Talk:Communication

<mediawiki xmlns="http://www.mediawiki.org/xml/export-0.10/" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.mediawiki.org/xml/export-0.10/ http://www.mediawiki.org/xml/export-0.10.xsd" version="0.10" xml:lang="en">
  <siteinfo>
    <sitename>MediaWiki</sitename>
    <dbname>mediawikiwiki</dbname>
    <base>https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/MediaWiki</base>
    <generator>MediaWiki 1.39.0-wmf.23</generator>
    <case>first-letter</case>
    <namespaces>
      <namespace key="-2" case="first-letter">Media</namespace>
      <namespace key="-1" case="first-letter">Special</namespace>
      <namespace key="0" case="first-letter" />
      <namespace key="1" case="first-letter">Talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="2" case="first-letter">User</namespace>
      <namespace key="3" case="first-letter">User talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="4" case="first-letter">Project</namespace>
      <namespace key="5" case="first-letter">Project talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="6" case="first-letter">File</namespace>
      <namespace key="7" case="first-letter">File talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="8" case="first-letter">MediaWiki</namespace>
      <namespace key="9" case="first-letter">MediaWiki talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="10" case="first-letter">Template</namespace>
      <namespace key="11" case="first-letter">Template talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="12" case="first-letter">Help</namespace>
      <namespace key="13" case="first-letter">Help talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="14" case="first-letter">Category</namespace>
      <namespace key="15" case="first-letter">Category talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="90" case="first-letter">Thread</namespace>
      <namespace key="91" case="first-letter">Thread talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="92" case="first-letter">Summary</namespace>
      <namespace key="93" case="first-letter">Summary talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="100" case="first-letter">Manual</namespace>
      <namespace key="101" case="first-letter">Manual talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="102" case="first-letter">Extension</namespace>
      <namespace key="103" case="first-letter">Extension talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="104" case="first-letter">API</namespace>
      <namespace key="105" case="first-letter">API talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="106" case="first-letter">Skin</namespace>
      <namespace key="107" case="first-letter">Skin talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="486" case="first-letter">Data</namespace>
      <namespace key="487" case="first-letter">Data talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="710" case="first-letter">TimedText</namespace>
      <namespace key="711" case="first-letter">TimedText talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="828" case="first-letter">Module</namespace>
      <namespace key="829" case="first-letter">Module talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="1198" case="first-letter">Translations</namespace>
      <namespace key="1199" case="first-letter">Translations talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="2300" case="first-letter">Gadget</namespace>
      <namespace key="2301" case="first-letter">Gadget talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="2302" case="case-sensitive">Gadget definition</namespace>
      <namespace key="2303" case="case-sensitive">Gadget definition talk</namespace>
      <namespace key="2600" case="first-letter">Topic</namespace>
      <namespace key="5500" case="first-letter">Newsletter</namespace>
      <namespace key="5501" case="first-letter">Newsletter talk</namespace>
    </namespaces>
  </siteinfo>
  <page>
    <title>Talk:Communication</title>
    <ns>1</ns>
    <id>2704</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402567</id>
      <parentid>5315937</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:33:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>75.142.128.7</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16544" xml:space="preserve">==Bugzilla==
*domains
**on sf.net http://bugzilla.wikipedia.org/ is promoted
**on mediawiki.org http://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/ is promoted
**two domains (bugzilla.wikipedia.org and bugzilla.wikimedia.org) offer the same(?) content? -&gt; use http-browser redirect
[[Special:MyLanguage/]]**shouldnt it be http://bugzilla.mediawiki.org? It's not for bugs in wikipedia nor wikimedia, but mediaWiki, right?
*contact
**bugzilla.wikipedia.org/createaccount.cgi gives brion@pobox.com. But this brion@pobox.com gives ''PERM_FAILURE: SMTP Error (state 9): 550 &lt;brian@pobox.com&gt;: Recipient address rejected: User unknown'' at least from one of my accounts. 
[[User:Tobias Conradi|Tobias Conradi]] 07:16, 19 November 2005 (UTC)

::bugzilla.wiki'''m'''edia.org is correct because the Wikimedia foundation hosts the MediaZilla site (like several more). And please type in the name of bri'''o'''n correctly, not with an &quot;a&quot; ;-) --[[User:Bdk|:Bdk:]] 20:30, 19 November 2005 (UTC) 

::: Bugzilla covers problems with all the Wikimedia websites as well as the software. Thus, it should not be a subdomain of mediawiki.org. [[User:Brianjd|Brian]][[User talk:Brianjd|j]][[Special:Contributions/Brianjd|d]] 03:41, 4 December 2005 (UTC)
::: Bdk argued that because the Wikimedia Foundation hosts it, it should be under wikimedia.org. Well the Wikimedia Foundation also hosts mediawiki.org, so should we make it mediawiki.wikimedia.org (a very confusing domain!)? [[User:Brianjd|Brian]][[User talk:Brianjd|j]][[Special:Contributions/Brianjd|d]] 03:41, 4 December 2005 (UTC)

::::@ Brianjd: Eh? Tobias not only asked for a relocation of MediaZilla, but also quoted the difference between wiki'''p'''edia.org and wiki'''m'''edia.org (both are working for bugzilla.[...].org). My answer was reffering to this point and emphasizing the status quo. Your last suggestion is a bit silly. We're lucky with this short and easy domain mediawiki.org. And of course, MediaZilla can stay where it is. Anyway, this is not the place to discuss such matters. --[[User:Bdk|:Bdk:]] 10:09, 7 December 2005 (UTC) 
:BdK, thanks for telling me about A and O ;-). What's the right place to ask for a bugzilla related to the software product MediaWiki? [[User:Tobias Conradi|Tobias Conradi]] 06:39, 16 December 2005 (UTC)
::Hm, suchst Du einen speziellen Bug oder wie Du eine eigene Bugzillaversion einrichtest? --[[User:Bdk|:Bdk:]] 08:07, 16 December 2005 (UTC) 
:::*BdK, sorry haven't been here for a long time. I meant: &quot;What's the right place to ask for a separate bugzilla-installation for the mediaWiki software? &quot;.
:::*what's the right place to ask for http-redirects?
:::*another &quot;bug&quot;: http://mail.wikiPedia.org/ should be serverside redirected to http://mail.wikiMedia.org/ . It is not very good behavior to bring in exactly the same content in the internet via two urls. It's like pollution. And than the phrase on the articles page that '''p''' seems to work better than '''m''' for site-restricted searching in Google &amp; Co can be avoided. Deletion should occur when Googles index is updated and reflects the proper domain. best regards and happy new year, even if it's allready 26th. [[User:Tobias Conradi|Tobias Conradi]] 20:25, 26 January 2006 (UTC)

Our bugzilla covers our non-MediaWiki software and site configuration issues as well as MediaWiki. There may be some old 'bugzilla.wikipedia.org' links around, but it doesn't really matter. --[[User:Brion VIBBER|Brion VIBBER]] 02:50, 27 January 2006 (UTC)

== Gmane link ==

Gmane is on [http://www.gmane.org www.gmane.org], not on gmane.net. [[User:Tinus|Tinus]] 12:31, 16 February 2006 (UTC)
:Thanks for this hint :-) --[[User:Bdk|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#116611&quot;&gt;:Bdk:&lt;/span&gt;]] 14:10, 16 February 2006 (UTC) 

== FAQ link ==

The link to [[meta:MediaWiki_FAQ|FAQ]] needs updating to [[Help:FAQ]]. -- [[User:Barrylb|Barrylb]] 16:34, 3 July 2006 (UTC)

: Done --[[User:HappyDog|HappyDog]] 16:49, 5 July 2006 (UTC)

== [[Project:Support desk]] ==

Linking to [[Project:Support desk]] from within this site would be quite helpful! --[[User:Flominator|Flominator]] 06:21, 4 August 2006 (UTC)
:It would be, if there were enough people answering the questions that get posted there.  The reason for that page was primarily to stop questions being posted ad-hoc around the site, however the page clearly says that questions posted there may go unanswered.  I would rather draw attention to the methods of communication that are likely to get a response... --[[User:HappyDog|HappyDog]] 12:36, 6 August 2006 (UTC)
:: Maybe the site gets more attention ,if more people know it? --[[User:Flominator|Flominator]] 09:11, 8 August 2006 (UTC)
::: Done. --[[User:Rogerhc|Rogerhc]] 05:58, 8 September 2006 (UTC)
:I think this is a pretty poor way of offering support. Look at how long the page is. Forums and mailing lists are far better. I've answered a couple questions on that page, and to be honest I don't plan on ever answering any more. I can't monitor the status of the threads. I can have emails sent when the page is updated, but the page has nearly 200 threads; the emails I would receive would almost definitely not pertain to my threads. I think that page should be put out of its misery.&lt;br&gt;--[[User:Ryan lane|Ryan lane]] 18:09, 31 January 2007 (UTC)
:# We are not a commercial organisation (dammit we're not even an organisation) 
:# We don't &quot;offer support&quot;, because there is no &quot;we&quot;.  All help provided by this website and most of the other channels of communication is provided by individuals ''voluntarily'' giving up their time to help others.
:# This page clearly states that [[Project:Support desk]] &quot;...is less frequented than the other sources of help listed on this page&quot;, 
:# The top of the support desk also states &quot;Questions on this page are unlikely to be answered very quickly, and may not get answered at all.&quot;.
:# The main purpose of the page (as stated two paragraphs up) was to stop the questions that people were asking (despite being advised not to) being scattered all over the site, and instead localise them in one place.  If people ignore the warnings and post there, that's their choice, and from what I can see a fair number of them actually get answered, eventually.  (...or at least the ones that consist of more than a &quot;my internet is broken please fix it&quot;).
: All that said, if you can think of a better way to organise this ''and are prepared to stay here and run it'' then please go ahead and refactor (this is wiki, after all).
:--[[User:HappyDog|HappyDog]] 01:45, 7 February 2007 (UTC)

Hello, I came and registered on mediawiki.org via wiki.roblox.com. now the point is that my username get not recognized back on wiki.roblox! Please help [[User:Pappyloopy|Pappyloopy]] ([[User talk:Pappyloopy|talk]]) 15:31, 26 February 2017 (UTC)

== mwusers.com ==

The site mwusers.com seems to be down... A few pages can be found in the google cache... Where can you turn to now when you have questions on the mediawiki? --[[Special:Contributions/87.176.236.127|87.176.236.127]] 11:54, 28 May 2008 (UTC)
:Seems to be up again. --[[User:Shape|Shape]] 20:48, 1 June 2008 (UTC)

== Wrong link for the mediawiki-announce list ==

The link to mediawiki-announce list on the ''Communication'' page is not working!
* Current link:[[mail:mediawiki-announce]]* correct link: [[mail:mediawiki-announce]]

[[User:VoskampM|VoskampM]] 15:27, 15 February 2009 (UTC)

== Notes on communication channels ==

:''Some notes I sent on an email to [[Outreach Program for Women]] interns. To be integrated here whenever I have a chance, unless someone is faster than me. Basically it is a different priority for community channels, leaving IRC to the last instead of te first.''--[[User:Qgil|Qgil]] ([[User talk:Qgil|talk]]) 19:20, 17 December 2012 (UTC)

In the MediaWiki project the default channel of collaboration are wiki pages and their associated discussion pages. This is an effective way to have accumulative documentation and discussion really specific to the topic of each page, visible by and open to those finding or watching regularly those pages.

Sometimes you want use a mailing list related to your work, being wikitech-l the fall-back if there isn't any more specific. This is good for open participation and archiving. Each email has a URL that you can point to from wiki pages or whatever.

Then, synchronous communication is also good:

You can have it scheduled and formalized around Google hangouts (voice/video, possibility to archive as YouTube videos, probably also to download and upload to Commons) or IRC meetings.

And finally there is the convenient, casual and ad hoc pure chat on IRC. As Smana points out it is better if it happens in one of the established channels. However, anything will do (even vis a vis chats in private rooms) as long as you get the previous points and use this communication as some kind of remote substitute to 'casual office chat'.

== Add the French-speaking mailing list on the French translation ==

There is since one month a new mailing list dedicated to MediaWiki (hosted by WM CH). I would like to add this mailing list on the French page [[Communication/fr]] -- and just on this one because it is not relevant for the English users. In order to not dissynchronise the translation tool (i.e. not directly add the link on the French translation), it can be added a template at the end of the section &quot;Mailing lists&quot; which displays something only when called by the page &quot;Communication/fr&quot; (I tested this scenario on a test wiki). Any opposition to this type of localisation? ~ [[User:Seb35|Seb35]] 13:51, 15 July 2013 (UTC)

== Sort Users by Edits ==

Is there a way I can sort users by the number of edits they make and have it show the number of edits? Please reply soon.&lt;!-- my sig, don't you dare put {{Unsigned}} ---&gt;-CC 02:39, 30 July 2013 (UTC)

== Can we advertise on our wiki (add space for advertising)? ==

Does Wiki run ads or do any type of Advertising? Can I add space on my Wiki for advertising?
:Which wiki? [[Special:SiteMatrix|Wikimedia projects]] don't have ads. Your own MediaWiki install can support ads. --[[User:Nemo_bis|Nemo]] 14:12, 26 June 2015 (UTC)

== Phabricator Person's are not helping me. Please help me ==

https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T102460 [[User:NehalDaveND|NehalDaveND]] ([[User talk:NehalDaveND|talk]]) 05:58, 13 July 2015 (UTC)

== Query regarding nomination of my pictures for deletion  ==

Hello, i had shared few of my amazing pictures for wiki loves earth 2016, in which few images that i uploaded were from my own   Facebook page. But now i am notified as it has been nominated for deletion. Since these are my own art i dont think there must be an issue publishing these images. I would really appreciate a positive response with this regard.
Thank you. [[User:Shravan Kamath94|Shravan Kamath94]] ([[User talk:Shravan Kamath94|talk]]) 09:18, 7 July 2016 (UTC)

==Using keyboard-interactive authentication==
how can i fix this problem, i can't login my account, any help?--[[User:جار الله|جار الله]] ([[User talk:جار الله|talk]]) 15:29, 1 August 2016 (UTC)

== سؤال  ==

الخوت عارفين كفاش تقراو الفيديوهات فويكي مديا [[User:Moustapha moutia|Moustapha moutia]] ([[User talk:Moustapha moutia|talk]]) 16:08, 8 October 2017 (UTC)

الخوت عارفين كفاش تقراو الفيديوهات فويكي مديا  [[User:Moustapha moutia|Moustapha moutia]] ([[User talk:Moustapha moutia|talk]]) 16:09, 8 October 2017 (UTC)

== Edit protected ==
I want you to add the {{[[Template:Semi-protected|Semi-protected]]}} template on the communication page. --[[User:KlekboR|klekboR]] ([[User talk:KlekboR|talk]]) 03:44, 3 April 2018 (UTC)
:Why? [[User:Legoktm|Legoktm]] ([[User talk:Legoktm|talk]]) 21:22, 3 April 2018 (UTC)
::To be disruptive I think. [[User:Green Giant|Green Giant]] ([[User talk:Green Giant|talk]]) 22:01, 3 April 2018 (UTC)

== IRC Chat is terminated ==
Tried to click on the IRC chat in order to get help and it gave me an error telling me it was terminated. Anyone know where I can find support for this program? Thanks.

== I need help ==

how can I began to translate?

== About the specifications of MediaWiki ==

Hello users !!!

As you know, recently, MediaWiki was revised.

I feel that this revision makes it difficult to use the source editor. 

I found it a little doubtful, so I searched around and found that the specifications of MediaWiki are decided in [[:phab:|Wikimedia Phablicator]]. 

However, Wikimedia Phablicator is, so to speak, a factory, and the community members are craftsmen. 

Although they are experts in program development, many of them do not seem to have much experience as users of Wikimedia projects. 

In the first place, MediaWiki is an infrastructure.

So it is inappropriate to change MediaWiki only by the taste of the craftsmen.
 
Therefore, I think that the specification of MediaWiki should be decided in a more open place, not in Wikimedia Phablicator. 

Please post your opinion. 

And please let me know if the place to post this opinion is not here.

Thank you !!!

--[[User:HaussmannSaintLazare|HaussmannSaintLazare]] ([[User talk:HaussmannSaintLazare|talk]]) 06:41, 11 May 2020 (UTC)
:I'm not sure which revision are you referring to. MediaWiki is changing all the time.
:Phabricator is a task and bug management system, which is built for software development. MediaWiki is not a task management system, but a content management system. doesn't provide necessary features 
:Phabricator is completely open: everyone can write there, with the same account as here. --[[User:Amire80|Amir E. Aharoni]] &amp;#123;{[[Global templates|🌎🌍🌏]]}} 07:27, 11 May 2020 (UTC)
::{{ping|HaussmannSaintLazare}} It is unclear what your point is, and it is unclear what your question is. Please be more specific, and do not re-post topics that you had already brought up in other venues, e.g. on [[meta:Tech]], as that is [[:w:en:Wikipedia:Consensus#FORUMSHOP|forum shopping]]. Thanks. --[[User:AKlapper (WMF)|AKlapper (WMF)]] ([[User talk:AKlapper (WMF)|talk]]) 11:16, 11 May 2020 (UTC)

Hello Amire80 and AKlapper (WMF) !!!

Thank you for your joining here.

There are many problems in the current situation. 

Therefore, I would like to explain little by little. 

First of all, what I would like to explain is &quot;open&quot;. 

Amire80 claims that Wikimedia Phablicator is open. 

Certainly, in a general sense, it is open. 

However, it is not open as defined by Wikimedia. 

That is because it does not follow [[:meta:Privacy policy]]. 

First, can you agree on this point? 

Thank you !!!

--[[User:HaussmannSaintLazare|HaussmannSaintLazare]] ([[User talk:HaussmannSaintLazare|talk]]) 17:44, 11 May 2020 (UTC)

Hello Amire80 and AKlapper (WMF) !!! 

I have been skeptical about the basics.

The question is whether Wikimedia Phablicator is a stand-alone project.

For example, English wikipedia, Japanese wiktionary, and Wikimedia MetaWiki use different urls such as en.wikipedia.org,ja.wiktionary.org,meta.wikimedia.org.

Similarly, Wikimedia Phablicator has a different url phabricator.wikimedia.org.

But Wikimedia Phablicator does not appear in the list of Wikipedia's sister projects.

It seems to me that it indicate that Wikimedia Phablicator is not a stand-alone project but only an attached part of some project (probably MediaWiki).

Is my guess correct?

Thank you !!!

--[[User:HaussmannSaintLazare|HaussmannSaintLazare]] ([[User talk:HaussmannSaintLazare|talk]]) 06:11, 12 May 2020 (UTC)
:{{ping|HaussmannSaintLazare}} [[Communication]] is about general communication channels. For specific Phabricator questions, please ask on the Phabricator Help talk page. For Wikimedia projects, see [[meta:Wikimedia projects]]. Again, this is unrelated to Communication. (PS: You may also want to check your keyboard, as it seems to always print three exclamation marks when you entered only one.) --[[User:AKlapper (WMF)|AKlapper (WMF)]] ([[User talk:AKlapper (WMF)|talk]]) 14:40, 13 May 2020 (UTC)

== Removing Gmane links ==

There was an issue with gmane, and now gmane.io only serves archives. I am not sure of the value of putting the links in such a prominent display. Maybe we can remove the links? Or reduce the 2 refences to one. 

In honesty I would prefer just replacing the gmane links, to the listserv archive.

Cant do the edit myself since the page is protected. 


https://lars.ingebrigtsen.no/2020/01/15/news-gmane-org-is-now-news-gmane-io/

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gmane</text>
      <sha1>rryxy6804wqr62ku4sgsz39zsqw908z</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403363</id>
      <parentid>5402567</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:58:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Clump</username>
        <id>81610</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/75.142.128.7|75.142.128.7]] ([[User talk:75.142.128.7|talk]]) to last version by Mainframe98</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16521" xml:space="preserve">==Bugzilla==
*domains
**on sf.net http://bugzilla.wikipedia.org/ is promoted
**on mediawiki.org http://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/ is promoted
**two domains (bugzilla.wikipedia.org and bugzilla.wikimedia.org) offer the same(?) content? -&gt; use http-browser redirect
**shouldnt it be http://bugzilla.mediawiki.org? It's not for bugs in wikipedia nor wikimedia, but mediaWiki, right?
*contact
**bugzilla.wikipedia.org/createaccount.cgi gives brion@pobox.com. But this brion@pobox.com gives ''PERM_FAILURE: SMTP Error (state 9): 550 &lt;brian@pobox.com&gt;: Recipient address rejected: User unknown'' at least from one of my accounts. 
[[User:Tobias Conradi|Tobias Conradi]] 07:16, 19 November 2005 (UTC)

::bugzilla.wiki'''m'''edia.org is correct because the Wikimedia foundation hosts the MediaZilla site (like several more). And please type in the name of bri'''o'''n correctly, not with an &quot;a&quot; ;-) --[[User:Bdk|:Bdk:]] 20:30, 19 November 2005 (UTC) 

::: Bugzilla covers problems with all the Wikimedia websites as well as the software. Thus, it should not be a subdomain of mediawiki.org. [[User:Brianjd|Brian]][[User talk:Brianjd|j]][[Special:Contributions/Brianjd|d]] 03:41, 4 December 2005 (UTC)
::: Bdk argued that because the Wikimedia Foundation hosts it, it should be under wikimedia.org. Well the Wikimedia Foundation also hosts mediawiki.org, so should we make it mediawiki.wikimedia.org (a very confusing domain!)? [[User:Brianjd|Brian]][[User talk:Brianjd|j]][[Special:Contributions/Brianjd|d]] 03:41, 4 December 2005 (UTC)

::::@ Brianjd: Eh? Tobias not only asked for a relocation of MediaZilla, but also quoted the difference between wiki'''p'''edia.org and wiki'''m'''edia.org (both are working for bugzilla.[...].org). My answer was reffering to this point and emphasizing the status quo. Your last suggestion is a bit silly. We're lucky with this short and easy domain mediawiki.org. And of course, MediaZilla can stay where it is. Anyway, this is not the place to discuss such matters. --[[User:Bdk|:Bdk:]] 10:09, 7 December 2005 (UTC) 
:BdK, thanks for telling me about A and O ;-). What's the right place to ask for a bugzilla related to the software product MediaWiki? [[User:Tobias Conradi|Tobias Conradi]] 06:39, 16 December 2005 (UTC)
::Hm, suchst Du einen speziellen Bug oder wie Du eine eigene Bugzillaversion einrichtest? --[[User:Bdk|:Bdk:]] 08:07, 16 December 2005 (UTC) 
:::*BdK, sorry haven't been here for a long time. I meant: &quot;What's the right place to ask for a separate bugzilla-installation for the mediaWiki software? &quot;.
:::*what's the right place to ask for http-redirects?
:::*another &quot;bug&quot;: http://mail.wikiPedia.org/ should be serverside redirected to http://mail.wikiMedia.org/ . It is not very good behavior to bring in exactly the same content in the internet via two urls. It's like pollution. And than the phrase on the articles page that '''p''' seems to work better than '''m''' for site-restricted searching in Google &amp; Co can be avoided. Deletion should occur when Googles index is updated and reflects the proper domain. best regards and happy new year, even if it's allready 26th. [[User:Tobias Conradi|Tobias Conradi]] 20:25, 26 January 2006 (UTC)

Our bugzilla covers our non-MediaWiki software and site configuration issues as well as MediaWiki. There may be some old 'bugzilla.wikipedia.org' links around, but it doesn't really matter. --[[User:Brion VIBBER|Brion VIBBER]] 02:50, 27 January 2006 (UTC)

== Gmane link ==

Gmane is on [http://www.gmane.org www.gmane.org], not on gmane.net. [[User:Tinus|Tinus]] 12:31, 16 February 2006 (UTC)
:Thanks for this hint :-) --[[User:Bdk|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#116611&quot;&gt;:Bdk:&lt;/span&gt;]] 14:10, 16 February 2006 (UTC) 

== FAQ link ==

The link to [[meta:MediaWiki_FAQ|FAQ]] needs updating to [[Help:FAQ]]. -- [[User:Barrylb|Barrylb]] 16:34, 3 July 2006 (UTC)

: Done --[[User:HappyDog|HappyDog]] 16:49, 5 July 2006 (UTC)

== [[Project:Support desk]] ==

Linking to [[Project:Support desk]] from within this site would be quite helpful! --[[User:Flominator|Flominator]] 06:21, 4 August 2006 (UTC)
:It would be, if there were enough people answering the questions that get posted there.  The reason for that page was primarily to stop questions being posted ad-hoc around the site, however the page clearly says that questions posted there may go unanswered.  I would rather draw attention to the methods of communication that are likely to get a response... --[[User:HappyDog|HappyDog]] 12:36, 6 August 2006 (UTC)
:: Maybe the site gets more attention ,if more people know it? --[[User:Flominator|Flominator]] 09:11, 8 August 2006 (UTC)
::: Done. --[[User:Rogerhc|Rogerhc]] 05:58, 8 September 2006 (UTC)
:I think this is a pretty poor way of offering support. Look at how long the page is. Forums and mailing lists are far better. I've answered a couple questions on that page, and to be honest I don't plan on ever answering any more. I can't monitor the status of the threads. I can have emails sent when the page is updated, but the page has nearly 200 threads; the emails I would receive would almost definitely not pertain to my threads. I think that page should be put out of its misery.&lt;br&gt;--[[User:Ryan lane|Ryan lane]] 18:09, 31 January 2007 (UTC)
:# We are not a commercial organisation (dammit we're not even an organisation) 
:# We don't &quot;offer support&quot;, because there is no &quot;we&quot;.  All help provided by this website and most of the other channels of communication is provided by individuals ''voluntarily'' giving up their time to help others.
:# This page clearly states that [[Project:Support desk]] &quot;...is less frequented than the other sources of help listed on this page&quot;, 
:# The top of the support desk also states &quot;Questions on this page are unlikely to be answered very quickly, and may not get answered at all.&quot;.
:# The main purpose of the page (as stated two paragraphs up) was to stop the questions that people were asking (despite being advised not to) being scattered all over the site, and instead localise them in one place.  If people ignore the warnings and post there, that's their choice, and from what I can see a fair number of them actually get answered, eventually.  (...or at least the ones that consist of more than a &quot;my internet is broken please fix it&quot;).
: All that said, if you can think of a better way to organise this ''and are prepared to stay here and run it'' then please go ahead and refactor (this is wiki, after all).
:--[[User:HappyDog|HappyDog]] 01:45, 7 February 2007 (UTC)

Hello, I came and registered on mediawiki.org via wiki.roblox.com. now the point is that my username get not recognized back on wiki.roblox! Please help [[User:Pappyloopy|Pappyloopy]] ([[User talk:Pappyloopy|talk]]) 15:31, 26 February 2017 (UTC)

== mwusers.com ==

The site mwusers.com seems to be down... A few pages can be found in the google cache... Where can you turn to now when you have questions on the mediawiki? --[[Special:Contributions/87.176.236.127|87.176.236.127]] 11:54, 28 May 2008 (UTC)
:Seems to be up again. --[[User:Shape|Shape]] 20:48, 1 June 2008 (UTC)

== Wrong link for the mediawiki-announce list ==

The link to mediawiki-announce list on the ''Communication'' page is not working!
* Current link:[[mail:mediawiki-announce]]* correct link: [[mail:mediawiki-announce]]

[[User:VoskampM|VoskampM]] 15:27, 15 February 2009 (UTC)

== Notes on communication channels ==

:''Some notes I sent on an email to [[Outreach Program for Women]] interns. To be integrated here whenever I have a chance, unless someone is faster than me. Basically it is a different priority for community channels, leaving IRC to the last instead of te first.''--[[User:Qgil|Qgil]] ([[User talk:Qgil|talk]]) 19:20, 17 December 2012 (UTC)

In the MediaWiki project the default channel of collaboration are wiki pages and their associated discussion pages. This is an effective way to have accumulative documentation and discussion really specific to the topic of each page, visible by and open to those finding or watching regularly those pages.

Sometimes you want use a mailing list related to your work, being wikitech-l the fall-back if there isn't any more specific. This is good for open participation and archiving. Each email has a URL that you can point to from wiki pages or whatever.

Then, synchronous communication is also good:

You can have it scheduled and formalized around Google hangouts (voice/video, possibility to archive as YouTube videos, probably also to download and upload to Commons) or IRC meetings.

And finally there is the convenient, casual and ad hoc pure chat on IRC. As Smana points out it is better if it happens in one of the established channels. However, anything will do (even vis a vis chats in private rooms) as long as you get the previous points and use this communication as some kind of remote substitute to 'casual office chat'.

== Add the French-speaking mailing list on the French translation ==

There is since one month a new mailing list dedicated to MediaWiki (hosted by WM CH). I would like to add this mailing list on the French page [[Communication/fr]] -- and just on this one because it is not relevant for the English users. In order to not dissynchronise the translation tool (i.e. not directly add the link on the French translation), it can be added a template at the end of the section &quot;Mailing lists&quot; which displays something only when called by the page &quot;Communication/fr&quot; (I tested this scenario on a test wiki). Any opposition to this type of localisation? ~ [[User:Seb35|Seb35]] 13:51, 15 July 2013 (UTC)

== Sort Users by Edits ==

Is there a way I can sort users by the number of edits they make and have it show the number of edits? Please reply soon.&lt;!-- my sig, don't you dare put {{Unsigned}} ---&gt;-CC 02:39, 30 July 2013 (UTC)

== Can we advertise on our wiki (add space for advertising)? ==

Does Wiki run ads or do any type of Advertising? Can I add space on my Wiki for advertising?
:Which wiki? [[Special:SiteMatrix|Wikimedia projects]] don't have ads. Your own MediaWiki install can support ads. --[[User:Nemo_bis|Nemo]] 14:12, 26 June 2015 (UTC)

== Phabricator Person's are not helping me. Please help me ==

https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T102460 [[User:NehalDaveND|NehalDaveND]] ([[User talk:NehalDaveND|talk]]) 05:58, 13 July 2015 (UTC)

== Query regarding nomination of my pictures for deletion  ==

Hello, i had shared few of my amazing pictures for wiki loves earth 2016, in which few images that i uploaded were from my own   Facebook page. But now i am notified as it has been nominated for deletion. Since these are my own art i dont think there must be an issue publishing these images. I would really appreciate a positive response with this regard.
Thank you. [[User:Shravan Kamath94|Shravan Kamath94]] ([[User talk:Shravan Kamath94|talk]]) 09:18, 7 July 2016 (UTC)

==Using keyboard-interactive authentication==
how can i fix this problem, i can't login my account, any help?--[[User:جار الله|جار الله]] ([[User talk:جار الله|talk]]) 15:29, 1 August 2016 (UTC)

== سؤال  ==

الخوت عارفين كفاش تقراو الفيديوهات فويكي مديا [[User:Moustapha moutia|Moustapha moutia]] ([[User talk:Moustapha moutia|talk]]) 16:08, 8 October 2017 (UTC)

الخوت عارفين كفاش تقراو الفيديوهات فويكي مديا  [[User:Moustapha moutia|Moustapha moutia]] ([[User talk:Moustapha moutia|talk]]) 16:09, 8 October 2017 (UTC)

== Edit protected ==
I want you to add the {{[[Template:Semi-protected|Semi-protected]]}} template on the communication page. --[[User:KlekboR|klekboR]] ([[User talk:KlekboR|talk]]) 03:44, 3 April 2018 (UTC)
:Why? [[User:Legoktm|Legoktm]] ([[User talk:Legoktm|talk]]) 21:22, 3 April 2018 (UTC)
::To be disruptive I think. [[User:Green Giant|Green Giant]] ([[User talk:Green Giant|talk]]) 22:01, 3 April 2018 (UTC)

== IRC Chat is terminated ==
Tried to click on the IRC chat in order to get help and it gave me an error telling me it was terminated. Anyone know where I can find support for this program? Thanks.

== I need help ==

how can I began to translate?

== About the specifications of MediaWiki ==

Hello users !!!

As you know, recently, MediaWiki was revised.

I feel that this revision makes it difficult to use the source editor. 

I found it a little doubtful, so I searched around and found that the specifications of MediaWiki are decided in [[:phab:|Wikimedia Phablicator]]. 

However, Wikimedia Phablicator is, so to speak, a factory, and the community members are craftsmen. 

Although they are experts in program development, many of them do not seem to have much experience as users of Wikimedia projects. 

In the first place, MediaWiki is an infrastructure.

So it is inappropriate to change MediaWiki only by the taste of the craftsmen.
 
Therefore, I think that the specification of MediaWiki should be decided in a more open place, not in Wikimedia Phablicator. 

Please post your opinion. 

And please let me know if the place to post this opinion is not here.

Thank you !!!

--[[User:HaussmannSaintLazare|HaussmannSaintLazare]] ([[User talk:HaussmannSaintLazare|talk]]) 06:41, 11 May 2020 (UTC)
:I'm not sure which revision are you referring to. MediaWiki is changing all the time.
:Phabricator is a task and bug management system, which is built for software development. MediaWiki is not a task management system, but a content management system. doesn't provide necessary features 
:Phabricator is completely open: everyone can write there, with the same account as here. --[[User:Amire80|Amir E. Aharoni]] &amp;#123;{[[Global templates|🌎🌍🌏]]}} 07:27, 11 May 2020 (UTC)
::{{ping|HaussmannSaintLazare}} It is unclear what your point is, and it is unclear what your question is. Please be more specific, and do not re-post topics that you had already brought up in other venues, e.g. on [[meta:Tech]], as that is [[:w:en:Wikipedia:Consensus#FORUMSHOP|forum shopping]]. Thanks. --[[User:AKlapper (WMF)|AKlapper (WMF)]] ([[User talk:AKlapper (WMF)|talk]]) 11:16, 11 May 2020 (UTC)

Hello Amire80 and AKlapper (WMF) !!!

Thank you for your joining here.

There are many problems in the current situation. 

Therefore, I would like to explain little by little. 

First of all, what I would like to explain is &quot;open&quot;. 

Amire80 claims that Wikimedia Phablicator is open. 

Certainly, in a general sense, it is open. 

However, it is not open as defined by Wikimedia. 

That is because it does not follow [[:meta:Privacy policy]]. 

First, can you agree on this point? 

Thank you !!!

--[[User:HaussmannSaintLazare|HaussmannSaintLazare]] ([[User talk:HaussmannSaintLazare|talk]]) 17:44, 11 May 2020 (UTC)

Hello Amire80 and AKlapper (WMF) !!! 

I have been skeptical about the basics.

The question is whether Wikimedia Phablicator is a stand-alone project.

For example, English wikipedia, Japanese wiktionary, and Wikimedia MetaWiki use different urls such as en.wikipedia.org,ja.wiktionary.org,meta.wikimedia.org.

Similarly, Wikimedia Phablicator has a different url phabricator.wikimedia.org.

But Wikimedia Phablicator does not appear in the list of Wikipedia's sister projects.

It seems to me that it indicate that Wikimedia Phablicator is not a stand-alone project but only an attached part of some project (probably MediaWiki).

Is my guess correct?

Thank you !!!

--[[User:HaussmannSaintLazare|HaussmannSaintLazare]] ([[User talk:HaussmannSaintLazare|talk]]) 06:11, 12 May 2020 (UTC)
:{{ping|HaussmannSaintLazare}} [[Communication]] is about general communication channels. For specific Phabricator questions, please ask on the Phabricator Help talk page. For Wikimedia projects, see [[meta:Wikimedia projects]]. Again, this is unrelated to Communication. (PS: You may also want to check your keyboard, as it seems to always print three exclamation marks when you entered only one.) --[[User:AKlapper (WMF)|AKlapper (WMF)]] ([[User talk:AKlapper (WMF)|talk]]) 14:40, 13 May 2020 (UTC)

== Removing Gmane links ==

There was an issue with gmane, and now gmane.io only serves archives. I am not sure of the value of putting the links in such a prominent display. Maybe we can remove the links? Or reduce the 2 refences to one. 

In honesty I would prefer just replacing the gmane links, to the listserv archive.

Cant do the edit myself since the page is protected. 


https://lars.ingebrigtsen.no/2020/01/15/news-gmane-org-is-now-news-gmane-io/

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gmane</text>
      <sha1>dac78ybqc8ajo8e7p18itzew4df6qw7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Sites using MediaWiki/multilingual</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>3478</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402670</id>
      <parentid>5212404</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:57:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>75.142.128.7</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* B */</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13515" xml:space="preserve">__NOTOC__
{{MediaWiki Sites}}
''This is a list of sites that are using '''MediaWiki''', the wiki engine this site is about. On this page we collect wikis that are written or provided in '''more than one language''', quite often these are the bigger projects.''
----
* Feel free to add your site to the list, but please stay close to the given format:
:&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;; Title – [http://www.example.org/ example.org]: (language code) Short description&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; 
* New entries will be checked. Unreachable sites or sites that don't use MediaWiki will be removed.
* Last complete check: 2021-10-01

== MediaWiki-Wikis in more than one language ==
{{CompactTOC}}

=== # ===
=== A ===

=== B ===
; [[India Hackathon 2011|Battlestar]] Wiki – [http://www.battlestarwiki.org/ battlestarwiki.org]: (de, es, en, fr, tr, zh) ''Battlestar Galactica'' online encyclopedia and episode guide
; Bad Jokes and Other Deleted Nonsense – [http://bjaodn.org/ bjaodn.org]: (en, nl, no)
; BasaBaliWiki - [https://dictionary.basabali.org/Main_Page dictionary.basabali.org]: (en, id, ban)

=== C ===
; Cantr II wiki – [http://wiki.cantr.net/index.php/Main_Page wiki.cantr.net]: (en/es/pt) Help to Cantr II - a game (MMORPG, PBBG and simulating society) which together involved more than a dozen linguistic communities, in a same persistent virtual world.
; Cigarettespedia – [http://www.cigarettespedia.com/ cigarettespedia.com]: (en) CigarettesPedia is unique, the fullest free collection of cigarette boxes, invaluable information about cigarette brands, history of their appearance and the manufacturers.
; CGSecurity – [http://www.cgsecurity.org/ www.cgsecurity.org]:Wiki about TestDisk &amp; Photorec (data recovery software)
; Combine OverWiki - [https://combineoverwiki.net/wiki/ combineoverwiki.net]: (en, pl)
; Cppreference – [http://en.cppreference.com/ cppreference.com] : (en, cs, de, es, fr, it, ja, pl, pt, ru, tr, zh) A reference for C and C++ programming languages
; CreationWiki - [http://creationwiki.org creationwiki.org] : (en, de, es, fr, ko, pt, ru, zh) Encyclopedia of creation science

=== D ===
; DataTrek – [http://data.wikitrek.org data.wikitrek.org]: (en, it) Open data repository for the ''Star Trek'' universe
; Dizionario-italiano.org – [http://www.dizionario-italiano.org/ dizionario-italiano.org]: (it, en) Italian Dictionary

=== E ===
; Encyclopaediae Pokemonis – [http://www.encyclopaediae-pokemonis.org/ www.encyclopaediae-pokemonis.org]: (de, en, es, fr, jp, zh) Wikis about [[:en:Pokémon|Pokémon]]
;EverybodyWiki - [http://everybodywiki.com everybodywiki.com] :A wiki where anyone can write their own biography (in 25 language editions: fr, en, pt, de, it, es, nl, sv, hi, pl, bg, ja, fa, no, da, ro, el, ca, hu, ar, he, uk, ko, vi, id)
;Everything Wiki - [https://everything.wiki/ Everything.Wiki] :An inclusive wiki where anyone can write their own biography or about any topic (more than 25 language editions)

=== F ===
; FlightGear wiki – [http://wiki.flightgear.org wiki.flightgear.org]: Wiki of the free, opensource flight simulator [[w:FlightGear]].

=== G ===
; Gamepedia - [http://www.gamepedia.com/ gamepedia.com]: A hub dedicated to create wikis about video and computer games, which use MediaWiki. Languages vary depending on the wiki, although it's mainly English.

=== H ===
; HausaDictionary.com - [http://hausadictionary.com/ hausadictionary.com]: (en, ha) Simple Hausa and English definitions/translations partially based on [http://simple.wiktionary.org simple.wiktionary.org]
; Hinnavaatlus wiki – [http://wiki.hinnavaatlus.ee/index.php/Esileht wiki.hinnavaatlus.ee]: (et, en) A site dedicated to organize manuals and tips gathered in [http://foorum.hinnavaatlus.ee/index.php Hinnavaatlus forum] (Estonian pricewatch forum)
; Hitchwiki – [http://hitchwiki.org/ hitchwiki.org]: ([http://hitchwiki.org/en/ en], [http://hitchwiki.org/de/ de], [http://hitchwiki.org/es/ es], [http://hitchwiki.org/fr/ fr], [http://hitchwiki.org/fi/ fi], [http://hitchwiki.org/pt pt], [http://hitchwiki.org/bg/ bg], [http://hitchwiki.org/zh/ zh], [http://hitchwiki.org/pl/ pl], [http://hitchwiki.org/ru/ ru]) Information about hitchhiking.
; HoraWiki - [http://horawiki.org/ horawiki.org]: ([http://horawiki.org?setlang=en en], [http://horawiki.co.il he]) Recreational Israeli dance, aka Israeli folkdance
; howtopedia.org – [http://www.howtopedia.org/ www.howtopedia.org]: (en,fr,es) Howtopedia is a library for practical knowledge and simple technologies. It focuses on development tools.

=== I ===
; ICANNWiki – [https://icannwiki.org/ icannwiki.org]
: ([https://icannwiki.org/ en], [https://es.icannwiki.org/ es], [https://sw.icannwiki.org/ sw], [https://zh.icannwiki.org/ zh]) Internet governance-related resource.
; IMSLP – [https://imslp.org/ imslp.org]: public domain musical score archive
; Inkipedia - [https://splatoonwiki.org/ splatoonwiki.org]: ([https://splatoonwiki.org/ en], [https://fr.splatoonwiki.org/ fr]) Inkipedia is an editable resource for the Nintendo franchise, Splatoon.
; IT Process Wiki – [https://wiki.en.it-processmaps.com/index.php/Main_Page IT Process Wiki - The ITIL Wiki]: ([https://wiki.en.it-processmaps.com/index.php/Main_Page en], [https://wiki.de.it-processmaps.com/index.php/Hauptseite de], [https://wiki.es.it-processmaps.com/index.php/Portada es]) The Wiki is about the IT Infrastructure Library ITIL&amp;reg;, ISO/IEC 20000 and IT Service Management (ITSM).

=== J ===
; '''JDocs''' – [https://docs.joomla.org/Main_Page docs.joomla.org]: ([https://docs.joomla.org/Main_Page en], [https://docs.joomla.org/Main_Page/de de], [https://docs.joomla.org/Main_Page/fr fr] and many more Languages) An online collaborative community manual for users, developers or anyone interested in learning more about the Content Management System [[wikipedia:Joomla!|Joomla!]]

=== K ===
; KDE TechBase – [http://techbase.kde.org/ http://techbase.kde.org/]: The [[wikipedia:KDE|KDE]] developers' wiki.
; KDE UserBase – [http://userbase.kde.org/ http://userbase.kde.org/]: The [[wikipedia:KDE|KDE]] user community wiki.
; Kompensationsverzeichnis Mecklenburg-Vorpommern – [http://www.kompensationsflaechen-mv.de/ kompensationsflaechen-mv.de]: (de) Platform for impact review-areas (Ausgleichsflächen, Ökokonten) in Mecklenburg-Vorpommern, State in Germany

=== L ===
; LibreOffice Turkey [http://wiki.libreoffice.org.tr wiki.libreoffice.org.tr]: LibreOffice Turkey Wiki
; Lingua Veritas [http://linguaveritas.com/ Lingua Veritas – Translation interpretation]: A Wiki-based multilingual resources agency
; Live Cinema Research Wiki – [http://livecinema.prototypen.com/wiki/ livecinema.prototypen.com]: (de/en) Wiki dedicated to the research of movie making and presentation techniques for the 21st century.
; LSJ – [https://lsj.gr lsj.gr]: (de/en/es/grc/el/it/la/nl/ru/zh) Classics wiki focusing to translations from and into Ancient Greek and Latin.

=== M ===
; Minecraft Wiki - [http://minecraftwiki.net minecraftwiki.net]: (en, de, fr, other languages) The biggest Wiki about the popular sandbox game Minecraft
; MLDonkey – [http://mldonkey.sourceforge.net/ mldonkey.sourceforge.net]: (de, en) Site for MLDonkey users and developers
; Moegirl — [https://en.moegirl.org/ moegirl.org]: (en, zh, ja) Site about &quot;Moe girls&quot;, an archetype in Anime/Manga culture. Also has a Commons-like project (so similar to the Wikimedia cluster in some ways)

===N===

===O===
;OpenSeaMap Wiki - [http://wiki.openseamap.org/ wiki.openseamap.org]: Wiki for [[w:OpenSeaMap|OpenSeaMap]], the nautical subproject of [[w:OpenStreetMap|OpenStreetMap]]
;OpenStreetMap Wiki – [http://wiki.openstreetmap.org/wiki/Main_Page wiki.openstreetmap.org]: (multilingual) wiki to the [[w:OpenStreetMap|project]] to create a free map of the world
;openSUSE – [http://en.opensuse.org/ opensuse.org]: (in many languages) a Linux distribution
;OpenTTD Wiki – [http://wiki.openttd.org wiki.openttd.org]: (various languages) using the OpenTTD game
;OrthodoxWiki [http://orthodoxwiki.org/ Orthodoxwiki.org]: An encyclopedia of Orthodoxy.

===P===
;Piratenwiki – [http://wiki.piratenpartei.de/ wiki.piratenpartei.de]: (de) Discussion, Information and Coordination platform of the [[:en:Pirate Party Germany|German Pirate Party]] (See also [[:en:Pirate Parties International|Pirate Parties International]])
;Pl@ntUse - [http://uses.plantnet-project.org/en/Main_Page uses.plantnet-project.org/en]: (en/fr) Useful plants of the world and their uses, a study case of Pl@ntNet [http://www.plantnet-project.org/papyrus.php?langue=en plantnet-project.org].
;Portal Unofficial Wiki - [https://theportalwiki.com/wiki/ theportalwiki.com]: (en, cs, da, de, es, fi, fr, hu, ja, ko, nl, no, pl, pt-br, ro, ru, sv, zh-hans, zh-hant)
;Pornopedia – [https://www.pornopedia.com/ www.pornopedia.com]: (bg/bn/cs/de/en/es/fr/hu/hy/it/ka/nl/pl/pt/pt-br/ru/sr/sv) Erotic encyclopedia
;ProleWiki – [https://prolewiki.org/ prolewiki.org]: (en/es/de/fr/pt) Marxist-Leninist encyclopedia

=== Q ===
; Qi Hardware – [http://en.qi-hardware.com/wiki/ en.qi-hardware.com/wiki]: (en/es/zh-hans) Copyleft hardware project.

=== R ===
; Rodovid – [http://rodovid.org/ rodovid.org]: (de, es, en, fi, fr, he, id, it, ja, nl, pl, pt, ro, ru, sr, uk, uz) Free multilingual family tree portal.

=== S ===
; ScoutWiki Network – [http://www.scoutwiki.org/ scoutwiki.org]: ([http://fi.scoutwiki.org/ fi], [http://fr.scoutwiki.org/ fr], [http://nl.scoutwiki.org/ nl], [http://en.scoutwiki.org/ en], [http://es.scoutwiki.org/ es], [http://de.scoutwiki.org/ de], [http://it.scoutwiki.org/ it], [http://sv.scoutwiki.org/ sv], [http://da.scoutwiki.org/ da], [http://cs.scoutwiki.org/ cs], [http://eo.scoutwiki.org/ eo], [http://ar.scoutwiki.org/ ar], [http://pt.scoutwiki.org/ pt], [http://uk.scoutwiki.org/ uk] ; [http://media.scoutwiki.org/ images], [http://asso.scoutwiki.org/ association]) The international network of scouting wikies.
; SeminaVerbi - [https://seminaverbi.bibleget.io seminaverbi.bibleget.io] ([https://en.seminaverbi.bibleget.io/ en], [https://it.seminaverbi.bibleget.io/ it],  [https://es.seminaverbi.bibleget.io/ es], [https://de.seminaverbi.bibleget.io/ de], [https://fr.seminaverbi.bibleget.io/ fr], [https://pt.seminaverbi.bibleget.io/ pt])
:A cultural project about the influence of the Bible on human culture
; Sharewiki – [http://sharewiki.org/ sharewiki.org]: ([http://sharewiki.org/de/ de], [http://sharewiki.org/en/ en]) Wiki about sharing, collaboration, participation, ...

=== T ===
; Tango.info – [http://wiki.tango.info/mul wiki.tango.info/mul]: (eng, spa, other languages) tango info wiki
; Team Fortress Wiki - [https://wiki.teamfortress.com/wiki/ wiki.teamfortress.com]: (en, ru, fr, de, pl, pt-br, fi, es, nl, zh-hans, zh-hant, ar, cs, da, hu, it, ja, ko, no, pt, ro, sv, tr) the official resource for the Team Fortress series
; The Document Foundation Wiki - [http://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Main_Page wiki.documentfoundation.org]:The official Wiki for LibreOffice and &quot;The Documentfoundation&quot;
; Translatewiki.net – [[translatewiki:Main Page|translatewiki.net]] :Free Open Source Software localisation wiki-style

=== U ===
;Uncyclomedia - [https://uncyclomedia.co/ uncyclomedia.co]: (en, other languages) Wiki farm of satirical Wikipedia parodies

=== V ===
; Venicewiki - [http://www.venicewiki.org/ venicewiki.org]: (it, other languages) The collaborative guide to '''Venice''', Italy.

=== W ===
; Watch-Wiki - [http://watch-wiki.org/ watch-wiki.org/] : (de, en, es, nl, pt, ru) The free watch encyclopedia is an on-line reference about watches.
; WikiJournal – [https://wikijournal.org WikiJournal.org]: (ru, en, de, fr, sp, it) International online journal on various topics
; Wikia – [http://www.wikia.com/ Wikia.com]: (en, other languages) Wiki site hosting on a great many subjects.
; Wikibooks – [http://www.wikibooks.org/ Wikibooks.org]: (en, other languages) Open Books source 
; WikiFur – [http://wikifur.com/ WikiFur.com]: (en, es, ru, de, fr and others) Information about [[:en:furry fandom|furry fandom]]
; WikiHow - [https://www.wikihow.com/Main-Page WikiHow] : (en, other languages) An extensive database of how-to guides.
; Wikimini – [http://www.wikimini.org/ Wikimini.org]: (fr, other languages soon) Encyclopedia for children written by children.
; Wikipedia – [http://www.wikipedia.org/ Wikipedia.org]: (en, other languages) Wiki encyclopedia
; Wikisimpsons – [https://simpsonswiki.com/wiki/Main_Page simpsonswiki.com]: (en, de, sv)  Wiki dedicated to [[w:Fox|Fox]]'s TV series ''[[w:The Simpsons|The Simpsons]]''.
; Wikitravel – [http://wikitravel.org/ wikitravel.org]: (ar, ca, de, en, eo, es, fi, fr, he, hi, hu, it, ja, ko, nl, pl, pt, ro, ru, sv, and zh as well as a multilingual media repository named Wikitravel Shared) Commercial world-wide travel guide
; Wikivoyage – [http://www.wikivoyage.org wikivoyage.org]: (en, de, pt, fr, it, nl, pl, ru, es, vi, others) Non-commercial world-wide travel guide and travel-related topics
; WordPress Codex – [http://codex.wordpress.org/ codex.wordpress.org]: (en, other languages) An open source documentation for the popular and free WordPress blogging system

=== X ===
; Xenharmonic Wiki - [http://en.xen.wiki/ xen.wiki]: (en, de, es, ja) Wiki about xenharmonic music
; xfamily - [http://www.xfamily.org/ xfamily.org]: (en, es) About the cult known as &quot;The Family&quot; or &quot;The Children of God&quot;.

=== Y ===
-

=== Z ===

[[Category:MediaWiki References| ]]</text>
      <sha1>acybgwnicxxprvlgaeebfka7j3s9axx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Starting a new page</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>5713</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402015</id>
      <parentid>5393866</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:27:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>41.115.15.0</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4416" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:1--&gt;
There are several ways to start a new page.

&lt;!--T:16--&gt;
These can vary based on the type of page started, as well as the wiki and namespace. This is stuff bot. Created by Stuff I'd like to receive reviews about the page

== Using Wikilinks == &lt;!--T:2--&gt;

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
MediaWiki makes it very easy to link wiki pages using a standard syntax (see &lt;tvar|1&gt;{{ll|Help:Links}}&lt;/&gt;).

&lt;!--T:21--&gt;
If you (or anyone else) create a link to an article that doesn't exist yet, the link will be colored red, &lt;u style=&quot;color:#ba0000&quot;&gt;like this&lt;/u&gt;.

&lt;!--T:32--&gt;
: Notes:
:* This sample displays that underline style unconditionally. The underline displayed below the text of actual links will normally be hidden by default and made visible only when the link is hovered by the mouse or selected by keyboard navigation, if the wiki (or the user's preferences) uses the default MediaWiki styles. 
:* The actual color of links is also dependent on the default wiki styles, and the design of Wiki pages may still override these default colors.

&lt;!--T:4--&gt;
Clicking a red link will take you to the edit page for the new article.

&lt;!--T:17--&gt;
Simply type your text, click save and the new page will be created.

&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
Once the page has been created, the link will change from &lt;u style=&quot;color:#ba0000&quot;&gt;red&lt;/u&gt; to &lt;u style=&quot;color:#002bb8&quot;&gt;blue&lt;/u&gt; (&lt;u style=&quot;color:#5a3696&quot;&gt;purple&lt;/u&gt; for pages you've visited) indicating that the article now exists.

&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
Usually this is the best way to create a new page, because it means that right from the start, the page will be linked from at least one other place on the wiki (and typically you will want to mesh it into other related pages later).

&lt;!--T:22--&gt;
If you are creating a new page without creating any link to it, you may need to ask yourself: Does this page really fit in with the topics already covered in the wiki?

&lt;!--T:23--&gt;
Also, how are you expecting visitors to find this page?

&lt;!--T:24--&gt;
Normally there is no reason to create a page without first creating a red link to it.

== From the search box == &lt;!--T:7--&gt;

&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
If you search for a page that doesn't exist, then you will be provided with a link to create the new page.

== Using the URL == &lt;!--T:9--&gt;

&lt;!--T:10--&gt;
You can use the wiki's URL for creating a new page.

&lt;!--T:18--&gt;
The URL to an article of the wiki is usually something like this:

&lt;!--T:33--&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.example.net/index.php/&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''ARTICLE'''&lt;/code&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp; or
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.example.net/wiki/&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''ARTICLE'''&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;!--T:11--&gt;
If you replace &lt;code&gt;'''ARTICLE'''&lt;/code&gt; with the name of the page you wish to create, you will be taken to a blank page which indicates that no article of that name exists yet.

&lt;!--T:25--&gt;
Clicking the &quot;&lt;tvar|edit&gt;{{int|edit}}&lt;/&gt;&quot; [[&lt;tvar|tabs&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Navigation#Page Tabs&lt;/&gt;|page tab]] at the top of the page will take you to the edit page for that article, where you can create the new page by typing your text, and clicking submit.

== Using article creation template == &lt;!--T:27--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:31--&gt; This method requires &lt;tvar|1&gt;{{ll|Extension:InputBox}}&lt;/&gt; to be installed.&lt;/translate&gt;}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:28--&gt;
Copy the following text into a page in the wiki:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html4strict&quot;&gt;
&lt;inputbox&gt;
type=create
width=100
break=no
buttonlabel=Create new article
default=(Article title)
&lt;/inputbox&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:29--&gt;
This generates a box where users can simply type the article title and generate a page with that name.

&lt;!--T:30--&gt;
This allows unexperienced editors to easily create pages.

== Create redirects to your new page == &lt;!--T:12--&gt;

&lt;!--T:13--&gt;
Don't forget to set up redirects when you create a page.

&lt;!--T:19--&gt;
If you think another person may search for the page you've created by using a different name or spelling, please create the proper redirect(s).

&lt;!--T:20--&gt;
See &lt;tvar|1&gt;{{ll|Help:Redirects}}&lt;/&gt;.

== Protecting your new page == &lt;!--T:14--&gt;

&lt;!--T:15--&gt;
Normally a new wiki page can be edited by other people (that is one of the main ideas of a wiki!).

&lt;!--T:26--&gt;
However, a sysop could ''[[&lt;tvar|prot&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Protected pages&lt;/&gt;|protect]]'' the page, if desired, to prevent normal users from editing it.
&lt;/translate&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>3wk87fq1ligjyszx6wf7x1lvx3au8vl</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402084</id>
      <parentid>5402015</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:46:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/41.115.15.0|41.115.15.0]] ([[User talk:41.115.15.0|talk]]) to last version by Ameisenigel</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4337" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:1--&gt;
There are several ways to start a new page.

&lt;!--T:16--&gt;
These can vary based on the type of page started, as well as the wiki and namespace.

== Using Wikilinks == &lt;!--T:2--&gt;

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
MediaWiki makes it very easy to link wiki pages using a standard syntax (see &lt;tvar|1&gt;{{ll|Help:Links}}&lt;/&gt;).

&lt;!--T:21--&gt;
If you (or anyone else) create a link to an article that doesn't exist yet, the link will be colored red, &lt;u style=&quot;color:#ba0000&quot;&gt;like this&lt;/u&gt;.

&lt;!--T:32--&gt;
: Notes:
:* This sample displays that underline style unconditionally. The underline displayed below the text of actual links will normally be hidden by default and made visible only when the link is hovered by the mouse or selected by keyboard navigation, if the wiki (or the user's preferences) uses the default MediaWiki styles. 
:* The actual color of links is also dependent on the default wiki styles, and the design of Wiki pages may still override these default colors.

&lt;!--T:4--&gt;
Clicking a red link will take you to the edit page for the new article.

&lt;!--T:17--&gt;
Simply type your text, click save and the new page will be created.

&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
Once the page has been created, the link will change from &lt;u style=&quot;color:#ba0000&quot;&gt;red&lt;/u&gt; to &lt;u style=&quot;color:#002bb8&quot;&gt;blue&lt;/u&gt; (&lt;u style=&quot;color:#5a3696&quot;&gt;purple&lt;/u&gt; for pages you've visited) indicating that the article now exists.

&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
Usually this is the best way to create a new page, because it means that right from the start, the page will be linked from at least one other place on the wiki (and typically you will want to mesh it into other related pages later).

&lt;!--T:22--&gt;
If you are creating a new page without creating any link to it, you may need to ask yourself: Does this page really fit in with the topics already covered in the wiki?

&lt;!--T:23--&gt;
Also, how are you expecting visitors to find this page?

&lt;!--T:24--&gt;
Normally there is no reason to create a page without first creating a red link to it.

== From the search box == &lt;!--T:7--&gt;

&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
If you search for a page that doesn't exist, then you will be provided with a link to create the new page.

== Using the URL == &lt;!--T:9--&gt;

&lt;!--T:10--&gt;
You can use the wiki's URL for creating a new page.

&lt;!--T:18--&gt;
The URL to an article of the wiki is usually something like this:

&lt;!--T:33--&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.example.net/index.php/&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''ARTICLE'''&lt;/code&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp; or
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.example.net/wiki/&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''ARTICLE'''&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;!--T:11--&gt;
If you replace &lt;code&gt;'''ARTICLE'''&lt;/code&gt; with the name of the page you wish to create, you will be taken to a blank page which indicates that no article of that name exists yet.

&lt;!--T:25--&gt;
Clicking the &quot;&lt;tvar|edit&gt;{{int|edit}}&lt;/&gt;&quot; [[&lt;tvar|tabs&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Navigation#Page Tabs&lt;/&gt;|page tab]] at the top of the page will take you to the edit page for that article, where you can create the new page by typing your text, and clicking submit.

== Using article creation template == &lt;!--T:27--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:31--&gt; This method requires &lt;tvar|1&gt;{{ll|Extension:InputBox}}&lt;/&gt; to be installed.&lt;/translate&gt;}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:28--&gt;
Copy the following text into a page in the wiki:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html4strict&quot;&gt;
&lt;inputbox&gt;
type=create
width=100
break=no
buttonlabel=Create new article
default=(Article title)
&lt;/inputbox&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:29--&gt;
This generates a box where users can simply type the article title and generate a page with that name.

&lt;!--T:30--&gt;
This allows unexperienced editors to easily create pages.

== Create redirects to your new page == &lt;!--T:12--&gt;

&lt;!--T:13--&gt;
Don't forget to set up redirects when you create a page.

&lt;!--T:19--&gt;
If you think another person may search for the page you've created by using a different name or spelling, please create the proper redirect(s).

&lt;!--T:20--&gt;
See &lt;tvar|1&gt;{{ll|Help:Redirects}}&lt;/&gt;.

== Protecting your new page == &lt;!--T:14--&gt;

&lt;!--T:15--&gt;
Normally a new wiki page can be edited by other people (that is one of the main ideas of a wiki!).

&lt;!--T:26--&gt;
However, a sysop could ''[[&lt;tvar|prot&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Protected pages&lt;/&gt;|protect]]'' the page, if desired, to prevent normal users from editing it.
&lt;/translate&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>qo8mgy5lwizuy9clwz9r2eh4wojxzv7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>6374</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402231</id>
      <parentid>5400724</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:02:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13200" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:36--&gt; Updated information is available at Meta: &lt;tvar name=meta&gt;[[m:Help:Preferences]]&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; Clicking on the [[&lt;tvar name=preferences&gt;Special:preferences&lt;/tvar&gt;|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:97--&gt; You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/translate&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:107--&gt; Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/translate&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}&lt;/tvar&gt; extension installed.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:93--&gt; A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:39--&gt; On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:40--&gt; See &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Help:OAuth}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for more information.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:94--&gt; The time your account was registered.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:43--&gt; see below&lt;/translate&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:45--&gt; see below&lt;/translate&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:95--&gt; Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:96--&gt; Manage global preferences.&lt;/translate&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:98--&gt; If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:99--&gt; Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;translate&gt;
==== Global account ==== &lt;!--T:46--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:100--&gt; Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:101--&gt; The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:48--&gt;
* Languages&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:49--&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:50--&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/translate&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:52--&gt;
* Your existing signature&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:53--&gt;
* New signature&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:54--&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/translate&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:10--&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:55--&gt; Email confirmation&lt;/translate&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:90--&gt; This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{int|emailuser}}&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:92--&gt; This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:91--&gt; This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/translate&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:14--&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;&lt;tvar name=int-skin-preview&gt;{{int|skin-preview}}&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to &lt;tvar name=skins&gt;{{ll|Help:Skins}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for more details.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;translate&gt;
=== Date format and time offset === &lt;!--T:20--&gt;

&lt;!--T:21--&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:18--&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/translate&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:19--&gt; This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/translate&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:87--&gt; Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:57--&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/translate&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the &lt;tvar name=math&gt;{{tag|math|open}}&lt;/tvar&gt; tag will be displayed.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:102--&gt; Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:103--&gt; Note the math preferences will only be visible if &lt;tvar name=ext&gt;{{ll|Extension:Math}}&lt;/tvar&gt; is installed.&lt;/translate&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:23--&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/translate&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; Here you can specify how far back the [[&lt;tvar name=tracking&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes&lt;/tvar&gt;|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/translate&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:88--&gt; Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see &lt;tvar name=editing&gt;{{ll|Help:Editing pages}}&lt;/tvar&gt;). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see &lt;tvar name=tracking&gt;{{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}&lt;/tvar&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:89--&gt; Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See &lt;tvar name=tracking&gt;{{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for more information on this feature.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:65--&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/translate&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See &lt;tvar name=watchlist&gt;{{ll|Help:Watchlist}}&lt;/tvar&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:104--&gt; Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:69--&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:70--&gt; This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:72--&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/translate&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt; Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:105--&gt; Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:106--&gt; You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:82--&gt; On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:83--&gt; If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:84--&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.

&lt;!--T:85--&gt;
See [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About&lt;/tvar&gt;|About Beta Features]] for more information.

&lt;!--T:86--&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.

== See also == &lt;!--T:33--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>4rxruk0b4a2xktuuw0qhf249a2x61b8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual talk:$wgSMTP</title>
    <ns>101</ns>
    <id>7944</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401587</id>
      <parentid>4589781</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:06:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>174.250.211.186</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* IDHost causing problems */</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22186" xml:space="preserve">== MediaWiki 1.18.0 #BUG ==
For those having a headache trying to get the SMTP functionality to work using MW-1.18.0 there's a little oopsy in the [[Manual:UserMailer.php|UserMailer.php]] file under /includes. It seems the PEAR parameters &quot;''From''&quot; and &quot;''Return-Path''&quot; are incorrectly populated.

Make the following changes to ''Line 164'' in UserMailer.php to fix the problem.&lt;br /&gt;
'''ORIGINAL'''
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
163:     $headers['From'] = $from-&gt;toString();
164:     $headers['Return-Path'] = $from-&gt;toString();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
'''Change to:'''
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
163:     $headers['From'] = $from-&gt;toString();
164:     $headers['Return-Path'] = $from-&gt;address;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Note:''''' It appears this is fixed in the &quot;trunk&quot; but i'm not sure if that code is slated for 1.19 or not

:''The above is fixed in 1.18.1 and the change above is confirmed to be in 1.19beta2.''

== IDHost causing problems ==

It appears that the MediaWiki code in includes/UserMailer.php is using the IDHost property to generate the email message id (in email headers).

Please note that IDHost is not a property documented at http://pear.php.net/manual/en/package.mail.mail.factory.php making it confusing that the code would count on it being present in $wgSMTP.

I recommend that either this documentation makes a special note that IDHost should be set for MediaWiki and is not a documented option for PEAR Mail, or providing an acceptable default such as automatically detecting the domain from other $wgSMTP options or the system hostname.
~

== Usage, this usage needs to be confirmed! == 
This can be used to setup access to your mail server. Say, when you have trouble sending mails you may get strange messages - like this: 

: Notice of the mail server: It is not safe to rely on the system's timezone settings. Please use the date.timezone setting, the TZ environment variable or the date_default_timezone_set() function. In case you used any of those methods and you are still getting this warning, you most likely misspelled the timezone identifier. We selected 'Europe/Paris' for '2.0/DST' instead 

(sorry for the odd way of formating this, I dont know how to do this right)
(Speciel:Confirmemail)
[[User:Asset|Asset]]

==Example for Usage==
I used this configuration variable to resolve a problem that I was having with my ISP's mail server refusing to forward e-mail generated by my wiki site.  I am running a web server using my DSL connection, with Bellsouth as my ISP.  Bellsouth's mail server was not delivering any messages generated using PHP's sendmail() function -- to resolve this problem, I set up my configuraton file so that mail generated by my wiki was sent using Bellsouth's mail server.

In my case, the Bellsouth mail server does not require authentication because I am sending mail from a Bellsouth IP address.  After installing PEAR's MAIL package, I included the following in my LocalSettings.php file:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgSMTP = array (
   'IDHost' =&gt; 'mywikidomainname.com', //this is used to build the Message-ID mail header
   'host'   =&gt; 'mail.bellsouth.net', //this is the outgoing mail server name (SMTP server)
   'port'   =&gt; 25, //this is the port used by the SMTP server
   'auth'   =&gt; false,  //in my case, authentication is not required by the mail server for outgoing mail
);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Voila!  No more undelivered messages!
--[[User:Hoggwild5|Hoggwild5]] 15:21, 18 November 2008 (UTC)

===Another example===
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgSMTP = array(
                'host'     =&gt; &quot;smtp.lifesci.dundee.ac.uk&quot;,
                'IDHost'   =&gt; &quot;www.division.university.ac.uk&quot;,
                #'port'     =&gt; 25,
                'auth'     =&gt; false,
                #'username' =&gt; &quot;my_user_name&quot;,
                #'password' =&gt; &quot;my_password&quot;
                );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
--[[User:Dmb|Dmb]] 16:16, 15 January 2009 (UTC)

===Example with localhost parameter===

if you are using a remote SMTP server, you may wish for the wiki to identify itself with a resolvable hostname instead of ''localhost''. This is set in the $wgSMTP array ''localhost'' parameter:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgSMTP = array(
 &quot;host&quot; =&gt; 'smtp.example.com', 
 &quot;IDHost&quot; =&gt; 'example.com', 
 &quot;localhost&quot; =&gt; 'mywiki.example.com',
 &quot;port&quot; =&gt; &quot;25&quot;,
 &quot;auth&quot; =&gt; true/false,
 &quot;username&quot; =&gt; user,
 &quot;password&quot; =&gt; password
);&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Some mail servers will reject with &quot;Helo command rejected: Host not found&quot;. For example [http://www.postfix.org postfix] with ''smtpd_helo_restrictions = reject_unknown_helo_hostname'' --[[User:Erikvw|Erikvw]] 07:57, 23 January 2009 (UTC)
: Nowadays &quot;localhost&quot; does not appear to be an option any longer. --[[User:Kghbln|&amp;#91;&amp;#91;kgh&amp;#93;&amp;#93;]] ([[User talk:Kghbln|talk]]) 21:00, 13 November 2020 (UTC)

== Using Sendmail or Postfix (on Ubuntu/Linux) ==
If you are useing '''Postfix''', that is more modern tool than Sendmail and should be installed by default with Ubuntu server, follow this manual to setup TLS encryption: [https://www.upcloud.com/support/secure-postfix-using-lets-encrypt/ How to Secure Postfix Using Let’s Encrypt]. Then edit &lt;code&gt;Localsettings.php&lt;/code&gt; in [https://serverfault.com/a/762361/364207 this way]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// Using Postfix
$wgSMTP = false;
$wgEmailAuthentication = false;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

If you are prefer to use '''Sendmail''' install it by the command: &lt;code&gt;sudo apt install sendmail&lt;/code&gt;. Probably, the installation process will hang on about 75%, when it is trying to generate a certificate. In this case interrupt the process by &lt;kbd&gt;Ctrl&lt;/kbd&gt;+&lt;kbd&gt;Z&lt;/kbd&gt; and follow [https://askubuntu.com/a/938450/566421 this answer] to complete the installation. Then edit &lt;code&gt;Localsettings.php&lt;/code&gt; in the following way (or tray to use the above configuration):

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// Using Sendmail
$wgSMTP = array(
       'host' =&gt; '127.0.0.1',
       'IDHost' =&gt; 'your.domain.com',
       'localhost' =&gt; 'your.domain.com',
       'port' =&gt; '25',
       'auth' =&gt; false,
);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
[[User:Spas.Z.Spasov|Spas.Z.Spasov]] ([[User talk:Spas.Z.Spasov|talk]]) 14:52, 30 June 2018 (UTC)

: I have postfix with SSL as you describe and I have $wgSMTP configured with the array of options. --[[User:Ciencia Al Poder|Ciencia Al Poder]] ([[User talk:Ciencia Al Poder|talk]]) 20:13, 1 July 2018 (UTC)

== Does IDHost need to be changed? ==

The documentation isn't even clear on whether this value needs to be changed from default. If so, what should go here? &amp;nbsp;'''&amp;mdash;&amp;nbsp;[[User:Mike.lifeguard|&lt;b style=&quot;color:#309;&quot;&gt;Mike&lt;/b&gt;]].[[User talk:Mike.lifeguard|&lt;b style=&quot;color:#309;&quot;&gt;lifeguard&lt;/b&gt;]]'''&amp;nbsp;&amp;#124;&amp;nbsp;&lt;sup&gt;[[m:User talk:Mike.lifeguard|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#309;&quot;&gt;@meta&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/sup&gt; 18:32, 9 October 2009 (UTC)
== Example using Google Mail ==
'''Note:  this method should only be used on low-traffic wikis since Google limits the sending of emails from any single email address to 500 per day'''&lt;br /&gt;
Many ISPs are providing Google Apps as an alternative to their legacy email system.  Using Google's mail servers requires additional configuration settings.  If you are using Google Apps for email for your domain, there are a few additional configuration options that need to be implemented to use Google to send mail from your MediaWiki site.

First, you need to make sure your ISP has compiled PHP with OpenSSL support.  You can check this with the output of phpinfo(), looking to see if OpenSSL is enabled ( this is for Unix/Linux flavors -- Windows will have other installation options ).

If this is the case, you can configure MediaWiki to use Google mail to send email from your MediaWiki site.

* Set up an email account for the MediaWiki site (webmaster@mydomain.com, or info@mydomain.com), making a note of the password assigned to this account.

* Configure your LocalSettings.php file with the following setting, replacing &quot;mydomain.com&quot; with your domain name:


&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
     $wgSMTP = array(
        'host' =&gt; 'ssl://smtp.gmail.com',
        'IDHost' =&gt; 'mydomain.com',
        'port' =&gt; 465,
        'username' =&gt; 'webmaster@mydomain.com', ## or info@mydomain.com, or whatever email account you've set up for your Mediawiki installation
        'password' =&gt; 'emailpasswordforwebmaster',
        'auth' =&gt; true
     );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
=== Customizing the &quot;From&quot; line ===
Using the Gmail option, you can configure a custom &quot;From&quot; line (that uses your own domain) by setting a new default address (under &quot;Settings&quot; -&gt; &quot;Accounts and Import&quot; -&gt; &quot;Send mail as:&quot;). Set &lt;code&gt;$wgPasswordSender&lt;/code&gt; to match this new default address.
==== Comments ====
[[User:Dmitry N. Medvedev|Dmitry N. Medvedev]] ([[User talk:Dmitry N. Medvedev|talk]]) 01:58, 21 March 2012 (UTC)
Does not work.
*How so?[[User:Jasper Deng|Jasper Deng]] ([[User talk:Jasper Deng|talk]]) 03:34, 21 March 2012 (UTC)
** It wrote: Failed to connect to ssl://smtp.gmail.com:465 [SMTP: Failed to connect socket: Connection timed out (code: -1, response: )] --[[User:Dipsy|Dipsy]] ([[User talk:Dipsy|talk]]) 13:20, 25 July 2012 (UTC)
*** Sorry, I incorrectly wrote IDHost. Everything works fine. --[[User:Dipsy|Dipsy]] ([[User talk:Dipsy|talk]]) 07:38, 28 July 2012 (UTC)

== why PEAR? ==

so i installed PEAR in /wiki/PEAR. but i don't quite know what it is used for? and does it even matter where it's installed?
*PEAR is an extension to PHP itself, not MediaWiki, so it's best to install it in PHP's directory.[[User:Jasper Deng|Jasper Deng]] ([[User talk:Jasper Deng|talk]]) 05:46, 21 March 2012 (UTC)

== Amazon SES ==
I just wanted to note that I was successful integrating MediaWiki with Amazon's Simple E-mail Service using this feature and SES's new SMTP support. This is important because a lot of providers block e-mail sent directly from EC2 servers, and Amazon will block the SMTP port if too many messages are sent. However, even in production mode SES restricts From addresses to previously validated addresses, so the $wgUserEmailUseReplyTo variable must be set to true to ensure user-to-user e-mail will work, and $wgEmergencyContact must be set to a validated sender address. [[User:Dcoetzee|Dcoetzee]] ([[User talk:Dcoetzee|talk]]) 13:13, 8 April 2012 (UTC)

Since I fought this for a couple of days, I thought I'd add my experience for the next person attempting this.
From [http://nuwira.co/mediawiki-and-amazon-ses-integration/ this page], I got the following config:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
  $wgSMTP = array(  
    'host' =&gt; 'tls://email-smtp.us-east-1.amazonaws.com',
    'IDHost' =&gt; 'email-smtp.us-east-1.amazonaws.com',
    'port' =&gt; 465,
    'username' =&gt; 'ISJAKSJAETQKJSAS8RP3LSFA',
    'password' =&gt; '13HJASHjhjhjHAkjhkhA/hUfJHSIFAjjAskJADOIW2',
    'auth' =&gt; true
);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Of course, username and password will be the ones Amazon assigned to you, not the ones shown in the example. I also found it extremely helpful to add 'debug' =&gt; true, in there to be able to see the errors in the SMTP exchange. WARNING, setting debug will show anyone who is visting your registration page the SMTP exchange which includes the password!

If your SES instance is configured in 'Sandbox' mode you should change your $wgPasswordSender and $wgEmergencyContact settings to an email address that you have verified in the AWS SES console. If new users register and they aren't in the SES verified list, they won't get the email and you'll be limited to 200 emails per day!

== Using Gmail ==

I'm using Gmail to send mail, my configs:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
         $wgSMTP = array(
                'host'     =&gt; 'smtp.gmail.com',
                'IDHost'   =&gt; &quot;wikibiz.vn&quot;,
                'port'     =&gt; 587,
                'auth'     =&gt; true,
                'username' =&gt; myusername@gmail.com
                'password' =&gt; &quot;mypassword&quot;
                );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
It doesn't work. Anyone know why? [[User:Thamdaocatba|Thamdaocatba]] ([[User talk:Thamdaocatba|talk]]) 06:09, 16 November 2012 (UTC)
:See the section &quot;Using Google Mail&quot; above.--[[User:Jasper Deng|Jasper Deng]] ([[User talk:Jasper Deng|talk]]) 06:55, 16 November 2012 (UTC)

== SELinux ==

If you see this error when sending email after configuring $wgSMTP, you probably have SELinux enabled.

  [SMTP: Failed to connect socket: Permission denied (code: -1, response: )]

CentOS, Fedora, Red Hat, and other users may need to reconfigure SELinux to allow PHP scripts to send email. You can *test* if this is your issue by following this guide - [http://www.crypt.gen.nz/selinux/disable_selinux.html How to Disable SELinux]. If it is, re-enable SELinux, and allow httpd (Apache) to use sendmail with &lt;code&gt;setsebool httpd_can_sendmail 1&lt;/code&gt;

== Some advices ==

I have solved problem with this tutorial, just take care with this:

1. If you are using Gmail, ensure of aprobe access, or Gmail will detect it as malicious acces and you couln't make it work.
2. If you have a error of acces to a socket or smething like this, it's due your hosting doesn't have open port for you, so ask them to open respective port, in case of Gmail, is port 465.
3. Put code at the beggining, before extensions codes.
4. Make sure you have installed 2 scripts of php, if you have cpanel, go to php console and install them, it's too easy as I can do it.

I hope could help you.

== Google rejecting automated MediaWiki messages ==

I am trying to get mail working using my gmail account as the outgoing address. I am using the following configuration:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
    $wgSMTP = array(
        'host' =&gt; 'ssl://smtp.gmail.com',
        'IDHost' =&gt; 'gmail.com',
        'port' =&gt; 465,
        'username' =&gt; '&lt;redacted&gt;@gmail.com',
        'password' =&gt; '&lt;redacted&gt;',
        'auth' =&gt; true
    );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
All mail then gets bounced back to my gmail account with a message similar to this:

    Delivery to the following recipient failed permanently:
    &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;redacted&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;@gmail.com
    Technical details of permanent failure:
    Message rejected.  See https://support.google.com/mail/answer/69585 for more information.

Any ideas on how I can fix this? [[User:Entropy|Entropy]] ([[User talk:Entropy|talk]]) 20:09, 10 May 2016 (UTC)

: Try changing IDHost so it matches your domain. Otherwise, try something from [https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=9855030] --[[User:Ciencia Al Poder|Ciencia Al Poder]] ([[User talk:Ciencia Al Poder|talk]]) 21:59, 10 May 2016 (UTC)
:: It turns out my firewall was blocking port 465—unblocking it fixed the problem. I had to enable less secure apps for my Gmail account under Account Settings as well. Email is now working fine with IDHost set to gmail.com. [[User:Entropy|Entropy]] ([[User talk:Entropy|talk]]) 22:49, 10 May 2016 (UTC)

== Problem with Hostmonster solved - should be part of the docs ==

Hi there, I think [[Topic:T4d834xnkk6asxi7|this]] should be added to the documentation. The code could also be improved to give a more helpful message. Thanks [[Special:Contributions/146.198.223.71|146.198.223.71]] 23:30, 21 May 2016 (UTC)
: Added to [[Manual:$wgEnableEmail]], you may want to mention it in this page as well (I can't edit it). Thanks. [[Special:Contributions/146.198.223.71|146.198.223.71]] 23:53, 21 May 2016 (UTC)
:: I've added it on the section about &quot;Unknown error in PHP's mail() function &quot; --[[User:Ciencia Al Poder|Ciencia Al Poder]] ([[User talk:Ciencia Al Poder|talk]]) 12:42, 22 May 2016 (UTC)
:::Nice one, thanks. Although, to me it reads a bit backwards, because fixing the sender is a less drastic solution than going through another SMTP server, and should be tried first. Also, if I understand it correctly, the reference to task T32260 relates to possible issues with the last-resort workaround, so it should be the last line of that section. Cheers. [[Special:Contributions/146.198.223.71|146.198.223.71]] 17:05, 22 May 2016 (UTC)
:::: Ok, done --[[User:Ciencia Al Poder|Ciencia Al Poder]] ([[User talk:Ciencia Al Poder|talk]]) 01:48, 24 May 2016 (UTC)

== How do I avoid exposing the server's IP address? ==

I'm using mailgun, with this setup:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgSMTP = array(
        'host' =&gt; 'smtp.mailgun.org',
        'IDHost' =&gt; 'foowiki.com',
        'port' =&gt; 25,
        'username' =&gt; 'postmaster@foowiki.com',
        'password' =&gt; 'xxx',
        'auth' =&gt; true
);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
The emails contain:
&lt;pre&gt;
X-Mailgun-Sending-Ip: xxx.xx.xxx.xxx
X-Mailgun-Sid: ...
Received: from localhost (affiliate.test.known.host [xx.xxx.xx.xxx]) by mxa.mailgun.org with ESMTP id ... ; Tue, 27 Sep 2016 20:42:39 -0000 (UTC)
&lt;/pre&gt;
How do I get it to not expose that localhost IP address? [[User:Let me tell you hwhat|Let me tell you hwhat]] ([[User talk:Let me tell you hwhat|talk]]) 00:50, 30 September 2016 (UTC)

: You can't do that, really. You send your email to a mail server, and that server tracks the original IP and adds it to mail headers. That's part of the protocol and, unless you have control on the mail server (mailgun in this case), you can't hide that. Even if you have control of the mail server, that server sends the mail to the recipient's server which would also add the IP of the previous server (mailgun). --[[User:Ciencia Al Poder|Ciencia Al Poder]] ([[User talk:Ciencia Al Poder|talk]]) 09:37, 30 September 2016 (UTC)
::I ended up accomplishing this using cURL; see [[Manual:Mailgun#cURL_option]]. [[User:Let me tell you hwhat|Let me tell you hwhat]] ([[User talk:Let me tell you hwhat|talk]]) 13:57, 2 October 2016 (UTC)

== Using gmail's SMTP - tested 31/03/17 ==

Hi all,

First post on here, signed up just for this. Just a note that gmail SMTP only worked for me if i used an 'App password' instead of my usual gmail password. https://support.google.com/accounts/answer/185833

cheers.

---
Hi... can you write down your configuration?
I'm trying gmail with specific app with no success.
Thanks.--[[User:Ssspera|Ssspera]] ([[User talk:Ssspera|talk]]) 10:33, 31 March 2017 (UTC)

This is what I used. I think your localhost server name needs to match as well.

# Enable SMTP Mail - Currently set to use personal gmail account.
  $wgSMTP = array(
        'host' =&gt; 'ssl://smtp.gmail.com',
        'IDHost' =&gt; 'gmail.com',
        'localhost' =&gt; 'myservername.org',
        'port' =&gt; 465,
        'username' =&gt; 'myemail@gmail.com',
        'password' =&gt; '16 digit special gmail app password as per url',
        'auth' =&gt; true

== Test email ==

I'm getting SMTP set up for my MediaWiki install and was curious: what's the best way to make the wiki send a test email, just so I can verify that the configuration is correct?  Thanks!  [[User:Huwmanbeing|Huwmanbeing]] ([[User talk:Huwmanbeing|talk]]) 09:34, 14 October 2017 (UTC)
:You can request a new password on the login page, it should send an email. Or when logged as user, you can also authenticate your email from the preferences. ~ [[User:Seb35|Seb35]] [[User talk:Seb35|&lt;small&gt;[^_^]&lt;/small&gt;]] 19:06, 15 October 2017 (UTC)

== PEAR Mail installation when upgrading ==

Upgrading from an older mediawiki and also php 5.4 to php 5.6, some problems with incompatible sources and versions for Auth_SASL occurred. The sequence:
&lt;kbd&gt;sudo pear channel-update pear.php.net; sudo pear uninstall mail pear/Auth_SASL net_smtp; sudo pear install mail pear/Auth_SASL net_smtp&lt;/kbd&gt; may be helpful. It worked for us. --[[User:Gregor Hagedorn|Gregor Hagedorn]] ([[User talk:Gregor Hagedorn|talk]]) 22:52, 21 December 2017 (UTC)

== Remove warning regarding MW 1.31 ==

As far as I can see the current build of MW code at 1.31 already contains all required dependencies (https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/c/mediawiki/core/+/465674/). Therefore the waring (https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Manual:$wgSMTP#Install_dependencies_(MW_1.31_and_earlier)) could be removed, couldn't it?
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span class=&quot;autosigned&quot;&gt;—&amp;nbsp;Preceding [[Help:Signatures|unsigned]] comment added by [[User:Osnard|Osnard]] ([[User talk:Osnard|talk]] • [[Special:Contributions/Osnard|contribs]]) &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;!-- Template:Unsigned --&gt;

: Looks like it's included [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/source/mediawiki/browse/REL1_31/RELEASE-NOTES-1.31 in MediaWiki 1.31.2], which hasn't been released, but not on 1.31.1, which is the latest released version for 1.31. So... I guess it should remain, since nobody cares about doing a new release... :-( --[[User:Ciencia Al Poder|Ciencia Al Poder]] ([[User talk:Ciencia Al Poder|talk]]) 09:21, 23 May 2019 (UTC)

== Yahoo? ==

Did somebody try to connect MediaWiki with [https://www.saleshandy.com/smtp/yahoo-smtp-settings/ Yahoo]? --[[User:Kghbln|&amp;#91;&amp;#91;kgh&amp;#93;&amp;#93;]] ([[User talk:Kghbln|talk]]) 08:26, 7 October 2020 (UTC)

== Running E-Mail Server on the same Server ==

It is not recommended, but if you are running the email-server on the same server and it gives you this error:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;txt&quot;&gt;
authentication failure [SMTP: STARTTLS failed (code: 220, response: TLS go ahead)]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

you can add the following line:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
'socket_options' =&gt; array('ssl' =&gt; array('verify_peer_name' =&gt; false)),
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

The array should look like this:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgSMTP = [
    'host' =&gt; 'localhost', // outbox server of the email account
    'IDHost' =&gt; 'yourdomain.com', // sub(domain) of your wiki (not something like mail.yourdomain.com)
    'port' =&gt; 587, // StartTLS-Port
    'username' =&gt; 'mediawiki@yourdomain.com', // user of the email account
    'password' =&gt; 'supersecure', // pass of the email account
    'auth' =&gt; true,
    'socket_options' =&gt; array('ssl' =&gt; array('verify_peer_name' =&gt; false))
];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

This turns off the peer name verification of the server. Since the HELO sent by mediawiki respective pear is the same as the one of the mailserver, you get the error (as far as I understand..).

Reference on GitHub: [https://github.com/pear/Net_SMTP/blob/68420118ac8f9dfe5c4b8cac1bdb955efcd4be21/docs/guide.txt#id3 1.2   The Net_Socket Package]

on php documentary: https://www.php.net/manual/en/context.ssl.php#context.ssl.verify-peer-name</text>
      <sha1>agdyeaze6v4x6lrcd8lzjima2h8hx5i</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401588</id>
      <parentid>5401587</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:06:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Clump</username>
        <id>81610</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/174.250.211.186|174.250.211.186]] ([[User talk:174.250.211.186|talk]]) to last version by 134.130.60.1</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22184" xml:space="preserve">== MediaWiki 1.18.0 #BUG ==
For those having a headache trying to get the SMTP functionality to work using MW-1.18.0 there's a little oopsy in the [[Manual:UserMailer.php|UserMailer.php]] file under /includes. It seems the PEAR parameters &quot;''From''&quot; and &quot;''Return-Path''&quot; are incorrectly populated.

Make the following changes to ''Line 164'' in UserMailer.php to fix the problem.&lt;br /&gt;
'''ORIGINAL'''
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
163:     $headers['From'] = $from-&gt;toString();
164:     $headers['Return-Path'] = $from-&gt;toString();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
'''Change to:'''
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
163:     $headers['From'] = $from-&gt;toString();
164:     $headers['Return-Path'] = $from-&gt;address;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Note:''''' It appears this is fixed in the &quot;trunk&quot; but i'm not sure if that code is slated for 1.19 or not

:''The above is fixed in 1.18.1 and the change above is confirmed to be in 1.19beta2.''

== IDHost causing problems ==

It appears that the MediaWiki code in includes/UserMailer.php is using the IDHost property to generate the email message id (in email headers).

Please note that IDHost is not a property documented at http://pear.php.net/manual/en/package.mail.mail.factory.php making it confusing that the code would count on it being present in $wgSMTP.

I recommend that either this documentation makes a special note that IDHost should be set for MediaWiki and is not a documented option for PEAR Mail, or providing an acceptable default such as automatically detecting the domain from other $wgSMTP options or the system hostname.

== Usage, this usage needs to be confirmed! == 
This can be used to setup access to your mail server. Say, when you have trouble sending mails you may get strange messages - like this: 

: Notice of the mail server: It is not safe to rely on the system's timezone settings. Please use the date.timezone setting, the TZ environment variable or the date_default_timezone_set() function. In case you used any of those methods and you are still getting this warning, you most likely misspelled the timezone identifier. We selected 'Europe/Paris' for '2.0/DST' instead 

(sorry for the odd way of formating this, I dont know how to do this right)
(Speciel:Confirmemail)
[[User:Asset|Asset]]

==Example for Usage==
I used this configuration variable to resolve a problem that I was having with my ISP's mail server refusing to forward e-mail generated by my wiki site.  I am running a web server using my DSL connection, with Bellsouth as my ISP.  Bellsouth's mail server was not delivering any messages generated using PHP's sendmail() function -- to resolve this problem, I set up my configuraton file so that mail generated by my wiki was sent using Bellsouth's mail server.

In my case, the Bellsouth mail server does not require authentication because I am sending mail from a Bellsouth IP address.  After installing PEAR's MAIL package, I included the following in my LocalSettings.php file:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgSMTP = array (
   'IDHost' =&gt; 'mywikidomainname.com', //this is used to build the Message-ID mail header
   'host'   =&gt; 'mail.bellsouth.net', //this is the outgoing mail server name (SMTP server)
   'port'   =&gt; 25, //this is the port used by the SMTP server
   'auth'   =&gt; false,  //in my case, authentication is not required by the mail server for outgoing mail
);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Voila!  No more undelivered messages!
--[[User:Hoggwild5|Hoggwild5]] 15:21, 18 November 2008 (UTC)

===Another example===
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgSMTP = array(
                'host'     =&gt; &quot;smtp.lifesci.dundee.ac.uk&quot;,
                'IDHost'   =&gt; &quot;www.division.university.ac.uk&quot;,
                #'port'     =&gt; 25,
                'auth'     =&gt; false,
                #'username' =&gt; &quot;my_user_name&quot;,
                #'password' =&gt; &quot;my_password&quot;
                );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
--[[User:Dmb|Dmb]] 16:16, 15 January 2009 (UTC)

===Example with localhost parameter===

if you are using a remote SMTP server, you may wish for the wiki to identify itself with a resolvable hostname instead of ''localhost''. This is set in the $wgSMTP array ''localhost'' parameter:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgSMTP = array(
 &quot;host&quot; =&gt; 'smtp.example.com', 
 &quot;IDHost&quot; =&gt; 'example.com', 
 &quot;localhost&quot; =&gt; 'mywiki.example.com',
 &quot;port&quot; =&gt; &quot;25&quot;,
 &quot;auth&quot; =&gt; true/false,
 &quot;username&quot; =&gt; user,
 &quot;password&quot; =&gt; password
);&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Some mail servers will reject with &quot;Helo command rejected: Host not found&quot;. For example [http://www.postfix.org postfix] with ''smtpd_helo_restrictions = reject_unknown_helo_hostname'' --[[User:Erikvw|Erikvw]] 07:57, 23 January 2009 (UTC)
: Nowadays &quot;localhost&quot; does not appear to be an option any longer. --[[User:Kghbln|&amp;#91;&amp;#91;kgh&amp;#93;&amp;#93;]] ([[User talk:Kghbln|talk]]) 21:00, 13 November 2020 (UTC)

== Using Sendmail or Postfix (on Ubuntu/Linux) ==
If you are useing '''Postfix''', that is more modern tool than Sendmail and should be installed by default with Ubuntu server, follow this manual to setup TLS encryption: [https://www.upcloud.com/support/secure-postfix-using-lets-encrypt/ How to Secure Postfix Using Let’s Encrypt]. Then edit &lt;code&gt;Localsettings.php&lt;/code&gt; in [https://serverfault.com/a/762361/364207 this way]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// Using Postfix
$wgSMTP = false;
$wgEmailAuthentication = false;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

If you are prefer to use '''Sendmail''' install it by the command: &lt;code&gt;sudo apt install sendmail&lt;/code&gt;. Probably, the installation process will hang on about 75%, when it is trying to generate a certificate. In this case interrupt the process by &lt;kbd&gt;Ctrl&lt;/kbd&gt;+&lt;kbd&gt;Z&lt;/kbd&gt; and follow [https://askubuntu.com/a/938450/566421 this answer] to complete the installation. Then edit &lt;code&gt;Localsettings.php&lt;/code&gt; in the following way (or tray to use the above configuration):

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// Using Sendmail
$wgSMTP = array(
       'host' =&gt; '127.0.0.1',
       'IDHost' =&gt; 'your.domain.com',
       'localhost' =&gt; 'your.domain.com',
       'port' =&gt; '25',
       'auth' =&gt; false,
);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
[[User:Spas.Z.Spasov|Spas.Z.Spasov]] ([[User talk:Spas.Z.Spasov|talk]]) 14:52, 30 June 2018 (UTC)

: I have postfix with SSL as you describe and I have $wgSMTP configured with the array of options. --[[User:Ciencia Al Poder|Ciencia Al Poder]] ([[User talk:Ciencia Al Poder|talk]]) 20:13, 1 July 2018 (UTC)

== Does IDHost need to be changed? ==

The documentation isn't even clear on whether this value needs to be changed from default. If so, what should go here? &amp;nbsp;'''&amp;mdash;&amp;nbsp;[[User:Mike.lifeguard|&lt;b style=&quot;color:#309;&quot;&gt;Mike&lt;/b&gt;]].[[User talk:Mike.lifeguard|&lt;b style=&quot;color:#309;&quot;&gt;lifeguard&lt;/b&gt;]]'''&amp;nbsp;&amp;#124;&amp;nbsp;&lt;sup&gt;[[m:User talk:Mike.lifeguard|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#309;&quot;&gt;@meta&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/sup&gt; 18:32, 9 October 2009 (UTC)
== Example using Google Mail ==
'''Note:  this method should only be used on low-traffic wikis since Google limits the sending of emails from any single email address to 500 per day'''&lt;br /&gt;
Many ISPs are providing Google Apps as an alternative to their legacy email system.  Using Google's mail servers requires additional configuration settings.  If you are using Google Apps for email for your domain, there are a few additional configuration options that need to be implemented to use Google to send mail from your MediaWiki site.

First, you need to make sure your ISP has compiled PHP with OpenSSL support.  You can check this with the output of phpinfo(), looking to see if OpenSSL is enabled ( this is for Unix/Linux flavors -- Windows will have other installation options ).

If this is the case, you can configure MediaWiki to use Google mail to send email from your MediaWiki site.

* Set up an email account for the MediaWiki site (webmaster@mydomain.com, or info@mydomain.com), making a note of the password assigned to this account.

* Configure your LocalSettings.php file with the following setting, replacing &quot;mydomain.com&quot; with your domain name:


&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
     $wgSMTP = array(
        'host' =&gt; 'ssl://smtp.gmail.com',
        'IDHost' =&gt; 'mydomain.com',
        'port' =&gt; 465,
        'username' =&gt; 'webmaster@mydomain.com', ## or info@mydomain.com, or whatever email account you've set up for your Mediawiki installation
        'password' =&gt; 'emailpasswordforwebmaster',
        'auth' =&gt; true
     );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
=== Customizing the &quot;From&quot; line ===
Using the Gmail option, you can configure a custom &quot;From&quot; line (that uses your own domain) by setting a new default address (under &quot;Settings&quot; -&gt; &quot;Accounts and Import&quot; -&gt; &quot;Send mail as:&quot;). Set &lt;code&gt;$wgPasswordSender&lt;/code&gt; to match this new default address.
==== Comments ====
[[User:Dmitry N. Medvedev|Dmitry N. Medvedev]] ([[User talk:Dmitry N. Medvedev|talk]]) 01:58, 21 March 2012 (UTC)
Does not work.
*How so?[[User:Jasper Deng|Jasper Deng]] ([[User talk:Jasper Deng|talk]]) 03:34, 21 March 2012 (UTC)
** It wrote: Failed to connect to ssl://smtp.gmail.com:465 [SMTP: Failed to connect socket: Connection timed out (code: -1, response: )] --[[User:Dipsy|Dipsy]] ([[User talk:Dipsy|talk]]) 13:20, 25 July 2012 (UTC)
*** Sorry, I incorrectly wrote IDHost. Everything works fine. --[[User:Dipsy|Dipsy]] ([[User talk:Dipsy|talk]]) 07:38, 28 July 2012 (UTC)

== why PEAR? ==

so i installed PEAR in /wiki/PEAR. but i don't quite know what it is used for? and does it even matter where it's installed?
*PEAR is an extension to PHP itself, not MediaWiki, so it's best to install it in PHP's directory.[[User:Jasper Deng|Jasper Deng]] ([[User talk:Jasper Deng|talk]]) 05:46, 21 March 2012 (UTC)

== Amazon SES ==
I just wanted to note that I was successful integrating MediaWiki with Amazon's Simple E-mail Service using this feature and SES's new SMTP support. This is important because a lot of providers block e-mail sent directly from EC2 servers, and Amazon will block the SMTP port if too many messages are sent. However, even in production mode SES restricts From addresses to previously validated addresses, so the $wgUserEmailUseReplyTo variable must be set to true to ensure user-to-user e-mail will work, and $wgEmergencyContact must be set to a validated sender address. [[User:Dcoetzee|Dcoetzee]] ([[User talk:Dcoetzee|talk]]) 13:13, 8 April 2012 (UTC)

Since I fought this for a couple of days, I thought I'd add my experience for the next person attempting this.
From [http://nuwira.co/mediawiki-and-amazon-ses-integration/ this page], I got the following config:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
  $wgSMTP = array(  
    'host' =&gt; 'tls://email-smtp.us-east-1.amazonaws.com',
    'IDHost' =&gt; 'email-smtp.us-east-1.amazonaws.com',
    'port' =&gt; 465,
    'username' =&gt; 'ISJAKSJAETQKJSAS8RP3LSFA',
    'password' =&gt; '13HJASHjhjhjHAkjhkhA/hUfJHSIFAjjAskJADOIW2',
    'auth' =&gt; true
);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Of course, username and password will be the ones Amazon assigned to you, not the ones shown in the example. I also found it extremely helpful to add 'debug' =&gt; true, in there to be able to see the errors in the SMTP exchange. WARNING, setting debug will show anyone who is visting your registration page the SMTP exchange which includes the password!

If your SES instance is configured in 'Sandbox' mode you should change your $wgPasswordSender and $wgEmergencyContact settings to an email address that you have verified in the AWS SES console. If new users register and they aren't in the SES verified list, they won't get the email and you'll be limited to 200 emails per day!

== Using Gmail ==

I'm using Gmail to send mail, my configs:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
         $wgSMTP = array(
                'host'     =&gt; 'smtp.gmail.com',
                'IDHost'   =&gt; &quot;wikibiz.vn&quot;,
                'port'     =&gt; 587,
                'auth'     =&gt; true,
                'username' =&gt; myusername@gmail.com
                'password' =&gt; &quot;mypassword&quot;
                );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
It doesn't work. Anyone know why? [[User:Thamdaocatba|Thamdaocatba]] ([[User talk:Thamdaocatba|talk]]) 06:09, 16 November 2012 (UTC)
:See the section &quot;Using Google Mail&quot; above.--[[User:Jasper Deng|Jasper Deng]] ([[User talk:Jasper Deng|talk]]) 06:55, 16 November 2012 (UTC)

== SELinux ==

If you see this error when sending email after configuring $wgSMTP, you probably have SELinux enabled.

  [SMTP: Failed to connect socket: Permission denied (code: -1, response: )]

CentOS, Fedora, Red Hat, and other users may need to reconfigure SELinux to allow PHP scripts to send email. You can *test* if this is your issue by following this guide - [http://www.crypt.gen.nz/selinux/disable_selinux.html How to Disable SELinux]. If it is, re-enable SELinux, and allow httpd (Apache) to use sendmail with &lt;code&gt;setsebool httpd_can_sendmail 1&lt;/code&gt;

== Some advices ==

I have solved problem with this tutorial, just take care with this:

1. If you are using Gmail, ensure of aprobe access, or Gmail will detect it as malicious acces and you couln't make it work.
2. If you have a error of acces to a socket or smething like this, it's due your hosting doesn't have open port for you, so ask them to open respective port, in case of Gmail, is port 465.
3. Put code at the beggining, before extensions codes.
4. Make sure you have installed 2 scripts of php, if you have cpanel, go to php console and install them, it's too easy as I can do it.

I hope could help you.

== Google rejecting automated MediaWiki messages ==

I am trying to get mail working using my gmail account as the outgoing address. I am using the following configuration:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
    $wgSMTP = array(
        'host' =&gt; 'ssl://smtp.gmail.com',
        'IDHost' =&gt; 'gmail.com',
        'port' =&gt; 465,
        'username' =&gt; '&lt;redacted&gt;@gmail.com',
        'password' =&gt; '&lt;redacted&gt;',
        'auth' =&gt; true
    );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
All mail then gets bounced back to my gmail account with a message similar to this:

    Delivery to the following recipient failed permanently:
    &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;redacted&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;@gmail.com
    Technical details of permanent failure:
    Message rejected.  See https://support.google.com/mail/answer/69585 for more information.

Any ideas on how I can fix this? [[User:Entropy|Entropy]] ([[User talk:Entropy|talk]]) 20:09, 10 May 2016 (UTC)

: Try changing IDHost so it matches your domain. Otherwise, try something from [https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=9855030] --[[User:Ciencia Al Poder|Ciencia Al Poder]] ([[User talk:Ciencia Al Poder|talk]]) 21:59, 10 May 2016 (UTC)
:: It turns out my firewall was blocking port 465—unblocking it fixed the problem. I had to enable less secure apps for my Gmail account under Account Settings as well. Email is now working fine with IDHost set to gmail.com. [[User:Entropy|Entropy]] ([[User talk:Entropy|talk]]) 22:49, 10 May 2016 (UTC)

== Problem with Hostmonster solved - should be part of the docs ==

Hi there, I think [[Topic:T4d834xnkk6asxi7|this]] should be added to the documentation. The code could also be improved to give a more helpful message. Thanks [[Special:Contributions/146.198.223.71|146.198.223.71]] 23:30, 21 May 2016 (UTC)
: Added to [[Manual:$wgEnableEmail]], you may want to mention it in this page as well (I can't edit it). Thanks. [[Special:Contributions/146.198.223.71|146.198.223.71]] 23:53, 21 May 2016 (UTC)
:: I've added it on the section about &quot;Unknown error in PHP's mail() function &quot; --[[User:Ciencia Al Poder|Ciencia Al Poder]] ([[User talk:Ciencia Al Poder|talk]]) 12:42, 22 May 2016 (UTC)
:::Nice one, thanks. Although, to me it reads a bit backwards, because fixing the sender is a less drastic solution than going through another SMTP server, and should be tried first. Also, if I understand it correctly, the reference to task T32260 relates to possible issues with the last-resort workaround, so it should be the last line of that section. Cheers. [[Special:Contributions/146.198.223.71|146.198.223.71]] 17:05, 22 May 2016 (UTC)
:::: Ok, done --[[User:Ciencia Al Poder|Ciencia Al Poder]] ([[User talk:Ciencia Al Poder|talk]]) 01:48, 24 May 2016 (UTC)

== How do I avoid exposing the server's IP address? ==

I'm using mailgun, with this setup:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgSMTP = array(
        'host' =&gt; 'smtp.mailgun.org',
        'IDHost' =&gt; 'foowiki.com',
        'port' =&gt; 25,
        'username' =&gt; 'postmaster@foowiki.com',
        'password' =&gt; 'xxx',
        'auth' =&gt; true
);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
The emails contain:
&lt;pre&gt;
X-Mailgun-Sending-Ip: xxx.xx.xxx.xxx
X-Mailgun-Sid: ...
Received: from localhost (affiliate.test.known.host [xx.xxx.xx.xxx]) by mxa.mailgun.org with ESMTP id ... ; Tue, 27 Sep 2016 20:42:39 -0000 (UTC)
&lt;/pre&gt;
How do I get it to not expose that localhost IP address? [[User:Let me tell you hwhat|Let me tell you hwhat]] ([[User talk:Let me tell you hwhat|talk]]) 00:50, 30 September 2016 (UTC)

: You can't do that, really. You send your email to a mail server, and that server tracks the original IP and adds it to mail headers. That's part of the protocol and, unless you have control on the mail server (mailgun in this case), you can't hide that. Even if you have control of the mail server, that server sends the mail to the recipient's server which would also add the IP of the previous server (mailgun). --[[User:Ciencia Al Poder|Ciencia Al Poder]] ([[User talk:Ciencia Al Poder|talk]]) 09:37, 30 September 2016 (UTC)
::I ended up accomplishing this using cURL; see [[Manual:Mailgun#cURL_option]]. [[User:Let me tell you hwhat|Let me tell you hwhat]] ([[User talk:Let me tell you hwhat|talk]]) 13:57, 2 October 2016 (UTC)

== Using gmail's SMTP - tested 31/03/17 ==

Hi all,

First post on here, signed up just for this. Just a note that gmail SMTP only worked for me if i used an 'App password' instead of my usual gmail password. https://support.google.com/accounts/answer/185833

cheers.

---
Hi... can you write down your configuration?
I'm trying gmail with specific app with no success.
Thanks.--[[User:Ssspera|Ssspera]] ([[User talk:Ssspera|talk]]) 10:33, 31 March 2017 (UTC)

This is what I used. I think your localhost server name needs to match as well.

# Enable SMTP Mail - Currently set to use personal gmail account.
  $wgSMTP = array(
        'host' =&gt; 'ssl://smtp.gmail.com',
        'IDHost' =&gt; 'gmail.com',
        'localhost' =&gt; 'myservername.org',
        'port' =&gt; 465,
        'username' =&gt; 'myemail@gmail.com',
        'password' =&gt; '16 digit special gmail app password as per url',
        'auth' =&gt; true

== Test email ==

I'm getting SMTP set up for my MediaWiki install and was curious: what's the best way to make the wiki send a test email, just so I can verify that the configuration is correct?  Thanks!  [[User:Huwmanbeing|Huwmanbeing]] ([[User talk:Huwmanbeing|talk]]) 09:34, 14 October 2017 (UTC)
:You can request a new password on the login page, it should send an email. Or when logged as user, you can also authenticate your email from the preferences. ~ [[User:Seb35|Seb35]] [[User talk:Seb35|&lt;small&gt;[^_^]&lt;/small&gt;]] 19:06, 15 October 2017 (UTC)

== PEAR Mail installation when upgrading ==

Upgrading from an older mediawiki and also php 5.4 to php 5.6, some problems with incompatible sources and versions for Auth_SASL occurred. The sequence:
&lt;kbd&gt;sudo pear channel-update pear.php.net; sudo pear uninstall mail pear/Auth_SASL net_smtp; sudo pear install mail pear/Auth_SASL net_smtp&lt;/kbd&gt; may be helpful. It worked for us. --[[User:Gregor Hagedorn|Gregor Hagedorn]] ([[User talk:Gregor Hagedorn|talk]]) 22:52, 21 December 2017 (UTC)

== Remove warning regarding MW 1.31 ==

As far as I can see the current build of MW code at 1.31 already contains all required dependencies (https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/c/mediawiki/core/+/465674/). Therefore the waring (https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Manual:$wgSMTP#Install_dependencies_(MW_1.31_and_earlier)) could be removed, couldn't it?
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span class=&quot;autosigned&quot;&gt;—&amp;nbsp;Preceding [[Help:Signatures|unsigned]] comment added by [[User:Osnard|Osnard]] ([[User talk:Osnard|talk]] • [[Special:Contributions/Osnard|contribs]]) &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;!-- Template:Unsigned --&gt;

: Looks like it's included [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/source/mediawiki/browse/REL1_31/RELEASE-NOTES-1.31 in MediaWiki 1.31.2], which hasn't been released, but not on 1.31.1, which is the latest released version for 1.31. So... I guess it should remain, since nobody cares about doing a new release... :-( --[[User:Ciencia Al Poder|Ciencia Al Poder]] ([[User talk:Ciencia Al Poder|talk]]) 09:21, 23 May 2019 (UTC)

== Yahoo? ==

Did somebody try to connect MediaWiki with [https://www.saleshandy.com/smtp/yahoo-smtp-settings/ Yahoo]? --[[User:Kghbln|&amp;#91;&amp;#91;kgh&amp;#93;&amp;#93;]] ([[User talk:Kghbln|talk]]) 08:26, 7 October 2020 (UTC)

== Running E-Mail Server on the same Server ==

It is not recommended, but if you are running the email-server on the same server and it gives you this error:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;txt&quot;&gt;
authentication failure [SMTP: STARTTLS failed (code: 220, response: TLS go ahead)]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

you can add the following line:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
'socket_options' =&gt; array('ssl' =&gt; array('verify_peer_name' =&gt; false)),
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

The array should look like this:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgSMTP = [
    'host' =&gt; 'localhost', // outbox server of the email account
    'IDHost' =&gt; 'yourdomain.com', // sub(domain) of your wiki (not something like mail.yourdomain.com)
    'port' =&gt; 587, // StartTLS-Port
    'username' =&gt; 'mediawiki@yourdomain.com', // user of the email account
    'password' =&gt; 'supersecure', // pass of the email account
    'auth' =&gt; true,
    'socket_options' =&gt; array('ssl' =&gt; array('verify_peer_name' =&gt; false))
];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

This turns off the peer name verification of the server. Since the HELO sent by mediawiki respective pear is the same as the one of the mailserver, you get the error (as far as I understand..).

Reference on GitHub: [https://github.com/pear/Net_SMTP/blob/68420118ac8f9dfe5c4b8cac1bdb955efcd4be21/docs/guide.txt#id3 1.2   The Net_Socket Package]

on php documentary: https://www.php.net/manual/en/context.ssl.php#context.ssl.verify-peer-name</text>
      <sha1>jb8cjpwbmnuklm5zehe12sgatpnhi7w</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>8407</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402911</id>
      <parentid>5354920</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:37:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="49674" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

&lt;translate&gt;
== Basic overview == &lt;!--T:1--&gt;

=== File transfer === &lt;!--T:2--&gt;

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
Choose a method for transferring files:

&lt;!--T:4--&gt;
* [[w:Wget|wget]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
* Secure copy with [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html&lt;/tvar&gt; SCP] or [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:7--&gt;
* Using a [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] client.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:9--&gt;
* Some other method.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
===Preliminary=== &lt;!--T:11--&gt;

&lt;!--T:12--&gt;
Read {{&lt;tvar name=1&gt;git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE&lt;/tvar&gt;|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.

&lt;!--T:13--&gt;
# Check the requirements&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:14--&gt;
# Read the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;RELEASE-NOTES&lt;/tvar&gt; file&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:237--&gt;
# Read the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/tvar&gt; file&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:15--&gt;
# Back up existing files and the database&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:16--&gt;
# Unpack the new files&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:17--&gt;
# Upgrade extensions&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:18--&gt;
# Run the update script to check the database&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:19--&gt;
# Test the update&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:209--&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations

== Check requirements == &lt;!--T:20--&gt; 
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:21--&gt;
MediaWiki &lt;tvar name=ver&gt;{{MW stable branch number}}&lt;/tvar&gt; requires:
&lt;/translate&gt;

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:173--&gt;
* One of the following:
&lt;/translate&gt;
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:238--&gt; Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:241--&gt; This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:24--&gt;
If you are using PostgreSQL, please also read &lt;tvar name=upgrading&gt;{{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.

&lt;!--T:25--&gt;
For more information, please read the &lt;tvar name=req&gt;{{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=compat&gt;{{ll|Compatibility}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.

== Read the release notes == &lt;!--T:26--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[&lt;tvar name=gerrit&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit&lt;/tvar&gt;|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the &lt;tvar name=relnotes&gt;'''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}'''&lt;/tvar&gt; ([[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Release notes&lt;/tvar&gt;|wiki]]).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:239--&gt; You should also read the instructions in the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/tvar&gt; file.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Clear pending jobs == &lt;!--T:176--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:177--&gt; For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[&lt;tvar name=man&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue&lt;/tvar&gt;|job queue]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:178--&gt; Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:179--&gt; It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:180--&gt; Use &lt;tvar name=runJobs&gt;{{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Back up existing files and the database == &lt;!--T:29--&gt;

&lt;!--T:30--&gt;
:''Full instructions: &lt;tvar name=backingup&gt;{{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}&lt;/tvar&gt;''

&lt;!--T:31--&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[&lt;tvar name=backup&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki&lt;/tvar&gt;|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:

&lt;!--T:32--&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/translate&gt;
:* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:33--&gt; MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/translate&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:34--&gt; PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/translate&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/translate&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:36--&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:37--&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:38--&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.

== Unpack the new files == &lt;!--T:39--&gt;

=== Using a tarball package === &lt;!--T:40--&gt;

&lt;!--T:41--&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;#Back up existing files and the database&lt;/tvar&gt;|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:43--&gt; Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ==== &lt;!--T:44--&gt;

&lt;!--T:45--&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use &lt;tvar name=7zip&gt;[http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip]&lt;/tvar&gt; to extract the tarball on your local PC.

&lt;!--T:46--&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/translate&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;translate&gt;
==== Command line ==== &lt;!--T:47--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:48--&gt; You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:224--&gt; When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:49--&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/translate&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

&lt;translate&gt;
===Other files=== &lt;!--T:50--&gt;

&lt;!--T:51--&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:52--&gt; contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:53--&gt;
* The &lt;tvar name=code-img&gt;&lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; (or &lt;tvar name=code-upl&gt;&lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;tvar name=chmod&gt;&lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=chgrp&gt;&lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:54--&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;tvar name=dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:55--&gt;
* In case you use a [[&lt;tvar name=logo&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo&lt;/tvar&gt;|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;tvar name=dir1&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;tvar name=dir2&gt;&lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=dir3&gt;&lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;tvar name=logo2&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:555--&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[&lt;tvar name=logo3&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos&lt;/tvar&gt;|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;tvar name=logo4&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:56--&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;tvar name=skins-dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:57--&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:58--&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).

&lt;!--T:59--&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.

=== Using Git === &lt;!--T:60--&gt;

&lt;!--T:61--&gt;
If using &lt;tvar name=git&gt;{{ll|Download from Git|Git}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:62--&gt; You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:213--&gt; More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[&lt;tvar name=download&gt;Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries&lt;/tvar&gt;|Git download documentation]].&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Using patch === &lt;!--T:63--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:64--&gt; A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:260--&gt; You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:261--&gt; Manually download and extract the patch file from [&lt;tvar name=dumps&gt;https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/&lt;/tvar&gt; the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:262--&gt; Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:65--&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:66--&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:67--&gt;
# Use &lt;tvar name=patch&gt;&lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;tvar name=patch2&gt;&lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:68--&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;tvar name=dry&gt;&lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:69--&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.

=== Files remaining that may cause errors === &lt;!--T:70--&gt;

&lt;!--T:71--&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:72--&gt; If you are not using [[&lt;tvar name=profiling&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling&lt;/tvar&gt;|profiling]], but have a &lt;tvar name=stprof&gt;&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;tvar name=dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:73--&gt; Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;tvar name=stprof&gt;&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;tvar name=sample&gt;&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:74--&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;tvar name=chick&gt;&lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=nostalgia&gt;&lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=simple&gt;&lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=standard&gt;&lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directly in the &lt;tvar name=dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;tvar name=dir2&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See &lt;tvar name=discovery&gt;{{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for details.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:75--&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;tvar name=cologne&gt;&lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=modern&gt;&lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=monobook&gt;&lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=vector&gt;&lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directly in the &lt;tvar name=dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory are no longer present. See &lt;tvar name=discovery&gt;{{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for details.

== Upgrade extensions == &lt;!--T:76--&gt;

&lt;!--T:77--&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.

&lt;!--T:78--&gt;
Different [[&lt;tvar name=tar&gt;Special:MyLanguage/tarballs&lt;/tvar&gt;|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.

&lt;!--T:79--&gt;
[[&lt;tvar name=special&gt;Special:ExtensionDistributor&lt;/tvar&gt;|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:80--&gt; If you want a lot of extensions then [[&lt;tvar name=download&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git&lt;/tvar&gt;|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:199--&gt; If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php == &lt;!--T:151--&gt;

&lt;!--T:152--&gt;
If you use the same &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:

=== Skin registration === &lt;!--T:153--&gt;

&lt;!--T:154--&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.

&lt;!--T:155--&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:158--&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[&lt;tvar name=skinreg&gt;Manual:Extension registration&lt;/tvar&gt;|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.

=== Extension registration === &lt;!--T:159--&gt;

&lt;!--T:160--&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[&lt;tvar name=extreg&gt;Manual:Extension registration&lt;/tvar&gt;|extension registration]] system.

&lt;!--T:161--&gt;
Previously your &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:162--&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:163--&gt; Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:164--&gt; Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:165--&gt; Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Other variables === &lt;!--T:166--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:167--&gt; Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:168--&gt; Having them in &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:169--&gt; New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:170--&gt; We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:171--&gt; In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Run the update script == &lt;!--T:81--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:82--&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.

&lt;!--T:83--&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.

=== Command line === &lt;!--T:84--&gt;

&lt;!--T:85--&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like &lt;tvar name=putty&gt;[http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY]&lt;/tvar&gt; to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;tvar name=maint-dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory and execute the [[&lt;tvar name=script&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php&lt;/tvar&gt;|update script]]:&lt;/translate&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:86--&gt; On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:214--&gt; Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with &lt;tvar name=xampp&gt;{{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}&lt;/tvar&gt;):&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:215--&gt; First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:216--&gt; Then run &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to &lt;tvar name=2&gt;PHP.exe&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:217--&gt; The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:87--&gt; You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:255--&gt; After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:256--&gt; Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:257--&gt; When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:258--&gt; If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:259--&gt; If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:88--&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:150--&gt; If you use a [[&lt;tvar name=shared-db&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database&lt;/tvar&gt;|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;tvar name=doshared&gt;&lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ==== &lt;!--T:219--&gt;

&lt;!--T:220--&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.

&lt;!--T:221--&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/tvar&gt; are present&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:222--&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;wfLoadExtension&lt;/tvar&gt; vs. &lt;tvar name=2&gt;require_once&lt;/tvar&gt;)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:556--&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:557--&gt; If this causes &lt;tvar name=1&gt;update.php&lt;/tvar&gt; to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:558--&gt; If this does NOT cause &lt;tvar name=1&gt;update.php&lt;/tvar&gt; to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:223--&gt; Repeat until &lt;tvar name=1&gt;update.php&lt;/tvar&gt; works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ==== &lt;!--T:89--&gt;

&lt;!--T:90--&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:91--&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}}&lt;/tvar&gt; in your &lt;tvar name=3&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.

&lt;!--T:200--&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.

==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ==== &lt;!--T:92--&gt;

&lt;!--T:93--&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:94--&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.

&lt;!--T:95--&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:

&lt;!--T:96--&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:97--&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:98--&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php

&lt;!--T:99--&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error==== &lt;!--T:100--&gt;

&lt;!--T:101--&gt;
You may encounter the error:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:102--&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.&lt;/translate&gt; 
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:103--&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:104--&gt;
# Re-run &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;translate&gt;
===Web browser=== &lt;!--T:105--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:106--&gt;
: ''See also &lt;tvar name=update&gt;{{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt;''

&lt;!--T:107--&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.

&lt;!--T:108--&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:109--&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:559--&gt; For example, if your wiki is at &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, then navigate to &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:110--&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:111--&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; file and look for the key assigned to &lt;tvar name=upgkey&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.

&lt;!--T:112--&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[&lt;tvar name=shorturl&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL&lt;/tvar&gt;|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:113--&gt; If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
== Test the update == &lt;!--T:114--&gt;

&lt;!--T:115--&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:

&lt;!--T:116--&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit &lt;tvar name=version&gt;[[Special:Version]]&lt;/tvar&gt; and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.

== Remove leftovers from old installations == &lt;!--T:210--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:211--&gt; If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:212--&gt; It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Frequently asked questions == &lt;!--T:117--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;translate&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?=== &lt;!--T:118--&gt;

&lt;!--T:119--&gt;
If the only file you have modified is &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:120--&gt; Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{MW legacy branch number}}.0&lt;/tvar&gt; to &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{MW legacy release number}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:218--&gt; You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:121--&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.

&lt;!--T:122--&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as &lt;tvar name=diff&gt;[http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff]&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=patch&gt;[http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch]&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=meld&gt;[http://meldmerge.org/ Meld]&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=winmerge&gt;[http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge]&lt;/tvar&gt; may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.

&lt;!--T:123--&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:124--&gt; Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;translate&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?=== &lt;!--T:125--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:126--&gt; It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:560--&gt; If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 (&lt;tvar name=latin&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}}&lt;/tvar&gt; needs to be set to true in your &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for this to work).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:561--&gt; Next, run update.php, and then set the &lt;tvar name=legacy&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}}&lt;/tvar&gt; option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [&lt;tvar name=noc&gt;https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki&lt;/tvar&gt; settings page for enwiki] and some [[&lt;tvar name=wikitech&gt;wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade&lt;/tvar&gt;|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:562--&gt; You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:175--&gt; If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the &lt;tvar name=text&gt;{{ll|Manual:Text table|text}}&lt;/tvar&gt; table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:127--&gt; If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:225--&gt; The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:226--&gt; If you have trouble believing this, read [[&lt;tvar name=mail&gt;mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html&lt;/tvar&gt;|this mailing list post]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:227--&gt; However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:228--&gt; You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:229--&gt; Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:230--&gt; This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:240--&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.

===Should I back up first?=== &lt;!--T:129--&gt;

&lt;!--T:130--&gt;
Short answer: Yes.

&lt;!--T:131--&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration. 
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:132--&gt; An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:231--&gt; A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:232--&gt; In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:233--&gt; However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:234--&gt; Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:133--&gt; Recovery is often complex.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:235--&gt; Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:236--&gt; A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;phab:maniphest/task/create/&lt;/tvar&gt;|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?=== &lt;!--T:134--&gt;

&lt;!--T:135--&gt;
Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; is largely backward compatible. Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Release notes&lt;/tvar&gt;|release notes]].

===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?=== &lt;!--T:136--&gt;

&lt;!--T:137--&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.

&lt;!--T:138--&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.

&lt;!--T:139--&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:

&lt;!--T:140--&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:201--&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{wg|Logo}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{wg|Logos}}&lt;/tvar&gt; settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:202--&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:203--&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:204--&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in &lt;tvar name=ReadOnly&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}&lt;/tvar&gt;. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:205--&gt;
# Run the [[&lt;tvar name=upg&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line&lt;/tvar&gt;|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:206--&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:207--&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.

===Why upgrade?=== &lt;!--T:141--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
:''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:142--&gt; Subscribe to &lt;tvar name=announce&gt;[[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]]&lt;/tvar&gt; to be notified of new releases.&lt;/translate&gt;''

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:181--&gt;
Because it's [[&lt;tvar name=upgrade&gt;#How hard is it to upgrade?&lt;/tvar&gt;|usually easy enough]], [[&lt;tvar name=steps&gt;#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?&lt;/tvar&gt;|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[&lt;tvar name=updater&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater&lt;/tvar&gt;|via web]].

&lt;!--T:143--&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see &lt;tvar name=lifecycle&gt;{{ll|Version lifecycle}}&lt;/tvar&gt;). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!

&lt;!--T:144--&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:

&lt;!--T:145--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4&lt;/tvar&gt;|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:182--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, an [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision&lt;/tvar&gt;|undo button]] is available.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:183--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling&lt;/tvar&gt;|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:184--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, you can [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page&lt;/tvar&gt;|rename]] (move) files.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:185--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, you can [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects&lt;/tvar&gt;|fix double redirects]] automatically.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:186--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|InstantCommons}}&lt;/tvar&gt; is available.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:187--&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|ResourceLoader}}&lt;/tvar&gt; optimizes pageload speeds a lot.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:188--&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting&lt;/tvar&gt;|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:189--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[&lt;tvar name=3&gt;m:Help:Special_page#Logs&lt;/tvar&gt;|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:190--&gt;
* In &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}&lt;/tvar&gt; the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:191--&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[&lt;tvar name=meta-diff&gt;m:Help:Diff&lt;/tvar&gt;|diffs]] are more readable.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:192--&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:193--&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:194--&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:195--&gt;
* Since [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25&lt;/tvar&gt;|1.25]], [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes&lt;/tvar&gt;|enhanced recent changes are available]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:196--&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:197--&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:242--&gt; InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:243--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:198--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:244--&gt; Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:245--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, the blocked users cannot change their email.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:246--&gt; Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:247--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, some extensions are now part of the core, like &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=3&gt;{{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=4&gt;{{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:248--&gt; The &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Skin:Timeless}}&lt;/tvar&gt; was introduced.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:249--&gt; Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:250--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, MediaWiki supports over &lt;tvar name=2&gt;350&lt;/tvar&gt; languages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:251--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:252--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, more extensions part of the core: &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}}&lt;/tvar&gt; (for Lua modules), &lt;tvar name=3&gt;{{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=pageimages&gt;{{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:253--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}}&lt;/tvar&gt; (a stable long-term support release), &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}}&lt;/tvar&gt; is part of the core.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:254--&gt; The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:147--&gt;
Also, in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}}&lt;/tvar&gt; we started [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated&lt;/tvar&gt;|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
== See also == &lt;!--T:148--&gt;

&lt;!--T:149--&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [&lt;tvar name=sabino&gt;http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html&lt;/tvar&gt; more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:172--&gt; if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>s98iu5a4qmn57zu7256u81q9hyd9u30</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402912</id>
      <parentid>5402911</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:38:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="49752" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

&lt;translate&gt;
== Basic overview == &lt;!--T:1--&gt;

=== File transfer === &lt;!--T:2--&gt;

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
Choose a method for transferring files:

&lt;!--T:4--&gt;
* [[w:Wget|wget]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
* Secure copy with [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html&lt;/tvar&gt; SCP] or [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:7--&gt;
* Using a [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] client.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:9--&gt;
* Some other method.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
===Preliminary=== &lt;!--T:11--&gt;

&lt;!--T:12--&gt;
Read {{&lt;tvar name=1&gt;git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE&lt;/tvar&gt;|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.

&lt;!--T:13--&gt;
# Check the requirements&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:14--&gt;
# Read the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;RELEASE-NOTES&lt;/tvar&gt; file&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:237--&gt;
# Read the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/tvar&gt; file&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:15--&gt;
# Back up existing files and the database&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:16--&gt;
# Unpack the new files&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:17--&gt;
# Upgrade extensions&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:18--&gt;
# Run the update script to check the database&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:19--&gt;
# Test the update&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:209--&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations

== Check requirements == &lt;!--T:20--&gt; 
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:21--&gt;
MediaWiki &lt;tvar name=ver&gt;{{MW stable branch number}}&lt;/tvar&gt; requires:
&lt;/translate&gt;

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:173--&gt;
* One of the following:
&lt;/translate&gt;
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:238--&gt; Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:241--&gt; This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:24--&gt;
If you are using PostgreSQL, please also read &lt;tvar name=upgrading&gt;{{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.

&lt;!--T:25--&gt;
For more information, please read the &lt;tvar name=req&gt;{{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=compat&gt;{{ll|Compatibility}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.

== Read the release notes == &lt;!--T:26--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[&lt;tvar name=gerrit&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit&lt;/tvar&gt;|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the &lt;tvar name=relnotes&gt;'''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}'''&lt;/tvar&gt; ([[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Release notes&lt;/tvar&gt;|wiki]]).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:239--&gt; You should also read the instructions in the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/tvar&gt; file.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Clear pending jobs == &lt;!--T:176--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:177--&gt; For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[&lt;tvar name=man&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue&lt;/tvar&gt;|job queue]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:178--&gt; Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:179--&gt; It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:180--&gt; Use &lt;tvar name=runJobs&gt;{{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Back up existing files and the database == &lt;!--T:29--&gt;

&lt;!--T:30--&gt;
:''Full instructions: &lt;tvar name=backingup&gt;{{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}&lt;/tvar&gt;''

&lt;!--T:31--&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[&lt;tvar name=backup&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki&lt;/tvar&gt;|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:

&lt;!--T:32--&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/translate&gt;
:* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:33--&gt; MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/translate&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:34--&gt; PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/translate&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/translate&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:36--&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:37--&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:38--&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.

== Unpack the new files == &lt;!--T:39--&gt;

=== Using a tarball package === &lt;!--T:40--&gt;

&lt;!--T:41--&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;#Back up existing files and the database&lt;/tvar&gt;|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:43--&gt; Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ==== &lt;!--T:44--&gt;

&lt;!--T:45--&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use &lt;tvar name=7zip&gt;[http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip]&lt;/tvar&gt; to extract the tarball on your local PC.

&lt;!--T:46--&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/translate&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;translate&gt;
==== Command line ==== &lt;!--T:47--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:48--&gt; You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:224--&gt; When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:49--&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/translate&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

&lt;translate&gt;
===Other files=== &lt;!--T:50--&gt;

&lt;!--T:51--&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:52--&gt; contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:53--&gt;
* The &lt;tvar name=code-img&gt;&lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; (or &lt;tvar name=code-upl&gt;&lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;tvar name=chmod&gt;&lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=chgrp&gt;&lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:54--&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;tvar name=dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:55--&gt;
* In case you use a [[&lt;tvar name=logo&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo&lt;/tvar&gt;|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;tvar name=dir1&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;tvar name=dir2&gt;&lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=dir3&gt;&lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;tvar name=logo2&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:555--&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[&lt;tvar name=logo3&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos&lt;/tvar&gt;|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;tvar name=logo4&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:56--&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;tvar name=skins-dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:57--&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:58--&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).

&lt;!--T:59--&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.

=== Using Git === &lt;!--T:60--&gt;

&lt;!--T:61--&gt;
If using &lt;tvar name=git&gt;{{ll|Download from Git|Git}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:62--&gt; You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:213--&gt; More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[&lt;tvar name=download&gt;Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries&lt;/tvar&gt;|Git download documentation]].&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Using patch === &lt;!--T:63--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:64--&gt; A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:260--&gt; You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:261--&gt; Manually download and extract the patch file from [&lt;tvar name=dumps&gt;https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/&lt;/tvar&gt; the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:262--&gt; Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:65--&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:66--&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:67--&gt;
# Use &lt;tvar name=patch&gt;&lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;tvar name=patch2&gt;&lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:68--&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;tvar name=dry&gt;&lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:69--&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.

=== Files remaining that may cause errors === &lt;!--T:70--&gt;

&lt;!--T:71--&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:72--&gt; If you are not using [[&lt;tvar name=profiling&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling&lt;/tvar&gt;|profiling]], but have a &lt;tvar name=stprof&gt;&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;tvar name=dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:73--&gt; Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;tvar name=stprof&gt;&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;tvar name=sample&gt;&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:74--&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;tvar name=chick&gt;&lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=nostalgia&gt;&lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=simple&gt;&lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=standard&gt;&lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directly in the &lt;tvar name=dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;tvar name=dir2&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See &lt;tvar name=discovery&gt;{{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for details.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:75--&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;tvar name=cologne&gt;&lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=modern&gt;&lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=monobook&gt;&lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=vector&gt;&lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directly in the &lt;tvar name=dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory are no longer present. See &lt;tvar name=discovery&gt;{{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for details.

== Upgrade extensions == &lt;!--T:76--&gt;

&lt;!--T:77--&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.

&lt;!--T:78--&gt;
Different [[&lt;tvar name=tar&gt;Special:MyLanguage/tarballs&lt;/tvar&gt;|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.

&lt;!--T:79--&gt;
[[&lt;tvar name=special&gt;Special:ExtensionDistributor&lt;/tvar&gt;|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:80--&gt; If you want a lot of extensions then [[&lt;tvar name=download&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git&lt;/tvar&gt;|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:199--&gt; If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php == &lt;!--T:151--&gt;

&lt;!--T:152--&gt;
If you use the same &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:

=== Skin registration === &lt;!--T:153--&gt;

&lt;!--T:154--&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.

&lt;!--T:155--&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:158--&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[&lt;tvar name=skinreg&gt;Manual:Extension registration&lt;/tvar&gt;|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.

=== Extension registration === &lt;!--T:159--&gt;

&lt;!--T:160--&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[&lt;tvar name=extreg&gt;Manual:Extension registration&lt;/tvar&gt;|extension registration]] system.

&lt;!--T:161--&gt;
Previously your &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:162--&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:163--&gt; Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:164--&gt; Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:165--&gt; Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Other variables === &lt;!--T:166--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:167--&gt; Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:168--&gt; Having them in &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:169--&gt; New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:170--&gt; We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:171--&gt; In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Run the update script == &lt;!--T:81--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:82--&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.

&lt;!--T:83--&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.

=== Command line === &lt;!--T:84--&gt;

&lt;!--T:85--&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like &lt;tvar name=putty&gt;[http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY]&lt;/tvar&gt; to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;tvar name=maint-dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory and execute the [[&lt;tvar name=script&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php&lt;/tvar&gt;|update script]]:&lt;/translate&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:86--&gt; On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:214--&gt; Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with &lt;tvar name=xampp&gt;{{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}&lt;/tvar&gt;):&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:215--&gt; First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:216--&gt; Then run &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to &lt;tvar name=2&gt;PHP.exe&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:217--&gt; The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:87--&gt; You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:255--&gt; After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:256--&gt; Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:257--&gt; When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:258--&gt; If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:259--&gt; If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:88--&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:150--&gt; If you use a [[&lt;tvar name=shared-db&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database&lt;/tvar&gt;|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;tvar name=doshared&gt;&lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ==== &lt;!--T:219--&gt;

&lt;!--T:220--&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.

&lt;!--T:221--&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/tvar&gt; are present&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:222--&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;wfLoadExtension&lt;/tvar&gt; vs. &lt;tvar name=2&gt;require_once&lt;/tvar&gt;)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:556--&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:557--&gt; If this causes &lt;tvar name=1&gt;update.php&lt;/tvar&gt; to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:558--&gt; If this does NOT cause &lt;tvar name=1&gt;update.php&lt;/tvar&gt; to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:223--&gt; Repeat until &lt;tvar name=1&gt;update.php&lt;/tvar&gt; works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ==== &lt;!--T:89--&gt;

&lt;!--T:90--&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:91--&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}}&lt;/tvar&gt; in your &lt;tvar name=3&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.

&lt;!--T:200--&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.

==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ==== &lt;!--T:92--&gt;

&lt;!--T:93--&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:94--&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.

&lt;!--T:95--&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:

&lt;!--T:96--&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:97--&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:98--&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php

&lt;!--T:99--&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error==== &lt;!--T:100--&gt;

&lt;!--T:101--&gt;
You may encounter the error:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:102--&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.&lt;/translate&gt; 
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:103--&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:104--&gt;
# Re-run &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;translate&gt;
===Web browser=== &lt;!--T:105--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:106--&gt;
: ''See also &lt;tvar name=update&gt;{{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt;''

&lt;!--T:107--&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.

&lt;!--T:108--&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:109--&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:559--&gt; For example, if your wiki is at &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, then navigate to &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:110--&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:111--&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; file and look for the key assigned to &lt;tvar name=upgkey&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.

&lt;!--T:112--&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[&lt;tvar name=shorturl&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL&lt;/tvar&gt;|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:113--&gt; If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
== Test the update == &lt;!--T:114--&gt;

&lt;!--T:115--&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:

&lt;!--T:116--&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit &lt;tvar name=version&gt;[[Special:Version]]&lt;/tvar&gt; and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.

== Remove leftovers from old installations == &lt;!--T:210--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:211--&gt; If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:212--&gt; It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Frequently asked questions == &lt;!--T:117--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;translate&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?=== &lt;!--T:118--&gt;

&lt;!--T:119--&gt;
If the only file you have modified is &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:120--&gt; Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{MW legacy branch number}}.0&lt;/tvar&gt; to &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{MW legacy release number}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:218--&gt; You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:121--&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.

&lt;!--T:122--&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as &lt;tvar name=diff&gt;[http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff]&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=patch&gt;[http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch]&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=meld&gt;[http://meldmerge.org/ Meld]&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=winmerge&gt;[http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge]&lt;/tvar&gt; may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.

&lt;!--T:123--&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:124--&gt; Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;translate&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?=== &lt;!--T:125--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:126--&gt; It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:560--&gt; If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 (&lt;tvar name=latin&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}}&lt;/tvar&gt; needs to be set to true in your &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for this to work).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:561--&gt; Next, run update.php, and then set the &lt;tvar name=legacy&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}}&lt;/tvar&gt; option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [&lt;tvar name=noc&gt;https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki&lt;/tvar&gt; settings page for enwiki] and some [[&lt;tvar name=wikitech&gt;wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade&lt;/tvar&gt;|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:562--&gt; You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:175--&gt; If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the &lt;tvar name=text&gt;{{ll|Manual:Text table|text}}&lt;/tvar&gt; table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:127--&gt; If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:225--&gt; The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:226--&gt; If you have trouble believing this, read [[&lt;tvar name=mail&gt;mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html&lt;/tvar&gt;|this mailing list post]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:227--&gt; However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:228--&gt; You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:229--&gt; Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:230--&gt; This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:240--&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.

===Should I back up first?=== &lt;!--T:129--&gt;

&lt;!--T:130--&gt;
Short answer: Yes.

&lt;!--T:131--&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration. 
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:132--&gt; An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:231--&gt; A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:232--&gt; In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:233--&gt; However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:234--&gt; Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:133--&gt; Recovery is often complex.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:235--&gt; Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:236--&gt; A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;phab:maniphest/task/create/&lt;/tvar&gt;|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?=== &lt;!--T:134--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:135--&gt; Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; is largely backward compatible.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;Changes which break &lt;tvar name=1&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/tvar&gt; compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Release notes&lt;/tvar&gt;|release notes]].&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?=== &lt;!--T:136--&gt;

&lt;!--T:137--&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.

&lt;!--T:138--&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.

&lt;!--T:139--&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:

&lt;!--T:140--&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:201--&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{wg|Logo}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{wg|Logos}}&lt;/tvar&gt; settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:202--&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:203--&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:204--&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in &lt;tvar name=ReadOnly&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}&lt;/tvar&gt;. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:205--&gt;
# Run the [[&lt;tvar name=upg&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line&lt;/tvar&gt;|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:206--&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:207--&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.

===Why upgrade?=== &lt;!--T:141--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
:''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:142--&gt; Subscribe to &lt;tvar name=announce&gt;[[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]]&lt;/tvar&gt; to be notified of new releases.&lt;/translate&gt;''

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:181--&gt;
Because it's [[&lt;tvar name=upgrade&gt;#How hard is it to upgrade?&lt;/tvar&gt;|usually easy enough]], [[&lt;tvar name=steps&gt;#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?&lt;/tvar&gt;|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[&lt;tvar name=updater&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater&lt;/tvar&gt;|via web]].

&lt;!--T:143--&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see &lt;tvar name=lifecycle&gt;{{ll|Version lifecycle}}&lt;/tvar&gt;). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!

&lt;!--T:144--&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:

&lt;!--T:145--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4&lt;/tvar&gt;|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:182--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, an [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision&lt;/tvar&gt;|undo button]] is available.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:183--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling&lt;/tvar&gt;|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:184--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, you can [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page&lt;/tvar&gt;|rename]] (move) files.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:185--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, you can [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects&lt;/tvar&gt;|fix double redirects]] automatically.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:186--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|InstantCommons}}&lt;/tvar&gt; is available.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:187--&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|ResourceLoader}}&lt;/tvar&gt; optimizes pageload speeds a lot.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:188--&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting&lt;/tvar&gt;|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:189--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[&lt;tvar name=3&gt;m:Help:Special_page#Logs&lt;/tvar&gt;|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:190--&gt;
* In &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}&lt;/tvar&gt; the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:191--&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[&lt;tvar name=meta-diff&gt;m:Help:Diff&lt;/tvar&gt;|diffs]] are more readable.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:192--&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:193--&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:194--&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:195--&gt;
* Since [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25&lt;/tvar&gt;|1.25]], [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes&lt;/tvar&gt;|enhanced recent changes are available]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:196--&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:197--&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:242--&gt; InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:243--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:198--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:244--&gt; Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:245--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, the blocked users cannot change their email.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:246--&gt; Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:247--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, some extensions are now part of the core, like &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=3&gt;{{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=4&gt;{{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:248--&gt; The &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Skin:Timeless}}&lt;/tvar&gt; was introduced.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:249--&gt; Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:250--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, MediaWiki supports over &lt;tvar name=2&gt;350&lt;/tvar&gt; languages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:251--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:252--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, more extensions part of the core: &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}}&lt;/tvar&gt; (for Lua modules), &lt;tvar name=3&gt;{{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=pageimages&gt;{{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:253--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}}&lt;/tvar&gt; (a stable long-term support release), &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}}&lt;/tvar&gt; is part of the core.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:254--&gt; The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:147--&gt;
Also, in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}}&lt;/tvar&gt; we started [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated&lt;/tvar&gt;|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
== See also == &lt;!--T:148--&gt;

&lt;!--T:149--&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [&lt;tvar name=sabino&gt;http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html&lt;/tvar&gt; more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:172--&gt; if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>o1scduzb1ybjp0wrp1ap1u9q9j12kz6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402913</id>
      <parentid>5402912</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:39:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Marked this version for translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="49765" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

&lt;translate&gt;
== Basic overview == &lt;!--T:1--&gt;

=== File transfer === &lt;!--T:2--&gt;

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
Choose a method for transferring files:

&lt;!--T:4--&gt;
* [[w:Wget|wget]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
* Secure copy with [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html&lt;/tvar&gt; SCP] or [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:7--&gt;
* Using a [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] client.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:9--&gt;
* Some other method.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
===Preliminary=== &lt;!--T:11--&gt;

&lt;!--T:12--&gt;
Read {{&lt;tvar name=1&gt;git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE&lt;/tvar&gt;|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.

&lt;!--T:13--&gt;
# Check the requirements&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:14--&gt;
# Read the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;RELEASE-NOTES&lt;/tvar&gt; file&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:237--&gt;
# Read the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/tvar&gt; file&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:15--&gt;
# Back up existing files and the database&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:16--&gt;
# Unpack the new files&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:17--&gt;
# Upgrade extensions&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:18--&gt;
# Run the update script to check the database&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:19--&gt;
# Test the update&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:209--&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations

== Check requirements == &lt;!--T:20--&gt; 
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:21--&gt;
MediaWiki &lt;tvar name=ver&gt;{{MW stable branch number}}&lt;/tvar&gt; requires:
&lt;/translate&gt;

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:173--&gt;
* One of the following:
&lt;/translate&gt;
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:238--&gt; Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:241--&gt; This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:24--&gt;
If you are using PostgreSQL, please also read &lt;tvar name=upgrading&gt;{{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.

&lt;!--T:25--&gt;
For more information, please read the &lt;tvar name=req&gt;{{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=compat&gt;{{ll|Compatibility}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.

== Read the release notes == &lt;!--T:26--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[&lt;tvar name=gerrit&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit&lt;/tvar&gt;|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the &lt;tvar name=relnotes&gt;'''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}'''&lt;/tvar&gt; ([[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Release notes&lt;/tvar&gt;|wiki]]).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:239--&gt; You should also read the instructions in the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/tvar&gt; file.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Clear pending jobs == &lt;!--T:176--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:177--&gt; For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[&lt;tvar name=man&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue&lt;/tvar&gt;|job queue]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:178--&gt; Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:179--&gt; It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:180--&gt; Use &lt;tvar name=runJobs&gt;{{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Back up existing files and the database == &lt;!--T:29--&gt;

&lt;!--T:30--&gt;
:''Full instructions: &lt;tvar name=backingup&gt;{{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}&lt;/tvar&gt;''

&lt;!--T:31--&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[&lt;tvar name=backup&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki&lt;/tvar&gt;|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:

&lt;!--T:32--&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/translate&gt;
:* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:33--&gt; MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/translate&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:34--&gt; PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/translate&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/translate&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:36--&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:37--&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:38--&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.

== Unpack the new files == &lt;!--T:39--&gt;

=== Using a tarball package === &lt;!--T:40--&gt;

&lt;!--T:41--&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;#Back up existing files and the database&lt;/tvar&gt;|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:43--&gt; Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ==== &lt;!--T:44--&gt;

&lt;!--T:45--&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use &lt;tvar name=7zip&gt;[http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip]&lt;/tvar&gt; to extract the tarball on your local PC.

&lt;!--T:46--&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/translate&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;translate&gt;
==== Command line ==== &lt;!--T:47--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:48--&gt; You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:224--&gt; When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:49--&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/translate&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

&lt;translate&gt;
===Other files=== &lt;!--T:50--&gt;

&lt;!--T:51--&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:52--&gt; contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:53--&gt;
* The &lt;tvar name=code-img&gt;&lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; (or &lt;tvar name=code-upl&gt;&lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;tvar name=chmod&gt;&lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=chgrp&gt;&lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:54--&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;tvar name=dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:55--&gt;
* In case you use a [[&lt;tvar name=logo&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo&lt;/tvar&gt;|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;tvar name=dir1&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;tvar name=dir2&gt;&lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=dir3&gt;&lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;tvar name=logo2&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:555--&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[&lt;tvar name=logo3&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos&lt;/tvar&gt;|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;tvar name=logo4&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:56--&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;tvar name=skins-dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:57--&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:58--&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).

&lt;!--T:59--&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.

=== Using Git === &lt;!--T:60--&gt;

&lt;!--T:61--&gt;
If using &lt;tvar name=git&gt;{{ll|Download from Git|Git}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:62--&gt; You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:213--&gt; More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[&lt;tvar name=download&gt;Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries&lt;/tvar&gt;|Git download documentation]].&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Using patch === &lt;!--T:63--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:64--&gt; A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:260--&gt; You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:261--&gt; Manually download and extract the patch file from [&lt;tvar name=dumps&gt;https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/&lt;/tvar&gt; the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:262--&gt; Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:65--&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:66--&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:67--&gt;
# Use &lt;tvar name=patch&gt;&lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;tvar name=patch2&gt;&lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:68--&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;tvar name=dry&gt;&lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:69--&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.

=== Files remaining that may cause errors === &lt;!--T:70--&gt;

&lt;!--T:71--&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:72--&gt; If you are not using [[&lt;tvar name=profiling&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling&lt;/tvar&gt;|profiling]], but have a &lt;tvar name=stprof&gt;&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;tvar name=dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:73--&gt; Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;tvar name=stprof&gt;&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;tvar name=sample&gt;&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:74--&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;tvar name=chick&gt;&lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=nostalgia&gt;&lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=simple&gt;&lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=standard&gt;&lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directly in the &lt;tvar name=dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;tvar name=dir2&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See &lt;tvar name=discovery&gt;{{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for details.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:75--&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;tvar name=cologne&gt;&lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=modern&gt;&lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=monobook&gt;&lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=vector&gt;&lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directly in the &lt;tvar name=dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory are no longer present. See &lt;tvar name=discovery&gt;{{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for details.

== Upgrade extensions == &lt;!--T:76--&gt;

&lt;!--T:77--&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.

&lt;!--T:78--&gt;
Different [[&lt;tvar name=tar&gt;Special:MyLanguage/tarballs&lt;/tvar&gt;|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.

&lt;!--T:79--&gt;
[[&lt;tvar name=special&gt;Special:ExtensionDistributor&lt;/tvar&gt;|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:80--&gt; If you want a lot of extensions then [[&lt;tvar name=download&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git&lt;/tvar&gt;|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:199--&gt; If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php == &lt;!--T:151--&gt;

&lt;!--T:152--&gt;
If you use the same &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:

=== Skin registration === &lt;!--T:153--&gt;

&lt;!--T:154--&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.

&lt;!--T:155--&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:158--&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[&lt;tvar name=skinreg&gt;Manual:Extension registration&lt;/tvar&gt;|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.

=== Extension registration === &lt;!--T:159--&gt;

&lt;!--T:160--&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[&lt;tvar name=extreg&gt;Manual:Extension registration&lt;/tvar&gt;|extension registration]] system.

&lt;!--T:161--&gt;
Previously your &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:162--&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:163--&gt; Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:164--&gt; Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:165--&gt; Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Other variables === &lt;!--T:166--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:167--&gt; Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:168--&gt; Having them in &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:169--&gt; New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:170--&gt; We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:171--&gt; In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Run the update script == &lt;!--T:81--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:82--&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.

&lt;!--T:83--&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.

=== Command line === &lt;!--T:84--&gt;

&lt;!--T:85--&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like &lt;tvar name=putty&gt;[http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY]&lt;/tvar&gt; to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;tvar name=maint-dir&gt;&lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory and execute the [[&lt;tvar name=script&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php&lt;/tvar&gt;|update script]]:&lt;/translate&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:86--&gt; On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:214--&gt; Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with &lt;tvar name=xampp&gt;{{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}&lt;/tvar&gt;):&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:215--&gt; First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:216--&gt; Then run &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to &lt;tvar name=2&gt;PHP.exe&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:217--&gt; The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:87--&gt; You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:255--&gt; After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:256--&gt; Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:257--&gt; When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:258--&gt; If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:259--&gt; If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:88--&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:150--&gt; If you use a [[&lt;tvar name=shared-db&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database&lt;/tvar&gt;|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;tvar name=doshared&gt;&lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ==== &lt;!--T:219--&gt;

&lt;!--T:220--&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.

&lt;!--T:221--&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/tvar&gt; are present&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:222--&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;wfLoadExtension&lt;/tvar&gt; vs. &lt;tvar name=2&gt;require_once&lt;/tvar&gt;)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:556--&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:557--&gt; If this causes &lt;tvar name=1&gt;update.php&lt;/tvar&gt; to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:558--&gt; If this does NOT cause &lt;tvar name=1&gt;update.php&lt;/tvar&gt; to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:223--&gt; Repeat until &lt;tvar name=1&gt;update.php&lt;/tvar&gt; works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ==== &lt;!--T:89--&gt;

&lt;!--T:90--&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:91--&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}}&lt;/tvar&gt; in your &lt;tvar name=3&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.

&lt;!--T:200--&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.

==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ==== &lt;!--T:92--&gt;

&lt;!--T:93--&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:94--&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.

&lt;!--T:95--&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:

&lt;!--T:96--&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:97--&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:98--&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php

&lt;!--T:99--&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error==== &lt;!--T:100--&gt;

&lt;!--T:101--&gt;
You may encounter the error:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:102--&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.&lt;/translate&gt; 
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:103--&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:104--&gt;
# Re-run &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;translate&gt;
===Web browser=== &lt;!--T:105--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:106--&gt;
: ''See also &lt;tvar name=update&gt;{{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt;''

&lt;!--T:107--&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.

&lt;!--T:108--&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:109--&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:559--&gt; For example, if your wiki is at &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, then navigate to &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:110--&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:111--&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; file and look for the key assigned to &lt;tvar name=upgkey&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.

&lt;!--T:112--&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[&lt;tvar name=shorturl&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL&lt;/tvar&gt;|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:113--&gt; If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
== Test the update == &lt;!--T:114--&gt;

&lt;!--T:115--&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:

&lt;!--T:116--&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit &lt;tvar name=version&gt;[[Special:Version]]&lt;/tvar&gt; and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.

== Remove leftovers from old installations == &lt;!--T:210--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:211--&gt; If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:212--&gt; It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Frequently asked questions == &lt;!--T:117--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;translate&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?=== &lt;!--T:118--&gt;

&lt;!--T:119--&gt;
If the only file you have modified is &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:120--&gt; Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{MW legacy branch number}}.0&lt;/tvar&gt; to &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{MW legacy release number}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:218--&gt; You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:121--&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.

&lt;!--T:122--&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as &lt;tvar name=diff&gt;[http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff]&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=patch&gt;[http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch]&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=meld&gt;[http://meldmerge.org/ Meld]&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=winmerge&gt;[http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge]&lt;/tvar&gt; may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.

&lt;!--T:123--&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:124--&gt; Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;translate&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?=== &lt;!--T:125--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:126--&gt; It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:560--&gt; If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 (&lt;tvar name=latin&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}}&lt;/tvar&gt; needs to be set to true in your &lt;tvar name=localsettings&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for this to work).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:561--&gt; Next, run update.php, and then set the &lt;tvar name=legacy&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}}&lt;/tvar&gt; option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [&lt;tvar name=noc&gt;https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki&lt;/tvar&gt; settings page for enwiki] and some [[&lt;tvar name=wikitech&gt;wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade&lt;/tvar&gt;|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:562--&gt; You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:175--&gt; If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the &lt;tvar name=text&gt;{{ll|Manual:Text table|text}}&lt;/tvar&gt; table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:127--&gt; If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:225--&gt; The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:226--&gt; If you have trouble believing this, read [[&lt;tvar name=mail&gt;mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html&lt;/tvar&gt;|this mailing list post]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:227--&gt; However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:228--&gt; You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:229--&gt; Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:230--&gt; This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:240--&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.

===Should I back up first?=== &lt;!--T:129--&gt;

&lt;!--T:130--&gt;
Short answer: Yes.

&lt;!--T:131--&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration. 
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:132--&gt; An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:231--&gt; A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:232--&gt; In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:233--&gt; However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:234--&gt; Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:133--&gt; Recovery is often complex.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:235--&gt; Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:236--&gt; A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;phab:maniphest/task/create/&lt;/tvar&gt;|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?=== &lt;!--T:134--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:135--&gt; Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; is largely backward compatible.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:563--&gt; Changes which break &lt;tvar name=1&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/tvar&gt; compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Release notes&lt;/tvar&gt;|release notes]].&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?=== &lt;!--T:136--&gt;

&lt;!--T:137--&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.

&lt;!--T:138--&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.

&lt;!--T:139--&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:

&lt;!--T:140--&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:201--&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{wg|Logo}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{wg|Logos}}&lt;/tvar&gt; settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:202--&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:203--&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:204--&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in &lt;tvar name=ReadOnly&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}&lt;/tvar&gt;. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:205--&gt;
# Run the [[&lt;tvar name=upg&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line&lt;/tvar&gt;|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:206--&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:207--&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.

===Why upgrade?=== &lt;!--T:141--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
:''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:142--&gt; Subscribe to &lt;tvar name=announce&gt;[[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]]&lt;/tvar&gt; to be notified of new releases.&lt;/translate&gt;''

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:181--&gt;
Because it's [[&lt;tvar name=upgrade&gt;#How hard is it to upgrade?&lt;/tvar&gt;|usually easy enough]], [[&lt;tvar name=steps&gt;#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?&lt;/tvar&gt;|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[&lt;tvar name=updater&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater&lt;/tvar&gt;|via web]].

&lt;!--T:143--&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see &lt;tvar name=lifecycle&gt;{{ll|Version lifecycle}}&lt;/tvar&gt;). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!

&lt;!--T:144--&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:

&lt;!--T:145--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4&lt;/tvar&gt;|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:182--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, an [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision&lt;/tvar&gt;|undo button]] is available.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:183--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling&lt;/tvar&gt;|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:184--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, you can [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page&lt;/tvar&gt;|rename]] (move) files.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:185--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, you can [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects&lt;/tvar&gt;|fix double redirects]] automatically.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:186--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|InstantCommons}}&lt;/tvar&gt; is available.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:187--&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|ResourceLoader}}&lt;/tvar&gt; optimizes pageload speeds a lot.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:188--&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting&lt;/tvar&gt;|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:189--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[&lt;tvar name=3&gt;m:Help:Special_page#Logs&lt;/tvar&gt;|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:190--&gt;
* In &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}&lt;/tvar&gt; the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:191--&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[&lt;tvar name=meta-diff&gt;m:Help:Diff&lt;/tvar&gt;|diffs]] are more readable.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:192--&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:193--&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:194--&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:195--&gt;
* Since [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25&lt;/tvar&gt;|1.25]], [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes&lt;/tvar&gt;|enhanced recent changes are available]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:196--&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:197--&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:242--&gt; InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:243--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:198--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:244--&gt; Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:245--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, the blocked users cannot change their email.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:246--&gt; Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:247--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, some extensions are now part of the core, like &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=3&gt;{{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=4&gt;{{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:248--&gt; The &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Skin:Timeless}}&lt;/tvar&gt; was introduced.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:249--&gt; Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:250--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, MediaWiki supports over &lt;tvar name=2&gt;350&lt;/tvar&gt; languages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:251--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:252--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, more extensions part of the core: &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}}&lt;/tvar&gt; (for Lua modules), &lt;tvar name=3&gt;{{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=pageimages&gt;{{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:253--&gt;
* Since &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}}&lt;/tvar&gt; (a stable long-term support release), &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}}&lt;/tvar&gt; is part of the core.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:254--&gt; The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:147--&gt;
Also, in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}}&lt;/tvar&gt; we started [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated&lt;/tvar&gt;|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
== See also == &lt;!--T:148--&gt;

&lt;!--T:149--&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [&lt;tvar name=sabino&gt;http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html&lt;/tvar&gt; more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:172--&gt; if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>ljecncusjm4w9lp4ill5yq3elndx3c4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>8409</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402924</id>
      <parentid>5384464</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="42470" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Übersicht ==

=== Dateiübertragung ===

Eine Methode zur Übertragung der Dateien auswählen:

* [[w:de:Wget|wget]]
* Secure copy (sicheres Kopieren) mit [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] oder [[w:de:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:de:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Einen [[w:de:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]]-Client verwenden.
* Möglicherweise bietet dir dein Provider einen Dateimanager als webbasierte Benutzeroberfläche an.
* Weitere Methoden: Es gibt eine englischsprachige List von denen auf [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

===Vorbereitung===

Lese die {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=UPGRADE-Textdatei, die in MediaWiki enthalten ist}}.

# Überprüfe die Voraussetzungen
# Lese die RELEASE-NOTES-Datei
# Lese die UPGRADE-Datei
# Sichere die vorhandenen Dateien und die Datenbank
# Entpacke die neuen Dateien
# Aktualisierung der Erweiterungen
# Starte das Update-Skript, um die Datenbank zu überprüfen.
# Teste das Update.
# Entfernen der Überresten der alten Installationen

== Überprüfe die Anforderungen == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} erfordert:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Eines der folgenden:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Von Version 1.36 an unterstützt MediaWiki Upgrades nur in Schritten von zwei LTS-Releases (siehe [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades von älteren Versionen müssen dann in mehreren Schritten durchgeführt werden.
Das bedeutet: ein Upgrade von 1.23 oder älter auf 1.36 muss über ein Upgrade auf 1.27 (oder 1.35) erfolgen, um dann auf die gewünschte Version 1.36 zu aktualisieren.

Wenn du PostgreSQL benutzst, lese bitte auch {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Für weitere Informationen lese bitte {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} und {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Lese die Versionshinweise ==
In der &quot;Tarball-Distribution&quot; (der .tar-Paket-Datei) oder unter den von [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] ausgecheckten/exportierten Dateien gibt es eine Reihe von Dateien mit Großbuchstaben in den Dateinamen, von denen eine die '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]) enthält.
Öffne diese jetzt und finde heraus, was in diesem Release geändert wurde.
Auch die Anweisungen in der UPGRADE-Datei sollten beachtet werden.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Ausstehende Aufträge löschen ==
Aus Performance-Gründen verzögern sich einige Aktionen in der Datenbank und werden vom [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]] verwaltet.
Diese Aufträge werden in der Datenbank gespeichert und enthalten Parameter mit Informationen über Aktionen, die sie ausführen sollen.
Es wird dringend empfohlen, diese ausstehenden Jobs vor dem Upgrade des Wikis auszuführen, um zu vermeiden, dass sie fehlschlagen, falls sich die Parameterspezifikation dieser Jobs mit der neuen Version ändert.
Verwende {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}}, um alle ausstehenden Aufträge auszuführen und die Warteschlange zu löschen, bevor du das Upgrade durchführst.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Sichern vorhandener Dateien und der Datenbank ==

:''Vollständige Anleitung: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

Während die Upgrade-Skripte gut in Stand gehalten und robust sind, können dennoch Dinge schief gehen. Bevor du das Datenbank Schema aktualisierst, &quot;&quot;mach ein vollständiges [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|Backup]]&quot;&quot; deines Wiki, inklusive der Datenbank und den Dateien:

* der Inhalt deines Wikis, von der Datenbank (stelle sicher, den richtigen Zeichensatz zu haben, überprüfe dies zuerst in der LocalSettings.php). Es wäre auch gut, zu dem SQL Datenbank Dump zusätzlich einen XML-Dump zu erstellen.
:* Bei MySQL ist für einen SQL- bzw. XML-Dump der  &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; Befehl zu verwenden:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* Bei PostgreSQL ist für einen Datenbank-Dump der &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; Befehl zu verwenden:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* Bei SQLite gibt es ein MediaWiki Skript um ein Backup zu erstellen:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* Bilder und andere Mediendateien (der Inhalt des &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; Verzeichnis, benutzerdefiniertes Logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* Konfigurationsdateien, bspw &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (wenn vorhanden)
* MediaWikis Programmdateien, inklusive allen Benutzeroberflächen (Skins) und Erweiterungen (Extensions), besonders wenn du diese modifiziert hast.

== Neue Dateien entpacken ==

=== Verwendung eines Tarball Paketes (.tar) ===

Du kannst die neuen Dateien via FTP oder Befehlszeile einfügen. Nutze die Befehlszeile, wenn du dazu Zugang hast! Die Befehlszeile zu verwenden ist viel schneller, als jede einzelne Datei der Tausend via FTP hochzuladen.

{{Note|1=Du solltest den entpackten tarball in ein neues und leeres Verzeichnis auf dem Server ablegen. Wenn Du den tarball stattdessen direkt in die bestehende alte Version entpackst, solltest Du die Anweisungen auf der Seite [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]] beachten. Andernfalls, falls Du irgendwelche Anpassungen vorgenommen hast, werden diese so überschrieben, dass keine Möglichkeit mehr bleibt, diese wieder herzustellen. Wenn Du dazu die neue Version direkt über die bestehende entpackst, können Dateien zurückbleiben, welche die neue Version beim updaten beeinflussen. Es ist daher empfehlenswert, die Dateien in einem neuen Verzeichnis zu entpacken und die Anpassungen im neuen Verzeichnis vorzunehmen (LocalSettings.php, Bildverzeichnis, Erweiterungen und andere Anpassungen wie eigene Skins).}}

==== FTP oder grafisch ====

Falls kein Kommandozeilen-Zugriff auf den Server möglich ist (zum Beispiel bei Shared Hosting), kann das MediaWiki tarball Archiv lokal auf einen Computer heruntergladen und mittels 7zip entpackt werden.

Nachdem alle Dateien und Ordner lokal entpackt wurden, können sie mit einem beliebigen FTP Programm auf den Server hoch geladen werden.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Kommandozeile ====
Unter Umständen kann es nötig sein, das Kommando als &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; auszuführen, falls der aktuelle Benutzer auf den wiki Installationsverzeichnissen keine vollständigen Schreibrechte haben sollte.
Beim enttarren (entpacken) eines tarball Pakets wird normalerweise ein neues Verzeichnis für die neue wiki Version erstellt. Danach müssen die die alten Konfigurationsdateien und das image Verzeichnis, in dem sich Bilder befinen, aus dem alten, vorherigen Installationsordner in den neuen kopiert werden:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

(Open)Solaris Benutzer sollten &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt; benutzen, oder:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

====Andere Dateien====

Nach dem entpacken das tarball Archivs, sollten einige Dateien und Ordner aus dem alten Installationsverzeichnis in das neue kopiert oder verschoben werden:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - enthält deine alten Konfigurationseinstellungen.
* Das &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (oder &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in älteren Versionen) Verzeichnis, das alle ins wiki hochgeladenen Dateien enthält, es sei denn es wurde ein anderes Uploadverzeichnis ausgewählt. Die Zugriffsrechte (Permissions) und der Besitzer (Ownership) müssen geändert werden.  &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (beispielweise falls der web user &quot;apache&quot; ist).
* Einige Erweiterungen im &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; Verzeichnis. Es sollten immer die aktuellen Erweiterungen installiert und verwendet werden, veraltete Erweiterungen funktionieren eventuell nicht korrekt oder gar nicht  mit neueren MediaWiki Versionen.
* Falls ein [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|benutzerdefiniertes Logo]] verwendet wird, muss diese Datei ebenfalls aus der Sicherungsdatei wiederherstellt werden. In Versionen vor 1.24 befindet es sich normalerweise im Verzeichnis &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. Ab Version 1.24 im Verzeichnis &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; oder &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt;, je nach dem welches zur Benutzung ausgewählt wurde. Danach dies in der LocalSettings.php hinzufügen, zum Beispiel &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Bei 1.35 müssen die Logos ggf. aus [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]] wiederhergestellt werden. Dann ist beispielsweise folgendes zur LocalSettings.php hinzuzufügen: &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* benutzerdefinierte Skins aus dem &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;-Verzeichnis
* jede Veränderung, die in den alten Installationsdateien oder Erweiterungen durchgeführt wurde.
* jede .htaccess Datei (falls Apache verwendet wird und irgendwelche Regeln in der .htaccess eingetragen wurden).

Mache diesen neuen Ordner zum veröffentlichten Ordner auf dem Webserver, oder benenne das alte Installationsverzeichnis um und benenne dann das neue um, um den alten Namen zu erhalten.

=== Git verwenden ===

Wenn du {{ll|Download from Git|Git}} verwendest, exportiere die Dateien an einen sauberen Speicherort und kopiere dann die alten benutzerdefinierten Dateien wie im vorherigen Abschnitt beschrieben an den neuen Speicherort.

Du musst auch einige externe PHP-Bibliotheken mit Composer oder einer bereitgestellten Sammlung installieren, die für die Wikimedia Wiki-Farm gepflegt wird.
Weitere Details zur Installation und Aktualisierung externer Bibliotheken findest du in der [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git-Download-Dokumentation]].

=== Verwendung eines Patches ===
Eine kleine Patchdatei wird in der Regel für ein Minor-Versions-Upgrade zur Verfügung gestellt.
Du musst [[w:de:patch (Unix)|patch]] manuell herunterladen, um dies verwenden zu können.
Nach dem manuellen Download von der [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ MediaWiki Release-Site] extrahierst du sie oder folgst den Anweisungen mit wget unten.
Patches sind inkrementell, du kannst '''keine Version überspringen'''.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; in dein Hauptverzeichnis von MediaWiki (das mit LocalSettings.php).
# Lade die Patchdatei herunter und entpacke sie mit &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt;.
# Verwende &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt;, um zu überprüfen, was geändert wird (''z.B.''', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;).
# Wenn alles in Ordnung ist, führe &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; erneut ohne &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt; aus.
Überprüfe deine Special:Version und du solltest die neue Versionsnummer sehen.

===Verbliebene Dateien, die Fehler verursachen können===

Wenn die neue Version in eine altes, bestehendes Installationsverzeichnis entpackt wurde, können einige alte Dateien Probleme mit der neuen Version verursachen.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Wenn du [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]] nicht verwendest, aber eine &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;-Datei im MediaWiki-Stammordner hast, erhaltest du möglicherweise Fehler, die sich auf &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt; beziehen.
Löschen oder umbenennen der &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; Datei behebt den Fehler. Die &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; Datei, die sich ebenfalls im MediaWiki Wurzelverzeichnis befindet, kann als Vorlage dafür dienen, falls profiling zukünftig aktiviert werden soll.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
Mediawiki 1.23 verwendet nicht mehr den skin autodiscovery Menchanismus. Nachdem auf diese Version aktualisiert wurde, sollte sicher gestellt werden, das die alten &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt;-Dateien direkt im &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; Verzeichnis sowie die entsprechenden Unterordner im &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; Verzeichnis gelöscht werden. MediaWiki wird als Erinnerung eine Warnung aufzeichnen und ggf. ausgeben, falls diese alten Skins immer noch gefunden werden. (Benutzerdefinierte Skins müssen ebenfalls entsprechend angepasst und mit ihnen verfahren werden.) Siehe {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} für mehr Informationen.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 ändert die Pfade von Kern-Skin-Dateien. Nach dem Upgrade auf diese Version solltest du sicherstellen, dass die alten Dateien &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; direkt im Verzeichnis &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; nicht mehr vorhanden sind. Siehe {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} für Details.

== Erweiterungen aktualisieren ==

Einige Erweiterungen wurden angepasst, um mit der neuen Version der MediaWiki-Software arbeiten zu können. Stelle sicher, dass du die jeweils aktuelle Version verwendst. Eventuell musst du Updates für spezifische Erweiterungen manuell einspielen.

Verschiedene [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|Tarball-Pakete]] enthalten Untergruppen von Erweiterungen mit eigener Versionierung, die dabei helfen, die passende Version für das vorhandene MediaWiki-Release zu finden.

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Die Erweiterung Distributor]] kann dabei helfen, den richtigen Snapshot einer Erweiterung für die Zusammenarbeit mit der jeweils unterstützten MediaWiki-Version zu finden.

Falls du viele Erweiterungen herunterladen möchtest, ist vermutlich  [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|das Herunterladen von Git]] die beste Lösung.
Wenn Git nicht zur Verfügung steht, aber eine große Zahl von Erweiterungen angepasst werden muss, sollte [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]] zu Rate gezogen werden.

== Deine LocalSettings.php anpassen ==

Wenn die vorhandene &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; aus der alten Version wiederverwendet wird, muss sie vermutlich angepasst werden:

=== Den Skin registrieren ===

Ab MediaWiki 1.24 sind die paketierten Skins wie Vector, Monobook, Modern und CologneBlue nicht länger Bestandteil des MediaWiki-Kerns und müssen explizit in der &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; registriert werden. Andernfalls wird MediaWiki davor warnen, dass keine Skins installiert wurden.

Folgendes muss bei einem Upgrade von einer Version vor 1.24 in die &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; eingefügt werden, wenn eine dieser Skins verfügbar sein soll:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Andere Skins sind eventuell noch nicht an das neue [[Manual:Extension registration|Skin Registration]] System angepasst. Sollte es bei der Verwendung zu Problemen kommen, ist die entsprechende Dokumentation der Skin zu beachten, um die korrekte Registrierung vorzunemen.

=== Erweiterungen registrieren ===

Seit MediaWiki 1.25 kommt ein neues [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] System zum Einsatz.

Vormals erfolgte die Einbindung in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; in der folgenden Form:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Das schreibt sich jetzt so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Erweiterungen werden an das neue Registrierungssystem angepasst.
Erweiterungen die noch nicht angepasst sind, sollten über den alten Weg eingebunden werden.
Mehr Informationen enthalten die jeweiligen Installationsanweisungen.

=== Andere Variablen ===
Einige Variablen könnten obsolet geworden oder gar entfernt worden sein.
Diese in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; zu haben wird für gewöhnlich keinen Effekt haben.
Neue Variablen können in neueren Versionen hinzugefügt worden sein, oder einige existierende Variablen ihren Typ geändert haben.
Normalerweise werden bei der Entwicklung vernünftige Voreinstellungen für die Variablen gewählt, und im Falle eine Typänderung wird auf Rückwärtskompatibilität geachtet.
Auf jeden Fall sollten die Release-Notes beachtet werden um solche Ändernungen erkennen zu können.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Das Update-Skript ausführen ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
Du kannst die MediaWiki-Datenbank auf zwei Arten aktualisieren: Entweder von der Kommandozeile oder vom Webbrowser aus. Wenn du Shell-Zugang zu deinen Server hast, wird ein Upgrade von der Kommandozeile aus empfohlen, da dies das Risiko verringert, dass der Upgrade-Prozess durch einen Timeout oder einen Verbindungsreset unterbrochen wird.

Das Skript wird auch versuchen alle fehlenden Abhängigkeiten herunterzuladen, welche MediaWiki benötigt.

=== Kommandozeile ===

Der Zugriff auf den Server erfolgt über eine SSH-Shell oder vergleichbares. Wenn dein PC unter Microsoft Windows arbeitet, benötigst du ein Tool wie [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] für den SSH-Zugriff. Aus der Kommandozeile oder Shell wechselst du ins Wartungsverzeichnis (&lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt;) und führst das [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|Update-Skript]] aus:

 $ php update.php

Wenn auf einem Linux-Server eine Fehlermeldung erscheint, versuche es mit dem Benutzerkonto root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Hinweis für einfache Installationen unter Windows (z.B. mit {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
Stelle zunächst sicher, dass der Webserver (z.B. Apache) und die Datenbank (wie MySQL) laufen.
Starte dann &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: Rechts klicken, &quot;Öffnen mit...&quot; auswählen und dann PHP.exe auswählen.
Das sich öffnende Kommandozeilenfenster wird sich selbstständig schließen, wenn das Schema-Update erfolgreich abgeschlossen ist.

Eventuell erhaltest du eine Fehlermeldung, dass die PHP-Version zu alt ist, und das MediaWiki eine neue Version benötigt.
Das Update bricht nach dieser Nachricht ab.
Der Grund dafür ist, dass die Kommandozeile eine andere PHP-Version verwenden kann als diejenige beim Ausführen von MediaWiki auf dem Webserver.
Wenn das der Fall ist, solltest du überprüfen, ob du eine neuere PHP-Version in der Shell ausführen kannst: Das Kommando dafür könnte beispielsweise &quot;php7&quot; oder &quot;php73&quot; lauten.
Ob eine andere Version verfügbar ist und unter welchem Namen, hängt von der Konfiguration deines Servers ab.
Wenn es nicht funktioniert, kontaktiere deinen Hoster - dort sollten die notwendigen Informationen vorliegen.

Mediawiki wird das Datenbankschema überprüfen und notwendige Tabellen und Spalten hinzufügen, damit es unter dem neuen Code arbeiten kann.

{{Note|1=Falls du eine [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Gemeinsame Datenbank]] nutzt, solltest du den &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; Parameter übergeben, wenn die shared tables angepasst werden sollen. Andernfalls werden sie vom Update-Skript nicht berücksichtigt.}}

==== Was ist zu tun, wenn das update.php nach einer kurzen Pause abbricht und zum Kommandoprompt zurückkehrt? ====

Dies kann durch eine Fehlfunktion einer Erweiterung oder Skin verursacht werden.

* Überprüfe, ob alle Erweiterungen, die in LocalSettings.php aufgerufen werden, auch vorhanden sind
* Stelle sicher, dass für alle Erweiterungen die korrekten Registrierungsmethoden verwendet werden (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
* Kommentiere die erste Hälfte der Erweiterungen in LocalSettings.php aus. Wenn update.php dann durchläuft, mache die Hälfte der Kommentierung rückgängig (also auf 1/4 der Erweiterungen). Läuft update.php nicht durch, versuche es mit dem anderen Viertel usw. Wiederhole den Vorgang, bis update.php funktioniert, um die fehlerhafte Stelle zu finden.

==== Was ist zu tun, bei der Fehlermeldung &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; (oder ähnlich) ====

In einigen Fällen brechen Skripte ab, mit Fehlermeldungen wie:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

Hier ist sicherzustellen, dass in der {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} (im Hauptverzeichnis der Installation) die Variablen {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} und {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} definiert sind. Das sind der Nutzer und sein Password, die das Skript benötigt um auf die Datenbank zuzugreifen.

In einigen Fällen wird scheinbar eine alte $wgDBmwschema Variable anstelle von $wgDBname eingelesen, insbesondere bei Verwendung von MySQL. Wenn das der Fall ist, ist die Definition des $wgDBmwschema aus der LocalSettings.php zu entfernen.

==== Was ist zu tun bei einer &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; Fehlermeldung? ====

Vereinzelt erschien nach dem Start der Update.php folgende Fehlermeldung:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

Dieser Fehler tritt auf, wenn update.php unter php4 ausgeführt wird.

Wenn die Site bei einem Provider gehostet ist, der sowohl php4 als auch php5 unterstützt, sollten folgende Schritte ausgeführt werden:

# Auf der Kommandozeile ist das Kommando #whereis php5' einzugeben
# wenn der Pfad für php5 identifiziert ist, den Inhalt des Verzeichnis php5/bin auflisten
# wenn der Name der ausführbaren Datei für php festgestellt ist (entweder php oder php5), ist der vollständige Pfad für die Ausführung der 'update.php' einzugeben

Hier ein Beispiel:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

====Was ist zu tun bei der Fehlermeldung  'register_argc_argv is set to false'====

Wenn die folgende Fehlermeldung erscheint:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Im Wartungsverzeichnis (/maintenance) ist die Datei 'php.ini' entweder zu bearbeiten oder zu erstellen. 
# Die folgende Zeile ist zu ergänzen:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Anschließend ist &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt; erneut auszuführen

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===Web-Browser===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
:''Siehe auch {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Falls die Datenbank groß ist und stark produktiv genutzt wird, solltest du auf eine Nutzung des Web-Updater verzichten, weil der Update-Prozess ein Time-Out verursachen kann, wenn die ''maximum_execution_time'' erreicht wird. In diesem Fall solltest du [[update.php]] über das Kommandozeilen-Interface starten (nicht über das Web). Was genau &quot;zu groß&quot; bedeutet, hängt von deinem Server ab (z.B. seine Performance, die Serverlast und davon wie lange die maximale Ausführungszeit für PHP gestattet ist). Wenn dein Wiki zu groß für den Web-Updater ist und dein Hoster keinen Shell-Zugriff gestattet, dann bleibt dir nichts anderes übrig als auf ein anderes Paket oder einen anderen Anbieter zu wechseln, damit ein Shell-Zugriff möglich wird.

# '''Vor jeder Änderung an der Datenbank sollte eine Datensicherung vorgenommen werden!'''
# Navigiere im Webbrowser zu &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt; Befindet sich dein Wiki z. B. bei &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, dann navigiere zu &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
# Wähle deine Sprache und klicke auf Weiter.
# Die vorhandene Installation sollte gefunden werden. Folge den Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm, um das Upgrade durchzuführen. &lt;br/&gt; Wenn nach dem &quot;Upgrade Key&quot; gefragt wird, öffne die {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}-Datei und suche nach dem Schlüssel, der {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}} zugewiesen ist.

Es kann vorkommen, dass der Web-Updater nicht zu arbeiten scheint: Anstelle der Sprachauswahl erscheint eine leere Wiki-Seite, eventuell mit einigen Fehlermeldungen. In diesem Fall ist es wahrscheinlich, dass der Server URL Rewrites nutzt (auch bekannt als  [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|Kurze URLs]]). Dadurch wird anstelle des Updaters im Verzeichnis &quot;mw-config/&quot; die leere Wiki-Seite &quot;Mw-config/&quot; (mit großem &quot;M&quot;) angezeigt. In diesem Fall ist die &quot;.htaccess&quot;-Datei für die Dauer des Updates umzubenennen, dann sollte der Zugriff auf den Web-Updater möglich sein.

{{Warning|1=Bei Nutzung dieser Methode ist es wichtig, '''die Namensänderung der .htaccess-Datei wieder rückgängig zu machen''', nachdem das Upgrade-Skript durchgelaufen ist! Ansonsten werden die kurzen URLs und anderes nicht mehr funktionieren!}}

== Das Update testen ==

Sobald das Upgrade fertiggestellt ist, besuche das Wiki und überprüfe, dass folgende Funtkionen wie erwartet funktionieren:

* Seiten ansehen
* Seiten bearbeiten
* Dateien hochladen
* Besuche [[Special:Version]] und überprüfe, dass die gezeigte Version korrekt ist und dass alle Extensions gelistet sind.

== Entfernen der Dateien der alten Installation ==
Wenn die vorige Installation in einen anderen Ordner kopiert wurde, muss dieser vollständig entfernt werden oder der Zugriff aus dem Web ist zu verhindern.
Wichtig ist es, keine Überreste alter Installationen zugreifbar auf dem Server zu belassen, da somit der Zweck des Upgrades verfehlt wird, und der Server angreifbar werden könnte.

== Häufig gestellte Fragen ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===Wie schwierig ist es zu aktualisieren?===

Wenn die einzige geänderte Datei die {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} ist, und das Upgrade von Version 1.5 oder größer erfolgt, ist der Prozess recht einfach. Die reine Arbeitszeit beträgt einige Minuten. Die Anpassung des Datenbankschemas kann einige Zeit dauern, dies hängt vom Umfang der Datenbank ab. Bei großen Wikis mit Millionen von Seiten kann dies einige Stunden dauern, bei typischen Wikis mit einigen Tausend Seiten ist es in Sekunden erledigt.

Kleinere Updates innerhalb der gleichen Hauptversion, beispielsweise von {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 auf {{MW legacy release number}} erfordern keinerlei Anpassung des Datenbankschemas.
Das einspielen der neuen Dateien recht aus. Die Datenbank benötigt kein Update, daher ist es nicht notwendig, das Updater-Skript auszuführen.

Aufrüsten von Version 1.4 oder früher kann kompliziert werden, da die Unterstützung für andere Zeichensätze als UTF-8 ausgebaut wurde. Außerdem wurde die Art Texte zu speichern geändert. Hinweise dazu finden sich im entsprechenden Abschnitt der &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; Datei

Schwierig wird es, wenn der Quellcode geändert wurde und diese Änderungen nicht überschrieben werden sollen. Tools wie [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld], oder [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] können hier hilfreich sein. Auch nicht mehr gewartete Erweiterungen können zu Problemen führen. Erweiterungen sollten immer zusammen mit dem MediaWiki upgedatet werden.

Wird mit einer modifizierten oder kundenspezifischen Skin gearbeitet, muss diese höchstwahrscheinlich an die neue MediaWiki-Version angepasst werden.

{{Tip|1=Anstatt jedes Mal die &quot;globalen&quot; css und js (JavaScript) Dateien zu erneuern, kann der Code auch einfach auf den Seiten &quot;MediaWiki:Common.css&quot; und &quot;MediaWiki:Common.js&quot; der Installation untergebracht werden. Da diese Teil der Datenbank sind, die ja beim Update wiederverwendet wird, müssen die entsprechenden MediaWiki-Kerndateien nicht mehr gepatcht werden.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
===Kann ich ein Upgrade von einer sehr alten Version in einem Schritt durchführen?===
Das kommt darauf an: Bei einem '''Upgrade von MediaWiki 1.4 oder älter''' sollte zunächst auf die Version 1.5 umgestellt werden.
Bei einem Upgrade eines Wiki auf Basis von Latin-1 ist das Skript &quot;upgrade1_5.php zu nutzen (findet sich in MediaWiki 1.5), um die relevanten Teile der Datenbank auf UTF-8 zu konvertieren ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} muss in den {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} auf true gesetzt werden damit es funktioniert)
Anschließend ist update.php auszuführen, und dann die {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}}-Option in der LocalSettings.php auf die Codierung zu setzen, die bisher im Wiki verwendet wurde (z.B. windows-1252). Dies ist die grundsätzliche Vorgehensweise, wie von Wikipedia und anderen Wikimedia-Foundation-Seiten Upgrades von MediaWiki 1.4 auf 1.5 durchgeführt wurden - siehe hierzu auch die 'Datei mit den [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki Einstellungsseite für enwiki ] und einige [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|relevante Anmerkungen auf Wikitech]].
Eventuell muss auch zunächst ein Upgrade auf MediaWiki 1.4 durchgeführt werden, bevor man das upgrade1.5-Skript ausführen kann.
Soll ein Datenbank-Dump des Latin-1 Wiki durchgeführt werden (z.B. bei MySQL), muss sichergestellt sein, dass der Typ des &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; Feldes in der {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} Tabelle &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt; ist, und nicht &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, um Fehler bei der Zeichencodierung zu vermeiden.

Ein '''Upgrade von Version 1.5 oder jünger''' auf '''1.35''' kann in einem Schritt durchgeführt werden.
Die überwiegende Mehrzahl der Berichte und das automatische Testing lassen den Schluss zu, dass das Upgrade in einem Schritt gut funktioniert.
Wer es nicht glaubt, lese bitte [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|dieses Maillist Posting]].
Allerdings sollte beachtet werden, dass die Wahrscheinlichkeit auf PHP-Fehlermeldungen zu stoßen mit der Anzahl der Versionssprünge steigt.
Du hättest diese Fehler sowieso erhalten, wenn du nicht Versionen übersprungen hättest, aber die Fehler wären mit jedem einzelnen Update verbunden gewesen.
Durch die mehrfachen Versionssprünge treten sie lediglich gleichzeitig auf.
Das macht das Upgrade vielleicht etwas komplizierter, aber insgesamt ist der Aufwand geringer.

Ein '''Upgrade auf MediaWiki 1.36''' wird lediglich in Abständen von zwei LTS-Versionen unterstützt ([[phab:T259771]]). Das bedeutet, dass für jede ältere Version zuerst auf 1.35 und dann auf 1.36 umgestellt werden muss.

===Sollte ich zuerst ein Backup vornehmen?===

Kurzantwort: Ja.

Lange Antwort: Es hängt davon ab a) wie sehr du deine Daten wertschätzt, b) wie schwer es ist, ein Backup anzulegen c) wie sicher du hinsichtlich MySQL-Wartung und Administration bist. 

Ein fehlerhafter Abbruch kann die Datenbank in einem inkonsistenten Zustand zwischen zwei Versionen hinterlassen.
Bei einem PHP- oder MySQL-Fehler während des Upgrade wird die Datenbank eventuell nur teilweise umgestellt.
In solchen Situation können aufwändige manuelle Anpassungen erforderlich werden.
Auf jeden Fall wird es der einfachere Weg sein, vor dem Durchlauf von update.php ein Datenbank-Backup anzulegen.
Alles andere kann Stunden nutzloser Arbeit verursachen.

Wiederherstellungen sind oft komplex.
Die ehrenamtlichen Mitarbeiter im Support sind selten begeistert, wenn ein Backup unterlassen wurde und dann die Schäden aus einem fehlgeschlagenen Upgrade beseitigt werden müssen.
Die bessere Variante ist, das Backup zurück zu spielen und eine [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|Fehlermeldung beim MediaWiki-Projekt]] einzustellen, wenn der Upgrade-Prozess auf Fehler läuft.

===Kann ich meine LocalSettings.php behalten?===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ja, aber es sind vermutlich einige kleinere Anpassungen vorzunehmen. Das Format der $localsettings ist in hohem Maße rückwärtskompatibel. Änderungen die damit brechen sind in den [[Release notes|Release-Notes]] unter &quot;configuration changes&quot; dokumentiert.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

===Kann mein Wiki während des Upgrades online bleiben?===

Generell ja, auch wenn Git es eventuell zeitweise (für ein paar Sekunden) unterbrechen kann.

Bei einem Update zwischen Unterversionen des MediaWiki müssen lediglich die Quelldateien eingespielt werden.

Anmerkung: Das Folgende setzt Zugriff per Kommandozeile voraus. Bei einem Upgrade zwischen Hauptversionen der MediaWiki-Software ist die folgende Prozedur zu bevorzugen:

# Auspacken der neuen Version von MediaWiki in ein neues Verzeichis
# Vorbereitung des neuen Verzeichnisses: Kopieren der LocalSettings.php vom alten ins neue Verzeichnis, ebenso alle vorhandenen Erweiterungen und Skins. Überprüfe die Einstellungen für {{wg|Logo}} und {{wg|Logos}} in LocalSettings.php und, wenn nötig, kopieren der Logo-Datei in das neue Verzeichnis.
# Anhand der Release Notes überprüfen, ob Änderungen in der LocalSettings.php notwendig sind.
# Den Schreibschutz auf der Datenbank aktivieren, indem folgende Variable in der LocalSettings.php im alten Verzeichnis eingefügt wird (Benutzer werden diese Meldung sehen, wenn sie während des Updates versuchen Seiten zu bearbeiten):&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Diese Arbeitsweise funktioniert ab Version 1.27 nicht mehr, da der Ablauf des Update-Skriptes verhindert wird. Ein Workaround findet sich in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}, siehe auch {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Start des [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|Update-Skripts]] oder des Web Updaters im neuen Verzeichnis.
# Kopieren der Bilddateien im Unterverzeichnis /images vom alten in das neue Verzeichnis.
# Vertauschen des alten und des neuen Verzeichnisses durch umbenennen.

===Warum aktualisieren?===
:''Eintragen in die [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] Mailing-Liste um über neue Versionen informiert zu werden.''

Weil es [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|normalerweise einfach]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|in einem Schritt durchführbar]], und außerdem [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|per Web]] machbar ist.

Neuere Veröffentlichungen enthalten Sicherheitsupdates, die die Wikis und die Webhoster, auf denen sich die Wikis befinden vor Vandalismus schützen. Ältere Versionen enthalten Sicherheitslücken und Bugs (siehe {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). Dies alles sind gute Gründe, weshalb man aktualisieren sollte.

Neue Versionen bieten neue Möglichkeiten, in den Release Notes finden sich Details. Hier eine Übersicht als Argumentationshilfe, um den Aufwand für das Upgrade eine alten Version zu rechtfertigen:

* Seit {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}} gibt es [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|eine Vorschau]] der bearbeiteten Seite inklusive der Veränderungen.
* Seit {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}} ist ein [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|Undo Button]] verfügbar.
* Seit {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}} ist das [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|Patrouillieren]] auf [[Special:NewPages|Neuen Seiten]] viel einfacher.
* Seit {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}} ist ein [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|Verschieben einer Seite]] möglich.
* Seit {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}} können [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|Doppelte Weiterleitungen]] automatisch repariert werden.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}} sind {{ll|InstantCommons}} verfügbar.
* Bei geeignetem Caching beschleunigt {{ll|ResourceLoader}} seit 1.17 das Laden der Seiten erheblich.
* Seit 1.17 ergibt die [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|Kategorien-Sortierung]] Sinn (speziell für nicht-Englische Buchstaben); sie wurde nach {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}} auf 68 Sprachen erweitert.
Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} und {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} werden Benutzer in aller Sprachen und Gechlechter vom Interface und in den [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|Logs]] korrekt angesprochen (vor 1.15 gab es keine Geschlechtsunterschiede).
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} wurde das Skinning System überarbeitet, um die Wiederverwendung von Teilen einzelner Skins in eigenen zu vereinfachen.
* Seit [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]] sind [[m:Help:Diff|Veränderungen]] besser lesbar.
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] und [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], wurden E-Mail Benachrichtigungen klarer und durchschaubarer, was das Wiki effektiver macht.
* Seit [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], ist Vandalismus-Bekämpfung (Patrolling) weniger zeitintensiv.
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]] wurde die Passwortspeicherung für mehr Sicherheit verbessert.
* Seit [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]] sind [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|Neue Filter zur Bearbeitungsprüfung]] verfügbar.
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], wurde der [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; Mechanismus]] verbessert.
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], wurde das Session Management überarbeitet, sowie die Nutzer-Authentifizierung komplett modernisiert. InstantCommons benötigen keine lokalen Dateien mehr.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, wurde der Cache für gerendertes HTML der Artikel-Seiten verbessert.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, wurde das Action API überarbeitet und verbessert. Außerdem können Gruppenzuordnungen nun für eine auswählbare Zeit vorgenommen werden. Blockweises Sperren von IPs wurde ermöglicht.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, können gesperrte Nutzer ihre E-Mail nicht mehr ändern. Die Möglichkeit der Suche nach IP-Adressen in den Benutzerbeiträgen wurde hinzugefügt.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, sind einige Erweiterungen Teil der Kernsoftware, wie {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}. Die {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} wurde eingeführt. Die maximale Rate von 90 Bearbeitungen/Minute wurde als Voreinstellung für alle Benutzer eingeführt.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}} unterstützt MediaWiki über 350 Sprachen.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}} unterstützt MediaWiki &quot;Partielle Blocks&quot;, durch die IPs und Accounts für die Bearbeitung von Seiten oder Namensräumen beschränkt werden können.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}} sind mehr Erweiterungen in die Kernsoftware integriert worden: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (für LUA-Module), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (eine stabile Langzeitsupport-Release), ist {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} Teil der Kernsoftware. Das &quot;watch&quot; Feature kann mit einem Ablaufdatum verbessert werden.

Mit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} wurde begonnen, einige [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|unverzichtbare Erweiterungen]], wie beispielsweise eine besserer Editor und die Anti-Vandalismus Werkzeuge wie ConfirmEdit und Nuke mit der Basisinstallation zu bündeln. Dadurch müssen diese Erweiterungen nicht mehr separat heruntergeladen und installiert werden. Weitere Erweiterungen folgten in späteren MediaWiki Versionen.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Siehe auch ==

* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post (englisch) bietet einige [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html Details über (kleinere) Minor Upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] wenn Hilfe benötigt wird oder irgendetwas falsch läuft.
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - wenn du kein erfolgreiches Backup hast
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>90mp0boknme5sxcon1c6jp1jenhbgsy</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402968</id>
      <parentid>5402924</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:44:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="42347" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Übersicht ==

=== Dateiübertragung ===

Eine Methode zur Übertragung der Dateien auswählen:

* [[w:de:Wget|wget]]
* Secure copy (sicheres Kopieren) mit [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] oder [[w:de:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:de:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Einen [[w:de:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]]-Client verwenden.
* Möglicherweise bietet dir dein Provider einen Dateimanager als webbasierte Benutzeroberfläche an.
* Weitere Methoden: Es gibt eine englischsprachige List von denen auf [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

===Vorbereitung===

Lese die {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=UPGRADE-Textdatei, die in MediaWiki enthalten ist}}.

# Überprüfe die Voraussetzungen
# Lese die RELEASE-NOTES-Datei
# Lese die UPGRADE-Datei
# Sichere die vorhandenen Dateien und die Datenbank
# Entpacke die neuen Dateien
# Aktualisierung der Erweiterungen
# Starte das Update-Skript, um die Datenbank zu überprüfen.
# Teste das Update.
# Entfernen der Überresten der alten Installationen

== Überprüfe die Anforderungen == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} erfordert:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Eines der folgenden:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Von Version 1.36 an unterstützt MediaWiki Upgrades nur in Schritten von zwei LTS-Releases (siehe [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades von älteren Versionen müssen dann in mehreren Schritten durchgeführt werden.
Das bedeutet: ein Upgrade von 1.23 oder älter auf 1.36 muss über ein Upgrade auf 1.27 (oder 1.35) erfolgen, um dann auf die gewünschte Version 1.36 zu aktualisieren.

Wenn du PostgreSQL benutzst, lese bitte auch {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Für weitere Informationen lese bitte {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} und {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Lese die Versionshinweise ==
In der &quot;Tarball-Distribution&quot; (der .tar-Paket-Datei) oder unter den von [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] ausgecheckten/exportierten Dateien gibt es eine Reihe von Dateien mit Großbuchstaben in den Dateinamen, von denen eine die '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]) enthält.
Öffne diese jetzt und finde heraus, was in diesem Release geändert wurde.
Auch die Anweisungen in der UPGRADE-Datei sollten beachtet werden.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Ausstehende Aufträge löschen ==
Aus Performance-Gründen verzögern sich einige Aktionen in der Datenbank und werden vom [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]] verwaltet.
Diese Aufträge werden in der Datenbank gespeichert und enthalten Parameter mit Informationen über Aktionen, die sie ausführen sollen.
Es wird dringend empfohlen, diese ausstehenden Jobs vor dem Upgrade des Wikis auszuführen, um zu vermeiden, dass sie fehlschlagen, falls sich die Parameterspezifikation dieser Jobs mit der neuen Version ändert.
Verwende {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}}, um alle ausstehenden Aufträge auszuführen und die Warteschlange zu löschen, bevor du das Upgrade durchführst.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Sichern vorhandener Dateien und der Datenbank ==

:''Vollständige Anleitung: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

Während die Upgrade-Skripte gut in Stand gehalten und robust sind, können dennoch Dinge schief gehen. Bevor du das Datenbank Schema aktualisierst, &quot;&quot;mach ein vollständiges [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|Backup]]&quot;&quot; deines Wiki, inklusive der Datenbank und den Dateien:

* der Inhalt deines Wikis, von der Datenbank (stelle sicher, den richtigen Zeichensatz zu haben, überprüfe dies zuerst in der LocalSettings.php). Es wäre auch gut, zu dem SQL Datenbank Dump zusätzlich einen XML-Dump zu erstellen.
:* Bei MySQL ist für einen SQL- bzw. XML-Dump der  &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; Befehl zu verwenden:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* Bei PostgreSQL ist für einen Datenbank-Dump der &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; Befehl zu verwenden:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* Bei SQLite gibt es ein MediaWiki Skript um ein Backup zu erstellen:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* Bilder und andere Mediendateien (der Inhalt des &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; Verzeichnis, benutzerdefiniertes Logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* Konfigurationsdateien, bspw &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (wenn vorhanden)
* MediaWikis Programmdateien, inklusive allen Benutzeroberflächen (Skins) und Erweiterungen (Extensions), besonders wenn du diese modifiziert hast.

== Neue Dateien entpacken ==

=== Verwendung eines Tarball Paketes (.tar) ===

Du kannst die neuen Dateien via FTP oder Befehlszeile einfügen. Nutze die Befehlszeile, wenn du dazu Zugang hast! Die Befehlszeile zu verwenden ist viel schneller, als jede einzelne Datei der Tausend via FTP hochzuladen.

{{Note|1=Du solltest den entpackten tarball in ein neues und leeres Verzeichnis auf dem Server ablegen. Wenn Du den tarball stattdessen direkt in die bestehende alte Version entpackst, solltest Du die Anweisungen auf der Seite [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]] beachten. Andernfalls, falls Du irgendwelche Anpassungen vorgenommen hast, werden diese so überschrieben, dass keine Möglichkeit mehr bleibt, diese wieder herzustellen. Wenn Du dazu die neue Version direkt über die bestehende entpackst, können Dateien zurückbleiben, welche die neue Version beim updaten beeinflussen. Es ist daher empfehlenswert, die Dateien in einem neuen Verzeichnis zu entpacken und die Anpassungen im neuen Verzeichnis vorzunehmen (LocalSettings.php, Bildverzeichnis, Erweiterungen und andere Anpassungen wie eigene Skins).}}

==== FTP oder grafisch ====

Falls kein Kommandozeilen-Zugriff auf den Server möglich ist (zum Beispiel bei Shared Hosting), kann das MediaWiki tarball Archiv lokal auf einen Computer heruntergladen und mittels 7zip entpackt werden.

Nachdem alle Dateien und Ordner lokal entpackt wurden, können sie mit einem beliebigen FTP Programm auf den Server hoch geladen werden.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Kommandozeile ====
Unter Umständen kann es nötig sein, das Kommando als &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; auszuführen, falls der aktuelle Benutzer auf den wiki Installationsverzeichnissen keine vollständigen Schreibrechte haben sollte.
Beim enttarren (entpacken) eines tarball Pakets wird normalerweise ein neues Verzeichnis für die neue wiki Version erstellt. Danach müssen die die alten Konfigurationsdateien und das image Verzeichnis, in dem sich Bilder befinen, aus dem alten, vorherigen Installationsordner in den neuen kopiert werden:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

(Open)Solaris Benutzer sollten &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt; benutzen, oder:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

====Andere Dateien====

Nach dem entpacken das tarball Archivs, sollten einige Dateien und Ordner aus dem alten Installationsverzeichnis in das neue kopiert oder verschoben werden:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - enthält deine alten Konfigurationseinstellungen.
* Das &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (oder &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in älteren Versionen) Verzeichnis, das alle ins wiki hochgeladenen Dateien enthält, es sei denn es wurde ein anderes Uploadverzeichnis ausgewählt. Die Zugriffsrechte (Permissions) und der Besitzer (Ownership) müssen geändert werden.  &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (beispielweise falls der web user &quot;apache&quot; ist).
* Einige Erweiterungen im &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; Verzeichnis. Es sollten immer die aktuellen Erweiterungen installiert und verwendet werden, veraltete Erweiterungen funktionieren eventuell nicht korrekt oder gar nicht  mit neueren MediaWiki Versionen.
* Falls ein [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|benutzerdefiniertes Logo]] verwendet wird, muss diese Datei ebenfalls aus der Sicherungsdatei wiederherstellt werden. In Versionen vor 1.24 befindet es sich normalerweise im Verzeichnis &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. Ab Version 1.24 im Verzeichnis &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; oder &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt;, je nach dem welches zur Benutzung ausgewählt wurde. Danach dies in der LocalSettings.php hinzufügen, zum Beispiel &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Bei 1.35 müssen die Logos ggf. aus [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]] wiederhergestellt werden. Dann ist beispielsweise folgendes zur LocalSettings.php hinzuzufügen: &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* benutzerdefinierte Skins aus dem &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;-Verzeichnis
* jede Veränderung, die in den alten Installationsdateien oder Erweiterungen durchgeführt wurde.
* jede .htaccess Datei (falls Apache verwendet wird und irgendwelche Regeln in der .htaccess eingetragen wurden).

Mache diesen neuen Ordner zum veröffentlichten Ordner auf dem Webserver, oder benenne das alte Installationsverzeichnis um und benenne dann das neue um, um den alten Namen zu erhalten.

=== Git verwenden ===

Wenn du {{ll|Download from Git|Git}} verwendest, exportiere die Dateien an einen sauberen Speicherort und kopiere dann die alten benutzerdefinierten Dateien wie im vorherigen Abschnitt beschrieben an den neuen Speicherort.

Du musst auch einige externe PHP-Bibliotheken mit Composer oder einer bereitgestellten Sammlung installieren, die für die Wikimedia Wiki-Farm gepflegt wird.
Weitere Details zur Installation und Aktualisierung externer Bibliotheken findest du in der [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git-Download-Dokumentation]].

=== Verwendung eines Patches ===
Eine kleine Patchdatei wird in der Regel für ein Minor-Versions-Upgrade zur Verfügung gestellt.
Du musst [[w:de:patch (Unix)|patch]] manuell herunterladen, um dies verwenden zu können.
Nach dem manuellen Download von der [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ MediaWiki Release-Site] extrahierst du sie oder folgst den Anweisungen mit wget unten.
Patches sind inkrementell, du kannst '''keine Version überspringen'''.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; in dein Hauptverzeichnis von MediaWiki (das mit LocalSettings.php).
# Lade die Patchdatei herunter und entpacke sie mit &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt;.
# Verwende &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt;, um zu überprüfen, was geändert wird (''z.B.''', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;).
# Wenn alles in Ordnung ist, führe &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; erneut ohne &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt; aus.
Überprüfe deine Special:Version und du solltest die neue Versionsnummer sehen.

===Verbliebene Dateien, die Fehler verursachen können===

Wenn die neue Version in eine altes, bestehendes Installationsverzeichnis entpackt wurde, können einige alte Dateien Probleme mit der neuen Version verursachen.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Wenn du [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]] nicht verwendest, aber eine &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;-Datei im MediaWiki-Stammordner hast, erhaltest du möglicherweise Fehler, die sich auf &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt; beziehen.
Löschen oder umbenennen der &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; Datei behebt den Fehler. Die &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; Datei, die sich ebenfalls im MediaWiki Wurzelverzeichnis befindet, kann als Vorlage dafür dienen, falls profiling zukünftig aktiviert werden soll.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
Mediawiki 1.23 verwendet nicht mehr den skin autodiscovery Menchanismus. Nachdem auf diese Version aktualisiert wurde, sollte sicher gestellt werden, das die alten &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt;-Dateien direkt im &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; Verzeichnis sowie die entsprechenden Unterordner im &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; Verzeichnis gelöscht werden. MediaWiki wird als Erinnerung eine Warnung aufzeichnen und ggf. ausgeben, falls diese alten Skins immer noch gefunden werden. (Benutzerdefinierte Skins müssen ebenfalls entsprechend angepasst und mit ihnen verfahren werden.) Siehe {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} für mehr Informationen.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 ändert die Pfade von Kern-Skin-Dateien. Nach dem Upgrade auf diese Version solltest du sicherstellen, dass die alten Dateien &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; direkt im Verzeichnis &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; nicht mehr vorhanden sind. Siehe {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} für Details.

== Erweiterungen aktualisieren ==

Einige Erweiterungen wurden angepasst, um mit der neuen Version der MediaWiki-Software arbeiten zu können. Stelle sicher, dass du die jeweils aktuelle Version verwendst. Eventuell musst du Updates für spezifische Erweiterungen manuell einspielen.

Verschiedene [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|Tarball-Pakete]] enthalten Untergruppen von Erweiterungen mit eigener Versionierung, die dabei helfen, die passende Version für das vorhandene MediaWiki-Release zu finden.

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Die Erweiterung Distributor]] kann dabei helfen, den richtigen Snapshot einer Erweiterung für die Zusammenarbeit mit der jeweils unterstützten MediaWiki-Version zu finden.

Falls du viele Erweiterungen herunterladen möchtest, ist vermutlich  [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|das Herunterladen von Git]] die beste Lösung.
Wenn Git nicht zur Verfügung steht, aber eine große Zahl von Erweiterungen angepasst werden muss, sollte [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]] zu Rate gezogen werden.

== Deine LocalSettings.php anpassen ==

Wenn die vorhandene &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; aus der alten Version wiederverwendet wird, muss sie vermutlich angepasst werden:

=== Den Skin registrieren ===

Ab MediaWiki 1.24 sind die paketierten Skins wie Vector, Monobook, Modern und CologneBlue nicht länger Bestandteil des MediaWiki-Kerns und müssen explizit in der &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; registriert werden. Andernfalls wird MediaWiki davor warnen, dass keine Skins installiert wurden.

Folgendes muss bei einem Upgrade von einer Version vor 1.24 in die &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; eingefügt werden, wenn eine dieser Skins verfügbar sein soll:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Andere Skins sind eventuell noch nicht an das neue [[Manual:Extension registration|Skin Registration]] System angepasst. Sollte es bei der Verwendung zu Problemen kommen, ist die entsprechende Dokumentation der Skin zu beachten, um die korrekte Registrierung vorzunemen.

=== Erweiterungen registrieren ===

Seit MediaWiki 1.25 kommt ein neues [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] System zum Einsatz.

Vormals erfolgte die Einbindung in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; in der folgenden Form:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Das schreibt sich jetzt so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Erweiterungen werden an das neue Registrierungssystem angepasst.
Erweiterungen die noch nicht angepasst sind, sollten über den alten Weg eingebunden werden.
Mehr Informationen enthalten die jeweiligen Installationsanweisungen.

=== Andere Variablen ===
Einige Variablen könnten obsolet geworden oder gar entfernt worden sein.
Diese in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; zu haben wird für gewöhnlich keinen Effekt haben.
Neue Variablen können in neueren Versionen hinzugefügt worden sein, oder einige existierende Variablen ihren Typ geändert haben.
Normalerweise werden bei der Entwicklung vernünftige Voreinstellungen für die Variablen gewählt, und im Falle eine Typänderung wird auf Rückwärtskompatibilität geachtet.
Auf jeden Fall sollten die Release-Notes beachtet werden um solche Ändernungen erkennen zu können.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Das Update-Skript ausführen ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
Du kannst die MediaWiki-Datenbank auf zwei Arten aktualisieren: Entweder von der Kommandozeile oder vom Webbrowser aus. Wenn du Shell-Zugang zu deinen Server hast, wird ein Upgrade von der Kommandozeile aus empfohlen, da dies das Risiko verringert, dass der Upgrade-Prozess durch einen Timeout oder einen Verbindungsreset unterbrochen wird.

Das Skript wird auch versuchen alle fehlenden Abhängigkeiten herunterzuladen, welche MediaWiki benötigt.

=== Kommandozeile ===

Der Zugriff auf den Server erfolgt über eine SSH-Shell oder vergleichbares. Wenn dein PC unter Microsoft Windows arbeitet, benötigst du ein Tool wie [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] für den SSH-Zugriff. Aus der Kommandozeile oder Shell wechselst du ins Wartungsverzeichnis (&lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt;) und führst das [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|Update-Skript]] aus:

 $ php update.php

Wenn auf einem Linux-Server eine Fehlermeldung erscheint, versuche es mit dem Benutzerkonto root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Hinweis für einfache Installationen unter Windows (z.B. mit {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
Stelle zunächst sicher, dass der Webserver (z.B. Apache) und die Datenbank (wie MySQL) laufen.
Starte dann &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: Rechts klicken, &quot;Öffnen mit...&quot; auswählen und dann PHP.exe auswählen.
Das sich öffnende Kommandozeilenfenster wird sich selbstständig schließen, wenn das Schema-Update erfolgreich abgeschlossen ist.

Eventuell erhaltest du eine Fehlermeldung, dass die PHP-Version zu alt ist, und das MediaWiki eine neue Version benötigt.
Das Update bricht nach dieser Nachricht ab.
Der Grund dafür ist, dass die Kommandozeile eine andere PHP-Version verwenden kann als diejenige beim Ausführen von MediaWiki auf dem Webserver.
Wenn das der Fall ist, solltest du überprüfen, ob du eine neuere PHP-Version in der Shell ausführen kannst: Das Kommando dafür könnte beispielsweise &quot;php7&quot; oder &quot;php73&quot; lauten.
Ob eine andere Version verfügbar ist und unter welchem Namen, hängt von der Konfiguration deines Servers ab.
Wenn es nicht funktioniert, kontaktiere deinen Hoster - dort sollten die notwendigen Informationen vorliegen.

Mediawiki wird das Datenbankschema überprüfen und notwendige Tabellen und Spalten hinzufügen, damit es unter dem neuen Code arbeiten kann.

{{Note|1=Falls du eine [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Gemeinsame Datenbank]] nutzt, solltest du den &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; Parameter übergeben, wenn die shared tables angepasst werden sollen. Andernfalls werden sie vom Update-Skript nicht berücksichtigt.}}

==== Was ist zu tun, wenn das update.php nach einer kurzen Pause abbricht und zum Kommandoprompt zurückkehrt? ====

Dies kann durch eine Fehlfunktion einer Erweiterung oder Skin verursacht werden.

* Überprüfe, ob alle Erweiterungen, die in LocalSettings.php aufgerufen werden, auch vorhanden sind
* Stelle sicher, dass für alle Erweiterungen die korrekten Registrierungsmethoden verwendet werden (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
* Kommentiere die erste Hälfte der Erweiterungen in LocalSettings.php aus. Wenn update.php dann durchläuft, mache die Hälfte der Kommentierung rückgängig (also auf 1/4 der Erweiterungen). Läuft update.php nicht durch, versuche es mit dem anderen Viertel usw. Wiederhole den Vorgang, bis update.php funktioniert, um die fehlerhafte Stelle zu finden.

==== Was ist zu tun, bei der Fehlermeldung &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; (oder ähnlich) ====

In einigen Fällen brechen Skripte ab, mit Fehlermeldungen wie:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

Hier ist sicherzustellen, dass in der {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} (im Hauptverzeichnis der Installation) die Variablen {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} und {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} definiert sind. Das sind der Nutzer und sein Password, die das Skript benötigt um auf die Datenbank zuzugreifen.

In einigen Fällen wird scheinbar eine alte $wgDBmwschema Variable anstelle von $wgDBname eingelesen, insbesondere bei Verwendung von MySQL. Wenn das der Fall ist, ist die Definition des $wgDBmwschema aus der LocalSettings.php zu entfernen.

==== Was ist zu tun bei einer &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; Fehlermeldung? ====

Vereinzelt erschien nach dem Start der Update.php folgende Fehlermeldung:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

Dieser Fehler tritt auf, wenn update.php unter php4 ausgeführt wird.

Wenn die Site bei einem Provider gehostet ist, der sowohl php4 als auch php5 unterstützt, sollten folgende Schritte ausgeführt werden:

# Auf der Kommandozeile ist das Kommando #whereis php5' einzugeben
# wenn der Pfad für php5 identifiziert ist, den Inhalt des Verzeichnis php5/bin auflisten
# wenn der Name der ausführbaren Datei für php festgestellt ist (entweder php oder php5), ist der vollständige Pfad für die Ausführung der 'update.php' einzugeben

Hier ein Beispiel:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

====Was ist zu tun bei der Fehlermeldung  'register_argc_argv is set to false'====

Wenn die folgende Fehlermeldung erscheint:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Im Wartungsverzeichnis (/maintenance) ist die Datei 'php.ini' entweder zu bearbeiten oder zu erstellen. 
# Die folgende Zeile ist zu ergänzen:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Anschließend ist &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt; erneut auszuführen

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===Web-Browser===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
:''Siehe auch {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Falls die Datenbank groß ist und stark produktiv genutzt wird, solltest du auf eine Nutzung des Web-Updater verzichten, weil der Update-Prozess ein Time-Out verursachen kann, wenn die ''maximum_execution_time'' erreicht wird. In diesem Fall solltest du [[update.php]] über das Kommandozeilen-Interface starten (nicht über das Web). Was genau &quot;zu groß&quot; bedeutet, hängt von deinem Server ab (z.B. seine Performance, die Serverlast und davon wie lange die maximale Ausführungszeit für PHP gestattet ist). Wenn dein Wiki zu groß für den Web-Updater ist und dein Hoster keinen Shell-Zugriff gestattet, dann bleibt dir nichts anderes übrig als auf ein anderes Paket oder einen anderen Anbieter zu wechseln, damit ein Shell-Zugriff möglich wird.

# '''Vor jeder Änderung an der Datenbank sollte eine Datensicherung vorgenommen werden!'''
# Navigiere im Webbrowser zu &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt; Befindet sich dein Wiki z. B. bei &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, dann navigiere zu &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
# Wähle deine Sprache und klicke auf Weiter.
# Die vorhandene Installation sollte gefunden werden. Folge den Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm, um das Upgrade durchzuführen. &lt;br/&gt; Wenn nach dem &quot;Upgrade Key&quot; gefragt wird, öffne die {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}-Datei und suche nach dem Schlüssel, der {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}} zugewiesen ist.

Es kann vorkommen, dass der Web-Updater nicht zu arbeiten scheint: Anstelle der Sprachauswahl erscheint eine leere Wiki-Seite, eventuell mit einigen Fehlermeldungen. In diesem Fall ist es wahrscheinlich, dass der Server URL Rewrites nutzt (auch bekannt als  [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|Kurze URLs]]). Dadurch wird anstelle des Updaters im Verzeichnis &quot;mw-config/&quot; die leere Wiki-Seite &quot;Mw-config/&quot; (mit großem &quot;M&quot;) angezeigt. In diesem Fall ist die &quot;.htaccess&quot;-Datei für die Dauer des Updates umzubenennen, dann sollte der Zugriff auf den Web-Updater möglich sein.

{{Warning|1=Bei Nutzung dieser Methode ist es wichtig, '''die Namensänderung der .htaccess-Datei wieder rückgängig zu machen''', nachdem das Upgrade-Skript durchgelaufen ist! Ansonsten werden die kurzen URLs und anderes nicht mehr funktionieren!}}

== Das Update testen ==

Sobald das Upgrade fertiggestellt ist, besuche das Wiki und überprüfe, dass folgende Funtkionen wie erwartet funktionieren:

* Seiten ansehen
* Seiten bearbeiten
* Dateien hochladen
* Besuche [[Special:Version]] und überprüfe, dass die gezeigte Version korrekt ist und dass alle Extensions gelistet sind.

== Entfernen der Dateien der alten Installation ==
Wenn die vorige Installation in einen anderen Ordner kopiert wurde, muss dieser vollständig entfernt werden oder der Zugriff aus dem Web ist zu verhindern.
Wichtig ist es, keine Überreste alter Installationen zugreifbar auf dem Server zu belassen, da somit der Zweck des Upgrades verfehlt wird, und der Server angreifbar werden könnte.

== Häufig gestellte Fragen ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===Wie schwierig ist es zu aktualisieren?===

Wenn die einzige geänderte Datei die {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} ist, und das Upgrade von Version 1.5 oder größer erfolgt, ist der Prozess recht einfach. Die reine Arbeitszeit beträgt einige Minuten. Die Anpassung des Datenbankschemas kann einige Zeit dauern, dies hängt vom Umfang der Datenbank ab. Bei großen Wikis mit Millionen von Seiten kann dies einige Stunden dauern, bei typischen Wikis mit einigen Tausend Seiten ist es in Sekunden erledigt.

Kleinere Updates innerhalb der gleichen Hauptversion, beispielsweise von {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 auf {{MW legacy release number}} erfordern keinerlei Anpassung des Datenbankschemas.
Das einspielen der neuen Dateien recht aus. Die Datenbank benötigt kein Update, daher ist es nicht notwendig, das Updater-Skript auszuführen.

Aufrüsten von Version 1.4 oder früher kann kompliziert werden, da die Unterstützung für andere Zeichensätze als UTF-8 ausgebaut wurde. Außerdem wurde die Art Texte zu speichern geändert. Hinweise dazu finden sich im entsprechenden Abschnitt der &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; Datei

Schwierig wird es, wenn der Quellcode geändert wurde und diese Änderungen nicht überschrieben werden sollen. Tools wie [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld], oder [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] können hier hilfreich sein. Auch nicht mehr gewartete Erweiterungen können zu Problemen führen. Erweiterungen sollten immer zusammen mit dem MediaWiki upgedatet werden.

Wird mit einer modifizierten oder kundenspezifischen Skin gearbeitet, muss diese höchstwahrscheinlich an die neue MediaWiki-Version angepasst werden.

{{Tip|1=Anstatt jedes Mal die &quot;globalen&quot; css und js (JavaScript) Dateien zu erneuern, kann der Code auch einfach auf den Seiten &quot;MediaWiki:Common.css&quot; und &quot;MediaWiki:Common.js&quot; der Installation untergebracht werden. Da diese Teil der Datenbank sind, die ja beim Update wiederverwendet wird, müssen die entsprechenden MediaWiki-Kerndateien nicht mehr gepatcht werden.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
===Kann ich ein Upgrade von einer sehr alten Version in einem Schritt durchführen?===
Das kommt darauf an: Bei einem '''Upgrade von MediaWiki 1.4 oder älter''' sollte zunächst auf die Version 1.5 umgestellt werden.
Bei einem Upgrade eines Wiki auf Basis von Latin-1 ist das Skript &quot;upgrade1_5.php zu nutzen (findet sich in MediaWiki 1.5), um die relevanten Teile der Datenbank auf UTF-8 zu konvertieren ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} muss in den {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} auf true gesetzt werden damit es funktioniert)
Anschließend ist update.php auszuführen, und dann die {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}}-Option in der LocalSettings.php auf die Codierung zu setzen, die bisher im Wiki verwendet wurde (z.B. windows-1252). Dies ist die grundsätzliche Vorgehensweise, wie von Wikipedia und anderen Wikimedia-Foundation-Seiten Upgrades von MediaWiki 1.4 auf 1.5 durchgeführt wurden - siehe hierzu auch die 'Datei mit den [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki Einstellungsseite für enwiki ] und einige [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|relevante Anmerkungen auf Wikitech]].
Eventuell muss auch zunächst ein Upgrade auf MediaWiki 1.4 durchgeführt werden, bevor man das upgrade1.5-Skript ausführen kann.
Soll ein Datenbank-Dump des Latin-1 Wiki durchgeführt werden (z.B. bei MySQL), muss sichergestellt sein, dass der Typ des &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; Feldes in der {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} Tabelle &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt; ist, und nicht &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, um Fehler bei der Zeichencodierung zu vermeiden.

Ein '''Upgrade von Version 1.5 oder jünger''' auf '''1.35''' kann in einem Schritt durchgeführt werden.
Die überwiegende Mehrzahl der Berichte und das automatische Testing lassen den Schluss zu, dass das Upgrade in einem Schritt gut funktioniert.
Wer es nicht glaubt, lese bitte [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|dieses Maillist Posting]].
Allerdings sollte beachtet werden, dass die Wahrscheinlichkeit auf PHP-Fehlermeldungen zu stoßen mit der Anzahl der Versionssprünge steigt.
Du hättest diese Fehler sowieso erhalten, wenn du nicht Versionen übersprungen hättest, aber die Fehler wären mit jedem einzelnen Update verbunden gewesen.
Durch die mehrfachen Versionssprünge treten sie lediglich gleichzeitig auf.
Das macht das Upgrade vielleicht etwas komplizierter, aber insgesamt ist der Aufwand geringer.

Ein '''Upgrade auf MediaWiki 1.36''' wird lediglich in Abständen von zwei LTS-Versionen unterstützt ([[phab:T259771]]). Das bedeutet, dass für jede ältere Version zuerst auf 1.35 und dann auf 1.36 umgestellt werden muss.

===Sollte ich zuerst ein Backup vornehmen?===

Kurzantwort: Ja.

Lange Antwort: Es hängt davon ab a) wie sehr du deine Daten wertschätzt, b) wie schwer es ist, ein Backup anzulegen c) wie sicher du hinsichtlich MySQL-Wartung und Administration bist. 

Ein fehlerhafter Abbruch kann die Datenbank in einem inkonsistenten Zustand zwischen zwei Versionen hinterlassen.
Bei einem PHP- oder MySQL-Fehler während des Upgrade wird die Datenbank eventuell nur teilweise umgestellt.
In solchen Situation können aufwändige manuelle Anpassungen erforderlich werden.
Auf jeden Fall wird es der einfachere Weg sein, vor dem Durchlauf von update.php ein Datenbank-Backup anzulegen.
Alles andere kann Stunden nutzloser Arbeit verursachen.

Wiederherstellungen sind oft komplex.
Die ehrenamtlichen Mitarbeiter im Support sind selten begeistert, wenn ein Backup unterlassen wurde und dann die Schäden aus einem fehlgeschlagenen Upgrade beseitigt werden müssen.
Die bessere Variante ist, das Backup zurück zu spielen und eine [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|Fehlermeldung beim MediaWiki-Projekt]] einzustellen, wenn der Upgrade-Prozess auf Fehler läuft.

===Kann ich meine LocalSettings.php behalten?===
Ja, aber es sind vermutlich einige kleinere Anpassungen vorzunehmen. Das Format der {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} ist in hohem Maße rückwärtskompatibel.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

===Kann mein Wiki während des Upgrades online bleiben?===

Generell ja, auch wenn Git es eventuell zeitweise (für ein paar Sekunden) unterbrechen kann.

Bei einem Update zwischen Unterversionen des MediaWiki müssen lediglich die Quelldateien eingespielt werden.

Anmerkung: Das Folgende setzt Zugriff per Kommandozeile voraus. Bei einem Upgrade zwischen Hauptversionen der MediaWiki-Software ist die folgende Prozedur zu bevorzugen:

# Auspacken der neuen Version von MediaWiki in ein neues Verzeichis
# Vorbereitung des neuen Verzeichnisses: Kopieren der LocalSettings.php vom alten ins neue Verzeichnis, ebenso alle vorhandenen Erweiterungen und Skins. Überprüfe die Einstellungen für {{wg|Logo}} und {{wg|Logos}} in LocalSettings.php und, wenn nötig, kopieren der Logo-Datei in das neue Verzeichnis.
# Anhand der Release Notes überprüfen, ob Änderungen in der LocalSettings.php notwendig sind.
# Den Schreibschutz auf der Datenbank aktivieren, indem folgende Variable in der LocalSettings.php im alten Verzeichnis eingefügt wird (Benutzer werden diese Meldung sehen, wenn sie während des Updates versuchen Seiten zu bearbeiten):&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Diese Arbeitsweise funktioniert ab Version 1.27 nicht mehr, da der Ablauf des Update-Skriptes verhindert wird. Ein Workaround findet sich in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}, siehe auch {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Start des [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|Update-Skripts]] oder des Web Updaters im neuen Verzeichnis.
# Kopieren der Bilddateien im Unterverzeichnis /images vom alten in das neue Verzeichnis.
# Vertauschen des alten und des neuen Verzeichnisses durch umbenennen.

===Warum aktualisieren?===
:''Eintragen in die [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] Mailing-Liste um über neue Versionen informiert zu werden.''

Weil es [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|normalerweise einfach]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|in einem Schritt durchführbar]], und außerdem [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|per Web]] machbar ist.

Neuere Veröffentlichungen enthalten Sicherheitsupdates, die die Wikis und die Webhoster, auf denen sich die Wikis befinden vor Vandalismus schützen. Ältere Versionen enthalten Sicherheitslücken und Bugs (siehe {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). Dies alles sind gute Gründe, weshalb man aktualisieren sollte.

Neue Versionen bieten neue Möglichkeiten, in den Release Notes finden sich Details. Hier eine Übersicht als Argumentationshilfe, um den Aufwand für das Upgrade eine alten Version zu rechtfertigen:

* Seit {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}} gibt es [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|eine Vorschau]] der bearbeiteten Seite inklusive der Veränderungen.
* Seit {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}} ist ein [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|Undo Button]] verfügbar.
* Seit {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}} ist das [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|Patrouillieren]] auf [[Special:NewPages|Neuen Seiten]] viel einfacher.
* Seit {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}} ist ein [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|Verschieben einer Seite]] möglich.
* Seit {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}} können [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|Doppelte Weiterleitungen]] automatisch repariert werden.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}} sind {{ll|InstantCommons}} verfügbar.
* Bei geeignetem Caching beschleunigt {{ll|ResourceLoader}} seit 1.17 das Laden der Seiten erheblich.
* Seit 1.17 ergibt die [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|Kategorien-Sortierung]] Sinn (speziell für nicht-Englische Buchstaben); sie wurde nach {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}} auf 68 Sprachen erweitert.
Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} und {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} werden Benutzer in aller Sprachen und Gechlechter vom Interface und in den [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|Logs]] korrekt angesprochen (vor 1.15 gab es keine Geschlechtsunterschiede).
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} wurde das Skinning System überarbeitet, um die Wiederverwendung von Teilen einzelner Skins in eigenen zu vereinfachen.
* Seit [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]] sind [[m:Help:Diff|Veränderungen]] besser lesbar.
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] und [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], wurden E-Mail Benachrichtigungen klarer und durchschaubarer, was das Wiki effektiver macht.
* Seit [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], ist Vandalismus-Bekämpfung (Patrolling) weniger zeitintensiv.
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]] wurde die Passwortspeicherung für mehr Sicherheit verbessert.
* Seit [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]] sind [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|Neue Filter zur Bearbeitungsprüfung]] verfügbar.
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], wurde der [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; Mechanismus]] verbessert.
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], wurde das Session Management überarbeitet, sowie die Nutzer-Authentifizierung komplett modernisiert. InstantCommons benötigen keine lokalen Dateien mehr.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, wurde der Cache für gerendertes HTML der Artikel-Seiten verbessert.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, wurde das Action API überarbeitet und verbessert. Außerdem können Gruppenzuordnungen nun für eine auswählbare Zeit vorgenommen werden. Blockweises Sperren von IPs wurde ermöglicht.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, können gesperrte Nutzer ihre E-Mail nicht mehr ändern. Die Möglichkeit der Suche nach IP-Adressen in den Benutzerbeiträgen wurde hinzugefügt.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, sind einige Erweiterungen Teil der Kernsoftware, wie {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}. Die {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} wurde eingeführt. Die maximale Rate von 90 Bearbeitungen/Minute wurde als Voreinstellung für alle Benutzer eingeführt.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}} unterstützt MediaWiki über 350 Sprachen.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}} unterstützt MediaWiki &quot;Partielle Blocks&quot;, durch die IPs und Accounts für die Bearbeitung von Seiten oder Namensräumen beschränkt werden können.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}} sind mehr Erweiterungen in die Kernsoftware integriert worden: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (für LUA-Module), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
* Seit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (eine stabile Langzeitsupport-Release), ist {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} Teil der Kernsoftware. Das &quot;watch&quot; Feature kann mit einem Ablaufdatum verbessert werden.

Mit {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} wurde begonnen, einige [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|unverzichtbare Erweiterungen]], wie beispielsweise eine besserer Editor und die Anti-Vandalismus Werkzeuge wie ConfirmEdit und Nuke mit der Basisinstallation zu bündeln. Dadurch müssen diese Erweiterungen nicht mehr separat heruntergeladen und installiert werden. Weitere Erweiterungen folgten in späteren MediaWiki Versionen.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Siehe auch ==

* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post (englisch) bietet einige [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html Details über (kleinere) Minor Upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] wenn Hilfe benötigt wird oder irgendetwas falsch läuft.
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - wenn du kein erfolgreiches Backup hast
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>gclh5i0kj8zrjdsdr958kpez9yx66zt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/hu</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>12623</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402933</id>
      <parentid>5381546</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="51051" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Alapvető áttekintés ==

=== Fájlok átvitele ===

Válassz ki egy módszert a fájlok átviteléhez:

* [[:hu:Wget|wget]]
* Biztonságos másolat [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] vagy [[w:hu:WinSCP|WinSCP]] segítségével
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
&lt;/div&gt;
* Egy [[:hu:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]]-kliens használatával.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Más módszerekkel. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]&lt;/span&gt;

=== Előkövetelmények ===

Olvasd el a mellékelt {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=UPGRADE}} szöveges állományt.

# Ellenőrizd a követelményeket
# Olvasd el a RELEASE-NOTES fájlt
# Olvasd el az UPGRADE fájlt
# Készíts biztonsági mentést a fájlokról és az adatbázisról
# Csomagold ki az új fájlokat
# Frissítsd a kiterjesztéseket
# Futtasd a frissítési szkriptet az adatbázis ellenőrzéséhez
# Teszteld a frissítést
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations
&lt;/div&gt;

== Követelmények == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
A MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} telepítéséhez szükség van az alábbiakra:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Egy az alábbiak közül:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

Ha PostgreSQL-t használsz, olvasd el a {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}} oldalt.

További információkhoz látogass el a {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} és {{ll|Compatibility}} oldalakra.

== A kiadási megjegyzések elolvasása ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== A függőben lévő feladatok törlése ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== A fájlok és az adatbázis biztonsági mentése ==

:''Részletes útmutató: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Az új fájlok kicsomagolása ==

=== Tarball-csomag használata ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

==== FTP-vel vagy grafikusan ====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Parancssor ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Egyéb fájlok ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Git használatával ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Kiterjesztések frissítése ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

== A LocalSettings.php aktualizálása ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Other variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== A frissítőszkript futtatása ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Parancssor ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: ''See also {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Should I back up first?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Short answer: Yes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Why upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Lásd még ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>omh0nxlzhp08of0v4rdrkzf35re8v0w</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/fi</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>14198</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402243</id>
      <parentid>5400736</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14010" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

Oikeassa yläkulmassa olevan [[Special:preferences|Asetukset]]-linkin painaminen kirjautuneena sisään ollessa antaa sinun vaihtaa asetuksiasi.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Languages
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Päiväyksen muoto ja aikaero ===

Seuraavat muodot ovat valittavissa asetuksista, kun käyttöliittymän kieli on suomi:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Katso myös ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>e3hpn85ffj0h9yooe4al51xbpao2qfu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Jobs</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>15169</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403336</id>
      <parentid>3290318</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:34:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>176.82.181.72</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3954" xml:space="preserve">

Zic As Aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaas 

== Sunsuneo Minecraft Java Edition ==
 
Selecciona cualquier comando para escribirlo fácilmente
 
== Agricunchjjj Minecraft Playstation Edition ==
Puedes seleccionar el comando pero luego tienes que escribir las coordenadas del /tp o material del /give @s etc
 
== Afanisilestain Minecraft Bedrock Edition ==
Estás obligado a escribir el comando entero menos /tp /time set /weather o /setworldspawn
 
== vanilla vanilla trotrotro Minecraft Pocket Edition ==
 
Al igual que en bedrock pero se necesita poner / después el comando que quieras usar y después estás obligado a poner todos los detalles del comando y todo el texto en letra minúscula
 
Zic As
 
 
== Estropajon ==
Me invento películas mentales en el As
 
== Sunsuneo Minecraft Java Edition ==
 
Selecciona cualquier comando para escribirlo fácilmente
 
== Agricunchjjj Minecraft Playstation Edition ==
Puedes seleccionar el comando pero luego tienes que escribir las coordenadas del /tp o material del /give @s etc
 
== Afanisilestain Minecraft Bedrock Edition ==
Estás obligado a escribir el comando entero menos /tp /time set /weather o /setworldspawn
 
== vanilla vanilla trotrotro Minecraft Pocket Edition ==
 
Al igual que en bedrock pero se necesita poner / después el comando que quieras usar y después estás obligado a poner todos los detalles del comando y todo el texto en letra minúscula
 
== Estropajon == 
 
Descucacualorenzo
 
== Sunsuneo Minecraft Java Edition ==
 
Selecciona cualquier comando para escribirlo fácilmente
 
== Agricunchjjj Minecraft Playstation Edition ==
Puedes seleccionar el comando pero luego tienes que escribir las coordenadas del /tp o material del /give @s etc
 
== Afanisilestain Minecraft Bedrock Edition ==
Estás obligado a escribir el comando entero menos /tp /time set /weather o /setworldspawn
 
== vanilla vanilla trotrotro Minecraft Pocket Edition ==
 
Al igual que en bedrock pero se necesita poner / después el comando que quieras usar y después estás obligado a poner todos los detalles del comando y todo el texto en letra minúscula
 
== Estropajon == 

:''For information on &quot;jobs&quot; (asynchronous processes) within MediaWiki, see [[Manual:Job queue]].''

There is a list of companies and individuals that offer [[MediaWiki]] [[developers|development]] for hire, and commercial support, at the page '''[[professional development and consulting]]'''. You can also find MediaWiki hosts and &quot;wiki farms&quot; at '''[[hosting services]]'''. Within reason, it is acceptable to post MediaWiki-related job openings on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-l mediawiki-l mailing list].

Other lists of developers and providers of commercial MediaWiki support can be found at these offsite webpages. Some offer MediaWiki-related job postings as well.

* [http://semantic-mediawiki.org/wiki/Professional_support Semantic MediaWiki: Professional support]
* [https://www.upwork.com/o/profiles/browse/hrs/100/?q=mediawiki&amp;user_pref=1 Upwork contractors with MediaWiki experience]
* [http://www.wikimatrix.org/consultants/mediawiki/-/- WikiMatrix.org:MediaWiki consultants]
* [https://www.linkedin.com/search/results/content/?keywords=mediawiki&amp;origin=SWITCH_SEARCH_VERTICAL MediaWiki professional developer jobs] listed in LinkedIn
* [https://www.linkedin.com/groups/124305/profile LinkedIn MediaWiki group LinkedIn] for &quot;technical users who installed the MediaWiki software, have questions about setup, configuration, adding modules, enhancing security, avoiding SPAM... for use on an intranet, making changes in PHP modules, CSS style sheets, or menus.&quot;

Please note that these sites are independent, and are neither affiliated with, nor endorsed by the [[w:Wikimedia Foundation|Wikimedia Foundation]]. Open positions with the Wikimedia Foundation are listed at [https://wikimediafoundation.org/about/jobs/ Wikimedia Careers].

[[Category:MediaWiki References]]</text>
      <sha1>pc95a5hc6vofvsamoq12wim1lv3umm3</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403352</id>
      <parentid>5403336</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:51:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Undo revision 5403336 by [[Special:Contributions/176.82.181.72|176.82.181.72]] ([[User talk:176.82.181.72|talk]]) removing unrelated text and reverting back to the previous revision</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1812" xml:space="preserve">:''For information on &quot;jobs&quot; (asynchronous processes) within MediaWiki, see [[Manual:Job queue]].''

There is a list of companies and individuals that offer [[MediaWiki]] [[developers|development]] for hire, and commercial support, at the page '''[[professional development and consulting]]'''. You can also find MediaWiki hosts and &quot;wiki farms&quot; at '''[[hosting services]]'''. Within reason, it is acceptable to post MediaWiki-related job openings on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-l mediawiki-l mailing list].

Other lists of developers and providers of commercial MediaWiki support can be found at these offsite webpages. Some offer MediaWiki-related job postings as well.

* [http://semantic-mediawiki.org/wiki/Professional_support Semantic MediaWiki: Professional support]
* [https://www.upwork.com/o/profiles/browse/hrs/100/?q=mediawiki&amp;user_pref=1 Upwork contractors with MediaWiki experience]
* [http://www.wikimatrix.org/consultants/mediawiki/-/- WikiMatrix.org:MediaWiki consultants]
* [https://www.linkedin.com/search/results/content/?keywords=mediawiki&amp;origin=SWITCH_SEARCH_VERTICAL MediaWiki professional developer jobs] listed in LinkedIn
* [https://www.linkedin.com/groups/124305/profile LinkedIn MediaWiki group LinkedIn] for &quot;technical users who installed the MediaWiki software, have questions about setup, configuration, adding modules, enhancing security, avoiding SPAM... for use on an intranet, making changes in PHP modules, CSS style sheets, or menus.&quot;

Please note that these sites are independent, and are neither affiliated with, nor endorsed by the [[w:Wikimedia Foundation|Wikimedia Foundation]]. Open positions with the Wikimedia Foundation are listed at [https://wikimediafoundation.org/about/jobs/ Wikimedia Careers].

[[Category:MediaWiki References]]</text>
      <sha1>sxt3kfrwex5wqihen737h7jnsvyq9wf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/ja</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>15241</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402936</id>
      <parentid>5379986</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="50388" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== 基本的な概要 ==

=== ファイル転送 ===

ファイル転送の方法を選択してください:

* [[:ja:GNU Wget|wget]]
* [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] または [[:ja:WinSCP|WinSCP]] でセキュアなコピー
* [[:ja:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* [[:ja:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] クライアントを使用。
* ホスティング会社がウェブブラウザ経由で使用できるファイルマネージャーを用意しているかもしれません。ご自分が契約しているプロバイダーを調べましょう。
* その他の方法。 これらのプロトコルの一覧は [[w:List of file transfer protocols]] にあります

===準備===

{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=MediaWikiに含まれるUPGRADE テキストファイル}}を読みましょう。

# 要件を確認する
# RELEASE-NOTES ファイルを読む
# UPGRADE ファイルを読む
# 既存のファイルとデータベースをバックアップする
# 新しいファイルを展開する
# 拡張機能をアップグレードする
# 更新スクリプトを実行してデータベースをチェックする
# アップグレードをテストする
# 過去にインストールしたバージョンに由来する残ったファイルを除去する

== システム要件の確認 == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} の要件は以下の通りです:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* 以下のうちいずれか 1 つ:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

バージョン1.36から2世代前のLTSリリースバージョンからのアップグレードしかサポートされなくなります（[[phab:T259771]]参照）。さらに古いバージョンのMediaWikiを使用している場合は、アップグレードにいくつかの段階を踏む必要があります。
すなわち、1.23 以前から 1.36 にアップグレードする場合は、まず 1.23 ウィキを 1.27 (または 1.35) にアップグレードする必要があり、その後 1.27 (または 1.35) から 1.36 にアップグレードできるようになります。

PostgreSQL をお使いの場合は、{{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}} もお読みください。

詳細情報については、{{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} および {{ll|Compatibility}} をお読みください。

== リリースノートを読む ==
配布物の tarball 内、または [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] からチェックアウト/エクスポートされたファイルの中に、ファイル名が大文字のファイルがいくつかあり、そのうちのひとつに '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|ウィキ]]) が含まれています。
ファイルを開くなら「今」です。今回のリリースでなにが変わっているのかを見てみましょう。
UPGRADEファイルに書かれた説明も読んでください。

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== 保留中のジョブの一掃 ==
性能向上の理由で、データベースのいくつかの動作は先延ばしされており、[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|ジョブキュー]]で管理されています。
それらのジョブはデータベースに格納され、実行すべき動作に関する情報をパラメーターに記録します。
新しいバージョンでジョブのパラメーターの指定方法が変更になり、ジョブの実行が失敗することを避けるために、wikiをアップグレードする前に、保留中のジョブを実行するように強く推奨します。
{{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}}を使用して全ての保留中のジョブを実行し、アップグレードを実行する前にジョブキューを一掃します。

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== 既存のファイルとデータベースをバックアップする ==

:''完全な説明: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

アップグレード・スクリプトは良く管理され安定していますが、上手く行かない可能性はあります。データベース・スキーマを更新処理する前に、Wikiの'''完全な[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|バックアップ]]をしましょう''' 。データベースとファイルのバックアップを両方とも行います。

ウィキはコンテンツです。データベースから表示しています。（キャラクターセットの設定は正確に。最初に LocalSettings.phpを確認しましょう）。SQLデータベース・ダンプの他にXMLダンプを作成するのは良いアイデアです。
:* MySQLの場合、&lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt;コマンドでSQL dumpとXML dumpを使用します。
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQLの場合、databaseのダンプ作成には &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;を使います。以下のように入力してください:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite の場合、バックアップ作成には MediaWiki スクリプトを使用します:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* 画像と他のメディアファイル（&lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリの内容とカスタムロゴ /skins/common/images/wiki.png）
* 設定ファイル。例えば&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;や&lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt;（もしあれば）。
* MediaWikiのプログラムファイル。すべての外装や拡張機能、とくに利用者が修正を加えたもの。

== 新しいファイルの展開 ==

=== tarball パッケージの使用 ===

FTPやコマンドラインを使って、新しいファイルを設置することが出来ます。もし可能ならコマンドラインを使いましょう！FTPを通して数千のファイルを一つづつアップロードするよりもコマンドラインの方がだんぜん速いです。

{{Note|1=tarball はサーバー上の新しい空のフォルダに解凍すべきです。そうせずに新しいバージョンを古いバージョンに直接展開するなら、 [[#Back up existing files and the database|既存ファイルとデータベースのバックアップ]]の指示に従いましょう。そうしないと上書きされて、カスタマイズした内容が分からなくなってしまいます。 tarballを利用者のMediaWikiの最上位フォルダに抽出すると、MediaWikiの古いバージョンのファイルが置き忘れられて、アップグレードされたコードを邪魔するかもしれません。お勧めは新しいファイルを新しいディレクトリに解凍して、それから新しいディレクトリをカスタマイズ（LocalSettings.phpやimagesフォルダ、拡張機能やカスタム外装など）することです。}}

==== FTP コマンドかグラフィカルか ====

コマンドラインからサーバへ接続できない場合、MediaWikiより.tar,gzファイルをダウンロードし、[http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip]で解凍することもできます。

ローカルで解凍したあとは、FTPクライアントアプリケーションでディレクトリとファイルをサーバへアップロードしてください。

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== コマンドライン ====
現在のユーザーがウィキをインストールするディレクトリに対する完全な書き込み権限を所有していない場合は、&lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; でコマンドを実行する必要があるかもしれません。
tarball パッケージを解凍すると、新しいバージョン用の新規ディレクトリが作成されます。古いバージョンをインストールしたディレクトリから設定ファイルや画像ディレクトリをコピーします:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

（Open）Solaris の利用者は&lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;を使用するか、または:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===その他のファイル===

tarballを展開した後、古いバージョンをインストールしたディレクトリから新しい方へ幾つかのファイルやフォルダをコピーします:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ（古いバージョンの場合は&lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ）。初期設定では、ウィキにアップロードした全てのファイルが入っています。所有権と権限を変更してください。&lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt;と&lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt;（ウェブユーザーが&quot;apache&quot;の場合）を実行します。
*  &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ内の拡張機能。出来れば拡張機能も新しいバージョンを取得すべきです。古い拡張機能が新しいバージョンのMediaWikiで動く保証はありません。
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]]を使用している場合は、バックアップからファイルを復元する必要があります。1.24以前は&lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;、1.24以降は&lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt;か&lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt;（ユーザーの設定による）。それからLocalSettings.php に例えば&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;を追加します。
* バージョン1.35では、[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]からロゴを復元し、LocalSettings.phpに設定を追記する必要があるかもしれません（例：&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;）。
* &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; ディレクトリからカスタム外装。
* 古いバージョンでインストールしたファイルや拡張機能に加えた修正。
* .htaccess ファイル（Apacheを使用し、何かルールを定義した場合）

完了したら、新しいフォルダをウェブサーバーの公開フォルダにします。もしくは古いインストールディレクトリの名前を変更して、新しい方を古い方の名前に変更します。

=== Git の使用 ===

{{ll|Download from Git|Git}} を使用する場合は、ファイルをクリーンな場所にエクスポートし、前の節で説明したように、古いカスタマイズ済みのファイルを新しい場所にコピーします。

Composer で使用している外部の PHP ライブラリやウィキメディアのウィキ ファームを保守するために提供されているコレクションもインストールする必要があるでしょう。
インストールや外部ライブラリの更新の詳細は[[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git ダウンロードの説明文書ドキュメント]]で見つけることができます。

=== パッチの使用 ===
小型パッチは通常マイナーなバージョン アップグレードに使用されます。
パッチを適用するには、[[w:patch (Unix)|patch]]をダウンロードしてください。
[https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ ダンプ サイト]からパッチ ファイルを手動でダウンロードして抽出して、下記の wget の指示に従います。
増分パッチなので、バージョンをスキップすることは'''できません'''。

# MediaWikiディレクトリへ &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt;で移ってください。(一般的にLocalSettings.phpがある場所となります。)
# バッチファイルをダウンロードし、&lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt;で解凍してください。
# &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt;を使って変更されることを確認します（''例えば'' &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;）
# 以上がよろしければ、&lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;無しで&lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt;を実行してください。
#「特別:バージョン情報」を確認すると、新しいバージョン番号になっているはずです。

=== エラーを引き起こす可能性がある残留ファイル ===

古いバージョンをインストールしたディレクトリに新しいバージョンを解凍した場合、幾つかの古いファイルが問題を引き起こすかもしれません。

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|プロファイリング]]を使用しないのに、MediaWikiのルートフォルダに&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; ファイルがある場合、&lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;の参照エラーが表示されるかもしれません。
削除するか、名称を変更すれば、&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;ファイルはこのエラーを解決できます。MediaWikiのルートフォルダにある &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;ファイルは将来のプロファイリングのテンプレートとして役立ちます。

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23ではコア外装ファイルの自動発見メカニズムを旧式化しました。このバージョンにアップグレードしたら、&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ内の&lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリや&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ内のサブフォルダを削除してください。それらのフォルダを見つけると、MediaWikiは注意喚起のために警告ログを記録します。（似たような理由でカスタム外装の調整も必要かもしれません）。詳細は{{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}ご覧ください。

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 はコア外装ファイルのパスを変更しました。このバージョンにアップグレードしたら、&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; ディレクトリ内の&lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt;に古いファイルが存在しないようにして下さい。詳細は{{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}をご覧下さい。

== 拡張機能のアップグレード ==

拡張機能の中にはMediaWikiの新しいバージョンで動くようにアップデートされている物があります。そのような拡張機能は必ず最新版にアップグレードしてください。中には拡張機能をカスタマイズするために手動アップデートを実行する必要がある物があるかもしれません。

ディファレント[[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarball]]は拡張機能の一部セット（サブセット）であり、 利用者のMediaWikiコア リリースに応じて正しい機能を選択して、利用者のアップグレードを助けるバージョニングを行います。

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|拡張機能ディストリビューター]] は古いMediaWikiで動作する拡張機能のスナップショットが欲しい人に役立ちます。

もし多くの拡張機能が欲しいなら、[[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|Gitからダウンロードする]]のが最良の選択かもしれません。
もしあなたがGitを持っていなくてもたくさんの拡張機能をアップグレードしたいのなら、mwExtUpgraderを使うことを検討するのがよいかもしれません。

== 今までのLocalSettings.phpの適用 ==

今まで使用してきた古いバージョンの&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;を使う場合、新しいバージョンが&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;を使用できるように&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;を修正する必要があるかもしれません:

=== 外装の登録 ===

MediaWiki 1.24から VectorやMonobookやModernやCologneBlueのような同梱された外装はMediaWiki のコアの一部ではなくなりました。それらを使用するためには&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;に明示的に設定する必要があります。もしそうしないとMediaWiki は外装がインストールされていないと警告します。

以下の設定は、1.24 未満のバージョンからアップグレードして、以前同梱されていた外装の 1 つを使用したい場合に &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; に追加する必要があるものです:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

他の外装は新しい[[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]]システムに未だ適用されていないと思われるので、問題が生じた場合は、外装ごとに適切な登録方法をドキュメント・ページで参照してください。

=== 拡張機能の登録 ===

MediaWiki 1.25より、新しい [[Manual:Extension registration|拡張機能の適用]] システムが使われています。

以前は &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;で以下のようにインクルードしていたと思われます:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

1.25より、以下のように置き換わります:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

拡張機能は新しい拡張機能登録システムを使用するように作られています。
適合しない拡張機能は古い方法を使ってインストールすべきです。
詳細は各拡張機能のページのインストール指示を参照してください。

=== その他の変数 ===
幾つかの変数は旧式になり、廃止された物もあります。
&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; の中にそれらの変数があっても、何の効果もありません。
新しいバージョンでは新しい変数が追加されたり、既存の変数の型が変更になっている事があります。
MediaWikiは変数をまずデフォルトで使用してみて、型が変わっている場合は、後方互換性で使用します。
どのような場合でも、リリースノートより変更点を見てください。

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== 更新スクリプトの実行 ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
MediaWiki データベースの更新には２つの方法があります。１つはコマンドラインから行うもの、１つはウェブブラウザから行うものです。もしサーバーにシェルアクセスが出来るなら、コマンドラインによる更新をお勧めします。その理由はタイムアウトやコネクション・リセットによる更新処理の中断のリスクを減らすことが出来るからです。

スクリプトはMediaWikiが必要とする依存ファイルが見つからない場合はダウンロードを試みます。

=== コマンドライン ===

サーバーのコマンドラインやSSHシェル他を使用しましょう。SSH経由でサーバーに接続してコマンドラインを使用しましょう。ローカルのMicrosoft Windowsのパソコンの場合は、[http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY]でSSHを使いましょう。コマンドラインやシェルで、&lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリを移動して[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]を実行しましょう。

 $ php update.php

Linux サーバーでエラーが表示されたら、root としてコマンドを実行してください (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;)。
Windows 上の単純なインストレーション (例えば {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}} でインストール) の場合:
まず最初にウェブ サーバー (例えば Apache) やデータベース (例えば MySQL) が実行中であることを確認してください。
それから &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt; を実行します (右クリックで「開く」を選択して PHP.exe)。
スキーマのアップグレードが完了したら、コマンド プロンプトの結果ウィンドウは自動的に閉じるようです。

PHPのバージョンが古すぎます、MediaWiki には新しいバージョンが必要です（your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version）というメッセージが表示されるかもしれません。
そのメッセージが表示された後、更新は中止されます。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

MediaWikiは既存のスキーマを検査して、新しいコードが動くように更新し、必要に応じてテーブルやカラムを追加します。

{{Note|1=[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|共有データベース]]を使用している場合、 共有テーブルを更新したいなら&lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt;パラメーターを付けてください。そうしないと更新スクリプトがテーブルを操作できません。}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

==== ALTER command denied to user エラー（類似エラー）の対処法 ====

スクリプトが以下のようなメッセージと共に中断することがあります:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

これは (最上位ディレクトリにある) {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} の {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} と {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} の設定を確認しなさいと言う意味です。そこにはスクリプトがデータベースに接続するために必要なユーザー名とパスワードの設定があります。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== unexpected T_STRING エラーの対処法 ====

コマンドラインからupdate.phpを実行している場合は、以下のようなエラーに出くわす可能性があります。

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

このエラーはPHP4でupdate.phpを実行している場合に起こります。

ホスティング会社がPHP4とPHP5の両方に対応している場合は、以下の手順を実行します:

# コマンドラインから「whereis php5」を実行する。
#PHP5のパスの場所を見つけたら、 php5/binディレクトリの内容をリスト表示する。
# php の実行ファイル (php または php5) が分かったら、完全なパスを入力して update.php を実行する。

以下に例を示します:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

==== register_argc_argv is set to false エラーの対処法 ====

以下のようなエラーが出力されると思われます:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# ~/maintenance に行き、既存の'php.ini'を編集するか、作成してください。 
# 以下のように行を追加します:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt; をもう一度実行します

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===Web ブラウザー ===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''{{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}} も参照してください''

データベースがすでに巨大だったり、稼働率が高い場合は、ウェブアップデートを使用すべきではありません。その理由は例えば''maximum_execution_time''に達した時、更新処理はタイムアウトするからです。そういう場合は （Webではなく）コマンドラインから[[update.php]]を使用すべきです。これはまったくもってユーザーのサーバーに「大きすぎるほど大きく」依存します（例えばパフォーマンスやロードやスクリプト実行をどのくらい許すかというPHPの最大実行時間など）。Wikiがウェブアップデートを使用するには大きすぎるのに、ユーザーのホスティング会社がコマンドライン・アクセスを許可しない場合は、Wikiを他のホスティング会社に移す必要があります。できればシェル・アクセスが出来る会社が良いです。

# データベース・メンテナンスを実行する前はいつでも[[Manual:Backing up a wiki|バックアップ]]してください。
# ウェブ ブラウザーで &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt; を開きます。 例えば、ご利用のウィキが &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; にある場合は、&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; を開いてください。
# 使用言語を選択し、「次へ」をクリックします。
# インストールされているウィキが検出されます。画面に表示される指示に従ってアップグレードします。&lt;br/&gt;もし「アップグレードキー」を尋ねられた場合は{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}ファイルを開いて{{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}に割り当てられたキーを探して下さい。

ウェブ・アップデーターが作動しないように思える時があるかもしれません。最初の言語選択画面が表示される代わりに、空のWikiページが表示されるかもしれません。この場合、ユーザーのウェブサーバーがRewriteルールを使用している可能性が高いです（特に[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]）。これは''mw-config''ではウェブアップデーターを表示せず、頭文字が大文字の''Mw-config/''の時は表示します。この場合、''.htaccess''ファイルの名前をアップデートの時だけ変更してください。そうすればウェブ・アップデーターにアクセスすることが出来るでしょう。

{{Warning|1=この方法を使った場合はアップグレード・スクリプトを実行した後に、必ず「'''.htaccessファイルの名称を元に戻して'''」ください。そうしないとshort URLやもしかすると他の物が壊れます！}}

== 更新のテスト ==

アップグレードが完了したら、ウェブブラウザでwikiを見て、以下の操作が期待通りに出来るか確認しましょう:

* 複数のページの閲覧
* 複数のページの編集
* ファイルを１つアップロード
* [[Special:Version]]を開いて、表示されるバージョンが正しいか、拡張機能があるかを確認します。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

== よくある質問 ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
=== アップグレードはどのくらい大変ですか? ===

もし修正したファイルが{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}だけで、1.5以降からアップグレードするなら、作業はとても単純です。人間の作業は数分だけです。データベース・スキーマの変更時間はユーザーのデータベースの大きさに比例します。数百万ページのWikiなら数時間かかる可能性があります。しかし千ページ以下の典型的な大きさなら、通常は数秒で完了します。

例えば {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 から {{MW legacy release number}} のようにメジャー バージョンが同じの「マイナー アップグレード」では、スキーマの変更は全く必要ありません。
利用者はファイルの更新だけで済みます。データベースの更新は必要ありません。従ってアップデーター スクリプトの実行は必要ありません。

1.4以前からのアップグレードは複雑になる可能性があります。その理由はUTF-8以外の文字セットへの対応が廃止され、大量の文章データを並べ替えるソート構造が変わったからです。&lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt;ファイルの関連する節を読んで下さい。

あなたが私たちのソースコードを修正していて、修正を上書きされたくない場合は、アップグレードは複雑になります。[http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff]、[http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch]、[http://meldmerge.org/ Meld]や[http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge]のようなツールが役に立つかもしれません。あなたが維持管理がなされていない拡張機能を使用している場合も、手間がかかる可能性があります。MediaWikiを更新する時は、拡張機能も一緒に更新しましょう。

あなたが外装を修正したり、カスタム外装を使用している場合は、それらが新しいバージョンのMediaWikiで動くように調整しなければならなくなる可能性が高いでしょう。

{{Tip|1=毎度毎度「グローバル」CSSやJS（JavaScript）ファイルにパッチを当てる代わりに、単純にMediaWiki:Common.jsや MediaWiki:Common.css ページにコードを追加することも出来ます。それらがデータベースの一部になっていれば、アップグレード後に再利用されるので、今後はMediaWiki のコアファイルにパッチを当てなくて済みます。}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== 本当に古いバージョンからどのようにアップグレードすれば良いでしょうか？一段階で済みますか？何段階もかかりますか？ ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
（例えばMySQLの）Latin-1のウィキのデータベース・ダンプを行いたい場合、{{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} テーブルの&lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt;の型が&lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;であることを確認してください。&lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;では文字エンコーディングの問題を避けられません。

'''MediaWiki 1.5 以降'''から '''1.35''' にアップグレードする場合は、古いバージョンから最新の安定バージョンに1ステップでアップグレードできます。
数多くの報告や自動テストが非常に上手く行くと指示しています。
あなたがもしそれを信じられないなら、[[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|メーリングリストのこの投稿]]を読んで下さい。
しかし注意して頂きたいことは、もしあなたが古い版から更新するならば、直前の版から更新する時よりもPHPエラーに遭遇する場合が多くなります。
バージョンをスキップしていなければ、とにかくこれらのエラーを受け取っていたでしょうが、エラーは個々の更新に関連付けられていたでしょう。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
この場合、更新が更に難しくなるでしょうが、あなたが飛ばした途中の版に更新すれば、その不具合が起きないことをお忘れなく！

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== バックアップは第一にするべきですか? ===

簡潔な回答: はい。

長い回答：a) あなたは自分のデータをどのくらい高く評価するか、b) バックアップ作成がどのくらい大変か、c) あなたはMySQLの保守管理にどのくらい自信があるかによります。 

アップグレードに失敗すると、あなたのデータベースは２つの版の間で矛盾した状態になるかもしれません。
更新中にPHPやMySQLエラーが発生すると、あなたのデータベースは一部だけ更新された状態になってしまうかもしれません。
そのような状況でも、たくさん手作業をすれば、なんとか問題を修正できるかもしれません。
しかし''もっと簡単な方法''があります。それはupdate.phpを実行して足踏みをする前にちょっとデータベースをバックアップすることであり、その後も継続的に行う事です。
そうしないと不要な作業を何時間もすることになるかもしれませんよ。

復旧は複雑になりがちです。
もしあなたがバックアップを怠って、更新関係の破損から復旧したいと助けを求めても、サポート フォーラムのボランティア達は好印象を持たないでしょう。
よりよい対応は、あなたがご自分のバックアップで復旧して、[[phab:maniphest/task/create/|MediaWiki プロジェクトの担当者]]に更新処理の不具合を報告することです。

=== 自分のLocalSettings.phpを長持ちさせることは出来ますか？ ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;はい、しかしユーザーは幾つかのマイナーな変更を行わなければならないかもしれません。$localsettingsのフォーマットは大部分が後方互換性です。 LocalSettings.phpの互換性を壊すような変更は[[Release notes|リリースノート]]の「後方互換性のない変更」節に文章化されて公表されます。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== アップグレード中にwikiをオンラインに出来ますか？ ===

一般的にはYESです。しかしGitは一時的に（数秒）Wikiを壊す可能性があります。

MediaWikiのマイナーリリース間のアップデートなら、行うべきことはソースファイルを更新するだけです。

注意: 以下はコマンドラインによる操作を想定しています。MediaWikiのメジャーリリース間のアップデートを行う場合に推奨される手順は以下の通りです:

# MediaWikiの新バージョンを新規ディレクトリに解凍します。
# 新しいバージョンのディレクトリの準備: 古いバージョンのディレクトリから設定済みの LocalSettings.php をコピーし、インストール済みの拡張機能やカスタム外装 (ある場合) をコピーします。LocalSettings.php の {{wg|Logo}} および {{wg|Logos}} の設定を確認して、必要な場合はロゴ ファイルを古いバージョンのディレクトリから新しい方にコピーします。
# 新しいバージョンのリリースノートに、LocalSettings.php に行う必要のある変更がないか調べます。
# 古いバージョンのディレクトリの LocalSettings.php に以下の変数を挿入して、データベースを読み取り専用にする。アップグレード処理の間に利用者が編集しようとすると、このメッセージが表示されます:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
# [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|更新スクリプト]]またはウェブ アップデーターを新バージョンのディレクトリで実行する。
# 古いバージョンのディレクトリ内の images サブ ディレクトリから新バージョンのディレクトリに画像をコピーする。
# 古いバージョンのディレクトリと新バージョンのディレクトリを交換する。

===アップグレードする理由===
:''新リリースの通知を受けるために [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] を購読しましょう。''

[[#How hard is it to upgrade?|普通のアップグレードなら十分に簡単]]で、[[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|ご利用のバージョンから最新バージョンへひとっ飛び]]に、[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|ウェブブラウザーでアップグレード]]も可能だからです。

最近のリリースではあなたのウィキやホストを荒らし行為から守り安全に保つためのセキュリティ修正を受け取れる一方で、旧版のリリースでは ({{ll|Version lifecycle}} を見れば分かるように) 受け取れません。このセキュリティ修正はアップグレードを決意するのに十分な理由となるはずです。

新しいメジャーリリースはあなたが使いたくなるような新しい機能を備えています。詳細はリリース・ノートをご覧ください。非常に古いバージョンからアップグレードすることを、あなたの上司に納得させるための根拠はこれです：

* {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}} 以降、[[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|編集内容を保存前にプレビューできるようになりました]] (差分表示と同じように)。
* {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}} 以降、[[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|取り消しボタン]]を利用できるようになりました。
* {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}} 以降、[[Special:NewPages]]の[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|巡回]]ははるかに簡単になりました。
* {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}} 以降、[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|改名]] (移動) できるようになりました。
* {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}} 以降、自動的に[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|二重リダイレクトを修正]]することができるようになりました。
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}} 以降、{{ll|InstantCommons}} が利用可能になりました。
* 適切なキャッシングがある場合、1.17 以降では {{ll|ResourceLoader}} はページの読み込み速度を大幅に最適化するようになりました。
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} で外装システムが改造され、既存の外装の一部を自分の外装で再利用しやすくなりました。
* [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]] 以降、[[m:Help:Diff|差分]]は読みやすくなりました。
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]]以降、荒らしとの戦い（パトロール）はそれほど時間がかからなくなりました。
* [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]]では、より良いセキュリティを可能にするためにパスワードの保存が改善されました。
* [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]]以降、[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|最近の更新の強化]]
* [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]]では、[[ResourceLoader|「ResourceLoader」メカニズムが改良されました]]
* [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]]では、セッション管理が改訂され、利用者認証管理も完全に近代化されました。 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

同様に {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} で、私たちは改良された編集エディタや荒らし防止ツールの ConfirmEdit や Nuke のような[[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|必要不可欠な拡張機能を同梱]]し始めました。最新版で私たちはより多くの拡張機能を追加しつづけます。
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== 関連項目 ==

* Greg Sabino Mullaneのブログで[http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html ポイント・リリース（マイナーな更新）に関する詳細]を知ることが出来ます。
*  [[Project:Support desk]] 上手く行かない場合や助けが必要な場合
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - バックアップに失敗した場合
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>jwkogq6jmhjkn0mu62kei4dcku79ff2</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402981</id>
      <parentid>5402936</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:48:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="50210" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== 基本的な概要 ==

=== ファイル転送 ===

ファイル転送の方法を選択してください:

* [[:ja:GNU Wget|wget]]
* [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] または [[:ja:WinSCP|WinSCP]] でセキュアなコピー
* [[:ja:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* [[:ja:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] クライアントを使用。
* ホスティング会社がウェブブラウザ経由で使用できるファイルマネージャーを用意しているかもしれません。ご自分が契約しているプロバイダーを調べましょう。
* その他の方法。 これらのプロトコルの一覧は [[w:List of file transfer protocols]] にあります

===準備===

{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=MediaWikiに含まれるUPGRADE テキストファイル}}を読みましょう。

# 要件を確認する
# RELEASE-NOTES ファイルを読む
# UPGRADE ファイルを読む
# 既存のファイルとデータベースをバックアップする
# 新しいファイルを展開する
# 拡張機能をアップグレードする
# 更新スクリプトを実行してデータベースをチェックする
# アップグレードをテストする
# 過去にインストールしたバージョンに由来する残ったファイルを除去する

== システム要件の確認 == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} の要件は以下の通りです:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* 以下のうちいずれか 1 つ:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

バージョン1.36から2世代前のLTSリリースバージョンからのアップグレードしかサポートされなくなります（[[phab:T259771]]参照）。さらに古いバージョンのMediaWikiを使用している場合は、アップグレードにいくつかの段階を踏む必要があります。
すなわち、1.23 以前から 1.36 にアップグレードする場合は、まず 1.23 ウィキを 1.27 (または 1.35) にアップグレードする必要があり、その後 1.27 (または 1.35) から 1.36 にアップグレードできるようになります。

PostgreSQL をお使いの場合は、{{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}} もお読みください。

詳細情報については、{{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} および {{ll|Compatibility}} をお読みください。

== リリースノートを読む ==
配布物の tarball 内、または [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] からチェックアウト/エクスポートされたファイルの中に、ファイル名が大文字のファイルがいくつかあり、そのうちのひとつに '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|ウィキ]]) が含まれています。
ファイルを開くなら「今」です。今回のリリースでなにが変わっているのかを見てみましょう。
UPGRADEファイルに書かれた説明も読んでください。

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== 保留中のジョブの一掃 ==
性能向上の理由で、データベースのいくつかの動作は先延ばしされており、[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|ジョブキュー]]で管理されています。
それらのジョブはデータベースに格納され、実行すべき動作に関する情報をパラメーターに記録します。
新しいバージョンでジョブのパラメーターの指定方法が変更になり、ジョブの実行が失敗することを避けるために、wikiをアップグレードする前に、保留中のジョブを実行するように強く推奨します。
{{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}}を使用して全ての保留中のジョブを実行し、アップグレードを実行する前にジョブキューを一掃します。

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== 既存のファイルとデータベースをバックアップする ==

:''完全な説明: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

アップグレード・スクリプトは良く管理され安定していますが、上手く行かない可能性はあります。データベース・スキーマを更新処理する前に、Wikiの'''完全な[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|バックアップ]]をしましょう''' 。データベースとファイルのバックアップを両方とも行います。

ウィキはコンテンツです。データベースから表示しています。（キャラクターセットの設定は正確に。最初に LocalSettings.phpを確認しましょう）。SQLデータベース・ダンプの他にXMLダンプを作成するのは良いアイデアです。
:* MySQLの場合、&lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt;コマンドでSQL dumpとXML dumpを使用します。
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQLの場合、databaseのダンプ作成には &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;を使います。以下のように入力してください:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite の場合、バックアップ作成には MediaWiki スクリプトを使用します:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* 画像と他のメディアファイル（&lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリの内容とカスタムロゴ /skins/common/images/wiki.png）
* 設定ファイル。例えば&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;や&lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt;（もしあれば）。
* MediaWikiのプログラムファイル。すべての外装や拡張機能、とくに利用者が修正を加えたもの。

== 新しいファイルの展開 ==

=== tarball パッケージの使用 ===

FTPやコマンドラインを使って、新しいファイルを設置することが出来ます。もし可能ならコマンドラインを使いましょう！FTPを通して数千のファイルを一つづつアップロードするよりもコマンドラインの方がだんぜん速いです。

{{Note|1=tarball はサーバー上の新しい空のフォルダに解凍すべきです。そうせずに新しいバージョンを古いバージョンに直接展開するなら、 [[#Back up existing files and the database|既存ファイルとデータベースのバックアップ]]の指示に従いましょう。そうしないと上書きされて、カスタマイズした内容が分からなくなってしまいます。 tarballを利用者のMediaWikiの最上位フォルダに抽出すると、MediaWikiの古いバージョンのファイルが置き忘れられて、アップグレードされたコードを邪魔するかもしれません。お勧めは新しいファイルを新しいディレクトリに解凍して、それから新しいディレクトリをカスタマイズ（LocalSettings.phpやimagesフォルダ、拡張機能やカスタム外装など）することです。}}

==== FTP コマンドかグラフィカルか ====

コマンドラインからサーバへ接続できない場合、MediaWikiより.tar,gzファイルをダウンロードし、[http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip]で解凍することもできます。

ローカルで解凍したあとは、FTPクライアントアプリケーションでディレクトリとファイルをサーバへアップロードしてください。

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== コマンドライン ====
現在のユーザーがウィキをインストールするディレクトリに対する完全な書き込み権限を所有していない場合は、&lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; でコマンドを実行する必要があるかもしれません。
tarball パッケージを解凍すると、新しいバージョン用の新規ディレクトリが作成されます。古いバージョンをインストールしたディレクトリから設定ファイルや画像ディレクトリをコピーします:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

（Open）Solaris の利用者は&lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;を使用するか、または:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===その他のファイル===

tarballを展開した後、古いバージョンをインストールしたディレクトリから新しい方へ幾つかのファイルやフォルダをコピーします:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ（古いバージョンの場合は&lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ）。初期設定では、ウィキにアップロードした全てのファイルが入っています。所有権と権限を変更してください。&lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt;と&lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt;（ウェブユーザーが&quot;apache&quot;の場合）を実行します。
*  &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ内の拡張機能。出来れば拡張機能も新しいバージョンを取得すべきです。古い拡張機能が新しいバージョンのMediaWikiで動く保証はありません。
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]]を使用している場合は、バックアップからファイルを復元する必要があります。1.24以前は&lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;、1.24以降は&lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt;か&lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt;（ユーザーの設定による）。それからLocalSettings.php に例えば&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;を追加します。
* バージョン1.35では、[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]からロゴを復元し、LocalSettings.phpに設定を追記する必要があるかもしれません（例：&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;）。
* &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; ディレクトリからカスタム外装。
* 古いバージョンでインストールしたファイルや拡張機能に加えた修正。
* .htaccess ファイル（Apacheを使用し、何かルールを定義した場合）

完了したら、新しいフォルダをウェブサーバーの公開フォルダにします。もしくは古いインストールディレクトリの名前を変更して、新しい方を古い方の名前に変更します。

=== Git の使用 ===

{{ll|Download from Git|Git}} を使用する場合は、ファイルをクリーンな場所にエクスポートし、前の節で説明したように、古いカスタマイズ済みのファイルを新しい場所にコピーします。

Composer で使用している外部の PHP ライブラリやウィキメディアのウィキ ファームを保守するために提供されているコレクションもインストールする必要があるでしょう。
インストールや外部ライブラリの更新の詳細は[[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git ダウンロードの説明文書ドキュメント]]で見つけることができます。

=== パッチの使用 ===
小型パッチは通常マイナーなバージョン アップグレードに使用されます。
パッチを適用するには、[[w:patch (Unix)|patch]]をダウンロードしてください。
[https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ ダンプ サイト]からパッチ ファイルを手動でダウンロードして抽出して、下記の wget の指示に従います。
増分パッチなので、バージョンをスキップすることは'''できません'''。

# MediaWikiディレクトリへ &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt;で移ってください。(一般的にLocalSettings.phpがある場所となります。)
# バッチファイルをダウンロードし、&lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt;で解凍してください。
# &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt;を使って変更されることを確認します（''例えば'' &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;）
# 以上がよろしければ、&lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;無しで&lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt;を実行してください。
#「特別:バージョン情報」を確認すると、新しいバージョン番号になっているはずです。

=== エラーを引き起こす可能性がある残留ファイル ===

古いバージョンをインストールしたディレクトリに新しいバージョンを解凍した場合、幾つかの古いファイルが問題を引き起こすかもしれません。

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|プロファイリング]]を使用しないのに、MediaWikiのルートフォルダに&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; ファイルがある場合、&lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;の参照エラーが表示されるかもしれません。
削除するか、名称を変更すれば、&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;ファイルはこのエラーを解決できます。MediaWikiのルートフォルダにある &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;ファイルは将来のプロファイリングのテンプレートとして役立ちます。

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23ではコア外装ファイルの自動発見メカニズムを旧式化しました。このバージョンにアップグレードしたら、&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ内の&lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリや&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ内のサブフォルダを削除してください。それらのフォルダを見つけると、MediaWikiは注意喚起のために警告ログを記録します。（似たような理由でカスタム外装の調整も必要かもしれません）。詳細は{{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}ご覧ください。

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 はコア外装ファイルのパスを変更しました。このバージョンにアップグレードしたら、&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; ディレクトリ内の&lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt;に古いファイルが存在しないようにして下さい。詳細は{{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}をご覧下さい。

== 拡張機能のアップグレード ==

拡張機能の中にはMediaWikiの新しいバージョンで動くようにアップデートされている物があります。そのような拡張機能は必ず最新版にアップグレードしてください。中には拡張機能をカスタマイズするために手動アップデートを実行する必要がある物があるかもしれません。

ディファレント[[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarball]]は拡張機能の一部セット（サブセット）であり、 利用者のMediaWikiコア リリースに応じて正しい機能を選択して、利用者のアップグレードを助けるバージョニングを行います。

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|拡張機能ディストリビューター]] は古いMediaWikiで動作する拡張機能のスナップショットが欲しい人に役立ちます。

もし多くの拡張機能が欲しいなら、[[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|Gitからダウンロードする]]のが最良の選択かもしれません。
もしあなたがGitを持っていなくてもたくさんの拡張機能をアップグレードしたいのなら、mwExtUpgraderを使うことを検討するのがよいかもしれません。

== 今までのLocalSettings.phpの適用 ==

今まで使用してきた古いバージョンの&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;を使う場合、新しいバージョンが&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;を使用できるように&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;を修正する必要があるかもしれません:

=== 外装の登録 ===

MediaWiki 1.24から VectorやMonobookやModernやCologneBlueのような同梱された外装はMediaWiki のコアの一部ではなくなりました。それらを使用するためには&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;に明示的に設定する必要があります。もしそうしないとMediaWiki は外装がインストールされていないと警告します。

以下の設定は、1.24 未満のバージョンからアップグレードして、以前同梱されていた外装の 1 つを使用したい場合に &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; に追加する必要があるものです:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

他の外装は新しい[[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]]システムに未だ適用されていないと思われるので、問題が生じた場合は、外装ごとに適切な登録方法をドキュメント・ページで参照してください。

=== 拡張機能の登録 ===

MediaWiki 1.25より、新しい [[Manual:Extension registration|拡張機能の適用]] システムが使われています。

以前は &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;で以下のようにインクルードしていたと思われます:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

1.25より、以下のように置き換わります:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

拡張機能は新しい拡張機能登録システムを使用するように作られています。
適合しない拡張機能は古い方法を使ってインストールすべきです。
詳細は各拡張機能のページのインストール指示を参照してください。

=== その他の変数 ===
幾つかの変数は旧式になり、廃止された物もあります。
&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; の中にそれらの変数があっても、何の効果もありません。
新しいバージョンでは新しい変数が追加されたり、既存の変数の型が変更になっている事があります。
MediaWikiは変数をまずデフォルトで使用してみて、型が変わっている場合は、後方互換性で使用します。
どのような場合でも、リリースノートより変更点を見てください。

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== 更新スクリプトの実行 ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
MediaWiki データベースの更新には２つの方法があります。１つはコマンドラインから行うもの、１つはウェブブラウザから行うものです。もしサーバーにシェルアクセスが出来るなら、コマンドラインによる更新をお勧めします。その理由はタイムアウトやコネクション・リセットによる更新処理の中断のリスクを減らすことが出来るからです。

スクリプトはMediaWikiが必要とする依存ファイルが見つからない場合はダウンロードを試みます。

=== コマンドライン ===

サーバーのコマンドラインやSSHシェル他を使用しましょう。SSH経由でサーバーに接続してコマンドラインを使用しましょう。ローカルのMicrosoft Windowsのパソコンの場合は、[http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY]でSSHを使いましょう。コマンドラインやシェルで、&lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリを移動して[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]を実行しましょう。

 $ php update.php

Linux サーバーでエラーが表示されたら、root としてコマンドを実行してください (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;)。
Windows 上の単純なインストレーション (例えば {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}} でインストール) の場合:
まず最初にウェブ サーバー (例えば Apache) やデータベース (例えば MySQL) が実行中であることを確認してください。
それから &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt; を実行します (右クリックで「開く」を選択して PHP.exe)。
スキーマのアップグレードが完了したら、コマンド プロンプトの結果ウィンドウは自動的に閉じるようです。

PHPのバージョンが古すぎます、MediaWiki には新しいバージョンが必要です（your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version）というメッセージが表示されるかもしれません。
そのメッセージが表示された後、更新は中止されます。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

MediaWikiは既存のスキーマを検査して、新しいコードが動くように更新し、必要に応じてテーブルやカラムを追加します。

{{Note|1=[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|共有データベース]]を使用している場合、 共有テーブルを更新したいなら&lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt;パラメーターを付けてください。そうしないと更新スクリプトがテーブルを操作できません。}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

==== ALTER command denied to user エラー（類似エラー）の対処法 ====

スクリプトが以下のようなメッセージと共に中断することがあります:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

これは (最上位ディレクトリにある) {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} の {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} と {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} の設定を確認しなさいと言う意味です。そこにはスクリプトがデータベースに接続するために必要なユーザー名とパスワードの設定があります。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== unexpected T_STRING エラーの対処法 ====

コマンドラインからupdate.phpを実行している場合は、以下のようなエラーに出くわす可能性があります。

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

このエラーはPHP4でupdate.phpを実行している場合に起こります。

ホスティング会社がPHP4とPHP5の両方に対応している場合は、以下の手順を実行します:

# コマンドラインから「whereis php5」を実行する。
#PHP5のパスの場所を見つけたら、 php5/binディレクトリの内容をリスト表示する。
# php の実行ファイル (php または php5) が分かったら、完全なパスを入力して update.php を実行する。

以下に例を示します:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

==== register_argc_argv is set to false エラーの対処法 ====

以下のようなエラーが出力されると思われます:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# ~/maintenance に行き、既存の'php.ini'を編集するか、作成してください。 
# 以下のように行を追加します:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt; をもう一度実行します

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===Web ブラウザー ===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''{{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}} も参照してください''

データベースがすでに巨大だったり、稼働率が高い場合は、ウェブアップデートを使用すべきではありません。その理由は例えば''maximum_execution_time''に達した時、更新処理はタイムアウトするからです。そういう場合は （Webではなく）コマンドラインから[[update.php]]を使用すべきです。これはまったくもってユーザーのサーバーに「大きすぎるほど大きく」依存します（例えばパフォーマンスやロードやスクリプト実行をどのくらい許すかというPHPの最大実行時間など）。Wikiがウェブアップデートを使用するには大きすぎるのに、ユーザーのホスティング会社がコマンドライン・アクセスを許可しない場合は、Wikiを他のホスティング会社に移す必要があります。できればシェル・アクセスが出来る会社が良いです。

# データベース・メンテナンスを実行する前はいつでも[[Manual:Backing up a wiki|バックアップ]]してください。
# ウェブ ブラウザーで &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt; を開きます。 例えば、ご利用のウィキが &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; にある場合は、&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; を開いてください。
# 使用言語を選択し、「次へ」をクリックします。
# インストールされているウィキが検出されます。画面に表示される指示に従ってアップグレードします。&lt;br/&gt;もし「アップグレードキー」を尋ねられた場合は{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}ファイルを開いて{{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}に割り当てられたキーを探して下さい。

ウェブ・アップデーターが作動しないように思える時があるかもしれません。最初の言語選択画面が表示される代わりに、空のWikiページが表示されるかもしれません。この場合、ユーザーのウェブサーバーがRewriteルールを使用している可能性が高いです（特に[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]）。これは''mw-config''ではウェブアップデーターを表示せず、頭文字が大文字の''Mw-config/''の時は表示します。この場合、''.htaccess''ファイルの名前をアップデートの時だけ変更してください。そうすればウェブ・アップデーターにアクセスすることが出来るでしょう。

{{Warning|1=この方法を使った場合はアップグレード・スクリプトを実行した後に、必ず「'''.htaccessファイルの名称を元に戻して'''」ください。そうしないとshort URLやもしかすると他の物が壊れます！}}

== 更新のテスト ==

アップグレードが完了したら、ウェブブラウザでwikiを見て、以下の操作が期待通りに出来るか確認しましょう:

* 複数のページの閲覧
* 複数のページの編集
* ファイルを１つアップロード
* [[Special:Version]]を開いて、表示されるバージョンが正しいか、拡張機能があるかを確認します。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

== よくある質問 ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
=== アップグレードはどのくらい大変ですか? ===

もし修正したファイルが{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}だけで、1.5以降からアップグレードするなら、作業はとても単純です。人間の作業は数分だけです。データベース・スキーマの変更時間はユーザーのデータベースの大きさに比例します。数百万ページのWikiなら数時間かかる可能性があります。しかし千ページ以下の典型的な大きさなら、通常は数秒で完了します。

例えば {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 から {{MW legacy release number}} のようにメジャー バージョンが同じの「マイナー アップグレード」では、スキーマの変更は全く必要ありません。
利用者はファイルの更新だけで済みます。データベースの更新は必要ありません。従ってアップデーター スクリプトの実行は必要ありません。

1.4以前からのアップグレードは複雑になる可能性があります。その理由はUTF-8以外の文字セットへの対応が廃止され、大量の文章データを並べ替えるソート構造が変わったからです。&lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt;ファイルの関連する節を読んで下さい。

あなたが私たちのソースコードを修正していて、修正を上書きされたくない場合は、アップグレードは複雑になります。[http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff]、[http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch]、[http://meldmerge.org/ Meld]や[http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge]のようなツールが役に立つかもしれません。あなたが維持管理がなされていない拡張機能を使用している場合も、手間がかかる可能性があります。MediaWikiを更新する時は、拡張機能も一緒に更新しましょう。

あなたが外装を修正したり、カスタム外装を使用している場合は、それらが新しいバージョンのMediaWikiで動くように調整しなければならなくなる可能性が高いでしょう。

{{Tip|1=毎度毎度「グローバル」CSSやJS（JavaScript）ファイルにパッチを当てる代わりに、単純にMediaWiki:Common.jsや MediaWiki:Common.css ページにコードを追加することも出来ます。それらがデータベースの一部になっていれば、アップグレード後に再利用されるので、今後はMediaWiki のコアファイルにパッチを当てなくて済みます。}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== 本当に古いバージョンからどのようにアップグレードすれば良いでしょうか？一段階で済みますか？何段階もかかりますか？ ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
（例えばMySQLの）Latin-1のウィキのデータベース・ダンプを行いたい場合、{{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} テーブルの&lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt;の型が&lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;であることを確認してください。&lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;では文字エンコーディングの問題を避けられません。

'''MediaWiki 1.5 以降'''から '''1.35''' にアップグレードする場合は、古いバージョンから最新の安定バージョンに1ステップでアップグレードできます。
数多くの報告や自動テストが非常に上手く行くと指示しています。
あなたがもしそれを信じられないなら、[[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|メーリングリストのこの投稿]]を読んで下さい。
しかし注意して頂きたいことは、もしあなたが古い版から更新するならば、直前の版から更新する時よりもPHPエラーに遭遇する場合が多くなります。
バージョンをスキップしていなければ、とにかくこれらのエラーを受け取っていたでしょうが、エラーは個々の更新に関連付けられていたでしょう。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
この場合、更新が更に難しくなるでしょうが、あなたが飛ばした途中の版に更新すれば、その不具合が起きないことをお忘れなく！

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== バックアップは第一にするべきですか? ===

簡潔な回答: はい。

長い回答：a) あなたは自分のデータをどのくらい高く評価するか、b) バックアップ作成がどのくらい大変か、c) あなたはMySQLの保守管理にどのくらい自信があるかによります。 

アップグレードに失敗すると、あなたのデータベースは２つの版の間で矛盾した状態になるかもしれません。
更新中にPHPやMySQLエラーが発生すると、あなたのデータベースは一部だけ更新された状態になってしまうかもしれません。
そのような状況でも、たくさん手作業をすれば、なんとか問題を修正できるかもしれません。
しかし''もっと簡単な方法''があります。それはupdate.phpを実行して足踏みをする前にちょっとデータベースをバックアップすることであり、その後も継続的に行う事です。
そうしないと不要な作業を何時間もすることになるかもしれませんよ。

復旧は複雑になりがちです。
もしあなたがバックアップを怠って、更新関係の破損から復旧したいと助けを求めても、サポート フォーラムのボランティア達は好印象を持たないでしょう。
よりよい対応は、あなたがご自分のバックアップで復旧して、[[phab:maniphest/task/create/|MediaWiki プロジェクトの担当者]]に更新処理の不具合を報告することです。

=== 自分のLocalSettings.phpを長持ちさせることは出来ますか？ ===
はい、しかし利用者は幾つかのマイナーな変更を行わなければならないかもしれません。{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} のフォーマットは大部分に後方互換性があります。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== アップグレード中にwikiをオンラインに出来ますか？ ===

一般的にはYESです。しかしGitは一時的に（数秒）Wikiを壊す可能性があります。

MediaWikiのマイナーリリース間のアップデートなら、行うべきことはソースファイルを更新するだけです。

注意: 以下はコマンドラインによる操作を想定しています。MediaWikiのメジャーリリース間のアップデートを行う場合に推奨される手順は以下の通りです:

# MediaWikiの新バージョンを新規ディレクトリに解凍します。
# 新しいバージョンのディレクトリの準備: 古いバージョンのディレクトリから設定済みの LocalSettings.php をコピーし、インストール済みの拡張機能やカスタム外装 (ある場合) をコピーします。LocalSettings.php の {{wg|Logo}} および {{wg|Logos}} の設定を確認して、必要な場合はロゴ ファイルを古いバージョンのディレクトリから新しい方にコピーします。
# 新しいバージョンのリリースノートに、LocalSettings.php に行う必要のある変更がないか調べます。
# 古いバージョンのディレクトリの LocalSettings.php に以下の変数を挿入して、データベースを読み取り専用にする。アップグレード処理の間に利用者が編集しようとすると、このメッセージが表示されます:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
# [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|更新スクリプト]]またはウェブ アップデーターを新バージョンのディレクトリで実行する。
# 古いバージョンのディレクトリ内の images サブ ディレクトリから新バージョンのディレクトリに画像をコピーする。
# 古いバージョンのディレクトリと新バージョンのディレクトリを交換する。

===アップグレードする理由===
:''新リリースの通知を受けるために [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] を購読しましょう。''

[[#How hard is it to upgrade?|普通のアップグレードなら十分に簡単]]で、[[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|ご利用のバージョンから最新バージョンへひとっ飛び]]に、[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|ウェブブラウザーでアップグレード]]も可能だからです。

最近のリリースではあなたのウィキやホストを荒らし行為から守り安全に保つためのセキュリティ修正を受け取れる一方で、旧版のリリースでは ({{ll|Version lifecycle}} を見れば分かるように) 受け取れません。このセキュリティ修正はアップグレードを決意するのに十分な理由となるはずです。

新しいメジャーリリースはあなたが使いたくなるような新しい機能を備えています。詳細はリリース・ノートをご覧ください。非常に古いバージョンからアップグレードすることを、あなたの上司に納得させるための根拠はこれです：

* {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}} 以降、[[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|編集内容を保存前にプレビューできるようになりました]] (差分表示と同じように)。
* {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}} 以降、[[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|取り消しボタン]]を利用できるようになりました。
* {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}} 以降、[[Special:NewPages]]の[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|巡回]]ははるかに簡単になりました。
* {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}} 以降、[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|改名]] (移動) できるようになりました。
* {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}} 以降、自動的に[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|二重リダイレクトを修正]]することができるようになりました。
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}} 以降、{{ll|InstantCommons}} が利用可能になりました。
* 適切なキャッシングがある場合、1.17 以降では {{ll|ResourceLoader}} はページの読み込み速度を大幅に最適化するようになりました。
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} で外装システムが改造され、既存の外装の一部を自分の外装で再利用しやすくなりました。
* [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]] 以降、[[m:Help:Diff|差分]]は読みやすくなりました。
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]]以降、荒らしとの戦い（パトロール）はそれほど時間がかからなくなりました。
* [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]]では、より良いセキュリティを可能にするためにパスワードの保存が改善されました。
* [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]]以降、[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|最近の更新の強化]]
* [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]]では、[[ResourceLoader|「ResourceLoader」メカニズムが改良されました]]
* [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]]では、セッション管理が改訂され、利用者認証管理も完全に近代化されました。 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

同様に {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} で、私たちは改良された編集エディタや荒らし防止ツールの ConfirmEdit や Nuke のような[[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|必要不可欠な拡張機能を同梱]]し始めました。最新版で私たちはより多くの拡張機能を追加しつづけます。
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== 関連項目 ==

* Greg Sabino Mullaneのブログで[http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html ポイント・リリース（マイナーな更新）に関する詳細]を知ることが出来ます。
*  [[Project:Support desk]] 上手く行かない場合や助けが必要な場合
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - バックアップに失敗した場合
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>j2eoyxbn50zmka7z9btwgyrfcx9ojlm</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402983</id>
      <parentid>5402981</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:48:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="50185" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== 基本的な概要 ==

=== ファイル転送 ===

ファイル転送の方法を選択してください:

* [[:ja:GNU Wget|wget]]
* [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] または [[:ja:WinSCP|WinSCP]] でセキュアなコピー
* [[:ja:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* [[:ja:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] クライアントを使用。
* ホスティング会社がウェブブラウザ経由で使用できるファイルマネージャーを用意しているかもしれません。ご自分が契約しているプロバイダーを調べましょう。
* その他の方法。 これらのプロトコルの一覧は [[w:List of file transfer protocols]] にあります

===準備===

{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=MediaWikiに含まれるUPGRADE テキストファイル}}を読みましょう。

# 要件を確認する
# RELEASE-NOTES ファイルを読む
# UPGRADE ファイルを読む
# 既存のファイルとデータベースをバックアップする
# 新しいファイルを展開する
# 拡張機能をアップグレードする
# 更新スクリプトを実行してデータベースをチェックする
# アップグレードをテストする
# 過去にインストールしたバージョンに由来する残ったファイルを除去する

== システム要件の確認 == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} の要件は以下の通りです:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* 以下のうちいずれか 1 つ:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

バージョン1.36から2世代前のLTSリリースバージョンからのアップグレードしかサポートされなくなります（[[phab:T259771]]参照）。さらに古いバージョンのMediaWikiを使用している場合は、アップグレードにいくつかの段階を踏む必要があります。
すなわち、1.23 以前から 1.36 にアップグレードする場合は、まず 1.23 ウィキを 1.27 (または 1.35) にアップグレードする必要があり、その後 1.27 (または 1.35) から 1.36 にアップグレードできるようになります。

PostgreSQL をお使いの場合は、{{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}} もお読みください。

詳細情報については、{{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} および {{ll|Compatibility}} をお読みください。

== リリースノートを読む ==
配布物の tarball 内、または [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] からチェックアウト/エクスポートされたファイルの中に、ファイル名が大文字のファイルがいくつかあり、そのうちのひとつに '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|ウィキ]]) が含まれています。
ファイルを開くなら「今」です。今回のリリースでなにが変わっているのかを見てみましょう。
UPGRADEファイルに書かれた説明も読んでください。

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== 保留中のジョブの一掃 ==
性能向上の理由で、データベースのいくつかの動作は先延ばしされており、[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|ジョブキュー]]で管理されています。
それらのジョブはデータベースに格納され、実行すべき動作に関する情報をパラメーターに記録します。
新しいバージョンでジョブのパラメーターの指定方法が変更になり、ジョブの実行が失敗することを避けるために、wikiをアップグレードする前に、保留中のジョブを実行するように強く推奨します。
{{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}}を使用して全ての保留中のジョブを実行し、アップグレードを実行する前にジョブキューを一掃します。

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== 既存のファイルとデータベースをバックアップする ==

:''完全な説明: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

アップグレード・スクリプトは良く管理され安定していますが、上手く行かない可能性はあります。データベース・スキーマを更新処理する前に、Wikiの'''完全な[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|バックアップ]]をしましょう''' 。データベースとファイルのバックアップを両方とも行います。

ウィキはコンテンツです。データベースから表示しています。（キャラクターセットの設定は正確に。最初に LocalSettings.phpを確認しましょう）。SQLデータベース・ダンプの他にXMLダンプを作成するのは良いアイデアです。
:* MySQLの場合、&lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt;コマンドでSQL dumpとXML dumpを使用します。
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQLの場合、databaseのダンプ作成には &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;を使います。以下のように入力してください:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite の場合、バックアップ作成には MediaWiki スクリプトを使用します:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* 画像と他のメディアファイル（&lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリの内容とカスタムロゴ /skins/common/images/wiki.png）
* 設定ファイル。例えば&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;や&lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt;（もしあれば）。
* MediaWikiのプログラムファイル。すべての外装や拡張機能、とくに利用者が修正を加えたもの。

== 新しいファイルの展開 ==

=== tarball パッケージの使用 ===

FTPやコマンドラインを使って、新しいファイルを設置することが出来ます。もし可能ならコマンドラインを使いましょう！FTPを通して数千のファイルを一つづつアップロードするよりもコマンドラインの方がだんぜん速いです。

{{Note|1=tarball はサーバー上の新しい空のフォルダに解凍すべきです。そうせずに新しいバージョンを古いバージョンに直接展開するなら、 [[#Back up existing files and the database|既存ファイルとデータベースのバックアップ]]の指示に従いましょう。そうしないと上書きされて、カスタマイズした内容が分からなくなってしまいます。 tarballを利用者のMediaWikiの最上位フォルダに抽出すると、MediaWikiの古いバージョンのファイルが置き忘れられて、アップグレードされたコードを邪魔するかもしれません。お勧めは新しいファイルを新しいディレクトリに解凍して、それから新しいディレクトリをカスタマイズ（LocalSettings.phpやimagesフォルダ、拡張機能やカスタム外装など）することです。}}

==== FTP コマンドかグラフィカルか ====

コマンドラインからサーバへ接続できない場合、MediaWikiより.tar,gzファイルをダウンロードし、[http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip]で解凍することもできます。

ローカルで解凍したあとは、FTPクライアントアプリケーションでディレクトリとファイルをサーバへアップロードしてください。

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== コマンドライン ====
現在のユーザーがウィキをインストールするディレクトリに対する完全な書き込み権限を所有していない場合は、&lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; でコマンドを実行する必要があるかもしれません。
tarball パッケージを解凍すると、新しいバージョン用の新規ディレクトリが作成されます。古いバージョンをインストールしたディレクトリから設定ファイルや画像ディレクトリをコピーします:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

（Open）Solaris の利用者は&lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;を使用するか、または:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===その他のファイル===

tarballを展開した後、古いバージョンをインストールしたディレクトリから新しい方へ幾つかのファイルやフォルダをコピーします:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ（古いバージョンの場合は&lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ）。初期設定では、ウィキにアップロードした全てのファイルが入っています。所有権と権限を変更してください。&lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt;と&lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt;（ウェブユーザーが&quot;apache&quot;の場合）を実行します。
*  &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ内の拡張機能。出来れば拡張機能も新しいバージョンを取得すべきです。古い拡張機能が新しいバージョンのMediaWikiで動く保証はありません。
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]]を使用している場合は、バックアップからファイルを復元する必要があります。1.24以前は&lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;、1.24以降は&lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt;か&lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt;（ユーザーの設定による）。それからLocalSettings.php に例えば&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;を追加します。
* バージョン1.35では、[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]からロゴを復元し、LocalSettings.phpに設定を追記する必要があるかもしれません（例：&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;）。
* &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; ディレクトリからカスタム外装。
* 古いバージョンでインストールしたファイルや拡張機能に加えた修正。
* .htaccess ファイル（Apacheを使用し、何かルールを定義した場合）

完了したら、新しいフォルダをウェブサーバーの公開フォルダにします。もしくは古いインストールディレクトリの名前を変更して、新しい方を古い方の名前に変更します。

=== Git の使用 ===

{{ll|Download from Git|Git}} を使用する場合は、ファイルをクリーンな場所にエクスポートし、前の節で説明したように、古いカスタマイズ済みのファイルを新しい場所にコピーします。

Composer で使用している外部の PHP ライブラリやウィキメディアのウィキ ファームを保守するために提供されているコレクションもインストールする必要があるでしょう。
インストールや外部ライブラリの更新の詳細は[[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git ダウンロードの説明文書ドキュメント]]で見つけることができます。

=== パッチの使用 ===
小型パッチは通常マイナーなバージョン アップグレードに使用されます。
パッチを適用するには、[[w:patch (Unix)|patch]]をダウンロードしてください。
[https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ ダンプ サイト]からパッチ ファイルを手動でダウンロードして抽出して、下記の wget の指示に従います。
増分パッチなので、バージョンをスキップすることは'''できません'''。

# MediaWikiディレクトリへ &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt;で移ってください。(一般的にLocalSettings.phpがある場所となります。)
# バッチファイルをダウンロードし、&lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt;で解凍してください。
# &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt;を使って変更されることを確認します（''例えば'' &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;）
# 以上がよろしければ、&lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;無しで&lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt;を実行してください。
#「特別:バージョン情報」を確認すると、新しいバージョン番号になっているはずです。

=== エラーを引き起こす可能性がある残留ファイル ===

古いバージョンをインストールしたディレクトリに新しいバージョンを解凍した場合、幾つかの古いファイルが問題を引き起こすかもしれません。

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|プロファイリング]]を使用しないのに、MediaWikiのルートフォルダに&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; ファイルがある場合、&lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;の参照エラーが表示されるかもしれません。
削除するか、名称を変更すれば、&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;ファイルはこのエラーを解決できます。MediaWikiのルートフォルダにある &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;ファイルは将来のプロファイリングのテンプレートとして役立ちます。

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23ではコア外装ファイルの自動発見メカニズムを旧式化しました。このバージョンにアップグレードしたら、&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ内の&lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリや&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリ内のサブフォルダを削除してください。それらのフォルダを見つけると、MediaWikiは注意喚起のために警告ログを記録します。（似たような理由でカスタム外装の調整も必要かもしれません）。詳細は{{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}ご覧ください。

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 はコア外装ファイルのパスを変更しました。このバージョンにアップグレードしたら、&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; ディレクトリ内の&lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt;に古いファイルが存在しないようにして下さい。詳細は{{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}をご覧下さい。

== 拡張機能のアップグレード ==

拡張機能の中にはMediaWikiの新しいバージョンで動くようにアップデートされている物があります。そのような拡張機能は必ず最新版にアップグレードしてください。中には拡張機能をカスタマイズするために手動アップデートを実行する必要がある物があるかもしれません。

ディファレント[[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarball]]は拡張機能の一部セット（サブセット）であり、 利用者のMediaWikiコア リリースに応じて正しい機能を選択して、利用者のアップグレードを助けるバージョニングを行います。

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|拡張機能ディストリビューター]] は古いMediaWikiで動作する拡張機能のスナップショットが欲しい人に役立ちます。

もし多くの拡張機能が欲しいなら、[[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|Gitからダウンロードする]]のが最良の選択かもしれません。
もしあなたがGitを持っていなくてもたくさんの拡張機能をアップグレードしたいのなら、mwExtUpgraderを使うことを検討するのがよいかもしれません。

== 今までのLocalSettings.phpの適用 ==

今まで使用してきた古いバージョンの&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;を使う場合、新しいバージョンが&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;を使用できるように&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;を修正する必要があるかもしれません:

=== 外装の登録 ===

MediaWiki 1.24から VectorやMonobookやModernやCologneBlueのような同梱された外装はMediaWiki のコアの一部ではなくなりました。それらを使用するためには&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;に明示的に設定する必要があります。もしそうしないとMediaWiki は外装がインストールされていないと警告します。

以下の設定は、1.24 未満のバージョンからアップグレードして、以前同梱されていた外装の 1 つを使用したい場合に &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; に追加する必要があるものです:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

他の外装は新しい[[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]]システムに未だ適用されていないと思われるので、問題が生じた場合は、外装ごとに適切な登録方法をドキュメント・ページで参照してください。

=== 拡張機能の登録 ===

MediaWiki 1.25より、新しい [[Manual:Extension registration|拡張機能の適用]] システムが使われています。

以前は &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;で以下のようにインクルードしていたと思われます:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

1.25より、以下のように置き換わります:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

拡張機能は新しい拡張機能登録システムを使用するように作られています。
適合しない拡張機能は古い方法を使ってインストールすべきです。
詳細は各拡張機能のページのインストール指示を参照してください。

=== その他の変数 ===
幾つかの変数は旧式になり、廃止された物もあります。
&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; の中にそれらの変数があっても、何の効果もありません。
新しいバージョンでは新しい変数が追加されたり、既存の変数の型が変更になっている事があります。
MediaWikiは変数をまずデフォルトで使用してみて、型が変わっている場合は、後方互換性で使用します。
どのような場合でも、リリースノートより変更点を見てください。

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== 更新スクリプトの実行 ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
MediaWiki データベースの更新には２つの方法があります。１つはコマンドラインから行うもの、１つはウェブブラウザから行うものです。もしサーバーにシェルアクセスが出来るなら、コマンドラインによる更新をお勧めします。その理由はタイムアウトやコネクション・リセットによる更新処理の中断のリスクを減らすことが出来るからです。

スクリプトはMediaWikiが必要とする依存ファイルが見つからない場合はダウンロードを試みます。

=== コマンドライン ===

サーバーのコマンドラインやSSHシェル他を使用しましょう。SSH経由でサーバーに接続してコマンドラインを使用しましょう。ローカルのMicrosoft Windowsのパソコンの場合は、[http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY]でSSHを使いましょう。コマンドラインやシェルで、&lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリを移動して[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]を実行しましょう。

 $ php update.php

Linux サーバーでエラーが表示されたら、root としてコマンドを実行してください (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;)。
Windows 上の単純なインストレーション (例えば {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}} でインストール) の場合:
まず最初にウェブ サーバー (例えば Apache) やデータベース (例えば MySQL) が実行中であることを確認してください。
それから &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt; を実行します (右クリックで「開く」を選択して PHP.exe)。
スキーマのアップグレードが完了したら、コマンド プロンプトの結果ウィンドウは自動的に閉じるようです。

PHPのバージョンが古すぎます、MediaWiki には新しいバージョンが必要です（your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version）というメッセージが表示されるかもしれません。
そのメッセージが表示された後、更新は中止されます。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

MediaWikiは既存のスキーマを検査して、新しいコードが動くように更新し、必要に応じてテーブルやカラムを追加します。

{{Note|1=[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|共有データベース]]を使用している場合、 共有テーブルを更新したいなら&lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt;パラメーターを付けてください。そうしないと更新スクリプトがテーブルを操作できません。}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

==== ALTER command denied to user エラー（類似エラー）の対処法 ====

スクリプトが以下のようなメッセージと共に中断することがあります:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

これは (最上位ディレクトリにある) {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} の {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} と {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} の設定を確認しなさいと言う意味です。そこにはスクリプトがデータベースに接続するために必要なユーザー名とパスワードの設定があります。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== unexpected T_STRING エラーの対処法 ====

コマンドラインからupdate.phpを実行している場合は、以下のようなエラーに出くわす可能性があります。

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

このエラーはPHP4でupdate.phpを実行している場合に起こります。

ホスティング会社がPHP4とPHP5の両方に対応している場合は、以下の手順を実行します:

# コマンドラインから「whereis php5」を実行する。
#PHP5のパスの場所を見つけたら、 php5/binディレクトリの内容をリスト表示する。
# php の実行ファイル (php または php5) が分かったら、完全なパスを入力して update.php を実行する。

以下に例を示します:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

==== register_argc_argv is set to false エラーの対処法 ====

以下のようなエラーが出力されると思われます:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# ~/maintenance に行き、既存の'php.ini'を編集するか、作成してください。 
# 以下のように行を追加します:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt; をもう一度実行します

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===Web ブラウザー ===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''{{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}} も参照してください''

データベースがすでに巨大だったり、稼働率が高い場合は、ウェブアップデートを使用すべきではありません。その理由は例えば''maximum_execution_time''に達した時、更新処理はタイムアウトするからです。そういう場合は （Webではなく）コマンドラインから[[update.php]]を使用すべきです。これはまったくもってユーザーのサーバーに「大きすぎるほど大きく」依存します（例えばパフォーマンスやロードやスクリプト実行をどのくらい許すかというPHPの最大実行時間など）。Wikiがウェブアップデートを使用するには大きすぎるのに、ユーザーのホスティング会社がコマンドライン・アクセスを許可しない場合は、Wikiを他のホスティング会社に移す必要があります。できればシェル・アクセスが出来る会社が良いです。

# データベース・メンテナンスを実行する前はいつでも[[Manual:Backing up a wiki|バックアップ]]してください。
# ウェブ ブラウザーで &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt; を開きます。 例えば、ご利用のウィキが &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; にある場合は、&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; を開いてください。
# 使用言語を選択し、「次へ」をクリックします。
# インストールされているウィキが検出されます。画面に表示される指示に従ってアップグレードします。&lt;br/&gt;もし「アップグレードキー」を尋ねられた場合は{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}ファイルを開いて{{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}に割り当てられたキーを探して下さい。

ウェブ・アップデーターが作動しないように思える時があるかもしれません。最初の言語選択画面が表示される代わりに、空のWikiページが表示されるかもしれません。この場合、ユーザーのウェブサーバーがRewriteルールを使用している可能性が高いです（特に[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]）。これは''mw-config''ではウェブアップデーターを表示せず、頭文字が大文字の''Mw-config/''の時は表示します。この場合、''.htaccess''ファイルの名前をアップデートの時だけ変更してください。そうすればウェブ・アップデーターにアクセスすることが出来るでしょう。

{{Warning|1=この方法を使った場合はアップグレード・スクリプトを実行した後に、必ず「'''.htaccessファイルの名称を元に戻して'''」ください。そうしないとshort URLやもしかすると他の物が壊れます！}}

== 更新のテスト ==

アップグレードが完了したら、ウェブブラウザでwikiを見て、以下の操作が期待通りに出来るか確認しましょう:

* 複数のページの閲覧
* 複数のページの編集
* ファイルを１つアップロード
* [[Special:Version]]を開いて、表示されるバージョンが正しいか、拡張機能があるかを確認します。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

== よくある質問 ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
=== アップグレードはどのくらい大変ですか? ===

もし修正したファイルが{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}だけで、1.5以降からアップグレードするなら、作業はとても単純です。人間の作業は数分だけです。データベース・スキーマの変更時間はユーザーのデータベースの大きさに比例します。数百万ページのWikiなら数時間かかる可能性があります。しかし千ページ以下の典型的な大きさなら、通常は数秒で完了します。

例えば {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 から {{MW legacy release number}} のようにメジャー バージョンが同じの「マイナー アップグレード」では、スキーマの変更は全く必要ありません。
利用者はファイルの更新だけで済みます。データベースの更新は必要ありません。従ってアップデーター スクリプトの実行は必要ありません。

1.4以前からのアップグレードは複雑になる可能性があります。その理由はUTF-8以外の文字セットへの対応が廃止され、大量の文章データを並べ替えるソート構造が変わったからです。&lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt;ファイルの関連する節を読んで下さい。

あなたが私たちのソースコードを修正していて、修正を上書きされたくない場合は、アップグレードは複雑になります。[http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff]、[http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch]、[http://meldmerge.org/ Meld]や[http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge]のようなツールが役に立つかもしれません。あなたが維持管理がなされていない拡張機能を使用している場合も、手間がかかる可能性があります。MediaWikiを更新する時は、拡張機能も一緒に更新しましょう。

あなたが外装を修正したり、カスタム外装を使用している場合は、それらが新しいバージョンのMediaWikiで動くように調整しなければならなくなる可能性が高いでしょう。

{{Tip|1=毎度毎度「グローバル」CSSやJS（JavaScript）ファイルにパッチを当てる代わりに、単純にMediaWiki:Common.jsや MediaWiki:Common.css ページにコードを追加することも出来ます。それらがデータベースの一部になっていれば、アップグレード後に再利用されるので、今後はMediaWiki のコアファイルにパッチを当てなくて済みます。}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== 本当に古いバージョンからどのようにアップグレードすれば良いでしょうか？一段階で済みますか？何段階もかかりますか？ ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
（例えばMySQLの）Latin-1のウィキのデータベース・ダンプを行いたい場合、{{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} テーブルの&lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt;の型が&lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;であることを確認してください。&lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;では文字エンコーディングの問題を避けられません。

'''MediaWiki 1.5 以降'''から '''1.35''' にアップグレードする場合は、古いバージョンから最新の安定バージョンに1ステップでアップグレードできます。
数多くの報告や自動テストが非常に上手く行くと指示しています。
あなたがもしそれを信じられないなら、[[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|メーリングリストのこの投稿]]を読んで下さい。
しかし注意して頂きたいことは、もしあなたが古い版から更新するならば、直前の版から更新する時よりもPHPエラーに遭遇する場合が多くなります。
バージョンをスキップしていなければ、とにかくこれらのエラーを受け取っていたでしょうが、エラーは個々の更新に関連付けられていたでしょう。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
この場合、更新が更に難しくなるでしょうが、あなたが飛ばした途中の版に更新すれば、その不具合が起きないことをお忘れなく！

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== バックアップは第一にするべきですか? ===

簡潔な回答: はい。

長い回答：a) あなたは自分のデータをどのくらい高く評価するか、b) バックアップ作成がどのくらい大変か、c) あなたはMySQLの保守管理にどのくらい自信があるかによります。 

アップグレードに失敗すると、あなたのデータベースは２つの版の間で矛盾した状態になるかもしれません。
更新中にPHPやMySQLエラーが発生すると、あなたのデータベースは一部だけ更新された状態になってしまうかもしれません。
そのような状況でも、たくさん手作業をすれば、なんとか問題を修正できるかもしれません。
しかし''もっと簡単な方法''があります。それはupdate.phpを実行して足踏みをする前にちょっとデータベースをバックアップすることであり、その後も継続的に行う事です。
そうしないと不要な作業を何時間もすることになるかもしれませんよ。

復旧は複雑になりがちです。
もしあなたがバックアップを怠って、更新関係の破損から復旧したいと助けを求めても、サポート フォーラムのボランティア達は好印象を持たないでしょう。
よりよい対応は、あなたがご自分のバックアップで復旧して、[[phab:maniphest/task/create/|MediaWiki プロジェクトの担当者]]に更新処理の不具合を報告することです。

=== 自分のLocalSettings.phpを長持ちさせることは出来ますか？ ===
はい、しかし利用者は幾つかのマイナーな変更を行わなければならないかもしれません。{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} のフォーマットは大部分に後方互換性があります。
LocalSettings.php の互換性を壊すような変更は[[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|リリースノート]]の「後方互換性のない変更」節に文章化されて公表されます。

=== アップグレード中にwikiをオンラインに出来ますか？ ===

一般的にはYESです。しかしGitは一時的に（数秒）Wikiを壊す可能性があります。

MediaWikiのマイナーリリース間のアップデートなら、行うべきことはソースファイルを更新するだけです。

注意: 以下はコマンドラインによる操作を想定しています。MediaWikiのメジャーリリース間のアップデートを行う場合に推奨される手順は以下の通りです:

# MediaWikiの新バージョンを新規ディレクトリに解凍します。
# 新しいバージョンのディレクトリの準備: 古いバージョンのディレクトリから設定済みの LocalSettings.php をコピーし、インストール済みの拡張機能やカスタム外装 (ある場合) をコピーします。LocalSettings.php の {{wg|Logo}} および {{wg|Logos}} の設定を確認して、必要な場合はロゴ ファイルを古いバージョンのディレクトリから新しい方にコピーします。
# 新しいバージョンのリリースノートに、LocalSettings.php に行う必要のある変更がないか調べます。
# 古いバージョンのディレクトリの LocalSettings.php に以下の変数を挿入して、データベースを読み取り専用にする。アップグレード処理の間に利用者が編集しようとすると、このメッセージが表示されます:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
# [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|更新スクリプト]]またはウェブ アップデーターを新バージョンのディレクトリで実行する。
# 古いバージョンのディレクトリ内の images サブ ディレクトリから新バージョンのディレクトリに画像をコピーする。
# 古いバージョンのディレクトリと新バージョンのディレクトリを交換する。

===アップグレードする理由===
:''新リリースの通知を受けるために [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] を購読しましょう。''

[[#How hard is it to upgrade?|普通のアップグレードなら十分に簡単]]で、[[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|ご利用のバージョンから最新バージョンへひとっ飛び]]に、[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|ウェブブラウザーでアップグレード]]も可能だからです。

最近のリリースではあなたのウィキやホストを荒らし行為から守り安全に保つためのセキュリティ修正を受け取れる一方で、旧版のリリースでは ({{ll|Version lifecycle}} を見れば分かるように) 受け取れません。このセキュリティ修正はアップグレードを決意するのに十分な理由となるはずです。

新しいメジャーリリースはあなたが使いたくなるような新しい機能を備えています。詳細はリリース・ノートをご覧ください。非常に古いバージョンからアップグレードすることを、あなたの上司に納得させるための根拠はこれです：

* {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}} 以降、[[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|編集内容を保存前にプレビューできるようになりました]] (差分表示と同じように)。
* {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}} 以降、[[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|取り消しボタン]]を利用できるようになりました。
* {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}} 以降、[[Special:NewPages]]の[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|巡回]]ははるかに簡単になりました。
* {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}} 以降、[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|改名]] (移動) できるようになりました。
* {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}} 以降、自動的に[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|二重リダイレクトを修正]]することができるようになりました。
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}} 以降、{{ll|InstantCommons}} が利用可能になりました。
* 適切なキャッシングがある場合、1.17 以降では {{ll|ResourceLoader}} はページの読み込み速度を大幅に最適化するようになりました。
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} で外装システムが改造され、既存の外装の一部を自分の外装で再利用しやすくなりました。
* [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]] 以降、[[m:Help:Diff|差分]]は読みやすくなりました。
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]]以降、荒らしとの戦い（パトロール）はそれほど時間がかからなくなりました。
* [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]]では、より良いセキュリティを可能にするためにパスワードの保存が改善されました。
* [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]]以降、[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|最近の更新の強化]]
* [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]]では、[[ResourceLoader|「ResourceLoader」メカニズムが改良されました]]
* [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]]では、セッション管理が改訂され、利用者認証管理も完全に近代化されました。 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

同様に {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} で、私たちは改良された編集エディタや荒らし防止ツールの ConfirmEdit や Nuke のような[[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|必要不可欠な拡張機能を同梱]]し始めました。最新版で私たちはより多くの拡張機能を追加しつづけます。
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== 関連項目 ==

* Greg Sabino Mullaneのブログで[http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html ポイント・リリース（マイナーな更新）に関する詳細]を知ることが出来ます。
*  [[Project:Support desk]] 上手く行かない場合や助けが必要な場合
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - バックアップに失敗した場合
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>6cvzifu06tkes9y86yqdv15qw4yxhf8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/ro</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>16079</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402262</id>
      <parentid>5400754</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14012" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Selectând Preferinţele mele din partea superioară a paginii logat fiind, se pot modifica preferinţele.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Languages
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Formatul datei ==
&lt;/div&gt;

Următoarele sunt afişate în funcţie de diferitele preferinţe:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Vezi şi ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1m168lz2oulogtdwkbi4qnx2fwds0zy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Tables/vi</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>16436</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402221</id>
      <parentid>5263034</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:59:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36040" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
:''Bảng (Tables)'' có thể được tham khảo ở đây; nếu bạn muốn tìm thêm thông tin về cấu trúc cơ sở dữ liệu (CSDL) bảng, hãy tham khảo tại {{ll|Manual:Database layout}}.

'''Bảng''' có thể đặt trong trang wiki. 
Hãy tránh sử dụng bảng trừ khi thật cần thiết, 
cú pháp tạo bảng thường làm phức tạp hóa việc soạn thảo trang.&lt;ref&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Có thể tạo bảng trong một trang wiki trực tiếp bằng mã HTML hoặc sử dụng wikicode.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Mã HTML đã được mô tả cặn kẽ trên nhiều trang web khác nhau nên sẽ không được đề cập đến ở đây.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lợi điểm của mã wiki là bảng được cấu tạo bởi các ký tự hướng tới dễ dàng hình dung cấu trúc của bảng trong khi soạn thảo hơn là mã HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/ref&gt;

== Sơ lược về bảng ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:60%&quot;
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;| Bắt đầu '''bảng'''.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|+&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''tiêu đề''' bảng, ''tùy chọn'', duy nhất cho mỗi bảng và đặt său ký tự đánh dấu bắt đầu bảng và trước ký tự đánh dấu hàng đầu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|-&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Hàng''', ''tùy chọn với hàng đầu tiên'' - nếu xuất hiện các phân cách cột, wiki mặc định thêm nó vào  dòng đấu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;!&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt; 
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Tên cột''', ''tùy chọn''. Các tên cột liên tiếp có thể để trên cùng một dòng ngăn cách nhau bởi hai dấu chấm than  (!!) hoặc bắt đầu trên một dòng khác, với một dấu chấm than (!).
|- 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Dữ liệu ô''', ''tùy chọn''. Các ô có thể viết trên cùng một dòng với hai dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;||&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), hoặc mỗi ô trên một dòng mới với một dấu gạch (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | kết thúc '''bảng'''.
|}
* Các ký tự trên bắt buộc phải được đặt ở đầu dòng trừ || và !!.
*'''Thuộc tính XHTML.''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Trừ cuối bảng, mỗi ký tự đánh dấu có thể chấp nhận một hay một vài thuộc tính XHTML.&lt;/span&gt; Các thuộc tính phải nằm trên cùng một dòng với ký tự đánh dấu, ngăn cách bởi một khoảng trống.
**Ô và tiêu đề (&lt;nowiki&gt;| hoặc ||, ! hoặc !!, và |+&lt;/nowiki&gt;) chứa nội dung. Vì thế hãy phân tách thuộc tính khỏi nội dung bằng một dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;). Nội dung của ô có thể theo ngay sau hoặc nằm trên dòng kế tiếp.
**Dấu hiệu bảng và hàng (&lt;nowiki&gt;{| và |-&lt;/nowiki&gt;) không trực tiếp chứa nội dung. Không chèn dấu gạch đứng  (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) sau chúng. Nếu chèn dấu gạch đứng sau dấu hiệu bảng hay hàng thì bộ phân tích ngữ pháp sẽ xoá nó cùng với thuộc tính.
*Nội dung có thể (a) theo sau ký hiệu ô trên cùng một dòng, sau những thuộc tính XHTML thêm vào hoặc (b) trong các dòng tiếp theo sau đó. Nội dung có sử dụng những kí pháp wiki cần bắt đầu trên dòng mới như danh sách, tiêu đề hoặc bảng lồng tất nhiên phải được đặt trên dòng riêng.
** '''Dấu gạch đứng trong nội dung.''' Để thêm dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) vào nội dung bảng, sử dụng &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;

==Bảng đơn giản==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Create a table with editor toolbar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In wikitext editor, place the caret where you want to insert a table. Then, in the toolbar, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-section-advanced}}”, then choose [[File:OOjs UI icon table.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table}} button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dialog opens.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the dialog, you can choose whether to enable a table header row, to stylize the table with border and to make the table [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|sortable]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview example is displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also set row and column counts you need. Then, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-insert}}” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, the following code is generated:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;display:flex&quot;&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikicode:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
 {&lt;nowiki/&gt;| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
 |+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
 |-
 ! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em; margin-left:2ex&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center; margin-bottom:1em&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Result:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
|+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
|-
! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Minimal syntax ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Bảng sau đây không có viền và giãn cách, cho thấy cú pháp cấu trúc bảng đơn giản nhất.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

Để cho trông giống bảng hơn thì các ô có thể được viết trên cùng một dòng, phân cách bởi ||. 
Nếu cần xuống dòng, sử dụng {{tag|br|single}}

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||thêm
|-
|Bánh mì    ||   Bánh ngọt     ||   thêm||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
|Bơ   || Kem ||  thêm nữa||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Bánh mỳ||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
| Bơ||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
|}

Khoảng trống phụ có thể được thêm vào trong ô để đoạn mã dễ nhìn hơn mà không ảnh hưởng đến kết quả.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
|}

Ô chữ có thể nhiều hơn hay chứa nhiều cấu trúc phức tạp hơn.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
|}

=== Định dạng bảng ===
Định dạng bảng sử dụng &quot;&lt;code&gt;!&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu chấm than) thay cho &quot;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu gạch đứng). 
Định dạng bảng thường thể hiện như đặt in đậm hay căn lề giữa như mặc định.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
|Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
|Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
!Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
| Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
| Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
! Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
|}

{{note|1=Khi dùng các thuộc tính như mục 'Sản phẩm', sử dụng dấu gạch đứng '&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;' để phân cách. Không dùng dấu chấm than '!'.}}

===Tiêu đề===

'''Tiêu đề bảng''' có thể thêm vào bên trên mỗi bảng như sau.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

=== class=&quot;wikitable&quot; ===

Kiểu cơ bản (nền xám nhạt, có viền, dồn sát và căn lề trái) có thể đặt dễ dàng bằng cách dùng class=&quot;wikitable&quot;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

===HTML chia hàng và chia cột===

bạn có thể dùng thuộc tính HTML '''chia hàng''' và '''chia cột''' với mỗi ô để tạo các bảng phức tạp.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
|Bánh kem
|Bánh ngọt
|Danish
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
|Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
|Bơ
|Sữa chua
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
| Bánh kem
| Bánh ngọt
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Danish&lt;/span&gt;
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
| Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
| Bơ
| Sữa chua
|}
|}

'''Thuộc tính HTML''':
Bạn có thể thêm các '''thuộc tính HTML''' vào bảng. 
Để xem nguồn chính thức về thuộc tính HTML, hãy xem [https://www.w3.org/TR/html401/struct/tables.html trang W3C's đặc tả về bảng của HTML].

=== Thuộc tính của bảng ===

Các thuộc tính đặt sau thẻ bắt đầu bảng (&lt;code&gt;{|&lt;/code&gt;) được áp cho toàn bảng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|12,333.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
|Bơ
|Kem
|1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
|1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của ô ===
Bạn có thể đặt thuộc tính cho từng '''ô''' riêng lẻ. 
Ví dụ, số trông đẹp hơn khi được canh phải.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

Có thể dùng chung thuộc tính '''ô''' khi đặt các ô này trên cùng một dòng. 
Nhớ rằng khi đó '''ô''' phân cách bởi  &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt;, và với mỗi '''ô ''' thuộc tính và giá trị được phân cách bởi &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của hàng ===

Bạn cũng có thể đặt thuộc tính riêng cho mỗi hàng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Attributes on caption and headers===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Attributes can be added to the caption and headers as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | Fruits
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | Fats
|-
|Cam
|Bơ
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Táo
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fruits&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fats&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Cam
| Bơ
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bánh mỳ&lt;/span&gt;
| Bánh kem
|-
| Táo
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Border width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has only one number, it is for all four border sides:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has more than one number, the four numbers are for '''top, right, bottom, left (REMEMBER clockwise order &amp;uarr;&amp;rarr;&amp;darr;&amp;larr;)''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:When there are fewer than 4 values :
&lt;/div&gt; 
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;three values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width is then the same on left and right side.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;two values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; (first value), and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; by default is assigned the value of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width on top is then the same as on bottom; width on left is the same as on right.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;one value i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; and it is the same for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt;. The fourth width are the same and build a regular border. This is a writing shortcut.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Another method to define the widths of the four sides of a cell is to use ''&quot;border-left&quot;, &quot;border-right&quot;, &quot;border-top&quot; and &quot;border-bottom&quot;'':
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width: 100%; overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The HTML attributes (such as &quot;width=&quot;, &quot;border=&quot;, &quot;cellspacing=&quot;, &quot;cellpadding=&quot;) do not need any length unit (the pixel unit is assumed).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are also invalid in HTML 5.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&quot;Cellpadding&quot; is for setting the space between the cell wall and the cell content.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.w3schools.com/tags/att_table_cellpadding.asp HTML table cellpadding Attribute]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The CSS style properties (which override the HTML attributes) require an explicit length unit (if the value is not 0) such as &quot;px&quot; for the pixel.
&lt;/div&gt;
}}

===Với thuộc tính HTML và định dạng CSS===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Các thuộc tính định dạng CSS có thể được thêm vào cùng với thuộc tính HTML hoặc không.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot; 
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Padding===
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%;&quot; 
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-valign=top
| style=&quot;padding:10px&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Column width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Column width''' can be added as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You type:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | This column width is 85% of the screen width
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| '''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| '''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You get:
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This column width is 85% of the screen width&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Accessibility of table header cells===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table header cells do not explicitly specify which table data cells they apply to (those on their right on the same row, or those below them on the same column).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the table is rendered in a visual 2D environment, this is usually easy to infer.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However when tables are rendered on non-visual media, you can help the browser to determine which table header cell applies to the description of any selected cell (in order to repeat its content in some accessibility helper) using a scope=&quot;row&quot; or scope=&quot;col&quot; attribute on table header cells.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases with simple tables, you'll use scope=&quot;col&quot; on all header cells of the first row, and scope=&quot;row&quot; on the first cell of the following rows:&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Item
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Quantity
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Price
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| Total
| $1.90
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Item&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quantity&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Price&lt;/span&gt;
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Total&lt;/span&gt;
| $1.90
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Alignment ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table alignment is achieved by using CSS.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The table alignment is controlled by margins.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A fixed margin on one side will make the table to be aligned to that side, if on the opposite side the margin is defined as ''auto''.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To have a table center aligned, you should set both margins to ''auto''&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, a right-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
And a center-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table floating around text ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you align a table to the right or the left side of the page, the text that comes after the table starts at the end of it, leaving an empty space around the table.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make the text to be wrapped around the table by making the table to ''float'' around the text instead of just aligning it.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be achieved using the &lt;code&gt;float&lt;/code&gt; CSS attribute, which can specify where the table floats to the right side or to the left.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When using ''float'', margins doesn't control table alignment and can be used to specify the margin between the table and the surrounding text.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Cell contents alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The alignment of cell contents can be controlled with 2 different CSS properties: &lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; can be specified at the table, row or individual cells, while &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt; only can be specified at individual rows or cells.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
|}

==Cảnh báo==

===Số âm===
Dấu trừ của số âm có thể gây nhầm lẫn nếu bạn viết như thế này: &lt;code&gt;|-6&lt;/code&gt;. 
Thay vào đó hãy chèn một khoảng trắng phía trước dấu trừ (&lt;code&gt;| -6&lt;/code&gt;) hoặc dùng cú pháp nội dòng (&lt;code&gt;||-6&lt;/code&gt;).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===CSS vs attributes===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Table borders specified through CSS rather than the border attribute will render incorrectly in a small subset of text browsers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Common attributes for columns, column groups and row groups===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The MediaWiki syntax for tables currently offers no support for specifying common attributes for columns (with the HTML element {{tag|col|single}}), column groups (HTML element {{tag|colgroup|content=}}) and row groups (HTML elements {{tag|thead|content=}}, {{tag|tbody|content=}} and {{tag|tfoot|content=}}).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those standard HTML elements are not accepted even in their HTML or XHTML syntax.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the rows and cells (header or data) of the table are rendered within a single implicit row group (HTML element {{tag|tbody|content=}}) without any attributes or styles.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Tables and the Visual Editor (VE) ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing tables}}''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Phab: T108245]]: &quot;Fully support basic table editing in the visual editor&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See the list of tasks. Finished tasks are &lt;s&gt;struck&lt;/s&gt;. It can be difficult to figure out from the technical language there what exactly has been improved, or what features have been added. Please add explanatory info below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Can now move or delete columns and rows ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on a column or row header.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then click on the arrow.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the popup menu click on &quot;Move&quot; or &quot;Delete&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert blank row or column ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
From the same popup menu click on &quot;Insert&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Copy table from web page to Visual Editor ===
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to copy and paste a table from a web page directly into the [[w:WP:Visual Editor|Visual Editor]] (VE).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do so safely, use a sandbox and check the table for proper coding in wikitext source mode and proper display in the Visual Editor and in preview mode.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Helping tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://excel2wiki.toolforge.org/ Excel2Wiki] allows you to copy a stylesheet from Excel, Apache OpenOffice, LibreOffice, or Gnumeric to convert it into wikicode table.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sorting rows of a table|Sorting rows of a table]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;m:Help:Sorting&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Help:Tables]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://www.tablesgenerator.com/mediawiki_tables A visual tool that helps generate tables]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Notes==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Tables]]</text>
      <sha1>slbowk3evb7u9ygw4xsacgy4hoqdvrt</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402224</id>
      <parentid>5402221</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:00:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36051" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
:''Bảng (Tables)'' có thể được tham khảo ở đây; nếu bạn muốn tìm thêm thông tin về cấu trúc cơ sở dữ liệu (CSDL) bảng, hãy tham khảo tại {{ll|Manual:Database layout}}.

'''Bảng (Tables)''' có thể tạo ra trong trang wiki. 
Hãy tránh sử dụng bảng trừ khi thật cần thiết, 
cú pháp tạo bảng thường làm phức tạp hóa việc soạn thảo trang.&lt;ref&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Có thể tạo bảng trong một trang wiki trực tiếp bằng mã HTML hoặc sử dụng wikicode.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Mã HTML đã được mô tả cặn kẽ trên nhiều trang web khác nhau nên sẽ không được đề cập đến ở đây.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lợi điểm của mã wiki là bảng được cấu tạo bởi các ký tự hướng tới dễ dàng hình dung cấu trúc của bảng trong khi soạn thảo hơn là mã HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/ref&gt;

== Sơ lược về bảng ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:60%&quot;
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;| Bắt đầu '''bảng'''.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|+&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''tiêu đề''' bảng, ''tùy chọn'', duy nhất cho mỗi bảng và đặt său ký tự đánh dấu bắt đầu bảng và trước ký tự đánh dấu hàng đầu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|-&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Hàng''', ''tùy chọn với hàng đầu tiên'' - nếu xuất hiện các phân cách cột, wiki mặc định thêm nó vào  dòng đấu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;!&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt; 
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Tên cột''', ''tùy chọn''. Các tên cột liên tiếp có thể để trên cùng một dòng ngăn cách nhau bởi hai dấu chấm than  (!!) hoặc bắt đầu trên một dòng khác, với một dấu chấm than (!).
|- 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Dữ liệu ô''', ''tùy chọn''. Các ô có thể viết trên cùng một dòng với hai dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;||&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), hoặc mỗi ô trên một dòng mới với một dấu gạch (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | kết thúc '''bảng'''.
|}
* Các ký tự trên bắt buộc phải được đặt ở đầu dòng trừ || và !!.
*'''Thuộc tính XHTML.''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Trừ cuối bảng, mỗi ký tự đánh dấu có thể chấp nhận một hay một vài thuộc tính XHTML.&lt;/span&gt; Các thuộc tính phải nằm trên cùng một dòng với ký tự đánh dấu, ngăn cách bởi một khoảng trống.
**Ô và tiêu đề (&lt;nowiki&gt;| hoặc ||, ! hoặc !!, và |+&lt;/nowiki&gt;) chứa nội dung. Vì thế hãy phân tách thuộc tính khỏi nội dung bằng một dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;). Nội dung của ô có thể theo ngay sau hoặc nằm trên dòng kế tiếp.
**Dấu hiệu bảng và hàng (&lt;nowiki&gt;{| và |-&lt;/nowiki&gt;) không trực tiếp chứa nội dung. Không chèn dấu gạch đứng  (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) sau chúng. Nếu chèn dấu gạch đứng sau dấu hiệu bảng hay hàng thì bộ phân tích ngữ pháp sẽ xoá nó cùng với thuộc tính.
*Nội dung có thể (a) theo sau ký hiệu ô trên cùng một dòng, sau những thuộc tính XHTML thêm vào hoặc (b) trong các dòng tiếp theo sau đó. Nội dung có sử dụng những kí pháp wiki cần bắt đầu trên dòng mới như danh sách, tiêu đề hoặc bảng lồng tất nhiên phải được đặt trên dòng riêng.
** '''Dấu gạch đứng trong nội dung.''' Để thêm dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) vào nội dung bảng, sử dụng &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;

==Bảng đơn giản==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Create a table with editor toolbar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In wikitext editor, place the caret where you want to insert a table. Then, in the toolbar, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-section-advanced}}”, then choose [[File:OOjs UI icon table.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table}} button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dialog opens.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the dialog, you can choose whether to enable a table header row, to stylize the table with border and to make the table [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|sortable]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview example is displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also set row and column counts you need. Then, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-insert}}” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, the following code is generated:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;display:flex&quot;&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikicode:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
 {&lt;nowiki/&gt;| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
 |+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
 |-
 ! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em; margin-left:2ex&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center; margin-bottom:1em&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Result:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
|+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
|-
! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Minimal syntax ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Bảng sau đây không có viền và giãn cách, cho thấy cú pháp cấu trúc bảng đơn giản nhất.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

Để cho trông giống bảng hơn thì các ô có thể được viết trên cùng một dòng, phân cách bởi ||. 
Nếu cần xuống dòng, sử dụng {{tag|br|single}}

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||thêm
|-
|Bánh mì    ||   Bánh ngọt     ||   thêm||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
|Bơ   || Kem ||  thêm nữa||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Bánh mỳ||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
| Bơ||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
|}

Khoảng trống phụ có thể được thêm vào trong ô để đoạn mã dễ nhìn hơn mà không ảnh hưởng đến kết quả.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
|}

Ô chữ có thể nhiều hơn hay chứa nhiều cấu trúc phức tạp hơn.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
|}

=== Định dạng bảng ===
Định dạng bảng sử dụng &quot;&lt;code&gt;!&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu chấm than) thay cho &quot;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu gạch đứng). 
Định dạng bảng thường thể hiện như đặt in đậm hay căn lề giữa như mặc định.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
|Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
|Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
!Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
| Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
| Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
! Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
|}

{{note|1=Khi dùng các thuộc tính như mục 'Sản phẩm', sử dụng dấu gạch đứng '&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;' để phân cách. Không dùng dấu chấm than '!'.}}

===Tiêu đề===

'''Tiêu đề bảng''' có thể thêm vào bên trên mỗi bảng như sau.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

=== class=&quot;wikitable&quot; ===

Kiểu cơ bản (nền xám nhạt, có viền, dồn sát và căn lề trái) có thể đặt dễ dàng bằng cách dùng class=&quot;wikitable&quot;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

===HTML chia hàng và chia cột===

bạn có thể dùng thuộc tính HTML '''chia hàng''' và '''chia cột''' với mỗi ô để tạo các bảng phức tạp.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
|Bánh kem
|Bánh ngọt
|Danish
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
|Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
|Bơ
|Sữa chua
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
| Bánh kem
| Bánh ngọt
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Danish&lt;/span&gt;
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
| Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
| Bơ
| Sữa chua
|}
|}

'''Thuộc tính HTML''':
Bạn có thể thêm các '''thuộc tính HTML''' vào bảng. 
Để xem nguồn chính thức về thuộc tính HTML, hãy xem [https://www.w3.org/TR/html401/struct/tables.html trang W3C's đặc tả về bảng của HTML].

=== Thuộc tính của bảng ===

Các thuộc tính đặt sau thẻ bắt đầu bảng (&lt;code&gt;{|&lt;/code&gt;) được áp cho toàn bảng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|12,333.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
|Bơ
|Kem
|1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
|1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của ô ===
Bạn có thể đặt thuộc tính cho từng '''ô''' riêng lẻ. 
Ví dụ, số trông đẹp hơn khi được canh phải.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

Có thể dùng chung thuộc tính '''ô''' khi đặt các ô này trên cùng một dòng. 
Nhớ rằng khi đó '''ô''' phân cách bởi  &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt;, và với mỗi '''ô ''' thuộc tính và giá trị được phân cách bởi &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của hàng ===

Bạn cũng có thể đặt thuộc tính riêng cho mỗi hàng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Attributes on caption and headers===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Attributes can be added to the caption and headers as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | Fruits
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | Fats
|-
|Cam
|Bơ
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Táo
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fruits&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fats&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Cam
| Bơ
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bánh mỳ&lt;/span&gt;
| Bánh kem
|-
| Táo
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Border width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has only one number, it is for all four border sides:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has more than one number, the four numbers are for '''top, right, bottom, left (REMEMBER clockwise order &amp;uarr;&amp;rarr;&amp;darr;&amp;larr;)''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:When there are fewer than 4 values :
&lt;/div&gt; 
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;three values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width is then the same on left and right side.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;two values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; (first value), and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; by default is assigned the value of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width on top is then the same as on bottom; width on left is the same as on right.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;one value i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; and it is the same for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt;. The fourth width are the same and build a regular border. This is a writing shortcut.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Another method to define the widths of the four sides of a cell is to use ''&quot;border-left&quot;, &quot;border-right&quot;, &quot;border-top&quot; and &quot;border-bottom&quot;'':
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width: 100%; overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The HTML attributes (such as &quot;width=&quot;, &quot;border=&quot;, &quot;cellspacing=&quot;, &quot;cellpadding=&quot;) do not need any length unit (the pixel unit is assumed).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are also invalid in HTML 5.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&quot;Cellpadding&quot; is for setting the space between the cell wall and the cell content.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.w3schools.com/tags/att_table_cellpadding.asp HTML table cellpadding Attribute]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The CSS style properties (which override the HTML attributes) require an explicit length unit (if the value is not 0) such as &quot;px&quot; for the pixel.
&lt;/div&gt;
}}

===Với thuộc tính HTML và định dạng CSS===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Các thuộc tính định dạng CSS có thể được thêm vào cùng với thuộc tính HTML hoặc không.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot; 
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Padding===
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%;&quot; 
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-valign=top
| style=&quot;padding:10px&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Column width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Column width''' can be added as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You type:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | This column width is 85% of the screen width
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| '''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| '''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You get:
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This column width is 85% of the screen width&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Accessibility of table header cells===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table header cells do not explicitly specify which table data cells they apply to (those on their right on the same row, or those below them on the same column).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the table is rendered in a visual 2D environment, this is usually easy to infer.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However when tables are rendered on non-visual media, you can help the browser to determine which table header cell applies to the description of any selected cell (in order to repeat its content in some accessibility helper) using a scope=&quot;row&quot; or scope=&quot;col&quot; attribute on table header cells.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases with simple tables, you'll use scope=&quot;col&quot; on all header cells of the first row, and scope=&quot;row&quot; on the first cell of the following rows:&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Item
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Quantity
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Price
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| Total
| $1.90
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Item&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quantity&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Price&lt;/span&gt;
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Total&lt;/span&gt;
| $1.90
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Alignment ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table alignment is achieved by using CSS.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The table alignment is controlled by margins.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A fixed margin on one side will make the table to be aligned to that side, if on the opposite side the margin is defined as ''auto''.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To have a table center aligned, you should set both margins to ''auto''&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, a right-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
And a center-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table floating around text ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you align a table to the right or the left side of the page, the text that comes after the table starts at the end of it, leaving an empty space around the table.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make the text to be wrapped around the table by making the table to ''float'' around the text instead of just aligning it.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be achieved using the &lt;code&gt;float&lt;/code&gt; CSS attribute, which can specify where the table floats to the right side or to the left.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When using ''float'', margins doesn't control table alignment and can be used to specify the margin between the table and the surrounding text.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Cell contents alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The alignment of cell contents can be controlled with 2 different CSS properties: &lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; can be specified at the table, row or individual cells, while &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt; only can be specified at individual rows or cells.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
|}

==Cảnh báo==

===Số âm===
Dấu trừ của số âm có thể gây nhầm lẫn nếu bạn viết như thế này: &lt;code&gt;|-6&lt;/code&gt;. 
Thay vào đó hãy chèn một khoảng trắng phía trước dấu trừ (&lt;code&gt;| -6&lt;/code&gt;) hoặc dùng cú pháp nội dòng (&lt;code&gt;||-6&lt;/code&gt;).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===CSS vs attributes===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Table borders specified through CSS rather than the border attribute will render incorrectly in a small subset of text browsers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Common attributes for columns, column groups and row groups===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The MediaWiki syntax for tables currently offers no support for specifying common attributes for columns (with the HTML element {{tag|col|single}}), column groups (HTML element {{tag|colgroup|content=}}) and row groups (HTML elements {{tag|thead|content=}}, {{tag|tbody|content=}} and {{tag|tfoot|content=}}).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those standard HTML elements are not accepted even in their HTML or XHTML syntax.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the rows and cells (header or data) of the table are rendered within a single implicit row group (HTML element {{tag|tbody|content=}}) without any attributes or styles.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Tables and the Visual Editor (VE) ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing tables}}''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Phab: T108245]]: &quot;Fully support basic table editing in the visual editor&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See the list of tasks. Finished tasks are &lt;s&gt;struck&lt;/s&gt;. It can be difficult to figure out from the technical language there what exactly has been improved, or what features have been added. Please add explanatory info below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Can now move or delete columns and rows ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on a column or row header.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then click on the arrow.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the popup menu click on &quot;Move&quot; or &quot;Delete&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert blank row or column ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
From the same popup menu click on &quot;Insert&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Copy table from web page to Visual Editor ===
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to copy and paste a table from a web page directly into the [[w:WP:Visual Editor|Visual Editor]] (VE).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do so safely, use a sandbox and check the table for proper coding in wikitext source mode and proper display in the Visual Editor and in preview mode.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Helping tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://excel2wiki.toolforge.org/ Excel2Wiki] allows you to copy a stylesheet from Excel, Apache OpenOffice, LibreOffice, or Gnumeric to convert it into wikicode table.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sorting rows of a table|Sorting rows of a table]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;m:Help:Sorting&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Help:Tables]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://www.tablesgenerator.com/mediawiki_tables A visual tool that helps generate tables]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Notes==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Tables]]</text>
      <sha1>ttdoabtcf86j2tecsrcw4txcnsm4rp0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402226</id>
      <parentid>5402224</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:00:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36139" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
:''Bảng (Tables)'' có thể được tham khảo ở đây; nếu bạn muốn tìm thêm thông tin về cấu trúc cơ sở dữ liệu (CSDL) bảng, hãy tham khảo tại {{ll|Manual:Database layout}}.

'''Bảng (Tables)''' có thể tạo ra trong trang wiki. 
Một điều cơ bản mà bạn nên biết, hãy tránh sử dụng bảng trừ khi thật cần thiết nếu muốn tạo ra bảng dữ liệu. 
cú pháp tạo bảng thường làm phức tạp hóa việc soạn thảo trang.&lt;ref&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Có thể tạo bảng trong một trang wiki trực tiếp bằng mã HTML hoặc sử dụng wikicode.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Mã HTML đã được mô tả cặn kẽ trên nhiều trang web khác nhau nên sẽ không được đề cập đến ở đây.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lợi điểm của mã wiki là bảng được cấu tạo bởi các ký tự hướng tới dễ dàng hình dung cấu trúc của bảng trong khi soạn thảo hơn là mã HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/ref&gt;

== Sơ lược về bảng ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:60%&quot;
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;| Bắt đầu '''bảng'''.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|+&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''tiêu đề''' bảng, ''tùy chọn'', duy nhất cho mỗi bảng và đặt său ký tự đánh dấu bắt đầu bảng và trước ký tự đánh dấu hàng đầu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|-&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Hàng''', ''tùy chọn với hàng đầu tiên'' - nếu xuất hiện các phân cách cột, wiki mặc định thêm nó vào  dòng đấu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;!&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt; 
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Tên cột''', ''tùy chọn''. Các tên cột liên tiếp có thể để trên cùng một dòng ngăn cách nhau bởi hai dấu chấm than  (!!) hoặc bắt đầu trên một dòng khác, với một dấu chấm than (!).
|- 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Dữ liệu ô''', ''tùy chọn''. Các ô có thể viết trên cùng một dòng với hai dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;||&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), hoặc mỗi ô trên một dòng mới với một dấu gạch (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | kết thúc '''bảng'''.
|}
* Các ký tự trên bắt buộc phải được đặt ở đầu dòng trừ || và !!.
*'''Thuộc tính XHTML.''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Trừ cuối bảng, mỗi ký tự đánh dấu có thể chấp nhận một hay một vài thuộc tính XHTML.&lt;/span&gt; Các thuộc tính phải nằm trên cùng một dòng với ký tự đánh dấu, ngăn cách bởi một khoảng trống.
**Ô và tiêu đề (&lt;nowiki&gt;| hoặc ||, ! hoặc !!, và |+&lt;/nowiki&gt;) chứa nội dung. Vì thế hãy phân tách thuộc tính khỏi nội dung bằng một dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;). Nội dung của ô có thể theo ngay sau hoặc nằm trên dòng kế tiếp.
**Dấu hiệu bảng và hàng (&lt;nowiki&gt;{| và |-&lt;/nowiki&gt;) không trực tiếp chứa nội dung. Không chèn dấu gạch đứng  (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) sau chúng. Nếu chèn dấu gạch đứng sau dấu hiệu bảng hay hàng thì bộ phân tích ngữ pháp sẽ xoá nó cùng với thuộc tính.
*Nội dung có thể (a) theo sau ký hiệu ô trên cùng một dòng, sau những thuộc tính XHTML thêm vào hoặc (b) trong các dòng tiếp theo sau đó. Nội dung có sử dụng những kí pháp wiki cần bắt đầu trên dòng mới như danh sách, tiêu đề hoặc bảng lồng tất nhiên phải được đặt trên dòng riêng.
** '''Dấu gạch đứng trong nội dung.''' Để thêm dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) vào nội dung bảng, sử dụng &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;

==Bảng đơn giản==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Create a table with editor toolbar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In wikitext editor, place the caret where you want to insert a table. Then, in the toolbar, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-section-advanced}}”, then choose [[File:OOjs UI icon table.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table}} button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dialog opens.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the dialog, you can choose whether to enable a table header row, to stylize the table with border and to make the table [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|sortable]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview example is displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also set row and column counts you need. Then, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-insert}}” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, the following code is generated:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;display:flex&quot;&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikicode:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
 {&lt;nowiki/&gt;| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
 |+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
 |-
 ! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em; margin-left:2ex&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center; margin-bottom:1em&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Result:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
|+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
|-
! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Minimal syntax ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Bảng sau đây không có viền và giãn cách, cho thấy cú pháp cấu trúc bảng đơn giản nhất.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

Để cho trông giống bảng hơn thì các ô có thể được viết trên cùng một dòng, phân cách bởi ||. 
Nếu cần xuống dòng, sử dụng {{tag|br|single}}

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||thêm
|-
|Bánh mì    ||   Bánh ngọt     ||   thêm||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
|Bơ   || Kem ||  thêm nữa||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Bánh mỳ||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
| Bơ||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
|}

Khoảng trống phụ có thể được thêm vào trong ô để đoạn mã dễ nhìn hơn mà không ảnh hưởng đến kết quả.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
|}

Ô chữ có thể nhiều hơn hay chứa nhiều cấu trúc phức tạp hơn.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
|}

=== Định dạng bảng ===
Định dạng bảng sử dụng &quot;&lt;code&gt;!&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu chấm than) thay cho &quot;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu gạch đứng). 
Định dạng bảng thường thể hiện như đặt in đậm hay căn lề giữa như mặc định.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
|Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
|Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
!Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
| Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
| Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
! Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
|}

{{note|1=Khi dùng các thuộc tính như mục 'Sản phẩm', sử dụng dấu gạch đứng '&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;' để phân cách. Không dùng dấu chấm than '!'.}}

===Tiêu đề===

'''Tiêu đề bảng''' có thể thêm vào bên trên mỗi bảng như sau.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

=== class=&quot;wikitable&quot; ===

Kiểu cơ bản (nền xám nhạt, có viền, dồn sát và căn lề trái) có thể đặt dễ dàng bằng cách dùng class=&quot;wikitable&quot;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

===HTML chia hàng và chia cột===

bạn có thể dùng thuộc tính HTML '''chia hàng''' và '''chia cột''' với mỗi ô để tạo các bảng phức tạp.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
|Bánh kem
|Bánh ngọt
|Danish
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
|Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
|Bơ
|Sữa chua
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
| Bánh kem
| Bánh ngọt
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Danish&lt;/span&gt;
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
| Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
| Bơ
| Sữa chua
|}
|}

'''Thuộc tính HTML''':
Bạn có thể thêm các '''thuộc tính HTML''' vào bảng. 
Để xem nguồn chính thức về thuộc tính HTML, hãy xem [https://www.w3.org/TR/html401/struct/tables.html trang W3C's đặc tả về bảng của HTML].

=== Thuộc tính của bảng ===

Các thuộc tính đặt sau thẻ bắt đầu bảng (&lt;code&gt;{|&lt;/code&gt;) được áp cho toàn bảng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|12,333.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
|Bơ
|Kem
|1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
|1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của ô ===
Bạn có thể đặt thuộc tính cho từng '''ô''' riêng lẻ. 
Ví dụ, số trông đẹp hơn khi được canh phải.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

Có thể dùng chung thuộc tính '''ô''' khi đặt các ô này trên cùng một dòng. 
Nhớ rằng khi đó '''ô''' phân cách bởi  &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt;, và với mỗi '''ô ''' thuộc tính và giá trị được phân cách bởi &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của hàng ===

Bạn cũng có thể đặt thuộc tính riêng cho mỗi hàng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Attributes on caption and headers===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Attributes can be added to the caption and headers as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | Fruits
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | Fats
|-
|Cam
|Bơ
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Táo
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fruits&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fats&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Cam
| Bơ
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bánh mỳ&lt;/span&gt;
| Bánh kem
|-
| Táo
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Border width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has only one number, it is for all four border sides:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has more than one number, the four numbers are for '''top, right, bottom, left (REMEMBER clockwise order &amp;uarr;&amp;rarr;&amp;darr;&amp;larr;)''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:When there are fewer than 4 values :
&lt;/div&gt; 
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;three values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width is then the same on left and right side.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;two values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; (first value), and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; by default is assigned the value of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width on top is then the same as on bottom; width on left is the same as on right.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;one value i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; and it is the same for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt;. The fourth width are the same and build a regular border. This is a writing shortcut.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Another method to define the widths of the four sides of a cell is to use ''&quot;border-left&quot;, &quot;border-right&quot;, &quot;border-top&quot; and &quot;border-bottom&quot;'':
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width: 100%; overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The HTML attributes (such as &quot;width=&quot;, &quot;border=&quot;, &quot;cellspacing=&quot;, &quot;cellpadding=&quot;) do not need any length unit (the pixel unit is assumed).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are also invalid in HTML 5.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&quot;Cellpadding&quot; is for setting the space between the cell wall and the cell content.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.w3schools.com/tags/att_table_cellpadding.asp HTML table cellpadding Attribute]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The CSS style properties (which override the HTML attributes) require an explicit length unit (if the value is not 0) such as &quot;px&quot; for the pixel.
&lt;/div&gt;
}}

===Với thuộc tính HTML và định dạng CSS===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Các thuộc tính định dạng CSS có thể được thêm vào cùng với thuộc tính HTML hoặc không.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot; 
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Padding===
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%;&quot; 
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-valign=top
| style=&quot;padding:10px&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Column width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Column width''' can be added as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You type:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | This column width is 85% of the screen width
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| '''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| '''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You get:
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This column width is 85% of the screen width&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Accessibility of table header cells===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table header cells do not explicitly specify which table data cells they apply to (those on their right on the same row, or those below them on the same column).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the table is rendered in a visual 2D environment, this is usually easy to infer.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However when tables are rendered on non-visual media, you can help the browser to determine which table header cell applies to the description of any selected cell (in order to repeat its content in some accessibility helper) using a scope=&quot;row&quot; or scope=&quot;col&quot; attribute on table header cells.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases with simple tables, you'll use scope=&quot;col&quot; on all header cells of the first row, and scope=&quot;row&quot; on the first cell of the following rows:&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Item
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Quantity
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Price
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| Total
| $1.90
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Item&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quantity&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Price&lt;/span&gt;
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Total&lt;/span&gt;
| $1.90
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Alignment ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table alignment is achieved by using CSS.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The table alignment is controlled by margins.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A fixed margin on one side will make the table to be aligned to that side, if on the opposite side the margin is defined as ''auto''.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To have a table center aligned, you should set both margins to ''auto''&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, a right-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
And a center-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table floating around text ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you align a table to the right or the left side of the page, the text that comes after the table starts at the end of it, leaving an empty space around the table.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make the text to be wrapped around the table by making the table to ''float'' around the text instead of just aligning it.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be achieved using the &lt;code&gt;float&lt;/code&gt; CSS attribute, which can specify where the table floats to the right side or to the left.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When using ''float'', margins doesn't control table alignment and can be used to specify the margin between the table and the surrounding text.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Cell contents alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The alignment of cell contents can be controlled with 2 different CSS properties: &lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; can be specified at the table, row or individual cells, while &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt; only can be specified at individual rows or cells.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
|}

==Cảnh báo==

===Số âm===
Dấu trừ của số âm có thể gây nhầm lẫn nếu bạn viết như thế này: &lt;code&gt;|-6&lt;/code&gt;. 
Thay vào đó hãy chèn một khoảng trắng phía trước dấu trừ (&lt;code&gt;| -6&lt;/code&gt;) hoặc dùng cú pháp nội dòng (&lt;code&gt;||-6&lt;/code&gt;).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===CSS vs attributes===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Table borders specified through CSS rather than the border attribute will render incorrectly in a small subset of text browsers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Common attributes for columns, column groups and row groups===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The MediaWiki syntax for tables currently offers no support for specifying common attributes for columns (with the HTML element {{tag|col|single}}), column groups (HTML element {{tag|colgroup|content=}}) and row groups (HTML elements {{tag|thead|content=}}, {{tag|tbody|content=}} and {{tag|tfoot|content=}}).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those standard HTML elements are not accepted even in their HTML or XHTML syntax.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the rows and cells (header or data) of the table are rendered within a single implicit row group (HTML element {{tag|tbody|content=}}) without any attributes or styles.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Tables and the Visual Editor (VE) ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing tables}}''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Phab: T108245]]: &quot;Fully support basic table editing in the visual editor&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See the list of tasks. Finished tasks are &lt;s&gt;struck&lt;/s&gt;. It can be difficult to figure out from the technical language there what exactly has been improved, or what features have been added. Please add explanatory info below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Can now move or delete columns and rows ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on a column or row header.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then click on the arrow.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the popup menu click on &quot;Move&quot; or &quot;Delete&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert blank row or column ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
From the same popup menu click on &quot;Insert&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Copy table from web page to Visual Editor ===
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to copy and paste a table from a web page directly into the [[w:WP:Visual Editor|Visual Editor]] (VE).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do so safely, use a sandbox and check the table for proper coding in wikitext source mode and proper display in the Visual Editor and in preview mode.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Helping tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://excel2wiki.toolforge.org/ Excel2Wiki] allows you to copy a stylesheet from Excel, Apache OpenOffice, LibreOffice, or Gnumeric to convert it into wikicode table.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sorting rows of a table|Sorting rows of a table]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;m:Help:Sorting&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Help:Tables]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://www.tablesgenerator.com/mediawiki_tables A visual tool that helps generate tables]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Notes==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Tables]]</text>
      <sha1>oe8uh9ku3v5tgcshfv4yim5crtyb8f0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402228</id>
      <parentid>5402226</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:01:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36201" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
:''Bảng (Tables)'' có thể được tham khảo ở đây; nếu bạn muốn tìm thêm thông tin về cấu trúc cơ sở dữ liệu (CSDL) bảng, hãy tham khảo tại {{ll|Manual:Database layout}}.

'''Bảng (Tables)''' có thể tạo ra trong trang wiki. 
Một điều cơ bản mà bạn nên biết, hãy tránh sử dụng bảng trừ khi thật cần thiết nếu muốn tạo ra bảng dữ liệu. 
Các lệnh để tạo ra và chỉnh sửa bảng (Table) thường khiến cho việc chỉnh sửa trang (Page) trở nên phức tạp hơn.&lt;ref&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Có thể tạo bảng trong một trang wiki trực tiếp bằng mã HTML hoặc sử dụng wikicode.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Mã HTML đã được mô tả cặn kẽ trên nhiều trang web khác nhau nên sẽ không được đề cập đến ở đây.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lợi điểm của mã wiki là bảng được cấu tạo bởi các ký tự hướng tới dễ dàng hình dung cấu trúc của bảng trong khi soạn thảo hơn là mã HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/ref&gt;

== Sơ lược về bảng ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:60%&quot;
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;| Bắt đầu '''bảng'''.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|+&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''tiêu đề''' bảng, ''tùy chọn'', duy nhất cho mỗi bảng và đặt său ký tự đánh dấu bắt đầu bảng và trước ký tự đánh dấu hàng đầu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|-&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Hàng''', ''tùy chọn với hàng đầu tiên'' - nếu xuất hiện các phân cách cột, wiki mặc định thêm nó vào  dòng đấu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;!&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt; 
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Tên cột''', ''tùy chọn''. Các tên cột liên tiếp có thể để trên cùng một dòng ngăn cách nhau bởi hai dấu chấm than  (!!) hoặc bắt đầu trên một dòng khác, với một dấu chấm than (!).
|- 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Dữ liệu ô''', ''tùy chọn''. Các ô có thể viết trên cùng một dòng với hai dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;||&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), hoặc mỗi ô trên một dòng mới với một dấu gạch (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | kết thúc '''bảng'''.
|}
* Các ký tự trên bắt buộc phải được đặt ở đầu dòng trừ || và !!.
*'''Thuộc tính XHTML.''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Trừ cuối bảng, mỗi ký tự đánh dấu có thể chấp nhận một hay một vài thuộc tính XHTML.&lt;/span&gt; Các thuộc tính phải nằm trên cùng một dòng với ký tự đánh dấu, ngăn cách bởi một khoảng trống.
**Ô và tiêu đề (&lt;nowiki&gt;| hoặc ||, ! hoặc !!, và |+&lt;/nowiki&gt;) chứa nội dung. Vì thế hãy phân tách thuộc tính khỏi nội dung bằng một dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;). Nội dung của ô có thể theo ngay sau hoặc nằm trên dòng kế tiếp.
**Dấu hiệu bảng và hàng (&lt;nowiki&gt;{| và |-&lt;/nowiki&gt;) không trực tiếp chứa nội dung. Không chèn dấu gạch đứng  (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) sau chúng. Nếu chèn dấu gạch đứng sau dấu hiệu bảng hay hàng thì bộ phân tích ngữ pháp sẽ xoá nó cùng với thuộc tính.
*Nội dung có thể (a) theo sau ký hiệu ô trên cùng một dòng, sau những thuộc tính XHTML thêm vào hoặc (b) trong các dòng tiếp theo sau đó. Nội dung có sử dụng những kí pháp wiki cần bắt đầu trên dòng mới như danh sách, tiêu đề hoặc bảng lồng tất nhiên phải được đặt trên dòng riêng.
** '''Dấu gạch đứng trong nội dung.''' Để thêm dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) vào nội dung bảng, sử dụng &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;

==Bảng đơn giản==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Create a table with editor toolbar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In wikitext editor, place the caret where you want to insert a table. Then, in the toolbar, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-section-advanced}}”, then choose [[File:OOjs UI icon table.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table}} button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dialog opens.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the dialog, you can choose whether to enable a table header row, to stylize the table with border and to make the table [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|sortable]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview example is displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also set row and column counts you need. Then, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-insert}}” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, the following code is generated:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;display:flex&quot;&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikicode:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
 {&lt;nowiki/&gt;| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
 |+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
 |-
 ! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em; margin-left:2ex&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center; margin-bottom:1em&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Result:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
|+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
|-
! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Minimal syntax ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Bảng sau đây không có viền và giãn cách, cho thấy cú pháp cấu trúc bảng đơn giản nhất.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

Để cho trông giống bảng hơn thì các ô có thể được viết trên cùng một dòng, phân cách bởi ||. 
Nếu cần xuống dòng, sử dụng {{tag|br|single}}

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||thêm
|-
|Bánh mì    ||   Bánh ngọt     ||   thêm||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
|Bơ   || Kem ||  thêm nữa||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Bánh mỳ||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
| Bơ||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
|}

Khoảng trống phụ có thể được thêm vào trong ô để đoạn mã dễ nhìn hơn mà không ảnh hưởng đến kết quả.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
|}

Ô chữ có thể nhiều hơn hay chứa nhiều cấu trúc phức tạp hơn.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
|}

=== Định dạng bảng ===
Định dạng bảng sử dụng &quot;&lt;code&gt;!&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu chấm than) thay cho &quot;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu gạch đứng). 
Định dạng bảng thường thể hiện như đặt in đậm hay căn lề giữa như mặc định.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
|Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
|Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
!Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
| Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
| Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
! Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
|}

{{note|1=Khi dùng các thuộc tính như mục 'Sản phẩm', sử dụng dấu gạch đứng '&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;' để phân cách. Không dùng dấu chấm than '!'.}}

===Tiêu đề===

'''Tiêu đề bảng''' có thể thêm vào bên trên mỗi bảng như sau.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

=== class=&quot;wikitable&quot; ===

Kiểu cơ bản (nền xám nhạt, có viền, dồn sát và căn lề trái) có thể đặt dễ dàng bằng cách dùng class=&quot;wikitable&quot;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

===HTML chia hàng và chia cột===

bạn có thể dùng thuộc tính HTML '''chia hàng''' và '''chia cột''' với mỗi ô để tạo các bảng phức tạp.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
|Bánh kem
|Bánh ngọt
|Danish
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
|Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
|Bơ
|Sữa chua
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
| Bánh kem
| Bánh ngọt
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Danish&lt;/span&gt;
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
| Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
| Bơ
| Sữa chua
|}
|}

'''Thuộc tính HTML''':
Bạn có thể thêm các '''thuộc tính HTML''' vào bảng. 
Để xem nguồn chính thức về thuộc tính HTML, hãy xem [https://www.w3.org/TR/html401/struct/tables.html trang W3C's đặc tả về bảng của HTML].

=== Thuộc tính của bảng ===

Các thuộc tính đặt sau thẻ bắt đầu bảng (&lt;code&gt;{|&lt;/code&gt;) được áp cho toàn bảng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|12,333.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
|Bơ
|Kem
|1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
|1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của ô ===
Bạn có thể đặt thuộc tính cho từng '''ô''' riêng lẻ. 
Ví dụ, số trông đẹp hơn khi được canh phải.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

Có thể dùng chung thuộc tính '''ô''' khi đặt các ô này trên cùng một dòng. 
Nhớ rằng khi đó '''ô''' phân cách bởi  &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt;, và với mỗi '''ô ''' thuộc tính và giá trị được phân cách bởi &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của hàng ===

Bạn cũng có thể đặt thuộc tính riêng cho mỗi hàng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Attributes on caption and headers===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Attributes can be added to the caption and headers as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | Fruits
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | Fats
|-
|Cam
|Bơ
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Táo
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fruits&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fats&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Cam
| Bơ
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bánh mỳ&lt;/span&gt;
| Bánh kem
|-
| Táo
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Border width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has only one number, it is for all four border sides:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has more than one number, the four numbers are for '''top, right, bottom, left (REMEMBER clockwise order &amp;uarr;&amp;rarr;&amp;darr;&amp;larr;)''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:When there are fewer than 4 values :
&lt;/div&gt; 
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;three values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width is then the same on left and right side.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;two values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; (first value), and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; by default is assigned the value of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width on top is then the same as on bottom; width on left is the same as on right.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;one value i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; and it is the same for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt;. The fourth width are the same and build a regular border. This is a writing shortcut.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Another method to define the widths of the four sides of a cell is to use ''&quot;border-left&quot;, &quot;border-right&quot;, &quot;border-top&quot; and &quot;border-bottom&quot;'':
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width: 100%; overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The HTML attributes (such as &quot;width=&quot;, &quot;border=&quot;, &quot;cellspacing=&quot;, &quot;cellpadding=&quot;) do not need any length unit (the pixel unit is assumed).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are also invalid in HTML 5.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&quot;Cellpadding&quot; is for setting the space between the cell wall and the cell content.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.w3schools.com/tags/att_table_cellpadding.asp HTML table cellpadding Attribute]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The CSS style properties (which override the HTML attributes) require an explicit length unit (if the value is not 0) such as &quot;px&quot; for the pixel.
&lt;/div&gt;
}}

===Với thuộc tính HTML và định dạng CSS===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Các thuộc tính định dạng CSS có thể được thêm vào cùng với thuộc tính HTML hoặc không.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot; 
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Padding===
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%;&quot; 
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-valign=top
| style=&quot;padding:10px&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Column width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Column width''' can be added as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You type:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | This column width is 85% of the screen width
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| '''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| '''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You get:
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This column width is 85% of the screen width&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Accessibility of table header cells===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table header cells do not explicitly specify which table data cells they apply to (those on their right on the same row, or those below them on the same column).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the table is rendered in a visual 2D environment, this is usually easy to infer.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However when tables are rendered on non-visual media, you can help the browser to determine which table header cell applies to the description of any selected cell (in order to repeat its content in some accessibility helper) using a scope=&quot;row&quot; or scope=&quot;col&quot; attribute on table header cells.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases with simple tables, you'll use scope=&quot;col&quot; on all header cells of the first row, and scope=&quot;row&quot; on the first cell of the following rows:&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Item
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Quantity
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Price
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| Total
| $1.90
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Item&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quantity&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Price&lt;/span&gt;
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Total&lt;/span&gt;
| $1.90
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Alignment ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table alignment is achieved by using CSS.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The table alignment is controlled by margins.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A fixed margin on one side will make the table to be aligned to that side, if on the opposite side the margin is defined as ''auto''.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To have a table center aligned, you should set both margins to ''auto''&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, a right-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
And a center-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table floating around text ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you align a table to the right or the left side of the page, the text that comes after the table starts at the end of it, leaving an empty space around the table.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make the text to be wrapped around the table by making the table to ''float'' around the text instead of just aligning it.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be achieved using the &lt;code&gt;float&lt;/code&gt; CSS attribute, which can specify where the table floats to the right side or to the left.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When using ''float'', margins doesn't control table alignment and can be used to specify the margin between the table and the surrounding text.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Cell contents alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The alignment of cell contents can be controlled with 2 different CSS properties: &lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; can be specified at the table, row or individual cells, while &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt; only can be specified at individual rows or cells.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
|}

==Cảnh báo==

===Số âm===
Dấu trừ của số âm có thể gây nhầm lẫn nếu bạn viết như thế này: &lt;code&gt;|-6&lt;/code&gt;. 
Thay vào đó hãy chèn một khoảng trắng phía trước dấu trừ (&lt;code&gt;| -6&lt;/code&gt;) hoặc dùng cú pháp nội dòng (&lt;code&gt;||-6&lt;/code&gt;).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===CSS vs attributes===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Table borders specified through CSS rather than the border attribute will render incorrectly in a small subset of text browsers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Common attributes for columns, column groups and row groups===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The MediaWiki syntax for tables currently offers no support for specifying common attributes for columns (with the HTML element {{tag|col|single}}), column groups (HTML element {{tag|colgroup|content=}}) and row groups (HTML elements {{tag|thead|content=}}, {{tag|tbody|content=}} and {{tag|tfoot|content=}}).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those standard HTML elements are not accepted even in their HTML or XHTML syntax.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the rows and cells (header or data) of the table are rendered within a single implicit row group (HTML element {{tag|tbody|content=}}) without any attributes or styles.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Tables and the Visual Editor (VE) ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing tables}}''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Phab: T108245]]: &quot;Fully support basic table editing in the visual editor&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See the list of tasks. Finished tasks are &lt;s&gt;struck&lt;/s&gt;. It can be difficult to figure out from the technical language there what exactly has been improved, or what features have been added. Please add explanatory info below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Can now move or delete columns and rows ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on a column or row header.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then click on the arrow.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the popup menu click on &quot;Move&quot; or &quot;Delete&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert blank row or column ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
From the same popup menu click on &quot;Insert&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Copy table from web page to Visual Editor ===
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to copy and paste a table from a web page directly into the [[w:WP:Visual Editor|Visual Editor]] (VE).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do so safely, use a sandbox and check the table for proper coding in wikitext source mode and proper display in the Visual Editor and in preview mode.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Helping tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://excel2wiki.toolforge.org/ Excel2Wiki] allows you to copy a stylesheet from Excel, Apache OpenOffice, LibreOffice, or Gnumeric to convert it into wikicode table.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sorting rows of a table|Sorting rows of a table]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;m:Help:Sorting&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Help:Tables]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://www.tablesgenerator.com/mediawiki_tables A visual tool that helps generate tables]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Notes==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Tables]]</text>
      <sha1>88wbr1wj8qj5gc47bxu48jj9x5m4hu0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402230</id>
      <parentid>5402228</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:02:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36222" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
:''Bảng (Tables)'' có thể được tham khảo ở đây; nếu bạn muốn tìm thêm thông tin về cấu trúc cơ sở dữ liệu (CSDL) bảng, hãy tham khảo tại {{ll|Manual:Database layout}}.

'''Bảng (Tables)''' có thể tạo ra trong trang wiki. 
Một điều cơ bản mà bạn nên biết, hãy tránh sử dụng bảng trừ khi thật cần thiết nếu muốn tạo ra bảng dữ liệu. 
Lí do cơ bản là các lệnh để tạo ra và chỉnh sửa bảng (Table) thường khiến cho việc chỉnh sửa trang (Page) trở nên phức tạp hơn.&lt;ref&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Có thể tạo bảng trong một trang wiki trực tiếp bằng mã HTML hoặc sử dụng wikicode.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Mã HTML đã được mô tả cặn kẽ trên nhiều trang web khác nhau nên sẽ không được đề cập đến ở đây.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lợi điểm của mã wiki là bảng được cấu tạo bởi các ký tự hướng tới dễ dàng hình dung cấu trúc của bảng trong khi soạn thảo hơn là mã HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/ref&gt;

== Sơ lược về bảng ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:60%&quot;
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;| Bắt đầu '''bảng'''.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|+&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''tiêu đề''' bảng, ''tùy chọn'', duy nhất cho mỗi bảng và đặt său ký tự đánh dấu bắt đầu bảng và trước ký tự đánh dấu hàng đầu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|-&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Hàng''', ''tùy chọn với hàng đầu tiên'' - nếu xuất hiện các phân cách cột, wiki mặc định thêm nó vào  dòng đấu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;!&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt; 
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Tên cột''', ''tùy chọn''. Các tên cột liên tiếp có thể để trên cùng một dòng ngăn cách nhau bởi hai dấu chấm than  (!!) hoặc bắt đầu trên một dòng khác, với một dấu chấm than (!).
|- 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Dữ liệu ô''', ''tùy chọn''. Các ô có thể viết trên cùng một dòng với hai dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;||&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), hoặc mỗi ô trên một dòng mới với một dấu gạch (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | kết thúc '''bảng'''.
|}
* Các ký tự trên bắt buộc phải được đặt ở đầu dòng trừ || và !!.
*'''Thuộc tính XHTML.''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Trừ cuối bảng, mỗi ký tự đánh dấu có thể chấp nhận một hay một vài thuộc tính XHTML.&lt;/span&gt; Các thuộc tính phải nằm trên cùng một dòng với ký tự đánh dấu, ngăn cách bởi một khoảng trống.
**Ô và tiêu đề (&lt;nowiki&gt;| hoặc ||, ! hoặc !!, và |+&lt;/nowiki&gt;) chứa nội dung. Vì thế hãy phân tách thuộc tính khỏi nội dung bằng một dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;). Nội dung của ô có thể theo ngay sau hoặc nằm trên dòng kế tiếp.
**Dấu hiệu bảng và hàng (&lt;nowiki&gt;{| và |-&lt;/nowiki&gt;) không trực tiếp chứa nội dung. Không chèn dấu gạch đứng  (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) sau chúng. Nếu chèn dấu gạch đứng sau dấu hiệu bảng hay hàng thì bộ phân tích ngữ pháp sẽ xoá nó cùng với thuộc tính.
*Nội dung có thể (a) theo sau ký hiệu ô trên cùng một dòng, sau những thuộc tính XHTML thêm vào hoặc (b) trong các dòng tiếp theo sau đó. Nội dung có sử dụng những kí pháp wiki cần bắt đầu trên dòng mới như danh sách, tiêu đề hoặc bảng lồng tất nhiên phải được đặt trên dòng riêng.
** '''Dấu gạch đứng trong nội dung.''' Để thêm dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) vào nội dung bảng, sử dụng &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;

==Bảng đơn giản==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Create a table with editor toolbar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In wikitext editor, place the caret where you want to insert a table. Then, in the toolbar, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-section-advanced}}”, then choose [[File:OOjs UI icon table.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table}} button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dialog opens.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the dialog, you can choose whether to enable a table header row, to stylize the table with border and to make the table [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|sortable]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview example is displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also set row and column counts you need. Then, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-insert}}” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, the following code is generated:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;display:flex&quot;&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikicode:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
 {&lt;nowiki/&gt;| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
 |+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
 |-
 ! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em; margin-left:2ex&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center; margin-bottom:1em&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Result:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
|+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
|-
! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Minimal syntax ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Bảng sau đây không có viền và giãn cách, cho thấy cú pháp cấu trúc bảng đơn giản nhất.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

Để cho trông giống bảng hơn thì các ô có thể được viết trên cùng một dòng, phân cách bởi ||. 
Nếu cần xuống dòng, sử dụng {{tag|br|single}}

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||thêm
|-
|Bánh mì    ||   Bánh ngọt     ||   thêm||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
|Bơ   || Kem ||  thêm nữa||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Bánh mỳ||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
| Bơ||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
|}

Khoảng trống phụ có thể được thêm vào trong ô để đoạn mã dễ nhìn hơn mà không ảnh hưởng đến kết quả.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
|}

Ô chữ có thể nhiều hơn hay chứa nhiều cấu trúc phức tạp hơn.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
|}

=== Định dạng bảng ===
Định dạng bảng sử dụng &quot;&lt;code&gt;!&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu chấm than) thay cho &quot;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu gạch đứng). 
Định dạng bảng thường thể hiện như đặt in đậm hay căn lề giữa như mặc định.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
|Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
|Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
!Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
| Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
| Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
! Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
|}

{{note|1=Khi dùng các thuộc tính như mục 'Sản phẩm', sử dụng dấu gạch đứng '&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;' để phân cách. Không dùng dấu chấm than '!'.}}

===Tiêu đề===

'''Tiêu đề bảng''' có thể thêm vào bên trên mỗi bảng như sau.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

=== class=&quot;wikitable&quot; ===

Kiểu cơ bản (nền xám nhạt, có viền, dồn sát và căn lề trái) có thể đặt dễ dàng bằng cách dùng class=&quot;wikitable&quot;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

===HTML chia hàng và chia cột===

bạn có thể dùng thuộc tính HTML '''chia hàng''' và '''chia cột''' với mỗi ô để tạo các bảng phức tạp.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
|Bánh kem
|Bánh ngọt
|Danish
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
|Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
|Bơ
|Sữa chua
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
| Bánh kem
| Bánh ngọt
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Danish&lt;/span&gt;
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
| Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
| Bơ
| Sữa chua
|}
|}

'''Thuộc tính HTML''':
Bạn có thể thêm các '''thuộc tính HTML''' vào bảng. 
Để xem nguồn chính thức về thuộc tính HTML, hãy xem [https://www.w3.org/TR/html401/struct/tables.html trang W3C's đặc tả về bảng của HTML].

=== Thuộc tính của bảng ===

Các thuộc tính đặt sau thẻ bắt đầu bảng (&lt;code&gt;{|&lt;/code&gt;) được áp cho toàn bảng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|12,333.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
|Bơ
|Kem
|1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
|1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của ô ===
Bạn có thể đặt thuộc tính cho từng '''ô''' riêng lẻ. 
Ví dụ, số trông đẹp hơn khi được canh phải.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

Có thể dùng chung thuộc tính '''ô''' khi đặt các ô này trên cùng một dòng. 
Nhớ rằng khi đó '''ô''' phân cách bởi  &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt;, và với mỗi '''ô ''' thuộc tính và giá trị được phân cách bởi &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của hàng ===

Bạn cũng có thể đặt thuộc tính riêng cho mỗi hàng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Attributes on caption and headers===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Attributes can be added to the caption and headers as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | Fruits
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | Fats
|-
|Cam
|Bơ
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Táo
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fruits&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fats&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Cam
| Bơ
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bánh mỳ&lt;/span&gt;
| Bánh kem
|-
| Táo
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Border width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has only one number, it is for all four border sides:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has more than one number, the four numbers are for '''top, right, bottom, left (REMEMBER clockwise order &amp;uarr;&amp;rarr;&amp;darr;&amp;larr;)''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:When there are fewer than 4 values :
&lt;/div&gt; 
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;three values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width is then the same on left and right side.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;two values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; (first value), and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; by default is assigned the value of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width on top is then the same as on bottom; width on left is the same as on right.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;one value i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; and it is the same for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt;. The fourth width are the same and build a regular border. This is a writing shortcut.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Another method to define the widths of the four sides of a cell is to use ''&quot;border-left&quot;, &quot;border-right&quot;, &quot;border-top&quot; and &quot;border-bottom&quot;'':
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width: 100%; overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The HTML attributes (such as &quot;width=&quot;, &quot;border=&quot;, &quot;cellspacing=&quot;, &quot;cellpadding=&quot;) do not need any length unit (the pixel unit is assumed).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are also invalid in HTML 5.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&quot;Cellpadding&quot; is for setting the space between the cell wall and the cell content.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.w3schools.com/tags/att_table_cellpadding.asp HTML table cellpadding Attribute]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The CSS style properties (which override the HTML attributes) require an explicit length unit (if the value is not 0) such as &quot;px&quot; for the pixel.
&lt;/div&gt;
}}

===Với thuộc tính HTML và định dạng CSS===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Các thuộc tính định dạng CSS có thể được thêm vào cùng với thuộc tính HTML hoặc không.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot; 
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Padding===
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%;&quot; 
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-valign=top
| style=&quot;padding:10px&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Column width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Column width''' can be added as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You type:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | This column width is 85% of the screen width
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| '''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| '''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You get:
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This column width is 85% of the screen width&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Accessibility of table header cells===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table header cells do not explicitly specify which table data cells they apply to (those on their right on the same row, or those below them on the same column).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the table is rendered in a visual 2D environment, this is usually easy to infer.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However when tables are rendered on non-visual media, you can help the browser to determine which table header cell applies to the description of any selected cell (in order to repeat its content in some accessibility helper) using a scope=&quot;row&quot; or scope=&quot;col&quot; attribute on table header cells.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases with simple tables, you'll use scope=&quot;col&quot; on all header cells of the first row, and scope=&quot;row&quot; on the first cell of the following rows:&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Item
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Quantity
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Price
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| Total
| $1.90
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Item&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quantity&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Price&lt;/span&gt;
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Total&lt;/span&gt;
| $1.90
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Alignment ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table alignment is achieved by using CSS.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The table alignment is controlled by margins.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A fixed margin on one side will make the table to be aligned to that side, if on the opposite side the margin is defined as ''auto''.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To have a table center aligned, you should set both margins to ''auto''&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, a right-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
And a center-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table floating around text ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you align a table to the right or the left side of the page, the text that comes after the table starts at the end of it, leaving an empty space around the table.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make the text to be wrapped around the table by making the table to ''float'' around the text instead of just aligning it.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be achieved using the &lt;code&gt;float&lt;/code&gt; CSS attribute, which can specify where the table floats to the right side or to the left.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When using ''float'', margins doesn't control table alignment and can be used to specify the margin between the table and the surrounding text.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Cell contents alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The alignment of cell contents can be controlled with 2 different CSS properties: &lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; can be specified at the table, row or individual cells, while &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt; only can be specified at individual rows or cells.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
|}

==Cảnh báo==

===Số âm===
Dấu trừ của số âm có thể gây nhầm lẫn nếu bạn viết như thế này: &lt;code&gt;|-6&lt;/code&gt;. 
Thay vào đó hãy chèn một khoảng trắng phía trước dấu trừ (&lt;code&gt;| -6&lt;/code&gt;) hoặc dùng cú pháp nội dòng (&lt;code&gt;||-6&lt;/code&gt;).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===CSS vs attributes===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Table borders specified through CSS rather than the border attribute will render incorrectly in a small subset of text browsers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Common attributes for columns, column groups and row groups===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The MediaWiki syntax for tables currently offers no support for specifying common attributes for columns (with the HTML element {{tag|col|single}}), column groups (HTML element {{tag|colgroup|content=}}) and row groups (HTML elements {{tag|thead|content=}}, {{tag|tbody|content=}} and {{tag|tfoot|content=}}).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those standard HTML elements are not accepted even in their HTML or XHTML syntax.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the rows and cells (header or data) of the table are rendered within a single implicit row group (HTML element {{tag|tbody|content=}}) without any attributes or styles.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Tables and the Visual Editor (VE) ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing tables}}''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Phab: T108245]]: &quot;Fully support basic table editing in the visual editor&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See the list of tasks. Finished tasks are &lt;s&gt;struck&lt;/s&gt;. It can be difficult to figure out from the technical language there what exactly has been improved, or what features have been added. Please add explanatory info below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Can now move or delete columns and rows ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on a column or row header.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then click on the arrow.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the popup menu click on &quot;Move&quot; or &quot;Delete&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert blank row or column ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
From the same popup menu click on &quot;Insert&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Copy table from web page to Visual Editor ===
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to copy and paste a table from a web page directly into the [[w:WP:Visual Editor|Visual Editor]] (VE).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do so safely, use a sandbox and check the table for proper coding in wikitext source mode and proper display in the Visual Editor and in preview mode.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Helping tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://excel2wiki.toolforge.org/ Excel2Wiki] allows you to copy a stylesheet from Excel, Apache OpenOffice, LibreOffice, or Gnumeric to convert it into wikicode table.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sorting rows of a table|Sorting rows of a table]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;m:Help:Sorting&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Help:Tables]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://www.tablesgenerator.com/mediawiki_tables A visual tool that helps generate tables]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Notes==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Tables]]</text>
      <sha1>oyp7tanqlknblwzaga8s2nfeu8qrblf</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402277</id>
      <parentid>5402230</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:04:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36292" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
:''Bảng (Tables)'' có thể được tham khảo ở đây; nếu bạn muốn tìm thêm thông tin về cấu trúc cơ sở dữ liệu (CSDL) bảng, hãy tham khảo tại {{ll|Manual:Database layout}}.

'''Bảng (Tables)''' có thể tạo ra trong trang wiki. 
Một điều cơ bản mà bạn nên biết, hãy tránh sử dụng bảng trừ khi thật cần thiết nếu muốn tạo ra bảng dữ liệu. 
Lí do cơ bản là các lệnh để tạo ra và chỉnh sửa bảng (Table) thường khiến cho việc chỉnh sửa trang (Page) trở nên phức tạp hơn.&lt;ref&gt;
Bảng (Table) có thể được tạo ra bằng cách sử dụng trực tiếp các câu lệnh phần tử (elements) của HTML, hoặc sử dụng định dạng &quot;wikicode&quot; để xác định được bảng. 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Mã HTML đã được mô tả cặn kẽ trên nhiều trang web khác nhau nên sẽ không được đề cập đến ở đây.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lợi điểm của mã wiki là bảng được cấu tạo bởi các ký tự hướng tới dễ dàng hình dung cấu trúc của bảng trong khi soạn thảo hơn là mã HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/ref&gt;

== Sơ lược về bảng ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:60%&quot;
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;| Bắt đầu '''bảng'''.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|+&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''tiêu đề''' bảng, ''tùy chọn'', duy nhất cho mỗi bảng và đặt său ký tự đánh dấu bắt đầu bảng và trước ký tự đánh dấu hàng đầu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|-&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Hàng''', ''tùy chọn với hàng đầu tiên'' - nếu xuất hiện các phân cách cột, wiki mặc định thêm nó vào  dòng đấu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;!&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt; 
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Tên cột''', ''tùy chọn''. Các tên cột liên tiếp có thể để trên cùng một dòng ngăn cách nhau bởi hai dấu chấm than  (!!) hoặc bắt đầu trên một dòng khác, với một dấu chấm than (!).
|- 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Dữ liệu ô''', ''tùy chọn''. Các ô có thể viết trên cùng một dòng với hai dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;||&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), hoặc mỗi ô trên một dòng mới với một dấu gạch (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | kết thúc '''bảng'''.
|}
* Các ký tự trên bắt buộc phải được đặt ở đầu dòng trừ || và !!.
*'''Thuộc tính XHTML.''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Trừ cuối bảng, mỗi ký tự đánh dấu có thể chấp nhận một hay một vài thuộc tính XHTML.&lt;/span&gt; Các thuộc tính phải nằm trên cùng một dòng với ký tự đánh dấu, ngăn cách bởi một khoảng trống.
**Ô và tiêu đề (&lt;nowiki&gt;| hoặc ||, ! hoặc !!, và |+&lt;/nowiki&gt;) chứa nội dung. Vì thế hãy phân tách thuộc tính khỏi nội dung bằng một dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;). Nội dung của ô có thể theo ngay sau hoặc nằm trên dòng kế tiếp.
**Dấu hiệu bảng và hàng (&lt;nowiki&gt;{| và |-&lt;/nowiki&gt;) không trực tiếp chứa nội dung. Không chèn dấu gạch đứng  (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) sau chúng. Nếu chèn dấu gạch đứng sau dấu hiệu bảng hay hàng thì bộ phân tích ngữ pháp sẽ xoá nó cùng với thuộc tính.
*Nội dung có thể (a) theo sau ký hiệu ô trên cùng một dòng, sau những thuộc tính XHTML thêm vào hoặc (b) trong các dòng tiếp theo sau đó. Nội dung có sử dụng những kí pháp wiki cần bắt đầu trên dòng mới như danh sách, tiêu đề hoặc bảng lồng tất nhiên phải được đặt trên dòng riêng.
** '''Dấu gạch đứng trong nội dung.''' Để thêm dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) vào nội dung bảng, sử dụng &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;

==Bảng đơn giản==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Create a table with editor toolbar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In wikitext editor, place the caret where you want to insert a table. Then, in the toolbar, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-section-advanced}}”, then choose [[File:OOjs UI icon table.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table}} button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dialog opens.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the dialog, you can choose whether to enable a table header row, to stylize the table with border and to make the table [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|sortable]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview example is displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also set row and column counts you need. Then, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-insert}}” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, the following code is generated:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;display:flex&quot;&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikicode:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
 {&lt;nowiki/&gt;| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
 |+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
 |-
 ! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em; margin-left:2ex&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center; margin-bottom:1em&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Result:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
|+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
|-
! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Minimal syntax ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Bảng sau đây không có viền và giãn cách, cho thấy cú pháp cấu trúc bảng đơn giản nhất.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

Để cho trông giống bảng hơn thì các ô có thể được viết trên cùng một dòng, phân cách bởi ||. 
Nếu cần xuống dòng, sử dụng {{tag|br|single}}

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||thêm
|-
|Bánh mì    ||   Bánh ngọt     ||   thêm||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
|Bơ   || Kem ||  thêm nữa||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Bánh mỳ||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
| Bơ||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
|}

Khoảng trống phụ có thể được thêm vào trong ô để đoạn mã dễ nhìn hơn mà không ảnh hưởng đến kết quả.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
|}

Ô chữ có thể nhiều hơn hay chứa nhiều cấu trúc phức tạp hơn.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
|}

=== Định dạng bảng ===
Định dạng bảng sử dụng &quot;&lt;code&gt;!&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu chấm than) thay cho &quot;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu gạch đứng). 
Định dạng bảng thường thể hiện như đặt in đậm hay căn lề giữa như mặc định.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
|Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
|Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
!Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
| Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
| Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
! Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
|}

{{note|1=Khi dùng các thuộc tính như mục 'Sản phẩm', sử dụng dấu gạch đứng '&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;' để phân cách. Không dùng dấu chấm than '!'.}}

===Tiêu đề===

'''Tiêu đề bảng''' có thể thêm vào bên trên mỗi bảng như sau.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

=== class=&quot;wikitable&quot; ===

Kiểu cơ bản (nền xám nhạt, có viền, dồn sát và căn lề trái) có thể đặt dễ dàng bằng cách dùng class=&quot;wikitable&quot;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

===HTML chia hàng và chia cột===

bạn có thể dùng thuộc tính HTML '''chia hàng''' và '''chia cột''' với mỗi ô để tạo các bảng phức tạp.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
|Bánh kem
|Bánh ngọt
|Danish
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
|Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
|Bơ
|Sữa chua
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
| Bánh kem
| Bánh ngọt
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Danish&lt;/span&gt;
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
| Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
| Bơ
| Sữa chua
|}
|}

'''Thuộc tính HTML''':
Bạn có thể thêm các '''thuộc tính HTML''' vào bảng. 
Để xem nguồn chính thức về thuộc tính HTML, hãy xem [https://www.w3.org/TR/html401/struct/tables.html trang W3C's đặc tả về bảng của HTML].

=== Thuộc tính của bảng ===

Các thuộc tính đặt sau thẻ bắt đầu bảng (&lt;code&gt;{|&lt;/code&gt;) được áp cho toàn bảng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|12,333.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
|Bơ
|Kem
|1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
|1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của ô ===
Bạn có thể đặt thuộc tính cho từng '''ô''' riêng lẻ. 
Ví dụ, số trông đẹp hơn khi được canh phải.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

Có thể dùng chung thuộc tính '''ô''' khi đặt các ô này trên cùng một dòng. 
Nhớ rằng khi đó '''ô''' phân cách bởi  &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt;, và với mỗi '''ô ''' thuộc tính và giá trị được phân cách bởi &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của hàng ===

Bạn cũng có thể đặt thuộc tính riêng cho mỗi hàng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Attributes on caption and headers===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Attributes can be added to the caption and headers as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | Fruits
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | Fats
|-
|Cam
|Bơ
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Táo
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fruits&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fats&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Cam
| Bơ
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bánh mỳ&lt;/span&gt;
| Bánh kem
|-
| Táo
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Border width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has only one number, it is for all four border sides:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has more than one number, the four numbers are for '''top, right, bottom, left (REMEMBER clockwise order &amp;uarr;&amp;rarr;&amp;darr;&amp;larr;)''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:When there are fewer than 4 values :
&lt;/div&gt; 
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;three values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width is then the same on left and right side.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;two values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; (first value), and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; by default is assigned the value of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width on top is then the same as on bottom; width on left is the same as on right.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;one value i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; and it is the same for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt;. The fourth width are the same and build a regular border. This is a writing shortcut.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Another method to define the widths of the four sides of a cell is to use ''&quot;border-left&quot;, &quot;border-right&quot;, &quot;border-top&quot; and &quot;border-bottom&quot;'':
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width: 100%; overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The HTML attributes (such as &quot;width=&quot;, &quot;border=&quot;, &quot;cellspacing=&quot;, &quot;cellpadding=&quot;) do not need any length unit (the pixel unit is assumed).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are also invalid in HTML 5.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&quot;Cellpadding&quot; is for setting the space between the cell wall and the cell content.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.w3schools.com/tags/att_table_cellpadding.asp HTML table cellpadding Attribute]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The CSS style properties (which override the HTML attributes) require an explicit length unit (if the value is not 0) such as &quot;px&quot; for the pixel.
&lt;/div&gt;
}}

===Với thuộc tính HTML và định dạng CSS===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Các thuộc tính định dạng CSS có thể được thêm vào cùng với thuộc tính HTML hoặc không.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot; 
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Padding===
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%;&quot; 
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-valign=top
| style=&quot;padding:10px&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Column width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Column width''' can be added as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You type:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | This column width is 85% of the screen width
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| '''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| '''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You get:
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This column width is 85% of the screen width&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Accessibility of table header cells===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table header cells do not explicitly specify which table data cells they apply to (those on their right on the same row, or those below them on the same column).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the table is rendered in a visual 2D environment, this is usually easy to infer.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However when tables are rendered on non-visual media, you can help the browser to determine which table header cell applies to the description of any selected cell (in order to repeat its content in some accessibility helper) using a scope=&quot;row&quot; or scope=&quot;col&quot; attribute on table header cells.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases with simple tables, you'll use scope=&quot;col&quot; on all header cells of the first row, and scope=&quot;row&quot; on the first cell of the following rows:&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Item
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Quantity
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Price
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| Total
| $1.90
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Item&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quantity&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Price&lt;/span&gt;
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Total&lt;/span&gt;
| $1.90
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Alignment ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table alignment is achieved by using CSS.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The table alignment is controlled by margins.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A fixed margin on one side will make the table to be aligned to that side, if on the opposite side the margin is defined as ''auto''.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To have a table center aligned, you should set both margins to ''auto''&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, a right-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
And a center-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table floating around text ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you align a table to the right or the left side of the page, the text that comes after the table starts at the end of it, leaving an empty space around the table.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make the text to be wrapped around the table by making the table to ''float'' around the text instead of just aligning it.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be achieved using the &lt;code&gt;float&lt;/code&gt; CSS attribute, which can specify where the table floats to the right side or to the left.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When using ''float'', margins doesn't control table alignment and can be used to specify the margin between the table and the surrounding text.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Cell contents alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The alignment of cell contents can be controlled with 2 different CSS properties: &lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; can be specified at the table, row or individual cells, while &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt; only can be specified at individual rows or cells.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
|}

==Cảnh báo==

===Số âm===
Dấu trừ của số âm có thể gây nhầm lẫn nếu bạn viết như thế này: &lt;code&gt;|-6&lt;/code&gt;. 
Thay vào đó hãy chèn một khoảng trắng phía trước dấu trừ (&lt;code&gt;| -6&lt;/code&gt;) hoặc dùng cú pháp nội dòng (&lt;code&gt;||-6&lt;/code&gt;).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===CSS vs attributes===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Table borders specified through CSS rather than the border attribute will render incorrectly in a small subset of text browsers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Common attributes for columns, column groups and row groups===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The MediaWiki syntax for tables currently offers no support for specifying common attributes for columns (with the HTML element {{tag|col|single}}), column groups (HTML element {{tag|colgroup|content=}}) and row groups (HTML elements {{tag|thead|content=}}, {{tag|tbody|content=}} and {{tag|tfoot|content=}}).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those standard HTML elements are not accepted even in their HTML or XHTML syntax.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the rows and cells (header or data) of the table are rendered within a single implicit row group (HTML element {{tag|tbody|content=}}) without any attributes or styles.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Tables and the Visual Editor (VE) ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing tables}}''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Phab: T108245]]: &quot;Fully support basic table editing in the visual editor&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See the list of tasks. Finished tasks are &lt;s&gt;struck&lt;/s&gt;. It can be difficult to figure out from the technical language there what exactly has been improved, or what features have been added. Please add explanatory info below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Can now move or delete columns and rows ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on a column or row header.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then click on the arrow.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the popup menu click on &quot;Move&quot; or &quot;Delete&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert blank row or column ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
From the same popup menu click on &quot;Insert&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Copy table from web page to Visual Editor ===
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to copy and paste a table from a web page directly into the [[w:WP:Visual Editor|Visual Editor]] (VE).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do so safely, use a sandbox and check the table for proper coding in wikitext source mode and proper display in the Visual Editor and in preview mode.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Helping tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://excel2wiki.toolforge.org/ Excel2Wiki] allows you to copy a stylesheet from Excel, Apache OpenOffice, LibreOffice, or Gnumeric to convert it into wikicode table.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sorting rows of a table|Sorting rows of a table]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;m:Help:Sorting&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Help:Tables]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://www.tablesgenerator.com/mediawiki_tables A visual tool that helps generate tables]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Notes==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Tables]]</text>
      <sha1>3c1gua6o4u9avq9d0wv4rc9ct3nacrs</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402289</id>
      <parentid>5402277</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:05:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36371" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
:''Bảng (Tables)'' có thể được tham khảo ở đây; nếu bạn muốn tìm thêm thông tin về cấu trúc cơ sở dữ liệu (CSDL) bảng, hãy tham khảo tại {{ll|Manual:Database layout}}.

'''Bảng (Tables)''' có thể tạo ra trong trang wiki. 
Một điều cơ bản mà bạn nên biết, hãy tránh sử dụng bảng trừ khi thật cần thiết nếu muốn tạo ra bảng dữ liệu. 
Lí do cơ bản là các lệnh để tạo ra và chỉnh sửa bảng (Table) thường khiến cho việc chỉnh sửa trang (Page) trở nên phức tạp hơn.&lt;ref&gt;
Bảng (Table) có thể được tạo ra bằng cách sử dụng trực tiếp các câu lệnh phần tử (elements) của HTML, hoặc sử dụng định dạng &quot;wikicode&quot; để xác định được bảng. 
Các câu lệnh phần tử của HTML để tạo bảng và cách sử dụng nó đều đã được giải thích chi tiết và kĩ càng trên nhiều trang Web khác nhau, vì thế nội dung này sẽ không được nhắc đến ở đây. 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lợi điểm của mã wiki là bảng được cấu tạo bởi các ký tự hướng tới dễ dàng hình dung cấu trúc của bảng trong khi soạn thảo hơn là mã HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/ref&gt;

== Sơ lược về bảng ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:60%&quot;
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;| Bắt đầu '''bảng'''.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|+&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''tiêu đề''' bảng, ''tùy chọn'', duy nhất cho mỗi bảng và đặt său ký tự đánh dấu bắt đầu bảng và trước ký tự đánh dấu hàng đầu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|-&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Hàng''', ''tùy chọn với hàng đầu tiên'' - nếu xuất hiện các phân cách cột, wiki mặc định thêm nó vào  dòng đấu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;!&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt; 
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Tên cột''', ''tùy chọn''. Các tên cột liên tiếp có thể để trên cùng một dòng ngăn cách nhau bởi hai dấu chấm than  (!!) hoặc bắt đầu trên một dòng khác, với một dấu chấm than (!).
|- 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Dữ liệu ô''', ''tùy chọn''. Các ô có thể viết trên cùng một dòng với hai dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;||&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), hoặc mỗi ô trên một dòng mới với một dấu gạch (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | kết thúc '''bảng'''.
|}
* Các ký tự trên bắt buộc phải được đặt ở đầu dòng trừ || và !!.
*'''Thuộc tính XHTML.''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Trừ cuối bảng, mỗi ký tự đánh dấu có thể chấp nhận một hay một vài thuộc tính XHTML.&lt;/span&gt; Các thuộc tính phải nằm trên cùng một dòng với ký tự đánh dấu, ngăn cách bởi một khoảng trống.
**Ô và tiêu đề (&lt;nowiki&gt;| hoặc ||, ! hoặc !!, và |+&lt;/nowiki&gt;) chứa nội dung. Vì thế hãy phân tách thuộc tính khỏi nội dung bằng một dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;). Nội dung của ô có thể theo ngay sau hoặc nằm trên dòng kế tiếp.
**Dấu hiệu bảng và hàng (&lt;nowiki&gt;{| và |-&lt;/nowiki&gt;) không trực tiếp chứa nội dung. Không chèn dấu gạch đứng  (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) sau chúng. Nếu chèn dấu gạch đứng sau dấu hiệu bảng hay hàng thì bộ phân tích ngữ pháp sẽ xoá nó cùng với thuộc tính.
*Nội dung có thể (a) theo sau ký hiệu ô trên cùng một dòng, sau những thuộc tính XHTML thêm vào hoặc (b) trong các dòng tiếp theo sau đó. Nội dung có sử dụng những kí pháp wiki cần bắt đầu trên dòng mới như danh sách, tiêu đề hoặc bảng lồng tất nhiên phải được đặt trên dòng riêng.
** '''Dấu gạch đứng trong nội dung.''' Để thêm dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) vào nội dung bảng, sử dụng &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;

==Bảng đơn giản==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Create a table with editor toolbar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In wikitext editor, place the caret where you want to insert a table. Then, in the toolbar, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-section-advanced}}”, then choose [[File:OOjs UI icon table.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table}} button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dialog opens.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the dialog, you can choose whether to enable a table header row, to stylize the table with border and to make the table [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|sortable]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview example is displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also set row and column counts you need. Then, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-insert}}” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, the following code is generated:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;display:flex&quot;&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikicode:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
 {&lt;nowiki/&gt;| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
 |+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
 |-
 ! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em; margin-left:2ex&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center; margin-bottom:1em&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Result:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
|+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
|-
! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Minimal syntax ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Bảng sau đây không có viền và giãn cách, cho thấy cú pháp cấu trúc bảng đơn giản nhất.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

Để cho trông giống bảng hơn thì các ô có thể được viết trên cùng một dòng, phân cách bởi ||. 
Nếu cần xuống dòng, sử dụng {{tag|br|single}}

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||thêm
|-
|Bánh mì    ||   Bánh ngọt     ||   thêm||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
|Bơ   || Kem ||  thêm nữa||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Bánh mỳ||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
| Bơ||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
|}

Khoảng trống phụ có thể được thêm vào trong ô để đoạn mã dễ nhìn hơn mà không ảnh hưởng đến kết quả.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
|}

Ô chữ có thể nhiều hơn hay chứa nhiều cấu trúc phức tạp hơn.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
|}

=== Định dạng bảng ===
Định dạng bảng sử dụng &quot;&lt;code&gt;!&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu chấm than) thay cho &quot;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu gạch đứng). 
Định dạng bảng thường thể hiện như đặt in đậm hay căn lề giữa như mặc định.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
|Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
|Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
!Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
| Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
| Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
! Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
|}

{{note|1=Khi dùng các thuộc tính như mục 'Sản phẩm', sử dụng dấu gạch đứng '&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;' để phân cách. Không dùng dấu chấm than '!'.}}

===Tiêu đề===

'''Tiêu đề bảng''' có thể thêm vào bên trên mỗi bảng như sau.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

=== class=&quot;wikitable&quot; ===

Kiểu cơ bản (nền xám nhạt, có viền, dồn sát và căn lề trái) có thể đặt dễ dàng bằng cách dùng class=&quot;wikitable&quot;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

===HTML chia hàng và chia cột===

bạn có thể dùng thuộc tính HTML '''chia hàng''' và '''chia cột''' với mỗi ô để tạo các bảng phức tạp.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
|Bánh kem
|Bánh ngọt
|Danish
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
|Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
|Bơ
|Sữa chua
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
| Bánh kem
| Bánh ngọt
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Danish&lt;/span&gt;
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
| Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
| Bơ
| Sữa chua
|}
|}

'''Thuộc tính HTML''':
Bạn có thể thêm các '''thuộc tính HTML''' vào bảng. 
Để xem nguồn chính thức về thuộc tính HTML, hãy xem [https://www.w3.org/TR/html401/struct/tables.html trang W3C's đặc tả về bảng của HTML].

=== Thuộc tính của bảng ===

Các thuộc tính đặt sau thẻ bắt đầu bảng (&lt;code&gt;{|&lt;/code&gt;) được áp cho toàn bảng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|12,333.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
|Bơ
|Kem
|1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
|1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của ô ===
Bạn có thể đặt thuộc tính cho từng '''ô''' riêng lẻ. 
Ví dụ, số trông đẹp hơn khi được canh phải.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

Có thể dùng chung thuộc tính '''ô''' khi đặt các ô này trên cùng một dòng. 
Nhớ rằng khi đó '''ô''' phân cách bởi  &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt;, và với mỗi '''ô ''' thuộc tính và giá trị được phân cách bởi &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của hàng ===

Bạn cũng có thể đặt thuộc tính riêng cho mỗi hàng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Attributes on caption and headers===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Attributes can be added to the caption and headers as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | Fruits
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | Fats
|-
|Cam
|Bơ
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Táo
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fruits&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fats&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Cam
| Bơ
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bánh mỳ&lt;/span&gt;
| Bánh kem
|-
| Táo
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Border width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has only one number, it is for all four border sides:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has more than one number, the four numbers are for '''top, right, bottom, left (REMEMBER clockwise order &amp;uarr;&amp;rarr;&amp;darr;&amp;larr;)''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:When there are fewer than 4 values :
&lt;/div&gt; 
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;three values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width is then the same on left and right side.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;two values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; (first value), and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; by default is assigned the value of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width on top is then the same as on bottom; width on left is the same as on right.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;one value i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; and it is the same for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt;. The fourth width are the same and build a regular border. This is a writing shortcut.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Another method to define the widths of the four sides of a cell is to use ''&quot;border-left&quot;, &quot;border-right&quot;, &quot;border-top&quot; and &quot;border-bottom&quot;'':
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width: 100%; overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The HTML attributes (such as &quot;width=&quot;, &quot;border=&quot;, &quot;cellspacing=&quot;, &quot;cellpadding=&quot;) do not need any length unit (the pixel unit is assumed).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are also invalid in HTML 5.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&quot;Cellpadding&quot; is for setting the space between the cell wall and the cell content.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.w3schools.com/tags/att_table_cellpadding.asp HTML table cellpadding Attribute]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The CSS style properties (which override the HTML attributes) require an explicit length unit (if the value is not 0) such as &quot;px&quot; for the pixel.
&lt;/div&gt;
}}

===Với thuộc tính HTML và định dạng CSS===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Các thuộc tính định dạng CSS có thể được thêm vào cùng với thuộc tính HTML hoặc không.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot; 
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Padding===
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%;&quot; 
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-valign=top
| style=&quot;padding:10px&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Column width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Column width''' can be added as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You type:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | This column width is 85% of the screen width
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| '''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| '''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You get:
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This column width is 85% of the screen width&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Accessibility of table header cells===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table header cells do not explicitly specify which table data cells they apply to (those on their right on the same row, or those below them on the same column).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the table is rendered in a visual 2D environment, this is usually easy to infer.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However when tables are rendered on non-visual media, you can help the browser to determine which table header cell applies to the description of any selected cell (in order to repeat its content in some accessibility helper) using a scope=&quot;row&quot; or scope=&quot;col&quot; attribute on table header cells.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases with simple tables, you'll use scope=&quot;col&quot; on all header cells of the first row, and scope=&quot;row&quot; on the first cell of the following rows:&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Item
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Quantity
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Price
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| Total
| $1.90
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Item&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quantity&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Price&lt;/span&gt;
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Total&lt;/span&gt;
| $1.90
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Alignment ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table alignment is achieved by using CSS.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The table alignment is controlled by margins.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A fixed margin on one side will make the table to be aligned to that side, if on the opposite side the margin is defined as ''auto''.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To have a table center aligned, you should set both margins to ''auto''&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, a right-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
And a center-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table floating around text ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you align a table to the right or the left side of the page, the text that comes after the table starts at the end of it, leaving an empty space around the table.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make the text to be wrapped around the table by making the table to ''float'' around the text instead of just aligning it.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be achieved using the &lt;code&gt;float&lt;/code&gt; CSS attribute, which can specify where the table floats to the right side or to the left.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When using ''float'', margins doesn't control table alignment and can be used to specify the margin between the table and the surrounding text.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Cell contents alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The alignment of cell contents can be controlled with 2 different CSS properties: &lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; can be specified at the table, row or individual cells, while &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt; only can be specified at individual rows or cells.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
|}

==Cảnh báo==

===Số âm===
Dấu trừ của số âm có thể gây nhầm lẫn nếu bạn viết như thế này: &lt;code&gt;|-6&lt;/code&gt;. 
Thay vào đó hãy chèn một khoảng trắng phía trước dấu trừ (&lt;code&gt;| -6&lt;/code&gt;) hoặc dùng cú pháp nội dòng (&lt;code&gt;||-6&lt;/code&gt;).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===CSS vs attributes===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Table borders specified through CSS rather than the border attribute will render incorrectly in a small subset of text browsers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Common attributes for columns, column groups and row groups===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The MediaWiki syntax for tables currently offers no support for specifying common attributes for columns (with the HTML element {{tag|col|single}}), column groups (HTML element {{tag|colgroup|content=}}) and row groups (HTML elements {{tag|thead|content=}}, {{tag|tbody|content=}} and {{tag|tfoot|content=}}).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those standard HTML elements are not accepted even in their HTML or XHTML syntax.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the rows and cells (header or data) of the table are rendered within a single implicit row group (HTML element {{tag|tbody|content=}}) without any attributes or styles.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Tables and the Visual Editor (VE) ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing tables}}''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Phab: T108245]]: &quot;Fully support basic table editing in the visual editor&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See the list of tasks. Finished tasks are &lt;s&gt;struck&lt;/s&gt;. It can be difficult to figure out from the technical language there what exactly has been improved, or what features have been added. Please add explanatory info below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Can now move or delete columns and rows ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on a column or row header.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then click on the arrow.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the popup menu click on &quot;Move&quot; or &quot;Delete&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert blank row or column ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
From the same popup menu click on &quot;Insert&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Copy table from web page to Visual Editor ===
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to copy and paste a table from a web page directly into the [[w:WP:Visual Editor|Visual Editor]] (VE).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do so safely, use a sandbox and check the table for proper coding in wikitext source mode and proper display in the Visual Editor and in preview mode.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Helping tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://excel2wiki.toolforge.org/ Excel2Wiki] allows you to copy a stylesheet from Excel, Apache OpenOffice, LibreOffice, or Gnumeric to convert it into wikicode table.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sorting rows of a table|Sorting rows of a table]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;m:Help:Sorting&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Help:Tables]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://www.tablesgenerator.com/mediawiki_tables A visual tool that helps generate tables]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Notes==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Tables]]</text>
      <sha1>8ozv80dx9x638dxcmqvz9bq885ty0d5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402291</id>
      <parentid>5402289</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:05:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36384" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
:''Bảng (Tables)'' có thể được tham khảo ở đây; nếu bạn muốn tìm thêm thông tin về cấu trúc cơ sở dữ liệu (CSDL) bảng, hãy tham khảo tại {{ll|Manual:Database layout}}.

'''Bảng (Tables)''' có thể tạo ra trong trang wiki. 
Một điều cơ bản mà bạn nên biết, hãy tránh sử dụng bảng trừ khi thật cần thiết nếu muốn tạo ra bảng dữ liệu. 
Lí do cơ bản là các lệnh để tạo ra và chỉnh sửa bảng (Table) thường khiến cho việc chỉnh sửa trang (Page) trở nên phức tạp hơn.&lt;ref&gt;
Bảng (Table) có thể được tạo ra bằng cách sử dụng trực tiếp các câu lệnh phần tử bảng (table elements) của HTML, hoặc sử dụng định dạng &quot;wikicode&quot; để xác định được bảng. 
Các câu lệnh phần tử của HTML để tạo bảng và cách sử dụng nó đều đã được giải thích chi tiết và kĩ càng trên nhiều trang Web khác nhau, vì thế nội dung này sẽ không được nhắc đến ở đây. 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lợi điểm của mã wiki là bảng được cấu tạo bởi các ký tự hướng tới dễ dàng hình dung cấu trúc của bảng trong khi soạn thảo hơn là mã HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/ref&gt;

== Sơ lược về bảng ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:60%&quot;
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;| Bắt đầu '''bảng'''.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|+&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''tiêu đề''' bảng, ''tùy chọn'', duy nhất cho mỗi bảng và đặt său ký tự đánh dấu bắt đầu bảng và trước ký tự đánh dấu hàng đầu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|-&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Hàng''', ''tùy chọn với hàng đầu tiên'' - nếu xuất hiện các phân cách cột, wiki mặc định thêm nó vào  dòng đấu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;!&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt; 
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Tên cột''', ''tùy chọn''. Các tên cột liên tiếp có thể để trên cùng một dòng ngăn cách nhau bởi hai dấu chấm than  (!!) hoặc bắt đầu trên một dòng khác, với một dấu chấm than (!).
|- 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Dữ liệu ô''', ''tùy chọn''. Các ô có thể viết trên cùng một dòng với hai dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;||&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), hoặc mỗi ô trên một dòng mới với một dấu gạch (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | kết thúc '''bảng'''.
|}
* Các ký tự trên bắt buộc phải được đặt ở đầu dòng trừ || và !!.
*'''Thuộc tính XHTML.''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Trừ cuối bảng, mỗi ký tự đánh dấu có thể chấp nhận một hay một vài thuộc tính XHTML.&lt;/span&gt; Các thuộc tính phải nằm trên cùng một dòng với ký tự đánh dấu, ngăn cách bởi một khoảng trống.
**Ô và tiêu đề (&lt;nowiki&gt;| hoặc ||, ! hoặc !!, và |+&lt;/nowiki&gt;) chứa nội dung. Vì thế hãy phân tách thuộc tính khỏi nội dung bằng một dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;). Nội dung của ô có thể theo ngay sau hoặc nằm trên dòng kế tiếp.
**Dấu hiệu bảng và hàng (&lt;nowiki&gt;{| và |-&lt;/nowiki&gt;) không trực tiếp chứa nội dung. Không chèn dấu gạch đứng  (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) sau chúng. Nếu chèn dấu gạch đứng sau dấu hiệu bảng hay hàng thì bộ phân tích ngữ pháp sẽ xoá nó cùng với thuộc tính.
*Nội dung có thể (a) theo sau ký hiệu ô trên cùng một dòng, sau những thuộc tính XHTML thêm vào hoặc (b) trong các dòng tiếp theo sau đó. Nội dung có sử dụng những kí pháp wiki cần bắt đầu trên dòng mới như danh sách, tiêu đề hoặc bảng lồng tất nhiên phải được đặt trên dòng riêng.
** '''Dấu gạch đứng trong nội dung.''' Để thêm dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) vào nội dung bảng, sử dụng &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;

==Bảng đơn giản==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Create a table with editor toolbar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In wikitext editor, place the caret where you want to insert a table. Then, in the toolbar, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-section-advanced}}”, then choose [[File:OOjs UI icon table.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table}} button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dialog opens.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the dialog, you can choose whether to enable a table header row, to stylize the table with border and to make the table [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|sortable]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview example is displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also set row and column counts you need. Then, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-insert}}” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, the following code is generated:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;display:flex&quot;&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikicode:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
 {&lt;nowiki/&gt;| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
 |+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
 |-
 ! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em; margin-left:2ex&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center; margin-bottom:1em&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Result:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
|+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
|-
! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Minimal syntax ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Bảng sau đây không có viền và giãn cách, cho thấy cú pháp cấu trúc bảng đơn giản nhất.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

Để cho trông giống bảng hơn thì các ô có thể được viết trên cùng một dòng, phân cách bởi ||. 
Nếu cần xuống dòng, sử dụng {{tag|br|single}}

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||thêm
|-
|Bánh mì    ||   Bánh ngọt     ||   thêm||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
|Bơ   || Kem ||  thêm nữa||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Bánh mỳ||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
| Bơ||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
|}

Khoảng trống phụ có thể được thêm vào trong ô để đoạn mã dễ nhìn hơn mà không ảnh hưởng đến kết quả.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
|}

Ô chữ có thể nhiều hơn hay chứa nhiều cấu trúc phức tạp hơn.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
|}

=== Định dạng bảng ===
Định dạng bảng sử dụng &quot;&lt;code&gt;!&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu chấm than) thay cho &quot;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu gạch đứng). 
Định dạng bảng thường thể hiện như đặt in đậm hay căn lề giữa như mặc định.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
|Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
|Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
!Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
| Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
| Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
! Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
|}

{{note|1=Khi dùng các thuộc tính như mục 'Sản phẩm', sử dụng dấu gạch đứng '&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;' để phân cách. Không dùng dấu chấm than '!'.}}

===Tiêu đề===

'''Tiêu đề bảng''' có thể thêm vào bên trên mỗi bảng như sau.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

=== class=&quot;wikitable&quot; ===

Kiểu cơ bản (nền xám nhạt, có viền, dồn sát và căn lề trái) có thể đặt dễ dàng bằng cách dùng class=&quot;wikitable&quot;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

===HTML chia hàng và chia cột===

bạn có thể dùng thuộc tính HTML '''chia hàng''' và '''chia cột''' với mỗi ô để tạo các bảng phức tạp.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
|Bánh kem
|Bánh ngọt
|Danish
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
|Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
|Bơ
|Sữa chua
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
| Bánh kem
| Bánh ngọt
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Danish&lt;/span&gt;
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
| Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
| Bơ
| Sữa chua
|}
|}

'''Thuộc tính HTML''':
Bạn có thể thêm các '''thuộc tính HTML''' vào bảng. 
Để xem nguồn chính thức về thuộc tính HTML, hãy xem [https://www.w3.org/TR/html401/struct/tables.html trang W3C's đặc tả về bảng của HTML].

=== Thuộc tính của bảng ===

Các thuộc tính đặt sau thẻ bắt đầu bảng (&lt;code&gt;{|&lt;/code&gt;) được áp cho toàn bảng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|12,333.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
|Bơ
|Kem
|1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
|1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của ô ===
Bạn có thể đặt thuộc tính cho từng '''ô''' riêng lẻ. 
Ví dụ, số trông đẹp hơn khi được canh phải.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

Có thể dùng chung thuộc tính '''ô''' khi đặt các ô này trên cùng một dòng. 
Nhớ rằng khi đó '''ô''' phân cách bởi  &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt;, và với mỗi '''ô ''' thuộc tính và giá trị được phân cách bởi &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của hàng ===

Bạn cũng có thể đặt thuộc tính riêng cho mỗi hàng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Attributes on caption and headers===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Attributes can be added to the caption and headers as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | Fruits
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | Fats
|-
|Cam
|Bơ
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Táo
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fruits&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fats&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Cam
| Bơ
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bánh mỳ&lt;/span&gt;
| Bánh kem
|-
| Táo
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Border width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has only one number, it is for all four border sides:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has more than one number, the four numbers are for '''top, right, bottom, left (REMEMBER clockwise order &amp;uarr;&amp;rarr;&amp;darr;&amp;larr;)''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:When there are fewer than 4 values :
&lt;/div&gt; 
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;three values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width is then the same on left and right side.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;two values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; (first value), and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; by default is assigned the value of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width on top is then the same as on bottom; width on left is the same as on right.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;one value i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; and it is the same for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt;. The fourth width are the same and build a regular border. This is a writing shortcut.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Another method to define the widths of the four sides of a cell is to use ''&quot;border-left&quot;, &quot;border-right&quot;, &quot;border-top&quot; and &quot;border-bottom&quot;'':
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width: 100%; overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The HTML attributes (such as &quot;width=&quot;, &quot;border=&quot;, &quot;cellspacing=&quot;, &quot;cellpadding=&quot;) do not need any length unit (the pixel unit is assumed).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are also invalid in HTML 5.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&quot;Cellpadding&quot; is for setting the space between the cell wall and the cell content.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.w3schools.com/tags/att_table_cellpadding.asp HTML table cellpadding Attribute]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The CSS style properties (which override the HTML attributes) require an explicit length unit (if the value is not 0) such as &quot;px&quot; for the pixel.
&lt;/div&gt;
}}

===Với thuộc tính HTML và định dạng CSS===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Các thuộc tính định dạng CSS có thể được thêm vào cùng với thuộc tính HTML hoặc không.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot; 
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Padding===
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%;&quot; 
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-valign=top
| style=&quot;padding:10px&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Column width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Column width''' can be added as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You type:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | This column width is 85% of the screen width
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| '''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| '''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You get:
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This column width is 85% of the screen width&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Accessibility of table header cells===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table header cells do not explicitly specify which table data cells they apply to (those on their right on the same row, or those below them on the same column).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the table is rendered in a visual 2D environment, this is usually easy to infer.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However when tables are rendered on non-visual media, you can help the browser to determine which table header cell applies to the description of any selected cell (in order to repeat its content in some accessibility helper) using a scope=&quot;row&quot; or scope=&quot;col&quot; attribute on table header cells.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases with simple tables, you'll use scope=&quot;col&quot; on all header cells of the first row, and scope=&quot;row&quot; on the first cell of the following rows:&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Item
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Quantity
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Price
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| Total
| $1.90
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Item&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quantity&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Price&lt;/span&gt;
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Total&lt;/span&gt;
| $1.90
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Alignment ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table alignment is achieved by using CSS.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The table alignment is controlled by margins.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A fixed margin on one side will make the table to be aligned to that side, if on the opposite side the margin is defined as ''auto''.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To have a table center aligned, you should set both margins to ''auto''&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, a right-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
And a center-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table floating around text ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you align a table to the right or the left side of the page, the text that comes after the table starts at the end of it, leaving an empty space around the table.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make the text to be wrapped around the table by making the table to ''float'' around the text instead of just aligning it.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be achieved using the &lt;code&gt;float&lt;/code&gt; CSS attribute, which can specify where the table floats to the right side or to the left.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When using ''float'', margins doesn't control table alignment and can be used to specify the margin between the table and the surrounding text.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Cell contents alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The alignment of cell contents can be controlled with 2 different CSS properties: &lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; can be specified at the table, row or individual cells, while &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt; only can be specified at individual rows or cells.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
|}

==Cảnh báo==

===Số âm===
Dấu trừ của số âm có thể gây nhầm lẫn nếu bạn viết như thế này: &lt;code&gt;|-6&lt;/code&gt;. 
Thay vào đó hãy chèn một khoảng trắng phía trước dấu trừ (&lt;code&gt;| -6&lt;/code&gt;) hoặc dùng cú pháp nội dòng (&lt;code&gt;||-6&lt;/code&gt;).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===CSS vs attributes===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Table borders specified through CSS rather than the border attribute will render incorrectly in a small subset of text browsers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Common attributes for columns, column groups and row groups===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The MediaWiki syntax for tables currently offers no support for specifying common attributes for columns (with the HTML element {{tag|col|single}}), column groups (HTML element {{tag|colgroup|content=}}) and row groups (HTML elements {{tag|thead|content=}}, {{tag|tbody|content=}} and {{tag|tfoot|content=}}).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those standard HTML elements are not accepted even in their HTML or XHTML syntax.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the rows and cells (header or data) of the table are rendered within a single implicit row group (HTML element {{tag|tbody|content=}}) without any attributes or styles.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Tables and the Visual Editor (VE) ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing tables}}''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Phab: T108245]]: &quot;Fully support basic table editing in the visual editor&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See the list of tasks. Finished tasks are &lt;s&gt;struck&lt;/s&gt;. It can be difficult to figure out from the technical language there what exactly has been improved, or what features have been added. Please add explanatory info below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Can now move or delete columns and rows ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on a column or row header.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then click on the arrow.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the popup menu click on &quot;Move&quot; or &quot;Delete&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert blank row or column ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
From the same popup menu click on &quot;Insert&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Copy table from web page to Visual Editor ===
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to copy and paste a table from a web page directly into the [[w:WP:Visual Editor|Visual Editor]] (VE).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do so safely, use a sandbox and check the table for proper coding in wikitext source mode and proper display in the Visual Editor and in preview mode.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Helping tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://excel2wiki.toolforge.org/ Excel2Wiki] allows you to copy a stylesheet from Excel, Apache OpenOffice, LibreOffice, or Gnumeric to convert it into wikicode table.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sorting rows of a table|Sorting rows of a table]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;m:Help:Sorting&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Help:Tables]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://www.tablesgenerator.com/mediawiki_tables A visual tool that helps generate tables]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Notes==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Tables]]</text>
      <sha1>dsdmyrcrwl5r1yftzcvu6qxwgw7wuyt</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402319</id>
      <parentid>5402291</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:10:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36554" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
:''Bảng (Tables)'' có thể được tham khảo ở đây; nếu bạn muốn tìm thêm thông tin về cấu trúc cơ sở dữ liệu (CSDL) bảng, hãy tham khảo tại {{ll|Manual:Database layout}}.

'''Bảng (Tables)''' có thể tạo ra trong trang wiki. 
Một điều cơ bản mà bạn nên biết, hãy tránh sử dụng bảng trừ khi thật cần thiết nếu muốn tạo ra bảng dữ liệu. 
Lí do cơ bản là các lệnh để tạo ra và chỉnh sửa bảng (Table) thường khiến cho việc chỉnh sửa trang (Page) trở nên phức tạp hơn.&lt;ref&gt;
Bảng (Table) có thể được tạo ra bằng cách sử dụng trực tiếp các câu lệnh phần tử bảng (table elements) của HTML, hoặc sử dụng định dạng &quot;wikicode&quot; để xác định được bảng. 
Các câu lệnh phần tử của HTML để tạo bảng và cách sử dụng nó đều đã được giải thích chi tiết và kĩ càng trên nhiều trang Web khác nhau, vì thế nội dung này sẽ không được nhắc đến ở đây. 
Lợi ích của việc sử dụng mã nguồn Wikicode để tạo bảng là bảng sẽ được xây dựng bằng các ngôn ngữ kí hiệu (các lệnh: commands) có xu hướng giúp cho người đọc có thể hiểu dễ dàng hơn, cảm nhận được cấu trúc bảng trong chế độ chỉnh sửa (Visual edit, Source edit) bài viết dễ hơn so với ngôn ngữ HTML
&lt;/ref&gt;

== Sơ lược về bảng ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:60%&quot;
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;| Bắt đầu '''bảng'''.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|+&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''tiêu đề''' bảng, ''tùy chọn'', duy nhất cho mỗi bảng và đặt său ký tự đánh dấu bắt đầu bảng và trước ký tự đánh dấu hàng đầu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|-&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Hàng''', ''tùy chọn với hàng đầu tiên'' - nếu xuất hiện các phân cách cột, wiki mặc định thêm nó vào  dòng đấu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;!&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt; 
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Tên cột''', ''tùy chọn''. Các tên cột liên tiếp có thể để trên cùng một dòng ngăn cách nhau bởi hai dấu chấm than  (!!) hoặc bắt đầu trên một dòng khác, với một dấu chấm than (!).
|- 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Dữ liệu ô''', ''tùy chọn''. Các ô có thể viết trên cùng một dòng với hai dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;||&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), hoặc mỗi ô trên một dòng mới với một dấu gạch (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | kết thúc '''bảng'''.
|}
* Các ký tự trên bắt buộc phải được đặt ở đầu dòng trừ || và !!.
*'''Thuộc tính XHTML.''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Trừ cuối bảng, mỗi ký tự đánh dấu có thể chấp nhận một hay một vài thuộc tính XHTML.&lt;/span&gt; Các thuộc tính phải nằm trên cùng một dòng với ký tự đánh dấu, ngăn cách bởi một khoảng trống.
**Ô và tiêu đề (&lt;nowiki&gt;| hoặc ||, ! hoặc !!, và |+&lt;/nowiki&gt;) chứa nội dung. Vì thế hãy phân tách thuộc tính khỏi nội dung bằng một dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;). Nội dung của ô có thể theo ngay sau hoặc nằm trên dòng kế tiếp.
**Dấu hiệu bảng và hàng (&lt;nowiki&gt;{| và |-&lt;/nowiki&gt;) không trực tiếp chứa nội dung. Không chèn dấu gạch đứng  (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) sau chúng. Nếu chèn dấu gạch đứng sau dấu hiệu bảng hay hàng thì bộ phân tích ngữ pháp sẽ xoá nó cùng với thuộc tính.
*Nội dung có thể (a) theo sau ký hiệu ô trên cùng một dòng, sau những thuộc tính XHTML thêm vào hoặc (b) trong các dòng tiếp theo sau đó. Nội dung có sử dụng những kí pháp wiki cần bắt đầu trên dòng mới như danh sách, tiêu đề hoặc bảng lồng tất nhiên phải được đặt trên dòng riêng.
** '''Dấu gạch đứng trong nội dung.''' Để thêm dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) vào nội dung bảng, sử dụng &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;

==Bảng đơn giản==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Create a table with editor toolbar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In wikitext editor, place the caret where you want to insert a table. Then, in the toolbar, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-section-advanced}}”, then choose [[File:OOjs UI icon table.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table}} button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dialog opens.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the dialog, you can choose whether to enable a table header row, to stylize the table with border and to make the table [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|sortable]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview example is displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also set row and column counts you need. Then, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-insert}}” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, the following code is generated:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;display:flex&quot;&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikicode:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
 {&lt;nowiki/&gt;| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
 |+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
 |-
 ! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em; margin-left:2ex&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center; margin-bottom:1em&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Result:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
|+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
|-
! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Minimal syntax ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Bảng sau đây không có viền và giãn cách, cho thấy cú pháp cấu trúc bảng đơn giản nhất.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

Để cho trông giống bảng hơn thì các ô có thể được viết trên cùng một dòng, phân cách bởi ||. 
Nếu cần xuống dòng, sử dụng {{tag|br|single}}

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||thêm
|-
|Bánh mì    ||   Bánh ngọt     ||   thêm||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
|Bơ   || Kem ||  thêm nữa||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Bánh mỳ||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
| Bơ||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
|}

Khoảng trống phụ có thể được thêm vào trong ô để đoạn mã dễ nhìn hơn mà không ảnh hưởng đến kết quả.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
|}

Ô chữ có thể nhiều hơn hay chứa nhiều cấu trúc phức tạp hơn.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
|}

=== Định dạng bảng ===
Định dạng bảng sử dụng &quot;&lt;code&gt;!&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu chấm than) thay cho &quot;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu gạch đứng). 
Định dạng bảng thường thể hiện như đặt in đậm hay căn lề giữa như mặc định.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
|Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
|Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
!Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
| Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
| Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
! Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
|}

{{note|1=Khi dùng các thuộc tính như mục 'Sản phẩm', sử dụng dấu gạch đứng '&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;' để phân cách. Không dùng dấu chấm than '!'.}}

===Tiêu đề===

'''Tiêu đề bảng''' có thể thêm vào bên trên mỗi bảng như sau.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

=== class=&quot;wikitable&quot; ===

Kiểu cơ bản (nền xám nhạt, có viền, dồn sát và căn lề trái) có thể đặt dễ dàng bằng cách dùng class=&quot;wikitable&quot;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

===HTML chia hàng và chia cột===

bạn có thể dùng thuộc tính HTML '''chia hàng''' và '''chia cột''' với mỗi ô để tạo các bảng phức tạp.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
|Bánh kem
|Bánh ngọt
|Danish
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
|Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
|Bơ
|Sữa chua
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
| Bánh kem
| Bánh ngọt
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Danish&lt;/span&gt;
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
| Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
| Bơ
| Sữa chua
|}
|}

'''Thuộc tính HTML''':
Bạn có thể thêm các '''thuộc tính HTML''' vào bảng. 
Để xem nguồn chính thức về thuộc tính HTML, hãy xem [https://www.w3.org/TR/html401/struct/tables.html trang W3C's đặc tả về bảng của HTML].

=== Thuộc tính của bảng ===

Các thuộc tính đặt sau thẻ bắt đầu bảng (&lt;code&gt;{|&lt;/code&gt;) được áp cho toàn bảng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|12,333.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
|Bơ
|Kem
|1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
|1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của ô ===
Bạn có thể đặt thuộc tính cho từng '''ô''' riêng lẻ. 
Ví dụ, số trông đẹp hơn khi được canh phải.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

Có thể dùng chung thuộc tính '''ô''' khi đặt các ô này trên cùng một dòng. 
Nhớ rằng khi đó '''ô''' phân cách bởi  &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt;, và với mỗi '''ô ''' thuộc tính và giá trị được phân cách bởi &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của hàng ===

Bạn cũng có thể đặt thuộc tính riêng cho mỗi hàng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Attributes on caption and headers===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Attributes can be added to the caption and headers as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | Fruits
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | Fats
|-
|Cam
|Bơ
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Táo
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fruits&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fats&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Cam
| Bơ
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bánh mỳ&lt;/span&gt;
| Bánh kem
|-
| Táo
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Border width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has only one number, it is for all four border sides:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has more than one number, the four numbers are for '''top, right, bottom, left (REMEMBER clockwise order &amp;uarr;&amp;rarr;&amp;darr;&amp;larr;)''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:When there are fewer than 4 values :
&lt;/div&gt; 
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;three values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width is then the same on left and right side.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;two values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; (first value), and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; by default is assigned the value of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width on top is then the same as on bottom; width on left is the same as on right.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;one value i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; and it is the same for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt;. The fourth width are the same and build a regular border. This is a writing shortcut.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Another method to define the widths of the four sides of a cell is to use ''&quot;border-left&quot;, &quot;border-right&quot;, &quot;border-top&quot; and &quot;border-bottom&quot;'':
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width: 100%; overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The HTML attributes (such as &quot;width=&quot;, &quot;border=&quot;, &quot;cellspacing=&quot;, &quot;cellpadding=&quot;) do not need any length unit (the pixel unit is assumed).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are also invalid in HTML 5.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&quot;Cellpadding&quot; is for setting the space between the cell wall and the cell content.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.w3schools.com/tags/att_table_cellpadding.asp HTML table cellpadding Attribute]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The CSS style properties (which override the HTML attributes) require an explicit length unit (if the value is not 0) such as &quot;px&quot; for the pixel.
&lt;/div&gt;
}}

===Với thuộc tính HTML và định dạng CSS===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Các thuộc tính định dạng CSS có thể được thêm vào cùng với thuộc tính HTML hoặc không.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot; 
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Padding===
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%;&quot; 
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-valign=top
| style=&quot;padding:10px&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Column width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Column width''' can be added as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You type:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | This column width is 85% of the screen width
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| '''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| '''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You get:
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This column width is 85% of the screen width&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Accessibility of table header cells===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table header cells do not explicitly specify which table data cells they apply to (those on their right on the same row, or those below them on the same column).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the table is rendered in a visual 2D environment, this is usually easy to infer.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However when tables are rendered on non-visual media, you can help the browser to determine which table header cell applies to the description of any selected cell (in order to repeat its content in some accessibility helper) using a scope=&quot;row&quot; or scope=&quot;col&quot; attribute on table header cells.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases with simple tables, you'll use scope=&quot;col&quot; on all header cells of the first row, and scope=&quot;row&quot; on the first cell of the following rows:&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Item
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Quantity
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Price
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| Total
| $1.90
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Item&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quantity&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Price&lt;/span&gt;
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Total&lt;/span&gt;
| $1.90
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Alignment ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table alignment is achieved by using CSS.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The table alignment is controlled by margins.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A fixed margin on one side will make the table to be aligned to that side, if on the opposite side the margin is defined as ''auto''.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To have a table center aligned, you should set both margins to ''auto''&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, a right-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
And a center-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table floating around text ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you align a table to the right or the left side of the page, the text that comes after the table starts at the end of it, leaving an empty space around the table.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make the text to be wrapped around the table by making the table to ''float'' around the text instead of just aligning it.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be achieved using the &lt;code&gt;float&lt;/code&gt; CSS attribute, which can specify where the table floats to the right side or to the left.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When using ''float'', margins doesn't control table alignment and can be used to specify the margin between the table and the surrounding text.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Cell contents alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The alignment of cell contents can be controlled with 2 different CSS properties: &lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; can be specified at the table, row or individual cells, while &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt; only can be specified at individual rows or cells.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
|}

==Cảnh báo==

===Số âm===
Dấu trừ của số âm có thể gây nhầm lẫn nếu bạn viết như thế này: &lt;code&gt;|-6&lt;/code&gt;. 
Thay vào đó hãy chèn một khoảng trắng phía trước dấu trừ (&lt;code&gt;| -6&lt;/code&gt;) hoặc dùng cú pháp nội dòng (&lt;code&gt;||-6&lt;/code&gt;).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===CSS vs attributes===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Table borders specified through CSS rather than the border attribute will render incorrectly in a small subset of text browsers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Common attributes for columns, column groups and row groups===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The MediaWiki syntax for tables currently offers no support for specifying common attributes for columns (with the HTML element {{tag|col|single}}), column groups (HTML element {{tag|colgroup|content=}}) and row groups (HTML elements {{tag|thead|content=}}, {{tag|tbody|content=}} and {{tag|tfoot|content=}}).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those standard HTML elements are not accepted even in their HTML or XHTML syntax.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the rows and cells (header or data) of the table are rendered within a single implicit row group (HTML element {{tag|tbody|content=}}) without any attributes or styles.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Tables and the Visual Editor (VE) ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing tables}}''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Phab: T108245]]: &quot;Fully support basic table editing in the visual editor&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See the list of tasks. Finished tasks are &lt;s&gt;struck&lt;/s&gt;. It can be difficult to figure out from the technical language there what exactly has been improved, or what features have been added. Please add explanatory info below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Can now move or delete columns and rows ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on a column or row header.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then click on the arrow.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the popup menu click on &quot;Move&quot; or &quot;Delete&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert blank row or column ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
From the same popup menu click on &quot;Insert&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Copy table from web page to Visual Editor ===
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to copy and paste a table from a web page directly into the [[w:WP:Visual Editor|Visual Editor]] (VE).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do so safely, use a sandbox and check the table for proper coding in wikitext source mode and proper display in the Visual Editor and in preview mode.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Helping tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://excel2wiki.toolforge.org/ Excel2Wiki] allows you to copy a stylesheet from Excel, Apache OpenOffice, LibreOffice, or Gnumeric to convert it into wikicode table.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sorting rows of a table|Sorting rows of a table]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;m:Help:Sorting&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Help:Tables]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://www.tablesgenerator.com/mediawiki_tables A visual tool that helps generate tables]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Notes==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Tables]]</text>
      <sha1>qiykkujz2au979gerg8u6597dxr42pt</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402331</id>
      <parentid>5402319</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:15:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36577" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
:''Bảng (Tables)'' có thể được tham khảo ở đây; nếu bạn muốn tìm thêm thông tin về cấu trúc cơ sở dữ liệu (CSDL) bảng, hãy tham khảo tại {{ll|Manual:Database layout}}.

'''Bảng (Tables)''' có thể tạo ra trong trang wiki. 
Một điều cơ bản mà bạn nên biết, hãy tránh sử dụng bảng trừ khi thật cần thiết nếu muốn tạo ra bảng dữ liệu. 
Lí do cơ bản là các lệnh để tạo ra và chỉnh sửa bảng (Table) thường khiến cho việc chỉnh sửa trang (Page) trở nên phức tạp hơn.&lt;ref&gt;
Bảng (Table) có thể được tạo ra bằng cách sử dụng trực tiếp các câu lệnh phần tử bảng (table elements) của HTML, hoặc sử dụng định dạng &quot;wikicode&quot; để xác định được bảng. 
Các câu lệnh phần tử của HTML để tạo bảng và cách sử dụng nó đều đã được giải thích chi tiết và kĩ càng trên nhiều trang Web khác nhau, vì thế nội dung này sẽ không được nhắc đến ở đây. 
Lợi ích của việc sử dụng mã nguồn Wikicode để tạo bảng là bảng sẽ được xây dựng bằng các ngôn ngữ kí hiệu (các lệnh: commands) có xu hướng giúp cho người đọc có thể hiểu dễ dàng hơn, cảm nhận được cấu trúc bảng trong chế độ chỉnh sửa (Visual edit, Source edit) bài viết dễ hơn so với ngôn ngữ HTML
&lt;/ref&gt;

== Sơ lược về bảng ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:60%&quot;
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;| câu lệnh để '''bắt đầu tạo bảng'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|+&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''tiêu đề''' bảng, ''tùy chọn'', duy nhất cho mỗi bảng và đặt său ký tự đánh dấu bắt đầu bảng và trước ký tự đánh dấu hàng đầu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|-&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Hàng''', ''tùy chọn với hàng đầu tiên'' - nếu xuất hiện các phân cách cột, wiki mặc định thêm nó vào  dòng đấu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;!&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt; 
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Tên cột''', ''tùy chọn''. Các tên cột liên tiếp có thể để trên cùng một dòng ngăn cách nhau bởi hai dấu chấm than  (!!) hoặc bắt đầu trên một dòng khác, với một dấu chấm than (!).
|- 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Dữ liệu ô''', ''tùy chọn''. Các ô có thể viết trên cùng một dòng với hai dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;||&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), hoặc mỗi ô trên một dòng mới với một dấu gạch (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | kết thúc '''bảng'''.
|}
* Các ký tự trên bắt buộc phải được đặt ở đầu dòng trừ || và !!.
*'''Thuộc tính XHTML.''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Trừ cuối bảng, mỗi ký tự đánh dấu có thể chấp nhận một hay một vài thuộc tính XHTML.&lt;/span&gt; Các thuộc tính phải nằm trên cùng một dòng với ký tự đánh dấu, ngăn cách bởi một khoảng trống.
**Ô và tiêu đề (&lt;nowiki&gt;| hoặc ||, ! hoặc !!, và |+&lt;/nowiki&gt;) chứa nội dung. Vì thế hãy phân tách thuộc tính khỏi nội dung bằng một dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;). Nội dung của ô có thể theo ngay sau hoặc nằm trên dòng kế tiếp.
**Dấu hiệu bảng và hàng (&lt;nowiki&gt;{| và |-&lt;/nowiki&gt;) không trực tiếp chứa nội dung. Không chèn dấu gạch đứng  (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) sau chúng. Nếu chèn dấu gạch đứng sau dấu hiệu bảng hay hàng thì bộ phân tích ngữ pháp sẽ xoá nó cùng với thuộc tính.
*Nội dung có thể (a) theo sau ký hiệu ô trên cùng một dòng, sau những thuộc tính XHTML thêm vào hoặc (b) trong các dòng tiếp theo sau đó. Nội dung có sử dụng những kí pháp wiki cần bắt đầu trên dòng mới như danh sách, tiêu đề hoặc bảng lồng tất nhiên phải được đặt trên dòng riêng.
** '''Dấu gạch đứng trong nội dung.''' Để thêm dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) vào nội dung bảng, sử dụng &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;

==Bảng đơn giản==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Create a table with editor toolbar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In wikitext editor, place the caret where you want to insert a table. Then, in the toolbar, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-section-advanced}}”, then choose [[File:OOjs UI icon table.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table}} button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dialog opens.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the dialog, you can choose whether to enable a table header row, to stylize the table with border and to make the table [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|sortable]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview example is displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also set row and column counts you need. Then, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-insert}}” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, the following code is generated:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;display:flex&quot;&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikicode:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
 {&lt;nowiki/&gt;| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
 |+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
 |-
 ! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em; margin-left:2ex&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center; margin-bottom:1em&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Result:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
|+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
|-
! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Minimal syntax ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Bảng sau đây không có viền và giãn cách, cho thấy cú pháp cấu trúc bảng đơn giản nhất.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

Để cho trông giống bảng hơn thì các ô có thể được viết trên cùng một dòng, phân cách bởi ||. 
Nếu cần xuống dòng, sử dụng {{tag|br|single}}

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||thêm
|-
|Bánh mì    ||   Bánh ngọt     ||   thêm||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
|Bơ   || Kem ||  thêm nữa||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Bánh mỳ||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
| Bơ||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
|}

Khoảng trống phụ có thể được thêm vào trong ô để đoạn mã dễ nhìn hơn mà không ảnh hưởng đến kết quả.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
|}

Ô chữ có thể nhiều hơn hay chứa nhiều cấu trúc phức tạp hơn.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
|}

=== Định dạng bảng ===
Định dạng bảng sử dụng &quot;&lt;code&gt;!&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu chấm than) thay cho &quot;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu gạch đứng). 
Định dạng bảng thường thể hiện như đặt in đậm hay căn lề giữa như mặc định.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
|Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
|Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
!Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
| Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
| Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
! Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
|}

{{note|1=Khi dùng các thuộc tính như mục 'Sản phẩm', sử dụng dấu gạch đứng '&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;' để phân cách. Không dùng dấu chấm than '!'.}}

===Tiêu đề===

'''Tiêu đề bảng''' có thể thêm vào bên trên mỗi bảng như sau.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

=== class=&quot;wikitable&quot; ===

Kiểu cơ bản (nền xám nhạt, có viền, dồn sát và căn lề trái) có thể đặt dễ dàng bằng cách dùng class=&quot;wikitable&quot;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

===HTML chia hàng và chia cột===

bạn có thể dùng thuộc tính HTML '''chia hàng''' và '''chia cột''' với mỗi ô để tạo các bảng phức tạp.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
|Bánh kem
|Bánh ngọt
|Danish
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
|Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
|Bơ
|Sữa chua
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
| Bánh kem
| Bánh ngọt
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Danish&lt;/span&gt;
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
| Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
| Bơ
| Sữa chua
|}
|}

'''Thuộc tính HTML''':
Bạn có thể thêm các '''thuộc tính HTML''' vào bảng. 
Để xem nguồn chính thức về thuộc tính HTML, hãy xem [https://www.w3.org/TR/html401/struct/tables.html trang W3C's đặc tả về bảng của HTML].

=== Thuộc tính của bảng ===

Các thuộc tính đặt sau thẻ bắt đầu bảng (&lt;code&gt;{|&lt;/code&gt;) được áp cho toàn bảng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|12,333.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
|Bơ
|Kem
|1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
|1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của ô ===
Bạn có thể đặt thuộc tính cho từng '''ô''' riêng lẻ. 
Ví dụ, số trông đẹp hơn khi được canh phải.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

Có thể dùng chung thuộc tính '''ô''' khi đặt các ô này trên cùng một dòng. 
Nhớ rằng khi đó '''ô''' phân cách bởi  &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt;, và với mỗi '''ô ''' thuộc tính và giá trị được phân cách bởi &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của hàng ===

Bạn cũng có thể đặt thuộc tính riêng cho mỗi hàng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Attributes on caption and headers===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Attributes can be added to the caption and headers as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | Fruits
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | Fats
|-
|Cam
|Bơ
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Táo
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fruits&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fats&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Cam
| Bơ
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bánh mỳ&lt;/span&gt;
| Bánh kem
|-
| Táo
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Border width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has only one number, it is for all four border sides:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has more than one number, the four numbers are for '''top, right, bottom, left (REMEMBER clockwise order &amp;uarr;&amp;rarr;&amp;darr;&amp;larr;)''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:When there are fewer than 4 values :
&lt;/div&gt; 
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;three values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width is then the same on left and right side.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;two values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; (first value), and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; by default is assigned the value of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width on top is then the same as on bottom; width on left is the same as on right.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;one value i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; and it is the same for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt;. The fourth width are the same and build a regular border. This is a writing shortcut.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Another method to define the widths of the four sides of a cell is to use ''&quot;border-left&quot;, &quot;border-right&quot;, &quot;border-top&quot; and &quot;border-bottom&quot;'':
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width: 100%; overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The HTML attributes (such as &quot;width=&quot;, &quot;border=&quot;, &quot;cellspacing=&quot;, &quot;cellpadding=&quot;) do not need any length unit (the pixel unit is assumed).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are also invalid in HTML 5.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&quot;Cellpadding&quot; is for setting the space between the cell wall and the cell content.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.w3schools.com/tags/att_table_cellpadding.asp HTML table cellpadding Attribute]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The CSS style properties (which override the HTML attributes) require an explicit length unit (if the value is not 0) such as &quot;px&quot; for the pixel.
&lt;/div&gt;
}}

===Với thuộc tính HTML và định dạng CSS===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Các thuộc tính định dạng CSS có thể được thêm vào cùng với thuộc tính HTML hoặc không.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot; 
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Padding===
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%;&quot; 
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-valign=top
| style=&quot;padding:10px&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Column width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Column width''' can be added as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You type:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | This column width is 85% of the screen width
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| '''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| '''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You get:
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This column width is 85% of the screen width&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Accessibility of table header cells===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table header cells do not explicitly specify which table data cells they apply to (those on their right on the same row, or those below them on the same column).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the table is rendered in a visual 2D environment, this is usually easy to infer.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However when tables are rendered on non-visual media, you can help the browser to determine which table header cell applies to the description of any selected cell (in order to repeat its content in some accessibility helper) using a scope=&quot;row&quot; or scope=&quot;col&quot; attribute on table header cells.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases with simple tables, you'll use scope=&quot;col&quot; on all header cells of the first row, and scope=&quot;row&quot; on the first cell of the following rows:&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Item
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Quantity
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Price
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| Total
| $1.90
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Item&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quantity&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Price&lt;/span&gt;
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Total&lt;/span&gt;
| $1.90
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Alignment ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table alignment is achieved by using CSS.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The table alignment is controlled by margins.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A fixed margin on one side will make the table to be aligned to that side, if on the opposite side the margin is defined as ''auto''.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To have a table center aligned, you should set both margins to ''auto''&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, a right-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
And a center-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table floating around text ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you align a table to the right or the left side of the page, the text that comes after the table starts at the end of it, leaving an empty space around the table.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make the text to be wrapped around the table by making the table to ''float'' around the text instead of just aligning it.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be achieved using the &lt;code&gt;float&lt;/code&gt; CSS attribute, which can specify where the table floats to the right side or to the left.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When using ''float'', margins doesn't control table alignment and can be used to specify the margin between the table and the surrounding text.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Cell contents alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The alignment of cell contents can be controlled with 2 different CSS properties: &lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; can be specified at the table, row or individual cells, while &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt; only can be specified at individual rows or cells.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
|}

==Cảnh báo==

===Số âm===
Dấu trừ của số âm có thể gây nhầm lẫn nếu bạn viết như thế này: &lt;code&gt;|-6&lt;/code&gt;. 
Thay vào đó hãy chèn một khoảng trắng phía trước dấu trừ (&lt;code&gt;| -6&lt;/code&gt;) hoặc dùng cú pháp nội dòng (&lt;code&gt;||-6&lt;/code&gt;).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===CSS vs attributes===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Table borders specified through CSS rather than the border attribute will render incorrectly in a small subset of text browsers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Common attributes for columns, column groups and row groups===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The MediaWiki syntax for tables currently offers no support for specifying common attributes for columns (with the HTML element {{tag|col|single}}), column groups (HTML element {{tag|colgroup|content=}}) and row groups (HTML elements {{tag|thead|content=}}, {{tag|tbody|content=}} and {{tag|tfoot|content=}}).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those standard HTML elements are not accepted even in their HTML or XHTML syntax.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the rows and cells (header or data) of the table are rendered within a single implicit row group (HTML element {{tag|tbody|content=}}) without any attributes or styles.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Tables and the Visual Editor (VE) ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing tables}}''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Phab: T108245]]: &quot;Fully support basic table editing in the visual editor&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See the list of tasks. Finished tasks are &lt;s&gt;struck&lt;/s&gt;. It can be difficult to figure out from the technical language there what exactly has been improved, or what features have been added. Please add explanatory info below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Can now move or delete columns and rows ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on a column or row header.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then click on the arrow.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the popup menu click on &quot;Move&quot; or &quot;Delete&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert blank row or column ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
From the same popup menu click on &quot;Insert&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Copy table from web page to Visual Editor ===
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to copy and paste a table from a web page directly into the [[w:WP:Visual Editor|Visual Editor]] (VE).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do so safely, use a sandbox and check the table for proper coding in wikitext source mode and proper display in the Visual Editor and in preview mode.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Helping tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://excel2wiki.toolforge.org/ Excel2Wiki] allows you to copy a stylesheet from Excel, Apache OpenOffice, LibreOffice, or Gnumeric to convert it into wikicode table.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sorting rows of a table|Sorting rows of a table]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;m:Help:Sorting&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Help:Tables]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://www.tablesgenerator.com/mediawiki_tables A visual tool that helps generate tables]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Notes==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Tables]]</text>
      <sha1>lrn7nlilvfn2i2cby2slr1xl602eu05</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402334</id>
      <parentid>5402331</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:21:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36688" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
:''Bảng (Tables)'' có thể được tham khảo ở đây; nếu bạn muốn tìm thêm thông tin về cấu trúc cơ sở dữ liệu (CSDL) bảng, hãy tham khảo tại {{ll|Manual:Database layout}}.

'''Bảng (Tables)''' có thể tạo ra trong trang wiki. 
Một điều cơ bản mà bạn nên biết, hãy tránh sử dụng bảng trừ khi thật cần thiết nếu muốn tạo ra bảng dữ liệu. 
Lí do cơ bản là các lệnh để tạo ra và chỉnh sửa bảng (Table) thường khiến cho việc chỉnh sửa trang (Page) trở nên phức tạp hơn.&lt;ref&gt;
Bảng (Table) có thể được tạo ra bằng cách sử dụng trực tiếp các câu lệnh phần tử bảng (table elements) của HTML, hoặc sử dụng định dạng &quot;wikicode&quot; để xác định được bảng. 
Các câu lệnh phần tử của HTML để tạo bảng và cách sử dụng nó đều đã được giải thích chi tiết và kĩ càng trên nhiều trang Web khác nhau, vì thế nội dung này sẽ không được nhắc đến ở đây. 
Lợi ích của việc sử dụng mã nguồn Wikicode để tạo bảng là bảng sẽ được xây dựng bằng các ngôn ngữ kí hiệu (các lệnh: commands) có xu hướng giúp cho người đọc có thể hiểu dễ dàng hơn, cảm nhận được cấu trúc bảng trong chế độ chỉnh sửa (Visual edit, Source edit) bài viết dễ hơn so với ngôn ngữ HTML
&lt;/ref&gt;

== Sơ lược về bảng ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:60%&quot;
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;| câu lệnh để '''bắt đầu tạo bảng'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|+&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;câu lệnh để '''tạo ra tiêu đề bảng'''. ví dụ: Mức độ tăng trưởng dân số của năm X.
câu lệnh này là tùy chọn, chỉ được đặt ở giữa lệnh &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt; và &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|-&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|-&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Hàng''', ''tùy chọn với hàng đầu tiên'' - nếu xuất hiện các phân cách cột, wiki mặc định thêm nó vào  dòng đấu tiên.
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;!&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt; 
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Tên cột''', ''tùy chọn''. Các tên cột liên tiếp có thể để trên cùng một dòng ngăn cách nhau bởi hai dấu chấm than  (!!) hoặc bắt đầu trên một dòng khác, với một dấu chấm than (!).
|- 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''Dữ liệu ô''', ''tùy chọn''. Các ô có thể viết trên cùng một dòng với hai dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;||&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), hoặc mỗi ô trên một dòng mới với một dấu gạch (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | kết thúc '''bảng'''.
|}
* Các ký tự trên bắt buộc phải được đặt ở đầu dòng trừ || và !!.
*'''Thuộc tính XHTML.''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Trừ cuối bảng, mỗi ký tự đánh dấu có thể chấp nhận một hay một vài thuộc tính XHTML.&lt;/span&gt; Các thuộc tính phải nằm trên cùng một dòng với ký tự đánh dấu, ngăn cách bởi một khoảng trống.
**Ô và tiêu đề (&lt;nowiki&gt;| hoặc ||, ! hoặc !!, và |+&lt;/nowiki&gt;) chứa nội dung. Vì thế hãy phân tách thuộc tính khỏi nội dung bằng một dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;). Nội dung của ô có thể theo ngay sau hoặc nằm trên dòng kế tiếp.
**Dấu hiệu bảng và hàng (&lt;nowiki&gt;{| và |-&lt;/nowiki&gt;) không trực tiếp chứa nội dung. Không chèn dấu gạch đứng  (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) sau chúng. Nếu chèn dấu gạch đứng sau dấu hiệu bảng hay hàng thì bộ phân tích ngữ pháp sẽ xoá nó cùng với thuộc tính.
*Nội dung có thể (a) theo sau ký hiệu ô trên cùng một dòng, sau những thuộc tính XHTML thêm vào hoặc (b) trong các dòng tiếp theo sau đó. Nội dung có sử dụng những kí pháp wiki cần bắt đầu trên dòng mới như danh sách, tiêu đề hoặc bảng lồng tất nhiên phải được đặt trên dòng riêng.
** '''Dấu gạch đứng trong nội dung.''' Để thêm dấu gạch đứng (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) vào nội dung bảng, sử dụng &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;

==Bảng đơn giản==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Create a table with editor toolbar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In wikitext editor, place the caret where you want to insert a table. Then, in the toolbar, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-section-advanced}}”, then choose [[File:OOjs UI icon table.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table}} button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dialog opens.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the dialog, you can choose whether to enable a table header row, to stylize the table with border and to make the table [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|sortable]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview example is displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also set row and column counts you need. Then, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-insert}}” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, the following code is generated:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;display:flex&quot;&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikicode:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
 {&lt;nowiki/&gt;| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
 |+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
 |-
 ! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em; margin-left:2ex&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center; margin-bottom:1em&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Result:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
|+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
|-
! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Minimal syntax ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Bảng sau đây không có viền và giãn cách, cho thấy cú pháp cấu trúc bảng đơn giản nhất.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

Để cho trông giống bảng hơn thì các ô có thể được viết trên cùng một dòng, phân cách bởi ||. 
Nếu cần xuống dòng, sử dụng {{tag|br|single}}

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||thêm
|-
|Bánh mì    ||   Bánh ngọt     ||   thêm||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
|Bơ   || Kem ||  thêm nữa||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Cam    ||   Táo   ||   thêm||Táo||&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Bánh mỳ||Bánh kem||thêm
|-
| Bơ||Đá &lt;br/&gt; kem||và &lt;br/&gt; thêm nữa
|}
|}

Khoảng trống phụ có thể được thêm vào trong ô để đoạn mã dễ nhìn hơn mà không ảnh hưởng đến kết quả.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|  Cam || Táo || thêm
|-
|   Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem || thêm
|-
|   Bơ || Kem || thêm nữa
|}
|}

Ô chữ có thể nhiều hơn hay chứa nhiều cấu trúc phức tạp hơn.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
|}

=== Định dạng bảng ===
Định dạng bảng sử dụng &quot;&lt;code&gt;!&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu chấm than) thay cho &quot;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (dấu gạch đứng). 
Định dạng bảng thường thể hiện như đặt in đậm hay căn lề giữa như mặc định.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
|Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
|Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
!Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Sản phẩm
! Số lượng
! Giá
|-
| Cam
|10
|7.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
|4
|3.00
|-
| Bơ
|1
|5.00
|-
! Tổng cộng
|
|15.00
|}
|}

{{note|1=Khi dùng các thuộc tính như mục 'Sản phẩm', sử dụng dấu gạch đứng '&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;' để phân cách. Không dùng dấu chấm than '!'.}}

===Tiêu đề===

'''Tiêu đề bảng''' có thể thêm vào bên trên mỗi bảng như sau.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

=== class=&quot;wikitable&quot; ===

Kiểu cơ bản (nền xám nhạt, có viền, dồn sát và căn lề trái) có thể đặt dễ dàng bằng cách dùng class=&quot;wikitable&quot;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+Thức ăn
|-
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ Thức ăn
|-
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

===HTML chia hàng và chia cột===

bạn có thể dùng thuộc tính HTML '''chia hàng''' và '''chia cột''' với mỗi ô để tạo các bảng phức tạp.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
|Bánh kem
|Bánh ngọt
|Danish
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
|Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
|Bơ
|Sữa chua
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Sản phẩm
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh mỳ và Bơ
| Bánh kem
| Bánh ngọt
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Danish&lt;/span&gt;
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Bánh sừng bò
|-
| Phô mai
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Kem
| Bơ
| Sữa chua
|}
|}

'''Thuộc tính HTML''':
Bạn có thể thêm các '''thuộc tính HTML''' vào bảng. 
Để xem nguồn chính thức về thuộc tính HTML, hãy xem [https://www.w3.org/TR/html401/struct/tables.html trang W3C's đặc tả về bảng của HTML].

=== Thuộc tính của bảng ===

Các thuộc tính đặt sau thẻ bắt đầu bảng (&lt;code&gt;{|&lt;/code&gt;) được áp cho toàn bảng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|12,333.00
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
|Bơ
|Kem
|1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
|1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của ô ===
Bạn có thể đặt thuộc tính cho từng '''ô''' riêng lẻ. 
Ví dụ, số trông đẹp hơn khi được canh phải.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

Có thể dùng chung thuộc tính '''ô''' khi đặt các ô này trên cùng một dòng. 
Nhớ rằng khi đó '''ô''' phân cách bởi  &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt;, và với mỗi '''ô ''' thuộc tính và giá trị được phân cách bởi &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam || Táo     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ || Bánh kem       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Bơ || Kem || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

=== Thuộc tính của hàng ===

Bạn cũng có thể đặt thuộc tính riêng cho mỗi hàng.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Bạn gõ
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|sẽ được
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Bơ
| Kem
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Attributes on caption and headers===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Attributes can be added to the caption and headers as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | Fruits
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | Fats
|-
|Cam
|Bơ
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Táo
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Thức ăn''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fruits&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fats&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Cam
| Bơ
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bánh mỳ&lt;/span&gt;
| Bánh kem
|-
| Táo
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Border width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has only one number, it is for all four border sides:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &quot;border-width:&quot; has more than one number, the four numbers are for '''top, right, bottom, left (REMEMBER clockwise order &amp;uarr;&amp;rarr;&amp;darr;&amp;larr;)''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:When there are fewer than 4 values :
&lt;/div&gt; 
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;three values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width is then the same on left and right side.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;two values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; (first value), and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; by default is assigned the value of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width on top is then the same as on bottom; width on left is the same as on right.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;one value i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; and it is the same for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt;. The fourth width are the same and build a regular border. This is a writing shortcut.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Another method to define the widths of the four sides of a cell is to use ''&quot;border-left&quot;, &quot;border-right&quot;, &quot;border-top&quot; and &quot;border-bottom&quot;'':
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width: 100%; overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt; 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
Hello
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hello&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The HTML attributes (such as &quot;width=&quot;, &quot;border=&quot;, &quot;cellspacing=&quot;, &quot;cellpadding=&quot;) do not need any length unit (the pixel unit is assumed).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are also invalid in HTML 5.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&quot;Cellpadding&quot; is for setting the space between the cell wall and the cell content.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.w3schools.com/tags/att_table_cellpadding.asp HTML table cellpadding Attribute]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The CSS style properties (which override the HTML attributes) require an explicit length unit (if the value is not 0) such as &quot;px&quot; for the pixel.
&lt;/div&gt;
}}

===Với thuộc tính HTML và định dạng CSS===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Các thuộc tính định dạng CSS có thể được thêm vào cùng với thuộc tính HTML hoặc không.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;
|Cam
|Táo
|-
|Bánh mỳ
|Bánh kem
|-
|Bơ
|Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot; 
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Padding===
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%;&quot; 
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-valign=top
| style=&quot;padding:10px&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Column width===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Column width''' can be added as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You type:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | This column width is 85% of the screen width
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| '''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| '''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You get:
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This column width is 85% of the screen width&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Accessibility of table header cells===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table header cells do not explicitly specify which table data cells they apply to (those on their right on the same row, or those below them on the same column).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the table is rendered in a visual 2D environment, this is usually easy to infer.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However when tables are rendered on non-visual media, you can help the browser to determine which table header cell applies to the description of any selected cell (in order to repeat its content in some accessibility helper) using a scope=&quot;row&quot; or scope=&quot;col&quot; attribute on table header cells.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases with simple tables, you'll use scope=&quot;col&quot; on all header cells of the first row, and scope=&quot;row&quot; on the first cell of the following rows:&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Item
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Quantity
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Price
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| Total
| $1.90
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Item&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quantity&lt;/span&gt;
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Price&lt;/span&gt;
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bánh mỳ
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Bơ
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Total&lt;/span&gt;
| $1.90
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Alignment ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table alignment is achieved by using CSS.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The table alignment is controlled by margins.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A fixed margin on one side will make the table to be aligned to that side, if on the opposite side the margin is defined as ''auto''.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To have a table center aligned, you should set both margins to ''auto''&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, a right-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
And a center-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Table floating around text ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you align a table to the right or the left side of the page, the text that comes after the table starts at the end of it, leaving an empty space around the table.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make the text to be wrapped around the table by making the table to ''float'' around the text instead of just aligning it.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be achieved using the &lt;code&gt;float&lt;/code&gt; CSS attribute, which can specify where the table floats to the right side or to the left.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When using ''float'', margins doesn't control table alignment and can be used to specify the margin between the table and the surrounding text.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Cam
| Táo
|-
| Bánh mỳ
| Bánh kem
|-
| Bơ
| Kem 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Cell contents alignment ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The alignment of cell contents can be controlled with 2 different CSS properties: &lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; can be specified at the table, row or individual cells, while &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt; only can be specified at individual rows or cells.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
|}

==Cảnh báo==

===Số âm===
Dấu trừ của số âm có thể gây nhầm lẫn nếu bạn viết như thế này: &lt;code&gt;|-6&lt;/code&gt;. 
Thay vào đó hãy chèn một khoảng trắng phía trước dấu trừ (&lt;code&gt;| -6&lt;/code&gt;) hoặc dùng cú pháp nội dòng (&lt;code&gt;||-6&lt;/code&gt;).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===CSS vs attributes===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Table borders specified through CSS rather than the border attribute will render incorrectly in a small subset of text browsers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Common attributes for columns, column groups and row groups===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The MediaWiki syntax for tables currently offers no support for specifying common attributes for columns (with the HTML element {{tag|col|single}}), column groups (HTML element {{tag|colgroup|content=}}) and row groups (HTML elements {{tag|thead|content=}}, {{tag|tbody|content=}} and {{tag|tfoot|content=}}).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those standard HTML elements are not accepted even in their HTML or XHTML syntax.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the rows and cells (header or data) of the table are rendered within a single implicit row group (HTML element {{tag|tbody|content=}}) without any attributes or styles.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Tables and the Visual Editor (VE) ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing tables}}''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Phab: T108245]]: &quot;Fully support basic table editing in the visual editor&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See the list of tasks. Finished tasks are &lt;s&gt;struck&lt;/s&gt;. It can be difficult to figure out from the technical language there what exactly has been improved, or what features have been added. Please add explanatory info below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Can now move or delete columns and rows ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on a column or row header.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then click on the arrow.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the popup menu click on &quot;Move&quot; or &quot;Delete&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert blank row or column ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
From the same popup menu click on &quot;Insert&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Copy table from web page to Visual Editor ===
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to copy and paste a table from a web page directly into the [[w:WP:Visual Editor|Visual Editor]] (VE).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do so safely, use a sandbox and check the table for proper coding in wikitext source mode and proper display in the Visual Editor and in preview mode.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Helping tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://excel2wiki.toolforge.org/ Excel2Wiki] allows you to copy a stylesheet from Excel, Apache OpenOffice, LibreOffice, or Gnumeric to convert it into wikicode table.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sorting rows of a table|Sorting rows of a table]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;m:Help:Sorting&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Help:Tables]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://www.tablesgenerator.com/mediawiki_tables A visual tool that helps generate tables]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Notes==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Tables]]</text>
      <sha1>pgqkep432mq6e0peuag91u88qxyi84e</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Configuration settings/es</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>16595</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402170</id>
      <parentid>5393281</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:40:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Low quality/machine translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="59154" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{TOCright}}
{{Note
|1=Empezando con $&lt;span translate=&quot;no&quot; class=&quot;notranslate&quot;&gt;1&lt;/span&gt; los parámetros de configuración están basados en $&lt;span translate=&quot;no&quot; class=&quot;notranslate&quot;&gt;2&lt;/span&gt;.
|2=gotcha
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is an index of all supported '''configuration settings''' based on the &lt;code&gt;'''[https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-core/blob/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php DefaultSettings.php]'''&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

Nunca editar $&lt;span translate=&quot;no&quot; class=&quot;notranslate&quot;&gt;1&lt;/span&gt;; copia líneas apropiadas a $&lt;span translate=&quot;no&quot; class=&quot;notranslate&quot;&gt;2&lt;/span&gt; en cambio y enmendarles como apropiado.

Si no puedes encontrar una configuración aquí, mira si  está definido en $&lt;span translate=&quot;no&quot; class=&quot;notranslate&quot;&gt;1&lt;/span&gt;.
La variable tendría que tener alguna documentación allí.

{{Note|1=La variable debería tener algo de documentación allí. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please use the search box to find the relevant manual page (e.g. &lt;code&gt;Manual:$wgAllowAnonymousMinor&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;}}

:{{ll|Manual:Configuration settings (alphabetical)|2=Enumerados alfabéticamente}} | {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Listed by function&lt;/span&gt;}} | {{ll|Category:MediaWiki configuration settings}}

{{anchor|General Settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== General Settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitename}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVersion}}

{{anchor|Global Objects}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Global Objects ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoloadLocalClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgConf}}

{{anchor|Server URLs and file paths|URLs and file paths|Paths}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Server URLs and file paths ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|IP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgActionPaths}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAppleTouchIcon}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgArticlePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAssumeProxiesUseDefaultProtocolPorts}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBaseDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCanonicalServer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgConfigRegistry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionAssetsPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFavicon}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFFmpegLocation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFFprobeLocation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileCacheDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForceHTTPS}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHttpsPort}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImgAuthPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLoadScript}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalStylePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogoHD}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogos}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogo}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainPageIsDomainRoot}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReferrerPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgScriptExtension}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgScriptPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgScript}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgServerName}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgServer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitesCacheFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStyleDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStylePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStyleSheetPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTmpDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadBaseUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadStashScalerBaseUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsePathInfo}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also [[#Uploads|file/image upload path settings]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also [[#Skins|skins path settings]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Files and file uploads|Uploads}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Files and file uploads ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Uploads have to be specially set up to be secure.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowCopyUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowJavaUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAttemptFailureEpoch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCheckFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadAllowOnWikiDomainConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadProxy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadsDomains}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadsFromSpecialUpload}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeletedDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDirectoryMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableUploadScriptChecks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableAsyncUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileBackends}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProhibitedFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHashedUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgIllegalFileChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImagePreconnect}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImgAuthDetails}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImgAuthUrlPathMap}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalFileRepo}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLockManagers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxUploadSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMediaInTargetLanguage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMinUploadChunkSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNativeImageLazyLoading}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserTestMediaHandlers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStrictFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailEpoch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadDialog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadMaintenance}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadMissingFileUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadNavigationUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadSizeWarning}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadStashMaxAge}}

{{anchor|Shared uploads}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Shared uploads ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These settings are kept for backward compatibility, see {{ll|Manual:$wgForeignFileRepos|$wgForeignFileRepos}} for the new setting, or {{ll|Manual:$wgUseInstantCommons|$wgUseInstantCommons}} if you only need read access to images on Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheSharedUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForeignFileRepos}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForeignUploadTargets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHashedSharedUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRepositoryBaseUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadDBname}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadDBprefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSharedUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFetchCommonsDescriptions}}

{{anchor|MIME types}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MIME types ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeDetectorCommand}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeInfoFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeTypeFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrivialMimeDetection}}
:{{Warning|1=&amp;uarr;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is '''not''' a configuration setting, but a global state variable.&lt;/span&gt;  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It should be used solely by {{ll|Manual:Thumb.php|thumb.php}}!&lt;/span&gt;|inline=1}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVerifyMimeType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVerifyMimeTypeIE}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeTypeBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeTypeExclusions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgXMLMimeTypes}}

''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Manual:Mime type detection}}''

{{anchor|Images}}

=== Imágenes ===
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowImageMoving}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCustomConvertCommand}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableAutoRotation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExiftool}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExiv2Command}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGalleryOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgIgnoreImageErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImageLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJpegQuality}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJpegTran}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxImageArea}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMediaHandlers}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameters for [[#Paths|upload path]]&lt;/span&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrustedMediaFormats}}

''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Manual:Configuring file uploads}}''

{{anchor|DjVu}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== DjVu ====
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuDump}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuOutputExtension}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuPostProcessor}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuRenderer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuToXML}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuTxt}}

{{anchor|EXIF}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== EXIF ====
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowEXIF}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpdateCompatibleMetadata}}

{{anchor|ImageMagick}}
==== ImageMagick ====
* {{configuration list entry|wgImageMagickConvertCommand}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImageMagickTempDir}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxInterlacingAreas}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharpenParameter}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharpenReductionThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseImageMagick}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTinyRGBForJPGThumbnails}}

{{anchor|SVG}}
==== SVG ====
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowTitlesInSVG}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGConverter}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGConverterPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGConverters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGMaxSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGMetadataCutoff}}

{{anchor|Thumbnail settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Thumbnail settings ====
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseImageResize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGenerateThumbnailOnParse}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxAnimatedGifArea}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedThumbnailScriptPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowArchiveThumbnails}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTiffThumbnailType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailScriptPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbUpright}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResponsiveImages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailBuckets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailMinimumBucketDistance}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJpegPixelFormat}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderHttpCustomHost}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderHttpCustomDomain}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderMap}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderMethod}}

{{anchor|Antivirus}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Antivirus ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAntivirus}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAntivirusRequired}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAntivirusSetup}}

{{anchor|Email settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Email settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;

''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also User Access:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Manual:$wgEmailConfirmToEdit|$wgEmailConfirmToEdit}}''

* {{configuration list entry|wgAdditionalMailParams}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowHTMLEmail}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEmailAuthentication}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEmergencyContact}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableEmail}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableSpecialMute}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUserEmailBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUserEmailMuteList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUserEmail}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNewPasswordExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoReplyAddress}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordExpirationDays}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordExpireGrace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordReminderResendTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordSender}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSMTP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUserEmailConfirmationTokenExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUserEmailUseReplyTo}}

{{anchor|Email notification (Enotif) settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Email notification (Enotif) settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Actual notifications for each user are defined in the options.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change defaults with {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions|$wgDefaultUserOptions}}.&lt;/span&gt;''

* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifFromEditor}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifImpersonal}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifMaxRecips}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifMinorEdits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifRevealEditorAddress}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifUseRealName}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifUserTalk}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifWatchlist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseEnotif}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsersNotifiedOnAllChanges}}

{{anchor|Database settings}}
{{anchor|MSSQL-specific|MSSQL specific}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
{{anchor|Oracle-specific|Oracle specific}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Database settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDataCenterUpdateStickTTL}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBadminpassword}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBadminuser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBcompress}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBDefaultGroup}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBerrorLogTZ}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBerrorLog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBmwschema}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBname}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBOracleDRCP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBpassword}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBprefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBserver}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBssl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBtype}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBuser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBWindowsAuthentication}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalDatabases}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxExecutionTimeForExpensiveQueries}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMultiContentRevisionSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchTypeAlternatives}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTemplateLinksSchemaMigrationStage}}

{{anchor|LoadBalancer settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== LoadBalancer settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgDBservers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLBFactoryConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMasterWaitTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSlaveLagCritical}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSlaveLagWarning}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDatabaseReplicaLagCritical}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDatabaseReplicaLagWarning}}

{{anchor|MySQL-specific|MySQL specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MySQL-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBmysql5}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBTableOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSQLMode}}

{{anchor|PostgreSQL-specific|PostgreSQL specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== PostgreSQL-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBport}}

{{anchor|SQLite-specific|SQLite specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== SQLite-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgSQLiteDataDir}}

{{anchor|Shared DB settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Shared DB settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedDB}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedTables}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedSchema}}

{{anchor|Extension fields}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension fields ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtPGNewFields}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtNewTables}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtNewFields}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtNewIndexes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtPGAlteredFields}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtModifiedFields}}

{{anchor|Content handlers and storage|ContentHandler}}
{{anchor|Compressed Storage Support}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Content handlers and storage ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCompressRevisions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentHandlers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentHandlerTextFallback}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultExternalStore}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDiffEngine}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableRemoteBagOStuffTests}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalDiffEngine}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalStores}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceContentModels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPageLanguageUseDB}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRevisionCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTextModelsToParse}}

{{anchor|Performance hacks and limits|Performance|Reduction}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Performance hacks and limits ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSchemaUpdates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSlowParserFunctions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCriticalSectionTimeLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableQueryPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForceDeferredUpdatesPreSend}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLinkHolderBatchSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxArticleSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaximumMovedPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxJobDBWriteDuration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxUserDBWriteDuration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemoryLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMiserMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMultiShardSiteStats}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPoolCounterConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgQueryCacheLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgQueryPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRequestTimeLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTransactionalTimeLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWantedPagesThreshold}}

{{anchor|Cache}}
{{anchor|Client side caching}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Cache ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Manual:Caching}}

* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheEpoch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCachePages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgChronologyProtectorStash}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgClockSkewFudge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionInfoMTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFooterLinkCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGitInfoCacheDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidateCacheOnLocalSettingsChange}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLanguageConverterCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainStash}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgObjectCaches}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserCacheUseJson}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParsoidCacheConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPHPSessionHandling}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionPbkdf2Iterations}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSuspiciousIpExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseGzip}}

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;''See: [[#Interwiki|Interwiki]] for Interwiki cache settings.''&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|File Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== File Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Settings for Server side file caching.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgFileCacheDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseFileCache}}

{{anchor|Message Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Message Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAdaptiveMessageCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalisationCacheConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMessageCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseLocalMessageCache}}

{{anchor|Sidebar Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sidebar Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSidebarCacheExpiry}}

{{anchor|Parser Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Parser Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableParserCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOldRevisionParserCacheExpireTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRenderHashAppend}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserCacheExpireTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseContentMediaStyles}}

{{anchor|Memcached settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Memcached settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Settings for configuring the {{ll|Memcached}} memory-based object store (if you are using it) {{git file|file=docs/memcached.md}} has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedDebug}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedPersistent}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgObjectCacheSessionExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionsInObjectCache}}

{{anchor|WAN cache}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== WAN cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableWANCacheReaper}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainWANCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWANObjectCaches}}

{{anchor|HTTP proxy (CDN) settings|CDN / Squid|Squid}}
{{anchor|Proxies}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== HTTP proxy (CDN) settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These settings configure MediaWiki when using a caching HTTP proxy server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They apply to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Varnish caching|caching using Varnish]] as well as [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Squid caching|Squid]].&lt;/span&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxageLagged}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxageStale}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxageSubstitute}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnReboundPurgeDelay}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnServersNoPurge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForcedRawSMaxage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInternalServer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLoggedOutMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidMaxage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidPurgeUseHostHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidServersNoPurge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCdn}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseESI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseKeyHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsePrivateIPs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSquid}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVaryOnXFP}}

{{anchor|HTCP multicast purging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== HTCP multicast purging ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTCPMulticastTTL}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTCPRouting}}

{{anchor|Language, regional and character encoding settings|Localization}}
{{anchor|User agent}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Language, regional and character encoding settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllUnicodeFixes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBrowserBlackList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultLanguageVariant}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisabledVariants}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableLangConversion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableTitleConversion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDummyLanguageCodes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraInterlanguageLinkPrefixes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraLanguageCodes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraLanguageNames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFixArabicUnicode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFixMalayalamUnicode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGrammarForms}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHideInterlanguageLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterlanguageLinkCodeMap}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiMagic}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLangObjCacheSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLanguageCode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegacyEncoding}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegacySchemaConversion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLoginLanguageSelector}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxMsgCacheEntrySize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMsgCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOverrideUcfirstCharacters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRawHtmlMessages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseDatabaseMessages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsePigLatinVariant}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVariantArticlePath}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgUserFallbackLanguages|$wgUserFallbackLanguages}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;maximum number of fallback languages per user&lt;/span&gt;&lt;!-- Can't use {{configuration list entry because [[Manual:$wgUserFallbackLanguages]] doesn't include the standard infobox --&gt;

{{anchor|Timezone settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Timezone settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocaltimezone}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalTZoffset}}

{{anchor|Language-specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Language-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;

;{{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAmericanDates}}

;{{#language:ar|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}/{{#language:hi|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTranslateNumerals}}

{{anchor|Output format and skin settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Output format and skin settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Output}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Output ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgBrowserFormatDetection}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableOutputCompression}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEdititis}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEditSubmitButtonLabelPublish}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableCanonicalServerLink}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExperimentalHtmlIds}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalInterwikiFragmentMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFragmentMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHtml5Version}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHtml5}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTMLFormAllowTableFormat}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJsMimeType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMangleFlashPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSend404Code}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowRollbackEditCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteNotice}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteSupportPage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseMediaWikiUIEverywhere}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgXhtmlNamespaces}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following setting is no longer used in supported versions of MediaWiki, but still exists for backward compatibility
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgXhtmlDefaultNamespace}}

{{anchor|Skins}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skins ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultSkin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFallbackSkin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFooterIcons}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkinMetaTags}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkipSkins}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkipSkin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCombinedLoginLink}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVectorUseIconWatch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVectorUseSimpleSearch}}

{{anchor|Resource loader}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== ResourceLoader ==
&lt;/div&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|ResourceLoader}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;''

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgIncludeLegacyJavaScript}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegacyJavaScriptGlobals}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceBasePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderDebug}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderEnableJSProfiler}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderLESSImportPaths}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderLESSVars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMaxage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMaxQueryLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMinifierMaxLineLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMinifierStatementsOnOwnLine}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderSources}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderStorageEnabled}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderStorageVersion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderUseObjectCacheForDeps}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderValidateJS}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderValidateStaticJS}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceModuleSkinStyles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVueDevelopmentMode}}

{{anchor|Page titles and redirects}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Page titles and redirects ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableHardRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFixDoubleRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidRedirectTargets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShortPagesNamespaceBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShortPagesNamespaceExclusions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCapitalLinkOverrides}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCapitalLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegalTitleChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxRedirects}}

{{anchor|Namespaces}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Namespaces ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCanonicalNamespaceNames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraGenderNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraSignatureNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetaNamespace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetaNamespaceTalk}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceAliases}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespacesWithSubpages}}

{{anchor|Mobile support}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Mobile support ===
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Interwiki links and sites|Interwiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Interwiki links and sites ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiPrefixDisplayTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalInterwikis}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalInterwiki}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRedirectSources}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteTypes}}

{{anchor|Interwiki cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Interwiki cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|interwiki cache}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;''

* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiFallbackSite}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiScopes}}

{{anchor|Parser}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Parser ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowDisplayTitle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowExternalImagesFrom}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowExternalImages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowImageTag}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCleanSignatures}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableImageWhitelist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableMagicLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableScaryTranscluding}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExpensiveParserFunctionLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalLinkTarget}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxGeneratedPPNodeCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxPPExpandDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxPPNodeCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxTemplateDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxTocLevel}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoFollowDomainExceptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoFollowLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoFollowNsExceptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserEnableLegacyMediaDOM}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParsoidSettings}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPreprocessorCacheThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRegisterInternalExternals}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestrictDisplayTitle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTranscludeCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUrlProtocols}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseNewMediaStructure}}

{{anchor|HTML}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== HTML ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgRawHtml}}

{{anchor|Tidy}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tidy ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{update}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tidy is an open source tool that cleans up broken HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use this to ensure that broken HTML in articles doesn't affect the layout of your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;While Tidy itself is going to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|replaced]], the configuration settings can still be used for the replacements.&lt;/span&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugTidy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyBin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyInternal}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyOpts}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTidy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgValidateAllHtml}}

:''See also: {{ll|Manual:Build Tidy from source}}.''

{{anchor|Statistics and content analysis|Site Statistics}}
{{anchor|Statistics}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Statistics and content analysis ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActiveUserDays}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgArticleCountMethod}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableCounters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExperiencedUserEdits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExperiencedUserMemberSince}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLearnerEdits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLearnerMemberSince}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgManualRevertSearchRadius}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRevertedTagMaxDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteStatsAsyncFactor}}

{{anchor|User accounts, authentication|Users}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User accounts, authentication ==
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowRequiringEmailForResets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoCreateTempUser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHiddenPrefs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidUsernameCharacters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaximalPasswordLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxNameChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxSigChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMinimalPasswordLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReservedUsernames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSignatureValidation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSignatureAllowedLintErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUserrightsInterwikiDelimiter}}

{{anchor|Authentication}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Authentication ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSecuritySensitiveOperationIfCannotReauthenticate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuthenticationTokenVersion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuthManagerAutoConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuthManagerConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCentralIdLookupProviders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCentralIdLookupProvider}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgChangeCredentialsBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidPasswordReset}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordDefault}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordResetRoutes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordSalt}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReauthenticateTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRememberMe}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRemoveCredentialsBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSecureLogin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionProviders}}

{{anchor|User rights, access control and monitoring|User Access}}
{{anchor|Rate limiter}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User rights, access control and monitoring ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAddGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoblockExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBlockAllowsUTEdit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeleteRevisionsBatchSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDnsBlacklistUrls}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEmailConfirmToEdit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableDnsBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGrantPermissionGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGrantPermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupInheritsPermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupPermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupsAddToSelf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHideUserContribLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImplicitGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordAttemptThrottle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProxyList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProxyWhitelist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRateLimitsExcludedIPs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRateLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRevokePermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWhitelistReadRegexp}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWhitelistRead}}

{{anchor|Access}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Access ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Blocking/banning, and some other related settings.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgAccountCreationThrottle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgApplyIpBlocksToXff}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoConfirmAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoConfirmCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutopromoteOnceLogInRC}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutopromoteOnce}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutopromote}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAvailableRights}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBlockCIDRLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBlockDisablesLogin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBotPasswordsCluster}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBotPasswordsDatabase}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCascadingRestrictionLevels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableBotPasswords}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnablePartialBlocks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnablePartialActionBlocks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHideIdentifiableRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNonincludableNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPutIPinRC}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgQueryPageDefaultLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestrictionLevels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestrictionTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSemiprotectedRestrictionLevels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSoftBlockRanges}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpamRegex}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSummarySpamRegex}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSysopEmailBans}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} for more methods and settings concerning access.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also {{ll|Manual:User rights}} for more information about $wgGroupPermissions, $wgAddGroups, $wgRemoveGroups, etc.&lt;/span&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[#User Access|User Access]] for User Access settings.&lt;/span&gt;''

{{anchor|Security|Content Security Policy|Content security policy}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Security ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowCrossOrigin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowUserCssPrefs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowUserCss}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowUserJs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgApiFrameOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBreakFrames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCSPFalsePositiveUrls}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCSPHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCSPReportOnlyHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEditPageFrameOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHKDFAlgorithm}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHKDFSecret}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestAllowCrossOriginCookieAuth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSecretKey}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionInsecureSecrets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionSecret}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSiteCss}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSiteJs}}

{{anchor|Cookies}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Cookies ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheVaryCookies}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieDomain}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieExpiration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieHttpOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookiePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookiePrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSameSite}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSecure}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSetOnAutoblock}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSetOnIpBlock}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableCookieCheck}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtendedLoginCookieExpiration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionHandler}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionName}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSameSiteLegacyCookies}}

{{anchor|Profiling, testing and debugging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Profiling, testing and debugging ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCachePrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableJavaScriptTest}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserTestFiles}}

{{anchor|Debug|Debug/logging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Debug ===
&lt;/div&gt;

:''See also: {{ll|Manual:How to debug}}''

* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugComments}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugDumpSql}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugLogFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugLogGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugLogPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugPrintHttpHeaders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugRawPage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugTimestamps}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugToolbar}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeprecationReleaseLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDevelopmentWarnings}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogExceptionBacktrace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMWLoggerDefaultSpi}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOverrideHostname}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPageInfoTransclusionLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPropagateErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowDBErrorBacktrace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowDebug}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowExceptionDetails}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowHostnames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowSQLErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialVersionShowHooks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrxProfilerLimits}}

{{anchor|Profiling}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Profiling ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableProfileInfo}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetricsTarget}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetricsPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetricsFormat}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProfiler}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProfileLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProfileOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsdMetricPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsdSamplingRates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsdServer}}

{{anchor|Search}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Search ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAdvancedSearchHighlighting}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableInternalSearch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableSearchUpdate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableTextSearch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableOpenSearchSuggest}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableSearchContributorsByIP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespacesToBeSearchedDefault}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchDefaultLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchDescriptionLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchTemplates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchTemplate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchForwardUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchHighlightBoundaries}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchMatchRedirectPreference}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchRunSuggestedQuery}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchSuggestCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitemapNamespacesPriorities}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitemapNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialSearchFormOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTwoButtonsSearchForm}}

{{anchor|Edit user interface}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Edit user interface ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDiff3}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDiff}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPreviewOnOpenNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUniversalEditButton}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseAutomaticEditSummaries}}

{{anchor|Maintenance Scripts setting}}
{{anchor|Wiki locking}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Maintenance Scripts setting ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCommandLineDarkBg}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCommandLineMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGitBin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGitRepositoryViewers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReadOnlyFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReadOnlyWatchedItemStore}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReadOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpgradeKey}}

{{anchor|Recent changes, new pages, watchlist and history|Recent changes}}
{{anchor|UDP updates}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Recent changes, new pages, watchlist and history ==
&lt;/div&gt;

See also {{ll|Help:Recent changes}} and {{wg|DefaultUserOptions}}

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowCategorizedRecentChanges}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableAnonTalk}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogAutopatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCChangedSizeThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCEngines}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCFeeds}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCFilterByAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCLinkDays}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCLinkLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCShowChangedSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCShowWatchingUsers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCWatchCategoryMembership}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRecentChangesFlags}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowUpdatedMarker}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSoftwareTags}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStructuredChangeFiltersLiveUpdatePollingRate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUnwatchedPageSecret}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUnwatchedPageThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseFilePatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseNPPatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseRCPatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTagFilter}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchersMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchlistExpiryMaxDuration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchlistExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchlistPurgeRate}}

{{anchor|Feed}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Feed ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeed}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAdvertisedFeedTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedCacheTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedDiffCutoff}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOverrideSiteFeed}}

{{anchor|Copyright}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Copyright ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxCredits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsIcon}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsPage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsText}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowCreditsIfMax}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCopyrightUpload}}

{{anchor|Import/Export}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Import/Export ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportAllowAll}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportAllowHistory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportAllowListContributors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportFromNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportMaxHistory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportPagelistLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImportSources}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImportTargetNamespace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgXmlDumpSchemaVersion}}

{{anchor|Extensions}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoloadAttemptLowercase}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoloadClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableParserLimitReporting}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionCredits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionEntryPointListFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionFunctions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionMessagesFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHooks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobBackoffThrottling}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobQueueIncludeInMaxLagFactor}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobSerialCommitThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobTypeConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobTypesExcludedFromDefaultQueue}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMessagesDirs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPagePropLinkInvalidations}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserOutputHooks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgServiceWiringFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialPageCacheUpdates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgValidSkinNames}}

{{anchor|Category}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Category ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCategoryCollation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCategoryMagicGallery}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCategoryPagingLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCategoryBrowser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTempCategoryCollations}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrackingCategories}}

{{anchor|Logging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Logging ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActionFilteredLogs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFilterLogTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogActionsHandlers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogActions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogHeaders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogNames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogRestrictions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNewUserLog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPageCreationLog}}

{{anchor|Special pages}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Special pages ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSpecialInclusion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCountCategorizedImagesAsUsed}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableQueryPageUpdate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxRedirectLinksRetrieved}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}}

{{anchor|Actions}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Actions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActions}}

{{anchor|Robot policies}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Robot policies ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgArticleRobotPolicies}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultRobotPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExemptFromUserRobotsControl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceRobotPolicies}}

{{anchor|Ajax, Action API and REST API}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Ajax, Action API and REST API ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Ajax}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Ajax ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxEditStash}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxExportList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxLicensePreview}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxUploadDestCheck}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestAPIAdditionalRouteFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseAjax}}

{{anchor|API}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== API ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowedCorsHeaders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPICacheHelpTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIFormatModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIListModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxDBRows}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxLagThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxResultSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxUncachedDiffs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMetaModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIPropModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIRequestLog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIUselessQueryPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCrossSiteAJAXdomainExceptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCrossSiteAJAXdomains}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugAPI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableAPI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableRestAPI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableWriteAPI}}

{{anchor|Shell and process control|Shell}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Shell and process control ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgPhpCli}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellFileSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellMemory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellWallClockTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellboxSecretKey}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellboxUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellboxUrls}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellCgroup}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellLocale}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellRestrictionMethod}}

{{anchor|HTTP client}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== HTTP client ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowExternalReqID}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAsyncHTTPTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPConnectTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPMaxTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPMaxConnectTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPImportTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPProxy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalHTTPProxy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalVirtualHosts}}

{{anchor|Jobs|Job queue}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobRunRate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobQueueAggregator}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRunJobsAsync}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpdateRowsPerJob}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpdateRowsPerQuery}}

{{anchor|Site customization}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Site customization ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgStructuredChangeFiltersOnWatchlist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStructuredChangeFiltersShowPreference}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStyleVersion}}

{{anchor|Frontend}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Frontend ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsejQueryThree}}

{{anchor|Wiki farm}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wiki farm ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiFarmSettingsDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiFarmSettingsExtension}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiFarmSiteDetector}}

{{anchor|Miscellaneous settings}}
{{anchor|Migration}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Miscellaneous settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActorTableSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgChangeTagsSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCommentTableSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentHandlerUseDB}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgElementTiming}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEventRelayerConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeaturePolicyReportOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOriginTrials}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPagePropsHaveSortkey}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPingback}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPopularPasswordFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPriorityHintsRatio}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPriorityHints}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRedirectOnLogin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReportToEndpoints}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReportToExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkinsPreferred}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTagStatisticsNewTable}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVirtualRestConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiDiff2MovedParagraphDetectionCutoff}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration for developers}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;how to set and retrieve configuration variables.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration#Configs (Your extension/skins settings)|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration#Configs (Your extension/skins settings)&lt;/span&gt;}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;how to register new configuration variables for extensions and skins.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Configure{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:MediaWiki configuration{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:MediaWiki configuration settings{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Variables{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>7rju87noqmajd5y9tkmm1cyt7zrcebp</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402171</id>
      <parentid>5402170</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:40:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Low quality/machine translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="59204" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{TOCright}}
{{Note
|1=Empezando con $&lt;span translate=&quot;no&quot; class=&quot;notranslate&quot;&gt;1&lt;/span&gt; los parámetros de configuración están basados en $&lt;span translate=&quot;no&quot; class=&quot;notranslate&quot;&gt;2&lt;/span&gt;.
|2=gotcha
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is an index of all supported '''configuration settings''' based on the &lt;code&gt;'''[https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-core/blob/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php DefaultSettings.php]'''&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Never edit &lt;code&gt;DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;; copy appropriate lines to &lt;code&gt;''{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}''&lt;/code&gt; instead and amend them as appropriate.
&lt;/div&gt;

Si no puedes encontrar una configuración aquí, mira si  está definido en $&lt;span translate=&quot;no&quot; class=&quot;notranslate&quot;&gt;1&lt;/span&gt;.
La variable tendría que tener alguna documentación allí.

{{Note|1=La variable debería tener algo de documentación allí. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please use the search box to find the relevant manual page (e.g. &lt;code&gt;Manual:$wgAllowAnonymousMinor&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;}}

:{{ll|Manual:Configuration settings (alphabetical)|2=Enumerados alfabéticamente}} | {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Listed by function&lt;/span&gt;}} | {{ll|Category:MediaWiki configuration settings}}

{{anchor|General Settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== General Settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitename}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVersion}}

{{anchor|Global Objects}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Global Objects ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoloadLocalClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgConf}}

{{anchor|Server URLs and file paths|URLs and file paths|Paths}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Server URLs and file paths ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|IP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgActionPaths}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAppleTouchIcon}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgArticlePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAssumeProxiesUseDefaultProtocolPorts}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBaseDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCanonicalServer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgConfigRegistry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionAssetsPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFavicon}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFFmpegLocation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFFprobeLocation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileCacheDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForceHTTPS}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHttpsPort}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImgAuthPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLoadScript}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalStylePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogoHD}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogos}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogo}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainPageIsDomainRoot}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReferrerPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgScriptExtension}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgScriptPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgScript}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgServerName}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgServer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitesCacheFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStyleDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStylePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStyleSheetPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTmpDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadBaseUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadStashScalerBaseUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsePathInfo}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also [[#Uploads|file/image upload path settings]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also [[#Skins|skins path settings]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Files and file uploads|Uploads}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Files and file uploads ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Uploads have to be specially set up to be secure.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowCopyUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowJavaUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAttemptFailureEpoch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCheckFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadAllowOnWikiDomainConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadProxy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadsDomains}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadsFromSpecialUpload}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeletedDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDirectoryMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableUploadScriptChecks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableAsyncUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileBackends}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProhibitedFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHashedUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgIllegalFileChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImagePreconnect}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImgAuthDetails}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImgAuthUrlPathMap}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalFileRepo}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLockManagers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxUploadSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMediaInTargetLanguage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMinUploadChunkSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNativeImageLazyLoading}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserTestMediaHandlers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStrictFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailEpoch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadDialog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadMaintenance}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadMissingFileUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadNavigationUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadSizeWarning}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadStashMaxAge}}

{{anchor|Shared uploads}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Shared uploads ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These settings are kept for backward compatibility, see {{ll|Manual:$wgForeignFileRepos|$wgForeignFileRepos}} for the new setting, or {{ll|Manual:$wgUseInstantCommons|$wgUseInstantCommons}} if you only need read access to images on Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheSharedUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForeignFileRepos}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForeignUploadTargets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHashedSharedUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRepositoryBaseUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadDBname}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadDBprefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSharedUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFetchCommonsDescriptions}}

{{anchor|MIME types}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MIME types ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeDetectorCommand}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeInfoFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeTypeFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrivialMimeDetection}}
:{{Warning|1=&amp;uarr;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is '''not''' a configuration setting, but a global state variable.&lt;/span&gt;  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It should be used solely by {{ll|Manual:Thumb.php|thumb.php}}!&lt;/span&gt;|inline=1}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVerifyMimeType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVerifyMimeTypeIE}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeTypeBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeTypeExclusions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgXMLMimeTypes}}

''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Manual:Mime type detection}}''

{{anchor|Images}}

=== Imágenes ===
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowImageMoving}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCustomConvertCommand}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableAutoRotation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExiftool}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExiv2Command}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGalleryOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgIgnoreImageErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImageLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJpegQuality}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJpegTran}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxImageArea}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMediaHandlers}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameters for [[#Paths|upload path]]&lt;/span&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrustedMediaFormats}}

''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Manual:Configuring file uploads}}''

{{anchor|DjVu}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== DjVu ====
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuDump}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuOutputExtension}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuPostProcessor}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuRenderer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuToXML}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuTxt}}

{{anchor|EXIF}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== EXIF ====
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowEXIF}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpdateCompatibleMetadata}}

{{anchor|ImageMagick}}
==== ImageMagick ====
* {{configuration list entry|wgImageMagickConvertCommand}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImageMagickTempDir}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxInterlacingAreas}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharpenParameter}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharpenReductionThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseImageMagick}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTinyRGBForJPGThumbnails}}

{{anchor|SVG}}
==== SVG ====
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowTitlesInSVG}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGConverter}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGConverterPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGConverters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGMaxSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGMetadataCutoff}}

{{anchor|Thumbnail settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Thumbnail settings ====
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseImageResize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGenerateThumbnailOnParse}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxAnimatedGifArea}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedThumbnailScriptPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowArchiveThumbnails}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTiffThumbnailType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailScriptPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbUpright}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResponsiveImages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailBuckets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailMinimumBucketDistance}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJpegPixelFormat}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderHttpCustomHost}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderHttpCustomDomain}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderMap}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderMethod}}

{{anchor|Antivirus}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Antivirus ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAntivirus}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAntivirusRequired}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAntivirusSetup}}

{{anchor|Email settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Email settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;

''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also User Access:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Manual:$wgEmailConfirmToEdit|$wgEmailConfirmToEdit}}''

* {{configuration list entry|wgAdditionalMailParams}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowHTMLEmail}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEmailAuthentication}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEmergencyContact}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableEmail}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableSpecialMute}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUserEmailBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUserEmailMuteList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUserEmail}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNewPasswordExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoReplyAddress}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordExpirationDays}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordExpireGrace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordReminderResendTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordSender}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSMTP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUserEmailConfirmationTokenExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUserEmailUseReplyTo}}

{{anchor|Email notification (Enotif) settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Email notification (Enotif) settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Actual notifications for each user are defined in the options.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change defaults with {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions|$wgDefaultUserOptions}}.&lt;/span&gt;''

* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifFromEditor}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifImpersonal}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifMaxRecips}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifMinorEdits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifRevealEditorAddress}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifUseRealName}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifUserTalk}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifWatchlist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseEnotif}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsersNotifiedOnAllChanges}}

{{anchor|Database settings}}
{{anchor|MSSQL-specific|MSSQL specific}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
{{anchor|Oracle-specific|Oracle specific}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Database settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDataCenterUpdateStickTTL}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBadminpassword}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBadminuser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBcompress}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBDefaultGroup}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBerrorLogTZ}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBerrorLog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBmwschema}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBname}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBOracleDRCP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBpassword}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBprefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBserver}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBssl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBtype}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBuser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBWindowsAuthentication}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalDatabases}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxExecutionTimeForExpensiveQueries}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMultiContentRevisionSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchTypeAlternatives}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTemplateLinksSchemaMigrationStage}}

{{anchor|LoadBalancer settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== LoadBalancer settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgDBservers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLBFactoryConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMasterWaitTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSlaveLagCritical}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSlaveLagWarning}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDatabaseReplicaLagCritical}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDatabaseReplicaLagWarning}}

{{anchor|MySQL-specific|MySQL specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MySQL-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBmysql5}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBTableOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSQLMode}}

{{anchor|PostgreSQL-specific|PostgreSQL specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== PostgreSQL-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBport}}

{{anchor|SQLite-specific|SQLite specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== SQLite-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgSQLiteDataDir}}

{{anchor|Shared DB settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Shared DB settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedDB}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedTables}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedSchema}}

{{anchor|Extension fields}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension fields ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtPGNewFields}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtNewTables}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtNewFields}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtNewIndexes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtPGAlteredFields}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtModifiedFields}}

{{anchor|Content handlers and storage|ContentHandler}}
{{anchor|Compressed Storage Support}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Content handlers and storage ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCompressRevisions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentHandlers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentHandlerTextFallback}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultExternalStore}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDiffEngine}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableRemoteBagOStuffTests}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalDiffEngine}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalStores}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceContentModels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPageLanguageUseDB}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRevisionCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTextModelsToParse}}

{{anchor|Performance hacks and limits|Performance|Reduction}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Performance hacks and limits ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSchemaUpdates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSlowParserFunctions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCriticalSectionTimeLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableQueryPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForceDeferredUpdatesPreSend}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLinkHolderBatchSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxArticleSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaximumMovedPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxJobDBWriteDuration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxUserDBWriteDuration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemoryLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMiserMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMultiShardSiteStats}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPoolCounterConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgQueryCacheLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgQueryPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRequestTimeLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTransactionalTimeLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWantedPagesThreshold}}

{{anchor|Cache}}
{{anchor|Client side caching}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Cache ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Manual:Caching}}

* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheEpoch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCachePages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgChronologyProtectorStash}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgClockSkewFudge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionInfoMTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFooterLinkCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGitInfoCacheDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidateCacheOnLocalSettingsChange}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLanguageConverterCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainStash}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgObjectCaches}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserCacheUseJson}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParsoidCacheConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPHPSessionHandling}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionPbkdf2Iterations}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSuspiciousIpExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseGzip}}

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;''See: [[#Interwiki|Interwiki]] for Interwiki cache settings.''&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|File Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== File Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Settings for Server side file caching.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgFileCacheDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseFileCache}}

{{anchor|Message Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Message Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAdaptiveMessageCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalisationCacheConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMessageCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseLocalMessageCache}}

{{anchor|Sidebar Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sidebar Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSidebarCacheExpiry}}

{{anchor|Parser Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Parser Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableParserCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOldRevisionParserCacheExpireTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRenderHashAppend}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserCacheExpireTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseContentMediaStyles}}

{{anchor|Memcached settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Memcached settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Settings for configuring the {{ll|Memcached}} memory-based object store (if you are using it) {{git file|file=docs/memcached.md}} has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedDebug}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedPersistent}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgObjectCacheSessionExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionsInObjectCache}}

{{anchor|WAN cache}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== WAN cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableWANCacheReaper}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainWANCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWANObjectCaches}}

{{anchor|HTTP proxy (CDN) settings|CDN / Squid|Squid}}
{{anchor|Proxies}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== HTTP proxy (CDN) settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These settings configure MediaWiki when using a caching HTTP proxy server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They apply to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Varnish caching|caching using Varnish]] as well as [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Squid caching|Squid]].&lt;/span&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxageLagged}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxageStale}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxageSubstitute}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnReboundPurgeDelay}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnServersNoPurge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForcedRawSMaxage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInternalServer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLoggedOutMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidMaxage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidPurgeUseHostHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidServersNoPurge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCdn}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseESI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseKeyHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsePrivateIPs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSquid}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVaryOnXFP}}

{{anchor|HTCP multicast purging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== HTCP multicast purging ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTCPMulticastTTL}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTCPRouting}}

{{anchor|Language, regional and character encoding settings|Localization}}
{{anchor|User agent}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Language, regional and character encoding settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllUnicodeFixes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBrowserBlackList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultLanguageVariant}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisabledVariants}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableLangConversion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableTitleConversion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDummyLanguageCodes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraInterlanguageLinkPrefixes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraLanguageCodes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraLanguageNames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFixArabicUnicode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFixMalayalamUnicode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGrammarForms}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHideInterlanguageLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterlanguageLinkCodeMap}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiMagic}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLangObjCacheSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLanguageCode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegacyEncoding}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegacySchemaConversion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLoginLanguageSelector}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxMsgCacheEntrySize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMsgCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOverrideUcfirstCharacters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRawHtmlMessages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseDatabaseMessages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsePigLatinVariant}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVariantArticlePath}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgUserFallbackLanguages|$wgUserFallbackLanguages}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;maximum number of fallback languages per user&lt;/span&gt;&lt;!-- Can't use {{configuration list entry because [[Manual:$wgUserFallbackLanguages]] doesn't include the standard infobox --&gt;

{{anchor|Timezone settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Timezone settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocaltimezone}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalTZoffset}}

{{anchor|Language-specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Language-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;

;{{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAmericanDates}}

;{{#language:ar|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}/{{#language:hi|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTranslateNumerals}}

{{anchor|Output format and skin settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Output format and skin settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Output}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Output ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgBrowserFormatDetection}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableOutputCompression}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEdititis}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEditSubmitButtonLabelPublish}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableCanonicalServerLink}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExperimentalHtmlIds}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalInterwikiFragmentMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFragmentMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHtml5Version}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHtml5}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTMLFormAllowTableFormat}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJsMimeType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMangleFlashPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSend404Code}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowRollbackEditCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteNotice}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteSupportPage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseMediaWikiUIEverywhere}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgXhtmlNamespaces}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following setting is no longer used in supported versions of MediaWiki, but still exists for backward compatibility
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgXhtmlDefaultNamespace}}

{{anchor|Skins}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skins ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultSkin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFallbackSkin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFooterIcons}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkinMetaTags}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkipSkins}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkipSkin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCombinedLoginLink}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVectorUseIconWatch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVectorUseSimpleSearch}}

{{anchor|Resource loader}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== ResourceLoader ==
&lt;/div&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|ResourceLoader}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;''

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgIncludeLegacyJavaScript}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegacyJavaScriptGlobals}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceBasePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderDebug}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderEnableJSProfiler}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderLESSImportPaths}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderLESSVars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMaxage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMaxQueryLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMinifierMaxLineLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMinifierStatementsOnOwnLine}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderSources}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderStorageEnabled}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderStorageVersion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderUseObjectCacheForDeps}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderValidateJS}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderValidateStaticJS}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceModuleSkinStyles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVueDevelopmentMode}}

{{anchor|Page titles and redirects}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Page titles and redirects ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableHardRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFixDoubleRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidRedirectTargets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShortPagesNamespaceBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShortPagesNamespaceExclusions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCapitalLinkOverrides}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCapitalLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegalTitleChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxRedirects}}

{{anchor|Namespaces}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Namespaces ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCanonicalNamespaceNames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraGenderNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraSignatureNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetaNamespace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetaNamespaceTalk}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceAliases}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespacesWithSubpages}}

{{anchor|Mobile support}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Mobile support ===
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Interwiki links and sites|Interwiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Interwiki links and sites ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiPrefixDisplayTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalInterwikis}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalInterwiki}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRedirectSources}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteTypes}}

{{anchor|Interwiki cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Interwiki cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|interwiki cache}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;''

* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiFallbackSite}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiScopes}}

{{anchor|Parser}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Parser ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowDisplayTitle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowExternalImagesFrom}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowExternalImages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowImageTag}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCleanSignatures}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableImageWhitelist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableMagicLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableScaryTranscluding}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExpensiveParserFunctionLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalLinkTarget}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxGeneratedPPNodeCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxPPExpandDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxPPNodeCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxTemplateDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxTocLevel}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoFollowDomainExceptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoFollowLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoFollowNsExceptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserEnableLegacyMediaDOM}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParsoidSettings}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPreprocessorCacheThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRegisterInternalExternals}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestrictDisplayTitle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTranscludeCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUrlProtocols}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseNewMediaStructure}}

{{anchor|HTML}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== HTML ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgRawHtml}}

{{anchor|Tidy}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tidy ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{update}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tidy is an open source tool that cleans up broken HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use this to ensure that broken HTML in articles doesn't affect the layout of your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;While Tidy itself is going to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|replaced]], the configuration settings can still be used for the replacements.&lt;/span&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugTidy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyBin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyInternal}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyOpts}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTidy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgValidateAllHtml}}

:''See also: {{ll|Manual:Build Tidy from source}}.''

{{anchor|Statistics and content analysis|Site Statistics}}
{{anchor|Statistics}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Statistics and content analysis ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActiveUserDays}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgArticleCountMethod}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableCounters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExperiencedUserEdits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExperiencedUserMemberSince}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLearnerEdits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLearnerMemberSince}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgManualRevertSearchRadius}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRevertedTagMaxDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteStatsAsyncFactor}}

{{anchor|User accounts, authentication|Users}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User accounts, authentication ==
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowRequiringEmailForResets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoCreateTempUser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHiddenPrefs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidUsernameCharacters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaximalPasswordLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxNameChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxSigChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMinimalPasswordLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReservedUsernames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSignatureValidation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSignatureAllowedLintErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUserrightsInterwikiDelimiter}}

{{anchor|Authentication}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Authentication ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSecuritySensitiveOperationIfCannotReauthenticate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuthenticationTokenVersion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuthManagerAutoConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuthManagerConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCentralIdLookupProviders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCentralIdLookupProvider}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgChangeCredentialsBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidPasswordReset}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordDefault}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordResetRoutes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordSalt}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReauthenticateTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRememberMe}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRemoveCredentialsBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSecureLogin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionProviders}}

{{anchor|User rights, access control and monitoring|User Access}}
{{anchor|Rate limiter}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User rights, access control and monitoring ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAddGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoblockExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBlockAllowsUTEdit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeleteRevisionsBatchSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDnsBlacklistUrls}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEmailConfirmToEdit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableDnsBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGrantPermissionGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGrantPermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupInheritsPermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupPermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupsAddToSelf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHideUserContribLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImplicitGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordAttemptThrottle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProxyList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProxyWhitelist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRateLimitsExcludedIPs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRateLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRevokePermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWhitelistReadRegexp}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWhitelistRead}}

{{anchor|Access}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Access ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Blocking/banning, and some other related settings.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgAccountCreationThrottle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgApplyIpBlocksToXff}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoConfirmAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoConfirmCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutopromoteOnceLogInRC}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutopromoteOnce}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutopromote}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAvailableRights}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBlockCIDRLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBlockDisablesLogin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBotPasswordsCluster}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBotPasswordsDatabase}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCascadingRestrictionLevels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableBotPasswords}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnablePartialBlocks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnablePartialActionBlocks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHideIdentifiableRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNonincludableNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPutIPinRC}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgQueryPageDefaultLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestrictionLevels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestrictionTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSemiprotectedRestrictionLevels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSoftBlockRanges}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpamRegex}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSummarySpamRegex}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSysopEmailBans}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} for more methods and settings concerning access.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also {{ll|Manual:User rights}} for more information about $wgGroupPermissions, $wgAddGroups, $wgRemoveGroups, etc.&lt;/span&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[#User Access|User Access]] for User Access settings.&lt;/span&gt;''

{{anchor|Security|Content Security Policy|Content security policy}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Security ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowCrossOrigin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowUserCssPrefs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowUserCss}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowUserJs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgApiFrameOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBreakFrames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCSPFalsePositiveUrls}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCSPHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCSPReportOnlyHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEditPageFrameOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHKDFAlgorithm}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHKDFSecret}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestAllowCrossOriginCookieAuth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSecretKey}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionInsecureSecrets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionSecret}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSiteCss}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSiteJs}}

{{anchor|Cookies}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Cookies ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheVaryCookies}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieDomain}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieExpiration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieHttpOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookiePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookiePrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSameSite}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSecure}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSetOnAutoblock}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSetOnIpBlock}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableCookieCheck}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtendedLoginCookieExpiration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionHandler}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionName}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSameSiteLegacyCookies}}

{{anchor|Profiling, testing and debugging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Profiling, testing and debugging ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCachePrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableJavaScriptTest}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserTestFiles}}

{{anchor|Debug|Debug/logging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Debug ===
&lt;/div&gt;

:''See also: {{ll|Manual:How to debug}}''

* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugComments}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugDumpSql}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugLogFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugLogGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugLogPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugPrintHttpHeaders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugRawPage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugTimestamps}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugToolbar}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeprecationReleaseLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDevelopmentWarnings}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogExceptionBacktrace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMWLoggerDefaultSpi}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOverrideHostname}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPageInfoTransclusionLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPropagateErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowDBErrorBacktrace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowDebug}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowExceptionDetails}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowHostnames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowSQLErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialVersionShowHooks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrxProfilerLimits}}

{{anchor|Profiling}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Profiling ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableProfileInfo}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetricsTarget}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetricsPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetricsFormat}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProfiler}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProfileLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProfileOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsdMetricPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsdSamplingRates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsdServer}}

{{anchor|Search}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Search ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAdvancedSearchHighlighting}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableInternalSearch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableSearchUpdate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableTextSearch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableOpenSearchSuggest}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableSearchContributorsByIP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespacesToBeSearchedDefault}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchDefaultLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchDescriptionLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchTemplates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchTemplate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchForwardUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchHighlightBoundaries}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchMatchRedirectPreference}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchRunSuggestedQuery}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchSuggestCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitemapNamespacesPriorities}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitemapNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialSearchFormOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTwoButtonsSearchForm}}

{{anchor|Edit user interface}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Edit user interface ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDiff3}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDiff}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPreviewOnOpenNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUniversalEditButton}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseAutomaticEditSummaries}}

{{anchor|Maintenance Scripts setting}}
{{anchor|Wiki locking}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Maintenance Scripts setting ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCommandLineDarkBg}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCommandLineMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGitBin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGitRepositoryViewers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReadOnlyFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReadOnlyWatchedItemStore}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReadOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpgradeKey}}

{{anchor|Recent changes, new pages, watchlist and history|Recent changes}}
{{anchor|UDP updates}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Recent changes, new pages, watchlist and history ==
&lt;/div&gt;

See also {{ll|Help:Recent changes}} and {{wg|DefaultUserOptions}}

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowCategorizedRecentChanges}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableAnonTalk}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogAutopatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCChangedSizeThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCEngines}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCFeeds}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCFilterByAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCLinkDays}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCLinkLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCShowChangedSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCShowWatchingUsers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCWatchCategoryMembership}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRecentChangesFlags}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowUpdatedMarker}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSoftwareTags}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStructuredChangeFiltersLiveUpdatePollingRate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUnwatchedPageSecret}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUnwatchedPageThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseFilePatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseNPPatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseRCPatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTagFilter}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchersMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchlistExpiryMaxDuration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchlistExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchlistPurgeRate}}

{{anchor|Feed}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Feed ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeed}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAdvertisedFeedTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedCacheTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedDiffCutoff}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOverrideSiteFeed}}

{{anchor|Copyright}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Copyright ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxCredits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsIcon}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsPage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsText}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowCreditsIfMax}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCopyrightUpload}}

{{anchor|Import/Export}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Import/Export ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportAllowAll}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportAllowHistory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportAllowListContributors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportFromNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportMaxHistory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportPagelistLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImportSources}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImportTargetNamespace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgXmlDumpSchemaVersion}}

{{anchor|Extensions}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoloadAttemptLowercase}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoloadClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableParserLimitReporting}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionCredits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionEntryPointListFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionFunctions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionMessagesFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHooks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobBackoffThrottling}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobQueueIncludeInMaxLagFactor}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobSerialCommitThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobTypeConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobTypesExcludedFromDefaultQueue}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMessagesDirs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPagePropLinkInvalidations}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserOutputHooks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgServiceWiringFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialPageCacheUpdates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgValidSkinNames}}

{{anchor|Category}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Category ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCategoryCollation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCategoryMagicGallery}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCategoryPagingLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCategoryBrowser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTempCategoryCollations}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrackingCategories}}

{{anchor|Logging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Logging ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActionFilteredLogs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFilterLogTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogActionsHandlers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogActions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogHeaders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogNames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogRestrictions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNewUserLog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPageCreationLog}}

{{anchor|Special pages}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Special pages ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSpecialInclusion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCountCategorizedImagesAsUsed}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableQueryPageUpdate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxRedirectLinksRetrieved}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}}

{{anchor|Actions}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Actions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActions}}

{{anchor|Robot policies}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Robot policies ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgArticleRobotPolicies}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultRobotPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExemptFromUserRobotsControl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceRobotPolicies}}

{{anchor|Ajax, Action API and REST API}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Ajax, Action API and REST API ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Ajax}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Ajax ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxEditStash}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxExportList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxLicensePreview}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxUploadDestCheck}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestAPIAdditionalRouteFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseAjax}}

{{anchor|API}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== API ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowedCorsHeaders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPICacheHelpTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIFormatModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIListModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxDBRows}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxLagThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxResultSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxUncachedDiffs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMetaModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIPropModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIRequestLog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIUselessQueryPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCrossSiteAJAXdomainExceptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCrossSiteAJAXdomains}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugAPI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableAPI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableRestAPI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableWriteAPI}}

{{anchor|Shell and process control|Shell}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Shell and process control ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgPhpCli}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellFileSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellMemory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellWallClockTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellboxSecretKey}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellboxUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellboxUrls}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellCgroup}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellLocale}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellRestrictionMethod}}

{{anchor|HTTP client}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== HTTP client ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowExternalReqID}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAsyncHTTPTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPConnectTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPMaxTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPMaxConnectTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPImportTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPProxy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalHTTPProxy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalVirtualHosts}}

{{anchor|Jobs|Job queue}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobRunRate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobQueueAggregator}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRunJobsAsync}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpdateRowsPerJob}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpdateRowsPerQuery}}

{{anchor|Site customization}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Site customization ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgStructuredChangeFiltersOnWatchlist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStructuredChangeFiltersShowPreference}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStyleVersion}}

{{anchor|Frontend}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Frontend ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsejQueryThree}}

{{anchor|Wiki farm}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wiki farm ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiFarmSettingsDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiFarmSettingsExtension}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiFarmSiteDetector}}

{{anchor|Miscellaneous settings}}
{{anchor|Migration}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Miscellaneous settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActorTableSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgChangeTagsSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCommentTableSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentHandlerUseDB}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgElementTiming}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEventRelayerConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeaturePolicyReportOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOriginTrials}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPagePropsHaveSortkey}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPingback}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPopularPasswordFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPriorityHintsRatio}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPriorityHints}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRedirectOnLogin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReportToEndpoints}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReportToExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkinsPreferred}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTagStatisticsNewTable}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVirtualRestConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiDiff2MovedParagraphDetectionCutoff}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration for developers}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;how to set and retrieve configuration variables.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration#Configs (Your extension/skins settings)|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration#Configs (Your extension/skins settings)&lt;/span&gt;}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;how to register new configuration variables for extensions and skins.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Configure{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:MediaWiki configuration{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:MediaWiki configuration settings{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Variables{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>9yy92b4iqghagu2gcq21fct5mgagsz1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402172</id>
      <parentid>5402171</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:40:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Low quality/machine translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="59272" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{TOCright}}
{{Note
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Starting with {{ll|MediaWiki 1.39}} the configuration settings are based on [https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/master/includes/MainConfigSchema.php MainConfigSchema.php].&lt;/span&gt;
|2=gotcha
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is an index of all supported '''configuration settings''' based on the &lt;code&gt;'''[https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-core/blob/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php DefaultSettings.php]'''&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Never edit &lt;code&gt;DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;; copy appropriate lines to &lt;code&gt;''{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}''&lt;/code&gt; instead and amend them as appropriate.
&lt;/div&gt;

Si no puedes encontrar una configuración aquí, mira si  está definido en $&lt;span translate=&quot;no&quot; class=&quot;notranslate&quot;&gt;1&lt;/span&gt;.
La variable tendría que tener alguna documentación allí.

{{Note|1=La variable debería tener algo de documentación allí. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please use the search box to find the relevant manual page (e.g. &lt;code&gt;Manual:$wgAllowAnonymousMinor&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;}}

:{{ll|Manual:Configuration settings (alphabetical)|2=Enumerados alfabéticamente}} | {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Listed by function&lt;/span&gt;}} | {{ll|Category:MediaWiki configuration settings}}

{{anchor|General Settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== General Settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitename}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVersion}}

{{anchor|Global Objects}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Global Objects ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoloadLocalClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgConf}}

{{anchor|Server URLs and file paths|URLs and file paths|Paths}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Server URLs and file paths ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|IP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgActionPaths}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAppleTouchIcon}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgArticlePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAssumeProxiesUseDefaultProtocolPorts}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBaseDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCanonicalServer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgConfigRegistry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionAssetsPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFavicon}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFFmpegLocation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFFprobeLocation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileCacheDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForceHTTPS}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHttpsPort}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImgAuthPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLoadScript}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalStylePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogoHD}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogos}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogo}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainPageIsDomainRoot}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReferrerPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgScriptExtension}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgScriptPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgScript}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgServerName}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgServer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitesCacheFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStyleDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStylePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStyleSheetPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTmpDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadBaseUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadStashScalerBaseUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsePathInfo}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also [[#Uploads|file/image upload path settings]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also [[#Skins|skins path settings]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Files and file uploads|Uploads}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Files and file uploads ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Uploads have to be specially set up to be secure.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowCopyUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowJavaUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAttemptFailureEpoch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCheckFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadAllowOnWikiDomainConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadProxy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadsDomains}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadsFromSpecialUpload}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeletedDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDirectoryMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableUploadScriptChecks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableAsyncUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileBackends}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProhibitedFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHashedUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgIllegalFileChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImagePreconnect}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImgAuthDetails}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImgAuthUrlPathMap}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalFileRepo}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLockManagers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxUploadSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMediaInTargetLanguage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMinUploadChunkSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNativeImageLazyLoading}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserTestMediaHandlers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStrictFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailEpoch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadDialog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadMaintenance}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadMissingFileUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadNavigationUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadSizeWarning}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadStashMaxAge}}

{{anchor|Shared uploads}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Shared uploads ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These settings are kept for backward compatibility, see {{ll|Manual:$wgForeignFileRepos|$wgForeignFileRepos}} for the new setting, or {{ll|Manual:$wgUseInstantCommons|$wgUseInstantCommons}} if you only need read access to images on Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheSharedUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForeignFileRepos}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForeignUploadTargets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHashedSharedUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRepositoryBaseUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadDBname}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadDBprefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSharedUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFetchCommonsDescriptions}}

{{anchor|MIME types}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MIME types ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeDetectorCommand}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeInfoFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeTypeFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrivialMimeDetection}}
:{{Warning|1=&amp;uarr;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is '''not''' a configuration setting, but a global state variable.&lt;/span&gt;  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It should be used solely by {{ll|Manual:Thumb.php|thumb.php}}!&lt;/span&gt;|inline=1}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVerifyMimeType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVerifyMimeTypeIE}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeTypeBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeTypeExclusions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgXMLMimeTypes}}

''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Manual:Mime type detection}}''

{{anchor|Images}}

=== Imágenes ===
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowImageMoving}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCustomConvertCommand}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableAutoRotation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExiftool}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExiv2Command}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGalleryOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgIgnoreImageErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImageLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJpegQuality}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJpegTran}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxImageArea}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMediaHandlers}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameters for [[#Paths|upload path]]&lt;/span&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrustedMediaFormats}}

''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Manual:Configuring file uploads}}''

{{anchor|DjVu}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== DjVu ====
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuDump}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuOutputExtension}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuPostProcessor}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuRenderer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuToXML}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuTxt}}

{{anchor|EXIF}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== EXIF ====
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowEXIF}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpdateCompatibleMetadata}}

{{anchor|ImageMagick}}
==== ImageMagick ====
* {{configuration list entry|wgImageMagickConvertCommand}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImageMagickTempDir}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxInterlacingAreas}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharpenParameter}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharpenReductionThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseImageMagick}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTinyRGBForJPGThumbnails}}

{{anchor|SVG}}
==== SVG ====
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowTitlesInSVG}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGConverter}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGConverterPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGConverters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGMaxSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGMetadataCutoff}}

{{anchor|Thumbnail settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Thumbnail settings ====
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseImageResize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGenerateThumbnailOnParse}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxAnimatedGifArea}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedThumbnailScriptPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowArchiveThumbnails}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTiffThumbnailType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailScriptPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbUpright}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResponsiveImages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailBuckets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailMinimumBucketDistance}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJpegPixelFormat}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderHttpCustomHost}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderHttpCustomDomain}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderMap}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderMethod}}

{{anchor|Antivirus}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Antivirus ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAntivirus}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAntivirusRequired}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAntivirusSetup}}

{{anchor|Email settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Email settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;

''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also User Access:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Manual:$wgEmailConfirmToEdit|$wgEmailConfirmToEdit}}''

* {{configuration list entry|wgAdditionalMailParams}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowHTMLEmail}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEmailAuthentication}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEmergencyContact}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableEmail}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableSpecialMute}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUserEmailBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUserEmailMuteList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUserEmail}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNewPasswordExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoReplyAddress}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordExpirationDays}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordExpireGrace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordReminderResendTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordSender}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSMTP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUserEmailConfirmationTokenExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUserEmailUseReplyTo}}

{{anchor|Email notification (Enotif) settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Email notification (Enotif) settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Actual notifications for each user are defined in the options.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change defaults with {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions|$wgDefaultUserOptions}}.&lt;/span&gt;''

* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifFromEditor}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifImpersonal}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifMaxRecips}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifMinorEdits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifRevealEditorAddress}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifUseRealName}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifUserTalk}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifWatchlist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseEnotif}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsersNotifiedOnAllChanges}}

{{anchor|Database settings}}
{{anchor|MSSQL-specific|MSSQL specific}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
{{anchor|Oracle-specific|Oracle specific}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Database settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDataCenterUpdateStickTTL}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBadminpassword}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBadminuser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBcompress}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBDefaultGroup}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBerrorLogTZ}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBerrorLog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBmwschema}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBname}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBOracleDRCP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBpassword}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBprefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBserver}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBssl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBtype}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBuser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBWindowsAuthentication}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalDatabases}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxExecutionTimeForExpensiveQueries}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMultiContentRevisionSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchTypeAlternatives}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTemplateLinksSchemaMigrationStage}}

{{anchor|LoadBalancer settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== LoadBalancer settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgDBservers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLBFactoryConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMasterWaitTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSlaveLagCritical}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSlaveLagWarning}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDatabaseReplicaLagCritical}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDatabaseReplicaLagWarning}}

{{anchor|MySQL-specific|MySQL specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MySQL-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBmysql5}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBTableOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSQLMode}}

{{anchor|PostgreSQL-specific|PostgreSQL specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== PostgreSQL-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBport}}

{{anchor|SQLite-specific|SQLite specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== SQLite-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgSQLiteDataDir}}

{{anchor|Shared DB settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Shared DB settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedDB}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedTables}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedSchema}}

{{anchor|Extension fields}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension fields ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtPGNewFields}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtNewTables}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtNewFields}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtNewIndexes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtPGAlteredFields}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtModifiedFields}}

{{anchor|Content handlers and storage|ContentHandler}}
{{anchor|Compressed Storage Support}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Content handlers and storage ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCompressRevisions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentHandlers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentHandlerTextFallback}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultExternalStore}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDiffEngine}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableRemoteBagOStuffTests}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalDiffEngine}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalStores}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceContentModels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPageLanguageUseDB}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRevisionCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTextModelsToParse}}

{{anchor|Performance hacks and limits|Performance|Reduction}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Performance hacks and limits ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSchemaUpdates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSlowParserFunctions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCriticalSectionTimeLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableQueryPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForceDeferredUpdatesPreSend}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLinkHolderBatchSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxArticleSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaximumMovedPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxJobDBWriteDuration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxUserDBWriteDuration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemoryLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMiserMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMultiShardSiteStats}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPoolCounterConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgQueryCacheLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgQueryPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRequestTimeLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTransactionalTimeLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWantedPagesThreshold}}

{{anchor|Cache}}
{{anchor|Client side caching}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Cache ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Manual:Caching}}

* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheEpoch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCachePages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgChronologyProtectorStash}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgClockSkewFudge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionInfoMTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFooterLinkCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGitInfoCacheDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidateCacheOnLocalSettingsChange}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLanguageConverterCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainStash}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgObjectCaches}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserCacheUseJson}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParsoidCacheConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPHPSessionHandling}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionPbkdf2Iterations}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSuspiciousIpExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseGzip}}

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;''See: [[#Interwiki|Interwiki]] for Interwiki cache settings.''&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|File Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== File Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Settings for Server side file caching.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgFileCacheDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseFileCache}}

{{anchor|Message Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Message Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAdaptiveMessageCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalisationCacheConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMessageCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseLocalMessageCache}}

{{anchor|Sidebar Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sidebar Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSidebarCacheExpiry}}

{{anchor|Parser Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Parser Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableParserCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOldRevisionParserCacheExpireTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRenderHashAppend}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserCacheExpireTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseContentMediaStyles}}

{{anchor|Memcached settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Memcached settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Settings for configuring the {{ll|Memcached}} memory-based object store (if you are using it) {{git file|file=docs/memcached.md}} has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedDebug}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedPersistent}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgObjectCacheSessionExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionsInObjectCache}}

{{anchor|WAN cache}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== WAN cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableWANCacheReaper}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainWANCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWANObjectCaches}}

{{anchor|HTTP proxy (CDN) settings|CDN / Squid|Squid}}
{{anchor|Proxies}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== HTTP proxy (CDN) settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These settings configure MediaWiki when using a caching HTTP proxy server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They apply to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Varnish caching|caching using Varnish]] as well as [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Squid caching|Squid]].&lt;/span&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxageLagged}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxageStale}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxageSubstitute}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnReboundPurgeDelay}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnServersNoPurge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForcedRawSMaxage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInternalServer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLoggedOutMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidMaxage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidPurgeUseHostHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidServersNoPurge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCdn}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseESI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseKeyHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsePrivateIPs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSquid}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVaryOnXFP}}

{{anchor|HTCP multicast purging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== HTCP multicast purging ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTCPMulticastTTL}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTCPRouting}}

{{anchor|Language, regional and character encoding settings|Localization}}
{{anchor|User agent}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Language, regional and character encoding settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllUnicodeFixes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBrowserBlackList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultLanguageVariant}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisabledVariants}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableLangConversion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableTitleConversion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDummyLanguageCodes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraInterlanguageLinkPrefixes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraLanguageCodes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraLanguageNames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFixArabicUnicode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFixMalayalamUnicode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGrammarForms}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHideInterlanguageLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterlanguageLinkCodeMap}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiMagic}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLangObjCacheSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLanguageCode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegacyEncoding}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegacySchemaConversion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLoginLanguageSelector}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxMsgCacheEntrySize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMsgCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOverrideUcfirstCharacters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRawHtmlMessages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseDatabaseMessages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsePigLatinVariant}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVariantArticlePath}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgUserFallbackLanguages|$wgUserFallbackLanguages}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;maximum number of fallback languages per user&lt;/span&gt;&lt;!-- Can't use {{configuration list entry because [[Manual:$wgUserFallbackLanguages]] doesn't include the standard infobox --&gt;

{{anchor|Timezone settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Timezone settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocaltimezone}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalTZoffset}}

{{anchor|Language-specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Language-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;

;{{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAmericanDates}}

;{{#language:ar|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}/{{#language:hi|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTranslateNumerals}}

{{anchor|Output format and skin settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Output format and skin settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Output}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Output ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgBrowserFormatDetection}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableOutputCompression}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEdititis}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEditSubmitButtonLabelPublish}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableCanonicalServerLink}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExperimentalHtmlIds}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalInterwikiFragmentMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFragmentMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHtml5Version}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHtml5}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTMLFormAllowTableFormat}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJsMimeType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMangleFlashPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSend404Code}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowRollbackEditCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteNotice}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteSupportPage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseMediaWikiUIEverywhere}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgXhtmlNamespaces}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following setting is no longer used in supported versions of MediaWiki, but still exists for backward compatibility
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgXhtmlDefaultNamespace}}

{{anchor|Skins}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skins ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultSkin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFallbackSkin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFooterIcons}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkinMetaTags}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkipSkins}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkipSkin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCombinedLoginLink}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVectorUseIconWatch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVectorUseSimpleSearch}}

{{anchor|Resource loader}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== ResourceLoader ==
&lt;/div&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|ResourceLoader}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;''

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgIncludeLegacyJavaScript}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegacyJavaScriptGlobals}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceBasePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderDebug}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderEnableJSProfiler}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderLESSImportPaths}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderLESSVars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMaxage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMaxQueryLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMinifierMaxLineLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMinifierStatementsOnOwnLine}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderSources}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderStorageEnabled}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderStorageVersion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderUseObjectCacheForDeps}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderValidateJS}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderValidateStaticJS}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceModuleSkinStyles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVueDevelopmentMode}}

{{anchor|Page titles and redirects}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Page titles and redirects ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableHardRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFixDoubleRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidRedirectTargets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShortPagesNamespaceBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShortPagesNamespaceExclusions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCapitalLinkOverrides}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCapitalLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegalTitleChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxRedirects}}

{{anchor|Namespaces}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Namespaces ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCanonicalNamespaceNames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraGenderNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraSignatureNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetaNamespace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetaNamespaceTalk}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceAliases}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespacesWithSubpages}}

{{anchor|Mobile support}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Mobile support ===
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Interwiki links and sites|Interwiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Interwiki links and sites ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiPrefixDisplayTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalInterwikis}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalInterwiki}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRedirectSources}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteTypes}}

{{anchor|Interwiki cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Interwiki cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|interwiki cache}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;''

* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiFallbackSite}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiScopes}}

{{anchor|Parser}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Parser ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowDisplayTitle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowExternalImagesFrom}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowExternalImages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowImageTag}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCleanSignatures}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableImageWhitelist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableMagicLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableScaryTranscluding}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExpensiveParserFunctionLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalLinkTarget}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxGeneratedPPNodeCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxPPExpandDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxPPNodeCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxTemplateDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxTocLevel}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoFollowDomainExceptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoFollowLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoFollowNsExceptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserEnableLegacyMediaDOM}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParsoidSettings}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPreprocessorCacheThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRegisterInternalExternals}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestrictDisplayTitle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTranscludeCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUrlProtocols}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseNewMediaStructure}}

{{anchor|HTML}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== HTML ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgRawHtml}}

{{anchor|Tidy}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tidy ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{update}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tidy is an open source tool that cleans up broken HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use this to ensure that broken HTML in articles doesn't affect the layout of your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;While Tidy itself is going to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|replaced]], the configuration settings can still be used for the replacements.&lt;/span&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugTidy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyBin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyInternal}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyOpts}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTidy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgValidateAllHtml}}

:''See also: {{ll|Manual:Build Tidy from source}}.''

{{anchor|Statistics and content analysis|Site Statistics}}
{{anchor|Statistics}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Statistics and content analysis ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActiveUserDays}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgArticleCountMethod}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableCounters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExperiencedUserEdits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExperiencedUserMemberSince}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLearnerEdits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLearnerMemberSince}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgManualRevertSearchRadius}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRevertedTagMaxDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteStatsAsyncFactor}}

{{anchor|User accounts, authentication|Users}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User accounts, authentication ==
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowRequiringEmailForResets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoCreateTempUser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHiddenPrefs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidUsernameCharacters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaximalPasswordLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxNameChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxSigChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMinimalPasswordLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReservedUsernames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSignatureValidation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSignatureAllowedLintErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUserrightsInterwikiDelimiter}}

{{anchor|Authentication}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Authentication ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSecuritySensitiveOperationIfCannotReauthenticate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuthenticationTokenVersion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuthManagerAutoConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuthManagerConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCentralIdLookupProviders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCentralIdLookupProvider}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgChangeCredentialsBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidPasswordReset}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordDefault}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordResetRoutes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordSalt}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReauthenticateTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRememberMe}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRemoveCredentialsBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSecureLogin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionProviders}}

{{anchor|User rights, access control and monitoring|User Access}}
{{anchor|Rate limiter}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User rights, access control and monitoring ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAddGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoblockExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBlockAllowsUTEdit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeleteRevisionsBatchSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDnsBlacklistUrls}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEmailConfirmToEdit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableDnsBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGrantPermissionGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGrantPermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupInheritsPermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupPermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupsAddToSelf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHideUserContribLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImplicitGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordAttemptThrottle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProxyList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProxyWhitelist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRateLimitsExcludedIPs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRateLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRevokePermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWhitelistReadRegexp}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWhitelistRead}}

{{anchor|Access}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Access ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Blocking/banning, and some other related settings.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgAccountCreationThrottle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgApplyIpBlocksToXff}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoConfirmAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoConfirmCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutopromoteOnceLogInRC}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutopromoteOnce}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutopromote}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAvailableRights}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBlockCIDRLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBlockDisablesLogin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBotPasswordsCluster}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBotPasswordsDatabase}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCascadingRestrictionLevels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableBotPasswords}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnablePartialBlocks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnablePartialActionBlocks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHideIdentifiableRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNonincludableNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPutIPinRC}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgQueryPageDefaultLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestrictionLevels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestrictionTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSemiprotectedRestrictionLevels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSoftBlockRanges}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpamRegex}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSummarySpamRegex}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSysopEmailBans}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} for more methods and settings concerning access.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also {{ll|Manual:User rights}} for more information about $wgGroupPermissions, $wgAddGroups, $wgRemoveGroups, etc.&lt;/span&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[#User Access|User Access]] for User Access settings.&lt;/span&gt;''

{{anchor|Security|Content Security Policy|Content security policy}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Security ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowCrossOrigin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowUserCssPrefs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowUserCss}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowUserJs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgApiFrameOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBreakFrames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCSPFalsePositiveUrls}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCSPHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCSPReportOnlyHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEditPageFrameOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHKDFAlgorithm}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHKDFSecret}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestAllowCrossOriginCookieAuth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSecretKey}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionInsecureSecrets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionSecret}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSiteCss}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSiteJs}}

{{anchor|Cookies}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Cookies ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheVaryCookies}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieDomain}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieExpiration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieHttpOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookiePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookiePrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSameSite}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSecure}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSetOnAutoblock}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSetOnIpBlock}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableCookieCheck}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtendedLoginCookieExpiration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionHandler}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionName}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSameSiteLegacyCookies}}

{{anchor|Profiling, testing and debugging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Profiling, testing and debugging ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCachePrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableJavaScriptTest}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserTestFiles}}

{{anchor|Debug|Debug/logging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Debug ===
&lt;/div&gt;

:''See also: {{ll|Manual:How to debug}}''

* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugComments}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugDumpSql}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugLogFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugLogGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugLogPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugPrintHttpHeaders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugRawPage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugTimestamps}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugToolbar}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeprecationReleaseLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDevelopmentWarnings}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogExceptionBacktrace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMWLoggerDefaultSpi}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOverrideHostname}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPageInfoTransclusionLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPropagateErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowDBErrorBacktrace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowDebug}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowExceptionDetails}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowHostnames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowSQLErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialVersionShowHooks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrxProfilerLimits}}

{{anchor|Profiling}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Profiling ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableProfileInfo}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetricsTarget}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetricsPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetricsFormat}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProfiler}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProfileLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProfileOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsdMetricPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsdSamplingRates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsdServer}}

{{anchor|Search}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Search ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAdvancedSearchHighlighting}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableInternalSearch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableSearchUpdate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableTextSearch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableOpenSearchSuggest}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableSearchContributorsByIP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespacesToBeSearchedDefault}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchDefaultLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchDescriptionLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchTemplates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchTemplate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchForwardUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchHighlightBoundaries}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchMatchRedirectPreference}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchRunSuggestedQuery}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchSuggestCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitemapNamespacesPriorities}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitemapNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialSearchFormOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTwoButtonsSearchForm}}

{{anchor|Edit user interface}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Edit user interface ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDiff3}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDiff}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPreviewOnOpenNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUniversalEditButton}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseAutomaticEditSummaries}}

{{anchor|Maintenance Scripts setting}}
{{anchor|Wiki locking}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Maintenance Scripts setting ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCommandLineDarkBg}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCommandLineMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGitBin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGitRepositoryViewers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReadOnlyFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReadOnlyWatchedItemStore}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReadOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpgradeKey}}

{{anchor|Recent changes, new pages, watchlist and history|Recent changes}}
{{anchor|UDP updates}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Recent changes, new pages, watchlist and history ==
&lt;/div&gt;

See also {{ll|Help:Recent changes}} and {{wg|DefaultUserOptions}}

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowCategorizedRecentChanges}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableAnonTalk}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogAutopatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCChangedSizeThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCEngines}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCFeeds}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCFilterByAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCLinkDays}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCLinkLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCShowChangedSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCShowWatchingUsers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCWatchCategoryMembership}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRecentChangesFlags}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowUpdatedMarker}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSoftwareTags}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStructuredChangeFiltersLiveUpdatePollingRate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUnwatchedPageSecret}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUnwatchedPageThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseFilePatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseNPPatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseRCPatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTagFilter}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchersMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchlistExpiryMaxDuration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchlistExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchlistPurgeRate}}

{{anchor|Feed}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Feed ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeed}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAdvertisedFeedTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedCacheTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedDiffCutoff}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOverrideSiteFeed}}

{{anchor|Copyright}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Copyright ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxCredits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsIcon}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsPage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsText}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowCreditsIfMax}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCopyrightUpload}}

{{anchor|Import/Export}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Import/Export ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportAllowAll}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportAllowHistory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportAllowListContributors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportFromNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportMaxHistory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportPagelistLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImportSources}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImportTargetNamespace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgXmlDumpSchemaVersion}}

{{anchor|Extensions}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoloadAttemptLowercase}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoloadClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableParserLimitReporting}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionCredits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionEntryPointListFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionFunctions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionMessagesFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHooks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobBackoffThrottling}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobQueueIncludeInMaxLagFactor}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobSerialCommitThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobTypeConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobTypesExcludedFromDefaultQueue}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMessagesDirs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPagePropLinkInvalidations}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserOutputHooks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgServiceWiringFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialPageCacheUpdates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgValidSkinNames}}

{{anchor|Category}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Category ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCategoryCollation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCategoryMagicGallery}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCategoryPagingLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCategoryBrowser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTempCategoryCollations}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrackingCategories}}

{{anchor|Logging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Logging ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActionFilteredLogs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFilterLogTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogActionsHandlers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogActions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogHeaders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogNames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogRestrictions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNewUserLog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPageCreationLog}}

{{anchor|Special pages}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Special pages ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSpecialInclusion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCountCategorizedImagesAsUsed}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableQueryPageUpdate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxRedirectLinksRetrieved}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}}

{{anchor|Actions}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Actions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActions}}

{{anchor|Robot policies}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Robot policies ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgArticleRobotPolicies}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultRobotPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExemptFromUserRobotsControl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceRobotPolicies}}

{{anchor|Ajax, Action API and REST API}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Ajax, Action API and REST API ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Ajax}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Ajax ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxEditStash}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxExportList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxLicensePreview}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxUploadDestCheck}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestAPIAdditionalRouteFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseAjax}}

{{anchor|API}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== API ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowedCorsHeaders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPICacheHelpTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIFormatModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIListModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxDBRows}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxLagThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxResultSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxUncachedDiffs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMetaModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIPropModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIRequestLog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIUselessQueryPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCrossSiteAJAXdomainExceptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCrossSiteAJAXdomains}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugAPI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableAPI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableRestAPI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableWriteAPI}}

{{anchor|Shell and process control|Shell}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Shell and process control ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgPhpCli}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellFileSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellMemory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellWallClockTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellboxSecretKey}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellboxUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellboxUrls}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellCgroup}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellLocale}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellRestrictionMethod}}

{{anchor|HTTP client}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== HTTP client ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowExternalReqID}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAsyncHTTPTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPConnectTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPMaxTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPMaxConnectTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPImportTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPProxy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalHTTPProxy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalVirtualHosts}}

{{anchor|Jobs|Job queue}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobRunRate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobQueueAggregator}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRunJobsAsync}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpdateRowsPerJob}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpdateRowsPerQuery}}

{{anchor|Site customization}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Site customization ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgStructuredChangeFiltersOnWatchlist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStructuredChangeFiltersShowPreference}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStyleVersion}}

{{anchor|Frontend}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Frontend ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsejQueryThree}}

{{anchor|Wiki farm}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wiki farm ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiFarmSettingsDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiFarmSettingsExtension}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiFarmSiteDetector}}

{{anchor|Miscellaneous settings}}
{{anchor|Migration}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Miscellaneous settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActorTableSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgChangeTagsSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCommentTableSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentHandlerUseDB}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgElementTiming}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEventRelayerConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeaturePolicyReportOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOriginTrials}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPagePropsHaveSortkey}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPingback}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPopularPasswordFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPriorityHintsRatio}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPriorityHints}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRedirectOnLogin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReportToEndpoints}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReportToExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkinsPreferred}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTagStatisticsNewTable}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVirtualRestConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiDiff2MovedParagraphDetectionCutoff}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration for developers}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;how to set and retrieve configuration variables.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration#Configs (Your extension/skins settings)|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration#Configs (Your extension/skins settings)&lt;/span&gt;}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;how to register new configuration variables for extensions and skins.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Configure{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:MediaWiki configuration{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:MediaWiki configuration settings{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Variables{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>nmxcnydcw2pz0bkdjibjq64p70gsnsa</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402173</id>
      <parentid>5402172</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:42:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Low quality/machine translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="59306" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{TOCright}}
{{Note
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Starting with {{ll|MediaWiki 1.39}} the configuration settings are based on [https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/master/includes/MainConfigSchema.php MainConfigSchema.php].&lt;/span&gt;
|2=gotcha
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is an index of all supported '''configuration settings''' based on the &lt;code&gt;'''[https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-core/blob/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php DefaultSettings.php]'''&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Never edit &lt;code&gt;DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;; copy appropriate lines to &lt;code&gt;''{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}''&lt;/code&gt; instead and amend them as appropriate.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you can't find a configuration setting here, see if it is defined in &lt;code&gt;DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
La variable tendría que tener alguna documentación allí.

{{Note|1=La variable debería tener algo de documentación allí. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please use the search box to find the relevant manual page (e.g. &lt;code&gt;Manual:$wgAllowAnonymousMinor&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;}}

:{{ll|Manual:Configuration settings (alphabetical)|2=Enumerados alfabéticamente}} | {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Listed by function&lt;/span&gt;}} | {{ll|Category:MediaWiki configuration settings}}

{{anchor|General Settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== General Settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitename}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVersion}}

{{anchor|Global Objects}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Global Objects ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoloadLocalClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgConf}}

{{anchor|Server URLs and file paths|URLs and file paths|Paths}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Server URLs and file paths ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|IP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgActionPaths}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAppleTouchIcon}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgArticlePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAssumeProxiesUseDefaultProtocolPorts}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBaseDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCanonicalServer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgConfigRegistry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionAssetsPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFavicon}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFFmpegLocation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFFprobeLocation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileCacheDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForceHTTPS}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHttpsPort}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImgAuthPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLoadScript}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalStylePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogoHD}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogos}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogo}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainPageIsDomainRoot}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReferrerPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgScriptExtension}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgScriptPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgScript}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgServerName}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgServer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitesCacheFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStyleDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStylePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStyleSheetPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTmpDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadBaseUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadStashScalerBaseUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsePathInfo}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also [[#Uploads|file/image upload path settings]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also [[#Skins|skins path settings]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Files and file uploads|Uploads}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Files and file uploads ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Uploads have to be specially set up to be secure.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowCopyUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowJavaUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAttemptFailureEpoch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCheckFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadAllowOnWikiDomainConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadProxy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadsDomains}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadsFromSpecialUpload}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCopyUploadTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeletedDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDirectoryMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableUploadScriptChecks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableAsyncUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileBackends}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProhibitedFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHashedUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgIllegalFileChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImagePreconnect}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImgAuthDetails}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImgAuthUrlPathMap}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalFileRepo}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLockManagers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxUploadSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMediaInTargetLanguage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMinUploadChunkSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNativeImageLazyLoading}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserTestMediaHandlers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStrictFileExtensions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailEpoch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadDialog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadMaintenance}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadMissingFileUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadNavigationUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadSizeWarning}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadStashMaxAge}}

{{anchor|Shared uploads}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Shared uploads ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These settings are kept for backward compatibility, see {{ll|Manual:$wgForeignFileRepos|$wgForeignFileRepos}} for the new setting, or {{ll|Manual:$wgUseInstantCommons|$wgUseInstantCommons}} if you only need read access to images on Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheSharedUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForeignFileRepos}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForeignUploadTargets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHashedSharedUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRepositoryBaseUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadDBname}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadDBprefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedUploadPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSharedUploads}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFetchCommonsDescriptions}}

{{anchor|MIME types}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MIME types ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeDetectorCommand}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeInfoFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeTypeFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrivialMimeDetection}}
:{{Warning|1=&amp;uarr;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is '''not''' a configuration setting, but a global state variable.&lt;/span&gt;  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It should be used solely by {{ll|Manual:Thumb.php|thumb.php}}!&lt;/span&gt;|inline=1}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVerifyMimeType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVerifyMimeTypeIE}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeTypeBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeTypeExclusions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgXMLMimeTypes}}

''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Manual:Mime type detection}}''

{{anchor|Images}}

=== Imágenes ===
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowImageMoving}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCustomConvertCommand}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableAutoRotation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExiftool}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExiv2Command}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGalleryOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgIgnoreImageErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImageLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJpegQuality}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJpegTran}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxImageArea}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMediaHandlers}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameters for [[#Paths|upload path]]&lt;/span&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrustedMediaFormats}}

''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Manual:Configuring file uploads}}''

{{anchor|DjVu}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== DjVu ====
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuDump}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuOutputExtension}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuPostProcessor}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuRenderer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuToXML}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDjvuTxt}}

{{anchor|EXIF}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== EXIF ====
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowEXIF}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpdateCompatibleMetadata}}

{{anchor|ImageMagick}}
==== ImageMagick ====
* {{configuration list entry|wgImageMagickConvertCommand}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImageMagickTempDir}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxInterlacingAreas}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharpenParameter}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharpenReductionThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseImageMagick}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTinyRGBForJPGThumbnails}}

{{anchor|SVG}}
==== SVG ====
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowTitlesInSVG}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGConverter}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGConverterPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGConverters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGMaxSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSVGMetadataCutoff}}

{{anchor|Thumbnail settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Thumbnail settings ====
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseImageResize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGenerateThumbnailOnParse}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxAnimatedGifArea}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedThumbnailScriptPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowArchiveThumbnails}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTiffThumbnailType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailScriptPath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbUpright}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResponsiveImages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailBuckets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgThumbnailMinimumBucketDistance}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJpegPixelFormat}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderHttpCustomHost}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderHttpCustomDomain}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderMap}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUploadThumbnailRenderMethod}}

{{anchor|Antivirus}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Antivirus ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAntivirus}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAntivirusRequired}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAntivirusSetup}}

{{anchor|Email settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Email settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;

''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also User Access:&lt;/span&gt; {{ll|Manual:$wgEmailConfirmToEdit|$wgEmailConfirmToEdit}}''

* {{configuration list entry|wgAdditionalMailParams}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowHTMLEmail}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEmailAuthentication}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEmergencyContact}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableEmail}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableSpecialMute}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUserEmailBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUserEmailMuteList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableUserEmail}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNewPasswordExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoReplyAddress}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordExpirationDays}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordExpireGrace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordReminderResendTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordSender}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSMTP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUserEmailConfirmationTokenExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUserEmailUseReplyTo}}

{{anchor|Email notification (Enotif) settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Email notification (Enotif) settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Actual notifications for each user are defined in the options.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change defaults with {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions|$wgDefaultUserOptions}}.&lt;/span&gt;''

* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifFromEditor}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifImpersonal}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifMaxRecips}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifMinorEdits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifRevealEditorAddress}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifUseRealName}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifUserTalk}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnotifWatchlist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseEnotif}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsersNotifiedOnAllChanges}}

{{anchor|Database settings}}
{{anchor|MSSQL-specific|MSSQL specific}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
{{anchor|Oracle-specific|Oracle specific}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Database settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDataCenterUpdateStickTTL}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBadminpassword}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBadminuser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBcompress}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBDefaultGroup}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBerrorLogTZ}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBerrorLog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBmwschema}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBname}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBOracleDRCP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBpassword}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBprefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBserver}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBssl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBtype}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBuser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBWindowsAuthentication}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalDatabases}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxExecutionTimeForExpensiveQueries}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMultiContentRevisionSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchTypeAlternatives}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTemplateLinksSchemaMigrationStage}}

{{anchor|LoadBalancer settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== LoadBalancer settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgDBservers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLBFactoryConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMasterWaitTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSlaveLagCritical}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSlaveLagWarning}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDatabaseReplicaLagCritical}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDatabaseReplicaLagWarning}}

{{anchor|MySQL-specific|MySQL specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MySQL-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBmysql5}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBTableOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSQLMode}}

{{anchor|PostgreSQL-specific|PostgreSQL specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== PostgreSQL-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDBport}}

{{anchor|SQLite-specific|SQLite specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== SQLite-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgSQLiteDataDir}}

{{anchor|Shared DB settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Shared DB settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedDB}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedTables}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSharedSchema}}

{{anchor|Extension fields}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension fields ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtPGNewFields}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtNewTables}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtNewFields}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtNewIndexes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtPGAlteredFields}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtModifiedFields}}

{{anchor|Content handlers and storage|ContentHandler}}
{{anchor|Compressed Storage Support}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Content handlers and storage ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCompressRevisions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentHandlers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentHandlerTextFallback}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultExternalStore}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDiffEngine}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableRemoteBagOStuffTests}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalDiffEngine}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalStores}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceContentModels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPageLanguageUseDB}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRevisionCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTextModelsToParse}}

{{anchor|Performance hacks and limits|Performance|Reduction}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Performance hacks and limits ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSchemaUpdates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSlowParserFunctions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCriticalSectionTimeLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableQueryPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForceDeferredUpdatesPreSend}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLinkHolderBatchSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxArticleSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaximumMovedPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxJobDBWriteDuration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxUserDBWriteDuration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemoryLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMiserMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMultiShardSiteStats}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPoolCounterConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgQueryCacheLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgQueryPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRequestTimeLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTransactionalTimeLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWantedPagesThreshold}}

{{anchor|Cache}}
{{anchor|Client side caching}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Cache ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Manual:Caching}}

* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheEpoch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCachePages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgChronologyProtectorStash}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgClockSkewFudge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionInfoMTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFooterLinkCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGitInfoCacheDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidateCacheOnLocalSettingsChange}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLanguageConverterCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainStash}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgObjectCaches}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserCacheUseJson}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParsoidCacheConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPHPSessionHandling}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionPbkdf2Iterations}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSuspiciousIpExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseGzip}}

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;''See: [[#Interwiki|Interwiki]] for Interwiki cache settings.''&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|File Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== File Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Settings for Server side file caching.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgFileCacheDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseFileCache}}

{{anchor|Message Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Message Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAdaptiveMessageCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalisationCacheConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMessageCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseLocalMessageCache}}

{{anchor|Sidebar Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sidebar Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSidebarCacheExpiry}}

{{anchor|Parser Cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Parser Cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableParserCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOldRevisionParserCacheExpireTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRenderHashAppend}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserCacheExpireTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseContentMediaStyles}}

{{anchor|Memcached settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Memcached settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Settings for configuring the {{ll|Memcached}} memory-based object store (if you are using it) {{git file|file=docs/memcached.md}} has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedDebug}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedPersistent}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMemCachedTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgObjectCacheSessionExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionCacheType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionsInObjectCache}}

{{anchor|WAN cache}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== WAN cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableWANCacheReaper}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMainWANCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWANObjectCaches}}

{{anchor|HTTP proxy (CDN) settings|CDN / Squid|Squid}}
{{anchor|Proxies}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== HTTP proxy (CDN) settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These settings configure MediaWiki when using a caching HTTP proxy server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They apply to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Varnish caching|caching using Varnish]] as well as [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Squid caching|Squid]].&lt;/span&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxageLagged}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxageStale}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxageSubstitute}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnReboundPurgeDelay}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnServersNoPurge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCdnServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForcedRawSMaxage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInternalServer}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLoggedOutMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidMaxage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidPurgeUseHostHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidServersNoPurge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSquidServers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCdn}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseESI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseKeyHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsePrivateIPs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSquid}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVaryOnXFP}}

{{anchor|HTCP multicast purging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== HTCP multicast purging ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTCPMulticastTTL}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTCPRouting}}

{{anchor|Language, regional and character encoding settings|Localization}}
{{anchor|User agent}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Language, regional and character encoding settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllUnicodeFixes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBrowserBlackList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultLanguageVariant}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisabledVariants}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableLangConversion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableTitleConversion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDummyLanguageCodes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraInterlanguageLinkPrefixes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraLanguageCodes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraLanguageNames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFixArabicUnicode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFixMalayalamUnicode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGrammarForms}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHideInterlanguageLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterlanguageLinkCodeMap}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiMagic}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLangObjCacheSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLanguageCode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegacyEncoding}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegacySchemaConversion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLoginLanguageSelector}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxMsgCacheEntrySize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMsgCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOverrideUcfirstCharacters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRawHtmlMessages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseDatabaseMessages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsePigLatinVariant}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVariantArticlePath}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgUserFallbackLanguages|$wgUserFallbackLanguages}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;maximum number of fallback languages per user&lt;/span&gt;&lt;!-- Can't use {{configuration list entry because [[Manual:$wgUserFallbackLanguages]] doesn't include the standard infobox --&gt;

{{anchor|Timezone settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Timezone settings ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocaltimezone}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalTZoffset}}

{{anchor|Language-specific}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Language-specific ===
&lt;/div&gt;

;{{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAmericanDates}}

;{{#language:ar|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}/{{#language:hi|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTranslateNumerals}}

{{anchor|Output format and skin settings}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Output format and skin settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Output}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Output ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgBrowserFormatDetection}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableOutputCompression}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEdititis}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEditSubmitButtonLabelPublish}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableCanonicalServerLink}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExperimentalHtmlIds}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalInterwikiFragmentMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFragmentMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHtml5Version}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHtml5}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTMLFormAllowTableFormat}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJsMimeType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMangleFlashPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMimeType}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSend404Code}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowRollbackEditCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteNotice}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteSupportPage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseMediaWikiUIEverywhere}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgXhtmlNamespaces}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following setting is no longer used in supported versions of MediaWiki, but still exists for backward compatibility
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgXhtmlDefaultNamespace}}

{{anchor|Skins}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skins ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultSkin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFallbackSkin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFooterIcons}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkinMetaTags}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkipSkins}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkipSkin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCombinedLoginLink}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVectorUseIconWatch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVectorUseSimpleSearch}}

{{anchor|Resource loader}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== ResourceLoader ==
&lt;/div&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|ResourceLoader}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;''

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgIncludeLegacyJavaScript}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegacyJavaScriptGlobals}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceBasePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderDebug}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderEnableJSProfiler}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderLESSImportPaths}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderLESSVars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMaxage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMaxQueryLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMinifierMaxLineLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderMinifierStatementsOnOwnLine}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderSources}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderStorageEnabled}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderStorageVersion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderUseObjectCacheForDeps}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderValidateJS}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceLoaderValidateStaticJS}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceModuleSkinStyles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgResourceModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVueDevelopmentMode}}

{{anchor|Page titles and redirects}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Page titles and redirects ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableHardRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFixDoubleRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidRedirectTargets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShortPagesNamespaceBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShortPagesNamespaceExclusions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCapitalLinkOverrides}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCapitalLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLegalTitleChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxRedirects}}

{{anchor|Namespaces}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Namespaces ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCanonicalNamespaceNames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraGenderNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtraSignatureNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetaNamespace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetaNamespaceTalk}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceAliases}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespacesWithSubpages}}

{{anchor|Mobile support}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Mobile support ===
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Interwiki links and sites|Interwiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Interwiki links and sites ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiPrefixDisplayTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalInterwikis}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalInterwiki}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRedirectSources}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteTypes}}

{{anchor|Interwiki cache}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Interwiki cache ===
&lt;/div&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|interwiki cache}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;''

* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiCache}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiFallbackSite}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInterwikiScopes}}

{{anchor|Parser}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Parser ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowDisplayTitle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowExternalImagesFrom}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowExternalImages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowImageTag}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCleanSignatures}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableImageWhitelist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableMagicLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableScaryTranscluding}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExpensiveParserFunctionLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExternalLinkTarget}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxGeneratedPPNodeCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxPPExpandDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxPPNodeCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxTemplateDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxTocLevel}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoFollowDomainExceptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoFollowLinks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNoFollowNsExceptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserEnableLegacyMediaDOM}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParsoidSettings}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPreprocessorCacheThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRegisterInternalExternals}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestrictDisplayTitle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTranscludeCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUrlProtocols}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseNewMediaStructure}}

{{anchor|HTML}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== HTML ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgRawHtml}}

{{anchor|Tidy}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tidy ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{update}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tidy is an open source tool that cleans up broken HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use this to ensure that broken HTML in articles doesn't affect the layout of your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;While Tidy itself is going to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|replaced]], the configuration settings can still be used for the replacements.&lt;/span&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugTidy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyBin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyInternal}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTidyOpts}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTidy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgValidateAllHtml}}

:''See also: {{ll|Manual:Build Tidy from source}}.''

{{anchor|Statistics and content analysis|Site Statistics}}
{{anchor|Statistics}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Statistics and content analysis ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActiveUserDays}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgArticleCountMethod}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableCounters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExperiencedUserEdits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExperiencedUserMemberSince}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLearnerEdits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLearnerMemberSince}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgManualRevertSearchRadius}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRevertedTagMaxDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSiteStatsAsyncFactor}}

{{anchor|User accounts, authentication|Users}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User accounts, authentication ==
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowRequiringEmailForResets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoCreateTempUser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHiddenPrefs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidUsernameCharacters}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaximalPasswordLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxNameChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxSigChars}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMinimalPasswordLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReservedUsernames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSignatureValidation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSignatureAllowedLintErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUserrightsInterwikiDelimiter}}

{{anchor|Authentication}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Authentication ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSecuritySensitiveOperationIfCannotReauthenticate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuthenticationTokenVersion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuthManagerAutoConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuthManagerConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCentralIdLookupProviders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCentralIdLookupProvider}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgChangeCredentialsBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgInvalidPasswordReset}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordDefault}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordResetRoutes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordSalt}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReauthenticateTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRememberMe}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRemoveCredentialsBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSecureLogin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionProviders}}

{{anchor|User rights, access control and monitoring|User Access}}
{{anchor|Rate limiter}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User rights, access control and monitoring ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAddGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoblockExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBlockAllowsUTEdit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeleteRevisionsBatchSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDnsBlacklistUrls}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEmailConfirmToEdit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableDnsBlacklist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGrantPermissionGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGrantPermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupInheritsPermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupPermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupsAddToSelf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHideUserContribLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImplicitGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPasswordAttemptThrottle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProxyList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProxyWhitelist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRateLimitsExcludedIPs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRateLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRevokePermissions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWhitelistReadRegexp}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWhitelistRead}}

{{anchor|Access}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Access ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Blocking/banning, and some other related settings.
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{configuration list entry|wgAccountCreationThrottle}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgApplyIpBlocksToXff}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoConfirmAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoConfirmCount}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutopromoteOnceLogInRC}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutopromoteOnce}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutopromote}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAvailableRights}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBlockCIDRLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBlockDisablesLogin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBotPasswordsCluster}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBotPasswordsDatabase}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCascadingRestrictionLevels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableBotPasswords}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnablePartialBlocks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnablePartialActionBlocks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHideIdentifiableRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNonincludableNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPutIPinRC}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgQueryPageDefaultLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestrictionLevels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestrictionTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSemiprotectedRestrictionLevels}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSoftBlockRanges}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpamRegex}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSummarySpamRegex}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSysopEmailBans}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} for more methods and settings concerning access.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also {{ll|Manual:User rights}} for more information about $wgGroupPermissions, $wgAddGroups, $wgRemoveGroups, etc.&lt;/span&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[#User Access|User Access]] for User Access settings.&lt;/span&gt;''

{{anchor|Security|Content Security Policy|Content security policy}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Security ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowCrossOrigin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowUserCssPrefs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowUserCss}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowUserJs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgApiFrameOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgBreakFrames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCSPFalsePositiveUrls}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCSPHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCSPReportOnlyHeader}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEditPageFrameOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHKDFAlgorithm}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHKDFSecret}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestAllowCrossOriginCookieAuth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSecretKey}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionInsecureSecrets}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionSecret}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSiteCss}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSiteJs}}

{{anchor|Cookies}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Cookies ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCacheVaryCookies}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieDomain}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieExpiration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieHttpOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookiePath}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookiePrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSameSite}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSecure}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSetOnAutoblock}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCookieSetOnIpBlock}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableCookieCheck}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtendedLoginCookieExpiration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionHandler}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSessionName}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseSameSiteLegacyCookies}}

{{anchor|Profiling, testing and debugging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Profiling, testing and debugging ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCachePrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableJavaScriptTest}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserTestFiles}}

{{anchor|Debug|Debug/logging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Debug ===
&lt;/div&gt;

:''See also: {{ll|Manual:How to debug}}''

* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugComments}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugDumpSql}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugLogFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugLogGroups}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugLogPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugPrintHttpHeaders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugRawPage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugRedirects}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugTimestamps}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugToolbar}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDeprecationReleaseLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDevelopmentWarnings}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogExceptionBacktrace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMWLoggerDefaultSpi}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOverrideHostname}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPageInfoTransclusionLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPropagateErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowDBErrorBacktrace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowDebug}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowExceptionDetails}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowHostnames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowSQLErrors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialVersionShowHooks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrxProfilerLimits}}

{{anchor|Profiling}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Profiling ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableProfileInfo}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetricsTarget}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetricsPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMetricsFormat}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProfiler}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProfileLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgProfileOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsdMetricPrefix}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsdSamplingRates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStatsdServer}}

{{anchor|Search}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Search ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAdvancedSearchHighlighting}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableInternalSearch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableSearchUpdate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableTextSearch}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableOpenSearchSuggest}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableSearchContributorsByIP}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespacesToBeSearchedDefault}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchDefaultLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchDescriptionLength}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchTemplates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOpenSearchTemplate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchForwardUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchHighlightBoundaries}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchMatchRedirectPreference}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchRunSuggestedQuery}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSearchSuggestCacheExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitemapNamespacesPriorities}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSitemapNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialSearchFormOptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTwoButtonsSearchForm}}

{{anchor|Edit user interface}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Edit user interface ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgDiff3}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDiff}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPreviewOnOpenNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUniversalEditButton}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseAutomaticEditSummaries}}

{{anchor|Maintenance Scripts setting}}
{{anchor|Wiki locking}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Maintenance Scripts setting ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCommandLineDarkBg}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCommandLineMode}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGitBin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgGitRepositoryViewers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReadOnlyFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReadOnlyWatchedItemStore}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReadOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpgradeKey}}

{{anchor|Recent changes, new pages, watchlist and history|Recent changes}}
{{anchor|UDP updates}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Recent changes, new pages, watchlist and history ==
&lt;/div&gt;

See also {{ll|Help:Recent changes}} and {{wg|DefaultUserOptions}}

* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowCategorizedRecentChanges}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableAnonTalk}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogAutopatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCChangedSizeThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCEngines}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCFeeds}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCFilterByAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCLinkDays}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCLinkLimits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCShowChangedSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCShowWatchingUsers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRCWatchCategoryMembership}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRecentChangesFlags}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowUpdatedMarker}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSoftwareTags}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStructuredChangeFiltersLiveUpdatePollingRate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUnwatchedPageSecret}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUnwatchedPageThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseFilePatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseNPPatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseRCPatrol}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseTagFilter}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchersMaxAge}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchlistExpiryMaxDuration}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchlistExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWatchlistPurgeRate}}

{{anchor|Feed}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Feed ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeed}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAdvertisedFeedTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedCacheTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedDiffCutoff}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeedLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOverrideSiteFeed}}

{{anchor|Copyright}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Copyright ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxCredits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsIcon}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsPage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsText}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRightsUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShowCreditsIfMax}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCopyrightUpload}}

{{anchor|Import/Export}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Import/Export ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportAllowAll}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportAllowHistory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportAllowListContributors}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportFromNamespaces}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportMaxHistory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExportPagelistLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImportSources}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgImportTargetNamespace}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgXmlDumpSchemaVersion}}

{{anchor|Extensions}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAuth}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoloadAttemptLowercase}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAutoloadClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableParserLimitReporting}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionCredits}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionEntryPointListFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionFunctions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExtensionMessagesFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHooks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobBackoffThrottling}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobClasses}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobQueueIncludeInMaxLagFactor}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobSerialCommitThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobTypeConf}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobTypesExcludedFromDefaultQueue}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMessagesDirs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPagePropLinkInvalidations}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgParserOutputHooks}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgServiceWiringFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialPageCacheUpdates}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSpecialPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgValidSkinNames}}

{{anchor|Category}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Category ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgCategoryCollation}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCategoryMagicGallery}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCategoryPagingLimit}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseCategoryBrowser}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTempCategoryCollations}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTrackingCategories}}

{{anchor|Logging}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Logging ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActionFilteredLogs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFilterLogTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogActionsHandlers}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogActions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogHeaders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogNames}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogRestrictions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLogTypes}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNewUserLog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPageCreationLog}}

{{anchor|Special pages}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Special pages ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowSpecialInclusion}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCountCategorizedImagesAsUsed}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDisableQueryPageUpdate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxRedirectLinksRetrieved}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}}

{{anchor|Actions}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Actions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActions}}

{{anchor|Robot policies}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Robot policies ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgArticleRobotPolicies}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDefaultRobotPolicy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgExemptFromUserRobotsControl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgNamespaceRobotPolicies}}

{{anchor|Ajax, Action API and REST API}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Ajax, Action API and REST API ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Ajax}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Ajax ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxEditStash}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxExportList}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxLicensePreview}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAjaxUploadDestCheck}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRestAPIAdditionalRouteFiles}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUseAjax}}

{{anchor|API}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== API ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowedCorsHeaders}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPICacheHelpTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIFormatModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIListModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxDBRows}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxLagThreshold}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxResultSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMaxUncachedDiffs}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIMetaModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIPropModules}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIRequestLog}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAPIUselessQueryPages}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCrossSiteAJAXdomainExceptions}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCrossSiteAJAXdomains}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgDebugAPI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableAPI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableRestAPI}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEnableWriteAPI}}

{{anchor|Shell and process control|Shell}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Shell and process control ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgPhpCli}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellFileSize}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellMemory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgMaxShellWallClockTime}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellboxSecretKey}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellboxUrl}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellboxUrls}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellCgroup}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellLocale}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgShellRestrictionMethod}}

{{anchor|HTTP client}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== HTTP client ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgAllowExternalReqID}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgAsyncHTTPTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPConnectTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPMaxTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPMaxConnectTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPImportTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPProxy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgHTTPTimeout}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalHTTPProxy}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgLocalVirtualHosts}}

{{anchor|Jobs|Job queue}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobRunRate}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgJobQueueAggregator}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRunJobsAsync}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpdateRowsPerJob}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgUpdateRowsPerQuery}}

{{anchor|Site customization}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Site customization ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgStructuredChangeFiltersOnWatchlist}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStructuredChangeFiltersShowPreference}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgStyleVersion}}

{{anchor|Frontend}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Frontend ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgUsejQueryThree}}

{{anchor|Wiki farm}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wiki farm ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiFarmSettingsDirectory}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiFarmSettingsExtension}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiFarmSiteDetector}}

{{anchor|Miscellaneous settings}}
{{anchor|Migration}}&lt;!--deprecated--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Miscellaneous settings ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{configuration list entry|wgActorTableSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgChangeTagsSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgCommentTableSchemaMigrationStage}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgContentHandlerUseDB}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgElementTiming}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgEventRelayerConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgFeaturePolicyReportOnly}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgOriginTrials}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPagePropsHaveSortkey}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPingback}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPopularPasswordFile}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPriorityHintsRatio}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgPriorityHints}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgRedirectOnLogin}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReportToEndpoints}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgReportToExpiry}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgSkinsPreferred}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgTagStatisticsNewTable}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgVirtualRestConfig}}
* {{configuration list entry|wgWikiDiff2MovedParagraphDetectionCutoff}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration for developers}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;how to set and retrieve configuration variables.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration#Configs (Your extension/skins settings)|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration#Configs (Your extension/skins settings)&lt;/span&gt;}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;how to register new configuration variables for extensions and skins.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Configure{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:MediaWiki configuration{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:MediaWiki configuration settings{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Variables{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>9xuh1h5cg4niq0jlul1zybn8mi6tftd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/ko</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>16861</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402250</id>
      <parentid>5400744</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14174" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;로그인 후에 화면 오른쪽 상단의 사용자 환경 설정을 클릭하면 설정을 변경할 수 있습니다. 사용자 정보를 포함하여 여러 종류의 설정이 탭으로 나타납니다.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-username'' 사용자 이름. 사무관만이 사용자 이름을 변경할 수 있으며 위키는 {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} 확장이 설치되어 있어야 합니다.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-prefs-edits'' 사용자의 총 편집 횟수. 모든 위키가 이 기능을 제공하는 것은 아닙니다.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|아래 참조]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|아래 참조]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;암호를 변경하려면 첫 번째 상자에 이전 암호를 입력하고 마지막 상자에 새 암호를 입력하십시오. 이 사이트에서 로그인 정보를 기억하게하려면 '이 컴퓨터에서 내 로그인 정보 기억'을 선택하십시오. 이 기능을 사용하려면 브라우저에서 쿠키를 활성화해야하며 쿠키가 삭제되거나 만료되면 더 이상 기억되지 않습니다.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== 글로벌 계정 ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;기본 설정에서 인터페이스를 사용할 언어를 선택할 수 있습니다. '편집'및 '대화'와 같은 메뉴와 사이드 바에있는 몇 문서만 영향을받습니다. 위키미디어 메타 위키에서처럼 일부 문서가 있지만 대부분의 문서에서는 문서의 주 텍스트가 변경되지 않습니다.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* 언어
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
* 더 많은 언어 설정

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* 당신의 기존 서명
* 새 서명
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* 이메일 인증&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== 날짜 형식 ===

아래는 보통 설정에 따라서 다르게 나타납니다:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - 여기서 얼마나 많은 편집 내용을 표시할지 지정할 수 있습니다.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; 이것은 당신의 위키에서 볼 수있는 위키데이터의 반달 행위를 잡는 데 도움이 될 수 있습니다.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
위키미디어 위키들에서는 '''베타 기능'''탭을 사용하면 모든 사람이 실험 기능을 사용하기 전에 해당 기능을 사용하도록 설정할 수 있습니다.
이러한 기능을 활성화하려고 하면 버그와 문제가 발생할 준비가되어 있어야하며, 개발이 계속되면 기능의 모습이나 작동하는 방식이 갑자기 변경 될 수 있습니다.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

* 새로운 베타 기능을 모두 자동으로 사용: 이 설정을 활성화하면 베타 기능이 베타 기능 시스템에 추가되는 즉시 새로운 베타 기능이 활성화됩니다.

== 같이 보기 ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>i6rg4hfzpx8ni2vaprlimuo46hrqf3a</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>17182</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402898</id>
      <parentid>5364446</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:08:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Vlad5250</username>
        <id>11178679</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="19966" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:54--&gt; Allow users to enable JS-based, user-provided gadgets from their preferences page&lt;/translate&gt;
|example         = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:55--&gt; Wikimedia Commons: [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;commons:Special:Gadgets&lt;/tvar&gt;|Gadget overview]], [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets&lt;/tvar&gt;|user preferences]] (click &quot;Gadgets&quot;; you need to be logged in of course)&lt;/translate&gt;
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:1--&gt;
The '''Gadgets''' extension provides a way for users to pick JavaScript or CSS based &quot;gadgets&quot; that other wiki users provide.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Gadgets are made up of JavaScript and/or CSS &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|snippets}}&lt;/tvar&gt; located on pages in the MediaWiki namespace.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:3--&gt; Each gadget is defined by a line in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]&lt;/tvar&gt;, providing a name and description for the gadget, and a list of the JS and CSS snippets that it uses (see the ''[[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;#Usage&lt;/tvar&gt;|Usage]]'' section below).&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Since Gadgets reside in the MediaWiki namespace (the list defining the gadgets as well as the actual code snippets), only sysops (interface admins from 1.32) can edit the code.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; This is as it should be: only users especially trusted by the wiki community should be able to edit JavaScript code that is used by other users, since JavaScript can easily be used to hijack accounts or spy on people.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Installation == &lt;!--T:6--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Usage == &lt;!--T:7--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:23--&gt; Selection of some gadgets at the user preferences in de.wikipedia&lt;/translate&gt;]]
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:24--&gt; There are two ways to define gadgets depending on the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; If It is &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; (the default value), the list of available gadgets is defined on &lt;tvar name=2&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; In an alternative way, Gadget definitions are defined on pages in the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:&lt;/tvar&gt;|Gadget definition]] namespace when &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; is set to &lt;tvar name=3&gt;&lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{caution|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Migration of the existing gadget definitions is not yet supported, so you will lose previously defined gadgets after changing this option.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; Once created with at least one valid gadget, gadgets defined there show up in the &quot;Gadgets&quot; section of &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[Special:Preferences]]&lt;/tvar&gt;, so users can pick the gadgets they would like to use.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:29--&gt; An overview of the gadgets defined by &lt;tvar name=1&gt;MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition&lt;/tvar&gt; is also shown on &lt;tvar name=2&gt;'''[[Special:Gadgets]]'''&lt;/tvar&gt;, along with links to the respective system messages, for easy editing.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt; Statistics for non-default gadget usage can be seen at &lt;tvar name=1&gt;'''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Format === &lt;!--T:8--&gt;

==== Using MediaWiki Gadgets Definition ==== &lt;!--T:9--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:31--&gt; Each line in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition&lt;/tvar&gt; that starts with one or more &quot;&lt;tvar name=2&gt;*&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; (asterisks) characters defines a gadget; it must have the following form:&lt;/translate&gt;

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:32--&gt; options (can be omitted)&lt;/translate&gt;] | &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:33--&gt; page names&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:34--&gt;
The first field (&quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; in the example) is the gadget's ''internal name'', and references a system message (&lt;tvar name=2&gt;'''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;'''&lt;/tvar&gt; in the example) that contains a short description of the gadget, using wiki syntax.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; The ''internal name'' is used as part of the name of a form field and must follow the [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id&lt;/tvar&gt; rules defined for NAME attribute values].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:36--&gt; This means it must begin with a basic Latin letter (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;) and may be followed by any number of letters, digits (&lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), hyphens (&lt;tvar name=3&gt;&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), underscores (&lt;tvar name=4&gt;&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), colons (&lt;tvar name=5&gt;&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), and periods (&lt;tvar name=6&gt;&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:37--&gt;
Options format:
&lt;/translate&gt;

 [&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:38--&gt; option1&lt;/translate&gt; | &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:39--&gt; option2&lt;/translate&gt; | ... &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:40--&gt; optionN&lt;/translate&gt;]

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:41--&gt; whitespace can be omitted.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; A single option can either consist of a single option name (in this case it is a flag option), or contain a comma-separated list of values:&lt;/translate&gt;

 option = value1, value2, value3

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:43--&gt;
Examples:
&lt;/translate&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:44--&gt;
or
&lt;/translate&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:45--&gt;
or
&lt;/translate&gt;
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Using Gadget Definition Namespace ==== &lt;!--T:21--&gt;

&lt;!--T:22--&gt;
Creation of the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[Gadget definition:mygadget]]&lt;/tvar&gt; page and putting in it the below [[w:JSON|JSON]] code have the same effect as &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:56--&gt; In above example, the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[Gadget:Mygadget.js]]&lt;/tvar&gt; and the &lt;tvar name=2&gt;[[Gadget:mygadget.css]]&lt;/tvar&gt; are used.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:57--&gt; Remember the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; option is always true in the gadget definition namespace.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:53--&gt; You can add the following in your &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; to provide the appropriate permissions for users who are within the interface-admin group.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:47--&gt; Editing pages in the Gadget namespace requires the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; right and editing pages in the Gadget definition namespace requires the &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; right.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Options === &lt;!--T:10--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Name&lt;/translate&gt;
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; Parameters&lt;/translate&gt;
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; Description&lt;/translate&gt;
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:18--&gt; Since&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:58--&gt; None&lt;/translate&gt;'' || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:59--&gt; Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|ResourceLoader}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:60--&gt; Comma-separated module names&lt;/translate&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:61--&gt; See [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules&lt;/tvar&gt;|list of default modules]].&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:62--&gt; Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/translate&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:63--&gt; Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/translate&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:64--&gt; Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions&lt;/tvar&gt;|privileges]].&lt;/translate&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:65--&gt; None&lt;/translate&gt;''
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:66--&gt; Hide the gadget from the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences&lt;/tvar&gt;|Preferences]] page.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:67--&gt; This can be used in two ways:&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:68--&gt; Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to &lt;tvar name=1&gt;Common.js&lt;/tvar&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:69--&gt; Note that you need to add both: &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:70--&gt; Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:71--&gt; For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/translate&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:72--&gt; Comma-separated skin names&lt;/translate&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:73--&gt; Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins&lt;/tvar&gt;|skins]].&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:74--&gt; Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; in the URL, &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{phab|T199478}}&lt;/tvar&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:114--&gt; Comma-separated action names&lt;/translate&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:115--&gt; Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:116--&gt; E.g. &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/translate&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:117--&gt; Specifying &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; action will also load it on &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:118--&gt; Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/translate&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:75--&gt; None&lt;/translate&gt;'' || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:76--&gt; Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:77--&gt; Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/translate&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:110--&gt; None&lt;/translate&gt;'' || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:111--&gt; Mark this gadget as [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets&lt;/tvar&gt;|packaged]].&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:112--&gt; In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;require()&lt;/tvar&gt; function.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:113--&gt; This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/translate&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:78--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; (default), &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=3&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:79--&gt; Set the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|ResourceLoader}}&lt;/tvar&gt; target(s) for the gadget.&lt;/translate&gt;
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:80--&gt; or&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:81--&gt; Use &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:82--&gt; It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:83--&gt; For details, see [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type&lt;/tvar&gt;|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/translate&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:84--&gt; Using &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:85--&gt; For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/translate&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:48--&gt; Comma-separated module names&lt;/translate&gt;
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:86--&gt; Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:87--&gt; These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:88--&gt; For details, see [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers&lt;/tvar&gt;|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/translate&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:89--&gt; pre-release&lt;/translate&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:119--&gt; None&lt;/translate&gt;'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:120--&gt; Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/translate&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:90--&gt; None&lt;/translate&gt;'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:91--&gt; Makes the gadget to be [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details&lt;/tvar&gt;|top-loaded]].&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:92--&gt; This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/translate&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:49--&gt; You can specify extra dependencies for your gadgets, for example:&lt;/translate&gt;

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:93--&gt; Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; with &lt;tvar name=3&gt;mygadget&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:94--&gt; Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:95--&gt; To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/translate&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:96--&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/translate&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:97--&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/translate&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:98--&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.

&lt;!--T:99--&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions&lt;/tvar&gt;|permissions]], not user groups like [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators&lt;/tvar&gt;|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:50--&gt; Here are some real examples:&lt;/translate&gt;

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Pages === &lt;!--T:11--&gt;

&lt;!--T:105--&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;'''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js'''&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;'''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css'''&lt;/tvar&gt; in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;&lt;tvar name=3&gt;.js&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; or &quot;&lt;tvar name=4&gt;.css&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;, respectively.

&lt;!--T:106--&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/translate&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:107--&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{tag|nowiki}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.

&lt;!--T:108--&gt;
See the first and last lines of &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]]&lt;/tvar&gt; for an example.

=== Sections === &lt;!--T:12--&gt;

&lt;!--T:109--&gt;
The list of gadgets in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition&lt;/tvar&gt; can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;&lt;tvar name=2&gt;=&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/translate&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:52--&gt; This would define a new section, with the title defined on the page &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]]&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

&lt;translate&gt;
== See also == &lt;!--T:14--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; Gadget Manager&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>mr6sii282m60st3dq8bykfgkycoyn2u</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402899</id>
      <parentid>5402898</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:08:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Vlad5250</username>
        <id>11178679</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* User rights */</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="19927" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:54--&gt; Allow users to enable JS-based, user-provided gadgets from their preferences page&lt;/translate&gt;
|example         = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:55--&gt; Wikimedia Commons: [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;commons:Special:Gadgets&lt;/tvar&gt;|Gadget overview]], [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets&lt;/tvar&gt;|user preferences]] (click &quot;Gadgets&quot;; you need to be logged in of course)&lt;/translate&gt;
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:1--&gt;
The '''Gadgets''' extension provides a way for users to pick JavaScript or CSS based &quot;gadgets&quot; that other wiki users provide.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Gadgets are made up of JavaScript and/or CSS &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|snippets}}&lt;/tvar&gt; located on pages in the MediaWiki namespace.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:3--&gt; Each gadget is defined by a line in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]&lt;/tvar&gt;, providing a name and description for the gadget, and a list of the JS and CSS snippets that it uses (see the ''[[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;#Usage&lt;/tvar&gt;|Usage]]'' section below).&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Since Gadgets reside in the MediaWiki namespace (the list defining the gadgets as well as the actual code snippets), only sysops (interface admins from 1.32) can edit the code.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; This is as it should be: only users especially trusted by the wiki community should be able to edit JavaScript code that is used by other users, since JavaScript can easily be used to hijack accounts or spy on people.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Installation == &lt;!--T:6--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Usage == &lt;!--T:7--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:23--&gt; Selection of some gadgets at the user preferences in de.wikipedia&lt;/translate&gt;]]
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:24--&gt; There are two ways to define gadgets depending on the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; If It is &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; (the default value), the list of available gadgets is defined on &lt;tvar name=2&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; In an alternative way, Gadget definitions are defined on pages in the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:&lt;/tvar&gt;|Gadget definition]] namespace when &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; is set to &lt;tvar name=3&gt;&lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{caution|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Migration of the existing gadget definitions is not yet supported, so you will lose previously defined gadgets after changing this option.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; Once created with at least one valid gadget, gadgets defined there show up in the &quot;Gadgets&quot; section of &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[Special:Preferences]]&lt;/tvar&gt;, so users can pick the gadgets they would like to use.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:29--&gt; An overview of the gadgets defined by &lt;tvar name=1&gt;MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition&lt;/tvar&gt; is also shown on &lt;tvar name=2&gt;'''[[Special:Gadgets]]'''&lt;/tvar&gt;, along with links to the respective system messages, for easy editing.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt; Statistics for non-default gadget usage can be seen at &lt;tvar name=1&gt;'''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Format === &lt;!--T:8--&gt;

==== Using MediaWiki Gadgets Definition ==== &lt;!--T:9--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:31--&gt; Each line in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition&lt;/tvar&gt; that starts with one or more &quot;&lt;tvar name=2&gt;*&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; (asterisks) characters defines a gadget; it must have the following form:&lt;/translate&gt;

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:32--&gt; options (can be omitted)&lt;/translate&gt;] | &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:33--&gt; page names&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:34--&gt;
The first field (&quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; in the example) is the gadget's ''internal name'', and references a system message (&lt;tvar name=2&gt;'''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;'''&lt;/tvar&gt; in the example) that contains a short description of the gadget, using wiki syntax.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; The ''internal name'' is used as part of the name of a form field and must follow the [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id&lt;/tvar&gt; rules defined for NAME attribute values].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:36--&gt; This means it must begin with a basic Latin letter (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;) and may be followed by any number of letters, digits (&lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), hyphens (&lt;tvar name=3&gt;&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), underscores (&lt;tvar name=4&gt;&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), colons (&lt;tvar name=5&gt;&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), and periods (&lt;tvar name=6&gt;&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:37--&gt;
Options format:
&lt;/translate&gt;

 [&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:38--&gt; option1&lt;/translate&gt; | &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:39--&gt; option2&lt;/translate&gt; | ... &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:40--&gt; optionN&lt;/translate&gt;]

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:41--&gt; whitespace can be omitted.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; A single option can either consist of a single option name (in this case it is a flag option), or contain a comma-separated list of values:&lt;/translate&gt;

 option = value1, value2, value3

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:43--&gt;
Examples:
&lt;/translate&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:44--&gt;
or
&lt;/translate&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:45--&gt;
or
&lt;/translate&gt;
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Using Gadget Definition Namespace ==== &lt;!--T:21--&gt;

&lt;!--T:22--&gt;
Creation of the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[Gadget definition:mygadget]]&lt;/tvar&gt; page and putting in it the below [[w:JSON|JSON]] code have the same effect as &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:56--&gt; In above example, the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[Gadget:Mygadget.js]]&lt;/tvar&gt; and the &lt;tvar name=2&gt;[[Gadget:mygadget.css]]&lt;/tvar&gt; are used.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:57--&gt; Remember the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; option is always true in the gadget definition namespace.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:53--&gt; You can add the following in your &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt; to provide the appropriate permissions for users who are within the interface-admin group.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:47--&gt; Editing pages in the Gadget namespace requires the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; right and editing pages in the Gadget definition namespace requires the &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; right.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}

&lt;translate&gt;

=== Options === &lt;!--T:10--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Name&lt;/translate&gt;
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; Parameters&lt;/translate&gt;
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; Description&lt;/translate&gt;
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:18--&gt; Since&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:58--&gt; None&lt;/translate&gt;'' || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:59--&gt; Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|ResourceLoader}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:60--&gt; Comma-separated module names&lt;/translate&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:61--&gt; See [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules&lt;/tvar&gt;|list of default modules]].&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:62--&gt; Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/translate&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:63--&gt; Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/translate&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:64--&gt; Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions&lt;/tvar&gt;|privileges]].&lt;/translate&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:65--&gt; None&lt;/translate&gt;''
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:66--&gt; Hide the gadget from the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences&lt;/tvar&gt;|Preferences]] page.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:67--&gt; This can be used in two ways:&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:68--&gt; Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to &lt;tvar name=1&gt;Common.js&lt;/tvar&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:69--&gt; Note that you need to add both: &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:70--&gt; Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:71--&gt; For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/translate&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:72--&gt; Comma-separated skin names&lt;/translate&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:73--&gt; Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins&lt;/tvar&gt;|skins]].&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:74--&gt; Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; in the URL, &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{phab|T199478}}&lt;/tvar&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:114--&gt; Comma-separated action names&lt;/translate&gt; || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:115--&gt; Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:116--&gt; E.g. &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/translate&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:117--&gt; Specifying &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; action will also load it on &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:118--&gt; Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/translate&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:75--&gt; None&lt;/translate&gt;'' || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:76--&gt; Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:77--&gt; Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/translate&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:110--&gt; None&lt;/translate&gt;'' || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:111--&gt; Mark this gadget as [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets&lt;/tvar&gt;|packaged]].&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:112--&gt; In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;require()&lt;/tvar&gt; function.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:113--&gt; This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/translate&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:78--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; (default), &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=3&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:79--&gt; Set the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|ResourceLoader}}&lt;/tvar&gt; target(s) for the gadget.&lt;/translate&gt;
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:80--&gt; or&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:81--&gt; Use &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:82--&gt; It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:83--&gt; For details, see [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type&lt;/tvar&gt;|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/translate&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:84--&gt; Using &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:85--&gt; For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/translate&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:48--&gt; Comma-separated module names&lt;/translate&gt;
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:86--&gt; Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:87--&gt; These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:88--&gt; For details, see [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers&lt;/tvar&gt;|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/translate&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:89--&gt; pre-release&lt;/translate&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:119--&gt; None&lt;/translate&gt;'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:120--&gt; Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/translate&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:90--&gt; None&lt;/translate&gt;'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:91--&gt; Makes the gadget to be [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details&lt;/tvar&gt;|top-loaded]].&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:92--&gt; This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/translate&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:49--&gt; You can specify extra dependencies for your gadgets, for example:&lt;/translate&gt;

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:93--&gt; Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; with &lt;tvar name=3&gt;mygadget&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:94--&gt; Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:95--&gt; To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/translate&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:96--&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/translate&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:97--&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/translate&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:98--&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.

&lt;!--T:99--&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions&lt;/tvar&gt;|permissions]], not user groups like [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators&lt;/tvar&gt;|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:50--&gt; Here are some real examples:&lt;/translate&gt;

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Pages === &lt;!--T:11--&gt;

&lt;!--T:105--&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;'''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js'''&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;'''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css'''&lt;/tvar&gt; in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;&lt;tvar name=3&gt;.js&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; or &quot;&lt;tvar name=4&gt;.css&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;, respectively.

&lt;!--T:106--&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/translate&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:107--&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{tag|nowiki}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.

&lt;!--T:108--&gt;
See the first and last lines of &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]]&lt;/tvar&gt; for an example.

=== Sections === &lt;!--T:12--&gt;

&lt;!--T:109--&gt;
The list of gadgets in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition&lt;/tvar&gt; can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;&lt;tvar name=2&gt;=&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/translate&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:52--&gt; This would define a new section, with the title defined on the page &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]]&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

&lt;translate&gt;
== See also == &lt;!--T:14--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; Gadget Manager&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>i2hq71ofu1jwyzlql0z3srt0pcbpyhm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/zh</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>17384</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402950</id>
      <parentid>5355670</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="38229" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== 概要 ==

===檔案轉送===

選擇一種傳送檔案的方法

* [[w:zh:Wget|wget]]
*  使用[http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP]或[[w:zh:WinSCP|WinSCP]]備份文件
* [[w:zh:SSH文件傳輸協定|SSH文件傳輸協定]] (SFTP)
* 使用[[w:zh:文件傳輸協定|FTP]]客户端。
* 主機提供商可能有提供一個在線的文件管理網頁；可以詢問一下廠家。
* 其他方法。 那些傳輸方式的列表：[[w:文件傳輸協定列表]]

===初步措施===

閱讀{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=包含在MediaWiki中的UPGRADE文件}}。

# 檢查需求
# 读取RELEASE-NOTES文件
# 读取UPGRADE文件
# 備份現有檔案和資料庫
# 解壓新文件
# 升級外掛
# 運行更新程式以檢查資料庫
# 測試更新
#从旧安装中删除剩余文件

== 檢查需求 == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}}需求：

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* 以下之一：
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
如果您想從1.23版本或更早的版本升級至1.36，您需要先將wiki從1.23版本至1.27（或 1.35），自1.27（或1.35）版本，您可以升級至1.36。

如果你在使用PostgreSQL，請同時閱讀{{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}。

更多資訊請閱讀{{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}}和{{ll|Compatibility}}。

== 閱讀發行版本說明 ==
藉由解壓縮壓縮檔,或是由[[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]]的檔案檢查/匯出, 裡面有一些檔案的檔名為大寫字母, 其中之個包含了'''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
現在打開它，並看看這個版本改變了些什麼。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== 清空等待中的工作 ==
出于性能原因，数据库中的某些操作被延迟，并由[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|作业队列]]管理。
这些作业存储在数据库中，并包含有关应执行的操作的信息参数。
强烈建议在升级Wiki前运行这些待处理的作业，以避免这些参数在新版本中发生变化而失败。
在执行升级前，可使用{{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}}运行所有挂起的作业并清除队列。

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== 備份現有檔案和資料庫 ==

:''完整說明: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

虽然升级脚本维护良好且功能强大，但仍可能出错。在更新数据库之前，请对Wiki进行一个'''完整[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|备份]]'''，包括数据库和文件：

* wiki的内容，来自数据库，（确保正确指定了字符集，首先检查LocalSettings.php）。除了SQL数据库转储之外，创建XML转储可能是个好主意。
:* MySQL，SQL转储和XML转储都与&lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt;命令一起使用：
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL，用于&lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;命令的数据库转储：
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite，您使用MediaWiki脚本进行备份：
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* 图片和其他媒体文件（&lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;目录下的内容，自定义logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png）
* 配置文件，例如:&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; 和 &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; （若存在）
* MediaWiki的程序文件，包括所有的皮肤和扩展，特别是如果您修改了它们。

== 解压新文件 ==

=== 使用tarball打包 ===

您可以通过FTP或者是命令行来放置新文件。若您可以使用命令行，请使用命令行。使用命令行要比使用FTP将数千个文件的每个文件上传要快得多。

{{Note|1=您应该将解压后的文件放到服务器上的一个新的空文件夹内。如果您直接在旧版本的目录中解压了新版本的文件，而不是在新文件夹中解压，您应遵循在[[#Back up existing files and the database|备份现有文件和数据库]]章节的说明。否则，如果您做的自定义改动将被抹掉，而无法重新应用它们。 在MediaWiki的实时副本顶部提取tarball也可能遗留旧版MediaWiki中可能会干扰升级代码的文件。建议您将新文件解压缩到新目录中，然后将自定义应用于新目录（还原LocalSettings.php，图像文件夹，扩展和其他自定义项，如自定义外观）}}

==== FTP或图形界面 ====

如果您不能够在服务器上访问命令行，下载MediaWiki tarball 到您的本地计算机并使用[http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip]解压该文件到本地计算机上。

在本地解压该文件后，使用您喜爱的FTP客户端软件上传目录和文件到服务器上。

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== 命令行 ====
若您当前用户下对Wiki安装目录没有完全的写入权限，则可能需要以&lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt;身份运行该命令。
在解压缩tar包时，通常会为新的Wiki版本创建一个新的目录，您需要从旧安装目录中复制之前配置文件和媒体文件目录：

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

(Open)Solaris用户应使用&lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;，或：

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===其他文件===

在解压压缩包后，您应该从旧安装目录中复制或者移动一些文件和文件到新安装目录下：
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* $code-lc 文件包含了您旧的配置设置。&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;（或在旧版本中&lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt;）目录，包含所有上传至wiki的文件，除非您已选择不同的上传目录，并更改所有权和权限。&lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt;和&lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt;（例如如果您的web用户是“apache”）。
* 在&lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;目录下的扩展。您应该经常更新扩展，旧扩展不能够保证在新版本的MediaWiki下工作。
* 如果您使用了[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|自定义logo]]，则还需要从备份中恢复该文件。在1.24版本之前通常在&lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt; 目录下。在1.24版本之后在&lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; 或&lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; 目录下，取决于您选择使用的目录。之后在LocalSettings.php文件中添加例如如下内容&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; 。
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
* 在&lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; 目录下的自定义皮肤。
* 对旧安装文件或扩展所做的任何修改。
* 任何 .htaccess 文件（若您使用Apache并定义了规则）。

一旦完成，将这个新文件夹设为Web服务器上的发布文件夹。或者将旧安装目录重命名，然后将新文件夹重命名为先前的旧安装目录的名字。

=== 使用Git ===

如果使用{{ll|Download from Git|Git}}，请将文件导出到干净的位置，然后将旧的自定义文件复制到新位置，如上一节中所述。

您還需要使用Composer或为维基媒体wiki场维护的提供的集合安装一些外部PHP库。
有關安裝和更新外部庫的更多詳細信息，請參見[[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git下載文檔]]。

=== 使用补丁 ===
通常可以使用小补丁文件进行次要版本升级。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
从[https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ 转存文件]手动下载并解压缩补丁文件，或按照下面wget的说明进行操作。
补丁是增量的，你'''不能'''跳过版本。

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt;定位到您MediaWiki的主目录下（存有LocalSettings.php文件的目录）
# 下载补丁文件，并用&lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt;命令解压它。
# 使用&lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt;检查什么被修改了（''例如''：&lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;）
#如果一切顺利，再次运行&lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt;而不用&lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;。
# 检查您的Special:Version，您应该看到新的版本号。

=== 可能导致错误的剩余文件 ===

如果在旧安装目录上解压缩，则某些旧文件可能会导致新版本出现问题。

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
如果您没有使用[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]]，但在MediaWiki根文件夹中有&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;文件，则可能会收到引用&lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;的错误。
删除或重命名&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;文件将解决此错误。如果您将来启用分析，则&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;文件（也在MediaWiki根文件夹中）可以用作模板。

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23不推荐核心皮肤文件的皮肤自动发现机制。升级到此版本后，您应该确保&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;目录中的旧文件&lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt;和&lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt;以及&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;目录中的相应子文件夹已被删除。MediaWiki将记录警告，如果仍然发现它们中的任何一个可以帮助您记住（您还需要调整任何自定义外观以遵循类似的约定）。有关详细信息，请参阅{{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}。

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24更改了核心皮肤文件的路径。升级到此版本后，应确保&lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;目录中的旧文件&lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt;和&lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt;不再存在。有关详情，请参阅{{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}。

== 升级扩展 ==

某些扩展已更新，以便使用新版本的MediaWiki。请务必升级到此类扩展的最新版本。您可能需要对自定义扩展程序执行手动更新。

不同的[[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]]包含一些扩展子集，并具有版本控制功能，可帮助您升级为MediaWiki核心版本选择正确的版本。

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]]适用于大多数想要使用支持的MediaWiki版本的扩展快照的人。

如果你想要很多扩展，那么[[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|从Git下载]]可能是最好的。
如果您没有Git但想要升级大量扩展，可以考虑使用[[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]]。

== 修改 LocalSettings.php 文件 ==

如果你使用来自旧版本的LocalSettings.php文件，你可能需要修改这个文件使其能够在新版本上使用。

=== 皮肤注册 ===

从MediaWiki 1.24版本开始Vector，Monobook，Modern和CologneBlue等捆绑的皮肤不再是MediaWiki核心的一部分，使用这些皮肤需要在&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;中注册，否则MediaWiki会向你提示没有安装这些皮肤。

若您希望这些皮肤可用，这是您升级到1.24版本后需要添加到&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;的内容：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

其他皮肤可能并不适应新的[[Manual:Extension registration|皮肤注册]]系统，所以请参阅有关每个皮肤的文档页面，了解如何在遇到问题时正确地注册它。

=== 扩展注册 ===

从MediaWiki 1.25版开始，扩展使用新的[[Manual:Extension registration|扩展注册]]系统。

您之前的&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;会包含这些内容：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

这些可以转换为：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

扩展正在适应使用新的扩展注册系统。
未经调整的扩展应使用旧的安装方式。
有关详细信息，请参阅扩展页面上的安装说明。

=== 其他变量 ===
一些变量可能已过时，或甚至被移除。
将它们放在&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;中通常不会有任何影响。
可以在较新版本中添加新变量，或者某些现有变量更改其类型。
我们通常会尝试为它们使用合理的默认值，并且在类型更改的情况下，向后兼容。
无论如何，请查看发行说明以查看这些更改。

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== 运行更新脚本 ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
您可以通过两种方式升级MediaWiki数据库：从命令行或从Web浏览器升级。如果您具有对服务器的shell访问权限，则建议从命令行进行升级，因为这样可以降低升级过程因超时或连接重置而中断的风险。

该脚本还将尝试下载MediaWiki需要的任何缺少的依赖项。

=== 命令行 ===

访问服务器的命令行或SSH shell或类似命令行。您可以通过SSH连接到服务器来访问命令行。如果您正在使用的本地PC运行Microsoft Windows，则需要使用[http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY]之类的工具来使用SSH。从命令行或命令行管理程序，切换到&lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt;目录并执行[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|升级脚本]]：

 $ php update.php

在Linux服务器上，如果出现错误，请尝试执行相同的命令（&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;）。
注意當您於Windows進行簡易安裝（例如：{{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}）：
首先確定網路伺服器（例如：Apache）和資料庫（例如：MySQL）正在運行。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

您可能会看到一条消息，指出您的PHP版本太旧，而且MediaWiki需要更新的版本。
在该消息之后，更新中止。
此错误的原因是命令行可以使用另一个PHP版本，而不是从Web服务器执行MediaWiki时使用的PHP版本。
当您收到此消息时，您应该检查如果您可以使用其他命令在shell上执行较新的PHP版本： 是''php5''或''php56''。
如果有其他版本可用，如果可用——在哪个名称下，取决于服务器的设置。
如果它不起作用，请询问您的主机提供商，他一定会知道的。

MediaWiki将检查现有架构并更新它以使用新代码，根据需要添加表和列。

{{Note|1=如果使用[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|共享数据库]]，则应该传递&lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt;参数（如果要更新共享表）。否则更新脚本不会触及它们。}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

==== 当发生“ALTER命令对用户拒绝”错误（或类似错误）时应做什么 ====

如果脚本中止了类似于以下的消息：

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

这意味着您应该检查是否在$l文件中（在主目录中）定义了{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}}和{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}。这些是此脚本访问数据库所需的用户和密码。

在某些情况下，即使使用了mysql，似乎也会读取旧的$wgDBmwschema变量（对于Postgres）以更新表名而不是$wgDBname。如果是这种情况，只需删除LocalSettings.php中的$wgDBmwschema定义。

==== 当发生“意外的T_STRING”错误时应做什么 ====

从命令行运行update.php的个人可能会遇到以下错误：

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

从php4运行update.php时会发生此错误。

由提供php4和php5的提供商托管其网站的个人应采取以下步骤：

# 从命令行输入命令whereis php5
#一旦你看清了php5路径的位置，列出php5/bin目录的内容
#一旦确定了php可执行文件的名称（php或php5），输入执行update.php的完整路径

以下是个例子：

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

==== 当发生“register_argc_argv被设定为假”错误时应做什么 ====

您可能遭遇这样的错误：
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# 转到〜/维护。编辑现有的'php.ini'文件，或创建一个。 
# 添加下面一行：

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# 重新运行&lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===Web浏览器===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''参见{{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

如果您的数据库已经很大并且生产率很高，那么您不应该使用Web更新程序，例如因为当达到'''maximum_execution_time'''时，更新过程将超时。在这种情况下，您应该使用命令行界面中的[[update.php]]（而不是来自Web）。究竟什么“太大”取决于您的服务器（例如，它的性能，负载以及PHP的最大执行时间允许脚本运行多长时间）。如果您的wiki对于Web更新程序来说太大而您的托管服务提供商不允许命令行访问，那么您需要将您的wiki迁移到另一个托管帐户，最好是具有shell访问权限的托管帐户。

# 在执行数据库维护之前始终[[Manual:Backing up a wiki|备份]]。
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
#将您的浏览器导航到&lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config /'''&lt;/code&gt;。例如，如果你的wiki位于&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;，那么导航到&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;。
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
# 选择您的语言并点击继续。
#应检测现有安装。按照屏幕上的说明进行升级。&lt;br /&gt;如果要求提供升级密钥，请打开{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}文件并查找分配给{{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}的密钥。

可能会发生Web更新程序似乎不起作用：您可能会看到一个空的Wiki页面，而不是看到初始语言选择屏幕，可能会显示一些错误消息。在这种情况下，您的网络服务器很可能使用重写规则（最有可能是[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|短网址]]），它们不会在''mw-config/''显示更新程序，而是一个维基页面 ''Mw-config/''，大写“M”。在这种情况下，请在更新时重命名“.htaccess”文件。然后，您应该能够访问Web更新程序。

{{Warning|1=如果您使用此方法，请确保在运行升级脚本后'''更改.htaccess文件的名称！''' 否则短URL和可能的其他东西将被破坏！}}

== 测试更新 ==

升级完成后，浏览到Wiki并检查以下操作是否按预期工作：

*查看页面
*编辑页面
*上传文件
*访问[[Special:Version]]并检查显示的版本是否正确以及扩展名是否存在。

==从旧安装中删除剩余文件==
如果您将先前安装的内容复制到服务器另一个文件夹，请确保其已删除或者不能通过web端访问。
重要的是不要让旧的安装程序可被web端访问，因为它完全破坏了升级的目的也让您的服务器易受到攻击。

== 常见问题 ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===更新有多难？===

如果您修改的唯一文件是{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}，并且您要从1.5或更高版本升级，则该过程非常简单。涉及的人力工作量只有几分钟。数据库架构更改将花费与数据库大小成比例的时间，对于具有数百万页的wiki而言可能需要数小时，但对于几千页的更典型大小，通常在几秒钟内完成。

在相同的主版本中進行的次要升級（例如，從{{MW legacy branch number}}.0升級到{{MW legacy release number}}）不需要任何架構更改。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

从1.4或更早版本升级可能很复杂，因为删除了对UTF-8以外的字符集的支持，并且用于存储批量文本的架构已更改。请阅读&lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt;文件中的相关部分。

如果您修改了源代码，并且不希望覆盖您的更改，则升级变得困难。[http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff]、[http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch]、[http://meldmerge.org/ Meld]或[http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge]等工具可能很有用。如果您使用的是非维护扩展，也可能会出现问题。在升级MediaWiki的同时升级扩展程序。

如果您修改了皮肤或使用自定义皮肤，则很可能需要使用新版本的MediaWiki将其调整为再次使用。

{{Tip|1=每次只需将代码添加到MediaWiki:Common.js和MediaWiki:Common.css页面，而不是修补“全局”css和js（JavaScript）文件。由于这些是升级时将重用的数据库的一部分，因此您不必再修补MediaWiki核心文件。}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
===我如何从一个非常老的版本升级？只需一步还是需要很多步？===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;这取决于：'''如果您要从MediaWiki 1.4或更早版本升级'''，则应首先升级到MediaWiki 1.5。如果您要从Latin-1 wiki升级，请使用upgrade1_5.php（在MediaWiki 1.5中找到）将数据库的相关部分转换为UTF-8（$latin需要在$localsettings中设置为true才能使其工作）。接下来，运行update.php，然后将LocalSettings.php中的$legacy选项设置为wiki先前使用的编码（例如，windows-1252）。这基本上是维基百科和其他维基媒体基金会网站从MediaWiki 1.4升级到1.5的方式，请参阅[$noc 相关设置文件（警告：巨大页面！）]和一些[[$wikitech|维基科技相关注释]]。在运行upgrade1.5脚本之前，您可能需要升级到MediaWiki 1.4。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
如果要创建Latin-1 wiki的数据库转储（例如MySQL），请确保{{ll|Manual:Text table|text}}表中&lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt;字段的类型为&lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;，而不是&lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;，以避免字符编码问题。

如果您要从'''MediaWiki 1.5或更新版本'''升级到'''1.35'''，则可以一步升级，从旧版本升级到最新稳定版本。
绝大多数报告以及自动化测试表明，一步完成这项工作就可以了。
如果您无法相信，请阅读[[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|此邮件列表帖子]]。
但请注意，从旧版本更新时，您遇到PHP错误的可能性比从新版本之前的版本升级时更大。
如果您没有跳过版本，无论如何您都会收到这些错误，但这些错误会与每个单独的更新相关联。
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;只有你当你跳过版本时才能同时获得它们。&lt;/span&gt;
这将使升级更加困难，但不要忘记您没有更新到您跳过的中间版本的麻烦！

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

===我是否应该首先备份？===

一个字：是。

答案很长：这取决于①您对数据的重视程度②创建备份的难度以及③您对MySQL维护和管理的信心。 

升级失败可能会使您的数据库处于两个版本之间的不一致状态。
升级期间可能会发生PHP或MySQL错误，导致数据库部分升级。
在这种情况下，有可能通过大量的手工工作以某种方式解决这个问题。
但是，在运行update.php之前放置数据库备份并继续使用它会“更容易”。
否则你可能需要数小时不必要的工作。

恢复通常很复杂。
如果您忽略了备份，然后需要帮助来从与升级相关的损坏中恢复，那么支持论坛上的志愿者不太可能留下深刻的印象。
更好的结果是，如果您可以恢复备份，然后[[phab:maniphest/task/create/|在升级过程中报告相应的MediaWiki项目的错误]]导致损坏。

===我可以保留我的LocalSettings.php么？===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;是的，但您可能需要做一些小改动。$localsettings的格式在很大程度上是向后兼容的。破坏LocalSettings.php兼容性的更改将记录在[[Release notes|发行说明]]的“配置更改”部分中。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

===我的wiki可以在更新时保持在线么？===

一般来说是的，但Git可能暂时（几秒钟）打断它。

如果要在MediaWiki的次要版本之间进行升级，您只需更新源文件即可。

注意：以下假定您具有命令行访问权限。如果要在MediaWiki的主要版本之间进行升级，则首选过程如下：

#将新版MediaWiki解压缩到新目录中
# 准备新目录：从旧目录复制当前的LocalSettings.php，复制任何已安装的扩展和自定义外观（如果有）。检查LocalSettings.php中的{{wg|Logo}}与{{wg|Logos}}设定，并在必要时将徽标文件从旧目录复制到新目录。
#在新版本的发行说明中，查看是否需要对LocalSettings.php进行任何更改。
#通过将以下变量插入旧目录中的LocalSettings.php，将数据库置于只读模式，如果用户在升级过程中尝试编辑，则会看到此消息：&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* 自MediaWiki 1.27以来，这不再有效，它也阻止了运行更新脚本。可以在{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}中找到MediaWiki 1.27以来版本的变通方法。另见{{phabricator|T151833}}。
#在新目录中运行[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|升级脚本]]或Web更新程序。
#将images子目录中的映像从旧目录复制到新目录。
# 交换旧目录和新目录。

===为什么升级？===
:''订阅[[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]]以获取新发行版本的通知。''

因为[[#How hard is it to upgrade?|通常很容易]]，[[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|从你的版本到最新的一步]]以及[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|经过网络]]。

最新版本接收安全修复程序，以保护您的wiki和您的主机免受破坏者的攻击，而旧版本则不会（请参阅{{ll|Version lifecycle}}）。这几十个很好的理由升级！

新的主要版本附带了您可能想要使用的新功能：有关详细信息，请参阅发行说明。如果您需要其他参数来说服您的老板让您从一个非常旧的版本升级，这里有一个摘要：

*由{{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}起，[[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|编辑可以在保存之前预览]]也作为差异。
*由{{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}起，[[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|撤消按钮]]可用。
*由{{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}起，[[Special:NewPages]]上的[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|巡查]]更容易。
*由{{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}起，你可以[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|重命名]]（移动）文件。
*由{{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}起，您可以自动[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|修复双重重定向]]。
* 从￥1版本起可使用{{ll|InstantCommons}}。
*如果你有适当的缓存，因为1.17的{{ll|ResourceLoader}}可以优化页面加载速度。
*自1.17以来，[[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|分类排序有意义！]]（特别是对于非英文字母），{{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}后扩展到68种语言。
*由于{{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}}和{{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}，所有语言和性别的用户都通过接口和[[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|日志]]正确处理（在1.15之前，根本没有性别）。
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}的皮肤系统经过了重新设计，可以更轻松地重复使用自己皮肤中的部分皮肤。
*从[[MediaWiki 1.20]]开始，[[m:Help:Diff差异]]更具可读性。
*在[[MediaWiki_1.21]]和[[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]]中，电子邮件通知变得更加清晰，更具可预测性，使您的wiki更有效。
*自[[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]]以来，破坏战斗（巡查）的时间较少。
*在[[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]]中，密码存储已得到改进，以提高安全性。
*自[[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]]以来，[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|增强的最新更改可用]]
*在[[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]]中，[[ResourceLoader|ResourceLoader机制得到了改进]]
*在[[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]]中，会话管理进行了重新设计，用户身份验证管理完全现代化。 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
*自{{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}以来，Action API得到了重新设计和改进。此外，用户组分配现在可以在可选择的时间段内完成。 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

另外，在{{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}}中我们开始[[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|捆绑一些重要扩展]]，就像一个更好的编辑器和反破坏工具ConfirmEdit和Nuke，在以后的版本中添加了更多内容。
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== 参见 ==

* 格雷格·萨比努·穆雷恩的博客文章提供了一些[http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html 有关指向发行版本升级的详情]。
* 如果您需要帮助，或发生了一些错误的话，可前往[[Project:Support desk]]询问
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - 如果您没有成功的备份
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>saxigoqrukt6rqgmqyiwz3k9gzcs8sz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Installing MediaWiki</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>18173</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402870</id>
      <parentid>5387487</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:40:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make variable names untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14284" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:146--&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:3--&gt; MediaWiki can be difficult to install if you do not have any experience with Apache (web server software), PHP and MySQL/MariaDB (database).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:147--&gt; The [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;#Appendices&lt;/tvar&gt;|Appendices]] section below offers [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;#Alternatives to manual installation&lt;/tvar&gt;|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:148--&gt;
The [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;#Appendices&lt;/tvar&gt;|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Note|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:149--&gt; If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading&lt;/tvar&gt;|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/translate&gt;}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Check the installation requirements == &lt;!--T:150--&gt;

&lt;!--T:151--&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements&lt;/tvar&gt;|installation requirements]].

&lt;!--T:152--&gt;
Make sure to also check the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Release notes}}&lt;/tvar&gt; of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.

== Download the MediaWiki software == &lt;!--T:6--&gt;

&lt;!--T:121--&gt;
Download the MediaWiki tar file from the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Download&lt;/tvar&gt;|official download page]].

&lt;!--T:122--&gt;
Generally, if you're using a production environment, you want to be running the latest stable release, which is &lt;tvar name=1&gt;MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.

== Extract the MediaWiki software == &lt;!--T:136--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; The downloaded file is in &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;.zip&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; or in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file format.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:137--&gt; You need to uncompress this archive file before use.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; You can uncompress the file locally (and then upload via FTP to the server) or directly on your server.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:12--&gt;
On Windows, uncompressing is usually done with software such as &lt;tvar name=7zip&gt;[https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip]&lt;/tvar&gt; (free), &lt;tvar name=winzip&gt;[http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip]&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=winrar&gt;[https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR]&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=izarc&gt;[https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc]&lt;/tvar&gt; (free).
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; On Linux and Mac OS X, you can uncompress the file using the command:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:145--&gt; If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:141--&gt; On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
==Upload files to your web server== &lt;!--T:18--&gt;

&lt;!--T:19--&gt;
If you have not already uploaded the files to your [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Web server&lt;/tvar&gt;|web server]] (or copied, if your web server software runs locally on your &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;localhost&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), do so now.

&lt;!--T:21--&gt;
Upload the files to your web server's web directory either by:

&lt;!--T:22--&gt;
# directly copying the unzipped folder or&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:23--&gt;
# by using an FTP client such as &lt;tvar name=filezilla&gt;[https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla]&lt;/tvar&gt; (Windows, OSX and Linux) or &lt;tvar name=cyberduck&gt;[https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck]&lt;/tvar&gt; (Windows and OSX).
&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:135--&gt; by using software already provided by your [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services&lt;/tvar&gt;|hosting service]], such as the ''cPanel File Manager''&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:20--&gt;
If your upload tool has a &quot;change file names to lowercase&quot; option, then you must disable this.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:24--&gt; If you use the Apache HTTPD web server, the correct directory is specified in your &lt;tvar name=conf&gt;&lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file in the &lt;tvar name=3&gt;[https://httpd.apache.org/docs/current/mod/core.html#documentroot &lt;code&gt;DocumentRoot&lt;/code&gt;]&lt;/tvar&gt; directive.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:153--&gt; By default, this is &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; or {{&lt;tvar name=2&gt;tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:142--&gt; The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; In Debian and Ubuntu, the file for Apache server settings and directories is &lt;tvar name=conf&gt;&lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:143--&gt; In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Rename the uploaded folder to whatever you would like to have in the URL.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; If your web server is running as &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; for example, renaming to &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory would mean you would access your wiki at &lt;tvar name=index&gt;&lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:29--&gt; Do not use &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;/wiki/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; if you want to set it up as a [[&lt;tvar name=3&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL&lt;/tvar&gt;|Short URL]] after running the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script&lt;/tvar&gt;|installation script]].&lt;/translate&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Set up the database == &lt;!--T:33--&gt;

&lt;!--T:46--&gt;
MediaWiki's [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script&lt;/tvar&gt;|installation script]] will ask you for a database name and database username, so MediaWiki can store the content of the wiki.

&lt;!--T:34--&gt;
If you already have a database server and know the password for the &quot;root&quot; (admin) user, skip to the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;#Run the installation script&lt;/tvar&gt;|#Run the installation script]] section below.

&lt;!--T:36--&gt;
If you don't know the password for the root user, for example if you are on a [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services&lt;/tvar&gt;|hosted server]], you will have to create a new database before you run the MediaWiki installation script in the next section.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:37--&gt; SQLite, MariaDB/MySQL, and PostgreSQL are supported databases.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:115--&gt; If you're unsure which database to choose, use MariaDB.&lt;/translate&gt;

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:144--&gt;
No further setup is required for [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite&lt;/tvar&gt;|SQLite]] if the &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; On the SQLite installation page, choose a database name (which can be anything) and the SQLite database directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:43--&gt; For the database directory, the installer will attempt to use a subdirectory outside of the document root and create it if needed.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:44--&gt; If this directory is not safe (for example, web-readable), change it manually to avoid making it accessible to everyone on the web.&lt;/translate&gt;

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:48--&gt; See the corresponding documentation of your hosting provider.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:49--&gt; Alternatively, contact your [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services&lt;/tvar&gt;|hosting provider]] to have them create an account for you.&lt;/translate&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:72--&gt;
Only if your database is not running on the same server as your web server, you need to give the appropriate web server hostname (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;mediawiki.example.com&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; in the example below):
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:105--&gt; MySQL/MariaDB logs all queries in a history file. It will include the database password for the user account.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:106--&gt; If this concerns you, delete and disable the &lt;tvar name=history&gt;&lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file after running these queries by following the [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/mysql-logging.html#mysql-logging-history-file&lt;/tvar&gt; MySQL documentation].&lt;/translate&gt;}}

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:74--&gt; If you are using [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PostgreSQL&lt;/tvar&gt;|PostgreSQL]], you will need to either have a database and user created for you, or supply the name of a PostgreSQL user with &quot;superuser&quot; privileges to the configuration form.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:75--&gt; Often, this is the database user named &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;postgres&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:154--&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and a database named &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; owned by the user named &lt;tvar name=3&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:80--&gt; (then enter the database password)&lt;/translate&gt;
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:81--&gt;
or as superuser (default postgres) execute the following commands at the database prompt:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:82--&gt;
Beware of the [[&lt;tvar name=phab&gt;phab:tag/postgreSQL&lt;/tvar&gt;|list of known issues when running MediaWiki with PostgreSQL]].
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Run the installation script == &lt;!--T:110--&gt;

&lt;!--T:84--&gt;
Next, complete the installation of MediaWiki by going to the URL of your MediaWiki installation in your web browser: Follow the instructions in &lt;tvar name=man&gt;{{ll|Manual:Config script}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.

==Further configuration== &lt;!--T:116--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:155--&gt; Additional configuration&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:156--&gt; Wiki administration&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
== Keep up to date! == &lt;!--T:88--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:90--&gt;
Once installed, make sure you stay up to date with releases, and keep your server secure!&lt;/translate&gt;
{{Clickable button 2|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:89--&gt; Subscribe to the MediaWiki release announcements mailing list.&lt;/translate&gt;|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Appendices == &lt;!--T:157--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;translate&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation === &lt;!--T:158--&gt;

&lt;!--T:159--&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:160--&gt; [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances&lt;/tvar&gt;|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:161--&gt; [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services&lt;/tvar&gt;|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/translate&gt;
:{{Note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:66--&gt; Hosting services which provide automatical installation of applications such as MediaWiki may offer outdated versions or have other issues. If you encounter problems, it ''does not'' mean that you cannot install MediaWiki. It means that you should install MediaWiki manually.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:140--&gt;
See also the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|comparison of distribution options}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.

=== System-specific instructions  === &lt;!--T:162--&gt;

&lt;!--T:163--&gt;
The pages listed on &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:OS specific help}}&lt;/tvar&gt; give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:164--&gt; However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:165--&gt; First consult &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}}&lt;/tvar&gt; (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;translate&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis === &lt;!--T:166--&gt;

&lt;!--T:167--&gt;
Refer to [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration&lt;/tvar&gt;|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;translate&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database === &lt;!--T:168--&gt;

&lt;!--T:169--&gt;
Refer to [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration&lt;/tvar&gt;|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].

== See also == &lt;!--T:94--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>jwzq13kr4i9ze1wk1js5l3dgo0cc42u</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Special pages/ja</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>18198</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402384</id>
      <parentid>5370901</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T03:53:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="47891" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{ExtensionTypes}}
[[File:MediaWiki-extensions-icon.svg|125px|alt=MediaWiki extensions|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
'''特別ページ'''は、特定の機能を求められたときにソフトウェアが作成したページです。 
例えば特定の外部サイトにひとつ以上リンクがあるページをすべて抽出させることも、利用者が提供したフィードバックをまとめたフォームの作成もできます。 
特別ページは固有の[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Namespace|名前空間]] ('''''特別:''''') に置かれ、他のページと違って直接、編集することはできません。 
{{ll|Developers}} が特別ページを開設することも可能です。 
利用者はこれらのページにアクセスでき、すべての特別ページをまとめた一覧は通常は [[Special:SpecialPages]] にあります。 
特別ページの中には、特別な利用者権限やアクセス権がないと利用できものがあります。 
あるいは特別ページの一覧には表示されず、ウィキで内部的に使用されるだけのものもあります。

== 全般的な情報 ==
MediaWiki に付属する特別ページはすべて &lt;code&gt;SpecialSomename.php&lt;/code&gt; という形式のファイル名であり、&lt;code&gt;includes/specials&lt;/code&gt; ディレクトリに配置されます。
コアの特別ページは、MediaWiki に読み込ませるために、&lt;code&gt;includes/specialpage/SpecialPageFactory.php&lt;/code&gt; にあるコア リストに登録する必要があります。
通常、サードパーティ製の特別ページは個別ファイルの属する&lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;ディレクトリか、もしくはさらに大きな拡張機能の一部として置かれます。 
どの特別ページも &lt;code&gt;includes/specialpage/SpecialPage.php&lt;/code&gt; で定義されているクラス {{class doclink|SpecialPage}} を継承します。 
新しい特別ページを作成する際には、その特別ページにアクセスするのに必要な利用者権限を定義する必要があります。 
利用者権限の定義により、特に[[Special:SpecialPages|特別ページ]]に表示するか、その他のページの下位に置くことを許可するか定義します。

また特別ページ固有の名称は、ウィキごとに変更できます。  
一般形式の「特別:ページ名」の「特別」も「ページ名」も、どちらもカスタマイズできます。  
「特別」の仮の {{ll|Manual:Namespaces|namespace}} は他言語に翻訳可能です。  
翻訳した名前空間の名称はこのウィキに「{{ns:special|特別}}」として、ウィキテキストで&lt;nowiki&gt;{{ns:special}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;に記述してください。  
特別ページの属名を ID にすると、'''名称'''はシステム・メッセージでもサイトの使用言語で定義し直せます。

特別ページにより、入力を許可するものとしないものがあります。  
一例として[[Special:Export|ページの書き出し]]の場合、ユーザーは[[Special:Export/Sun]]により特定のページを定義できます。  
複雑な指定を許可する特別ページの場合は、他のパラメーターをURLの[[W:Query string|クエリ文字列]]に送って処理します。例：https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=Special:Recentchanges&amp;days=3&amp;limit=250 （「最近の更新」のオプションで
最近 3 日間の更新を最大 250 件表示）

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Special pages|特別ページ]]の作成方法は何種類もありますが、公式の {{ll|Manual:Extensions|extensions}} の大部分が採用する下記の方法に従うよう推奨します。 また新設した特別ページの 'specialpage' には必ず著作権ブロックを含めるようお願いします。詳細は &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgExtensionCredits|$wgExtensionCredits}}&lt;/code&gt; を参照してください。
* 他の人が作成した特別ページに気づくように、{{ll|Category:Special page extensions}} に追加するのをお忘れなく。
* この方法は PHP5 以降で MediaWiki を実行したときのみ有効です。PHPの版は新しくても旧版の MediaWiki をご使用でしたら、{{ll|Manual:Upgrading|upgrade MediaWiki}} をお願いします。
* 特別ページは、$wgOut-&gt;allowClickjacking();を適用しない限り、フレーム化できません。
}}

==特別ページの基本のテンプレート==
{{ombox|text=MediaWiki 1.25 で拡張機能を読み込む[[Manual:Extension registration|新しい方法]]を採用しました。サポートしていない旧版の MediaWiki については[https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=Manual:Special_pages&amp;oldid=2331671 過去の改訂版]を参照してください。}}

一般に、特別ページの拡張機能の要件は、以下の 3 つのファイルです:

* MediaWiki の開始時に毎回読み込む、小さな設定ファイル
* コードの集まりであるファイル
* 地域化ファイル

MediaWiki のコーディング規約の定義

*&lt;code&gt;MyExtension/extension.json&lt;/code&gt; - 設定ファイル
*&lt;code&gt;MyExtension/includes/Special.php&lt;/code&gt; - 特別ページのコード
*&lt;code&gt;i18n/*.json&lt;/code&gt; - {{ll|localisation file}} ファイル。

これらのファイルを一括して MediaWiki の &lt;code&gt;extensions/&lt;/code&gt; に作った新しいディレクトリに保存します。

特別ページ ファイルの名前には、拡張機能の名称を対応させる必要があります。{{ll|Extension:Gadgets}} の例だと &lt;code&gt;SpecialGadgets.php&lt;/code&gt; が対応しています。
もし作成した拡張機能が複数の特別ページを採用するなら、名前も複数、必要です。

下記のサンプルは特別ページが'''MyExtension'''という名前です。

リストのファイルを作成したら拡張機能を有効にするため、次の定義文を'''LocalSettings.php'''に書き加えます。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'MyExtension' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{anchor|The Setup File}}
===設定ファイル===

&lt;code&gt;MyExtension/extension.json&lt;/code&gt;の設定ファイルの例
{{#tag:syntaxhighlight|
{
	&quot;name&quot;: &quot;MyExtension&quot;,
	&quot;version&quot;: &quot;0.0.0&quot;,
	&quot;author&quot;: [
		&quot;Your Name&quot;
	],
	&quot;url&quot;: &quot;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:MyExtension&quot;,
	&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-desc&quot;,
	&quot;license-name&quot;: &quot;MIT&quot;,
	&quot;type&quot;: &quot;other&quot;,
	&quot;AutoloadNamespaces&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki\\Extension\\MyExtension\\&quot;: &quot;src/&quot;
	},
	&quot;SpecialPages&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtension&quot;: &quot;MediaWiki\\Extension\\MyExtension\\Special&quot;
	},
	&quot;MessagesDirs&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtension&quot;: [
			&quot;i18n&quot;
		]
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2,
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= {{MW legacy branch number}}.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 5.6&quot;
		},
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;dependendExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
|lang=json}}

このファイルで登録する項目には重要なものも任意のものもあります。

* MediaWiki\Extension\MyExtension\Special クラスの場所
* 地域化ファイルの保存先
* 新設した特別ページ名とクラス名

{{anchor|The Special Page File}}
===特別ページのファイル===
ファイル本体 (&lt;code&gt;MyExtension/src/Special.php&lt;/code&gt;) には必ず特別ページあるいはそれ自体のサブクラスを最低1件、含むこと。 
このファイルはその特別ページを誰かが呼び出すたびに自動で読み込まれます。 
次の例ではサブクラス SpecialMyExtension を実行します。

最初のパラメーターで特別ページを名付けるため、&lt;code&gt;__construct()&lt;/code&gt; コンストラクタは必須。

&lt;code&gt;execute()&lt;/code&gt; は特別ページにアクセスがあったときに呼び出される main 関数。  
この関数は、関数 {{phpi|SpecialPage::execute()}} をオーバーライドします。 
現在のタイトルの下位ページのコンポーネントである、単体のパラメーター&lt;code&gt;$par&lt;/code&gt;を渡します。  
例えば誰かが[[Special:MyExtension/blah]]のリンクをたどると、&lt;code&gt;$par&lt;/code&gt;に「blah」が入ります。

ウィキテキストと HTML は &lt;code&gt;$wgOut&lt;/code&gt; を介して走らせます。直接、ウィキの UI を操作する間、'print' 文も 'echo' 文も使用しないでください。

ただし特別ページを、カスタムの XML またはバイナリ出力を得るためのアクセスポイントとして使用する場合は、{{ll|Taking over output in your special page}} を参照してください。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
namespace MediaWiki\Extension\MyExtension;
class SpecialMyExtension extends \SpecialPage {
	function __construct() {
		parent::__construct( 'MyExtension' );
	}

	function execute( $par ) {
		$request = $this-&gt;getRequest();
		$output = $this-&gt;getOutput();
		$this-&gt;setHeaders();

		# リクエストデータの取得先は例えば
		$param = $request-&gt;getText( 'param' );

		# 実行する内容
		# ...
		$wikitext = 'Hello world!';
		$output-&gt;addWikiTextAsInterface( $wikitext );
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{anchor|The localisation file}}

=== 地域化ファイル ===

{{anchor|The Messages/Internationalization File}}

:''翻訳方法は{{ll|Help:System message#Adding new messages}}を参照してください。''

特別ページはすべて、&lt;code&gt;'My Extension'&lt;/code&gt;のようにタイトルを定義します。

* タイトルは拡張機能のページで{{tag|title|open}}と{{tag|h1|open}}の要素として、また[[Special:Specialpages|特別ページ]]でも使われます。
* 特別ページと拡張機能の説明になっていれば、どんなタイトルでもかまいません。
* タイトルを定義するのはメッセージで、その構成はキーと値のペアで構成されます。キーも&lt;code&gt;'myextension'&lt;/code&gt;も、英文の小文字の''必要があります''。

&lt;code&gt;MyExtension/i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt;に置く地域化ファイルの一例。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@metadata&quot;: {
		&quot;authors&quot;: [
			&quot;&lt;your username&gt;&quot;
		]
	},
	&quot;myextension&quot;: &quot;My Extension&quot;,
	&quot;myextension-desc&quot;: &quot;Adds the MyExtension functionality.&quot;,
	&quot;myextension-summary&quot;: &quot;On this special page, do this simple thing and earn wonders.&quot;,
	&quot;group-myextensionrole&quot;: &quot;Role of myextension&quot;,
	&quot;group-myextensionrole-member&quot;: &quot;Member of role of myextension&quot;,
	&quot;grouppage-myextensionrole&quot;: &quot;{{ns:project}}:Role of myextension&quot;,
	&quot;action-myextension&quot;: &quot;XYZ doing.&quot;,
	&quot;right-myextension&quot;: &quot;to do xyz&quot;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;code&gt;i18n/qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; にある[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:System message#Message documentation|メッセージの説明文書]]。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@metadata&quot;: {
		&quot;authors&quot;: [
			&quot;&lt;your username&gt;&quot;
		]
	},
	&quot;myextension&quot;: &quot;The name of the extension's entry in Special:SpecialPages&quot;,
	&quot;myextension-desc&quot;: &quot;{{desc}}&quot;,
	&quot;myextension-summary&quot;: &quot;Description appearing on top of Special:MyExtension.&quot;,
	&quot;action-myextension&quot;: &quot;{{doc-action|myextension}}&quot;,
	&quot;right-myextension&quot;: &quot;{{doc-right|myextension}}&quot;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

ID は頭文字（最初の1文字）から小文字のみで表記していること、ID の文字列をコードで記すには、スペース（空白）に代わってアンダーバー（_）を使うこと。

-summary メッセージは必須ではありません。 
親クラスが自動で生成すると特別ページの最上部に表示し、通常はユーザーの手続きを明示的に解説します。 
その内容を定義しなければ、ウィキ管理者がそのウィキでカスタマイズするまで実行されません。

{{anchor|The Aliases File}}
=== 別名ファイル ===
特別ページの別名を作成することで、その特別ページ名を国際化する方法もあります。下記の例で使用するファイルは「MyExtension.i18n.alias.php」です。
特別ページ&lt;code&gt;MyExtension&lt;/code&gt;に''別名''を登録することで、ドイツ語版では&lt;code&gt;.../Special:My Extension&lt;/code&gt;と&lt;code&gt;.../Spezial:Meine_Erweiterung&lt;/code&gt;からアクセス可能にしました。

&lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;に別名を付ける。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
...
	&quot;ExtensionMessagesFiles&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtensionAlias&quot;: &quot;MyExtension.i18n.alias.php&quot;
	},
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

特別ページ&lt;code&gt;MyExtension.i18n.alias.php&lt;/code&gt;に別名をつける。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
/**
 * Aliases for myextension
 *
 * @file
 * @ingroup Extensions
 */

$specialPageAliases = [];

/** English
 * @author &lt;あなたの利用者名を入力&gt;
 */
$specialPageAliases['en'] = [
	'MyExtension' =&gt; [ 'MyExtension', 'My Extension' ],
];

/** Deutsch
 * @author &lt;あなたの利用者名を入力&gt;
 */
$specialPageAliases['de'] = [
	'MyExtension' =&gt; [ 'MeineErweiterung', 'Meine Erweiterung' ],
];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

ここでも ID 中にスペース（空白）を用いる場合は、アンダーバー（_）を代入します。

ページのヘッダーとリンクの処理は、通常のページと同じ規則に従います。

&lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgCapitalLinks|$wgCapitalLinks}}&lt;/code&gt; が正の場合、小文字を大文字変換し、アンダーバーはスペース (空白) として表示します。

例えば拡張機能を例外なくすべて&lt;code&gt;my_extension&lt;/code&gt;で定義したと仮定し、上記を&lt;code&gt;'my_extension' =&gt; 'My extension'&lt;/code&gt;で表現することも可能です。

その場合、英語の連想配列においてSpecialPageを識別する文字列（この例では&lt;code&gt;MyExtension&lt;/code&gt;）は''同時に''有効なタイトルでもあることに注意します。

あるいはまた、{{phpi|$specialPageAliases['en']['MyExtension']}}の最初の要素はキーと同一（&lt;code&gt;'MyExtension'&lt;/code&gt;）の''必要があります'' ! さもないと[[Special:SpecialPages|特別ページ]]はページを一覧に出力しません。

{{anchor|Special page group}}
====特別ページ群====

サブクラスでSpecialPage::getGroupName()をオーバーライドすると、その特別ページを[[Special:SpecialPages]]でどの群の下位に表示するか指定できます。 

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
    /**
     * 特別ページをSpecial:SpecialPagesで表示する場所を指定するには、親ページをオーバーライドしてください。
     * 既定値は 'other' です。既定値のままでよければ、オーバーライドは不要です。
     * 'media'を指定するとシステム・インターフェース&lt;code&gt;specialpages-group-media&lt;/code&gt; を適用します。英語では'Media reports and uploads' （メディアのレポートと読み込み）と訳出します。
     * 
     * @return string
     */
    function getGroupName() {
        return 'media';
    }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

よく使われる値は「'login'」「'maintenance'」「'media'」「'other'」「'pagetools'」「'redirects'」「'users'」です。  
承認された設定値は&lt;nowiki&gt;Special:AllMessages&lt;/nowiki&gt; ('''specialpages-group'''を検索) もしくは&lt;nowiki&gt;Special:SpecialPages?uselang=qqx&lt;/nowiki&gt;を開き仮の言語「qqx」を使ってウィキをブラウジング) を開いて、見出しを検索すると確認できます。  
インターフェースのメッセージ「'specialpages-group-media'」を使用するには、「'media'」という用語を設定します。

ご利用の特別ページでpreconfigured見出しのどのパターンにも当てはまらない場合は、新しい見出しを地域化ファイルに追加して使用できます。詳細は[[#The localisation file|地域化ファイル]]を参照してください。)

地域化ファイルには、MediaWikiと同梱の標準ページグループの一覧があります。例えば英語のメッセージの一覧は&lt;code&gt;languages/i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt;) に収納してあり、冒頭は&lt;code&gt;specialpages-group-&lt;/code&gt;で始まります。 
自分の特別ページを&lt;code&gt;users&lt;/code&gt;配下に分類するには、メッセージは&lt;code&gt;specialpages-group-users&lt;/code&gt;となります。 
このキーの値は例えば&lt;code&gt;Users and rights&lt;/code&gt;のように、そのカテゴリ名として表示される文字列となります。

もし自分の特別ページが既存のカテゴリのどれにも当てはまらないと思える場合は、いつでも新規に作成できます。 
拡張機能の地域化ファイルを開き、&lt;code&gt;messages&lt;/code&gt;配列に対応する新しいキーを挿入するだけで処理できます。 
この例では&lt;code&gt;gamification&lt;/code&gt;グループを以下のとおり定義しています。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
    &quot;myextension&quot;: &quot;My Extension&quot;,
	&quot;myextension-desc&quot;: &quot;Adds the MyExtension functionality.&quot;,
	&quot;myextension-summary&quot;: &quot;On this special page, do this simple thing and earn wonders&quot;,
	&quot;specialpages-group-gamification&quot;: &quot;Gamification&quot;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

こうして自分のクラス定義でメソッド&lt;code&gt;SpecialPage::getGroupName()&lt;/code&gt;の返り値を&lt;code&gt;gamification&lt;/code&gt;にしたと仮定し、[[Special:SpecialPages]]をリロードして新しいカテゴリを確認します。

== その他の重要なファイル ==

===SpecialPage.php===

{{anchor|Constructor}}
====コンストラクター====
コンストラクターは[[:ja:多重定義|多重定義]]して利用者自身のデータを初期化することができますが、多重定義をする主な理由はSpecialPageクラス自体の挙動を変更するためです。 
子クラスから基本クラスのコンストラクターを呼び出すときは、以下の引数を利用できます。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
function __construct( $name = '', $restriction = '', $listed = true );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

* ''string'' &lt;code&gt;$name&lt;/code&gt; リンクやURLで表示される特別ページの名称
* ''string'' &lt;code&gt;$restriction&lt;/code&gt; 「&quot;block&quot;」や「&quot;delete&quot;」など[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights|利用者権限]]が必要です。[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special_pages#Restricting_page_access|制限つきページのアクセス]]も参照してください。
* ''boolean'' &lt;code&gt;$listed&lt;/code&gt; 当該ページが特別ページ:特別ページに掲載されているかどうか

====&lt;code&gt;SpecialPage-&gt;setHeaders()&lt;/code&gt;====

これにより OutputPage のオブジェクト &lt;code&gt;$wgOut&lt;/code&gt; をファイル名と特別ページの説明で初期化します。
常にexecute()メソッドから呼び出します。

====&lt;code&gt;SpecialPage-&gt;getOutput()&lt;/code&gt;====

このメソッドが返すOutputPageオブジェクトは、以下の方法でアクセスができます。 
サンプルコードのとおり、以下を使用

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$output = $this-&gt;getOutput();
$output-&gt;addWikiTextAsInterface( 'Hello, World' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

上記は廃止予定の &lt;code&gt;$wgOut&lt;/code&gt; グローバル変数の代用です。

====&lt;code&gt;SpecialPage-&gt;getRequest()&lt;/code&gt;====

このメソッドが返すWebRequestオブジェクトは、以下の方法でアクセスできます。 
サンプルコードのとおり、以下を使用

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$request = $this-&gt;getRequest();
$myparam = $request-&gt;getText( 'myparam' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

廃止予定の {{$wg|Request}} グローバル変数の代替

====&lt;code&gt;SpecialPage-&gt;including()&lt;/code&gt;====

特別ページによっては、他のページ内から取り込むことができます。 
例えば、ページに &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:RecentChanges}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; を追加すると、ページの既存のコンテンツ内に最近の変更のリストが挿入されます。

別のWebページから特別なページを含めることができるのは、そのページをコンストラクターに含めることができると宣言した場合のみです。  
これを行うには、親クラスの初期化後に &lt;code&gt;__construct()&lt;/code&gt; メソッドに以下を追加します。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$this-&gt;mIncludable = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

IncludableSpecialPage クラスを拡張するものとして特別ページクラスを定義することもできます。

SpecialPage-&gt;including() 関数は、特別なページが呼び出されているコンテキストを示す真偽値を返します。別のWebページの場合はfalse、別のWebページ内からインクルードされている場合は true です。 
通常、ページが含まれている場合は、プレゼンテーションをいくらか削除する必要があります。

{{anchor|execute}}
====&lt;code&gt;SpecialPage-&gt;execute()&lt;/code&gt;====

これは子クラスがオーバーロードするべき関数です。 
これは、通常は暗号的に &lt;code&gt;$par&lt;/code&gt; と呼ばれる単一のパラメーターを渡します（ユーザーが特別なページにフィードできるパラメーターであるため、$parameter の略です）。 
このパラメーターは、現在のページ名の下位ページ コンポーネントです。 
たとえば、誰かが [[Special:MyExtension/blah]] へのリンクをたどると、&lt;code&gt;$par&lt;/code&gt;には「blah」が含まれます。

===== ヘルプ ページ =====

{{MW 1.25|and later}}

MediaWiki.orgに [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:PD help|ヘルプページ]] を追加すると便利です。ここで [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:Language policy|翻訳可能]] になります。 
利用者がヘルプページを確実に見つけられるようにするには、特別なページで問題のヘルプページをリンクすることをお勧めします。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$this-&gt;addHelpLink( 'Help:Extension:MyExtension' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===OutputPage.php===

OutputPage.php には、タイプ &lt;code&gt;OutputPage&lt;/code&gt; のオブジェクトのクラス定義が含まれています。 
このクラスのオブジェクトは、特別ページ から次を使用して取得できます。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$output = $this-&gt;getOutput();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

もちろん、変数名 $output は任意です。 
何と呼んでも、これはブラウザに出力を送信する方法であるため、最も使用する変数です。（いいえ、&lt;code&gt;echo&lt;/code&gt; または &lt;code&gt;print&lt;/code&gt; は使用しません。） 
どこかで使用したい場合、グローバル変数を宣言します。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
function randomFunction() {
        $output = $this-&gt;getOutput();
	$output-&gt;addHTML( '&lt;b&gt;This is not a pipe...&lt;/b&gt;' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

必要に応じて、特別ページ 拡張機能のさまざまなメソッドで複数の OutputPage オブジェクトを作成できます。 
それらは、実行された順序で出力に追加されます。

&lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:OutputPage.php|includes/OutputPage.php}}&lt;/code&gt; を表示することで OutputPage クラスを検査できます（実際、これらはすべて検査できます。）が、必ず知っておくべきメソッドがいくつかあります。

====&lt;code&gt;OutputPage-&gt;addHTML()&lt;/code&gt;====
基本的に、&lt;code&gt;echo&lt;/code&gt; の迅速で汚い代替品です。 
それはあなたの入力を受け取り、それをバッファに追加します:質問はありません。 
以下の操作では、&lt;code&gt;$action&lt;/code&gt; に利用者データが含まれている場合、XSS、邪悪なもの、または[[:ja:サタン|サタン]]の spawn が簡単に挿入される可能性があります。 
信頼できる出力を構築するには、エスケープ（php関数htmlentitiesなど）またはXMLビルダークラスを使用することをお勧めします。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$output-&gt;addHTML( '&lt;form action=&quot;'.$action.'&quot; method=&quot;post&quot;&gt;' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

====&lt;code&gt;OutputPage-&gt;addWikiText()&lt;/code&gt;====
ほとんどの出力では、この関数を使用する必要があります。 
これは少し黒魔術の機能です。ウィキテキストが入り、HTMLが出て、その間にたくさんの難解なコードと悪魔の召喚が行われます。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$output-&gt;addWikiText(&quot;This is some ''lovely'' [[wikitext]] that will '''get''' parsed nicely.&quot;);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

注目に値するのは、パーサーがチャンクをまとまりのある全体として表示し、それに応じて段落を表示することです。あれは...

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$output-&gt;addWikiText( '* Item 1' );
$output-&gt;addWikiText( '* Item 2' );
$output-&gt;addWikiText( '* Item 3' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

おそらく意図されていなかった、それぞれ1つのアイテムを含む3つのリストを出力します。

{{Warning|1=もしご利用の特別ページを他のページに読みこむつもりなら、おそらくは&lt;code&gt;addWikiText()&lt;/code&gt;の使用を避けたほうがよいでしょう (あるいは他のパーサーを呼び出す関数も使用外に該当。関数 ($this-&gt;msg()) を解析するメッセージ関連関数は最近のバージョンのMediaWikiに影響しないため除外されます。) あるページに別のページが含まれている場合、[http://www.ehartwell.com/TechNotes/MediaWikiExtensionParserDebug.htm MediaWikiのバグ]が原因で ([[phab:T18129]]) そのページ上に後から特定の特別ページを内包したため、既存ページすべてに悪影響を与えてしまい、UNIQ10842e596cbb71daのような文字列が表示されます。}}

しかしながら注意点として、システムメッセージの挿入と、解析したウィキ適すとの用に処理したいだけの場合、{{phpi|$this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addHtml( $this-&gt;msg( 'key-of-message' )-&gt;parse() )}}のようなコードを使用してください。 
これは、上記で取上げた入れ子のパーサコールでは問題となりません。

=====回避手段 #1=====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Important: these work arounds are only needed if you are making a transcludable special page. Normal special pages do not need these.
&lt;/div&gt;

回避策として、別のパーサーオブジェクトを使用して拡張機能でウィキテキストをHTMLに変換してから、&lt;code&gt;addHTML()&lt;/code&gt;. を使用することができます。 
例:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgOut-&gt;addHTML( $this-&gt;sandboxParse( &quot;Here's some '''formatted''' text.&quot; ) );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# これが他の特別なページコードと同じクラス内にあると仮定します。
function sandboxParse( $wikiText ) {
	$myParser = new Parser();
        $user = $this-&gt;getUser();
        $title = self::getTitleFor('YourCanonicalSpecialPageName');
	$myParserOptions = ParserOptions::newFromUser( $user );
	$result = $myParser-&gt;parse( $wikiText, $title, $myParserOptions );
	return $result-&gt;getText();
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=====回避手段 #2=====
上記を試してみたところ、参照読み込みされたテキスト内のすべてのタグに同じ問題が適用されることがわかりました。 
これは多くの拡張機能では問題になりませんが、私が書いていた拡張機能は、機能の一部として別のページのウィキテキストを表示することを目的としていたため、これは問題でした。

特別なページを変換するページを解析するプロセスは次のように思われます。

# &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MyExtension}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; を[[Strip marker|UNIQ-QINUマーカー]]に置き換えます（SpecialPageの出力はすぐに出力できるHTMLであることが期待されるため）
# 上記のように、タグを[[Strip marker|QINUマーカー]]に置き換えます
# ウィキテキストからHTMLまで他のすべてを解析します。
# 1回のパスで、すべての[[Strip marker|QINUマーカー]]をそれぞれの保存された値に置き換えます。

ただし、「非」特殊ページを変換するページを解析するプロセスは、明らかに次のようになります。

# &lt;nowiki&gt;{{:Normal Article Name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; または &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Template Name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; を参照読み込みされたページのコンテンツに置き換えます（参照読み込みされたページには解析されていないウィキテキストが含まれているため）
# 上記のように、タグを[[Strip marker|QINUマーカー]]に置き換えます
# ウィキテキストからHTMLまで他のすべてを解析します。
# 1回のパスで、すべての[[Strip marker|QINUマーカー]]をそれぞれの保存された値に置き換えます。

問題は、前のケースでは、SpecialPageのwikiテキストの解析に最後のQINUデコードステップがないため（なぜ？）、すべての[[Strip marker|QINUマーカー]]がデコードされないままになっていることです。 
（これは、ホストページのウィキテキストコンテンツに直接貼り付けられて解析されるウィキテキストページのトランスクルージョンを呼び出すために同じ構文を使用することによる残り物である可能性があります。これは、まったく解析してはならないSpecialPageのトランスクルージョンを呼び出すために使用されます。「待機、これは特別ページです。QINUに置き換えてください」と決定するコードがある場合は常に、QINU置換を行う前に、追加のunstripGeneralを実行する必要があります。）
{{void|1=
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wherever the code is that decides &quot;wait, this is a special page -- replace it with a QINU&quot;, it should be doing the extra unstripGeneral before doing the QINU substitution.)&lt;/span&gt;
}}

だから私はちょうど次のことをしました-この行の後に:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$htOut = $wgParser-&gt;recursiveTagParse( $iText );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
...私はこれらの行を追加しました（2番目の行は最初の行の関数定義がそれを推奨しているためだけです）：
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$htOut = $wgParser-&gt;mStripState-&gt;unstripGeneral( $htOut );
$htOut = $wgParser-&gt;mStripState-&gt;unstripNoWiki( $htOut );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
もちろん、これを文書化したので、悲劇的な欠陥を見つけて、本当に愚かだと感じます...しかし、それが機能しているように見える限り、ここでそれを書き留めなければなりませんでした。 
（回避策＃1の問題に注意することも重要です。） 
また、私はこれを MediaWiki 1.10.1 でのみテストしました。 
問題は MediaWiki 1.14 でもまだ存在しますが、この解決策は機能する場合と機能しない場合があります。 
--[[User:Woozle|Woozle]] 18:26, 9 April 2009 (UTC)

====&lt;code&gt;OutputPage-&gt;showErrorPage()&lt;/code&gt;====
エラーページが表示されます。 
引数 &lt;code&gt;$title&lt;/code&gt; と &lt;code&gt;$msg&lt;/code&gt; は、テキストではなく $this-&gt;msg() へのキーを指定します。 
例:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$output-&gt;showErrorPage( 'error', 'badarticleerror' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

*「error」は、テキスト「'''{{int|error}}'''」を指します。
*「badarticleerror」は、テキスト「'''{{int|badarticleerror}}'''」を指します。

メッセージオブジェクトを指定したり、パラメータを追加したりすることもできます。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$output-&gt;showErrorPage( 'error', 'badarticleerror', [ 'param1', 'param2' ] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$messageObject = new Message(...);
...
$output-&gt;showErrorPage( 'error', $messageObject );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$titleMessageObject = new Message(...);
$messageObject = new Message(...);
...
$output-&gt;showErrorPage( $titleMessageObject, $messageObject );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===WebRequest.php===
{{manual|WebRequest.php|WebRequest}} クラスは、GET配列とPOST配列から情報を取得するために使用されます。 
スーパーグローバルに直接アクセスするよりも、これを使用することをお勧めします。
WebRequestオブジェクトには、{{ll|RequestContext}} を使用して拡張機能からアクセスできます。

===Database.php===
MediaWikiには、{{manual|Database.php|\Wikimedia\Rdbms\Database}} クラスを使用してデータベースと対話するための便利な関数とラッパーがたくさんあります。 
また、興味深い負荷分散スキームも用意されています。 
これらのラッパーを使用することをお勧めします。 
すべての便利な機能の完全なリストについては、&lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:Database.php|Database.php}}&lt;/code&gt; をチェックしてください。これらのドキュメントでは、明らかでない警告についてのみ説明しているためです。 
{{ll|Manual:Database access}} を参照してください。

===User.php===
{{manual|User.php|User}} クラスは、システム上のユーザーを表すために使用されます。 
SpecialPage-&gt;getUser() は、現在ログインしている利用者の User オブジェクトを取得するために使用する必要があります。
グローバル &lt;code&gt;$wgUser&lt;/code&gt; の使用は非推奨です

===Title.php===
タイトルは、Wiki内のページの名前を表します。 
MediaWikiはページ名に対してあらゆる種類の楽しいエスケープと特殊なケースロジックを実行するため、これは便利です。したがって、独自のタイトルをURLに変換する関数をロールする代わりに、ページ名を使用してTitleオブジェクトを作成し、&lt;code&gt;getLocalURL()&lt;/code&gt; を使用してURLを取得します。そのページに。

特別ページクラスの外部から特別ページのタイトルオブジェクトを取得するには、{{phpi|SpecialPage::getTitleFor( 'YourCanonicalSpecialPageName' )}} を使用できます。 
それはあなたにWikiの言語でローカライズされたタイトルを与えます。

== カスタム特別ページ ==

MediaWikiにバンドルされていない独自の特別なページを提供するさまざまな方法があります。

* 1つの方法は、記事を作成または編集するためのフォームを生成する拡張機能をインストールすることです。現在利用可能な拡張機能のリストは、{{ll|Category:Special page extensions}} にあります。
* 独自の特別なページを提供する拡張機能を作成することもできます。独自の拡張機能を作成するには、[[:ja:PHP (プログラミング言語)|PHP]] コーディングのスキルと、オブジェクト指向の設計とデータベースに関する快適さが必要です。また、コードを使用して MediaWiki 記事を作成および編集する方法を知る必要があります。詳細については、[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Forms#Articles_with_embedded_forms|この議論]] を参照してください。
* [[Special:BlankPage|特別:白紙ページ]] の下位ページを使用している場合は、既定のエラー メッセージ「不明な特殊ページ」（または「このページは意図的に空白になっています。」）の代わりに、JavaScriptを使用してカスタム ページを表示することもできます。 MediaWiki:Common.jsで、{{ll|Manual:Interface/JavaScript#mw.config|wgPageName}} を確認してから、MediaWikiで生成されたコンテンツを非表示にし（appendCSS &lt;code&gt;{visibility:hidden;}&lt;/code&gt; のみ）、カスタムHTML（&lt;code&gt;innerHTML&lt;/code&gt;）を &lt;code&gt;document.getElementById('bodyContent')&lt;/code&gt; または &lt;code&gt;document.getElementById('mw_contentholder')&lt;/code&gt; に挿入します。例については、[[meta:User:Krinkle/Tools/Real-Time Recent Changes]] を参照してください。

==よくある質問==

=== 拡張機能の名称を設定する ===
拡張機能の題名を設定するのはMediaWikiではなく、開発者のしごとです。
[[Special:Specialpages]] が呼びされたとき、または特別ページが読み込まれたときに、拡張機能の名前を探します。  
[[#execute|''function execute( $par )'']] 節では、拡張機能に題名を与えるため OutputPage メソッドを以下のように使用します: {{phpi|$this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;setPageTitle(&quot;your title&quot;);}}

拡張機能を探せる場所 (特別ページのコンストラクターに渡すものとして定義) とは、キーであり--'''ただし'''&lt;code&gt;getDescription()&lt;/code&gt;の影響で大文字表記しない点が異なります。当初使われ特別ページの題名を探す関数 (もしくはdescriptionとよばれるもの) 、&lt;code&gt;strtolower&lt;/code&gt;の名称です。 
例えば&quot;ThisIsACoolSpecialPage&quot;のキーは&quot;thisisacoolspecialpage&quot;となります。

理論上、メッセージキャッシュに影響を与えないため&lt;code&gt;getDescription&lt;/code&gt;をオーバーロードしても、ソースコードに記述してあるとおり、以下の結果となります。「&quot;これを派生クラスでオーバーライドできるものの、通常は既定の動作を維持する方が簡単です。
さらに、MediaWiki名前空間がメッセージをオーバーロードしようとしても、これは以下のように予防します。

=== 拡張機能の名称を地域化する ===
さて、ぴかぴかのMediaWiki拡張機能をインストールした直後だとします。そのとき気づきました。「自分のウィキはフランス語版なのに、ページは英語で表示されてしまった、困った。」 
ほとんどの人は見過ごしますが、実は簡単なタスクで修正できます (ただし、開発者がこのページで解説した方法を使った場合に限る。) 
ソースコードをめぐる処理はありません。 
仮にページ名を&lt;code&gt;DirtyPages&lt;/code&gt;とすると、その名前は「List of Dirty Pages」の一覧に (訳注：英語版として) 表示されるものの、(訳注：フランス語版で使うという仮定なので・[[wikipedia:Pardon my French|excuse my poor French]]つまり読者にはフランス語はわからないだろうけれど) 「Liste de Pages Sales」に表示したいとします。 
すると処理は、以下のように実に簡単です。

# [[MediaWiki:DirtyPages]]を探して開きたいのですが、ページが存在しなくても、編集します。
# &quot;Liste de Pages Sales&quot;を追加して保存

すると''ヴアラ'' (voilàってダジャレですが) 変更が適用されました。

この方法だと、利用者のウィキの題名を使用言語にカスタマイズするためにも便利に使えます。例として、開発者が名づけた「汚れたページ一覧」という名称が気に入らないなら、（訳注：この方法で）「クリーンアップが必要なページ一覧」と改名します。  
詳細については、[[Special:Allmessages]]を参照してください。

また、例えば警告文など自分の拡張機能に変化させる文章がまとまった量ある場合は、直接、文を出力しません。.  
代わりに、メッセージキャッシュに変化する部分の文章を取り込み、ご利用の言語コードで出力する段階が来たら、次の処理をします。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgOut-&gt;addWikiText( $this-&gt;msg( 'dirtypageshelp' ) );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

さらにこのメッセージ自体も[[MediaWiki:Dirtypageshelp]]でカスタム化することができます。

{{ll|Help:System message}} も参照してください。

=== ページのアクセスを制限する ===

==== [[Special:SpecialPages]]に自分の特別ページを表示しない ====
特別ページの表示を制限したい場合、特別ページを[[Special:SpecialPages]]から除去して特定の権限を持つ利用者限定で表示する処理をしようと考えるかもしれません。 
これを[[#Constructor|コンストラクター]]で実行するには、&lt;code&gt;$restriction&lt;/code&gt;パラメータに渡します。例えば、既定では管理者限定で割り当てられる「editinterface」という権限が対象です。利用できるその他の利用者権限については、利用者権限のマニュアル[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User_rights|利用者権限のマニュアル]]を参照してください。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
function __construct() {
	parent::__construct( 'MyExtension', 'editinterface' ); // システム管理者に限定
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

または、[[#The Setup File|セットアップ ファイル]]に独自の権限を作成して、それをシステム管理者に、次の例のように割り当てます。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
&quot;AvailableRights&quot;: [
	&quot;myextension-right&quot;
],
&quot;GroupPermissions&quot;: {
	&quot;sysop&quot;: {
		&quot;myextension-right&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

次に、右でコンストラクターを呼び出します。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
function __construct() {
	parent::__construct( 'MyExtension', 'myextension-right' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

====Prevent 自分の特別ページへのアクセスを防止する ====
コンストラクター上で上記の手順に従い自分のページに制限をかけても、例えばSpecial:MySpecialPageを開くと、依然としてURL経由で直接、見ることができます。
自分の特別ページへのアクセスを制限するには、&lt;code&gt;execute&lt;/code&gt;メソッドで{{phpi|$this-&gt;checkPermissions()}}を呼び出す必要があります。

権限に関してもっと細かいコントロールが必要な場合は、{{phpi|$this-&gt;checkPermissions()}}をオーバーライド、そして／もしくは拡張機能に必要な権限チェック機能をなんでも追加します。

===Special:UserLogin ならびにSpecial:UserLogout ページの無効化===
LocalSettings.phpでは{{ll|Manual:Hooks/SpecialPage_initList|SpecialPage_initList hook}}を使って不要なビルトインの特別ページを''解除'' することが可能です。 
[[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2009-June/031231.html|&quot;複数のSpecialPagesに制限をかける&quot;]]を参照して、例えば特定の利用者グループについて''条件付きの''特別ページ解除の実施も参照してください。 
一般的なメッセージ「無効な特別ページを要求しました。」が表示されるのは、利用者が解除された特別ページにアクセスしようとした場合です。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgHooks['SpecialPage_initList'][] = function ( &amp;$list ) {
	unset( $list['Userlogout'] );
	unset( $list['Userlogin'] );
	return true;
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

別のアプローチは、DisabledSpecialPage コールバックを使用することです。
この場合のデフォルトのメッセージは、ページがまったく存在しないふりをする代わりに「{{int|disabledspecialpage-disabled}}」と表示されるため、特別なページを「一時的に」無効にするだけの場合は、このアプローチが推奨されます。
これにより、ページが後でアクティブ化される可能性があることが明確に示されます。 

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgSpecialPages['Userlogout'] = DisabledSpecialPage::getCallback( 'Userlogout' );
$wgSpecialPages['Userlogin'] = DisabledSpecialPage::getCallback( 'Userlogin' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

コールバックの2番目の引数としてメッセージキーを指定することにより、特別なページを無効にする理由のカスタムの長い説明を追加することもできます。
これを行うには、最初にシステムメッセージ「MediaWiki:Userlogout-disable-reason」を作成し、そこにすべての説明を書き込みます。
メッセージはブロック形式で解析されます。
次に、LocalSettings.php に次を追加します。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgSpecialPages['Userlogout'] = DisabledSpecialPage::getCallback( 'Userlogout', 'Userlogout-disable-reason' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== 記録の追加 ===
MediaWiki では透明性と共同作業のために、ユーザーの行動をすべて記録します。
その方法は {{ll|Manual:Logging to Special:Log}} で解説してあります。

===[[Special:Specialpages|特別ページ]]のグループを変更する===

拡張機能の開発者の皆さんは、このページの[[#Special page group|特別ページのグループの節]]の説明に従い、&lt;code&gt;getGroupName()&lt;/code&gt;方式を実行してください。

MediaWiki 1.21 以降、特別ページのグループは[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:System message|システムメッセージ]]を編集すると、オーバーライド可能になりました。 
ただしサイト管理者が実行する方法であり、拡張機能の開発者向けではありません。 
グループ名は&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;specialpages-specialpagegroup-&lt;special page name&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;メッセージに配し、特別ページの英語版の正規名称&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;special page name&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;は小文字で表記します。 
例えばグループ「MyLittleGroup」を作り[[Special:Specialpages|特別ページ]]で下位ページとして「Special:MyLittlePage」を示したいなら、「MediaWiki:Specialpages-specialpagegroup-mylittlepage」を作成しコンテンツページを「MyLittleGroup」と指定するだけです。 
すると「Special:MyLittlePage」は「MyLittleGroup」の下位ページになります。後者の命名は「MediaWiki:Specialpages-group-mylittlegroup」で行います。&lt;br /&gt;
既存の特別ページのグループを変更するには、[https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=Special:SpecialPages&amp;uselang=qqx Special:SpecialPages&amp;uselang=qqx] を参照して前述の「mylittlepage」の部分を書き換えます。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Unlisting the page from [[Special:Specialpages]]===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a special page from the [[Special:Specialpages]] altogether, pass a {{phpi|false}} as a third parameter to the SpecialPage parent constructor, as described in [[#Constructor|the SpecialPage Constructor section]] of this page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you need more complicated logic to determine whether the page should be listed or not, you can also override the &lt;code&gt;isListed()&lt;/code&gt; function, but using the constructor parameter is simpler.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Getting a list of special pages and their aliases on a wiki===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Simply use the &quot;siteinfo&quot; API module to retrieve the information from the wiki like e.g. [https://www.mediawiki.org/w/api.php?action=query&amp;meta=siteinfo&amp;siprop=specialpagealiases /api.php?action=query&amp;meta=siteinfo&amp;siprop=specialpagealiases].&lt;/span&gt;
== 関連項目 ==
*[[Special:MyLanguage/HTMLForm|HTMLForm]] – チェックボックスやテキストエリア、ラジオボタン他を、特別ページに作る方法

[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Customization techniques{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:User interface{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>beet80pf8re3f7dzkah90jazuftqhmj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:System message</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>18744</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402523</id>
      <parentid>5352356</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:23:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="68336" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{i18n navigation}}
{{TOC right|limit=2}}

[[Image:MediaWiki SpecialUpload interface labelled.png|thumb|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; Labelled diagram of the [[Special:Upload]] form, showing various system messages.&lt;/translate&gt;]]
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; A '''system message''' is a snippet of plain text (nowiki), wikitext, [[w:CSS|CSS]], or [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] that can be used to customize the behavior of MediaWiki and its appearance for each language and [[w:Locale (computer software)|locale]]. MediaWiki uses messages for any user-facing part of the interface, allowing for internationalization and localization of the MediaWiki UI, for both core and extensions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:380--&gt; All messages used in MediaWiki are defined in a ''messages file''.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Overriding messages on-wiki == &lt;!--T:381--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; Messages can be overridden from their default values by editing them on-wiki.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:33--&gt; Each message has a wiki page in the MediaWiki namespace with its message key as the name of the page.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:34--&gt; For example, the &quot;aboutsite&quot; message is stored at MediaWiki:aboutsite.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; By default this namespace is restricted from editing unless the user has the &quot;editinterface&quot; permission.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:36--&gt; A list of all message pages can be found on [[Special:AllMessages]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:37--&gt; Editing interface messages is typically straightforward, just like editing a normal wiki page, but it is restricted to users with the [[editinterface]] permission, which is assigned to administrators (and interface administrators) by default.&lt;/translate&gt;
[[Image:Wiki-system-messages.png|thumb|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; Example row on the old [[Special:AllMessages]].&lt;/translate&gt;]]
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; The [[Special:AllMessages]] table contains two columns: the linked interface name, and the text.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; The text is horizontally split to show the default text above, and the customized text below.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:29--&gt; When a custom message does not exist, only the default will be shown.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt; To customize a message, click the upper link in the left column (the name of the message).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:31--&gt; This link is red if the default text is in use, because the edit page is empty.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; The lower links in the left column cells lead to the discussion pages for that message.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Finding messages and documentation}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Finding messages and documentation == &lt;!--T:10--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; How each message is used by MediaWiki, variables available, parameters used, limitations, et cetera is explained with the [&lt;tvar name=twn&gt;//translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;task=reviewall&amp;group=core&amp;language=qqq&amp;limit=5000&amp;action=page&amp;filter=&lt;/tvar&gt; complete documentation in the qqq pseudo-language] files, as per [[&lt;tvar name=localization&gt;#Message_documentation&lt;/tvar&gt;|message documentation guidelines]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:32--&gt; Some longer explanation pages may exist for some interface messages at the older &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Category:Interface messages}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{note|1=
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:22--&gt; In the wiki base of translatewiki.net, qqq is the page which holds the user documentation of the message (in English because it is the same shown to all readers).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:23--&gt; In the same way as /en /ge /fr .../qqq is a subpage of the article and is viewable directly.&lt;/translate&gt;

* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:24--&gt; Try &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/en]]&lt;/tvar&gt; to view an article in English,&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; Try &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/fr]]&lt;/tvar&gt; to view the same article in French,&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; Try &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/qqq]]&lt;/tvar&gt; to display its associated documentation (in English).&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:27--&gt;
From this point of view &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; is considered as a language in parameter &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;language=&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; of the request.
&lt;/translate&gt;
}}

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:12--&gt;
In MediaWiki 1.18 and above, you can find a message key by browsing a wiki in the special pseudo-language code &lt;tvar name=qqx&gt;&lt;code&gt;'''[[Help:Qqx|qqx]]'''&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, which can be done by appending &lt;tvar name=qqxparam1&gt;&lt;code&gt;?[[uselang]]=qqx&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; to the URL, or &lt;tvar name=qqxparam2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&amp;uselang=qqx&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; if the URL already contains a &lt;code&gt;?&lt;/code&gt; character ([{{fullurl:{{FULLPAGENAME}}|uselang=qqx}} example]). All the messages will then be replaced by their message keys, so you can identify which message is responsible. Messages that are always in the content language will not be shown using qqx.

&lt;!--T:21--&gt;
Some parts of the interface add &lt;tvar name=nstab&gt;&lt;code&gt;nstab-&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; to the string that is shown when you use the qqx trick. For example the label for the tab that links to the discussion page in the main namespace is shown as &lt;tvar name=nt&gt;&lt;code&gt;nstab-talk&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, but the string is actually located at &lt;tvar name=talk&gt;[[MediaWiki:Talk]]&lt;/tvar&gt;.

&lt;!--T:19--&gt;
In case the page uses tabs like e.g. [[&lt;tvar name=prefs&gt;Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-rendering&lt;/tvar&gt;|special page &quot;Preferences&quot;]] you will have to add the tab after the &lt;code&gt;uselang&lt;/code&gt; parameter, e.g. &lt;tvar name=qqxparam3&gt;&lt;code&gt;Special:Preferences?uselang=qqx#mw-prefsection-rendering&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Localisation file format}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Localisation file format == &lt;!--T:784--&gt;

&lt;!--T:382--&gt;
All messages used in MediaWiki are defined in a ''messages file''.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:383--&gt; There are two types of message files in MediaWiki: JSON and PHP.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:384--&gt; As of April 2014, core MediaWiki and most of the maintained extensions were migrated to the JSON format.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:385--&gt; You should use JSON for all new development.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:386--&gt; For more information about the migration to JSON see &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[Requests for comment/Localisation format]]&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== JSON ===

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:387--&gt; Starting from late 2013 a new file format for messages was introduced: JSON.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:388--&gt; This is plain [[:w:JSON|JSON]], familiar as a common generic data storage format.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:389--&gt; Every key in it is a message key, and the value is the message text.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:390--&gt; In addition, the special &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;@metadata&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; key is used to store information about the translation, such as the translation authors.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:391--&gt; Using JSON makes the localisation files more secure because it's not executable.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:392--&gt; It is also compatible with &lt;tvar name=1&gt;jquery.i18n&lt;/tvar&gt;, a &lt;tvar name=2&gt;JavaScript&lt;/tvar&gt; library developed as part of [[&lt;tvar name=3&gt;Milkshake&lt;/tvar&gt;|Project Milkshake]], which provides MediaWiki-like frontend localisation capabilities and is used by some extensions that want to be less dependent on MediaWiki, such as [[&lt;tvar name=4&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Extension:VisualEditor&lt;/tvar&gt;|VisualEditor]] and [[&lt;tvar name=5&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector&lt;/tvar&gt;|UniversalLanguageSelector]].&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:393--&gt;
Because the wider suite of internationalisation and localisation tools were called &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[Project Milkshake]]&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;, some people call this format &quot;banana&quot;.

==== File location ==== &lt;!--T:394--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:395--&gt; In MediaWiki core, localisation files are placed in the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;{{git file |file=languages/i18n |action=tree}}&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:396--&gt; MediaWiki extensions usually place theirs in an &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; subdirectory.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:397--&gt; If a large number of messages exist within a project, one may want to split these into two or more topical subdirectories for maintainability.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:398--&gt; In MediaWiki context, the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}}&lt;/tvar&gt; configuration key is used to list these subdirectories.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:399--&gt; Here's an example from the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;VisualEditor&lt;/tvar&gt; extension for MediaWiki:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
  &quot;MessagesDirs&quot;: {
    &quot;VisualEditor&quot;: [
      &quot;lib/ve/modules/ve/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-mw/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-wmf/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;lib/ve/lib/oojs-ui/i18n&quot;
    ]
  }
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:400--&gt; You add new messages to the English &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;en&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; messages file &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and document them in the message documentation file with the special pseudo-language code &quot;&lt;tvar name=3&gt;qqq&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; &amp;ndash; &lt;tvar name=4&gt;&lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:401--&gt; ''See also: [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;#Adding new messages&lt;/tvar&gt;|Adding new messages]]''.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Metadata ==== &lt;!--T:402--&gt;

&lt;!--T:403--&gt;
Currently the following metadata fields are used in the files:
&lt;/translate&gt;

;authors
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:404--&gt; A JSON list of the authors of the messages.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:405--&gt; For English (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;en&lt;/tvar&gt;) and message documentation (&lt;tvar name=2&gt;qqq&lt;/tvar&gt;) these are added manually when the messages file is edited.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:406--&gt; For all other languages this is inserted automatically when the message file is exported from &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[translatewiki.net]]&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:407--&gt; Message documentation can be edited on &lt;tvar name=1&gt;translatewiki.net&lt;/tvar&gt;, and documentation editors are inserted to the &lt;tvar name=2&gt;qqq.json&lt;/tvar&gt; file automatically as well.&lt;/translate&gt;
;message-documentation
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:408--&gt; This is the pseudo-language code for storing the message documentation.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:409--&gt; For MediaWiki this is always ''&lt;tvar name=1&gt;qqq&lt;/tvar&gt;''.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:410--&gt; (This appears in some extensions, but it's not actually processed in any way. It's not mandatory.)&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Conventions ==== &lt;!--T:411--&gt;

&lt;!--T:412--&gt;
Special characters like line breaks are escaped (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&quot;\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;).
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:413--&gt; Unicode characters that represent letters in different alphabets are stored as real characters and not as character codes, because these files are sometimes read by people and because this makes the files smaller (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&quot;誼&quot;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and not &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&quot;\u8ABC&quot;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:414--&gt; In any case, developers have few reasons to edit messages in any languages except English, because these are usually edited through translatewiki.net.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:415--&gt;
HTML code is not escaped either, so &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&quot;&amp;lt;strong&gt;Warning&amp;lt;/strong&gt;&quot;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and not &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&quot;\u003cstrong\u003eWarning\u003c/strong\u003e&quot;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.

&lt;!--T:416--&gt;
The JSON files are indented using tabs.
&lt;/translate&gt;

=== PHP ===

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:417--&gt; The older localisation file format is PHP.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:418--&gt; This is essentially a PHP array with all the messages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:419--&gt; In core MediaWiki each language resides in its own file in the languages/message directory of the MediaWiki source code.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:420--&gt; In the extensions all the languages and the message documentation (''&lt;tvar name=1&gt;qqq&lt;/tvar&gt;'') are in the same file: ''&lt;tvar name=2&gt;ExtensionName.i18n.php&lt;/tvar&gt;'', usually in the main directory of the extension.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:421--&gt; To migrate from PHP to JSON use the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:GenerateJsonI18n.php&lt;/tvar&gt;|generateJsonI18n.php]] script.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:422--&gt; It will move the messages to JSON files and replace the text of the PHP file with a shim that points to the JSON files.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:423--&gt; This boilerplate code is needed for backwards compatibility with MediaWiki 1.19.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:424--&gt; It is not used in new extensions that do not require MediaWiki 1.19 compatibility.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Using messages == &lt;!--T:425--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:426--&gt; MediaWiki uses a ''central'' repository of messages which are referenced by keys in the code.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:427--&gt; This is different from, for example, &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;Gettext&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, which just extracts the translatable strings from the source files.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:428--&gt; The key-based system makes some things easier, like refining the original texts and tracking changes to messages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:429--&gt; The drawback is of course that the list of used messages and the list of source texts for those keys can get out of sync.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:430--&gt; In practice this isn't a big problem, and the only significant problem is that sometimes extra messages that are not used anymore still stay up for translation.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:431--&gt; To make message keys more manageable and easy to find, also with grep, always write them completely and don't rely too much on creating them dynamically.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:432--&gt; You may concatenate parts of message keys if you feel that it gives your code better structure, but put a comment nearby with a list of the possible resulting keys.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:433--&gt; See also [[&lt;tvar name=ccdynamic&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding_conventions#Dynamic_identifiers&lt;/tvar&gt;|code conventions]]. For example:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// &lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:434--&gt; Messages that can be used here:&lt;/translate&gt;
// * myextension-connection-success
// * myextension-connection-warning
// * myextension-connection-error
$text = wfMessage( 'myextension-connection-' . $status )-&gt;parse();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:436--&gt;
To use a message in JavaScript, you have to [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Messages API#Using a ResourceLoader module&lt;/tvar&gt;|list it]] in the definition of your ResourceLoader module, in the &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&quot;messages&quot;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; property.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:437--&gt; The detailed use of message functions in PHP and JavaScript is on &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:Messages API}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
'''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:438--&gt; This is an important documentation page, and you should read it before you write code that uses messages.&lt;/translate&gt;'''

{{anchor|Message sources}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Message sources == &lt;!--T:439--&gt;

&lt;!--T:440--&gt;
Code looks up system messages from these sources:
&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:441--&gt; The MediaWiki namespace.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:442--&gt; This allows wikis to adopt, or override, all of their messages, when standard messages do not fit or are not desired.&lt;/translate&gt;
** &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:443--&gt; MediaWiki:''Message-key'' is the default message,&lt;/translate&gt;
** &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:444--&gt; MediaWiki:''Message-key''/''language-code'' is the message to be used when a user has selected a language other than the wiki's default language.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:445--&gt; From message files:&lt;/translate&gt;
** &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:446--&gt; Core MediaWiki itself and most currently maintained [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Category:All extensions&lt;/tvar&gt;|extensions]] use a file per language, named &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;''zyx''.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, where &lt;tvar name=3&gt;''zyx''&lt;/tvar&gt; is the language code for the language.&lt;/translate&gt;
** &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:447--&gt; Some older extensions use a combined message file holding all messages in all languages, usually named &lt;code&gt;''MyExtensionName''.i18n.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
** &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:448--&gt; Many Wikimedia Foundation wikis access some messages from the {{ll|Extension:WikimediaMessages|nsp=0}} extension, allowing them to standardise messages across WMF wikis without imposing them on every MediaWiki installation.&lt;/translate&gt;
** &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:449--&gt; A few extensions use other techniques.&lt;/translate&gt;
{{anchor|Caching}}

&lt;translate&gt;
== Caching == &lt;!--T:450--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:451--&gt; System messages are one of the more significant components of MediaWiki, primarily because it is used in every web request.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:452--&gt; The PHP message files are large, since they store thousands of message keys and values.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:453--&gt; Loading this file (and possibly multiple files, if the user's language is different from the content language) has a large memory and performance cost.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:454--&gt; An aggressive, layered caching system is used to reduce this performance impact.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:455--&gt; MediaWiki has lots of caching mechanisms built in, which make the code somewhat more difficult to understand.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:456--&gt; Since 1.16 there is a new caching system, which caches messages either in [[cdb]] files or in the database.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:457--&gt; Customised messages are cached in the filesystem and in [[memcached]] (or alternative), depending on the configuration.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:458--&gt; The table below gives an overview of the settings involved:&lt;/translate&gt;

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!colspan=&quot;2&quot; rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:459--&gt; Location of cache storage&lt;/translate&gt;
!colspan=&quot;4&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf}}
|-
! 'store' =&gt; 'db'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;br /&gt;(&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:460--&gt; default&lt;/translate&gt;) !! 'store' =&gt; 'files'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'array'&lt;br /&gt;''(&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:461--&gt; experimental since MW ≥ 1.26&lt;/translate&gt;)''
|-
!rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}
! = false&lt;br /&gt;(&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:791--&gt; default&lt;/translate&gt;)
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || ''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:462--&gt; error&lt;/translate&gt;'' (&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:463--&gt; undefined path&lt;/translate&gt;) || ''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:464--&gt; error&lt;/translate&gt;'' (&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:465--&gt; undefined path&lt;/translate&gt;)
|-
! = ''path''
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:379--&gt; local filesystem&lt;/translate&gt; (CDB) || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:466--&gt; local filesystem&lt;/translate&gt; (CDB) || &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:467--&gt; local filesystem (PHP array)&lt;/translate&gt;
|}
{{MW version|version=1.27.0|version2=1.27.2|gerrit change=Id3e2d2b18ddb423647bf2e893bcf942722c0e097}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:468--&gt; In MediaWiki 1.27.0 and 1.27.1, the autodetection was changed to favor the file backend.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:469--&gt; In case &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; (the default), the file backend is used with the path from &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:470--&gt; If this value is not set (which is the default), a temporary directory determined by the operating system is used.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:471--&gt; If a temporary directory cannot be detected, the database backend is used as a fallback.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:472--&gt; This was reverted from 1.27.2 and 1.28.0 because of conflict of files on shared hosts and security issues (see [[:phab:T127127|T127127]] and [[:phab:T161453|T161453]]).&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Function backtrace === &lt;!--T:473--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:474--&gt; To better visually depict the layers of caching, here is a function backtrace of what methods are called when retrieving a message.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:475--&gt; See the below sections for an explanation of each layer.&lt;/translate&gt;

* &lt;code&gt;Message::fetchMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;MessageCache::get()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;Language::getMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalisationCache::getSubitem()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LCStore::get()&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== MessageCache === &lt;!--T:476--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:477--&gt; The &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; class is the top level of caching for messages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:478--&gt; It is called from the Message class and returns the final raw contents of a message.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:479--&gt; This layer handles the following logic:&lt;/translate&gt;

* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:480--&gt; Checking for message overrides in the database&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:481--&gt; Caching over-ridden messages in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|memcached}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, or whatever &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgMessageCacheType|$wgMessageCacheType}}&lt;/tvar&gt; is set to&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:482--&gt;
Resolving the remainder of the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages&lt;/tvar&gt;|language fallback]] sequence
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:483--&gt; The last bullet is important.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:484--&gt; [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages&lt;/tvar&gt;|Language fallbacks]] allow MediaWiki to fall back on another language if the original does not have a message being asked for.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:485--&gt; As mentioned in the next section, most of the language fallback resolution occurs at a lower level.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:486--&gt; However, only the &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; layer checks the database for overridden messages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:487--&gt; Thus integrating overridden messages from the database into the fallback chain is done here.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:488--&gt; If not using the database, this entire layer can be disabled.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== LocalisationCache === &lt;!--T:489--&gt;

&lt;!--T:490--&gt;
See &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalisationCache.php|LocalisationCache.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt;

=== LCStore === &lt;!--T:491--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:492--&gt; The &lt;code&gt;LCStore&lt;/code&gt; class is merely a back-end implementation used by the LocalisationCache class for actually caching and retrieving messages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:493--&gt; Like the &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; class, which is used for general caching in MediaWiki, there are a number of different cache types (configured using [[Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf]]):&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:494--&gt; &quot;db&quot; (default) - Caches messages in the database&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:495--&gt; &quot;file&quot; (default if &lt;code&gt;$wgCacheDirectory&lt;/code&gt; is set) - Uses [[w:cdb (software)|CDB]] to cache messages in a local file&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:496--&gt; &quot;accel&quot; - Uses [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching&lt;/tvar&gt;|APC]] or another opcode cache to store the data&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:497--&gt;
The &quot;file&quot; option is used by the Wikimedia Foundation, and is recommended because it is faster than going to the database and more reliable than the APC cache, especially since APC is incompatible with PHP versions 5.5 or later.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new messages}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Adding new messages == &lt;!--T:498--&gt;

=== Choosing the message key === &lt;!--T:499--&gt;

&lt;!--T:500--&gt;
See also:
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{ll|Manual:Coding conventions#System messages}}

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:501--&gt; The message key must be globally unique.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:502--&gt; This includes core MediaWiki and all the extensions and skins.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:503--&gt; Stick to lower case letters, numbers, and dashes in message names; most other characters are between less practical or not working at all.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:504--&gt; Per MediaWiki convention, first character is case-insensitive and other chars are case-sensitive.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:505--&gt; Please follow global or local conventions for naming.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:506--&gt; For extensions, use a standard prefix, preferably the extension name in lower case, followed by a hyphen (&quot;-&quot;).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:507--&gt; Exceptions are:&lt;/translate&gt;

; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:508--&gt; Messages used by the API&lt;/translate&gt; : &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:509--&gt; These must begin with &lt;code&gt;apihelp-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apiwarn-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apierror-&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:510--&gt; After this prefix put the extension prefix.&lt;/translate&gt; (&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:511--&gt; Note that these messages should be in a separate file, usually under [[phab:source/mediawiki/browse/master/includes/api/i18n/|includes/i18/api]].&lt;/translate&gt;)
; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:512--&gt; Log-related messages&lt;/translate&gt; : &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:513--&gt; These must begin with &lt;code&gt;logentry-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;log-name-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;log-description&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:514--&gt; User rights&lt;/translate&gt; : &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:515--&gt; The key for the name of the right as displayed on Special:ListGroupRights must begin with &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:516--&gt; The name of the action that completes the sentence &quot;{{int|Permissionserrorstext-withaction|unused}}&quot; must begin with&lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:802--&gt; Revisions tags&lt;/translate&gt; : &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:517--&gt; Revisions tags must begin with &lt;code&gt;tag-&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:803--&gt; Special page titles&lt;/translate&gt; : &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:518--&gt; Special page titles must begin with &lt;code&gt;special-&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Other things to note when creating messages === &lt;!--T:519--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:520--&gt; Make sure that you are using suitable handling for the message (parsing, &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;-replacement, escaping for HTML, etc.)&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:521--&gt; If your message is part of core, it should usually be added to &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;languages/i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, although some components, such as Installer, EXIF tags, and ApiHelp have their own message files.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:522--&gt; If your message is in an extension add it to the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file or the &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file in the appropriate subdirectory.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:523--&gt; In particular, API messages that are only seen by developers and not by most end users are usually in a separate file, such as &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;i18n/api/en.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:524--&gt; If an extension has a lot of messages, you may create subdirectories under &lt;code&gt;i18n&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:525--&gt; All the message directories, including the default &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, must be listed in the &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;MessagesDirs&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; section in &lt;tvar name=3&gt;&lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; or in the &lt;tvar name=4&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}}&lt;/tvar&gt; variable.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:526--&gt; Take a pause and consider the wording of the message.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:527--&gt; Is it as clear as possible?&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:528--&gt; Can it be misunderstood? Ask for comments from other developers or localisers if possible.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:529--&gt; Follow the [[#Internationalisation hints|Internationalisation hints]].&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:530--&gt; Add documentation to &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; in the same directory.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:804--&gt; The sequence of the messages in the file should roughly conform to the features of your project. Put messages from the same feature next to each other. This helps translators stay focused and be efficient and consistent.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:805--&gt; Put the messages that are expected to be the most basic and the most frequently used in the beginning of the file, and the messages that are rarer and more technically advanced towards the end.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;

== Messages that should not be translated == &lt;!--T:531--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:532--&gt; '''Ignored''' messages are those which should exist only in the English messages file.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:533--&gt; They are messages that should not need translation, because they reference only other messages or language-neutral features, ''e.g.'' a message of &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:534--&gt; '''Optional''' messages may be translated only if changed in the target language.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:535--&gt;
To flag such messages:
&lt;/translate&gt;

* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:536--&gt; use the template in the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; message documentation, that is respectively&lt;/translate&gt;
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Notranslate|notranslate]]}}&lt;/code&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:537--&gt; or&lt;/translate&gt;
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Optional|optional]]}}&lt;/code&gt;;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:538--&gt; tell the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Extension:Translate|nsp=0}}&lt;/tvar&gt; extension used on &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}&lt;/tvar&gt; what to do with the messages by submitting a patch listing them as appropriate (see also {{&lt;tvar name=3&gt;ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Group configuration/MediaWiki&lt;/tvar&gt;|full configuration docs}}):&lt;/translate&gt;
** &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:539--&gt; for core, in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/MediaWiki.yaml}}&lt;/tvar&gt; add the message keys&lt;/translate&gt;
**# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:540--&gt; under &lt;tvar name=&quot;ignored&quot;&gt;&lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;ignored:&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; or&lt;/translate&gt;
**# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:541--&gt; under &lt;tvar name=&quot;optional&quot;&gt;&lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;optional:&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;;
** &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:542--&gt; for extensions, in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/mediawiki-extensions.txt}}&lt;/tvar&gt; add a line under the extension's name like&lt;/translate&gt;
**# &lt;code&gt;ignored = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt; or
**# &lt;code&gt;optional = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;translate&gt;
== Removing existing messages == &lt;!--T:543--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:544--&gt; Remove it from &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:545--&gt; Don't bother with other languages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:546--&gt; Updates from &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}&lt;/tvar&gt; will handle those automatically.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:547--&gt; In addition, check whether the message appears anywhere in translatewiki configuration, for example in the list of optional or most used messages (a simple git grep should be enough).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:548--&gt; Remove it from these lists if needed.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Changing existing messages == &lt;!--T:549--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:550--&gt; Consider updating the [[#Message documentation | message documentation]].&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:551--&gt; Change the message key if old translations are not suitable for the new meaning.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:552--&gt; This also includes changes in message handling (parsing, escaping, parameters, etc.).&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:553--&gt; Improving the phrasing of a message without technical changes is usually not a reason for changing a key.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:554--&gt; At translatewiki.net, the translations will be marked as outdated so that they can be targeted by translators.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:555--&gt; Changing a message key does not require talking to the i18n team or filing a support request.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:556--&gt; However, if you have special circumstances or questions, ask in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{irc|translatewiki}}&lt;/tvar&gt; or in the [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;translatewiki:Support&lt;/tvar&gt;|support page]] at &lt;tvar name=3&gt;{{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:557--&gt; If the extension is supported by &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, please only change the English source message and/or key, and the accompanying entry in &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:558--&gt; If needed, the translatewiki.net team will take care of updating the translations, marking them as outdated, cleaning up the file or renaming keys where possible.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:559--&gt; This also applies when you're only changing things like HTML tags which you could change in other languages without speaking those languages.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:560--&gt; Most of these actions will take place in [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]] and will reach Git with about one day of delay.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Message documentation}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Message documentation == &lt;!--T:561--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:562--&gt; There is a pseudo-language code &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; for message documentation.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:563--&gt; It is one of the ISO 639 codes reserved for private use.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:564--&gt; There, we do not keep translations of each message, but collect English sentences ''about each message'': telling us where it is used, giving hints about how to translate it, and enumerating and describing its parameters, link to related messages, and so on.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:565--&gt; In [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]], these hints are shown to translators when they edit messages.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:566--&gt; Programmers must document each and every message.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:567--&gt; Message documentation is an essential resource – not just for translators, but for all the maintainers of the module.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:568--&gt; Whenever a message is added to the software, a corresponding &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; entry ''must'' be added as well; revisions which don't do so are marked &quot;&lt;code&gt;V-1&lt;/code&gt;&quot; until the documentation is added.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:569--&gt; Documentation in &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; files should be edited directly only when adding new messages or when changing an existing English message in a way that requires a documentation change, for example adding or removing parameters.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:570--&gt; In other cases, documentation should usually be edited in translatewiki.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:571--&gt; Each documentation string is accessible at &lt;nowiki&gt;https://translatewiki.net/wiki/MediaWiki:&lt;/nowiki&gt;''message-key''&lt;nowiki&gt;/qqq&lt;/nowiki&gt;, as if it were a translation.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:572--&gt; These edits will be exported to the source repositories along with the translations.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:573--&gt; Useful information that should be in the documentation includes:&lt;/translate&gt;

# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:574--&gt; Message handling (parsing, escaping, plain text).&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:575--&gt; Type of parameters with example values.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:576--&gt; Where the message is used (pages, locations in the user interface).&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:577--&gt; How the message is used where it is used (a page title, button text, ''etc.'').&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:578--&gt; What other messages are used together with this message, or which other messages this message refers to.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:579--&gt; Anything else that could be understood when the message is seen on the context, but not when the message is displayed alone (which is the case when it is being translated).&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:580--&gt; If applicable, notes about grammar.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:581--&gt; For example, &quot;open&quot; in English can be both a verb and an adjective.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:582--&gt; In many other languages the words are different and it's impossible to guess how to translate them without documentation.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:583--&gt; Adjectives that describe things, such as &quot;disabled&quot;, &quot;open&quot; or &quot;blocked&quot;, must ''always'' say what are they describing.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:584--&gt; In many languages adjectives must have the gender of the noun that they describe.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:585--&gt; It may also happen that different kinds of things need different adjectives.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:586--&gt; If the message has special properties, for example, if it is a page name, or if it should not be a direct translation, but adapted to the culture or the project.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:587--&gt; Whether the message appears near other message, for example in a list or a menu.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:588--&gt; The wording or the grammatical features of the words should probably be similar to the messages nearby.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:589--&gt; Also, items in a list may have to be properly related to the heading of the list.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:590--&gt; Parts of the message that must not be translated, such as generic namespace names, URLs or tags.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:591--&gt; Explanations of potentially unclear words, for example abbreviations, like &quot;CTA&quot;, or specific jargon, like &quot;template&quot;, &quot;suppress&quot; or &quot;stub&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:592--&gt; (Note that it's best to avoid such words in the first place!)&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:593--&gt; Screenshots are very helpful.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:594--&gt; Don't crop – an image of the full screen in which the message appears gives complete context and can be reused in several messages.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:595--&gt;
A few other hints:
&lt;/translate&gt;

* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:596--&gt; Remember that very, very often translators translate the messages without actually using the software.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:597--&gt; Most usually, translators do not have any context information, neither of your module, nor of other messages in it.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:598--&gt; A rephrased message alone is useless in most circumstances.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:599--&gt; Don't use designers' jargon like &quot;nav&quot; or &quot;comps&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:600--&gt; Consider writing a [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;betawiki:Terminology#Terminologies&lt;/tvar&gt;|glossary]] of the technical terms that are used in your module.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:601--&gt; If you do it, link to it from the messages' documentation.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:602--&gt; You can link to other messages by using {{&lt;tvar name=1&gt;tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;{{((}}msg-mw{{!}}message key{{))}}&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;|message key}}.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:603--&gt; Please do this if parts of the messages come from other messages (if this cannot be avoided), or if some messages are shown together or in same context.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:604--&gt;
translatewiki.net provides some default templates for documentation:
&lt;/translate&gt;

* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-action|doc-action]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:605--&gt; for &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt; messages&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-right|doc-right]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:606--&gt; for &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt; messages&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-group|doc-group]]|[...]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:607--&gt; for messages around user groups (&lt;code&gt;group&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;member&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;page&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;js&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;css&lt;/code&gt;)&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-accesskey|doc-accesskey]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:608--&gt; for &lt;code&gt;accesskey-&lt;/code&gt; messages&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:609--&gt;
Have a look at the template pages for more information.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Internationalisation hints}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Internationalisation hints == &lt;!--T:610--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:611--&gt; Besides [[#Message documentation|documentation]], translators ask developers to consider some hints so as to make their work easier and more efficient and to allow an actual and good localisation for all languages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:612--&gt; Even if only adding or editing messages in English, one should be aware of the needs of all languages.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:613--&gt; Each message is translated into more than 300 languages and this should be done in the best possible way.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:614--&gt; Correct implementation of these hints will very often help you write better messages in English, too.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:792--&gt; [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Help_and_contact_info&lt;/tvar&gt;|Localisation#Help_and_contact_info]] lists the main places where you can find the assistance of experienced and knowledgeable people regarding i18n.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
=== Use Message parameters and switches properly === &lt;!--T:793--&gt;

&lt;!--T:794--&gt;
That's a prerequisite of a correct wording for your messages.

=== Avoid message re-use === &lt;!--T:795--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:615--&gt; The translators discourage message re-use.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:616--&gt; This may seem counter-intuitive, because copying and duplicating code is usually a bad practice, but in system messages it is often needed.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:617--&gt; Although two concepts can be expressed with the same word in English, this doesn't necessarily mean they can be expressed with the same word in every language.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:618--&gt; &quot;OK&quot; is a good example: in English this is used for a generic button label, but in some languages they prefer to use a button label related to the operation which will be performed by the button.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:619--&gt; Another example is practically any adjective: a word like &quot;multiple&quot; changes according to gender in many languages, so you cannot reuse it to describe several different things, and you must create several separate messages.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:620--&gt; If you are adding multiple identical messages, please add message documentation to describe the differences in their contexts.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:621--&gt; Don't worry about the extra work for translators.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:622--&gt; Translation memory helps a lot in these while keeping the flexibility to have different translations if needed.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Avoid_patchwork_messages|Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages}}
&lt;translate&gt;
=== Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages === &lt;!--T:623--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:624--&gt; Languages have varying word orders, and complex grammatical and syntactic rules.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:625--&gt; It's very hard to translate &quot;lego&quot; messages, that is messages formed by multiple pieces of text, possibly with some indirection (also called &quot;string concatenation&quot;).&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:626--&gt; It is better to make every message a complete phrase.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:627--&gt; Several sentences can usually be combined much more easily into a text block, if needed.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:628--&gt; When you want to combine several strings in one message, pass them in as parameters, as translators can order them correctly for their language when translating.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Messages quoting each other ==== &lt;!--T:629--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:630--&gt; An exception from the rule may be messages referring to one another: 'Enter the original author's name in the field labelled &quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot; and click &quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:proceed}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot; when done'.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:631--&gt; This makes the message consistent when a software developer or wiki operator alters the messages &quot;name&quot; or &quot;proceed&quot; later.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:632--&gt; Without the int-trick, developers and operators would have to be aware of all related messages needing adjustment, when they alter one.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Don't use terms and templates that are specific to particular projects === &lt;!--T:633--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:634--&gt; MediaWiki is used by very diverse people, within the Wikimedia movement and outside of it.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:635--&gt; Even though it was originally built for an encyclopedia, it is now used for various kinds of content.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:636--&gt; Therefore, use general terms.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:637--&gt; For example, avoid terms like &quot;article&quot;, and use &quot;page&quot; instead, unless you are absolutely sure that the feature you are developing will only be used on a site where pages are called &quot;articles&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:638--&gt; Don't use &quot;village pump&quot;, which is the name of an English Wikipedia community page, and use a generic term, such as &quot;community discussion page&quot;, instead.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:639--&gt; Don't assume that a certain template exists on all wikis.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:640--&gt; Templates are local to wikis.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:641--&gt; This applies to both the source messages and to their translations.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:642--&gt; If messages use templates, they will only work if a template is created on ''each'' wiki where the feature is deployed.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:643--&gt; It's best to avoid using templates in messages completely.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:644--&gt; If you really have to use them, you must document this clearly in the message documentation and in the extension installation instructions.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Separate times from dates in sentences === &lt;!--T:645--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:646--&gt; Some languages have to insert something between a date and a time which grammatically depends on other words in a sentence.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:647--&gt; Thus, they will not be able to use date/time combined.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:648--&gt; Others may find the combination convenient, thus it is usually the best choice to supply three parameter values (date/time, date, time) in such cases, and in each translation leave either the first one or last two unused as needed.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Avoid &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; in messages === &lt;!--T:649--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:650--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; has several disadvantages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:651--&gt; It can be anything (acronym, word, short phrase, ''etc.'') and, depending on language, may need the use of &lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Messages_API#…on use context inside sentences via GRAMMAR|&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/code&gt; on each occurrence.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:652--&gt; No matter what, each message having &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; will need review in most wiki languages for each new wiki on which your code is installed.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:653--&gt; In the majority of cases, when there is not a general &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;GRAMMAR&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; configuration for a language, wiki operators will have to add or amend PHP code so as to get &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; for &lt;tvar name=3&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; working.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:654--&gt; This requires both more skills, and more understanding, than otherwise.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:655--&gt; It is more convenient to have generic references like &quot;this wiki&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:656--&gt; This does not keep installations from locally altering these messages to use &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, but at least they don't have to, and they can postpone message adaption until the wiki is already running and used.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Avoid references to visual layout and positions === &lt;!--T:657--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:658--&gt; What is rendered where depends on skins.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:659--&gt; Most often screen layouts of languages written from left-to-right are mirrored compared to those used for languages written from right-to-left, but not always, and for some languages and wikis, not entirely.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:660--&gt; Handheld devices, narrow windows, and so on may show blocks underneath each other, that would appear side-by-side on larger displays.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:661--&gt; Since site- and user-written JavaScript scripts and gadgets can, and do, hide parts, or move things around in unpredictable ways, there is no reliable way of knowing the actual layout.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:662--&gt; It is wrong to tie layout information to content languages, since the user interface language may not be the page's content language, and layout may be a mixture of the two depending on circumstances.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:663--&gt; Non-visual user agents like acoustic screen readers and other auxiliary devices do not even have a concept of visual layout.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:664--&gt; Thus, you should not refer to visual layout positions in the majority of cases, though semantic layout terms may still be used (&quot;previous steps in the form&quot;, ''etc.'').&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:665--&gt;
MediaWiki does not support showing different messages or message fragments based on the current directionality of the interface (see [[phab:T30997|T30997]]).

&lt;!--T:666--&gt;
The upcoming browser and MediaWiki support for East and North Asian top-down writing&lt;ref&gt;http://dev.w3.org/csswg/css3-writing-modes/&lt;/ref&gt; will make screen layouts even more unpredictable, with at least eight possible layouts (left/right starting position, top/bottom starting position, and which happens first).

=== Avoid references to screen colours === &lt;!--T:667--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:668--&gt; The colour in which something is rendered depends on many factors, including skins, site- and user-written JavaScript scripts and gadgets, and local user agent over-rides for reasons of accessibility or technological limitations.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:669--&gt; Non-visual user agents like acoustic screen readers and other auxiliary devices do not even have a concept of colour.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:670--&gt; Thus, you should not refer to screen colours.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:671--&gt; (You should also not rely on colour alone as a mechanism for informing the user of state, for the same reason.)&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Have message elements before and after each input field === &lt;!--T:672--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

:''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:673--&gt; This is a suggested guideline, has not become standard in MediaWiki development&lt;/translate&gt;''

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:674--&gt; While English allows efficient use of prompting in the form item–colon–space–input-field, many other languages don't.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:675--&gt; Even in English, you often want to use &quot;Distance: ___ metres&quot; rather than &quot;Distance (in metres): ___&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:676--&gt; Leaving {{tag|textarea|open}} elements aside, you should think of each and every input field following the &quot;Distance: ___ metres&quot; pattern. So:&lt;/translate&gt;

* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:677--&gt; give it two messages, even if the 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; one is empty in English and some other languages, or&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:678--&gt; allow the placement of inputs via &lt;code&gt;$i&lt;/code&gt; parameters.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
=== Avoid untranslated HTML markup in messages === &lt;!--T:679--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:680--&gt; HTML markup not requiring translation, such as enclosing {{tag|div|open}}s, rulers above or below, and similar, should usually not be part of messages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:681--&gt; They unnecessarily burden translators, increase message file size, and pose the risk to accidentally being altered or skipped in the translation process.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:682--&gt; In general, avoid raw HTML in messages if you can.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Messages are often longer than you think! === &lt;!--T:683--&gt;

&lt;!--T:684--&gt;
Skimming foreign language message files, you almost never find messages shorter than Chinese ones, rarely shorter than English ones, and usually much longer than English ones.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:685--&gt; Especially in forms, in front of input fields, English messages tend to be terse, and short.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:686--&gt; That is often not kept in translations.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:687--&gt; Languages may lack the technical vocabulary present in English, and may require multiple words or even complete sentences to explain some concepts.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:688--&gt; For example, the brief English message &quot;TSV file:&quot; may have to be translated in a language as literally:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;blockquote&gt;''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:689--&gt; Please type a name here which denotes a collection of computer data that is comprised of a sequentially organised series of typewritten lines which themselves are organised as a series of informational fields each, where said fields of information are fenced, and the fences between them are single signs of the kind that slips a typewriter carriage forward to the next predefined position each. Here we go: _____ (thank you)&lt;/translate&gt;''&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:690--&gt; This is, admittedly, an extreme example, but you get the trait.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:691--&gt; Imagine this sentence in a column in a form where each word occupies a line of its own, and the input field is vertically centered in the next column.&lt;/translate&gt; :-(

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Avoid using very close, similar, or identical words to denote different things, or concepts === &lt;!--T:692--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:693--&gt; For example, pages may have older ''revisions'' (of a specific date, time, and edit), comprising past ''versions'' of said page.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:694--&gt; The words ''revision'', and ''version'' can be used interchangeably.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:695--&gt; A problem arises, when versioned pages are revised, and the revision, ''i.e.'' the process of revising them, is being mentioned, too.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:696--&gt; This may not pose a serious problem when the two synonyms of &quot;revision&quot; have different translations.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:697--&gt; Do not rely on that, however.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:698--&gt; It is better to avoid the use of &quot;revision&quot; ''aka'' &quot;version&quot; altogether, then, so as to avoid it being misinterpreted.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Basic words may have unforeseen connotations, or not exist at all === &lt;!--T:699--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:700--&gt; There are some words that are hard to translate because of their very specific use in MediaWiki.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:701--&gt; Some may [[#Expect untranslated words|not be translated at all]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:702--&gt; For example, there is no word &quot;user&quot; relating to &quot;someone who uses something&quot; in several languages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:703--&gt; Similarly, in [[:en:Colognian language|Kölsch]] the English words &quot;namespace&quot; and &quot;apartment&quot; translate the same word.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:704--&gt; Also, in Kölsch, they say &quot;corroborator and participant&quot; in one word since any reference to &quot;use&quot; would too strongly imply &quot;abuse&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:705--&gt; The term &quot;wiki farm&quot; is translated as &quot;stable full of wikis&quot;, since a single-crop farm would be a contradiction in terms in the language, and not understood, ''etc.''.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Expect untranslated words}}
&lt;translate&gt;
=== Expect untranslated words === &lt;!--T:706--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

:''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:707--&gt; This is a suggested guideline, has not yet become standard in MediaWiki development&lt;/translate&gt;''

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:708--&gt; It is not uncommon that proper names, tag names, ''etc.'' and computerese in English are not translated, and instead taken as loan-words, or foreign words.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:709--&gt; In the latter case, some particularly-fastidious translators may mark such words as belonging to another language with HTML markup, such as &lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot;&gt; … &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:710--&gt;
You may want to consider ensuring that your message output handler passes such markup along unchanged, despite the obvious security risks.

=== Permit explanatory inline markup === &lt;!--T:711--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

:''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:712--&gt; This is a suggested guideline, has not yet become standard in MediaWiki development&lt;/translate&gt;''

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:713--&gt; Sometimes there are abbreviations, technical terms, or generally ambiguous words in target languages that may not be immediately understood by newcomers, but are obvious to experienced computer users.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:714--&gt; To avoid screen clutter of lengthy explanations without leaving newcomers stranded, translators may choose to add explanations as {{tag|abbr|open}}annotations, shown by browsers when you move the mouse over them.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:715--&gt;
For example, the MediaWiki core message &lt;code&gt;exif-orientation-8&lt;/code&gt; about image rotation, which in English is simply &quot;&lt;code&gt;Rotated 90° CW&lt;/code&gt;&quot;, in Moroccan Arabic is translated as:
&lt;/translate&gt;

:&lt;code lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &amp;lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&amp;lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:716--&gt;
giving:&lt;/translate&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:717--&gt;
explaining the abbreviation for &quot;counter clockwise&quot; when needed.

&lt;!--T:718--&gt;
You may want to consider ensuring that your message output handler passes such markup along unchanged, even if the original message does not use them.

=== Use {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}}, and {{tag|kbd|open}} tags where needed === &lt;!--T:719--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:720--&gt; When talking about technical parameters, values, or keyboard inputs, mark them appropriately as such using the HTML tags {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}}, or {{tag|kbd|open}}.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:721--&gt; Thus they are typographically set off form the normal text.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:722--&gt; That clarifies their sense to readers, avoiding confusion, errors and mis-representations.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:723--&gt; Ensure that your message handler allows such markup.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Symbols, colons, brackets, ''etc.'' are parts of messages === &lt;!--T:724--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:725--&gt; Many symbols are localisable, too. Some scripts have other kinds of brackets than the Latin script has.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:726--&gt; A colon may not be appropriate after a label or input prompt in some languages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:727--&gt; Having those symbols included in messages helps to make better and less Anglo-centric translations, and also reduces code clutter.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:728--&gt;
For example, there are different quotation mark conventions used in «Norwegian», »Swedish», »Danish«, „German“, and 「Japanese」.&lt;ref&gt;[[w:Quotation_mark#Summary_table]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;!--T:729--&gt;
If you need to wrap some text in localized parentheses, brackets, or quotation marks, you can use the &lt;code&gt;parentheses&lt;/code&gt; {{int:parentheses}} or &lt;code&gt;brackets&lt;/code&gt; {{int:brackets}} or &lt;code&gt;quotation-marks&lt;/code&gt; {{int:quotation-marks}} messages like so:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php&gt;wfMessage( 'parentheses' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside parentheses */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'brackets' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside brackets */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'quotation-marks' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside quotation marks */ )-&gt;escaped()&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Do not expect symbols and punctuation to survive translation === &lt;!--T:730--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:731--&gt; Languages written from right to left (as opposed to English) usually swap arrow symbols being presented with &quot;next&quot; and &quot;previous&quot; links, and their placement relative to a message text may, or may not, be inverted as well.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:732--&gt; Ellipsis may be translated to &quot;''etc.''&quot;, or to words.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:733--&gt; Question marks, exclamation marks, colons will be placed other than at the end of a sentence, not at all, or twice.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:734--&gt; As a consequence, always include all of those in the text of your messages, and never try to insert them programmatically.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Use full stops === &lt;!--T:735--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:736--&gt; '''Do''' terminate normal sentences with full stops.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:737--&gt; This is often the only indicator for a translator to know that they are not headlines or list items, which may need to be translated differently.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Link anchors === &lt;!--T:738--&gt;

==== Wikitext of links ==== &lt;!--T:739--&gt;

&lt;!--T:740--&gt;
Link anchors can be put into messages in several technical ways:

&lt;!--T:741--&gt;
# via wikitext:&lt;/translate&gt; …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:787--&gt; ''a wiki page''&lt;/translate&gt;|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:788--&gt; ''anchor''&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…,
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:742--&gt;
#via wikitext:&lt;/translate&gt; …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;[&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:789--&gt; ''some-url''&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:790--&gt; ''anchor''&lt;/translate&gt;]&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…, or
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:743--&gt;
#the anchor text is a message in the MediaWiki namespace. ''Avoid it!''
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:744--&gt; The latter is often hard or impossible to handle for translators, [[#Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages|avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages]] here, too.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:745--&gt; Make sure that &quot;&lt;code&gt;some-url&lt;/code&gt;&quot; does not contain spaces.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Use meaningful link anchors ==== &lt;!--T:746--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:747--&gt; Take care with your wording.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:748--&gt; Link anchors play an important role in search engine assessment of pages – both the words linked, and the target anchor.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:749--&gt; Make sure that the anchor describes the target page well.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:750--&gt; Always avoid commonplace and generic words.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:751--&gt; For example, &quot;Click here&quot; is an absolute no-go,&lt;ref&gt;http://www.w3.org/QA/Tips/noClickHere&lt;/ref&gt; since target pages are almost never about &quot;click here&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:752--&gt; Do not put that in sentences around links either, because &quot;here&quot; was not the place to click.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:753--&gt; Instead, Use precise action words telling what a user will get to when following the link, such as &quot;You can [[Special:Upload|upload a file]] if you wish.&quot;&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:754--&gt;
See also ''[http://www.nngroup.com/articles/using-link-titles-to-help-users-predict-where-they-are-going/ Help users predict where they are going]'', and [[w:Mystery meat navigation|mystery meat navigation]], and ''[https://tosbourn.com/click-here/ The main reasons why we shouldn't use click here as link text]''.

=== Avoid jargon and slang === &lt;!--T:755--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:756--&gt; Avoid developer and power user jargon in messages. Try to use a simple language whenever possible.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:757--&gt; Avoid saying &quot;success&quot;, &quot;successfully&quot;, &quot;fail&quot;, &quot;error occurred while&quot;, etc., when you want to notify the user that something happened or didn't happen.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:758--&gt; This comes from developers' perspective of seeing everything as true or false, but users usually just want to know what actually happened or didn't, and what they should do about it (if at all). So:&lt;/translate&gt;

* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:759--&gt; &quot;The file was successfully renamed&quot; -&gt; &quot;The file was renamed&quot;&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:760--&gt;
&quot;File renaming failed&quot; -&gt; &quot;There is a file with this name already. Please choose a different name.&quot;

=== Be aware of whitespace and line breaks === &lt;!--T:765--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:766--&gt; MediaWiki's localised messages usually get edited within the wiki, either by wiki operations on live wikis, or by the translators on [[translatewiki.net]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:767--&gt; You should be aware of how whitespace, especially at the beginning or end of your message, will affect editors:&lt;/translate&gt;

* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:785--&gt; Spaces and line breaks (new lines) at the end of the message are always automatically removed by the wikitext editor. Your message must not end with a space or line break, as it will be lost when it's edited on the wiki.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:786--&gt; Spaces and line breaks at the beginning are not automatically removed, but they are likely to be removed by accident during editing, and should be avoided.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:768--&gt;
Start and end your message with active text; if you need a newline or paragraph break around it, your surrounding code should deal with adding it to the returned text.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:796--&gt; There are some messages which require a space at the end, such as 'word-separator' (which consists of just a space character in most languages).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:797--&gt; To support such use cases, the following HTML entities are allowed in messages and transformed to the actual characters, even if the message otherwise doesn't allow wikitext or HTML formatting:&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/REL1_34/includes/cache/MessageCache.php#L887&lt;/ref&gt;

* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#32;&lt;/code&gt; – &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:798--&gt; space&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:799--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#160;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; – [[w:non-breaking space|non-breaking space]]&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:800--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;shy;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; – [[w:soft hyphen|soft hyphen]]&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:801--&gt; On a related note, any other syntax elements affected by [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/pre-save transforms&lt;/tvar&gt;|pre-save transforms]] also must not be used in messages, as they will be transformed when the message is edited on the wiki.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Use standard capitalisation === &lt;!--T:769--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:770--&gt; Capitalisation gives hints to translators as to what they are translating, such as single words, list or menu items, phrases, or full sentences.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:771--&gt; Correct (standard) capitalisation may also play a role in search engines' assessment of your pages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:772--&gt; MediaWiki uses [[w:Letter case|sentence case]] (''The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog'') in interface messages.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:773--&gt; Always remember that many writing systems don't have capital letters at all, and some of those that do have them, use them differently from English.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:774--&gt; Therefore, don't use ALL-CAPS for emphasis.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:775--&gt; Use CSS, or HTML {{tag|em|open}} or {{tag|strong|open}} per below:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Emphasis ==== &lt;!--T:776--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:777--&gt; In normal text, [[w:Emphasis|emphasis]] like '''boldface''' or ''italics'' and similar should be part of message texts.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:778--&gt; Local conventions on emphasis often vary, especially some Asian scripts have their own.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:779--&gt; Translators must be able to adjust emphasis to their target languages and areas.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:780--&gt; Try to use &quot;{{tag|em|open}}&quot; and &quot;{{tag|strong|open}}&quot; in your user interface to allow mark-up on a per language or per script basis.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:781--&gt; In modern screen layouts of English and European styles, emphasis becomes less used.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:782--&gt; Do convey it in your [[#Message documentation]] still, as it may give valuable hints as to how to translate.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:783--&gt; Emphasis can and should be used in other cultural contexts as appropriate, provided that translators know about it.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;references /&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== See also == &lt;!--T:13--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

* {{ll|Customization}}
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings}}
* {{ll|Manual:Skins}}
* {{ll|Manual:Messages API}}
* {{ll|Localisation}}
* [[translatewiki:FAQ]]

[[Category:Customization techniques{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:User interface{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Localisation{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:System message{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7we1q4t9cbt7sknybd2cqt05689bl1w</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/fr</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>19489</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402244</id>
      <parentid>5400737</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12700" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=L'information actualisée est disponible sur Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

En cliquant sur le lien [[Special:preferences|Préférences]] en haut à droite pendant que vous êtes connecté, vous pouvez modifier vos préférences.
Vous obtiendrez la section Profil utilisateur, ainsi qu'une barre d'onglets en haut pour modifier les autres types de paramètres.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Votre nom d'utilisateur. Seuls les utilisateurs de confiance peuvent changer votre nom d'utilisateur, et le wiki doit également avoir l'extension {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} installée.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Liste des groupes d'utilisateurs auxquels vous appartenez.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Sur les wikis de Wikimedia, ce lien vous permet de gérer les applications externes autorisées à accéder à votre compte. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Voir [[Help:OAuth|l'aide OAuth]] pour plus d'informations.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Combien de modifications vous avez effectuées. Pas présent sur tous les wikis.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || Temps pendant lequel votre compte a été enregistré.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|voir ci-dessous]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|voir ci-dessous]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Gérer l'authentification à deux facteurs.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Gérer les préférences globales.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Pour modifier votre mot de passe, entrez votre ancien mot de passe dans la première case et votre nouveau mot de passe dans les deux dernières.
Si vous souhaitez que ce site se souvienne de votre connexion, cochez la case « Se souvenir de mon identifiant sur cet ordinateur ».
Notez bien que cette fonction vous oblige à avoir les cookies activés dans votre navigateur et que, si votre cookie est effacé ou expire, vous ne serez plus mémorisé.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Compte global ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
A partir de vos préférences, vous pouvez sélectionner la langue dans laquelle vous souhaitez que l'interface s'affiche.
Seuls les boutons comme 'édition' et 'discussion', en plus de quelques pages dans la barre latérale, seront affectés.
Le texte principal des pages ne sera pas modifié par cela pour la grande majorité des pages, bien qu'il y ait quelques pages où il le sera, comme dans  Wikimedia Meta Wiki.

* Langues 
* Comment préférez-vous être décrit ?
* Davantage de paramètres de langue

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Votre signature existante
* Nouvelle signature
** Traiter comme du texte wiki

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Si vous avez fourni une adresse courriel, vous devrez cliquer sur le bouton « vérifier l'adresse » afin d'utiliser ces fonctions. Vous recevrez un courriel; il suffira de l'ouvrir et de suivre le lien pour activer les fonctions suivantes.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| confirmation du courriel ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || Ceci permet aux autres utilisateurs enregistrés de vous envoyer un courriel en utilisant le lien ''{{int|emailuser}}'' de la barre latérale de votre page utilisateur. Les courriels sont envoyés par l'interface web, et votre adresse n'est pas révélée à l'émetteur tant que vous ne répondez pas par courriel.
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Ceci permet aux utilisateurs qui ne sont pas autoconfirmés de vous envoyer des courriels.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Cette option vous permet de spécifier quels utilisateurs ne pourront pas vous envoyer de courriels directement. Ils ne verront pas le lien &quot;Envoyer un courriel à cet utilisateur&quot;, dans la barre latérale de votre page utilisateur. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Ici vous pouvez choisir l'habillage que vous souhaitez utiliser. Vous pouvez prévisualiser les habillages disponibles avant de les choisir, en cliquant sur le lien «{{int|skin-preview}} » à côté de chaque habillage. Veuillez vous référer à {{ll|Help:Skins}} pour plus de détails.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Format de la date et décalage horaire ===

Ce qui suit est normalement rendu selon les préférences :

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Ici vous pouvez déterminer comment les images seront affichées. Les images affichées par collage direct d'une URL (si le wiki l'a activé) ne seront pas affectées par ce paramètre.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Ce paramètre vous permet de choisir la taille des prévisualisations d'images sur les pages Image :. Si vous connaissez la résolution actuelle de votre écran vous pouvez vouloir la redéfinir à une ou deux tailles en dessous de l'actuelle. Si vous avez une connexion lente (par exemple, via une ligne téléphonique), vous pouvez la limiter à 320 × 240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Définit la taille de l'affichage des vignettes. Ce réglage n'affectera pas les vignettes avec les dimensions déterminées par un éditeur, ni les images au-delà de leurs dimensions d'origine.
* Utiliser l'afficheur de média (Media Viewer): sur les wikis Wikimedia, ce paramètre (activé par défaut) détermine si le [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] doit être utilisé pour fournir une expérience plus agréable de l'affichage des images.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Ici vous pouvez contrôler comment les équations mathématiques décrites en utilisant la balise {{tag|math|open}} sont affichées.
Les formules mathématiques téléchargées sous forme d'images ou écrites en dehors de la balise mathématique ne seront pas affectées par ce paramètre.
Notez que les préférences mathématiques ne seront visibles que si {{ll|Extension:Math}} est installée.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Ce sont les paramètres permettant de contrôler les pages d'édition, y compris  la possibilité de visualiser automatiquement les pages que vous avez modifiées ou créées.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Ici, vous pouvez spécifier la profondeur des dates des pages de [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|modifications récentes]]. Notez que la liste s'arrêtera prématurément si le nombre de modifications est dépassé (voir ci-dessous).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Ici, vous pouvez spécifier le nombre de modifications à afficher.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Cela permet de masquer les modifications marquées comme mineures (voir {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Étant donné que certains utilisateurs vont rapidement faire beaucoup de petits ajustements pour mettre à jour les modèles ou corriger les erreurs d'orthographe, vous trouverez peut-être que c'est utile. Vous pouvez également activer cette option temporairement depuis la page des modifications récentes (voir {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Les modifications récentes améliorées condensent les modifications dans une liste par page. Comme indiqué, cela requiert que JavaScript soit activé. Voir {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} pour plus d'informations sur cette fonctionnalité.
* Afficher les modifications de Wikidata dans les modifications récentes: sur les projets Wikimedia sélectionnés où des données de [[d:|Wikidata]] sont disponibles, cette option vous permet de voir les modifications apportées aux éléments Wikidata connectés aux pages de votre wiki, ainsi que les modifications apportées aux pages du wiki elles-mêmes. Cela peut aider à détecter le vandalisme sur Wikidata qui pourrait être vu sur votre wiki.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Celles-ci sont les options qui contrôlent le comportement de la liste de suivi (voir {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
La plupart de ces options aussi sont disponibles dans le même écran que la liste de suivi, mais en les déclarant dans vos préférences, vous contrôlerez le comportement par défaut de la liste de suivi, c'est à dire que les mêmes actions seront exécutées à chaque fois que visiterez la page.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Afficher les modifications de Wikidata dans votre liste de suivi: sur les projets Wikimedia sélectionnés où des données de [[d:|Wikidata]] sont disponibles, cette option vous permet de voir les modifications apportées aux éléments Wikidata connectés aux pages de votre wiki, ainsi que les modifications apportées au pages wiki elles-mêmes. Cela peut aider à détecter le vandalisme sur Wikidata qui pourrait être vu sur votre wiki.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Jeton de la liste de suivi: ce jeton est utilisé pour générer un [[w:en:RSS feed|flux RSS]] à partir de votre liste de suivi. Quiconque connaît ce jeton peut l'utiliser pour accéder à votre liste de suivi. Si le jeton est découvert par quelqu'un d'autre, vous pouvez utiliser le lien &quot;Cliquez ici si vous devez le réinitialiser&quot; pour créer un nouveau jeton. Une fois cela fait, vous devrez modifier l'URL de votre abonnement à un flux dans votre lecteur de flux pour tenir compte du nouveau jeton.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Paramètres par défaut pour les recherches, y compris le nombre de résultats à afficher et la quantité de contexte à afficher pour chaque résultat.
Cochez les cases à côté des espaces de noms que vous souhaitez afficher, la première fois que vous recherchez quelque chose.
Vous pouvez modifier cela lors d'une recherche réelle, en cochant ou en décochant les cases en bas de l'écran des résultats de recherche.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
Sur les wikis Wikimedia, l'onglet '''Fonctionnalités Bêta''' vous permet d'activer les fonctionnalités expérimentales avant qu'elles ne soient mises à disposition pour tous.
Si vous choisissez d'activer l'une de ces fonctionnalités, vous devriez être prêt à rencontrer des bogues et des problèmes, et vous pourrez constater des changements soudains dans l'apparence ou l'exécution de la fonctionnalité au fur et à mesure du développement.

Chaque fonction possède un lien &quot;discussion&quot; à côté d'elle, pour que vous puissiez proposer vos suggestions ou signaler tout problème.

Voir [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|A propos des fonctionnalités bêta]] pour plus d'informations.

* Active automatiquement toutes les nouvelles fonctionalités bêta: si vous activez cette option, les nouvelles fonctionalités bêta deviendront actives pour vous dès qu'elles seront ajoutées au système des fonctionalités bêta.

== Voir aussi ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ez2gbx05018bafdn0rea32gg1t1ezmk</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402293</id>
      <parentid>5402244</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:05:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12650" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=L'information actualisée est disponible sur Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

En cliquant sur le lien [[Special:preferences|Préférences]] en haut à droite pendant que vous êtes connecté, vous pouvez modifier vos préférences.
Vous obtiendrez la section Profil utilisateur, ainsi qu'une barre d'onglets en haut pour modifier les autres types de paramètres.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Votre nom d'utilisateur. Seuls les utilisateurs de confiance peuvent changer votre nom d'utilisateur, et le wiki doit également avoir l'extension {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} installée.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Liste des groupes d'utilisateurs auxquels vous appartenez.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Sur les wikis de Wikimedia, ce lien vous permet de gérer les applications externes autorisées à accéder à votre compte. Voir {{ll|Help:OAuth}} pour plus d'informations.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Combien de modifications vous avez effectuées. Pas présent sur tous les wikis.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || Temps pendant lequel votre compte a été enregistré.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|voir ci-dessous]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|voir ci-dessous]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Gérer l'authentification à deux facteurs.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Gérer les préférences globales.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Pour modifier votre mot de passe, entrez votre ancien mot de passe dans la première case et votre nouveau mot de passe dans les deux dernières.
Si vous souhaitez que ce site se souvienne de votre connexion, cochez la case « Se souvenir de mon identifiant sur cet ordinateur ».
Notez bien que cette fonction vous oblige à avoir les cookies activés dans votre navigateur et que, si votre cookie est effacé ou expire, vous ne serez plus mémorisé.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Compte global ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
A partir de vos préférences, vous pouvez sélectionner la langue dans laquelle vous souhaitez que l'interface s'affiche.
Seuls les boutons comme 'édition' et 'discussion', en plus de quelques pages dans la barre latérale, seront affectés.
Le texte principal des pages ne sera pas modifié par cela pour la grande majorité des pages, bien qu'il y ait quelques pages où il le sera, comme dans  Wikimedia Meta Wiki.

* Langues 
* Comment préférez-vous être décrit ?
* Davantage de paramètres de langue

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Votre signature existante
* Nouvelle signature
** Traiter comme du texte wiki

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Si vous avez fourni une adresse courriel, vous devrez cliquer sur le bouton « vérifier l'adresse » afin d'utiliser ces fonctions. Vous recevrez un courriel; il suffira de l'ouvrir et de suivre le lien pour activer les fonctions suivantes.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| confirmation du courriel ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || Ceci permet aux autres utilisateurs enregistrés de vous envoyer un courriel en utilisant le lien ''{{int|emailuser}}'' de la barre latérale de votre page utilisateur. Les courriels sont envoyés par l'interface web, et votre adresse n'est pas révélée à l'émetteur tant que vous ne répondez pas par courriel.
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Ceci permet aux utilisateurs qui ne sont pas autoconfirmés de vous envoyer des courriels.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Cette option vous permet de spécifier quels utilisateurs ne pourront pas vous envoyer de courriels directement. Ils ne verront pas le lien &quot;Envoyer un courriel à cet utilisateur&quot;, dans la barre latérale de votre page utilisateur. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Ici vous pouvez choisir l'habillage que vous souhaitez utiliser. Vous pouvez prévisualiser les habillages disponibles avant de les choisir, en cliquant sur le lien «{{int|skin-preview}} » à côté de chaque habillage. Veuillez vous référer à {{ll|Help:Skins}} pour plus de détails.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Format de la date et décalage horaire ===

Ce qui suit est normalement rendu selon les préférences :

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Ici vous pouvez déterminer comment les images seront affichées. Les images affichées par collage direct d'une URL (si le wiki l'a activé) ne seront pas affectées par ce paramètre.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Ce paramètre vous permet de choisir la taille des prévisualisations d'images sur les pages Image :. Si vous connaissez la résolution actuelle de votre écran vous pouvez vouloir la redéfinir à une ou deux tailles en dessous de l'actuelle. Si vous avez une connexion lente (par exemple, via une ligne téléphonique), vous pouvez la limiter à 320 × 240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Définit la taille de l'affichage des vignettes. Ce réglage n'affectera pas les vignettes avec les dimensions déterminées par un éditeur, ni les images au-delà de leurs dimensions d'origine.
* Utiliser l'afficheur de média (Media Viewer): sur les wikis Wikimedia, ce paramètre (activé par défaut) détermine si le [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] doit être utilisé pour fournir une expérience plus agréable de l'affichage des images.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Ici vous pouvez contrôler comment les équations mathématiques décrites en utilisant la balise {{tag|math|open}} sont affichées.
Les formules mathématiques téléchargées sous forme d'images ou écrites en dehors de la balise mathématique ne seront pas affectées par ce paramètre.
Notez que les préférences mathématiques ne seront visibles que si {{ll|Extension:Math}} est installée.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Ce sont les paramètres permettant de contrôler les pages d'édition, y compris  la possibilité de visualiser automatiquement les pages que vous avez modifiées ou créées.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Ici, vous pouvez spécifier la profondeur des dates des pages de [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|modifications récentes]]. Notez que la liste s'arrêtera prématurément si le nombre de modifications est dépassé (voir ci-dessous).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Ici, vous pouvez spécifier le nombre de modifications à afficher.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Cela permet de masquer les modifications marquées comme mineures (voir {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Étant donné que certains utilisateurs vont rapidement faire beaucoup de petits ajustements pour mettre à jour les modèles ou corriger les erreurs d'orthographe, vous trouverez peut-être que c'est utile. Vous pouvez également activer cette option temporairement depuis la page des modifications récentes (voir {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Les modifications récentes améliorées condensent les modifications dans une liste par page. Comme indiqué, cela requiert que JavaScript soit activé. Voir {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} pour plus d'informations sur cette fonctionnalité.
* Afficher les modifications de Wikidata dans les modifications récentes: sur les projets Wikimedia sélectionnés où des données de [[d:|Wikidata]] sont disponibles, cette option vous permet de voir les modifications apportées aux éléments Wikidata connectés aux pages de votre wiki, ainsi que les modifications apportées aux pages du wiki elles-mêmes. Cela peut aider à détecter le vandalisme sur Wikidata qui pourrait être vu sur votre wiki.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Celles-ci sont les options qui contrôlent le comportement de la liste de suivi (voir {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
La plupart de ces options aussi sont disponibles dans le même écran que la liste de suivi, mais en les déclarant dans vos préférences, vous contrôlerez le comportement par défaut de la liste de suivi, c'est à dire que les mêmes actions seront exécutées à chaque fois que visiterez la page.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Afficher les modifications de Wikidata dans votre liste de suivi: sur les projets Wikimedia sélectionnés où des données de [[d:|Wikidata]] sont disponibles, cette option vous permet de voir les modifications apportées aux éléments Wikidata connectés aux pages de votre wiki, ainsi que les modifications apportées au pages wiki elles-mêmes. Cela peut aider à détecter le vandalisme sur Wikidata qui pourrait être vu sur votre wiki.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Jeton de la liste de suivi: ce jeton est utilisé pour générer un [[w:en:RSS feed|flux RSS]] à partir de votre liste de suivi. Quiconque connaît ce jeton peut l'utiliser pour accéder à votre liste de suivi. Si le jeton est découvert par quelqu'un d'autre, vous pouvez utiliser le lien &quot;Cliquez ici si vous devez le réinitialiser&quot; pour créer un nouveau jeton. Une fois cela fait, vous devrez modifier l'URL de votre abonnement à un flux dans votre lecteur de flux pour tenir compte du nouveau jeton.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Paramètres par défaut pour les recherches, y compris le nombre de résultats à afficher et la quantité de contexte à afficher pour chaque résultat.
Cochez les cases à côté des espaces de noms que vous souhaitez afficher, la première fois que vous recherchez quelque chose.
Vous pouvez modifier cela lors d'une recherche réelle, en cochant ou en décochant les cases en bas de l'écran des résultats de recherche.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
Sur les wikis Wikimedia, l'onglet '''Fonctionnalités Bêta''' vous permet d'activer les fonctionnalités expérimentales avant qu'elles ne soient mises à disposition pour tous.
Si vous choisissez d'activer l'une de ces fonctionnalités, vous devriez être prêt à rencontrer des bogues et des problèmes, et vous pourrez constater des changements soudains dans l'apparence ou l'exécution de la fonctionnalité au fur et à mesure du développement.

Chaque fonction possède un lien &quot;discussion&quot; à côté d'elle, pour que vous puissiez proposer vos suggestions ou signaler tout problème.

Voir [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|A propos des fonctionnalités bêta]] pour plus d'informations.

* Active automatiquement toutes les nouvelles fonctionalités bêta: si vous activez cette option, les nouvelles fonctionalités bêta deviendront actives pour vous dès qu'elles seront ajoutées au système des fonctionalités bêta.

== Voir aussi ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>gclt7htgpgxh5q3xebdg13bmnje0z4t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Installing MediaWiki/fr</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>20055</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402875</id>
      <parentid>5387496</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:41:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13900" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;MediaWiki peut sembler difficile à installer pour un utilisateur moyen qui n'a pas d'expérience Apache, PHP ou MySQL/MariaDB.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Télécharger le logiciel MediaWiki ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Download the MediaWiki tar file from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|official download page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally, if you're using a production environment, you want to be running the latest stable release, which is MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extract the MediaWiki software ==
&lt;/div&gt;
Le fichier téléchargé est dans le format &lt;code&gt;.zip&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to uncompress this archive file before use.&lt;/span&gt;
Vous pouvez décompresser le fichier localement (puis téléversér vers le serveur via FTP) ou directement sur votre serveur.

Ceci est habituellement fait avec un logiciel du type [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (gratuit), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] ou [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] (gratuit) sous Windows.

Sous Linux et Mac OS X, vous pouvez décompresser le fichier en usant la commande :
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

== Téléverser les fichiers sur votre serveur ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Si vous n'avez pas encore téléversé les fichiers sur votre serveur web, c'est le moment de le faire.
&lt;/div&gt;

Téléversez les fichiers vers le répertoire web de votre serveur web soit en :

# copiant directement le répertoire décompressé, soit
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# en utilisant un client FTP tel que [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (logiciel Open Source, Windows, OSX et Linux) ou [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (OSX).
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;by using software already provided by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting service]], such as the ''cPanel File Manager''&lt;/span&gt;

Si votre outil de téléversement possède une option « modifier les noms de fichiers en minuscules », vous devez le désactiver.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si vous avez installé Apache, le répertoire correct est spécifié dans votre fichier &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; (c'est la directive [$docroot DocumentRoot], généralement $1 ou {{$2|dossier-apache}}). C'est la racine principale de l'arborescence des documents visible depuis internet.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;{{note|Ceci a changé dans Ubuntu 14.04 avec Apache 2.4.7 où le fichier de configuration principal pour les paramètres du serveur Apache et les répertoires est &lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt;.}}&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

Renommez le répertoire téléversé selon le nom que vous voulez avoir dans l'URL.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si votre serveur web fonctionne en tant que &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt; par exemple, le renommer en &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt; voudrait dire que vous accèderiez à votre wiki avec &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''''N'utilisez pas $wiki si vous souhaitez l'utiliser comme [[$short-url|URL courte]].'''''&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Créer une base de données ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki vous demandera une base de données et un nom d'utilisateur et tentera de les créer s'ils n'existent pas déjà.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Si vous disposez déjà d'un serveur de base de données et connaissez le mot de passe root pour y accéder, le script d'installation de MediaWiki peut créer une nouvelle base de données pour vous.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Si vous ne connaissez pas le mot de passe root, par exemple si vous vous trouvez sur un serveur hébergé, vous devez créer une nouvelle base de données dès maintenant.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A ce moment, vous devrez utiliser SQLite, MariaDB/MySQL ou Postgres pour stocker le contenu actuel de votre wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si vous ne savez pas de quelle base de données il s'agit, choisissez MariaDB car c'est celle qui est la mieux prise en charge par MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Sur la page d'installation, vous aurez besoin de choisir un nom de base de données (c'est vous qui voyez) et le répertoire de la base de données SQLite.&lt;/span&gt;
Pour le répertoire de la base de données, l'installateur tentera d'utiliser un sous-répertoire en dehors de la racine des documents ou le créera si nécessaire.
Si ce répertoire n'est pas sécurisé (par exemple, lisible à partir du web), modifiez le manuellement pour empêcher de le rendre accessible à chacun à partir du web.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Voir la documentation associée.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Autrement, contactez votre fournisseur d'hébergement pour lui demander de vous créer un compte.&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Si votre base de données ne s'exécute pas sur le même serveur que votre serveur web, vous devez indiquer le nom d'hôte du serveur web approprié &amp;mdash; mediawiki.exemple.com dans l'exemple suivant &amp;mdash; comme suit :
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=MySQL et MariaDB enregistrent toutes les requêtes dans un fichier historique, ce qui incluera le mot de passe  utilisé pour le compte utilisateur. Si cela vous concerne, supprimez et désactivez le fichier &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt; après avoir exécuté ces requêtes en suivant la [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/mysql-logging.html#mysql-logging-history-file documentation MySQL].}}

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si vous utilisez PostgreSQL, vous aurez besoin soit de vous faire créer un utilisateur et une base de données ou simplement de donner le nom d'un utilisateur PostgreSQL avec les droits de ''superuser'' au script d'installation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;L'utilisateur de la base de données ayant ces privilèges s'appelle souvent '''postgres'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, and a database named &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; owned by the user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser (puis entrez le mot de passe)
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

Ou bien en tant que superutilisateur (par defaut postgres) exécutez les commandes suivantes à l'invite de la base de données :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Faites attention à la [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|liste des problèmes connus lorsque MediaWiki  s'exécute avec PostgreSQL]].

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== Exécuter le script d'installation ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Une fois toutes les étapes ci-dessus achevées, vous pouvez terminer l'installation depuis un navigateur web en vous rendant à l'URL index.php dans votre navigateur — voir les instructions dans {{ll|Manual:Config script}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Pour aller plus loin ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additional configuration&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wiki administration&lt;/span&gt;
== Restez à jour ! ==
Une fois installé, assurez-vous de rester à jour au niveau des versions et gardez votre serveur sécurisé !
{{Clickable button 2|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$maillist|Abonnez-vous à notre liste de diffusion concernant les annonces de diffusion des versions.]]&lt;/span&gt;|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Appendices ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/span&gt;
:{{Note|1=Au moment de créer le compte initial, utilisez un mot de passe dont vous vous souviendrez.}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== System-specific instructions  ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The pages listed on {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First consult {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Voir aussi ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>he0uzdy7qr7peeu80vcz9md7l0wha2k</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402885</id>
      <parentid>5402875</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:42:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14017" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;MediaWiki peut sembler difficile à installer pour un utilisateur moyen qui n'a pas d'expérience Apache, PHP ou MySQL/MariaDB.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Télécharger le logiciel MediaWiki ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Download the MediaWiki tar file from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|official download page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally, if you're using a production environment, you want to be running the latest stable release, which is MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extract the MediaWiki software ==
&lt;/div&gt;
Le fichier téléchargé est dans le format &lt;code&gt;.zip&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to uncompress this archive file before use.&lt;/span&gt;
Vous pouvez décompresser le fichier localement (puis téléversér vers le serveur via FTP) ou directement sur votre serveur.

Ceci est habituellement fait avec un logiciel du type [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (gratuit), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] ou [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] (gratuit) sous Windows.

Sous Linux et Mac OS X, vous pouvez décompresser le fichier en usant la commande :
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

== Téléverser les fichiers sur votre serveur ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Si vous n'avez pas encore téléversé les fichiers sur votre serveur web, c'est le moment de le faire.
&lt;/div&gt;

Téléversez les fichiers vers le répertoire web de votre serveur web soit en :

# copiant directement le répertoire décompressé, soit
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# en utilisant un client FTP tel que [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (logiciel Open Source, Windows, OSX et Linux) ou [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (OSX).
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;by using software already provided by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting service]], such as the ''cPanel File Manager''&lt;/span&gt;

Si votre outil de téléversement possède une option « modifier les noms de fichiers en minuscules », vous devez le désactiver.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si vous avez installé Apache, le répertoire correct est spécifié dans votre fichier &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; (c'est la directive [$docroot DocumentRoot], généralement $1 ou {{$2|dossier-apache}}). C'est la racine principale de l'arborescence des documents visible depuis internet.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;{{note|Ceci a changé dans Ubuntu 14.04 avec Apache 2.4.7 où le fichier de configuration principal pour les paramètres du serveur Apache et les répertoires est &lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt;.}}&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

Renommez le répertoire téléversé selon le nom que vous voulez avoir dans l'URL.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si votre serveur web fonctionne en tant que &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt; par exemple, le renommer en &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt; voudrait dire que vous accèderiez à votre wiki avec &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not use &lt;code&gt;/wiki/&lt;/code&gt; if you want to set it up as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|Short URL]] after running the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script|installation script]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Créer une base de données ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki vous demandera une base de données et un nom d'utilisateur et tentera de les créer s'ils n'existent pas déjà.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Si vous disposez déjà d'un serveur de base de données et connaissez le mot de passe root pour y accéder, le script d'installation de MediaWiki peut créer une nouvelle base de données pour vous.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Si vous ne connaissez pas le mot de passe root, par exemple si vous vous trouvez sur un serveur hébergé, vous devez créer une nouvelle base de données dès maintenant.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A ce moment, vous devrez utiliser SQLite, MariaDB/MySQL ou Postgres pour stocker le contenu actuel de votre wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si vous ne savez pas de quelle base de données il s'agit, choisissez MariaDB car c'est celle qui est la mieux prise en charge par MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Sur la page d'installation, vous aurez besoin de choisir un nom de base de données (c'est vous qui voyez) et le répertoire de la base de données SQLite.&lt;/span&gt;
Pour le répertoire de la base de données, l'installateur tentera d'utiliser un sous-répertoire en dehors de la racine des documents ou le créera si nécessaire.
Si ce répertoire n'est pas sécurisé (par exemple, lisible à partir du web), modifiez le manuellement pour empêcher de le rendre accessible à chacun à partir du web.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Voir la documentation associée.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Autrement, contactez votre fournisseur d'hébergement pour lui demander de vous créer un compte.&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Si votre base de données ne s'exécute pas sur le même serveur que votre serveur web, vous devez indiquer le nom d'hôte du serveur web approprié &amp;mdash; mediawiki.exemple.com dans l'exemple suivant &amp;mdash; comme suit :
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=MySQL et MariaDB enregistrent toutes les requêtes dans un fichier historique, ce qui incluera le mot de passe  utilisé pour le compte utilisateur. Si cela vous concerne, supprimez et désactivez le fichier &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt; après avoir exécuté ces requêtes en suivant la [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/mysql-logging.html#mysql-logging-history-file documentation MySQL].}}

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si vous utilisez PostgreSQL, vous aurez besoin soit de vous faire créer un utilisateur et une base de données ou simplement de donner le nom d'un utilisateur PostgreSQL avec les droits de ''superuser'' au script d'installation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;L'utilisateur de la base de données ayant ces privilèges s'appelle souvent '''postgres'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, and a database named &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; owned by the user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser (puis entrez le mot de passe)
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

Ou bien en tant que superutilisateur (par defaut postgres) exécutez les commandes suivantes à l'invite de la base de données :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Faites attention à la [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|liste des problèmes connus lorsque MediaWiki  s'exécute avec PostgreSQL]].

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== Exécuter le script d'installation ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Une fois toutes les étapes ci-dessus achevées, vous pouvez terminer l'installation depuis un navigateur web en vous rendant à l'URL index.php dans votre navigateur — voir les instructions dans {{ll|Manual:Config script}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Pour aller plus loin ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additional configuration&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wiki administration&lt;/span&gt;
== Restez à jour ! ==
Une fois installé, assurez-vous de rester à jour au niveau des versions et gardez votre serveur sécurisé !
{{Clickable button 2|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$maillist|Abonnez-vous à notre liste de diffusion concernant les annonces de diffusion des versions.]]&lt;/span&gt;|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Appendices ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/span&gt;
:{{Note|1=Au moment de créer le compte initial, utilisez un mot de passe dont vous vous souviendrez.}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== System-specific instructions  ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The pages listed on {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First consult {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Voir aussi ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>l9ipivw18vqje05d1lg2hxxoj5iyqof</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/ja</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>20701</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402252</id>
      <parentid>5400742</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13340" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=更新された情報はMeta:[[m:Help:Preferences]]にあります。}}

ログイン後、各種設定を変更するために上部右側にある[[Special:preferences|個人設定]]のリンクをクリックしてください。
各種設定を変更するための項目が複数表示され、ページを開いた時点で利用者情報のタブが選択されています。

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || あなたの利用者名です。承認された利用者のみがあなたの利用者名を変更でき、さらに利用者名変更は、ウィキに {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} 拡張機能がインストール済みという条件があります。
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || あなたが所属している利用者グループの一覧です。
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Wikimedia Wikiでは、このリンクを使用して、あなたのアカウントへのアクセスが許可されている外部アプリケーションを管理することができます。 詳細情報は {{ll|Help:OAuth}} を参照してください。
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || あなたが編集を行なった回数。すべてのウィキにこの項目があるとは限りません。
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || アカウント作成の日時。
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|下記参照]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|下記参照]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || 二段階認証の設定を調整します。
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || グローバルな個人設定を調整します。
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
パスワードを変更するには、最初の入力ボックスの中に古い(現在の)パスワードを入力し、続く 2 つの入力ボックスに新しいパスワードを入力します。
ログイン情報をこのサイトに記憶させておくには、「セッションを越えてパスワードを記憶する」をクリックします。
この機能を有効にするには、ご利用のブラウザーの Cookie を有効にする必要があることと、さらに情報を記憶させても、Cookie の消去または有効期限切れが原因で無効となることにご注意ください。

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== グローバルアカウント ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
個人設定でインターフェイスの表示言語を選択できます。
サイドバーのいくつかのページの他に影響を受けるのは「編集」や「議論」といったボタンに限定されます。
それでも本文表示は大多数のページでは変わりませんが、たとえばウィキメディアのメタ・ウィキで見るように、それが変わることはあります。

* 言語
* 性別の表現は何を選びますか？
*その他の言語設定

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
*あなたの既存の署名
*新しい署名
**ウィキテキストとして扱う

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
メールアドレスを入力した場合、「メールアドレスを確認」するというボタンをクリックして、これらの機能を使用する準備をする必要があります。確認メールが届いたら開封し、リンクを開くと、以下のオプション機能を有効にする手続きに入ります。

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| メール認証 ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || これにより、あなたの利用者ページを訪問した登録利用者がサイドバーにある「{{int|emailuser}}」リンクを押すと、あなたにメールを送信できるようになります。メール送信にはWebインターフェイスが使われるため、送信者にあなたのメールアドレスが知られることはありません。もしあなたが受信メールに返信すると、アドレスが相手に表示されます。
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || この方法があるから、自動承認されていない利用者でも他の利用者にメールを送ることができます。
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
ここで、使用したい外装を選択できます。それぞれの外装の隣にある「{{int|skin-preview}}」リンクをクリックすることで外装を選択する前にプレビューできます。詳細は {{ll|Help:Skins}} を参照。

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== 日時の書式と時刻オフセット ===

個人設定の設定内容によりますが、通常は以下のように表示されます:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
ここで、画像の表示方法を指定できます。URL を直接貼り付けて表示した画像 (ウィキがそれを有効にしている場合) にはこの指定は影響しません。

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - この設定で、画像ページでのイメージプレビューをどの大きさにするかを選ぶことが出来ます。あなたの現在の画面解像度がわかっているなら、自分の画面より多少小さいサイズにこれを設定するのがよいかもしれません。(ダイヤルアップなどの)遅い接続環境でしたら320×240のサイズを設定したほうがよいでしょう。
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - サムネイルをどれくらいの大きさで表示させるかを定義してください。この設定は編集者がサイズを指定しているサムネイルには影響しませんし、オリジナル以上の大きさで表示されることもありません。
* Media Viewerを使用する:Wikimedia Wikiでは、この設定（デフォルトでは）は、[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]を使用してよりスムーズな画像を表示するかどうかを決定します。

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
ここでは {{tag|math|open}} タグを用いて書かれた数学の方程式の表示方法を選択できます。
画像としてアップロードされた数式や数式タグを用いていない数式には影響しません。
なお、数式表示の設定は {{ll|Extension:Math}} がインストールされている場合のみ利用可能です。

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
編集に関する設定です。編集エリアの大きさ、保存時に自動的にページをウォッチリストに追加かなどを選べます。

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - ここで、[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|最近の更新]]ページでどのくらい先まで表示されるかを指定できます。「最近の更新の表示件数」を超えると一覧がそこで打ち切られることにご注意ください (下記参照)
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - ここで、いくつの編集を表示するかを指定できます。

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - これは、「細部の編集」の印が付けられた編集を非表示にできます ({{ll|Help:Editing pages}} を参照)。一部の利用者はテンプレートを更新するため、あるいはスペルミスの修正など、数多くの些細な編集を短時間で行うため、この機能が役立つ場合があります。「最近の更新」ページでも、一時的に同様の設定ができます ({{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} を参照)。
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - 拡張された「最近の更新」では、1つのページに対する編集を1つの一覧に凝縮して表示します。この機能を使用するには JavaScript を有効にする必要があります。この機能についての詳細情報は {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} を参照してください。
* 最近の更新にウィキデータの編集を表示：ウィキメディアの特定のプロジェクトでは[[d:|Wikidata]]のデータが利用でき、このオプションを使ってご利用のウィキページ自体に加え、連携するウィキデータ項目の変更が確認できます。ご利用のウィキで発生した不正行為が、ウィキデータからの反映だと判断することができます。

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
ウォッチリストに関する設定を行います ({{ll|Help:Watchlist}} 参照)。
ほとんどの設定はウォッチリストのページでも変更できますが、個人設定で初期値を設定することで、毎回、好みの設定でウォッチリストを表示させることができます。

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* 最近の更新にウィキデータの編集を表示：ウィキメディアの特定のプロジェクトでは[[d:|Wikidata]]のデータが利用でき、このオプションを使ってご利用のウィキページ自体に加え、連携するウィキデータ項目の変更が確認できます。 これはWikidataの不正行為があなたのwikiに反映したかどうか判断できます。

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* ウォッチリストのトークン：このトークンを使い、皆さんのウォッチリストから[[:ja:RSS feed|RSS feed]]を生成します。このトークンを知っていると誰でも皆さんのウォッチリストにアクセスできます。もし他人にこのトークンを発見された場合は、「リセットが必要な場合はここをクリック」リンクを使い、トークンを新規に発行します。この処理をすると、新しいトークンを反映するため、フィードリーダーでフィード購読のURLを編集する必要があります。

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
検索結果に表示する表示件数や、ページ内容を表示する分量等を指定します。
名前空間名の横のボックスをチェックすることで、標準で検索する名前空間を指定します。
検索結果表示画面で設定を一時的に変更できます。

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
ウィキメディア ウィキの'''ベータ機能'''タブは、一般に実装される前に実験的な拡張機能を有効にすることができます。
これら拡張機能をひとつでも有効にする前に、バグや問題が発生に対する準備をしておき、また開発が続くにつれ、特定の機能の見た目や使い心地が急に変更される可能性を理解しておいてください。

拡張機能すべての横に「議論」リンクがあり、提案や問題の報告ができます。

詳細は[[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|ベータ機能について]]を参照してください。

* すべてのベータ版機能を自動的に有効にする: このオプションを有効にした利用者は、ベータ機能システムに追加された直後に新しいベータ機能が使えるようになります。

==関連項目==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>k4n5d7cjutyysvxw1w6w05w9of6ywek</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Formatting/it</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>21568</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402917</id>
      <parentid>5380302</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;* Combina elenco puntato ** con definizione  ::- definizione ** crea spazio vuoto&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26859" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
Puoi formattare il tuo testo utilizzando il linguaggio di markup di wiki. Questo consiste in caratteri normali come asterischi, apostrofi o simboli di uguaglianza che hanno funzioni speciali in wiki, alle volte dipendenti dalla loro posizione. Per esempio, per formattare una parola in ''corsivo'' bisogna introdurre il testo da mettere in corsivo in due paia di apostrofi come ad esempio &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;''questo''&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.

==Markup di formattazione del testo==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | formattazione dei caratteri in line - &quot;si applica ovunque&quot;
|-
| Testo in corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
''corsivo''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
''corsivo''
|-
| Testo in grassetto
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''grassetto'''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''grassetto'''
|-
| Grassetto e Corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|nowiki|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|.3Cnowiki.3E}}
|-
| Ignorare il linguaggio di markup wiki
| {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|
&lt;!-- This can't use ＜syntaxhighlight＞＜nowiki＞, as that breaks the ＜translate＞ tag --&gt;
{{^(}}nowiki{{)^}}no [[wiki]] ''markup''{{^(}}/nowiki{{)^}}
| lang = &quot;html&quot;
}}
|
&lt;nowiki&gt;no [[wiki]] ''markup''&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | Formattazione della sezione - ''solo all'inizio della riga''
|-
| Intestazioni di livelli differenti 
| &lt;pre&gt;
== Livello 2 ==

=== Livello 3 ===

==== Livello 4 ====

===== Livello 5 =====

====== Livello 6 ======
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help_talk:Formatting#Level_1|Salta Livello 1]], è il livello nome della pagina.
* Non inserire alcun testo sulla stessa linea dopo i segni uguale finali.
* Un articolo con 4 o più intestazioni crea automaticamente un [[wikipedia:Help:Section#Table of contents (TOC)|indice]] (a meno che non si inserisca la parola magica &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
}}
|
&lt;!-- using HTML markup to avoid creating new sections --&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;Livello 2&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;Livello 3&lt;/h3&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;Livello 4&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Livello 5&lt;/h5&gt;

&lt;h6&gt;Livello 6&lt;/h6&gt;
|-
| Riga orizzontale
| &lt;pre&gt;
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
|-
| Elenco puntato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto

* combine bullet list
** with definition 
*:- definition
** without empty spaces

*bullet list
:- definition
:* sublist that doesn't create empty
:* spaces after definition
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* combine bullet list
** with definition 
::- definition
** creates empty space
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* combine bullet list
** with definition 
*:- definition
** without empty spaces
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*bullet list
:- definition
:* sublist that doesn't create empty
:* spaces after definition
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| Elenco numerato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;#&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&lt;nowiki&gt;#&lt;/nowiki&gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|Definition list}}
|-
| Lista di definizioni
| &lt;pre&gt;
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
; oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{note|1=Se la linea inizia con un punto e virgola (;), ogni due punti (:) inserito al termine di essa non verrà mostrato. Se vuoi che i due punti vengano mostrati, scrivili come &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#58;&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
;oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
|-
| Testo indentato
| &lt;pre&gt;
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{Note|1=Questa soluzione può danneggiare l'accessibilità}}
|
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
|-
| Mescolare differenti tipi di elenchi
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=L'utilizzo di &lt;code&gt;#:&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;*:&lt;/code&gt; per spezzare le righe di un oggetto in definizione può danneggiare l'accessibilità.}}
|
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
|-
| Testo preformattato
| &lt;pre&gt;
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=Questo modo di preformattare si applica solo alla formattazione delle sezioni. Il markup di formattazione dei caratteri è comunque attivo.}}
|
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
|-
| Blocchi di testo preformattati
| &lt;pre&gt; &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato di blocco sarà
    mantenuto.

Questo è buone per copiare blocchi di codice:

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
 {{#tag:nowiki|Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato del blocco sarà mantenuto

Questo è un buon modo per copiare blocchi di codice

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False
}}
|}

{{anchor|&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;|.3Cp.3E}}
== Paragrafi ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;|.3Cbr.3E}}
MediaWiki ignora i singoli ritorni a capo. Per iniziare un nuovo paragrafo, lascia una riga vuota. Puoi forzare un ritorno a capo all'interno di un paragrafo con il tag HTML {{tag|br|single}}.

== Tag HTML ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;|.3Cdiv.3E|&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;|.3Cspan.3E}}
Alcuni [[wikipedia:HTML|HTML]] tags sono permessi in MediaWiki, ad esempio {{tag|code|open}}, [[w:Div and span|{{tag|div|open}}, and {{tag|span|open}}]] Questi funzionano ovunque tu li inserisca.
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;|.3Cins.3E|&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;|.3Cu.3E}}
|-
| Inserito &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browsers viene mostrato come un underline)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

o

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

o

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;del&amp;gt;|.3Cdel.3E|&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;|.3Cs.3E}}
|-
| Cancellato &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browser viene mostrato come barrato)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

o

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

oppure

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|.3Ccode.3E}}
|-
| Larghezza testo fissa
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;|.3Cblockquote.3E}}
|-
| Citazione
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=Se la citazione contiene più paragrafi, le etichette devono essere su righe separate per essere visualizzati correttamente, ad esempio:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;blockquote&gt;
Primo paragrafo.

Secondo paragrafo
&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Tracked|T309778|float=none}}
}}
|
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;q&amp;gt;|.3Cq.3E}}
|-
| Citazioni
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The q element '''must not''' be used in place of quotation marks that do not represent quotes; for example, it is inappropriate to use the q element for marking up sarcastic statements.&lt;ref&gt;[https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/text-level-semantics.html#the-q-element HTML Living Standard—The &amp;lt;'''q'''&amp;gt; element]&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;/span&gt;}}
| &lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;
|-
| Commento
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;|.3Cpre.3E}}
|-
| Testo già completamente formattato
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=Per contrassegnare il testo preformattato, spuntare la voce &quot;Testo preformattato&quot; alla fine della tabella precedente.}} 
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=È possibile indicare uno stile CSS all'interno della proprietà &lt;code&gt;style&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}
continua:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; | style=&quot;table-layout: fixed; width: 100%&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Il testo preformattato di '''default''' ha un attributo CSS (&lt;code&gt;white-space: pre-wrap;&lt;/code&gt;) per avvolgere il testo in base alla larghezza disponibile
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato''' con a capo automatico '''disabilitato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}


== Inserimento di simboli ==

I simboli e gli altri caratteri speciali non disponibili sulla tastiera possono essere inseriti in molti modi diversi. Molti [http://www.howtogeek.com/210824/how-to-quickly-type-special-characters-on-any-computer-smartphone-or-tablet/ Sistemi Operativi e browser] ti consentono di inserire caratteri speciali attraverso un menu di opzioni o un pannello del Sistema Operativo. In aggiunta a ciò, puoi inserirli nella schermata di modifica usando il WikiEditor o [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]].

Come ultima risorsa, è possibile utilizzare una sequenza speciale di caratteri. Tali sequenze sono chiamate entità HTML. Per esempio, la seguente sequenza (entità) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;rarr; e '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;mdash;. 
----
{{note|1=Passare il mouse su un simbolo per scoprire l'entità che lo produce.  Alcuni simboli non disponibili nel font corrente appariranno come quadrati vuoti.}} 

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; text-align:center; font-weight:bold;&quot;
|+ &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;HTML symbol entities&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acute;&quot;&gt;&amp;acute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;AElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;AElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;aelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alefsym;&quot;&gt;&amp;alefsym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;Alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;amp;&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;and;&quot;&gt;&amp;and;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ang;&quot;&gt;&amp;ang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;asymp;&quot;&gt;&amp;asymp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;bdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;brvbar;&quot;&gt;&amp;brvbar;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bull;&quot;&gt;&amp;bull;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cap;&quot;&gt;&amp;cap;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;cedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cent;&quot;&gt;&amp;cent;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;circ;&quot;&gt;&amp;circ;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;clubs;&quot;&gt;&amp;clubs;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cong;&quot;&gt;&amp;cong;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;copy;&quot;&gt;&amp;copy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;crarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;crarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cup;&quot;&gt;&amp;cup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;curren;&quot;&gt;&amp;curren;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;Dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;darr;&quot;&gt;&amp;darr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;dArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;deg;&quot;&gt;&amp;deg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;diams;&quot;&gt;&amp;diams;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;divide;&quot;&gt;&amp;divide;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;empty;&quot;&gt;&amp;empty;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;emsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;emsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ensp;&quot;&gt;&amp;ensp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;equiv;&quot;&gt;&amp;equiv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;eta;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ETH;&quot;&gt;&amp;ETH;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eth;&quot;&gt;&amp;eth;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euro;&quot;&gt;&amp;euro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;exist;&quot;&gt;&amp;exist;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;fnof;&quot;&gt;&amp;fnof;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;forall;&quot;&gt;&amp;forall;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac12;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac12;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac14;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac14;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac34;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac34;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frasl;&quot;&gt;&amp;frasl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ge;&quot;&gt;&amp;ge;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gt;&quot;&gt;&amp;gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;harr;&quot;&gt;&amp;harr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;hArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hearts;&quot;&gt;&amp;hearts;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hellip;&quot;&gt;&amp;hellip;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iexcl;&quot;&gt;&amp;iexcl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;image;&quot;&gt;&amp;image;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;infin;&quot;&gt;&amp;infin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;int;&quot;&gt;&amp;int;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iota;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;iota;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iquest;&quot;&gt;&amp;iquest;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;isin;&quot;&gt;&amp;isin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;Kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;Lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lang;&quot;&gt;&amp;lang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;laquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;laquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;larr;&quot;&gt;&amp;larr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;lArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;lceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ldquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;ldquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;le;&quot;&gt;&amp;le;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;lfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lowast;&quot;&gt;&amp;lowast;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;loz;&quot;&gt;&amp;loz;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lrm;&quot;&gt;&amp;lrm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lt;&quot;&gt;&amp;lt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;macr;&quot;&gt;&amp;macr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mdash;&quot;&gt;&amp;mdash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;micro;&quot;&gt;&amp;micro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;middot;&quot;&gt;&amp;middot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;minus;&quot;&gt;&amp;minus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nabla;&quot;&gt;&amp;nabla;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ndash;&quot;&gt;&amp;ndash;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ne;&quot;&gt;&amp;ne;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ni;&quot;&gt;&amp;ni;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;not;&quot;&gt;&amp;not;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;notin;&quot;&gt;&amp;notin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nsub;&quot;&gt;&amp;nsub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;OElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;OElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;oelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oline;&quot;&gt;&amp;oline;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oplus;&quot;&gt;&amp;oplus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;or;&quot;&gt;&amp;or;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordf;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordm;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otimes;&quot;&gt;&amp;otimes;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;para;&quot;&gt;&amp;para;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;part;&quot;&gt;&amp;part;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;permil;&quot;&gt;&amp;permil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;perp;&quot;&gt;&amp;perp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;piv;&quot;&gt;&amp;piv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;plusmn;&quot;&gt;&amp;plusmn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pound;&quot;&gt;&amp;pound;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;Prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prod;&quot;&gt;&amp;prod;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prop;&quot;&gt;&amp;prop;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;quot;&quot;&gt;&amp;quot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;radic;&quot;&gt;&amp;radic;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rang;&quot;&gt;&amp;rang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;raquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;raquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;rceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;real;&quot;&gt;&amp;real;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;reg;&quot;&gt;&amp;reg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;rfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;Rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rlm;&quot;&gt;&amp;rlm;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sbquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;sbquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sdot;&quot;&gt;&amp;sdot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sect;&quot;&gt;&amp;sect;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;shy;&quot;&gt;&amp;shy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigmaf;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigmaf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sim;&quot;&gt;&amp;sim;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;spades;&quot;&gt;&amp;spades;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sub;&quot;&gt;&amp;sub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sube;&quot;&gt;&amp;sube;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sum;&quot;&gt;&amp;sum;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup1;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup1;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup2;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup2;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup3;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup3;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;supe;&quot;&gt;&amp;supe;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;szlig;&quot;&gt;&amp;szlig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;Tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;there4;&quot;&gt;&amp;there4;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thetasym;&quot;&gt;&amp;thetasym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thinsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;thinsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;THORN;&quot;&gt;&amp;THORN;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thorn;&quot;&gt;&amp;thorn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;tilde;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;times;&quot;&gt;&amp;times;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;trade;&quot;&gt;&amp;trade;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsih;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsih;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;weierp;&quot;&gt;&amp;weierp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yen;&quot;&gt;&amp;yen;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwj;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwnj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwnj;&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Simbolo di Copyright
|class=mw-code| &amp;amp;copy;
|
:::'''&amp;copy;'''
|-
| Simbolo lettera delta greca
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;delta;
|
:::'''&amp;delta;'''
|-
| Simbolo di valuta Euro
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;euro;
|
:::'''&amp;euro;'''
|}
Si veda la lista delle entità HTML nell'articolo Wikipedia  [[wikipedia:List of HTML entities|List of HTML entities]]. Oltre a queste, MediaWiki supporta due sequenze di riferimento ad entità: &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;רלמ;&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;رلم;&lt;/code&gt;, entrambe vengono considerate equivalenti a &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;rlm;&lt;/code&gt; che è un [[wikipedia:Right-to-left mark|right-to-left mark]]. (Utilizzata quando, nella stessa pagina, vengono combinate lingue da destra a sinistra con lingue da sinistra a destra)

== Tag HTML ed entità di simboli visualizzati tali e quali (senza interpretazione) ==
:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;amp;euro;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;amp;euro;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&amp;lt;/span&gt;'''

=== Nowiki per HTML ===
{{tag|nowiki|s}} può vietare tag (HTML):
* &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;&lt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;nowiki /&gt;pre&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &lt;&lt;nowiki/&gt;pre&gt;
Ma ''non'' &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli:
* &amp;&lt;&lt;nowiki /&gt;nowiki /&gt;amp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &amp;&lt;nowiki /&gt;amp;
Per visualizzare &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli come testo, utilizzare &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot; al posto del carattere &quot;&amp;&quot; (es. inserire &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;, che viene visualizzato come &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;).

== Altri formati ==

Oltre ai markup di formattazione del testo sopraindicati vi sono alcuni altri riferimenti:

* {{ll|Help:Links|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Lists|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Images|nsp=0}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* LanguageConverter markup – see {{ll|Writing systems/Syntax}}
&lt;/div&gt;
* Riferimenti - si veda {{ll|Extension:Cite}}
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tables|Tabelle]]

Altri riferimenti sono disponibili in {{ll|Help:Contents}}.

== Riferimenti ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Formatting]]</text>
      <sha1>s04olt8dhpufm75moc89ht630s99v17</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402949</id>
      <parentid>5402917</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;* Combina elenco puntato ** con definizione  *:- definizione ** senza spazi vuoti&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26860" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
Puoi formattare il tuo testo utilizzando il linguaggio di markup di wiki. Questo consiste in caratteri normali come asterischi, apostrofi o simboli di uguaglianza che hanno funzioni speciali in wiki, alle volte dipendenti dalla loro posizione. Per esempio, per formattare una parola in ''corsivo'' bisogna introdurre il testo da mettere in corsivo in due paia di apostrofi come ad esempio &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;''questo''&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.

==Markup di formattazione del testo==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | formattazione dei caratteri in line - &quot;si applica ovunque&quot;
|-
| Testo in corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
''corsivo''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
''corsivo''
|-
| Testo in grassetto
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''grassetto'''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''grassetto'''
|-
| Grassetto e Corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|nowiki|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|.3Cnowiki.3E}}
|-
| Ignorare il linguaggio di markup wiki
| {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|
&lt;!-- This can't use ＜syntaxhighlight＞＜nowiki＞, as that breaks the ＜translate＞ tag --&gt;
{{^(}}nowiki{{)^}}no [[wiki]] ''markup''{{^(}}/nowiki{{)^}}
| lang = &quot;html&quot;
}}
|
&lt;nowiki&gt;no [[wiki]] ''markup''&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | Formattazione della sezione - ''solo all'inizio della riga''
|-
| Intestazioni di livelli differenti 
| &lt;pre&gt;
== Livello 2 ==

=== Livello 3 ===

==== Livello 4 ====

===== Livello 5 =====

====== Livello 6 ======
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help_talk:Formatting#Level_1|Salta Livello 1]], è il livello nome della pagina.
* Non inserire alcun testo sulla stessa linea dopo i segni uguale finali.
* Un articolo con 4 o più intestazioni crea automaticamente un [[wikipedia:Help:Section#Table of contents (TOC)|indice]] (a meno che non si inserisca la parola magica &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
}}
|
&lt;!-- using HTML markup to avoid creating new sections --&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;Livello 2&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;Livello 3&lt;/h3&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;Livello 4&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Livello 5&lt;/h5&gt;

&lt;h6&gt;Livello 6&lt;/h6&gt;
|-
| Riga orizzontale
| &lt;pre&gt;
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
|-
| Elenco puntato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
*:- definizione
** senza spazi vuoti

*bullet list
:- definition
:* sublist that doesn't create empty
:* spaces after definition
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* combine bullet list
** with definition 
::- definition
** creates empty space
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* combine bullet list
** with definition 
*:- definition
** without empty spaces
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*bullet list
:- definition
:* sublist that doesn't create empty
:* spaces after definition
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| Elenco numerato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;#&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&lt;nowiki&gt;#&lt;/nowiki&gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|Definition list}}
|-
| Lista di definizioni
| &lt;pre&gt;
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
; oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{note|1=Se la linea inizia con un punto e virgola (;), ogni due punti (:) inserito al termine di essa non verrà mostrato. Se vuoi che i due punti vengano mostrati, scrivili come &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#58;&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
;oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
|-
| Testo indentato
| &lt;pre&gt;
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{Note|1=Questa soluzione può danneggiare l'accessibilità}}
|
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
|-
| Mescolare differenti tipi di elenchi
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=L'utilizzo di &lt;code&gt;#:&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;*:&lt;/code&gt; per spezzare le righe di un oggetto in definizione può danneggiare l'accessibilità.}}
|
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
|-
| Testo preformattato
| &lt;pre&gt;
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=Questo modo di preformattare si applica solo alla formattazione delle sezioni. Il markup di formattazione dei caratteri è comunque attivo.}}
|
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
|-
| Blocchi di testo preformattati
| &lt;pre&gt; &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato di blocco sarà
    mantenuto.

Questo è buone per copiare blocchi di codice:

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
 {{#tag:nowiki|Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato del blocco sarà mantenuto

Questo è un buon modo per copiare blocchi di codice

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False
}}
|}

{{anchor|&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;|.3Cp.3E}}
== Paragrafi ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;|.3Cbr.3E}}
MediaWiki ignora i singoli ritorni a capo. Per iniziare un nuovo paragrafo, lascia una riga vuota. Puoi forzare un ritorno a capo all'interno di un paragrafo con il tag HTML {{tag|br|single}}.

== Tag HTML ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;|.3Cdiv.3E|&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;|.3Cspan.3E}}
Alcuni [[wikipedia:HTML|HTML]] tags sono permessi in MediaWiki, ad esempio {{tag|code|open}}, [[w:Div and span|{{tag|div|open}}, and {{tag|span|open}}]] Questi funzionano ovunque tu li inserisca.
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;|.3Cins.3E|&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;|.3Cu.3E}}
|-
| Inserito &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browsers viene mostrato come un underline)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

o

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

o

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;del&amp;gt;|.3Cdel.3E|&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;|.3Cs.3E}}
|-
| Cancellato &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browser viene mostrato come barrato)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

o

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

oppure

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|.3Ccode.3E}}
|-
| Larghezza testo fissa
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;|.3Cblockquote.3E}}
|-
| Citazione
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=Se la citazione contiene più paragrafi, le etichette devono essere su righe separate per essere visualizzati correttamente, ad esempio:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;blockquote&gt;
Primo paragrafo.

Secondo paragrafo
&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Tracked|T309778|float=none}}
}}
|
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;q&amp;gt;|.3Cq.3E}}
|-
| Citazioni
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The q element '''must not''' be used in place of quotation marks that do not represent quotes; for example, it is inappropriate to use the q element for marking up sarcastic statements.&lt;ref&gt;[https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/text-level-semantics.html#the-q-element HTML Living Standard—The &amp;lt;'''q'''&amp;gt; element]&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;/span&gt;}}
| &lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;
|-
| Commento
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;|.3Cpre.3E}}
|-
| Testo già completamente formattato
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=Per contrassegnare il testo preformattato, spuntare la voce &quot;Testo preformattato&quot; alla fine della tabella precedente.}} 
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=È possibile indicare uno stile CSS all'interno della proprietà &lt;code&gt;style&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}
continua:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; | style=&quot;table-layout: fixed; width: 100%&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Il testo preformattato di '''default''' ha un attributo CSS (&lt;code&gt;white-space: pre-wrap;&lt;/code&gt;) per avvolgere il testo in base alla larghezza disponibile
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato''' con a capo automatico '''disabilitato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}


== Inserimento di simboli ==

I simboli e gli altri caratteri speciali non disponibili sulla tastiera possono essere inseriti in molti modi diversi. Molti [http://www.howtogeek.com/210824/how-to-quickly-type-special-characters-on-any-computer-smartphone-or-tablet/ Sistemi Operativi e browser] ti consentono di inserire caratteri speciali attraverso un menu di opzioni o un pannello del Sistema Operativo. In aggiunta a ciò, puoi inserirli nella schermata di modifica usando il WikiEditor o [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]].

Come ultima risorsa, è possibile utilizzare una sequenza speciale di caratteri. Tali sequenze sono chiamate entità HTML. Per esempio, la seguente sequenza (entità) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;rarr; e '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;mdash;. 
----
{{note|1=Passare il mouse su un simbolo per scoprire l'entità che lo produce.  Alcuni simboli non disponibili nel font corrente appariranno come quadrati vuoti.}} 

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; text-align:center; font-weight:bold;&quot;
|+ &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;HTML symbol entities&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acute;&quot;&gt;&amp;acute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;AElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;AElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;aelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alefsym;&quot;&gt;&amp;alefsym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;Alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;amp;&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;and;&quot;&gt;&amp;and;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ang;&quot;&gt;&amp;ang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;asymp;&quot;&gt;&amp;asymp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;bdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;brvbar;&quot;&gt;&amp;brvbar;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bull;&quot;&gt;&amp;bull;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cap;&quot;&gt;&amp;cap;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;cedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cent;&quot;&gt;&amp;cent;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;circ;&quot;&gt;&amp;circ;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;clubs;&quot;&gt;&amp;clubs;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cong;&quot;&gt;&amp;cong;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;copy;&quot;&gt;&amp;copy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;crarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;crarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cup;&quot;&gt;&amp;cup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;curren;&quot;&gt;&amp;curren;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;Dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;darr;&quot;&gt;&amp;darr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;dArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;deg;&quot;&gt;&amp;deg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;diams;&quot;&gt;&amp;diams;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;divide;&quot;&gt;&amp;divide;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;empty;&quot;&gt;&amp;empty;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;emsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;emsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ensp;&quot;&gt;&amp;ensp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;equiv;&quot;&gt;&amp;equiv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;eta;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ETH;&quot;&gt;&amp;ETH;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eth;&quot;&gt;&amp;eth;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euro;&quot;&gt;&amp;euro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;exist;&quot;&gt;&amp;exist;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;fnof;&quot;&gt;&amp;fnof;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;forall;&quot;&gt;&amp;forall;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac12;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac12;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac14;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac14;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac34;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac34;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frasl;&quot;&gt;&amp;frasl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ge;&quot;&gt;&amp;ge;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gt;&quot;&gt;&amp;gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;harr;&quot;&gt;&amp;harr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;hArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hearts;&quot;&gt;&amp;hearts;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hellip;&quot;&gt;&amp;hellip;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iexcl;&quot;&gt;&amp;iexcl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;image;&quot;&gt;&amp;image;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;infin;&quot;&gt;&amp;infin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;int;&quot;&gt;&amp;int;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iota;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;iota;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iquest;&quot;&gt;&amp;iquest;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;isin;&quot;&gt;&amp;isin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;Kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;Lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lang;&quot;&gt;&amp;lang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;laquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;laquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;larr;&quot;&gt;&amp;larr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;lArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;lceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ldquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;ldquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;le;&quot;&gt;&amp;le;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;lfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lowast;&quot;&gt;&amp;lowast;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;loz;&quot;&gt;&amp;loz;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lrm;&quot;&gt;&amp;lrm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lt;&quot;&gt;&amp;lt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;macr;&quot;&gt;&amp;macr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mdash;&quot;&gt;&amp;mdash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;micro;&quot;&gt;&amp;micro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;middot;&quot;&gt;&amp;middot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;minus;&quot;&gt;&amp;minus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nabla;&quot;&gt;&amp;nabla;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ndash;&quot;&gt;&amp;ndash;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ne;&quot;&gt;&amp;ne;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ni;&quot;&gt;&amp;ni;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;not;&quot;&gt;&amp;not;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;notin;&quot;&gt;&amp;notin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nsub;&quot;&gt;&amp;nsub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;OElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;OElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;oelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oline;&quot;&gt;&amp;oline;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oplus;&quot;&gt;&amp;oplus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;or;&quot;&gt;&amp;or;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordf;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordm;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otimes;&quot;&gt;&amp;otimes;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;para;&quot;&gt;&amp;para;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;part;&quot;&gt;&amp;part;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;permil;&quot;&gt;&amp;permil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;perp;&quot;&gt;&amp;perp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;piv;&quot;&gt;&amp;piv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;plusmn;&quot;&gt;&amp;plusmn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pound;&quot;&gt;&amp;pound;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;Prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prod;&quot;&gt;&amp;prod;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prop;&quot;&gt;&amp;prop;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;quot;&quot;&gt;&amp;quot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;radic;&quot;&gt;&amp;radic;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rang;&quot;&gt;&amp;rang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;raquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;raquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;rceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;real;&quot;&gt;&amp;real;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;reg;&quot;&gt;&amp;reg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;rfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;Rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rlm;&quot;&gt;&amp;rlm;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sbquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;sbquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sdot;&quot;&gt;&amp;sdot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sect;&quot;&gt;&amp;sect;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;shy;&quot;&gt;&amp;shy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigmaf;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigmaf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sim;&quot;&gt;&amp;sim;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;spades;&quot;&gt;&amp;spades;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sub;&quot;&gt;&amp;sub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sube;&quot;&gt;&amp;sube;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sum;&quot;&gt;&amp;sum;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup1;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup1;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup2;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup2;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup3;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup3;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;supe;&quot;&gt;&amp;supe;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;szlig;&quot;&gt;&amp;szlig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;Tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;there4;&quot;&gt;&amp;there4;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thetasym;&quot;&gt;&amp;thetasym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thinsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;thinsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;THORN;&quot;&gt;&amp;THORN;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thorn;&quot;&gt;&amp;thorn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;tilde;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;times;&quot;&gt;&amp;times;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;trade;&quot;&gt;&amp;trade;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsih;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsih;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;weierp;&quot;&gt;&amp;weierp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yen;&quot;&gt;&amp;yen;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwj;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwnj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwnj;&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Simbolo di Copyright
|class=mw-code| &amp;amp;copy;
|
:::'''&amp;copy;'''
|-
| Simbolo lettera delta greca
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;delta;
|
:::'''&amp;delta;'''
|-
| Simbolo di valuta Euro
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;euro;
|
:::'''&amp;euro;'''
|}
Si veda la lista delle entità HTML nell'articolo Wikipedia  [[wikipedia:List of HTML entities|List of HTML entities]]. Oltre a queste, MediaWiki supporta due sequenze di riferimento ad entità: &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;רלמ;&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;رلم;&lt;/code&gt;, entrambe vengono considerate equivalenti a &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;rlm;&lt;/code&gt; che è un [[wikipedia:Right-to-left mark|right-to-left mark]]. (Utilizzata quando, nella stessa pagina, vengono combinate lingue da destra a sinistra con lingue da sinistra a destra)

== Tag HTML ed entità di simboli visualizzati tali e quali (senza interpretazione) ==
:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;amp;euro;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;amp;euro;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&amp;lt;/span&gt;'''

=== Nowiki per HTML ===
{{tag|nowiki|s}} può vietare tag (HTML):
* &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;&lt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;nowiki /&gt;pre&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &lt;&lt;nowiki/&gt;pre&gt;
Ma ''non'' &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli:
* &amp;&lt;&lt;nowiki /&gt;nowiki /&gt;amp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &amp;&lt;nowiki /&gt;amp;
Per visualizzare &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli come testo, utilizzare &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot; al posto del carattere &quot;&amp;&quot; (es. inserire &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;, che viene visualizzato come &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;).

== Altri formati ==

Oltre ai markup di formattazione del testo sopraindicati vi sono alcuni altri riferimenti:

* {{ll|Help:Links|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Lists|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Images|nsp=0}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* LanguageConverter markup – see {{ll|Writing systems/Syntax}}
&lt;/div&gt;
* Riferimenti - si veda {{ll|Extension:Cite}}
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tables|Tabelle]]

Altri riferimenti sono disponibili in {{ll|Help:Contents}}.

== Riferimenti ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Formatting]]</text>
      <sha1>jz090ipmzuapocqmvyd772nvqx4oi26</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402956</id>
      <parentid>5402949</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:42:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;*elenco puntato :- definizione :* sottoelenco che non crea spazio :* vuoto dopo la definizione&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26864" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
Puoi formattare il tuo testo utilizzando il linguaggio di markup di wiki. Questo consiste in caratteri normali come asterischi, apostrofi o simboli di uguaglianza che hanno funzioni speciali in wiki, alle volte dipendenti dalla loro posizione. Per esempio, per formattare una parola in ''corsivo'' bisogna introdurre il testo da mettere in corsivo in due paia di apostrofi come ad esempio &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;''questo''&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.

==Markup di formattazione del testo==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | formattazione dei caratteri in line - &quot;si applica ovunque&quot;
|-
| Testo in corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
''corsivo''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
''corsivo''
|-
| Testo in grassetto
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''grassetto'''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''grassetto'''
|-
| Grassetto e Corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|nowiki|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|.3Cnowiki.3E}}
|-
| Ignorare il linguaggio di markup wiki
| {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|
&lt;!-- This can't use ＜syntaxhighlight＞＜nowiki＞, as that breaks the ＜translate＞ tag --&gt;
{{^(}}nowiki{{)^}}no [[wiki]] ''markup''{{^(}}/nowiki{{)^}}
| lang = &quot;html&quot;
}}
|
&lt;nowiki&gt;no [[wiki]] ''markup''&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | Formattazione della sezione - ''solo all'inizio della riga''
|-
| Intestazioni di livelli differenti 
| &lt;pre&gt;
== Livello 2 ==

=== Livello 3 ===

==== Livello 4 ====

===== Livello 5 =====

====== Livello 6 ======
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help_talk:Formatting#Level_1|Salta Livello 1]], è il livello nome della pagina.
* Non inserire alcun testo sulla stessa linea dopo i segni uguale finali.
* Un articolo con 4 o più intestazioni crea automaticamente un [[wikipedia:Help:Section#Table of contents (TOC)|indice]] (a meno che non si inserisca la parola magica &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
}}
|
&lt;!-- using HTML markup to avoid creating new sections --&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;Livello 2&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;Livello 3&lt;/h3&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;Livello 4&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Livello 5&lt;/h5&gt;

&lt;h6&gt;Livello 6&lt;/h6&gt;
|-
| Riga orizzontale
| &lt;pre&gt;
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
|-
| Elenco puntato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
*:- definizione
** senza spazi vuoti

*elenco puntato
:- definizione
:* sottoelenco che non crea spazio
:* vuoto dopo la definizione
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* combine bullet list
** with definition 
::- definition
** creates empty space
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* combine bullet list
** with definition 
*:- definition
** without empty spaces
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*bullet list
:- definition
:* sublist that doesn't create empty
:* spaces after definition
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| Elenco numerato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;#&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&lt;nowiki&gt;#&lt;/nowiki&gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|Definition list}}
|-
| Lista di definizioni
| &lt;pre&gt;
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
; oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{note|1=Se la linea inizia con un punto e virgola (;), ogni due punti (:) inserito al termine di essa non verrà mostrato. Se vuoi che i due punti vengano mostrati, scrivili come &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#58;&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
;oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
|-
| Testo indentato
| &lt;pre&gt;
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{Note|1=Questa soluzione può danneggiare l'accessibilità}}
|
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
|-
| Mescolare differenti tipi di elenchi
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=L'utilizzo di &lt;code&gt;#:&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;*:&lt;/code&gt; per spezzare le righe di un oggetto in definizione può danneggiare l'accessibilità.}}
|
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
|-
| Testo preformattato
| &lt;pre&gt;
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=Questo modo di preformattare si applica solo alla formattazione delle sezioni. Il markup di formattazione dei caratteri è comunque attivo.}}
|
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
|-
| Blocchi di testo preformattati
| &lt;pre&gt; &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato di blocco sarà
    mantenuto.

Questo è buone per copiare blocchi di codice:

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
 {{#tag:nowiki|Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato del blocco sarà mantenuto

Questo è un buon modo per copiare blocchi di codice

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False
}}
|}

{{anchor|&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;|.3Cp.3E}}
== Paragrafi ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;|.3Cbr.3E}}
MediaWiki ignora i singoli ritorni a capo. Per iniziare un nuovo paragrafo, lascia una riga vuota. Puoi forzare un ritorno a capo all'interno di un paragrafo con il tag HTML {{tag|br|single}}.

== Tag HTML ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;|.3Cdiv.3E|&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;|.3Cspan.3E}}
Alcuni [[wikipedia:HTML|HTML]] tags sono permessi in MediaWiki, ad esempio {{tag|code|open}}, [[w:Div and span|{{tag|div|open}}, and {{tag|span|open}}]] Questi funzionano ovunque tu li inserisca.
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;|.3Cins.3E|&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;|.3Cu.3E}}
|-
| Inserito &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browsers viene mostrato come un underline)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

o

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

o

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;del&amp;gt;|.3Cdel.3E|&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;|.3Cs.3E}}
|-
| Cancellato &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browser viene mostrato come barrato)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

o

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

oppure

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|.3Ccode.3E}}
|-
| Larghezza testo fissa
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;|.3Cblockquote.3E}}
|-
| Citazione
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=Se la citazione contiene più paragrafi, le etichette devono essere su righe separate per essere visualizzati correttamente, ad esempio:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;blockquote&gt;
Primo paragrafo.

Secondo paragrafo
&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Tracked|T309778|float=none}}
}}
|
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;q&amp;gt;|.3Cq.3E}}
|-
| Citazioni
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The q element '''must not''' be used in place of quotation marks that do not represent quotes; for example, it is inappropriate to use the q element for marking up sarcastic statements.&lt;ref&gt;[https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/text-level-semantics.html#the-q-element HTML Living Standard—The &amp;lt;'''q'''&amp;gt; element]&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;/span&gt;}}
| &lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;
|-
| Commento
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;|.3Cpre.3E}}
|-
| Testo già completamente formattato
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=Per contrassegnare il testo preformattato, spuntare la voce &quot;Testo preformattato&quot; alla fine della tabella precedente.}} 
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=È possibile indicare uno stile CSS all'interno della proprietà &lt;code&gt;style&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}
continua:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; | style=&quot;table-layout: fixed; width: 100%&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Il testo preformattato di '''default''' ha un attributo CSS (&lt;code&gt;white-space: pre-wrap;&lt;/code&gt;) per avvolgere il testo in base alla larghezza disponibile
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato''' con a capo automatico '''disabilitato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}


== Inserimento di simboli ==

I simboli e gli altri caratteri speciali non disponibili sulla tastiera possono essere inseriti in molti modi diversi. Molti [http://www.howtogeek.com/210824/how-to-quickly-type-special-characters-on-any-computer-smartphone-or-tablet/ Sistemi Operativi e browser] ti consentono di inserire caratteri speciali attraverso un menu di opzioni o un pannello del Sistema Operativo. In aggiunta a ciò, puoi inserirli nella schermata di modifica usando il WikiEditor o [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]].

Come ultima risorsa, è possibile utilizzare una sequenza speciale di caratteri. Tali sequenze sono chiamate entità HTML. Per esempio, la seguente sequenza (entità) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;rarr; e '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;mdash;. 
----
{{note|1=Passare il mouse su un simbolo per scoprire l'entità che lo produce.  Alcuni simboli non disponibili nel font corrente appariranno come quadrati vuoti.}} 

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; text-align:center; font-weight:bold;&quot;
|+ &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;HTML symbol entities&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acute;&quot;&gt;&amp;acute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;AElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;AElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;aelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alefsym;&quot;&gt;&amp;alefsym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;Alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;amp;&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;and;&quot;&gt;&amp;and;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ang;&quot;&gt;&amp;ang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;asymp;&quot;&gt;&amp;asymp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;bdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;brvbar;&quot;&gt;&amp;brvbar;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bull;&quot;&gt;&amp;bull;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cap;&quot;&gt;&amp;cap;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;cedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cent;&quot;&gt;&amp;cent;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;circ;&quot;&gt;&amp;circ;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;clubs;&quot;&gt;&amp;clubs;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cong;&quot;&gt;&amp;cong;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;copy;&quot;&gt;&amp;copy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;crarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;crarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cup;&quot;&gt;&amp;cup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;curren;&quot;&gt;&amp;curren;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;Dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;darr;&quot;&gt;&amp;darr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;dArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;deg;&quot;&gt;&amp;deg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;diams;&quot;&gt;&amp;diams;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;divide;&quot;&gt;&amp;divide;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;empty;&quot;&gt;&amp;empty;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;emsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;emsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ensp;&quot;&gt;&amp;ensp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;equiv;&quot;&gt;&amp;equiv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;eta;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ETH;&quot;&gt;&amp;ETH;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eth;&quot;&gt;&amp;eth;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euro;&quot;&gt;&amp;euro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;exist;&quot;&gt;&amp;exist;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;fnof;&quot;&gt;&amp;fnof;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;forall;&quot;&gt;&amp;forall;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac12;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac12;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac14;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac14;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac34;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac34;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frasl;&quot;&gt;&amp;frasl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ge;&quot;&gt;&amp;ge;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gt;&quot;&gt;&amp;gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;harr;&quot;&gt;&amp;harr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;hArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hearts;&quot;&gt;&amp;hearts;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hellip;&quot;&gt;&amp;hellip;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iexcl;&quot;&gt;&amp;iexcl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;image;&quot;&gt;&amp;image;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;infin;&quot;&gt;&amp;infin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;int;&quot;&gt;&amp;int;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iota;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;iota;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iquest;&quot;&gt;&amp;iquest;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;isin;&quot;&gt;&amp;isin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;Kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;Lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lang;&quot;&gt;&amp;lang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;laquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;laquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;larr;&quot;&gt;&amp;larr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;lArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;lceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ldquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;ldquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;le;&quot;&gt;&amp;le;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;lfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lowast;&quot;&gt;&amp;lowast;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;loz;&quot;&gt;&amp;loz;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lrm;&quot;&gt;&amp;lrm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lt;&quot;&gt;&amp;lt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;macr;&quot;&gt;&amp;macr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mdash;&quot;&gt;&amp;mdash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;micro;&quot;&gt;&amp;micro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;middot;&quot;&gt;&amp;middot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;minus;&quot;&gt;&amp;minus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nabla;&quot;&gt;&amp;nabla;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ndash;&quot;&gt;&amp;ndash;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ne;&quot;&gt;&amp;ne;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ni;&quot;&gt;&amp;ni;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;not;&quot;&gt;&amp;not;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;notin;&quot;&gt;&amp;notin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nsub;&quot;&gt;&amp;nsub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;OElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;OElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;oelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oline;&quot;&gt;&amp;oline;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oplus;&quot;&gt;&amp;oplus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;or;&quot;&gt;&amp;or;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordf;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordm;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otimes;&quot;&gt;&amp;otimes;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;para;&quot;&gt;&amp;para;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;part;&quot;&gt;&amp;part;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;permil;&quot;&gt;&amp;permil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;perp;&quot;&gt;&amp;perp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;piv;&quot;&gt;&amp;piv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;plusmn;&quot;&gt;&amp;plusmn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pound;&quot;&gt;&amp;pound;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;Prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prod;&quot;&gt;&amp;prod;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prop;&quot;&gt;&amp;prop;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;quot;&quot;&gt;&amp;quot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;radic;&quot;&gt;&amp;radic;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rang;&quot;&gt;&amp;rang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;raquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;raquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;rceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;real;&quot;&gt;&amp;real;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;reg;&quot;&gt;&amp;reg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;rfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;Rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rlm;&quot;&gt;&amp;rlm;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sbquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;sbquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sdot;&quot;&gt;&amp;sdot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sect;&quot;&gt;&amp;sect;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;shy;&quot;&gt;&amp;shy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigmaf;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigmaf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sim;&quot;&gt;&amp;sim;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;spades;&quot;&gt;&amp;spades;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sub;&quot;&gt;&amp;sub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sube;&quot;&gt;&amp;sube;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sum;&quot;&gt;&amp;sum;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup1;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup1;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup2;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup2;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup3;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup3;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;supe;&quot;&gt;&amp;supe;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;szlig;&quot;&gt;&amp;szlig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;Tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;there4;&quot;&gt;&amp;there4;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thetasym;&quot;&gt;&amp;thetasym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thinsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;thinsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;THORN;&quot;&gt;&amp;THORN;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thorn;&quot;&gt;&amp;thorn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;tilde;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;times;&quot;&gt;&amp;times;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;trade;&quot;&gt;&amp;trade;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsih;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsih;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;weierp;&quot;&gt;&amp;weierp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yen;&quot;&gt;&amp;yen;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwj;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwnj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwnj;&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Simbolo di Copyright
|class=mw-code| &amp;amp;copy;
|
:::'''&amp;copy;'''
|-
| Simbolo lettera delta greca
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;delta;
|
:::'''&amp;delta;'''
|-
| Simbolo di valuta Euro
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;euro;
|
:::'''&amp;euro;'''
|}
Si veda la lista delle entità HTML nell'articolo Wikipedia  [[wikipedia:List of HTML entities|List of HTML entities]]. Oltre a queste, MediaWiki supporta due sequenze di riferimento ad entità: &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;רלמ;&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;رلم;&lt;/code&gt;, entrambe vengono considerate equivalenti a &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;rlm;&lt;/code&gt; che è un [[wikipedia:Right-to-left mark|right-to-left mark]]. (Utilizzata quando, nella stessa pagina, vengono combinate lingue da destra a sinistra con lingue da sinistra a destra)

== Tag HTML ed entità di simboli visualizzati tali e quali (senza interpretazione) ==
:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;amp;euro;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;amp;euro;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&amp;lt;/span&gt;'''

=== Nowiki per HTML ===
{{tag|nowiki|s}} può vietare tag (HTML):
* &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;&lt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;nowiki /&gt;pre&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &lt;&lt;nowiki/&gt;pre&gt;
Ma ''non'' &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli:
* &amp;&lt;&lt;nowiki /&gt;nowiki /&gt;amp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &amp;&lt;nowiki /&gt;amp;
Per visualizzare &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli come testo, utilizzare &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot; al posto del carattere &quot;&amp;&quot; (es. inserire &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;, che viene visualizzato come &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;).

== Altri formati ==

Oltre ai markup di formattazione del testo sopraindicati vi sono alcuni altri riferimenti:

* {{ll|Help:Links|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Lists|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Images|nsp=0}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* LanguageConverter markup – see {{ll|Writing systems/Syntax}}
&lt;/div&gt;
* Riferimenti - si veda {{ll|Extension:Cite}}
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tables|Tabelle]]

Altri riferimenti sono disponibili in {{ll|Help:Contents}}.

== Riferimenti ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Formatting]]</text>
      <sha1>1j0s1kbp295qjq0fwamsl440w97o044</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402962</id>
      <parentid>5402956</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:43:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;* Combina elenco puntato ** con definizione  ::- definizione ** crea spazio vuoto&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26810" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
Puoi formattare il tuo testo utilizzando il linguaggio di markup di wiki. Questo consiste in caratteri normali come asterischi, apostrofi o simboli di uguaglianza che hanno funzioni speciali in wiki, alle volte dipendenti dalla loro posizione. Per esempio, per formattare una parola in ''corsivo'' bisogna introdurre il testo da mettere in corsivo in due paia di apostrofi come ad esempio &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;''questo''&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.

==Markup di formattazione del testo==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | formattazione dei caratteri in line - &quot;si applica ovunque&quot;
|-
| Testo in corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
''corsivo''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
''corsivo''
|-
| Testo in grassetto
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''grassetto'''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''grassetto'''
|-
| Grassetto e Corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|nowiki|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|.3Cnowiki.3E}}
|-
| Ignorare il linguaggio di markup wiki
| {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|
&lt;!-- This can't use ＜syntaxhighlight＞＜nowiki＞, as that breaks the ＜translate＞ tag --&gt;
{{^(}}nowiki{{)^}}no [[wiki]] ''markup''{{^(}}/nowiki{{)^}}
| lang = &quot;html&quot;
}}
|
&lt;nowiki&gt;no [[wiki]] ''markup''&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | Formattazione della sezione - ''solo all'inizio della riga''
|-
| Intestazioni di livelli differenti 
| &lt;pre&gt;
== Livello 2 ==

=== Livello 3 ===

==== Livello 4 ====

===== Livello 5 =====

====== Livello 6 ======
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help_talk:Formatting#Level_1|Salta Livello 1]], è il livello nome della pagina.
* Non inserire alcun testo sulla stessa linea dopo i segni uguale finali.
* Un articolo con 4 o più intestazioni crea automaticamente un [[wikipedia:Help:Section#Table of contents (TOC)|indice]] (a meno che non si inserisca la parola magica &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
}}
|
&lt;!-- using HTML markup to avoid creating new sections --&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;Livello 2&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;Livello 3&lt;/h3&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;Livello 4&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Livello 5&lt;/h5&gt;

&lt;h6&gt;Livello 6&lt;/h6&gt;
|-
| Riga orizzontale
| &lt;pre&gt;
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
|-
| Elenco puntato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
*:- definizione
** senza spazi vuoti

*elenco puntato
:- definizione
:* sottoelenco che non crea spazio
:* vuoto dopo la definizione
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* combine bullet list
** with definition 
*:- definition
** without empty spaces
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*bullet list
:- definition
:* sublist that doesn't create empty
:* spaces after definition
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| Elenco numerato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;#&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&lt;nowiki&gt;#&lt;/nowiki&gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|Definition list}}
|-
| Lista di definizioni
| &lt;pre&gt;
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
; oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{note|1=Se la linea inizia con un punto e virgola (;), ogni due punti (:) inserito al termine di essa non verrà mostrato. Se vuoi che i due punti vengano mostrati, scrivili come &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#58;&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
;oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
|-
| Testo indentato
| &lt;pre&gt;
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{Note|1=Questa soluzione può danneggiare l'accessibilità}}
|
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
|-
| Mescolare differenti tipi di elenchi
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=L'utilizzo di &lt;code&gt;#:&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;*:&lt;/code&gt; per spezzare le righe di un oggetto in definizione può danneggiare l'accessibilità.}}
|
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
|-
| Testo preformattato
| &lt;pre&gt;
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=Questo modo di preformattare si applica solo alla formattazione delle sezioni. Il markup di formattazione dei caratteri è comunque attivo.}}
|
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
|-
| Blocchi di testo preformattati
| &lt;pre&gt; &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato di blocco sarà
    mantenuto.

Questo è buone per copiare blocchi di codice:

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
 {{#tag:nowiki|Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato del blocco sarà mantenuto

Questo è un buon modo per copiare blocchi di codice

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False
}}
|}

{{anchor|&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;|.3Cp.3E}}
== Paragrafi ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;|.3Cbr.3E}}
MediaWiki ignora i singoli ritorni a capo. Per iniziare un nuovo paragrafo, lascia una riga vuota. Puoi forzare un ritorno a capo all'interno di un paragrafo con il tag HTML {{tag|br|single}}.

== Tag HTML ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;|.3Cdiv.3E|&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;|.3Cspan.3E}}
Alcuni [[wikipedia:HTML|HTML]] tags sono permessi in MediaWiki, ad esempio {{tag|code|open}}, [[w:Div and span|{{tag|div|open}}, and {{tag|span|open}}]] Questi funzionano ovunque tu li inserisca.
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;|.3Cins.3E|&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;|.3Cu.3E}}
|-
| Inserito &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browsers viene mostrato come un underline)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

o

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

o

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;del&amp;gt;|.3Cdel.3E|&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;|.3Cs.3E}}
|-
| Cancellato &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browser viene mostrato come barrato)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

o

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

oppure

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|.3Ccode.3E}}
|-
| Larghezza testo fissa
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;|.3Cblockquote.3E}}
|-
| Citazione
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=Se la citazione contiene più paragrafi, le etichette devono essere su righe separate per essere visualizzati correttamente, ad esempio:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;blockquote&gt;
Primo paragrafo.

Secondo paragrafo
&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Tracked|T309778|float=none}}
}}
|
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;q&amp;gt;|.3Cq.3E}}
|-
| Citazioni
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The q element '''must not''' be used in place of quotation marks that do not represent quotes; for example, it is inappropriate to use the q element for marking up sarcastic statements.&lt;ref&gt;[https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/text-level-semantics.html#the-q-element HTML Living Standard—The &amp;lt;'''q'''&amp;gt; element]&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;/span&gt;}}
| &lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;
|-
| Commento
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;|.3Cpre.3E}}
|-
| Testo già completamente formattato
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=Per contrassegnare il testo preformattato, spuntare la voce &quot;Testo preformattato&quot; alla fine della tabella precedente.}} 
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=È possibile indicare uno stile CSS all'interno della proprietà &lt;code&gt;style&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}
continua:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; | style=&quot;table-layout: fixed; width: 100%&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Il testo preformattato di '''default''' ha un attributo CSS (&lt;code&gt;white-space: pre-wrap;&lt;/code&gt;) per avvolgere il testo in base alla larghezza disponibile
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato''' con a capo automatico '''disabilitato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}


== Inserimento di simboli ==

I simboli e gli altri caratteri speciali non disponibili sulla tastiera possono essere inseriti in molti modi diversi. Molti [http://www.howtogeek.com/210824/how-to-quickly-type-special-characters-on-any-computer-smartphone-or-tablet/ Sistemi Operativi e browser] ti consentono di inserire caratteri speciali attraverso un menu di opzioni o un pannello del Sistema Operativo. In aggiunta a ciò, puoi inserirli nella schermata di modifica usando il WikiEditor o [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]].

Come ultima risorsa, è possibile utilizzare una sequenza speciale di caratteri. Tali sequenze sono chiamate entità HTML. Per esempio, la seguente sequenza (entità) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;rarr; e '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;mdash;. 
----
{{note|1=Passare il mouse su un simbolo per scoprire l'entità che lo produce.  Alcuni simboli non disponibili nel font corrente appariranno come quadrati vuoti.}} 

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; text-align:center; font-weight:bold;&quot;
|+ &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;HTML symbol entities&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acute;&quot;&gt;&amp;acute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;AElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;AElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;aelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alefsym;&quot;&gt;&amp;alefsym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;Alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;amp;&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;and;&quot;&gt;&amp;and;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ang;&quot;&gt;&amp;ang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;asymp;&quot;&gt;&amp;asymp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;bdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;brvbar;&quot;&gt;&amp;brvbar;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bull;&quot;&gt;&amp;bull;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cap;&quot;&gt;&amp;cap;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;cedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cent;&quot;&gt;&amp;cent;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;circ;&quot;&gt;&amp;circ;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;clubs;&quot;&gt;&amp;clubs;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cong;&quot;&gt;&amp;cong;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;copy;&quot;&gt;&amp;copy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;crarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;crarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cup;&quot;&gt;&amp;cup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;curren;&quot;&gt;&amp;curren;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;Dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;darr;&quot;&gt;&amp;darr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;dArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;deg;&quot;&gt;&amp;deg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;diams;&quot;&gt;&amp;diams;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;divide;&quot;&gt;&amp;divide;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;empty;&quot;&gt;&amp;empty;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;emsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;emsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ensp;&quot;&gt;&amp;ensp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;equiv;&quot;&gt;&amp;equiv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;eta;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ETH;&quot;&gt;&amp;ETH;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eth;&quot;&gt;&amp;eth;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euro;&quot;&gt;&amp;euro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;exist;&quot;&gt;&amp;exist;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;fnof;&quot;&gt;&amp;fnof;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;forall;&quot;&gt;&amp;forall;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac12;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac12;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac14;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac14;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac34;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac34;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frasl;&quot;&gt;&amp;frasl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ge;&quot;&gt;&amp;ge;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gt;&quot;&gt;&amp;gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;harr;&quot;&gt;&amp;harr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;hArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hearts;&quot;&gt;&amp;hearts;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hellip;&quot;&gt;&amp;hellip;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iexcl;&quot;&gt;&amp;iexcl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;image;&quot;&gt;&amp;image;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;infin;&quot;&gt;&amp;infin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;int;&quot;&gt;&amp;int;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iota;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;iota;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iquest;&quot;&gt;&amp;iquest;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;isin;&quot;&gt;&amp;isin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;Kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;Lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lang;&quot;&gt;&amp;lang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;laquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;laquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;larr;&quot;&gt;&amp;larr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;lArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;lceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ldquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;ldquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;le;&quot;&gt;&amp;le;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;lfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lowast;&quot;&gt;&amp;lowast;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;loz;&quot;&gt;&amp;loz;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lrm;&quot;&gt;&amp;lrm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lt;&quot;&gt;&amp;lt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;macr;&quot;&gt;&amp;macr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mdash;&quot;&gt;&amp;mdash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;micro;&quot;&gt;&amp;micro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;middot;&quot;&gt;&amp;middot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;minus;&quot;&gt;&amp;minus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nabla;&quot;&gt;&amp;nabla;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ndash;&quot;&gt;&amp;ndash;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ne;&quot;&gt;&amp;ne;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ni;&quot;&gt;&amp;ni;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;not;&quot;&gt;&amp;not;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;notin;&quot;&gt;&amp;notin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nsub;&quot;&gt;&amp;nsub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;OElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;OElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;oelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oline;&quot;&gt;&amp;oline;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oplus;&quot;&gt;&amp;oplus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;or;&quot;&gt;&amp;or;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordf;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordm;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otimes;&quot;&gt;&amp;otimes;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;para;&quot;&gt;&amp;para;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;part;&quot;&gt;&amp;part;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;permil;&quot;&gt;&amp;permil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;perp;&quot;&gt;&amp;perp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;piv;&quot;&gt;&amp;piv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;plusmn;&quot;&gt;&amp;plusmn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pound;&quot;&gt;&amp;pound;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;Prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prod;&quot;&gt;&amp;prod;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prop;&quot;&gt;&amp;prop;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;quot;&quot;&gt;&amp;quot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;radic;&quot;&gt;&amp;radic;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rang;&quot;&gt;&amp;rang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;raquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;raquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;rceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;real;&quot;&gt;&amp;real;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;reg;&quot;&gt;&amp;reg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;rfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;Rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rlm;&quot;&gt;&amp;rlm;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sbquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;sbquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sdot;&quot;&gt;&amp;sdot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sect;&quot;&gt;&amp;sect;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;shy;&quot;&gt;&amp;shy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigmaf;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigmaf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sim;&quot;&gt;&amp;sim;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;spades;&quot;&gt;&amp;spades;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sub;&quot;&gt;&amp;sub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sube;&quot;&gt;&amp;sube;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sum;&quot;&gt;&amp;sum;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup1;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup1;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup2;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup2;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup3;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup3;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;supe;&quot;&gt;&amp;supe;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;szlig;&quot;&gt;&amp;szlig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;Tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;there4;&quot;&gt;&amp;there4;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thetasym;&quot;&gt;&amp;thetasym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thinsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;thinsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;THORN;&quot;&gt;&amp;THORN;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thorn;&quot;&gt;&amp;thorn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;tilde;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;times;&quot;&gt;&amp;times;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;trade;&quot;&gt;&amp;trade;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsih;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsih;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;weierp;&quot;&gt;&amp;weierp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yen;&quot;&gt;&amp;yen;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwj;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwnj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwnj;&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Simbolo di Copyright
|class=mw-code| &amp;amp;copy;
|
:::'''&amp;copy;'''
|-
| Simbolo lettera delta greca
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;delta;
|
:::'''&amp;delta;'''
|-
| Simbolo di valuta Euro
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;euro;
|
:::'''&amp;euro;'''
|}
Si veda la lista delle entità HTML nell'articolo Wikipedia  [[wikipedia:List of HTML entities|List of HTML entities]]. Oltre a queste, MediaWiki supporta due sequenze di riferimento ad entità: &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;רלמ;&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;رلم;&lt;/code&gt;, entrambe vengono considerate equivalenti a &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;rlm;&lt;/code&gt; che è un [[wikipedia:Right-to-left mark|right-to-left mark]]. (Utilizzata quando, nella stessa pagina, vengono combinate lingue da destra a sinistra con lingue da sinistra a destra)

== Tag HTML ed entità di simboli visualizzati tali e quali (senza interpretazione) ==
:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;amp;euro;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;amp;euro;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&amp;lt;/span&gt;'''

=== Nowiki per HTML ===
{{tag|nowiki|s}} può vietare tag (HTML):
* &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;&lt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;nowiki /&gt;pre&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &lt;&lt;nowiki/&gt;pre&gt;
Ma ''non'' &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli:
* &amp;&lt;&lt;nowiki /&gt;nowiki /&gt;amp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &amp;&lt;nowiki /&gt;amp;
Per visualizzare &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli come testo, utilizzare &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot; al posto del carattere &quot;&amp;&quot; (es. inserire &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;, che viene visualizzato come &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;).

== Altri formati ==

Oltre ai markup di formattazione del testo sopraindicati vi sono alcuni altri riferimenti:

* {{ll|Help:Links|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Lists|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Images|nsp=0}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* LanguageConverter markup – see {{ll|Writing systems/Syntax}}
&lt;/div&gt;
* Riferimenti - si veda {{ll|Extension:Cite}}
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tables|Tabelle]]

Altri riferimenti sono disponibili in {{ll|Help:Contents}}.

== Riferimenti ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Formatting]]</text>
      <sha1>6z39wmrpzdnreb8sns9l5yb838x4c7u</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402964</id>
      <parentid>5402962</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:43:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;* Combina elenco puntato ** con definizione  *:- definizione ** senza spazi vuoti&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26755" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
Puoi formattare il tuo testo utilizzando il linguaggio di markup di wiki. Questo consiste in caratteri normali come asterischi, apostrofi o simboli di uguaglianza che hanno funzioni speciali in wiki, alle volte dipendenti dalla loro posizione. Per esempio, per formattare una parola in ''corsivo'' bisogna introdurre il testo da mettere in corsivo in due paia di apostrofi come ad esempio &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;''questo''&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.

==Markup di formattazione del testo==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | formattazione dei caratteri in line - &quot;si applica ovunque&quot;
|-
| Testo in corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
''corsivo''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
''corsivo''
|-
| Testo in grassetto
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''grassetto'''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''grassetto'''
|-
| Grassetto e Corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|nowiki|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|.3Cnowiki.3E}}
|-
| Ignorare il linguaggio di markup wiki
| {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|
&lt;!-- This can't use ＜syntaxhighlight＞＜nowiki＞, as that breaks the ＜translate＞ tag --&gt;
{{^(}}nowiki{{)^}}no [[wiki]] ''markup''{{^(}}/nowiki{{)^}}
| lang = &quot;html&quot;
}}
|
&lt;nowiki&gt;no [[wiki]] ''markup''&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | Formattazione della sezione - ''solo all'inizio della riga''
|-
| Intestazioni di livelli differenti 
| &lt;pre&gt;
== Livello 2 ==

=== Livello 3 ===

==== Livello 4 ====

===== Livello 5 =====

====== Livello 6 ======
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help_talk:Formatting#Level_1|Salta Livello 1]], è il livello nome della pagina.
* Non inserire alcun testo sulla stessa linea dopo i segni uguale finali.
* Un articolo con 4 o più intestazioni crea automaticamente un [[wikipedia:Help:Section#Table of contents (TOC)|indice]] (a meno che non si inserisca la parola magica &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
}}
|
&lt;!-- using HTML markup to avoid creating new sections --&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;Livello 2&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;Livello 3&lt;/h3&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;Livello 4&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Livello 5&lt;/h5&gt;

&lt;h6&gt;Livello 6&lt;/h6&gt;
|-
| Riga orizzontale
| &lt;pre&gt;
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
|-
| Elenco puntato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
*:- definizione
** senza spazi vuoti

*elenco puntato
:- definizione
:* sottoelenco che non crea spazio
:* vuoto dopo la definizione
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
*:- definizione
** senza spazi vuoti

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*bullet list
:- definition
:* sublist that doesn't create empty
:* spaces after definition
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| Elenco numerato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;#&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&lt;nowiki&gt;#&lt;/nowiki&gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|Definition list}}
|-
| Lista di definizioni
| &lt;pre&gt;
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
; oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{note|1=Se la linea inizia con un punto e virgola (;), ogni due punti (:) inserito al termine di essa non verrà mostrato. Se vuoi che i due punti vengano mostrati, scrivili come &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#58;&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
;oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
|-
| Testo indentato
| &lt;pre&gt;
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{Note|1=Questa soluzione può danneggiare l'accessibilità}}
|
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
|-
| Mescolare differenti tipi di elenchi
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=L'utilizzo di &lt;code&gt;#:&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;*:&lt;/code&gt; per spezzare le righe di un oggetto in definizione può danneggiare l'accessibilità.}}
|
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
|-
| Testo preformattato
| &lt;pre&gt;
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=Questo modo di preformattare si applica solo alla formattazione delle sezioni. Il markup di formattazione dei caratteri è comunque attivo.}}
|
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
|-
| Blocchi di testo preformattati
| &lt;pre&gt; &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato di blocco sarà
    mantenuto.

Questo è buone per copiare blocchi di codice:

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
 {{#tag:nowiki|Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato del blocco sarà mantenuto

Questo è un buon modo per copiare blocchi di codice

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False
}}
|}

{{anchor|&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;|.3Cp.3E}}
== Paragrafi ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;|.3Cbr.3E}}
MediaWiki ignora i singoli ritorni a capo. Per iniziare un nuovo paragrafo, lascia una riga vuota. Puoi forzare un ritorno a capo all'interno di un paragrafo con il tag HTML {{tag|br|single}}.

== Tag HTML ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;|.3Cdiv.3E|&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;|.3Cspan.3E}}
Alcuni [[wikipedia:HTML|HTML]] tags sono permessi in MediaWiki, ad esempio {{tag|code|open}}, [[w:Div and span|{{tag|div|open}}, and {{tag|span|open}}]] Questi funzionano ovunque tu li inserisca.
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;|.3Cins.3E|&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;|.3Cu.3E}}
|-
| Inserito &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browsers viene mostrato come un underline)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

o

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

o

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;del&amp;gt;|.3Cdel.3E|&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;|.3Cs.3E}}
|-
| Cancellato &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browser viene mostrato come barrato)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

o

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

oppure

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|.3Ccode.3E}}
|-
| Larghezza testo fissa
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;|.3Cblockquote.3E}}
|-
| Citazione
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=Se la citazione contiene più paragrafi, le etichette devono essere su righe separate per essere visualizzati correttamente, ad esempio:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;blockquote&gt;
Primo paragrafo.

Secondo paragrafo
&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Tracked|T309778|float=none}}
}}
|
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;q&amp;gt;|.3Cq.3E}}
|-
| Citazioni
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The q element '''must not''' be used in place of quotation marks that do not represent quotes; for example, it is inappropriate to use the q element for marking up sarcastic statements.&lt;ref&gt;[https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/text-level-semantics.html#the-q-element HTML Living Standard—The &amp;lt;'''q'''&amp;gt; element]&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;/span&gt;}}
| &lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;
|-
| Commento
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;|.3Cpre.3E}}
|-
| Testo già completamente formattato
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=Per contrassegnare il testo preformattato, spuntare la voce &quot;Testo preformattato&quot; alla fine della tabella precedente.}} 
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=È possibile indicare uno stile CSS all'interno della proprietà &lt;code&gt;style&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}
continua:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; | style=&quot;table-layout: fixed; width: 100%&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Il testo preformattato di '''default''' ha un attributo CSS (&lt;code&gt;white-space: pre-wrap;&lt;/code&gt;) per avvolgere il testo in base alla larghezza disponibile
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato''' con a capo automatico '''disabilitato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}


== Inserimento di simboli ==

I simboli e gli altri caratteri speciali non disponibili sulla tastiera possono essere inseriti in molti modi diversi. Molti [http://www.howtogeek.com/210824/how-to-quickly-type-special-characters-on-any-computer-smartphone-or-tablet/ Sistemi Operativi e browser] ti consentono di inserire caratteri speciali attraverso un menu di opzioni o un pannello del Sistema Operativo. In aggiunta a ciò, puoi inserirli nella schermata di modifica usando il WikiEditor o [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]].

Come ultima risorsa, è possibile utilizzare una sequenza speciale di caratteri. Tali sequenze sono chiamate entità HTML. Per esempio, la seguente sequenza (entità) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;rarr; e '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;mdash;. 
----
{{note|1=Passare il mouse su un simbolo per scoprire l'entità che lo produce.  Alcuni simboli non disponibili nel font corrente appariranno come quadrati vuoti.}} 

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; text-align:center; font-weight:bold;&quot;
|+ &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;HTML symbol entities&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acute;&quot;&gt;&amp;acute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;AElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;AElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;aelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alefsym;&quot;&gt;&amp;alefsym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;Alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;amp;&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;and;&quot;&gt;&amp;and;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ang;&quot;&gt;&amp;ang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;asymp;&quot;&gt;&amp;asymp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;bdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;brvbar;&quot;&gt;&amp;brvbar;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bull;&quot;&gt;&amp;bull;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cap;&quot;&gt;&amp;cap;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;cedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cent;&quot;&gt;&amp;cent;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;circ;&quot;&gt;&amp;circ;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;clubs;&quot;&gt;&amp;clubs;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cong;&quot;&gt;&amp;cong;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;copy;&quot;&gt;&amp;copy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;crarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;crarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cup;&quot;&gt;&amp;cup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;curren;&quot;&gt;&amp;curren;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;Dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;darr;&quot;&gt;&amp;darr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;dArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;deg;&quot;&gt;&amp;deg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;diams;&quot;&gt;&amp;diams;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;divide;&quot;&gt;&amp;divide;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;empty;&quot;&gt;&amp;empty;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;emsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;emsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ensp;&quot;&gt;&amp;ensp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;equiv;&quot;&gt;&amp;equiv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;eta;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ETH;&quot;&gt;&amp;ETH;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eth;&quot;&gt;&amp;eth;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euro;&quot;&gt;&amp;euro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;exist;&quot;&gt;&amp;exist;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;fnof;&quot;&gt;&amp;fnof;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;forall;&quot;&gt;&amp;forall;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac12;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac12;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac14;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac14;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac34;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac34;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frasl;&quot;&gt;&amp;frasl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ge;&quot;&gt;&amp;ge;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gt;&quot;&gt;&amp;gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;harr;&quot;&gt;&amp;harr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;hArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hearts;&quot;&gt;&amp;hearts;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hellip;&quot;&gt;&amp;hellip;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iexcl;&quot;&gt;&amp;iexcl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;image;&quot;&gt;&amp;image;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;infin;&quot;&gt;&amp;infin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;int;&quot;&gt;&amp;int;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iota;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;iota;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iquest;&quot;&gt;&amp;iquest;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;isin;&quot;&gt;&amp;isin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;Kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;Lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lang;&quot;&gt;&amp;lang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;laquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;laquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;larr;&quot;&gt;&amp;larr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;lArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;lceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ldquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;ldquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;le;&quot;&gt;&amp;le;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;lfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lowast;&quot;&gt;&amp;lowast;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;loz;&quot;&gt;&amp;loz;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lrm;&quot;&gt;&amp;lrm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lt;&quot;&gt;&amp;lt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;macr;&quot;&gt;&amp;macr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mdash;&quot;&gt;&amp;mdash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;micro;&quot;&gt;&amp;micro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;middot;&quot;&gt;&amp;middot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;minus;&quot;&gt;&amp;minus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nabla;&quot;&gt;&amp;nabla;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ndash;&quot;&gt;&amp;ndash;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ne;&quot;&gt;&amp;ne;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ni;&quot;&gt;&amp;ni;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;not;&quot;&gt;&amp;not;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;notin;&quot;&gt;&amp;notin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nsub;&quot;&gt;&amp;nsub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;OElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;OElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;oelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oline;&quot;&gt;&amp;oline;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oplus;&quot;&gt;&amp;oplus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;or;&quot;&gt;&amp;or;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordf;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordm;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otimes;&quot;&gt;&amp;otimes;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;para;&quot;&gt;&amp;para;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;part;&quot;&gt;&amp;part;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;permil;&quot;&gt;&amp;permil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;perp;&quot;&gt;&amp;perp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;piv;&quot;&gt;&amp;piv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;plusmn;&quot;&gt;&amp;plusmn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pound;&quot;&gt;&amp;pound;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;Prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prod;&quot;&gt;&amp;prod;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prop;&quot;&gt;&amp;prop;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;quot;&quot;&gt;&amp;quot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;radic;&quot;&gt;&amp;radic;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rang;&quot;&gt;&amp;rang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;raquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;raquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;rceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;real;&quot;&gt;&amp;real;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;reg;&quot;&gt;&amp;reg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;rfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;Rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rlm;&quot;&gt;&amp;rlm;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sbquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;sbquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sdot;&quot;&gt;&amp;sdot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sect;&quot;&gt;&amp;sect;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;shy;&quot;&gt;&amp;shy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigmaf;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigmaf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sim;&quot;&gt;&amp;sim;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;spades;&quot;&gt;&amp;spades;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sub;&quot;&gt;&amp;sub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sube;&quot;&gt;&amp;sube;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sum;&quot;&gt;&amp;sum;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup1;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup1;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup2;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup2;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup3;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup3;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;supe;&quot;&gt;&amp;supe;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;szlig;&quot;&gt;&amp;szlig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;Tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;there4;&quot;&gt;&amp;there4;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thetasym;&quot;&gt;&amp;thetasym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thinsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;thinsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;THORN;&quot;&gt;&amp;THORN;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thorn;&quot;&gt;&amp;thorn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;tilde;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;times;&quot;&gt;&amp;times;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;trade;&quot;&gt;&amp;trade;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsih;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsih;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;weierp;&quot;&gt;&amp;weierp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yen;&quot;&gt;&amp;yen;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwj;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwnj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwnj;&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Simbolo di Copyright
|class=mw-code| &amp;amp;copy;
|
:::'''&amp;copy;'''
|-
| Simbolo lettera delta greca
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;delta;
|
:::'''&amp;delta;'''
|-
| Simbolo di valuta Euro
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;euro;
|
:::'''&amp;euro;'''
|}
Si veda la lista delle entità HTML nell'articolo Wikipedia  [[wikipedia:List of HTML entities|List of HTML entities]]. Oltre a queste, MediaWiki supporta due sequenze di riferimento ad entità: &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;רלמ;&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;رلم;&lt;/code&gt;, entrambe vengono considerate equivalenti a &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;rlm;&lt;/code&gt; che è un [[wikipedia:Right-to-left mark|right-to-left mark]]. (Utilizzata quando, nella stessa pagina, vengono combinate lingue da destra a sinistra con lingue da sinistra a destra)

== Tag HTML ed entità di simboli visualizzati tali e quali (senza interpretazione) ==
:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;amp;euro;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;amp;euro;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&amp;lt;/span&gt;'''

=== Nowiki per HTML ===
{{tag|nowiki|s}} può vietare tag (HTML):
* &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;&lt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;nowiki /&gt;pre&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &lt;&lt;nowiki/&gt;pre&gt;
Ma ''non'' &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli:
* &amp;&lt;&lt;nowiki /&gt;nowiki /&gt;amp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &amp;&lt;nowiki /&gt;amp;
Per visualizzare &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli come testo, utilizzare &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot; al posto del carattere &quot;&amp;&quot; (es. inserire &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;, che viene visualizzato come &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;).

== Altri formati ==

Oltre ai markup di formattazione del testo sopraindicati vi sono alcuni altri riferimenti:

* {{ll|Help:Links|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Lists|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Images|nsp=0}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* LanguageConverter markup – see {{ll|Writing systems/Syntax}}
&lt;/div&gt;
* Riferimenti - si veda {{ll|Extension:Cite}}
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tables|Tabelle]]

Altri riferimenti sono disponibili in {{ll|Help:Contents}}.

== Riferimenti ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Formatting]]</text>
      <sha1>lhdarpjfmzqpcaqybn83ksi9xh7geyj</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402966</id>
      <parentid>5402964</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:43:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;*elenco puntato :- definizione :* sottoelenco che non crea spazio :* vuoto dopo la definizione&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26703" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
Puoi formattare il tuo testo utilizzando il linguaggio di markup di wiki. Questo consiste in caratteri normali come asterischi, apostrofi o simboli di uguaglianza che hanno funzioni speciali in wiki, alle volte dipendenti dalla loro posizione. Per esempio, per formattare una parola in ''corsivo'' bisogna introdurre il testo da mettere in corsivo in due paia di apostrofi come ad esempio &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;''questo''&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.

==Markup di formattazione del testo==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | formattazione dei caratteri in line - &quot;si applica ovunque&quot;
|-
| Testo in corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
''corsivo''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
''corsivo''
|-
| Testo in grassetto
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''grassetto'''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''grassetto'''
|-
| Grassetto e Corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|nowiki|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|.3Cnowiki.3E}}
|-
| Ignorare il linguaggio di markup wiki
| {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|
&lt;!-- This can't use ＜syntaxhighlight＞＜nowiki＞, as that breaks the ＜translate＞ tag --&gt;
{{^(}}nowiki{{)^}}no [[wiki]] ''markup''{{^(}}/nowiki{{)^}}
| lang = &quot;html&quot;
}}
|
&lt;nowiki&gt;no [[wiki]] ''markup''&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | Formattazione della sezione - ''solo all'inizio della riga''
|-
| Intestazioni di livelli differenti 
| &lt;pre&gt;
== Livello 2 ==

=== Livello 3 ===

==== Livello 4 ====

===== Livello 5 =====

====== Livello 6 ======
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help_talk:Formatting#Level_1|Salta Livello 1]], è il livello nome della pagina.
* Non inserire alcun testo sulla stessa linea dopo i segni uguale finali.
* Un articolo con 4 o più intestazioni crea automaticamente un [[wikipedia:Help:Section#Table of contents (TOC)|indice]] (a meno che non si inserisca la parola magica &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
}}
|
&lt;!-- using HTML markup to avoid creating new sections --&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;Livello 2&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;Livello 3&lt;/h3&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;Livello 4&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Livello 5&lt;/h5&gt;

&lt;h6&gt;Livello 6&lt;/h6&gt;
|-
| Riga orizzontale
| &lt;pre&gt;
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
|-
| Elenco puntato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
*:- definizione
** senza spazi vuoti

*elenco puntato
:- definizione
:* sottoelenco che non crea spazio
:* vuoto dopo la definizione
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
*:- definizione
** senza spazi vuoti

*elenco puntato
:- definizione
:* sottoelenco che non crea spazio
:* vuoto dopo la definizione
|-
| Elenco numerato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;#&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&lt;nowiki&gt;#&lt;/nowiki&gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|Definition list}}
|-
| Lista di definizioni
| &lt;pre&gt;
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
; oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{note|1=Se la linea inizia con un punto e virgola (;), ogni due punti (:) inserito al termine di essa non verrà mostrato. Se vuoi che i due punti vengano mostrati, scrivili come &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#58;&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
;oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
|-
| Testo indentato
| &lt;pre&gt;
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{Note|1=Questa soluzione può danneggiare l'accessibilità}}
|
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
|-
| Mescolare differenti tipi di elenchi
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=L'utilizzo di &lt;code&gt;#:&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;*:&lt;/code&gt; per spezzare le righe di un oggetto in definizione può danneggiare l'accessibilità.}}
|
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
|-
| Testo preformattato
| &lt;pre&gt;
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=Questo modo di preformattare si applica solo alla formattazione delle sezioni. Il markup di formattazione dei caratteri è comunque attivo.}}
|
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
|-
| Blocchi di testo preformattati
| &lt;pre&gt; &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato di blocco sarà
    mantenuto.

Questo è buone per copiare blocchi di codice:

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
 {{#tag:nowiki|Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato del blocco sarà mantenuto

Questo è un buon modo per copiare blocchi di codice

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False
}}
|}

{{anchor|&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;|.3Cp.3E}}
== Paragrafi ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;|.3Cbr.3E}}
MediaWiki ignora i singoli ritorni a capo. Per iniziare un nuovo paragrafo, lascia una riga vuota. Puoi forzare un ritorno a capo all'interno di un paragrafo con il tag HTML {{tag|br|single}}.

== Tag HTML ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;|.3Cdiv.3E|&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;|.3Cspan.3E}}
Alcuni [[wikipedia:HTML|HTML]] tags sono permessi in MediaWiki, ad esempio {{tag|code|open}}, [[w:Div and span|{{tag|div|open}}, and {{tag|span|open}}]] Questi funzionano ovunque tu li inserisca.
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;|.3Cins.3E|&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;|.3Cu.3E}}
|-
| Inserito &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browsers viene mostrato come un underline)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

o

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

o

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;del&amp;gt;|.3Cdel.3E|&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;|.3Cs.3E}}
|-
| Cancellato &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browser viene mostrato come barrato)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

o

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

oppure

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|.3Ccode.3E}}
|-
| Larghezza testo fissa
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;|.3Cblockquote.3E}}
|-
| Citazione
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=Se la citazione contiene più paragrafi, le etichette devono essere su righe separate per essere visualizzati correttamente, ad esempio:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;blockquote&gt;
Primo paragrafo.

Secondo paragrafo
&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Tracked|T309778|float=none}}
}}
|
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;q&amp;gt;|.3Cq.3E}}
|-
| Citazioni
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The q element '''must not''' be used in place of quotation marks that do not represent quotes; for example, it is inappropriate to use the q element for marking up sarcastic statements.&lt;ref&gt;[https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/text-level-semantics.html#the-q-element HTML Living Standard—The &amp;lt;'''q'''&amp;gt; element]&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;/span&gt;}}
| &lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;
|-
| Commento
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;|.3Cpre.3E}}
|-
| Testo già completamente formattato
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=Per contrassegnare il testo preformattato, spuntare la voce &quot;Testo preformattato&quot; alla fine della tabella precedente.}} 
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=È possibile indicare uno stile CSS all'interno della proprietà &lt;code&gt;style&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}
continua:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; | style=&quot;table-layout: fixed; width: 100%&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Il testo preformattato di '''default''' ha un attributo CSS (&lt;code&gt;white-space: pre-wrap;&lt;/code&gt;) per avvolgere il testo in base alla larghezza disponibile
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato''' con a capo automatico '''disabilitato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}


== Inserimento di simboli ==

I simboli e gli altri caratteri speciali non disponibili sulla tastiera possono essere inseriti in molti modi diversi. Molti [http://www.howtogeek.com/210824/how-to-quickly-type-special-characters-on-any-computer-smartphone-or-tablet/ Sistemi Operativi e browser] ti consentono di inserire caratteri speciali attraverso un menu di opzioni o un pannello del Sistema Operativo. In aggiunta a ciò, puoi inserirli nella schermata di modifica usando il WikiEditor o [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]].

Come ultima risorsa, è possibile utilizzare una sequenza speciale di caratteri. Tali sequenze sono chiamate entità HTML. Per esempio, la seguente sequenza (entità) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;rarr; e '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;mdash;. 
----
{{note|1=Passare il mouse su un simbolo per scoprire l'entità che lo produce.  Alcuni simboli non disponibili nel font corrente appariranno come quadrati vuoti.}} 

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; text-align:center; font-weight:bold;&quot;
|+ &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;HTML symbol entities&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acute;&quot;&gt;&amp;acute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;AElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;AElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;aelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alefsym;&quot;&gt;&amp;alefsym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;Alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;amp;&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;and;&quot;&gt;&amp;and;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ang;&quot;&gt;&amp;ang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;asymp;&quot;&gt;&amp;asymp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;bdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;brvbar;&quot;&gt;&amp;brvbar;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bull;&quot;&gt;&amp;bull;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cap;&quot;&gt;&amp;cap;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;cedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cent;&quot;&gt;&amp;cent;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;circ;&quot;&gt;&amp;circ;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;clubs;&quot;&gt;&amp;clubs;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cong;&quot;&gt;&amp;cong;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;copy;&quot;&gt;&amp;copy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;crarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;crarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cup;&quot;&gt;&amp;cup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;curren;&quot;&gt;&amp;curren;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;Dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;darr;&quot;&gt;&amp;darr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;dArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;deg;&quot;&gt;&amp;deg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;diams;&quot;&gt;&amp;diams;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;divide;&quot;&gt;&amp;divide;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;empty;&quot;&gt;&amp;empty;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;emsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;emsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ensp;&quot;&gt;&amp;ensp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;equiv;&quot;&gt;&amp;equiv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;eta;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ETH;&quot;&gt;&amp;ETH;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eth;&quot;&gt;&amp;eth;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euro;&quot;&gt;&amp;euro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;exist;&quot;&gt;&amp;exist;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;fnof;&quot;&gt;&amp;fnof;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;forall;&quot;&gt;&amp;forall;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac12;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac12;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac14;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac14;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac34;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac34;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frasl;&quot;&gt;&amp;frasl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ge;&quot;&gt;&amp;ge;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gt;&quot;&gt;&amp;gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;harr;&quot;&gt;&amp;harr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;hArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hearts;&quot;&gt;&amp;hearts;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hellip;&quot;&gt;&amp;hellip;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iexcl;&quot;&gt;&amp;iexcl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;image;&quot;&gt;&amp;image;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;infin;&quot;&gt;&amp;infin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;int;&quot;&gt;&amp;int;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iota;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;iota;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iquest;&quot;&gt;&amp;iquest;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;isin;&quot;&gt;&amp;isin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;Kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;Lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lang;&quot;&gt;&amp;lang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;laquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;laquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;larr;&quot;&gt;&amp;larr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;lArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;lceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ldquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;ldquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;le;&quot;&gt;&amp;le;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;lfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lowast;&quot;&gt;&amp;lowast;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;loz;&quot;&gt;&amp;loz;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lrm;&quot;&gt;&amp;lrm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lt;&quot;&gt;&amp;lt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;macr;&quot;&gt;&amp;macr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mdash;&quot;&gt;&amp;mdash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;micro;&quot;&gt;&amp;micro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;middot;&quot;&gt;&amp;middot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;minus;&quot;&gt;&amp;minus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nabla;&quot;&gt;&amp;nabla;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ndash;&quot;&gt;&amp;ndash;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ne;&quot;&gt;&amp;ne;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ni;&quot;&gt;&amp;ni;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;not;&quot;&gt;&amp;not;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;notin;&quot;&gt;&amp;notin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nsub;&quot;&gt;&amp;nsub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;OElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;OElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;oelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oline;&quot;&gt;&amp;oline;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oplus;&quot;&gt;&amp;oplus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;or;&quot;&gt;&amp;or;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordf;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordm;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otimes;&quot;&gt;&amp;otimes;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;para;&quot;&gt;&amp;para;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;part;&quot;&gt;&amp;part;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;permil;&quot;&gt;&amp;permil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;perp;&quot;&gt;&amp;perp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;piv;&quot;&gt;&amp;piv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;plusmn;&quot;&gt;&amp;plusmn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pound;&quot;&gt;&amp;pound;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;Prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prod;&quot;&gt;&amp;prod;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prop;&quot;&gt;&amp;prop;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;quot;&quot;&gt;&amp;quot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;radic;&quot;&gt;&amp;radic;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rang;&quot;&gt;&amp;rang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;raquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;raquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;rceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;real;&quot;&gt;&amp;real;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;reg;&quot;&gt;&amp;reg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;rfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;Rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rlm;&quot;&gt;&amp;rlm;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sbquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;sbquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sdot;&quot;&gt;&amp;sdot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sect;&quot;&gt;&amp;sect;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;shy;&quot;&gt;&amp;shy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigmaf;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigmaf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sim;&quot;&gt;&amp;sim;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;spades;&quot;&gt;&amp;spades;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sub;&quot;&gt;&amp;sub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sube;&quot;&gt;&amp;sube;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sum;&quot;&gt;&amp;sum;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup1;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup1;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup2;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup2;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup3;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup3;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;supe;&quot;&gt;&amp;supe;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;szlig;&quot;&gt;&amp;szlig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;Tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;there4;&quot;&gt;&amp;there4;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thetasym;&quot;&gt;&amp;thetasym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thinsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;thinsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;THORN;&quot;&gt;&amp;THORN;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thorn;&quot;&gt;&amp;thorn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;tilde;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;times;&quot;&gt;&amp;times;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;trade;&quot;&gt;&amp;trade;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsih;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsih;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;weierp;&quot;&gt;&amp;weierp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yen;&quot;&gt;&amp;yen;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwj;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwnj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwnj;&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Simbolo di Copyright
|class=mw-code| &amp;amp;copy;
|
:::'''&amp;copy;'''
|-
| Simbolo lettera delta greca
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;delta;
|
:::'''&amp;delta;'''
|-
| Simbolo di valuta Euro
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;euro;
|
:::'''&amp;euro;'''
|}
Si veda la lista delle entità HTML nell'articolo Wikipedia  [[wikipedia:List of HTML entities|List of HTML entities]]. Oltre a queste, MediaWiki supporta due sequenze di riferimento ad entità: &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;רלמ;&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;رلم;&lt;/code&gt;, entrambe vengono considerate equivalenti a &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;rlm;&lt;/code&gt; che è un [[wikipedia:Right-to-left mark|right-to-left mark]]. (Utilizzata quando, nella stessa pagina, vengono combinate lingue da destra a sinistra con lingue da sinistra a destra)

== Tag HTML ed entità di simboli visualizzati tali e quali (senza interpretazione) ==
:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;amp;euro;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;amp;euro;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&amp;lt;/span&gt;'''

=== Nowiki per HTML ===
{{tag|nowiki|s}} può vietare tag (HTML):
* &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;&lt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;nowiki /&gt;pre&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &lt;&lt;nowiki/&gt;pre&gt;
Ma ''non'' &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli:
* &amp;&lt;&lt;nowiki /&gt;nowiki /&gt;amp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &amp;&lt;nowiki /&gt;amp;
Per visualizzare &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli come testo, utilizzare &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot; al posto del carattere &quot;&amp;&quot; (es. inserire &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;, che viene visualizzato come &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;).

== Altri formati ==

Oltre ai markup di formattazione del testo sopraindicati vi sono alcuni altri riferimenti:

* {{ll|Help:Links|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Lists|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Images|nsp=0}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* LanguageConverter markup – see {{ll|Writing systems/Syntax}}
&lt;/div&gt;
* Riferimenti - si veda {{ll|Extension:Cite}}
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tables|Tabelle]]

Altri riferimenti sono disponibili in {{ll|Help:Contents}}.

== Riferimenti ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Formatting]]</text>
      <sha1>6xd25ogk6qit7nmz1iucv6esq10emyp</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402971</id>
      <parentid>5402966</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:45:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26708" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
Puoi formattare il tuo testo utilizzando il linguaggio di markup di wiki. Questo consiste in caratteri normali come asterischi, apostrofi o simboli di uguaglianza che hanno funzioni speciali in wiki, alle volte dipendenti dalla loro posizione. Per esempio, per formattare una parola in ''corsivo'' bisogna introdurre il testo da mettere in corsivo in due paia di apostrofi come ad esempio &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;''questo''&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.

==Markup di formattazione del testo==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | formattazione dei caratteri in line - &quot;si applica ovunque&quot;
|-
| Testo in corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
''corsivo''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
''corsivo''
|-
| Testo in grassetto
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''grassetto'''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''grassetto'''
|-
| Grassetto e Corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|nowiki|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|.3Cnowiki.3E}}
|-
| Ignorare il linguaggio di markup wiki
| {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|
&lt;!-- This can't use ＜syntaxhighlight＞＜nowiki＞, as that breaks the ＜translate＞ tag --&gt;
{{^(}}nowiki{{)^}}no [[wiki]] ''markup''{{^(}}/nowiki{{)^}}
| lang = &quot;html&quot;
}}
|
&lt;nowiki&gt;no [[wiki]] ''markup''&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | Formattazione della sezione - ''solo all'inizio della riga''
|-
| Intestazioni di livelli differenti 
| &lt;pre&gt;
== Livello 2 ==

=== Livello 3 ===

==== Livello 4 ====

===== Livello 5 =====

====== Livello 6 ======
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help_talk:Formatting#Level_1|Salta Livello 1]], è il livello nome della pagina.
* Non inserire alcun testo sulla stessa linea dopo i segni uguale finali.
* Un articolo con 4 o più intestazioni crea automaticamente un [[wikipedia:Help:Section#Table of contents (TOC)|indice]] (a meno che non si inserisca la parola magica &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
}}
|
&lt;!-- using HTML markup to avoid creating new sections --&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;Livello 2&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;Livello 3&lt;/h3&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;Livello 4&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Livello 5&lt;/h5&gt;

&lt;h6&gt;Livello 6&lt;/h6&gt;
|-
| Riga orizzontale
| &lt;pre&gt;
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
|-
| Elenco puntato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
*:- definizione
** senza spazi vuoti

*elenco puntato
:- definizione
:* sottoelenco che non crea spazio
:* vuoto dopo la definizione
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
*:- definizione
** senza spazi vuoti

*elenco puntato
:- definizione
:* sottoelenco che non crea spazio
:* vuoto dopo la definizione
|-
| Elenco numerato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;#&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&lt;nowiki&gt;#&lt;/nowiki&gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|Definition list}}
|-
| Lista di definizioni
| &lt;pre&gt;
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
; oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{note|1=Se la linea inizia con un punto e virgola (;), ogni due punti (:) inserito al termine di essa non verrà mostrato. Se vuoi che i due punti vengano mostrati, scrivili come &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#58;&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
;oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
|-
| Testo indentato
| &lt;pre&gt;
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{Note|1=Questa soluzione può danneggiare l'accessibilità}}
|
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
|-
| Mescolare differenti tipi di elenchi
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=L'utilizzo di &lt;code&gt;#:&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;*:&lt;/code&gt; per spezzare le righe di un oggetto in definizione può danneggiare l'accessibilità.}}
|
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
|-
| Testo preformattato
| &lt;pre&gt;
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=Questo modo di preformattare si applica solo alla formattazione delle sezioni. Il markup di formattazione dei caratteri è comunque attivo.}}
|
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
|-
| Blocchi di testo preformattati
| &lt;pre&gt; &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato di blocco sarà
    mantenuto.

Questo è buone per copiare blocchi di codice:

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
 {{#tag:nowiki|Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato del blocco sarà mantenuto

Questo è un buon modo per copiare blocchi di codice

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False
}}
|}

{{anchor|&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;|.3Cp.3E}}
== Paragrafi ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;|.3Cbr.3E}}
MediaWiki ignora i singoli ritorni a capo. Per iniziare un nuovo paragrafo, lascia una riga vuota. Puoi forzare un ritorno a capo all'interno di un paragrafo con il tag HTML {{tag|br|single}}.

== Tag HTML ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;|.3Cdiv.3E|&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;|.3Cspan.3E}}
Alcuni [[wikipedia:HTML|HTML]] tags sono permessi in MediaWiki, ad esempio {{tag|code|open}}, [[w:Div and span|{{tag|div|open}}, and {{tag|span|open}}]] Questi funzionano ovunque tu li inserisca.
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;|.3Cins.3E|&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;|.3Cu.3E}}
|-
| Inserito &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browsers viene mostrato come un underline)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

oppure

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

o

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;del&amp;gt;|.3Cdel.3E|&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;|.3Cs.3E}}
|-
| Cancellato &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browser viene mostrato come barrato)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

o

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

oppure

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|.3Ccode.3E}}
|-
| Larghezza testo fissa
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;|.3Cblockquote.3E}}
|-
| Citazione
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=Se la citazione contiene più paragrafi, le etichette devono essere su righe separate per essere visualizzati correttamente, ad esempio:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;blockquote&gt;
Primo paragrafo.

Secondo paragrafo
&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Tracked|T309778|float=none}}
}}
|
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;q&amp;gt;|.3Cq.3E}}
|-
| Citazioni
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The q element '''must not''' be used in place of quotation marks that do not represent quotes; for example, it is inappropriate to use the q element for marking up sarcastic statements.&lt;ref&gt;[https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/text-level-semantics.html#the-q-element HTML Living Standard—The &amp;lt;'''q'''&amp;gt; element]&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;/span&gt;}}
| &lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;
|-
| Commento
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;|.3Cpre.3E}}
|-
| Testo già completamente formattato
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=Per contrassegnare il testo preformattato, spuntare la voce &quot;Testo preformattato&quot; alla fine della tabella precedente.}} 
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=È possibile indicare uno stile CSS all'interno della proprietà &lt;code&gt;style&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}
continua:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; | style=&quot;table-layout: fixed; width: 100%&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Il testo preformattato di '''default''' ha un attributo CSS (&lt;code&gt;white-space: pre-wrap;&lt;/code&gt;) per avvolgere il testo in base alla larghezza disponibile
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato''' con a capo automatico '''disabilitato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}


== Inserimento di simboli ==

I simboli e gli altri caratteri speciali non disponibili sulla tastiera possono essere inseriti in molti modi diversi. Molti [http://www.howtogeek.com/210824/how-to-quickly-type-special-characters-on-any-computer-smartphone-or-tablet/ Sistemi Operativi e browser] ti consentono di inserire caratteri speciali attraverso un menu di opzioni o un pannello del Sistema Operativo. In aggiunta a ciò, puoi inserirli nella schermata di modifica usando il WikiEditor o [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]].

Come ultima risorsa, è possibile utilizzare una sequenza speciale di caratteri. Tali sequenze sono chiamate entità HTML. Per esempio, la seguente sequenza (entità) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;rarr; e '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;mdash;. 
----
{{note|1=Passare il mouse su un simbolo per scoprire l'entità che lo produce.  Alcuni simboli non disponibili nel font corrente appariranno come quadrati vuoti.}} 

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; text-align:center; font-weight:bold;&quot;
|+ &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;HTML symbol entities&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acute;&quot;&gt;&amp;acute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;AElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;AElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;aelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alefsym;&quot;&gt;&amp;alefsym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;Alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;amp;&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;and;&quot;&gt;&amp;and;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ang;&quot;&gt;&amp;ang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;asymp;&quot;&gt;&amp;asymp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;bdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;brvbar;&quot;&gt;&amp;brvbar;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bull;&quot;&gt;&amp;bull;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cap;&quot;&gt;&amp;cap;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;cedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cent;&quot;&gt;&amp;cent;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;circ;&quot;&gt;&amp;circ;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;clubs;&quot;&gt;&amp;clubs;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cong;&quot;&gt;&amp;cong;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;copy;&quot;&gt;&amp;copy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;crarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;crarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cup;&quot;&gt;&amp;cup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;curren;&quot;&gt;&amp;curren;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;Dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;darr;&quot;&gt;&amp;darr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;dArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;deg;&quot;&gt;&amp;deg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;diams;&quot;&gt;&amp;diams;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;divide;&quot;&gt;&amp;divide;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;empty;&quot;&gt;&amp;empty;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;emsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;emsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ensp;&quot;&gt;&amp;ensp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;equiv;&quot;&gt;&amp;equiv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;eta;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ETH;&quot;&gt;&amp;ETH;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eth;&quot;&gt;&amp;eth;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euro;&quot;&gt;&amp;euro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;exist;&quot;&gt;&amp;exist;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;fnof;&quot;&gt;&amp;fnof;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;forall;&quot;&gt;&amp;forall;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac12;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac12;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac14;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac14;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac34;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac34;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frasl;&quot;&gt;&amp;frasl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ge;&quot;&gt;&amp;ge;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gt;&quot;&gt;&amp;gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;harr;&quot;&gt;&amp;harr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;hArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hearts;&quot;&gt;&amp;hearts;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hellip;&quot;&gt;&amp;hellip;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iexcl;&quot;&gt;&amp;iexcl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;image;&quot;&gt;&amp;image;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;infin;&quot;&gt;&amp;infin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;int;&quot;&gt;&amp;int;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iota;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;iota;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iquest;&quot;&gt;&amp;iquest;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;isin;&quot;&gt;&amp;isin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;Kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;Lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lang;&quot;&gt;&amp;lang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;laquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;laquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;larr;&quot;&gt;&amp;larr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;lArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;lceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ldquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;ldquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;le;&quot;&gt;&amp;le;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;lfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lowast;&quot;&gt;&amp;lowast;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;loz;&quot;&gt;&amp;loz;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lrm;&quot;&gt;&amp;lrm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lt;&quot;&gt;&amp;lt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;macr;&quot;&gt;&amp;macr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mdash;&quot;&gt;&amp;mdash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;micro;&quot;&gt;&amp;micro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;middot;&quot;&gt;&amp;middot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;minus;&quot;&gt;&amp;minus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nabla;&quot;&gt;&amp;nabla;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ndash;&quot;&gt;&amp;ndash;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ne;&quot;&gt;&amp;ne;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ni;&quot;&gt;&amp;ni;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;not;&quot;&gt;&amp;not;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;notin;&quot;&gt;&amp;notin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nsub;&quot;&gt;&amp;nsub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;OElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;OElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;oelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oline;&quot;&gt;&amp;oline;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oplus;&quot;&gt;&amp;oplus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;or;&quot;&gt;&amp;or;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordf;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordm;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otimes;&quot;&gt;&amp;otimes;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;para;&quot;&gt;&amp;para;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;part;&quot;&gt;&amp;part;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;permil;&quot;&gt;&amp;permil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;perp;&quot;&gt;&amp;perp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;piv;&quot;&gt;&amp;piv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;plusmn;&quot;&gt;&amp;plusmn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pound;&quot;&gt;&amp;pound;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;Prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prod;&quot;&gt;&amp;prod;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prop;&quot;&gt;&amp;prop;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;quot;&quot;&gt;&amp;quot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;radic;&quot;&gt;&amp;radic;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rang;&quot;&gt;&amp;rang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;raquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;raquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;rceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;real;&quot;&gt;&amp;real;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;reg;&quot;&gt;&amp;reg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;rfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;Rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rlm;&quot;&gt;&amp;rlm;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sbquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;sbquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sdot;&quot;&gt;&amp;sdot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sect;&quot;&gt;&amp;sect;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;shy;&quot;&gt;&amp;shy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigmaf;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigmaf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sim;&quot;&gt;&amp;sim;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;spades;&quot;&gt;&amp;spades;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sub;&quot;&gt;&amp;sub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sube;&quot;&gt;&amp;sube;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sum;&quot;&gt;&amp;sum;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup1;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup1;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup2;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup2;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup3;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup3;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;supe;&quot;&gt;&amp;supe;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;szlig;&quot;&gt;&amp;szlig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;Tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;there4;&quot;&gt;&amp;there4;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thetasym;&quot;&gt;&amp;thetasym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thinsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;thinsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;THORN;&quot;&gt;&amp;THORN;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thorn;&quot;&gt;&amp;thorn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;tilde;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;times;&quot;&gt;&amp;times;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;trade;&quot;&gt;&amp;trade;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsih;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsih;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;weierp;&quot;&gt;&amp;weierp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yen;&quot;&gt;&amp;yen;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwj;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwnj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwnj;&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Simbolo di Copyright
|class=mw-code| &amp;amp;copy;
|
:::'''&amp;copy;'''
|-
| Simbolo lettera delta greca
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;delta;
|
:::'''&amp;delta;'''
|-
| Simbolo di valuta Euro
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;euro;
|
:::'''&amp;euro;'''
|}
Si veda la lista delle entità HTML nell'articolo Wikipedia  [[wikipedia:List of HTML entities|List of HTML entities]]. Oltre a queste, MediaWiki supporta due sequenze di riferimento ad entità: &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;רלמ;&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;رلم;&lt;/code&gt;, entrambe vengono considerate equivalenti a &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;rlm;&lt;/code&gt; che è un [[wikipedia:Right-to-left mark|right-to-left mark]]. (Utilizzata quando, nella stessa pagina, vengono combinate lingue da destra a sinistra con lingue da sinistra a destra)

== Tag HTML ed entità di simboli visualizzati tali e quali (senza interpretazione) ==
:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;amp;euro;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;amp;euro;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&amp;lt;/span&gt;'''

=== Nowiki per HTML ===
{{tag|nowiki|s}} può vietare tag (HTML):
* &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;&lt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;nowiki /&gt;pre&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &lt;&lt;nowiki/&gt;pre&gt;
Ma ''non'' &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli:
* &amp;&lt;&lt;nowiki /&gt;nowiki /&gt;amp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &amp;&lt;nowiki /&gt;amp;
Per visualizzare &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli come testo, utilizzare &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot; al posto del carattere &quot;&amp;&quot; (es. inserire &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;, che viene visualizzato come &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;).

== Altri formati ==

Oltre ai markup di formattazione del testo sopraindicati vi sono alcuni altri riferimenti:

* {{ll|Help:Links|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Lists|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Images|nsp=0}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* LanguageConverter markup – see {{ll|Writing systems/Syntax}}
&lt;/div&gt;
* Riferimenti - si veda {{ll|Extension:Cite}}
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tables|Tabelle]]

Altri riferimenti sono disponibili in {{ll|Help:Contents}}.

== Riferimenti ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Formatting]]</text>
      <sha1>326mct3mt0x6wtqk81wselix7vkd7dz</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402975</id>
      <parentid>5402971</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:46:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26705" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
Puoi formattare il tuo testo utilizzando il linguaggio di markup di wiki. Questo consiste in caratteri normali come asterischi, apostrofi o simboli di uguaglianza che hanno funzioni speciali in wiki, alle volte dipendenti dalla loro posizione. Per esempio, per formattare una parola in ''corsivo'' bisogna introdurre il testo da mettere in corsivo in due paia di apostrofi come ad esempio &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;''questo''&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.

==Markup di formattazione del testo==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | formattazione dei caratteri in line - &quot;si applica ovunque&quot;
|-
| Testo in corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
''corsivo''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
''corsivo''
|-
| Testo in grassetto
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''grassetto'''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''grassetto'''
|-
| Grassetto e Corsivo
| &lt;pre&gt;
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
'''''grassetto &amp; corsivo'''''
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|nowiki|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|.3Cnowiki.3E}}
|-
| Ignorare il linguaggio di markup wiki
| {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|
&lt;!-- This can't use ＜syntaxhighlight＞＜nowiki＞, as that breaks the ＜translate＞ tag --&gt;
{{^(}}nowiki{{)^}}no [[wiki]] ''markup''{{^(}}/nowiki{{)^}}
| lang = &quot;html&quot;
}}
|
&lt;nowiki&gt;no [[wiki]] ''markup''&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|-
! colspan=&quot;3&quot; style=&quot;background: #ABE&quot; | Formattazione della sezione - ''solo all'inizio della riga''
|-
| Intestazioni di livelli differenti 
| &lt;pre&gt;
== Livello 2 ==

=== Livello 3 ===

==== Livello 4 ====

===== Livello 5 =====

====== Livello 6 ======
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help_talk:Formatting#Level_1|Salta Livello 1]], è il livello nome della pagina.
* Non inserire alcun testo sulla stessa linea dopo i segni uguale finali.
* Un articolo con 4 o più intestazioni crea automaticamente un [[wikipedia:Help:Section#Table of contents (TOC)|indice]] (a meno che non si inserisca la parola magica &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;).
}}
|
&lt;!-- using HTML markup to avoid creating new sections --&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;Livello 2&lt;/h2&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;Livello 3&lt;/h3&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;Livello 4&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Livello 5&lt;/h5&gt;

&lt;h6&gt;Livello 6&lt;/h6&gt;
|-
| Riga orizzontale
| &lt;pre&gt;
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
Testo prima
----
Testo dopo
|-
| Elenco puntato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
*:- definizione
** senza spazi vuoti

*elenco puntato
:- definizione
:* sottoelenco che non crea spazio
:* vuoto dopo la definizione
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
* Inizia ogni riga 
* con un [[Wikipedia:asterisk|asterisco]] (*).
** Più asterischi danno livelli profondi
*** e ancora più profondi.
* L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
*** Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
Ogni altra riga senza asterisco termina la lista.

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto

* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
*:- definizione
** senza spazi vuoti

*elenco puntato
:- definizione
:* sottoelenco che non crea spazio
:* vuoto dopo la definizione
|-
| Elenco numerato
|
&lt;pre&gt;
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;#&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
# Inizia ogni riga 
# con un [[Wikipedia:Number_sign|cancelletto]] (#).
## Più cancelletti danno livelli più profondi
### e ancora
### più profondi.
# L'andare a capo &lt;br /&gt;non spezza i livelli.
### Ma saltare i livelli crea uno spazio vuoto.
# Righe vuota

# finisci un elenco e avviane un altro.
Ogni altro inizio a sua volta
termina l'elenco.

&lt;nowiki&gt;#&lt;/nowiki&gt; usa le etichette &quot;nowiki&quot; per visualizzare un carattere (#) all'inizio di una riga senza interpretarla come un elenco numerato.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|Definition list}}
|-
| Lista di definizioni
| &lt;pre&gt;
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
; oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{note|1=Se la linea inizia con un punto e virgola (;), ogni due punti (:) inserito al termine di essa non verrà mostrato. Se vuoi che i due punti vengano mostrati, scrivili come &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#58;&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
;oggetto 1
: definizione 1
;oggetto 2
: definizione 2-1
: definizione 2-2
|-
| Testo indentato
| &lt;pre&gt;
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{Note|1=Questa soluzione può danneggiare l'accessibilità}}
|
: Indentazione singola
:: Indentazione doppia
::::: Indentazione multipla
|-
| Mescolare differenti tipi di elenchi
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=L'utilizzo di &lt;code&gt;#:&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;*:&lt;/code&gt; per spezzare le righe di un oggetto in definizione può danneggiare l'accessibilità.}}
|
# uno
# due
#* due punto uno
#* due punto due
# tre
#; tre oggetto uno
#: tre definizione uno
# quattro
#: quattro definizione uno
#: questo sembra essere un prolungamento
#: ed è usato spesso
#: al posto &lt;br /&gt; di &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
# cinque
## cinque, sottocat. 1
### cinque, sottocat. 1 sottocat. 1
## cinque sottocat. 2
|-
| Testo preformattato
| &lt;pre&gt;
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
&lt;/pre&gt;
----
{{note|1=Questo modo di preformattare si applica solo alla formattazione delle sezioni. Il markup di formattazione dei caratteri è comunque attivo.}}
|
 Inizia ogni riga con uno spazio.
 Il testo è '''preformattato''' e
 ''markups'' '''''possono''''' essere fatti.
|-
| Blocchi di testo preformattati
| &lt;pre&gt; &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato di blocco sarà
    mantenuto.

Questo è buone per copiare blocchi di codice:

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
 {{#tag:nowiki|Inizia con uno spazio nella prima colonna,
(prima del &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;).

Così il tuo formato del blocco sarà mantenuto

Questo è un buon modo per copiare blocchi di codice

def function():
    &quot;&quot;&quot;documentation string&quot;&quot;&quot;

    if True:
        print True
    else:
        print False
}}
|}

{{anchor|&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;|.3Cp.3E}}
== Paragrafi ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;|.3Cbr.3E}}
MediaWiki ignora i singoli ritorni a capo. Per iniziare un nuovo paragrafo, lascia una riga vuota. Puoi forzare un ritorno a capo all'interno di un paragrafo con il tag HTML {{tag|br|single}}.

== Tag HTML ==
{{anchor|&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;|.3Cdiv.3E|&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;|.3Cspan.3E}}
Alcuni [[wikipedia:HTML|HTML]] tags sono permessi in MediaWiki, ad esempio {{tag|code|open}}, [[w:Div and span|{{tag|div|open}}, and {{tag|span|open}}]] Questi funzionano ovunque tu li inserisca.
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;ins&amp;gt;|.3Cins.3E|&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;|.3Cu.3E}}
|-
| Inserito &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browsers viene mostrato come un underline)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

oppure

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;ins&gt;Inserito&lt;/ins&gt;

o

&lt;u&gt;Sottolineato&lt;/u&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;del&amp;gt;|.3Cdel.3E|&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;|.3Cs.3E}}
|-
| Cancellato &lt;br /&gt;(Nella maggior parte dei browser viene mostrato come barrato)
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

o

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;s&gt;Barrato&lt;/s&gt;

oppure

&lt;del&gt;Cancellato&lt;/del&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|.3Ccode.3E}}
|-
| Larghezza testo fissa
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;Codice sorgente&lt;/code&gt;
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;|.3Cblockquote.3E}}
|-
| Citazione
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=Se la citazione contiene più paragrafi, le etichette devono essere su righe separate per essere visualizzati correttamente, ad esempio:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;blockquote&gt;
Primo paragrafo.

Secondo paragrafo
&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Tracked|T309778|float=none}}
}}
|
Testo prima
&lt;blockquote&gt;Citazione&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Testo dopo
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;q&amp;gt;|.3Cq.3E}}
|-
| Citazioni
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;&lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The q element '''must not''' be used in place of quotation marks that do not represent quotes; for example, it is inappropriate to use the q element for marking up sarcastic statements.&lt;ref&gt;[https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/text-level-semantics.html#the-q-element HTML Living Standard—The &amp;lt;'''q'''&amp;gt; element]&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;/span&gt;}}
| &lt;q&gt;Questa è una citazione&lt;/q&gt;
|-
| Commento
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;! Questo è un commento --&gt;
I commenti sono visibili solo nella zona di modifica.
{{Table-AnchorRow|colspan=3|&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;|.3Cpre.3E}}
|-
| Testo già completamente formattato
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=Per contrassegnare il testo preformattato, spuntare la voce &quot;Testo preformattato&quot; alla fine della tabella precedente.}} 
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
----
{{note|1=È possibile indicare uno stile CSS all'interno della proprietà &lt;code&gt;style&lt;/code&gt;.}}
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;color: red&quot;&gt;
Il testo è '''preformattato''' 
con uno stile ed i 
''markup'' '''''non sono''''' possibili
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}
continua:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; | style=&quot;table-layout: fixed; width: 100%&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Il testo preformattato di '''default''' ha un attributo CSS (&lt;code&gt;white-space: pre-wrap;&lt;/code&gt;) per avvolgere il testo in base alla larghezza disponibile
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|-
| Testo preformattato '''personalizzato''' con a capo automatico '''disabilitato'''
| &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|
&lt;pre style=&quot;white-space: pre;&quot;&gt;
Questa frase lunga viene utilizzata per dimostrare la funzione di a capo automatico. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo. Questa ulteriore frase rende il testo ancora più lungo.
&lt;/pre&gt;
|}


== Inserimento di simboli ==

I simboli e gli altri caratteri speciali non disponibili sulla tastiera possono essere inseriti in molti modi diversi. Molti [http://www.howtogeek.com/210824/how-to-quickly-type-special-characters-on-any-computer-smartphone-or-tablet/ Sistemi Operativi e browser] ti consentono di inserire caratteri speciali attraverso un menu di opzioni o un pannello del Sistema Operativo. In aggiunta a ciò, puoi inserirli nella schermata di modifica usando il WikiEditor o [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]].

Come ultima risorsa, è possibile utilizzare una sequenza speciale di caratteri. Tali sequenze sono chiamate entità HTML. Per esempio, la seguente sequenza (entità) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;rarr; e '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' una volta inserita sarà mostrata come simbolo HTML &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; &amp;mdash;. 
----
{{note|1=Passare il mouse su un simbolo per scoprire l'entità che lo produce.  Alcuni simboli non disponibili nel font corrente appariranno come quadrati vuoti.}} 

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; text-align:center; font-weight:bold;&quot;
|+ &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;HTML symbol entities&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;aacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;acirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;acute;&quot;&gt;&amp;acute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;AElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;AElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;aelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;agrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;agrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alefsym;&quot;&gt;&amp;alefsym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;Alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;alpha;&quot;&gt;&amp;alpha;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;amp;&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;and;&quot;&gt;&amp;and;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ang;&quot;&gt;&amp;ang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;Aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;aring;&quot;&gt;&amp;aring;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;asymp;&quot;&gt;&amp;asymp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;atilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;atilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;auml;&quot;&gt;&amp;auml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;bdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;beta;&quot;&gt;&amp;beta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;brvbar;&quot;&gt;&amp;brvbar;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;bull;&quot;&gt;&amp;bull;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cap;&quot;&gt;&amp;cap;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ccedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;ccedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cedil;&quot;&gt;&amp;cedil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cent;&quot;&gt;&amp;cent;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;chi;&quot;&gt;&amp;chi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;circ;&quot;&gt;&amp;circ;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;clubs;&quot;&gt;&amp;clubs;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cong;&quot;&gt;&amp;cong;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;copy;&quot;&gt;&amp;copy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;crarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;crarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;cup;&quot;&gt;&amp;cup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;curren;&quot;&gt;&amp;curren;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Dagger;&quot;&gt;&amp;Dagger;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;darr;&quot;&gt;&amp;darr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;dArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;dArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;deg;&quot;&gt;&amp;deg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;delta;&quot;&gt;&amp;delta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;diams;&quot;&gt;&amp;diams;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;divide;&quot;&gt;&amp;divide;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;eacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ecirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ecirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;egrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;egrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;empty;&quot;&gt;&amp;empty;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;emsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;emsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ensp;&quot;&gt;&amp;ensp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;epsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;epsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;equiv;&quot;&gt;&amp;equiv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Eta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eta;&quot;&gt;&amp;eta;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ETH;&quot;&gt;&amp;ETH;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;eth;&quot;&gt;&amp;eth;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euml;&quot;&gt;&amp;euml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;euro;&quot;&gt;&amp;euro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;exist;&quot;&gt;&amp;exist;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;fnof;&quot;&gt;&amp;fnof;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;forall;&quot;&gt;&amp;forall;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac12;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac12;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac14;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac14;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frac34;&quot;&gt;&amp;frac34;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;frasl;&quot;&gt;&amp;frasl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gamma;&quot;&gt;&amp;gamma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ge;&quot;&gt;&amp;ge;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;gt;&quot;&gt;&amp;gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;harr;&quot;&gt;&amp;harr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;hArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hearts;&quot;&gt;&amp;hearts;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;hellip;&quot;&gt;&amp;hellip;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;iacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;icirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;icirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iexcl;&quot;&gt;&amp;iexcl;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;igrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;igrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;image;&quot;&gt;&amp;image;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;infin;&quot;&gt;&amp;infin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;int;&quot;&gt;&amp;int;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iota;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iota;&quot;&gt;&amp;iota;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iquest;&quot;&gt;&amp;iquest;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;isin;&quot;&gt;&amp;isin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;iuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;iuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;Kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;kappa;&quot;&gt;&amp;kappa;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;Lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lambda;&quot;&gt;&amp;lambda;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lang;&quot;&gt;&amp;lang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;laquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;laquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;larr;&quot;&gt;&amp;larr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;lArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;lceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ldquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;ldquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;le;&quot;&gt;&amp;le;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;lfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lowast;&quot;&gt;&amp;lowast;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;loz;&quot;&gt;&amp;loz;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lrm;&quot;&gt;&amp;lrm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;lsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;lt;&quot;&gt;&amp;lt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;macr;&quot;&gt;&amp;macr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mdash;&quot;&gt;&amp;mdash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;micro;&quot;&gt;&amp;micro;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;middot;&quot;&gt;&amp;middot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;minus;&quot;&gt;&amp;minus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;mu;&quot;&gt;&amp;mu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nabla;&quot;&gt;&amp;nabla;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ndash;&quot;&gt;&amp;ndash;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ne;&quot;&gt;&amp;ne;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ni;&quot;&gt;&amp;ni;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;not;&quot;&gt;&amp;not;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;notin;&quot;&gt;&amp;notin;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nsub;&quot;&gt;&amp;nsub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ntilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;ntilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;Nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;nu;&quot;&gt;&amp;nu;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;oacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ocirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ocirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;OElig;&quot;&gt;&amp;OElig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oelig;&quot;&gt;&amp;oelig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ograve;&quot;&gt;&amp;ograve;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oline;&quot;&gt;&amp;oline;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omega;&quot;&gt;&amp;omega;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;omicron;&quot;&gt;&amp;omicron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oplus;&quot;&gt;&amp;oplus;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;or;&quot;&gt;&amp;or;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordf;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ordm;&quot;&gt;&amp;ordm;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;Oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;oslash;&quot;&gt;&amp;oslash;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;Otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;otilde;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;otimes;&quot;&gt;&amp;otimes;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ouml;&quot;&gt;&amp;ouml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;para;&quot;&gt;&amp;para;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;part;&quot;&gt;&amp;part;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;permil;&quot;&gt;&amp;permil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;perp;&quot;&gt;&amp;perp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;phi;&quot;&gt;&amp;phi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pi;&quot;&gt;&amp;pi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;piv;&quot;&gt;&amp;piv;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;plusmn;&quot;&gt;&amp;plusmn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;pound;&quot;&gt;&amp;pound;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Prime;&quot;&gt;&amp;Prime;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prod;&quot;&gt;&amp;prod;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;prop;&quot;&gt;&amp;prop;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;psi;&quot;&gt;&amp;psi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;quot;&quot;&gt;&amp;quot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;radic;&quot;&gt;&amp;radic;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rang;&quot;&gt;&amp;rang;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;raquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;raquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;rArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rceil;&quot;&gt;&amp;rceil;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rdquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rdquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;real;&quot;&gt;&amp;real;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;reg;&quot;&gt;&amp;reg;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rfloor;&quot;&gt;&amp;rfloor;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;Rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rho;&quot;&gt;&amp;rho;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rlm;&quot;&gt;&amp;rlm;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsaquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsaquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;rsquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;rsquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sbquo;&quot;&gt;&amp;sbquo;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;Scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;scaron;&quot;&gt;&amp;scaron;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sdot;&quot;&gt;&amp;sdot;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sect;&quot;&gt;&amp;sect;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;shy;&quot;&gt;&amp;shy;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;Sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigma;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigma;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sigmaf;&quot;&gt;&amp;sigmaf;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sim;&quot;&gt;&amp;sim;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;spades;&quot;&gt;&amp;spades;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sub;&quot;&gt;&amp;sub;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sube;&quot;&gt;&amp;sube;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sum;&quot;&gt;&amp;sum;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup1;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup1;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup2;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup2;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;sup3;&quot;&gt;&amp;sup3;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;supe;&quot;&gt;&amp;supe;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;szlig;&quot;&gt;&amp;szlig;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;Tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tau;&quot;&gt;&amp;tau;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;there4;&quot;&gt;&amp;there4;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;theta;&quot;&gt;&amp;theta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thetasym;&quot;&gt;&amp;thetasym;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thinsp;&quot;&gt;&amp;thinsp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;THORN;&quot;&gt;&amp;THORN;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;thorn;&quot;&gt;&amp;thorn;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;tilde;&quot;&gt;&amp;tilde;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;times;&quot;&gt;&amp;times;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;trade;&quot;&gt;&amp;trade;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;uacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uarr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uarr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uArr;&quot;&gt;&amp;uArr;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ucirc;&quot;&gt;&amp;ucirc;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;Ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;ugrave;&quot;&gt;&amp;ugrave;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsih;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsih;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;Upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;upsilon;&quot;&gt;&amp;upsilon;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;uuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;uuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;weierp;&quot;&gt;&amp;weierp;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;Xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;xi;&quot;&gt;&amp;xi;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yacute;&quot;&gt;&amp;yacute;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yen;&quot;&gt;&amp;yen;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Yuml;&quot;&gt;&amp;Yuml;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;Zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;Zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zeta;&quot;&gt;&amp;zeta;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwj;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span title=&quot;&amp;amp;zwnj;&quot;&gt;&amp;zwnj;&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Descrizione
! width=40% | Tu digiti
! width=40% | Ottieni
|-
| Simbolo di Copyright
|class=mw-code| &amp;amp;copy;
|
:::'''&amp;copy;'''
|-
| Simbolo lettera delta greca
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;delta;
|
:::'''&amp;delta;'''
|-
| Simbolo di valuta Euro
|class=mw-code|&amp;amp;euro;
|
:::'''&amp;euro;'''
|}
Si veda la lista delle entità HTML nell'articolo Wikipedia  [[wikipedia:List of HTML entities|List of HTML entities]]. Oltre a queste, MediaWiki supporta due sequenze di riferimento ad entità: &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;רלמ;&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;رلم;&lt;/code&gt;, entrambe vengono considerate equivalenti a &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;rlm;&lt;/code&gt; che è un [[wikipedia:Right-to-left mark|right-to-left mark]]. (Utilizzata quando, nella stessa pagina, vengono combinate lingue da destra a sinistra con lingue da sinistra a destra)

== Tag HTML ed entità di simboli visualizzati tali e quali (senza interpretazione) ==
:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;amp;euro;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;amp;euro;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;'''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; &lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; '''&amp;lt;span style=&quot;color: red; text-decoration: line-through;&quot;&gt;Errore tipografico ancora da correggere&amp;lt;/span&gt;'''

=== Nowiki per HTML ===
{{tag|nowiki|s}} può vietare tag (HTML):
* &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;&lt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;nowiki /&gt;pre&gt; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &lt;&lt;nowiki/&gt;pre&gt;
Ma ''non'' &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli:
* &amp;&lt;&lt;nowiki /&gt;nowiki /&gt;amp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;rarr; &amp;&lt;nowiki /&gt;amp;
Per visualizzare &amp;amp; prefissi di simboli come testo, utilizzare &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot; al posto del carattere &quot;&amp;&quot; (es. inserire &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;, che viene visualizzato come &quot;&lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&quot;).

== Altri formati ==

Oltre ai markup di formattazione del testo sopraindicati vi sono alcuni altri riferimenti:

* {{ll|Help:Links|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Lists|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Help:Images|nsp=0}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* LanguageConverter markup – see {{ll|Writing systems/Syntax}}
&lt;/div&gt;
* Riferimenti - si veda {{ll|Extension:Cite}}
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tables|Tabelle]]

Altri riferimenti sono disponibili in {{ll|Help:Contents}}.

== Riferimenti ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Formatting]]</text>
      <sha1>lq8nvtoecbyrywpxh63onawezzvhw4b</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/zh</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>22501</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402276</id>
      <parentid>5400767</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:04:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10219" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=更新信息在元维基可用：[[m:Help:Preferences]]。}}

登入后，点击右上角的[[Special:preferences|参数设置]]，将转到设置页面。
你会看到“用户资料”设置，点击上方的标签页可以去更改其他类型的设定。

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || 你的用户名。只有行政员才可以更改名字，并且 wiki 也必须安装{{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}扩展。
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || 你所处在的用户组的名单
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || 在维基媒体的维基上，这个链接允许您管理被授权访问您账号的外部程序。 &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;参见[[Help:OAuth|OAuth帮助]]了解更多信息。&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || 你编辑的次数。不是所有的 wiki 都会有这个。
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || 您的帐户注册时间。
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|参见下方]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|参见下方]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || 管理双重认证
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || 管理全域首选项。
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
要更改密码，在第一个文本框里输入你的旧密码，后两个文本框里输入新密码。
如果你希望在当前计算机上保持登录状态，选择“在这部电脑上记住我的密码”。
请注意该功能需要你在浏览器中启用 cookies，而如果你的 cookie 被清除或过期，那么你将不再被记住。

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== 全域账户 ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
你可以在设置界面选择你喜欢的界面语言。
这个设定只影响像“编辑”和“讨论”这样的按钮，和侧边栏列出的一些页面。
绝大多数页面正文将不受影响，仅有极少数页面受到影响，例如在维基媒体元维基上的一些页面。

* 语言
* 您更希望被如何称呼？
* 更多语言设置

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* 您现有的签名
* 新签名
** 视为维基文本

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
如果你提供了电子邮件地址，你需要先选择确认地址按钮才能开始使用这些功能。你将会收到一封邮件；只要打开它然后跟随链接就可以开始使用以下功能了。

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| 电子邮件确认 ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;这允许其他注册用户向您通过点击您用户页左侧中的“邮件联系该用户”的链接发送邮件。邮件发送将通过Web界面，并且您的电子邮件地址不会透露给发件人，除非您通过电子邮件回复。&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || 这允许没有自动确认权限的用户向您发送邮件。
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || 该选项允许您指定不能够向您发送邮件的用户。他们将不会再您用户页的左侧看到“邮件联系该用户”的链接。 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
在这里你可以选择你想使用的皮肤。在决定之前你可以预览皮肤的样子，只需点击皮肤选项后面的“{{int|skin-preview}}”。更多细节请参见{{ll|Help:Skins}}。

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== 日期格式和时间偏移 ===

在这里你可以设定日期和时间的显示方式。

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
在这里你可以设定图像的显示方式。直接粘贴URL展示的图片（如果该wiki启用这项功能）不会被这项设定影响。

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - 该设定允许你选择图像描述页上的预览图将会多大。如果你知道你当前的屏幕分辨率，可以将这个选项设置的比它稍微小一些。如果你的连接速度较慢（例如拨号上网）你也许会想要把它设置到320×240。
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - 设定缩略图的大小。这将不会影响到编辑者已指定大小的缩略图，也不会将图像放大到比原始尺寸更大。
*使用Media Viewer：在维基媒体Wiki上，此设置（默认情况下处于启用状态）确定是否应使用[[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]]提供更流畅的图像查看体验。

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
这里您可以控制用{{tag|math|open}}标记描述的数学公式将如何显示。
以图像形式上传的，或者在 math 标签外的数学公式将不受此设置影响。
注意只有安装{{ll|Extension:Math}}后，此选项才会显示。

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
控制编辑页面的选项，包括是否自动监视你所编辑或创建的页面。

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - 这里你可以指定[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|最近更改]]页追溯显示多少天的内容。注意达到默认显示的编辑次数时（即使没达到这里指定的数字）列表也将终止（如下）。
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - 您可以在此处指定应显示多少编辑。

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - 允许你隐藏小编辑（又见{{ll|Help:Editing pages}}）。当一些用户因更新模板或修正拼写错误而快速地进行大量的小修改，你就会发现这个选项十分有用。你也可以在最近修改页面（又见{{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}）临时打开这个选项。
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - 按页面合并更改，增强最近更改页面，需要允许JavaScript脚本。此功能的进一步信息请参见{{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}。
* 在最近更改中显示维基数据编辑：在可以使用来自[[d:|维基数据]]中的数据的选定维基媒体项目上，此选项允许您查看连接到您wiki上某页面的维基数据项的更改，这与对wiki页面本身的更改一样。这可以帮助捕捉在您的wiki上发现的维基数据破坏。

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
这些设定用来控制监视列表的行为（又见{{ll|Help:Watchlist}}）。
这些操作中多数操作可以在监视列表界面进行，但是在这里设定的话，你可以设成监视列表的默认行为，也就是，你在每一次访问页面时她总表现出相同的行为。

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* 在您的监视列表中显示维基数据编辑：在可以使用来自[[d:|维基数据]]中的数据的选定维基媒体项目上，此选项允许您查看连接到您wiki上某页面的维基数据项的更改，这与对wiki页面本身的更改一样。 这可以帮助捕捉在您的wiki上发现的维基数据破坏。

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
默认的搜索设置，包括显示多少结果、每个结果中显示多少上下文。
勾选当你搜索时首要搜索的那些名字空间。
在搜索结果界面，你可以通过勾选名字空间，从而在该搜索中覆盖这里的设定。

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
在维基媒体Wiki上，“测试版功能 （Beta features）”选项卡允许您启用实验性功能，然后将其提供给所有人。
如果选择打开任何这些功能，则应该准备遇到错误和问题，并且随着开发的继续，您可能会看到该功能的外观或工作方式突然发生变化。

每个功能旁边都有一个“讨论”链接，因此您可以提出建议或报告任何问题。

参见[[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|关于测试功能]]了解更多信息。

*自动启用所有新的测试版功能：如果启用此选项，则将新的测试版功能添加到测试版功能系统后将立即为您激活。

== 参见 ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ellieu1pzyagu53frqjmo67l0fzdgol</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:MediaWiki feature list/it</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>23307</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402372</id>
      <parentid>5392766</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:49:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22287" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
{{Outdated}}
Questa pagina contiene una lista di contenuti del software MediaWiki.
A seconda di come vorrai usare il tuo wiki, puoi sceglierne di installare altri.
Il software di Wikipedia ha molti contenuti utili, nati dai bisogni degli utenti e da idee degli sviluppatori; ma contenuti extra significano complessità extra!
 
Prima di decidere di usare '''MediaWiki''', guarda anche gli altri software wiki (vedi [http://wiki.c2.com/?WikiEngines questa lista] o [http://www.wikimatrix.org/ questo confronto]) e vedi quale di essi soddisfa meglio le tue necessità.

Richieste di nuove features vanno fatte a [[Bugzilla/it|Bugzilla]].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Do I want MediaWiki? ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki software and extensions have features and benefits, strengths and weaknesses, pros and cons, and in spite of anyone's intended purposes, MediaWiki software and extensions can be used for unique, clever, inventive purposes unforeseen by the original programmers or other installers.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is a brief list of MediaWiki features and benefits.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you develop an equivalent list of your own goals and resources, you can compare this list to your list and see where there's a match, or mismatch.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Need more help deciding?&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are open discussion groups on the web, and &quot;talk&quot; discussion pages behind each main MediaWiki page where you can seek connection with other people's experiences.&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sample feature list from pages 13-14, in the book &quot;MediaWiki Administrators' Tutorial Guide: Install, manage, and customize your MediaWiki installation&quot; by Mizanur Rahman, 2007 [https://www.packtpub.com/ https://www.packtpub.com/]&lt;/span&gt;}}

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''MediaWiki feature'''&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''MediaWiki Benefit'''&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Your goals'''&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Your resources'''&lt;/span&gt;

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Easy Navigation:&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Easy to contribute without much training...&lt;/span&gt;
|...
|...

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing, Formatting, and Referencing:&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage and find content...&lt;/span&gt;
|...
|...

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Look and feel change:&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Customizable to your preferences...&lt;/span&gt;
|...
|...

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;File uploading:&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Content management and sharing...&lt;/span&gt;
|...
|...

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multilanguage support:&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;UTF-8 support allows one piece of software to author for all languages...&lt;/span&gt;
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;User Management:&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Access and security control...&lt;/span&gt;
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Syndication:&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Share your site info...&lt;/span&gt;
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;...more...&lt;/span&gt;
|...
|...
|...

|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please enhance and expand the above table's features and benefits to assist visitors to best know what they are getting into.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thanks!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;One recurring problem is that system administrators decide to create a wiki, without taking into account many issues.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After filling out the previous table, ask yourself the following questions, to see if a wiki is the right software for you:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''What is my site's intended purpose?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: Wikis are ideal for collaborative editing and creation of content; they are not very well suited for other purposes, like blogging.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consider whether a [[w:wiki|wiki]] is an adequate option for your goals.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''How many users will this wiki be exposed to?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: With a few exceptions, installing wiki software is unnecessary when there is a very small group of people interested in editing the wiki.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The larger the user base, the higher the probability a wiki makes more sense for you.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''How many active editors do I expect to edit my wiki?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: Wikis, due to their open nature, require some maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The larger the editor base, the more hands available to perform those maintenance tasks.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''What can I do with MediaWiki?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: MediaWiki is an extremely versatile wiki engine; it is relatively easy to install, but more importantly, allows for the use and creation of [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|extensions]].
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These allow your MediaWiki installation to be extremely customizable with some knowledge of PHP.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With the proper motivation, MediaWiki can be &quot;abused&quot; to do almost anything.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''Is MediaWiki right for me?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: MediaWiki has its limitations.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A more considerable limitation is that MediaWiki is not meant to be an [[w:access control list|access control list]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki ''raison d'etre'' is to provide open content; while recent versions have a much stronger security model, there are still significant gaps in individual-based security access.&lt;/span&gt;

{{Note|1=''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} and [[Security issues with authorization extensions]].&lt;/span&gt;''}}


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How should I configure MediaWiki? ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have decided that MediaWiki is indeed an appropriate solution, there are still more things to consider.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These questions will hopefully help you decide how to configure your wiki in a way that will allow you to minimize issues in the longer term:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''Who do I want reading my wiki?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: In spite of all the issues with individual-based page restrictions, MediaWiki can be configured to restrict or allow access to everyone.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;So, ask yourself whether you want everyone in the Internet to see the contents of your wiki, or if you want to restrict that privilege to those users who have created accounts in your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''Who do I want editing my wiki?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: Perhaps the most common question is whether you want to permit everyone to edit your wiki, similar to the [[w:Wikipedia|Wikipedia]] model.
&lt;/div&gt;  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki allows for fine-grained writing restrictions; you can allow unregistered users to edit talk pages, for example, but only allow users with accounts older than a certain amount of time to edit your content pages.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can restrict editing to sysops, or even to a custom user group you create and delegate.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''Who do I want creating an account on my wiki?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: Depending on some of the answers to the questions above, you may want to decide to restrict who can create accounts in a wiki.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can allow anyone to create accounts; or you can even designate that privilege to administrators, who would then be responsible for creating accounts for new users via some process of your choosing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''What powers do I want each user group to have?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: One of the most important questions you need to answer is this one.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Granting or removing privileges to a group can be ''extremely'' controversial in a large wiki, so having a good idea of what each user should be able to do is critical.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do you want unregistered users to create pages?&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do you want registered users to create pages?&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do you want wiki administrators to be able to block and delete pages, or do you want to extend more privileges to them?&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Who is responsible for granting more privileges?&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Who is responsible for removing them?&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Who do you want to have more fine-grained powers, such as [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Oversight policy|oversight]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/CheckUser policy|checkuser]], and [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Reverting#Rollback|rollback]]?&lt;/span&gt;
#:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Manual:User rights]] and [[Help:User rights management]] for more ideas and information.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''Which extensions should I install?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: With a few exceptions, [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|extensions]] are easy to add, whether it be while installing the wiki, or after a couple of years of the wiki being run.
&lt;/div&gt;
# ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do I need to manage structured data?&lt;/span&gt;''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: For [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Managing data in MediaWiki|managing structured data within MediaWiki]], several dedicated extensions exist.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With those answers, you should be able to configure the most critical aspects of your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can proceed to beginning the installation process in your [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:OS specific help|operating system]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Aspetto e stile ==

*'''Link e collegamenti''', l'aspetto dipende dalla skin.
*'''{{ll|Manual:Skins|nsp=0}}''' - Diversi modi di presentare il sito, possono essere espanse con i template [[meta:PHPTal|PHPTal]].
*'''[[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Help:User style|User style]]''': Gli utenti possono adattare il look del sito tramite il CSS delle loro pagine utente.
* '''Segnalazione &quot;Stub&quot;''': Gli utenti possono decidere di modificare la visualizzazione del collegamento ad una voce sotto un certo numero di KB.
* '''Versione stampabile''' degli articoli.
*'''Auto-numerazione sezioni''' degli articoli (opzionale).
*'''Collegamenti interni alla pagina''' (automaticamente generati per le sezioni e con &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;div id=&quot;tagname&quot;&gt;...&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;).
* {{anchor|TOC}}'''Indice automatico''' per articoli lunghi (opzionale).
* Conversione automatica di '''codici ISBN''' in link a liste di libri.
* Integrazione '''XHTML''' con output compatibile.

== File multimediali ed estensioni ==

*'''Caricamento file''' consente il caricamento di immagini o file sonori, via [[Special:Upload]], vedi [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Uploading files/it|Caricamento file]], I file caricati sono riportati nelle [[Special:Recentchanges|Ultime modifiche]] e registrati in [[Special:Log/upload]].
* '''Formule matematiche in sintassi LaTeX''' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Extension:Math}} and {{ll|Manual:Mathoid}}&lt;/span&gt;
* '''Ridimensionamento automatico''' delle immagini usando ImageMagick o libgd, semplice sintassi per l'uso di file.
* '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiHiero|WikiHiero]]''' per geroglifici egiziani (necessita componenti aggiuntivi)
*'''{{ll|Extension:Graph|nsp=0}}''' - per linee del tempo (necessita componenti aggiuntivi)

== Tenere traccia delle modifiche ==

*'''Osservati speciali''' Ogni pagina ha un link ''segui''. Usa [[Special:Watchlist]] per vedere tutte le tue pagine seguite modificate di recente. Gli articoli seguiti sono anche segnati in grassetto nelle Ultime modifiche.
*'''Contributi utente''' nella sidebar di ogni pagina utente c'è un link con tutti i contributi dell'utente.
*'''Ultime modifiche avanzate''' che accorpa tra loro tutte le modifiche ad un articolo.
*'''Modifiche correlate:''' Vedi una versione delle ultime modifiche filtrata con le pagine linakte dalla pagina dove ti trovi.
*'''Differenze''' Le differenze tra due edit sono segnate ed evidenziate. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additionally, a diff is shown during an edit conflict so you can see exactly what you need to reintegrate.&lt;/span&gt;
*'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Real names&lt;/span&gt;''' - Gli utenti possono anche specificare il loro pseudonimo che vogliono usare per i crediti.
* '''Crediti sulla pagina'''. Gli amministratori possono abilitare un paragrafo che visualizza chi ha lavorato ad una pagina.

==Struttura e sintassi==

* Di default solo [[Special:MyLanguage/HTML restriction|una parte]] del codice [[:it:HTML|HTML]] può essere usata. C'è anche un opzione per consentirlo in toto.
* '''Sintassi di modifica basata su UseMod''', che supporta il mox di wikicode ed HTML. Non è supportato [[w:CamelCase|CamelCase]]
*'''Namespace''' consentono la separazione del contenuto (per linkare un namesace, usa &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Namespace:Pagina]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;).
** Discussione (Talk:): pagine separate per discutere sul contenuto di una pagina.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
**[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:System message|MediaWiki: namespace]] contains all user interface texts, so that they can be edited like any other wiki page
&lt;/div&gt;
** Template: contiene pezzi di codice riutilizzabili. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates may contain string variables which are replaced with certain values passed to the template from the calling page.&lt;/span&gt;
* '''[[w:Transclusion|Inclusione]]''' di pagina arbitrarie in ogni namespace: &lt;nowiki&gt;{{:Page Name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Vedi [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Template|Templates]]
*'''Link con estensione di parole''': Se fai un link &lt;nowiki&gt;[[italia]]ni&lt;/nowiki&gt;, il sistema lo mostra automaticamente come &lt;nowiki&gt;[[italia|italiani]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;-
*'''Parentesi nascoste''' Se fai un link &lt;nowiki&gt;[[kernel (mathematics)|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;, il sistema lo mostra automaticamente come [[kernel (mathematics)|kernel]]. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is useful for disambiguating different meanings of a word without making linking too difficult or cluttering up the text of articles.&lt;/span&gt; Questo vale anche per i nomi di namespace; ad esempio &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Wikipedia:Copyrights|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; diventa [[Wikipedia:Copyrights|Copyrights]]
*'''Link a sezioni di un articolo''' es [[MediaWiki roadmap#Version 1.4]] (questi link possono essere inutili se le sezioni vengono cambiate. Per compensare ciò c'è stata [http://bugzilla.wikipedia.org/show_bug.cgi?id=1521 una proposta].)
*Supporto per '''sottopagine'''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic words|Special keywords]] for inserting '''dynamic data''' such as the name of the current page, the current date, the number of articles, etc.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Multiple '''Categorie''' che possono essere assegnate ad ogni pagina. == Editing == &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Categories allow classification and hierarchical browsing of the content.&lt;/span&gt;

== Editing ==
*'''[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Section|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Section editing&lt;/span&gt;]]''' - Si può anche modificare una singola sezione invece di tutto il testo.
*'''Toolbar''' (richiede JavaScript) per creare pulsanti utili alla modifica delle pagine. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If JavaScript is disabled, the toolbar is not shown.&lt;/span&gt;
* '''Oggetto''' della modifica, visualizzato nelle ultime modifiche. Se si modifica una sezione verrà preceduto dal nome.
*'''Doppio click''': Gli utenti possono abilitare l'opzione di modificare un articolo cliccandoci sopra due volte.
*'''Anteprima''' (can be shown before or after edit box)
*Gestione del '''conflitto di edizione''' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki will merge changes automatically if possible and otherwise require the user to do a manual merge.&lt;/span&gt;
*Segnalare le modifiche come '''minori''' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only signed in users can mark edits as minor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Spam and Vandalism ==
&lt;/div&gt;
*{{ll|Manual:Combating spam}}: Prevenziona da link di spam
**[[meta:Spam blacklist]]: Lista di domini di spammer che gli utenti non possono linkare.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Manual:Combating vandalism]]: Helpful hints and links to some extensions for dealing with vandalism
&lt;/div&gt;

== Discussioni ==

*'''Pagine di discussione''': Ogni pagina ed ogni utente (anche anonimo) ha lo spazio dove lasciargli messaggi. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are separate namespaces (see above), &quot;Talk:&quot; and &quot;User talk:&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
*'''Notifica messaggi''' Gli utenti (anche anonimo) ricevono una notifica se qualcuno ha modificato la loro pagina di discussione.
*'''Firma automatica''': Inserendo tre tildi (~) verrà inserito il tuo nome utente e/o la tua firma personalizzata. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use four tildes, the current date will be added as well.&lt;/span&gt; Pensato per le pagine di discussione
* Possibilità di '''inviare email''' agli utenti (l'indirizzo non verrà visualizzato)

== Supporto multilingue ==

* Tradotto in '''molte lingue''' (vedi [[:en:Wikipedia:Multilingual coordination]] per dettagli)
*'''[[:it:Help:Interwiki|Interwiki]]''': collegamenti tra lingue diverse
*Supporto '''UTF-8'''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Backend ==
&lt;/div&gt;

* '''Database-driven''' (MySQL e PostgreSQL supportati)
* '''Parser caching''': ricaricare pagine
* '''Output caching''': salvare pagine
*Login con account basato sui '''Cookie'''
*'''Cronologia ''' di un articolo
* Feed'''[[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Syndication feeds|RSS]]''' per molte pagine speciali
*'''[[m:Special:MyLanguage/RDF metadata|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;RDF metadata&lt;/span&gt;]]'''


== Permessi ==

*'''Differenti diritti''' per utenti anonimi, registrati, amministratori, burocrati e sviluppatori.
*Gli '''utenti registrati''' possono:
**spostare e rinominare pagine
**caricare file
**avere ed utilizzare una lista di osservati speciali
**segnalare modifiche come ''minori''
*Gli '''Amministratori''' (o '''Sysop''', ''system operator'') possono:
**proteggere pagine
**cancellare e recuperare pagine
**modificare pagine protette
**bloccare indirizzi IP
**bloccare utenti
*I '''Burocrati''' possono:
**creare amministratori
**rinominare utenti
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
**flag bots
&lt;/div&gt;
*Gli '''Sviluppatori''' possono:
**bloccare il database
**lanciare script di manutenzione
* '''Altri schemi di autorizzazione''' (ad es. solo gli utenti registrati possono modificare le pagine) [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|possono essere configurati]].

== Ricerca e Query ==

* '''Ricerca testo'''
* '''Bottone &quot;Vai&quot;''' se la ricerca trova un titolo esatto ti ci porta
* '''&quot;Puntano qui&quot;:''' Pagina che linkano alla corrente
* '''Pagine speciali:'''
**Lista di articoli più recenti
**Lista di articoli più vecchi
**Lista di immagini
**Lista di utenti
**Statistiche
**Pagine orfane
**Immagini orfane
**Articoli più popolari
**Articoli più richiesti
**Lista di articoli più corti
**Lista di articoli più lunghi
**Tutte le pagine
* '''[[Special:MyLanguage/API:Query|Query]] API'''

== Varie ==

* '''Una pagina a caso'''
* Configurazione '''fuso orario'''
* Personalizzazione ricerca

== Pagine di aiuto ==
Il file di installazione contiene un namespace di aiuto vuoto.
Per aiutare gli utenti, puoi esportare da www.mediawiki.org le pagine di aiuto e importarle sul tuo wiki o modificare i parametri in modo che linki qui.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remedy these broken links, you must either (a) [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:PD_help/Copying|export from this site]] or manually copy and modify help pages to your installation or (b) modify the installation's parameters to change the help link targets to this site, either of which may require a substantial time investment.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki Introduction{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1ljvwqkgomxvw7nw6r3p9yn5d8l3ng5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Project:Help/pl</title>
    <ns>4</ns>
    <id>23634</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403349</id>
      <parentid>5329523</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:49:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Wargo</username>
        <id>25061</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updated translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2339" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:''To have a question answered, visit {{ll|Communication}}.''
&lt;/div&gt;

== Informacje ogólne ==

* [[w:pl:Wiki|Czym jest wiki?]]
* {{ll|Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|nsp=0}} – &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jeżeli masz problemy z rozróżnianiem pojęć zawierających &quot;wiki&quot;, przeczytaj ten artykuł.&lt;/span&gt;

== Oprogramowanie MediaWiki ==
{{Hubs|none}}
Przejrzyj poniżej wymienione lokalizacje, aby uzyskać pomoc odnośnie instalowania / uruchamiania / korzystania z oprogramowania MediaWiki.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents|'''The MediaWiki Handbook''']]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ|Najczęściej zadawane pytania]] (FAQ)
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Contents|Dokumentacja techniczna]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jeżeli sprawdziłeś te strony i nadal potrzebujesz pomocy, możesz spróbować zadać pytanie w [[Project:Support desk|panelu pomocy]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== www.mediawiki.org ==

=== Podstawowe informacje ===
* {{ll|Project:About}}
* {{ll|Project:Copyrights}}
* {{ll|Project:Language policy}}
* {{ll|Project:Deletion}}
* {{ll|Project:Namespaces}}

=== Bieżące projekty ===
* {{ll|Project:PD help}} – Omówienie stron pomocy w domenie publicznej.
* {{ll|Project:Manual}} – &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Omówienie przestrzeni nazw Manual:.&lt;/span&gt;
* [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Meta:MetaProject to transfer content to MediaWiki.org|Meta:MetaProjekt o transferze zawartości do MediaWiki.org]] — Koordynacja przenosin stron z Meta.
* {{ll|Project:Tasks}} – Zadania, które są do wykonywania na mediawiki.org. Możesz także się zaangażować!

=== Pytania i dyskusja ===

* [[Project:Support desk|Project:Support desk]] — Dyskusje na temat problemów z oprogramowaniem MediaWiki. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Communication}} for other support venues.&lt;/span&gt;
* [[Project:Village pump|Project:Current issues]] — Dyskusja na temat kwestii związanych ze stroną MediaWiki.org.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
=== Prośby o uprawnienia użytkowników ===
&lt;/div&gt;

* [[Project:Requests|Project:Requests]]
__NOTOC__ 

[[Category:MediaWiki.org website{{#translation:}}|Help]]</text>
      <sha1>g1wh29o1zq0dsb3k0uvv7x2xuhev0fj</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403351</id>
      <parentid>5403349</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:50:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Wargo</username>
        <id>25061</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updated translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2316" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:''To have a question answered, visit {{ll|Communication}}.''
&lt;/div&gt;

== Informacje ogólne ==

* [[w:pl:Wiki|Czym jest wiki?]]
* {{ll|Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|nsp=0}} – &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jeżeli masz problemy z rozróżnianiem pojęć zawierających &quot;wiki&quot;, przeczytaj ten artykuł.&lt;/span&gt;

== Oprogramowanie MediaWiki ==
{{Hubs|none}}
Przejrzyj poniżej wymienione lokalizacje, aby uzyskać pomoc odnośnie instalowania / uruchamiania / korzystania z oprogramowania MediaWiki.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents|'''The MediaWiki Handbook''']]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ|Najczęściej zadawane pytania]] (FAQ)
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Contents|Dokumentacja techniczna]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jeżeli sprawdziłeś te strony i nadal potrzebujesz pomocy, możesz spróbować zadać pytanie w [[Project:Support desk|panelu pomocy]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== www.mediawiki.org ==

=== Podstawowe informacje ===
* {{ll|Project:About}}
* {{ll|Project:Copyrights}}
* {{ll|Project:Language policy}}
* {{ll|Project:Deletion}}
* {{ll|Project:Namespaces}}

=== Bieżące projekty ===
* {{ll|Project:PD help}} – Omówienie stron pomocy w domenie publicznej.
* {{ll|Project:Manual}} – &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Omówienie przestrzeni nazw Manual:.&lt;/span&gt;
* [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Meta:MetaProject to transfer content to MediaWiki.org|Meta:MetaProjekt o transferze zawartości do MediaWiki.org]] — Koordynacja przenosin stron z Meta.
* {{ll|Project:Tasks}} – Zadania, które są do wykonywania na mediawiki.org. Możesz także się zaangażować!

=== Pytania i dyskusja ===

* [[Project:Support desk|Project:Support desk]] — Dyskusje na temat problemów z oprogramowaniem MediaWiki. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Communication}} for other support venues.&lt;/span&gt;
* [[Project:Village pump|Project:Current issues]] — Dyskusja na temat kwestii związanych ze stroną MediaWiki.org.

=== Prośby o uprawnienia użytkowników na mediawiki.org ===

* [[Project:Requests|Project:Requests]]
__NOTOC__ 

[[Category:MediaWiki.org website{{#translation:}}|Help]]</text>
      <sha1>i2xctesp1mht9vo3jc8iloqn4oykvg6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/de</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>24053</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402237</id>
      <parentid>5400730</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12898" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Aktualisierte Informationen ist in der Meta verfügbar: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Wenn du eingeloggt bist und in der rechten oberen Ecke auf [[Special:preferences|Einstellungen]] klickst, gelangst du zu den Benutzereinstellungen.
Am oberen Rand befindet sich eine Leiste mit Registerkarten, mit denen du Zugriff auf unterschiedliche Optionen hast.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || * ''$int-username'' Dein Benutzername. Nur vertrauenswürdige Benutzer können deinen Benutzernamen ändern, aber nur wenn im Wiki {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} installiert ist.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Eine Liste der Benutzergruppen, in denen du Mitglied bist.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Auf Wikimedia-Wikis kannst du über diesen Link externe Anwendungen verwalten, die auf dein Konto zugreifen dürfen. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Siehe das [[Help:OAuth | OAuth Hilfe]] für weitere Informationen.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || * ''$int-prefs-edits'' Anzahl der Bearbeitungen: Zeigt an, wie viele Bearbeitungen du vorgenommen hast. Nicht alle Wikis zeigen das an.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || Der Zeitpunkt, zu dem das Konto angemeldet wurde.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|siehe unten]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|siehe unten]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Zwei-Faktor-Authentifizierung verwalten.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Globalpräferenzen verwalten.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Um dein altes Passwort zu ändern, gib dein altes Passwort in der ersten Box und dein neues Passwort in der letzten beiden Boxen ein.
In den beiden anderen gibst du das neue Passwort ein. Wenn du dich immer automatisch bei dem Besuch der Wiki einloggen möchtest, aktiviere bitte &quot;Benutzer soll auf diesem Computer dauerhaft angemeldet bleiben&quot;.
Wenn du diese Funktion aktivierst wird ein Cookie auf dem Computer gespeichert. Wenn Cookies im Browser deaktiviert sind funktioniert dies nicht.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Globales Konto ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
In den Einstellungen kannst du auswählen, in welcher Sprache du die Benutzeroberfläche haben möchtest.
Davon sind nur die Schaltflächen „Bearbeiten“ und „Diskussion“ sowie einige Seiten in der Seitenleiste betroffen.
Der Haupttext der Seiten wird bei den meisten Seiten dadurch nicht verändert, obwohl es einige Seiten gibt, bei denen das der Fall ist, wie z.&amp;#8239;B. einige im Wikimedia Meta Wiki.

* Sprachen
* Wie möchtest du am liebsten genannt werden?
* Mehr Spracheinstellungen

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Deine existierende Signatur
* Neue Signatur
** Als Wikitext behandeln

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Wenn du deine E-Mail Adresse angegeben hast, musst du auf den Button &lt;code&gt;Bestätige Adresse&lt;/code&gt; klicken um diese Funktionen benutzen zu können. Danach erhältst du eine einfache E-Mail mit einem Link den du öffnen musst, danach kannst du die Funktionen benutzen.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| E-Post bestätigung ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || So können andere registrierte Benutzer dir über den &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot;-Link in der Seitenleiste deiner Benutzerseite eine E-Mail schicken. Die E-Mails werden über eine Weboberfläche versendet, und deine E-Mail-Adresse bleibt dem Absender verborgen, bis du per E-Mail antwortest.
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Hier kannst du die Oberfläche der Wiki ändern. Benutze die Vorschau um zu sehen, wie die Oberfläche aussieht, in dem du auf {{int|skin-preview}} klickst. Standardmäßig stehen dir diese Skins zur Verfügung:

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Datumformat und Zeitverschiebung ===

Im Folgenden werden unterschiedliche Datumsformate gezeigt:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Hier kannst du bestimmen, wie Bilder angezeigt werden. Bilder, die durch direktes Einfügen ihrer URL (wenn dies in der Wiki aktiviert ist) eingebunden wurden, sind nicht von dieser Einstellung betroffen.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Maximale Bildgröße auf Bildbeschreibungsseiten:': Mit dieser Einstellung kannst du wählen, wie groß die Bildvorschau ist. Wenn du deine Bildschirmauflösung kennst, setze den Wert um 1-2 Größen kleiner als die Auflösung. Bei einer langsamen Netzanbindung solltest du diesen Wert möglichst klein halten, z.B.: 320 × 240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Standardgröße der Vorschaubilder (thumbnails): Lege fest, wie groß die Vorschaubilder angezeigt werden. Diese Einstellung wirkt sich nicht auf Thumbnails aus, deren Abmessungen vom Bearbeiter festgelegt wurden. Ebenso ist es nicht möglich Bilder über Ihre Ursprungsgröße hinaus zu vergrößern.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Hier kannst du einstellen, wie mathematische Zeichen mit dem math Modul bei Verwendung des {{tag|math|open}}-Tags angezeigt werden.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Einstellungen für die &quot;Bearbeiten&quot;-Seite, z. B. ob bearbeitete Seiten automatisch beobachtet werden sollen, etc.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Hier kannst du angeben, wie weit die Ansicht auf der Seite Letzte Änderungen zurückreichen soll. Bitte beachte, dass die Liste vorzeitig endet, wenn die Anzahl der anzuzeigenden Einträge überschritten wird. (siehe unten)
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Hier kannst du angeben, wie viele Änderungen angezeigt werden sollen.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Hiermit kannst du Änderungen ausblenden, die als „Kleinigkeit“ markiert wurden. (siehe Help:Editing pages/de). Da manche Benutzer viele kleine Änderungen vornehmen, um Vorlagen zu aktualisieren oder Rechtschreibfehler zu korrigieren, kann es nützlich sein, diesen Schalter zu aktivieren. Du kannst diese Option auch vorübergehend auf der Seite „Letzte Änderungen“ aktivieren. (siehe {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Die Erweiterte Darstellung verdichtet die Anzeige der Änderungen zu einer Liste, in der pro geändertem Artikel nur ein Eintrag angezeigt wird. Ein Klick auf den Pfeil an der linken Seite zeigt alle Änderungen eines Artikels an, falls mehrere existieren. Wie in der Beschreibung der Option angedeutet, benötigt diese JavaScript, um genutzt werden zu können. Siehe {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} für weitere Informationen über dieses Feature.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
In diesem Abschnitt kann das Verhalten der Beobachtungsliste eingestellt werden (Siehe {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
Die meisten dieser Einstellungen sind auch auf der Beobachtungsliste selbst verfügbar, du kannst aber in den persönlichen Einstellungen das Standardverhalten setzen, nach dem sich die Beobachtungsliste bei jedem Aufruf verhält.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Hier kannst du deine Standardeinstellungen für die Suche setzen. Diese umfassen z. B. die anzuzeigenden Treffer je Seite oder die Größe für die anzuzeigenden Vorschauen der Ergebnisse.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>0tqugpgy4c0hc0phz2dqqauldswveaa</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402283</id>
      <parentid>5402237</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:04:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12843" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Aktualisierte Informationen ist in der Meta verfügbar: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Wenn du eingeloggt bist und in der rechten oberen Ecke auf [[Special:preferences|Einstellungen]] klickst, gelangst du zu den Benutzereinstellungen.
Am oberen Rand befindet sich eine Leiste mit Registerkarten, mit denen du Zugriff auf unterschiedliche Optionen hast.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || * ''$int-username'' Dein Benutzername. Nur vertrauenswürdige Benutzer können deinen Benutzernamen ändern, aber nur wenn im Wiki {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} installiert ist.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Eine Liste der Benutzergruppen, in denen du Mitglied bist.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Auf Wikimedia-Wikis kannst du über diesen Link externe Anwendungen verwalten, die auf dein Konto zugreifen dürfen. Siehe {{ll|Help:OAuth}} für weitere Informationen.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || * ''$int-prefs-edits'' Anzahl der Bearbeitungen: Zeigt an, wie viele Bearbeitungen du vorgenommen hast. Nicht alle Wikis zeigen das an.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || Der Zeitpunkt, zu dem das Konto angemeldet wurde.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|siehe unten]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|siehe unten]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Zwei-Faktor-Authentifizierung verwalten.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Globalpräferenzen verwalten.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Um dein altes Passwort zu ändern, gib dein altes Passwort in der ersten Box und dein neues Passwort in der letzten beiden Boxen ein.
In den beiden anderen gibst du das neue Passwort ein. Wenn du dich immer automatisch bei dem Besuch der Wiki einloggen möchtest, aktiviere bitte &quot;Benutzer soll auf diesem Computer dauerhaft angemeldet bleiben&quot;.
Wenn du diese Funktion aktivierst wird ein Cookie auf dem Computer gespeichert. Wenn Cookies im Browser deaktiviert sind funktioniert dies nicht.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Globales Konto ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
In den Einstellungen kannst du auswählen, in welcher Sprache du die Benutzeroberfläche haben möchtest.
Davon sind nur die Schaltflächen „Bearbeiten“ und „Diskussion“ sowie einige Seiten in der Seitenleiste betroffen.
Der Haupttext der Seiten wird bei den meisten Seiten dadurch nicht verändert, obwohl es einige Seiten gibt, bei denen das der Fall ist, wie z.&amp;#8239;B. einige im Wikimedia Meta Wiki.

* Sprachen
* Wie möchtest du am liebsten genannt werden?
* Mehr Spracheinstellungen

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Deine existierende Signatur
* Neue Signatur
** Als Wikitext behandeln

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Wenn du deine E-Mail Adresse angegeben hast, musst du auf den Button &lt;code&gt;Bestätige Adresse&lt;/code&gt; klicken um diese Funktionen benutzen zu können. Danach erhältst du eine einfache E-Mail mit einem Link den du öffnen musst, danach kannst du die Funktionen benutzen.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| E-Post bestätigung ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || So können andere registrierte Benutzer dir über den &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot;-Link in der Seitenleiste deiner Benutzerseite eine E-Mail schicken. Die E-Mails werden über eine Weboberfläche versendet, und deine E-Mail-Adresse bleibt dem Absender verborgen, bis du per E-Mail antwortest.
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Hier kannst du die Oberfläche der Wiki ändern. Benutze die Vorschau um zu sehen, wie die Oberfläche aussieht, in dem du auf {{int|skin-preview}} klickst. Standardmäßig stehen dir diese Skins zur Verfügung:

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Datumformat und Zeitverschiebung ===

Im Folgenden werden unterschiedliche Datumsformate gezeigt:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Hier kannst du bestimmen, wie Bilder angezeigt werden. Bilder, die durch direktes Einfügen ihrer URL (wenn dies in der Wiki aktiviert ist) eingebunden wurden, sind nicht von dieser Einstellung betroffen.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Maximale Bildgröße auf Bildbeschreibungsseiten:': Mit dieser Einstellung kannst du wählen, wie groß die Bildvorschau ist. Wenn du deine Bildschirmauflösung kennst, setze den Wert um 1-2 Größen kleiner als die Auflösung. Bei einer langsamen Netzanbindung solltest du diesen Wert möglichst klein halten, z.B.: 320 × 240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Standardgröße der Vorschaubilder (thumbnails): Lege fest, wie groß die Vorschaubilder angezeigt werden. Diese Einstellung wirkt sich nicht auf Thumbnails aus, deren Abmessungen vom Bearbeiter festgelegt wurden. Ebenso ist es nicht möglich Bilder über Ihre Ursprungsgröße hinaus zu vergrößern.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Hier kannst du einstellen, wie mathematische Zeichen mit dem math Modul bei Verwendung des {{tag|math|open}}-Tags angezeigt werden.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Einstellungen für die &quot;Bearbeiten&quot;-Seite, z. B. ob bearbeitete Seiten automatisch beobachtet werden sollen, etc.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Hier kannst du angeben, wie weit die Ansicht auf der Seite Letzte Änderungen zurückreichen soll. Bitte beachte, dass die Liste vorzeitig endet, wenn die Anzahl der anzuzeigenden Einträge überschritten wird. (siehe unten)
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Hier kannst du angeben, wie viele Änderungen angezeigt werden sollen.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Hiermit kannst du Änderungen ausblenden, die als „Kleinigkeit“ markiert wurden. (siehe Help:Editing pages/de). Da manche Benutzer viele kleine Änderungen vornehmen, um Vorlagen zu aktualisieren oder Rechtschreibfehler zu korrigieren, kann es nützlich sein, diesen Schalter zu aktivieren. Du kannst diese Option auch vorübergehend auf der Seite „Letzte Änderungen“ aktivieren. (siehe {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Die Erweiterte Darstellung verdichtet die Anzeige der Änderungen zu einer Liste, in der pro geändertem Artikel nur ein Eintrag angezeigt wird. Ein Klick auf den Pfeil an der linken Seite zeigt alle Änderungen eines Artikels an, falls mehrere existieren. Wie in der Beschreibung der Option angedeutet, benötigt diese JavaScript, um genutzt werden zu können. Siehe {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} für weitere Informationen über dieses Feature.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
In diesem Abschnitt kann das Verhalten der Beobachtungsliste eingestellt werden (Siehe {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
Die meisten dieser Einstellungen sind auch auf der Beobachtungsliste selbst verfügbar, du kannst aber in den persönlichen Einstellungen das Standardverhalten setzen, nach dem sich die Beobachtungsliste bei jedem Aufruf verhält.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Hier kannst du deine Standardeinstellungen für die Suche setzen. Diese umfassen z. B. die anzuzeigenden Treffer je Seite oder die Größe für die anzuzeigenden Vorschauen der Ergebnisse.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>fk9tg3vlepovrawmjvddut1xwc790w9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/es</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>24635</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402241</id>
      <parentid>5400735</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12330" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Hay información actualizada disponible en Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Al hacer clic en [[Special:preferences|Preferencias]], ubicado en la parte superior derecha si has iniciado sesión, te permitirá cambiar tus preferencias.
Se te presentará la sección Perfil de usuario, así como una barra de pestañas en la parte superior para cambiar otros tipos de ajustes.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Tu nombre de usuario. Sólo usuarios con privilegios pueden cambiar los nombres de usuario, y el wiki debe tener instalada la extensión {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Una lista de los grupos de usuario que te incluyen.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || En Wikimedia wikis, este enlace te permite gestionar aplicaciones externas que tengan permisos para acceder a tu cuenta. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Véase [[Help:OAuth/es|Help:OAuth]] para más información.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-prefs-edits'' Cuántos cambios has realizado. No todos los wikis tienen esta opción.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || La hora a la que se registró tu cuenta.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|véase más abajo]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|véase más abajo]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Administrar la autenticación en dos pasos.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Administrar las preferencias globales.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Para cambiar tu contraseña, introduce la contraseña antigua en la primera casilla, y tu nueva contraseña en las dos últimas.
Si deseas que este sitio recuerde tu inicio de sesión, marca ''Recordar mi inicio de sesión en este equipo''.
Ten en cuenta que esta función requiere tener habilitadas las cookies en tu navegador, y si la cookie se elimina o expira ya no será recordada.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Cuenta global ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
Desde tus preferencias puedes seleccionar en qué idioma te gustaría que esté la interfaz.
Solo se verán afectados los botones, como 'editar' o 'discusión', así como unas pocas páginas de la barra lateral.
El texto principal de las páginas no será cambiado para la mayoría de las páginas, sin embargo en algunas sí, como algunas de Wikimedia Meta Wiki.

* Idiomas
* ¿Cómo prefieres que se te describa?
* Más configuraciones del idioma

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Tu firma actual
* Firma nueva
** Tratar como wikitexto

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Si has proporcionado una dirección de correo electrónico, deberás hacer clic en el botón ''verificar dirección'' para usar estas funciones. Recibirás un correo electrónico, simplemente ábrelo y sigue el enlace para habilitar las siguientes funciones.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Confirmación de correo electrónico ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Esto permite que otros usuarios registrados te envíen un correo electrónico usando el enlace ''Enviar un correo a este usuario'' en la barra lateral de tu página de usuario. Los correos electrónicos se envían usando una interfaz web y tu dirección de correo electrónico no se muestra al remitente hasta que tu respondas por correo electrónico.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Esto permite que los usuarios sin permiso autoconfirmado te envíen correos electrónicos.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Esta opción te permite especificar qué usuarios no podrán enviarte correos electrónicos directos. No verán el enlace ''Enviar un correo a este usuario'' en la barra lateral de tu página de usuario. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Aquí puedes elegir la apariencia que quieres utilizar. Puedes previsualizar cada apariencia disponibles haciendo clic en el enlace ''{{int|skin-preview}}'' al lado de cada diseño. Por favor consulta {{ll|Help:Skins}} para más detalles.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Formato de fecha y diferencia horaria ===

Dependiendo de las preferencias, normalmente se representa lo siguiente:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Aquí­ puedes determinar cómo se mostrarán las imágenes. Las imágenes mostradas pegando directamente una URL (si el wiki lo permite) no se verán afectadas por este ajuste.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Este ajuste te permite elegir el tamaño de las vistas previas de las imágenes, en las páginas de Imagen. Si sabes cuál es la resolución de tu pantalla, puedes fijarlas en una o dos veces más pequeñas que tu pantalla. Si tienes una conexión lenta (como acceso telefónico), puedes limitarlas a 320×240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Define la forma en que deseas que aparezcan las miniaturas. Este ajuste no afectará a las miniaturas con dimensiones determinadas por el editor, ni puedes aumentar las imágenes más allá de sus dimensiones originales.
* Activar el visor multimedia: en Wikimedia wikis, esta configuración (activada por defecto) determina si el [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About/es|visor multimedia]] se debe usar para proporcionar una experiencia de visualización de imágenes más fluida.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Aquí puedes controlar cómo se mostrarán las ecuaciones matemáticas que son descritas usando la etiqueta {{tag|math|open}}.
Las fórmulas matemáticas cargadas como imágenes o escritas fuera de la etiqueta &quot;math&quot; no serán afectadas por este ajuste.
Ten en cuenta que las preferencias matemáticas solo serán visibles si la {{ll|Extension:Math}} está instalada.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Estas son las configuraciones para controlar las páginas de edición, incluida la visualización automática de las páginas que has editado o creado.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - aquí puedes especificar hasta qué día verás los [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|cambios recientes]]. Nota que la lista se detendrá prematuramente si el número de ediciones supera el número de ediciones para mostrar (véase más abajo).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - aquí puedes especificar el número de ediciones que se deben mostrar.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - te permite esconder ediciones marcadas como menores (véase {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Puesto que algunos usuarios realizan rápidamente un montón de pequeños retoques para actualizar las plantillas o arreglar los errores ortográficos, es posible que esta opción te sea útil. También puedes habilitar esta función temporalmente en la página de cambios recientes (véase {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - los cambios recientes mejorados condensa ediciones en una lista por cada página. Como se indica, requiere JavaScript para activarse. Véase {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} para más información sobre esta función.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Opciones para personalizar la lista de seguimiento (Ver {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
La mayoría de estas opciones están disponibles en la misma pantalla Lista de Seguimiento, pero al cambiarlas en tus preferencias fijas el comportamiento predeterminado de la lista. Es decir, se ejecutarán las mismas acciones cada vez que visites la página.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
En esta sección se configuran cuantos resultados se han de presentar y qué cantidad de contexto mostrar para cada resultado.
Marca las casillas al lado de los espacios de nombres que quieras mostrar la primera vez que hagas alguna búsqueda.
Puedes modificar la configuración cuando hagas una búsqueda; para ello, marca o desmarca las casillas en la parte inferior de la pantalla de resultados de búsqueda.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Véase también ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9bcsmltmtl2lrfug5vgol7f1rlmlcb0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402285</id>
      <parentid>5402241</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:05:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12279" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Hay información actualizada disponible en Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Al hacer clic en [[Special:preferences|Preferencias]], ubicado en la parte superior derecha si has iniciado sesión, te permitirá cambiar tus preferencias.
Se te presentará la sección Perfil de usuario, así como una barra de pestañas en la parte superior para cambiar otros tipos de ajustes.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Tu nombre de usuario. Sólo usuarios con privilegios pueden cambiar los nombres de usuario, y el wiki debe tener instalada la extensión {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Una lista de los grupos de usuario que te incluyen.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || En Wikimedia wikis, este enlace te permite gestionar aplicaciones externas que tengan permisos para acceder a tu cuenta. Véase {{ll|Help:OAuth}} para más información.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-prefs-edits'' Cuántos cambios has realizado. No todos los wikis tienen esta opción.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || La hora a la que se registró tu cuenta.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|véase más abajo]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|véase más abajo]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Administrar la autenticación en dos pasos.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Administrar las preferencias globales.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Para cambiar tu contraseña, introduce la contraseña antigua en la primera casilla, y tu nueva contraseña en las dos últimas.
Si deseas que este sitio recuerde tu inicio de sesión, marca ''Recordar mi inicio de sesión en este equipo''.
Ten en cuenta que esta función requiere tener habilitadas las cookies en tu navegador, y si la cookie se elimina o expira ya no será recordada.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Cuenta global ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
Desde tus preferencias puedes seleccionar en qué idioma te gustaría que esté la interfaz.
Solo se verán afectados los botones, como 'editar' o 'discusión', así como unas pocas páginas de la barra lateral.
El texto principal de las páginas no será cambiado para la mayoría de las páginas, sin embargo en algunas sí, como algunas de Wikimedia Meta Wiki.

* Idiomas
* ¿Cómo prefieres que se te describa?
* Más configuraciones del idioma

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Tu firma actual
* Firma nueva
** Tratar como wikitexto

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Si has proporcionado una dirección de correo electrónico, deberás hacer clic en el botón ''verificar dirección'' para usar estas funciones. Recibirás un correo electrónico, simplemente ábrelo y sigue el enlace para habilitar las siguientes funciones.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Confirmación de correo electrónico ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Esto permite que otros usuarios registrados te envíen un correo electrónico usando el enlace ''Enviar un correo a este usuario'' en la barra lateral de tu página de usuario. Los correos electrónicos se envían usando una interfaz web y tu dirección de correo electrónico no se muestra al remitente hasta que tu respondas por correo electrónico.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Esto permite que los usuarios sin permiso autoconfirmado te envíen correos electrónicos.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Esta opción te permite especificar qué usuarios no podrán enviarte correos electrónicos directos. No verán el enlace ''Enviar un correo a este usuario'' en la barra lateral de tu página de usuario. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Aquí puedes elegir la apariencia que quieres utilizar. Puedes previsualizar cada apariencia disponibles haciendo clic en el enlace ''{{int|skin-preview}}'' al lado de cada diseño. Por favor consulta {{ll|Help:Skins}} para más detalles.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Formato de fecha y diferencia horaria ===

Dependiendo de las preferencias, normalmente se representa lo siguiente:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Aquí­ puedes determinar cómo se mostrarán las imágenes. Las imágenes mostradas pegando directamente una URL (si el wiki lo permite) no se verán afectadas por este ajuste.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Este ajuste te permite elegir el tamaño de las vistas previas de las imágenes, en las páginas de Imagen. Si sabes cuál es la resolución de tu pantalla, puedes fijarlas en una o dos veces más pequeñas que tu pantalla. Si tienes una conexión lenta (como acceso telefónico), puedes limitarlas a 320×240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Define la forma en que deseas que aparezcan las miniaturas. Este ajuste no afectará a las miniaturas con dimensiones determinadas por el editor, ni puedes aumentar las imágenes más allá de sus dimensiones originales.
* Activar el visor multimedia: en Wikimedia wikis, esta configuración (activada por defecto) determina si el [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About/es|visor multimedia]] se debe usar para proporcionar una experiencia de visualización de imágenes más fluida.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Aquí puedes controlar cómo se mostrarán las ecuaciones matemáticas que son descritas usando la etiqueta {{tag|math|open}}.
Las fórmulas matemáticas cargadas como imágenes o escritas fuera de la etiqueta &quot;math&quot; no serán afectadas por este ajuste.
Ten en cuenta que las preferencias matemáticas solo serán visibles si la {{ll|Extension:Math}} está instalada.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Estas son las configuraciones para controlar las páginas de edición, incluida la visualización automática de las páginas que has editado o creado.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - aquí puedes especificar hasta qué día verás los [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|cambios recientes]]. Nota que la lista se detendrá prematuramente si el número de ediciones supera el número de ediciones para mostrar (véase más abajo).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - aquí puedes especificar el número de ediciones que se deben mostrar.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - te permite esconder ediciones marcadas como menores (véase {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Puesto que algunos usuarios realizan rápidamente un montón de pequeños retoques para actualizar las plantillas o arreglar los errores ortográficos, es posible que esta opción te sea útil. También puedes habilitar esta función temporalmente en la página de cambios recientes (véase {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - los cambios recientes mejorados condensa ediciones en una lista por cada página. Como se indica, requiere JavaScript para activarse. Véase {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} para más información sobre esta función.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Opciones para personalizar la lista de seguimiento (Ver {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
La mayoría de estas opciones están disponibles en la misma pantalla Lista de Seguimiento, pero al cambiarlas en tus preferencias fijas el comportamiento predeterminado de la lista. Es decir, se ejecutarán las mismas acciones cada vez que visites la página.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
En esta sección se configuran cuantos resultados se han de presentar y qué cantidad de contexto mostrar para cada resultado.
Marca las casillas al lado de los espacios de nombres que quieras mostrar la primera vez que hagas alguna búsqueda.
Puedes modificar la configuración cuando hagas una búsqueda; para ello, marca o desmarca las casillas en la parte inferior de la pantalla de resultados de búsqueda.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Véase también ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>iwop8izastesnrfj4qyywekvzhk922l</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Project:Help/de</title>
    <ns>4</ns>
    <id>28285</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403355</id>
      <parentid>5388872</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:53:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2114" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:''To have a question answered, visit {{ll|Communication}}.''
&lt;/div&gt;

== Allgemeine Informationen ==

* [[w:de:Wiki|Was ist ein Wiki?]]
* {{ll|Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|nsp=0}} – Falls du über die Namen verwirrt bist.

== MediaWiki-Software ==
{{Hubs|none}}
Bitte siehe an folgenden Orten nach, um Hilfe zu Installation / Betreiben / Benutzen der MediaWiki-Software zu finden.

* [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents|'''MediaWiki-Benutzerhandbuch''']]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ|Häufig gestellte Fragen]] (FAQ)
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Contents|Technische Referenz]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Falls du diese Seiten durchgelesen hast und immer noch Hilfe benötigst, dann kannst beim [[Project:Support desk|Support Desk]] nachfragen.
&lt;/div&gt;

== www.mediawiki.org ==

=== Grundlegendes ===
* {{ll|Project:About}}
* {{ll|Project:Copyrights}}
* {{ll|Project:Language policy}}
* {{ll|Project:Deletion}}
* {{ll|Project:Namespaces}}

=== Aktuelle Projekte ===
* {{ll|Project:PD help}} – Zum Diskutieren über die gemeinfreien Hilfeseiten.
* {{ll|Project:Manual}} – Zum Diskutieren über den technischen Manual:/Handbuch:-Namensraum.
* [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Meta:MetaProject to transfer content to MediaWiki.org|Meta:MetaProject to transfer content to MediaWiki.org]] – Zum Koordinieren der Verschiebungen der Seiten von Meta.
* {{ll|Project:Tasks}} – Andauernde Aufgaben auf der Webseite. Mach mit!

=== Fragen und Diskussionen ===

* [[Project:Support desk|Project:Support desk]] – Zum Diskutieren über Probleme mit der MediaWiki-Software. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Communication}} for other support venues.&lt;/span&gt;
* [[Project:Village pump|Project:Current issues]] – Zum Diskutieren über Probleme mit der MediaWiki-Seite.

=== Anfragen für Benutzerrechte auf www.mediawiki.org ===

* [[Project:Requests|Projekt:Anfragen]]
__NOTOC__ 

[[Category:MediaWiki.org website{{#translation:}}|Help]]</text>
      <sha1>bbgepu2i3gxyafev9jye2zliwjwfh3m</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Installing MediaWiki/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>29586</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402873</id>
      <parentid>5400798</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:41:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13615" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Die Installation von MediaWiki kann für den durchschnittlichen Computeranwender schwierig werden, der keine Erfahrung mit Apache, PHP und MySQL/MariaDB hat.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Herunterladen der MediaWiki-Software ==

Lade die MediaWiki tar-Datei von der [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|offiziellen Download-Seite]] herunter.

Wenn du eine Produktionsumgebung verwendest, sollte man in der Regel die aktuellste stabile Version (MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}) einsetzen.

== Extrahiere die MediaWiki-Software ==
Die heruntergeladene Datei liegt im &lt;code&gt;.zip&lt;/code&gt;- oder im &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;-Format vor.
Du musst diese Archivdatei vor der 
Verwendung entpacken.
Du kannst die Datei lokal entpacken (und dann per FTP auf den Server hochladen) oder direkt auf deinem Server entpacken.

Unter Windows werden dafür gewöhnlich Programme wie [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (quelltextoffene Software), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] oder [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] benutzt.

Unter Linux und Mac OS X kannst du die Datei entpacken (untar), indem du folgenden Befehl anwendest:
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

==Dateien auf den Server hochladen==

Wenn du die Dateien noch nicht auf deinen [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Web server|Webserver]] hochgeladen hast (oder kopiert, wenn deine Webserver-Software lokal auf deinen Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Web server läuft), tu dies jetzt.

Lade die Dateien in das Webverzeichnis deines Webservers hoch, in dem du entweder:

# das entpackte Verzeichnis direkt kopierst oder
# einen FTP-Clienten wie [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (Windows, OSX und Linux) oder [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (Windows und OSX) nutzt.
# &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;cPanel File Manager benutzt ([[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|siehe unten]])&lt;/span&gt;

Wenn dein Kopier- oder FTP-Programm eine Option zur Umwandlung des Dateinamens in Kleinbuchstaben hat (change file names to lowercase), musst du diese ausschalten.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn du Apache installiert hast, steht das korrekte Verzeichnis in deiner &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;-Datei (es ist die [$docroot DocumentRoot]-Richtlinie, normalerweise $1 oder {{$2|apache-folder}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Hinweis: Dies änderte sich in Ubuntu 14.04 mit Apache 2.4.7, wo die ursprüngliche Konfigurationsdatei für Apache-Server-Einstellungen und -Verzeichnisse &lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt; ist.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

Benenne den hochgeladenen Ordner (oder den symbolischen Link) so um, wie du ihn in der URL haben willst.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn dein Web-Server z.&amp;nbsp;B. wie &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt; läuft, würde eine Umbenennung zu einem &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt;-Verzeichnis bedeuten, dass du dein Wiki über &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt; erreichst.&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''''Benutze nicht $wiki, wenn du es als einen [[$short-url|Kurzlink]] benutzen möchtest.'''''&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
== Die Datenbank einrichten ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki wird dich nach der Datenbank und dem Benutzernamen fragen und versuchen, diese zu erstellen, wenn sie noch nicht vorhanden sind.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Sofern du das root-Passwort deiner Datenbank kennst, kann das Installationsprogramm von MediaWiki eine Datenbank für dich erstellen.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wenn du das root-Passwort nicht kennst, z.&amp;nbsp;B. wenn du auf einem gemieteten Server bist, musst du eine neue Datenbank erzeugen.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Derzeit musst du entweder MariaDB/MySQL oder Postgres benutzen, um die aktuellen Inhalte des Wikis zu speichern.&lt;/span&gt;
Wenn du dir nicht sicher bist, welche Datenbank du auswählen sollst, benutze MariaDB.

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

Wähle auf der Installationsseite von SQLite einen Datenbanknamen (ein frei wählbarer Name) und das SQLite-Datenbankverzeichnis aus.
Für das Datenbankverzeichnis versucht das Installationsprogramm, ein Unterverzeichnis außerhalb des Dokument-Root-Verzeichnisses zu benutzen und erstellt es bei Bedarf.
Wenn dieses Verzeichnis nicht sicher ist (z.&amp;nbsp;B. für das Web lesbar), dann solltest du es manuell ändern, damit es nicht für das gesamte Web zugänglich ist.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Siehe die entsprechende Dokumentation.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Alternativ kann auch der Host-Provider ein Konto für dich einrichten.&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wenn deine Datenbank nicht auf dem gleichen Server wie dein Webserver läuft, musst du den zugehörigen Webserverhostnamen – im folgenden Beispiel ''mediawiki.example.com'' – wie folgt eingeben:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;MySQL/MariaDB unter UNIX/Linux protokolliert alle Abfragen, die an die Datenbank gesendet werden, in einer Datei, die auch das Passwort enthält, das für das Benutzerkonto verwendet wird.&lt;/span&gt; Wenn das für dich bedenklich ist, lösche und deaktiviere die &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt;-Datei, nachdem du diese Abfragen ausgeführt hast, indem du die [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/mysql-logging.html#mysql-logging-history-file MySQL-Dokumentation] befolgst.}}

===PostgreSQL===
Wenn du [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PostgreSQL|PostgreSQL]] verwendest, musst du entweder eine Datenbank und einen Benutzer für dich erstellen lassen oder den Namen eines PostgreSQL-Benutzers mit „Superuser“-Rechten in das Konfigurationsformular eingeben.
Dieser Datenbankbenutzer wird häufig &lt;code&gt;postgres&lt;/code&gt; genannt.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, and a database named &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; owned by the user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser (gib dann das Passwort ein)
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

oder du gibst, als Superuser (standardmäßig „postgres“), die folgenden Befehle in die Datenbank-Eingabezeile ein:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

'''Achtung:''' die [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|Liste bekannter Probleme beim Betrieb von MediaWiki mit PostgreSQL]] sollte beachtet werden.

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== Das Installationsskript ausführen ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wenn alle oben genannten Schritte abgeschlossen sind, kann die Installation über einen Webbrowser abgeschlossen werden, indem die URL der index.php im Browser aufgerufen wird – bitte die in {{ll|Manual:Config script}} beschriebenen Anweisungen beachten.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Weitere Konfiguration ==
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additional configuration&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wiki administration&lt;/span&gt;
== Auf dem Laufenden bleiben ==
Einmal installiert, sollte man immer auf dem Laufenden bleiben, was die neuen Versionen angeht, und seinen Server entsprechend schützen!
{{Clickable button 2|Abonniere die Mailingliste über Mitteilungen zu MediaWiki-Versionsankündigungen.|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Appendices ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/span&gt;
:{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hosting services which provide automatical installation of applications such as MediaWiki may offer outdated versions or have other issues. If you encounter problems, it ''does not'' mean that you cannot install MediaWiki. It means that you should install MediaWiki manually.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== System-specific instructions  ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The pages listed on {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First consult {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>96f17em3tv10d33s073wylj3bope013</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402882</id>
      <parentid>5402873</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:42:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13729" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Die Installation von MediaWiki kann für den durchschnittlichen Computeranwender schwierig werden, der keine Erfahrung mit Apache, PHP und MySQL/MariaDB hat.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Herunterladen der MediaWiki-Software ==

Lade die MediaWiki tar-Datei von der [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|offiziellen Download-Seite]] herunter.

Wenn du eine Produktionsumgebung verwendest, sollte man in der Regel die aktuellste stabile Version (MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}) einsetzen.

== Extrahiere die MediaWiki-Software ==
Die heruntergeladene Datei liegt im &lt;code&gt;.zip&lt;/code&gt;- oder im &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;-Format vor.
Du musst diese Archivdatei vor der 
Verwendung entpacken.
Du kannst die Datei lokal entpacken (und dann per FTP auf den Server hochladen) oder direkt auf deinem Server entpacken.

Unter Windows werden dafür gewöhnlich Programme wie [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (quelltextoffene Software), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] oder [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] benutzt.

Unter Linux und Mac OS X kannst du die Datei entpacken (untar), indem du folgenden Befehl anwendest:
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

==Dateien auf den Server hochladen==

Wenn du die Dateien noch nicht auf deinen [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Web server|Webserver]] hochgeladen hast (oder kopiert, wenn deine Webserver-Software lokal auf deinen Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Web server läuft), tu dies jetzt.

Lade die Dateien in das Webverzeichnis deines Webservers hoch, in dem du entweder:

# das entpackte Verzeichnis direkt kopierst oder
# einen FTP-Clienten wie [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (Windows, OSX und Linux) oder [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (Windows und OSX) nutzt.
# &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;cPanel File Manager benutzt ([[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|siehe unten]])&lt;/span&gt;

Wenn dein Kopier- oder FTP-Programm eine Option zur Umwandlung des Dateinamens in Kleinbuchstaben hat (change file names to lowercase), musst du diese ausschalten.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn du Apache installiert hast, steht das korrekte Verzeichnis in deiner &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;-Datei (es ist die [$docroot DocumentRoot]-Richtlinie, normalerweise $1 oder {{$2|apache-folder}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Hinweis: Dies änderte sich in Ubuntu 14.04 mit Apache 2.4.7, wo die ursprüngliche Konfigurationsdatei für Apache-Server-Einstellungen und -Verzeichnisse &lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt; ist.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

Benenne den hochgeladenen Ordner (oder den symbolischen Link) so um, wie du ihn in der URL haben willst.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn dein Web-Server z.&amp;nbsp;B. wie &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt; läuft, würde eine Umbenennung zu einem &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt;-Verzeichnis bedeuten, dass du dein Wiki über &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt; erreichst.&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not use &lt;code&gt;/wiki/&lt;/code&gt; if you want to set it up as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|Short URL]] after running the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script|installation script]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
== Die Datenbank einrichten ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki wird dich nach der Datenbank und dem Benutzernamen fragen und versuchen, diese zu erstellen, wenn sie noch nicht vorhanden sind.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Sofern du das root-Passwort deiner Datenbank kennst, kann das Installationsprogramm von MediaWiki eine Datenbank für dich erstellen.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wenn du das root-Passwort nicht kennst, z.&amp;nbsp;B. wenn du auf einem gemieteten Server bist, musst du eine neue Datenbank erzeugen.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Derzeit musst du entweder MariaDB/MySQL oder Postgres benutzen, um die aktuellen Inhalte des Wikis zu speichern.&lt;/span&gt;
Wenn du dir nicht sicher bist, welche Datenbank du auswählen sollst, benutze MariaDB.

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

Wähle auf der Installationsseite von SQLite einen Datenbanknamen (ein frei wählbarer Name) und das SQLite-Datenbankverzeichnis aus.
Für das Datenbankverzeichnis versucht das Installationsprogramm, ein Unterverzeichnis außerhalb des Dokument-Root-Verzeichnisses zu benutzen und erstellt es bei Bedarf.
Wenn dieses Verzeichnis nicht sicher ist (z.&amp;nbsp;B. für das Web lesbar), dann solltest du es manuell ändern, damit es nicht für das gesamte Web zugänglich ist.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Siehe die entsprechende Dokumentation.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Alternativ kann auch der Host-Provider ein Konto für dich einrichten.&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wenn deine Datenbank nicht auf dem gleichen Server wie dein Webserver läuft, musst du den zugehörigen Webserverhostnamen – im folgenden Beispiel ''mediawiki.example.com'' – wie folgt eingeben:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;MySQL/MariaDB unter UNIX/Linux protokolliert alle Abfragen, die an die Datenbank gesendet werden, in einer Datei, die auch das Passwort enthält, das für das Benutzerkonto verwendet wird.&lt;/span&gt; Wenn das für dich bedenklich ist, lösche und deaktiviere die &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt;-Datei, nachdem du diese Abfragen ausgeführt hast, indem du die [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/mysql-logging.html#mysql-logging-history-file MySQL-Dokumentation] befolgst.}}

===PostgreSQL===
Wenn du [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PostgreSQL|PostgreSQL]] verwendest, musst du entweder eine Datenbank und einen Benutzer für dich erstellen lassen oder den Namen eines PostgreSQL-Benutzers mit „Superuser“-Rechten in das Konfigurationsformular eingeben.
Dieser Datenbankbenutzer wird häufig &lt;code&gt;postgres&lt;/code&gt; genannt.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, and a database named &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; owned by the user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser (gib dann das Passwort ein)
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

oder du gibst, als Superuser (standardmäßig „postgres“), die folgenden Befehle in die Datenbank-Eingabezeile ein:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

'''Achtung:''' die [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|Liste bekannter Probleme beim Betrieb von MediaWiki mit PostgreSQL]] sollte beachtet werden.

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== Das Installationsskript ausführen ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wenn alle oben genannten Schritte abgeschlossen sind, kann die Installation über einen Webbrowser abgeschlossen werden, indem die URL der index.php im Browser aufgerufen wird – bitte die in {{ll|Manual:Config script}} beschriebenen Anweisungen beachten.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Weitere Konfiguration ==
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additional configuration&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wiki administration&lt;/span&gt;
== Auf dem Laufenden bleiben ==
Einmal installiert, sollte man immer auf dem Laufenden bleiben, was die neuen Versionen angeht, und seinen Server entsprechend schützen!
{{Clickable button 2|Abonniere die Mailingliste über Mitteilungen zu MediaWiki-Versionsankündigungen.|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Appendices ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/span&gt;
:{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hosting services which provide automatical installation of applications such as MediaWiki may offer outdated versions or have other issues. If you encounter problems, it ''does not'' mean that you cannot install MediaWiki. It means that you should install MediaWiki manually.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== System-specific instructions  ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The pages listed on {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First consult {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>45vtptxad5f6i0na7hniujf5cpuj6mj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/fr</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>29803</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402931</id>
      <parentid>5355652</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="46689" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Présentation générale ==

=== Transfert de fichiers ===

Choisissez une méthode pour transférer les fichiers :

* [[w:fr:GNU Wget|wget]]
* Copie sécurisée avec [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] ou [[w:fr:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:fr:SSH File Transfer Protocol|Protocole de transfert de fichiers SSH]] (SFTP)
* Utiliser un client [[w:fr:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]].
* Votre hébergeur peut mettre à disposition un gestionnaire de fichiers en ligne, vérifiez auprès de votre hébergeur.
* Une autre méthode. Voir [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

=== Préalable ===

Lisez {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=le fichier texte UPGRADE inclus dans MediaWiki}}.

# Vérifiez les prérequis
# Lire le fichier RELEASE-NOTES
# Lire le fichier UPGRADE
# Sauvegardez les fichiers existants et la base de données
# Décompressez les nouveaux fichiers
# Mettez à jour les extensions
# Exécutez le script de mise à jour pour vérifier la base de données
# Testez la mise à jour
# Supprimer ce qui reste des anciennes installations

== Vérifier les paramètres nécessaires == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} nécessite :

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* L'une des options suivantes :
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Depuis la version 1.36, MediaWiki ne valide que la prise en charge des mises à jour des deux dernières versions LTS (voir [[phab:T259771]]). Les mises à jour à partir de versions plus anciennes de MediaWiki devront se faire en plusieurs étapes.
Cela signifie que si vous voulez mettre à jour à partir de la 1.23 (ou plus ancienne) vers la 1.36, vous devrez d'abord faire la mise à jour de votre wiki 1.23 vers la 1.27 (ou 1.35), puis à partir de la 1.27 (ou la 1.35), vous pourrez faire la mise à jour vers la 1.36.

Si vous utilisez PostgreSQL, veuillez lire également {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}} .

Pour plus d'information, lisez {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} et {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Lisez les notes de version ==
Dans l'archive de l'installation ou dans les fichiers copiés/exportés de [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] sont présents des fichiers nommés en majuscules dont l'un contient les notes de version '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Il est maintenant temps de l'ouvrir et de rechercher ce qui a changé dans cette version.
Lisez également les instructions dans le fichier UPGRADE.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Vider la file des tâches en attente d'exécution ==
Pour des raisons de performance, certaines actions sur  la base de données sont retardées, et gérées par la [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|file des travaux]].
Ces tâches sont rangées dans la base de données et contiennent des paramètres avec les informations indiquant les actions à réaliser.
Il est vivement conseillé d'exécuter ces tâches en attente avant de faire la mise à jour du wiki, pour éviter qu'elles n'abortent dans le cas où la spécification des paramètres viendrait à changer d'une version à l'autre.
Utilisez {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} pour exécuter toutes les tâches en attente et vider la file d'attente avant de réaliser la mise à jour.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Sauvegarder les fichiers existants et la base de données ==

:''Instructions complètes : {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

Même si les scripts de mise à jour sont maintenus et robustes, les choses peuvent mal tourner. Avant de procéder à la mise à jour du schéma de base de données, '''faites une [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|sauvegarde]] complète''' du wiki, incluant à la fois la base de données et les fichiers :

* le contenu du wiki, en commençant par la base de données (assurez-vous de spécifier correctement le '''jeu de caractères''', vérifiez d'abord dans Localsettings.php). Il peut être utile de générer un export XML en plus de l'export SQL de la base de données.
:* MySQL, les deux exports SQL et XML sont à utiliser avec la commande &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; :
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, un export de la base de données à utiliser avec la commande &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; :
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, utilisez un script MediaWiki pour créer la sauvegarde :
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* les images et autres fichiers multimédia (le contenu du dossier &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;, logo personnalisé /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* les fichiers de configuration, comme par exemple &lt;code&gt;Localsettings.php&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (si présent)
* les fichiers du programme MediaWiki, en incluant tous les habillages et les extensions en particulier si vous les avez modifiés.

== Décompresser les nouveaux fichiers ==

=== Utiliser le paquet d'archive ===

Vous pouvez ramener les nouveaux fichiers en utilisant FTP ou la ligne de commande. Privilégiez la ligne de commande si vous y avez accès ! Celle-ci sera beaucoup plus rapide que de transférer les fichiers un à un parmi les milliers via FTP.

{{Note|1=Vous devriez extraire les fichiers de l'archive tarball dans un répertoire vide sur votre serveur. Si vous choisissez d'extraire l'archive de la nouvelle version directement à la racine de votre ancienne version, plutôt que dans un nouveau répertoire, suivez les instructions dans [[#Back up existing files and the database|Sauvegarde des fichiers existants et de la base de données]] sinon, les adaptations préalablement effectuées pourraient être perdues sans possibilité de les retrouver pour les ré-appliquer. Extraire l'archive à la racine de votre copie de production de MediaWiki risque de laisser derrière des fichiers de l'ancienne version de MediaWiki qui peuvent interférer avec le code mis à jour. Il est recommandé de décompresser les nouveaux fichiers dans un nouveau répertoire, et ensuite d'appliquer les modifications sur le nouveau répertoire (restaurer LocalSettings.php, le dossier des images, les extensions, et autres modifications comme les apparences personnalisées)}}

==== Client FTP ou interface graphique ====

Si vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le mode ligne sur votre serveur, téléchargez l'archive MediaWiki en local sur votre ordinateur et utilisez [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] pour extraire l'archive sur votre PC local.

Une fois les fichiers extraits localement, utilisez le client FTP de votre choix pour téléverser les dossiers et fichiers sur le serveur.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Ligne de commande ====
Il est possible que vous ayez à exécuter les commandes en tant que &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; si votre compte courant n'a pas toutes les permissions d'écriture dans le dossier d'installation du wiki.
Lors de l'extraction de l'archive tarball de MediaWiki normalement un nouveau dossier va se créer pour la nouvelle version de MediaWiki et vous devrez y copier les anciens fichiers de configuration et le dossier 'images' depuis le dossier où se trouve l'ancienne installation :

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

Les utilisateurs d'(Open)Solaris doivent utiliser &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt; ou :

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Autres fichiers ===

Après avoir extrait les archives, vous devez copier ou déplacer certains fichiers et dossiers depuis l'ancien répertoire d'installation vers le nouveau :
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - contient vos anciens paramètres de configuration.
* Le répertoire &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (ou &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; dans des versions antérieures), qui contient tous les fichiers hébergés sur le wiki, sauf si vous avez spécifié un dossier différent pour le téléversement des fichiers. Vous devrez changer le propriétaire et les permissions de façon appropriée, par exemple avec &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; si l'utilisateur web est ''apache''.
* Certaines extensions du répertoire &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;. Vous devriez toujours utiliser des versions actualisées des extensions ; il n'est pas garanti que les anciennes extensions fonctionnent avec une version plus récente de MediaWiki.
* Si utilisez un [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|logo personnalisé]], ce fichier doit aussi être restauré à partir de la sauvegarde. Avant la version 1.24 il se trouve habituellement dans &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. À partir de la version 1.24 il se trouve dans le dossier &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; ou dans &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; si vous avez préféré l'utiliser. Dans ce cas ajoutez-le dans Localsettings.php, par exemple avec &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
*Pour la 1.35 vous devrez peut-être restaurer les logos depuis [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]], et ensuite ajouter au LocalSettings.php &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; par exemple.
* Les habillages personnalisés au sein du répertoire &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;.
* Toutes modifications réalisées sur les anciens fichiers d'installation ou aux extensions.
* Les éventuels fichiers .htaccess (si vous utlisez Apache et que vous y avez défini des règles).

Une fois fait ceci, faites de ce nouveau dossier le dossier publié sur le serveur, ou renommez l'ancien dossier d'installation, et ensuite renommez le nouveau dossier pour qu'il coïncide avec l'ancien nom.

=== En utilisant Git ===

Si vous utilisez {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, exportez les fichiers dans un dossier vide et ensuite copiez uniquement les fichiers modifiés dans le nouveau répertoire comme détaillé dans la section précédente.

Vous devrez aussi installer certaines bibliothèques PHP externes en utilisant Composer ou une archive fournie maintenue pour la ferme de wikis Wikimedia.
Plus de détails sur l'installation et l'actualisation des bibliothèques externes se trouvent dans la [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|documentation de téléchargement Git]].

=== Utilisation de patch ===
Un petit fichier de patch est habituellement disponible pour une mise à jour de version mineure.
Vous devrez télécharger [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] pour utiliser ceci.
Téléchargez et extrayez manuellement le fichier patch depuis  [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ le site des archives] ou bien suivez les instructions utilisant wget ci-dessous.
Les patchs sont incrémentaux, vous '''ne''' pouvez '''pas''' ignorer une version.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; à votre répertoire principal MediaWiki (celui avec LocalSettings.php).
# Téléchargez le fichier de patch et faites un  &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; dessus.
# Utilisez &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; pour vérifier ce qui sera changé (''par exemple'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Si tout va bien, lancez &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; à nouveau sans &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
# Vérifiez votre Special:Version et vous devriez voir le nouveau numéro de version en place.

=== Fichiers restants susceptibles de provoquer des erreurs ===

Si vous installez dans le même répertoire que l'ancienne version, il est possible que les anciens fichiers causent des problèmes avec la nouvelle version.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Si vous n'utilisez pas [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], mais que vous avez un fichier &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; dans le répertoire racine de MediaWiki, vous pouvez voir apparaître des erreurs de référence à &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt; .
En effaçant ou renommant le fichier &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; , vous corrigerez cette erreur.  Le fichier &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; , qui est aussi dans le répertoire racine de MediaWiki, peut servir de modèle au cas où vous activeriez le profiling à l'avenir.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23 abandonne le mécanisme de découverte automatique des fichiers d'habillage embarqués. Après la mise à jour vers cette version, vous devez vérifier directement que les anciens fichiers &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; dans le répertoire &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; de même que les sous-répertoires correspondants dans &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;, ont été supprimés. MédiaWiki enregistrera les avertissements si certains d'entre-eux sont encore présents, pour vous aider à vous en souvenir (vous aurez aussi besoin d'ajuster les habillages personnalisés pour suivre une convention similaire). Voir {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} pour les détails.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 modifie les chemins des fichiers d'habillage système. Après avoir fait la mise à jour vers cette version, vous devez vérifier directement que les anciens fichiers &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; du répertoire &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; , ne sont plus présents. Voir {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} pour les détails.

== Mettre à jour les extensions ==

Certaines extensions ont été mises à jour pour fonctionner avec la nouvelle version de MediaWiki. Vérifiez de que vous utilisez bien la dernière version de ces extensions. Il est possible que vous ayez à faire les mises à jour manuellement pour les extensions personnalisées.

Les différentes [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|archives de distribution .tar]] contiennent quelques sous-ensembles des extensions ainsi qu'un numéro de version pour vous aider à mettre à jour en choisissant celui compatible avec la version de votre coeur de système MédiaWiki.

L'[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|extension Distributor]] fonctionne bien pour la plupart des personnes qui veulent une capture des extensions compatible avec les versions que leur  MédiaWiki peut supporter.

Si vous désirez beaucoup d'extensions alors le [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|téléchargement à partir de Git]] est probablement la meilleure chose.
Si vous ne possédez pas Git et voulez mettre à jour un grand nombre d'extensions, vous pouvez utiliser [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].

== Adaptez votre LocalSettings.php ==

Si vous utilisez le &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; de l'ancienne version, il est possible que vous deviez l'adapter en fonction de l'utilisation qu'en fait la nouvelle version :

=== Enregistrement de l'habillage ===

Depuis MediaWiki 1.24, les habillages embarqués tels que Vector, Monobook, Modern et CologneBlue ne font plus partie du coeur de MediaWiki, et ils doivent être enregistrés explicitement dans &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; pour pouvoir être utilisés, sinon MediaWiki vous avertira que vous n'avez pas installé ces habillages.

Voici ce que vous devez ajouter à &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; quand vous mettez à jour à partir d'une version plus ancienne que la 1.24 et que vous voulez mettre à disposition l'un des habillages suivants :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Les autres habillages peuvent encore ne pas avoir été adaptés au nouveau système d'[[Manual:Extension registration|enregistrement des habillages]], aussi reportez-vous à la page de documentation de chacun d'eux pour voir comment l'enregistrer proprement en cas de problème.

=== Enregistrement d'extension ===

Depuis MediaWiki 1.25, les extensions utilisent un nouveau système d'[[Manual:Extension registration|enregistrement des extensions]] .

Auparavant votre &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; aurait inclus quelque chose comme :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Cela peut être converti en :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Nous sommes en train d'adapter les extensions pour utiliser le nouveau système d'enregistrement.
Les extensions qui ne sont pas adaptées doivent utiliser l'ancienne méthode d'installation.
Reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation sur la page des extensions pour plus d'information.

=== Autres variables ===
Certaines variables peuvent être obsolètes ou même avoir été retirées.
Le fait de les avoir dans &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; n'a habituellement pas de conséquences.
De nouvelles variables peuvent être ajoutées dans les versions les plus récentes, ou certaines variables peuvent voir leur type modifié.
D'ordinaire, nous essayons d'utiliser pour elles, des valeurs saines par défaut, et dans le cas d'une modification de type, de conserver la compatibilité ascendante.
Dans tous les cas, lisez les notes de livraison pour voir ces changements.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Exécuter le script de mise à jour ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
Vous pouvez mettre à jour la base de données MediaWiki de deux manières : soit à partir de la ligne de commande, soit à partir du navigateur web. Si vous avez accès au shell de votre serveur, la mise à jour à partir de la ligne de commande est recommandée, car cela réduit le risque que le processus de mise à jour soit interrompu par un dépassement de temps ou par la reinitialisation de la connexion.

Le script essayera aussi de télécharger toute dépendance manquante dont MediaWiki aurait besoin.

=== Ligne de commande ===

Allez à la ligne de commande sur votre serveur, ou par shell SSH ou équivalent. Vous pouvez accéder à la ligne de commande en vous connectant sur votre serveur par SSH. Si le PC local à partir duquel vous travaillez est sous Microsoft Windows, vous aurez besoin d'un outil tel que [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] pour utiliser SSH. A partir de la ligne de commande ou du shell, placez-vous dans le répertoire &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; et exécutez le [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|script de mise à jour]]:

 $ php update.php

Sur un serveur Linux, si vous obtenez une erreur, essayez d'exécuter la même commande en tant que root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Notez pour les installations simples sous Windows (par exemple avec {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
D'abord s'assurer que votre serveur web (comme Apache) et que votre base de données (comme MySQL) sont montés (accessibles).
Ensuite exécutez &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt; : cliquez-droit dessus, sélectionnez « Ouvrir avec », et accédez à PHP.exe .
La fenêtre de dialogue de la commande résultante se fermera vraisemblablement automatiquement quand la mise à jour du schéma sera terminée.

Vous pourriez voir un message indiquant que votre version de PHP est trop ancienne et que MediaWiki en réclame une version plus récente.
Après ce message, la mise à jour s'arrête.
Le motif de cette erreur est que la ligne de commande peut utiliser une autre version de PHP que celle que vous avez quand vous exécutez MediaWiki à partir du serveur web.
Quand ce message apparaît, vérifiez si vous pouvez exécuter une nouvelle version de PHP dans le shell en utilisant une commande différente : ceci pourrait être par exemple ''php5'' ou ''php56''.
La disponibilité d'une autre version et son nom (si elle est installée), dépendent de la configuration de votre serveur.
Si cela ne fonctionne pas, demandez à votre hébergeur; il saura sûrement.

MediaWiki va scruter le schéma existant et le mettre à jour pour qu'il puisse travailler avec le nouveau code, en ajoutant des tables et des colonnes en fonction des besoins.

{{Note|1=Si vous utilisez une [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|base de données partagée]], vous devez passer le paramètre &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; si vous voulez que les tables partagées soient mises à jour. Sinon elles ne resteront inchangées par le script de mise à jour.}}

==== Que faire si le fichier php update.php échoue dans une action, résultant en un bref arrêt avant de retourner à l'invite de commande ====

Ceci peut être causé par une extension ou un habillage défaillant.

* Vérifiez que toutes les extensions ainsi que tous les habilages appelés dans LocalSettings.php sont présents
* Vérifiez que les extensions utilisent la méthode d'enregistrement correcte (wfLoadExtension avec require_once)
* Commentez la première moitié des extensions en LocalSettings.php. Si cela fait fonctionner update.php, décommentez la moitié de cette moitié (donc 1/4 des extensions). Si cela ne fait PAS fonctionner update.php, décommentez la première moitié mais commentez la seconde moitié, puis commentez la moitié de la seconde moitié, etc. Recommencer jusqu'à ce que update.php fonctionne pour trouver celui qui échoue.

==== Que faire en cas d'erreur &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; (ou similaire) ====

Dans le cas où le script échoue avec un message similaire à :

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

Cela signifie que vous devez vérifier d'avoir bien défini {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} et {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} dans votre fichier {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} (dans le répertoire principal). C'est l'utilisateur et le mot de passe nécessaire au script pour accéder à la base de données.

Dans certains cas, une ancienne variable $wgDBmwschema (pour Postgres) semble être lue pour le nom de la table au lieu de $wgDBname, même quand MySQL est utilisé. Dans ce cas, supprimez simplement la définition de $wgDBmwschema dans LocalSettings.php.

==== Que faire en cas d'erreur &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; ====

Les utilisateurs qui exécutent update.php individuellement à partir de leur ligne de commande peuvent rencontrer l'erreur suivante :

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

Cette erreur apparait quand vous exécutez update.php sous php4.

Les personnes qui ont leur site hébergé chez des fournisseurs qui mettent à disposition à la fois php4 et php5, doivent suivre les étapes suivantes :

# sur la ligne de commande, entrez 'whereis php5'
# dès que vous avez identifié le chemin vers php5, affichez le contennu du répertoire php5/bin
# une fois le nom de l'exécutable php trouvé (php ou php5), entrez le chemin complet pour exécuter update.php

Voici un exemple :

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

==== Que faire en cas d'erreur 'register_argc_argv is set to false' =====

Vous pouvez rencontrer cette erreur :
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Allez dans ~/maintenance. Modifiez un fichier 'php.ini' existant, ou créez-en un. 
# Ajoutez une ligne comme ceci :

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Réexécutez &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
=== Navigateur web ===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Voir aussi {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Si votre base de données est déja imposante et utilisée à un haut niveau, alors il ne faut pas utiliser la mise à jour par le web, par exemple parceque le processus de mise à jour vas échouer faute de temps suffisant quand le ''maximum_execution_time'' sera atteint. Dans ce cas vous devez utiliser [[update.php]] à partir de l'interface ligne de commande (pas à partir du web). Que signifie exactement &quot;imposante&quot;, cela dépend de votre serveur (par exemple de ses performances, de la charge et du temps maximal d'exécution que PHP attribue à l'exécution du script). Si votre wiki est trop gros pour la mise à jour par web et que votre fournisseur d'hébergement n'autorise pas l'accès aux commandes en mode ligne, alors vous devez migrer votre wiki vers un autre compte d'hébergement possédant - lui - un accès réel au shell.

# Faites toujours une [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|copie de sauvegarde]] (back up) avant la maintenance de la base de données.
# Naviguez dans votre navigateur Web jusqu'à &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;. Par exemple, si votre wiki est à &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, alors naviguez jusqu'à &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
# Choisissez votre langue et cliquez sur continuer.
# L'installation existante devrait être détectée. Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour en faire la mise à jour.&lt;br/&gt;Si la &quot;clé de mise à jour&quot; est demandée, ouvrez votre fichier {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} et cherchez la valeur assignée à {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.

Il peut arriver que la mise à jour par web semble ne pas fonctionner : au lieu de voir le menu initial de l'écran de sélection de langue, vous pouvez obtenir une page wiki vide, avec éventuellement des messages d'erreur. Dans ce cas il est probable que votre serveur web utilise les règles de réécriture (- Rewrite Rules - probablment pour les [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|URLs courtes]]), qui ne vous montrent pas le moteur de mise à jour dans ''mw-config/'', mais sur une page wiki à ''Mw-config/'', avec un &quot;M&quot; majuscule. Dans ce cas, renommez le fichier ''.htaccess'' pour le temps de la mise à jour. Vous devriez ensuite pouvoir accéder à la mise à jour par web.

{{Warning|1=Si vous suivez cette méthode, assurez-vous de '''re-changer le nom du fichier .htaccess''' après avoir lancé le script de mise à jour! Sinon les URLs courtes et peut être aussi d'autres éléments pourraient être cassés.}}

== Tester la mise à jour ==

Une fois que la mise à jour s'est terminée, explorez le wiki et vérifiez que les opérations suivantes s'exécutent comme désiré :

* afficher des pages
* modifier des pages
* téléverser un fichier
* consultez [[Special:Version]] et vérifiez que la version affichée est correcte et que les extensions sont présentes.

== Supprimer ce qui reste des anciennes installations ==
Si vous avez recopié votre ancienne installation dans un autre répertoire du serveur, vérifiez que vous avez bien supprimé le dossier initial ou rendez le complètement inaccessible du web.
Il est très important de ne pas laisser les anciennes installations accessibles à partir du web parce que cela nuit au principe de la mise à jour et laisse votre serveur ouvert aux attaques.

== Foire aux questions ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
=== Quelles sont les difficultés lors de la mise à jour ? ===

Si le seul fichier que vous avez modifié est {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, et que vous faites la mise à jour de la 1.5 ou ultérieure, le processus est très simple. La quantité de travail à fournir par un humain n'est que de quelques minutes. Les modifications du schéma de la base de données prendront un temps proportionnel à la taille de votre base de données — potentiellement des heures pour les wikis avec des millions de pages, mais pour des tailles plus typiques de quelques milliers de pages, cela prendra habituellement quelques secondes.

Les mises à jour mineures, à l'intérieur de la même version majeure, disons de la {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 vers la {{MW legacy release number}}, ne nécessitent aucune modification du schema.
Il vous suffit de mettre à jour les fichiers. La base de données n'a pas à être mise à jour, et donc il n'est pas nécessaire de lancer le script de mise à jour.

Faire la mise à jour de la 1.4 ou antérieure est potentiellement compliqué car la prise en charge des familles de caractères autres que UTF-8 a été sautée, et le schéma pour ranger du texte en masse a changé. Veuillez lire la section correspondante du fichier &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; .

La mise à jour devient difficile si vous avez modifié notre code source, et que vous ne voulez pas que vos modifications soient écrasées. Les outils tels que [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] ou [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] peuvent vous être utiles. Il y a aussi des risques de perturbation si vous utilisez des extensions qui n'ont pas été maintenues. Mettez à jour vos extensions au même moment que vous mettez à jour MediaWiki.

Si vous avez modifié l'habillage, ou si vous utilisez un habillage personnalisé, vous devrez probablement l'ajuster pour le rendre compatible avec la nouvelle version de MédiaWiki.

{{Tip|1=Au lieu de patcher votre css &quot;global&quot; et les fichiers js (javascript) à chaque fois, vous pouvez simplement ajouter le code à votre MediaWiki:Common.js et vos pages MediaWiki:Common.css. Comme ceux-ci font partie de la base de données qui sera réutilisée dans la mise à jour, vous n'aurez plus à patcher les fichiers du coeur de MediaWiki.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== Que faire si je mets à jour à partir d'une très vieille version ? En une étape ou en plusieurs ? ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Cela dépend: si vous effectuez une '''mise à niveau à partir de MediaWiki version 1.4 ou antérieure''', vous devez commencer par effectuer une mise à niveau vers MediaWiki 1.5. Si vous mettez à niveau à partir d'un wiki Latin-1, utilisez upgrade1_5.php (présent dans MediaWiki 1.5) pour convertir en UTF-8 les parties pertinentes de la base de données ($latin doit être défini à true dans vos $localsettings pour que cela fonctionne). Ensuite, exécutez update.php, puis initialisez l’option $legacy dans LocalSettings.php avec la valeur du codage précédemment utilisé par le wiki (par exemple, windows-1252). C’est en gros la manière dont Wikipedia et d’autres sites de la Wikimedia Foundation ont été mis à niveau de MediaWiki 1.4 à 1.5 - voir le [$noc fichier des paramètres pertinents (attention: page très grande!)] et quelques [[$wikitech|notes connexes sur Wikitech]]. Vous devrez peut-être mettre à niveau vers MediaWiki 1.4 avant d’exécuter le script upgrade1.5 .&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
Si vous voulez faire un vidage des tables de la base de données (par exemple MySQL) de votre wiki Latin-1, assurez-vous que le type du champ &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; de la table {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} vaut &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, et non pas  &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, pour éviter les problèmes d'encodage de caractères.

Si vous effectuez une '''mise à niveau à partir de MediaWiki 1.5 (ou plus récent)''' vers '''1.35''', vous pouvez faire la mise à niveau en une passe, de votre ancienne version vers la dernière version stable.
La grande majorité des rapports, ainsi que des tests automatisés, indiquent que le faire en une seule étape fonctionne parfaitement.
Si vous avez du mal à le croire, lisez [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|cet article de la liste de diffusion]].
Cependant, veuillez noter que lorsque vous mettez à jour à partir d'anciennes versions, les chances de rencontrer des erreurs PHP sont plus grandes que lorsque vous effectuez une mise à jour à partir de la version qui précède la nouvelle version.
Vous auriez de toute façon reçu ces erreurs si vous n'aviez pas sauté de versions, mais les erreurs auraient été associées à chaque mise à jour individuelle.
En revanche, si vous passez plusieurs versions d'un coup, vous obtiendrez les mêmes erreurs toutes en même temps.
Cela rendra la mise à jour plus difficile, mais n'oubliez pas que vous n'aurez pas de problème si vous mettez à jour les versions intermédiaires, que vous avez sautées!

Si vous faites la '''mise à jour vers MediaWiki 1.36''' ou ultérieure, seules les mises à jour à partir des deux dernières versions LTS sont prises en charge ([[phab:T259771]]). Cela signifie que pour les versions très anciennes, vous devrez d'abord passer en MediaWiki 1.35 puis en MediaWiki 1.36.

=== Dois-je faire une sauvegarde préalable ?===

Réponse courte : oui.

Réponse plus longue : cela dépend de a) la valeur que vous prêtez à vos données, b) la difficulté à créer une sauvegarde et c) l'expérience que vous avez en entretien et administration de MySQL. 

Une faute dans la mise à jour peut laisser votre base de données dans un état instable, entre deux versions.
Une erreur PHP ou MySQL pourrait survenir durant la mise à jour en laissant votre base de données partiellement traitée.
Dans de telles situations il est possible qu'une personne puisse corriger ce problème avec beaucoup de travail manuel.
Néanmoins, il serait ''plus facile'' de faire simplement une sauvegarde de la base de données juste avant de lancer update.php et de continuer avec.
Sinon vous y passeriez - inutilement - toutes vos heures de travail.

La récupération est souvent complexe.
Les bénévoles des forums de support ne se sentiront pas trop concernés si vous avez négligé de faire une sauvegarde et qu'ensuite vous avez besoin d'aide pour récupérer tout ce qui a été cassé par la mise à jour.
Une meilleure solution c'est, de réinstaller votre sauvegarde, puis de [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|signaler le bogue sur le projet MediaWiki correspondant]] dans le processus de mise à jour qui a causé le dysfonctionnement.

=== Puis-je conserver mon fichier LocalSettings.php ? ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Oui, mais il se peut que vous deviez faire quelques petits changements. Le format de $localsettings est fondamentalement compatible avec les versions précédentes. Les changements qui peuvent casser la compatibilité de Localsettings.php seront documentés dans la section &quot;Changements dans la configuration&quot; des [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|notes de version]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== Est-ce que mon wiki peut rester en ligne pendant la mise à jour ? ===

En général oui, néanmoins Git peut le casser temporairement (pendant quelques secondes).

Si vous mettez à jour entre des versions mineures de MediaWiki, il est uniquement nécessaire de mettre à jour les fichiers source.

Note : ce qui suit suppose que vous avez accès à la ligne de commande. Si vous êtes en train de mettre à jour entre des versions majeures de MediaWiki, la procédure recommandée est la suivante :

# Décompressez la nouvelle version de MediaWiki dans un nouveau dossier
# Préparez ce nouveau dossier : copiez votre LocalSettings.php actuel de l'ancien répertoire, ainsi que les extensions et les habillages personnalisés que vous pouvez avoir installés(s'il y en a). Vérifiez les paramètres {{wg|Logo}} et {{wg|Logos}} dans LocalSettings.php et, si nécessaire, copiez le fichier logo de l'ancien répertoire vers le nouveau répertoire.
# Dans les notes de version pour la nouvelle version, vérifiez s'il faut faire des modifications dans LocalSettings.php.
# Mettez la base de données en lecture seule en insérant la variable suivante dans LocalSettings.php de l'ancien répertoire; les utilisateurs verront ce message s'ils essaient de modifier une page pendant le processus de mise à jour :&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Ceci n'est plus fonctionnel depuis MediaWiki 1.27, ce qui empêche aussi d'exécuter le script de mise à jour. Une solution de contournement pour les versions après la 1.27 peut être trouvée dans {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. Voir aussi {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Exécutez le [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|script de mise à jour]] ou via l'interface web dans le nouveau dossier.
# Copiez les images du sous-dossier d'images de l'ancien répertoire vers le nouveau.
# Permutez l'ancien répertoire avec le nouveau.

=== Pourquoi mettre à jour ? ===
:''Abonnez-vous à la liste [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] pour être notifié des nouvelles versions.''

Parce que c'est [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|habituellement assez facile]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|une seule étape de votre version à la dernière]] et aussi [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via le web]].

Les versions récentes reçoivent des correctifs de sécurité pour protéger votre wiki et votre hôte des vandales, ce qui n'est pas le cas des anciennes versions (voir {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). Ce qui vous donne des dizaines de bonnes raisons pour faire la mise à jour!

Les nouvelles versions majeures sont livrées avec de nouvelles fonctions que vous pourriez utiliser: voir la bulletin de livraison pour les détails. Dans le cas où vous auriez besoin de détails supplémentaires pour convaincre vos chefs de vous laisser faire la mise à jour d'une version viellotte, voici un résumé :

* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, vous pouvez avoir un [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|aperçu des modifications avant sauvegarde]] aussi sous forme de différentiel.
* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, un [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|bouton annuler]] est disponible.
* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, le [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] des [[Special:NewPages]] est beaucoup plus facile.
* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, vous pouvez [[$3|renommer]] (déplacer) les fichiers.
* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, vous pouvez [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|corriger les doubles redirections]] automatiquement.
* Depuis la {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} est disponible.
* Si vous avez un mécanisme de cache adapté, depuis la 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimise beaucoup la vitesse de chargement des pages.
* Depuis la 1.17, le [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|tri sur les catégories a un sens!]] (particulièrement pour les lettres non anglaises); étendu à 68 langues après {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} et {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, les utilisateurs de toutes les langues ainsi que les genres sont correctement adressés par l'interface ainsi que dans les [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|journaux]] (avant la 1.15, les genres n'existaient pas du tout).
* Dans la {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} le système d'habillage a été recodé rendant plus facile la réutilisation des parties d'habillages existants dans vos propres habillages.
* Depuis la [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], les [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] sont plus lisibles.
* Dans la [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] et la [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], les notifications par courriel sont plus claires et plus prévisibles, rendant votre wiki plus efficace.
* Depuis la [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], la chasse aux vandales (patrolling) demmande moins de temps pour s'exécuter.
* Dans la [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], l'enregistrement des mots de passe a été amélioré pour permettre une meilleure sécurité.
* A partir de la [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], des  [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|modifications récentes élargies sont disponibles]]
* En [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], le [[ResourceLoader|fonctionnement du &quot;ResourceLoader&quot; a été amélioré]]
* Dans la [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], la gestion des sessions a été recodée tout comme la gestion de l'authentification des utilisateurs qui a été complètement modernisée. InstantCommons n'a plus besoin de fichiers en local.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, le cache du HTML généré pour les pages d'articles a été amélioré.
* Depuis la {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, l'API Action a été recodée et améliorée. Egalement, les permissions du groupe des utilisateurs peuvent maintenant être faites pour une période définissable. Permet de bloquer une plage d'adresses IP.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, les utilisateurs bloqués ne peuvent pas modifier leur adresse courriel. La possibilité de rechercher les contributions à l'intérieur d'intervalles d'adresses IP dans les Special:Contributions a été ajoutée.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, quelques extensions font maintenant partie du noyau, telles {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}. La {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} a été présentée. La limite du taux par défaut de 90 modifications par minute a été ajoutée à tous les utilisateurs.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki prend en charge plus de 350 langues.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki prend en charge les « blocages partiels » , où les adresses IP et les comptes peuvent être restreints quant à la modification des pages ou d'espaces de noms particuliers.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, davantage d'extensions font partie du noyau : {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (pour les modules Lua), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (version LTS stable), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} est une partie du noyau. La fonctionnalité de '''suivi''' peut être enrichie avec les dates d'expiration.

Egalement, à partir de {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} nous commençons à [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|embarquer quelques extensions vitales]], comme un  meilleur éditeur et les outils anti-vandales ConfirmEdit and Nuke; d'autres extensions ont été ajoutées dans les dernières versions.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Voir aussi ==

* Un article du blog de Greg Sabino Mullane offre [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html plus de détails sur les mises à jour mineures].
* Le [[Project:Support desk|support]] si vous avez besoin d'aide ou si quelque chose s'est mal passé
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - si votre sauvegarde ne s'est pas bien réalisée
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>0zo4n3x1qjpwtbhz6ebd64wbnrznj6v</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402952</id>
      <parentid>5402931</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:42:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="46668" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Présentation générale ==

=== Transfert de fichiers ===

Choisissez une méthode pour transférer les fichiers :

* [[w:fr:GNU Wget|wget]]
* Copie sécurisée avec [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] ou [[w:fr:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:fr:SSH File Transfer Protocol|Protocole de transfert de fichiers SSH]] (SFTP)
* Utiliser un client [[w:fr:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]].
* Votre hébergeur peut mettre à disposition un gestionnaire de fichiers en ligne, vérifiez auprès de votre hébergeur.
* Une autre méthode. Voir [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

=== Préalable ===

Lisez {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=le fichier texte UPGRADE inclus dans MediaWiki}}.

# Vérifiez les prérequis
# Lire le fichier RELEASE-NOTES
# Lire le fichier UPGRADE
# Sauvegardez les fichiers existants et la base de données
# Décompressez les nouveaux fichiers
# Mettez à jour les extensions
# Exécutez le script de mise à jour pour vérifier la base de données
# Testez la mise à jour
# Supprimer ce qui reste des anciennes installations

== Vérifier les paramètres nécessaires == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} nécessite :

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* L'une des options suivantes :
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Depuis la version 1.36, MediaWiki ne valide que la prise en charge des mises à jour des deux dernières versions LTS (voir [[phab:T259771]]). Les mises à jour à partir de versions plus anciennes de MediaWiki devront se faire en plusieurs étapes.
Cela signifie que si vous voulez mettre à jour à partir de la 1.23 (ou plus ancienne) vers la 1.36, vous devrez d'abord faire la mise à jour de votre wiki 1.23 vers la 1.27 (ou 1.35), puis à partir de la 1.27 (ou la 1.35), vous pourrez faire la mise à jour vers la 1.36.

Si vous utilisez PostgreSQL, veuillez lire également {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}} .

Pour plus d'information, lisez {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} et {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Lisez les notes de version ==
Dans l'archive de l'installation ou dans les fichiers copiés/exportés de [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] sont présents des fichiers nommés en majuscules dont l'un contient les notes de version '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Il est maintenant temps de l'ouvrir et de rechercher ce qui a changé dans cette version.
Lisez également les instructions dans le fichier UPGRADE.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Vider la file des tâches en attente d'exécution ==
Pour des raisons de performance, certaines actions sur  la base de données sont retardées, et gérées par la [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|file des travaux]].
Ces tâches sont rangées dans la base de données et contiennent des paramètres avec les informations indiquant les actions à réaliser.
Il est vivement conseillé d'exécuter ces tâches en attente avant de faire la mise à jour du wiki, pour éviter qu'elles n'abortent dans le cas où la spécification des paramètres viendrait à changer d'une version à l'autre.
Utilisez {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} pour exécuter toutes les tâches en attente et vider la file d'attente avant de réaliser la mise à jour.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Sauvegarder les fichiers existants et la base de données ==

:''Instructions complètes : {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

Même si les scripts de mise à jour sont maintenus et robustes, les choses peuvent mal tourner. Avant de procéder à la mise à jour du schéma de base de données, '''faites une [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|sauvegarde]] complète''' du wiki, incluant à la fois la base de données et les fichiers :

* le contenu du wiki, en commençant par la base de données (assurez-vous de spécifier correctement le '''jeu de caractères''', vérifiez d'abord dans Localsettings.php). Il peut être utile de générer un export XML en plus de l'export SQL de la base de données.
:* MySQL, les deux exports SQL et XML sont à utiliser avec la commande &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; :
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, un export de la base de données à utiliser avec la commande &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; :
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, utilisez un script MediaWiki pour créer la sauvegarde :
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* les images et autres fichiers multimédia (le contenu du dossier &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;, logo personnalisé /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* les fichiers de configuration, comme par exemple &lt;code&gt;Localsettings.php&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (si présent)
* les fichiers du programme MediaWiki, en incluant tous les habillages et les extensions en particulier si vous les avez modifiés.

== Décompresser les nouveaux fichiers ==

=== Utiliser le paquet d'archive ===

Vous pouvez ramener les nouveaux fichiers en utilisant FTP ou la ligne de commande. Privilégiez la ligne de commande si vous y avez accès ! Celle-ci sera beaucoup plus rapide que de transférer les fichiers un à un parmi les milliers via FTP.

{{Note|1=Vous devriez extraire les fichiers de l'archive tarball dans un répertoire vide sur votre serveur. Si vous choisissez d'extraire l'archive de la nouvelle version directement à la racine de votre ancienne version, plutôt que dans un nouveau répertoire, suivez les instructions dans [[#Back up existing files and the database|Sauvegarde des fichiers existants et de la base de données]] sinon, les adaptations préalablement effectuées pourraient être perdues sans possibilité de les retrouver pour les ré-appliquer. Extraire l'archive à la racine de votre copie de production de MediaWiki risque de laisser derrière des fichiers de l'ancienne version de MediaWiki qui peuvent interférer avec le code mis à jour. Il est recommandé de décompresser les nouveaux fichiers dans un nouveau répertoire, et ensuite d'appliquer les modifications sur le nouveau répertoire (restaurer LocalSettings.php, le dossier des images, les extensions, et autres modifications comme les apparences personnalisées)}}

==== Client FTP ou interface graphique ====

Si vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le mode ligne sur votre serveur, téléchargez l'archive MediaWiki en local sur votre ordinateur et utilisez [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] pour extraire l'archive sur votre PC local.

Une fois les fichiers extraits localement, utilisez le client FTP de votre choix pour téléverser les dossiers et fichiers sur le serveur.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Ligne de commande ====
Il est possible que vous ayez à exécuter les commandes en tant que &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; si votre compte courant n'a pas toutes les permissions d'écriture dans le dossier d'installation du wiki.
Lors de l'extraction de l'archive tarball de MediaWiki normalement un nouveau dossier va se créer pour la nouvelle version de MediaWiki et vous devrez y copier les anciens fichiers de configuration et le dossier 'images' depuis le dossier où se trouve l'ancienne installation :

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

Les utilisateurs d'(Open)Solaris doivent utiliser &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt; ou :

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Autres fichiers ===

Après avoir extrait les archives, vous devez copier ou déplacer certains fichiers et dossiers depuis l'ancien répertoire d'installation vers le nouveau :
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - contient vos anciens paramètres de configuration.
* Le répertoire &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (ou &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; dans des versions antérieures), qui contient tous les fichiers hébergés sur le wiki, sauf si vous avez spécifié un dossier différent pour le téléversement des fichiers. Vous devrez changer le propriétaire et les permissions de façon appropriée, par exemple avec &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; si l'utilisateur web est ''apache''.
* Certaines extensions du répertoire &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;. Vous devriez toujours utiliser des versions actualisées des extensions ; il n'est pas garanti que les anciennes extensions fonctionnent avec une version plus récente de MediaWiki.
* Si utilisez un [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|logo personnalisé]], ce fichier doit aussi être restauré à partir de la sauvegarde. Avant la version 1.24 il se trouve habituellement dans &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. À partir de la version 1.24 il se trouve dans le dossier &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; ou dans &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; si vous avez préféré l'utiliser. Dans ce cas ajoutez-le dans Localsettings.php, par exemple avec &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
*Pour la 1.35 vous devrez peut-être restaurer les logos depuis [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]], et ensuite ajouter au LocalSettings.php &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; par exemple.
* Les habillages personnalisés au sein du répertoire &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;.
* Toutes modifications réalisées sur les anciens fichiers d'installation ou aux extensions.
* Les éventuels fichiers .htaccess (si vous utlisez Apache et que vous y avez défini des règles).

Une fois fait ceci, faites de ce nouveau dossier le dossier publié sur le serveur, ou renommez l'ancien dossier d'installation, et ensuite renommez le nouveau dossier pour qu'il coïncide avec l'ancien nom.

=== En utilisant Git ===

Si vous utilisez {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, exportez les fichiers dans un dossier vide et ensuite copiez uniquement les fichiers modifiés dans le nouveau répertoire comme détaillé dans la section précédente.

Vous devrez aussi installer certaines bibliothèques PHP externes en utilisant Composer ou une archive fournie maintenue pour la ferme de wikis Wikimedia.
Plus de détails sur l'installation et l'actualisation des bibliothèques externes se trouvent dans la [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|documentation de téléchargement Git]].

=== Utilisation de patch ===
Un petit fichier de patch est habituellement disponible pour une mise à jour de version mineure.
Vous devrez télécharger [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] pour utiliser ceci.
Téléchargez et extrayez manuellement le fichier patch depuis  [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ le site des archives] ou bien suivez les instructions utilisant wget ci-dessous.
Les patchs sont incrémentaux, vous '''ne''' pouvez '''pas''' ignorer une version.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; à votre répertoire principal MediaWiki (celui avec LocalSettings.php).
# Téléchargez le fichier de patch et faites un  &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; dessus.
# Utilisez &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; pour vérifier ce qui sera changé (''par exemple'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Si tout va bien, lancez &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; à nouveau sans &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
# Vérifiez votre Special:Version et vous devriez voir le nouveau numéro de version en place.

=== Fichiers restants susceptibles de provoquer des erreurs ===

Si vous installez dans le même répertoire que l'ancienne version, il est possible que les anciens fichiers causent des problèmes avec la nouvelle version.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Si vous n'utilisez pas [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], mais que vous avez un fichier &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; dans le répertoire racine de MediaWiki, vous pouvez voir apparaître des erreurs de référence à &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt; .
En effaçant ou renommant le fichier &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; , vous corrigerez cette erreur.  Le fichier &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; , qui est aussi dans le répertoire racine de MediaWiki, peut servir de modèle au cas où vous activeriez le profiling à l'avenir.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23 abandonne le mécanisme de découverte automatique des fichiers d'habillage embarqués. Après la mise à jour vers cette version, vous devez vérifier directement que les anciens fichiers &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; dans le répertoire &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; de même que les sous-répertoires correspondants dans &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;, ont été supprimés. MédiaWiki enregistrera les avertissements si certains d'entre-eux sont encore présents, pour vous aider à vous en souvenir (vous aurez aussi besoin d'ajuster les habillages personnalisés pour suivre une convention similaire). Voir {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} pour les détails.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 modifie les chemins des fichiers d'habillage système. Après avoir fait la mise à jour vers cette version, vous devez vérifier directement que les anciens fichiers &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; du répertoire &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; , ne sont plus présents. Voir {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} pour les détails.

== Mettre à jour les extensions ==

Certaines extensions ont été mises à jour pour fonctionner avec la nouvelle version de MediaWiki. Vérifiez de que vous utilisez bien la dernière version de ces extensions. Il est possible que vous ayez à faire les mises à jour manuellement pour les extensions personnalisées.

Les différentes [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|archives de distribution .tar]] contiennent quelques sous-ensembles des extensions ainsi qu'un numéro de version pour vous aider à mettre à jour en choisissant celui compatible avec la version de votre coeur de système MédiaWiki.

L'[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|extension Distributor]] fonctionne bien pour la plupart des personnes qui veulent une capture des extensions compatible avec les versions que leur  MédiaWiki peut supporter.

Si vous désirez beaucoup d'extensions alors le [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|téléchargement à partir de Git]] est probablement la meilleure chose.
Si vous ne possédez pas Git et voulez mettre à jour un grand nombre d'extensions, vous pouvez utiliser [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].

== Adaptez votre LocalSettings.php ==

Si vous utilisez le &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; de l'ancienne version, il est possible que vous deviez l'adapter en fonction de l'utilisation qu'en fait la nouvelle version :

=== Enregistrement de l'habillage ===

Depuis MediaWiki 1.24, les habillages embarqués tels que Vector, Monobook, Modern et CologneBlue ne font plus partie du coeur de MediaWiki, et ils doivent être enregistrés explicitement dans &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; pour pouvoir être utilisés, sinon MediaWiki vous avertira que vous n'avez pas installé ces habillages.

Voici ce que vous devez ajouter à &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; quand vous mettez à jour à partir d'une version plus ancienne que la 1.24 et que vous voulez mettre à disposition l'un des habillages suivants :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Les autres habillages peuvent encore ne pas avoir été adaptés au nouveau système d'[[Manual:Extension registration|enregistrement des habillages]], aussi reportez-vous à la page de documentation de chacun d'eux pour voir comment l'enregistrer proprement en cas de problème.

=== Enregistrement d'extension ===

Depuis MediaWiki 1.25, les extensions utilisent un nouveau système d'[[Manual:Extension registration|enregistrement des extensions]] .

Auparavant votre &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; aurait inclus quelque chose comme :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Cela peut être converti en :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Nous sommes en train d'adapter les extensions pour utiliser le nouveau système d'enregistrement.
Les extensions qui ne sont pas adaptées doivent utiliser l'ancienne méthode d'installation.
Reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation sur la page des extensions pour plus d'information.

=== Autres variables ===
Certaines variables peuvent être obsolètes ou même avoir été retirées.
Le fait de les avoir dans &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; n'a habituellement pas de conséquences.
De nouvelles variables peuvent être ajoutées dans les versions les plus récentes, ou certaines variables peuvent voir leur type modifié.
D'ordinaire, nous essayons d'utiliser pour elles, des valeurs saines par défaut, et dans le cas d'une modification de type, de conserver la compatibilité ascendante.
Dans tous les cas, lisez les notes de livraison pour voir ces changements.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Exécuter le script de mise à jour ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
Vous pouvez mettre à jour la base de données MediaWiki de deux manières : soit à partir de la ligne de commande, soit à partir du navigateur web. Si vous avez accès au shell de votre serveur, la mise à jour à partir de la ligne de commande est recommandée, car cela réduit le risque que le processus de mise à jour soit interrompu par un dépassement de temps ou par la reinitialisation de la connexion.

Le script essayera aussi de télécharger toute dépendance manquante dont MediaWiki aurait besoin.

=== Ligne de commande ===

Allez à la ligne de commande sur votre serveur, ou par shell SSH ou équivalent. Vous pouvez accéder à la ligne de commande en vous connectant sur votre serveur par SSH. Si le PC local à partir duquel vous travaillez est sous Microsoft Windows, vous aurez besoin d'un outil tel que [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] pour utiliser SSH. A partir de la ligne de commande ou du shell, placez-vous dans le répertoire &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; et exécutez le [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|script de mise à jour]]:

 $ php update.php

Sur un serveur Linux, si vous obtenez une erreur, essayez d'exécuter la même commande en tant que root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Notez pour les installations simples sous Windows (par exemple avec {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
D'abord s'assurer que votre serveur web (comme Apache) et que votre base de données (comme MySQL) sont montés (accessibles).
Ensuite exécutez &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt; : cliquez-droit dessus, sélectionnez « Ouvrir avec », et accédez à PHP.exe .
La fenêtre de dialogue de la commande résultante se fermera vraisemblablement automatiquement quand la mise à jour du schéma sera terminée.

Vous pourriez voir un message indiquant que votre version de PHP est trop ancienne et que MediaWiki en réclame une version plus récente.
Après ce message, la mise à jour s'arrête.
Le motif de cette erreur est que la ligne de commande peut utiliser une autre version de PHP que celle que vous avez quand vous exécutez MediaWiki à partir du serveur web.
Quand ce message apparaît, vérifiez si vous pouvez exécuter une nouvelle version de PHP dans le shell en utilisant une commande différente : ceci pourrait être par exemple ''php5'' ou ''php56''.
La disponibilité d'une autre version et son nom (si elle est installée), dépendent de la configuration de votre serveur.
Si cela ne fonctionne pas, demandez à votre hébergeur; il saura sûrement.

MediaWiki va scruter le schéma existant et le mettre à jour pour qu'il puisse travailler avec le nouveau code, en ajoutant des tables et des colonnes en fonction des besoins.

{{Note|1=Si vous utilisez une [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|base de données partagée]], vous devez passer le paramètre &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; si vous voulez que les tables partagées soient mises à jour. Sinon elles ne resteront inchangées par le script de mise à jour.}}

==== Que faire si le fichier php update.php échoue dans une action, résultant en un bref arrêt avant de retourner à l'invite de commande ====

Ceci peut être causé par une extension ou un habillage défaillant.

* Vérifiez que toutes les extensions ainsi que tous les habilages appelés dans LocalSettings.php sont présents
* Vérifiez que les extensions utilisent la méthode d'enregistrement correcte (wfLoadExtension avec require_once)
* Commentez la première moitié des extensions en LocalSettings.php. Si cela fait fonctionner update.php, décommentez la moitié de cette moitié (donc 1/4 des extensions). Si cela ne fait PAS fonctionner update.php, décommentez la première moitié mais commentez la seconde moitié, puis commentez la moitié de la seconde moitié, etc. Recommencer jusqu'à ce que update.php fonctionne pour trouver celui qui échoue.

==== Que faire en cas d'erreur &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; (ou similaire) ====

Dans le cas où le script échoue avec un message similaire à :

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

Cela signifie que vous devez vérifier d'avoir bien défini {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} et {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} dans votre fichier {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} (dans le répertoire principal). C'est l'utilisateur et le mot de passe nécessaire au script pour accéder à la base de données.

Dans certains cas, une ancienne variable $wgDBmwschema (pour Postgres) semble être lue pour le nom de la table au lieu de $wgDBname, même quand MySQL est utilisé. Dans ce cas, supprimez simplement la définition de $wgDBmwschema dans LocalSettings.php.

==== Que faire en cas d'erreur &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; ====

Les utilisateurs qui exécutent update.php individuellement à partir de leur ligne de commande peuvent rencontrer l'erreur suivante :

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

Cette erreur apparait quand vous exécutez update.php sous php4.

Les personnes qui ont leur site hébergé chez des fournisseurs qui mettent à disposition à la fois php4 et php5, doivent suivre les étapes suivantes :

# sur la ligne de commande, entrez 'whereis php5'
# dès que vous avez identifié le chemin vers php5, affichez le contennu du répertoire php5/bin
# une fois le nom de l'exécutable php trouvé (php ou php5), entrez le chemin complet pour exécuter update.php

Voici un exemple :

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

==== Que faire en cas d'erreur 'register_argc_argv is set to false' =====

Vous pouvez rencontrer cette erreur :
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Allez dans ~/maintenance. Modifiez un fichier 'php.ini' existant, ou créez-en un. 
# Ajoutez une ligne comme ceci :

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Réexécutez &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
=== Navigateur web ===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Voir aussi {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Si votre base de données est déja imposante et utilisée à un haut niveau, alors il ne faut pas utiliser la mise à jour par le web, par exemple parceque le processus de mise à jour vas échouer faute de temps suffisant quand le ''maximum_execution_time'' sera atteint. Dans ce cas vous devez utiliser [[update.php]] à partir de l'interface ligne de commande (pas à partir du web). Que signifie exactement &quot;imposante&quot;, cela dépend de votre serveur (par exemple de ses performances, de la charge et du temps maximal d'exécution que PHP attribue à l'exécution du script). Si votre wiki est trop gros pour la mise à jour par web et que votre fournisseur d'hébergement n'autorise pas l'accès aux commandes en mode ligne, alors vous devez migrer votre wiki vers un autre compte d'hébergement possédant - lui - un accès réel au shell.

# Faites toujours une [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|copie de sauvegarde]] (back up) avant la maintenance de la base de données.
# Naviguez dans votre navigateur Web jusqu'à &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;. Par exemple, si votre wiki est à &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, alors naviguez jusqu'à &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
# Choisissez votre langue et cliquez sur continuer.
# L'installation existante devrait être détectée. Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour en faire la mise à jour.&lt;br/&gt;Si la &quot;clé de mise à jour&quot; est demandée, ouvrez votre fichier {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} et cherchez la valeur assignée à {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.

Il peut arriver que la mise à jour par web semble ne pas fonctionner : au lieu de voir le menu initial de l'écran de sélection de langue, vous pouvez obtenir une page wiki vide, avec éventuellement des messages d'erreur. Dans ce cas il est probable que votre serveur web utilise les règles de réécriture (- Rewrite Rules - probablment pour les [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|URLs courtes]]), qui ne vous montrent pas le moteur de mise à jour dans ''mw-config/'', mais sur une page wiki à ''Mw-config/'', avec un &quot;M&quot; majuscule. Dans ce cas, renommez le fichier ''.htaccess'' pour le temps de la mise à jour. Vous devriez ensuite pouvoir accéder à la mise à jour par web.

{{Warning|1=Si vous suivez cette méthode, assurez-vous de '''re-changer le nom du fichier .htaccess''' après avoir lancé le script de mise à jour! Sinon les URLs courtes et peut être aussi d'autres éléments pourraient être cassés.}}

== Tester la mise à jour ==

Une fois que la mise à jour s'est terminée, explorez le wiki et vérifiez que les opérations suivantes s'exécutent comme désiré :

* afficher des pages
* modifier des pages
* téléverser un fichier
* consultez [[Special:Version]] et vérifiez que la version affichée est correcte et que les extensions sont présentes.

== Supprimer ce qui reste des anciennes installations ==
Si vous avez recopié votre ancienne installation dans un autre répertoire du serveur, vérifiez que vous avez bien supprimé le dossier initial ou rendez le complètement inaccessible du web.
Il est très important de ne pas laisser les anciennes installations accessibles à partir du web parce que cela nuit au principe de la mise à jour et laisse votre serveur ouvert aux attaques.

== Foire aux questions ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
=== Quelles sont les difficultés lors de la mise à jour ? ===

Si le seul fichier que vous avez modifié est {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, et que vous faites la mise à jour de la 1.5 ou ultérieure, le processus est très simple. La quantité de travail à fournir par un humain n'est que de quelques minutes. Les modifications du schéma de la base de données prendront un temps proportionnel à la taille de votre base de données — potentiellement des heures pour les wikis avec des millions de pages, mais pour des tailles plus typiques de quelques milliers de pages, cela prendra habituellement quelques secondes.

Les mises à jour mineures, à l'intérieur de la même version majeure, disons de la {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 vers la {{MW legacy release number}}, ne nécessitent aucune modification du schema.
Il vous suffit de mettre à jour les fichiers. La base de données n'a pas à être mise à jour, et donc il n'est pas nécessaire de lancer le script de mise à jour.

Faire la mise à jour de la 1.4 ou antérieure est potentiellement compliqué car la prise en charge des familles de caractères autres que UTF-8 a été sautée, et le schéma pour ranger du texte en masse a changé. Veuillez lire la section correspondante du fichier &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; .

La mise à jour devient difficile si vous avez modifié notre code source, et que vous ne voulez pas que vos modifications soient écrasées. Les outils tels que [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] ou [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] peuvent vous être utiles. Il y a aussi des risques de perturbation si vous utilisez des extensions qui n'ont pas été maintenues. Mettez à jour vos extensions au même moment que vous mettez à jour MediaWiki.

Si vous avez modifié l'habillage, ou si vous utilisez un habillage personnalisé, vous devrez probablement l'ajuster pour le rendre compatible avec la nouvelle version de MédiaWiki.

{{Tip|1=Au lieu de patcher votre css &quot;global&quot; et les fichiers js (javascript) à chaque fois, vous pouvez simplement ajouter le code à votre MediaWiki:Common.js et vos pages MediaWiki:Common.css. Comme ceux-ci font partie de la base de données qui sera réutilisée dans la mise à jour, vous n'aurez plus à patcher les fichiers du coeur de MediaWiki.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== Que faire si je mets à jour à partir d'une très vieille version ? En une étape ou en plusieurs ? ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Cela dépend: si vous effectuez une '''mise à niveau à partir de MediaWiki version 1.4 ou antérieure''', vous devez commencer par effectuer une mise à niveau vers MediaWiki 1.5. Si vous mettez à niveau à partir d'un wiki Latin-1, utilisez upgrade1_5.php (présent dans MediaWiki 1.5) pour convertir en UTF-8 les parties pertinentes de la base de données ($latin doit être défini à true dans vos $localsettings pour que cela fonctionne). Ensuite, exécutez update.php, puis initialisez l’option $legacy dans LocalSettings.php avec la valeur du codage précédemment utilisé par le wiki (par exemple, windows-1252). C’est en gros la manière dont Wikipedia et d’autres sites de la Wikimedia Foundation ont été mis à niveau de MediaWiki 1.4 à 1.5 - voir le [$noc fichier des paramètres pertinents (attention: page très grande!)] et quelques [[$wikitech|notes connexes sur Wikitech]]. Vous devrez peut-être mettre à niveau vers MediaWiki 1.4 avant d’exécuter le script upgrade1.5 .&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
Si vous voulez faire un vidage des tables de la base de données (par exemple MySQL) de votre wiki Latin-1, assurez-vous que le type du champ &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; de la table {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} vaut &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, et non pas  &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, pour éviter les problèmes d'encodage de caractères.

Si vous effectuez une '''mise à niveau à partir de MediaWiki 1.5 (ou plus récent)''' vers '''1.35''', vous pouvez faire la mise à niveau en une passe, de votre ancienne version vers la dernière version stable.
La grande majorité des rapports, ainsi que des tests automatisés, indiquent que le faire en une seule étape fonctionne parfaitement.
Si vous avez du mal à le croire, lisez [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|cet article de la liste de diffusion]].
Cependant, veuillez noter que lorsque vous mettez à jour à partir d'anciennes versions, les chances de rencontrer des erreurs PHP sont plus grandes que lorsque vous effectuez une mise à jour à partir de la version qui précède la nouvelle version.
Vous auriez de toute façon reçu ces erreurs si vous n'aviez pas sauté de versions, mais les erreurs auraient été associées à chaque mise à jour individuelle.
En revanche, si vous passez plusieurs versions d'un coup, vous obtiendrez les mêmes erreurs toutes en même temps.
Cela rendra la mise à jour plus difficile, mais n'oubliez pas que vous n'aurez pas de problème si vous mettez à jour les versions intermédiaires, que vous avez sautées!

Si vous faites la '''mise à jour vers MediaWiki 1.36''' ou ultérieure, seules les mises à jour à partir des deux dernières versions LTS sont prises en charge ([[phab:T259771]]). Cela signifie que pour les versions très anciennes, vous devrez d'abord passer en MediaWiki 1.35 puis en MediaWiki 1.36.

=== Dois-je faire une sauvegarde préalable ?===

Réponse courte : oui.

Réponse plus longue : cela dépend de a) la valeur que vous prêtez à vos données, b) la difficulté à créer une sauvegarde et c) l'expérience que vous avez en entretien et administration de MySQL. 

Une faute dans la mise à jour peut laisser votre base de données dans un état instable, entre deux versions.
Une erreur PHP ou MySQL pourrait survenir durant la mise à jour en laissant votre base de données partiellement traitée.
Dans de telles situations il est possible qu'une personne puisse corriger ce problème avec beaucoup de travail manuel.
Néanmoins, il serait ''plus facile'' de faire simplement une sauvegarde de la base de données juste avant de lancer update.php et de continuer avec.
Sinon vous y passeriez - inutilement - toutes vos heures de travail.

La récupération est souvent complexe.
Les bénévoles des forums de support ne se sentiront pas trop concernés si vous avez négligé de faire une sauvegarde et qu'ensuite vous avez besoin d'aide pour récupérer tout ce qui a été cassé par la mise à jour.
Une meilleure solution c'est, de réinstaller votre sauvegarde, puis de [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|signaler le bogue sur le projet MediaWiki correspondant]] dans le processus de mise à jour qui a causé le dysfonctionnement.

=== Puis-je conserver mon fichier LocalSettings.php ? ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Oui, mais il se peut que vous deviez faire quelques petits changements. Le format de $localsettings est fondamentalement compatible avec les versions précédentes. Les changements qui peuvent casser la compatibilité de Localsettings.php seront documentés dans la section &quot;Changements dans la configuration&quot; des [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|notes de version]].&lt;/span&gt;
Les changements qui peuvent casser la compatibilité de LocalSettings.php seront documentés dans la section &quot;Changements dans la configuration&quot; des [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|notes de version]].

=== Est-ce que mon wiki peut rester en ligne pendant la mise à jour ? ===

En général oui, néanmoins Git peut le casser temporairement (pendant quelques secondes).

Si vous mettez à jour entre des versions mineures de MediaWiki, il est uniquement nécessaire de mettre à jour les fichiers source.

Note : ce qui suit suppose que vous avez accès à la ligne de commande. Si vous êtes en train de mettre à jour entre des versions majeures de MediaWiki, la procédure recommandée est la suivante :

# Décompressez la nouvelle version de MediaWiki dans un nouveau dossier
# Préparez ce nouveau dossier : copiez votre LocalSettings.php actuel de l'ancien répertoire, ainsi que les extensions et les habillages personnalisés que vous pouvez avoir installés(s'il y en a). Vérifiez les paramètres {{wg|Logo}} et {{wg|Logos}} dans LocalSettings.php et, si nécessaire, copiez le fichier logo de l'ancien répertoire vers le nouveau répertoire.
# Dans les notes de version pour la nouvelle version, vérifiez s'il faut faire des modifications dans LocalSettings.php.
# Mettez la base de données en lecture seule en insérant la variable suivante dans LocalSettings.php de l'ancien répertoire; les utilisateurs verront ce message s'ils essaient de modifier une page pendant le processus de mise à jour :&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Ceci n'est plus fonctionnel depuis MediaWiki 1.27, ce qui empêche aussi d'exécuter le script de mise à jour. Une solution de contournement pour les versions après la 1.27 peut être trouvée dans {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. Voir aussi {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Exécutez le [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|script de mise à jour]] ou via l'interface web dans le nouveau dossier.
# Copiez les images du sous-dossier d'images de l'ancien répertoire vers le nouveau.
# Permutez l'ancien répertoire avec le nouveau.

=== Pourquoi mettre à jour ? ===
:''Abonnez-vous à la liste [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] pour être notifié des nouvelles versions.''

Parce que c'est [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|habituellement assez facile]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|une seule étape de votre version à la dernière]] et aussi [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via le web]].

Les versions récentes reçoivent des correctifs de sécurité pour protéger votre wiki et votre hôte des vandales, ce qui n'est pas le cas des anciennes versions (voir {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). Ce qui vous donne des dizaines de bonnes raisons pour faire la mise à jour!

Les nouvelles versions majeures sont livrées avec de nouvelles fonctions que vous pourriez utiliser: voir la bulletin de livraison pour les détails. Dans le cas où vous auriez besoin de détails supplémentaires pour convaincre vos chefs de vous laisser faire la mise à jour d'une version viellotte, voici un résumé :

* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, vous pouvez avoir un [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|aperçu des modifications avant sauvegarde]] aussi sous forme de différentiel.
* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, un [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|bouton annuler]] est disponible.
* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, le [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] des [[Special:NewPages]] est beaucoup plus facile.
* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, vous pouvez [[$3|renommer]] (déplacer) les fichiers.
* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, vous pouvez [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|corriger les doubles redirections]] automatiquement.
* Depuis la {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} est disponible.
* Si vous avez un mécanisme de cache adapté, depuis la 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimise beaucoup la vitesse de chargement des pages.
* Depuis la 1.17, le [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|tri sur les catégories a un sens!]] (particulièrement pour les lettres non anglaises); étendu à 68 langues après {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} et {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, les utilisateurs de toutes les langues ainsi que les genres sont correctement adressés par l'interface ainsi que dans les [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|journaux]] (avant la 1.15, les genres n'existaient pas du tout).
* Dans la {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} le système d'habillage a été recodé rendant plus facile la réutilisation des parties d'habillages existants dans vos propres habillages.
* Depuis la [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], les [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] sont plus lisibles.
* Dans la [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] et la [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], les notifications par courriel sont plus claires et plus prévisibles, rendant votre wiki plus efficace.
* Depuis la [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], la chasse aux vandales (patrolling) demmande moins de temps pour s'exécuter.
* Dans la [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], l'enregistrement des mots de passe a été amélioré pour permettre une meilleure sécurité.
* A partir de la [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], des  [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|modifications récentes élargies sont disponibles]]
* En [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], le [[ResourceLoader|fonctionnement du &quot;ResourceLoader&quot; a été amélioré]]
* Dans la [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], la gestion des sessions a été recodée tout comme la gestion de l'authentification des utilisateurs qui a été complètement modernisée. InstantCommons n'a plus besoin de fichiers en local.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, le cache du HTML généré pour les pages d'articles a été amélioré.
* Depuis la {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, l'API Action a été recodée et améliorée. Egalement, les permissions du groupe des utilisateurs peuvent maintenant être faites pour une période définissable. Permet de bloquer une plage d'adresses IP.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, les utilisateurs bloqués ne peuvent pas modifier leur adresse courriel. La possibilité de rechercher les contributions à l'intérieur d'intervalles d'adresses IP dans les Special:Contributions a été ajoutée.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, quelques extensions font maintenant partie du noyau, telles {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}. La {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} a été présentée. La limite du taux par défaut de 90 modifications par minute a été ajoutée à tous les utilisateurs.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki prend en charge plus de 350 langues.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki prend en charge les « blocages partiels » , où les adresses IP et les comptes peuvent être restreints quant à la modification des pages ou d'espaces de noms particuliers.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, davantage d'extensions font partie du noyau : {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (pour les modules Lua), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (version LTS stable), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} est une partie du noyau. La fonctionnalité de '''suivi''' peut être enrichie avec les dates d'expiration.

Egalement, à partir de {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} nous commençons à [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|embarquer quelques extensions vitales]], comme un  meilleur éditeur et les outils anti-vandales ConfirmEdit and Nuke; d'autres extensions ont été ajoutées dans les dernières versions.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Voir aussi ==

* Un article du blog de Greg Sabino Mullane offre [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html plus de détails sur les mises à jour mineures].
* Le [[Project:Support desk|support]] si vous avez besoin d'aide ou si quelque chose s'est mal passé
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - si votre sauvegarde ne s'est pas bien réalisée
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>kgs98kvde62e7qoziwg1qn67l7ab4bb</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402954</id>
      <parentid>5402952</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:42:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="46459" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Présentation générale ==

=== Transfert de fichiers ===

Choisissez une méthode pour transférer les fichiers :

* [[w:fr:GNU Wget|wget]]
* Copie sécurisée avec [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] ou [[w:fr:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:fr:SSH File Transfer Protocol|Protocole de transfert de fichiers SSH]] (SFTP)
* Utiliser un client [[w:fr:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]].
* Votre hébergeur peut mettre à disposition un gestionnaire de fichiers en ligne, vérifiez auprès de votre hébergeur.
* Une autre méthode. Voir [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

=== Préalable ===

Lisez {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=le fichier texte UPGRADE inclus dans MediaWiki}}.

# Vérifiez les prérequis
# Lire le fichier RELEASE-NOTES
# Lire le fichier UPGRADE
# Sauvegardez les fichiers existants et la base de données
# Décompressez les nouveaux fichiers
# Mettez à jour les extensions
# Exécutez le script de mise à jour pour vérifier la base de données
# Testez la mise à jour
# Supprimer ce qui reste des anciennes installations

== Vérifier les paramètres nécessaires == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} nécessite :

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* L'une des options suivantes :
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Depuis la version 1.36, MediaWiki ne valide que la prise en charge des mises à jour des deux dernières versions LTS (voir [[phab:T259771]]). Les mises à jour à partir de versions plus anciennes de MediaWiki devront se faire en plusieurs étapes.
Cela signifie que si vous voulez mettre à jour à partir de la 1.23 (ou plus ancienne) vers la 1.36, vous devrez d'abord faire la mise à jour de votre wiki 1.23 vers la 1.27 (ou 1.35), puis à partir de la 1.27 (ou la 1.35), vous pourrez faire la mise à jour vers la 1.36.

Si vous utilisez PostgreSQL, veuillez lire également {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}} .

Pour plus d'information, lisez {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} et {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Lisez les notes de version ==
Dans l'archive de l'installation ou dans les fichiers copiés/exportés de [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] sont présents des fichiers nommés en majuscules dont l'un contient les notes de version '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Il est maintenant temps de l'ouvrir et de rechercher ce qui a changé dans cette version.
Lisez également les instructions dans le fichier UPGRADE.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Vider la file des tâches en attente d'exécution ==
Pour des raisons de performance, certaines actions sur  la base de données sont retardées, et gérées par la [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|file des travaux]].
Ces tâches sont rangées dans la base de données et contiennent des paramètres avec les informations indiquant les actions à réaliser.
Il est vivement conseillé d'exécuter ces tâches en attente avant de faire la mise à jour du wiki, pour éviter qu'elles n'abortent dans le cas où la spécification des paramètres viendrait à changer d'une version à l'autre.
Utilisez {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} pour exécuter toutes les tâches en attente et vider la file d'attente avant de réaliser la mise à jour.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Sauvegarder les fichiers existants et la base de données ==

:''Instructions complètes : {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

Même si les scripts de mise à jour sont maintenus et robustes, les choses peuvent mal tourner. Avant de procéder à la mise à jour du schéma de base de données, '''faites une [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|sauvegarde]] complète''' du wiki, incluant à la fois la base de données et les fichiers :

* le contenu du wiki, en commençant par la base de données (assurez-vous de spécifier correctement le '''jeu de caractères''', vérifiez d'abord dans Localsettings.php). Il peut être utile de générer un export XML en plus de l'export SQL de la base de données.
:* MySQL, les deux exports SQL et XML sont à utiliser avec la commande &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; :
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, un export de la base de données à utiliser avec la commande &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; :
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, utilisez un script MediaWiki pour créer la sauvegarde :
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* les images et autres fichiers multimédia (le contenu du dossier &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;, logo personnalisé /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* les fichiers de configuration, comme par exemple &lt;code&gt;Localsettings.php&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (si présent)
* les fichiers du programme MediaWiki, en incluant tous les habillages et les extensions en particulier si vous les avez modifiés.

== Décompresser les nouveaux fichiers ==

=== Utiliser le paquet d'archive ===

Vous pouvez ramener les nouveaux fichiers en utilisant FTP ou la ligne de commande. Privilégiez la ligne de commande si vous y avez accès ! Celle-ci sera beaucoup plus rapide que de transférer les fichiers un à un parmi les milliers via FTP.

{{Note|1=Vous devriez extraire les fichiers de l'archive tarball dans un répertoire vide sur votre serveur. Si vous choisissez d'extraire l'archive de la nouvelle version directement à la racine de votre ancienne version, plutôt que dans un nouveau répertoire, suivez les instructions dans [[#Back up existing files and the database|Sauvegarde des fichiers existants et de la base de données]] sinon, les adaptations préalablement effectuées pourraient être perdues sans possibilité de les retrouver pour les ré-appliquer. Extraire l'archive à la racine de votre copie de production de MediaWiki risque de laisser derrière des fichiers de l'ancienne version de MediaWiki qui peuvent interférer avec le code mis à jour. Il est recommandé de décompresser les nouveaux fichiers dans un nouveau répertoire, et ensuite d'appliquer les modifications sur le nouveau répertoire (restaurer LocalSettings.php, le dossier des images, les extensions, et autres modifications comme les apparences personnalisées)}}

==== Client FTP ou interface graphique ====

Si vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le mode ligne sur votre serveur, téléchargez l'archive MediaWiki en local sur votre ordinateur et utilisez [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] pour extraire l'archive sur votre PC local.

Une fois les fichiers extraits localement, utilisez le client FTP de votre choix pour téléverser les dossiers et fichiers sur le serveur.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Ligne de commande ====
Il est possible que vous ayez à exécuter les commandes en tant que &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; si votre compte courant n'a pas toutes les permissions d'écriture dans le dossier d'installation du wiki.
Lors de l'extraction de l'archive tarball de MediaWiki normalement un nouveau dossier va se créer pour la nouvelle version de MediaWiki et vous devrez y copier les anciens fichiers de configuration et le dossier 'images' depuis le dossier où se trouve l'ancienne installation :

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

Les utilisateurs d'(Open)Solaris doivent utiliser &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt; ou :

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Autres fichiers ===

Après avoir extrait les archives, vous devez copier ou déplacer certains fichiers et dossiers depuis l'ancien répertoire d'installation vers le nouveau :
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - contient vos anciens paramètres de configuration.
* Le répertoire &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (ou &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; dans des versions antérieures), qui contient tous les fichiers hébergés sur le wiki, sauf si vous avez spécifié un dossier différent pour le téléversement des fichiers. Vous devrez changer le propriétaire et les permissions de façon appropriée, par exemple avec &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; si l'utilisateur web est ''apache''.
* Certaines extensions du répertoire &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;. Vous devriez toujours utiliser des versions actualisées des extensions ; il n'est pas garanti que les anciennes extensions fonctionnent avec une version plus récente de MediaWiki.
* Si utilisez un [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|logo personnalisé]], ce fichier doit aussi être restauré à partir de la sauvegarde. Avant la version 1.24 il se trouve habituellement dans &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. À partir de la version 1.24 il se trouve dans le dossier &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; ou dans &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; si vous avez préféré l'utiliser. Dans ce cas ajoutez-le dans Localsettings.php, par exemple avec &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
*Pour la 1.35 vous devrez peut-être restaurer les logos depuis [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]], et ensuite ajouter au LocalSettings.php &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; par exemple.
* Les habillages personnalisés au sein du répertoire &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;.
* Toutes modifications réalisées sur les anciens fichiers d'installation ou aux extensions.
* Les éventuels fichiers .htaccess (si vous utlisez Apache et que vous y avez défini des règles).

Une fois fait ceci, faites de ce nouveau dossier le dossier publié sur le serveur, ou renommez l'ancien dossier d'installation, et ensuite renommez le nouveau dossier pour qu'il coïncide avec l'ancien nom.

=== En utilisant Git ===

Si vous utilisez {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, exportez les fichiers dans un dossier vide et ensuite copiez uniquement les fichiers modifiés dans le nouveau répertoire comme détaillé dans la section précédente.

Vous devrez aussi installer certaines bibliothèques PHP externes en utilisant Composer ou une archive fournie maintenue pour la ferme de wikis Wikimedia.
Plus de détails sur l'installation et l'actualisation des bibliothèques externes se trouvent dans la [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|documentation de téléchargement Git]].

=== Utilisation de patch ===
Un petit fichier de patch est habituellement disponible pour une mise à jour de version mineure.
Vous devrez télécharger [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] pour utiliser ceci.
Téléchargez et extrayez manuellement le fichier patch depuis  [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ le site des archives] ou bien suivez les instructions utilisant wget ci-dessous.
Les patchs sont incrémentaux, vous '''ne''' pouvez '''pas''' ignorer une version.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; à votre répertoire principal MediaWiki (celui avec LocalSettings.php).
# Téléchargez le fichier de patch et faites un  &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; dessus.
# Utilisez &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; pour vérifier ce qui sera changé (''par exemple'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Si tout va bien, lancez &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; à nouveau sans &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
# Vérifiez votre Special:Version et vous devriez voir le nouveau numéro de version en place.

=== Fichiers restants susceptibles de provoquer des erreurs ===

Si vous installez dans le même répertoire que l'ancienne version, il est possible que les anciens fichiers causent des problèmes avec la nouvelle version.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Si vous n'utilisez pas [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], mais que vous avez un fichier &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; dans le répertoire racine de MediaWiki, vous pouvez voir apparaître des erreurs de référence à &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt; .
En effaçant ou renommant le fichier &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; , vous corrigerez cette erreur.  Le fichier &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; , qui est aussi dans le répertoire racine de MediaWiki, peut servir de modèle au cas où vous activeriez le profiling à l'avenir.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23 abandonne le mécanisme de découverte automatique des fichiers d'habillage embarqués. Après la mise à jour vers cette version, vous devez vérifier directement que les anciens fichiers &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; dans le répertoire &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; de même que les sous-répertoires correspondants dans &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;, ont été supprimés. MédiaWiki enregistrera les avertissements si certains d'entre-eux sont encore présents, pour vous aider à vous en souvenir (vous aurez aussi besoin d'ajuster les habillages personnalisés pour suivre une convention similaire). Voir {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} pour les détails.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 modifie les chemins des fichiers d'habillage système. Après avoir fait la mise à jour vers cette version, vous devez vérifier directement que les anciens fichiers &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; du répertoire &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; , ne sont plus présents. Voir {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} pour les détails.

== Mettre à jour les extensions ==

Certaines extensions ont été mises à jour pour fonctionner avec la nouvelle version de MediaWiki. Vérifiez de que vous utilisez bien la dernière version de ces extensions. Il est possible que vous ayez à faire les mises à jour manuellement pour les extensions personnalisées.

Les différentes [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|archives de distribution .tar]] contiennent quelques sous-ensembles des extensions ainsi qu'un numéro de version pour vous aider à mettre à jour en choisissant celui compatible avec la version de votre coeur de système MédiaWiki.

L'[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|extension Distributor]] fonctionne bien pour la plupart des personnes qui veulent une capture des extensions compatible avec les versions que leur  MédiaWiki peut supporter.

Si vous désirez beaucoup d'extensions alors le [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|téléchargement à partir de Git]] est probablement la meilleure chose.
Si vous ne possédez pas Git et voulez mettre à jour un grand nombre d'extensions, vous pouvez utiliser [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].

== Adaptez votre LocalSettings.php ==

Si vous utilisez le &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; de l'ancienne version, il est possible que vous deviez l'adapter en fonction de l'utilisation qu'en fait la nouvelle version :

=== Enregistrement de l'habillage ===

Depuis MediaWiki 1.24, les habillages embarqués tels que Vector, Monobook, Modern et CologneBlue ne font plus partie du coeur de MediaWiki, et ils doivent être enregistrés explicitement dans &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; pour pouvoir être utilisés, sinon MediaWiki vous avertira que vous n'avez pas installé ces habillages.

Voici ce que vous devez ajouter à &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; quand vous mettez à jour à partir d'une version plus ancienne que la 1.24 et que vous voulez mettre à disposition l'un des habillages suivants :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Les autres habillages peuvent encore ne pas avoir été adaptés au nouveau système d'[[Manual:Extension registration|enregistrement des habillages]], aussi reportez-vous à la page de documentation de chacun d'eux pour voir comment l'enregistrer proprement en cas de problème.

=== Enregistrement d'extension ===

Depuis MediaWiki 1.25, les extensions utilisent un nouveau système d'[[Manual:Extension registration|enregistrement des extensions]] .

Auparavant votre &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; aurait inclus quelque chose comme :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Cela peut être converti en :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Nous sommes en train d'adapter les extensions pour utiliser le nouveau système d'enregistrement.
Les extensions qui ne sont pas adaptées doivent utiliser l'ancienne méthode d'installation.
Reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation sur la page des extensions pour plus d'information.

=== Autres variables ===
Certaines variables peuvent être obsolètes ou même avoir été retirées.
Le fait de les avoir dans &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; n'a habituellement pas de conséquences.
De nouvelles variables peuvent être ajoutées dans les versions les plus récentes, ou certaines variables peuvent voir leur type modifié.
D'ordinaire, nous essayons d'utiliser pour elles, des valeurs saines par défaut, et dans le cas d'une modification de type, de conserver la compatibilité ascendante.
Dans tous les cas, lisez les notes de livraison pour voir ces changements.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Exécuter le script de mise à jour ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
Vous pouvez mettre à jour la base de données MediaWiki de deux manières : soit à partir de la ligne de commande, soit à partir du navigateur web. Si vous avez accès au shell de votre serveur, la mise à jour à partir de la ligne de commande est recommandée, car cela réduit le risque que le processus de mise à jour soit interrompu par un dépassement de temps ou par la reinitialisation de la connexion.

Le script essayera aussi de télécharger toute dépendance manquante dont MediaWiki aurait besoin.

=== Ligne de commande ===

Allez à la ligne de commande sur votre serveur, ou par shell SSH ou équivalent. Vous pouvez accéder à la ligne de commande en vous connectant sur votre serveur par SSH. Si le PC local à partir duquel vous travaillez est sous Microsoft Windows, vous aurez besoin d'un outil tel que [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] pour utiliser SSH. A partir de la ligne de commande ou du shell, placez-vous dans le répertoire &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; et exécutez le [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|script de mise à jour]]:

 $ php update.php

Sur un serveur Linux, si vous obtenez une erreur, essayez d'exécuter la même commande en tant que root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Notez pour les installations simples sous Windows (par exemple avec {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
D'abord s'assurer que votre serveur web (comme Apache) et que votre base de données (comme MySQL) sont montés (accessibles).
Ensuite exécutez &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt; : cliquez-droit dessus, sélectionnez « Ouvrir avec », et accédez à PHP.exe .
La fenêtre de dialogue de la commande résultante se fermera vraisemblablement automatiquement quand la mise à jour du schéma sera terminée.

Vous pourriez voir un message indiquant que votre version de PHP est trop ancienne et que MediaWiki en réclame une version plus récente.
Après ce message, la mise à jour s'arrête.
Le motif de cette erreur est que la ligne de commande peut utiliser une autre version de PHP que celle que vous avez quand vous exécutez MediaWiki à partir du serveur web.
Quand ce message apparaît, vérifiez si vous pouvez exécuter une nouvelle version de PHP dans le shell en utilisant une commande différente : ceci pourrait être par exemple ''php5'' ou ''php56''.
La disponibilité d'une autre version et son nom (si elle est installée), dépendent de la configuration de votre serveur.
Si cela ne fonctionne pas, demandez à votre hébergeur; il saura sûrement.

MediaWiki va scruter le schéma existant et le mettre à jour pour qu'il puisse travailler avec le nouveau code, en ajoutant des tables et des colonnes en fonction des besoins.

{{Note|1=Si vous utilisez une [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|base de données partagée]], vous devez passer le paramètre &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; si vous voulez que les tables partagées soient mises à jour. Sinon elles ne resteront inchangées par le script de mise à jour.}}

==== Que faire si le fichier php update.php échoue dans une action, résultant en un bref arrêt avant de retourner à l'invite de commande ====

Ceci peut être causé par une extension ou un habillage défaillant.

* Vérifiez que toutes les extensions ainsi que tous les habilages appelés dans LocalSettings.php sont présents
* Vérifiez que les extensions utilisent la méthode d'enregistrement correcte (wfLoadExtension avec require_once)
* Commentez la première moitié des extensions en LocalSettings.php. Si cela fait fonctionner update.php, décommentez la moitié de cette moitié (donc 1/4 des extensions). Si cela ne fait PAS fonctionner update.php, décommentez la première moitié mais commentez la seconde moitié, puis commentez la moitié de la seconde moitié, etc. Recommencer jusqu'à ce que update.php fonctionne pour trouver celui qui échoue.

==== Que faire en cas d'erreur &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; (ou similaire) ====

Dans le cas où le script échoue avec un message similaire à :

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

Cela signifie que vous devez vérifier d'avoir bien défini {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} et {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} dans votre fichier {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} (dans le répertoire principal). C'est l'utilisateur et le mot de passe nécessaire au script pour accéder à la base de données.

Dans certains cas, une ancienne variable $wgDBmwschema (pour Postgres) semble être lue pour le nom de la table au lieu de $wgDBname, même quand MySQL est utilisé. Dans ce cas, supprimez simplement la définition de $wgDBmwschema dans LocalSettings.php.

==== Que faire en cas d'erreur &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; ====

Les utilisateurs qui exécutent update.php individuellement à partir de leur ligne de commande peuvent rencontrer l'erreur suivante :

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

Cette erreur apparait quand vous exécutez update.php sous php4.

Les personnes qui ont leur site hébergé chez des fournisseurs qui mettent à disposition à la fois php4 et php5, doivent suivre les étapes suivantes :

# sur la ligne de commande, entrez 'whereis php5'
# dès que vous avez identifié le chemin vers php5, affichez le contennu du répertoire php5/bin
# une fois le nom de l'exécutable php trouvé (php ou php5), entrez le chemin complet pour exécuter update.php

Voici un exemple :

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

==== Que faire en cas d'erreur 'register_argc_argv is set to false' =====

Vous pouvez rencontrer cette erreur :
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Allez dans ~/maintenance. Modifiez un fichier 'php.ini' existant, ou créez-en un. 
# Ajoutez une ligne comme ceci :

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Réexécutez &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
=== Navigateur web ===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Voir aussi {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Si votre base de données est déja imposante et utilisée à un haut niveau, alors il ne faut pas utiliser la mise à jour par le web, par exemple parceque le processus de mise à jour vas échouer faute de temps suffisant quand le ''maximum_execution_time'' sera atteint. Dans ce cas vous devez utiliser [[update.php]] à partir de l'interface ligne de commande (pas à partir du web). Que signifie exactement &quot;imposante&quot;, cela dépend de votre serveur (par exemple de ses performances, de la charge et du temps maximal d'exécution que PHP attribue à l'exécution du script). Si votre wiki est trop gros pour la mise à jour par web et que votre fournisseur d'hébergement n'autorise pas l'accès aux commandes en mode ligne, alors vous devez migrer votre wiki vers un autre compte d'hébergement possédant - lui - un accès réel au shell.

# Faites toujours une [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|copie de sauvegarde]] (back up) avant la maintenance de la base de données.
# Naviguez dans votre navigateur Web jusqu'à &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;. Par exemple, si votre wiki est à &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, alors naviguez jusqu'à &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
# Choisissez votre langue et cliquez sur continuer.
# L'installation existante devrait être détectée. Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour en faire la mise à jour.&lt;br/&gt;Si la &quot;clé de mise à jour&quot; est demandée, ouvrez votre fichier {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} et cherchez la valeur assignée à {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.

Il peut arriver que la mise à jour par web semble ne pas fonctionner : au lieu de voir le menu initial de l'écran de sélection de langue, vous pouvez obtenir une page wiki vide, avec éventuellement des messages d'erreur. Dans ce cas il est probable que votre serveur web utilise les règles de réécriture (- Rewrite Rules - probablment pour les [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|URLs courtes]]), qui ne vous montrent pas le moteur de mise à jour dans ''mw-config/'', mais sur une page wiki à ''Mw-config/'', avec un &quot;M&quot; majuscule. Dans ce cas, renommez le fichier ''.htaccess'' pour le temps de la mise à jour. Vous devriez ensuite pouvoir accéder à la mise à jour par web.

{{Warning|1=Si vous suivez cette méthode, assurez-vous de '''re-changer le nom du fichier .htaccess''' après avoir lancé le script de mise à jour! Sinon les URLs courtes et peut être aussi d'autres éléments pourraient être cassés.}}

== Tester la mise à jour ==

Une fois que la mise à jour s'est terminée, explorez le wiki et vérifiez que les opérations suivantes s'exécutent comme désiré :

* afficher des pages
* modifier des pages
* téléverser un fichier
* consultez [[Special:Version]] et vérifiez que la version affichée est correcte et que les extensions sont présentes.

== Supprimer ce qui reste des anciennes installations ==
Si vous avez recopié votre ancienne installation dans un autre répertoire du serveur, vérifiez que vous avez bien supprimé le dossier initial ou rendez le complètement inaccessible du web.
Il est très important de ne pas laisser les anciennes installations accessibles à partir du web parce que cela nuit au principe de la mise à jour et laisse votre serveur ouvert aux attaques.

== Foire aux questions ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
=== Quelles sont les difficultés lors de la mise à jour ? ===

Si le seul fichier que vous avez modifié est {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, et que vous faites la mise à jour de la 1.5 ou ultérieure, le processus est très simple. La quantité de travail à fournir par un humain n'est que de quelques minutes. Les modifications du schéma de la base de données prendront un temps proportionnel à la taille de votre base de données — potentiellement des heures pour les wikis avec des millions de pages, mais pour des tailles plus typiques de quelques milliers de pages, cela prendra habituellement quelques secondes.

Les mises à jour mineures, à l'intérieur de la même version majeure, disons de la {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 vers la {{MW legacy release number}}, ne nécessitent aucune modification du schema.
Il vous suffit de mettre à jour les fichiers. La base de données n'a pas à être mise à jour, et donc il n'est pas nécessaire de lancer le script de mise à jour.

Faire la mise à jour de la 1.4 ou antérieure est potentiellement compliqué car la prise en charge des familles de caractères autres que UTF-8 a été sautée, et le schéma pour ranger du texte en masse a changé. Veuillez lire la section correspondante du fichier &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; .

La mise à jour devient difficile si vous avez modifié notre code source, et que vous ne voulez pas que vos modifications soient écrasées. Les outils tels que [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] ou [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] peuvent vous être utiles. Il y a aussi des risques de perturbation si vous utilisez des extensions qui n'ont pas été maintenues. Mettez à jour vos extensions au même moment que vous mettez à jour MediaWiki.

Si vous avez modifié l'habillage, ou si vous utilisez un habillage personnalisé, vous devrez probablement l'ajuster pour le rendre compatible avec la nouvelle version de MédiaWiki.

{{Tip|1=Au lieu de patcher votre css &quot;global&quot; et les fichiers js (javascript) à chaque fois, vous pouvez simplement ajouter le code à votre MediaWiki:Common.js et vos pages MediaWiki:Common.css. Comme ceux-ci font partie de la base de données qui sera réutilisée dans la mise à jour, vous n'aurez plus à patcher les fichiers du coeur de MediaWiki.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== Que faire si je mets à jour à partir d'une très vieille version ? En une étape ou en plusieurs ? ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Cela dépend: si vous effectuez une '''mise à niveau à partir de MediaWiki version 1.4 ou antérieure''', vous devez commencer par effectuer une mise à niveau vers MediaWiki 1.5. Si vous mettez à niveau à partir d'un wiki Latin-1, utilisez upgrade1_5.php (présent dans MediaWiki 1.5) pour convertir en UTF-8 les parties pertinentes de la base de données ($latin doit être défini à true dans vos $localsettings pour que cela fonctionne). Ensuite, exécutez update.php, puis initialisez l’option $legacy dans LocalSettings.php avec la valeur du codage précédemment utilisé par le wiki (par exemple, windows-1252). C’est en gros la manière dont Wikipedia et d’autres sites de la Wikimedia Foundation ont été mis à niveau de MediaWiki 1.4 à 1.5 - voir le [$noc fichier des paramètres pertinents (attention: page très grande!)] et quelques [[$wikitech|notes connexes sur Wikitech]]. Vous devrez peut-être mettre à niveau vers MediaWiki 1.4 avant d’exécuter le script upgrade1.5 .&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
Si vous voulez faire un vidage des tables de la base de données (par exemple MySQL) de votre wiki Latin-1, assurez-vous que le type du champ &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; de la table {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} vaut &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, et non pas  &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, pour éviter les problèmes d'encodage de caractères.

Si vous effectuez une '''mise à niveau à partir de MediaWiki 1.5 (ou plus récent)''' vers '''1.35''', vous pouvez faire la mise à niveau en une passe, de votre ancienne version vers la dernière version stable.
La grande majorité des rapports, ainsi que des tests automatisés, indiquent que le faire en une seule étape fonctionne parfaitement.
Si vous avez du mal à le croire, lisez [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|cet article de la liste de diffusion]].
Cependant, veuillez noter que lorsque vous mettez à jour à partir d'anciennes versions, les chances de rencontrer des erreurs PHP sont plus grandes que lorsque vous effectuez une mise à jour à partir de la version qui précède la nouvelle version.
Vous auriez de toute façon reçu ces erreurs si vous n'aviez pas sauté de versions, mais les erreurs auraient été associées à chaque mise à jour individuelle.
En revanche, si vous passez plusieurs versions d'un coup, vous obtiendrez les mêmes erreurs toutes en même temps.
Cela rendra la mise à jour plus difficile, mais n'oubliez pas que vous n'aurez pas de problème si vous mettez à jour les versions intermédiaires, que vous avez sautées!

Si vous faites la '''mise à jour vers MediaWiki 1.36''' ou ultérieure, seules les mises à jour à partir des deux dernières versions LTS sont prises en charge ([[phab:T259771]]). Cela signifie que pour les versions très anciennes, vous devrez d'abord passer en MediaWiki 1.35 puis en MediaWiki 1.36.

=== Dois-je faire une sauvegarde préalable ?===

Réponse courte : oui.

Réponse plus longue : cela dépend de a) la valeur que vous prêtez à vos données, b) la difficulté à créer une sauvegarde et c) l'expérience que vous avez en entretien et administration de MySQL. 

Une faute dans la mise à jour peut laisser votre base de données dans un état instable, entre deux versions.
Une erreur PHP ou MySQL pourrait survenir durant la mise à jour en laissant votre base de données partiellement traitée.
Dans de telles situations il est possible qu'une personne puisse corriger ce problème avec beaucoup de travail manuel.
Néanmoins, il serait ''plus facile'' de faire simplement une sauvegarde de la base de données juste avant de lancer update.php et de continuer avec.
Sinon vous y passeriez - inutilement - toutes vos heures de travail.

La récupération est souvent complexe.
Les bénévoles des forums de support ne se sentiront pas trop concernés si vous avez négligé de faire une sauvegarde et qu'ensuite vous avez besoin d'aide pour récupérer tout ce qui a été cassé par la mise à jour.
Une meilleure solution c'est, de réinstaller votre sauvegarde, puis de [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|signaler le bogue sur le projet MediaWiki correspondant]] dans le processus de mise à jour qui a causé le dysfonctionnement.

=== Puis-je conserver mon fichier LocalSettings.php ? ===
Oui, mais il se peut que vous deviez faire quelques petits changements. Le format de {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} est fondamentalement compatible avec les versions précédentes.
Les changements qui peuvent casser la compatibilité de LocalSettings.php seront documentés dans la section &quot;Changements dans la configuration&quot; des [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|notes de version]].

=== Est-ce que mon wiki peut rester en ligne pendant la mise à jour ? ===

En général oui, néanmoins Git peut le casser temporairement (pendant quelques secondes).

Si vous mettez à jour entre des versions mineures de MediaWiki, il est uniquement nécessaire de mettre à jour les fichiers source.

Note : ce qui suit suppose que vous avez accès à la ligne de commande. Si vous êtes en train de mettre à jour entre des versions majeures de MediaWiki, la procédure recommandée est la suivante :

# Décompressez la nouvelle version de MediaWiki dans un nouveau dossier
# Préparez ce nouveau dossier : copiez votre LocalSettings.php actuel de l'ancien répertoire, ainsi que les extensions et les habillages personnalisés que vous pouvez avoir installés(s'il y en a). Vérifiez les paramètres {{wg|Logo}} et {{wg|Logos}} dans LocalSettings.php et, si nécessaire, copiez le fichier logo de l'ancien répertoire vers le nouveau répertoire.
# Dans les notes de version pour la nouvelle version, vérifiez s'il faut faire des modifications dans LocalSettings.php.
# Mettez la base de données en lecture seule en insérant la variable suivante dans LocalSettings.php de l'ancien répertoire; les utilisateurs verront ce message s'ils essaient de modifier une page pendant le processus de mise à jour :&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Ceci n'est plus fonctionnel depuis MediaWiki 1.27, ce qui empêche aussi d'exécuter le script de mise à jour. Une solution de contournement pour les versions après la 1.27 peut être trouvée dans {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. Voir aussi {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Exécutez le [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|script de mise à jour]] ou via l'interface web dans le nouveau dossier.
# Copiez les images du sous-dossier d'images de l'ancien répertoire vers le nouveau.
# Permutez l'ancien répertoire avec le nouveau.

=== Pourquoi mettre à jour ? ===
:''Abonnez-vous à la liste [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] pour être notifié des nouvelles versions.''

Parce que c'est [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|habituellement assez facile]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|une seule étape de votre version à la dernière]] et aussi [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via le web]].

Les versions récentes reçoivent des correctifs de sécurité pour protéger votre wiki et votre hôte des vandales, ce qui n'est pas le cas des anciennes versions (voir {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). Ce qui vous donne des dizaines de bonnes raisons pour faire la mise à jour!

Les nouvelles versions majeures sont livrées avec de nouvelles fonctions que vous pourriez utiliser: voir la bulletin de livraison pour les détails. Dans le cas où vous auriez besoin de détails supplémentaires pour convaincre vos chefs de vous laisser faire la mise à jour d'une version viellotte, voici un résumé :

* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, vous pouvez avoir un [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|aperçu des modifications avant sauvegarde]] aussi sous forme de différentiel.
* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, un [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|bouton annuler]] est disponible.
* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, le [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] des [[Special:NewPages]] est beaucoup plus facile.
* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, vous pouvez [[$3|renommer]] (déplacer) les fichiers.
* Depuis la {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, vous pouvez [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|corriger les doubles redirections]] automatiquement.
* Depuis la {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} est disponible.
* Si vous avez un mécanisme de cache adapté, depuis la 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimise beaucoup la vitesse de chargement des pages.
* Depuis la 1.17, le [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|tri sur les catégories a un sens!]] (particulièrement pour les lettres non anglaises); étendu à 68 langues après {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} et {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, les utilisateurs de toutes les langues ainsi que les genres sont correctement adressés par l'interface ainsi que dans les [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|journaux]] (avant la 1.15, les genres n'existaient pas du tout).
* Dans la {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} le système d'habillage a été recodé rendant plus facile la réutilisation des parties d'habillages existants dans vos propres habillages.
* Depuis la [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], les [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] sont plus lisibles.
* Dans la [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] et la [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], les notifications par courriel sont plus claires et plus prévisibles, rendant votre wiki plus efficace.
* Depuis la [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], la chasse aux vandales (patrolling) demmande moins de temps pour s'exécuter.
* Dans la [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], l'enregistrement des mots de passe a été amélioré pour permettre une meilleure sécurité.
* A partir de la [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], des  [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|modifications récentes élargies sont disponibles]]
* En [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], le [[ResourceLoader|fonctionnement du &quot;ResourceLoader&quot; a été amélioré]]
* Dans la [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], la gestion des sessions a été recodée tout comme la gestion de l'authentification des utilisateurs qui a été complètement modernisée. InstantCommons n'a plus besoin de fichiers en local.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, le cache du HTML généré pour les pages d'articles a été amélioré.
* Depuis la {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, l'API Action a été recodée et améliorée. Egalement, les permissions du groupe des utilisateurs peuvent maintenant être faites pour une période définissable. Permet de bloquer une plage d'adresses IP.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, les utilisateurs bloqués ne peuvent pas modifier leur adresse courriel. La possibilité de rechercher les contributions à l'intérieur d'intervalles d'adresses IP dans les Special:Contributions a été ajoutée.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, quelques extensions font maintenant partie du noyau, telles {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}. La {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} a été présentée. La limite du taux par défaut de 90 modifications par minute a été ajoutée à tous les utilisateurs.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki prend en charge plus de 350 langues.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki prend en charge les « blocages partiels » , où les adresses IP et les comptes peuvent être restreints quant à la modification des pages ou d'espaces de noms particuliers.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, davantage d'extensions font partie du noyau : {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (pour les modules Lua), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
* Depuis {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (version LTS stable), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} est une partie du noyau. La fonctionnalité de '''suivi''' peut être enrichie avec les dates d'expiration.

Egalement, à partir de {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} nous commençons à [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|embarquer quelques extensions vitales]], comme un  meilleur éditeur et les outils anti-vandales ConfirmEdit and Nuke; d'autres extensions ont été ajoutées dans les dernières versions.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Voir aussi ==

* Un article du blog de Greg Sabino Mullane offre [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html plus de détails sur les mises à jour mineures].
* Le [[Project:Support desk|support]] si vous avez besoin d'aide ou si quelque chose s'est mal passé
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - si votre sauvegarde ne s'est pas bien réalisée
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>t1ka1pt51g8pupzawng6dq9zabv63ya</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Installing MediaWiki/zh</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>30889</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402878</id>
      <parentid>5387509</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:41:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12641" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;如果没有 Apache, PHP 和 MySQL/MariaDB 的使用经验的话，安装 MediaWiki 可能会很吃力。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== 下载 MediaWiki 软件 ==

从 [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|official download page]]下载MediaWiki tar文件

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally, if you're using a production environment, you want to be running the latest stable release, which is MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extract the MediaWiki software ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;下载的文件是 &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt; 格式，所以在使用前需要先从压缩文件中提取。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to uncompress this archive file before use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;可以在本地提取并上传到服务器，或者上传压缩包然后在服务器上提取，或者直接在服务器上下载并提取.&lt;/span&gt;

在Windows上，这通常由[https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip]（免费）、[http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip]、[https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR]或[https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc]（免费）来完成。

Linux 和 macOS 系统上可以通过这个命令来提取：
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

==上传文件到你的服务器==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
如果尚未将文件上载到Web服务器，请立即执行此操作。
&lt;/div&gt;

通过以下方式将文件上传到Web服务器的Web目录：

# 直接复制解压的文件夹或
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
#使用FTP客户端，如[https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla]（开源软件、Windows、OSX和Linux）或[https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck]（OSX）。
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;by using software already provided by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting service]], such as the ''cPanel File Manager''&lt;/span&gt;

如果您的上传工具有“将文件名更改为小写”选项，则必须禁用此选项。

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;如果您安装了Apache，则会在&lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;文件中指定正确的目录（它是[$docroot DocumentRoot]指令，通常是&lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt;或&lt;code&gt;&lt;apache-folder&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;）。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;注意：这在Ubuntu 14.04 与Apache 2.4.7的中发生了变化，其中Apache服务器设置和目录的主要配置文件是&lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt;。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

将上传的文件夹重命名为您希望在URL中拥有的任何内容。
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;如果您的Web服务器以&lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt;运行，例如，重命名为&lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt;目录意味着你将在&lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt;访问你的wiki。&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''如果您希望将其用作[[$short-url|缩短URL]]的话，不要使用$wiki。'''&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==创建数据库==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki将询问您是否有数据库和用户名，如果它们尚不存在，将尝试创建它们。
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
如果您已有数据库服务器并且知道它的root密码，则MediaWiki安装脚本可以为您创建新数据库。
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
如果您不知道root密码，例如，如果您在托管服务器上，则必须立即创建新数据库。
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;目前，您必须使用SQLite、MariaDB、MySQL或PostgreSQL来存储Wiki的实际内容。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're unsure which database to choose, use MariaDB.&lt;/span&gt;

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;在安装页面上，您需要选择数据库名称（可以是任何内容）和SQLite数据库目录。&lt;/span&gt;
对于数据库目录，安装程序将尝试使用文档根目录之外的子目录，并在需要时创建它。
如果此目录不安全（例如Web可读），请手动更改它以避免Web上的每个人都可以访问它。

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;请参阅相应的文档。&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;或者，与您的主机提供商联系，让他们为您创建一个帐户。&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
如果您的数据库未在与Web服务器相同的服务器上运行，则需要提供相应的Web服务器主机名，以下示例中的mediawiki.example.com，如下：
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;UNIX/Linux上的MySQL/MariaDB将发送给它的所有查询记录到一个文件中，该文件将包含您用于该用户帐户的密码。&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;如果这与您有关，请在运行这些查询后删除&lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt;文件。&lt;/span&gt;}}

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;如果您使用的是PostgreSQL，则需要为您创建数据库和用户，或者只是为配置表单提供具有“超级用户”权限的PostgreSQL用户的名称。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;通常，这是名为'''postgres'''的数据库用户。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, and a database named &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; owned by the user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser （然后输入密码）
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

或者作为超级用户（默认postgres）在数据库提示符下执行以下命令：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

注意[[phab:tag/postgreSQL|使用PostgreSQL运行MediaWiki时已知问题的列表]]。

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== 启动安装脚本 ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
完成上述所有步骤后，您可以通过浏览器中的index.php通过Web浏览器完成安装：查看{{ll|Manual:Config script}}中提到的说明。
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Further configuration==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additional configuration&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wiki administration&lt;/span&gt;
== 保持最新！ ==
安装后，请确保您及时了解版本，并确保您的服务器安全！
{{Clickable button 2|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$maillist|订阅我们的发布公告邮件列表。]]&lt;/span&gt;|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Appendices ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/span&gt;
:{{Note|1=当你创建根账户时，使用一个你能够记住的密码。}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== System-specific instructions  ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The pages listed on {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First consult {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== 参见 ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1p98498wzv2miznf05ozmn5ugp3xyxu</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402888</id>
      <parentid>5402878</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:43:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12764" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;如果没有 Apache, PHP 和 MySQL/MariaDB 的使用经验的话，安装 MediaWiki 可能会很吃力。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== 下载 MediaWiki 软件 ==

从 [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|official download page]]下载MediaWiki tar文件

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally, if you're using a production environment, you want to be running the latest stable release, which is MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extract the MediaWiki software ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;下载的文件是 &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt; 格式，所以在使用前需要先从压缩文件中提取。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to uncompress this archive file before use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;可以在本地提取并上传到服务器，或者上传压缩包然后在服务器上提取，或者直接在服务器上下载并提取.&lt;/span&gt;

在Windows上，这通常由[https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip]（免费）、[http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip]、[https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR]或[https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc]（免费）来完成。

Linux 和 macOS 系统上可以通过这个命令来提取：
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

==上传文件到你的服务器==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
如果尚未将文件上载到Web服务器，请立即执行此操作。
&lt;/div&gt;

通过以下方式将文件上传到Web服务器的Web目录：

# 直接复制解压的文件夹或
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
#使用FTP客户端，如[https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla]（开源软件、Windows、OSX和Linux）或[https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck]（OSX）。
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;by using software already provided by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting service]], such as the ''cPanel File Manager''&lt;/span&gt;

如果您的上传工具有“将文件名更改为小写”选项，则必须禁用此选项。

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;如果您安装了Apache，则会在&lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;文件中指定正确的目录（它是[$docroot DocumentRoot]指令，通常是&lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt;或&lt;code&gt;&lt;apache-folder&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;）。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;注意：这在Ubuntu 14.04 与Apache 2.4.7的中发生了变化，其中Apache服务器设置和目录的主要配置文件是&lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt;。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

将上传的文件夹重命名为您希望在URL中拥有的任何内容。
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;如果您的Web服务器以&lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt;运行，例如，重命名为&lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt;目录意味着你将在&lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt;访问你的wiki。&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not use &lt;code&gt;/wiki/&lt;/code&gt; if you want to set it up as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|Short URL]] after running the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script|installation script]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==创建数据库==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki将询问您是否有数据库和用户名，如果它们尚不存在，将尝试创建它们。
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
如果您已有数据库服务器并且知道它的root密码，则MediaWiki安装脚本可以为您创建新数据库。
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
如果您不知道root密码，例如，如果您在托管服务器上，则必须立即创建新数据库。
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;目前，您必须使用SQLite、MariaDB、MySQL或PostgreSQL来存储Wiki的实际内容。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're unsure which database to choose, use MariaDB.&lt;/span&gt;

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;在安装页面上，您需要选择数据库名称（可以是任何内容）和SQLite数据库目录。&lt;/span&gt;
对于数据库目录，安装程序将尝试使用文档根目录之外的子目录，并在需要时创建它。
如果此目录不安全（例如Web可读），请手动更改它以避免Web上的每个人都可以访问它。

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;请参阅相应的文档。&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;或者，与您的主机提供商联系，让他们为您创建一个帐户。&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
如果您的数据库未在与Web服务器相同的服务器上运行，则需要提供相应的Web服务器主机名，以下示例中的mediawiki.example.com，如下：
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;UNIX/Linux上的MySQL/MariaDB将发送给它的所有查询记录到一个文件中，该文件将包含您用于该用户帐户的密码。&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;如果这与您有关，请在运行这些查询后删除&lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt;文件。&lt;/span&gt;}}

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;如果您使用的是PostgreSQL，则需要为您创建数据库和用户，或者只是为配置表单提供具有“超级用户”权限的PostgreSQL用户的名称。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;通常，这是名为'''postgres'''的数据库用户。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, and a database named &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; owned by the user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser （然后输入密码）
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

或者作为超级用户（默认postgres）在数据库提示符下执行以下命令：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

注意[[phab:tag/postgreSQL|使用PostgreSQL运行MediaWiki时已知问题的列表]]。

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== 启动安装脚本 ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
完成上述所有步骤后，您可以通过浏览器中的index.php通过Web浏览器完成安装：查看{{ll|Manual:Config script}}中提到的说明。
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Further configuration==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additional configuration&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wiki administration&lt;/span&gt;
== 保持最新！ ==
安装后，请确保您及时了解版本，并确保您的服务器安全！
{{Clickable button 2|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$maillist|订阅我们的发布公告邮件列表。]]&lt;/span&gt;|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Appendices ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/span&gt;
:{{Note|1=当你创建根账户时，使用一个你能够记住的密码。}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== System-specific instructions  ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The pages listed on {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First consult {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== 参见 ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>dbwc109kaw1v1t0u1nb0q0pard6nfma</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/pt-br</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>35676</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402943</id>
      <parentid>5355663</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="50415" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Visão geral básica ==

=== Transferência de arquivos ===

Escolha um método para transferir arquivos:

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
* Cópia segura com [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] ou [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|Protocolo de transferência de arquivos SSH]] (SFTP)
* Usando um cliente [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]].
* A empresa de hospedagem pode fornecer uma interface de gerenciador de arquivos por meio do navegador da Web; verifique com seu provedor.
* Outro método. Há uma lista destes em [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

=== Preliminar ===

Leia {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=o arquivo de texto &quot;UPGRADE&quot; incluído no MediaWiki}}.

# Verifique os requisitos
# Leia o arquivo RELEASE-NOTES
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
# Efetue uma cópia de segurança dos arquivos existentes e da base de dados
# Descompacte os novos arquivos
# Atualize as extensões
# Execute o script de atualização para verificar o banco de dados
# Teste a atualização
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations
&lt;/div&gt;

== Verificação de requisitos == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
O MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} requer:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Um dos seguintes:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

Se estiver utilizando PostgreSQL, por favor, leia também {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}. (em inglês)

Para mais informação, por favor, leia {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} e {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Ler as notas de lançamento ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
Agora é a hora de abri-lo e descobrir o que foi alterado nesta versão.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Limpar trabalhos pendentes ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
Esses trabalhos são armazenados no banco de dados e contêm parâmetros com informações sobre as ações que ele deve executar.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Fazer backup dos arquivos existentes e do banco de dados ==

:''Instruções completas: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, você usa um script MediaWiki para fazer um backup:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Descompactar os novos arquivos ==

=== Utilizando o pacote ''tarball'' ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

==== FTP ou gráfica ====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Linha de comando ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Outros arquivos ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Usando o Git ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Atualizando extensões ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

Previamente, seu &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; incluiria algo como:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Atividades Relacionadas ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Executando o script de atualização ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Linha de comando ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== O que fazer com o erro &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; ====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

Aqui está um exemplo:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Ver também {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Should I back up first?===
&lt;/div&gt;

Resposta rápida: Sim.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

===Posso manter meu arquivo LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Por que atualizar?===
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>qq1rgg5a8lbv6d6scm7j8qlkx5h079t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Installing MediaWiki/pt-br</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>36201</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402869</id>
      <parentid>5389977</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:40:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12406" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pode ser difícil instalar o MediaWiki para um usuário médio, sem experiência com Apache, PHP e MySQL/MariaDB.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Baixar o software MediaWiki ==

Baixe o arquivo tar do MediaWiki da [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|página oficial de baixar]].

Geralmente, se estiver usando um ambiente de produção, você deseja executar a versão estável mais recente, que é MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extract the MediaWiki software ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Os arquivos baixados estarão no formato &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;, então deverão ser descomprimidos antes de serem usados.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to uncompress this archive file before use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Isto pode ser feito localmente (e então subido via FTP) ou diretamente em seu servidor.&lt;/span&gt;

No Windows, a descompactação pode ser feita com programas como [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (grátis), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] ou [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] (grátis).

No Linux e Mac OS X, você pode descompactar o arquivo usando este comando:
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

== Fazer upload de arquivos para seu sevidor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se você ainda não carregou os arquivos para seu servidor web, carregue agora.
&lt;/div&gt;

É possível fazer o upload dos arquivos para o diretório de seu servidor web:

# copiando diretamente a pasta descompactada ou
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# usando um cliente FTP como [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (Software de código aberto, com versões para Windows, OSX e Linux) ou [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (OSX).
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;by using software already provided by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting service]], such as the ''cPanel File Manager''&lt;/span&gt;

Se sua ferramenta de carregamento tiver uma opção &quot;alterar nomes de arquivo para minúsculas&quot;, então você deve desabilitar isso.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se você instalou o Apache, o diretório correto é especificado em seu &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; file (é o diretiva, tipicamente $1 ou {{$2|apache-folder}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Nota: Isso mudou em Ubuntu 14.04 com Apache 2.4.7 onde o arquivo de configuração primário para configurações e diretórios do servidor Apache é &lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

Renomeie a pasta que subiu como você quiser que seja na URL.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se seu servidor web estiver rodando como &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt; por exemplo, ao renomear o diretório para &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt; significará que você acessará seu wiki em &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not use &lt;code&gt;/wiki/&lt;/code&gt; if you want to set it up as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|Short URL]] after running the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script|installation script]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
== Definir o banco de dados ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
O MediaWiki solicitará a base de dados e nome de usuário, e tentará criá-los, se não existirem ainda.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se você já tem um servidor de base de dados e sabe a senha do root para ele, o instalador do MediaWiki poderá criar uma nova base de dados pra você.
&lt;/div&gt;

Se você não souber a senha do usuário root, por exemplo, se você estiver em um [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|servidor hospedado]], você terá que criar um novo banco de dados antes de executar o script de instalação do MediaWiki na próxima seção.

SQLite, MariaDB/MySQL, e PostgreSQL são bancos de dados com suporte.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se você não tiver certeza sobre qual banco de dados escolher, use o MariaDB, pois é o melhor suportado pelo MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Na página de instalação, você deverá escolher o nome da base de dados (que pode ser qualquer um) e o diretório da base de dados SQLite.&lt;/span&gt;
Para o diretório da base de dados, o instalador tentará usar um subdiretório fora do document root, e irá criá-lo se necessário.
Se este diretório não for seguro (por exemplo, puder ser lido via web), mude-o manualmente para evitar que fique acessível a todos na web.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Consulte a documentação correspondente.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Opcionalmente, entre em contato com seu provedor para que eles criem esta conta para você.&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se sua base de dados não estiver rodando no mesmo servidor de ser servidor web, você precisará fornecer o hostname de seu servidor web -- mediawiki.example.com no meu exemplo -- como se segue:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O MySQL/MariaDB no UNIX/Linux registra todas queries enviadas a ele em um arquivo, que incluirá a senha que você usou para a conta do usuário.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se isto for preocupante para você, apague seu arquivo &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt; após rodar estas queries.&lt;/span&gt;}}

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se você estiver usando o PostgreSQL, precisará, ou ter uma base de dados e usuário já criados para você, ou simplesmente fornecer o nome de um usuário do PostgreSQL com privilégios de &quot;superusuário&quot; para efetuar a configuração.&lt;/span&gt;
Com frequência, este é o usuário do banco de dados chamado &lt;code&gt;postgres&lt;/code&gt;
Os seguintes comandos em uma linha de comando Linux, como usuário postgres, criam um usuário de banco de dados chamado &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, e um banco de dados chamado &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; de propriedade do usuário chamado &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser (então insira a senha)
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

ou como superusuário (que por padrão é postgres) execute os seguintes comandos no prompt da base de dados:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Atenção para a [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|lista de problemas conhecidos ao rodar o MediaWiki com PostgreSQL]].

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== Executar o script de instalação ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Uma vez completados os passos acima, você poderá completar a instalação através do navegador de internet, acessando a URI index.php em seu navegador -- verifique as instruções mencionadas em {{ll|Manual:Config script}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Configuração extra ===
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - Configuração adicional
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - Administração da Wiki
== Mantenha atualizado! ==
Uma vez instalado, tenha certeza de manter atualizado, e manter seu servidor seguro!
{{Clickable button 2|Inscreva-se na lista de anúncios de lançamentos do MediaWiki.|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
== Anexos ==

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
=== Alternativas à instalação manual ===

Em vez de instalar o MediaWiki manualmente, as opções alternativas podem ser mais fáceis:
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|dispositivos de software pré-integrados]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|serviços de hospedagem com instalação em 1 clique, ou wiki farms]]
:{{Note|1=Ao criar uma conta root, use uma senha que você se lembrará.}}

Consulte também o {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}

=== Instruções específicas do sistema ===

As páginas listadas em {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} fornecem instruções de instalação mais detalhadas destinadas a sistemas específicos.

Entretanto, na maioria dos casos, estes documentos por sistema são menos conservados e nem sempre podem estar atualizados.
Primeiro consulte {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (esta página) antes de examinar a documentação de instalação por sistema.

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
=== Executando múltiplas wikis ===

Consultar [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Instalação e configuração]].

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
=== Importar uma base de dados wiki existente ===

Consultar [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Instalação e configuração]].

== Ver também ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>c7od0uw04r8mvsuhgkgvbqo3z5trj19</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/ru</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>36770</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402946</id>
      <parentid>5355666</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="54763" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Обзор ==

=== Перенос файлов ===

Выберите метод переноса файлов:

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
* Безопасное копирование с помощью [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] или [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* С помощью [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* С использованием [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]]-клиента.
* С помощью веб-интерфейса файлового менеджера, предоставляемого хостинг-провайдером; узнайте о такой возможности у своего провайдера.
* Иной метод. Список возможных методов можно найти в статье [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

=== Подготовка ===

В первую очередь, прочтите {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=текстовый файл UPGRADE, включённый в архив MediaWiki}}.

# Проверьте соответствие требованиям
# Прочтите файл RELEASE-NOTES
# Прочтите файл UPGRADE
# Сделайте резервную копию существующих файлов и базы данных
# Распакуйте новые файлы
# Обновите расширения
# Запустите скрипт обновления для проверки базы данных
# Протестируйте обновление
# Удалите &quot;хвосты&quot; от старых инсталляций

== Проверка требований == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki версии {{MW stable branch number}} требует:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Одно из следующего:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

Если вы используете PostgreSQL, прочтите, пожалуйста, {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Более подробно об этом можно прочесть в {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} и {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Прочтите примечания к релизу ==
Где-то внутри дистрибутивного архива (''tarball''), или среди файлов, полученных или экспортированных из [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], есть ряд файлов с именами, набранными прописными литерами. Один из них содержит —  '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Теперь — самое время, чтобы открыть этот файл и узнать то, что изменилось в этом релизе.
Вы также должны прочитать инструкции в файле UPGRADE.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Очистка списка задач ==
В интересах производительности некоторые действия с базой данных откладываются и управляются очередью задач (смотрите [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]])
Эти задачи сохраняются в базе данных и содержат параметры с информацией о необходимых действиях.
Крайне рекомендуется выполнить отложенные задачи перед обновлением вики во избежание их потери, что может  произойти если обновление затронет параметры, указанные в этих задачах.
Используйте {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} чтобы выполнить все отложенные задачи и очистить очередь перед выполнением обновления.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Сделайте резервную копию существующих файлов и базы данных ==

::''Смотрите более подробные инструкции в разделе {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

Несмотря на то, что скрипты обновления тщательно отлажены и проверены, всегда остаётся вероятность сбоя. Поэтому перед обновлением базы данных, '''сделайте полную [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|резервную копию]]''' своего вики-проекта, включая резервную копию базы данных, а также файлы:

* содержимое базы данных вики-проекта (проверьте LocalSettings.php и убедитесь, что получили тексты в корректной кодировке); в дополнение к резервной копии базы данных не повредит сделать и экспорт всех страниц в формате XML.
:* MySQL, в т.ч. SQL-дамп и XML-дамп для использования с командой &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt;:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, дамп базы данных для использования с командой &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, используя скрипт MediaWiki для создания резервной копии:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* изображения и другие медиафайлы (находящиеся в каталоге &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;, а также логотип /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* конфигурационные файлы, т.е. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; и &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (если есть)
* программные файлы MediaWiki, включая все стили оформления и расширения, особенно если вы их изменяли.

== Распакуйте новые файлы ==

=== Использование пакета tarball ===

Вы можете загрузить новые файлы при помощи FTP или командной строки. Использование командной строки возможно только при наличии соответствующих прав доступа! Этот способ гораздо эффективнее, чем FTP, когда каждый из сотен файлов загружается отдельно.

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

==== FTP или графический интерфейс ====

Если у вас нет доступа к командной строке вашего сервера, загрузите на локальный компьютер архив (tarball) с MediaWiki, и распакуйте его на локальном компьютере с помощью [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip].

После того, как файлы будут извлечены локально, воспользуйтесь FTP-клиентом для загрузки каталогов и файлов на сервер.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Командная строка ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

Пользователи (Open)Solaris должны использовать &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, или же следующий способ:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Другие файлы ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* $code-lc, содержит старые параметры конфигурации.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
* Пользовательское оформление в &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; каталоге.
* Любые изменения, внесенные в старые установочные файлы или расширений.
* Любой файл .htaccess (если вы используете Apache и вы определили какие-либо правила в них).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Использование Git ===

При использовании @git, закачайте файлы в новую папку, а затем скопируйте старые файлы настройки в эту папку, как описано в предыдущем разделе.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== Использование патчей ===
Небольшой файл исправлений обычно становится доступным для незначительного обновления версии.
Вам нужно скачать [[w:patch (Unix)|патч]], чтобы использовать это.
Вручную загрузите с [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ сайта с дампами] и извлеките файл патча, или следуйте инструкциям ниже, чтобы загрузить патч с помощью команды wget.
Патчи являются нарастающие, вы '''не можете''' пропускать версии.

# С помощью команды &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; перейдите в основной каталог MediaWiki (содержащий файл LocalSettings.php).
# Скачайте файл патча и распакуйте его с помощью команды &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt;.
# С помощью команды &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; проверьте, какие изменения будут произведены (''например'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Если всё хорошо, запустите команду &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; снова, но без &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
# Зайдите на Special:Version и убедитесь, что номер версии изменился на новый.

=== Файлы, оставление которых может привести к ошибкам ===

Если вы распаковали дистрибутив поверх старого каталога установки, некоторые старые файлы могут вызвать проблемы с новой версией.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Обновите расширения ==

Некоторые расширения были обновлены, чтобы работать с новой версией MediaWiki. Убедитесь, что обновили такие расширения до их последних версий. Вполне возможно, что вам потребуется вручную выполнить  обновления некоторых расширений.

Различные [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|архивы]] включают в себя некоторые наборы расширений и имеют функционал управления версиями, который помогает при обновлении выбрать правильный вариант для вашего выпуска ядра MediaWiki.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Откорректируйте ваш LocalSettings.php ==

Если вы используете тот же &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; от старой версии, вы должны его адаптировать так, чтобы новая версия его обрабатывала правильно:

=== Регистрация тем оформления ===

Начиная с MediaWiki 1.24, интегрированные темы оформления, такие как Vector, Monobook, Modern и CologneBlue, больше не являются частью ядра MediaWiki, и они должны быть явно зарегистрированы в &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, чтобы их можно было использовать, иначе MediaWiki предупредит, что у вас нет установленных тем оформления.

Если хотите иметь в наличии одну их этих тем оформления при обновлении с версий старше 1.24,  в &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; нужно добавить следующее:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Некоторые другие темы оформления все еще могут быть не адаптированы к новой [[Manual:Extension registration|системе регистрации тем оформления]], поэтому в случае возникновения проблем обратитесь к странице документации каждой темы оформления, чтобы узнать, как правильно её зарегистрировать.

=== Регистрация расширений ===

В MediaWiki 1.25 используется новая система [[Manual:Extension registration|регистрации расширений]].

До этого ваш &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, например, выглядел так:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Сейчас нужно преобразовать в:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Расширения должны быть адаптированы для использования с новой системой регистрации расширений.
Расширения, которые не адаптированы, должны использовать старый способ установки.
Для получения дополнительной информации обратитесь к инструкциям по установке на странице расширения.

=== Другие переменные ===
Некоторые переменные могут быть устаревшими или даже удалены.
Если они находятся в &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, то не будет никакого эффекта.
Новые переменные могут быть добавлены в более новых версиях, а некоторые существующие переменные изменили свой тип.
Мы обычно стараемся использовать для них привычные значения по умолчанию, а в случае изменения типа - обратную совместимость.
В любом случае, обращайте внимание на примечания к выпуску, чтобы увидеть эти изменения.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Запустите скрипт обновления ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Командная строка (''shell'') ===

Доступ к командной строке на вашем сервере будет организован через SSH shell или похожим образом. Вы можете работать в командной строке, подключившись к серверу через SSH. На локальном компьютере под управлением Microsoft Windows, для использования SSH вам потребуется программа типа [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY]. Из командной строки, с использованием SSH, или иным аналогичным образом, перейдите в каталог &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; и выполните [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|сценарий обновления]]:

 $ php update.php

Если вы столкнулись с ошибкой на сервере под управлением Linux, попробуйте повторить ту же самую команду как root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Примечание для простой установки в Windows (например, с {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
Сначала убедитесь, что ваше серверное приложение (например, Apache) и база данных (например, MySQL) запущены.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

MediaWiki проверит существующую схему и обновит её для работы с новым кодом, добавив при необходимости таблицы или новые поля.

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

==== Что делать, если возникает ошибка &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; (или похожая) ====

Может случиться так, что выполнение скрипта прерывается с сообщением, похожим на:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

Это означает, что вы должны проверить настройки {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} и {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} в своём файле {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} (в основном каталоге). Это имя пользователя и пароль, необходимые этому скрипту для получения доступа к базе данных.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== Что делать, если возникает ошибка &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; ====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

Эта ошибка возникает, когда update.php запускается из php4.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

# в командной строке, введите 'whereis php5'
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

Ниже приведён пример:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

==== Что делать, если возникает ошибка 'register_argc_argv is set to false' ====

Вам может встретиться ошибка:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
# Добавьте строку:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Повторно запустите &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
=== Веб-браузер ===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Смотрите также {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

# Всегда делайте [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|резервную копию]] перед запуском скриптов, работающих с базой данных.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
# Выберите язык и нажмите продолжить.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Протестируйте обновление ==

Как только обновление завершится, просмотрите вики-сайт и проверьте основные моменты, — чтобы гарантировать, что всё по-прежнему работает так, как ожидается. В первую очередь, это:

* просмотр страниц
* редактирование страниц
* загрузка файлов
* посетите страницу [[Special:Version]] и проверьте, что версия отображается корректно.

== Удаление остатков от старых инсталляций ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

== Часто задаваемые вопросы ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===Как сложно сделать обновление?===

Если единственный файл, который вы изменили, это {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, и вы обновляете версию 1.5 или более позднюю, процесс будет весьма простым. Объем затраченной человеческой работы составит всего несколько минут. Изменения схемы базы данных займут время, пропорциональное размеру вашей базы данных — для вики с миллионами страниц вероятно час, но для более типичной, размером в несколько тысяч страниц, обычно займёт секунды.

Незначительные обновления в рамках одной и той же основной версии, скажем, с {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 до {{MW legacy release number}}, вообще не требуют никаких изменений схемы базы данных.
Вы можете просто обновить файлы. База данных не нуждается в обновлении, поэтому нет необходимости запускать скрипт обновления.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Сперва я должен сделать резервное копирование? ===

Короткий ответ: Да.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Why upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== См. также ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>h3rk1svo4x54w7kqqvi5sfggz4yivke</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/pl</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>38828</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402940</id>
      <parentid>5355662</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="50381" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Informacje ogólne ==

== Transfer plików ==

Wybierz metodę przesłania plików:

* [[w:pl:Wget|wget]]
* Bezpieczne kopiowanie za pomocą [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] lub [[w:pl:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:pl:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Przy użyciu klienta [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]].
* Firma hostingowa może dostarczać menedżer plików dostępny poprzez przeglądarkę.
* Inny sposób. Ich lista znajduje się na stronie [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

=== Wstęp ===

Przeczytaj {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=plik tekstowy UPGRADE dołączony do MediaWiki}}.

# Sprawdź wymagania
# Przeczytaj rejestr zmian
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
# Zrób kopię zapasową istniejących plików i bazy danych
# Rozpakuj nowe pliki
# Zaktualizuj rozszerzenia
# Uruchom skrypt aktualizacyjny, aby sprawdzić bazę danych
# Sprawdź czy aktualizacja się powiodła
Usuń pozostałości po instalatorze i starej wersji

== Sprawdź wymagania == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} wymaga:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Jedno z poniższych:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

Jeżeli używasz PostgreSQL, przeczytaj też {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Aby uzyskać więcej informacji, przeczytaj {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} i {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Przeczytaj rejestr zmian ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Clear pending jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Zrób kopię zapasową dotychczasowych plików i bazy danych ==

:''Pełna instrukcja: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Rozpakuj nowe pliki ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using a tarball package ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Command line ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Other files===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using Git ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Zaktualizuj rozszerzenia ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Other variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Uruchom skrypt aktualizacyjny ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

Poniżej przykład:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Zobacz też {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

Po zakończeniu procesu aktualizacji, przejrzyj swoją wiki i sprawdź czy poniższe operacje działają tak jak trzeba:

* Oglądanie stron
* Edytowanie stron
* Przesyłanie plików
* Odwiedź [[Special:Version]] (na swojej wiki) i sprawdź czy jest właściwa wersja oraz czy wszystkie rozszerzenia są obecne.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

== Najczęściej zadawane pytania ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Czy powinienem wykonać najpierw kopię zapasową?===

Krótka odpowiedź: Tak.

Dłuższa odpowiedź: Zależy to od a) jak bardzo ważne są to dane, b) jak trudne jest wykonanie kopii c) jak pewnie się czujesz w administrowaniu MySQL. 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

===Czy mogę zachować swój LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Tak, ale czasem może być konieczność dokonania w nim drobnych zmian. Sam format $localsettings jest kompatybilny wstecznie. Zmiany, które wpłyną na zawartość LocalSettings.php będą opisane w sekcji &quot;configuration changes&quot; [[Release notes|rejestru zmian]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

Generalnie tak, ale Git może tymczasowo (na kilka sekund) przerwać proces.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Dlaczego aktualizować?===
:''Subskrybuj [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] aby być powiadamianym o nowych wersjach.''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.5, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|jest możliwy podgląd w postaci porównania zmian]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.9 dostępny jest przycisk [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|cofnij]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* Od {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, dostępna jest funkcja [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolowania]] na [[Special:NewPages|Specjalna:Nowe strony]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.13 można [[$moving|zmieniać nazwy]] (przenosić) plikom.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.14 można włączyć [[$FixDoubleRedirects|automatyczną poprawę podwójnych przekierowań]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.16 dostępny jest $commons.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Zobacz też ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>89zi4e4myzgnzm34osum21977xfowuf</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402985</id>
      <parentid>5402940</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:49:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="50237" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Informacje ogólne ==

== Transfer plików ==

Wybierz metodę przesłania plików:

* [[w:pl:Wget|wget]]
* Bezpieczne kopiowanie za pomocą [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] lub [[w:pl:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:pl:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Przy użyciu klienta [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]].
* Firma hostingowa może dostarczać menedżer plików dostępny poprzez przeglądarkę.
* Inny sposób. Ich lista znajduje się na stronie [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

=== Wstęp ===

Przeczytaj {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=plik tekstowy UPGRADE dołączony do MediaWiki}}.

# Sprawdź wymagania
# Przeczytaj rejestr zmian
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
# Zrób kopię zapasową istniejących plików i bazy danych
# Rozpakuj nowe pliki
# Zaktualizuj rozszerzenia
# Uruchom skrypt aktualizacyjny, aby sprawdzić bazę danych
# Sprawdź czy aktualizacja się powiodła
Usuń pozostałości po instalatorze i starej wersji

== Sprawdź wymagania == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} wymaga:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Jedno z poniższych:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

Jeżeli używasz PostgreSQL, przeczytaj też {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Aby uzyskać więcej informacji, przeczytaj {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} i {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Przeczytaj rejestr zmian ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Clear pending jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Zrób kopię zapasową dotychczasowych plików i bazy danych ==

:''Pełna instrukcja: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Rozpakuj nowe pliki ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using a tarball package ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Command line ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Other files===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using Git ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Zaktualizuj rozszerzenia ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Other variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Uruchom skrypt aktualizacyjny ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

Poniżej przykład:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Zobacz też {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

Po zakończeniu procesu aktualizacji, przejrzyj swoją wiki i sprawdź czy poniższe operacje działają tak jak trzeba:

* Oglądanie stron
* Edytowanie stron
* Przesyłanie plików
* Odwiedź [[Special:Version]] (na swojej wiki) i sprawdź czy jest właściwa wersja oraz czy wszystkie rozszerzenia są obecne.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

== Najczęściej zadawane pytania ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Czy powinienem wykonać najpierw kopię zapasową?===

Krótka odpowiedź: Tak.

Dłuższa odpowiedź: Zależy to od a) jak bardzo ważne są to dane, b) jak trudne jest wykonanie kopii c) jak pewnie się czujesz w administrowaniu MySQL. 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

===Czy mogę zachować swój LocalSettings.php?===
Tak, ale czasem może być konieczność dokonania w nim drobnych zmian. Sam format {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} jest kompatybilny wstecznie.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

Generalnie tak, ale Git może tymczasowo (na kilka sekund) przerwać proces.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Dlaczego aktualizować?===
:''Subskrybuj [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] aby być powiadamianym o nowych wersjach.''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.5, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|jest możliwy podgląd w postaci porównania zmian]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.9 dostępny jest przycisk [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|cofnij]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* Od {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, dostępna jest funkcja [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolowania]] na [[Special:NewPages|Specjalna:Nowe strony]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.13 można [[$moving|zmieniać nazwy]] (przenosić) plikom.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.14 można włączyć [[$FixDoubleRedirects|automatyczną poprawę podwójnych przekierowań]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.16 dostępny jest $commons.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Zobacz też ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>9qtarojrtxawd3qpqoe6wmx9svqlu2e</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402987</id>
      <parentid>5402985</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:49:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="50170" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Informacje ogólne ==

== Transfer plików ==

Wybierz metodę przesłania plików:

* [[w:pl:Wget|wget]]
* Bezpieczne kopiowanie za pomocą [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] lub [[w:pl:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:pl:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Przy użyciu klienta [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]].
* Firma hostingowa może dostarczać menedżer plików dostępny poprzez przeglądarkę.
* Inny sposób. Ich lista znajduje się na stronie [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

=== Wstęp ===

Przeczytaj {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=plik tekstowy UPGRADE dołączony do MediaWiki}}.

# Sprawdź wymagania
# Przeczytaj rejestr zmian
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
# Zrób kopię zapasową istniejących plików i bazy danych
# Rozpakuj nowe pliki
# Zaktualizuj rozszerzenia
# Uruchom skrypt aktualizacyjny, aby sprawdzić bazę danych
# Sprawdź czy aktualizacja się powiodła
Usuń pozostałości po instalatorze i starej wersji

== Sprawdź wymagania == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} wymaga:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Jedno z poniższych:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

Jeżeli używasz PostgreSQL, przeczytaj też {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Aby uzyskać więcej informacji, przeczytaj {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} i {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Przeczytaj rejestr zmian ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Clear pending jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Zrób kopię zapasową dotychczasowych plików i bazy danych ==

:''Pełna instrukcja: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Rozpakuj nowe pliki ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using a tarball package ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Command line ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Other files===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using Git ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Zaktualizuj rozszerzenia ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Other variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Uruchom skrypt aktualizacyjny ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

Poniżej przykład:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Zobacz też {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

Po zakończeniu procesu aktualizacji, przejrzyj swoją wiki i sprawdź czy poniższe operacje działają tak jak trzeba:

* Oglądanie stron
* Edytowanie stron
* Przesyłanie plików
* Odwiedź [[Special:Version]] (na swojej wiki) i sprawdź czy jest właściwa wersja oraz czy wszystkie rozszerzenia są obecne.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

== Najczęściej zadawane pytania ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Czy powinienem wykonać najpierw kopię zapasową?===

Krótka odpowiedź: Tak.

Dłuższa odpowiedź: Zależy to od a) jak bardzo ważne są to dane, b) jak trudne jest wykonanie kopii c) jak pewnie się czujesz w administrowaniu MySQL. 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

===Czy mogę zachować swój LocalSettings.php?===
Tak, ale czasem może być konieczność dokonania w nim drobnych zmian. Sam format {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} jest kompatybilny wstecznie.
Zmiany, które wpłyną na zawartość LocalSettings.php będą opisane w sekcji &quot;configuration changes&quot; [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|rejestru zmian]].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

Generalnie tak, ale Git może tymczasowo (na kilka sekund) przerwać proces.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Dlaczego aktualizować?===
:''Subskrybuj [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] aby być powiadamianym o nowych wersjach.''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.5, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|jest możliwy podgląd w postaci porównania zmian]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.9 dostępny jest przycisk [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|cofnij]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* Od {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, dostępna jest funkcja [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolowania]] na [[Special:NewPages|Specjalna:Nowe strony]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.13 można [[$moving|zmieniać nazwy]] (przenosić) plikom.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.14 można włączyć [[$FixDoubleRedirects|automatyczną poprawę podwójnych przekierowań]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Od 1.16 dostępny jest $commons.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Zobacz też ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>6xnnlditdp78owhl16f6oln36b0omzx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:MediaWiki feature list/fr</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>40903</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403247</id>
      <parentid>5370117</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:09:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24547" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
{{Outdated}}
Cette page contient une liste de fonctionnalités natives du logiciel  MediaWiki.
La manière dont vous utiliserez MediaWiki pour votre propre wiki est fonction du genre de site web que vous voulez créer avec lui.
Le logiciel Wikipédia comporte beaucoup de fonctionnalités très utiles qui ont évolué selon les besoins des utilisateurs et les idées des développeurs. Mais plus de fonctionnalités signifie aussi plus de complexité.
 
Avant de vous décider à utiliser '''MediaWiki''', nous vous invitons à évaluer d'autres moteurs de Wikis (voir [http://wiki.c2.com/?WikiEngines cette liste] ou [http://www.wikimatrix.org/ cette évaluation comparative]) et de vérifier si l'un d'eux peut mieux répondre à vos besoins.

Les demandes pour de nouvelles fonctionnalités doivent être proposées dans [[Phabricator]].

== Ai-je besoin de MediaWiki ? ==
Le logiciel et les extensions de MediaWiki ont des caractéristiques et des avantages, des forces et des faiblesses, des  « pour » et des  « contre », mais malgré tout, en dépit des objectifs de chacun, le logiciel et les extensions MediaWiki peuvent être utilisés à des fins uniques, intelligentes et inventives, non prévues par les développeurs originaux ou autres installateurs.
Voici une brève liste des caractéristiques et des bénéfices de MediaWiki
Si vous développez une liste équivalente avec vos objectifs et vos ressources, vous pouvez comparer cette liste avec votre liste et voir si il y a des correspondances ou non.
Besoin d'un peu plus d'aide pour vous décider?
Il existe des groupes de discussion ouverts sur le web, et des pages de discussion (talk pages) derrière chaque page principale de MediaWiki, où vous pouvez bénéficier de l'expérience des autres utilisateurs.

{{note|1=Exemple de liste de fonctionalités des pages 13-14, du livre « Guide tutoriel des administrateurs MediaWiki : Installez, gérez et personnalisez votre installation MediaWiki » par Mizanur Rahman, 2007 [http://www.packtpub.com/ http://www.packtpub.com/]}}

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| '''Fonctionnalité MediaWiki'''
| '''Avantages de MediaWiki'''
| '''Vos objectifs'''
| '''Vos ressources'''

|-
| Navigation facile:
| Facile à contribuer, sans trop de formation ...
|...
|...

|-
| Modification, mise en forme et sourçage :
| Gérer et trouver du contenu ...
|...
|...

|-
| Modifier l'habillage :
| Personnalisable à vos préférences ...
|...
|...

|-
| Le téléversement de fichiers:
| La gestion et le partage de contenu ...
|...
|...

|-
| Support multi-langue:
| La prise en charge de UTF-8 permet qu'une même portion de programme gère toutes les langues ...
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| Gestion des utilisateurs:
| L'accès et le contrôle de la sécurité ...
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| Syndication:
| Partagez les informations de votre site ...
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| ... et plus...
|...
|...
|...

|}

Veuillez enrichir et étendre les fonctionalités de la table ci-dessus et prendre avantage à aider les visiteurs pour mieux savoir ce qu'ils attendent.
Merci!

Un problème récurrent est que les administrateurs système décident de créer un wiki, sans prendre en compte plusieurs problèmes.
Après avoir rempli la table précédente, posez-vous les questions suivantes, pour voir si un wiki est le bon logiciel pour vous :

# '' Quel est le but de mon site? ''
#: Les wikis sont un moyen idéal pour la rédaction collaborative et la création de contenu ; ils ne conviennent pas bien à d'autres usages, comme les blogs. Estimez si un [[w:wiki|wiki]] est une option adequate pour vos objectifs.
# ''A combien d'utilisateurs, ce wiki sera-t-il présenté ?''
#: Sauf quelques exceptions, l'installation du logiciel wiki n'est pas nécessaire lorsqu'il y a un très petit groupe de personnes intéressées par le modification du wiki. Plus la base des utilisateurs est grande, plus la probabilité est grande qu'un wiki était la bonne solution pour vous.
# ''Combien j'espère avoir de contributeurs actifs qui modifient mon wiki  ?''
#: Les Wikis, à cause de leur caractère ouvert, demandent une certaine maintenance. Plus la base des contributeurs est grande, plus il y a de mains pour réaliser ces tâches de maintenance.
# ''Que peut-on faire avec MediaWiki ?''
#: MediaWiki est un moteur wiki extrêmement adaptable; il est relativement facile à installer, mais ce qui est le plus important, c'est qu'il  autorise l'utilisation et la création d'[[Manual:Extensions/fr|extensions]]. Cela permet à votre installation MediaWiki d'être très personnalisable avec quelques connaissances de PHP. Avec la motivation adaptée, MediaWiki peut être « abusé » pour faire presque tout.
# ''Est-ce que MediaWiki est bien pour moi ?''
#: MediaWiki a ses limites. Une limite plus considérable est que MediaWiki n'est pas censé être une [[w:access control list|liste de contôles d'accès]]. La ''raison d'etre'' de MediaWiki est de fournir du contenu ouvert; alors que les versions récentes ont un modèle de sécurité beaucoup plus renforcé, il existe encore des lacunes significatives pour l'accès sécurisé individuel.

{{Note|1=''Voir {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} et [[Security issues with authorization extensions]].''}}


== Comment configurer MediaWiki ? ==

Si vous avez décidé que MediaWiki est bien sûr une solution appropriée, il y a encore d'autres choses à considérer.

Ces questions, nous l'espérons,  vous aideront à  décider comment configurer votre wiki d'une manière qui minimisera les problèmes à long terme:

# ''Qui je désire pouvoir lire mon wiki ?''
#: Malgré tous les problèmes liés aux contraintes des page basées sur l'utilisateur, MediaWiki peut être configuré pour restreindre ou permettre l'accès à tout le monde. Aussi demandez-vous si vous voulez que chaque utilisateur d'internet puisse voir le contenu de votre wiki, ou si vous voulez restreindre ce privilège au utilisateurs qui ont créé un compte sur votre wiki.
# ''Qui je désire pouvoir modifier mon wiki ?''
#: Peut-être la question la plus commune est de savoir si vous voulez permettre à chacun de modifier votre wiki, sur le même modèle que [[w:Wikipedia|Wikipedia]] .  MediaWiki permet des contraintes fines pour l'écriture; vous pouvez permettre aux utilisateurs non enregistrés de modifier les pages de discussion par exemple, et autoriser uniquement les utilisateurs ayant un compte créé il y a plus d'un certain temps, à modifier les pages de contenu. Vous pouvez restreindre les modifications aux administrateurs système,  ou même à un groupe d'utilisateurs personnalisé que vous créez et que vous  déléguez.
# ''Qui voulez-vous pouvoir créer un compte sur mon wiki ?''
#: En fonction de certaines réponses aux questions ci-dessus, vous pouvez décider de restreindre les personnes pouvant créer un compte sur un wiki. Vous pouvez autoriser n'importe qui à créer des comptes; ou même vous pouvez donner ce privilège aux administrateurs, qui seront alors responsables de la création des comptes des nouveaux utilisateurs à travers un processus que vous choisirez.
# ''Quelles forces attribuer à chaque groupe d'utilisateurs ?''
#: Une des plus importantes questions à laquelle vous devez répondre, est la suivante. Allouer ou retirer des privilèges à un groupe peut être ''extrêmement'' controversé sur un grand wiki, donc avoir une bonne idée de ce que chaque utilisateur a le droit de faire est critique. Voulez-vous que les utilisateurs non enregistrés puissent créer des pages ? Voulez-vous que les utilisateurs enregistrés puissent créer des pages ? Voulez-vous que les administrateurs wiki puissent bloquer et supprimer des pages, ou voulez-vous étendre leurs droits ? Qui a le droit d'allouer davantage de privilèges ? Qui est responsable pour leur retrait ? Voulez-vous avoir des droits plus raffinés tels que l'[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Oversight policy|aperçu]], le [[m:Special:MyLanguage/CheckUser policy|contrôle des utilisateurs]], et l'[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Reverting#Rollback|annulation]] ?
#:#:Voir [[Manual:User rights]] et [[Help:User rights management]] pour davantage d'idées et d'information.
# ''Quelles extensions dois-je installer ?''
#: Sauf quelques exceptions, les [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|extensions]] sont faciles à ajouter, que ce soit à l'installation du wiki, ou après quelques années d'utilisation du wiki.
# ''Ai-je besoin de gérer les données structurées ?''
#: Pour la [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Managing data in MediaWiki|gestion des données structurées dans MediaWiki]], plusieurs extensions dédiées existent.

Avec ces réponses, vous devriez être capable de configurer les aspects  les plus critiques de votre wiki.
Vous pouvez procéder en commençant par le processu d'installation sur votre [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:OS specific help|système d'exploitation]].

== Aspect et convivialité ==

* '''Liens avec raccourcis''', le rendu est fonction de l'habillage (''skin'' en anglais)
*'''{{ll|Manual:Skins|nsp=0}}''' - différentes façons de présenter le site
* '''[[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Help:User style|Styles utilisateurs]]''' : les utilisateurs peuvent modifier l'aspect et la convivialité du site grâce à une feuille de style CSS personnalisable attachée à leur compte utilisateur.
* '''Le seuil d'&quot;ébauche&quot;''' (&quot;Stub&quot;): les utilisateurs peuvent voir s'afficher les liens vers les articles dans une couleur particulière quand ils ont une taille en octets inférieure à ce seuil.
* Les '''versions imprimables''' des articles peuvent être générées.
* '''Numérotation automatique des titres''' dans un article (optionnel)
*'''Ancres dans une page''' (générés automatiquement pour les titres; on peut aussi les placer explicitement avec &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;div id=&quot;tagname&quot;&gt;...&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;).
* {{anchor|TOC}}'''Génération automatique d'un sommaire''' (&quot;TOC&quot;) pour les articles longs (optionnel)
* Transforme automatiquement les '''numéros ISBN''' en liens vers une liste modifiable de libraires.
* Rendu de page compatible '''XHTML'''- ou '''HTML5''' (on fait vraiment de notre mieux), integration ordonnée.

== Multimédia et extensions ==

* Une '''fonction de téléversement (&quot;''upload''&quot;) de fichiers''' permet d'importer des fichiers d'images, de sons, etc. (aller à [[Special:Upload]] pour voir comment s'effectue cette opération, et [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Uploading files|Téléversement de fichiers]] pour sa description). Les fichiers téléversés sont listés dans [[Special:Recentchanges|Recent Changes]] et ils sont aussi tracés dans [[Special:Log/upload]].
* '''Formules mathématiques en utilisant la syntaxe LaTeX''' - Voir {{ll|Extension:Math}} et {{ll|Manual:Mathoid}}
*'''Redimensionnement automatique''' des images avec ImageMagick ou libgd ; syntaxe assez simple pour les légendes et l'alignement des images.
*'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiHiero|WikiHiero]]''' pour les hiéroglyphes égyptiens (requiert l'installation de composants indépendants)
*'''{{ll|Extension:Graph|nsp=0}}''' - pour toute sorte de graphiques (requiert une installation séparée des composants)

== Conserver la trace des modifications ==

* '''Liste de suivi (''Watchlist'')''' : Chaque page comporte un lien « Suivre (''watch'') cet article pour moi ». Utilisez [[Special:Watchlist]] pour suivre les changements récents sur les articles que vous avez déclarés intéressants ; les articles suivis sont aussi affichés en gras dans la liste [[Special:Recentchanges|des modifications récentes]] (''RecentChanges'').
* Le lien '''Contributions de l'utilisateur''' dans la barre latérale des pages utilisateur liste tous les articles que l'utilisateur a modifiés, suivant les informations de la base de données.
* '''Suivi étendu des modifications récentes''' avec un regroupement dynamique des modifications du même article et des liens rapides vers les diff des modifications, l'affichage de l'historique des modifications de l'article, celui de la page utilisateur, de sa page de discussion ou le blocage de l'utilisateur (pour les administrateurs).
* '''Suivi des pages liées''' montre une version de la page Modifications récentes limitée aux pages liées à la page courante.
* '''diffs côte-à-côte''' : les « diffs » (pour « différences ») sont affichés côte à côte, et les portions de lignes modifiées sont mises en évidence, ce qui facilite la visualisation des modifications. En outre, un « diff » est affiché lors d'un conflit de modification, ce qui permet de voir exactement et de reprendre aisément ce que vous aviez tenté d'ajouter.
*'''Noms réels''' - Les utilisateurs peuvent donner (optionellement) un « nom réel » qui sera utilisé pour les crédits d'auteur.
*'''Crédits sur la page'''. Les administrateurs peuvent autoriser l'affichage d'un paragraphe sur la page qui donne le crédit des contributeurs ont travaillé dessus.

== Structures et syntaxe ==

* Par défaut, il n'est autorisé qu'un usage [[Special:MyLanguage/HTML restriction|restreint]] du [[:fr:HTML|HTML]]. Une option permet l'usage complet du HTML.
*'''Syntaxe de rédaction basée sur UseMod''', avec prise en charge d’un mélange de syntaxes wiki et HTML. Par choix délibéré il n'y a pas de support des liens « [[w:fr:CamelCase|CamelCase]] ».
*les '''Namespaces''' (''espaces de noms'') permettent la séparation des contenus (pour accéder à l'espace de noms, utilisez la syntaxe &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Namespace:Page title]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;).
**Les pages de discussion (Talk:) sont indépendantes des pages articles, les pages du projet &quot;meta&quot; peuvent être séparées des pages de contenu, les pages d'images sont utilisées pour la description des images.
**[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:System message|L'espace de noms MediaWiki:]] contient tous les textes de l'interface utilisateur de sorte qu'ils peuvent être modifiés comme n'importe quelle autre page du wiki.
**Template: cet espace de noms (« modèle ») sert aux messages personnalisables. Les modèles peuvent contenir des variables qui seront remplacées par des valeurs transmises aux modèles depuis la page appelante.
* '''[[:fr:Aide:Transclusion|Transclusion]]''' de pages arbitraires dans tout espace de nom : &lt;nowiki&gt;{{:Nom de la page}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Voir [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Template|la page d'aide générale sur les modèles]].
*'''Liaison étendue sur les mots''': Si vous placez un lien sous la forme &lt;nowiki&gt;[[war]]s&lt;/nowiki&gt;, ou &lt;nowiki&gt;[[war]]time&lt;/nowiki&gt;, le système va automatiquement afficher cela comme si vous aviez écrit  &lt;nowiki&gt;[[war|wars]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; ou &lt;nowiki&gt;[[war|wartime]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;, économisant ainsi de l'espace d'écriture.
*'''Masquage des textes entre parenthèses''' (&quot;[[pipe tricks]]&quot;): si vous incluez un lien sous la forme &lt;nowiki&gt;[[kernel (mathematics)|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;, la partie entre parenthèse sera masquée dans le lien, comme si vous aviez écrit [[kernel (mathematics)|kernel]]. C'est très utile pour désambiguïser les différentes significations d'un mot en allégeant la saisie d'un lien et l'affichage dans l'article. Cela fonctionne aussi pour abréger les espaces de noms pour un rendu plus propre: un lien &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Wikipedia:Copyrights|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; devient [[Wikipedia:Copyrights|Copyrights]]
*'''Lien direct vers des sections précises''' d'article, par exemple [[{{FULLPAGENAME}}#Modification]] (ces liens seront incorrects si le titre de section est modifié ou supprimé).
*Support des '''sous-pages''' (un lien vers &quot;Foo/Bar&quot; depuis la page &quot;Foo&quot; peut s’écrire simplement &quot;/Bar&quot;, et &quot;Foo/Bar&quot; contient un lien automatique vers son « parent » &quot;Foo&quot;). L'option de création de sous-pages peut être activée ou désactivée pour chaque espace de noms (par exemple, Wikipédia accepte actuellement les sous-pages dans les pages de discussion, pour pouvoir les archiver facilement, et sur les pages utilisateur pour donner aux utilisateurs de l'espace pour leurs pages personnelles).
*Les [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic words|mots réservés]] permettent d'insérer des '''données dynamiques''' telles que le nom de la page courante, la date actuelle, le nombre actuel d'articles, etc.
* Plusieurs '''catégories''' peuvent être assignées à toute page, ce qui inclut les pages de catégories elles-mêmes, ceci permettant de créer une hiérarchie à l'intérieur de ces catégories. Une page de catégorie affiche automatiquement toutes les pages qui lui sont assignées, y compris ses sous-catégories. Les pages de catégories permettent une classification et un parcours hiérarchisé de leurs contenus.

== Modification ==
*'''[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Section|Modification de section]]''' - Les utilisateurs peuvent activer l'option qui les autorise à modifier individuellement les sections d’un article (séparées par un titre) au lieu de modifier la totalité de l’article.
* '''La barre d'outils d'édition''' (utilisant le JavaScript) permet le formater le texte, de le mettre en '''gras''', ''italique'', etc. (entièrement fonctionnel avec Mozilla et IE, dans les autres navigateurs elle permet de visualiser la syntaxe de mise en forme mais peut ne pas fonctionner pour modifier les zones de saisie de texte, selon leur implémentation de JavaScript). Si JavaScript est désactivé, la barre d'outils n'est pas affichée.
* '''Résumé des modifications''', qui apparait sur la page des « Modifications récentes ». Il sera pré-rempli avec le titre de section modifié.
* '''Modification par double clic''' : les utilisateurs peuvent activer cette option qui leur permet de modifier les articles en double-cliquant sur le texte.
* '''Prévisualition''' (peut être affiché avant ou après la boite d'édition).
* Gestion des '''conflits de modification''' (une page sauvegardée par un utilisateur tandis qu'un autre utilisateur la modifie, puis tente de la sauvegarder à son tour). MediaWiki effectuera une fusion des modifications automatiquement si cela est possible, sinon, il demandera à l'utilisateur d'effectuer lui-même une fusion manuelle.
* Marquer les modifications comme '''mineures''' ; les utilisateurs peuvent décider de masquer les modifications de ce type dans la liste des modifications récentes. Seuls les utilisateurs enregistrés peuvent marquer leurs modifications comme mineures.

== Spam et vandalisme ==
*{{ll|Manual:Combating spam}}: Prévention du spam des liens et autres formes de modifications abusives.
** [[meta:Spam blacklist|Spam blacklist]] : Liste des noms de domaine de spammeurs que les utilisateurs ne sont pas autorisés lier dans les articles.
* [[Manual:Combating vandalism|Manuel sur comment combattre le vandalisme]] : des astuces efficaces et des liens vers certaines extensions qui traitent le vandalisme.

== Discussions ==

* Les '''pages de discussion''' (''Talk pages'') : Chaque utilisateur (y compris les utilisateurs anonymes) et tous les articles ont une page associée où des messages peuvent être laissés. Ce sont des espaces de noms indépendants (voir plus haut), &quot;Discussion&quot; (&quot;''Talk:''&quot;) et &quot;Discussion utilisateur&quot; (&quot;''User talk:''&quot;).
* Les '''notifications de message''' (l'utilisateur voit un bandeau &quot;Vous avez de nouveaux messages&quot; si quelqu'un d'autre modifié sa page de discussion) ; ceci fonctionne aussi pour les utilisateurs anonymes, mais pas pour les utilisateurs d'adresses IP ''partagées''.
* La '''signature automatique''' : Tapez simplement trois tildes (~) quand vous éditez, et quand vous publierez la page, elles seront remplacées par votre nom d'utilisateur et un lien vers votre page utilisateur. Si vous tapez quatre tildes, la date au moment de la publication sera aussi ajoutée. Destinée principalement aux pages de discussion.
* Support pour l&lt;nowiki&gt;'&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''envoi de courriel aux utilisateurs''' via le wiki (l'adresse courriel n'est pas montrée à l'utilisateur).

== Support multilingue ==

* Traduit dans de nombreuses langues (Voir [[:fr:Wikipédia:Coordination multilingue|Coordination multilingue sur Wikipédia]] pour plus de détails).
*'''[[:fr:Aide:Lien interlangue|Liens inter-langues]]''' : méthode manuelle permettant de lier des articles entre des wikis de différentes langues (chaque langue nécessitant sa propre base de données).
*Prise en charge de '''UTF-8'''

== Coeur du système ==

* '''Orienté base de données''' (MySQL/MariaDB, PostgreSQL et SQlite sont supportés) ;
* '''Mise en cache de l'analyseur''' : le rendu des pages est mis en cache afin de réduire les tâches processeur redondantes ;
* '''Mise en cache des sorties''' : la sortie définitive de la page peut sur demande être sauvegardée sous forme de fichier HTML statique pour que d'autres clients puissent l'utiliser ; support pour les proxies Squid ;
* Compte et système de connexion '''orienté cookie''', mais les utilisateurs anonymes peuvent aussi modifier les pages
* '''Toutes les révisions''' d'un article sont stockées (compressées sur option)
* Association '''[[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Syndication feeds|RSS]]''' disponible pour beaucoup de pages spéciales comme [[Special:Newpages]] et [[Special:Recentchanges]]
*'''[[m:Special:MyLanguage/RDF metadata|Métadonnées RDF]]'''


== Autorisations ==

* Des '''droits différents''' selon que vous soyez utilisateur anonyme, utilisateur déclaré, admin (''sysop''), bureaucrate ou développeur.
* Les '''utilisateurs déclarés''' peuvent :
** déplacer et renommer les pages
** téléverser des fichiers
** avoir et utiliser une liste de suivi
** marquer les modifications avec le tag ''modification mineure'' (par exemple une correction de faute de frappe)
*Les '''admins/sysops''' peuvent :
**protéger les pages contre les modifications
**supprimer et restaurer des pages
**modifier les pages protégées
**exclure des utilisateurs par leur adresse IP
**bloquer les utilisateurs par leur identifiant, si cette option est activée
*Les '''bureaucrates''' peuvent :
**créer des admins/sysops
**renommer des utilisateurs
**répertorier les robots
*Les '''développeurs''' peuvent :
**verrouiller la base de données
**lancer différentes tâches de maintenance
* d' '''autres options de permissions''' (comme par exemple seuls les utilisateurs enregistrés peuvent modifier les pages) [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|peuvent être configurées]].

== Recherche et requêtes ==

* '''recherche plein texte'''
* Le '''bouton &quot;Go&quot;''' permet une vue directe du contenu de l'article spécifié (donne les valeurs approchées si le lien n'est pas exact)
* '''&quot;Pages liées&quot;''' : voyez les pages qui pointent vers la page actuelle
* '''Pages spéciales de rapport''' :
** Nouvelles pages : liste des derniers articles créés
** Pages les plus anciennement modifiées : liste des plus anciens articles classée chronologiquement par ordre croissant
** Liste des images
** Liste des utilisateurs
** Statistiques du site
** Article orphelins (articles qui n'ont aucun lien pointant sur eux)
** Images orphelines
** Article populaires (articles par nombre de visite, ne fonctionne que si les compteurs sont activés)
** Articles les plus demandés (articles non existants triés selon le nombre de liens pointant sur eux)
** Pages courtes
** Pages longues
** Liste de toutes les pages par titre
*L' '''API [[Special:MyLanguage/API:Query|Query]]''' - permet un accès par script à diverses méta-données

== Divers ==

* Fonction d'affichage '''Page au hasard'''
* Les utilisateurs peuvent configurer leur '''fuseau horaire''', qui est utilisé sur tous les horodatages de rapports
* Les attributs de plusieurs pages de rapport ('''nombre de résultats''', etc.) peuvent être paramétrés dans les préférences utilisateur

== Ensemble vide de pages d'aide ==
Notez que les fichiers de l'installation contiennent beaucoup de liens pointant vers des documents qui ne sont pas inclus dans le téléchargement.
Les plus important est l'ensemble vide de pages d'aide qui sera nécessaire à tout nouvel utilisateur du site.
Pour remédier à ces liens rompus, vous devez soit :
* a. [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:PD_help/Copying|exporter depuis ce site]] ou copier manuellement et modifier les pages d'aide vers votre installation ou
* b. modifier les paramètres d'installation pour changer les liens-cible de l'aide vers ce site, l'un comme l'autre pouvant requérir un investissement en temps substantiel.

[[Category:MediaWiki Introduction{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>8hem0ketw8gi6wth8fz8mqtw6cgsk2z</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:LiquidThreads</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>41546</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402071</id>
      <parentid>5031118</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:45:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>prepare for translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3563" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
[[Extension:LiquidThreads|LiquidThreads]] is a discussion system for MediaWiki that adds forum-like features to discussion pages.

&lt;translate&gt;
This page is still developing; these are only basic instructions.

== Basics == &lt;!--T:1--&gt;

=== Posting a new discussion === &lt;!--T:2--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
To post a new discussion, click on the &quot;Start new discussion&quot; link at the top of the discussion page.

[[File:LiquidThreads New Discussion Link.png|500px]]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Adding a reply === &lt;!--T:3--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
[[File:LiquidThreads Reply Button.png]]

To add a reply to a thread, click on the &quot;Add a reply&quot; link at the bottom of a thread.

&lt;translate&gt;
Once you have clicked on this button, a form will load allowing you to enter your reply.
&lt;/translate&gt;

When you are done, click &quot;Save&quot; to save your reply.

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Searching past discussions === &lt;!--T:4--&gt;

To search past discussions on a page, use the search box at the top of the page.
&lt;/translate&gt;

[[File:LiquidThreads Search Box.png|500px]]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Editing a post === &lt;!--T:5--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;To edit a post, move your mouse over the post, then move it over the arrow to the right of the menu.&lt;/translate&gt;
Then, click &quot;Edit&quot;.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Edit.png]]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Viewing thread history === &lt;!--T:6--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
To view the history of a thread, click on the &quot;History&quot; link to the right-hand side of the thread's header.

[[File:LiquidThreads Thread Menu History.png]]

&lt;translate&gt;
You can navigate between changes made to threads, and view the thread as it existed at certain points of time.

== Refactoring == &lt;!--T:7--&gt;

=== Moving a post to a new position === &lt;!--T:8--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;You can move a post to a new position on the page with drag-and-drop.&lt;/translate&gt;
To activate this for a post, click on &quot;Drag to a new location&quot; under the &quot;More&quot; menu.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Drag.png]]

&lt;translate&gt;Once you've clicked on this, you can drag the thread to a new location.&lt;/translate&gt;
[[File:LiquidThreads drop points.png|600px|thumb|left]]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Writing a thread summary === &lt;!--T:9--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
To write or edit a thread summary, click on the &quot;Summarize&quot; option, to the right of the section heading.

[[File:LiquidThreads Thread Menu Summarize.png]]

&lt;translate&gt;
== Administrative tasks == &lt;!--T:10--&gt;

=== Toggling LiquidThreads on a page === &lt;!--T:11--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
To activate LiquidThreads on a specific page on a wiki where LiquidThreads is opt-in, add 
 &lt;kbd&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#useliquidthreads:1}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/kbd&gt; 
to the page's source code. To deactivate LiquidThreads on a specific page on a wiki where LiquidThreads is opt-out add 
 &lt;kbd&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#useliquidthreads:0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/kbd&gt; 
to the page's source code.

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Removing a post === &lt;!--T:12--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
To remove a post, [[#Editing a post|edit it]], and remove all of its content.
If it has no replies with content in them, then it will not be shown.
The previous content of the post will still be available in its page history.

Administrators can delete individual posts.
If you are one, then to do this, move your mouse over the post, and then over the arrow on the toolbar.
Then, select &quot;Delete&quot; from the options.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Delete.png]]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Restoring a post === &lt;!--T:13--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
To restore a previously-removed post, you should [[#Viewing thread history|view the thread's history]], and find the revision before that thread was removed. [TBC]

[[Category:Extension help|LiquidThreads{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>c9o4b0udmxd8oh7815j5dvoypj3ivz7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402072</id>
      <parentid>5402071</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:45:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Marked this version for translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3647" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
[[Extension:LiquidThreads|LiquidThreads]] is a discussion system for MediaWiki that adds forum-like features to discussion pages.

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:14--&gt;
This page is still developing; these are only basic instructions.

== Basics == &lt;!--T:1--&gt;

=== Posting a new discussion === &lt;!--T:2--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
To post a new discussion, click on the &quot;Start new discussion&quot; link at the top of the discussion page.

[[File:LiquidThreads New Discussion Link.png|500px]]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Adding a reply === &lt;!--T:3--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
[[File:LiquidThreads Reply Button.png]]

To add a reply to a thread, click on the &quot;Add a reply&quot; link at the bottom of a thread.

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:15--&gt;
Once you have clicked on this button, a form will load allowing you to enter your reply.
&lt;/translate&gt;

When you are done, click &quot;Save&quot; to save your reply.

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Searching past discussions === &lt;!--T:4--&gt;

&lt;!--T:16--&gt;
To search past discussions on a page, use the search box at the top of the page.
&lt;/translate&gt;

[[File:LiquidThreads Search Box.png|500px]]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Editing a post === &lt;!--T:5--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; To edit a post, move your mouse over the post, then move it over the arrow to the right of the menu.&lt;/translate&gt;
Then, click &quot;Edit&quot;.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Edit.png]]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Viewing thread history === &lt;!--T:6--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
To view the history of a thread, click on the &quot;History&quot; link to the right-hand side of the thread's header.

[[File:LiquidThreads Thread Menu History.png]]

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:18--&gt;
You can navigate between changes made to threads, and view the thread as it existed at certain points of time.

== Refactoring == &lt;!--T:7--&gt;

=== Moving a post to a new position === &lt;!--T:8--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:19--&gt; You can move a post to a new position on the page with drag-and-drop.&lt;/translate&gt;
To activate this for a post, click on &quot;Drag to a new location&quot; under the &quot;More&quot; menu.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Drag.png]]

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; Once you've clicked on this, you can drag the thread to a new location.&lt;/translate&gt;
[[File:LiquidThreads drop points.png|600px|thumb|left]]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Writing a thread summary === &lt;!--T:9--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
To write or edit a thread summary, click on the &quot;Summarize&quot; option, to the right of the section heading.

[[File:LiquidThreads Thread Menu Summarize.png]]

&lt;translate&gt;
== Administrative tasks == &lt;!--T:10--&gt;

=== Toggling LiquidThreads on a page === &lt;!--T:11--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
To activate LiquidThreads on a specific page on a wiki where LiquidThreads is opt-in, add 
 &lt;kbd&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#useliquidthreads:1}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/kbd&gt; 
to the page's source code. To deactivate LiquidThreads on a specific page on a wiki where LiquidThreads is opt-out add 
 &lt;kbd&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#useliquidthreads:0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/kbd&gt; 
to the page's source code.

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Removing a post === &lt;!--T:12--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
To remove a post, [[#Editing a post|edit it]], and remove all of its content.
If it has no replies with content in them, then it will not be shown.
The previous content of the post will still be available in its page history.

Administrators can delete individual posts.
If you are one, then to do this, move your mouse over the post, and then over the arrow on the toolbar.
Then, select &quot;Delete&quot; from the options.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Delete.png]]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Restoring a post === &lt;!--T:13--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
To restore a previously-removed post, you should [[#Viewing thread history|view the thread's history]], and find the revision before that thread was removed. [TBC]

[[Category:Extension help|LiquidThreads{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>gnfdcwaq4udhyi0ijmu0yug8n9cnk6o</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/pt</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>43732</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402259</id>
      <parentid>5400752</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14567" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Está disponível informação atualizada em Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se clicar [[Special:preferences|Preferências]] no topo da página à direita quando tiver iniciado uma sessão na wiki, pode alterar as suas preferências. Ser-lhe-á apresentada a secção «Dados do utilizador» e uma série de separadores no topo para alterar outras configurações.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-username'' O seu nome de utilizador. Só os burocratas podem alterar o seu nome de utilizador e precisa de estar instalada na wiki a extensão {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Nas wikis da Wikimedia, este link permite-lhe gerir aplicações externas que têm permissão para aceder à sua conta. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Consulte a [[Help:OAuth|ajuda do OAuth]] para mais informações.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-prefs-edits'' Quantas edições já realizou. Nem todas as wikis apresentam isto.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|ver abaixo]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|ver abaixo]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para alterar a sua palavra-passe, introduza a palavra-passe antiga na primeira caixa e a nova nas duas últimas. Se pretende que este ''site'' se recorde de si na próxima vez que entrar na wiki, marque «Recordar os meus dados neste computador». Note que esta funcionalidade exige que tenha possibilitado o uso de ''cookies'' no ''browser'' e, se o ''cookie'' for apagado ou expirar, deixará de ser recordado pelo ''site''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Conta global ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A partir das suas preferências pode selecionar a língua em que prefere que a interface seja apresentada. Só botões como «editar» e «discussão», e algumas páginas na barra lateral, serão afetados. Na maioria das páginas, o texto principal da página não será alterado por esta definição, embora em algumas o seja, como é o caso de páginas na Meta Wiki da Wikimedia.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* Línguas
* Como prefere ser descrito?
* Mais definições de idioma

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* A sua assinatura atual
* Assinatura nova
** Tratar como texto wiki

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Se forneceu um endereço de correio eletrónico, terá de clicar o botão «Confirmar endereço de correio eletrónico» para ativar estas funcionalidades. Receberá um correio eletrónico; abra-o e clique o ''link'' fornecido para ativar as seguintes funcionalidades.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* Confirmação do endereço de correio eletrónico&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Isto permite que outros utilizadores registados lhe enviem mensagens por correio eletrónico usando a hiperligação «Enviar correio eletrónico a este utilizador» na barra lateral da sua página de utilizador. Os correios são enviados usando uma interface ''web'' e o seu endereço de correio eletrónico não é revelado a um remetente até que responda por correio eletrónico.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Isso permite que os utilizadores sem as permissões de utilizadores autoconfirmados lhe enviem correio eletrónico.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Esta opção permite-lhe especificar os utilizadores que não lhe podem enviar mensagens diretas. Estes não verão a hiperligação &quot;Enviar correio eletrónico a este utilizador&quot; na barra lateral da sua página de utilizador. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Aqui pode escolher o tema que deseja utilizar. Pode antever o aspeto dos temas antes de escolhê-los, clicando o ''link'' «{{int|skin-preview}}» ao lado de cada tema. Consulte {{ll|Help:Skins}} para mais detalhes, por favor.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Formato da data e desvio da hora ===

Normalmente, é apresentado o seguinte, dependendo das preferências:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Aqui pode determinar como as imagens serão apresentadas. As imagens apresentadas através da inserção de um URL direto (se esta possibilidade estiver ativada na wiki), não serão afetadas por esta definição.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Esta definição permite-lhe escolher o tamanho que a antevisão de imagens terá nas páginas «Image:». Se sabe qual é a resolução atual do seu monitor pode querer definir este tamanho um pouco menor do que o do ecrã. Se tem uma ligação lenta (por ''modem'') pode querer limitá-lo a 320x240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Define qual será o tamanho das miniaturas (''thumbnails''). Esta definição não afeta miniaturas cuja dimensão foi definida por um editor da página, nem pode ampliar imagens para além das suas dimensões originais.
* Utilizar o Media Viewer: nas wikis da Wikimedia, esta definição (ligada, por padrão) determina se o [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] deve ser usado para oferecer uma experiência de visionamento de imagens mais suave.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Aqui pode controlar como são mostradas as equações matemáticas descritas usando o elemento {{tag|math|open}}. Fórmulas matemáticas que sejam carregadas na forma de imagens ou escritas fora do elemento ''math'' não serão afetadas por esta definição. Note que as preferências para as fórmulas matemática só serão visíveis se a extensão $ext for instalada.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Estas definições permitem controlar a edição de páginas, incluindo se quer adicionar automaticamente às suas páginas vigiadas as páginas que editou ou criou.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Aqui pode especificar quantos dias serão mostrados nas [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|mudanças recentes]]. Note que a lista será prematuramente interrompida se o número de edições for excedido (ver abaixo).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Aqui pode especificar o número de edições que serão mostradas.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Isto permite-lhe esconder as mudanças etiquetadas como edições menores (consulte {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Dado que alguns utilizadores farão rapidamente muitas alterações pequenas para atualizar predefinições ou corrigir palavras mal soletradas, esta preferência pode ser útil para escondê-las. Também pode ligar esta funcionalidade temporariamente na própria página (consulte {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Esta definição condensa todas as edições de cada página numa única entrada. Como indicado, isto requer que o JavaScript esteja ativado no seu ''browser''. Consulte {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} para mais informação sobre esta funcionalidade.
* Mostrar as edições da Wikidata nas modificações recentes. Em projetos Wikimedia selecionados onde estão disponíveis dados da [[d:|Wikidata]], esta opção permite-lhe ver mudanças aos elementos Wikidata ligados a páginas da sua wiki, para além daquelas feitas às páginas da própria wiki. Isto pode ajudar a identificar vandalismo na Wikidata que possa ser visto na sua wiki.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Estas definições controlam o comportamento da lista de páginas vigiadas (consulte {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}). A maioria destas opções também estão disponíveis na própria página das páginas vigiadas mas, ao defini-las nas suas preferências, controla o comportamento padrão, isto é, sempre que visitar a página ela fará o mesmo.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Mostrar edições da Wikidata da sua lista de páginas vigiadas: em projetos Wikimedia selecionados onde estão disponíveis dados da [[d:|Wikidata]], esta opção permite-lhe ver mudanças aos elementos Wikidata ligados a páginas da sua wiki, para além daquelas feitas às páginas da própria wiki. Isto pode ajudar a identificar vandalismo na Wikidata que possa ser visto na sua wiki.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Chave secreta das páginas vigiadas: esta chave é usada para gerar um [[w:en:RSS feed|''feed'' RSS]] a partir da sua lista de páginas vigiadas. Qualquer pessoa que conheça esta chave pode usá-la para aceder à sua lista de páginas vigiadas. Se a chave for descoberta por alguém, pode usar o link &quot;Clique aqui para redefini-la&quot; para criar uma chave nova. Quando o fizer, terá de editar o URL de subscrição do ''feed'' no seu leitor de notícias, para usar a chave nova.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Definições padrão para pesquisas, incluindo quantos resultados devem ser mostrados e quanto contexto para cada resultado. Marque as caixas dos espaços nominais que deseja que sejam pesquisados, na primeira vez que pesquisa alguma coisa. Pode alterar estes espaços nominais ao fazer uma pesquisa, se marcar ou desmarcar as caixas ao fundo da página de resultados.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
Nas wikis da Wikimedia, o separador '''Funcionalidades Beta''' permite-lhe ativar funcionalidades experimentais antes que estas sejam disponibilizadas para todos.
Se ativar alguma destas funcionalidades deve preparar-se para encontrar defeitos e problemas, e podem ocorrer mudanças repentinas na funcionalidade à medida que o desenvolvimento progrida.

Cada funcionalidade tem um link de &quot;discussão&quot;, de modo a poder fazer sugestões e reportar quaisquer problemas.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para mais informações, consulte [[About Beta Features]].
&lt;/div&gt;

* Ativar automaticamente todas as novas funcionalidades beta: se ligar esta opção, as funcionalidades serão ativadas logo que sejam adicionadas ao sistema Funcionalidades Beta.

== Consulte também ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1fxx9oz2a49pk87v2mgoodm6ijr2snu</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402307</id>
      <parentid>5402259</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:07:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14512" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Está disponível informação atualizada em Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se clicar [[Special:preferences|Preferências]] no topo da página à direita quando tiver iniciado uma sessão na wiki, pode alterar as suas preferências. Ser-lhe-á apresentada a secção «Dados do utilizador» e uma série de separadores no topo para alterar outras configurações.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-username'' O seu nome de utilizador. Só os burocratas podem alterar o seu nome de utilizador e precisa de estar instalada na wiki a extensão {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Nas wikis da Wikimedia, este link permite-lhe gerir aplicações externas que têm permissão para aceder à sua conta. Consulte {{ll|Help:OAuth}} para mais informação.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-prefs-edits'' Quantas edições já realizou. Nem todas as wikis apresentam isto.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|ver abaixo]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|ver abaixo]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para alterar a sua palavra-passe, introduza a palavra-passe antiga na primeira caixa e a nova nas duas últimas. Se pretende que este ''site'' se recorde de si na próxima vez que entrar na wiki, marque «Recordar os meus dados neste computador». Note que esta funcionalidade exige que tenha possibilitado o uso de ''cookies'' no ''browser'' e, se o ''cookie'' for apagado ou expirar, deixará de ser recordado pelo ''site''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Conta global ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A partir das suas preferências pode selecionar a língua em que prefere que a interface seja apresentada. Só botões como «editar» e «discussão», e algumas páginas na barra lateral, serão afetados. Na maioria das páginas, o texto principal da página não será alterado por esta definição, embora em algumas o seja, como é o caso de páginas na Meta Wiki da Wikimedia.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* Línguas
* Como prefere ser descrito?
* Mais definições de idioma

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* A sua assinatura atual
* Assinatura nova
** Tratar como texto wiki

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Se forneceu um endereço de correio eletrónico, terá de clicar o botão «Confirmar endereço de correio eletrónico» para ativar estas funcionalidades. Receberá um correio eletrónico; abra-o e clique o ''link'' fornecido para ativar as seguintes funcionalidades.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* Confirmação do endereço de correio eletrónico&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Isto permite que outros utilizadores registados lhe enviem mensagens por correio eletrónico usando a hiperligação «Enviar correio eletrónico a este utilizador» na barra lateral da sua página de utilizador. Os correios são enviados usando uma interface ''web'' e o seu endereço de correio eletrónico não é revelado a um remetente até que responda por correio eletrónico.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Isso permite que os utilizadores sem as permissões de utilizadores autoconfirmados lhe enviem correio eletrónico.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Esta opção permite-lhe especificar os utilizadores que não lhe podem enviar mensagens diretas. Estes não verão a hiperligação &quot;Enviar correio eletrónico a este utilizador&quot; na barra lateral da sua página de utilizador. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Aqui pode escolher o tema que deseja utilizar. Pode antever o aspeto dos temas antes de escolhê-los, clicando o ''link'' «{{int|skin-preview}}» ao lado de cada tema. Consulte {{ll|Help:Skins}} para mais detalhes, por favor.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Formato da data e desvio da hora ===

Normalmente, é apresentado o seguinte, dependendo das preferências:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Aqui pode determinar como as imagens serão apresentadas. As imagens apresentadas através da inserção de um URL direto (se esta possibilidade estiver ativada na wiki), não serão afetadas por esta definição.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Esta definição permite-lhe escolher o tamanho que a antevisão de imagens terá nas páginas «Image:». Se sabe qual é a resolução atual do seu monitor pode querer definir este tamanho um pouco menor do que o do ecrã. Se tem uma ligação lenta (por ''modem'') pode querer limitá-lo a 320x240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Define qual será o tamanho das miniaturas (''thumbnails''). Esta definição não afeta miniaturas cuja dimensão foi definida por um editor da página, nem pode ampliar imagens para além das suas dimensões originais.
* Utilizar o Media Viewer: nas wikis da Wikimedia, esta definição (ligada, por padrão) determina se o [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] deve ser usado para oferecer uma experiência de visionamento de imagens mais suave.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Aqui pode controlar como são mostradas as equações matemáticas descritas usando o elemento {{tag|math|open}}. Fórmulas matemáticas que sejam carregadas na forma de imagens ou escritas fora do elemento ''math'' não serão afetadas por esta definição. Note que as preferências para as fórmulas matemática só serão visíveis se a extensão $ext for instalada.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Estas definições permitem controlar a edição de páginas, incluindo se quer adicionar automaticamente às suas páginas vigiadas as páginas que editou ou criou.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Aqui pode especificar quantos dias serão mostrados nas [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|mudanças recentes]]. Note que a lista será prematuramente interrompida se o número de edições for excedido (ver abaixo).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Aqui pode especificar o número de edições que serão mostradas.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Isto permite-lhe esconder as mudanças etiquetadas como edições menores (consulte {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Dado que alguns utilizadores farão rapidamente muitas alterações pequenas para atualizar predefinições ou corrigir palavras mal soletradas, esta preferência pode ser útil para escondê-las. Também pode ligar esta funcionalidade temporariamente na própria página (consulte {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Esta definição condensa todas as edições de cada página numa única entrada. Como indicado, isto requer que o JavaScript esteja ativado no seu ''browser''. Consulte {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} para mais informação sobre esta funcionalidade.
* Mostrar as edições da Wikidata nas modificações recentes. Em projetos Wikimedia selecionados onde estão disponíveis dados da [[d:|Wikidata]], esta opção permite-lhe ver mudanças aos elementos Wikidata ligados a páginas da sua wiki, para além daquelas feitas às páginas da própria wiki. Isto pode ajudar a identificar vandalismo na Wikidata que possa ser visto na sua wiki.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Estas definições controlam o comportamento da lista de páginas vigiadas (consulte {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}). A maioria destas opções também estão disponíveis na própria página das páginas vigiadas mas, ao defini-las nas suas preferências, controla o comportamento padrão, isto é, sempre que visitar a página ela fará o mesmo.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Mostrar edições da Wikidata da sua lista de páginas vigiadas: em projetos Wikimedia selecionados onde estão disponíveis dados da [[d:|Wikidata]], esta opção permite-lhe ver mudanças aos elementos Wikidata ligados a páginas da sua wiki, para além daquelas feitas às páginas da própria wiki. Isto pode ajudar a identificar vandalismo na Wikidata que possa ser visto na sua wiki.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Chave secreta das páginas vigiadas: esta chave é usada para gerar um [[w:en:RSS feed|''feed'' RSS]] a partir da sua lista de páginas vigiadas. Qualquer pessoa que conheça esta chave pode usá-la para aceder à sua lista de páginas vigiadas. Se a chave for descoberta por alguém, pode usar o link &quot;Clique aqui para redefini-la&quot; para criar uma chave nova. Quando o fizer, terá de editar o URL de subscrição do ''feed'' no seu leitor de notícias, para usar a chave nova.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Definições padrão para pesquisas, incluindo quantos resultados devem ser mostrados e quanto contexto para cada resultado. Marque as caixas dos espaços nominais que deseja que sejam pesquisados, na primeira vez que pesquisa alguma coisa. Pode alterar estes espaços nominais ao fazer uma pesquisa, se marcar ou desmarcar as caixas ao fundo da página de resultados.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
Nas wikis da Wikimedia, o separador '''Funcionalidades Beta''' permite-lhe ativar funcionalidades experimentais antes que estas sejam disponibilizadas para todos.
Se ativar alguma destas funcionalidades deve preparar-se para encontrar defeitos e problemas, e podem ocorrer mudanças repentinas na funcionalidade à medida que o desenvolvimento progrida.

Cada funcionalidade tem um link de &quot;discussão&quot;, de modo a poder fazer sugestões e reportar quaisquer problemas.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para mais informações, consulte [[About Beta Features]].
&lt;/div&gt;

* Ativar automaticamente todas as novas funcionalidades beta: se ligar esta opção, as funcionalidades serão ativadas logo que sejam adicionadas ao sistema Funcionalidades Beta.

== Consulte também ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>shrnbynscjz0c0816yfj7d4mh0uuzc2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:WikimediaDownload/es</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>46916</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402831</id>
      <parentid>4708822</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:21:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>fix</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3459" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;white-space: nowrap&quot;&gt;{{#if: {{{nosnapshot|}}}|
| [[Special:ExtensionDistributor/{{{1|{{PAGENAME:{{translatable}}}}}}}|'''Descargar la extensión.''']] &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;!--

--&gt;Git &lt;sup&gt;[&lt;nowiki/&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|?]]&lt;nowiki/&gt;]&lt;/sup&gt;: 
* {{DownloadGitHubSnapshot|1={{{1|{{PAGENAME:{{translatable}}}}}}}|2=Descargar desde master de Git}}
* [[git:mediawiki/extensions/{{{1|{{urlencode:{{PAGENAME:{{translatable}}}}|WIKI}}}}}|Explorar el repositorio]] (&lt;!--
	--&gt;{{#if:{{{phab|}}}|[[phab:diffusion/{{{phab}}}|Phabricator]] ·&amp;nbsp;}}&lt;!--
	--&gt;[https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-{{{1|{{urlencode:{{PAGENAME:{{translatable}}}}|WIKI}}}}} GitHub]&lt;!--
--&gt;)
* [[git:mediawiki/extensions/{{{1|{{urlencode:{{PAGENAME:{{translatable}}}}|WIKI}}}}}/+log/master|historial de cambios]]
* [https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-{{{1|{{urlencode:{{PAGENAME:{{translatable}}}}}}}}}/graphs/contributors Colaboradores de repositorio (GitHub)]
{{#if: {{{disabled|}}}||
* [[gerrit:q/project:mediawiki/extensions/{{{1|{{urlencode:{{PAGENAME:{{translatable}}}}|WIKI}}}}}|revisión de código]]
}}&lt;!-- endif disabled

--&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;includeonly&gt;{{#switch:{{{server|}}}
|svn=&lt;span style=&quot;display:none&quot;&gt;[[Template:WikimediaDownload/svn]]&lt;/span&gt;
|gerrit=&lt;span style=&quot;display:none&quot;&gt;[[Template:WikimediaDownload/gerrit]]&lt;/span&gt;
|gerritonly=&lt;span style=&quot;display:none&quot;&gt;[[Template:WikimediaDownload/gerritonly]]&lt;/span&gt;
}}&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#ifeq:{{{templatemode|}}}|nocats|&lt;!-- do nothing --&gt;
|&lt;!--else--&gt;[[Category:Extensions in Wikimedia version control{{#translation:}}]]}}&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{Documentation|content=

== Uso ==
Transclude La plantilla dentro de una página de Extensión para crear enlaces útiles a un Gerrit repositorio hosted por Wikimedia.
Es específicamente diseñado para uso en el parámetro de &lt;code&gt;descarga&lt;/code&gt; de $plantilla y categorizes a $gato.

{{Note|1=Los espacios tienen que ser acolchados con '_' underscores.}}

Para esconder el enlace a [[Special:ExtensionDistributor]], añade puesto nosnapshot=1.
Esto es útil cuándo una extensión sólo existe en una rama, desde entonces actualmente el {{ll|Extension:ExtensionDistributor|ExtensionDistributor}} diría que la extensión no existe debido a no siendo en maestro.

&lt;pre&gt;{{WikimediaDownload|SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{WikimediaDownload|SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi|templatemode=nocats}}

-------

&lt;pre&gt;{{WikimediaDownload|SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi|nosnapshot=1}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{WikimediaDownload|SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi|nosnapshot=1|templatemode=nocats}}

-------

&lt;pre&gt;{{WikimediaDownload|SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi|disabled=1}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{WikimediaDownload|SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi|disabled=1|templatemode=nocats}}

-------

&lt;pre&gt;{{WikimediaDownload|SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi|phab=ESHG}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{WikimediaDownload|SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi|phab=ESHG|templatemode=nocats}}

== Véase también ==
* {{ll|Template:WikimediaGitCheckout}}
* {{ll|Template:WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
}}

&lt;small&gt;Maintenance:
[[Special:WhatLinksHere/Template:WikimediaDownload/svn|server=svn]],
[[Special:WhatLinksHere/Template:WikimediaDownload/gerrit|server=gerrit]],
[[Special:WhatLinksHere/Template:WikimediaDownload/gerritonly|server=gerritonly]],
&lt;/small&gt;
[[Category:Link templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Git{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extensions in Wikimedia version control{{#translation:}}|*]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>53o8hxl8szm0xpr0shzauia01r3e44d</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/id</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>52712</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402247</id>
      <parentid>5400739</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11680" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Informasi terbarutersedia di Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Menekan tautan [[Special:preferences|Preferensi]] di kanan atas setelah masuk akan memungkinkan Anda untuk mengubah preferensi.
Anda akan melihat tampilan bagian Profil pengguna berikut bilah tab di bagian atas untuk mengganti jenis setelan lainnya.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Nama pengguna yang dipilih sewaktu mendaftar. Hanya bisa diubah oleh birokrat dengan menggunakan ekstensi {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Daftar kelompok pengguna yang Anda masuki.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Di wiki Wikimedia, tautan ini memperbolehkan anda mengelola aplikasi luar yang diizinkan untuk mengakses akun anda. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lihat [[Help:Oauth/id|bantuan Oauth]] untuk informasi lebih lanjut.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Berapa banyak suntingan yang Anda buat. Tidak semua wiki memiliki ini.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || Kapan akun Anda didaftarkan.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|lihat dibawah]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|lihat dibawah]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Mengatur otentikasi dua-faktor
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Mengatur preferensi global.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Untuk mengubah kata sandi Anda, masukkan kata sandi lama di kotak pertama dan kata sandi baru Anda di kotak yang kedua.
Jika anda ingin situs ini mengingat masuknya anda, contreng &quot;Ingat log masuk saya di komputer ini&quot;.
Catat bahwa fungsi ini membutuhkan kuki yang tersedia di peramban anda, dan jika kuki anda dibersihkan atau kedaluwarsa anda tidak akan diingat lagi.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Akun global ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
Dari preferensi Anda, Anda bisa memilih bahasa apa yang ingin anda jadikan sebagai antarmuka.
Hanya tombol seperti 'sunting' dan 'bicara', pada tambahan beberapa halaman di bilah samping, akan terpengaruh.
Teks utama dari halaman akan tidak berubah dikarenakan perubahan besar halaman, walaupun ada beberapa halaman yang seharusnya berubah, seperti Meta Wiki Wikimedia.

* Bahasa
* Bagaimana anda ingin dideskripsikan
* Pengaturan bahasa lanjutan

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Tanda tangan anda sekarang
* Tanda tangan baru
** Perlakukan sebagai teks wiki

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Jika anda menyediakan alamat surel, anda harus mengklik tombol &quot;Konfirmasi alamat&quot; untuk menggunakan fungsi berikut. Anda akan menerima surel; buka saja dan ikuti tautan untuk menyediakan fungsi berikut.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Konfirmasi surel ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ini memperbolehkan pengguna terdaftar lainnya untukl mengirimi anda surel menggunakan tautan &quot;Kirimi surel pengguna ini&quot; pada ''sidebar'' halaman pengguna anda. Surel dikirim melalui antarmuka web, dan alamat surel anda tidak tiberitahukan kepada pengirim sampai anda membalasnya.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Ini memperbolehkan pengguna tanpa izin autokonfirmasi mengirimi anda surel.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Pilihan ini memperbolehkan anda untuk menentukan pengguna mana yang tidak bisa mengirimi anda surel langsung. Mereka tidak bisa melihat tautan &quot;Kirimi pengguna ini surel&quot; pada ''sidebar'' halaman pengguna anda. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Disini anda bisa memilih kulit yang ingin anda pakai. Anda bisa menayangkan kulit tersedia sebelum memilih mereka, dengan mengklik tautan &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; di sebelah setiap kulit. Mohon baca {{ll|Help:Skins}} untuk detail lebih lanjut.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Pengaturan format tanggal dan waktu ===

Berikut tersedia secara normal bergantung pada preferensi:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Disini anda bisa menentukan bagaimana gambar akan ditampilkan. Gambar ditampilkan berdasar penempelan URL langsung (jika wiki menyediakan) tidak akan terpengaruh oleh pengaturan ini.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Pengaturan ini memungkinkan Anda memilih seberapa besar pratayang gambar akan berada di Image :halaman. Jika Anda tahu apa resolusi layar Anda saat ini, Anda mungkin ingin mengatur ini ke satu atau dua ukuran lebih kecil dari layar Anda sendiri. Jika Anda memiliki koneksi yang lambat (seperti dial-up), Anda mungkin ingin membatasinya hingga 320 × 240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Tentukan seberapa besar Anda ingin thumbnail muncul. Pengaturan ini tidak akan memengaruhi thumbnail dengan dimensi yang ditentukan oleh editor, juga tidak dapat meningkatkan gambar di luar dimensi aslinya.
* Aktifkan Penampil Media. Di wiki Wikimedia, pengaturan ini (menyala secara default) menentukan apakah [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Penampil Media]] sebaiknya digunakan untuk memberikan pengalaman melihat gambar yang lebih mulus.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Di sini Anda bisa mengatur bagaimana persamaan matematika yang digambarkan menggunakan tag {{tag|math|open}} akan ditampilkan.
Formula matemtika yang diunggah sebagai gambar atau ditulis di luar tag math tidak akan dipengaruhi pengaturan ini.
Perhatikan bahwa preferensi matematika hanya bisa dilihat apabila {{ll|Extension:Math}} dipasang.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Berikut ini adalah pengaturan yang mengendalikan penyuntingan halaman, seperti apakah halaman yang disunting atau dibuat secara otomatis dipantau atau tidak.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Di sini Anda bisa menentukan seberapa jauh ke masa lampau halaman [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|perubahan terbaru]] akan mencari perubahan. Perhatikan bahwa daftarnya akan langsung berhenti jika banyak suntingan telah melewati batas maksimalnya (lihat di bawah).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Di sini Anda bisa menentukan berapa banyak suntingan yang ditampilkan.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Ini memungkinkan Anda menyembunyikan suntingan yang ditandai sebagai kecil (lihat {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Karena beberapa pengguna melakukan banyak suntingan kecil untuk memperbarui templat atau memperbaiki kesalahan pengejaan, Anda mungkin merasa pengraturan ini berguna. Anda juga bisa menyalakan ini secara sementara dari halaman perubahan terbaru (lihat {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Perubahan terbaru yang ditingkatkan memadatkan suntingan-suntingan menjadi daftar per-halaman. Seperti yang diindikasikan, ini memerlukan Anda menyalakan JavaScript. Lihat {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} untuk informasi lebih lanjut mengenai fitur ini.
* Tampilkan suntingan Wikidata di perubahan terbaru: Di proyek Wikimedia tertentu di mana data dari [[d:|Wikidata]] disediakan, pilihan ini memungkinkan Anda melihat perubahan item Wikidata yang terhubung dengan halaman di Wiki Anda, serta perubahan di halaman Wiki itu sendiri. Ini bisa membantu menemukan vandalisme di Wikidata yang bisa dilihat di Wiki Anda.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Berikut ini adalah pengaturan yang mengendalikan daftar pantauan (Lihat {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
Kebanyakan dari pilihan ini tersedia juga di tampilan daftar pantauan, tetapi dengan mengatur mereka di preferensi Anda, Anda mengendalikan kelakuan bawaan dari daftar pantauan, artinya daftar pantauan akan melakukan tindakan yang sama setiap kali Anda mengunjungi halamannya.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Tampilkan suntingan Wikidata pada daftar pantauan Anda: Di proyek Wikimedia tertentu di mana data dari [[d:|Wikidata]] tersedia, pilihan ini memungkinkan Anda melihat perubahan item Wikidata yang terhubung dengan halaman di wiki Anda, serta perubahan halaman wiki itu sendiri. Ini bisa membantu menemukan vandalisme di Wikidata yang bisa dilihat di wiki Anda.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Token daftar pantauan: Token ini digunakan untuk membuat [[w:id:umpan web|umpan]] [[w:id:RSS|RSS]] dari daftar pantauan Anda. Semua orang yang mengetahui token ini bisa menggunakannya untuk mengakses daftar pantauan Anda. Jika token ini ditemukan oleh orah lain, Anda bisa menekan pranala &quot;Tekan di sini jika Anda perlu mengatur ulangnya&quot; untuk membuat token baru. Setelah Anda melakukan ini, Anda perlu menyunting URL langganan umpan Anda di pembaca umpan Anda ke akun untuk token yang baru.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Pengaturan bawaan untuk pencarian di antaranya adalah berapa banyak hasil yang ditampilkan dan berapa banyak konteks yang ditampilkan untuk masing-masing hasil.
Centang kotak di sebelah ruang nama yang Anda ingin tampilkan ketika Anda pertama kali mencari sesuatu.
Anda bisa mengabaikan ini ketika melakukan pencarian, dengan mencentang dan menghapus centang di kotak yang terdapat pada bagian bawah layar hasil pencarian.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
Di wiki Wikimedia, tab '''Fitur beta''' memungkinkan Anda menyalakan fitur percobaan sebelum mereka disediakan kepada semua orang.
Jika Anda menyalakan fitur berikut, Anda harus siap menghadapi ''bug'' dan masalah, dan Anda mungkin akan melihat perubahan tiba-tiba dalam tampilan atau cara kerja fitur seiring pengembangannya dilanjutkan.

Setiap fitur memiliki pranala &quot;pembicaraan&quot; di sebelahnya, jadi Anda bisa menawarkan saran atau melaporkan masalah.

Lihat [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|Mengenai Fitur Beta]] untuk informasi lebih lanjut.

* Secara otomatis aktifkan sebagian besar fitur beta: Jika Anda menyalakan pilihan ini, fitur beta baru akan menjadi aktif begitu mereka ditambahkan ke sitem Fitur Beta.

== Lihat pula ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>lwxcglwvgi8pakay5omj6j82rzpa25d</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402297</id>
      <parentid>5402247</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:06:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11626" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Informasi terbarutersedia di Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Menekan tautan [[Special:preferences|Preferensi]] di kanan atas setelah masuk akan memungkinkan Anda untuk mengubah preferensi.
Anda akan melihat tampilan bagian Profil pengguna berikut bilah tab di bagian atas untuk mengganti jenis setelan lainnya.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Nama pengguna yang dipilih sewaktu mendaftar. Hanya bisa diubah oleh birokrat dengan menggunakan ekstensi {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Daftar kelompok pengguna yang Anda masuki.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Di wiki Wikimedia, tautan ini memperbolehkan anda mengelola aplikasi luar yang diizinkan untuk mengakses akun anda. Lihat {{ll|Help:OAuth}} untuk informasi lebih lanjut.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Berapa banyak suntingan yang Anda buat. Tidak semua wiki memiliki ini.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || Kapan akun Anda didaftarkan.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|lihat dibawah]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|lihat dibawah]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Mengatur otentikasi dua-faktor
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Mengatur preferensi global.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Untuk mengubah kata sandi Anda, masukkan kata sandi lama di kotak pertama dan kata sandi baru Anda di kotak yang kedua.
Jika anda ingin situs ini mengingat masuknya anda, contreng &quot;Ingat log masuk saya di komputer ini&quot;.
Catat bahwa fungsi ini membutuhkan kuki yang tersedia di peramban anda, dan jika kuki anda dibersihkan atau kedaluwarsa anda tidak akan diingat lagi.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Akun global ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
Dari preferensi Anda, Anda bisa memilih bahasa apa yang ingin anda jadikan sebagai antarmuka.
Hanya tombol seperti 'sunting' dan 'bicara', pada tambahan beberapa halaman di bilah samping, akan terpengaruh.
Teks utama dari halaman akan tidak berubah dikarenakan perubahan besar halaman, walaupun ada beberapa halaman yang seharusnya berubah, seperti Meta Wiki Wikimedia.

* Bahasa
* Bagaimana anda ingin dideskripsikan
* Pengaturan bahasa lanjutan

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Tanda tangan anda sekarang
* Tanda tangan baru
** Perlakukan sebagai teks wiki

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Jika anda menyediakan alamat surel, anda harus mengklik tombol &quot;Konfirmasi alamat&quot; untuk menggunakan fungsi berikut. Anda akan menerima surel; buka saja dan ikuti tautan untuk menyediakan fungsi berikut.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Konfirmasi surel ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ini memperbolehkan pengguna terdaftar lainnya untukl mengirimi anda surel menggunakan tautan &quot;Kirimi surel pengguna ini&quot; pada ''sidebar'' halaman pengguna anda. Surel dikirim melalui antarmuka web, dan alamat surel anda tidak tiberitahukan kepada pengirim sampai anda membalasnya.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Ini memperbolehkan pengguna tanpa izin autokonfirmasi mengirimi anda surel.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Pilihan ini memperbolehkan anda untuk menentukan pengguna mana yang tidak bisa mengirimi anda surel langsung. Mereka tidak bisa melihat tautan &quot;Kirimi pengguna ini surel&quot; pada ''sidebar'' halaman pengguna anda. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Disini anda bisa memilih kulit yang ingin anda pakai. Anda bisa menayangkan kulit tersedia sebelum memilih mereka, dengan mengklik tautan &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; di sebelah setiap kulit. Mohon baca {{ll|Help:Skins}} untuk detail lebih lanjut.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Pengaturan format tanggal dan waktu ===

Berikut tersedia secara normal bergantung pada preferensi:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Disini anda bisa menentukan bagaimana gambar akan ditampilkan. Gambar ditampilkan berdasar penempelan URL langsung (jika wiki menyediakan) tidak akan terpengaruh oleh pengaturan ini.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Pengaturan ini memungkinkan Anda memilih seberapa besar pratayang gambar akan berada di Image :halaman. Jika Anda tahu apa resolusi layar Anda saat ini, Anda mungkin ingin mengatur ini ke satu atau dua ukuran lebih kecil dari layar Anda sendiri. Jika Anda memiliki koneksi yang lambat (seperti dial-up), Anda mungkin ingin membatasinya hingga 320 × 240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Tentukan seberapa besar Anda ingin thumbnail muncul. Pengaturan ini tidak akan memengaruhi thumbnail dengan dimensi yang ditentukan oleh editor, juga tidak dapat meningkatkan gambar di luar dimensi aslinya.
* Aktifkan Penampil Media. Di wiki Wikimedia, pengaturan ini (menyala secara default) menentukan apakah [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Penampil Media]] sebaiknya digunakan untuk memberikan pengalaman melihat gambar yang lebih mulus.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Di sini Anda bisa mengatur bagaimana persamaan matematika yang digambarkan menggunakan tag {{tag|math|open}} akan ditampilkan.
Formula matemtika yang diunggah sebagai gambar atau ditulis di luar tag math tidak akan dipengaruhi pengaturan ini.
Perhatikan bahwa preferensi matematika hanya bisa dilihat apabila {{ll|Extension:Math}} dipasang.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Berikut ini adalah pengaturan yang mengendalikan penyuntingan halaman, seperti apakah halaman yang disunting atau dibuat secara otomatis dipantau atau tidak.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Di sini Anda bisa menentukan seberapa jauh ke masa lampau halaman [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|perubahan terbaru]] akan mencari perubahan. Perhatikan bahwa daftarnya akan langsung berhenti jika banyak suntingan telah melewati batas maksimalnya (lihat di bawah).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Di sini Anda bisa menentukan berapa banyak suntingan yang ditampilkan.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Ini memungkinkan Anda menyembunyikan suntingan yang ditandai sebagai kecil (lihat {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Karena beberapa pengguna melakukan banyak suntingan kecil untuk memperbarui templat atau memperbaiki kesalahan pengejaan, Anda mungkin merasa pengraturan ini berguna. Anda juga bisa menyalakan ini secara sementara dari halaman perubahan terbaru (lihat {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Perubahan terbaru yang ditingkatkan memadatkan suntingan-suntingan menjadi daftar per-halaman. Seperti yang diindikasikan, ini memerlukan Anda menyalakan JavaScript. Lihat {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} untuk informasi lebih lanjut mengenai fitur ini.
* Tampilkan suntingan Wikidata di perubahan terbaru: Di proyek Wikimedia tertentu di mana data dari [[d:|Wikidata]] disediakan, pilihan ini memungkinkan Anda melihat perubahan item Wikidata yang terhubung dengan halaman di Wiki Anda, serta perubahan di halaman Wiki itu sendiri. Ini bisa membantu menemukan vandalisme di Wikidata yang bisa dilihat di Wiki Anda.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Berikut ini adalah pengaturan yang mengendalikan daftar pantauan (Lihat {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
Kebanyakan dari pilihan ini tersedia juga di tampilan daftar pantauan, tetapi dengan mengatur mereka di preferensi Anda, Anda mengendalikan kelakuan bawaan dari daftar pantauan, artinya daftar pantauan akan melakukan tindakan yang sama setiap kali Anda mengunjungi halamannya.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Tampilkan suntingan Wikidata pada daftar pantauan Anda: Di proyek Wikimedia tertentu di mana data dari [[d:|Wikidata]] tersedia, pilihan ini memungkinkan Anda melihat perubahan item Wikidata yang terhubung dengan halaman di wiki Anda, serta perubahan halaman wiki itu sendiri. Ini bisa membantu menemukan vandalisme di Wikidata yang bisa dilihat di wiki Anda.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Token daftar pantauan: Token ini digunakan untuk membuat [[w:id:umpan web|umpan]] [[w:id:RSS|RSS]] dari daftar pantauan Anda. Semua orang yang mengetahui token ini bisa menggunakannya untuk mengakses daftar pantauan Anda. Jika token ini ditemukan oleh orah lain, Anda bisa menekan pranala &quot;Tekan di sini jika Anda perlu mengatur ulangnya&quot; untuk membuat token baru. Setelah Anda melakukan ini, Anda perlu menyunting URL langganan umpan Anda di pembaca umpan Anda ke akun untuk token yang baru.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Pengaturan bawaan untuk pencarian di antaranya adalah berapa banyak hasil yang ditampilkan dan berapa banyak konteks yang ditampilkan untuk masing-masing hasil.
Centang kotak di sebelah ruang nama yang Anda ingin tampilkan ketika Anda pertama kali mencari sesuatu.
Anda bisa mengabaikan ini ketika melakukan pencarian, dengan mencentang dan menghapus centang di kotak yang terdapat pada bagian bawah layar hasil pencarian.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
Di wiki Wikimedia, tab '''Fitur beta''' memungkinkan Anda menyalakan fitur percobaan sebelum mereka disediakan kepada semua orang.
Jika Anda menyalakan fitur berikut, Anda harus siap menghadapi ''bug'' dan masalah, dan Anda mungkin akan melihat perubahan tiba-tiba dalam tampilan atau cara kerja fitur seiring pengembangannya dilanjutkan.

Setiap fitur memiliki pranala &quot;pembicaraan&quot; di sebelahnya, jadi Anda bisa menawarkan saran atau melaporkan masalah.

Lihat [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|Mengenai Fitur Beta]] untuk informasi lebih lanjut.

* Secara otomatis aktifkan sebagian besar fitur beta: Jika Anda menyalakan pilihan ini, fitur beta baru akan menjadi aktif begitu mereka ditambahkan ke sitem Fitur Beta.

== Lihat pula ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>sqjixr7grawcxmam19wxakpwsbxyui5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Installing MediaWiki/id</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>52746</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402876</id>
      <parentid>5387499</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:41:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13541" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;MediaWIki bisa jadi sulit diinstal bagi pengguna komputer rata-rata yang tidak punya pengalaman menggunakan Apache, PHP dan MySQL/MariaDB.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Mengunduh perangkat lunak MediaWiki ==

Unduh berkas tar MediaWiki dari [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|halaman pengunduhan resmi]].

Pada umumnya, jika Anda menggunakan lingkungan produksi, Anda sebaiknya menjalankan rilis stabil terbaru, yaitu MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extract the MediaWiki software ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Berkas-berkas yang diunduh memiliki format &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;, jadi mereka perlu diekstrak sebelum digunakan.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to uncompress this archive file before use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ini bisa dilakukan secara lokal (dan kemudian diunggah via FTP) atau secara langsung di peladen Anda.&lt;/span&gt;

Ini biasanya dilakukan dengan perangkat lunak seperti [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (gratis), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] atau [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] (gratis) di Windows.

Di Linux dan Mac OS X, Anda bisa mengekstrak berkasnya menggunakan perintah ini:
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

== Mengunggah berkas ke peladen anda==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jika Anda belum mengunggah berkas-berkas ke peladen web Anda, lakukanlah sekarang.
&lt;/div&gt;

Unggah berkas-berkasnya ke direktori web peladen web Anda dengan cara:

# menyalin folder yang telah diekstrak secara langsung atau
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# dengan menggunakan sebuah klien FTP seperti [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (Perangkat Lunak Sumber Terbuka, Windows, OSX dan Linux) atau [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (OSX).
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;by using software already provided by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting service]], such as the ''cPanel File Manager''&lt;/span&gt;

Jika alat pengunggah Anda punya pilihan &quot;ubah nama berkas menjadi huruf kecil&quot;, Anda harus menonaktifkannya.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jika Anda menginstal Apache, direktori yang benar ditentukan dalam berkas &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; Anda (direktif [$docroot DocumentRoot], biasanya $1 atau {{$2|apache-folder}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Catatan: Ini diubah di Ubuntu 14.04 dengan Apache 2.4.7 di mana berkas konfigurasi utama untuk pengaturan peladen dan direktori Apache adalah &lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

Ubah nama folder yang diunggah menjadi apapun yang Anda ingin tampilkan di URL.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jika peladen web Anda dijalankan sebagai misalnya &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt;, mengubah namanya menjadi direktori &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt; berarti Anda akan mengakses wiki Anda di &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''''Jangan gunakan $wiki apabila Anda ingin menggunaknnya sebagai [[$short-url|URL Singkat]].'''''&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Membuat sebuah basis data ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki akan menanyakan nama basis data dan pengguna dan akan mencoba membuat mereka apabila mereka belum ada.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jika Anda sudah punya peladen basis data dan tahu kata sandi root untuknya, skrip instalasi MediaWiki bisa membuat basis data baru untuk Anda.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jika Anda tidak tahu kata sandi rootnya, misalnya apabila Anda menggunakan peladen yang dihos, Anda harus membuat basis data yang baru.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Untuk sekarang, Anda harus menggunakan SQLite, MariaDB/MySQL atau PostgreSQL untuk menyimpan isi wiki Anda.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jika Anda tidak yakin basis data yang mana yang mau dipilih, gunakan MariaDB karena itulah yang didukung dengan paling baik oleh MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Di halaman instalasi, Anda perlu memilih nama basis data (bisa apapun namanya) dan direktori basis data SQLite.&lt;/span&gt;
Untuk direktori basis data, penginstal akan mencoba menggunakan sebuah subdirektori di luar akar dokumen dan membuatnya apabila diperlukan.
Jika direktori ini tidak aman (contohnya, bisa dibaca dari web), ubah secara manual agar direktorinya tidak bisa diakses oleh semua orang di web.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lihat dokumentasi yang sesuai.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Untuk alternatifnya, hubungi penyedia hos Anda untuk meminta mereka membuat akun bagi Anda.&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jika basis data Anda tidak dijalankan di peladen yang sama dengan peladen web Anda, Anda perlu memberikan nama hos peladen web &amp;mdash; mediawiki.example.com dalam contoh di bawah &amp;mdash; sebagaimana berikut:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;MySQL/MariaDB di UNIX/Linux mencatat semua kueri yang dikirimkan kepadanya ke dalam satu berkas, yang akan mengandung kata sandi yang Anda gunakan untuk akun pengguna.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jika ini membuat Anda khawatir, hapus berkas &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt; Anda setelah menjalankan kueri-kueri tersebut.&lt;/span&gt;}}

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jika Anda menggunakan PostgreSQL, Anda akan memerlukan antara basis data dan pengguna yang dibuatkan untuk Anda, atau tinggal menyediakan nama pengguna PostgreSQL dengan hak &quot;superuser&quot; ke isian konfigurasi.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Biasanya, ini adalah pengguna basis data yang bernama '''postgres'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, and a database named &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; owned by the user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser (kemudian masukkan kata sandi)
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

atau sebagai superuser (''default'' postgres) jalankan perintah-perintah berikut di wantian basis data:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Perhatikan [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|daftar masalah yang diketahui apabila menjalankan MediaWiki menggunakan PostgreSQL]].

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== Menjalankan skrip instalasi ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Setelah semua langkah di atas selesai, Anda bisa menyelesaikan instalasi melalui peramban web dengan pergi ke URL index.php di peramban Anda — periksa instruksi yang disebutkan di {{ll|Manual:Config script}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Langkah selanjutnya ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additional configuration&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wiki administration&lt;/span&gt;
== Pastikan muktahir! ==
Setelah menginstal, pastikan Anda memerhatikan rilis yang mutakhir, dan tetap jaga keamanan peladen Anda!
{{Clickable button 2|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$maillist|Berlanggananlah dengan milis pengumuman rilis kami.]]&lt;/span&gt;|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Appendices ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/span&gt;
:{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hosting services which provide automatical installation of applications such as MediaWiki may offer outdated versions or have other issues. If you encounter problems, it ''does not'' mean that you cannot install MediaWiki. It means that you should install MediaWiki manually.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== System-specific instructions  ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The pages listed on {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First consult {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Lihat pula ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1w4nk4x5qe6quoswkjau14psrftu7dh</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402886</id>
      <parentid>5402876</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:42:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13651" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;MediaWIki bisa jadi sulit diinstal bagi pengguna komputer rata-rata yang tidak punya pengalaman menggunakan Apache, PHP dan MySQL/MariaDB.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Mengunduh perangkat lunak MediaWiki ==

Unduh berkas tar MediaWiki dari [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|halaman pengunduhan resmi]].

Pada umumnya, jika Anda menggunakan lingkungan produksi, Anda sebaiknya menjalankan rilis stabil terbaru, yaitu MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extract the MediaWiki software ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Berkas-berkas yang diunduh memiliki format &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;, jadi mereka perlu diekstrak sebelum digunakan.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to uncompress this archive file before use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ini bisa dilakukan secara lokal (dan kemudian diunggah via FTP) atau secara langsung di peladen Anda.&lt;/span&gt;

Ini biasanya dilakukan dengan perangkat lunak seperti [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (gratis), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] atau [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] (gratis) di Windows.

Di Linux dan Mac OS X, Anda bisa mengekstrak berkasnya menggunakan perintah ini:
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

== Mengunggah berkas ke peladen anda==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jika Anda belum mengunggah berkas-berkas ke peladen web Anda, lakukanlah sekarang.
&lt;/div&gt;

Unggah berkas-berkasnya ke direktori web peladen web Anda dengan cara:

# menyalin folder yang telah diekstrak secara langsung atau
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# dengan menggunakan sebuah klien FTP seperti [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (Perangkat Lunak Sumber Terbuka, Windows, OSX dan Linux) atau [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (OSX).
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;by using software already provided by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting service]], such as the ''cPanel File Manager''&lt;/span&gt;

Jika alat pengunggah Anda punya pilihan &quot;ubah nama berkas menjadi huruf kecil&quot;, Anda harus menonaktifkannya.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jika Anda menginstal Apache, direktori yang benar ditentukan dalam berkas &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; Anda (direktif [$docroot DocumentRoot], biasanya $1 atau {{$2|apache-folder}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Catatan: Ini diubah di Ubuntu 14.04 dengan Apache 2.4.7 di mana berkas konfigurasi utama untuk pengaturan peladen dan direktori Apache adalah &lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

Ubah nama folder yang diunggah menjadi apapun yang Anda ingin tampilkan di URL.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jika peladen web Anda dijalankan sebagai misalnya &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt;, mengubah namanya menjadi direktori &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt; berarti Anda akan mengakses wiki Anda di &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not use &lt;code&gt;/wiki/&lt;/code&gt; if you want to set it up as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|Short URL]] after running the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script|installation script]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Membuat sebuah basis data ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki akan menanyakan nama basis data dan pengguna dan akan mencoba membuat mereka apabila mereka belum ada.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jika Anda sudah punya peladen basis data dan tahu kata sandi root untuknya, skrip instalasi MediaWiki bisa membuat basis data baru untuk Anda.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jika Anda tidak tahu kata sandi rootnya, misalnya apabila Anda menggunakan peladen yang dihos, Anda harus membuat basis data yang baru.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Untuk sekarang, Anda harus menggunakan SQLite, MariaDB/MySQL atau PostgreSQL untuk menyimpan isi wiki Anda.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jika Anda tidak yakin basis data yang mana yang mau dipilih, gunakan MariaDB karena itulah yang didukung dengan paling baik oleh MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Di halaman instalasi, Anda perlu memilih nama basis data (bisa apapun namanya) dan direktori basis data SQLite.&lt;/span&gt;
Untuk direktori basis data, penginstal akan mencoba menggunakan sebuah subdirektori di luar akar dokumen dan membuatnya apabila diperlukan.
Jika direktori ini tidak aman (contohnya, bisa dibaca dari web), ubah secara manual agar direktorinya tidak bisa diakses oleh semua orang di web.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lihat dokumentasi yang sesuai.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Untuk alternatifnya, hubungi penyedia hos Anda untuk meminta mereka membuat akun bagi Anda.&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jika basis data Anda tidak dijalankan di peladen yang sama dengan peladen web Anda, Anda perlu memberikan nama hos peladen web &amp;mdash; mediawiki.example.com dalam contoh di bawah &amp;mdash; sebagaimana berikut:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;MySQL/MariaDB di UNIX/Linux mencatat semua kueri yang dikirimkan kepadanya ke dalam satu berkas, yang akan mengandung kata sandi yang Anda gunakan untuk akun pengguna.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jika ini membuat Anda khawatir, hapus berkas &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt; Anda setelah menjalankan kueri-kueri tersebut.&lt;/span&gt;}}

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jika Anda menggunakan PostgreSQL, Anda akan memerlukan antara basis data dan pengguna yang dibuatkan untuk Anda, atau tinggal menyediakan nama pengguna PostgreSQL dengan hak &quot;superuser&quot; ke isian konfigurasi.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Biasanya, ini adalah pengguna basis data yang bernama '''postgres'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, and a database named &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; owned by the user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser (kemudian masukkan kata sandi)
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

atau sebagai superuser (''default'' postgres) jalankan perintah-perintah berikut di wantian basis data:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Perhatikan [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|daftar masalah yang diketahui apabila menjalankan MediaWiki menggunakan PostgreSQL]].

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== Menjalankan skrip instalasi ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Setelah semua langkah di atas selesai, Anda bisa menyelesaikan instalasi melalui peramban web dengan pergi ke URL index.php di peramban Anda — periksa instruksi yang disebutkan di {{ll|Manual:Config script}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Langkah selanjutnya ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additional configuration&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wiki administration&lt;/span&gt;
== Pastikan muktahir! ==
Setelah menginstal, pastikan Anda memerhatikan rilis yang mutakhir, dan tetap jaga keamanan peladen Anda!
{{Clickable button 2|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$maillist|Berlanggananlah dengan milis pengumuman rilis kami.]]&lt;/span&gt;|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Appendices ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/span&gt;
:{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hosting services which provide automatical installation of applications such as MediaWiki may offer outdated versions or have other issues. If you encounter problems, it ''does not'' mean that you cannot install MediaWiki. It means that you should install MediaWiki manually.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== System-specific instructions  ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The pages listed on {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First consult {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Lihat pula ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>gh587se8a6287uysxcymz5oo9dd865i</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/id</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>52748</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402934</id>
      <parentid>5355656</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="42665" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Ikhtisar dasar ==

=== Transfer berkas ===

Pilih metode untuk mentransfer berkas:

* [[w:id:Wget|wget]]
* Penyalinan aman dengan [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] atau [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Menggunakan sebuah klien [[w:id:Protokol Transfer Berkas|FTP]].
* Perusahaan hosting mungkin menyediakan antrarmuka manajer berkas via peramban web; periksa penyedia Anda.
* Suatu metode lain. Ada daftarnya di [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

===Persiapan===

Bacalah {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=berkas teks UPGRADE yang termasuk dalam MediaWiki}}.

# Periksa persyaratannya
# Baca berkas RELEASE-NOTES
# Baca berkas UPGRADE
# Cadangkan berkas dan basis data yang sudah ada
# Ekstrak berkas-berkas baru
# Mutakhirkan ekstensi-ekstensinya
# Jalankan skrip pembaruan untuk memeriksa basis data
# Uji coba hasil pemutakhirannya
# Hapus sisa-sisa dari instalasi yang lama

== Cek persyaratan == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} memerlukan:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Salah satu di antara yang berikut:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Sejak Versi 1.36, MediaWiki hanya melakukan ''commit'' untuk mendukung pemutakhiran dari dua rilis LTS terbaru (lihat [[phab:T259771]]). Pemutakhiran dari versi MediaWiki yang lebih lama harus dilakukan melalui beberapa tahap.
Jadi jika Anda ingin memutakhirkan ke 1.36 dari 1.23 atau sebelumnya, Anda harus memutakhirkan wiki 1.23 Anda ke 1.27 (atau 1.35) terlebih dahulu, kemudian dari 1.27 (atau 1.35) Anda bisa memutakhirkan ke 1.36.

Jika Anda menggunakan PostgreSQL, tolong baca juga {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Untuk informasi lebih lanjut, tolong baca {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} dan {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Baca catatan rilis ==
Di dalam tarball distribusi, atau di dalam berkas-berkas yang diperiksa/diekspor dari [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], terdapat beberapa berkas dengan nama berkas yang dikapitalkan, salah satunya berisi '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Sekarang waktunya membukanya dan mengetahui apa yang telah diubah dalam rilis ini.
Anda sebaiknya juga membaca instruksi di berkas UPGRADE.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Tuntaskan pekerjaan tertunda ==
Untuk alasan performa, beberapa tindakan dalam basis data ditunda, dan dikelola oleh [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|antrean pekerjaan]].
Pekerjaan-pekerjaan disimpan dalam basis data dan berisi parameter-parameter dengan informasi mengenai tindakan yang dilakukannya.
Sangat disarankan untuk menjalankan pekerjaan-pekerjaan yang ditunda sebelum memutakhirkan wiki, agar tidak terjadi masalah yang disebabkan spesifikasi parameter pekerjaan tersebut berubah di versi yang baru.
Gunakan {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} untuk menjalankan semua pekerjaan yang ditunda dan membersihkan antrean sebelum menjalankan pemutakhiran.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Cadangkan berkas dan basisdata yang sudah ada ==

:''Instruksi selengkapnya: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

Meskipun skrip pemutakhiran telah diperlihara dengan baik, masalah masih bisa terjadi. Sebelum memulai memutakhirkan skema basis data, '''buatlah [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|cadangan]] lengkap''' wiki, termasuk seluruh basis data dan berkas:

* konten wiki, dari basis data, (pastikan Anda menentukan set karakternya dengan benar, periksa dulu LocalSettings.php). Sebaiknya dibuat juga sebuah ''dump'' XML sebagai pelengkap ''dump'' basis data SQL.
:* MySQL, baik ''dump'' SQL dan ''dump'' XML digunakan dengan perintah &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt;:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, ''dump'' basis data digunakan dengan perintah &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, Anda menggunakan sebuah skrip MediaWiki untuk membuat salinan:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* gambar dan berkas media lainnya (isi dari direktori &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;, logo wiki /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* berkas-berkas konfigurasi, contohnya &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; dan &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (apabila ada)
* Berkas program MediaWiki, termasuk semua kulit dan ekstensi, khususnya apabila Anda telah mengubahnya.

== Ekstrak berkas baru ==

=== Menggunakan sebuah paket tarball ===

Anda bisa menaruh berkas-berkas baru menggunakan FTP atau barisan perintah (''command line''). Gunakan barisan perintah, apabila Anda bisa mengaksesnya! Menggunakan baris perintah lebih cepat daripada mengunggah setiap berkas melalui FTP.

{{Note|1=Anda sebaiknya meletakkan tarball yang telah diekstrak di dalam berkas baru yang kosong di peladen Anda. Jika Anda mengekstrak versi baru tepat di tempat versi lama Anda, bukannya di direktori baru, Anda sebaiknya mengikuti instruksi yang dijelaskan di [[#Back up existing files and the database|Cadangkan berkas dan basis data yang sudah ada]]: jika tidak, apabila Anda telah membuat kustomisasi Anda mungkin menghapusnya tanpa mengetahui cara menerapkannya kembali. Mengekstrak tarball di atas salinan langsung MediaWiki Anda juga bisa meninggalkan berkas-berkas dari versi lama MediaWiki yang mungkin mengganggu kode yang dimutakhirkan. Disarankan bagi Anda untuk mengekstrak berkas yang baru ke dalam direktori yang baru, dan kemudian terapkan kustomisasi ke direktori baru (mengembalikan LocalSettings.php, berkas gambar, ekstensi, dan kustomisasi lainnya seperti kulit buatan sendiri)}}

==== FTP atau grafis ====

Jika Anda tidak bisa mengakses baris perintah di peladen Anda, unduh tarball MediaWiki ke komputer lokal Anda dan gunakan [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] untuk mengekstrak tarball di PC lokal Anda.

Setelah Anda mengekstrak berkasnya secara lokal, gunakan perangkat lunak klien FTP kesukaan Anda untuk mengunggah direktori dan berkas ke peladen Anda.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Baris perintah ====
Anda mungkin perlu menjalankan perintah sebagai &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; apabila Anda tidak punya izin menulis penuh ke direktori instalasi wiki menggunakan pengguna Anda yang sekarang.
Ketika mengekstrak paket tarball biasanya sebuah direktori baru akan dibuat dan Anda akan punya salinan berkas konfigurasi dan direktori gambar lama dari direktori instalasi lama Anda:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

Pengguna (Open)Solaris sebaiknya menggunakan &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, atau:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Berkas lain ===

Setelah mengekstrak tarball, Anda sebaiknya menyalin atau memindahkan beberapa berkas dan folder dari direktori instalasi yang lama ke yang baru:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* $code-lc, yang berisi pengaturan konfigurasi lama Anda.&lt;/span&gt;
* Direktori &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (atau &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; dalam versi yang lebih lama), yang berisi semua berkas yang telah diunggah ke wiki, kecuali Anda memilih direktori pengunggahan yang berbeda, dan ubah kepemilikan dan perizinannya. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; dan &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (jika misalnya pengguna web Anda adalah ''apache'').
* Beberapa ekstensi di direktori &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;. Anda sebainya selalu memakai ekstensi yang mutakhir, ekstensi lama tidak dijamin akan bekerja di versi MediaWiki yang lebih baru.
* Jika Anda menggunakan [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|logo buatan sendiri]] berkas ini juga perlu dikembalikan dari cadangan. Sebelum 1.24 ini biasanya terletak di &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. Setelah 1.24 letaknya di &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; atau &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; tergantung yang mana yang Anda pilih. Kemduian tambahkan misalnya &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; ke LocalSettings.php.
* Untuk 1.35, Anda mungkin perlu mengembalikan logo dari [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Kemudian menambahkannya ke LocalSettings.php, misalnya &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Kulit-kulit khusus dari dalam direktori &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;.
* Modifikasi apapun yang dilakukan pada berkas instalasi atau ekstensi yang lama.
* Berkas .htaccess apapun (apabila Anda menggunakan Apache dan Anda telah mendefinisikan aturan-aturan di dalamnya).

Setelah melakukannya, jadikan folder baru ini folder yang dimuatkan di peladen web, atau ubah nama direktori instalasi yang lama lalu ubah nama direktori yang baru menjadi nama direktori yang lama.

=== Menggunakan Git ===

Jika menggunakan {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, ekspor berkas-berkasnya ke dalam lokasi yang bersih, lalu salin berkas yang dulu pernah disesuaikan ke dalam lokasi baru sebagaimana dijelaskan di bagian sebelumnya.

Anda juga perlu menginstal beberapa pustaka PHP eksternal menggunakan Composer atau kumpulan pustaka yang disediakan dan dipelihara untuk ''wiki farm'' Wikimedia.
Rincian lebih lanjut mengenai pemasangan dan pembaruan pustaka eksternal bisa ditemukan di [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|dokumentasi unduhan Git]].

=== Menggunakan patch ===
Berkas ''patch'' kecil biasanya disediakan untuk pemutakhiran versi minor.
Anda perlu mengunduh [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] untuk melakukan ini.
Unduh dan ekstrak berkas ''patch'' secara manual dari [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ situs ''dump''] atau ikuti petunjuk dengan wget di bawah.
''Patch'' bersifat bertahap, Anda '''tidak''' bisa melewatkan salah satu versi.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; ke direktori MediaWiki utama Anda (direktori yang berisi LocalSettings.php).
# Unduh berkas ''patch'' dan gunakan &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; padanya.
# Gunakan &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; untuk memeriksa apa yang akan diubah (''contoh'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Jika semuanya berjalan baik, jalankan &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; lagi tanpa &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
# Periksa Special:Version Anda dan Anda seharusnya melihat nomor versi yang baru.

=== Sisa berkas yang mungkin menimbulkan kesalahan ===

Jika Anda mengekstrak menimpa direktori instalasi yang lama, beberapa berkas lama bisa menyebabkan masalah untuk versi yang baru.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Jika Anda tidak menggunakan [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|''profiling'']], tetapi memiliki berkas &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; di folder akar MediaWiki, Anda mungkin mendapatkan galat yang merujuk pada &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.
Menghapus, atau mengubah nama, berkas &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; akan menyelesaikan galat ini. Berkas &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;, juga terletak di folder akar MediaWiki, bisa menjadi templat apabila Anda suatu saat mau mengaktifkan ''profiling''.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23 mengusangkan mekanisme penemuan kulit secara otomatis untuk berkas-berkas kulit inti. Setelah memutakhirkan ke versi ini, Anda sebaiknya memastikan berkas-berkas lama &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; dan &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; di dalam direktori &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; serta subfolder-subfolder yang bersesuaian di dalam direktori &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; telah dihapus. MediaWiki akan mengingatkan Anda dengan mencatat peringatan apabila masih ada di antara mereka yang masih ditemukan. (Anda juga perlu menyesuaikan kulit-kulit buatan sendiri agar mengikuti konvensi yang serupa.) Lihat $discover untuk rinciannya.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 mengubah jalur ke berkas kulit inti. Setelah memutakhirkan ke versi ini, Anda sebaiknya memastikan berkas-berkas lama &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; dan &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; yang ada secara langsung di direktori &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; tidak lagi ada. Lihat $discover untuk rinciannya.

== Memuktahirkan ekstensi ==

Ekstensi-ekstensi tertentu telah dimutakhirkan agar bekerja dengan versi MediaWiki yang baru. Pastikan untuk memutakhirkan ekstensi-ekstensi tersebut ke versi terkininya. Anda mungkin perlu melakukan pemutakhiran secara manual untuk ekstensi-ekstensi kustom.

[[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|Tarball]] yang berbeda-beda memasukkan beberapa subset dari ekstensi dan memiliki pengelolaan versi yang membantu Anda memilih yang tepat untuk rilis inti MediaWiki Anda.

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] bekerja baik untuk kebanyakan orang yang menginginkan cuplikan ekstensi-ekstensi yang akan bekerja pada versi MediaWiki yang didukung.

Jika Anda menginginkan banyak ekstensi maka sebaiknya Anda [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|mengunduh dari Git]].
Jika Anda tidak punya Git tetapi Anda ingin memperbarui banyak ekstensi, Anda sebaiknya mempertimbangkan untuk menggunakan [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].

== Menyesuaikan LocalSettings.php anda ==

Jika Anda menggunakan &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; yang sama dengan versi yang lama, Anda mungkin perlu menyesuaikannya dengan bagaimana versi yang baru menjalankannya:

=== Pendaftaran kulit ===

Sejak MediaWiki 1.24, kulit-kulit yang sepaket seperti Vector, Monobook, Modern dan CologneBlue tidak lagi menjadi bagian dari inti MediaWiki, dan perlu didaftarkan secara eksplisit di &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; agar bisa digunakan, jika tidak MediaWiki akan memperingatkan bahwa Anda tidak memiliki kulit yang telah dipasang.

Ini adalah apa yang perlu Anda tambahkan ke &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; ketika memutakhirkan dari versi-versi yang lebih lama daripada 1.24 dan menginginkan kulit-kulit tersebut tersedia:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Kulit-kulit lainnya mungkin belum disesuaikan dengan sistem [[Manual:Extension registration|pendaftaran kulit]] yang baru, jadi rujuklah halaman dokumentasi masing-masing kulit untuk melihat bagaimana cara mendaftarkannya apabila terjadi masalah.

=== Pendaftaran ekstensi ===

Sejak MediaWiki 1.25, ekstensi menggunakan sistem [[Manual:Extension registration|pendaftaran ekstensi]] baru.

Sebelumnya &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; Anda akan berisi seperti ini:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ini bisa diubah menjadi:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ekstensi disesuaikan agar menggunakan sistem pendaftaran ekstensi baru.
Ekstensi yang tidak disesuaikan sebaiknya menggunakan cara instalasi yang lama.
Rujuklah instruksi instalasi di halaman ekstensi untuk informasi lebih lanjut.

=== Variabel lainnya ===
Beberapa variabel mungkin telah usang atau bahkan dihapus.
Memiliki mereka di &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; biasanya tidak akan berpengaruh.
Variabel-variabel baru mungkin ditambahkan di versi lebih baru, atau beberapa variabel yang sudah ada diubah tipenya.
Kami biasanya mencoba menggunakan ''default'' yang wajar untuk mereka, dan apabila tipenya berubah, dibuat agar kompatibel mundur.
Dalam kasus apapun, periksa catatan rilis untuk melihat perubahan tersebut.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Menjalankan skrip pemuktahiran ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
Anda bisa memutakhirkan basis data MediaWiki dengan dua cara: Dari baris perintah atau dari peramban web. Jika Anda punya akses shell ke peladen Anda, memutakhirkan dari basis perintah lebih disarankan, karena ini mengurangi risiko proses pemutakhirannya diganggu oleh masalah waktu habis atau pengaturan ulang koneksi.

Skrip juga akan mencoba mengunduh hal-hal yang belum ada yang dibutuhkan MediaWiki.

=== Baris perintah ===

Akses baris perintah peladen Anda atau shell SSH atau sejenisnya. Anda bisa mengakses baris perintah dengan menghubungi peladen Anda via SSH. Jika PC lokal yang Anda gunakan menjalankan Microsoft Windows, Anda akan membutuhkan alat seperti [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] untuk menggunakan SSH. Dari baris perintah atau Shell, pindah ke direktori &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; dan jalankan [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|skrip pemutakhiran]]:

 $ php update.php

Di sebuah peladen Linux jika Anda mendapatkan galat coba lakukan perintah yang sama sebagai root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Catatan untuk instalasi sederhana di Windows (misalnya menggunakan {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
Pertama-tama pastikan peladen web Anda (misalnya Apache) dan basis data Anda (misalnya MySQL) sedang berjalan.
Kemudian jalankan &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: klik kanan, pilih Open With, dan telusuri hingga PHP.exe.
Jendela baris perintah yang dihasilkan kemungkinan akan tertutup secara otomatis ketika pemutakhiran skemanya selesai.

Anda mungkin mendapatkan pesan bahwa versi PHP Anda terlalu tua dan bahwa MediaWiki memerlukan versi yang lebih baru.
Setelah pesan tersebut pemutakhiran akan dibatalkan.
Penyebab galat ini adalah baris perintah menggunakan versi PHP yang berbeda dengan yang Anda miliki ketika Anda menjalankan MediaWiki dari peladen web.
Ketika Anda mendapatkan pesan ini Anda sebaiknya memeriksa, apabila Anda menjalankan versi PHP yang lebih baru di shell dengan menggunakan perintah yang berbeda: Itu mungkin bisa jadi ''php5'' atau ''php56''.
Jika versi lain tersedia dan — apabila iya — dengan nama apa, bergantung pada pengaturan peladen Anda.
Jika tidak bekerja, tanya penyedia hos Anda; mereka pasti tahu.

MediaWiki akan memeriksa skema yang ada dan memutakhirkannya agar bekerja dengan kode yang baru, menambahkan tabel dan kolom apabila diperlukan.

{{Note|1=Jika Anda menggunakan [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|basis data bersama]], Anda sebaiknya memberikan parameter &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; apabila Anda ingin tabel bersamanya diperbarui. Jika tidak mereka tidak akan disentuh oleh skrip pemutakhiran.}}

==== Apa yang perlu dilakukan apabila &quot;php update.php&quot; tidak melakukan apa-apa, hanya terjadi jeda sebentar kemudian kembali ke baris perintah ====

Ini bisa jadi disebabkan malfungsi pada kulit atau ekstensi.

* Periksa apakah semua ekstensi dan kulit yang dipanggil di LocalSettings.php tersedia
* Periksa apakah ekstensi-ekstensi menggunakan metode registrasi yang benar (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
* Jadikan setengah pertama ekstensi di LocalSettings.php menjadi komentar. Jika ini menyebabkan update.php bekerja, kembalikan setengah dari setelah tersebut menjadi seperti semula (setengah dari setengah jadi 1/4 ekstensi). Jika ini TIDAK menyebabkan update.php bekerja, kembalikan setengah awal menjadi semula dan jadikan setengah akhir menjadi komentar, lalu jadikan setengah dari setengah akhir menjadi komentar, dst. Ulangi sampai update.php bekerja untuk menemukan ekstensi mana yang bersalah.

==== Apa yang dilakukan ketika muncul kesalahan &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; (atau yang mirip) ====

Jika skripnya dibatalkan dengan pesan seperti begini:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

Ini berarti Anda sebaiknya memeriksa apakah Anda telah mendefinisikan {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} dan {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} dalam berkas {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} Anda (di direktori utama). Ini adalah pengguna dan kata sandi yang diperlukan oleh skrip ini agar bisa mengakses basis data.

Dalam beberapa kasus, variabel lama $wgDBmwschema (untuk Postgres) kelihatannya dibaca sebagai nama tabel yang diperbarui bukannya $wgDBname, meskipun ketika mysql yang digunakan. Jika ini penyebabnya, tinggal hapus definisi $wgDBmwschema di LocalSettings.php.

==== Apa yang dilakukan ketika muncul kesalahan &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; ====

Orang-orang yang menjalankan update.php dari baris perintah mungkin menemui galat berikut:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

Galat ini terjadi ketika update.php dijalankan dari php4.

Orang-orang yang situsnya dihos oleh penyedia yang menyediakan php4 sekaligus php5 sebaiknya melakukan langkah-langkah berikut:

# dari baris perintah, masukkan perintah 'whereis php5'
# begitu Anda menemukan lokasi jalur php5, daftarkan isi direktori php5/bin
# setelah Anda mengetahui nama berkas php yang dapat dieksekusi (php atau php5), ketikkan seluruh jalur untuk menjalankan update.php

Berikut adalah sebuah contoh:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

====Apa yang dilakukan ketika muncul kesalahan 'register_argc_argv is set to false'====

Anda mungkin menemui galat berikut:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Pergi ke ~/maintenance. Sunting berkas 'php.ini' yang sudah ada, atau buat yang baru. 
# Tambahkan sebuah baris seperti berikut:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Jalankan kembali &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===Peramban web===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Lihat pula {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Jika basis data Anda sudah besar dan dalam penggunaan yang tinggi, maka Anda sebaiknya tidak menggunakan pembaru Web, di antaranya karena proses pembaruan akan kehabisan waktu ketika ''maximum_execution_time'' tercapai. Jika begitu, Anda sebaiknya menggunakan [[update.php]] dari antarmuka baris-perintah (tidak dari web). Apa yang dimaksus &quot;terlalu besar&quot; bergantung pada peladen Anda (performanya, muatannya, dan berapa lama waktu eksekusi maksimum PHP yang diberikan kepada skrip). Jika wiki Anda terlalu besar untuk pembaru web dan penyedia hosting Anda tidak memungkinkan akses baris-perintah, maka Anda perlu memindahkan wiki Anda ke akun hosting lainnya, sebaiknya yang memiliki akses shell.

# Selalu [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|cadangkan]] sebelum melakukan pemeliharaan basis data.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# Jelajahi peramban web Anda hingga ke &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;. Misalnya, jika wiki Anda berada di &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, maka jelajahi ke &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
# Pilih bahasa Anda dan tekan lanjutkan.
# Instalasi yang sudah ada harusnya terdeteksi. Ikuti instruksi di layar untuk memperbaruinya.&lt;br/&gt;Jika diminta sebuah &quot;''upgrade key''&quot;, bukalah berkas {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} Anda dan cari kunci yang diberikan untuk {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.

Mungkin juga pembaru-web tampak tidak bekerja: Bukannya melihat layar pemilihan bahasa awal, Anda malah melihat sebuah halaman wiki kosong, mungkin dengan suatu pesan galat. Jika begini, kemungkinan ini disebabkan peladen web Anda menggunakan ''Rewrite Rules'' (kemungkinan untuk [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|URL pendek]]), yang tidak menampilkan pembaru di ''mw-config/'', melainkan sebuah halaman wiki di ''Mw-config/'', dengan &quot;M&quot; kapital. Jika begini, ubah nama berkas ''.htaccess'' untuk waktu pembaruan. Kemudian Anda seharusnya bisa mengakses pembaru web.

{{Warning|1=Jika Anda menggunakan metode ini, pastikan untuk '''mengubah kembali nama berkas .htaccess''' setelah menjalankan skrip pemutakhiran! Jika tidak URL pendek dan beberapa hal lainnya akan rusak!}}

== Mengujicoba pemuktahiran ==

Ketika pemutakhiran telah selesai, pergi ke wiki dan periksa apakah operasi-operasi berikut bekerja sebagaimana mestinya:

* Membaca halaman
* Menyunting halaman
* Mengunggah berkas
* Kunjungi [[Special:Version]] dan periksa apakah versi yang ditampilkan benar dan ekstensi-ekstensinya ada

== Menghapus sisa-sisa dari instalasi yang lama ==
Jika Anda telah menyalin instalasi lama Anda ke folder lain di peladen, pastikan untuk menghapusnya atau membuatnya sama sekali tidak bisa diakses dari web.
Sangat penting untuk tidak membiarkan instalasi lama bisa diakses dari web, karena itu tidak sesuai dengan tujuan pemutakhiran, dan membuat peladen Anda berisiko diserang.

== Pertanyaan yang sering diajukan ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===Seberapa sulit melakukan pemuktahiran?===

Jika satu-satunya berkas yang telah Anda ubah adalah {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, dan Anda memutakhirkan dari 1.5 atau setelahnya, prosesnya sangatlah sederhana. Pekerjaan manusia yang harus dilakukan hanya berdurasi beberapa menit. Perubahan skema basis data akan menghabiskan waktu sebanding dengan ukuran basis data Anda — mungkin beberapa jam untuk wiki dengan jutaan halaman, tetapi untuk ukuran biasa sekitar beberapa ribu halaman, biasanya dilakukan dalam hitungan detik.

Pemutakhiran minor, di antara versi-versi mayor yang sama, misalnya dari {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 ke {{MW legacy release number}}, tidak membutuhkan perubahan skema sama sekali.
Anda bisa hanya memperbarui berkas-berkasnya. Basis datanya tidak perlu, sehingga tidak perlu menjalankan skrip pembaru.

Memutakhirkan dari 1.4 atau sebelumnya akan lebih rumit karena dukungan untuk set karakter selain UTF-8 dihentikan, dan skema untuk menyimpan banyak teks diubah. Tolong baca bagian yang relevan di berkas &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt;.

Pemutakhiran menjadi sulit apabila Anda telah mengubah kode sumber, dan Anda tidak ingin pengubahan Anda ditimpa. Peralatan seperti [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] atau [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] bisa jadi berguna. Juga terdapat potensi masalah apabila Anda menggunakan ekstensi yang tidak terpelihara. Mutakhirkan ekstensi Anda bersamaan dengan Anda memperbarui MediaWiki.

Jika Anda telah mengubah kulit atau menggunakan kulit buatan sendiri Anda kemungkinan harus menyesuaikannya lagi agar bisa bekerja di versi MediaWiki yang baru.

{{Tip|1=Agar tidak perlu menambal berkas css dan js (javascript) &quot;global&quot; setiap kali memutakhirkan, Anda bisa menambhkan kodenya ke halaman MediaWiki:Common.js dan MediaWiki:Common.css Anda. Karena halaman-halaman tersebut merupakan bagian dari basis data yang akan kembali digunakan ketika Anda memutakhirkan, Anda tidak perlu menambal berkas inti MediaWiki lagi.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== Bagaimana saya memuktahirkan dari versi yang lama sekali? Dalam satu langkah, atau beberapa langkah?===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Tergantung: Jika Anda '''memutakhirkan dari MediaWiki 1.4 atau lebih lama''', Anda sebaiknya memperbarui ke MediaWiki 1.5 dulu. Jika Anda memperbarui dari wiki Latin-1, gunakan upgrade1_5.php (ditemukan di MediaWiki 1.5) untuk mengubah bagian-bagian yang relevan dari basis data ke UTF-8 ($latin perlu diatur menjadi true dalam $localsettings Anda agar ini bekerja). Kemudian, jalankan update.hp, dan atur pilihan $legacy di LocalSettings.php untuk kode yang sebelumnya digunakan di wiki (misalnya windows-1252). Ini pada dasarnya adalah bagaimana Wikipedia dari situs Yayasan Wikimedia lainnya diperbarui dari MediaWiki 1.4 ke 1.5 — lihat [$noc berkas pengaturan yang relevan (peringatan: halaman besar!)] dan beberapa [[$wikitech|catatan-catatan terkait di Wikitech]]. Anda mungkin perlu memperbarui dari MediaWiki 1.4 sebelum menjalankan skrip upgrade1.5.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
Jika Anda ingin membuat sebuah ''dump'' basis data (misalnya MySQL) dari wiki Latin-1 Anda, pastikan untuk mengetik isian &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; di tabel {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} dengan &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, bukan &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt; untuk menghindari masalah pengodean karakter.

Jika Anda '''memutakhirkan dari MediaWiki 1.5 atau lebih baru''', Anda bisa memutakhirkan dalam satu langkah, dari versi lama Anda ke versi stabil terbaru.
Kebanyakan laporan, serta pengujian otomatis, mengindikasikan bahwa melakukannya dalam satu langkah bekerja dengan baik.
Jika Anda kesulitan memercayainya, bacalah [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|posting milis ini]].
Akan tetapi, tolong perhatikan bahwa ketika Anda memutakhirkan dari versi lama, kemungkinan Anda akan menemukan galat PHP yang lebih besar dibandingkan dengan memutakhirkan dari versi yang tepat sebelum versi baru.
Anda akan tetap menerima kesalahan ini, jika Anda tidak melewatkan versi, tetapi kesalahan akan dikaitkan dengan setiap pembaruan individu.
Jika Anda memutakhirkan beberapa versi secara bersamaan, Anda akan mendapatkan semua galatnya secara bersamaan.
Ini akan mebuat pemutakhiran lebih sulit, tetapi jangan lupa bahwa Anda tidak mengalami masalah ketika memutakhirkan ke versi pertengahan, yang Anda lewatkan!

Jika Anda '''memutakhirkan ke MediaWiki 1.36''' atau setelahnya, hanya pemutakhiran dari dua rilis LTS terakhir yang didukung ([[phab:T259771]]). Ini berarti untuk versi yang sangat lama, Anda harus memutakhirkan ke MediaWiki 1.35 terlebih dahulu kemudian memutakhirkan ke 1.36.

===Apakah sebaiknya saya mencadangkan dulu?===

Jawaban singkat: Ya.

Jawaban panjang: Bergantung pada a) seberapa berharga data Anda, b) seberapa sulit membuat cadangan dan c) seberapa yakin Anda pada pemeliharaan dan administrasi MySQL. 

Kegagalan dalam pemutakhiran bisa menyebabkan basis data Anda berada dalam keadaan yang tidak konsisten, di antara dua versi.
Sebuah galat PHP atau MySQL bisa terjadi ketika pemutakhiran sehingga basis data Anda hanya sebagian yang dimutakhirkan.
Dalam situasi tersebut mungkin saja untuk memperbaiki masalahnya dengan kerja manual yang banyak.
Akan tetapi, ''jauh lebih mudah'' untuk meletakkan basis data cadangan dari sebelum dijalankannya update.php dan meneruskan pemutakhiran menggunakan itu.
Jika tidak Anda mungkin perlu menghabiskan pekerjaan — yang  tidak perlu — selama berjam-jam.

Pemulihan adalah hal yang biasanya rumit.
Sukarelawan di forum dukungan tidak akan senang apabila Anda tidak membuat cadangan dan perlu bantuan untuk memulihkan data yang rusak dalam proses pemutakhiran.
Hasil yang ideal adalah apabila Anda bisa mengembalikan cadangan Anda, dan kemudian [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|melaporkan ''bug'' pada proyek MediaWiki yang sesuai]] selama proses pemutakhiran yang menyebabkan kerusakan data.

===Bisakah saya menyimpan LocalSettings.php saya?===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ya, tetapi Anda harus membuat beberapa perubahan kecil. Format $localsettings pada umumnya kompatibel mundur. Perubahan yang akan merusak kompatibilitas akan didokumentasikan dalam bagian &quot;configuration changes&quot; di [[Release notes|catatan rilis]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

===Bisakah wiki saya tetap dalam jaringan ketika pemuktahiran?===

Secara umum iya, tetapi Git bisa memutuskannya secara sementara (selama beberapa detik).

Jika Anda memutakhirkan di antara rilis minor MediaWiki, satu-satunya yang perlu Anda lakukan adalah memutakhirkan berkas-berkas sumber.

Catatan: instruksi berikut mengasumsikan Anda punya akses baris perintah. Jika Anda memutakhirkan di antara rilis utama MediaWiki, prosedur yang disarankan adalah:

# Ekstrak versi baru MediaWiki ke dalam direktori baru.
# Siapkan direktori baru tersebut: salin LocalSettings.php Anda dari direktori yang lama, sali ekstensi-ekstensi dan kulit-kulit yang telah dipasang (apabila ada). Periksa pengaturan {{wg|Logo}} dan {{wg|Logos}} di LocalSettings.php dan jika perlu sali berkas logo dari direktori lama ke direktori baru.
# Dalam catatan rilis untuk versi yang baru, lihat apakah ada perubahan yang harus dibuat pada LocalSettings.php.
# Letakkan basis data dalam mode hanya baca dengan memasukkan variabel berikut ke LocalSettings.php di direktori lama — para pengguna akan melihat pesan ini apabila mereka mencoba menyunting selama proses pemutakhiran:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Ini tidak lagi bekerja sejak MediaWiki 1.27, yang juga menghentikan dijalankannhya skrip pemutakhiran. Cara mengatasinya untuk versi sejak MediaWiki 1.27 bisa ditemukan di {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. Lihat pula {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Jalankan [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|skrip pemutakhiran]] atau pembaru web dalam direktori baru.
# Salin gambar dari subdirektori gambar dari direktori lama ke direktori baru.
# Tukar direktori lama dengan direktori baru.

===Mengapa memuktahirkan?===
:''Berlanggananlah dengan [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] agar diberitahukan soal rilis baru.''

Karena memutakhirkan [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|biasanya cukup mudah]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|satu langkah dari versi Anda ke versi terbaru]] dan juga [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|lewat web]].

Rilis terbaru menerima perbaikan keamanan untuk menjaga wiki dan hos Anda aman dari para vandal, sedangkan rilis lama tidak (lihat {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). Jadi ada lusinan alasan yang bagus untuk memutakhirkan.

Rilis utama yang baru menyediakan fitur-fitur baru, yang Anda mungkin mau gunakan: lihat catatan rilis untuk rinciannya. Jika Anda perlu argumen tambahan untuk meyakinkan bos Anda untuk membiarkan Anda memutakhirkan dari versi yang sudah tua, berikut adalah ringkasannya:

* Sejak {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|suntingan bisa dipratayangkan sebelum menyimpan]] dalam bentuk ''diff''.
* Sejak {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, tersedia sebuah [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|tombol balikkan]].
* Sejak {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|berpatroli]] di [[Special:NewPages]] menjadi lebih mudah.
* Sejak {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, Anda bisa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|mengganti nama]] (memindahkan) berkas.
* Sejak {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, Anda bisa [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|memperbaiki pengalihan ganda]] secara otomatis.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} tersedia.
* Jika Anda memiliki tembolok yang sesuai, sejak 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} mengoptimalkan kecepatan pemuatan halaman.
* Sejak 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|pengurutan kategori menjadi masuk akal!]] (terutama untuk huruf non-Inggris); diperluas menjadi 68 bahasa setelah {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} dan {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, pengguna dari semua bahasa dan jenis kelamin dipanggil oleh antarmuka dan [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|catatan]] secara tepat (sebelum 1.15, sama sekali tidak ada jenis kelamin).
* Dalam {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} sistem perkulitan diubah agar lebih mudah untuk menggunakan bagian dari kulit yang sudah ada untuk kulit Anda sendiri.
* Sejak [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|''diff'']] menjadi lebih mudah dibaca.
* Pada [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] dan [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], pemberitahuan surel menjadi lebih jelas dan bisa ditebak, membuat wiki Anda lebih efektif.
* Sejak [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], pemberantasan vandal (patroli) menjadi lebih hemat waktu.
* Pada [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], penyimpanan kata sandi diperbaiki untuk memungkinkan peningkatan keamanan.
* Sejak [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|perubahan terbaru ''enhanced'' disediakan]]
* Pada [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], [[ResourceLoader|mekanisme &quot;ResourceLoader&quot; diperbaiki]]
* Pada [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], manajemen sesi diubah dan manajemen autentikasi pengguna sepenuhnya dimodernkan. InstantCommons tidak lagi membutuhkan berkas lokal.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, tembolok untuk HTML halaman artikel yang digambarkan telah ditingkatkan.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, Action API diubah dan diperbaiki. Pemberian kelompok pengguna juga sekarang bisa dilakukan untuk suatu periode waktu yang bisa dipilih. Memungkinkan memblokir suatu jangkauan IP.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, pengguna terblokir tidak bisa mengubah surel mereka. Menambahkan kemampuan untuk mencari kontribusi untuk suatu jangkauan IP di Special:Contributions.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, beberapa ekstensi menjadi bagian dari inti, contohnya {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}. {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} diperkenalkan. Menambahkan batasan laju suntingan baku sebesar 90 suntingan/menit untuk semua pengguna.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki mendukung lebih dari 350 bahasa.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki mendukung &quot;pemblokiran sebagian&quot;, sehingga IP dan akun bisa ditahan dari menyunting halaman atau ruang nama tertentu.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, lebih banyak ekstensi menjadi bagian dari inti: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (untuk modul Lua), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; Fitur &quot;pantau&quot; bisa ditingkatkan dengan tanggal kedaluwarsa.

Juga, pada {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} kami mulai [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|membundel beberapa ekstensi penting]], seperti alat penyuntingan dan pelawan vandalisme ConfirmEdit dan Nuke; lebih banyak lagi ditambahkan pada rilis-rilis berikutnya.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Lihat pula ==

* Posting blog Greg Sabino Mulla memberikan [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html rincian lebih lanjut mengenai pemutakhiran rilis titik].
* [[Project:Support desk]] apabila Anda perlu bantuan atau terjadi kesalahan
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - apabila Anda tidak punya cadangan yang berhasil
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>05bltghir2oggd018njyqbmndxnck53</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402979</id>
      <parentid>5402934</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:47:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="42522" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Ikhtisar dasar ==

=== Transfer berkas ===

Pilih metode untuk mentransfer berkas:

* [[w:id:Wget|wget]]
* Penyalinan aman dengan [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] atau [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Menggunakan sebuah klien [[w:id:Protokol Transfer Berkas|FTP]].
* Perusahaan hosting mungkin menyediakan antrarmuka manajer berkas via peramban web; periksa penyedia Anda.
* Suatu metode lain. Ada daftarnya di [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

===Persiapan===

Bacalah {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=berkas teks UPGRADE yang termasuk dalam MediaWiki}}.

# Periksa persyaratannya
# Baca berkas RELEASE-NOTES
# Baca berkas UPGRADE
# Cadangkan berkas dan basis data yang sudah ada
# Ekstrak berkas-berkas baru
# Mutakhirkan ekstensi-ekstensinya
# Jalankan skrip pembaruan untuk memeriksa basis data
# Uji coba hasil pemutakhirannya
# Hapus sisa-sisa dari instalasi yang lama

== Cek persyaratan == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} memerlukan:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Salah satu di antara yang berikut:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Sejak Versi 1.36, MediaWiki hanya melakukan ''commit'' untuk mendukung pemutakhiran dari dua rilis LTS terbaru (lihat [[phab:T259771]]). Pemutakhiran dari versi MediaWiki yang lebih lama harus dilakukan melalui beberapa tahap.
Jadi jika Anda ingin memutakhirkan ke 1.36 dari 1.23 atau sebelumnya, Anda harus memutakhirkan wiki 1.23 Anda ke 1.27 (atau 1.35) terlebih dahulu, kemudian dari 1.27 (atau 1.35) Anda bisa memutakhirkan ke 1.36.

Jika Anda menggunakan PostgreSQL, tolong baca juga {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Untuk informasi lebih lanjut, tolong baca {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} dan {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Baca catatan rilis ==
Di dalam tarball distribusi, atau di dalam berkas-berkas yang diperiksa/diekspor dari [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], terdapat beberapa berkas dengan nama berkas yang dikapitalkan, salah satunya berisi '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Sekarang waktunya membukanya dan mengetahui apa yang telah diubah dalam rilis ini.
Anda sebaiknya juga membaca instruksi di berkas UPGRADE.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Tuntaskan pekerjaan tertunda ==
Untuk alasan performa, beberapa tindakan dalam basis data ditunda, dan dikelola oleh [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|antrean pekerjaan]].
Pekerjaan-pekerjaan disimpan dalam basis data dan berisi parameter-parameter dengan informasi mengenai tindakan yang dilakukannya.
Sangat disarankan untuk menjalankan pekerjaan-pekerjaan yang ditunda sebelum memutakhirkan wiki, agar tidak terjadi masalah yang disebabkan spesifikasi parameter pekerjaan tersebut berubah di versi yang baru.
Gunakan {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} untuk menjalankan semua pekerjaan yang ditunda dan membersihkan antrean sebelum menjalankan pemutakhiran.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Cadangkan berkas dan basisdata yang sudah ada ==

:''Instruksi selengkapnya: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

Meskipun skrip pemutakhiran telah diperlihara dengan baik, masalah masih bisa terjadi. Sebelum memulai memutakhirkan skema basis data, '''buatlah [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|cadangan]] lengkap''' wiki, termasuk seluruh basis data dan berkas:

* konten wiki, dari basis data, (pastikan Anda menentukan set karakternya dengan benar, periksa dulu LocalSettings.php). Sebaiknya dibuat juga sebuah ''dump'' XML sebagai pelengkap ''dump'' basis data SQL.
:* MySQL, baik ''dump'' SQL dan ''dump'' XML digunakan dengan perintah &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt;:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, ''dump'' basis data digunakan dengan perintah &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, Anda menggunakan sebuah skrip MediaWiki untuk membuat salinan:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* gambar dan berkas media lainnya (isi dari direktori &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;, logo wiki /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* berkas-berkas konfigurasi, contohnya &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; dan &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (apabila ada)
* Berkas program MediaWiki, termasuk semua kulit dan ekstensi, khususnya apabila Anda telah mengubahnya.

== Ekstrak berkas baru ==

=== Menggunakan sebuah paket tarball ===

Anda bisa menaruh berkas-berkas baru menggunakan FTP atau barisan perintah (''command line''). Gunakan barisan perintah, apabila Anda bisa mengaksesnya! Menggunakan baris perintah lebih cepat daripada mengunggah setiap berkas melalui FTP.

{{Note|1=Anda sebaiknya meletakkan tarball yang telah diekstrak di dalam berkas baru yang kosong di peladen Anda. Jika Anda mengekstrak versi baru tepat di tempat versi lama Anda, bukannya di direktori baru, Anda sebaiknya mengikuti instruksi yang dijelaskan di [[#Back up existing files and the database|Cadangkan berkas dan basis data yang sudah ada]]: jika tidak, apabila Anda telah membuat kustomisasi Anda mungkin menghapusnya tanpa mengetahui cara menerapkannya kembali. Mengekstrak tarball di atas salinan langsung MediaWiki Anda juga bisa meninggalkan berkas-berkas dari versi lama MediaWiki yang mungkin mengganggu kode yang dimutakhirkan. Disarankan bagi Anda untuk mengekstrak berkas yang baru ke dalam direktori yang baru, dan kemudian terapkan kustomisasi ke direktori baru (mengembalikan LocalSettings.php, berkas gambar, ekstensi, dan kustomisasi lainnya seperti kulit buatan sendiri)}}

==== FTP atau grafis ====

Jika Anda tidak bisa mengakses baris perintah di peladen Anda, unduh tarball MediaWiki ke komputer lokal Anda dan gunakan [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] untuk mengekstrak tarball di PC lokal Anda.

Setelah Anda mengekstrak berkasnya secara lokal, gunakan perangkat lunak klien FTP kesukaan Anda untuk mengunggah direktori dan berkas ke peladen Anda.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Baris perintah ====
Anda mungkin perlu menjalankan perintah sebagai &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; apabila Anda tidak punya izin menulis penuh ke direktori instalasi wiki menggunakan pengguna Anda yang sekarang.
Ketika mengekstrak paket tarball biasanya sebuah direktori baru akan dibuat dan Anda akan punya salinan berkas konfigurasi dan direktori gambar lama dari direktori instalasi lama Anda:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

Pengguna (Open)Solaris sebaiknya menggunakan &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, atau:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Berkas lain ===

Setelah mengekstrak tarball, Anda sebaiknya menyalin atau memindahkan beberapa berkas dan folder dari direktori instalasi yang lama ke yang baru:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* $code-lc, yang berisi pengaturan konfigurasi lama Anda.&lt;/span&gt;
* Direktori &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (atau &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; dalam versi yang lebih lama), yang berisi semua berkas yang telah diunggah ke wiki, kecuali Anda memilih direktori pengunggahan yang berbeda, dan ubah kepemilikan dan perizinannya. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; dan &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (jika misalnya pengguna web Anda adalah ''apache'').
* Beberapa ekstensi di direktori &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;. Anda sebainya selalu memakai ekstensi yang mutakhir, ekstensi lama tidak dijamin akan bekerja di versi MediaWiki yang lebih baru.
* Jika Anda menggunakan [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|logo buatan sendiri]] berkas ini juga perlu dikembalikan dari cadangan. Sebelum 1.24 ini biasanya terletak di &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. Setelah 1.24 letaknya di &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; atau &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; tergantung yang mana yang Anda pilih. Kemduian tambahkan misalnya &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; ke LocalSettings.php.
* Untuk 1.35, Anda mungkin perlu mengembalikan logo dari [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Kemudian menambahkannya ke LocalSettings.php, misalnya &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Kulit-kulit khusus dari dalam direktori &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;.
* Modifikasi apapun yang dilakukan pada berkas instalasi atau ekstensi yang lama.
* Berkas .htaccess apapun (apabila Anda menggunakan Apache dan Anda telah mendefinisikan aturan-aturan di dalamnya).

Setelah melakukannya, jadikan folder baru ini folder yang dimuatkan di peladen web, atau ubah nama direktori instalasi yang lama lalu ubah nama direktori yang baru menjadi nama direktori yang lama.

=== Menggunakan Git ===

Jika menggunakan {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, ekspor berkas-berkasnya ke dalam lokasi yang bersih, lalu salin berkas yang dulu pernah disesuaikan ke dalam lokasi baru sebagaimana dijelaskan di bagian sebelumnya.

Anda juga perlu menginstal beberapa pustaka PHP eksternal menggunakan Composer atau kumpulan pustaka yang disediakan dan dipelihara untuk ''wiki farm'' Wikimedia.
Rincian lebih lanjut mengenai pemasangan dan pembaruan pustaka eksternal bisa ditemukan di [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|dokumentasi unduhan Git]].

=== Menggunakan patch ===
Berkas ''patch'' kecil biasanya disediakan untuk pemutakhiran versi minor.
Anda perlu mengunduh [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] untuk melakukan ini.
Unduh dan ekstrak berkas ''patch'' secara manual dari [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ situs ''dump''] atau ikuti petunjuk dengan wget di bawah.
''Patch'' bersifat bertahap, Anda '''tidak''' bisa melewatkan salah satu versi.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; ke direktori MediaWiki utama Anda (direktori yang berisi LocalSettings.php).
# Unduh berkas ''patch'' dan gunakan &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; padanya.
# Gunakan &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; untuk memeriksa apa yang akan diubah (''contoh'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Jika semuanya berjalan baik, jalankan &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; lagi tanpa &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
# Periksa Special:Version Anda dan Anda seharusnya melihat nomor versi yang baru.

=== Sisa berkas yang mungkin menimbulkan kesalahan ===

Jika Anda mengekstrak menimpa direktori instalasi yang lama, beberapa berkas lama bisa menyebabkan masalah untuk versi yang baru.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Jika Anda tidak menggunakan [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|''profiling'']], tetapi memiliki berkas &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; di folder akar MediaWiki, Anda mungkin mendapatkan galat yang merujuk pada &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.
Menghapus, atau mengubah nama, berkas &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; akan menyelesaikan galat ini. Berkas &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;, juga terletak di folder akar MediaWiki, bisa menjadi templat apabila Anda suatu saat mau mengaktifkan ''profiling''.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23 mengusangkan mekanisme penemuan kulit secara otomatis untuk berkas-berkas kulit inti. Setelah memutakhirkan ke versi ini, Anda sebaiknya memastikan berkas-berkas lama &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; dan &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; di dalam direktori &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; serta subfolder-subfolder yang bersesuaian di dalam direktori &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; telah dihapus. MediaWiki akan mengingatkan Anda dengan mencatat peringatan apabila masih ada di antara mereka yang masih ditemukan. (Anda juga perlu menyesuaikan kulit-kulit buatan sendiri agar mengikuti konvensi yang serupa.) Lihat $discover untuk rinciannya.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 mengubah jalur ke berkas kulit inti. Setelah memutakhirkan ke versi ini, Anda sebaiknya memastikan berkas-berkas lama &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; dan &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; yang ada secara langsung di direktori &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; tidak lagi ada. Lihat $discover untuk rinciannya.

== Memuktahirkan ekstensi ==

Ekstensi-ekstensi tertentu telah dimutakhirkan agar bekerja dengan versi MediaWiki yang baru. Pastikan untuk memutakhirkan ekstensi-ekstensi tersebut ke versi terkininya. Anda mungkin perlu melakukan pemutakhiran secara manual untuk ekstensi-ekstensi kustom.

[[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|Tarball]] yang berbeda-beda memasukkan beberapa subset dari ekstensi dan memiliki pengelolaan versi yang membantu Anda memilih yang tepat untuk rilis inti MediaWiki Anda.

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] bekerja baik untuk kebanyakan orang yang menginginkan cuplikan ekstensi-ekstensi yang akan bekerja pada versi MediaWiki yang didukung.

Jika Anda menginginkan banyak ekstensi maka sebaiknya Anda [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|mengunduh dari Git]].
Jika Anda tidak punya Git tetapi Anda ingin memperbarui banyak ekstensi, Anda sebaiknya mempertimbangkan untuk menggunakan [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].

== Menyesuaikan LocalSettings.php anda ==

Jika Anda menggunakan &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; yang sama dengan versi yang lama, Anda mungkin perlu menyesuaikannya dengan bagaimana versi yang baru menjalankannya:

=== Pendaftaran kulit ===

Sejak MediaWiki 1.24, kulit-kulit yang sepaket seperti Vector, Monobook, Modern dan CologneBlue tidak lagi menjadi bagian dari inti MediaWiki, dan perlu didaftarkan secara eksplisit di &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; agar bisa digunakan, jika tidak MediaWiki akan memperingatkan bahwa Anda tidak memiliki kulit yang telah dipasang.

Ini adalah apa yang perlu Anda tambahkan ke &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; ketika memutakhirkan dari versi-versi yang lebih lama daripada 1.24 dan menginginkan kulit-kulit tersebut tersedia:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Kulit-kulit lainnya mungkin belum disesuaikan dengan sistem [[Manual:Extension registration|pendaftaran kulit]] yang baru, jadi rujuklah halaman dokumentasi masing-masing kulit untuk melihat bagaimana cara mendaftarkannya apabila terjadi masalah.

=== Pendaftaran ekstensi ===

Sejak MediaWiki 1.25, ekstensi menggunakan sistem [[Manual:Extension registration|pendaftaran ekstensi]] baru.

Sebelumnya &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; Anda akan berisi seperti ini:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ini bisa diubah menjadi:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ekstensi disesuaikan agar menggunakan sistem pendaftaran ekstensi baru.
Ekstensi yang tidak disesuaikan sebaiknya menggunakan cara instalasi yang lama.
Rujuklah instruksi instalasi di halaman ekstensi untuk informasi lebih lanjut.

=== Variabel lainnya ===
Beberapa variabel mungkin telah usang atau bahkan dihapus.
Memiliki mereka di &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; biasanya tidak akan berpengaruh.
Variabel-variabel baru mungkin ditambahkan di versi lebih baru, atau beberapa variabel yang sudah ada diubah tipenya.
Kami biasanya mencoba menggunakan ''default'' yang wajar untuk mereka, dan apabila tipenya berubah, dibuat agar kompatibel mundur.
Dalam kasus apapun, periksa catatan rilis untuk melihat perubahan tersebut.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Menjalankan skrip pemuktahiran ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
Anda bisa memutakhirkan basis data MediaWiki dengan dua cara: Dari baris perintah atau dari peramban web. Jika Anda punya akses shell ke peladen Anda, memutakhirkan dari basis perintah lebih disarankan, karena ini mengurangi risiko proses pemutakhirannya diganggu oleh masalah waktu habis atau pengaturan ulang koneksi.

Skrip juga akan mencoba mengunduh hal-hal yang belum ada yang dibutuhkan MediaWiki.

=== Baris perintah ===

Akses baris perintah peladen Anda atau shell SSH atau sejenisnya. Anda bisa mengakses baris perintah dengan menghubungi peladen Anda via SSH. Jika PC lokal yang Anda gunakan menjalankan Microsoft Windows, Anda akan membutuhkan alat seperti [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] untuk menggunakan SSH. Dari baris perintah atau Shell, pindah ke direktori &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; dan jalankan [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|skrip pemutakhiran]]:

 $ php update.php

Di sebuah peladen Linux jika Anda mendapatkan galat coba lakukan perintah yang sama sebagai root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Catatan untuk instalasi sederhana di Windows (misalnya menggunakan {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
Pertama-tama pastikan peladen web Anda (misalnya Apache) dan basis data Anda (misalnya MySQL) sedang berjalan.
Kemudian jalankan &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: klik kanan, pilih Open With, dan telusuri hingga PHP.exe.
Jendela baris perintah yang dihasilkan kemungkinan akan tertutup secara otomatis ketika pemutakhiran skemanya selesai.

Anda mungkin mendapatkan pesan bahwa versi PHP Anda terlalu tua dan bahwa MediaWiki memerlukan versi yang lebih baru.
Setelah pesan tersebut pemutakhiran akan dibatalkan.
Penyebab galat ini adalah baris perintah menggunakan versi PHP yang berbeda dengan yang Anda miliki ketika Anda menjalankan MediaWiki dari peladen web.
Ketika Anda mendapatkan pesan ini Anda sebaiknya memeriksa, apabila Anda menjalankan versi PHP yang lebih baru di shell dengan menggunakan perintah yang berbeda: Itu mungkin bisa jadi ''php5'' atau ''php56''.
Jika versi lain tersedia dan — apabila iya — dengan nama apa, bergantung pada pengaturan peladen Anda.
Jika tidak bekerja, tanya penyedia hos Anda; mereka pasti tahu.

MediaWiki akan memeriksa skema yang ada dan memutakhirkannya agar bekerja dengan kode yang baru, menambahkan tabel dan kolom apabila diperlukan.

{{Note|1=Jika Anda menggunakan [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|basis data bersama]], Anda sebaiknya memberikan parameter &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; apabila Anda ingin tabel bersamanya diperbarui. Jika tidak mereka tidak akan disentuh oleh skrip pemutakhiran.}}

==== Apa yang perlu dilakukan apabila &quot;php update.php&quot; tidak melakukan apa-apa, hanya terjadi jeda sebentar kemudian kembali ke baris perintah ====

Ini bisa jadi disebabkan malfungsi pada kulit atau ekstensi.

* Periksa apakah semua ekstensi dan kulit yang dipanggil di LocalSettings.php tersedia
* Periksa apakah ekstensi-ekstensi menggunakan metode registrasi yang benar (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
* Jadikan setengah pertama ekstensi di LocalSettings.php menjadi komentar. Jika ini menyebabkan update.php bekerja, kembalikan setengah dari setelah tersebut menjadi seperti semula (setengah dari setengah jadi 1/4 ekstensi). Jika ini TIDAK menyebabkan update.php bekerja, kembalikan setengah awal menjadi semula dan jadikan setengah akhir menjadi komentar, lalu jadikan setengah dari setengah akhir menjadi komentar, dst. Ulangi sampai update.php bekerja untuk menemukan ekstensi mana yang bersalah.

==== Apa yang dilakukan ketika muncul kesalahan &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; (atau yang mirip) ====

Jika skripnya dibatalkan dengan pesan seperti begini:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

Ini berarti Anda sebaiknya memeriksa apakah Anda telah mendefinisikan {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} dan {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} dalam berkas {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} Anda (di direktori utama). Ini adalah pengguna dan kata sandi yang diperlukan oleh skrip ini agar bisa mengakses basis data.

Dalam beberapa kasus, variabel lama $wgDBmwschema (untuk Postgres) kelihatannya dibaca sebagai nama tabel yang diperbarui bukannya $wgDBname, meskipun ketika mysql yang digunakan. Jika ini penyebabnya, tinggal hapus definisi $wgDBmwschema di LocalSettings.php.

==== Apa yang dilakukan ketika muncul kesalahan &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; ====

Orang-orang yang menjalankan update.php dari baris perintah mungkin menemui galat berikut:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

Galat ini terjadi ketika update.php dijalankan dari php4.

Orang-orang yang situsnya dihos oleh penyedia yang menyediakan php4 sekaligus php5 sebaiknya melakukan langkah-langkah berikut:

# dari baris perintah, masukkan perintah 'whereis php5'
# begitu Anda menemukan lokasi jalur php5, daftarkan isi direktori php5/bin
# setelah Anda mengetahui nama berkas php yang dapat dieksekusi (php atau php5), ketikkan seluruh jalur untuk menjalankan update.php

Berikut adalah sebuah contoh:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

====Apa yang dilakukan ketika muncul kesalahan 'register_argc_argv is set to false'====

Anda mungkin menemui galat berikut:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Pergi ke ~/maintenance. Sunting berkas 'php.ini' yang sudah ada, atau buat yang baru. 
# Tambahkan sebuah baris seperti berikut:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Jalankan kembali &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===Peramban web===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Lihat pula {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Jika basis data Anda sudah besar dan dalam penggunaan yang tinggi, maka Anda sebaiknya tidak menggunakan pembaru Web, di antaranya karena proses pembaruan akan kehabisan waktu ketika ''maximum_execution_time'' tercapai. Jika begitu, Anda sebaiknya menggunakan [[update.php]] dari antarmuka baris-perintah (tidak dari web). Apa yang dimaksus &quot;terlalu besar&quot; bergantung pada peladen Anda (performanya, muatannya, dan berapa lama waktu eksekusi maksimum PHP yang diberikan kepada skrip). Jika wiki Anda terlalu besar untuk pembaru web dan penyedia hosting Anda tidak memungkinkan akses baris-perintah, maka Anda perlu memindahkan wiki Anda ke akun hosting lainnya, sebaiknya yang memiliki akses shell.

# Selalu [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|cadangkan]] sebelum melakukan pemeliharaan basis data.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# Jelajahi peramban web Anda hingga ke &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;. Misalnya, jika wiki Anda berada di &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, maka jelajahi ke &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
# Pilih bahasa Anda dan tekan lanjutkan.
# Instalasi yang sudah ada harusnya terdeteksi. Ikuti instruksi di layar untuk memperbaruinya.&lt;br/&gt;Jika diminta sebuah &quot;''upgrade key''&quot;, bukalah berkas {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} Anda dan cari kunci yang diberikan untuk {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.

Mungkin juga pembaru-web tampak tidak bekerja: Bukannya melihat layar pemilihan bahasa awal, Anda malah melihat sebuah halaman wiki kosong, mungkin dengan suatu pesan galat. Jika begini, kemungkinan ini disebabkan peladen web Anda menggunakan ''Rewrite Rules'' (kemungkinan untuk [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|URL pendek]]), yang tidak menampilkan pembaru di ''mw-config/'', melainkan sebuah halaman wiki di ''Mw-config/'', dengan &quot;M&quot; kapital. Jika begini, ubah nama berkas ''.htaccess'' untuk waktu pembaruan. Kemudian Anda seharusnya bisa mengakses pembaru web.

{{Warning|1=Jika Anda menggunakan metode ini, pastikan untuk '''mengubah kembali nama berkas .htaccess''' setelah menjalankan skrip pemutakhiran! Jika tidak URL pendek dan beberapa hal lainnya akan rusak!}}

== Mengujicoba pemuktahiran ==

Ketika pemutakhiran telah selesai, pergi ke wiki dan periksa apakah operasi-operasi berikut bekerja sebagaimana mestinya:

* Membaca halaman
* Menyunting halaman
* Mengunggah berkas
* Kunjungi [[Special:Version]] dan periksa apakah versi yang ditampilkan benar dan ekstensi-ekstensinya ada

== Menghapus sisa-sisa dari instalasi yang lama ==
Jika Anda telah menyalin instalasi lama Anda ke folder lain di peladen, pastikan untuk menghapusnya atau membuatnya sama sekali tidak bisa diakses dari web.
Sangat penting untuk tidak membiarkan instalasi lama bisa diakses dari web, karena itu tidak sesuai dengan tujuan pemutakhiran, dan membuat peladen Anda berisiko diserang.

== Pertanyaan yang sering diajukan ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===Seberapa sulit melakukan pemuktahiran?===

Jika satu-satunya berkas yang telah Anda ubah adalah {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, dan Anda memutakhirkan dari 1.5 atau setelahnya, prosesnya sangatlah sederhana. Pekerjaan manusia yang harus dilakukan hanya berdurasi beberapa menit. Perubahan skema basis data akan menghabiskan waktu sebanding dengan ukuran basis data Anda — mungkin beberapa jam untuk wiki dengan jutaan halaman, tetapi untuk ukuran biasa sekitar beberapa ribu halaman, biasanya dilakukan dalam hitungan detik.

Pemutakhiran minor, di antara versi-versi mayor yang sama, misalnya dari {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 ke {{MW legacy release number}}, tidak membutuhkan perubahan skema sama sekali.
Anda bisa hanya memperbarui berkas-berkasnya. Basis datanya tidak perlu, sehingga tidak perlu menjalankan skrip pembaru.

Memutakhirkan dari 1.4 atau sebelumnya akan lebih rumit karena dukungan untuk set karakter selain UTF-8 dihentikan, dan skema untuk menyimpan banyak teks diubah. Tolong baca bagian yang relevan di berkas &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt;.

Pemutakhiran menjadi sulit apabila Anda telah mengubah kode sumber, dan Anda tidak ingin pengubahan Anda ditimpa. Peralatan seperti [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] atau [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] bisa jadi berguna. Juga terdapat potensi masalah apabila Anda menggunakan ekstensi yang tidak terpelihara. Mutakhirkan ekstensi Anda bersamaan dengan Anda memperbarui MediaWiki.

Jika Anda telah mengubah kulit atau menggunakan kulit buatan sendiri Anda kemungkinan harus menyesuaikannya lagi agar bisa bekerja di versi MediaWiki yang baru.

{{Tip|1=Agar tidak perlu menambal berkas css dan js (javascript) &quot;global&quot; setiap kali memutakhirkan, Anda bisa menambhkan kodenya ke halaman MediaWiki:Common.js dan MediaWiki:Common.css Anda. Karena halaman-halaman tersebut merupakan bagian dari basis data yang akan kembali digunakan ketika Anda memutakhirkan, Anda tidak perlu menambal berkas inti MediaWiki lagi.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== Bagaimana saya memuktahirkan dari versi yang lama sekali? Dalam satu langkah, atau beberapa langkah?===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Tergantung: Jika Anda '''memutakhirkan dari MediaWiki 1.4 atau lebih lama''', Anda sebaiknya memperbarui ke MediaWiki 1.5 dulu. Jika Anda memperbarui dari wiki Latin-1, gunakan upgrade1_5.php (ditemukan di MediaWiki 1.5) untuk mengubah bagian-bagian yang relevan dari basis data ke UTF-8 ($latin perlu diatur menjadi true dalam $localsettings Anda agar ini bekerja). Kemudian, jalankan update.hp, dan atur pilihan $legacy di LocalSettings.php untuk kode yang sebelumnya digunakan di wiki (misalnya windows-1252). Ini pada dasarnya adalah bagaimana Wikipedia dari situs Yayasan Wikimedia lainnya diperbarui dari MediaWiki 1.4 ke 1.5 — lihat [$noc berkas pengaturan yang relevan (peringatan: halaman besar!)] dan beberapa [[$wikitech|catatan-catatan terkait di Wikitech]]. Anda mungkin perlu memperbarui dari MediaWiki 1.4 sebelum menjalankan skrip upgrade1.5.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
Jika Anda ingin membuat sebuah ''dump'' basis data (misalnya MySQL) dari wiki Latin-1 Anda, pastikan untuk mengetik isian &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; di tabel {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} dengan &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, bukan &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt; untuk menghindari masalah pengodean karakter.

Jika Anda '''memutakhirkan dari MediaWiki 1.5 atau lebih baru''', Anda bisa memutakhirkan dalam satu langkah, dari versi lama Anda ke versi stabil terbaru.
Kebanyakan laporan, serta pengujian otomatis, mengindikasikan bahwa melakukannya dalam satu langkah bekerja dengan baik.
Jika Anda kesulitan memercayainya, bacalah [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|posting milis ini]].
Akan tetapi, tolong perhatikan bahwa ketika Anda memutakhirkan dari versi lama, kemungkinan Anda akan menemukan galat PHP yang lebih besar dibandingkan dengan memutakhirkan dari versi yang tepat sebelum versi baru.
Anda akan tetap menerima kesalahan ini, jika Anda tidak melewatkan versi, tetapi kesalahan akan dikaitkan dengan setiap pembaruan individu.
Jika Anda memutakhirkan beberapa versi secara bersamaan, Anda akan mendapatkan semua galatnya secara bersamaan.
Ini akan mebuat pemutakhiran lebih sulit, tetapi jangan lupa bahwa Anda tidak mengalami masalah ketika memutakhirkan ke versi pertengahan, yang Anda lewatkan!

Jika Anda '''memutakhirkan ke MediaWiki 1.36''' atau setelahnya, hanya pemutakhiran dari dua rilis LTS terakhir yang didukung ([[phab:T259771]]). Ini berarti untuk versi yang sangat lama, Anda harus memutakhirkan ke MediaWiki 1.35 terlebih dahulu kemudian memutakhirkan ke 1.36.

===Apakah sebaiknya saya mencadangkan dulu?===

Jawaban singkat: Ya.

Jawaban panjang: Bergantung pada a) seberapa berharga data Anda, b) seberapa sulit membuat cadangan dan c) seberapa yakin Anda pada pemeliharaan dan administrasi MySQL. 

Kegagalan dalam pemutakhiran bisa menyebabkan basis data Anda berada dalam keadaan yang tidak konsisten, di antara dua versi.
Sebuah galat PHP atau MySQL bisa terjadi ketika pemutakhiran sehingga basis data Anda hanya sebagian yang dimutakhirkan.
Dalam situasi tersebut mungkin saja untuk memperbaiki masalahnya dengan kerja manual yang banyak.
Akan tetapi, ''jauh lebih mudah'' untuk meletakkan basis data cadangan dari sebelum dijalankannya update.php dan meneruskan pemutakhiran menggunakan itu.
Jika tidak Anda mungkin perlu menghabiskan pekerjaan — yang  tidak perlu — selama berjam-jam.

Pemulihan adalah hal yang biasanya rumit.
Sukarelawan di forum dukungan tidak akan senang apabila Anda tidak membuat cadangan dan perlu bantuan untuk memulihkan data yang rusak dalam proses pemutakhiran.
Hasil yang ideal adalah apabila Anda bisa mengembalikan cadangan Anda, dan kemudian [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|melaporkan ''bug'' pada proyek MediaWiki yang sesuai]] selama proses pemutakhiran yang menyebabkan kerusakan data.

===Bisakah saya menyimpan LocalSettings.php saya?===
Ya, tetapi Anda harus membuat beberapa perubahan kecil. Format {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} pada umumnya kompatibel mundur.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

===Bisakah wiki saya tetap dalam jaringan ketika pemuktahiran?===

Secara umum iya, tetapi Git bisa memutuskannya secara sementara (selama beberapa detik).

Jika Anda memutakhirkan di antara rilis minor MediaWiki, satu-satunya yang perlu Anda lakukan adalah memutakhirkan berkas-berkas sumber.

Catatan: instruksi berikut mengasumsikan Anda punya akses baris perintah. Jika Anda memutakhirkan di antara rilis utama MediaWiki, prosedur yang disarankan adalah:

# Ekstrak versi baru MediaWiki ke dalam direktori baru.
# Siapkan direktori baru tersebut: salin LocalSettings.php Anda dari direktori yang lama, sali ekstensi-ekstensi dan kulit-kulit yang telah dipasang (apabila ada). Periksa pengaturan {{wg|Logo}} dan {{wg|Logos}} di LocalSettings.php dan jika perlu sali berkas logo dari direktori lama ke direktori baru.
# Dalam catatan rilis untuk versi yang baru, lihat apakah ada perubahan yang harus dibuat pada LocalSettings.php.
# Letakkan basis data dalam mode hanya baca dengan memasukkan variabel berikut ke LocalSettings.php di direktori lama — para pengguna akan melihat pesan ini apabila mereka mencoba menyunting selama proses pemutakhiran:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Ini tidak lagi bekerja sejak MediaWiki 1.27, yang juga menghentikan dijalankannhya skrip pemutakhiran. Cara mengatasinya untuk versi sejak MediaWiki 1.27 bisa ditemukan di {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. Lihat pula {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Jalankan [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|skrip pemutakhiran]] atau pembaru web dalam direktori baru.
# Salin gambar dari subdirektori gambar dari direktori lama ke direktori baru.
# Tukar direktori lama dengan direktori baru.

===Mengapa memuktahirkan?===
:''Berlanggananlah dengan [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] agar diberitahukan soal rilis baru.''

Karena memutakhirkan [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|biasanya cukup mudah]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|satu langkah dari versi Anda ke versi terbaru]] dan juga [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|lewat web]].

Rilis terbaru menerima perbaikan keamanan untuk menjaga wiki dan hos Anda aman dari para vandal, sedangkan rilis lama tidak (lihat {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). Jadi ada lusinan alasan yang bagus untuk memutakhirkan.

Rilis utama yang baru menyediakan fitur-fitur baru, yang Anda mungkin mau gunakan: lihat catatan rilis untuk rinciannya. Jika Anda perlu argumen tambahan untuk meyakinkan bos Anda untuk membiarkan Anda memutakhirkan dari versi yang sudah tua, berikut adalah ringkasannya:

* Sejak {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|suntingan bisa dipratayangkan sebelum menyimpan]] dalam bentuk ''diff''.
* Sejak {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, tersedia sebuah [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|tombol balikkan]].
* Sejak {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|berpatroli]] di [[Special:NewPages]] menjadi lebih mudah.
* Sejak {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, Anda bisa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|mengganti nama]] (memindahkan) berkas.
* Sejak {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, Anda bisa [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|memperbaiki pengalihan ganda]] secara otomatis.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} tersedia.
* Jika Anda memiliki tembolok yang sesuai, sejak 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} mengoptimalkan kecepatan pemuatan halaman.
* Sejak 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|pengurutan kategori menjadi masuk akal!]] (terutama untuk huruf non-Inggris); diperluas menjadi 68 bahasa setelah {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} dan {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, pengguna dari semua bahasa dan jenis kelamin dipanggil oleh antarmuka dan [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|catatan]] secara tepat (sebelum 1.15, sama sekali tidak ada jenis kelamin).
* Dalam {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} sistem perkulitan diubah agar lebih mudah untuk menggunakan bagian dari kulit yang sudah ada untuk kulit Anda sendiri.
* Sejak [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|''diff'']] menjadi lebih mudah dibaca.
* Pada [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] dan [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], pemberitahuan surel menjadi lebih jelas dan bisa ditebak, membuat wiki Anda lebih efektif.
* Sejak [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], pemberantasan vandal (patroli) menjadi lebih hemat waktu.
* Pada [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], penyimpanan kata sandi diperbaiki untuk memungkinkan peningkatan keamanan.
* Sejak [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|perubahan terbaru ''enhanced'' disediakan]]
* Pada [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], [[ResourceLoader|mekanisme &quot;ResourceLoader&quot; diperbaiki]]
* Pada [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], manajemen sesi diubah dan manajemen autentikasi pengguna sepenuhnya dimodernkan. InstantCommons tidak lagi membutuhkan berkas lokal.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, tembolok untuk HTML halaman artikel yang digambarkan telah ditingkatkan.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, Action API diubah dan diperbaiki. Pemberian kelompok pengguna juga sekarang bisa dilakukan untuk suatu periode waktu yang bisa dipilih. Memungkinkan memblokir suatu jangkauan IP.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, pengguna terblokir tidak bisa mengubah surel mereka. Menambahkan kemampuan untuk mencari kontribusi untuk suatu jangkauan IP di Special:Contributions.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, beberapa ekstensi menjadi bagian dari inti, contohnya {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}. {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} diperkenalkan. Menambahkan batasan laju suntingan baku sebesar 90 suntingan/menit untuk semua pengguna.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki mendukung lebih dari 350 bahasa.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki mendukung &quot;pemblokiran sebagian&quot;, sehingga IP dan akun bisa ditahan dari menyunting halaman atau ruang nama tertentu.
* Sejak {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, lebih banyak ekstensi menjadi bagian dari inti: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (untuk modul Lua), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; Fitur &quot;pantau&quot; bisa ditingkatkan dengan tanggal kedaluwarsa.

Juga, pada {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} kami mulai [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|membundel beberapa ekstensi penting]], seperti alat penyuntingan dan pelawan vandalisme ConfirmEdit dan Nuke; lebih banyak lagi ditambahkan pada rilis-rilis berikutnya.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Lihat pula ==

* Posting blog Greg Sabino Mulla memberikan [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html rincian lebih lanjut mengenai pemutakhiran rilis titik].
* [[Project:Support desk]] apabila Anda perlu bantuan atau terjadi kesalahan
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - apabila Anda tidak punya cadangan yang berhasil
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>lmzvpb4t7pjej5gwstexfi0hwfwwwm7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ResourceLoader/Core modules</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>52788</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401744</id>
      <parentid>5398852</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:39:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Krinkle</username>
        <id>135822</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* mw.loader.load */ don't recommend use of /w/index.php, as this is not stable across domains when scripts are loaded indirectly. E.g. load A.js which loads B.js. It's possible but not encouraged.</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="39219" xml:space="preserve">{{languages}}{{ResourceLoader navigation}}
{{rellink|See also [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/ JS documentation on doc.wikimedia.org]}}
{{TOCRight|limit=2}}
This page lists '''modules that ship with MediaWiki core''' by default. It reflects the current development version of MediaWiki and may vary from the latest stable release. For older modules, see the [[ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)|Migration guide]].

{{anchor|base-env}}The modules &lt;code&gt;jquery&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;mediawiki&lt;/code&gt; together form the base environment (&quot;startup&quot;) and are always present. They must not be declared as dependencies.

== mediawiki ==
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw JS Documentation]

This is the MediaWiki base module. It initialises the &lt;code&gt;mw&lt;/code&gt; global object.

=== {{anchor|mediaWiki.config}} mw.config ===

* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw-property-config JS Documentation]
For a list of stable config keys to read from &lt;code&gt;mw.config&lt;/code&gt;, see [[Manual:Interface/JavaScript#mw.config|Manual:Interface/JavaScript]]. 

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;

// Check existence
if ( mw.config.exists( 'wgGlobalGroups' ) ) {
	// CentralNotice has registered this variable...
}

// Or just a plain access for comparison
// (no need to check exists first, it falls back to null)
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgPageName' ) === 'ResourceLoader' ) {
	// Do stuff...
}

/* Access multiple ones for use throughout a larger code base
   Returns an array containing the variables requested.        */
var conf = mw.config.get([
	'wgServer',
	'wgPageName',
	'wgCanonicalSpecialPageName',
	'wgUserLanguage'
]);

if ( conf.wgCanonicalSpecialPageName === 'Blankpage' ) {
	// Do stuff...
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== mw.hook ===
{{MWv|1.22|and after|r=56762}}
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.hook JS Documentation]
A framework for registering and firing events in JavaScript (as opposed to doing everything on document ready). For example, the snippet below provides a message once the categories on a page load:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;js&quot;&gt;
mw.hook( 'wikipage.categories' ).add( function ( $content ) {
	if ( mw.config.get( 'wgCategories' ).length === 0 ) {
		alert( 'Please add categories to this page' );
	}
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In user scripts and gadgets you can fire hooks/events prefixed by &quot;userjs.&quot;. E.g.:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;js&quot;&gt;
function MyScriptInit() {
	var simpleVariable = 'done';
	var objectPassed = { me: this };
	mw.hook( 'userjs.myScript.postInit' ).fire( simpleVariable, objectPassed );
}
//...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
Then you subscribe to this event like so:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;js&quot;&gt;
// here we receive both variables (but we skip them too)
mw.hook( 'userjs.myScript.postInit' ).add( function ( simple, objectPassed ) {
	//...
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== hook execution order ====
Note that hooks are run in a sequence (and in place where they are fired).
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;js&quot;&gt;
function MyGadget() {
  var objectPassed = {
    abc: 'default'
  };
  this.objectPassed = objectPassed;
  console.log('before hooks', objectPassed)
  mw.hook('userjs.MyGadget.postInit').fire(objectPassed);
  console.log('after hooks', objectPassed)
}
mw.hook('userjs.MyGadget.postInit').add(function(objectPassed) {
  objectPassed.abc = 'changed in hook';
  console.log('inside a hook', objectPassed)
});

(function() {
  console.log('before init');
  var gadget = new MyGadget();
  console.log('after init', gadget.objectPassed)
})()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Above will result in following order:
# before init
# before hooks, Object { abc: &quot;default&quot; }
# inside a hook, Object { abc: &quot;changed in hook&quot; }
# after hooks, Object { abc: &quot;changed in hook&quot; }
# after init, Object { abc: &quot;changed in hook&quot; }

=== mw.html ===
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.html JS Documentation]
Helper functions for escaping and creating strings of HTML.

=== mw.loader ===
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.loader JS Documentation]

=== mw.loader.load ===
Load one or more modules, a script or a stylesheet. To load an external script or stylesheet, the URL must start with either &quot;&lt;code&gt;http://&lt;/code&gt;&quot;, &quot;&lt;code&gt;https://&lt;/code&gt;&quot; or &quot;&lt;code&gt;//&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (protocol-relative), or &quot;&lt;code&gt;/&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (local path). Provide a MIME-type as second parameter (either &quot;&lt;code&gt;text/javascript&lt;/code&gt;&quot; or &quot;&lt;code&gt;text/css&lt;/code&gt;&quot;). If no MIME-type is provided, the default &quot;&lt;code&gt;text/javascript&lt;/code&gt;&quot; is assumed. &lt;code&gt;mw.loader&lt;/code&gt; creates an asynchronous request, if you need to run code that depends on a module, use mw.loader.using instead (which provides a callback). If you need a callback from an external script, use [[#mw.loader.getScript|mw.loader.getScript]] (or &lt;code&gt;[https://api.jquery.com/jQuery.getScript/ jQuery.getScript]&lt;/code&gt;).

Loader instructions represent the intent that a module by that name should be loaded. It will not load the same module a second time if it has already been loaded previously. This does not apply to scripts and stylesheets – they ''will'' be loaded each time, even if loaded previously. If a script defines &lt;code&gt;window.Foo&lt;/code&gt;, you can use &lt;code&gt;( window.Foo !== undefined )&lt;/code&gt; to check if that script has already been loaded.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Module by name
mw.loader.load( 'oojs' );

// Multiple modules
mw.loader.load( [ 'oojs', 'mediawiki.Title' ] );

// Local gadget module. These must be defined in [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]].
mw.loader.load( 'ext.gadget.Navigation_popups' );

// JavaScript page
mw.loader.load( 'https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript' );
mw.loader.load( 'https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-HotCat.js&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript' );

// CSS stylesheet
mw.loader.load( 'https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Example/custom-foo.css&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/css', 'text/css' );

// External stylesheet
mw.loader.load( 'https://wiki.example/mystyles.css', 'text/css' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== mw.loader.using ===
Load one or more modules, and execute a function once those modules are loaded. See [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.loader-method-using JS Documentation]

=== mw.loader.getScript ===
{{MWv|1.33|and after|gerrit change=487566}}
Load a script by URL. Returns a jQuery [https://api.jquery.com/Types/#Promise promise object] which can be used to specify callbacks.

Example:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.getScript( 'https://example.org/x-1.0.0.js' )
.then(
    function () {
        // Script succeeded. You can use X now.
    },
    function ( e ) {
        // Script failed. X is not available
        mw.log.error( e.message ); // =&gt; &quot;Failed to load script&quot;
    }
);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
To get a single callback from multiple promises, use &lt;code&gt;[https://api.jquery.com/jQuery.when/ jQuery.when]&lt;/code&gt; or Promise.all
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$.when(
    mw.loader.getScript( 'https://example.org/x-1.0.0.js' ),
    mw.loader.getScript( 'https://example.org/y-2.0.0.js' )
)
.then(
    function () {
        // Both script succeeded. You can use X and Y now.
    },
    function ( e ) {
        // A script failed, and is not available
        mw.log.error( e.message ); // =&gt; &quot;Failed to load script&quot;
    }
);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== mw.inspect ===
{{MWv|1.32|and after}}

Shortcut for [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.inspect-method-runReports mw.inspect.runReports]. Shows in the console a list of all ResourceLoader modules that are loaded on this page, sorted by the total size of each module's JavaScript, CSS, etc. 

* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.inspect JS Documentation]

=== mw.log ===
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.log JS Documentation]
Collection of methods to help log messages to the console.

=== {{anchor|mw.msg}} mw.message ===
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.Message JS Documentation]
:''See also [[Manual:Messages API#Using messages in JavaScript]]''

If the &lt;code&gt;[[#mediawiki.jqueryMsg|mediawiki.jqueryMsg]]&lt;/code&gt; module is loaded, the behaviour of this module changes significantly. See above link.

=== mw.now ===
{{MW 1.23|and after|gerrit change=99547}}

Get the current time, measured in milliseconds since January 1, 1970 (UTC).

On browsers that implement the [[devmo:Web/API/Navigation timing API|Navigation Timing API]], this function will produce floating-point values with microsecond precision that are guaranteed to be monotonic. On all other browsers, it will fall back to using &lt;code&gt;Date&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var totalTime, time = mw.now();
// some expensive code
totalTime = mw.now() - time;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== mw.track ===
{{MW 1.23|and after|gerrit change=99547}}

Track an analytic event.

This method provides a generic means for MediaWiki JavaScript code to capture state information for analysis. Each logged event specifies a string topic name that describes the kind of event that it is. Topic names consist of dot-separated path components, arranged from most general to most specific. Each path component should have a clear and well-defined purpose. Data handlers are registered via `mw.trackSubscribe`, and receive the full set of events that match their subscription, including those that fired before the handler was bound.

The [[Extension:WikimediaEvents|WikimediaEvents]] extension demonstrates how to add a subscriber for the &quot;timing&quot; and &quot;counter&quot; topics ([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-WikimediaEvents/blob/1e56fd3e03295bcf10078441b75dbb359709c54f/modules/all/ext.wikimediaEvents.statsd.js#L59-L77 example]).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var totalTime, time = mw.now();
// some expensive code
totalTime = mw.now() - time;
mw.track( 'timing.MediaWiki.foo.bar', totalTime );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== {{anchor|mediaWiki.notify|mediawiki.notify}} mw.notify ===
{{MWv|1.20|and after|gerrit change=19199}}

* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw-method-notify JS Documentation]
Creates [[bubble notifications]]. Basic examples:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.notify( 'This is a notification.' ); // Send a plaintext notification
mw.notify( mw.message( 'some-message' ) ); // Use an i18n message to send a notification
mw.notify( $( '&lt;span&gt;This is an &lt;u&gt;HTML&lt;/u&gt; notification.&lt;/span&gt;' ) ); // Send an HTML notification with a jQuery instance (a DOM node also works)

mw.notify( 'Test', { title: 'Title!' } ); // Give the notification a title
mw.notify( 'Test', { autoHide: false } ); // Don't automatically hide the notification
mw.notify( 'Test', { tag: 'foobar' } ); // Send a notification tagged with a tag
mw.notify( 'Test 2', { tag: 'foobar' } ); // This one will replace the previous 'foobar' notification.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
For available options, see [[Bubble notifications#API|Bubble notifications § API]].

== mediawiki.user ==
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.user JS Documentation]

Module that represents information about the current user.

== user.options ==
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=includes/resourceloader/ResourceLoaderUserOptionsModule.php|text=Source code}}
=== mw.user.options ===
Contains [[Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions|the preferences of the user]], or the defaults when logged out.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Get a preference option and use it directly
alert( 'According to your preferences, your gender is ' + mw.user.options.get( 'gender' ) );

// Get several preferences and compare them
var opts = mw.user.options.get( [ 'diffonly', 'showhiddencats' ] );
if ( opts.diffonly === 0 &amp;&amp; opts.showhiddencats === false ) {
	// User's preferences match
} else {
	// User's preferences don't match
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

This module is loaded asynchronously and may depend on a separate HTTP request for the &lt;code&gt;user.defaults&lt;/code&gt; module. Always declare the relevant dependencies for your module, or use &lt;code&gt;mw.loader.using()&lt;/code&gt;.

=== {{anchor|tokens|user.tokens}} mw.user.tokens ===
{{MWv|1.19|and after|r=88553}}

This contains an [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.Map mw.Map] object, pre-populated with tokens for use by [[#mediawiki.api]].

== {{anchor|mediawiki.api.category|mediawiki.api.edit|mediawiki.api.login|mediawiki.api.options|mediawiki.api.upload|mediawiki.api.user|mediawiki.api.watch|mediawiki.api.messages|mediawiki.api.rollback}} mediawiki.api ==
{{MWv|1.18.1|and after|r=105646}}
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.Api JS Documentation]
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/src/mediawiki.api/|text=Source code}}

This module provides the &lt;code&gt;mw.Api&lt;/code&gt; constructor. The main methods of the &lt;code&gt;mw.Api&lt;/code&gt; object are &lt;code&gt;get()&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;post()&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;ajax()&lt;/code&gt;. The &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.api&lt;/code&gt; module (and its plugins) return a ''[https://api.jquery.com/Types/#Promise &lt;code&gt;Promise&lt;/code&gt;]'' – similar to &lt;code&gt;jQuery.ajax&lt;/code&gt; (and its derivatives such as &lt;code&gt;jQuery.get&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;jQuery.post&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jQuery.getJSON&lt;/code&gt;).

Before MediaWiki 1.32 &lt;small&gt;({{gerrit|434179}})&lt;/small&gt;, the methods were part of separate modules named under &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.api.*&lt;/code&gt;. These have been merged into the main module &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.api&lt;/code&gt;, so you only have to depend on that module. The submodules have been deprecated with warnings. These submodules have been removed in MediaWiki 1.33.

{{anchor|mw.Api#edit|mw.Api#saveOptions|mw.Api#watch}}Examples of methods that are available:

* &lt;code&gt;mw.Api#edit&lt;/code&gt; - Edit an existing page.
* &lt;code&gt;mw.Api#saveOptions&lt;/code&gt; - Changes one or more user preferences.
* &lt;code&gt;mw.Api#watch&lt;/code&gt; - Add a given title (or titles) to the user's [[Manual:Watchlist|watchlist]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;// Example
var api = new mw.Api();
api.watch( 'Page to watch' );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== {{anchor|mw.cookie|mediaWiki.cookie}} mediawiki.cookie ==
{{MWv|1.24|and after|gerrit change=120806}}
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.cookie JS Documentation]

Cookie module that uses the same settings as the MediaWiki server-side configuration (except for &lt;code&gt;wgCookieSecure&lt;/code&gt;).

Usage example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.cookie.set( 'myCookie', 'some-value' );

var value = mw.cookie.get( 'myCookie' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

This module prepends the cookie names with &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgCookiePrefix|$wgCookiePrefix}}&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. &quot;&lt;u&gt;enwiki&lt;/u&gt;myCookie=some-value&quot;).

Avoid accessing the same cookie in different ways, for example via &lt;code&gt;mw.cookie&lt;/code&gt; and via &lt;code&gt;$.cookie&lt;/code&gt;, because you may encounter issues if doing so.

See the API documentation for available options.

== {{anchor|mw.Debug|mediaWiki.Debug}} mediawiki.feedback ==
{{MW 1.19|and after}}
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.Feedback JS Documentation]
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/src/mediawiki.feedback/|text=Source code}}

User interface for collecting feedback, particularly on new features.

== mediawiki.jqueryMsg ==
{{See also|Manual:Messages API#Using messages in JavaScript}}
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/src/mediawiki.jqueryMsg/|text=mediawiki.jqueryMsg}}

This module upgrades the &lt;code&gt;[[#mw.message|mw.message]]&lt;/code&gt; parser to support basic wikitext localisation and formatting features. For example, &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.jqueryMsg&lt;/code&gt; is required for [[Manual:Messages_API#Notes about gender, grammar, plural|plural and gender support]], the [[int|int: magic word]] and links.

== {{anchor|mw.storage|mediaWiki.storage}} mediawiki.storage ==
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.storage JS Documentation]
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/src/mediawiki.storage.js|text=mediawiki.storage}}

Wrapper for HTML5 Web Storage (localStorage, and sessionStorage).

If you are migrating from &lt;code&gt;[[#jquery.jStorage|$.jStorage]]&lt;/code&gt;, note that &lt;code&gt;mw.storage&lt;/code&gt; only stores string values. Use &lt;code&gt;JSON.stringify()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;JSON.parse()&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;parseInt&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;parseFloat&lt;/code&gt; accordingly when setting and getting non-string values.

== mediawiki.ui ==
{{MW 1.22|and after}}
* {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/src/mediawiki.ui/|text=mediawiki.ui}}
{{Deprecated-inline|1.29}}
Please use [[OOUI]] instead. See the [[OOUI/Using OOUI in MediaWiki#JavaScript|OOUI module names]].

UI module developed as part of the [[Agora]] project. It defines &lt;code&gt;mw-ui-*&lt;/code&gt; CSS styles. It is used in the [[Special:UserLogin|Login]] and [[Special:UserLogin/signup|Create account]] forms and several extensions. It provides one appearance for Vector and another for the rest of the skins.

== {{anchor|mw.widgets|mediaWiki.widgets}} mediawiki.widgets ==
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.widgets JS Documentation]

== {{anchor|mw.util|mediaWiki.util|mw.util.getUrl|mediaWiki.util.getUrl|getUrl|validateEmail|wikiUrlencode}} mediawiki.util ==
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.util JS Documentation]
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/src/mediawiki.util/util.js|text=mediawiki.util}}

=== addCSS ===
Adds a &lt;code&gt;&lt;style&gt;&lt;/code&gt; element to the HEAD and returns the CSSStyleSheet object.

The CSSStyleSheet object can be used to disable the CSS rules at any later time and re-enable them as well.
This can be done through the 'disabled' attribute. When setting this to true, the rules no longer apply.
When setting to false, the rules apply again.

See also [http://dev.w3.org/csswg/cssom/#css W3 on CSSStyleSheet] for more info.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Add a simple stylesheet rule
mw.util.addCSS( '.plainlinks { color: green; }' );

// Add a rule and set a variable to the sheet
var myCssRules = mw.util.addCSS( '.plainlinks { color: green; }' );
$( '#myButton' ).click( function () {
	// When button is clicked, toggle the stylesheet from true to non-true (false), or from false to non-false (true)
	myCssRules.disabled = !myCssRules.disabled;
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== addPortletLink ===
This function is ported from the legacy wikibits keeping it fully backwards compatible, with a few adjustments that support all core skins and with added support for a CSS-selector as &lt;code&gt;nextnode&lt;/code&gt;.

Only the first three arguments are required. In case you need to execute a custom function when the user clicks on a portlet, use the [https://api.jquery.com/click/ jQuery(...).on('click', .. )] on returned Element object to attach a callback that runs the code that should be executed.

See the [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.util-method-addPortletLink &lt;code&gt;mw.util documentation&lt;/code&gt;] for details.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// First wait for mediawiki.util to load, and the page to be ready.
$.when( mw.loader.using( 'mediawiki.util' ), $.ready ).then( function () { 

	// General usage pattern:
	// mw.util.addPortletLink( portletId, href, text /* Optional: , id, tooltip, accesskey, nextnode */ );

	// Example: Add a link to mediawiki.org to the Tools area, above the &quot;Special pages&quot; link.
	var newElement = mw.util.addPortletLink(
		'p-tb',
		'https://www.mediawiki.org/',
		'Link to mediawiki.org',
		't-mworg',
		'Go to www.mediawiki.org',
		'm',
		'#t-specialpages'
	);

	// The old way of passing a DOM-node also works
	mw.util.addPortletLink(
		'p-tb',
		'https://www.mediawiki.org/',
		'Link to mediawiki.org',
		't-mworg',
		'Go to www.mediawiki.org',	
		'm',
		document.getElementById( 't-specialpages' )
	);

} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== $content ===
A jQuery object for a page's overall content area regardless of the skin used. This is, for example, &lt;code&gt;#content&lt;/code&gt; in the Vector-[[Help:Skins|skin]] (before 1.20 it was &lt;code&gt;#bodyContent&lt;/code&gt;).

This does '''not''' refer to the area where the page content goes. If you wish to work with that area of the page instead of the overall content area you should use &lt;code&gt;$( '#mw-content-text' )&lt;/code&gt; instead.

This property is populated on document ready. To use it, wait for &lt;code&gt;$.ready&lt;/code&gt; and be sure to have a module dependency on &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; which will ensure your document ready handler fires after initialization.

Because of the lazy-initialised nature of this property, you are discouraged from using it.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/* Add some HTML to the page content */
mw.util.$content.append( '&lt;h2&gt;Lorem ipsum&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;This section was just added to the bottom of the wiki page.&lt;/p&gt;' );

/* Count number of tables in the page's content with a class of &quot;wikitable&quot; */
var $wikitablesInPage = mw.util.$content.find( 'table.wikitable' );

if ( $wikitablesInPage.length ) {
	alert( 'There are ' + $wikitablesInPage.length + ' wikitables on this page.' );
} else {
	alert( 'There are no wikitables on this page.' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Here is a more advanced example involving loading in extra content with an AJAX request.
Run this example on a page other than the main page.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/* Loads in main page (or any page for that matter) over AJAX (may be useful for Special:BlankPage) */

// Put a loading message on top of the page
mw.util.$content.prepend( '&lt;p&gt;&lt;em&gt;Loading...&lt;/em&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;hr/&gt;' );

// To get the article contents, use #mw-content-text instead.
$( '#mw-content-text' ).load( mw.util.getUrl( '' ) + ' #mw-content-text', function () {
	mw.notify( 'Load complete!' );
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== getParamValue ===
This function returns the value of the specified URL parameter.
By default it uses the current window's address. Optionally you can pass it a custom location.

It returns &lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt; if the parameter is not present.
Returns an empty string(&lt;code&gt;&quot;&quot;&lt;/code&gt;) if it was an empty parameter (such as &lt;code&gt;/page.php?some=parameter&lt;strong&gt;&amp;emptyparameter=&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;id=12&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Location: https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=ResourceLoader/Default_modules&amp;action=edit&amp;section=28
// Suppose we're editing a page section, this will return the number of the edit section
mw.util.getParamValue( 'section' ); /* returns '28'; */

// Extract a value from a custom url
// For example on a diff page where there is: &quot;← Older edit&quot; and you need the oldid of the previous edit
var oldid = mw.util.getParamValue( 'oldid', '//www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=ResourceLoader/Default_modules&amp;diff=prev&amp;oldid=365296' );
if ( oldid !== null ) {
	alert( 'The previous text version of this page has id: ' + oldid );
} else {
	alert( 'No &quot;oldid&quot; parameter found in the given address.' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== isIPv4Address ===
{{MWv|1.18|r=83202|and after}}

This function returns bool for passed string is valid IPv4 Address or not.
{{Clear}}

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// true
mw.util.isIPv4Address( '192.0.2.0' );

// false (range is invalid IPv4 Address)
mw.util.isIPv4Address( '192.0.2.0/24' );

// false
mw.util.isIPv4Address( 'string' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== isIPv6Address ===
{{MWv|1.18|r=83202|and after}}

This function returns bool for passed string is valid IPv6 Address or not.
{{Clear}}

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// true
mw.util.isIPv6Address( '2001:db8:a:0:0:0:0:0' );

// true
mw.util.isIPv6Address( '2001:db8:a::' );

// false (range is invalid IPv6 Address)
mw.util.isIPv6Address( '2001:db8:a::/32' );

// false
mw.util.isIPv6Address( 'string' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== rawurlencode ===
This function returns an encoded string in its raw form for use in urls.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var exFooUrl = 'http://example.org/foo/' + mw.util.rawurlencode( mw.config.get( 'wgPageName' ) );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

For building query strings, you may want to use [https://api.jquery.com/jQuery.param/ jQuery.param] instead:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var query = {
	page: 'MyPage',
	value: mw.config.get( 'skin' ),
	action: 'foo'
};

var fooQuery = 'http://example.com/stuff.php?' + $.param( query );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== wikiScript ===
{{MWv|1.18|and after|r=88513}}

This function returns the location of a script on the current wiki. Much like &lt;code&gt;wfScript&lt;/code&gt; in [[GlobalFunctions.php]].

'''Parameters:''' &lt;code&gt;str&lt;/code&gt; - Name of the script (e.g. 'api'), defaults to 'index'.
{{Clear}}
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
jQuery.getJSON( mw.util.wikiScript( 'api' ), {
	format: 'json',
	action: 'query',
	titles: 'Main Page',
	prop: 'revisions'
} ).done( function ( data ) {
	// data.query
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== mediawiki.RegExp ==
{{MW version|version=1.26|version2=1.35}}
{{Deprecated-inline|1.34}}
:''See [[ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#mediawiki.RegExp|ResourceLoader/Migration guide § mediawiki.RegExp]]''

== {{anchor|mw.Title|mediaWiki.Title}} mediawiki.Title ==
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.Title JS Documentation]
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/src/mediawiki.Title/|text=mediawiki.Title}}

This sets the &lt;code&gt;mw.Title&lt;/code&gt; constructor, which has several methods in its prototype. Basic example:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var t = new mw.Title( 'Image: foo_bar baz.jpg' );
t.getMain(); // &quot;Foo_bar_baz.jpg&quot;
t.getNamespaceId(); // 6
t.getNamespacePrefix(); // &quot;File:&quot;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== {{anchor|mw.Uri|mediaWiki.Uri}} mediawiki.Uri ==
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.Uri JS Documentation]
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/src/mediawiki.Uri/|text=mediawiki.Uri}}

== moment ==

* Upstream documentation: https://momentjs.com/

Moment.js can parse, manipulate, and format date-time timestamps. Localisation is automatically loaded and configured for the current user interface language.&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var moment = require( 'moment' );

moment( '2011-04-01 09:00' ).format( 'LLLL' );
// &quot;Friday, 1 April 2011 9:00 AM&quot;

moment.version
//&gt; &quot;2.25.2&quot;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== {{anchor|OOjs}} oojs ==
{{MW 1.23|and after}}
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/OO JS Documentation]

[[OOjs]] is a libary that provides a consistent way of implementing object-oriented design in JS.

== oojs-ui ==
{{MW 1.23|and after}}
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/OO.ui JS Documentation]

[[OOUI]] is a user interface toolkit based on OOjs. Note that &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui&lt;/code&gt; is just a legacy name for the module. See all the known [[OOUI/Using OOUI in MediaWiki#JavaScript|OOUI module names]].

== {{anchor|jQuery}} jquery ==
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/lib/jquery/jquery.js|text=jquery}}
More information about jQuery's presence in MediaWiki, see [[jQuery]]. For more about jQuery in general and all its core functions, refer to https://api.jquery.com/

ResourceLoader provides jQuery as part of its [[#base-env|base environment]] (the loader client uses jQuery internally), therefore this module is &lt;em&gt;always&lt;/em&gt; loaded and should not (and in fact can not) be loaded through ResourceLoader (as dependency or otherwise).

== jquery.chosen ==
* {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/lib/jquery.chosen/|text=jquery.chosen}}
“Chosen is a jQuery plugin that makes long, unwieldy select boxes much more user-friendly.” — [http://harvesthq.github.io/chosen/ harvesthq.github.io]

In fact, it turns a select into a combo box with [[:en:Autocomplete|autocomplete]] functionality by default but also supports grouping, and &quot;tagging&quot; (i.e. multiple values).
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;JavaScript&quot;&gt;
$( 'select' ).chosen( { /* options */ } );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== jquery.client ==
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/jquery-client/master/#!/api/jQuery.client JS Documentation]

A plugin that extracts information about the client's browser, layout engine, and operating system.

=== jQuery.client.profile ===
Here a few examples:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( $.client.profile().layout == 'gecko' &amp;&amp; $.client.profile().platform == 'linux' ) {
	// This will only run on Gecko browsers (ie. Mozilla Firefox) on Linux.
}

if ( $.client.profile().name == 'msie' ) {
	// Only for good ol' Internet Explorer
}

// Shortcut
var prof = $.client.profile();
if ( prof.name == 'firefox' &amp;&amp; prof.versionBase == '2' &amp;&amp; prof.platform == 'win' ) {
	// Target Mozilla Firefox 2.x on Windows
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
Check {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/lib/jquery.client/jquery.client.js|text=jquery.client.js}} for possible values of browser names, layout engines and platforms.

== jquery.color ==
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/jQuery.colorUtil JS Documentation: $.colorUtil]
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/src/jquery.color|text=Source code}}
{{clear}}

== jquery.cookie ==
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/lib/jquery.cookie/|text=jquery.cookie}}
You can use jquery.cookie or you can use &lt;code&gt;[[#mediawiki.cookie|mediawiki.cookie]]&lt;/code&gt; instead in new code, since it takes into account MediaWiki's cookie configuration settings for you.

This plugin allows you to set, get and delete cookies.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Set cookie (simple, current page/path)
$.cookie( 'myName', 'Flower' );

// Set cookie (extra options)
$.cookie( 'myName', 'Flower', {
	expires: 7, // expires in 7 days
	path: '/' // domain-wide, entire wiki
} );

// Get cookie
var name = $.cookie( 'myName' );

// Delete cookie
// Deprecated since 1.2 please use $.removeCookie( 'foo' ) instead
$.cookie( 'myName', null );

$.removeCookie( 'foo' )
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

When deleting a cookie, you must use the same path and domain used when the cookie was set.

Note that when MediaWiki server-side code sets a cookie it usually prefixes it with the database name; this prefix is available to JavaScript code as the &lt;code&gt;mw.config&lt;/code&gt; variable &lt;code&gt;wgCookiePrefix&lt;/code&gt;.

Note that users will likely get separate cookies for &lt;code&gt;/wiki/&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt; paths in page URLs if you do not specify the extra option &lt;code&gt;{ path: '/' }&lt;/code&gt; when setting a cookie.

== jquery.i18n ==
{{MW 1.26|and after|gerrit change=223201}}
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/lib/jquery.i18n/|text=jquery.i18n}}

{{clear}}

== jquery.makeCollapsible ==
{{MWv|1.18|and after|r=78914}}
:''See also [[Manual:Collapsible elements]].''
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/jQuery.plugin.makeCollapsible JS Documentation]
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/src/jquery/jquery.makeCollapsible.js|text=jquery.makeCollapsible}}

Makes elements collapsible. It supports lots of variations such as:
; Simple: Add &quot;&lt;code&gt;mw-collapsible&lt;/code&gt;&quot; to an element (a {{cnw|&lt;div&gt;}} for example) with some content and save the page. The inner content of this element will be treated as collapsible content. Prepended to the element, before the collapsible content, is a toggle-link with a localized label ([[MediaWiki:Collapsible-expand|collapsible-expand]], [[MediaWiki:Collapsible-collapse|collapsible-collapse]])
; Initial state: Adding &quot;&lt;code&gt;mw-collapsed&lt;/code&gt;&quot; as additional class will cause the element to be initially collapsed when the page is loaded.
; Custom label:&lt;sup&gt;HTML5 only&lt;/sup&gt; Using the &lt;code&gt;data-collapsetext&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;data-expandtext&lt;/code&gt; attributes one can define a custom text for the toggle labels added by the script. When added in wikitext these could be populated by a localized message like:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html4strict&quot; enclose=&quot;none&quot;&gt;&lt;div class=&quot;mw-collapsible&quot; data-expandtext=&quot;{{int:show}}&quot; data-collapsetext=&quot;{{int:hide}}&quot;&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
; Remote toggle: If you don't want the script to put the default toggle link (whether or not with a custom label) in your element, you can make one of your own. This could reside anywhere inside ''or'' outside the collapsible element. Its relationship to the collapsible element is detected by using an ID attribute with the prefix &lt;code&gt;mw-customcollapsible&lt;/code&gt; and a corresponding class attribute with prefix &lt;code&gt;mw-customtoggle&lt;/code&gt; for the collapsible element and the togglelink respectively.

&lt;div style=&quot;font-size: larger;&quot;&gt;'''Example: Simple collapsible div or table'''&lt;/div&gt;

'''Input:'''
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html4strict&quot;&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Foo
! Bar
|-
| Lorem
| Ipsum
|-
| More info
|&lt;!--
--&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;width: 100%;&quot;
! Head
! Top
|-
| Cell
| content
|-
| This table is collapsible
| Because it has the &quot;mw-collapsible&quot; class
|-
| It was initially hidden, because it
| had the &quot;mw-collapsed&quot; class
|}&lt;!--
--&gt;
|-
|}

&lt;div class=&quot;toccolours mw-collapsible&quot; style=&quot;width: 400px;&quot;&gt;
This is text is collapsible. {{Lorem}}
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

'''Output:'''

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Foo
! Bar
|-
| Lorem
| Ipsum
|-
| More info
|&lt;!--
--&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; style=&quot;width: 100%;&quot;
! Head
! Top
|-
| Cell
| content
|-
| This table is collapsible
| Because it has the &quot;mw-collapsible&quot; class
|-
| It was initially hidden, because it
| had the &quot;mw-collapsed&quot; class
|}

|}

&lt;div class=&quot;toccolours mw-collapsible&quot; style=&quot;width: 400px;&quot;&gt;
This is text is collapsible. {{Lorem}}
&lt;/div&gt;


{{clear}}
----

'''Example: Hide the collapsible element by default, the toggle element resides outside of it'''

'''Input:'''

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html4strict&quot;&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-customtoggle-myDivision&quot; style=&quot;background:#e0e8ff&quot;&gt;Click here to toggle the element&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; id=&quot;mw-customcollapsible-myDivision&quot;&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;toccolours mw-collapsible-content&quot;&gt;Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet...&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-customtoggle-myDivision&quot; style=&quot;background:#e8ffe0&quot;&gt;Clicking will toggle it also!&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

'''Output:'''

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-customtoggle-myDivision&quot; style=&quot;background:#e0e8ff&quot;&gt;Click here to toggle the element&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&quot; id=&quot;mw-customcollapsible-myDivision&quot;&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;toccolours mw-collapsible-content&quot;&gt;Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet...&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-customtoggle-myDivision&quot; style=&quot;background:#e8ffe0&quot;&gt;Clicking will toggle it also!&lt;/div&gt;

For other live examples, see [[Manual:Collapsible elements/Demo/Advanced|Test Wikipedia - Collapsing Testpage]].

== jquery.suggestions ==
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/jQuery.plugin.suggestions-method-suggestions JS Documentation]

== jquery.spinner ==
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/jQuery.plugin.spinner JS Documentation]

== jquery.tabIndex ==
{{Deprecated-inline|1.34}}
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/src/jquery/jquery.tabIndex.js|text=jquery.tabIndex}}

== jquery.tablesorter ==
{{MWv|1.18|and after|r=86088}}
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/src/jquery/jquery.tablesorter.js|text=jquery.tablesorter}}
{{clear}}

== jquery.textSelection ==
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/jQuery.plugin.textSelection JS Documentation]
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/src/jquery/jquery.textSelection.js|text=Source code}}
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot; enclose=&quot;pre&quot;&gt;
mw.util.jsMessage( 'The selected text is &quot;' + mw.html.escape( $( '#wpTextbox1' ).textSelection( 'getSelection' ) ) + '&quot;.' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== jquery.tipsy ==
{{Deprecated-inline|1.28}}
* {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=HEAD|file=resources/src/jquery.tipsy/|text=jquery.tipsy}}
The library will be available for the forseeable future, but overlaps with functionality within [[OOUI]] and provides a suboptimal experience to mobile users. Where jQuery.tipsy is being used, we encourage developers to inspect OOUI and feedback on how the library might be improved to support the usecase that jquery.tipsy provides.

[http://onehackoranother.com/projects/jquery/tipsy Example page]; [http://plugins.jquery.com/project/tipsy jQuery project page]

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! Option
! Type
! Possible values
! Default
! Description
|-
| gravity
| string / call-back function
| 'nw' &amp;#124; 'n' &amp;#124; 'ne' &amp;#124; 'w' &amp;#124; 'e' &amp;#124; 'sw' &amp;#124; 's' &amp;#124; 'se' / $.fn.tipsy.autoNS &amp;#124; $.fn.tipsy.autoWE &amp;#124; pointer or anonymous
| 'n'
| sets the positioning of the tooltip relative to the element
|-
| fade
| bool
| true &amp;#124; false
| true
| use fading effect (fadeIn / fadeOut)
|-
| title
| string (an attribute) / call-back function
| style, class, id, ..., function () { return 'some string'; }
| title &lt;small&gt;(or if not specified fallback-value; see below)&lt;/small&gt;
| Which string to display as a &quot;tool-tip&quot;?
|-
| fallback
| string
| 'valid string'
| 
| used if an element has no tooltip
|-
| html
| bool
| true &amp;#124; false
| false
| interpret the tooltip text as HTML
|-
| delayIn
| number in ms
| 0, 1, 2, ...
| 0
| How long to wait after onmouseover to show the tip?
|-
| delayOut
| number in ms
| 0, 1, 2, ...
| 0
| How long to wait after onmouseout to close the tip?
|-
| trigger
| string
| 'focus' &amp;#124; 'manual' &amp;#124; 'hover'
| hover
| When to show the tooltip (useful for forms)
|-
| live
| bool
| true &amp;#124; false
| false
| dynamical add to selectors- see JQuery's live interpretation
|-
| offset
| number in px
| 
| 0
| offset from tooltip to element
|-
| opacity
| number (float)
| 
| 1.0
| opacity of the tooltip
|}

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.using( 'jquery.tipsy', function () {
	$someObject.prepend(
		$( '&lt;span&gt;', {
			title: 'Some tipsy test title'
		} )
		.append( 'Hover here' )
		.tipsy( {
			option: 'value',
			option2: 'value2'
		} )
	);
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== {{anchor|jQuery UI}} jquery.ui ==
{{Deprecated-inline|1.29}}
Please use OOUI instead.

For more information on and demos for jQuery UI, refer to http://jqueryui.com/

== site ==
This module loads site scripts from the pages:

* &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Common.js&lt;/code&gt;,
* and &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Vector.js&lt;/code&gt; (depending on the current skin).

If {{Wg|UseSiteJs}} is disabled by configuration, then the module is empty.

== user ==
This module loads:

* &lt;code&gt;User:&lt;name&gt;/common.js&lt;/code&gt;,
* &lt;code&gt;User:&lt;name&gt;/vector.js&lt;/code&gt; (depending on current skin),
* &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Group-user.js&lt;/code&gt;,
* &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Group-&lt;groupname&gt;.js&lt;/code&gt; (for each group the current user is a member of, e.g. &quot;sysop&quot;, &quot;bureaucrat&quot; etc.)

If {{Wg|AllowUserJs}} is disabled by configuration, then the &quot;User&quot; sub pages are not included.

If {{Wg|UseSiteJs}} is disabled by configuration, then the &quot;MediaWiki:Group-&quot; pages are not included.{{ResourceLoader navigation}}
{{Shortcut|RL/CM|RL/DM}}
[[Category:JavaScript]]</text>
      <sha1>rflotnu8xobws74fvlegehkrpcuqlna</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>53856</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401703</id>
      <parentid>5312688</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:23:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>78.32.143.113</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update article</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3796" xml:space="preserve">&lt;Languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; '''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[:Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.  Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.CompaniesHouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.  ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[:Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]].  See ShoutWiki's website at [http://www.ShoutWiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com], or [http://www.ShoutWiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; ShoutWiki also has [&lt;tvar|url&gt;https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285&lt;/&gt; its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==Extensions== &lt;!--T:2--&gt;

&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
ShoutWiki uses many [[:Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.  The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://Phabricator.Wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).  See [[:category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]] for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[:Category:All skins|skins]],&lt;ref&gt;[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==
There are [https://Archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==
&lt;References/&gt;

==External links== &lt;!--T:3--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
*[http://www.ShoutWiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.ShoutWiki.com/wiki/Project:About &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; About ShoutWiki&lt;/translate&gt;]
**[http://www.ShoutWiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/translate&gt;]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/translate&gt;
*[https://GitHub.com/ShoutWiki &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/translate&gt;]
*[https://WikiStats.WMCloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>tctb97prkzaipi6p17e819ezhoxsr10</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401745</id>
      <parentid>5401703</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:42:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>discard translation units</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3788" xml:space="preserve">&lt;Languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[:Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.CompaniesHouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[:Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]].  See ShoutWiki's website at [http://www.ShoutWiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com], or [http://www.ShoutWiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; ShoutWiki also has [&lt;tvar|url&gt;https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285&lt;/&gt; its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==Extensions== &lt;!--T:2--&gt;

&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
ShoutWiki uses many [[:Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.  The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://Phabricator.Wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).  See [[:category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]] for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.
&lt;/translate&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[:Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://Archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.ShoutWiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.ShoutWiki.com/wiki/Project:About &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; About ShoutWiki&lt;/translate&gt;]
**[http://www.ShoutWiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/translate&gt;]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/translate&gt;
*[https://GitHub.com/ShoutWiki &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/translate&gt;]
*[https://WikiStats.WMCloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>fhp0ymqht2hcv3kbec1nnskggxz4u8h</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401746</id>
      <parentid>5401745</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:43:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>discard translation units</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3754" xml:space="preserve">&lt;Languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[:Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.CompaniesHouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[:Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]].  See ShoutWiki's website at [http://www.ShoutWiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com], or [http://www.ShoutWiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; ShoutWiki also has [&lt;tvar|url&gt;https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285&lt;/&gt; its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==Extensions== &lt;!--T:2--&gt;

&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
ShoutWiki uses many [[:Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.  The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://Phabricator.Wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).  See [[:category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]] for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.
&lt;/translate&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[:Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://Archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.ShoutWiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.ShoutWiki.com/wiki/Project:About &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; About ShoutWiki&lt;/translate&gt;]
**[http://www.ShoutWiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/translate&gt;]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/translate&gt;
*[https://GitHub.com/ShoutWiki &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/translate&gt;]
*[https://WikiStats.WMCloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>qi7orued2bgqze9kqjrc31x1xho9ozg</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401749</id>
      <parentid>5401746</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:48:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>translation tweaks</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3928" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]].  See ShoutWiki's website at &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com]&lt;/tvar&gt;, or [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About&lt;/tvar&gt; ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; ShoutWiki also has [&lt;tvar|url&gt;https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285&lt;/&gt; its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==Extensions== &lt;!--T:2--&gt;

&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
ShoutWiki uses many [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions&lt;/tvar&gt;|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.  The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [&lt;tvar name=url2&gt;https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/&lt;/tvar&gt; Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git). See [[:category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]] for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.
&lt;/translate&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; About ShoutWiki&lt;/translate&gt;]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/translate&gt;]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/translate&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/translate&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>qwlqbv7o2e2xnehxxwbz372afjxlfns</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401750</id>
      <parentid>5401749</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>translation tweaks</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4036" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]].  See ShoutWiki's website at &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com]&lt;/tvar&gt;, or [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About&lt;/tvar&gt; ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; ShoutWiki also has [&lt;tvar|url&gt;https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285&lt;/&gt; its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==Extensions== &lt;!--T:2--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; ShoutWiki uses many [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions&lt;/tvar&gt;|extensions]] used by [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki&lt;/tvar&gt;|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/&lt;/tvar&gt; Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;See &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/translate&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; About ShoutWiki&lt;/translate&gt;]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/translate&gt;]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/translate&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/translate&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>s7uhhp5io1xlsex5ugfyh5y7exm76u6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401751</id>
      <parentid>5401750</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Marked this version for translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4060" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]].  See ShoutWiki's website at &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com]&lt;/tvar&gt;, or [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About&lt;/tvar&gt; ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; ShoutWiki also has [&lt;tvar|url&gt;https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285&lt;/&gt; its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==Extensions== &lt;!--T:2--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; ShoutWiki uses many [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions&lt;/tvar&gt;|extensions]] used by [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki&lt;/tvar&gt;|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/&lt;/tvar&gt; Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; See &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/translate&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; About ShoutWiki&lt;/translate&gt;]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/translate&gt;]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/translate&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/translate&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>96fhznovq6w0zx5bhy6but5djp0w6np</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401772</id>
      <parentid>5401751</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4058" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]]. See ShoutWiki's website at &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com]&lt;/tvar&gt;, or [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About&lt;/tvar&gt; ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; ShoutWiki also has [&lt;tvar|url&gt;https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285&lt;/&gt; its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==Extensions== &lt;!--T:2--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; ShoutWiki uses many [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions&lt;/tvar&gt;|extensions]] used by [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki&lt;/tvar&gt;|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/&lt;/tvar&gt; Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; See &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/translate&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; About ShoutWiki&lt;/translate&gt;]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/translate&gt;]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/translate&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/translate&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>sr81dzfte8tvphyblkxtn48c60885y7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401872</id>
      <parentid>5401772</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>restore translation units</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4030" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]]. See [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;http://www.shoutwiki.com/&lt;/tvar&gt; ShoutWiki's website] or [&lt;tvar name=url2&gt;http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About&lt;/tvar&gt; ShoutWiki's about page on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; ShoutWiki also has [&lt;tvar|url&gt;https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285&lt;/&gt; its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==Extensions== &lt;!--T:2--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; ShoutWiki uses many [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions&lt;/tvar&gt;|extensions]] used by [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki&lt;/tvar&gt;|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/&lt;/tvar&gt; Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; See &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}&lt;/tvar&gt; for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/translate&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; About ShoutWiki&lt;/translate&gt;]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/translate&gt;]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/translate&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/translate&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>m8ehpbrh0bjahpw96u8ji69vhout0b3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki/fi</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>53857</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401757</id>
      <parentid>5312691</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3968" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Useat ShoutWikin henkilökunnan jäsenet ovat myös MediaWikin [[developers|ohjelmistonkehittäjiä]]. Katso [http://fi.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWikin verkkosivusto] tai [http://fi.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:Tietoja ShoutWikin tietoja-sivu ShoutWikissä] saadaksesi lisätietoja ShoutWikistä yleensä.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWikillä on myös [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 Gerrit-ryhmä] joke koostuu ShoutWikin kehittäjähenkilöstöstä.

==Lisäosat==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki käyttää useita Wikimedian sivustojen käyttämiä lisäosia itsetehtyjen lisäosiensa lisäksi. Useimpien näiden itsetehtyjen lisäosien lähdekoodi löytyy [http://git.wikimedia.org/ Wikimedian git-koodivarastosta (MediaWikin virallinen git)]. Katso [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]] saadaksesi listan ShoutWikin kirjoittamista lisäosista.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Tietoja ShoutWikistä]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Tietoa ShoutWikistä ja avoimesta lähdekoodista]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — erinäisiä ShoutWikin tekemiä paikkauksia MediaWikin koodiin
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWikin GitHub]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>pxccbonime0sgw3cx3xn8y1v6b39gvm</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401776</id>
      <parentid>5401757</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3967" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Useat ShoutWikin henkilökunnan jäsenet ovat myös MediaWikin [[developers|ohjelmistonkehittäjiä]]. Katso [http://fi.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWikin verkkosivusto] tai [http://fi.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:Tietoja ShoutWikin tietoja-sivu ShoutWikissä] saadaksesi lisätietoja ShoutWikistä yleensä.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWikillä on myös [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 Gerrit-ryhmä] joke koostuu ShoutWikin kehittäjähenkilöstöstä.

==Lisäosat==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki käyttää useita Wikimedian sivustojen käyttämiä lisäosia itsetehtyjen lisäosiensa lisäksi. Useimpien näiden itsetehtyjen lisäosien lähdekoodi löytyy [http://git.wikimedia.org/ Wikimedian git-koodivarastosta (MediaWikin virallinen git)]. Katso [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]] saadaksesi listan ShoutWikin kirjoittamista lisäosista.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Tietoja ShoutWikistä]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Tietoa ShoutWikistä ja avoimesta lähdekoodista]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — erinäisiä ShoutWikin tekemiä paikkauksia MediaWikin koodiin
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWikin GitHub]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>nyhexcin77biytzelofoyaw7xuaoihh</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401874</id>
      <parentid>5401776</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3959" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Useat ShoutWikin henkilökunnan jäsenet ovat myös MediaWikin [[developers|ohjelmistonkehittäjiä]]. Katso [http://fi.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWikin verkkosivusto] tai [http://fi.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:Tietoja ShoutWikin tietoja-sivu ShoutWikissä] saadaksesi lisätietoja ShoutWikistä yleensä.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWikillä on myös [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 Gerrit-ryhmä] joke koostuu ShoutWikin kehittäjähenkilöstöstä.

==Lisäosat==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki käyttää useita Wikimedian sivustojen käyttämiä lisäosia itsetehtyjen lisäosiensa lisäksi. Useimpien näiden itsetehtyjen lisäosien lähdekoodi löytyy [http://git.wikimedia.org/ Wikimedian git-koodivarastosta (MediaWikin virallinen git)]. Katso [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]] saadaksesi listan ShoutWikin kirjoittamista lisäosista.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Tietoja ShoutWikistä]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Tietoa ShoutWikistä ja avoimesta lähdekoodista]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; erinäisiä ShoutWikin tekemiä paikkauksia MediaWikin koodiin
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWikin GitHub]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1fwvkgvynsj5ivbt7e36jcebbhvqtvv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/it</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>57402</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402935</id>
      <parentid>5356201</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="49636" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Concetti di base ==

=== Trasferimento di file ===

Scegli un metodo per trasferire i file:

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
* Copia sicura con [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] o [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Usando un client [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]].
* Nel caso di un server host, il fornitore di hosting potrebbe fornire un file manager gestibile via browser web; verificare assieme al proprio fornitore di hosting.
* Altri metodi. Puoi vedere una lista in [[w:List of file transfer protocols|Lista di protocolli trasferimento file]]

=== Preliminari ===

Leggi {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=il file di testo dell'AGGIORNAMENTO incluso in MediaWiki}}.

# Controlla i requisiti
# Leggi il file RELEASE-NOTES
# Leggi il file UPGRADE
# Fai un back up dei file esistenti e dei database
# Spacchetta i nuovi file
# Aggiorna le estensioni
# Esegui lo script di aggiornamento per controllare il database
# Verifica l'aggiornamento
# Elimina i residui di vecchie installazioni

== Controlla i requisiti == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} richiede:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Uno dei seguenti:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Dalla versione 1.36, MediaWiki si impegna a supportare solo gli aggiornamenti da due versioni LTS precedenti (vedi [[phab:T259771]]). Gli aggiornamenti da versioni precedenti di MediaWiki dovranno essere eseguiti in più fasi.
Ciò significa che se volete aggiornare alla 1.36 dalla 1.23 o da una versione precedente, dovrete prima aggiornare il vostro wiki 1.23 alla 1.27 (o 1.35) e, dalla 1.27 (o 1.35), sarete in grado di passare alla 1.36.

Se stai usando PostgreSQL, leggi anche {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Per maggiori informazioni, leggi {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} e {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Leggi le note di rilascio ==
All'interno dei files tarball che vengono distribuiti, o nella lista dei files verificati/esportati dalle [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], troverai alcuni files con il nome tutto in lettere maiuscole. Uno di questi contiene le note sulle modifiche: '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Ora è il momento di aprirlo e vedere cosa è stato modificato in questa versione.
Dovresti anche leggere le istruzioni nel file UPGRADE.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Eliminare i lavori in sospeso ==
Per problemi di performance, alcune azioni nel database vengono differite, e vengono gestite dalla [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|coda dei lavori]].
Questi lavori vengono memorizzati nel database e contengono i parametri con le informazioni sulle azioni che devono essere effettuate.
E' fortemente raccomandato di terminare questi lavori in sospeso prima di aggiornare il wiki, per evitare che fallisca nel caso in cui le specifiche dei parametri di questi lavori cambino nella nuova versione.
Utilizzare {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} per avviare tutti i lavori pendenti e pulire la coda dei lavori prima di effettuare l'aggiornamento.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Backup dei files esistenti e del database ==

:''Istruzioni complete: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

Mentre gli script di aggiornamento sono ben mantenuti e robusti, le cose potrebbero ancora andare storte. Prima di procedere all'aggiornamento dello schema del database, '''crea un [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' completo del wiki, includendo sia il database che i files:

* il contenuto del wiki, dal database, (assicurati di avere il set di caratteri specificato correttamente, prima controlla &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;). Potrebbe essere una buona idea creare un dump XML oltre al dump del database SQL.
:* MySQL, sia dump SQL che dump XML sono utilizzabili con il comando &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt;:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, dump del database da utilizzare con il comando &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, usa uno script MediaWiki per fare un backup:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* immagini e altri file multimediali (il contenuto della directory &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;, logo personalizzato /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* file di configurazione, ad es. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (se presente)
* I file di programma di MediaWiki, comprese tutte le skin e le estensioni, specialmente se li hai modificati.

== Spacchetta i nuovi files ==

=== Utilizzando un pacchetto tarball ===

Puoi mettere i nuovi file in posizione usando FTP o la riga di comando. Usa la riga di comando, se hai accesso ad essa! L'utilizzo della riga di comando sarà molto più veloce di dover caricare ognuno dei migliaia di file tramite FTP.

{{Note|1=Dovresti mettere il tarball decompresso in una nuova cartella vuota sul tuo server. Se invece estrai la nuova versione direttamente sulla tua vecchia versione, piuttosto che in una nuova directory, dovresti seguire le istruzioni descritte in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Backup dei file esistenti e del database]]: altrimenti, se hai hai apportato delle personalizzazioni che potresti eliminarle in un modo che ti lascia senza riferimenti per riapplicarle. Estrarre un tarball sopra la tua copia live di MediaWiki può anche lasciare dei file della vecchia versione di MediaWiki che potrebbero interferire con il codice aggiornato. Si consiglia di decomprimere i nuovi file in una nuova directory e quindi applicare le personalizzazioni alla nuova directory (ripristino LocalSettings.php, cartella immagini, estensioni e altre personalizzazioni come skin personalizzate)}}

==== FTP o grafico ====

Se non riesci ad accedere alla riga di comando sul tuo server, scarica il tarball MediaWiki sul tuo computer locale e usa [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] per estrarre il tarball sul tuo PC locale.

Dopo aver estratto i file localmente, utilizzare il software client FTP preferito per caricare directory e file sul server.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Linea di comando ====
Potrebbe essere necessario eseguire il comando come &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; se non si dispone di autorizzazioni di scrittura complete per le directory di installazione wiki dell'utente corrente.
Mentre si estrae un pacchetto di tarball normalmente verrà creata una nuova directory per la nuova versione wiki e sarà necessario copiare i vecchi file di configurazione e la directory delle immagini dalla vecchia directory di installazione:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

Gli utenti di (Open)Solaris dovrebbero usare &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, o:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===Altri file===

Dopo aver estratto il tarball, è necessario copiare o spostare alcuni file e cartelle dalla vecchia directory di installazione a quella nuova:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - contiene le tue vecchie impostazioni di configurazione.
* La directory &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (o &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; nelle versioni precedenti), che contiene tutti i file caricati sul wiki, a meno che tu non abbia scelto una directory di caricamento diversa e ne cambi la proprietà e le autorizzazioni. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (ad esempio se il tuo utente web è ''apache'').
* Alcune estensioni nella directory &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;. Dovresti sempre ottenere le estensioni aggiornate, le vecchie estensioni non sono garantite per funzionare con una versione più recente di MediaWiki.
* Nel caso in cui si usi [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|logo personalizzato]], questo file deve anche essere ripristinato dal backup. Prima della versione 1.24 di solito in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. Dopo la 1.24 in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; se è quello che hai scelto di usare. Quindi aggiungere a LocalSettings.php, ad es. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
* Skin personalizzati all'interno della directory &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;.
* Qualsiasi modifica apportata ai vecchi file di installazioni o alle estensioni.
* Qualsiasi file .htaccess (se stai usando Apache e hai definito delle regole al loro interno).

Una volta terminato, crea questa nuova cartella come la cartella pubblicata sul server web, o rinomina la vecchia directory di installazione e quindi rinomina quella nuova per farla corrispondere al vecchio nome.

=== Utilizzando Git ===

Se usi {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, esporta i file in una cartella vuota e poi copia i vecchi file personalizzati nella nuova cartella come descritto nella sezione precedente.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Upgrade extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Other variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Run the update script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: ''See also {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Should I back up first?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Short answer: Yes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Why upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>lhheze4qtl2ac20lme67qjsgabardos</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Good first bugs</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>58627</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401675</id>
      <parentid>5343861</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T17:53:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>120.29.78.98</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>My Apple ID</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12617" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:1--&gt;
This page provides a list of [[w:Software bug|software bugs]] and small missing features that have been identified as a good way to get involved with an existing Wikimedia project ([[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki&lt;/tvar&gt;|not only MediaWiki core and its extensions]]).

&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
This is one way to start getting familiar with the code in Wikimedia projects.

&lt;!--T:93--&gt;
Note that the tasks linked below do not have assigned mentors. You will be mostly &quot;on your own&quot;. We recommend to work on software projects with mentors: [[&lt;tvar name=NewDevs&gt;Special:MyLanguage/New Developers&lt;/tvar&gt;|Check out the list of software projects that we recommend]].

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
No matter which software project you work on, you ''must'' have read the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/New Developers#communication&lt;/tvar&gt;|Communication tips]] section to understand workflow and communication expectations.

&lt;!--T:97--&gt;
If you decide to work on MediaWiki core or MediaWiki extensions, you ''must'' have read &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|How to become a MediaWiki hacker}}&lt;/tvar&gt; to understand the infrastructure and workflow.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;div style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-ui-button mw-ui-progressive mw-ui-big&quot; style=&quot;font-size: 1.5em;&quot; title=&quot;&quot;&gt;[[phab:maniphest/query/hJPlqwIq3VqY/#R|&lt;code&gt;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:109--&gt; Pick from the latest tasks&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;/code&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;show password 
== Potential tasks to work on == &lt;!--T:4--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;section begin=bugs/&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
The following sections describe a few example areas in which you can contribute, but you are not limited to these areas! 

&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
If the software project uses Wikimedia Phabricator, the upper right corner of a task shows the project that the problem is located in.

&lt;!--T:7--&gt;
This provides you a hint about the Git repository that the code is located in, and about the development team which you could contact if you want to discuss it in a &quot;broader&quot; way (as comments in bug reports should preferably refer to the specific problem described in the report only).&lt;/translate&gt;

== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:99--&gt; MediaWiki core and extensions&lt;/translate&gt; ==

{{ContentGrid
|content =

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; Wikidata&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Wikidata}}&lt;/tvar&gt; is a centralized knowledge base for structured data, such as interwiki references and statistical information.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Ask your general development questions on the [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/wikidata-l?language={{pagelang}}&lt;/tvar&gt; Wikidata mailing list], the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#wikidata IRC channel]] and on the [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;wikidata:Wikidata:Contact the development team&lt;/tvar&gt;|wiki]].&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = feTFXRzwJufz
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:40--&gt; VisualEditor&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:41--&gt; [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;VisualEditor&lt;/tvar&gt;|VisualEditor]] is [[w:MediaWiki|MediaWiki]]'s [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;WYSIWYG editor&lt;/tvar&gt;|WYSIWYG editor]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; Ask your general VisualEditor development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/wikitech-l?language=en wikitech mailing list] and the [[&lt;tvar name=IRC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#mediawiki-visualeditor IRC channel]].&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = 1jIQVKiF4Cuv
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:47--&gt; Discovery / Search&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:48--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Wikimedia Search Platform}}&lt;/tvar&gt; team builds the path of anonymous discovery to a trusted and relevant source of knowledge.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:49--&gt; Ask your general development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/discovery?language=en Discovery mailing list] and on the [[&lt;tvar name=IRC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#wikimedia-discovery IRC channel]].&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = x8ChCXRefnjb
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:60--&gt; Skins&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:61--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:Skins|nsp=0}}&lt;/tvar&gt; allow users to customize the look and feel of MediaWiki.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:62--&gt; Basic knowledge of [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|CSS]] and PHP is helpful.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:63--&gt; Check the project page in Phabricator for more information on each skin and contact information.&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = Nr66n3sZzhZM
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:110--&gt; Growth&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:72--&gt;
The [[&lt;tvar name=GC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Collaboration&lt;/tvar&gt;|Growth team]] mainly works on &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Notifications}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, [[&lt;tvar name=ERI&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Edit_Review_Improvements/New_filters_for_edit_review&lt;/tvar&gt;|New filters for edit review]] and [[&lt;tvar name=SD&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions&lt;/tvar&gt;|Structured Discussions]].

&lt;!--T:73--&gt;
Ask questions on the [[&lt;tvar name=IRC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#wikimedia-collaboration IRC channel]].
&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = chrdRB7Xeupd
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:75--&gt; MediaWiki core&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:76--&gt; [[w:MediaWiki|MediaWiki]] is the core software which provides basic wiki functionality.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:77--&gt; It is complex, written in PHP, and some areas might not have clear maintainership.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:78--&gt; Ask your general development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/wikitech-l?language=en wikitech mailing list] and the [[&lt;tvar name=IRC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#wikimedia-dev and #mediawiki IRC channels]].&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = 9otR6me9VKZa
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:94--&gt; Semantic MediaWiki&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:95--&gt; Semantic MediaWiki is one of the biggest and most popular MediaWiki extensions.&lt;/translate&gt;

→ [https://github.com/SemanticMediaWiki/SemanticMediaWiki/issues?q=is%3Aissue+is%3Aopen+label%3Anewcomer '''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:96--&gt; Potential tasks for new contributors&lt;/translate&gt;''']
}}

}}

== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:100--&gt; Standalone projects&lt;/translate&gt; ==

{{ContentGrid
|content =

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = Pywikibot
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:10--&gt;
[[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Pywikibot&lt;/tvar&gt;|Pywikibot]] is a Python-based framework to write bots for [[w:MediaWiki|MediaWiki]].

&lt;!--T:11--&gt;
Ask your general development questions on the [[&lt;tvar name=mailinglist&gt;mail:pywikibot&lt;/tvar&gt;|Pywikibot mailing list]] and the [[&lt;tvar name=IRC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Pywikibot/Communication#IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#pywikibot IRC channel]].
&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = yuAX0ibD.dMx
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; Mobile Apps&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; There are numerous applications for mobile devices (Android, iOS) to access Wikimedia wikis.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:18--&gt;
For Wikipedia:
[[&lt;tvar name=Apps&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Team/Wikipedia Android app hacking&lt;/tvar&gt;|Read the general development information]] and ask your questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mobile-l?language=en Mobile mailing list] and the [[&lt;tvar name=IRC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#wikimedia-mobile IRC channel]].
&lt;/translate&gt;

→ '''[[phab:maniphest/query/ACz_7mctc8DE/#R|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; Potential tasks for new contributors:&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:102--&gt; Android Wikipedia application&lt;/translate&gt;]]'''

→ '''[[phab:maniphest/query/ghNR2Itm3BS./#R|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Potential tasks for new contributors:&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:103--&gt; iOS Wikipedia application&lt;/translate&gt;]]'''

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:104--&gt; For Commons:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:105--&gt; [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://github.com/commons-app/apps-android-commons/#documentation&lt;/tvar&gt; Read the general development information] and ask your questions on the [&lt;tvar name=url2&gt;https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/commons-app-android&lt;/tvar&gt; Commons App mailing list].&lt;/translate&gt;

→ '''[https://github.com/commons-app/apps-android-commons/labels/beginner%20friendly &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; Potential tasks for new contributors:&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:106--&gt; Android Commons application&lt;/translate&gt;]'''
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:29--&gt; Huggle&lt;/translate&gt;
|content =
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt;
[[&lt;tvar name=Huggle&gt;meta:Special:MyLanguage/Huggle&lt;/tvar&gt;|Huggle]] is a desktop application for dealing with vandalism on Wikimedia projects, written in C++ and [[:en:QT (software)|QT]].
&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = dFY64hUU16qu
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:111--&gt; Data Engineering&lt;/translate&gt;
|content =
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:52--&gt; The &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Data Engineering}}&lt;/tvar&gt; team empowers and supports data-informed decision making in Wikimedia.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:53--&gt; Ask your general development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/analytics?language=en Analytics mailing list].&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = 9xR.Pps7pivZ
}}

}}

== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:101--&gt; Cross-project areas&lt;/translate&gt; ==

{{ContentGrid
|content =

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Documentation&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:98--&gt; These are documentation related tasks across all Wikimedia projects.&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = uHWsrx9ZmGIl
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:55--&gt; Design&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:56--&gt; Fixing design bugs or requests requires existing graphics skills working with a [[w:Vector graphics|Vector graphics]] application (e.g. [[w:Inkscape|Inkscape]]).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:57--&gt; Basic knowledge of [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|CSS]] can also be helpful for integration.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:58--&gt; Ask your general development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/design?language=en Design mailing list] and the [[&lt;tvar name=IRC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#wikimedia-design IRC channel]].&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = d7UxGJmPBMen
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:65--&gt; Strings&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:66--&gt; Messages displayed in the user interface often need small corrections to the English text. The source text can only be changed in the code by developers, contrary to translations.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:68--&gt; Also, many messages are unclear and [[&lt;tvar name=Localisation&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:System message#Message documentation&lt;/tvar&gt;|require better documentation]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:69--&gt; Missing documentation can also be added by editing the &lt;tvar name=qqq&gt;&lt;code&gt;/qqq&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; subpage of the message on &lt;tvar name=TWN&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net]]&lt;/tvar&gt;, like all translations, but may require some study of the code to understand what a message is for.&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = 2a.g6qDjnp4A
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:84--&gt; And many more…&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:85--&gt; Still not enough ideas? There are more fields you can explore - Wikimedia has hundreds of projects! Check out the complete list of potential tasks for new contributors:&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = QbBdVKL4yh3Q
}}
}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:87--&gt;
If you have any trouble or [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/New Developers#communication&lt;/tvar&gt;|specific questions]], please ask for help in one of our [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Communication&lt;/tvar&gt;|support places]].
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;section end=bugs/&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
== See also == &lt;!--T:88--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|New Developers}} —  &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:107--&gt; Wikimedia software projects which offer mentors. Recommended for new contributors.&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|How to become a MediaWiki hacker}} — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:108--&gt; For hacking on MediaWiki core or MediaWiki extensions.&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|How to contribute}} — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:89--&gt; Learn about more ways how you can contribute to MediaWiki and the free culture community (e.g. translation, documentation, etc.)&lt;/translate&gt;

[[Category:New contributors{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Phabricator{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:New contributors task lists{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2mqi7r9yx7k5kwc7rjpozgj5a3byqad</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401677</id>
      <parentid>5401675</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T17:59:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mainframe98</username>
        <id>2319711</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/120.29.78.98|120.29.78.98]] ([[User talk:120.29.78.98|talk]]) to last version by AKlapper (WMF)</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12590" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:1--&gt;
This page provides a list of [[w:Software bug|software bugs]] and small missing features that have been identified as a good way to get involved with an existing Wikimedia project ([[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki&lt;/tvar&gt;|not only MediaWiki core and its extensions]]).

&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
This is one way to start getting familiar with the code in Wikimedia projects.

&lt;!--T:93--&gt;
Note that the tasks linked below do not have assigned mentors. You will be mostly &quot;on your own&quot;. We recommend to work on software projects with mentors: [[&lt;tvar name=NewDevs&gt;Special:MyLanguage/New Developers&lt;/tvar&gt;|Check out the list of software projects that we recommend]].

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
No matter which software project you work on, you ''must'' have read the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/New Developers#communication&lt;/tvar&gt;|Communication tips]] section to understand workflow and communication expectations.

&lt;!--T:97--&gt;
If you decide to work on MediaWiki core or MediaWiki extensions, you ''must'' have read &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|How to become a MediaWiki hacker}}&lt;/tvar&gt; to understand the infrastructure and workflow.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;div style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;&gt;
[[phab:maniphest/query/hJPlqwIq3VqY/#R|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-ui-button mw-ui-progressive mw-ui-big&quot; style=&quot;font-size: 1.5em;&quot; title=&quot;&quot;&gt;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:109--&gt; Pick from the latest tasks&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Potential tasks to work on == &lt;!--T:4--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;section begin=bugs/&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
The following sections describe a few example areas in which you can contribute, but you are not limited to these areas! 

&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
If the software project uses Wikimedia Phabricator, the upper right corner of a task shows the project that the problem is located in.

&lt;!--T:7--&gt;
This provides you a hint about the Git repository that the code is located in, and about the development team which you could contact if you want to discuss it in a &quot;broader&quot; way (as comments in bug reports should preferably refer to the specific problem described in the report only).&lt;/translate&gt;

== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:99--&gt; MediaWiki core and extensions&lt;/translate&gt; ==

{{ContentGrid
|content =

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; Wikidata&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Wikidata}}&lt;/tvar&gt; is a centralized knowledge base for structured data, such as interwiki references and statistical information.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Ask your general development questions on the [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/wikidata-l?language={{pagelang}}&lt;/tvar&gt; Wikidata mailing list], the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#wikidata IRC channel]] and on the [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;wikidata:Wikidata:Contact the development team&lt;/tvar&gt;|wiki]].&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = feTFXRzwJufz
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:40--&gt; VisualEditor&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:41--&gt; [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;VisualEditor&lt;/tvar&gt;|VisualEditor]] is [[w:MediaWiki|MediaWiki]]'s [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;WYSIWYG editor&lt;/tvar&gt;|WYSIWYG editor]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; Ask your general VisualEditor development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/wikitech-l?language=en wikitech mailing list] and the [[&lt;tvar name=IRC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#mediawiki-visualeditor IRC channel]].&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = 1jIQVKiF4Cuv
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:47--&gt; Discovery / Search&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:48--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Wikimedia Search Platform}}&lt;/tvar&gt; team builds the path of anonymous discovery to a trusted and relevant source of knowledge.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:49--&gt; Ask your general development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/discovery?language=en Discovery mailing list] and on the [[&lt;tvar name=IRC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#wikimedia-discovery IRC channel]].&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = x8ChCXRefnjb
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:60--&gt; Skins&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:61--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:Skins|nsp=0}}&lt;/tvar&gt; allow users to customize the look and feel of MediaWiki.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:62--&gt; Basic knowledge of [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|CSS]] and PHP is helpful.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:63--&gt; Check the project page in Phabricator for more information on each skin and contact information.&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = Nr66n3sZzhZM
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:110--&gt; Growth&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:72--&gt;
The [[&lt;tvar name=GC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Collaboration&lt;/tvar&gt;|Growth team]] mainly works on &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Notifications}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, [[&lt;tvar name=ERI&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Edit_Review_Improvements/New_filters_for_edit_review&lt;/tvar&gt;|New filters for edit review]] and [[&lt;tvar name=SD&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions&lt;/tvar&gt;|Structured Discussions]].

&lt;!--T:73--&gt;
Ask questions on the [[&lt;tvar name=IRC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#wikimedia-collaboration IRC channel]].
&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = chrdRB7Xeupd
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:75--&gt; MediaWiki core&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:76--&gt; [[w:MediaWiki|MediaWiki]] is the core software which provides basic wiki functionality.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:77--&gt; It is complex, written in PHP, and some areas might not have clear maintainership.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:78--&gt; Ask your general development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/wikitech-l?language=en wikitech mailing list] and the [[&lt;tvar name=IRC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#wikimedia-dev and #mediawiki IRC channels]].&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = 9otR6me9VKZa
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:94--&gt; Semantic MediaWiki&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:95--&gt; Semantic MediaWiki is one of the biggest and most popular MediaWiki extensions.&lt;/translate&gt;

→ [https://github.com/SemanticMediaWiki/SemanticMediaWiki/issues?q=is%3Aissue+is%3Aopen+label%3Anewcomer '''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:96--&gt; Potential tasks for new contributors&lt;/translate&gt;''']
}}

}}

== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:100--&gt; Standalone projects&lt;/translate&gt; ==

{{ContentGrid
|content =

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = Pywikibot
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:10--&gt;
[[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Pywikibot&lt;/tvar&gt;|Pywikibot]] is a Python-based framework to write bots for [[w:MediaWiki|MediaWiki]].

&lt;!--T:11--&gt;
Ask your general development questions on the [[&lt;tvar name=mailinglist&gt;mail:pywikibot&lt;/tvar&gt;|Pywikibot mailing list]] and the [[&lt;tvar name=IRC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Pywikibot/Communication#IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#pywikibot IRC channel]].
&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = yuAX0ibD.dMx
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; Mobile Apps&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; There are numerous applications for mobile devices (Android, iOS) to access Wikimedia wikis.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:18--&gt;
For Wikipedia:
[[&lt;tvar name=Apps&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Team/Wikipedia Android app hacking&lt;/tvar&gt;|Read the general development information]] and ask your questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mobile-l?language=en Mobile mailing list] and the [[&lt;tvar name=IRC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#wikimedia-mobile IRC channel]].
&lt;/translate&gt;

→ '''[[phab:maniphest/query/ACz_7mctc8DE/#R|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; Potential tasks for new contributors:&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:102--&gt; Android Wikipedia application&lt;/translate&gt;]]'''

→ '''[[phab:maniphest/query/ghNR2Itm3BS./#R|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Potential tasks for new contributors:&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:103--&gt; iOS Wikipedia application&lt;/translate&gt;]]'''

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:104--&gt; For Commons:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:105--&gt; [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://github.com/commons-app/apps-android-commons/#documentation&lt;/tvar&gt; Read the general development information] and ask your questions on the [&lt;tvar name=url2&gt;https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/commons-app-android&lt;/tvar&gt; Commons App mailing list].&lt;/translate&gt;

→ '''[https://github.com/commons-app/apps-android-commons/labels/beginner%20friendly &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; Potential tasks for new contributors:&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:106--&gt; Android Commons application&lt;/translate&gt;]'''
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:29--&gt; Huggle&lt;/translate&gt;
|content =
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt;
[[&lt;tvar name=Huggle&gt;meta:Special:MyLanguage/Huggle&lt;/tvar&gt;|Huggle]] is a desktop application for dealing with vandalism on Wikimedia projects, written in C++ and [[:en:QT (software)|QT]].
&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = dFY64hUU16qu
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:111--&gt; Data Engineering&lt;/translate&gt;
|content =
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:52--&gt; The &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Data Engineering}}&lt;/tvar&gt; team empowers and supports data-informed decision making in Wikimedia.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:53--&gt; Ask your general development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/analytics?language=en Analytics mailing list].&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = 9xR.Pps7pivZ
}}

}}

== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:101--&gt; Cross-project areas&lt;/translate&gt; ==

{{ContentGrid
|content =

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Documentation&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:98--&gt; These are documentation related tasks across all Wikimedia projects.&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = uHWsrx9ZmGIl
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:55--&gt; Design&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:56--&gt; Fixing design bugs or requests requires existing graphics skills working with a [[w:Vector graphics|Vector graphics]] application (e.g. [[w:Inkscape|Inkscape]]).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:57--&gt; Basic knowledge of [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|CSS]] can also be helpful for integration.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:58--&gt; Ask your general development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/design?language=en Design mailing list] and the [[&lt;tvar name=IRC&gt;Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC&lt;/tvar&gt;|#wikimedia-design IRC channel]].&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = d7UxGJmPBMen
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:65--&gt; Strings&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:66--&gt; Messages displayed in the user interface often need small corrections to the English text. The source text can only be changed in the code by developers, contrary to translations.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:68--&gt; Also, many messages are unclear and [[&lt;tvar name=Localisation&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:System message#Message documentation&lt;/tvar&gt;|require better documentation]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:69--&gt; Missing documentation can also be added by editing the &lt;tvar name=qqq&gt;&lt;code&gt;/qqq&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; subpage of the message on &lt;tvar name=TWN&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net]]&lt;/tvar&gt;, like all translations, but may require some study of the code to understand what a message is for.&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = 2a.g6qDjnp4A
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:84--&gt; And many more…&lt;/translate&gt;
|content = 
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:85--&gt; Still not enough ideas? There are more fields you can explore - Wikimedia has hundreds of projects! Check out the complete list of potential tasks for new contributors:&lt;/translate&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = QbBdVKL4yh3Q
}}
}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:87--&gt;
If you have any trouble or [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/New Developers#communication&lt;/tvar&gt;|specific questions]], please ask for help in one of our [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Communication&lt;/tvar&gt;|support places]].
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;section end=bugs/&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
== See also == &lt;!--T:88--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|New Developers}} —  &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:107--&gt; Wikimedia software projects which offer mentors. Recommended for new contributors.&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|How to become a MediaWiki hacker}} — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:108--&gt; For hacking on MediaWiki core or MediaWiki extensions.&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|How to contribute}} — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:89--&gt; Learn about more ways how you can contribute to MediaWiki and the free culture community (e.g. translation, documentation, etc.)&lt;/translate&gt;

[[Category:New contributors{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Phabricator{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:New contributors task lists{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>f8oswhg5omsozj77f7wsojqxy2pugz1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/ko</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>60983</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402937</id>
      <parentid>5355658</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="48481" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== 기본 개요 ==

=== 파일 전송 ===

다음 중 파일을 전송할 방법을 선택:

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
* [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] 혹은 [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]와 같은 시큐어 카피 이용하기
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] 클라이언트 이용하기
* 호스팅업체에서 제공하는 각종 파일 전송 방법 이용하기. 자세한 사항은 호스팅 업체에 문의할 것.
* 기타 다른 방법 [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]에 파일 전송 방법에 대한 목록이 있습니다.

===준비단계===

'''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=미디어위키에 포함된 UPGRADE 텍스트 문서}}'''를 읽으십시오.

# 요구사항 확인
# RELEASE-NOTES 읽기
# UPGRADE 읽기
# 기존 파일과 데이터 베이스를 백업
# 새 파일의 압축을 풀기
# 확장 프로그램을 업그레이드
# 업데이트 스크립트를 사용하여 데이터베이스를 확인하시오
# 업데이트를 시험해 보시오.
# 이전 설치에서 남은 항목 제거

== 요구사항 확인하기 == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
미디어위키 {{MW stable branch number}}는 다음 사항을 요구합니다.

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* 아래 중 하나:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

PostgreSQL를 사용한다면, {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}도 읽으시오.

더 자세한 정보를 원한다면, {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}}와 {{ll|Compatibility}}를 읽으시오.

== 배포 통지문 읽기 ==
배포 tar파일 내에 혹은 [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]]를 통해 추출된 파일 내에 대문자로 쓰인 다수의 파일명들이 있습니다. 그 중에 '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}'''(배포 통지문)([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]])이 있습니다.
파일을 찾았다면 바로 배포 당시 어떤 부분이 바뀌었는지 확인하십시오.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== 보류된 작업 없애기 ==
수행능력의 이유로 데이터 베이스의 어떤 동작들이 지연되고, [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|작업 대기 행렬]]에 의해 관리됩니다.
이 작업들은 데이터베이스에 저장되어 있고, 어떤 동작을 취해야 하는지에 대한 매개 변수를 포함하고 있습니다.
위키를 업데이트하기 전에 이 보류된 작업들을 처리하는 것을 강력히 권장합니다. 그렇지 않으면 새 버전에서 이 작업들의 매개 변수의 세목이 바뀌어, 작업을 더 이상 할 수 없게 될 수 있기 때문입니다.
업그레이드 수행 전에 모든 보류된 작업을 처리하여 대기행렬을 비우기 위하여 {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} 를 이용합니다.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== 이전 파일과 데이터 베이스 백업하기 ==

:''지시사항 일체는 {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}을 참고하시오''

비록 업그레이드 스크립트는 잘 관리되고 안정적이지만, 항상 문제는 발생할 수 있습니다. 데이터베이스 스키마를 업데이트를 진행하기 앞서, 데이터 베이스를 포함하여 위키의 전체 파일을 [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|백업]]하십시오.

* 데이터 베이스를 포함한 위키의 내용 (문자 세트가 정확히 지정되었는지를 확실히 하기 위해 LocalSettings.php를 확인하십시오.). SQL 데이터베이스 덤프와 더불어 XML 덤프를 만드는 것을 추천합니다.
:* MySQL, SQL 덤프와 XML 덤프는 &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; 명령어와 함께 사용됩니다:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, 데이터베이스 덤프는 &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; 명령어와 함께 사용됩니다:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, 백업하기 위해 미디어위키 스크립트를 사용합니다:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* 이미지와 다른 미디어 파일들 (&lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; 폴더에 있는 내용물들,과 커스텀 로고 /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* 구성 파일들. 예를 들어 &lt;code&gt;LocalSettins.php&lt;/code&gt;와 (만약 있다면)&lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt;
* 스킨과 확장 프로그램들을 포함한 미디어위키 프로그램 파일들. (별다른 수정을 하지 않았다면 백업하지 않아도 괜찮음).

== 새로운 파일을 압축 풀기 ==

=== tarball 패키지 이용하기 ===

새 파일은 FTP나 명령어를 입력하여 옮길 수 있습니다. 접근 가능하다면 명령어를 입력하십시오! FTP를 이용하여 수천개의 파일을 업로드하는 것보다 명령어를 이용하는 것이 빠릅니다.

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

==== FTP 또는 graphical ====

서버에서 명령어 접근이 안된다면, 로컬 컴퓨터로 미디어위키 tar를 다운받고 [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip]을 사용하여 압축해제합니다.

로컬에서 압축해제 후, 선호하는 FTP 클라이언트로 서버에 업로드합니다.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== 명령어 ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

(오픈) 솔라리스 사용자들은 &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt; 등을 사용해야 합니다.

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===기타 파일===

tarball 을 풀어낸 후에, 예전 설치 디렉토리에서 몇 개의 파일과 폴더를 새로운 곳으로 복사 및 이동시켜야 합니다 :
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* 귀하의 위키의 기존 설정값을 가지고 있는 $code-lc.&lt;/span&gt;
* 이미지들도 가지고 오십시요.
* 몇가지의 확장기능들을 가져오십시요. 그 확장기능중에 일부는 업데이트해야할 수도 있습니다.
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|개별 로고]]를 사용하시는 경우에는 백업파일에서 이 파일도 복원되어야 합니다. 로고는 1.24 이전에는 보통 &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt; 에 있었지만, 1.24 이후에는 &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; 나 귀하가 사용하기로 선택하신 디렉토리라면 &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt;에 있습니다. 추가한 이후에는 다음과 같이 LocalSettings.php에 다음 코드를 추가해 주십시오.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; 디렉토리 안의 커스텀 스킨들
* 기존 설치파일이나 확장기능에 해 놓은 모든 변경내역
* (아파치를 쓸 경우, 규칙을 설정해 두었다면) 모든 .htaccess 파일

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Git 이용하기 ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== 패치 사용하기 ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

== 확장기능 업그레이드 ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

== LocalSettings.php 를 적합하게 하기 ==

만약 오래된 버전에서 가져온 &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; 를 그대로 사용하고 있다면, 이를 새 버전에 맞춰서 조정해야할 필요가 있습니다.:

=== 스킨 등록 ===

미디어위키 1.24 이래로, Vector, Monobook, Modern, CologneBlue 같은 번들 스킨들은 더이상 Mediawiki core 의 일부가 아닙니다. 사용하기 위해서는 &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; 에 명시적으로 등록되어질 필요가 있습니다. 그렇지 않으면 미디어위키는 스킨이 설치되지 않았음을 경고할 것입니다.

이것은 이들 스킨들 중 유용한 하나를 원하고 1.24보다 오래된 버전으로부터 업그레이드를 할 때에 &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; 에 추가할 필요가 있습니다.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== 확장기능 등록 ===

미디어위키 1.25 부터는, 확장기능은 새로운 [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] 시스템을 이용합니다.

이전의 &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; 에서는 다음과 같이 포함합니다:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

이것은 이렇게 변환해야 합니다:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

확장기능들은 새로운 확장기능 등록 시스템을 이용하게끔 조정되어지는 중입니다.
조정되지 않은 확장기능들은 예전 방법을 이용해야 합니다.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

== 다른 변수 ==
몇 변수들은 쓸모가 없어지거나 심지어 삭제될 수 있습니다.
그런 것들을 &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;에 넣는다고 해도 아무런 효과도 없을 것입니다.
새 변수들은 새로운 버전에서 추가되어질 수 있습니다, 또는 존재하는 몇 변수들은 타입이 변경되어질 수 있습니다.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
그 변경사항들을 보려면 릴리즈 노트를 보십시오.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== 업데이트 스크립트 가동하기 ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

스크립트는 또한 미디어위키에 필요하지만 빠진 것을 다운로드 시도할 것입니다.

=== 명령어 ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

이 오류는 update.php가 php4에서 실행될 때 발생합니다.

php4 및 php5를 제공하는 업체가 호스팅하는 사이트를 운영하는 개인은 다음 단계를 따라야합니다.

# 이 명령어를 'whereis php5'에 입력하세요.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===웹 브라우저===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''{{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}} 참조''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

# 데이터베이스 업데이트를 하기 전엔 항상 [[Manual:Baking up a wiki|백업]]부터 하세요.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
# 당신의 언어를 선택하고 계속을 누르세요.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

== 업데이트 검사하기 ==

업데이트가 완료되면, 위키에 접속하여 다음 작업들이 가능한지 확인하시오.

* 페이지 보기 
* 페이지 편집하기
* 파일 올리기
* [[Special:Version]]에 가서 버전 숫자가 제대로 나오고, 확장 파일이 존재하는지 확인하기

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

== 자주 묻는 질문 ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
=== 업그레이드는 얼마나 어렵나요?===

수정한 파일이 {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}뿐이며, 현재 위키의 버전이 1.5 이상이라면, 업그레이드 과정은 매우 간단합니다. 사람이 해야 할 일은 고작 몇 번에 불과합니다. 데이터베이스 스키마 관련 업데이트는 데이터 베이스 크기에 따라 걸리는 시간이 달라집니다. 수백만 페이지가 되는 위키라면 수시간이 걸릴 수도 있습니다. 하지만 몇 천 페이지 정도의 대부분의 위키는 일 분도 안 되어서 완료됩니다.

메이저 버전 내 사소한 업데이트(예를 들어 {{MW legacy branch number}}.0에서 {{MW legacy release number}}로 업데이트 하기) 는 스키마 변경도 필요가 없습니다.
파일만 새 버전으로 덮어쓰기 하면 됩니다. 데이터베이스가 업데이트 될 필요가 없으므로, 설치 스크립트도 작동할 필요가 없습니다.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
===오래된 버전에서 업그레이드는 한 번에 또는 각 단계별로 하나요? ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

===업데이트 전에 백업을 꼭 해야 하나요? ===

네(우문현답).

길게 답변하자면, ㄱ)얼마나 데이터를 소중하게 여기는지, ㄴ)얼마나 백업파일을 만드는 것이 어려운지, ㄷ)얼마나 MySQL 유지 및 관리에 자신이 있는지에 달려있습니다. 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

===LocalSettings.php를 그대로 유지할 수 있습니까?===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;네, 그래도 어떤 마이너 변경은 해야할 수도 있습니다. The format of $localsettings is largely backwards compatible. Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

===업데이트 중에 위키에 접속가능 한가요?===

일반적으로 가능합니다. 다만 Git이 (수초간) 임시적으로 연결을 끊을 수 있습니다.

미디어위키의 마이너 버전 상에 업그레이드를 할 경우는, 소스 파일만 새 버전으로 교체하면 됩니다.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== 업그레이드는 왜 할까요? ===
:''새 배포 소식을 받아보려면 [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]]를 구독하세요.''

왜냐하면 [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|대개 너무나 쉽고]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|최신 버전으로 올리는데 한 단계만 거치며 되는데]], 심지어 [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|웹 상에서]] 할 수 있기 때문입니다.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== 같이 보기 ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - 백업이 성공적이지 않은 경우
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>m4sw2kd0s7tg8aeycleudvleytc8i3o</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Skins/pl</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>62121</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403348</id>
      <parentid>5328713</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:48:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Wargo</username>
        <id>25061</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updated translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2102" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
'''Skórki''' pozwalają na ustalenie wyglądu interfejsu MediaWiki.
Choć wygląd i uczucia różnią się w zależności od skórki, ogólnie wszystkie skórki mają te same komponenty interfejsu.
Każda skórka może pokazać każdy element interfejsu inaczej, poprzez pokazywanie go w innym kolorze lub położeniu na stronie.

Aby wypróbować dostępne skórki oraz je wybierać, kliknij link [[Special:preferences|{{int|mypreferences}}]], gdy jesteś zalogowany, a następnie wybierz zakładkę &quot;{{int|prefs-skin}}&quot;. Możesz podejrzeć styl przed wybraniem, klikając na link &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; znajdujący się obok każdej nazwy.

== Domyślne skórki ==

:Zobacz też [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgDefaultSkin#Available skins|$wgDefaultSkin#Dostępne skórki]]

Domyślnie MediaWiki udostępnia kilka skórek. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[mw:Bundled extensions and skins#Skins]] for the list of skins.&lt;/span&gt;

Pomimo że możesz wybrać taką skórkę, jaką chcesz, weź pod uwagę, że niektóre wiki dostarczają szablony lub elementy układu, które nie będą wyświetlały się, tak jak powinny w niektórych z tych skórek.
Ogólnie rzecz biorąc, pozostawiając skórkę Wektor (lub inną domyślną dla wiki) utwierdzi Cię, że strony wyświetlają się tak jak zamierzono.

== Dostosowywanie ==
Użytkownicy znający [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface/Stylesheets|Kaskadowe Arkusze Stylów]] (CSS) mogą dostosować plik stylu poprzez utworzenie [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Subpages|podstrony]] do swojej strony użytkownika, której tytuł zawiera nazwę skórki + rozszerzenie .css, np. &quot;[[Special:Mypage/vector.css|User:Twoja_nazwa/vector.css]].
CSS umieszczony w tym arkuszu ma pierwszeństwo nad CSS skórki. To wymaga, żeby administrator strony [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgAllowUserCss|włączył tę funkcję]].

== Zobacz też ==
* {{ll|Manual:Skins}}
* {{ll|Help:Preferences}}
* {{ll|Category:All skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Skinning{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>tvgok6y4iohtod2db2u84bnlsnbze96</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Social tools</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>66534</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401700</id>
      <parentid>4429443</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T20:59:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>78.32.143.113</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>fix template [[redirect]]s, reduce xs whitespace</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2151" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;&lt;Languages/&gt;&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
|name = Social tools
|title= {{Localized link|Social tools|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}
|bodyclass= hlist

|group1={{Localized link|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
|list1=
*{{Localized link|Extension:SocialProfile|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Overview&lt;/translate&gt;}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Developer info&lt;/translate&gt;}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Screenshots&lt;/translate&gt;}}
*{{Localized link|Social tools/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; History&lt;/translate&gt;}}
|group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; other social&lt;br&gt;extensions&lt;/translate&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
|group1 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;
|list1 = 
*{{Localized link|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

|group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; other related extensions&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; independent of SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|list2 = 
*{{Localized link|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}
}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}| ]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;
[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>pxh8q22biej1ea0gtsedsmpow3rm8vy</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401869</id>
      <parentid>5401700</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:08:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Undo revision 5401700 by [[Special:Contributions/78.32.143.113|78.32.143.113]] ([[User talk:78.32.143.113|talk]]): wrong markup</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1879" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Overview&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Developer info&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Screenshots&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; History&lt;/translate&gt;}}
|group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Other social extensions&lt;/translate&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; Dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; Other related extensions&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; which do not depend on SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>5kg2s7yaegfd7a7yqd5i11km50zg3kn</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401954</id>
      <parentid>5401869</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:48:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>78.32.143.113</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Undo revision 5401869 by [[Special:Contributions/Shirayuki|Shirayuki]] ([[User talk:Shirayuki|talk]]) - absolutely NOTHING wrong with my 'markup', I used official MediaWiki wikitext, and fixed server-intensive template redirects</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2151" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;&lt;Languages/&gt;&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
|name = Social tools
|title= {{Localized link|Social tools|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}
|bodyclass= hlist

|group1={{Localized link|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
|list1=
*{{Localized link|Extension:SocialProfile|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Overview&lt;/translate&gt;}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Developer info&lt;/translate&gt;}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Screenshots&lt;/translate&gt;}}
*{{Localized link|Social tools/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; History&lt;/translate&gt;}}
|group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; other social&lt;br&gt;extensions&lt;/translate&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
|group1 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;
|list1 = 
*{{Localized link|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

|group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; other related extensions&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; independent of SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|list2 = 
*{{Localized link|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
*{{Localized link|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}
}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}| ]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;
[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>pxh8q22biej1ea0gtsedsmpow3rm8vy</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401966</id>
      <parentid>5401954</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:06:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>wrong markup :(</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1869" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Overview&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Developer info&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Screenshots&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; History&lt;/translate&gt;}}
|group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; other social&lt;br&gt;extensions&lt;/translate&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
|group1 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

|group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; other related extensions&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; independent of SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}
}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>ms04r6no57p13uoe9h6bc0tkfg9tzd7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401967</id>
      <parentid>5401966</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:07:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Protected &quot;[[Template:Social tools]]&quot;: Excessive vandalism ([Edit=Allow only autoconfirmed users] (expires 23:07, 6 February 2023 (UTC)) [Move=Allow only autoconfirmed users] (expires 23:07, 6 February 2023 (UTC)))</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1869" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Overview&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Developer info&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Screenshots&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; History&lt;/translate&gt;}}
|group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; other social&lt;br&gt;extensions&lt;/translate&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
|group1 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

|group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; other related extensions&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; independent of SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}
}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>ms04r6no57p13uoe9h6bc0tkfg9tzd7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401968</id>
      <parentid>5401967</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:07:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1866" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Overview&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Developer info&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Screenshots&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; History&lt;/translate&gt;}}
|group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; other social extensions&lt;/translate&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
|group1 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

|group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; other related extensions&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; independent of SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}
}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>0iu7zpqf3uum3dqphwho26iqwiqh8uq</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401969</id>
      <parentid>5401968</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1869" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Overview&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Developer info&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Screenshots&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; History&lt;/translate&gt;}}
|group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; other social extensions&lt;/translate&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; other related extensions&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; independent of SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>o9d6ddqvz2ab212cz4geb0nvbt7jq3j</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401986</id>
      <parentid>5401969</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:10:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1870" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Overview&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Developer info&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Screenshots&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; History&lt;/translate&gt;}}
|group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; other social extensions&lt;/translate&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; other related extensions&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; independent of SocialProfile&lt;/translate&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>c7bfxeddm2ys69fn7foydez1s5y033n</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social tools</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>66537</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401701</id>
      <parentid>4268062</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:08:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>78.32.143.113</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>fix template [[redirect]]s</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1146" xml:space="preserve">{{Ptag|Social-Tools}}
{{SocialToolsSidebar}}
'''Social tools''' is a term which refers to the {{Localized link|Extension:SocialProfile|SocialProfile extension}} and various other related extensions, most of which depend on the SocialProfile extension.

Many of the social tools were originally developed by Aaron Wright, Ashish Datta&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.eecs.tufts.edu/~adatta02/ashish_datta.pdf Ashish Datta's résumé]&lt;/ref&gt;, David Pean, Jeffrey Tierney,&lt;ref&gt;[http://trac.wikia-code.com/browser/wikia/branches/wikia-ny/trunk/extensions/wikia/MarchMadness/SpecialMarchMadnessGroupEmails.php#L150 Reference to Jeffrey's e-mail address on the source code of the MarchMadness extension]&lt;/ref&gt; and Robert Lefkowitz for ArmchairGM.  Currently, the SocialProfile extension and other related social tools are maintained by {{User link|Jack Phoenix}} (the lead maintainer) in collaboration with a few other people, {{User link|UltrasonicNXT}} and {{User link|SamanthaNguyen}} (formerly).

For a complete list of social tools, see [[:category:Social tools]].

==References==
&lt;References/&gt;

{{Social tools}}
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ag5uubm5atxikkeha983ghx938ncdw8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401870</id>
      <parentid>5401701</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:10:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1113" xml:space="preserve">{{Ptag|Social-Tools}}
{{SocialToolsSidebar}}
'''Social tools''' is a term which refers to the {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|SocialProfile extension}} and various other related extensions, most of which depend on the SocialProfile extension.

Many of the social tools were originally developed by Aaron Wright, Ashish Datta&lt;ref&gt;[http://www.eecs.tufts.edu/~adatta02/ashish_datta.pdf Ashish Datta's résumé]&lt;/ref&gt;, David Pean, Jeffrey Tierney,&lt;ref&gt;[http://trac.wikia-code.com/browser/wikia/branches/wikia-ny/trunk/extensions/wikia/MarchMadness/SpecialMarchMadnessGroupEmails.php#L150 Reference to Jeffrey's e-mail address on the source code of the MarchMadness extension]&lt;/ref&gt; and Robert Lefkowitz for ArmchairGM.
Currently, the SocialProfile extension and other related social tools are maintained by {{u|Jack Phoenix}} (the lead maintainer) in collaboration with a few other people, {{u|UltrasonicNXT}} and {{u|SamanthaNguyen}} (formerly).

For a complete list of social tools, see [[:Category:Social tools]].

== References ==
&lt;references /&gt;

{{Social tools}}

[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>t0rylgi9hnmqvntqu1lht609gptbg6s</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Nimbus</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>67688</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401695</id>
      <parentid>5208733</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T19:15:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>78.32.143.113</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki]]</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5636" xml:space="preserve">{{Distinguish|Extension:Nimbus}}
{{Skin
|name         = Nimbus
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =
*Aaron Wright — original code
*David Pean — original code
*Inez Korczyński — original code (sidebar parsing code)
*{{User link|Jack Phoenix}} — bugfixes, modernization, code docs, etc.
|description  = 
|image        = Nimbus skin - registered user.png
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 3.6.0
|update       = continuous updates
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          =
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin|Nimbus}}
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=nimbus ShoutWiki]
|compatibility= 
|phabricator  = MediaWiki-skins-Nimbus
|newhook1     = NimbusLeftSide
}}
'''Nimbus''' skin (previously known as ''Halopedia'' or ''Halo'') first debuted at [http://www.halopedia.org/ Halopedia], and is currently Halopedia's default skin.  It has been available on [[ShoutWiki]] since 3 July 2013.&lt;sup&gt;[http://blog.shoutwiki.com/2013/07/nimbus-a-free-premium-skin/]&lt;/sup&gt;

==Installation==
{{SkinInstall|registration=required}}

==Features==
*Stylish and elegant
*Valid XHTML
*More features if [[Extension:SocialProfile|SocialProfile]] extension is enabled

==Known bugs/issues==
*Nimbus_IE.css should be loaded for Internet Explorer, but right now it isn't, because [[ResourceLoader]] doesn't support browser-specific stylesheets (yet?)

==Internationalization==
[[File:Nimbus skin - anonymous user - qqx.png|right|thumb|350px|Anonymous user viewing a page with uselang=qqx]]
[[File:Nimbus skin - anonymous user.png|right|thumb|350px|Anonymous user viewing a page]]
[[File:Nimbus skin - footer.png|right|thumb|350px|Footer of a content page]]
[[File:Nimbus skin - registered user - qqx.png|right|thumb|350px|Registered user viewing a page with uselang=qqx]]
[[File:Nimbus skin - registered user.png|right|thumb|350px|Registered user viewing a page with the main navigation menu (MediaWiki:Sidebar) active]]
Nimbus skin has 18 internationalization messages.  To see how and where the messages are used in the interface, please refer to the screenshots.
{|class=wikitable style=width:48em
!message name!!English default!!notes
|-
|morewikis|| ||&lt;nowiki&gt;This is the content of the 'More wikis' menu (the 'More wikis' message is MediaWiki:Nimbus-more-wikis).  The format for this message is *Page name/Interwiki link/URL|Text to show; separate items by newlines.&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|-
|nimbus-advertise||Advertise||Title of a link that is shown in the page footer, but only if MediaWiki:Nimbus-advertise-url is set.
|-
|nimbus-advertise-url|| ||Set this to an URL if you want an 'Advertise' link to show up in the footer of every page.
|-
|nimbus-contribute||Contribute||Shown in the page footer; MediaWiki:Nimbus-pages-can-be-edited is shown below this.
|-
|nimbus-didyouknow||Did you know||Title of a section that is shown in the left column, below the search box.  Below this section header, a list of small did-you-knows (from Template:Didyouknow) is shown.
|-
|nimbus-featuredimage||Featured image||Title of a section that is shown in the left column, below the 'Did you know' section, if [[Extension:RandomImageByCategory]] is installed on the wiki.
|-
|nimbus-featureduser||Featured user||Title of a section that is shown in the left column, below the 'Featured image' section, if [[Extension:RandomFeaturedUser]] is installed on the wiki.
|-
|nimbus-login||Login||Button text; clicking on the button with this text takes you to the wiki's login page, [[Special:UserLogin]].  Because this is a button text, '''keep it short!'''
|-
|nimbus-logout||Log out?||Button text; clicking on the button with this text logs you out ([[Special:UserLogout]]).  Because this is a button text, '''keep it short!'''
|-
|nimbus-more-actions||More actions||Title of a drop-down menu that contains things such as a link to Special:WhatLinksHere/&lt;nowiki&gt;{{PAGENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;, and for privileged users, the move/protect/delete links.
|-
|nimbus-more-wikis||More wikis||This text is shown in a small button on the left side, almost above the site logo; '''keep it short!'''
|-
|nimbus-pages-can-be-edited||{{SITENAME}}'s pages can be edited.&lt;br&gt;Is this page incomplete? Is there anything wrong?&lt;br&gt;'''Change it!'''||A notice shown in the footer for pages in {{Localized link|Manual:$wgContentNamespaces|$wgContentNamespaces}}, encouraging users to edit the page in question.
|-
|nimbus-profile||Profile||Button text; clicking on the button with this text takes a logged-in user to their own user page ([[Special:MyPage]]).  Because this is a button text, '''keep it short!'''
|-
|nimbus-recent-contributors||Recent contributors to this page||Shown in the page footer.
|-
|nimbus-recent-contributors-info||The following people recently contributed to this article.||Shown in the page footer.
|-
|nimbus-sidebar||(See the source file for the real value of this message)||Nimbus-specific version of [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]], the message controlling what is displayed on the sidebar.
|-
|nimbus-signup||Sign up||Button text; clicking on the button with this text takes an unregistered user to the signup page ([[Special:UserLogin/signup]]).  Because this is a button text, '''keep it short!'''
|-
|nimbus-welcome||Welcome $1||Shown in the top right, on the left of the 'Profile' button for registered users.  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; tags are passed as $1 along with the actual username, so the final output might look like this: &quot;Welcome '''Foo Bar'''&quot;.
|}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>gihess4vacpfoy8rclt81zdltm4pvtz</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401848</id>
      <parentid>5401695</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:03:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>restore :(</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5785" xml:space="preserve">{{distinguish|Extension:Nimbus}}
{{Skin
|name            = Nimbus
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
*Aaron Wright &amp;mdash; original code
*David Pean &amp;mdash; original code
*Inez Korczyński &amp;mdash; original code (sidebar parsing code)
*[[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] &amp;mdash; bugfixes, modernization, code docs, etc.
|description     = 
|image           = Nimbus skin - registered user.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 3.6.0
|update          = Continuous updates
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             =
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin|Nimbus}}
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=nimbus ShoutWiki]
|compatibility   = 
|phabricator = MediaWiki-skins-Nimbus
|newhook1        = NimbusLeftSide
}}
'''Nimbus skin''' (previously known as ''Halopedia'' or ''Halo'') first debuted at [http://www.halopedia.org/ Halopedia] and currently it is Halopedia's default skin. It has been available on [[ShoutWiki]] since 3 July 2013.&lt;sup&gt;[http://blog.shoutwiki.com/2013/07/nimbus-a-free-premium-skin/]&lt;/sup&gt;

==Installation==
{{SkinInstall|registration=required}}

==Features==
*Stylish and elegant
*Valid XHTML
*More features if [[Extension:SocialProfile|SocialProfile]] extension is enabled

==Known bugs/issues==
*Nimbus_IE.css should be loaded for Internet Explorer, but right now it isn't, because [[ResourceLoader]] doesn't support browser-specific stylesheets (yet?)

==Internationalization==
[[File:Nimbus skin - anonymous user - qqx.png|right|thumb|350px|Anonymous user viewing a page with uselang=qqx]]
[[File:Nimbus skin - anonymous user.png|right|thumb|350px|Anonymous user viewing a page]]
[[File:Nimbus skin - footer.png|right|thumb|350px|Footer of a content page]]
[[File:Nimbus skin - registered user - qqx.png|right|thumb|350px|Registered user viewing a page with uselang=qqx]]
[[File:Nimbus skin - registered user.png|right|thumb|350px|Registered user viewing a page with the main navigation menu (MediaWiki:Sidebar) active]]
Nimbus skin has 18 internationalization messages. To see how and where the messages are used in the interface, please refer to the screenshots.
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 65%;&quot;
! Message name
! English default
! Notes
|-
| morewikis
|
| &lt;nowiki&gt;This is the content of the &quot;More wikis&quot; menu (the &quot;More wikis&quot; message is MediaWiki:Nimbus-more-wikis). The format for this message is *Page name/Interwiki link/URL|Text to show. Separate items by newlines.&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|-
| nimbus-advertise
| Advertise
| Title of a link that is shown in the page footer, but only if MediaWiki:Nimbus-advertise-url is set.
|-
| nimbus-advertise-url
|
| Set this to an URL if you want an &quot;Advertise&quot; link to show up in the footer of every page.
|-
| nimbus-contribute
| Contribute
| Shown in the page footer; MediaWiki:Nimbus-pages-can-be-edited is shown below this.
|-
| nimbus-didyouknow
| Did you know
| Title of a section that is shown in the left column, below the search box. Below this section header, a list of small did-you-knows (from Template:Didyouknow) is shown.
|-
| nimbus-featuredimage
| Featured image
| Title of a section that is shown in the left column, below the Did you know section, if [[Extension:RandomImageByCategory]] is installed on the wiki.
|-
| nimbus-featureduser
| Featured user
| Title of a section that is shown in the left column, below the Featured image section, if [[Extension:RandomFeaturedUser]] is installed on the wiki.
|-
| nimbus-login
| Login
| Button text; clicking on the button with this text takes you to the wiki's login page, [[Special:UserLogin]]. Because this is a button text, '''keep it short!'''
|-
| nimbus-logout
| Log out?
| Button text; clicking on the button with this text logs you out ([[Special:UserLogout]]). Because this is a button text, '''keep it short!'''
|-
| nimbus-more-actions
| More actions
| Title of a drop-down menu that contains things such as a link to Special:WhatLinksHere/&lt;nowiki&gt;{{PAGENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;, and for privileged users, the move/protect/delete links.
|-
| nimbus-more-wikis
| More wikis
| This text is shown in a small button on the left side, almost above the site logo; '''keep it short!'''
|-
| nimbus-pages-can-be-edited
| &lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}'s pages can be edited. &lt;br /&gt;
Is this page incomplete? Is there anything wrong?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;b&gt;Change it!&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;
| A notice shown in the footer for pages in {{ll|Manual:$wgContentNamespaces|$wgContentNamespaces}}, encouraging users to edit the page in question.
|-
| nimbus-profile
| Profile
| Button text; clicking on the button with this text takes a logged-in user to their own user page ([[Special:MyPage]]). Because this is a button text, '''keep it short!'''
|-
| nimbus-recent-contributors
| Recent contributors to this page
| Shown in the page footer
|-
| nimbus-recent-contributors-info
| The following people recently contributed to this article.
| Shown in the page footer
|-
| nimbus-sidebar
| (see the source file for the real value of this message)
| Nimbus-specific version of [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]], the message controlling what is displayed on the sidebar.
|-
| nimbus-signup
| Sign up
| Button text; clicking on the button with this text takes an unregistered user to the signup page ([[Special:UserLogin/signup]]). Because this is a button text, '''keep it short!'''
|-
| nimbus-welcome
| Welcome $1
| Shown in the top right, on the left of the &quot;Profile&quot; button for registered users. &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; tags are passed as $1 along with the actual username, so the final output might look like this: &quot;Welcome '''Foo Bar'''&quot;
|}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>3kl2wnb7u88kr3jkdtktcxrrnvmsgl3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/de</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>68422</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403322</id>
      <parentid>5307410</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:23:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="19277" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = Erlaubt Nutzern die JS-basierenden, vom Nutzer bereitgestellten &quot;Helferlein&quot; auf ihrer Einstellungsseite zu aktivieren.
|example         = Wikimedia Commons: [[commons:Special:Gadgets|Überblick der Helferlein]], [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|Benutzereinstellungen]] (klicke auf &quot;Helferlein&quot;; du musst dafür natürlich hier angemeldet sein)
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
Die '''Gadgets'''-Erweiterung bietet eine Möglichkeit für Benutzer, JavaScript- oder CSS-basierte &quot;Helferlein&quot; auszuwählen, welche andere Wiki-Benutzer anbieten.

Helferlein (in der englischsprachigen Version &quot;Gadgets&quot; genannt) werden aus JavaScript- und/oder CSS-{{ll|snippets}} zusammengesetzt, die auf den Seiten im MediaWiki-Namensraum vorhanden sind.
Jedes Helferlein wird durch eine Zeile in der [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]] bestimmt. Diese enthält einen Namen und eine Beschreibung für das Helferlein sowie die Liste der von ihm verwendeten JS- oder CSS-Schnipsel (siehe Abschnitt ''[[#Usage|Verwendung]]'' unten).

Seit dem die Helferlein sich im MediaWiki-Namensraum (die Liste der Definition des Helferleins als auch die tatsächlichen Code-Schnipsel) befinden, können nur Sysops (aka Wiki-Admins) den Code bearbeiten.
Dies ist, wie es sein soll: Nur von der Wiki-Gemeinschaft besonders vertraute Benutzer sollten im Stande sein, JavaScript-Code zu editieren, der von anderen Benutzern verwendet wird, da JavaScript leicht verwendet werden kann, um Zugangsdaten oder andere sensible Daten auszuspionieren.

== Installation ==
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
== Verwendung ==
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Selection of some gadgets at the user preferences in de.wikipedia&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to define gadgets depending on the &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If It is &lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt; (the default value), the list of available gadgets is defined on '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In an alternative way, Gadget definitions are defined on pages in the [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|Gadget definition]] namespace when &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt; is set to &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{caution|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Migration of the existing gadget definitions is not yet supported, so you will lose previously defined gadgets after changing this option.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once created with at least one valid gadget, gadgets defined there show up in the &quot;Gadgets&quot; section of [[Special:Preferences]], so users can pick the gadgets they would like to use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An overview of the gadgets defined by MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition is also shown on '''[[Special:Gadgets]]''', along with links to the respective system messages, for easy editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Statistics for non-default gadget usage can be seen at '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==== Format ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===== Die MediaWiki-Gadgets-Definition verwenden =====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each line in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition that starts with one or more &quot;*&quot; (asterisks) characters defines a gadget; it must have the following form:&lt;/span&gt;

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;options (can be omitted)&lt;/span&gt;] | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;page names&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first field (&quot;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&quot; in the example) is the gadget's ''internal name'', and references a system message ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''' in the example) that contains a short description of the gadget, using wiki syntax.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''internal name'' is used as part of the name of a form field and must follow the [https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id rules defined for NAME attribute values].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means it must begin with a basic Latin letter (&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;) and may be followed by any number of letters, digits (&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;), hyphens (&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;), underscores (&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;), colons (&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;), and periods (&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;}}

Optionsformat:

 [Option1 | Option2 | ... OptionN]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whitespace can be omitted.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A single option can either consist of a single option name (in this case it is a flag option), or contain a comma-separated list of values:&lt;/span&gt;

 option = value1, value2, value3

Beispiele:
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
oder
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
oder
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using Gadget Definition Namespace ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Creation of the [[Gadget definition:mygadget]] page and putting in it the below [[w:JSON|JSON]] code have the same effect as &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In above example, the [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] and the [[Gadget:mygadget.css]] are used.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember the &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; option is always true in the gadget definition namespace.&lt;/span&gt;

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add the following in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} to provide the appropriate permissions for users who are within the interface-admin group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing pages in the Gadget namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; right and editing pages in the Gadget definition namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt; right.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


=== Optionen ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! Name
! Parameter
! Beschreibung
! Seit
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''Keine'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with {{ll|ResourceLoader}}.&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || Kommagetrennte Modulnamen || Siehe die [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|Liste der Standardmodulen]]. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|privileges]].&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''Keine''
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide the gadget from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Preferences]] page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be used in two ways:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to Common.js).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you need to add both: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated skin names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; in the URL, {{phab|T199478}}).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated action names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g. &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/span&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specifying &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; action will also load it on &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/span&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''Keine'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''Keine'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mark this gadget as [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the require() function.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (Standard), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; oder &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;
| Setzt die/das {{ll|ResourceLoader}}-Ziel(e) für das Helferlein.
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; oder &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/span&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pre-release&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''Keine'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''Keine'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Makes the gadget to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|top-loaded]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can specify extra dependencies for your gadgets, for example:&lt;/span&gt;

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; with mygadget.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/span&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|permissions]], not user groups like [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here are some real examples:&lt;/span&gt;

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

=== Seiten ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' and '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css''' in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;.js&quot; or &quot;.css&quot;, respectively.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/div&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into {{tag|nowiki}} and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See the first and last lines of [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] for an example.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Abschnitte ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The list of gadgets in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;=&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would define a new section, with the title defined on the page [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=Gadget-Manager}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>66cxmi7j7gr99kzt2kxppodto0kpd3x</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>73416</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401641</id>
      <parentid>5184788</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:59:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ericliu1912</username>
        <id>2506749</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>added [[Category:Social media]] using [[w:Wikipedia:HotCat|HotCat]]</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3297" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:71--&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.

== Overview == &lt;!--T:72--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:73--&gt; Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:74--&gt; Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:75--&gt; Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Social media channels == &lt;!--T:76--&gt;

&lt;!--T:77--&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.

=== MediaWiki === &lt;!--T:78--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology === &lt;!--T:79--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Current maintainers === &lt;!--T:80--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;translate&gt;
== Our operating rules == &lt;!--T:81--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:82--&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.

== Posting to Twitter and Facebook == &lt;!--T:83--&gt;

&lt;!--T:84--&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/translate&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:Social media| ]]</text>
      <sha1>poea7rs7j6it9nf71c7odnr2e7han87</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401646</id>
      <parentid>5401641</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T14:01:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Clump</username>
        <id>81610</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/Ericliu1912|Ericliu1912]] ([[User talk:Ericliu1912|talk]]) to last version by HLepp (WMF)</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3268" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:71--&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.

== Overview == &lt;!--T:72--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:73--&gt; Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:74--&gt; Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:75--&gt; Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Social media channels == &lt;!--T:76--&gt;

&lt;!--T:77--&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.

=== MediaWiki === &lt;!--T:78--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology === &lt;!--T:79--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Current maintainers === &lt;!--T:80--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;translate&gt;
== Our operating rules == &lt;!--T:81--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:82--&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.

== Posting to Twitter and Facebook == &lt;!--T:83--&gt;

&lt;!--T:84--&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/translate&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.</text>
      <sha1>fg3uv0ichnwd5vchumavgmgvizua8d9</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401647</id>
      <parentid>5401646</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T14:08:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ericliu1912</username>
        <id>2506749</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3312" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:71--&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.

== Overview == &lt;!--T:72--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:73--&gt; Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:74--&gt; Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:75--&gt; Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Social media channels == &lt;!--T:76--&gt;

&lt;!--T:77--&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.

=== MediaWiki === &lt;!--T:78--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology === &lt;!--T:79--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Current maintainers === &lt;!--T:80--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;translate&gt;
== Our operating rules == &lt;!--T:81--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:82--&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.

== Posting to Twitter and Facebook == &lt;!--T:83--&gt;

&lt;!--T:84--&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/translate&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:Social media{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>mo7ip6j369v2bx2d28sgwn0kmr5yqd5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401648</id>
      <parentid>5401647</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T14:10:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Ericliu1912</username>
        <id>2506749</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>well this is good enough</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3323" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:71--&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.

== Overview == &lt;!--T:72--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:73--&gt; Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:74--&gt; Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:75--&gt; Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Social media channels == &lt;!--T:76--&gt;

&lt;!--T:77--&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.

=== MediaWiki === &lt;!--T:78--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology === &lt;!--T:79--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Current maintainers === &lt;!--T:80--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;translate&gt;
== Our operating rules == &lt;!--T:81--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:82--&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.

== Posting to Twitter and Facebook == &lt;!--T:83--&gt;

&lt;!--T:84--&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/translate&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ny3lf1pdum6lcyvg81i99tp82akfkgb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:MediaWiki feature list/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>75302</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402370</id>
      <parentid>5392700</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:48:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="23867" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
{{Outdated}}
Diese Seite enthält eine Liste von Eigenschaften, die in die MediaWiki-Software integriert sind.
Ob Sie MediaWiki für ihren eigenen Wiki verwenden sollten, hängt von der Art der Website, auf der Sie es betreiben wollen ab.
Wikipedias Software bietet zahlreiche nützliche Funktionen, die aus den Bedürfnissen der Benutzer und den Ideen der Entwickler wuchsen - aber Funktionen bedeuten auch Komplexität.
 
Bevor Sie sich dafür entscheiden '''MediaWiki''' zu verwenden, sehen Sie sich bitte andere Wiki Engines an (siehe [http://wiki.c2.com/?WikiEngines diese Liste] oder [http://www.wikimatrix.org/ diese Vergleiche]), und sehen Sie ob einer von ihnen Ihren Anforderungen besser entsprechen könnte.

Anfragen für neue Funktionen sollten bei [[Bugzilla]] eingereicht werden.

== Möchte Ich MediaWiki? ==
MediaWiki-Software und -Erweiterungen haben Funktionen und Leistungen, Stärken und Schwächen, Vor- und Nachteile, und trotz der beabsichtigten Verwendung können die MediaWiki-Software und -Erweiterungen für einzigartige, clevere und erfinderische Zwecke verwendet werden, die von den ursprünglichen Programmierern oder anderen Installateuren unvorhergesehen sind.
Hier ist eine kurze Liste der MediaWiki-Funktionen und -Leistungen.
Wenn Sie eine entsprechende Liste ihrer eigenen Ziele und Ressourcen entwickeln, können Sie diese Liste mit Ihrer Liste vergleichen und prüfen, wo es Ähnlichkeiten und Unterschiede gibt.
Mehr Helfe zum Entscheiden benötigt?
Es gibt offene Diskussionsgruppen im Internet und Diskussionsseiten hinter jeder MediaWiki-Hauptseite, wo Sie Verbindungen mit den Erfahrungen Anderer suchen können.

{{note|1=Beispiel-Feature-Liste von Seite 13-14 im Buch &quot;MediaWiki Administrators' Tutorial Guide:}}

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| '''Funktionen von MediaWiki'''
| '''Leistungen von MediaWiki'''
| '''Ihre Ziele'''
| '''Ihre Ressourcen'''

|-
| Einfache Navigation:
| Ohne viel Training einfach mitzuwirken ...
|...
|...

|-
| Bearbeiten, Formatieren und Referenzieren:
| Inhalte verwalten und finden ...
|...
|...

|-
| Veränderung des [[w:Look and Feel|Look and Feel]]:
| An persönliche Präferenzen anpassen ...
|...
|...

|-
| Datenupload:
| Inhalte verwalten und teilen ...
|...
|...

|-
| Mehrsprachige Unterstützung:
| UTF-8-Unterstützung erlaubt eine Stück Software zum Schreiben in allen Sprachen ...
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| Benutzerverwaltung:
| Zugangs- und Sicherheitskontrolle ...
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| Syndizierung:
| Teilen der persönlichen Seiteninformationen ...
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| ... und weiteres ...
|...
|...
|...

|}

Bitte verbessern und erweitern Sie die Funktionen und Leistungen der oben genannten Tabelle, damit Besucher besser verstehen, worauf sie sich einlassen.
Vielen Dank!

Ein wiederkehrendes Problem ist, dass Systemadministratoren beschließen, ein Wiki zu erstellen, ohne viele Probleme zu berücksichtigen.
Nachdem Sie die vorherige Tabelle ausgefüllt haben, stellen Sie sich die folgenden Fragen, um zu sehen, ob ein Wiki die richtige Software für Sie ist:

# ''Was ist der Zweck meiner Seite?''
#: Wikis sind ideal für gemeinschaftliches Bearbeiten und Erstellen von Inhalten; sie eignen sich nicht sehr gut für andere Zwecke wie Bloggen. Überlegen Sie, ob ein [[w:Wiki|Wiki]] eine angemessene Option für ihre Ziele ist.
# ''Wie vielen Benutzern wird diese Seite ausgesetzt sein?''
#: Mit ein paar Ausnahmen ist die Installation einer Wiki-Software unnötig, wenn sich nur eine kleine Gruppe von Personen für die Bearbeitung interessiert. Je größer die Anwenderbasis, desto höher ist die Wahrscheinlichkeit, dass ein Wiki mehr Sinn für Sie macht.
#: ''Wie viele aktive Redakteure erwarte ich, die mein Wiki bearbeiten werden?''
#: Wikis benötigen wegen ihrer offenen Natur etwas Wartung. Je größer die Gruppe der Redakteure, desto mehr Hände sind verfügbar, die diese Wartungsaufgaben wahrnehmen.
# ''Was kann ich mit MediaWiki machen?''
#: MediaWiki ist eine extrem wandlungsfähige Wikiengine; es ist relativ einfach zu installieren und, noch wichtiger, erlaubt die Verwendung und Erstellung von [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|Erweiterungen]]. Das erlaubt Ihrer MediaWiki-Installation mit ein wenig PHP-Wissen extrem anpassbar zu sein. Mit genügend Motivation kann MediaWiki dazu ''missbraucht werden'', beinahe alles zu tun.
# ''Ist MediaWiki das Richtige für mich?''
#: MediaWiki hat seine Grenzen. Eine erheblichere Einschränkung ist, dass MediaWiki keine [[w:Access Control List|Zugriffssteuerungsliste]] sein sollte. MediaWikis ''Raison d'etre'' ist es, offenen Inhalt bereitzustellen; während jüngste Versionen ein viel stärkeres Sicherheitsmodel haben, gibt es noch immer signifikante Lücken im individuellen Sicherheitszugriff.

{{Note|1=''Siehe {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} und [[Security issues with authorization extensions|Sicherheitsprobleme mit Erweiterungen zur Autorisierung]].''}}


== Wie sollte ich MediaWiki konfigurieren? ==

Wenn Sie sich dazu entschieden haben, dass MediaWiki tatsächlich eine angemessene Lösung ist, gibt es immer noch weitere Dinge abzuwägen.

Diese Fragen werden Ihnen hoffentlich helfen, sich zu entscheiden, wie Sie Ihr Wiki konfigurieren, um Probleme langfristig zu minimieren:

# ''Wer soll mein Wiki lesen?''
#: Trotz aller Probleme  mit persönlichen Seiteneinschränkungen kann MediaWiki so konfiguriert werden, dass der Zugriff für jeden eingeschränkt oder zugelassen wird. Deswegen sollten Sie sich selbst fragen, ob jeder im Internet die Inhalte Ihres Wikis sehen soll, oder ob dieses Privileg den Benutzern vorbehalten bleibt, die einen Account in Ihrem Wiki erstellt haben.
# ''Wer soll mein Wiki bearbeiten?''
#: Eventuell ist die meistgestellte Frage, ob die Bearbeitung Ihres Wikis jedem erlaubt sein soll, wie beim [[w:Wikipedia|Wikipedia]]-Model.  MediaWiki erlaubt detaillierte Schreibbegrenzungen; Sie können zum Beispiel unregistrierten Benutzern die Bearbeitung von Diskussionsseiten erlauben, aber nur Benutzern mit Accounts, die älter als eine bestimmte Zeit sind, die Bearbeitung der Inhaltsseiten erlauben. Sie können die Bearbeitung von sysops einschränken oder sogar auf eine beliebige Benutzergruppe, die Sie erstellen, beschränken.
# ''Wer darf ein Account in meinem Wiki erstellen?''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: Depending on some of the answers to the questions above, you may want to decide to restrict who can create accounts in a wiki.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can allow anyone to create accounts; or you can even designate that privilege to administrators, who would then be responsible for creating accounts for new users via some process of your choosing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''What powers do I want each user group to have?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: One of the most important questions you need to answer is this one.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Granting or removing privileges to a group can be ''extremely'' controversial in a large wiki, so having a good idea of what each user should be able to do is critical.&lt;/span&gt; Möchten du, dass nicht registrierte Benutzer Seiten erstellen? Möchten du, dass registrierte Benutzer Seiten erstellen? &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do you want wiki administrators to be able to block and delete pages, or do you want to extend more privileges to them?&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Who is responsible for granting more privileges?&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Who is responsible for removing them?&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Who do you want to have more fine-grained powers, such as [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Oversight policy|oversight]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/CheckUser policy|checkuser]], and [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Reverting#Rollback|rollback]]?&lt;/span&gt;
#:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Manual:User rights]] and [[Help:User rights management]] for more ideas and information.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''Which extensions should I install?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: With a few exceptions, [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|extensions]] are easy to add, whether it be while installing the wiki, or after a couple of years of the wiki being run.
&lt;/div&gt;
# ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do I need to manage structured data?&lt;/span&gt;''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: For [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Managing data in MediaWiki|managing structured data within MediaWiki]], several dedicated extensions exist.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With those answers, you should be able to configure the most critical aspects of your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can proceed to beginning the installation process in your [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:OS specific help|operating system]].&lt;/span&gt;

==Aussehen und Gefühl==

*'''Links mit Abkürzung''', Anordnung hängt vom Skin ab.
*'''{{ll|Manual:Skins|nsp=0}}''' - Verschiedene Möglichkeiten, um die Website zu präsentieren
*'''[[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Help:User style|Anwenderstil]]e''': Anwender können das Aussehen und Gefühl der Website durch benutzerdefinierte CSS über ihre Benutzerseiten anpassen.
*'''Der Schwellenwert für die Einstufung Entwurf''' (&quot;Stub&quot;): Anwender können Links zu Artikeln unter einer bestimmten Größe gerendert, in einer anderen Farbe sehen.
*'''Druckbare Versionen''' können von Artikeln generiert werden.
*'''Überschriften automatisch nummerieren''' in einem Artikel (optional).
*'''Intra-Seite Anker''' (automatisch für Überschriften, und auch mit &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;div id=&quot;tagname&quot;&gt;...&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; generiert).
* {{anchor|TOC}}'''Generieren Sie ein automatisches Inhaltsverzeichnis''' für lange Artikel (optional).
*Schalten automatisch '''ISBN-Nummern''' in Links um, zu einer bearbeitbaren Liste der Buchhändler.
*'''XHTML'''- oder '''HTML5'''-kompatiblen Ausgang (oder sehr nahe daran), geordnete Integration.

==Multimedia und Erweiterungen==

*'''Datei-Upload-Funktion''' ermöglicht es, Grafiken oder Sound-Dateien hochzuladen, siehe [[Special:Upload]], um es in Aktion zu sehen, und [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Uploading files|Hochladen von Dateien]] für eine Beschreibung. Hochgeladene Dateien werden über die [[Special:Recentchanges|letzten Änderungen]] aufgeführt und sie sind auch auf [[Special:Log/upload]] protokolliert.
*'''Mathematische Formeln, welche die LATEX-Syntax verwenden''' - Siehe {{ll|Extension:Math}} und {{ll|Manual:Mathoid}}
*'''Automatische Größenanpassung''' von Bildern, welche ImageMagick oder libgd verwenden, einfache Syntax für Bildunterschriften und Bildausrichtung
*'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiHiero|WikiHiero]]''' für ägyptische Hieroglyphen (benötigt separat installierte Komponenten)
*'''{{ll|Extension:Graph|nsp=0}}''' - für Zeit-Charts: siehe ([[w:Hilfe:Zeitleisten|hier]]) (benötigt separat installierte Komponenten)

==Verfolgung von Änderungen==

*'''Beobachtungsliste''' Jede Seite hat einen Link &quot;Diese Seite beobachten.&quot; Verwenden Sie [[:de:Spezial:Beobachtungsliste|Beobachtungsliste]], um Änderungen auf den Artikeln zu verfolgen, die Sie als interessant erklärten; beobachtete Artikel sind auch in der [[:de:Spezial:Letzte Änderungen|Liste der Letzten Änderungen]] fett.
*'''Benutzerbeiträge''' in der Seitenleiste jeder Benutzerseite, listet alle Artikel des Nutzers auf, entsprechend der Datenbank.
*'''Erweiterte letzte Änderungen''' mit dynamischer Aufklappfunktion der Änderungen auf die gleichen Artikel und Schnellzugriffs-Links, um Bearbeitungen zu unterscheiden, zeigt die Versionsgeschichte, zeigt die Benutzerseite, zeigt die Diskussionsseite oder Sperrung der Benutzer (für Sysops)
*'''&quot;Änderungen an verlinkten Seiten&quot;:''' Sehen Sie sich eine gefilterte Version der letzten Änderungen zu den von der gegenwärtigen Seite verbundenen Seiten an.
*'''Unterschied zwischen Versionen''' - die Unterschiede werden nebeneinander angezeigt und geänderte Teile von Zeilen werden hervorgehoben, so dass es viel leichter zu sehen ist, was genau was ist. Zusätzlich wird ein Unterschied bei einem Bearbeitungskonflikt angezeigt, sodass Sie genau sehen können, was Sie wieder eingliedern sollten.
*'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Real names&lt;/span&gt;''' - Benutzer können (optional) einen &quot;echten Namen&quot; angeben, wollen sie ihn für &quot;Autor-Credits&quot; verwenden.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*'''On-page credits'''.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administrators can enable an on-page paragraph giving credit to editors who've worked on a page.&lt;/span&gt;

==Strukturen und Satzbau/Syntax==

*Standardmäßig ist nur der [[Special:MyLanguage/HTML restriction|eingeschränkte]] Gebrauch von [[w:HTML|HTML]] gestattet. Es gibt eine Möglichkeit, vollen Gebrauch von HTML zu ermöglichen.
*'''Bearbeiten von Satzbau/Syntax beruht auf UseMod Basis''', mit der Unterstützung für das Mischen Wiki-Syntax und HTML. Nur freie Links werden für die Verlinkung unterstützt, [[:de:CamelCase|CamelCase]] wird nicht unterstützt. (bewusste Design-Entscheidung)
*'''Namensräume''' erlauben die Inhalts-Trennung (um den Namensraum zu adressieren, nutze die &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Namensraum:Seitentitel]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; Syntax).
** Diskussion (Diskussion:) Seiten sind getrennt von Artikelseiten, &quot;meta&quot;-Projekt Seiten können von Inhaltsseiten getrennt werden, Bilder-Seiten werden für Bildbeschreibungen eingesetzt.
** [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:System message|MediaWiki:Namensraum]] enthält alle Benutzer-Interface Texte, so dass sie wie jede andere Wiki-Seite bearbeitet werden kann.
** Vorlage: Namensraum für benutzerdefinierte Meldungen. Vorlagen können String-Variablen enthalten, die durch bestimmte Werte ersetzt werden, zu der Vorlage aus der aufrufenden Seite.
*'''[[w:Transklusion|Transklusion]]''' von beliebigen Seiten in jedem Namensraum: &lt;nowiki&gt;{{:Page Name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Siehe [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Hilfe:Vorlagen|Vorlagen]]
*'''Word-Erweiterung Verlinkung''': Wenn Sie einen Link von der Form &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Krieg]]e,&lt;/nowiki&gt; oder &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Krieg]]s-Zeit&lt;/nowiki&gt; einbeziehen, wird es das System automatisch anzeigen, als ob Sie &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Krieg]]e&lt;/nowiki&gt;, oder &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Krieg]]szeit&lt;/nowiki&gt;, eingegeben haben, beziehungsweise, das spart etwas Tipparbeit.
*'''Beiläufiges verstecken''' Wenn Sie einen Link in der Form &lt;nowiki&gt;[[kernel (mathematics)|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; einbeziehen, wird der beiläufige Teil in dem Link versteckt werden: [[kernel (mathematics)|kernel]]. Das ist nützlich, um verschiedene Bedeutungen eines Wortes zu disambiguieren, ohne die Verlinkung zu schwierig oder das Überhäufen des Textes von Artikeln zu machen. Dies funktioniert auch mit dem Zurechtschneiden aus Namensräumen, wenn Sie einen Sauber-aussehenden Link wollen: &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Wikipedia:Copyrights|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; wird zu [[Wikipedia:Copyrights|Copyrights]]
*'''Link zu einzelnen Abschnitten''' von einen Artikel, z.B. [[{{FULLPAGENAME}}#Bearbeitung]] (diese Links können ungültig werden, wenn Abschnitte umbenannt oder entfernt werden -- eine Modifizierung, die das lindern würde, ist [http://bugzilla.wikipedia.org/show_bug.cgi?id=1521 vorgeschlagen worden].)
*Unterstüzung für '''Unterseiten''' (Link zu &quot;Foo/Bar&quot; von &quot;Foo&quot; nur durch Eingabe von &quot;/Bar&quot;, &quot;Foo/Bar&quot; enthält einen Backlink zu &quot;Foo&quot;), diese können vom Namensraum aktiviert oder deaktiviert werden (z.B., Wikipedia unterstützt derzeit Unterseiten auf Diskussionsseiten, um die Archivierung einfach zu machen, und auf Benutzerseiten, um den Benutzern Platz für persönliche Seiten zu geben).
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic words|Special keywords]] for inserting '''dynamic data''' such as the name of the current page, the current date, the number of articles, etc.
&lt;/div&gt;
*Mehrere '''Kategorien''' können zu jeder Seite, einschließlich Kategorien selbst zugeordnet werden, wodurch eine Hierarchie von Kategorien erstellt wird. Kategorie-Seiten listen automatisch eine Liste aller Seiten, die ihnen einschließlich Unterkategorien zugeteilt sind. Kategorien ermöglichen Einstufung und hierarchisches Durchsuchen des Inhalts.

==Bearbeitung==
*'''[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Section|Abschnittsbearbeitung]]''' - Benutzer können eine Option aktivieren, die ihnen erlaubt, individuelle Abschnitte eines Artikels (getrennt durch Überschriften) zu editieren, anstatt den kompletten Artikel zu laden.
*Editieren Sie Werkzeugleiste, die (JavaScript-basiert) ist, um Text als '''fett''' bzw. ''kursiv'' usw. zu formatieren (voll funktionsfähig in Mozilla und IE, andere Browser verwenden es, um die Syntax zu zeigen, können Text jedoch nicht innerhalb des Textfeldes formatieren, weil ihre JavaScript-Implementierung es nicht unterstützt). Wenn JavaScript deaktiviert ist, wird die Werkzeugleiste nicht gezeigt.
*'''[[wmf:de:Hilfe:Zusammenfassung und Quellen|Zusammenfassung]]''' die in den &quot;Letzten Änderungen&quot; gezeigt wird. Wird mit Abschnitts-Titel vorausgefüllt werden, wenn der Abschnitt bearbeitet wird.
*'''Doppelklick Bearbeitung''': Benutzer können eine Option aktivieren, sodass sie Artikel mittels Doppelklick bearbeiten können.
*'''Bearbeitungvorschau''' (kann vor oder nach Eingabefeld angezeigt werden)
*Handhabe '''Bearbeitungskonflikte''' (Seite die durch einen Nutzer gespeichert wurde, während diese immer noch von einem anderen bearbeitet wird, dann wieder gespeichert wurde). MediaWiki wird wenn möglich Änderungen automatisch verschmelzen und sonst verlangen, dass der Benutzer eine manuelle Verschmelzung veranlasst.
*Markiere Bearbeitungen als '''geringfügig''', Benutzer können entscheiden, manche Bearbeitungen aus der Liste der Letzten Änderungen zu verstecken. Nur angemeldeten Nutzer können Änderungen als geringfügig markieren.

== Spam &amp; Vandalismus ==
*{{ll|Manual:Combating spam}}: Verhindern Sie Link-Spamming und andere Formen der missbräuchlichen Bearbeitung.
**[[meta:Spam blacklist|Schwarze Spamliste]]: Liste der Spammerdomains, welche es Benutzern nicht erlaubt, sie zu verlinken.
* [[Manual:Combating vandalism|Vandalismus bekämpfen]]: Hilfreiche Tipps und Links zu einigen Erweiterungen für den Umgang mit Vandalismus.

==Diskussionen==

*'''Diskussionsseiten''': Jeder Benutzer (einschließlich jeder anonyme Benutzer) und jeder Artikel hat eine zugehörige Seite auf der Nachrichten hinterlassen werden können. Dies sind separate Namensräume (siehe oben), &quot;Diskussion:&quot; und &quot;Benutzer Diskussion:&quot;.
*Benachrichtigung über Nachrichten (Benutzer bekommt ein &quot;Du hast neue Nachrichten&quot; Mitteilung, sobald jemand anderes seine Benutzer Diskussions-Seite bearbeitet hat); das gilt auch für anonyme Benutzer, aber nicht von gemeinsam genutzten IP-Benutzern.
*Automatische Signatur: Tippen Sie einfach die drei Tilden (~) wenn Sie bearbeiten, und beim speichern der Seite, wird es mit Ihrem Benutzernamen und einem Link zu Ihrer Benutzer-Seite ersetzt. Wenn Sie vier Tilden verwenden, wird zusätzlich das aktuelle Datum hinzugefügt werden. Hauptsächlich für Diskussionsseiten gedacht.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Support for '''emailing users''' through the wiki (email address not shown to the user)
&lt;/div&gt;

==Mehrsprachige Unterstützung==

*In '''vielen Sprachen''' übersetzt (siehe [[:en:Wikipedia:Multilingual coordination|Mehrsprachige Koordination]] für weitere Details) (engl.)
*'''[[:de:Hilfe:Internationalisierung|Interlanguage-Links]]''': praktische Methode zur Verknüpfung von Artikeln, zwischen Wikis in verschiedenen Sprachen (jede Sprache benötigt eine eigene Datenbank)
*UTF-8 Unterstützung

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Backend ==
&lt;/div&gt;

*Datenbank-gestützte (MySQL und PostgreSQL werden beide unterstützt).
*Parser Caching: gerenderte Seiten werden zwischengespeichert, um redundante Verarbeitung zu reduzieren.
*Ausgabezwischenspeicherung: (Output caching) komplette Ausgangsleistung kann wahlweise als statische HTML-Datei um anderen Clients zu dienen; gespeichert werden, Unterstützung für Squid-Proxys.
*Cookie-basiertes Konto (Account) und Login-System, aber anonyme Benutzer können auch Seiten bearbeiten.
*Alle Versionen eines Artikels werden gespeichert (wahlweise komprimiert).
*'''[[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Syndication feeds|RSS]]''' syndication für viele spezielle Seiten, wie z.B. [[Special:Newpages|Spezial:Neue Seiten]] und [[Special:Recentchanges|Spezial:Letzte Änderungen]]
*'''[[m:Special:MyLanguage/RDF metadata|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;RDF metadata&lt;/span&gt;]]'''


==Berechtigungen==

*'''Unterschiedliche Rechte''' für anonyme Benutzer, angemeldete Benutzer, Sysops, Bürokraten und Entwickler.
*'''Eingeloggte Benutzer''' können:
**verschieben und Seiten umbenennen
**Dateien hochladen
**haben und verwenden eine Beobachtungsliste
**kennzeichnen Bearbeitungen als ''Kleine Änderungen'' (z.B. Tippfehler-Korrektur)
*'''Admins/Sysops''' können:
**Seiten vor Bearbeitung schützen
**Seiten löschen und wiederherstellen
**Geschützte Seiten bearbeiten
**Benutzer mit IP-Addresse bannen
**Benutzer nach Benutzernamen bannen, wenn diese Option aktiviert ist
*'''Bürokraten''' können:
**Sysops ernennen/erstellen
**Benutzer umbenennen
**Bots &quot;flaggen&quot; (kennzeichnen)
*'''Entwickler''' können:
**Die Datenbank sperren
**Verschiedene Wartungsaufgaben starten
*'''Andere Berechtigungsschemata''' (z.B. nur angemeldete Benutzer können Seiten bearbeiten) [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|kann so konfiguriert werden]].

==Suchen und Abfragen==

*'''Volltextsuche'''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*'''&quot;Go&quot; button''' allows direct viewing of a specified article's contents (tries near match if no exact hit)
&lt;/div&gt;
*'''Links auf diese Seite''': Alle Seiten, die auf der aktuellen Seite verlinken (Backlinks)
*'''Sonderbericht Seiten'''
**Neue Seiten: Liste der neu erstellten Artikel
**Alte Seiten: Artikel nach Zeitstempel, aufsteigend
**Liste der Bilder
**Liste der Benutzer
**Seitenstatistiken
**Verwaiste Artikel (Artikel, die keine Links, mit Verweis auf sie haben)
**Verwaiste Bilder
**Beliebte Artikel (Artikel nach Anzahl der Besuche, funktioniert nur, wenn Zähler aktiviert sind)
**Meist besuchte Artikel (nicht vorhandene Artikel nach der Anzahl der Links, die auf sie sortiert sind)
**Kurze Artikel
**Lange Artikel
**Liste aller Seiten nach Titel
*'''[[API:Query/de|Query]] API''' - ermöglicht den Zugriff auf verschiedene Skript-Metadaten

==Verschiedenes==

*'''Zufälliger Artikel''' Anzeigefunktion
*Benutzer können ihre '''Zeitzone''' konfigurieren, die auf allen Bericht-Zeitstempel verwendet wird
*Die Attribute von vielen Seiten Bericht ('''Anzahl der Ergebnisse''' etc.) können in den Benutzer-Einstellungen gesetzt werden

==Leerer Satz von Hilfeseiten==
Beachten Sie, dass die Dateien in der Installation viele Links enthalten, die zu Dokumenten verweisen, die nicht im Download enthalten sind.
Am wichtigsten ist die leere Menge von Hilfe-Dateien, die von jedem neuen Benutzer der Website benötigt werden.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remedy these broken links, you must either (a) [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:PD_help/Copying|export from this site]] or manually copy and modify help pages to your installation or (b) modify the installation's parameters to change the help link targets to this site, either of which may require a substantial time investment.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki Introduction{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>mmd9h00xttapg1305e1cyr2qmfc1o5r</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/pt-br</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>76072</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402261</id>
      <parentid>5400753</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11828" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Está disponível informação atualizada na wiki Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Se você clicar [[Special:preferences|Preferences]], o link do usuário no topo da página, quando estiver autenticado na wiki, você pode alterar as suas preferências.
Você verá a seção de perfil do usuário, bem como uma barra de guias na parte superior para alterar outros tipos de configurações.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Seu nome de usuário. Apenas usuários confiáveis podem alterar seu nome de usuário, e a wiki também deve ter a extensão {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} instalada.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Uma lista dos grupos de usuários em que você está.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Nas wikis da Wikimedia, este link permite gerenciar aplicativos externos que estão autorizados a acessar sua conta. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Consulte a [[Help:OAuth|ajuda do OAuth]] para mais informações.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Quantas edições já realizou. Nem todas as wikis apresentam isto.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || A hora em que sua conta foi registrada.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|(veja abaixo)]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|(veja abaixo)]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Gerenciar autenticação de dois fatores.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Gerenciar preferências globais.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Para alterar a sua senha, introduza a senha antiga na primeira caixa e a nova nas duas seguintes.
Se você quiser que este site lembre seu login, marque ''Lembrar meu login neste computador''.
Observe que esta função requer que você tenha os cookies ativados em seu navegador e, se o cookie for apagado ou expirar, você não será mais lembrado.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Conta global ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
A partir de suas preferências, você pode selecionar o idioma em que é mostrada a interface.
Apenas os botões 'editar' e 'discutir', além de algumas páginas na barra lateral, serão afetados.
O texto principal das páginas não será alterado por isso para a grande maioria das páginas, embora existam algumas páginas onde será, como algumas no Meta Wiki da Wikimedia.

*Idiomas
* Como prefere ser descrito?
* Mais definições de idioma

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* A sua assinatura atual
* Assinatura nova
** Tratar como texto wiki

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Se tiver fornecido um endereço de correio eletrônico, clique o botão Confirmar endereço de E-mail para ativar esta funcionalidade. Você receberá um e-mail; abra-o e clique o link fornecido, para ativar as seguintes funcionalidades:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Confirmação de e-mail ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Isso permite que outros usuários registrados enviem um e-mail usando o link &quot;Enviar este usuário&quot; na barra lateral da sua página de usuário. Os e-mails são enviados usando uma interface da web e seu endereço de e-mail não é revelado ao remetente até que você responda por e-mail.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Isso permite que usuários sem as permissões autoconfirmadas lhe enviem e-mails.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Esta opção permite que você especifique quais usuários não poderão enviar e-mails diretos. Eles não verão o link &quot;Enviar um Email para este usuário&quot; na barra lateral da sua página de usuário. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Aqui você pode escolher a skin que você deseja usar. Você pode visualizar as skins disponíveis antes de escolhê-las, clicando no link &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; ao lado de cada skin. Por favor, consulte {{ll|Help:Skins}} para mais detalhes.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Formato da data e deslocamento do tempo ===

A seguinte normalmente é processado de acordo com as preferências:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Aqui você pode determinar como as imagens serão exibidas. As imagens exibidas por colagem direta de uma URL (se a wiki tem a opção habilitada) não serão afetadas por essa configuração.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Esta preferência permite-lhe escolher o tamanho que a previsão de imagens terá nas páginas «File:» de descrição das mesmas. Se souber qual é a resolução do seu monitor, você pode definir este tamanho um pouco menor do que o da tela. Se tiver uma conexão lenta (por modem), pode limitá-las a 320x240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Define qual será o tamanho das miniaturas (thumbnails). Esta preferência não afetará miniaturas cuja dimensão foi definida pelo editor da página, nem pode ampliar imagens para além das suas dimensões originais.
* Utilizar o Media Viewer: nas wikis da Wikimedia, esta definição (ligada, por padrão) determina se o [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] deve ser usado para oferecer uma experiência de visionamento de imagens mais suave.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Aqui você pode controlar como as equações matemáticas descritas com a tag {{tag|math|open}} são mostradas.
As fórmulas matemáticas carregadas como imagens ou escritas fora da marca matemática não serão afetadas por esta configuração.
Observe que as preferências matemáticas só estarão visíveis se {{ll|Extension:Math}} estiver instalado.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Estas são as configurações para controlar as páginas de edição, incluindo se deseja assistir automaticamente as páginas que você editou ou criou.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Aqui você pode especificar quantos dias serão mostrados nas [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|mudanças recentes]]. Note que a lista será prematuramente interrompida se o número de edições for excedido (ver abaixo).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Aqui você pode especificar o número de edições que serão mostradas.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Isto permite-lhe esconder da lista de mudanças as edições marcadas pelos editores como edições menores (consulte {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Dado que alguns usuários farão rapidamente muitas alterações pequenas para atualizar predefinições ou corrigir erros de digitação, esta preferência pode ser útil para escondê-las. Esta funcionalidade pode ser ativada temporariamente na própria página Mudanças recentes (consulte {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Esta preferência condensa as edições de cada página numa só entrada, de modo a listar uma única entrada por cada página editada. Consulte acompanhar alterações para mais informação sobre esta funcionalidade.
* Mostrar as edições da Wikidata nas modificações recentes. Em projetos Wikimedia selecionados onde estão disponíveis dados da [[d:|Wikidata]], esta opção permite-lhe ver mudanças aos elementos Wikidata ligados a páginas da sua wiki, para além daquelas feitas às páginas da própria wiki. Isto pode ajudar a identificar vandalismo na Wikidata que possa ser visto na sua wiki.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Preferência para controlar o comportamento da lista de páginas vigiadas (consulte {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
A maioria destas opções também estão disponíveis na própria página das páginas vigiadas mas, ao defini-las nas suas preferências, é controlado o comportamento por omissão, isto é, sempre que visitar a página ela fará o mesmo.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Mostrar edições da Wikidata da sua lista de páginas vigiadas: em projetos Wikimedia selecionados onde estão disponíveis dados da [[d:|Wikidata]], esta opção permite-lhe ver mudanças aos elementos Wikidata ligados a páginas da sua wiki, para além daquelas feitas às páginas da própria wiki. Isto pode ajudar a identificar vandalismo na Wikidata que possa ser visto na sua wiki.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Chave secreta das páginas vigiadas: esta chave é usada para gerar um [[w:en:RSS feed|''feed'' RSS]] a partir da sua lista de páginas vigiadas. Qualquer pessoa que conheça esta chave pode usá-la para aceder à sua lista de páginas vigiadas. Se a chave for descoberta por alguém, pode usar o link &quot;Clique aqui para redefini-la&quot; para criar uma chave nova. Quando o fizer, terá de editar o URL de subscrição do ''feed'' no seu leitor de notícias, para usar a chave nova.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Definições por omissão para pesquisas, incluindo quantos resultados devem ser mostrados e quanto contexto para cada resultado.
Marque as caixas dos espaços nominais que deseja que sejam pesquisados na primeira vez que pesquisar alguma coisa.
Você pode alterar esta definição ao fazer uma pesquisa, se desmarcar as caixas ao fundo da página de resultados.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
Nas wikis da Wikimedia, o separador '''Funcionalidades Beta''' permite-lhe ativar funcionalidades experimentais antes que estas sejam disponibilizadas para todos.
Se ativar alguma destas funcionalidades deve preparar-se para encontrar defeitos e problemas, e podem ocorrer mudanças repentinas na funcionalidade à medida que o desenvolvimento progrida.

Cada funcionalidade tem um link de &quot;discussão&quot;, de modo que pode fazer sugestões e reportar quaisquer problemas.

Para mais informações, consulte [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|sobre recursos beta]]

* Ativar automaticamente todas as novas funcionalidades beta: se ligar esta opção, as funcionalidades serão ativadas logo que sejam adicionadas ao sistema Funcionalidades Beta.

== Ver também ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>tqrirqisyj62o883zlgw2adf41yldup</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402309</id>
      <parentid>5402261</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:07:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11774" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Está disponível informação atualizada na wiki Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Se você clicar [[Special:preferences|Preferences]], o link do usuário no topo da página, quando estiver autenticado na wiki, você pode alterar as suas preferências.
Você verá a seção de perfil do usuário, bem como uma barra de guias na parte superior para alterar outros tipos de configurações.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Seu nome de usuário. Apenas usuários confiáveis podem alterar seu nome de usuário, e a wiki também deve ter a extensão {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} instalada.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Uma lista dos grupos de usuários em que você está.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Nas wikis da Wikimedia, este link permite gerenciar aplicativos externos que estão autorizados a acessar sua conta. Consulte {{ll|Help:OAuth}} para mais informações.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Quantas edições já realizou. Nem todas as wikis apresentam isto.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || A hora em que sua conta foi registrada.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|(veja abaixo)]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|(veja abaixo)]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Gerenciar autenticação de dois fatores.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Gerenciar preferências globais.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Para alterar a sua senha, introduza a senha antiga na primeira caixa e a nova nas duas seguintes.
Se você quiser que este site lembre seu login, marque ''Lembrar meu login neste computador''.
Observe que esta função requer que você tenha os cookies ativados em seu navegador e, se o cookie for apagado ou expirar, você não será mais lembrado.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Conta global ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
A partir de suas preferências, você pode selecionar o idioma em que é mostrada a interface.
Apenas os botões 'editar' e 'discutir', além de algumas páginas na barra lateral, serão afetados.
O texto principal das páginas não será alterado por isso para a grande maioria das páginas, embora existam algumas páginas onde será, como algumas no Meta Wiki da Wikimedia.

*Idiomas
* Como prefere ser descrito?
* Mais definições de idioma

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* A sua assinatura atual
* Assinatura nova
** Tratar como texto wiki

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Se tiver fornecido um endereço de correio eletrônico, clique o botão Confirmar endereço de E-mail para ativar esta funcionalidade. Você receberá um e-mail; abra-o e clique o link fornecido, para ativar as seguintes funcionalidades:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Confirmação de e-mail ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Isso permite que outros usuários registrados enviem um e-mail usando o link &quot;Enviar este usuário&quot; na barra lateral da sua página de usuário. Os e-mails são enviados usando uma interface da web e seu endereço de e-mail não é revelado ao remetente até que você responda por e-mail.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Isso permite que usuários sem as permissões autoconfirmadas lhe enviem e-mails.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Esta opção permite que você especifique quais usuários não poderão enviar e-mails diretos. Eles não verão o link &quot;Enviar um Email para este usuário&quot; na barra lateral da sua página de usuário. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Aqui você pode escolher a skin que você deseja usar. Você pode visualizar as skins disponíveis antes de escolhê-las, clicando no link &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; ao lado de cada skin. Por favor, consulte {{ll|Help:Skins}} para mais detalhes.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Formato da data e deslocamento do tempo ===

A seguinte normalmente é processado de acordo com as preferências:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Aqui você pode determinar como as imagens serão exibidas. As imagens exibidas por colagem direta de uma URL (se a wiki tem a opção habilitada) não serão afetadas por essa configuração.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Esta preferência permite-lhe escolher o tamanho que a previsão de imagens terá nas páginas «File:» de descrição das mesmas. Se souber qual é a resolução do seu monitor, você pode definir este tamanho um pouco menor do que o da tela. Se tiver uma conexão lenta (por modem), pode limitá-las a 320x240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Define qual será o tamanho das miniaturas (thumbnails). Esta preferência não afetará miniaturas cuja dimensão foi definida pelo editor da página, nem pode ampliar imagens para além das suas dimensões originais.
* Utilizar o Media Viewer: nas wikis da Wikimedia, esta definição (ligada, por padrão) determina se o [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] deve ser usado para oferecer uma experiência de visionamento de imagens mais suave.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Aqui você pode controlar como as equações matemáticas descritas com a tag {{tag|math|open}} são mostradas.
As fórmulas matemáticas carregadas como imagens ou escritas fora da marca matemática não serão afetadas por esta configuração.
Observe que as preferências matemáticas só estarão visíveis se {{ll|Extension:Math}} estiver instalado.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Estas são as configurações para controlar as páginas de edição, incluindo se deseja assistir automaticamente as páginas que você editou ou criou.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Aqui você pode especificar quantos dias serão mostrados nas [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|mudanças recentes]]. Note que a lista será prematuramente interrompida se o número de edições for excedido (ver abaixo).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Aqui você pode especificar o número de edições que serão mostradas.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Isto permite-lhe esconder da lista de mudanças as edições marcadas pelos editores como edições menores (consulte {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Dado que alguns usuários farão rapidamente muitas alterações pequenas para atualizar predefinições ou corrigir erros de digitação, esta preferência pode ser útil para escondê-las. Esta funcionalidade pode ser ativada temporariamente na própria página Mudanças recentes (consulte {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Esta preferência condensa as edições de cada página numa só entrada, de modo a listar uma única entrada por cada página editada. Consulte acompanhar alterações para mais informação sobre esta funcionalidade.
* Mostrar as edições da Wikidata nas modificações recentes. Em projetos Wikimedia selecionados onde estão disponíveis dados da [[d:|Wikidata]], esta opção permite-lhe ver mudanças aos elementos Wikidata ligados a páginas da sua wiki, para além daquelas feitas às páginas da própria wiki. Isto pode ajudar a identificar vandalismo na Wikidata que possa ser visto na sua wiki.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Preferência para controlar o comportamento da lista de páginas vigiadas (consulte {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
A maioria destas opções também estão disponíveis na própria página das páginas vigiadas mas, ao defini-las nas suas preferências, é controlado o comportamento por omissão, isto é, sempre que visitar a página ela fará o mesmo.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Mostrar edições da Wikidata da sua lista de páginas vigiadas: em projetos Wikimedia selecionados onde estão disponíveis dados da [[d:|Wikidata]], esta opção permite-lhe ver mudanças aos elementos Wikidata ligados a páginas da sua wiki, para além daquelas feitas às páginas da própria wiki. Isto pode ajudar a identificar vandalismo na Wikidata que possa ser visto na sua wiki.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Chave secreta das páginas vigiadas: esta chave é usada para gerar um [[w:en:RSS feed|''feed'' RSS]] a partir da sua lista de páginas vigiadas. Qualquer pessoa que conheça esta chave pode usá-la para aceder à sua lista de páginas vigiadas. Se a chave for descoberta por alguém, pode usar o link &quot;Clique aqui para redefini-la&quot; para criar uma chave nova. Quando o fizer, terá de editar o URL de subscrição do ''feed'' no seu leitor de notícias, para usar a chave nova.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Definições por omissão para pesquisas, incluindo quantos resultados devem ser mostrados e quanto contexto para cada resultado.
Marque as caixas dos espaços nominais que deseja que sejam pesquisados na primeira vez que pesquisar alguma coisa.
Você pode alterar esta definição ao fazer uma pesquisa, se desmarcar as caixas ao fundo da página de resultados.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
Nas wikis da Wikimedia, o separador '''Funcionalidades Beta''' permite-lhe ativar funcionalidades experimentais antes que estas sejam disponibilizadas para todos.
Se ativar alguma destas funcionalidades deve preparar-se para encontrar defeitos e problemas, e podem ocorrer mudanças repentinas na funcionalidade à medida que o desenvolvimento progrida.

Cada funcionalidade tem um link de &quot;discussão&quot;, de modo que pode fazer sugestões e reportar quaisquer problemas.

Para mais informações, consulte [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|sobre recursos beta]]

* Ativar automaticamente todas as novas funcionalidades beta: se ligar esta opção, as funcionalidades serão ativadas logo que sejam adicionadas ao sistema Funcionalidades Beta.

== Ver também ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>f2y2i42eewf81hzszm6vmrs859718qn</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>How to become a MediaWiki hacker/pt-br</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>76592</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402374</id>
      <parentid>5349109</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:54:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14140" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Este artigo está escrito para ajudar os desenvolvedores a aprender as habilidades básicas necessárias para contribuir com '''desenvolvimento de [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:What is MediaWiki?|MediaWiki core]] e extensões MediaWiki'''.
Observe que, na maioria dos casos, quando você trabalha com o MediaWiki, você [[Special:MyLanguage/Do not hack MediaWiki core|não quer cortar o núcleo do MediaWiki]] a menos que você realmente saiba o que está fazendo.

A principal forma de se iniciar no desenvolvimento da [[Special:MyLanguage/Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] é '''contribuir nos [[Special:MyLanguage/New Developers|projetos Wikimedia que oferecem orientação]]'''. Uma forma alternativa sem orientação é corrigir um [[Special:MyLanguage/Good first bugs|defeito pequeno mas irritante]].

Se já é um programador experiente, familiarizado com o uso do MediaWiki, visite antes o portal dos programadores - '''{{ll|Developer hub}}'''.

Para outras formas de se envolver na comunidade Wikimedia, veja '''{{ll|How to contribute}}'''

{{TOCRight}}
== Visão geral ==

MediaWiki é o software que alimenta a Wikipédia, seus projetos parceiros e milhares de outras wikis ao redor do mundo.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O MediaWiki está escrito na linguagem de programação [http://php.net PHP]&lt;ref&gt;Nem todo o MediaWiki está em PHP. Algumas ferramentas de apoio estão escritas noutras línguas, incluindo [[w:Batch files|ficheiros ''batch'']], [[w:Shell script|''shell scripts'']], [[w:Makefile|''makefiles'']] e [[w:Python (programming language)|Python]].&lt;/ref&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Usa jQuery como a biblioteca JavaScript cliente.&lt;/span&gt;

O MediaWiki está escrito principalmente para a [[w:LAMP_(software_bundle)|plataforma LAMP]]&lt;ref&gt;O MediaWiki corre na maioria das plataformas que suportam PHP. No entanto, a falta de certos utilitários ou funcionalidades do sistema operativo pode limitar a funcionalidade ou o desempenho do MediaWiki em plataformas que não sejam LAMP.&lt;/ref&gt; e corre na maioria dos sistemas operativos.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O MediaWiki usa principalmente os servidores de bases de dados MySQL and MariaDB.&lt;ref&gt;O MediaWiki suporta outras [[w:DBMS|DBMS]] além de [[w:MySQL|MySQL]] e [[w:MariaDB|MariaDB]], incluindo [[w:Oracle Database|Oracle]], [[w:PostgreSQL|PostgreSQL]], [[w:SQLite|SQLite]] e [[w:Microsoft SQL Server|Microsoft SQL Server]].&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;/span&gt;

O desenvolvimento é feito com [[w:Open Source|código aberto]]&lt;ref&gt;Os programadores são uma mistura de voluntários e pessoal assalariado (ou contratados) para várias organizações. Para uma lista completa de quem trabalha no código do MediaWiki, leia o artigo {{ll|Developers}}.&lt;/ref&gt;, é coordenado em grande medida ''online'', e é suportado pela Wikimedia Foundation, embora os programadores voluntários da comunidade também desempenhem um papel muito importante.

* A '''discussão de desenvolvimento''' ocorre em várias [[mailing lists]] e [[MediaWiki on IRC|canais IRC]]. A principal lista de programadores é [[mail:wikitech-l|wikitech-l]]. Os principais canais de desenvolvimento são o {{irc|mediawiki}} e o {{irc|wikimedia-dev}}.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* O '''código-fonte''' é gerido usando o sistema de controlo de versões [[w:Git (software)|Git]].&lt;ref&gt;Visite os repositórios do código-fonte e respetivas revisões de código em https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ ou descarregue o código-fonte para o seu sistema usando o Gerrit.&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* As '''revisões do código''' são feitas no {{ll|Gerrit}}.
&lt;/div&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit/Tutorial|Siga este guia prático]] para configurar o Git e o Gerrit de forma a poder enviar modificações do código.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Os '''relatórios de defeitos''' e as tarefas são gerenciadas em {{ll|Phabricator}} e podem ser vistas [[phab:tag/mediawiki-general/|aqui]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Esta página deve ajudá-lo a tornar-se um colaborador da MediaWiki.
Isto '''não''' é um tutorial e sim o direciona a vários locais onde poderá aprender o que for necessário.

{{Anchor|Set up your development environment|dev-environment}}

== Configure seu ambiente de desenvolvimento ==
A maioria dos projetos usa Git e Gerrit. Segue o [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit/Tutorial|tutorial Gerrit]] para configurar sua conta de desenvolvedor.
Então, você pode avançar para baixar nosso código, fazer alterações, testá-los e enviar patches.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Há duas formas de configurar o seu ambiente de desenvolvimento: usar o instalador de uma máquina virtual pré-configurada (Vagrant ou Docker), ou uma abordagem de configuração manual.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Ambiente de desenvolvimento Docker ===

* [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki-Docker|MediaWiki Docker Dev]] – Executar o MediaWiki usando Docker (pode ser usado em servidores Linux, Windows e macOS). This is the recommended method.

You can also try the experimental [[mwcli]] tool which provides basic orchestration functionality for MediaWiki docker containers.
=== Máquina Virtual com o Vagrant ===

* [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki-Vagrant|Instalação do Vagrant]] - Estes passos instalarão o servidor MediaWiki com todos os requisitos dentro de uma máquina virtual Linux (pode ser usada em servidores Linux, Windows ou Mac)

Vagrant is a powerful tool, but it is more complex and less robust than Docker, and significantly more resource-intensive.
It is mainly aimed at developers who need to set up complex, flexible environments, e.g. for testing the interaction of multiple extensions.

=== Instalação manual ===

* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|Requisitos de instalação]] — Verifique os requisitos de hardware, e instale um dos servidores LAMP, MAMP ou WAMP (Linux, Mac ou Windows, mais Apache, MySQL/MariaDB e PHP).
* {{ll|Download from Git|nsp=0}} — Descarregue o último código fonte do Git.
* {{ll|Manual:Installation guide|nsp=0}} — Prossiga com a instalação e a configuração inicial.
* Configure os [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:How to debug|vários modos de despiste de erros]]  no seu ambiente para apresentarem os alertas e erros cedo.

Não é necessário descarregar cópias em ficheiro da base de dados da Wikipédia para desenvolver funcionalidades do MediaWiki.
Na verdade, muitas vezes é mais fácil usar uma base de dados quase vazia, só com poucas páginas de testes especificamente criadas.
Contudo, se por alguma razão quiser ter uma cópia da Wikipédia, pode [[m:data dumps|obter uma cópia em ficheiro]].

{{anchor|Suggested reading|suggested-reading}}
{{anchor|Feedback, questions and support|support}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Communication tips and guidelines ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Wikimedia Open Tech Chat 2012-11-29-cut.ogg|thumbtime=12:18|thumb|Assista a como um programador corrige um defeito numa extensão do MediaWiki, incluindo a investigação, o ''commit'' no git, conseguir a revisão e integração no código, e o encerramento do ''ticket'' no Bugzilla (agora substituído pelo {{ll|Phabricator}}).]]
{{:New_Developers/Communication_tips}}

== Apêndice ==
[[File:DevCamp Bangalore 2012 IMG 0482 (199) qgil.JPG|thumb|400px|Colaboradores MediaWiki a trabalhar em Bangalore, Índia.]]

=== PHP ===
O MediaWiki está escrito em PHP, portanto tem de se familiarizar com o PHP para programar o núcleo central do MediaWiki.

;Aprenda PHP
:* [https://php.net/tutorial Guia prático de PHP] — Disponível em muitas línguas diferentes. Se não tem nenhum conhecimento de PHP mas sabe programar noutras linguagens de programação orientada para objetos, será fácil para si aprender PHP.
:* [[b:PHP Programming|PHP Programming]] at Wikibooks.
:* [[wikiversity:PHP|PHP]] at Wikiversity.

;Recursos PHP:
:* [https://php.net/manual O manual de PHP] — Disponível em muitas línguas diferentes.
:* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding conventions/PHP|Convenções de código PHP]] na comunidade MediaWiki.

;Coisas para saber:
:* O script &lt;code&gt;maintenance/eval.php&lt;/code&gt; no MediaWiki fornece um interpretador básico de PHP com objetos e classes MediaWiki carregados.
:* Adicionalmente, o ficheiro de comandos &lt;code&gt;maintenance/shell.php&lt;/code&gt; no MediaWiki substitui o &lt;code&gt;maintenance/eval.php&lt;/code&gt; baseado em PsySH; consulte {{ll|Manual:Shell.php}}


=== Base de dados ===

Muitas características requerem alguma manipulação da base de dados, portanto precisará frequentemente de estar familiarizado com MySQL ou MariaDB.

;Aprender MySQL/MariaDB
:* [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/tutorial.html Guia prático de MySQL] — Do Manual de referência do MySQL.
:* [[b:MySQL|MySQL]] at Wikibooks.

;Recursos MySQL/MariaDB.
:* [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/ Manuais de referência de MySQL.] — Disponível em muitas línguas diferentes.
:* [https://mariadb.com/kb/ MariaDB Base de Conhecimento (Knowledge Base).]
:* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding conventions/Database|Convenções para código de base de dados]] na comunidade MediaWiki.
:* {{ll|Manual:Database access|2=Acessando o Banco de Dados}}

;Coisas para saber:
:* Teste o seu código com MySQL/MariaDB.
:** O MediaWiki usa atualmente [[w:MySQL|MySQL]] e [[w:MariaDB|MariaDB]] como servidor principal da base de dados. Também suporta outros Gestores de Base de Dados (DBMSes), tal como [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PostgreSQL|PostgreSQL]] e [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]]. Contudo, a maioria dos programadores utilizam MySQL/MariaDB e não testam outras bases de dados, que em consequência têm falhas constantes. É portanto aconselhado a utilizar MySQL/MariaDB quando testar correções, a menos que esteja especificamente a tentar melhorar o suporte de outra base de dados. Neste último caso, certifique-se de que não estraga MySQL/MariaDB (ou escreve consultas horrivelmente ineficientes nesta base de dados), pois MySQL/MariaDB é o que todas as outras pessoas usam.

=== JavaScript e CSS ===
JavaScript e CSS tornaram-se omnipresentes no código do lado do cliente.
Não ''tem'' de estar familiarizado com JavaScript, jQuery e CSS para trabalhar no MediaWiki, mas precisará ser preciso, dependendo daquilo em que escolher trabalhar.

;Aprenda JavaScript e CSS
:* [[b:JavaScript|JavaScript]] and [[b:Cascading Style Sheets|CSS]] at Wikibooks.
:* [https://learn.jquery.com/ Iniciar-se em jQuery] — Um guia prático de jQuery.
:* [[Learning JavaScript]] — references and sources.

;Recursos de JavaScript e CSS
:* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding conventions/JavaScript|Convenções de código JavaScript]] na comunidade MediaWiki.
:* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding conventions/CSS|Convenções de código CSS]] na comunidade MediaWiki.

=== MediaWiki ===
O código do MediaWiki é extenso e algumas partes são feias; não se intimide.
Quando você começa pela primeira vez, aponte para escrever recursos ou corrigir erros que toquem apenas uma pequena região de código.

;MediaWiki básico e deve-lê:
:* '''{{ll|Manual:MediaWiki architecture|2=Arquitetura do MediaWiki}}''' — Uma visão geral de alto nível dos principais componentes do MediaWiki e como eles funcionam um com o outro.
:* '''{{ll|Security for developers|2=Segurança para desenvolvedores}}''' — Uma perspetiva de como e porquê escrever código seguro.

;Recursos MediaWiki:
:* {{ll|Manual:Code}} — Uma lista importante de arquivos e hiperligações para informações mais detalhadas.
:* {{ll|Manual:Hooks}} — Uma lista de ''hooks'' (ganchos). Se está a tentar determinar que parte do código faz determinada coisa, um bom sítio para começar é procurar os ''hooks'' relacionados com ela.
:* {{ll|Manual:Coding conventions}} — Uma perspetiva geral de convenções de código na comunidade MediaWiki.
&lt;!-- :* {{ll|How to become a MediaWiki hacker/Workshop|&quot;Learn how to hack MediaWiki&quot; workshop}} — Ways to hack MediaWiki, from user preferences to extensions and core.--&gt;
:* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/ Documentação do código (referência de classe)] — Documentação gerada automaticamente a partir do código e dos comentários do código.
:* {{ll|Manual:How to debug}} — Um guia para despistar defeitos do MediaWiki.
:* {{ll|Manual:Eval.php}} — Uma ferramenta para interagir ao vivo com objetos do MediaWiki.

=== Extensões MediaWiki ===

Se escolher trabalhar no código das extensões do MediaWiki, os seguintes links fornecem mais informações.

;Princípios básicos das extensões MediaWiki:
:* '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions|Desenvolver extensões]]''' — Como escrever uma extensão para o MediaWiki.
:* [[Special:MyLanguage/How to become a MediaWiki hacker/Extension Writing Tutorial|Guia prático de criação de extensões]]

;Recursos de extensões do MediaWiki:
:*[[Best practices for extensions|Melhores práticas para extensões]]
:* [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4zlGo-hrnt8 Uma introdução breve ao desenvolvimento de extensões MediaWiki] — Um vídeo de apresentação acerca de como criar extensões MediaWiki ([https://wikimania2011.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Wikimania_2011-_A_brief_introduction_to_MediaWiki_extension_development.pdf slides]).
:* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/view/File:Hacking_mediawiki.pdf Criar uma extensão do MediaWiki] — Cobre como desenvolver uma extensão para o MediaWiki, melhores práticas, e como integrar-se na comunidade MediaWiki. Desde Fevereiro de 2011.
:* [[Special:MyLanguage/Developer hub#Help for extension developers|Ajuda para programadores de extensões]] no Portal de Desenvolvimento

== Ver também ==
* [https://codesearch.wmcloud.org/search/ Pesquise código nos repositórios]
* {{ll|Developer hub}} – Quando você lê atentamente as informações contidas neste artigo, é hora de seguir as informações no hub do desenvolvedor.
* {{ll|Code of Conduct}}

&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki technical documentation{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:New contributors{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ocou0kanxukha95fj8pfdtyz0pt2i27</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>77548</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401743</id>
      <parentid>5401406</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:36:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Krinkle</username>
        <id>135822</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>/* importScript */</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="68625" xml:space="preserve">{{Languages}}{{ResourceLoader navigation}}
Over time, MediaWiki core JavaScript functions and HTML outputs have improved in functionality, introduced new methods, been deprecated, or changed in other ways. This document intends to highlight the most common problems that need to be fixed.

* For an overview of the modules that are available in MediaWiki core, see [[ResourceLoader/Core modules]].
* '''Problems with gadgets?''' Check if it's [[#Keep gadgets central|listed below]]. If so, ask an interface administrator to update it on your wiki.

{{TOC|limit=3}}

= [[MediaWiki 1.38]] =

== jquery.jStorage ==
The &lt;code&gt;jquery.jStorage&lt;/code&gt; module was deprecated in 2016 (MediaWiki 1.28). It has been removed in 2021 (MediaWiki 1.38). Use mw.storage from the &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.storage&lt;/code&gt; module instead ([[phab:T143034|T143034]]).

See also: [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.storage mw.storage Documentation].&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Old (deprecated)
$.jStorage.set( 'mygadget-example', simple ); // simple = 'Hello'
$.jStorage.set( 'mygadget-example', object ); // obj = { sub: 'Hello' }

simple = $.jStorage.get( 'mygadget-example' );
object = $.jStorage.get( 'mygadget-example' );

// New (replacement)
mw.storage.set( 'mygadget-example', simple );       // simple = 'Hello'
mw.storage.setObject( 'mygadget-example', object ); // object = { sub: 'Hello' }

simple = mw.storage.get( 'mygadget-example' );
object = mw.storage.getObject( 'mygadget-example' );


&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Package Gadgets ==
{{Rellink|See also [[phab:T198758|T198758]].}}
Gadgets could always have multiple files, but these were simply merged and executed as one script. MediaWiki 1.33 introduced the &quot;[[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Package_files|Package files]]&quot; feature, which allows for a more modular JavaScript design, with the &lt;code&gt;require()&lt;/code&gt; function and &lt;code&gt;module.exports&lt;/code&gt; pattern to refer to additional modules. Additionally, this allows you to include data from JSON files. This feature was limited to modules in MediaWiki core and extensions.

Since MediaWiki 1.38 this feature is also supported in ResourceLoaderWikiModule, and [[Extension:Gadgets#Options|the Gadgets extension]] was updated to make use of this through a new definition option called &quot;&lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.

Administrators (eg. [[m:Interface administrator|Interface administrator]] on WMF wikis) should take care when writing or reviewing JavaScript code that creates HTML based on text from JSON pages, to escape these to avoid security problems.

For example:
&lt;pre&gt;
* mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]|mygadget-main.js|mygadget-Foo.js|mygadget-data.json|mygadget.css
&lt;/pre&gt;

Where MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget-Foo.js exports:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function Foo( config ) {
    // ...
}

Foo.prototype.format = function () {
    // ...
};

module.exports = Foo;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

and MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget-data.json: 
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
    &quot;setting&quot;: [
        &quot;value1&quot;,
        &quot;value2&quot;
    ],
    &quot;flag&quot;: true
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

From &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget-main.js&lt;/code&gt; you can then use:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var Foo = require( './mygadget-Foo.js' ); // class Foo
var flag = require( './mygadget-data.json' ).flag; // true
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

= [[MediaWiki 1.37]] =

== jQuery Migrate 3 ==
[[jQuery]] was upgraded to version 3 in MediaWiki 1.29 (released in 2017). In jQuery 3.0, several deprecated features were removed by upstream. We temporarily added these back through the jQuery Migrate layer to allow for a gradual transition ([[phab:T280944|T280944]]).

In the developer console, you may find warnings like the following:

&lt;blockquote&gt;
JQMIGRATE: jQuery.fn.size() is deprecated and removed; use the .length property.

JQMIGRATE: Attribute selector with '#' must be quoted
&lt;/blockquote&gt;

You may also find warnings that only say that something &quot;is deprecated&quot; without &quot;and removed&quot;, such as:&lt;blockquote&gt;JQMIGRATE: jQuery.fn.bind() is deprecated&lt;/blockquote&gt;Warnings that only say &quot;deprecated&quot; are for features that '''will continue to work''' even after the jQuery 3 migration layer is removed.

To understand how to update your code, use the following manuals:

* [https://github.com/jquery/jquery-migrate/blob/3.3.2/warnings.md jQuery Migrate 3 warnings reference]
* [https://jquery.com/upgrade-guide/3.0/ jQuery 3.0 Upgrade Guide]
* [https://jquery.com/upgrade-guide/3.5/ jQuery 3.5 Upgrade Guide]
The following three issues may be difficult to find and have some extra tips:
* [https://jquery.com/upgrade-guide/3.5/#description-of-the-change HTML tags must be properly nested]: This means you have used an invalid shortcut like &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;div/&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;p/&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;. In older jQuery versions, this invalid HTML was automatically corrected to DIV, followed by P. In jQuery 3 the browser standard behaviour is followed, which means this becomes a P inside a DIV like &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;p&gt;..&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;. To preserve the old behaviour, explicitly open and close your HTML. Like &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;div&gt; &lt;/div&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
* [https://jquery.com/upgrade-guide/3.0/#breaking-change-cross-domain-script-requests-must-be-declared Cross-domain AJAX request with JSON-P]: If you may cross-domain requests with &lt;code&gt;$.ajax()&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;$.get()&lt;/code&gt; to APIs that returns executable JSON-P scripts (instead of plain JSON), then you must add the &lt;code&gt;{ dataType: &quot;script&quot; }&lt;/code&gt; option. In previous versions, jQuery would guess between secure JSON and insecure JSON-P scripts.
* [https://jquery.com/upgrade-guide/3.0/#breaking-change-load-unload-and-error-removed Calling .load() as event method]: It is no longer possible to call  &lt;code&gt;$img.load(function)&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;$img.on(&quot;load&quot;, function)&lt;/code&gt; instead.

=== $wgIncludejQueryMigrate ===
As site administrator running MediaWiki 1.35.3 or later, you can choose to turn off migrate layer today already by setting {{wg|IncludejQueryMigrate}} to false. Turning off the migration layer improves page load performance, and helps you to verify whether your extensions and gadgets are ready for the upgrade. For example, if you have old code still using methods that were removed in jQuery 3, this may fail as follows.

&lt;blockquote&gt;
Uncaught TypeError: $elem.size is not a function.
&lt;/blockquote&gt;

In MediaWiki 1.37, the migration layer will be off by default. A site administrator may temporarily turn it back on until problems like the above are resolved.

In MediaWiki 1.38, the migration layer will be permanently removed.

= [[MediaWiki 1.35]] =

== user.tokens module ==
The &lt;code&gt;user.tokens&lt;/code&gt; module has been merged into the &lt;code&gt;user.options&lt;/code&gt; module bundle. The old module name is now an alias and has been deprecated in MediaWiki 1.35. It will be removed in MediaWiki 1.36 sometime later in 2020. – [[phab:T235457|T235457]]

To remain compatible, update dependency lists or loader statements from &quot;&lt;code&gt;user.tokens&lt;/code&gt;&quot; to &quot;&lt;code&gt;user.options&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.

== mediawiki.notify ==
The &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.notify&lt;/code&gt; module has been merged into the MediaWiki base environment. This module was responsible for providing the &lt;code&gt;mw.notify()&lt;/code&gt; function, which in turn lazy-loads the larger &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.notification&lt;/code&gt; module. – [[phab:T233676|T233676]]

To remain compatible, simply remove &quot;&lt;code&gt;mediawiki.notify&lt;/code&gt;&quot; from any dependency lists or loader statements.

= [[MediaWiki 1.34]] =

== Module deprecations ==

=== jquery.ui.* ===
jQuery UI has been deprecated for years, but remains available due to slow switching to alternatives. As a part of [https://timotijhof.net/posts/2019/wikipedia-javascript-on-budget/ on-going efforts to reduce bandwidth cost], the 27 deprecated jQuery UI modules have been collapsed into a single, still-deprecated mega-module ([[gerrit:q/I9070ad9052319f5ca2bc67e0ffaf502db0f13ceb|Gerrit]], [[:phab:T219604|T219604]]).

To remain compatible, update dependency lists and loader statements from &quot;&lt;code&gt;jquery.ui.*&lt;/code&gt;&quot; to &quot;&lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.

=== accessKeyLabel ===
The &lt;code&gt;jquery.accessKeyLabel&lt;/code&gt; plugin has been available through &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; since 2014 (MediaWiki 1.24).

Depending on it directly is no longer supported as of MediaWiki 1.34. Update dependency lists and loader statements from &quot;jquery.accessKeyLabel&quot; to &quot;mediawiki.util&quot; to remain compatible.

=== mediawiki.RegExp ===
The &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.RegExp&lt;/code&gt; module has been available through &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; since 2015 (MediaWiki 1.25). – [[phab:T218339|T218339]]

Depending on it directly is no longer supported as of MediaWiki 1.34. Update dependency lists and loader statements from &quot;mediawiki.RegExp&quot; to &quot;mediawiki.util&quot; to remain compatible.

The &lt;code&gt;mw.RegExp.escape()&lt;/code&gt; function has also been deprecated (although kept as alias, shipping with &quot;mediawiki.util&quot;). Replace usage with &lt;code&gt;mw.util.escapeRegExp()&lt;/code&gt;.

=== jquery.tabIndex ===
The &lt;code&gt;jquery.tabIndex&lt;/code&gt; module existed to help compute a low or high tab index on focusable elements on a page. In most cases this code was redundant. Lines of code involving &lt;code&gt;firstTabIndex()&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;lastTabIndex()&lt;/code&gt; are often best removed entirely. The module is deprecated in MediaWiki 1.34.&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Simply remove
$thing.attr( 'tabindex', $( document ).lastTabIndex() + 1 );

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;If the effect of this code is still wanted, it can be achieved in a simpler way without this JavaScript plugin. For example, to set a low tabindex, use &lt;code&gt;tabindex=&quot;0&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Remove
$thing.attr( 'tabindex', $( document ).firstTabIndex() );
// Add
$thing.attr( 'tabindex', '0' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;Or, to set a high tabindex, use &lt;code&gt;tabindex=&quot;999&quot;&lt;/code&gt; instead, like so:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Remove
$thing.attr( 'tabindex', $( document ).lastTabIndex() + 1 );
// Add
$thing.attr( 'tabindex', '999' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;If you do need the exact behaviour of the original &lt;code&gt;lastTabIndex&lt;/code&gt; function, use the following:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Remove
$thing.attr( 'tabindex', $( document ).lastTabIndex() + 1 );
// Add
var lastIndex = Math.max.apply(null, $.map($('[tabindex]'), function (el) { return +el.tabIndex; }));
$thing.attr( 'tabindex', lastIndex + 1 );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== mw.user.tokens &lt;code&gt;editToken&lt;/code&gt; ==
The &lt;code&gt;editToken&lt;/code&gt; key of &lt;code&gt;mw.user.tokens&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated in 2016 (MediaWiki 1.26). It has been removed in 2019 (MediaWiki 1.34). – [[phab:T233442|T233442]]

The &lt;code&gt;csrfToken&lt;/code&gt; key should be used instead. For example, change &lt;code&gt;mw.user.tokens.get('editToken')&lt;/code&gt; to  &lt;code&gt;mw.user.tokens.get('csrfToken')&lt;/code&gt;.

'''Note''': The &lt;code&gt;mw.Api&lt;/code&gt; class has not changed. Code like &lt;code&gt;mw.Api.getToken('edit')&lt;/code&gt; will continue to work and should not be changed. 

= [[MediaWiki 1.32]] =

== Api modules ==
All submodules &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.api.*&lt;/code&gt; have been merged into the main module &lt;code&gt;[[ResourceLoader/Core modules#mediawiki.api|mediawiki.api]]&lt;/code&gt;, so you only have to require the main module, and requiring submodules emits deprecation warnings. These submodules were kept as deprecated aliases to &quot;mediawiki.api&quot;, and removed in MediaWiki 1.33.

== &lt;code&gt;wikiGetlink&lt;/code&gt; ==
Method &lt;code&gt;mw.util.wikiGetlink()&lt;/code&gt;, which was deprecated since MediaWiki 1.23, has been removed. Use &lt;code&gt;[[ResourceLoader/Core modules#mw.util.getUrl|mw.util.getUrl()]]&lt;/code&gt; instead.

== wgEnableAPI ==
The &lt;code&gt;wgEnableAPI&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wgEnableWriteAPI&lt;/code&gt; keys of mw.config are deprecated as of MediaWiki 1.32, and will be removed in MediaWiki 1.35 ([[gerrit:504076|change]]).

The value of these configuration keys is always &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;. Any check for them in JavaScript code is redundant and can be safely removed.

= [[MediaWiki 1.31]] =

== Internet Explorer 10 browser ==
With this version, we have stopped JavaScript support for IE10. See [[Compatibility#Browsers|Compatibility]] for details.

== jquery.placeholder ==
Deprecated in MediaWiki 1.29 ([[gerrit:341845|change]]), removed in MediaWiki 1.31.

The shim for the native placeholder attribute became obsolete as all [[Compatibility|supported browsers]] for JavaScript support this natively. Simply remove the call to &lt;code&gt;.placeholder()&lt;/code&gt;. 

= [[MediaWiki 1.30]] =

== &lt;code&gt;jquery.mwExtension&lt;/code&gt; ==
The functionality was originally provided by a module called &lt;code&gt;jquery.mwPrototypes&lt;/code&gt; in MediaWiki 1.17 ([[rev:76320|r76320]]). This was renamed to &lt;code&gt;jquery.mwExtension&lt;/code&gt; in MediaWiki 1.19 ([[rev:94227|r94227]]).

The module was deprecated in MediaWiki 1.26, and removed in MediaWiki 1.30.

* &lt;code&gt;$.trimLeft&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;$.trimRight&lt;/code&gt;: These have native JavaScript methods available now.
* &lt;code&gt;$.ucFirst&lt;/code&gt;: No replacement, rarely used. Simple enough to do in plain JavaScript as &lt;code&gt;str[0].toUpperCase + str.slice(1)&lt;/code&gt;.
* &lt;code&gt;$.escapeRE&lt;/code&gt;: Moved to [[ResourceLoader/Core modules#mediawiki.RegExp|mediawiki.RegExp]]; later [[#mediawiki.RegExp|moved to &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt;]].
* &lt;code&gt;$.isDomElement&lt;/code&gt;: No replacement, rarely used. Use duck-type checks like &lt;code&gt;!!obj.nodeType&lt;/code&gt; instead.
* &lt;code&gt;$.compareArray, $.compareObject, $.isEmpty&lt;/code&gt;: No replacement, rarely used.

= [[MediaWiki 1.29]] =

== Legacy removals ==
JavaScript functions and variables part of &lt;code&gt;wikibits.js&lt;/code&gt; that had been deprecated since MediaWiki 1.17 or 1.18 have been removed:

User-Agent variables: &lt;code&gt;is_gecko, is_chrome_mac, is_chrome, webkit_version, is_safari_win, is_safari, webkit_match, is_ff2, ff2_bugs, is_ff2_win, is_ff2_x11, opera95_bugs, opera7_bugs, opera6_bugs, is_opera_95, is_opera_preseven, is_opera, ie6_bugs, clientPC&lt;/code&gt;.

DOM manipulation: &lt;code&gt;changeText, killEvt, addHandler, hookEvent, addClickHandler, removeHandler, getElementsByClassName, getInnerText&lt;/code&gt;.

Utilities: &lt;code&gt;setupCheckboxShiftClick, addCheckboxClickHandlers, mwEditButtons, mwCustomEditButtons, injectSpinner, removeSpinner, escapeQuotes, escapeQuotesHTML, jsMsg, addPortletLink, appendCSS, tooltipAccessKeyPrefix, tooltipAccessKeyRegexp, updateTooltipAccessKeys&lt;/code&gt;.

=== How to migrate ===
Below is a table containing migration information for the wikibits functionality. Many of the replacements are part of the &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; module, which [[#Legacy default: mediawiki.util|is not loaded by default]]. Please declare your dependency on this module if you refer to &lt;code&gt;mw.util&lt;/code&gt;, as described in [[ResourceLoader/Developing with ResourceLoader#Client-side (dynamically)|the development guide]].

{| class=&quot;wikitable plainlinks&quot;
 ! Identifier
 ! Type
 ! Replaced by
 |-
 | {{anchor|clientPC}}clientPC || string ||
'''» &lt;code&gt;[[devmo:Web/API/NavigatorID/userAgent|navigator.userAgent]]&lt;/code&gt;'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_gecko}}is_gecko || boolean || rowspan=&quot;9&quot; |
'''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#jquery.client|jQuery.client]]'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_safari}}is_safari || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_safari_win}}is_safari_win || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_chrome}}is_chrome || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_chrome_mac}}is_chrome_mac || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_ff2}}is_ff2 || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_ff2_win}}is_ff2_win || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_ff2_x11}}is_ff2_x11 || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|webkit_match}}webkit_match || object
 |-
 | {{anchor|ff2_bugs}}ff2_bugs || boolean || rowspan=&quot;2&quot; |
''obsolete''
 |-
 | {{anchor|ie6_bugs}}ie6_bugs || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|doneOnloadHook}}doneOnloadHook || boolean || rowspan=&quot;4&quot; |
{{anchor|addOnloadHook}}
'''» [[ResourceLoader/Core_modules#mw.hook|mw.hook]]'''

'''» jQuery'''

Use
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$( function () {
	/* place code here to be executed after the page is loaded */
} );

// or:
function LoadMyApp() {
	/* place code here to be executed after the page is loaded */
}
$( LoadMyApp );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

 |-
 | {{anchor|onloadFuncts}}onloadFuncts || object&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|addOnloadHook}}addOnloadHook || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|runOnloadHook}}runOnloadHook || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|killEvt}}killEvt || function ||
'''» [http://api.jquery.com/category/events/event-object/ jQuery.Event]''':

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/**
 * @param e {jQuery.Event} Cross-browser compatible/normalized event object
 */
$( '#mw-fooBar' ).click( function( e ) {
	e.preventDefault();
	/* do something else */
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|loadedScripts}}loadedScripts || object || ''redundant''
 |-
 | {{anchor|importScript}}{{anchor|importScriptURI}}importScriptURI || function || rowspan=&quot;2&quot; | &lt;!-- --&gt;
'''»  [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#mw.loader|mw.loader]]'''
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Full script url
mw.loader.load( 'https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript' );

// Local script url
mw.loader.load( '/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-HotCat.js&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript' );

// Full stylesheet url
mw.loader.load( 'https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=User:Example/custom-foo.css&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/css', 'text/css' );

// Local stylesheet
mw.loader.load( '/w/index.php?title=User:Example/custom-foo.css&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/css', 'text/css' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|importStylesheet}}{{anchor|importStylesheetURI}}importStylesheetURI || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|appendCSS}}appendCSS || function || '''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#addCSS|mw.util.addCSS]]'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|addHandler}}addHandler || function || rowspan=&quot;4&quot; |
{{anchor|addHandler}}
'''» jQuery Events'''

Using &lt;code&gt;.[http://api.jquery.com/on/ on()]&lt;/code&gt; one can add event handlers.
Some of the more common events have their own shortcuts (such as &lt;code&gt;.[http://api.jquery.com/click/ click()]&lt;/code&gt;).
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Attach multiple events to an element and attach an anonymous function
$( '#fooBar' ).on( 'mouseenter mouseleave', function() {
	alert( '#fooBar is moused!' );
} );

// Attach multiple events with different handlers to a single element
$( '#fooBar' ).on( {
	click: function() {
		// do something on click
	},
	mouseenter: function() {
		// do something on mouseenter
	}
} );

// Attach a handler to the click events of an earlier defined DOM element
$( myElement ).click( myFunction );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

 |-
 | {{anchor|addClickHandler}}addClickHandler || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|removeHandler}}removeHandler || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|hookEvent}}hookEvent || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|mwEditButtons}}mwEditButtons || object || ''obsolete''
 |-
 | {{anchor|mwCustomEditButtons}}mwCustomEditButtons || object ||
'''» WikiEditor'''

The new WikiEditor (which also works fine in Monobook, see [http://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=edit&amp;useskin=monobook here]) has built-in function to customize the toolbar. For more info see [[Extension:WikiEditor/Toolbar customization]]. For examples to insert buttons using the native script see [[Extension:WikiEditor/Toolbar customization/Library]]. For a script to insert buttons using a simple syntax similar to the old way check out [[meta:User:Krinkle/Scripts/insertVectorButtons#Description]]
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.load( '//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Krinkle/insertVectorButtons.js'
 + '&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript' );

function kCustomMainInsertButton_config(){
// {{Welcome}} ~~~~
kCustomMainInsertButton(
	'welcome', // Id
	'//commons.wikimedia.org/w/thumb.php?f=Nuvola_apps_edu_languages.svg&amp;w=22', // File
	'Welcome', // tooltip
	'{\{Welcome}\}\~\~\~\~', // Open tag
	'', // Close tag
	'' // sampleText
);
// {{subst:Test2}} ~~~~
kCustomMainInsertButton(
	'test2', // Id
	'//commons.wikimedia.org/w/thumb.php?f=Nuvola_apps_important.svg&amp;w=22', // File
	'Test2', // tooltip
	'{\{subst:test2|', // Open tag
	'}\}\~\~\~\~', // Close tag
	'' // sample text
);
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{anchor|tooltipAccessKeys}}
 |-
 | {{anchor|tooltipAccessKeyPrefix}}tooltipAccessKeyPrefix || string || rowspan=3 | '''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#jquery.accessKeyLabel|jquery.accessKeyLabel]]'''
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// myElement.accessKey = 'x';
// myElement.title = 'Example [x]';
mw.loader.using('jquery.accessKeyLabel').then(function () {
    $(myElement).updateTooltipAccessKeys();
});
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|tooltipAccessKeyRegexp}}tooltipAccessKeyRegexp || object ||
 |-
 | {{anchor|updateTooltipAccessKeys}}updateTooltipAccessKeys || function ||
 |-
 | {{anchor|ta}}ta || object || [{{fullurl:Special:AllMessages|prefix=accesskey-}} MediaWiki:Accesskey-*] and [{{fullurl:Special:AllMessages|prefix=tooltip-}} MediaWiki:Tooltip-*].
 |-
 | {{anchor|akeytt}}akeytt || function || ''obsolete''
 |-
 | {{anchor|checkboxes}}checkboxes || object || rowspan=&quot;5&quot; |
'''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#jquery.checkboxShiftClick|jquery.checkboxShiftClick]]'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|lastCheckbox}}lastCheckbox || object&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|setupCheckboxShiftClick}}setupCheckboxShiftClick || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|addCheckboxClickHandlers}}addCheckboxClickHandlers || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|checkboxClickHandler}}checkboxClickHandler || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|showTocToggle}}showTocToggle || function || rowspan=&quot;2&quot; |
 |-
 | {{anchor|toggleToc}}toggleToc || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_image_path}}ts_image_path || string || rowspan=&quot;19&quot; |
'''» [[RL/DM#jquery.tablesorter|jquery.tablesorter]]'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_image_up}}ts_image_up || string
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_image_down}}ts_image_down || string
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_image_none}}ts_image_none || string
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_europeandate}}ts_europeandate || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_alternate_row_colors}}ts_alternate_row_colors || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_number_transform_table}}ts_number_transform_table || object
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_number_regex}}ts_number_regex || object
 |-
 | {{anchor|sortables_init}}sortables_init || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_makeSortable}}ts_makeSortable || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_getInnerText}}ts_getInnerText || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_resortTable}}ts_resortTable || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_initTransformTable}}ts_initTransformTable || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_toLowerCase}}ts_toLowerCase || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_dateToSortKey}}ts_dateToSortKey || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_parseFloat}}ts_parseFloat || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_currencyToSortKey}}ts_currencyToSortKey || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_sort_generic}}ts_sort_generic || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_alternate}}ts_alternate || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|changeText}}changeText || function || rowspan=&quot;2&quot; |
'''» jQuery'''

Using &lt;code&gt;[https://api.jquery.com/text/ .text()]&lt;/code&gt; one can get (or set) the text content of an element:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Set text of an earlier defined element
$( myElement ).text( 'New text!' );

// Set text for multiple elements at once
$( '.mw-userlink' ).text( 'Mr. Foobar' );

// Get the text of an element
$( myElement ).text();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|getInnerText}}getInnerText || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|escapeQuotes}}escapeQuotes || function ||
 |-
 | {{anchor|escapeQuotesHTML}}escapeQuotesHTML || function||
'''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#mw.html|mw.html]]'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|addPortletLink}}addPortletLink||function ||
'''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#addPortletLink|mw.util.addPortletLink]]'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|jsMsg}}jsMsg || function ||
'''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#jsMessage|mw.util.jsMessage]]'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|injectSpinner}}injectSpinner || function || rowspan=&quot;2&quot; |
'''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#jquery.spinner|jquery.spinner]]''' ([https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/jQuery.plugin.spinner Documentation])
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
jQuery( .. ).injectSpinner('some-id');

jQuery.removeSpinner('some-id');
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|removeSpinner}}removeSpinner || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|getElementsByClassName}}getElementsByClassName || function ||
'''» jQuery'''

Use the CSS Selector in jQuery to select elements by classname. Here examples for the three most common usecases of &lt;code&gt;getElementsByClassName()&lt;/code&gt;:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Get everything with a classname
$( '.myclass' );

// Get all of element X (ie. table) with a classname
$( 'table.wikitable' );

// Get all of something within another element
$( myDomElement ).find( '.myclass' );
$( myDomElement ).find( '&gt; .myclass' ); // only direct children

// Get all class-elements that are direct children of an element
$( '#someElement .myclass' );
$( '#someElement &gt; .myclass' ); // only direct children
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|-
| {{anchor|redirectToFragment}}redirectToFragment || function ||
|}

== Gadget type ==
{{Rellink|See also [[phab:T42284|T42284]].}}

=== Background ===
Since early 2011, gadgets with styles (both &quot;only styles&quot; and &quot;styles and scripts&quot;) had their styles loaded twice. [[phab:T42284|T42284]] and https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/308096 address this bug.

=== What's new ===
This bug was addressed by adding support in the Gadgets extension for the ResourceLoader &quot;type&quot; feature. This allows gadget developers to configure how the module should be loaded
* '''type=styles''': Load module styles via &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;link rel=&quot;stylesheet&quot;&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;, and completely omits loading any JavaScript files. (Loads styles early, applies styles before skin and page are ready, also works when JavaScript is disabled.)
* '''type=general''': Load module scripts and/or styles via &lt;code&gt;mw.loader.load()&lt;/code&gt;. (Applies styles after the skin and page are ready, right before JS execution, has better caching.)
Gadgets with only styles, internally get &lt;code&gt;type=styles&lt;/code&gt; by default. Gadgets with only scripts default to &lt;code&gt;type=general&lt;/code&gt;.

Gadgets with both scripts ''and'' styles currently default to loading both ways (just before the bug was fixed). When this happens, a warning is shown in the console that asks the developer to provide the desired type. Once we've given gadget developers enough time to migrate, we can make &lt;code&gt;type=general&lt;/code&gt; the default for gadgets that have both scripts and styles.

To load styles through the &lt;code&gt;type=styles&lt;/code&gt; system, while also loading JavaScript files, two separate gadget definitions need to be specified.

=== How to migrate ===
{{Note|1=Gadget &quot;mygadget&quot; styles loaded twice. Migrate to &lt;code&gt;type=general&lt;/code&gt;. See https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T42284.|2=reminder}}
If you see this warning, that means your gadget contains both scripts and styles. Here are two ways to fix the warning:
# If the styles in your gadget are there to provide styling for things created by the gadget, add &quot;&lt;code&gt;type=general&lt;/code&gt;&quot; to your gadget definition (&quot;MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition&quot;).
# Or – If the styles in your gadget are there to provide styling for things that are part of the skin or on the page, then these styles should not be together with the scripts in the same gadget. Convert the gadget to two separate gadgets. One gadget that is styles-only, and the other with the scripts. If the scripts gadget also has its own styles, then also set &quot;&lt;code&gt;type=general&lt;/code&gt;&quot; on the original gadget (per point 1). If you want to keep presenting the modules as one gadget on the Preferences page, use [[#Gadget peers]].
As you can see, in most cases the solution is &quot;type=general.&quot; And in the future, this will become the default and we will not load styles twice. Right now, loading twice remains the default for compatibility with older gadgets covered by point 2 above. Changing these mixed gadgets to type=general now would cause some styles to load too late and cause a &quot;flash of unstyled content&quot;.

== Gadget peers ==
{{Rellink|See also [[phab:T42284|T42284]].}}For a long time, gadget authors have been interested in being able to provide a visual enhancement for all pages and also accompanying some scripting logic to apply related changes to interactive interfaces created by other modules. This requires the gadget to have both scripts and styles, but most of the styles are not required by the scripts – rather, the styles should apply directly to the page without waiting for JavaScript. So far this required either creating two gadgets (and requiring users to enable both), or creating a single gadget with the downside of the styles applying slightly after the page loads.

To accommodate the use case of a single gadget providing both page styles (which don't depend on JavaScript) and JavaScript code with its own styles, a new setting was introduced: &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;. This is similar to &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, except that where dependencies load before the main module (not before the page itself), peers will allow one to reference a separate gadget module that will be loaded regardless of whether JavaScript is enabled.

For example:
 * example [ResourceLoader|dependencies=mediawiki.util|peers=example-pagestyles] | example.js | example.css
 * example-pagestyles [hidden] | example-pagestyles.css
This will register a gadget named &quot;Example&quot; in the preferences which, if enabled, will load example-pagestyles before the page renders. And, once JavaScript is available, the example module will also be loaded with its own dependencies, styles and scripts.

== Internet Explorer 9 and pre-ES5 browsers ==
With this version, we have stopped JavaScript support for IE9 and other browsers that do not support [[:en:ECMAScript#5th Edition|ES5]]. See [[Compatibility#Browsers|Compatibility]] for details.

= [[MediaWiki 1.27]] =
== Legacy default: mediawiki.util ==
The {{wg|PreloadJavaScriptMwUtil}} option was removed. This option allowed third-party MediaWiki administrators to re-enable the unconditional preload of &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; by default for all users (for backwards compatibility). It was disabled by default since MediaWiki 1.26, and has been disabled on Wikimedia wikis since 2014.  Extensions, skins, gadgets and scripts that use the &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; module must express a dependency on it.

== bits.wikimedia.org ==
The internal Wikimedia domain &quot;bits.wikimedia.org&quot; was deprecated sometime mid-2015. The following common paths should be migrated to avoid breakage once the domain is decommissioned ([[phab:T107430|T107430]]).
* &lt;code&gt;bits.wikimedia.org/:domain/load.php&lt;/code&gt; → &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://:domain/w/load.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; . Moved back to local domains, alongside &lt;code&gt;/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt; and others.
* &lt;code&gt;bits.wikimedia.org/static-current/*&lt;/code&gt; → &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://:domain/static/current/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;: Moved to local domain, sharing a hostname-agonistic Varnish cache.
** &lt;code&gt;bits.wikimedia.org/skins/*&lt;/code&gt; → &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://:domain/static/current/skins&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;bits.wikimedia.org/static-1.xx-wmf.X/*&lt;/code&gt; → &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://:domain/w/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;: Specific versions can now be accessed through the regular script path. Wikimedia's multiversion entry point automatically serves the file from to the wikis' current MediaWiki version. ([[phab:T99096|T99096]])
** &lt;code&gt;bits.wikimedia.org/static-1.xx/skins/*&lt;/code&gt; &lt;code&gt;'''→'''&lt;/code&gt; &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://:domain/w/skins/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
** &lt;code&gt;bits.wikimedia.org/static-1.xx/extensions/*&lt;/code&gt; &lt;code&gt;'''→'''&lt;/code&gt; &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://:domain/w/extensions/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
** &lt;code&gt;bits.wikimedia.org/static-1.xx/resources/*&lt;/code&gt; &lt;code&gt;'''→'''&lt;/code&gt; &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://:domain/w/resources/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;

== Internet Explorer 8 ==
Following the deactivation of JavaScript in Internet Explorer 6 and 7 in MediaWiki 1.24, JavaScript has been deactivated in Internet Explorer 8. See [[Compatibility#Browsers|Compatibility]] for details.

= [[MediaWiki 1.26]] =
== Legacy gadgets ==
Gadgets are now required to use ResourceLoader. For many Gadgets, migrating to ResourceLoader will be as easy as adding &lt;code&gt;[ResourceLoader]&lt;/code&gt; to its definition on MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition. If after adding that, the gadget is not working properly, consult the rest of this page to look for functionality that may have been removed since the gadget was last maintained. If you run into any issues or find features that don't work without a clear way of making it work, please reach out to MediaWiki developers and fellow gadget authors on the [[{{TALKPAGENAME}}|talk page]], via [[IRC]], or on the [[Mailing lists|wikitech-l]] mailing list.

=== Global variables are not global ===
When ResourceLoader loads a gadget script, it is not executed in global context. This means that local variables you define in the script are actually local, and ''not'' assumed to be also global. They are local to the function your code is wrapped in. It's best to modularize your code to avoid using globals, see [[Manual:Coding conventions/JavaScript#Globals|&quot;Globals&quot; in MediaWiki's JavaScript coding conventions]]. However, if you need to export a variable to the global scope, you can explicitly assign them as &lt;code&gt;window&lt;/code&gt; properties. For example:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// This is a local variable
var foo;
// This is a local function
function bar() {
 ..
}

// This is a global variable (accessible from other scripts, and from legacy event handlers, e.g. onclick=&quot;javascript:Quux();&quot;
window.Quux = function( width, height ) {
	...
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Code within your gadget can access foo and bar. Code outside the gadget (or code evaluated as separate programs, such as legacy onclick handlers), can only access Quux..

{{As of|2015|August}}, [[ResourceLoader/Architecture#Debug mode|ResourceLoader debug mode]] still executes scripts in global scope ([[phab:T64605]]), so your code may seem to work fine in debug mode but be broken in regular mode.

== Font mw-geshi ==
The font-size of {{tag|syntaxhighlight|open}} was often too small by default due to a font-family CSS bug. This was fixed in MediaWiki 1.26 (see ([[phab:T28204]]).

The &lt;code&gt;mw-geshi&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;source-css&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;source-javascript&lt;/code&gt; and related classes no longer exist. Related code such as the following can be safely removed:

&lt;div class=&quot;errorbox&quot;&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Fix &lt;syntaxhighlight&gt; text size. [[phab:T28204]] */
div.mw-geshi div,
div.mw-geshi div pre,
span.mw-geshi,
pre.source-css,
pre.source-javascript,
pre.source-lua {
    font-family: monospace, Courier !important;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

== Inline scripts ==

To inject JavaScript inline, use &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader::makeInlineScript()&lt;/code&gt; to wrap the JavaScript code in an anonymous function that can access MediaWiki-related objects properly, and &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addScript()&lt;/code&gt; to add the results to the page source for execution.

For example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$outputPage = RequestContext::getMain()-&gt;getOutput();

$js = 'alert(&quot;hello world&quot;);';
$wrappedJS = ResourceLoader::makeInlineScript($js);
$outputPage-&gt;addScript($wrappedScript);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

= [[MediaWiki 1.24]] =
== Legacy removals ==
The &lt;code&gt;jquery.delayedBind&lt;/code&gt; JavaScript module, deprecated in MediaWiki 1.23, has been removed. See [[phab:rMW8f2ebcbf6769]].

{{anchor|IE}}

== Internet Explorer ==
Browser support for Internet Explorer 6 and 7 changed from Grade A to Grade C. This means JavaScript is no longer executed in these browser versions. See [[Compatibility#Browsers|Compatibility]] for details.

= [[MediaWiki 1.20]] =

== mw.util.jsMessage ==
This method has been deprecated in favour of [[ResourceLoader/Core modules#mw.notify|'''mw.notify''']].

The jsMessage message was designed to be a drop-in replacement fully compatible with the legacy wikibits &lt;code&gt;jsMsg&lt;/code&gt; function (deprecated since 1.17, removed in 1.29). The 2012 notification system on the other hand was designed with developer usability and security in mind.

For most cases, the new method is just as easy to use as the old one, and requires only a the same single parameter that represents the message. For example, with plain text:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Deprecated (dependencies: mediawiki.util)
var msgText = 'Hello world';
mw.util.jsMessage(msgText);

// New, as of 2012 (dependencies: mediawiki.notify)
var msgText = 'Hello world';
mw.notify(msgText);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;And another example, with a DOM element, or a jQuery object:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Deprecated (dependencies: mediawiki.util)
var $myWidget = ExampleWidget.create( {
    having: '2-buttons',
    toggle: '#sidebar'
});
mw.util.jsMessage($myWidget);

// New, as of 2012 (dependencies: mediawiki.notify)
var $myWidget = ExampleWidget.create( {
    having: '2-buttons',
    toggle: '#sidebar'
});
mw.notify($myWidget);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;If you're currently using raw HTML with &lt;code&gt;mw.util.jsMessage()&lt;/code&gt;, the simplest way to migrate is to do what jsMessage used to do internally for you, which is to parse the HTML and place the node(s) in a jQuery object, as follows:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot; highlight=&quot;7&quot;&gt;
// Deprecated (dependencies: mediawiki.util)
var msgHtml = '&lt;form&gt;&lt;button&gt;Click me&lt;/button&gt;&lt;/form&gt;';
mw.util.jsMessage(msgHtml);

// New, as of 2012 (dependencies: mediawiki.notify)
var msgHtml = '&lt;form&gt;&lt;button&gt;Click me&lt;/button&gt;&lt;/form&gt;';
var $msg = $($.parseHTML(msgHtml));
mw.notify($msg);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== New diff styles ==
This version introduces a new diff view, greatly improved in clarity especially for whitespace and other small changes and colour-blind users. If your wiki has custom CSS for the diffs, they may be in conflict with the new style (as happened on [//pt.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki%3ACommon.css&amp;diff=29858952&amp;oldid=28922245&amp;uselang=en ptwiki] and [//sr.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?diff=5578051&amp;oldid=5533214&amp;uselang=en srwiki]). You are recommended to remove the old code (or if still wanted by some users, update it to work with the new layout and create a gadget for it so that users can opt-in to it still).

= [[MediaWiki 1.19]] =
== wikitable style updates ==
As of [[MediaWiki 1.19]] a few bugs have been fixed with the &lt;code&gt;wikitable&lt;/code&gt; class (see [[phab:T32485]] and [[phab:T35434]] for more info). If your wiki maintains a legacy synonym of this class (e.g. &quot;&lt;code&gt;prettytable&lt;/code&gt;&quot;) you need to update its CSS to match the current style in core.

The current style as of 1.19 can be found [//github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/1.19.24/skins/common/shared.css here]. Copy those rules to your wiki and replace &quot;wikitable&quot; with the synonym ([//nl.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Common.css&amp;diff=29814645&amp;oldid=29702942 example for nl.wikipedia]).

If your wiki doesn't keep something like this, then no update is necessary and everything should take care of itself.

== File page checkered background ==
[[File:Checker-16x16.png|thumb|Checkered background]]
The checkered background often applied to transparent file namespace pages is now part of the software. Local rules like the following should be removed (because they are redundant, and actually cause an additional unnecessary HTTP request for the image)

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Put a checker background at the image description page.
   Only visible if the image has transparent background.
*/
#file img {
	background: url(&quot;//upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/commons/5/5d/Checker-16x16.png&quot;) repeat;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Trackbacks ==
Trackbacks were removed from MediaWiki core, so any styling targeting &lt;code&gt;#mw_trackbacks&lt;/code&gt; can be removed.

= [[MediaWiki 1.18]] =
{{anchor|HTTPS}}

== Protocol-relative urls ==
:''This change only applies to Wikimedia Foundation wikis''.

As of [[MediaWiki 1.18]] there is native support for protocol-relative wiki installations. This means that a wiki could be accessible from both http://example.org/ and https://example.org./ To make it possible to a share a common cache for as much as possible, we make use of a technique called protocol-relative urls. Although browsers have supports this for ages, script writers generally aren't very familiar with it until fairly recently. Briefly explained, this means that &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;//meta.wikimedia.org&quot; /&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; when on &quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://example.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot; will be automatically expanded by the browser to https://meta.wikimedia.org./ This is much like (for example) &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;foobar.jpg&quot; /&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; or &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;/w/foobar.jpg&quot; /&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;, which are are automatically expanded to &quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://mediawiki.org/w/foobar.jpg&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot;.

Depending on how the scripts were written this may require some changes to be made to your scripts. If you use the following method to detect whether the script is executed on a certain wiki, this change will break your script:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( wgServer === 'http://en.wikipedia.org' ) {
	// Doesn't work anymore!
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
because wgServer is now &quot;&lt;code&gt;//en.wikipedia.org&lt;/code&gt;&quot;. For a few years there has been another config variable, called &quot;&lt;code&gt;wgDBname&lt;/code&gt;&quot;. You should use that instead to differentiate wikis, like:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgDBname' ) === 'enwiki' ) {
	// English Wikipedia!
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
Alternatively, you can use &lt;code&gt;wgServerName&lt;/code&gt; which is without the protocol or port:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgServerName' ) === 'en.wikipedia.org' ) {
	// English Wikipedia!
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== &quot;Enabled by default&quot; (Gadgets extension) ==
As of the version of the Gadgets extension at the MW 1.18 branchpoint, there is a new feature that allows a gadget to be opt-out instead of opt-in based. By setting &quot;&lt;code&gt;[default]&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (or adding &quot;&lt;code&gt;|default&lt;/code&gt;&quot; to an existing section) the gadget will be enabled by default for everybody, unless a user has specifically opted out by unticking the checkbox on [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets]].

Note that this also loads it for '''all anonymous users'''. Gadgets that are only for logged-in users should be additionally restricted by, for example, requiring certain user rights.

See also [[Extension:Gadgets#Options]].

== mw.util.wikiScript ==
The actual paths have not changed, but getting the path to the API and index.php has become a lot easier. This also makes the code more portable as it has no hardcoded wiki-specific paths.

This is how it used to go in many gadgets.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var foo = 'bar';
var apiUrl = '//www.mediawiki.org/w/api.php?foo=' + encodeURIComponent( foo ) + '&amp;baz=quux';

$.ajax( { url: apiUrl, ... } );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Instead use something like one of the following:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Behold, mw.util.wikiScript!
var foo = 'bar';
var apiUrl = mw.util.wikiScript( 'api' ) + '?foo=' + encodeURIComponent( foo ) + '&amp;baz=quux';

$.ajax( {
	url: apiUrl,
	...
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

You may also want to use &lt;code&gt;$.param&lt;/code&gt; to automatically escape and create things properly in the query string:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// $.param is also awesome. No need for encodeURIComponent that way :)
var foo = 'bar';
var apiUrl = mw.util.wikiScript( 'api' ) + '?' + $.param( {
	foo: foo,
	baz: 'quux'
} );

$.ajax( {
	url: apiUrl,
	...
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

You can even use the &lt;code&gt;data&lt;/code&gt; option of [http://api.jquery.com/jQuery.ajax/ &lt;code&gt;$.ajax&lt;/code&gt;], that abstracts away the need to deal with the query string entirely:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// No longer needed to inject the '?' or '&amp;' in the url
$.ajax( {
	url: mw.util.wikiScript( 'api' ),
	data: {
		foo: 'bar',
		baz: 'quux'
	}, ...
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

= [[MediaWiki 1.17]] =

== jQuery ==
: ''See also [[jQuery]]''
As of [[MediaWiki 1.17|1.17]] the jQuery library is loaded by default on all MediaWiki pages. Each MediaWiki release will keep it up to date with the latest version of jQuery. If you used to load jQuery from within your script, (e.g. from ajax.googleapis.com), make sure you remove that. If you load jQuery more than once on a page, it overwrites the earlier version. Other scripts break because they may not work with an older version of jQuery.

Also, by overwriting the jQuery object, any plugins that were bound to that object are also lost.

Global identifier &quot;&lt;code&gt;$j&lt;/code&gt;&quot; has been deprecated. Use &lt;code&gt;jQuery&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;$&lt;/code&gt; instead.

{{anchor|mainpage-nstab}}

== Tabs (vector) ==
In 1.17 the HTML construction for the navigation tabs has changed from &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot; inline&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a&gt;&lt;span /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; to &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot; inline&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span&gt;&lt;a /&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;. The most common situation in which this causes problems is where scripts assume the presence of the span element when, for example, customizing the tab for &quot;Main Page&quot;. Before 1.17 this usually meant that wikis had a different implementation for Monobook and one for Vector (or only one for each and the other was distorted).

Please use {{Blue|MediaWiki:Mainpage-nstab}} or refer to [[Snippets/Main Page tab]] for a script that will work in both Vector and Monobook for 1.17.

== Adding portlet links ==
The legacy function &lt;code&gt;addPortletLink&lt;/code&gt; has been rewritten as &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#addPortletLink|mw.util.addPortletLink]]&lt;/code&gt;. The syntax and argument order is fully backwards compatible. The differences
* Support for all core skins now
* Support for simple id-selector as 'nextNode' (see [[RL/DM#addPortletLink|documentation]] for details).

Some wikis may have re-defined / overwritten the &lt;code&gt;addPortlinkLink&lt;/code&gt; function to support a few extra skins. This is no longer needed. The function definition should be removed and calls adjusted to &lt;code&gt;mw.util.addPortletLink&lt;/code&gt;.

The legacy version of &lt;code&gt;addPortlinkLink&lt;/code&gt; has been preserved as-is in case some edge cases would behave differently (for that reason the &lt;code&gt;addPortlinkLink&lt;/code&gt; does not redirect to mw.util.addPortlinkLink)

== Toolbar ==
The legacy array &lt;code&gt;mwCustomEditButtons&lt;/code&gt; has been refactored into the &lt;code&gt;mw.toolbar&lt;/code&gt; library. The global array still exists in wikibits to avoid fatal errors but is no longer used due to race conditions. Code may run too late when the toolbar already exists. Using &lt;code&gt;mw.toolbar.addButton&lt;/code&gt; will work always, even if the toolbar has already been created.

See [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.toolbar mw.toolbar Documentation].

Note that mw.toolbar, just like the old mwCustomEditButtons array, are associated with the classic toolbar. The current default wikitext editor is WikiEditor, which has its own API. See [[Extension:WikiEditor/Toolbar customization]] for more information.

== Sajax ==
The legacy functions such as &lt;code&gt;sajax_init_object&lt;/code&gt; have been deprecated. Instead, &lt;code&gt;mw.Api&lt;/code&gt; from the &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.api&lt;/code&gt; module, or &lt;code&gt;jQuery.ajax&lt;/code&gt;.
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.Api mediawiki.api documentation]
* [http://api.jquery.com/jQuery.ajax/ jQuery.ajax documentation]
Migration guide:
{| class=&quot;wikitable plainlinks&quot;
!Identifier
!Type
!Replaced by
|-
|{{anchor|sajax_debug_mode}}sajax_debug_mode
|string
| rowspan=&quot;5&quot; |'''» [http://api.jquery.com/jQuery.ajax/ jQuery.ajax]'''

Use &lt;code class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[http://api.jquery.com/category/ajax/ AJAX]&lt;/code&gt; functions to access pages and the API directly.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$( '#mybox' ).load( '/wiki/Template:ResourceLoader_navigation #bodyContent' );

$.get(
	mw.config.get( 'wgScript' ), {
		title: 'ResourceLoader',
		action: 'raw'
	},
	function( data ) {
		/* Call was successful do something with &quot;data&quot; */
	}
);

$.getJSON(
	mw.util.wikiScript( 'api' ), {
		format: 'json',
		action: 'query',
		titles: 'Main Page',
		prop: 'info'
	},
	function( obj ) {
		/* API call was successful do something with obj */
	}
);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
For more information see documentation for [http://api.jquery.com/load/ .load()], [http://api.jquery.com/jQuery.get/ .get()], [http://api.jquery.com/jQuery.getJSON/ .getJSON()] and the [http://api.jquery.com/category/ajax/ other jQuery Ajax functions].

See also [[w:Wikipedia:WikiProject User scripts/Guide/Ajax#jQuery examples|this guide]] from [[w:Wikipedia:WikiProject User scripts|WikiProject User scripts]], for an example of how to edit a wikipage using AJAX.
|-
|{{anchor|sajax_request_type}}sajax_request_type
|string
|-
|{{anchor|sajax_debug}}sajax_debug
|function
|-
|{{anchor|sajax_init_object}}sajax_init_object
|function
|-
|{{anchor|wfSupportsAjax}}wfSupportsAjax
|function
|-
|{{anchor|sajax_do_call}}sajax_do_call
|function
|
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$.get(
	mw.util.wikiScript(), {
		action: 'ajax',
		rs: 'SomeExtensionFunction',
		rsargs: [arg1, arg2, arg3] // becomes &amp;rsargs[]=arg1&amp;rsargs[]=arg2...
	}
);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
''Note: These calls using action=ajax should be rewritten to use an API module''
|}

== Client testing ==
Checking which browser, platform, layout engine etc. has should now be done with '''[[RL/DM#jquery.client|jQuery.client]]'''.
* &lt;code&gt;is_safari&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;is_chrome&lt;/code&gt; etc. are deprecated
* No need to &lt;code&gt;navigator.userAgent.indexOf(&quot;MSIE 6&quot;)==-1&lt;/code&gt; etc.

== Sysop script ==
New in [[MediaWiki 1.17]] is a user groups module that can automatically load scripts and styles from the MediaWiki namespace for a particular user group. For example, if the wiki has MediaWiki:Group-sysop.js, this script is automatically loaded for all users in that group.

This should obsolete customisations wikis may have with regards to loading MediaWiki:Sysop.js with importScript inside Common.js.

== mw.loader ==
If you need certain scripts like [http://jqueryui.com/ jQuery UI]'s dialog or datepicker, instead of doing something like:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
importStylesheetURI( mw.config.get( 'wgExtensionAssetsPath' ) + '/Example/css/jquery-ui-1.7.2.css' );

$.getScript( mw.config.get( 'wgExtensionAssetsPath' ) + '/Example/js/jui.combined.min.js', function () {
	MyTool.init();
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Instead use this:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.using( ['jquery.ui.dialog', 'jquery.ui.datepicker'], MyTool.init );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Or if you need to delay initialization until document.ready:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.using( ['jquery.ui.dialog', 'jquery.ui.datepicker'], function () {
	$( document ).ready( MyTool.init );
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== Dependencies ====
When a script depends on another module, such as &lt;code&gt;oojs&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt;, you will need to declare this as a &quot;dependency&quot;. This is because modules are loaded on-demand and asynchronously (in consecutive order: all at the same time), so a script needs to make sure a module has been loaded before it can use its methods. On-site modules, like gadgets, have a registry to declare these dependencies. For user scripts, one has to wrap code with &lt;code&gt;{{ll|ResourceLoader/Core_modules#mw.loader|mw.loader.using()}}&lt;/code&gt;.

While this has been required since 2011, many scripts have continued to work without declaring their dependencies. Scripts may have worked before by accident as long as at least one user script (that used the same methods) did declare their dependencies and happened to load earlier.

With MediaWiki 1.19, page view performance has been optimised to use fewer modules by default. This makes it increasingly more important to declare the dependencies. Otherwise, your script may fail because any of the 1000+ modules you might refer to in your code would not be loaded yet. Loading everything all the time would be much too slow.

The only two base modules that are always present are &lt;code&gt;mediawiki&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery&lt;/code&gt;.

==== In practice ====
Use &lt;code&gt;mw.loader.using()&lt;/code&gt; to declare any modules that you need before executing the contents of &quot;function&quot;. You can pass multiple modules as an array of strings.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.using( ['mediawiki.util', 'oojs', 'jquery.cookie'], function () {

	/* some other script that uses $.cookie */

	/* some other script that uses mw.util and OO.EventEmitter() */

} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{anchor|wg* Variables}}

== Global wg variables ==
As of MediaWiki 1.17, the global config variables are deprecated. Rationale to clear the global namespace, working towards a reality where most of the core libraries will be object oriented as part of the &lt;code&gt;mw&lt;/code&gt; object. Configuration is managed through an instance of &lt;code&gt;[[ResourceLoader/Default modules#mw.Map|mw.Map]]&lt;/code&gt; in &lt;code&gt;mw.config&lt;/code&gt;. It is also supporting the behaviour of more script executing in their own local/private scope as opposed to the global scope.

Legacy globals will be kept for backwards compatibility, but people should start migrating so that they may removed in a future version of MediaWiki ({{phabricator|T35837}}).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// One variable
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgCanonicalSpecialPageName' ) === 'Search' ) {
	// Example for Special:Search
}

if ( mw.config.get( 'wgGlobalGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'global-rollbacker' ) !== -1 ) {
	// Example for users in the global group &quot;global-rollbacker&quot;.
}

// Multiple variables
var conf = mw.config.get( [
	'wgScript',
	'wgAction'
] );
if ( conf.wgAction === 'edit' ) {
	console.log( 'Example when editing a page', config.wgScript );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
More info: [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#mw.config]]

== Ready, onload, hook ==
Check [[#addOnloadHook|JavaScript deprecation overview]] for &quot;&lt;code&gt;addOnloadHook&lt;/code&gt;&quot;. Use &lt;code&gt;$(&amp;#160;''function''&amp;#160;);&lt;/code&gt; instead, or &lt;code&gt;$( fn );&lt;/code&gt; for short.

== New CSS declarations in core ==
=== Headings overflow hidden ===
&lt;code&gt;overflow:hidden&lt;/code&gt; for any of h1, h2, h3, h4, h5 and/or h6 can be safely removed from stylesheets as this is now part of the core.

=== Italic redirects ===
Links to redirects appear italicized on [[Special:AllPages]], [[Special:PrefixIndex]], [[Special:Watchlist/edit]] and in category listings

&lt;pre&gt;
.allpagesredirect,
.redirect-in-category,
.watchlistredir {
 font-style: italic;
}
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== wpSummary ===
Per [[phab:T22276]], &lt;code&gt;input#wpSummary&lt;/code&gt;'s &lt;code&gt;width&lt;/code&gt; is now set in Vector as well (instead of just Monobook).

== UsabilityInitiative no more ==
As of 1.17 the functionality developed by the UsabilityInitiative has been extracted to stand-alone extensions. Buttons like &quot;#pt-optin-try&quot; no longer exist. You can enable/disable these functions like other extensions via [[Special:Preferences]].

Scripts and styles doing things like &quot;HideUsabilityOptIn&quot;:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#pt-optin-try {
	display: none !important;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
should therefore be deleted entirely as the button no longer exists.

== Preformatted JS/CSS pages ==
It's no longer useful to wrap these pages in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt; /* &lt;pre&gt; */ &lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; or  &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt; // &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; etc. In newer versions of MediaWiki, these pages are rendered as code automatically (including syntax highlighting when available). See also {{phabricator|T6801}}. &lt;!-- [[phab:T34858]] --&gt;

== Table sorter ==
The old table sorter in &lt;code&gt;wikibits.js&lt;/code&gt; was removed in favour of &lt;code&gt;jquery.tablesorter&lt;/code&gt;.

Variables such as &lt;code&gt;ts_alternate_row_colors&lt;/code&gt;, and functions like &lt;code&gt;ts_parseFloat&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;ts_dateToSortKey&lt;/code&gt; no longer exist.

= [[MediaWiki 1.16]] and before =

== importScript ==

As of 2008, the &lt;code&gt;importScript&lt;/code&gt; function commonly defined by communities locally became a built-in part part of MediaWiki (&quot;wikibits.js&quot;). Wikis that previously defined this function themselves, are able to remove that. The new built-in function is automatically be used. The same also applies to &lt;code&gt;importStylesheet&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;importStylesheetURI&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;importScriptURI&lt;/code&gt;.

Note that &lt;code&gt;importStylesheetURI&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;importScriptURI&lt;/code&gt; were subsequently deprecated in 2011 with MediaWiki 1.17, and disabled on mobile sites like https://en.m.wikipedia.org/. Use [[ResourceLoader/Core modules#mw.loader|mw.loader.load]] instead.

== addPortletLink ==
As of 2008, the function &lt;code&gt;addPortletLink&lt;/code&gt; is part of MediaWiki. Many wikis and gadgets have created functions like &lt;code&gt;addLink&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;addLiLink&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;addlilink&lt;/code&gt; etc. these should be removed as they most likely don't support different skins (ie. only Monobook, not Vector or older skins). Be sure to check the syntax as there is no way of knowing the creator of those local functions used the same parameter order.
:'''Note''': The global function was [[RL/JD#wikibits.js|deprecated]] in 2012 and moved to the mediawiki.util module as &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#addPortletLink|mw.util.addPortletLink]]()&lt;/code&gt;

== appendCSS ==
As of 2008, the function &lt;code&gt;appendCSS&lt;/code&gt; is part of MediaWiki. Wikis that have defined this function themselves may remove that. It will automatically use the new function.
:'''Note''': The global function was [[RL/JD#importScript|deprecated]] in 2012 and moved to the mediawiki.util module as &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#addCSS|mw.util.addCSS]]()&lt;/code&gt;

== HTML bugs in core ==
=== html lang ===

This bugfix is obsolete as MediaWiki does this correctly by default. ([https://zh.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki%3ACommon.js&amp;type=revision&amp;diff=77150&amp;oldid=77149 example])

&lt;div class=&quot;errorbox&quot;&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var htmlE = document.documentElement;
htmlE.setAttribute('lang', mw.config.get('wgUserLanguage'));
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

== CSS declarations new in core ==
{{anchor|Wikitable}}

=== wikitable ===
The &lt;code&gt;.wikitable&lt;/code&gt; CSS class is part of MediaWiki. Wikis that previously defined this class in their &lt;code&gt;Common.css&lt;/code&gt; should remove it. Do check if the wiki has any customisations that should be retained (e.g. different background-color, or font-size).

=== plainlinks ===
The &lt;code&gt;.plainlinks&lt;/code&gt; CSS class is part of MediaWiki. Wikis that previously defined this class in their &lt;code&gt;Common.css&lt;/code&gt; should remove it.

Many wikis defined this functionality under a different name: &lt;code&gt;.plainlinksneverexpand&lt;/code&gt;. Once any usage is replaced with &quot;plainlinks&quot;, it may also be removed. (Search with &lt;code&gt;insource:plainlinksneverexpand&lt;/code&gt;.)

=== mw-plusminus ===
The CSS classes &lt;code&gt;.mw-plusminus-pos&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;.mw-plusminus-null&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;.mw-plusminus-neg&lt;/code&gt; are now implemented by MediaWiki.

=== External URLs ===
Icons for protocols like [{{fullurl:RL}} HTTP], [irc://irc.example.org/ IRC], etc. and file types like [{{fullurl:.pdf}} PDF] are now supported by MediaWiki.

{{anchor|ta}}

== Tooltip and accesskeys ==
Scripts like &lt;code&gt;ta['pt-userpage'] = new Array('.','My user page');&lt;/code&gt; are ignored. It was deprecated in 2009.
The function akeytt() no longer exists. Tooltips and accesskeys are now supported from core. The most common values that wikis used with ta[] are the same that have now been integrated into the core (ie. &quot;.&quot; for &quot;my user page&quot;). They can still be modified, if really needed, by sysops in MediaWiki-messages (no need for JavaScript workarounds anymore).

As of MediaWiki 1.19 the global dummy placeholder &lt;code&gt;ta = new Object();&lt;/code&gt; was removed from &lt;code&gt;wikibits.js&lt;/code&gt;. Code trying to add members to it will likely emit an exception.

{{anchor|Good practices}}

= Best practices =
The below are additional advices not related to a particular MediaWiki release, but rather general best practices.

{{anchor|document.write()}}

== Avoid document.write() ==
Do not use this method, as it can cause a page to become visually blanked. Instead, use [http://api.jquery.com/ jQuery] to modify the document (adding elements, changing things etc.). To load external resources, use the import/loader functions instead.

'''Example:''' replace
&lt;div class=&quot;errorbox&quot;&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
document.write('&lt;script type=&quot;text/javascript&quot; src=&quot;'
             + 'https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-HotCat.js'
             + '&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript&quot;&gt;&lt;/script&gt;');
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
with
&lt;div class=&quot;successbox&quot;&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.load('https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-HotCat.js&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript');
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

== Event binding ==
Binding input events to callback functions can be hard to do in cross-browser compatible way for all browsers that MediaWiki supports.

It is recommended that you use [http://api.jquery.com/category/events/ jQuery for event binding]. See the [[RL/JD#addHandler|JavaScript deprecation overview on &quot;addHandler&quot;]] for examples.

== Encoding and escaping ==
When working with regular expressions, user input and/or urls must always be encoded or escaped.

* Regexes: &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#mediawiki.util|mw.util.escapeRegExp]]&lt;/code&gt; (provided by &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; module).
* HTML: &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#mw.html|mw.html.escape]]&lt;/code&gt; (provided by default).
* URL:  &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#wikiUrlencode|mw.util.wikiUrlencode]]&lt;/code&gt; for page titles, &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#rawurlencode|mw.util.rawurlencode]]&lt;/code&gt; for other values (provided by &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; module).

== Prototyping ==
Do not extend native JavaScript constructors with non-standard methods (e.g. &lt;code&gt;String.prototype.foobar&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Regex.myMethod&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Array.prototype.inArray&lt;/code&gt; etc.).

Such non-standard methods should be defined in your own namespace instead, for example &lt;code&gt;MyThing.foobar&lt;/code&gt;, or using module.exports/require.

=== Polyfills ===
Before 2015, it was common for user scripts and gadgets to define fallback method for standard features of newer JavaScript engines.  This is no longer needed in most cases, because the '''[[ResourceLoader/Developing with ResourceLoader#Base environment|Base environment]]''' already ensures ES5 or later. This means ES5 methods such as &lt;code&gt;String#trim&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Array#forEach&lt;/code&gt; can be used directly.

Before MediaWiki 1.32, the [https://github.com/es-shims/es5-shim#shims es5-shim] module was bundled with MediaWiki to automatically define polyfills if needed. It could be used like so: 
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// This using() command will immediately execute as &quot;then()&quot; in modern browsers.
// In older browsers, it loads es5-shim.js first, and then executes your &quot;then()&quot;.
mw.loader.using( 'es5-shim').then( function () {
	console.log( '    bar    '.trim() ); // &quot;bar&quot;
	[ 'a', 'b' ].forEach( function ( val ) {
		/* .. */
	} );
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Getting URL parameter values ==
Functions like getURLParamValue, getParamVal, getParamValue, etc. are very common across wikis. Some are better than others (i.e. what if a parameter appears twice? (it should return the last one), does it ignore anything after the #tag?). As of 1.17 &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#getParamValue|mw.util.getParamValue]]&lt;/code&gt; is available everywhere and takes these factors into account.
Perform a full-text all-namespace search for these function names. If they are widely used perhaps make a note about it in the local village pump. Any site-wide scripts should be updated to use the mw.util function. If there are any serious problems with the local implementation (like not escaping the value for regex), it may be wise to redirect the function:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function getURLParamValue( p, url ) {
	return mw.util.getParamValue( p, url );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Avoid use of !important ==
CSS stands for Cascading Style Sheets. Cascading means what comes later overwrites what came earlier. In most cases there is no need to use &lt;code&gt;!important&lt;/code&gt;. See the following example:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
.my-element { color: blue; }
.my-element { color: green; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
Text inside &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;strong class=&quot;my-element&quot;&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; will now be &lt;strong style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;green&lt;/strong&gt;.

== Keep gadgets central ==
Use Meta.wikimedia.org or MediaWiki.org to store Gadgets' code, then import it into various local mediawiki.

'''Interface administrators:''' To update a gadget on your wiki:

* Check {{blue|MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition}} on your wiki and find the gadget in question.
* The part after the pipe ({{cnw|{{!}}}}) is the scriptname (eg. &quot;{{cnw|UTCLiveClock.js}}&quot;).
* Go to {{blue|MediaWiki:Gadget-&amp;lt;scriptname&gt;}} (eg. [[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js]])
* Remove everything and replace with the code in they grey area below the scriptname in the list. For an example on how this is done, check out [{{fullurl:simple:MediaWiki:Gadget-LiveClock.js|action=edit}} LiveClock on Simple Wikipedia].

Below is a list of gadgets that are :
* centrally stored
* compatible with 1.17
* work in Monobook and Vector
* can be loaded into any mediawiki, from WMF or external.

=== Gadgets ===
* '''UTCLiveClock''' {{ImportGadget|UTCLiveClock}}
* '''contribsrange''' {{ImportGadget|contribsrange}}
* '''modrollback''' {{ImportGadget|modrollback}}
* '''QPreview''' {{ImportGadget|QPreview|commons.wikimedia}}
* '''ShortDiff''' {{ImportGadget|ShortDiff|meta.wikimedia}}
* '''lastdiff''' Check [[Snippets/Last revision action]]
* '''HotCat'''
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/**
 * This imports the latest version of HotCat from Commons.
 * HotCat is a gadget to make changes to categories much easier.
 * Full documentation can be found at https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/Help:Gadget-HotCat
 */
mw.loader.load('https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-HotCat.js&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript');
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* '''WikiMiniAtlas'''
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/**
 * WikiMiniAtlas is a popup click and drag world map.
 * See [[meta:WikiMiniAtlas]] for more information.
 * Maintainers: [[w:User:Dschwen]]
 */
mw.loader.load('https://meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Wikiminiatlas.js&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript');
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* '''Navigation Popups''' (MediaWiki:Gadget-popups.js and MediaWiki:Gadget-popups.css respectively)
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.load('https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-popups.js&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript');
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
@import url('https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-navpop.css&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/css');
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== jQuery optimization ===
* [[Optimization for jQuery]]
* [http://paulirish.com/perf/ jQuery for Performance &amp; Common mistakes]
* http://www.smashingmagazine.com/2008/09/16/jquery-examples-and-best-practices/

== Use API instead of index.php ==
XML retrieved by invoking GET and POST methods on index.php is incompatible with HTML 5, which is the default as of 1.16 (and WMF sites since [[phab:T29478|17th of September, 2012]]). You should update code to use [[API:Main page|api.php]], JSON format and jQuery.ajax immediately. Use the ResourceLoader modules that do this for you to simplify interactng with the API, including [[ResourceLoader/Modules#mediawiki.api|mediawiki.api]].

A temporary fix for problems with DOM parsing of XML retrieved via AJAX: For example the method &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;getElementById(&quot;foobar&quot;)&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; on a XML object from Mozilla's DOMParser stopped to work as before. Replacing the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;getElementById&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;$('#foobar', client.responseText).get(0)&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; might work without many other changes to your code. Updating your script to the above mentioned methods is strongly recommended, however.

== Conventions ==
* [[Manual:Coding conventions/JavaScript]] – keep if statements with brackets, use proper indention (block B in block A is indented more, visualize the tree), etc.
* [[Manual:Coding conventions/CSS]] – combine selectors, remove stuff now in core, etc.

== See also ==
* [[w:de:Wikipedia:Technik/Skin/JS/Obsolet]]
{{Shortcut|RL/MGU}}</text>
      <sha1>qywi1fy0x2i6q7jpjq0gtit2i8onndh</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402969</id>
      <parentid>5401743</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:45:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Tacsipacsi</username>
        <id>561046</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* importScript */ copy edit</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="68622" xml:space="preserve">{{Languages}}{{ResourceLoader navigation}}
Over time, MediaWiki core JavaScript functions and HTML outputs have improved in functionality, introduced new methods, been deprecated, or changed in other ways. This document intends to highlight the most common problems that need to be fixed.

* For an overview of the modules that are available in MediaWiki core, see [[ResourceLoader/Core modules]].
* '''Problems with gadgets?''' Check if it's [[#Keep gadgets central|listed below]]. If so, ask an interface administrator to update it on your wiki.

{{TOC|limit=3}}

= [[MediaWiki 1.38]] =

== jquery.jStorage ==
The &lt;code&gt;jquery.jStorage&lt;/code&gt; module was deprecated in 2016 (MediaWiki 1.28). It has been removed in 2021 (MediaWiki 1.38). Use mw.storage from the &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.storage&lt;/code&gt; module instead ([[phab:T143034|T143034]]).

See also: [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.storage mw.storage Documentation].&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Old (deprecated)
$.jStorage.set( 'mygadget-example', simple ); // simple = 'Hello'
$.jStorage.set( 'mygadget-example', object ); // obj = { sub: 'Hello' }

simple = $.jStorage.get( 'mygadget-example' );
object = $.jStorage.get( 'mygadget-example' );

// New (replacement)
mw.storage.set( 'mygadget-example', simple );       // simple = 'Hello'
mw.storage.setObject( 'mygadget-example', object ); // object = { sub: 'Hello' }

simple = mw.storage.get( 'mygadget-example' );
object = mw.storage.getObject( 'mygadget-example' );


&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Package Gadgets ==
{{Rellink|See also [[phab:T198758|T198758]].}}
Gadgets could always have multiple files, but these were simply merged and executed as one script. MediaWiki 1.33 introduced the &quot;[[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Package_files|Package files]]&quot; feature, which allows for a more modular JavaScript design, with the &lt;code&gt;require()&lt;/code&gt; function and &lt;code&gt;module.exports&lt;/code&gt; pattern to refer to additional modules. Additionally, this allows you to include data from JSON files. This feature was limited to modules in MediaWiki core and extensions.

Since MediaWiki 1.38 this feature is also supported in ResourceLoaderWikiModule, and [[Extension:Gadgets#Options|the Gadgets extension]] was updated to make use of this through a new definition option called &quot;&lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.

Administrators (eg. [[m:Interface administrator|Interface administrator]] on WMF wikis) should take care when writing or reviewing JavaScript code that creates HTML based on text from JSON pages, to escape these to avoid security problems.

For example:
&lt;pre&gt;
* mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]|mygadget-main.js|mygadget-Foo.js|mygadget-data.json|mygadget.css
&lt;/pre&gt;

Where MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget-Foo.js exports:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function Foo( config ) {
    // ...
}

Foo.prototype.format = function () {
    // ...
};

module.exports = Foo;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

and MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget-data.json: 
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
    &quot;setting&quot;: [
        &quot;value1&quot;,
        &quot;value2&quot;
    ],
    &quot;flag&quot;: true
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

From &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget-main.js&lt;/code&gt; you can then use:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var Foo = require( './mygadget-Foo.js' ); // class Foo
var flag = require( './mygadget-data.json' ).flag; // true
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

= [[MediaWiki 1.37]] =

== jQuery Migrate 3 ==
[[jQuery]] was upgraded to version 3 in MediaWiki 1.29 (released in 2017). In jQuery 3.0, several deprecated features were removed by upstream. We temporarily added these back through the jQuery Migrate layer to allow for a gradual transition ([[phab:T280944|T280944]]).

In the developer console, you may find warnings like the following:

&lt;blockquote&gt;
JQMIGRATE: jQuery.fn.size() is deprecated and removed; use the .length property.

JQMIGRATE: Attribute selector with '#' must be quoted
&lt;/blockquote&gt;

You may also find warnings that only say that something &quot;is deprecated&quot; without &quot;and removed&quot;, such as:&lt;blockquote&gt;JQMIGRATE: jQuery.fn.bind() is deprecated&lt;/blockquote&gt;Warnings that only say &quot;deprecated&quot; are for features that '''will continue to work''' even after the jQuery 3 migration layer is removed.

To understand how to update your code, use the following manuals:

* [https://github.com/jquery/jquery-migrate/blob/3.3.2/warnings.md jQuery Migrate 3 warnings reference]
* [https://jquery.com/upgrade-guide/3.0/ jQuery 3.0 Upgrade Guide]
* [https://jquery.com/upgrade-guide/3.5/ jQuery 3.5 Upgrade Guide]
The following three issues may be difficult to find and have some extra tips:
* [https://jquery.com/upgrade-guide/3.5/#description-of-the-change HTML tags must be properly nested]: This means you have used an invalid shortcut like &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;div/&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;p/&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;. In older jQuery versions, this invalid HTML was automatically corrected to DIV, followed by P. In jQuery 3 the browser standard behaviour is followed, which means this becomes a P inside a DIV like &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;p&gt;..&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;. To preserve the old behaviour, explicitly open and close your HTML. Like &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;div&gt; &lt;/div&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
* [https://jquery.com/upgrade-guide/3.0/#breaking-change-cross-domain-script-requests-must-be-declared Cross-domain AJAX request with JSON-P]: If you may cross-domain requests with &lt;code&gt;$.ajax()&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;$.get()&lt;/code&gt; to APIs that returns executable JSON-P scripts (instead of plain JSON), then you must add the &lt;code&gt;{ dataType: &quot;script&quot; }&lt;/code&gt; option. In previous versions, jQuery would guess between secure JSON and insecure JSON-P scripts.
* [https://jquery.com/upgrade-guide/3.0/#breaking-change-load-unload-and-error-removed Calling .load() as event method]: It is no longer possible to call  &lt;code&gt;$img.load(function)&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;$img.on(&quot;load&quot;, function)&lt;/code&gt; instead.

=== $wgIncludejQueryMigrate ===
As site administrator running MediaWiki 1.35.3 or later, you can choose to turn off migrate layer today already by setting {{wg|IncludejQueryMigrate}} to false. Turning off the migration layer improves page load performance, and helps you to verify whether your extensions and gadgets are ready for the upgrade. For example, if you have old code still using methods that were removed in jQuery 3, this may fail as follows.

&lt;blockquote&gt;
Uncaught TypeError: $elem.size is not a function.
&lt;/blockquote&gt;

In MediaWiki 1.37, the migration layer will be off by default. A site administrator may temporarily turn it back on until problems like the above are resolved.

In MediaWiki 1.38, the migration layer will be permanently removed.

= [[MediaWiki 1.35]] =

== user.tokens module ==
The &lt;code&gt;user.tokens&lt;/code&gt; module has been merged into the &lt;code&gt;user.options&lt;/code&gt; module bundle. The old module name is now an alias and has been deprecated in MediaWiki 1.35. It will be removed in MediaWiki 1.36 sometime later in 2020. – [[phab:T235457|T235457]]

To remain compatible, update dependency lists or loader statements from &quot;&lt;code&gt;user.tokens&lt;/code&gt;&quot; to &quot;&lt;code&gt;user.options&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.

== mediawiki.notify ==
The &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.notify&lt;/code&gt; module has been merged into the MediaWiki base environment. This module was responsible for providing the &lt;code&gt;mw.notify()&lt;/code&gt; function, which in turn lazy-loads the larger &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.notification&lt;/code&gt; module. – [[phab:T233676|T233676]]

To remain compatible, simply remove &quot;&lt;code&gt;mediawiki.notify&lt;/code&gt;&quot; from any dependency lists or loader statements.

= [[MediaWiki 1.34]] =

== Module deprecations ==

=== jquery.ui.* ===
jQuery UI has been deprecated for years, but remains available due to slow switching to alternatives. As a part of [https://timotijhof.net/posts/2019/wikipedia-javascript-on-budget/ on-going efforts to reduce bandwidth cost], the 27 deprecated jQuery UI modules have been collapsed into a single, still-deprecated mega-module ([[gerrit:q/I9070ad9052319f5ca2bc67e0ffaf502db0f13ceb|Gerrit]], [[:phab:T219604|T219604]]).

To remain compatible, update dependency lists and loader statements from &quot;&lt;code&gt;jquery.ui.*&lt;/code&gt;&quot; to &quot;&lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.

=== accessKeyLabel ===
The &lt;code&gt;jquery.accessKeyLabel&lt;/code&gt; plugin has been available through &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; since 2014 (MediaWiki 1.24).

Depending on it directly is no longer supported as of MediaWiki 1.34. Update dependency lists and loader statements from &quot;jquery.accessKeyLabel&quot; to &quot;mediawiki.util&quot; to remain compatible.

=== mediawiki.RegExp ===
The &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.RegExp&lt;/code&gt; module has been available through &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; since 2015 (MediaWiki 1.25). – [[phab:T218339|T218339]]

Depending on it directly is no longer supported as of MediaWiki 1.34. Update dependency lists and loader statements from &quot;mediawiki.RegExp&quot; to &quot;mediawiki.util&quot; to remain compatible.

The &lt;code&gt;mw.RegExp.escape()&lt;/code&gt; function has also been deprecated (although kept as alias, shipping with &quot;mediawiki.util&quot;). Replace usage with &lt;code&gt;mw.util.escapeRegExp()&lt;/code&gt;.

=== jquery.tabIndex ===
The &lt;code&gt;jquery.tabIndex&lt;/code&gt; module existed to help compute a low or high tab index on focusable elements on a page. In most cases this code was redundant. Lines of code involving &lt;code&gt;firstTabIndex()&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;lastTabIndex()&lt;/code&gt; are often best removed entirely. The module is deprecated in MediaWiki 1.34.&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Simply remove
$thing.attr( 'tabindex', $( document ).lastTabIndex() + 1 );

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;If the effect of this code is still wanted, it can be achieved in a simpler way without this JavaScript plugin. For example, to set a low tabindex, use &lt;code&gt;tabindex=&quot;0&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Remove
$thing.attr( 'tabindex', $( document ).firstTabIndex() );
// Add
$thing.attr( 'tabindex', '0' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;Or, to set a high tabindex, use &lt;code&gt;tabindex=&quot;999&quot;&lt;/code&gt; instead, like so:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Remove
$thing.attr( 'tabindex', $( document ).lastTabIndex() + 1 );
// Add
$thing.attr( 'tabindex', '999' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;If you do need the exact behaviour of the original &lt;code&gt;lastTabIndex&lt;/code&gt; function, use the following:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Remove
$thing.attr( 'tabindex', $( document ).lastTabIndex() + 1 );
// Add
var lastIndex = Math.max.apply(null, $.map($('[tabindex]'), function (el) { return +el.tabIndex; }));
$thing.attr( 'tabindex', lastIndex + 1 );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== mw.user.tokens &lt;code&gt;editToken&lt;/code&gt; ==
The &lt;code&gt;editToken&lt;/code&gt; key of &lt;code&gt;mw.user.tokens&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated in 2016 (MediaWiki 1.26). It has been removed in 2019 (MediaWiki 1.34). – [[phab:T233442|T233442]]

The &lt;code&gt;csrfToken&lt;/code&gt; key should be used instead. For example, change &lt;code&gt;mw.user.tokens.get('editToken')&lt;/code&gt; to  &lt;code&gt;mw.user.tokens.get('csrfToken')&lt;/code&gt;.

'''Note''': The &lt;code&gt;mw.Api&lt;/code&gt; class has not changed. Code like &lt;code&gt;mw.Api.getToken('edit')&lt;/code&gt; will continue to work and should not be changed. 

= [[MediaWiki 1.32]] =

== Api modules ==
All submodules &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.api.*&lt;/code&gt; have been merged into the main module &lt;code&gt;[[ResourceLoader/Core modules#mediawiki.api|mediawiki.api]]&lt;/code&gt;, so you only have to require the main module, and requiring submodules emits deprecation warnings. These submodules were kept as deprecated aliases to &quot;mediawiki.api&quot;, and removed in MediaWiki 1.33.

== &lt;code&gt;wikiGetlink&lt;/code&gt; ==
Method &lt;code&gt;mw.util.wikiGetlink()&lt;/code&gt;, which was deprecated since MediaWiki 1.23, has been removed. Use &lt;code&gt;[[ResourceLoader/Core modules#mw.util.getUrl|mw.util.getUrl()]]&lt;/code&gt; instead.

== wgEnableAPI ==
The &lt;code&gt;wgEnableAPI&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wgEnableWriteAPI&lt;/code&gt; keys of mw.config are deprecated as of MediaWiki 1.32, and will be removed in MediaWiki 1.35 ([[gerrit:504076|change]]).

The value of these configuration keys is always &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;. Any check for them in JavaScript code is redundant and can be safely removed.

= [[MediaWiki 1.31]] =

== Internet Explorer 10 browser ==
With this version, we have stopped JavaScript support for IE10. See [[Compatibility#Browsers|Compatibility]] for details.

== jquery.placeholder ==
Deprecated in MediaWiki 1.29 ([[gerrit:341845|change]]), removed in MediaWiki 1.31.

The shim for the native placeholder attribute became obsolete as all [[Compatibility|supported browsers]] for JavaScript support this natively. Simply remove the call to &lt;code&gt;.placeholder()&lt;/code&gt;. 

= [[MediaWiki 1.30]] =

== &lt;code&gt;jquery.mwExtension&lt;/code&gt; ==
The functionality was originally provided by a module called &lt;code&gt;jquery.mwPrototypes&lt;/code&gt; in MediaWiki 1.17 ([[rev:76320|r76320]]). This was renamed to &lt;code&gt;jquery.mwExtension&lt;/code&gt; in MediaWiki 1.19 ([[rev:94227|r94227]]).

The module was deprecated in MediaWiki 1.26, and removed in MediaWiki 1.30.

* &lt;code&gt;$.trimLeft&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;$.trimRight&lt;/code&gt;: These have native JavaScript methods available now.
* &lt;code&gt;$.ucFirst&lt;/code&gt;: No replacement, rarely used. Simple enough to do in plain JavaScript as &lt;code&gt;str[0].toUpperCase + str.slice(1)&lt;/code&gt;.
* &lt;code&gt;$.escapeRE&lt;/code&gt;: Moved to [[ResourceLoader/Core modules#mediawiki.RegExp|mediawiki.RegExp]]; later [[#mediawiki.RegExp|moved to &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt;]].
* &lt;code&gt;$.isDomElement&lt;/code&gt;: No replacement, rarely used. Use duck-type checks like &lt;code&gt;!!obj.nodeType&lt;/code&gt; instead.
* &lt;code&gt;$.compareArray, $.compareObject, $.isEmpty&lt;/code&gt;: No replacement, rarely used.

= [[MediaWiki 1.29]] =

== Legacy removals ==
JavaScript functions and variables part of &lt;code&gt;wikibits.js&lt;/code&gt; that had been deprecated since MediaWiki 1.17 or 1.18 have been removed:

User-Agent variables: &lt;code&gt;is_gecko, is_chrome_mac, is_chrome, webkit_version, is_safari_win, is_safari, webkit_match, is_ff2, ff2_bugs, is_ff2_win, is_ff2_x11, opera95_bugs, opera7_bugs, opera6_bugs, is_opera_95, is_opera_preseven, is_opera, ie6_bugs, clientPC&lt;/code&gt;.

DOM manipulation: &lt;code&gt;changeText, killEvt, addHandler, hookEvent, addClickHandler, removeHandler, getElementsByClassName, getInnerText&lt;/code&gt;.

Utilities: &lt;code&gt;setupCheckboxShiftClick, addCheckboxClickHandlers, mwEditButtons, mwCustomEditButtons, injectSpinner, removeSpinner, escapeQuotes, escapeQuotesHTML, jsMsg, addPortletLink, appendCSS, tooltipAccessKeyPrefix, tooltipAccessKeyRegexp, updateTooltipAccessKeys&lt;/code&gt;.

=== How to migrate ===
Below is a table containing migration information for the wikibits functionality. Many of the replacements are part of the &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; module, which [[#Legacy default: mediawiki.util|is not loaded by default]]. Please declare your dependency on this module if you refer to &lt;code&gt;mw.util&lt;/code&gt;, as described in [[ResourceLoader/Developing with ResourceLoader#Client-side (dynamically)|the development guide]].

{| class=&quot;wikitable plainlinks&quot;
 ! Identifier
 ! Type
 ! Replaced by
 |-
 | {{anchor|clientPC}}clientPC || string ||
'''» &lt;code&gt;[[devmo:Web/API/NavigatorID/userAgent|navigator.userAgent]]&lt;/code&gt;'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_gecko}}is_gecko || boolean || rowspan=&quot;9&quot; |
'''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#jquery.client|jQuery.client]]'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_safari}}is_safari || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_safari_win}}is_safari_win || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_chrome}}is_chrome || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_chrome_mac}}is_chrome_mac || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_ff2}}is_ff2 || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_ff2_win}}is_ff2_win || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|is_ff2_x11}}is_ff2_x11 || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|webkit_match}}webkit_match || object
 |-
 | {{anchor|ff2_bugs}}ff2_bugs || boolean || rowspan=&quot;2&quot; |
''obsolete''
 |-
 | {{anchor|ie6_bugs}}ie6_bugs || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|doneOnloadHook}}doneOnloadHook || boolean || rowspan=&quot;4&quot; |
{{anchor|addOnloadHook}}
'''» [[ResourceLoader/Core_modules#mw.hook|mw.hook]]'''

'''» jQuery'''

Use
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$( function () {
	/* place code here to be executed after the page is loaded */
} );

// or:
function LoadMyApp() {
	/* place code here to be executed after the page is loaded */
}
$( LoadMyApp );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

 |-
 | {{anchor|onloadFuncts}}onloadFuncts || object&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|addOnloadHook}}addOnloadHook || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|runOnloadHook}}runOnloadHook || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|killEvt}}killEvt || function ||
'''» [http://api.jquery.com/category/events/event-object/ jQuery.Event]''':

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/**
 * @param e {jQuery.Event} Cross-browser compatible/normalized event object
 */
$( '#mw-fooBar' ).click( function( e ) {
	e.preventDefault();
	/* do something else */
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|loadedScripts}}loadedScripts || object || ''redundant''
 |-
 | {{anchor|importScript}}{{anchor|importScriptURI}}importScriptURI || function || rowspan=&quot;2&quot; | &lt;!-- --&gt;
'''»  [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#mw.loader|mw.loader]]'''
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Full script url
mw.loader.load( 'https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript' );

// Local script url
mw.loader.load( '/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-HotCat.js&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript' );

// Full stylesheet url
mw.loader.load( 'https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=User:Example/custom-foo.css&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/css', 'text/css' );

// Local stylesheet
mw.loader.load( '/w/index.php?title=User:Example/custom-foo.css&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/css', 'text/css' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|importStylesheet}}{{anchor|importStylesheetURI}}importStylesheetURI || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|appendCSS}}appendCSS || function || '''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#addCSS|mw.util.addCSS]]'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|addHandler}}addHandler || function || rowspan=&quot;4&quot; |
{{anchor|addHandler}}
'''» jQuery Events'''

Using &lt;code&gt;.[http://api.jquery.com/on/ on()]&lt;/code&gt; one can add event handlers.
Some of the more common events have their own shortcuts (such as &lt;code&gt;.[http://api.jquery.com/click/ click()]&lt;/code&gt;).
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Attach multiple events to an element and attach an anonymous function
$( '#fooBar' ).on( 'mouseenter mouseleave', function() {
	alert( '#fooBar is moused!' );
} );

// Attach multiple events with different handlers to a single element
$( '#fooBar' ).on( {
	click: function() {
		// do something on click
	},
	mouseenter: function() {
		// do something on mouseenter
	}
} );

// Attach a handler to the click events of an earlier defined DOM element
$( myElement ).click( myFunction );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

 |-
 | {{anchor|addClickHandler}}addClickHandler || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|removeHandler}}removeHandler || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|hookEvent}}hookEvent || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|mwEditButtons}}mwEditButtons || object || ''obsolete''
 |-
 | {{anchor|mwCustomEditButtons}}mwCustomEditButtons || object ||
'''» WikiEditor'''

The new WikiEditor (which also works fine in Monobook, see [http://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=edit&amp;useskin=monobook here]) has built-in function to customize the toolbar. For more info see [[Extension:WikiEditor/Toolbar customization]]. For examples to insert buttons using the native script see [[Extension:WikiEditor/Toolbar customization/Library]]. For a script to insert buttons using a simple syntax similar to the old way check out [[meta:User:Krinkle/Scripts/insertVectorButtons#Description]]
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.load( '//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Krinkle/insertVectorButtons.js'
 + '&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript' );

function kCustomMainInsertButton_config(){
// {{Welcome}} ~~~~
kCustomMainInsertButton(
	'welcome', // Id
	'//commons.wikimedia.org/w/thumb.php?f=Nuvola_apps_edu_languages.svg&amp;w=22', // File
	'Welcome', // tooltip
	'{\{Welcome}\}\~\~\~\~', // Open tag
	'', // Close tag
	'' // sampleText
);
// {{subst:Test2}} ~~~~
kCustomMainInsertButton(
	'test2', // Id
	'//commons.wikimedia.org/w/thumb.php?f=Nuvola_apps_important.svg&amp;w=22', // File
	'Test2', // tooltip
	'{\{subst:test2|', // Open tag
	'}\}\~\~\~\~', // Close tag
	'' // sample text
);
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
{{anchor|tooltipAccessKeys}}
 |-
 | {{anchor|tooltipAccessKeyPrefix}}tooltipAccessKeyPrefix || string || rowspan=3 | '''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#jquery.accessKeyLabel|jquery.accessKeyLabel]]'''
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// myElement.accessKey = 'x';
// myElement.title = 'Example [x]';
mw.loader.using('jquery.accessKeyLabel').then(function () {
    $(myElement).updateTooltipAccessKeys();
});
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|tooltipAccessKeyRegexp}}tooltipAccessKeyRegexp || object ||
 |-
 | {{anchor|updateTooltipAccessKeys}}updateTooltipAccessKeys || function ||
 |-
 | {{anchor|ta}}ta || object || [{{fullurl:Special:AllMessages|prefix=accesskey-}} MediaWiki:Accesskey-*] and [{{fullurl:Special:AllMessages|prefix=tooltip-}} MediaWiki:Tooltip-*].
 |-
 | {{anchor|akeytt}}akeytt || function || ''obsolete''
 |-
 | {{anchor|checkboxes}}checkboxes || object || rowspan=&quot;5&quot; |
'''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#jquery.checkboxShiftClick|jquery.checkboxShiftClick]]'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|lastCheckbox}}lastCheckbox || object&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|setupCheckboxShiftClick}}setupCheckboxShiftClick || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|addCheckboxClickHandlers}}addCheckboxClickHandlers || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|checkboxClickHandler}}checkboxClickHandler || function&lt;!-- --&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|showTocToggle}}showTocToggle || function || rowspan=&quot;2&quot; |
 |-
 | {{anchor|toggleToc}}toggleToc || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_image_path}}ts_image_path || string || rowspan=&quot;19&quot; |
'''» [[RL/DM#jquery.tablesorter|jquery.tablesorter]]'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_image_up}}ts_image_up || string
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_image_down}}ts_image_down || string
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_image_none}}ts_image_none || string
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_europeandate}}ts_europeandate || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_alternate_row_colors}}ts_alternate_row_colors || boolean
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_number_transform_table}}ts_number_transform_table || object
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_number_regex}}ts_number_regex || object
 |-
 | {{anchor|sortables_init}}sortables_init || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_makeSortable}}ts_makeSortable || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_getInnerText}}ts_getInnerText || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_resortTable}}ts_resortTable || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_initTransformTable}}ts_initTransformTable || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_toLowerCase}}ts_toLowerCase || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_dateToSortKey}}ts_dateToSortKey || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_parseFloat}}ts_parseFloat || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_currencyToSortKey}}ts_currencyToSortKey || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_sort_generic}}ts_sort_generic || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|ts_alternate}}ts_alternate || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|changeText}}changeText || function || rowspan=&quot;2&quot; |
'''» jQuery'''

Using &lt;code&gt;[https://api.jquery.com/text/ .text()]&lt;/code&gt; one can get (or set) the text content of an element:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Set text of an earlier defined element
$( myElement ).text( 'New text!' );

// Set text for multiple elements at once
$( '.mw-userlink' ).text( 'Mr. Foobar' );

// Get the text of an element
$( myElement ).text();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|getInnerText}}getInnerText || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|escapeQuotes}}escapeQuotes || function ||
 |-
 | {{anchor|escapeQuotesHTML}}escapeQuotesHTML || function||
'''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#mw.html|mw.html]]'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|addPortletLink}}addPortletLink||function ||
'''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#addPortletLink|mw.util.addPortletLink]]'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|jsMsg}}jsMsg || function ||
'''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#jsMessage|mw.util.jsMessage]]'''
 |-
 | {{anchor|injectSpinner}}injectSpinner || function || rowspan=&quot;2&quot; |
'''» [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#jquery.spinner|jquery.spinner]]''' ([https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/jQuery.plugin.spinner Documentation])
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
jQuery( .. ).injectSpinner('some-id');

jQuery.removeSpinner('some-id');
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
 |-
 | {{anchor|removeSpinner}}removeSpinner || function
 |-
 | {{anchor|getElementsByClassName}}getElementsByClassName || function ||
'''» jQuery'''

Use the CSS Selector in jQuery to select elements by classname. Here examples for the three most common usecases of &lt;code&gt;getElementsByClassName()&lt;/code&gt;:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Get everything with a classname
$( '.myclass' );

// Get all of element X (ie. table) with a classname
$( 'table.wikitable' );

// Get all of something within another element
$( myDomElement ).find( '.myclass' );
$( myDomElement ).find( '&gt; .myclass' ); // only direct children

// Get all class-elements that are direct children of an element
$( '#someElement .myclass' );
$( '#someElement &gt; .myclass' ); // only direct children
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|-
| {{anchor|redirectToFragment}}redirectToFragment || function ||
|}

== Gadget type ==
{{Rellink|See also [[phab:T42284|T42284]].}}

=== Background ===
Since early 2011, gadgets with styles (both &quot;only styles&quot; and &quot;styles and scripts&quot;) had their styles loaded twice. [[phab:T42284|T42284]] and https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/308096 address this bug.

=== What's new ===
This bug was addressed by adding support in the Gadgets extension for the ResourceLoader &quot;type&quot; feature. This allows gadget developers to configure how the module should be loaded
* '''type=styles''': Load module styles via &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;link rel=&quot;stylesheet&quot;&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;, and completely omits loading any JavaScript files. (Loads styles early, applies styles before skin and page are ready, also works when JavaScript is disabled.)
* '''type=general''': Load module scripts and/or styles via &lt;code&gt;mw.loader.load()&lt;/code&gt;. (Applies styles after the skin and page are ready, right before JS execution, has better caching.)
Gadgets with only styles, internally get &lt;code&gt;type=styles&lt;/code&gt; by default. Gadgets with only scripts default to &lt;code&gt;type=general&lt;/code&gt;.

Gadgets with both scripts ''and'' styles currently default to loading both ways (just before the bug was fixed). When this happens, a warning is shown in the console that asks the developer to provide the desired type. Once we've given gadget developers enough time to migrate, we can make &lt;code&gt;type=general&lt;/code&gt; the default for gadgets that have both scripts and styles.

To load styles through the &lt;code&gt;type=styles&lt;/code&gt; system, while also loading JavaScript files, two separate gadget definitions need to be specified.

=== How to migrate ===
{{Note|1=Gadget &quot;mygadget&quot; styles loaded twice. Migrate to &lt;code&gt;type=general&lt;/code&gt;. See https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T42284.|2=reminder}}
If you see this warning, that means your gadget contains both scripts and styles. Here are two ways to fix the warning:
# If the styles in your gadget are there to provide styling for things created by the gadget, add &quot;&lt;code&gt;type=general&lt;/code&gt;&quot; to your gadget definition (&quot;MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition&quot;).
# Or – If the styles in your gadget are there to provide styling for things that are part of the skin or on the page, then these styles should not be together with the scripts in the same gadget. Convert the gadget to two separate gadgets. One gadget that is styles-only, and the other with the scripts. If the scripts gadget also has its own styles, then also set &quot;&lt;code&gt;type=general&lt;/code&gt;&quot; on the original gadget (per point 1). If you want to keep presenting the modules as one gadget on the Preferences page, use [[#Gadget peers]].
As you can see, in most cases the solution is &quot;type=general.&quot; And in the future, this will become the default and we will not load styles twice. Right now, loading twice remains the default for compatibility with older gadgets covered by point 2 above. Changing these mixed gadgets to type=general now would cause some styles to load too late and cause a &quot;flash of unstyled content&quot;.

== Gadget peers ==
{{Rellink|See also [[phab:T42284|T42284]].}}For a long time, gadget authors have been interested in being able to provide a visual enhancement for all pages and also accompanying some scripting logic to apply related changes to interactive interfaces created by other modules. This requires the gadget to have both scripts and styles, but most of the styles are not required by the scripts – rather, the styles should apply directly to the page without waiting for JavaScript. So far this required either creating two gadgets (and requiring users to enable both), or creating a single gadget with the downside of the styles applying slightly after the page loads.

To accommodate the use case of a single gadget providing both page styles (which don't depend on JavaScript) and JavaScript code with its own styles, a new setting was introduced: &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;. This is similar to &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, except that where dependencies load before the main module (not before the page itself), peers will allow one to reference a separate gadget module that will be loaded regardless of whether JavaScript is enabled.

For example:
 * example [ResourceLoader|dependencies=mediawiki.util|peers=example-pagestyles] | example.js | example.css
 * example-pagestyles [hidden] | example-pagestyles.css
This will register a gadget named &quot;Example&quot; in the preferences which, if enabled, will load example-pagestyles before the page renders. And, once JavaScript is available, the example module will also be loaded with its own dependencies, styles and scripts.

== Internet Explorer 9 and pre-ES5 browsers ==
With this version, we have stopped JavaScript support for IE9 and other browsers that do not support [[:en:ECMAScript#5th Edition|ES5]]. See [[Compatibility#Browsers|Compatibility]] for details.

= [[MediaWiki 1.27]] =
== Legacy default: mediawiki.util ==
The {{wg|PreloadJavaScriptMwUtil}} option was removed. This option allowed third-party MediaWiki administrators to re-enable the unconditional preload of &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; by default for all users (for backwards compatibility). It was disabled by default since MediaWiki 1.26, and has been disabled on Wikimedia wikis since 2014.  Extensions, skins, gadgets and scripts that use the &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; module must express a dependency on it.

== bits.wikimedia.org ==
The internal Wikimedia domain &quot;bits.wikimedia.org&quot; was deprecated sometime mid-2015. The following common paths should be migrated to avoid breakage once the domain is decommissioned ([[phab:T107430|T107430]]).
* &lt;code&gt;bits.wikimedia.org/:domain/load.php&lt;/code&gt; → &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://:domain/w/load.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; . Moved back to local domains, alongside &lt;code&gt;/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt; and others.
* &lt;code&gt;bits.wikimedia.org/static-current/*&lt;/code&gt; → &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://:domain/static/current/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;: Moved to local domain, sharing a hostname-agonistic Varnish cache.
** &lt;code&gt;bits.wikimedia.org/skins/*&lt;/code&gt; → &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://:domain/static/current/skins&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;bits.wikimedia.org/static-1.xx-wmf.X/*&lt;/code&gt; → &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://:domain/w/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;: Specific versions can now be accessed through the regular script path. Wikimedia's multiversion entry point automatically serves the file from to the wikis' current MediaWiki version. ([[phab:T99096|T99096]])
** &lt;code&gt;bits.wikimedia.org/static-1.xx/skins/*&lt;/code&gt; &lt;code&gt;'''→'''&lt;/code&gt; &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://:domain/w/skins/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
** &lt;code&gt;bits.wikimedia.org/static-1.xx/extensions/*&lt;/code&gt; &lt;code&gt;'''→'''&lt;/code&gt; &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://:domain/w/extensions/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
** &lt;code&gt;bits.wikimedia.org/static-1.xx/resources/*&lt;/code&gt; &lt;code&gt;'''→'''&lt;/code&gt; &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://:domain/w/resources/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;

== Internet Explorer 8 ==
Following the deactivation of JavaScript in Internet Explorer 6 and 7 in MediaWiki 1.24, JavaScript has been deactivated in Internet Explorer 8. See [[Compatibility#Browsers|Compatibility]] for details.

= [[MediaWiki 1.26]] =
== Legacy gadgets ==
Gadgets are now required to use ResourceLoader. For many Gadgets, migrating to ResourceLoader will be as easy as adding &lt;code&gt;[ResourceLoader]&lt;/code&gt; to its definition on MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition. If after adding that, the gadget is not working properly, consult the rest of this page to look for functionality that may have been removed since the gadget was last maintained. If you run into any issues or find features that don't work without a clear way of making it work, please reach out to MediaWiki developers and fellow gadget authors on the [[{{TALKPAGENAME}}|talk page]], via [[IRC]], or on the [[Mailing lists|wikitech-l]] mailing list.

=== Global variables are not global ===
When ResourceLoader loads a gadget script, it is not executed in global context. This means that local variables you define in the script are actually local, and ''not'' assumed to be also global. They are local to the function your code is wrapped in. It's best to modularize your code to avoid using globals, see [[Manual:Coding conventions/JavaScript#Globals|&quot;Globals&quot; in MediaWiki's JavaScript coding conventions]]. However, if you need to export a variable to the global scope, you can explicitly assign them as &lt;code&gt;window&lt;/code&gt; properties. For example:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// This is a local variable
var foo;
// This is a local function
function bar() {
 ..
}

// This is a global variable (accessible from other scripts, and from legacy event handlers, e.g. onclick=&quot;javascript:Quux();&quot;
window.Quux = function( width, height ) {
	...
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Code within your gadget can access foo and bar. Code outside the gadget (or code evaluated as separate programs, such as legacy onclick handlers), can only access Quux..

{{As of|2015|August}}, [[ResourceLoader/Architecture#Debug mode|ResourceLoader debug mode]] still executes scripts in global scope ([[phab:T64605]]), so your code may seem to work fine in debug mode but be broken in regular mode.

== Font mw-geshi ==
The font-size of {{tag|syntaxhighlight|open}} was often too small by default due to a font-family CSS bug. This was fixed in MediaWiki 1.26 (see ([[phab:T28204]]).

The &lt;code&gt;mw-geshi&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;source-css&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;source-javascript&lt;/code&gt; and related classes no longer exist. Related code such as the following can be safely removed:

&lt;div class=&quot;errorbox&quot;&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Fix &lt;syntaxhighlight&gt; text size. [[phab:T28204]] */
div.mw-geshi div,
div.mw-geshi div pre,
span.mw-geshi,
pre.source-css,
pre.source-javascript,
pre.source-lua {
    font-family: monospace, Courier !important;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

== Inline scripts ==

To inject JavaScript inline, use &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader::makeInlineScript()&lt;/code&gt; to wrap the JavaScript code in an anonymous function that can access MediaWiki-related objects properly, and &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addScript()&lt;/code&gt; to add the results to the page source for execution.

For example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$outputPage = RequestContext::getMain()-&gt;getOutput();

$js = 'alert(&quot;hello world&quot;);';
$wrappedJS = ResourceLoader::makeInlineScript($js);
$outputPage-&gt;addScript($wrappedScript);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

= [[MediaWiki 1.24]] =
== Legacy removals ==
The &lt;code&gt;jquery.delayedBind&lt;/code&gt; JavaScript module, deprecated in MediaWiki 1.23, has been removed. See [[phab:rMW8f2ebcbf6769]].

{{anchor|IE}}

== Internet Explorer ==
Browser support for Internet Explorer 6 and 7 changed from Grade A to Grade C. This means JavaScript is no longer executed in these browser versions. See [[Compatibility#Browsers|Compatibility]] for details.

= [[MediaWiki 1.20]] =

== mw.util.jsMessage ==
This method has been deprecated in favour of [[ResourceLoader/Core modules#mw.notify|'''mw.notify''']].

The jsMessage message was designed to be a drop-in replacement fully compatible with the legacy wikibits &lt;code&gt;jsMsg&lt;/code&gt; function (deprecated since 1.17, removed in 1.29). The 2012 notification system on the other hand was designed with developer usability and security in mind.

For most cases, the new method is just as easy to use as the old one, and requires only a the same single parameter that represents the message. For example, with plain text:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Deprecated (dependencies: mediawiki.util)
var msgText = 'Hello world';
mw.util.jsMessage(msgText);

// New, as of 2012 (dependencies: mediawiki.notify)
var msgText = 'Hello world';
mw.notify(msgText);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;And another example, with a DOM element, or a jQuery object:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Deprecated (dependencies: mediawiki.util)
var $myWidget = ExampleWidget.create( {
    having: '2-buttons',
    toggle: '#sidebar'
});
mw.util.jsMessage($myWidget);

// New, as of 2012 (dependencies: mediawiki.notify)
var $myWidget = ExampleWidget.create( {
    having: '2-buttons',
    toggle: '#sidebar'
});
mw.notify($myWidget);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;If you're currently using raw HTML with &lt;code&gt;mw.util.jsMessage()&lt;/code&gt;, the simplest way to migrate is to do what jsMessage used to do internally for you, which is to parse the HTML and place the node(s) in a jQuery object, as follows:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot; highlight=&quot;7&quot;&gt;
// Deprecated (dependencies: mediawiki.util)
var msgHtml = '&lt;form&gt;&lt;button&gt;Click me&lt;/button&gt;&lt;/form&gt;';
mw.util.jsMessage(msgHtml);

// New, as of 2012 (dependencies: mediawiki.notify)
var msgHtml = '&lt;form&gt;&lt;button&gt;Click me&lt;/button&gt;&lt;/form&gt;';
var $msg = $($.parseHTML(msgHtml));
mw.notify($msg);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== New diff styles ==
This version introduces a new diff view, greatly improved in clarity especially for whitespace and other small changes and colour-blind users. If your wiki has custom CSS for the diffs, they may be in conflict with the new style (as happened on [//pt.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki%3ACommon.css&amp;diff=29858952&amp;oldid=28922245&amp;uselang=en ptwiki] and [//sr.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?diff=5578051&amp;oldid=5533214&amp;uselang=en srwiki]). You are recommended to remove the old code (or if still wanted by some users, update it to work with the new layout and create a gadget for it so that users can opt-in to it still).

= [[MediaWiki 1.19]] =
== wikitable style updates ==
As of [[MediaWiki 1.19]] a few bugs have been fixed with the &lt;code&gt;wikitable&lt;/code&gt; class (see [[phab:T32485]] and [[phab:T35434]] for more info). If your wiki maintains a legacy synonym of this class (e.g. &quot;&lt;code&gt;prettytable&lt;/code&gt;&quot;) you need to update its CSS to match the current style in core.

The current style as of 1.19 can be found [//github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/1.19.24/skins/common/shared.css here]. Copy those rules to your wiki and replace &quot;wikitable&quot; with the synonym ([//nl.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Common.css&amp;diff=29814645&amp;oldid=29702942 example for nl.wikipedia]).

If your wiki doesn't keep something like this, then no update is necessary and everything should take care of itself.

== File page checkered background ==
[[File:Checker-16x16.png|thumb|Checkered background]]
The checkered background often applied to transparent file namespace pages is now part of the software. Local rules like the following should be removed (because they are redundant, and actually cause an additional unnecessary HTTP request for the image)

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Put a checker background at the image description page.
   Only visible if the image has transparent background.
*/
#file img {
	background: url(&quot;//upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/commons/5/5d/Checker-16x16.png&quot;) repeat;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Trackbacks ==
Trackbacks were removed from MediaWiki core, so any styling targeting &lt;code&gt;#mw_trackbacks&lt;/code&gt; can be removed.

= [[MediaWiki 1.18]] =
{{anchor|HTTPS}}

== Protocol-relative urls ==
:''This change only applies to Wikimedia Foundation wikis''.

As of [[MediaWiki 1.18]] there is native support for protocol-relative wiki installations. This means that a wiki could be accessible from both http://example.org/ and https://example.org./ To make it possible to a share a common cache for as much as possible, we make use of a technique called protocol-relative urls. Although browsers have supports this for ages, script writers generally aren't very familiar with it until fairly recently. Briefly explained, this means that &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;//meta.wikimedia.org&quot; /&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; when on &quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://example.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot; will be automatically expanded by the browser to https://meta.wikimedia.org./ This is much like (for example) &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;foobar.jpg&quot; /&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; or &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;img src=&quot;/w/foobar.jpg&quot; /&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;, which are are automatically expanded to &quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://mediawiki.org/w/foobar.jpg&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot;.

Depending on how the scripts were written this may require some changes to be made to your scripts. If you use the following method to detect whether the script is executed on a certain wiki, this change will break your script:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( wgServer === 'http://en.wikipedia.org' ) {
	// Doesn't work anymore!
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
because wgServer is now &quot;&lt;code&gt;//en.wikipedia.org&lt;/code&gt;&quot;. For a few years there has been another config variable, called &quot;&lt;code&gt;wgDBname&lt;/code&gt;&quot;. You should use that instead to differentiate wikis, like:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgDBname' ) === 'enwiki' ) {
	// English Wikipedia!
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
Alternatively, you can use &lt;code&gt;wgServerName&lt;/code&gt; which is without the protocol or port:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgServerName' ) === 'en.wikipedia.org' ) {
	// English Wikipedia!
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== &quot;Enabled by default&quot; (Gadgets extension) ==
As of the version of the Gadgets extension at the MW 1.18 branchpoint, there is a new feature that allows a gadget to be opt-out instead of opt-in based. By setting &quot;&lt;code&gt;[default]&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (or adding &quot;&lt;code&gt;|default&lt;/code&gt;&quot; to an existing section) the gadget will be enabled by default for everybody, unless a user has specifically opted out by unticking the checkbox on [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets]].

Note that this also loads it for '''all anonymous users'''. Gadgets that are only for logged-in users should be additionally restricted by, for example, requiring certain user rights.

See also [[Extension:Gadgets#Options]].

== mw.util.wikiScript ==
The actual paths have not changed, but getting the path to the API and index.php has become a lot easier. This also makes the code more portable as it has no hardcoded wiki-specific paths.

This is how it used to go in many gadgets.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var foo = 'bar';
var apiUrl = '//www.mediawiki.org/w/api.php?foo=' + encodeURIComponent( foo ) + '&amp;baz=quux';

$.ajax( { url: apiUrl, ... } );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Instead use something like one of the following:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// Behold, mw.util.wikiScript!
var foo = 'bar';
var apiUrl = mw.util.wikiScript( 'api' ) + '?foo=' + encodeURIComponent( foo ) + '&amp;baz=quux';

$.ajax( {
	url: apiUrl,
	...
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

You may also want to use &lt;code&gt;$.param&lt;/code&gt; to automatically escape and create things properly in the query string:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// $.param is also awesome. No need for encodeURIComponent that way :)
var foo = 'bar';
var apiUrl = mw.util.wikiScript( 'api' ) + '?' + $.param( {
	foo: foo,
	baz: 'quux'
} );

$.ajax( {
	url: apiUrl,
	...
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

You can even use the &lt;code&gt;data&lt;/code&gt; option of [http://api.jquery.com/jQuery.ajax/ &lt;code&gt;$.ajax&lt;/code&gt;], that abstracts away the need to deal with the query string entirely:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// No longer needed to inject the '?' or '&amp;' in the url
$.ajax( {
	url: mw.util.wikiScript( 'api' ),
	data: {
		foo: 'bar',
		baz: 'quux'
	}, ...
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

= [[MediaWiki 1.17]] =

== jQuery ==
: ''See also [[jQuery]]''
As of [[MediaWiki 1.17|1.17]] the jQuery library is loaded by default on all MediaWiki pages. Each MediaWiki release will keep it up to date with the latest version of jQuery. If you used to load jQuery from within your script, (e.g. from ajax.googleapis.com), make sure you remove that. If you load jQuery more than once on a page, it overwrites the earlier version. Other scripts break because they may not work with an older version of jQuery.

Also, by overwriting the jQuery object, any plugins that were bound to that object are also lost.

Global identifier &quot;&lt;code&gt;$j&lt;/code&gt;&quot; has been deprecated. Use &lt;code&gt;jQuery&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;$&lt;/code&gt; instead.

{{anchor|mainpage-nstab}}

== Tabs (vector) ==
In 1.17 the HTML construction for the navigation tabs has changed from &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot; inline&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a&gt;&lt;span /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; to &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot; inline&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span&gt;&lt;a /&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;. The most common situation in which this causes problems is where scripts assume the presence of the span element when, for example, customizing the tab for &quot;Main Page&quot;. Before 1.17 this usually meant that wikis had a different implementation for Monobook and one for Vector (or only one for each and the other was distorted).

Please use {{Blue|MediaWiki:Mainpage-nstab}} or refer to [[Snippets/Main Page tab]] for a script that will work in both Vector and Monobook for 1.17.

== Adding portlet links ==
The legacy function &lt;code&gt;addPortletLink&lt;/code&gt; has been rewritten as &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#addPortletLink|mw.util.addPortletLink]]&lt;/code&gt;. The syntax and argument order is fully backwards compatible. The differences
* Support for all core skins now
* Support for simple id-selector as 'nextNode' (see [[RL/DM#addPortletLink|documentation]] for details).

Some wikis may have re-defined / overwritten the &lt;code&gt;addPortlinkLink&lt;/code&gt; function to support a few extra skins. This is no longer needed. The function definition should be removed and calls adjusted to &lt;code&gt;mw.util.addPortletLink&lt;/code&gt;.

The legacy version of &lt;code&gt;addPortlinkLink&lt;/code&gt; has been preserved as-is in case some edge cases would behave differently (for that reason the &lt;code&gt;addPortlinkLink&lt;/code&gt; does not redirect to mw.util.addPortlinkLink)

== Toolbar ==
The legacy array &lt;code&gt;mwCustomEditButtons&lt;/code&gt; has been refactored into the &lt;code&gt;mw.toolbar&lt;/code&gt; library. The global array still exists in wikibits to avoid fatal errors but is no longer used due to race conditions. Code may run too late when the toolbar already exists. Using &lt;code&gt;mw.toolbar.addButton&lt;/code&gt; will work always, even if the toolbar has already been created.

See [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.toolbar mw.toolbar Documentation].

Note that mw.toolbar, just like the old mwCustomEditButtons array, are associated with the classic toolbar. The current default wikitext editor is WikiEditor, which has its own API. See [[Extension:WikiEditor/Toolbar customization]] for more information.

== Sajax ==
The legacy functions such as &lt;code&gt;sajax_init_object&lt;/code&gt; have been deprecated. Instead, &lt;code&gt;mw.Api&lt;/code&gt; from the &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.api&lt;/code&gt; module, or &lt;code&gt;jQuery.ajax&lt;/code&gt;.
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/js/#!/api/mw.Api mediawiki.api documentation]
* [http://api.jquery.com/jQuery.ajax/ jQuery.ajax documentation]
Migration guide:
{| class=&quot;wikitable plainlinks&quot;
!Identifier
!Type
!Replaced by
|-
|{{anchor|sajax_debug_mode}}sajax_debug_mode
|string
| rowspan=&quot;5&quot; |'''» [http://api.jquery.com/jQuery.ajax/ jQuery.ajax]'''

Use &lt;code class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[http://api.jquery.com/category/ajax/ AJAX]&lt;/code&gt; functions to access pages and the API directly.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$( '#mybox' ).load( '/wiki/Template:ResourceLoader_navigation #bodyContent' );

$.get(
	mw.config.get( 'wgScript' ), {
		title: 'ResourceLoader',
		action: 'raw'
	},
	function( data ) {
		/* Call was successful do something with &quot;data&quot; */
	}
);

$.getJSON(
	mw.util.wikiScript( 'api' ), {
		format: 'json',
		action: 'query',
		titles: 'Main Page',
		prop: 'info'
	},
	function( obj ) {
		/* API call was successful do something with obj */
	}
);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
For more information see documentation for [http://api.jquery.com/load/ .load()], [http://api.jquery.com/jQuery.get/ .get()], [http://api.jquery.com/jQuery.getJSON/ .getJSON()] and the [http://api.jquery.com/category/ajax/ other jQuery Ajax functions].

See also [[w:Wikipedia:WikiProject User scripts/Guide/Ajax#jQuery examples|this guide]] from [[w:Wikipedia:WikiProject User scripts|WikiProject User scripts]], for an example of how to edit a wikipage using AJAX.
|-
|{{anchor|sajax_request_type}}sajax_request_type
|string
|-
|{{anchor|sajax_debug}}sajax_debug
|function
|-
|{{anchor|sajax_init_object}}sajax_init_object
|function
|-
|{{anchor|wfSupportsAjax}}wfSupportsAjax
|function
|-
|{{anchor|sajax_do_call}}sajax_do_call
|function
|
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$.get(
	mw.util.wikiScript(), {
		action: 'ajax',
		rs: 'SomeExtensionFunction',
		rsargs: [arg1, arg2, arg3] // becomes &amp;rsargs[]=arg1&amp;rsargs[]=arg2...
	}
);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
''Note: These calls using action=ajax should be rewritten to use an API module''
|}

== Client testing ==
Checking which browser, platform, layout engine etc. has should now be done with '''[[RL/DM#jquery.client|jQuery.client]]'''.
* &lt;code&gt;is_safari&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;is_chrome&lt;/code&gt; etc. are deprecated
* No need to &lt;code&gt;navigator.userAgent.indexOf(&quot;MSIE 6&quot;)==-1&lt;/code&gt; etc.

== Sysop script ==
New in [[MediaWiki 1.17]] is a user groups module that can automatically load scripts and styles from the MediaWiki namespace for a particular user group. For example, if the wiki has MediaWiki:Group-sysop.js, this script is automatically loaded for all users in that group.

This should obsolete customisations wikis may have with regards to loading MediaWiki:Sysop.js with importScript inside Common.js.

== mw.loader ==
If you need certain scripts like [http://jqueryui.com/ jQuery UI]'s dialog or datepicker, instead of doing something like:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
importStylesheetURI( mw.config.get( 'wgExtensionAssetsPath' ) + '/Example/css/jquery-ui-1.7.2.css' );

$.getScript( mw.config.get( 'wgExtensionAssetsPath' ) + '/Example/js/jui.combined.min.js', function () {
	MyTool.init();
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Instead use this:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.using( ['jquery.ui.dialog', 'jquery.ui.datepicker'], MyTool.init );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Or if you need to delay initialization until document.ready:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.using( ['jquery.ui.dialog', 'jquery.ui.datepicker'], function () {
	$( document ).ready( MyTool.init );
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== Dependencies ====
When a script depends on another module, such as &lt;code&gt;oojs&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt;, you will need to declare this as a &quot;dependency&quot;. This is because modules are loaded on-demand and asynchronously (in consecutive order: all at the same time), so a script needs to make sure a module has been loaded before it can use its methods. On-site modules, like gadgets, have a registry to declare these dependencies. For user scripts, one has to wrap code with &lt;code&gt;{{ll|ResourceLoader/Core_modules#mw.loader|mw.loader.using()}}&lt;/code&gt;.

While this has been required since 2011, many scripts have continued to work without declaring their dependencies. Scripts may have worked before by accident as long as at least one user script (that used the same methods) did declare their dependencies and happened to load earlier.

With MediaWiki 1.19, page view performance has been optimised to use fewer modules by default. This makes it increasingly more important to declare the dependencies. Otherwise, your script may fail because any of the 1000+ modules you might refer to in your code would not be loaded yet. Loading everything all the time would be much too slow.

The only two base modules that are always present are &lt;code&gt;mediawiki&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery&lt;/code&gt;.

==== In practice ====
Use &lt;code&gt;mw.loader.using()&lt;/code&gt; to declare any modules that you need before executing the contents of &quot;function&quot;. You can pass multiple modules as an array of strings.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.using( ['mediawiki.util', 'oojs', 'jquery.cookie'], function () {

	/* some other script that uses $.cookie */

	/* some other script that uses mw.util and OO.EventEmitter() */

} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{anchor|wg* Variables}}

== Global wg variables ==
As of MediaWiki 1.17, the global config variables are deprecated. Rationale to clear the global namespace, working towards a reality where most of the core libraries will be object oriented as part of the &lt;code&gt;mw&lt;/code&gt; object. Configuration is managed through an instance of &lt;code&gt;[[ResourceLoader/Default modules#mw.Map|mw.Map]]&lt;/code&gt; in &lt;code&gt;mw.config&lt;/code&gt;. It is also supporting the behaviour of more script executing in their own local/private scope as opposed to the global scope.

Legacy globals will be kept for backwards compatibility, but people should start migrating so that they may removed in a future version of MediaWiki ({{phabricator|T35837}}).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// One variable
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgCanonicalSpecialPageName' ) === 'Search' ) {
	// Example for Special:Search
}

if ( mw.config.get( 'wgGlobalGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'global-rollbacker' ) !== -1 ) {
	// Example for users in the global group &quot;global-rollbacker&quot;.
}

// Multiple variables
var conf = mw.config.get( [
	'wgScript',
	'wgAction'
] );
if ( conf.wgAction === 'edit' ) {
	console.log( 'Example when editing a page', config.wgScript );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
More info: [[ResourceLoader/Default modules#mw.config]]

== Ready, onload, hook ==
Check [[#addOnloadHook|JavaScript deprecation overview]] for &quot;&lt;code&gt;addOnloadHook&lt;/code&gt;&quot;. Use &lt;code&gt;$(&amp;#160;''function''&amp;#160;);&lt;/code&gt; instead, or &lt;code&gt;$( fn );&lt;/code&gt; for short.

== New CSS declarations in core ==
=== Headings overflow hidden ===
&lt;code&gt;overflow:hidden&lt;/code&gt; for any of h1, h2, h3, h4, h5 and/or h6 can be safely removed from stylesheets as this is now part of the core.

=== Italic redirects ===
Links to redirects appear italicized on [[Special:AllPages]], [[Special:PrefixIndex]], [[Special:Watchlist/edit]] and in category listings

&lt;pre&gt;
.allpagesredirect,
.redirect-in-category,
.watchlistredir {
 font-style: italic;
}
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== wpSummary ===
Per [[phab:T22276]], &lt;code&gt;input#wpSummary&lt;/code&gt;'s &lt;code&gt;width&lt;/code&gt; is now set in Vector as well (instead of just Monobook).

== UsabilityInitiative no more ==
As of 1.17 the functionality developed by the UsabilityInitiative has been extracted to stand-alone extensions. Buttons like &quot;#pt-optin-try&quot; no longer exist. You can enable/disable these functions like other extensions via [[Special:Preferences]].

Scripts and styles doing things like &quot;HideUsabilityOptIn&quot;:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#pt-optin-try {
	display: none !important;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
should therefore be deleted entirely as the button no longer exists.

== Preformatted JS/CSS pages ==
It's no longer useful to wrap these pages in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt; /* &lt;pre&gt; */ &lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; or  &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt; // &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; etc. In newer versions of MediaWiki, these pages are rendered as code automatically (including syntax highlighting when available). See also {{phabricator|T6801}}. &lt;!-- [[phab:T34858]] --&gt;

== Table sorter ==
The old table sorter in &lt;code&gt;wikibits.js&lt;/code&gt; was removed in favour of &lt;code&gt;jquery.tablesorter&lt;/code&gt;.

Variables such as &lt;code&gt;ts_alternate_row_colors&lt;/code&gt;, and functions like &lt;code&gt;ts_parseFloat&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;ts_dateToSortKey&lt;/code&gt; no longer exist.

= [[MediaWiki 1.16]] and before =

== importScript ==

As of 2008, the &lt;code&gt;importScript&lt;/code&gt; function commonly defined by communities locally became a built-in part part of MediaWiki (&quot;wikibits.js&quot;). Wikis that previously defined this function themselves, are able to remove that. The new built-in function is automatically used. The same also applies to &lt;code&gt;importStylesheet&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;importStylesheetURI&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;importScriptURI&lt;/code&gt;.

Note that &lt;code&gt;importStylesheetURI&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;importScriptURI&lt;/code&gt; were subsequently deprecated in 2011 with MediaWiki 1.17, and disabled on mobile sites like https://en.m.wikipedia.org/. Use [[ResourceLoader/Core modules#mw.loader|mw.loader.load]] instead.

== addPortletLink ==
As of 2008, the function &lt;code&gt;addPortletLink&lt;/code&gt; is part of MediaWiki. Many wikis and gadgets have created functions like &lt;code&gt;addLink&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;addLiLink&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;addlilink&lt;/code&gt; etc. these should be removed as they most likely don't support different skins (ie. only Monobook, not Vector or older skins). Be sure to check the syntax as there is no way of knowing the creator of those local functions used the same parameter order.
:'''Note''': The global function was [[RL/JD#wikibits.js|deprecated]] in 2012 and moved to the mediawiki.util module as &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#addPortletLink|mw.util.addPortletLink]]()&lt;/code&gt;

== appendCSS ==
As of 2008, the function &lt;code&gt;appendCSS&lt;/code&gt; is part of MediaWiki. Wikis that have defined this function themselves may remove that. It will automatically use the new function.
:'''Note''': The global function was [[RL/JD#importScript|deprecated]] in 2012 and moved to the mediawiki.util module as &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#addCSS|mw.util.addCSS]]()&lt;/code&gt;

== HTML bugs in core ==
=== html lang ===

This bugfix is obsolete as MediaWiki does this correctly by default. ([https://zh.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki%3ACommon.js&amp;type=revision&amp;diff=77150&amp;oldid=77149 example])

&lt;div class=&quot;errorbox&quot;&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var htmlE = document.documentElement;
htmlE.setAttribute('lang', mw.config.get('wgUserLanguage'));
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

== CSS declarations new in core ==
{{anchor|Wikitable}}

=== wikitable ===
The &lt;code&gt;.wikitable&lt;/code&gt; CSS class is part of MediaWiki. Wikis that previously defined this class in their &lt;code&gt;Common.css&lt;/code&gt; should remove it. Do check if the wiki has any customisations that should be retained (e.g. different background-color, or font-size).

=== plainlinks ===
The &lt;code&gt;.plainlinks&lt;/code&gt; CSS class is part of MediaWiki. Wikis that previously defined this class in their &lt;code&gt;Common.css&lt;/code&gt; should remove it.

Many wikis defined this functionality under a different name: &lt;code&gt;.plainlinksneverexpand&lt;/code&gt;. Once any usage is replaced with &quot;plainlinks&quot;, it may also be removed. (Search with &lt;code&gt;insource:plainlinksneverexpand&lt;/code&gt;.)

=== mw-plusminus ===
The CSS classes &lt;code&gt;.mw-plusminus-pos&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;.mw-plusminus-null&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;.mw-plusminus-neg&lt;/code&gt; are now implemented by MediaWiki.

=== External URLs ===
Icons for protocols like [{{fullurl:RL}} HTTP], [irc://irc.example.org/ IRC], etc. and file types like [{{fullurl:.pdf}} PDF] are now supported by MediaWiki.

{{anchor|ta}}

== Tooltip and accesskeys ==
Scripts like &lt;code&gt;ta['pt-userpage'] = new Array('.','My user page');&lt;/code&gt; are ignored. It was deprecated in 2009.
The function akeytt() no longer exists. Tooltips and accesskeys are now supported from core. The most common values that wikis used with ta[] are the same that have now been integrated into the core (ie. &quot;.&quot; for &quot;my user page&quot;). They can still be modified, if really needed, by sysops in MediaWiki-messages (no need for JavaScript workarounds anymore).

As of MediaWiki 1.19 the global dummy placeholder &lt;code&gt;ta = new Object();&lt;/code&gt; was removed from &lt;code&gt;wikibits.js&lt;/code&gt;. Code trying to add members to it will likely emit an exception.

{{anchor|Good practices}}

= Best practices =
The below are additional advices not related to a particular MediaWiki release, but rather general best practices.

{{anchor|document.write()}}

== Avoid document.write() ==
Do not use this method, as it can cause a page to become visually blanked. Instead, use [http://api.jquery.com/ jQuery] to modify the document (adding elements, changing things etc.). To load external resources, use the import/loader functions instead.

'''Example:''' replace
&lt;div class=&quot;errorbox&quot;&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
document.write('&lt;script type=&quot;text/javascript&quot; src=&quot;'
             + 'https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-HotCat.js'
             + '&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript&quot;&gt;&lt;/script&gt;');
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
with
&lt;div class=&quot;successbox&quot;&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.load('https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-HotCat.js&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript');
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

== Event binding ==
Binding input events to callback functions can be hard to do in cross-browser compatible way for all browsers that MediaWiki supports.

It is recommended that you use [http://api.jquery.com/category/events/ jQuery for event binding]. See the [[RL/JD#addHandler|JavaScript deprecation overview on &quot;addHandler&quot;]] for examples.

== Encoding and escaping ==
When working with regular expressions, user input and/or urls must always be encoded or escaped.

* Regexes: &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#mediawiki.util|mw.util.escapeRegExp]]&lt;/code&gt; (provided by &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; module).
* HTML: &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#mw.html|mw.html.escape]]&lt;/code&gt; (provided by default).
* URL:  &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#wikiUrlencode|mw.util.wikiUrlencode]]&lt;/code&gt; for page titles, &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#rawurlencode|mw.util.rawurlencode]]&lt;/code&gt; for other values (provided by &lt;code&gt;mediawiki.util&lt;/code&gt; module).

== Prototyping ==
Do not extend native JavaScript constructors with non-standard methods (e.g. &lt;code&gt;String.prototype.foobar&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Regex.myMethod&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Array.prototype.inArray&lt;/code&gt; etc.).

Such non-standard methods should be defined in your own namespace instead, for example &lt;code&gt;MyThing.foobar&lt;/code&gt;, or using module.exports/require.

=== Polyfills ===
Before 2015, it was common for user scripts and gadgets to define fallback method for standard features of newer JavaScript engines.  This is no longer needed in most cases, because the '''[[ResourceLoader/Developing with ResourceLoader#Base environment|Base environment]]''' already ensures ES5 or later. This means ES5 methods such as &lt;code&gt;String#trim&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Array#forEach&lt;/code&gt; can be used directly.

Before MediaWiki 1.32, the [https://github.com/es-shims/es5-shim#shims es5-shim] module was bundled with MediaWiki to automatically define polyfills if needed. It could be used like so: 
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
// This using() command will immediately execute as &quot;then()&quot; in modern browsers.
// In older browsers, it loads es5-shim.js first, and then executes your &quot;then()&quot;.
mw.loader.using( 'es5-shim').then( function () {
	console.log( '    bar    '.trim() ); // &quot;bar&quot;
	[ 'a', 'b' ].forEach( function ( val ) {
		/* .. */
	} );
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Getting URL parameter values ==
Functions like getURLParamValue, getParamVal, getParamValue, etc. are very common across wikis. Some are better than others (i.e. what if a parameter appears twice? (it should return the last one), does it ignore anything after the #tag?). As of 1.17 &lt;code&gt;[[RL/DM#getParamValue|mw.util.getParamValue]]&lt;/code&gt; is available everywhere and takes these factors into account.
Perform a full-text all-namespace search for these function names. If they are widely used perhaps make a note about it in the local village pump. Any site-wide scripts should be updated to use the mw.util function. If there are any serious problems with the local implementation (like not escaping the value for regex), it may be wise to redirect the function:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function getURLParamValue( p, url ) {
	return mw.util.getParamValue( p, url );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Avoid use of !important ==
CSS stands for Cascading Style Sheets. Cascading means what comes later overwrites what came earlier. In most cases there is no need to use &lt;code&gt;!important&lt;/code&gt;. See the following example:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
.my-element { color: blue; }
.my-element { color: green; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
Text inside &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=html inline&gt;&lt;strong class=&quot;my-element&quot;&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; will now be &lt;strong style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;green&lt;/strong&gt;.

== Keep gadgets central ==
Use Meta.wikimedia.org or MediaWiki.org to store Gadgets' code, then import it into various local mediawiki.

'''Interface administrators:''' To update a gadget on your wiki:

* Check {{blue|MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition}} on your wiki and find the gadget in question.
* The part after the pipe ({{cnw|{{!}}}}) is the scriptname (eg. &quot;{{cnw|UTCLiveClock.js}}&quot;).
* Go to {{blue|MediaWiki:Gadget-&amp;lt;scriptname&gt;}} (eg. [[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js]])
* Remove everything and replace with the code in they grey area below the scriptname in the list. For an example on how this is done, check out [{{fullurl:simple:MediaWiki:Gadget-LiveClock.js|action=edit}} LiveClock on Simple Wikipedia].

Below is a list of gadgets that are :
* centrally stored
* compatible with 1.17
* work in Monobook and Vector
* can be loaded into any mediawiki, from WMF or external.

=== Gadgets ===
* '''UTCLiveClock''' {{ImportGadget|UTCLiveClock}}
* '''contribsrange''' {{ImportGadget|contribsrange}}
* '''modrollback''' {{ImportGadget|modrollback}}
* '''QPreview''' {{ImportGadget|QPreview|commons.wikimedia}}
* '''ShortDiff''' {{ImportGadget|ShortDiff|meta.wikimedia}}
* '''lastdiff''' Check [[Snippets/Last revision action]]
* '''HotCat'''
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/**
 * This imports the latest version of HotCat from Commons.
 * HotCat is a gadget to make changes to categories much easier.
 * Full documentation can be found at https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/Help:Gadget-HotCat
 */
mw.loader.load('https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-HotCat.js&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript');
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* '''WikiMiniAtlas'''
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/**
 * WikiMiniAtlas is a popup click and drag world map.
 * See [[meta:WikiMiniAtlas]] for more information.
 * Maintainers: [[w:User:Dschwen]]
 */
mw.loader.load('https://meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Wikiminiatlas.js&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript');
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* '''Navigation Popups''' (MediaWiki:Gadget-popups.js and MediaWiki:Gadget-popups.css respectively)
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.load('https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-popups.js&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/javascript');
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
@import url('https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Gadget-navpop.css&amp;action=raw&amp;ctype=text/css');
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== jQuery optimization ===
* [[Optimization for jQuery]]
* [http://paulirish.com/perf/ jQuery for Performance &amp; Common mistakes]
* http://www.smashingmagazine.com/2008/09/16/jquery-examples-and-best-practices/

== Use API instead of index.php ==
XML retrieved by invoking GET and POST methods on index.php is incompatible with HTML 5, which is the default as of 1.16 (and WMF sites since [[phab:T29478|17th of September, 2012]]). You should update code to use [[API:Main page|api.php]], JSON format and jQuery.ajax immediately. Use the ResourceLoader modules that do this for you to simplify interactng with the API, including [[ResourceLoader/Modules#mediawiki.api|mediawiki.api]].

A temporary fix for problems with DOM parsing of XML retrieved via AJAX: For example the method &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;getElementById(&quot;foobar&quot;)&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; on a XML object from Mozilla's DOMParser stopped to work as before. Replacing the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;getElementById&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;$('#foobar', client.responseText).get(0)&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; might work without many other changes to your code. Updating your script to the above mentioned methods is strongly recommended, however.

== Conventions ==
* [[Manual:Coding conventions/JavaScript]] – keep if statements with brackets, use proper indention (block B in block A is indented more, visualize the tree), etc.
* [[Manual:Coding conventions/CSS]] – combine selectors, remove stuff now in core, etc.

== See also ==
* [[w:de:Wikipedia:Technik/Skin/JS/Obsolet]]
{{Shortcut|RL/MGU}}</text>
      <sha1>8k6cl6dfpafceqo1yg8pwp1r1xl7qns</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Project:Copyrights/pt-br</title>
    <ns>4</ns>
    <id>78422</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401633</id>
      <parentid>4378427</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:46:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4009" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
== Licenças no MediaWiki.org ==

Todo o conteúdo textual do MediaWiki.org é liberado sob uma das duas licenças.

* As págjihoknas de ajuda de domínio público são, como o nome indica, publicadas em [[:pt:domínio público|domínio público]] (PD).
* Todas as outras páginas são liberadas sob a licença [[w:Wikipedia:Text of Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License|Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported]] (CC BY-SA).

Ambas as licenças permitem que qualquer um re-utilizar o conteúdo da forma que escolher.
Isto inclui cobrar para o acesso ao conteúdo, distribuí-lo onde e como quiser, e modificá-lo em qualquer forma que entenderem.
As principais diferenças entre as duas licenças são:

* Se você alterar conteúdo CC BY-SA, as alterações também devem ser liberadas sob a licença CC BY-SA.
* Qualquer uso de conteúdo CC BY-SA deve fornecer crédito aos autores.

{{Note|1=Esta é uma comparação bastante básica para destacar os pontos principais. Existem outras diferenças que não foram mencionadas aqui. Por favor, procure aconselhamento jurídico adequado, se você estiver em dúvida sobre o que você está e o que não está autorizado a fazer com o material liberado sob uma licença.}}

As permissões específicas para imagens estão localizadas nas páginas de descrição das imagens.

== Como identificar a licença ==
As páginas de ajuda de domínio público estão incluídos dentro do namespace ''help''.
Isto significa que todos os títulos de página de ajuda começarão com '''Help:''' (por exemplo: {{ll|Help:Contents}}).
Eles também ganham uma &lt;span style=&quot;color:#00C&quot;&gt;borda azul grossa&lt;/span&gt; para destaca-los (como você pode ver se você seguir o link acima).

== Considerações para contribuintes de domínio público ==
Se você for contribuir para as páginas de ajuda de domínio público, certifique-se que todas as contribuições vêm de fontes de domínio público.
Isto significa que ou você escreveu isso sozinho, ou você tem algo copiado de outra fonte que está ''clara e inequivocamente'' liberada para o domínio público.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most importantly, '''do not contribute content released under the CC BY-SA or GFDL''' or any other &quot;open&quot; license.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It may appear that this is acceptable, because there is a certain amount of similarity between the licenses, but ''PD is not compatible with any other license'' in the way that the content with any other license can't be relicensed into PD (except that you are the author of the content).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, PD content can always be relicensed into any license.&lt;/span&gt;

Em particular:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not copy or transfer content from [[m:|meta.wikimedia.org]], [[w:|Wikipedia]] or any other Wikimedia projects into the Help: namespace as they are all released under the CC BY-SA.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may of course copy it to other places on MediaWiki.org, however.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Within the site, do not move pages from any other namespaces into the Help: namespace.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exception to the above rules is if you are the sole author of content for a page, in which case you may relicense your own material by posting it to the Help: namespace as public domain.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this is a '''one way''' process - you cannot change your mind once it has been done!&lt;/span&gt;

== Ver também ==
* {{ll|Project:General disclaimer|2=Discussão geral}}
* {{ll|Project:PD help|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Public domain help pages&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Project:Fair use policy|2=Política do Fair Use}}

[[Category:MediaWiki.org website{{#translation:}}|Copyright]]</text>
      <sha1>nftmlp5m5u6mwe6d5io570tihbegpdg</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401636</id>
      <parentid>5401633</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:46:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4003" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
== Licenças no MediaWiki.org ==

Todo o conteúdo textual do MediaWiki.org é liberado sob uma das duas licenças.

* As págjihoknas de ajuda de domínio público são, como o nome indica, publicadas em [[:pt:domínio público|domínio público]] (PD).
* Todas as outras páginas são liberadas sob a licença [[w:Wikipedia:ti ok Text of Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported the Commons Attribmution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported]] (CC BY-SA).

Ambas as licenças permitem que qualquer um re-utilizar o conteúdo da forma que escolher.
Isto inclui cobrar para o acesso ao conteúdo, distribuí-lo onde e como quiser, e modificá-lo em qualquer forma que entenderem.
As principais diferenças entre as duas licenças são:

* Se você alterar conteúdo CC BY-SA, as alterações também devem ser liberadas sob a licença CC BY-SA.
* Qualquer uso de conteúdo CC BY-SA deve fornecer crédito aos autores.

{{Note|1=Esta é uma comparação bastante básica para destacar os pontos principais. Existem outras diferenças que não foram mencionadas aqui. Por favor, procure aconselhamento jurídico adequado, se você estiver em dúvida sobre o que você está e o que não está autorizado a fazer com o material liberado sob uma licença.}}

As permissões específicas para imagens estão localizadas nas páginas de descrição das imagens.

== Como identificar a licença ==
As páginas de ajuda de domínio público estão incluídos dentro do namespace ''help''.
Isto significa que todos os títulos de página de ajuda começarão com '''Help:''' (por exemplo: {{ll|Help:Contents}}).
Eles também ganham uma &lt;span style=&quot;color:#00C&quot;&gt;borda azul grossa&lt;/span&gt; para destaca-los (como você pode ver se você seguir o link acima).

== Considerações para contribuintes de domínio público ==
Se você for contribuir para as páginas de ajuda de domínio público, certifique-se que todas as contribuições vêm de fontes de domínio público.
Isto significa que ou você escreveu isso sozinho, ou você tem algo copiado de outra fonte que está ''clara e inequivocamente'' liberada para o domínio público.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most importantly, '''do not contribute content released under the CC BY-SA or GFDL''' or any other &quot;open&quot; license.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It may appear that this is acceptable, because there is a certain amount of similarity between the licenses, but ''PD is not compatible with any other license'' in the way that the content with any other license can't be relicensed into PD (except that you are the author of the content).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, PD content can always be relicensed into any license.&lt;/span&gt;

Em particular:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not copy or transfer content from [[m:|meta.wikimedia.org]], [[w:|Wikipedia]] or any other Wikimedia projects into the Help: namespace as they are all released under the CC BY-SA.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may of course copy it to other places on MediaWiki.org, however.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Within the site, do not move pages from any other namespaces into the Help: namespace.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exception to the above rules is if you are the sole author of content for a page, in which case you may relicense your own material by posting it to the Help: namespace as public domain.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this is a '''one way''' process - you cannot change your mind once it has been done!&lt;/span&gt;

== Ver também ==
* {{ll|Project:General disclaimer|2=Discussão geral}}
* {{ll|Project:PD help|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Public domain help pages&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Project:Fair use policy|2=Política do Fair Use}}

[[Category:MediaWiki.org website{{#translation:}}|Copyright]]</text>
      <sha1>ltn5yhggweq2gia0kw4rggbn183fljl</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401638</id>
      <parentid>5401636</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:47:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4018" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
== Licenças no MediaWiki.org ==

Todo o conteúdo textual do MediaWiki.org é liberado sob uma das duas licenças.

* As págjihoknas de ajuda de domínio público são, como o nome indica, Mpublicadas h ky nhi aaj em [[:pjt:domínio público|domínio público]] (PD).
* Todas as outras páginas são liberadas sob a licença [[w:Wikipedia:ti ok Text of Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported the Commons Attribmution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported]] (CC BY-SA).

Ambas as licenças permitem que qualquer um re-utilizar o conteúdo da forma que escolher.
Isto inclui cobrar para o acesso ao conteúdo, distribuí-lo onde e como quiser, e modificá-lo em qualquer forma que entenderem.
As principais diferenças entre as duas licenças são:

* Se você alterar conteúdo CC BY-SA, as alterações também devem ser liberadas sob a licença CC BY-SA.
* Qualquer uso de conteúdo CC BY-SA deve fornecer crédito aos autores.

{{Note|1=Esta é uma comparação bastante básica para destacar os pontos principais. Existem outras diferenças que não foram mencionadas aqui. Por favor, procure aconselhamento jurídico adequado, se você estiver em dúvida sobre o que você está e o que não está autorizado a fazer com o material liberado sob uma licença.}}

As permissões específicas para imagens estão localizadas nas páginas de descrição das imagens.

== Como identificar a licença ==
As páginas de ajuda de domínio público estão incluídos dentro do namespace ''help''.
Isto significa que todos os títulos de página de ajuda começarão com '''Help:''' (por exemplo: {{ll|Help:Contents}}).
Eles também ganham uma &lt;span style=&quot;color:#00C&quot;&gt;borda azul grossa&lt;/span&gt; para destaca-los (como você pode ver se você seguir o link acima).

== Considerações para contribuintes de domínio público ==
Se você for contribuir para as páginas de ajuda de domínio público, certifique-se que todas as contribuições vêm de fontes de domínio público.
Isto significa que ou você escreveu isso sozinho, ou você tem algo copiado de outra fonte que está ''clara e inequivocamente'' liberada para o domínio público.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most importantly, '''do not contribute content released under the CC BY-SA or GFDL''' or any other &quot;open&quot; license.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It may appear that this is acceptable, because there is a certain amount of similarity between the licenses, but ''PD is not compatible with any other license'' in the way that the content with any other license can't be relicensed into PD (except that you are the author of the content).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, PD content can always be relicensed into any license.&lt;/span&gt;

Em particular:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not copy or transfer content from [[m:|meta.wikimedia.org]], [[w:|Wikipedia]] or any other Wikimedia projects into the Help: namespace as they are all released under the CC BY-SA.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may of course copy it to other places on MediaWiki.org, however.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Within the site, do not move pages from any other namespaces into the Help: namespace.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exception to the above rules is if you are the sole author of content for a page, in which case you may relicense your own material by posting it to the Help: namespace as public domain.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this is a '''one way''' process - you cannot change your mind once it has been done!&lt;/span&gt;

== Ver também ==
* {{ll|Project:General disclaimer|2=Discussão geral}}
* {{ll|Project:PD help|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Public domain help pages&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Project:Fair use policy|2=Política do Fair Use}}

[[Category:MediaWiki.org website{{#translation:}}|Copyright]]</text>
      <sha1>e33yi6t4jrnxwkkzswaseuor6ltidir</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401643</id>
      <parentid>5401638</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T14:01:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Clump</username>
        <id>81610</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12|2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12]] ([[User talk:2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12|talk]]) to last version by Shirayuki</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4024" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
== Licenças no MediaWiki.org ==

Todo o conteúdo textual do MediaWiki.org é liberado sob uma das duas licenças.

* As págjihoknas de ajuda de domínio público são, como o nome indica, Mpublicadas h ky nhi aaj em [[:pjt:domínio público|domínio público]] (PD).
* Todas as outras páginas são liberadas sob a licença [[w:Wikipedia:Text of Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License|Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported]] (CC BY-SA).

Ambas as licenças permitem que qualquer um re-utilizar o conteúdo da forma que escolher.
Isto inclui cobrar para o acesso ao conteúdo, distribuí-lo onde e como quiser, e modificá-lo em qualquer forma que entenderem.
As principais diferenças entre as duas licenças são:

* Se você alterar conteúdo CC BY-SA, as alterações também devem ser liberadas sob a licença CC BY-SA.
* Qualquer uso de conteúdo CC BY-SA deve fornecer crédito aos autores.

{{Note|1=Esta é uma comparação bastante básica para destacar os pontos principais. Existem outras diferenças que não foram mencionadas aqui. Por favor, procure aconselhamento jurídico adequado, se você estiver em dúvida sobre o que você está e o que não está autorizado a fazer com o material liberado sob uma licença.}}

As permissões específicas para imagens estão localizadas nas páginas de descrição das imagens.

== Como identificar a licença ==
As páginas de ajuda de domínio público estão incluídos dentro do namespace ''help''.
Isto significa que todos os títulos de página de ajuda começarão com '''Help:''' (por exemplo: {{ll|Help:Contents}}).
Eles também ganham uma &lt;span style=&quot;color:#00C&quot;&gt;borda azul grossa&lt;/span&gt; para destaca-los (como você pode ver se você seguir o link acima).

== Considerações para contribuintes de domínio público ==
Se você for contribuir para as páginas de ajuda de domínio público, certifique-se que todas as contribuições vêm de fontes de domínio público.
Isto significa que ou você escreveu isso sozinho, ou você tem algo copiado de outra fonte que está ''clara e inequivocamente'' liberada para o domínio público.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most importantly, '''do not contribute content released under the CC BY-SA or GFDL''' or any other &quot;open&quot; license.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It may appear that this is acceptable, because there is a certain amount of similarity between the licenses, but ''PD is not compatible with any other license'' in the way that the content with any other license can't be relicensed into PD (except that you are the author of the content).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, PD content can always be relicensed into any license.&lt;/span&gt;

Em particular:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not copy or transfer content from [[m:|meta.wikimedia.org]], [[w:|Wikipedia]] or any other Wikimedia projects into the Help: namespace as they are all released under the CC BY-SA.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may of course copy it to other places on MediaWiki.org, however.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Within the site, do not move pages from any other namespaces into the Help: namespace.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exception to the above rules is if you are the sole author of content for a page, in which case you may relicense your own material by posting it to the Help: namespace as public domain.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this is a '''one way''' process - you cannot change your mind once it has been done!&lt;/span&gt;

== Ver também ==
* {{ll|Project:General disclaimer|2=Discussão geral}}
* {{ll|Project:PD help|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Public domain help pages&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Project:Fair use policy|2=Política do Fair Use}}

[[Category:MediaWiki.org website{{#translation:}}|Copyright]]</text>
      <sha1>b1q9umylvcxkre7g507eapqvv87cc03</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401645</id>
      <parentid>5401643</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T14:01:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Clump</username>
        <id>81610</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12|2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12]] ([[User talk:2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12|talk]]) to last version by Fabsouza1</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4005" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
== Licenças no MediaWiki.org ==

Todo o conteúdo textual do MediaWiki.org é liberado sob uma das duas licenças.

* As páginas de ajuda de domínio público são, como o nome indica, publicadas em [[:pt:domínio público|domínio público]] (PD).
* Todas as outras páginas são liberadas sob a licença [[w:Wikipedia:Text of Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License|Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported]] (CC BY-SA).

Ambas as licenças permitem que qualquer um re-utilizar o conteúdo da forma que escolher.
Isto inclui cobrar para o acesso ao conteúdo, distribuí-lo onde e como quiser, e modificá-lo em qualquer forma que entenderem.
As principais diferenças entre as duas licenças são:

* Se você alterar conteúdo CC BY-SA, as alterações também devem ser liberadas sob a licença CC BY-SA.
* Qualquer uso de conteúdo CC BY-SA deve fornecer crédito aos autores.

{{Note|1=Esta é uma comparação bastante básica para destacar os pontos principais. Existem outras diferenças que não foram mencionadas aqui. Por favor, procure aconselhamento jurídico adequado, se você estiver em dúvida sobre o que você está e o que não está autorizado a fazer com o material liberado sob uma licença.}}

As permissões específicas para imagens estão localizadas nas páginas de descrição das imagens.

== Como identificar a licença ==
As páginas de ajuda de domínio público estão incluídos dentro do namespace ''help''.
Isto significa que todos os títulos de página de ajuda começarão com '''Help:''' (por exemplo: {{ll|Help:Contents}}).
Eles também ganham uma &lt;span style=&quot;color:#00C&quot;&gt;borda azul grossa&lt;/span&gt; para destaca-los (como você pode ver se você seguir o link acima).

== Considerações para contribuintes de domínio público ==
Se você for contribuir para as páginas de ajuda de domínio público, certifique-se que todas as contribuições vêm de fontes de domínio público.
Isto significa que ou você escreveu isso sozinho, ou você tem algo copiado de outra fonte que está ''clara e inequivocamente'' liberada para o domínio público.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most importantly, '''do not contribute content released under the CC BY-SA or GFDL''' or any other &quot;open&quot; license.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It may appear that this is acceptable, because there is a certain amount of similarity between the licenses, but ''PD is not compatible with any other license'' in the way that the content with any other license can't be relicensed into PD (except that you are the author of the content).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, PD content can always be relicensed into any license.&lt;/span&gt;

Em particular:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not copy or transfer content from [[m:|meta.wikimedia.org]], [[w:|Wikipedia]] or any other Wikimedia projects into the Help: namespace as they are all released under the CC BY-SA.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may of course copy it to other places on MediaWiki.org, however.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Within the site, do not move pages from any other namespaces into the Help: namespace.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exception to the above rules is if you are the sole author of content for a page, in which case you may relicense your own material by posting it to the Help: namespace as public domain.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this is a '''one way''' process - you cannot change your mind once it has been done!&lt;/span&gt;

== Ver também ==
* {{ll|Project:General disclaimer|2=Discussão geral}}
* {{ll|Project:PD help|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Public domain help pages&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Project:Fair use policy|2=Política do Fair Use}}

[[Category:MediaWiki.org website{{#translation:}}|Copyright]]</text>
      <sha1>fypxj2b8410y9h3hw9zvy1dbm3oet2p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/de-formal</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>83017</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402839</id>
      <parentid>4505772</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:31:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8813" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Diese Seite erklärt, wie man offline übersetzt.
Wenn Sie daran interessiert sind, wissen Sie vielleicht schon, was [[w:Gettext|Gettext-PO]]-Dateien sind.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this reason, we'll only discuss how to use them in a wiki with the Translate extension here.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise, you're probably more interested in the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|How to translate]] tutorial for online translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Vielleicht wollen Sie auch ganz allgemein nicht die Web-Benutzeroberfläche benutzen, wenn Sie eine sehr langsame oder begrenzte Internetverbindung oder einige besonders schöne Offline-Werkzeuge haben, an die Sie sich gewöhnt haben oder die Sie vorziehen. Seien Sie sich allerdings im Klaren darüber, dass die Übersetzungserweiterung als gemeinschaftlicher Prozess konzipiert wurde. Dies bedeutet, dass Sie die Dateien nicht für längere Zeit offline behalten sollten und dass Sie immer erst kurz, bevor Sie mit dem Übersetzen anfangen, eine neue Datei herunterladen sollten. Andernfalls können Sie eventuell in Konflikt mit anderen Übersetzern geraten, die in dem Wiki arbeiten.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Exportieren ==

Sie können jede Nachrichtengruppe als Gettext-PO-Datei herunterladen, indem Sie in Spezial:Übersetzen die Aufgabe ''Export für Offline-Übersetzung'' auswählen. Einige Wikis haben eventuell diese Aufgabe deaktiviert. Sie sollten alle lokalen Anleitungen überprüfen, wie diese Dateien zu verarbeiten sind, bevor Sie anfangen.

{{Note|1=Obwohl einige Nachrichtengruppen eine Exportoption haben können, die Übersetzungen im ursprünglichen Format dieser Gruppe exportiert, und dieses Format Gettext sein kann, sind das nicht die Dateien, die für Offline-Übersetzungen verwendet werden können!}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Die Dateien sind Standard-Gettext-PO-Dateien mit etwas zusätzlicher Information. Die Kopfzeile enthält einige zusätzliche Felder, die unten zu sehen sind; das &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; für jede Nachricht beinhaltet eine Kennzeichnung, die die Übersetzungserweiterung benötigt. Einige Bearbeitungsprogramme sind dafür bekannt, dass sie entweder die Kopfzeilenkommentare oder die &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;-Zeilen abschneiden; also beginnen Sie mit einer kleinen Datei, um sicherzugehen, dass Ihr Programm sie nicht entfernt – es ist nicht lustig festzustellen, dass das Programm fehlerhaft war, nachdem man Hunderte von Nachrichten übersetzt hat, die man nicht zurück ins Online-System importieren kann! Die Nachrichtendokumentation wird als Übersetzungskommentare exportiert.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Wichtige Kopfzeilenfelder:

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, &quot;ext-abc&quot; is the name of the message group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For translatable pages, the corresponding message group has the name &quot;page-&quot; + the page name (i.e. for the page &quot;Example&quot;, the header would contain the line &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;

Beispieleintrag in einer Gettext-PO-Datei:
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Importieren ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Es ist nicht nötig, die Datei vollständig zu übersetzen. Teilweise übersetzte Nachrichtengruppen hochzuladen, ist völlig ausreichend. Es gibt zwei Wege, diese Dateien zu importieren. Die Benutzer mit den richtigen Benutzerrechten können Spezial:Importiere_Übersetzungen verwenden, um die Übersetzungen hochzuladen und zu importieren. Die Spezialseite verarbeitet die Datei, zeigt die Änderungen an und lässt den Benutzer diese importieren. Bei großen Dateien mit vielen Änderungen kann das Importieren mehrere Schritte benötigen, da die Verarbeitungszeit begrenzt ist.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

Das Importieren kann auch mittels Verwendung eines Kommandozeilenskripts in &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt; durchgeführt werden. Das ist weniger flexibel, kann aber alles in einem Rutsch importieren. Es benötigt auch einen Eingriff von jemandem mit [[:w:de:Betriebssystem-Shell|Shell]]zugang zum Server.

Die Art und Weise, wie Importe von Offline-Übersetzungen behandelt werden (oder nicht), hängt von Ihrem Wiki ab.

== Gettext-Bearbeitungsprogramme ==

Hier folgen einige Hilfsprogramme, die Sie verwenden können, um die Dateien offline zu bearbeiten:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : Available for all platforms supporting the [http://www.wxwidgets.org/ wxWidgets toolkit], tested on Unix with GTK+ and Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''WARNING:''' make sure you are using  version 1.4.2 or above, otherwise &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; lines are dropped and your work cannot be processed.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>e1u5l9ohchkbjh8wtm2xvaccyfv18oo</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402841</id>
      <parentid>5402839</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:31:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8780" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Diese Seite erklärt, wie man offline übersetzt.
Wenn Sie daran interessiert sind, wissen Sie vielleicht schon, was [[w:Gettext|Gettext-PO]]-Dateien sind.
Aus diesem Grund werden wir hier nur diskutieren, wie man sie in einem Wiki mit der Übersetzungserweiterung verwendet.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise, you're probably more interested in the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|How to translate]] tutorial for online translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Vielleicht wollen Sie auch ganz allgemein nicht die Web-Benutzeroberfläche benutzen, wenn Sie eine sehr langsame oder begrenzte Internetverbindung oder einige besonders schöne Offline-Werkzeuge haben, an die Sie sich gewöhnt haben oder die Sie vorziehen. Seien Sie sich allerdings im Klaren darüber, dass die Übersetzungserweiterung als gemeinschaftlicher Prozess konzipiert wurde. Dies bedeutet, dass Sie die Dateien nicht für längere Zeit offline behalten sollten und dass Sie immer erst kurz, bevor Sie mit dem Übersetzen anfangen, eine neue Datei herunterladen sollten. Andernfalls können Sie eventuell in Konflikt mit anderen Übersetzern geraten, die in dem Wiki arbeiten.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Exportieren ==

Sie können jede Nachrichtengruppe als Gettext-PO-Datei herunterladen, indem Sie in Spezial:Übersetzen die Aufgabe ''Export für Offline-Übersetzung'' auswählen. Einige Wikis haben eventuell diese Aufgabe deaktiviert. Sie sollten alle lokalen Anleitungen überprüfen, wie diese Dateien zu verarbeiten sind, bevor Sie anfangen.

{{Note|1=Obwohl einige Nachrichtengruppen eine Exportoption haben können, die Übersetzungen im ursprünglichen Format dieser Gruppe exportiert, und dieses Format Gettext sein kann, sind das nicht die Dateien, die für Offline-Übersetzungen verwendet werden können!}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Die Dateien sind Standard-Gettext-PO-Dateien mit etwas zusätzlicher Information. Die Kopfzeile enthält einige zusätzliche Felder, die unten zu sehen sind; das &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; für jede Nachricht beinhaltet eine Kennzeichnung, die die Übersetzungserweiterung benötigt. Einige Bearbeitungsprogramme sind dafür bekannt, dass sie entweder die Kopfzeilenkommentare oder die &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;-Zeilen abschneiden; also beginnen Sie mit einer kleinen Datei, um sicherzugehen, dass Ihr Programm sie nicht entfernt – es ist nicht lustig festzustellen, dass das Programm fehlerhaft war, nachdem man Hunderte von Nachrichten übersetzt hat, die man nicht zurück ins Online-System importieren kann! Die Nachrichtendokumentation wird als Übersetzungskommentare exportiert.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Wichtige Kopfzeilenfelder:

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, &quot;ext-abc&quot; is the name of the message group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For translatable pages, the corresponding message group has the name &quot;page-&quot; + the page name (i.e. for the page &quot;Example&quot;, the header would contain the line &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;

Beispieleintrag in einer Gettext-PO-Datei:
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Importieren ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Es ist nicht nötig, die Datei vollständig zu übersetzen. Teilweise übersetzte Nachrichtengruppen hochzuladen, ist völlig ausreichend. Es gibt zwei Wege, diese Dateien zu importieren. Die Benutzer mit den richtigen Benutzerrechten können Spezial:Importiere_Übersetzungen verwenden, um die Übersetzungen hochzuladen und zu importieren. Die Spezialseite verarbeitet die Datei, zeigt die Änderungen an und lässt den Benutzer diese importieren. Bei großen Dateien mit vielen Änderungen kann das Importieren mehrere Schritte benötigen, da die Verarbeitungszeit begrenzt ist.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

Das Importieren kann auch mittels Verwendung eines Kommandozeilenskripts in &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt; durchgeführt werden. Das ist weniger flexibel, kann aber alles in einem Rutsch importieren. Es benötigt auch einen Eingriff von jemandem mit [[:w:de:Betriebssystem-Shell|Shell]]zugang zum Server.

Die Art und Weise, wie Importe von Offline-Übersetzungen behandelt werden (oder nicht), hängt von Ihrem Wiki ab.

== Gettext-Bearbeitungsprogramme ==

Hier folgen einige Hilfsprogramme, die Sie verwenden können, um die Dateien offline zu bearbeiten:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : Available for all platforms supporting the [http://www.wxwidgets.org/ wxWidgets toolkit], tested on Unix with GTK+ and Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''WARNING:''' make sure you are using  version 1.4.2 or above, otherwise &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; lines are dropped and your work cannot be processed.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>t950o57ec6qa60816rcmrht7h38yct3</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402843</id>
      <parentid>5402841</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:31:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8743" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Diese Seite erklärt, wie man offline übersetzt.
Wenn Sie daran interessiert sind, wissen Sie vielleicht schon, was [[w:Gettext|Gettext-PO]]-Dateien sind.
Aus diesem Grund werden wir hier nur diskutieren, wie man sie in einem Wiki mit der Übersetzungserweiterung verwendet.
Andernfalls sind Sie möglicherweise mehr an der „[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|Übersetzungsanleitung]]“ für Online-Übersetzungen interessiert.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Vielleicht wollen Sie auch ganz allgemein nicht die Web-Benutzeroberfläche benutzen, wenn Sie eine sehr langsame oder begrenzte Internetverbindung oder einige besonders schöne Offline-Werkzeuge haben, an die Sie sich gewöhnt haben oder die Sie vorziehen. Seien Sie sich allerdings im Klaren darüber, dass die Übersetzungserweiterung als gemeinschaftlicher Prozess konzipiert wurde. Dies bedeutet, dass Sie die Dateien nicht für längere Zeit offline behalten sollten und dass Sie immer erst kurz, bevor Sie mit dem Übersetzen anfangen, eine neue Datei herunterladen sollten. Andernfalls können Sie eventuell in Konflikt mit anderen Übersetzern geraten, die in dem Wiki arbeiten.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Exportieren ==

Sie können jede Nachrichtengruppe als Gettext-PO-Datei herunterladen, indem Sie in Spezial:Übersetzen die Aufgabe ''Export für Offline-Übersetzung'' auswählen. Einige Wikis haben eventuell diese Aufgabe deaktiviert. Sie sollten alle lokalen Anleitungen überprüfen, wie diese Dateien zu verarbeiten sind, bevor Sie anfangen.

{{Note|1=Obwohl einige Nachrichtengruppen eine Exportoption haben können, die Übersetzungen im ursprünglichen Format dieser Gruppe exportiert, und dieses Format Gettext sein kann, sind das nicht die Dateien, die für Offline-Übersetzungen verwendet werden können!}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Die Dateien sind Standard-Gettext-PO-Dateien mit etwas zusätzlicher Information. Die Kopfzeile enthält einige zusätzliche Felder, die unten zu sehen sind; das &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; für jede Nachricht beinhaltet eine Kennzeichnung, die die Übersetzungserweiterung benötigt. Einige Bearbeitungsprogramme sind dafür bekannt, dass sie entweder die Kopfzeilenkommentare oder die &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;-Zeilen abschneiden; also beginnen Sie mit einer kleinen Datei, um sicherzugehen, dass Ihr Programm sie nicht entfernt – es ist nicht lustig festzustellen, dass das Programm fehlerhaft war, nachdem man Hunderte von Nachrichten übersetzt hat, die man nicht zurück ins Online-System importieren kann! Die Nachrichtendokumentation wird als Übersetzungskommentare exportiert.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Wichtige Kopfzeilenfelder:

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, &quot;ext-abc&quot; is the name of the message group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For translatable pages, the corresponding message group has the name &quot;page-&quot; + the page name (i.e. for the page &quot;Example&quot;, the header would contain the line &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;

Beispieleintrag in einer Gettext-PO-Datei:
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Importieren ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Es ist nicht nötig, die Datei vollständig zu übersetzen. Teilweise übersetzte Nachrichtengruppen hochzuladen, ist völlig ausreichend. Es gibt zwei Wege, diese Dateien zu importieren. Die Benutzer mit den richtigen Benutzerrechten können Spezial:Importiere_Übersetzungen verwenden, um die Übersetzungen hochzuladen und zu importieren. Die Spezialseite verarbeitet die Datei, zeigt die Änderungen an und lässt den Benutzer diese importieren. Bei großen Dateien mit vielen Änderungen kann das Importieren mehrere Schritte benötigen, da die Verarbeitungszeit begrenzt ist.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

Das Importieren kann auch mittels Verwendung eines Kommandozeilenskripts in &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt; durchgeführt werden. Das ist weniger flexibel, kann aber alles in einem Rutsch importieren. Es benötigt auch einen Eingriff von jemandem mit [[:w:de:Betriebssystem-Shell|Shell]]zugang zum Server.

Die Art und Weise, wie Importe von Offline-Übersetzungen behandelt werden (oder nicht), hängt von Ihrem Wiki ab.

== Gettext-Bearbeitungsprogramme ==

Hier folgen einige Hilfsprogramme, die Sie verwenden können, um die Dateien offline zu bearbeiten:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : Available for all platforms supporting the [http://www.wxwidgets.org/ wxWidgets toolkit], tested on Unix with GTK+ and Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''WARNING:''' make sure you are using  version 1.4.2 or above, otherwise &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; lines are dropped and your work cannot be processed.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>g8b98eockdch96z3hto80cwicgnr9zk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/fr</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>83284</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403326</id>
      <parentid>5380425</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:23:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="19020" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow users to enable JS-based, user-provided gadgets from their preferences page&lt;/span&gt;
|example         = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikimedia Commons: [[commons:Special:Gadgets|Gadget overview]], [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|user preferences]] (click &quot;Gadgets&quot;; you need to be logged in of course)&lt;/span&gt;
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
L'extension '''Gadgets''' apporte un moyen pour les utilisateurs d'utiliser des &quot;gadgets&quot; écrits en JavaScript ou CSS que d'autres utilisateurs du wiki ont fournis.

Les gadgets sont constitués de {{ll|snippets}} de JavaScript et/ou CSS situés sur les pages de l'espace de noms MediaWiki.
Chaque gadget est défini par une ligne dans [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]], fournissant un nom et une description pour le gadget, et une liste du code JavaScript et CSS qu'il utilise (voir la section ''[[#Usage|Utilisation]]'' ci-dessous).

Comme les gadgets sont définis dans l'espace de noms &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:&lt;/code&gt; (la liste décrivant les gadgets comme le code lui-même), seuls les sysops (administrateurs d'interface depuis 1.32) peuvent modifier le code.
Et c'est une bonne chose : seuls les utilisateurs particulièrement fiables au sein de la communauté du wiki sont supposés aptes à modifier le code JavaScript utilisé par d'autres utilisateurs, dans la mesure où le JavaScript peut être facilement utilisé pour hacker des comptes ou espionner des gens.

== Installation ==
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
== Utilisation ==
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|Sélection de certains gadgets aux préférences de l'utilisateur dans de.wikipedia]]
Il y a deux façons de définir les gadgets en fonction de &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;.
S'il est &lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt; (valeur par défaut), la liste des gadgets disponibles est définie sur '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''.
De manière alternative, les définitions de gadget sont définies sur les pages de l'espace de noms [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|Définition de gadget]] lorsque &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt; est défini sur &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;.

{{caution|1=La migration des définitions de gadget existantes n'est pas encore prise en charge. Vous perdrez donc les gadgets précédemment définis après avoir modifié cette option.}}

Une fois créés avec au moins un gadget valide, les gadgets définis s'affichent dans la section &quot;Gadgets&quot; de [[Special:Preferences]], afin que les utilisateurs puissent choisir les gadgets qu'ils souhaitent utiliser.
Un aperçu des gadgets définis par MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition est également affiché sur '''[[Special:Gadgets]]''', ainsi que des liens vers les messages système respectifs, pour faciliter l'édition.
Les statistiques d'utilisation des gadgets autres que par défaut sont visibles à '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
=== Format ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===== Utiliser [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]] =====
&lt;/div&gt;
Chaque ligne de MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition qui commence par un ou plusieurs caractères &quot;*&quot; (astérisques) définit un gadget ; il doit avoir la forme suivante :

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [== Options (peut être omis) ==] | Noms de page

Le premier champ (&quot;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&quot; dans l'exemple) est le ''nom interne'' du gadget et fait référence à un message système ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''' dans l'exemple) qui contient une courte description du gadget, en utilisant la syntaxe wiki.

{{note|1=Le 'nom interne' est utilisé comme partie intégrante du nom d'un champ de formulaire et doit suivre les [https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id rules defined for NAME attribute values].
Cela signifie qu'il doit commencer par une lettre latine de base (&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;) et peut être suivi de n'importe quel nombre de lettres, de chiffres (&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;), de tirets (&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;), de traits de soulignement (&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;), de deux-points (&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;) et de points (&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;).}}

Format des options:

 [option1 | option2 | ... optionN]

les espaces peuvent être omis.
Une option unique peut être constituée d'un nom d'option unique (dans ce cas, il s'agit d'une option d'indicateur) ou contenir une liste de valeurs séparées par des virgules:

 option = value1, value2, value3

Exemples:
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
ou
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
ou
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===== Utilisation de l'espace de noms de définition de gadget =====
&lt;/div&gt;

La création de la page [[Gadget definition:mygadget]] et l'insertion du code [[w:JSON|JSON]] ci-dessous ont le même effet que &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In above example, the [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] and the [[Gadget:mygadget.css]] are used.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember the &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; option is always true in the gadget definition namespace.&lt;/span&gt;

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add the following in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} to provide the appropriate permissions for users who are within the interface-admin group.&lt;/span&gt;
La modification de pages dans l'espace de noms Gadget nécessite le droit &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; et la modification de pages dans l'espace de noms de définition Gadget nécessite le droit &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


=== Options ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! Nom
! Paramètres
! Description
! Depuis
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with {{ll|ResourceLoader}}.&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt; || Voir la [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|liste des modules par défaut]]. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|privileges]].&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;''
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide the gadget from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Preferences]] page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be used in two ways:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to Common.js).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you need to add both: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated skin names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; in the URL, {{phab|T199478}}).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated action names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g. &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/span&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specifying &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; action will also load it on &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/span&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mark this gadget as [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the require() function.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (default), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set the {{ll|ResourceLoader}} target(s) for the gadget.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;or&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/span&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| Noms de modules séparés par des virgules
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pre-release&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Makes the gadget to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|top-loaded]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

Vous pouvez spécifier des dépendances supplémentaires pour vos gadgets, par exemple :

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; with mygadget.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/span&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|permissions]], not user groups like [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/div&gt;
Voici quelques exemples réels :

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

=== Pages ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' and '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css''' in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;.js&quot; or &quot;.css&quot;, respectively.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/div&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into {{tag|nowiki}} and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See the first and last lines of [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] for an example.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Sections ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The list of gadgets in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;=&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

Cela définirait une nouvelle section, avec le titre défini sur la page [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]].

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

== Voir aussi ==
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=Gestionnaire de gadgets}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9stt82etogi4ddhk9aexv1nf3rd6fi8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Gerrit/New repositories/Requests/Entries</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>84638</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401631</id>
      <parentid>5401584</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:43:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>QChrisNonWMF</username>
        <id>2122778</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* cloud/toolforge/kube-container-updater */ Mark done</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="39746" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;{{mbox|text='''&lt;big&gt;[[Gerrit/New_repositories/Requests|Click here]] to visit the main Git repositories request page. Your edit has been added there.&lt;/big&gt;'''&lt;br/&gt;This page is meant only to feed entries into the primary [[Gerrit/New_repositories/Requests|new Git repositories request]] page.  The wikitable syntax is intentionally left &quot;open&quot; to allow for new entries submitted via the Request button. Closing the table here will break it on other wikipages.}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;

&lt;includeonly&gt;
You'll be telling us your wikitech/LDAP username, what code review model you want  ([[Gerrit/Privilege policy#Merging without review|by default]] this should be &quot;Merge review&quot;), and what you want the project name in gerrit to be. ''Click request, then fill in the fields on the page creation screen:''
&lt;div style=&quot;padding:15px; background-color:#eeeeff;&quot;&gt;&lt;inputbox&gt;
type=comment
break=no
editintro=Gerrit/New repositories/Request preload intro
hidden=true
preload=Gerrit/New repositories/Request preload
default=Gerrit/New repositories/Requests/Entries
buttonlabel=Request
nosummary=true
&lt;/inputbox&gt;&lt;/div&gt;


{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
! Extension
! Developer
! Preferred model
! Phabricator project
! Comments
! Status

|-
| '''Example'''
| Alison
| Merge review
| [[phab:tag/Documentation]]
| Early stages of development.
| {{done}} --[[User:Example|Admin user]] 09:56, 14 February 2012 (UTC)

|-
| mediawiki/skins/Cavendish
| [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]]
| Merge review
| [[phab:tag/Other-skins]]
| Please import this from [https://github.com/DaSchTour/Cavendish GitHub], as per [https://github.com/DaSchTour/Cavendish/issues/33 this conversation]. (If it's not too much of a hassle to rewrite the author of commits made by &quot;root&quot; since 1 November 2020 to me, that'd be great, but definitely just a bonus rather than anything else. :-) Thanks in advance! --[[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] &lt;sub&gt;([[User talk:Jack Phoenix|Contact]])&lt;/sub&gt; 21:46, 30 December 2021 (UTC)&lt;!--do not forget to sign your request --&gt;
| LGTM. But since the repo is in DaSchTour's GitHub, I've reached out to DaSchTour if DaSchTour is ok with the import. --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 11:11, 31 December 2021 (UTC)

:I did not hear from DaSchTour, so I imported the repo and rewrote the recent commits by root to your name. Note though that there is a &lt;code&gt;2.5.0&lt;/code&gt; tag on one of the commits from root. I did not want to move/rewrite that. If you want that moved as well let me know. --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 09:41, 13 January 2022 (UTC)

{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/skins/Cavendish mediawiki/skins/Cavendish] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-skins-Cavendish GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/SCAV/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 09:41, 13 January 2022 (UTC)


|-
| cloud/toolforge/toolforge-cli
| dcaro
| Merge review
| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/tag/toolforge/ Toolforge]
| Should have the same permissions as the parent cloud/toolforge project, and use main as the default branch. --[[User:DCaro (WMF)|DCaro (WMF)]] ([[User talk:DCaro (WMF)|talk]]) 16:33, 7 January 2022 (UTC)&lt;!--do not forget to sign your request --&gt;
| {{done}} Sorry for the delay! Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/cloud/toolforge/toolforge-cli cloud/toolforge/toolforge-cli] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/cloud-toolforge-toolforge-cli GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/CTTC/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 09:43, 13 January 2022 (UTC)


|-
| mediawiki/extensions/BlueSpiceProDistributionConnector
| rvogel
| Merge review
| 
| Please set group &quot;bluespice&quot; as owner
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/BlueSpiceProDistributionConnector mediawiki/extensions/BlueSpiceProDistributionConnector] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-BlueSpiceProDistributionConnector GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EBVM/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 09:46, 13 January 2022 (UTC)

|-
| mediawiki-extensions-CategoryExplorer
| jdlrobson
| Merge review
| N/A
| Please import https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-CategoryExplorer and make the github repo read only. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 05:01, 27 January 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/CategoryExplorer mediawiki/extensions/CategoryExplorer] 

([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ECXP/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 13:13, 27 January 2022 (UTC)

|-
| PageProperties
| thomas-topway-it
| Merge review
| 
| One-time import of the code and then the development will continue on Gerrit

Please import from https://github.com/thomas-topway-it/mediawiki-extensions-PageProperties
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/PageProperties mediawiki/extensions/PageProperties] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-PageProperties GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EPPR/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 15:49, 1 February 2022 (UTC)

|-
| mediawiki/extensions/TuleapWikiFarm
| rvogel
| Merge review
| 
|
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/TuleapWikiFarm mediawiki/extensions/TuleapWikiFarm] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-TuleapWikiFarm GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ETWF/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 09:03, 10 February 2022 (UTC)

|-
| analytics/datahub
| BTullis
| Merge review
| [[phab:tag/Data-Catalog]]
| We would like to make a local copy of https://github.com/linkedin/datahub/ which will be used with the deployment pipeline to build the project and create our own WMF containers. We would also appreciate a long-running branch named &lt;code&gt;wmf&lt;/code&gt; --[[User:BTullis (WMF)|BTullis (WMF)]] ([[User talk:BTullis (WMF)|talk]]) 14:09, 11 February 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/analytics/datahub analytics/datahub] 

([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/3101/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:TCipriani (WMF)|TCipriani (WMF)]] ([[User talk:TCipriani (WMF)|talk]]) 22:56, 11 February 2022 (UTC)

Added corresponding [https://github.com/wikimedia/analytics-datahub GitHub repo] --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 10:34, 20 February 2022 (UTC)

|-
| mediawiki/extensions/PageOwnership
| thomas-topway-it
| Merge review
| 
| One-time import of the code and then the development will continue on Gerrit
Please import from https://github.com/thomas-topway-it/mediawiki-extensions-PageOwnership Thank you! [[User:thomas-topway-it]]
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/PageOwnership mediawiki/extensions/PageOwnership] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-PageOwnership GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EPOW/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 09:07, 20 February 2022 (UTC)


|-
| mediawiki/extensions/ImageSuggestions
| Matthias Mullie
| Merge review
| https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/project/profile/5098/
| Would be great if it could be initialized with https://github.com/matthiasmullie/ImageSuggestions
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/ImageSuggestions mediawiki/extensions/ImageSuggestions] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-ImageSuggestions GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EISU/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 09:10, 20 February 2022 (UTC)


|-
| mediawiki/extensions/RedirectManager 
| samwilson
| Merge review
| None yet
| New extension that adds a WikiEditor dialog for managing redirects to a page. [[User:Samwilson|Sam]] [[User_talk:Samwilson|Wilson]] 01:00, 18 February 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/RedirectManager mediawiki/extensions/RedirectManager] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-RedirectManager GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EREM/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 09:12, 20 February 2022 (UTC)

|-
| RegularTooltips
| Techwizzie
| Merge review
| 
| Please import the code from https://github.com/sanjay-thiyagarajan/RegularTooltips. --[[User:Yaron Koren|Yaron Koren]] ([[User talk:Yaron Koren|talk]]) 19:56, 22 February 2022 (UTC)
| I've reached out for confirmation from Techwizzie that he wants to see his code imported as well. --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 09:40, 23 February 2022 (UTC)

Techwizzie confirmed by e-mail that the repo should get imported. --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 20:04, 23 February 2022 (UTC)

{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/RegularTooltips mediawiki/extensions/RegularTooltips] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-RegularTooltips GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ERET/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 20:04, 23 February 2022 (UTC)

|-
| mediawiki/extensions/VueTest
| Eric Gardner
| Merge review
| https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T299956
| Requesting a new Gerrit repo for the &quot;VueTest&quot; MW extension that the Design System Team has been using to test Vue and Codex features inside of a MediaWiki environment. This will be used for testing and QA purposes, but will never be deployed to production on a real wiki. Currently code lives here [[https://gitlab.wikimedia.org/egardner/mediawiki-extensions-vuetest]]; moving this into Gerrit will make it easier to accept patches from other developers, run tests in MW CI, etc. --[[User:EGardner (WMF)|EGardner (WMF)]] ([[User talk:EGardner (WMF)|talk]]) 21:21, 28 February 2022 (UTC) &lt;!--do not forget to sign your request --&gt;
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/VueTest mediawiki/extensions/VueTest] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-VueTest GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EVTE/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 09:17, 1 March 2022 (UTC)

|-
| wikidata/propertysuggester/RecommenderServier 
| Martaannaj
| Merge review
| Phabricator ticket: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T301471
| Please import the code from https://github.com/martaannaj/RecommenderServer, thanks! --[[User:Martaannaj|Martaannaj]] ([[User talk:Martaannaj|talk]]) 16:30, 2 March 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/wikidata/propertysuggester/RecommenderServer wikidata/propertysuggester/RecommenderServer] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/wikidata-propertysuggester-RecommenderServer GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/DPRS/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 19:14, 2 March 2022 (UTC)

|-
| extensions/SemanticRESTAPI
| Sophivorus
| Merge review
|
| Thanks! [[User:Sophivorus|Sophivorus]] ([[User talk:Sophivorus|talk]]) 22:58, 3 March 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/SemanticRESTAPI mediawiki/extensions/SemanticRESTAPI] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-SemanticRESTAPI GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ESRP/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 21:31, 5 March 2022 (UTC)

|-
| operations/debs/istio
| elukey
| Merge review (preferred) 
| https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T297612 - We don't have a specific Phabricator tag, Istio is a core k8s component that will be maintained by SRE.
| We are trying to consolidate istio-related packages (like operations/deb/istioctl) in one place, like it was done for a similar component (operations/debs/calico). Thanks in advance!
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/operations/debs/istio operations/debs/istio] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/operations-debs-istio GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ODST/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 19:08, 15 March 2022 (UTC)

|-
| operations/software/mediabackups
| Jcrespo
| Merge review
| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/tag/media-backups/ #media-backups]
| Initially we wanted to deploy all code related to WMF backups on the operations/software/wmfbackups repo, but because of limitations of how packaging works and how WMF ci works, it is easier to not mix self-contained projects. This will be used to hold the multimedia (swift, user-uploaded) backups code. It can be created empty and has to inherit the usual ldap ops permissions from that subranch. Thank you! --[[User:JCrespo (WMF)|JCrespo (WMF)]] ([[User talk:JCrespo (WMF)|talk]]) 09:58, 17 March 2022 (UTC)
|
{{partially done}} Created fully empty as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/operations/software/mediabackups operations/software/mediabackups] 

([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/OSMB/ Phabricator mirror])

GitHub mirror is still missing, as GitHub is facing a partial outage right now and does not allow to create repos. I'll create the GitHub repo in the next days once the outage is over. --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 15:02, 17 March 2022 (UTC)

{{done}} Now creating the [https://github.com/wikimedia/operations-software-mediabackups GitHub repo] worked. --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 10:34, 18 March 2022 (UTC)

|-
| labs/tools/force-rebase
| DannyS712
| Merge review
| No current phab project
| For creation of a new toolforge tool. Thanks, --[[User:DannyS712|DannyS712]] ([[User talk:DannyS712|talk]]) 18:53, 21 March 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/labs/tools/force-rebase labs/tools/force-rebase] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/labs-tools-force-rebase GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/LTFR/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 10:31, 22 March 2022 (UTC)

|-
| extensions/Wikivideos
| Sophivorus
| Merge review
| 
| Thanks! [[User:Sophivorus|Sophivorus]] ([[User talk:Sophivorus|talk]]) 17:25, 23 March 2022 (UTC)
| {{ping|Sophivorus}} Since we're trying to use CamelCase with extension names, would &lt;code&gt;WikiVideos&lt;/code&gt; (capital V) also work as name? --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 08:42, 24 March 2022 (UTC)
:@[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] Ok, yes! [[User:Sophivorus|Sophivorus]] ([[User talk:Sophivorus|talk]]) 12:55, 25 March 2022 (UTC)

{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/WikiVideos mediawiki/extensions/WikiVideos] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-WikiVideos GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EWVI/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 13:34, 25 March 2022 (UTC)

|-
| generated-data-platform/datasets/image-suggestions
| eevans
| Merge review
| Phabricator ticket: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T303408
| A data access service for Image Suggestions; Initial code can be imported from https://gitlab.wikimedia.org/repos/generated-data-platform/datasets/image-suggestions --[[User:EEvans (WMF)|EEvans (WMF)]] ([[User talk:EEvans (WMF)|talk]]) 20:48, 29 March 2022 (UTC)
| {{ping|EEvans (WMF)}} I'm thinking about where to best put this in our Gerrit hierarchy. Since you wrote that it will be a data access service ... It's not a service directly used by MediaWiki (and weuld hence fit under &lt;code&gt;mediawiki/services&lt;/code&gt; or is it? I see that there is a whole &lt;code&gt;generated-data-platform&lt;/code&gt; hierarchy in our GitLab. Will the other repos there migrate over to Gerrit as well and we should prepare for that by using the full &lt;code&gt;generated-data-platform/datasets/image-suggestions&lt;/code&gt;? I could not find any comparable repo in our Gerrit, are you aware of any? Or should we just use the full name from GitLab and not care because we're migrating to GitLab at some point anyways? --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 13:35, 31 March 2022 (UTC)
:Correct {{ping|QChrisNonWMF}}, it's not a service used by MediaWiki (read: shouldn't exist under &lt;code&gt;mediawiki/services&lt;/code&gt;). As for the other repos in Gitlab, anything that requires a Docker image be built will need to be moved over, unfortunately.  The reason we used the &lt;code&gt;datasets&lt;/code&gt; namespacing there, was that naming clashes might exist with other repos directly under &lt;code&gt;generated-data-platform&lt;/code&gt;.  Image matching is a good example, there exists a &lt;code&gt;generated-data-platform/image-suggestions&lt;/code&gt; repository that contains AirFlow collateral, and corresponds with the dataset (the code for which is &lt;code&gt;generated-data-platform/datasets/image-suggestions&lt;/code&gt;).  N=1 one right now, but the theory is that many such examples will exist in the future. [[User:EEvans (WMF)|EEvans (WMF)]] ([[User talk:EEvans (WMF)|talk]]) 14:56, 31 March 2022 (UTC)

::{{ping|EEvans (WMF)}} Ah, ok. Thanks for the clarification! :) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 06:28, 3 April 2022 (UTC)

{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/generated-data-platform/datasets/image-suggestions generated-data-platform/datasets/image-suggestions] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/generated-data-platform-datasets-image-suggestions GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/GDIS/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 06:33, 3 April 2022 (UTC)

|-
| mediawiki/extensions/EasyWiki
| Sophivorus
| Merge review 
|
| Thanks! [[User:Sophivorus|Sophivorus]] ([[User talk:Sophivorus|talk]]) 22:43, 2 April 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/EasyWiki mediawiki/extensions/EasyWiki] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-EasyWiki GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EEAS/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 06:30, 3 April 2022 (UTC)

|-
| SimilarEditors
| Tchanders
| Merge review
| https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/tag/similar_editors/
| New extension for the SimilarEditors project. Owned by the [[Anti-Harassment_Tools|Anti-Harassment Tools Team]]. --[[User:TChan (WMF)|TChan (WMF)]] ([[User talk:TChan (WMF)|talk]]) 15:39, 21 April 2022 (UTC)
|
{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/SimilarEditors mediawiki/extensions/SimilarEditors] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-SimilarEditors GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ESIE/ Phabricator mirror]).

Also, since I failed to find a proper group in Gerrit, could you please have a look at [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/admin/groups/2031,members Gerrit's new wmf-team-anti-harassment-tools group]? I've tried to add all relevant users that I could find in Gerrit. Please add/remove members as needed. --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 20:10, 21 April 2022 (UTC)

|-
| PhotoSwipe
| jasonkhanlar
| Merge review
| https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T306414
| Initial working development release at https://github.com/jasonkhanlar/mediawiki-extensions-PhotoSwipe/ [[User:Jasonkhanlar|Jasonkhanlar]] ([[User talk:Jasonkhanlar|talk]]) 06:23, 26 April 2022 (UTC)
|Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/PhotoSwipe mediawiki/extensions/PhotoSwipe] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-PhotoSwipe GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EPHS/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 11:01, 26 April 2022 (UTC)

{{ping|Jasonkhanlar}} I could not find your user in Gerrit, and hence failed to assign the project to you. Did you sign in with [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/ Gerrit] yet? If you did, what's your username? If you didn't, could you please sign in once, so Gerrit can initialize your user? --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 11:01, 26 April 2022 (UTC)

{{ping|QChrisNonWMF}} I see! I created a Wikitech/Gerrit account with the same name now. https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Jasonkhanlar [[User:Jasonkhanlar|Jasonkhanlar]] ([[User talk:Jasonkhanlar|talk]]) 18:15, 26 April 2022 (UTC)

:{{ping|Jasonkhanlar}} Great! I can now see your account in WMF's LDAP directory. But could you please also sign in once at https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/ (When signing in with Gerrit with your user, Gerrit initializes your account for use with Gerrit. Only then, I can assign the repo to you.) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 19:12, 26 April 2022 (UTC)

{{ping|QChrisNonWMF}} I have signed in to my account at https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/. I see that I need 'Push' rights for the repository before I can commit changes to the repo. [[User:Jasonkhanlar|Jasonkhanlar]] ([[User talk:Jasonkhanlar|talk]]) 07:07, 28 April 2022 (UTC)

:{{ping|Jasonkhanlar}} Thanks! I've made you owner of the repo and granted you Push permission. --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 13:18, 28 April 2022 (UTC)

{{done}} --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 13:18, 28 April 2022 (UTC)


|-
| operations/debs/python-opensearch
| cwhite
| Merge review
| Observability-Logging
| Local copy of https://github.com/shdubsh/opensearch-py/tree/debian/sid --[[User:CWhite (WMF)|CWhite (WMF)]] ([[User talk:CWhite (WMF)|talk]]) 18:05, 27 April 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/operations/debs/python-opensearch operations/debs/python-opensearch] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/operations-debs-python-opensearch GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ODOS/ Phabricator mirror]) (without adding a &lt;code&gt;.gitreview&lt;/code&gt; file to avoid getting in the way of Debianization. If you expected a &lt;code&gt;.gitreview&lt;/code&gt; file, please let me know and I'll add it) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 13:27, 28 April 2022 (UTC)

|-
| mediawiki/extensions/EnhancedUpload
| rvogel
| Merge review
| 
| Please set group &quot;bluespice&quot; as owner
| {{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/EnhancedUpload mediawiki/extensions/EnhancedUpload] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-EnhancedUpload GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EEUL/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 11:19, 9 May 2022 (UTC)


|-
| mediawiki/extensions/ImportOfficeFiles
| rvogel
| Merge review
| 
| Please set group &quot;bluespice&quot; as owner
| {{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/ImportOfficeFiles mediawiki/extensions/ImportOfficeFiles] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-ImportOfficeFiles GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EIOF/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 11:20, 9 May 2022 (UTC)


|-
| mediawiki/extensions/MenuEditor
| rvogel
| Merge review
| 
| Please set group &quot;bluespice&quot; as owner
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/MenuEditor mediawiki/extensions/MenuEditor] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-MenuEditor GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EMEE/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 11:20, 9 May 2022 (UTC)

|-
| Json5Config
| jasonkhanlar
| Merge review
| n/a yet
| no existing repository yet --[[User:Jasonkhanlar|Jasonkhanlar]] ([[User talk:Jasonkhanlar|talk]]) 00:30, 12 May 2022 (UTC)&lt;!--do not forget to sign your request --&gt;
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/Json5Config mediawiki/extensions/Json5Config] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-Json5Config GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EJFC/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 07:37, 12 May 2022 (UTC)

|-
| labs/tools/stewardbots-ui
| samtar
| Merge review
| https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/tag/stewardbots
| To supplement splitting out some of [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/g/labs/tools/stewardbots labs/tools/stewardbots]'s functionality [[User:TheresNoTime|TheresNoTime]] ([[User talk:TheresNoTime|talk]]) 15:38, 12 May 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/labs/tools/stewardbots-ui labs/tools/stewardbots-ui] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/labs-tools-stewardbots-ui GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/LTSI/ Phabricator mirror])

I created the repo fully empty, as you probably (?) want to import some parts of &lt;code&gt;labs/tools/stewardbots&lt;/code&gt;. If that was unwarranted or you want me to add a &lt;code&gt;.gitreview&lt;/code&gt; file, just let me know. --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 14:17, 13 May 2022 (UTC)

|-
| mediawiki/extensions/Phonos
| samtar
| Merge review
| None yet
| New extension owned by the [[:meta:Community Tech|Community Tech team]] for [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/tag/ipa-audio-renderer-wish-2022/ IPA Audio Renderer Wish 2022] [[User:TheresNoTime-WMF|TheresNoTime-WMF]] ([[User talk:TheresNoTime-WMF|talk]]) 22:24, 16 May 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/Phonos mediawiki/extensions/Phonos] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-Phonos GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EPHN/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 06:59, 17 May 2022 (UTC)

|-
| cloud/toolforge/toolforge-build-cli
| David Caro
| Merge review
| toolforge
| Use 'main' as the default branch, to be created under &quot;cloud/toolforge/&quot; tree --[[User:DCaro (WMF)|DCaro (WMF)]] ([[User talk:DCaro (WMF)|talk]]) 14:49, 23 May 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/cloud/toolforge/toolforge-build-cli cloud/toolforge/toolforge-build-cli] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/cloud-toolforge-toolforge-build-cli GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/CTCL/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 18:45, 24 May 2022 (UTC)

|-
| cloud/toolforge/toolforge-build-api
| David Caro
| Merge review
| toolforge
| Use 'main' as the default branch, to be created under &quot;cloud/toolforge/&quot; tree --[[User:DCaro (WMF)|DCaro (WMF)]] ([[User talk:DCaro (WMF)|talk]]) 14:49, 23 May 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/cloud/toolforge/toolforge-build-api cloud/toolforge/toolforge-build-api] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/cloud-toolforge-toolforge-build-api GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/CTAP/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 18:46, 24 May 2022 (UTC)


|-
| cloud/toolforge/toolforge-build-cli
| David Caro
| Merge review
| toolforge
| Use 'main' as the default branch, to be created under &quot;cloud/toolforge/&quot; tree --[[User:DCaro (WMF)|DCaro (WMF)]] ([[User talk:DCaro (WMF)|talk]]) 14:50, 23 May 2022 (UTC)
| {{Not done}} Is a dupe; see above. --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 18:47, 24 May 2022 (UTC)

|-
| cloud/toolforge/toolforge-build-api
| dcaro
| Merge review
| toolforge
| Use 'main' as the default branch, to be created under &quot;cloud/toolforge/&quot; tree --[[User:DCaro (WMF)|DCaro (WMF)]] ([[User talk:DCaro (WMF)|talk]]) 14:53, 23 May 2022 (UTC)
| {{Not done}} Is a dupe; see above. --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 18:47, 24 May 2022 (UTC)

|-
| cloud/toolforge/toolforge-build-cli
| dcaro
| Merge review
| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/tag/toolforge/ toolforge]
| Using 'main' as the default branch, inheriting right from cloud/toolforge please :) --[[User:DCaro (WMF)|DCaro (WMF)]] ([[User talk:DCaro (WMF)|talk]]) 15:01, 23 May 2022 (UTC)
| {{Not done}} Is a dupe; see above. --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 18:47, 24 May 2022 (UTC)

|-
| operations/software/pampinus
| Jcrespo (but this should inherit LDAP permissions from its parents, as with other operations repos)
| Merge review
| This is for [[phab:project/profile/5291/|#dbbackups-dashboard]], part of the larger [[phab:project/view/5372/|#database-backups]] and [[phab:project/manage/5372/|#Data-persistence-backups]]
| We requested a year ago a repository called operations/software/bernard for the database backups dashboard that a GSOC student was going to work on. Sadly, work on that didn't achieve fully its goals and wasn't ready for production deployment, development stopped. We have done some simple Django dashboard to replace the (still existing) need for a #dbbackups-dashboard and bring the functionality to production, but I don't want to overwrite the student's work, so we will use a separate repo for the production-ready code. --[[User:JCrespo (WMF)|JCrespo (WMF)]] ([[User talk:JCrespo (WMF)|talk]]) 16:29, 25 May 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/operations/software/pampinus operations/software/pampinus] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/operations-software-pampinus GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/OSPM/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 18:12, 25 May 2022 (UTC)

|-
| SearchVue
| seddon
| Merge review (preferred)
| In process.
| &lt;s&gt;'''Please hold until''' I can confirm the projects name. [[User:Seddon (WMF)|Seddon (WMF)]] ([[User talk:Seddon (WMF)|talk]]) 01:48, 5 June 2022 (UTC)&lt;/s&gt;
:This can now proceed. [[User:Seddon (WMF)|Seddon (WMF)]] ([[User talk:Seddon (WMF)|talk]]) 02:17, 8 June 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/SearchVue mediawiki/extensions/SearchVue] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-SearchVue GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ESVU/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 20:13, 8 June 2022 (UTC)

|-
| mediawiki/extensions/Share
| Agent Isai
| Merge review
| N/A
| Please import https://github.com/AgentIsai/Share into there, thanks!--[[User:Agent Isai|Agent Isai]] ([[User talk:Agent Isai|talk]]) 03:46, 26 June 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/Share mediawiki/extensions/Share] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-Share GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ESHR/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 11:31, 27 June 2022 (UTC)

|-
| mediawiki/extensions/MultiMail
| mainframe98
| Merge review
| https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T311542
| Please add a .gitreview file. Thanks! &lt;span style=&quot;color:#ffcc33&quot;&gt;&amp;mdash;'''[[User:Mainframe98|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#ffcc33&quot;&gt;Mainframe98&lt;/span&gt;]] &lt;sub&gt;[[User talk:Mainframe98|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#ffcc33&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/sub&gt;'''&lt;/span&gt; 17:52, 28 June 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/MultiMail mediawiki/extensions/MultiMail] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-MultiMail GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EMML/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 21:12, 29 June 2022 (UTC)

|-
| operations/software/varnish/libvmod-querysort
| ori
| Merge review
|
| Please import https://github.com/atdt/libvmod-querysort. Thank you (and hello)! --[[User:ATDT|ATDT]] ([[User talk:ATDT|talk]]) 17:38, 30 June 2022 (UTC)

|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/operations/software/varnish/libvmod-querysort operations/software/varnish/libvmod-querysort] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/operations-software-varnish-libvmod-querysort GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/OSQR/ Phabricator mirror])

And hello as well :))) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 21:28, 1 July 2022 (UTC)

|-
| cloud/wmcs-cookbooks
| dcaro
| Merge review
| wmcs-kanban
| Inheriting permissions from cloud, using main as the primary branch. Thanks! --[[User:DCaro (WMF)|DCaro (WMF)]] ([[User talk:DCaro (WMF)|talk]]) 12:44, 4 July 2022 (UTC)&lt;!--do not forget to sign your request --&gt;
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/cloud/wmcs-cookbooks cloud/wmcs-cookbooks] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/cloud-wmcs-cookbooks GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/CCKB/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 12:00, 7 July 2022 (UTC)

|-
| mediawiki/tools/wikilambda-cli
| AAssaf
| Merge review
| No phabricator project at the moment.
| The repository currently exists on github: https://github.com/vrandezo/lambda-cli. Would it be possible to import it?
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/tools/wikilambda-cli mediawiki/tools/wikilambda-cli] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-tools-wikilambda-cli GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MTWC/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 18:49, 13 July 2022 (UTC)

(Forgot to add: The repo owner confirmed via IRC that he is ok with the import to Gerrit) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 18:53, 13 July 2022 (UTC)

|-
| Realnames
| Tosfos
| Merge review
|
| Please add the WikiTeq group as owner. Please import from [https://github.com/WikiTeq/mediawiki-realnames here]. The extension author (ofbeaton) has expressed support for us taking over maintenance of the extension via email. --[[User:Tosfos|Ike Hecht]] 21:47, 11 July 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/Realnames mediawiki/extensions/Realnames] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-Realnames GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ERNM/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 19:05, 13 July 2022 (UTC)


|-
| mediawiki/extensions/Toolhub
| [[wikitech:User:BryanDavis|BryanDavis]] (shell: bd808)
| Merge review
| 
| Repo for [[phab:T272652]]. Please import https://github.com/bd808/mediawiki-extensions-Toolhub as initial content. --[[User:BDavis (WMF)|BDavis (WMF)]] ([[User talk:BDavis (WMF)|talk]]) 15:37, 13 July 2022 (UTC)&lt;!--do not forget to sign your request --&gt;
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/Toolhub mediawiki/extensions/Toolhub] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-Toolhub GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ETHB/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 19:08, 13 July 2022 (UTC)

|-
| mediawiki/extensions/EmergencyCaptcha
| Zabe
| Merge review
|
| Working on a solution for [[:phab:T303433|T303433]]. --[[User:Zabe|Zabe]] ([[User talk:Zabe|talk]]) 22:21, 15 July 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/extensions/EmergencyCaptcha mediawiki/extensions/EmergencyCaptcha] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-EmergencyCaptcha GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/EECP/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 19:37, 16 July 2022 (UTC)

|-
| mediawiki-skins-Pivot
| Jdlrobson
| Merge review
| https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/project/view/6075/
| Please import https://github.com/Hutchy68/pivot (see https://github.com/Hutchy68/pivot/issues/114#issuecomment-1200042966) [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 20:39, 4 August 2022 (UTC)&lt;!--do not forget to sign your request --&gt;
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/skins/Pivot mediawiki/skins/Pivot] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-skins-Pivot GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/SPIV/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 14:38, 5 August 2022 (UTC)

|-
| mediawiki-skins-foreground
| Jdlrobson
| Merge review
| https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/project/manage/5076/
| Please import https://github.com/jthingelstad/foreground (see https://github.com/jthingelstad/foreground/issues/398#issuecomment-1200038490 [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 20:39, 4 August 2022 (UTC)&lt;!--do not forget to sign your request --&gt;
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/mediawiki/skins/Foreground mediawiki/skins/Foreground] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-skins-Foreground GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/SFOR/ Phabricator mirror])

It seems most action took place in the &lt;code&gt;develop&lt;/code&gt; branch of jthingelstad's github repo and the branch &lt;code&gt;master&lt;/code&gt; went stale at some point only receiving localization updates. So I renamed jthingelstad's &lt;code&gt;develop&lt;/code&gt; branch to &lt;code&gt;master&lt;/code&gt; in Gerrit and kept a backup of jthingelstad's &lt;code&gt;master&lt;/code&gt; branch as &lt;code&gt;github-jthingelstad-master&lt;/code&gt; in Gerrit. If that was unwarranted, let me know and I'll undo that. --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 14:55, 5 August 2022 (UTC)

|-
| cloud/toolforge/kube-container-updater
| Majavah
| Merge review
| toolforge
| thank you! [[User:Taavi|Taavi]] ([[User talk:Taavi|talk!]]) 11:58, 6 August 2022 (UTC)
|{{done}} Created as [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/projects/cloud/toolforge/kube-container-updater cloud/toolforge/kube-container-updater] 

([https://github.com/wikimedia/cloud-toolforge-kube-container-updater GitHub mirror])([https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/CFKU/ Phabricator mirror]) --[[User:QChrisNonWMF|QChrisNonWMF]] ([[User talk:QChrisNonWMF|talk]]) 13:43, 6 August 2022 (UTC)</text>
      <sha1>ne52aq8fphzewh1jhlyt2m4x3d0tl2n</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/it</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>84887</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402248</id>
      <parentid>5400741</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13600" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

Facendo clic sul link [[$preferenze|Preferenze]] in alto a destra durante l'accesso si possono modificare le preferenze.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Il tuo nome utente. Solo gli utenti autorizzati possono modificare il tuo nome utente e il wiki deve anche avere installata l'estensione {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-prefs-edits'': quante modifiche hai fatto. Non tutte le wiki hanno questa funzione.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|Vedi sotto]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|Vedi sotto]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Per cambiare la tua password, inserisci la tua vecchia password nella prima casella di testo e quella nuova nelle altre due.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
Account Globale

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
Dalle tue preferenze puoi selezionare in quale lingua vuoi visualizzare l'interfaccia.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Languages
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Se hai specificato un indirizzo email, è necessario fare clic sul pulsante ''verificare l'indirizzo'' per poter utilizzare queste funzioni. Riceverai una email;  apri e segui semplicemente il link per abilitare le seguenti funzioni.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Conferma Email&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Qui puoi scegliere la &quot;skin&quot; che preferisci usare. Puoi visualizzare un'anteprima delle skin disponibili prima di sceglierne una cliccando sul link &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; che si trova accanto ad essa. Fare riferimento a {{ll|Help:Skins}} per maggiori dettagli.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Date format and time offset ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Quanto segue è impostato nelle preferenze:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Qui è possibile impostare come verranno visualizzate le immagini. Le immagini visualizzate incollando direttamente un URL (se il wiki è abilitato) non saranno interessate da questa impostazione.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Qui è possibile controllare come le equazioni matematiche saranno visualizzate, utilizzando il tag  {{tag|math|open}}.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Queste sono le impostazioni per gestire la modifica delle pagine, inclusa la dimensione della casella di modifica visualizzata, e se aggiungere automaticamente agli osservati speciali le pagine che hai modificato o creato.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Vedi anche ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>paotmf06203o3badrxi1h6vodpjmh86</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>User:Kghbln/monobook.css</title>
    <ns>2</ns>
    <id>94052</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402754</id>
      <parentid>3807546</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:33:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Kghbln</username>
        <id>189117</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>änd</comment>
      <model>css</model>
      <format>text/css</format>
      <text bytes="1575" xml:space="preserve">/* MediaWiki */
.mediawiki {
    background: #fff none repeat scroll 0 0;
}

#globalWrapper {
    width: 1024px;
}

#content {
    border-right: 1px solid #aaa;
}

#p-personal .portlet,
#p-personal .pBody {
    width: 1045px;
}

/* Echo */
.mw-echo-overlay {
	width: 70em;
}

.oo-ui-popupWidget-popup {
	width: 70em !important;
}

/* Flow - avoid wasting heaps of space */

.mw-content-ltr .flow-post .flow-post-main {
	margin-left: -1em;
}

.mw-content-ltr .flow-post .flow-replies {
	margin-left: -0.5em;
	padding-left: 0.1em;
}

.flow-post.flow-post-highlight-newer &gt; .flow-post-main .flow-post-content {
	margin-left: -1em;
	padding-left: 1em;
}

div#content h2.flow-topic-title {
	font-size: 1.5em;
}

.flow-topic-summary-container {
	margin-bottom: -1em;
}

/* Translate - move translate header around */
.mw-pt-translate-header {
    margin-top: -15px;
    padding-bottom: 10px;
}

/* MediaWiki.org - Template:Tip - remove minimum height */
.tip,
.note {
    min-height: 0;
}
/* MediaWiki.org - Template:Main_Page_de - remove hr below translation info */

.mw-editable.page-Template_Main_page_de.rootpage-Template_Main_page.skin-monobook.action-view div#globalWrapper div#column-content div#content.mw-body div#bodyContent.mw-body-content div#mw-content-text.mw-content-ltr hr {
	display: none;
}

/* Misc - Template Header mega - remove margins*/
.plainlinks.megaheader {
	margin: -41px 0 0 0 !important;
}

/* WikiEditor - stopping sans serif and non-monospaced fonts */
#wpTextbox1 {
 	font-family: &quot;Courier New&quot;, Courier, monospace !important;
 	font-size: 10pt;
}</text>
      <sha1>tqgisjmvjxdw3o91wep8bfzozxc0z2i</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:MediaWiki feature list/da</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>108661</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402368</id>
      <parentid>5392699</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:47:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24805" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
{{Outdated}}
Denne side indeholder en liste over de funktioner, der er indbygget i MediaWiki-softwaren,
uanset om du skal bruge MediaWiki til din egen wiki, eller på hvilken slags websted, du vil køre det.
Wikipedia's software har mange nyttige funktioner, der er vokset ud af brugernes behov og udviklernes ​​idéer - men funktionalitet betyder også kompleksitet.
 
Før du beslutter dig for at bruge '''MediaWiki''', bedes du tage et kig på andre Wiki-programmer (se [http://wiki.c2.com/?WikiEngines denne liste] eller [http://www.wikimatrix.org/ denne sammenligning]), og se om en af ​​dem vil kunne opfylde dine krav bedre.

Anmodninger om nye funktioner kan forelægges [[Bugzilla]]/[[Bugzilla/da|da]].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Do I want MediaWiki? ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki software and extensions have features and benefits, strengths and weaknesses, pros and cons, and in spite of anyone's intended purposes, MediaWiki software and extensions can be used for unique, clever, inventive purposes unforeseen by the original programmers or other installers.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is a brief list of MediaWiki features and benefits.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you develop an equivalent list of your own goals and resources, you can compare this list to your list and see where there's a match, or mismatch.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Need more help deciding?&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are open discussion groups on the web, and &quot;talk&quot; discussion pages behind each main MediaWiki page where you can seek connection with other people's experiences.&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sample feature list from pages 13-14, in the book &quot;MediaWiki Administrators' Tutorial Guide: Install, manage, and customize your MediaWiki installation&quot; by Mizanur Rahman, 2007 [https://www.packtpub.com/ https://www.packtpub.com/]&lt;/span&gt;}}

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''MediaWiki feature'''&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''MediaWiki Benefit'''&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Your goals'''&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Your resources'''&lt;/span&gt;

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Easy Navigation:&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Easy to contribute without much training...&lt;/span&gt;
|...
|...

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing, Formatting, and Referencing:&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage and find content...&lt;/span&gt;
|...
|...

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Look and feel change:&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Customizable to your preferences...&lt;/span&gt;
|...
|...

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;File uploading:&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Content management and sharing...&lt;/span&gt;
|...
|...

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multilanguage support:&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;UTF-8 support allows one piece of software to author for all languages...&lt;/span&gt;
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;User Management:&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Access and security control...&lt;/span&gt;
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Syndication:&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Share your site info...&lt;/span&gt;
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;...more...&lt;/span&gt;
|...
|...
|...

|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please enhance and expand the above table's features and benefits to assist visitors to best know what they are getting into.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thanks!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;One recurring problem is that system administrators decide to create a wiki, without taking into account many issues.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After filling out the previous table, ask yourself the following questions, to see if a wiki is the right software for you:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''What is my site's intended purpose?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: Wikis are ideal for collaborative editing and creation of content; they are not very well suited for other purposes, like blogging.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consider whether a [[w:wiki|wiki]] is an adequate option for your goals.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''How many users will this wiki be exposed to?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: With a few exceptions, installing wiki software is unnecessary when there is a very small group of people interested in editing the wiki.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The larger the user base, the higher the probability a wiki makes more sense for you.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''How many active editors do I expect to edit my wiki?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: Wikis, due to their open nature, require some maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The larger the editor base, the more hands available to perform those maintenance tasks.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''What can I do with MediaWiki?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: MediaWiki is an extremely versatile wiki engine; it is relatively easy to install, but more importantly, allows for the use and creation of [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|extensions]].
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These allow your MediaWiki installation to be extremely customizable with some knowledge of PHP.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With the proper motivation, MediaWiki can be &quot;abused&quot; to do almost anything.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''Is MediaWiki right for me?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: MediaWiki has its limitations.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A more considerable limitation is that MediaWiki is not meant to be an [[w:access control list|access control list]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki ''raison d'etre'' is to provide open content; while recent versions have a much stronger security model, there are still significant gaps in individual-based security access.&lt;/span&gt;

{{Note|1=''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} and [[Security issues with authorization extensions]].&lt;/span&gt;''}}


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How should I configure MediaWiki? ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have decided that MediaWiki is indeed an appropriate solution, there are still more things to consider.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These questions will hopefully help you decide how to configure your wiki in a way that will allow you to minimize issues in the longer term:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''Who do I want reading my wiki?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: In spite of all the issues with individual-based page restrictions, MediaWiki can be configured to restrict or allow access to everyone.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;So, ask yourself whether you want everyone in the Internet to see the contents of your wiki, or if you want to restrict that privilege to those users who have created accounts in your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''Who do I want editing my wiki?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: Perhaps the most common question is whether you want to permit everyone to edit your wiki, similar to the [[w:Wikipedia|Wikipedia]] model.
&lt;/div&gt;  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki allows for fine-grained writing restrictions; you can allow unregistered users to edit talk pages, for example, but only allow users with accounts older than a certain amount of time to edit your content pages.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can restrict editing to sysops, or even to a custom user group you create and delegate.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''Who do I want creating an account on my wiki?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: Depending on some of the answers to the questions above, you may want to decide to restrict who can create accounts in a wiki.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can allow anyone to create accounts; or you can even designate that privilege to administrators, who would then be responsible for creating accounts for new users via some process of your choosing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''What powers do I want each user group to have?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: One of the most important questions you need to answer is this one.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Granting or removing privileges to a group can be ''extremely'' controversial in a large wiki, so having a good idea of what each user should be able to do is critical.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do you want unregistered users to create pages?&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do you want registered users to create pages?&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do you want wiki administrators to be able to block and delete pages, or do you want to extend more privileges to them?&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Who is responsible for granting more privileges?&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Who is responsible for removing them?&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Who do you want to have more fine-grained powers, such as [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Oversight policy|oversight]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/CheckUser policy|checkuser]], and [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Reverting#Rollback|rollback]]?&lt;/span&gt;
#:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Manual:User rights]] and [[Help:User rights management]] for more ideas and information.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# ''Which extensions should I install?''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: With a few exceptions, [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|extensions]] are easy to add, whether it be while installing the wiki, or after a couple of years of the wiki being run.
&lt;/div&gt;
# ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do I need to manage structured data?&lt;/span&gt;''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: For [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Managing data in MediaWiki|managing structured data within MediaWiki]], several dedicated extensions exist.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With those answers, you should be able to configure the most critical aspects of your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can proceed to beginning the installation process in your [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:OS specific help|operating system]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Udseende og indretning ==

*'''Links med genveje''', arrangeret afhængig af skin.
*'''{{ll|Manual:Skins|nsp=0}}''' - Forskellige måder at præsentere webstedet.
*'''[[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Help:User style|User style]]''': Brugere kan tilpasse udseendet og indretningen af hjemmesiden gennem tilpasset CSS på deres bruger-sider.
*'''&quot;Stub&quot; grænse''': Brugere kan se links til artikler under en vis størrelse vist i en anden farve.
*'''Udskriftsvenlig version''' af artikler kan genereres.
*'''Automatisk nummerering af overskrifter''' i en artikel (valgfrit).
*'''Interne sideankre''' (genereres automatisk for overskrifter, og evt. med &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;div id=&quot;tagname&quot;&gt;...&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;).
* {{anchor|TOC}}'''Generér en automatisk indholdsfortegnelse''' for lange artikler (valgfrit).
* Automatisk visning af '''ISBN-numre''' som links til en redigerbar liste af boghandlere.
*'''XHTML''' eller '''HTML5'''-kompatibel output med ryddelig integration.

== Multimedier og udvidelser (extensions) ==

*'''Fil-upload funktion''' gør det muligt at uploade grafik eller lydfiler, se '[[Special:Upload|læg en fil op]]' for at se funktionen i drift og [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Uploading files|meta]] for beskrivelse. Filerne ses i [[Special:Recentchanges|seneste ændringer]] og i [[Special:Log/upload|oplægningsloggen]].
*'''Matematiske formler med LaTeX-syntaks''' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Extension:Math}} and {{ll|Manual:Mathoid}}&lt;/span&gt;
*'''Automatisk ændring af størrelsen''' på billeder ved brug af ImageMagick eller libgd, simpel syntaks for billed-tekster og billed-placering
*'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiHiero|WikiHiero]]''' for ægyptiske hieroglyffer (kræver separat installerede komponenter)
*'''{{ll|Extension:Graph|nsp=0}}''' - for tidsdiagrammer (kræver separat installerede komponenter)

== Holde øje med redigeringer ==

*'''Overvåg'''. Hver side har linket 'sæt denne side på din overvågningsliste'. Brug [[Special:Watchlist|overvågningslisten]] til at spore ændringer på de artikler du har angivet som interessante. Overvågede artikler vises med fed skrift i [[Special:Recentchanges|seneste ændringer]]-listen.
*'''Brugerbidrag''' for hver enkelt bruger, viser alle artikler som brugeren har arbejdet med ifølge databasen.
*'''Udvidede seneste ændringer''' med dynamisk kollaps af redigeringer af samme artikel og hurtige links til andre redigereringer, viser artiklens historik, viser bruger-siden, vise brugerens diskussionsside, eller blokerer brugeren (for systemoperatører).
*'''Relaterede ændringer:''' Se en filtreret version af de seneste ændringer i sider henvist fra den aktuelle side.
*'''Forskel mellem versioner''' - versionerne vises side-ved-side og ændrede dele af linjerne fremhæves for at gøre det meget nemmere at se forskellene. Derudover er vises ændringerne under en redigeringskonflikt, så du kan se præcis, hvad du har brug for at genindskrive.
*'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Real names&lt;/span&gt;''' - Brugere kan (valgfrit) angive et 'rigtigt navn' de vil bruge til at kreditere en forfatter.
*'''Side-kreditering'''. Administratorer kan aktivere et side-afsnit, der krediterer redaktører, der har arbejdet på en side.

== Strukturer og syntaks ==

* Som standard er kun [[Special:MyLanguage/HTML restriction|begrænset]] brug af [[:da:HTML|HTML]] tilladt. Det er muligt at tillade fuld brug af HTML.
*'''Redigeringssyntaks baseret på UseMod''' med understøttelse af en blanding af wiki-syntaks og HTML. Kun frie links understøttes, ikke [[w:CamelCase|CamelCase]] (bevidst design beslutning).
*'''Navnerum''' tillader indholds-adskillelse (for at henvise til navnerummet, skal du bruge &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Navnerum:Sidens navn]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;-syntaks).
**Diskussions-sider er adskilt fra artikel-siderne, 'meta' projektsider kan være adskilt fra indholdssider, og billedsider bruges til billed-beskrivelser.
**[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:System message|System message]] indeholder alle brugergrænseflade-tekster, så de kan redigeres som enhver anden wikiside
**Skabelon: navnerum for brugerdefinerede beskeder. Skabeloner kan indeholde en streng med variabler som udskiftes med bestemte værdier, der sendes til skabelonen fra den kaldende side.
*'''[[w:Transclusion|Indlejring]]''' af bestemte sider i ethvert navnerum: &lt;nowiki&gt;{{:Sidens navn}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Se [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Template|skabeloner]]
*'''Udvidede ordlinks''': Hvis du indsætter et link af formen &lt;nowiki&gt;[[krig]]e&lt;/nowiki&gt; eller &lt;nowiki&gt;[[krig]]stid&lt;/nowiki&gt;, vil systemet automatisk vise det, som om du havde skrevet hhv. &lt;nowiki&gt;[[krig|krige]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; eller &lt;nowiki&gt;[[krig|krigstid]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;, hvilket kan være nemmere at skrive.
*'''Skjul parentes''' Hvis du indsætter et link af formen &lt;nowiki&gt;[[kernel (mathematics)|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;, skjules den del af linket som står i parentes: [[kernel (mathematics)|kernel]]. Dette er nyttigt for ord som har en flertydig betydning, så artiklens tekst ikke kommer til at se for rodet ud. Dette virker også ved beskæring af navnerum, hvis du ønsker et pænere udseende link: &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Wikipedia:Copyrights|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; bliver [[Wikipedia:Copyrights|Copyrights]]
*'''Links til de enkelte afsnit''' i en artikel, for eks. [[{{FULLPAGENAME}}#Redigering]] (disse links bliver ugyldige, hvis afsnittet er omdøbt eller fjernet - en ændring, som vil rette problemet er [//bugzilla.wikipedia.org/show_bug.cgi?id=1521 foreslået her].)
*Support til '''undersider''' (link til 'Foo/Bar' fra 'Foo' ved kun at skrive '/Bar, idet 'Foo/Bar indeholder et tilbagelink til 'Foo'), disse kan aktiveres eller deaktiveres i navnerummet (for eks. understøtter Wikipedia undersider til diskussionssider for at gøre arkivering let, og på brugersider for at give brugerne plads til personlige sider)
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic words|Special keywords]] for inserting '''dynamic data''' such as the name of the current page, the current date, the number of articles, etc.
&lt;/div&gt;
*Flere '''kategorier''' kan tildeles en side, inklusiv kategorien selv, for at skabe et hierarki af kategorier. Kategorisider viser automatisk en liste over alle tilknyttede sider, herunder underkategorier. Kategorier muliggør klassifikation og hierarkisk browsing af indholdet.

== Redigering ==
*'''[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Section|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Section editing&lt;/span&gt;]]''' - Brugere kan aktivere en indstilling, der giver dem mulighed for at redigere individuelle sektioner af en artikel (adskilt af overskrifter) i stedet for at hente hele artiklen.
*'''Redigerings-værktøj''' (JavaScript-baseret) til formatterring af tekst som '''fed''', ''kursiv'' osv. (virker perfekt i Mozilla og IE, mens andre browsere viser syntaksen men kan ikke formatere tekst indenfor tekstområdet, fordi deres JavaScript implementering ikke understøtter det). Hvis JavaScript er slået fra, bliver værktøjslinjen ikke vist.
*'''Rediger beskrivelse''' som vises i 'seneste ændringer'. Udfyldes automatisk med afsnittets titel, når afsnits-redigering er valgt.
*'''Dobbeltkliks-redigering''': Brugere kan aktivere indstillingen, der giver dem mulighed for at redigere artikler ved at dobbeltklikke på dem.
*'''Forhåndsvisning''' (kan vises før eller efter redigeringsboksen)
*Håndtér '''redigeringskonflikter''' (sider, som gemmes af en bruger, selvom de stadig redigeres af en anden, kan derefter gemmes igen). MediaWiki fletter om muligt ændringerne automatisk, eller kræver at brugeren laver en manuel sammenfletning.
*Når redigeringer markeres som '''mindre''', kan brugerne vælge at skjule sådanne redigeringer fra seneste ændringer listen. Kun indloggede brugere kan markere redigeringer som mindre.

== Spam og vandalisme ==
*{{ll|Manual:Combating spam}}: Undgå link spamming og andre former for misbrugende redigering.
**[[meta:Spam blacklist]]: Liste over spam-domænenavne, som brugerne ikke må linke til.
* [[Manual:Combating vandalism|Combating vandalism]]/[[Manual:Combating vandalism/da|da]]: Nyttige tips og links til nogle udvidelser (extensions) til håndtering af hærværk

== Diskussioner ==

*'''Diskussionssider''': Alle brugere (også anonyme brugere) og hver artikel har en tilknyttet side, hvor budskaber kan efterlades. Disse har forskellige navnerum (se ovenfor), 'Diskussion:' og 'Bruger-diskussion:.
*'''Besked om meddelelser''' - 'Du har nye beskeder'-notitsen vises til en bruger, hvis andre har redigeret dennes diskussionsside. Dette virker også for anonyme brugere, men ikke for brugere med ''delt IP''
*'''Automatisk signatur''': Hvis du har skrevet 3 tilder (~) i en redigering og gemmer siden, erstattes de med dit brugernavn og en link til din brugerside. Har du skrevet 4 tilder, bliver også den aktuelle dato tilføjet. Er primært beregnet til diskussions-sider.
*Understøttelse af '''bruger-email''' gennem wikien (email-adresser vises ikke til brugeren)

== Multi-sprogs support==

*Programmet er oversat til '''mange sprog''' (se [[:en:Wikipedia:Multilingual coordination|koordinering på wikipedia]] for detaljer)
*'''[[:da:Hjælp:Henvisninger til andre sprog|Henvisninger til andre sprog]]''': en handy metode til at sammenknytte artikler mellem wikier på forskellige sprog (hvert sprog kræver sin egen database)
*'''UTF-8'''-understøttelse

== Teknik ==

*'''Database-styring''' (både MySQL og PostgreSQL understøttes)
*'''Parser lagring''': cache med viste sider gemmes for at reducere overflødig behandling
*'''Output lagring''': cache med komplet side output kan valgfrit gemmes som statiske HTML-filer til brug for andre kunder, understøttelse af Squid proxier
*'''Cookie-baseret''' konto og login-system, men anonyme brugere kan også redigere sider
*'''Alle redigerede versioner''' af en artikel gemmes (evt. i komprimeret form)
*'''[[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Syndication feeds|RSS syndikering]]''' til rådighed for mange special-sider, såsom [[Special:Newpages|nyeste sider]] og [[Special:Recentchanges|nyeste ændringer]]
*'''[[m:Special:MyLanguage/RDF metadata|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;RDF metadata&lt;/span&gt;]]'''


== Tilladelser ==

*'''Forskellige rettigheder''' for anonyme brugere, indloggede brugerne, systemoperatører, bureaukrater og udviklere.
*'''Indloggede brugere''' kan:
**flytte og omdøbe sider
**uploade filer
**have og bruge en overvågningsliste
**markere redigeringer som ''mindre ændringer'' (for eks. typografiske rettelser)
*'''Admininistratorer/systemoperatører''' kan:
**beskytte sider mod redigering
**slette og genoprette sider
**redigere beskyttede sider
**forbyde brugere af en IP-addresse
**forbyde brugere af et brugernavn, hvis muligheden er aktiveret
*'''Bureaukrater''' kan:
**skabe systemoperatører
**omdøbe brugere
**markere robotter
*'''Udviklere''' kan:
**låse databasen
** køre diverse vedligeholdelsesopgaver
*'''Andre tilladelses-ordninger''' (for eks. at kun indloggede brugere kan redigere sider) [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|kan konfigureres]].

== Søgning og forespørgsler ==

*'''Fuldtekstsøgning'''
*'''&quot;Gå til&quot; knap''' tillader direkte visning af en angivet artikels indhold
*'''&quot;Hvad henviser hertil&quot;:''' Se sider, der linker til den aktuelle side (tilbagelinks)
*'''Specialsider:'''
**Nyeste sider: Liste over nyoprettede artikler
**Ældste sider: Artikler sorteret efter tidsstempel, stigende
**Filliste
**Brugerliste
**Website statistikker
**Forældreløse sider (artikler, der ikke har nogen links der peger på dem)
**Populære sider (ordnet efter antal besøgende, fungerer kun hvis tællere er aktiveret)
**Populære sider (ordnet efter antal besøgende, fungerer kun hvis tællere er aktiveret)
**Ønskede sider (ikke-eksisterende artikler sorteret efter antal links, der peger på dem)
**Korte sider
**Lange sider
**Alle sider, listet efter titel
*'''[[API:Query|Query]]/[[API:Query/da|da]] API''' - giver script-adgang til forskellig metadata

== Forskelligt ==

*'''Tilfældig artikel''' displayfunktion
* Brugere kan konfigurere deres '''tidszone''', som bruges på alle rapport-tidsstempler
* Valgmuligheder ved mange rapportsider ('''antal resultater''' osv.) kan indstilles i brugerindstillingerne

== Sættet af tomme hjælpesider ==
Bemærk at filerne i installationen indeholder mange links, som peger på dokumenter, der ikke indgår i overførslen.
Vigtigst er sættet af hjælpesider, som alle nye brugere af sitet har brug for.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remedy these broken links, you must either (a) [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:PD_help/Copying|export from this site]] or manually copy and modify help pages to your installation or (b) modify the installation's parameters to change the help link targets to this site, either of which may require a substantial time investment.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki Introduction{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ir5njt4ryugz1g5lalonh5mnunw93lp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Installing MediaWiki/da</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>109126</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402881</id>
      <parentid>5387488</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:41:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13432" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;MediaWiki kan være svær at installere for den gennemsnitlige computerbruger, der ikke har erfaring med Apache, PHP og MySQL/MariaDB.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Download MediaWiki-softwaren ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Download the MediaWiki tar file from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|official download page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally, if you're using a production environment, you want to be running the latest stable release, which is MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extract the MediaWiki software ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Download-filerne er i &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt; format og skal udpakkes før brug.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to uncompress this archive file before use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Dette kan gøres lokalt (og så oploades via FTP) eller direkte på serveren.&lt;/span&gt;

Dette gøres normalt med software såsom [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (gratis), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] eller [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] (gratis) på Windows.

På Linux og Mac OS X kan du udpakke filen med kommandoen:
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Oploadede  filer ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Hvis du ikke allerede har uploadet filerne til din webserver, så gør det nu.
&lt;/div&gt;

Overføre filerne til din webservers web-mappe enten ved at:

# direkte kopiering af den udpakkede mappe eller
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# ved brug af en FTP client såsom [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (Open Source Software, Windows, OSX og Linux) eller [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (OSX).
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;by using software already provided by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting service]], such as the ''cPanel File Manager''&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''Sørg for, at &quot;ændre filnavne til små bogstaver&quot;-indstillingen for upload er deaktiveret.'''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Hvis du har installeret Apache er den korrekte mappe specificeret i din &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; fil (den normale &lt;code&gt;&lt;apache-folder&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Hvis du bruger Linux eller Unix server kan du kopiere filerne til enhver mappe på serveren og så lave et [[Wikipedia:Symbolic link|symbolsk link]] til mappen fra serverens web-mappe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

Omdøb den oploadede mappe til et hvilket som helst navn, som du vil have i URL'en.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Hvis webserveren for eks. kører som &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt; betyder omdøbning til &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt; mappen, at adgang wikien fås på &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not use &lt;code&gt;/wiki/&lt;/code&gt; if you want to set it up as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|Short URL]] after running the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script|installation script]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Opret en database ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki spørger dig om database- og brugernavn og forsøger at oprette dem, hvis de ikke allerede findes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Hvis du allerede har en database og kender rod-password til den, kan MediaWiki installationsscriptet oprette en ny database til dig.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Hvis du ikke kender rod-passwordet, for eksempel hvis du er på en hosted server, bliver du nødt til at oprette en ny database nu.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;P.t. kan du bruge SQLite, MariaDB/MySQL eller Postgres til at gemme det faktiske indhold af din wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're unsure which database to choose, use MariaDB.&lt;/span&gt;

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;På installationssiden er du nød til at vælge et database-navn (hvad som helst) og SQLite database-mappen.&lt;/span&gt;
Til database-mappe vil installations-programmet forsøge at anvende en undermappe uden for dokumentroden og om nødvendig oprette den.
Hvis mappen ikke er sikker (for eks. web-læsbar), skift navnet manuelt for at undgå den bliver tilgængelig for alle på internettet.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se den tilhørende dokumentation.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Alternativt kan du kontakte din vært udbyder, for at få dem til at oprette en konto til dig.&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Hvis din database ikke kører på samme server som din webserver, skal du give den rette web-server værtnavn - eksempelvis mediawiki.example.com - som følger:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL/MariaDB logs all queries in a history file. It will include the database password for the user account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this concerns you, delete and disable the &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt; file after running these queries by following the [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/mysql-logging.html#mysql-logging-history-file MySQL documentation].&lt;/span&gt;}}

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Hvis du bruger Postgres, skal du enten have en database og bruger oprettet til dig, eller blot levere navnet på en Postgres bruger med 'superbruger'-privilegier til konfigurations-skemaet.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Dette er ofte database-brugeren med navnet '''postgres'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, and a database named &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; owned by the user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(then enter the database password)&lt;/span&gt;
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

eller som superbruger (standandnavn: postgres) udfør følgende forespørgsler i database-prompten:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Beware of the [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|list of known issues when running MediaWiki with PostgreSQL]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Run the installation script ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Når alle ovenstående trin er fuldført, kan du fuldføre installationen gennem en webbrowser ved at gå til index.php URI i din browser - læs instruktionen nævnt i {{ll|Manual:Config script}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Further configuration==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additional configuration&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wiki administration&lt;/span&gt;
== Opdater! ==
Efter installationen skal du sørge for at holde dig ajour med opdateringer, for at holde din server sikker!
{{Clickable button 2|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[mail:mediawiki-announce|Tilmelding til mail-listen med annoncering af udgivelser]].&lt;/span&gt;|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Appendices ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/span&gt;
:{{Note|1=Ved oprettelse af rod-kontoen, brug en adgangskode, som du er i stand til at huske.}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== System-specific instructions  ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The pages listed on {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First consult {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Se også ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>jit775fstijou6hqd8bzpx1k27c4iio</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/da</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>111265</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402833</id>
      <parentid>4505769</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:29:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8865" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Denne side forklarer, hvordan du kan '''oversætte off-line'''.
Hvis emnet interesserer dig, ved du måske hvad [[w:Gettext|Gettext PO]]-filer er.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this reason, we'll only discuss how to use them in a wiki with the Translate extension here.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise, you're probably more interested in the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|How to translate]] tutorial for online translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Du vil måske ikke bruge web-brugergrænsefladen, hvis du har en meget langsom eller begrænset internetforbindelse eller har &quot;superduper&quot; offline værktøjer, som du foretrækker og er vant til. Vær opmærksom på, at Translate-udvidelsen er udformet som en samarbejdsproces. Det betyder, at du ikke bør holde filer offline i lang tid, og du bør altid hente en ny fil lige før du begynder at oversætte. Ellers kan du måske komme i konflikt med andre oversættere, som arbejder med wikien.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Eksport ==

Du kan hente enhver meddelelses-gruppe som Gettext PO-fil ved at vælge ''Eksportér'' til off-line oversættelse i [[Special:Translate]]. Nogle websites kan have deaktiveret denne mulighed. Du bør tjekke eventuelle lokale guider, hvordan du behandler disse filer, før du starter.

{{Note|1=Selv om nogle meddelelses-grupper kan have en eksportmulighed, der eksporterer oversættelser i gruppens oprindelige format, og formatet kunne være Gettext, er det ikke de filer, der kan bruges til off-line oversættelse!}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Filerne er standard gettext PO-filer med nogen ekstra information. Overskriften indeholder nogle ekstra felter som vist nedenfor, &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for hver meddelelse indeholder et id, som Translate-udvidelsen behøver. Nogle redigerings-værktøjer er kendt for at fjerne enten overskrifts-kommentarerne eller &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;-linjerne, så start med en lille fil for at sikre, at dit redigerings-værktøj ikke fjerner disse - det er ikke sjovt at indse at redigeringen indeholdt fejl, efter at have oversat hundredvis af meddelelser, som du ikke kan importere tilbage i online-systemet!
Meddelelses-dokumentationen eksporteres som oversættelses-kommentarer.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Vigtige overskrifts-felter

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, &quot;ext-abc&quot; is the name of the message group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For translatable pages, the corresponding message group has the name &quot;page-&quot; + the page name (i.e. for the page &quot;Example&quot;, the header would contain the line &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;

Eksempel på indgang til en Translate Gettext po fil.
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Import ==
Der er ikke nødvendigt at oversætte filen fuldstændigt. Opload af delvist oversatte meddelelses-grupper er godt nok.
Der er to måder at importere disse filer.

Brugere med korrekte brugerrettigheder kan bruge &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; til at oploade og importere oversættelserne.
Specialsiden behandler filen, viser ændringerne og lader brugeren importere dem.
Store filer med mange ændringer importeres måske i flere skridt, da behandlings-tiden er begrænset.

Import kan også ske ved hjælp af kommandolinje-script i &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. Metoden er mindre fleksibel, men kan importere alt på én gang. Det kræver også indgriben fra en person med shell adgang til serveren.

Måden hvorpå import af ​​off-line oversættelser håndteres (eller ikke), afhænger af din wiki.

== Gettext redigeringsværktøj ==

Her er nogle værktøjer, du kan bruge til at redigere filerne off-line.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
; [//poedit.net/ POedit]
: Tilgængelig for alle platforme der understøtter [//wxwidgets.org/ wxWidgets værktøj], testet på Unix med GTK+ og Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''ADVARSEL:''' vær sikker på du bruger version 1.4.2 eller højere, ellers droppes &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; linjer og dit arbejde kan ikke udføres.
; [//projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ Gtranslator]
: Kan bruges i [//gnome.org GNOME] skrivebords-miljø, Unix og Linux platforme.
; [//gted.org gted]
: Skal bruges som plugin i Eclipse IDE på Linux, Windows og MAC OS X, har forskellige værktøjer indbygget.
; [//kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize]
: Bruger [//kde.org/ KDE 4] skrivebords-miljø på alle platforme som understøtter det. Har en [//userbase.kde.org/Lokalize bruger-wiki] (delvis på dansk) og online [//docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html håndbog]
; [//translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit]
: Værktøj skrevet i [//python.org python] programmeringssprog, som også skal installeres, kan bruges på alle platforme. Understøtter også flere andre filformater.
; [//omegat.org OmegaT]
: Gratis værktøj for professionelle oversættere skrevet i Java, kræver Java installeret, tilgængelig på alle platforme. Understøtter en række andre filformater, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, og oversættelseshukommelser.
; [//gorm.po.dk Gorm .po file editor]
: Et lille program, som kører på Windows, ingen installation påkrævet.
; [//betterpoeditor.sourceforge.net Better PO Editor]
: Tilgængelig for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Omfatter stavekontrol og Google Translate-forslag.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>8xd8asli138in20dkttkreri9w0xwiq</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402835</id>
      <parentid>5402833</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:29:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8798" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Denne side forklarer, hvordan du kan '''oversætte off-line'''.
Hvis emnet interesserer dig, ved du måske hvad [[w:Gettext|Gettext PO]]-filer er.
Derfor vil vi her diskutere, hvordan disse bruges i en wiki med Translate-udvidelsen.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise, you're probably more interested in the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|How to translate]] tutorial for online translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Du vil måske ikke bruge web-brugergrænsefladen, hvis du har en meget langsom eller begrænset internetforbindelse eller har &quot;superduper&quot; offline værktøjer, som du foretrækker og er vant til. Vær opmærksom på, at Translate-udvidelsen er udformet som en samarbejdsproces. Det betyder, at du ikke bør holde filer offline i lang tid, og du bør altid hente en ny fil lige før du begynder at oversætte. Ellers kan du måske komme i konflikt med andre oversættere, som arbejder med wikien.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Eksport ==

Du kan hente enhver meddelelses-gruppe som Gettext PO-fil ved at vælge ''Eksportér'' til off-line oversættelse i [[Special:Translate]]. Nogle websites kan have deaktiveret denne mulighed. Du bør tjekke eventuelle lokale guider, hvordan du behandler disse filer, før du starter.

{{Note|1=Selv om nogle meddelelses-grupper kan have en eksportmulighed, der eksporterer oversættelser i gruppens oprindelige format, og formatet kunne være Gettext, er det ikke de filer, der kan bruges til off-line oversættelse!}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Filerne er standard gettext PO-filer med nogen ekstra information. Overskriften indeholder nogle ekstra felter som vist nedenfor, &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for hver meddelelse indeholder et id, som Translate-udvidelsen behøver. Nogle redigerings-værktøjer er kendt for at fjerne enten overskrifts-kommentarerne eller &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;-linjerne, så start med en lille fil for at sikre, at dit redigerings-værktøj ikke fjerner disse - det er ikke sjovt at indse at redigeringen indeholdt fejl, efter at have oversat hundredvis af meddelelser, som du ikke kan importere tilbage i online-systemet!
Meddelelses-dokumentationen eksporteres som oversættelses-kommentarer.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Vigtige overskrifts-felter

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, &quot;ext-abc&quot; is the name of the message group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For translatable pages, the corresponding message group has the name &quot;page-&quot; + the page name (i.e. for the page &quot;Example&quot;, the header would contain the line &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;

Eksempel på indgang til en Translate Gettext po fil.
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Import ==
Der er ikke nødvendigt at oversætte filen fuldstændigt. Opload af delvist oversatte meddelelses-grupper er godt nok.
Der er to måder at importere disse filer.

Brugere med korrekte brugerrettigheder kan bruge &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; til at oploade og importere oversættelserne.
Specialsiden behandler filen, viser ændringerne og lader brugeren importere dem.
Store filer med mange ændringer importeres måske i flere skridt, da behandlings-tiden er begrænset.

Import kan også ske ved hjælp af kommandolinje-script i &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. Metoden er mindre fleksibel, men kan importere alt på én gang. Det kræver også indgriben fra en person med shell adgang til serveren.

Måden hvorpå import af ​​off-line oversættelser håndteres (eller ikke), afhænger af din wiki.

== Gettext redigeringsværktøj ==

Her er nogle værktøjer, du kan bruge til at redigere filerne off-line.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
; [//poedit.net/ POedit]
: Tilgængelig for alle platforme der understøtter [//wxwidgets.org/ wxWidgets værktøj], testet på Unix med GTK+ og Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''ADVARSEL:''' vær sikker på du bruger version 1.4.2 eller højere, ellers droppes &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; linjer og dit arbejde kan ikke udføres.
; [//projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ Gtranslator]
: Kan bruges i [//gnome.org GNOME] skrivebords-miljø, Unix og Linux platforme.
; [//gted.org gted]
: Skal bruges som plugin i Eclipse IDE på Linux, Windows og MAC OS X, har forskellige værktøjer indbygget.
; [//kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize]
: Bruger [//kde.org/ KDE 4] skrivebords-miljø på alle platforme som understøtter det. Har en [//userbase.kde.org/Lokalize bruger-wiki] (delvis på dansk) og online [//docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html håndbog]
; [//translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit]
: Værktøj skrevet i [//python.org python] programmeringssprog, som også skal installeres, kan bruges på alle platforme. Understøtter også flere andre filformater.
; [//omegat.org OmegaT]
: Gratis værktøj for professionelle oversættere skrevet i Java, kræver Java installeret, tilgængelig på alle platforme. Understøtter en række andre filformater, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, og oversættelseshukommelser.
; [//gorm.po.dk Gorm .po file editor]
: Et lille program, som kører på Windows, ingen installation påkrævet.
; [//betterpoeditor.sourceforge.net Better PO Editor]
: Tilgængelig for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Omfatter stavekontrol og Google Translate-forslag.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>qmmuk3pju82xe2fi11odxbc6l5g9z0f</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402837</id>
      <parentid>5402835</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:29:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8718" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Denne side forklarer, hvordan du kan '''oversætte off-line'''.
Hvis emnet interesserer dig, ved du måske hvad [[w:Gettext|Gettext PO]]-filer er.
Derfor vil vi her diskutere, hvordan disse bruges i en wiki med Translate-udvidelsen.
Ellers er du måske mere interesseret i ''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|hvordan man oversætter]]'' online.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Du vil måske ikke bruge web-brugergrænsefladen, hvis du har en meget langsom eller begrænset internetforbindelse eller har &quot;superduper&quot; offline værktøjer, som du foretrækker og er vant til. Vær opmærksom på, at Translate-udvidelsen er udformet som en samarbejdsproces. Det betyder, at du ikke bør holde filer offline i lang tid, og du bør altid hente en ny fil lige før du begynder at oversætte. Ellers kan du måske komme i konflikt med andre oversættere, som arbejder med wikien.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Eksport ==

Du kan hente enhver meddelelses-gruppe som Gettext PO-fil ved at vælge ''Eksportér'' til off-line oversættelse i [[Special:Translate]]. Nogle websites kan have deaktiveret denne mulighed. Du bør tjekke eventuelle lokale guider, hvordan du behandler disse filer, før du starter.

{{Note|1=Selv om nogle meddelelses-grupper kan have en eksportmulighed, der eksporterer oversættelser i gruppens oprindelige format, og formatet kunne være Gettext, er det ikke de filer, der kan bruges til off-line oversættelse!}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Filerne er standard gettext PO-filer med nogen ekstra information. Overskriften indeholder nogle ekstra felter som vist nedenfor, &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for hver meddelelse indeholder et id, som Translate-udvidelsen behøver. Nogle redigerings-værktøjer er kendt for at fjerne enten overskrifts-kommentarerne eller &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;-linjerne, så start med en lille fil for at sikre, at dit redigerings-værktøj ikke fjerner disse - det er ikke sjovt at indse at redigeringen indeholdt fejl, efter at have oversat hundredvis af meddelelser, som du ikke kan importere tilbage i online-systemet!
Meddelelses-dokumentationen eksporteres som oversættelses-kommentarer.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Vigtige overskrifts-felter

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, &quot;ext-abc&quot; is the name of the message group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For translatable pages, the corresponding message group has the name &quot;page-&quot; + the page name (i.e. for the page &quot;Example&quot;, the header would contain the line &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;

Eksempel på indgang til en Translate Gettext po fil.
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Import ==
Der er ikke nødvendigt at oversætte filen fuldstændigt. Opload af delvist oversatte meddelelses-grupper er godt nok.
Der er to måder at importere disse filer.

Brugere med korrekte brugerrettigheder kan bruge &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; til at oploade og importere oversættelserne.
Specialsiden behandler filen, viser ændringerne og lader brugeren importere dem.
Store filer med mange ændringer importeres måske i flere skridt, da behandlings-tiden er begrænset.

Import kan også ske ved hjælp af kommandolinje-script i &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. Metoden er mindre fleksibel, men kan importere alt på én gang. Det kræver også indgriben fra en person med shell adgang til serveren.

Måden hvorpå import af ​​off-line oversættelser håndteres (eller ikke), afhænger af din wiki.

== Gettext redigeringsværktøj ==

Her er nogle værktøjer, du kan bruge til at redigere filerne off-line.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
; [//poedit.net/ POedit]
: Tilgængelig for alle platforme der understøtter [//wxwidgets.org/ wxWidgets værktøj], testet på Unix med GTK+ og Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''ADVARSEL:''' vær sikker på du bruger version 1.4.2 eller højere, ellers droppes &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; linjer og dit arbejde kan ikke udføres.
; [//projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ Gtranslator]
: Kan bruges i [//gnome.org GNOME] skrivebords-miljø, Unix og Linux platforme.
; [//gted.org gted]
: Skal bruges som plugin i Eclipse IDE på Linux, Windows og MAC OS X, har forskellige værktøjer indbygget.
; [//kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize]
: Bruger [//kde.org/ KDE 4] skrivebords-miljø på alle platforme som understøtter det. Har en [//userbase.kde.org/Lokalize bruger-wiki] (delvis på dansk) og online [//docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html håndbog]
; [//translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit]
: Værktøj skrevet i [//python.org python] programmeringssprog, som også skal installeres, kan bruges på alle platforme. Understøtter også flere andre filformater.
; [//omegat.org OmegaT]
: Gratis værktøj for professionelle oversættere skrevet i Java, kræver Java installeret, tilgængelig på alle platforme. Understøtter en række andre filformater, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, og oversættelseshukommelser.
; [//gorm.po.dk Gorm .po file editor]
: Et lille program, som kører på Windows, ingen installation påkrævet.
; [//betterpoeditor.sourceforge.net Better PO Editor]
: Tilgængelig for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Omfatter stavekontrol og Google Translate-forslag.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>obxdrxamz6pvx6coggdwjbuyvgdal83</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Wikibase Client/Lua</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>118565</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401837</id>
      <parentid>5050941</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:59:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Concacne123</username>
        <id>17658396</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Further reading</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1753" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ambox
| type = content
| text = Documentation can now be found at [https://doc.wikimedia.org/Wikibase/master/php/md_docs_topics_lua.html doc.wikimedia.org], automatically generated from &lt;code&gt;docs/topics/lua.md&lt;/code&gt; in [[Wikibase]].
}}
{{Notice|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
; Notes
* [[d:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata:Lexicographical data|Lexeme (WD LGD)]] is now supported. See [https://doc.wikimedia.org/WikibaseLexeme/master/php/md_docs_topics_lua.html doc.wikimedia.org] and [[phab:T235901]].&lt;!-- Need [[Extension:WikibaseLexeme/Lua]] --&gt;
* [[c:Special:MyLanguage/Commons:Structured data|MediaInfo (SDC)]] is now supported. See [[Extension:WikibaseMediaInfo/Lua]] and [[c:Commons:Structured data/Lua|Commons:Structured data/Lua]].
}}

&lt;translate&gt;
== Further reading == &lt;&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
|Manual:Coding conventions/
* Extension:Scribunt reference manua
*|Wikibase/DataModel
* Wikimedia Gerrit mediawiki-extensions-Wikibase (master) source code
** [[git:mediawiki/extensions/Wikibase/+/master/docs/topics
 [[git:mediawiki/extensions/Wikibase/+/master/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.lua|/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.l
[[git:mediawiki/extensions/Wikibase/+/master/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.entity.lua|/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.entity.lua]]
* Wikimedia Phabricator Diffusion extension-Wikibase (master) source code mirror
** [[phab:diffusion//browse/master/docs/topics//docs/topics/
** [[phab:diffusion/EWBA/browse/master/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.lua|/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase
** [[phab:diffusion/browse/master/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.entity./client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.entity.</text>
      <sha1>byn2x1h8s9vjlrzwgd1ipnxm0ekzmm6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401857</id>
      <parentid>5401837</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:06:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Clump</username>
        <id>81610</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/Concacne123|Concacne123]] ([[User talk:Concacne123|talk]]) to last version by Lucas Werkmeister (WMDE)</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2520" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ambox
| type = content
| text = Documentation can now be found at [https://doc.wikimedia.org/Wikibase/master/php/md_docs_topics_lua.html doc.wikimedia.org], automatically generated from &lt;code&gt;docs/topics/lua.md&lt;/code&gt; in [[Wikibase]].
}}
{{Notice|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
; Notes
* [[d:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata:Lexicographical data|Lexeme (WD LGD)]] is now supported. See [https://doc.wikimedia.org/WikibaseLexeme/master/php/md_docs_topics_lua.html doc.wikimedia.org] and [[phab:T235901]].&lt;!-- Need [[Extension:WikibaseLexeme/Lua]] --&gt;
* [[c:Special:MyLanguage/Commons:Structured data|MediaInfo (SDC)]] is now supported. See [[Extension:WikibaseMediaInfo/Lua]] and [[c:Commons:Structured data/Lua|Commons:Structured data/Lua]].
}}

&lt;translate&gt;
== Further reading == &lt;!--T:1--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Coding conventions/Lua}}
* {{ll|Extension:Scribunto/Lua reference manual}}
* {{ll|Wikibase/DataModel/JSON}}
* Wikimedia Gerrit mediawiki-extensions-Wikibase (master) source code
** [[git:mediawiki/extensions/Wikibase/+/master/docs/topics/lua.md|/docs/topics/lua.md]]
** [[git:mediawiki/extensions/Wikibase/+/master/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.lua|/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.lua]]
** [[git:mediawiki/extensions/Wikibase/+/master/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.entity.lua|/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.entity.lua]]
* Wikimedia Phabricator Diffusion extension-Wikibase (master) source code mirror
** [[phab:diffusion/EWBA/browse/master/docs/topics/lua.md|/docs/topics/lua.md]]
** [[phab:diffusion/EWBA/browse/master/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.lua|/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.lua]]
** [[phab:diffusion/EWBA/browse/master/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.entity.lua|/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.entity.lua]]
* Wikimedia GitHub mediawiki-extensions-Wikibase (master) source code mirror
** [https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-Wikibase/blob/master/docs/topics/lua.md /docs/topics/lua.md]
** [https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-Wikibase/blob/master/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.lua /client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.lua]
** [https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-Wikibase/blob/master/client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.entity.lua /client/includes/DataAccess/Scribunto/mw.wikibase.entity.lua]

[[Category:Wikibase{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Lua{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9ghqyq0txndm8awq3emj1b10fadk3zx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:Translate/Statistics and reporting/it</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>121686</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402891</id>
      <parentid>5365239</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:45:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17268" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
L'[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|estensione Translate]] fornisce molte '''statistiche e rapporti informativi'''.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of them are updated in real time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are exposed primarily through the four special pages ''LanguageStats'', ''MessageGroupStats'', ''TranslationStats'' and ''SupportedLanguages''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first two are different views to the same data: completion percentages of each language of each message groups.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The latter two pages help translation administrators to track the health of the translation community, both from a high level perspective and from close-up detailed perspective.&lt;/span&gt;

Risultano comode sia per il traduttore, a cui permettono di trovare cose da fare, sia per i coordinatori del progetto, a cui permettono di monitorare cosa sta succedendo. Inoltre, possono essere utili per creare visualizzazioni della comunità e del lavoro del wiki per molti potenziali clienti.

== Statistiche di completamento di tutto il lavoro per una specifica lingua ==
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 01. LanguageStats long.png|thumb|Statistiche linguistiche]]

Il pubblico principale per la pagina [[Special:LanguageStats|Special:LanguageStats]] sono i '''traduttori'''.
Ai traduttori viene fornita una panoramica di tutti i gruppi di messaggi che sono disponibili per la traduzione e di quanti messaggi non tradotti ogni gruppo contiene, in modo da scoprire facilmente su cosa c'è da lavorare.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione i gruppi di messaggi senza traduzioni, quelli con tutte le traduzione fatte (predefinito), o entrambi.

Gli amministratori di traduzione possono raccogliere i gruppi di messaggi in gruppi più grandi, cosa che li rende espandibili nella tabella delle statistiche ed aiuta i traduttori interessati solo in alcuni progetti.
Tali gruppi sono chiamati ''gruppi di messaggi aggregati'' e sono visualizzati in grassetto.
La stessa formattazione è applicata per i ''gruppi di messaggi secondari'', i quali condividono parte o tutti i loro messaggi con un altro gruppo.
[[translatewiki:Special:LanguageStats|Esempi di questi gruppi su translatewiki.net]] sono il gruppo di messaggi per le diramazioni stabili di MediaWiki e il gruppo dei &quot;500 messaggi più usati di MediaWiki&quot;.

Se viene fatto uso di stati che rappresentano il flusso di lavoro, anche questi vengono visualizzati.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Questa pagina può essere inclusa in altre pagine del wiki utilizzando la sintassi &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:LanguageStats/nl}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;, dove &lt;code&gt;nl&lt;/code&gt; può essere sostituito da qualsiasi codice di lingua. Per impostazione predefinita, i gruppi completamente tradotti sono nascosti, ma i filtri che compaiono nella pagina speciale si possono controllare utilizzando la sintassi {{Special:LanguageStats/nl|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Statistiche di completamento per un gruppo di messaggi in tutte le lingue ==
Il pubblico principale per [[Special:MessageGroupStats|Special:MessageGroupStats]] sono i '''gestori di traduzione e di progetto'''.
Questa pagina offre una panoramica del livello di traduzione di un gruppo di messaggi in diverse lingue.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione le lingue senza traduzione (attivato per impostazione predefinita), le lingue con tutte le traduzioni fatte, o entrambe.
Può essere usato per valutare quante lingue hanno un livello di traduzione adeguato, quali hanno bisogno di provvedimenti per riuscire a raggiungere l'obiettivo prefissato entro i termini della scadenza o quali hanno appena iniziato.
Può essere usata insieme alla [[#supportedlanguage|lista delle lingue e dei traduttori]] per trovare i traduttori di ogni lingua.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If message group workflow states are used, they will also be shown on this page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This special page is includable with the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; where &lt;code&gt;groupid&lt;/code&gt; can be replaced with any valid ''group id''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also use the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats/groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; but if the group id contains slashes this won't work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default languages without any translations are hidden, but you can control to filters shown in the special page with syntax like &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|supportedlanguage}}
== Elenco di lingue e traduttori ==
[[File:Translate manual - SupportedLanguages.png|thumb|In SupportedLanguages, è possibile scegliere la lingua in cui si è interessati a tradurre e visualizzare la lista dei traduttori già attivi (solo in parte).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[translatewiki:Special:SupportedLanguages|Special:SupportedLanguages]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the translation administrator's high level overview of the translation community of a wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All used languages are listed there and their activity level is visualized by a tag cloud.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Larger text means a more active language.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a list of translators, annotated with how much work they have done and whether they have been inactive for some time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A translation administrator can use the list to find translators for urgent translation jobs or just to ping inactive translators to try to get active again.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Translators can also use it to find fellow translators in their language who are active and can be contacted, thus improving interaction and collaboration in the translation community.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Graphing the activity ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - TranslationStats.png|thumb|Nella pagina speciale sono presenti dei grafici che possono essere incorporati ovunque nelle wiki (in questo esempio [[Extension:LiquidThreads|liquid thread]]).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[Special:TranslationStats|Special:TranslationStats]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page acts as a tool to both inspect the community activity and generate nice graphs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose to map any of the following five parameters (only one at a time): number of active translators, number of translation edits, number of translation reviews, number of reviewers or number of new user registrations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose a time scale in hours, days, weeks or months, a period to report on in days and an image size.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview of the graph will also provide wikitext that can be copied to any page in the wiki to include the graph in it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The graphs are cached for a few hours, but essentially they update in almost real time.&lt;/span&gt;

È possibile creare dei grafici anche solo per un certo gruppo di messaggi o per una specifica lingua con lo scopo di effettuare dei confronti. In questo modo è possibile, per esempio, creare dei grafici sulle traduzioni di MediaWiki in finlandese, svedese, norvegese e danese e visualizzarli in pagine di rilievo al fine di stimolare e dare impulso alla creazione di una sana competizione nell'attività di traduzione.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The availability of this page depends on PHPlot being installed and configured. The graphs are localised, but the server must have fonts for all the scripts and even with good fonts some languages are rendered incorrectly.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduzioni in tutte le lingue ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The primary audience for [[Special:Translations|Special:Translations]] are '''translation administrators'''. This page lists all translations of a given message. With this page the translation administrator can easily perform simple maintenance and compare translations. The history and translation editor for each message are just one click away.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page is linked from the sidebar Toolbox section as &quot;In other languages&quot; when viewing translation units or other message translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For semi-automated mass changes have a look at [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Replace Text|extension Replace Text]] or the {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}} framework. For exporting, a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/API|action API module]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Cambiamenti recenti, registrazioni e feed==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''All users''' can benefit from [[Special:RecentChanges|Special:RecentChanges]], on which all translation related work can be tracked. Filters are added to make it more useful, especially in the case of page translation where each edit is performed on the translation unit page and copied over the translation page, which causes two entries in an unfiltered recent changes page.
&lt;/div&gt;

Questi sono i filtri disponibili per la visualizzazione delle modifiche recenti:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-no}}&quot;: Don't filter anything, show complete feed.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-only}}&quot;: Show only edits to all system messages, their translations and all translation namespaces.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot;: Hide all the edits shown with the previous option (default option).
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-site}}&quot;: Show only edits to actual system messages used by the wiki interface (MediaWiki pages, not subpages).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filters apply in the same way also to actions on such pages as well as to their talk pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more filters you can install the {{ll|Extension:CleanChanges|CleanChanges}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It provides filtering by user names and language codes and the recent changes list itself contains a smaller subset of information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the filters can also be used as feeds. Just choose the filters that you want and append &lt;code&gt;&amp;feed=atom&lt;/code&gt; to the URL. You could for instance watch all new translations in your language in your feed reader. Example: &lt;code&gt;[https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&amp;feed=atom https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&lt;big&gt;'''&amp;feed=atom'''&lt;/big&gt;]&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

Quasi tutte le azioni relative alla traduzione, come la marcatura di alcune pagine per l'aggiornamento ecc..., sono registrate. I cambiamenti sono visibili nella cronologia, e anche in [[Special:log/pagetranslation|traduzioni di pagine]] e [[Special:Log/translationreview|revisioni delle traduzioni]].
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 08. Review all.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On &quot;review all&quot; task for this group we see that there is only a new translation to review&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translators who want to follow recent translations have many options: they can use their watchlist, typically to just check for updates to their translations; alternatively, if they want to give a more general look to all translations, follow the recent changes from the special page or the syndicated feed as described above, or, perhaps the most comfortable way, using the &quot;[[Special:Translate/!recent]]&quot; recent translation message group with the &quot;accept translations&quot; or &quot;review all translations&quot; task (see [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Quality assurance|Quality assurance]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The review tasks (currently) also provide the only way to monitor changes to a specific message group: you can select that group and, if you (or someone else) have reviewed its translations before, only the new ones will show up for review.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translated pages are the easiest message groups to monitor: you can just look at the history of a page, or have a combined view of all changes to all pages on the recent changes page with the &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot; filter.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Static translation statistics table ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The command line script &lt;code&gt;groupStatistics.php&lt;/code&gt; allows the creation of custom versions of tables shown in Special:MessageGroupStats.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose multiple groups and the list of languages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script can produce output in different formats: text, wikitext or HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bots or &lt;code&gt;maintenance/edit.php&lt;/code&gt; can be used to automatically import the statistics tables into wiki pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to keep these tables up to date you have to rerun the scripts regularly (for example daily).&lt;/span&gt;

== Altre estensioni utili ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== User rating ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:ContributionScores.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A custom rank included on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for ''Special:ContributionScores'' (added by [[Extension:Contribution Scores|Contribution Scores extension]]) are '''translators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page produces a rank of users based on the number of edited pages and edits users have made in the last 7 days, 30 days or in all time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's useful to see who's been most active on the wiki in the last few days and to compare one's own activity to the others'.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Custom charts can be generated and included in any page, by passing parameters to the special page in the subpage format, for instance: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:ContributionScores/10/0/notools,nosort}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the parameters used in the previous example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The number of users shown in each table.
# The number of days to report on (&lt;code&gt;0&lt;/code&gt; for all time).
# A list of comma-separated configuration settings:
#* &lt;code&gt;notools&lt;/code&gt; hides the standard links to user talk, contributions etc. after each user name;
#* &lt;code&gt;nosort&lt;/code&gt; makes the table not sortable, reducing space requirements.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Mappe ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Maps are a useful feature added by the {{ll|Extension:Maps|Maps}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are not specific to translation work, but they can be of use for instance in project and language portals/coordination pages, which are among the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation best practices|translation best practices]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See for instance the [[translatewiki:Translating:MediaWiki#Translator map|map of MediaWiki translators]] on [[translatewiki.net]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thanks to maps, the distribution of translators in the physical world can be easily visualized, which means that people from outside the community see how it's vibrant and world-spread (as every translation community will probably be).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondarily, translators can feel it too; moreover, seeing where other translators working on the same language or project are helps in building a sense of community (and perhaps even making new friends).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lastly, project coordinators and wiki administrators can see also the geographies (not only the languages) where the wiki is doing well or could be improved.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Statistics and reporting]]</text>
      <sha1>ae2i0kbm5akat6ugv2oy8c75q4dnry4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402893</id>
      <parentid>5402891</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:45:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17271" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
L'[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|estensione Translate]] fornisce molte '''statistiche e rapporti informativi'''.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of them are updated in real time.&lt;/span&gt;
La maggior parte delle informazioni viene caricata in tempo reale ed è visibile consultando le quattro pagine speciali ''LanguageStats'', ''MessageGroupStats'', ''TranslationStats'' e ''SupportedLanguages''.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first two are different views to the same data: completion percentages of each language of each message groups.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The latter two pages help translation administrators to track the health of the translation community, both from a high level perspective and from close-up detailed perspective.&lt;/span&gt;

Risultano comode sia per il traduttore, a cui permettono di trovare cose da fare, sia per i coordinatori del progetto, a cui permettono di monitorare cosa sta succedendo. Inoltre, possono essere utili per creare visualizzazioni della comunità e del lavoro del wiki per molti potenziali clienti.

== Statistiche di completamento di tutto il lavoro per una specifica lingua ==
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 01. LanguageStats long.png|thumb|Statistiche linguistiche]]

Il pubblico principale per la pagina [[Special:LanguageStats|Special:LanguageStats]] sono i '''traduttori'''.
Ai traduttori viene fornita una panoramica di tutti i gruppi di messaggi che sono disponibili per la traduzione e di quanti messaggi non tradotti ogni gruppo contiene, in modo da scoprire facilmente su cosa c'è da lavorare.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione i gruppi di messaggi senza traduzioni, quelli con tutte le traduzione fatte (predefinito), o entrambi.

Gli amministratori di traduzione possono raccogliere i gruppi di messaggi in gruppi più grandi, cosa che li rende espandibili nella tabella delle statistiche ed aiuta i traduttori interessati solo in alcuni progetti.
Tali gruppi sono chiamati ''gruppi di messaggi aggregati'' e sono visualizzati in grassetto.
La stessa formattazione è applicata per i ''gruppi di messaggi secondari'', i quali condividono parte o tutti i loro messaggi con un altro gruppo.
[[translatewiki:Special:LanguageStats|Esempi di questi gruppi su translatewiki.net]] sono il gruppo di messaggi per le diramazioni stabili di MediaWiki e il gruppo dei &quot;500 messaggi più usati di MediaWiki&quot;.

Se viene fatto uso di stati che rappresentano il flusso di lavoro, anche questi vengono visualizzati.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Questa pagina può essere inclusa in altre pagine del wiki utilizzando la sintassi &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:LanguageStats/nl}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;, dove &lt;code&gt;nl&lt;/code&gt; può essere sostituito da qualsiasi codice di lingua. Per impostazione predefinita, i gruppi completamente tradotti sono nascosti, ma i filtri che compaiono nella pagina speciale si possono controllare utilizzando la sintassi {{Special:LanguageStats/nl|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Statistiche di completamento per un gruppo di messaggi in tutte le lingue ==
Il pubblico principale per [[Special:MessageGroupStats|Special:MessageGroupStats]] sono i '''gestori di traduzione e di progetto'''.
Questa pagina offre una panoramica del livello di traduzione di un gruppo di messaggi in diverse lingue.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione le lingue senza traduzione (attivato per impostazione predefinita), le lingue con tutte le traduzioni fatte, o entrambe.
Può essere usato per valutare quante lingue hanno un livello di traduzione adeguato, quali hanno bisogno di provvedimenti per riuscire a raggiungere l'obiettivo prefissato entro i termini della scadenza o quali hanno appena iniziato.
Può essere usata insieme alla [[#supportedlanguage|lista delle lingue e dei traduttori]] per trovare i traduttori di ogni lingua.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If message group workflow states are used, they will also be shown on this page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This special page is includable with the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; where &lt;code&gt;groupid&lt;/code&gt; can be replaced with any valid ''group id''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also use the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats/groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; but if the group id contains slashes this won't work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default languages without any translations are hidden, but you can control to filters shown in the special page with syntax like &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|supportedlanguage}}
== Elenco di lingue e traduttori ==
[[File:Translate manual - SupportedLanguages.png|thumb|In SupportedLanguages, è possibile scegliere la lingua in cui si è interessati a tradurre e visualizzare la lista dei traduttori già attivi (solo in parte).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[translatewiki:Special:SupportedLanguages|Special:SupportedLanguages]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the translation administrator's high level overview of the translation community of a wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All used languages are listed there and their activity level is visualized by a tag cloud.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Larger text means a more active language.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a list of translators, annotated with how much work they have done and whether they have been inactive for some time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A translation administrator can use the list to find translators for urgent translation jobs or just to ping inactive translators to try to get active again.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Translators can also use it to find fellow translators in their language who are active and can be contacted, thus improving interaction and collaboration in the translation community.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Graphing the activity ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - TranslationStats.png|thumb|Nella pagina speciale sono presenti dei grafici che possono essere incorporati ovunque nelle wiki (in questo esempio [[Extension:LiquidThreads|liquid thread]]).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[Special:TranslationStats|Special:TranslationStats]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page acts as a tool to both inspect the community activity and generate nice graphs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose to map any of the following five parameters (only one at a time): number of active translators, number of translation edits, number of translation reviews, number of reviewers or number of new user registrations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose a time scale in hours, days, weeks or months, a period to report on in days and an image size.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview of the graph will also provide wikitext that can be copied to any page in the wiki to include the graph in it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The graphs are cached for a few hours, but essentially they update in almost real time.&lt;/span&gt;

È possibile creare dei grafici anche solo per un certo gruppo di messaggi o per una specifica lingua con lo scopo di effettuare dei confronti. In questo modo è possibile, per esempio, creare dei grafici sulle traduzioni di MediaWiki in finlandese, svedese, norvegese e danese e visualizzarli in pagine di rilievo al fine di stimolare e dare impulso alla creazione di una sana competizione nell'attività di traduzione.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The availability of this page depends on PHPlot being installed and configured. The graphs are localised, but the server must have fonts for all the scripts and even with good fonts some languages are rendered incorrectly.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduzioni in tutte le lingue ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The primary audience for [[Special:Translations|Special:Translations]] are '''translation administrators'''. This page lists all translations of a given message. With this page the translation administrator can easily perform simple maintenance and compare translations. The history and translation editor for each message are just one click away.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page is linked from the sidebar Toolbox section as &quot;In other languages&quot; when viewing translation units or other message translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For semi-automated mass changes have a look at [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Replace Text|extension Replace Text]] or the {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}} framework. For exporting, a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/API|action API module]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Cambiamenti recenti, registrazioni e feed==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''All users''' can benefit from [[Special:RecentChanges|Special:RecentChanges]], on which all translation related work can be tracked. Filters are added to make it more useful, especially in the case of page translation where each edit is performed on the translation unit page and copied over the translation page, which causes two entries in an unfiltered recent changes page.
&lt;/div&gt;

Questi sono i filtri disponibili per la visualizzazione delle modifiche recenti:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-no}}&quot;: Don't filter anything, show complete feed.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-only}}&quot;: Show only edits to all system messages, their translations and all translation namespaces.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot;: Hide all the edits shown with the previous option (default option).
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-site}}&quot;: Show only edits to actual system messages used by the wiki interface (MediaWiki pages, not subpages).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filters apply in the same way also to actions on such pages as well as to their talk pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more filters you can install the {{ll|Extension:CleanChanges|CleanChanges}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It provides filtering by user names and language codes and the recent changes list itself contains a smaller subset of information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the filters can also be used as feeds. Just choose the filters that you want and append &lt;code&gt;&amp;feed=atom&lt;/code&gt; to the URL. You could for instance watch all new translations in your language in your feed reader. Example: &lt;code&gt;[https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&amp;feed=atom https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&lt;big&gt;'''&amp;feed=atom'''&lt;/big&gt;]&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

Quasi tutte le azioni relative alla traduzione, come la marcatura di alcune pagine per l'aggiornamento ecc..., sono registrate. I cambiamenti sono visibili nella cronologia, e anche in [[Special:log/pagetranslation|traduzioni di pagine]] e [[Special:Log/translationreview|revisioni delle traduzioni]].
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 08. Review all.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On &quot;review all&quot; task for this group we see that there is only a new translation to review&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translators who want to follow recent translations have many options: they can use their watchlist, typically to just check for updates to their translations; alternatively, if they want to give a more general look to all translations, follow the recent changes from the special page or the syndicated feed as described above, or, perhaps the most comfortable way, using the &quot;[[Special:Translate/!recent]]&quot; recent translation message group with the &quot;accept translations&quot; or &quot;review all translations&quot; task (see [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Quality assurance|Quality assurance]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The review tasks (currently) also provide the only way to monitor changes to a specific message group: you can select that group and, if you (or someone else) have reviewed its translations before, only the new ones will show up for review.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translated pages are the easiest message groups to monitor: you can just look at the history of a page, or have a combined view of all changes to all pages on the recent changes page with the &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot; filter.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Static translation statistics table ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The command line script &lt;code&gt;groupStatistics.php&lt;/code&gt; allows the creation of custom versions of tables shown in Special:MessageGroupStats.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose multiple groups and the list of languages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script can produce output in different formats: text, wikitext or HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bots or &lt;code&gt;maintenance/edit.php&lt;/code&gt; can be used to automatically import the statistics tables into wiki pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to keep these tables up to date you have to rerun the scripts regularly (for example daily).&lt;/span&gt;

== Altre estensioni utili ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== User rating ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:ContributionScores.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A custom rank included on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for ''Special:ContributionScores'' (added by [[Extension:Contribution Scores|Contribution Scores extension]]) are '''translators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page produces a rank of users based on the number of edited pages and edits users have made in the last 7 days, 30 days or in all time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's useful to see who's been most active on the wiki in the last few days and to compare one's own activity to the others'.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Custom charts can be generated and included in any page, by passing parameters to the special page in the subpage format, for instance: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:ContributionScores/10/0/notools,nosort}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the parameters used in the previous example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The number of users shown in each table.
# The number of days to report on (&lt;code&gt;0&lt;/code&gt; for all time).
# A list of comma-separated configuration settings:
#* &lt;code&gt;notools&lt;/code&gt; hides the standard links to user talk, contributions etc. after each user name;
#* &lt;code&gt;nosort&lt;/code&gt; makes the table not sortable, reducing space requirements.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Mappe ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Maps are a useful feature added by the {{ll|Extension:Maps|Maps}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are not specific to translation work, but they can be of use for instance in project and language portals/coordination pages, which are among the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation best practices|translation best practices]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See for instance the [[translatewiki:Translating:MediaWiki#Translator map|map of MediaWiki translators]] on [[translatewiki.net]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thanks to maps, the distribution of translators in the physical world can be easily visualized, which means that people from outside the community see how it's vibrant and world-spread (as every translation community will probably be).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondarily, translators can feel it too; moreover, seeing where other translators working on the same language or project are helps in building a sense of community (and perhaps even making new friends).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lastly, project coordinators and wiki administrators can see also the geographies (not only the languages) where the wiki is doing well or could be improved.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Statistics and reporting]]</text>
      <sha1>g7eguxmdefmiujjjza14xi7u6a08y2h</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402895</id>
      <parentid>5402893</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:45:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17239" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
L'[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|estensione Translate]] fornisce molte '''statistiche e rapporti informativi'''.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of them are updated in real time.&lt;/span&gt;
La maggior parte delle informazioni viene caricata in tempo reale ed è visibile consultando le quattro pagine speciali ''LanguageStats'', ''MessageGroupStats'', ''TranslationStats'' e ''SupportedLanguages''.
Le prime due sono visualizzazioni differenti degli stessi dati: le percentuali di completamento per ogni lingua di ogni gruppo di messaggi.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The latter two pages help translation administrators to track the health of the translation community, both from a high level perspective and from close-up detailed perspective.&lt;/span&gt;

Risultano comode sia per il traduttore, a cui permettono di trovare cose da fare, sia per i coordinatori del progetto, a cui permettono di monitorare cosa sta succedendo. Inoltre, possono essere utili per creare visualizzazioni della comunità e del lavoro del wiki per molti potenziali clienti.

== Statistiche di completamento di tutto il lavoro per una specifica lingua ==
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 01. LanguageStats long.png|thumb|Statistiche linguistiche]]

Il pubblico principale per la pagina [[Special:LanguageStats|Special:LanguageStats]] sono i '''traduttori'''.
Ai traduttori viene fornita una panoramica di tutti i gruppi di messaggi che sono disponibili per la traduzione e di quanti messaggi non tradotti ogni gruppo contiene, in modo da scoprire facilmente su cosa c'è da lavorare.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione i gruppi di messaggi senza traduzioni, quelli con tutte le traduzione fatte (predefinito), o entrambi.

Gli amministratori di traduzione possono raccogliere i gruppi di messaggi in gruppi più grandi, cosa che li rende espandibili nella tabella delle statistiche ed aiuta i traduttori interessati solo in alcuni progetti.
Tali gruppi sono chiamati ''gruppi di messaggi aggregati'' e sono visualizzati in grassetto.
La stessa formattazione è applicata per i ''gruppi di messaggi secondari'', i quali condividono parte o tutti i loro messaggi con un altro gruppo.
[[translatewiki:Special:LanguageStats|Esempi di questi gruppi su translatewiki.net]] sono il gruppo di messaggi per le diramazioni stabili di MediaWiki e il gruppo dei &quot;500 messaggi più usati di MediaWiki&quot;.

Se viene fatto uso di stati che rappresentano il flusso di lavoro, anche questi vengono visualizzati.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Questa pagina può essere inclusa in altre pagine del wiki utilizzando la sintassi &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:LanguageStats/nl}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;, dove &lt;code&gt;nl&lt;/code&gt; può essere sostituito da qualsiasi codice di lingua. Per impostazione predefinita, i gruppi completamente tradotti sono nascosti, ma i filtri che compaiono nella pagina speciale si possono controllare utilizzando la sintassi {{Special:LanguageStats/nl|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Statistiche di completamento per un gruppo di messaggi in tutte le lingue ==
Il pubblico principale per [[Special:MessageGroupStats|Special:MessageGroupStats]] sono i '''gestori di traduzione e di progetto'''.
Questa pagina offre una panoramica del livello di traduzione di un gruppo di messaggi in diverse lingue.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione le lingue senza traduzione (attivato per impostazione predefinita), le lingue con tutte le traduzioni fatte, o entrambe.
Può essere usato per valutare quante lingue hanno un livello di traduzione adeguato, quali hanno bisogno di provvedimenti per riuscire a raggiungere l'obiettivo prefissato entro i termini della scadenza o quali hanno appena iniziato.
Può essere usata insieme alla [[#supportedlanguage|lista delle lingue e dei traduttori]] per trovare i traduttori di ogni lingua.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If message group workflow states are used, they will also be shown on this page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This special page is includable with the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; where &lt;code&gt;groupid&lt;/code&gt; can be replaced with any valid ''group id''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also use the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats/groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; but if the group id contains slashes this won't work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default languages without any translations are hidden, but you can control to filters shown in the special page with syntax like &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|supportedlanguage}}
== Elenco di lingue e traduttori ==
[[File:Translate manual - SupportedLanguages.png|thumb|In SupportedLanguages, è possibile scegliere la lingua in cui si è interessati a tradurre e visualizzare la lista dei traduttori già attivi (solo in parte).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[translatewiki:Special:SupportedLanguages|Special:SupportedLanguages]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the translation administrator's high level overview of the translation community of a wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All used languages are listed there and their activity level is visualized by a tag cloud.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Larger text means a more active language.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a list of translators, annotated with how much work they have done and whether they have been inactive for some time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A translation administrator can use the list to find translators for urgent translation jobs or just to ping inactive translators to try to get active again.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Translators can also use it to find fellow translators in their language who are active and can be contacted, thus improving interaction and collaboration in the translation community.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Graphing the activity ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - TranslationStats.png|thumb|Nella pagina speciale sono presenti dei grafici che possono essere incorporati ovunque nelle wiki (in questo esempio [[Extension:LiquidThreads|liquid thread]]).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[Special:TranslationStats|Special:TranslationStats]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page acts as a tool to both inspect the community activity and generate nice graphs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose to map any of the following five parameters (only one at a time): number of active translators, number of translation edits, number of translation reviews, number of reviewers or number of new user registrations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose a time scale in hours, days, weeks or months, a period to report on in days and an image size.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview of the graph will also provide wikitext that can be copied to any page in the wiki to include the graph in it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The graphs are cached for a few hours, but essentially they update in almost real time.&lt;/span&gt;

È possibile creare dei grafici anche solo per un certo gruppo di messaggi o per una specifica lingua con lo scopo di effettuare dei confronti. In questo modo è possibile, per esempio, creare dei grafici sulle traduzioni di MediaWiki in finlandese, svedese, norvegese e danese e visualizzarli in pagine di rilievo al fine di stimolare e dare impulso alla creazione di una sana competizione nell'attività di traduzione.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The availability of this page depends on PHPlot being installed and configured. The graphs are localised, but the server must have fonts for all the scripts and even with good fonts some languages are rendered incorrectly.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduzioni in tutte le lingue ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The primary audience for [[Special:Translations|Special:Translations]] are '''translation administrators'''. This page lists all translations of a given message. With this page the translation administrator can easily perform simple maintenance and compare translations. The history and translation editor for each message are just one click away.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page is linked from the sidebar Toolbox section as &quot;In other languages&quot; when viewing translation units or other message translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For semi-automated mass changes have a look at [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Replace Text|extension Replace Text]] or the {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}} framework. For exporting, a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/API|action API module]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Cambiamenti recenti, registrazioni e feed==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''All users''' can benefit from [[Special:RecentChanges|Special:RecentChanges]], on which all translation related work can be tracked. Filters are added to make it more useful, especially in the case of page translation where each edit is performed on the translation unit page and copied over the translation page, which causes two entries in an unfiltered recent changes page.
&lt;/div&gt;

Questi sono i filtri disponibili per la visualizzazione delle modifiche recenti:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-no}}&quot;: Don't filter anything, show complete feed.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-only}}&quot;: Show only edits to all system messages, their translations and all translation namespaces.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot;: Hide all the edits shown with the previous option (default option).
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-site}}&quot;: Show only edits to actual system messages used by the wiki interface (MediaWiki pages, not subpages).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filters apply in the same way also to actions on such pages as well as to their talk pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more filters you can install the {{ll|Extension:CleanChanges|CleanChanges}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It provides filtering by user names and language codes and the recent changes list itself contains a smaller subset of information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the filters can also be used as feeds. Just choose the filters that you want and append &lt;code&gt;&amp;feed=atom&lt;/code&gt; to the URL. You could for instance watch all new translations in your language in your feed reader. Example: &lt;code&gt;[https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&amp;feed=atom https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&lt;big&gt;'''&amp;feed=atom'''&lt;/big&gt;]&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

Quasi tutte le azioni relative alla traduzione, come la marcatura di alcune pagine per l'aggiornamento ecc..., sono registrate. I cambiamenti sono visibili nella cronologia, e anche in [[Special:log/pagetranslation|traduzioni di pagine]] e [[Special:Log/translationreview|revisioni delle traduzioni]].
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 08. Review all.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On &quot;review all&quot; task for this group we see that there is only a new translation to review&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translators who want to follow recent translations have many options: they can use their watchlist, typically to just check for updates to their translations; alternatively, if they want to give a more general look to all translations, follow the recent changes from the special page or the syndicated feed as described above, or, perhaps the most comfortable way, using the &quot;[[Special:Translate/!recent]]&quot; recent translation message group with the &quot;accept translations&quot; or &quot;review all translations&quot; task (see [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Quality assurance|Quality assurance]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The review tasks (currently) also provide the only way to monitor changes to a specific message group: you can select that group and, if you (or someone else) have reviewed its translations before, only the new ones will show up for review.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translated pages are the easiest message groups to monitor: you can just look at the history of a page, or have a combined view of all changes to all pages on the recent changes page with the &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot; filter.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Static translation statistics table ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The command line script &lt;code&gt;groupStatistics.php&lt;/code&gt; allows the creation of custom versions of tables shown in Special:MessageGroupStats.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose multiple groups and the list of languages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script can produce output in different formats: text, wikitext or HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bots or &lt;code&gt;maintenance/edit.php&lt;/code&gt; can be used to automatically import the statistics tables into wiki pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to keep these tables up to date you have to rerun the scripts regularly (for example daily).&lt;/span&gt;

== Altre estensioni utili ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== User rating ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:ContributionScores.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A custom rank included on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for ''Special:ContributionScores'' (added by [[Extension:Contribution Scores|Contribution Scores extension]]) are '''translators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page produces a rank of users based on the number of edited pages and edits users have made in the last 7 days, 30 days or in all time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's useful to see who's been most active on the wiki in the last few days and to compare one's own activity to the others'.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Custom charts can be generated and included in any page, by passing parameters to the special page in the subpage format, for instance: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:ContributionScores/10/0/notools,nosort}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the parameters used in the previous example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The number of users shown in each table.
# The number of days to report on (&lt;code&gt;0&lt;/code&gt; for all time).
# A list of comma-separated configuration settings:
#* &lt;code&gt;notools&lt;/code&gt; hides the standard links to user talk, contributions etc. after each user name;
#* &lt;code&gt;nosort&lt;/code&gt; makes the table not sortable, reducing space requirements.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Mappe ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Maps are a useful feature added by the {{ll|Extension:Maps|Maps}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are not specific to translation work, but they can be of use for instance in project and language portals/coordination pages, which are among the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation best practices|translation best practices]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See for instance the [[translatewiki:Translating:MediaWiki#Translator map|map of MediaWiki translators]] on [[translatewiki.net]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thanks to maps, the distribution of translators in the physical world can be easily visualized, which means that people from outside the community see how it's vibrant and world-spread (as every translation community will probably be).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondarily, translators can feel it too; moreover, seeing where other translators working on the same language or project are helps in building a sense of community (and perhaps even making new friends).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lastly, project coordinators and wiki administrators can see also the geographies (not only the languages) where the wiki is doing well or could be improved.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Statistics and reporting]]</text>
      <sha1>tctbrqtjjgs30rpi5he4x5x9c5aizuf</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402897</id>
      <parentid>5402895</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:45:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17180" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
L'[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|estensione Translate]] fornisce molte '''statistiche e rapporti informativi'''.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of them are updated in real time.&lt;/span&gt;
La maggior parte delle informazioni viene caricata in tempo reale ed è visibile consultando le quattro pagine speciali ''LanguageStats'', ''MessageGroupStats'', ''TranslationStats'' e ''SupportedLanguages''.
Le prime due sono visualizzazioni differenti degli stessi dati: le percentuali di completamento per ogni lingua di ogni gruppo di messaggi.
Le alre due pagine aiutano gli amministratori di traduzione a controllare lo stato della comunità, sia da una prospettiva generale che da un punto di vista più dettagliato.

Risultano comode sia per il traduttore, a cui permettono di trovare cose da fare, sia per i coordinatori del progetto, a cui permettono di monitorare cosa sta succedendo. Inoltre, possono essere utili per creare visualizzazioni della comunità e del lavoro del wiki per molti potenziali clienti.

== Statistiche di completamento di tutto il lavoro per una specifica lingua ==
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 01. LanguageStats long.png|thumb|Statistiche linguistiche]]

Il pubblico principale per la pagina [[Special:LanguageStats|Special:LanguageStats]] sono i '''traduttori'''.
Ai traduttori viene fornita una panoramica di tutti i gruppi di messaggi che sono disponibili per la traduzione e di quanti messaggi non tradotti ogni gruppo contiene, in modo da scoprire facilmente su cosa c'è da lavorare.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione i gruppi di messaggi senza traduzioni, quelli con tutte le traduzione fatte (predefinito), o entrambi.

Gli amministratori di traduzione possono raccogliere i gruppi di messaggi in gruppi più grandi, cosa che li rende espandibili nella tabella delle statistiche ed aiuta i traduttori interessati solo in alcuni progetti.
Tali gruppi sono chiamati ''gruppi di messaggi aggregati'' e sono visualizzati in grassetto.
La stessa formattazione è applicata per i ''gruppi di messaggi secondari'', i quali condividono parte o tutti i loro messaggi con un altro gruppo.
[[translatewiki:Special:LanguageStats|Esempi di questi gruppi su translatewiki.net]] sono il gruppo di messaggi per le diramazioni stabili di MediaWiki e il gruppo dei &quot;500 messaggi più usati di MediaWiki&quot;.

Se viene fatto uso di stati che rappresentano il flusso di lavoro, anche questi vengono visualizzati.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Questa pagina può essere inclusa in altre pagine del wiki utilizzando la sintassi &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:LanguageStats/nl}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;, dove &lt;code&gt;nl&lt;/code&gt; può essere sostituito da qualsiasi codice di lingua. Per impostazione predefinita, i gruppi completamente tradotti sono nascosti, ma i filtri che compaiono nella pagina speciale si possono controllare utilizzando la sintassi {{Special:LanguageStats/nl|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Statistiche di completamento per un gruppo di messaggi in tutte le lingue ==
Il pubblico principale per [[Special:MessageGroupStats|Special:MessageGroupStats]] sono i '''gestori di traduzione e di progetto'''.
Questa pagina offre una panoramica del livello di traduzione di un gruppo di messaggi in diverse lingue.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione le lingue senza traduzione (attivato per impostazione predefinita), le lingue con tutte le traduzioni fatte, o entrambe.
Può essere usato per valutare quante lingue hanno un livello di traduzione adeguato, quali hanno bisogno di provvedimenti per riuscire a raggiungere l'obiettivo prefissato entro i termini della scadenza o quali hanno appena iniziato.
Può essere usata insieme alla [[#supportedlanguage|lista delle lingue e dei traduttori]] per trovare i traduttori di ogni lingua.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If message group workflow states are used, they will also be shown on this page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This special page is includable with the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; where &lt;code&gt;groupid&lt;/code&gt; can be replaced with any valid ''group id''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also use the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats/groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; but if the group id contains slashes this won't work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default languages without any translations are hidden, but you can control to filters shown in the special page with syntax like &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|supportedlanguage}}
== Elenco di lingue e traduttori ==
[[File:Translate manual - SupportedLanguages.png|thumb|In SupportedLanguages, è possibile scegliere la lingua in cui si è interessati a tradurre e visualizzare la lista dei traduttori già attivi (solo in parte).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[translatewiki:Special:SupportedLanguages|Special:SupportedLanguages]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the translation administrator's high level overview of the translation community of a wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All used languages are listed there and their activity level is visualized by a tag cloud.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Larger text means a more active language.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a list of translators, annotated with how much work they have done and whether they have been inactive for some time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A translation administrator can use the list to find translators for urgent translation jobs or just to ping inactive translators to try to get active again.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Translators can also use it to find fellow translators in their language who are active and can be contacted, thus improving interaction and collaboration in the translation community.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Graphing the activity ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - TranslationStats.png|thumb|Nella pagina speciale sono presenti dei grafici che possono essere incorporati ovunque nelle wiki (in questo esempio [[Extension:LiquidThreads|liquid thread]]).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[Special:TranslationStats|Special:TranslationStats]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page acts as a tool to both inspect the community activity and generate nice graphs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose to map any of the following five parameters (only one at a time): number of active translators, number of translation edits, number of translation reviews, number of reviewers or number of new user registrations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose a time scale in hours, days, weeks or months, a period to report on in days and an image size.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview of the graph will also provide wikitext that can be copied to any page in the wiki to include the graph in it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The graphs are cached for a few hours, but essentially they update in almost real time.&lt;/span&gt;

È possibile creare dei grafici anche solo per un certo gruppo di messaggi o per una specifica lingua con lo scopo di effettuare dei confronti. In questo modo è possibile, per esempio, creare dei grafici sulle traduzioni di MediaWiki in finlandese, svedese, norvegese e danese e visualizzarli in pagine di rilievo al fine di stimolare e dare impulso alla creazione di una sana competizione nell'attività di traduzione.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The availability of this page depends on PHPlot being installed and configured. The graphs are localised, but the server must have fonts for all the scripts and even with good fonts some languages are rendered incorrectly.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduzioni in tutte le lingue ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The primary audience for [[Special:Translations|Special:Translations]] are '''translation administrators'''. This page lists all translations of a given message. With this page the translation administrator can easily perform simple maintenance and compare translations. The history and translation editor for each message are just one click away.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page is linked from the sidebar Toolbox section as &quot;In other languages&quot; when viewing translation units or other message translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For semi-automated mass changes have a look at [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Replace Text|extension Replace Text]] or the {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}} framework. For exporting, a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/API|action API module]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Cambiamenti recenti, registrazioni e feed==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''All users''' can benefit from [[Special:RecentChanges|Special:RecentChanges]], on which all translation related work can be tracked. Filters are added to make it more useful, especially in the case of page translation where each edit is performed on the translation unit page and copied over the translation page, which causes two entries in an unfiltered recent changes page.
&lt;/div&gt;

Questi sono i filtri disponibili per la visualizzazione delle modifiche recenti:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-no}}&quot;: Don't filter anything, show complete feed.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-only}}&quot;: Show only edits to all system messages, their translations and all translation namespaces.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot;: Hide all the edits shown with the previous option (default option).
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-site}}&quot;: Show only edits to actual system messages used by the wiki interface (MediaWiki pages, not subpages).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filters apply in the same way also to actions on such pages as well as to their talk pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more filters you can install the {{ll|Extension:CleanChanges|CleanChanges}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It provides filtering by user names and language codes and the recent changes list itself contains a smaller subset of information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the filters can also be used as feeds. Just choose the filters that you want and append &lt;code&gt;&amp;feed=atom&lt;/code&gt; to the URL. You could for instance watch all new translations in your language in your feed reader. Example: &lt;code&gt;[https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&amp;feed=atom https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&lt;big&gt;'''&amp;feed=atom'''&lt;/big&gt;]&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

Quasi tutte le azioni relative alla traduzione, come la marcatura di alcune pagine per l'aggiornamento ecc..., sono registrate. I cambiamenti sono visibili nella cronologia, e anche in [[Special:log/pagetranslation|traduzioni di pagine]] e [[Special:Log/translationreview|revisioni delle traduzioni]].
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 08. Review all.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On &quot;review all&quot; task for this group we see that there is only a new translation to review&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translators who want to follow recent translations have many options: they can use their watchlist, typically to just check for updates to their translations; alternatively, if they want to give a more general look to all translations, follow the recent changes from the special page or the syndicated feed as described above, or, perhaps the most comfortable way, using the &quot;[[Special:Translate/!recent]]&quot; recent translation message group with the &quot;accept translations&quot; or &quot;review all translations&quot; task (see [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Quality assurance|Quality assurance]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The review tasks (currently) also provide the only way to monitor changes to a specific message group: you can select that group and, if you (or someone else) have reviewed its translations before, only the new ones will show up for review.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translated pages are the easiest message groups to monitor: you can just look at the history of a page, or have a combined view of all changes to all pages on the recent changes page with the &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot; filter.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Static translation statistics table ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The command line script &lt;code&gt;groupStatistics.php&lt;/code&gt; allows the creation of custom versions of tables shown in Special:MessageGroupStats.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose multiple groups and the list of languages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script can produce output in different formats: text, wikitext or HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bots or &lt;code&gt;maintenance/edit.php&lt;/code&gt; can be used to automatically import the statistics tables into wiki pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to keep these tables up to date you have to rerun the scripts regularly (for example daily).&lt;/span&gt;

== Altre estensioni utili ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== User rating ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:ContributionScores.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A custom rank included on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for ''Special:ContributionScores'' (added by [[Extension:Contribution Scores|Contribution Scores extension]]) are '''translators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page produces a rank of users based on the number of edited pages and edits users have made in the last 7 days, 30 days or in all time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's useful to see who's been most active on the wiki in the last few days and to compare one's own activity to the others'.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Custom charts can be generated and included in any page, by passing parameters to the special page in the subpage format, for instance: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:ContributionScores/10/0/notools,nosort}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the parameters used in the previous example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The number of users shown in each table.
# The number of days to report on (&lt;code&gt;0&lt;/code&gt; for all time).
# A list of comma-separated configuration settings:
#* &lt;code&gt;notools&lt;/code&gt; hides the standard links to user talk, contributions etc. after each user name;
#* &lt;code&gt;nosort&lt;/code&gt; makes the table not sortable, reducing space requirements.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Mappe ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Maps are a useful feature added by the {{ll|Extension:Maps|Maps}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are not specific to translation work, but they can be of use for instance in project and language portals/coordination pages, which are among the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation best practices|translation best practices]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See for instance the [[translatewiki:Translating:MediaWiki#Translator map|map of MediaWiki translators]] on [[translatewiki.net]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thanks to maps, the distribution of translators in the physical world can be easily visualized, which means that people from outside the community see how it's vibrant and world-spread (as every translation community will probably be).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondarily, translators can feel it too; moreover, seeing where other translators working on the same language or project are helps in building a sense of community (and perhaps even making new friends).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lastly, project coordinators and wiki administrators can see also the geographies (not only the languages) where the wiki is doing well or could be improved.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Statistics and reporting]]</text>
      <sha1>n5nztpx9ykiu4w18xgqacuy6phkank6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402901</id>
      <parentid>5402897</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:13:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17130" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
L'[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|estensione Translate]] fornisce molte '''statistiche e rapporti informativi'''.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of them are updated in real time.&lt;/span&gt;
La maggior parte delle informazioni viene caricata in tempo reale ed è visibile consultando le quattro pagine speciali ''LanguageStats'', ''MessageGroupStats'', ''TranslationStats'' e ''SupportedLanguages''.
Le prime due sono visualizzazioni differenti degli stessi dati: le percentuali di completamento per ogni lingua di ogni gruppo di messaggi.
Le alre due pagine aiutano gli amministratori di traduzione a controllare lo stato della comunità, sia da una prospettiva generale che da un punto di vista più dettagliato.

Risultano comode sia per il traduttore, a cui permettono di trovare cose da fare, sia per i coordinatori del progetto, a cui permettono di monitorare cosa sta succedendo. Inoltre, possono essere utili per creare visualizzazioni della comunità e del lavoro del wiki per molti potenziali clienti.

== Statistiche di completamento di tutto il lavoro per una specifica lingua ==
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 01. LanguageStats long.png|thumb|Statistiche linguistiche]]

Il pubblico principale per la pagina [[Special:LanguageStats|Special:LanguageStats]] sono i '''traduttori'''.
Ai traduttori viene fornita una panoramica di tutti i gruppi di messaggi che sono disponibili per la traduzione e di quanti messaggi non tradotti ogni gruppo contiene, in modo da scoprire facilmente su cosa c'è da lavorare.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione i gruppi di messaggi senza traduzioni, quelli con tutte le traduzione fatte (predefinito), o entrambi.

Gli amministratori di traduzione possono raccogliere i gruppi di messaggi in gruppi più grandi, cosa che li rende espandibili nella tabella delle statistiche ed aiuta i traduttori interessati solo in alcuni progetti.
Tali gruppi sono chiamati ''gruppi di messaggi aggregati'' e sono visualizzati in grassetto.
La stessa formattazione è applicata per i ''gruppi di messaggi secondari'', i quali condividono parte o tutti i loro messaggi con un altro gruppo.
[[translatewiki:Special:LanguageStats|Esempi di questi gruppi su translatewiki.net]] sono il gruppo di messaggi per le diramazioni stabili di MediaWiki e il gruppo dei &quot;500 messaggi più usati di MediaWiki&quot;.

Se viene fatto uso di stati che rappresentano il flusso di lavoro, anche questi vengono visualizzati.

Questa pagina può essere inclusa in altre pagine del wiki con la sintassi &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:LanguageStats/nl}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; dove &lt;code&gt;nl&lt;/code&gt; può essere sostituito dal  codice di qualsiasi lingua. Per impostazione predefinita, i gruppi completamente tradotti sono nascosti, ma è possibile controllare i filtri mostrati nella pagina speciale con la sintassi &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:LanguageStats/nl|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.

== Statistiche di completamento per un gruppo di messaggi in tutte le lingue ==
Il pubblico principale per [[Special:MessageGroupStats|Special:MessageGroupStats]] sono i '''gestori di traduzione e di progetto'''.
Questa pagina offre una panoramica del livello di traduzione di un gruppo di messaggi in diverse lingue.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione le lingue senza traduzione (attivato per impostazione predefinita), le lingue con tutte le traduzioni fatte, o entrambe.
Può essere usato per valutare quante lingue hanno un livello di traduzione adeguato, quali hanno bisogno di provvedimenti per riuscire a raggiungere l'obiettivo prefissato entro i termini della scadenza o quali hanno appena iniziato.
Può essere usata insieme alla [[#supportedlanguage|lista delle lingue e dei traduttori]] per trovare i traduttori di ogni lingua.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If message group workflow states are used, they will also be shown on this page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This special page is includable with the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; where &lt;code&gt;groupid&lt;/code&gt; can be replaced with any valid ''group id''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also use the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats/groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; but if the group id contains slashes this won't work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default languages without any translations are hidden, but you can control to filters shown in the special page with syntax like &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|supportedlanguage}}
== Elenco di lingue e traduttori ==
[[File:Translate manual - SupportedLanguages.png|thumb|In SupportedLanguages, è possibile scegliere la lingua in cui si è interessati a tradurre e visualizzare la lista dei traduttori già attivi (solo in parte).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[translatewiki:Special:SupportedLanguages|Special:SupportedLanguages]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the translation administrator's high level overview of the translation community of a wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All used languages are listed there and their activity level is visualized by a tag cloud.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Larger text means a more active language.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a list of translators, annotated with how much work they have done and whether they have been inactive for some time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A translation administrator can use the list to find translators for urgent translation jobs or just to ping inactive translators to try to get active again.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Translators can also use it to find fellow translators in their language who are active and can be contacted, thus improving interaction and collaboration in the translation community.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Graphing the activity ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - TranslationStats.png|thumb|Nella pagina speciale sono presenti dei grafici che possono essere incorporati ovunque nelle wiki (in questo esempio [[Extension:LiquidThreads|liquid thread]]).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[Special:TranslationStats|Special:TranslationStats]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page acts as a tool to both inspect the community activity and generate nice graphs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose to map any of the following five parameters (only one at a time): number of active translators, number of translation edits, number of translation reviews, number of reviewers or number of new user registrations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose a time scale in hours, days, weeks or months, a period to report on in days and an image size.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview of the graph will also provide wikitext that can be copied to any page in the wiki to include the graph in it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The graphs are cached for a few hours, but essentially they update in almost real time.&lt;/span&gt;

È possibile creare dei grafici anche solo per un certo gruppo di messaggi o per una specifica lingua con lo scopo di effettuare dei confronti. In questo modo è possibile, per esempio, creare dei grafici sulle traduzioni di MediaWiki in finlandese, svedese, norvegese e danese e visualizzarli in pagine di rilievo al fine di stimolare e dare impulso alla creazione di una sana competizione nell'attività di traduzione.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The availability of this page depends on PHPlot being installed and configured. The graphs are localised, but the server must have fonts for all the scripts and even with good fonts some languages are rendered incorrectly.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduzioni in tutte le lingue ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The primary audience for [[Special:Translations|Special:Translations]] are '''translation administrators'''. This page lists all translations of a given message. With this page the translation administrator can easily perform simple maintenance and compare translations. The history and translation editor for each message are just one click away.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page is linked from the sidebar Toolbox section as &quot;In other languages&quot; when viewing translation units or other message translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For semi-automated mass changes have a look at [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Replace Text|extension Replace Text]] or the {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}} framework. For exporting, a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/API|action API module]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Cambiamenti recenti, registrazioni e feed==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''All users''' can benefit from [[Special:RecentChanges|Special:RecentChanges]], on which all translation related work can be tracked. Filters are added to make it more useful, especially in the case of page translation where each edit is performed on the translation unit page and copied over the translation page, which causes two entries in an unfiltered recent changes page.
&lt;/div&gt;

Questi sono i filtri disponibili per la visualizzazione delle modifiche recenti:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-no}}&quot;: Don't filter anything, show complete feed.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-only}}&quot;: Show only edits to all system messages, their translations and all translation namespaces.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot;: Hide all the edits shown with the previous option (default option).
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-site}}&quot;: Show only edits to actual system messages used by the wiki interface (MediaWiki pages, not subpages).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filters apply in the same way also to actions on such pages as well as to their talk pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more filters you can install the {{ll|Extension:CleanChanges|CleanChanges}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It provides filtering by user names and language codes and the recent changes list itself contains a smaller subset of information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the filters can also be used as feeds. Just choose the filters that you want and append &lt;code&gt;&amp;feed=atom&lt;/code&gt; to the URL. You could for instance watch all new translations in your language in your feed reader. Example: &lt;code&gt;[https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&amp;feed=atom https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&lt;big&gt;'''&amp;feed=atom'''&lt;/big&gt;]&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

Quasi tutte le azioni relative alla traduzione, come la marcatura di alcune pagine per l'aggiornamento ecc..., sono registrate. I cambiamenti sono visibili nella cronologia, e anche in [[Special:log/pagetranslation|traduzioni di pagine]] e [[Special:Log/translationreview|revisioni delle traduzioni]].
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 08. Review all.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On &quot;review all&quot; task for this group we see that there is only a new translation to review&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translators who want to follow recent translations have many options: they can use their watchlist, typically to just check for updates to their translations; alternatively, if they want to give a more general look to all translations, follow the recent changes from the special page or the syndicated feed as described above, or, perhaps the most comfortable way, using the &quot;[[Special:Translate/!recent]]&quot; recent translation message group with the &quot;accept translations&quot; or &quot;review all translations&quot; task (see [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Quality assurance|Quality assurance]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The review tasks (currently) also provide the only way to monitor changes to a specific message group: you can select that group and, if you (or someone else) have reviewed its translations before, only the new ones will show up for review.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translated pages are the easiest message groups to monitor: you can just look at the history of a page, or have a combined view of all changes to all pages on the recent changes page with the &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot; filter.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Static translation statistics table ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The command line script &lt;code&gt;groupStatistics.php&lt;/code&gt; allows the creation of custom versions of tables shown in Special:MessageGroupStats.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose multiple groups and the list of languages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script can produce output in different formats: text, wikitext or HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bots or &lt;code&gt;maintenance/edit.php&lt;/code&gt; can be used to automatically import the statistics tables into wiki pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to keep these tables up to date you have to rerun the scripts regularly (for example daily).&lt;/span&gt;

== Altre estensioni utili ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== User rating ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:ContributionScores.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A custom rank included on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for ''Special:ContributionScores'' (added by [[Extension:Contribution Scores|Contribution Scores extension]]) are '''translators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page produces a rank of users based on the number of edited pages and edits users have made in the last 7 days, 30 days or in all time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's useful to see who's been most active on the wiki in the last few days and to compare one's own activity to the others'.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Custom charts can be generated and included in any page, by passing parameters to the special page in the subpage format, for instance: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:ContributionScores/10/0/notools,nosort}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the parameters used in the previous example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The number of users shown in each table.
# The number of days to report on (&lt;code&gt;0&lt;/code&gt; for all time).
# A list of comma-separated configuration settings:
#* &lt;code&gt;notools&lt;/code&gt; hides the standard links to user talk, contributions etc. after each user name;
#* &lt;code&gt;nosort&lt;/code&gt; makes the table not sortable, reducing space requirements.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Mappe ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Maps are a useful feature added by the {{ll|Extension:Maps|Maps}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are not specific to translation work, but they can be of use for instance in project and language portals/coordination pages, which are among the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation best practices|translation best practices]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See for instance the [[translatewiki:Translating:MediaWiki#Translator map|map of MediaWiki translators]] on [[translatewiki.net]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thanks to maps, the distribution of translators in the physical world can be easily visualized, which means that people from outside the community see how it's vibrant and world-spread (as every translation community will probably be).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondarily, translators can feel it too; moreover, seeing where other translators working on the same language or project are helps in building a sense of community (and perhaps even making new friends).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lastly, project coordinators and wiki administrators can see also the geographies (not only the languages) where the wiki is doing well or could be improved.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Statistics and reporting]]</text>
      <sha1>p967uh26tu66xnps7relh25ftp1ppav</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402903</id>
      <parentid>5402901</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:23:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17102" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
L'[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|estensione Translate]] fornisce molte '''statistiche e rapporti informativi'''.
La maggior parte delle informazioni viene caricata in tempo reale.
La maggior parte delle informazioni viene caricata in tempo reale ed è visibile consultando le quattro pagine speciali ''LanguageStats'', ''MessageGroupStats'', ''TranslationStats'' e ''SupportedLanguages''.
Le prime due sono visualizzazioni differenti degli stessi dati: le percentuali di completamento per ogni lingua di ogni gruppo di messaggi.
Le alre due pagine aiutano gli amministratori di traduzione a controllare lo stato della comunità, sia da una prospettiva generale che da un punto di vista più dettagliato.

Risultano comode sia per il traduttore, a cui permettono di trovare cose da fare, sia per i coordinatori del progetto, a cui permettono di monitorare cosa sta succedendo. Inoltre, possono essere utili per creare visualizzazioni della comunità e del lavoro del wiki per molti potenziali clienti.

== Statistiche di completamento di tutto il lavoro per una specifica lingua ==
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 01. LanguageStats long.png|thumb|Statistiche linguistiche]]

Il pubblico principale per la pagina [[Special:LanguageStats|Special:LanguageStats]] sono i '''traduttori'''.
Ai traduttori viene fornita una panoramica di tutti i gruppi di messaggi che sono disponibili per la traduzione e di quanti messaggi non tradotti ogni gruppo contiene, in modo da scoprire facilmente su cosa c'è da lavorare.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione i gruppi di messaggi senza traduzioni, quelli con tutte le traduzione fatte (predefinito), o entrambi.

Gli amministratori di traduzione possono raccogliere i gruppi di messaggi in gruppi più grandi, cosa che li rende espandibili nella tabella delle statistiche ed aiuta i traduttori interessati solo in alcuni progetti.
Tali gruppi sono chiamati ''gruppi di messaggi aggregati'' e sono visualizzati in grassetto.
La stessa formattazione è applicata per i ''gruppi di messaggi secondari'', i quali condividono parte o tutti i loro messaggi con un altro gruppo.
[[translatewiki:Special:LanguageStats|Esempi di questi gruppi su translatewiki.net]] sono il gruppo di messaggi per le diramazioni stabili di MediaWiki e il gruppo dei &quot;500 messaggi più usati di MediaWiki&quot;.

Se viene fatto uso di stati che rappresentano il flusso di lavoro, anche questi vengono visualizzati.

Questa pagina può essere inclusa in altre pagine del wiki con la sintassi &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:LanguageStats/nl}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; dove &lt;code&gt;nl&lt;/code&gt; può essere sostituito dal  codice di qualsiasi lingua. Per impostazione predefinita, i gruppi completamente tradotti sono nascosti, ma è possibile controllare i filtri mostrati nella pagina speciale con la sintassi &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:LanguageStats/nl|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.

== Statistiche di completamento per un gruppo di messaggi in tutte le lingue ==
Il pubblico principale per [[Special:MessageGroupStats|Special:MessageGroupStats]] sono i '''gestori di traduzione e di progetto'''.
Questa pagina offre una panoramica del livello di traduzione di un gruppo di messaggi in diverse lingue.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione le lingue senza traduzione (attivato per impostazione predefinita), le lingue con tutte le traduzioni fatte, o entrambe.
Può essere usato per valutare quante lingue hanno un livello di traduzione adeguato, quali hanno bisogno di provvedimenti per riuscire a raggiungere l'obiettivo prefissato entro i termini della scadenza o quali hanno appena iniziato.
Può essere usata insieme alla [[#supportedlanguage|lista delle lingue e dei traduttori]] per trovare i traduttori di ogni lingua.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If message group workflow states are used, they will also be shown on this page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This special page is includable with the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; where &lt;code&gt;groupid&lt;/code&gt; can be replaced with any valid ''group id''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also use the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats/groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; but if the group id contains slashes this won't work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default languages without any translations are hidden, but you can control to filters shown in the special page with syntax like &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|supportedlanguage}}
== Elenco di lingue e traduttori ==
[[File:Translate manual - SupportedLanguages.png|thumb|In SupportedLanguages, è possibile scegliere la lingua in cui si è interessati a tradurre e visualizzare la lista dei traduttori già attivi (solo in parte).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[translatewiki:Special:SupportedLanguages|Special:SupportedLanguages]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the translation administrator's high level overview of the translation community of a wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All used languages are listed there and their activity level is visualized by a tag cloud.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Larger text means a more active language.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a list of translators, annotated with how much work they have done and whether they have been inactive for some time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A translation administrator can use the list to find translators for urgent translation jobs or just to ping inactive translators to try to get active again.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Translators can also use it to find fellow translators in their language who are active and can be contacted, thus improving interaction and collaboration in the translation community.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Graphing the activity ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - TranslationStats.png|thumb|Nella pagina speciale sono presenti dei grafici che possono essere incorporati ovunque nelle wiki (in questo esempio [[Extension:LiquidThreads|liquid thread]]).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[Special:TranslationStats|Special:TranslationStats]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page acts as a tool to both inspect the community activity and generate nice graphs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose to map any of the following five parameters (only one at a time): number of active translators, number of translation edits, number of translation reviews, number of reviewers or number of new user registrations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose a time scale in hours, days, weeks or months, a period to report on in days and an image size.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview of the graph will also provide wikitext that can be copied to any page in the wiki to include the graph in it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The graphs are cached for a few hours, but essentially they update in almost real time.&lt;/span&gt;

È possibile creare dei grafici anche solo per un certo gruppo di messaggi o per una specifica lingua con lo scopo di effettuare dei confronti. In questo modo è possibile, per esempio, creare dei grafici sulle traduzioni di MediaWiki in finlandese, svedese, norvegese e danese e visualizzarli in pagine di rilievo al fine di stimolare e dare impulso alla creazione di una sana competizione nell'attività di traduzione.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The availability of this page depends on PHPlot being installed and configured. The graphs are localised, but the server must have fonts for all the scripts and even with good fonts some languages are rendered incorrectly.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduzioni in tutte le lingue ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The primary audience for [[Special:Translations|Special:Translations]] are '''translation administrators'''. This page lists all translations of a given message. With this page the translation administrator can easily perform simple maintenance and compare translations. The history and translation editor for each message are just one click away.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page is linked from the sidebar Toolbox section as &quot;In other languages&quot; when viewing translation units or other message translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For semi-automated mass changes have a look at [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Replace Text|extension Replace Text]] or the {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}} framework. For exporting, a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/API|action API module]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Cambiamenti recenti, registrazioni e feed==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''All users''' can benefit from [[Special:RecentChanges|Special:RecentChanges]], on which all translation related work can be tracked. Filters are added to make it more useful, especially in the case of page translation where each edit is performed on the translation unit page and copied over the translation page, which causes two entries in an unfiltered recent changes page.
&lt;/div&gt;

Questi sono i filtri disponibili per la visualizzazione delle modifiche recenti:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-no}}&quot;: Don't filter anything, show complete feed.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-only}}&quot;: Show only edits to all system messages, their translations and all translation namespaces.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot;: Hide all the edits shown with the previous option (default option).
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-site}}&quot;: Show only edits to actual system messages used by the wiki interface (MediaWiki pages, not subpages).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filters apply in the same way also to actions on such pages as well as to their talk pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more filters you can install the {{ll|Extension:CleanChanges|CleanChanges}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It provides filtering by user names and language codes and the recent changes list itself contains a smaller subset of information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the filters can also be used as feeds. Just choose the filters that you want and append &lt;code&gt;&amp;feed=atom&lt;/code&gt; to the URL. You could for instance watch all new translations in your language in your feed reader. Example: &lt;code&gt;[https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&amp;feed=atom https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&lt;big&gt;'''&amp;feed=atom'''&lt;/big&gt;]&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

Quasi tutte le azioni relative alla traduzione, come la marcatura di alcune pagine per l'aggiornamento ecc..., sono registrate. I cambiamenti sono visibili nella cronologia, e anche in [[Special:log/pagetranslation|traduzioni di pagine]] e [[Special:Log/translationreview|revisioni delle traduzioni]].
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 08. Review all.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On &quot;review all&quot; task for this group we see that there is only a new translation to review&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translators who want to follow recent translations have many options: they can use their watchlist, typically to just check for updates to their translations; alternatively, if they want to give a more general look to all translations, follow the recent changes from the special page or the syndicated feed as described above, or, perhaps the most comfortable way, using the &quot;[[Special:Translate/!recent]]&quot; recent translation message group with the &quot;accept translations&quot; or &quot;review all translations&quot; task (see [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Quality assurance|Quality assurance]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The review tasks (currently) also provide the only way to monitor changes to a specific message group: you can select that group and, if you (or someone else) have reviewed its translations before, only the new ones will show up for review.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translated pages are the easiest message groups to monitor: you can just look at the history of a page, or have a combined view of all changes to all pages on the recent changes page with the &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot; filter.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Static translation statistics table ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The command line script &lt;code&gt;groupStatistics.php&lt;/code&gt; allows the creation of custom versions of tables shown in Special:MessageGroupStats.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose multiple groups and the list of languages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script can produce output in different formats: text, wikitext or HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bots or &lt;code&gt;maintenance/edit.php&lt;/code&gt; can be used to automatically import the statistics tables into wiki pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to keep these tables up to date you have to rerun the scripts regularly (for example daily).&lt;/span&gt;

== Altre estensioni utili ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== User rating ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:ContributionScores.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A custom rank included on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for ''Special:ContributionScores'' (added by [[Extension:Contribution Scores|Contribution Scores extension]]) are '''translators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page produces a rank of users based on the number of edited pages and edits users have made in the last 7 days, 30 days or in all time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's useful to see who's been most active on the wiki in the last few days and to compare one's own activity to the others'.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Custom charts can be generated and included in any page, by passing parameters to the special page in the subpage format, for instance: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:ContributionScores/10/0/notools,nosort}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the parameters used in the previous example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The number of users shown in each table.
# The number of days to report on (&lt;code&gt;0&lt;/code&gt; for all time).
# A list of comma-separated configuration settings:
#* &lt;code&gt;notools&lt;/code&gt; hides the standard links to user talk, contributions etc. after each user name;
#* &lt;code&gt;nosort&lt;/code&gt; makes the table not sortable, reducing space requirements.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Mappe ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Maps are a useful feature added by the {{ll|Extension:Maps|Maps}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are not specific to translation work, but they can be of use for instance in project and language portals/coordination pages, which are among the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation best practices|translation best practices]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See for instance the [[translatewiki:Translating:MediaWiki#Translator map|map of MediaWiki translators]] on [[translatewiki.net]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thanks to maps, the distribution of translators in the physical world can be easily visualized, which means that people from outside the community see how it's vibrant and world-spread (as every translation community will probably be).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondarily, translators can feel it too; moreover, seeing where other translators working on the same language or project are helps in building a sense of community (and perhaps even making new friends).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lastly, project coordinators and wiki administrators can see also the geographies (not only the languages) where the wiki is doing well or could be improved.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Statistics and reporting]]</text>
      <sha1>8qiuk9rtiui472etmd849sjgofgi0nr</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402905</id>
      <parentid>5402903</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:24:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17055" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
L'[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|estensione Translate]] fornisce molte '''statistiche e rapporti informativi'''.
La maggior parte delle informazioni viene caricata in tempo reale.
Queste sono esposte principalmente attraverso le quattro pagine speciali ''LanguageStats'', ''MessageGroupStats'', ''TranslationStats'' e ''SupportedLanguages''.
Le prime due sono visualizzazioni differenti degli stessi dati: le percentuali di completamento per ogni lingua di ogni gruppo di messaggi.
Le alre due pagine aiutano gli amministratori di traduzione a controllare lo stato della comunità, sia da una prospettiva generale che da un punto di vista più dettagliato.

Risultano comode sia per il traduttore, a cui permettono di trovare cose da fare, sia per i coordinatori del progetto, a cui permettono di monitorare cosa sta succedendo. Inoltre, possono essere utili per creare visualizzazioni della comunità e del lavoro del wiki per molti potenziali clienti.

== Statistiche di completamento di tutto il lavoro per una specifica lingua ==
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 01. LanguageStats long.png|thumb|Statistiche linguistiche]]

Il pubblico principale per la pagina [[Special:LanguageStats|Special:LanguageStats]] sono i '''traduttori'''.
Ai traduttori viene fornita una panoramica di tutti i gruppi di messaggi che sono disponibili per la traduzione e di quanti messaggi non tradotti ogni gruppo contiene, in modo da scoprire facilmente su cosa c'è da lavorare.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione i gruppi di messaggi senza traduzioni, quelli con tutte le traduzione fatte (predefinito), o entrambi.

Gli amministratori di traduzione possono raccogliere i gruppi di messaggi in gruppi più grandi, cosa che li rende espandibili nella tabella delle statistiche ed aiuta i traduttori interessati solo in alcuni progetti.
Tali gruppi sono chiamati ''gruppi di messaggi aggregati'' e sono visualizzati in grassetto.
La stessa formattazione è applicata per i ''gruppi di messaggi secondari'', i quali condividono parte o tutti i loro messaggi con un altro gruppo.
[[translatewiki:Special:LanguageStats|Esempi di questi gruppi su translatewiki.net]] sono il gruppo di messaggi per le diramazioni stabili di MediaWiki e il gruppo dei &quot;500 messaggi più usati di MediaWiki&quot;.

Se viene fatto uso di stati che rappresentano il flusso di lavoro, anche questi vengono visualizzati.

Questa pagina può essere inclusa in altre pagine del wiki con la sintassi &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:LanguageStats/nl}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; dove &lt;code&gt;nl&lt;/code&gt; può essere sostituito dal  codice di qualsiasi lingua. Per impostazione predefinita, i gruppi completamente tradotti sono nascosti, ma è possibile controllare i filtri mostrati nella pagina speciale con la sintassi &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:LanguageStats/nl|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.

== Statistiche di completamento per un gruppo di messaggi in tutte le lingue ==
Il pubblico principale per [[Special:MessageGroupStats|Special:MessageGroupStats]] sono i '''gestori di traduzione e di progetto'''.
Questa pagina offre una panoramica del livello di traduzione di un gruppo di messaggi in diverse lingue.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione le lingue senza traduzione (attivato per impostazione predefinita), le lingue con tutte le traduzioni fatte, o entrambe.
Può essere usato per valutare quante lingue hanno un livello di traduzione adeguato, quali hanno bisogno di provvedimenti per riuscire a raggiungere l'obiettivo prefissato entro i termini della scadenza o quali hanno appena iniziato.
Può essere usata insieme alla [[#supportedlanguage|lista delle lingue e dei traduttori]] per trovare i traduttori di ogni lingua.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If message group workflow states are used, they will also be shown on this page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This special page is includable with the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; where &lt;code&gt;groupid&lt;/code&gt; can be replaced with any valid ''group id''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also use the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats/groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; but if the group id contains slashes this won't work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default languages without any translations are hidden, but you can control to filters shown in the special page with syntax like &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|supportedlanguage}}
== Elenco di lingue e traduttori ==
[[File:Translate manual - SupportedLanguages.png|thumb|In SupportedLanguages, è possibile scegliere la lingua in cui si è interessati a tradurre e visualizzare la lista dei traduttori già attivi (solo in parte).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[translatewiki:Special:SupportedLanguages|Special:SupportedLanguages]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the translation administrator's high level overview of the translation community of a wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All used languages are listed there and their activity level is visualized by a tag cloud.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Larger text means a more active language.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a list of translators, annotated with how much work they have done and whether they have been inactive for some time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A translation administrator can use the list to find translators for urgent translation jobs or just to ping inactive translators to try to get active again.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Translators can also use it to find fellow translators in their language who are active and can be contacted, thus improving interaction and collaboration in the translation community.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Graphing the activity ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - TranslationStats.png|thumb|Nella pagina speciale sono presenti dei grafici che possono essere incorporati ovunque nelle wiki (in questo esempio [[Extension:LiquidThreads|liquid thread]]).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[Special:TranslationStats|Special:TranslationStats]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page acts as a tool to both inspect the community activity and generate nice graphs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose to map any of the following five parameters (only one at a time): number of active translators, number of translation edits, number of translation reviews, number of reviewers or number of new user registrations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose a time scale in hours, days, weeks or months, a period to report on in days and an image size.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview of the graph will also provide wikitext that can be copied to any page in the wiki to include the graph in it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The graphs are cached for a few hours, but essentially they update in almost real time.&lt;/span&gt;

È possibile creare dei grafici anche solo per un certo gruppo di messaggi o per una specifica lingua con lo scopo di effettuare dei confronti. In questo modo è possibile, per esempio, creare dei grafici sulle traduzioni di MediaWiki in finlandese, svedese, norvegese e danese e visualizzarli in pagine di rilievo al fine di stimolare e dare impulso alla creazione di una sana competizione nell'attività di traduzione.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The availability of this page depends on PHPlot being installed and configured. The graphs are localised, but the server must have fonts for all the scripts and even with good fonts some languages are rendered incorrectly.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduzioni in tutte le lingue ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The primary audience for [[Special:Translations|Special:Translations]] are '''translation administrators'''. This page lists all translations of a given message. With this page the translation administrator can easily perform simple maintenance and compare translations. The history and translation editor for each message are just one click away.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page is linked from the sidebar Toolbox section as &quot;In other languages&quot; when viewing translation units or other message translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For semi-automated mass changes have a look at [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Replace Text|extension Replace Text]] or the {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}} framework. For exporting, a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/API|action API module]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Cambiamenti recenti, registrazioni e feed==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''All users''' can benefit from [[Special:RecentChanges|Special:RecentChanges]], on which all translation related work can be tracked. Filters are added to make it more useful, especially in the case of page translation where each edit is performed on the translation unit page and copied over the translation page, which causes two entries in an unfiltered recent changes page.
&lt;/div&gt;

Questi sono i filtri disponibili per la visualizzazione delle modifiche recenti:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-no}}&quot;: Don't filter anything, show complete feed.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-only}}&quot;: Show only edits to all system messages, their translations and all translation namespaces.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot;: Hide all the edits shown with the previous option (default option).
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-site}}&quot;: Show only edits to actual system messages used by the wiki interface (MediaWiki pages, not subpages).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filters apply in the same way also to actions on such pages as well as to their talk pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more filters you can install the {{ll|Extension:CleanChanges|CleanChanges}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It provides filtering by user names and language codes and the recent changes list itself contains a smaller subset of information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the filters can also be used as feeds. Just choose the filters that you want and append &lt;code&gt;&amp;feed=atom&lt;/code&gt; to the URL. You could for instance watch all new translations in your language in your feed reader. Example: &lt;code&gt;[https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&amp;feed=atom https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&lt;big&gt;'''&amp;feed=atom'''&lt;/big&gt;]&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

Quasi tutte le azioni relative alla traduzione, come la marcatura di alcune pagine per l'aggiornamento ecc..., sono registrate. I cambiamenti sono visibili nella cronologia, e anche in [[Special:log/pagetranslation|traduzioni di pagine]] e [[Special:Log/translationreview|revisioni delle traduzioni]].
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 08. Review all.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On &quot;review all&quot; task for this group we see that there is only a new translation to review&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translators who want to follow recent translations have many options: they can use their watchlist, typically to just check for updates to their translations; alternatively, if they want to give a more general look to all translations, follow the recent changes from the special page or the syndicated feed as described above, or, perhaps the most comfortable way, using the &quot;[[Special:Translate/!recent]]&quot; recent translation message group with the &quot;accept translations&quot; or &quot;review all translations&quot; task (see [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Quality assurance|Quality assurance]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The review tasks (currently) also provide the only way to monitor changes to a specific message group: you can select that group and, if you (or someone else) have reviewed its translations before, only the new ones will show up for review.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translated pages are the easiest message groups to monitor: you can just look at the history of a page, or have a combined view of all changes to all pages on the recent changes page with the &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot; filter.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Static translation statistics table ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The command line script &lt;code&gt;groupStatistics.php&lt;/code&gt; allows the creation of custom versions of tables shown in Special:MessageGroupStats.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose multiple groups and the list of languages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script can produce output in different formats: text, wikitext or HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bots or &lt;code&gt;maintenance/edit.php&lt;/code&gt; can be used to automatically import the statistics tables into wiki pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to keep these tables up to date you have to rerun the scripts regularly (for example daily).&lt;/span&gt;

== Altre estensioni utili ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== User rating ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:ContributionScores.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A custom rank included on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for ''Special:ContributionScores'' (added by [[Extension:Contribution Scores|Contribution Scores extension]]) are '''translators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page produces a rank of users based on the number of edited pages and edits users have made in the last 7 days, 30 days or in all time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's useful to see who's been most active on the wiki in the last few days and to compare one's own activity to the others'.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Custom charts can be generated and included in any page, by passing parameters to the special page in the subpage format, for instance: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:ContributionScores/10/0/notools,nosort}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the parameters used in the previous example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The number of users shown in each table.
# The number of days to report on (&lt;code&gt;0&lt;/code&gt; for all time).
# A list of comma-separated configuration settings:
#* &lt;code&gt;notools&lt;/code&gt; hides the standard links to user talk, contributions etc. after each user name;
#* &lt;code&gt;nosort&lt;/code&gt; makes the table not sortable, reducing space requirements.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Mappe ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Maps are a useful feature added by the {{ll|Extension:Maps|Maps}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are not specific to translation work, but they can be of use for instance in project and language portals/coordination pages, which are among the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation best practices|translation best practices]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See for instance the [[translatewiki:Translating:MediaWiki#Translator map|map of MediaWiki translators]] on [[translatewiki.net]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thanks to maps, the distribution of translators in the physical world can be easily visualized, which means that people from outside the community see how it's vibrant and world-spread (as every translation community will probably be).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondarily, translators can feel it too; moreover, seeing where other translators working on the same language or project are helps in building a sense of community (and perhaps even making new friends).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lastly, project coordinators and wiki administrators can see also the geographies (not only the languages) where the wiki is doing well or could be improved.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Statistics and reporting]]</text>
      <sha1>bqh38194hn11v14c08w2m1f8amkrbwo</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402907</id>
      <parentid>5402905</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:25:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>typo</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17056" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
L'[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|estensione Translate]] fornisce molte '''statistiche e rapporti informativi'''.
La maggior parte delle informazioni viene caricata in tempo reale.
Queste sono esposte principalmente attraverso le quattro pagine speciali ''LanguageStats'', ''MessageGroupStats'', ''TranslationStats'' e ''SupportedLanguages''.
Le prime due sono visualizzazioni differenti degli stessi dati: le percentuali di completamento per ogni lingua di ogni gruppo di messaggi.
Le altre due pagine aiutano gli amministratori di traduzione a controllare lo stato della comunità, sia da una prospettiva generale che da un punto di vista più dettagliato.

Risultano comode sia per il traduttore, a cui permettono di trovare cose da fare, sia per i coordinatori del progetto, a cui permettono di monitorare cosa sta succedendo. Inoltre, possono essere utili per creare visualizzazioni della comunità e del lavoro del wiki per molti potenziali clienti.

== Statistiche di completamento di tutto il lavoro per una specifica lingua ==
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 01. LanguageStats long.png|thumb|Statistiche linguistiche]]

Il pubblico principale per la pagina [[Special:LanguageStats|Special:LanguageStats]] sono i '''traduttori'''.
Ai traduttori viene fornita una panoramica di tutti i gruppi di messaggi che sono disponibili per la traduzione e di quanti messaggi non tradotti ogni gruppo contiene, in modo da scoprire facilmente su cosa c'è da lavorare.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione i gruppi di messaggi senza traduzioni, quelli con tutte le traduzione fatte (predefinito), o entrambi.

Gli amministratori di traduzione possono raccogliere i gruppi di messaggi in gruppi più grandi, cosa che li rende espandibili nella tabella delle statistiche ed aiuta i traduttori interessati solo in alcuni progetti.
Tali gruppi sono chiamati ''gruppi di messaggi aggregati'' e sono visualizzati in grassetto.
La stessa formattazione è applicata per i ''gruppi di messaggi secondari'', i quali condividono parte o tutti i loro messaggi con un altro gruppo.
[[translatewiki:Special:LanguageStats|Esempi di questi gruppi su translatewiki.net]] sono il gruppo di messaggi per le diramazioni stabili di MediaWiki e il gruppo dei &quot;500 messaggi più usati di MediaWiki&quot;.

Se viene fatto uso di stati che rappresentano il flusso di lavoro, anche questi vengono visualizzati.

Questa pagina può essere inclusa in altre pagine del wiki con la sintassi &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:LanguageStats/nl}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; dove &lt;code&gt;nl&lt;/code&gt; può essere sostituito dal  codice di qualsiasi lingua. Per impostazione predefinita, i gruppi completamente tradotti sono nascosti, ma è possibile controllare i filtri mostrati nella pagina speciale con la sintassi &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:LanguageStats/nl|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.

== Statistiche di completamento per un gruppo di messaggi in tutte le lingue ==
Il pubblico principale per [[Special:MessageGroupStats|Special:MessageGroupStats]] sono i '''gestori di traduzione e di progetto'''.
Questa pagina offre una panoramica del livello di traduzione di un gruppo di messaggi in diverse lingue.
Permette di non prendere in considerazione le lingue senza traduzione (attivato per impostazione predefinita), le lingue con tutte le traduzioni fatte, o entrambe.
Può essere usato per valutare quante lingue hanno un livello di traduzione adeguato, quali hanno bisogno di provvedimenti per riuscire a raggiungere l'obiettivo prefissato entro i termini della scadenza o quali hanno appena iniziato.
Può essere usata insieme alla [[#supportedlanguage|lista delle lingue e dei traduttori]] per trovare i traduttori di ogni lingua.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If message group workflow states are used, they will also be shown on this page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This special page is includable with the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; where &lt;code&gt;groupid&lt;/code&gt; can be replaced with any valid ''group id''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also use the syntax &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats/groupid}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; but if the group id contains slashes this won't work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default languages without any translations are hidden, but you can control to filters shown in the special page with syntax like &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MessageGroupStats|group=groupid|suppressempty=1|suppresscomplete=0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|supportedlanguage}}
== Elenco di lingue e traduttori ==
[[File:Translate manual - SupportedLanguages.png|thumb|In SupportedLanguages, è possibile scegliere la lingua in cui si è interessati a tradurre e visualizzare la lista dei traduttori già attivi (solo in parte).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[translatewiki:Special:SupportedLanguages|Special:SupportedLanguages]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the translation administrator's high level overview of the translation community of a wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All used languages are listed there and their activity level is visualized by a tag cloud.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Larger text means a more active language.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a list of translators, annotated with how much work they have done and whether they have been inactive for some time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A translation administrator can use the list to find translators for urgent translation jobs or just to ping inactive translators to try to get active again.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Translators can also use it to find fellow translators in their language who are active and can be contacted, thus improving interaction and collaboration in the translation community.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Graphing the activity ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - TranslationStats.png|thumb|Nella pagina speciale sono presenti dei grafici che possono essere incorporati ovunque nelle wiki (in questo esempio [[Extension:LiquidThreads|liquid thread]]).]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for [[Special:TranslationStats|Special:TranslationStats]] are '''translation administrators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page acts as a tool to both inspect the community activity and generate nice graphs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose to map any of the following five parameters (only one at a time): number of active translators, number of translation edits, number of translation reviews, number of reviewers or number of new user registrations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose a time scale in hours, days, weeks or months, a period to report on in days and an image size.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview of the graph will also provide wikitext that can be copied to any page in the wiki to include the graph in it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The graphs are cached for a few hours, but essentially they update in almost real time.&lt;/span&gt;

È possibile creare dei grafici anche solo per un certo gruppo di messaggi o per una specifica lingua con lo scopo di effettuare dei confronti. In questo modo è possibile, per esempio, creare dei grafici sulle traduzioni di MediaWiki in finlandese, svedese, norvegese e danese e visualizzarli in pagine di rilievo al fine di stimolare e dare impulso alla creazione di una sana competizione nell'attività di traduzione.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The availability of this page depends on PHPlot being installed and configured. The graphs are localised, but the server must have fonts for all the scripts and even with good fonts some languages are rendered incorrectly.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduzioni in tutte le lingue ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The primary audience for [[Special:Translations|Special:Translations]] are '''translation administrators'''. This page lists all translations of a given message. With this page the translation administrator can easily perform simple maintenance and compare translations. The history and translation editor for each message are just one click away.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page is linked from the sidebar Toolbox section as &quot;In other languages&quot; when viewing translation units or other message translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For semi-automated mass changes have a look at [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Replace Text|extension Replace Text]] or the {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}} framework. For exporting, a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/API|action API module]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Cambiamenti recenti, registrazioni e feed==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''All users''' can benefit from [[Special:RecentChanges|Special:RecentChanges]], on which all translation related work can be tracked. Filters are added to make it more useful, especially in the case of page translation where each edit is performed on the translation unit page and copied over the translation page, which causes two entries in an unfiltered recent changes page.
&lt;/div&gt;

Questi sono i filtri disponibili per la visualizzazione delle modifiche recenti:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-no}}&quot;: Don't filter anything, show complete feed.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-only}}&quot;: Show only edits to all system messages, their translations and all translation namespaces.
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot;: Hide all the edits shown with the previous option (default option).
* &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-site}}&quot;: Show only edits to actual system messages used by the wiki interface (MediaWiki pages, not subpages).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filters apply in the same way also to actions on such pages as well as to their talk pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more filters you can install the {{ll|Extension:CleanChanges|CleanChanges}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It provides filtering by user names and language codes and the recent changes list itself contains a smaller subset of information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the filters can also be used as feeds. Just choose the filters that you want and append &lt;code&gt;&amp;feed=atom&lt;/code&gt; to the URL. You could for instance watch all new translations in your language in your feed reader. Example: &lt;code&gt;[https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&amp;feed=atom https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?translations=only&amp;trailer=%2Ffi&amp;title=Special:RecentChanges&lt;big&gt;'''&amp;feed=atom'''&lt;/big&gt;]&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

Quasi tutte le azioni relative alla traduzione, come la marcatura di alcune pagine per l'aggiornamento ecc..., sono registrate. I cambiamenti sono visibili nella cronologia, e anche in [[Special:log/pagetranslation|traduzioni di pagine]] e [[Special:Log/translationreview|revisioni delle traduzioni]].
[[File:Translate manual - Translate example - 08. Review all.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On &quot;review all&quot; task for this group we see that there is only a new translation to review&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translators who want to follow recent translations have many options: they can use their watchlist, typically to just check for updates to their translations; alternatively, if they want to give a more general look to all translations, follow the recent changes from the special page or the syndicated feed as described above, or, perhaps the most comfortable way, using the &quot;[[Special:Translate/!recent]]&quot; recent translation message group with the &quot;accept translations&quot; or &quot;review all translations&quot; task (see [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Quality assurance|Quality assurance]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The review tasks (currently) also provide the only way to monitor changes to a specific message group: you can select that group and, if you (or someone else) have reviewed its translations before, only the new ones will show up for review.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translated pages are the easiest message groups to monitor: you can just look at the history of a page, or have a combined view of all changes to all pages on the recent changes page with the &quot;{{int|translate-rc-translation-filter-filter}}&quot; filter.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Static translation statistics table ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The command line script &lt;code&gt;groupStatistics.php&lt;/code&gt; allows the creation of custom versions of tables shown in Special:MessageGroupStats.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can choose multiple groups and the list of languages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script can produce output in different formats: text, wikitext or HTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bots or &lt;code&gt;maintenance/edit.php&lt;/code&gt; can be used to automatically import the statistics tables into wiki pages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to keep these tables up to date you have to rerun the scripts regularly (for example daily).&lt;/span&gt;

== Altre estensioni utili ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== User rating ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:ContributionScores.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A custom rank included on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The primary audience for ''Special:ContributionScores'' (added by [[Extension:Contribution Scores|Contribution Scores extension]]) are '''translators'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page produces a rank of users based on the number of edited pages and edits users have made in the last 7 days, 30 days or in all time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's useful to see who's been most active on the wiki in the last few days and to compare one's own activity to the others'.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Custom charts can be generated and included in any page, by passing parameters to the special page in the subpage format, for instance: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:ContributionScores/10/0/notools,nosort}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the parameters used in the previous example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The number of users shown in each table.
# The number of days to report on (&lt;code&gt;0&lt;/code&gt; for all time).
# A list of comma-separated configuration settings:
#* &lt;code&gt;notools&lt;/code&gt; hides the standard links to user talk, contributions etc. after each user name;
#* &lt;code&gt;nosort&lt;/code&gt; makes the table not sortable, reducing space requirements.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Mappe ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Maps are a useful feature added by the {{ll|Extension:Maps|Maps}} extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are not specific to translation work, but they can be of use for instance in project and language portals/coordination pages, which are among the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation best practices|translation best practices]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See for instance the [[translatewiki:Translating:MediaWiki#Translator map|map of MediaWiki translators]] on [[translatewiki.net]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thanks to maps, the distribution of translators in the physical world can be easily visualized, which means that people from outside the community see how it's vibrant and world-spread (as every translation community will probably be).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondarily, translators can feel it too; moreover, seeing where other translators working on the same language or project are helps in building a sense of community (and perhaps even making new friends).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lastly, project coordinators and wiki administrators can see also the geographies (not only the languages) where the wiki is doing well or could be improved.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Statistics and reporting]]</text>
      <sha1>t04y3vspejxwvmsf006k6lfi08l9xex</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/pt-br</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>122371</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402863</id>
      <parentid>4505783</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:35:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7387" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Esta página explica como fazer '''traduções off-line'''.
Se estiver interessado, provavelmente, você já conhece o que são arquivos [[w:Gettext PO|Gettext PO]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this reason, we'll only discuss how to use them in a wiki with the Translate extension here.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise, you're probably more interested in the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|How to translate]] tutorial for online translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Mais em geral, você pode querer não usar a interface web se você tiver uma conexão com a internet muito lenta ou limitada ou ferramentas off-line imprescindíveis. Esteja ciente, no entanto, que a extensão Translate é concebida como um processo colaborativo. Isto significa que você não deve manter os arquivos off-line por longos períodos, e você deve sempre baixar um novo arquivo antes de começar a traduzir. Caso contrário, você pode entrar em conflito com outros tradutores que trabalham na wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Exportação ==

Você pode baixar qualquer grupo de mensagens como arquivo Gettext PO escolhendo a tarefa ''exportar para tradução off-line'' em &quot;Special: Translate&quot;. Alguns sites podem ter desativado essa tarefa. Você deve verificar em todas as guias locais como processar esses arquivos antes de começar.

{{Note|1=Embora alguns grupos de mensagens possam ter uma opção de exportação, que exporta traduções no formato nativo desse grupo, e esse formato pode ser Gettext, esses não são os arquivos que podem ser usados para tradução off-line!}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The files are standard Gettext PO files with some extra information.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Campos de cabeçalho importantes:

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

Neste exemplo, &quot;ext-abc&quot; é o nome do grupo de mensagens.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For translatable pages, the corresponding message group has the name &quot;page-&quot; + the page name (i.e. for the page &quot;Example&quot;, the header would contain the line &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example entry in a Translate Gettext po file.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Importação ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is no need to translate the file completely. Uploading partially translated message groups is perfectly fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Importing can also be done using a command line script in &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. It's less flexible but can import everything in one go. It also needs intervention from someone with shell access to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

A maneira como as importações de traduções off-line são tratadas (ou não) depende da sua wiki.

== Editores Gettext ==

Aqui estão algumas ferramentas que você pode usar para editar os arquivos off-line.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : Available for all platforms supporting the [http://www.wxwidgets.org/ wxWidgets toolkit], tested on Unix with GTK+ and Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''WARNING:''' make sure you are using  version 1.4.2 or above, otherwise &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; lines are dropped and your work cannot be processed.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>cr5kv0co7jgy441k2szwasmta15sxmb</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402865</id>
      <parentid>5402863</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:35:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7330" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Esta página explica como fazer '''traduções off-line'''.
Se estiver interessado, provavelmente, você já conhece o que são arquivos [[w:Gettext PO|Gettext PO]].
Por esta razão, somente discutiremos como usá-los em uma wiki com a extensão Translate aqui.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise, you're probably more interested in the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|How to translate]] tutorial for online translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Mais em geral, você pode querer não usar a interface web se você tiver uma conexão com a internet muito lenta ou limitada ou ferramentas off-line imprescindíveis. Esteja ciente, no entanto, que a extensão Translate é concebida como um processo colaborativo. Isto significa que você não deve manter os arquivos off-line por longos períodos, e você deve sempre baixar um novo arquivo antes de começar a traduzir. Caso contrário, você pode entrar em conflito com outros tradutores que trabalham na wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Exportação ==

Você pode baixar qualquer grupo de mensagens como arquivo Gettext PO escolhendo a tarefa ''exportar para tradução off-line'' em &quot;Special: Translate&quot;. Alguns sites podem ter desativado essa tarefa. Você deve verificar em todas as guias locais como processar esses arquivos antes de começar.

{{Note|1=Embora alguns grupos de mensagens possam ter uma opção de exportação, que exporta traduções no formato nativo desse grupo, e esse formato pode ser Gettext, esses não são os arquivos que podem ser usados para tradução off-line!}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The files are standard Gettext PO files with some extra information.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Campos de cabeçalho importantes:

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

Neste exemplo, &quot;ext-abc&quot; é o nome do grupo de mensagens.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For translatable pages, the corresponding message group has the name &quot;page-&quot; + the page name (i.e. for the page &quot;Example&quot;, the header would contain the line &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example entry in a Translate Gettext po file.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Importação ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is no need to translate the file completely. Uploading partially translated message groups is perfectly fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Importing can also be done using a command line script in &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. It's less flexible but can import everything in one go. It also needs intervention from someone with shell access to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

A maneira como as importações de traduções off-line são tratadas (ou não) depende da sua wiki.

== Editores Gettext ==

Aqui estão algumas ferramentas que você pode usar para editar os arquivos off-line.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : Available for all platforms supporting the [http://www.wxwidgets.org/ wxWidgets toolkit], tested on Unix with GTK+ and Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''WARNING:''' make sure you are using  version 1.4.2 or above, otherwise &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; lines are dropped and your work cannot be processed.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>2e6r64c8lm70k5xm9u2pd588do7rox3</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402867</id>
      <parentid>5402865</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:35:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7276" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Esta página explica como fazer '''traduções off-line'''.
Se estiver interessado, provavelmente, você já conhece o que são arquivos [[w:Gettext PO|Gettext PO]].
Por esta razão, somente discutiremos como usá-los em uma wiki com a extensão Translate aqui.
Caso contrário, você pode estar mais interessado no tutorial [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|Como traduzir]] para traduções online.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Mais em geral, você pode querer não usar a interface web se você tiver uma conexão com a internet muito lenta ou limitada ou ferramentas off-line imprescindíveis. Esteja ciente, no entanto, que a extensão Translate é concebida como um processo colaborativo. Isto significa que você não deve manter os arquivos off-line por longos períodos, e você deve sempre baixar um novo arquivo antes de começar a traduzir. Caso contrário, você pode entrar em conflito com outros tradutores que trabalham na wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Exportação ==

Você pode baixar qualquer grupo de mensagens como arquivo Gettext PO escolhendo a tarefa ''exportar para tradução off-line'' em &quot;Special: Translate&quot;. Alguns sites podem ter desativado essa tarefa. Você deve verificar em todas as guias locais como processar esses arquivos antes de começar.

{{Note|1=Embora alguns grupos de mensagens possam ter uma opção de exportação, que exporta traduções no formato nativo desse grupo, e esse formato pode ser Gettext, esses não são os arquivos que podem ser usados para tradução off-line!}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The files are standard Gettext PO files with some extra information.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Campos de cabeçalho importantes:

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

Neste exemplo, &quot;ext-abc&quot; é o nome do grupo de mensagens.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For translatable pages, the corresponding message group has the name &quot;page-&quot; + the page name (i.e. for the page &quot;Example&quot;, the header would contain the line &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example entry in a Translate Gettext po file.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Importação ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is no need to translate the file completely. Uploading partially translated message groups is perfectly fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Importing can also be done using a command line script in &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. It's less flexible but can import everything in one go. It also needs intervention from someone with shell access to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

A maneira como as importações de traduções off-line são tratadas (ou não) depende da sua wiki.

== Editores Gettext ==

Aqui estão algumas ferramentas que você pode usar para editar os arquivos off-line.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : Available for all platforms supporting the [http://www.wxwidgets.org/ wxWidgets toolkit], tested on Unix with GTK+ and Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''WARNING:''' make sure you are using  version 1.4.2 or above, otherwise &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; lines are dropped and your work cannot be processed.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>tri10hw9mb54q35dzrqydwoh9dr64z4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>131708</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402993</id>
      <parentid>4983823</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make variable names untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7779" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:1--&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[&lt;tvar name=ve&gt;Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor&lt;/tvar&gt;|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:46--&gt; Read &lt;tvar name=guide&gt;'''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:47--&gt; [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}}&lt;/tvar&gt; '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:48--&gt; Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/translate&gt;
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:49--&gt; Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/translate&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

&lt;translate&gt;
== About VisualEditor == &lt;!--T:3--&gt;

&lt;!--T:4--&gt;
VisualEditor is a &quot;visual&quot; way of editing Wikipedia. Editing Wikipedia has historically required people to learn wiki markup, a fairly complex markup language, even to make tiny changes to a page. In 2001, this was acceptable; in 2015, it is [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why&lt;/tvar&gt;|driving contributors away]]. We hope that VisualEditor will be useful to existing contributors and more welcoming to new users. 
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [&lt;tvar name=blog-april&gt;https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/&lt;/tvar&gt; in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [&lt;tvar name=blog-june&gt;https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/&lt;/tvar&gt; almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:51--&gt; We expect to make it available by default to most of [[&lt;tvar name=rollouts&gt;VisualEditor/Rollouts&lt;/tvar&gt;|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:52--&gt; Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[&lt;tvar name=beta&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features&lt;/tvar&gt;|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:43--&gt;
We are releasing a [[&lt;tvar name=ve-news&gt;:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter&lt;/tvar&gt;|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.

== Using VisualEditor == &lt;!--T:44--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide&lt;/tvar&gt;|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts&lt;/tvar&gt;|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].

&lt;!--T:7--&gt;
VisualEditor has some current bugs and limitations. If you encounter an issue, please do not hesitate to [[&lt;tvar name=ve-feedback&gt;VisualEditor/Feedback&lt;/tvar&gt;|report it on the Feedback page]]. Current limitations include:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
* '''Slow to load''' — It will take some time for long, complex pages to load into VisualEditor. In the future the software will be a lot faster, and will allow for the loading of larger pages.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:10--&gt;
* '''Incomplete editing''' — Some elements of complex formatting will display and let you edit their contents, but will not let users edit their structure or add new entries – such as definition lists. Adding features in this area is one of our priorities.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:12--&gt;
* '''Most content pages, not talk pages''' — VisualEditor is only enabled for some namespaces.  At most Wikipedias, VisualEditor can be used on articles, User:, File:, Help: and Category: pages.  VisualEditor is not currently available for Wikipedia: pages or any talk pages.

&lt;!--T:13--&gt;
We recommend that users click &quot;&lt;tvar name=label-review&gt;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; before saving the page and [[&lt;tvar name=ve-feedback&gt;VisualEditor/Feedback&lt;/tvar&gt;|report any problems they encounter]].

== How to help out == &lt;!--T:30--&gt;

&lt;!--T:31--&gt;
For VisualEditor to be as good as it can be, there are a lot of things we need help with. Obviously, one big area is using the software, finding bugs and [[&lt;tvar name=ve-feedback&gt;VisualEditor/Feedback&lt;/tvar&gt;|reporting them]], but there are many other tasks as well. These include:

&lt;!--T:32--&gt;
* '''Updating help pages''' — All of our projects have help pages to make it easier for new users to contribute. Unfortunately they are all built around the markup editor, and as VisualEditor evolves, the screenshots and tutorials will all become outdated. It would be very useful if people could  [[&lt;tvar name=ve-help&gt;Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help&lt;/tvar&gt;|update help pages]], based on [[&lt;tvar name=ug&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide&lt;/tvar&gt;|our tutorial to using VisualEditor]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:33--&gt;
* '''Adding TemplateData to templates''' — VisualEditor features a nice template editor, which is described in more detail on our [[&lt;tvar name=ug&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates&lt;/tvar&gt;|help page]]. As you'll see if you use it on Wikipedia, some templates have named parameters and nice descriptions that make it easy to use. Others do not. This is because templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; before this feature will work. If you're interested in adding TemplateData, we have [[&lt;tvar name=td-tutor&gt;Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial&lt;/tvar&gt;|a guide to doing so]], along with a [[&lt;tvar name=td&gt;Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData&lt;/tvar&gt;|list of the most important templates to add it to]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:45--&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[&lt;tvar name=beta&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor&lt;/tvar&gt;|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:34--&gt;
* '''Help new users''' — If the VisualEditor launch is successful, we will have a lot more new users than we are used to, and even though editing may be easier, working out how to interact with the community will still be hard. Please spend some time [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users&lt;/tvar&gt;|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]], to help these newcomers become acclimatized to Wikipedia.

==See also== &lt;!--T:50--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:54--&gt; a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:55--&gt; get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:56--&gt; a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/translate&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>6i45hm0jly4snz5po23k7d73h20b39m</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ro</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>132639</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402788</id>
      <parentid>5347028</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:53:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="63781" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Dacă doriți să testați EditorulVizual fără a modifica un articol, puteți folosi în voie [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} această pagină] pentru teste.&lt;/span&gt; Nu aveți nevoie de un cont pentru a folosi EditorulVizual pe acea pagină.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Deschiderea EditoruluiVizual ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| Pentru a modifica o pagină cu ajutorul EditoruluiVizual, faceți clic pe butonul „{{int|vector-view-edit}}” din partea de sus a paginii.

Poate dura câteva secunde până la deschiderea paginii pentru modificare, iar timpul se poate mări dacă pagina este foarte lungă.

Apăsând butonul „{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}” se va deschide vechiul editor de text wiki.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Puteți, de asemenea, deschide EditorulVizual, dând clic pe legătura „{{int|editsection}}” din cadrul fiecărei secțiuni.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Introducere: bara de instrumente a EditoruluiVizual ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Captură de ecran cu bara de instrumente a EditoruluiVizual]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | Bara de instrumente a EditoruluiVizual apare în partea de sus a ecranului atunci când începeți să modificați. Aceasta conține câteva pictograme familiare:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' și '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' schimbările pe care le-ați făcut.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Meniul vertical '''Titluri''': vă permite să schimbați formatarea paragrafului. Pentru a schimba stilul unui paragraf, plasați cursorul în interiorul paragrafului și alegeți o intrare din acest meniu (nu trebuie să selectați vreun text). Titlurile de secțiune sunt formatate „{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}” și subsecțiunile cu „{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}”, „{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}” și așa mai departe. Formatarea obișnuită pentru text este „{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}”.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Formatare:''' Apăsarea butonului „&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;” deschide un meniu. 
* Opțiunea „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}” ('''B''') îngroașă textul selectat.
* Opțiunea „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}” (''I'') transformă textul selectat în caractere cursive.
* Opțiunea „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}” (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) face ca textul selectat să apară mai mic decât caracterele vecine și să se situeze puțin mai sus decât caracterele vecine.
* Opțiunea „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}” (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) face ca textul selectat să apară mai mic decât caracterele vecine și să fie puțin mai jos decât acestea.
* Opțiunea „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}” (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) taie textul selectat cu o linie continuă.
* Opțiunea „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}” (o pereche de acolade: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) schimbă fontul textului selectat într-un font monospațiat, care îl diferențiază de textul din jur (spațiat proporțional).
* Opțiunea „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}” (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) adaugă o linie continuă sub textul selectat.
* Opțiunea „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}” (文A) vă permite să etichetați limba (de exemplu, japoneză) și direcția de scriere (de exemplu, de la dreapta la stânga) a textului selectat.
* Ultima opțiune ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), denumită „{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}”, înlătură orice formatare a textului selectat, inclusiv legăturile.

Dacă nu ați selectat vreun text, atunci când veți da clic pe &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; pentru a deschide meniul și veți selecta o opțiune, formatul se va aplica la textul pe care veți începe să-l scrieți, indiferent unde se află cursorul dumneavoastră.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Unealta pentru legături:''' Lanțul reprezintă [[#Editing links|unealta pentru legături]]. Dacă dați clic pe ea (de regulă, după selectarea unui text), se va deschide [[#Editing links|caseta de dialog pentru legături]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''Meniul {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}:''' Meniul „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}” este utilizat pentru adăugarea citărilor în cadrul textului (denumite și „note de subsol” sau „referințe”). Toate proiectele au acces la formatarea de bază a referințelor și posibilitatea de a refolosi citările folosind acest meniu. De asemenea, acest meniu vă oferă acces rapid la formatele de citare locale, dacă acestea sunt activate pe proiectul dumneavoastră.

(Instrucțiuni pentru adăugarea formatelor locale de citare în meniul {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} din cadrul unui anumit wiki sunt disponibile la {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''Butonul {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Dacă serviciul citoid este activat pe proiectul dumneavoastră, veți vedea un buton {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} în loc de un meniu {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

Serviciul citoid încearcă să golească automat formatele de citare.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Liste și indentări:''' Primele două opțiuni vă permit să formatați textul fie ca o „{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}”, fie ca o „{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}”. Ultimele două opțiuni vă permit să creșteți sau să scădeți nivelul de indentare al elementelor listelor.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' Meniul vertical „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}” ar putea fi diferit în anumite proiecte. Mai jos este o listă a '''tuturor''' opțiunilor care pot apărea.
* Pictograma „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}” (imaginea unor munți) deschide [[#Editing images and other media files|opțiunile media]].
* Pictograma „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}” (o piesă de puzzle) vă permite să [[#Editing templates|modificati formatele]].
* Opțiunea „Tabel” vă oferă posibilitatea de a insera un tabel.
* Elementul „{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}” (un balon) vă permite să inserați comentarii care nu sunt vizibile cititorilor. Aceste comentarii pot fi văzute doar în modul de editare, unde sunt indicate în text printr-un semn de exclamare. În modul de editare, dacă dați clic pe iconița cu semnul exclamării puteți modifica sau șterge comentariul.
* Pictograma „{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}” (un simbol [[:w:ro:ankh|ankh]] - ☥) vă permite să introduceți hieroglife. (Vezi mai jos.)
* Item-ul &quot;Code block&quot; vă permite să introduceți cod.
* Item-ul „Notație muzicală” vă permite să introduceți o notație muzicală.
* Pictograma „{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}” (un set de imagini) vă permite să inserați o galerie în pagină.
* Pictograma „{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}” (Σ) deschide [[#Editing mathematical formulae|dialogul de inserare a formulelor]].
* Item-ul „Grafic” vă oferă posibilitatea de a insera un grafic.
* Elementul „{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}” vă permite să inserați o semnătură pe care o utilizați în proiect. Acesta va fi nuanțat (nu poate fi selectat) atunci când editați un tip de pagină (un &quot;spațiu de nume&quot;), cum ar fi un articol, unde semnăturile nu ar trebui inserate.
* Pictograma &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (trei cărți) deschide un dialog în care puteți specifica unde vor fi afișate referințele cititorului. De obicei, acest lucru trebuie făcut numai o singură dată pe o pagină.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Inserarea caracterelor speciale:''' Pictograma „{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}” (Ω) este lângă meniul „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}”. Când apăsați pe ea, se afișează un dialog ce vă prezintă numeroase caractere speciale. Apăsând pe un anumit caracter, acesta este introdus în text. Aceste caractere speciale includ unele simboluri standard, diacritice și simboluri matematice. (Această listă poate fi modificată local. Vezi {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} pentru instrucțiuni.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| Butonul '''Notificări privind modificarea''' arată orice notificare pentru pagina curentă.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Meniul '''$pagemenu''' se află în stânga butonului ''$save'' și a meniului ''Comută editorul''. În acest meniu se află un buton care deschide un dialog de '''Opțiuni''' cu următoarele file în partea stângă:&lt;/span&gt;

* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' vă permite să adăugați categorii acestei pagini și să ajustați modul în care este sortată pagina, când este afișată înăuntrul unei categorii prin setarea unui index diferit cu care să se sorteze.
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' vă permite să faceți pagină să fie o redirecționare și să ajustați opțiunile pentru această redirecționare, să ajustați setările legate de afișarea tabelului de cuprins, să dezactivați legăturile de editare de lângă fiecare antet și să definiți paggina ca o pagină de dezambiguizare.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Setări avansate''' vă permite să ajustați setările legate de indexarea paginii de motoarele de căutare, afișarea unei file pentru adăugarea unei secțiuni noi și titlului afișat.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' care arată o listă de pagini în alte limbi care sunt legate de acea pagină.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Formate folosite''' arată o listă de legături către fiecare format folosit pe această pagină.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ferestrele dialogului Opțiuni sunt afișate de asemenea în meniul $pagemenu și pot fi deschise apăsând pe el.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Prin urmare, meniul $pagemenu conține butonul '''Vezi dreapta-stânga''' și butonul '''[[$1|Găsește și înlocuiește]]''' care deschide un dialog unde puteți insera caractere, termeni sau expresii obișnuite pe care le căutați și pe cele cu care să le înlocuiți, împreună cu câteva butoane pentru opțiuni.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Butonul '''$switch''' este lângă butonul '''$save'''. Vă permite să comutați la editorul de wikitext.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Publicarea schimbărilor ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Când ați terminat de modificat articolul, apăsați butonul albastru „{{int|publishchanges}}” din bara de instrumente. Dacă nu ați făcut nicio modificare, butonul va fi inactiv (gri). Pentru a renunța la toate modificările, închideți fereastra browser-ului sau apăsați pe fila „{{int|vector-view-view}}” de deasupra barei cu unelte de editare.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Apăsând butonul albastru „{{int|publishchanges-start}}”, se va deschide o fereastră de dialog. În aceasta, veți putea introduce un scurt rezumat al schimbărilor dumneavoastră, marca editarea ca minoră sau adăuga pagina în $watchlist. Câmpul pentru descriere este echivalent cu câmpul {{int|summary}} din editorul de wikitext.&lt;/span&gt;

Vă puteți, de asemenea, reexamina modificările folosind butonul  „{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}”, pentru a vă asigura că ele arată așa cum v-ați dorit, înainte de a le salva. Acesta este similar butonului „{{int|showdiff}}” din editorul de wikitext.

Butonul „{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}” vă întoarce în pagina pe care o editați. Puteți să vă salvati toate modificările mai târziu.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Modificarea legăturilor ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Legăturile pot fi adăugate prin intermediul pictogramei „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}” (zale într-un lanț) din bara de instrumente sau prin folosirea comenzii rapide {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (sau {{Key press|Command|K}} pe un Mac).

Dacă selectați un text, iar apoi apăsați butonul „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}”, acel text va fi utilizat în crearea legăturii. Pentru legături ce conțin un singur cuvânt, puteți fie să-l selectați, fie să puneți pur și simplu cursorul pe acel cuvânt.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Indiferent dacă utilizați butonul sau comanda rapidă, se va deschide o fereastră de dialog în care puteți introduce legătura.
Unealta de legături va încerca să vă ajute cu legăturile '''interne''', căutând potriviri probabile.
După ce ați introdus sau selectat legătura, puteți finaliza procesul de adăugare/modificare a legăturii prin apăsarea tastei {{key press|Enter}} sau prin apăsarea butonului „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}”. Legătura dumneavoastră va apărea imediat în pagină, dar la fel ca și în cazul altor schimbări ale paginii, ea nu va fi publicată până când nu publicați ''întreaga'' pagină.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Pentru a vă conecta la o pagină web de pe un alt site web, procesul este similar: alegeți fila „{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}” și introduceți o adresă URL în casetă.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Legăturile externe fără text arată astfel: [http://example.com]. Le puteți adăuga plasând cursorul departe de orice cuvânt (de exemplu, după un spațiu). Deschideți unealta pentru legături apăsând pe buton sau tastând comanda rapidă. Scrieți URL-ul în căsuță, apoi apăsați pe butonul „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}” pentru a insera legătura.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Pentru a modifica sau elimina o legătură existentă, apăsaţi pe textul legăturii, apoi pe pictograma „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}” care apare lângă ea. Va fi afișată fereastra de editare a legăturii. (Aveți posibilitatea să folosiţi comanda rapidă {{key press|Ctrl|K}}.) Când este selectată o legătură, aceasta apare încadrată cu albastru.

În caseta de dialog pentru modificarea legăturilor, puteți apoi modifica destinația legăturii. Puteți de asemenea elimina legătura cu totul apăsând butonul „{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}” din colțul din dreapta sus al casetei de dialog.
Puteți deschide destinația legăturii în altă fereastră apăsând pe copia legăturii din caseta de dialog. (Ați putea vrea asta pentru a verifica validitatea unei legături externe.)

Dacă doriți să ieșiți de pe eticheta link (textul afișat ca link) sau să continuați să scrieți după această legătură, puteți apăsa pe {{Key press|→}}:
* Apăsând o dată va scăpa de elementul de editare a link-urilor și puneți cursorul la sfârșitul elementului legat (albastru încadrat, pentru a edita acest element)
* Apăsând-o de două ori se va pune cursorul după elementul legat, gata să scrie restul textului.

Pentru a edita eticheta de link a unei legături existente, apăsați pe eticheta de legătură și tastați-o pe cea nouă.
Dar dacă doriți să înlocuiți întreaga etichetă, vă rugăm să rețineți:

* Dacă ați selectat (evidențiat) întreaga etichetă de legătură, linkul va fi șters introducând orice tastă.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pentru a păstra direct link-ul, puteți apăsa în interiorul acelei etichete de link, utilizați spate și ștergeți cheia fără să o apăsați o dată mai mult decât este necesar și o zonă îngustă de legătură albastră va rămâne acolo.&lt;/span&gt; Acum puteți introduce noua etichetă pentru link-ul păstrat.
* Poți de asemenea introduce [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|legături către categorii, fișiere și multe altele]].
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Modificarea referințelor ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Ajutor privitor la folosirea formatelor de citare]] sau [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Ajutor privitor la folosirea butonului {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} din citoid]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== Determinarea sistemului care există ===
|-
| Proiectul dumneavostră wiki poate utiliza unul din trei sisteme de citare a notelor de subsol. Cel afișat în dreapta este cel mai simplu sistem, unde meniul „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}” nu include vreun format de citare. Dacă proiectul dumneavoastră wiki utilizează acest sistem, atunci tot ce trebuie să știți despre notele de subsol se află pe această pagină.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Al doilea sistem are același tip de meniu „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}”, însă cu câteva formate de citare populare configurate pentru acces rapid. Dacă proiectul dumneavoastră wiki utilizează acest sistem, veți găsi mai multe detalii la {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;În al treilea sistem, porniți din nou apăsând butonul Citește.&lt;/span&gt; Apoi se deschide o casetă de dialog, care include un proces de citare automată utilizând serviciul citoid. Dacă wiki-ul dvs. utilizează acest sistem, veți găsi mai multe detalii la {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Modificarea unei referințe existente ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pentru a modifica o referință, dați clic pe ea acolo unde apare în text (de obicei sub forma unui număr între paranteze drepte). Veți vedea fie o pictogramă de „$ref” (semn de carte) sau o pictogramă (și nume) pentru formatul care a fost utilizat pentru a crea această referință. În oricare dintre cazuri, dând clic pe butonul „Modifică”, se va deschide un casetă de dialog unde veți putea modifica referința.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pentru iconița &quot;$ref&quot;, apăsând &quot;Edit&quot; deschide dialogul de referințe. Pentru a începe să schimbați referințele, apăsați pe ea.&lt;/span&gt;

Multe proiecte wiki folosesc formate pentru a formata referințele. Dacă un format este utilizat în referința dumneavoastră, atunci când veți muta cursorul pe informațiile referinței, vor fi selectate toate informațiile din acel câmp.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Dacă a fost utilizat un format, iar dumneavoastră dați clic pe informațiile referinței, va apărea pictograma $template (o piesă de puzzle) cu ceva informații. Dați clic pe butonul „Modificare” pentru a modifica conținutul formatului în mini-caseta de dialog.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Dacă ceea ce vă apare atunci când dați clic pe o referință este o pictogramă de format standard pentru citări (un astfel de exemplu se află în partea dreaptă), dând clic pe „Modificare” va deschide mini-caseta de dialog pentru editarea formatului.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;În interiorul acestui mini-format de editare, puteți adăuga sau înlătura anumite tipuri de informații sau puteți schimba conținutul actual. Inițial, vor apărea doar câmpurile (parametrii formatului) care au conținut. Pentru a adăuga câmpuri suplimentare, dați clic pe „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}” care se află în josul mini-formatului de editare.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Dați clic pe „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}” atunci când ați terminat. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Reutilizarea unei referințe existente ===
|-
| Dacă pagina conține deja o citare care poate fi folosită textului căruia doriți să-i adăugați o sursă, atunci puteți alege să reutilizați acea citare existentă.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Pentru a reutiliza o referință existentă, mutați cursorul în corpul textului unde doriți să adăugați o nouă referință (număr) pentru acea citare. Apoi, dați clic pe butonul „Re-use reference” din meniul „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}”.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(Notă: Dacă wiki-ul dvs. folosește cel de-al treilea sistem de citare a notelor de subsol descris mai sus, veți vedea o filă „Refolosește” într-o casetă de dialog, în loc de o pictogramă „Refolosește” în meniul „$cite”.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| În caseta de dialog de la {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}}, uitați-vă în listă după referința pe care doriți să o refolosiți și selectați-o. Dacă sunt mai multe referințe, puteți utiliza caseta de căutare (etichetat ca „{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}”) pentru a lista doar acele referințe care includ un anume text.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Adăugarea unei referințe noi ===
|-
| Pentru a adăuga o citare utilizând meniul „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}”, mutați cursorul acolo unde doriți să o adăugați în text. Apoi, selectați din meniu tipul de citare potrivit.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Utilizarea citării „de bază” ====
|-
| Aici este ilustrat ce veți vedea când veți selecta citarea de bază.  În caseta de modificare a referințelor puteți adăuga referința dumneavoastră, inclusiv formatarea.

Puteți aloca referința unui anumit grup dat, deși în mod normal acest lucru nu este specificat. (Această opțiune este folosită pentru a realiza grupuri de referințe folosind unealta „{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}”.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| În caseta de dialog pentru referințe, dacă doriți să includeți un format de citare sau orice alt format în noua dumneavoastră referință, dați clic pe pictograma {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} (piesă de puzzle) în meniul „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}” din bara de instrumente din cadrul casetei de dialog pentru modificarea referințelor.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Apoi, căutați formatul pe care doriți să-l folosiți, adăugați-l și modificați-l așa cum ați face cu orice alt format. (Pentru mai multe informații despre formate, vezi secțiunea [[#Editing templates|modificarea formatelor]] de mai jos.)

După ce ați terminat cu noul dumneavoastră format, dați clic pe „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}” pentru a reveni la caseta de dialog pentru modificarea referințelor, iar apoi dați din nou „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}” pentru a reveni la pagina pe care o modificați.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Dacă pe pagină nu se află deja o listă de referințe (de exemplu, dacă adăugați prima referință pentru pagina respectivă), trebuie să specificați unde va fi afișată lista de referințe, alături de textul lor, pentru cei care citesc pagina.

Mutați cursorul acolo unde doriți să se afișeze lista de referințe (de regulă, la sfârșitul paginii), deschideți meniul „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}” și dați clic pe pictograma „{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}” (trei cărți).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Dacă utilizați mai multe grupuri de referințe, ceea ce este destul de rar întâlnit, puteți specifica grupul în această casetă de dialog. Numai referințele care aparțin acelui grup vor fi afișate în pagină acolo unde inserați grupul.

Ultima etapă din caseta de dialog pentru referințe presupune să dați clic pe „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}”.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Folosirea formatelor standard de citare ====
|-
| Este posibil ca proiectul dumneavoastră să aibă formate suplimentare de citare în meniul „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}”. În acest caz, aveți acces rapid către cele mai utilizate formate de citare pentru proiectul dumneavoastră. (Instrucțiuni pentru adăugarea unor formate de citare suplimentare la proiectul dumneavoastră sunt disponibile la {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Dacă veți da clic pe pictograma unui format, cum ar fi „citează carte”, vi se va deschide mini-caseta de editare pentru acel format. Câmpurile cu informații importante care trebuie completate pot apărea marcate cu un asterix. Cu toate că vor fi afișate majoritatea câmpurilor utilizate în mod normal, nu este necesară completarea tuturor acestora.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pentru a adăuga mai mulți parametrii, parcurgeți în jos, în mini-caseta de modificare a formatului, iar apoi dați clic pe opțiunea „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}”.&lt;/span&gt;

Când ați terminat, dați clic pe „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}”.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Modificarea imaginilor și a altor fișiere media ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Modificarea imaginilor ===
|-
| Pentru a adăuga o imagine nouă (sau alt fişier media) în pagină, dați clic pe pictograma „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}” (o imagine a unor munți) din meniul „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}”. Imaginea va fi adăugată acolo unde se află cursorul dumneavoastră.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Prin apăsarea pictogramei „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}”, se va deschide o casetă de dialog care va căuta automat în Wikimedia Commons și proiectul dumneavoastră wiki local fișierele media referitoare la titlul paginii pe care o modificați.

Puteți căuta alte fișiere media modificând textul din caseta de căutare a ferestrei.

Pentru a selecta un fișier, dați clic pe miniatura sa.

Acest lucru va introduce imaginea pe pagina pe care o modificați.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| După ce imaginea pe care ați selectat-o a fost inserată în pagină, se va deschide o altă casetă de dialog. Acesta vă permite să adăugați și să editați captura imaginii. Ea poate conține formatări și legături.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Caseta de dialog media vă permite, de asemenea, să adăugați capturi alternative pentru a ajutora utilizatorii care folosesc cititoare de ecran sau care au dezactivat opțiunea de afișare a imaginii.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| De asemenea, în fereastra „{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}” puteți stabili diverși parametrii pentru imagine. Acestea includ alinierea, tipul și dimensiunea imaginii.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Când ați terminat, dați clic pe „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}” pentru a închide caseta de dialog și a reveni la editarea paginii.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Pentru o imagine care deja există, puteți adăuga sau modifica o captură sau alte setări. Dați clic pe imagine, apoi dați clic pe pictograma „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}” care apare mai jos de imagine.

Puteți redimensiona o imagine dacă dați clic pe ea, iar apoi mutați pictograma de redimensionare (cele două săgeți care apar într-unul sau ambele colțuri de jos).

De asemenea, puteți să trageți o imagine și să o puneți mai sus sau mai jos în pagină.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== Încărcarea imaginilor ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Puteți încărca imagini dintr-o filă a dialogului media, sau prin tragerea de fișiere în editor, sau lipind o imagine din clipboard.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Apăsați pe fila &quot;Încărcare&quot; și alegeți o imagine de pe calculator. Puteți tasta numele fișierului sau trage o imagine în cutie. Dacă ați tras o imagine în editor sau ați lipit o imagine din clipboard, această filă se va deschide automat.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Trebuie să descrieți imaginea și să îi adăugați categorii pentru ca alți oameni să poată să o găsească.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Imaginea va fi inserată în pagină când terminați.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Modificarea galeriilor multimedia ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Pentru a adăuga o galerie nouă de imagini, dați clic pe pictograma „{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}” din meniul „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}”. (Dacă nu vedeți această pictogramă în acel meniu, înseamnă că proiectul dumneavoastră wiki local a decis să amâne implementarea acestei funcționalități în EditorulVizual.) 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Pentru a modifica o galerie în EditorulVizual, dați clic pe acea galerie. Apoi, în josul acelei galerii, dați clic pe pictograma galeriei (un set de imagini). Se va deschide astfel caseta de modificare a galeriei, cu lista completă de imagini incluse în acea galerie.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;În acest moment, caseta de modificare a galeriei este o simplă casetă care vă permite să modificați galeriile existente, utilizând wikitext. Pentru a adăuga o imagine nouă într-o galerie deja existentă, scrieți numele fișierului urmat apoi de o bară verticală (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) și de captura pentru acea imagine. Trebuie să introduceți fiecare imagine pe un rând nou.&lt;/span&gt; De asemenea, puteți edita această listă pentru a înlătura sau rearanja imagini sau pentru a schimba capturile imaginilor.

Când dați clic pe butonul „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}”, veți ieși din caseta de modificare a galeriei de imagini. Ar trebui apoi să puteți vizualiza modificările dumneavoastră, cu galeria așa cum va apărea la cei care vor citi pagina.

Rețineți faptul că dacă ieșiți din caseta de modificare a galeriei de imagini, modificările dumneavoastră nu vor fi publicate. Ca și în cazul altor modificări efectuate cu ajutorul editorului vizual, trebuie să salvați întreaga pagină pentru a publica modificările dumneavoastră.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Modificarea formatelor ==
Puternicul sistem MediaWiki pentru formate vă permite să inserați conținut dinamic, text din alte pagini și multe altele. Pentru o explicație detaliată și exemple, vedeți [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Pagina de ajutor pentru formate]]. 

În EditorulVizual puteți căuta după un format relevant, adăuga o invocație sau [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transcludere]] pe pagina pe care o editați și, dacă este nevoie, adăuga conținut personalizat utilizând [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parametri]].

=== Inserarea unui format nou ===
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Pentru a adăuga un format la o pagină, plasați-vă cursorul la poziția din pagină unde doriți să fie inserat formatul. Apoi deschideți meniul {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} și selectați „[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}”. Alternativ, tastați două acolade {{((}} pentru a deschide același dialog.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| De asemenea, puteți să modificați un format care se află deja pe o pagină. Atunci când selectați formatul pe care doriți să îl editați, acesta devine albastru și apare o cutie ce afișează „[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}”. După care selectați legătura „{{int|vector-view-edit}}” sau apăsați de două ori pe formatul însuși pentru a deschide formatul.
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Unele formate nu sunt vizibile cuiva care citește o pagină. În editorul vizual, astfel de formate ascunse încă sunt afișate, așa că puteți să le apăsați și editați sau șterge. Numele formatului va fi afișat lângă pictograma puzzle și ambele vor fi slab vizibile, de culoare gri.
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Parametrii formatului ===
|-
| Veți vedea această cutie de dialog atunci când adăugați un nou format sau editați unul deja plasat. Ce anume vedeți în cutie depinde dacă formatul în cauză conține {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} sau nu, metadate utila adăugate de alți editori pentru a face mai ușoară editarea formatelor în EditorulVizual.

Atunci când un format conține TemplateData, EditorulVizual poate utiliza datele pentru a prezenta câmpuri adnotate pe care să le completați.


Pentru formatele care au ceva date TemplateData furnizate de către comunitate, the EditorulVizual listează o listă a parametrilor numiți și adesea descrieri și intrucțiuni ce explică înțelesul și forma necesară pentru valorile fiecărui parametru.
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
==== Adăugarea de parametri nedocumentați ====
|-
| Dacă inserați sau editați un format al cărui autor nu i-a expus parametrii săi în TemplateData, are ceea ce numim „parametri nedocumentați” sau „nenumiți”. În aceste cazuri, ar trebui să consultați pagina pentru formatul însuși. Acolo puteți învăța cum să întrebuințați și lucra în mod corect cu toți parametrii formatului. Asta include învățarea denumirilor exacte ale parametrilor după cum sunt scrise de către autorul formatului.  

Dacă descoperiți din documentație că formatul se așteaptă la parametri fără a utiliza denumiri, completați cu numere ca înlocuitori pentru denumirile parametrilor utilizând funcția de introdus parametri nedocumentați, după care adăugați lângă valorile pe care doriți să le furnizați așa cum ați face în mod normal. 

Exemplu:
* primul parametru nedenumit: „1”
* valoarea primului parametru nedenumit: „en_US”
* al doilea parametru nedenumit: „2”
* valoarea celui de-al doilea parametru nedenumit: „da”

Dacă includeți accidental parametri eronați, scriși greșit sau inexistenți, valorile pe care le introduceți pentru acei parametri nu vor fi afișate pe pagina pe care o editați. 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
==== Parametri autogenerați ====
|-
| În acest exemplu, formatului în cauză îi lipsesc datele TemplateData, dar a fost posibilă autogenerarea parametrilor. Asta înseamnă că parametrii nedocumentați au fost adăugații deja pentru dvs., dar denumirile ar putea să nu fie înțelese cu ușurință, iar dialogul nu poate afișa nicio direcție sau descriere. Drept consecință, cutia de dialog oferă o legătură către documentația formatului, care ar trebui să vă ajute să deduceți și să completați în diverșii parametri ai formatului.
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
==== Modificarea de conținut cu mai multe părți de format ====
|-
| În timpul modificării, puteți deschide conținutul de formatul ce constă din multiple formate sau un singur format legat de același wikitext. Asta diferă de formatele cuibărite descrise mai jos. În acest caz, formatele sunt vizualizate mai bine ca fiind stivuite sau conectate. 

Acest conținut conține „formate nebalansate”, formate care sunt incomplete pe cont propriu și trebuie să fie împerecheate cu ceva wikitext sau alt format pentru a funcționa. 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
==== Formate cuibărite ====
|-
| Formatele pot include alte formate ca valoarea pentru parametri. Îl veți recunoaște atunci când vedeți un parametru al cărui valoare conține paranteze pătrate &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; ce denotă un format. 

EditorulVizual nu poate prezenta acest format dinăuntrul unui format (un format cuibărit) utilizând interfața ușor de utilizat a editorului, așa că dacă doriți dvs. să cuibăriți un format, va trebui să înțelegeți cum să adăugați manual formatul în wikitext în câmpul parametrului corespunzător.
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Finalizarea modificării dvs. ===
|-
| Atunci când ați terminat modificarea unui format, puteți apăsa pe „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}”. Apoi puteți să vă previzualizați modificarea și să vă asigurați că arată în modul pe care îl doriți și la care vă așteptați.

Puteți de asemenea să vedeți un mesaj de eroare, care (precum celelalte date TemplateData menționate mai sus) reprezintă conținut furnizat de către comunitate și poate varia în utilitate.
Ați putea avea nevoie să consultați documentația proprie a formatului pentru a reuși să rezolvați unele erori.
Dacă încă aveți probleme, luați în considerare să vorbiți despre problema dvs. pe pagina de discuție a formatului.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Eliminarea unui format ===
|-
| Pentru a elimina un format în EditorulVizual, apăsați pe cutia formatului. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|Eliminarea unui format în EditorulVizual]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Modificarea pe mobil ===
|-
| Când modificați un format pe o pagină utilizând EditorulVizual pe un dispozitiv mobil, veți vedea că bara laterală începe ascunsă. O puteți face vizibilă apăsând butonul numit „Arată/ascunde opțiunile”.

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|Modificarea unui format pe mobil în EditorulVizual]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Substituirea formatelor ===
|-
| Atunci când inserați un format într-o pagină wiki, conținutul său și aparența sa sunt reevaluate de fiecare dată când se încarcă pagina, pe baza codului formatului și valorilor parametrilor săi. Asta înseamnă că dacă cineva actualizează codul formatului, atunci fiecare pagină care utilizează acel format va ajunge de asemenea actualizată când publică.

Există, cu toate acestea, altă cale, mai puțină comună de a utiliza formate, iar asta este cea de a [[w:Help:Substitution|substitui]] un format.
Când se face asta, conținutul formatului se include permanent pur și simplu așa cum apare la momentul în care îl inserați. Nu se va actualiza dacă codul formatului este schimbat mai târziu.

Cei mai mulți utilizatori nu vor trebui să recurgă vreodată la substituire.
Substituirea este de obicei utilă numai atunci când trebuie să capturați aparența exactă a unei versiuni a unui format, precum atunci când conținutul este în dezvoltare și necesită evaluare.

Pentru a substitui un format în EditorulVizual, inserați un format utilizând sintaxa de denumire „&lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;denumirea formatului&gt;&lt;/code&gt;”.
(Autocompletarea nu funcționează în acest caz.)
Apoi apăsați butonul albastru denumit „Adăugare format”.

Atunci când ați terminat, apăsați „Inserare”, care va insera conținutul formatului așa cum îl vedeți.
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Modificarea listelor ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Puteți utiliza editorul vizual pentru a crea liste sau pentru a schimba formatul unei liste existente. Există două tipuri de liste: neordonat (punctat) și ordonat (numerotat).

Pentru a începe o listă nouă, pur și simplu apăsați pe unul dintre elementele din meniu afișate aici. Sau dacă deja ați scris lista (pe linii separate), selectați (evidențiați) lista pe care ați scris-o, apoi apăsați pe unul dintre elementele din meniu.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Aici sunt afișate exemple ale celor două tipuri de liste: neordonat (punctat) și ordonat (numerotat).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Dacă doriți să schimbați nivelul de indentare al unei liste existente, selectați partea listei pe care doriți să o schimbați.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| După aceea utilizați meniul, sau apăsați tasta Tab. (Tasta Tab crește indentarea; utilizați tasta shift plus tasta Tab pentru a descrește indentarea)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Aici este rezultatul indentății crescute.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Puteți chiar să amestecați listele ordonate (numerotate) și neordonate (punctate), dacă elementele listelor au indentări diferite.
|}

== Modificarea tabelelor ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Puteți utiliza EditorulVizual pentru a introduce și schimba tabele.

Puteți chiar să importați un tabel trăgând cu mouse-ul un fișier de tip ''csv'' (comma-separated value) din calculatorul dumneavoastră în fereastra de editare principală.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Când apăsați pe „Tabel”, în meniul „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}”, editorul vizual inserează un tabel gol de patru-pe-patru.

Acum meniul „Tabel” este disponibil. Din acel meniu, puteți adăuga o legendă în partea de sus a tabelului.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Pentru a selecta o celulă, apăsați-o o dată.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Pentru a edita conținutul celulei (de exemplu, pentru a adăuga conținut sau corect o eroare de scriere), apăsați de două ori în celulă. Sau puteți selecta celula și după aceea apăsa Înapoi.

Pentru a vă termina editarea unei celule, pur și simplu apăsați altundeva.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| Puteți adăuga, muta sau șterge o coloană sau un rând.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Puteți uni celule: Selectați-le, după care din meniul Tabel, apăsați „Unire celule”.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Dacă uniți celule, doar textul dintr-o singură celulă este păstrat; oricare text din celelalte celule este șters când uniți celulele. Dacă decideți că doreați câtva din sau tot textul care a fost șters, utilizați butonul Anulează, mutați sau copiați textul pe care îl vreți, apoi uniți celulele din nou.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Puteți de asemenea să împărțiți celule care erau anterior unite. Tot conținutul care era în celula unită va rămâne în prima celulă când realizați împărțirea. Apoi puteți copia și lipi text pe alte celule, dacă vreți.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Modificarea categoriilor ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| Pentru a modifica categoriile, dați clic pe pictograma „{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}” din meniul „{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}”.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Dacă dați clic pe „{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}”, se va deschide o casetă de dialog care listează categoriile existente și care vă permite să adăugați unele noi sau să le ștergeți pe cele existente.

De asemenea, aveți opțiunea de a seta sau schimba [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|cheia]] generală (prestabilită) de sortare, care determină unde apare pagina atunci când este listată alături de alte pagini în aceeași categorie.

De exemplu, cheia de sortare prestabilită pentru articolul „George Washington” este „Washington, George”. În categoria „Președinți ai Statelor Unite”, articolul este listat la litera „W”, nu la litera „G”.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Pentru a adăuga o categorie la o pagină, tastați numele categoriei în interiorul câmpului „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}”. Pe măsură ce tastați, editorul vizual va căuta posibile potriviri printre categoriile existente. Puteți fie selecta o categorie care deja există sau puteți adăuga o categorie care nu are încă propria sa pagină de categorie. (Până când acea pagină de categorie va fi creată, noua dumneavoastră categorie va apărea ca o legătură roșie după ce vă publicați toate schimbările de editare.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Pentru a șterge o categorie, dați clic pe ea, iar apoi dați clic pe pictograma „{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}” (coș de gunoi) din caseta de dialog care se deschide.

Dacă dați clic pe o categorie, vi se va permite să specificați cheia de sortare pentru acea categorie. O asemenea cheie de sortare va substitui cheia prestabilită de sortare.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Dați clic pe „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}” atunci când ați terminat de modificat categoriile pentru a reveni la modificarea paginii.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Modificarea setărilor paginii ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| Pentru a modifica setările unei pagini, dați clic pentru a deschide meniul „{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}” din bara de instrumente și selectați butonul „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}”.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Butonul „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}” deschide o casetă de dialog care afișează mai multe opțiuni.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Puteți crea o pagină de redirecționare către o altă pagină dacă bifați căsuța „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}”, iar apoi tastați numele paginii către care doriți să trimiteți persoana care accesează pagina pe care o modificați.

În jos, există opțiunea de a preveni ca redenumirile ulterioare ale paginii să nu poată modifica această redirecționare. Această opțiunea este foarte rar folosită.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Puteți schimba afișarea cuprinsului prin selectarea unuia dintre aceste trei butoane. Opțiunea prestabilită este „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}”, care afișează cuprinsul dacă există trei sau mai multe secțiuni.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Dând clic pe această căsuță, puteți face ca o pagină să nu afișeze legăturile de editare pentru fiecare secțiune în parte.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Dați clic pe „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}” atunci când ați terminat de editat {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} pentru a reveni la editorul de pagină.
|}

== Modificarea hărților ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Puteți adăuga și schimba hărți. Vezi {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Modificarea formulelor matematice ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Pentru a adăuga o nouă formulă matematică în pagină, plasați cursorul dumneavoastră acolo unde doriți să fie introdusă, iar apoi dați clic pe pictograma „{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}” („Σ”) din meniul „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}” din bara de instrumente.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Se va deschide o fereastră în care puteți să tastați formula, utilizând sintaxa LaTeX. EditorulVizual va actualiza formula pe măsură ce o tastați, astfel încât să puteți vedea cum va arătat când veți face modificările. De îndată ce sunteți mulțumit cu formula, dați clic pe butonul „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}”.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Pentru a modifica o formulă matematică care deja există în pagină, dați clic pe ea, iar apoi dați clic pe pictograma „Σ” care apare. Se va deschide o mică fereastră, unde puteți face modificările.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Formulele matematice pot fi plasate în linie sau centrate ca un bloc.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

==Modificarea gamelor muzicale==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Pentru a adăuga notație muzicală nouă unei pagini, plasați-vă cursorul unde doriți să fie inserată notația muzicală. După aceea, din meniul „Inserare” din bara de unelte, apăsați pe opțiunea „Notație muzicală”.

Pentru a edita o notație muzicală existentă pe pagină, apăsați pe ea de două ori.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Asta va deschide dialogul „Notație muzicală”. Aici notația poate fi editată prin scară, fie în formatul ABC, fie în cel Lilypond. Puteți, de asemenea, să legați notația de un fișier audio sau MIDI. Odată ce ați terminat, apăsați butonul „Realizat” pentru a închide dialog și vă publica schimbările.
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Modificarea poeziilor și a altor elemente speciale ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Unele intrări, precum listele de asociere și poeziile nu sunt încă pe deplin suportate de către editorul vizual.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| În cele mai multe cazuri, intrările existente pot fi modificate, dar cele noi nu pot fi inserate în EditorulVizual.

Până când vor fi complet suportate, puteți copia una deja existentă pe o altă pagină sau puteți modifica direct sursa wikitextului.

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== Comutarea între editorul vizual și cel wikitext ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
Pentru a comuta de la editorul vizual la editorul wikitext, apăsați butonul &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; din partea dreaptă de pe la sfârșitul barei de unelte.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Veți vedea un diff. (Dacă ați apăsat pe „Respingeți schimbările”, veți vedea doar wikitext, gata să îl editați cu editorul wikitext.)

Mergeți mai jos și veți vedea zona de editare a wikitextului. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
Puteți de asemenea să comutați de la editorul wikitext la editorul vizual. Pentru a face asta, apăsați pictograma creion din partea dreaptă de pe la sfârșitul barei de unelte.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Comenzi rapide de la tastatură ==

Mulți editori sunt obișnuiți să introducă wikitext în mod direct, mai ales cel pentru boldire, text cursiv și legături interne. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Comenzile rapide]] de la tastatură permit inserarea rapidă a unei formatării similare, fără a fi nevoie să utilizați intrările din bara de instrumente. Aici se află cele mai utilizate comenzi rapide în EditorulVizual.

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! Comenzi rapide PC
! Acțiune
! Comenzi rapide MAC
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Aldin
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Cursiv
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Inserarea unei legături
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Tăiere
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Copiere
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Lipire
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Anulare
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>q2kv158ulcd60jzac4javeta8mzyxle</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/de</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>132675</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402762</id>
      <parentid>5347063</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:39:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="62022" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Wenn du den VisualEditor ausprobieren möchtest, ohne einen bestehenden Artikel zu bearbeiten, kannst du ihn [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} hier] testen.&lt;/span&gt; Du benötigst keinen Account um den VisualEditor auf dieser Seite zu benutzen.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Den VisualEditor öffnen ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| Um eine Seite mit dem VisualEditor zu bearbeiten, klicke auf den Reiter „{{int|vector-view-edit}}“ oben auf der Seite.

Manchmal dauert es einige Sekunden, bis die Seite bearbeitet werden kann, besonders wenn die Seite sehr lang ist.

Klickt man auf den Reiter „{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}“ öffnet sich der klassische Wiki-Quelltexteditor.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Du kannst den VisualEditor auch durch das Klicken auf den „{{int|editsection}}“-Link an jeder Abschnittsüberschrift öffnen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Erste Schritte: Die VisualEditor-Werkzeugleiste ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Screenshot der VisualEditor-Werkzeugleiste]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | Die Werkzeugleiste erscheint ganz oben auf dem Bildschirm, wenn man mit VisualEditor bearbeitet. Die Leiste enthält einige bekannte Symbole:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' und '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' der vorgenommenen Änderungen.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Überschriftenmenü:''' Du kannst das Format des Textes ändern. Um den Stil eines Abschnittes zu ändern fahre mit dem Cursor über den Abschnitt und wähle den passenden Stil im Menü aus (dazu musst du den Text nicht markieren). Abschnittsüberschriften formatiert man mit „{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}“, Unterabschnittstitel mit „{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}“, „{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}“ usw. Das normale Textformat ist „{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}“.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Formatierung:''' Wenn man auf das „&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;“ klickt, öffnet sich ein Menü. 
* Die ''{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}''-Schaltfläche ('''F''') setzt den markierten Text fett.
* Die {{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}-Schaltfläche (''K'') setzt den Text kursiv.
* Die {{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}-Schaltfläche (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) lässt den ausgewählten Text kleiner und hochgestellt im Vergleich zum umgebenden Text werden.
* Die {{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}-Schaltfläche (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) erzeugt Text, der kleiner ist und tiefergestellt im Vergleich zum umgebenden Text.
* Die {{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}-Schaltfläche (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) streicht den gewählten Text durch.
* Die „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}-Schaltfläche“ (geschweifte Klammern: &lt;code&gt;{ }&lt;/code&gt;) verändert die Schriftart des gewählten Textes in eine nichtproportionale Schriftart, die den Text von dem umgebenden Text (in proportionaler Schrift) abhebt.
* Die {{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}-Schaltfläche (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) unterstreicht den gewählten Text.
* Die {{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}-Schaltfläche (文A) ermöglicht es dir, die Sprache (zum Beispiel Japanisch) und Schriftrichtung (zum Beispiel rechts nach links) des gewählten Textes festzulegen.
* Die letzte Schaltfläche ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), genannt {{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}, entfernt jegliche Formatierung des gewählten Textes, inklusive Links.

Falls kein Text ausgewählt worden ist vor dem Klicken auf das „&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;“ und auf eine Schaltfläche, wird der im Folgenden eingegebene Text ab der aktuellen Position des Cursors entsprechend formatiert, egal, wo dein Cursor sich gerade befindet.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Verlinkungstool:''' Die Kette ist das [[#Editing links|Verlinkungstool]]. Wenn man darauf klickt (typischerweise nach Markieren eines Textausschnittes) öffnet sich der [[#Editing links|Verlinkungsdialog]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''Belegen-Menü:''' Das Belegen-Menü dient dazu, Verweise (auch Einzelnachweise oder Fußnoten genannt) innerhalb des Textes einzufügen. Alle Projekte haben Zugriff auf die $basic-Einzelnachweisformatierung und machen eine Mehrfachnutzung von Verweisen mithilfe dieses Menüs möglich. Außerdem kann man über das Menü einfach Quellenvorlagen nutzen, sofern sie in dem jeweiligen Projekt existieren.

(Anleitungen, um lokale Quellenvorlagen für ein bestimmtes Wiki zum {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} hinzuzufügen, finden sich unter {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}-Schaltfläche:''' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the {{ll|Citoid|Citoid}} service is enabled on your wiki, you will see a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button instead of a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

Der Citoid-Service versucht Quellen-Vorlagen automatisch auszufüllen.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Listen und Einrückungen:''' Die beiden ersten Schaltflächen erlauben dir, den Text entweder als {{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}} oder {{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}} zu formatieren. Die letzten beiden Schaltflächen ermöglicht es dir die Einrückungsebene der Einträge zu verändern.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' Das {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} kann sich von Projekt zu Projekt unterscheiden. Hier findet sich eine Liste ''aller'' möglichen Optionen die auftauchen könnten.
* Das {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}-Symbol (ein Bild mit Bergen) öffnet den [[#Editing images and other media files|Medien-Dialog]].
* Die {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}-Schaltfläche (ein Puzzleteil) ermöglicht das [[#Editing templates|Bearbeiten von Vorlagen]].
* Die Tabellen-Schaltfläche ermöglicht das Einfügen von Tabelle.
* Die {{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}-Schaltfläche (eine Sprechblase) ermöglicht es, Kommentare einzufügen, die für Leser nicht sichtbar sind, also nur im Bearbeitungsmodus zu sehen sind. Dort werden sie durch ein Ausrufezeichen-Symbol markiert. Ein Klick auf das Ausrufezeichen-Symbol ermöglicht es, den Kommentar zu bearbeiten oder zu löschen.
* Die {{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}-Schaltfläche (ein [[:de:Anch|Ankh]]-Symbol - ☥) ermöglicht das Einfügen von Hieroglyphen (siehe unten).
* Die Schaltfläche „Code-Block“ erlaubt die Eingabe von Code.
* Die Notenschrift-Schaltfläche ermöglicht die Eingabe von Musiknoten.
* Die {{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}-Schaltfläche (einige Photos) ermöglicht das Einfügen einer Galerie von Bildern.
* Die Schaltfläche {{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}} (Σ) öffnet den  [[#Editing mathematical formulae|Dialog zum Einfügen von Formeln]].
* Mittels der Diagramm-Schaltfläche können Diagramme erstellt werden.
* Die Schaltfläche „{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}“ fügt eine Unterschrift ein, die du auf dem Projekt benutzt. Diese Schaltfläche ist deaktiviert (nicht auswählbar), wenn du einen Seitentyp (einen Namensraum) wie Artikel bearbeitest, wo keine Unterschriften eingefügt werden sollten.
* Die Schaltfläche {{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}} (drei Bücher) öffnet einen Dialog der erlaubt, den Anzeigeort der Einzelnachweise festzulegen. Dies muss normalerweise nur einmal pro Seite getan werden.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Einfügen von Sonderzeichen:''' Beim Klicken auf die {{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}-Schaltfläche im {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}-Menü öffnet sich ein Dialog, der das Einfügen einer Vielzahl von Sonderzeichen ermöglicht. Wenn man auf eines der Zeichen klickt, wird es in den Text eingefügt. Diese Sonderzeichen enthalten einige Standardsymbole, Diakritika und mathematische Symbole. (Diese Liste kann von Land zu Land variieren. Weitere Hinweise unter {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}})
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| Der „Bearbeite Notizen“-Knopf zeigt alle Notizen dieser Seite an.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| Das Menü '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' befindet sich links neben dem ''{{int|publishchanges}}''-Knopf und dem Menü „{{int|visualeditor-mweditmode-tooltip}}“. In diesem Menü befindet sich ein Knopf, mit dem man einen '''{{int|visualeditor-meta-tool}}'''-Dialog mit den folgenden Reitern (links) öffnen kann:

* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' ermöglicht es, Kategorien zu dieser Seite hinzuzufügen und die Sortierung der Seite anzupassen, wenn sie innerhalb einer Kategorie angezeigt wird, indem ein anderer Index für die Sortierung festgelegt wird.
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' ermöglicht es, die Seite zu einer Weiterleitung zu machen und die Optionen dieser Weiterleitung anzupassen, die Einstellungen für die Anzeige des Inhaltsverzeichnisses anzupassen, die Bearbeitungslinks neben jeder Überschrift zu deaktivieren und die Seite als Disambiguierungs-Seite zu definieren.
* '''{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}''' ermöglicht die Anpassung der Einstellungen für die Indizierung der Seite durch Suchmaschinen, die Anzeige einer Registerkarte zum Hinzufügen eines neuen Abschnitts und den angezeigten Titel.
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' zeigt eine Liste von Seiten in anderen Sprachen, die mit dieser Seite verlinkt sind.
* '''{{int|visualeditor-templatesused-tool}}''' zeigt eine Liste von Links zu allen auf dieser Seite verwendeten Templates.

Die Reiter des {{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-title}} dialogs werden auch im Menü {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} angezeigt und können durch Anklicken geöffnet werden.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Darüber hinaus enthält das Menü $pagemenu die Schaltfläche '''Von rechts nach links anzeigen''' und die Schaltfläche '''[[$1|Suchen und Ersetzen]]''', die ein Dialogfeld öffnet, in das die gesuchten Zeichen, Begriffe oder regulären Ausdrücke sowie die zu ersetzenden Zeichen eingegeben werden können, zusammen mit mehreren Options-Schaltflächen.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| Die '''{{int|visualeditor-mweditmode-tooltip}}'''-Schaltfläche befindet sich neben der '''{{int|publishchanges}}'''-Schaltfläche. Ein Klick auf Sie öffnet ein Menü, das unten die Schaltfläche '''Quelltextbearbeitung''' enthält. Diese erlaubt dir, zum Wikitext-Editor zu wechseln.
|}

== Änderungen veröffentlichen ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Wenn du mit dem Bearbeiten fertig bist, klicke auf die blaue Schaltfläche „{{int|publishchanges}}“ in der Werkzeugleiste. Wenn du keine Änderungen vorgenommen hast, ist der Button deaktiviert (und wird daher grau angezeigt). Um all deine Bearbeitungen zu verwerfen, schließe entweder das Browserfenster oder klicke auf den Tab „{{int|vector-view-view}}“ oberhalb der Werkzeugleiste.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn du den blauen Knopf „{{int|publishchanges-start}}“ drückst, öffnet sich ein Dialogfenster. Hier kannst du eine kurze Zusammenfassung deiner Änderungen eingeben, deine Bearbeitung als klein markieren und/oder die Seite zu deiner $watchlist hinzufügen. Das Feld Zusammenfassung und Quellen entspricht dem Zusammenfassungsfeld im Quelltexteditor.&lt;/span&gt;

Wenn du auf „{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}“ drückst, kannst du den Unterschied zwischen deiner Version und der alten Version sehen. Diese Funktion gleicht dem „{{int|showdiff}}“ des Quelltexteditors.

Der {{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}-Button ermöglicht es dir zurück auf die Seite zu gelangen, die du gerade bearbeitest. Du kannst deine Bearbeitungen später veröffentlichen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Links bearbeiten ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Links können durch das {{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}-Symbol (Kettenglieder) in der Werkzeugleiste oder durch die Tastenkombination {{key press|Strg|K}} (oder {{Key press|Command|K}} auf einem Mac) hinzugefügt werden.

Wenn du Text markierst und dann auf „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}“ klickst, wird ein Link mit dem Text als Linktext eingefügt. Wenn du nur ein Wort als Linktext verwenden willst, reicht es, wenn sich der Cursor über dem Wort befindet.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Egal ob du die Schaltfläche oder die Tastenkombination genutzt hast, wird sich ein Dialog öffnen, in den du den Link eingeben kannst.
Der VisualEditor wird versuchen, dich bei '''internen''' Links zu unterstützen, indem er ähnliche Seitennamen vorschlägt.
Nachdem du einen Link eingegeben oder ausgewählt hast, beendest du die Verlinkung indem du {{key press|Enter}} klickst, durch Klicken die „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}“-Schaltfläche. Dein Link wird dann sofort auf der Seite erscheinen, wird aber wie alle anderen Änderungen an einer Seite, erst veröffentlicht, wenn du die ''gesamte'' Seite veröffentlichst.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Um auf eine Webseite einer anderen Website zu verlinken, ist der Vorgang ähnlich: Wählen Sie die Registerkarte „{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}“ und geben Sie eine URL in das Feld ein.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Externe Links ohne Titel sehen so aus: [http://example.com]. Diese können hinzugefügt werden indem man den Cursor weg von einem Wort setzt (z.&amp;nbsp;B. nach einem Leerzeichen). Öffne das Verlinkungstool in dem du auf den Button klickst oder das Tastaturkürzel verwendest. Trage die URL in dem Eingabefeld ein und klicke auf „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}“ um den Link einzufügen.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Um einen bestehenden Link zu ändern oder entfernen, klicke auf den Link und dann auf „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}“, das in der Nähe erscheint. Es öffnet sich ein Bearbeitungsfenster (Du kannst auch auf das gleiche Symbol in der Werkzeugleiste klicken oder die Tastenkombination {{key press|Strg|K}} benutzen, während der Cursor im Linktext ist.) Wenn ein Link ausgewählt ist, erscheint er in einem blauen Rahmen.

Im Linkbearbeitungsdialog kannst du das Linkziel verändern. Du kannst zudem den Link komplett entfernen, indem du auf den Button „{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}“ klickst, der sich in der unteren linken Ecke des Dialogs befindet.
Du kannst das Linkziel auch in einem anderen Fenster öffnen lassen, indem du auf die Kopie des Links im Dialog klickst. (Dies ist nützlich zur Überprüfung, ob ein externer Link noch gültig ist.)

Wenn du aus der Linkbearbeitung (oder dem Linktext) heraus möchtest oder nach dem Link weiterschreiben möchtest kannst du {{Key press|→}} drücken.
* Einmaliges Drücken wird den Linkbearbeitungsdialog schließen und den Cursor an das Ende des Linktextes setzen (blau eingerahmt und den Link zu bearbeiten)
* Zweimaliges Drücken wird den Cursor hinter den Linktext setzten, so dass du den Rest deines Textes schreiben kannst.

Der angezeigte Text eines bestehenden Links kann bearbeitet werden, indem der Text angeklickt und der neue Text eingetippt wird.
Solltest du den ganzen Tetx ersetzen wollen, beachte bitte Folgendes:

* Falls du den ganzen Linktext ausgewählt hast, wird der Link durch das Tippen einer Taste gelöscht.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Um die Löschung des Links zu verhindern, einfach in den Linktext klicken und diesen mit der Rücklöschtaste (Backspace) und der Entfernen-Taste (Delete) löschen – wenn du diese Tasten nicht mehr als unbedingt nötig verwendest, bleibt ein schmaler blauer Linkbereich übrig.&lt;/span&gt; Jetzt kannst du den neuen Linktext für den bestehenden Link einfügen.
* Du kannst ebenfalls [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|Links auf Kategorien, Dateien und mehr]] erstellen.
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Einzelnachweise bearbeiten ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] oder [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} button]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== Feststellen, welches System vorhanden ist ===
|-
| Dein Wiki kann eines von drei Fußnotensystemen benutzen. Rechts wird das einfachste System gezeigt, in dem das Belegen-Menü keine Quellenvorlagen enthält. Wenn dein Wiki dieses System verwendet, findest du alles, was du über Fußnoten wissen musst, auf dieser Seite weiter unten.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Das zweite System hat dasselbe Belegen-Menü und enthält zudem noch einige beliebte Quellenvorlagen für den Schnellzugriff. Wenn dein Wiki dieses System benutzt, findest du weitere Einzelheiten unter {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| Im dritten System beginnen Sie wieder mit dem Drücken der Taste {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}. Es öffnet sich dann ein Dialogfenster, das einen automatischen Prozess fürs Einfügen von Belegen enthält basierend auf dem Citoid-Service. Wenn dein Wiki dieses System verwendet, findest du weitere Informationen unter {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Einen bestehenden Einzelnachweis bearbeiten ===
|-
| Um einen bestehenden Einzelnachweis zu bearbeiten, klicke auf die Stelle, wo er im Text auftaucht (meistens eine Zahl in eckigen Klammern). Du siehst dann entweder das Symbol „{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}“ (Lesezeichen) oder ein Symbol (und Name) für die Vorlage, die verwendet wurde um diesen Einzelnachweis zu erstellen. In jedem Fall öffnet sich durch Klicken auf das die &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot;-Schaltfläche ein Bearbeitungsdialog.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ein Klick auf „$ref“ öffnet ein Fenster mit einem Mini-Editor, in dem du den Einzelnachweis bearbeiten kannst.&lt;/span&gt;

Viele Wikis benutzen Vorlagen, um Einzelnachweise einheitlich darzustellen. Wenn dein Einzelnachweis eine Vorlage benutzt, wird die gesamte Information in diesem Feld hervorgehoben, wenn du deinen Mauszeiger über dieses Feld bewegst.

Wenn eine Vorlage verwendet wird und du die Einzelnachweise angeklickst, erscheint das {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}-Symbol (Puzzleteil) mit einigen Zusatzinformationen. Klicke auf &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; um den Inhalt der Vorlage in dem Vorlagen-Minieditor zu bearbeiten.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Wenn bei einem Klick auf einen Einzelnachweis das Symbol einer Standard-Quellenvorlage erscheint (siehe Beispiel rechts), dann kann man mit einem Klick auf &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; den Vorlagen-Minieditor öffnen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Im Vorlagen-Editor können Informationen oder Inhalte hinzugefügt, entfernt oder verändert werden. Am Anfang werden nur ausgefüllte Felder (Vorlagenparameter) angezeigt. Weitere Felder können mit einen Klick auf „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}“ unten im Vorlagen-Minieditor hinzugefügt werden.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Klicke auf &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;, wenn du fertig bist. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Einen bestehenden Einzelnachweis wiederverwenden ===
|-
| Wenn die Seite bereits einen Einzelnachweis enthält der zu dem Textabschnitt passt, den du belegen willst, kannst du diesen erneut verwenden.

Um einen Einzelnachweis ein weiteres Mal zu benutzen, platziere den Cursor an der gewünschten Stelle im Text, wo du den neuen Einzelnachweis (Nummer) für die Referenzierung angeben willst. Daraufhin klicke auf den Punkt „{{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-useexisting-tool}}“ auf dem Menü „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}“ in der Werkzeugleiste.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(Bemerkung: Wenn dein Wiki das dritte Fußnoten-System hat, wie oben beschrieben, erscheint anstelle des Punktes &quot;$re-using-reference&quot; im Menü &quot;$cite&quot; ein „Weiterverwenden“-Tab im Bearbeitungsfenster.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Im Dialog „{{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}}“ kannst du den Einzelnachweis, den du wiederverwenden willst, auswählen. Gibt es dort viele Einträge, kannst das Suchfeld (genannt „{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}“) verwenden, um dir eine entsprechende Auswahl anzeigen zu lassen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Einen neuen Einzelnachweis hinzufügen ===
|-
| Um ein Zitat über das Menü &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; hinzuzufügen, platziert man den Cursor an der Stelle im Text, an der das Zitat eingefügt werden soll. Dann wählt man im Menü die entsprechende Zitierart aus.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Einfaches Referenzieren verwenden ====
|-
| Hier ist dargestellt, was du siehst, wenn du das Basisform auswählst.  Im Einzelnachweiseditor kannst du den Einzelnachweistext hinzufügen und formatieren.

Es ist möglich, die Referenz einer bestimmten Gruppe zuzuordnen, auch wenn dies normalerweise nicht getan wird. (Damit können Einzelnachweise gruppiert mit „{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}“ angezeigt werden.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Wenn du einen neuen Einzelnachweis hinzufügst und dabei Quellen- oder andere Vorlagen verwenden möchtest, musst du das {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}-Symbol in der Werkzeugleiste des Referenzen-Editors ({{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}) anklicken.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Danach kannst du die Vorlage wie im normalen Modus hinzufügen und anschließend bearbeiten wie jede andere Vorlage (siehe den Abschnitt [[#Editing templates|Vorlagen bearbeiten]] weiter unten, wenn du mehr Informationen über Vorlagen benötigst.)

Nachdem die Vorlage bearbeitet wurde, klicke auf „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}“ um zum Einzelnachweiseditor zurückzukehren, und dann nochmal auf „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}“ um zur Seite zu zurückzukommen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Wenn noch keine Einzelnachweisliste auf der Seite vorhanden ist (beispielsweise, wenn du den ersten Einzelnachweis hinzufügst), musst du sie ergänzen, damit deine Einzelnachweise dem Leser angezeigt werden.

Wähle dir die Stelle aus, an der die Einzelnachweise angezeigt werden sollen (üblicherweise am Ende der Seite), und öffne dann das {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}-Menü und klicke anschließend auf das Symbol „{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}“ (drei Bücher), um die Liste hinzuzufügen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Wenn du mehrere Gruppen von Einzelnachweisen nutzt, was eher selten vorkommt, kannst du die gewünschte Gruppe im Fenster angeben. Nur die Einzelnachweise, die zu dieser Gruppe gehören, werden dann dort gezeigt werden.

Klicke zuletzt auf „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}“.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Einfache Einzelnachweisvorlagen verwenden ====
|-
| In deinem lokalen Wiki sind unter Umständen andere Quellenvorlagen in diesem Menü. (In der deutschen Wikipedia heißen diese beispielsweise „Webseite“ und „Literatur“.) So hast du einen schnellen Zugriff auf die am häufigsten verwendeten Quellenvorlagen deines Wikis. (Eine Anleitung, um weitere Quellenvorlagen in deinem lokalen Wiki hinzuzufügen, findet sich unter {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Wenn man auf ein Vorlagensymbol klickt, wie hier in der Abbildung „Cite book“, wird man zu einer Eingabemaske für diese Vorlage geführt. wichtige Felder sind dabei mit einem Sternchen markiert. Zudem werden zwar die üblichsten Felder aufgeführt, jedoch müssen nicht immer auch alle ausgefüllt werden.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Um weitere Parameter hinzuzufügen, scrolle ans Ende der Eingabemaske und klicke auf „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}“.&lt;/span&gt;

Klicke auf „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}“, wenn du fertig bist.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Bilder und andere Mediendateien bearbeiten ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Bilder bearbeiten ===
|-
| Zum Hinzufügen eines Bildes (oder einer anderen Mediendatei) zur Seite musst du auf das &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot;-Icon in der {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} (ein Bild mit Bergen) klicken. Das Bild wird da eingefügt, wo der Cursor gerade steht.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Das Klicken auf „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}“ öffnet ein Dialogfenster, das automatisch auf Wikimedia Commons nach Dateien sucht, die in Beziehung zur Seite stehen, die du gerade bearbeitest.

Durch das Ändern des Textes im Suchfeld kannst du nach anderen Mediadateien suchen.

Klicke auf ein Miniaturbild, um die Datei auszuwählen.

Dieses stellt das Bild auf die gerade bearbeitete Seite.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Nachdem das ausgewählte Bild auf der Seite eingefügt wurde, öffnet sich ein weiterer Dialog. Dieser Dialog erlaubt das Hinzufügen und die Veränderung der Bildunterschrift. Diese kann sowohl Formatierungen als auch Links enthalten.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Der Mediendialog erlaubt zudem das Hinzufügen von alternativen Unterschriften für Benutzer von Screenreadern oder Benutzern die die Anzeige von Bildern deaktiviert haben.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Im Fenster „{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}“ können zudem unterschiedliche Parameter des Bildes, wie Ausrichtung, Typ oder Größe, eingestellt werden.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Wenn du mit dem Bearbeiten fertig bist, klicke auf „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}“, um sie Seite weiter zu bearbeiten.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Zu einem bereits vorhandenen Bild können eine Bildunterschrift oder andere Parameter ergänzt oder verändert werden, in dem man auf das Bild und dann auf das darunter erscheinende {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}-Symbol klickt.

Die Größe eines bereits vorhandenen Bildes kann verändert werden indem man auf dieses klickt und dann das Symbol mit dem Doppelpfeil (links unten) kleiner oder größer zieht.

Man kann auch ein Bild per Drag-und-Drop an eine andere Stelle ziehen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== Bilder hochladen ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Du kannst Bilder entweder in einem Tab im Mediendialog, durch ziehen und ablegen einer Datei in den Editor oder durch einfügen eines Bildes aus der Zwischenablage hochladen
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Klicke den Reiter &quot;Hochladen&quot; und wähle ein Bild von deinem Rechner aus. Du kannst den Dateinamen eintippen oder ein Bild in den Kasten ziehen. Wenn du ein Bild per Drag-und-Drop direkt in den Editor gezogen oder eines aus der Zwischenablage eingefügt hast, öffnet sich dieser Tab automatisch.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Du musst das Bild beschreiben und Kategorien hinzufügen, damit andere es finden können.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Das Bild wird in die Seite eingefügt, wenn du fertig bist.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Galerien bearbeiten ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Um eine neue Bildgalerie hinzuzufügen klicke auf das Symbol „{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}“ (eine Gruppe von Photos) im Menü „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}“. (Wenn das Symbol nicht im Menü auftaucht, dann ist diese Funktionalität noch nicht in deinem lokalen Wiki implementiert.) 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Eine bereits vorhandene Galerie kann bearbeitet werden, in dem man zuerst auf die Galerie klickt und dann unten auf das Galerie-Symbol (eine Gruppe von Photos). Dies öffnet den Galerie-Editor der alle Bilder in der Galerie auflistet.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| Der Galerie-Editor ist derzeit ein einfacher Kasten, mit dem Sie bestehende Galerien mit Hilfe von Wikitext-Auszeichnungen bearbeiten können. Um ein neues Bild zu einer bestehenden Galerie hinzuzufügen, geben Sie den Dateinamen ein, gefolgt von einem Balken (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) und der Bildunterschrift für dieses Bild. Sie müssen jedes Bild in der Galerie in eine eigene Zeile setzen. Diese Liste kann bearbeitet werden um Bilder zu entfernen oder umzupositionieren, sowie die Bildunterschriften zu verändern.

Klicke auf „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}“ um den Galerie-Editor zu verlassen. Die Änderungen sollten nun sichtbar sein.

Denke daran, dass durch Verlassen des Galerie-Editors deine Änderungen nicht abschließend gespeichert werden. Wie bei allen Änderungen mit dem VisualEditor, musst du erst die komplette Seite speichern, damit die Änderungen aktiv werden.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Vorlagen bearbeiten ==
Mit dem mächtigen MediaWiki-Vorlagensystem lassen sich dynamische Inhalte, Text von anderen Seiten und vieles mehr einfügen. Eine ausführliche Erklärung und Beispiele findet sich auf der Hilfeseite [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Templates (Vorlagen)]]. 

Im VisualEditor können nach einer passenden Vorlage gesucht, ein Aufruf oder eine [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|Transklusion]] auf der zu bearbeitenden Seite hinzugefügt und, falls erforderlich, mit [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|Parameter]] benutzerdefinierte Inhalte hinzugefügt werden.

=== Neue Vorlage einfügen ===
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Um eine neue Vorlage auf einer Seite einzufügen, platziert man den Cursor an die Stelle, an der die Vorlage eingefügt werden soll. Öffne dann das {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}-Menü und wähle &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;. Alternativ können auch zwei geschweifte Klammern {{((}} eingegeben werden, um denselben Dialog zu öffnen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|Suchen Sie die Vorlage, die Sie einfügen möchten, indem Sie entweder ihren Namen oder ein entsprechendes Stichwort eingeben. Ergebnisse, die den Suchbegriff entweder im Namen oder in der Beschreibung enthalten, werden in einer Dropdown-Liste angezeigt. Dies sollte Ihnen helfen, eine relevante Vorlage zu finden, auch wenn Sie ihren genauen Namen nicht kennen.

Wenn Sie Schwierigkeiten haben, die gewünschte Vorlage mit Hilfe von Schlüsselwörtern zu finden, können Sie auf anderen Wikiseiten mit ähnlichem Inhalt nachsehen, welche Vorlagen verwendet werden. Wenn Sie den Namen der gewünschten Vorlage gefunden haben, können Sie ihn in dieses Feld eingeben, um ihn hier einzufügen.
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot des Suchfelds für Vorlagen im visuellen Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Außerdem kann eine Vorlage bearbeitet werden, die sich bereits auf der Seite befindet. Wenn du die zu bearbeitende Vorlage auswählst, erscheint sie in Blau und es erscheint ein Feld mit der Aufschrift „[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}“. Wähle dann den Link „{{int|vector-view-edit}}“ oder klicke doppelt auf die Vorlage selbst, um sie zu öffnen.
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Einige Vorlagen sind für die Leser der Seite nicht sichtbar. Im visuellen Editor werden solche versteckten Vorlagen weiterhin angezeigt, sodass du sie durch Anklicken bearbeiten oder löschen kannst. Der Name der Vorlage wird neben dem Puzzlesymbol angezeigt, wobei beide ausgegraut sind.
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Vorlagenparameter ===
|-
| Dieses Dialogfeld wird angezeigt, wenn Sie eine neue Vorlage hinzufügen oder eine bereits vorhandene Vorlage bearbeiten. Was Sie in dem Feld sehen, hängt davon ab, ob die betreffende Vorlage {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, hilfreiche Metadaten enthält, die von anderen Editoren hinzugefügt wurden, um die Bearbeitung von Vorlagen im visuellen Editor zu erleichtern.

Wenn eine Vorlage TemplateData enthält, kann der VisualEditor diese verwenden, um kommentierte Felder anzuzeigen, die Sie ausfüllen können.


Bei Vorlagen, die einige von der Gemeinschaft bereitgestellte TemplateData enthalten, zeigt der VisualEditor eine Liste der benannten Parameter und oft auch Beschreibungen und Anweisungen an, die die Bedeutung und das erforderliche Format für die Werte der einzelnen Parameter erklären.
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Sie können jeden optionalen Parameter (mit blauen Kontrollkästchen auf der linken Seite) deaktivieren. Wenn das Kontrollkästchen eines Parameters ausgegraut ist und nicht angeklickt werden kann, benötigt die Vorlage diesen Parameter, so dass er nicht deaktiviert werden kann.

Wenn Sie eine neue Vorlage einfügen, werden Sie feststellen, dass einige optionale Parameter vorausgewählt sind. Das bedeutet, dass der/die Autor(en) der Vorlage die Verwendung dieser Parameter empfiehlt/empfehlen. Es empfiehlt sich, alle Parameter, die in einer Vorlage verwendet werden, zu überprüfen, um sicherzustellen, dass Sie ihre Verwendung verstehen.

Wenn Sie auf einen nicht markierten Parameter klicken, wird er der Vorlage hinzugefügt. Wenn Sie auf einen bereits hinzugefügten Parameter klicken, gelangen Sie zum Eingabefeld des Parameters.

Einige Vorlagenparameter werden als &quot;veraltet&quot; angezeigt. Verwenden Sie keine veralteten Parameter, wenn Sie eine Vorlage einfügen. Sie sind nur für Sie sichtbar, weil diese Parameter auf älteren Seiten verwendet werden, in denen diese Vorlage enthalten war.
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
==== Hinzufügen undokumentierter Parameter ====
|-
| Wenn Sie eine Vorlage einfügen oder bearbeiten, deren Autor die Parameter nicht in TemplateData angegeben hat, handelt es sich um so genannte &quot;undokumentierte&quot; oder &quot;unbenannte Parameter&quot;. In diesen Fällen sollten Sie die Seite für die Vorlage selbst konsultieren. Dort können Sie lernen, wie man alle Parameter der Vorlage richtig einsetzt und mit ihnen arbeitet. Dazu gehört auch, dass Sie die genauen Namen der Parameter lernen, wie sie vom Autor der Vorlage geschrieben wurden.  

Wenn Sie in der Dokumentation feststellen, dass die Vorlage Parameter ohne Namen erwartet, geben Sie Zahlen als Platzhalter für die Parameternamen ein, indem Sie die undokumentierte Parametereingabe verwenden, und fügen Sie dann wie gewohnt Text zu den Werten hinzu, die Sie angeben möchten. 

Beispiel:
* erster unbenannter Parameter: &quot;1&quot;
* Wert des ersten unbenannten Parameters: &quot;en_US&quot;
* zweiter unbenannter Parameter: &quot;2&quot;
* Wert des zweiten unbenannten Parameters: &quot;ja&quot;

Wenn Sie versehentlich nicht vorhandene, falsch geschriebene oder fehlerhafte Parameter eingeben, werden die Werte, die Sie für diese Parameter eingeben, nicht auf der Seite angezeigt, die Sie gerade bearbeiten. 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
==== Autogenerierte Parameter ====
|-
| In diesem Beispiel fehlen der betreffenden Vorlage die TemplateData, aber es war möglich, die Parameter automatisch zu generieren. Das bedeutet, dass die undokumentierten Parameter bereits für Sie hinzugefügt wurden, aber die Namen sind möglicherweise nicht leicht verständlich und der Dialog kann keine Anweisungen oder Beschreibungen anzeigen. Das Dialogfeld enthält einen Link zur Dokumentation der Vorlage, der Ihnen helfen soll, die verschiedenen Parameter der Vorlage zu ermitteln und auszufüllen.
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
==== Bearbeiten von mehrteiligem Vorlageninhalt ====
|-
| Während der Bearbeitung können Sie Vorlageninhalte öffnen, die aus mehreren Vorlagen oder einer einzelnen Vorlage bestehen, die mit einem Wikitext verknüpft ist. Während der Bearbeitung können Sie Vorlageninhalte öffnen, die aus mehreren Vorlagen oder einer einzelnen Vorlage bestehen, die mit einem Wikitext verknüpft ist. In diesem Fall lassen sich die Vorlagen besser als gestapelt oder verbunden darstellen. 

Diese Inhalte enthalten häufig &quot;unausgewogene Vorlagen&quot;, d. h. Vorlagen, die für sich genommen unvollständig sind und mit einem Wikitext oder einer anderen Vorlage kombiniert werden müssen, um zu funktionieren. 

Diese zusammenhängenden Teile des Vorlageninhalts müssen in wikitext erstellt werden, können aber im VisualEditor bearbeitet werden. In diesen Fällen wird oben im Dialogfeld ein Hinweis angezeigt, um die Situation zu signalisieren, und unten in der Seitenleiste wird eine spezielle Symbolleiste eingeblendet. Dort können Sie über die Icon-Schaltflächen weitere Vorlagen und zusätzlichen Wikitext hinzufügen, Elemente löschen oder deren Reihenfolge ändern.

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
==== Verschachtelte Vorlagen ====
|-
| Schablonen können andere Schablonen als Wert für Parameter enthalten. Sie erkennen dies daran, dass ein Parameter, dessen Wert die doppelten geschweiften Klammern &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; enthält, eine Vorlage bezeichnet. 

Der VisualEditor kann diese Vorlage nicht innerhalb einer Vorlage (einer verschachtelten Vorlage) mit der benutzerfreundlichen Oberfläche des Editors darstellen. Wenn Sie also selbst eine Vorlage verschachteln wollen, müssen Sie wissen, wie Sie die Vorlage von Hand in wikitext in das entsprechende Parameterfeld einfügen.
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Abschluss der Bearbeitung ===
|-
| Wenn Sie die Bearbeitung einer Vorlage abgeschlossen haben, können Sie auf &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; klicken. Dann können Sie eine Vorschau Ihrer Bearbeitung anzeigen und sicherstellen, dass sie so aussieht, wie Sie es wünschen und erwarten.

Möglicherweise wird auch eine Fehlermeldung angezeigt, bei der es sich (wie bei den anderen oben genannten TemplateData) um von der Gemeinschaft bereitgestellte Inhalte handelt, die unterschiedlich nützlich sein können.
Möglicherweise müssen Sie die Dokumentation der Vorlage konsultieren, um einigen Fehlern auf den Grund zu gehen.
Wenn Sie immer noch Probleme haben, können Sie Ihr Problem auf der Diskussionsseite der Vorlage schildern.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Entfernen einer Vorlage ===
|-
| Um eine Vorlage im VisualEditor zu entfernen, klicken Sie auf das Vorlagenfeld. Drücken Sie die &quot;Entf&quot;- oder &quot;Backspace&quot;-Taste auf Ihrer Tastatur. Die Vorlage wird von der Seite verschwinden.
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|Entfernen einer Vorlage im VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Bearbeitung auf dem Handy ===
|-
| Wenn Sie eine Vorlage auf einer Seite mit dem VisualEditor auf einem mobilen Gerät bearbeiten, werden Sie feststellen, dass die Seitenleiste zunächst ausgeblendet ist. Sie können sie sichtbar machen, indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche &quot;Optionen ein-/ausblenden&quot; klicken.

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|Bearbeiten einer Vorlage auf dem Handy mit dem VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Vorlagen substituieren ===
|-
| Wenn Sie eine Vorlage in eine Wikiseite einfügen, werden ihr Inhalt und ihr Aussehen jedes Mal, wenn die Seite geladen wird, auf der Grundlage des Vorlagencodes und der Werte ihrer Parameter neu bewertet. Das heißt, wenn jemand den Code einer Vorlage aktualisiert, wird jede Seite, die diese Vorlage verwendet, ebenfalls aktualisiert, wenn sie veröffentlicht wird.

Es gibt aber noch eine andere, weit weniger verbreitete Möglichkeit, Vorlagen zu verwenden, nämlich die [[w:Hilfe:Substitution|Substitution]] einer Vorlage.
Auf diese Weise wird der Inhalt der Vorlage dauerhaft so übernommen, wie er zum Zeitpunkt des Einfügens erscheint. Er wird nicht aktualisiert, wenn der Vorlagencode später geändert wird.

Die meisten Nutzer werden nie auf die Substitution zurückgreifen müssen.
Die Ersetzung ist in der Regel nur dann sinnvoll, wenn Sie das genaue Erscheinungsbild einer Version einer Vorlage erfassen müssen, z. B. wenn der Inhalt gerade entwickelt wird und bewertet werden muss.

Um eine Vorlage im VisualEditor zu ersetzen, fügen Sie eine Vorlage mit der Namenssyntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;Vorlagenname&gt;&lt;/code&gt; ein.
(Die Autovervollständigung funktioniert in diesem Fall nicht.)
Drücken Sie dann auf die blaue Schaltfläche &quot;Vorlage hinzufügen&quot;.

Wenn Sie fertig sind, klicken Sie auf &quot;Einfügen&quot;, um den Inhalt der Vorlage so einzufügen, wie Sie ihn sehen.
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Listen bearbeiten ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Du kannst mit dem VisualEditor Listen erstellen oder das Format bestehender Listen verändern. Es gibt zwei Arten von Listen: Liten mit Aufzählungszeichen (unsortiert) und nummerierte Listen (sortiert).

Um eine neue Liste zu erstellen, klickst du einfach einen der beiden Menueinträge an, die hier gezeigt werden. Oder, falls du eingegebenen Text in eine Liste verwandeln willst, markiere den entsprechenden Text (mehrzeilig) im Editor und klicke dann auf einen der Menueinträge.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Hier siehst du zwei Beispiele für eine Liste mit Aufzählungszeichen (unsortiert) und eine nummerierte Liste (sortiert).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Wenn du die Einrückung (Einzug) einer bestehenden Liste verändern möchtest, markiere den Teil der Liste, welchen du verändern willst.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Dann kannst du über das Menu oder die Tabulator-Taste den Einzug verändern. (Die Tabulator-Taste vergrößert den Einzug; beim gleichzeitigen Drücken der Umschalttaste mit der Tabulator-Taste wird der Einzug verringert.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| So sieht eine Liste mit vergrößertem Einzug aus.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| In einer Liste können auch Nummern (sortiert) und Aufzählungszeichen (unsortiert) kombiniert werden, wenn die Einträge unterschiedliche Einrückung haben.
|}

== Tabellen bearbeiten ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Du kannst den VisualEditor benutzen, um Tabellen einzufügen und zu bearbeiten.

Du kannst sogar eine Tabelle importieren, indem du eine .csv-Datei von deinem Rechner in das Hauptbearbeitungsfenster ziehst.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Wenn du auf „Tabelle“ in dem „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}“-Menü klickst, fügt der VisualEditor eine leere Tabelle mit vier Zeilen und vier Spalten ein.

Es wird dann ein „Tabellen“-Menü angezeigt. Über dieses Menü kannst du einen Titel über der Tabelle einfügen
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Um eine Zelle auszuwählen, klicke sie ein Mal an.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Um den Inhalt einer Zelle zu bearbeiten (z.B. um Inhalt einzufügen oder einen Fehler zu korrigieren), klicke sie zwei Mal an. Du kannst auch die Zelle auswählen und dann die Eingabe-Taste (Return) drücken.

Um die Bearbeitung der Zelle abzuschließen, klicke irgendwo außerhalb der Zelle.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| Sie können eine Spalte oder eine Zeile hinzufügen, verschieben oder löschen.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Du kannst Zellen verbinden: Wähle sie aus und klicke bei „Zellen zusammenführen“ auf „Verbinden“.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Wenn du Zellen verbindest, wird nur der Inhalt einer Zelle behalten; etwaiger Inhalt der anderen Zellen wird dabei gelöscht. Wurde etwas versehentlich gelöscht, kannst du die Schaltfläche „Rückgängig“ in der Toolbar verwenden, den Inhalt verschieben oder kopieren und dann die Zellen erneut verbinden.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Du kannst Zellen, die zuvor verbunden wurden, wieder teilen. Alle Inhalte, die in der verbundenen Zelle waren, werden beim Teilen in der ersten Zelle bleiben. Du kannst dann Text ausschneiden und in andere Zellen einfügen, falls du möchtest.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Kategorien bearbeiten ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| Um die Kategorien zu Bearbeiten klicke im Menü „{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}“ auf die „{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}“-Schaltfläche.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Ein Klick auf „{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}“ öffnet ein Dialogfenster, in dem die vorhandenen Kategorien aufgelistet sind und das es dir ermöglicht, neue hinzuzufügen und vorhandene zu löschen.

Dort gibt es auch die Möglichkeit, den (Standard-)[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|Sortierschlüssel]] der Seite zu ändern, der beeinflusst, an welcher Stelle der Artikel in den Kategorien aufgeführt wird.

Beispielsweise ist beim Artikel „Konrad Adenauer“ die Standardsortierung „Adenauer, Konrad“ damit dieser in der Kategorie „Bundeskanzler (Deutschland)“ unter A und nicht unter K geführt wird.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Um eine neue Kategorie hinzuzufügen, gib ihren Namen in das Feld &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}&quot; ein. Während der Eingabe wird der VisualEditor passende Treffer auf vorhandene Kategorien anzeigen. Du kannst entweder eine eine bestehende Kategorie auswählen oder eine neue hinzufügen. (Solange die neue Kategorie noch keine eigene Kategorienseite besitzt, wird diese mit einem roten Link aufgeführt.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Um eine bestehende Kategorie zu entfernen, klicke sie an und dann in dem sich öffnenden Dialog auf „{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}“ (einen Abfalleimer).

Durch einen Klick auf eine Kategorie kann der Sortierschlüssel für diese spezifische Kategorie festgelegt werden. Er überschreibt dann den allgemeinen Sortierschlüssel.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Wenn du mit dem Bearbeiten der Kategorien fertig bist, klicke auf „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}“, um zum Seiteneditor zurückzukehren.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Seiteneinstellungen bearbeiten ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| Um die Einstellungen einer Seite zu bearbeiten öffne per Klick das Pulldown-Menü „{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}“ in der Werkzeugleiste und klicke auf die „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}“-Schaltfläche.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}“ öffnet einen Dialog mit mehreren Optionen.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Um diese Seite auf eine andere weiterleiten zu lassen setzte ein Häkchen bei „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}“ und gebe dann den Namen der Zielseite ein auf die der Leser geführt werden soll, wenn er den Namen der Seite die gerade bearbeitet wird eingibt.

Am Ende ist ein Option um zu verhindern, dass Seitenumbenennungen diese Weiterleitung aktualisieren. Diese wird jedoch nur in den seltensten Fällen benötigt.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Mit diesen drei Schaltflächen kann bestimmt werden, ob die Seite ein Inhaltsverzeichnis aufführt. Die Standardeinstellung ist „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}“ bei der das Inhaltsverzeichnis angezeigt wird, wenn mindestens drei Überschriften vorhanden sind.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Um zu verhindern, dass Bearbeiten-Links neben den Überschriften angezeigt werden, wähle diese Schaltfläche an.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Wenn du mit dem Bearbeiten von {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} fertig bist, klicke auf „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}“, um zum Seiteneditor zurückzukehren.
|}

== Bearbeitung von Karten ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Sie können Karten hinzufügen und ändern. Siehe {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Mathematische Formeln bearbeiten ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Um eine Vorlage auf der Seite einzufügen, kannst du den Cursor an die gewünschte Stelle setzen und anschließend auf „{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}“ (''Σ'') im Menü „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}“ klicken.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Es öffnet sich ein Fenster in dem die Formel in LaTeX-Syntax eingegeben werden kann. Der VisualEditor wird die Formel während des Schreibens laufend aktualisieren, so dass man sofort das Ergebnis sehen kann. Ist die Formel fertig, klick auf „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}“.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Um eine bereits vorhandene mathematische Formel zu bearbeiten, klicke auf diese und dann auf das ''Σ''-Symbol um das Formelfenster aufzurufen in dem die Änderungen vorgenommen werden können.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Mathematische Formeln können innerhalb des Texts („inline“) oder als separater, zentrierter Absatz („Block“) angezeigt werden.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Musiknoten bearbeiten ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Um einer Seite eine neue Musiknotation hinzuzufügen, setzen Sie den Cursor an die Stelle, an der die Musiknotation eingefügt werden soll. Wählen Sie dann aus dem Menü &quot;Einfügen&quot; in der Symbolleiste die Option &quot;Musikalische Notation&quot;.

Um eine vorhandene Notation auf der Seite zu bearbeiten, drücken Sie doppelt auf sie.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Dies öffnet den Dialog &quot;Musikalische Notation&quot;. Hier kann die Notation nach Tonleiter bearbeitet werden, entweder im ABC- oder im Lilypond-Format. Sie können die Notation auch mit einer Audio- oder MIDI-Datei verknüpfen. Wenn Sie fertig sind, klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche &quot;Fertig&quot;, um den Dialog zu schließen und Ihre Änderungen zu veröffentlichen.
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Gedichte und andere spezielle Elemente bearbeiten ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Manche Elemente, wie zum Beispiel assoziative Listen und Gedichte  werden vom VisualEditor derzeit noch nicht vollständig unterstützt.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| In den meisten Fällen können bereits vorhandene Elemente bearbeitet, jedoch keine neuen eingefügt werden.

Bis diese voll unterstützt werden, kannst du sie von anderen Seiten kopieren oder den Wikitext direkt bearbeiten.

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== Wechseln zwischen VisualEditor und Quelltext ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
Um vom visuellen Editor zum Wikitext-Editor zu wechseln, drücken Sie die Schaltfläche &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; ganz rechts in der Symbolleiste.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Du siehst dann die Änderungen im Code angezeigt. (Falls du auf „Änderungen verwerfen“ geklickt hast, siehst du einfach das Eingabefeld für den Quelltext (Wikitext).)

Scrolle nach unten, bis du das Eingabefeld für den Quelltext (Wikitext) siehst. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
Du kannst auch von der Quelltextbearbeitung zum VisualEditor wechseln. Hierfür klicke auf die Schaltfläche mit dem Bleistift rechts in der Werkzeugleiste.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Tastenkürzel ==

Viele Benutzer sind es gewöhnt, Wikitextformatierungen direkt einzugeben, insbesondere Fett-/Kursivschrift und Wikilinks. Die [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Tastenkombinationen]] erlauben das schnelle Einfügen ähnlicher Formatierungen, ohne dafür die Werkzeugleistensymbole verwenden zu müssen.
Hier sind einige Tastenkombinationen des VisualEditors gelistet:

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! Tastenkombination (PC)
! Funktion
! Tastenkombination (Mac)
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Fett
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Kursiv
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Link einfügen
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Ausschneiden
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Kopieren
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Einfügen
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Rückgängig machen
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>lh7ukeyca0jmzohc0mc5vdisjkuhjeb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/el</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>132950</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402764</id>
      <parentid>5346968</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:40:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="92342" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Αν θα θέλατε να δοκιμάσετε τον VisualEditor χωρίς να επεξεργαστείτε ένα λήμμα, [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} εδώ είναι μια σελίδα] όπου ελεύθερα μπορείτε να τον δοκιμάσετε.&lt;/span&gt; Δεν χρειάζεται να έχετε λογαριασμό για να χρησιμοποιήσετε τον VisualEditor σε αυτή τη σελίδα.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Άνοιγμα του VisualEditor ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| Για να επεξεργαστείτε μια σελίδα με τον οπτικό επεξεργαστή, πατήστε στην καρτέλα &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot;, στην κορυφή της σελίδας.

Το άνοιγμα της σελίδας για επεξεργασία μπορεί να διαρκέσει μερικά δευτερόλεπτα ή και περισσότερο αν η σελίδα είναι πολύ μεγάλη.

Πατώντας στην καρτέλα &quot;{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}&quot; θα ανοίξει ο κλασικός επεξεργαστής κώδικα wiki.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Μπορείτε επίσης να ανοίξετε τον οπτικό επεξεργαστή με πάτημα στον σύνδεσμο &quot;{{int|editsection}}&quot; σε οποιαδήποτε ενότητα.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Ξεκινώντας: η μπάρα εργαλείων του VisualEditor ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Στιγμιότυπο της μπάρας εργαλείων του οπτικού επεξεργαστή]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | Η μπάρα εργαλείων του VisualEditor εμφανίζεται στην κορυφή της οθόνης όταν ξεκινάτε την επεξεργασία με τον VisualEditor. Περιλαμβάνει μερικά γνώριμα εικονίδια:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' και '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' των αλλαγών που έχετε κάνει.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Το πτυσσόμενο μενού '''Επικεφαλίδες''': επιτρέπει να αλλάξετε το πως μορφοποιείται η παράγραφος. Για να αλλάξετε τη μορφή μιας παραγράφου, πηγαίνετε τον δείκτη κειμένου στην παράγραφο και επιλέξτε ένα αντικείμενο από το μενού (δεν χρειάζεται να επισημάνετε κείμενο). Οι τίτλοι ενοτήτων είναι &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}&quot;, και οι υποενότητες είναι  &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}&quot;, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}&quot; κ.ο.κ. Η κανονική μορφή για κείμενο είναι &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Μορφοποίηση:''' Πατώντας στο «&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;» ανοίγει ένα μενού. 
* Το αντικείμενο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}&quot; ('''Α''') κάνει έντονο το επιλεγμένο κείμενο.
* Το αντικείμενο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}&quot; (''Α'') κάνει πλάγιο το επιλεγμένο κείμενο.
* Το αντικείμενο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) (εκθέτης) κάνει το επιλεγμένο κείμενο μικρότερο από το περιβάλλον κείμενο και είναι ελαφρώς ψηλότερα από το περιβάλλον κείμενο.
* Το αντικείμενο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) (δείκτης) κάνει το επιλεγμένο κείμενο μικρότερο από το περιβάλλον κείμενο και το τοποθετεί ελαφρώς χαμηλότερα από το περιβάλλον κείμενο.
* Το αντικείμενο {{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;s&gt;Α&lt;/s&gt;) προσθέτει μια γραμμή μέσα από το επιλεγμένο κείμενο.
* Το αντικείμενο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}&quot; (ένα σύνολο από κυματιστές αγκύλες: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) αλλάζει τη γραμματοσειρά του επιλεγμένου κειμένου σε γραμματοσειρά σταθερού πλάτους, που το ξεχωρίζει από το περιβάλλον κείμενο (το οποίο χρησιμοποιεί αναλογικά διαστήματα).
* Το αντικείμενο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;u&gt;Α&lt;/u&gt;) προσθέτει μια συμπαγή γραμμή κάτω από το επιλεγμένο κείμενο.
* Το αντικείμενο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}&quot; (文A) επιτρέπει να επισημάνετε την γλώσσα (για παράδειγμα, Ιαπωνικά) και την κατεύθυνση (για παράδειγμα, δεξιά-προς-αριστερά) του επιλεγμένου κειμένου.
* Το τελικό αντικείμενο ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), που καλείται &quot;{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}&quot;, αφαιρεί όλες τις μορφοποιήσεις χαρακτήρων από το επιλεγμένο κείμενο, συμπεριλαμβανομένων των συνδέσμων.

Αν δεν έχετε επιλέξει κανένα κείμενο, τότε όταν πατήσετε το «&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;» για να ανοίξετε το μενού, και μετά επιλέξετε ένα αντικείμενο, αυτή η μορφοποίηση θα εφαρμοστεί στο κείμενο που αρχίσατε να πληκτρολογείτε, από όπου ήταν τοποθετημένος ο δρομέας σας.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Εργαλείο συνδέσμων:''' Το εικονίδιο αλυσίδα είναι το  [[#Editing links|εργαλείο συνδέσμων]]. Πατώντας σε αυτό (συνήθως αφού πρώτα έχετε επιλέξει κάποιο κείμενο) ανοίγει τον [[#Editing links|διάλογο συνδέσμου]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''Μενού {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}:''' Το μενού {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} χρησιμοποιείται για να προστεθούν εντός κειμένου παραπομπές (επίσης λέγονται &quot;υποσημειώσεις&quot; ή &quot;αναφορές&quot;). Όλα τα εγχειρήματα έχουν πρόσβαση σε βασική μορφοποίηση αναφορών και την δυνατότητα για επαναχρησιμοποίησης των παραπομπών, χρησιμοποιώντας αυτό το μενού. Αυτό το μενού επίσης δίνει γρήγορη πρόσβαση σε τοπικά πρότυπα παραπομπών, αν αυτά είναι ενεργοποιημένα στο wiki σας.

(Οδηγίες για την προσθήκη τοπικών προτύπων παραπομπών στο μενού {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} σε κάποιο συγκεκριμένο wiki είναι διαθέσιμες στην {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''Κουμπί {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Αν η υπηρεσία citoid είναι ενεργοποιημένη στο wiki σας, τότε θα δείτε ένα κουμπί {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} αντί το μενού {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

Η υπηρεσία citoid προσπαθεί να συμπληρώσει, αυτόματα, πρότυπα παραπομπών.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Λίστες και εσοχή:''' Τα πρώτα δύο αντικείμενα σας επιτρέπουν να μορφοποιήσετε κείμενο είτε ως &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}&quot; είτε &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}&quot;. Τα τελευταία δύο αντικείμενα σας επιτρέπουν να μειώσετε ή αυξήσετε το επίπεδο εσοχής των αντικειμένων της λίστας.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' Το μενού &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; μπορεί να είναι διαφορετικό σε μερικά εγχειρήματα. Παρακάτω είναι μια λίστα με '''όλες''' τις επιλογές που μπορεί να εμφανίζονται.
* Το εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; (μια εικόνα με βουνά) ανοίγει τον [[#Editing images and other media files|διάλογο πολυμέσων]].
* Το εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot; (ένα κομμάτι παζλ) σας επιτρέπει να [[#Editing templates|επεξεργαστείτε πρότυπα]].
* Το αντικείμενο «Πίνακας» σας επιτρέπει να εισαγάγετε ένα πίνακα.
* Το εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}&quot; (ένα μπαλόνι ομιλίας) σας επιτρέπει να εισάγετε σχόλια που δεν είναι ορατά στους αναγνώστες. Αυτά τα σχόλια μπορούν να διαβαστούν μόνο σε λειτουργία επεξεργασίας, όπου επισημαίνονται από ένα εικονίδιο με θαυμαστικό. Στη λειτουργία επεξεργασίας, πατώντας στο εικονίδιο με θαυμαστικό σας επιτρέπει να επεξεργαστείτε ή να διαγράψετε το σχόλιο.
* Το εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}&quot; (ένα σύμβολο [[:w:el:ανκχ|ανκχ]] - ☥) σας επιτρέπει να εισάγετε ιερογλυφικά. (Δείτε παρακάτω.)
* Το αντικείμενο «Code block» σας επιτρέπει να εισαγάγετε κώδικα.
* Το αντικείμενο «Musical notation» σας επιτρέπει να εισαγάγετε μουσική σημειογραφία.
* Το εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (ένα σύνολο φωτογραφιών) σας επιτρέπει να εισαγάγετε μια πινακοθήκη στη σελίδα.
* Το εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (Σ) ανοίγει τον [[#Editing mathematical formulae|διάλογο προσθήκης μαθηματικών τύπων]].
* Το αντικείμενο «Γράφημα» σας επιτρέπει να εισαγάγετε ένα γράφημα.
* Το αντικείμενο «{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}» σας επιτρέπει να εισαγάγετε την υπογραφή που χρησιμοποιείτε στο εγχείρημα. Θα είναι γκριζαρισμένο (μη επιλεγόμενο) όταν επεξεργάζεστε ένα τύπο σελίδας (ένα «namespace», «ομάδα σελίδων»), όπως ένα λήμμα, όπου δεν θα πρέπει να εισάγονται υπογραφές.
* Το εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (τρία βιβλία) ανοίγει ένα διάλογο στον οποίο μπορείτε να ορίσετε το πού θα δει τις παραπομπές ο αναγνώστης. Συνήθως αυτό χρειάζεται να γίνει μόνο μια φορά σε μια σελίδα.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Εισαγωγή ειδικών χαρακτήρων:''' Το εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}&quot; (Ω) είναι δίπλα στο μενού &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. Όταν πατηθεί, εμφανίζει ένα διάλογο με πολλούς ειδικούς χαρακτήρες. Πατώντας σε κάποιο χαρακτήρα, τον προσθέτετε στο κείμενο. Αυτοί οι ειδικοί χαρακτήρες περιλαμβάνουν κάποια κοινά σύμβολα, διακριτικά, και μαθηματικά σύμβολα. (Αυτή η λίστα μπορεί να προσαρμοστεί τοπικά. Δείτε {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} για οδηγίες.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| Το κουμπί &quot;Ειδοποιήσεις επεξεργασίας&quot; εμφανίζει οποιεσδήποτε ειδοποιήσεις για την σελίδα.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Το μενού '''$pagemenu''' βρίσκεται αριστερά από το κουμπί ''$save'' και το μενού ''Εναλλαγή επεξεργαστή''. Σε αυτό το μενού υπάρχει ένα κουμπί για να ανοίξετε το διάλογο '''Επιλογές''' με τις ακόλουθες (αριστερά) καρτέλες:&lt;/span&gt;

* Το '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' σας επιτρέπει να προσθέσετε κατηγορίες σε αυτή τη σελίδα και να προσαρμόσετε το πως ταξινομείται η σελίδα, όταν εμφανίζεται εντός μιας κατηγορίας ορίζοντας ένα διαφορετικό κλειδί ταξινόμησης.
* Το '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' σάς επιτρέπει να κάνετε τη σελίδα ανακατεύθυνση και να προσαρμόσετε τις επιλογές αυτής της ανακατεύθυνσης, να προσαρμόσετε τις ρυθμίσεις σχετικά με την εμφάνιση του Πίνακα Περιεχομένων, να απενεργοποιήσετε τους συνδέσμους επεξεργασίας δίπλα σε κάθε επικεφαλίδα και να ορίσετε τη σελίδα ως σελίδα αποσαφήνισης.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Το '''Προηγμένες ρυθμίσεις''' σας επιτρέπει να προσαρμόσετε τις ρυθμίσεις σχετικά με την ευρετηρίαση της σελίδας από τις μηχανές αναζήτησης, την εμφάνιση μιας καρτέλας για προσθήκη νέας ενότητας, και τον εμφανιζόμενο τίτλο.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' που εμφανίζει μια λίστα σελίδων σε άλλες γλώσσες που συνδέονται με αυτήν τη σελίδα.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Χρησιμοποιούμενα πρότυπα''' δείχνει μια λίστα συνδέσμων προς κάθε πρότυπο που χρησιμοποιείται σε αυτήν τη σελίδα.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Οι καρτέλες του διαλόγου Επιλογές εμφανίζονται επίσης στο μενού $pagemenu και μπορούν να ανοίξουν κάνοντας κλικ σε αυτό.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Επιπλέον, το μενού $pagemenu περιέχει το κουμπί '''Προβολή ως δεξιά προς τα αριστερά''' και το κουμπί '''[[$1|Εύρεση και αντικατάσταση]]''' που ανοίγει ένα παράθυρο διαλόγου όπου μπορείτε να εισαγάγετε χαρακτήρες, όρους ή regular expressions που αναζητάτε και αυτά που θα τα αντικαταστήσουν, μαζί με διάφορα κουμπιά για επιλογές.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Το κουμπί '''εναλλαγής σε επεξεργασία κώδικα''' είναι δίπλα στο κουμπί '''$save''''. Επιτρέπει να αλλάξετε στον επεξεργαστή κώδικα wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Δημοσίευση αλλαγών ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Όταν έχετε τελειώσει την επεξεργασία, πατήστε στο μπλε κουμπί «{{int|publishchanges}}» στη μπάρα εργαλείων. Αν δεν έχουν γίνει αλλαγές, το κουμπί θα είναι απενεργοποιημένο (γκριζαρισμένο). Για να ακυρώσετε όλες τις αλλαγές στην επεξεργασία σας, κλείστε το παράθυρο του φυλλομετρητή (browser) σας, ή πατήστε στην καρτέλα «{{int|vector-view-view}}» πάνω από τη μπάρα εργαλείων επεξεργασίας.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Πατώντας το μπλε κουμπί «{{int|publishchanges-start}}» ανοίγει ένας μικρός διάλογος. Μπορείτε να δώσετε σύντομη περιγραφή των ενεργειών σας, να σημάνετε την επεξεργασία σας ως μικρή, και να προσθέσετε τη σελίδα στην $watchlist σας. Το πλαίσιο για τη σύνοψη είναι το ισοδύναμο με το πεδίο {{int|summary}} στον επεξεργαστή κώδικα wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

Πριν αποθηκεύσετε τις αλλαγές σας, μπορείτε να επιθεωρήσετε τις αλλαγές σας χρησιμοποιώντας το κουμπί &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;, για να σιγουρευτείτε ότι δουλεύουν όπως πρέπει. Αυτό είναι παρόμοιο με το κουμπί &quot;{{int|showdiff}}&quot; στον επεξεργαστή πηγαίου κώδικα.

Το κουμπί «{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}» σας επιστρέφει στην σελίδα που επεξεργάζεστε. Μπορείτε να δημοσιεύσετε όλες τις αλλαγές σας αργότερα.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Επεξεργασία συνδέσμων ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Σύνδεσμοι μπορούν να προστίθενται μέσω του εικονιδίου &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; (αλυσίδα) στη μπάρα επεξεργασίας, ή χρησιμοποιώντας τη συντόμευση {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (ή, σε Mac, την {{Key press|Command|K}}).

Αν επιλέξετε (μαρκάρετε) κείμενο και πατήσετε το κουμπί &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot;, θα χρησιμοποιηθεί για τη δημιουργεία ενός συνδέσμου. Για σύνδεσμο που περιλαμβάνει μόνο μία λέξη, μπορείτε είτε να επιλέξετε εκείνη τη λέξη ή να τοποθετήσετε απλώς τον δείκτη εντός της λέξης.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Είτε χρησιμοποιήσετε το κουμπί είτε τη συντόμευση, θα ανοίξει ένας διάλογος στον οποίο μπορείτε να πληκτρολογήσετε τον σύνδεσμο.
Το εργαλείο συνδέσμων θα προσπαθήσει να βοηθήσει με '''εσωτερικούς''' συνδέσμους αναζητώντας για πιθανά ταιριάσματα.
Όταν θα έχετε γράψει ή επιλέξει τον σύνδεσμο, ολοκληρώνετε την διαδικασία σύνδεσης με το να πατήσετε {{key press|Enter}}, ή να πατήσετε το κουμπί &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot;. Ο σύνδεσμός σας τώρα θα εμφανίζεται στη σελίδα, αλλά όπως και με άλλες αλλαγές στην σελίδα, δεν θα έχει δημοσιευτεί μέχρι να δημοσιεύσετε ''ολόκληρη'' τη σελίδα.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Η διαδικασία για να εισάγετε σύνδεσμο προς σελίδα σε άλλο ιστότοπο είναι παρόμοια: Επιλέξτε την καρτέλα «{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}», και βάλτε το URL στο πεδίο.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Εξωτερικοί σύνδεσμοι χωρίς τίτλους φαίνονται κάπως έτσι: [http://example.com]. Μπορείτε να προσθέσετε αυτούς τοποθετώντας τον κέρσορα έξω από οποιαδήποτε λέξη (π.χ. μετά από ένα διάστημα). Ανοίξτε το εργαλείο συνδέσμων πατώντας στο κουμπί ή πατώντας τα πλήκτρα συντόμευσης. Πληκτρολογήστε τη διεύθυνση (URL) στο κουτί, και πατήστε το κουμπί &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; για να εισαγάγετε τον σύνδεσμο.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Για να αλλάξετε ή να αφαιρέσετε ένα υπάρχοντα σύνδεσμο, πατήστε στο κείμενο για αυτό το σύνδεσμο, μετά πατήστε το εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; που εμφανίζεται κοντά του. Ο διάλογος θα εμφανιστεί, για επεξεργασία. (Μπορείτε επίσης να εμφανίσετε το διάλογο με τη συντόμευση πληκτρολογίου {{key press|Ctrl|K}}.) Όταν ένας σύνδεσμος είναι επιλεγμένος, εμφανίζεται σε μπλε πλαίσιο.

Στον διάλογο επεξεργασίας συνδέσμου, μπορείτε μετά να αλλάξετε τον στόχο του συνδέσμου. Μπορείτε επίσης να αφαιρέσετε εντελώς τον σύνδεσμο, πατώντας το κουμπί &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; στην πάνω δεξιά γωνία του διαλόγου.
Μπορείτε επίσης να ανοίξετε τον στόχο του συνδέσμου σε άλλο παράθυρο, πατώντας στο αντίγραφο του συνδέσμου στο πλαίσιο διαλόγου. (Ίσως θέλετε να το κάνετε αυτό για να βεβαιωθείτε ότι ο εξωτερικός σύνδεσμος είναι σωστός).

Αν θέλετε να βγείτε από την ετικέτα συνδέσμου (το κείμενο εμφανίζεται ως σύνδεσμος) ή να συνεχίσετε να γράφετε μετά από αυτό το σύνδεσμο, μπορείτε να πατήσετε {{Key press|→}}:
* Πατώντας το μια φορά θα σας βγάλει από τον διάλογο επεξεργασίας συνδέσμου και θα βάλει τον κέρσορά σας στο τέλος του συνδεδεμένου στοιχείου (με μπλε πλαίσιο, για επεξεργασία του στοιχείου)
* Πατώντας το δυο φορές θα σας θα τοποθετήσει τον δρομέα σας μετά το συνδεδεμένο στοιχείο, έτοιμο για να γράψετε το υπόλοιπο κείμενό σας

Για να επεξεργαστείτε την ετικέτα συνδέσμου ενός υπάρχοντος συνδέσμου, πατήστε μέσα στην ετικέτα συνδέσμου και γράψτε μια νέα.
Αλλά αν θέλετε να αντικαταστήσετε ολόκληρη την ετικέτα, παρακαλούμε λάβετε υπόψη:

* Αν έχετε επιλέξει (επισημάνατε) ολόκληρη την ετικέτα συνδέσμου, ο σύνδεσμος θα διαγραφεί πατώντας οποιοδήποτε πλήκτρο.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Για να διατηρήσετε άμεσα το σύνδεσμο, μπορείτε να πατήσετε μέσα στην ετικέτα συνδέσμου, να χρησιμοποιήσετε τα πλήκτρα διαγραφής χωρίς να τα πατήσετε πέρα από όσο είναι απαραίτητο, και μια στενή μπλε περιοχή συνδέσμου θα παραμείνει εκεί.&lt;/span&gt; Τώρα μπορείτε να πληκτρολογήσετε μια νέα ετικέτα για τον διατηρηθέντα σύνδεσμο.
* Μπορείτε επίσης να [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|συνδέσετε σε κατηγορίες, αρχεία και περισσότερα]].
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Επεξεργασία παραπομπών ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Βοήθεια στη χρήση προτύπων παραπομπών]] ή [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Βοήθεια για τη χρήση του κουμπιού {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} του citoid]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== Διαπιστώνοντας ποιο σύστημα ισχύει ===
|-
| Το wiki σας μπορεί να χρησιμοποιεί ένα από τρία συστήματα υποσημειώσεων. Αυτό που φαίνεται δεξιά είναι το απλούστερο σύστημα, όπου το μενού &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; δεν περιλαμβάνει πρότυπα παραπομπών. Αν το wiki σας χρησιμοποιεί αυτό το σύστημα, τότε όλα όσα χρειάζεται να γνωρίζετε για υποσημειώσεις είναι σε αυτή τη σελίδα.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Το δεύτερο σύστημα έχει τον ίδιο τύπο μενού &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;, αλλά με διάφορα δημοφιλή πρότυπα παραπομπών για γρήγορη πρόσβαση. Αν το wiki σας χρησιμοποιεί αυτό το σύστημα, τότε θα βρείτε περισσότερες πληροφορίες στο {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Στο τρίτο σύστημα, μπορείτε να ξεκινήσετε ξανά πατώντας στο κουμπί Παραπομπή.&lt;/span&gt; Τότε ανοίγει το πλαίσιο διαλόγου, που περιλαμβάνει τη διαδικασία αυτόματης παραπομπής με τη χρήση της υπηρεσίας citoid. Αν το wiki σας χρησιμοποιεί αυτό το σύστημα, θα βρείτε περισσότερες πληροφορίες στο {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Διόρθωση υπάρχουσας παραπομπής ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Για να διορθώσετε μια υπάρχουσα παραπομπή, πατήστε την στο σημείο που αυτή βρίσκεται στο κείμενο (συνήθως ως αριθμός σε αγκύλες). Θα δείτε είτε ένα εικονίδιο &quot;$ref&quot; (σελιδοδείκτη) ή ένα εικονίδιο (και όνομα) προτύπου το οποίο είχε χρησιμοποιηθεί για να δημιουργηθεί αυτή η παραπομπή. Σε οποιαδήποτε περίπτωση, πατώντας στο εικονίδιο &quot;Επεξεργασία&quot; θα ανοίξει ένας διάλογος που σας επιτρέπει να επεξεργαστείτε την παραπομπή.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Για το εικονίδιο &quot;$ref&quot;, πατώντας &quot;Επεξεργασία&quot; ανοίγει ο διάλογος Παραπομπή. Για να αρχίσετε να αλλάζετε τις πληροφορίες παραπομπές, πατήστε επάνω του.&lt;/span&gt;

Πολλά wiki χρησιμοποιούν πρότυπα για να μορφοποιούν τις παραπομπές. Αν ένα πρότυπο χρησιμοποιείται στην παραπομπή σας, τότε όταν μετακινείτε τον δείκτη σας πάνω από τις πληροφορίες παραπομπής, όλες οι πληροφορίες σε εκείνο το πεδίο θα επισημανθούν.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Αν έχει χρησιμοποιηθεί πρότυπο και πατήσετε πάνω στις πληροφορίες παραπομπής, θα εμφανιστεί το εικονίδιο $template (κομμάτι παζλ) με κάποιες πληροφορίες. Πατήστε το κουμπί &quot;επεξεργασία&quot; για να επεξεργαστείτε το περιεχόμενο του προτύπου στον μίνι επεξεργαστή προτύπων.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Αν αυτό που εμφανίζεται όταν πατήσετε στην παραπομπή είναι ένα από τα διάφορα εικονίδια προτύπων για παραπομπές (ένα παράδειγμα είναι δεξιά), τότε πατώντας &quot;επεξεργασία&quot; θα ανοίξει ο διάλογος μίνι επεξεργαστή προτύπων.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Μέσα στον μίνι-επεξεργαστή προτύπων, μπορείτε να προσθέσετε ή να αφαιρέσετε περιεχόμενο σε παραμέτρους που έχουν ήδη χρησιμοποιηθεί ή να προσθέσετε καινούριες παραμέτρους. Μόνο οι παράμετροι που έχουν περιεχόμενο θα εμφανιστούν, αρχικά. Για να προσθέσετε παραμέτρους, πατήστε το κουμπί &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; στη βάση του παραθύρου του μίνι επεξεργαστή.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Πατήστε το &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; όταν έχετε τελειώσει. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Επαναχρησιμοποίηση υπάρχουσας παραπομπής ===
|-
| Αν η σελίδα περιέχει μια παραπομπή που ισχύει για το περιεχόμενο όπου θέλετε να βάλετε πηγή, τότε μπορείτε να επιλέξετε να επαναχρησιμοποιήσετε εκείνη την υπάρχουσα παραπομπή.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Για να επαναχρησιμοποιήσετε μια υπάρχουσα παραπομπή, τοποθετήστε τον δείκτη στο σημείο του κειμένου όπου θέλετε να την εισάγετε. Μετά πατήστε στο αντικείμενο «Εναχρησιμοποίηση παραπομπής» από το μενού «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}».
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(Σημείωση: Αν το wiki σας έχει το τρίτο σύστημα υποσημειώσεων που περιγράφεται παραπάνω, θα δείτε μια καρτέλα &quot;Επαναχρησιμοποίηση&quot;, σε ένα διάλογο, αντί του αντικειμένου &quot;Επαναχρησιμοποίηση&quot; στο μενού &quot;$cite&quot;.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Στον διάλογο {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}}, βρείτε από τη λίστα την παραπομπή που θέλετε να επαναχρησιμοποιήσετε και επιλέξτε την. Αν υπάρχουν πολλές παραπομπές, μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε το πλαίσιο αναζήτησης (με ετικέτα «{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}») έτσι ώστε να απεικονιστούν μόνο οι παραπομπές που περιλαμβάνουν συγκεκριμένο κείμενο.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Προσθήκη νέας παραπομπής ===
|-
| Για να προσθέσετε παραπομπή χρησιμοποιώντας το μενού «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}», τοποθετήστε τον κέρσορα εκεί που θέλετε να την προσθέσετε στο κείμενο. Μετά επιλέξτε τον κατάλληλο τύπο παραπομπής από το μενού.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Χρήση της επιλογής &quot;Βασικό&quot; για παραπομπές ====
|-
| Εδώ εμφανίζεται αυτό που θα δείτε αν επιλέξετε το αντικείμενο βασικών παραπομπών.  Στον επεξεργαστή παραπομπών, μπορείτε να προσθέσετε την παραπομπή σας μαζί με τη μορφοποίηση.

Μπορείτε να εντάξετε την παραπομπή σε κάποια ομάδα, αν και συνήθως αυτό το πεδίο παραμένει κενό.(Αυτή η δυνατότητα χρησιμεύει στην εμφάνιση ομάδων παραπομπών μέσω του εργαλείου &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot;.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Στον διάλογο Παραπομπή, αν θελήσετε να περιλάβετε κάποιο πρότυπο παραπομπών, ή οποιοδήποτε άλλο πρότυπο, στη νέα παραπομπή σας πατήστε στο εικονίδιο {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} (κομμάτι παζλ) στο μενού &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; της μπάρας εργαλείων του επεξεργαστή παραπομπών.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Έπειτα, αναζητήστε το πρότυπο που θέλετε να χρησιμοποιήσετε, προσθέστε το και επεξεργαστείτε το όπως θα κάνατε με οποιοδήποτε άλλο πρότυπο. (Δείτε την ενότητα [[#Editing templates|Επεξεργασία προτύπων]], παρακάτω, αν χρειάζεστε πληροφορίες για τα πρότυπα.)

Αφού έχετε τελειώσει την επεξεργασία του νέου προτύπου, πατήστε το &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; για να επιστρέψετε στον επεξεργαστή Παραπομπών και πατήστε ξανά το &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; για να επιστρέψετε στη σελίδα που επεξεργάζεστε.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Αν δεν προϋπάρχει κατάλογος παραπομπών στη σελίδα (αυτό συμβαίνει π.χ. αν εισάγετε την πρώτη παραπομπή της σελίδας), τότε, προκειμενου να εμφανιστούν οι παραπομπές, θα ορίσετε εδώ σε ποιό σημείο της σελίδας θα εμφανιστεί αυτός ο κατάλογος.

Τοποθετήστε τον δείκτη εκεί που θέλετε να εμφανίζεται ο κατάλογος παραπομπών (συνήθως στο τέλος της σελίδας), ανοίξτε το μενού &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; και πατήστε το εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (τρία βιβλία).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Αν χρησιμοποιείτε διάφορες ομάδες παραπομπών, κάτι που είναι σχετικά σπάνιο, μπορείτε να ορίσετε μια ομάδα σε αυτό το διάλογο. Μόνο οι παραπομπές που ανήκουν σε αυτή την ομάδα θα εμφανίζονται στη σελίδα στην θέση όπου τοποθετείτε την ομάδα.

Το τελικό βήμα στον διάλογο καταλόγου παραπομπών είναι να πατήσετε στο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Χρήση τυπικών προτύπων παραπομπών ====
|-
| Το τοπικό wiki σας μπορεί να έχει προσθέσει επιπλέον πρότυπα παραπομπών στο μενού &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;. Αν είναι έτσι, έχετε γρήγορη πρόσβαση σε μερικά από τα περισσότερο χρήσιμα πρότυπα παραπομπών στο wiki σας. (Οδηγίες για την προσθήκη επιπλέον προτύπων παραπομπών στο τοπικό σας wiki είναι διαθέσιμες στην {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Πατώντας ένα εικονίδιο προτύπου, όπως το &quot;Cite book&quot;, θα οδηγηθείτε  στον μίνι-επεξεργαστή για το πρότυπο που έχετε επιλέξει. Οι σημαντικές παράμετροι είναι μαρκαρισμένες με αστερίσκο. Αν και θα εμφανιστούν οι περισσότερο συνηθισμένες παράμετροι, δεν απαιτούνται όλες.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Για να προσθέσετε πρόσθετες παραμέτρους, κυλήστε κάτω στον μίνι-επεξεργαστή προτύπων και πατήστε στην επιλογή &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

Πατήστε στο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; όταν έχετε τελειώσει.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Επεξεργασία εικόνων και άλλων αρχείων πολυμέσων ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Επεξεργασία εικόνων ===
|-
| Για να προσθέσετε νέα εικόνα (ή άλλο τύπο αρχείου πολυμέσων) στη σελίδα, πατήστε στο εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; (εικόνα με βουνά) στο αναδυόμενο μενού &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. Η εικόνα θα προστεθεί εκεί όπου βρίσκεται ο δρομέας.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Πατώντας στο εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; ανοίγει ένας διαλόγος,ο οποίος κάνει αυτόματα αναζήτηση στα Wikimedia Commons και το τοπικό wiki για αρχεία πολυμέσων σχετιζόμενα με τη σελίδα που επεξεργάζεστε.

Μπορείτε να ψάξετε για άλλα αρχεία πολυμέσων αλλάζοντας το κείμενο στο κουτί αναζήτησης του διαλόγου.

Για να επιλέξετε ένα αρχείο πατήστε στη μικρογραφία του.

Αυτή η ενέργεια τοποθετεί την εικόνα στη σελίδα που επεξεργάζεστε.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Αφού η εικόνα που επιλέξατε εισαχθεί στην σελίδα, θα ανοίξει ένας άλλος διάλογος. Αυτός ο διάλογος σας επιτρέπει να προσθέσετε ή διορθώσετε την λεζάντα της εικόνας. Η λεζάντα μπορεί να περιέχει μορφοποίηση και συνδέσμους.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ο διάλογος πολυμέσων σας επιτρέπει επίσης να προσθέσετε εναλλακτικές λεζάντες, οι οποίες βοηθούν χρήστες που χρησιμοποιούν αναγνώστες οθόνης, ή που έχουν απενεργοποιημένη την εμφάνιση εικόνων.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Μπορείτε επίσης να ορίσετε διάφορες παραμέτρους για την εικόνα, στο παράθυρο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot;. Αυτές περιλαμβάνουν τη στοίχιση, τον τύπο και το μέγεθός της.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Όταν τελειώσετε, πατήστε το &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; για να κλείσετε τον διάλογο και να επιστρέψετε στον επεξεργαστή σελίδας.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Σε υπάρχουσα εικόνα, μπορείτε να προσθέσετε ή να επεξεργαστείτε τη λεζάντα ή άλλες ρυθμίσεις αν πατήσετε στην εικόνα και έπειτα πατήσετε στο εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; που εμφανίζεται πιο κάτω από την εικόνα.

Μπορείτε να αλλάξετε το μέγεθος υπάρχουσας εικόνας πατώντας σε αυτή και κινώντας το εικονίδιο αλλαγής μεγέθους (το βέλος με τις δύο αιχμές σε μια ή και τις δυο κάτω γωνίες).

Μπορείτε επίσης να σύρετε και να αφήσετε μια εικόνα σε οποιοδήποτε θέση, κάτω ή πάνω, στη σελίδα.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== Ανέβασμα εικόνων ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Μπορείτε να ανεβάσετε εικόνες από μια καρτέλα στο διάλογο πολυμέσων, ή σέρνοντας και αφήνοντας ένα αρχείο στον επεξεργαστή, ή επικολλώντας μια εικόνα από το clipboard σας.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Πατήστε την καρτέλα &quot;Επιφόρτωση&quot; και επιλέξτε μια εικόνα από τον υπολογιστή σας. Μπορείτε να γράψετε το όνομα αρχείου ή να τραβήξετε μια εικόνα στο πλαίσιο. Αν τραβήξατε και ρίξατε μια εικόνα απευθείας στον επεξεργαστή, ή επικολλήσατε μια από το πρόχειρό σας, αυτή η ετικέτα θα ανοίξει αυτόματα.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Χρειάζετε να περιγράψετε την εικόνα και να προσθέσετε κατηγορίες ώστε να μπορούν να τη βρουν και άλλοι άνθρωποι.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Η εικόνα θα εισαχθεί στη σελίδα όταν τελειώσετε.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Επεξεργασία πινακοθηκών ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Για να προσθέσετε νέα πινακοθήκη, πατήστε στο εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (ένα σύνολο φωτογραφιών) στο μενού &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; (αν δεν βλέπετε αυτό το εικονίδιο, τότε το wiki σας έχει αποφασίσει να καθυστερήσει την υλοποίηση αυτής της λειτουργίας στον οπτικό επεξεργαστή). 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Για να επεξεργαστείτε μια υπάρχουσα πινακοθήκη στον οπτικό επεξεργαστή, πατήστε σε αυτή την πινακοθήκη. Μετά, κοντά στη βάση της πινακοθήκης, πατήστε στο εικονίδιο πινακοθήκης (ένα σετ εικόνων). Θα εμφανιστεί ο επεξεργαστής πινακοθήκης με την πλήρη λίστα εικόνων που περιλαμβάνονται στην πινακοθήκη.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O επεξεργαστήw πινακοθήκης, επί του παρόντος, είναι ένα απλό κουτί που δουλεύει παρόμοια με τη σήμανση κώδικα wiki. Για να προσθέσετε εικόνες σε υπάρχουσα πινακοθήκη, πληκτρολογήστε το όνομα του αρχείου, ακολουθούμενο από μια κάθετη (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) και την λεζάντα που θα θέλατε για την εικόνα. Κάθε εικόνα στην πινακοθήκη θα πρέπει να έχει την δική της γραμμή.&lt;/span&gt; Μπορείτε επίσης να επεξεργαστείτε αυτή τη λίστα για να αφαιρέσετε ή να αναδιατάξετε εικόνες ή να τροποποιήσετε λεζάντες.

Όταν πατάτε το κουμπί «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}», βγαίνετε από τον επεξεργαστή πινακοθήκης. Τότε θα δείτε τις αλλαγές καθώς η πινακοθήκη θα απεικονίζεται με τον ίδιο τρόπο που θα τη βλέπουν οι αναγνώστες.

Να θυμάστε ότι βγαίνοντας από τον επεξεργαστή πινακοθήκης δεν δημοσιεύονται οι αλλαγές σας. Όπως και με άλλες αλλαγές που γίνονται με τον οπτικό επεξεργαστή, πρέπει να δημοσιεύσετε ολόκληρη τη σελίδα προκειμένου να δημοσιευτεί η εργασία σας.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Επεξεργασία προτύπων ==
Το ισχυρό σύστημα προτύπων MediaWiki σάς επιτρέπει να εισάγετε δυναμικό περιεχόμενο, κείμενο από άλλες σελίδες και πολλά άλλα. Για λεπτομερή επεξήγηση και παραδείγματα, ανατρέξτε στη [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|σελίδα βοήθειας προτύπων]]. 

Στο VisualEditor μπορείτε να αναζητήσετε ένα σχετικό πρότυπο, να προσθέσετε μια κλήση ή [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|ενσωμάτωση]] στη σελίδα που επεξεργάζεστε και, εάν χρειάζεται, να προσθέσετε προσαρμοσμένο περιεχόμενο χρησιμοποιώντας [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|παραμέτρους]].

=== Εισαγωγή νέου προτύπου ===
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Για να προσθέσετε ένα νέο πρότυπο στη σελίδα, τοποθετήστε τον δείκτη σας στη θέση της σελίδας όπου λέτε να εισαγάγετε το πρότυπο. Μετά ανοίξτε το μενού {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} και επιλέξτε «[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}». Εναλλακτικά, πληκτρολογήστε δυο αγκύλες {{((}} για να ανοίξει ο ίδιος διάλογος.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Μπορείτε επίσης να επεξεργαστείτε ένα πρότυπο που βρίσκεται ήδη σε μια σελίδα. Όταν πατάτε πάνω σε ένα πρότυπο για να το επιλέξετε, γίνεται μπλε, και εμφανίζεται ένα πλαίσιο που εμφανίζει «[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}». Στη συνέχεια, επιλέξτε το σύνδεσμο «{{int|vector-view-edit}}» ή κάντε διπλό κλικ στο ίδιο το πρότυπο για να ανοίξετε το πρότυπο.
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ορισμένα πρότυπα δεν είναι ορατά όταν κάποιος διαβάζει μια σελίδα. Στον οπτικό επεξεργαστή, τέτοια κρυμμένα πρότυπα συνεχίζουν εμφανίζονται έτσι ώστε να μπορείτε να τα πατήσετε και να επεξεργαστείτε ή να τα διαγράψετε. Το όνομα του προτύπου θα εμφανίζεται δίπλα από το εικονίδιο παζλ και αμφότερα θα είναι γκριζαρισμένα.
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Παράμετροι προτύπων ===
|-
| Θα δείτε αυτό το πλαίσιο διαλόγου όταν προσθέτετε ένα νέο πρότυπο ή όταν επεξεργάζεστε ένα που υπάρχει ήδη. Αυτό που βλέπετε στο πλαίσιο εξαρτάται από το αν το εν λόγω πρότυπο περιέχει {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, χρήσιμα μεταδεδομένα που έχουν προστεθεί από άλλους συντάκτες για να διευκολύνεται η επεξεργασία προτύπων στο Visual Editor.

Όταν ένα πρότυπο περιέχει TemplateData, το VisualEditor μπορεί να το χρησιμοποιήσει για να παρουσιάσει σχολιασμένα πεδία για να τα συμπληρώσετε.


Για τα πρότυπα που διαθέτουν ορισμένα TemplateData που παρέχονται από την κοινότητα, το VisualEditor εμφανίζει μια λίστα με τις ονομασμένες παραμέτρους και, συχνά, περιγραφές και οδηγίες που εξηγούν το νόημα και την απαιτούμενη μορφή για τις τιμές κάθε παραμέτρου.
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
==== Προσθήκη μη τεκμηριωμένων παραμέτρων ====
|-
| Εάν εισάγετε ή επεξεργάζεστε ένα πρότυπο του οποίου ο συντάκτης δεν έχει ορίσει τις παραμέτρους του στο TemplateData, έχει αυτό που ονομάζουμε «μη τεκμηριωμένες» ή «μη ονομασμένες παραμέτρους». Σε αυτές τις περιπτώσεις, θα πρέπει να συμβουλευτείτε τη σελίδα για το ίδιο το πρότυπο. Εκεί μπορείτε να μάθετε πώς να χρησιμοποιείτε σωστά και να εργάζεστε με όλες τις παραμέτρους του προτύπου. Αυτό περιλαμβάνει την εκμάθηση των ακριβών ονομάτων των παραμέτρων όπως έχουν γραφτεί από τον δημιουργό του προτύπου.  

Εάν βρείτε στην τεκμηρίωση ότι το πρότυπο αναμένει παραμέτρους χωρίς ονόματα, συμπληρώστε αριθμούς ως σύμβολα κράτησης θέσης για τα ονόματα παραμέτρων χρησιμοποιώντας την μη τεκμηριωμένη είσοδο παραμέτρων και, στη συνέχεια, προσθέστε δίπλα τις τιμές που θέλετε να παρέχετε όπως θα κάνατε συνήθως. 

Παράδειγμα:
* πρώτη μη ονομασμένη παράμετρος: «1»
* τιμή πρώτης μη ονομασμένης παραμέτρου: «en_US»
* δεύτερη μη ονομασμένη παράμετρος: «2»
* τιμή δεύτερης μη ονομασμένης παραμέτρου: «yes»

Εάν κατά λάθος συμπεριλάβετε ανύπαρκτες, ανορθόγραφες ή λανθασμένες παραμέτρους, οι τιμές που εισάγετε για αυτές τις παραμέτρους δεν θα εμφανιστούν στη σελίδα που επεξεργάζεστε. 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
==== Παράμετροι που δημιουργούνται αυτόματα ====
|-
| Σε αυτό το παράδειγμα, το εν λόγω πρότυπο δεν διαθέτει TemplateData, αλλά ήταν δυνατή η αυτόματη δημιουργία των παραμέτρων. Αυτό σημαίνει ότι οι μη τεκμηριωμένες παράμετροι έχουν ήδη προστεθεί για εσάς, αλλά τα ονόματα μπορεί να μην είναι εύκολα κατανοητά και το παράθυρο διαλόγου δεν μπορεί να εμφανίσει οδηγίες ή περιγραφές. Ως αποτέλεσμα, το πλαίσιο διαλόγου παρέχει έναν σύνδεσμο προς την τεκμηρίωση του προτύπου, η οποία θα σας βοηθήσει να συμπεράνετε και να συμπληρώσετε τις διάφορες παραμέτρους του προτύπου.
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completing your edit ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| Όταν έχετε τελειώσει με την επεξεργασία ενός προτύπου, πατήστε &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing on mobile ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Υποκατάσταση προτύπων ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Επεξεργασία καταλόγων ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε τον οπτικό επεξεργαστή για να δημιουργήσετε καταλόγους/λίστες, ή να αλλάξετε τη μορφή μιας υπάρχουσας λίστας. Υπάρχουν δυο τύποι από λίστες: μη ταξινομημένες (κουκκίδες) και ταξινομημένες (αριθμημένες).

Για να ξεκινήσετε μια νέα λίστα, απλώς πατήστε σε ένα από τα δυο αντικείμενα μενού που εμφανίζονται εδώ. Ή, αν έχετε ήδη πληκτρολογήσει την λίστα (σε ξεχωριστές γραμμές), επιλέξτε (μαρκάρετε) τη λίστα που πληκτρολογήσατε, μετά πατήστε σε ένα από τα αντικείμενα του μενού.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Εμφανίζονται εδώ παραδείγματα από τα δύο είδη λιστών: αταξινόμητες (κουκκίδες) και ταξινομημένες (αριθμημένες).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Αν θέλετε να αλλάξετε το επίπεδο εσοχής ενός μέρους μιας υπάρχουσας λίστας, επιλέξτε εκείνο το μέρος της λίστας που θέλετε να αλλάξετε.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Έπειτα χρησιμοποιήστε το μενού, ή πατήστε το πλήκτρο Tab. (Το πλήκτρο Tab αυξάνει την εσοχή. Χρησιμοποιήστε το πλήκτρο shift και Tab για να μειώσετε την εσοχή)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Αυτό είναι το αποτέλεσμα αυξημένης εσοχής.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Μπορείτε ακόμη και να αναμείξετε ταξινομημένες (αριθμημένες) και αταξινόμητες (με κουκκίδες) λίστες, αν τα αντικείμενα της λίστας είναι σε διαφορετικές εσοχές.
|}

== Επεξεργασία πινάκων ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε τον VisualEditor για να εισάγετε και τροποποιείτε πίνακες.

Μπορείτε ακόμη και να εισαγάγετε ένα πίνακα τραβώντας ένα αρχείο με τιμές διαχωρισμένες με κόμμα  (.csv) από τον υπολογιστή σας στο κύριο παράθυρο επεξεργασίας.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Όταν πατήσετε στο «Πίνακας», στο μενού «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}», ο οπτικός επεξεργαστής εισάγει ένα κενό πίνακα τέσσερα επί τέσσερα.

Το μενού &quot;Πίνακας&quot; είναι τώρα διαθέσιμο. Από αυτό το μενού, μπορείτε να προσθέστε τη λεζάντα στην κορυφή του πίνακα.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Για να επιλέξετε ένα κελί, πατήστε το μια φορά.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Για να επεξεργαστείτε τα περιεχόμενα του κελιού (για παράδειγμα, για να προσθέστε περιεχόμενο ή να διορθώσετε ένα ορθογραφικό σφάλμα), διπλοπατήστε στο κελί. Ή μπορείτε να επιλέξετε το κελί και να πατήσετε Enter.

Για να τελειώσετε την επεξεργασία ενός κελιού, απλώς πατήστε κάπου αλλού.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| Μπορείτε να προσθέσετε, μετακινήσετε ή αφαιρέσετε μια στήλη ή μια γραμμή.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Μπορείτε να συγχωνεύσετε κελιά: Επιλέξτε τα και μετά, από το μενού Πίνακας, πατήστε στο &quot;Συγχώνευση κελιών&quot;.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Αν συγχωνεύσετε κελιά, μόνο το κείμενο ενός κελιού θα διατηρηθεί. Οποιοδήποτε κείμενο σε άλλα κελιά θα διαγραφεί όταν συγχωνεύσετε τα κελιά. Αν αποφασίσετε ότι θέλατε κάποιο ή όλο το κείμενο που διαγράφηκε, χρησιμοποιήστε το κουμπί Αναίρεση, μετακινείστε ή αντιγράψτε το κείμενο που θέλετε, μετά συγχωνεύστε ξανά τα κελιά.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Μπορείτε επίσης να διαχωρίσετε κελιά που προηγουμένως συγχωνεύσατε. Όλο το περιεχόμενο που βρισκόταν στο συγχωνευμένο κελί θα παραμείνει στο πρώτο κελί όταν κάνετε τον διαχωρισμό. Μπορείτε μετά να κάνετε αποκοπή και επικόλληση κειμένου σε άλλα κελιά, αν το θέλετε.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Επεξεργασία κατηγοριών ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| Για να επεξεργαστείτε κατηγορίες, στο μενού &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot;, πατήστε στο αντικείμενο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Πατώντας στο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; ανοίγει διάλογος ο οποίος εμφανίζει τις υπάρχουσες κατηγορίες και επιτρέπει την προσθήκη νέων, και τη διαγραφεί υπαρχουσών κατηγοριών.

Έχετε επίσης την επιλογή της ρύθμισης ή την αλλαγής του γενικού (προεπιλογή) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|κλειδιού]], το οποίο προσδιορίζει το που θα εμφανίζεται η σελίδα όταν θα είναι σε κατάλογο με άλλες σελίδες στην ίδια κατηγορία.

Για παράδειγμα, το προκαθορισμένο κλειδί ταξινόμησης για το λήμμα &quot;Γεώργιος Σεφέρης&quot; είναι το &quot;Σεφέρης, Γεώργιος&quot;. Στην κατηγορία &quot;Έλληνες ποιητές&quot; το λήμμα αναφέρεται κάτω από το γράμμα &quot;Σ&quot; και όχι το &quot;Γ&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Για να προσθέσετε μια νέα κατηγορία, γράψτε το όνομά της στο πεδίο «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}». Καθώς γράφετε, ο οπτικός επεξεργαστής θα ψάξει για πιθανές κατηγορίες που ταιριάζουν, από αυτές που υπάρχουν. Μπορείτε είτε να επιλέξετε μια ήδη υπάρχουσα κατηγορία ή να προσθέσετε μια κατηγορία που δεν έχει ακόμη δική της σελίδα κατηγορίας. (Μέχρι να δημιουργηθεί η σχετική σελίδα, η νέα κατηγορία θα απεικονίζεται ως κόκκινος σύνδεσμος μετά που θα δημοσιεύσετε τις αλλαγές σας).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Για να αφαιρέσετε μια υπάρχουσα κατηγορία, πατήστε επάνω της και μετά πατήστε στο εικονίδιο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; (κάδος απορριμάτων) στο μενού διαλόγου που ανοίγει.

Πατώντας στην κατηγορία σας επιτρέπει επίσης να ορίσετε το κλειδί ταξινόμησης για αυτή τη συγκεκριμένη κατηγορίας. Αυτό το κλειδί ταξινόμησης παρακάμπτει το γενικό κλειδί ταξινόμησης.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Πατήστε στο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; όταν τελειώσετε την επεξεργασία των κατηγοριών, για να επιστρέψετε στον επεξεργαστή σελίδας.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Επεξεργασία ρυθμίσεων σελίδας ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| Για να επεξεργαστείτε τις ρυθμίσεις μιας σελίδας, πατήστε για να ανοίξετε το μενού &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot;, στην μπάρα επεξεργασίας, και επιλέξτε το κουμπί &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Το κουμπί &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; ανοίγει ένα διάλογο που εμφανίζει διάφορες επιλογές.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Μπορείτε να κάνετε μια σελίδα να ανακατευθύνει σε μια άλλη σελίδα τσεκάροντας το κουτάκι &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot;, και έπειτα γράφοντας εκεί το όνομα της σελίδας στην οποία θέλετε να οδηγήσετε τον αναγνώστη που προσπαθεί να πάει στη σελίδα που επεξεργάζεστε.

Στο κάτω μέρος βρίσκεται η επιλογή με την οποία προλαμβάνεται η ενημέρωση αυτής της ανακατεύθυνσης, όταν μετονομάζεται η σχετική σελίδα. Αυτή η επιλογή χρησιμοποιείται εξαιρετικά σπάνια.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Μπορείτε να επιλέξετε το αν η σελίδα εμφανίζει Πίνακα Περιεχομένων, επιλέγοντας ένα από τα τρία αυτά κουμπιά. Η προεπιλεγμένη επιλογή είναι &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot;, που εμφανίζει ένα πίνακα περιεχομένων αν υπάρχουν τρεις ή περισσότερες επικεφαλίδες.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Τσεκάροντας αυτό το κουτάκι, μπορείτε να κάνετε μια σελίδα να μην δείχνει συνδέσμους επεξεργασίας δίπλα από την επικεφαλίδα κάθε ενότητας.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Πατήστε στο &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; όταν τελειώσετε την επεξεργασία στο {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} για να επιστρέψετε στον επεξεργαστή σελίδας.
|}

== Επεξεργασία χαρτών ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Μπορείτε να προσθέσετε και να αλλάξετε χάρτες. Δείτε {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Επεξεργασία μαθηματικών τύπων ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Για να προσθέσετε καινούριο μαθηματικό τύπο στη σελίδα, τοποθετήστε τον κέρσορα εκεί που επιθυμείτε και πατήστε στο εικονίδιο «{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot;» στο μενού «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}» στη μπάρα εργαλείων.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Θα ανοίξει ένα παράθυρο όπου μπορείτε να πληκτρολογήσετε τον τύπο, με χρήση σύνταξης LaTeX. Ο οπτικός επεξεργαστής θα ενημερώνει τον μαθηματικό τύπο καθώς πληκτρολογείτε, κι έτσι θα βλέπετε πως θα φαίνονται οι αλλαγές σας. Όταν είστε ευχαριστημένος με τον τύπο, πατήστε το κουμπί &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Για να βγείτε από υπάρχοντα μαθηματικό τύπο, πατήστε σε αυτόν και μετά πατήστε το εικονίδιο &quot;Σ&quot; που θα εμφανιστεί. Τότε θα ανοίξει το παράθυρο διόρθωσης μαθηματικών τύπων, όπου θα πραγματοποιήσετε τις αλλαγές που θέλετε.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Μαθηματικοί τύποι μπορούν να τοποθετηθούν εντός κειμένου ή κεντραρισμένοι ως αντικείμενο.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Επεξεργασία μουσικών παρτιτούρων ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Για να προσθέσετε νέα μουσική σημειογραφία σε μια σελίδα, τοποθετήσετε το δρομέα εκεί όπου θέλετε να εισαχθεί η μουσική σημειογραφία. Κατόπιν, από το μενού «Εισαγωγή» στην μπάρα επεξεργασίας, πατήστε την επιλογή «Μουσική σημειογραφία»

Για να επεξεργαστείτε μια μουσική σημειογραφία σε μια σελίδα, κάντε διπλό πάτημα επάνω της.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Θα ανοίξει τον διάλογο &quot;Μουσική σημειογραφία&quot;. Εδώ μπορείτε να διορθώσετε τη σημειογραφία κατά κλίμακα, σε μορφή ABC ή Lilypond. Μπορείτε επίσης να συνδέσετε την σημειογραφία με ένα αρχείο ήχου ή MIDI. Όταν έχετε τελειώσει, πατήστε το κουμπί «Έγινε» για να κλείσετε το διάλογο και να δημοσιεύσετε τις αλλαγές σας.
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Επεξεργασία ποιημάτων και άλλων ειδικών αντικειμένων. ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Κάποια αντικείμενα, όπως λίστες δεδομένων και ποιήματα, προς το παρόν δεν υποστηρίζονται από τον οπτικό επεξεργαστή.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Στις περισσότερες περιπτώσεις, τα υπάρχοντα αντικείμενα μπορούν να τύχουν επεξεργασία, αλλά νέα δεν μπορούν να εισαχθούν στον οπτικό επεξεργαστεί.

Μέχρι να υποστηρίζεται πλήρως, μπορείτε να αντιγράψετε ένα υπάρχον από μια άλλη σελίδα, ή να επεξεργαστείτε απευθείας τον κώδικα wiki.

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== Εναλλαγή μεταξύ οπτικού επεξεργαστή και επεξεργαστή κώδικα ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
Για να αλλάξετε από τον οπτικό επεξεργαστή στον επεξεργαστή κώδικα wiki, πατήστε το κουμπί &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; πέρα δεξιά στην μπάρα εργαλείων.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Θα δείτε μια διαφορά κειμένων (diff) (αν πατήσατε στο «Απόρριψη αλλαγών», θα δείτε απλά κώδικα wiki, έτοιμο για επεξεργασία στον επεξεργαστή κώδικα).

Κυλήστε κάτω, και θα δείτε την περιοχή επεξεργασίας κώδικα wiki. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
Μπορείτε επίσης να αλλάξετε από τον επεξεργαστή κώδικα wiki στον οπτικό επεξεργαστή. Για να το κάνετε αυτό, πατήστε το εικονίδιο με μολύβι πέρα δεξιά στην μπάρα εργαλείων.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Συντομεύσεις πληκτρολογίου ==

Πολλοί συντάκτες είναι συνηθισμένοι να γράφουν απευθείας κώδικα wiki, ειδικά έντονα, πλάγια, και συνδέσμους. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Οι συντομεύσεις πληκτρολογίου]] επιτρέπουν την ταχεία εισαγωγή παρόμοιας μορφοποίησης χωρίς να χρειάζεται να χρησιμοποιήσετε τα αντικείμενα στη μπάρα εργαλείων. Αυτές είναι οι κοινές γενικές συντομεύσεις στον VisualEditor:

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! Συντόμευση PC
! Ενέργεια
! Συντόμευση Mac
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Έντονα
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Πλάγια
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Εισαγωγή συνδέσμου
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Αποκοπή
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Αντιγραφή
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Επικόλληση
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Αναίρεση
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>pez8h4nlgmhhdhzudnopw4hrmq8pcpd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/es</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>133084</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402767</id>
      <parentid>5347067</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:41:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="63334" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Si quieres probar el Editor visual sin editar un artículo, [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} aquí hay una página] en la que puedes probarlo libremente.&lt;/span&gt; No necesitas una cuenta para usar el Editor visual en esa página.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Abrir el Editor visual ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| Para editar una página usando el Editor Visual, haz clic en la pestaña &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot;, en la parte superior de esta página.

Si la página es muy larga, es posible que la apertura del editor tarde algunos segundos.

Al hacer clic en la pestaña &quot;{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}&quot;, se abrirá el editor clásico de wikitexto.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| También puedes abrir el Editor Visual haciendo clic en el enlace &quot;{{int|editsection}}&quot; en cada sección.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Primeros pasos: la barra de herramientas del editor visual ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Capturas de pantalla de la barra de herramientas del Editor visual]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | La barra de herramientas del Editor visual aparece en la parte superior de la pantalla cuando se empieza a editar. Incluye algunos iconos familiares:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' y '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' los cambios que hayas hecho.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| El menú desplegable de '''encabezados''': permite cambiar el formato del texto. Para cambiar el estilo de un párrafo, pon el cursor en el párrafo y selecciona un elemento en este menú (no tienes que resaltar ningún texto). Los títulos de las secciones comunes (nivel más alto) son del tipo &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}&quot;, y los apartados son del tipo &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}&quot;, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}&quot;, y así sucesivamente. El formato común para texto es &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Formato:''' hacer clic en &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; abre un menú. Para cada elemento que tienen un efecto, ''primero'' debes seleccionar (resaltar) algún texto. 
* El elemento &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}&quot; ('''B''') pone en negrita el texto seleccionado.
* El elemento &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}&quot; (''I'') pone en cursiva el texto seleccionado.
* El elemento &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) hace que el texto seleccionado aparezca más chico y ligeramente más arriba que el texto que lo rodea.
* El elemento &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) hace que el texto seleccionado aparezca más chico y ligeramente más abajo que el texto que lo rodea.
* El elemento &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) agrega una línea sólida a través del texto seleccionado.
* El elemento &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}&quot; (un conjunto de llaves: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) cambia el texto seleccionado a un tipo de letra monoespaciada, que lo diferencia del texto circundante (espaciado proporcionalmente).
* El elemento &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) agrega una línea continua debajo del texto seleccionado.
* El elemento &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}&quot; (文A) permite identificar el idioma (por ejemplo, japonés) y la dirección (por ejemplo, derecha a izquierda) del texto seleccionado.
* El elemento final ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), llamado &quot;{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}&quot;, elimina todo el formato de caracteres del texto seleccionado, incluyendo enlaces.

Si no ha seleccionado ningún texto, entonces cuando le de clic a &lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt; para abrir el menú y seleccione un elemento, el formato se aplicará al texto que empiece a escribir, desde donde se encuentre el cursor.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Herramienta de enlazado:''' el icono de la cadena es la [[#Editing links|herramienta de enlazado]]. Al hacerle clic (en general, luego de seleccionar algún texto) se abre el [[#Editing links|cuadro de diálogo de enlace]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''Menú {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}:''' El menú {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} es usado para agregar citas en linea (tambien llamadas &quot;notas de pie de página&quot; o &quot;referencias&quot;). Todos los proyectos tienen acceso al formato básico de referencia y a la capacidad de reusar las citas mediante este menú. También ofrece accesos rápidos a los usuarios hacia las plantillas de citas locales, si están habilitadas en su wiki.

(Las instrucciones para agregar plantillas locales de citas al menú {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} de una wiki específica están disponibles en {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''Botón {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}''' Si el servicio {{ll|Citoid|Citoid}} está activado en tu wiki, verás un botón {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} en lugar de un menú {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

El servicio citoid intenta rellenar plantillas de citas automáticamente.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Listas y sangrado:''' los dos primeros elementos permiten formatear texto ya sea como una &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}&quot; o una &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}&quot;, respectivamente. Los dos últimos permiten disminuir o aumentar el nivel de sangría de elementos de la lista.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' el menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; puede ser diferente en algunos proyectos. Debajo hay una lista de '''todas''' las opciones que pueden aparecer.
* El icono &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; (una imagen de montañas) abre el [[#Editing images and other media files|cuadro de diálogo Multimedia]].
* El icono &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot; (una pieza de rompecabezas) permite [[#Editing templates|editar plantillas]].
* El elemento &quot;Tabla&quot; te permite insertar una tabla.
* El elemento &quot;{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}&quot; (un globo de diálogo) te permite insertar comentarios que no son visibles para los lectores; sólo pueden ser vistos cuando estan en modo edición, donde se indican con un ícono de signo de exclamación. En el modo de edición, si hace clic en el signo de exclamación le permitirá editar o eliminar el comentario.
* El icono &quot;{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}&quot; (símbolo [[:w:ankh|anj]] - ☥) permite insertar jeroglíficos (véase más abajo).
* El elemento &quot;Bloque de codigo&quot;, te permite insertar código.
* El elemento &quot;notación musical&quot;, te permite insertar una notación musical.
* El icono &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (un grupo de fotos) permite insertar una galería a una página.
* El icono &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (Σ) abre el [[#Editing mathematical formulae|cuadro de diálogo insertar fórmulas]].
* El itém &quot;Gráfico&quot;, te permite insertar un gráfico.
* El elemento &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}&quot;, te permite insertar tu firma de usuario de Wikipedia. Estará en gris (no seleccionable) cuando se esté editando un tipo de página (un &quot;namespace&quot;), como un artículo, donde las firmas no deben ser insertadas.
* El icono &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (tres libros) abre un diálogo en el que se puede especificar dónde se mostrarán las referencias al lector. En general, esto debe hacerse solo una vez en cada página.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Inserción de carácter especial :''' El ícono &quot;{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}&quot; (Ω) se encuentra al lado del menú {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}. Cuando se le hace clic, se muestra un cuadro de diálogo con muchos caracteres especiales. Al hacer clic en un caracter específico, se inserta en el texto. Estos carácteres especiales incluyen algunos símbolos estándares, tildes y símbolos matemáticos. (Esta lista puede ser personalizda localmente. Véase {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} para instrucciones.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| El botón &quot;Editar avisos&quot;, muestra cualquier aviso para la página.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| El menú &quot;'''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}'''&quot; está a la izquierda del botón de &quot;{{int|publishchanges}}&quot; y el menú de &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mweditmode-tooltip}}&quot;. En este menú hay un botón para abrir un dialogo de unos &quot;{{int|visualeditor-meta-tool}}&quot; con las siguientes pestañas (lado izquierdo):

* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' te permite añadir categorías a esta página y ajustar cómo la página es ordenada cuando se muestra dentro de una categoría al establecer un índice diferente con el que ordenar.
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' te permite hacer de la página una redirección y ajustar opciones de esta redirección, ajustar configuraciones con respecto a la aparición de la Tabla de Contenidos, deshabilitar los links de edición junto a cada encabezado, y definir la página como una página de desambiguación.
* '''{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}''' te permite ajustar la configuración con respecto a la indexación de la página por los motores de búsqueda, mostrando una pestaña para añadir una nueva sección, y el título mostrado.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' que muestra una lista de páginas en otros idiomas que están enlazados a esa página.&lt;/span&gt;
* '''{{int|visualeditor-templatesused-tool}}''' muestra una lista de enlaces a cada plantilla usada en esta página.

Las pestañas del dialogo de {{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-title}} también se muestran en el menú {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} y puede ser abierto al hacer clic en él.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Además del menú $pagemenu que contiene el botón '''Ver de derecha a izquierda''' y el botón '''[[$1|Buscar y reemplazar]]''' que abre un dialogo donde puedes insertar caracteres, términos o expresiones regulares que estás buscando y se reemplazaran, junto con muchos botones para opciones.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| El botón '''{{int|visualeditor-mweditmode-tooltip}}''' esta luego del botón '''{{int|publishchanges}}'''. Este, te permite cambiar al editor wikitext.
|}

== Guardar cambios ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Cuando se haya terminado la edición, haga clic en el botón verde &quot;{{int|publishchanges}}&quot; en la barra de herramientas. Si no se han hecho cambios, el botón verde aparecerá atenuado - inutilizable. Para cancelar todos tus cambios, simplemente cierra la ventana del navegador o haga clic en la pestaña {{int|vector-view-view}} situada encima de la barra de herramientas de edición.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Al pulsar el botón azul &quot;{{int|publishchanges-start}}&quot; se abre un cuadro de diálogo, donde puedes introducir un breve resumen de las acciones realizadas, marcar la edición como menor y/o agregar la página a tu $watchlist. El cuadro de resumen de edición es equivalente al campo {{int|summary}} en el editor wikitext.&lt;/span&gt;

También se pueden revisar los cambios usando el botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; para asegurarse de que funcionarán según lo previsto antes de guardar los cambios. Esto es similar al botón &quot;{{int|showdiff}}&quot; en el editor de wikitexto.

El botón &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}&quot; regresa a la página que se estaba editando. Pueden guardarse todos los cambios después.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Edición de enlaces ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Los enlaces pueden agregarse a través del icono &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; (eslabones de cadena) en la barra de herramientas o usando el atajo {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (o {{Key press|Comando|K}} en Mac).

Si se selecciona (resalta) texto y luego se pulsa el botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot;, se insertará un enlace usando ese texto. Para enlaces de una sola palabra, basta con hacerlo mientras el cursor está sobre tal palabra.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Cuando usas ya sea el botón o el atajo de teclado, se abrirá un cuadro de diálogo donde puedes escribir el enlace.
El Editor visual tratará de ayudarte con los enlaces '''internos''' mediante búsqueda de posibles coincidencias mientras escribes.
Una vez que hayas escrito o seleccionado el enlace, completas el proceso de enlazado presionando {{key press|Enter}} o presionando el botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot;. El enlace aparecerá inmediatamente en la página del Editor visual, pero al igual que con otros cambios en la página, no se guardará hasta que se grabe toda la página.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Para vincular a una página web en otro sitio web, el proceso es similar: elija la pestaña «{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}» e ingrese una URL en el cuadro.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Los enlaces externos sin etiquetas se ven así: [http://example.com]. Puedes agregarlos ubicando tu cursor lejos de toda palabra (p. ej., luego de un espacio). Abre la herramienta de enlaces haciendo clic en el botón o presionando el atajo de teclado. Escribe el URL en el cuadro y, a continuación, pulsa en el botón «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}» para insertar el enlace.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Para cambiar o eliminar un enlace existente, haga clic dentro del texto del enlace y luego presione el icono &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; que aparece al lado. Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo para editar. También puede ir al cuadro de diálogo con el atajo de teclado {{key press|Ctrl|K}}. Cuando se selecciona un enlace, este aparece enmarcado en azul.

En el cuadro de diálogo, puedes modificar el destino del enlace. También puedes eliminarlo por completo presionando el botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; en la esquina inferior derecha del cuadro de diálogo.
También puedes abrir el enlace en otra ventana haciendo clic en la copia del enlace en el cuadro de diálogo.(En el caso de que quieras comprobar si el enlace externo es válido).

Si deseas salir de la etiqueta del enlace (el texto que se muestra como enlace) o continuar escribiendo después del enlace, puedes seleccionar {{Key press|→}}:
* Presionando una vez se saldrá del diálogo de enlaces y el cursor se colocará al final del elemento enlazado (enmarcado en azul, para editar este elemento).
* Presionando dos veces pondrá el cursor después del elemento vinculado, listo para escribir el resto de tu texto.

Para editar la etiqueta de enlace de uno existente, de clic dentro del enlace y escriba uno nuevo.
Pero si quieres reemplazar toda la etiqueta, tenga en cuenta lo siguiente:

* Si has seleccionado(resaltado) la etiqueta de enlace completa, el enlace se eliminará escribiendo cualquier tecla.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para mantener el vinculo directamente, puedes hacer clic dentro de esta etiqueta de enlace, utilizar la tecla de eliminar y retroceso, sin presionarla más de lo necesario, así una estrecha área de enlace azul permanecerá allí.&lt;/span&gt; Ahora, puedes escribir la nueva etiqueta para el enlace guardado.
* También puedes [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|enlazar a categorías, archivos y más]].
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Edición de referencias ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Ayuda usando platillas de citas]] o [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Ayuda usando citoid's botón {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== Determinando qué sistema se usa ===
|-
| Tu wiki puede usar uno de tres sistemas de notas al pie. El que se muestra a la derecha es el sistema más simple, donde el menú ''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}'' no incluye plantillas de citas. Si tu wiki usa este sistema, entonces todo lo que necesitas saber acerca de las citas al pie está en esta página.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| El segundo sistema tiene el mismo tipo del menú ''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}'', pero con muchas plantillas de citas populares con acceso rápido. Si tu wiki usa este sistema, entonces encontrarás más detalles en {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;En el tercer sistema, nuevamente empiezas haciendo clic en el botón de Citas&lt;/span&gt; Entonces se abre un cuadro de diálogo, el cual incluye un proceso automático de citas usando el servicio citoid Si tu wiki utiliza este sistema, encontrarás más detalles en {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Editar una referencia ya existente ===
|-
| Para editar una referencia existente, haga clic encima de esta, la cual aparece en el texto (por lo general, como un número entre corchetes). Verá o un icono {{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}&quot;(marcador) o bien un icono (y nombre) de la plantilla que se usó para crear esta referencia. En ambos casos, al darle clic a este icono se abrirá un cuadro de diálogo donde se puede {{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}} la referencia.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Para el icono &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}&quot;, al darle clic en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot;, se abre el cuadro de diálogo de referencias. Para empezar a editar la información de la referencia, de clic en el cuadro.

Muchos wikis usan plantillas para formatear referencias. Si se usa una plantilla en tu referencia, todo el texto de ese campo se resaltará cuando hagas clic en la información de referencia.

Si se usó una plantilla y das clic a la información en esa plantilla, entonces aparecerá el icono {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} (una pieza de rompecabezas). Dale clic para {{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}} el contenido de la plantilla en el minieditor de plantillas.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Si un ícono para una plantilla estándar para citas (un ejemplo está a la derecha) es lo que aparece cuando haces clic en una referencia, entonces hacer click en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; abrirá el dialogo de mini-editor de plantillas.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Dentro del mini-editor de plantillas pueden agregarse o eliminarse tipos de información o cambiar el contenido actual. Inicialmente, solo se mostrarán los campos (parámetros de plantillas) que tienen contenido. Para agregar campos, haz clic en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot;, que está hasta abajo del minieditor.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Haga clic en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; cuando haya terminado. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Reutilización de una referencia existente ===
|-
| Si la página ya contiene una cita que aplica al texto que quieres referenciar, entonces puedes elegir reutilizar la cita existente.

Para reusar una referencia existente, sitúa el cursor en el cuerpo del texto donde quieras añadir una nueva referencia (número) para esa cita. Luego haz clic en el elemento de &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-useexisting-tool}}&quot; menú &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(Nota: Si tu wiki tiene el tercer sistema de citas al pie de página descrito arriba, verás una pestaña de reuso, en un diálogo, en vez de un elemento &quot;reuso&quot; en el menú &quot;$cite&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| En el cuadro de diálogo {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}}, busque en la lista la referencia que se quiere reutilizar y selecciónela. Si hay muchas referencias, puede usar la casilla de búsqueda (etiquetada &quot;{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}&quot;) para mostrar solo aquellas referencias que incluyan cierto texto.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Adición de una referencia nueva ===
|-
| Para agregar una cita usando el menú &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;, sitúa el cursor donde quieras añadirla en el texto. Luego selecciona el tipo de cita apropiado en el menú.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Uso de la cita &quot;básica&quot; ====
|-
| Aquí se muestra lo que verá si selecciona el elemento de referencias básicas.  En el editor de referencias, puedes añadir tu cita, incluyendo el formato.

Puedes hacer que la referencia pertenezca a un grupo determinado, aunque normalmente esto se deja vacío. (Esta opción es usada mostrar grupos de referencias con la herramienta &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot;).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| En el cuadro de diálogo de referencias, si quieres incluir una plantilla de reefencia o cualquier otra plantilla en tu cita, haz clic en el icono &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot; (pieza de rompecabezas) en el menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; del editor de referencias.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ahora, busca la plantilla que quieras usar, añádela y edítala como lo harías con cualquier otra plantilla. Véase la sección [[#Editing templates|Editar plantillas]] más abajo, si necesitas más información sobre plantillas.

Cuando hayas terminado de editar la nueva plantilla, dé clic en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; para volver al editor de referencias, y &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; de nuevo para volver a la página que se está editando.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Si no hay todavía una lista de referencias en la página (por ejemplo, si está añadiendo la primera referencia para la página), debes especificar dónde se mostrará al lector la lista de referencias y sus textos.

Sitúa el cursor donde quieras mostrar la lista de referencias (habitualmente al pie de la página), abre el menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; y haz clic en el icono &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (tres libros).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Si estás usando varios grupos de referencias, que es poco usual, puedes especificar el grupo en este cuadro de diálogo. Solo las referencias que pertenezcan al grupo serán mostradas en la página, en el lugar donde esta colocado el grupo.

El último paso en el cuadro de diálogo de la lista de referencias es hacer clic en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Uso de plantillas de citas estándar ====
|-
| Su wiki local puede haber añadido plantillas de citas adicionales para el menú &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;. Si es así, se te ofrece un acceso rápido a las plantillas de citas más usadas para tu wiki. (Las instrucciones para agregar plantillas de citas adicionales a tu wiki local están disponibles en {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Hacer clic en un icono de plantilla tal como &quot;Citar libro&quot; te llevará al mini-editor de plantillas para esa plantilla. Los campos de información importante pueden marcarse con un asterisco. Si bien se mostrarán los campos más comunes, no todos son obligatorios.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para agregar parámetros adicionales, vaya abajo, en el minieditor de plantillas, y dé clic en la opción &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

Haz clic en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; cuando termines.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Edición de imágenes y otros archivos multimedia ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Edición de imágenes ===
|-
| Para añadir una nueva imagen (u otro tipo de archivo multimedia) a la página, haz clic en el icono &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; (imagen de montañas) en el menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. La imagen se agregará donde esté el cursor.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Haciendo clic en el icono &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; se abre un cuadro de diálogo que busca automáticamente en Wikimedia Commons y en tu wiki local, archivos multimedia relacionados con el título de la página que estás editando.

Puedes cambiar la búsqueda cambiando el texto en la casilla de búsqueda del cuadro de diálogo.

Para elegir un archivo, haz clic en su imagen de miniatura.

Esto ubica la imagen en la página que estás editando.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Luego de que la imagen que seleccionaste se haya insertado en la página, se abrirá otro cuadro de diálogo. Este cuadro de diálogo permite añadir y editar la leyenda de la imagen. Esta puede contener formato y enlaces.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| El cuadro de diálogo de medios también te permite agregar leyendas de texto alternativas, para ayudar a los usuarios que usan lectores de pantalla o que hayan desactivado la visualización de imágenes.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| También puedes establecer varios parámetros para la imagen en la ventana &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot;. Estos incluyen la alineación, el tipo y el tamaño de la imagen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Al teminar, haz clic en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; para cerrar el cuadro de diálogo y volver a la edición de la página.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Para una imagen existente, puedes agregar o editar una leyenda u otra preferencia haciendo clic en la imagen, y luego en el icono &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; que aparece debajo de ella.

Puedes redimensionar una imagen existente haciendo clic en ella y luego moviendo el icono de redimensión (la fecha de dos puntas en una o ambas esquinas inferiores).

También puedes arrastrar y soltar una imagen en un lugar más arriba o más bajo en la página.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== Cargando imagenes. ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Puede cargar imágenes desde la pestaña en el cuadro de diálogo de medios, o al arrastrar y soltar un archivo dentro del editor, o al pegar una imagen desde tu portapapeles.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Clic en la pertaña &quot;Cargar&quot; y seleccione una imagen de su computadora. Puede escribir el nombre del archivo, o dibujar una imagen dentro del cuadro. Si arrastras y sueltas una imagen directamente al editor, o pegas una desde tu portapapeles, esta pestaña se abrirá automáticamente.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Necesita describir la imagen y añadir las categorías de modo que otras personas puedan encontrarlo.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| La imagen debe ser insertada en la página cuando ya se haya terminado.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Edición de galerías multimedia ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Para agregar una galería nueva, haz clic en el icono &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (un grupo de fotos) en el menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. (Si no ves este icono en el menú, entonces tu wiki local ha decidido retrasar la implementación de esta funcionalidad en el Editor visual). 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Para editar una galería existente en el Editor visual, haz clic en esa galería. Luego, casi al final de la galería, haz clic en el icono de galería (un conjunto de fotos). Se abrirá el editor de galería, con la lista completa de las imágenes incluidas en la galería.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Actualmente, el editor de galerías es un cuadro simple que te permite editar galerías existentes usando wikitexto. Para agregar una imagen nueva a una galería existente, escribe el nombre de archivo, seguido de una barra (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) y la leyenda para esa imagen. Debes poner cada imagen en la galería en su propia línea.&lt;/span&gt; También puedes editar esta lista para eliminar o reorganizar las imágenes o para cambiar las leyendas.

Cuando hagas clic al botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot;, saldrás del editor de galerías. Así verás la galería con tus cambios, tal como se les presenta a los lectores.

Recuerda que salir del editor de galería no publica tus cambios. Al igual que con otros cambios realizados mediante el Editor visual, debes guardar toda la página para guardar tu trabajo.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Edición de plantillas ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The powerful MediaWiki template system lets you insert dynamic content, text from other pages, and much more. For a detailed explanation and examples, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Templates help page]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the VisualEditor you can search for a relevant template, add an invocation or [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusion]] on the page you’re editing and, if needed, add custom content using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameters]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert new template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Para añadir una plantilla nueva a la página, sitúa el cursor donde quieras que la plantilla quede insertada. Luego haz clic en el menú {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} y selecciona &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, type two curly brackets {{((}} to open the same dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| También puedes editar una plantilla que ya esté en la página. Cuando selecciones una plantilla que quieras editar, esta se volverá azul, y un cuadro aparecerá mostrando &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;. Entonces selecciona el enlace &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot;, o haz doble clic en la misma plantilla para abrirla.
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Algunas plantillas no son visibles para los que leen la página. En el editor visual, tales plantillas escondidas son mostradas para que puedas hacer clic sobre ellas y editarlas o quitarlas. El nombre de la plantilla será mostrada detrás del icono de rompecabezas y ambos estarán en color gris.
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Parámetros de plantilla ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You’ll see this dialog box when you’re adding a new template or editing one already in place.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What you see in the box depends on whether the template in question contains {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, helpful metadata added by other editors to make it easier to edit templates in the Visual Editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When a template contains TemplateData, the VisualEditor can use it to present annotated fields for you to fill in.
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For templates that have some community-provided TemplateData, the VisualEditor displays a list of the named parameters and, often, descriptions and instructions explaining the meaning and required format for each parameter’s values.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Adding undocumented parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter: “1”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter’s value: “en_US”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter: “2”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter’s value: “yes”&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Autogenerated parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completing your edit ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| Al terminar de editar una plantilla, puedes hacer clic en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing on mobile ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Sustitución de plantillas ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Editando listas ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Puedes usar el editor visual para crear listas, o para cambiar el formato de una lista existente. Hay dos tipos de listas: desordenadas(viñeta) y ordenadas(numeradas).

Para empezar una nueva lista, haga clic encima de uno de los dos elementos del menú mostrados aquí. O, si ya has escrito la lista(en líneas separadas), seleccione (resalte) la lista que has escrito, luego haga clic en uno de los elementos del menú.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| A continuación se muestran ejemplos de los dos tipos de listas: desordenada (viñeta) y ordenada (numerada).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Si desea cambiar el nivel de sangría de la parte de una lista existente, seleccione la parte de la lista que desea cambiar.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Luego, use el menú o presione la tecla Tab (tabulador). (La tecla de tabulación aumenta la sangría; use la tecla Mayús y la tecla Tab para disminuir la sangría)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Aquí se muestra el resultado de la sangría aumentada.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Incluso puede mezclar las listas ordenadas (numeradas) y desordenadas (viñetas), si la lista de elementos tiene diferentes sangrías.
|}

== Editar tablas ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Puede usarse el editor visual para insertar y cambiar tablas.

Incluso puedes importar una tabla arrastrando un archivo de valores separados por comas (.csv) desde tu computadora hasta una ventana de edición abierta.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Al hacer clic en &quot;Tabla&quot;, en el menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; (barra de herramientas), el editor visual inserta una tabla en blanco de dimensiones de cuatro por cuatro.

Ahora el menú &quot;Tabla&quot; está disponible. Desde ese menú, puede agregar un título a la parte superior de la tabla.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Para seleccionar una celda, de clic en esta una vez.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Para editar el contenido de la celda (por ejemplo, para añadir contenido o para corregir un error de ortografía), de doble clic en la celda. O puede seleccionar la celda y presionar Regresar.

Para temrinar la edición de la celda, de clic en cualquier otro lugar.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| Puedes añadir, mover o borrar una columna o una fila.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Puede combinar celdas: Seleccionelas y, a continuación, en el menú Tabla, haga clic en &quot;Combinar celdas&quot;.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Si combina celdas, solo el texto de una de ellas será conservado; cualquier texto de las otras celdas será eliminado cuando realice la combinación. Si decide eliminar todo o parte del texto, utilice el botón Deshacer, mueva o copie el texto que desee y, a continuación, fusione las celdas de nuevo.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| También puede separar celdas que previamente haya combinado. Todo el contenido que estaba en la celda combinada permanecerá en la primera celda cuando se haga la división. A continuación, puede cortar y pegar texto en otras celdas, si lo desea.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Edición de categorías ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| Para editar categorías, en el menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot;, haz clic en el elemento &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| El botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; abre un cuadro de diálogo que lista las categorías existentes y permite agregar nuevas y borrar las existentes.

También tienes la opción de configurar o cambiar la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|clave de clasificación]] general (predeterminada), que determina dónde aparece la página cuando se lista con otras páginas en la misma categoría.

Por ejemplo, la clave predeterminada de ordenación del artículo &quot;George Washington&quot; es &quot;Washington, George&quot;. En la categoría &quot;Presidentes de los Estados Unidos de América&quot;, el artículo está listado en la lera &quot;W&quot;, y no en la &quot;G&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Para agregar una categoría a una página, escriba el nombre de la categoría en el campo &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}&quot;. Mientras escribes, el Editor visual buscará categorías existentes que posiblemente coincidan. Puede seleccionarse una categoría existente o bien agregar una categoría que aún no tenga su propia página (hasta que se cree esa página de categoría, tal nueva categoría aparecerá como un enlace rojo, tras guardarse todos los cambios de edición).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Para eliminar una categoría existente, haga clic en ella y luego en el icono &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; (una papelera) en el cuadro de diálogo que se abre.

Hacer clic sobre una categoría también permite especificar una clave de clasificación para esa categoría específica. Tal clave de clasificación tiene precedencia a la clave predeterminada de clasificación.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Haga clic en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; cuando se terminen de editar las categorías para volver al editor de página.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Edición de preferencias de página ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| Para editar las preferencias de una página, haz clic en el menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; en la barra de herramientas y selecciona el botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| El botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; abre un cuadro de diálogo que muestra varias opciones.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Puede hacer que una página redirija a otra verificando la casilla &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot; y luego escribiendo el nombre de la página donde se quiera enviar al lector cuando intente acceder a la página que se está editando.

En la parte inferior está la opción para impedir que los renombramientos de página cambien esta redirección. Esto se utiliza muy raramente.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Puedes elegir si la página muestra una tabla de contenidos seleccionando alguno de estos tres botones. La opción predeterminada es &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot;, que muestra una tabla de contenidos si hay tres o más encabezados.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Puedes hacer que una página no muestra enlaces de edición junto a cada encabezado de sección marcando esta casilla.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Haga clic en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; cuando se termine de editar el {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} para volver al editor de página.
|}

== Edición de mapas ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Puedes agregar y cambiar mapas. Véase {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Edición de fórmulas matemáticas ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Para agregar una nueva fórmula matemática a la página, ubica tu cursor donde quieras insertarla y haz clic en el icono &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (&quot;Σ&quot;) en el menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; de la barra de herramientas.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Se abrirá una ventana en la que puede escribirse la fórmula, usando sintaxis LaTeX. El Editor visual actualizará la fórmula mientras se escribe, así que puede verse cómo se verá a medida que se hagan cambios. Cuando se esté satisfecho con la fórmula, dé clic en el botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Para editar una fórmula matemática existente en la página, haz clic en ella y luego en el icono &quot;Σ&quot; que aparece. Esto abrirá la ventana de fórmula donde harás los cambios.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Las fórmulas matemáticas se pueden colocar en línea o centrarse como un bloque.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Editando partituras musicales ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Para añadir una nueva partitura musical a la página, posicione el cursor donde desea insertar la notación. Luego, del menú &quot;Insertar&quot; en la barra de herramientas, haga clic a la opción &quot;Musical notation&quot;(partitura musical).

Para editar una partitura musical existente en la página, haga doble clic sobre esta.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Esto abrirá el cuadro de diálogo de &quot;partitura musical&quot;. Aquí la partitura debe ser editada por escala, ya sea en formato ABC o en Lilypond. También puede enlazar la notación al audio o al archivo MIDI. Una vez finalizado, haga clic en el botón &quot;Hecho&quot; para cerrar el cuadro de diálogo y guardar sus cambios.
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Edición de poemas y otros elementos especiales ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Algunos elementos, como listas de asociaciones y poemas, aún no son soportados completamente por el editor visual.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| En la mayoría de los casos, los elementos existentes pueden editarse, pero los nuevos no se pueden insertar en el editor visual.

Hasta que sean soportados completamente, puedes copiar uno existente de otra página, o editar el wikitexto fuente directamente.

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== Cambiando entre los editores visual y wikitext. ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
Para cambiar desde el editor visual al editor wikitext, haga clic en el botón &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; situado en el extremo derecho de la barra de herramientas.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Verás un diff (comparación de archivos). (Si hace clic en &quot;Descartar cambios&quot;, verás wikitext, listo para editar con el editor wikitext).

Desplace hacia abajo, y verá el área de edición wikitext. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
Tambié puede cambiar del editor wikitext hacia el editor visual. Para ello, haga clic en el ícono de lapiz en el extremo derecho de la barra de herramientas.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Atajos de teclado ==

Muchos editores están acostumbrados a introducir wikitexto directamente, especialmente negrita, cursiva y enlaces wiki. Los [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|atajos de teclado]] permiten insertar rápidamente un formateo similar sin tener que usar los elementos de la barra de herramientas. Aquí están los atajos de teclado más comunes en el Editor visual:

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! Atajo para PC
! Acción
! Atajo para Mac
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Negrita
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Cursiva
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Insertar enlace
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Cortar
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Copiar
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Pegar
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Deshacer
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>du3d3fwvnn10etmjh7r7w4mlxw2rqyj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/pt-br</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>133164</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402756</id>
      <parentid>5377694</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:35:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="60962" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Caso queira experimentar o editor visual sem editar um artigo, [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} clique aqui] para testá-lo livremente.&lt;/span&gt; Não é necessário ter uma conta para utilizar o editor visual nessa página.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Abrindo o editor visual ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| Para editar uma página com o editor visual, pressione a aba “{{int|vector-view-edit}}” no topo da página.

Pode levar alguns segundos até que a página abra em modo de edição, e demorará mais se a página for muito longa.

Pressione na aba “{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}” abrirá o editor clássico de wikitexto.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Você também pode abrir o editor visual Pressionando em “{{int|editsection}}”, presente em cada seção.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Primeiros passos: a barra de ferramentas do editor visual ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Captura de tela da barra de ferramentas do editor visual]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | A barra de ferramentas do editor visual aparece no topo da tela quando você começa a editar. Ela inclui alguns ícones familiares:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' e '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' as alterações que você fez.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Menu suspenso '''Títulos''': permite a alteração da formatação do parágrafo. Para alterar o estilo de um parágrafo, posicione seu cursor no parágrafo e selecione um item neste menu (você não precisa selecionar o texto). Títulos de seção são formatados como “{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}”, e subseções como “{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}”, “{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}”, e assim por diante. A formatação normal para texto é o “{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}”.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Formatação:''' Ao pressionar no “&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;”, um menu é aberto. 
* O item “{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}” ('''B''') destaca em negrito o texto selecionado.
* O item “{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}” (''I'') destaca em itálico o texto selecionado.
* O item “{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}” (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) faz com que o texto selecionado seja menor do que o texto não selecionado e um pouco acima dele.
* O item “{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}” (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) faz com que o texto selecionado seja menor do que o texto não selecionado e um pouco abaixo dele.
* O item “{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}” (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) adiciona uma barra horizontal no meio do texto selecionado.
* O item “{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}” (um conjunto de chaves: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) altera a fonte do texto selecionado para uma fonte mono-espaçada, que o diferencia do texto (proporcionalmente espaçado) não selecionado.
* O item “{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}” (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) adiciona uma barra horizontal abaixo do texto selecionado.
* O item “{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}” (文A) permite a rotulação do idioma (por exemplo, japonês) e a direção (por exemplo, da direita para a esquerda) do texto selecionado.
* O último item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), denominado “{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}”, remove toda a formatação de caracteres do texto selecionado, incluindo ligações.

Se nenhum texto estiver selecionado, ao pressionar no “&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;” para abrir o menu, e selecionar um item, a formatação será aplicada para o texto que for escrito após o cursor.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Ferramenta de ligação:''' O ícone de corrente representa a [[#Editing links|ferramenta de ligação]]. Pressionar nela (geralmente após selecionar algum texto) abre a [[#Editing links|caixa de diálogo de ligações]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''Menu {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}:''' O menu “{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}” é usado para adicionar citações em linha (também chamadas de “notas de rodapé” ou “referências”). Todos os projetos têm acesso à formatação básica de referências e à habilidade de reusar citações com este menu. Este menu também dá um acesso rápido às predefinições de citação locais, caso estejam ativas na sua wiki.

(Instruções para adicionar predefinições de citação locais ao menu {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} em uma wiki específica estão disponíveis em {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''Botão {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se o serviço citoid estiver habilitado na sua wiki, você verá o botão {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ao invés do menu {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

O serviço citoid tenta preencher predefinições de citação automaticamente.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Listas e indentação:''' Os dois primeiros itens permitem a formatação do texto em uma “{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}” ou em uma “{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}”. Os últimos dois itens permitem o aumento ou a diminuição do nível de indentação das listas.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' O menu “{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}” pode ser mostrado diferentemente dependendo do projeto. Aqui está uma lista de '''todas''' as opções que poderão ser mostradas.
* O ícone “{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}” (uma imagem de montanhas) abre a [[#Editing images and other media files|caixa de diálogo de mídia]].
* O ícone “{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}” (uma peça de quebra-cabeças) permite a [[#Editing templates|edição de predefinições]].
* O item “Tabela” permite que você insira uma tabela.
* O item “{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}” (uma balão de fala) permite a inserção de comentários ocultos aos leitores; estes comentários podem ser vistos apenas no modo de edição, quando estiverem sendo indicados por um ícone de ponto de exclamação. No modo edição, pressione no ícone para editar ou apagar o comentário.
* O ícone “{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}” (um símbolo [[:pt:ankh|ankh]] - ☥) permite a inserção de hieróglifos. (Veja abaixo.)
* O item “Bloco de código” permite a inserção de código.
* O item “Nota musical” permite a inserção de notas musicais.
* O ícone “{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}” (um conjunto de fotos) permite a inserção de uma galeria na página.
* O ícone “{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}” (Σ) abre a [[#Editing mathematical formulae|caixa de diálogo de inserção de fórmula]].
* O item “Gráfico” permite a inserção de um gráfico.
* O item “{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}” permite que você insira uma assinatura que você usa no projeto. Ele estará cinza (não selecionável) quando você estiver editando um espaço nominal, como uma artigo, onde assinaturas não devem ser inseridas.
* O ícone “{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}” (três livros) abre uma caixa de diálogo para especificação de onde as referências serão exibidas ao leitor. Geralmente, isto só precisa ser feito uma vez em cada página.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Inserção de caractere especial:''' O ícone “{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}” (Ω) está próximo ao menu “{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}”. Quando pressionado, exibe uma caixa de diálogo mostrando vários caracteres especiais. Ao pressionar em um caractere específico, ele será inserido no texto. Estes caracteres especiais incluem alguns símbolos, acentos, e símbolos matemáticos padrões. (Esta lista pode ser personalizada localmente. Veja {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} para instruções.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| O botão '''Avisos de edição''' exibe quaisquer avisos sobre a página.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O menu '''$pagemenu''' fica à esquerda do botão ''$save'' e no menu '' Alternar editor ''. Neste menu, existe um botão para abrir uma caixa de diálogo '''Opções''' com as seguintes guias (lado esquerdo):&lt;/span&gt;

* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' permite adicionar categorias a esta página e ajustar como a página é classificada, quando exibida em uma categoria, definindo um índice diferente para classificar com.
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' permite que você faça da página um redirecionamento e ajusta as opções desse redirecionamento, ajusta as configurações relacionadas à exibição do Índice, desabilita as ligações de edição próximas a cada título e define a página como uma página de desambiguação.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Configurações avançadas''' permite que você ajuste as configurações relacionadas à indexação da página pelos mecanismos de pesquisa, exibindo uma guia para adicionar uma nova seção e o título exibido.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' que mostra uma lista de páginas em outros idiomas que estão ligadas a essa página.&lt;/span&gt;
* '''Templates used''' mostra uma lista de ligações para cada predefinição utilizada nesta página.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;As abas da caixa de diálogo Opções também são exibidas no menu $pagemenu e podem ser abertas clicando nela.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Além disso, o menu $pagemenu contém o botão '''Visualizar como da direita para a esquerda''' e o botão '''Localizar e substituir''' que abre uma caixa de diálogo onde você pode inserir caracteres, termos ou expressões regulares que você está pesquisando para e aqueles para substituí-los, juntamente com vários botões para opções.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O botão '''alternar para edição do código-fonte''' está próximo do botão '''$save'''. Ele permite que você alterne para o editor de wikitexto.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Salvando alterações ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Ao término da edição, pressione no botão azul “{{int|publishchanges}}” na barra de ferramentas. Se nenhuma alteração for feita, o botão permanecerá desabilitado (cinza). Para descartar todas as suas alterações, apenas feche a janela do seu navegador ou pressione no separador “{{int|vector-view-view}}”, acima da barra de edição.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pressionar o botão azul “{{int|publishchanges-start}}” abre uma caixa de diálogo. Você pode inserir um breve sumário das suas ações, marcar sua edição como menor, e adicionar a página a sua $watchlist. A caixa para o sumário é equivalente ao campo {{int|summary}} no editor de código-fonte.&lt;/span&gt;

Você também pode revisar suas alterações usando o botão “{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}” para certificar-se de que elas funcionarão corretamente antes de salvá-las. Isto é semelhante ao botão “{{int|showdiff}}” no editor de código-fonte.

O botão “{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}” retorna à página editada. Você pode salvar todas as suas alterações mais tarde.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Editando ligações ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Ligações podem ser adicionadas através do ícone “{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}” (uma corrente) na barra de ferramentas, ou usando o atalho {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (ou {{Key press|Command|K}} no Mac).

Se você selecionar um texto e então pressionar o botão “{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}”, este será usado na criação da ligação. Para uma ligação que envolva apenas uma palavra, selecione esta palavra ou apenas posicione o cursor sobre ela.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Ao usar o botão ou o atalho, uma caixa de diálogo abrirá, onde você poderá digitar a ligação.
A ferramenta de ligação tentará ajudar você com ligações '''internas''' procurando por prováveis correspondências.
Uma vez inserido ou selecionado a ligação, complete o processo de ligação pressionando {{key press|Enter}} ou o botão “{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}”. A ligação imediatamente aparecerá na página do editor visual, mas assim como outras alterações na página, não será salva até que a página inteira seja salva.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Para criar uma ligação a uma página web em outro site, o processo é o mesmo: Escolha a aba “{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}” e insira um URL na caixa.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Ligações externas sem rótulos ficarão assim: [http://example.com]. Você pode adicioná-las colocando seu cursor longe de palavras (por exemplo, depois de um espaço). Abra a ferramenta de ligação pressione no botão ou pressionando o atalho de teclado. Digite o URL na caixa e pressione no botão “{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}” para inserir a ligação.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Para alterar ou remover uma ligação existente, pressione no texto da ligação e em seguida pressione o ícone “{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}” que aparece próximo dele. A caixa de diálogo aparecerá, para edição. (Você também pode abrir a caixa de diálogo com o atalho de teclado {{key press|Ctrl|K}}.) Quando uma ligação for selecionada, ela aparece destacada em azul.

Na caixa de diálogo da edição da ligação, você pode então alterar o destino da ligação. Você também pode removê-la por completo pressionando o botão “{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}” no canto superior direito da caixa.
Você também pode abrir o destino da ligação em outra janela pressionando na cópia dela na caixa de diálogo. (Você poderá usar isto para verificar se uma ligação externa está funcionando.)

Caso queira sair do rótulo da ligação (o texto exibido como ligação) ou continuar a escrever após esta ligação, pressione {{Key press|→}}:
* Pressione-a uma vez para sair da caixa de diálogo de edição da ligação e posicionar seu cursor no final do elemento ligado (destacado em azul, para editar este elemento);
* Pressione-a duas vezes para posicionar o cursor após o elemento ligado, preparado para digitar o resto do texto.

Para editar o rótulo de uma ligação existente, pressione nele e escreva um novo rótulo.
Caso você deseje substituir o rótulo inteiro, note que:

* Se o rótulo inteiro estiver selecionado (destacado), a ligação será apagada ao pressionar qualquer tecla.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para manter a ligação, clique no rótulo, pressione {{Key press |⌫}} ou {{Key press |Del}} uma vez, e apenas o URL restará.&lt;/span&gt; Então, será possível inserir um novo rótulo para a ligação mantida.
* Você também pode [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|ligar categorias, arquivos e mais]].
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Editando referências ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|ajuda para predefinições de citação]] ou [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|ajuda para o botão {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== Determinando qual sistema está em vigor ===
|-
| Sua wiki pode usar um dos três sistemas de notas de rodapé. O exibido à direita é o sistema mais simples, onde o menu “{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}” não inclui nenhuma predefinição de citação. Caso sua wiki use este sistema, tudo que você precisará saber sobre notas de rodapé está nesta página.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| O segundo sistema tem o mesmo tipo do menu “{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}”, mas com várias predefinições populares de citação para acesso rápido. Caso sua wiki use este sistema, você poderá encontrar mais detalhes em {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;No terceiro sistema, comece pressionando novamente no botão Citar.&lt;/span&gt; Em seguida, é aberta uma caixa de diálogo que possui um processo de citação automática que usa o serviço citoid. Se sua wiki usar esse sistema, mais detalhes serão encontrados em {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Editando uma referência existente ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para editar uma referência existente, pressione onde ela aparece no texto (geralmente como um número entre colchetes). Você verá um ícone “$ref” (marcador) ou um ícone (e nome) para a predefinição usada para criar esta referência. Em ambos os casos, pressionar no botão “Editar” abrirá uma caixa de diálogo onde você poderá editar a referência.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para o ícone “$ref”, pressionar em “Editar” abrirá a caixa de diálogo Referência. Para começar a alterar as informações da referência, pressione.&lt;/span&gt;

Muitas wikis usam predefinições para formatar referências. Se uma predefinição for usada na sua referência, ao mover o cursor sobre informações da referência, todas as informações naquele campo estarão destacadas.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se uma predefinição for usada e você pressionar nas informações da referência, o ícone $template (peça de quebra-cabeças) aparecerá com algumas delas. pressione no botão “Editar” para editar o conteúdo da predefinição na caixa de diálogo do mini-editor da predefinição.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se o que aparecer ao pressionar em uma referência for um ícone para a predefinição padrão para citações (exemplo à direita), pressionar no botão “Editar” abrirá a caixa de diálogo do mini-editor da predefinição.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Dentro do mini-editor da predefinição, você poderá adicionar ou remover tipos de informação ou alterar o conteúdo atual. Apenas campos (parâmetros da predefinição) que têm conteúdo serão mostrados inicialmente. Para adicionar campos, pressione em “{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}” na parte inferior do mini-editor.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ao terminar, pressione em “{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}”. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Reutilizando uma referência existente ===
|-
| Se a página já possuir uma citação que se aplica ao texto, você poderá reutilizar aquela citação existente.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para reutilizar uma referência existente, posicione o cursor no corpo do texto onde você deseja adicionar uma nova referência (número) para esta citação. Em seguida, pressione no item “Reusar referência” no menu “{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}”.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(Nota: Caso sua wiki use o terceiro sistema de notas de rodapé descrito acima, você verá a guia “Reusar” numa caixa de diálogo ao invés de estar no menu “$cite”.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Na caixa de diálogo {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}}, ache na lista a referência que você quer reutilizar e selecione-a. Se há muitas referências, use a caixa de pesquisa (rotulada “{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}”) para listar apenas referências que incluam certo texto.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Adicionando uma nova referência ===
|-
| Para adicionar uma citação usando o menu “{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}”, posicione seu cursor onde deseja adiciona-la no texto. Em seguida, selecione o tipo apropriado de citação no menu.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Usando a citação “Básica” ====
|-
| O exibido aqui é o que você verá caso selecionar o item de referência básica.  No editor Referência, você pode adicionar e formatar sua citação.

Você pode fazer com que a sua referência pertença a um certo grupo, apesar de geralmente não ser especificado nenhum. (Esta opção é usada para exibir grupos de referências com a ferramenta “{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}”.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Na caixa de diálogo Referência, caso queira incluir uma predefinição de citação (ou qualquer outra) na sua nova referência, pressione no ícone {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} (peça de quebra-cabeças) no menu “{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}” da barra de ferramentas do editor Referência.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Em seguida, ache a predefinição que quer usar, adicione-a e edite-a como faria com qualquer outra. (Veja a seção [[#Editing templates|Editando predefinições]] abaixo se necessitar de mais informações sobre elas.)

Após o término da edição da nova predefinição, pressione em “{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}” para retornar ao editor Referência, e novamente pressione em “{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}” para retornar à página que você está editando.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Se ainda não há uma lista de referências na página (por exemplo, se você está inserindo a primeira referência para a página), você precisa especificar onde ela e seu texto serão exibidos ao leitor.

Posicione o cursor onde você deseja exibir a lista de referências (geralmente no final da página), abra o menu “{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}” e pressione no ícone “{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}” (três livros).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Caso esteja usando vários grupos de referências, o que é geralmente raro, você poderá especificar o grupo nesta caixa de diálogo. Apenas as referências pertencentes àquele grupo serão exibidas no local onde está localizado o grupo.

O último passo na caixa de diálogo da Lista de referências é pressionar em “{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}”.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Usando predefinições de citação padrões ====
|-
| Sua wiki local pode ter adicionado predefinições de citação extras ao menu “{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}”. Caso isto tenha ocorrido, você terá acesso rápido às predefinições de citação mais usadas na sua wiki. (Instruções para adicionar predefinições de citação extras à sua wiki local estão disponíveis em {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Pressionar em um ícone de predefinição como “Citar livro” lhe levará ao mini-editor de predefinições para a mesma. Campos de informação importantes poderão estar marcados com um asterisco. Embora sejam mostrados os campos mais comuns, nem todos serão necessários.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para adicionar mais parâmetros, vá para o fim do mini-editor de predefinições e pressione na opção “{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}”.&lt;/span&gt;

Ao terminar, pressione em “{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}”.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Editando imagens e outros arquivos de mídia ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Editando imagens ===
|-
| Para adicionar uma nova imagem (ou outro tipo de arquivo de mídia) na página, pressione no ícone “{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}” (uma imagem de montanhas) no menu “{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}”. A imagem será inserida onde quer que o cursor esteja.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Pressionar no ícone “{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}” abrirá uma caixa de diálogo que pesquisa automaticamente no Wikimedia Commons e na sua wiki local arquivos de mídia relacionados à página que você está editando.

Você pode alterar a pesquisa alterando o texto na caixa de pesquisa da caixa de diálogo.

Para escolher um arquivo, pressione em sua miniatura.

Isto colocará a imagem na página que você está editando.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Após a inserção da imagem selecionada na página, outra caixa de diálogo se abrirá. Esta caixa permitirá que você adicione e edite a legenda da imagem, que poderá conter formatação e ligações.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| A caixa de diálogo de mídia também permitirá que você adicione legendas alternativas, para ajudar usuários com leitores de tela ou com a exibição de imagens desabilitada.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Você também pode definir vários parâmetros para a imagem na janela &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot;, que incluem o alinhamento, o tipo e o tamanho da imagem.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ao terminar, pressione em &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; para fechar a caixa de diálogo e retornar a editar a página.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Para uma imagem existente, você pode adicionar ou editar uma legenda ou outras configurações pressionando na imagem e em seguida no ícone &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; que aparece abaixo da imagem.

Você pode redimensionar uma imagem existente pressionando nela e em seguida movendo o ícone de redimensionamento (a seta de duas pontas no(s) canto(s) inferior(es)).

Você também pode arrastar e soltar uma imagem para qualquer outro local da página.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== Enviando imagens ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Você pode enviar imagens a partir de uma aba na caixa de diálogo de mídia.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Pressione na aba “Enviar” e selecione uma imagem de seu computador. Você pode digitar o nome do arquivo ou arrastar uma imagem à caixa. Se você arrastou e soltou uma imagem diretamente no editor ou colou uma na sua área de transferência, essa guia será aberta automaticamente.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Você deve descrever a imagem e adicionar categorias à ela para que outras pessoas possam encontrá-la.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| A imagem será inserida na página ao terminar.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Editando galerias de mídia ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Para adicionar uma nova galeria, pressione no ícone “{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}” (um conjunto de fotos) no menu “{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}”. (Caso não ver este ícone neste menu, então sua wiki local decidiu adiar a implementação desta funcionalidade no editor visual.) 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Para editar uma galeria no Editor Visual, pressione nela. Em seguida, próximo ao fim da mesma, pressione no ícone galeria (um conjunto de fotos) para abrir o editor dela, com a lista completa de imagens incluídas na galeria.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Atualmente, o editor da galeria é uma caixa simples que permite a edição de galerias existentes usando a marcação de wikitexto. Para adicionar uma nova imagem a uma galeria existente, digite o nome do arquivo, seguido por uma barra vertical (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) e pela legenda da imagem. Você deve colocar cada imagem na galeria em sua própria linha.&lt;/span&gt; Você também pode editar esta lista para remover ou reorganizar imagens, ou para alterar legendas.

Ao pressionar no botão “{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}”, você sairá do editor da galeria. Em seguida, você verá suas alterações, uma vez que a galeria será mostrada para leitores.

Lembre-se que sair do editor da galeria não salva suas alterações. Assim como em outras alterações feitas usando o editor visual, você deve salvar a página inteira para salvar seu trabalho.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Editando predefinições ==
O poderoso sistema de predefinição MediaWiki permite inserir conteúdo dinâmico, texto de outras páginas e muito mais. Para uma explicação detalhada e exemplos, consulte a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|página de ajuda de predefinições]]. 

No Editor Visual, você pode pesquisar uma predefinição relevante, adicionar uma invocação ou [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusão]] na página que você está editando e, se necessário, adicionar conteúdo personalizado usando [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parâmetros]].

=== Inserir nova predefinição ===
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Para adicionar uma predefinição a uma página, coloque o cursor na posição da página onde deseja que a predefinição seja inserida. Em seguida, abra o menu {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} e selecione &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;. Alternativamente, digite duas chaves {{((}} para abrir a mesma caixa de diálogo.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Você também pode editar uma predefinição que já está em uma página. Quando você seleciona a predefinição que deseja editar, ela fica azul e uma caixa aparece exibindo &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;. Em seguida, selecione o link &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; ou clique duas vezes na própria predefinição para a abrir.
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Algumas predefinições não são visíveis para quem lê uma página. No editor visual, essas a predefinições ocultas ainda são exibidas para que você possa clicar e as editar ou excluir. O nome da predefinição será mostrado próximo ao ícone do quebra-cabeça e ambos ficarão esmaecidos.
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Parâmetros da predefinição ===
|-
| Você verá essa caixa de diálogo ao adicionar uma nova predefinição ou editar uma já existente. O que você vê na caixa depende se a predefinição em questão contém {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, metadados úteis adicionados por outros editores para facilitar a edição de modelos no Editor Visual.

Quando uma predefinição contém TemplateData, o Editor Visual pode usar isso para apresentar campos anotados para você preencher.


Para predefinições que possuem alguns TemplateData fornecidos pela comunidade, o Editor Visual exibe uma lista dos parâmetros nomeados e, frequentemente, descrições e instruções que explicam o significado e o formato necessário para os valores de cada parâmetro.
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
==== Adicionando parâmetros não documentados ====
|-
| Se você estiver inserindo ou editando uma predefinição cujo autor não definiu seus parâmetros em TemplateData, temos o que chamamos de “parâmetros sem nome” ou “não documentados”. Nestes casos, você deve consultar a página da própria predefinição. Lá você pode aprender como empregar e trabalhar corretamente com todos os parâmetros da predefinição. Isso inclui aprender os nomes exatos dos parâmetros escritos pelo autor da predefinição.  

Se você descobrir na documentação que a predefinição espera parâmetros sem ter nomes, preencha os números como espaços reservados para os nomes dos parâmetros usando a entrada de parâmetro não documentada e, em seguida, adicione ao lado dos valores que deseja fornecer como faria normalmente. 

Exemplo:
* primeiro parâmetro sem nome: “1”
* primeiro valor do parâmetro sem nome: “pt_BR”
* segundo parâmetro sem nome: “2”
* valor do segundo parâmetro sem nome: “sim”

Se você acidentalmente incluir parâmetros inexistentes, com erros ortográficos ou incorretos, os valores inseridos para esses parâmetros não serão exibidos na página que você está editando. 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
==== Parâmetros gerados automaticamente ====
|-
| Neste exemplo, a predefinição em questão não tem TemplateData, mas foi possível gerar os parâmetros automaticamente. Isso significa que os parâmetros não documentados já foram adicionados para você, mas os nomes podem não ser facilmente compreensíveis e a caixa de diálogo não pode exibir nenhuma direção ou descrição. Como resultado, a caixa de diálogo fornece um link para a documentação da predefinição, que deve o ajudar a deduzir e preencher os vários parâmetros da predefinição.
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
==== Editando o conteúdo de predefinição de várias partes ====
|-
| Durante a edição, você pode abrir o conteúdo da predefinição que consiste em várias predefinições ou uma única predefinição vinculada a algum wikitexto. Isso é diferente das predefinições aninhadas descritas a seguir. Nesse caso, as predefinições são melhor visualizadas como empilhadas ou conectadas. 

Este conteúdo geralmente contém “predefinições não balanceadas”, predefinições que são incompletas por si próprias e precisam ser combinadas com algum wikitexto ou outra predefinição para funcionar. 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
==== Predefinições aninhadas ====
|-
| As predefinições podem incluir outras predefinições como o valor dos parâmetros. Você reconhecerá isso quando ver um parâmetro cujo valor contém as chaves duplas &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denotando uma predefinição. 

O Editor Visual não pode apresentar esta predefinição dentro de uma predefinição (uma predefinição aninhada) usando a interface fácil de usar do editor, então se você quiser aninhar uma predefinição, você precisa entender como adicionar a predeffinição manualmente em wikitexto no campo de parâmetro apropriado.
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Completando sua edição ===
|-
| Quando terminar de editar uma predefinição, você pode clicar em &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;. Em seguida, você pode visualizar sua edição e se certificar de que ela tenha a aparência que você deseja e espera.

Você também pode ver uma mensagem de erro, que (como os outros TemplateData mencionados acima) é um conteúdo fornecido pela comunidade e pode variar em utilidade.
Pode ser necessário consultar a própria documentação da predefinição para descobrir alguns erros.
Se você ainda estiver tendo problemas, considere postar sobre seu problema na página de discussão da predefinição.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Editando no celular ===
|-
| Ao editar uma predefinição em uma página usando o Editor Visual em um dispositivo móvel, você verá que a barra lateral começa oculta. Você pode a tornar visível pressionando o botão “Mostrar/ocultar opções”.

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Substituindo predefinições ===
|-
| Quando você insere um modelo em uma página wiki, seu conteúdo e aparência são reavaliados sempre que a página é carregada, com base no código da predefinição e nos valores de seus parâmetros. Isso significa que se alguém atualizar o código de uma predefinição, todas as páginas que usam ess predefinição também serão atualizadas ao publicar.

No entanto, há outra maneira muito menos comum de usar modelos, que é [[w:Help:Substitution|substituir]] uma predefinições.
Isso inclui permanentemente o conteúdo da predefinição exatamente como ela aparece no momento em que você a insere. Ela não será atualizada se o código da predefinição for alterado posteriormente.

A maioria dos usuários nunca precisará recorrer à substituição.
A substituição normalmente só é útil quando você precisa capturar a aparência exata de uma versão de uma predefinição, como quando o conteúdo está em desenvolvimento e precisa de avaliação.

Para substituir uma predefinição no Editor Visual, insira uma predefinição usando a sintaxe de nome &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
(O preenchimento automático não funciona neste caso.)
Em seguida, pressione o botão azul “Adicionar predefinição”.

Quando terminar, pressione “Inserir”, que irá inserir o conteúdo da predefinição como você a vê.
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Editando listas ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Você pode usar o editor visual para criar listas ou para mudar o formato de uma lista existente. Há dois tipos de lista: não-ordenadas (pontuadas) e ordenadas (enumeradas).

Para começar uma nova lista, apenas pressione em um dos dois itens do menu mostrados aqui. Ou, se você já digitou a lista (em linhas separadas), selecione (marque) a lista que você digitou e então pressione em um dos itens do menu.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Aqui são mostrados exemplos dos dois tipos de listas: não-ordenadas (pontuadas) e ordenadas (enumeradas).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Se você quiser mudar o nível de indentação de parte de uma lista existente, selecione a parte da lista que você deseja modificar.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Então use o menu ou pressione a tecla Tab. (A tecla Tab aumenta a indentação; use a tecla shift junto à tecla Tab para diminuir a indentação).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Aqui está o resultado do aumento de indentação:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Você pode até misturar listas ordenadas (enumeradas) e não-ordenadas (pontuadas), se os itens da lista tiverem indentações diferentes.
|}

== Editando tabelas ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Você pode usar o Editor Visual para inserir e alterar tabelas.

Pode, inclusive, importar uma tabela movendo um arquivo de valores separados por vírgula (.csv) de seu computador à janela de edição principal.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ao pressionar em “Tabela”, no menu “{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}”, o Editor Visual insere uma tabela quatro-por-quatro em branco.

Agora o menu &quot;Tabela&quot; está disponível. Deste menu, você pode adicionar uma legenda ao topo da tabela.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Para selecionar uma célula, pressione nela uma vez.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Para editar o conteúdo da célula (por exemplo, para adicionar conteúdo ou corrigir um erro de ortografia), pressione duas vezes na célula. Ou você pode selecionar a célular e pressionar Return.

Para terminar a sua edição de uma célula, apenas pressione em outro lugar.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| Você pode adicionar, mover e remover uma coluna ou linha.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Você pode juntar células: selecione-as, e então do menu Tabela, pressione em &quot;Juntar células&quot;.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Se você juntar células, apenas um texto em uma célula é mantido; qualquer texto em outras células é excluído quando você junta as células. Se você decidir que você deseja algum ou todo o texto que foi excluído, use o botão Desfazer, mova ou copie o texto que você quer, e então junte as células novamente.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Você pode também separar células que foram juntadas anteriormente. Todo o conteúdo que estava na célula unida permanecerá na primeira célula quando você fizer a separação. Você pode então cortar e copiar texto de outras células, se você quiser.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Editando categorias ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| Para editar categorias, no menu “{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}”, pressione no item “{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}”.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Pressionar em &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; abrirá uma caixa de diálogo que lista categorias existentes e permite que você adicione novas ou remova as existentes.

Você também tem a opção de configurar ou alterar a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|chave de ordenamento geral]] (padrão), que determina onde a página aparece quando listada com outras páginas na mesma categoria.

Por exemplo, a chave de ordenamento padrão para o artigo “George Washington” é “Washington, George”. Na categoria “Presidentes dos Estados Unidos”, o artigo é listado abaixo da letra “W”, não “G”.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Para adicionar uma categoria para uma página, digite o nome da categoria no campo &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}&quot;. Enquanto digita, o Editor Visual pesquisará por possíveis categorias existentes. Você pode tanto selecionar uma categoria existente quanto adicionar uma que ainda não tem página própria. (Até que essa categoria for criada, a nova será mostrada como uma ligação em vermelho após salvar as suas alterações.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Para remover uma categoria existente, pressione nela e no ícone &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; (lata de lixo) na caixa de diálogo que aparecerá.

Pressionar em uma categoria também lhe permite especificar uma chave de ordenamento para aquela categoria específica. Tal chave substitui a padrão.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Pressionar em &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; ao terminar de editar categorias para retornar ao editor.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Editando configurações da página ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| Para editar as configurações de uma página, pressione para abrir o menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot;, na barra de ferramentas, e selecione o botão &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| O botão &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; abre uma caixa de diálogo que mostra várias opções.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Você pode fazer com que uma página se torne uma página de redirecionamento marcando a caixa de seleção &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot;, e em seguida digitando o nome da página onde você deseja redirecionar o usuário para.

Na parte inferior está a opção para evitar a atualização do redirecionamento. Isto não é muito utilizado.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Você pode alterar se a página exibirá ou não um Índice selecionando um desses três botões. A opção padrão é &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot;, que mostra um Índice se houver três ou mais seções.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Você pode desativar as ligações de edição ao lado de cada título de seção ao marcar esta caixa de seleção.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Pressionar em &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; ao término da edição das {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} para retornar ao editor.
|}

== Editando mapas ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Você pode adicionar e mudar mapas. Veja {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Editando fórmulas matemáticas ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Para adicionar uma nova fórmula matemática à página, posicione o cursor onde deseja que ela seja inserida e pressione no ícone &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (&quot;Σ&quot;) no menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; na barra de ferramentas.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Uma janela se abrirá, onde você poderá digitar a fórmula, usando a sintaxe LaTeX. O Editor Visual atualizará a fórmula enquanto você a escreve para que você possa ver como ela se parecerá na medida que você faz alterações. Uma vez satisfeito com a fórmula, pressione no botão &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Para editar uma fórmula matemática existente na página, pressione nela e em seguida pressione no ícone &quot;Σ&quot; que aparecerá. Isto abrirá a janela de fórmula, onde é possível fazer alterações.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Fórmulas matemáticas podem ser posicionadas alinhadas ou centralizadas como um bloco.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Editando partituras musicais ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Para adicionar uma nova notação musical a uma página, posicione o seu cursor onde você quer que a notação musical seja inserida. Então, do menu &quot;Inserir&quot; na barra de ferramentas, pressione na opção &quot;Notação musical&quot;.

Para editar uma notação musical existente na página, pressione duas vezes nela.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Isso irá abrir o diálogo de &quot;Notação musical&quot;. Aqui a notação pode ser editada por escala, ou no formato ABC ou no formato Lilypond. Você também pode ligar a notação a um áudio ou arquivo MIDI. Uma vez que você terminou, pressione no botão &quot;Pronto&quot; para fechar o diálogo e salvar as suas mudanças.
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Editar poemas e outros itens especiais ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Alguns itens, tais como listas de associação e poemas, ainda não são totalmente compatíveis com o editor visual.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Na maioria dos casos, os itens existentes podem ser editados, mas novos não podem ser inseridos no Editor Visual.

Até que sejam totalmente compatíveis, você pode copiar um já existente de outra página, ou editar diretamente do editor de código-fonte.

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== Mudando entre os editores visual e de wikitexto ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
Para mudar do editor visual para o editor de wikitexto, pressione o botão &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; na extremidade direita da barra de ferramentas.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Você verá uma diferença. (Se você pressionou em &quot;Descartar mudanças&quot;, você verá apenas wikitexto, pronto para edição com o seu editor de wikitexto.)

Avance para baixo e você verá a área de edição de wikitexto. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
Você também pode mudar do editor de wikitexto para o editor visual. Para fazer isso, pressione no ícone de lápis na extrema direita da barra de ferramentas.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Atalhos de teclado ==

Muitos editores estão acostumados a inserir wikitexto diretamente, especialmente negrito, itálico e ligações internas. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Atalhos de teclado]] permitem rapidamente inserir formatações similares sem ter de usar itens da barra de ferramentas. Aqui estão os atalhos mais comuns no Editor Visual:

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! Atalho para PC
! Ação
! Atalho para Mac
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Negrito
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Itálico
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Inserir ligação
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Recortar
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Copiar
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Colar
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Desfazer
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>25l54kesizhydd5y7leabz14cobjph2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/id</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>133239</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402778</id>
      <parentid>5350846</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:47:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="62795" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Jika Anda ingin mencoba penyunting visual ini tanpa menyunting sebuah artikel, Anda dapat dengan bebas mengujinya [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} di halaman ini].&lt;/span&gt; Anda tidak perlu akun untuk menggunakan penyunting visual pada halaman tersebut.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Membuka penyunting visual ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| Untuk menyunting sebuah halaman menggunakan penyunting visual, tekan tab &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; pada bagian atas halaman tersebut.

Mungkin perlu waktu beberapa detik hingga halaman terbuka untuk penyuntingan, dan lebih lama jika halaman tersebut sangat panjang.

Menekan tab &quot;{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}&quot; akan membuka penyunting sumber teks wiki yang klasik.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Anda juga dapat membuka penyunting visual dengan menekan pranala &quot;{{int|editsection}}&quot; pada masing-masing bagian.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Memulai: bilah alat penyunting visual ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Cuplikan layar dari bilah alat penyunting visual]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | Bilah alat penyunting visual tampil pada bagian atas layar ketika Anda mulai menyunting. Bilah alat ini menyertakan beberapa ikon familier:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' dan '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' perubahan yang telah Anda buat.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Menu daftar turun-bawah '''Judul''': memungkinkan Anda untuk mengubah cara suatu paragraf diformat. Untuk mengubah gaya suatu paragraf, letakkan kursor Anda pada paragraf tersebut dan pilihlah sebuah butir dari menu ini (Anda tidak perlu untuk menyorot teks apa pun). Judul bagian memiliki format &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}&quot;, dan subbagian memiliki format &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}&quot;, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}&quot;, dan seterusnya. Format normal untuk teks adaah &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Pemformatan:''' Menekan &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; akan membuka sebuah menu. 
* Butir &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}&quot; ('''A''') akan menebalkan teks terpilih.
* Butir &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}&quot; (''A'') akan mencetak miring teks terpilih.
* Butir &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sup&gt;ɪ&lt;/sup&gt;) akan membuat teks terpilih tampak lebih kecil dibandingkan teks di sekelilingnya dan menjadi sedikit lebih tinggi dibandingkan teks di sekelilingnya.
* Butir &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sub&gt;ɪ&lt;/sub&gt;) akan membuat teks terpilih tampak lebih kecil dibandingkan teks di sekelilingnya dan menjadi sedikit lebih rendah dibandingkan teks di sekelilingnya.
* Butir &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;s&gt;A&lt;/s&gt;) akan menambahkan garis yang melintasi teks terpilih.
* Butir &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}&quot; (sepasang kurung kurawal: {}) akan mengubah fon teks terpilih menjadi fon ''monospace'' (lebar karakter tetap), yang membedakannya dengan teks di sekelilingnya (lebar karakter proporsional).
* Butir &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;u&gt;A&lt;/u&gt;) akan menambahkan garis di bawah teks terpilih.
* Butir &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}&quot; (文A) memungkinkan Anda untuk menandai bahasa (misalnya, bahasa Jepang) dan arah penulisan (misalnya, kanan-ke-kiri) dari teks terpilih.
* Butir terakhir ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), bernama &quot;{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}&quot;, akan menghapus semua pemformatan karakter dari teks terpilih, termasuk pranala.

Jika Anda tidak memilih teks apa pun, maka saat Anda menekan &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; untuk membuka menu ini dan memilih sebuah butir, pemformatan tersebut akan diterapkan pada teks yang mulai Anda ketikkan, dari mana pun lokasi kursor Anda.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Alat pranala:''' Ikon rantai adalah [[#Editing links|alat pranala]]. Menekannya (umumnya setelah memilih beberapa teks) akan membuka [[#Editing links|dialog pranala]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''Menu {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}:''' Menu {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} digunakan untuk menambahkan kutipan ke dalam baris (disebut juga dengan &quot;catatan kaki&quot; atau &quot;referensi&quot;). Semua proyek memiliki akses untuk memformat referensi dasar dan menggunakan kembali kutipan melalui menu ini. Menu ini juga memberikan pengguna akses cepat ke templat kutipan lokal, jika diaktifkan di wiki mereka.

(Petunjuk untuk menambahkan templat kutipan lokal pada menu {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} untuk suatu wiki tertentu tersedia di {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''Tombol {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jika layanan citoid diaktifkan pada wiki Anda, maka Anda akan melihat tombol {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}, bukan menu {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

Layanan citoid akan mencoba mengisi templat kutipan secara otomatis.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Struktur:''' Dua butir pertama memungkinkan Anda untuk memformat teks sebagai &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}&quot; atau &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}&quot;. Dua butir terakhir memungkinkan Anda untuk mengurangi atau menambah tingkatan inden dari butir daftar.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' Menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; mungkin berbeda-beda di beberapa proyek. Di bawah ini adalah daftar '''semua''' pilihan yang mungkin muncul.
* Butir &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; membuka [[#Editing images and other media files|dialog media]].
* Butir &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot; memungkinkan Anda untuk [[#Editing templates|menyunting templat]].
* Butir &quot;Tabel&quot; memungkinkan Anda untuk menyisipkan sebuah tabel.
* Butir &quot;{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}&quot; memungkinkan Anda untuk menyisipkan komentar-komentar yang tidak terlihat oleh pembaca; komentar ini hanya dapat terlihat ketika berada dalam mode penyuntingan, di mana mereka akan ditandai dengan ikon tanda seru. Dalam mode penyuntingan, menekan ikon tanda seru tersebut memungkinkan Anda untuk menyunting atau menghapus komentar tersebut.
* Butir &quot;{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}&quot; memungkinkan Anda untuk masuk ke penyisip hieroglif. (Lihat di bawah.)
* Butir &quot;Blok kode&quot; memungkinkan Anda untuk menyisipkan kode.
* Butir &quot;Notasi musik&quot; memungkinkan Anda untuk menyisipkan sebuah notasi musik.
* Butir &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; memungkinkan Anda untuk menyisipkan sebuah galeri ke dalam halaman.
* Butir &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; membuka [[#Editing mathematical formulae|dialog penyisipan rumus]].
* Butir &quot;Grafik&quot; memungkinkan Anda untuk menyisipkan sebuah grafik.
* Butir &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}&quot; memungkinkan Anda untuk menyisipkan sebuah tanda tangan yang Anda gunakan di proyek tersebut. Butir ini akan diabu-abukan (tidak dapat dipilih) saat Anda menyunting jenis halaman (sebuah &quot;ruang nama&quot;), seperti artikel, di mana tanda tangan tidak seharusnya disisipkan.
* Butir &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; membuka sebuah dialog di mana Anda bisa menentukan di mana daftar referensi akan ditampilkan kepada pembaca. Umumnya hal ini hanya perlu dilakukan satu kali saja dalam satu halaman.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Penyisipan karakter khusus:''' Ikon &quot;{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}&quot; (Ω) tepat berada di samping menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. Ketika ditekan, ia akan menampilkan sebuah dialog yang memuat banyak karakter khusus. Dengan menekan suatu karakter, Anda akan menempatkannya pada teks. Karakter khusus ini meliputi beberapa simbol standar, diakritik, dan simbol matematika. (Daftar ini dapat disesuaikan secara lokal. Lihat {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} untuk petunjuknya.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| Tombol '''Pemberitahuan suntingan''' menampilkan pemberitahuan yang ada untuk halaman tersebut.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Menu '''$pagemenu''' berada di sebelah kiri tombol ''$save'' dan menu ''Beralih penyunting''. Pada menu ini, terdapat sebuah tombol untuk membuka dialog '''Opsi''' dengan tab-tab (sisi kiri) sebagai berikut:&lt;/span&gt;

* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' memungkinkan Anda untuk menambahkan kategori ke halaman, dan mengatur bagaimana halaman diurutkan ketika ditampilkan dalam kategori dengan menetapkan indeks yang berbeda.
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' memungkinkan Anda untuk membuat halaman sebagai pengalihan dan menyesuaikan opsi pengalihan tersebut, untuk menyesuaikan pengaturan terkait penampilan Daftar Isi, untuk menonaktifkan pranala sunting di setiap judul bagian, serta untuk menentukan halaman sebagai halaman disambiguasi.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Pengaturan lanjut''' memungkinkan Anda untuk menyesuaikan pengaturan terkait pengindeksan halaman oleh mesin pencari, penampilan tab untuk menambahkan bagian baru, dan judul yang akan ditampilkan.&lt;/span&gt;
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' menampilkan daftar halaman dalam bahasa lain yang terhubung dengan halaman tersebut.
* '''Templat yang digunakan''' menampilkan daftar pranala ke masing-masing templat yang digunakan pada halaman tersebut.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Tab-tab dari dialog Opsi juga ditampilkan pada menu $pagemenu dan dapat dibuka dengan menekannya.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Selain itu, menu $pagemenu juga memiliki tombol '''Tampilkan kanan-ke-kiri''' dan tombol '''[[$1|Temukan dan ganti]]''' yang membuka sebuah dialog di mana Anda dapat memasukkan karakter, istilah maupun Ekspresi reguler yang ingin Anda cari dan apa yang akan menggantikan mereka. Bersama dengannya, terdapat juga dengan beberapa tombol untuk opsi.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Tombol '''beralih ke penyuntingan sumber''' berada di samping tombol '''$save'''. Tombol ini memungkinkan Anda untuk beralih ke penyunting teks wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Menerbitkan perubahan ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Ketika Anda telah selesai menyunting, tekan tombol &quot;{{int|publishchanges}}&quot; berwarna biru pada bilah alat. Jika Anda tidak membuat perubahan apa pun, tombol tersebut tidak dapat dipakai (diabu-abukan). Untuk membatalkan semua perubahan suntingan Anda, tutup jendela peramban Anda, atau tekan tab &quot;{{int|vector-view-view}}&quot; di atas bilah alat suntingan.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Menekan tombol &quot;{{int|publishchanges-start}}&quot; berwarna biru akan membuka sebuah dialog. Kemudian, Anda dapat memasukkan ringkasan singkat dari tindakan Anda, menandai suntingan Anda sebagai suntingan kecil, dan/atau menambahkan halaman tersebut ke dalam $watchlist Anda. Kotak untuk ringkasan ini serupa dengan bidang {{int|summary}} pada penyunting teks wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

Anda juga dapat meninjau perubahan Anda dengan menggunakan tombol &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; untuk mengkonfirmasi apakah semuanya berfungsi seperti yang Anda harapkan sebelum menyimpan perubahan Anda. Ini serupa dengan tombol &quot;{{int|showdiff}}&quot; pada penyunting teks wiki.

Tombol &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}&quot; mengembalikan Anda ke halaman yang sedang Anda sunting. Anda dapat menerbitkan semua perubahan Anda nanti.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Menyunting pranala ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Pranala dapat ditambahkan melalui ikon &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; pada bilah alat, atau dengan menggunakan pintasan {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (atau {{Key press|Command|K}} pada Mac).

Jika Anda memilih (menyorot) teks lalu menekan tombol &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot;, teks tersebut akan digunakan saat membuat pranala. Untuk pranala yang memiliki satu kata saja, Anda dapat melakukannya dengan memilih keseluruhan kata, atau cukup dengan menempatkan kursor di dalam kata tersebut.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Baik menggunakan tombol maupun pintasan, sebuah dialog akan terbuka. Di dalamnya, Anda dapat mengetikkan pranala.
Alat pranala akan mencoba membantu pranala '''internal''' yang Anda buat dengan mencari kecocokan yang mungkin.
Saat Anda telah memasukkan atau memilih pranala, Anda dapat menyelesaikan proses penautan tersebut dengan menekan {{key press|Enter}}, atau dengan menekan tombol &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot;. Pranala Anda akan langsung tampil di halaman, namun sama seperti perubahan pada halaman lainnya, pranala yang Anda buat tidak akan diterbitkan sampai Anda menyimpan ''keseluruhan'' halaman.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Untuk memberikan pranala ke sebuah halaman web atau situs web lainnya, prosesnya sama: Pilih tab &quot;{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}&quot;, dan masukkan URL dalam kotak tersebut.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Pranala luar tanpa label akan terlihat seperti ini: [http://example.com]. Anda dapat menambahkan pranala seperti ini dengan menempatkan kursor Anda di luar kata (misalnya, di setelah spasi). Buka alat pranala dengan menekan pada tombol atau dengan menekan tombol pintasan. Ketikkan URL pada kotak yang tersedia, lalu tekan tombol &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; untuk menyisipkan pranala tersebut.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Untuk mengubah atau menghapus pranala yang ada, tekan teks pranalanya, lalu tekan ikon &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; yang muncul di dekatnya. Dialog untuk menyunting akan muncul. Anda juga dapat membuka dialog tersebut dengan pintasan papan tombol {{key press|Ctrl|K}}. Jika sebuah pranala dipilih, ia akan tampak seperti dibingkai biru.

Pada kotak dialog penyuntingan pranala, kemudian Anda dapat mengubah ke mana pranala tersebut diarahkan. Anda juga dapat menghapus keseluruhan pranala dengan menekan tombol &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; di tepi kanan atas dialog.
Anda juga dapat membuka tujuan pranala di jendela lainnya dengan menekan salinan pranala yang muncul di dalam kotak dialog. Anda mungkin ingin melakukannya untuk memeriksa apakah pranala luar tersebut benar.

Jika Anda ingin keluar dari label pranala (teks yang dimunculkan sebagai pranala) atau lanjut menulis setelah pranala ini, Anda dapat menekan {{Key press|→}}:
* Menekannya sekali akan menempatkan kursor Anda '''di akhir''' elemen yang dibuat menjadi pranala (dibingkai biru, untuk menyunting elemen ini).
* Menekannya dua kali akan menempatkan kursor Anda '''setelah''' elemen yang dibuat menjadi pranala, siap untuk menerima ketikan Anda untuk teks lainnya.

Untuk menyunting label pranala dari pranala yang ada, tekan label pranalanya lalu ketikkan label yang baru.
Namun, jika Anda ingin menggantik keseluruhan label, harap perhatikan:

* Jika Anda telah memilih (menyorot) keseluruhan label pranala, pranala tersebut akan terhapus dengan mengetikkan tombol apa saja.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Untuk mempertahankan tujuan pranala, Anda perlu menekan label pranalanya, gunakan tombol ''backspace'' dan ''delete'' tanpa menekannya berkali-kali lebih dari yang diperlukan, dan area pranala biru yang sempit akan tetap ada.&lt;/span&gt; Kini Anda dapat mengetikkan label baru untuk tujuan pranala yang sudah dipertahankan.
* Anda juga dapat [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|membuat pranala ke kategori, berkas dan lainnya]].
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Menyunting referensi ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Bantuan menggunakan templat kutipan]] atau [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Bantuan menggunakan tombol {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} Citoid]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== Menentukan sistem mana yang dipakai ===
|-
| Wiki Anda mungkin menggunakan salah satu dari tiga sistem catatan kaki. Yang ditampilkan di sebelah kanan ini adalah sistem yang paling sederhana, di mana menu &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; tidak menyertakan templat kutipan apa pun. Jika wiki Anda menggunakan sistem ini, maka semua hal yang perlu Anda ketahui mengenai catatan kaki ada di halaman ini.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Sistem kedua memiliki jenis menu &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; yang sama, namun dilengkapi dengan beberapa templat kutipan populer yang diatur untuk akses cepat. Jika wiki Anda menggunakan sistem ini, maka Anda akan menemukan rincian selengkapnya di {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Di sistem ketiga, Anda juga memulainya dengan menekan tombol Kutip.&lt;/span&gt; Lalu sebuah kotak dialog akan terbuka. Di dalamnya, Anda dapat menemukan proses kutipan otomatis dengan menggunakan layanan Citoid. Jika wiki Anda menggunakan sistem ini, maka Anda akan menemukan rincian selengkapnya di {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Menyunting referensi yang ada ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Untuk menyunting referensi yang ada, tekan tepat di mana referensi itu muncul pada teks (biasanya sebagai angka dengan tanda kurung). Anda akan melihat sebuah ikon &quot;$ref&quot; (penanda buku) atau sebuah ikon dan nama dari templat yang digunakan untuk membuat referensi tersebut. Apa pun yang muncul, menekan tombol &quot;Sunting&quot; akan membuka sebuah dialog di mana Anda dapat menyuting referensi tersebut.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Untuk ikon &quot;$ref&quot;, menekan &quot;Sunting&quot; akan membuka dialog Referensi. Untuk mulai mengubah informasi referensi, tekan teks tersebut.&lt;/span&gt;

Banyak wiki menggunakan templat untuk memformat referensi. Jika templat digunakan pada referensi Anda, maka ketika Anda melayangkan tetikus di atas informasi referensi tersebut, semua informasi pada bidang akan disorot.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jika templat digunakan dan Anda menekan informasi referensinya, maka ikon $template (potongan ''puzzle'') akan muncul bersamaan dengan beberapa informasi. Tekan tombol &quot;Sunting&quot; untuk menyunting isi templat pada dialog penyunting-mini untuk templat.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jika yang muncul ketika Anda menekan referensi adalah ikon untuk templat standar untuk kutipan (contohnya di sebelah kanan ini), menekan &quot;Sunting&quot; akan membuka dialog penyunting-mini untuk templat.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Di dalam penyunting-mini untuk templat, Anda dapat menambah atau menghapus jenis informasi, atau mengubah isi yang ada. Hanya bidang (parameter templat) yang memiliki isi yang akan ditampilkan, di awal. Untuk menambahkan bidang, tekan &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; di bawah penyunting-mini.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Tekan &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; ketika Anda sudah selesai. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Menggunakan kembali referensi yang ada ===
|-
| Jika halaman sudah memiliki kutipan yang dapat diterapkan pada teks yang ingin Anda tambahkan sumbernya, maka Anda dapat menggunakan kembali kutipan yang ada tersebut.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Untuk menggunakan kembali referensi yang ada, letakkan kursor Anda di badan teks tempat Anda ingin menambahkan (nomor) referensi baru untuk kutipan tersebut. Lalu tekan butir &quot;Pakai ulang&quot; dari menu &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(Catatan: Jika wiki Anda menggunakan sistem catatan kaki ketiga seperti yang dijelaskan di atas, Anda akan melihat tab &quot;Pakai ulang&quot;, di dalam dialog, bukan butir &quot;Pakai ulang&quot; dalam menu &quot;$cite&quot;.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Pada dialog {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}}, cari referensi yang ingin Anda gunakan kembali di dalam daftar yang tersedia, lalu pilihlah. Jika terdapat banyak referensi, Anda dapat menggunakan kotak pencarian (berlabel &quot;{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}&quot;) untuk hanya mencantumkan referensi yang memuat teks tertentu.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Menambahkan referensi baru ===
|-
| Untuk menambahkan kutipan menggunakan menu &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;, letakkan kursor Anda di tempat Anda ingin menyisipkan referensi pada teks. Lalu pilih jenis kutipan yang sesuai pada menu.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Menggunakan kutipan &quot;Dasar&quot; ====
|-
| Yang ditampilkan di sini adalah apa yang akan Anda lihat jika Anda memilih butir referensi dasar.  Pada penyunting referensi, Anda dapat menambahkan kutipan Anda, termasuk pemformatan.

Anda dapat memasukkan referensi ke dalam kelompok tertentu, walaupun biasanya bidang ini dibiarkan kosong. (Opsi ini digunakan untuk menampilkan kelompok referensi dengan alat &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot;.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Pada dialog Referensi, jika Anda ingin menyertakan templat kutipan, atau pun templat lainnya, dalam referensi baru Anda, tekan ikon {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} (potongan ''puzzle'') pada menu bilah alat &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; di dalam penyunting referensi.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Kemudian, cari templat yang ingin Anda gunakan, tambahkan dan sunting templat tersebut sama seperti yang Anda lakukan pada templat-templat lainnya. (Lihat bagian [[#Editing templates|menyunting templat]] di bawah, jika Anda memerlukan informasi lebih lanjut mengenai templat.)

Setelah Anda selesai menyunting templat baru Anda, tekan &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; untuk kembali ke penyunting referensi, dan &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; sekali lagi untuk kembali ke halaman yang sedang Anda sunting.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Jika halaman belum memiliki daftar referensi (misalnya, jika Anda menambahkan referensi pertama pada halaman), Anda harus menentukan di mana daftar referensi, dan teksnya, akan ditampilkan kepada pembaca.

Letakkan kursor di tempat Anda ingin menampilkan daftar referensinya (biasanya di bagian bawah halaman), buka menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;, dan tekan ikon &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (tiga buku).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Jika Anda menggunakan beberapa kelompok referensi, di mana kejadian ini cukup jarang, Anda dapat menentukan kelompok tersebut dalam dialog ini. Hanya referensi yang masuk ke dalam kelompok tersebut yang akan ditampilkan pada halaman di lokasi di mana Anda menempatkan kelompoknya.

Langkah terakhir di dialog daftar Referensi adalah menekan &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Menggunakan templat kutip standar ====
|-
| Wiki lokal Anda mungkin memiliki templat kutip tambahan pada menu &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;. Jika demikian, Anda memiliki akses cepat ke templat kutipan yang paling sering digunakan di wiki Anda. (Petunjuk untuk menambahkan templat kutipan tambahan ke wiki lokal Anda tersedia di {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Menekan ikon templat seperti &quot;Kutip buku&quot; akan membawa Anda ke penyunting-mini untuk templat dari templat tersebut. Bidang informasi yang penting mungkin ditandai dengan tanda bintang. Meskipun bidang-bidang yang umum akan ditampilkan, tidak semuanya harus diisi.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Untuk menambahkan lebih banyak parameter, gulir ke bawah di penyunting-mini untuk templat, dan tekan opsi &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

Tekan &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; ketika Anda sudah selesai.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Menyunting gambar dan berkas media lainnya ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Menyunting gambar ===
|-
| Untuk menambahkan gambar (atau berkas media jenis lain) baru ke dalam halaman, tekan ikon &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; (gambar pegunungan) pada menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. Gambar akan ditambahkan di posisi kursor Anda.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Menekan ikon &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; akan membuka sebuah dialog yang secara otomatis mencari berkas media yang berhubungan dengan judul halaman yang sedang Anda sunting di Wikimedia Commons dan wiki lokal Anda.

Anda dapat mengubah pencarian dengan mengubah teks yang ada pada kotak pencarian dalam dialog tersebut.

Untuk memilih sebuah berkas, tekan pada gambar mini dari gambar.

Gambar akan diletakkan pada halaman yang sedang Anda sunting.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Setelah gambar yang Anda pilih disisipkan ke dalam halaman, dialog lainnya akan terbuka. Dialog ini memungkinkan Anda untuk menambahkan atau menyunting takarir gambar. Takarir dapat memuat pemformatan dan pranala.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Dialog media juga memungkinkan Anda menambah takarir teks alternatif, untuk membantu pengguna yang menggunakan pembaca layar, atau yang telah menonaktifkan penampilan gambar.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Anda dapat mengatur beragam parameter untuk gambar di jendela &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot;. Ini termasuk penjajaran, jenis, dan ukuran gambar.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ketika Anda sudah selasai, tekan &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; untuk menutup dialog tersebut dan kembali menyunting halaman.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Untuk gambar yang telah ada, Anda dapat menambahkan atau menyunting takarir atau pengaturan lainnya dengan menekan gambarnya, lalu menekan ikon &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; yang muncul di bawah gambar tersebut.

Anda dapat mengubah ukuran gambar yang ada dengan menekannya, kemudian menggerakkan ikon ubah ukuran (panah bermata dua di salah satu atau kedua pojok bawah).

Anda juga dapat menyeret dan melepas gambar untuk meletakkannya lebih tinggi atau lebih rendah pada halaman.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== Mengunggah gambar ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Anda dapat mengunggah gambar dari sebuah tab pada dialog media, atau dengan menyeret dan melepas sebuah berkas ke dalam penyunting, atau dengan menempelkan gambar dari papan klip Anda.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Tekan tab &quot;Unggah&quot; dan pilih sebuah gambar dari komputer Anda. Anda dapat mengetikkan nama berkas, atau menyeret sebuah gambar ke dalam kotak. Jika Anda menyeret dan melepas sebuah gambar secara langsung ke dalam penyunting, atau menempelkan salah satu gambar dari papan klip Anda, tab ini akan terbuka secara otomatis.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Anda perlu menjelaskan gambar tersebut dan menambahkan kategori pada gambar sehingga bisa ditemukan oleh orang lain.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Gambar akan disisipkan ke dalam halaman ketika Anda sudah selesai.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Menyunting galeri media ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Untuk menambahkan galeri baru, tekan ikon &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (sekumpulan foto) pada menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. (Jika Anda tidak melihat ikon ini di dalam menu, berarti wiki lokal Anda telah memutuskan untuk menunda implementasi fungsi ini di penyunting visual.) 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Untuk menyunting galeri yang ada di penyunting visual, tekan galeri tersebut. Kemudian, dekat bagian bawah galeri, tekan ikon galeri (sekumpulan foto). Ini akan memunculkan penyunting galeri, dengan daftar lengkap gambar yang disertakan pada galeri tersebut.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Penyunting galeri saat ini berupa kotak sederhana yang memungkinkan Anda untuk menyunting galeri yang ada dengan markah teks wiki. Untuk menambahkan gambar baru ke dalam sebuah galeri, ketikkan nama berkas, diikuti dengan tanda pipa (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) dan takarir untuk gambar tersebut. Anda harus meletakkan setiap gambar dalam galeri pada barisnya sendiri-sendiri.&lt;/span&gt; Anda juga dapat menyunting daftar ini untuk menghapus atau menyusun urutan gambar atau mengubah takarir.

Ketika Anda menekan tombol &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot;, Anda akan keluar dari penyunting galeri. Lalu, Anda seharusnya akan melihat perubahan yang telah Anda lakukan, dengan galeri seperti yang akan ditampilkan ke para pembaca.

Harap diingat bahwa keluar dari penyunting galeri tidak menerbitkan perubahan Anda. Sama seperti perubahan lainnya yang dibuat dengan penyunting visual, Anda harus menerbitkan keseluruhan halaman untuk menerbitkan apa yang telah Anda kerjakan.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Menyunting templat ==
Sistem templat MediaWiki yang kuat membolehkan Anda memasukkan konten dinamis, teks dari halaman lain, dan lebih banyak lagi. Untuk penjelasan lebih lanjut dan contohnya, lihatlah [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|halaman bantuan Templat]]. 

Di VisualEditor, Anda bisa mencari templat yang relevan, menambahkan pemanggilan atau [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transklusi]] templat tersebut di halaman yang sedagn Anda sutning dan, jika diperlukan, menambahkan konten penyesuaian menggunakan [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameter]].

=== Memasukkan templat baru ===
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Untuk menambahkan templat pada halaman, letakkan kursor Anda di tempat di halaman di mana Anda ingin menyisipkan templat tersebut, Lalu buka menu {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} dan pilih &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;. Selain itu, mengetik dua tanda kurung kurawal {{((}} bisa membuka dialog yang sama.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Anda juga dapat menyunting templat yang sudah ada pada halaman. Ketika Anda menekan templat untuk memilihnya, templat tersebut akan menjadi berwarna biru, dan sebuah kotak yang menampilkan &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot; akan muncul. Lalu, tekan pranala &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; atau tekan dua kali templatnya untuk membuka templat.
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Beberapa templat tidak ditampilkan ke para pembaca. Pada penyunting visual, templat tersembunyi semacam ini tetap ditampilkan agar Anda bisa menekan dan menyunting atau menghapusnya. Nama dari templat akan ditampilkan di samping ikon tersebut dan ditulis dalam warna abu-abu.
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Parameter templat ===
|-
| Anda akan melihat kotak dialog ini ketika Anda menambahkan sebuah templat baru atau menyunting templat yang sudah diletakkan. Apa yang Anda lihat di dalam kotak bergantung pada apakah templat tersebut memiliki {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, metadata berguna yang ditambahkan oleh penyunting lain untuk mempermudah menyunting templat di Penyunting Visual.

Ketika tempat memiliki DataTemplat, Penyunting Visual bisa menggunakannya untuk memberikan isian dengan keterangan untuk Anda isi.


Untuk templat yang punya DataTemplat yang disediakan oleh komunitas, Penyunting Visual menampilkan daftar parameter-parameter bernama serta, biasanya, deskripsi dan instruksi yang menjelaskan arti dan format yang dibutuhkan untuk setiap nilai parameter.
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Adding undocumented parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter: “1”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter’s value: “en_US”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter: “2”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter’s value: “yes”&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Autogenerated parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Menyelesaikan suntingan Anda ===
|-
| Ketika Anda sudah selasai menyunting templat, Anda bisa menekan &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;. Lalu Anda bisa melihat pratayang suntingan Anda dan memastikan hasilnya tampak yang seperti yang Anda inginkan dan harapkan.

Anda juga mungkin melihat sebuah pesan galat, yang (seperti DataTemplat lainnya yang sudah disebutkan) merupakan konten dari komunitas dan beragam kegunaannya.
Anda mungkin perlu membaca dokumentasi templatnya untuk mengetahui masalah sebenarnya dari beberapa galat.
Jika Anda masih mendapat masalah, pertimbangkan untuk menulis masalah Anda di halaman pembicaraan templat.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Menyunting di gawai ''mobile'' ===
|-
| Ketika menyunting templat di halaman menggunakan Penyunting Visual di perangkat ''mobile'', Anda akan melihat bahwa bilah sisinya awalnya disembunyikan. Anda bisa membuatnya terlihat dengan menekan tombol &quot;Tampilkan/sembunyikan pilihan&quot;.

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Penggantian templat ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Menyunting daftar ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Anda dapat menggunakan penyunting visual untuk membuat daftar, atau mengubah format dari daftar yang ada. Terdapat dua jenis daftar: tak berurutan (berpoin) dan berurutan (bernomor).

Untuk membuat daftar baru, cukup tekan salah satu dari dua butir menu yang ditampilkan di sini. Atau, jika Anda sudah mengetikkan butir daftar (pada baris-baris yang terpisah), pilih (sorot) butir tersebut, lalu tekan salah satu butir menu daftar.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Yang ditampilkan di sini adalah contoh dari dua jenis daftar: tak berurutan (berpoin) dan berurutan (bernomor).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Jika Anda ingin mengubah tingkatan inden beberapa butir dari daftar yang ada, pilih bagian dari daftar yang ingin Anda ubah.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Lalu gunakan menu, atau tekan tombol Tab. (Tombol Tab akan menambah inden; tombol Tab disertai dengan tombol Shift akan mengurangi inden)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Berikut ini adalah hasil dari inden yang sudah ditambahkan.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Anda bahkan dapat mencampur daftar tak berurutan (berpoin) dengan daftar berurutan (bernomor), jika butir daftar memiliki tingkatan inden yang berbeda.
|}

== Menyunting tabel ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Anda dapat menggunakan penyunting visual untuk menyisipkan dan mengubah tabel.

Anda bahkan dapat mengimpor tabel dengan menyeret berkas nilai dipisahkan koma (.csv) dari komputer Anda ke jendela penyuntingan utama.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ketika Anda menekan &quot;Tabel&quot; pada menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;, penyunting visual akan menyisipkan sebuah tabel kosong empat-kali-empat.

Sekarang menu &quot;Tabel&quot; akan tersedia. Dari menu tersebut, Anda dapat menambahkan takarir di bagian atas tabel.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Untuk memilih suatu sel, tekan sekali.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Untuk menyunting isi dari sel (misalnya, untuk menambah isi atau memperbaiki kesalahan eja), tekan ganda pada cel. Atau Anda dapat memilih sel dan kemudian menekan Enter.

Untuk mengakhiri penyuntingan Anda pada suatu sel, cukup tekan di tempat lain.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| Anda dapat menambah, memindahkan atau menghapus sebuah kolom maupun baris.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Anda dapat menggabungkan sel: Pilih beberapa sel, lalu dari menu Tabel, tekan &quot;Gabungkan sel&quot;.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Jika Anda menggabungkan sel, hanya teks dari satu sel yang dipertahankan; teks apa pun pada sel lainnya akan dihapus saat Anda menggabungkannya. Jika Anda memutuskan bahwa Anda memerlukan beberapa atau semua teks yang terhapus, gunakan tombol Urungkan, pindahkan atau salin teks yang Anda inginkan, lalu gabungkan selnya kembali.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Anda juga dapat memisah sel yang telah digabung sebelumnya. Semua isi yang sebelumnya ada di dalam sel yang digabung akan berada di dalam sel pertama ketika Anda memisahkannya. Anda kemudian dapat memotong dan menempel teksnya ke sel lain jika mau.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Menyunting kategori ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| Untuk menyunting kategori, pada menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot;, tekan butir &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Menekan &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; akan membuka sebuah dialog yang mendaftarkan kategori-kategori yang ada dan memungkinkan Anda untuk menambahkan kategori yang baru, dan menghapus kategori yang ada.

Anda juga memiliki pilihan untuk menetapkan atau mengubah [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|kunci pengurutan]] (baku) yang umum, yang akan menentukan di mana halaman akan muncul ketika didaftarkan bersamaan dengan halaman lain yang berada dalam kategori yang sama.

Misalnya, kunci pengurutan baku untuk artikel &quot;Joko Widodo&quot; adalah &quot;Widodo, Joko&quot;. Dalam kategori &quot;Presiden Indonesia&quot;, artikel akan didaftarkan di bawah huruf &quot;W&quot;, bukan huruf &quot;J&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Untuk menambahkan kategori baru pada halaman, ketikkan nama kategori dalam bidang &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}&quot;. Selagi Anda mengetik, penyunting visual akan mencari kecocokan yang mungkin dari kategori yang ada. Anda dapat memilih untuk menggunakan kategori yang ada, atau menambahkan kategori yang belum memiliki halaman kategorinya sendiri. (Sampai halaman kategori tersebut dibuat, kategori baru Anda akan tampil sebagai pranala merah setelah Anda menerbitkan semua perubahan penyuntingan Anda.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Untuk menghapus kategori yang ada, tekan kategori tersebut dan tekan ikon &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; (tong sampah) pada dialog yang terbuka.

Menekan kategori juga memungkinkan Anda untuk menentukan kunci pengurutan untuk kategori tertentu tersebut. Kunci pengurutan semacam ini akan menimpa kunci pengurutan baku.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Tekan &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; ketika Anda sudah selesai menyunting kategori untuk kembali ke penyunting halaman.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Menyunting pengaturan halaman ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| Untuk menyunting pengaturan halaman, tekan ikon untuk membuka menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot;, pada bilah alat, lalu pilih tombol &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Tombol &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; akan membuka sebuah dialog yang berisi beberapa opsi.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Anda dapat membuat sebuah halaman sebagai pengalihan ke halaman lain dengan mencentang kotak cek &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot;, lalu ketikkan nama halaman yang Anda inginkan yang akan menjadi tujuan pengarahan saat pembaca mencoba mengunjungi halaman yang sedang Anda sunting ini.

Di bagian bawah, terdapat opsi untuk mencegah pengubahan nama halaman untuk memperbarui pengalihan ini. Hal ini sangat jarang dilakukan.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Anda dapat mengubah apakah halaman menampilkan Daftar Isi atau tidak dengan memilih salah satu dari tiga tombol yang ada. Opsi bakunya adalah &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot;, yang menampilkan Daftar Isi jika terdapat tiga atau lebih sub-judul.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Anda dapat membuat halaman tidak menampilkan pranala sunting di samping setiap judul bagian dengan mencentang kotak cek ini.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Tekan &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; ketika Anda sudah selesai menyunting &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; untuk kembali ke penyunting halaman.
|}

== Menyunting peta ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Anda dapat menambahkan dan mengubah peta. Lihat {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Menyunting rumus matematika ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Untuk menambahkan rumus matematika baru pada halaman, letakkan kursor Anda di tempat Anda ingin menyisipkannya, dan tekan ikon &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (&quot;Σ&quot;) dalam menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; pada bilah alat.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Sebuah jendela akan terbuka. Di dalamnya, Anda dapat mengetikkan rumus, menggunakan sintaks LaTeX. Penyunting visual akan memperbarui rumus ketika Anda mengetikkannya, sehingga Anda dapat melihat bagaimana tampilannya ketika Anda melakukan perubahan. Ketika Anda puas dengan rumusnya, tekan tombol &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Untuk menyunting rumus matematika yang ada pada halaman, tekan rumus tersebut dan kemudian tekan ikon &quot;Σ&quot; yang muncul. Tindakan ini akan membuka jendela rumus, di mana Anda dapat melakukan perubahan.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Rumus matematika dapat ditempatkan sebaris atau diketengahkan sebagai blok.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Menyunting partitur musik ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Untuk menambahkan notasi musik baru pada halaman, letakkan kursor Anda di tempat Anda ingin menyisipkannya. Lalu, dari menu &quot;Sisipkan&quot; pada bilah alat, tekan opsi &quot;Notasi musik&quot;.

Untuk menyunting notasi musik yang ada pada halaman, tekan ganda notasi tersebut.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ini akan membuka dialog &quot;Notasi musik&quot;. Di sini notasi dapat disunting berdasarkan skala, baik dalam format ABC maupun Lilypond. Anda juga dapat menautkan notasi ke berkas audio atau MIDI. Ketika Anda sudah selesai, tekan tombol &quot;Selesai&quot; untuk menutup dialog dan menerapkan perubahan Anda.
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Menyunting puisi dan butir istimewa lainnya ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Beberapa butir, seperti daftar asosiasi dan puisi, saat ini belum didukung penuh oleh penyunting visual.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Dalam kebanyakan kasus, butir yang ada dapat disunting, namun butir baru tidak dapat disisipkan melalui penyunting visual.

Hingga didukung sepenuhnya, Anda dapat menyalin butir semacam ini dari satu halaman ke halaman lainnya, atau menyunting langsung sumber teks wikinya.

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== Beralih antara penyunting visual dan teks wiki ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
Untuk beralih dari penyunting visual ke penyunting teks wiki, tekan tombol &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; pada ujung kanan bilah alat.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Anda akan melihat perbedaannya. (Jika Anda menekan &quot;Buang perubahan&quot;, Anda hanya akan melihat teks wiki, siap disunting dengan penyunting teks wiki.)

Gulir ke bawah, dan Anda akan melihat area penyuntingan teks wiki. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
Anda juga dapat beralih dari penyunting teks wiki ke penyunting visual. Untuk melakukannya, tekan ikon pensil pada ujung kanan bilah alat.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Pintasan papan tombol ==

Banyak pengguna terbiasa memasukkan teks wiki secara langsung, khususnya cetak tebal, miring dan pranala wiki. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Pintasan papan tombol]] memungkinkan pengguna memasukkan pemformatan serupa dengan cepat tanpa harus menggunakan butir bilah alat. Berikut adalah pintasan umum pada penyunting visual:

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! Pintasan PC
! Tindakan
! Pintasan Mac
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Tebal
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Miring
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Pranala
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Potong
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Salin
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Tempel
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Urungkan
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>fouvfmzzd6b5s5n03y2oxm0trf0b0jp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ca</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>133645</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402760</id>
      <parentid>5346960</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:38:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="62613" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Si voleu provar l'editor visual sense modificar cap article, [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} aquí hi ha una pàgina] on podeu provar-lo lliurement.&lt;/span&gt; Per usar l'editor visual en aquella pàgina no cal tenir un compte.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Obrir l'editor visual ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| Per a modificar (&quot;editar&quot;) una pàgina emprant l'editor visual, seleccioneu la pestanya &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; de dalt de tot de la pàgina.

L'editor pot trigar uns segons a obrir la pàgina, o més si la pàgina és molt llarga.

Pitjant a la pestanya &quot;{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}&quot; s'obre l'editor clàssic de codi wikitext.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| També podeu obrir l'editor visual seleccionant l'enllaç &quot;{{int|editsection}}&quot; que hi ha a cada secció.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Per començar: la barra d'eines de l'editor visual ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Captura de pantalla de la barra d'eines de l'editor visual]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | Quan comenceu a fer modificacions amb l'editor visual, apareix a dalt de tot de la pantalla una barra d'eines que conté unes icones familiars:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' i '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''', per desfer i refer els canvis que heu fet.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Menú desplegable '''Encapçalaments''': us permet canviar el format del text. Primer heu de col·locar el cursor al paràgraf que voleu canviar d'estil i després escollir un element d'aquest menú (no cal seleccionar cap text). Els títols de secció s'anomenen &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}&quot;, i els de les subseccions són &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}&quot;, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}&quot;, etc. El format normal per a text és &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Format:''' En seleccionar el botó &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; s'obre un menú. 
* La icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}&quot; ('''B''') posa en negreta el text seleccionat.
* La icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}&quot; (''I'') posa en cursiva el text seleccionat.
* La icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) fa que el text seleccionat aparegui més petit i lleugerament més alçat que el text circumdant.
* La icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) fa que el text seleccionat aparegui més petit i lleugerament més abaixat que el text circumdant.
* La icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) ratlla el text seleccionat.
* La icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}&quot; (un parell de claus: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) posa el text seleccionat en un tipus de lletra monoespaiada, cosa que el diferencia del text circumdant (que té lletra espaiada proporcionalment).
* La icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) subratlla el text seleccionat.
* La icona {{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}} (文A) us permet etiquetar l'idioma (per exemple, japonès) i la direcció (per exemple, de dreta a esquerra) del text seleccionat.
* L'última icona ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), anomenada &quot;{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}&quot;, treu al text seleccionat tot el format de caràcter, fins i tot els enllaços.

Si no heu seleccionat cap text, quan premeu &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; per obrir el menú i en seleccioneu un element, la formatació escollida s'aplicarà al text que escriviu a continuació, a partir de la posició actual del cursor.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Eina d'enllaçar:''' La icona de la cadena és l'[[#Editing links|eina d'enllaçar]]. En clicar-hi (normalment després de seleccionar algun text) s'obre el [[#Editing links|diàleg d'enllaços]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''Menú {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}:''' El menú &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; serveix per afegir citacions dins del text (també anomenades &quot;notes a peu de pàgina&quot; o &quot;referències&quot;). Mitjançant aquest menú, tots els projectes tenen accés al formatatge bàsic de referències i la capacitat de reutilitzar les citacions. També dona als usuaris un accés ràpid a les plantilles locals de citació, si és que estan habilitades al wiki que estan utilitzant.

(Les instruccions per afegir plantilles locals de citació al menú {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} d'un wiki específic són disponibles a {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''Botó {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si el servei Citoid és habilitat al vostre wiki, veureu un botó {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} en comptes del menú {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

El servei Citoid procura omplir automàticament les plantilles de citació.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Llistes i sagnia:''' Les dues primeres icones us permeten crear llistes numerades o puntades, respectivament. Les últimes dues augmenten o redueixen el nivell de sagnat del contingut.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' El menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; pot ser diferent en alguns projectes. Més avall hi ha una llista de '''totes''' les opcions que hi poden aparèixer.
* La icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; (una imatge de muntanyes) obre el [[#Editing images and other media files|diàleg de mitjans]].
* La icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot; (una peça de trencaclosques) us permet [[#Editing templates|editar plantilles]].
* L'element &quot;Taula&quot; us permet inserir una taula.
* L'element &quot;{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}&quot; (una bafarada) us permet inserir comentaris que no són visibles pels lectors; aquests comentaris només es poden veure quan s'és en mode edició, i s'indiquen amb una icona de signe d'exclamació. En mode edició, prement la icona de signe d'exclamació, podeu modificar o esborrar el comentari.
* La icona &quot;{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}&quot; (un símbol d'[[:w:ca:ankh|ankh]]: ☥) us permet entrar a l'inseridor de jeroglífics. (Vegeu més avall.)
* L'element &quot;Bloc de codi&quot; us permet inserir codi.
* L'element &quot;Notació musical&quot; us permet inserir una notació musical.
* La icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (un grup de fotos) us permet inserir una galeria de fotos a la pàgina.
* La icona &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (Σ) obre el [[#Editing mathematical formulae|diàleg per inserir fórmules]].
* L'element &quot;Gràfic&quot; us permet inserir un gràfic.
* L'element &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}&quot; us permet inserir una signatura que feu servir en el projecte. Apareixerà en gris (que indica que no es pot seleccionar) quan estigueu modificant un tipus de pàgina (un &quot;espai de noms&quot;), com ara un article, on no s'hi haurien d'inserir signatures.
* La icona de &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (tres llibres) obre un diàleg on podeu especificar on es mostraran al lector les referències. Normalment només cal fer-ho un cop per pàgina.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Inserció de caràcters especials:''' La icona de &quot;{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}&quot; (Ω) és al costat del menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. Quan la premeu, mostra un diàleg amb molts caràcters especials. Prement en un dels caràcters, el col·loqueu en el text. Entre els caràcters especials hi ha alguns signes estàndard, diacrítics i signes matemàtics. (Aquesta llista pot estar personalitzada localment. Per a les instruccions, vegeu {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}}.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| El botó '''Notificacions d'edició''' mostra les notificacions que hi pugui haver sobre la pàgina.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;El menú '''$pagemenu''' és a l'esquerra del botó ''$save'' i del menú ''Canvia l'editor''. En aquest menú hi ha un botó per obrir un quadre de diàleg '''Opcions''' amb les pestanyes següents (a l'esquerra):&lt;/span&gt;

* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' permet afegir categories a la pàgina i definir una clau d'ordenament diferent per a ordenar aquesta pàgina en cada categoria.
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' permet convertir la pàgina en una redirecció i ajustar les opcions de la redirecció, triar quan s'ha de mostrar la taula de continguts, amagar els enllaços d'edició de l'encapçalament de les seccions, i definir la pàgina com a pàgina de desambiguació.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Configuració avançada''' permet triar si els cercadors han d'indexar la pàgina, mostrar una pestanya per a afegir una nova secció i modificar el títol mostrat.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' mostra una llista de pàgines en altres llengües que estan enllaçades a aquesta pàgina.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Plantilles utilitzades''' mostra una llista d'enllaços a les plantilles utilitzades en la pàgina.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Les pestanyes del quadre de diàleg Opcions també es mostren al menú $pagemenu i es poden obrir clicant-hi directament.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the items {{int|visualeditor-changedir-tool-ltr}} or {{int|visualeditor-changedir-tool-rtl}} and the item '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Find and replace|{{int|visualeditor-find-and-replace-title}}]]''', which opens a bar, where you can insert words or regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;L'ordre de '''canviar a edició de codi''' apareix desplegada quan es clica el botó que es troba al costat del botó '''$save'''. Us permet canviar a l'editor de codi font de wikitext.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Publicar (desar) els canvis ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Quan hàgiu acabat d'editar, pitgeu el botó blau &quot;{{int|publishchanges}}&quot; de la barra d'eines. Si no heu fet cap canvi, el botó estarà inhabilitat (en gris). Per cancel·lar totes les modificacions que heu fet, tanqueu la finestra del navegador o premeu la pestanya &quot;{{int|vector-view-view}}&quot; que hi ha damunt de la barra d'eines d'edició.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pitjant el botó blau &quot;{{int|publishchanges-start}}&quot; s'obre un diàleg on podeu introduir un breu resum de les vostres modificacions, marcar l'edició com a menor i afegir la pàgina a la vostra $watchlist. El requadre de resum equival al camp {{int|summary}} de l'editor de wikitext.&lt;/span&gt;

També, mitjançant el botó &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;, podeu revisar els canvis que heu fet, per assegurar-vos abans de desar-los que funcionen com preteníeu. Això és similar al botó &quot;{{int|showdiff}}&quot; de l'editor de wikitext.

El botó &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}&quot; us retorna a la pàgina que estàveu modificant. Podeu desar tots els canvis més endavant.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Editar enllaços ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Es poden afegir enllaços mitjançant la icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; (anelles enllaçades en una cadena) de la barra d'eines, o bé emprant la drecera {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (o {{Key press|Command|K}} a un Mac).

Si seleccioneu text i llavors premeu el botó &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot;, el text s'utilitzarà per crear l'enllaç. Si l'enllaç només ha de contenir una paraula, podeu escollir entre seleccionar la paraula i simplement posar el cursor dins de la paraula.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Quan empreu ja sigui el botó o la drecera, s'obrirà un diàleg on podreu teclejar l'enllaç.
L'eina d'enllaçar provarà d'ajudar amb els enllaços '''interns''' cercant possibles candidats.
Quan hàgiu escrit o seleccionat l'enllaç, completareu el procés pitjant {{key press|Retorn}} o pitjant el botó &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot;. L'enllaç apareixerà immediatament en la pàgina, però, com amb qualsevol canvi fet a la pàgina, no es desarà fins que no deseu ''tota'' la pàgina.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Per enllaçar amb una pàgina web d'un altre lloc web, el procés és similar: escolliu la pestanya &quot;{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}&quot; i introduïu l'URL al requadre.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Els enllaços externs sense etiquetes són així: [http://example.com]. Podeu afegir-los col·locant el cursor fora de tota paraula (per exemple, després d'un espai). Obriu l'eina d'enllaçar clicant al botó o prement les tecles d'accés directe. Teclegeu l'URL al requadre, i cliqueu al botó &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; per inserir l'enllaç.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Per canviar o esborrar un enllaç existent, cliqueu dins del text de l'enllaç i després premeu la icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; que apareix al costat. Apareixerà el diàleg d'edició. També podeu arribar al diàleg mitjançant la drecera de teclat {{key press|Ctrl|K}}. L'enllaç seleccionat es mostra amb un ressaltat blau.

Aleshores, al diàleg d'edició d'enllaços, podeu modificar on du l'enllaç. També hi podeu esborrar l'enllaç del tot pitjant el botó &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; (a dalt a la dreta).
També podeu obrir l'objectiu de l'enllaç en una altra finestra clicant a la còpia de l'enllaç present al diàleg. (Això us pot anar bé per comprovar si un enllaç extern és vàlid.)

Si voleu sortir de l'etiqueta de l'enllaç (el text mostrat com a enllaç) o seguir escrivint després d'aquest enllaç, podeu prémer la tecla {{Key press|→}}:
* Prement-la un cop es tancarà el diàleg d'edició d'enllaços i es posarà el cursor al final de l'element enllaçat (ressaltat en blau, per modificar aquest element)
* Prement-la dos cops es posarà el cursor després de l'element enllaçat, llest perquè pugueu teclejar la resta del text.

Per modificar l'etiqueta d'un enllaç existent, cliqueu dins de l'etiqueta i teclegeu l'etiqueta nova.
Però si voleu reemplaçar tota l'etiqueta, tingueu en compte això:

* Si heu seleccionat tota l'etiqueta, s'eliminarà l'enllaç quan premeu qualsevol tecla.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Per mantenir l'enllaç, podeu clicar dins de l'etiqueta i prémer retrocés ({{Key press|backspace}}) i supressió ({{Key press|delete}}) el nombre just de cops. Hi quedarà una àrea blava estreta que segueix sent un enllaç.&lt;/span&gt; Ara hi podreu teclejar l'etiqueta nova de l'enllaç.
* També podeu [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|enllaçar categories, fitxers i més]].
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Editar referències ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Com utilitzar les plantilles de citació]] o [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Com utilitzar el botó {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} de Citoid]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== Sistemes disponibles a la Viquipèdia ===
|-
| Podeu utilitzar qualsevol dels tres sistemes de notes a peu de pàgina, segons us convingui, després de clicar el botó &quot;Cita&quot;: &lt;br/&gt;
El primer sistema (mostrat a la dreta) és el de '''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}''', en el que es vol utilitzar una citació que ja s'estigui utilitzant en un altre lloc de l'article. Teniu el cercador per tal de buscar-lo. &lt;/br&gt;
S'explica amb una mica més de detall, a la següent secció.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| El segon sistema, o '''Manual''', permet afegir una citació segons algunes de les diferents plantilles establertes (''Lloc web'', ''Llibre'', ''Publicació'' i ''Tesi''), o la forma ''Bàsica'' que permet un text lliure. &lt;br/&gt;
Algun detall innecessari a {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;El tercer sistema, o '''Automàtic''', permet tan sols copiant la url que s'anoti el títol, autor, data, i altres; en molts casos.&lt;/span&gt; S'obre un quadre de diàleg on hi ha un procés de citació automàtica mitjançant el servei Citoid. &lt;/br&gt;
Algun detall innecessari a {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Editar una referència existent ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Per modificar una referència existent, feu-hi clic on apareix dins del text (normalment en forma de número entre claudàtors). Veureu una icona &quot;$ref&quot; (punt de llibre) o una icona (i un nom) de la plantilla utilitzada per crear aquesta referència. En qualsevol cas, clicant al botó &quot;Modifica&quot; obrireu un diàleg on podreu modificar la referència.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;En el cas de la icona &quot;$ref&quot;, clicant a &quot;Modifica&quot; s'obre el diàleg &quot;Referència&quot;. Per començar a canviar la informació de la referència, feu-hi clic.&lt;/span&gt;

Molts wikis usen plantilles per formatar les referències. Si en la referència en qüestió hi ha una plantilla, quan passeu el punter per damunt de la informació de la referència, es ressaltarà tota la informació del camp.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Si s'hi va utilitzar una plantilla i cliqueu a la informació de la referència, apareixerà la icona $template (peça de trencaclosques) amb alguna informació. Per modificar el contingut de la plantilla al diàleg mini-editor de plantilles, cliqueu al botó &quot;modifica&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si quan cliqueu a una referència apareix la icona d'una plantilla estàndard de citació (com a l'exemple de la dreta), clicant a &quot;Modifica&quot; s'obrirà el diàleg mini-editor de plantilles.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Dins del mini-editor de plantilles, podeu afegir o treure tipus d'informació o canviar-ne el contingut actual. Al principi, només hi apareixeran els camps (paràmetres de la plantilla) que tinguin contingut. Per afegir-hi camps, cliqueu a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; (al capdavall del mini-editor).&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Quan acabeu, feu clic a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Reutilitzar una referència ja existent ===
|-
| Si la pàgina ja conté una referència que serveix per documentar el text, la podeu reutilitzar.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Per reutilitzar una referència existent, col·loqueu el cursor al cos del text on voleu afegir una referència nova (número) d'aquesta citació, i després de clicar &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; feu clic a la pestanya &quot;Reutilitza&quot; de la finestra.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(Nota: Si el vostre wiki té el tercer dels sistemes de notes a peu de pàgina descrits més amunt, veureu una pestanya &quot;Reutilitza&quot; dins d'un diàleg, en comptes d'un element &quot;Reutilitza&quot; en el menú &quot;$cite&quot;.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Al diàleg {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}}, cerqueu a la llista la referència que voleu reutilitzar i seleccioneu-la. Si hi ha moltes referències, podeu utilitzar el quadre de cerca perquè es mostrin només les referències que continguin un text determinat (etiquetat com a «{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}»).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Afegir una nova referència ===
|-
| Per afegir una nova referència mitjançant el menú «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}», col·loqueu el cursor on la vulgueu afegir al text. A continuació, seleccioneu el tipus de cita adequat al menú.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Utilitzant la citació bàsica ====
|-
| Si seleccioneu l'element &quot;Forma bàsica&quot;, es mostrarà això.  En l'editor de referències podeu afegir la citació i donar-li format.

Podeu fer que la referència pertanyi a un grup determinat, tot i que normalment això es deixa en blanc. (Aquesta opció s'utilitza per mostrar grups de referències amb l'eina &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot;.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| En el diàleg de referències, si voleu incloure una plantilla de citació o qualsevol altra plantilla a la referència nova, feu clic a la icona {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} (la peça de trencaclosques) del menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; de l'editor de referències.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Aleshores, cerqueu la plantilla que voleu utilitzar, afegiu-la i modifiqueu-la com ho faríeu amb qualsevol altra. (Vegeu la secció [[#Editing templates|Editar plantilles]], més avall, si necessiteu més informació sobre les plantilles.)

Quan acabeu de modificar la plantilla nova, feu clic a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; per tornar a l'editor de referències, i torneu a fer clic a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; per tornar a la pàgina que esteu modificant.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Si encara no hi ha una llista de referències a la pàgina (per exemple, si heu afegit la primera referència de la pàgina), heu d'indicar on apareixeran la llista de referències i el seu text.

Col·loqueu el cursor on voleu mostrar la llista de referències (normalment al capdavall de la pàgina), obriu el menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; i feu clic a la icona &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (tres llibres).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Si esteu utilitzant diversos grups de referències (cosa poc freqüent), en aquest quadre de diàleg podeu indicar el grup. Al lloc de la pàgina on esteu col·locant el grup només es mostraran les referències que hi pertanyen.

El pas final a fer en el diàleg &quot;Llista de referències&quot; és clicar a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Utilitzar plantilles estàndard de citació ====
|-
| El vostre wiki local pot haver afegit plantilles de citació addicionals al menú &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;. Si és així, teniu un accés ràpid a les plantilles de citació més habituals del vostre wiki. (Les instruccions per afegir plantilles de citació addicionals al vostre wiki local són disponibles a {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Clicant a la icona d'una plantilla com ara &quot;Llibre&quot;, s'obrirà el mini-editor de plantilles d'aquella plantilla. Els camps importants poden estar marcats amb un asterisc. Encara que s'hi mostren els camps més comuns, no tots són necessaris.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Per afegir-hi més paràmetres, desplaceu-vos avall pel mini-editor de plantilles i cliqueu a l'opció &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

Quan acabeu, cliqueu a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Editar imatges i altres mitjans ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Editar imatges ===
|-
| Per afegir una nova imatge (o un altre tipus de fitxer multimèdia) a la pàgina, premeu la icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; (una imatge de muntanyes) al menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. La imatge s'afegirà allà on sigui el cursor.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Clicant la icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; s'obre un diàleg que busca automàticament a Wikimedia Commons i al vostre wiki  local els fitxers multimèdia relacionats amb el títol de la pàgina que esteu modificant.

Podeu buscar altres fitxers multimèdia canviant el text al diàleg de cerca.

Cliqueu una miniatura per a escollir un fitxer.

Això col·loca la imatge a la pàgina que esteu modificant.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Quan s'ha inserit a la pàgina la imatge que havíeu seleccionat, s'obre un altre diàleg que us permet afegir i modificar el peu de la imatge, que pot contenir format i enllaços.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| El diàleg de mitjans també us permet afegir peus amb text alternatiu per assistir els usuaris que empren lectors de pantalla o el que han inhabilitat que es mostrin les imatges.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| A  la finestra de &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot; podeu establir diversos paràmetres de la imatge, com ara l'alineació, el tipus i la mida.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Quan hàgiu acabat, cliqueu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; per a tancar el diàleg i tornar a la pàgina d'edició.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Si voleu afegir o modificar un peu o qualsevol altre configuració d'una imatge ja existent, cliqueu a la imatge i a continuació cliqueu a la icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; que hi apareix a sota.

Podeu redimensionar una imatge existent clicant-hi i a continuació movent la icona de redimensionament (la fletxa doble que hi ha en una de les cantonades inferiors o en totes dues).

També podeu arrossegar i deixar anar una imatge més amunt o més avall de la pàgina.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== Pujar imatges ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Podeu carregar imatges des d'una pestanya del diàleg d'inserció d'imatges i multimèdia, o bé arrossegant un fitxer a l'editor de text o copiant i enganxant.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Cliqueu a la pestanya &quot;Carrega&quot; i seleccioneu una imatge del vostre ordinador. Podeu teclejar-ne el nom de fitxer o bé arrossegar una imatge fins al quadre. Si heu arrossegat o enganxat una imatge a l'editor, la pestanya s'obrirà automàticament.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Cal que descriviu la imatge i li afegiu categories perquè els altres usuaris la puguin trobar.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Quan acabeu, la imatge s'inserirà a la pàgina.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Editar galeries de mitjans ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Per crear una galeria d'imatges, cliqueu a la icona de &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (un conjunt de fotos) del menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Per modificar a l'editor visual una galeria ja existent, cliqueu a la galeria. Llavors, cliqueu el botó &quot;Modifica&quot;. Això obre l'editor de galeries, amb tota la llista d'imatges incloses a la galeria.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Actualment, l'editor de galeries és un simple quadre que us permet modificar les galeries ja existents mitjançant codi de wikitext. Per afegir una imatge cliqueu el botó &quot;Afegeix una imatge nova&quot;, que obra una finestra per incloure el nom de la nova imatge i el text del peu.&lt;/span&gt; Podeu arrossegar amunt i avall la imatge per posar-la on creieu més adient. També podeu canviar el text del peu que creieu més convenient.

Quan cliqueu al botó «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}», sortireu de l'editor de galeries. Aleshores hauríeu de veure els canvis que heu fet, amb la galeria tal com apareixerà a partir d'ara als lectors.

Recordeu que sortir de l'editor de galeries no publica els canvis que heu fet. Com passa amb altres canvis fets mitjançant l'editor visual, per publicar la feina feta us cal publicar tota la pàgina.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Editar plantilles ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The powerful MediaWiki template system lets you insert dynamic content, text from other pages, and much more. For a detailed explanation and examples, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Templates help page]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the VisualEditor you can search for a relevant template, add an invocation or [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusion]] on the page you’re editing and, if needed, add custom content using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameters]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert new template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Per afegir una nova plantilla a una pàgina, col·loqueu el cursor on voleu inserir-la, i llavors feu clic a la icona &quot;$template&quot; (la peça de trencaclosques) del menú &quot;$insert&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then open the {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} menu and select &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, type two curly brackets {{((}} to open the same dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;També podeu modificar una plantilla que ja sigui a la pàgina. Quan cliqueu a la plantilla per seleccionar-la, es tornarà de color blau i apareixerà un quadre amb una icona &quot;$template&quot; (la peça de trencaclosques). Llavors cliqueu a l'enllaç &quot;$edit&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you select the template you want to edit, it turns blue, and a box appears displaying &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then select the &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; link  or double click on the template itself to open the template.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Algunes plantilles no són visibles als lectors d'una pàgina. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A l'editor visual, aquestes plantilles ocultes es mostren com a icones de trencaclosques.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;El nom de la plantilla es mostrarà al costat de la icona del trencaclosques.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Paràmetres de plantilla ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You’ll see this dialog box when you’re adding a new template or editing one already in place.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What you see in the box depends on whether the template in question contains {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, helpful metadata added by other editors to make it easier to edit templates in the Visual Editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When a template contains TemplateData, the VisualEditor can use it to present annotated fields for you to fill in.
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For templates that have some community-provided TemplateData, the VisualEditor displays a list of the named parameters and, often, descriptions and instructions explaining the meaning and required format for each parameter’s values.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Adding undocumented parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter: “1”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter’s value: “en_US”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter: “2”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter’s value: “yes”&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Autogenerated parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completing your edit ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Quan hàgiu acabat de modificar una plantilla, cliqueu a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; per a tancar el diàleg i tornar a la pàgina principal que estàveu modificant.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing on mobile ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Substituir plantilles ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Editar llistes ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Podeu utilitzar l'editor visual per crear llistes, o per canviar el format d'una llista ja existent. Hi ha dos tipus de llista: desordenades (puntejades) i ordenades (numerades).

Per crear una llista, només cal clicar en un dels dos elements de menú mostrats aquí, o, si ja heu teclejat la llista (en línies diferents), seleccionar la llista que heu teclejat i clicar en un dels elements de menú.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Aquí es mostren exemples de tots dos tipus de llista: les desordenades (puntejades) i les ordenades (numerades).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Si voleu canviar el nivell de sagnia de part d'una llista ja existent, seleccioneu la part de la llista que voleu canviar.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Llavors utilitzeu el menú o premeu la tecla de tabulador. (La tecla de tabulador incrementa la sagnia, mentre que la tecla de tabulador més la tecla de majúscules decrementa la sagnia.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Aquí hi ha el resultat de l'increment de sagnia.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Fins i tot podeu barrejar llistes ordenades (numerades) i desordenades (puntejades), si els elements de les llistes tenen sagnies diferents.
|}

== Editar taules ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Podeu utilitzar l'editor visual per inserir i modificar taules.

Fins i tot podeu importar una taula arrossegant un fitxer CSV (''comma-separated values'', valors separats per comes) del vostre ordinador i deixant-lo anar a la finestra principal d'edició.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Quan cliqueu a &quot;Taula&quot;, al menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;, l'editor visual insereix una taula de quatre per quatre en blanc.

Aleshores es fa disponible el menú &quot;Taula&quot;, des d'on podeu afegir un títol al capdamunt de la taula.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Per seleccionar una cel·la, feu-hi clic un cop.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Per modificar el contingut de la cel·la (com ara per afegir-hi contingut o per corregir un error ortogràfic), feu clic doble a la cel·la o seleccioneu la cel·la i premeu Retorn.

Per acabar la modificació de la cel·la, només cal clicar fora.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| Podeu afegir, moure o eliminar una columna o una fila.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Podeu fusionar cel·les: Seleccioneu-les i, al menú Taula, cliqueu a &quot;Fusiona les cel·les&quot;.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Quan fusioneu cel·les, només es manté el text d'una de les cel·les; tot el text de les altres cel·les s'elimina. Si voleu recuperar-lo, premeu el botó Desfés, traslladeu o copieu el text que voleu conservar i torneu a fusionar les cel·les.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| També podeu separar les cel·les que han estat fusionades. Quan les separeu, tot el contingut que era a la cel·la fusionada romandrà a la primera cel·la. Llavors podeu retallar el text i enganxar-lo a d'altres cel·les, si voleu.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Editar categories ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| Per modificar categories, al menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot;, cliqueu a l'element &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Clicant al botó &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; s'obre un quadre de diàleg que llista les categories existents i us permet afegir-ne de noves, i eliminar les categories existents.

També teniu l'opció d'establir o canviar la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|clau d'ordenació]] general (predeterminada), que determina on apareix la pàgina quan es llista amb les altres pàgines de la mateixa categoria.

Per exemple, la clau d'ordenació predeterminada de l'article &quot;George Washington&quot; és &quot;Washington, George&quot;. Per això, a la categoria &quot;Presidents dels Estats Units&quot;, l'article es llista sota la lletra &quot;W&quot; i no la &quot;G&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Per afegir una categoria en una pàgina, teclegeu el nom de la categoria en el camp &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}&quot;. A mesura que teclegeu, l'editor visual anirà cercant candidats possibles d'entre les categories existents. Podeu seleccionar una categoria existent o afegir-ne una que encara no tingui pàgina de categoria. (Quan publiqueu totes les modificacions, i fins que no es creï la pàgina de categoria, la categoria nova apareixerà com a enllaç vermell.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Per esborrar una categoria, feu-hi clic a sobre i llavors feu clic a la icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; (paperera) en el quadre de diàleg que s'obre.

Clicant a una categoria també podeu indicar-li una clau d'ordenació a aquesta categoria específica. Aquesta clau d'ordenació té prioritat sobre la clau d'ordenació predeterminada.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Feu clic a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; quan acabeu de modificar les categories, i tornareu a l'editor de la pàgina.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Editar paràmetres de la pàgina ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| Per modificar la configuració de la pàgina, cliqueu al menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; i seleccioneu el botó &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| El botó &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; fa que s'obri un diàleg que mostra diverses opcions.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Podeu fer que una pàgina redirigeixi cap a una altra marcant la casella de selecció &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot; i teclejant el nom de la pàgina cap a on voleu enviar el lector que provi d'anar a la pàgina que esteu modificant.

Al capdavall hi ha l'opció d'impedir que els reanomenaments de pàgina actualitzin aquesta redirecció. Això s'utilitza molt poc.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Podeu escollir si la pàgina ha de mostrar una Taula de Continguts seleccionant un d'aquestes tres botons. L'opció predeterminada és &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot;, que mostra una Taula de Continguts si hi ha tres encapçalaments o més.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Marcant aquesta casella de selecció, podeu fer que una pàgina no mostri els enllaços &quot;modifica&quot; al costat de cada encapçalament de secció.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Quan hàgiu acabat de modificar el {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}, cliqueu a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; i tornareu a l'editor de la pàgina.
|}

== Edició de mapes ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Podeu afegir i modificar mapes. Vegeu {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Editar fórmules matemàtiques ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Per afegir una fórmula matemàtica a la pàgina, col·loqueu el cursor on voleu que s'insereixi i cliqueu a la icona &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (&quot;Σ&quot;) del menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; de la barra d'eines.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| S'obrirà una finestra on podeu teclejar la fórmula en sintaxi LaTeX. A mesura que teclegeu la fórmula, l'editor visual anirà actualitzant-la perquè pugueu veure com quedarà. Quan ja la tingueu com voleu, cliqueu al botó &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Per modificar una fórmula matemàtica ja existent a la pàgina, cliqueu-hi i després cliqueu a la icona &quot;Σ&quot; que apareix. Així s'obrirà la finestra de fórmules, on podeu fer-hi els canvis.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Les fórmules matemàtiques es poden col·locar dins del cos del text o bé com a bloc centrat.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Editar partitures musicals ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Per afegir una partitura musical en una pàgina, col·loqueu el cursor on voleu que s'insereixi la partitura musical. Llavors, al menú &quot;Insereix&quot; de la barra d'eines, cliqueu a l'opció &quot;Partitura musical&quot;.

Per modificar una partitura musical ja existent a la pàgina, feu-hi doble clic.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Així s'obrirà el diàleg &quot;Partitura musical&quot;, on podeu modificar la partitura per escala, en format ABC o Lilypond. També hi podeu enllaçar la partitura amb un fitxer d'àudio o MIDI. Un cop hàgiu acabat, cliqueu al botó &quot;Fet&quot; per tancar el diàleg i publicar els canvis.
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Editar poemes i altres elements especials ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| L'editor visual encara no admet plenament alguns elements, com ara les llistes associatives i els poemes.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| En la majoria dels casos, els elements ja existents es poden modificar amb l'editor visual però no se'n poden inserir de nous.

Mentrestant, podeu copiar-ne un d'una altra pàgina o modificar-ne el codi font wiki directament.

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== Commutar entre l'editor visual i el de wikitext ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Per passar de l'editor visual a l'editor de wikitext, cliqueu al botó &lt;code&gt;[[ ]]&lt;/code&gt; que hi ha a l'extrem dret de la barra d'eines.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Veureu un dif. (Si havíeu clicat a &quot;Descarta els canvis&quot;, només veureu el wikitext, llest per modificar amb l'editor de wikitext.)

Desplaceu-vos avall i veureu l'àrea de modificació de wikitext. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
També podeu passar de l'editor de wikitext a l'editor visual. Per fer-ho, cliqueu a la icona del llapis que hi ha a l'extrem dret de la barra d'eines.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Dreceres de teclat ==

Molts editors estan acostumats a introduir directament codi wiki, especialment negretes, cursives i enllaços wiki. Les [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|dreceres de teclat]] permeten introduir ràpidament formats similars sense haver d'utilitzar els elements de la barra d'eines. Aquestes són les dreceres més comunes de l'Editor Visual:

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! Drecera de PC
! Acció
! Drecera de Mac
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Negreta
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Cursiva
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Afegeix enllaç
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Retalla
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Copia
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Enganxa
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Desfés
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5wi2gioqlfs0cbb7l4hy28w9ysl90jq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/he</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>133942</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402774</id>
      <parentid>5346983</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:45:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="69770" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;אם ברצונכם לנסות את העורך החזותי מבלי לערוך ערך או דף תוכן, [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} כאן יש דף] שבו אפשר להתנסות בעורך החזותי באופן חופשי.&lt;/span&gt; אין צורך בחשבון כדי להשתמש בעורך החזותי בדף הזה.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== פתיחת העורך החזותי ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| כדי לערוך דף באמצעות העורך החזותי, לחצו על הלשונית &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; שמופיעה בראש הדף.

פתיחת הדף לעריכה עשויה לקחת כמה שניות, ואף יותר אם הדף שאתם עורכים ארוך מאוד.

לחיצה על הלשונית &quot;{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}&quot; תפתח את עורך קוד המקור הקלאסי.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| ניתן לפתוח את העורך החזותי גם באמצעות לחיצה על הקישור &quot;{{int|editsection}}&quot; ליד הכותרות של הפסקאות.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== בואו נתחיל: סרגל הכלים של העורך החזותי ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=צילום מסך של סרגל הכלים של העורך החזותי]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | סרגל הכלים של העורך החזותי יופיע בראש המסך ברגע שתתחילו לערוך. הסרגל כולל כמה כפתורים מוכרים:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| לחצו על הכפתור &quot;'''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}'''&quot; כדי לבטל את הפעולה האחרונה שנעשתה, ועל הכפתור &quot;'''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}'''&quot; כדי לבצע מחדש את הפעולה שבוטלה.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| התפריט הנפתח '''כותרות''' מאפשר לשנות את עיצוב הכותרת. כדי לשנות עיצוב של כותרת, מקמו את הסמן בכותרת הרצויה, ולאחר מכן בחרו פריט מהתפריט הזה (אין צורך לסמן שום טקסט). בחרו באפשרות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}&quot; עבור עיצוב לכותרת של פסקה ראשית, או באפשרויות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}&quot;, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}&quot; (וכן הלאה) עבור עיצוב לכותרות משנה של תתי־פסקאות. העיצוב הרגיל עבור טקסט הוא &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''עיצוב:''' לחיצה על &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; פותחת תפריט. 
* האפשרות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}&quot; ('''B''') הופכת את הטקסט שנבחר למודגש.
* האפשרות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}&quot; (''I'') הופכת את הטקסט שנבחר לנטוי.
* האפשרות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) גורמת לטקסט שנבחר להופיע קטן יותר מהטקסט שסביבו, ולהיות מעט מוגבה ממנו.
* האפשרות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) גורמת לטקסט שנבחר להופיע קטן יותר מהטקסט שסביבו, ולהיות מעט מונמך ממנו.
* האפשרות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) מוסיפה קו רציף העובר דרך הטקסט שנבחר.
* האפשרות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}&quot; (צמד סוגריים מסולסלים: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) משנה את הגופן של הטקסט הנבחר לגופן ברוחב קבוע (monospace), וזה מבדיל אותו מהטקסט שסביבו (שהוא בעל גופן ברוחב יחסי).
* האפשרות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) מוסיפה קו רציף העובר מתחת לטקסט שנבחר.
* האפשרות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}&quot; (文A) מאפשרת לבחור את השפה (למשל, יפנית) והכיוון (למשל, משמאל לימין) של הטקסט שנבחר.
* האפשרות האחרונה ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), שנקראת &quot;{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}&quot;, מסירה את כל העיצוב מהטקסט שנבחר, כולל קישורים.

אם לא בחרת אף טקסט, כשתלחץ על &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; כדי לפתוח את התפריט ובוחר את אחת האפשרויות, העיצוב שנבחר יוחל על הטקסט שתתחיל להקליד, מהיכן שהסמן ממוקם.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''כלי הקישור''': סמליל השרשרת מפעיל את [[#Editing links|כלי הקישור]]. לחיצה עליו – לרוב לאחר סימון טקסט כלשהו – פותחת את [[#Editing links|תיבת הקישור]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''תפריט {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}:''' תפריט &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; משמש להוספת מקורות בגוף הטקסט כהערות שוליים. בכל המיזמים ניתן ליצור הערה בסיסית ולהשתמש שנית בהערה קיימת, באמצעות התפריט. התפריט מספק גם גישה מהירה לתבניות מקומיות של הערות, אם הן הוגדרו עבורו במיזם בו עורכים.

(הוראות להוספת תבניות ציטוט מקומיות לתפריט {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} בוויקי מסוים זמינות בדף {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}})
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''הכפתור {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;אם השירות {{ll|Citoid|Citoid}} מופעל באתר הוויקי שאתם עורכים, תראו את הכפתור &quot;{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}&quot; במקום תפריט {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}. (כדי לבדוק אם הוא מופעה, ר' את הדף &quot;$4&quot; בוויקי שלכם ואת הדף [[$3|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

מטרת שירות ה־citoid היא למלא תבניות ציטוט באופן אוטומטי.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''רשימות והזחה:''' שתי האפשרויות הראשונות מאפשרות ליצור {{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}} או {{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}. שתי האפשרויות האחרונות מאפשרים להקטין או להגדיל את רמת ההזחה של פריט הרשימה המסומן.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' התפריט &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; עלול להשתנות ממיזם למיזם (למשל, ייתכן שהוא לא יהיה זהה באתר [[w:he:ויקיפדיה|ויקיפדיה]] ובאתר [[w:he:ויקימילון|ויקימילון]]). להלן רשימה של '''כל''' האפשרויות שיכולות להופיע בתפריט.
* סמל &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; (תמונה של הרים) פותח את [[#Editing images and other media files|תיבת המדיה]].
* סמל &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot; (חתיכת פאזל) מאפשר לך [[#Editing templates|לערוך תבניות]].
* האפשרות &quot;טבלה&quot; מאפשרת להוסיף טבלה.
* האפשרות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}&quot; מאפשרת להוסיף הערות שאינן מוצגות למי שקורא את הדף. ההערות האלה מוצגות רק במצב עריכה, וניתן להבחין בהן לפי סימן הקריאה שלידן. במצב עריכה, לחיצה על סימן הקריאה יאפשר לכם לערוך או לבטל את ההערה.
* האפשרות &quot;{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}&quot; פותחת את הכלי להוספת היירוגליפים.
* האפשרות &quot;גוש קוד&quot; מאפשרת הוספה של קוד שיוצג בטקסט.
* האפשרות &quot;תווי מוזיקה&quot; מאפשרת הוספת תווי מוזיקה
* האפשרות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; מאפשרת להוסיף גלריה לדף.
* סמל &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (Σ) פותח את [[#Editing mathematical formulae|תיבת הוספת נוסחה]].
* האפשרות &quot;תרשים&quot; מאפשרת להוסיף תרשים.
* האפשרות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}&quot; מאפשרת להוסיף את החתימה שלך במיזם. האפשרות תהיה אפורה (לא ניתנת ללחיצה), כאשר הדף שנערך הוא מסוג (&quot;מרחב שם&quot;) שבו אין להוסיף חתימה, כמו במרחב הראשי.
* האפשרות &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; פותחת תיבת דו־שיח שבה אפשר לקבוע באיזה מקום בדף יוצגו הערות השוליים לקוראים. בדרך־כלל צריך להגדיר את המקום הזה פעם אחת בלבד בכל דף.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''הוספת תווים מיוחדים:''' האפשרות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}&quot; (הסמל '''Ω''') נמצא ליד תפריט {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}. לחיצה על הסמליל פותחת תיבת דו־שיח המציגה תווים מיוחדים רבים. יש ללחוץ על תו מסוים כדי להוסיף אותו לטקסט. התווים המיוחדים האלה כוללים כמה סמלים תקניים, סימנים דיאקריטיים, וסימנים מתמטיים. (ניתן לשנות את הרשימה הזאת באופן מקומי עבור כל מיזם. ראו הוראות ב{{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}}.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| הכפתור '''{{int:visualeditor-editnotices-tooltip}}''' מציג הודעות ואזהרות שעשויות להיות רלוונטיות עבור עורכי הדף.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;תפריט '''$pagemenu''' נמצא מימין לכפתור ''$save'' ולתפריט ''$switch-tooltip''. בתפריט הזה יש כפתור לפתיחת תיבת ''$options'' עם הלשוניות הבאות מצד ימין:&lt;/span&gt;

* ''''''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]'''''' מאפשר להוסיף קטגוריות לדף, ולהגדיר את הסדר של הדף בקטגוריה, כך שכשיופיע בקטגוריה יופיע על פי סדר השונה משמו.
* ''''''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]'''''' מאפשר להגדיר את הדף כהפניה ולשלוט באפשרויות ההפניה, לשלוט בהגדרות של תוכן העניינים, לבטל את אפשרות העריכה בסמוך לכותרות, ולהגדיר את הדף כדף פירושונים.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''$advanced-settings''' מאפשר לבחור את הגדרות המפתוח של הדף במנועי חיפוש, הוספת לשונית להוספת פרק חדש, ואופן התצוגה של הכותרת.&lt;/span&gt;
* הכפתור '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' מציג רשימת דפים בשפות אחרות שמקושרות לדף הזה.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;הכפתור '''$templates-used''' מציג רשימת קישורים לכל תבנית שמשמשת בדף.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;הלשוניות של תיבת $options מוצגות גם בתפריט $pagemenu ואפשר לפתוח אותן באמצעות לחיצה.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;בנוסף, תפריט $pagemenu מכיל את הפריטים $view-as-ltr ו$view-as-rtl ואת הפריט '''[[$1|$find-and-replace]]''', שפותח סרגל שאפשר לרשום בו מילים או ביטויים רגולריים לחיפוש והחלפה, יחד עם כמה כפתורים לאפשרויות.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;כפתור ה'''$switch-tooltip''' ממוקם סמוך לכפתור '''$save'''. הוא מאפשר לך לעבור לעורך קוד המקור.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== פרסום שינויים ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| לאחר שסיימתם לערוך, לחצו על הכפתור הכחול &quot;{{int|publishchanges}}&quot; שמופיע בצדו השמאלי של סרגל הכלים. אם לא ביצעתם שינויים בדף, הכפתור יהיה מבוטל (כלומר אפור). כדי לבטל את כל השינויים שערכת בדף, יש לסגור את חלון הדפדפן או ללחוץ על לשונית &quot;{{int|vector-view-view}}&quot; הנמצאת מעל לסרגל העריכה.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| לחיצה על הכפתור הכחול &quot;{{int|publishchanges-start}}&quot; פותחת תיבת דו־שיח. אפשר להקליד בה תקציר קצר של השינויים שביצעתם, לסמן את העריכה כמשנית ולהוסיף את הדף לרשימת המעקב שלכם. השדה של תקציר העריכה בעורך החזותי זהה לשדה של תקציר העריכה בעורך קוד המקור.

באפשרותכם גם לבדוק מהם השינויים שביצעתם בדף באמצעות לחיצה על הכפתור &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;. זה שימושי כדי לבדוק שאתם אכן מתכוונים לשמור ולפרסם את כל השינויים שביצעתם. פעולה זו זהה לכפתור &quot;{{int|showdiff}}&quot; שבעורך קוד המקור.

לחיצה על הכפתור &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}&quot; תחזיר אתכם לדף שערכתם. תוכלו לבצע בדף שינויים נוספים ולאחר מכן לשמור את כל העריכה.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== עריכת קישורים ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| ניתן להוסיף קישורים באמצעות לחיצה על הכפתור &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; בסרגל הכלים (סמל של שרשרת), או באמצעות הקשה על צירוף המקשים {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (במחשב מק: {{Key press|K|⌘}}).

אם תסמנו טקסט ולאחר מכן תלחצו על הכפתור &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot;, הקישור יתווסף לטקסט שנבחר. אם הקישור מכיל מילה אחת בלבד, אפשר פשוט למקם את סמן העכבר בתוך המילה (אין צורך לסמן את כל המילה).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| לאחר שתלחצו על כפתור הקישור או תקישו על צירוף המקשים, תיפתח תיבת דו־שיח שבה תוכלו להזין את הקישור.
כלי הקישור ינסה לעזור עם קישורים '''פנימיים''' באמצעות חיפוש התאמות סבירות.
לאחר שכתבת או בחרת את יעד קישור, יש לסיים את תהליך הקישור באמצעות לחיצה על {{key press|Enter}} או לחיצה על הכפתור &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot;. הקישור יופיע מייד בדף, אך כמו שינויים אחרים בדף, הוא לא יפורסם עד לפרסום הדף.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| כדי להוסיף קישור לדף באתר אחר, התהליך דומה: עליך לבחור בלשונית &quot;{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}&quot; ולהזין את הכתובת בתיבה.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| קישור חיצוני ללא תווית נראה ככה: [http://example.com]. ניתן להוסיף את אלו על ידי מיקום הסמן במרחק מכל מילה שהיא (למשל - אחרי רווח). פתחו את כלי הקישורים על ידי לחיצה על הכפתור או הקשה על מקשי הקיצור. הקלד את הכתובת בתיבה, ולחץ על הכפתור &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; כדי  להכניס את הקישור.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| כדי לשנות או להסיר קישור קיים יש ללחוץ על הקישור, ואז ללחוץ על הסמל {{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}} שמופיע לידו. ניתן גם ללחוץ על סימון הקישור בסרגל הכלים, או להשתמש בקיצור {{key press|Ctrl|K}} במקלדת כאשר הסמן נמצא על הקישור. כשקישור נבחר, הוא יופיע כמסגרת כחולה.

בתיבת הדו־שיח של עריכת הקישורים, אפשר לשנות את יעד הקישור. ניתן גם למחוק אותו לגמרי על ידי לחיצה על הכפתור &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; בפינה הימנית העליונה של תיבת-השיח.
אפשר גם לפתוח את יעד הקישור בחלון אחר באמצעות לחיצה על העותק של הקישור בתיבה. (אפשר לעשות את זה, למשל, בשביל לבדוק האם קישור חיצוני תקין.)

אם ברצונך לצאת מתוך תווית הקישור (הטקסט המופיע כקישור) או להמשיך לכתוב אחרי הקישור, ניתן לעשות זאת באמצעות לחיצה על {{Key press|→}}:
* לחיצה על הכפתור פעם אחת תצא מתיבת עריכת הקישור ותציב את הסמן שלך בסוף הרכיב המקושר (במסגרת כחולה, לשם עריכת הרכיב)
* לחיצה על הכפתור פעמיים תציב את הסמן אחרי הרכיב המקושר, מוכן להקלדת שאר הטקסט שלך.

כיד לערוך את התווית של קישור, יש ללחוץ בתוך התווית ולהקליד תווית חדשה.
אבל בעת החלפת התווית כולה, יש לשים לב לדברים הבאים:

* אם בחרת (סימנת) את כל תווית הקישור, הקישור יימחק בעת הקלדה על כל מקש.
* כדי לערוך את תווית הקישור ישירות בלי למחוק, יש להציב את הסמן בתוך הקישור, ולהשתמש במקשים Backspace ו־Delete (לא יותר מכמה שצריך), ואף אם יימחקו כל האותיות, יישאר אזור כחול ריק. עכשיו אפשר להקליד את התווית החדשה לקישור.
* אפשר גם לקשר ל[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|קטגוריות, קבצים ועוד]].
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== עריכת מקורות ==
{{Further|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Help using citation templates]] or [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Help using citoid's &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; button]]&lt;/span&gt;}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== איך להבין איזו מערכת פועלת ===
|-
| הויקי שלך יכול להשתמש בתצורה אחת מתוך שלוש תצורות של מערכת הערת שוליים. זאת שמוצגת כאן משמאל היא המערכת הפשוטה ביותר, שבה תפריט &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; אינו מכיל שום תבניות הערות שוליים. אם הוויקי שלך משתמש במערכת הזאת, כל מה שצריך לדעת על הערות שוליים נמצא בדף הזה.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The second system has the same type of &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; menu, but with several popular citation templates set up for quick access.&lt;/span&gt; אם הוויקי שלך משתמש במערכת הזאת, אפשר למצוא פרטים נוספים בדף {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the third system, you again start by pressing the {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
===עריכת מקור קיים===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}&quot; icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For the &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}&quot; icon, pressing &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; opens the reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.&lt;/span&gt;

אתרי ויקי רבים משתמשים בתבניות כדי לעצב רשימות סימוכין. אם הסימוכין שלך נעזר בתבנית, כל הטקסט בתבנית יהיה מסומן בעת לחיצה על המידע שבסימוכין.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
אם שימשה תבנית, לחיצה על מידע על הערת השוליים תציג את הסמל $edit (חלק פאזל). יש ללחוץ על כפתור &quot;$edit&quot; לעריכת תוכן תוכן התבנית בתיבת התבנית הקטנה.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; will open the template mini-editor dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| בעורך התבניות אפשר להוסיף ולהסיר סוגי נתונים או לשנות תוכן קיים. רק שדות (פרמטרים של תבניות) שיש בהם תוכן אמורים להיות מוצגים בהתחלה. כדי להוסיף שדות יש ללחוץ על &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; בתחתית העורך.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| יש ללחוץ על &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; בסיום העריכה. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== שימוש חוזר בהערת שוליים קיימת ===
|-
| אם כבר קיים מקור המתאים לטקסט מסויים, ניתן להשתמש שוב באותו מקור קיים.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
כדי להשתמש שוב בהערת שוליים קיימת, הניחו את הסמן במקום המיועד ולחצו על כפתור &quot;$reuse&quot; מתוך תפריט &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a &quot;{{int|citoid-citoiddialog-mode-reuse}}&quot; tab, in a dialog, instead of a &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-useexisting-tool}}&quot; item on the &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; menu.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| בתיבת הדו־שיח {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} יש לחפש ברשימה את הערת השוליים שאתם רוצים לעשות בה שימוש חוזר ולבחור אותה. אם יש הרבה הערות שוליים, אפשר להשתמש בתיבת החיפוש (&quot;{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}&quot;) כדי לקבל רשימה של הערות השוליים שכוללות טקסט מסוים.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== הוספת הערת שוליים חדשה ===
|-
| כדי להוסיף הערת שוליים מתפריט &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; יש למקם את הסמן במקום בטקסט שבו ברצונך להוסיף את הטקסט. לאחר מכן יש לבחור את הסוג המתאים של הערת השוליים בתפריט.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== שימוש בציטוט בסיסי ====
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.&lt;/span&gt;  בעורך הערות השוליים ניתן להוסיף, לערוך ולעצב את תוכן המקור.

ניתן לשייך את מראה המקום לקבוצה נתונה, אם כי בדרך כלל ניתן להשאיר את השדה ריק. (אפשרות זו שימושית בעיקר לשם הצגת קבוצות של הערות שוליים בצורה מסודרת בכלי &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot;.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| בתיבת הערת שוליים, אם ברצונכם תבנית הערת שוליים או תבנית אחרת כלשהי בהערת השוליים החדשה שלכם, יש ללחוץ על הכפתור {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} (פיסת פאזל) מתוך תפריט סרגל הכלים &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; בעורך הערות השוליים.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| לאחר מכן יש לחפש את התבנית שרצית להשתמש בה, להוסיף אותה ולערוך אותה כפי שעורכים כל תבנית אחרת. (ר' את הסעיף [[#Editing templates|עריכת תבניות]] בהמשך אם נחוץ מידע נוסף על תבניות.)

אחרי שסיימת לערוך את התבנית, יש ללחוץ על &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; כדי לחזור לחלון עורך הערות השוליים ושוב על &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; על מנת לחזור לחלון העורך הראשי.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| אם עדיין לא קיימת רשימת מראי מקום בדף הנוכחי (למשל, אם מדובר בהוספת מראה המקום הראשון בערך) , יש צורך לציין היכן רשימת מראי המקום והטקסט שלהם יוצגו לקורא.

יש לשים את הסמן במקום המיועד לרשימת מראי המקום (לרוב בתחתית הדף), לפתוח את תפריט &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; וללחוץ על כפתור &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (שלושה ספרים).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| אם יצרתם כמה קבוצות של הערות שוליים, מה שנדיר יחסית, באפשרותכם לציין את הקבוצה בתיבת-שיח זאת. רק מראי המקום ששייכים לקבוצה הזו יוצגו בדף במיקום שתבחרו בעת הצבת הקבוצה.

הצעד האחרון בתיבת-שיח רשימת מראי מקום הוא לחיצה על &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== שימוש בתבניות ציטוט תקניות ====
|-
| ייתכן שהוויקי שלכם הוסיף עוד תבניות הערות שוליים לתפריט {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}. אם זהו המצב, זה יש לך גישה מהירה לתבניות ההערות השוליים הנפוצות ביותר בוויקי שלך. (הוראות על הוספת תבניות לוויקי שלכם זמינות בדף {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| לחיצה על סמל תבנית, כגון &quot;צ-ספר&quot; תיקח אותך לעורך התבניות עבור אותה התבנית. שדות מידע חשובים יסומנו בכוכבית. השדות הנפוצים ביותר יוצגו, אבל אין חובה למלא את כולם.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| כדי להוסיף עוד פרמטרים, יש לגלול עד הסוף בעורך התבניות וללחוץ על האפשרות &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot;.

בסיום יש ללחוץ על &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== הוספת תמונות וקובצי מדיה אחרים ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== עריכת תמונות ===
|-
| כדי להוסיף לדף תמונה חדשה (או סוג אחר של קובץ מדיה), יש ללחוץ על סמל &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; (תמונה של הרים) בתפריט {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}. התמונה תתווסף במקום בו נמצא הסמן.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| לחיצה על כפתור ה&quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; פותחת תיבת-שיח שמחפשת אוטומטית בוויקישיתוף ובוויקי שלכם קובצי מדיה המתאימים לכותרת של הדף אותו אתם עורכים.

ניתן לחפש קובצי מדיה אחרים על ידי שינוי הכיתוב בתיבת החיפוש.

יש ללחוץ על התמונה הממוזערת כדי לבחור קובץ.

זה ממקם את התמונה לתוך הדף אותו אתם עורכים.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| אחרי שהתמונה שבחרתם מוקמה בתוך הדף, תיפתח תיבת־שיח אחרת. התיבה הזאת מאפשרת לכם להוסיף ולערוך את כותרת התמונה. הכותרת יכולה להכיל עיצוב וקישורים.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| תיבת המדיה מאפשרת גם להוסיף לתמונה כיתוב חלופי, שמקל על קוראים שמשתמשים בקוראי מסך או שביטלו את האפשרות להצגת תמונה.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| ניתן להגדיר פרמטרים מגוונים לתמונה בחלון &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot;. זה כולל יישור, סוג וגודל התמונה.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| בסיום עריכת המדיה, לחצו על &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; כדי לסגור את החלון ולחזור לעריכת הדף.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| עבור תמונה קיימת, ניתן להוסיף או לערוך את כיתוב התמונה ואת ההגדרות האחרות באמצעות לחיצה על התמונה, ואז לחיצה על צלמית &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; שמופיעה מתחתיה.

ניתן לשנות את גודל התמונה הקיימת באמצעות גרירת צלמית שינוי הגודל (החץ הדו־כיווני בפינות התמונה).

ניתן גם לגרור את התמונה למיקום גבוה או נמוך יותר בדף.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== העלאת תמונות ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Upload&quot; tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| התמונה תוכנס לדף כשתסיימו
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== עריכת גלריות מדיה ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| כדי להוסיף גלריה חדשה, יש ללחוץ על הצלמית '''{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}''' (חפיסת תמונות) בתפריט '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}'''. (אם אינכם רואים את הצלמית בתפריט הזה, אז הוויקי המקומי שלכם בחר להמנע מלממש את היכולת הזאת בעורך החזותי.) 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| כדי לערוך גלריה קיימת בעורך החזותי, ליחצו על הגלריה. קרוב לתחתית הגלריה ליחצו על צלמית הגלריה (חפיסת תמונות). זה מעלה את עורך הגלריות, עם רשימה מלאה של תמונות המשויכות לגלריה הזאת.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| עורך הגלריות הוא תיבה פשוטה שמאפשרת לך לערוך גלריות קיימות בקוד ויקי. כדי להוסיף תמונה לגלריה, יש להקליד את שם הקובץ ואחריו קו אופקי (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) ואת הכיתוב לתמונה. כל תמונה צריכה להיות בשורה נפרדת. ניתן לערוך את הרשימה הזאת כדי להסיר או לסדר מחדש את התמונות או כדי לשנות את הכיתובים.

לחיצה על כפתור &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; תוציא אתכם מעורך הגלריה. לאחר מכן יוצגו השינויים שלכם בגלריה כפי שהיא תופיע עכשיו לקוראים.

זכרו שיציאה מעורך הגלריה אינה מפרסמת את השינויים שלכם. כמו במקרה של כל שינוי אחר בעורך החזותי, יש לפרסם את כל הדף כדי שהעבודה תפורסם.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== עריכת תבניות ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The powerful MediaWiki template system lets you insert dynamic content, text from other pages, and much more. For a detailed explanation and examples, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Templates help page]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the VisualEditor you can search for a relevant template, add an invocation or [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusion]] on the page you’re editing and, if needed, add custom content using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameters]].
&lt;/div&gt;

=== הוספת תבנית חדשה ===
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| כדי להוסיף תבנית לדף, יש להציב את הסמן במקום בדף שבו אתם רוצים להוסיף את התבנית. עכשיו צריך לפתוח את תפריד {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} ולבחור &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;. לחלופין, אפשר להקליד שני סוגריים מסולסלים {{((}} כדי לפתוח את אותה התיבה.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|עכשיו צריך למצוא את התבנית שרוצים להוסיף באמצעות הקלדת השם שלה או של מילת מפתח רלוונטית. תוצאות שמכילות את מונחי החיפוש או את התיאור תוצגנה ברשימה נפתחת. זה אמור לעזור לך למצוא תבנית מתאימה, גם אם שמה המדויק אינו ידוע לך.

אם יש לך בעיה למצוא את סוג התבנית המבוקש באמצעות מילות מפתח, אפשר לחפש בדפי ויקי אחרים עם תוכן דומה ולהציג או לערוך את קוד המקור של התבנית כדי לראות אילו תבניות נמצאות בשימוש. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| אתם יכולים גם לערוך תבנית שכבר נמצאת בדף. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you select the template you want to edit, it turns blue, and a box appears displaying &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then select the &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; link  or double click on the template itself to open the template.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the visual editor, such hidden templates are still shown so that you can click and edit or delete them.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon and both will be grayed out.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== הפרמטרים של התבניות ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You’ll see this dialog box when you’re adding a new template or editing one already in place.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What you see in the box depends on whether the template in question contains {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, helpful metadata added by other editors to make it easier to edit templates in the Visual Editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When a template contains TemplateData, the VisualEditor can use it to present annotated fields for you to fill in.
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For templates that have some community-provided TemplateData, the VisualEditor displays a list of the named parameters and, often, descriptions and instructions explaining the meaning and required format for each parameter’s values.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
=== הוספת פרמטרים בלתי־מתועדים ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

דוגמה:
* פרמטר ראשון ללא שם: &quot;1&quot;
* הערך של הפרמטר הראשון ללא שם: &quot;en_US&quot;
* פרמטר שני ללא שם: &quot;2&quot;
* הערך של הפרמטר הראשון ללא שם: &quot;yes&quot;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
==== פרמטרים מחוללים אוטומטית ====
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
==== עריכת תוכן תבניות מרובה־חלקים ====
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
==== תבניות מקוננות ====
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== השלמת העריכה שלך ===
|-
| כשסיימתם לערוך תבנית, אפשר ללחוץ על &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== הסרת תבנית ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== עריכה במכשיר נייד ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== החלפת תבניות ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

==עריכת רשימות==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation;  use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is the result of increased indentation.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== עריכת טבלאות ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| אפשר להשתמש בעורך החזותי כדי להוסיף ולשנות טבלאות.

אפשר אפילו לייבא טבלה בעזרת גרירית קובץ המופרד הפסיקים (.csv) ממחשבך לחלון העריכה הראשי.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you press on &quot;Table&quot;, in the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now the &quot;Table&quot; menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| כדי לבחור תא, לחצו עליו פעם אחת
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.&lt;/span&gt;

כדי לסיים את עריכתכם של תא, רק לחצו בכל מקום אחר
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| ניתן להוסיף, להעביר ולמחוק עמודות ו/או שורות.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on &quot;Merge cells&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also split cells that were previously merged.  All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== עריכת קטגוריות ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| כדי לערוך קטגוריות, יש ללחוץ בתפריט &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; על הכפתור &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| הכפתור &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; פותח רשימת קטגוריות קיימות ומאפשר להוסיף חדשות, ולמחוק קטגוריות קיימות.

קיימת אפשרות לקבוע את ברירת המחדל של [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|מפתח המיון]] הכללי, אשר משמש לקבוע היכן יופיע הדף בין דפים אחרים מאותה קטגוריה ברשימה האלפביתית.

למשל, מפתח המיון הרגיל בערך &quot;עדה יונת&quot; הוא &quot;יונת, עדה&quot;, אז בקטגוריה &quot;זוכי פרס נובל לכימיה&quot; הערך הזה יופיע באות י' ולא באות ע'.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| בשביל להוסיף קטגוריה חדשה לדף, יש להזין את שמה בשדה &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}&quot;. בעת ההקלדה העורך החזותי יחפש שמות מתאימים של קטגוריות קיימות. אפשר לבחור קטגוריה קיימת או להוסיף קטגוריה שעדיין אין לה דף קטגוריה משלה. (עד שהקטגוריה תיווצר, הקטגוריה החדשה שלך תוצג בתור קישור אדום אחרי פרסום השינויים.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| כדי להסיר קטגוריה קיימת יש להקיש על הצלמית &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; (פח אשפה) בתיבת הדו־שיח.

לחיצה על קטגוריה מאפשרת גם לקבוע גם את מפתח המיון לאותה הקטגוריה. מפתח זה ידרוס את מפתח המיון הכללי.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| יש ללחוץ על &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; כשתסיים לערוך את הקטגוריות בכדי לחזור לדף העריכה.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== עריכת הגדרות דף ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| כדי לערוך את אפשרויות הדף יש להקיש על התפריט הנפתח &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; בסרגל הכלים ולבחור ב&quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| הכפתור &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; פותח תיבת-שיח שמציגה מספר אפשרויות.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| ניתן לגרום לדף להפנות לדף אחר באמצעות תיבת הסימון &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot; והקלדת שם הדף שברצונך לשלוח אליו את מי שינסה להיכנס לדף הזה.

בתחתית נמצאת האפשרות שמונעת מפעולת שינוי שם הדף לעדכן את ההפניה. זה משמש לעתים רחוקות מאוד.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| ניתן לקבוע אם הדף יציג תוכן עניינים באמצעות בחירה באחד משלושת הכפתורים האלה. בררת מחדל היא &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot;, שתציג את תוכן העניינים אם יש שלוש כותרות או יותר.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| ניתן לגרום לדף לא להראות קישורי עריכת פסקה באמצעות סימון התיבה הזאת.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| עם סיום עריכת {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} יש להקיש על &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; כדי לחזור לעורך הדף.
|}

== עריכת מפות ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| ניתן להוסיף ולשנות מפות. ראו {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== עריכת נוסחאות מתמטיות ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| כדי להוסיף נוסחה מתמטית חדשה לדף יש למקם את הסמן בנקודה שבה הנוסחה אמורה להופיע ולהקיש על הצלמית &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (&quot;Σ&quot;) בתפריט הנפתח &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; בסרגל הכלים.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| נפתח חלון שבו ניתן להקליד את הנוסחה בתחביר LaTeX. העורך החזותי מעדכן את הנוסחה תוך כדי הקלדתה, וכך ניתן לראות כיצד היא תיראה לאחר השינויים. כשהנוסחה נראית לך טוב, ניתן לצאת מחלון הנוסחאות באמצעות הכפתור &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| כדי לערוך נוסחה מתמטית שקיימת בדף, יש ללחוץ עליה, ואז ללחוץ על הצלמית  &quot;Σ&quot; שתופיע עם הלחיצה. פעולה זו תפתח את חלון הנוסחאות ותאפשר לכם לעשות שינויים.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== עריכת תווים מוזיקליים ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then, from the &quot;Insert&quot; menu on the toolbar, press the &quot;Musical notation&quot; option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will open the &quot;Musical notation&quot; dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you are finished, press the &quot;Done&quot; button to close the dialog and publish your changes.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== עריכת שירים ופריטים מיוחדים אחרים ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| פריטים מסוימים, כגון רשימות הגדרה ושירה, אינם נתמכים עדיין בעורך החזותי.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== מעבר בין העורך החזותי ועורך קוד המקור ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; button on the far right of the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on &quot;Discard changes&quot;, you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)&lt;/span&gt;

גללו למטה ותראו את אזור העריכה של עורך קוד המקור. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
ניתן גם לעבור מעורך קוד המקור לעורך החזותי. על מנת לעשות זאת יש ללחוץ על סמל העיפרון בקצה הימני של סרגל הכלים.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== קיצורי מקלדת ==

עורכים רבים רגילים להשתמש בקוד ויקי, בייחוד להדגשה, כתב נטוי, וקישורים פנימיים. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|קיצורי מקשים]] מאפשרים ביצוע פעולה דומה מבלי להזדקק ללחיצות על פריטים בסרגל הכלים. להלן קיצורי המקלדת הנפוצים בעורך החזותי:

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! קיצור מקלדת ב־PC
! פעולה
! קיצור מקלדת במק
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| מודגש
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| נטוי
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| הכנסת קישור
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| גזירה
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| העתקה
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| הדבקה
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| ביטול
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7k3vys718et4e3bdm34fvzp04qqyvnv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/uk</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>134279</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402794</id>
      <parentid>5347048</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:55:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="86057" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Якщо Ви хочете спробувати Візуальний редактор, не редагуючи статтю, [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ось сторінка], де Ви можете вільно його тестувати.&lt;/span&gt; Вам не потрібен обліковий запис, щоб використовувати Візуальний редактор на тій сторінці.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Відкриття Візуального редактора ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| Щоб редагувати сторінку, використовуючи Візуальний редактор, натисніть вкладку «{{int|vector-view-edit}}» у верхній частині сторінки.

Відкриття сторінки для редагування може тривати кілька секунд чи й довше, якщо вона дуже довга.

Натискання на вкладку «{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}» відкриває класичний редактор вікітексту.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ви також можете відкрити Візуальний редактор, натиснувши на посилання «{{int|editsection}}» біля заголовку кожного розділу.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Початок роботи: панель інструментів Візуального редактора ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Вигляд панелі інструментів Візуального редактора]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | Панель інструментів Візуального редактора з'являється вгорі екрану, коли ви починаєте редагувати з його допомогою. На ній є декілька знайомих іконок:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' і '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' зроблені Вами зміни.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Випадне меню '''Заголовки''' дозволяє змінювати форматування абзацу. Щоб змінити стиль абзацу, поставте курсор у такому абзаці та виберіть елемент із цього меню (виділяти текст непотрібно). Для заголовків розділів використовується форматування «{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}», а підрозділів — «{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}», «{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}» тощо. Нормальний формат для тексту — «{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}».
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Форматування''': Клацання по «&lt;u&gt;'''''А'''''&lt;/u&gt;» відкриває меню. 
* Пункт «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}» ('''Ж''') робить виділений текст жирним.
* Пункт «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}» (''К'') перетворює виділений текст у курсив.
* Пункт «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}» (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) робить виділений текст меншим і розташовує його трохи вище, ніж навколишній текст.
* Пункт «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}» (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) робить виділений текст меншим і розташовує його трохи нижче, ніж навколишній текст.
* Пункт «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}» (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) додає суцільну лінію через виділений текст.
* Пункт «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}» (пара фігурних дужок: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) змінює шрифт виділеного тексту на моноширинний шрифт, що виділяє його з-поміж навколишнього (пропорційного) тексту.
* Пункт «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}» (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) додає суцільну лінію під виділеним текстом.
* Пункт «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}» (文A) дозволяє Вам позначати мову (наприклад, японську) і напрямок (наприклад, справа наліво) виділеного тексту.
* Останній пункт ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]) під назвою «{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}» вилучає усе форматування символів з виділеного тексту, включно з посиланнями.

Якщо Ви не виділили жодного тексту, то коли Ви клацнете «&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;», щоб відкрити меню, і потім виберете бажаний елемент, це форматування буде застосоване до тексту, який Ви почнете набирати, де б не був розташований Ваш курсор.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Інструмент посилань:''' Іконка ланцюжка — це [[#Editing links|інструмент додавання посилань]]. Натискання на нього (зазвичай після виділення певного тексту) відкриває [[#Editing links|діалог посилання]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''Меню «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}»:''' Меню «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}» використовується для додавання вбудованих цитувань (або ж «приміток» чи «виносок»). Усі проєкти мають доступ до базового формату приміток і можливість повторного використання цитувань з допомогою цього меню. Це меню також дає користувачам швидкий доступ до локальних шаблонів цитування, якщо такі увімкнені у їхніх вікі.

(Інструкції з додавання локальних шаблонів цитування до меню «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}» у певній вікі доступні на сторінці {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''кнопка {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Якщо у Вашій вікі увімкнений сервіс Citoid, то замість меню {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} Ви бачитимете кнопку {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

Сервіс Citoid створений для автоматичного заповнення шаблонів цитування.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Списки і відступи''': перші два пункти дають змогу форматувати текст як «{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}» чи «{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}». Останні два пункти дозволяють зменшувати чи збільшувати рівень відступу пунктів списку.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' Меню «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}» може відрізнятися у деяких проєктах. Нижче подано список '''усіх''' опцій, які там можуть з'явитися.
* Іконка «{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}» (малюночок гір) відкриває [[#Editing images and other media files|діалогове вікно додавання мультимедіа]].
* Іконка «{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}» (частинка пазла) дозволяє Вам [[#Editing templates|редагувати шаблони]].
* Елемент «Таблиця» дає змогу вставити таблицю.
* Пункт «{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}» (хмарка мовлення) дозволяє Вам вставити коментарі, невидимі для читачів; ці коментарі можна побачити лише в режимі редагування, де вони виділені іконкою зі знаком оклику. Натискання на іконку зі знаком оклику в режимі редагування дозволить Вам відредагувати або вилучити коментар.
* Іконка «{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}» (символ [[:uk:Анкх|анкх]] — ☥) дозволяє Вам перейти до вставлення ієрогліфів. (Див. нижче.)
* Елемент «Блок коду» дає змогу вставити код.
* Елемент «Нотний запис» дає змогу вставити нотний запис.
* Іконка «{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}» (набір фотознімків) дозволяє Вам вставити на сторінку галерею.
* Іконка «{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}» (Σ) відкриває [[#Editing mathematical formulae|діалог вставлення формул]].
* Елемент «Графік» дає змогу вставити графік.
* Елемент «{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}» дає змогу вставляти Ваш користувацький підпис, який ви використовуєте в цьому проєкті. Він буде сірим (недоступним для вибору), коли Ви будете редагувати певний тип сторінок («простір назв»), такий як простір статей, де підписи вставляти не слід.
* Іконка «{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}» (три книжки) відкриває діалогове вікно, у якому Ви можете визначити, у якому місці для читача відображатимуться примітки. Зазвичай таку дію треба робити лише раз для окремої сторінки.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Вставка спеціальних символів:''' Іконка «{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}» (Ω) розташована поруч з меню «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}». Після натискання вона відображає діалогове вікно із багатьма спеціальними символами. Натиснувши на певний символ, Ви вставляєте його в текст. Серед цих спеціальних символів — деякі стандартні символи, діакритики та математичні символи. (Це може налаштовуватись локально. Див. інструкції на сторінці {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}}.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| Кнопка '''Сповіщення''' показує будь-які сповіщення, які стосуються поточної сторінки.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Меню '''$pagemenu''' знаходиться ліворуч від кнопки ''$save'' та меню ''Перемкнути редактор''. У цьому меню є кнопка, щоб відкрити діалогове вікно '''Параметри''' з наступними (ліворуч) вкладками:&lt;/span&gt;

* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' дозволяє додавати категорії до цієї сторінки та налаштовувати сортування сторінки під час відображення в межах категорії, встановлюючи інший індекс для сортування.
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' дозволяє зробити сторінку перенаправленням і налаштувати параметри цього перенаправлення, налаштувати параметри відображення змісту, вимкнути посилання для редагування поруч із кожним заголовком і визначити сторінку як сторінку неоднозначності.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Додаткові налаштування''' дозволяють налаштувати параметри індексації сторінки пошуковими системами, відображення вкладки для додавання нового розділу та відображеного заголовка.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' показує список сторінок іншими мовами, які пов'язані з цією сторінкою.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Шаблони, які використовуються''', показують список посилань на кожен шаблон, що використовується на цій сторінці.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Вкладки діалогового вікна «Параметри» також відображаються в меню $pagemenu і їх можна відкрити, клацнувши по ньому.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Крім того, меню $pagemenu містить кнопку '''Переглянути з напрямком справа наліво''' та кнопку '''Пошук та заміна''', яка відкриває діалогове вікно, у яке ви можете вставити символи, терміни або регулярні вирази, які ви шукаєте, і ті, якими їх можна замінити, а також кілька кнопок для опцій.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Кнопка '''$switch''' розташована поряд з кнопкою '''$save'''. Вона дає змогу перемкнутися на редактор вікірозмітки.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Публікація змін ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Після завершення редагування, натисніть синю кнопку «{{int|publishchanges}}» на панелі інструментів. Якщо не було внесено жодних змін, ця кнопка буде неактивною (матиме сірий колір). Щоб скасувати усі редагування, просто закрийте вікно браузера, або ж клацніть вкладку «{{int|vector-view-view}}» над панеллю інструментів редагування.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Натискання синьої кнопки «{{int|publishchanges-start}}» відкриває діалогове вікно. У ньому Ви можете ввести короткий опис своїх дій, позначити редагування як незначне, та/або додати цю сторінку у свій «$watchlist». Поле для опису еквівалентне полю «{{int|summary}}» у редакторі вікірозмітки.&lt;/span&gt;

Ви також можете попередньо переглянути свої зміни за допомогою кнопки «{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}», щоб підтвердити, що вони працюватимуть належним чином, перш ніж зберегти зміни. Ця функція подібна до тієї, яку виконує кнопка «{{int|showdiff}}» у редакторі вікітексту.

Кнопка «{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}» повертає Вас до сторінки, яку Ви редагували. Ви можете зберегти свої зміни пізніше.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Редагування посилань ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Посилання можна додавати за допомогою іконки «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}» (ланцюжок) на панелі інструментів або використовуючи комбінацію клавіш {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (чи {{Key press|Command|K}} на Mac).

Якщо обрати (виділити) текст і після цього натиснути кнопку «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}», цей текст буде перетворено на посилання. Для посилань у формі одного окремого слова, Ви можете або виділити це слово, або розмістити курсор в його межах.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Незалежно від того, чи Ви використали кнопку, чи комбінацію клавіш, відкриється діалогове вікно, у якому ви можете набрати посилання.
Інструмент додавання посилань спробує допомогти із '''внутрішніми''' посиланнями, шукаючи подібне до того, яке Ви починаєте вводити.
Як тільки Ви введете чи оберете посилання, можете закінчити процес його додавання, натиснувши {{key press|Enter}} або кнопку «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}». Ваше посилання відразу з'явиться на сторінці, але як і інші зміни на сторінці, не буде опубліковане доти, поки Ви не опублікуєте ''усю'' сторінку.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Щоб вставити посилання на веб-сторінку на іншому сайті, процес той самий: виберіть вкладку «{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}» та вставте посилання в поле.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Зовнішні посилання без опису виглядають так: [http://example.com]. Ви можете додавати їх, розмістивши курсор на віддалі від будь-якого слова (напр., через пробіл). Натисніть відповідну іконку або комбінацію клавіш, аби відкрити інструмент додавання посилань. Введіть URL-адресу у поле, що з'явилося, та натисніть кнопку «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}», аби вставити посилання.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Щоб змінити або видалити наявне посилання, клацніть на текст із цим посиланням, після чого натисніть іконку «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}», що з'явиться поряд. Відкриється діалогове вікно для редагування. (Ви також можете скористатись комбінацією клавіш {{key press|Ctrl|K}}). Коли посилання виділене, воно має синю рамку.

У діалозі редагування посилань Ви можете відредагувати ціль посилання. Або видалити його цілковито, натиснувши кнопку «{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}» у верхньому правому кутку діалогового вікна.
Ви також можете відкрити ціль посилання у новому вікні, натиснувши копію посилання в діалоговому вікні. (Так можна перевірити, чи зовнішнє посилання дійсне.)

Якщо Ви хочете вийти з діалогу визначення назви посилання (текст посилання) або продовжити писати після цього посилання, натисніть {{Key press|→}}:
* Якщо клацнути один раз, Ви покинете діалог редагування посилань і Ваш курсор опиниться в кінці елемента, до якого було додано посилання (має синю рамку, щоб редагувати цей елемент)
* Якщо клацнути двічі, то Ваш курсор опиниться вже після цього елемента, щоб додати решту тексту.

Щоб відредагувати назву наявного посилання, клацніть на поточній його назві і введіть нову.
Але якщо Ви хочете замінити назву посилання повністю, будь ласка, зверніть увагу:

* Якщо Ви вибрали (виділили) всю назву посилання, це посилання буде повністю вилучене натисканням будь-якої клавіші.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Щоб зберегти поточне посилання, можна клацнути в межах його назви, скористатися кнопками «backspace» і «delete», не натискаючи їх більше разів ніж потрібно, і вузька синя смужка посилання залишиться на місці.&lt;/span&gt; Тепер можна вписати нову назву збереженого посилання.
* Ви також можете [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|посилатися на категорії, файли тощо]].
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Редагування приміток ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Довідка щодо використання шаблонів цитування]] або [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Довідка щодо використання кнопки додавання {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} сервісу Citoid]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== Визначення того, яка система діє ===
|-
| Ваша вікі може використовувати одну з трьох систем додавання приміток. Система, показана справа, є найпростішою. У ній меню «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}» не містить жодних шаблонів цитування. Якщо Ваша вікі використовує цю систему, то все, що Вам треба знати про додавання приміток, Ви знайдете на цій сторінці.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Друга система має той же тип меню «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}», але для швидкого доступу до нього було додано декілька найпопулярніших шаблонів цитувань. Якщо Ваша вікі використовує цю систему, то більше інформації про неї Ви знайдете на сторінці {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;У третій системі Вам знову доведеться починати з натискання відповідної кнопки.&lt;/span&gt; Далі відкриється діалогове вікно, яке містить автоматичний процес додавання примітки за допомогою сервісу Citoid. Якщо Ваша вікі використовує цю систему, то більше інформації про неї Ви зможете знайти на сторінці {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Редагування наявної примітки ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Щоб відредагувати наявну примітку, натисніть по ній там, де вона з'являється у тексті (зазвичай виглядає як число у квадратних дужках). Ви побачите або іконку «$ref» (закладка), або іконку (та назву) шаблону, що був використаний для створення цієї примітки. В будь-якому разі, при натисканні кнопки «Редагувати» відкриється діалогове вікно, в якому можна відредагувати цю примітку.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Що стосується іконки «$ref», то клацання кнопки «Редагувати» відкриє діалогове вікно редагування примітки. Щоб почати змінювати інформацію примітки, клацніть на ній.&lt;/span&gt;

Чимало вікі використовують шаблони для автоматичного форматування приміток. Якщо шаблон використано у Вашій примітці, тоді коли ви наведете вказівник миші на текст примітки, уся інформація у цьому полі буде підсвіченою.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Якщо було використано шаблон і Ви натискаєте на інформації примітки, тоді з'явиться іконка «$template» (частинка пазла) з деякою інформацією. Натисніть на кнопку «редагувати», щоб редагувати вміст шаблону у діалоговому вікні мініредактора шаблонів.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Якщо під час натискання посилання з'являється піктограма стандартного шаблону цитат (приклад праворуч), то натискання «Редагувати» відкриє діалогове вікно мініредактора шаблону.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;У мініредакторі шаблонів Ви можете додавати або вилучати певну інформацію або змінювати поточний вміст шаблону. Початково відображатимуться лише ті поля (параметри шаблону), що заповнені. Додавати поля можна кнопкою «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}» унизу мініредактора.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Натисніть «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}», коли завершите. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Повторне використання наявної примітки ===
|-
| Якщо сторінка уже містить примітки, що стосуються тексту, до якого Ви хочете вказати джерело, Ви можете повторно використати наявне цитування.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Щоб повторно використати наявну примітку, помістіть курсор туди, де ви хочете додати нове посилання (виноску) на це джерело. Після цього натисніть на іконку «Повторно» в меню «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}».
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(Примітка. Якщо ваша вікі має третю систему виносок, описану вище, ви побачите вкладку «Повторно» у діалоговому вікні замість пункту «Повторно» в меню «$cite».)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| У діалоговому вікні «{{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}}» відшукайте примітку, яку ви бажаєте використати повторно, та виберіть її. Якщо наявна велика кількість приміток, можна використати поле пошуку (із запитанням «{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}»), щоб відобразились лише примітки, що містять певний текст.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Додавання нової примітки ===
|-
| Щоб додати нову примітку з використанням меню «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}», помістіть курсор туди, де Ви хочете її додати в тексті. Тоді виберіть відповідний пункт у меню «$cite».
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Використання «Базової» примітки ====
|-
| Тут показано те, що ви побачите, якщо виберете основний елемент посилання.  У редакторі приміток Ви можете додати, відредагувати та відформатувати своє цитування.

Ви можете віднести примітку до певної групи, хоча зазвичай це поле залишають порожнім. (Ця опція використовується для відображення груп приміток з допомогою інструменту «{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}».)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Якщо Ви додаєте нову примітку і хочете включити в неї шаблон посилання на джерело чи якийсь інший шаблон, оберіть пункт «{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}» (частинка пазла) в меню «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}» на панелі інструментів редактора приміток.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Далі, знайдіть шаблон, який хочете використати, додайте його і відредагуйте так, як і будь-який інший шаблон. (Див. додаткову інформацію про шаблони у розділі [[#Editing templates|Редагування шаблонів]] нижче).

Після того, як ви завершите редагування нового шаблону, натисніть «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}», щоб повернутись до редактора приміток, і ще раз «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}», щоб повернутись до сторінки, яку редагуєте.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Якщо списку приміток на сторінці іще немає (наприклад, якщо Ви додаєте на сторінку першу примітку), Вам треба вказати, у якому місці на сторінці він має відображатися для читачів.

Помістіть курсор туди, де Ви хочете, щоб відображались примітки (зазвичай унизу сторінки), відкрийте меню «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}» та натисніть іконку «{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}» (три книжки), щоб додати його.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Якщо Ви створили декілька груп приміток, Ви можете вказати групу у цьому діалозі. На сторінці у місці, де ви розміщуєте групу, будуть відображені лише ті примітки, що належать до вказаної групи.

Щоб завершити додавання списку приміток, натисніть «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}» у діалозі.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Використання стандартних шаблонів цитувань ====
|-
| У Вашій локальній вікі можуть бути додані у меню «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}» іще інші шаблони цитувань. У такому разі ви маєте швидкий доступ до найчастіше використовуваних шаблонів цитувань у вашій вікі. (Інструкції з додавання інших шаблонів цитування у Вашій локальній вікі доступні на сторінці {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Натискання на іконці шаблону, наприклад «Cite book», приведе Вас у мініредактор для цього шаблону. Поля важливої інформації можуть бути відмічені астериском (зірочкою). Відображатимуться переважно частовживані поля, хоч і не всі з них обов'язкові.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Щоб додати більше параметрів, прокрутіть вниз у мініредакторі шаблонів і виберіть опцію «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}».&lt;/span&gt;

Натисніть «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}», коли завершите.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Редагування зображень та інших файлів мультимедіа ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Редагування зображень ===
|-
| Щоб додати нове зображення (або інший медіафайл) на сторінку, натисніть іконку «{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}» (зображення гір) в меню «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}» на панелі інструментів. Зображення буде вставлено туди, де в цю мить перебуває курсор.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Натискання на іконку «{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}» відкриває діалогове вікно, що автоматично шукає у Вікісховищі та локальній вікі медіафайли, пов'язані з назвою сторінки, яку Ви редагуєте.

Ви можете змінити критерії пошуку, змінивши текст у пошуковому рядку діалогу.

Клацніть на мініатюрку, щоб обрати файл.

Ця дія поміщає зображення на сторінку, з якою Ви працюєте.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Коли Ви натиснули на мініатюру, вставивши зображення на сторінку, відкриється діалог медіа. Діалог мультимедіа дозволяє додавати і редагувати опис. Опис може містити форматування та посилання.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Діалог мультимедіа також дозволяє додавати альтернативні текстові підписи, щоб допомогти користувачам, що використовують [[w:uk:Читач екрана|читачі екрана]] або вимкнули показ зображень.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ви також можете налаштувати різні параметри зображення у вікні «{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}». Сюди входять вирівнювання, тип і розміри.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Коли закінчите, натисніть «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}», щоб закрити діалогове вікно та повернутись до редактора сторінки.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| До наявного зображення Ви можете додати чи відредагувати підпис або інші налаштування, клацнувши по зображенню та натиснувши іконку «{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}», що з'являється під зображенням.

Ви можете змінити розмір наявного зображення, натиснувши на нього та перемістивши іконку зміни зображення (двостороння стрілка в одному чи обох кутках унизу).

Ви також можете перетягти зображення вище або нижче на сторінці.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== Завантаження зображень ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Ви можете завантажувати зображення з вкладки у діалозі мультимедіа або перетягнувши і відпустивши файл у редакторі, або вставивши зображення із буфера обміну.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Натисніть вкладку «Завантажити» й оберіть зображення зі свого комп'ютера. Ви можете ввести назву файлу або перетягти зображення на вікно. Якщо ви перетягнули зображення безпосередньо в редактор або вставили його з буфера обміну, ця вкладка відкриється автоматично.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Ви можете описати зображення і додати категорії до нього, щоб інші люди могли його знайти.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Зображення буде вставлене на сторінку, коли Ви завершите.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Редагування галерей мультимедіа ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Щоб додати нову галерею, натисніть іконку «{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}» (набір фотознімків) у меню «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}». (Якщо Ви не бачите цієї іконки у тому меню, то Ваша локальна вікі вирішила відкласти впровадження цього функціоналу у Візуальному редакторі.) 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Щоб відредагувати існуючу галерею у Візуальному редакторі, клацніть будь-де в межах тієї галереї. Далі, ближче до низу галереї, натисніть на іконку галереї (набір фото). Цим Ви відкриєте вікно редагування галереї із повним списком зображень, які в неї включені.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Діалог редагування галереї зараз виглядає як простий прямокутник, що дозволяє Вам редагувати наявні галереї з використанням вікірозмітки. Щоб додати нове зображення до наявної галереї, введіть назву файлу і вертикальну риску після нього (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), а далі — опис зображення. Кожне зображення в галереї треба вписувати з нового рядка.&lt;/span&gt; Ви також можете редагувати цей список, щоб вилучити зображення або переставити місцями чи змінити підписи.

Натиснувши кнопку «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}», ви вийдете з редактора галерей. Далі Ви маєте побачити результат внесених Вами змін — галерея виглядатиме такою, якою її бачитимуть читачі.

Пам'ятайте, що вихід з діалогу редагування галереї не публікує Ваших змін. Як і з іншими змінами, зробленими з допомогою візуального редактора, Ви маєте опублікувати усю сторінку, щоб опублікувати свою роботу.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Редагування шаблонів ==
Потужна система шаблонів MediaWiki дозволяє вам вставляти динамічний вміст, текст з інших сторінок і багато іншого. Детальне пояснення та приклади можна знайти на [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|сторінці довідки про шаблони]]. 

У візуальному редакторі ви можете шукати потрібний шаблон, додати посилання на нього або [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|включити]] його на сторінці, яку редагуєте, а також внести у нього додатковий контент, використовуючи [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|параметри]].

=== Вставляння нового шаблона ===
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Щоб додати шаблон на сторінку, помістіть курсор у те місце на сторінці, куди потрібно вставити шаблон. Далі відкрийте меню {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} й оберіть «[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}». Або ж ви можете ввести дві відкривні фігурні дужки {{((}}, і відкриється цей самий діалог.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ви також можете редагувати шаблон, який уже є на сторінці. Коли ви обираєте шаблон, який хочете відредагувати, він стає синім і з'являється комірка з текстом «[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}». Далі натисніть на посилання «{{int|vector-view-edit}}» або двічі натисніть на сам шаблон, щоб він відкрився.
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Деякі шаблони невидимі для тих, хто читає сторінку. У візуальному редакторі такі приховані шаблони все ще відображаються, щоб їх можна було натиснути, відредагувати чи видалити. Назва шаблону буде показано біля значка пазла; і назва, й значок будуть сірими.
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Параметри шаблону ===
|-
| Коли ви додаєте новий шаблон або редагуєте уже наявний, то побачите це діалогове віконце. Що ви бачите у віконці, залежить від того, чи даний шаблон містить {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}} — корисні метадані, додані іншими редакторами, які полегшують редагування шаблонів у візуальному редакторі.

Коли шаблон містить TemplateData, візуальний редактор може використовувати ці дані, щоб показувати вам анотовані поля, які ви можете заповнити.


Для шаблонів, які мають створений спільнотою TemplateData, візуальний редактор показує список іменованих параметрів, а також описи та інструкції, які пояснюють, що означає кожен параметр і якого формату має бути його значення.
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
==== Додавання недокументованих параметрів ====
|-
| Якщо ви додаєте чи редагуєте шаблон, автор якого не описав усі параметри у TemplateData, то цей шаблон матиме, як ми говоримо, «недокументовані» чи «неіменовані параметри». У цьому випадку вам варто ознайомитися із сторінкою самого шаблона. Там ви дізнаєтеся, як правильно додавати і використовувати усі параметри шаблона. Сюди належать також і точні назви параметрів, як вони прописані автором шаблона.  

Якщо у документації шаблона написано, що шаблон очікує параметрів без назв, то скористайтеся номерами параметрів як замінниками для назв, ввівши їх у полі використання недокументованих параметрів, а тоді додайте їхні значення, як зазвичай. 

Приклад:
* перший неіменований параметр: «1»
* значення першого неіменованого параметра: «en_US»
* другий неіменований параметр: «2»
* значення другого неіменованого параметра: «так»

Якщо ви випадково додали неіснуючі чи помилкові параметри, то значення, які ви введете для цих параметрів, не будуть показані на сторінці, яку ви редагуєте. 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
==== Автозгенеровані параметри ====
|-
| У цьому прикладі шаблон не має TemplateData, але для нього вдалося автоматично згенерувати параметри. Це означає, що для вас уже додано недокументовані параметри, але їхні назви можуть не бути зрозумілими, а діалог не може видати вам жодних описів чи вказівок щодо їх використання. Діалогове віконце містить посилання на документацію шаблона, яка має допомогти вам розібратися і заповнити різні параметри шаблона.
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
==== Редагування вмісту з багатокомпонентними шаблонами ====
|-
| Під час редагування ви можете відкрити вміст, що складається з кількох шаблонів, або єдиного шаблона, пов'язаного з якимось вікітекстом. Це відрізняється від вкладених один в один шаблонів, які розглянуті нижче. У цьому випадку, шаблони краще уявляти як пов'язані чи складені один на одному. 

Такий вміст часто має «незбалансовані шаблони» — шаблони, які самі по собі не є цілісними й обов'язково мають бути в зв'язці з якимось вікітекстом або іншим шаблоном, щоб нормально функціонувати. 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
==== Вкладені шаблони ====
|-
| Шаблони можуть містити інші шаблони у ролі значень своїх параметрів. Ви помітите їх, коли побачите значення параметра, яке містить подвійні фігурні дужки &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; — вони і позначають шаблон. 

Візуальний редактор не може відобразити цей шаблон-в-шаблоні (вкладений шаблон) використовують простий для використання інтерфейс, тому якщо ви хочете вкласти шаблон самостійно, вам треба буде зрозуміти, як додавати шаблон вручну вікітекстом у полі відповідного параметра.
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Завершення вашого редагування ===
|-
| Коли ви закінчите редагувати шаблон, ви можете натиснути «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}». Тоді ви можете попередньо переглянути своє редагування і переконатися, що все виглядає так, як ви хотіли й очікували.

Ви можете побачити повідомлення про помилку, яке (як-то інші TemplateData, згадані вище) задане іншими редакторами і може бути більш чи менш корисним.
Вам може знадобитися познайомитися з документацією самого шаблона, щоб розібратися в причинах деяких помилок.
Якщо у вас все ще є труднощі, можливо, вам варто буде написати про свою проблему на сторінці обговорення шаблона.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Вилучення шаблона ===
|-
| Щоб вилучити шаблон у візуальному редакторі, натисніть на нього. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|Вилучення шаблона у візуальному редакторі]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Редагування з мобільного ===
|-
| При редагуванні шаблона на сторінці у візуальному редакторі на мобільному пристрої, ви побачите, що бічна панель початково прихована. Її можна зробити видимою, натиснувши на кнопку «Показати/сховати параметри».

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|Редагування шаблона з мобільного у візуальному редакторі]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Підставляння шаблонів ===
|-
| Коли ви вставляєте шаблон на вікісторінку, його вміст і вигляд переоцінюються кожного разу, коли сторінка завантажується, залежно від коду шаблона і значення його параметрів. Це означає, що якщо хтось оновлює код шаблона, то після публікації таких змін кожна сторінка, яка використовує цей шаблон, також ці зміни отримає.

Існує однак інший, набагато менш поширений спосіб використання шаблонів, і це [[w:Help:Substitution|підстановка]] шаблона.
Виконання цієї дії вставляє вміст шаблона на сторінку назовсім, таким, яким він є у цей момент. Надалі цей вміст не буде оновлюватися, якщо код шаблона пізніше зміниться.

Більшості користувачів ніколи не потрібно користуватися цією можливістю.
Підстановка зазвичай корисна лише тоді, коли є потреба розмістити вміст однієї версії шаблона, наприклад, коли його вміст у процесі розробки і потребує оцінки.

Щоб виконати підстановку шаблона у візуальному редакторі, вставте шаблон, скориставшись таким синтаксисом назви: &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;назва шаблона&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
(Автодоповнення у цьому випадку не працюватиме).
Далі натисніть синю кнопку «Додати шаблон».

Коли ви завершите, натисніть «Вставити», і вміст шаблону буде вставлено так, як ви його бачите.
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Редагування списків ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Ви можете використовувати візуальний редактор для створення списків або для зміни формату наявного списку. Існує два типи списків: невпорядковані (марковані) і впорядковані (нумеровані).

Щоб створити новий список, просто натисніть один із двох пунктів меню, показаних тут. Або, якщо ви вже ввели список (в окремих рядках), виберіть (виділіть) список, який ви ввели, а потім натисніть один із пунктів меню.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Тут наведено приклади двох типів списків: невпорядкований (маркований) і впорядкований (нумерований).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Якщо ви хочете змінити рівень відступу частини наявного списку, виберіть частину списку, яку потрібно змінити.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Потім скористайтеся меню або натисніть клавішу Tab. (Клавіша Tab збільшує відступ; використовуйте клавішу Shift+Tab, щоб зменшити відступ)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Ось результат збільшення відступу.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Ви навіть можете змішувати впорядковані (нумеровані) та невпорядковані (марковані) списки, якщо елементи списку мають різні відступи.
|}

== Редагування таблиць ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Ви можете використовувати візуальний редактор для додавання та редагування таблиць.

Ви навіть можете імпортувати таблицю, перетягнувши файл із значеннями, розділеними комами (.csv), зі свого комп’ютера в головне вікно редагування.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Коли ви натискаєте «Таблиця», у меню «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}» візуальний редактор вставляє порожню таблицю чотири на чотири.

Тепер доступне меню «Таблиця». З цього меню ви можете додати підпис у верхній частині таблиці.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Щоб вибрати клітинку, натисніть її один раз.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Щоб відредагувати вміст комірки (наприклад, щоб додати вміст або виправити орфографічну помилку), двічі натисніть у комірці. Або ви можете вибрати клітинку, а тоді натиснути Enter на клавіатурі.

Щоб завершити редагування комірки, просто натисніть в іншому місці.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| Ви можете додавати, переміщувати або видаляти колонки або рядки.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ви можете об'єднати клітинки: виберіть їх, а потім у меню «Таблиця» натисніть «Об'єднати комірки».
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Якщо ви об’єднаєте комірки, зберігається лише текст в одній комірці; будь-який текст в інших комірках при об'єднанні вилучається. Якщо ви вирішите, що хочете видалити частину або весь текст, скористайтеся кнопкою «Скасувати», перемістіть або скопіюйте потрібний текст, а потім знову об'єднайте комірки.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ви також можете розділити комірки, які раніше були об'єднані. Весь вміст, який був в об'єднаній комірці, залишиться в першій комірці, коли ви зробите поділ. Потім ви можете вирізати та вставляти текст в інші комірці, якщо хочете.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Редагування категорій ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| Для редагування категорій, клацніть кнопку «{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}» в меню «{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}».
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Натискання на «{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}» відкриває діалогове вікно, у якому перераховані наявні категорії і можна додати нові, а також вилучити наявні.

У Вас є можливість встановлення або зміни загального (типового) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|ключа сортування]], що використовується для визначення того, де сторінка перебуватиме при відображенні її у списку всіх сторінок, що належать до однакової категорії.

Приміром, для статті «Джордж Вашингтон» ключ сортування за замовчуванням «Вашингтон, Джордж», тому в категорії «Президенти Сполучених Штатів» ця стаття розміщена під літерою «В», а не під «Д».
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Щоб додати категорію до сторінки, введіть назву категорії у поле «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}». Під час вводу тексту, візуальний редактор автоматично підшукуватиме наявні категорії з найбільш відповідними назвами. Ви можете або вибрати вже наявну категорію, або додати категорію, яка ще не має власної сторінки. (Доки така сторінка категорії не буде створена, додана Вами категорія виглядатиме як червоне посилання після публікування внесених Вами змін.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Щоб видалити наявну категорію, клацніть на ній і натисніть іконку «{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}» (смітник) у діалоговому вікні, що відкриється.

Клацання на категорії також дозволить Вам вказати ключ сортування для цієї конкретної категорії. Таким чином можна знехтувати стандартним ключем сортування.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Натисніть «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}», коли завершите редагування категорій, щоб повернутись до редактора сторінки.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Редагування параметрів сторінки ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| Щоб редагувати параметри сторінки, відкрийте меню «{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}» на панелі інструментів і натисніть кнопку «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}».
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Кнопка «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}» відкриває діалогове вікно, що пропонує декілька опцій.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Ви можете зробити сторінку перенаправленням на іншу сторінку, поставивши галочку «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}», а потім ввівши назву сторінки, на яку Ви хочете відправляти читача, коли він намагатиметься зайти на сторінку, яку Ви саме редагуєте.

Унизу є опція, яка запобігає оновленню цього перенаправлення при перейменуванні сторінки, що використовується дуже рідко.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Ви можете вказати, чи має ця сторінка відображати зміст, вибравши одну з цих трьох кнопок. Опцією за замовчуванням є «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}», за якою зміст відображається, коли є три і більше розділів.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Ви можете зробити так, щоб на сторінці не відображалися посилання на редагування поруч із заголовком кожного розділу, поставивши цю галочку.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Натисніть «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}», коли завершите редагувати {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}, щоб повернутися до редактора сторінки.
|}

== Редагування мап ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Ви можете додавати та змінювати мапи. Дивіться {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Редагування математичних формул ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Щоб додати нову математичну формулу на сторінку, помістіть курсор туди, де вона має бути, і натисніть на іконку «{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}» («Σ») у меню «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}» на панелі інструментів.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Відкриється віконце, у якому Вам треба ввести формулу, використовуючи синтаксис LaTeX. Візуальний редактор буде оновлювати формулу по ходу друку, тож Ви зможете бачити, як вона виглядатиме в процесі набору. Як тільки Ви будете задоволені результатом, натисніть кнопку «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}».
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Щоб відредагувати існуючу на сторінці математичну формулу, клацніть на ній, а потім натисніть іконку «Σ» у меню, що випливе. Це відкриє віконце і дасть Вам змогу внести зміни.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Математичні формули можуть бути розміщені в рядку або по центру як блок.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Редагування нот ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Щоб додати нову нотну грамоту на сторінку, помістіть курсор у те місце, куди потрібно вставити нотний запис. Потім у меню «Вставити» на панелі інструментів натисніть опцію «Нотний запис».

Щоб відредагувати наявний нотний запис на сторінці, двічі натисніть на нього.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Це відкриє діалогове вікно «Музичні ноти». Тут позначення можна редагувати за гамою, у форматі ABC або у форматі Lilypond. Ви також можете зв’язати нотацію з аудіо або MIDI-файлом. Після завершення натисніть кнопку «Готово», щоб закрити діалогове вікно та опублікувати зміни.
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Редагування віршів та інших незвичних елементів ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Деякі елементи, як-то списки асоціацій і вірші, ще не підтримуються візуальним редактором повною мірою.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| У більшості випадків наявні елементи можна редагувати, але нові не можна вставити у візуальний редактор.

Поки вони не підтримуються повністю, ви можете скопіювати наявну з іншої сторінки або безпосередньо редагувати вихідний вікітекст.

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== Перемикання між візуальним і вікітекстовим редакторами ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
Щоб переключитися з візуального редактора на редактор вікітексту, натисніть кнопку &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; у крайньому правому куті панелі інструментів.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ви побачите різницю. (Якщо ви натиснули «Відхилити зміни», ви просто побачите вікітекст, готовий до редагування за допомогою редактора вікітексту.)

Прокрутіть вниз, і ви побачите область редагування вікітексту. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
Ви також можете переключитися з редактора вікітексту на візуальний редактор. Для цього натисніть піктограму олівця в крайньому правому куті панелі інструментів.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Комбінації клавіш ==

Чимало редакторів використовують для прямого вводу вікітексту, особливо жирного, курсиву і вікіпосилань. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Комбінації клавіш]] дають змогу швидко вставити подібне форматування без необхідності натискати кнопки панелі інструментів. Загальні комбінації клавіш, які використовуються й іншими редакторами, працюють у візуальному редакторі:

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! Комбінація для ПК
! Дія
! Комбінація для Mac
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Жирний
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Курсив
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Вставити посилання
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Вирізати
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Копіювати
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Вставити
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Скасувати
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>lswhg15hvysq8b692n6yrs5ve00qcf9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/pl</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>134349</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402784</id>
      <parentid>5347025</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:51:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="61896" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Edytor wizualny można wypróbować, nie zmieniając artykułu - [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} tu można swobodnie go testować].&lt;/span&gt; Nie jest konieczne posiadanie konta, aby zmienić tę stronę za pomocą edytora wizualnego.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Uruchamianie edytora wizualnego ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| Aby zmienić stronę za pomocą edytora wizualnego, należy kliknąć w zakładkę „{{int|vector-view-edit}}” u góry strony.

Może potrwać kilka sekund, zanim otworzy się strona edycji lub dłużej, jeżeli strona jest bardzo długa.

Kliknięcie w zakładkę „{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}” otworzy klasyczny edytor kodu źródłowego.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Edytor wizualny można także uruchomić, klikając link „{{int|editsection}}”, znajdujący się przy nagłówku każdej sekcji.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Na początek: pasek narzędzi edytora wizualnego ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Zrzut ekranu: pasek narzędzi edytora wizualnego]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | Po uruchomieniu edytora wizualnego na górze ekranu pojawi się pasek narzędzi. Zawiera on znajome ikony:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' lub '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' wykonane zmiany.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Nagłówki''' (menu rozwijane): pozwala zmienić formatowanie tekstu. Aby zmienić styl akapitu należy umieścić kursor w tekście (nie ma potrzeby zaznaczania czegokolwiek). Tytuły sekcji są formatowane jako „{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}”, a podsekcji jako „{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}”, „{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}” itd. Zwykłe formatowanie tekstu to „{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}”.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Formatowanie:''' Kliknięcie na „&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;” otwiera menu. 
* „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}” ('''B''') wytłuszcza zaznaczony tekst.
* „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}” (''I'') pochyla zaznaczony tekst.
* „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}” (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) umieszcza zaznaczony tekst we frakcji górnej.
* „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}” (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) umieszcza zaznaczony tekst w indeksie dolnym, tj. będzie mniejszy i niżej niż reszta tekstu.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) dodaje przekreślenie do zaznaczonego tekstu.
* Element „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}” (para nawiasów klamrowych: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) ustawia czcionkę zaznaczonego tekstu na czcionkę o stałej szerokości; nie wpływa to na pozostały tekst w akapicie.
* Element „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}” (&lt;u&gt;A&lt;/u&gt;) dodaje linię ciągłą pod zaznaczonym tekstem.
* „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}” (文A) pozwala ustawić język zaznaczonego tekstu (np. na japoński) i kierunek pisania (np. od prawej do lewej).
* Ostatni element („[[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]”), zwany „{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}”, usuwa formatowanie zaznaczonego tekstu, w tym linkowanie.

Jeżeli nie zaznaczono żadnego tekstu, po kliknięciu &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; i otwarciu menu, z którego zostanie wybrana pozycja, wybrane formatowanie zostanie zastosowane do następnie wpisywanego tekstu, w miejscu, gdzie zlokalizowany jest kursor.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Linkowanie:''' ikona łańcucha symbolizuje [[#Editing links|narzędzie wstawiania odnośników (linków)]]. Kliknięcie w nią (zazwyczaj po zaznaczeniu tekstu) otwiera [[#Editing links|okno linku]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''Menu „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}”''' używamy do dodania przypisów. Jest możliwość dodania zwykłych przypisów i wykorzystania istniejących, wcześniej już zdefiniowanych. W tym menu dostępne jest także wstawianie szablonów cytowania dostępnych lokalnie na edytowanej wiki.

(Instrukcje dodawania lokalnych szablonów cytowania do menu „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}” są opisane na {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}})
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''Przycisk {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jeżeli na polskiej wiki jest włączony Citoid, to dostępny będzie przycisk „{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}” zamiast menu „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

Citoid spróbuje samodzielnie wypełnić szablon cytowania.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Listy i wcięcia:''' pierwsze dwa elementy pozwalają formatować tekst jako „{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}” albo „{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}”. Kolejne dwa służą do powiększania lub zmniejszania wcięcia listy elementów.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' menu „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}” może się różnić na różnych wiki. Poniżej zamieszczono listę '''wszystkich''' możliwych opcji.
* Ikona „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}” (obrazek przedstawiający góry) otwiera [[#Editing images and other media files|okno multimediów]].
* Ikona „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}” (puzel) otwiera okno [[#Editing templates|zmieniania szablonów]].
* Element „Tabela” pozwala na wstawienie tabeli.
* „{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}” (dymek) otwiera okno dodawania komentarzy, które są niewidoczne dla czytelników; są widoczne tylko w trybie edycji jako ikonka wykrzyknika w kółku, której kliknięcie pozwala na edycje lub usunięcie komentarza.
* Ikona „{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}” (symbol [[:w:anch|anch]] - ☥) otwiera okno wstawiania hieroglifów (patrz niżej).
* Element &quot;Blok kodu&quot; pozwala na wstawienie kodu.
* Element „Notacja muzyczna” pozwala na wstawianie zapisu nut.
* Ikona „{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}” (zbiór zdjęć) otwiera okno wstawiania galerii.
* Ikona „{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}” (Σ) otwiera okno [[#Editing mathematical formulae|wstawiania wzorów matematycznych]].
* Element „Wykres” pozwala na wstawianie wykresów.
* Element „{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}” pozwala na wstawienie podpisu, którego używasz w danym projekcie. Element będzie wyświetlony w kolorze szarym (czyli nie można go wybrać), jeżeli będziesz edytować stronę takiego typu (w przestrzeni nazw), w którym nie powinno się wstawiać podpisów.
* Ikona „{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}” (trzy książki) otwiera okno dialogowe, w którym możesz określić, gdzie przypisy zostaną wyświetlone czytelnikowi. Zazwyczaj na stronie potrzeba użyć tego tylko raz.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Wstawianie znaków specjalnych:''' naciśnięcie na ikonę „{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}” (Ω) obok menu „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}” otwiera okno z wieloma znakami specjalnymi. Naciśnięcie na znak umieszcza go w tekście. Zbiór znaków specjalnych zawiera niektóre standardowe symbole, litery diakrytyczne i symbole matematyczne. (Tę listę można lokalnie dostosowywać, zobacz instrukcję: {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}})
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| Okno '''komunikatów''' wyświetla komunikaty kierowane do użytkownika dotyczące edytowanej strony.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''{{int|visualeditor-mweditmode-tooltip}}'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an ''{{int|visualeditor-meta-tool}}'' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:&lt;/span&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-templatesused-tool}}''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The tabs of the {{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-title}} dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the items {{int|visualeditor-changedir-tool-ltr}} or {{int|visualeditor-changedir-tool-rtl}} and the item '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Find and replace|{{int|visualeditor-find-and-replace-title}}]]''', which opens a bar, where you can insert words or regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Przycisk '''Edytowanie kodu źródłowego''' znajduje się obok przycisku '''$save'''. Umożliwia przełączanie do edytora kodu źródłowego.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Publikowanie zmian ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Po zakończeniu edycji należy kliknąć na niebieski przycisk „{{int|publishchanges}}” na pasku narzędzi. Nie jest to możliwe, jeśli nie dokonano żadnych zmian (przycisk jest szary). Aby anulować wszystkie zmiany edycyjne, wystarczy zamknąć okno przeglądarki albo kliknąć zakładkę „{{int|vector-view-view}}” nad paskiem narzędzi edycji.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Naciśnięcie niebiekiego przycisku „{{int|publishchanges-start}}” otwiera okno, w którym można wprowadzić krótkie podsumowanie swoich działań, oznaczyć edycję jako drobną czy zdecydować się na obserwowanie przyszłych zmian na stronie. To okno odpowiada polu opisu zmian w edytorze kodu źródłowego.&lt;/span&gt;

Można też przejrzeć swoje zmiany, używając przycisku „{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}”. W ten sposób można upewnić się jeszcze przed zapisaniem edycji, że zmiany są zgodne z ich intencjami. Ta opcja odpowiada przyciskowi „{{int|showdiff}}” w edytorze kodu źródłowego.

Klikając na przycisk „{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}”, wracasz do edytowanej strony. Później możesz zapisać wszystkie swoje zmiany.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Edycja linków ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Można dodać link za pomocą ikony „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}” w pasku narzędzi lub używając skrótu klawiszowego {{Key press|Ctrl|K}} (lub {{Key press|Command|K}} na Mac-u).

Po zaznaczeniu (podświetleniu) tekstu naciśnięcie na „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}” spowoduje użycie tego tekstu do tworzenia linku. W przypadku linku obejmującego jeden wyraz można albo zaznaczyć wyraz, albo umieścić kursor w środku tego wyrazu.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Niezależnie od tego, czy użyto ikonki czy skrótu, to otworzy się okno dialogowe, w którym można wpisać adres linku.
Edytor linków będzie wyszukał proponowane linki '''wewnętrzne''' pasujące do tego, co wpiszesz.
Po wpisaniu lub wybraniu linku, można wcisnąć {{key press|Enter}} albo kliknąć „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}”. Link pojawi się na zmienianej stronie, ale, jak pozostałe zmiany, nie będzie opublikowany, dopóki ''cała'' strona nie zostanie opublikowana.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Aby dodać link do innej strony, proces jest podobny: należy wybrać zakładkę „{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}” i wpisać adres URL.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Linki zewnętrzne bez etykiet wyglądają tak: [http://example.com]. Można je dodać, klikając gdziekolwiek indziej (np. po spacji). Należy otwórzyć narzędzie do edycji linków, klikając na przycisk lub używając skrótu klawiszowego. Należy wpisać URL i kliknąć przycisk „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}”, by wstawić link.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Aby zmienić lub usunąć istniejący link, kliknij na niego, a następnie na ikonę „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}” widoczną obok. Pojawi się okno do zmieniania linku. (Możesz też kliknąć na taką samą ikonę na pasku narzędzi lub użyć skrótu klawiszowego {{key press|Ctrl|K}}). Jeżeli link zostanie zaznaczony, to wyświetli się na niebieskim tle.

W oknie zmieniania linku można zmienić stronę do której ma prowadzić link, albo usunąć link, klikając na ikonę „{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}”, znajdującą się w prawym górnym rogu okna.
Można  także otworzyć link w osobnym oknie, wybierając taką opcję w menu kontekstowym. (Można sprawdzić, czy link zewnętrzny jest poprawny).

Aby wyjść z okna edycji linku (tekstu wyświetlonego jako link) lub kontynuować pisanie po tym linku, można nacisnąć {{Key press|→}}:
* Pojedyncze naciśnięcie spowoduje wyjście z okna edycji linku i umieści kursor na końcu linkowanego elementu (który będzie wyróżniony w niebieskiej ramce podczas edycji)
* Dwukrotne naciśnięcie umieści kursor za linkiem, w miejscu, gdzie można kontynuować pisanie.

Aby zmienić etykietę linku (wyświetlany tekst), kliknij na etykietę i wpisz nową.
Jeżeli chcesz całkowicie zmienić etykietę, uważaj na:

* Jeżeli zaznaczyłeś (podświetliłeś) całą etykietę linku, link do zostanie usunięty po wciśnięciu jakiegokolwiek klawisza.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Aby sam link był zachowany podczas zmiany, używaj klawiszy backspace i delete i nie wciskaj ich więcej razy niż to konieczne, pozostanie wtedy wąski niebieski obszar linka.&lt;/span&gt; Teraz możesz wpisać nowy tekst pozostawionego linka.
* Możesz także utworzyć [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|łącza do kategorii, plików i innych elementów]].
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Edycja przypisów ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Pomoc w używaniu szablonów cytowania]] i [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|pomoc w używaniu Citoida {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== Ustalanie który system obowiązuje ===
|-
| Wiki, na której edytujesz może używać jednego z trzech sposobów wstawiania przypisów. Po prawej wyświetlany jest najprostszy sposób, w którym menu „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}” nie zawiera zdefiniowanych dla wiki szablonów cytowania. Jeżeli twoja wiki używa tego systemu, to wszystko co należy wiedzieć o wstawianiu przypisów, jest na tej stronie.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Drugi system ma takie samo menu „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}”, ale zawierające kilka szablonów cytowania do szybkiego wstawiania. Jeżeli twoja wiki używa tego systemu, to szczegóły można znaleźć na {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;W trzecim systemie również zaczynasz przez kliknięcie przycisku Przypis.&lt;/span&gt; Pojawi się okienko, które oferuje automatyczny proces wstawiania przypisu przy użyciu usługi Citoid. Jeżeli wiki, na której działasz korzysta z tego systemu to więcej informacji zdobędziesz na stronie {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Edycja istniejącego przypisu ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Aby zmienić istniejący przypis, należy kliknąć na niego w tekście, w którym się on znajduje (zazwyczaj to liczba w nawiasie). Pojawi się ikona „$ref” (obrazek zakładki w książce) albo ikona i nazwa szablonu, którego użyto do utworzenia przypisu. W obu przypadkach, kliknięcie na &quot;Edytuj&quot; otworzy okno, w którym można zmienić ten przypis.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Kliknięcie na „Edytuj” obok ikony „$ref” otwiera okno dialogowe. Aby zmienić tekst przypisu należy kliknąć na niego.&lt;/span&gt;

Wiele serwisów wiki używa szablonów formatujących przypisy do właściwego standardu. Jeżeli w przypisie użyto szablonu, przesunięcie kursora na tekście spowoduje podświetlenie się tekstu.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jeżeli użyto szablonu, to kliknięcie na tekst formatowany za pomocą szablonu spowoduje pojawienie się ikony „$template”. Należy kliknąć  przycisk „Edytuj”, by edytować zawartość szablonu.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jeżeli pojawia się wtedy standardowa ikona przypisu (przykład po prawej), kliknięcie „Edytuj” otworzy okno edytowania szablonu.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Kliknięcie na ikonę ''Dołączony szablon'' pozwala dodać i usuwać rodzaje informacji oraz zmieniać wpisane informacje. Na początku pojawią się tylko te pola (parametry), które zawierają treść. By dodać pola, należy kliknąć na „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}” na dole okna dialogowego.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Po zakończeniu należy kliknąć „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}”. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Używanie istniejącego przypisu ===
|-
| Jeżeli strona zawiera już przypisy, to można wybrać jeden z nich, o ile dotyczy on informacji  do której należy go dodać.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Aby użyć istniejącego przypisu, należy umieścić kursor w miejscu, w którym ma być on dodany i kliknąć na ikonę „Użyj istniejącego” (obrazek zakładki w książce) z menu „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}”.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(Uwaga: Jeżeli twoja wiki ma trzeci system wstawiania przypisów opisany powyżej, to będzie dostępna zakładka „Użyj istniejącego” w oknie dialogowym, zamiast ikonki „Użyj istniejącego” widniejącej w menu „$cite”).
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| W oknie „{{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}}” dostępna będzie lista istniejących przypisów, które można wybrać i wstawić ponownie. Jeżeli jest ich wiele, to można użyć wyszukiwarki (podpowiadającej „{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}”) i otrzymać listę tylko tych przypisów, które zawierają tekst wpisany do wyszukiwarki.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Tworzenie nowego przypisu ===
|-
| Aby utworzyć nowy przypis używając menu „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}”, należy umieścić kursor w miejscu, w którym ma być wstawiony, a następnie wybrać odpowiedni typ przypisu z menu.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Użycie „zwykłego wyglądu” ====
|-
| Obok pokazano, co wyświetli się po wybraniu opcji „zwykły przypis”.  W tym oknie dialogowym można dodać, edytować i formatować swój przypis.

Można określić przynależność przypisu do danej grupy (zwykle do żadnej nie należy). Ta opcja jest używana do wyświetlania grup przypisów za pomocą narzędzia „{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}”.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Jeżeli dodawany jest nowy przypis i ma być w nim zawarty szablon przypisu albo jakiś inny, to należy kliknąć na ikonę „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}” (obrazek puzzla) w menu „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}” w pasku narzędziowym okna tworzenia nowego przypisu.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Należy wybrać szablon, który ma być użyty, dodać  i zmienić tak samo, jak zmienia się istniejący. (Zobacz sekcję [[#Editing templates|Edycja szablonów]] dla uzyskania dodatkowych informacji  o szablonach).

Po zakończeniu edytowania nowego szablonu należy  kliknąć na „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}”, by wrócić do edytora przypisów i powtórnie „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}”, by wrócić do edytowanej strony.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Jeżeli strona nie zawiera jeszcze listy przypisów (np. tworzony jest właśnie pierwszy przypis), to tę listę dodać, aby treść przypisów wyświetlała się na stronie.

Należy umieścić kursor w miejscu, w którym ma wyświetlać się lista przypisów (zwykle na dole strony) i otworzyć menu „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}”, po czym kliknąć na ikonę „{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}” (obrazek trzech książek).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Gdy używa się kilku grup przypisów, co jest rzadkie, to można wybrać jedną z nich w tym oknie. Tylko te przypisy, które należą do niej, wyświetlą się w miejscu, w którym umieszcza się  daną grupę.

Ostatnim krokiem w oknie edycji grup przypisów jest kliknięcie na „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}”.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Użycie standardowych szablonów cytowań ====
|-
| Na lokalnej wiki mogą być podane inne szablony w menu „{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}”. Jeżeli tak jest, to jest szybki dostęp do najczęściej używanych szablonów przypisów na waszej wiki. (Instrukcje takiego dodawania szablonów przypisów do menu są opisane na {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Kliknięcie na ikonę szablonu taką jak „Cytuj książkę” zaprowadzi do edytora tego szablonu. Ważne pola informacji mogą być oznaczone gwiazdką. Domyślnie wyświetlają się najczęściej używane pola, ale być może nie będzie potrzeby wypełniania wszystkich.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;By dodać więcej parametrów należy przewinąć okno edycji szablonu i kliknąć na „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}”.&lt;/span&gt;

Po zakończeniu należy kliknąć na „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}”.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Edycja obrazków i innych plików multimedialnych ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Edycja obrazków ===
|-
| Aby dodać nowe zdjęcie (lub inny plik multimedialny) do strony, należy kliknąć ikonę „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}” (obrazek gór) w rozwijanym menu „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}”. Zdjęcie zostanie wstawione w miejscu, gdzie znajduje się kursor.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Kliknięcie na ikonę „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}” otwiera okno dialogowe, które automatycznie wyszukuje w Wikimedia Commons i w polskiej wiki pliki multimedialne związane z tytułem edytowanej strony.

Można szukać innych plików multimedialnych, zmieniając tekst w oknie dialogowym w polu wyszukiwania.

Należy kliknąć na miniaturę, aby wybrać plik.

To umieszcza plik na stronie, która jest edytowana.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Kiedy wybierany jest i wstawiany plik na stronę, to pojawi się nowe okno dialogowe, w którym można dodać (lub zmienić) opis, który może zawierać sformatowany tekst i linki.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Okno edycji multimediów pozwala na dodawanie alternatywnych opisów używanych przez osoby, które używają czytników ekranowych oraz przez tych, którzy wyłączyli wyświetlanie plików.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Można także skorzystać z różnych ustawień plików w oknie „{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}”. Znajdują się tam opcje wyrównania, rodzaju wyświetlania i rozmiaru pliku.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Po zakończeniu należy kliknąć  ''{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}'' by zamknąć okno i wrócić do edycji strony.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Można zmieniać opis lub ustawienia istniejącej grafiki poprzez kliknięcie tej grafiki, a następnie kliknięcia ikony „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}” umieszczonej poniżej grafiki.

Można zmienić rozmiar istniejącego pliku, klikając na niego i przesuwając ikony zmieniania rozmiaru (dwukierunkowe strzałki na jednym albo dwóch dolnych rogach pliku).

Można także przeciągać i upuszczać plik, by umieścić go wyżej albo niżej.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== Przesyłanie plików ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Można ładować nowe pliki, używając zakładki w menu edycji plików, przeciągając i upuszczając plik w edytorze lub wklejając obraz ze schowka.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Należy kliknąć przycisk „Załaduj” i wybrać plik grafiki na komputerze lokalnym – można wpisać nazwę lub zaczepić i przeciągnąć do okna. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Należy opisać grafikę i zdefiniować jej kategorię, co pozwoli innym ją odnaleźć.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Po zakończeniu grafika zostanie wstawiona na stronę.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Edycja i wstawianie galerii zdjęć ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Aby dodać nową galerię, należ kliknąć ikonę „{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}” (zbiór zdjęć) w menu „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}”. (Jeżeli nie widzisz tej ikony w tym menu to oznacza, że na lokalnej wiki zdecydowano, że zostanie odłożone zaimplementowanie tej funkcji w edytorze wizualnym.) 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Aby edytować w edytorze wizualnym istniejącą galerię należy ją kliknąć. Następnie na dole galerii należy kliknąć ikonę galerii (zestaw grafik). Spowoduje to wywołanie edytora galerii z pełnym wykazem grafik w galerii.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Edytor galerii obecnie to zwykłe okno w którym można edytować istniejące galerie w wikikodzie. Aby do galerii dodać nową grafikę, to należy wpisać nazwę pliku, następnie kreskę (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) i opis tej grafiki, przy czym każda grafiki musi być wpisana w oddzielnym wierszu.&lt;/span&gt; Można również edytować daną listę – usuwając lub przemieszczając grafiki lub zmieniając ich opisy.

Kliknięcie przycisku &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; powoduje wyjście z edytora galerii i zostaną pokazane wprowadzane zmiany tak jak są one widoczne dla czytelników.

Należy pamiętać, że wyjście z okna edycji galerii nie opublikuje zmian. Tak jak w przypadku innych zmian dokonanych za pomocą edytora wizualnego, trzeba opublikować całą stronę, aby zmiany zostały zachowane.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Edycja szablonów ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The powerful MediaWiki template system lets you insert dynamic content, text from other pages, and much more. For a detailed explanation and examples, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Templates help page]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the VisualEditor you can search for a relevant template, add an invocation or [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusion]] on the page you’re editing and, if needed, add custom content using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameters]].
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Wstaw nowy szablon ===
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Aby dodać nowy szablon na stronie, należy umieścić kursor w miejscu, w którym chcesz go wstawić. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then open the {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} menu and select &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, type two curly brackets {{((}} to open the same dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Można także edytować szablony, które znajdują się już na stronie. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you select the template you want to edit, it turns blue, and a box appears displaying &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then select the &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; link  or double click on the template itself to open the template.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Niektóre szablony są niewidoczne dla czytelników. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;W edytorze wizualnym takim ukrytym szablonom towarzyszy ikona puzzla.&lt;/span&gt; Obok tej ikony zostanie wyświetlona nazwa szablonu i obydwa te elementy będą wyszarzone.
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Parametry szablonu ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You’ll see this dialog box when you’re adding a new template or editing one already in place.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What you see in the box depends on whether the template in question contains {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, helpful metadata added by other editors to make it easier to edit templates in the Visual Editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When a template contains TemplateData, the VisualEditor can use it to present annotated fields for you to fill in.
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For templates that have some community-provided TemplateData, the VisualEditor displays a list of the named parameters and, often, descriptions and instructions explaining the meaning and required format for each parameter’s values.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Adding undocumented parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter: “1”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter’s value: “en_US”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter: “2”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter’s value: “yes”&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Autogenerated parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completing your edit ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Po zakończeniu należy kliknąć „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}” by zamknąć okno i wrócić do edycji strony.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Usuwanie szablonu ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing on mobile ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Wklejanie szablonów ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Edytowanie list ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| W edytorze wizualnym można tworzyć listy lub zmieniać format istniejących list. Są dwa typy list: nienumerowana (wypunktowana) i uporządkowana (numerowana).

Aby dodać nową listę, kliknij na jedną z dwóch pozycji z menu pokazanego obok. Jeżeli już masz wpisany tekst listy, zaznacz go i kliknij jeden z wspomnianych wcześniej przycisków, aby sformatować wiersze jako listę.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Oto przykłady dwóch typów list: nienumerowana (wypunktowana) i uporządkowana (numerowana).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Jeżeli chcesz zmienić poziom wcięcia części istniejącej listy, zaznacz ją.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Następnie skorzystaj z odpowiedniej opcji w menu lub wciśnij przycisk Tab. Przycisk Tab zwiększa wcięcie, a kombinacja Shift+Tab zmniejsza je.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Oto przykład dodania wcięcia w liście.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Jest możliwość mieszania rodzajów list jeżeli są one na innych poziomach wcięć.
|}

== Edycja tabel ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Edytor wizualny może być używany do wstawiania i edytowania tabel.

Można również używać go do stosowania metody przeciągnij i upuść wartości w formacie .csv z komputera lokalnego.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Po kliknięciu przycisku &quot;Tabela&quot; w menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; edytor wizualny wstawi pustą tabelę 4x4.

Dostępne będzie menu &quot;Tabela&quot;, z którego można dodać tytuł tabeli.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Aby wybrać komórkę, należy ją raz kliknąć.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Aby edytować zawartość komórki (na przykład dodać zawartość lub poprawić błąd), kliknij dwukrotnie tę komórkę. Można też wybrać komórkę i wcisnąć Enter.

Aby zakończyć wprowadzanie zmian do komórki, kliknij w dowolne miejsce poza nią.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| Można dodawać, poruszać lub usuwać kolumny i wiersze.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Komórki można scalić: Wybierz je, a następnie z menu Tabela wybierz &quot;Scal komórki&quot;.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Podczas łączenia komórek zachowywany jest tekst tylko z jednej z nich; tekst z pozostałych łączonych komórek jest usuwany. Jeżeli potrzebujesz zawartości komórek, która zostanie usunięta, Cofnij operację, skopiuj lub przenieś potrzebny tekst, a następnie ponownie dokonaj łączenia komórek.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Można także rozdzielać komórki wcześniej połączone. Cała zawartość takiej komórki znajdzie się w pierwszej z poowstałych w wyniku podziału.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Edycja kategorii ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| Edytowanie kategorii wykonuje się po kliknięciu  pozycji &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; w menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Przycisk &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; otwiera okno, w którym wymienione są dotychczas przypisane kategorie oraz pozwala dodać nowe lub je usuwać.

Istnieje możliwość skonfigurowania [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|klucza sortowania]] używanego do wstawiania danej strony na stronach kategorii.

Na przykład domyślnym kluczem sortowania hasło &quot;Gabriel Narutowicz&quot; jest ono samo i w kategorii &quot;Prezydenci Polski&quot; byłoby wykazane pod literą &quot;G&quot;, a nie &quot;N&quot; (faktycznie ten artykuł ma jawnie ustawiony klucz sortowania &quot;Narutowicz, Gabriel&quot; i jest wykazany pod literą &quot;N&quot;).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Aby dodać nową kategorię, należy wpisać jej nazwę w pole „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}”. Po wpisaniu nazwy kategorii edytor wizualny odszuka możliwe dopasowania istniejących kategorii. Można zarówno wybrać istniejącą kategorię, albo dodać nową. (Dopóki strona kategorii nie zostanie utworzona, nowa kategoria będzie pokazana jako czerwony link po opublikowaniu zmian).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Aby usunąć dołączoną kategorię, należy kliknąć  na nią, a następnie na ikonę  „{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}” (obrazek kosza) w oknie, które się pojawi.

Można także określić klucz sortowania dla poszczególnych kategorii. Zastępuje on w danym przypadku ogólny klucz sortowania.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Po zakończeniu nalezy klikniąć ''{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}'' by zamknąć okno i wrócić do edycji strony.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Edycja ustawień strony ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| Aby wejść do edycji ustawień strony, należy kliknąć przycisk &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; na belce narzędziowej i wybrać pozycję &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Kliknięcie przycisku &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; otwiera okno dialogowe pokazujące kilka opcji.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Można zdefiniować przekierowanie do innej strony za pomocą zaznaczenia pola wyboru &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot;, a następnie wpisania nazwy strony do której ma być przeniesiony czytelnik, który wejdzie na stronę która jest edytowana.

Na dole jest opcja chroniąca przed aktualizacją danego przekierowania w przypadku przeniesienia strony będącej aktualnie celem przekierowania (standardowo takie przeniesienie powoduje powstanie na tej stronie kolejnego przekierowania). Używane jest bardzo rzadko.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Poprzez kliknięcie jednego z tych trzech przycisków można wskazać czy na stronie jest wstawiany spis treści. Domyślnym wyborem jest &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot;, czyli wstawianie spisu treści w przypadku gdy hasło ma trzy sekcje lub więcej.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Zaznaczenie tego pola wyboru powoduje, że obok tytułu sekcji nie będzie pokazywany przycisk  &quot;Edytuj&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Po zakończeniu edytowania menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; należy kliknąć przycisk &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; aby powrócić do edycji strony..
|}

== Edytowanie map ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Możesz dodawać i zmieniać mapy. Zobacz {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Edycja wzorów matematycznych ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Aby dodać nowy wzór matematyczny należy ustawić wskaźnik kursora w miejscu zamierzonego wstawienia i kliknąć ikonę „{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}” („Σ”) w przycisk „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}” paska narzędziowego.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Zostanie otwarte okno do wpisania wzoru z użyciem składni LaTeX-u. Edytor wizualny uaktualni wzór i pokaże wygląd wzoru po zakończeniu zmian. Gdy jesteśmy uszczęśliwieni zmianami, to należy je zatwierdzić klikając przycisk „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}”.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Aby edytować wzory matematyczne na stronie należy kliknąć występującą tu ikonę „Σ”. Spowoduje to otwarcie okna wzorów, w którym można wprowadzić zmiany.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Wzory matematyczne można umieszczać w linii lub wyśrodkowane blokowo.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Edytowanie zapisu nut ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Aby wstawić notację muzyczną na stronie, umieść kursor, gdzie ma się pojawić. Następnie z menu &quot;Wstaw&quot; wybierz &quot;Notacja muzyczna&quot;.

Aby edytować wcześniej wstawiony na stronie zapis nut, kliknij w niego dwukrotnie.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Zostanie otwarte okno dialogowe &quot;Notacja muzyczna&quot;. Tutaj notacja może być edytowana według skali, w formacie ABC lub w LilyPond. Można również powiązać notację z plikiem audio lub MIDI. Kiedy skończysz, kliknij przycisk &quot;Gotowe&quot;, aby zamknąć okienko i opublikować zmiany.
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Edycja fragmentów liryki i innych specjalnych elementów ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Niektóre elementy, jak np. listy powiązań i poematy nie są jeszcze w pełni obsługiwane przez edytor wizualny. Aby je dodać lub edytować, należy edytować kod źródłowy.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| W większości przypadków istniejące elementy mogą być wstawiane, ale wstawienie niektórych nowych  elementów może nie być obsługiwane przez edytor wizualny.

Dopóki nie będzie to w pełni obsługiwane, można to skopiować z innej strony albo przejść do edycji kodu źródłowego.

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== Przełączanie między edytorem wizualnym i wikitekstu ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
Aby przełączyć się z edytora wizualnego na edytor wikitekstu, kliknij przycisk &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; znajdujący na pasku narzędzi po prawej stronie.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on &quot;Discard changes&quot;, you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)&lt;/span&gt;

Przewiń w dół, aby zobaczyć pole edycji wikitekstu. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
Możesz także przełączyć się z edytora kodu źródłowego do edytora wizualnego. Aby to zrobić, należy kliknąć ikonę ołówka po prawej stronie paska narzędziowego.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Skróty klawiszowe ==

Wielu użytkowników jest przyzwyczajonych do wpisywania wikikodu wprost, w szczególności wytłuszczenia, pochylenia i linków. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Skróty klawiszowe]] pozwalają szybko zastosować podobne formatowanie bez konieczności klikania w pasek narzędzi. VisualEditor zna popularne ogólne skróty oraz skróty stosowane przez niektórych użytkowników.

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! Skrót PC
! Akcja
! Skrót Maca
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Pogrubienie
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Kursywa
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Wstaw link
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Wytnij
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Kopiuj
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Wklej
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Cofnij
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>66lrmavnpriwuguasui008dndofzslz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>134846</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402994</id>
      <parentid>2554748</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="363" xml:space="preserve">* '''Help new users''' — If the VisualEditor launch is successful, we will have a lot more new users than we are used to, and even though editing may be easier, working out how to interact with the community will still be hard. Please spend some time [[$1|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]], to help these newcomers become acclimatized to Wikipedia.</text>
      <sha1>dv1xfg9im4o1rilkxmykcfw5ozuffz5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/pl</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>135074</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402424</id>
      <parentid>4983786</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:59:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7431" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Przeczytaj '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Zgłoś problem''' w EdytorzeWizualnym].
|-
| Sprawdź jak wstawiać linki, dodawać i przenosić ilustracje, tworzyć przypisy, wstawiać szablony, edytować tabele. Więcej informacji o edycji.
|Prosimy o dołączenie informacje o swojej '''przeglądarce, systemie operacyjnym, oraz używanej skórce Wikipedii''' (zazwyczaj jest to skórka Vector, czasami Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== O VisualEditorze ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor to &quot;wizualny&quot; sposób edytowania Wikipedii. Poprzednio edytowanie Wikipedii wymagało od użytkowników nauki znaczników wiki, dość skomplikowanego języka znaczników, nawet do wprowadzania drobnych zmian na stronie. W 2001 r. Było to do zaakceptowania w 2015r. jest  [[$ve-why| driving contributors away]]. Mamy nadzieję, że VisualEditor przyda się obecnym współpracownikom i będzie bardziej przyjazny dla nowych użytkowników..
&lt;/div&gt; 

VisualEditor był dostępny jako opcja do włączenia, w wersji &quot;alpha&quot; na MediaWiki.org od połowy 2012 roku i na angielskiej Wikipedii od grudnia 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ w 14 kolejnych wersjach językowych od kwietnia 2013], oraz [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ prawie wszystkich innych językach] od początku czerwca 2013. Od czerwca 2015, jest dostępny jako domyślny dla zalogowanych i niezalogowanych edytujących na więcej niż 75% Wikipedii.
Spodziewamy się, że udostępnimy go dla większości [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|pozostałych języków]] pod koniec 2015 roku.
Od końca listopada 2014 jest także dostępny jako dostępna dla chętnych jako [[Beta Features|funkcja eksperymentalna]] na wszystkich wiki WMF, z wyjątkiem Wikisłownika i Wkiźródeł.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wydajemy [[VisualEditor/changelog|regularne aktualizacje statusu]] na Mediawiki.org oraz [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|wielojęzyczny newsletter]], skupiający się na wiki WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Używanie VisualEditora ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Obecnie VisualEditor ma liczne bugi, jest to nieuniknione. Jeżeli napotkasz problem, nie wahaj się [[VisualEditor/Feedback|zostawić komentarza]]. Jest też sporo obszarów, w których musimy zaplanować zupełnie nowe funkcje. Obecnie ograniczeniami są:

* '''Powolne ładowanie''' – ładowanie długich, skomplikowanych stron do VisualEditora zajmuje trochę czasu. W przyszłości oprogramowanie będzie szybsze i umożliwi ładowanie dłuższych stron.
* '''Niedokładne edytowanie''' – niektóre elementy skomplikowanego formatowania wyświetlają się i można edytować ich zawartość, ale nie da się edytować ich struktury ani dodawać nowych elementów – np. tabel czy list wypunktowanych (numerowanych). Dodanie nowych funkcji w tym obszarze jest jednym z naszych priorytetów.
* '''Większość stron treści, bez stron dyskusji''' — Edytor wizualny jest włączony tylko dla niektórych przestrzeni nazw.  Na większości Wikipedii, edytor wizualny można używać w artykułach, na stronach użytkowników, opisu plików, pomocy i opisu kategorii. Edytor wizualny nie zawsze jest dostępny na stronach w przestrzeni nazw Wikipedia:, nie jest też dostępny na stronach dyskusji.

Z powodu tych ograniczeń i nieuniknionych bugów zalecamy, aby użytkownicy klikali na ''{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}'' przed zapisaniem zmian i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|zgłaszali wszelkie problemy, jakie spotkają]].

== Jak pomóc ==

Skoro VisualEditor nie jest tak dobry, jak mógłby być, jest wiele rzeczy, w których można pomóc. Oczywiście jednym dużym obszarem jest korzystanie z oprogramowania, znajdywanie bugów i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|zgłaszanie ich]], ale jest też wiele innych spraw, np.:

* '''Aktualizowanie stron pomocy''' – wszystkie projekty mają strony pomocy ułatwiające edytowanie nowym użytkownikom. Niestety opisują one edytowanie za pomocą zmieniania wikikodu i w miarę rozwoju VisualEditora, zrzuty ekranów oraz samouczki staną się nieaktualne. Byłoby bardzo dobrze, gdyby użytkownicy [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|zaktualizowali strony pomocy]] do wersji opartych na [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|naszej instrukcji edytowania VisualEditorem]].
* '''Dodawanie TemplateData do szablonów''' – VisualEditor zawiera wygodny edytor szablonów, opisany szerzej w [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|instrukcji]]. Jak zobaczysz używając go w Wikipedii, niektóre szablony mają nazwane parametry i dokładne opisy, które ułatwiają ich użycie. Inne tego nie mają. To dlatego, że szablony wymagają ''TemplateData'' do działania edytora szablonów. Jeżeli chcesz dodawać ''TemplateData'', mamy do tego [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|poradnik]] i [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|listę najważniejszych szablonów]] wymagających dopracowania.
* '''Pomóż swojej społeczności''' — Zobacz [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|listę sposobów na pomaganie społeczności]] w optymalizacji doświadczenia podczas edycji za pomocą edytora wizualnego.
* '''Pomoc nowym użytkownikom''' – jeżeli uruchomienie VisualEditora przebiegnie pomyślnie, będziemy mieli dużo więcej nowych użytkowników, niż dotychczas. Nawet, jeśli edytowanie będzie łatwiejsze, nauka współpracy ze społecznością nadal będzie trudna. Prosimy, spędźcie trochę czasu [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|tam, gdzie nowicjusze przychodzą z prośbami o pomoc]], by pomóc im zaaklimatyzować się w Wikipedii.

== Zobacz też ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - Jako jeden z Wikimedians, uzyskaj i oferuj pomoc do Edytora Wizualnego lub pracy z nim.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - Poradnik dla społeczności nowych w użytkowaniu Edytora Wizualnego.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>hio99frvh43aj1zrk3c4ehmbourgbsl</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403020</id>
      <parentid>5402424</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7471" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Przeczytaj '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Zgłoś problem''' w EdytorzeWizualnym].
|-
| Sprawdź jak wstawiać linki, dodawać i przenosić ilustracje, tworzyć przypisy, wstawiać szablony, edytować tabele. Więcej informacji o edycji.
|Prosimy o dołączenie informacje o swojej '''przeglądarce, systemie operacyjnym, oraz używanej skórce Wikipedii''' (zazwyczaj jest to skórka Vector, czasami Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== O VisualEditorze ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor to &quot;wizualny&quot; sposób edytowania Wikipedii. Poprzednio edytowanie Wikipedii wymagało od użytkowników nauki znaczników wiki, dość skomplikowanego języka znaczników, nawet do wprowadzania drobnych zmian na stronie. W 2001 r. Było to do zaakceptowania w 2015r. jest  [[$ve-why| driving contributors away]]. Mamy nadzieję, że VisualEditor przyda się obecnym współpracownikom i będzie bardziej przyjazny dla nowych użytkowników..
&lt;/div&gt; 

VisualEditor był dostępny jako opcja do włączenia, w wersji &quot;alpha&quot; na MediaWiki.org od połowy 2012 roku i na angielskiej Wikipedii od grudnia 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ w 14 kolejnych wersjach językowych od kwietnia 2013], oraz [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ prawie wszystkich innych językach] od początku czerwca 2013. Od czerwca 2015, jest dostępny jako domyślny dla zalogowanych i niezalogowanych edytujących na więcej niż 75% Wikipedii.
Spodziewamy się, że udostępnimy go dla większości [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|pozostałych języków]] pod koniec 2015 roku.
Od końca listopada 2014 jest także dostępny jako dostępna dla chętnych jako [[Beta Features|funkcja eksperymentalna]] na wszystkich wiki WMF, z wyjątkiem Wikisłownika i Wkiźródeł.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wydajemy [[VisualEditor/changelog|regularne aktualizacje statusu]] na Mediawiki.org oraz [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|wielojęzyczny newsletter]], skupiający się na wiki WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Używanie VisualEditora ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Obecnie VisualEditor ma liczne bugi, jest to nieuniknione. Jeżeli napotkasz problem, nie wahaj się [[VisualEditor/Feedback|zostawić komentarza]]. Jest też sporo obszarów, w których musimy zaplanować zupełnie nowe funkcje. Obecnie ograniczeniami są:

* '''Powolne ładowanie''' – ładowanie długich, skomplikowanych stron do VisualEditora zajmuje trochę czasu. W przyszłości oprogramowanie będzie szybsze i umożliwi ładowanie dłuższych stron.
* '''Niedokładne edytowanie''' – niektóre elementy skomplikowanego formatowania wyświetlają się i można edytować ich zawartość, ale nie da się edytować ich struktury ani dodawać nowych elementów – np. tabel czy list wypunktowanych (numerowanych). Dodanie nowych funkcji w tym obszarze jest jednym z naszych priorytetów.
* '''Większość stron treści, bez stron dyskusji''' — Edytor wizualny jest włączony tylko dla niektórych przestrzeni nazw.  Na większości Wikipedii, edytor wizualny można używać w artykułach, na stronach użytkowników, opisu plików, pomocy i opisu kategorii. Edytor wizualny nie zawsze jest dostępny na stronach w przestrzeni nazw Wikipedia:, nie jest też dostępny na stronach dyskusji.

Z powodu tych ograniczeń i nieuniknionych bugów zalecamy, aby użytkownicy klikali na ''{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}'' przed zapisaniem zmian i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|zgłaszali wszelkie problemy, jakie spotkają]].

== Jak pomóc ==

Skoro VisualEditor nie jest tak dobry, jak mógłby być, jest wiele rzeczy, w których można pomóc. Oczywiście jednym dużym obszarem jest korzystanie z oprogramowania, znajdywanie bugów i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|zgłaszanie ich]], ale jest też wiele innych spraw, np.:

* '''Aktualizowanie stron pomocy''' – wszystkie projekty mają strony pomocy ułatwiające edytowanie nowym użytkownikom. Niestety opisują one edytowanie za pomocą zmieniania wikikodu i w miarę rozwoju VisualEditora, zrzuty ekranów oraz samouczki staną się nieaktualne. Byłoby bardzo dobrze, gdyby użytkownicy [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|zaktualizowali strony pomocy]] do wersji opartych na [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|naszej instrukcji edytowania VisualEditorem]].
* '''Dodawanie TemplateData do szablonów''' – VisualEditor zawiera wygodny edytor szablonów, opisany szerzej w [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|instrukcji]]. Jak zobaczysz używając go w Wikipedii, niektóre szablony mają nazwane parametry i dokładne opisy, które ułatwiają ich użycie. Inne tego nie mają. To dlatego, że szablony wymagają ''TemplateData'' do działania edytora szablonów. Jeżeli chcesz dodawać ''TemplateData'', mamy do tego [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|poradnik]] i [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|listę najważniejszych szablonów]] wymagających dopracowania.
* '''Pomóż swojej społeczności''' — Zobacz [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|listę sposobów na pomaganie społeczności]] w optymalizacji doświadczenia podczas edycji za pomocą edytora wizualnego.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Pomoc nowym użytkownikom''' – jeżeli uruchomienie VisualEditora przebiegnie pomyślnie, będziemy mieli dużo więcej nowych użytkowników, niż dotychczas. Nawet, jeśli edytowanie będzie łatwiejsze, nauka współpracy ze społecznością nadal będzie trudna. Prosimy, spędźcie trochę czasu [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|tam, gdzie nowicjusze przychodzą z prośbami o pomoc]], by pomóc im zaaklimatyzować się w Wikipedii.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Zobacz też ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - Jako jeden z Wikimedians, uzyskaj i oferuj pomoc do Edytora Wizualnego lub pracy z nim.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - Poradnik dla społeczności nowych w użytkowaniu Edytora Wizualnego.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>5ewpc0tbkj82czcidqnoj53fhmo3f5h</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403176</id>
      <parentid>5403020</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:41:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7431" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Przeczytaj '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Zgłoś problem''' w EdytorzeWizualnym].
|-
| Sprawdź jak wstawiać linki, dodawać i przenosić ilustracje, tworzyć przypisy, wstawiać szablony, edytować tabele. Więcej informacji o edycji.
|Prosimy o dołączenie informacje o swojej '''przeglądarce, systemie operacyjnym, oraz używanej skórce Wikipedii''' (zazwyczaj jest to skórka Vector, czasami Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== O VisualEditorze ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor to &quot;wizualny&quot; sposób edytowania Wikipedii. Poprzednio edytowanie Wikipedii wymagało od użytkowników nauki znaczników wiki, dość skomplikowanego języka znaczników, nawet do wprowadzania drobnych zmian na stronie. W 2001 r. Było to do zaakceptowania w 2015r. jest  [[$ve-why| driving contributors away]]. Mamy nadzieję, że VisualEditor przyda się obecnym współpracownikom i będzie bardziej przyjazny dla nowych użytkowników..
&lt;/div&gt; 

VisualEditor był dostępny jako opcja do włączenia, w wersji &quot;alpha&quot; na MediaWiki.org od połowy 2012 roku i na angielskiej Wikipedii od grudnia 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ w 14 kolejnych wersjach językowych od kwietnia 2013], oraz [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ prawie wszystkich innych językach] od początku czerwca 2013. Od czerwca 2015, jest dostępny jako domyślny dla zalogowanych i niezalogowanych edytujących na więcej niż 75% Wikipedii.
Spodziewamy się, że udostępnimy go dla większości [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|pozostałych języków]] pod koniec 2015 roku.
Od końca listopada 2014 jest także dostępny jako dostępna dla chętnych jako [[Beta Features|funkcja eksperymentalna]] na wszystkich wiki WMF, z wyjątkiem Wikisłownika i Wkiźródeł.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wydajemy [[VisualEditor/changelog|regularne aktualizacje statusu]] na Mediawiki.org oraz [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|wielojęzyczny newsletter]], skupiający się na wiki WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Używanie VisualEditora ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Obecnie VisualEditor ma liczne bugi, jest to nieuniknione. Jeżeli napotkasz problem, nie wahaj się [[VisualEditor/Feedback|zostawić komentarza]]. Jest też sporo obszarów, w których musimy zaplanować zupełnie nowe funkcje. Obecnie ograniczeniami są:

* '''Powolne ładowanie''' – ładowanie długich, skomplikowanych stron do VisualEditora zajmuje trochę czasu. W przyszłości oprogramowanie będzie szybsze i umożliwi ładowanie dłuższych stron.
* '''Niedokładne edytowanie''' – niektóre elementy skomplikowanego formatowania wyświetlają się i można edytować ich zawartość, ale nie da się edytować ich struktury ani dodawać nowych elementów – np. tabel czy list wypunktowanych (numerowanych). Dodanie nowych funkcji w tym obszarze jest jednym z naszych priorytetów.
* '''Większość stron treści, bez stron dyskusji''' — Edytor wizualny jest włączony tylko dla niektórych przestrzeni nazw.  Na większości Wikipedii, edytor wizualny można używać w artykułach, na stronach użytkowników, opisu plików, pomocy i opisu kategorii. Edytor wizualny nie zawsze jest dostępny na stronach w przestrzeni nazw Wikipedia:, nie jest też dostępny na stronach dyskusji.

Z powodu tych ograniczeń i nieuniknionych bugów zalecamy, aby użytkownicy klikali na ''{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}'' przed zapisaniem zmian i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|zgłaszali wszelkie problemy, jakie spotkają]].

== Jak pomóc ==

Skoro VisualEditor nie jest tak dobry, jak mógłby być, jest wiele rzeczy, w których można pomóc. Oczywiście jednym dużym obszarem jest korzystanie z oprogramowania, znajdywanie bugów i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|zgłaszanie ich]], ale jest też wiele innych spraw, np.:

* '''Aktualizowanie stron pomocy''' – wszystkie projekty mają strony pomocy ułatwiające edytowanie nowym użytkownikom. Niestety opisują one edytowanie za pomocą zmieniania wikikodu i w miarę rozwoju VisualEditora, zrzuty ekranów oraz samouczki staną się nieaktualne. Byłoby bardzo dobrze, gdyby użytkownicy [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|zaktualizowali strony pomocy]] do wersji opartych na [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|naszej instrukcji edytowania VisualEditorem]].
* '''Dodawanie TemplateData do szablonów''' – VisualEditor zawiera wygodny edytor szablonów, opisany szerzej w [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|instrukcji]]. Jak zobaczysz używając go w Wikipedii, niektóre szablony mają nazwane parametry i dokładne opisy, które ułatwiają ich użycie. Inne tego nie mają. To dlatego, że szablony wymagają ''TemplateData'' do działania edytora szablonów. Jeżeli chcesz dodawać ''TemplateData'', mamy do tego [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|poradnik]] i [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|listę najważniejszych szablonów]] wymagających dopracowania.
* '''Pomóż swojej społeczności''' — Zobacz [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|listę sposobów na pomaganie społeczności]] w optymalizacji doświadczenia podczas edycji za pomocą edytora wizualnego.
* '''Pomoc nowym użytkownikom''' – jeżeli uruchomienie VisualEditora przebiegnie pomyślnie, będziemy mieli dużo więcej nowych użytkowników, niż dotychczas. Nawet, jeśli edytowanie będzie łatwiejsze, nauka współpracy ze społecznością nadal będzie trudna. Prosimy, spędźcie trochę czasu [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|tam, gdzie nowicjusze przychodzą z prośbami o pomoc]], by pomóc im zaaklimatyzować się w Wikipedii.

== Zobacz też ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - Jako jeden z Wikimedians, uzyskaj i oferuj pomoc do Edytora Wizualnego lub pracy z nim.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - Poradnik dla społeczności nowych w użytkowaniu Edytora Wizualnego.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>hio99frvh43aj1zrk3c4ehmbourgbsl</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/nb</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>135211</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402782</id>
      <parentid>5347016</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:50:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="61242" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Hvis du ønsker å prøve visuell redigering uten å redigere en ordentlig artikkel finnes det [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} en egen testside] du kan bruke.&lt;/span&gt; Du trenger ikke opprette brukerkonto for å bruke visuell redigering der.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Åpne visuell redigering ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| For å redigere en side med visuell redigering, trykk på «{{int|vector-view-edit}}»-fanen øverst på siden.

Det kan ta noen sekunder å åpne siden for redigering, og enda lenger hvis siden er veldig stor.

Trykker du på «{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}»-fanen vil du i stedet åpne den klassiske wikitekst-editoren.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Du også starte visuell redigering ved å trykke på «{{int|editsection}}»-lenken ved hvert avsnitt.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Kom i gang: verktøylinja for visuell redigering ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Skjermbilde av verktøylinja for visuell redigering]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | Når du begynner å redigere vil du se verkøylinja for visuell redigering øverst på skjermen. Der finner du noen velkjente ikoner:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' og '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' endringene du har gjort.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Nedtrekksmenyen '''Avsnitt''': brukes for å endre hvordan avsnittet formateres. For å endre stil, sett innsettingspunktet i avsnittet og velg et element fra menyen (du trenger ikke markere teksten). Overskrifter skal formateres med «{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}» og underoverskrifter med «{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}», «{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}», osv. Det vanlige tekstformatet er «{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}».
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Formatering:''' Ved å trykke på «&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;» åpnes en meny. 
* «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}» ('''B''') gjør den valgte teksten halvfet.
* «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}» (''I'') gjør den valgte teksten kursiv.
* «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}» (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) hever den valgte teksten i forhold til den omkringliggende teksten og gjør den litt mindre.
* «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}» (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) senker den valgte teksten i forhold til den omkringliggende teksten og gjør den litt mindre.
* «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}» (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) legger til en heltrukket strek gjennom den valgte teksten.
* «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}» (to krøllparenteser: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) endrer skrifttypen på den valgte teksten til en skrifttype med fast bredde, som skiller den fra den omkringliggende teksten i proporsjonal skrifttype.
* «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}» (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) legger til en heltrukken linje under den valgte teksten.
* «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}» (文A) lar deg markere språk (for eksempel japansk) og skriveretning (for eksempel høyre-til-venstre) for tekstutvalget.
* Det siste menyvalget ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), kalt «{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}», fjerner all formattering fra den valgte teksten, inkludert lenker

Om du ikke har valgt noe tekst før du trykker på «&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;» og velger en stil, vil denne formateringen gjelde for teksten du begynner å skrive fra der markøren er plassert.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Lenkeverktøy:''' Kjettingen er [[#Editing links|lenkevertøyet]]. Trykk på det (vanligvis etter å ha valgt noe tekst) for å åpne [[#Editing links|lenkedialogen]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}-menyen:''' brukes for å legge til kildehenvisninger i teksten (også kalt «referanser» eller «fotnoter»). Alle prosjekter har støtte for grunnleggende referanseformatering og for gjenbruk av referanser ved bruk av denne menyen. I tillegg vises lokale referansemaler som er aktivert på din wiki.

(Instruksjoner for å legge lokale referansemaler til {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}-menyen på en spesifikk wiki er tilgjengelig på {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}-knapp:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Hvis referansetjenesten er skrudd på for din wiki så vil du se en {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} knapp istedenfor en {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}-meny.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

Referansetjenesten forsøker å fylle ut referansemalene automatisk.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Lister og innrykk:''' De første to valgene lar deg formatere tekst enten som en «{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}» eller som et «{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}». De to siste valgene lar deg henholdsvis øke og redusere innrykksnivået til punktene i lista.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' Denne menyen kan se litt forskjellig ut fra prosjekt til prosjekt. Her vises en liste over '''alle''' mulige valg den kan inneholde.
* «{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}»-ikonet (et bilde av fjell) åpner [[#Editing images and other media files|mediedialogboksen]].
* «{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}» (en puslespillbit) lar deg [[#Editing templates|redigere maler]].
* «Tabell»-elementet lar deg sette inn en tabell.
* «{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}» (en snakkeboble) lar deg legge inn kommentarer som ikke er synlige for vanlige lesere; disse kommentarene er bare synlige i redigeringsmodus, hvor de vises med et utropstegn. Om man trykker på dette utropstegnet i redigeringsmodus kan man redigere eller slette kommentaren.
* «{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}»-ikonet (et [[:no:ankh|ankh]]-symbol - ☥) lar deg åpne en dialogboks for å sette inn hieroglyfer. (Se under.)
* «Kodeblokk»-elementet lar deg sette inn kode.
* «Musikknotasjon»-elementet lar deg sette inn musikknoter.
* «{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}»-ikonet (en bunke bilder) lar deg sette inn et galleri på siden.
* «{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}»-ikonet (Σ) åpner [[#Editing mathematical formulae|dialogen for å sette inn formler]].
* «Graf»-elementet lar deg sette inn en graf.
* «{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}»-elementet lar deg sette inn signaturen som du bruker på dette prosjektet. Den vil vises som grå om du redigerer en type side (et «navnerom»), slik som artikler, der signaturer ikke skal settes inn.
* «{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}»-ikonet (tre bøker) åpner en dialogboks der du kan angi hvor referanselisten(e) skal vises for leseren. Vanligvis trenger dette bare å gjøres én gang per side.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Spesialtegn:''' Menyvalget «{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}» (Ω) ved siden av «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}»-menyen fører til en dialogboks med mange spesialtegn. Trykk på et bestemt tegn for å sette det inn i teksten. Oversikten inkluderer et utvalg av vanlige symboler, bokstaver med diakritiske tegn og matematiske symboler. (Denne lista kan tilpasses lokalt. Se {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} for veiledning.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| Knappen '''Redigeringsmerknader''' viser eventuelle merknader for siden.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Menyen '''$pagemenu''' finnes til venstre for knappen '''$save''' og menyen ''Bytt editor''. I denne menyen er det en knapp for å åpne en dialogboks '''Alternativer''' med følgende (venstre side) faner:&lt;/span&gt;

* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' lar deg legge til kategorier på denne siden og justere hvordan siden sorteres i kategoriene ved å legge til en sorteringsnøkkel.
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' lar deg gjøre en side til en omdirigering og justere innstillingene for denne omdirigeringen, justere innstillinger som gjelder innholdsfortegnelsen, å slå av redigeringslenker ved siden av hver overskrift, og å definere en side som en pekerside.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Avanserte innstillinger''' lar deg justere innstillinger som gjelder indeksering av siden av søkemotorer, visning av en fane for å legge til en ny seksjon, og hvordan sidetittelen vises.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' viser en liste over sider på andre språk som er knyttet til den gjeldende siden.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Maler brukt''' viser ei liste over lenker til hver av malene som brukes på siden.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Fanene i innstillingsdialogen vises også i $pagemenu-menyen og kan åpnes ved å trykke på den.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;$pagemenu-menyen inneholder også knappen '''Vis som høyre-til-venstre''' og knappen '''Finn og erstatt''', som åpner en dialog der du kan sette inn tegn, begreper eller regulære uttrykk du vil søke etter, og evt. erstatte disse med annen tekst, sammen med flere alternativer.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Knappen '''bytt til kilderedigering''' ligger ved siden av '''$save'''-knappen. Den brukes for å bytte til wikitekst-redigering.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Publisering av endringer ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Trykk på den blå «{{int|publishchanges}}»-knappen når du er ferdig med å redigere. Hvis ingen endringer er gjort vil knappen være grå og ikke mulig å trykke på. For å forkaste alle endringer du har gjort, kan du enten lukke vinduet eller trykke på «{{int|vector-view-view}}»-fana over verktøylinja.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ved å trykke på den blå «{{int|publishchanges-start}}»-knappen åpnes en liten dialogboks. Der kan du skrive et kort sammendrag av hva du har endret, merke endringen som «mindre», og/eller velge om du vil legge siden til din $watchlist. Sammendragsfeltet er det samme som {{int|summary}}-feltet i wikitekst-editoren.&lt;/span&gt;

Du kan også forhåndsvise endringene dine ved å bruke «{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}»-knappen for å være sikker på at resultatet ble som planlagt før du lagrer endringene dine. Dette tilsvarer knappen «{{int|showdiff}}» i kilderedigering.

Knappen «{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}» tar deg tilbake til siden du redigerte. Du kan publisere alle endringene dine senere.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Redigering av lenker ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Lenker kan legges til ved å trykke på «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}»-ikonet i verktøylinja, eller ved å bruke tastatursnarveien {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (eller {{Key press|Command|K}} på Mac).

Dersom du merker (uthever) tekst og trykker «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}»-knappen, vil det bli opprettet en lenke med den valgte teksten. Hvis det bare er ett ord i lenken er det nok at innsettingspunktet befinner seg i det aktuelle ordet.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Uavhengig av om du bruker knappen eller tastatursnarveien vil det åpnes en liten dialogboks der du kan skrive inn lenken (intern eller ekstern). VisualEditor sjekker om det finnes en eksisterende artikkel med tittelen du har skrevet inn, og viser en liste over artikler med titler som minner om det du har skrevet inn.
Lenkeverktøyet vil prøve å hjelpe med '''interne''' lenker ved å søke etter sannsynlige treff.
Når du har skrevet inn eller markert lenken, gjør du ferdig lenkingen ved å trykke {{key press|Enter}} eller ved å klikke på «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}»-knappen. Lenken din vil bli synlig umiddelbart, men som med andre endringer vil den ikke publiseres før du publiserer hele siden.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| For å lenke til en nettside eller et annet nettsted, er prosessen nesten den samme: velg fanen «{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}» og skriv inn en URL i tekstfeltet.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Eksterne lenker uten forklaring ser slik ut: [http://example.com]. Du kan legge til disse ved å plassere markøren vekk fra et ord (f.eks. etter et mellomrom). Åpne lenkeverktøyet ved å trykke på knappen eller ved å bruke tastatursnarveien. Skriv inn URLen i boksen, og trykk på «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}»-knappen for å sette inn lenken.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| For å endre eller fjerne en eksisterende lenke, trykker du på lenken i teksten og deretter på «{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}»-ikonet som dukker opp. Du kan også trykke på det samme ikonet i verktøylinja eller bruke tastatursnarveien {{key press|Ctrl|K}}. Når en lenke er valgt fremstår den med en blå ramme.

I lenkeredigeringsdialogboksen kan du deretter endre hvor lenken peker. Du kan også fjerne lenken helt ved å trykke på «{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}»-knappen øverst til høyre i dialogboksen.
Du kan også åpne lenken i et annet vindu ved å trykke på kopien av lenken i dialogboksen. (Nyttig for eksempel hvis du vil sjekke om en ekstern lenke er gyldig.)

Om du ønsker å gå ut av lenkeetiketten (teksten som vises som lenke) eller fortsette å skrive etter lenken, kan du trykke på {{Key press|→}}:
* Å trykke én gang vil gå ut av lenkeredigeringsdialogen og putte markøren ved slutten av det lenkede lementet (med blå ramme, for å redigere dette elementet)
* Å trykke to ganger vil putte markøren etter det lenkede elementet, så du kan fortsette å skrive etter lenka.

For å redigere lenkeetiketten til en eksisterende lenke, trykk innenfor lenkeetiketten og begynn å skrive den nye lenkeetiketten.
Men om du ønsker å erstatte hele lenkeetiketten, merk deg at:

* Om du har valgt (merket) hele lenkeetiketten vil lenken slettes ved å skrive et hvilket som helst tegn.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;For å beholde lenken direkte kan du trykke på lenkeetiketten, bruke slettetasten og slette teksten uten å slette for mye, så et smalt blått lenkeområde blir værende.&lt;/span&gt; Nå kan du skrive den nye etiketten for å beholde lenken.
* Du kan også [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|lenke til kategorier, filer, med mer]].
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Redigering av referanser ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Hjelp med bruk av referansemaler]] eller [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|hjelp med citoids {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} knapp]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== Fastslå hvilket oppsett som er i bruk ===
|-
| Wikien din kan bruke et av tre ulike oppsett. Det som vises til høyre er det enkleste, der «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}»-menyen ikke inneholder noen referansemaler. Hvis wikien din bruker dette oppsettet finner du alt du trenger å vite om fotnoter på denne siden.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Det andre oppsettet har den samme «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}»-menyen, men menyen inneholder også populære referansemaler for rask tilgang til disse. Hvis wikien din bruker dette oppsettet kan du finne mer informasjon på {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;I det tredje oppsettet starter du igjen ved å trykke på «Angi referanse»-knappen.&lt;/span&gt; En dialogboks blir så åpnet, som inkluderer en automatisk referanseprosess ved bruk av citoid-tjenesten. Om wikien din bruker dette systemet vil du finne flere detaljer på {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Redigering av en eksisterende referanse ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;For å redigere en eksisterende kildehenvisning, trykk på den i teksten (vanligvis vist som et opphevet tall i klammeparenteser). Du vil da se enten et «$ref»-ikon (bokmerke) eller et ikon (med navn) for malen som ble brukt for å opprette referansen. I begge tilfeller kan du trykke på «Rediger»-knappen for å åpne en dialogboks der du kan redigere referansen.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Hvis det er «$ref»-ikonet som vises, vil dialogboksen for å redigere referanser åpnes når du trykker på «Rediger».&lt;/span&gt;

Mange wikier bruker maler for å formatere referanser på bestemte måter. Hvis det er brukt en mal i referansen vil all teksten i malen bli uthevet når du klikker på innholdet.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Hvis det er brukt en mal og du har trykket på referanse-informasjonen, vil $template-symbolet (puslespillbiten) dukke opp. Trykk på «rediger»-knappen for å redigere innholdet i malen.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Hvis det som dukker opp når du trykker på en referanse er et ikon for en av referansemalene (se et eksempel til høyre), kan du trykke på «Rediger» for å komme direkte til dialogboksen for redigering av malen.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;I dialogboksen for redigering av maler kan du legge til eller fjerne forskjellige typer informasjon eller endre nåværende innhold. I utgangspunktet vises bare felter (mal-parametre) som har innhold. For å legge til flere felter, trykk på «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}» i bunnen av dialogboksen.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Trykk på «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}» når du er ferdig. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Gjenbruk av en eksisterende referanse ===
|-
| Hvis siden allerede har en referanse som dekker teksten du ønsker å kildebelegge, kan du gjenbruke den eksisterende referansen fremfor å legge den inn på nytt.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
For å gjenbruke en eksisterende referanse, plasser innsettingspunktet der du ønsker å sette den inn. Velg så «Gjenbruk referanse» fra «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}»-menyen.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(Merk: Hvis wikien din har det tredje oppsettet beskrevet ovenfor vil du se en «Gjenbruk»-fane i en dialog i stedet for et «Gjenbruk»-element i «$cite»-menyen.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| I dialogboksen {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}}, velg referansen du ønsker å gjenbruke. Hvis det er mange referanser kan du bruke søkefeltet («{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}») for å avgrense til referansene som inneholder en bestemt tekst.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Legge til en ny referanse ===
|-
| For å legge til en ny referanse ved hjelp av «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}»-menyen; plasser markøren i teksten der du ønsker å legge den til før du velger den ønskede referansetypen i menyen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Bruke «Enkel» referanse ====
|-
| Her vises hva du ser når du velger det grunnleggende referanseelementet.  I referanse-editoren kan du legge til, redigere og formatere referansen din.

Du kan legge til referansen i en bestemt gruppe om du ønsker, men vanligvis trenger du ikke dette. (Dette valget brukes for å vise grupper av referanser med «{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}»-verktøyet.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Når du befinner deg i referansedialogboksen kan du legge til en referansemal (eller en annen mal) ved å trykke på {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}-symbolet (puslespillbiten) i «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}»-menyen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Deretter søker du opp malen du ønsker å bruke, legger den til og redigerer den slik du gjør med en hvilken som helst annen mal. (Se avsnittet om [[#Editing templates|redigering av maler]] under hvis du trenger mer informasjon.)

Når du er ferdig med å redigere din nye mal, trykker du «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}» for å gå tilbake til dialogboksen for å redigere referanser, og igjen på «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}» for å gå tilbake til siden du holder på å redigere.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Hvis det ikke allerede er en liste med referanser på siden (f.eks. dersom du legger til den første referansen på den aktuelle siden), må du spesifisere hvor listen med referanser, og tilhørende tekst skal vises for leseren.

Sett markøren der du vil ha lista med referanser (vanligvis helt nederst på siden), åpne «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}»-menyen og velg symbolet «{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}» (tre bøker).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Hvis du bruker flere grupper med referanser, noe som er relativt uvanlig, kan du angi hvilken gruppe du vil sette inn i denne dialogboksen. Kun referansene som hører til i gruppen vil da bli satt inn.

Det siste steget i dialogen for referanseliste er å trykke på «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}».
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Bruk av standard referansemaler ====
|-
| Wikien du bruker kan ha lagt til flere referansemaler i «{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}»-menyen. I så fall gir det kjapp tilgang til de vanligste referansemalene. (Veiledning for å legge til flere referansemaler på din lokale wiki er tilgjengelig på {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ved å trykke på f.eks. malsymbolet «Bok» vil du komme til en dialogboks der du kan redigere den aktuelle malen. Felt som må fylles ut er merket med en stjerne. Selv om de mest brukte feltene vises, må ikke alle fylles ut.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;For å legge til flere felter, gå nederst i malverktøyet og trykk på valget «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}».&lt;/span&gt;

Trykk på «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}» når du er ferdig.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Redigere bilder og andre mediafiler ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Redigering av bilder ===
|-
| For å sette inn et bilde (eller en annen mediefil) i en artikkel, trykk på ikonet «{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}» (et bilde av fjell) i «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}»-menyen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ved å trykke på «{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}»-symbolet åpnes en dialogboks som automatisk søker gjennom Wikimedia Commons og din lokale wiki etter mediefiler knyttet til siden du holder på å redigere.

Du kan også se etter andre mediefiler ved å endre teksten i boksens søkefelt.

Trykk på miniatyrbildet for å velge en fil.

Dette setter inn bildet på siden du redigerer.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| En ny dialogboks vil bli åpnet etter at bildet du valgte har blitt satt inn på siden. Denne dialogboksen lar deg legge til og redigere bildeteksten under bildet. Bildeteksten kan inneholde formattering og lenker.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Dialogboksen for media lar deg legge til alternative bildetekster, som kan være til hjelp for brukere som benytter skjermlesere, eller som har slått av bildevisning.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Du kan også gjøre forskjellige innstillinger for bildet i «{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}»-vinduet. Disse inkluderer plassering, type og størrelse på bildet.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Når du er ferdig trykker du «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}» for å lukke dialogboksen og fortsette redigeringen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Du kan legge til eller redigere en bildetekst, eller endre andre innstillinger i et eksisterende bilde ved først å trykke på bildet, og deretter trykke på «{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}»-symbolet som dukker opp under bildet.

Du kan endre størrelsen på et eksisterende bilde ved å trykke på det, og deretter bruke symbolet for å endre størrelse (pilen som peker i to retninger i et av de nedre hjørnene).

Ved å dra og slippe et bilde kan du flytte det høyere opp eller lavere ned på siden.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== Opplasting av bilder ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Du kan laste opp bilder fra en fane i medie-dialogboksen, eller ved å dra og slippe en fil på editoren, eller ved å lime inn et bilde fra utklippstavlen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Trykk på fanen «Last opp» og velg et bilde fra datamaskinen din. Du kan skrive inn filnavnet eller dra et bilde inn i boksen. Hvis du har dratt og sluppet et bilde direkte i editoren, eller limet inn et fra utklippstavlen, vil denne fanen åpnes automatisk.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| For at andre skal kunne finne bildet må du skrive inn en beskrivelse og legge til kategorier.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Bildet vil bli plassert på siden når du er ferdig.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Redigering av bildegallerier ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| For å legge til et nytt galleri, trykker du på «{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}»-symbolet (en bunke bilder) i «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}»-menyen. (Hvis du ikke ser dette symbolet i den menyen, er det fordi din lokale wiki har besluttet å utsette innføringen av denne funksjonen i VisualEditor.) 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Trykk på galleriet for å redigere et eksisterende galleri i VisualEditor. Deretter trykker du på gallerisymbolet (en bunke bilder) nær bunnen av galleriet. Dette åpner galleriredigeringsvinduet med den fullstendige listen over bilder inkludert i galleriet.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Galleriredigeringsvinduet er foreløpig en enkel dialogboks som lar deg redigere eksisterende gallerier ved hjelp av ordinær wikitekst. For å legge til et nytt bilde i et eksisterende galleri, skriv inn filnavnet, etterfulgt av en vertikal strek (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) og bildeteksten for det aktuelle bildet. Du må legge hvert bilde i galleriet på en egen linje.&lt;/span&gt; Du kan også redigere listen for å fjerne eller flytte rundt på bilder eller endre på bildeteksten.

Når du trykker på «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}»-knappen, forlater du redigeringsvinduet. Du vil da se endringene du har gjort, slik de vil vises for leserne.

Husk at endringene dine ikke blir publisert når du går ut av redigeringsvinduet. Som med andre endringer gjort i VisualEditor, må du publisere hele siden for at endringene dine skal bli publisert.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Redigering av maler ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The powerful MediaWiki template system lets you insert dynamic content, text from other pages, and much more. For a detailed explanation and examples, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Templates help page]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the VisualEditor you can search for a relevant template, add an invocation or [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusion]] on the page you’re editing and, if needed, add custom content using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameters]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert new template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;For å legge til en ny mal på en side plasserer du markøren der du vil sette inn malen og velger «$template»-symbolet (puslespillbiten) i «$insert»-menyen.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then open the {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} menu and select &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, type two curly brackets {{((}} to open the same dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Du kan også redigere en mal som allerede finnes på siden. Når du trykker på malen skifter fargen til blå og det dukker opp en boks med et «$template»-symbol (puslespillbit). Trykk på «$edit»-lenken.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you select the template you want to edit, it turns blue, and a box appears displaying &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then select the &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; link  or double click on the template itself to open the template.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Enkelte maler er kun synlige når du leser en side. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;I visuell redigering vises slike skjulte maler som små puslespillbrikker.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Navnet på malen vil vises ved siden av puslebrikkeikonet.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Malparametre ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You’ll see this dialog box when you’re adding a new template or editing one already in place.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What you see in the box depends on whether the template in question contains {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, helpful metadata added by other editors to make it easier to edit templates in the Visual Editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When a template contains TemplateData, the VisualEditor can use it to present annotated fields for you to fill in.
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For templates that have some community-provided TemplateData, the VisualEditor displays a list of the named parameters and, often, descriptions and instructions explaining the meaning and required format for each parameter’s values.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Adding undocumented parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter: “1”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter’s value: “en_US”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter: “2”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter’s value: “yes”&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Autogenerated parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completing your edit ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Når du er ferdig med å redigere en mal trykker du på «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}» for å lukke dialogboksen og komme tilbake til hovedbildet for redigering.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing on mobile ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Substituere maler ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Redigering av lister ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Du kan bruke VisualEditor til å opprette lister, eller endre formatet til en eksisterende liste. Det er to typer lister: uordnede lister (punktlister) og ordnede lister (nummererte lister).

For å starte ei ny liste, trykk på et av de to menyelementene som vises her. Eller, om du allerede har skrevet lista (med linjeskift mellom hvert element), velg (merk) lista du har skrevet, og trykk på et av menyelementene.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Her vises eksempler på de to listetypene: uordnet liste (punktliste) og ordnet liste (nummerert liste).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Om du ønsker å endre innrykksnivået i deler av en eksisterende liste, merk den delen av lista du ønsker å forandre.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Bruk så menyen, eller trykk på tabulatortasten. (Tabulatortasten øker innrykket; trykk på den mens du holder Shift inne for å minske innrykket.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Her er resultatet av økt innrykk.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Du kan også blande ordnede (nummererte) og uordnede lister (punktlister), om listeelementene har forskjellig innrykksnivå.
|}

== Redigering av tabeller ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Visuell redigering lar deg sette inn og endre tabeller.

Du kan til og med importere en tabell ved å dra en kommaseparert fil (.csv) fra maskinen din inn i redigeringsvinduet.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Når du trykker på «Tabell» i «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}»-menyen settes det inn en tom fire-ganger-fire-tabell.

Nå er «Tabell»-menyen tilgjengelig. Fra den menyen kan du legge til en tittel på toppen av tabellen.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| For å velge ei celle, trykk på den én gang.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| For å redigere innholdet i cellen (for eksempel for å legge til innhold eller rette en skrivefeil), dobbeltrykk i cellen. Du kan også velge cellen og så trykke Enter.

For å avslutte redigeringen av en celle, trykk et sted utenfor den.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| Du kan legge til, flytte eller fjerne en kolonne eller en rad.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Du kan slå sammen celler: Velg dem og gå til tabellmenyen og trykk «Slå sammen celler».
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Om du slår sammen celler vil kun teksten i én celle beholdes; teksten i alle andre celler vil bli slettet når du slår dem sammen. Om du angrer på at du slettet teksten i en celle, trykk på angreknappen, flytt eller kopier teksten du ønsker å beholde, og slå sammen cellene på nytt.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Du kan også splitte celler som tidligere har blitt slått sammen. Alt innholdet som var i den sammenslåtte cellen vil bli beholdt i den første av de nye splittede cellene. Du kan så klippe ut og lime inn teksten til andre celler om det er ønskelig.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Redigering av kategorier ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| For å redigere kategorier velger du «{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}» i «{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}»-menyen.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Menyvalget «{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}» åpner en dialogboks hvor eksisterende kategorier listes opp, og der du kan legge til og slette kategorier.

Du har også mulighet til å sette eller endre standard [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorteringsnøkkel]] som brukes for å bestemme hvor siden vises når den listes opp sammen med andre sider i samme kategori.

Eksempelvis er standardsorteringsnøkkelen for artikkelen «George Washington» «Washington, George», noe som gjør at artikkelen i kategorien &quot;USAs presidenter&quot; listes opp under bokstaven «W», ikke under «G».
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| For å legge til en kategori for en side, skriver du navnet på kategorien i feltet «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}». Mens du skriver vil det komme forslag til eksisterende kategorier. Du kan enten velge en eksisterende kategori, eller du kan legge til en kategori som ikke har sin egen kategoriside enda. (Inntil den kategorisiden er opprettet, vil din nye kategori vises som en rød lenke etter at du har publisert endringene dine.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| For å fjerne en eksisterende kategori trykker du på den og trykker så på «{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}»-symbolet (papirkurv) i dialogen som åpnes.

Når du trykker på en kategori får du også muliget til å endre sorteringsnøkkelen for den spesifikke kategorien. En slik sorteringsnøkkel overstyrer standard sorteringsnøkkel.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Trykk «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}» når du er ferdig med å redigere kategorier for å gå tilbake til sideredigeringsvinduet.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Redigere sideinnstillinger ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| For å redigere innstillingene for en side trykker du på «{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}» til høyre i verktøylinja og velger «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}».
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Valget «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}» åpner en dialogboks som viser forskjellige valg.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| For å la siden omdirigere til en annen side, huk av i avkrysningsboksen «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}» og skriv inn tittelen på siden du vil sende leseren til når han/hun prøver å gå til siden du nå redigerer.

Nederst kan du velge at denne omdirigeringen ikke oppdateres når siden den peker til flyttes. Dette valget brukes svært sjelden.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Du kan bestemme om det skal være en innholdsfortegnelse på siden ved å velge en av disse tre knappene. Standardvalget er «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}», som viser innholdsfortegnelse dersom det er tre eller flere overskrifter.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Du kan velge at det ikke skal være redigeringslenker ved siden av hver overskrift ved å krysse av i denne boksen.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Trykk på «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}» når du er ferdig med å redigere {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} for å gå tilbake til sideredigeringsvinduet.
|}

== Redigering av kart ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Du kan legge til og endre kart. Se {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Redigering av matematiske formler ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| For å legge til en matematisk formel på siden plasserer du markøren der du vil sette den inn, og trykker på «{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}»-symbolet (Σ) i «{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}»-menyen i verktøylinja.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Et vindu vil bli åpnet der du kan skrive inn formelen med LaTeX-syntaks. Resultatet vil bli forhåndsvist mens du skriver. Når du er fornøyd trykker du på «{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}»-knappen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| For å redigere en eksisterende matematisk formel på en side trykker du på den og trykker deretter på Σ-symbolet som dukker opp. Dette vil åpne formelvinduet hvor du kan gjøre endringer.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Matematiske formler kan plasseres med teksten eller sentrert som en blokk.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Redigering av noter ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| For å legge til musikknoter på en side, plasser markøren der du ønsker å sette inn notene. Fra «Sett inn»-menyen i verktøylinjen trykker du så på valget «Musikknotasjon».

For å redigere eksisterende musikknotasjon på siden, dobbelttrykk på den.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Dette vil åpne dialogboksen for «Musikknotasjon». Her kan notasjonen redigeres etter skala, enten i ABC- eller Lilypond-format. Du kan også lenke notasjonen til en lyd- eller MIDI-fil. Når du er ferdig, trykk på «Ferdig»-knappen for å lukke dialogen og publisere endringene dine.
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Redigering av dikt og andre spesialtekster ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Noen elementer, som assosiasjonslister og dikt, er ikke fullstendig støttet av den visuelle editoren enda.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| I de fleste tilfeller kan eksisterende elementer redigeres, men nye kan ikke opprettes med visuell redigering.

Inntil det er lagt til støtte for dette, kan du kopiere fra en eksisterende til en ny side, eller redigere kildeteksten direkte.

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== Å bytte mellom visuell redigering og wikitekstredigering ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;For å bytte fra visuell redigering til wikitekstredigering, trykk på &lt;code&gt;[[ ]]&lt;/code&gt;-knappen helt til høyre på verktøylinjen.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Du vil presentert for en diff. (Om du trykket på «Forkast endringer» vil du bare se wikiteksten, som er klar til å redigeres med wikitekstredigeringen.)

Rull nedover, så vil du se området for wikitekstredigering. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
Du kan også bytte fra wikitekstredigering til visuell redigering. For å gjøre det, trykk på blyantikonet helt til høyre på verktøylinjen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Tastatursnarveier ==

Noen bidragsytere er vant til å skrive inne wikikode direkte, særlig for halvfet, kursiv og wikilenker. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Tastatursnarveier]] gjør at du kjapt kan sette inn slik formattering uten å måtte bruke menylinja. Her er de vanlige generelle tastatursnarveiene i VisualEditor:

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! PC-snarvei
! Effekt
! Mac-snarvei
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Fet
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Kursiv
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Sett inn lenke
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Klipp ut
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Kopier
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Lim inn
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Angre
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>bzsqd6lryfugxg6kuhyq9zlboewcmx2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/fi</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>135326</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402771</id>
      <parentid>5346975</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:43:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="64271" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Jos haluat kokeilla visuaalista muokkainta ilman, että muokkaat jotakin artikkelia, voit vapaasti kokeilla sitä [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} tällä sivulla].&lt;/span&gt; Voit muokata kyseistä sivua ilman käyttäjätunnusta.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Visuaalisen muokkaimen avaaminen ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| Muokataksesi sivua visuaalisella muokkaimella klikkaa sivun yläosassa olevaa {{int|vector-view-edit}}-välilehteä.

Sivun avautuminen muokkaustilaan saattaa kestää muutaman sekunnin tai pidempäänkin, jos sivu on erittäin pitkä.

Klikkaamalla {{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}} -välilehteä sivu avautuu perinteisessä wikitekstin muokkausnäkymässä.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Voit avata visuaalisen muokkaimen myös klikkaamalla {{int|editsection}}-linkkiä jonkin osion otsikon vieressä.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Aloittaminen: visuaalisen muokkaimen työkalurivi ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Näyttökuva visuaalisen muokkaimen työkalurivistä]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | Visuaalisen muokkaimen työkalurivi näkyy sivun yläosassa, kun aloitat muokkaamisen. Se sisältää joitakin tuttuja symboleja:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' ja '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' suorittamiasi muutoksia.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Otsikot'''-pudotusvalikko: voit valita kappaleelle tyylin. Muuta tyyliä napsauttamalla hiiren osoitin kappaleeseen (sinun ei tarvitse korostaa tekstiä) ja valitsemalla tyyli listasta. Osioiden otsikot ovat muodoltaan &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}&quot;, ja alaosiot &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}&quot;, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}&quot; ja niin edelleen. Normaalifontti tekstille on &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Muotoilu:''' Valikko avautuu painamalla &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot;-painiketta. 
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}&quot; ('''L''') lihavoi valitun tekstin.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}&quot; (''K'') kursivoi valitun tekstin.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) muuttaa valitun tekstin sitä ympäröivää tekstiä pienemmäksi ja siirtää sen hieman korkeammalle.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) muuttaa valitun tekstin sitä ympäröivää tekstiä pienemmäksi ja siirtää sen hieman alemmaksi.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;s&gt;Y&lt;/s&gt;) yliviivaa valitun tekstin.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}&quot; (kaarisulut: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) muuttaa valitun tekstin fontin kiinteäväliseksi fontiksi, joka saa sen erottumaan ympärillä olevasta tekstistä.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;u&gt;A&lt;/u&gt;) lisää yhtenäisen viivan valitun tekstin alapuolelle.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}&quot;-toiminnolla (文A) voi määrittää valitulle tekstille kielen (esim. japani) ja suunnan (esim. oikealta vasemmalle).
* Viimeinen toiminto &quot;[[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]] {{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}&quot; poistaa kaikki merkkimuotoilut valitusta tekstistä, myös linkit.

Jos et ole valinnut mitään tekstiä ja avaat valikon &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot;-painikkeesta, tulee sieltä valitsemasi tyyli automaattisesti tekstiin, jota alat kirjoittaa.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Linkitystyökalu:''' Ketjukuvake on [[#Editing links|linkitystyökalu]]. Sitä painamalla (yleesä tekstin valinnan jälkeen) avautuu [[#Editing links|linkki-ikkuna]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}-valikko:''' &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;-valikkoa käytetään lähdeviittausten lisäämiseen. Kaikissa projekteissa on mahdollisuus hyödyntää yksinkertaista lähdemuotoilua sekä käyttää viitteitä uudelleen tämän valikon avulla. Se antaa käyttäjille myös nopean pääsyn paikallisiin viitemallineisiin, jos ne ovat kyseisessä wikissä käytössä.

(Ohjeet paikallisten viittausmallineiden lisäämiseksi {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}-valikkoon tietyssä wikissä löytyvät sivulta {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}-painike:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jos wikissäsi on otettu käyttöön citoid-palvelu, näet {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}-valikon sijaan {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}-painikkeen.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

Citoid-palvelu yrittää täyttää viitemallineet automaattisesti.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Listat ja sisennys:''' kaksi ensimmäistä kohdetta mahdollistavat tekstin muotoilun joko &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}&quot;- tai &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}&quot; -muotoon. Kahden viimeisen kohteen avulla voit vähentää tai lisätä luettelokohteiden sisennystasoa.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;-valikko voi olla erilainen joissakin projekteissa. Alla on lista '''kaikista''' vaihtoehdoista, joita siinä saattaa olla.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot;-kuvake (kuva vuorista) avaa [[#Editing images and other media files|media-ikkunan]].
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;-kuvake (palapelin pala) mahdollistaa [[#Editing templates|mallineiden muokkaamisen]].
* &quot;Taulukko&quot;-kohteella voi lisätä taulukon.
* {{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}-kohde (puhekupla) mahdollistaa kommentit, jotka eivät näy lukijoille; nämä kommentit voi nähdä vain muokkaustilassa, jossa ne on merkitty huutomerkillä. Kommenttia voi muokata tai sen voi poistaa painamalla muokkaustilassa huutomerkkiä.
* &quot;{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}&quot;-kuvake ([[:w:fi:ankh|ankh]]-symboli - ☥) avaa hieroglyfin lisäämistyökalun. (Katso alla.)
* &quot;Koodipätkä&quot;-kohteella voi lisätä koodia.
* &quot;Musiikkinuotti&quot;-kohteella voi lisätä nuotteja.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot;-kuvakkeella (kuvasarja) voi lisätä sivulle gallerian.
* &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot;-kuvake (Σ) avaa [[#Editing mathematical formulae|kaavamuokkaimen]].
* &quot;Kaavio&quot;-kohteella voi lisätä kaavion.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}&quot;-kohteella voit lisätä sen allekirjoituksesi, joka sinulla on kyseisessä projektissa. Se on harmaana (ei valittavissa), kun muokkaat sellaista sivutyyppiä (”nimiavaruus”), missä allekirjoituksia ei pitäisi lisätä.
* &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot;-kuvake (kolme kirjaa) avaa ikkunan, jossa voit määritellä, missä kohtaa lähteet näytetään lukijalle. Yleensä tämän tarvitsee tehdä sivulla vain kerran.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Erikoismerkin lisääminen:''' &quot;{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}&quot; (Ω) -kuvake on &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; -valikon vieressä. Siitä avautuvassa ikkunassa on paljon erikoismerkkejä, joita voit lisätä tekstiin merkkiä klikkaamalla. Tarjolla on muun muassa joitain vakiosymboleja, tarkkeita ja matemaattisia symboleja. (Tätä listaa on mahdollista muokata paikallisesti. Katso ohjeet sivulta {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}}.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| Painike '''muokkausilmoitukset''' näyttää sivun mahdolliset ilmoitukset.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''$pagemenu''' -valikko on painikkeiden '''$save''' ja '''Vaihda muokkainta''' vasemmalla puolella. Valikkolistan '''valinnat'''-vaihtoehdosta avautuu valintaikkuna, jossa on seuraavat (vasemmalla olevat) välilehdet:&lt;/span&gt;

* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' mahdollistaa luokkien lisääminen kyseiselle sivulle, ja lisäksi sen avulla voi määritellä miten sivu järjestyy luokan sisällä.
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]'''-valikon avulla sivusta voi tehdä ohjauksen ja asettaa sille ominaisuuksia, muuttaa sisällysluettelon asetuksia, estää osioiden muokkaamisen tai tehdä sivusta täsmennyssivun.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Lisäasetukset'''-kohdasta voi muuttaa sivun indeksoimista hakukoneissa, uuden osion lisäyslinkin asetuksia ja sivun näkyvää otsikkoa.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' näyttää listan sivuun linkitetyistä muunkielisistä sivuista.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Käytetyt mallineet''' näyttää linkkilistan mallineista, joita sivulla on käytössä.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Valinnat-kohdan välilehdet näkyvät myös $pagemenu-listassa, ja ne voi avata klikkaamalla.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lisäksi $pagemenu-valikossa on painike '''Näytä oikealta vasemmalle''' sekä '''Etsi ja korvaa''', josta avautuvassa ikkunassa voit erilaisin asetuksin hakea merkkejä, termejä tai säännöllisiä lausekkeita, joita voit korvata.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Wikitekstin muokkaustila'''-painike on '''$save'''-painikkeen vieressä. Sen avulla voit vaihtaa wikitekstin muokkaimeen.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Muokkausten julkaiseminen ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Kun olet tehnyt muokkauksesi, klikkaa työkalurivillä olevaa sinistä &quot;{{int|publishchanges}}&quot; -painiketta. Painiketta ei voi klikata, jos muutoksia ei ole tehty (painike on harmaa). Peruuttaaksesi kaikki tekemäsi muutokset, sulje selainikkunasi tai paina muokkausvalikon yllä olevaa ”{{int|vector-view-view}}”-välilehteä.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Painamalla sinistä &quot;{{int|publishchanges-start}}&quot; -painiketta avautuu pieni ikkuna. Siihen voit kirjoittaa lyhyen kuvauksen tekemistäsi muutoksista, merkitä muokkauksesi pieneksi ja/tai lisätä sivun tarkkailulistallesi. {{int|summary}}-laatikko on vastaava kuin {{int|summary}}-tekstikenttä wikiteksti-muokkaimessa.&lt;/span&gt;

Ennen tallentamista voit myös tarkistaa muutoksesi käyttämällä &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; -painiketta varmistaaksesi, että muutokset olivat sellaisia kuin piti. Tämä on samantapainen kuin &quot;{{int|showdiff}}&quot; -painike wikiteksti-muokkaimessa.

X-painike palauttaa sinut sivulle, jota olit muokkaamassa. Voit julkaista kaikki muokkauksesi myöhemmin.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Linkkien muokkaaminen ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Linkkejä voi lisätä työkalurivillä olevalla &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot;-kuvakkeella (ketju) tai käyttämällä pikanäppäintä {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (tai {{Key press|Command|K}} Macissa).

Jos valitset (maalaat) tekstiä ja painat sitten ”{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}”-painiketta, käytetään tätä tekstiä linkin luomisessa. Jos linkissä on vain yksi sana, voit joko valita sanan tai laittaa osoittimen sanan sisälle.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Painikkeesta tai oikotietä käyttämällä avautuu ikkuna, johon voit kirjoittaa linkin.
Linkkityökalu yrittää auttaa '''sisäisten''' linkkien lisäämisessä hakemalla todennäköisiä vastaavuuksia.
Kun olet kirjoittanut tai valinnut linkin, viimeistele linkittämisprosessi painamalla {{key press|Enter}} tai napsauttamalla &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot;-painiketta. Linkkisi ilmestyy välittömästi sivulle, mutta kuten muutkin muutokset, sitä ei julkaista ennen kuin julkaiset ''koko'' sivun.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Muun verkkosivuston sivulle linkittämisessä prosessi on samanlainen: Valitse &quot;{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}&quot;-välilehti ja kirjoita URL-osoite ruutuun.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Ulkoiset linkit ilman selitettä näyttävät tältä: [http://example.com]. Voit lisätä niitä sijoittamalla kursorisi sanojen ulkopuolelle (esim. välilyönnin jälkeen). Avaa linkkityökalu painamalla painiketta tai pikanäppäimiä. Kirjoita URL-osoite laatikkoon ja paina ”{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}”-painiketta lisätäksesi linkin.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Kun haluat muuttaa tai poistaa olemassa olevan linkin, klikkaa linkin tekstiä, jolloin sen lähelle ilmestyy &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot;-valintaikkuna. (Pääset valintaikkunaan myös {{key press|Ctrl|K}} -näppäinyhdistelmällä.) Kun linkki on valittu, se näkyy sinisellä taustalla.

Linkin muokkaus -valintaikkunassa voit muuttaa sitä, mihin linkki vie. Voit myös poistaa linkin kokonaan painamalla oikeassa yläkulmassa olevaa punaista &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot;-painiketta (renkaat, joiden yli menee viiva).
Voit myös avata linkin kohteen toisessa ikkunassa painamalla valintaikkunassa näkyvää linkin kopiota. (Voit haluta tehdä tämän tarkistaaksesi onko ulkoinen linkki kelvollinen.)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want to exit the link label (the text displayed as a link) or continue to write after this link, you can press {{Key press|→}}:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:&lt;/span&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the link label directly without deleting it, put the cursor within that link label, use the backspace and delete keys (no more than necessary), and a narrow blue link area will remain there.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Lähteiden muokkaaminen ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Ohjeita viitemallineiden käyttämiseen]] tai [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Ohjeita citoidin {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}-painikkeen käyttämiseen]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Determining which system is in place ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your wiki may use one of three footnote systems.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The one shown on the right is the simplest system, where the &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; menu does not include any citation templates.&lt;/span&gt; Jos wikisi käyttää tätä systeemiä, kaikki tarvitsemasi tieto lähdeviitteistä on tällä sivulla.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Toisessa systeemissä on samanlainen &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;-valikko, mutta siinä on useita paljon käytettyjä vittemallineita, joita on nopea siitä käyttää. Jos wikisi käyttää tätä systeemiä, löydät lisätietoa sivulta {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the third system, you again start by pressing the {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Jo löytyvän lähteen muokkaaminen ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}&quot; icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For the &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}&quot; icon, pressing &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; opens the reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Monet wikit käyttävät mallineita lähteiden muotoilemiseen. Jos lähteessäsi käytetään mallinetta, sitten kaikki mallineen tekstit korostetaan napsauttaessasi lähteen tietoja.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; will open the template mini-editor dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; at the bottom of the mini-editor.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Kun olet valmis, paina &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Jo löytyvän lähteen uudelleenkäyttäminen ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Uudelleenkäyttääksesi jo olemassaolevaa lähdettä, laita kursorisi sinne, johon haluat lisätä lähteen tekstissä, ja napsauta &quot;{{int:visualeditor-dialogbutton-reference-tooltip}}&quot;-kuvaketta (kirjanmerkki) &quot;{{int:visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;-valikossa.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a &quot;{{int|citoid-citoiddialog-mode-reuse}}&quot; tab, in a dialog, instead of a &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-useexisting-tool}}&quot; item on the &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; menu.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jos sivu sisältää useita lähteitä, voit käyttää hakupalkkia (otsikoitu &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}}&quot;) nähdäksesi vain lähteet, jotka vastaavat annetun tekstin kanssa.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Uuden lähteen lisääminen ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lisätäksesi uuden lähteen, laita kursori sinne minne haluat sen lisätä tekstiin, ja napsauta työkaluriviltä &quot;{{int:visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;-painikkeesta aukeavaa &quot;{{int:visualeditor-dialogbutton-reference-tooltip}}&quot;-kuvaketta (kirjanmerkki).&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== &quot;Perus&quot;-viitteen käyttäminen ====
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.&lt;/span&gt;  Lähdemuokkaimessa voit lisätä viitteen sekä muotoilla sitä.

Voit valita lähteen kuulumaan tiettyyn ryhmään, vaikka normaalisti tämä jätetään tyhjäksi. (Tätä vaihtoehtoa käytetään lähderyhmien näyttämiseksi &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot;-työkalulla.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jos olet lisäämässä uutta lähdettä ja haluat lisätä sen mallineella, napsauta työkaluvalikossa olevaa &quot;{{int:visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;-painiketta, ja valitse sieltä &quot;Malline&quot;-kuvake (palapelin pala).&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Sitten etsi malline, jota haluat käyttää, lisää se ja muokkaa sitä kuten tekisit jo sivulla olevalle mallineelle.&lt;/span&gt;

Kun olet saanut uuden mallineen muokkaamisen tehtyä, paina &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; palataksesi viitemuokkaimeen, ja &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; uudelleen palataksesi sivulle, jota olet muokkaamassa.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Jos sivulla ei ole vielä luetteloa lähteistä (esimerkiksi jos olet lisäämässä sivulle ensimmäistä lähdettä), sinun täytyy lisätä se, jotta lähteeseen lisäämäsi teksti näkyy sivulla.

Laita kursori sinne missä haluat näyttää lähdeluettelon (yleensä sivun alaosassa), avaa &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;-valikko ja paina kuvaketta &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (kolme kirjaa).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jos loit ryhmän lähteitä, voit määrittää ryhmän tässä valintaikkunassa, näyttäen valikoivasti lähteet jotka kuuluvat siihen.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The final step in the References list dialog is to press &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Vakioviitemallineiden käyttäminen ====
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Pressing on a template icon such as &quot;Cite book&quot; will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; option.&lt;/span&gt;

Kun olet valmis, paina &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Kuvien ja muiden mediatiedostojen muokkaaminen ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Kuvien muokkaaminen ===
|-
| Lisätäksesi uuden kuvan (tai muuntyyppisen mediatiedoston) sivulle, napsauta avattavasta &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;-valikosta aukeavaa &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot;-kuvaketta (kuva vuorista). Kuva lisätään sinne missä kursori on.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Napsauttamalla &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot;-kuvaketta aukeaa valintaikkuna, joka etsii automaattisesti Wikimedia Commonsista ja paikallisesta wikistäsi mediatiedostoja, jotka liittyvät sivun otsikkoon, jota olet muokkaamassa.

Voit vaihtaa hakua vaihtamalla valintaikkunassa olevan hakulaatikon tekstiä.

Valitaksesi tiedoston, napsauta sen pienoiskuvaa.

Tämä asettaa kuvan sivulle, jota olet muokkaamassa.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Media-valintaikkunan avulla voit lisätä (ja muokata) kuvatekstiä, joka voi sisältää muotoilua ja linkkejä.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Media-valintaikkunassa voit myös lisätä vaihtoehtoisen kuvatekstin, joka auttaa käyttäjiä, jotka käyttävät näytönlukijoita, tai joilla on kuvat estettynä.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Voit myös asettaa eri parametreja kuvalle &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot;-ikkunassa. Näihin sisältyvät sijainti, tyyppi sekä kuvan koko.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Kun olet valmis, napsauta &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; sulkeaksesi valintaikkunan ja palataksesi sivun muokkaustilaan.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; icon that appears below the picture.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
&lt;/div&gt;

Voit myös vetää ja pudottaa kuvan haluamallesi paikalle sivulla.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Uploading images&lt;/span&gt; ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Upload&quot; tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Gallerioiden muokkaaminen ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lisätäksesi uuden gallerian, napsauta &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot;-kuvaketta (kuvasarja).&lt;/span&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Muokataksesi jo löytyvää galleriaa Visuaalisella muokkaimella, napsauta galleriaa, jotta galleria-kuvake tulee näkyviin oikeaan yläkulmaan. Napsauttamalla kuvaketta pääset galleria-asetinlaatikkoon, joka sisältää täyden listan kuvista, jotka galleriassa ovat.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Galleria-asetin on tällä hetkellä yksinkertainen laatikko, jonka avulla voit muokata jo löytyviä kuvia ja mediagallerioita käyttäen wikiteksti-merkintätapaa. Lisätäksesi uusia kuvia galleriaan, anna tiedoston nimi, pystyviiva (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) sekä kuvateksti, jonka haluat kuvalle. Jokaisella galleriassa olevalla kuvalla pitäisi olla oma rivinsä.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you press the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Mallineiden muokkaaminen ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The powerful MediaWiki template system lets you insert dynamic content, text from other pages, and much more. For a detailed explanation and examples, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Templates help page]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the VisualEditor you can search for a relevant template, add an invocation or [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusion]] on the page you’re editing and, if needed, add custom content using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameters]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert new template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lisätäksesi uuden mallineen sivulle, aseta kursori sinne, johon haluat mallineen tulevan, ja napsauta työkaluvalikossa olevasta &quot;$insert&quot;-painikkeesta aukeavaa &quot;$template&quot;-kuvaketta (palapelin pala).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then open the {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} menu and select &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, type two curly brackets {{((}} to open the same dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also edit a template that’s already on a page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you select the template you want to edit, it turns blue, and a box appears displaying &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then select the &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; link  or double click on the template itself to open the template.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the visual editor, such hidden templates are still shown so that you can click and edit or delete them.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon and both will be grayed out.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Mallineen parametrit ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You’ll see this dialog box when you’re adding a new template or editing one already in place.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What you see in the box depends on whether the template in question contains {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, helpful metadata added by other editors to make it easier to edit templates in the Visual Editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When a template contains TemplateData, the VisualEditor can use it to present annotated fields for you to fill in.
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For templates that have some community-provided TemplateData, the VisualEditor displays a list of the named parameters and, often, descriptions and instructions explaining the meaning and required format for each parameter’s values.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Adding undocumented parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter: “1”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter’s value: “en_US”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter: “2”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter’s value: “yes”&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Autogenerated parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completing your edit ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you have finished editing a template, you can click &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing on mobile ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Mallineiden substaaminen ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Listojen muokkaaminen ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation;  use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is the result of increased indentation.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Taulukoiden muokkaaminen ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Voit käyttää visuaalista muokkainta taulukoiden lisäämisen ja muokkaamiseen.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you press on &quot;Table&quot;, in the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now the &quot;Table&quot; menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To select a cell, press it once.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| Voit lisätä, siirtää tai poistaa sarakkeen tai rivin.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on &quot;Merge cells&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also split cells that were previously merged.  All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Luokkien muokkaaminen ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| Muokataksesi luokkia, paina &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; -valikossa kohtaa &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; -painike avaa uuden ikkunan, joka luetteloi sivulla olevat luokat, ja mahdollistaa sinun lisätä uusia tai poistaa jo lisättyjä luokkia.

Voit myös asettaa tai muuttaa yleistä (oletus) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|aakkostusavainta]], joka määrittää, missä kohtaa luokkaa sivu näkyy, kun samassa luokassa on useita sivuja.

Esimerkiksi oletusaakkostus artikkelille &quot;Kimi Räikkönen&quot; on &quot;Räikkönen, Kimi&quot;. Se näkyy luokassa &quot;Suomalaiset Formula 1 -kuljettajat&quot; kirjaimen &quot;R&quot; kohdalla, ei kirjaimen &quot;K&quot; kohdalla.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Lisätäksesi luokan sivulle, anna luokan nimi kenttään &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}&quot;. Kirjoittaessasi visuaalinen muokkain etsii mahdollisia vastaavia, jo luotuja luokkia. Voit joko valita jo luodun luokan, tai lisätä luokan, jota ei ole vielä olemassa. (Siihen asti, kun luokkaa ei ole olemassa, luokkaan osoittava linkki näkyy punaisena julkaistuasi muutokset.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Poistaaksesi sivulla jo valmiina olevan luokan, paina sitä, ja sen jälkeen paina aukeavassa valintaikkunassa olevaa &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot;-kuvaketta (roskakori).

Voit myös määrittää siellä aakkostusavaimen tälle tietylle luokalle. Tällainen aakkostusavain korvaa oletuksena olevan aakkostusavaimen.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Suoritettuasi luokkien muokkaamisen, paina &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; palataksesi sivun muokkaustilaan.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Sivun asetusten muokkaaminen ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| Muokataksesi sivun asetuksia, paina työkalurivillä olevaa &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; -valikkoa ja valitse &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; -painike.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; -painike avaa valikon, joka näyttää useita toimintoja.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Voit tehdä sivusta ohjauksen toiselle sivulle valitsemalla &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot; -valinnan, ja sen jälkeen kirjoittamalla valintakenttään sivun, johon haluat lukijan menevän, kun hän yrittää mennä sivulle, jota olet muokkaamassa.

Alaosassa on valinta, jolla voit estää sivujen uudeelleennimeämisten päivittämästä tätä ohjausta. Tätä käytetään erittäin harvoin.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Voit valita näytetäänkö sivulla sisällysluettelo valitsemalla yhden näistä kolmesta painikkeesta. Oletuksena (&quot;tarvittaessa&quot;) sivut näyttävät sisällysluettelon, jos sivulla on yli kolme otsikkoa.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Voit valita, ettei sivu näytä muokkauslinkkejä jokaisen alaotsikon kohdalla valitsemalla tämän valintaruudun.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Suoritettuasi sivun asetusten muokkaamisen, napsauta &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; palataksesi sivun muokkaimeen.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Karttojen muokkaaminen ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Voit lisätä ja muokata karttoja. Katso {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Matemaattisen kaavan muokkaaminen ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Lisätäksesi uuden matemaattisen kaavan sivulle, aseta kursori sinne, johon haluat sen tulevan, ja paina työkaluvalikossa olevasta &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;-painikkeesta aukeavaa &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot;-kuvaketta (&quot;Σ&quot;).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ikkuna aukeaa, johon voit kirjoittaa kaavan, käyttäen LaTeX-syntaksia. Visuaalinen muokkain päivittää kaavan sitä kirjoittaessasi, joten voit nähdä miltä se näyttää muutoksia tehdessäsi. Kun olet tyytyväinen kaavaan, paina &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;-painiketta.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Muokataksesi sivulta jo löytyvää matemaattista kaavaa, paina sitä, ja sen jälkeen paina kuvaketta &quot;Σ&quot;. Tämä avaa kaavamuokkaimen, jonne voit tehdä muutoksesi.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Editing musical scores ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then, from the &quot;Insert&quot; menu on the toolbar, press the &quot;Musical notation&quot; option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will open the &quot;Musical notation&quot; dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you are finished, press the &quot;Done&quot; button to close the dialog and publish your changes.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Runojen ja muiden erikoisten kohteiden muokkaaminen ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Visuaalinen muokkain ei tue vielä kaikkia kohteita, kuten runoja ja musiikkinuotteja. Siihen asti voit halutessasi muokata ja lisätä näitä wikitekstitilassa.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Switching between the visual and wikitext editors&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; button on the far right of the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on &quot;Discard changes&quot;, you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scroll down, and you'll see the wikitext editing area.&lt;/span&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Pikanäppäimet ==

Monet muokkaajat ovat tottuneet syöttämään wikitekstiä suoraan, erityisesti lihavoidakseen, kursivoidakseen ja lisätäkseen wikilinkkejä. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Pikanäppäinten]] avulla voit nopeasti asettaa vastaavia muotoiluja, ilman että tarvitsee napsauttaa työkalurivin kohteita. Tässä ovat yleiset pikanäppäimet Visuaalisessa muokkaimessa:

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! PC:n pikanäppäin
! Toiminto
! Macin pikanäppäin
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Lihavointi
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Kursivointi
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Aseta linkki
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Leikkaa
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Kopioi
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Liitä
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Kumoa
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>gju9a6eui0u2qufus84lnko12rtmwvj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/ja</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>135638</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402438</id>
      <parentid>4983839</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:03:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9053" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ビジュアルエディター]]'''のポータルにようこそ。ビジュアルエディター(VE)は、ウィキメディア財団によって開発された新しい編集方法です。ビジュアルエディターを使えば、ウィキ記法を覚えなくても編集できます。私達はビジュアルエディターがウィキメディアの各プロジェクトのwikiページに投稿する人達の役に立てるよう願っています。

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' をお読みください。
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} ビジュアルエディターの'''問題を報告''']
|-
| リンク張り、画像の追加・除去、引用、テンプレート挿入、表編集などなどの方法を確認してください。
|あなたの'''ウェブ・ブラウザ、PCのOS、ウィキペディアの外装''' (通常はベクター、モノブックの場合も)を付記してください。
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== ビジュアルエディターについて ==

ビジュアルエディターは、ウィキペディアを'''ビジュアル'''（見た目のまま）に編集する方法です。これまでウィキペディアで編集を行うには、たとえ記事を微修正するときでも、ウィキ記法という、かなり複雑な記法を学ぶ必要がありました。2001年当時はこれも容認できましたが、2015年現在、この記法が[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|利用者を遠ざけてしまっています]]。ビジュアルエディターが、すでにウィキペディアにいる人たちに有用であるとともに、新しくくる利用者により快適であるよう願っています。 

ビジュアルエディターは、&quot;α&quot;版の オプトイン（個人設定で選択すれば利用可能になる方式）機能として、 MediaWiki.org で2012年半ばから、また英語版ウィキペディアでは 2012 年 12  月から採用され、[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 2013年4月からは14言語版で]、[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ 2013年6月初めからはほとんどすべての言語版]で提供されています。2015年 7 月現在、75% 以上の言語版のウィキペディアで、ログインの有無に関わらず既定のエディターとして利用できるようになりました。
未対応の [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|ほとんどの言語版]] では 2015 年末までに使えるよう努力しています。
2014年11月以降、ウィキメディア財団のウィクショナリとウィキソース以外のすべてのウィキでオプトインの[[Beta Features|ベータ版]]形式で提供されています。

私たちは WMF ウィキに焦点を当てて [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|多言語ニュースレター]]を発行します。

== ビジュアルエディターの使用 ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

ビジュアルエディターで編集することに興味があって使ってみようと思う方は、[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|利用者ガイド]]と[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|よくあるキーボードショートカットの一覧]]をご覧ください。

ビジュアルエディターには現在も若干のバグと制約があります。問題に行き当たったら、遠慮なく[[VisualEditor/Feedback|フィードバックページに報告してください]]。現段階での制約はたとえば：

* '''読み込みに時間がかかる''' — たくさんの複雑なページをビジュアルエディターに読み込むには少々時間がかかります。将来的には、このソフトウェアはもっと速くなり、もっと大きなページ群を読み込めるようになるでしょう。
* '''編集が完全にはできない''' — 複雑なフォーマットの要素の一部では、内容の表示と編集はできますが、その構造を編集したり新しいエントリを追加したりはできません。例えば定義リストです。この分野の改善は、私たちの中でも優先順位が高いものの 1 つです。
* '''主として記事ページが対象で、会話ページは除外''' — VEはいくつかの名前空間に限って有効化されています。ほとんどのウィキペディアでは、VEは記事空間、利用者:、ファイル:、ヘルプ:、カテゴリ: のページで利用可能です。現在のところ、VEはウィキペディアページと各ノートページでは使えません。

利用者のみなさんには編集を保存する前に「{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}」をクリックすることと、[[VisualEditor/Feedback|問題が起きたら報告すること]]を推奨します。

== 手伝う方法 ==

ビジュアルエディターがその長所を最大限に発揮するためには、多くの面での助けが必要です。大きな分野のひとつに、このソフトウェアを実際に使ってバグを見つけて報告することがありますが、それ以外にも多くの課題があります。例えば:　

* '''ヘルプページの刷新''' — 私たちのプロジェクトはみなヘルプページを設けて新規参加者が投稿しやすいようにしています。残念ながら、これらのヘルプページはすべて、これまでのウィキ記法にのっとって作成されているため、ビジュアルエディターが進化するにつれて、スクリーンショットも手引書もすべて時代遅れになってしまいます。もし[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|私たちの手引書に基づいて]]、ビジュアルエディターに即した形で[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|ヘルプページを刷新]]できれば大変有用なことでしょう。
* '''テンプレートに TemplateData を加える''' — ビジュアルエディターにはすてきなテンプレート編集機能が付随しています。詳細は[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ヘルプページ]]をご覧ください。もしウィキペディア上でこれを用いれば、テンプレートの一部はパラメータと説明が付随していて使いやすくなっているのに気づくでしょう。付随していないテンプレートもあるでしょうけど。これはテンプレートに「TemplateData」が無いと、この機能がうまく働かないからなのです。「TemplateData」の追加に興味があれば、[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|TemplateData編集の手引]]と[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|重要なテンプレートの一覧]]をご覧ください。
* '''あなたのコミュニティを手伝ってください''' —  ビジュアルエディターでの編集体験をより良くするために[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|あなたのコミュニティを手伝う有効な方法]] を見てください。
* '''新規参加者を支援する''' — もしビジュアルエディターの導入が成功すれば、これまでよりもっと多くの新規参加者を迎えることができるようになるでしょうーたとえ編集がこれまでよりずっと容易になったとしても、コミュニティとどうやって付き合っていくかを習得するのは、依然として容易なことではありません。どうか、[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|利用案内やIRCのヘルプチャンネル]]にいくらかの時間を割いて、これら新規参加者がウィキペディアに慣れて溶け込めるようにしてあげてください。

==関連項目==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - このチェックリストで、皆さんのウィキや仲間の編集者が最も充実した編集体験を得られるようにします。
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - ビジュアル編集機能関連のヘルプは、皆さん自身のようなウィキメディアン相互で求めたり提供したりします。
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - 旧版のガイド。対象はビジュアルエディタに全く触れたことのないコミュニティ。

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>9esy4i9d7n1lq7ss2rv04drmpq64tly</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403016</id>
      <parentid>5402438</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9093" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ビジュアルエディター]]'''のポータルにようこそ。ビジュアルエディター(VE)は、ウィキメディア財団によって開発された新しい編集方法です。ビジュアルエディターを使えば、ウィキ記法を覚えなくても編集できます。私達はビジュアルエディターがウィキメディアの各プロジェクトのwikiページに投稿する人達の役に立てるよう願っています。

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' をお読みください。
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} ビジュアルエディターの'''問題を報告''']
|-
| リンク張り、画像の追加・除去、引用、テンプレート挿入、表編集などなどの方法を確認してください。
|あなたの'''ウェブ・ブラウザ、PCのOS、ウィキペディアの外装''' (通常はベクター、モノブックの場合も)を付記してください。
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== ビジュアルエディターについて ==

ビジュアルエディターは、ウィキペディアを'''ビジュアル'''（見た目のまま）に編集する方法です。これまでウィキペディアで編集を行うには、たとえ記事を微修正するときでも、ウィキ記法という、かなり複雑な記法を学ぶ必要がありました。2001年当時はこれも容認できましたが、2015年現在、この記法が[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|利用者を遠ざけてしまっています]]。ビジュアルエディターが、すでにウィキペディアにいる人たちに有用であるとともに、新しくくる利用者により快適であるよう願っています。 

ビジュアルエディターは、&quot;α&quot;版の オプトイン（個人設定で選択すれば利用可能になる方式）機能として、 MediaWiki.org で2012年半ばから、また英語版ウィキペディアでは 2012 年 12  月から採用され、[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 2013年4月からは14言語版で]、[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ 2013年6月初めからはほとんどすべての言語版]で提供されています。2015年 7 月現在、75% 以上の言語版のウィキペディアで、ログインの有無に関わらず既定のエディターとして利用できるようになりました。
未対応の [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|ほとんどの言語版]] では 2015 年末までに使えるよう努力しています。
2014年11月以降、ウィキメディア財団のウィクショナリとウィキソース以外のすべてのウィキでオプトインの[[Beta Features|ベータ版]]形式で提供されています。

私たちは WMF ウィキに焦点を当てて [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|多言語ニュースレター]]を発行します。

== ビジュアルエディターの使用 ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

ビジュアルエディターで編集することに興味があって使ってみようと思う方は、[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|利用者ガイド]]と[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|よくあるキーボードショートカットの一覧]]をご覧ください。

ビジュアルエディターには現在も若干のバグと制約があります。問題に行き当たったら、遠慮なく[[VisualEditor/Feedback|フィードバックページに報告してください]]。現段階での制約はたとえば：

* '''読み込みに時間がかかる''' — たくさんの複雑なページをビジュアルエディターに読み込むには少々時間がかかります。将来的には、このソフトウェアはもっと速くなり、もっと大きなページ群を読み込めるようになるでしょう。
* '''編集が完全にはできない''' — 複雑なフォーマットの要素の一部では、内容の表示と編集はできますが、その構造を編集したり新しいエントリを追加したりはできません。例えば定義リストです。この分野の改善は、私たちの中でも優先順位が高いものの 1 つです。
* '''主として記事ページが対象で、会話ページは除外''' — VEはいくつかの名前空間に限って有効化されています。ほとんどのウィキペディアでは、VEは記事空間、利用者:、ファイル:、ヘルプ:、カテゴリ: のページで利用可能です。現在のところ、VEはウィキペディアページと各ノートページでは使えません。

利用者のみなさんには編集を保存する前に「{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}」をクリックすることと、[[VisualEditor/Feedback|問題が起きたら報告すること]]を推奨します。

== 手伝う方法 ==

ビジュアルエディターがその長所を最大限に発揮するためには、多くの面での助けが必要です。大きな分野のひとつに、このソフトウェアを実際に使ってバグを見つけて報告することがありますが、それ以外にも多くの課題があります。例えば:　

* '''ヘルプページの刷新''' — 私たちのプロジェクトはみなヘルプページを設けて新規参加者が投稿しやすいようにしています。残念ながら、これらのヘルプページはすべて、これまでのウィキ記法にのっとって作成されているため、ビジュアルエディターが進化するにつれて、スクリーンショットも手引書もすべて時代遅れになってしまいます。もし[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|私たちの手引書に基づいて]]、ビジュアルエディターに即した形で[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|ヘルプページを刷新]]できれば大変有用なことでしょう。
* '''テンプレートに TemplateData を加える''' — ビジュアルエディターにはすてきなテンプレート編集機能が付随しています。詳細は[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ヘルプページ]]をご覧ください。もしウィキペディア上でこれを用いれば、テンプレートの一部はパラメータと説明が付随していて使いやすくなっているのに気づくでしょう。付随していないテンプレートもあるでしょうけど。これはテンプレートに「TemplateData」が無いと、この機能がうまく働かないからなのです。「TemplateData」の追加に興味があれば、[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|TemplateData編集の手引]]と[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|重要なテンプレートの一覧]]をご覧ください。
* '''あなたのコミュニティを手伝ってください''' —  ビジュアルエディターでの編集体験をより良くするために[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|あなたのコミュニティを手伝う有効な方法]] を見てください。
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''新規参加者を支援する''' — もしビジュアルエディターの導入が成功すれば、これまでよりもっと多くの新規参加者を迎えることができるようになるでしょうーたとえ編集がこれまでよりずっと容易になったとしても、コミュニティとどうやって付き合っていくかを習得するのは、依然として容易なことではありません。どうか、[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|利用案内やIRCのヘルプチャンネル]]にいくらかの時間を割いて、これら新規参加者がウィキペディアに慣れて溶け込めるようにしてあげてください。
&lt;/div&gt;

==関連項目==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - このチェックリストで、皆さんのウィキや仲間の編集者が最も充実した編集体験を得られるようにします。
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - ビジュアル編集機能関連のヘルプは、皆さん自身のようなウィキメディアン相互で求めたり提供したりします。
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - 旧版のガイド。対象はビジュアルエディタに全く触れたことのないコミュニティ。

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>3apuvb059p6erveplq4oibz1vdaoxzn</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403170</id>
      <parentid>5403016</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:41:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9053" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ビジュアルエディター]]'''のポータルにようこそ。ビジュアルエディター(VE)は、ウィキメディア財団によって開発された新しい編集方法です。ビジュアルエディターを使えば、ウィキ記法を覚えなくても編集できます。私達はビジュアルエディターがウィキメディアの各プロジェクトのwikiページに投稿する人達の役に立てるよう願っています。

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' をお読みください。
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} ビジュアルエディターの'''問題を報告''']
|-
| リンク張り、画像の追加・除去、引用、テンプレート挿入、表編集などなどの方法を確認してください。
|あなたの'''ウェブ・ブラウザ、PCのOS、ウィキペディアの外装''' (通常はベクター、モノブックの場合も)を付記してください。
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== ビジュアルエディターについて ==

ビジュアルエディターは、ウィキペディアを'''ビジュアル'''（見た目のまま）に編集する方法です。これまでウィキペディアで編集を行うには、たとえ記事を微修正するときでも、ウィキ記法という、かなり複雑な記法を学ぶ必要がありました。2001年当時はこれも容認できましたが、2015年現在、この記法が[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|利用者を遠ざけてしまっています]]。ビジュアルエディターが、すでにウィキペディアにいる人たちに有用であるとともに、新しくくる利用者により快適であるよう願っています。 

ビジュアルエディターは、&quot;α&quot;版の オプトイン（個人設定で選択すれば利用可能になる方式）機能として、 MediaWiki.org で2012年半ばから、また英語版ウィキペディアでは 2012 年 12  月から採用され、[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 2013年4月からは14言語版で]、[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ 2013年6月初めからはほとんどすべての言語版]で提供されています。2015年 7 月現在、75% 以上の言語版のウィキペディアで、ログインの有無に関わらず既定のエディターとして利用できるようになりました。
未対応の [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|ほとんどの言語版]] では 2015 年末までに使えるよう努力しています。
2014年11月以降、ウィキメディア財団のウィクショナリとウィキソース以外のすべてのウィキでオプトインの[[Beta Features|ベータ版]]形式で提供されています。

私たちは WMF ウィキに焦点を当てて [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|多言語ニュースレター]]を発行します。

== ビジュアルエディターの使用 ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

ビジュアルエディターで編集することに興味があって使ってみようと思う方は、[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|利用者ガイド]]と[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|よくあるキーボードショートカットの一覧]]をご覧ください。

ビジュアルエディターには現在も若干のバグと制約があります。問題に行き当たったら、遠慮なく[[VisualEditor/Feedback|フィードバックページに報告してください]]。現段階での制約はたとえば：

* '''読み込みに時間がかかる''' — たくさんの複雑なページをビジュアルエディターに読み込むには少々時間がかかります。将来的には、このソフトウェアはもっと速くなり、もっと大きなページ群を読み込めるようになるでしょう。
* '''編集が完全にはできない''' — 複雑なフォーマットの要素の一部では、内容の表示と編集はできますが、その構造を編集したり新しいエントリを追加したりはできません。例えば定義リストです。この分野の改善は、私たちの中でも優先順位が高いものの 1 つです。
* '''主として記事ページが対象で、会話ページは除外''' — VEはいくつかの名前空間に限って有効化されています。ほとんどのウィキペディアでは、VEは記事空間、利用者:、ファイル:、ヘルプ:、カテゴリ: のページで利用可能です。現在のところ、VEはウィキペディアページと各ノートページでは使えません。

利用者のみなさんには編集を保存する前に「{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}」をクリックすることと、[[VisualEditor/Feedback|問題が起きたら報告すること]]を推奨します。

== 手伝う方法 ==

ビジュアルエディターがその長所を最大限に発揮するためには、多くの面での助けが必要です。大きな分野のひとつに、このソフトウェアを実際に使ってバグを見つけて報告することがありますが、それ以外にも多くの課題があります。例えば:　

* '''ヘルプページの刷新''' — 私たちのプロジェクトはみなヘルプページを設けて新規参加者が投稿しやすいようにしています。残念ながら、これらのヘルプページはすべて、これまでのウィキ記法にのっとって作成されているため、ビジュアルエディターが進化するにつれて、スクリーンショットも手引書もすべて時代遅れになってしまいます。もし[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|私たちの手引書に基づいて]]、ビジュアルエディターに即した形で[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|ヘルプページを刷新]]できれば大変有用なことでしょう。
* '''テンプレートに TemplateData を加える''' — ビジュアルエディターにはすてきなテンプレート編集機能が付随しています。詳細は[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ヘルプページ]]をご覧ください。もしウィキペディア上でこれを用いれば、テンプレートの一部はパラメータと説明が付随していて使いやすくなっているのに気づくでしょう。付随していないテンプレートもあるでしょうけど。これはテンプレートに「TemplateData」が無いと、この機能がうまく働かないからなのです。「TemplateData」の追加に興味があれば、[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|TemplateData編集の手引]]と[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|重要なテンプレートの一覧]]をご覧ください。
* '''あなたのコミュニティを手伝ってください''' —  ビジュアルエディターでの編集体験をより良くするために[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|あなたのコミュニティを手伝う有効な方法]] を見てください。
* '''新規参加者を支援する''' — もしビジュアルエディターの導入が成功すれば、これまでよりもっと多くの新規参加者を迎えることができるようになるでしょうーたとえ編集がこれまでよりずっと容易になったとしても、コミュニティとどうやって付き合っていくかを習得するのは、依然として容易なことではありません。どうか、[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|利用案内やIRCのヘルプチャンネル]]にいくらかの時間を割いて、これら新規参加者がウィキペディアに慣れて溶け込めるようにしてあげてください。

==関連項目==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - このチェックリストで、皆さんのウィキや仲間の編集者が最も充実した編集体験を得られるようにします。
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - ビジュアル編集機能関連のヘルプは、皆さん自身のようなウィキメディアン相互で求めたり提供したりします。
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - 旧版のガイド。対象はビジュアルエディタに全く触れたことのないコミュニティ。

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>9esy4i9d7n1lq7ss2rv04drmpq64tly</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403239</id>
      <parentid>5403170</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:01:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9071" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ビジュアルエディター]]'''のポータルにようこそ。ビジュアルエディター(VE)は、ウィキメディア財団によって開発された新しい編集方法です。ビジュアルエディターを使えば、ウィキ記法を覚えなくても編集できます。私達はビジュアルエディターがウィキメディアの各プロジェクトのwikiページに投稿する人達の役に立てるよう願っています。

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' をお読みください。
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} ビジュアルエディターの'''問題を報告''']
|-
| リンク張り、画像の追加・除去、引用、テンプレート挿入、表編集などなどの方法を確認してください。
|あなたの'''ウェブ・ブラウザ、PCのOS、ウィキペディアの外装''' (通常はベクター、モノブックの場合も)を付記してください。
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== ビジュアルエディターについて ==

ビジュアルエディターは、ウィキペディアを'''ビジュアル'''（見た目のまま）に編集する方法です。これまでウィキペディアで編集を行うには、たとえ記事を微修正するときでも、ウィキ記法という、かなり複雑な記法を学ぶ必要がありました。2001年当時はこれも容認できましたが、2015年現在、この記法が[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|利用者を遠ざけてしまっています]]。ビジュアルエディターが、すでにウィキペディアにいる人たちに有用であるとともに、新しくくる利用者により快適であるよう願っています。 

ビジュアルエディターは、&quot;α&quot;版の オプトイン（個人設定で選択すれば利用可能になる方式）機能として、 MediaWiki.org で2012年半ばから、また英語版ウィキペディアでは 2012 年 12  月から採用され、[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 2013年4月からは14言語版で]、[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ 2013年6月初めからはほとんどすべての言語版]で提供されています。2015年 7 月現在、75% 以上の言語版のウィキペディアで、ログインの有無に関わらず既定のエディターとして利用できるようになりました。
未対応の [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|ほとんどの言語版]] では 2015 年末までに使えるよう努力しています。
2014年11月以降、ウィキメディア財団のウィクショナリとウィキソース以外のすべてのウィキでオプトインの[[Beta Features|ベータ版]]形式で提供されています。

私たちは WMF ウィキに焦点を当てて [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|多言語ニュースレター]]を発行します。

== ビジュアルエディターの使用 ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

ビジュアルエディターで編集することに興味があって使ってみようと思う方は、[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|利用者ガイド]]と[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|よくあるキーボードショートカットの一覧]]をご覧ください。

ビジュアルエディターには現在も若干のバグと制約があります。問題に行き当たったら、遠慮なく[[VisualEditor/Feedback|フィードバックページに報告してください]]。現段階での制約はたとえば：

* '''読み込みに時間がかかる''' — たくさんの複雑なページをビジュアルエディターに読み込むには少々時間がかかります。将来的には、このソフトウェアはもっと速くなり、もっと大きなページ群を読み込めるようになるでしょう。
* '''編集が完全にはできない''' — 複雑なフォーマットの要素の一部では、内容の表示と編集はできますが、その構造を編集したり新しいエントリを追加したりはできません。例えば定義リストです。この分野の改善は、私たちの中でも優先順位が高いものの 1 つです。
* '''主として記事ページが対象で、会話ページは除外''' — VEはいくつかの名前空間に限って有効化されています。ほとんどのウィキペディアでは、VEは記事空間、利用者:、ファイル:、ヘルプ:、カテゴリ: のページで利用可能です。現在のところ、VEはウィキペディアページと各ノートページでは使えません。

利用者のみなさんには編集を保存する前に「{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}」をクリックすることと、[[VisualEditor/Feedback|問題が起きたら報告すること]]を推奨します。

== 手伝う方法 ==

ビジュアルエディターがその長所を最大限に発揮するためには、多くの面での助けが必要です。大きな分野のひとつに、このソフトウェアを実際に使ってバグを見つけて報告することがありますが、それ以外にも多くの課題があります。例えば:　

* '''ヘルプページの刷新''' — 私たちのプロジェクトはみなヘルプページを設けて新規参加者が投稿しやすいようにしています。残念ながら、これらのヘルプページはすべて、これまでのウィキ記法にのっとって作成されているため、ビジュアルエディターが進化するにつれて、スクリーンショットも手引書もすべて時代遅れになってしまいます。もし[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|私たちの手引書に基づいて]]、ビジュアルエディターに即した形で[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|ヘルプページを刷新]]できれば大変有用なことでしょう。
* '''テンプレートに TemplateData を加える''' — ビジュアルエディターにはすてきなテンプレート編集機能が付随しています。詳細は[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|ヘルプページ]]をご覧ください。もしウィキペディア上でこれを用いれば、テンプレートの一部はパラメータと説明が付随していて使いやすくなっているのに気づくでしょう。付随していないテンプレートもあるでしょうけど。これはテンプレートに「TemplateData」が無いと、この機能がうまく働かないからなのです。「TemplateData」の追加に興味があれば、[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|TemplateData編集の手引]]と[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|重要なテンプレートの一覧]]をご覧ください。
* '''あなたのコミュニティを手伝ってください''' —  ビジュアルエディターでの編集体験をより良くするために[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|あなたのコミュニティを手伝う有効な方法]] を見てください。
* '''新規参加者を支援する''' — もしビジュアルエディターの導入が成功すれば、これまでよりもっと多くの新規参加者を迎えることができるようになるでしょうーたとえ編集がこれまでよりずっと容易になったとしても、コミュニティとどうやって付き合っていくかを習得するのは、依然として容易なことではありません。どうか、[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|利用案内やIRCのヘルプチャンネル]]にいくらかの時間を割いて、これら新規参加者がウィキペディアに慣れて溶け込めるようにしてあげてください。

==関連項目==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - このチェックリストで、皆さんのウィキや仲間の編集者が最も充実した編集体験を得られるようにします。
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - ビジュアル編集機能関連のヘルプは、皆さん自身のようなウィキメディアン相互で求めたり提供したりします。
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - 旧版のガイド。対象はビジュアルエディタに全く触れたことのないコミュニティ。

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>79qel1bw9oke87vk9wqivv7jbwwez20</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>135730</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402437</id>
      <parentid>2795346</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:03:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="472" xml:space="preserve">'''[[$ve|ビジュアルエディター]]'''のポータルにようこそ。ビジュアルエディター(VE)は、ウィキメディア財団によって開発された新しい編集方法です。ビジュアルエディターを使えば、ウィキ記法を覚えなくても編集できます。私達はビジュアルエディターがウィキメディアの各プロジェクトのwikiページに投稿する人達の役に立てるよう願っています。</text>
      <sha1>m7xqmtpx2sofh0vqzsng80m3jhtrd3z</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>135741</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403238</id>
      <parentid>1803187</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:01:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="768" xml:space="preserve">* '''テンプレートに TemplateData を加える''' — ビジュアルエディターにはすてきなテンプレート編集機能が付随しています。詳細は[[$ug|ヘルプページ]]をご覧ください。もしウィキペディア上でこれを用いれば、テンプレートの一部はパラメータと説明が付随していて使いやすくなっているのに気づくでしょう。付随していないテンプレートもあるでしょうけど。これはテンプレートに「TemplateData」が無いと、この機能がうまく働かないからなのです。「TemplateData」の追加に興味があれば、[[$td-tutor|TemplateData編集の手引]]と[[$td|重要なテンプレートの一覧]]をご覧ください。</text>
      <sha1>bowt3rr0hk6jyuelzml74gv3k8fzror</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>135742</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403169</id>
      <parentid>1803195</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:41:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="653" xml:space="preserve">* '''新規参加者を支援する''' — もしビジュアルエディターの導入が成功すれば、これまでよりもっと多くの新規参加者を迎えることができるようになるでしょうーたとえ編集がこれまでよりずっと容易になったとしても、コミュニティとどうやって付き合っていくかを習得するのは、依然として容易なことではありません。どうか、[[$1|利用案内やIRCのヘルプチャンネル]]にいくらかの時間を割いて、これら新規参加者がウィキペディアに慣れて溶け込めるようにしてあげてください。</text>
      <sha1>ryl0luqnajt5wy7wtmq6xhlacc8f7q3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/pt</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>136175</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402786</id>
      <parentid>5347027</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:51:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="64044" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Se desejar testar o editor visual sem editar um artigo, [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} aqui está uma página] onde pode fazê-lo livremente.&lt;/span&gt; Não precisa de ter uma conta para utilizar o editor visual nessa página.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Abrir o editor visual ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| Para editar uma página com o editor visual, clique no separador &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; no topo da página.

Pode levar alguns segundos até que a página abra para edição, e demorará mais se a página for muito longa.

Ao clicar no separador &quot;{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}&quot; irá abrir o editor clássico do texto da wiki.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Também pode abrir o editor visual ao clicar na hiperligação &quot;{{int|editsection}}&quot; em cada secção.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Começar: a barra de ferramentas do editor visual ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Captura de ecrã da barra de ferramentas do editor visual]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | A barra de ferramentas do editor visual aparece no topo do ecrã quando começa a editar. Esta inclui alguns ícones familiares:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' e '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' as alterações que efetuou.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| O menu suspenso '''Cabeçalho''': permite definir como o texto será formatado. Para alterar o estilo de um parágrafo, posicione o cursor do rato sobre o parágrafo e seleccione um item neste menu (não é necessário destacar qualquer texto). Os títulos das secções são formatados como &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}&quot;, e as subsecções são &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}&quot;, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}&quot;, e assim por diante. A formatação normal para texto é &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Formatação:''' Ao clicar no botão &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; surgirá um menu. 
* O item &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}&quot; ('''B''') destaca a negrito o texto selecionado.
* O item &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}&quot; (''I'') destaca em itálico o texto selecionado.
* O item &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) torna o texto seleccionado menor do que o texto circundante e um pouco acima da linha de escrita.
* O item &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) torna o texto seleccionado menor do que o texto circundante e um pouco abaixo da linha de escrita.
* O item &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) torna o texto seleccionado menor do que o texto circundante e um pouco acima da linha de escrita.
* O item &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}&quot; (um conjunto de chavetas: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) altera a fonte do texto seleccionado para uma fonte monoespaçada, o que o diferencia do texto (proporcionalmente espaçado) circundante.
* O item &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) adiciona uma barra sólida horizontal abaixo do texto selecionado.
* O item &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}&quot; (文A) permite-lhe identificar o idioma (por exemplo, japonês) e direção (por exemplo, da direita para a esquerda) do texto selecionado.
* O último item ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), denominado &quot;{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}&quot;, remove toda a formatação de caracteres do texto selecionado, incluindo hiperligações.

Se não selecionou nenhum texto, então ao clicar em &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; para abrir o menu e selecionar um item, essa formatação será aplicada ao texto que está a escrever, a partir de onde está localizado o cursor.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Ferramenta de hiperligação:''' o ícone de uma corrente representa a [[#Editing links|ferramenta de hiperligação]]. Ao clicar nela (normalmente quando seleciona algum texto), abre a [[#Editing links|janela de hiperligações]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''Menu {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}:''' este é utilizado para adicionar citações em linha (também chamadas de &quot;referências&quot; ou &quot;notas de rodapé&quot;). Todos os projetos têm acesso à formatação básica de referências e possuem a capacidade de reutilização de citações com este menu. Este menu também dá-lhe acesso rápido aos modelos de citação local, se estes estiverem ativados na sua wiki.

(Instruções para adicionar modelos de citação local ao menu {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}, numa wiki específica estão disponíveis em {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''Botão {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se o serviço citoid está habilitado em sua wiki, verá um botão {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} em vez de um menu {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

O serviço de citação tenta preencher predefinições de citação automaticamente.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Listas e indentação:''' Os dois primeiros itens permitem que formate o texto em {{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}} ou {{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}com, respectivamente. Os dois últimos permitem que aumente ou diminua o nível de indentação do conteúdo.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' O menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; pode ser mostrado de maneira diferente em alguns projectos. Aqui está uma lista de '''todas''' as opções que podem aparecer.
* O ícone &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; (uma imagem de montanhas) abre a [[#Editing images and other media files|janela de multimédia]].
* O ícone &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot; (uma peça de puzzle) permite-lhe [[#Editing templates|editar os modelos]].
* O item &quot;Tabela&quot; permite-lhe inserir uma tabela.
* O item &quot;{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}&quot; (um balão de conversação) permite-lhe inserir comentários ocultos aos leitores; estes comentários são visualizados apenas no modo de edição, onde são indicados por um ícone com uma marca de exclamação. No modo de edição, clicar no ícone com marca de exclamação permite editar ou eliminar o comentário.
* O ícone &quot;{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}&quot; (um símbolo [[:w:ankh|ankh]] - ☥) permite-lhe introduzir hieróglifos. (Veja abaixo.)
* O item &quot;Bloco de código&quot; permite inserir código.
* O item &quot;Notação musical&quot; permite inserir uma notação musical.
* O ícone &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (uma série de fotografias) permite inserir uma galeria de imagens à página.
* O ícone &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (Σ) abre a [[#Editing mathematical formulae|janela de inserção de fórmulas]].
* O item &quot;Gráfico&quot; permite-lhe inserir um gráfico.
* O item &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}&quot; permite-lhe inserir uma assinatura que pode utilizar no projeto. Ele estará acizentado (não selecionável) quando estiver editando um espaço nominal, como um artigo, onde assinaturas não devem ser inseridas.
* O ícone &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (três livros) abre um diálogo onde poderá especificar onde as referências serão mostradas ao leitor. Normalmente, isto apenas precisa de ser efetuado uma vez em cada página.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Inserção de carateres especiais:''' O ícone ''{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}'' (Ω) está ao lado do menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. Quando clicado, faz aparecer um diálogo que mostra muitos caracteres especiais. Ao clicar um carácter específico, insere-o no texto. Estes caracteres especiais incluem alguns símbolos padrão, acentos e símbolos matemáticos. (Esta lista pode ser personalizada localmente. Consulte {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} para instruções.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| O botão '''Avisos de edição''' exibe quaisquer avisos para a página.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O menu '''$pagemenu''' fica à esquerda do botão ''$save'' e do menu ''Alterar modo de edição''. Neste menu, existe um botão para abrir uma caixa de diálogo '''Opções''' com as seguintes guias (lado esquerdo):&lt;/span&gt;

* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' permite adicionar categorias a esta página e ajustar como a página é ordenada, quando exibida em uma categoria, definindo um índice diferente para a ordenação.
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' permite que você faça da página um redirecionamento e ajusta as opções desse redirecionamento, ajusta as configurações relacionadas à exibição do Índice, desabilita as ligações de edição próximas a cada título e define a página como uma página de desambiguação.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Configurações avançadas''' permite ajustar as configurações relacionadas à indexação da página pelos mecanismos de pesquisa, exibindo uma guia para adicionar uma nova secção e o título exibido.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' que mostra uma lista de páginas em outros idiomas que estão ligadas a essa página.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Templates used''' mostra uma lista de ligações para cada predefinição utilizada nesta página.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;As abas da caixa de diálogo Opções também são exibidas no menu $pagemenu e podem ser abertas clicando nelas.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Além disso, o menu $pagemenu contém o botão '''Ver da direita para a esquerda''' e o botão '''[[$1|Localizar e substituir]]''' que abre uma caixa de diálogo onde você pode inserir caracteres, termos ou expressões regulares pelos quais você está a pesquisar e aqueles para substituí-los, juntamente com vários botões para opções.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O botão '''$switch''' está localizado ao lado do botão '''$save'''. Ele permite alternar para o editor de código-fonte.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Publicar alterações ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Ao terminar de editar, clique no botão azul &quot;{{int|publishchanges}}&quot; na barra de ferramentas. Caso não tenha feito quaisquer mudanças, o botão azul estará desactivado (acinzentado). Para cancelar todas as alterações que realizou, feche apenas a janela do seu navegador, ou clique na guia &quot;{{int|vector-view-view}}&quot; acima da barra de ferramentas de edição.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ao pressionar o botão azul &quot;{{int|publishchanges-start}}&quot;, abre-se uma pequena caixa de diálogo no qual é possível inserir um breve resumo das suas ações, marcar a sua edição como menor e optar por adicionar a página à sua $watchlist. A caixa para o resumo é equivalente ao campo {{int|summary}} mostrado no editor clássico de wikitexto.&lt;/span&gt;

Pode também rever as mudanças que fez, ao usar o botão &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;, para ter a certeza de que funcionam como desejado antes de gravar as suas alterações. Isto é semelhante ao botão &quot;{{int|showdiff}}&quot; no editor clássico de wikitexto.

O botão &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}&quot; faz o editor regressar à página que estava a editar. Pode gravar as suas alterações mais tarde.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Editar hiperligações ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Hiperligações podem ser adicionadas através do ícone &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; (elos de uma corrente) na barra de ferramentas, ou usando o atalho {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (ou {{Key press|Command|K}} em um Mac).

Se seleccionar (destacar) um texto e clicar no botão &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot;, esse texto será utilizado na criação da hiperligação. Para uma hiperligação que envolva uma única palavra, pode seleccionar essa palavra ou simplesmente posicione o cursor por sobre essa palavra.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Quando utilizar o botão ou o atalho, aparecerá uma janela em que poderá digitar a ligação.
A ferramenta de ligação tentará ajudá-lo com as ligações '''internas''' ao procurar por prováveis correspondências.
Assim que tiver inserido ou selecionado uma hiperligação, pode completar o processo de hiperligação pressionando em {{key press|Enter}}, ou clicando no botão &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot;. A sua hiperligação irá aparecer imediatamente na página, mas assim como nas outras alterações à página, ela não será publicada até que publique a página &quot;completa&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Para interligar a uma página da Web ou outro ''site'' da Web, o processo é similar: escolha &quot;{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}&quot;, e insira um URL na caixa.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Hiperligações externas sem etiquetas parecem-se como isto: [http://example.com]. Pode adicionar um ao colocar o cursor longe de qualquer palavra (por exemplo, depois de um espaço). Abra a ferramenta de ligação ao clicar no botão ou pressionar o atalho de teclado. Digite a URL na caixa e clique no botão &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; para inserir a ligação.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Para alterar ou remover uma hiperligação existente, clique no texto com a hiperligação, depois pressione o ícone &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; que aparece próximo a ele. A caixa de diálogo irá surgir, para edição. (Pode também utilizar o atalho do teclado {{key press|Ctrl|K}}.) Quando uma ligação for seleccionada, esta surgirá destacada em azul.

Na caixa de diálogo para edição da ligação, pode então editar o destino da ligação. Poderá também removê-la por completo ao clicar no botão &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; no canto superior direito da janela de diálogo.
Pode também abrir a página de destino da ligação noutra janela ao clicar na cópia dela na caixa de diálogo. (Poderá querer fazer isto para verificar se uma ligação externa é válida).

Se quer sair do rótulo de ligação (o texto exibido como uma ligação) ou continuar a escrever após esta ligação, pode clicar em {{Key press|→}}:
* Pressione-a uma vez para sair da caixa de diálogo de edição da ligação e posicione o cursor no final do elemento ligado (destacado em azul, para editar este elemento)
* Pressione-a duas vezes para posicionar o cursor no final do elemento ligado, preparado para digitar o restante de seu texto

Para editar o rótulo em uma ligação existente, clique no rótulo da ligação e escreva o novo.
Mas se deseja substituir todo o rótulo, por favor note:

* Se selecionou (destacou) toda a etiqueta da hiperligação, esta será eliminada ao pressionar qualquer tecla.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para manter a ligação, clique no rótulo, pressione {{Key press |⌫}} ou {{Key press |Del}} uma vez, e apenas o URL restará.&lt;/span&gt; Agora você pode digitar a nova etiqueta para a hiperligação mantida.
* Você também pode [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|ligar a categorias, arquivos e mais]].
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Editar referências ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Ajuda para utilizar predefinições de ligação]] ou [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Ajuda para utilizar o botão citoid's {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== Determinar qual sistema está em vigor ===
|-
| Sua wiki pode utilizar um dos três sistemas de notas de rodapé. A opção mostrada à direita é o sistema mais simples, onde o menu &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; não inclui nenhuma predefinição de citação. Se a sua wiki utiliza este sistema, então tudo o que precisa saber acerca das notas de rodapé está nesta página.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| O segundo sistema possui o mesmo tipo de menu &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;, mas com várias predefinições populares de citação configuradas para acesso rápido. Se a sua wiki utiliza este sistema, poderá encontrar mais detalhes em {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;No terceiro sistema, comece clicando novamente no botão Citar.&lt;/span&gt; Depois é aberta uma janela, que inclui um processo de citação automática que utiliza o serviço &quot;citoid&quot;. Se a sua wiki utiliza este sistema, encontrará mais detalhes em {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Editar uma referência existente ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para editar uma referência existente, clique nela onde estiver ao longo do texto (geralmente, são indicadas por um número entre parênteses retos). Verá ou o ícone &quot;$ref&quot; (marcador) ou um ícone (e o nome) para a predefinição utilizada para criar esta referência. Em qualquer caso, ao clicar no botão &quot;Editar&quot; surgirá uma caixa de diálogo onde pode editar a referência.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para o ícone &quot;$ref&quot;, clique em &quot;Editar&quot; para abrir a caixa de diálogo Referência. Para iniciar a alteração das informações da referência, clique sobre ela.&lt;/span&gt;

Muitas wikis utilizam predefinições para formatar as referências de acordo com um padrão específico. Se uma predefinição é usada na sua referência, após posicionar o ponteiro do mouse sobre as informações da referência, todas as informações nesse campo serão destacadas.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se uma predefinição foi utilizada e clicaste nas informações da referência, o ícone $template (peça de puzzle) surgirá com algumas informações. Clique no botão &quot;editar&quot; para editar o conteúdo da predefinição na mini-caixa de diálogo.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se, ao clicar numa referência, for mostrado um ícone para uma predefinição padrão para citações (um exemplo é mostrado à direita), clique a seguir em &quot;Editar&quot; para abrir a caixa de diálogo com o mini-editor de predefinições.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;No mini-editor de predefinições, poderá adicionar ou remover quaisquer tipos de informação ou alterar o conteúdo atual. Serão mostrados, inicialmente, apenas os campos (parâmetros de predefinição) que têm conteúdo. Para adicionar campos, clique em &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; na parte inferior do mini-editor.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Clique em &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; quando terminar. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Reutilizar uma referência existente ===
|-
| Se a página já possui referências que se apliquem ao texto, pode reutilizar uma citação existente, se esta se aplicar ao texto que deseja referenciar.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para reutilizar uma referência existente, posicione o cursor na parte do texto onde deseja adicionar uma nova referência (número) para esta citação. Depois clique no item &quot;Reutilizar&quot;, no menu &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(Nota: Se a sua wiki possui o terceiro sistema de notas de rodapé descrito acima, verá uma guia &quot;Reutilizar&quot; em uma caixa de diálogo, em vez de um item &quot;Reutilizar&quot; no menu &quot;$cite&quot;.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Na caixa de diálogo {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}}, procure na lista pela referência que gostaria de reutilizar e seleccione-a. Se houver muitas referências, pode utilizar a caixa de pesquisa (rotulada com &quot;{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}&quot;) para mostrar apenas as referências que incluam um determinado texto.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Adicionar uma nova referência ===
|-
| Para adicionar uma nova referência com o menu &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;, posicione o cursor onde deseja adicioná-la no texto. De seguida, selecione o tipo apropriado de citação no menu.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Usar a citação &quot;Básica&quot; ====
|-
| O que se mostra aqui é o que verá caso selecione o item de referência básica.  No editor Referência, pode adicionar a sua citação, incluindo a sua formatação.

Pode fazer com que a sua referência pertença a um certo grupo, apesar de normalmente não ser especificado nenhum. (Esta opção é utilizada para mostrar grupos de referências com a ferramenta &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot;.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Na caixa de diálogo Referência, se quiser incluir uma predefinição de citação, ou qualquer nova predefinição, na sua nova referência, clique no ícone {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} (peça de puzzle) no menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; da barra de ferramentas do editor de referências.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Depois, procure pela predefinição que gostaria de usar, inclua-a e edite-a como faria com uma já existente. (Veja a seção [[#Editing templates|Editar predefinições]] abaixo se necessitar de mais informações.)

Se já terminou de editar a sua nova predefinição, clique em &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; para regressar ao editor de referências, e &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; novamente para retornar à página que está a editar.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Se ainda não há uma lista de referências na página (por exemplo, se está a inserir a primeira referência na página), precisa de especificar onde a lista de referências, e o seu texto, será apresentada ao leitor.

Coloque o cursor no local em que lista de referências devem aparecer (geralmente no final da página), abra o menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;, e clique no ícone &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (três livros).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Se criou grupos de referências, o que é normalmente raro, pode especificá-los nesta janela. Apenas as referências que pertencem a esse grupo serão exibidas no local onde está localizado o grupo.

O último passo final é clicar em &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; na janela.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Usar predefinições padrão de citação ====
|-
| A sua wiki local poderá ter adicionado predefinições de citação extra no menu &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;. Se assim for, terá fácil acesso às predefinições de referências mais utilizadas na sua wiki. (Instruções para adicionar predefinições de citação extra à sua wiki local estão disponíveis na página {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ao clicar no ícone de uma predefinição como &quot;Citar livro&quot;, será direcionado o mini-editor para essa mesma predefinição. Os campos de informação importantes podem ser marcados com um asterisco. Embora sejam mostrados os campos mais comuns, nem todos eles são necessários.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para acrescentar mais parâmetros, clique na opção &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; que se encontra na parte inferior do mini-editor.&lt;/span&gt;

Clique em &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; quando terminar.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Editar imagens e outros ficheiro multimédia ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Editar imagens ===
|-
| Para inserir uma nova imagem (ou outro tipo de ficheiro multimédia), clique no ícone &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; (uma imagem de montanhas) no menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. A imagem será incluída onde o rato estiver.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ao clicar no ícone &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot;, é aberta uma janela que procura automaticamente ficheiros multimédia relacionados com o título da página que está a editar no Wikimedia Commons.

Pode procurar por outros ficheiros multimédia ao alterar o texto no campo de pesquisa da janela.

Para escolher um ficheiro, clique na sua respetiva miniatura.

Desta forma, colocará a imagem na página que está a editar.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Depois da imagem que selecionou ser inserida na página, será aberta outra caixa de diálogo. A janela de média permite que insira e edite uma legenda, que pode conter formatação e hiperligações.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| O diálogo &quot;Média&quot; também permite a inserção de legendas e/ou textos alternativos, para ajudarem utilizadores com leitores de ecrã, ou que possuem desabilitada a exibição de imagens nos seus navegadores.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Pode-se também definir vários parâmetros para a imagem na janela &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot;. Estes incluem o alinhamento, tipo e tamanho da imagem.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Quando terminar, clique &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; para fechar a janela e voltar à edição da página.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ao clicar numa imagem existente, pode adicionar ou editar a sua legenda ao clicar no ícone &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; que aparece abaixo da fotografia.

Pode redimensionar uma imagem existente, clicando sobre nela, e em seguida, movendo o ícone de redimensionamento (a seta de duas pontas em um ou em ambos os cantos inferiores).

Também pode arrastar e soltar uma imagem para um outro local (acima ou abaixo) da página.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== Carregar uma imagem ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Pode enviar imagens a partir de um separador na janela de multimédia, ou arrastando e largando um ficheiro no editor, ou colando uma imagem da sua área de transferência.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Clique na guia &quot;Carregar&quot; e seleccione uma imagem de seu computador. Pode digitar o nome do ficheiro, ou arrastar uma imagem até a caixa. Se você arrastou e soltou uma imagem diretamente para o editor ou colou uma da sua área de transferência, essa guia será aberta automaticamente.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Precisa de descrever a imagem e adicionar categorias à ela e para que outras pessoas possam encontrá-la.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| A imagem será inserida na página ao terminar.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Editar galerias multimédia ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Para adicionar uma nova galeria, clique no ícone &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (um conjunto de fotografias) no menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. (Caso este ícone não seja mostrado no menu, significa que a sua wiki local decidiu adiar a implementação desta funcionalidade no Editor Visual.) 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Para editar uma galeria existente com o Editor Visual, clique na mesma. De seguida, na parte inferior da galeria, clique no ícone (um conjunto de fotos) para abrir o editor da galeria e mostrar a lista completa de imagens incluídas na mesma.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| O editor da galeria é atualmente uma caixa de exemplo que lhe permite editar as galerias existentes utilizando a marcação de wikitexto. Para adicionar uma nova imagem à galeria existente, digite o nome do ficheiro, seguido de uma barra (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) e a legenda para essa imagem. Deve colocar cada imagem na galeria na sua própria linha. Também pode editar esta lista para remover ou reorganizar as imagens ou para alterar as legendas.

Quando clicar no botão &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot;, sairá do editor de galerias. Depois, pode visualizar as suas alterações, uma vez que a galeria será agora mostrada aos leitores.

Lembre-se que sair do editor não publica as suas alterações. Tal como acontece com outras alterações efetuadas com o editor visual, deve publicar a página inteira para poder publicar o seu trabalho.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Edição de modelos ==
O sistema de modelos MediaWiki poderoso deixa-o inserir conteúdo dinâmico, texto de outras páginas, e muito mais. Para uma explicação detalhada e exemplos, consulte a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|página de ajuda dos modelos]]. 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the VisualEditor you can search for a relevant template, add an invocation or [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusion]] on the page you’re editing and, if needed, add custom content using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameters]].
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Inserir novo modelo ===
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Para adicionar um novo modelo numa página, coloque o seu cursor na posição na página que pretende inserir o modelo. Depois abra o menu {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} e selecione '[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}'. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, type two curly brackets {{((}} to open the same dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Também pode editar um modelo que já está numa página. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you select the template you want to edit, it turns blue, and a box appears displaying &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then select the &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; link  or double click on the template itself to open the template.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Algumas predefinições não são visíveis para quem lê uma página. No editor visual, tais modelos ocultos ainda são mostrados e assim pode clicar e editar ou apagá-los. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O nome da predefinição será mostrado ao lado do ícone de quebra-cabeça.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Parâmetros da predefinição ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You’ll see this dialog box when you’re adding a new template or editing one already in place.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What you see in the box depends on whether the template in question contains {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, helpful metadata added by other editors to make it easier to edit templates in the Visual Editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When a template contains TemplateData, the VisualEditor can use it to present annotated fields for you to fill in.
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For templates that have some community-provided TemplateData, the VisualEditor displays a list of the named parameters and, often, descriptions and instructions explaining the meaning and required format for each parameter’s values.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Adding undocumented parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter: “1”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter’s value: “en_US”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter: “2”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter’s value: “yes”&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Autogenerated parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completing your edit ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Quando terminar a edição de uma predefinição, clique em &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; para fechar a janela e voltar à edição da página principal.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing on mobile ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Substituição de predefinições ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Editar listas ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Você pode usar o editor visual para criar listas ou para mudar o formato de uma lista existente. Há dois tipos de lista: as não-ordenadas (pontuadas) e as ordenadas (enumeradas).

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation;  use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is the result of increased indentation.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Editar tabelas ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Pode usar o Editor Visual para inserir e alterar tabelas.

Pode, inclusive, importar uma tabela ao mover um ficheiro de valor separado por vírgula (.csv) do seu computador para a janela de edição principal.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ao clicar em &quot;Tabela&quot;, no menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;, o Editor Visual insere uma tabela em branco de quatro-por-quatro.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now the &quot;Table&quot; menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To select a cell, press it once.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| Pode adicionar, mover ou remover uma coluna ou uma linha.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on &quot;Merge cells&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also split cells that were previously merged.  All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Editar categorias ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| Para editar categorias, no menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot;, clique no item &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Ao clicar no item &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot;, abre-se uma caixa que lista categorias existentes e permite que adicione novas categorias, ou eliminar as categorias existentes.

Tem também a opção de configurar ou alterar a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|chave geral (padrão) de ordenamento]], que determina em que ordem a página aparece quando listada com outras páginas da mesma categoria.

Por exemplo, se a chave de ordenamento padrão para o artigo &quot;George Washington&quot; é &quot;Washington, George&quot;. Este artigo será listado na categoria &quot;Presidentes dos Estados Unidos&quot; com a letra &quot;W&quot;, e não com a &quot;G&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para adicionar uma nova categoria a uma página, escreva o seu nome no campo &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}&quot;. À medida que vai escrevendo, o Editor Visual procurará uma correspondência nas categorias existentes. Pode selecionar uma categoria existente ou criar uma nova que não tenha página própria. (Até que a página dessa nova categoria seja criada, o seu nome será mostrado a vermelho após gravar as suas alterações.)&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Para remover uma categoria existente, clique nela e depois no ícone &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; (caixote do lixo) na janela que abrirá.

Pode também especificar aí a chave de ordenamento para uma categoria específica. Esta sobrepõe-se à chave de ordenamento geral.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Clique em &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; quando terminar de editar as categorias para regressar à edição da página.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Editar configurações de página ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| Para editar as configurações de página, clique para abrir o menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot;, na barra de ferramentas&quot;, e pressione &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| O botão &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; abre uma caixa de diálogo que mostra várias opções.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Pode fazer da página um redirecionamento para outra, marcando a caixa de seleção &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot; e digitando o título da página para a qual quer que o leitor seja enviado quando tentar consultar a página que está a editar.

Abaixo surge a opção para evitar a atualização do redirecionamento. Isto não é muito utilizado.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Pode mudar a definição da página sobre a exibição do Índice ao clicar num desses três botões. A opção padrão é &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot;, que mostra um índice se houver três ou mais seções.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Pode desativar as ligações de edição ao lado de cada título de seção ao marcar esta caixa de seleção.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Clique em &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; ao terminar de editar as {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}, a fim de regressar à edição da página.
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing maps&lt;/span&gt; ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Editar fórmulas matemáticas ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Para adicionar uma nova fórmula matemática à página, posicione o rato no local onde deseja inseri-la e clique no ícone &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (&quot;Σ&quot;) do menu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; da barra de ferramentas.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Será aberta uma nova janela para que escreva a fórmula, utilizando a sintaxe LaTeX. O Editor Visual irá atualizar a fórmula à medida que a vá digitando, de forma a que consiga visualizá-la após as mudanças que for efetuando. Depois de terminar a fórmula, clique no botão &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Para editar uma fórmula matemática existente na página, clique na mesma e depois no ícone &quot;Σ&quot; que aparece. Isto abrirá a janela da fórmula, onde poderá fazer alterações.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Editing musical scores ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then, from the &quot;Insert&quot; menu on the toolbar, press the &quot;Musical notation&quot; option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will open the &quot;Musical notation&quot; dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you are finished, press the &quot;Done&quot; button to close the dialog and publish your changes.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Editar poemas e outros itens especiais ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Alguns itens, tais como listas de associação, poemas e partituras musicais, não são ainda totalmente suportados pelo Editor Visual.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Na maioria dos casos, os itens existentes podem ser editados, mas novos itens não podem ser inseridos no Editor Visual.

Até que sejam totalmente suportados, pode copiar um item já existente de outra página, ou editar o código de wikitexto directamente.

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Switching between the visual and wikitext editors&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; button on the far right of the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on &quot;Discard changes&quot;, you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scroll down, and you'll see the wikitext editing area.&lt;/span&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Teclas de atalho do teclado ==

Muitos editores estão acostumados a inserir wikitexto diretamente, especialmente negrito, itálico e ligações internas. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Teclas de atalho]] permitem inserir rapidamente formatações similares sem ser necessário clicar nos botões da barra de ferramentas de edição. Alguns atalhos gerais funcionam no Editor Visual.

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! Atalho para PC
! Ação
! Atalho para Mac
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Negrito
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Itálico
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Inserir ligação
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Cortar
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Copiar
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Colar
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Desfazer
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>htczybv8qw1h55ye9pjb8sro3xwh5yu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/pl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>136816</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403175</id>
      <parentid>1803332</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:41:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="417" xml:space="preserve">* '''Pomoc nowym użytkownikom''' – jeżeli uruchomienie VisualEditora przebiegnie pomyślnie, będziemy mieli dużo więcej nowych użytkowników, niż dotychczas. Nawet, jeśli edytowanie będzie łatwiejsze, nauka współpracy ze społecznością nadal będzie trudna. Prosimy, spędźcie trochę czasu [[$1|tam, gdzie nowicjusze przychodzą z prośbami o pomoc]], by pomóc im zaaklimatyzować się w Wikipedii.</text>
      <sha1>b85f1um84on4f3cdv14j0vj7qgxtxya</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>137040</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402435</id>
      <parentid>847064</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:03:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="345" xml:space="preserve">Benvenuta/o nel portale del '''[[$ve|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) è una nuova modalità di scrivere in Wikipedia che è stata sviluppata dalla Wikimedia Foundation. Questo permetterà alla gente di editare senza dovere prima apprendere la cosiddetta &quot;formattazione wiki&quot;. Speriamo in questo modo di agevolare le persone nell'editazione.</text>
      <sha1>ncyse8lxvr7igp468c6v7i9429qfw36</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/it</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>137041</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402436</id>
      <parentid>4983811</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:03:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7478" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Benvenuta/o nel portale del '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) è una nuova modalità di scrivere in Wikipedia che è stata sviluppata dalla Wikimedia Foundation. Questo permetterà alla gente di editare senza dovere prima apprendere la cosiddetta &quot;formattazione wiki&quot;. Speriamo in questo modo di agevolare le persone nell'editazione.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leggi la '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Segnala un problema''' con VisualEditor].
|-
| Scopri come creare link, aggiungere o spostare immagini, creare citazioni, inserire template, modificare tabelle e altro ancora
|Per favore indica '''il Browser, il sistema operativo e la skin di Wikipedia''' (solitamente Vector, qualche volta Monobook)
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Riguardo al VisualEditor ==

Il VisualEditor è una maniera &quot;visuale&quot; di editare in Wikipedia. Editare in Wikipedia ha richiesto in passato la conoscenza dei marcatori wiki, cioè di un linguaggio piuttosto complesso di formattazione, anche solo per effettuare piccoli cambiamenti ad una pagina. Nel 2001 questo era ancora accettabile, ma nel 2014 questo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|allontana eventuali contributori]]. Speriamo che VisualEditor diventi utile agli editori attuali e che aiuterà anche quelli che verranno. 

Il VisualEditor è stato reso disponibile in una versione opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; su MediaWiki.org fin dalla metà del 2012 e nella Wikipedia inglese a partire dal dicembre 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in più di 14 lingue fin dall' aprile 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ quasi in tutte le altre lingue] fin dall'inizio di giugno 2013. Dal luglio 2015 è stato reso disponibile di default agli utenti registrati e non, su più del 75% delle Wikipedie.
Speriamo di renderlo disponibile sulla maggior parte delle [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|lingue rimanenti]] entro la fine del 2015.
Fin dalla fine del novembre 2014, è disponibile anche come [[Beta Features/it|Funzione Beta]] opzionale su tutte le wiki di WMF, fatta eccezione per Wikizionario e Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Stiamo pubblicando [[VisualEditor/changelog|aggiornamenti di stato regolarmente]] su Mediawiki.org, e una [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|newsletter multilingua mensile]], incentrata sulle wiki di WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Usare VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se sei interessato a utilizzare VisualEditor, è stata scritta una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|semplice guida per l'utente]], e anche un [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|elenco dei più comuni tasti rapidi di utilizzo]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Al momento, VisualEditor è afflitto da un certo numero di bug e limitazioni. Se riscontri un problema [[VisualEditor/Feedback|segnalalo nella pagina di Feedback]]. Le attuali limitazioni comprendono:

* '''Lento da caricare''' — Occorrerà del tempo per caricare le pagine lunghe e complesse con VisualEditor. Prossimamente il software sarà molto più veloce e permetterà anche il caricamento agevole delle pagine più grandi.
* '''Modifica incompleta''' — Alcuni elementi di formattazione &quot;complessa&quot; sono visualizzati e modificabili nei loro contenuti ma non nella loro struttura e nell'introduzione di elementi nuovi - come liste di definizione. Permettere anche queste modifiche è un'altra priorità di sviluppo.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Disponibilità solo nelle voci e nelle pagine utente''' - Il VisualEditor sarà abilitato solo per le voci e le pagine utente (per effettuare eventuali prove col sistema in una propria pagina personale). Col tempo saranno attivati anche gli strumenti necessari per le altre sezioni di wikipedia come per le pagine di discussione, pagine di aiuto, e così via, ma per ora l'attenzione si è incentrata sulle voci.
&lt;/div&gt;

A causa delle limitazioni e degli inevitabili ''bug'', si raccomanda agli utenti di cliccare &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prima di salvare, e di [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferire ogni problema eventualmente riscontrato]].

== Come collaborare? ==

Per sfruttare al meglio le potenzialità del VisualEditor, c'è bisogno di aiuto sotto vari aspetti. Ovviamente, l'aspetto più importante è l'approccio con il nuovo editor, trovare i bug e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferirli]], ma non è l'unico:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Aggiornare le pagine di aiuto''' — Tutti i progetti hanno pagine d'aiuto per spiegare ai nuovi utenti come contribuire. Con l'arrivo del VisualEditor, queste pagine, così come i video e le immagini relative, diventeranno superati. Sarebbe pertanto molto utile  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|aggiornare le pagine di aiuto]], basandosi sulla [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guida all'impiego di VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Aggiungere TemplateData ai modelli''' — VisualEditor include un pratico editor di modelli, descritto dettagliatamente nella [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|pagina di aiuto relativa]]. Come si può notare usandolo, alcuni modelli hanno nomi di parametri e descrizioni per facilitarne l'uso, altri no. Questo perchè i modelli necessitano dei &quot;TemplateData&quot; per funzionare al meglio. Se sei interessato ad aggiungere dei TemplateData, è disponibile un'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|apposita guida]], insieme all'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|elenco dei più importanti modelli da aggiungere]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Aiuta la tua community''' — vedi la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista di modi utili per aiutare la tua community locale]] quando VisualEditor è offerto come una funzionalità beta.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Aiutare i nuovi utenti''' — Se il lancio di VisualEditor avrà successo, ci saranno molti più utenti di quanto non ve ne siano ora e, sebbene effettuare modifiche diverrà più facile, l'interazione con la comunità potrebbe rimanere complesso. Se lo desideri, spendi un po' del tuo tempo nell'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|help desk, o nel canale IRC di aiuto]], per accogliere i nuovi arrivati e aiutarli ad abituarsi a Wikipedia.

== Vedi anche ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>nbpaqgb1lgwmluhng67797rephfe86w</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403015</id>
      <parentid>5402436</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7518" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Benvenuta/o nel portale del '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) è una nuova modalità di scrivere in Wikipedia che è stata sviluppata dalla Wikimedia Foundation. Questo permetterà alla gente di editare senza dovere prima apprendere la cosiddetta &quot;formattazione wiki&quot;. Speriamo in questo modo di agevolare le persone nell'editazione.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leggi la '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Segnala un problema''' con VisualEditor].
|-
| Scopri come creare link, aggiungere o spostare immagini, creare citazioni, inserire template, modificare tabelle e altro ancora
|Per favore indica '''il Browser, il sistema operativo e la skin di Wikipedia''' (solitamente Vector, qualche volta Monobook)
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Riguardo al VisualEditor ==

Il VisualEditor è una maniera &quot;visuale&quot; di editare in Wikipedia. Editare in Wikipedia ha richiesto in passato la conoscenza dei marcatori wiki, cioè di un linguaggio piuttosto complesso di formattazione, anche solo per effettuare piccoli cambiamenti ad una pagina. Nel 2001 questo era ancora accettabile, ma nel 2014 questo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|allontana eventuali contributori]]. Speriamo che VisualEditor diventi utile agli editori attuali e che aiuterà anche quelli che verranno. 

Il VisualEditor è stato reso disponibile in una versione opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; su MediaWiki.org fin dalla metà del 2012 e nella Wikipedia inglese a partire dal dicembre 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in più di 14 lingue fin dall' aprile 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ quasi in tutte le altre lingue] fin dall'inizio di giugno 2013. Dal luglio 2015 è stato reso disponibile di default agli utenti registrati e non, su più del 75% delle Wikipedie.
Speriamo di renderlo disponibile sulla maggior parte delle [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|lingue rimanenti]] entro la fine del 2015.
Fin dalla fine del novembre 2014, è disponibile anche come [[Beta Features/it|Funzione Beta]] opzionale su tutte le wiki di WMF, fatta eccezione per Wikizionario e Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Stiamo pubblicando [[VisualEditor/changelog|aggiornamenti di stato regolarmente]] su Mediawiki.org, e una [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|newsletter multilingua mensile]], incentrata sulle wiki di WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Usare VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se sei interessato a utilizzare VisualEditor, è stata scritta una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|semplice guida per l'utente]], e anche un [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|elenco dei più comuni tasti rapidi di utilizzo]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Al momento, VisualEditor è afflitto da un certo numero di bug e limitazioni. Se riscontri un problema [[VisualEditor/Feedback|segnalalo nella pagina di Feedback]]. Le attuali limitazioni comprendono:

* '''Lento da caricare''' — Occorrerà del tempo per caricare le pagine lunghe e complesse con VisualEditor. Prossimamente il software sarà molto più veloce e permetterà anche il caricamento agevole delle pagine più grandi.
* '''Modifica incompleta''' — Alcuni elementi di formattazione &quot;complessa&quot; sono visualizzati e modificabili nei loro contenuti ma non nella loro struttura e nell'introduzione di elementi nuovi - come liste di definizione. Permettere anche queste modifiche è un'altra priorità di sviluppo.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Disponibilità solo nelle voci e nelle pagine utente''' - Il VisualEditor sarà abilitato solo per le voci e le pagine utente (per effettuare eventuali prove col sistema in una propria pagina personale). Col tempo saranno attivati anche gli strumenti necessari per le altre sezioni di wikipedia come per le pagine di discussione, pagine di aiuto, e così via, ma per ora l'attenzione si è incentrata sulle voci.
&lt;/div&gt;

A causa delle limitazioni e degli inevitabili ''bug'', si raccomanda agli utenti di cliccare &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prima di salvare, e di [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferire ogni problema eventualmente riscontrato]].

== Come collaborare? ==

Per sfruttare al meglio le potenzialità del VisualEditor, c'è bisogno di aiuto sotto vari aspetti. Ovviamente, l'aspetto più importante è l'approccio con il nuovo editor, trovare i bug e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferirli]], ma non è l'unico:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Aggiornare le pagine di aiuto''' — Tutti i progetti hanno pagine d'aiuto per spiegare ai nuovi utenti come contribuire. Con l'arrivo del VisualEditor, queste pagine, così come i video e le immagini relative, diventeranno superati. Sarebbe pertanto molto utile  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|aggiornare le pagine di aiuto]], basandosi sulla [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guida all'impiego di VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Aggiungere TemplateData ai modelli''' — VisualEditor include un pratico editor di modelli, descritto dettagliatamente nella [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|pagina di aiuto relativa]]. Come si può notare usandolo, alcuni modelli hanno nomi di parametri e descrizioni per facilitarne l'uso, altri no. Questo perchè i modelli necessitano dei &quot;TemplateData&quot; per funzionare al meglio. Se sei interessato ad aggiungere dei TemplateData, è disponibile un'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|apposita guida]], insieme all'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|elenco dei più importanti modelli da aggiungere]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Aiuta la tua community''' — vedi la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista di modi utili per aiutare la tua community locale]] quando VisualEditor è offerto come una funzionalità beta.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Aiutare i nuovi utenti''' — Se il lancio di VisualEditor avrà successo, ci saranno molti più utenti di quanto non ve ne siano ora e, sebbene effettuare modifiche diverrà più facile, l'interazione con la comunità potrebbe rimanere complesso. Se lo desideri, spendi un po' del tuo tempo nell'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|help desk, o nel canale IRC di aiuto]], per accogliere i nuovi arrivati e aiutarli ad abituarsi a Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Vedi anche ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>830w3646g2aqgz7xe0my8glxot7atqr</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403063</id>
      <parentid>5403015</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:06:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7478" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Benvenuta/o nel portale del '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) è una nuova modalità di scrivere in Wikipedia che è stata sviluppata dalla Wikimedia Foundation. Questo permetterà alla gente di editare senza dovere prima apprendere la cosiddetta &quot;formattazione wiki&quot;. Speriamo in questo modo di agevolare le persone nell'editazione.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leggi la '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Segnala un problema''' con VisualEditor].
|-
| Scopri come creare link, aggiungere o spostare immagini, creare citazioni, inserire template, modificare tabelle e altro ancora
|Per favore indica '''il Browser, il sistema operativo e la skin di Wikipedia''' (solitamente Vector, qualche volta Monobook)
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Riguardo al VisualEditor ==

Il VisualEditor è una maniera &quot;visuale&quot; di editare in Wikipedia. Editare in Wikipedia ha richiesto in passato la conoscenza dei marcatori wiki, cioè di un linguaggio piuttosto complesso di formattazione, anche solo per effettuare piccoli cambiamenti ad una pagina. Nel 2001 questo era ancora accettabile, ma nel 2014 questo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|allontana eventuali contributori]]. Speriamo che VisualEditor diventi utile agli editori attuali e che aiuterà anche quelli che verranno. 

Il VisualEditor è stato reso disponibile in una versione opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; su MediaWiki.org fin dalla metà del 2012 e nella Wikipedia inglese a partire dal dicembre 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in più di 14 lingue fin dall' aprile 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ quasi in tutte le altre lingue] fin dall'inizio di giugno 2013. Dal luglio 2015 è stato reso disponibile di default agli utenti registrati e non, su più del 75% delle Wikipedie.
Speriamo di renderlo disponibile sulla maggior parte delle [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|lingue rimanenti]] entro la fine del 2015.
Fin dalla fine del novembre 2014, è disponibile anche come [[Beta Features/it|Funzione Beta]] opzionale su tutte le wiki di WMF, fatta eccezione per Wikizionario e Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Stiamo pubblicando [[VisualEditor/changelog|aggiornamenti di stato regolarmente]] su Mediawiki.org, e una [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|newsletter multilingua mensile]], incentrata sulle wiki di WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Usare VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se sei interessato a utilizzare VisualEditor, è stata scritta una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|semplice guida per l'utente]], e anche un [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|elenco dei più comuni tasti rapidi di utilizzo]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Al momento, VisualEditor è afflitto da un certo numero di bug e limitazioni. Se riscontri un problema [[VisualEditor/Feedback|segnalalo nella pagina di Feedback]]. Le attuali limitazioni comprendono:

* '''Lento da caricare''' — Occorrerà del tempo per caricare le pagine lunghe e complesse con VisualEditor. Prossimamente il software sarà molto più veloce e permetterà anche il caricamento agevole delle pagine più grandi.
* '''Modifica incompleta''' — Alcuni elementi di formattazione &quot;complessa&quot; sono visualizzati e modificabili nei loro contenuti ma non nella loro struttura e nell'introduzione di elementi nuovi - come liste di definizione. Permettere anche queste modifiche è un'altra priorità di sviluppo.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Disponibilità solo nelle voci e nelle pagine utente''' - Il VisualEditor sarà abilitato solo per le voci e le pagine utente (per effettuare eventuali prove col sistema in una propria pagina personale). Col tempo saranno attivati anche gli strumenti necessari per le altre sezioni di wikipedia come per le pagine di discussione, pagine di aiuto, e così via, ma per ora l'attenzione si è incentrata sulle voci.
&lt;/div&gt;

A causa delle limitazioni e degli inevitabili ''bug'', si raccomanda agli utenti di cliccare &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prima di salvare, e di [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferire ogni problema eventualmente riscontrato]].

== Come collaborare? ==

Per sfruttare al meglio le potenzialità del VisualEditor, c'è bisogno di aiuto sotto vari aspetti. Ovviamente, l'aspetto più importante è l'approccio con il nuovo editor, trovare i bug e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferirli]], ma non è l'unico:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Aggiornare le pagine di aiuto''' — Tutti i progetti hanno pagine d'aiuto per spiegare ai nuovi utenti come contribuire. Con l'arrivo del VisualEditor, queste pagine, così come i video e le immagini relative, diventeranno superati. Sarebbe pertanto molto utile  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|aggiornare le pagine di aiuto]], basandosi sulla [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guida all'impiego di VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Aggiungere TemplateData ai modelli''' — VisualEditor include un pratico editor di modelli, descritto dettagliatamente nella [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|pagina di aiuto relativa]]. Come si può notare usandolo, alcuni modelli hanno nomi di parametri e descrizioni per facilitarne l'uso, altri no. Questo perchè i modelli necessitano dei &quot;TemplateData&quot; per funzionare al meglio. Se sei interessato ad aggiungere dei TemplateData, è disponibile un'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|apposita guida]], insieme all'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|elenco dei più importanti modelli da aggiungere]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Aiuta la tua community''' — vedi la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista di modi utili per aiutare la tua community locale]] quando VisualEditor è offerto come una funzionalità beta.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Aiutare i nuovi utenti''' — Se il lancio di VisualEditor avrà successo, ci saranno molti più utenti di quanto non ve ne siano ora e, sebbene effettuare modifiche diverrà più facile, l'interazione con la comunità potrebbe rimanere complesso. Se lo desideri, spendi un po' del tuo tempo nell'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|help desk, o nel canale IRC di aiuto]], per accogliere i nuovi arrivati e aiutarli ad abituarsi a Wikipedia.

== Vedi anche ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>nbpaqgb1lgwmluhng67797rephfe86w</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403065</id>
      <parentid>5403063</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:07:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7440" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Benvenuta/o nel portale del '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) è una nuova modalità di scrivere in Wikipedia che è stata sviluppata dalla Wikimedia Foundation. Questo permetterà alla gente di editare senza dovere prima apprendere la cosiddetta &quot;formattazione wiki&quot;. Speriamo in questo modo di agevolare le persone nell'editazione.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leggi la '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Segnala un problema''' con VisualEditor].
|-
| Scopri come creare link, aggiungere o spostare immagini, creare citazioni, inserire template, modificare tabelle e altro ancora
|Per favore indica '''il Browser, il sistema operativo e la skin di Wikipedia''' (solitamente Vector, qualche volta Monobook)
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Riguardo al VisualEditor ==

Il VisualEditor è una maniera &quot;visuale&quot; di editare in Wikipedia. Editare in Wikipedia ha richiesto in passato la conoscenza dei marcatori wiki, cioè di un linguaggio piuttosto complesso di formattazione, anche solo per effettuare piccoli cambiamenti ad una pagina. Nel 2001 questo era ancora accettabile, ma nel 2014 questo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|allontana eventuali contributori]]. Speriamo che VisualEditor diventi utile agli editori attuali e che aiuterà anche quelli che verranno. 

Il VisualEditor è stato reso disponibile in una versione opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; su MediaWiki.org fin dalla metà del 2012 e nella Wikipedia inglese a partire dal dicembre 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in più di 14 lingue fin dall' aprile 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ quasi in tutte le altre lingue] fin dall'inizio di giugno 2013. Dal luglio 2015 è stato reso disponibile di default agli utenti registrati e non, su più del 75% delle Wikipedie.
Speriamo di renderlo disponibile sulla maggior parte delle [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|lingue rimanenti]] entro la fine del 2015.
Fin dalla fine del novembre 2014, è disponibile anche come [[Beta Features/it|Funzione Beta]] opzionale su tutte le wiki di WMF, fatta eccezione per Wikizionario e Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Stiamo pubblicando [[VisualEditor/changelog|aggiornamenti di stato regolarmente]] su Mediawiki.org, e una [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|newsletter multilingua mensile]], incentrata sulle wiki di WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Usare VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se sei interessato a utilizzare VisualEditor, è stata scritta una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|semplice guida per l'utente]], e anche un [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|elenco dei più comuni tasti rapidi di utilizzo]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Al momento, VisualEditor è afflitto da un certo numero di bug e limitazioni. Se riscontri un problema [[VisualEditor/Feedback|segnalalo nella pagina di Feedback]]. Le attuali limitazioni comprendono:

* '''Lento da caricare''' — Occorrerà del tempo per caricare le pagine lunghe e complesse con VisualEditor. Prossimamente il software sarà molto più veloce e permetterà anche il caricamento agevole delle pagine più grandi.
* '''Modifica incompleta''' — Alcuni elementi di formattazione &quot;complessa&quot; sono visualizzati e modificabili nei loro contenuti ma non nella loro struttura e nell'introduzione di elementi nuovi - come liste di definizione. Permettere anche queste modifiche è un'altra priorità di sviluppo.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Disponibilità solo nelle voci e nelle pagine utente''' - Il VisualEditor sarà abilitato solo per le voci e le pagine utente (per effettuare eventuali prove col sistema in una propria pagina personale). Col tempo saranno attivati anche gli strumenti necessari per le altre sezioni di wikipedia come per le pagine di discussione, pagine di aiuto, e così via, ma per ora l'attenzione si è incentrata sulle voci.
&lt;/div&gt;

A causa delle limitazioni e degli inevitabili ''bug'', si raccomanda agli utenti di cliccare &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prima di salvare, e di [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferire ogni problema eventualmente riscontrato]].

== Come collaborare? ==

Per sfruttare al meglio le potenzialità del VisualEditor, c'è bisogno di aiuto sotto vari aspetti. Ovviamente, l'aspetto più importante è l'approccio con il nuovo editor, trovare i bug e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferirli]], ma non è l'unico:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Aggiornare le pagine di aiuto''' — Tutti i progetti hanno pagine d'aiuto per spiegare ai nuovi utenti come contribuire. Con l'arrivo del VisualEditor, queste pagine, così come i video e le immagini relative, diventeranno superati. Sarebbe pertanto molto utile  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|aggiornare le pagine di aiuto]], basandosi sulla [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guida all'impiego di VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Aggiungere TemplateData ai modelli''' — VisualEditor include un pratico editor di modelli, descritto dettagliatamente nella [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|pagina di aiuto relativa]]. Come si può notare usandolo, alcuni modelli hanno nomi di parametri e descrizioni per facilitarne l'uso, altri no. Questo perchè i modelli necessitano dei &quot;TemplateData&quot; per funzionare al meglio. Se sei interessato ad aggiungere dei TemplateData, è disponibile un'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|apposita guida]], insieme all'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|elenco dei più importanti modelli da aggiungere]].
* '''Aiuta la tua community''' — vedi la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista di modi utili per aiutare la tua community locale]] per ottimizzare l'esperienza di editing con l'editor visuale.
* '''Aiutare i nuovi utenti''' — Se il lancio di VisualEditor avrà successo, ci saranno molti più utenti di quanto non ve ne siano ora e, sebbene effettuare modifiche diverrà più facile, l'interazione con la comunità potrebbe rimanere complesso. Se lo desideri, spendi un po' del tuo tempo nell'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|help desk, o nel canale IRC di aiuto]], per accogliere i nuovi arrivati e aiutarli ad abituarsi a Wikipedia.

== Vedi anche ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>59jj4u6jqxt1midvua1ux7h0rwodncw</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403067</id>
      <parentid>5403065</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:11:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7471" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Benvenuta/o nel portale del '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) è una nuova modalità di scrivere in Wikipedia che è stata sviluppata dalla Wikimedia Foundation. Questo permetterà alla gente di editare senza dovere prima apprendere la cosiddetta &quot;formattazione wiki&quot;. Speriamo in questo modo di agevolare le persone nell'editazione.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leggi la '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Segnala un problema''' con VisualEditor].
|-
| Scopri come creare link, aggiungere o spostare immagini, creare citazioni, inserire template, modificare tabelle e altro ancora
|Per favore indica '''il Browser, il sistema operativo e la skin di Wikipedia''' (solitamente Vector, qualche volta Monobook)
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Riguardo al VisualEditor ==

Il VisualEditor è una maniera &quot;visuale&quot; di editare in Wikipedia. Editare in Wikipedia ha richiesto in passato la conoscenza dei marcatori wiki, cioè di un linguaggio piuttosto complesso di formattazione, anche solo per effettuare piccoli cambiamenti ad una pagina. Nel 2001 questo era ancora accettabile, ma nel 2014 questo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|allontana eventuali contributori]]. Speriamo che VisualEditor diventi utile agli editori attuali e che aiuterà anche quelli che verranno. 

Il VisualEditor è stato reso disponibile in una versione opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; su MediaWiki.org fin dalla metà del 2012 e nella Wikipedia inglese a partire dal dicembre 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in più di 14 lingue fin dall' aprile 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ quasi in tutte le altre lingue] fin dall'inizio di giugno 2013. Dal luglio 2015 è stato reso disponibile di default agli utenti registrati e non, su più del 75% delle Wikipedie.
Speriamo di renderlo disponibile sulla maggior parte delle [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|lingue rimanenti]] entro la fine del 2015.
Fin dalla fine del novembre 2014, è disponibile anche come [[Beta Features/it|Funzione Beta]] opzionale su tutte le wiki di WMF, fatta eccezione per Wikizionario e Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Stiamo pubblicando [[VisualEditor/changelog|aggiornamenti di stato regolarmente]] su Mediawiki.org, e una [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|newsletter multilingua mensile]], incentrata sulle wiki di WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Usare VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se sei interessato a utilizzare VisualEditor, è stata scritta una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|semplice guida per l'utente]], e anche un [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|elenco dei più comuni tasti rapidi di utilizzo]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Al momento, VisualEditor è afflitto da un certo numero di bug e limitazioni. Se riscontri un problema [[VisualEditor/Feedback|segnalalo nella pagina di Feedback]]. Le attuali limitazioni comprendono:

* '''Lento da caricare''' — Occorrerà del tempo per caricare le pagine lunghe e complesse con VisualEditor. Prossimamente il software sarà molto più veloce e permetterà anche il caricamento agevole delle pagine più grandi.
* '''Modifica incompleta''' — Alcuni elementi di formattazione &quot;complessa&quot; sono visualizzati e modificabili nei loro contenuti ma non nella loro struttura e nell'introduzione di elementi nuovi - come liste di definizione. Permettere anche queste modifiche è un'altra priorità di sviluppo.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Disponibilità solo nelle voci e nelle pagine utente''' - Il VisualEditor sarà abilitato solo per le voci e le pagine utente (per effettuare eventuali prove col sistema in una propria pagina personale). Col tempo saranno attivati anche gli strumenti necessari per le altre sezioni di wikipedia come per le pagine di discussione, pagine di aiuto, e così via, ma per ora l'attenzione si è incentrata sulle voci.
&lt;/div&gt;

A causa delle limitazioni e degli inevitabili ''bug'', si raccomanda agli utenti di cliccare &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prima di salvare, e di [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferire ogni problema eventualmente riscontrato]].

== Come collaborare? ==

Per sfruttare al meglio le potenzialità del VisualEditor, c'è bisogno di aiuto sotto vari aspetti. Ovviamente, l'aspetto più importante è l'approccio con il nuovo editor, trovare i bug e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferirli]], ma non è l'unico:

* '''Aggiornare le pagine di aiuto''' — Tutti i progetti hanno pagine d'aiuto per spiegare ai nuovi utenti come contribuire.  Purtroppo sono tutti costruiti intorno all'editor di markup e, con l'evoluzione di VisualEditor, le schermate e le esercitazioni diventeranno tutte obsolete.  Sarebbe pertanto molto utile se le persone potessero [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|aggiornare le pagine di aiuto]], basandosi sulla [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guida all'impiego di VisualEditor]].
* '''Aggiungere TemplateData ai modelli''' — VisualEditor include un pratico editor di modelli, descritto dettagliatamente nella [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|pagina di aiuto relativa]]. Come si può notare usandolo, alcuni modelli hanno nomi di parametri e descrizioni per facilitarne l'uso, altri no. Questo perchè i modelli necessitano dei &quot;TemplateData&quot; per funzionare al meglio. Se sei interessato ad aggiungere dei TemplateData, è disponibile un'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|apposita guida]], insieme all'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|elenco dei più importanti modelli da aggiungere]].
* '''Aiuta la tua community''' — vedi la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista di modi utili per aiutare la tua community locale]] per ottimizzare l'esperienza di editing con l'editor visuale.
* '''Aiutare i nuovi utenti''' — Se il lancio di VisualEditor avrà successo, ci saranno molti più utenti di quanto non ve ne siano ora e, sebbene effettuare modifiche diverrà più facile, l'interazione con la comunità potrebbe rimanere complesso. Se lo desideri, spendi un po' del tuo tempo nell'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|help desk, o nel canale IRC di aiuto]], per accogliere i nuovi arrivati e aiutarli ad abituarsi a Wikipedia.

== Vedi anche ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>1l25jl06alkr77fync88yvhh3ko7u8v</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403235</id>
      <parentid>5403067</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:01:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7489" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Benvenuta/o nel portale del '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) è una nuova modalità di scrivere in Wikipedia che è stata sviluppata dalla Wikimedia Foundation. Questo permetterà alla gente di editare senza dovere prima apprendere la cosiddetta &quot;formattazione wiki&quot;. Speriamo in questo modo di agevolare le persone nell'editazione.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leggi la '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Segnala un problema''' con VisualEditor].
|-
| Scopri come creare link, aggiungere o spostare immagini, creare citazioni, inserire template, modificare tabelle e altro ancora
|Per favore indica '''il Browser, il sistema operativo e la skin di Wikipedia''' (solitamente Vector, qualche volta Monobook)
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Riguardo al VisualEditor ==

Il VisualEditor è una maniera &quot;visuale&quot; di editare in Wikipedia. Editare in Wikipedia ha richiesto in passato la conoscenza dei marcatori wiki, cioè di un linguaggio piuttosto complesso di formattazione, anche solo per effettuare piccoli cambiamenti ad una pagina. Nel 2001 questo era ancora accettabile, ma nel 2014 questo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|allontana eventuali contributori]]. Speriamo che VisualEditor diventi utile agli editori attuali e che aiuterà anche quelli che verranno. 

Il VisualEditor è stato reso disponibile in una versione opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; su MediaWiki.org fin dalla metà del 2012 e nella Wikipedia inglese a partire dal dicembre 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in più di 14 lingue fin dall' aprile 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ quasi in tutte le altre lingue] fin dall'inizio di giugno 2013. Dal luglio 2015 è stato reso disponibile di default agli utenti registrati e non, su più del 75% delle Wikipedie.
Speriamo di renderlo disponibile sulla maggior parte delle [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|lingue rimanenti]] entro la fine del 2015.
Fin dalla fine del novembre 2014, è disponibile anche come [[Beta Features/it|Funzione Beta]] opzionale su tutte le wiki di WMF, fatta eccezione per Wikizionario e Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Stiamo pubblicando [[VisualEditor/changelog|aggiornamenti di stato regolarmente]] su Mediawiki.org, e una [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|newsletter multilingua mensile]], incentrata sulle wiki di WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Usare VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se sei interessato a utilizzare VisualEditor, è stata scritta una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|semplice guida per l'utente]], e anche un [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|elenco dei più comuni tasti rapidi di utilizzo]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Al momento, VisualEditor è afflitto da un certo numero di bug e limitazioni. Se riscontri un problema [[VisualEditor/Feedback|segnalalo nella pagina di Feedback]]. Le attuali limitazioni comprendono:

* '''Lento da caricare''' — Occorrerà del tempo per caricare le pagine lunghe e complesse con VisualEditor. Prossimamente il software sarà molto più veloce e permetterà anche il caricamento agevole delle pagine più grandi.
* '''Modifica incompleta''' — Alcuni elementi di formattazione &quot;complessa&quot; sono visualizzati e modificabili nei loro contenuti ma non nella loro struttura e nell'introduzione di elementi nuovi - come liste di definizione. Permettere anche queste modifiche è un'altra priorità di sviluppo.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Disponibilità solo nelle voci e nelle pagine utente''' - Il VisualEditor sarà abilitato solo per le voci e le pagine utente (per effettuare eventuali prove col sistema in una propria pagina personale). Col tempo saranno attivati anche gli strumenti necessari per le altre sezioni di wikipedia come per le pagine di discussione, pagine di aiuto, e così via, ma per ora l'attenzione si è incentrata sulle voci.
&lt;/div&gt;

A causa delle limitazioni e degli inevitabili ''bug'', si raccomanda agli utenti di cliccare &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prima di salvare, e di [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferire ogni problema eventualmente riscontrato]].

== Come collaborare? ==

Per sfruttare al meglio le potenzialità del VisualEditor, c'è bisogno di aiuto sotto vari aspetti. Ovviamente, l'aspetto più importante è l'approccio con il nuovo editor, trovare i bug e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferirli]], ma non è l'unico:

* '''Aggiornare le pagine di aiuto''' — Tutti i progetti hanno pagine d'aiuto per spiegare ai nuovi utenti come contribuire.  Purtroppo sono tutti costruiti intorno all'editor di markup e, con l'evoluzione di VisualEditor, le schermate e le esercitazioni diventeranno tutte obsolete.  Sarebbe pertanto molto utile se le persone potessero [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|aggiornare le pagine di aiuto]], basandosi sulla [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guida all'impiego di VisualEditor]].
* '''Aggiungere TemplateData ai modelli''' — VisualEditor include un pratico editor di modelli, descritto dettagliatamente nella [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|pagina di aiuto relativa]]. Come si può notare usandolo, alcuni modelli hanno nomi di parametri e descrizioni per facilitarne l'uso, altri no. Questo perchè i modelli necessitano dei &quot;TemplateData&quot; per funzionare al meglio. Se sei interessato ad aggiungere dei TemplateData, è disponibile un'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|apposita guida]], insieme all'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|elenco dei più importanti modelli da aggiungere]].
* '''Aiuta la tua community''' — vedi la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista di modi utili per aiutare la tua community locale]] per ottimizzare l'esperienza di editing con l'editor visuale.
* '''Aiutare i nuovi utenti''' — Se il lancio di VisualEditor avrà successo, ci saranno molti più utenti di quanto non ve ne siano ora e, sebbene effettuare modifiche diverrà più facile, l'interazione con la comunità potrebbe rimanere complesso. Se lo desideri, spendi un po' del tuo tempo nell'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|help desk, o nel canale IRC di aiuto]], per accogliere i nuovi arrivati e aiutarli ad abituarsi a Wikipedia.

== Vedi anche ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>g3dpptezgatzeglo9j74x2we750zv3j</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403339</id>
      <parentid>5403235</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:35:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7372" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Benvenuta/o nel portale del '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) è una nuova modalità di scrivere in Wikipedia che è stata sviluppata dalla Wikimedia Foundation. Questo permetterà alla gente di editare senza dovere prima apprendere la cosiddetta &quot;formattazione wiki&quot;. Speriamo in questo modo di agevolare le persone nell'editazione.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leggi la '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Segnala un problema''' con VisualEditor].
|-
| Scopri come creare link, aggiungere o spostare immagini, creare citazioni, inserire template, modificare tabelle e altro ancora
|Per favore indica '''il Browser, il sistema operativo e la skin di Wikipedia''' (solitamente Vector, qualche volta Monobook)
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Riguardo al VisualEditor ==

Il VisualEditor è una maniera &quot;visuale&quot; di editare in Wikipedia. Editare in Wikipedia ha richiesto in passato la conoscenza dei marcatori wiki, cioè di un linguaggio piuttosto complesso di formattazione, anche solo per effettuare piccoli cambiamenti ad una pagina. Nel 2001 questo era ancora accettabile, ma nel 2014 questo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|allontana eventuali contributori]]. Speriamo che VisualEditor diventi utile agli editori attuali e che aiuterà anche quelli che verranno. 

Il VisualEditor è stato reso disponibile in una versione opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; su MediaWiki.org fin dalla metà del 2012 e nella Wikipedia inglese a partire dal dicembre 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in più di 14 lingue fin dall' aprile 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ quasi in tutte le altre lingue] fin dall'inizio di giugno 2013. Dal luglio 2015 è stato reso disponibile di default agli utenti registrati e non, su più del 75% delle Wikipedie.
Speriamo di renderlo disponibile sulla maggior parte delle [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|lingue rimanenti]] entro la fine del 2015.
Fin dalla fine del novembre 2014, è disponibile anche come [[Beta Features/it|Funzione Beta]] opzionale su tutte le wiki di WMF, fatta eccezione per Wikizionario e Wikisource.

Stiamo pubblicando una [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|newsletter multilingue]], incentrata sui wiki WMF.

== Usare VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se sei interessato a utilizzare VisualEditor, è stata scritta una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|semplice guida per l'utente]], e anche un [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|elenco dei più comuni tasti rapidi di utilizzo]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Al momento, VisualEditor è afflitto da un certo numero di bug e limitazioni. Se riscontri un problema [[VisualEditor/Feedback|segnalalo nella pagina di Feedback]]. Le attuali limitazioni comprendono:

* '''Lento da caricare''' — Occorrerà del tempo per caricare le pagine lunghe e complesse con VisualEditor. Prossimamente il software sarà molto più veloce e permetterà anche il caricamento agevole delle pagine più grandi.
* '''Modifica incompleta''' — Alcuni elementi di formattazione &quot;complessa&quot; sono visualizzati e modificabili nei loro contenuti ma non nella loro struttura e nell'introduzione di elementi nuovi - come liste di definizione. Permettere anche queste modifiche è un'altra priorità di sviluppo.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Disponibilità solo nelle voci e nelle pagine utente''' - Il VisualEditor sarà abilitato solo per le voci e le pagine utente (per effettuare eventuali prove col sistema in una propria pagina personale). Col tempo saranno attivati anche gli strumenti necessari per le altre sezioni di wikipedia come per le pagine di discussione, pagine di aiuto, e così via, ma per ora l'attenzione si è incentrata sulle voci.
&lt;/div&gt;

A causa delle limitazioni e degli inevitabili ''bug'', si raccomanda agli utenti di cliccare &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prima di salvare, e di [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferire ogni problema eventualmente riscontrato]].

== Come collaborare? ==

Per sfruttare al meglio le potenzialità del VisualEditor, c'è bisogno di aiuto sotto vari aspetti. Ovviamente, l'aspetto più importante è l'approccio con il nuovo editor, trovare i bug e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferirli]], ma non è l'unico:

* '''Aggiornare le pagine di aiuto''' — Tutti i progetti hanno pagine d'aiuto per spiegare ai nuovi utenti come contribuire.  Purtroppo sono tutti costruiti intorno all'editor di markup e, con l'evoluzione di VisualEditor, le schermate e le esercitazioni diventeranno tutte obsolete.  Sarebbe pertanto molto utile se le persone potessero [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|aggiornare le pagine di aiuto]], basandosi sulla [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guida all'impiego di VisualEditor]].
* '''Aggiungere TemplateData ai modelli''' — VisualEditor include un pratico editor di modelli, descritto dettagliatamente nella [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|pagina di aiuto relativa]]. Come si può notare usandolo, alcuni modelli hanno nomi di parametri e descrizioni per facilitarne l'uso, altri no. Questo perchè i modelli necessitano dei &quot;TemplateData&quot; per funzionare al meglio. Se sei interessato ad aggiungere dei TemplateData, è disponibile un'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|apposita guida]], insieme all'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|elenco dei più importanti modelli da aggiungere]].
* '''Aiuta la tua community''' — vedi la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista di modi utili per aiutare la tua community locale]] per ottimizzare l'esperienza di editing con l'editor visuale.
* '''Aiutare i nuovi utenti''' — Se il lancio di VisualEditor avrà successo, ci saranno molti più utenti di quanto non ve ne siano ora e, sebbene effettuare modifiche diverrà più facile, l'interazione con la comunità potrebbe rimanere complesso. Se lo desideri, spendi un po' del tuo tempo nell'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|help desk, o nel canale IRC di aiuto]], per accogliere i nuovi arrivati e aiutarli ad abituarsi a Wikipedia.

== Vedi anche ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>8j0clli8jdp2jtmbync2cp7hyd8q0d1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403341</id>
      <parentid>5403339</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:37:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7313" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Benvenuta/o nel portale del '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) è una nuova modalità di scrivere in Wikipedia che è stata sviluppata dalla Wikimedia Foundation. Questo permetterà alla gente di editare senza dovere prima apprendere la cosiddetta &quot;formattazione wiki&quot;. Speriamo in questo modo di agevolare le persone nell'editazione.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leggi la '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Segnala un problema''' con VisualEditor].
|-
| Scopri come creare link, aggiungere o spostare immagini, creare citazioni, inserire template, modificare tabelle e altro ancora
|Per favore indica '''il Browser, il sistema operativo e la skin di Wikipedia''' (solitamente Vector, qualche volta Monobook)
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Riguardo al VisualEditor ==

Il VisualEditor è una maniera &quot;visuale&quot; di editare in Wikipedia. Editare in Wikipedia ha richiesto in passato la conoscenza dei marcatori wiki, cioè di un linguaggio piuttosto complesso di formattazione, anche solo per effettuare piccoli cambiamenti ad una pagina. Nel 2001 questo era ancora accettabile, ma nel 2014 questo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|allontana eventuali contributori]]. Speriamo che VisualEditor diventi utile agli editori attuali e che aiuterà anche quelli che verranno. 

Il VisualEditor è stato reso disponibile in una versione opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; su MediaWiki.org fin dalla metà del 2012 e nella Wikipedia inglese a partire dal dicembre 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in più di 14 lingue fin dall' aprile 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ quasi in tutte le altre lingue] fin dall'inizio di giugno 2013. Dal luglio 2015 è stato reso disponibile di default agli utenti registrati e non, su più del 75% delle Wikipedie.
Speriamo di renderlo disponibile sulla maggior parte delle [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|lingue rimanenti]] entro la fine del 2015.
Fin dalla fine del novembre 2014, è disponibile anche come [[Beta Features/it|Funzione Beta]] opzionale su tutte le wiki di WMF, fatta eccezione per Wikizionario e Wikisource.

Stiamo pubblicando una [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|newsletter multilingue]], incentrata sui wiki WMF.

== Usare VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Se siete interessati a utilizzare VisualEditor per l'editing, abbiamo una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guida per farlo]] e un [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|elenco di scorciatoie da tastiera comuni]].

Al momento, VisualEditor è afflitto da un certo numero di bug e limitazioni. Se riscontri un problema [[VisualEditor/Feedback|segnalalo nella pagina di Feedback]]. Le attuali limitazioni comprendono:

* '''Lento da caricare''' — Occorrerà del tempo per caricare le pagine lunghe e complesse con VisualEditor. Prossimamente il software sarà molto più veloce e permetterà anche il caricamento agevole delle pagine più grandi.
* '''Modifica incompleta''' — Alcuni elementi di formattazione &quot;complessa&quot; sono visualizzati e modificabili nei loro contenuti ma non nella loro struttura e nell'introduzione di elementi nuovi - come liste di definizione. Permettere anche queste modifiche è un'altra priorità di sviluppo.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Disponibilità solo nelle voci e nelle pagine utente''' - Il VisualEditor sarà abilitato solo per le voci e le pagine utente (per effettuare eventuali prove col sistema in una propria pagina personale). Col tempo saranno attivati anche gli strumenti necessari per le altre sezioni di wikipedia come per le pagine di discussione, pagine di aiuto, e così via, ma per ora l'attenzione si è incentrata sulle voci.
&lt;/div&gt;

A causa delle limitazioni e degli inevitabili ''bug'', si raccomanda agli utenti di cliccare &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prima di salvare, e di [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferire ogni problema eventualmente riscontrato]].

== Come collaborare? ==

Per sfruttare al meglio le potenzialità del VisualEditor, c'è bisogno di aiuto sotto vari aspetti. Ovviamente, l'aspetto più importante è l'approccio con il nuovo editor, trovare i bug e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferirli]], ma non è l'unico:

* '''Aggiornare le pagine di aiuto''' — Tutti i progetti hanno pagine d'aiuto per spiegare ai nuovi utenti come contribuire.  Purtroppo sono tutti costruiti intorno all'editor di markup e, con l'evoluzione di VisualEditor, le schermate e le esercitazioni diventeranno tutte obsolete.  Sarebbe pertanto molto utile se le persone potessero [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|aggiornare le pagine di aiuto]], basandosi sulla [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guida all'impiego di VisualEditor]].
* '''Aggiungere TemplateData ai modelli''' — VisualEditor include un pratico editor di modelli, descritto dettagliatamente nella [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|pagina di aiuto relativa]]. Come si può notare usandolo, alcuni modelli hanno nomi di parametri e descrizioni per facilitarne l'uso, altri no. Questo perchè i modelli necessitano dei &quot;TemplateData&quot; per funzionare al meglio. Se sei interessato ad aggiungere dei TemplateData, è disponibile un'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|apposita guida]], insieme all'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|elenco dei più importanti modelli da aggiungere]].
* '''Aiuta la tua community''' — vedi la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista di modi utili per aiutare la tua community locale]] per ottimizzare l'esperienza di editing con l'editor visuale.
* '''Aiutare i nuovi utenti''' — Se il lancio di VisualEditor avrà successo, ci saranno molti più utenti di quanto non ve ne siano ora e, sebbene effettuare modifiche diverrà più facile, l'interazione con la comunità potrebbe rimanere complesso. Se lo desideri, spendi un po' del tuo tempo nell'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|help desk, o nel canale IRC di aiuto]], per accogliere i nuovi arrivati e aiutarli ad abituarsi a Wikipedia.

== Vedi anche ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>d8ajrvsv1zc4wlqh5harlsx69cw3r09</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403343</id>
      <parentid>5403341</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:41:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7229" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Benvenuta/o nel portale del '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) è una nuova modalità di scrivere in Wikipedia che è stata sviluppata dalla Wikimedia Foundation. Questo permetterà alla gente di editare senza dovere prima apprendere la cosiddetta &quot;formattazione wiki&quot;. Speriamo in questo modo di agevolare le persone nell'editazione.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leggi la '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Segnala un problema''' con VisualEditor].
|-
| Scopri come creare link, aggiungere o spostare immagini, creare citazioni, inserire template, modificare tabelle e altro ancora
|Per favore indica '''il Browser, il sistema operativo e la skin di Wikipedia''' (solitamente Vector, qualche volta Monobook)
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Riguardo al VisualEditor ==

Il VisualEditor è una maniera &quot;visuale&quot; di editare in Wikipedia. Editare in Wikipedia ha richiesto in passato la conoscenza dei marcatori wiki, cioè di un linguaggio piuttosto complesso di formattazione, anche solo per effettuare piccoli cambiamenti ad una pagina. Nel 2001 questo era ancora accettabile, ma nel 2014 questo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|allontana eventuali contributori]]. Speriamo che VisualEditor diventi utile agli editori attuali e che aiuterà anche quelli che verranno. 

Il VisualEditor è stato reso disponibile in una versione opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; su MediaWiki.org fin dalla metà del 2012 e nella Wikipedia inglese a partire dal dicembre 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in più di 14 lingue fin dall' aprile 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ quasi in tutte le altre lingue] fin dall'inizio di giugno 2013. Dal luglio 2015 è stato reso disponibile di default agli utenti registrati e non, su più del 75% delle Wikipedie.
Speriamo di renderlo disponibile sulla maggior parte delle [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|lingue rimanenti]] entro la fine del 2015.
Fin dalla fine del novembre 2014, è disponibile anche come [[Beta Features/it|Funzione Beta]] opzionale su tutte le wiki di WMF, fatta eccezione per Wikizionario e Wikisource.

Stiamo pubblicando una [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|newsletter multilingue]], incentrata sui wiki WMF.

== Usare VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Se siete interessati a utilizzare VisualEditor per l'editing, abbiamo una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guida per farlo]] e un [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|elenco di scorciatoie da tastiera comuni]].

Al momento, VisualEditor è afflitto da un certo numero di bug e limitazioni. Se riscontri un problema [[VisualEditor/Feedback|segnalalo nella pagina di Feedback]]. Le attuali limitazioni comprendono:

* '''Lento da caricare''' — Occorrerà del tempo per caricare le pagine lunghe e complesse con VisualEditor. Prossimamente il software sarà molto più veloce e permetterà anche il caricamento agevole delle pagine più grandi.
* '''Modifica incompleta''' — Alcuni elementi di formattazione &quot;complessa&quot; sono visualizzati e modificabili nei loro contenuti ma non nella loro struttura e nell'introduzione di elementi nuovi - come liste di definizione. Permettere anche queste modifiche è un'altra priorità di sviluppo.
* '''Più per la pagine di contenuto, non per le pagine di discussione''' - VisualEditor è abilitato solo per alcuni namespace.  Nella maggior parte delle Wikipedie, VisualEditor può essere usato per gli articoli, le pagine User:, File:, Help: e Category:.  VisualEditor non è attualmente disponibile per Wikipedia: né pagine contenuto né per le pagine di discussione.

A causa delle limitazioni e degli inevitabili ''bug'', si raccomanda agli utenti di cliccare &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prima di salvare, e di [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferire ogni problema eventualmente riscontrato]].

== Come collaborare? ==

Per sfruttare al meglio le potenzialità del VisualEditor, c'è bisogno di aiuto sotto vari aspetti. Ovviamente, l'aspetto più importante è l'approccio con il nuovo editor, trovare i bug e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|riferirli]], ma non è l'unico:

* '''Aggiornare le pagine di aiuto''' — Tutti i progetti hanno pagine d'aiuto per spiegare ai nuovi utenti come contribuire.  Purtroppo sono tutti costruiti intorno all'editor di markup e, con l'evoluzione di VisualEditor, le schermate e le esercitazioni diventeranno tutte obsolete.  Sarebbe pertanto molto utile se le persone potessero [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|aggiornare le pagine di aiuto]], basandosi sulla [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guida all'impiego di VisualEditor]].
* '''Aggiungere TemplateData ai modelli''' — VisualEditor include un pratico editor di modelli, descritto dettagliatamente nella [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|pagina di aiuto relativa]]. Come si può notare usandolo, alcuni modelli hanno nomi di parametri e descrizioni per facilitarne l'uso, altri no. Questo perchè i modelli necessitano dei &quot;TemplateData&quot; per funzionare al meglio. Se sei interessato ad aggiungere dei TemplateData, è disponibile un'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|apposita guida]], insieme all'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|elenco dei più importanti modelli da aggiungere]].
* '''Aiuta la tua community''' — vedi la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista di modi utili per aiutare la tua community locale]] per ottimizzare l'esperienza di editing con l'editor visuale.
* '''Aiutare i nuovi utenti''' — Se il lancio di VisualEditor avrà successo, ci saranno molti più utenti di quanto non ve ne siano ora e, sebbene effettuare modifiche diverrà più facile, l'interazione con la comunità potrebbe rimanere complesso. Se lo desideri, spendi un po' del tuo tempo nell'[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|help desk, o nel canale IRC di aiuto]], per accogliere i nuovi arrivati e aiutarli ad abituarsi a Wikipedia.

== Vedi anche ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>db7ubi19b248cyrb7uqrl8v9lorgfbg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>137327</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402409</id>
      <parentid>1384947</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:52:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="302" xml:space="preserve">Bienvenido al portal del '''[[$ve|Editor visual]]'''. El Editor visual (VE) es una nueva forma de editar Wikipedia que está siendo desarrollada por la Fundación Wikimedia. Permite a la gente editar sin tener que aprender la sintaxis Wikitexto. Esperamos que anime a la gente a contribuir a Wikipedia.</text>
      <sha1>mg8sdincs3y386u6urlj42ucioc4gcm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/es</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>137328</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402410</id>
      <parentid>5232761</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:52:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7469" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bienvenido al portal del '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor visual]]'''. El Editor visual (VE) es una nueva forma de editar Wikipedia que está siendo desarrollada por la Fundación Wikimedia. Permite a la gente editar sin tener que aprender la sintaxis Wikitexto. Esperamos que anime a la gente a contribuir a Wikipedia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lee '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Reporta un problema''' con el editor visual].
|-
| Descubre cómo crear enlaces, añadir o trasladar imágenes, crear citas, insertar plantillas, editar tablas y más.
|Incluye tu '''navegador web, sistema operativo y apariencia de Wikipedia''' (usualmente Vector, a veces Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Acerca del Editor visual ==

El Editor visual es una manera &quot;visual&quot; de editar Wikipedia. Históricamente, editar Wikipedia requería aprender la sintaxis Wikitexto, un lenguaje de marcas algo complejo, incluso para hacer cambios pequeños a una página. En 2001 esto era aceptable; en 2013 está [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|ahuyentando contribuyentes]]. Esperamos que el Editor visual sea útil para los contribuyentes actuales y más acogedor para los nuevos. 

La versión &quot;alfa&quot; del Editor visual ha estado disponible como una inclusión voluntaria en MediaWiki.org desde mediados de 2012 y en la Wikipedia en inglés desde diciembre de 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ en 14 idiomas adicionales desde abril de 2013], y [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ en casi todos los demás idiomas] desde principios de junio de 2013. A julio de 2015, está disponible por omisión tanto para los editores con sesión iniciada como para los que no, en más del 75% de las Wikipedias.
Esperamos que esté disponible de forma predeterminada para la mayoría de [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|los idiomas restantes]] para fines de 2015.
Desde fines de noviembre 2014, también está disponible como una [[Beta Features|funcionalidad beta]] de inclusión voluntaria en todos los wikis de la WMF excepto Wikcionario y Wikisource.

Publicamos regularmente un [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|boletín multilingüe]], enfocado en las wikis de la WMF.

== Uso del Editor visual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Si estás interesado en utilizar el Editor visual, tenemos una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guía para que lo hagas]], así como una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|lista de atajos de teclado comunes]].

Hasta el momento, el Editor visual tiene algunas fallas; esto es inevitable. Si encuentras algún problema, por favor no dudes en [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportarlo en la página de comentarios]]. También existen algunas áreas en las que seguimos desarrollando nuevas funciones por completo. Las limitaciones actuales incluyen:

* '''Lento para cargar''' — Tomará algún tiempo cargar las páginas complejas en el Editor visual. En el futuro el software será mucho más rápido y permitirá la carga de las páginas más grandes.
* '''Edición incompleta''' — Algunos elementos de formato complejo se mostrarán y permitirán editar su contenido, pero no permitirán a los usuarios editar su estructura o agregar nuevas entradas, como las listas de definición. Adicionar funcionalidades en esta área es una de nuestras prioridades.
* '''La mayoría de páginas de contenido, no de discusión''' — el Editor visual sólo está habilitado para algunos espacios de nombres. En la mayoría de las Wikipedias, el Editor visual puede usarse en páginas de artículos, Usuario:, Archivo:, Ayuda: y Categoría: . Actualmente, el Editor visual no está disponible para las páginas Wikipedia: o de discusión.

Debido a estas limitaciones, y a las fallas inevitables, recomendamos a los usuarios hacer clic en &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antes de guardar la página, y [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportar cualquier problema que encuentren]].

== ¿Cómo puedo ayudar? ==

Para que el Editor visual sea tan bueno como sea posible, hay muchas cosas con las que necesitamos ayuda. Obviamente, un aspecto importante es utilizar el software, encontrar errores y [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportarlos]], pero hay muchas otras tareas también. Estas incluyen:

* '''Actualizar páginas de ayuda''' — Todos nuestros proyectos tienen páginas de ayuda para facilitar la contribución a los nuevos usuarios. Desafortunadamente, todas están hechas sobre el editor de fuente, y mientras el Editor visual evoluciona, las capturas de pantalla y tutoriales quedarán todos desactualizados. Sería muy útil si la gente pudiera [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|actualizar las páginas de ayuda]], en base a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|nuestro tutorial de uso del Editor visual]].
* '''Agregar TemplateData a las plantillas''' —  el Editor visual incluye un práctico editor de plantillas, que se describe más detalladamente en nuestra página de ayuda. Como verás, si lo utilizas en Wikipedia, algunas plantillas tienen nombres de parámetros y descripciones que hacen que sea más fácil utilizarlas. Otras no. Esto debido a que las plantillas necesitan &quot;TemplateData&quot; (información de plantilla) para que esta función funcione bien. si estás interesado en agregar información de plantilla (TempletaData), tenemos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|una guía para hacerlo]], además de una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|lista de las plantillas más importantes para agregar TemplateData]].
* '''Ayuda a tu comunidad''': consulta la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista de formas útiles para ayudar a tu communidad local]] cuando el editor visual se ofrezca como una funcionalidad beta de inclusión voluntaria.
* '''Ayudar a usuarios nuevos''' — Si el lanzamiento del Editor visual es exitoso, tendremos muchos más usuarios nuevos de lo acostumbrado - y a pesar de que la edición puede ser más sencilla, aprender a interactuar con la comunidad va a seguir siendo difícil. Por favor, trata de pasar algún tiempo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|en la mesa de ayuda, o en el canal IRC de ayuda]], para ayudar a los recién llegados a que se acostumbren a Wikipedia.

==Véase también==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - Una guía anterior para las comunidades totalmente nuevas al editor visual.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>78yvsk6nmnfikraecvfimvzb96uq4uv</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403003</id>
      <parentid>5402410</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7509" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bienvenido al portal del '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor visual]]'''. El Editor visual (VE) es una nueva forma de editar Wikipedia que está siendo desarrollada por la Fundación Wikimedia. Permite a la gente editar sin tener que aprender la sintaxis Wikitexto. Esperamos que anime a la gente a contribuir a Wikipedia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lee '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Reporta un problema''' con el editor visual].
|-
| Descubre cómo crear enlaces, añadir o trasladar imágenes, crear citas, insertar plantillas, editar tablas y más.
|Incluye tu '''navegador web, sistema operativo y apariencia de Wikipedia''' (usualmente Vector, a veces Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Acerca del Editor visual ==

El Editor visual es una manera &quot;visual&quot; de editar Wikipedia. Históricamente, editar Wikipedia requería aprender la sintaxis Wikitexto, un lenguaje de marcas algo complejo, incluso para hacer cambios pequeños a una página. En 2001 esto era aceptable; en 2013 está [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|ahuyentando contribuyentes]]. Esperamos que el Editor visual sea útil para los contribuyentes actuales y más acogedor para los nuevos. 

La versión &quot;alfa&quot; del Editor visual ha estado disponible como una inclusión voluntaria en MediaWiki.org desde mediados de 2012 y en la Wikipedia en inglés desde diciembre de 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ en 14 idiomas adicionales desde abril de 2013], y [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ en casi todos los demás idiomas] desde principios de junio de 2013. A julio de 2015, está disponible por omisión tanto para los editores con sesión iniciada como para los que no, en más del 75% de las Wikipedias.
Esperamos que esté disponible de forma predeterminada para la mayoría de [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|los idiomas restantes]] para fines de 2015.
Desde fines de noviembre 2014, también está disponible como una [[Beta Features|funcionalidad beta]] de inclusión voluntaria en todos los wikis de la WMF excepto Wikcionario y Wikisource.

Publicamos regularmente un [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|boletín multilingüe]], enfocado en las wikis de la WMF.

== Uso del Editor visual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Si estás interesado en utilizar el Editor visual, tenemos una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guía para que lo hagas]], así como una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|lista de atajos de teclado comunes]].

Hasta el momento, el Editor visual tiene algunas fallas; esto es inevitable. Si encuentras algún problema, por favor no dudes en [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportarlo en la página de comentarios]]. También existen algunas áreas en las que seguimos desarrollando nuevas funciones por completo. Las limitaciones actuales incluyen:

* '''Lento para cargar''' — Tomará algún tiempo cargar las páginas complejas en el Editor visual. En el futuro el software será mucho más rápido y permitirá la carga de las páginas más grandes.
* '''Edición incompleta''' — Algunos elementos de formato complejo se mostrarán y permitirán editar su contenido, pero no permitirán a los usuarios editar su estructura o agregar nuevas entradas, como las listas de definición. Adicionar funcionalidades en esta área es una de nuestras prioridades.
* '''La mayoría de páginas de contenido, no de discusión''' — el Editor visual sólo está habilitado para algunos espacios de nombres. En la mayoría de las Wikipedias, el Editor visual puede usarse en páginas de artículos, Usuario:, Archivo:, Ayuda: y Categoría: . Actualmente, el Editor visual no está disponible para las páginas Wikipedia: o de discusión.

Debido a estas limitaciones, y a las fallas inevitables, recomendamos a los usuarios hacer clic en &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antes de guardar la página, y [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportar cualquier problema que encuentren]].

== ¿Cómo puedo ayudar? ==

Para que el Editor visual sea tan bueno como sea posible, hay muchas cosas con las que necesitamos ayuda. Obviamente, un aspecto importante es utilizar el software, encontrar errores y [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportarlos]], pero hay muchas otras tareas también. Estas incluyen:

* '''Actualizar páginas de ayuda''' — Todos nuestros proyectos tienen páginas de ayuda para facilitar la contribución a los nuevos usuarios. Desafortunadamente, todas están hechas sobre el editor de fuente, y mientras el Editor visual evoluciona, las capturas de pantalla y tutoriales quedarán todos desactualizados. Sería muy útil si la gente pudiera [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|actualizar las páginas de ayuda]], en base a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|nuestro tutorial de uso del Editor visual]].
* '''Agregar TemplateData a las plantillas''' —  el Editor visual incluye un práctico editor de plantillas, que se describe más detalladamente en nuestra página de ayuda. Como verás, si lo utilizas en Wikipedia, algunas plantillas tienen nombres de parámetros y descripciones que hacen que sea más fácil utilizarlas. Otras no. Esto debido a que las plantillas necesitan &quot;TemplateData&quot; (información de plantilla) para que esta función funcione bien. si estás interesado en agregar información de plantilla (TempletaData), tenemos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|una guía para hacerlo]], además de una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|lista de las plantillas más importantes para agregar TemplateData]].
* '''Ayuda a tu comunidad''': consulta la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista de formas útiles para ayudar a tu communidad local]] cuando el editor visual se ofrezca como una funcionalidad beta de inclusión voluntaria.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Ayudar a usuarios nuevos''' — Si el lanzamiento del Editor visual es exitoso, tendremos muchos más usuarios nuevos de lo acostumbrado - y a pesar de que la edición puede ser más sencilla, aprender a interactuar con la comunidad va a seguir siendo difícil. Por favor, trata de pasar algún tiempo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|en la mesa de ayuda, o en el canal IRC de ayuda]], para ayudar a los recién llegados a que se acostumbren a Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Véase también==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - Una guía anterior para las comunidades totalmente nuevas al editor visual.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>c9kgk053e0gxzn9danu5or1awrxav3h</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403047</id>
      <parentid>5403003</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:00:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7469" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bienvenido al portal del '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor visual]]'''. El Editor visual (VE) es una nueva forma de editar Wikipedia que está siendo desarrollada por la Fundación Wikimedia. Permite a la gente editar sin tener que aprender la sintaxis Wikitexto. Esperamos que anime a la gente a contribuir a Wikipedia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lee '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Reporta un problema''' con el editor visual].
|-
| Descubre cómo crear enlaces, añadir o trasladar imágenes, crear citas, insertar plantillas, editar tablas y más.
|Incluye tu '''navegador web, sistema operativo y apariencia de Wikipedia''' (usualmente Vector, a veces Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Acerca del Editor visual ==

El Editor visual es una manera &quot;visual&quot; de editar Wikipedia. Históricamente, editar Wikipedia requería aprender la sintaxis Wikitexto, un lenguaje de marcas algo complejo, incluso para hacer cambios pequeños a una página. En 2001 esto era aceptable; en 2013 está [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|ahuyentando contribuyentes]]. Esperamos que el Editor visual sea útil para los contribuyentes actuales y más acogedor para los nuevos. 

La versión &quot;alfa&quot; del Editor visual ha estado disponible como una inclusión voluntaria en MediaWiki.org desde mediados de 2012 y en la Wikipedia en inglés desde diciembre de 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ en 14 idiomas adicionales desde abril de 2013], y [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ en casi todos los demás idiomas] desde principios de junio de 2013. A julio de 2015, está disponible por omisión tanto para los editores con sesión iniciada como para los que no, en más del 75% de las Wikipedias.
Esperamos que esté disponible de forma predeterminada para la mayoría de [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|los idiomas restantes]] para fines de 2015.
Desde fines de noviembre 2014, también está disponible como una [[Beta Features|funcionalidad beta]] de inclusión voluntaria en todos los wikis de la WMF excepto Wikcionario y Wikisource.

Publicamos regularmente un [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|boletín multilingüe]], enfocado en las wikis de la WMF.

== Uso del Editor visual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Si estás interesado en utilizar el Editor visual, tenemos una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guía para que lo hagas]], así como una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|lista de atajos de teclado comunes]].

Hasta el momento, el Editor visual tiene algunas fallas; esto es inevitable. Si encuentras algún problema, por favor no dudes en [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportarlo en la página de comentarios]]. También existen algunas áreas en las que seguimos desarrollando nuevas funciones por completo. Las limitaciones actuales incluyen:

* '''Lento para cargar''' — Tomará algún tiempo cargar las páginas complejas en el Editor visual. En el futuro el software será mucho más rápido y permitirá la carga de las páginas más grandes.
* '''Edición incompleta''' — Algunos elementos de formato complejo se mostrarán y permitirán editar su contenido, pero no permitirán a los usuarios editar su estructura o agregar nuevas entradas, como las listas de definición. Adicionar funcionalidades en esta área es una de nuestras prioridades.
* '''La mayoría de páginas de contenido, no de discusión''' — el Editor visual sólo está habilitado para algunos espacios de nombres. En la mayoría de las Wikipedias, el Editor visual puede usarse en páginas de artículos, Usuario:, Archivo:, Ayuda: y Categoría: . Actualmente, el Editor visual no está disponible para las páginas Wikipedia: o de discusión.

Debido a estas limitaciones, y a las fallas inevitables, recomendamos a los usuarios hacer clic en &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antes de guardar la página, y [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportar cualquier problema que encuentren]].

== ¿Cómo puedo ayudar? ==

Para que el Editor visual sea tan bueno como sea posible, hay muchas cosas con las que necesitamos ayuda. Obviamente, un aspecto importante es utilizar el software, encontrar errores y [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportarlos]], pero hay muchas otras tareas también. Estas incluyen:

* '''Actualizar páginas de ayuda''' — Todos nuestros proyectos tienen páginas de ayuda para facilitar la contribución a los nuevos usuarios. Desafortunadamente, todas están hechas sobre el editor de fuente, y mientras el Editor visual evoluciona, las capturas de pantalla y tutoriales quedarán todos desactualizados. Sería muy útil si la gente pudiera [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|actualizar las páginas de ayuda]], en base a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|nuestro tutorial de uso del Editor visual]].
* '''Agregar TemplateData a las plantillas''' —  el Editor visual incluye un práctico editor de plantillas, que se describe más detalladamente en nuestra página de ayuda. Como verás, si lo utilizas en Wikipedia, algunas plantillas tienen nombres de parámetros y descripciones que hacen que sea más fácil utilizarlas. Otras no. Esto debido a que las plantillas necesitan &quot;TemplateData&quot; (información de plantilla) para que esta función funcione bien. si estás interesado en agregar información de plantilla (TempletaData), tenemos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|una guía para hacerlo]], además de una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|lista de las plantillas más importantes para agregar TemplateData]].
* '''Ayuda a tu comunidad''': consulta la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista de formas útiles para ayudar a tu communidad local]] cuando el editor visual se ofrezca como una funcionalidad beta de inclusión voluntaria.
* '''Ayudar a usuarios nuevos''' — Si el lanzamiento del Editor visual es exitoso, tendremos muchos más usuarios nuevos de lo acostumbrado - y a pesar de que la edición puede ser más sencilla, aprender a interactuar con la comunidad va a seguir siendo difícil. Por favor, trata de pasar algún tiempo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|en la mesa de ayuda, o en el canal IRC de ayuda]], para ayudar a los recién llegados a que se acostumbren a Wikipedia.

==Véase también==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - Una guía anterior para las comunidades totalmente nuevas al editor visual.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>78yvsk6nmnfikraecvfimvzb96uq4uv</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403212</id>
      <parentid>5403047</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:51:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7539" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bienvenido al portal del '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor visual]]'''. El Editor visual (VE) es una nueva forma de editar Wikipedia que está siendo desarrollada por la Fundación Wikimedia. Permite a la gente editar sin tener que aprender la sintaxis Wikitexto. Esperamos que anime a la gente a contribuir a Wikipedia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lee '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Reporta un problema''' con el editor visual].
|-
| Descubre cómo crear enlaces, añadir o trasladar imágenes, crear citas, insertar plantillas, editar tablas y más.
|Incluye tu '''navegador web, sistema operativo y apariencia de Wikipedia''' (usualmente Vector, a veces Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Acerca del Editor visual ==

El Editor visual es una manera &quot;visual&quot; de editar Wikipedia. Históricamente, editar Wikipedia requería aprender la sintaxis Wikitexto, un lenguaje de marcas algo complejo, incluso para hacer cambios pequeños a una página. En 2001 esto era aceptable; en 2013 está [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|ahuyentando contribuyentes]]. Esperamos que el Editor visual sea útil para los contribuyentes actuales y más acogedor para los nuevos. 

La versión &quot;alfa&quot; del Editor visual ha estado disponible como una inclusión voluntaria en MediaWiki.org desde mediados de 2012 y en la Wikipedia en inglés desde diciembre de 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ en 14 idiomas adicionales desde abril de 2013], y [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ en casi todos los demás idiomas] desde principios de junio de 2013. A julio de 2015, está disponible por omisión tanto para los editores con sesión iniciada como para los que no, en más del 75% de las Wikipedias.
Esperamos que esté disponible de forma predeterminada para la mayoría de [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|los idiomas restantes]] para fines de 2015.
Desde fines de noviembre 2014, también está disponible como una [[Beta Features|funcionalidad beta]] de inclusión voluntaria en todos los wikis de la WMF excepto Wikcionario y Wikisource.

Publicamos regularmente un [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|boletín multilingüe]], enfocado en las wikis de la WMF.

== Uso del Editor visual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Si estás interesado en utilizar el Editor visual, tenemos una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guía para que lo hagas]], así como una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|lista de atajos de teclado comunes]].

Hasta el momento, el Editor visual tiene algunas fallas; esto es inevitable. Si encuentras algún problema, por favor no dudes en [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportarlo en la página de comentarios]]. También existen algunas áreas en las que seguimos desarrollando nuevas funciones por completo. Las limitaciones actuales incluyen:

* '''Lento para cargar''' — Tomará algún tiempo cargar las páginas complejas en el Editor visual. En el futuro el software será mucho más rápido y permitirá la carga de las páginas más grandes.
* '''Edición incompleta''' — Algunos elementos de formato complejo se mostrarán y permitirán editar su contenido, pero no permitirán a los usuarios editar su estructura o agregar nuevas entradas, como las listas de definición. Adicionar funcionalidades en esta área es una de nuestras prioridades.
* '''La mayoría de páginas de contenido, no de discusión''' — el Editor visual sólo está habilitado para algunos espacios de nombres. En la mayoría de las Wikipedias, el Editor visual puede usarse en páginas de artículos, Usuario:, Archivo:, Ayuda: y Categoría: . Actualmente, el Editor visual no está disponible para las páginas Wikipedia: o de discusión.

Debido a estas limitaciones, y a las fallas inevitables, recomendamos a los usuarios hacer clic en &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antes de guardar la página, y [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportar cualquier problema que encuentren]].

== ¿Cómo puedo ayudar? ==

Para que el Editor visual sea tan bueno como sea posible, hay muchas cosas con las que necesitamos ayuda. Obviamente, un aspecto importante es utilizar el software, encontrar errores y [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportarlos]], pero hay muchas otras tareas también. Estas incluyen:

* '''Actualizar páginas de ayuda''' — Todos nuestros proyectos tienen páginas de ayuda para facilitar la contribución a los nuevos usuarios. Desafortunadamente, todas están hechas sobre el editor de fuente, y mientras el Editor visual evoluciona, las capturas de pantalla y tutoriales quedarán todos desactualizados. Sería muy útil si la gente pudiera [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|actualizar las páginas de ayuda]], en base a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|nuestro tutorial de uso del Editor visual]].
* '''Agregar TemplateData a las plantillas''' —  el Editor visual incluye un práctico editor de plantillas, que se describe más detalladamente en nuestra [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|página de ayuda]]. Como verás, si lo utilizas en Wikipedia, algunas plantillas tienen nombres de parámetros y descripciones que hacen que sea más fácil utilizarlas. Otras no. Esto debido a que las plantillas necesitan &quot;TemplateData&quot; (información de plantilla) para que esta función funcione bien. si estás interesado en agregar información de plantilla (TempletaData), tenemos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|una guía para hacerlo]], además de una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|lista de las plantillas más importantes para agregar TemplateData]].
* '''Ayuda a tu comunidad''': consulta la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista de formas útiles para ayudar a tu communidad local]] cuando el editor visual se ofrezca como una funcionalidad beta de inclusión voluntaria.
* '''Ayudar a usuarios nuevos''' — Si el lanzamiento del Editor visual es exitoso, tendremos muchos más usuarios nuevos de lo acostumbrado - y a pesar de que la edición puede ser más sencilla, aprender a interactuar con la comunidad va a seguir siendo difícil. Por favor, trata de pasar algún tiempo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|en la mesa de ayuda, o en el canal IRC de ayuda]], para ayudar a los recién llegados a que se acostumbren a Wikipedia.

==Véase también==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - Una guía anterior para las comunidades totalmente nuevas al editor visual.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>ae3vk0o4f3tqbzr3t5gbhuup84ov08t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/5/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>137699</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403340</id>
      <parentid>1217901</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:35:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="150" xml:space="preserve">Se siete interessati a utilizzare VisualEditor per l'editing, abbiamo una [[$1|guida per farlo]] e un [[$2|elenco di scorciatoie da tastiera comuni]].</text>
      <sha1>8df8j4jsdqrfzlciuznah9tpoyiwks1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>138668</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403211</id>
      <parentid>1802841</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:51:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="678" xml:space="preserve">* '''Agregar TemplateData a las plantillas''' —  el Editor visual incluye un práctico editor de plantillas, que se describe más detalladamente en nuestra [[$ug|página de ayuda]]. Como verás, si lo utilizas en Wikipedia, algunas plantillas tienen nombres de parámetros y descripciones que hacen que sea más fácil utilizarlas. Otras no. Esto debido a que las plantillas necesitan &quot;TemplateData&quot; (información de plantilla) para que esta función funcione bien. si estás interesado en agregar información de plantilla (TempletaData), tenemos [[$td-tutor|una guía para hacerlo]], además de una [[$td|lista de las plantillas más importantes para agregar TemplateData]].</text>
      <sha1>f9igp4n97kygu7zf4uw849xb01l7wsv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>138670</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403046</id>
      <parentid>1802845</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:00:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="431" xml:space="preserve">* '''Ayudar a usuarios nuevos''' — Si el lanzamiento del Editor visual es exitoso, tendremos muchos más usuarios nuevos de lo acostumbrado - y a pesar de que la edición puede ser más sencilla, aprender a interactuar con la comunidad va a seguir siendo difícil. Por favor, trata de pasar algún tiempo [[$1|en la mesa de ayuda, o en el canal IRC de ayuda]], para ayudar a los recién llegados a que se acostumbren a Wikipedia.</text>
      <sha1>9bxp9beoxdzmo3lev13amo1103d4g35</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/ru</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>138846</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403022</id>
      <parentid>5159164</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12084" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Добро пожаловать на портал '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Визуального редактора]]''' (''VisualEditor, VE'') — нового инструмента для редактирования Википедии, разработанного Фондом Викимедиа (Wikimedia Foundation). Он позволяет людям работать со страницами без изучения довольно сложного языка вики-разметки. Мы надеемся, что это поможет людям внести свой вклад в Википедию.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Прочтите '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Сообщите о проблеме''' с Визуальным редактором].
|-
| Узнайте, как делать ссылки, добавлять или перемещать изображения, создавать цитаты, вставлять шаблоны, редактировать таблицы, и многое другое.
|Пожалуйста, укажите свой '''веб-браузер, операционную систему компьютера, и тему оформления в Википедии''' (обычно Векторная, иногда MonoBook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== О Визуальном редакторе ==

Визуальный редактор является «визуальным» инструментом редактирования Википедии. Редактирование Википедии исторически требовало, чтобы люди изучили язык вики-разметки, довольно сложной, даже чтобы сделать крошечные изменения на странице. В 2001 году, это было приемлемо; в 2015 году [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|это стало отпугивать людей]]. Мы надеемся, что Визуальный редактор будет полезным для существующих участников и станет более привлекательным для новых участников. 

Визуальный редактор доступен как опция в «Альфа» релизе на MediaWiki.org с середины 2012 года и на англоязычной Википедии с декабря 2012 года, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ в более 14 языках с апреля 2013], и [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ почти всех других языках] с начала июня 2013 года. По состоянию на июль 2015 года, он доступен по умолчанию для вошедших и не вошедших в систему пользователей в более 75% Википедий.
Мы планируем сделать его доступным по умолчанию в большинстве [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|остальных языковых разделов]] в конце 2015.
С конца ноября 2014 он также доступен как опциональная [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Бета-функция]] во всех вики-проектах Фонда Викимедиа, кроме Викисловаря и Викитеки.

Мы выпускаем [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|многоязычную рассылку писем]], ориентированнуб на вики-проекты Фонда «Викимедиа».

== Использование Визуального редактора ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Если вы заинтересовались использованием Визуального редактора, у нас есть по нему [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|руководство]], а также [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|список «быстрых» клавиш]].

На данный момент в Визуальном редакторе имеются некоторые «баги» и ограничения. Если при его использовании вы столкнулись с проблемой, пожалуйста, [[VisualEditor/Feedback|оставьте отзыв на соответствующей странице]]. К текущим ограничениям относятся:

* '''Медленная загрузка''' — большие и сложные в плане разметки страницы загружаются в Визуальном редакторе в течение длительного времени. В будущем программное обеспечение будет улучшено, что позволит загружать большие страницы быстрее.
* '''Урезанные возможности''' — некоторые элементы ''сложного'' форматирования отображаются, и имеется возможность вносить изменения в их содержимое. Однако изменение структуры или добавление новых элементов в таких структурах, как списки определений, для участников пока недоступны. Добавление соответствующих возможностей является одной из наших приоритетных задач.
* '''Бо́льшая часть страницы с содержимым, но без страниц обсуждения''' — Визуальный редактор доступен только для некоторых пространств имён. В большинстве Википедий Визуальный редактор может быть использован на страницах статьей, а также в пространствах «Участник:», «Файл:», «Справка:» и «Категория:». Визуальный редактор в настоящее время недоступен для пространства «Википедия:» и любых страниц обсуждения.

Из-за перечисленных ограничений и неизбежных «багов» мы рекомендуем пользоваться функцией «{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}» перед их сохранением и [[VisualEditor/Feedback|сообщать о возникающих проблемах]].

== Чем помочь ==

Для максимальной оптимизации Визуального редактора нам требуется самая разнообразная помощь. Хотя самой очевидной помощью будет непосредственное использование Визуального редактора и [[VisualEditor/Feedback|сообщения об обнаруженных проблемах]], есть и другие способы оказать поддержку. К ним относятся:

* '''Обновление руководств''' — все разделы содержат страницы с руководствами по тому, как облегчить редактирование для новых участников. К сожалению, на данный момент они ориентированы на редактор вики-разметки, и с развитием Визуального редактора, скриншоты и руководства потеряют свою актуальность. Своевременное [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|обновление соответствующего руководства]] на основе [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|руководства по использованию Визуального редактора]] является крайне востребованным.
* '''Добавление TemplateData в шаблоны''' — В Визуальном редакторе есть удобный редактор шаблонов, который описан более подробно на нашей [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|странице справки]]. Как вы сможете увидеть, если используете его в Википедии, некоторые шаблоны имеют именованные параметры и хорошие описания, которые делают их простыми в использовании. А другие — нет. Это потому, что шаблонам нужно использование «TemplateData», чтоб эта функция заработала. Если вы заинтересованы в добавлении TemplateData, у нас есть [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|руководство о том, как это сделать]], а также [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|список наиболее важных шаблонов, чтобы добавить его]].
* '''Помощь сообществу''' — Ознакомьтесь со [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|списком полезных способов помочь вашему местному сообществу]], чтобы оптимизировать процесс редактирования с помощью визуального редактора.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Помощь новым участникам''' — если внедрение Визуального редактора окажется успешным, появится гораздо больше новых участников, чем обычно — и даже если редактирование станет проще, общение с сообществом на ознакомительном этапе всё равно останется затруднительным. Пожалуйста, уделите некоторое время обработке [[$new-users|запросов о помощи, или на IRC-канале помощи]] для того, чтобы облегчить новым участникам процесс ознакомления с устройством Википедии.
&lt;/div&gt;

== См. также ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - контрольный список по оптимизации редактирования вашей вики и ваших редакторов-коллег.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - получить и предложить помощь, связанной с работой Визуального редактора от и до участников-Викимедистов, как вы.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - бывшее руководство для сообществ совершенно нового Визуального редактора

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>pwpf6d7izle2auzeu7oxtxdfuf0mb5m</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/sv</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>138993</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403027</id>
      <parentid>4983788</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7250" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Välkommen till portalen för '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]''' (VE), ett nytt sätta att redigera artiklar på WikiPedia som är under utveckling av Wikimediastiftelsen. Det låter användare redigera artiklar utan att behöva lära sig wikitext. Vi hoppas att det kommer att hjälpa folk att bidra till Wikipedia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Läs '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Anmäl ett problem''' med VisualEditor].
|-
| Lär dig hur man gör länkar, lägger till eller flyttar bilder, skapar referenser och fotnoter, infogar mallar, redigerar tabeller och mer.
|Var god inkludera din '''webbläsare, operativsystem och Wikipediaskinn''' (vanligtvis Vector, ibland Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Om VisualEditor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor är ett visuellt sätt att redigera Wikipedia som låter folk bidra utan att behöva lära sig wikisyntax. Den har varit tillgänglig som en valbar &quot;alfa&quot;-version på engelska Wikipedia sedan december 2012 och [$blog-april  på 16 andra språk] sedan april 2013 och på [$blog-june  nästan alla andra språkversioner] sedan början av juni. Som [[#Tidtabell|förklaras nedan]] kommer den att vara standard på nästan alla språkversioner i slutet av juli, med början med engelska Wikipedia 1 juli.
&lt;/div&gt; 

VisualEditor har funnits som en opt-in &quot;alfarelease&quot; på MediaWiki.org sedan mitten på 2012, på engelskspråkiga Wikipedia sedan december 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ ytterligare 14 språk sedan april 2013] och [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ nästan alla språk] sedan början av juni 2013. Sedan juli 2015 är det tillgängligt som standardval för både inloggade och ej inloggade skribenter på mer än 75% av Wikipediasajter.
Vi räknar med att kunna göra det tillgängligt som standardval för de flesta av [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|de kvarvarande språken]] sent i 2015.
Det finns även sedan sent i november 2014 tillgängligt som opt-in [[Beta Features|Beta Feature]] för alla wikis i WMF, förutom Wiktionary och Wikisource.

Vi släpper ett [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|flerspråkigt nyhetsbrev]], fokuserat på WMF-wikier.

== Använda VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

För tillfället har VisualEditor en del buggar; detta är ofrånkomligt. Om du upptäcker något fel, tveka inte att [[VisualEditor/Feedback|rapportera det på återkopplingssidan (på engelska)]]. Det finns också några ställen där vi fortfarande behöver bygga helt ny funktionalitet. För närvarande finns följande begränsningar:

* '''Långsam start''' — Det tar en stund för stora och komplexa sidor att ladda i VisualEditor. Framöver kommer programvaran att vara mycket snabbare och kommer att kunna hantera större sidor.
* '''Ofullständig redigering''' — Vissa objekt med &quot;komplexa&quot; formateringsmöjligheter kommer att visas och låta dig redigera innehållet men inte låta användare ändra dess struktur eller skapa nya enheter – som till exempel definitionslistor. Att lägga till funktioner i dessa områden är en av våra prioriteter.
* '''De flesta innehållssidor, ej diskussionssidor''' — VisualEditor är endast aktiverat för vissa namnrymder. På det flesta Wikipedias kan VisualEditor användas på artiklar, Användare:-, Fil:-, Hjälp:- och Kategori:-sidor. VisualEditor är för närvarande inte tillgängligt på Wikipedia:- eller Diskussion:-sidor.

På grund av dessa begränsningar och oundvikliga buggar rekommenderar vi att användare klickar på &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; innan man sparar sidan och att [[VisualEditor/Feedback|rapportera alla problem som upptäcks (på engelska).]]

== Hjälpa till ==

För att VisualEditor ska bli så bra som den kan bli finns det en hel del som vi behöver hjälp med. Givetvis är ett stort område att hitta buggar och [[VisualEditor/Återkoppling|rapportera dem]], men det finns många andra uppgifter också. Dessa inkluderar:

* '''Uppdatera hjälpsidor''' — Alla projekt har hjälpsidor för att göra det lättare för nybörjare att bidra. Tyvärr är de alla uppbyggda kring den gamla uppmärkningseditorn, och när VisualEditor utvecklas kommer skärmbilderna och guiderna bli förlegade. Det vore bra om folk kunde [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|uppdatera hjälpsidorna]] baserat på vår [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|vår guide på hur man använder VisualEditor]].
* '''Lägg till TemplateData till mallar''' — VisualEditor har en trevlig malleditor som beskrivs noggrannare i [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|användarguiden]]. Som du har märkt om du använder den på Wikipedia har en del mallar namngivna parametrar och bra beskrivningar som gör den lätt att använda. Andra har det inte. Detta beror på att mallarna behöver &quot;TempalteData&quot; innan funktionen fungerar. Om du vill hjälpa till med att lägga till TemplateData har vi gjort [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|en guide]] för hur man gör det tillsammans med [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|en lista över de viktigaste mallarna]] att lägga till det till.
* '''Hjälp din gemenskap''' — Se [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|listan över bra sätt att hjälpa din lokala gemenskap]]  för att optimera redigeringsupplevelsen med den visuella redigeraren.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Hjälp nya användare''' — Om VisualEditor-lanseringen blir lycksoam kommer vi ha många fler nya användare än vad vi är vana vid - och även om det är lättare att redigera så är det fortfarande svårt att lista ut hur gemenskapen fungerar. Försök gärna att lägga lite tid [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|i hjälpdisken eller IRC]] på att få dessa nya användare acklimatiserade till Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Se även ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - en checklista för att optimera redigeringsupplevelsen för din wiki och dina redaktörer.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - få hjälp och hjälp andra med saker som rör visualredigeraren med andra Wikimedianer som du.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - en tidigare guide för gemenskaper som är helt nya inför visualredigeraren.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>tefkkpwsfzc2xgfv6rbsrl739q1xmns</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403190</id>
      <parentid>5403027</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:43:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7210" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Välkommen till portalen för '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]''' (VE), ett nytt sätta att redigera artiklar på WikiPedia som är under utveckling av Wikimediastiftelsen. Det låter användare redigera artiklar utan att behöva lära sig wikitext. Vi hoppas att det kommer att hjälpa folk att bidra till Wikipedia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Läs '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Anmäl ett problem''' med VisualEditor].
|-
| Lär dig hur man gör länkar, lägger till eller flyttar bilder, skapar referenser och fotnoter, infogar mallar, redigerar tabeller och mer.
|Var god inkludera din '''webbläsare, operativsystem och Wikipediaskinn''' (vanligtvis Vector, ibland Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Om VisualEditor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor är ett visuellt sätt att redigera Wikipedia som låter folk bidra utan att behöva lära sig wikisyntax. Den har varit tillgänglig som en valbar &quot;alfa&quot;-version på engelska Wikipedia sedan december 2012 och [$blog-april  på 16 andra språk] sedan april 2013 och på [$blog-june  nästan alla andra språkversioner] sedan början av juni. Som [[#Tidtabell|förklaras nedan]] kommer den att vara standard på nästan alla språkversioner i slutet av juli, med början med engelska Wikipedia 1 juli.
&lt;/div&gt; 

VisualEditor har funnits som en opt-in &quot;alfarelease&quot; på MediaWiki.org sedan mitten på 2012, på engelskspråkiga Wikipedia sedan december 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ ytterligare 14 språk sedan april 2013] och [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ nästan alla språk] sedan början av juni 2013. Sedan juli 2015 är det tillgängligt som standardval för både inloggade och ej inloggade skribenter på mer än 75% av Wikipediasajter.
Vi räknar med att kunna göra det tillgängligt som standardval för de flesta av [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|de kvarvarande språken]] sent i 2015.
Det finns även sedan sent i november 2014 tillgängligt som opt-in [[Beta Features|Beta Feature]] för alla wikis i WMF, förutom Wiktionary och Wikisource.

Vi släpper ett [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|flerspråkigt nyhetsbrev]], fokuserat på WMF-wikier.

== Använda VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

För tillfället har VisualEditor en del buggar; detta är ofrånkomligt. Om du upptäcker något fel, tveka inte att [[VisualEditor/Feedback|rapportera det på återkopplingssidan (på engelska)]]. Det finns också några ställen där vi fortfarande behöver bygga helt ny funktionalitet. För närvarande finns följande begränsningar:

* '''Långsam start''' — Det tar en stund för stora och komplexa sidor att ladda i VisualEditor. Framöver kommer programvaran att vara mycket snabbare och kommer att kunna hantera större sidor.
* '''Ofullständig redigering''' — Vissa objekt med &quot;komplexa&quot; formateringsmöjligheter kommer att visas och låta dig redigera innehållet men inte låta användare ändra dess struktur eller skapa nya enheter – som till exempel definitionslistor. Att lägga till funktioner i dessa områden är en av våra prioriteter.
* '''De flesta innehållssidor, ej diskussionssidor''' — VisualEditor är endast aktiverat för vissa namnrymder. På det flesta Wikipedias kan VisualEditor användas på artiklar, Användare:-, Fil:-, Hjälp:- och Kategori:-sidor. VisualEditor är för närvarande inte tillgängligt på Wikipedia:- eller Diskussion:-sidor.

På grund av dessa begränsningar och oundvikliga buggar rekommenderar vi att användare klickar på &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; innan man sparar sidan och att [[VisualEditor/Feedback|rapportera alla problem som upptäcks (på engelska).]]

== Hjälpa till ==

För att VisualEditor ska bli så bra som den kan bli finns det en hel del som vi behöver hjälp med. Givetvis är ett stort område att hitta buggar och [[VisualEditor/Återkoppling|rapportera dem]], men det finns många andra uppgifter också. Dessa inkluderar:

* '''Uppdatera hjälpsidor''' — Alla projekt har hjälpsidor för att göra det lättare för nybörjare att bidra. Tyvärr är de alla uppbyggda kring den gamla uppmärkningseditorn, och när VisualEditor utvecklas kommer skärmbilderna och guiderna bli förlegade. Det vore bra om folk kunde [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|uppdatera hjälpsidorna]] baserat på vår [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|vår guide på hur man använder VisualEditor]].
* '''Lägg till TemplateData till mallar''' — VisualEditor har en trevlig malleditor som beskrivs noggrannare i [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|användarguiden]]. Som du har märkt om du använder den på Wikipedia har en del mallar namngivna parametrar och bra beskrivningar som gör den lätt att använda. Andra har det inte. Detta beror på att mallarna behöver &quot;TempalteData&quot; innan funktionen fungerar. Om du vill hjälpa till med att lägga till TemplateData har vi gjort [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|en guide]] för hur man gör det tillsammans med [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|en lista över de viktigaste mallarna]] att lägga till det till.
* '''Hjälp din gemenskap''' — Se [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|listan över bra sätt att hjälpa din lokala gemenskap]]  för att optimera redigeringsupplevelsen med den visuella redigeraren.
* '''Hjälp nya användare''' — Om VisualEditor-lanseringen blir lycksoam kommer vi ha många fler nya användare än vad vi är vana vid - och även om det är lättare att redigera så är det fortfarande svårt att lista ut hur gemenskapen fungerar. Försök gärna att lägga lite tid [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|i hjälpdisken eller IRC]] på att få dessa nya användare acklimatiserade till Wikipedia.

== Se även ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - en checklista för att optimera redigeringsupplevelsen för din wiki och dina redaktörer.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - få hjälp och hjälp andra med saker som rör visualredigeraren med andra Wikimedianer som du.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - en tidigare guide för gemenskaper som är helt nya inför visualredigeraren.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>1yzyvvuu7sytcbdqw0nlygccw7v3ko8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/sv</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>139032</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403189</id>
      <parentid>1803523</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:43:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="387" xml:space="preserve">* '''Hjälp nya användare''' — Om VisualEditor-lanseringen blir lycksoam kommer vi ha många fler nya användare än vad vi är vana vid - och även om det är lättare att redigera så är det fortfarande svårt att lista ut hur gemenskapen fungerar. Försök gärna att lägga lite tid [[$1|i hjälpdisken eller IRC]] på att få dessa nya användare acklimatiserade till Wikipedia.</text>
      <sha1>duce8q1og8ydml0hi5bchc39wvqdiz4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/id</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>139182</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402430</id>
      <parentid>4985102</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:01:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7444" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Selamat datang di portal '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) adalah sebuah cara baru dalam menyunting Wikipedia yang sedang dikembangkan oleh Wikimedia Foundation. VisualEditor memperbolehkan seseorang untuk menyunting tanpa harus mempelajari markah wiki. Kami berharap VisualEditor akan membantu orang-orang dalam berkontribusi di Wikipedia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Baca '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Laporkan masalah''' dari VisualEditor].
|-
| Cari tahu lebih lanjut bagaimana membuat pranala, menambahkan atau memindahkan gambar, membuat kutipan, memasukkan templat, menyunting tabel, dan lain-lain.
|Mohon masukkan juga informasi '''peramban web, sistem operasi komputer, dan kulit Wikipedia''' (biasanya Vector, terkadang Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tentang VisualEditor ==

VisualEditor adalah sebuah cara &quot;visual&quot; dalam menyunting Wikipedia. Menyunting Wikipedia dahulunya memerlukan seseorang untuk memahami markah wiki, sebuah bahasa markah yang cukup rumit, bahkan untuk membuat perbaikan kecil pada sebuah artikel sekali pun. Pada tahun 2001, cara ini masih dapat diterima; pada tahun 2014, cara ini [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|membuat para kontributor meninggalkan Wikipedia]]. Kami berharap VisualEditor akan berguna bagi kontributor yang sudah ada dan lebih menyambut kontributor baru. 

VisualEditor telah tersedia sebagai sebuah pilihan peluncuran &quot;alpha&quot; di MediaWiki.org sejak tengah 2015 dan di Wikipedia bahasa Inggris sejak Desember 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ pada 14 bahasa lainnya sejak April 2013], dan [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ hampir pada seluruh bahasa lainnya] sejak awal Juni 2013. Per Juli 2015, alat ini telah tersedia secara baku bagi penyunting yang sudah masuk log maupun yang belum pada lebih dari 75% dari seluruh Wikipedia yang ada.
Kami menargetkan membuatnya tersedia ke hampir [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|semua bahasa lainnya]] pada akhir 2015.
Sejak akhir November 2014, alat ini telah tersedia sebagai [[Beta Features|fitur beta]] di semua wiki WMF kecuali Wiktionary dan Wikisource.

Kami mengeluarkan [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|surat kabar multibahasa]], berfokus pada wiki WMF.

== Menggunakan VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Jika Anda tertarik untuk menggunakan VisualEditor untuk menyunting, kami memiliki [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|panduan untuk menggunakannya]], dan juga [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|daftar pintasan papan tombol yang umum]].

Saat ini, VisualEditor memiliki beberapa kekutu; hal ini tidak dapat dihindari. Jika Anda menemui masalah, jangan ragu untuk [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkannya di halaman Umpan balik]]. Ada juga beberapa area di mana kami masih harus mengembangkan fitur-fitur baru. Keterbatasan yang ada saat ini antara lain:

* '''Lama dalam memuat''' — Memerlukan waktu cukup lama bagi sebuah halaman yang panjang dan rumit untuk dapat dimuat ke dalam VisualEditor. Ke depannya peranti lunak ini akan menjadi lebih cepat dan memperbolehkan pemuatan halaman yang lebih panjang.
* '''Penyuntingan yang tidak lengkap''' — Beberapa unsur pemformatan &quot;rumit&quot; akan ditampilkan dan dapat Anda sunting isinya, namun tidak dapat Anda ubah strukturnya maupun tambahkan entri barunya – seperti pada daftar definsi. Penambahan fitur di area ini adalah salah satu prioritas kami.
* '''Hanya untuk halaman Artikel dan Pengguna''' — VisualEditor hanya akan diaktifkan untuk beberapa ruang nama. Pada sebagian besar Wikipedia, VisualEditor dapat digunakan pada halaman artikel, User:, File:, Help: dan Category:. VisualEditor pada saat ini tidak dapat digunakan pada halaman maupun halaman pembicaraan.

Akibat keterbatasan ini, dan kekutu yang tidak dapat dihindari, kami menyarankan agar pengguna mengeklik &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; sebelum menyimpan halaman, dan [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkan segala masalah yang dihadapi]].

== Bagaimana cara membantu ==

Agar VisualEditor dapat menjadi sebagus mungkin, kami memerlukan bantuan Anda dalam beberapa hal. Tentunya, satu area terbesar adalah dengan menggunakan peranti lunaknya, menemukan kekutu, dan [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkannya]], namun ada banyak tugas lainnya juga. Tugas-tugas ini antara lain:

* '''Memutakhirkan halaman bantuan''' — Semua proyek kami memiliki halaman bantuan yang dapat mempermudah pengguna baru untuk berkontribusi. Sayangnya mereka semua sibuk mengembangkan penyunting markahnya, dan saat VisualEditor terus berkembang, cuplikan layar dan tutorial tersebut akan menjadi usang. Akan sangat berguna jika ada yang dapat [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|memutakhirkan halaman bantuan]], berdasarkan [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|tutorial kami untuk menggunakan VisualEditor]].
* '''Menambahkan DataTemplat di templat''' — VisualEditor menyertakan penyunting templat yang cantik, seperti yang dijelaskan lebih rinci di [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|halaman bantuan]] kami. Seperti yang Anda lihat saat menggunakan templat di Wikipedia, beberapa templat memiliki parameter bernama dan penjelasan yang bagus yang mempermudah penggunaannya. Namun ada beberapa templat yang tidak memilikinya. Ini karena templat memerlukan &quot;DataTemplat&quot; agar fitur ini dapat berfungsi. Jika Anda tertarik dalam menambahkan DataTemplat, kami memiliki [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|panduan untuk melakukannya]], berserta [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|daftar templat paling penting untuk ditambahkan DataTemplatnya]].
* '''Bantulah komunitas Anda''' — Lihat [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|cara-cara berguna untuk membantu komunitas lokal Anda]] untuk mengoptimalkan pengalaman menyunting dengan VisualEditor.
* '''Membantu pengguna baru''' — Jika peluncuran VisualEditor berhasil, kita akan memiliki lebih banyak pengguna baru dari jumlah yang kita miliki biasanya, dan meskipun penyuntingan mungkin menjadi lebih mudah, mencari tahu cara untuk berinteraksi dengan komunitas tetaplah sulit. Silakan luangkan lebih banyak waktu [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|di meja bantuan, atau di saluran bantuan IRC]], untuk membantu para pendatang baru ini menjadi terbiasa dengan Wikipedia.

== Lihat pula ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - Sebuah daftar tentang optimalisasi pengalaman menyunting wiki anda dan sesama penyunting.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - dapatkan dan tawarkan bantuan untuk pekerjaan terkait VisualEditor dari dan kepada Wikimedian lainnya seperti Anda.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - sebuah panduan dahulu untuk komunitas baru kepada VisualEditor

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>pra8g8nzj4hcf8emsbbcvhqnjfmaoag</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403012</id>
      <parentid>5402430</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7484" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Selamat datang di portal '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) adalah sebuah cara baru dalam menyunting Wikipedia yang sedang dikembangkan oleh Wikimedia Foundation. VisualEditor memperbolehkan seseorang untuk menyunting tanpa harus mempelajari markah wiki. Kami berharap VisualEditor akan membantu orang-orang dalam berkontribusi di Wikipedia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Baca '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Laporkan masalah''' dari VisualEditor].
|-
| Cari tahu lebih lanjut bagaimana membuat pranala, menambahkan atau memindahkan gambar, membuat kutipan, memasukkan templat, menyunting tabel, dan lain-lain.
|Mohon masukkan juga informasi '''peramban web, sistem operasi komputer, dan kulit Wikipedia''' (biasanya Vector, terkadang Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tentang VisualEditor ==

VisualEditor adalah sebuah cara &quot;visual&quot; dalam menyunting Wikipedia. Menyunting Wikipedia dahulunya memerlukan seseorang untuk memahami markah wiki, sebuah bahasa markah yang cukup rumit, bahkan untuk membuat perbaikan kecil pada sebuah artikel sekali pun. Pada tahun 2001, cara ini masih dapat diterima; pada tahun 2014, cara ini [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|membuat para kontributor meninggalkan Wikipedia]]. Kami berharap VisualEditor akan berguna bagi kontributor yang sudah ada dan lebih menyambut kontributor baru. 

VisualEditor telah tersedia sebagai sebuah pilihan peluncuran &quot;alpha&quot; di MediaWiki.org sejak tengah 2015 dan di Wikipedia bahasa Inggris sejak Desember 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ pada 14 bahasa lainnya sejak April 2013], dan [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ hampir pada seluruh bahasa lainnya] sejak awal Juni 2013. Per Juli 2015, alat ini telah tersedia secara baku bagi penyunting yang sudah masuk log maupun yang belum pada lebih dari 75% dari seluruh Wikipedia yang ada.
Kami menargetkan membuatnya tersedia ke hampir [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|semua bahasa lainnya]] pada akhir 2015.
Sejak akhir November 2014, alat ini telah tersedia sebagai [[Beta Features|fitur beta]] di semua wiki WMF kecuali Wiktionary dan Wikisource.

Kami mengeluarkan [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|surat kabar multibahasa]], berfokus pada wiki WMF.

== Menggunakan VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Jika Anda tertarik untuk menggunakan VisualEditor untuk menyunting, kami memiliki [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|panduan untuk menggunakannya]], dan juga [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|daftar pintasan papan tombol yang umum]].

Saat ini, VisualEditor memiliki beberapa kekutu; hal ini tidak dapat dihindari. Jika Anda menemui masalah, jangan ragu untuk [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkannya di halaman Umpan balik]]. Ada juga beberapa area di mana kami masih harus mengembangkan fitur-fitur baru. Keterbatasan yang ada saat ini antara lain:

* '''Lama dalam memuat''' — Memerlukan waktu cukup lama bagi sebuah halaman yang panjang dan rumit untuk dapat dimuat ke dalam VisualEditor. Ke depannya peranti lunak ini akan menjadi lebih cepat dan memperbolehkan pemuatan halaman yang lebih panjang.
* '''Penyuntingan yang tidak lengkap''' — Beberapa unsur pemformatan &quot;rumit&quot; akan ditampilkan dan dapat Anda sunting isinya, namun tidak dapat Anda ubah strukturnya maupun tambahkan entri barunya – seperti pada daftar definsi. Penambahan fitur di area ini adalah salah satu prioritas kami.
* '''Hanya untuk halaman Artikel dan Pengguna''' — VisualEditor hanya akan diaktifkan untuk beberapa ruang nama. Pada sebagian besar Wikipedia, VisualEditor dapat digunakan pada halaman artikel, User:, File:, Help: dan Category:. VisualEditor pada saat ini tidak dapat digunakan pada halaman maupun halaman pembicaraan.

Akibat keterbatasan ini, dan kekutu yang tidak dapat dihindari, kami menyarankan agar pengguna mengeklik &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; sebelum menyimpan halaman, dan [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkan segala masalah yang dihadapi]].

== Bagaimana cara membantu ==

Agar VisualEditor dapat menjadi sebagus mungkin, kami memerlukan bantuan Anda dalam beberapa hal. Tentunya, satu area terbesar adalah dengan menggunakan peranti lunaknya, menemukan kekutu, dan [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkannya]], namun ada banyak tugas lainnya juga. Tugas-tugas ini antara lain:

* '''Memutakhirkan halaman bantuan''' — Semua proyek kami memiliki halaman bantuan yang dapat mempermudah pengguna baru untuk berkontribusi. Sayangnya mereka semua sibuk mengembangkan penyunting markahnya, dan saat VisualEditor terus berkembang, cuplikan layar dan tutorial tersebut akan menjadi usang. Akan sangat berguna jika ada yang dapat [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|memutakhirkan halaman bantuan]], berdasarkan [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|tutorial kami untuk menggunakan VisualEditor]].
* '''Menambahkan DataTemplat di templat''' — VisualEditor menyertakan penyunting templat yang cantik, seperti yang dijelaskan lebih rinci di [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|halaman bantuan]] kami. Seperti yang Anda lihat saat menggunakan templat di Wikipedia, beberapa templat memiliki parameter bernama dan penjelasan yang bagus yang mempermudah penggunaannya. Namun ada beberapa templat yang tidak memilikinya. Ini karena templat memerlukan &quot;DataTemplat&quot; agar fitur ini dapat berfungsi. Jika Anda tertarik dalam menambahkan DataTemplat, kami memiliki [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|panduan untuk melakukannya]], berserta [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|daftar templat paling penting untuk ditambahkan DataTemplatnya]].
* '''Bantulah komunitas Anda''' — Lihat [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|cara-cara berguna untuk membantu komunitas lokal Anda]] untuk mengoptimalkan pengalaman menyunting dengan VisualEditor.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Membantu pengguna baru''' — Jika peluncuran VisualEditor berhasil, kita akan memiliki lebih banyak pengguna baru dari jumlah yang kita miliki biasanya, dan meskipun penyuntingan mungkin menjadi lebih mudah, mencari tahu cara untuk berinteraksi dengan komunitas tetaplah sulit. Silakan luangkan lebih banyak waktu [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|di meja bantuan, atau di saluran bantuan IRC]], untuk membantu para pendatang baru ini menjadi terbiasa dengan Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Lihat pula ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - Sebuah daftar tentang optimalisasi pengalaman menyunting wiki anda dan sesama penyunting.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - dapatkan dan tawarkan bantuan untuk pekerjaan terkait VisualEditor dari dan kepada Wikimedian lainnya seperti Anda.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - sebuah panduan dahulu untuk komunitas baru kepada VisualEditor

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>9xigqgmm5g9p54vu0dlwzotl7ecj7bm</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403166</id>
      <parentid>5403012</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:40:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7444" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Selamat datang di portal '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) adalah sebuah cara baru dalam menyunting Wikipedia yang sedang dikembangkan oleh Wikimedia Foundation. VisualEditor memperbolehkan seseorang untuk menyunting tanpa harus mempelajari markah wiki. Kami berharap VisualEditor akan membantu orang-orang dalam berkontribusi di Wikipedia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Baca '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Laporkan masalah''' dari VisualEditor].
|-
| Cari tahu lebih lanjut bagaimana membuat pranala, menambahkan atau memindahkan gambar, membuat kutipan, memasukkan templat, menyunting tabel, dan lain-lain.
|Mohon masukkan juga informasi '''peramban web, sistem operasi komputer, dan kulit Wikipedia''' (biasanya Vector, terkadang Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tentang VisualEditor ==

VisualEditor adalah sebuah cara &quot;visual&quot; dalam menyunting Wikipedia. Menyunting Wikipedia dahulunya memerlukan seseorang untuk memahami markah wiki, sebuah bahasa markah yang cukup rumit, bahkan untuk membuat perbaikan kecil pada sebuah artikel sekali pun. Pada tahun 2001, cara ini masih dapat diterima; pada tahun 2014, cara ini [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|membuat para kontributor meninggalkan Wikipedia]]. Kami berharap VisualEditor akan berguna bagi kontributor yang sudah ada dan lebih menyambut kontributor baru. 

VisualEditor telah tersedia sebagai sebuah pilihan peluncuran &quot;alpha&quot; di MediaWiki.org sejak tengah 2015 dan di Wikipedia bahasa Inggris sejak Desember 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ pada 14 bahasa lainnya sejak April 2013], dan [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ hampir pada seluruh bahasa lainnya] sejak awal Juni 2013. Per Juli 2015, alat ini telah tersedia secara baku bagi penyunting yang sudah masuk log maupun yang belum pada lebih dari 75% dari seluruh Wikipedia yang ada.
Kami menargetkan membuatnya tersedia ke hampir [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|semua bahasa lainnya]] pada akhir 2015.
Sejak akhir November 2014, alat ini telah tersedia sebagai [[Beta Features|fitur beta]] di semua wiki WMF kecuali Wiktionary dan Wikisource.

Kami mengeluarkan [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|surat kabar multibahasa]], berfokus pada wiki WMF.

== Menggunakan VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Jika Anda tertarik untuk menggunakan VisualEditor untuk menyunting, kami memiliki [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|panduan untuk menggunakannya]], dan juga [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|daftar pintasan papan tombol yang umum]].

Saat ini, VisualEditor memiliki beberapa kekutu; hal ini tidak dapat dihindari. Jika Anda menemui masalah, jangan ragu untuk [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkannya di halaman Umpan balik]]. Ada juga beberapa area di mana kami masih harus mengembangkan fitur-fitur baru. Keterbatasan yang ada saat ini antara lain:

* '''Lama dalam memuat''' — Memerlukan waktu cukup lama bagi sebuah halaman yang panjang dan rumit untuk dapat dimuat ke dalam VisualEditor. Ke depannya peranti lunak ini akan menjadi lebih cepat dan memperbolehkan pemuatan halaman yang lebih panjang.
* '''Penyuntingan yang tidak lengkap''' — Beberapa unsur pemformatan &quot;rumit&quot; akan ditampilkan dan dapat Anda sunting isinya, namun tidak dapat Anda ubah strukturnya maupun tambahkan entri barunya – seperti pada daftar definsi. Penambahan fitur di area ini adalah salah satu prioritas kami.
* '''Hanya untuk halaman Artikel dan Pengguna''' — VisualEditor hanya akan diaktifkan untuk beberapa ruang nama. Pada sebagian besar Wikipedia, VisualEditor dapat digunakan pada halaman artikel, User:, File:, Help: dan Category:. VisualEditor pada saat ini tidak dapat digunakan pada halaman maupun halaman pembicaraan.

Akibat keterbatasan ini, dan kekutu yang tidak dapat dihindari, kami menyarankan agar pengguna mengeklik &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; sebelum menyimpan halaman, dan [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkan segala masalah yang dihadapi]].

== Bagaimana cara membantu ==

Agar VisualEditor dapat menjadi sebagus mungkin, kami memerlukan bantuan Anda dalam beberapa hal. Tentunya, satu area terbesar adalah dengan menggunakan peranti lunaknya, menemukan kekutu, dan [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkannya]], namun ada banyak tugas lainnya juga. Tugas-tugas ini antara lain:

* '''Memutakhirkan halaman bantuan''' — Semua proyek kami memiliki halaman bantuan yang dapat mempermudah pengguna baru untuk berkontribusi. Sayangnya mereka semua sibuk mengembangkan penyunting markahnya, dan saat VisualEditor terus berkembang, cuplikan layar dan tutorial tersebut akan menjadi usang. Akan sangat berguna jika ada yang dapat [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|memutakhirkan halaman bantuan]], berdasarkan [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|tutorial kami untuk menggunakan VisualEditor]].
* '''Menambahkan DataTemplat di templat''' — VisualEditor menyertakan penyunting templat yang cantik, seperti yang dijelaskan lebih rinci di [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|halaman bantuan]] kami. Seperti yang Anda lihat saat menggunakan templat di Wikipedia, beberapa templat memiliki parameter bernama dan penjelasan yang bagus yang mempermudah penggunaannya. Namun ada beberapa templat yang tidak memilikinya. Ini karena templat memerlukan &quot;DataTemplat&quot; agar fitur ini dapat berfungsi. Jika Anda tertarik dalam menambahkan DataTemplat, kami memiliki [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|panduan untuk melakukannya]], berserta [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|daftar templat paling penting untuk ditambahkan DataTemplatnya]].
* '''Bantulah komunitas Anda''' — Lihat [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|cara-cara berguna untuk membantu komunitas lokal Anda]] untuk mengoptimalkan pengalaman menyunting dengan VisualEditor.
* '''Membantu pengguna baru''' — Jika peluncuran VisualEditor berhasil, kita akan memiliki lebih banyak pengguna baru dari jumlah yang kita miliki biasanya, dan meskipun penyuntingan mungkin menjadi lebih mudah, mencari tahu cara untuk berinteraksi dengan komunitas tetaplah sulit. Silakan luangkan lebih banyak waktu [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|di meja bantuan, atau di saluran bantuan IRC]], untuk membantu para pendatang baru ini menjadi terbiasa dengan Wikipedia.

== Lihat pula ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - Sebuah daftar tentang optimalisasi pengalaman menyunting wiki anda dan sesama penyunting.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - dapatkan dan tawarkan bantuan untuk pekerjaan terkait VisualEditor dari dan kepada Wikimedian lainnya seperti Anda.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - sebuah panduan dahulu untuk komunitas baru kepada VisualEditor

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>pra8g8nzj4hcf8emsbbcvhqnjfmaoag</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403230</id>
      <parentid>5403166</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:59:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7462" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Selamat datang di portal '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) adalah sebuah cara baru dalam menyunting Wikipedia yang sedang dikembangkan oleh Wikimedia Foundation. VisualEditor memperbolehkan seseorang untuk menyunting tanpa harus mempelajari markah wiki. Kami berharap VisualEditor akan membantu orang-orang dalam berkontribusi di Wikipedia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Baca '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Laporkan masalah''' dari VisualEditor].
|-
| Cari tahu lebih lanjut bagaimana membuat pranala, menambahkan atau memindahkan gambar, membuat kutipan, memasukkan templat, menyunting tabel, dan lain-lain.
|Mohon masukkan juga informasi '''peramban web, sistem operasi komputer, dan kulit Wikipedia''' (biasanya Vector, terkadang Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tentang VisualEditor ==

VisualEditor adalah sebuah cara &quot;visual&quot; dalam menyunting Wikipedia. Menyunting Wikipedia dahulunya memerlukan seseorang untuk memahami markah wiki, sebuah bahasa markah yang cukup rumit, bahkan untuk membuat perbaikan kecil pada sebuah artikel sekali pun. Pada tahun 2001, cara ini masih dapat diterima; pada tahun 2014, cara ini [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|membuat para kontributor meninggalkan Wikipedia]]. Kami berharap VisualEditor akan berguna bagi kontributor yang sudah ada dan lebih menyambut kontributor baru. 

VisualEditor telah tersedia sebagai sebuah pilihan peluncuran &quot;alpha&quot; di MediaWiki.org sejak tengah 2015 dan di Wikipedia bahasa Inggris sejak Desember 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ pada 14 bahasa lainnya sejak April 2013], dan [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ hampir pada seluruh bahasa lainnya] sejak awal Juni 2013. Per Juli 2015, alat ini telah tersedia secara baku bagi penyunting yang sudah masuk log maupun yang belum pada lebih dari 75% dari seluruh Wikipedia yang ada.
Kami menargetkan membuatnya tersedia ke hampir [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|semua bahasa lainnya]] pada akhir 2015.
Sejak akhir November 2014, alat ini telah tersedia sebagai [[Beta Features|fitur beta]] di semua wiki WMF kecuali Wiktionary dan Wikisource.

Kami mengeluarkan [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|surat kabar multibahasa]], berfokus pada wiki WMF.

== Menggunakan VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Jika Anda tertarik untuk menggunakan VisualEditor untuk menyunting, kami memiliki [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|panduan untuk menggunakannya]], dan juga [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|daftar pintasan papan tombol yang umum]].

Saat ini, VisualEditor memiliki beberapa kekutu; hal ini tidak dapat dihindari. Jika Anda menemui masalah, jangan ragu untuk [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkannya di halaman Umpan balik]]. Ada juga beberapa area di mana kami masih harus mengembangkan fitur-fitur baru. Keterbatasan yang ada saat ini antara lain:

* '''Lama dalam memuat''' — Memerlukan waktu cukup lama bagi sebuah halaman yang panjang dan rumit untuk dapat dimuat ke dalam VisualEditor. Ke depannya peranti lunak ini akan menjadi lebih cepat dan memperbolehkan pemuatan halaman yang lebih panjang.
* '''Penyuntingan yang tidak lengkap''' — Beberapa unsur pemformatan &quot;rumit&quot; akan ditampilkan dan dapat Anda sunting isinya, namun tidak dapat Anda ubah strukturnya maupun tambahkan entri barunya – seperti pada daftar definsi. Penambahan fitur di area ini adalah salah satu prioritas kami.
* '''Hanya untuk halaman Artikel dan Pengguna''' — VisualEditor hanya akan diaktifkan untuk beberapa ruang nama. Pada sebagian besar Wikipedia, VisualEditor dapat digunakan pada halaman artikel, User:, File:, Help: dan Category:. VisualEditor pada saat ini tidak dapat digunakan pada halaman maupun halaman pembicaraan.

Akibat keterbatasan ini, dan kekutu yang tidak dapat dihindari, kami menyarankan agar pengguna mengeklik &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; sebelum menyimpan halaman, dan [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkan segala masalah yang dihadapi]].

== Bagaimana cara membantu ==

Agar VisualEditor dapat menjadi sebagus mungkin, kami memerlukan bantuan Anda dalam beberapa hal. Tentunya, satu area terbesar adalah dengan menggunakan peranti lunaknya, menemukan kekutu, dan [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkannya]], namun ada banyak tugas lainnya juga. Tugas-tugas ini antara lain:

* '''Memutakhirkan halaman bantuan''' — Semua proyek kami memiliki halaman bantuan yang dapat mempermudah pengguna baru untuk berkontribusi. Sayangnya mereka semua sibuk mengembangkan penyunting markahnya, dan saat VisualEditor terus berkembang, cuplikan layar dan tutorial tersebut akan menjadi usang. Akan sangat berguna jika ada yang dapat [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|memutakhirkan halaman bantuan]], berdasarkan [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|tutorial kami untuk menggunakan VisualEditor]].
* '''Menambahkan DataTemplat di templat''' — VisualEditor menyertakan penyunting templat yang cantik, seperti yang dijelaskan lebih rinci di [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|halaman bantuan]] kami. Seperti yang Anda lihat saat menggunakan templat di Wikipedia, beberapa templat memiliki parameter bernama dan penjelasan yang bagus yang mempermudah penggunaannya. Namun ada beberapa templat yang tidak memilikinya. Ini karena templat memerlukan &quot;DataTemplat&quot; agar fitur ini dapat berfungsi. Jika Anda tertarik dalam menambahkan DataTemplat, kami memiliki [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|panduan untuk melakukannya]], berserta [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|daftar templat paling penting untuk ditambahkan DataTemplatnya]].
* '''Bantulah komunitas Anda''' — Lihat [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|cara-cara berguna untuk membantu komunitas lokal Anda]] untuk mengoptimalkan pengalaman menyunting dengan VisualEditor.
* '''Membantu pengguna baru''' — Jika peluncuran VisualEditor berhasil, kita akan memiliki lebih banyak pengguna baru dari jumlah yang kita miliki biasanya, dan meskipun penyuntingan mungkin menjadi lebih mudah, mencari tahu cara untuk berinteraksi dengan komunitas tetaplah sulit. Silakan luangkan lebih banyak waktu [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|di meja bantuan, atau di saluran bantuan IRC]], untuk membantu para pendatang baru ini menjadi terbiasa dengan Wikipedia.

== Lihat pula ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - Sebuah daftar tentang optimalisasi pengalaman menyunting wiki anda dan sesama penyunting.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - dapatkan dan tawarkan bantuan untuk pekerjaan terkait VisualEditor dari dan kepada Wikimedian lainnya seperti Anda.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - sebuah panduan dahulu untuk komunitas baru kepada VisualEditor

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>rrcopk975w9z6gx5ezqxft52ghg9xe4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/12/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>139556</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403342</id>
      <parentid>1803153</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:41:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="373" xml:space="preserve">* '''Più per la pagine di contenuto, non per le pagine di discussione''' - VisualEditor è abilitato solo per alcuni namespace.  Nella maggior parte delle Wikipedie, VisualEditor può essere usato per gli articoli, le pagine User:, File:, Help: e Category:.  VisualEditor non è attualmente disponibile per Wikipedia: né pagine contenuto né per le pagine di discussione.</text>
      <sha1>jwre6lo09uqrnhioxq3i1y9umihnhj3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/32/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>139577</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403066</id>
      <parentid>1803156</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:11:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="442" xml:space="preserve">* '''Aggiornare le pagine di aiuto''' — Tutti i progetti hanno pagine d'aiuto per spiegare ai nuovi utenti come contribuire.  Purtroppo sono tutti costruiti intorno all'editor di markup e, con l'evoluzione di VisualEditor, le schermate e le esercitazioni diventeranno tutte obsolete.  Sarebbe pertanto molto utile se le persone potessero [[$ve-help|aggiornare le pagine di aiuto]], basandosi sulla [[$ug|guida all'impiego di VisualEditor]].</text>
      <sha1>ebnb50gvcbmr9fvpzhxo1opncua3sx3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/da</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>140314</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402399</id>
      <parentid>4983780</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:49:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7871" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Læs '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Rapporter et problem''' med VisualEditor].
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Om VisualEditor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor er en &quot;visuel&quot; måde at redigere Wikipedia på, et nyt system, som lader brugere bidrage uden at være nødt til at lære at bruge wikimarkup. Den har været tilgængelig som en valgfri &quot;alpha&quot;-version på den engelsksprogede Wikipedia siden december 2012 [$blog-april på 16 andre sprog siden april 2013] og [$blog-june på næsten alle andre sprog] siden begyndelsen af juni. Som [[#Tidsplan|forklaret nedenfor]] forventer vi at gøre den tilgængelig i næsten alle Wikipediaer i slutningen af 2013, idet vi begynder med den engelsksprogede Wikipedia 1. juli.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Brug af Visual Editor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

I øjeblikket har VisualEditor et antal fejl; dette kan ikke helt undgås. Hvis du støder på et problem skal du ikke tøve med at [[VisualEditor/Feedback|rapportere om det på feedback-siden]]. Der findes også nogle områder, hvor vi stadig skal have skabt helt nye faciliteter. De nuværende begrænsninger omfatter følgende:

* '''Langsom til at hente''' - det vil tage et stykke tid at hente lange, komplekse sider ind i VisualEditor. I fremtiden vil softwaren være noget hurtigere og vil tillade at hente større sider.
* '''Ufuldstændig redigering''' - nogle elementer af meget ''kompleks'' formatering vil blive vist og lade dig redigere indholdet, men ikke tillade brugere at redigere strukturen eller tilføje nye elementer. Det gælder fx definitionslister. Tilføjelser på dette område er en af de ting, vi prioriterer.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Kun artikler og brugersider''' - VisualEditor vil kun blive mulig at bruge i artikel- og brugernavnerummene (så man også kan redigere i personlige sandkasser). Med tiden vil vi udbygge den til også at indeholde de særlige redigeringsværktøjer, der er nødvendige for andet end artikler, men vores fokus har foreløbig været på artikler.
&lt;/div&gt;

På grund af disse begrænsninger og uundgåelige fejl anbefaler vi, at brugere trykker på &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;, inden man gemmer siden, samt [[VisualEditor/Feedback|rapporterer alle problemer, man støder på]].

== Hvordan man kan hjælpe ==

For at VisualEditor skal blive så god som mulig, er der en masse ting, vi har brug for hjælp til. Det er klart, at 
et stort område er at bruge softwaren, finde fejl og [[VisualEditor/Feedback|indrapportere disse]], men derudover er der mange andre opgaver. Disse omfatter blandt andet:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Opdatere hjælpesider''' - alle vore projekter har hjælpesider for at gøre det lettere for nye brugere at bidrage. Uheldigvis er de alle opbygget til markup-editoren, og når VisualEditor bliver tilgængelig, bliver skærmbilleder og brugervejledninger forældede. Det vil være meget nyttigt, hvis der er nogen, der vil [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|opdatere hjælpesider]] på basis af  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|vores brugervejledning til VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Tilføje SkabelonData til skabeloner''' - VisualEditor har en fin skabelon-editor, der er beskrevet mere detaljeret på vores [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|hjælpeside]]. Som man kan se, hvis man bruger det på Wikipedia, har nogle skabeloner navngivne parametre og fine beskrivelser, der gør dem nemmere at bruge. Andre har ikke. Det er, fordi skabeloner skal have &quot;SkabelonData&quot;, hvis denne funktion skal virke. Hvis du har lyst til at tilføje SkabelonData, har [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|en vejledning i, hvordan man gør det]] samt en [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|liste over de vigtigste skabeloner, der har brug for data]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Hjælp nye brugere''' - Hvis VisualEditor lanceringen bliver en succes, får vi mange flere nye brugere end vi er vant til, og selvom redigering kan være lettere, vil det stadig være svært at regne ud hvordan man skal interagere med fællesskabet. Venligst at bruge lidt tid [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|på help desk eller i IRC hjælpe kanalen]], for at hjælpe disse nyankomne med at vænne sig til Wikipedia.

==Se også==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>tnc2669kbegknbfxk2vkkzvu1xfjiro</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403001</id>
      <parentid>5402399</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7911" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Læs '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Rapporter et problem''' med VisualEditor].
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Om VisualEditor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor er en &quot;visuel&quot; måde at redigere Wikipedia på, et nyt system, som lader brugere bidrage uden at være nødt til at lære at bruge wikimarkup. Den har været tilgængelig som en valgfri &quot;alpha&quot;-version på den engelsksprogede Wikipedia siden december 2012 [$blog-april på 16 andre sprog siden april 2013] og [$blog-june på næsten alle andre sprog] siden begyndelsen af juni. Som [[#Tidsplan|forklaret nedenfor]] forventer vi at gøre den tilgængelig i næsten alle Wikipediaer i slutningen af 2013, idet vi begynder med den engelsksprogede Wikipedia 1. juli.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Brug af Visual Editor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

I øjeblikket har VisualEditor et antal fejl; dette kan ikke helt undgås. Hvis du støder på et problem skal du ikke tøve med at [[VisualEditor/Feedback|rapportere om det på feedback-siden]]. Der findes også nogle områder, hvor vi stadig skal have skabt helt nye faciliteter. De nuværende begrænsninger omfatter følgende:

* '''Langsom til at hente''' - det vil tage et stykke tid at hente lange, komplekse sider ind i VisualEditor. I fremtiden vil softwaren være noget hurtigere og vil tillade at hente større sider.
* '''Ufuldstændig redigering''' - nogle elementer af meget ''kompleks'' formatering vil blive vist og lade dig redigere indholdet, men ikke tillade brugere at redigere strukturen eller tilføje nye elementer. Det gælder fx definitionslister. Tilføjelser på dette område er en af de ting, vi prioriterer.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Kun artikler og brugersider''' - VisualEditor vil kun blive mulig at bruge i artikel- og brugernavnerummene (så man også kan redigere i personlige sandkasser). Med tiden vil vi udbygge den til også at indeholde de særlige redigeringsværktøjer, der er nødvendige for andet end artikler, men vores fokus har foreløbig været på artikler.
&lt;/div&gt;

På grund af disse begrænsninger og uundgåelige fejl anbefaler vi, at brugere trykker på &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;, inden man gemmer siden, samt [[VisualEditor/Feedback|rapporterer alle problemer, man støder på]].

== Hvordan man kan hjælpe ==

For at VisualEditor skal blive så god som mulig, er der en masse ting, vi har brug for hjælp til. Det er klart, at 
et stort område er at bruge softwaren, finde fejl og [[VisualEditor/Feedback|indrapportere disse]], men derudover er der mange andre opgaver. Disse omfatter blandt andet:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Opdatere hjælpesider''' - alle vore projekter har hjælpesider for at gøre det lettere for nye brugere at bidrage. Uheldigvis er de alle opbygget til markup-editoren, og når VisualEditor bliver tilgængelig, bliver skærmbilleder og brugervejledninger forældede. Det vil være meget nyttigt, hvis der er nogen, der vil [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|opdatere hjælpesider]] på basis af  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|vores brugervejledning til VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Tilføje SkabelonData til skabeloner''' - VisualEditor har en fin skabelon-editor, der er beskrevet mere detaljeret på vores [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|hjælpeside]]. Som man kan se, hvis man bruger det på Wikipedia, har nogle skabeloner navngivne parametre og fine beskrivelser, der gør dem nemmere at bruge. Andre har ikke. Det er, fordi skabeloner skal have &quot;SkabelonData&quot;, hvis denne funktion skal virke. Hvis du har lyst til at tilføje SkabelonData, har [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|en vejledning i, hvordan man gør det]] samt en [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|liste over de vigtigste skabeloner, der har brug for data]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Hjælp nye brugere''' - Hvis VisualEditor lanceringen bliver en succes, får vi mange flere nye brugere end vi er vant til, og selvom redigering kan være lettere, vil det stadig være svært at regne ud hvordan man skal interagere med fællesskabet. Venligst at bruge lidt tid [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|på help desk eller i IRC hjælpe kanalen]], for at hjælpe disse nyankomne med at vænne sig til Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Se også==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>8esyh92ot081ofb94yikfmmdlgo2aw6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403043</id>
      <parentid>5403001</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:54:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7871" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Læs '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Rapporter et problem''' med VisualEditor].
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Om VisualEditor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor er en &quot;visuel&quot; måde at redigere Wikipedia på, et nyt system, som lader brugere bidrage uden at være nødt til at lære at bruge wikimarkup. Den har været tilgængelig som en valgfri &quot;alpha&quot;-version på den engelsksprogede Wikipedia siden december 2012 [$blog-april på 16 andre sprog siden april 2013] og [$blog-june på næsten alle andre sprog] siden begyndelsen af juni. Som [[#Tidsplan|forklaret nedenfor]] forventer vi at gøre den tilgængelig i næsten alle Wikipediaer i slutningen af 2013, idet vi begynder med den engelsksprogede Wikipedia 1. juli.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Brug af Visual Editor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

I øjeblikket har VisualEditor et antal fejl; dette kan ikke helt undgås. Hvis du støder på et problem skal du ikke tøve med at [[VisualEditor/Feedback|rapportere om det på feedback-siden]]. Der findes også nogle områder, hvor vi stadig skal have skabt helt nye faciliteter. De nuværende begrænsninger omfatter følgende:

* '''Langsom til at hente''' - det vil tage et stykke tid at hente lange, komplekse sider ind i VisualEditor. I fremtiden vil softwaren være noget hurtigere og vil tillade at hente større sider.
* '''Ufuldstændig redigering''' - nogle elementer af meget ''kompleks'' formatering vil blive vist og lade dig redigere indholdet, men ikke tillade brugere at redigere strukturen eller tilføje nye elementer. Det gælder fx definitionslister. Tilføjelser på dette område er en af de ting, vi prioriterer.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Kun artikler og brugersider''' - VisualEditor vil kun blive mulig at bruge i artikel- og brugernavnerummene (så man også kan redigere i personlige sandkasser). Med tiden vil vi udbygge den til også at indeholde de særlige redigeringsværktøjer, der er nødvendige for andet end artikler, men vores fokus har foreløbig været på artikler.
&lt;/div&gt;

På grund af disse begrænsninger og uundgåelige fejl anbefaler vi, at brugere trykker på &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;, inden man gemmer siden, samt [[VisualEditor/Feedback|rapporterer alle problemer, man støder på]].

== Hvordan man kan hjælpe ==

For at VisualEditor skal blive så god som mulig, er der en masse ting, vi har brug for hjælp til. Det er klart, at 
et stort område er at bruge softwaren, finde fejl og [[VisualEditor/Feedback|indrapportere disse]], men derudover er der mange andre opgaver. Disse omfatter blandt andet:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Opdatere hjælpesider''' - alle vore projekter har hjælpesider for at gøre det lettere for nye brugere at bidrage. Uheldigvis er de alle opbygget til markup-editoren, og når VisualEditor bliver tilgængelig, bliver skærmbilleder og brugervejledninger forældede. Det vil være meget nyttigt, hvis der er nogen, der vil [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|opdatere hjælpesider]] på basis af  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|vores brugervejledning til VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Tilføje SkabelonData til skabeloner''' - VisualEditor har en fin skabelon-editor, der er beskrevet mere detaljeret på vores [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|hjælpeside]]. Som man kan se, hvis man bruger det på Wikipedia, har nogle skabeloner navngivne parametre og fine beskrivelser, der gør dem nemmere at bruge. Andre har ikke. Det er, fordi skabeloner skal have &quot;SkabelonData&quot;, hvis denne funktion skal virke. Hvis du har lyst til at tilføje SkabelonData, har [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|en vejledning i, hvordan man gør det]] samt en [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|liste over de vigtigste skabeloner, der har brug for data]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Hjælp nye brugere''' - Hvis VisualEditor lanceringen bliver en succes, får vi mange flere nye brugere end vi er vant til, og selvom redigering kan være lettere, vil det stadig være svært at regne ud hvordan man skal interagere med fællesskabet. Venligst at bruge lidt tid [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|på help desk eller i IRC hjælpe kanalen]], for at hjælpe disse nyankomne med at vænne sig til Wikipedia.

==Se også==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>tnc2669kbegknbfxk2vkkzvu1xfjiro</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403208</id>
      <parentid>5403043</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:49:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7889" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Læs '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Rapporter et problem''' med VisualEditor].
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Om VisualEditor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor er en &quot;visuel&quot; måde at redigere Wikipedia på, et nyt system, som lader brugere bidrage uden at være nødt til at lære at bruge wikimarkup. Den har været tilgængelig som en valgfri &quot;alpha&quot;-version på den engelsksprogede Wikipedia siden december 2012 [$blog-april på 16 andre sprog siden april 2013] og [$blog-june på næsten alle andre sprog] siden begyndelsen af juni. Som [[#Tidsplan|forklaret nedenfor]] forventer vi at gøre den tilgængelig i næsten alle Wikipediaer i slutningen af 2013, idet vi begynder med den engelsksprogede Wikipedia 1. juli.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Brug af Visual Editor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

I øjeblikket har VisualEditor et antal fejl; dette kan ikke helt undgås. Hvis du støder på et problem skal du ikke tøve med at [[VisualEditor/Feedback|rapportere om det på feedback-siden]]. Der findes også nogle områder, hvor vi stadig skal have skabt helt nye faciliteter. De nuværende begrænsninger omfatter følgende:

* '''Langsom til at hente''' - det vil tage et stykke tid at hente lange, komplekse sider ind i VisualEditor. I fremtiden vil softwaren være noget hurtigere og vil tillade at hente større sider.
* '''Ufuldstændig redigering''' - nogle elementer af meget ''kompleks'' formatering vil blive vist og lade dig redigere indholdet, men ikke tillade brugere at redigere strukturen eller tilføje nye elementer. Det gælder fx definitionslister. Tilføjelser på dette område er en af de ting, vi prioriterer.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Kun artikler og brugersider''' - VisualEditor vil kun blive mulig at bruge i artikel- og brugernavnerummene (så man også kan redigere i personlige sandkasser). Med tiden vil vi udbygge den til også at indeholde de særlige redigeringsværktøjer, der er nødvendige for andet end artikler, men vores fokus har foreløbig været på artikler.
&lt;/div&gt;

På grund af disse begrænsninger og uundgåelige fejl anbefaler vi, at brugere trykker på &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;, inden man gemmer siden, samt [[VisualEditor/Feedback|rapporterer alle problemer, man støder på]].

== Hvordan man kan hjælpe ==

For at VisualEditor skal blive så god som mulig, er der en masse ting, vi har brug for hjælp til. Det er klart, at 
et stort område er at bruge softwaren, finde fejl og [[VisualEditor/Feedback|indrapportere disse]], men derudover er der mange andre opgaver. Disse omfatter blandt andet:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Opdatere hjælpesider''' - alle vore projekter har hjælpesider for at gøre det lettere for nye brugere at bidrage. Uheldigvis er de alle opbygget til markup-editoren, og når VisualEditor bliver tilgængelig, bliver skærmbilleder og brugervejledninger forældede. Det vil være meget nyttigt, hvis der er nogen, der vil [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|opdatere hjælpesider]] på basis af  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|vores brugervejledning til VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Tilføje SkabelonData til skabeloner''' - VisualEditor har en fin skabelon-editor, der er beskrevet mere detaljeret på vores [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|hjælpeside]]. Som man kan se, hvis man bruger det på Wikipedia, har nogle skabeloner navngivne parametre og fine beskrivelser, der gør dem nemmere at bruge. Andre har ikke. Det er, fordi skabeloner skal have &quot;SkabelonData&quot;, hvis denne funktion skal virke. Hvis du har lyst til at tilføje SkabelonData, har [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|en vejledning i, hvordan man gør det]] samt en [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|liste over de vigtigste skabeloner, der har brug for data]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Hjælp nye brugere''' - Hvis VisualEditor lanceringen bliver en succes, får vi mange flere nye brugere end vi er vant til, og selvom redigering kan være lettere, vil det stadig være svært at regne ud hvordan man skal interagere med fællesskabet. Venligst at bruge lidt tid [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|på help desk eller i IRC hjælpe kanalen]], for at hjælpe disse nyankomne med at vænne sig til Wikipedia.

==Se også==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>b2mgehpwvvbhw2fo28ssdeqd21h9197</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>140425</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403234</id>
      <parentid>1803157</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:01:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="531" xml:space="preserve">* '''Aggiungere TemplateData ai modelli''' — VisualEditor include un pratico editor di modelli, descritto dettagliatamente nella [[$ug|pagina di aiuto relativa]]. Come si può notare usandolo, alcuni modelli hanno nomi di parametri e descrizioni per facilitarne l'uso, altri no. Questo perchè i modelli necessitano dei &quot;TemplateData&quot; per funzionare al meglio. Se sei interessato ad aggiungere dei TemplateData, è disponibile un'[[$td-tutor|apposita guida]], insieme all'[[$td|elenco dei più importanti modelli da aggiungere]].</text>
      <sha1>6bs1ebw8yzx3fp24j02ivmvvbq17tej</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>140429</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403062</id>
      <parentid>1803162</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:06:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="415" xml:space="preserve">* '''Aiutare i nuovi utenti''' — Se il lancio di VisualEditor avrà successo, ci saranno molti più utenti di quanto non ve ne siano ora e, sebbene effettuare modifiche diverrà più facile, l'interazione con la comunità potrebbe rimanere complesso. Se lo desideri, spendi un po' del tuo tempo nell'[[$1|help desk, o nel canale IRC di aiuto]], per accogliere i nuovi arrivati e aiutarli ad abituarsi a Wikipedia.</text>
      <sha1>3uymvhk4dmz1hpzfkaei02e6uy9mv3z</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/he</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>140796</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402425</id>
      <parentid>1415634</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:00:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="363" xml:space="preserve">ברוכים הבאים לפורטל של [[$ve|העורך החזותי]], דרך חדשה לעריכת ויקיפדיה שמפתחת קרן ויקימדיה.  העורך החזותי מאפשר לאנשים לערוך מבלי ללמוד את תחביר ויקי, ואנו מקווים שהוא יעודד אנשים נוספים לתרום לוויקיפדיה.</text>
      <sha1>eoxfaltec4lwi32e9xqlzuo5mhc44pe</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/he</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>140797</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402426</id>
      <parentid>4989887</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:00:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9121" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
ברוכים הבאים לפורטל של [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|העורך החזותי]], דרך חדשה לעריכת ויקיפדיה שמפתחת קרן ויקימדיה.  העורך החזותי מאפשר לאנשים לערוך מבלי ללמוד את תחביר ויקי, ואנו מקווים שהוא יעודד אנשים נוספים לתרום לוויקיפדיה.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''דיווח על תקלה''' בעורך החזותי].
|-
| חיפוש מידע נוסף על יצירת קישורים, הוספת או הזזה של תמונות, יצירת ציטוטים, הוספת תבניות, עריכת טבלאות ועוד.
|נא לכלול את '''הדפדפן, מערכת ההפעלה של המחשב וערכת העיצוב של ויקיפדיה''' (על־פי רוב וקטור, לעתים מונובוק).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== אודות העורך החזותי ==

העורך החזותי הוא דרך &quot;חזותית&quot; לעריכת ויקיפדיה – מערכת חדשה שתאפשר לאנשים לתרום מבלי לאלץ אותם ללמוד תחביר ויקי. עד כה עריכת ויקיפדיה, אפילו לשם תיקון קטן בערך, דרשה ללמוד תחביר ויקי, שפת תגים מורכבת למדי. ב־2001 הדבר התקבל על הדעת; ב־2015 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|זה מרחיק עורכים פוטנציאליים]]. אנו מקווים שהעורך החזותי יהיה שימושי תורמים קיימים ויותר מזמין לחדשים. 

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;העורך החזותי היה זמין בגירסת &quot;אלפא&quot; בויקימידה מאמצע 2012 ובגירסא האנגלית של ויקיפדיה מאז דצמבר 2012, [[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/|בעוד 14 שפות נוספות מאז אפריל 2013]], ו[[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/|ברוב שאר השפות]] מאז תחילת יוני 2013. מ יולי 2014, הפכנו אותו לברירת מחדל לעורכים מחוברים ומנותקים ביותר מחצי מהויקיפדיות. אנו מצפים להפוך אותו לברירת מחדל לרוב שאר השפות בויקיפדיה בשנת 2015. מסוף נובמבר 2014, הוא היה זמין ב[[Beta Feature|גירסאת &quot;בטא&quot;]] בכל אתרי ויקימדיה למעט ויקימסע וויקיטקסט.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
אנו משחררים [[VisualEditor/status|עדכונים סדירים]] בMediawiki.org, וב[[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|ירחון רב-לשוני]], ממוקד על WMF ויקי.
&lt;/div&gt;

== שימוש בעורך החזותי ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

כיום יש לעורך החזותי מספר באגים; זה בלתי נמנע. אם אתם נתקלים בבעיה אנא אל תהססו לדווח עליה ב[[:he:WP:VE/F|דף המשוב]]. קיימים מספר תחומים שבהם אנו עדיין צריכים לבנות פונקציות חדשות לחלוטין. בין המגבלות הנוכחיות ניתן למנות:

* '''טעינה איטית:''' טעינת העורך יכולה לקחת זמן רב יחסית בערכים ארוכים או מורכבים. בעתיד תהיה התכנה מהירה בהרבה.
* '''עריכה לא מלאה:''' ניתן לערוך כמה אלמנטים של פורמטים &quot;מורכבים&quot;, למשל תבניות, אך לא תמיד אפשר לערוך את המבנה עצמו או להוסיף רשומות נוספות, כגון טבלאות. הוספת אפשרויות לתחום זה היא אחת מהעדיפויות הגבוהות שלנו.
* '''מאמרים ועמודי שיחה בלבד:''' העורך החזותי זמין רק במספר מרחבי שם. ברוב הויקיפדיות, העורך החזותי יכל לפעול על דפי מאמרים, משתמש:, קובץ: עזרה: וקטגוריה:. העורך החזותי כרגי לא זמין בעמודי ויקיפדיה: ובדפי שיחה.

בגלל מגבלות אלה ובגלל באגים אנו ממליצים למשתמשים ללחוץ על &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; בטרם שמירת העמוד, [[:he:WP:VE/F|ולדווח על כל תקלה]].

== איך לעזור ==

על מנת להפוך את העורך החזותי לטוב ככל האפשר, יש הרבה דברים בהם אנו זקוקים לעזרה. כמובן, תחום מרכזי שכזה הוא שימוש בתכנה, מציאת באגים ו[[:he:WP:VE/F|דיווח עליהם]], אך יש משימות רבות אחרות. ביניהן:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''עדכון דפי עזרה:''' לכל המיזמים שלנו יש דפי עזרה שנועדו להקל על משתמשים חדשים לתרום. למרבה הצער הם עדיין מדברים על עריכה בשיטת תחביר ויקי, וכשיושק העורך החזותי הם לא יהיו עדכניים. יהיה זה מאוד מועיל אם אנשים [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|יעזרו לעדכן אותם]], בהתבסס על [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/he|המדריך שלנו לעורך החזותי]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''הוספת TemplateData לתבניות:''' העורך החזותי מסוגל לערוך תבניות בנוחות, כמתואר בפירוט ב[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/he|דפי העזרה]]. כפי שתראו אם תשתמשו בו בוויקיפדיה, לחלק מהתבניות יש פרמטרים עם שמות ברורים ותיאורים נהירים שהופכים אותן לקלות לשימוש. לאחרות אין, כיוון שדפי התבניות זקוקים לתוכן שנקרא &quot;[[TemplateData]]&quot; לפני שתכונה זו יכולה לעבוד. אם אתם מעוניינים להוסיף TemplateData, יש לנו [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|מדריך על כך]], יחד עם [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|רשימה של התבניות החשובות ביותר שזקוקות לו]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''עזור לקהילתנו''' — ראה את  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|רשימת דרכים שימושיות לעזור לקהילה המקומית]] כשהעורך החזותי יהיה זמין כאופצית בטא.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''עזרה למשמשים חדשים:''' אם השקת העורך תהא מוצלחת יהיו לנו הרבה יותר משתמשים חדשים מבדרך כלל, ואף־על־פי שעריכה תהיה קלה יותר, הבנת כללי קהילת ויקיפדיה (כמו הפתרון המקובל למלחמות עריכה) עדיין עלולה להיות מבלבלת. אנא נסו להקציב מעט זמן בדלפק הייעוץ או ב[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|פורטל המשתמשים החדשים]] על מנת לעזור להם להתאקלם לוויקיפדיה.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>takt80i3qd9t8g7497g3ui0u6hkrgkv</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403009</id>
      <parentid>5402426</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9161" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
ברוכים הבאים לפורטל של [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|העורך החזותי]], דרך חדשה לעריכת ויקיפדיה שמפתחת קרן ויקימדיה.  העורך החזותי מאפשר לאנשים לערוך מבלי ללמוד את תחביר ויקי, ואנו מקווים שהוא יעודד אנשים נוספים לתרום לוויקיפדיה.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''דיווח על תקלה''' בעורך החזותי].
|-
| חיפוש מידע נוסף על יצירת קישורים, הוספת או הזזה של תמונות, יצירת ציטוטים, הוספת תבניות, עריכת טבלאות ועוד.
|נא לכלול את '''הדפדפן, מערכת ההפעלה של המחשב וערכת העיצוב של ויקיפדיה''' (על־פי רוב וקטור, לעתים מונובוק).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== אודות העורך החזותי ==

העורך החזותי הוא דרך &quot;חזותית&quot; לעריכת ויקיפדיה – מערכת חדשה שתאפשר לאנשים לתרום מבלי לאלץ אותם ללמוד תחביר ויקי. עד כה עריכת ויקיפדיה, אפילו לשם תיקון קטן בערך, דרשה ללמוד תחביר ויקי, שפת תגים מורכבת למדי. ב־2001 הדבר התקבל על הדעת; ב־2015 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|זה מרחיק עורכים פוטנציאליים]]. אנו מקווים שהעורך החזותי יהיה שימושי תורמים קיימים ויותר מזמין לחדשים. 

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;העורך החזותי היה זמין בגירסת &quot;אלפא&quot; בויקימידה מאמצע 2012 ובגירסא האנגלית של ויקיפדיה מאז דצמבר 2012, [[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/|בעוד 14 שפות נוספות מאז אפריל 2013]], ו[[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/|ברוב שאר השפות]] מאז תחילת יוני 2013. מ יולי 2014, הפכנו אותו לברירת מחדל לעורכים מחוברים ומנותקים ביותר מחצי מהויקיפדיות. אנו מצפים להפוך אותו לברירת מחדל לרוב שאר השפות בויקיפדיה בשנת 2015. מסוף נובמבר 2014, הוא היה זמין ב[[Beta Feature|גירסאת &quot;בטא&quot;]] בכל אתרי ויקימדיה למעט ויקימסע וויקיטקסט.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
אנו משחררים [[VisualEditor/status|עדכונים סדירים]] בMediawiki.org, וב[[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|ירחון רב-לשוני]], ממוקד על WMF ויקי.
&lt;/div&gt;

== שימוש בעורך החזותי ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

כיום יש לעורך החזותי מספר באגים; זה בלתי נמנע. אם אתם נתקלים בבעיה אנא אל תהססו לדווח עליה ב[[:he:WP:VE/F|דף המשוב]]. קיימים מספר תחומים שבהם אנו עדיין צריכים לבנות פונקציות חדשות לחלוטין. בין המגבלות הנוכחיות ניתן למנות:

* '''טעינה איטית:''' טעינת העורך יכולה לקחת זמן רב יחסית בערכים ארוכים או מורכבים. בעתיד תהיה התכנה מהירה בהרבה.
* '''עריכה לא מלאה:''' ניתן לערוך כמה אלמנטים של פורמטים &quot;מורכבים&quot;, למשל תבניות, אך לא תמיד אפשר לערוך את המבנה עצמו או להוסיף רשומות נוספות, כגון טבלאות. הוספת אפשרויות לתחום זה היא אחת מהעדיפויות הגבוהות שלנו.
* '''מאמרים ועמודי שיחה בלבד:''' העורך החזותי זמין רק במספר מרחבי שם. ברוב הויקיפדיות, העורך החזותי יכל לפעול על דפי מאמרים, משתמש:, קובץ: עזרה: וקטגוריה:. העורך החזותי כרגי לא זמין בעמודי ויקיפדיה: ובדפי שיחה.

בגלל מגבלות אלה ובגלל באגים אנו ממליצים למשתמשים ללחוץ על &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; בטרם שמירת העמוד, [[:he:WP:VE/F|ולדווח על כל תקלה]].

== איך לעזור ==

על מנת להפוך את העורך החזותי לטוב ככל האפשר, יש הרבה דברים בהם אנו זקוקים לעזרה. כמובן, תחום מרכזי שכזה הוא שימוש בתכנה, מציאת באגים ו[[:he:WP:VE/F|דיווח עליהם]], אך יש משימות רבות אחרות. ביניהן:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''עדכון דפי עזרה:''' לכל המיזמים שלנו יש דפי עזרה שנועדו להקל על משתמשים חדשים לתרום. למרבה הצער הם עדיין מדברים על עריכה בשיטת תחביר ויקי, וכשיושק העורך החזותי הם לא יהיו עדכניים. יהיה זה מאוד מועיל אם אנשים [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|יעזרו לעדכן אותם]], בהתבסס על [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/he|המדריך שלנו לעורך החזותי]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''הוספת TemplateData לתבניות:''' העורך החזותי מסוגל לערוך תבניות בנוחות, כמתואר בפירוט ב[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/he|דפי העזרה]]. כפי שתראו אם תשתמשו בו בוויקיפדיה, לחלק מהתבניות יש פרמטרים עם שמות ברורים ותיאורים נהירים שהופכים אותן לקלות לשימוש. לאחרות אין, כיוון שדפי התבניות זקוקים לתוכן שנקרא &quot;[[TemplateData]]&quot; לפני שתכונה זו יכולה לעבוד. אם אתם מעוניינים להוסיף TemplateData, יש לנו [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|מדריך על כך]], יחד עם [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|רשימה של התבניות החשובות ביותר שזקוקות לו]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''עזור לקהילתנו''' — ראה את  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|רשימת דרכים שימושיות לעזור לקהילה המקומית]] כשהעורך החזותי יהיה זמין כאופצית בטא.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''עזרה למשמשים חדשים:''' אם השקת העורך תהא מוצלחת יהיו לנו הרבה יותר משתמשים חדשים מבדרך כלל, ואף־על־פי שעריכה תהיה קלה יותר, הבנת כללי קהילת ויקיפדיה (כמו הפתרון המקובל למלחמות עריכה) עדיין עלולה להיות מבלבלת. אנא נסו להקציב מעט זמן בדלפק הייעוץ או ב[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|פורטל המשתמשים החדשים]] על מנת לעזור להם להתאקלם לוויקיפדיה.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>enuqb98cf5wnbt43emhnllxv0g2ofdb</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403059</id>
      <parentid>5403009</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:02:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9121" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
ברוכים הבאים לפורטל של [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|העורך החזותי]], דרך חדשה לעריכת ויקיפדיה שמפתחת קרן ויקימדיה.  העורך החזותי מאפשר לאנשים לערוך מבלי ללמוד את תחביר ויקי, ואנו מקווים שהוא יעודד אנשים נוספים לתרום לוויקיפדיה.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''דיווח על תקלה''' בעורך החזותי].
|-
| חיפוש מידע נוסף על יצירת קישורים, הוספת או הזזה של תמונות, יצירת ציטוטים, הוספת תבניות, עריכת טבלאות ועוד.
|נא לכלול את '''הדפדפן, מערכת ההפעלה של המחשב וערכת העיצוב של ויקיפדיה''' (על־פי רוב וקטור, לעתים מונובוק).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== אודות העורך החזותי ==

העורך החזותי הוא דרך &quot;חזותית&quot; לעריכת ויקיפדיה – מערכת חדשה שתאפשר לאנשים לתרום מבלי לאלץ אותם ללמוד תחביר ויקי. עד כה עריכת ויקיפדיה, אפילו לשם תיקון קטן בערך, דרשה ללמוד תחביר ויקי, שפת תגים מורכבת למדי. ב־2001 הדבר התקבל על הדעת; ב־2015 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|זה מרחיק עורכים פוטנציאליים]]. אנו מקווים שהעורך החזותי יהיה שימושי תורמים קיימים ויותר מזמין לחדשים. 

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;העורך החזותי היה זמין בגירסת &quot;אלפא&quot; בויקימידה מאמצע 2012 ובגירסא האנגלית של ויקיפדיה מאז דצמבר 2012, [[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/|בעוד 14 שפות נוספות מאז אפריל 2013]], ו[[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/|ברוב שאר השפות]] מאז תחילת יוני 2013. מ יולי 2014, הפכנו אותו לברירת מחדל לעורכים מחוברים ומנותקים ביותר מחצי מהויקיפדיות. אנו מצפים להפוך אותו לברירת מחדל לרוב שאר השפות בויקיפדיה בשנת 2015. מסוף נובמבר 2014, הוא היה זמין ב[[Beta Feature|גירסאת &quot;בטא&quot;]] בכל אתרי ויקימדיה למעט ויקימסע וויקיטקסט.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
אנו משחררים [[VisualEditor/status|עדכונים סדירים]] בMediawiki.org, וב[[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|ירחון רב-לשוני]], ממוקד על WMF ויקי.
&lt;/div&gt;

== שימוש בעורך החזותי ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

כיום יש לעורך החזותי מספר באגים; זה בלתי נמנע. אם אתם נתקלים בבעיה אנא אל תהססו לדווח עליה ב[[:he:WP:VE/F|דף המשוב]]. קיימים מספר תחומים שבהם אנו עדיין צריכים לבנות פונקציות חדשות לחלוטין. בין המגבלות הנוכחיות ניתן למנות:

* '''טעינה איטית:''' טעינת העורך יכולה לקחת זמן רב יחסית בערכים ארוכים או מורכבים. בעתיד תהיה התכנה מהירה בהרבה.
* '''עריכה לא מלאה:''' ניתן לערוך כמה אלמנטים של פורמטים &quot;מורכבים&quot;, למשל תבניות, אך לא תמיד אפשר לערוך את המבנה עצמו או להוסיף רשומות נוספות, כגון טבלאות. הוספת אפשרויות לתחום זה היא אחת מהעדיפויות הגבוהות שלנו.
* '''מאמרים ועמודי שיחה בלבד:''' העורך החזותי זמין רק במספר מרחבי שם. ברוב הויקיפדיות, העורך החזותי יכל לפעול על דפי מאמרים, משתמש:, קובץ: עזרה: וקטגוריה:. העורך החזותי כרגי לא זמין בעמודי ויקיפדיה: ובדפי שיחה.

בגלל מגבלות אלה ובגלל באגים אנו ממליצים למשתמשים ללחוץ על &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; בטרם שמירת העמוד, [[:he:WP:VE/F|ולדווח על כל תקלה]].

== איך לעזור ==

על מנת להפוך את העורך החזותי לטוב ככל האפשר, יש הרבה דברים בהם אנו זקוקים לעזרה. כמובן, תחום מרכזי שכזה הוא שימוש בתכנה, מציאת באגים ו[[:he:WP:VE/F|דיווח עליהם]], אך יש משימות רבות אחרות. ביניהן:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''עדכון דפי עזרה:''' לכל המיזמים שלנו יש דפי עזרה שנועדו להקל על משתמשים חדשים לתרום. למרבה הצער הם עדיין מדברים על עריכה בשיטת תחביר ויקי, וכשיושק העורך החזותי הם לא יהיו עדכניים. יהיה זה מאוד מועיל אם אנשים [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|יעזרו לעדכן אותם]], בהתבסס על [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/he|המדריך שלנו לעורך החזותי]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''הוספת TemplateData לתבניות:''' העורך החזותי מסוגל לערוך תבניות בנוחות, כמתואר בפירוט ב[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/he|דפי העזרה]]. כפי שתראו אם תשתמשו בו בוויקיפדיה, לחלק מהתבניות יש פרמטרים עם שמות ברורים ותיאורים נהירים שהופכים אותן לקלות לשימוש. לאחרות אין, כיוון שדפי התבניות זקוקים לתוכן שנקרא &quot;[[TemplateData]]&quot; לפני שתכונה זו יכולה לעבוד. אם אתם מעוניינים להוסיף TemplateData, יש לנו [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|מדריך על כך]], יחד עם [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|רשימה של התבניות החשובות ביותר שזקוקות לו]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''עזור לקהילתנו''' — ראה את  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|רשימת דרכים שימושיות לעזור לקהילה המקומית]] כשהעורך החזותי יהיה זמין כאופצית בטא.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''עזרה למשמשים חדשים:''' אם השקת העורך תהא מוצלחת יהיו לנו הרבה יותר משתמשים חדשים מבדרך כלל, ואף־על־פי שעריכה תהיה קלה יותר, הבנת כללי קהילת ויקיפדיה (כמו הפתרון המקובל למלחמות עריכה) עדיין עלולה להיות מבלבלת. אנא נסו להקציב מעט זמן בדלפק הייעוץ או ב[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|פורטל המשתמשים החדשים]] על מנת לעזור להם להתאקלם לוויקיפדיה.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>takt80i3qd9t8g7497g3ui0u6hkrgkv</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403223</id>
      <parentid>5403059</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:56:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9136" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
ברוכים הבאים לפורטל של [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|העורך החזותי]], דרך חדשה לעריכת ויקיפדיה שמפתחת קרן ויקימדיה.  העורך החזותי מאפשר לאנשים לערוך מבלי ללמוד את תחביר ויקי, ואנו מקווים שהוא יעודד אנשים נוספים לתרום לוויקיפדיה.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''דיווח על תקלה''' בעורך החזותי].
|-
| חיפוש מידע נוסף על יצירת קישורים, הוספת או הזזה של תמונות, יצירת ציטוטים, הוספת תבניות, עריכת טבלאות ועוד.
|נא לכלול את '''הדפדפן, מערכת ההפעלה של המחשב וערכת העיצוב של ויקיפדיה''' (על־פי רוב וקטור, לעתים מונובוק).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== אודות העורך החזותי ==

העורך החזותי הוא דרך &quot;חזותית&quot; לעריכת ויקיפדיה – מערכת חדשה שתאפשר לאנשים לתרום מבלי לאלץ אותם ללמוד תחביר ויקי. עד כה עריכת ויקיפדיה, אפילו לשם תיקון קטן בערך, דרשה ללמוד תחביר ויקי, שפת תגים מורכבת למדי. ב־2001 הדבר התקבל על הדעת; ב־2015 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|זה מרחיק עורכים פוטנציאליים]]. אנו מקווים שהעורך החזותי יהיה שימושי תורמים קיימים ויותר מזמין לחדשים. 

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;העורך החזותי היה זמין בגירסת &quot;אלפא&quot; בויקימידה מאמצע 2012 ובגירסא האנגלית של ויקיפדיה מאז דצמבר 2012, [[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/|בעוד 14 שפות נוספות מאז אפריל 2013]], ו[[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/|ברוב שאר השפות]] מאז תחילת יוני 2013. מ יולי 2014, הפכנו אותו לברירת מחדל לעורכים מחוברים ומנותקים ביותר מחצי מהויקיפדיות. אנו מצפים להפוך אותו לברירת מחדל לרוב שאר השפות בויקיפדיה בשנת 2015. מסוף נובמבר 2014, הוא היה זמין ב[[Beta Feature|גירסאת &quot;בטא&quot;]] בכל אתרי ויקימדיה למעט ויקימסע וויקיטקסט.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
אנו משחררים [[VisualEditor/status|עדכונים סדירים]] בMediawiki.org, וב[[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|ירחון רב-לשוני]], ממוקד על WMF ויקי.
&lt;/div&gt;

== שימוש בעורך החזותי ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

כיום יש לעורך החזותי מספר באגים; זה בלתי נמנע. אם אתם נתקלים בבעיה אנא אל תהססו לדווח עליה ב[[:he:WP:VE/F|דף המשוב]]. קיימים מספר תחומים שבהם אנו עדיין צריכים לבנות פונקציות חדשות לחלוטין. בין המגבלות הנוכחיות ניתן למנות:

* '''טעינה איטית:''' טעינת העורך יכולה לקחת זמן רב יחסית בערכים ארוכים או מורכבים. בעתיד תהיה התכנה מהירה בהרבה.
* '''עריכה לא מלאה:''' ניתן לערוך כמה אלמנטים של פורמטים &quot;מורכבים&quot;, למשל תבניות, אך לא תמיד אפשר לערוך את המבנה עצמו או להוסיף רשומות נוספות, כגון טבלאות. הוספת אפשרויות לתחום זה היא אחת מהעדיפויות הגבוהות שלנו.
* '''מאמרים ועמודי שיחה בלבד:''' העורך החזותי זמין רק במספר מרחבי שם. ברוב הויקיפדיות, העורך החזותי יכל לפעול על דפי מאמרים, משתמש:, קובץ: עזרה: וקטגוריה:. העורך החזותי כרגי לא זמין בעמודי ויקיפדיה: ובדפי שיחה.

בגלל מגבלות אלה ובגלל באגים אנו ממליצים למשתמשים ללחוץ על &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; בטרם שמירת העמוד, [[:he:WP:VE/F|ולדווח על כל תקלה]].

== איך לעזור ==

על מנת להפוך את העורך החזותי לטוב ככל האפשר, יש הרבה דברים בהם אנו זקוקים לעזרה. כמובן, תחום מרכזי שכזה הוא שימוש בתכנה, מציאת באגים ו[[:he:WP:VE/F|דיווח עליהם]], אך יש משימות רבות אחרות. ביניהן:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''עדכון דפי עזרה:''' לכל המיזמים שלנו יש דפי עזרה שנועדו להקל על משתמשים חדשים לתרום. למרבה הצער הם עדיין מדברים על עריכה בשיטת תחביר ויקי, וכשיושק העורך החזותי הם לא יהיו עדכניים. יהיה זה מאוד מועיל אם אנשים [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|יעזרו לעדכן אותם]], בהתבסס על [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/he|המדריך שלנו לעורך החזותי]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''הוספת TemplateData לתבניות:''' העורך החזותי מסוגל לערוך תבניות בנוחות, כמתואר בפירוט ב[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|דפי העזרה]]. כפי שתראו אם תשתמשו בו בוויקיפדיה, לחלק מהתבניות יש פרמטרים עם שמות ברורים ותיאורים נהירים שהופכים אותן לקלות לשימוש. לאחרות אין, כיוון שדפי התבניות זקוקים לתוכן שנקרא &quot;[[TemplateData]]&quot; לפני שתכונה זו יכולה לעבוד. אם אתם מעוניינים להוסיף TemplateData, יש לנו [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|מדריך על כך]], יחד עם [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|רשימה של התבניות החשובות ביותר שזקוקות לו]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''עזור לקהילתנו''' — ראה את  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|רשימת דרכים שימושיות לעזור לקהילה המקומית]] כשהעורך החזותי יהיה זמין כאופצית בטא.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''עזרה למשמשים חדשים:''' אם השקת העורך תהא מוצלחת יהיו לנו הרבה יותר משתמשים חדשים מבדרך כלל, ואף־על־פי שעריכה תהיה קלה יותר, הבנת כללי קהילת ויקיפדיה (כמו הפתרון המקובל למלחמות עריכה) עדיין עלולה להיות מבלבלת. אנא נסו להקציב מעט זמן בדלפק הייעוץ או ב[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|פורטל המשתמשים החדשים]] על מנת לעזור להם להתאקלם לוויקיפדיה.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>4onz9adbghsuks8trzh9nyku1nqknri</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/fi</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>141012</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402416</id>
      <parentid>5122436</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:55:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6944" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Tervetuloa ''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Visuaalisen muokkaimen]]'' portaaliin. Visuaalinen muokkain (VisualEditor, VE) on uusi tapa muokata Wikipediaa. Sen kehittämisestä vastaa Wikimedia-säätiö. Sen avulla käyttäjät voivat muokata osaamatta wikikoodia. Tavoitteena on tehdä Wikipedian muokkaamisesta entistä helpompaa.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lue '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Raportoi ongelmasta''' Visuaalisessa muokkaimessa].
|-
| Opi linkkien luomien, kuvien lisääminen ja siirtely, lähdeviitteiden luominen, mallineiden lisääminen ja taulukoiden muokkaaminen.
|Muista mainita '''verkkoselaimesi, käyttöjärjestelmäsi ja Wikipedia-teemasi''' (useimmiten Vector, joskus Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tietoja Visuaalisesta muokkaimesta ==

Visuaalinen muokkain on &quot;visuaalinen&quot; tapa muokata Wikipediaa. Wikipedian muokkaaminen on aina edellyttänyt pientenkin muokkausten tekemiseksi melko monimutkaisen [[w:fi:Merkintäkieli|merkintäkieltä]]. Vuonna 2001 tämä oli hyväksyttävissä; vuonna 2013 se on [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|karkottamassa muokkaajia pois]]. Toivomme Visuaalisen muokkaimen olevan hyödyllinen nykyisille ja käyttäjäystävällinen uusille muokkaajille. 

Visuaalinen muokkain on ollut saatavilla valinnaisena, keskeneräisenä julkaisuna MediaWikissä vuoden 2012 puolestavälistä lähtien, englanninkielisessä Wikipediassa joulukuusta 2012 lähtien, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 muulla kielellä huhtikuusta 2013] ja [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ lähes kaikilla kielillä] kesäkuusta 2013 lähtien. Heinäkuussa 2015 se on käytössä oletuksena kirjautuneilla ja tunnistautumattomilla muokkaajilla yli 75 prosentissa Wikipedioista.
Tavoitteena on julkaista se oletusvaihtoehtona suurimmassa osassa [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|jäljellä olevista kieliversioista]] loppuvuodesta 2015.
Marraskuusta 2014 lähties se on ollut saatavilla [[Beta Features|valinnaisena ominaisuutena]] myös kaikilla Wikimedia-säätiön (WMF) sivustoilla Wikisanakirjaa ja Wikisitaatteja lukuun ottamatta.

Julkaisemme [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|monikielisen uutiskirjeen]], joka käsittelee WMF-wikejä.

== Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttäminen ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Jos olet kiinnostunut Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttämisestä muokkaamiseen, meillä on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ohje siihen]], ja sen lisäksi [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|luettelo yleisistä pikanäppäimistä]].

Visuaalisessa muokkaimessa on vielä joitakin ongelmia ja puutteita. Ilmoita rohkeasti kaikista ongelmista [[VisualEditor/Feedback|palautesivulla]]. Ajankohtaisia ongelmia:

* '''Hidas latautumaan''' — Monimutkaisten ja pitkien sivujen latautuminen voi kestää pitkään. Tulevaisuudessa ohjelmisto tulee olemaan paljon nopeampi ja mahdollistaa entistä laajempien sivujen muokkaamisen.
* '''Puutteelliset muokkaustoiminnot''' — Jotkut osat näkyvät normaalisti, ja myös niiden sisällön muokkaaminen onnistuu, mutta niiden rakenteen muokkaaminen ja lisääminen ei ole mahdollista. Tämä on yksi pääkehityskohteistamme.
* '''Vain sisältösivuja, ei keskusteluja''' — Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttö on rajoitettua tiettyihin sivutyyppeihin: useimmissa Wikipedioissa sillä voi muokata artikkeleita, Käyttäjä:-, Tiedosto:-, Ohje:- ja Luokka:-sivuja. Sen sijaan keskustelusivujen tai Wikipedia:-sivujen muokkaaminen ei ole mahdollista.

Suosittelemme napsauttamaan &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;-painiketta ennen sivun tallentamista ja [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ilmoittamaan kaikista ongelmista]].

== Osallistuminen ==

Visuaalisen muokkaimen kehittäminen mahdollisimman toimivaksi edellyttää paljon työtä. Oikeastaan erittäin tärkeä yksittäinen tehtävä olisi ohjelmiston käyttö ja virheiden [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ilmoittaminen]], mutta myös muita tehtäviä riittää. Tässä muutamia:

* '''Ohjesivujen päivittäminen''' — Kaikilla projekteillamme on ohjesivut uusien käyttäjien opastamiseksi. Valitettavasti ne on kirjoitettu vanhaan lähdekoodimuokkaimeen pohjautuen, ja myös Visuaalisen muokkaimen ohjeet vanhenevat ohjelmiston kehittyessä nopeasti. [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|Ohjesivujen päivittäminen]] olisikin tärkeää [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttöohjeen]] pohjalta.
* '''TemplateData-mallineohjeistuksen lisääminen''' — Visuaalisessa muokkaimessa on näppärä mallinemuokkaustoiminto, jonka käyttöä on kuvailtu tarkemmin[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|käyttöoppaassa]]. Joidenkin mallineiden kentät on nimetty, ja niillä on käyttöä helpottavat kuvaukset. Joiltakin mallineilta nämä tiedot puuttuvat, sillä toiminto edellyttää jokaiselle mallineelle TemplateData-sivun luomista, joka on mallineen käyttöohje. Jos olet kiinnostunut tästä, tutustu[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|ohjeeseen]] ja [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|luetteloon tärkeimmistä mallineista]].
* '''Yhteisön auttaminen''' — Katso hyödyllisiä tapoja, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|miten voit auttaa yhteisöä]] optimoimaan muokkauskokemusta visuaalisella muokkaimella.
* '''Uusien käyttäjien auttaminen''' — Visuaalisen muokkaimen tavoitteena on ennen kaikkea harvemmin muokkaaiven käyttäjien määrän lisääminen - nämä käyttäjät tarvitsevat myös enemmän opastusta kuin kokeneemmat käyttäjät. Myös uusien vuorovaikutusmenetelmien kehittäminen on tärkeää. Voit auttaa  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|tukemalla uusia käyttäjiä tukikeskuksessa tai IRC-kanavalla]].

==Katso myös==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - tarkistuslista muokkauskokemuksen optimoimisesta wikillesi ja kanssamuokkaajillesi.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>pzbskhip9qva5sx3w2k2l05etvr6ks9</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403006</id>
      <parentid>5402416</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6984" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Tervetuloa ''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Visuaalisen muokkaimen]]'' portaaliin. Visuaalinen muokkain (VisualEditor, VE) on uusi tapa muokata Wikipediaa. Sen kehittämisestä vastaa Wikimedia-säätiö. Sen avulla käyttäjät voivat muokata osaamatta wikikoodia. Tavoitteena on tehdä Wikipedian muokkaamisesta entistä helpompaa.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lue '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Raportoi ongelmasta''' Visuaalisessa muokkaimessa].
|-
| Opi linkkien luomien, kuvien lisääminen ja siirtely, lähdeviitteiden luominen, mallineiden lisääminen ja taulukoiden muokkaaminen.
|Muista mainita '''verkkoselaimesi, käyttöjärjestelmäsi ja Wikipedia-teemasi''' (useimmiten Vector, joskus Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tietoja Visuaalisesta muokkaimesta ==

Visuaalinen muokkain on &quot;visuaalinen&quot; tapa muokata Wikipediaa. Wikipedian muokkaaminen on aina edellyttänyt pientenkin muokkausten tekemiseksi melko monimutkaisen [[w:fi:Merkintäkieli|merkintäkieltä]]. Vuonna 2001 tämä oli hyväksyttävissä; vuonna 2013 se on [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|karkottamassa muokkaajia pois]]. Toivomme Visuaalisen muokkaimen olevan hyödyllinen nykyisille ja käyttäjäystävällinen uusille muokkaajille. 

Visuaalinen muokkain on ollut saatavilla valinnaisena, keskeneräisenä julkaisuna MediaWikissä vuoden 2012 puolestavälistä lähtien, englanninkielisessä Wikipediassa joulukuusta 2012 lähtien, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 muulla kielellä huhtikuusta 2013] ja [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ lähes kaikilla kielillä] kesäkuusta 2013 lähtien. Heinäkuussa 2015 se on käytössä oletuksena kirjautuneilla ja tunnistautumattomilla muokkaajilla yli 75 prosentissa Wikipedioista.
Tavoitteena on julkaista se oletusvaihtoehtona suurimmassa osassa [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|jäljellä olevista kieliversioista]] loppuvuodesta 2015.
Marraskuusta 2014 lähties se on ollut saatavilla [[Beta Features|valinnaisena ominaisuutena]] myös kaikilla Wikimedia-säätiön (WMF) sivustoilla Wikisanakirjaa ja Wikisitaatteja lukuun ottamatta.

Julkaisemme [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|monikielisen uutiskirjeen]], joka käsittelee WMF-wikejä.

== Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttäminen ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Jos olet kiinnostunut Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttämisestä muokkaamiseen, meillä on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ohje siihen]], ja sen lisäksi [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|luettelo yleisistä pikanäppäimistä]].

Visuaalisessa muokkaimessa on vielä joitakin ongelmia ja puutteita. Ilmoita rohkeasti kaikista ongelmista [[VisualEditor/Feedback|palautesivulla]]. Ajankohtaisia ongelmia:

* '''Hidas latautumaan''' — Monimutkaisten ja pitkien sivujen latautuminen voi kestää pitkään. Tulevaisuudessa ohjelmisto tulee olemaan paljon nopeampi ja mahdollistaa entistä laajempien sivujen muokkaamisen.
* '''Puutteelliset muokkaustoiminnot''' — Jotkut osat näkyvät normaalisti, ja myös niiden sisällön muokkaaminen onnistuu, mutta niiden rakenteen muokkaaminen ja lisääminen ei ole mahdollista. Tämä on yksi pääkehityskohteistamme.
* '''Vain sisältösivuja, ei keskusteluja''' — Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttö on rajoitettua tiettyihin sivutyyppeihin: useimmissa Wikipedioissa sillä voi muokata artikkeleita, Käyttäjä:-, Tiedosto:-, Ohje:- ja Luokka:-sivuja. Sen sijaan keskustelusivujen tai Wikipedia:-sivujen muokkaaminen ei ole mahdollista.

Suosittelemme napsauttamaan &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;-painiketta ennen sivun tallentamista ja [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ilmoittamaan kaikista ongelmista]].

== Osallistuminen ==

Visuaalisen muokkaimen kehittäminen mahdollisimman toimivaksi edellyttää paljon työtä. Oikeastaan erittäin tärkeä yksittäinen tehtävä olisi ohjelmiston käyttö ja virheiden [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ilmoittaminen]], mutta myös muita tehtäviä riittää. Tässä muutamia:

* '''Ohjesivujen päivittäminen''' — Kaikilla projekteillamme on ohjesivut uusien käyttäjien opastamiseksi. Valitettavasti ne on kirjoitettu vanhaan lähdekoodimuokkaimeen pohjautuen, ja myös Visuaalisen muokkaimen ohjeet vanhenevat ohjelmiston kehittyessä nopeasti. [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|Ohjesivujen päivittäminen]] olisikin tärkeää [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttöohjeen]] pohjalta.
* '''TemplateData-mallineohjeistuksen lisääminen''' — Visuaalisessa muokkaimessa on näppärä mallinemuokkaustoiminto, jonka käyttöä on kuvailtu tarkemmin[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|käyttöoppaassa]]. Joidenkin mallineiden kentät on nimetty, ja niillä on käyttöä helpottavat kuvaukset. Joiltakin mallineilta nämä tiedot puuttuvat, sillä toiminto edellyttää jokaiselle mallineelle TemplateData-sivun luomista, joka on mallineen käyttöohje. Jos olet kiinnostunut tästä, tutustu[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|ohjeeseen]] ja [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|luetteloon tärkeimmistä mallineista]].
* '''Yhteisön auttaminen''' — Katso hyödyllisiä tapoja, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|miten voit auttaa yhteisöä]] optimoimaan muokkauskokemusta visuaalisella muokkaimella.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Uusien käyttäjien auttaminen''' — Visuaalisen muokkaimen tavoitteena on ennen kaikkea harvemmin muokkaaiven käyttäjien määrän lisääminen - nämä käyttäjät tarvitsevat myös enemmän opastusta kuin kokeneemmat käyttäjät. Myös uusien vuorovaikutusmenetelmien kehittäminen on tärkeää. Voit auttaa  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|tukemalla uusia käyttäjiä tukikeskuksessa tai IRC-kanavalla]].
&lt;/div&gt;

==Katso myös==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - tarkistuslista muokkauskokemuksen optimoimisesta wikillesi ja kanssamuokkaajillesi.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>g6aednxez86yh5isoqyejrsus61z73u</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403053</id>
      <parentid>5403006</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:01:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6944" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Tervetuloa ''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Visuaalisen muokkaimen]]'' portaaliin. Visuaalinen muokkain (VisualEditor, VE) on uusi tapa muokata Wikipediaa. Sen kehittämisestä vastaa Wikimedia-säätiö. Sen avulla käyttäjät voivat muokata osaamatta wikikoodia. Tavoitteena on tehdä Wikipedian muokkaamisesta entistä helpompaa.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lue '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Raportoi ongelmasta''' Visuaalisessa muokkaimessa].
|-
| Opi linkkien luomien, kuvien lisääminen ja siirtely, lähdeviitteiden luominen, mallineiden lisääminen ja taulukoiden muokkaaminen.
|Muista mainita '''verkkoselaimesi, käyttöjärjestelmäsi ja Wikipedia-teemasi''' (useimmiten Vector, joskus Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tietoja Visuaalisesta muokkaimesta ==

Visuaalinen muokkain on &quot;visuaalinen&quot; tapa muokata Wikipediaa. Wikipedian muokkaaminen on aina edellyttänyt pientenkin muokkausten tekemiseksi melko monimutkaisen [[w:fi:Merkintäkieli|merkintäkieltä]]. Vuonna 2001 tämä oli hyväksyttävissä; vuonna 2013 se on [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|karkottamassa muokkaajia pois]]. Toivomme Visuaalisen muokkaimen olevan hyödyllinen nykyisille ja käyttäjäystävällinen uusille muokkaajille. 

Visuaalinen muokkain on ollut saatavilla valinnaisena, keskeneräisenä julkaisuna MediaWikissä vuoden 2012 puolestavälistä lähtien, englanninkielisessä Wikipediassa joulukuusta 2012 lähtien, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 muulla kielellä huhtikuusta 2013] ja [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ lähes kaikilla kielillä] kesäkuusta 2013 lähtien. Heinäkuussa 2015 se on käytössä oletuksena kirjautuneilla ja tunnistautumattomilla muokkaajilla yli 75 prosentissa Wikipedioista.
Tavoitteena on julkaista se oletusvaihtoehtona suurimmassa osassa [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|jäljellä olevista kieliversioista]] loppuvuodesta 2015.
Marraskuusta 2014 lähties se on ollut saatavilla [[Beta Features|valinnaisena ominaisuutena]] myös kaikilla Wikimedia-säätiön (WMF) sivustoilla Wikisanakirjaa ja Wikisitaatteja lukuun ottamatta.

Julkaisemme [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|monikielisen uutiskirjeen]], joka käsittelee WMF-wikejä.

== Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttäminen ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Jos olet kiinnostunut Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttämisestä muokkaamiseen, meillä on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ohje siihen]], ja sen lisäksi [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|luettelo yleisistä pikanäppäimistä]].

Visuaalisessa muokkaimessa on vielä joitakin ongelmia ja puutteita. Ilmoita rohkeasti kaikista ongelmista [[VisualEditor/Feedback|palautesivulla]]. Ajankohtaisia ongelmia:

* '''Hidas latautumaan''' — Monimutkaisten ja pitkien sivujen latautuminen voi kestää pitkään. Tulevaisuudessa ohjelmisto tulee olemaan paljon nopeampi ja mahdollistaa entistä laajempien sivujen muokkaamisen.
* '''Puutteelliset muokkaustoiminnot''' — Jotkut osat näkyvät normaalisti, ja myös niiden sisällön muokkaaminen onnistuu, mutta niiden rakenteen muokkaaminen ja lisääminen ei ole mahdollista. Tämä on yksi pääkehityskohteistamme.
* '''Vain sisältösivuja, ei keskusteluja''' — Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttö on rajoitettua tiettyihin sivutyyppeihin: useimmissa Wikipedioissa sillä voi muokata artikkeleita, Käyttäjä:-, Tiedosto:-, Ohje:- ja Luokka:-sivuja. Sen sijaan keskustelusivujen tai Wikipedia:-sivujen muokkaaminen ei ole mahdollista.

Suosittelemme napsauttamaan &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;-painiketta ennen sivun tallentamista ja [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ilmoittamaan kaikista ongelmista]].

== Osallistuminen ==

Visuaalisen muokkaimen kehittäminen mahdollisimman toimivaksi edellyttää paljon työtä. Oikeastaan erittäin tärkeä yksittäinen tehtävä olisi ohjelmiston käyttö ja virheiden [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ilmoittaminen]], mutta myös muita tehtäviä riittää. Tässä muutamia:

* '''Ohjesivujen päivittäminen''' — Kaikilla projekteillamme on ohjesivut uusien käyttäjien opastamiseksi. Valitettavasti ne on kirjoitettu vanhaan lähdekoodimuokkaimeen pohjautuen, ja myös Visuaalisen muokkaimen ohjeet vanhenevat ohjelmiston kehittyessä nopeasti. [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|Ohjesivujen päivittäminen]] olisikin tärkeää [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttöohjeen]] pohjalta.
* '''TemplateData-mallineohjeistuksen lisääminen''' — Visuaalisessa muokkaimessa on näppärä mallinemuokkaustoiminto, jonka käyttöä on kuvailtu tarkemmin[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|käyttöoppaassa]]. Joidenkin mallineiden kentät on nimetty, ja niillä on käyttöä helpottavat kuvaukset. Joiltakin mallineilta nämä tiedot puuttuvat, sillä toiminto edellyttää jokaiselle mallineelle TemplateData-sivun luomista, joka on mallineen käyttöohje. Jos olet kiinnostunut tästä, tutustu[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|ohjeeseen]] ja [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|luetteloon tärkeimmistä mallineista]].
* '''Yhteisön auttaminen''' — Katso hyödyllisiä tapoja, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|miten voit auttaa yhteisöä]] optimoimaan muokkauskokemusta visuaalisella muokkaimella.
* '''Uusien käyttäjien auttaminen''' — Visuaalisen muokkaimen tavoitteena on ennen kaikkea harvemmin muokkaaiven käyttäjien määrän lisääminen - nämä käyttäjät tarvitsevat myös enemmän opastusta kuin kokeneemmat käyttäjät. Myös uusien vuorovaikutusmenetelmien kehittäminen on tärkeää. Voit auttaa  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|tukemalla uusia käyttäjiä tukikeskuksessa tai IRC-kanavalla]].

==Katso myös==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - tarkistuslista muokkauskokemuksen optimoimisesta wikillesi ja kanssamuokkaajillesi.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>pzbskhip9qva5sx3w2k2l05etvr6ks9</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403217</id>
      <parentid>5403053</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:53:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6962" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Tervetuloa ''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Visuaalisen muokkaimen]]'' portaaliin. Visuaalinen muokkain (VisualEditor, VE) on uusi tapa muokata Wikipediaa. Sen kehittämisestä vastaa Wikimedia-säätiö. Sen avulla käyttäjät voivat muokata osaamatta wikikoodia. Tavoitteena on tehdä Wikipedian muokkaamisesta entistä helpompaa.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lue '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Raportoi ongelmasta''' Visuaalisessa muokkaimessa].
|-
| Opi linkkien luomien, kuvien lisääminen ja siirtely, lähdeviitteiden luominen, mallineiden lisääminen ja taulukoiden muokkaaminen.
|Muista mainita '''verkkoselaimesi, käyttöjärjestelmäsi ja Wikipedia-teemasi''' (useimmiten Vector, joskus Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tietoja Visuaalisesta muokkaimesta ==

Visuaalinen muokkain on &quot;visuaalinen&quot; tapa muokata Wikipediaa. Wikipedian muokkaaminen on aina edellyttänyt pientenkin muokkausten tekemiseksi melko monimutkaisen [[w:fi:Merkintäkieli|merkintäkieltä]]. Vuonna 2001 tämä oli hyväksyttävissä; vuonna 2013 se on [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|karkottamassa muokkaajia pois]]. Toivomme Visuaalisen muokkaimen olevan hyödyllinen nykyisille ja käyttäjäystävällinen uusille muokkaajille. 

Visuaalinen muokkain on ollut saatavilla valinnaisena, keskeneräisenä julkaisuna MediaWikissä vuoden 2012 puolestavälistä lähtien, englanninkielisessä Wikipediassa joulukuusta 2012 lähtien, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 muulla kielellä huhtikuusta 2013] ja [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ lähes kaikilla kielillä] kesäkuusta 2013 lähtien. Heinäkuussa 2015 se on käytössä oletuksena kirjautuneilla ja tunnistautumattomilla muokkaajilla yli 75 prosentissa Wikipedioista.
Tavoitteena on julkaista se oletusvaihtoehtona suurimmassa osassa [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|jäljellä olevista kieliversioista]] loppuvuodesta 2015.
Marraskuusta 2014 lähties se on ollut saatavilla [[Beta Features|valinnaisena ominaisuutena]] myös kaikilla Wikimedia-säätiön (WMF) sivustoilla Wikisanakirjaa ja Wikisitaatteja lukuun ottamatta.

Julkaisemme [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|monikielisen uutiskirjeen]], joka käsittelee WMF-wikejä.

== Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttäminen ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Jos olet kiinnostunut Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttämisestä muokkaamiseen, meillä on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ohje siihen]], ja sen lisäksi [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|luettelo yleisistä pikanäppäimistä]].

Visuaalisessa muokkaimessa on vielä joitakin ongelmia ja puutteita. Ilmoita rohkeasti kaikista ongelmista [[VisualEditor/Feedback|palautesivulla]]. Ajankohtaisia ongelmia:

* '''Hidas latautumaan''' — Monimutkaisten ja pitkien sivujen latautuminen voi kestää pitkään. Tulevaisuudessa ohjelmisto tulee olemaan paljon nopeampi ja mahdollistaa entistä laajempien sivujen muokkaamisen.
* '''Puutteelliset muokkaustoiminnot''' — Jotkut osat näkyvät normaalisti, ja myös niiden sisällön muokkaaminen onnistuu, mutta niiden rakenteen muokkaaminen ja lisääminen ei ole mahdollista. Tämä on yksi pääkehityskohteistamme.
* '''Vain sisältösivuja, ei keskusteluja''' — Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttö on rajoitettua tiettyihin sivutyyppeihin: useimmissa Wikipedioissa sillä voi muokata artikkeleita, Käyttäjä:-, Tiedosto:-, Ohje:- ja Luokka:-sivuja. Sen sijaan keskustelusivujen tai Wikipedia:-sivujen muokkaaminen ei ole mahdollista.

Suosittelemme napsauttamaan &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;-painiketta ennen sivun tallentamista ja [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ilmoittamaan kaikista ongelmista]].

== Osallistuminen ==

Visuaalisen muokkaimen kehittäminen mahdollisimman toimivaksi edellyttää paljon työtä. Oikeastaan erittäin tärkeä yksittäinen tehtävä olisi ohjelmiston käyttö ja virheiden [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ilmoittaminen]], mutta myös muita tehtäviä riittää. Tässä muutamia:

* '''Ohjesivujen päivittäminen''' — Kaikilla projekteillamme on ohjesivut uusien käyttäjien opastamiseksi. Valitettavasti ne on kirjoitettu vanhaan lähdekoodimuokkaimeen pohjautuen, ja myös Visuaalisen muokkaimen ohjeet vanhenevat ohjelmiston kehittyessä nopeasti. [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|Ohjesivujen päivittäminen]] olisikin tärkeää [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Visuaalisen muokkaimen käyttöohjeen]] pohjalta.
* '''TemplateData-mallineohjeistuksen lisääminen''' — Visuaalisessa muokkaimessa on näppärä mallinemuokkaustoiminto, jonka käyttöä on kuvailtu tarkemmin[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|käyttöoppaassa]]. Joidenkin mallineiden kentät on nimetty, ja niillä on käyttöä helpottavat kuvaukset. Joiltakin mallineilta nämä tiedot puuttuvat, sillä toiminto edellyttää jokaiselle mallineelle TemplateData-sivun luomista, joka on mallineen käyttöohje. Jos olet kiinnostunut tästä, tutustu[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|ohjeeseen]] ja [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|luetteloon tärkeimmistä mallineista]].
* '''Yhteisön auttaminen''' — Katso hyödyllisiä tapoja, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|miten voit auttaa yhteisöä]] optimoimaan muokkauskokemusta visuaalisella muokkaimella.
* '''Uusien käyttäjien auttaminen''' — Visuaalisen muokkaimen tavoitteena on ennen kaikkea harvemmin muokkaaiven käyttäjien määrän lisääminen - nämä käyttäjät tarvitsevat myös enemmän opastusta kuin kokeneemmat käyttäjät. Myös uusien vuorovaikutusmenetelmien kehittäminen on tärkeää. Voit auttaa  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|tukemalla uusia käyttäjiä tukikeskuksessa tai IRC-kanavalla]].

==Katso myös==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - tarkistuslista muokkauskokemuksen optimoimisesta wikillesi ja kanssamuokkaajillesi.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>gc6isd50fhgqg5qradd6kj50rift3kj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/cs</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>141080</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403000</id>
      <parentid>4987731</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7186" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Vítejte na portálu '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Vizuálního editoru]]'''. Vizuální editor (VE) je nástroj pro editaci Wikipedie, který vyvíjí nadace Wikimedia Foundation. Vizuální editor umožňuje editovat bez nutnosti učit se wikijazyk.  Doufáme, že pomůže povzbudit lidi k tomu, aby do Wikipedie přispívali.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Čtěte: '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Nahlaste chybu''' Vizuálního editoru].
|-
| Dozvíte se, jak vyrábět odkazy, přidávat nebo přesouvat obrázky, tvořit citace, vkládat šablony, editovat tabulky a mnoho dalšího.
|Uveďte prosím svůj '''webový prohlížeč, operační systém počítače a používaný vzhled Wikipedie''' (většinou Vektor, někdy Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== O Vizuálním editoru ==

Vizuální editor je &quot;názorným&quot; způsobem editace Wikipedie. Editování Wikipedie doposud od člověka vyžadovalo naučit se wikijazyk. Poměrně složitý značkovací jazyk. Dokonce i jen kvůli nepatrným změnám v nějakém článku. V roce 2001 to byl přijatelný požadavek. V roce 2013 to však již [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|přispěvatele odrazuje]]. Doufáme, že Vizuální editor bude užitečný pro stávající přispěvatele a přívětivější pro uživatele nové. 

Vizuální editor je dostupný jako volitelný v „alfaverzi“ na MediaWiki.org od půlky roku 2012, na anglické Wikipedii od prosince 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ ve 14 dalších jazycích] od dubna 2013 a [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ téměř všech dalších jazycích] od začátku června 2013. V červenci 2015 byl implicitně zapnutý přihlášeným i nepřihlášeným uživatelům na více než 75 % Wikipedií.
Předpokládáme, že pro většinu [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|zbývajících jazyků]] bude k dispozici ke konci roku 2015.
Od konce listopadu 2014 je také dostupný jako volitelná [[Beta Features|betafunkce]] na všech wiki WMF s výjimkou Wikislovníku a Wikizdrojů.

Vydáváme [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|vícejazyčný zpravodaj]] zaměřený na wiki WMF.

== Používání Vizuálního editoru ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Pokud Vás zajímá, jak Vizuální editor používat k editování, je tu [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|uživatelská příručka]] a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|seznam běžných klávesových zkratek]].

Vizuální editor má v současnosti některé chyby a omezení. Pokud na nějakou chybu narazíte, prosíme neváhejte [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ji ohlásit na příslušné stránce]]. Mezi stávající omezení patří:

* '''Pomalé načítání''' – nějakou chvíli trvá, než se do Vizuálního editoru načtou dlouhé a složité stránky. V budoucnu bude tento software mnohem rychlejší a umožní i načítání velkých stránek.
* '''Neúplné editování''' – Některé prvky složitého formátování se zobrazí a umožní upravovat jejich obsah, ale neumožní uživatelům upravit jejich strukturu nebo přidat nové položky – jako například seznamy definic. Rozšiřování funkcionalit v této oblasti je jednou z našich priorit.
* '''Většina obsahových stránek, diskuse ne''' – Vizuální editor je zapnut pouze v některých jmenných prostorech. Na většině Wikipediích lze Vizuální editor používat v článcích, stránkách uživatelů, souborů, nápovědy a kategorií. Vizuální editor momentálně není dostupný pro editace projektových stránek ani na diskusních stránkách.

Kvůli těmto omezením a nevyhnutelným programovým chybám doporučujeme, aby uživatelé klikli na „{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}“ předtím, než stránku uloží a [[VisualEditor/Feedback|oznámili každý problém, na který narazí]]

== Jak pomoci ==

Aby Vizuální editor mohl být tak dobrý, jak jen může být, potřebujeme pomoci s mnoha věcmi. Samozřejmě, jednou velkou oblastí je používání softwaru, nacházení chyb a [[VisualEditor/Feedback|jejich oznamování]], ale jsou tu také mnohé další úkoly. Ty zahrnují:

* '''Aktualizace nápovědy''' – všechny naše projekty mají své stránky nápovědy usnadňující novým uživatelům přispívání. Bohužel jsou všechny založeny na editoru wikitextu a v průběhu vývoje Vizuálního editoru se náhledy obrazovek a průvodci stávají zastaralými. Velmi by pomohlo, pokud by někdo mohl  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|aktualizovat nápovědu]], a to v souladu s [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|naší stránkou pro používání Vizuálního editoru]].
* '''Doplňování šablon o TemplateData''' – Vizuální editor obsahuje zdařilý editor šablon, podrobněji popsaný v  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|naší nápovědě]]. Jak sami při jeho použití na Wikipedii uvidíte, některé šablony mají pojmenované parametry a kvalitní popisky, ovšem jiné nikoliv. To je proto, že pro tuto funkčnost šablona potřebuje „TemplateData“. Pokud byste chtěli TemplateData vkládat, máme [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|průvodce, jak to činit]], spolu se [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|seznamem nejdůležitějších šablon, do nichž je potřeba je vložit]].
* '''Pomoc vaší komunitě''' – přečtěte si [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|seznam užitečných způsobů, jak pomoci místní komunitě]] ke zlepšení dojmů z editace Vizuálním editorem.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Pomoc novým uživatelům''' – pokud bude Vizuální editor úspěšný, budeme mít mnohem více nových uživatelů než doposud; avšak byť třeba bude editování snažší, naučit se spolupracovat s Wikispolečenstvím zůstane pořád těžké. Prosíme, zkuste strávit nějaký čas [[$new-users|na helpdesku nebo na nápovědním IRC kanálu]], abyste pomohli těmto nováčkům přizpůsobit se Wikipedii.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Související stránky ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - kontrolní seznam o optimalizaci editačních zkušeností pro wiki a další editory.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - získávat a nabízet pomoc pro práci s vizuálními editory od jiných Wikimediánů jako jste vy.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - původní průvodce pro komunity bez žádných zkušeností s Vizuálním editorem

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>9ejk8hf26xpqj9psszwkzhbahdhw261</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403041</id>
      <parentid>5403000</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:54:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7184" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Vítejte na portálu '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Vizuálního editoru]]'''. Vizuální editor (VE) je nástroj pro editaci Wikipedie, který vyvíjí nadace Wikimedia Foundation. Vizuální editor umožňuje editovat bez nutnosti učit se wikijazyk.  Doufáme, že pomůže povzbudit lidi k tomu, aby do Wikipedie přispívali.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Čtěte: '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Nahlaste chybu''' Vizuálního editoru].
|-
| Dozvíte se, jak vyrábět odkazy, přidávat nebo přesouvat obrázky, tvořit citace, vkládat šablony, editovat tabulky a mnoho dalšího.
|Uveďte prosím svůj '''webový prohlížeč, operační systém počítače a používaný vzhled Wikipedie''' (většinou Vektor, někdy Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== O Vizuálním editoru ==

Vizuální editor je &quot;názorným&quot; způsobem editace Wikipedie. Editování Wikipedie doposud od člověka vyžadovalo naučit se wikijazyk. Poměrně složitý značkovací jazyk. Dokonce i jen kvůli nepatrným změnám v nějakém článku. V roce 2001 to byl přijatelný požadavek. V roce 2013 to však již [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|přispěvatele odrazuje]]. Doufáme, že Vizuální editor bude užitečný pro stávající přispěvatele a přívětivější pro uživatele nové. 

Vizuální editor je dostupný jako volitelný v „alfaverzi“ na MediaWiki.org od půlky roku 2012, na anglické Wikipedii od prosince 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ ve 14 dalších jazycích] od dubna 2013 a [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ téměř všech dalších jazycích] od začátku června 2013. V červenci 2015 byl implicitně zapnutý přihlášeným i nepřihlášeným uživatelům na více než 75 % Wikipedií.
Předpokládáme, že pro většinu [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|zbývajících jazyků]] bude k dispozici ke konci roku 2015.
Od konce listopadu 2014 je také dostupný jako volitelná [[Beta Features|betafunkce]] na všech wiki WMF s výjimkou Wikislovníku a Wikizdrojů.

Vydáváme [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|vícejazyčný zpravodaj]] zaměřený na wiki WMF.

== Používání Vizuálního editoru ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Pokud Vás zajímá, jak Vizuální editor používat k editování, je tu [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|uživatelská příručka]] a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|seznam běžných klávesových zkratek]].

Vizuální editor má v současnosti některé chyby a omezení. Pokud na nějakou chybu narazíte, prosíme neváhejte [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ji ohlásit na příslušné stránce]]. Mezi stávající omezení patří:

* '''Pomalé načítání''' – nějakou chvíli trvá, než se do Vizuálního editoru načtou dlouhé a složité stránky. V budoucnu bude tento software mnohem rychlejší a umožní i načítání velkých stránek.
* '''Neúplné editování''' – Některé prvky složitého formátování se zobrazí a umožní upravovat jejich obsah, ale neumožní uživatelům upravit jejich strukturu nebo přidat nové položky – jako například seznamy definic. Rozšiřování funkcionalit v této oblasti je jednou z našich priorit.
* '''Většina obsahových stránek, diskuse ne''' – Vizuální editor je zapnut pouze v některých jmenných prostorech. Na většině Wikipediích lze Vizuální editor používat v článcích, stránkách uživatelů, souborů, nápovědy a kategorií. Vizuální editor momentálně není dostupný pro editace projektových stránek ani na diskusních stránkách.

Kvůli těmto omezením a nevyhnutelným programovým chybám doporučujeme, aby uživatelé klikli na „{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}“ předtím, než stránku uloží a [[VisualEditor/Feedback|oznámili každý problém, na který narazí]]

== Jak pomoci ==

Aby Vizuální editor mohl být tak dobrý, jak jen může být, potřebujeme pomoci s mnoha věcmi. Samozřejmě, jednou velkou oblastí je používání softwaru, nacházení chyb a [[VisualEditor/Feedback|jejich oznamování]], ale jsou tu také mnohé další úkoly. Ty zahrnují:

* '''Aktualizace nápovědy''' – všechny naše projekty mají své stránky nápovědy usnadňující novým uživatelům přispívání. Bohužel jsou všechny založeny na editoru wikitextu a v průběhu vývoje Vizuálního editoru se náhledy obrazovek a průvodci stávají zastaralými. Velmi by pomohlo, pokud by někdo mohl  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|aktualizovat nápovědu]], a to v souladu s [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|naší stránkou pro používání Vizuálního editoru]].
* '''Doplňování šablon o TemplateData''' – Vizuální editor obsahuje zdařilý editor šablon, podrobněji popsaný v  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|naší nápovědě]]. Jak sami při jeho použití na Wikipedii uvidíte, některé šablony mají pojmenované parametry a kvalitní popisky, ovšem jiné nikoliv. To je proto, že pro tuto funkčnost šablona potřebuje „TemplateData“. Pokud byste chtěli TemplateData vkládat, máme [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|průvodce, jak to činit]], spolu se [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|seznamem nejdůležitějších šablon, do nichž je potřeba je vložit]].
* '''Pomoc vaší komunitě''' – přečtěte si [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|seznam užitečných způsobů, jak pomoci místní komunitě]] ke zlepšení dojmů z editace Vizuálním editorem.
* '''Pomoc novým uživatelům''' – pokud bude Vizuální editor úspěšný, budeme mít mnohem více nových uživatelů než doposud; avšak byť třeba bude editování snažší, naučit se spolupracovat s Wikispolečenstvím zůstane pořád těžké. Prosíme, zkuste strávit nějaký čas [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|na helpdesku nebo na nápovědním IRC kanálu]], abyste pomohli těmto nováčkům přizpůsobit se Wikipedii.

== Související stránky ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - kontrolní seznam o optimalizaci editačních zkušeností pro wiki a další editory.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - získávat a nabízet pomoc pro práci s vizuálními editory od jiných Wikimediánů jako jste vy.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - původní průvodce pro komunity bez žádných zkušeností s Vizuálním editorem

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>fa00opi16ddbjops25jujoysazhj9y7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/he</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>141247</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403222</id>
      <parentid>1803012</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:56:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="754" xml:space="preserve">* '''הוספת TemplateData לתבניות:''' העורך החזותי מסוגל לערוך תבניות בנוחות, כמתואר בפירוט ב[[$ug|דפי העזרה]]. כפי שתראו אם תשתמשו בו בוויקיפדיה, לחלק מהתבניות יש פרמטרים עם שמות ברורים ותיאורים נהירים שהופכים אותן לקלות לשימוש. לאחרות אין, כיוון שדפי התבניות זקוקים לתוכן שנקרא &quot;[[TemplateData]]&quot; לפני שתכונה זו יכולה לעבוד. אם אתם מעוניינים להוסיף TemplateData, יש לנו [[$td-tutor|מדריך על כך]], יחד עם [[$td|רשימה של התבניות החשובות ביותר שזקוקות לו]].</text>
      <sha1>3iuxpwb8i7mhs15inooy1a1l90wutuj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/he</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>141248</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403058</id>
      <parentid>1803016</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:02:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="566" xml:space="preserve">* '''עזרה למשמשים חדשים:''' אם השקת העורך תהא מוצלחת יהיו לנו הרבה יותר משתמשים חדשים מבדרך כלל, ואף־על־פי שעריכה תהיה קלה יותר, הבנת כללי קהילת ויקיפדיה (כמו הפתרון המקובל למלחמות עריכה) עדיין עלולה להיות מבלבלת. אנא נסו להקציב מעט זמן בדלפק הייעוץ או ב[[$1|פורטל המשתמשים החדשים]] על מנת לעזור להם להתאקלם לוויקיפדיה.</text>
      <sha1>b7mgleajd2yr13g5zgqrn8x02ojim0p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/ar</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>141492</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402995</id>
      <parentid>4989877</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9544" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
أهلًا وسهلًا بك في بوابة '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|المحرر المرئي]]'''. المحرر المرئي «VisualEditor - VE» هو طريقة جديدة لتعديل ويكيبيديا يجري تصميمها في مؤسسة ويكيميديا. يفسح المحرر للمستخدم التعديل دون الحاجة لتعلم ترميز الويكي. نأمل أن يساعد هذا الأمر الأفراد في المساهمة في ويكيبيديا.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | طالع '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''رفع بلاغ عن مشكلة''' في المحرر المرئي].
|-
| تعرف على كيفية إضافة وصلات شبكية وإضافة الصور ورفعها وإضافة استشهادات وإدراج قوالب وتعديل الجداول وغيرها الكثير.
|يرجى ذكر '''مستعرض الوب الذي تستخدمه ونظام تشغيل حاسوبك وسمة ويكيبيديا''' (عادة ما تكون السمة Vector وأحيانًا تكون Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== عن المحرر المرئي ==

المحرر المرئي هو سبيل «مرئي» لتعديل ويكيبيديا. تطلب تعديل ويكيبيديا في السابق من الأفراد تعلم ترميز الويكي، وهي لغة ترميز معقدة إلى حد ما وذلك في أمور مثل إجراء تعديلات طفيفة على صفحة. في 2001 كان هذا الأمر مقبولًا أما في 2015 ينتج عنه [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|عزوف المساهمين]]. نأمل أن يكون المحرر المرئي مفيدًا للمساهمين القائمين وجاذبًا للمستخدمين الجدد. 

كان المحرر المرئي متاحًا في صفة إصدار «ألفا» يمكن تنشيطه على موقع MediaWiki.org منذ منتصف 2012 وعلى ويكيبيديا الإنكليزية منذ ديسمبر/كانون الأول 2012، و[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ في 14 لغة أخرى منذ أبريل/نيسان 2013]، وفي [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ كافة اللغات تقريبًا] منذ بداية شهر يونيو/حزيران 2013. منذ شهر يوليو/حزيران 2015، أصبح متاحًا بصفة افتراضية للمستخدمين مسجلي الدخول وغير مسجلي الدخول في أكثر من 75% من مواقع ويكيبيديا.
نتوقع أن يصبح متاحًا بصفة افتراضية لأغلب [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|اللغات الباقية]] في نهاية 2015.
منذ أواخر نوفمبر/تشرين الثاني 2014، أصبح متاحًا أيضًا في صفة [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|سمة تجريبية]] يمكن تنشيطها على كافة مواقع الويكي التابعة لويكيميديا عدا مواقع ويكاموس وويكي مصدر.

نصدر [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|نشرة إخبارية متعددة اللغات]]، تركز على مواقع الويكي التابعة لمؤسسة ويكيميديا.

== استخدام المحرر المرئي ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

لو كنت باستخدام المحرر المرئي في التعديل، لدينا [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|دليل لكيفية ذلك]]، وكذلك [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|قائمة لوحة المفاتيح الشائعة]].

يعاني المحرر المرئي من بعض العيوب الفنية والقيود. لو واجهتك مشكلة، لا تتردد رجاءً في [[VisualEditor/Feedback|الإبلاغ عنها على صفحة الآراء والملاحظات]]. تشمل القيود الحالية ما يلي:

* '''بطء التحميل''' — سوف يستغرق الأمر بعض الوقت مع الصفحات الطويلة المتشابكة من أجل تحميلها في المحرر المرئي. سوف تكون الأداة أسرع كثيرًا في المستقبل، وستسمح بتحميل الصفحات الكبيرة.
* '''التعديل غير الكامل''' — سوف تظهر بعض عناصر التنسيق المعقد وستسمح لك بتعديل محتواها، إلا أنها لن تسمح للمستخدمين تعديل بنيتها أو إضافة مدخلات جديدة – مثل قوائم التعريفات. إضافة سمات في هذا المجال واحد من أولوياتنا.
* '''أغلب صفحات المحتوى، لا صفحات النقاش''' — يفعّل المحرر المرئي على بعض نطاقات الاسم لا غير. في اغلب مواقع ويكيبيديا يمكن استخدام المحرر المرئي في المقالات ونطاق مستخدم: «User:» وملف: «File:» ومساعدة: «Help:» وتصنيف: «Category:». المحرر المرئي ليس متاحًا حاليًا على صفحات ويكيبيديا: «Wikipedia:» أو أي صفحات نقاش.

نحبّذ أن يضغط المستخدمين على «{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}» قبل حفظ الصفحة ومن ثم [[VisualEditor/Feedback|رفع بلاغات بأي مشاكل تواجههم]].

== كيف يمكنك المساعدة ==

كي يصبح المحرر المرئي أفضل ما يمكن، ثمة أمور عدة نحتاج للمساعدة فيها. دون شك واحد من المجالات الكبرى هو استخدام الأداة والبحث عن الأعطال الفنية وكذلك [[VisualEditor/Feedback|رفع بلاغات عنها]] إلا أنه ثمة مهام أخرى عديدة. تشمل هذه ما يلي:

* ''' تحديث صفحات المساعدة'''  -- تتضمن كل مشاريعنا على صفحات مساعدة حتى يتيسر على المستخدمين الجدد المساهمة. وللأسف كلها مبنية على محرر المصدر. وستصبح كل هذه الصفحات بدروسها ولقطات الشاشة المستخدمة بها غير محدثة مع تدشين المحرر المرئي. سيكون من المفيد إذا قام الناس ب[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]] بناءا على [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using VisualEditor]].
* '''إضافة TemplateData إلى القوالب''' — يحتوي المحرر المرئي على محرر قوالب رائع، يمكنك الاطلاع على تفاصيل عنه في [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|صفحة المساعدة]]. كما سترى لو استخدمته في ويكيبيديا، تحتوي بعض القوالب على متغيرات مسماة وبيان مفيد ييسر استخدامها. قوالب أخرى لا تحتوي عليها. هذا الأمر سببه أن القوالب تحتاج «TemplateData» قبل أن تعمل هذه السمة. لو كنت مهتمًا بإضافة TemplateData، لدينا [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|دليل لكيفية عمل هذا]]، وكذلك [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|قائمة بأهم القوالب المطلوب إضافتها لها]].
* '''ساعد مجتمعك''' — طالع [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|قائمة بأنفع السبل لمساعدة مجتمعك المحلي]] على تحقيق أقصى فائدة من خبرة التعديل مستخدمين المحرر المرئي.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''ساعد المستخدمين الجدد''' — لو كان تشدين المحرر المرئي ناجحًا، سيكون لدينا كم كبير من المستخدمين الجدد الذين اعتدنا على التعامل معهم، ورغم أن التعديل سيكون أيسر، سيظل التعرف على كيفية التفاعل مع المجتمع أمرًا عسيرًا. يرجى قضاء بعض الوقت في [[$new-users|في مكتب المساعدة أو على قناة المساعدة في آي آر سي]]، كي تساعد هؤلاء الوافدين الجدد في التعرف على طريقهم داخل ويكيبيديا.
&lt;/div&gt;

==انظر أيضًا==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - قائمة تحقق تتناول أفضل استغلال لخبرة التعديل على موقعك الويكي ولزملائك المحررين.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - أحصل على المساعدة وقدمها للأعمال المتعلقة بالمحرر المرئي وإلى الويكيميديين الآخرين مثلك.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - دليل سابق للمجتمعات حديثة العهد بالمحرر المرئي.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>5ub6pv30jtmqujzg1z4shcwa083jx0e</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403033</id>
      <parentid>5402995</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9542" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
أهلًا وسهلًا بك في بوابة '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|المحرر المرئي]]'''. المحرر المرئي «VisualEditor - VE» هو طريقة جديدة لتعديل ويكيبيديا يجري تصميمها في مؤسسة ويكيميديا. يفسح المحرر للمستخدم التعديل دون الحاجة لتعلم ترميز الويكي. نأمل أن يساعد هذا الأمر الأفراد في المساهمة في ويكيبيديا.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | طالع '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''رفع بلاغ عن مشكلة''' في المحرر المرئي].
|-
| تعرف على كيفية إضافة وصلات شبكية وإضافة الصور ورفعها وإضافة استشهادات وإدراج قوالب وتعديل الجداول وغيرها الكثير.
|يرجى ذكر '''مستعرض الوب الذي تستخدمه ونظام تشغيل حاسوبك وسمة ويكيبيديا''' (عادة ما تكون السمة Vector وأحيانًا تكون Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== عن المحرر المرئي ==

المحرر المرئي هو سبيل «مرئي» لتعديل ويكيبيديا. تطلب تعديل ويكيبيديا في السابق من الأفراد تعلم ترميز الويكي، وهي لغة ترميز معقدة إلى حد ما وذلك في أمور مثل إجراء تعديلات طفيفة على صفحة. في 2001 كان هذا الأمر مقبولًا أما في 2015 ينتج عنه [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|عزوف المساهمين]]. نأمل أن يكون المحرر المرئي مفيدًا للمساهمين القائمين وجاذبًا للمستخدمين الجدد. 

كان المحرر المرئي متاحًا في صفة إصدار «ألفا» يمكن تنشيطه على موقع MediaWiki.org منذ منتصف 2012 وعلى ويكيبيديا الإنكليزية منذ ديسمبر/كانون الأول 2012، و[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ في 14 لغة أخرى منذ أبريل/نيسان 2013]، وفي [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ كافة اللغات تقريبًا] منذ بداية شهر يونيو/حزيران 2013. منذ شهر يوليو/حزيران 2015، أصبح متاحًا بصفة افتراضية للمستخدمين مسجلي الدخول وغير مسجلي الدخول في أكثر من 75% من مواقع ويكيبيديا.
نتوقع أن يصبح متاحًا بصفة افتراضية لأغلب [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|اللغات الباقية]] في نهاية 2015.
منذ أواخر نوفمبر/تشرين الثاني 2014، أصبح متاحًا أيضًا في صفة [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|سمة تجريبية]] يمكن تنشيطها على كافة مواقع الويكي التابعة لويكيميديا عدا مواقع ويكاموس وويكي مصدر.

نصدر [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|نشرة إخبارية متعددة اللغات]]، تركز على مواقع الويكي التابعة لمؤسسة ويكيميديا.

== استخدام المحرر المرئي ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

لو كنت باستخدام المحرر المرئي في التعديل، لدينا [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|دليل لكيفية ذلك]]، وكذلك [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|قائمة لوحة المفاتيح الشائعة]].

يعاني المحرر المرئي من بعض العيوب الفنية والقيود. لو واجهتك مشكلة، لا تتردد رجاءً في [[VisualEditor/Feedback|الإبلاغ عنها على صفحة الآراء والملاحظات]]. تشمل القيود الحالية ما يلي:

* '''بطء التحميل''' — سوف يستغرق الأمر بعض الوقت مع الصفحات الطويلة المتشابكة من أجل تحميلها في المحرر المرئي. سوف تكون الأداة أسرع كثيرًا في المستقبل، وستسمح بتحميل الصفحات الكبيرة.
* '''التعديل غير الكامل''' — سوف تظهر بعض عناصر التنسيق المعقد وستسمح لك بتعديل محتواها، إلا أنها لن تسمح للمستخدمين تعديل بنيتها أو إضافة مدخلات جديدة – مثل قوائم التعريفات. إضافة سمات في هذا المجال واحد من أولوياتنا.
* '''أغلب صفحات المحتوى، لا صفحات النقاش''' — يفعّل المحرر المرئي على بعض نطاقات الاسم لا غير. في اغلب مواقع ويكيبيديا يمكن استخدام المحرر المرئي في المقالات ونطاق مستخدم: «User:» وملف: «File:» ومساعدة: «Help:» وتصنيف: «Category:». المحرر المرئي ليس متاحًا حاليًا على صفحات ويكيبيديا: «Wikipedia:» أو أي صفحات نقاش.

نحبّذ أن يضغط المستخدمين على «{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}» قبل حفظ الصفحة ومن ثم [[VisualEditor/Feedback|رفع بلاغات بأي مشاكل تواجههم]].

== كيف يمكنك المساعدة ==

كي يصبح المحرر المرئي أفضل ما يمكن، ثمة أمور عدة نحتاج للمساعدة فيها. دون شك واحد من المجالات الكبرى هو استخدام الأداة والبحث عن الأعطال الفنية وكذلك [[VisualEditor/Feedback|رفع بلاغات عنها]] إلا أنه ثمة مهام أخرى عديدة. تشمل هذه ما يلي:

* ''' تحديث صفحات المساعدة'''  -- تتضمن كل مشاريعنا على صفحات مساعدة حتى يتيسر على المستخدمين الجدد المساهمة. وللأسف كلها مبنية على محرر المصدر. وستصبح كل هذه الصفحات بدروسها ولقطات الشاشة المستخدمة بها غير محدثة مع تدشين المحرر المرئي. سيكون من المفيد إذا قام الناس ب[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]] بناءا على [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using VisualEditor]].
* '''إضافة TemplateData إلى القوالب''' — يحتوي المحرر المرئي على محرر قوالب رائع، يمكنك الاطلاع على تفاصيل عنه في [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|صفحة المساعدة]]. كما سترى لو استخدمته في ويكيبيديا، تحتوي بعض القوالب على متغيرات مسماة وبيان مفيد ييسر استخدامها. قوالب أخرى لا تحتوي عليها. هذا الأمر سببه أن القوالب تحتاج «TemplateData» قبل أن تعمل هذه السمة. لو كنت مهتمًا بإضافة TemplateData، لدينا [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|دليل لكيفية عمل هذا]]، وكذلك [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|قائمة بأهم القوالب المطلوب إضافتها لها]].
* '''ساعد مجتمعك''' — طالع [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|قائمة بأنفع السبل لمساعدة مجتمعك المحلي]] على تحقيق أقصى فائدة من خبرة التعديل مستخدمين المحرر المرئي.
* '''ساعد المستخدمين الجدد''' — لو كان تشدين المحرر المرئي ناجحًا، سيكون لدينا كم كبير من المستخدمين الجدد الذين اعتدنا على التعامل معهم، ورغم أن التعديل سيكون أيسر، سيظل التعرف على كيفية التفاعل مع المجتمع أمرًا عسيرًا. يرجى قضاء بعض الوقت في [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|في مكتب المساعدة أو على قناة المساعدة في آي آر سي]]، كي تساعد هؤلاء الوافدين الجدد في التعرف على طريقهم داخل ويكيبيديا.

==انظر أيضًا==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - قائمة تحقق تتناول أفضل استغلال لخبرة التعديل على موقعك الويكي ولزملائك المحررين.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - أحصل على المساعدة وقدمها للأعمال المتعلقة بالمحرر المرئي وإلى الويكيميديين الآخرين مثلك.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - دليل سابق للمجتمعات حديثة العهد بالمحرر المرئي.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>kdnwef3vrlonif0i5klfglv06m2w7lm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/cs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>141593</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403040</id>
      <parentid>3001205</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:54:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="416" xml:space="preserve">* '''Pomoc novým uživatelům''' – pokud bude Vizuální editor úspěšný, budeme mít mnohem více nových uživatelů než doposud; avšak byť třeba bude editování snažší, naučit se spolupracovat s Wikispolečenstvím zůstane pořád těžké. Prosíme, zkuste strávit nějaký čas [[$1|na helpdesku nebo na nápovědním IRC kanálu]], abyste pomohli těmto nováčkům přizpůsobit se Wikipedii.</text>
      <sha1>qy304s7bzzfy3atxz0udxx3oschmui7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/ar</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>141652</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403032</id>
      <parentid>4641869</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="658" xml:space="preserve">* '''ساعد المستخدمين الجدد''' — لو كان تشدين المحرر المرئي ناجحًا، سيكون لدينا كم كبير من المستخدمين الجدد الذين اعتدنا على التعامل معهم، ورغم أن التعديل سيكون أيسر، سيظل التعرف على كيفية التفاعل مع المجتمع أمرًا عسيرًا. يرجى قضاء بعض الوقت في [[$1|في مكتب المساعدة أو على قناة المساعدة في آي آر سي]]، كي تساعد هؤلاء الوافدين الجدد في التعرف على طريقهم داخل ويكيبيديا.</text>
      <sha1>6lkcnp1nvjlu4ibbezl85vw7lwyr8m2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/bg</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>141683</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402758</id>
      <parentid>5346956</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:38:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="84442" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Ако искате да опитате Визуалния редактор, без да редактирате статия, [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} тук е страницата], на която може свободно да го тествате.&lt;/span&gt; Не е нужно да имате потребителска сметка, за да използвате Визуалния редактор на тази страница.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Отваряне на Визуалния редактор ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| За да редактирате страница с помощта на Визуалния редактор, кликнете върху раздела &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; в горната част на страницата.

Отварянето на страница за редактиране може да отнеме няколко секунди и повече, ако страницата е много голяма.

Кликването върху раздел &quot;{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}&quot; ще отвори класическия уикитекстов редактор.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Вие също може да отворите Визуалния редактор с натискане върху раздела &quot;{{int|editsection}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Първи стъпки: лентата с инструменти на Визуалния редактор. ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Екранен кадър на лентата с инструменти на Визуалния редактор.]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | Лентата с инструменти на Визуалния редактор се появява в горната част на екрана, когато започнете да редактирате. Тя включва някои от познатите икони:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' и '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' на промените, които сте направили.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Падащо меню '''Параграф''': позволява да промените форматирането на параграфа. За да промените стила на абзац, поставете курсора на мишката върху '''Параграф''', натисните и изберете желания елемент от менюто (не е нужно предварително да избирате текста). Заглавията на разделите са форматирани като &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}&quot;, а подразделите - &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}&quot;, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}&quot; и т.н. Нормалният формат за текст е &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Форматиране:''' Натискането върху &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; отваря друго меню. 
* Елементът &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}&quot; ('''B''') удебелява избрания текст.
* Елементът &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}&quot; (''I'') поставя избрания текст в курсив.
* Елементът &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) прави избрания текст да се появи по-малък и да е малко по-високо разположен спрямо околния текст.
* Елементът &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) прави избрания текст да се появи по-малък и да е малко по-ниско разположен спрямо околния текст.
* Елементът &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) поставя дебела черта през избрания текст.
* Елементът &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}&quot; (двойка фигурни скоби:&lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) променя шрифта на избрания текст в равноширок шрифт, което го отличава от околния (пропорционално широк) текст.
* Елементът &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) поставя дебела черта под избрания текст.
* Елементът &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}&quot; (文A) ви позволява да поставите описание на езика (например японски) и посока (например от дясно на ляво) на избрания текст.
* Последният елемент ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), наричан &quot;{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}&quot;, премахва форматиращите символи от избрания текст, включително препратките.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have not selected any text, then when you press the &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Инструмент за препратки:''' иконата с верига е на [[#Editing links|инструмента за свързване]]. Кликването върху нея (обикновено след като изберете някакъв текст) отваря [[#Editing links|прозорец за препратка]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''Меню {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}:''' Менюто &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; се използва за добавяне на вътрешни източници (също наричани &quot;бележки&quot; или &quot;източници&quot;). С помощта на това меню, всички проекти имат достъп до основното референтно форматиране и възможност за повторна употреба на цитати. Това меню ви дава бърз достъп до локалните шаблони за цитиране, ако те са активирани на вашето уики.

(Допълнителните инструкции за добавяне на локални шаблони за цитиране в меню '''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}''' на определено уики се намират на {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''Бутон {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ако услугата ''citoid'' е активирана на вашето уики, вместо меню ''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}'' ще видите бутон '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}'''.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

Услугата ''citoid'' ще опита да попълни шаблоните за цитиране автоматично.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Списъци и отстъп:''' първите два елемента ви позволяват да форматирате текст като &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}&quot; или &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}&quot;. Последните два елемента ви позволяват да намалите или увеличите нивото на отстъп на елементите в списъка.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' Меню '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}''' може да се различава в някои проекти. По-долу е даден списък на '''всички''' възможни опции.
* Иконата „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}“ (картинка с планини) отваря [[#Editing images and other media files|диалогов прозорец за медийни файлове]].
* Иконата &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot; (парченце от пъзел) ви позволява да [[#Editing templates|редактирате шаблони]].
* Бутон &quot;Table&quot; ви позволява да въведете таблица.
* Елементът &quot;{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}&quot; (кръгче с удивителна) ви позволява да поставите коментари, които не са видими за читателите; те могат да се видят само в режим на редактиране, където са обозначени с икона на удивителен знак. В режим на редактиране, натискането върху тази икона ви позволява да редактирате или изтриете коментара.
* Иконата &quot;{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}&quot; (символа [[:w:ankh|анх]] - ☥) ви дава възможност за въвеждане на йероглифи. (Вижте по-долу.)
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;Code block&quot; item allows you to insert code.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;Musical notation&quot; item allows you to insert a musical notation.&lt;/span&gt;
* Иконата &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (набор от снимки) ви позволява да вмъкнете галерия от снимки на страницата.
* Иконата &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (Σ) отваря [[#Editing mathematical formulae|прозорец за въвеждане на формули]].
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;Graph&quot; item allows you to insert a graph.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}&quot; item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a &quot;namespace&quot;), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.&lt;/span&gt;
* Иконата &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (три книги) отваря прозорец, в който можете да определите къде да се показват източниците за читателя. Обикновено това се извършва само един път на страница.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Вмъкване на специални символи:''' Когато натиснете иконата &quot;{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}&quot; (Ω), която се намира до &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;, се отваря диалогов прозорец, показващ множество специални символи. С кликване върху специфичен символ, можете да го поставите в текста. Тези специални символи включват някои стандартни обозначения, ударения, както и математически символи. (Този списък може да се персонализира локално. Вижте {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} за допълнителни инструкции.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| Бутонът '''Съобщения при редактиране''' показва всички съобщения за страницата.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''{{int|visualeditor-mweditmode-tooltip}}'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an ''{{int|visualeditor-meta-tool}}'' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:&lt;/span&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-templatesused-tool}}''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The tabs of the {{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-title}} dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the items {{int|visualeditor-changedir-tool-ltr}} or {{int|visualeditor-changedir-tool-rtl}} and the item '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Find and replace|{{int|visualeditor-find-and-replace-title}}]]''', which opens a bar, where you can insert words or regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Бутонът '''$switch''' е до бутон '''$save'''. Той ви позволява да преминете в режима на текстовия редактор.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Съхраняване на промените ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Когато сте готови с редактирането, кликнете на синия &quot;{{int|publishchanges}}&quot; бутон в лентата с инструменти. Ако не сте направили промени, бутонът няма да е активиран (ще остане в сиво). За да отмените всички свои промени по редактирането, просто затворете прозореца на браузъра си или или натиснете бутона &quot;{{int|vector-view-view}}&quot; над лентата с инструменти за редактиране.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;При натискането на синия бутон &quot;{{int|publishchanges-start}}&quot; се отваря диалогов прозорец. В него можете да въведете кратко резюме на вашите промени, маркирате редакцията си като ''малка'' и да добавите страницата към списъка ви за наблюдение. Кутията за резюмето е еквивалента на полето {{int|summary}} в текстовия редактор.&lt;/span&gt;

Можете да прегледате редакциите си, използвайки бутона &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; - за да бъдете сигурни, че те ще функционират по предназначение, преди да съхраните промените си. Това е подобно на действието на бутона &quot;{{int|showdiff}}&quot; в текстовия редактор.

Бутонът &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}&quot; ви връща към страницата, която редактирахте. Можете да съхраните всичките си промени по-късно.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Редактиране на препратки ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Препратки могат да се добавят чрез иконата &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; (звена на верига) в лентата с инструменти, или с помощта на прекия път {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (или {{Key press|Command|K}} на Mac).

Ако изберете (маркирате) текст и след това натиснете бутона &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot;, този текст ще се използва при създаването на препратката. За препратка, която да включва само една дума, можете или да маркирате думата или просто да поставите курсора в рамките на тази дума.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| При използването на бутона или прекия път ще се отвори прозорец, в който можете да въведете препратката.
Инструментът за препратки ще се опита да помогне с '''вътрешни''' препратки, като потърси за вероятни съвпадения.
След като вече сте въвели или избрали препратката, можете да завършите процеса, като натиснете {{key press|Enter}} или бутона &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot;. Препратката ви ще се визуализира веднага на страницата, но заедно с другите промени, тя няма да бъде съхранена, докато не запаметите цялата страница.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| За да създадете препратка към страница на друг уебсайт, използвайте подобен процес: Изберете бутона &quot;{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}&quot; и въведете URL-адреса на уебсайта в полето.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Външни препратки без добавен надпис изглеждат така: [http://example.com]. Можете да го добавите като кликнете два пъти върху препратката. Или един път върху препратката и после един път върху инструмента за препратка. Въведете URL адреса в полето и натиснете бутона &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot;, за да вмъкнете препратка.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| За да промените или премахнете съществуваща препратка, щракнете в текста за тази препратка, след това натиснете иконата &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot;, която се появява в близост до нея. Ще се появи диалогов прозорец за редактиране (Можете също да стигнете до него с клавишната комбинация {{key press|Ctrl|K}}.) Когато е избрана препратка, тя се появява като оцветена в синьо.

В прозореца за редактиране на препратка можете да промените накъде тя да насочва. Можете също да премахнете препратката изцяло чрез натискане на бутона &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; в горния десен ъгъл на прозореца.
Можете също така да отворите целевата страница на препратката в друг прозорец, като кликнете на препратката в диалоговия прозорец. (Може би искате да направите това, за да проверите дали външната препратка е валидна.)

Ако искате да излезете от надписа на препратката (текста, показан като препратка) или да продължите да пишете след тази препратка, можете да натиснете {{Key press|→}}:
* Натискането му веднъж ще затвори прозореца за редактиране и ще постави курсора в края на свързания елемент (на син фон, за да редактирате този елемент)
* Натискането му два пъти ще постави курсора в края на свързания елемент в готовност за писане на останалата част от текста ви.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:&lt;/span&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the link label directly without deleting it, put the cursor within that link label, use the backspace and delete keys (no more than necessary), and a narrow blue link area will remain there.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Редактиране на източници ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Помощ за шаблоните за цитиране]] или [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Помощ за бутона за {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Determining which system is in place ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| Вашето уики може да използва една от трите системи за бележки под линия. Тази, показана в дясно, е най-опростената система, в която меню &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; не включва никакви шаблони. Ако уикито ви използва тази система, тогава всичко, което трябва да знаете за бележките под линия е на тази страница.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Втората система има същия вид на меню &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;, но с няколко често използвани шаблони за цитиране, настроени за бърз достъп. Ако уикито ви използва тази система, ще намерите повече информация на {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the third system, you again start by pressing the {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Редактиране на съществуващ източник ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;За да редактирате съществуващ източник, кликнете върху него, на мястото на което е в текста (обикновено като номер в скоби). Ще видите или иконата за &quot;$ref&quot; (като маркер) или икона (и име) на шаблона, който е използван за създаване на източника. И в двата случая, натискането върху бутона &quot;Редактиране&quot; ще отвори нов диалогов прозорец, в който можете да редактирате източника.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;За иконата &quot;$ref&quot;, натискането върху &quot;Редактиране&quot; отваря прозореца за източници. За да промените справочна информация, кликнете върху нея.&lt;/span&gt;

Много уикита използват шаблони за форматиране на източници. Ако използвате шаблон във вашия източник, когато движите курсора си над референтната информация, цялата информация в тази област ще бъде маркирана.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ако е използван шаблон и кликнете на справочната информация, тогава ще се появи иконата $template (парченце пъзел) с информация. Кликнете върху бутона &quot;редактиране&quot;, за да редактирате съдържанието на шаблона в прозореца на мини-редактора на шаблона.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ако това, което се появява, когато щракнете върху източник, е икона за стандартен шаблон за източници (примера вдясно), тогава натискането върху &quot;Редактиране&quot; ще отвори прозореца на мини-редактора на шаблона.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Вътре в мини-редактора, можете да добавяте или премахвате видовете информация или да променяте сегашното съдържание. Първоначално ще се покажат само полетата (параметрите на шаблона), които имат съдържание. За да добавите полета, кликнете върху &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; в долната част на мини-редактора.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Натиснете &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; когато приключите с редактирането. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Повторна употреба на съществуващ източник ===
|-
| Ако страницата вече съдържа източник, който се отнася за текст, към който искате да насочите, можете да го използвате повторно.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
За повторна употреба на съществуващ източник, поставете курсора в текста, към който искате да добавите нова препратка (като номер) към същия източник. След това натиснете върху елемента &quot;Повторна употреба на източник&quot; от менюто {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(Забележка: Ако вашето уики има третата система за бележки под линия, описана по-горе, вместо в меню &quot;$cite&quot; ще видите елемента &quot;повторна употреба&quot; в нов диалогов прозорец.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| В прозореца {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}}, разгледайте списъка за препратката, която искате да използвате отново и я изберете. Ако има много препратки, можете да използвате полето за търсене (с надпис {{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}), за да се покажат само тези препратки, които включват определен текст.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Добавяне на нов източник ===
|-
| За да добавите източник с помощта на меню {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}, поставете курсора на мястото в текста, където искате да го добавите. След това изберете подходящия вид цитиране от менюто.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== С помощта на &quot;Основно&quot; цитиране ====
|-
| Показаното тук, е това, което ще видите, ако изберете основният елемент за препратки.  Можете да добавите вашия източник в редактора за източници, дори и с включено в него форматиране.

Можете да направите източника да принадлежи към дадена група, макар че обикновено това поре се оставя празно. (Тази опция се използва за показване на групи от източници с инструмента &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot;.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ако искате да включите шаблон за източници (или друг шаблон) в новия си източник, в диалоговия прозорец кликнете върху иконата {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} (парченце пъзел) в  лентата на менюто &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;, намиращ се в рамките на редактора за източници.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| След това, потърсете шаблона, който искате да използвате, и го добавете го и редактирайте като всеки друг шаблон. (Ако имате нужда от повече информация за шаблоните, вижте раздела [[#Editing templates|редактиране на шаблони]] по-долу.)

След като приключите с редактирането на новия си шаблон, кликнете на &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;, за да се върнете в редактора за източници, и още веднъж &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; за да се върнете към страницата, която редактирате.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ако на страницата няма списък с източници (например ако поставяте първия източник на страницата), ще трябва да посочите къде да се изобразява списъка с източници и техния текст за читателя.

Поставете курсора там, където искате да се показва списъка (обикновено в долната част на страницата), отворете менюто &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; и кликнете върху иконата &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (три книги).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ако използвате няколко групи от изтачници, което е сравнително рядко, можете да посочите групата в този диалогов прозорец. Само препратки, които принадлежат към тази група, ще бъдат показвани на мястото на страницата, където сте поставили групата.

Последната стъпка в прозореца за списъка с източници е да натиснете &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Употреба на стандартни шаблони за източници ====
|-
| Вашето локално уики може да добавя допълнителни шаблони за източници към менюто &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;. За целта трябва да имате бърз достъп до най-често използваните шаблони за източници във вашето уики. (Инструкциите за добавяне на допълнителни шаблони за източници към уикито ви се намират на {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Кликването върху икона за шаблон като &quot;Цитат книга&quot; ще ви отведе до мини-редактора за този шаблон. Важните информационни полета могат да са отбелязани със звездичка. Не всички от тях са задължителни, ще се показват само най-често използваните полета.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;За да добавите повече параметри, превъртете надолу в мини-редактора и кликнете върху опцията &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

Натиснете &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; когато сте приключили с редактирането.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Редактиране на изображения и други мултимедийни файлове ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Редактиране на изображения ===
|-
| За да поставите ново изображение (или друг вид мултимедиен файл) в страницата, натиснете иконата &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; (картинката с планина). Изображението ще бъде добавено на мястото, където е курсорът на мишката ви.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Кликването върху иконата &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; отваря диалогов прозорец, който автоматично търси в Общомедия и вашето локално уики за мултимедийни файлове, свързани със заглавието на страницата, която редактирате.

Можете да промените търсенето чрез промяна на текста в полето за търсене на диалоговия прозорец.

За да изберете файл, кликнете върху умаленото му изображение.

Това поставя изображението върху страницата, която редактирате.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| След като избраното изображение е вмъкнато в страницата, ще се отвори друг прозорец. Той ви позволява да добавяте и редактирате надписа на изображението. Надписът може да съдържа форматиране и препратки.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Прозорецът за медийни файлове също ви позволява да добавяте алтернативни текстови надписи, за да помогнете на потребители, които използват екранни четци или които са деактивирали изображенията на екрана си поради някаква причина.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Можете също да настроите различни параметри за изображението в прозореца &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot;. Те включват подравняването, типа и размера на изображението.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Когато сте готови, натиснете &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;, за да затворите диалоговия прозорец и да се върнете към редактирането на страницата.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| За съществуващо изображение, можете да добавите или редактирате надпис или други настройки, като кликнете върху изображението и после върху бутон &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; който се появява под снимката.

Можете да промените размера на съществуващо изображение, като кликнете върху него и след това местите иконата за преоразмеряване (стрелката в единия или двата долни ъгли. В зависимост от това къде е изображението, то може да има една или две стрелки).

Можете също така да влачите и пуснете изображение на по-високо или по-ниско място в страницата.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== Качване на изображения ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Можете да качвате изображения от раздел в прозореца за медийни файлове или чрез влачене и пускане на файл в редактора, или чрез поставяне на изображение от клипборда си.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Натиснете върху раздел &quot;Качване&quot; и изберете изображение от компютъра си. Можете да въведете името на файла, или да провлачите изображението в полето. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Трябва да опишете изображението и да добавите към него категории, така че другите редактори да могат да го намерят.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Когато сте готови, изображението ще бъде поставено в страницата.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Редактиране на мултимедийни галерии ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| За да добавите нова галерия, кликнете върху иконата &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (комплект от снимки) в менюто &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. (Ако не виждате иконата в това меню, то вашето уики е решило да отложи прилагането на тази функционалност във Визуалния редактор.) 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| За да редактирате съществуваща галерия във визуалния редактор, натиснете върху галерията. След това натиснете върху бутона Редактиране, който се появява горе над галерията. Това отваря пълния списък на изображения и техните налични описания, включени в галерията.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Редакторът на галерия в момента е обикновена кутия, която ви позволява да редактирате съществуващите галерии с помощта на уикитекстово форматиране. За да добавите ново изображение към съществуваща галерия, въведете името на файла, последван от права черта (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) и описание на изображението. Трябва да поставяте всяка снимка в галерията на отделен ред.&lt;/span&gt; Може също така да редактирате този списък, за да премахнете или пренаредите изображенията или да промените описанията.

Когато кликнете на  бутона {{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}, вие ще излезете от редактора на галерия. След това можете да видите промените в галерията, както ще изглежда тя за читателите.

Не забравяйте, че излизането от редактора на галерия не публикува промените. Както и при другите промени, направени с помощта на визуалния редактор, трябва да публикувате цялата страница, за да публикувате работата си.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Редактиране на шаблони ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The powerful MediaWiki template system lets you insert dynamic content, text from other pages, and much more. For a detailed explanation and examples, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Templates help page]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the VisualEditor you can search for a relevant template, add an invocation or [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusion]] on the page you’re editing and, if needed, add custom content using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameters]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert new template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;За да добавите нов шаблон в страницата, поставете курсора на мястото на което искате да добавите шаблона, и натиснете иконата „$template“ (парченце от пъзел) в меню „$insert“.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then open the {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} menu and select &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, type two curly brackets {{((}} to open the same dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Също така можете да редактирате шаблон, който вече присъства на страницата. Кликнете върху шаблона за да го изберете. Той ще промени цвета си в синьо, и ще се появи кутийка с икона &quot;$template&quot; (парченце от пъзел). След това кликнете върху бутона &quot;$edit&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you select the template you want to edit, it turns blue, and a box appears displaying &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then select the &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; link  or double click on the template itself to open the template.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Възможно е някои шаблони да не са видими за някой, който чете страницата. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;В визуалния редактор, такива скрити шаблони са показани като икони на пъзел.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon and both will be grayed out.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Параметри на шаблона ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You’ll see this dialog box when you’re adding a new template or editing one already in place.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What you see in the box depends on whether the template in question contains {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, helpful metadata added by other editors to make it easier to edit templates in the Visual Editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When a template contains TemplateData, the VisualEditor can use it to present annotated fields for you to fill in.
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For templates that have some community-provided TemplateData, the VisualEditor displays a list of the named parameters and, often, descriptions and instructions explaining the meaning and required format for each parameter’s values.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Adding undocumented parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter: “1”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter’s value: “en_US”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter: “2”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter’s value: “yes”&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Autogenerated parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completing your edit ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Когато сте готови с редактирането на шаблона, натиснете &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;, за да затворите диалоговия прозорец и да се върнете към редактирането на страницата.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing on mobile ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Заместване на шаблони ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Редактиране на списъци ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation;  use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is the result of increased indentation.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Редактиране на таблици ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Можете да използвате визуалния редактор за въвеждане и промяна на таблици.

Можете дори да вмъкнете таблица, влачейки .csv файл от компютъра си в главния прозорец за редактиране.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Когато кликнете върху &quot;Таблица&quot; в менюто &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;, визуален редактор вмъква празна таблица с размери четири на четири клетки.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now the &quot;Table&quot; menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To select a cell, press it once.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| Можете да добавяте, преместите или изтриете колона или ред.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on &quot;Merge cells&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also split cells that were previously merged.  All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Редактиране на категории ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| За да редактирате категории, натиснете елемента &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; от менюто &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Кликването върху &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; отваря диалогов прозорец, в който са изброени съществуващите категории и ви позволява да ги изтриете и да добавяте нови категории.

Също така имате възможност да настроите или промените общия (по подразбиране) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|ключ за сортиране]], който определя къде да се показва страницата, когато е изброена заедно с други страници в една и съща категория.

Например, сортиращият ключ по подразбиране за статията &quot;Джордж Вашингтон&quot; е &quot;Вашингтон, Джордж&quot;. В категория &quot;Президенти на САЩ&quot;, статията е показана на буквата &quot;В&quot;, а не на буквата &quot;Д&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| За да добавите категория за страница, въведете името на категорията, в полето &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}&quot;. Докато пишете, визуалният редактор ще търси възможно съвпадение в съществуващите категории. Можете да изберете съществуваща категория, или можете да добавите категория, която все още не разполага със собствена категорийна страница. (Докато не бъде създадена тази категорийна страница, новата ви категория ще се показва като червена препратка, след съхраняването на всичките ви промени.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| За да премахнете съществуваща категория, кликнете върху нея и после натиснете върху иконата &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; (кошче) в отворения диалогов прозорец.

Кликването върху категория също така ви позволява да определите ключ за сортиране за тази конкретна категория. Такъв ключов заменя стандартния ключ по подразбиране.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Кликнете &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;, когато сте готови с редактирането на категории, за да се върнете към редактора на страницата.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Настройки за редактиране на страница ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| За да промените настройките на страница, отворете менюто &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; в лентата с инструменти и изберете бутона &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Бутонът &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; отваря диалогов прозорец, който показва няколко опции.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Можете да направите страницата да пренасочва към друга страница чрез отмятане на квадратчето &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot; и вписване на името на страницата, към която искате да насочите читателя.

Малко по-долу има друго квадратче, което дава възможност да се  предотврати преименуването на пранасочващата при актуализиране на целевата страница. Това се използва много рядко.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Можете да промените дали страницата да показва таблицата &quot;Съдържание&quot;, като изберете един от тези три бутона. Опцията по подразбиране е  &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot;, което показва &quot;Съдържание&quot;, ако в страницата има три или повече раздела.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Можете да скриете показването на препратките за редактиране до заглавието на всеки раздел, чрез отмятане на това квадратче.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Кликнете &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;, когато сте готови с редактирането на {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}, за да се върнете към редактора на страницата.
|}

== Редактиране на карти ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Редактиране на математически формули ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| За да добавите нова математическа формула на страницата, поставете курсора, на мястото където искате да я поставите, и кликнете върху иконата &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (&quot;Σ&quot;) от менюто &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; в лентата с инструменти.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ще се отвори прозорец, в който можете да въведете формулата, с помощта на LaTeX синтаксис. Визуалният редактор ще актуализира формулата, така че да можете да видите как ще изглежда, докато правите промените. Когато сте доволни от резултата, натиснете бутона &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| За да редактирате съществуваща математическа формула на страницата, кликнете върху я и след това натиснете върху появилата се икона &quot;Σ&quot;. Това ще отвори прозорец, в който можете да направите промените.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Editing musical scores ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then, from the &quot;Insert&quot; menu on the toolbar, press the &quot;Musical notation&quot; option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will open the &quot;Musical notation&quot; dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you are finished, press the &quot;Done&quot; button to close the dialog and publish your changes.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Редактиране на стихове и други специални елементи ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Някои елементи, като асоциирани списъци и стихотворения, все още не се поддържат напълно от визуалния редактор.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| В повечето случаи, съществуващите елементи могат да се редактират, но не може да бъдат добавяни нови чрез визуалния редактор.

Докато не се поддържа напълно, можете да копирате съществуваща от друга страница, или да редактирате директно в уикитекст.

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Switching between the visual and wikitext editors&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; button on the far right of the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on &quot;Discard changes&quot;, you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)&lt;/span&gt;

Щракни надолу и ще видиш уикитекс редакцията. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Клавишни комбинации ==

Много редактори са свикнали да въвеждат директно уикитекст, особено получер или курсивен текст и уикпрепратки. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Клавишите за бърз достъп]] ви позволяват да поставяте подобно форматиране бързо, без да се налага да използвате елементите от лентата с инструменти. Ето някои от най-често срещаните клавишни комбинации във визуалния редактор:

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! Клавишни комбинации за PC
! Действие
! Клавишни комбинации за MAC
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Получер (удебелен) текст
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Курсивен (наклонен) текст
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Вмъкване на препратка
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Изрязване
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Копиране
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Поставяне
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Отмяна
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>pkz5rc7qmzyts2e3cyvftavixukubzz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/sl</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>142550</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402450</id>
      <parentid>4983789</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:05:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7314" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Dobrodošli na portalu '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) je nov način urejanja Wikipedije, ki ga razvija Wikimedia Foundation. Uporabnikom omogoča urejanje brez učenja wiki označevalnega jezika. Upamo, da bo pomagal ljudem pri prispevanju k Wikipediji.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Preberite '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Poročajte o problemu''' z VisualEditorje].
|-
| Poizvedite kako ustvarite povezave, dodate ali  ali prestavite slike, ustvarite navedke, vstavite predloge, uredite tabele, in več.
|Prosimo, da vključite vaš '''spletni brskalnik, operacijski sistem računalnika in kožo Wikipedije''' (običajno je to Vector, včasih Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== O VisualEditorju ==

VisualEditor je &quot;grafični&quot; način urejanja Wikipedije. Urejanje Wikipedije je prej zahtevalo poznavanje wikimarkup označevalnega jezika, ki je precej kompleksen jezik tudi pri manjših spremembah strani. Leta 2001 je bilo to še sprejemljivo, v letu 2013 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|pa to urejevalce odvrača]]. Upamo, da bo VisualEditor uporaben obstoječim uporabnikom in da bo prijaznejši novim uporabnikom. 

VisualEditor je bil dostopen kot izdaja opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; na MediaWiki.org od sredine leta 2012 in na angleški wikipediji od decembra 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ v dodatnih 14 jezikih od aprila 2013] in od začetka junija 2013 v [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ skoraj vseh ostalih jezikih]. Od julija 2015 je bil privzeto na voljo prijavljenim in neprijavljenim uporabnikom v več kot 75% Wikipdijah.
Pričakujemo, da bo privzeto na voljo večini [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|preostalih jezikov]] konec leta 2015.
Od konca novembra 2014, je na coljo tudi kot opt-in [[Beta Features|Beta Feature]] na vseh WMF wikijih, razen za Wiktionary in Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Izdajamo [[VisualEditor/changelog|redna poročila o stanju]] na Mediawiki.org, in [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|večjezični časopis]], ki je osredotočen na WMF wikije.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Uporaba VisualEditorja ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Trenutno VisualEditor vsebuje večje število hroščev. Medtem ko se nekaterim ne da izogniti, je trenutno število nesprejemljivo. Če naletite na problem, vas prosimo, da o tem [[VisualEditor/Feedback|poročate na Feedback strani]]. Obstaja še nekaj področij kjer je potrebno nove funkcije šele zgraditi. Trenutne omejitve vključujejo:

* '''Počasno nalaganje''' — Daljše in kompleksnejše strani se v VisualEditorju nalagajo dalj časa. V prihodnosti bo programska oprema precej hitrejša in bo dovoljevala nalaganje daljših strani.
* '''Nepopolna funkcionalnost urejanja''' — Nekateri elementi zapletenejšega oblikovanja se bodo prikazali in vam dovolili urejanje svoje vsebine, ne bodo pa dovolili uporabnikom urediti svoje strukture ali dodajanja novih podatkov - kot so to seznami. Dodajanje funkcionalnosti na tem področju je naša prioriteta.
* '''Večina vsebinskih strani, in ne pogovornih strani''' — VisualEditor je omogočen le za nekatere imenske prostore. V večini Wikipedijah, se lahko VisualEditor uporablja le za članke, na straneh Uporabnik:, Pomoč: in Kategorija:. VisualEditor trenutno ni omogočen na straneh Wikipedia: ali na katerikoli pogovorni strani.

Zaradi omejitev in hroščev priporočamo, da uporabniki pred shranitvijo strani kliknejo na &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; in [[VisualEditor/Feedback|poročajo o kateremkoli problemu na katerega so naleteli]].

== Kako pomagati ==

Da bi VisualEditor lahko postal tako dober kot je le lahko, je veliko stvari pri katerih potrebujemo pomoč. Očitno je, da potrebujemo pomoč na področju uporabe programske opreme, iskanju hroščev in [[VisualEditor/Feedback|poročanju o njih]], toda obstajajo tudi druge naloge. Te vključujejo:

* '''Posodabljanje strani pomoči''' — Vsi naši projekti vsebujejo strani pomoči, kar je v pomoč novim uporabnikom pri urejanju. Na žalost so te strani zgrajene okoli  klasičnega wikitext urejevalnika in ker se VisualEditor razvija, bodo zaslonski posnetki in navodila postala zastarela. V pomoč bi bilo, če bi ljudje lahko   [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|posodabljali strani pomoči]], temelječ na  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|našem vodiču za uporabo VisualEditorja]].
* '''Dodajanje TemplateData v predloge''' — VisualEditor vsebuje urejevalnik predlog, ki je podrobneje opisan na naši [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|strani pomoči]]. Kakor boste videli, če jih boste uporabili v Wikipediji, imajo nekatere predloge poimenovane parametre in opise, kar jih naredi enostavne za uporabo. Za nekatere pa to ne velja. To je zato, ker predloge potrebujejo &quot;TemplateData&quot;, če želimo, da bi ta funkcionalnost delovala. Če ste pripravljeni dodajati TemplateData, je na voljo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|vodič kako to storiti]], skupaj z [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|seznamom najpomembnejših predlog, ki potrebujejo TemplateData]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Pomagajte vaši skupnosti''' — Glejte [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|seznam kako učinkovito pomagati vaši lokalni skupnosti]], če je VisualEditor ponujen kot opt-in Beta Feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Pomoč novim uporabnikom''' — Če bo zagon VisualEditorja uspešen, bomo pridobili večje število novih uporabnikov - in čeprav urejanje izgleda lažje, bo način kako komunicirati s skupnostjo še vedno težek. Prosimo, preživite nekaj časa [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|na strani podpore uporabnikom ali na IRC kanalu pomoči]] in na ta način pomagate tem novincem navajati se na Wikipedijo.

==Glej tudi==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>tot8jv1ec9603db7t73x9p7yf6n0pic</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403025</id>
      <parentid>5402450</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7354" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Dobrodošli na portalu '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) je nov način urejanja Wikipedije, ki ga razvija Wikimedia Foundation. Uporabnikom omogoča urejanje brez učenja wiki označevalnega jezika. Upamo, da bo pomagal ljudem pri prispevanju k Wikipediji.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Preberite '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Poročajte o problemu''' z VisualEditorje].
|-
| Poizvedite kako ustvarite povezave, dodate ali  ali prestavite slike, ustvarite navedke, vstavite predloge, uredite tabele, in več.
|Prosimo, da vključite vaš '''spletni brskalnik, operacijski sistem računalnika in kožo Wikipedije''' (običajno je to Vector, včasih Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== O VisualEditorju ==

VisualEditor je &quot;grafični&quot; način urejanja Wikipedije. Urejanje Wikipedije je prej zahtevalo poznavanje wikimarkup označevalnega jezika, ki je precej kompleksen jezik tudi pri manjših spremembah strani. Leta 2001 je bilo to še sprejemljivo, v letu 2013 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|pa to urejevalce odvrača]]. Upamo, da bo VisualEditor uporaben obstoječim uporabnikom in da bo prijaznejši novim uporabnikom. 

VisualEditor je bil dostopen kot izdaja opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; na MediaWiki.org od sredine leta 2012 in na angleški wikipediji od decembra 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ v dodatnih 14 jezikih od aprila 2013] in od začetka junija 2013 v [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ skoraj vseh ostalih jezikih]. Od julija 2015 je bil privzeto na voljo prijavljenim in neprijavljenim uporabnikom v več kot 75% Wikipdijah.
Pričakujemo, da bo privzeto na voljo večini [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|preostalih jezikov]] konec leta 2015.
Od konca novembra 2014, je na coljo tudi kot opt-in [[Beta Features|Beta Feature]] na vseh WMF wikijih, razen za Wiktionary in Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Izdajamo [[VisualEditor/changelog|redna poročila o stanju]] na Mediawiki.org, in [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|večjezični časopis]], ki je osredotočen na WMF wikije.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Uporaba VisualEditorja ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Trenutno VisualEditor vsebuje večje število hroščev. Medtem ko se nekaterim ne da izogniti, je trenutno število nesprejemljivo. Če naletite na problem, vas prosimo, da o tem [[VisualEditor/Feedback|poročate na Feedback strani]]. Obstaja še nekaj področij kjer je potrebno nove funkcije šele zgraditi. Trenutne omejitve vključujejo:

* '''Počasno nalaganje''' — Daljše in kompleksnejše strani se v VisualEditorju nalagajo dalj časa. V prihodnosti bo programska oprema precej hitrejša in bo dovoljevala nalaganje daljših strani.
* '''Nepopolna funkcionalnost urejanja''' — Nekateri elementi zapletenejšega oblikovanja se bodo prikazali in vam dovolili urejanje svoje vsebine, ne bodo pa dovolili uporabnikom urediti svoje strukture ali dodajanja novih podatkov - kot so to seznami. Dodajanje funkcionalnosti na tem področju je naša prioriteta.
* '''Večina vsebinskih strani, in ne pogovornih strani''' — VisualEditor je omogočen le za nekatere imenske prostore. V večini Wikipedijah, se lahko VisualEditor uporablja le za članke, na straneh Uporabnik:, Pomoč: in Kategorija:. VisualEditor trenutno ni omogočen na straneh Wikipedia: ali na katerikoli pogovorni strani.

Zaradi omejitev in hroščev priporočamo, da uporabniki pred shranitvijo strani kliknejo na &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; in [[VisualEditor/Feedback|poročajo o kateremkoli problemu na katerega so naleteli]].

== Kako pomagati ==

Da bi VisualEditor lahko postal tako dober kot je le lahko, je veliko stvari pri katerih potrebujemo pomoč. Očitno je, da potrebujemo pomoč na področju uporabe programske opreme, iskanju hroščev in [[VisualEditor/Feedback|poročanju o njih]], toda obstajajo tudi druge naloge. Te vključujejo:

* '''Posodabljanje strani pomoči''' — Vsi naši projekti vsebujejo strani pomoči, kar je v pomoč novim uporabnikom pri urejanju. Na žalost so te strani zgrajene okoli  klasičnega wikitext urejevalnika in ker se VisualEditor razvija, bodo zaslonski posnetki in navodila postala zastarela. V pomoč bi bilo, če bi ljudje lahko   [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|posodabljali strani pomoči]], temelječ na  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|našem vodiču za uporabo VisualEditorja]].
* '''Dodajanje TemplateData v predloge''' — VisualEditor vsebuje urejevalnik predlog, ki je podrobneje opisan na naši [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|strani pomoči]]. Kakor boste videli, če jih boste uporabili v Wikipediji, imajo nekatere predloge poimenovane parametre in opise, kar jih naredi enostavne za uporabo. Za nekatere pa to ne velja. To je zato, ker predloge potrebujejo &quot;TemplateData&quot;, če želimo, da bi ta funkcionalnost delovala. Če ste pripravljeni dodajati TemplateData, je na voljo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|vodič kako to storiti]], skupaj z [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|seznamom najpomembnejših predlog, ki potrebujejo TemplateData]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Pomagajte vaši skupnosti''' — Glejte [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|seznam kako učinkovito pomagati vaši lokalni skupnosti]], če je VisualEditor ponujen kot opt-in Beta Feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Pomoč novim uporabnikom''' — Če bo zagon VisualEditorja uspešen, bomo pridobili večje število novih uporabnikov - in čeprav urejanje izgleda lažje, bo način kako komunicirati s skupnostjo še vedno težek. Prosimo, preživite nekaj časa [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|na strani podpore uporabnikom ali na IRC kanalu pomoči]] in na ta način pomagate tem novincem navajati se na Wikipedijo.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Glej tudi==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>bd5bkdxo74l0moplw9utwx8f6wl2s42</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403186</id>
      <parentid>5403025</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:43:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7314" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Dobrodošli na portalu '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) je nov način urejanja Wikipedije, ki ga razvija Wikimedia Foundation. Uporabnikom omogoča urejanje brez učenja wiki označevalnega jezika. Upamo, da bo pomagal ljudem pri prispevanju k Wikipediji.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Preberite '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Poročajte o problemu''' z VisualEditorje].
|-
| Poizvedite kako ustvarite povezave, dodate ali  ali prestavite slike, ustvarite navedke, vstavite predloge, uredite tabele, in več.
|Prosimo, da vključite vaš '''spletni brskalnik, operacijski sistem računalnika in kožo Wikipedije''' (običajno je to Vector, včasih Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== O VisualEditorju ==

VisualEditor je &quot;grafični&quot; način urejanja Wikipedije. Urejanje Wikipedije je prej zahtevalo poznavanje wikimarkup označevalnega jezika, ki je precej kompleksen jezik tudi pri manjših spremembah strani. Leta 2001 je bilo to še sprejemljivo, v letu 2013 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|pa to urejevalce odvrača]]. Upamo, da bo VisualEditor uporaben obstoječim uporabnikom in da bo prijaznejši novim uporabnikom. 

VisualEditor je bil dostopen kot izdaja opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; na MediaWiki.org od sredine leta 2012 in na angleški wikipediji od decembra 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ v dodatnih 14 jezikih od aprila 2013] in od začetka junija 2013 v [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ skoraj vseh ostalih jezikih]. Od julija 2015 je bil privzeto na voljo prijavljenim in neprijavljenim uporabnikom v več kot 75% Wikipdijah.
Pričakujemo, da bo privzeto na voljo večini [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|preostalih jezikov]] konec leta 2015.
Od konca novembra 2014, je na coljo tudi kot opt-in [[Beta Features|Beta Feature]] na vseh WMF wikijih, razen za Wiktionary in Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Izdajamo [[VisualEditor/changelog|redna poročila o stanju]] na Mediawiki.org, in [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|večjezični časopis]], ki je osredotočen na WMF wikije.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Uporaba VisualEditorja ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Trenutno VisualEditor vsebuje večje število hroščev. Medtem ko se nekaterim ne da izogniti, je trenutno število nesprejemljivo. Če naletite na problem, vas prosimo, da o tem [[VisualEditor/Feedback|poročate na Feedback strani]]. Obstaja še nekaj področij kjer je potrebno nove funkcije šele zgraditi. Trenutne omejitve vključujejo:

* '''Počasno nalaganje''' — Daljše in kompleksnejše strani se v VisualEditorju nalagajo dalj časa. V prihodnosti bo programska oprema precej hitrejša in bo dovoljevala nalaganje daljših strani.
* '''Nepopolna funkcionalnost urejanja''' — Nekateri elementi zapletenejšega oblikovanja se bodo prikazali in vam dovolili urejanje svoje vsebine, ne bodo pa dovolili uporabnikom urediti svoje strukture ali dodajanja novih podatkov - kot so to seznami. Dodajanje funkcionalnosti na tem področju je naša prioriteta.
* '''Večina vsebinskih strani, in ne pogovornih strani''' — VisualEditor je omogočen le za nekatere imenske prostore. V večini Wikipedijah, se lahko VisualEditor uporablja le za članke, na straneh Uporabnik:, Pomoč: in Kategorija:. VisualEditor trenutno ni omogočen na straneh Wikipedia: ali na katerikoli pogovorni strani.

Zaradi omejitev in hroščev priporočamo, da uporabniki pred shranitvijo strani kliknejo na &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; in [[VisualEditor/Feedback|poročajo o kateremkoli problemu na katerega so naleteli]].

== Kako pomagati ==

Da bi VisualEditor lahko postal tako dober kot je le lahko, je veliko stvari pri katerih potrebujemo pomoč. Očitno je, da potrebujemo pomoč na področju uporabe programske opreme, iskanju hroščev in [[VisualEditor/Feedback|poročanju o njih]], toda obstajajo tudi druge naloge. Te vključujejo:

* '''Posodabljanje strani pomoči''' — Vsi naši projekti vsebujejo strani pomoči, kar je v pomoč novim uporabnikom pri urejanju. Na žalost so te strani zgrajene okoli  klasičnega wikitext urejevalnika in ker se VisualEditor razvija, bodo zaslonski posnetki in navodila postala zastarela. V pomoč bi bilo, če bi ljudje lahko   [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|posodabljali strani pomoči]], temelječ na  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|našem vodiču za uporabo VisualEditorja]].
* '''Dodajanje TemplateData v predloge''' — VisualEditor vsebuje urejevalnik predlog, ki je podrobneje opisan na naši [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|strani pomoči]]. Kakor boste videli, če jih boste uporabili v Wikipediji, imajo nekatere predloge poimenovane parametre in opise, kar jih naredi enostavne za uporabo. Za nekatere pa to ne velja. To je zato, ker predloge potrebujejo &quot;TemplateData&quot;, če želimo, da bi ta funkcionalnost delovala. Če ste pripravljeni dodajati TemplateData, je na voljo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|vodič kako to storiti]], skupaj z [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|seznamom najpomembnejših predlog, ki potrebujejo TemplateData]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Pomagajte vaši skupnosti''' — Glejte [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|seznam kako učinkovito pomagati vaši lokalni skupnosti]], če je VisualEditor ponujen kot opt-in Beta Feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Pomoč novim uporabnikom''' — Če bo zagon VisualEditorja uspešen, bomo pridobili večje število novih uporabnikov - in čeprav urejanje izgleda lažje, bo način kako komunicirati s skupnostjo še vedno težek. Prosimo, preživite nekaj časa [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|na strani podpore uporabnikom ali na IRC kanalu pomoči]] in na ta način pomagate tem novincem navajati se na Wikipedijo.

==Glej tudi==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>tot8jv1ec9603db7t73x9p7yf6n0pic</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/sl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>142551</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402449</id>
      <parentid>852057</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:05:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="268" xml:space="preserve">Dobrodošli na portalu '''[[$ve|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) je nov način urejanja Wikipedije, ki ga razvija Wikimedia Foundation. Uporabnikom omogoča urejanje brez učenja wiki označevalnega jezika. Upamo, da bo pomagal ljudem pri prispevanju k Wikipediji.</text>
      <sha1>ny9mqeyxgxtk58iv05yusz5n94h8l80</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/th</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>142813</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402792</id>
      <parentid>5359337</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:53:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="96827" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;หากคุณประสงค์ทดลองเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพโดยไม่แก้ไขบทความ [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} นี่คือหน้า]ที่คุณสามารถทดสอบได้อย่างเสรี&lt;/span&gt; คุณไม่จำเป็นต้องมีบัญชีเพื่อใช้เครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพในหน้านั้น}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== การเปิดเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพ ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| ในการแก้ไขหน้าโดยใช้เครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพ ให้คลิกแถบ &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; ที่บนสุดของหน้า

การเปิดหน้าเพื่อแก้ไขอาจใช้เวลาหลายวินาที และนานกว่านั้นหากหน้ามีความยาวมาก

คลิกที่แท็บ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}&quot; จะเปิดตัวแก้ไขข้อความวิกิ (wikitext) แบบดั้งเดิม
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| คุณยังสามารถเปิดเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพโดยคลิกลิงก์ &quot;{{int|editsection}}&quot; ในแต่ละส่วน
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== เริ่มต้น: แถบเครื่องมือของเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพ ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=ภาพจับหน้าจอของแถบเครื่องมือเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพ]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | แถบเครื่องมือเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพปรากฏที่บนสุดของจอภาพเมื่อคุณเริ่มต้นแก้ไข ในแถบมีสัญรูปที่คุ้นเคยอยู่บ้าง
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' และ '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' การแก้ไขที่คุณสร้าง
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| รายการเลือกดึงลง'''หัวเรื่อง''': ทำให้คุณเปลี่ยนแปลงการจัดรูปแบบย่อหน้า ในการเปลี่ยนแปลงลีลาของย่อหน้า ให้คุณวางเคอร์เซอร์ไว้ในย่อหน้าแล้วเลือกรายการในรายการเลือกนี้ (ไม่จำเป็นต้องเน้นข้อความใด ๆ ทั้งสิ้น) ชื่อส่วน (section) จะจัดรูปแบบเป็น &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}&quot; และส่วนย่อย (subsection) เป็น &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}&quot;, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}&quot; ฯลฯ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}&quot; เป็นรูปแบบปกติสำหรับข้อความ
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''การจัดรูปแบบ''': เมื่อกด &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; จะเปิดรายการเลือก 
* รายการ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}&quot; ('''B''') ทำให้ข้อความที่เลือกเป็นตัวเส้นหนา
* รายการ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}&quot; (''I'') ทำให้ข้อความที่เลือกเป็นตัวเอน
* รายการ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) ทำให้ข้อความที่เลือกปรากฏเล็กลงและอยู่สูงกว่าข้อความที่แวดล้อมเล็กน้อย
* รายการ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) ทำให้ข้อความที่เลือกปรากฏเล็กลงและอยู่ต่ำกว่าข้อความที่แวดล้อมเล็กน้อย
* รายการ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) เพิ่มขีดทึบทับข้อความที่เลือก
* รายการ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}&quot; (วงเล็บปีกกาเปิดและปิด: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) เปลี่ยนชุดแบบอักษรของข้อความที่เลือกให้เป็นชุดแบบอักษรความกว้างคงที่ ซึ่งจะแยกข้อความนี้กับข้อความที่อยู่แวดล้อม (ที่มีความกว้างแบบสัดส่วน)
* รายการ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) เพิ่มขีดทึบใต้ข้อความที่เลือก
* รายการ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}&quot; (文A) ทำให้คุณระบุภาษา (เช่น ภาษาญี่ปุ่น) และทิศทาง (ตัวอย่างเช่น จากขวาไปซ้าย) ของข้อความที่เลือก
* รายการสุดท้าย ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]) เรียก &quot;{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}&quot; ลบการจัดรูปแบบอักขระทั้งหมดจากข้อความที่เลือก รวมทั้งลิงก์

หากคุณไม่ได้เลือกข้อความใด เมื่อคุณกด &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; เพื่อเปิดรายการเลือก แล้วคลิกรายการหนึ่ง การจัดรูปแบบจะใช้กับข้อความที่คุณพิมพ์หลังจากนั้น เริ่มจากตำแหน่งของเคอร์เซอร์
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''เครื่องมือการเชื่อมโยง:''' สัญรูปโซ่เป็น[[#Editing links|เครื่องมือการเชื่อมโยง]] เมื่อคลิกแล้ว (ปกติหลังเลือกข้อความส่วนหนึ่ง) จะเปิด[[#Editing links|คำโต้ตอบลิงก์]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''รายการเลือก{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}:''' รายการ &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; ใช้เพื่อเพิ่มแหล่งที่มาในบรรทัด (หรือเรียก &quot;เชิงอรรถ&quot; หรือ &quot;อ้างอิง&quot;) ทุกโครงการเข้าถึงการจัดรูปแบบอ้างอิงพื้นฐานและความสามารถใช้แหล่งที่มาซ้ำโดยรายการเลือกนี้ นอกจากนี้ ยังให้ผู้ใช้เข้าถึงแม่แบบแหล่งที่มาท้องถิ่นได้อย่างรวดเร็ว หากเปิดใช้งานแม่แบบดังกล่าวในวิกิของตน

(ดูคำชี้แจงสำหรับการเพิ่มแม่แบบแหล่งที่มาท้องถิ่นเข้ารายการเลือก{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}ในวิกิจำเพาะได้ที่ {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}})
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''ปุ่ม {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;หากเปิดใช้งานบริการไซทอยด์บนวิกิของคุณ คุณจะเห็นปุ่ม {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} แทนรายการเลือก {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

บริการไซทอยด์พยายมกรอกแม่แบบแหล่งที่มาอัตโนมัติ
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''รายการและย่อหน้า:''' สองสัญรูปแรกให้คุณจัดรูปแบบข้อความเป็น &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}&quot; หรือ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}&quot; สองรายการหลังให้คุณเพิ่มหรือลดระดับการเยื้องรายการ
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' รายการเลือก &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; อาจแตกต่างกันในบางโครงการ ด้านล่างเป็นตัวเลือก'''ทั้งหมด'''ที่อาจปรากฏ
* ไอคอน &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; รูปภูเขา เปิด[[#Editing images and other media files|ตัวจัดการสื่อ]].
* สัญรูป &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot; (ชิ้นส่วนจิ๊กซอว์) เปิดให้คุณ[[#Editing templates|แก้ไขแม่แบบ]]
* รายการ &quot;ตาราง&quot; ให้คุณแทรกตาราง
* รายการ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}&quot; (บอลลูนคำพูด) เปิดให้คุณแทรกความเห็นซึ่งผู้อ่านจะมองไม่เห็น ความเห็นเหล่านี้จะเห็นเฉพาะเมื่ออยู่ในภาวะแก้ไข โดยมีการบ่งชี้โดยสัญรูปเครื่องหมายอัศเจรีย์ (!) ในภาวะแก้ไข เมื่อกดที่สัญรูปเครื่องหมายอัศเจรีย์จะทำให้คุณแก้ไขหรือลบความเห็นดังกล่าว
* สัญรูป &quot;{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}&quot; (เครื่องหมาย[[:w:ankh|อังก์]] - ☥) เปิดให้คุณเข้าเครื่องมือแทรกเฮียโรกริฟ (ดูด้านล่าง)
* รายการ &quot;Code block&quot; เปิดให้คุณแทรกรหัส
* รายการ &quot;เครื่องหมายกำกับดนตรี&quot; เปิดให้คุณแทรกเครื่องหมายกำกับดนตรี
* สัญรูป &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (ชุดภาพถ่าย) เปิดให้คุณแทรกแกลอรีเข้าในหน้า
* สัญรูป &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (Σ) เปิด[[#Editing mathematical formulae|คำโต้ตอบเครื่องมือแทรกสูตร]]
* รายการ &quot;กราฟ&quot; ให้คุณแทรกกราฟ
* รายการ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}&quot; ให้คุณแทรกลายเซ็นที่คุณใช้ในโครงการนั้น เครื่องมือจะกลายเป็นสีเทา (เลือกไม่ได้) เมื่อคุณแก้ไขหน้าบางประเภท (&quot;เนมสเปซ&quot;) เช่น บทความ ซึ่งไม่ควรแทรกลายเซ็น
* ไอคอน &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; รูปหนังสือสามเล่มเปิดหน้าต่างแสดงรายการอ้างอิง
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''การแทรกอักขระพิเศษ:''' สัญรูป &quot;{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}&quot; (Ω) อยู่ถัดจากรายการเลือก &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; เมื่อกดจะแสดงคำโต้ตอบที่แสดงอักขระพิเศษจำนวนมาก เมื่อคลิกที่อักขระใดอักขระหนึ่งจะเป็นการวางในข้อความ อักขระพิเศษเหล่านี้ประกอบด้วยสัญลักษณ์มาตรฐาน เครื่องหมายเสริมสัทอักษรและเครื่องหมายคณิตศาสตร์ (รายการนี้อาจปรับแต่งได้ในท้องถิ่น ดูคำชี้แจงที่ {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}})
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| ปุ่ม'''ประกาศแก้ไข'''แสดงผลประกาศใด ๆ สำหรับหน้านั้น
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;รายการเลือก '''$pagemenu''' อยู่ซ้ายมือของปุ่ม ''$save'' และรายการเลือก &quot;เปลี่ยนเครื่องมือแก้ไข&quot; ในรายการเลือกนี้มีปุ่มเปิดคำโต้ตอบ'''ตัวเลือก'''โดยมีแถบดังต่อไปนี้ (อยู่ซ้ายมือ)&lt;/span&gt;

* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' ให้คุณเพิ่มหมวดหมู่เข้าหน้านี้และปรับเปลี่ยนวิธีการเรียงลำดับหน้า เมื่อแสดงผลภายในหมวดหมู่โดยการตั้งค่าดัชนีต่าง ๆ ให้สำหรับเรียงลำดับ
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' ให้คุณแปลงหน้าเป็นหน้าเปลี่ยนทางและปรับเปลี่ยนตัวเลือกของการเปลี่ยนทางนี้, ปรับเปลี่ยนการตั้งค่าว่าด้วยการแสดงผลสารบัญ, ปิดใช้งานข้อความลิงก์แก้ไขที่อยู่ถัดจากหัวเรื่อง และนิยามหน้าเป็นหน้าแก้ความกำกวม
* '''การตั้งค่าขั้นสูง''' ให้คุณปรับเปลี่ยนการตั้งค่าเกี่ยวกับการทำดัชนีของหน้าโดยเสิร์ชเอนจิน แสดงแถบให้เพิ่มส่วนใหม่และชื่อเรื่องที่แสดงผล
* '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' ซึ่งแสดงรายการหน้าในภาษาอื่นที่เชื่อมโยงมาหน้านั้น
* '''แม่แบบที่ใช้''' แสดงรายการลิงก์ไปแม่แบบที่ใช้ในหน้านี้

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;แถบคำโต้ตอบตัวเลือกยังแสดงผลในรายการเลือก$pagemenu สามารถเปิดได้โดยคลิก&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ยิ่งไปกว่านั้นรายการเลือก$pagemenuยังมีปุ่ม '''ดูเป็นขวาไปซ้าย''' และปุ่ม '''ค้นหาและแทนที่''' ซึ่งเปิดคำโต้ตอบที่คุณสามารถแทรกอักขระ พจน์หรือนิพจน์ปรกติที่คุณกำลังค้นหาและที่จะแทนที่ ร่วมกับตัวเลือกอีกหลายปุ่ม&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ปุ่ม'''เปลี่ยนเป็นการแก้ไขต้นฉบับ'''อยู่ถัดจากปุ่ม '''$save''' ซึ่งจพทำให้คุณเปลี่ยนเป็นเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบข้อความวิกิ&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== การเผยแพร่การเปลี่ยนแปลง ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| เมื่อคุณแก้ไขเสร็จแล้ว คลิกปุ่ม &quot;{{int|publishchanges}}&quot; สีน้ำเงินในแถบเครื่องมือ ถ้ายังไม่ได้เปลี่ยนแปลงอะไร ปุ่มจะยังปิดใช้งาน (เป็นสีเทา) หากต้องการยกเลิกการเปลี่ยนแปลงแก้ไขทั้งหมด ให้ปิดหน้าต่างเบราว์เซอร์ หรือกดแถบ &quot;{{int|vector-view-view}}&quot; ที่อยู่บนแถบเครื่องมือแก้ไข
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;การกดปุ่ม &quot;{{int|publishchanges-start}}&quot; สีน้ำเงินจะเปิดคำโต้ตอบ คุณสามารถกรอกความย่อการแก้ไขการกระทำของคุณ ระบุว่าการแก้ไขของคุณเป็นการแก้ไขเล็กน้อย และเพิ่มหน้าเข้า$watchlist กล่องสำหรับความย่อเทียบเท่ากับเขตข้อมูล{{int|summary}}ในเครื่องมือแก้ไขข้อความวิกิ&lt;/span&gt;

คุณยังสามารถทบทวนการเปลี่ยนแปลงของคุณโดยใช้ปุ่ม &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; เพื่อยืนยันว่าการแก้ไขนั้นจะทำงานได้ตามที่คุณประสงค์ก่อนบันทึกการเปลี่ยนแปลง ซึ่งคล้ายกับปุ่ม &quot;{{int|showdiff}}&quot; ในเครื่องมือแก้ไขข้อความวิกิ

ปุ่ม &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}&quot; ให้คุณย้อนกลับไปหน้าที่คุณกำลังแก้ไข คุณสามารถเผยแพร่การเปลี่ยนแปลงของคุณทีหลังได้
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== การแก้ไขลิงก์ ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| สามารถเพิ่มลิงก์ผ่านสัญรูป &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; (รูปข้อต่อโซ่) ในแถบเครื่องมือหรือผ่านทางลัด {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (หรือ {{Key press|Command|K}} บนแมค)

หากคุณเลือก (เน้น) ข้อความแล้วกดปุ่ม &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; จะใช้ข้อความนั้นในการสร้างลิงก์ สำหรับลิงก์ที่ใช้คำคำเดียว คุณสามารถเลือกคำคำนั้นหรือเพียงวางเคอร์เซอร์ในคำนั้นก็ได้
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| ไม่ว่าคุณจะกดปุ่มในแถบเครื่องมือหรือผ่านทางลัด หน้าต่างจะปรากฏให้คุณพิมพ์ลิงก์ที่คุณต้องการเชื่อม VisualEditor จะพยายามช่วยคุณหาลิงก์ภายใน (ลิงก์หน้าอื่นๆ ของวิกิพีเดีย) โดยการค้นหาหน้าที่อาจใช่ทันทีที่คุณเริ่มพิมพ์
เครื่องมือลิงก์จะพยายามช่วยเหลือลิงก์'''ภายใน'''โดยการค้นหาคำตรงกันที่เป็นไปได้
เวลาคุณกรอกหรือเลือกลิงก์ การกด {{key press|Enter}} หรือกดปุ่ม &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; จะเป็นการเสร็จสิ้นกระบวนการเชื่อมโยง ลิงก์ของคุณจะปรากฏบนหน้าทันที แต่จะยังไม่เผยเแพร่จนกว่าจะเผยแพร่''ทั้ง''หน้าพร้อมกับการเปลี่ยนแปลงอย่างอื่น
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| การลิงก์ไปยังเว็บเพจในเว็บไซต์อื่นมีกระบวนการคล้ายกัน: เลือกแถบ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}&quot; แล้วกรอกยูอาร์แอลในกล่อง
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| ลิงก์ภายนอกที่ไม่มีป้ายจะเป็นดังตัวอย่าง: [http://example.com] คุณสามารถเพิ่มลิงก์ภายนอกโดยวางเคอร์เซอร์ไม่ให้อยู่บนคำใดคำหนึ่ง (เช่น ตามหลังช่องว่าง) เปิดเครื่องมือลิงก์โดยกดปุ่มหรือกดแป้นทางลัด พิมพ์ยูอาร์แอลในกล่อง แล้วกดปุ่ม&quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; เพื่อแทรกลิงก์
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| ในการเปลี่ยนแปลงหรือลบลิงก์ที่มีอยู่แล้ว กดภายในข้อความสำหรับลิงก์นั้น แล้วกดสัญรูป &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; ซึ่งปรากฏอยู่ใกล้เคียง จะปรากฏคำโต้ตอบสำหรับแก้ไข คุณยังสามารถไปยังคำโต้ตอบดังกล่าวได้โดยกดทางลัดคีย์บอร์ด {{key press|Ctrl|K}} ก็ได้ เมื่อเลือกลิงก์ จะปรากฏโดยมีกรอบสีน้ำเงิน

ในคำโต้ตอบแก้ไขลิงก์ คุณสามารถเปลี่ยนแปลงปลายทางของลิงก์ คุณยังสามารถลบลิงก์ได้โดยกดปุ่ม &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; ที่อยู่มุมขวาบนของคำโต้ตอบ
คุณยังสามารถเปิดเป้าหมายลิงก์ในหน้าต่างอื่นได้โดยกดสำเนาของลิงก์ในกล่องคำโต้ตอบ (เผื่อคุณต้องการตรวจสอบว่าลิงก์ภายนอกนั้นใช้การได้หรือไม่)

หากคุณต้องการออกจากป้ายลิงก์ (ข้อความที่แสดงผลเป็นลิงก์) หรือเขียนต่อหลังจากลิงก์นี้ สามารถกด {{Key press|→}}:
* เมื่อกดหนึ่งครั้งจะออกจากคำโต้ตอบแก้ไขลิงก์ และวางเคอร์เซอร์ไว้ที่ปลายสุดของส่วนย่อยที่เลือก (กรอบสีน้ำเงินเพื่อแก้ไขส่วนย่อยนี้)
* เมื่อกดสองครั้งจะวางเคอร์เซอร์ไว้หลังส่วนย่อยที่ลิงก์ พร้อมกรอกข้อความที่เหลือ

ในการแก้ไขป้ายลิงก์สำหรับลิงก์ที่มีอยู่ ให้กดภายในป้ายลิงก์แล้วกรอกป้ายใหม่
แต่ห้ากคุณต้องการเปลี่ยนทั้งป้าย กรุณาทราบว่า:

* หากคุณเลือก (เน้น) ป้ายลิงก์ทั้งหมด การพิมพ์แป้นใด ๆ จะเป็นการลบลิงก์
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ในการเก็บลิงก์โดยตรง คุณอาจกดภายในป้ายลิงก์นั้น กดย้อนกลับและลบแป้นโดยไม่กดมากกว่าจำเป็นหนึ่งครั้ง แล้วจะยังเหลือบริเวณลิงก์สีน้ำเงินแคบ ๆ ตรงนั้น&lt;/span&gt; ตอนนี้คุณสามารถพิมพ์ป้ายใหม่สำหรับลิงก์ที่เก็บไว้ได้
* คุณยังสามารถ[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|เชื่อมโยงไปหมวดหมู่ ไฟล์ และอื่น ๆ]]
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== การแก้ไขแหล่งอ้างอิง ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|คำอธิบายการใช้แม่แบบยกแหล่งที่มา]] หรือ[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|คำอธิบายการใช้ปุ่ม citoid's {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} ของไซทอยด์]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== การดูว่าใช้ระบบใด ===
|-
| วิกิของคุณอาจใช้ระบบเชิงอรรถหนึ่งในสามระบบ ระบบที่แสดงด้านขวามือเป็นระบบง่ายสุด โดยที่รายการเลือก &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; ไม่รวมแม่แบบยกแหล่งที่มาใด หากวิกิของคุณใช้ระบบนี้ คุณจำเป็นต้องทราบเกี่ยวกับเชิงอรรถเฉพาะเท่าที่อยู่ในหน้านี้
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| ระบบที่สองมีรายการเลือก &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; ประเภทเดียวกัน แต่มีแม่แบบยกแหล่งที่มาที่ได้รับความนิยมหลายแม่แบบสำหรับเข้าถึงได้อย่างรวดเร็ว หากวิกิของคุณใช้ระบบนี้ รายละเอียดเพิ่มเติมจะอยู่ที่ {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ในระบบที่สาม คุณเริ่มจากการกดปุ่ม Cite เช่นกัน&lt;/span&gt; จะปรากฏกล่องคำโต้ตอบซึ่งมีกระบวนการยกแหล่งที่มาอัตโนมัติโดยใช้บริการไซทอยด์ หากวิกิของคุณใช้ระบบนี้ รายละเอียดเพิ่มเติมจะอยู่ที่ {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== แก้ไขแหล่งอ้างอิงที่มีอยู่ ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ในการแก้ไขแหล่งอ้างอิงที่มีอยู่แล้ว ให้กดที่แหล่งอ้างอิงนั้นที่ปรากฏในข้อความ (ปกติเป็นเลขในวงเล็บเหลี่ยม) คุณจะเห็นสัญรูป &quot;$ref&quot; (ที่คั่นหนังสือ) หรือสัญรูป (และชื่อ) สำหรับแม่แบบที่ใช้สร้างแหล่งอ้างอิงนั้น ทั้งสองกรณี เมื่อกดปุ่ม &quot;แก้ไช&quot; จะเปิดคำโต้ตอบให้คุณแก้ไขแหล่งที่มา&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;สำหรับสัญรูป &quot;$ref&quot; เมื่อกด &quot;แก้ไข&quot; จะเป็นการเปิดคำโต้ตอบอ้างอิง การเปลี่ยนแปลงสารนิเทศแหล่งอ้างอิงให้เริ่มจากกดปุ่ม&lt;/span&gt;

หลายวิกิใช้แม่แบบในการจัดรูปแบบแหล่งอ้างอิงในมาตรฐานที่แตกต่างกัน คุณจะสังเกตได้เมื่อคุณแก้ไขแหล่งอ้างอิงที่มีอยู่และพบว่าเนื้อหาข้อความอ้างอิงเปลี่ยนเป็นสีฟ้าเมื่อคุณเลือกมัน

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
หากใช้แม่แบบและคุณกดสารนิเทศอ้างอิง จะปรากฏสัญรูป $template (ชิ้นส่วนจิ๊กซอว์) พร้อมกับสารนิเทศบางส่วน เมื่อกดปุ่ม &quot;แก้ไข&quot; จะแก้ไขเนื้อหาของแม่แบบนั้นในคำโต้ตอบเครื่องมือแก้ไขแม่แบบขนาดย่อม
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;หากสิ่งที่ปรากฏเมื่อคุณกดอ้างอิงเป็นสัญรูปสำหรับแม่แบบมาตรฐานสำหรับการยกแหล่งที่มา (ตัวอย่างอยู่ขวามือ) แล้วเมื่อกด &quot;แก้ไข&quot; จะเปิดคำโต้ตอบเครื่องมือแก้ไขแม่แบบขนาดย่อม&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ภายในเครื่องมือแก้ไขแม่แบบขนาดย่อม คุณสามารถเพิ่มหรือลบประเภทของสารสนเทศหรือเปลี่ยนเนื้อหาปัจจุบันได้ ทีแรกจะแสดงเฉพาะเตข้อมูล (ตัวแปรเสริมแม่แบบ) ที่มีเนื้อหา ในการเพิ่มเขตข้อมูลให้เกิด &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; ที่อยู่ด้านล่างของเครื่องมือแก้ไขขนาดย่อมดังกล่าว&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| คลิกที่ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; เมื่อคุณเสร็จแล้ว 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== การใช้แหล่งอ้างอิงที่มีอยู่แล้วซ้ำ ===
|-
| หากหน้านั้นมีการยกแหล่งที่มาที่ใช้แก่ข้อความที่คุณต้องการระบุแหล่งที่มาแล้ว คุณสามารถเลือกใช้การยกแหล่งที่มาที่มีอยู่แล้วซ้ำได้

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
ในการใช้แหล่งอ้างอิงที่มีอยู่แล้วซ้ำ ให้วางเคอร์เซอร์ในข้อความที่คุณต้องการเพิ่มแหล่งอ้างอิงใหม่ (เลข) สำหรับการยกแหล่งที่มานั้น แล้วกดรายการ &quot;ใช่แหล่งอ้างอิงซ้ำ&quot; จากรายการเลือก &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(หมายเหตุ: หากวิกิของคุณใช้ระบบเชิงอรรถระบบที่สามดังที่อธิบายไว้ข้างต้น คุณจะเห็นแถบ &quot;ใช้ซ้ำ&quot; ในคำโต้ตอบ แทนรายการเลือก &quot;ใช้ซ้ำ&quot; ในรายการเลือก &quot;$cite&quot;)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| ในคำโต้ตอบ {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} ให้ดูรายการแหล่งอ้างอิงที่คุณต้องการใช้ซ้ำแล้วเลือก หากมีแหล่งอ้างอิงหลายแหล่ง คุณสามารถใช้กล่องค้นหา (ระบุว่า &quot;{{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}&quot;) ให้แสดงรายการเฉพาะแหล่งอ้างอิงที่มีข้อความที่ใส่ในช่องค้นหา
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== การเพิ่มแหล่งอ้างอิงใหม่ ===
|-
| ในการเพิ่มการยกแหล่งที่มาโดยใช้รายการเลือก &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; ให้วางเคอร์เซอร์ของคุณในที่ที่คุณต้องการเพิ่มการยกแหล่งที่มาในข้อความ แล้วเลือกประเภทการยกแหล่งที่มาให้เหมาะสมในรายการเลือก
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== การใช้การยกแหล่งที่มา &quot;พื้นฐาน&quot; ====
|-
| ที่แสดงอยู่นี้เป็นสิ่งที่คุณจะเห็นเมื่อเลือกรายการอ้างอิงพื้นฐาน  ในเครื่องมือแก้ไขแหล่งอ้างอิง คุณสามารถเพิ่มการยกแหล่งที่มารวมทั้งการจัดรูปแบบได้

คุณสามารถทำให้แหล่งอ้างอิงนั้นอยู่ในกลุ่มหนึ่ง ๆ ได้ แม้ปกติแล้วควรจะปล่อยว่างไว้ (ตัวเลือกนี้ใช้เพื่อแสดงผลกลุ่มแหล่งอ้างอิงด้วยเครื่องมือ &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot;)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| ในคำโต้ตอบแหล่งอ้างอิง หากคุณต้องการใส่แม่แบบการยกแหล่งที่มา หรือแม่แบบอื่นในแหล่งอ้างอิงใหม่ ให้กดสัญรูป{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} (ชิ้นส่วนจิ๊กซอว์) ในรายการเลือกแถบเครื่องมือ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; ในเครื่องมือแก้ไขแหล่งอ้างอิง
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| แล้วมองหาแม่แบบที่คุณต้องการใช้ เพิ่มและแก้ไขแบบเดียวกับแม่แบบอื่น (ดูส่วน[[#Editing templates|การแก้ไขแม่แบบ]]ด้านล่าง หากคุณต้องสารทราบเพิ่มเติมเกี่ยวกับแม่แบบ)

เมื่อแก้ไขแม่แบบใหม่เสร็จแล้ว ให้กด &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; เพื่อย้อนกลับมาเครื่องมือแก้ไขแหล่งอ้างอิง และกด &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; อีกครั้งเพื่อย้อนกลับไปหน้าที่คุณกำลังแก้ไข
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| หากไม่มีรายการแหล่งอ้างอิงอยู่ในหน้าอยู่แล้ว (ตัวอย่างเช่น หากคุณกำลังเพิ่มแหล่งอ้างอิงแรกเข้าหน้า) คุณจำเป็นต้องเจาะจงว่ารายการแหล่งอ้างอิงและข้อความนั้นจะแสดงผลให้แก่ผู้อ่านที่ใด

ให้วางเคอร์เซอร์ไว้ ณ ตำแหน่งที่คุณต้องการแสดงผลรายการแหล่งอ้างอิง (ปกติอยู่ท้ายหน้า) ให้เปิดรายการเลือก &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; แล้วกดสัญรูป &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (หนังสือสามเล่ม)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| หากคุณกำลังใช้แหล่งอ้างอิงหลายกลุ่มซึ่งค่อนข้างพบน้อย คุณสามารถเจาะจงกลุ่มในคำโต้ตอบนี้ได้ จะแสดงผลเฉพาะแหล่งอ้างอิงที่อยู่ในกลุ่มที่เลือกในตำแหน่งที่คุณวางกลุ่มนั้นในหน้า

ขั้นตอนสุดท้ายในคำโต้ตอบรายการแหล่งอ้างอิงคือกด &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== การใช้แม่แบบยกแหล่งที่มามาตรฐาน ====
|-
| วิกิท้องถิ่นของคุณอาจเพิ่มแม่แบบยกแหล่งที่มาเพิ่มเข้ารายการเลือก &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; หากเป็นเช่นนั้น คุณสามารถเข้าถึงแม่แบบยกแหล่งที่มาที่ใช้บ่อยที่สุดในวิกิของคุณ (มีคำชี้แจงสำหรับการเพิ่มแม่แบบยกแหล่งที่มาเพิ่มเข้าวิกิท้องถิ่นของคุณที่ {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}})
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| เมื่อกดสัญรูปแม่แบบอย่าง &quot;ยกแหล่งที่มาหนังสือ&quot; จะนำคุณไปยังเครื่องมือแก้ไขแม่แบบขนาดย่อมสำหรับแม่แบบนั้น เขตข้อมูลสารนิเทศสำคัญอาจทำเครื่องหมายด้วยดอกจัน (*) ส่วนเขตข้อมูลที่ใช้มากที่สุดจะแสดง ทั้งนี้ ไม่จำเป็นต้องกรอกบางเขตข้อมูล
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ในการเพิ่มตัวแปรเสริมอีก ให้เลื่อนลงมาในเครื่องมือแก้ไขแม่แบบขนาดย่อม แล้วกดตัวเลือก &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot;&lt;/span&gt;

กด &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; เมื่อคุณดำเนินการเสร็จ
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== การแก้ไขภาพและไฟล์สื่ออื่น ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== การแก้ไขภาพ ===
|-
| ในการการเพิ่มภาพใหม่ (หรือไฟล์สื่อประเภทอื่น) ลงในหน้า ให้กดสัญรูป &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}} (รูปภูเขา) ในรายการเลือก &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; จะเพิ่มภาพ ณ ตำแหน่งของเคอร์เซอร์
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| เมื่อกดสัญรูป &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; จะเปิดคำโต้ตอบที่ค้นหาวิกิมีเดียคอมมอนส์และวิกิท้องถิ่นของคุณอัตโนมัติเพื่อหาไฟล์สื่อที่สัมพันธ์กับชื่อเรื่องหน้าที่คุณกำลังแก้ไขอยู่

คุณสามารถเปลี่ยนแปลงการค้นหาโดยเปลี่ยนข้อความในกล่องค้นหาของคำโต้ตอบ

คลิกที่รูปย่อเพื่อเลือกไฟล์

จะเป็นการเพิ่มภาพลงในหน้าที่คุณกำลังแก้ไข
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| หลังแทรกภาพที่คุณเลือกลงในหน้าแล้ว จะเปิดคำโต้ตอบอีกอันหนึ่ง คำโต้ตอบทำให้คุณเพิ่มและแก้ไขคำบรรยายภาพ ซึ่งสามารถใส่การจัดรูปแบบและลิงก์ได้
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| คำโต้ตอบสื่อยังเปิดให้คุณเพิ่มคำบรรยายภาพที่เป็นข้อความทางเลือก (alternative text) เพื่อช่วยผู้อ่านที่ใช้โปรแกรมอ่านจอภาพ หรือผู้ที่ปิดใช้งานการแสดงผลภาพ
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| คุณสามารถตั้งตัวแปรเสริมต่าง ๆ สำหรับภาพในหน้าต่าง &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot; ซึ่งรวมถึงการปรับแนว ชนิดและขนาดภาพ
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| เมื่อคุณเสร็จแล้ว กด &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; เพื่อปิดคำโต้ตอบและย้อนกลับไปแก้ไขหน้าเดิม
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| สำหรับภาพที่มีอยู่แล้ว คุณสามารถเพิ่มหรือแก้ไขคำบรรยายภาพ หรือแก้ไขการตั้งค่าอื่นโดยกดที่ภาพ แล้วกดสัญรูป &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; ที่ปรากฏอยู่ใต้ภาพ

คุณสามารถปรับขนาดภาพที่มีอยู่แล้วโดยกดที่ภาพ แล้วเลื่อนสัญรูปปรับขนาด (ลูกศรสองหัวที่อยู่มุมด้านล่างซึ่งอาจมีด้านเดียวหรือสองด้าน)

คุณยังสามารถลากและวางภาพไปยังตำแหน่งที่อยู่สูงขึ้นไปหรือล่างลงมาในภาพได้
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== การอัปโหลดภาพ ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| คุณสามารถอัปโหลดภาพจากแถบในคำโต้ตอบสื่อ หรือโดยลากและวางไฟล์ลงในเครื่องมือแก้ไข หรือโดยวางภาพจากคลิปบอร์ดของคุณ
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| กดแถบ &quot;อัปโหลด&quot; แล้วเลือกภาพจากคอมพิวเตอร์ของคุณ คุณสามารถเพิ่มชื่อไฟล์ หรือลากภาพลงในกล่อง หากคุณลากและวางภาพลงในเครื่องมือแก้ไขโดยตรง หรือวางภาพจากคลิปบอร์ดของคุณ แถบนี้จะเปิดอัตโนมัติ
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| คุณจำเป็นต้องบรรยายภาพและเพิ่มหมวดหมู่เพื่อให้ผู้อื่นหาพบ
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| จะแทรกภาพลงในหน้าเมื่อคุณเสร็จสิ้น
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== การแก้ไขแกลอรีสื่อ ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| ในการเพิ่มแกลอรีใหม่ ให้กดสัญรูป &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (ชุดภาพถ่าย) ในรายการเลือก &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (หากคุณไม่เห็นสัญรูปนี้ในรายการเลือกแปลว่าวิกอท้องถิ่นของคุณตัดสินใจชะลอการนำฟังก์ชันนี้ในปฏิบัติในเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพ) 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| ในการแก้ไขแกลอรีที่มีอยู่แล้วในเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพ ให้กดแกลอรีนั้น แล้วกดสัญรูปแกลอรี (ชุดภาพถ่าย) ที่อยู่ใกล้ล่างสุดของแกลอรี จะปรากฏเครื่องมือแก้ไขแกลอรี โดยมีรายการภาพเต็มที่รวมอยู่ในแกอลรีนั้น
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;เครื่องมือแก้ไขแกลอรีปัจจุบันเป็นกล่องเรียบ ๆ ที่ให้คุณแก้ไขแกลอรีที่มีอยู่แล้วโดยใช้มาร์กอัพข้อความวิกิ ในการเพิ่มภาพใหม่ลงในแกลอรีที่มีอยู่แล้ว ให้พิมพ์ชื่อไฟล์ ตามด้วยขีดตั้ง (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) และคำบรรยายสำหรับภาพนั้น ภาพในแกลอรีต้องใส่หนึ่งบรรทัดต่อหนึ่งภาพ&lt;/span&gt; คุณยังสามารถแก้ไขรายการนี้เพื่อลบหรือจัดเรียงภาพหรือเพื่อเปลี่ยนคำบรรยายภาพ

เมื่อคุณกดปุ่ม &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; คุณจะออกจากเครื่องมือแก้ไขแกลอรี จากนั้นคุณควรดูการเปลี่ยนแปลงของคุณ โดยมีแกลอรีที่จะปรากฏแก่ผู้อ่าน

ระลึกว่าการออกเครื่องมือแก้ไขแกลอรียังไม่เผยแพร่การเปลี่ยนแปลงของคุณ เช่นเดียวกับการเปลี่ยนแปลงอื่นที่ใช้เครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพ คุณต้องเผยแพร่ทั้งหน้าเพื่อเผยแพร่งานของคุณ
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== การแก้ไขแม่แบบ ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The powerful MediaWiki template system lets you insert dynamic content, text from other pages, and much more. For a detailed explanation and examples, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Templates help page]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the VisualEditor you can search for a relevant template, add an invocation or [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusion]] on the page you’re editing and, if needed, add custom content using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameters]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert new template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ในการเพิ่มแม่แบบลงในหน้า ให้วางเคอร์เซอร์ที่ที่คุณต้องการแทรกแม่แบบ และกดสัญรูป &quot;$template&quot;  (ชิ้นส่วนจิ๊กซอว์) ในรายการเลือก &quot;$insert&quot;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then open the {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} menu and select &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, type two curly brackets {{((}} to open the same dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;คุณยังสามารถแก้ไขแม่แบบที่มีอยู่ในหน้าอยู่แล้วได้ เมื่อคุณกดเลือกที่แม่แบบ จะกลายเป็นสีน้ำเงิน แล้วจะมีกล่องปรากฏพร้อมสัญรูป &quot;$template&quot; (ชิ้นส่วนจิ๊กซอว์) แล้วกดลิงก์ &quot;$edit&quot;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you select the template you want to edit, it turns blue, and a box appears displaying &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then select the &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; link  or double click on the template itself to open the template.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| บางคนที่อ่านหน้าอาจมองไม่เห็นบางแม่แบบ &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ในเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพ แม่แบบซ่อนดังกล่าวจะแสดงเป็นสัญรูปจิ๊กซอว์&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ชื่อของแม่แบบจะแสดงอยู่ถัดจากสัญรูปจิ๊กซอว์&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== พารามิเตอร์แม่แบบ ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You’ll see this dialog box when you’re adding a new template or editing one already in place.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What you see in the box depends on whether the template in question contains {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, helpful metadata added by other editors to make it easier to edit templates in the Visual Editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When a template contains TemplateData, the VisualEditor can use it to present annotated fields for you to fill in.
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For templates that have some community-provided TemplateData, the VisualEditor displays a list of the named parameters and, often, descriptions and instructions explaining the meaning and required format for each parameter’s values.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Adding undocumented parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter: “1”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter’s value: “en_US”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter: “2”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter’s value: “yes”&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Autogenerated parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completing your edit ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;เมื่อคุณแก้ไขแม่แบบแล้วเสร็จ กด &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; เพื่อปิดคำโต้ตอบแล้วกลับไปแก้ไขหน้าหลัก&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing on mobile ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== การแทนที่แม่แบบ ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== การแก้ไขรายการ ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| คุณสามารถใช้เครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพเพื่อสร้างรายการ หรือเปลี่ยนรูปแบบของรายการที่มีอยู่เดิม มีรายการสองประเภท คือ รายการไม่เรียงลำดับ (จุดนำ) และเรียงลำดับ (เลขนำ)

ในการเริ่มรายการใหม่ ให้กดรายการหนึ่งจากสองรายการที่แสดง หรือหากคุณพิมพ์รายการแล้ว (แยกคนละบรรทัด) สามารถเลือก (เน้น) รายการที่พิมพ์ แล้วค่อยกดเลือกรายการก็ได้
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| ที่แสดงอยู่นี้เป็นตัวอย่างของรายการสองประเภท: รายการไม่เรียงลำดับ (จุดนำ) และเรียงลำดับ (เลขนำ)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| หากคุณต้องการเปลี่ยนระดับการย่อหน้าของส่วนรายการที่มีอยู่แล้ว ให้เลือกส่วนของรายการที่คุณต้องการเปลี่ยน
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| แล้วใช้รายการเลือก หรือกดแป้น Tab (แป้น Tab เพิ่มย่อหน้า, แป้น Shift+Tab ลดย่อหน้า)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| ผลของการเพิ่มย่อหน้าเป็นดังนี้
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| คุณสามารถผสมรายการเรียงลำดับ (เลขนำ) และไม่เรียงลำดับ (จุดนำ) ด้วยกันได้ หากข้อมูลในรายการมีย่อหน้าต่างระดับกัน
|}

== การแก้ไขตาราง ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| คุณสามารถใช้เครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพเพื่อแทรกและเปลี่ยนตาราง

คุณสามารถนำเข้าตารางโดยการลากไฟล์ค่าที่คั่นด้วยเครื่องหมายจุลภาค (.csv) จากคอมพิวเตอร์คุณเข้าหน้าต่างแก้ไขหลัก
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| เมื่อคุณกด &quot;ตาราง&quot; ในรายการเลือก &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; เครื่องมือแก้ไขแทรกตารางว่างขนาด 4 คูณ 4

เมื่อรายการเลือก &quot;ตาราง&quot; แล้ว จากรายการเลือกนั้น คุณสามารถเพิ่มคำบรรยายไว้หัวตารางได้
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| ในการเลือกเซลล์ ให้กดหนึ่งครั้ง
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| ในการแก้ไขเนื้อหาของเซลล์ (ตัวอย่างเช่น เพื่อเพิ่มเนื้อหาหรือแก้ไขการสะกด) ให้กดเซลล์สองครั้ง หรือกดเลือกเซลล์แล้วกด Return (Enter)

ในการยุติการแก้ไขเซลล์ เพียงแค่กดที่อื่น
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| คุณสามารถเพิ่ม ย้ายหรือลบแถวตั้งหรือแถวนอน
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| คุณสามารถผสานเซลล์ได้ ให้เลือกเซลล์ที่จะผสาน แล้วกด &quot;Merge cells&quot; จากรายการเลือกตาราง
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| หากคุณผสานเซลล์ จะเก็บข้อความจากเซลล์เดียว และข้อความอื่นใดในเซลล์อื่นจะถูกลบเมื่อผสาน หากคุณตัดสินใจว่าคุณต้องการเก็บข้อความบางส่วนหรือทั้งหมดที่ถูกลบ ให้ใช้วิธีกดปุ่มทำกลับ แล้วย้ายหรือคัดลอกข้อความที่ต้องการก่อน แล้วจึงผสานเซลล์อีกครั้ง
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| คุณยังสามารถแบ่งเซลล์ที่ผสานก่อนหน้านี้ เนื้อหาทั้งหมดที่อยู่ในเซลล์ผสานจะยังอยู่ในเซลล์แรกเมื่อคุณแยก คุณสามารถตัดและวางข้คอวามในเซลล์อื่นได้ตามต้องการ
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== การแก้ไขหมวดหมู่ ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| ในการแก้ไขหมวดหมู่ ให้กดรายการ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; ในรายการเลือก &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| เมื่อกด &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; จะเปิดคำโต้ตอบซึ่งแสดงรายการหมวดหมู่ที่มีอยู่ และให้คุณเพิ่มหมวดหมู่ใหม่และลบหมวดหมู่ที่มีอยู่

คุณยังมีตัวเลือกตั้งหรือเปลี่ยน[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|แป้นเรียงลำดับ]]ทั่วไป (โดยปริยาย) ซึ่งตัดสินว่าหน้านั้นจะปรากฏอยู่ลำดับใดเมื่อเรียงลำดับพร้อมกับหน้าอื่นในหมวดหมู่เดียวกัน

ตัวอย่างเช่น แป้นเรียงลำดับโดยปริยายของบทความ &quot;George Washington&quot; คือ &quot;Washington, George&quot; ในหมวดหมู่ &quot;ประธานาธิบดีสหรัฐ&quot; บทความจะแสดงรายการอยู่ภายใต้อักษร &quot;W&quot; ไม่ใช่อักษร &quot;G&quot; 

(สำหรับตัวอย่างภาษาไทย &quot;ไก่&quot; แป้นเรียงลำดับจะเป็น &quot;กไ&quot; เพื่อให้เรียงลำดับโดยใช้อักษร &quot;ก&quot; ก่อน แล้วจึงเรียงลำดับด้วย &quot;ไ&quot; ซึ่งคล้ายกับการเรียงคำของพจนานุกรม)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| ในการเพิ่มหมวดหมู่สำหรับหน้า ให้พิมพ์ชื่อแม่แบบลงในเขตข้อมูล &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}&quot; ระหว่างที่พิมพ์ เครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพจะค้นหาแม่แบบเป็นไปได้ที่อาจตรงกันด้วย จากนั้นคุณสามารถเลือกหมวดหมู่ที่มีอยู่แล้วหรือคุณสามารถเพิ่มหมวดหมู่ที่ยังไม่มีหน้าหมวดหมู่ก็ได้ (ถ้ายังไม่สร้างหน้าหมวดหมู่จะปรากฏเป็นลิงก์แดงหลังคุณเผยแพร่การเปลี่ยนแปลง)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| การลบหมวดหมู่ที่มีอยู่เดิมให้กดเลือกหมวดหมู่แล้วคลิกสัญรูป &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; (ถังขยะ) ในคำโต้ตอบที่เปิดขึ้นมา

เมื่อกดหมวดหมู่จะให้คุณเจาะจงแป้นเรียงลำดับสำหรับหมวดหมู่นั้นโดยเฉพาะด้วย แป้นเรียงลำดับนี้จะเขียนทับแป้นเรียงลำดับทั่วไป
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| กด &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; เมื่อคุณเสร็จสิ้นการแก้ไขหมวดหมู่เพื่อย้อนกลับไปเครื่องมือแก้ไขหน้า
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== การแก้ไขการตั้งค่าหน้า ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| ในการแก้ไขการตั้งค่าของหน้า ให้เปิดรายการเลือก &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; ในแถบเครื่องมือ แล้วกดปุ่ม &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| ปุ่ม &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; เปิดคำโต้ตอบที่แสดงหลายตัวเลือก
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| คุณสามารถสร้างหน้าเป็นหน้าเปลี่ยนทางไปหน้าอื่นโดยเลือกกล่อง &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot; แล้วพิมพ์ชื่อหน้าปลายทาง

ด้านล่างเป็นตัวเลือกในการป้องกันการเปลี่ยนชื่อหน้าจากการปรับการเปลี่ยนทางนี้ ซึ่งแทบไม่ได้ใช้
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| คุณสามารถเปลี่ยนให้หน้าแสดงสารบัญหรือไม่โดยเลือกปุ่มสามปุ่มนี้ ตัวเลือกโดยปริยายคือ &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot; ซึ่งแสดงสารบัญหากมีพาดหัวตั้งแต่สามพาดหัวขึ้นไป
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| คุณสามารถทำให้หน้าไม่แสดงลิงก์แก้ไขถัดจากพาดหัวส่วนโดยเลือกกล่องนี้
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| กด &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; เมื่อคุณแก้ไข {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} เสร็จเพื่อกลับไปเครื่องมือแก้ไขหน้า
|}

== การแก้ไขแผนที่ ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| คุณสามารถเพิ่มและเปลี่ยนแผนที่ ดู {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== การแก้ไขสูตรคณิตศาสตร์ ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| ในการเพิ่มสูตรคณิตศาสตร์ใหม่ในหน้า ให้วางเคอร์เซอร์ที่ที่คุณต้องการแทรก แล้วกดสัญรูป {{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot;  (&quot;Σ&quot;) ในรายการเลือก &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; บนแถบเครื่องมือ
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| จะเปิดหน้าต่างที่คุณสามารถพิมพ์สูตร โดยใช้วากยสัมพันธ์ LaTeX เครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพจะปรับสูตรตามที่คุณพิมพ์ ฉะนั้นคุณจะเห็นว่าการแสดงผลเป็นอย่างไรพร้อมกับที่คุณกำลังเปลี่ยนแปลง เมื่อคุณพอใจกับสูตรแล้ว ให้กดปุ่ม &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| ในการแก้ไขสูตรคณิตศาสตร์ที่มีอยู่แล้วในหน้า ให้กดที่สูตรแล้วกดสัญรูป &quot;Σ&quot; ที่ปรากฏ จะเปิดหน้าต่างสูตรแล้วให้คุณเปลี่ยนแปลง
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| สูตรคณิตศาสตร์สามารถวางในบรรทัดหรือจัดกลางเป็นบล็อกก็ได้
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== การแก้ไขโน้ตดนตรี ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| ในการเพิ่มเครื่องหมายดนตรีลงในหน้า ให้วางเคอร์เซอร์ที่ที่คุณต้องการแทรก แล้วกดตัวเลือก &quot;Musical notation&quot; ในรายการเลือก &quot;แทรก&quot;

ในการแก้ไขเครื่องหมายดนตรีที่มีอยู่แล้วในหน้า ให้คลิกสองครั้ง
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| จะเปิดคำโต้ตอบ &quot;เครื่องหมายดนตรี&quot; ตรงนี้สามารถแก้ไขเครื่องหมายโดยสเกลในรูปแบบ ABC หรือ Lilypond คุณสามารถเชื่อมโยงเครื่องหมายไปยังเสียงหรือไฟล์ MIDI ได้ เมื่อคุณเสร็จสิ้นแล้ว ให้กดปุ่ม &quot;เสร็จ&quot; เพื่อปิดคำโต้ตอบและเผยแพร่การเปลี่ยนแปลง
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== การแก้ไขบทกวีและรายการพิเศษอื่น ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| เครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพยังไม่รองรับบางรายการ เช่น association list และบทกวี อย่างสมบูรณ์
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| ในกรณีส่วนใหญ่ รายการที่มีอยู่เดิมสามารถแก้ไขได้ แต่รายการใหม่ไม่สามารถแทรกในเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพ

จนกว่าจะรองรับสมบูรณ์ คุณสามารถคัดลอกรายการที่มีอยู่แล้วจากหน้าอื่น หรือแก้ไขรหัสต้นฉบับข้อความวิกิโดยตรง

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== การเปลี่ยนระหว่างเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพกับช้อความวิกิ ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
ในการเปลี่ยนจากเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบเห็นภาพเป็นเครื่องมือแก้ไขข้อความวิกิ ให้กดปุ่ม &lt;code&gt;[[ ]]&lt;/code&gt; ที่อยู่ขวาสุดของแถบเครื่องมือ
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| คุณจะเห็นผลต่าง (ถ้าคุณเลือก &quot;ทิ้งการเปลี่ยนแปลง&quot; คุณจะเห็นข้อความวิกิ พร้อมแก้ไขด้วยเครื่องมือแก้ไขข้อความวิกิ)

เลื่อนลงแล้วคุณจะเห็นพื้นที่แก้ไขข้อความวิกิ 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
คุณยังสามารถเปลี่ยนจากเครื่องมือแก้ไขข้อความวิกิเป็นเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพ ให้กดสัญรูปดินสอที่อยู่ขวาสุดของแถบเครื่องมือ
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== ทางลัดคีย์บอร์ด ==

ผู้เขียนหลายคนคุ้นเคยกับการกรอกข้อความวิกิโดยตรง โดยเฉพาะตัวเส้นหนา ตัวเอนและการเชื่อมโยงวิกิ [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|ทางลัดคีย์บอร์ด]]เปิดให้แทรกการจัดรูปแบบที่คุ้นเคยได้อย่างรวดเร็วโดยไม่ต้องใช้แถบเครื่องมือ ต่อไปนี้เป็นทางลัดสามัญสำหรับเครื่องมือแก้ไขแบบเห็นภาพ:

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! ทางลัดพีซี
! การกระทำ
! ทางลัดแมค
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| ตัวเส้นหนา
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| ตัวเอน
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| แทรกลิงก์
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| ตัด
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| คัดลอก
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| วาง
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| ทำกลับ
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>qr8lq5uv3w14ioc312gn7m0jmllyb0q</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/sr</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>143194</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402458</id>
      <parentid>4983837</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:09:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9642" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== О VisualEditor-у ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor is a &quot;visual&quot; way of editing Wikipedia. Editing Wikipedia has historically required people to learn wiki markup, a fairly complex markup language, even to make tiny changes to a page. In 2001, this was acceptable; in 2015, it is [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|driving contributors away]]. We hope that VisualEditor will be useful to existing contributors and more welcoming to new users.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

У овом тренутку, VisualEditor има много грешака, но то је неизбежно. Ако се сусретнете са проблемом у раду, слободно то [[VisualEditor/Feedback|пријавите на Страницу за повратне информације]]. У неким областима тек треба да направимо потпуно нове опције. Тренутна ограничења обухватају:

* '''Споро учитавање''' — Потребно је доста времена да се дуге и комплексне странице учитају у VisualEditor. У будућности ће софтвер бити доста бржи и омогућиће учитавање дужих страница.
* '''Непотпуно уређивање''' — Неки елементи „сложеног“ форматирања се приказују и дозвољавају вам да уређујете њихов садржај, али не дозвољавају корисницима да уреде њихову структуру или да убаце нове уносе, као што су спискови дефиниција. Додавање опција у овој области нам је један од приоритета.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Само чланци и корисничке странице''' — VisualEditor ће бити омогућен само за именске просторе чланака и корисника (да бисте могли да пробате у личном песку). Касније ћемо развити посебне алате за уређивање не-чланака, али засада су приоритет чланци.
&lt;/div&gt;

Због наведених ограничења и неизбежних грешака, препоручујемо да корисници кликну &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; пре но што сачувају страницу, и [[VisualEditor/Feedback|пријаве сваки проблем на који наиђу]].

== Како да нам помогнете? ==

Да би VisualEditor био што бољи, потребна нам је помоћ око многих ствари. Очигледно, једна таква област је коришћење софтвера, проналажење грешака и [[VisualEditor/Feedback|њихово пријављивање]], али има и многих других послова. Ту спада:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Обнављање страница за помоћ''' — Сви наши пројекти имају странице за помоћ да би се новим корисницима олакшало уређивање. Нажалост, све су засноване на wikimarkup уређивању, па ће сва објашњења и упутства постати застарела када се објави VisualEditor. Веома би било корисно када би се [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|обновиле странице за помоћ]] на основу [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|нашег упутства за коришћење VisualEditor-а]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Убацивање TemplateData у шаблоне''' — VisualEditor укључује одличан уређивач шаблона, који је детаљно објашњен на нашој [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|страници за помоћ]]. Као што ћете приметити ако га користите на Википедији, неки шаблони имају имена параметара и описе који их чине лаким за употребу. Други то немају. То је из разлога што је шаблонима потребан &quot;TemplateData&quot; да би овај алат радио. Ако сте заинтересовани за убацивање TemplateData, ту је [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|упутство]] заједно са [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|списком најважнијих шаблона у које је потрено убацити га]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Помоћ новим корисницима''' — Ако објављивање VisualEditor-а буде успешно, имаћемо много више нових корисника него што смо навикли - и мада ће уређивање бити једноставније, одржавање односа са заједницом ће и даље бити тешко. Молимо вас да одвојите мало времена [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|за шалтер за помоћ, или за IRC канал за помоћ]] како бисте помогли новим корисницима да се навикну на Википедију.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>86p2t1dqj5b29i7qy0rv4wdgj7ylie9</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403026</id>
      <parentid>5402458</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9682" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== О VisualEditor-у ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor is a &quot;visual&quot; way of editing Wikipedia. Editing Wikipedia has historically required people to learn wiki markup, a fairly complex markup language, even to make tiny changes to a page. In 2001, this was acceptable; in 2015, it is [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|driving contributors away]]. We hope that VisualEditor will be useful to existing contributors and more welcoming to new users.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

У овом тренутку, VisualEditor има много грешака, но то је неизбежно. Ако се сусретнете са проблемом у раду, слободно то [[VisualEditor/Feedback|пријавите на Страницу за повратне информације]]. У неким областима тек треба да направимо потпуно нове опције. Тренутна ограничења обухватају:

* '''Споро учитавање''' — Потребно је доста времена да се дуге и комплексне странице учитају у VisualEditor. У будућности ће софтвер бити доста бржи и омогућиће учитавање дужих страница.
* '''Непотпуно уређивање''' — Неки елементи „сложеног“ форматирања се приказују и дозвољавају вам да уређујете њихов садржај, али не дозвољавају корисницима да уреде њихову структуру или да убаце нове уносе, као што су спискови дефиниција. Додавање опција у овој области нам је један од приоритета.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Само чланци и корисничке странице''' — VisualEditor ће бити омогућен само за именске просторе чланака и корисника (да бисте могли да пробате у личном песку). Касније ћемо развити посебне алате за уређивање не-чланака, али засада су приоритет чланци.
&lt;/div&gt;

Због наведених ограничења и неизбежних грешака, препоручујемо да корисници кликну &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; пре но што сачувају страницу, и [[VisualEditor/Feedback|пријаве сваки проблем на који наиђу]].

== Како да нам помогнете? ==

Да би VisualEditor био што бољи, потребна нам је помоћ око многих ствари. Очигледно, једна таква област је коришћење софтвера, проналажење грешака и [[VisualEditor/Feedback|њихово пријављивање]], али има и многих других послова. Ту спада:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Обнављање страница за помоћ''' — Сви наши пројекти имају странице за помоћ да би се новим корисницима олакшало уређивање. Нажалост, све су засноване на wikimarkup уређивању, па ће сва објашњења и упутства постати застарела када се објави VisualEditor. Веома би било корисно када би се [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|обновиле странице за помоћ]] на основу [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|нашег упутства за коришћење VisualEditor-а]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Убацивање TemplateData у шаблоне''' — VisualEditor укључује одличан уређивач шаблона, који је детаљно објашњен на нашој [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|страници за помоћ]]. Као што ћете приметити ако га користите на Википедији, неки шаблони имају имена параметара и описе који их чине лаким за употребу. Други то немају. То је из разлога што је шаблонима потребан &quot;TemplateData&quot; да би овај алат радио. Ако сте заинтересовани за убацивање TemplateData, ту је [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|упутство]] заједно са [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|списком најважнијих шаблона у које је потрено убацити га]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Помоћ новим корисницима''' — Ако објављивање VisualEditor-а буде успешно, имаћемо много више нових корисника него што смо навикли - и мада ће уређивање бити једноставније, одржавање односа са заједницом ће и даље бити тешко. Молимо вас да одвојите мало времена [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|за шалтер за помоћ, или за IRC канал за помоћ]] како бисте помогли новим корисницима да се навикну на Википедију.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>5yer17eno9k2s1ovjcub5o7b3xb3n38</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403188</id>
      <parentid>5403026</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:43:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9642" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== О VisualEditor-у ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor is a &quot;visual&quot; way of editing Wikipedia. Editing Wikipedia has historically required people to learn wiki markup, a fairly complex markup language, even to make tiny changes to a page. In 2001, this was acceptable; in 2015, it is [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|driving contributors away]]. We hope that VisualEditor will be useful to existing contributors and more welcoming to new users.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

У овом тренутку, VisualEditor има много грешака, но то је неизбежно. Ако се сусретнете са проблемом у раду, слободно то [[VisualEditor/Feedback|пријавите на Страницу за повратне информације]]. У неким областима тек треба да направимо потпуно нове опције. Тренутна ограничења обухватају:

* '''Споро учитавање''' — Потребно је доста времена да се дуге и комплексне странице учитају у VisualEditor. У будућности ће софтвер бити доста бржи и омогућиће учитавање дужих страница.
* '''Непотпуно уређивање''' — Неки елементи „сложеног“ форматирања се приказују и дозвољавају вам да уређујете њихов садржај, али не дозвољавају корисницима да уреде њихову структуру или да убаце нове уносе, као што су спискови дефиниција. Додавање опција у овој области нам је један од приоритета.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Само чланци и корисничке странице''' — VisualEditor ће бити омогућен само за именске просторе чланака и корисника (да бисте могли да пробате у личном песку). Касније ћемо развити посебне алате за уређивање не-чланака, али засада су приоритет чланци.
&lt;/div&gt;

Због наведених ограничења и неизбежних грешака, препоручујемо да корисници кликну &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; пре но што сачувају страницу, и [[VisualEditor/Feedback|пријаве сваки проблем на који наиђу]].

== Како да нам помогнете? ==

Да би VisualEditor био што бољи, потребна нам је помоћ око многих ствари. Очигледно, једна таква област је коришћење софтвера, проналажење грешака и [[VisualEditor/Feedback|њихово пријављивање]], али има и многих других послова. Ту спада:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Обнављање страница за помоћ''' — Сви наши пројекти имају странице за помоћ да би се новим корисницима олакшало уређивање. Нажалост, све су засноване на wikimarkup уређивању, па ће сва објашњења и упутства постати застарела када се објави VisualEditor. Веома би било корисно када би се [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|обновиле странице за помоћ]] на основу [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|нашег упутства за коришћење VisualEditor-а]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Убацивање TemplateData у шаблоне''' — VisualEditor укључује одличан уређивач шаблона, који је детаљно објашњен на нашој [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|страници за помоћ]]. Као што ћете приметити ако га користите на Википедији, неки шаблони имају имена параметара и описе који их чине лаким за употребу. Други то немају. То је из разлога што је шаблонима потребан &quot;TemplateData&quot; да би овај алат радио. Ако сте заинтересовани за убацивање TemplateData, ту је [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|упутство]] заједно са [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|списком најважнијих шаблона у које је потрено убацити га]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Помоћ новим корисницима''' — Ако објављивање VisualEditor-а буде успешно, имаћемо много више нових корисника него што смо навикли - и мада ће уређивање бити једноставније, одржавање односа са заједницом ће и даље бити тешко. Молимо вас да одвојите мало времена [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|за шалтер за помоћ, или за IRC канал за помоћ]] како бисте помогли новим корисницима да се навикну на Википедију.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>86p2t1dqj5b29i7qy0rv4wdgj7ylie9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/sr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>143258</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403187</id>
      <parentid>1803503</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:43:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="673" xml:space="preserve">* '''Помоћ новим корисницима''' — Ако објављивање VisualEditor-а буде успешно, имаћемо много више нових корисника него што смо навикли - и мада ће уређивање бити једноставније, одржавање односа са заједницом ће и даље бити тешко. Молимо вас да одвојите мало времена [[$1|за шалтер за помоћ, или за IRC канал за помоћ]] како бисте помогли новим корисницима да се навикну на Википедију.</text>
      <sha1>8ditdf1y6v8wbxehtr8rjs6nmvwhv22</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/bg</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>143817</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402398</id>
      <parentid>4989881</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:49:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11344" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Добре дошли в портала на '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Визуалния редактор]]'''. Визуалният редактор (ВР) е нов инструмент за редактиране на Уикипедия, който се разработва от Фондация Уикимедия и позволява на хората да редактират, без да се налага да учат уикиформатиране. Надяваме се, че той ще им помогне да допринасят в Уикипедия.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Прочетете '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Съобщете за проблем''' с Визуалния редактор].
|-
| Узнайте как може да създавате препратки, добавяте или премествате изображения, създавате цитати, вмъквате шаблони, редактирате таблици и др.
|Моля, посочете '''уеб браузъра, операционната система на компютъра и облика, който ползвате на Уикипедия''' (обикновено Vector, понякога Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== За Визуалния редактор ==

Визуалният редактор е &quot;визуален&quot; инструмент за редактиране на Уикипедия. Исторически, редактирането на Уикипедия наложи хората да се научат на уики маркиране, доста сложен език за маркиране, дори и само за да могат да правят малки промени по дадена страница. Докато през 2001 г. това бе приемливо; през 2015 г. то [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|отблъсква сътрудниците]]. Надяваме се, че Визуалният редактор ще бъде от полза за настоящите сътрудници и по-гостоприемен към новите потребители. 

Визуалният редактор е достъпен като опция в &quot;алфа&quot; версията на MediaWiki.org от средата на 2012 г., в англоезичната Уикипедия от декември 2012 г., [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ на още 14 езика от април 2013 г.] и [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ на почти всички други езици] от началото на юни 2013 г. Към юли 2015 г., той е достъпен по подразбиране за регистирани и нерегистрирани в системата потребители в над 75% от уикипедиите.
Планирано е да бъде достъпен по подразбиране за повечето от [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|останалите езици]] към края на 2015 г.
От края на ноември 2014 г., редакторът е също така наличен като опционална [[Beta Features|Бета функция]] във всички уикита на Фондация Уикимедия, с изключение на Уикиречник и Уикиизточник.

Издаваме [[VisualEditor/changelog|редовна информация за обновленията]] в Mediawiki.org, и [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter| многоезичен бюлетин]], фокусиран върху уикитата на Фондация Уикимедия.

== Употреба на Визуалния редактор ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ако сте заинтересувани от използването на Визуалния редактор за редактиране, имаме [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ръководство за това]], както и [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|списък от основни клавишни комбинации]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Визуалният редактор има бъгове и ограничения; това е неизбежно. Ако се натъкнете на проблем, моля не се колебайте да [[VisualEditor/Feedback|го докладвате на страницата за обратна връзка]]. Настоящите ограничения включват:

* '''Бавно зареждане''' - отнема известно време за дълги, сложни страници да се заредят в редактора. В бъдеще софтуерът ще бъде много по-бърз, и ще даде възможност за зареждане на по-големи страници.
* '''Непълно редактиране''' - Някои елементи на сложното форматиране ще се изобразяват и ще ви позволяват да редактирате съдържанието им, но няма да позволяват на потребителите да редактират тяхната структура или да добавят нови елементи - например списъците с дефиниции. Добавяне на функции в тази област е един от нашите приоритети.
* '''Повече страници със съдържание, но без беседи''' - Визуалният редактор е разрешен само за някои именни пространства. В повечето уикипедии, Визуалният редактор може да се използва за страниците за статии, както и в пространствата ''Потребител:'', ''Файл:'', ''Помощ:'' и ''Категория:''. Визуалният редактор в момента е недостъпен за пространството ''Уикипедия:'', както и за каквито и да е беседи.

Препоръчваме потребителите да натискат &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;, преди да съхранят страницата и да [[VisualEditor/Feedback|съобщават за проблемите, на които се натъкват]].

== Как можете да помогнете ==

За максимална оптимизация на Визуалния редактор, ние се нуждаем от най-разнообразна помощ. Очевидно е, че непосредственото поле за помощ е употребата на софтуера, откриването на грешки и  [[VisualEditor/Feedback|съобщаването им]], но също така има и много други задачи. Те включват:

* '''Обновяване на помощните страници''' - Всички наши проекти имат помощни страници, които улесняват новите потребители при допринасянето им. За съжаление всички те са изградени около редактора за уикимаркиране, и с развитието на Визуалния редактор, скрийншотите и ръководствата губят актуалността си. Би било много полезно, ако хората [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|актуализат помощните страници]], въз основа на [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|нашето ръководство за употреба на Визуалния редактор]].
* '''Добавяне на TemplateData в шаблони''' — Инструментът разполага с хубава редактор на шаблони, който е описан по-подробно в нашата [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|помощна страница]]. Както можете да се уверите, ако го използвате в Уикипедия, някои шаблони имат именувани параметри и хубави описания, които ги правят лесни за употреба. Други нямат. Това е така, защото шаблоните първо се нуждаят от &quot;TemplateData&quot; преди тази функция да може да работи. Ако сте заинтересувани от добавянето на TemplateData, имаме [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|ръководство за това]], заедно със [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|списък на най-важните шаблони, към които да го добавите]].
* '''Помогнете на общността си''' - Вижте [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|списък с полезни начини как да помогнете на вашата местна общност]] за оптимизиране на редакторския опит с визуалния редактор.
* '''Помогнете на новите потребители''' — Макар, че редактирането с Визуалния редактор е по-лесно, изработването на взаимодействие с общността може да бъде трудно. Моля, отделете повече време  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|за помощ или в IRC-канала]], за да помогнете на новодошлите при процеса на запознаване с Уикипедия.

==Вижте също==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>27josumopw8f65bptp58v77ahp3d1rv</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402997</id>
      <parentid>5402398</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11346" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Добре дошли в портала на '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Визуалния редактор]]'''. Визуалният редактор (ВР) е нов инструмент за редактиране на Уикипедия, който се разработва от Фондация Уикимедия и позволява на хората да редактират, без да се налага да учат уикиформатиране. Надяваме се, че той ще им помогне да допринасят в Уикипедия.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Прочетете '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Съобщете за проблем''' с Визуалния редактор].
|-
| Узнайте как може да създавате препратки, добавяте или премествате изображения, създавате цитати, вмъквате шаблони, редактирате таблици и др.
|Моля, посочете '''уеб браузъра, операционната система на компютъра и облика, който ползвате на Уикипедия''' (обикновено Vector, понякога Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== За Визуалния редактор ==

Визуалният редактор е &quot;визуален&quot; инструмент за редактиране на Уикипедия. Исторически, редактирането на Уикипедия наложи хората да се научат на уики маркиране, доста сложен език за маркиране, дори и само за да могат да правят малки промени по дадена страница. Докато през 2001 г. това бе приемливо; през 2015 г. то [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|отблъсква сътрудниците]]. Надяваме се, че Визуалният редактор ще бъде от полза за настоящите сътрудници и по-гостоприемен към новите потребители. 

Визуалният редактор е достъпен като опция в &quot;алфа&quot; версията на MediaWiki.org от средата на 2012 г., в англоезичната Уикипедия от декември 2012 г., [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ на още 14 езика от април 2013 г.] и [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ на почти всички други езици] от началото на юни 2013 г. Към юли 2015 г., той е достъпен по подразбиране за регистирани и нерегистрирани в системата потребители в над 75% от уикипедиите.
Планирано е да бъде достъпен по подразбиране за повечето от [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|останалите езици]] към края на 2015 г.
От края на ноември 2014 г., редакторът е също така наличен като опционална [[Beta Features|Бета функция]] във всички уикита на Фондация Уикимедия, с изключение на Уикиречник и Уикиизточник.

Издаваме [[VisualEditor/changelog|редовна информация за обновленията]] в Mediawiki.org, и [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter| многоезичен бюлетин]], фокусиран върху уикитата на Фондация Уикимедия.

== Употреба на Визуалния редактор ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ако сте заинтересувани от използването на Визуалния редактор за редактиране, имаме [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ръководство за това]], както и [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|списък от основни клавишни комбинации]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Визуалният редактор има бъгове и ограничения; това е неизбежно. Ако се натъкнете на проблем, моля не се колебайте да [[VisualEditor/Feedback|го докладвате на страницата за обратна връзка]]. Настоящите ограничения включват:

* '''Бавно зареждане''' - отнема известно време за дълги, сложни страници да се заредят в редактора. В бъдеще софтуерът ще бъде много по-бърз, и ще даде възможност за зареждане на по-големи страници.
* '''Непълно редактиране''' - Някои елементи на сложното форматиране ще се изобразяват и ще ви позволяват да редактирате съдържанието им, но няма да позволяват на потребителите да редактират тяхната структура или да добавят нови елементи - например списъците с дефиниции. Добавяне на функции в тази област е един от нашите приоритети.
* '''Повече страници със съдържание, но без беседи''' - Визуалният редактор е разрешен само за някои именни пространства. В повечето уикипедии, Визуалният редактор може да се използва за страниците за статии, както и в пространствата ''Потребител:'', ''Файл:'', ''Помощ:'' и ''Категория:''. Визуалният редактор в момента е недостъпен за пространството ''Уикипедия:'', както и за каквито и да е беседи.

Препоръчваме потребителите да натискат &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;, преди да съхранят страницата и да [[VisualEditor/Feedback|съобщават за проблемите, на които се натъкват]].

== Как можете да помогнете ==

За максимална оптимизация на Визуалния редактор, ние се нуждаем от най-разнообразна помощ. Очевидно е, че непосредственото поле за помощ е употребата на софтуера, откриването на грешки и  [[VisualEditor/Feedback|съобщаването им]], но също така има и много други задачи. Те включват:

* '''Обновяване на помощните страници''' - Всички наши проекти имат помощни страници, които улесняват новите потребители при допринасянето им. За съжаление всички те са изградени около редактора за уикимаркиране, и с развитието на Визуалния редактор, скрийншотите и ръководствата губят актуалността си. Би било много полезно, ако хората [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|актуализат помощните страници]], въз основа на [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|нашето ръководство за употреба на Визуалния редактор]].
* '''Добавяне на TemplateData в шаблони''' — Инструментът разполага с хубава редактор на шаблони, който е описан по-подробно в нашата [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|помощна страница]]. Както можете да се уверите, ако го използвате в Уикипедия, някои шаблони имат именувани параметри и хубави описания, които ги правят лесни за употреба. Други нямат. Това е така, защото шаблоните първо се нуждаят от &quot;TemplateData&quot; преди тази функция да може да работи. Ако сте заинтересувани от добавянето на TemplateData, имаме [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|ръководство за това]], заедно със [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|списък на най-важните шаблони, към които да го добавите]].
* '''Помогнете на общността си''' - Вижте [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|списък с полезни начини как да помогнете на вашата местна общност]] за оптимизиране на редакторския опит с визуалния редактор.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Помогнете на новите потребители''' — Макар, че редактирането с Визуалния редактор е по-лесно, изработването на взаимодействие с общността може да бъде трудно. Моля, отделете повече време  [[$new-users|за помощ или в IRC-канала]], за да помогнете на новодошлите при процеса на запознаване с Уикипедия.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Вижте също==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>hc74msqcmygeekz3vidv6o1ipues8fw</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403030</id>
      <parentid>5402997</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11344" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Добре дошли в портала на '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Визуалния редактор]]'''. Визуалният редактор (ВР) е нов инструмент за редактиране на Уикипедия, който се разработва от Фондация Уикимедия и позволява на хората да редактират, без да се налага да учат уикиформатиране. Надяваме се, че той ще им помогне да допринасят в Уикипедия.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Прочетете '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Съобщете за проблем''' с Визуалния редактор].
|-
| Узнайте как може да създавате препратки, добавяте или премествате изображения, създавате цитати, вмъквате шаблони, редактирате таблици и др.
|Моля, посочете '''уеб браузъра, операционната система на компютъра и облика, който ползвате на Уикипедия''' (обикновено Vector, понякога Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== За Визуалния редактор ==

Визуалният редактор е &quot;визуален&quot; инструмент за редактиране на Уикипедия. Исторически, редактирането на Уикипедия наложи хората да се научат на уики маркиране, доста сложен език за маркиране, дори и само за да могат да правят малки промени по дадена страница. Докато през 2001 г. това бе приемливо; през 2015 г. то [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|отблъсква сътрудниците]]. Надяваме се, че Визуалният редактор ще бъде от полза за настоящите сътрудници и по-гостоприемен към новите потребители. 

Визуалният редактор е достъпен като опция в &quot;алфа&quot; версията на MediaWiki.org от средата на 2012 г., в англоезичната Уикипедия от декември 2012 г., [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ на още 14 езика от април 2013 г.] и [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ на почти всички други езици] от началото на юни 2013 г. Към юли 2015 г., той е достъпен по подразбиране за регистирани и нерегистрирани в системата потребители в над 75% от уикипедиите.
Планирано е да бъде достъпен по подразбиране за повечето от [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|останалите езици]] към края на 2015 г.
От края на ноември 2014 г., редакторът е също така наличен като опционална [[Beta Features|Бета функция]] във всички уикита на Фондация Уикимедия, с изключение на Уикиречник и Уикиизточник.

Издаваме [[VisualEditor/changelog|редовна информация за обновленията]] в Mediawiki.org, и [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter| многоезичен бюлетин]], фокусиран върху уикитата на Фондация Уикимедия.

== Употреба на Визуалния редактор ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ако сте заинтересувани от използването на Визуалния редактор за редактиране, имаме [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ръководство за това]], както и [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|списък от основни клавишни комбинации]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Визуалният редактор има бъгове и ограничения; това е неизбежно. Ако се натъкнете на проблем, моля не се колебайте да [[VisualEditor/Feedback|го докладвате на страницата за обратна връзка]]. Настоящите ограничения включват:

* '''Бавно зареждане''' - отнема известно време за дълги, сложни страници да се заредят в редактора. В бъдеще софтуерът ще бъде много по-бърз, и ще даде възможност за зареждане на по-големи страници.
* '''Непълно редактиране''' - Някои елементи на сложното форматиране ще се изобразяват и ще ви позволяват да редактирате съдържанието им, но няма да позволяват на потребителите да редактират тяхната структура или да добавят нови елементи - например списъците с дефиниции. Добавяне на функции в тази област е един от нашите приоритети.
* '''Повече страници със съдържание, но без беседи''' - Визуалният редактор е разрешен само за някои именни пространства. В повечето уикипедии, Визуалният редактор може да се използва за страниците за статии, както и в пространствата ''Потребител:'', ''Файл:'', ''Помощ:'' и ''Категория:''. Визуалният редактор в момента е недостъпен за пространството ''Уикипедия:'', както и за каквито и да е беседи.

Препоръчваме потребителите да натискат &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;, преди да съхранят страницата и да [[VisualEditor/Feedback|съобщават за проблемите, на които се натъкват]].

== Как можете да помогнете ==

За максимална оптимизация на Визуалния редактор, ние се нуждаем от най-разнообразна помощ. Очевидно е, че непосредственото поле за помощ е употребата на софтуера, откриването на грешки и  [[VisualEditor/Feedback|съобщаването им]], но също така има и много други задачи. Те включват:

* '''Обновяване на помощните страници''' - Всички наши проекти имат помощни страници, които улесняват новите потребители при допринасянето им. За съжаление всички те са изградени около редактора за уикимаркиране, и с развитието на Визуалния редактор, скрийншотите и ръководствата губят актуалността си. Би било много полезно, ако хората [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|актуализат помощните страници]], въз основа на [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|нашето ръководство за употреба на Визуалния редактор]].
* '''Добавяне на TemplateData в шаблони''' — Инструментът разполага с хубава редактор на шаблони, който е описан по-подробно в нашата [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|помощна страница]]. Както можете да се уверите, ако го използвате в Уикипедия, някои шаблони имат именувани параметри и хубави описания, които ги правят лесни за употреба. Други нямат. Това е така, защото шаблоните първо се нуждаят от &quot;TemplateData&quot; преди тази функция да може да работи. Ако сте заинтересувани от добавянето на TemplateData, имаме [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|ръководство за това]], заедно със [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|списък на най-важните шаблони, към които да го добавите]].
* '''Помогнете на общността си''' - Вижте [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|списък с полезни начини как да помогнете на вашата местна общност]] за оптимизиране на редакторския опит с визуалния редактор.
* '''Помогнете на новите потребители''' — Макар, че редактирането с Визуалния редактор е по-лесно, изработването на взаимодействие с общността може да бъде трудно. Моля, отделете повече време  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|за помощ или в IRC-канала]], за да помогнете на новодошлите при процеса на запознаване с Уикипедия.

==Вижте също==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>27josumopw8f65bptp58v77ahp3d1rv</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403200</id>
      <parentid>5403030</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:45:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11362" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Добре дошли в портала на '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Визуалния редактор]]'''. Визуалният редактор (ВР) е нов инструмент за редактиране на Уикипедия, който се разработва от Фондация Уикимедия и позволява на хората да редактират, без да се налага да учат уикиформатиране. Надяваме се, че той ще им помогне да допринасят в Уикипедия.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Прочетете '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Съобщете за проблем''' с Визуалния редактор].
|-
| Узнайте как може да създавате препратки, добавяте или премествате изображения, създавате цитати, вмъквате шаблони, редактирате таблици и др.
|Моля, посочете '''уеб браузъра, операционната система на компютъра и облика, който ползвате на Уикипедия''' (обикновено Vector, понякога Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== За Визуалния редактор ==

Визуалният редактор е &quot;визуален&quot; инструмент за редактиране на Уикипедия. Исторически, редактирането на Уикипедия наложи хората да се научат на уики маркиране, доста сложен език за маркиране, дори и само за да могат да правят малки промени по дадена страница. Докато през 2001 г. това бе приемливо; през 2015 г. то [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|отблъсква сътрудниците]]. Надяваме се, че Визуалният редактор ще бъде от полза за настоящите сътрудници и по-гостоприемен към новите потребители. 

Визуалният редактор е достъпен като опция в &quot;алфа&quot; версията на MediaWiki.org от средата на 2012 г., в англоезичната Уикипедия от декември 2012 г., [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ на още 14 езика от април 2013 г.] и [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ на почти всички други езици] от началото на юни 2013 г. Към юли 2015 г., той е достъпен по подразбиране за регистирани и нерегистрирани в системата потребители в над 75% от уикипедиите.
Планирано е да бъде достъпен по подразбиране за повечето от [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|останалите езици]] към края на 2015 г.
От края на ноември 2014 г., редакторът е също така наличен като опционална [[Beta Features|Бета функция]] във всички уикита на Фондация Уикимедия, с изключение на Уикиречник и Уикиизточник.

Издаваме [[VisualEditor/changelog|редовна информация за обновленията]] в Mediawiki.org, и [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter| многоезичен бюлетин]], фокусиран върху уикитата на Фондация Уикимедия.

== Употреба на Визуалния редактор ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ако сте заинтересувани от използването на Визуалния редактор за редактиране, имаме [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ръководство за това]], както и [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|списък от основни клавишни комбинации]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Визуалният редактор има бъгове и ограничения; това е неизбежно. Ако се натъкнете на проблем, моля не се колебайте да [[VisualEditor/Feedback|го докладвате на страницата за обратна връзка]]. Настоящите ограничения включват:

* '''Бавно зареждане''' - отнема известно време за дълги, сложни страници да се заредят в редактора. В бъдеще софтуерът ще бъде много по-бърз, и ще даде възможност за зареждане на по-големи страници.
* '''Непълно редактиране''' - Някои елементи на сложното форматиране ще се изобразяват и ще ви позволяват да редактирате съдържанието им, но няма да позволяват на потребителите да редактират тяхната структура или да добавят нови елементи - например списъците с дефиниции. Добавяне на функции в тази област е един от нашите приоритети.
* '''Повече страници със съдържание, но без беседи''' - Визуалният редактор е разрешен само за някои именни пространства. В повечето уикипедии, Визуалният редактор може да се използва за страниците за статии, както и в пространствата ''Потребител:'', ''Файл:'', ''Помощ:'' и ''Категория:''. Визуалният редактор в момента е недостъпен за пространството ''Уикипедия:'', както и за каквито и да е беседи.

Препоръчваме потребителите да натискат &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;, преди да съхранят страницата и да [[VisualEditor/Feedback|съобщават за проблемите, на които се натъкват]].

== Как можете да помогнете ==

За максимална оптимизация на Визуалния редактор, ние се нуждаем от най-разнообразна помощ. Очевидно е, че непосредственото поле за помощ е употребата на софтуера, откриването на грешки и  [[VisualEditor/Feedback|съобщаването им]], но също така има и много други задачи. Те включват:

* '''Обновяване на помощните страници''' - Всички наши проекти имат помощни страници, които улесняват новите потребители при допринасянето им. За съжаление всички те са изградени около редактора за уикимаркиране, и с развитието на Визуалния редактор, скрийншотите и ръководствата губят актуалността си. Би било много полезно, ако хората [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|актуализат помощните страници]], въз основа на [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|нашето ръководство за употреба на Визуалния редактор]].
* '''Добавяне на TemplateData в шаблони''' — Инструментът разполага с хубава редактор на шаблони, който е описан по-подробно в нашата [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|помощна страница]]. Както можете да се уверите, ако го използвате в Уикипедия, някои шаблони имат именувани параметри и хубави описания, които ги правят лесни за употреба. Други нямат. Това е така, защото шаблоните първо се нуждаят от &quot;TemplateData&quot; преди тази функция да може да работи. Ако сте заинтересувани от добавянето на TemplateData, имаме [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|ръководство за това]], заедно със [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|списък на най-важните шаблони, към които да го добавите]].
* '''Помогнете на общността си''' - Вижте [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|списък с полезни начини как да помогнете на вашата местна общност]] за оптимизиране на редакторския опит с визуалния редактор.
* '''Помогнете на новите потребители''' — Макар, че редактирането с Визуалния редактор е по-лесно, изработването на взаимодействие с общността може да бъде трудно. Моля, отделете повече време  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|за помощ или в IRC-канала]], за да помогнете на новодошлите при процеса на запознаване с Уикипедия.

==Вижте също==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>oiabh4innrwecbzsydwxtv47k8sc8rc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/gl</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>143887</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402773</id>
      <parentid>5346982</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:45:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="63161" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Se quere probar o editor visual sen editar un artigo, [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} aquí hai unha páxina] onde pode probalo libremente.&lt;/span&gt; Non necesita unha conta para usar o editor visual nesa páxina.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Abrir o editor visual ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| Para editar unha páxina mediante o editor visual, prema na lapela &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; que hai na parte superior da páxina.

Abrir a páxina no modo de edición pode levar uns segundos; tardará máis tempo se a páxina é moi longa.

Se preme na lapela &quot;{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}&quot;, abrirá o editor de texto wiki fonte clásico.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Tamén pode abrir o editor visual premendo na ligazón &quot;{{int|editsection}}&quot; que hai en cada sección.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Primeiros pasos: a barra de ferramentas do editor visual ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Imaxe da barra de ferramentas do editor visual.]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | A barra de ferramentas do editor visual aparece no canto superior da pantalla ao facer uso do editor visual. Inclúe algunhas iconas familiares:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' e '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' as modificacións que teña feitas.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Menú despregable de '''cabeceiras''': permite cambiar o formato do parágrafo. Para cambiar o estilo dun parágrafo, poña o cursor no parágrafo e seleccione un obxecto neste menú (non ten que seleccionar ningún texto). Aos títulos de sección dáselles formato con &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}&quot;, e ás subseccións con &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}&quot;, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}&quot; e así sucesivamente. O formato normal para o texto é &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Formato:''' Ao premer en &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot;, ábrese un menú. 
* A icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}&quot; ('''N''') pon en negras o texto seleccionado.
* A icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}&quot; (''I'') pon en cursivas o texto seleccionado.
* A icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) fai que o texto seleccionado apareza máis pequeno que o texto darredor e un pouco máis alto.
* A icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}&quot; (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) fai que o texto seleccionado apareza máis pequeno que o texto darredor e un pouco máis baixo.
* A icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;s&gt;A&lt;/s&gt;) engade unha barra sólida riscando o texto seleccionado.
* A icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}&quot; (un par de chaves: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) cambia a fonte do texto seleccionado a un tipo de letra monoespazada, o que o diferencia do texto darredor (proporcionalmente espazado).
* A icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}&quot; (&lt;u&gt;A&lt;/u&gt;) engade unha liña sólida debaixo do texto seleccionado.
* A icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}&quot; (文A) permítelle etiquetar o idioma (por exemplo, xaponés) e a dirección de escritura (por exemplo, da dereita á esquerda) do texto seleccionado.
* A icona final ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), chamada &quot;{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}&quot;, elimina todo o formato dos caracteres do texto seleccionado, incluíndo as ligazóns.

Se non seleccionou ningún texto, ó premer en &lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt; para abrir o menú e seleccionar un obxecto, ese formato será aplicado ó texto que está a escribir, a partir de onde estea situado o cursor.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Ferramenta de ligazóns:''' A icona da cadea é a [[#Editing links|ferramenta de ligazóns]]. Premendo nela (normalmente despois de seleccionar algo de texto) ábrese a [[#Editing links|caixa de diálogo de ligazóns]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''Menú de citas:''' O menú &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; úsase para engadir citas en liña (tamén chamadas &quot;referencias&quot; ou &quot;notas&quot;). Todos os proxectos teñen acceso ao formato de referencias básico e a capacidade de reusar as citas usando este menú. Este menú tamén dá acceso rápido ós modelos de cita locais, se estes están activados na súa wiki.

(As instrucións para engadir modelos de cita locais ao menú {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} nun wiki específico están dispoñibles en  {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''Botón {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se o servizo citoid está activado na súa wiki, verá entón un botón {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} en lugar dun menú {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

O servizo citoid intenta encher modelos de citas de xeito automático.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Listas e sangría:''' As primeiras dúas iconas permiten dar formato ao texto a modo de &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}&quot; ou &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}&quot;. As últimas dúas iconas permiten aumentar ou diminuír o nivel de sangría dos elementos da lista.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' O menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; pode ser diferente nalgúns proxectos. A continuación hai unha lista con '''todas''' as opcións que poden aparecer.
* A icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; (un debuxo de montañas) abre a [[#Editing images and other media files|caixa de diálogo de multimedia]].
* A icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot; (unha peza de crebacabezas) permite [[#Editing templates|editar os modelos]].
* O obxecto &quot;Táboa&quot; permite inserir unha táboa.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}&quot; (unha burbulla de diálogo) permite inserir comentarios que non serán visibles para os lectores; estes comentarios só se ven no modo de edición, onde están indicados cunha icona de exclamación. No modo de edición, premendo na icona de exclamación poderá editar ou borrar o comentario.&lt;/span&gt;
* A icona &quot;{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}&quot; (un símbolo [[:w:ankh|ankh]] - ☥) permite inserir xeróglifos. (Véxase máis abaixo.)
* A opción de &quot;Bloque de código&quot; permítelle inserir código.
* A opción &quot;Notación musical&quot; permítelle inserir as notas musicais.
* A icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (un conxunto de fotografías) permite inserir unha galería de imaxes á páxina.
* A icona &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (Σ) abre a [[#Editing mathematical formulae|caixa de diálogo de inserción de fórmulas]].
* A opción &quot;Gráfico&quot; permítelle inserir un gráfico.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A opción &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}&quot; permítelle inserir a súa sinatura de usuario.&lt;/span&gt; Estará de cor gris (non seleccionable) cando estea a editar un tipo de páxina (nun &quot;espazo de nomes&quot;), como un artigo, onde as sinaturas non deben inserirse.
* A icona &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (tres libros) abre unha caixa de diálogo na que pode especificar onde se mostrarán as referencias ao lector. Normalmente só é necesario facer isto unha única vez nunha páxina.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Inserción de caracteres especiais:'''  A icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}&quot; (Ω) está ó lado do menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. Ao premer ela, móstrase unha caixa de diálogo con algúns caracteres especiais. Ao premer sobre un carácter en concreto, insírese no texto. Entre estes caracteres especiais atópanse algúns símbolos estándar, diacríticos e símbolos matemáticos.&lt;/span&gt; (Esta lista pode personalizarse localmente. Consulte {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} para obter máis instrucións.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| O botón '''Avisos de edición''' amosa calquera aviso para a páxina.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''{{int|visualeditor-mweditmode-tooltip}}'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an ''{{int|visualeditor-meta-tool}}'' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:&lt;/span&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-templatesused-tool}}''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The tabs of the {{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-title}} dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the items {{int|visualeditor-changedir-tool-ltr}} or {{int|visualeditor-changedir-tool-rtl}} and the item '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Find and replace|{{int|visualeditor-find-and-replace-title}}]]''', which opens a bar, where you can insert words or regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O botón '''cambiar a edición da fonte''' está localizado ó lado do botón '''$save'''. Permítelle cambiar ó editor de código fonte, o wikitexto.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Gardar os cambios&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Cando remate as súas modificacións, prema no botón azul &quot;{{int|publishchanges}}&quot; da barra de ferramentas. Se non fixo cambios, o botón non estará activo (aparecerá cun ton gris). &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para cancelar todas as modificacións que realizou, peche a xanela do seu navegador, ou prema na lapela &quot;{{int|vector-view-view}}&quot; que están enriba da barra de ferramentas de edición.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ao premer no botón azul &quot;{{int|publishchanges-start}}&quot; ábrese unha caixa de diálogo. Nesa xanela pode engadir un pequeno resumo das súas modificacións, marcar a edición como pequena e/ou engadir a páxina á súa $watchlist. A caixa para o resumo é equivalente ao campo {{int|summary}} mostrado no editor clásico de texto wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

Tamén pode revisar as modificacións que fixo mediante o botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;, para ter a certeza de que funcionan como desexa antes de gravalas. Esta opción é similar ao botón &quot;{{int|showdiff}}&quot; do editor clásico de texto wiki.

O botón &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}&quot; fai que o editor regrese á páxina que estaba a editar. Pode gravar as súas modificacións máis tarde.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Editar as ligazóns ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| As ligazóns poden engadirse usando a icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; (os elos dunha cadea) da caixa de ferramentas ou mediante o atallo de teclado {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (ou {{Key press|Command|K}} nun Mac).

Se selecciona (resalta) texto e logo preme no botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot;, ese texto será usado na creación da ligazón. Para unha ligazón que use só unha palabra, pode seleccionar esa palabra ou simplemente poñer o cursor nela.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Tanto empregando o botón coma o atallo ábrese unha caixa de diálogo na que pode inserir a ligazón. O editor visual ha axudar coas ligazóns internas (as ligazóns cara a outras páxinas da Wikipedia) buscando coincidencias mentres escribe.
A ferramenta de ligazón intentará axudar coas ligazóns '''internas''', procurando correspondencias probables.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Así que teña tecleada ou seleccionada a ligazón, pode premer {{key press|Enter}} ou premer no botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; para rematar o proceso. A súa ligazón aparecerá inmediatamente na páxina do editor visual, pero coma nos outros cambios na páxina, non se gardará ata que grave toda a páxina.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Para crear unha ligazón cara a unha páxina web ou a outro sitio web, o proceso é similar: escolla a lapela «{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}» e insera o enderezo URL na caixa.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| As ligazóns externas sen etiqueta son así: [http://example.com]. Pode engadir unha poñendo o cursor lonxe de calquera palabra (por exemplo, despois dun espazo). Abra a ferramenta de ligazóns premendo no botón ou premendo as teclas do atallo de teclado. Escriba o enderezo URL na caixa e prema no botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; para inserir a ligazón.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Para cambiar ou eliminar unha ligazón existente, prema dentro do texto desa ligazón e logo na icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; que aparece ao seu carón. Así aparecerá unha caixa de diálogo para editar a ligazón. (Tamén pode abrir ese diálogo co atallo de teclado {{key press|Ctrl|K}}.) Cando se selecciona unha ligazón, aparece destacada en azul.

Na caixa de diálogo de edición de ligazóns, pode entón editar o destino da ligazón. Poderá tamén borrala por completo premendo no botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; que hai no recuncho superior dereito da xanela.
Pode tamén abrir a páxina de destino da ligazón noutra xanela premendo na copia da ligazón na xanela de diálogo. (Pode querer facer isto para verificar se unha ligazón externa é válida.)

Se desexa sair da etiqueta da ligazón (o texto que se mostra como ligazón) ou continuar escribindo despois da ligazón, pode seleccionar {{Key press|→}}:
* preméndoo unha vez sae da pantalla de diálogo de edición da ligazón e coloca o seu cursor ó final do elemento ligado (enmarcado en azul, para editar este elemento)
* preméndoo dúas veces pon o cursor despois do elemento ligado, listo para escribir o resto do seu texto.

Para editar o texto dunha ligazón xa existente, prema no texto da ligazón e escriba un novo.
Pero se quere substituír todo o texto, por favor, teña en conta:

* Se seleccionou (resaltando) todo o texto da ligazón, a ligazón será borrada ó premer calquera tecla.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para manter a ligazón directamente, pode premer dentro da etiqueta da ligazón, usar as teclas de retroceso e suprimir sen presionalo de novo, e unha área azul de ligazón aparecerá alí.&lt;/span&gt; Agora pode escribir na nova etiqueta para crear a ligazón.
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Editar as referencias ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Axuda para usar os modelos de cita]] ou [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Axuda para usar o botón de citoid's {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== Determinar que sistema está en vigor ===
|-
| A súa wiki pode usar un dos tres sistema de notas ó pé. A opción mostrada á dereita é o sistema máis simple, onde o menú &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; non inclúe ningún modelo de cita. Se a súa wiki usa este sistema, entón todo o que precisa saber sobre as notas está nesta páxina.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| O segundo sistema posúe o mesmo tipo de menú &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;, pero con varios modelos de cita populares listos para ter un acceso rápido. Se a súa wiki utiliza este sistema, entón atopará máis detalles en {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;No terceiro sistema, de novo comeza premendo no botón de Citar.&lt;/span&gt; Entón ábrese unha xanela de diálogo, o cal inclúe un proceso automático de citas usando o servizo citoid. Se a súa wiki usa este sistema, atopará máis detalles en {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Editar unha referencia existente ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para editar unha referencia existente, prema onde aparece no texto (normalmente como un número entre corchetes). Aparecerá unha icona &quot;$ref&quot; (marcapáxinas) ou unha icona (e un nome) para o modelo que se usou para crear esa referencia. En calquera caso, premendo no botón &quot;Editar&quot; abrirá unha xanela de diálogo onde pode editar a referencia.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para a icona &quot;$ref&quot;, premendo en &quot;Editar&quot; abre a xanela de diálogo de Referencias. Para comezar a modificar a información da referencia, prema sobre ela.&lt;/span&gt;

Moitos wikis utilizan modelos para formatar referencias. Se na súa referencia está a usarse un modelo, entón cando move o seu punteiro sobre a información da referencia, toda a información dese campo será destacada.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se se estaba a usar un modelo e vostede preme na información da referencia, entón aparecerá a icona $template (a peza de crebacabezas) con algunha información. Prema no botón &quot;Editar&quot; para editar o contido do modelo na mini-xanela de edición.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se, ó premer nunha referencia, aparece unha icona dun modelo estándar para citas (móstrase un exemplo á dereita), entón premendo en &quot;Editar&quot; abrirá á mini-xanela de edición do modelo.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Na xanela de edición do modelo, pode engadir ou quitar calquera tipo de información ou cambiar o contido actual. Inicialmente só se mostrarán os campos (parámetros do modelo) que teñan contido. Para engadir campos, prema en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; na parte inferior da mini-xanela.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Prema en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; cando remate. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Reutilizar unha referencia existente ===
|-
| Se a páxina xa contén unha referencia que se aplica ó texto que quere referenciar, entón pode escoller reutilizar esa cita existente.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para reutilizar unha referencia existente, poña o seu cursor no corpo do texto no que a quere engadir unha referencia nova (número) para esa cita. Logo prema no elemento &quot;Reutilizar referencia&quot; do menú &quot;$cite&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(Nota: Se a súa wiki posúe o terceiro sistema de notas descrito arriba, verá unha pestana &quot;Reutilizar&quot;, nunha caixa de diálogo, no canto dun elemento &quot;Reutilizar&quot; no menú &quot;$cite&quot;.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Na caixa de diálogo $reference-title, busque na lista pola referencia que quere reutilizar e selecciónea. Se hai varias referencias, pode utilizar a caixa de busca (nomeada &quot;$input&quot;) para listar só as referencias que inclúan un texto determinado.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Engadir unha nova referencia ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para engadir unha nova referencia usando o menú &quot;$cite&quot;, posicione o cursor onde a quere engadir no texto. De seguida, seleccione o tipo apropiado de cita do menú.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Usar a cita &quot;Básica&quot; ====
|-
| Amósase aquí o que verá se selecciona o elemento de referencia básica.  No editor de Referencias, pode engadir a súa cita, incluíndo o formato.

Pode facer que a súa referencia pertenza a un certo grupo, aínda que normalmente non se especificada ningún. (Esta opción úsase para mostrar grupos de referencias coa ferramenta &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot;.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Na caixa de diálogo Referencia, se quere incluír unha predefinição de citação, ou qualquer nova predefinición, na súa nova referencia, prema na icona {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} (peza de crebacabezas) no menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; da barra de ferramentas do editor de referencias.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Despois, busque o modelo que quere usar, inclúao e edíteo como faría con un xa existente. (Vexa a sección [[#Editing templates|Editar modelos]] abaixo se necesita de máis información.)

Así que remate de editar o se novo modelo, prema en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; para voltar ó editor de Referencia, e prema de novo &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; para voltar á páxina que estaba editando.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Se aínda non hai unha lista de referencias na páxina (por exemplo, se está engadindo a primeira referencia á páxina), cómpre engadila para mostrar o texto da referencia no lugar que corresponda.

Coloque o cursor no sitio no que queira que aparezan as referencias (xeralmente ó final da páxina), abra o menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;, e prema na icona &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; (tres libros) para engadila.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Se creou grupos de referencias, o que normalmente é raro, pode especificalos nesta xanela. Só se mostrarán as referencias que pertencen a ese grupo na páxina no lugar no que está a colocar o grupo.

O último paso é premer &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; na xanela.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Usar os modelos de cita estándar ====
|-
| A súa wiki local pode ter definidos modelos de citas adicionais no menú &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;. Se é así, vostede terá un acceso rápido ós modelos de cita máis usados na súa wiki. (Instruccións para engadir modelos de cita locais ó menú $cite, nunha wiki específica, poden consultarse na páxina {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ó premer na icona dun modelo como &quot;Citar libro&quot;, será enviado ó mini-editor dese mesmo modelo. Os campos de información importantes poden marcarse cun asterisco. Aínda que se mostran os campos máis comúns, é posible que non se necesiten todos.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para engadir máis parámetros, baixe na xanela do modelo e prema na opción de &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

Prema en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; cando remate.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Editar as imaxes e outros ficheiros multimedia ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Editar as imaxes ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para engadir unha nova imaxe (ou outro ficheiro multimedia) á páxina, prema na icona &quot;Ficheiros multimedia&quot; da barra de ferramentas (un debuxo de montañas).&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ó premer na icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; ábrese unha xanela que busca automaticamente ficheiros multimedia na Wikimedia Commons relacionados co título da páxina que está a editar.

Pode buscar outros ficheiros multimedia cambiando o texto na caixa de procuras do diálogo.

Prema nunha miniatura para elixir ese ficheiro.

Desta forma, colocará a imaxe na páxina que está a editar.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Despois de que se insira na páxina a imaxe que seleccionou, abrirase outra caixa de diálogo. A xanela permítelle que insira e edite unha lenda, que pode conter formato e ligazóns.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| A xanela de ficheiros tamén permite a inserción de lendas e/ou textos alternativos, para axudar ós usuarios con lectores de pantalla, ou ós que teñen deshabilitada a visualización de imaxes nos seus navegadores.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Tamén pode definir varios parámetros da imaxe na xanela &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot;. Estes inclúen o aliñamento, tipo e tamaño da imaxe.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Cando remate, prema en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; para pechar a caixa de diálogo e volver ao editor da páxina.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ó premer nunha imaxe existente, pode engadir ou editar a súa lenda ó premer na icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; que aparece debaixo da imaxe.

Pode redimensionar unha imaxe existente, premendo sobre ela, e en seguida, movendo a icona de redimensionamento (a frecha de dúas puntas nun ou nos dous cantos inferiores).

Tamén pode arrastrar e soltar unha imaxe para cambiala de sitio na páxina.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== Subindo imaxes ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pode subir imaxes dende unha pestana da caixa de diálogo de ficheiros multimedia.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Prema na lapela &quot;Subir&quot; e seleccione unha imaxe do seu ordenador. Pode teclear o nome do ficheiro, ou arrastar unha imaxe na caixa. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Ten que describir a imaxe e engadirlle categorías para que outras persoas poidan atopala.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| A imaxe será inserida na páxina cando remate.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Editar as galerías de imaxes ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Para engadir unha nova galería, prema na icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; (un conxunto de fotografías) no menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;. (En caso de que non se mostre esta icona no menú, significa que a súa wiki local decidiu atrasar a aplicación desta funcionalidade no editor visual.) 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Para editar unha galería existente co Editor Visual, prema na mesma. De seguida, na parte inferior da galería, prema na icona (un conxunto de fotos) para abrir o editor da galería e mostrar a lista completa de imaxes incluídas na mesma.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O editor de galerías é unha simple caixa que lle permite editar as galerías existentes usando wiki-texto. Para engadir novas imaxes á súa galería, debe incluír o nome do ficheiro, seguido dunha barra (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) e da lenda que desexa engadir á imaxe. Cada imaxe da galería debe estar na súa propia liña.&lt;/span&gt; Tamén pode editar esta lista para eliminar e/ou reorganizar imaxes ou para alterar as lendas.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Cando prema no botón &quot;$dialogdone&quot;, sairá do editor de galerías. Despois xa verá os seus cambios, coa galería co aspecto que se lle mostrará ós lectores.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Lémbrese que saír do editor de galerías non grava as súas modificacións. Igual que sucede con outras modificacións feitas co Editor Visual, debe gravar a páxina enteira para gardar o seu traballo.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Edición de modelos ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The powerful MediaWiki template system lets you insert dynamic content, text from other pages, and much more. For a detailed explanation and examples, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Templates help page]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the VisualEditor you can search for a relevant template, add an invocation or [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusion]] on the page you’re editing and, if needed, add custom content using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameters]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert new template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para engadir un novo modelo á páxina, poña o cursor no sitio onde queira inserir o modelo e prema na icona &quot;$template&quot; (a peza de crebacabezas) no menú &quot;$insert&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then open the {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} menu and select &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, type two curly brackets {{((}} to open the same dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pode tamén editar un modelo que xa se atopa na páxina. Ao premer no modelo para seleccionalo, ponse azul e aparece unha caixa con unha icona &quot;$template&quot; (peza de crebacabezas). Logo prema na ligazón &quot;$edit&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you select the template you want to edit, it turns blue, and a box appears displaying &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then select the &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; link  or double click on the template itself to open the template.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Algúns modelos non son visibles para os lectores da páxina. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;No editor visual, estes modelos ocultos móstranse coma iconas de crebacabezas.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O nome do modelo aparecerá ó lado da icona de crebacabezas.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Parámetros de modelo ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You’ll see this dialog box when you’re adding a new template or editing one already in place.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What you see in the box depends on whether the template in question contains {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, helpful metadata added by other editors to make it easier to edit templates in the Visual Editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When a template contains TemplateData, the VisualEditor can use it to present annotated fields for you to fill in.
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For templates that have some community-provided TemplateData, the VisualEditor displays a list of the named parameters and, often, descriptions and instructions explaining the meaning and required format for each parameter’s values.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Adding undocumented parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter: “1”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter’s value: “en_US”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter: “2”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter’s value: “yes”&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Autogenerated parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completing your edit ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Cando remate a edición dun modelo, prema en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; para pechar a xanela e voltar á edición da páxina principal.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing on mobile ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Substituír os modelos ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Editando listas ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Pode usar o editor visual para crear listas, ou para cambiar o formato dunha lista existente. Hai dous tipos de listas: non ordenadas e ordenadas (numeradas).

Para comezar unha nova lista, prema nun dos dous elementos do menú mostrados aquí. Ou, se xa ten tecleada a lista (en liñas separadas), seleccione (resalte) a lista que tecleou, e logo prema nun dos elementos do menú.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Aquí amósanse exemplos dos dous tipos de listas: non ordenadas e ordenadas (numeradas).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Se quere cambiar o nivel identación de parte dunha lista, seleccione a parte que quere cambiar.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Logo use o menú, ou prema a tecla Tab. (A tecla Tab aumenta a identación, use a tecla Shift xunto coa tecla Tab para diminuír a identación).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Este é o resultado dunha identación aumentada.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Pode mesturar listas ordenadas (numeradas) e non ordenadas, se os elementos da lista teñen identacións diferentes.
|}

== Editar as táboas ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Pode usar o Editor visual para inserir e cambiar táboas.

Pode, incluso, importar unha táboa arrastrando un ficheiro de valores separados por coma (.csv) dende o seu ordenador ata a xanela de edición principal.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Cando preme en &quot;Táboa&quot;, no menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot;, o Editor Visual insire unha táboa de catro por catro en branco.

Agora o menú &quot;Táboa&quot; está dispoñible. Dende este menú, pode engadir un título na parte superior da táboa.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Para seleccionar unha cela, presiónea unha vez.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Para editar os contidos dunha cela (por exemplo, para engadir contido ou corrixir un erro ortográfico), prema dúas veces na cela. Ou pode seleccionar a cela e despois premer Return.

Para rematar de editar unha cela, só prema en calquera outro lado.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pode engadir ou borrar unha columna ou unha fila.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Pode fusionar celas: seleccióneas, logo no menú Táboa, prema en &quot;Fusionar celas&quot;.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Se fusiona celas, só se mantén o texto nunha das celas, o texto nas outras celas bórrase cando fusiona as celas. Se decide que quere algún ou todo o texto que foi borrado, use o botón de Desfacer, mova ou copie o texto que quere, e logo fusione as celas de novo.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Tamén pode dividir celas que foron fusionadas previamente. Todo o contido que estaba na cela fusionada pasarase á primeira cela cando faga a fusión. Logo pode cortar e pegar texto a outras celas, se quere.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Editar as categorías ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| Para editar categorías, no menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot;, prema no elemento &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Premendo en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; abre unha xanela que lista as categorías existentes e permite que engada outras novas, e que borre as existentes.

Ten tamén a opción de configurar ou cambiar a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|chave xeral (predeterminada) de ordenamento]], que determina onde aparece a páxina cando se lista con outras páxinas na mesma categoría.

Por exemplo, a chave de ordenamento por defecto para o artigo &quot;George Washington&quot; é &quot;Washington, George&quot;. Na categoría &quot;Presidentes dos Estados Unidos&quot;, o artigo aparecerá listado na letra &quot;W&quot;, non na &quot;G&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para engadir unha categoría a unha páxina, escriba o nome da categoría e prema en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}&quot;. A medida que vai escribindo, o Editor Visual buscará unha correspondencia nas categorías existentes. Pode seleccionar unha categoría existente ou crear unha nova que aínda non teña a súa propia páxina de categoría. (Ata que a páxina desa nova categoría sexa creada, o seu nome mostrarase en vermello despois de que grave as súas modificacións.)&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Para eliminar unha categoría existente, prema nela e na icona &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; (caldeiro de lixo) na xanela que se abre.

Premendo nunha categoría tamén lle permite especificar a clave de ordenación para esa categoría específica. Esta clave de ordenación sobreponse á clave de ordenación por defecto.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Prema en &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; ao rematar de editar as categorías e volverá ao editor da páxina.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Editar a configuración da páxina ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| Para editar a configuración dunha páxina, prema para abrir o &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; menú, na barra de ferramentas, e seleccione o botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| O botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; abre unha xanela que mostra varias opcións.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Pode facer que unha páxina redirixa a outra marcando a caixa &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot;, e despois escribindo o nome da páxina á que quere que se reenvíe ó usuario que quere ir á páxina que vostede está editando.

Na parte de abaixo está a opción de previr renomeados de páxina de actualizacións desta redireción. Esta opción utilízase raras veces.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Pode cambiar se a páxina mostra unha Táboa de contidos seleccionando un destes tres botóns. A opción por defecto é &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot;, que mostra unha Táboa de contidos se hai tres ou máis seccións.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Pode facer unha páxina que non mostre as ligazóns de editar ó lado de cada título de sección marcando esta opción.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| Prema &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; cando remate de editar o {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} para volver ó editor da páxina.
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing maps&lt;/span&gt; ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Editar as fórmulas matemáticas ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Para engadir fórmulas matemáticas a unha páxina, poña o cursor onde quera insertala, e prema na icona &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; (&quot;Σ&quot;) no menú &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; da barra de ferramentas.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Abrirase unha xanela na cal pode escribir a fórmula, usando sintaxe LaTeX. O Editor visual actualizará a fórmula ó tempo que a escribe, así vostede poderá ver como queda ó mesmo tempo que fai os cambios. Así que teña a fórmula correctamente escrita, prema no botón &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Para editar unha fórmula que xa está na páxina, prema nela e logo prema na icona &quot;Σ&quot; que aparece. Isto abrirá a xanela das fórmulas, onde poderá facer os cambios.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| As fórmulas matemáticas poden engadirse dentro do texto ou centradas como un bloque.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

==Editando partituras musicais ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Para engadir unha nova partitura a unha páxina, poña o cursor no sitio onde quere inserila. Logo, dende o menú &quot;Insert&quot; na barra de ferramentas, prema na opción &quot;Notación musical&quot;.

Para editar unha partitura xa existente na páxina, prema dúas veces nela.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Isto abrirá a pantalla de &quot;Notación musical&quot;. Aquí a notación pode editarse por escala, tanto en formato ABC como en Lilypond. Tamén pode ligar a notación a un ficheiro de son ou MIDI. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Así que teña rematado, prema o botón &quot;Feito&quot; para pechar a xanela e gardar os seus cambios.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Editar os poemas e outros elementos especiais ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Algúns elementos, como as listas de asociación e poemas, aínda non están soportados completamente no editor visual.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Na maioría dos casos, os elementos existentes poden editarse, pero os novos non se poden inserir no editor visual.

Ata que sexan soportados completamente, pode copiar un existente doutra páxina, ou editar o texto wiki fonte directamente.

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== Cambiar de modo de edición ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para cambiar do editor visual ó editor de wikitexto, prema no botón &lt;code&gt;[[ ]]&lt;/code&gt; na parte dereita máis afastada da barra de ferramentas.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Verá un diff. (Se preme en &quot;Descartar cambios&quot;, vostede simplemente verá o wikitexto, listo para modificar co editor de wikitexto.)

Desprácese á parte de abaixo e verá a área de edición de wikitexto. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
Tamén pode cambiar entre o editor de wikitexto e o editor visual. Para facer isto, prema na icona do lapis na parte da dereita máis alonxada.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Atallos de teclado ==

Moitos editores insiren texto wiki directamente, especialmente negras, cursivas e ligazóns internas. Os [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|atallos de teclado]] permiten inserir rapidamente formatos similares sen ter que premer nos botóns da barra de ferramentas. Aquí están os atallos de teclado de uso xeral do Editor visual.

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! Atallos para PC
! Acción
! Atallo para Mac
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Negra
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Cursiva
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Inserir unha ligazón
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Cortar
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Copiar
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Pegar
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Desfacer
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>n0e4d4qcsqehbkp6r5gw5v5fcox7ht7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/fo</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>144158</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402417</id>
      <parentid>4983781</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:56:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8208" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Um VisualEditor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor er ein &quot;visuellur&quot; máti at rætta og skriva Wikipedia, ein nýggj skipan sum letur fólk rætta uttan at tey fyrst noyðast at læra seg wiki-kotur. Hesin møguleiki hevur verið tøkur sum ein opt-in, tvs. at tað var valfrítt, í einari &quot;alpha&quot; útgávu á ensk-mæltu Wikipediu síðan desember 2012. [$blog-april á 16 øðrum málum síðan apríl 2013], og [$blog-june á næstan øllum øðrum málum] síðan byrjanina av juni. Sum [[#Tíðarætlan|greitt frá niðanfyri]], so vænta vit, at VisualEditor verður tøkur á nærum øllum Wikipedium við ársenda 2013, og byrja varð við enskmæltu Wikipediu hin 1. juli 2013.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Í løtuni eru tað ávísir trupulleikar við VisualEditor; tað slepst ikki undan hesum. Um tú finnur onkran trupulleika, vinarliga bíða so ikki, men [[VisualEditor/Feedback|gev eina afturmelding um feilin á Afturmeldingarsíðuni]]. Tað eru eisini øki, har ið vit noyðast at gera heilt nýggjar funksjónir. Avmarkingar eru í løtuni hesar:

* '''Heintar spakuliga''' — Tað fer at taka nakað av tíð fyri langar, kompleksar síður at heintast niður til VisualEditor. Í framtíðini fer ritbúnaðurin at gerast nógv skjótari, og fer at loyva loading av størri síðum.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Incomplete editing''' — Some elements of complex formatting will display and let you edit their contents, but will not let users edit their structure or add new entries – such as definition lists. Adding features in this area is one of our priorities.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Most content pages, not talk pages''' — VisualEditor is only enabled for some namespaces.  At most Wikipedias, VisualEditor can be used on articles, User:, File:, Help: and Category: pages.  VisualEditor is not currently available for Wikipedia: pages or any talk pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We recommend that users click &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; before saving the page and [[VisualEditor/Feedback|report any problems they encounter]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Hvussu tú kanst hjálpa ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For VisualEditor to be as good as it can be, there are a lot of things we need help with. Obviously, one big area is using the software, finding bugs and [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reporting them]], but there are many other tasks as well. These include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Updating help pages''' — All of our projects have help pages to make it easier for new users to contribute. Unfortunately they are all built around the markup editor, and as VisualEditor evolves, the screenshots and tutorials will all become outdated. It would be very useful if people could  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]], based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Adding TemplateData to templates''' — VisualEditor features a nice template editor, which is described in more detail on our [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|help page]]. As you'll see if you use it on Wikipedia, some templates have named parameters and nice descriptions that make it easy to use. Others do not. This is because templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; before this feature will work. If you're interested in adding TemplateData, we have [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]], along with a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help new users''' — If the VisualEditor launch is successful, we will have a lot more new users than we are used to, and even though editing may be easier, working out how to interact with the community will still be hard. Please spend some time [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]], to help these newcomers become acclimatized to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>6ndvvs7xpmfc35lp1xqejnarfbbupuh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/ast</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>144445</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402396</id>
      <parentid>4983790</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:48:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7646" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Llei la '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Informa d'un problema''' con VisualEditor].
|-
| Descubre cómo enllazar, amestar o mover imaxes, crear cites, insertar plantíes, editar tables y más.
|Inclui'l '''navegador web,   del ordenador, y tema de Wikipedia''' (de vezu Vector, dacuando Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tocante a VisualEditor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor ye una manera &quot;visual&quot; d'editar Wikipedia, un nuevu sistema que permite a les persones collaborar ensin necesidá de deprender marques wiki. Ta disponible como versión &quot;alfa&quot; voluntaria na Wikipedia en llingua inglesa dende diciembre de 2012, [$blog-april n'otres 16 llingües dende abril de 2013], y [$blog-june en casi toles demás llingües] dende primeros de xunu. Como [[#Timetable|s'esplica más abaxo]], esperamos que tea disponible pa casi toles Wikipedias pa finales de xunetu, principiando cola Wikipedia en llingua inglesa el 1 de xunetu.
&lt;/div&gt; 

VisualEditor lleva disponible como versión &quot;alfa&quot; pa voluntarios en MediaWiki.org dende mediaos de 2012 y na Wikipedia n'inglés dende diciembre de 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ en 14 llingües más dende abril de 2013], y [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ en casi toles demás llingües] dende primeros de xunu de 2013. A xunetu de 2015, ta disponible de mou predetermináu pa to los editores con o sin sesión aniciada en más del 75% de les Wikipedies.
Esperamos tenelu disponible de mou predetermináu pa la mayor parte de [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|les llingües que falten]] pa finales de 2015.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Nesti momentu, VisualEditor tien ciertu númberu de ''bugs''; esto ye inevitable. Si alcuentra un problema, por favor, nun dulde [[VisualEditor/Feedback|n'informar del mesmu na páxina de Comentarios]]. Tamién hai delles árees nes qu'inda tenemos de construir funciones nueves dafechu. Les torgues actuales incluyen:

* '''Carga lenta''' — Llevará un tiempu cargar páxines llargues y complexes en VisualEditor. Nel futuru el software será muncho más rápidu, y permitirá cargar páxines más grandes.
* '''Edición incompleta''' — Dalgunos elementos de formatu complexu veránse y permitirán qu'edites el conteníu, pero nun permiten que los usuarios editen la so estructura o amiesten entraes nueves (como llistes de definiciones). Añadir funciones nesta área ye una de les nueses prioridaes.
* '''La mayoría de páxines de conteníu, non d'alderique''' — VisualEditor sólo tará activáu en dellos espacios de nomes. Na mayor parte de Wikipedies, VisualEditor puedee usase nes páxines d'artículos, Usuariu:, Ficheru:, Ayuda: y Categoría:. Anguaño VisualEditor nun ta disponible pa les páxines de Wikipedia: nin les d'alderique.

Por eses torgues, y polos inevitables bugs, recomendamos que los usuarios faigan click en &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; enantes de guardar la páxina, y qu'[[VisualEditor/Feedback|informen de cualquier problema qu'alcuentren]].

== Cómo ayudar ==

Pa que VisualEditor seya tán bonu como pue ser, hai munches coses coles que necesitamos ayuda. Obviamente, un gran área ye usar el software, atopar fallos ya [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar d'ellos]], pero hai tamién munches otres xeres. Estes incluyen:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Anovar les páxines d'ayuda''' — Tolos nuesos proyeutos tienen páxines d'ayuda pa facer más fácil que los nuevos usuarios collaboren. Por desgracia, toes tan feches sobro l'editor de llinguax de marques, y cuando se llance VisualEditor, les captures de pantalla y los tutoriales quedarán anticuaos. Sedría mui útil si pudieran  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|anovase les páxines d'ayuda]], basandose nel [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|nuesu tutorial pa usar VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Amestar TemplateData a les plantíes''' — VisualEditor presenta un guapu editor de plantíes, que se describe más detalladamente na nuesa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|páxina d'ayuda]]. Como verá si lu usa na Wikipedia, delles plantíes tienen parámetros con nome y bones descripciones que faenles fáciles d'usar. Otres non. Esto ye porque les plantíes necesiten &quot;TemplateData&quot; enantes de que funcione esta carauterística. Si tien interés n'amestar TemplateData, tenemos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|una guía pa facelo]], xunto con una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|llista de les plantíes más importantes a les qu'amestalo]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Ayudar a los usuarios nuevos''' — Si'l llanzamientu de VisualEditor tien éxitu, tendremos munchos más usuarios nuevos de lo que tamos avezaos - y anque editar pue ser más cenciello, descubrir cómo interactuar cola comunidá inda sera difícil. Por favor, intente pasar dalgún tiempu [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|nel serviciu d'ayuda, o na canal d'ayuda nel IRC]], p'ayudar a qu'estos principiantes s'aclimaten a Wikipedia.

==Ver tamién==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>ljevbjrhq92vi8pag5dro54h9qqs5wu</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402996</id>
      <parentid>5402396</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7686" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Llei la '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Informa d'un problema''' con VisualEditor].
|-
| Descubre cómo enllazar, amestar o mover imaxes, crear cites, insertar plantíes, editar tables y más.
|Inclui'l '''navegador web,   del ordenador, y tema de Wikipedia''' (de vezu Vector, dacuando Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tocante a VisualEditor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor ye una manera &quot;visual&quot; d'editar Wikipedia, un nuevu sistema que permite a les persones collaborar ensin necesidá de deprender marques wiki. Ta disponible como versión &quot;alfa&quot; voluntaria na Wikipedia en llingua inglesa dende diciembre de 2012, [$blog-april n'otres 16 llingües dende abril de 2013], y [$blog-june en casi toles demás llingües] dende primeros de xunu. Como [[#Timetable|s'esplica más abaxo]], esperamos que tea disponible pa casi toles Wikipedias pa finales de xunetu, principiando cola Wikipedia en llingua inglesa el 1 de xunetu.
&lt;/div&gt; 

VisualEditor lleva disponible como versión &quot;alfa&quot; pa voluntarios en MediaWiki.org dende mediaos de 2012 y na Wikipedia n'inglés dende diciembre de 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ en 14 llingües más dende abril de 2013], y [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ en casi toles demás llingües] dende primeros de xunu de 2013. A xunetu de 2015, ta disponible de mou predetermináu pa to los editores con o sin sesión aniciada en más del 75% de les Wikipedies.
Esperamos tenelu disponible de mou predetermináu pa la mayor parte de [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|les llingües que falten]] pa finales de 2015.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Nesti momentu, VisualEditor tien ciertu númberu de ''bugs''; esto ye inevitable. Si alcuentra un problema, por favor, nun dulde [[VisualEditor/Feedback|n'informar del mesmu na páxina de Comentarios]]. Tamién hai delles árees nes qu'inda tenemos de construir funciones nueves dafechu. Les torgues actuales incluyen:

* '''Carga lenta''' — Llevará un tiempu cargar páxines llargues y complexes en VisualEditor. Nel futuru el software será muncho más rápidu, y permitirá cargar páxines más grandes.
* '''Edición incompleta''' — Dalgunos elementos de formatu complexu veránse y permitirán qu'edites el conteníu, pero nun permiten que los usuarios editen la so estructura o amiesten entraes nueves (como llistes de definiciones). Añadir funciones nesta área ye una de les nueses prioridaes.
* '''La mayoría de páxines de conteníu, non d'alderique''' — VisualEditor sólo tará activáu en dellos espacios de nomes. Na mayor parte de Wikipedies, VisualEditor puedee usase nes páxines d'artículos, Usuariu:, Ficheru:, Ayuda: y Categoría:. Anguaño VisualEditor nun ta disponible pa les páxines de Wikipedia: nin les d'alderique.

Por eses torgues, y polos inevitables bugs, recomendamos que los usuarios faigan click en &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; enantes de guardar la páxina, y qu'[[VisualEditor/Feedback|informen de cualquier problema qu'alcuentren]].

== Cómo ayudar ==

Pa que VisualEditor seya tán bonu como pue ser, hai munches coses coles que necesitamos ayuda. Obviamente, un gran área ye usar el software, atopar fallos ya [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar d'ellos]], pero hai tamién munches otres xeres. Estes incluyen:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Anovar les páxines d'ayuda''' — Tolos nuesos proyeutos tienen páxines d'ayuda pa facer más fácil que los nuevos usuarios collaboren. Por desgracia, toes tan feches sobro l'editor de llinguax de marques, y cuando se llance VisualEditor, les captures de pantalla y los tutoriales quedarán anticuaos. Sedría mui útil si pudieran  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|anovase les páxines d'ayuda]], basandose nel [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|nuesu tutorial pa usar VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Amestar TemplateData a les plantíes''' — VisualEditor presenta un guapu editor de plantíes, que se describe más detalladamente na nuesa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|páxina d'ayuda]]. Como verá si lu usa na Wikipedia, delles plantíes tienen parámetros con nome y bones descripciones que faenles fáciles d'usar. Otres non. Esto ye porque les plantíes necesiten &quot;TemplateData&quot; enantes de que funcione esta carauterística. Si tien interés n'amestar TemplateData, tenemos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|una guía pa facelo]], xunto con una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|llista de les plantíes más importantes a les qu'amestalo]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Ayudar a los usuarios nuevos''' — Si'l llanzamientu de VisualEditor tien éxitu, tendremos munchos más usuarios nuevos de lo que tamos avezaos - y anque editar pue ser más cenciello, descubrir cómo interactuar cola comunidá inda sera difícil. Por favor, intente pasar dalgún tiempu [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|nel serviciu d'ayuda, o na canal d'ayuda nel IRC]], p'ayudar a qu'estos principiantes s'aclimaten a Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ver tamién==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>2vn3u9hohx6bhxatm8o6ns2wxjekrus</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403035</id>
      <parentid>5402996</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7646" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Llei la '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Informa d'un problema''' con VisualEditor].
|-
| Descubre cómo enllazar, amestar o mover imaxes, crear cites, insertar plantíes, editar tables y más.
|Inclui'l '''navegador web,   del ordenador, y tema de Wikipedia''' (de vezu Vector, dacuando Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tocante a VisualEditor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor ye una manera &quot;visual&quot; d'editar Wikipedia, un nuevu sistema que permite a les persones collaborar ensin necesidá de deprender marques wiki. Ta disponible como versión &quot;alfa&quot; voluntaria na Wikipedia en llingua inglesa dende diciembre de 2012, [$blog-april n'otres 16 llingües dende abril de 2013], y [$blog-june en casi toles demás llingües] dende primeros de xunu. Como [[#Timetable|s'esplica más abaxo]], esperamos que tea disponible pa casi toles Wikipedias pa finales de xunetu, principiando cola Wikipedia en llingua inglesa el 1 de xunetu.
&lt;/div&gt; 

VisualEditor lleva disponible como versión &quot;alfa&quot; pa voluntarios en MediaWiki.org dende mediaos de 2012 y na Wikipedia n'inglés dende diciembre de 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ en 14 llingües más dende abril de 2013], y [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ en casi toles demás llingües] dende primeros de xunu de 2013. A xunetu de 2015, ta disponible de mou predetermináu pa to los editores con o sin sesión aniciada en más del 75% de les Wikipedies.
Esperamos tenelu disponible de mou predetermináu pa la mayor parte de [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|les llingües que falten]] pa finales de 2015.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Nesti momentu, VisualEditor tien ciertu númberu de ''bugs''; esto ye inevitable. Si alcuentra un problema, por favor, nun dulde [[VisualEditor/Feedback|n'informar del mesmu na páxina de Comentarios]]. Tamién hai delles árees nes qu'inda tenemos de construir funciones nueves dafechu. Les torgues actuales incluyen:

* '''Carga lenta''' — Llevará un tiempu cargar páxines llargues y complexes en VisualEditor. Nel futuru el software será muncho más rápidu, y permitirá cargar páxines más grandes.
* '''Edición incompleta''' — Dalgunos elementos de formatu complexu veránse y permitirán qu'edites el conteníu, pero nun permiten que los usuarios editen la so estructura o amiesten entraes nueves (como llistes de definiciones). Añadir funciones nesta área ye una de les nueses prioridaes.
* '''La mayoría de páxines de conteníu, non d'alderique''' — VisualEditor sólo tará activáu en dellos espacios de nomes. Na mayor parte de Wikipedies, VisualEditor puedee usase nes páxines d'artículos, Usuariu:, Ficheru:, Ayuda: y Categoría:. Anguaño VisualEditor nun ta disponible pa les páxines de Wikipedia: nin les d'alderique.

Por eses torgues, y polos inevitables bugs, recomendamos que los usuarios faigan click en &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; enantes de guardar la páxina, y qu'[[VisualEditor/Feedback|informen de cualquier problema qu'alcuentren]].

== Cómo ayudar ==

Pa que VisualEditor seya tán bonu como pue ser, hai munches coses coles que necesitamos ayuda. Obviamente, un gran área ye usar el software, atopar fallos ya [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar d'ellos]], pero hai tamién munches otres xeres. Estes incluyen:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Anovar les páxines d'ayuda''' — Tolos nuesos proyeutos tienen páxines d'ayuda pa facer más fácil que los nuevos usuarios collaboren. Por desgracia, toes tan feches sobro l'editor de llinguax de marques, y cuando se llance VisualEditor, les captures de pantalla y los tutoriales quedarán anticuaos. Sedría mui útil si pudieran  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|anovase les páxines d'ayuda]], basandose nel [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|nuesu tutorial pa usar VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Amestar TemplateData a les plantíes''' — VisualEditor presenta un guapu editor de plantíes, que se describe más detalladamente na nuesa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|páxina d'ayuda]]. Como verá si lu usa na Wikipedia, delles plantíes tienen parámetros con nome y bones descripciones que faenles fáciles d'usar. Otres non. Esto ye porque les plantíes necesiten &quot;TemplateData&quot; enantes de que funcione esta carauterística. Si tien interés n'amestar TemplateData, tenemos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|una guía pa facelo]], xunto con una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|llista de les plantíes más importantes a les qu'amestalo]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Ayudar a los usuarios nuevos''' — Si'l llanzamientu de VisualEditor tien éxitu, tendremos munchos más usuarios nuevos de lo que tamos avezaos - y anque editar pue ser más cenciello, descubrir cómo interactuar cola comunidá inda sera difícil. Por favor, intente pasar dalgún tiempu [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|nel serviciu d'ayuda, o na canal d'ayuda nel IRC]], p'ayudar a qu'estos principiantes s'aclimaten a Wikipedia.

==Ver tamién==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>ljevbjrhq92vi8pag5dro54h9qqs5wu</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403202</id>
      <parentid>5403035</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:47:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7664" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Llei la '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Informa d'un problema''' con VisualEditor].
|-
| Descubre cómo enllazar, amestar o mover imaxes, crear cites, insertar plantíes, editar tables y más.
|Inclui'l '''navegador web,   del ordenador, y tema de Wikipedia''' (de vezu Vector, dacuando Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tocante a VisualEditor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor ye una manera &quot;visual&quot; d'editar Wikipedia, un nuevu sistema que permite a les persones collaborar ensin necesidá de deprender marques wiki. Ta disponible como versión &quot;alfa&quot; voluntaria na Wikipedia en llingua inglesa dende diciembre de 2012, [$blog-april n'otres 16 llingües dende abril de 2013], y [$blog-june en casi toles demás llingües] dende primeros de xunu. Como [[#Timetable|s'esplica más abaxo]], esperamos que tea disponible pa casi toles Wikipedias pa finales de xunetu, principiando cola Wikipedia en llingua inglesa el 1 de xunetu.
&lt;/div&gt; 

VisualEditor lleva disponible como versión &quot;alfa&quot; pa voluntarios en MediaWiki.org dende mediaos de 2012 y na Wikipedia n'inglés dende diciembre de 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ en 14 llingües más dende abril de 2013], y [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ en casi toles demás llingües] dende primeros de xunu de 2013. A xunetu de 2015, ta disponible de mou predetermináu pa to los editores con o sin sesión aniciada en más del 75% de les Wikipedies.
Esperamos tenelu disponible de mou predetermináu pa la mayor parte de [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|les llingües que falten]] pa finales de 2015.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Nesti momentu, VisualEditor tien ciertu númberu de ''bugs''; esto ye inevitable. Si alcuentra un problema, por favor, nun dulde [[VisualEditor/Feedback|n'informar del mesmu na páxina de Comentarios]]. Tamién hai delles árees nes qu'inda tenemos de construir funciones nueves dafechu. Les torgues actuales incluyen:

* '''Carga lenta''' — Llevará un tiempu cargar páxines llargues y complexes en VisualEditor. Nel futuru el software será muncho más rápidu, y permitirá cargar páxines más grandes.
* '''Edición incompleta''' — Dalgunos elementos de formatu complexu veránse y permitirán qu'edites el conteníu, pero nun permiten que los usuarios editen la so estructura o amiesten entraes nueves (como llistes de definiciones). Añadir funciones nesta área ye una de les nueses prioridaes.
* '''La mayoría de páxines de conteníu, non d'alderique''' — VisualEditor sólo tará activáu en dellos espacios de nomes. Na mayor parte de Wikipedies, VisualEditor puedee usase nes páxines d'artículos, Usuariu:, Ficheru:, Ayuda: y Categoría:. Anguaño VisualEditor nun ta disponible pa les páxines de Wikipedia: nin les d'alderique.

Por eses torgues, y polos inevitables bugs, recomendamos que los usuarios faigan click en &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; enantes de guardar la páxina, y qu'[[VisualEditor/Feedback|informen de cualquier problema qu'alcuentren]].

== Cómo ayudar ==

Pa que VisualEditor seya tán bonu como pue ser, hai munches coses coles que necesitamos ayuda. Obviamente, un gran área ye usar el software, atopar fallos ya [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar d'ellos]], pero hai tamién munches otres xeres. Estes incluyen:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Anovar les páxines d'ayuda''' — Tolos nuesos proyeutos tienen páxines d'ayuda pa facer más fácil que los nuevos usuarios collaboren. Por desgracia, toes tan feches sobro l'editor de llinguax de marques, y cuando se llance VisualEditor, les captures de pantalla y los tutoriales quedarán anticuaos. Sedría mui útil si pudieran  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|anovase les páxines d'ayuda]], basandose nel [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|nuesu tutorial pa usar VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Amestar TemplateData a les plantíes''' — VisualEditor presenta un guapu editor de plantíes, que se describe más detalladamente na nuesa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|páxina d'ayuda]]. Como verá si lu usa na Wikipedia, delles plantíes tienen parámetros con nome y bones descripciones que faenles fáciles d'usar. Otres non. Esto ye porque les plantíes necesiten &quot;TemplateData&quot; enantes de que funcione esta carauterística. Si tien interés n'amestar TemplateData, tenemos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|una guía pa facelo]], xunto con una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|llista de les plantíes más importantes a les qu'amestalo]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Ayudar a los usuarios nuevos''' — Si'l llanzamientu de VisualEditor tien éxitu, tendremos munchos más usuarios nuevos de lo que tamos avezaos - y anque editar pue ser más cenciello, descubrir cómo interactuar cola comunidá inda sera difícil. Por favor, intente pasar dalgún tiempu [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|nel serviciu d'ayuda, o na canal d'ayuda nel IRC]], p'ayudar a qu'estos principiantes s'aclimaten a Wikipedia.

==Ver tamién==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>mq6tebl9k17rgmoa2ntceubpn50xw48</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/hu</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>144602</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402776</id>
      <parentid>5346987</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:47:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="66224" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Ha szeretnéd kipróbálni a Visual Editort szócikk szerkesztése nélkül,  [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} ezen az oldalon] megteheted.&lt;/span&gt; Nem szükséges regisztrálnod a Visual Editor kipróbálásához azon a lapon.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== A VisualEditor elindítása ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| A VisualEditorral való szerkesztéshez kattints a &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; fülre a lap tetején.

Az oldal megnyitása néhány másodpercet vesz igénybe, hosszabb oldal esetén tovább is tarthat.

Ha a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}&quot; fülre kattintasz, a hagyományos szerkesztőfelületet érheted el.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| A VisualEditort a szakaszok melletti &quot;{{int|editsection}}&quot; linkre kattintva is elindíthatod.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Első lépések: a VisualEditor eszköztára ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Képernyőkép a VisualEditor menüjéről]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | Amikor elindítod a VisualEditort, a képernyő felső részén találod a szerkesztőmenüt. Az ikonok egy része ismerős lehet:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' és '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' a változtatásaidra értve.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| A '''Fejlécek''' lenyíló menüvel lehetőséged van a bekezdés formázásának módosítására. Egy bekezdés stílusának megváltoztatásához helyezd a kurzort a bekezdésbe, majd válassz ki egy elemet a menüből (nem szükséges szöveget kijelölnöd). A szakaszok címét &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}&quot;, az alszakaszokét &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}&quot;, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}&quot;, és a további stílusokkal formázd. A szövegek alapstílusa a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}&quot; stílus.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Formátum:''' Az „&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;” betűre kattintva lenyílik egy menü. 
* A „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}” menüpont ('''F''') megvastagítja a kijelölt szöveget.
* Az „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}” menüpont a kijelölt szöveget dőlt betűssé teszi.
* A &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}&quot; menüponttal (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) azt érjük el, hogy a kijelölt szöveg kisebb lesz a körülötte lévő szövegnél és egy kissé feljebb (felsőindexbe) kerül.
* A „{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}” menüponttal (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) azt érjük el, hogy a kijelölt szöveg kisebb lesz a körülötte lévő szövegnél és egy kissé lejjebb (alsó indexbe) kerül.
* A &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}&quot; menüpont (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) a kijelölt szöveget áthúzza.
* A &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}&quot; menüpont (egy pár kapcsoszárójel: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) a kijelölt szöveg betűtípusát azonos szélességűre változtatja, ami kiemeli a környező, arányos szélességű szövegből.
* Az {{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}} menüpont (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) a kijelölt szöveget aláhúzza.
* A &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}&quot; menüpont (文A) lehetővé teszi a kijelölt szöveg nyelvének meghatározását (például: japán), illetve az olvasás irányát (például jobbról balra).
* Az utolsó menüpont ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), az &quot;{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}&quot;, minden formázást eltávolít a kijelölt szövegről, a hivatkozásokat is beleértve.

Ha nem jelöltél ki szöveget, és megnyomod az &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; gombot, hogy legördüljön a menü, majd kiválasztasz egy menüpontot, akkor a kiválasztott formázás lesz érvényben, amikor elkezded begépelni a szöveget, a kurzor helyétől kezdődően.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Hivatkozás menüpont''': a lánc ikon a [[#Editing links|hivatkozás menüpontot]] rejti. Ha rákattintasz (általában miután kijelöltél egy szövegrészt), megjelenik a [[#Editing links|hivatkozás hozzáadása]] menü.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menü:''' A {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menüben forráshivatkozásokat (lábjegyzeteket) lehet elhelyezni a szövegben. Mindegyik projekt rendelkezik hozzáféréssel az alapvető forráshivatkozás-formátumokhoz, és ennek a menüpontnak a segítségével lehetőségük van a forráshivatkozások újrafelhasználásához is. A szerkesztők számára a helyi forrássablonok gyors elérést is biztosítja, amennyiben ez a funkció az adott wikiben rendelkezésre áll.

(A helyi forrássablonok hozzáadásához a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menühöz itt található leírás: {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} gomb:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ha a Citoid engedélyezve van, a {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} helyett a {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} gombot fogod látni.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

A Citoid megpróbálja automatikusan előállítani a forráshivatkozást.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Listák és behúzások''': Az első két gomb lehetővé teszi, hogy &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}&quot; vagy &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}&quot; listát készítsünk. Az utolsó két gomb a listaelemek behúzásának mértékét csökkenti vagy növeli.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' Az &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menü egyes projektekben máshogy nézhet ki. Alább egy lista az '''összes''' lehetséges beállítási lehetőséget mutatja.
* A &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; ikon, mely hegyeket ábrázol, megnyitja a [[#Editing images and other media files|média párbeszédpanelt]].
* A „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}” ikonnal (puzzle) [[#Editing templates|módosíthatod a sablonokat]].
* A „Táblázat” gombra kattintva táblázatot szúrhatsz be.
* A &quot;{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}&quot; menüpont (sötét kör felkiáltójellel) lehetővé teszi olyan megjegyzések beszúrását a szövegbe, amelyek az olvasók számára nem láthatók. Ezek a megjegyzések csak szerkesztői nézetben láthatók, felkiáltójeles ikon jelzi őket. Szerkesztéskor az ikonra kattintva lehetőséged van szerkeszteni vagy kitörölni a megjegyzést.
* A &quot;{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}&quot; ikon (egy [[:hu:ankh|ankh]] szimbólum - ☥) lehetővé teszi hieroglifák beszúrását. (Lásd lentebb.)
* A &quot;Kódblokk&quot; menüponttal kódot szúrhatsz be.
* A &quot;Kotta&quot; gombbal zenei hangjegyeket illeszthetsz be.
* A &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; ikonra (több fénykép) kattintva képgalériát helyezhetsz el az oldalon.
* A &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; ikon (Σ) megnyitja a [[#Editing mathematical formulae|matematikaiképlet-beszúró párbeszédablakot]].
* A &quot;Grafikon&quot; ikonnal grafikont illeszthetsz be.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}&quot; gombbal a projekten használt aláírásodat szúrhatod be. Szürkének fogod látni az ikont (nem kiválasztható), ha olyan típusú oldalt (&quot;névteret&quot;), például szócikket szerkesztesz, ahol aláírást nem szabad elhelyezni.
* A &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; gomb (a három könyvvel) megnyit egy párbeszédpanelt, ahol meghatározható, hogy hol fognak megjelenni a forráshivatkozások az olvasónak. Ezt általában egyszer kell megcsinálni egy lapon.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Speciális karakter beszúrása:''' A &quot;{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}&quot; (Ω) ikon a {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} menü mellett lehetővé teszi, hogy speciális karaktert szúrj be a szövegbe. Ez lehet például szimbólum, ékezetes betű vagy matematikai jelölés. (Ez a lista lokálisan testre szabható. Instrukciókhoz lásd: {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}})
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| A '''Szerkesztési bevezetők''' gomb az adott lapra vonatkozó értesítéseket mutatja meg (például, hogy a lap [[:hu:Kategória:lapvédelem|védett]]).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A '''$pagemenu''' menü a ''$save'' és a '''Szerkesztő váltása''' gombtól balra helyezkedik el. Az '''Opciók''' menüpont alatt a következő (bal oldali) fülek találhatóak:&lt;/span&gt;

* A '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' lehetővé teszi, hogy kategóriákat adj az oldalhoz, valamint hogy beállítsd, hogy a lap milyen [[:hu:ikipédia:Kategóriák#Funkcionális_rendezési_kulcsok|rendezési kulcs]] szerint szerepeljen az adott kategóriában.
* Az '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' lehetővé teszi, hogy egy oldalt átirányítássá alakíts, az átirányításhoz különféle beállításokat adhatsz meg, módosíthatod a Tartalomjegyzék megjelenését, eltávolíthatod a szakaszcímek melletti szerkesztéslinkeket és egyértelműsítő lappá nyilvánítod az oldalt.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A '''Speciális beállítások''' menüben a lap keresőmotorok általi indexelésének beállításait változtathatod meg, megjelenítheted az „Új szakasz” fület és felülírhatod az oldal címének megjelenítését.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A '''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' azon más nyelvű oldalakat tartalmazza, amelyek az adott laphoz kapcsolódnak. Jelenleg csak [[:hu:Wikipédia:Wikidata-szerkesztési útmutató|Wikidatán]] szerkeszthető ez a lista.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A '''Használt sablonok''' menüben a lapon használt sablonok listája tekinthető meg.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Az Opciók párbeszédpanel fülei a $pagemenu menüben is elérhetők.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A $pagemenu menüben található még a '''Megtekintés jobbról balra''' gomb, valamint a '''Keresés és csere''' gomb, utóbbi egy párbeszédpanelt nyit meg, ahová karaktereket, szavakat vagy reguláris kifejezéseket gépelhetsz be, melyekre rá szeretnél keresni a szövegben, és a kívánt kifejezésekkel helyettesíteni őket. A párbeszédpanelen beállítási lehetőségeket is találsz.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A '''forrásszöveg szerkesztése''' gomb a ''$save''' gomb mellett helyezkedik el (a ceruza ikonra kattintva gördül le). Segítségével a wiki-jelölőnyelvet használó szerkesztőre válthatsz.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Változtatások közzététele ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Mikor a szerkesztéssel elkészültél, akkor kattints a kék &quot;{{int|publishchanges}}&quot; gombra az eszköztáron. Ha nem változtattál semmin, akkor a gomb le lesz tiltva (szürke lesz). Ha nem akarod elmenteni a változtatásokat, zárd be a böngészőablakot, vagy kattints az &quot;{{int|vector-view-view}}&quot; fülre a szerkesztőfelület felett.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A kék „{{int|publishchanges-start}}” gomb megnyit egy párbeszédpanelt. Ide beírhatod egy rövid összefoglalóban, hogy mit változtattál a lapon, bejelölheted, hogy ez apró változtatás-e és felveheted a lapot a figyelőlistádra. Az összefoglaló doboza azonos a wikiszöveg-szerkesztő {{int|summary}} mezőjével.&lt;/span&gt;

Még egyszer áttekintheted változtatásaidat a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; gombbal, hogy meggyőződj a lap mentése előtt arról, hogy minden úgy néz ki, ahogy szeretnéd. Ez hasonló a wikiszöveg-szerkesztő &quot;{{int|showdiff}}&quot; gombjához.

A &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}&quot; gombbal (X) visszatérhetsz a szerkesztett oldalra mentés nélkül. Később elmentheted a változtatásaidat.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Hivatkozások szerkesztése ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Hivatkozásokat az eszköztáron lévő &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; ikonnal (láncszemek egy láncban) is hozzáadhatsz, vagy a {{key press|Ctrl|K}} billentyűkombináció használatával (Mac-en: {{Key press|Command|K}}).

Ha kijelölsz egy szövegrészt és megnyomod a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; gombot, a kijelölt szöveget fogja felhasználni a hivatkozáshoz. Ha csak egyetlen szóra szeretnél hivatkozást készíteni, kijelölheted a szót, vagy elhelyezheted benne a kurzort.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Mikor használod a gombot, vagy a shortcutot, akkor egy párbeszédpanel fog megnyílni, melybe beírhatod a linket.
Az eszköz megpróbálja majd megkeresni a lehetséges '''belső hivatkozást''' a begépelt szöveg alapján és valószínűsíthető egyezéseket ajánl fel.
Ha már egyszer begépeltél, vagy kiválasztottál egy linket, akkor az {{key press|Enter}} gomb lenyomásával vagy a panel &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; gombjának megnyomásával befejezheted a folyamatot. A hivatkozás rögtön megjelenik a VisualEditor lapon, de a teljes lap közzétételéig ennek a közzététele sem történik meg.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Külső weboldalra szóló hivatkozáshoz a folyamat hasonló: Válaszd a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}&quot; fület, majd írd be az URL-t a dobozba.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| A címke nélküli külső hivatkozások így néznek ki: [http://peldaurl.hu]. Úgy hozhatod létre, ha a szavakon kívül (például egy szóköz után) helyezed el a kurzort. Nyomd meg a Hivatkozás gombot vagy használd a billentyűkombinációt a párbeszédablak megnyitásához. Írd be az URL-t a rubrikába és nyomd meg a the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; gombot a hivatkozás elhelyezéséhez.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Már létező hivatkozás megváltoztatásához vagy törléséhez kattints a hivatkozást alkotó szövegre, majd nyomd meg a mellette megjelenő &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; ikont. Egy párbeszédpanel jelenik meg a szerkesztéshez. A párbeszédpanelt a {{key press|Ctrl|K}} billentyűkombinációval is elérheted. Ha egy hivatkozás ki van választva, kék kerettel jelenik meg.

A párbeszédpanelen ezután megváltoztathatod a hivatkozás célját. A hivatkozást a panel jobb felső sarkában található &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; gombbal törölheted.
Meg is nyithatod hivatkozást egy új ablakban, ha a helyi menüben a hivatkozásra kattintasz. (Ez azért kellhet például, hogy ellenőrizd, hogy jó-e egy adott külső hivatkozás.)

Ha ki akarsz lépni a hivatkozás szerkesztéséből, és folytatni akarod a szerkesztést a hivatkozás utáni szövegen, akkor nyomd meg a {{Key press|→}} gombot:
* Egyszer megnyomva kilép a hivatkozás szerkesztéséből és a kurzort a hivatkozás után helyezi.
* Másodszor megnyomva a kurzort a hivatkozás után helyezi és lehetővé teszi további szöveg beírását.

A hivatkozás címkéjének szerkesztéséhez kattints a címkébe és írd be a kívánt szöveget.
Ugyanakkor, ha a teljes címkét le szeretnéd cserélni, vedd figyelembe az alábbiakat:

* Ha kijelölted a teljes hivatkozáscímkét, a hivatkozás bármely billentyű megnyomásával törölhető.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ha a hivatkozást szeretnéd megtartani, kattints bele a címkébe, és a delete vagy backspace gombok segítségével kitörölheted a címkét, a kék kereten belül maradva.&lt;/span&gt; Most már begépelheted az új címkét.
* Hivatkozást létrehozhatsz többek között [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|kategóriákra, fájlokra is]].
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Hivatkozások szerkesztése ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Segítség a hivatkozássablonok használatához]] vagy [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Segítség a citoid {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} gombjának használatához]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
==== A te nyelvi változatodban használt rendszer meghatározása ===
|-
| A wikidben az alábbi három forráshivatkozás-rendszer egyikét használják. A jobb oldali kép által illusztrált a legegyszerűbb verzió, ahol a &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; (Cite) menüben nincsenek hivatkozássablonok. Ha a wikid ezt a rendszert használja, akkor minden, amit tudnod kell a forráshivatkozásokról, ezen az oldalon található.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| A második rendszer ugyanezt a  &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; (Cite) menüt használja, de népszerű sablonokkal kiegészítve a gyorsabb elérésért. Ha a wikid ezt a rendszert használja, a {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}} oldalon találsz hozzá leírást.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A harmadik rendszerben a Forrás gombot kell először megnyomni.&lt;/span&gt; Megjelenik egy párbeszédablak, ahol automatikusan lehet forráshivatkozást létrehozni a citoid segítségével. Ha a wikid ezt a rendszert használja, a {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}} oldalon találsz hozzá részletes leírást.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Egy létező hivatkozás szerkesztése ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit an existing reference, press on it where it appears in the text (usually as a bracketed number). You will see either a &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}&quot; icon (bookmark) or an icon (and name) for the template that was used to create this reference. In either case, pressing on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; button will open a dialog where you can edit the reference.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For the &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}&quot; icon, pressing &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; opens the reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.&lt;/span&gt;

Számos wiki használ sablonokat a forráshivatkozások formázására. Ha a kurzort a forráshivatkozásra mozgatod, a mező összes információja ki lesz emelve.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a template was used and you press on the reference information, then the {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} icon (puzzle piece) will appear with some information. Press on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; button to edit the content of the template in the template mini-editor dialog.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If what appears when you press on a reference is an icon for a standard template for citations (an example is at right), then pressing &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; will open the template mini-editor dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Inside the template mini-editor, you can add or remove types of information or change current content. Only fields (template parameters) that have content will show, initially. To add fields, press on &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; at the bottom of the mini-editor.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Kattints a „{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}” feliratra, ha végeztél. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Létező hivatkozások újrafelhasználása ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the page already contains a citation that applies to the text you want to source, then you can choose to re-use that existing citation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ahhoz, hogy egy létező hivatkozást újra fel tudj használni, vidd az egeret oda, ahová a hivatkozást be akarod illeszteni és kattints a ''Hivatkozás'' ikonra az Eszköztárban.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a &quot;{{int|citoid-citoiddialog-mode-reuse}}&quot; tab, in a dialog, instead of a &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-useexisting-tool}}&quot; item on the &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; menu.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ha több hivatkozás is rendelkezésre áll, akkor használd a keresőt (melyet a &quot;Mit szeretnél hivatkoztatni?&quot; címke mutat), hogy csak olyan találatokat kapj, amely az adott szöveggel megegyezik. Keresd meg a szükséges hivatkozást és válaszd ki a megfelelőt.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Új hivatkozás hozzáadása ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ahhoz, hogy új hivatkozást tudj hozzáadni, helyezd a kurzort oda, ahová a hivatkozást tenni szeretnéd, majd kattints a ''Hivatkozások'' gombra az Eszköztárban.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using the &quot;Basic&quot; citation&lt;/span&gt; ====
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shown here is what you will see if you select the basic references item.&lt;/span&gt;  &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A hivatkozásszerkesztőben hozzáadhatod, szerkesztheted és formázhatod a hivatkozás szövegét.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Akár egy egész adott csoportnak is hivatkozást készíthetsz, ezt arra lehet felhasználni, hogy megmutassuk az összetartozó csoportokat a ''Hivatkozások listája'' eszközzel.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ha új hivatkozást adsz egy sablonhoz és azt akarod, hogy az tartalmazza is azt, akkor kattints a Beillesztés ikonra az eszköztárban, vagy a hivatkozászerkesztőben.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Eztán nézd meg azt a sablont, amelyet használni akarsz, add hozzá a hivatkozást és szerkeszd át, úgy, mint egy már létező hivatkozás esetén.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Kattints a ''Változtatások alkalmazása'' felirattal lehet váltani a referenciák szerkesztése és a lap normál nézete között.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ha még nincs hivatkozások listája az adott lapon (például te adod hozzá az első hivatkozást), akkor szükséged lesz arra, hogy hozzá legyen rendelve ahhoz a szöveghez, amelyet te hivatkozással akarsz ellátni.

Vidd a kurzort oda, ahol a hivatkozások listáját meg akarod jeleníteni (általában a lap alja), nyisd meg a „{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}” menüt és kattints a „{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}” ikonra (három könyv) a hozzáadáshoz.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ha hivatkozások csoportját szerkeszted, határozd meg ezt a párbeszédpanelen, hogy elkülönülten jelenjenek meg a hivatkozások, melyek összetartoznak.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The final step in the References list dialog is to press &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using standard cite templates&lt;/span&gt; ====
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your local wiki may have added extra citation templates to the &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; menu. If so, you have quick access to the most-used citation templates for your wiki.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Instructions for adding extra citation templates to your local wiki are available at {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Pressing on a template icon such as &quot;Cite book&quot; will take you into the template mini-editor for that template. Important information fields may be marked with an asterisk. While the most common fields will be shown, not all of them are required.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add more parameters, scroll down in the template mini-editor and press on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press on &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; when you are done.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Képek és egyéb médiafájlok szerkesztése ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Képek szerkesztése ===
|-
| Új kép (vagy egyéb médiafájl) hozzáadásához az oldalon kattints a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; ikonra a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menüben. A kép a kurzornál lesz beszúrva.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Kattints a „{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}” ikonra, amely megnyit egy párbeszédpanelt, amely automatikusan végigböngészi a Wikimedia Commons-t és a helyi wikit olyan fájlok után kutatva, melyeknek valamilyen kapcsolata van az általad szerkesztett oldal címével.

További médiaállományokat tekinthetsz meg, ha átírod a keresőmezőben a szöveget.

Kattints a kis képre, a fájl kiválasztásához.

Berakja a képet a szerkesztett oldalra.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A média párbeszédpanel lehetővé teszi számodra, hogy hozzáírj, vagy szerkeszd a már meglévő képaláírást, amelyet formázhatsz és linkelhetsz is.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also set various parameters for the image in the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot; window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Mikor készen vagy, kattints erre: ''{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}'', hogy bezárd a párbeszédpanelt és visszatérj az oldal szerkesztéséhez.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; icon that appears below the picture.&lt;/span&gt;

Meglévő kép méretének módosításához kattints a képre, majd a kétfejű nyílra a sarkoknál.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Uploading images&lt;/span&gt; ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Upload&quot; tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing media galleries&lt;/span&gt; ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a new gallery, press the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; icon (a set of photos) on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)&lt;/span&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.&lt;/span&gt; A lista szerkeszthető.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you press the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing templates&lt;/span&gt; ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The powerful MediaWiki template system lets you insert dynamic content, text from other pages, and much more. For a detailed explanation and examples, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Templates help page]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the VisualEditor you can search for a relevant template, add an invocation or [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusion]] on the page you’re editing and, if needed, add custom content using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameters]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert new template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Új sablon hozzáadásához vidd a kurzort oda, ahová a sablont tenni akarod, majd kattints erre az ikonra az eszköztárban ($insert): $template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then open the {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} menu and select &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, type two curly brackets {{((}} to open the same dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also edit a template that’s already on a page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you select the template you want to edit, it turns blue, and a box appears displaying &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then select the &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; link  or double click on the template itself to open the template.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the visual editor, such hidden templates are still shown so that you can click and edit or delete them.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon and both will be grayed out.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Sablon paraméterek ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You’ll see this dialog box when you’re adding a new template or editing one already in place.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What you see in the box depends on whether the template in question contains {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, helpful metadata added by other editors to make it easier to edit templates in the Visual Editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When a template contains TemplateData, the VisualEditor can use it to present annotated fields for you to fill in.
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For templates that have some community-provided TemplateData, the VisualEditor displays a list of the named parameters and, often, descriptions and instructions explaining the meaning and required format for each parameter’s values.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Adding undocumented parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter: “1”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter’s value: “en_US”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter: “2”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter’s value: “yes”&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Autogenerated parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completing your edit ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Mikor készen vagy a sablon szerkesztésével, kattints erre: {{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}, hogy bezárd a párbeszédpanelt és visszatérj az oldal szerkesztéséhez.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing on mobile ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Helyettesítő sablonok ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

== Listák szerkesztése ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation;  use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is the result of increased indentation.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Táblázatok szerkesztése ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use the visual editor to insert and change tables.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you press on &quot;Table&quot;, in the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now the &quot;Table&quot; menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To select a cell, press it once.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| Hozzáadhatsz, törölhetsz vagy áthelyezhetsz oszlopokat vagy sorokat.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on &quot;Merge cells&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also split cells that were previously merged.  All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Kategóriák szerkesztése ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit categories, on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; menu, press the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; item.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| A {{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}} gombra kattintva megnyílik egy párbeszédpanel, ahol a már létező kategóriák lesznek felsorolva, ehhez hozzáadhatsz újabbakat, vagy törölhetsz meglévőket.

Létezik egy opció arra, hogy konfiguráld a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|választókulcsot]] a kategóriák oldalának listázásához.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, the default sorting key for the article &quot;George Washington&quot; is &quot;Washington, George&quot;. In the category &quot;Presidents of the United States&quot;, the article is listed under the letter &quot;W&quot;, not the letter &quot;G&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ahhoz, hogy új kategóriát adhass hozzá, gépeld be a nevét az {{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}} részbe. Kiválaszthatsz innen egy már létező kategóriát, vagy újabbat is adhatsz hozzá. (amíg a kategória nincs létrehozva, a link piros lesz).&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Kategória eltávolításához kattints rá majd a megjelenő párbeszédpanelen a szemetes ikonra (&quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot;).

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Kattints a ''{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}'' feliratra, ha végeztél a kategóriák szerkesztésével és térj vissza az oldal szerkesztőjébe.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Oldalbeállítások szerkesztése ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit a page's settings, press to open the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; menu, in the toolbar, and select the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; button.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; button opens a dialog that shows several options.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot; checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot;, which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing maps&lt;/span&gt; ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Matematikai képlet szerkesztése ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; icon (&quot;Σ&quot;) in the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menu on the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; button.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the &quot;Σ&quot; icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Kották szerkesztése ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then, from the &quot;Insert&quot; menu on the toolbar, press the &quot;Musical notation&quot; option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will open the &quot;Musical notation&quot; dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you are finished, press the &quot;Done&quot; button to close the dialog and publish your changes.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Versek és egyéb speciális tételek szerkesztése ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| A VisualEditor néhány elemet (például rendezett listák és versek) még nem támogat.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| A legtöbb esetben a meglévő tételek módosíthatók, de újakat nem tudsz beszúrni.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Switching between the visual and wikitext editors&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; button on the far right of the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on &quot;Discard changes&quot;, you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scroll down, and you'll see the wikitext editing area.&lt;/span&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
Az eszköztár jobb szélén lévő ceruza ikonnal válthatsz a vizuális és a wikiszöveges szerkesztő között.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Billentyű-kombinációk ==

Számos szerkesztő a szöveget dőlt, vastag betűvel és wikilinkkel együtt gépeli be. A [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|billentyű-kombinációk]] funkció lehetővé teszi a gyors formázást anélkül, hogy az eszköztárat kellene használni. Itt van néhány gyakori gyorsbillentyű a Visual Editorban:

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! PC shortcut
! Művelet
! Mac shortcut
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Félkövér betű
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Dőlt betű
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Hivatkozás beillesztése
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Kivágás
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Másolás
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Beillesztés
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Visszavonás
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>r0aqpcsmjrmawlpmigw9ip25c6mltu8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/gl</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>144733</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402418</id>
      <parentid>4983805</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:56:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7123" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lea '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Avise dun problema''' co editor visual].
|-
| Descubra como crear ligazóns, engadir ou trasladar imaxes, crear citas, inserir modelos, editar táboas e máis.
|Inclúa o seu '''navegador web, sistema operativo e aparencia de Wikipedia''' (usualmente Vector, ás veces Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Acerca do editor visual ==

O Editor visual é unha maneira &quot;visual&quot; de editar a Wikipedia. Historicamente a edición da Wikipedia requería que a xente aprendera a sintaxe wiki, unha linguaxe de etiquetas demasiada complexa, mesmo para efectuar pequenas modificacións nunha páxina. En 2001, isto era aceptable; en 2013, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|afasta colaboradores]]. Esperamos que o Editor Visual sexa útil para os colaboradores xa existentes e máis acolledor para os novos. 

O Editor visual leva dispoñible como versión &quot;alfa&quot; en MediaWiki.org dende mediados do 2012 e opcional na Wikipedia en inglés dende decembro do 2012, en máis de 14 idiomas máis dende abril de 2013, e dende xuño na maioría dos idiomas. A xullo de 2015, está dispoñible por defecto para os editores rexistrados e os non rexistrados en máis do 75% das Wikipedias.
Esperamos que estea dispoñible de forma predeterminada para a maioría das [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|linguas restantes]] para fins de 2015.
Desde finais de novembro de 2014, tamén está dispoñible como unha [[Beta Features|funcionalidade beta]] de inclusión voluntaria en todas as wikis da WMF excepto Wikcionario e Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Estamos lanzando [[VisualEditor/changelog|actualizacións regulares de estado]] en Mediawiki.org, e un  [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|xornal multiidioma]], centrado nas wikis da WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Usando o editor visual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se ten interese en utilizar o editor visual, temos unha [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guía de uso]], así como unha [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|lista dos atallos de teclado comúns]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Polo de agora, o editor visual ten numerosos erros; isto é inevitable. Se atopa algún problema ou erro, non dubide en [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar na páxina de comentarios]]. Tamén hai algunhas áreas nas que aínda temos que construír por completo novas ferramentas. As limitacións actuais inclúen:

* '''Moito tempo de carga:''' Leva algún tempo cargar algunhas páxinas longas e complexas no editor visual. No futuro, o software será máis rápido e permitirá cargar páxinas máis grandes.
* '''Edición incompleta:''' Algúns elementos de formato &quot;complexo&quot; hanse mostrar e han permitir a edición dos seus contidos, pero non deixarán aos usuarios editar a súa estrutura ou engadir novas entradas (como nas listas de definición). A adición de características nesta área é unha das nosas prioridades.
* '''Só artigos, non as páxinas de conversa:''' O editor visual só está dispoñible nalgúns espazos de nomes. Na maioría das Wikipedias, o Editor visual pode ser usado nas páxinas de artigos, Usuario:, Ficheiro:, Axuda: e Categoría:. Non está dispoñible para as páxinas Wikipedia: ou as páxinas de conversa.

Debido a estas limitacións e aos erros inevitables, recomendamos que os usuarios preman en &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antes de gardar a páxina; ademais, pedimos que [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informe de calquera problema que atope]].

== Como axudar ==

Para que o editor visual sexa todo o bo que pode ser, hai moitas cousas coas que necesitamos axuda. Obviamente, unha área importante é utilizar o software, atopar erros e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar deles]], pero hai moitas outras tarefas. Entre elas:

* '''Actualizar as páxinas de axuda:''' Todos os nosos proxectos teñen páxinas de axuda para facer máis fáciles as contribucións aos novos usuarios. Por desgraza, están todas construídas en base ao editor de texto wiki e, co lanzamento do Editor Visual, as capturas de pantalla e as guías quedarán todas obsoletas. Sería de moita axuda se a xente puidera [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|actualizar as páxinas de axuda]], baseándose no [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|noso titorial de uso do Editor Visual]].
* '''Engadir TemplateData aos modelos:''' O editor visual conta cun editor de modelos, que está descrito detalladamente na nosa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|páxina de axuda]]. Como verá se o emprega na Wikipedia, algúns modelos teñen parámetros con nome e descrición que fan máis doado o seu uso. Outros, non. Isto é porque os modelos necesitan &quot;TemplateData&quot; para que esta característica poida funcionar. Se ten interese en engadir TemplateData, temos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|unha guía cos pasos a seguir]], xunto a unha [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|lista dos modelos máis importantes nos que engadir TemplateData]].
* '''Axuda á túa comunidade'''- Revisa a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista de formas útiles de axudar á súa comunidade local]] para optimizar a experiencia de edición co Editor visual.
* '''Axudar aos novos usuarios:''' Se o lanzamento do editor visual ten éxito, teremos máis novos usuarios dos que estamos afeitos a ter, e aínda que a edición poida ser máis sinxela, determinar o xeito de interactuar coa comunidade seguirá sendo difícil. Por favor pase un tempo no [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|portal de axuda ou na canle de axuda IRC]] para axudar a que os novos usuarios se habitúen á Wikipedia.

==Véxase tamén==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - unha lista para marcar sobre optimizar a experiencia de edición para a súa wiki e os seus compañeiros editores.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - conseguir e ofrecer axuda sobre tarefas relacionadas co editor visual, de e para outros wikipedistas como vostede.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - unha primeira guía para comunidades totalmente descoñecedoras do editor visual.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>nz992sfkvyfatryzf4au5u2nt9q03w0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403008</id>
      <parentid>5402418</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7163" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lea '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Avise dun problema''' co editor visual].
|-
| Descubra como crear ligazóns, engadir ou trasladar imaxes, crear citas, inserir modelos, editar táboas e máis.
|Inclúa o seu '''navegador web, sistema operativo e aparencia de Wikipedia''' (usualmente Vector, ás veces Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Acerca do editor visual ==

O Editor visual é unha maneira &quot;visual&quot; de editar a Wikipedia. Historicamente a edición da Wikipedia requería que a xente aprendera a sintaxe wiki, unha linguaxe de etiquetas demasiada complexa, mesmo para efectuar pequenas modificacións nunha páxina. En 2001, isto era aceptable; en 2013, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|afasta colaboradores]]. Esperamos que o Editor Visual sexa útil para os colaboradores xa existentes e máis acolledor para os novos. 

O Editor visual leva dispoñible como versión &quot;alfa&quot; en MediaWiki.org dende mediados do 2012 e opcional na Wikipedia en inglés dende decembro do 2012, en máis de 14 idiomas máis dende abril de 2013, e dende xuño na maioría dos idiomas. A xullo de 2015, está dispoñible por defecto para os editores rexistrados e os non rexistrados en máis do 75% das Wikipedias.
Esperamos que estea dispoñible de forma predeterminada para a maioría das [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|linguas restantes]] para fins de 2015.
Desde finais de novembro de 2014, tamén está dispoñible como unha [[Beta Features|funcionalidade beta]] de inclusión voluntaria en todas as wikis da WMF excepto Wikcionario e Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Estamos lanzando [[VisualEditor/changelog|actualizacións regulares de estado]] en Mediawiki.org, e un  [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|xornal multiidioma]], centrado nas wikis da WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Usando o editor visual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se ten interese en utilizar o editor visual, temos unha [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guía de uso]], así como unha [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|lista dos atallos de teclado comúns]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Polo de agora, o editor visual ten numerosos erros; isto é inevitable. Se atopa algún problema ou erro, non dubide en [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar na páxina de comentarios]]. Tamén hai algunhas áreas nas que aínda temos que construír por completo novas ferramentas. As limitacións actuais inclúen:

* '''Moito tempo de carga:''' Leva algún tempo cargar algunhas páxinas longas e complexas no editor visual. No futuro, o software será máis rápido e permitirá cargar páxinas máis grandes.
* '''Edición incompleta:''' Algúns elementos de formato &quot;complexo&quot; hanse mostrar e han permitir a edición dos seus contidos, pero non deixarán aos usuarios editar a súa estrutura ou engadir novas entradas (como nas listas de definición). A adición de características nesta área é unha das nosas prioridades.
* '''Só artigos, non as páxinas de conversa:''' O editor visual só está dispoñible nalgúns espazos de nomes. Na maioría das Wikipedias, o Editor visual pode ser usado nas páxinas de artigos, Usuario:, Ficheiro:, Axuda: e Categoría:. Non está dispoñible para as páxinas Wikipedia: ou as páxinas de conversa.

Debido a estas limitacións e aos erros inevitables, recomendamos que os usuarios preman en &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antes de gardar a páxina; ademais, pedimos que [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informe de calquera problema que atope]].

== Como axudar ==

Para que o editor visual sexa todo o bo que pode ser, hai moitas cousas coas que necesitamos axuda. Obviamente, unha área importante é utilizar o software, atopar erros e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar deles]], pero hai moitas outras tarefas. Entre elas:

* '''Actualizar as páxinas de axuda:''' Todos os nosos proxectos teñen páxinas de axuda para facer máis fáciles as contribucións aos novos usuarios. Por desgraza, están todas construídas en base ao editor de texto wiki e, co lanzamento do Editor Visual, as capturas de pantalla e as guías quedarán todas obsoletas. Sería de moita axuda se a xente puidera [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|actualizar as páxinas de axuda]], baseándose no [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|noso titorial de uso do Editor Visual]].
* '''Engadir TemplateData aos modelos:''' O editor visual conta cun editor de modelos, que está descrito detalladamente na nosa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|páxina de axuda]]. Como verá se o emprega na Wikipedia, algúns modelos teñen parámetros con nome e descrición que fan máis doado o seu uso. Outros, non. Isto é porque os modelos necesitan &quot;TemplateData&quot; para que esta característica poida funcionar. Se ten interese en engadir TemplateData, temos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|unha guía cos pasos a seguir]], xunto a unha [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|lista dos modelos máis importantes nos que engadir TemplateData]].
* '''Axuda á túa comunidade'''- Revisa a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista de formas útiles de axudar á súa comunidade local]] para optimizar a experiencia de edición co Editor visual.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Axudar aos novos usuarios:''' Se o lanzamento do editor visual ten éxito, teremos máis novos usuarios dos que estamos afeitos a ter, e aínda que a edición poida ser máis sinxela, determinar o xeito de interactuar coa comunidade seguirá sendo difícil. Por favor pase un tempo no [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|portal de axuda ou na canle de axuda IRC]] para axudar a que os novos usuarios se habitúen á Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Véxase tamén==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - unha lista para marcar sobre optimizar a experiencia de edición para a súa wiki e os seus compañeiros editores.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - conseguir e ofrecer axuda sobre tarefas relacionadas co editor visual, de e para outros wikipedistas como vostede.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - unha primeira guía para comunidades totalmente descoñecedoras do editor visual.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>00xoo1epaipcy4gx8h2onmjtrvq8k73</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403057</id>
      <parentid>5403008</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:01:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7123" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lea '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Avise dun problema''' co editor visual].
|-
| Descubra como crear ligazóns, engadir ou trasladar imaxes, crear citas, inserir modelos, editar táboas e máis.
|Inclúa o seu '''navegador web, sistema operativo e aparencia de Wikipedia''' (usualmente Vector, ás veces Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Acerca do editor visual ==

O Editor visual é unha maneira &quot;visual&quot; de editar a Wikipedia. Historicamente a edición da Wikipedia requería que a xente aprendera a sintaxe wiki, unha linguaxe de etiquetas demasiada complexa, mesmo para efectuar pequenas modificacións nunha páxina. En 2001, isto era aceptable; en 2013, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|afasta colaboradores]]. Esperamos que o Editor Visual sexa útil para os colaboradores xa existentes e máis acolledor para os novos. 

O Editor visual leva dispoñible como versión &quot;alfa&quot; en MediaWiki.org dende mediados do 2012 e opcional na Wikipedia en inglés dende decembro do 2012, en máis de 14 idiomas máis dende abril de 2013, e dende xuño na maioría dos idiomas. A xullo de 2015, está dispoñible por defecto para os editores rexistrados e os non rexistrados en máis do 75% das Wikipedias.
Esperamos que estea dispoñible de forma predeterminada para a maioría das [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|linguas restantes]] para fins de 2015.
Desde finais de novembro de 2014, tamén está dispoñible como unha [[Beta Features|funcionalidade beta]] de inclusión voluntaria en todas as wikis da WMF excepto Wikcionario e Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Estamos lanzando [[VisualEditor/changelog|actualizacións regulares de estado]] en Mediawiki.org, e un  [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|xornal multiidioma]], centrado nas wikis da WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Usando o editor visual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se ten interese en utilizar o editor visual, temos unha [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guía de uso]], así como unha [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|lista dos atallos de teclado comúns]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Polo de agora, o editor visual ten numerosos erros; isto é inevitable. Se atopa algún problema ou erro, non dubide en [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar na páxina de comentarios]]. Tamén hai algunhas áreas nas que aínda temos que construír por completo novas ferramentas. As limitacións actuais inclúen:

* '''Moito tempo de carga:''' Leva algún tempo cargar algunhas páxinas longas e complexas no editor visual. No futuro, o software será máis rápido e permitirá cargar páxinas máis grandes.
* '''Edición incompleta:''' Algúns elementos de formato &quot;complexo&quot; hanse mostrar e han permitir a edición dos seus contidos, pero non deixarán aos usuarios editar a súa estrutura ou engadir novas entradas (como nas listas de definición). A adición de características nesta área é unha das nosas prioridades.
* '''Só artigos, non as páxinas de conversa:''' O editor visual só está dispoñible nalgúns espazos de nomes. Na maioría das Wikipedias, o Editor visual pode ser usado nas páxinas de artigos, Usuario:, Ficheiro:, Axuda: e Categoría:. Non está dispoñible para as páxinas Wikipedia: ou as páxinas de conversa.

Debido a estas limitacións e aos erros inevitables, recomendamos que os usuarios preman en &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antes de gardar a páxina; ademais, pedimos que [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informe de calquera problema que atope]].

== Como axudar ==

Para que o editor visual sexa todo o bo que pode ser, hai moitas cousas coas que necesitamos axuda. Obviamente, unha área importante é utilizar o software, atopar erros e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar deles]], pero hai moitas outras tarefas. Entre elas:

* '''Actualizar as páxinas de axuda:''' Todos os nosos proxectos teñen páxinas de axuda para facer máis fáciles as contribucións aos novos usuarios. Por desgraza, están todas construídas en base ao editor de texto wiki e, co lanzamento do Editor Visual, as capturas de pantalla e as guías quedarán todas obsoletas. Sería de moita axuda se a xente puidera [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|actualizar as páxinas de axuda]], baseándose no [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|noso titorial de uso do Editor Visual]].
* '''Engadir TemplateData aos modelos:''' O editor visual conta cun editor de modelos, que está descrito detalladamente na nosa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|páxina de axuda]]. Como verá se o emprega na Wikipedia, algúns modelos teñen parámetros con nome e descrición que fan máis doado o seu uso. Outros, non. Isto é porque os modelos necesitan &quot;TemplateData&quot; para que esta característica poida funcionar. Se ten interese en engadir TemplateData, temos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|unha guía cos pasos a seguir]], xunto a unha [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|lista dos modelos máis importantes nos que engadir TemplateData]].
* '''Axuda á túa comunidade'''- Revisa a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista de formas útiles de axudar á súa comunidade local]] para optimizar a experiencia de edición co Editor visual.
* '''Axudar aos novos usuarios:''' Se o lanzamento do editor visual ten éxito, teremos máis novos usuarios dos que estamos afeitos a ter, e aínda que a edición poida ser máis sinxela, determinar o xeito de interactuar coa comunidade seguirá sendo difícil. Por favor pase un tempo no [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|portal de axuda ou na canle de axuda IRC]] para axudar a que os novos usuarios se habitúen á Wikipedia.

==Véxase tamén==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - unha lista para marcar sobre optimizar a experiencia de edición para a súa wiki e os seus compañeiros editores.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - conseguir e ofrecer axuda sobre tarefas relacionadas co editor visual, de e para outros wikipedistas como vostede.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - unha primeira guía para comunidades totalmente descoñecedoras do editor visual.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>nz992sfkvyfatryzf4au5u2nt9q03w0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403221</id>
      <parentid>5403057</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:55:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7141" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lea '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Avise dun problema''' co editor visual].
|-
| Descubra como crear ligazóns, engadir ou trasladar imaxes, crear citas, inserir modelos, editar táboas e máis.
|Inclúa o seu '''navegador web, sistema operativo e aparencia de Wikipedia''' (usualmente Vector, ás veces Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Acerca do editor visual ==

O Editor visual é unha maneira &quot;visual&quot; de editar a Wikipedia. Historicamente a edición da Wikipedia requería que a xente aprendera a sintaxe wiki, unha linguaxe de etiquetas demasiada complexa, mesmo para efectuar pequenas modificacións nunha páxina. En 2001, isto era aceptable; en 2013, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|afasta colaboradores]]. Esperamos que o Editor Visual sexa útil para os colaboradores xa existentes e máis acolledor para os novos. 

O Editor visual leva dispoñible como versión &quot;alfa&quot; en MediaWiki.org dende mediados do 2012 e opcional na Wikipedia en inglés dende decembro do 2012, en máis de 14 idiomas máis dende abril de 2013, e dende xuño na maioría dos idiomas. A xullo de 2015, está dispoñible por defecto para os editores rexistrados e os non rexistrados en máis do 75% das Wikipedias.
Esperamos que estea dispoñible de forma predeterminada para a maioría das [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|linguas restantes]] para fins de 2015.
Desde finais de novembro de 2014, tamén está dispoñible como unha [[Beta Features|funcionalidade beta]] de inclusión voluntaria en todas as wikis da WMF excepto Wikcionario e Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Estamos lanzando [[VisualEditor/changelog|actualizacións regulares de estado]] en Mediawiki.org, e un  [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|xornal multiidioma]], centrado nas wikis da WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Usando o editor visual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se ten interese en utilizar o editor visual, temos unha [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guía de uso]], así como unha [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|lista dos atallos de teclado comúns]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Polo de agora, o editor visual ten numerosos erros; isto é inevitable. Se atopa algún problema ou erro, non dubide en [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar na páxina de comentarios]]. Tamén hai algunhas áreas nas que aínda temos que construír por completo novas ferramentas. As limitacións actuais inclúen:

* '''Moito tempo de carga:''' Leva algún tempo cargar algunhas páxinas longas e complexas no editor visual. No futuro, o software será máis rápido e permitirá cargar páxinas máis grandes.
* '''Edición incompleta:''' Algúns elementos de formato &quot;complexo&quot; hanse mostrar e han permitir a edición dos seus contidos, pero non deixarán aos usuarios editar a súa estrutura ou engadir novas entradas (como nas listas de definición). A adición de características nesta área é unha das nosas prioridades.
* '''Só artigos, non as páxinas de conversa:''' O editor visual só está dispoñible nalgúns espazos de nomes. Na maioría das Wikipedias, o Editor visual pode ser usado nas páxinas de artigos, Usuario:, Ficheiro:, Axuda: e Categoría:. Non está dispoñible para as páxinas Wikipedia: ou as páxinas de conversa.

Debido a estas limitacións e aos erros inevitables, recomendamos que os usuarios preman en &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antes de gardar a páxina; ademais, pedimos que [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informe de calquera problema que atope]].

== Como axudar ==

Para que o editor visual sexa todo o bo que pode ser, hai moitas cousas coas que necesitamos axuda. Obviamente, unha área importante é utilizar o software, atopar erros e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar deles]], pero hai moitas outras tarefas. Entre elas:

* '''Actualizar as páxinas de axuda:''' Todos os nosos proxectos teñen páxinas de axuda para facer máis fáciles as contribucións aos novos usuarios. Por desgraza, están todas construídas en base ao editor de texto wiki e, co lanzamento do Editor Visual, as capturas de pantalla e as guías quedarán todas obsoletas. Sería de moita axuda se a xente puidera [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|actualizar as páxinas de axuda]], baseándose no [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|noso titorial de uso do Editor Visual]].
* '''Engadir TemplateData aos modelos:''' O editor visual conta cun editor de modelos, que está descrito detalladamente na nosa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|páxina de axuda]]. Como verá se o emprega na Wikipedia, algúns modelos teñen parámetros con nome e descrición que fan máis doado o seu uso. Outros, non. Isto é porque os modelos necesitan &quot;TemplateData&quot; para que esta característica poida funcionar. Se ten interese en engadir TemplateData, temos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|unha guía cos pasos a seguir]], xunto a unha [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|lista dos modelos máis importantes nos que engadir TemplateData]].
* '''Axuda á túa comunidade'''- Revisa a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista de formas útiles de axudar á súa comunidade local]] para optimizar a experiencia de edición co Editor visual.
* '''Axudar aos novos usuarios:''' Se o lanzamento do editor visual ten éxito, teremos máis novos usuarios dos que estamos afeitos a ter, e aínda que a edición poida ser máis sinxela, determinar o xeito de interactuar coa comunidade seguirá sendo difícil. Por favor pase un tempo no [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|portal de axuda ou na canle de axuda IRC]] para axudar a que os novos usuarios se habitúen á Wikipedia.

==Véxase tamén==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - unha lista para marcar sobre optimizar a experiencia de edición para a súa wiki e os seus compañeiros editores.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - conseguir e ofrecer axuda sobre tarefas relacionadas co editor visual, de e para outros wikipedistas como vostede.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - unha primeira guía para comunidades totalmente descoñecedoras do editor visual.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>0zz5je6sa9bh4x3ns53p15mdqq5gcvg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/gl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>144780</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403220</id>
      <parentid>1802981</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:55:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="571" xml:space="preserve">* '''Engadir TemplateData aos modelos:''' O editor visual conta cun editor de modelos, que está descrito detalladamente na nosa [[$ug|páxina de axuda]]. Como verá se o emprega na Wikipedia, algúns modelos teñen parámetros con nome e descrición que fan máis doado o seu uso. Outros, non. Isto é porque os modelos necesitan &quot;TemplateData&quot; para que esta característica poida funcionar. Se ten interese en engadir TemplateData, temos [[$td-tutor|unha guía cos pasos a seguir]], xunto a unha [[$td|lista dos modelos máis importantes nos que engadir TemplateData]].</text>
      <sha1>2q7vn6ub355xduogcfqyt12t2yp1wqu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/gl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>144781</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403056</id>
      <parentid>1802985</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:01:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="400" xml:space="preserve">* '''Axudar aos novos usuarios:''' Se o lanzamento do editor visual ten éxito, teremos máis novos usuarios dos que estamos afeitos a ter, e aínda que a edición poida ser máis sinxela, determinar o xeito de interactuar coa comunidade seguirá sendo difícil. Por favor pase un tempo no [[$1|portal de axuda ou na canle de axuda IRC]] para axudar a que os novos usuarios se habitúen á Wikipedia.</text>
      <sha1>pd7zo0rzs6llct94d9zdt65mx0dmv4h</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/ka</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>145315</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402421</id>
      <parentid>4983849</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:58:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10823" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | წაიკითხეთ '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} ვიზუალური რედაქტორის '''პრობლემის შეტყობინება'''].
|-
| გაიგეთ, თუ როგორ უნდა შექმნათ ბმული, სურათების დამატება და წაშლა, ციტატების შექმნა, თარგების შექმნა, ცხრილების რედაქტირება და სხვ.
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== ვიზუალური რედაქტორის შესახებ ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
ვიზუალური რედაქტორი წარმოადგენს ვიკიპედიის რედაქტირების „ვიზუალურ“ ხელსაწყოს, თავისი არსით ის არის რედაქტირების ახალი სისტემა, რომელიც საშუალებას გვაძლევს რედაქტირება განვახორციელოთ  ვიკი-მონიშვნის გარეშე. ის „ალფა“ ვერსიის სახით ხელმისაწვდომი იყო ინგლისური ვიკიპედიისათვის 2012 წლის დეკემბრიდან, [$blog-april სხვა 16 განყოფილებისათვის 2013 წლის აპრილიდან] და [$blog-june თითქმის ყველა განყოფილებისათვის] ივნისის დასაწყისიდან. როგორც [[$ve-why|ნაჩვენებია ქვემოთ]], ჩვენ ვგეგმავთ, რომ ივლისის ბოლოსათვის ის ხელმისაწვდომი იყოს თითქმის ყველა განყოფილებისათვის, რომელიც დავიწყეთ 1 ივლისს ინგლისური ვიკიპედიით.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

== ვიზუალური რედაქტორის გამოყენება ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

თუ თქვენ დაინტერესდით ვიზუალური რედაქტორით, ჩვენ გვაქვს მისი  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|სახელმძღვანელო]], ისევე როგორც [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|სწრაფი ღილაკების სია]].

ვიზუალურ რედაქტორს ამჟამად გარკვეული პრობლემები და შეზღუდვები გააჩნია. თუ გაქვთ რაიმე გამოსავალი, გთხოვთ, ნუ დაყოვნდებით და [[VisualEditor/Feedback|გამოგაზავნეთ უკუკავშირი]]. ამჟამინდელი შეზღუდვები მოიცავს:

* '''ნელი ჩატვირთვა''' — დიდი და რთული გვერდების ჩატვირთვას  ვიზუალურ რედაქტორში დიდი დრო სჭირდება. სამომავლოდ, პროგრამული უზრუნველყოფა გაუმჯობესდება და დიდი გვერდების სწრაფი ჩატვირთვაც შესაძლებელი გახდება.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Incomplete editing''' — Some elements of complex formatting will display and let you edit their contents, but will not let users edit their structure or add new entries – such as definition lists. Adding features in this area is one of our priorities.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''გვერდების უმეტესობის შინაარსი, გარდა განხილვის გვერდებისა''' — ვიზუალური რედაქტორი (VisualEditor) ხელმისაწვდომია ზოგიერთი სახელების სივრცისთვის. ვიკიპედიების უმეტესობაში, ვიზუალური რედაქტორი შეიძლება გამოყენებულ იქნას სტატიებში, მომხმარებელი:, ფაილი:, დახმარება: და კატეგორია: გვერდებზე. ამჟამად ვიზუალური რედაქტორი ხელმისაწვდომი არ არის ვიკიპედიაში: ნებისმიერი განხილვის გვერდებისთვის.

მანამ, სანამ შეინახავთ გვერდს, ჩვენ გირჩევთ დააჭიროთ &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}-ს&quot; და  [[VisualEditor/Feedback|შეგვატყობინოთ ნებისმიერი პრობლემის შემთხვევაში]].

== რით შემიძლია დახმარება ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For VisualEditor to be as good as it can be, there are a lot of things we need help with. Obviously, one big area is using the software, finding bugs and [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reporting them]], but there are many other tasks as well. These include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Updating help pages''' — All of our projects have help pages to make it easier for new users to contribute. Unfortunately they are all built around the markup editor, and as VisualEditor evolves, the screenshots and tutorials will all become outdated. It would be very useful if people could  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]], based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Adding TemplateData to templates''' — VisualEditor features a nice template editor, which is described in more detail on our [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|help page]]. As you'll see if you use it on Wikipedia, some templates have named parameters and nice descriptions that make it easy to use. Others do not. This is because templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; before this feature will work. If you're interested in adding TemplateData, we have [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]], along with a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help new users''' — If the VisualEditor launch is successful, we will have a lot more new users than we are used to, and even though editing may be easier, working out how to interact with the community will still be hard. Please spend some time [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]], to help these newcomers become acclimatized to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

== იხილეთ აგრეთვე ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>6iyk4epxxs0jiuxrje5sdwlnatt66v0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/hu</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>145776</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402420</id>
      <parentid>4983783</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:57:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9624" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== A VisualEditorról ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A VisualEditor egy &quot;vizuális&quot; lehetőség a wikipédia szerkesztésére, amely egy új rendszert takar, ami lehetővé teszi az emberek számára, hogy közreműködjenek a projektben a wiki jelölőnyelv megtanulása nélkül is. 2012 decemberétől úgy nevezett &quot;alfa&quot; verzióban érhető el a visualEditor az angol Wikipédián. 2013 áprilisától pedig további 16 nyelvi változatban, illetve 2013 júniusától pedig szinte valamennyi nyelvi változatban elérhető a VisualEditor. Amint a lenti táblázat is mutatja, várhatóan 2013 július végére közel minden nyelvi változatban elérhetővé válik a VisualEditor, kezdve július elsején az angol Wikipédiával.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Jelenleg számos kisebb hibája van még a VisualEditornak, de ez elkerülhetetlen. Ha felfedeztél egy hibát, akkor kérjük jelezd azt [[VisualEditor/Feedback|a VisualEditor Visszajelzések oldalán]]. Vannak még olyan területek a szoftverben, ahol további funkciókat kell beépíteni. A jelenlegi korlátozások:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
&quot;Lassú betöltés&quot; - Hosszabb időt is igénybe vehet az oldalak betöltése a Visual Editorral. A jövőben a szoftver jóval gyorsabban fog majd működni, ezért gyorsabban is fogja a kért oldalakat betölteni.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
&quot;Befejezetlen szerkesztés&quot; -Néhány bonyolultabb elem a szövegformázáskor meg fog jelenni és lehetővé teszi, hogy szerkeszd tartalmukat, de nem teszi lehetővé, hogy a felhasználók megváltoztassák felépítésüket, vagy újabb részekkel bővítsék azokat, mint például a táblázatokat és a leíró listákat. Ehhez a területhez a további funkciók hozzáadása egyike kiemelt feladatainknak, amin dolgozunk.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''Cikkek és Felhasználói oldalak kizárólag''' -A VisualEditor csak névtérbeli és felhasználói névtérbeli szerkesztésekhez használható. Idővel megalkotjuk azokat a speciális eszközöket majd, amelyek a nem szócikk névtérbeli szerkesztésekhez szükségesek, de jelenleg a cikkek szerkeszthetőségén van a hangsúly.
&lt;/div&gt;

Ezen korlátozások miatt és az elkerülhetetlen hibák okán azt tanácsoljuk, hogy kattintsatok a VisualEditor-párbeszédek mentése-címke-áttekintés (&quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; ) oldalra, mielőtt elmentenétek egy oldalt és a VisualEditor/Visszajelzések|bármilyen probléma jelentése ([[VisualEditor/Feedback|report any problems they encounter]])oldalon jeleznétek a felmerülő problémákat felénk.

== Hogyan segíthetsz ==

Bár a VisualEditor nagyjából jó úgy, ahogy van, de még számos teendő van hátra. Nyilvánvaló, hogy a szoftvernek a használata ezek közül az egyik legnagyobb részt alkotja, és a hibák fellelése és jelentése a VisualEditor/Visszajelzések/hibák jelentése oldalon ([[VisualEditor/Feedback|reporting them]]), ugyanakkor még ezenkívül számos egyéb feladat is van. Ezek például:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''Támogatás oldalainak frissítése''' -Minden projektünknél fontos, hogy legyen egy Segítség oldal, ahol az újonnan csatlakozó szerkesztők segítséget kaphatnak a szerkesztések elkezdéséhez. Sajnos ezek a jelölőnyelv szerkesztőre vannak kihegyezve, ezért amikor mi elindítjuk a VisualEditort, akkor a képernyőképek és oktatási anyagok idejétmúlttá válnak. Nagyon hasznos lenne, ha az emberek frissíteni tudnák időben a támogató oldalakat ([[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]]), melyekhez a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/Segítség:VisualEditor/Felhasználói útmutató|Hogyan használd a visualEditort ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using the VisualEditor]]) oldalon találnak segítséget.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''Sablonadatok hozzáadása a sablonokhoz''' -A VisualEditorral jól lehet sablonokat szerkeszteni, melyek jóval részletesebben vannak körülírva a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/Segítség:VisualEditor/Felhasználói útmutató|Segítség ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|help page]]) oldalon. Amint látod a Wikipédián néhány sablon megnevezett paraméterekkel rendelkezik és remek leírásaik vannak, amellyel könnyű őket használni. Másoknál ez nem így van. Ez azért van, mert a sablonokhoz meg kell adni a sablonadatokat is, mielőtt a funkciójukat betöltenék. Ha érdekelt vagy abban, hogy a sablonadatok meg legyenek adva, akkor ott van a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/VisualEditor/Portál/SablonAdatok ismertető|milyen teendők vannak még ([[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]]) oldalunk, vagy a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/VisualEditor/Portál/SablonAdatok|legfontosabb hiányzó sablonok listája ([[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]]) oldal.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''Segítség új felhasználóknak'''-Ha a VisualEditor indítása sikeresen fog lezajlani, akkor számtalan új felhasználónk lesz, akik jóval könnyebben tudnak majd közreműködni, bár a közösséggel való együttműködés továbbra sem lesz egyszerű. Kérlek szánj rá időt, hogy meglátogasd a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/VisualEditor/Portál/Új felhasználók|segítség, vagy az IRC segítség csatornáját ([[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]]), hogy segítsd te is az új jövevények beilleszkedését a Wikipédia közösségébe.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>2xqrfbfzy5sykkvwvmsdydvg8be9sbc</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403149</id>
      <parentid>5402420</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:38:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9584" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== A VisualEditorról ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A VisualEditor egy &quot;vizuális&quot; lehetőség a wikipédia szerkesztésére, amely egy új rendszert takar, ami lehetővé teszi az emberek számára, hogy közreműködjenek a projektben a wiki jelölőnyelv megtanulása nélkül is. 2012 decemberétől úgy nevezett &quot;alfa&quot; verzióban érhető el a visualEditor az angol Wikipédián. 2013 áprilisától pedig további 16 nyelvi változatban, illetve 2013 júniusától pedig szinte valamennyi nyelvi változatban elérhető a VisualEditor. Amint a lenti táblázat is mutatja, várhatóan 2013 július végére közel minden nyelvi változatban elérhetővé válik a VisualEditor, kezdve július elsején az angol Wikipédiával.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Jelenleg számos kisebb hibája van még a VisualEditornak, de ez elkerülhetetlen. Ha felfedeztél egy hibát, akkor kérjük jelezd azt [[VisualEditor/Feedback|a VisualEditor Visszajelzések oldalán]]. Vannak még olyan területek a szoftverben, ahol további funkciókat kell beépíteni. A jelenlegi korlátozások:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
&quot;Lassú betöltés&quot; - Hosszabb időt is igénybe vehet az oldalak betöltése a Visual Editorral. A jövőben a szoftver jóval gyorsabban fog majd működni, ezért gyorsabban is fogja a kért oldalakat betölteni.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
&quot;Befejezetlen szerkesztés&quot; -Néhány bonyolultabb elem a szövegformázáskor meg fog jelenni és lehetővé teszi, hogy szerkeszd tartalmukat, de nem teszi lehetővé, hogy a felhasználók megváltoztassák felépítésüket, vagy újabb részekkel bővítsék azokat, mint például a táblázatokat és a leíró listákat. Ehhez a területhez a további funkciók hozzáadása egyike kiemelt feladatainknak, amin dolgozunk.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''Cikkek és Felhasználói oldalak kizárólag''' -A VisualEditor csak névtérbeli és felhasználói névtérbeli szerkesztésekhez használható. Idővel megalkotjuk azokat a speciális eszközöket majd, amelyek a nem szócikk névtérbeli szerkesztésekhez szükségesek, de jelenleg a cikkek szerkeszthetőségén van a hangsúly.
&lt;/div&gt;

Ezen korlátozások miatt és az elkerülhetetlen hibák okán azt tanácsoljuk, hogy kattintsatok a VisualEditor-párbeszédek mentése-címke-áttekintés (&quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; ) oldalra, mielőtt elmentenétek egy oldalt és a VisualEditor/Visszajelzések|bármilyen probléma jelentése ([[VisualEditor/Feedback|report any problems they encounter]])oldalon jeleznétek a felmerülő problémákat felénk.

== Hogyan segíthetsz ==

Bár a VisualEditor nagyjából jó úgy, ahogy van, de még számos teendő van hátra. Nyilvánvaló, hogy a szoftvernek a használata ezek közül az egyik legnagyobb részt alkotja, és a hibák fellelése és jelentése a VisualEditor/Visszajelzések/hibák jelentése oldalon ([[VisualEditor/Feedback|reporting them]]), ugyanakkor még ezenkívül számos egyéb feladat is van. Ezek például:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''Támogatás oldalainak frissítése''' -Minden projektünknél fontos, hogy legyen egy Segítség oldal, ahol az újonnan csatlakozó szerkesztők segítséget kaphatnak a szerkesztések elkezdéséhez. Sajnos ezek a jelölőnyelv szerkesztőre vannak kihegyezve, ezért amikor mi elindítjuk a VisualEditort, akkor a képernyőképek és oktatási anyagok idejétmúlttá válnak. Nagyon hasznos lenne, ha az emberek frissíteni tudnák időben a támogató oldalakat ([[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]]), melyekhez a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/Segítség:VisualEditor/Felhasználói útmutató|Hogyan használd a visualEditort ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using the VisualEditor]]) oldalon találnak segítséget.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''Sablonadatok hozzáadása a sablonokhoz''' -A VisualEditorral jól lehet sablonokat szerkeszteni, melyek jóval részletesebben vannak körülírva a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/Segítség:VisualEditor/Felhasználói útmutató|Segítség ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|help page]]) oldalon. Amint látod a Wikipédián néhány sablon megnevezett paraméterekkel rendelkezik és remek leírásaik vannak, amellyel könnyű őket használni. Másoknál ez nem így van. Ez azért van, mert a sablonokhoz meg kell adni a sablonadatokat is, mielőtt a funkciójukat betöltenék. Ha érdekelt vagy abban, hogy a sablonadatok meg legyenek adva, akkor ott van a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/VisualEditor/Portál/SablonAdatok ismertető|milyen teendők vannak még ([[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]]) oldalunk, vagy a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/VisualEditor/Portál/SablonAdatok|legfontosabb hiányzó sablonok listája ([[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]]) oldal.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
'''Segítség új felhasználóknak'''-Ha a VisualEditor indítása sikeresen fog lezajlani, akkor számtalan új felhasználónk lesz, akik jóval könnyebben tudnak majd közreműködni, bár a közösséggel való együttműködés továbbra sem lesz egyszerű. Kérlek szánj rá időt, hogy meglátogasd a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/VisualEditor/Portál/Új felhasználók|segítség, vagy az IRC segítség csatornáját ([[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]]), hogy segítsd te is az új jövevények beilleszkedését a Wikipédia közösségébe.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>nf6i5robf5ialdksput2jr5djjoaqdc</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403227</id>
      <parentid>5403149</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:58:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9562" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== A VisualEditorról ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A VisualEditor egy &quot;vizuális&quot; lehetőség a wikipédia szerkesztésére, amely egy új rendszert takar, ami lehetővé teszi az emberek számára, hogy közreműködjenek a projektben a wiki jelölőnyelv megtanulása nélkül is. 2012 decemberétől úgy nevezett &quot;alfa&quot; verzióban érhető el a visualEditor az angol Wikipédián. 2013 áprilisától pedig további 16 nyelvi változatban, illetve 2013 júniusától pedig szinte valamennyi nyelvi változatban elérhető a VisualEditor. Amint a lenti táblázat is mutatja, várhatóan 2013 július végére közel minden nyelvi változatban elérhetővé válik a VisualEditor, kezdve július elsején az angol Wikipédiával.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Jelenleg számos kisebb hibája van még a VisualEditornak, de ez elkerülhetetlen. Ha felfedeztél egy hibát, akkor kérjük jelezd azt [[VisualEditor/Feedback|a VisualEditor Visszajelzések oldalán]]. Vannak még olyan területek a szoftverben, ahol további funkciókat kell beépíteni. A jelenlegi korlátozások:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
&quot;Lassú betöltés&quot; - Hosszabb időt is igénybe vehet az oldalak betöltése a Visual Editorral. A jövőben a szoftver jóval gyorsabban fog majd működni, ezért gyorsabban is fogja a kért oldalakat betölteni.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
&quot;Befejezetlen szerkesztés&quot; -Néhány bonyolultabb elem a szövegformázáskor meg fog jelenni és lehetővé teszi, hogy szerkeszd tartalmukat, de nem teszi lehetővé, hogy a felhasználók megváltoztassák felépítésüket, vagy újabb részekkel bővítsék azokat, mint például a táblázatokat és a leíró listákat. Ehhez a területhez a további funkciók hozzáadása egyike kiemelt feladatainknak, amin dolgozunk.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''Cikkek és Felhasználói oldalak kizárólag''' -A VisualEditor csak névtérbeli és felhasználói névtérbeli szerkesztésekhez használható. Idővel megalkotjuk azokat a speciális eszközöket majd, amelyek a nem szócikk névtérbeli szerkesztésekhez szükségesek, de jelenleg a cikkek szerkeszthetőségén van a hangsúly.
&lt;/div&gt;

Ezen korlátozások miatt és az elkerülhetetlen hibák okán azt tanácsoljuk, hogy kattintsatok a VisualEditor-párbeszédek mentése-címke-áttekintés (&quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; ) oldalra, mielőtt elmentenétek egy oldalt és a VisualEditor/Visszajelzések|bármilyen probléma jelentése ([[VisualEditor/Feedback|report any problems they encounter]])oldalon jeleznétek a felmerülő problémákat felénk.

== Hogyan segíthetsz ==

Bár a VisualEditor nagyjából jó úgy, ahogy van, de még számos teendő van hátra. Nyilvánvaló, hogy a szoftvernek a használata ezek közül az egyik legnagyobb részt alkotja, és a hibák fellelése és jelentése a VisualEditor/Visszajelzések/hibák jelentése oldalon ([[VisualEditor/Feedback|reporting them]]), ugyanakkor még ezenkívül számos egyéb feladat is van. Ezek például:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''Támogatás oldalainak frissítése''' -Minden projektünknél fontos, hogy legyen egy Segítség oldal, ahol az újonnan csatlakozó szerkesztők segítséget kaphatnak a szerkesztések elkezdéséhez. Sajnos ezek a jelölőnyelv szerkesztőre vannak kihegyezve, ezért amikor mi elindítjuk a VisualEditort, akkor a képernyőképek és oktatási anyagok idejétmúlttá válnak. Nagyon hasznos lenne, ha az emberek frissíteni tudnák időben a támogató oldalakat ([[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]]), melyekhez a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/Segítség:VisualEditor/Felhasználói útmutató|Hogyan használd a visualEditort ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using the VisualEditor]]) oldalon találnak segítséget.
&lt;/div&gt;
'''Sablonadatok hozzáadása a sablonokhoz''' -A VisualEditorral jól lehet sablonokat szerkeszteni, melyek jóval részletesebben vannak körülírva a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/Segítség:VisualEditor/Felhasználói útmutató|Segítség ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|help page]]) oldalon. Amint látod a Wikipédián néhány sablon megnevezett paraméterekkel rendelkezik és remek leírásaik vannak, amellyel könnyű őket használni. Másoknál ez nem így van. Ez azért van, mert a sablonokhoz meg kell adni a sablonadatokat is, mielőtt a funkciójukat betöltenék. Ha érdekelt vagy abban, hogy a sablonadatok meg legyenek adva, akkor ott van a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/VisualEditor/Portál/SablonAdatok ismertető|milyen teendők vannak még ([[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]]) oldalunk, vagy a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/VisualEditor/Portál/SablonAdatok|legfontosabb hiányzó sablonok listája ([[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]]) oldal.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
'''Segítség új felhasználóknak'''-Ha a VisualEditor indítása sikeresen fog lezajlani, akkor számtalan új felhasználónk lesz, akik jóval könnyebben tudnak majd közreműködni, bár a közösséggel való együttműködés továbbra sem lesz egyszerű. Kérlek szánj rá időt, hogy meglátogasd a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/VisualEditor/Portál/Új felhasználók|segítség, vagy az IRC segítség csatornáját ([[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]]), hogy segítsd te is az új jövevények beilleszkedését a Wikipédia közösségébe.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>n7t7xofjg21s73q9qta4bnl3rxmoi2t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Installing MediaWiki/es</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>145927</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402884</id>
      <parentid>5387495</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:42:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13592" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;MediaWiki puede ser difícil de instalar para un usuario promedio que no tiene experiencia con Apache, PHP y MySQL/MariaDB.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Descarga el software MediaWiki ==

Descarga el archivo comprimido de MediaWiki desde [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|la página oficial de descarga]].

Por lo general, si  estás utilizando un entorno de producción, querrás usar la versión estable más reciente, que es MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extract the MediaWiki software ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Los archivos descargados están en formato &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;, por lo que tendrás que descomprimirlos antes de usarlos.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to uncompress this archive file before use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Esto lo puedes hacer en local, y subir posteriormente los archivos por FTP, o bien directamente en el servidor.&lt;/span&gt;

En Windows puedes hacerlo con programas como [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (libre), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] o [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] (libre).

En Linux y Mac OS X puedes descomprimirlo usando este comando:
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

== Subir los archivos al servidor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Si aun no has subido los archivos al servidor web, este es el momento de hacerlo.
&lt;/div&gt;

Puedes subir los archivos al directorio web de tu servidor de una de estas formas:

# Copiando directamente la carpeta descomprimida o
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# Mediante un cliente FTP como [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (Software de código abierto, Windows, OSX y Linux) o [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (OSX).
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;by using software already provided by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting service]], such as the ''cPanel File Manager''&lt;/span&gt;

Si la herramienta que usas para subir los archivos tiene una opción &quot;Cambiar a minúsculas los nombres de archivos&quot;, debes desactivarla.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si has instalado Apache, el directorio correcto se especifica en el archivo &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; (es la directiva [$docroot DocumentRoot], que es normalmente $1 o {{$2|directorio-apache}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Nota: Esto cambió en Ubuntu 14.04 con Apache 2.4.7 donde el archivo principal de configuración de Apache y los directorios se encuentran en &lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

Cambia el nombre de la carpeta de la instalación de MediaWiki a lo que quieras que se vea en la URL del wiki.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si el servidor web se ejecuta como &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt; por ejemplo, cambiar el nombre al directorio por &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt; significa que podrás acceder al wiki usando &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not use &lt;code&gt;/wiki/&lt;/code&gt; if you want to set it up as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|Short URL]] after running the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script|installation script]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Crear una base de datos ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki te preguntará por un nombre para la base de datos y un nombre de usuario, y tratará de crearlos si no existen.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Si ya dispones de un servidor de base de datos y conoces la contraseña de root, el script de instalación de MediaWiki puede crear la nueva base de datos por ti.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Si no conoces la contraseña de root, por ejemplo si estás en un alojamiento compartido, ahora tendrás que crear una nueva base de datos.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;En la actualidad, debes utilizar SQLite, MariaDB/MySQL o PostgreSQL para almacenar el contenido del wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si no estás seguro sobre qué base de datos escoger, utiliza MariaDB la cual es la mejor soportada por MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;En la página de instalación, tendrás que elegir un nombre para la base de datos (que puede ser cualquier cosa) y el directorio de la base de datos SQLite.&lt;/span&gt;
Para el directorio de la base de datos, el instalador intentará utilizar un subdirectorio fuera de la raíz y crearlo si es necesario.
Si este directorio no es seguro (por ejemplo, es accesible desde la web), cámbialo manualmente para evitar que sea accesible por todo el mundo en la web.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Consulta la documentación correspondiente.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Como alternativa, contacta con tu proveedor de alojamiento para que ellos creen la cuenta de usuario por ti.&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Si tu base de datos no está en el mismo servidor que el servidor web, tendrás que otorgarle el nombre del servidor web de forma correcta (mediawiki.example.com en este ejemplo) de esta forma:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;MySQL/MariaDB en UNIX/Linux registra todas las consultas enviadas a la base de datos en un archivo, incluyendo la contraseña que usaste para crear la cuenta de usuario.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si esto te incomoda, borra el archivo &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt; después de ejecutar estas consultas:&lt;/span&gt;}}

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si utiliza Postgres, tendrá que o bien tienen una base de datos y el usuario creado para usted, o simplemente proporcionar el nombre de un usuario con privilegios de Postgres &quot;Superuser&quot; en el formulario de configuración.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A menudo, este es el usuario de base de datos llamado postgres.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, and a database named &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; owned by the user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser (ahora introduce la contraseña)
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

O superusuario (por defecto postgres) ejecutar los siguientes comandos en la base de datos del sistema:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ten en cuenta la [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|lista de problemas conocidos cuando uses MediaWiki con PostgreSQL]].

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== Ejecutar el script de instalación ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Una vez que todos los pasos anteriores se han completado, puedes completar la instalación a través de un navegador web, accediendo a la URI &lt;code&gt;index.php&lt;/code&gt; en el navegador. Consulte las instrucciones mencionadas en {{ll|Manual:Config script}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Pasos adicionales ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additional configuration&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wiki administration&lt;/span&gt;
== !Mantente al día! ==
Una vez esté instalado, ¡asegúrate de estar al día con las publicaciones de software, y mantén tu servidor seguro!
{{Clickable button 2|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[mail:mediawiki-announce|Suscríbete a nuestro boletín de anuncios en lista de correos.]]&lt;/span&gt;|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Appendices ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/span&gt;
:{{Note|1=Cuando crees la cuenta de root, recuerda la contraseña que introduzcas aquí.}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== System-specific instructions  ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The pages listed on {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First consult {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Vease también ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5sissmfp295623odj6qjxmq8hwywkpx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/ast</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>145957</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403201</id>
      <parentid>1802598</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:46:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="578" xml:space="preserve">* '''Amestar TemplateData a les plantíes''' — VisualEditor presenta un guapu editor de plantíes, que se describe más detalladamente na nuesa [[$ug|páxina d'ayuda]]. Como verá si lu usa na Wikipedia, delles plantíes tienen parámetros con nome y bones descripciones que faenles fáciles d'usar. Otres non. Esto ye porque les plantíes necesiten &quot;TemplateData&quot; enantes de que funcione esta carauterística. Si tien interés n'amestar TemplateData, tenemos [[$td-tutor|una guía pa facelo]], xunto con una [[$td|llista de les plantíes más importantes a les qu'amestalo]].</text>
      <sha1>e5xrjprdia0li7s78hjukscixm9ud83</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/ast</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>145961</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403034</id>
      <parentid>1802606</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="410" xml:space="preserve">* '''Ayudar a los usuarios nuevos''' — Si'l llanzamientu de VisualEditor tien éxitu, tendremos munchos más usuarios nuevos de lo que tamos avezaos - y anque editar pue ser más cenciello, descubrir cómo interactuar cola comunidá inda sera difícil. Por favor, intente pasar dalgún tiempu [[$1|nel serviciu d'ayuda, o na canal d'ayuda nel IRC]], p'ayudar a qu'estos principiantes s'aclimaten a Wikipedia.</text>
      <sha1>a1xj8c5lv62j0pp0cmv7fslz22nupkx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/hu</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>146043</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403226</id>
      <parentid>757263</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:58:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="960" xml:space="preserve">'''Sablonadatok hozzáadása a sablonokhoz''' -A VisualEditorral jól lehet sablonokat szerkeszteni, melyek jóval részletesebben vannak körülírva a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/Segítség:VisualEditor/Felhasználói útmutató|Segítség ([[$ug|help page]]) oldalon. Amint látod a Wikipédián néhány sablon megnevezett paraméterekkel rendelkezik és remek leírásaik vannak, amellyel könnyű őket használni. Másoknál ez nem így van. Ez azért van, mert a sablonokhoz meg kell adni a sablonadatokat is, mielőtt a funkciójukat betöltenék. Ha érdekelt vagy abban, hogy a sablonadatok meg legyenek adva, akkor ott van a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/VisualEditor/Portál/SablonAdatok ismertető|milyen teendők vannak még ([[$td-tutor|a guide to doing so]]) oldalunk, vagy a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/VisualEditor/Portál/SablonAdatok|legfontosabb hiányzó sablonok listája ([[$td|list of the most important templates to add it to]]) oldal.</text>
      <sha1>l7dsovkckxzxi6ydgg0kzjqe2xooifu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/hu</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>146044</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403148</id>
      <parentid>757265</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:38:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="570" xml:space="preserve">'''Segítség új felhasználóknak'''-Ha a VisualEditor indítása sikeresen fog lezajlani, akkor számtalan új felhasználónk lesz, akik jóval könnyebben tudnak majd közreműködni, bár a közösséggel való együttműködés továbbra sem lesz egyszerű. Kérlek szánj rá időt, hogy meglátogasd a Speciális lap:Saját nyelv/VisualEditor/Portál/Új felhasználók|segítség, vagy az IRC segítség csatornáját ([[$1|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]]), hogy segítsd te is az új jövevények beilleszkedését a Wikipédia közösségébe.</text>
      <sha1>2sdply2w7mvfphpfadiknfsxcie0yz8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/sk</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>146775</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402448</id>
      <parentid>5059350</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:05:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7450" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Vitajte na portále pre '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) je nový spôsob upravovania Wikipédie vyvíjaný nadáciou Wikimedia Foundation. Umožňuje ľuďom upravovať bez potreby naučiť sa wikijazyk. Dúfame, že pomôže podnieť ľuďom s prispievaním do Wikipédie.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Prečítajte si '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Nahláste problém''' s VisualEditorom].
|-
| Zistite ako vytvoriť odkazy, pridať alebo presunúť obrázky, vytvoriť citácie, vložiť šablóny, upravovať tabuľky a mnoho ďalších vecí.
|Prosím, zahrňte aj informácie o '''prehliadači, operačnom systéme a vzhľade Wikipédie''' (vo väčšine prípadov je to Vector, niekedy Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Čo je VisualEditor ==

VisualEditor je &quot;vizuálny&quot; spôsob úpravy Wikipédie. Upravovanie Wikipédie doteraz vyžadovalo, aby sa prispievateľ naučil wikijazyk, pomerne zložitý značkovací jazyk, aj kvôli malým zmenám v článku. V roku 2001 to bola prijateľná požiadavka. V roku 2015 to však [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|odrádza prispievateľov]]. Dúfame, že VisualEditor bude pre existujúcich prispievateľov užitočný a pre nových používateľov prívetivý. 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
Očakávame že bude dostupný pre všetky [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|zostávajúce jazyky]] do konca roka 2015.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Používanie VisualEditora ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Pokiaľ chcete na úpravy využívať VisualEditor, máme pre vás [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|príručku ako na to]] a takisto [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|zoznam bežných klávesových skratiek]].

VisualEditor má momentálne pár chýb a obmedzení. Pokiaľ sa stretnete s problémom, neváhajte ho [[VisualEditor/Feedback|nahlásiť na stránke spätnej väzby]]. Momentálne obmedzenia sú:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Slow to load''' — It will take some time for long, complex pages to load into VisualEditor. In the future the software will be a lot faster, and will allow for the loading of larger pages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Incomplete editing''' — Some elements of complex formatting will display and let you edit their contents, but will not let users edit their structure or add new entries – such as definition lists. Adding features in this area is one of our priorities.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Most content pages, not talk pages''' — VisualEditor is only enabled for some namespaces.  At most Wikipedias, VisualEditor can be used on articles, User:, File:, Help: and Category: pages.  VisualEditor is not currently available for Wikipedia: pages or any talk pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

Odporúčame používateľom aby pred uložením zmien klikli na tlačidlo &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; a [[VisualEditor/Feedback|nahlásili každý problém s ktorým sa stretnú]].

== Ako môžem pomôcť? ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For VisualEditor to be as good as it can be, there are a lot of things we need help with. Obviously, one big area is using the software, finding bugs and [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reporting them]], but there are many other tasks as well. These include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Updating help pages''' — All of our projects have help pages to make it easier for new users to contribute. Unfortunately they are all built around the markup editor, and as VisualEditor evolves, the screenshots and tutorials will all become outdated. It would be very useful if people could  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]], based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Adding TemplateData to templates''' — VisualEditor features a nice template editor, which is described in more detail on our [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|help page]]. As you'll see if you use it on Wikipedia, some templates have named parameters and nice descriptions that make it easy to use. Others do not. This is because templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; before this feature will work. If you're interested in adding TemplateData, we have [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]], along with a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help new users''' — If the VisualEditor launch is successful, we will have a lot more new users than we are used to, and even though editing may be easier, working out how to interact with the community will still be hard. Please spend some time [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]], to help these newcomers become acclimatized to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Pozrite si taktiež==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>37lxbm14tdfx1g03v6dv1yh9y3hebpz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/el</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>148669</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402405</id>
      <parentid>4347040</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:50:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8124" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Καλωσήλθατε στην Πύλη για τον '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]''', έναν νέο τρόπο επεξεργασίας της Βικιπαίδειας που αναπτύσσεται από το Ίδρυμα Wikimedia. Επιτρέπει στους ανθρώπους να επεξεργάζονται χωρίς να πρέπει να μάθουν τη γλώσσα σήμανσης wiki. Ελπίζουμε ότι θα ενθαρρύνει τους ανθρώπους να συνεισφέρουν στη Βικιπαίδεια.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Σχετικά με τον VisualEditor ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor is a &quot;visual&quot; way of editing Wikipedia. Editing Wikipedia has historically required people to learn wiki markup, a fairly complex markup language, even to make tiny changes to a page. In 2001, this was acceptable; in 2015, it is [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|driving contributors away]]. We hope that VisualEditor will be useful to existing contributors and more welcoming to new users.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Χρησιμοποιώντας τον VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor has some current bugs and limitations. If you encounter an issue, please do not hesitate to [[VisualEditor/Feedback|report it on the Feedback page]]. Current limitations include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Slow to load''' — It will take some time for long, complex pages to load into VisualEditor. In the future the software will be a lot faster, and will allow for the loading of larger pages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Incomplete editing''' — Some elements of complex formatting will display and let you edit their contents, but will not let users edit their structure or add new entries – such as definition lists. Adding features in this area is one of our priorities.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Most content pages, not talk pages''' — VisualEditor is only enabled for some namespaces.  At most Wikipedias, VisualEditor can be used on articles, User:, File:, Help: and Category: pages.  VisualEditor is not currently available for Wikipedia: pages or any talk pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We recommend that users click &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; before saving the page and [[VisualEditor/Feedback|report any problems they encounter]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Πώς να βοηθήσετε ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For VisualEditor to be as good as it can be, there are a lot of things we need help with. Obviously, one big area is using the software, finding bugs and [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reporting them]], but there are many other tasks as well. These include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Updating help pages''' — All of our projects have help pages to make it easier for new users to contribute. Unfortunately they are all built around the markup editor, and as VisualEditor evolves, the screenshots and tutorials will all become outdated. It would be very useful if people could  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]], based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Adding TemplateData to templates''' — VisualEditor features a nice template editor, which is described in more detail on our [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|help page]]. As you'll see if you use it on Wikipedia, some templates have named parameters and nice descriptions that make it easy to use. Others do not. This is because templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; before this feature will work. If you're interested in adding TemplateData, we have [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]], along with a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help new users''' — If the VisualEditor launch is successful, we will have a lot more new users than we are used to, and even though editing may be easier, working out how to interact with the community will still be hard. Please spend some time [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]], to help these newcomers become acclimatized to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>78571cf0e0he58e7e97kfm8auo6hm8q</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/el</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>148672</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402404</id>
      <parentid>1761790</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:50:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="546" xml:space="preserve">Καλωσήλθατε στην Πύλη για τον '''[[$ve|VisualEditor]]''', έναν νέο τρόπο επεξεργασίας της Βικιπαίδειας που αναπτύσσεται από το Ίδρυμα Wikimedia. Επιτρέπει στους ανθρώπους να επεξεργάζονται χωρίς να πρέπει να μάθουν τη γλώσσα σήμανσης wiki. Ελπίζουμε ότι θα ενθαρρύνει τους ανθρώπους να συνεισφέρουν στη Βικιπαίδεια.</text>
      <sha1>efof78y5gu1uo5m398wan4by99hqn3a</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>148832</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403295</id>
      <parentid>4738547</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:15:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="183" xml:space="preserve">Certaines de ces notifications ne sont pas activées par défaut ou ne sont pas disponibles sur votre wiki. Vous pouvez les activer (ou les désactiver) dans vos [[$1|préférences]].</text>
      <sha1>0ou4w7xdtfij76zepe329sjy667duei</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>149093</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403307</id>
      <parentid>3483301</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:17:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="217" xml:space="preserve">Algumas destas notificações estarão desativadas por padrão ou indisponíveis na sua wiki. Se preferir ativar alguma destas notificações (ou desativá-la), poderá fazê-lo [[$1|na sua página de preferências]].</text>
      <sha1>k9du2bgnceg1phcvzoxyls8vqaw3kmx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/sl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>149287</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403185</id>
      <parentid>1803486</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:43:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="380" xml:space="preserve">* '''Pomoč novim uporabnikom''' — Če bo zagon VisualEditorja uspešen, bomo pridobili večje število novih uporabnikov - in čeprav urejanje izgleda lažje, bo način kako komunicirati s skupnostjo še vedno težek. Prosimo, preživite nekaj časa [[$1|na strani podpore uporabnikom ali na IRC kanalu pomoči]] in na ta način pomagate tem novincem navajati se na Wikipedijo.</text>
      <sha1>8e5t2wmrn8z3emghub3ag5ei6xcog2m</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/hy</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>149302</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402428</id>
      <parentid>4983806</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:00:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8772" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Բարի գալուստ '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի]]''' պորտալ: ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը (ՎԽ) Վիքիպեդիան խմբագրելու նոր գործիք է, որը ստեղծվել է Վիքիմեդիա Հիմնադրամի կողմից: Այն ստեղծվել է խմբագրումը էլ ավելի հեշտացնելու նպատակով: Հույսով ենք, որ այս նորարարությունը կօգնի մարդկանց և կնպաստի Վիքիպեդիայի զարգացմանը:

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Կարդացեք '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''ը:
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Հայտնել խնդիր''' ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի հետ].
|-
| Իմացեք, թե ինչպես են ստեղծում հղումներ, ավելացնում կամ տեղափոխում նկարներ ու ծանոթագրություններ, ներդնում և խմբագրում աղյուսակներ և այլն:
|Խնդրում ենք, ավելացրեք ձեր '''վեբդիտարկիչը, համակարգչի օպերացիոն համակարգը և Վիքիպեդիայում գրանցման թեման''' (հաճախ Vector, երբեմն` Monobook):
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի մասին ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը Վիքիպեդիան խմբագրելու «վիզուալ» գործիք է: Վիքիպեդիան խմբագրելու համար մասնակիցները պետք է սովորեին վիքիլեզու: Հույսով ենք, որ ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը օգտակար կլինի արդեն գրանցված մասնակիցների համար և, մասնավորապես` նորեկների:
&lt;/div&gt; 

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը հասանելի է MediaWiki.org կայքում 2012 թվականի կեսերից, անգլերեն վիքիպեդիայում` 2012 թվականի դեկտեմբերից, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 այլ լեզուներում` 2013 թվականի ապրիլից] և [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ գրեթե բոլոր այլ լեզուներում]` 2013 թվականի հունիսից:
Հույսով ենք, որ մինչև 2015 թվականի վերջն այն հասանելի կլինի նաև [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|մնացած այլ լեզուներով]]:
2014 թվականի նոյեմբերի վերջից այն հասանելի է Վիքիմեդիա Հիմնադրամի բոլոր վիքինախագծերի համար (բացի Վիքիբառարանից և Վիքիդարանից):

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Մենք թողարկում ենք մեր [[VisualEditor/changelog|թարմացումները]] Mediawiki.org կայքում և ունենք [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|նորությունների բազմալեզու պարբերական]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

== ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի օգտագործում ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Եթե հետաքրքրված եք ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչով, կարող եք այցելել [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Մասնակցի ուղեցույց]], ինչպես նաև [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|ստեղնաշարի արագ օգտագործման ստեղների]] էջերը:
&lt;/div&gt;

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչն այժմ ունի որոշ սահմանափակումներ և խնդիրներ:Եթե որևէ խնդիր եք նկատում, [[VisualEditor/Feedback|թողեք մեկնաբանություն]]: Ներկա սահմանափակումներն են.

* '''Էջերի դանդաղ բացում'''

Բարդ և մեծ էջերը ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի համար բացվում են դանդաղ: Մոտ ապագայում արագությունը անկասկած մեծանալու է:
* '''Չավարտված խմբագրում'''

Բարդ ձևավորումների պարամետրեր կերևան և դուք կարող եք խմբագրել նրանց բովանդակությունը, սակայն չեք կարողանա փոփոխել նրանց ձևը:
* '''Հատուկ էջերի սահմանափակումներ'''

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը գործում է միայն հատուկ անվանատարածքների համար: Շատ Վիքիպեդիաներում այն աշխատում է հոդվածների, Մասնակից:, Պատկեր:, Օգնություն: և Կատեգորիա: էջերում: ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը չի աշխատում Վիքիպեդիա: և քննարկման էջերում:

Մենք առաջարկում ենք մասնակիցներին, որ էջը հիշելուց առաջ սեղմեն «{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}» և [[VisualEditor/Feedback|թողնեն մեկնաբանություն]], եթե որևէ խնդիր են նկատում:

== Ինչպե՞ս գլուխ հանել ==

Որպեսզի ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը դառնա ավելի օգտակար, անհրաժեշտ է այն հաճախ օգտագործել, գտնել թերությունները, [[VisualEditor/Feedback|թողնել մեկնաբանություններ]], ինչպես նաև անել շատ այլ բաներ: Դրանցից են.

* '''Օգնության էջերի թարմացում''' 

Յուրաքանչյուր ծրագիր ունի իր օգնության էջը, որպեսզի նոր մասնակիցների համար հեշտացնի ծրագրի օգտագործումը: Շատ օգտակար կլիներ, որ մասնակիցները [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|թարմացնեն ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի օգնության էջը]]` հիմնվելով [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի մասնակցի ուղեցույցի]] վրա:
* '''ԿաղապարիՏվյալի ավելացում կաղապարներին'''

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը պարունակում է կաղապարները հեշտ խմբագրելու գործիք: Որպեսզի նրա աշխատանքն էլ ավելի օգտակար լինի, այն պետք է կաղապարի մասին տեղեկություն հավաքի: Մասնավորապես` այն կարիք ունի իմանալու կաղապարի հնարավոր պարամետրերն ու նրանց բովանդակությունները: Սրա մասին տեղեկություններ ստանալու համար այցելեք
[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|օգնության]] և [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|ԿաղապարիՏվյալի]] էջերը:
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Օգնիր քո համայնքին''' 

Տես [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|Օգտակար եղանակներ քո համայնքին օգնելու համար]] էջը, որտեղ ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը առաջարկվում է որպես փորձնական դիտարկիչ:
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Օգնիր նոր մասնակիցներին'''

ՎիզուալԽմբարիչով աշխատանքը ավելի պարզ է և մատչելի: Խնդրում ենք` որոշ ժամանակ անցկացրեք [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|նոր խմբագիրների]] հետ, որպեսզի նրանց սովորեցնեք խմբագրման տարրական կանոնները:

==Տես նաև==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>0iezvb96z109semg3ef2r0iqpafobho</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403011</id>
      <parentid>5402428</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8812" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Բարի գալուստ '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի]]''' պորտալ: ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը (ՎԽ) Վիքիպեդիան խմբագրելու նոր գործիք է, որը ստեղծվել է Վիքիմեդիա Հիմնադրամի կողմից: Այն ստեղծվել է խմբագրումը էլ ավելի հեշտացնելու նպատակով: Հույսով ենք, որ այս նորարարությունը կօգնի մարդկանց և կնպաստի Վիքիպեդիայի զարգացմանը:

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Կարդացեք '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''ը:
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Հայտնել խնդիր''' ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի հետ].
|-
| Իմացեք, թե ինչպես են ստեղծում հղումներ, ավելացնում կամ տեղափոխում նկարներ ու ծանոթագրություններ, ներդնում և խմբագրում աղյուսակներ և այլն:
|Խնդրում ենք, ավելացրեք ձեր '''վեբդիտարկիչը, համակարգչի օպերացիոն համակարգը և Վիքիպեդիայում գրանցման թեման''' (հաճախ Vector, երբեմն` Monobook):
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի մասին ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը Վիքիպեդիան խմբագրելու «վիզուալ» գործիք է: Վիքիպեդիան խմբագրելու համար մասնակիցները պետք է սովորեին վիքիլեզու: Հույսով ենք, որ ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը օգտակար կլինի արդեն գրանցված մասնակիցների համար և, մասնավորապես` նորեկների:
&lt;/div&gt; 

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը հասանելի է MediaWiki.org կայքում 2012 թվականի կեսերից, անգլերեն վիքիպեդիայում` 2012 թվականի դեկտեմբերից, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 այլ լեզուներում` 2013 թվականի ապրիլից] և [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ գրեթե բոլոր այլ լեզուներում]` 2013 թվականի հունիսից:
Հույսով ենք, որ մինչև 2015 թվականի վերջն այն հասանելի կլինի նաև [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|մնացած այլ լեզուներով]]:
2014 թվականի նոյեմբերի վերջից այն հասանելի է Վիքիմեդիա Հիմնադրամի բոլոր վիքինախագծերի համար (բացի Վիքիբառարանից և Վիքիդարանից):

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Մենք թողարկում ենք մեր [[VisualEditor/changelog|թարմացումները]] Mediawiki.org կայքում և ունենք [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|նորությունների բազմալեզու պարբերական]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

== ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի օգտագործում ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Եթե հետաքրքրված եք ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչով, կարող եք այցելել [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Մասնակցի ուղեցույց]], ինչպես նաև [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|ստեղնաշարի արագ օգտագործման ստեղների]] էջերը:
&lt;/div&gt;

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչն այժմ ունի որոշ սահմանափակումներ և խնդիրներ:Եթե որևէ խնդիր եք նկատում, [[VisualEditor/Feedback|թողեք մեկնաբանություն]]: Ներկա սահմանափակումներն են.

* '''Էջերի դանդաղ բացում'''

Բարդ և մեծ էջերը ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի համար բացվում են դանդաղ: Մոտ ապագայում արագությունը անկասկած մեծանալու է:
* '''Չավարտված խմբագրում'''

Բարդ ձևավորումների պարամետրեր կերևան և դուք կարող եք խմբագրել նրանց բովանդակությունը, սակայն չեք կարողանա փոփոխել նրանց ձևը:
* '''Հատուկ էջերի սահմանափակումներ'''

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը գործում է միայն հատուկ անվանատարածքների համար: Շատ Վիքիպեդիաներում այն աշխատում է հոդվածների, Մասնակից:, Պատկեր:, Օգնություն: և Կատեգորիա: էջերում: ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը չի աշխատում Վիքիպեդիա: և քննարկման էջերում:

Մենք առաջարկում ենք մասնակիցներին, որ էջը հիշելուց առաջ սեղմեն «{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}» և [[VisualEditor/Feedback|թողնեն մեկնաբանություն]], եթե որևէ խնդիր են նկատում:

== Ինչպե՞ս գլուխ հանել ==

Որպեսզի ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը դառնա ավելի օգտակար, անհրաժեշտ է այն հաճախ օգտագործել, գտնել թերությունները, [[VisualEditor/Feedback|թողնել մեկնաբանություններ]], ինչպես նաև անել շատ այլ բաներ: Դրանցից են.

* '''Օգնության էջերի թարմացում''' 

Յուրաքանչյուր ծրագիր ունի իր օգնության էջը, որպեսզի նոր մասնակիցների համար հեշտացնի ծրագրի օգտագործումը: Շատ օգտակար կլիներ, որ մասնակիցները [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|թարմացնեն ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի օգնության էջը]]` հիմնվելով [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի մասնակցի ուղեցույցի]] վրա:
* '''ԿաղապարիՏվյալի ավելացում կաղապարներին'''

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը պարունակում է կաղապարները հեշտ խմբագրելու գործիք: Որպեսզի նրա աշխատանքն էլ ավելի օգտակար լինի, այն պետք է կաղապարի մասին տեղեկություն հավաքի: Մասնավորապես` այն կարիք ունի իմանալու կաղապարի հնարավոր պարամետրերն ու նրանց բովանդակությունները: Սրա մասին տեղեկություններ ստանալու համար այցելեք
[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|օգնության]] և [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|ԿաղապարիՏվյալի]] էջերը:
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Օգնիր քո համայնքին''' 

Տես [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|Օգտակար եղանակներ քո համայնքին օգնելու համար]] էջը, որտեղ ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը առաջարկվում է որպես փորձնական դիտարկիչ:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Օգնիր նոր մասնակիցներին'''

ՎիզուալԽմբարիչով աշխատանքը ավելի պարզ է և մատչելի: Խնդրում ենք` որոշ ժամանակ անցկացրեք [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|նոր խմբագիրների]] հետ, որպեսզի նրանց սովորեցնեք խմբագրման տարրական կանոնները:
&lt;/div&gt;

==Տես նաև==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>f6f12yauz5srgr6591kj34ka8mynmkf</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403163</id>
      <parentid>5403011</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:39:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8771" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Բարի գալուստ '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի]]''' պորտալ: ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը (ՎԽ) Վիքիպեդիան խմբագրելու նոր գործիք է, որը ստեղծվել է Վիքիմեդիա Հիմնադրամի կողմից: Այն ստեղծվել է խմբագրումը էլ ավելի հեշտացնելու նպատակով: Հույսով ենք, որ այս նորարարությունը կօգնի մարդկանց և կնպաստի Վիքիպեդիայի զարգացմանը:

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Կարդացեք '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''ը:
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Հայտնել խնդիր''' ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի հետ].
|-
| Իմացեք, թե ինչպես են ստեղծում հղումներ, ավելացնում կամ տեղափոխում նկարներ ու ծանոթագրություններ, ներդնում և խմբագրում աղյուսակներ և այլն:
|Խնդրում ենք, ավելացրեք ձեր '''վեբդիտարկիչը, համակարգչի օպերացիոն համակարգը և Վիքիպեդիայում գրանցման թեման''' (հաճախ Vector, երբեմն` Monobook):
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի մասին ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը Վիքիպեդիան խմբագրելու «վիզուալ» գործիք է: Վիքիպեդիան խմբագրելու համար մասնակիցները պետք է սովորեին վիքիլեզու: Հույսով ենք, որ ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը օգտակար կլինի արդեն գրանցված մասնակիցների համար և, մասնավորապես` նորեկների:
&lt;/div&gt; 

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը հասանելի է MediaWiki.org կայքում 2012 թվականի կեսերից, անգլերեն վիքիպեդիայում` 2012 թվականի դեկտեմբերից, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 այլ լեզուներում` 2013 թվականի ապրիլից] և [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ գրեթե բոլոր այլ լեզուներում]` 2013 թվականի հունիսից:
Հույսով ենք, որ մինչև 2015 թվականի վերջն այն հասանելի կլինի նաև [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|մնացած այլ լեզուներով]]:
2014 թվականի նոյեմբերի վերջից այն հասանելի է Վիքիմեդիա Հիմնադրամի բոլոր վիքինախագծերի համար (բացի Վիքիբառարանից և Վիքիդարանից):

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Մենք թողարկում ենք մեր [[VisualEditor/changelog|թարմացումները]] Mediawiki.org կայքում և ունենք [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|նորությունների բազմալեզու պարբերական]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

== ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի օգտագործում ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Եթե հետաքրքրված եք ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչով, կարող եք այցելել [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Մասնակցի ուղեցույց]], ինչպես նաև [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|ստեղնաշարի արագ օգտագործման ստեղների]] էջերը:
&lt;/div&gt;

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչն այժմ ունի որոշ սահմանափակումներ և խնդիրներ:Եթե որևէ խնդիր եք նկատում, [[VisualEditor/Feedback|թողեք մեկնաբանություն]]: Ներկա սահմանափակումներն են.

* '''Էջերի դանդաղ բացում'''

Բարդ և մեծ էջերը ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի համար բացվում են դանդաղ: Մոտ ապագայում արագությունը անկասկած մեծանալու է:
* '''Չավարտված խմբագրում'''

Բարդ ձևավորումների պարամետրեր կերևան և դուք կարող եք խմբագրել նրանց բովանդակությունը, սակայն չեք կարողանա փոփոխել նրանց ձևը:
* '''Հատուկ էջերի սահմանափակումներ'''

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը գործում է միայն հատուկ անվանատարածքների համար: Շատ Վիքիպեդիաներում այն աշխատում է հոդվածների, Մասնակից:, Պատկեր:, Օգնություն: և Կատեգորիա: էջերում: ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը չի աշխատում Վիքիպեդիա: և քննարկման էջերում:

Մենք առաջարկում ենք մասնակիցներին, որ էջը հիշելուց առաջ սեղմեն «{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}» և [[VisualEditor/Feedback|թողնեն մեկնաբանություն]], եթե որևէ խնդիր են նկատում:

== Ինչպե՞ս գլուխ հանել ==

Որպեսզի ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը դառնա ավելի օգտակար, անհրաժեշտ է այն հաճախ օգտագործել, գտնել թերությունները, [[VisualEditor/Feedback|թողնել մեկնաբանություններ]], ինչպես նաև անել շատ այլ բաներ: Դրանցից են.

* '''Օգնության էջերի թարմացում''' 

Յուրաքանչյուր ծրագիր ունի իր օգնության էջը, որպեսզի նոր մասնակիցների համար հեշտացնի ծրագրի օգտագործումը: Շատ օգտակար կլիներ, որ մասնակիցները [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|թարմացնեն ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի օգնության էջը]]` հիմնվելով [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի մասնակցի ուղեցույցի]] վրա:
* '''ԿաղապարիՏվյալի ավելացում կաղապարներին'''

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը պարունակում է կաղապարները հեշտ խմբագրելու գործիք: Որպեսզի նրա աշխատանքն էլ ավելի օգտակար լինի, այն պետք է կաղապարի մասին տեղեկություն հավաքի: Մասնավորապես` այն կարիք ունի իմանալու կաղապարի հնարավոր պարամետրերն ու նրանց բովանդակությունները: Սրա մասին տեղեկություններ ստանալու համար այցելեք
[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|օգնության]] և [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|ԿաղապարիՏվյալի]] էջերը:
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Օգնիր քո համայնքին''' 

Տես [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|Օգտակար եղանակներ քո համայնքին օգնելու համար]] էջը, որտեղ ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը առաջարկվում է որպես փորձնական դիտարկիչ:
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Օգնիր նոր մասնակիցներին''' ՎիզուալԽմբարիչով աշխատանքը ավելի պարզ է և մատչելի: Խնդրում ենք` որոշ ժամանակ անցկացրեք [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|նոր խմբագիրների]] հետ, որպեսզի նրանց սովորեցնեք խմբագրման տարրական կանոնները:

==Տես նաև==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>ccl2pesefo90lli4winsr34oiinrd91</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403228</id>
      <parentid>5403163</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:58:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8683" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Բարի գալուստ '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի]]''' պորտալ: ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը (ՎԽ) Վիքիպեդիան խմբագրելու նոր գործիք է, որը ստեղծվել է Վիքիմեդիա Հիմնադրամի կողմից: Այն ստեղծվել է խմբագրումը էլ ավելի հեշտացնելու նպատակով: Հույսով ենք, որ այս նորարարությունը կօգնի մարդկանց և կնպաստի Վիքիպեդիայի զարգացմանը:

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Կարդացեք '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''ը:
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Հայտնել խնդիր''' ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի հետ].
|-
| Իմացեք, թե ինչպես են ստեղծում հղումներ, ավելացնում կամ տեղափոխում նկարներ ու ծանոթագրություններ, ներդնում և խմբագրում աղյուսակներ և այլն:
|Խնդրում ենք, ավելացրեք ձեր '''վեբդիտարկիչը, համակարգչի օպերացիոն համակարգը և Վիքիպեդիայում գրանցման թեման''' (հաճախ Vector, երբեմն` Monobook):
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի մասին ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը Վիքիպեդիան խմբագրելու «վիզուալ» գործիք է: Վիքիպեդիան խմբագրելու համար մասնակիցները պետք է սովորեին վիքիլեզու: Հույսով ենք, որ ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը օգտակար կլինի արդեն գրանցված մասնակիցների համար և, մասնավորապես` նորեկների:
&lt;/div&gt; 

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը հասանելի է MediaWiki.org կայքում 2012 թվականի կեսերից, անգլերեն վիքիպեդիայում` 2012 թվականի դեկտեմբերից, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 այլ լեզուներում` 2013 թվականի ապրիլից] և [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ գրեթե բոլոր այլ լեզուներում]` 2013 թվականի հունիսից:
Հույսով ենք, որ մինչև 2015 թվականի վերջն այն հասանելի կլինի նաև [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|մնացած այլ լեզուներով]]:
2014 թվականի նոյեմբերի վերջից այն հասանելի է Վիքիմեդիա Հիմնադրամի բոլոր վիքինախագծերի համար (բացի Վիքիբառարանից և Վիքիդարանից):

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Մենք թողարկում ենք մեր [[VisualEditor/changelog|թարմացումները]] Mediawiki.org կայքում և ունենք [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|նորությունների բազմալեզու պարբերական]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

== ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի օգտագործում ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Եթե հետաքրքրված եք ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչով, կարող եք այցելել [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Մասնակցի ուղեցույց]], ինչպես նաև [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|ստեղնաշարի արագ օգտագործման ստեղների]] էջերը:
&lt;/div&gt;

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչն այժմ ունի որոշ սահմանափակումներ և խնդիրներ:Եթե որևէ խնդիր եք նկատում, [[VisualEditor/Feedback|թողեք մեկնաբանություն]]: Ներկա սահմանափակումներն են.

* '''Էջերի դանդաղ բացում'''

Բարդ և մեծ էջերը ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի համար բացվում են դանդաղ: Մոտ ապագայում արագությունը անկասկած մեծանալու է:
* '''Չավարտված խմբագրում'''

Բարդ ձևավորումների պարամետրեր կերևան և դուք կարող եք խմբագրել նրանց բովանդակությունը, սակայն չեք կարողանա փոփոխել նրանց ձևը:
* '''Հատուկ էջերի սահմանափակումներ'''

ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը գործում է միայն հատուկ անվանատարածքների համար: Շատ Վիքիպեդիաներում այն աշխատում է հոդվածների, Մասնակից:, Պատկեր:, Օգնություն: և Կատեգորիա: էջերում: ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը չի աշխատում Վիքիպեդիա: և քննարկման էջերում:

Մենք առաջարկում ենք մասնակիցներին, որ էջը հիշելուց առաջ սեղմեն «{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}» և [[VisualEditor/Feedback|թողնեն մեկնաբանություն]], եթե որևէ խնդիր են նկատում:

== Ինչպե՞ս գլուխ հանել ==

Որպեսզի ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը դառնա ավելի օգտակար, անհրաժեշտ է այն հաճախ օգտագործել, գտնել թերությունները, [[VisualEditor/Feedback|թողնել մեկնաբանություններ]], ինչպես նաև անել շատ այլ բաներ: Դրանցից են.

* '''Օգնության էջերի թարմացում''' 

Յուրաքանչյուր ծրագիր ունի իր օգնության էջը, որպեսզի նոր մասնակիցների համար հեշտացնի ծրագրի օգտագործումը: Շատ օգտակար կլիներ, որ մասնակիցները [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|թարմացնեն ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի օգնության էջը]]` հիմնվելով [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի մասնակցի ուղեցույցի]] վրա:
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Adding TemplateData to templates''' — VisualEditor features a nice template editor, which is described in more detail on our [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|help page]]. As you'll see if you use it on Wikipedia, some templates have named parameters and nice descriptions that make it easy to use. Others do not. This is because templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; before this feature will work. If you're interested in adding TemplateData, we have [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]], along with a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Օգնիր քո համայնքին''' 

Տես [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|Օգտակար եղանակներ քո համայնքին օգնելու համար]] էջը, որտեղ ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը առաջարկվում է որպես փորձնական դիտարկիչ:
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Օգնիր նոր մասնակիցներին''' ՎիզուալԽմբարիչով աշխատանքը ավելի պարզ է և մատչելի: Խնդրում ենք` որոշ ժամանակ անցկացրեք [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|նոր խմբագիրների]] հետ, որպեսզի նրանց սովորեցնեք խմբագրման տարրական կանոնները:

==Տես նաև==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>4hpw36l07z7l1es4kj1721h5zpf0l18</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>149367</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403305</id>
      <parentid>3483300</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:17:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="217" xml:space="preserve">Algumas destas notificações estarão desativadas por padrão ou indisponíveis na sua wiki. Se preferir ativar alguma destas notificações (ou desativá-la), poderá fazê-lo [[$1|na sua página de preferências]].</text>
      <sha1>k9du2bgnceg1phcvzoxyls8vqaw3kmx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/uk</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>149644</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403311</id>
      <parentid>4908297</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:17:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="350" xml:space="preserve">Деякі з цих сповіщень вимкнено за замовчуванням або недоступні у вашій вікі. Якщо ви хочете ввімкнути будь-які з цих сповіщень (або вимкнути їх), ви можете зробити це у [[$1|своїх налаштуваннях]].</text>
      <sha1>5mhlq3w9pwhnmo7bnz0gkp81a68t1k8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/et</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>149679</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403293</id>
      <parentid>4369467</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:15:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="192" xml:space="preserve">Mõni neist teatistest on vaikimisi välja lülitatud või pole teie vikis saadaval. Kui soovite mõne neist märguannetest lubada (või need keelata), saate seda teha [[$1|teie eelistustes]].</text>
      <sha1>248icw25sumyt0pjd4mkmn00sdzp0gs</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/ko</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>150462</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403017</id>
      <parentid>5136626</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7883" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|시각편집기]]''' 포털에 오신 것을 환영합니다. 시각편집기는 위키미디어 재단에서 개발하고 있는 위키백과를 편집하는 새로운 편집기입니다. 시각편집기를 사용하면 위키 문법을 배우지 않고도 편집할 수 있으며 그 결과로 바라건대 사람들이 위키백과에 기여 하는 데 도움이 됐으면 합니다.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''를 읽어보세요.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} 시각편집기의 '''문제를 제보'''하세요].
|-
| 링크를 삽입하고, 이미지를 추가 또는 이동하고, 인용을 삽입하고, 틀을 삽입하고, 표를 편집하는 등의 방법을 알아보세요.
|당신의 '''웹 브라우저, 컴퓨터 운영 체제, 그리고 위키백과 스킨''' (대개 벡터, 가끔씩 모노북)을 포함시켜 주세요.
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== 시각편집기 소개 ==

시각편집기는 위키백과를 편집하는 &quot;시각적인&quot; 방법입니다. 위키백과를 편집하려면 역사적으로 사람들이 문서를 약간씩만 변경하는 경우에도 상당히 복잡한 마크업 언어인 위키 문법(위키 마크업)을 배워야 했습니다. 2001년에는 이것이 괜찮았지만 2015년에는 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|기여자를 몰아내는]] 요인이 됩니다. 시각편집기가 기존 기여자에게 유용하고 새로운 사용자에게 더 환영받기를 바랍니다. 

시각편집기는 2012년 중반까지 Mediawiki.org에서 알파 기능으로 이용이 가능하고, 영어 위키백과에서는 2012년 12월, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/2013년 4월까지 14개 이상 언어판에서], 2013년 6월의 시작까지 [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ 대부분의 언어판에서 이용이 가능]합니다. 2014년 7월 기준으로 우리는 기본값으로 위키백과 절반 이상에서 로그인된 편집자와 로그인한 편집자가 시각편집기를 쓸 수 있도록 했습니다. 2014년 12월 후반에, 위키낱말사전과 위키문헌을 제외한 모든 위키미디어 재단 위키에서 [[Beta Features|베타 기능]]으로 사용하실 수 있습니다.
2015년 말에 대부분의 [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|나머지 언어]]에 기본적으로 제공될 예정입니다.
2014년 11월 말부터 위키낱말사전 및 위키문헌을 제외한 모든 WMF 위키에서 옵트인 [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|베타 기능]]으로도 사용할 수 있습니다.

위키미디어 재단 위키를 중심으로 [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|다국어 뉴스레터]]도 발행하고 있습니다.

== 시각편집기 사용하기 ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

편집을 위해 시각편집기를 사용하는 데 관심이 있다면 [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|가이드]]와 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|일반적인 키보드 단축키 목록]]이 있습니다.

시각편집기에는 현재 몇 가지 버그와 제한 사항이 있습니다. 문제가 생기면 부디 [[VisualEditor/Feedback|피드백 문서에서 보고]]해 주세요. 현재 제한 사항은 다음과 같습니다.

* '''불러오는 데 오래 걸림''' — 장문의 복잡한 문서를 시각편집기로 불러오는 데 시간이 좀 걸릴 것입니다. 앞으로 훨씬 빨리 불러올 것이고 더 대용량 문서도 불러올 수 있을 것입니다.
* '''편집 기능이 불완전함''' — 복잡한 양식의 일부 구성 요소 중 일부는 표시가 될 것이도 그 내용을 편집할 수 있으나 그 구조를 수정하거나 표나 정의 목록과 같은 새로운 항목을 추가할 수 없을 것입니다. 이 분야를 개선하는 데 우선순위를 두고 있습니다.
* '''일반 문서와 사용자 문서에서만 작동''' — 시각편집기는 일반 문서와 사용자 이름공간에서만 활성화될 것입니다. 따라서 개인 연습장에서도 사용할 수 있습니다. 앞으로 일반 문서 이외에서도 사용할 수 있도록 특별 편집 도구를 만들겠지만 초점은 일반 문서에 두었습니다.

사용자는 문서를 저장하기에 앞서 &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;를 클릭하여 검토하고 [[VisualEditor/Feedback|문제가 생기면 보고]]할 것을 권합니다.

== 돕는 방법 ==

시각편집기를 최대한 잘 만들기 위해 도울 수 있는 것이 많습니다. 가장 확실한 방법으로는 시각편집기를 사용해보고 버그를 찾아서 [[VisualEditor/Feedback|보고]]하는 것이지만 다른 많은 방법도 다음과 같이 있습니다.

* '''도움말 문서 갱신하기''' — 모든 위키미디어 프로젝트에는 새로운 사용자가 기여하기 쉽도록 도움말 문서가 있습니다. 불행히도 모두가 마크업 편집기를 기준으로 작성되어 있습니다. 시각편집기가 도입되면 스크린샷과 설명서 모두를 갱신해야 합니다. [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|시각편집기 사용 설명서]]에 기초해 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|도움말 문서를 갱신]]한다면 매우 유용할 것입니다.
* '''틀데이터(TemplateData)를 틀에 추가하기''' — 시각편집기는 틀 편집기(자세한 내용은 [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|도움말 문서]]를 참고)가 내장되어 있습니다. 시각편집기를 위키백과에서 사용해보면 알 수 있듯이 일부 틀에는 매개변수가 명명되고 사용하기 쉽도록 설명문도 있지만 다른 틀은 그렇지 않습니다. 이것이 시각편집기가 제대로 작동하려면 &quot;TemplateData&quot;가 틀에 필요한 이유입니다. TemplateData를 추가하는 데 관심이 있다면, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|안내서]]와 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|추가가 필요한 가장 중요한 틀 목록]]을 보세요.
* '''공동체를 돕기'''— 시각편집기가 기본으로 포함된 베타 기능으로 제공될 때 [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|위키 공동체를 도울 수 있는 유용한 방법의 목록]]을 봐 주세요.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''새로운 사용자 돕기''' — 시각편집기가 성공적으로 도입되면 훨씬 많은 새로운 사용자가 생길 것입니다. 편집하기가 더 쉬워질지라도 공동체와 상호작용하는 방법은 어려울 것입니다. [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|도와주는 곳이나 IRC 도움 채널]]에서 새로운 사용자가 위키백과에 잘 적응하도록 도와주는 데 부디 시간을 내어 주세요.
&lt;/div&gt;

==같이 보기==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - 위키 및 동료 편집자를 위한 편집 환경 최적화에 대한 체크리스트입니다.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - 당신과 같은 다른 위키미디언들로부터 시각편집기 관련 작업에 대한 도움을 받고 제공하세요.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - 시각편집기에 대한 완전히 새로운 커뮤니티를 위한 이전 가이드.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>hqxgj58j5sab3f5yob84szzvl6bner8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/bs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>151126</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403289</id>
      <parentid>3483276</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:14:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="239" xml:space="preserve">Neka od ovih obavještenja su automatski isključena za trenutne korisnike ili nisu dostupna na vašem wikiju.. Ako biste željeli omogućiti (ili onemogućiti) bilo koje od tih obavještenja, možete to uraditi [[$1|u vašim postavkama]].</text>
      <sha1>4xxozb1w8f90lytexm7oih5mhh1rbkw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/ro</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>151820</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403309</id>
      <parentid>4369476</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:17:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="239" xml:space="preserve">Unele dintre aceste notificări sunt dezactivate în mod implicit sau nu sunt disponibile pe wiki.  Dacă doriți să activați oricare dintre aceste notificări (sau să le dezactivați), puteți face acest lucru [[$1|în preferințele]].</text>
      <sha1>d3tenmkcuv5dyqyvf26eegjb6h47p9s</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/lmo</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>152031</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402422</id>
      <parentid>4983717</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:58:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7963" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Che laùr él el VisualEditor? ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
El VisualEditor l'è 'na maniéra &quot;vizuala&quot; de fà mudìfiche ai tèscc de la Wikipedia, en sistéma nöf che ghe permetarà a le persùne de contreböéser sènsa ìga de 'mparà nisü còdes de formatasiù.

L'è stat mitìt a dispuzisiù endèna versiù de pröa sö la Wikipedia 'n inglés zamò del dezèmber del 2012, endèl més de bril del 2013 [$blog-april per 16 ótre lèngue], e per la [$blog-june gan part de le ótre lèngue] al prensépe del més de zögn.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor has some current bugs and limitations. If you encounter an issue, please do not hesitate to [[VisualEditor/Feedback|report it on the Feedback page]]. Current limitations include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Slow to load''' — It will take some time for long, complex pages to load into VisualEditor. In the future the software will be a lot faster, and will allow for the loading of larger pages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Incomplete editing''' — Some elements of complex formatting will display and let you edit their contents, but will not let users edit their structure or add new entries – such as definition lists. Adding features in this area is one of our priorities.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Most content pages, not talk pages''' — VisualEditor is only enabled for some namespaces.  At most Wikipedias, VisualEditor can be used on articles, User:, File:, Help: and Category: pages.  VisualEditor is not currently available for Wikipedia: pages or any talk pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We recommend that users click &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; before saving the page and [[VisualEditor/Feedback|report any problems they encounter]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Come se g'ha de fà per colaborà? ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For VisualEditor to be as good as it can be, there are a lot of things we need help with. Obviously, one big area is using the software, finding bugs and [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reporting them]], but there are many other tasks as well. These include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Updating help pages''' — All of our projects have help pages to make it easier for new users to contribute. Unfortunately they are all built around the markup editor, and as VisualEditor evolves, the screenshots and tutorials will all become outdated. It would be very useful if people could  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]], based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Adding TemplateData to templates''' — VisualEditor features a nice template editor, which is described in more detail on our [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|help page]]. As you'll see if you use it on Wikipedia, some templates have named parameters and nice descriptions that make it easy to use. Others do not. This is because templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; before this feature will work. If you're interested in adding TemplateData, we have [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]], along with a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help new users''' — If the VisualEditor launch is successful, we will have a lot more new users than we are used to, and even though editing may be easier, working out how to interact with the community will still be hard. Please spend some time [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]], to help these newcomers become acclimatized to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>sk52veee8wg08v1pegvlcp3x6yut2yb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/he</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>153100</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403297</id>
      <parentid>3483287</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:16:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="281" xml:space="preserve">חלק מהתראות אלו כבויות כברירת-מחדל או לא זמינות באתר הוויקי שלך. אם ברצונך להפעיל חלק מהתראות אלו (או לכבותן), ניתן לעשות זאת דרך [[$1|דף ההעדפות האישיות שלך]].</text>
      <sha1>e822k3g5pvra9pf34qadq6gbfiwb5vf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/ca</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>153269</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403291</id>
      <parentid>3483277</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:14:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="299" xml:space="preserve">En la primera versió d'aquest producte, algunes d'aquestes notificacions estaran desactivades per defecte tant per usuaris existents com per usuaris nous. Si voleu activar (o desactivar) qualsevol d'aquestes notificacions, ho podeu fer en les vostres [[$1|preferències]], com s'explica més avall.</text>
      <sha1>p5mlkwsuy1pdfisj6s1hq1udndf5zak</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/sk</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>153350</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402447</id>
      <parentid>1753232</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:05:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="287" xml:space="preserve">Vitajte na portále pre '''[[$ve|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) je nový spôsob upravovania Wikipédie vyvíjaný nadáciou Wikimedia Foundation. Umožňuje ľuďom upravovať bez potreby naučiť sa wikijazyk. Dúfame, že pomôže podnieť ľuďom s prispievaním do Wikipédie.</text>
      <sha1>dc03czf2n43ymt4ej02ajauicu9k3y8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/ilo</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>153700</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402432</id>
      <parentid>4983807</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:01:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8472" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Naragsak nga isasangbay iti portal para iti '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. Ti VisualEditor (VE) ket ti baro a waya ti panagurnos ti Wikipedia nga agdama a pinarparang-ay babaen ti pundasion ti Wikimedia. Daytoy ket mangpalubos iti tattao nga agurnos a saan nga agadal iti wiki markup.  Manamnamami a makatulongto iti tattao nga agparawad iti Wikipedia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Maipanggep ti VisualEditor ==

Ti VisualEditor ket &quot;bisual&quot; a waya iti panagurnos ti Wikipedia. Ti panagurnos iti Wikipedia ket historikal a makasapul ti tattao nga agdal iti markup, ti narikut met a pagsasao ti panagsurat, uray ti panagaramid ti bassit a panagbaliw iti panid. Idi 2001, daytoy ket maawat idi; idi 2014, daytoy ket[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|mangpappapanaw kadagiti kontributor]]. Manamnamami a ti VisualEditor ket naserbinto kadagiti addan a kontributor ken nasaysayaatto kadagiti kabarbaro. 

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ti VisualEditor ket magunoden a kas maysa a pablaak ti opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; iti Wikipedia ti pagsasao nga Ingles manipud idi Disiembre 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ kadagiti 14 pay a pagsasao manipud idi Abril 2013], ken [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ gangani amin dagiti sabali apagsasao] manipud idi rugi ti Hunio 2013.  Manipud idi Hulio 2014, inaramidmi a magun-od babaen ti kasisigud kadagiti nakastrek ken nakaruar nga editor iti ad-adu ngem gudua kadagiti Wikipedia.  Manamnamami nga aramiden a magun-odto iti gangani amin a Wikipedia iti gibus ti 2014 wenno nasapa a 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ipablaakmi dagiti [[VisualEditor/changelog|kankanayon a pabaro ti kasasaad]] idiay Mediawiki.org,ken ti [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|adu ti pagsasao a binulan  a warnakan]], a naipatengnga ti isip kadagiti wiki ti WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Panagusar iti VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para kadagiti mayat nga agusar ti VisualEditor, adda met ti [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|alagaden ti panag-usar]], ken dagiti pay  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|listaan dagiti kadawyan nga apat ti teklado]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Iti agdama, ti VisualEditor ket adu kadagiti bilang ti parikut. No makasarakka ti parikut, pangngaasi ngarud nga [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ireporta idiay pagibagaan a panid]]. Adda met dagiti kabarbaro a langa a maaramidto pay laeng. Dagiti agdama a limitasion ket mairaman ti:

* '''Nabuntog a panagkarga''' — Makauray ti nabayag tapno maikarga para iti atiddog, ken narikut a pampanid iti VisualEditor. Iti masakbayan ti sopwer ket naparpardasto, ken mangpalubosto para iti mangikarga kadagiti dakdakkel a panid.
* '''Saan a kompleto a panagurnos''' — Adda met dagiti elemento ti  &quot;narikut&quot; a panagporma nga agparangto ken mangpalubos kenka nga agurnos kadagiti linaonda, ngem saanto a mangipalubos kadagiti agar-aramat nga agurnos iti estruktura wenno aginayon kadagiti baro a maikabil – kasla dagiti listaan panangipalplawag. Ti panaginayon kadagiti langa iti daytoy a lugar ket maysa kadagiti iyunay-unaymi.
* '''Kaaduan kadagiti aglaon a panid, saan a dagiti tungtungan a panid''' — Ti VisualEditor ket napakabaelan laeng para kadagiti dadduma a nagan ti espasio.  Kadagiti kaaduan a Wikipedia, ti VisualEditor ket mabalin a mausar kadagiti panid ti artikulo, Agar-aramat:, Papeles:, Tulong: ken Kategoria:.  Ti VisualEditor ket agdama a saan a magunod para kadagiti panid ti Wikipedia: wenno ania man a pampanid ti tungtungan.

Gapu kadagitoy a limitasion, ken dagiti matungpuan a parikut, mangisingasingkami a dagiti agar-aramat ket pindutenda ti &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; sakbay nga idulin ti panid, ken [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ireporta dagiti ania man a problema a makitada]].

== Kasano ti tumulong ==

Tapno mapasayaatto ti VisualEditor, adu met dagiti banag a masapulmi ti tulong. Ti maysa a dakkel a paset ket ti panagusar ti sopwer, panagbiruk kadagiti parikut ken [[VisualEditor/Feedback|panangireporta kaniada]], ngem adu pay met dagiti daduma a maobra. Dagitoy ket mairaman ti:

* '''Panagpabaro kadagiti panid''' — Amin dagit igandatmi ket addaanda kadagiti panid ti tulong a mangpalaka para kadagiti baro nga agar-aramat iti agparawad. Daksanggasat met a dagitoy ket naaramid iti markup nga editor, ken iti panagbalbaliw ti VisualEditor, dagiti screenshots ken dagiti panagisursuro ket agbalindanto a baak. Makatulongto no ti tattao ket [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|pabaruenda dagiti panid ti tulong]], a naibatay iti [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|panangisursuromi ti panagusar ti VisualEditor]].
* '''Pananginayon ti TemplateData kadagiti plantilia''' — ti VisualEditor ket addaan ti langa ti nasayaat nga editor ti plantilia, nga ipalawagminto a nasaysayaat idiay [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|panid ti tulong]]. A kas makitamto no usarem daytoy iti Wikipedia, adda met dagiti plantilia nga addaan kadagiti nainagan a parametro ken dagiti nasayaat a deskripsion tapno nalaklakada a mausar. Dagiti dadduma ket awanda met. Daytoy ket gapu ta dagiti plantilia ket makasapulda ti &quot;TemplateData&quot; sakbay a mabalin daytoy a langa. No interesadoka nga aginayon ti TemplateData, adaankami iti [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|alagaden ti panagaramid]], a maikuyog ti [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|listaan dagiti nangruna a plantilia a pakainayonan dagitoy]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Tumulong kadagiti agdadamo nga agar-aramat''' — No balliginto ti pannakairuar ti VisualEditor, ad-adunto met dagiti agar-aramat ngem ti nakasansanayantayo, ken urayno ti panag-urnos ket mabalin a nalaklaka, ti pannakitinnignay iti komunidad ket narigatto pay met laeng. Pangngaasi a padasen ti tumulong  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|idiay help desk, wenno idiay kanal ti tulong ti IRC]], tapno makatulong kadagitoy nga agdadamo a masanay iti Wikipedia.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>ll7br36o12fdg8son9beee262i11d82</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403013</id>
      <parentid>5402432</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8512" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Naragsak nga isasangbay iti portal para iti '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. Ti VisualEditor (VE) ket ti baro a waya ti panagurnos ti Wikipedia nga agdama a pinarparang-ay babaen ti pundasion ti Wikimedia. Daytoy ket mangpalubos iti tattao nga agurnos a saan nga agadal iti wiki markup.  Manamnamami a makatulongto iti tattao nga agparawad iti Wikipedia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Maipanggep ti VisualEditor ==

Ti VisualEditor ket &quot;bisual&quot; a waya iti panagurnos ti Wikipedia. Ti panagurnos iti Wikipedia ket historikal a makasapul ti tattao nga agdal iti markup, ti narikut met a pagsasao ti panagsurat, uray ti panagaramid ti bassit a panagbaliw iti panid. Idi 2001, daytoy ket maawat idi; idi 2014, daytoy ket[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|mangpappapanaw kadagiti kontributor]]. Manamnamami a ti VisualEditor ket naserbinto kadagiti addan a kontributor ken nasaysayaatto kadagiti kabarbaro. 

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ti VisualEditor ket magunoden a kas maysa a pablaak ti opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; iti Wikipedia ti pagsasao nga Ingles manipud idi Disiembre 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ kadagiti 14 pay a pagsasao manipud idi Abril 2013], ken [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ gangani amin dagiti sabali apagsasao] manipud idi rugi ti Hunio 2013.  Manipud idi Hulio 2014, inaramidmi a magun-od babaen ti kasisigud kadagiti nakastrek ken nakaruar nga editor iti ad-adu ngem gudua kadagiti Wikipedia.  Manamnamami nga aramiden a magun-odto iti gangani amin a Wikipedia iti gibus ti 2014 wenno nasapa a 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ipablaakmi dagiti [[VisualEditor/changelog|kankanayon a pabaro ti kasasaad]] idiay Mediawiki.org,ken ti [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|adu ti pagsasao a binulan  a warnakan]], a naipatengnga ti isip kadagiti wiki ti WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Panagusar iti VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para kadagiti mayat nga agusar ti VisualEditor, adda met ti [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|alagaden ti panag-usar]], ken dagiti pay  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|listaan dagiti kadawyan nga apat ti teklado]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Iti agdama, ti VisualEditor ket adu kadagiti bilang ti parikut. No makasarakka ti parikut, pangngaasi ngarud nga [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ireporta idiay pagibagaan a panid]]. Adda met dagiti kabarbaro a langa a maaramidto pay laeng. Dagiti agdama a limitasion ket mairaman ti:

* '''Nabuntog a panagkarga''' — Makauray ti nabayag tapno maikarga para iti atiddog, ken narikut a pampanid iti VisualEditor. Iti masakbayan ti sopwer ket naparpardasto, ken mangpalubosto para iti mangikarga kadagiti dakdakkel a panid.
* '''Saan a kompleto a panagurnos''' — Adda met dagiti elemento ti  &quot;narikut&quot; a panagporma nga agparangto ken mangpalubos kenka nga agurnos kadagiti linaonda, ngem saanto a mangipalubos kadagiti agar-aramat nga agurnos iti estruktura wenno aginayon kadagiti baro a maikabil – kasla dagiti listaan panangipalplawag. Ti panaginayon kadagiti langa iti daytoy a lugar ket maysa kadagiti iyunay-unaymi.
* '''Kaaduan kadagiti aglaon a panid, saan a dagiti tungtungan a panid''' — Ti VisualEditor ket napakabaelan laeng para kadagiti dadduma a nagan ti espasio.  Kadagiti kaaduan a Wikipedia, ti VisualEditor ket mabalin a mausar kadagiti panid ti artikulo, Agar-aramat:, Papeles:, Tulong: ken Kategoria:.  Ti VisualEditor ket agdama a saan a magunod para kadagiti panid ti Wikipedia: wenno ania man a pampanid ti tungtungan.

Gapu kadagitoy a limitasion, ken dagiti matungpuan a parikut, mangisingasingkami a dagiti agar-aramat ket pindutenda ti &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; sakbay nga idulin ti panid, ken [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ireporta dagiti ania man a problema a makitada]].

== Kasano ti tumulong ==

Tapno mapasayaatto ti VisualEditor, adu met dagiti banag a masapulmi ti tulong. Ti maysa a dakkel a paset ket ti panagusar ti sopwer, panagbiruk kadagiti parikut ken [[VisualEditor/Feedback|panangireporta kaniada]], ngem adu pay met dagiti daduma a maobra. Dagitoy ket mairaman ti:

* '''Panagpabaro kadagiti panid''' — Amin dagit igandatmi ket addaanda kadagiti panid ti tulong a mangpalaka para kadagiti baro nga agar-aramat iti agparawad. Daksanggasat met a dagitoy ket naaramid iti markup nga editor, ken iti panagbalbaliw ti VisualEditor, dagiti screenshots ken dagiti panagisursuro ket agbalindanto a baak. Makatulongto no ti tattao ket [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|pabaruenda dagiti panid ti tulong]], a naibatay iti [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|panangisursuromi ti panagusar ti VisualEditor]].
* '''Pananginayon ti TemplateData kadagiti plantilia''' — ti VisualEditor ket addaan ti langa ti nasayaat nga editor ti plantilia, nga ipalawagminto a nasaysayaat idiay [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|panid ti tulong]]. A kas makitamto no usarem daytoy iti Wikipedia, adda met dagiti plantilia nga addaan kadagiti nainagan a parametro ken dagiti nasayaat a deskripsion tapno nalaklakada a mausar. Dagiti dadduma ket awanda met. Daytoy ket gapu ta dagiti plantilia ket makasapulda ti &quot;TemplateData&quot; sakbay a mabalin daytoy a langa. No interesadoka nga aginayon ti TemplateData, adaankami iti [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|alagaden ti panagaramid]], a maikuyog ti [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|listaan dagiti nangruna a plantilia a pakainayonan dagitoy]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Tumulong kadagiti agdadamo nga agar-aramat''' — No balliginto ti pannakairuar ti VisualEditor, ad-adunto met dagiti agar-aramat ngem ti nakasansanayantayo, ken urayno ti panag-urnos ket mabalin a nalaklaka, ti pannakitinnignay iti komunidad ket narigatto pay met laeng. Pangngaasi a padasen ti tumulong  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|idiay help desk, wenno idiay kanal ti tulong ti IRC]], tapno makatulong kadagitoy nga agdadamo a masanay iti Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>gwcyzowd9bugsz0hiz1mowb51hje65o</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403168</id>
      <parentid>5403013</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:40:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8472" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Naragsak nga isasangbay iti portal para iti '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. Ti VisualEditor (VE) ket ti baro a waya ti panagurnos ti Wikipedia nga agdama a pinarparang-ay babaen ti pundasion ti Wikimedia. Daytoy ket mangpalubos iti tattao nga agurnos a saan nga agadal iti wiki markup.  Manamnamami a makatulongto iti tattao nga agparawad iti Wikipedia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Maipanggep ti VisualEditor ==

Ti VisualEditor ket &quot;bisual&quot; a waya iti panagurnos ti Wikipedia. Ti panagurnos iti Wikipedia ket historikal a makasapul ti tattao nga agdal iti markup, ti narikut met a pagsasao ti panagsurat, uray ti panagaramid ti bassit a panagbaliw iti panid. Idi 2001, daytoy ket maawat idi; idi 2014, daytoy ket[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|mangpappapanaw kadagiti kontributor]]. Manamnamami a ti VisualEditor ket naserbinto kadagiti addan a kontributor ken nasaysayaatto kadagiti kabarbaro. 

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ti VisualEditor ket magunoden a kas maysa a pablaak ti opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; iti Wikipedia ti pagsasao nga Ingles manipud idi Disiembre 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ kadagiti 14 pay a pagsasao manipud idi Abril 2013], ken [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ gangani amin dagiti sabali apagsasao] manipud idi rugi ti Hunio 2013.  Manipud idi Hulio 2014, inaramidmi a magun-od babaen ti kasisigud kadagiti nakastrek ken nakaruar nga editor iti ad-adu ngem gudua kadagiti Wikipedia.  Manamnamami nga aramiden a magun-odto iti gangani amin a Wikipedia iti gibus ti 2014 wenno nasapa a 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ipablaakmi dagiti [[VisualEditor/changelog|kankanayon a pabaro ti kasasaad]] idiay Mediawiki.org,ken ti [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|adu ti pagsasao a binulan  a warnakan]], a naipatengnga ti isip kadagiti wiki ti WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Panagusar iti VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para kadagiti mayat nga agusar ti VisualEditor, adda met ti [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|alagaden ti panag-usar]], ken dagiti pay  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|listaan dagiti kadawyan nga apat ti teklado]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Iti agdama, ti VisualEditor ket adu kadagiti bilang ti parikut. No makasarakka ti parikut, pangngaasi ngarud nga [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ireporta idiay pagibagaan a panid]]. Adda met dagiti kabarbaro a langa a maaramidto pay laeng. Dagiti agdama a limitasion ket mairaman ti:

* '''Nabuntog a panagkarga''' — Makauray ti nabayag tapno maikarga para iti atiddog, ken narikut a pampanid iti VisualEditor. Iti masakbayan ti sopwer ket naparpardasto, ken mangpalubosto para iti mangikarga kadagiti dakdakkel a panid.
* '''Saan a kompleto a panagurnos''' — Adda met dagiti elemento ti  &quot;narikut&quot; a panagporma nga agparangto ken mangpalubos kenka nga agurnos kadagiti linaonda, ngem saanto a mangipalubos kadagiti agar-aramat nga agurnos iti estruktura wenno aginayon kadagiti baro a maikabil – kasla dagiti listaan panangipalplawag. Ti panaginayon kadagiti langa iti daytoy a lugar ket maysa kadagiti iyunay-unaymi.
* '''Kaaduan kadagiti aglaon a panid, saan a dagiti tungtungan a panid''' — Ti VisualEditor ket napakabaelan laeng para kadagiti dadduma a nagan ti espasio.  Kadagiti kaaduan a Wikipedia, ti VisualEditor ket mabalin a mausar kadagiti panid ti artikulo, Agar-aramat:, Papeles:, Tulong: ken Kategoria:.  Ti VisualEditor ket agdama a saan a magunod para kadagiti panid ti Wikipedia: wenno ania man a pampanid ti tungtungan.

Gapu kadagitoy a limitasion, ken dagiti matungpuan a parikut, mangisingasingkami a dagiti agar-aramat ket pindutenda ti &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; sakbay nga idulin ti panid, ken [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ireporta dagiti ania man a problema a makitada]].

== Kasano ti tumulong ==

Tapno mapasayaatto ti VisualEditor, adu met dagiti banag a masapulmi ti tulong. Ti maysa a dakkel a paset ket ti panagusar ti sopwer, panagbiruk kadagiti parikut ken [[VisualEditor/Feedback|panangireporta kaniada]], ngem adu pay met dagiti daduma a maobra. Dagitoy ket mairaman ti:

* '''Panagpabaro kadagiti panid''' — Amin dagit igandatmi ket addaanda kadagiti panid ti tulong a mangpalaka para kadagiti baro nga agar-aramat iti agparawad. Daksanggasat met a dagitoy ket naaramid iti markup nga editor, ken iti panagbalbaliw ti VisualEditor, dagiti screenshots ken dagiti panagisursuro ket agbalindanto a baak. Makatulongto no ti tattao ket [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|pabaruenda dagiti panid ti tulong]], a naibatay iti [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|panangisursuromi ti panagusar ti VisualEditor]].
* '''Pananginayon ti TemplateData kadagiti plantilia''' — ti VisualEditor ket addaan ti langa ti nasayaat nga editor ti plantilia, nga ipalawagminto a nasaysayaat idiay [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|panid ti tulong]]. A kas makitamto no usarem daytoy iti Wikipedia, adda met dagiti plantilia nga addaan kadagiti nainagan a parametro ken dagiti nasayaat a deskripsion tapno nalaklakada a mausar. Dagiti dadduma ket awanda met. Daytoy ket gapu ta dagiti plantilia ket makasapulda ti &quot;TemplateData&quot; sakbay a mabalin daytoy a langa. No interesadoka nga aginayon ti TemplateData, adaankami iti [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|alagaden ti panagaramid]], a maikuyog ti [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|listaan dagiti nangruna a plantilia a pakainayonan dagitoy]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Tumulong kadagiti agdadamo nga agar-aramat''' — No balliginto ti pannakairuar ti VisualEditor, ad-adunto met dagiti agar-aramat ngem ti nakasansanayantayo, ken urayno ti panag-urnos ket mabalin a nalaklaka, ti pannakitinnignay iti komunidad ket narigatto pay met laeng. Pangngaasi a padasen ti tumulong  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|idiay help desk, wenno idiay kanal ti tulong ti IRC]], tapno makatulong kadagitoy nga agdadamo a masanay iti Wikipedia.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>ll7br36o12fdg8son9beee262i11d82</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403232</id>
      <parentid>5403168</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:00:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8490" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Naragsak nga isasangbay iti portal para iti '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. Ti VisualEditor (VE) ket ti baro a waya ti panagurnos ti Wikipedia nga agdama a pinarparang-ay babaen ti pundasion ti Wikimedia. Daytoy ket mangpalubos iti tattao nga agurnos a saan nga agadal iti wiki markup.  Manamnamami a makatulongto iti tattao nga agparawad iti Wikipedia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Maipanggep ti VisualEditor ==

Ti VisualEditor ket &quot;bisual&quot; a waya iti panagurnos ti Wikipedia. Ti panagurnos iti Wikipedia ket historikal a makasapul ti tattao nga agdal iti markup, ti narikut met a pagsasao ti panagsurat, uray ti panagaramid ti bassit a panagbaliw iti panid. Idi 2001, daytoy ket maawat idi; idi 2014, daytoy ket[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|mangpappapanaw kadagiti kontributor]]. Manamnamami a ti VisualEditor ket naserbinto kadagiti addan a kontributor ken nasaysayaatto kadagiti kabarbaro. 

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ti VisualEditor ket magunoden a kas maysa a pablaak ti opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; iti Wikipedia ti pagsasao nga Ingles manipud idi Disiembre 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ kadagiti 14 pay a pagsasao manipud idi Abril 2013], ken [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ gangani amin dagiti sabali apagsasao] manipud idi rugi ti Hunio 2013.  Manipud idi Hulio 2014, inaramidmi a magun-od babaen ti kasisigud kadagiti nakastrek ken nakaruar nga editor iti ad-adu ngem gudua kadagiti Wikipedia.  Manamnamami nga aramiden a magun-odto iti gangani amin a Wikipedia iti gibus ti 2014 wenno nasapa a 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ipablaakmi dagiti [[VisualEditor/changelog|kankanayon a pabaro ti kasasaad]] idiay Mediawiki.org,ken ti [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|adu ti pagsasao a binulan  a warnakan]], a naipatengnga ti isip kadagiti wiki ti WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Panagusar iti VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para kadagiti mayat nga agusar ti VisualEditor, adda met ti [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|alagaden ti panag-usar]], ken dagiti pay  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|listaan dagiti kadawyan nga apat ti teklado]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Iti agdama, ti VisualEditor ket adu kadagiti bilang ti parikut. No makasarakka ti parikut, pangngaasi ngarud nga [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ireporta idiay pagibagaan a panid]]. Adda met dagiti kabarbaro a langa a maaramidto pay laeng. Dagiti agdama a limitasion ket mairaman ti:

* '''Nabuntog a panagkarga''' — Makauray ti nabayag tapno maikarga para iti atiddog, ken narikut a pampanid iti VisualEditor. Iti masakbayan ti sopwer ket naparpardasto, ken mangpalubosto para iti mangikarga kadagiti dakdakkel a panid.
* '''Saan a kompleto a panagurnos''' — Adda met dagiti elemento ti  &quot;narikut&quot; a panagporma nga agparangto ken mangpalubos kenka nga agurnos kadagiti linaonda, ngem saanto a mangipalubos kadagiti agar-aramat nga agurnos iti estruktura wenno aginayon kadagiti baro a maikabil – kasla dagiti listaan panangipalplawag. Ti panaginayon kadagiti langa iti daytoy a lugar ket maysa kadagiti iyunay-unaymi.
* '''Kaaduan kadagiti aglaon a panid, saan a dagiti tungtungan a panid''' — Ti VisualEditor ket napakabaelan laeng para kadagiti dadduma a nagan ti espasio.  Kadagiti kaaduan a Wikipedia, ti VisualEditor ket mabalin a mausar kadagiti panid ti artikulo, Agar-aramat:, Papeles:, Tulong: ken Kategoria:.  Ti VisualEditor ket agdama a saan a magunod para kadagiti panid ti Wikipedia: wenno ania man a pampanid ti tungtungan.

Gapu kadagitoy a limitasion, ken dagiti matungpuan a parikut, mangisingasingkami a dagiti agar-aramat ket pindutenda ti &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; sakbay nga idulin ti panid, ken [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ireporta dagiti ania man a problema a makitada]].

== Kasano ti tumulong ==

Tapno mapasayaatto ti VisualEditor, adu met dagiti banag a masapulmi ti tulong. Ti maysa a dakkel a paset ket ti panagusar ti sopwer, panagbiruk kadagiti parikut ken [[VisualEditor/Feedback|panangireporta kaniada]], ngem adu pay met dagiti daduma a maobra. Dagitoy ket mairaman ti:

* '''Panagpabaro kadagiti panid''' — Amin dagit igandatmi ket addaanda kadagiti panid ti tulong a mangpalaka para kadagiti baro nga agar-aramat iti agparawad. Daksanggasat met a dagitoy ket naaramid iti markup nga editor, ken iti panagbalbaliw ti VisualEditor, dagiti screenshots ken dagiti panagisursuro ket agbalindanto a baak. Makatulongto no ti tattao ket [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|pabaruenda dagiti panid ti tulong]], a naibatay iti [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|panangisursuromi ti panagusar ti VisualEditor]].
* '''Pananginayon ti TemplateData kadagiti plantilia''' — ti VisualEditor ket addaan ti langa ti nasayaat nga editor ti plantilia, nga ipalawagminto a nasaysayaat idiay [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|panid ti tulong]]. A kas makitamto no usarem daytoy iti Wikipedia, adda met dagiti plantilia nga addaan kadagiti nainagan a parametro ken dagiti nasayaat a deskripsion tapno nalaklakada a mausar. Dagiti dadduma ket awanda met. Daytoy ket gapu ta dagiti plantilia ket makasapulda ti &quot;TemplateData&quot; sakbay a mabalin daytoy a langa. No interesadoka nga aginayon ti TemplateData, adaankami iti [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|alagaden ti panagaramid]], a maikuyog ti [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|listaan dagiti nangruna a plantilia a pakainayonan dagitoy]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Tumulong kadagiti agdadamo nga agar-aramat''' — No balliginto ti pannakairuar ti VisualEditor, ad-adunto met dagiti agar-aramat ngem ti nakasansanayantayo, ken urayno ti panag-urnos ket mabalin a nalaklaka, ti pannakitinnignay iti komunidad ket narigatto pay met laeng. Pangngaasi a padasen ti tumulong  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|idiay help desk, wenno idiay kanal ti tulong ti IRC]], tapno makatulong kadagitoy nga agdadamo a masanay iti Wikipedia.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>letv9w0alq6645oolq96o4b1vwgj5a4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/ilo</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>153701</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402431</id>
      <parentid>1266355</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:01:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="349" xml:space="preserve">Naragsak nga isasangbay iti portal para iti '''[[$ve|VisualEditor]]'''. Ti VisualEditor (VE) ket ti baro a waya ti panagurnos ti Wikipedia nga agdama a pinarparang-ay babaen ti pundasion ti Wikimedia. Daytoy ket mangpalubos iti tattao nga agurnos a saan nga agadal iti wiki markup.  Manamnamami a makatulongto iti tattao nga agparawad iti Wikipedia.</text>
      <sha1>a7vfninjvreaf96p88witn6t0vhttta</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/ilo</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>153737</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403231</id>
      <parentid>1803122</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:00:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="687" xml:space="preserve">* '''Pananginayon ti TemplateData kadagiti plantilia''' — ti VisualEditor ket addaan ti langa ti nasayaat nga editor ti plantilia, nga ipalawagminto a nasaysayaat idiay [[$ug|panid ti tulong]]. A kas makitamto no usarem daytoy iti Wikipedia, adda met dagiti plantilia nga addaan kadagiti nainagan a parametro ken dagiti nasayaat a deskripsion tapno nalaklakada a mausar. Dagiti dadduma ket awanda met. Daytoy ket gapu ta dagiti plantilia ket makasapulda ti &quot;TemplateData&quot; sakbay a mabalin daytoy a langa. No interesadoka nga aginayon ti TemplateData, adaankami iti [[$td-tutor|alagaden ti panagaramid]], a maikuyog ti [[$td|listaan dagiti nangruna a plantilia a pakainayonan dagitoy]].</text>
      <sha1>5247gt444anaanpti6fpms1r93a115x</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/ilo</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>153738</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403167</id>
      <parentid>1803129</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:40:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="435" xml:space="preserve">* '''Tumulong kadagiti agdadamo nga agar-aramat''' — No balliginto ti pannakairuar ti VisualEditor, ad-adunto met dagiti agar-aramat ngem ti nakasansanayantayo, ken urayno ti panag-urnos ket mabalin a nalaklaka, ti pannakitinnignay iti komunidad ket narigatto pay met laeng. Pangngaasi a padasen ti tumulong  [[$1|idiay help desk, wenno idiay kanal ti tulong ti IRC]], tapno makatulong kadagitoy nga agdadamo a masanay iti Wikipedia.</text>
      <sha1>nlzxjljzfd1gcg5y77wstggalefio8a</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/bs</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>154315</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402459</id>
      <parentid>4983779</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:09:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7794" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== О VisualEditor-u ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor je &quot;vizuelni&quot; način uređivanja Wikipedije, novi sistem koji omogućava uređivanje bez obaveze poznavanja wikimarkup-a. Dostupan je u vidu opcione &quot;alfa“ verzije na engleskoj Wikipediju od decembra 2012, [$blog-april u još 16 jezika od aprila 2013], i [$blog-june u skoro svim ostalim jezicima] od početka jula. Kao što je [[#Timetable|ispod objašnjeno]], očekujemo da ćemo ga omogućiti skoro svim korisnicima Wikipedije do kraja jula, počevši od engleske Wikipedije 1. jula.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

U ovom trenutku, VisualEditor ima mnogo grešaka, ali je to neizbježno. Ako se susretnete sa problemom u radu, slobodno to [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijavite na stranicu za povratne informacije]]. U nekim oblastima tek treba da napravimo potpuno nove funkcije. Trenutna ograničenja obuhvataju:

* '''Sporo učitavanje''' — Potrebno je dosta vremena da se duge i složene stranice učitaju u VisualEditor. U budućnosti će softver biti puno brži i omogućit će učitavanje dužih stranica.
* '''Nepotpuno uređivanje''' — Neki elementi &quot;složenog&quot; formatiranja se prikazuju i dozvoljavaju vam da uređujete njihov sadržaj, ali ne dozvoljavaju korisnicima da urede njihovu strukturu ili da ubace nove unose, kao što spiskovi definicija. Dodavanje opcija u ovoj oblasti nam je jedan od prioriteta.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Samo članci i korisničke stranice''' — VisualEditor će biti omogućen samo za imenske prostore članaka i korisnika (da biste mogli da probate na igralištu). Kasnije ćemo razviti posebne alate za uređivanje ne-članaka, ali zasada su prioritet članci.
&lt;/div&gt;

Zbog navedenih ograničenja i neizbježnih grešaka, preporučujemo da korisnici kliknu na &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prije nego što sačuvaju stranicu, i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijave svaki problem na koji nađu]].

== Kako pomoći? ==

Da bi VisualEditor bio što bolji, potrebna nam je pomoć oko mnogih stvari. Očigledno, jedna takva oblast je korištenje softvera, pronalaženje grešaka i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|njihovo prijavljivanje]], ali ima i mnogih drugih poslova. Tu spada:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Ažuriranje stranica za pomoć''' — Svi naši projekti imaju stranice za pomoć da bi se novim korisnicima olakšalo uređivanje. Nažalost, sve su zasnovane na wikimarkup uređivanju, pa će sva objašnjenja i uputstva postati zastarjela kada se objavi VisualEditor. Veoma bi bilo korisno kada bi se [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|obnovile stranice za pomoć]] na osnovu [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|našeg uputstva za korištenje VisualEditor-а]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Ubacivanje TemplateData u šablone''' — VisualEditor uključuje odličan uređivač šablona, koji je detaljno objašnjen na našoj [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|stranici za pomoć]]. Kao što ćete primjetiti ako ga koristite na Wikipediji, neki šabloni imaju imena parametara i opise koji ih čine lahkim za upotrebu. Drugi to nemaju. To je iz razloga što je šablonima potreban &quot;TemplateData&quot; da bi ovaj alat radio. Ako ste zainteresovani za ubacivanje TemplateData, tu je [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|uputstvo]] zajedno sa [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|spiskom najvažnijih šablona u koje je potrebno ubaciti ga]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Pomoć novim korisnicima''' — Ako objavljivanje VisualEditor-a bude uspješno, imat ćemo mnogo više novih korisnika nego što smo navikli, i mada će uređivanje biti jednostavnije, održavanje odnosa sa zajednicom će i dalje biti teško. Molimo Vas da odvojite malo vremena [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|za šalter za pomoć, ili za IRC kanal za pomoć]] kako biste pomogli novim korisnicima da se naviknu na Wikipediju.

==Također pogledajte==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>f8x0gku6y5g42077u7d8q1whibrgv8h</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402998</id>
      <parentid>5402459</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7834" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== О VisualEditor-u ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor je &quot;vizuelni&quot; način uređivanja Wikipedije, novi sistem koji omogućava uređivanje bez obaveze poznavanja wikimarkup-a. Dostupan je u vidu opcione &quot;alfa“ verzije na engleskoj Wikipediju od decembra 2012, [$blog-april u još 16 jezika od aprila 2013], i [$blog-june u skoro svim ostalim jezicima] od početka jula. Kao što je [[#Timetable|ispod objašnjeno]], očekujemo da ćemo ga omogućiti skoro svim korisnicima Wikipedije do kraja jula, počevši od engleske Wikipedije 1. jula.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

U ovom trenutku, VisualEditor ima mnogo grešaka, ali je to neizbježno. Ako se susretnete sa problemom u radu, slobodno to [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijavite na stranicu za povratne informacije]]. U nekim oblastima tek treba da napravimo potpuno nove funkcije. Trenutna ograničenja obuhvataju:

* '''Sporo učitavanje''' — Potrebno je dosta vremena da se duge i složene stranice učitaju u VisualEditor. U budućnosti će softver biti puno brži i omogućit će učitavanje dužih stranica.
* '''Nepotpuno uređivanje''' — Neki elementi &quot;složenog&quot; formatiranja se prikazuju i dozvoljavaju vam da uređujete njihov sadržaj, ali ne dozvoljavaju korisnicima da urede njihovu strukturu ili da ubace nove unose, kao što spiskovi definicija. Dodavanje opcija u ovoj oblasti nam je jedan od prioriteta.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Samo članci i korisničke stranice''' — VisualEditor će biti omogućen samo za imenske prostore članaka i korisnika (da biste mogli da probate na igralištu). Kasnije ćemo razviti posebne alate za uređivanje ne-članaka, ali zasada su prioritet članci.
&lt;/div&gt;

Zbog navedenih ograničenja i neizbježnih grešaka, preporučujemo da korisnici kliknu na &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prije nego što sačuvaju stranicu, i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijave svaki problem na koji nađu]].

== Kako pomoći? ==

Da bi VisualEditor bio što bolji, potrebna nam je pomoć oko mnogih stvari. Očigledno, jedna takva oblast je korištenje softvera, pronalaženje grešaka i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|njihovo prijavljivanje]], ali ima i mnogih drugih poslova. Tu spada:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Ažuriranje stranica za pomoć''' — Svi naši projekti imaju stranice za pomoć da bi se novim korisnicima olakšalo uređivanje. Nažalost, sve su zasnovane na wikimarkup uređivanju, pa će sva objašnjenja i uputstva postati zastarjela kada se objavi VisualEditor. Veoma bi bilo korisno kada bi se [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|obnovile stranice za pomoć]] na osnovu [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|našeg uputstva za korištenje VisualEditor-а]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Ubacivanje TemplateData u šablone''' — VisualEditor uključuje odličan uređivač šablona, koji je detaljno objašnjen na našoj [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|stranici za pomoć]]. Kao što ćete primjetiti ako ga koristite na Wikipediji, neki šabloni imaju imena parametara i opise koji ih čine lahkim za upotrebu. Drugi to nemaju. To je iz razloga što je šablonima potreban &quot;TemplateData&quot; da bi ovaj alat radio. Ako ste zainteresovani za ubacivanje TemplateData, tu je [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|uputstvo]] zajedno sa [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|spiskom najvažnijih šablona u koje je potrebno ubaciti ga]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Pomoć novim korisnicima''' — Ako objavljivanje VisualEditor-a bude uspješno, imat ćemo mnogo više novih korisnika nego što smo navikli, i mada će uređivanje biti jednostavnije, održavanje odnosa sa zajednicom će i dalje biti teško. Molimo Vas da odvojite malo vremena [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|za šalter za pomoć, ili za IRC kanal za pomoć]] kako biste pomogli novim korisnicima da se naviknu na Wikipediju.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Također pogledajte==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>29iw5hhz2jnswjn4b2mwce98vhe026h</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403037</id>
      <parentid>5402998</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:54:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7794" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== О VisualEditor-u ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor je &quot;vizuelni&quot; način uređivanja Wikipedije, novi sistem koji omogućava uređivanje bez obaveze poznavanja wikimarkup-a. Dostupan je u vidu opcione &quot;alfa“ verzije na engleskoj Wikipediju od decembra 2012, [$blog-april u još 16 jezika od aprila 2013], i [$blog-june u skoro svim ostalim jezicima] od početka jula. Kao što je [[#Timetable|ispod objašnjeno]], očekujemo da ćemo ga omogućiti skoro svim korisnicima Wikipedije do kraja jula, počevši od engleske Wikipedije 1. jula.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

U ovom trenutku, VisualEditor ima mnogo grešaka, ali je to neizbježno. Ako se susretnete sa problemom u radu, slobodno to [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijavite na stranicu za povratne informacije]]. U nekim oblastima tek treba da napravimo potpuno nove funkcije. Trenutna ograničenja obuhvataju:

* '''Sporo učitavanje''' — Potrebno je dosta vremena da se duge i složene stranice učitaju u VisualEditor. U budućnosti će softver biti puno brži i omogućit će učitavanje dužih stranica.
* '''Nepotpuno uređivanje''' — Neki elementi &quot;složenog&quot; formatiranja se prikazuju i dozvoljavaju vam da uređujete njihov sadržaj, ali ne dozvoljavaju korisnicima da urede njihovu strukturu ili da ubace nove unose, kao što spiskovi definicija. Dodavanje opcija u ovoj oblasti nam je jedan od prioriteta.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Samo članci i korisničke stranice''' — VisualEditor će biti omogućen samo za imenske prostore članaka i korisnika (da biste mogli da probate na igralištu). Kasnije ćemo razviti posebne alate za uređivanje ne-članaka, ali zasada su prioritet članci.
&lt;/div&gt;

Zbog navedenih ograničenja i neizbježnih grešaka, preporučujemo da korisnici kliknu na &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prije nego što sačuvaju stranicu, i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijave svaki problem na koji nađu]].

== Kako pomoći? ==

Da bi VisualEditor bio što bolji, potrebna nam je pomoć oko mnogih stvari. Očigledno, jedna takva oblast je korištenje softvera, pronalaženje grešaka i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|njihovo prijavljivanje]], ali ima i mnogih drugih poslova. Tu spada:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Ažuriranje stranica za pomoć''' — Svi naši projekti imaju stranice za pomoć da bi se novim korisnicima olakšalo uređivanje. Nažalost, sve su zasnovane na wikimarkup uređivanju, pa će sva objašnjenja i uputstva postati zastarjela kada se objavi VisualEditor. Veoma bi bilo korisno kada bi se [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|obnovile stranice za pomoć]] na osnovu [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|našeg uputstva za korištenje VisualEditor-а]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Ubacivanje TemplateData u šablone''' — VisualEditor uključuje odličan uređivač šablona, koji je detaljno objašnjen na našoj [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|stranici za pomoć]]. Kao što ćete primjetiti ako ga koristite na Wikipediji, neki šabloni imaju imena parametara i opise koji ih čine lahkim za upotrebu. Drugi to nemaju. To je iz razloga što je šablonima potreban &quot;TemplateData&quot; da bi ovaj alat radio. Ako ste zainteresovani za ubacivanje TemplateData, tu je [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|uputstvo]] zajedno sa [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|spiskom najvažnijih šablona u koje je potrebno ubaciti ga]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Pomoć novim korisnicima''' — Ako objavljivanje VisualEditor-a bude uspješno, imat ćemo mnogo više novih korisnika nego što smo navikli, i mada će uređivanje biti jednostavnije, održavanje odnosa sa zajednicom će i dalje biti teško. Molimo Vas da odvojite malo vremena [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|za šalter za pomoć, ili za IRC kanal za pomoć]] kako biste pomogli novim korisnicima da se naviknu na Wikipediju.

==Također pogledajte==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>f8x0gku6y5g42077u7d8q1whibrgv8h</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403204</id>
      <parentid>5403037</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:48:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7812" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== О VisualEditor-u ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor je &quot;vizuelni&quot; način uređivanja Wikipedije, novi sistem koji omogućava uređivanje bez obaveze poznavanja wikimarkup-a. Dostupan je u vidu opcione &quot;alfa“ verzije na engleskoj Wikipediju od decembra 2012, [$blog-april u još 16 jezika od aprila 2013], i [$blog-june u skoro svim ostalim jezicima] od početka jula. Kao što je [[#Timetable|ispod objašnjeno]], očekujemo da ćemo ga omogućiti skoro svim korisnicima Wikipedije do kraja jula, počevši od engleske Wikipedije 1. jula.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

U ovom trenutku, VisualEditor ima mnogo grešaka, ali je to neizbježno. Ako se susretnete sa problemom u radu, slobodno to [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijavite na stranicu za povratne informacije]]. U nekim oblastima tek treba da napravimo potpuno nove funkcije. Trenutna ograničenja obuhvataju:

* '''Sporo učitavanje''' — Potrebno je dosta vremena da se duge i složene stranice učitaju u VisualEditor. U budućnosti će softver biti puno brži i omogućit će učitavanje dužih stranica.
* '''Nepotpuno uređivanje''' — Neki elementi &quot;složenog&quot; formatiranja se prikazuju i dozvoljavaju vam da uređujete njihov sadržaj, ali ne dozvoljavaju korisnicima da urede njihovu strukturu ili da ubace nove unose, kao što spiskovi definicija. Dodavanje opcija u ovoj oblasti nam je jedan od prioriteta.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Samo članci i korisničke stranice''' — VisualEditor će biti omogućen samo za imenske prostore članaka i korisnika (da biste mogli da probate na igralištu). Kasnije ćemo razviti posebne alate za uređivanje ne-članaka, ali zasada su prioritet članci.
&lt;/div&gt;

Zbog navedenih ograničenja i neizbježnih grešaka, preporučujemo da korisnici kliknu na &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prije nego što sačuvaju stranicu, i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijave svaki problem na koji nađu]].

== Kako pomoći? ==

Da bi VisualEditor bio što bolji, potrebna nam je pomoć oko mnogih stvari. Očigledno, jedna takva oblast je korištenje softvera, pronalaženje grešaka i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|njihovo prijavljivanje]], ali ima i mnogih drugih poslova. Tu spada:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Ažuriranje stranica za pomoć''' — Svi naši projekti imaju stranice za pomoć da bi se novim korisnicima olakšalo uređivanje. Nažalost, sve su zasnovane na wikimarkup uređivanju, pa će sva objašnjenja i uputstva postati zastarjela kada se objavi VisualEditor. Veoma bi bilo korisno kada bi se [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|obnovile stranice za pomoć]] na osnovu [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|našeg uputstva za korištenje VisualEditor-а]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Ubacivanje TemplateData u šablone''' — VisualEditor uključuje odličan uređivač šablona, koji je detaljno objašnjen na našoj [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|stranici za pomoć]]. Kao što ćete primjetiti ako ga koristite na Wikipediji, neki šabloni imaju imena parametara i opise koji ih čine lahkim za upotrebu. Drugi to nemaju. To je iz razloga što je šablonima potreban &quot;TemplateData&quot; da bi ovaj alat radio. Ako ste zainteresovani za ubacivanje TemplateData, tu je [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|uputstvo]] zajedno sa [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|spiskom najvažnijih šablona u koje je potrebno ubaciti ga]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Pomoć novim korisnicima''' — Ako objavljivanje VisualEditor-a bude uspješno, imat ćemo mnogo više novih korisnika nego što smo navikli, i mada će uređivanje biti jednostavnije, održavanje odnosa sa zajednicom će i dalje biti teško. Molimo Vas da odvojite malo vremena [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|za šalter za pomoć, ili za IRC kanal za pomoć]] kako biste pomogli novim korisnicima da se naviknu na Wikipediju.

==Također pogledajte==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>222hdl8daf98sb25btu504mbd95dava</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/bs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>154553</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403203</id>
      <parentid>1802657</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:48:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="563" xml:space="preserve">* '''Ubacivanje TemplateData u šablone''' — VisualEditor uključuje odličan uređivač šablona, koji je detaljno objašnjen na našoj [[$ug|stranici za pomoć]]. Kao što ćete primjetiti ako ga koristite na Wikipediji, neki šabloni imaju imena parametara i opise koji ih čine lahkim za upotrebu. Drugi to nemaju. To je iz razloga što je šablonima potreban &quot;TemplateData&quot; da bi ovaj alat radio. Ako ste zainteresovani za ubacivanje TemplateData, tu je [[$td-tutor|uputstvo]] zajedno sa [[$td|spiskom najvažnijih šablona u koje je potrebno ubaciti ga]].</text>
      <sha1>honz0oyfxzs0qd5fy54t80qm3ils629</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/bs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>154555</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403036</id>
      <parentid>1802659</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:54:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="406" xml:space="preserve">* '''Pomoć novim korisnicima''' — Ako objavljivanje VisualEditor-a bude uspješno, imat ćemo mnogo više novih korisnika nego što smo navikli, i mada će uređivanje biti jednostavnije, održavanje odnosa sa zajednicom će i dalje biti teško. Molimo Vas da odvojite malo vremena [[$1|za šalter za pomoć, ili za IRC kanal za pomoć]] kako biste pomogli novim korisnicima da se naviknu na Wikipediju.</text>
      <sha1>tvcr9d3rbq4itqcqvkxun7uu48frht3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>154585</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403301</id>
      <parentid>3483292</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:16:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="239" xml:space="preserve">これらの通知の一部は既定で無効、もしくはご利用のウィキで使用できません。これらの通知のいずれかを有効 (または無効) にしたい場合は、[[$1|個人設定]]にて設定できます。</text>
      <sha1>g1o5ybu8wy2rn8296a4h64wd5ffrxje</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/id</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>154594</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402429</id>
      <parentid>1270124</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:01:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="352" xml:space="preserve">Selamat datang di portal '''[[$ve|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) adalah sebuah cara baru dalam menyunting Wikipedia yang sedang dikembangkan oleh Wikimedia Foundation. VisualEditor memperbolehkan seseorang untuk menyunting tanpa harus mempelajari markah wiki. Kami berharap VisualEditor akan membantu orang-orang dalam berkontribusi di Wikipedia.</text>
      <sha1>l0hzpy5tiwu5qhw33j9q5o2vcaoonwe</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/hr</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>154696</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402419</id>
      <parentid>4983791</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:57:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7925" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== O VisualEditoru ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor je „vizualni“ način uređivanja Wikipedije, novi sustav koji će privući ljude uređivanju bez potrebe poznavanja wikimarkup-a. Od prosinca 2012. dostupan je kao izborna „alfa“ inačica na Wikipediji na engleskom jeziku, a od [$blog-april travnja 2013. i na 16 drugih jezičnih projekata] te i na [$blog-june ostalim jezicima] od početka lipnja. Kao što je [[#Raspored|objašnjeno dolje]], očekujemo da će postati dostupan za sve Wikipedije od kraja srpnja, počevši od Wikipedije na engleskom jeziku 1. srpnja.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Trenutačno VisualEditor ima puno pogrješaka jer one su neizbježne. Ako primjetite neki problem, možete to [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijaviti na stranicu za povratne informacije]]. Također, u nekim područjima tek trebamo razviti nove mogućnosti. Trenutačna ograničenja uključuju:

* '''sporo učitavanje''' — Potrebno je puno vremena da bi se velike i kompleksne stranice učitale u VisualEditoru. Ubuduće će program biti značajno brži i omogućit će učitavanje većih stranica.
* '''nepotpuno uređivanje''' — Neki elementi „složenog“ formatiranja prikazuju se i dopuštaju uređivanje njihovog sadržaja, ali ne dopuštaju suradnicima uređivanje njihove strukture ili dodavanje novih stavaka, kao što su definicijski popisi. Dodavanje svojstava u ovom području jedan je od naših prioriteta.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''samo članci i suradničke stranice''' — VisualEditor bit će omogućen samo za imenske prostore članaka i suradničkih stranica (kako biste mogli izmjenjivati u osobnom pješčaniku). Kasnije ćemo razviti posebne alate za uređivanje ne-članaka, ali trenutačno smo usredotočeni na članke.
&lt;/div&gt;

Zbog navedenih ograničenja i neizbježnih grješaka, preporučujemo suradnicima da kliknu „{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}“ prije spremanja izmjena i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijave svaki problem na koji naiđu]].

== Kako pomoći? ==

Kako bi VisualEditor bio što bolji, potrebna nam je pomoć oko puno stvari. Očito, jedno veliko područje je uporaba programa, pronalaženje grješaka i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|njihovo prijavljivanje]], ali i razni ostali zadatci. To uključuje:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''ažuriranje stranica za pomoć''' — Svi naši projekti imaju stranice za pomoć, kojima se novim suradnicima olakšava uređivanje. Nažalost, sve one zasnovane su na markup uređivanju, tako da će nakon pokretanja VisualEditora objašnjenja i upute postati zastarjeli. Bilo bi vrlo korisno kada bi suradnici [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|ažurirali stranice za pomoć]], na osnovi [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|naših uputa o uporabi VisualEditora]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''dodavanje TemplateData u predloške''' — VisualEditor uključuje odličan uređivač predložaka, koji je detaljnije objašnjen na našoj [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|stranici za pomoć]]. Kao što ćete primjetiti ako ga rabite na Wikipediji, neki predlošci imaju imenovane parametre i lijepe opise koji olakšavaju uporabu. Ostali to nemaju. Zato je „TemplateData“ potreban predlošcima, kako bi ovo što bolje radilo. Ako želite pomoći u dodavanju TemplateData, imamo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|upute kako to učiniti]], kao i [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|popis najvažnijih predložaka kojima ga je potrebno dodati]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''pomoć novim suradnicima''' — Ako objavljivanje VisualEditora bude uspješno, imat ćemo puno više novih suradnika nego što smo navikli. Iako će uređivanje biti lakše, održavanje odnosa sa zajednicom i dalje će biti teško. Molimo Vas da odvojiti nešto vremena [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|za šalter za pomoć, ili na kanalu IRC-a za pomoć]], kako biste pomogli novim suradnicima da se naviknu na Wikipediju.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>qvq7av4u56yiggl426o8s9p1a2w3tuw</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403010</id>
      <parentid>5402419</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7965" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== O VisualEditoru ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor je „vizualni“ način uređivanja Wikipedije, novi sustav koji će privući ljude uređivanju bez potrebe poznavanja wikimarkup-a. Od prosinca 2012. dostupan je kao izborna „alfa“ inačica na Wikipediji na engleskom jeziku, a od [$blog-april travnja 2013. i na 16 drugih jezičnih projekata] te i na [$blog-june ostalim jezicima] od početka lipnja. Kao što je [[#Raspored|objašnjeno dolje]], očekujemo da će postati dostupan za sve Wikipedije od kraja srpnja, počevši od Wikipedije na engleskom jeziku 1. srpnja.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Trenutačno VisualEditor ima puno pogrješaka jer one su neizbježne. Ako primjetite neki problem, možete to [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijaviti na stranicu za povratne informacije]]. Također, u nekim područjima tek trebamo razviti nove mogućnosti. Trenutačna ograničenja uključuju:

* '''sporo učitavanje''' — Potrebno je puno vremena da bi se velike i kompleksne stranice učitale u VisualEditoru. Ubuduće će program biti značajno brži i omogućit će učitavanje većih stranica.
* '''nepotpuno uređivanje''' — Neki elementi „složenog“ formatiranja prikazuju se i dopuštaju uređivanje njihovog sadržaja, ali ne dopuštaju suradnicima uređivanje njihove strukture ili dodavanje novih stavaka, kao što su definicijski popisi. Dodavanje svojstava u ovom području jedan je od naših prioriteta.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''samo članci i suradničke stranice''' — VisualEditor bit će omogućen samo za imenske prostore članaka i suradničkih stranica (kako biste mogli izmjenjivati u osobnom pješčaniku). Kasnije ćemo razviti posebne alate za uređivanje ne-članaka, ali trenutačno smo usredotočeni na članke.
&lt;/div&gt;

Zbog navedenih ograničenja i neizbježnih grješaka, preporučujemo suradnicima da kliknu „{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}“ prije spremanja izmjena i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijave svaki problem na koji naiđu]].

== Kako pomoći? ==

Kako bi VisualEditor bio što bolji, potrebna nam je pomoć oko puno stvari. Očito, jedno veliko područje je uporaba programa, pronalaženje grješaka i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|njihovo prijavljivanje]], ali i razni ostali zadatci. To uključuje:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''ažuriranje stranica za pomoć''' — Svi naši projekti imaju stranice za pomoć, kojima se novim suradnicima olakšava uređivanje. Nažalost, sve one zasnovane su na markup uređivanju, tako da će nakon pokretanja VisualEditora objašnjenja i upute postati zastarjeli. Bilo bi vrlo korisno kada bi suradnici [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|ažurirali stranice za pomoć]], na osnovi [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|naših uputa o uporabi VisualEditora]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''dodavanje TemplateData u predloške''' — VisualEditor uključuje odličan uređivač predložaka, koji je detaljnije objašnjen na našoj [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|stranici za pomoć]]. Kao što ćete primjetiti ako ga rabite na Wikipediji, neki predlošci imaju imenovane parametre i lijepe opise koji olakšavaju uporabu. Ostali to nemaju. Zato je „TemplateData“ potreban predlošcima, kako bi ovo što bolje radilo. Ako želite pomoći u dodavanju TemplateData, imamo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|upute kako to učiniti]], kao i [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|popis najvažnijih predložaka kojima ga je potrebno dodati]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''pomoć novim suradnicima''' — Ako objavljivanje VisualEditora bude uspješno, imat ćemo puno više novih suradnika nego što smo navikli. Iako će uređivanje biti lakše, održavanje odnosa sa zajednicom i dalje će biti teško. Molimo Vas da odvojiti nešto vremena [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|za šalter za pomoć, ili na kanalu IRC-a za pomoć]], kako biste pomogli novim suradnicima da se naviknu na Wikipediju.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>h6o981f9r1qbahaj340p00vlfa05jfl</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403061</id>
      <parentid>5403010</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:02:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7925" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== O VisualEditoru ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor je „vizualni“ način uređivanja Wikipedije, novi sustav koji će privući ljude uređivanju bez potrebe poznavanja wikimarkup-a. Od prosinca 2012. dostupan je kao izborna „alfa“ inačica na Wikipediji na engleskom jeziku, a od [$blog-april travnja 2013. i na 16 drugih jezičnih projekata] te i na [$blog-june ostalim jezicima] od početka lipnja. Kao što je [[#Raspored|objašnjeno dolje]], očekujemo da će postati dostupan za sve Wikipedije od kraja srpnja, počevši od Wikipedije na engleskom jeziku 1. srpnja.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Trenutačno VisualEditor ima puno pogrješaka jer one su neizbježne. Ako primjetite neki problem, možete to [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijaviti na stranicu za povratne informacije]]. Također, u nekim područjima tek trebamo razviti nove mogućnosti. Trenutačna ograničenja uključuju:

* '''sporo učitavanje''' — Potrebno je puno vremena da bi se velike i kompleksne stranice učitale u VisualEditoru. Ubuduće će program biti značajno brži i omogućit će učitavanje većih stranica.
* '''nepotpuno uređivanje''' — Neki elementi „složenog“ formatiranja prikazuju se i dopuštaju uređivanje njihovog sadržaja, ali ne dopuštaju suradnicima uređivanje njihove strukture ili dodavanje novih stavaka, kao što su definicijski popisi. Dodavanje svojstava u ovom području jedan je od naših prioriteta.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''samo članci i suradničke stranice''' — VisualEditor bit će omogućen samo za imenske prostore članaka i suradničkih stranica (kako biste mogli izmjenjivati u osobnom pješčaniku). Kasnije ćemo razviti posebne alate za uređivanje ne-članaka, ali trenutačno smo usredotočeni na članke.
&lt;/div&gt;

Zbog navedenih ograničenja i neizbježnih grješaka, preporučujemo suradnicima da kliknu „{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}“ prije spremanja izmjena i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijave svaki problem na koji naiđu]].

== Kako pomoći? ==

Kako bi VisualEditor bio što bolji, potrebna nam je pomoć oko puno stvari. Očito, jedno veliko područje je uporaba programa, pronalaženje grješaka i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|njihovo prijavljivanje]], ali i razni ostali zadatci. To uključuje:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''ažuriranje stranica za pomoć''' — Svi naši projekti imaju stranice za pomoć, kojima se novim suradnicima olakšava uređivanje. Nažalost, sve one zasnovane su na markup uređivanju, tako da će nakon pokretanja VisualEditora objašnjenja i upute postati zastarjeli. Bilo bi vrlo korisno kada bi suradnici [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|ažurirali stranice za pomoć]], na osnovi [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|naših uputa o uporabi VisualEditora]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''dodavanje TemplateData u predloške''' — VisualEditor uključuje odličan uređivač predložaka, koji je detaljnije objašnjen na našoj [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|stranici za pomoć]]. Kao što ćete primjetiti ako ga rabite na Wikipediji, neki predlošci imaju imenovane parametre i lijepe opise koji olakšavaju uporabu. Ostali to nemaju. Zato je „TemplateData“ potreban predlošcima, kako bi ovo što bolje radilo. Ako želite pomoći u dodavanju TemplateData, imamo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|upute kako to učiniti]], kao i [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|popis najvažnijih predložaka kojima ga je potrebno dodati]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''pomoć novim suradnicima''' — Ako objavljivanje VisualEditora bude uspješno, imat ćemo puno više novih suradnika nego što smo navikli. Iako će uređivanje biti lakše, održavanje odnosa sa zajednicom i dalje će biti teško. Molimo Vas da odvojiti nešto vremena [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|za šalter za pomoć, ili na kanalu IRC-a za pomoć]], kako biste pomogli novim suradnicima da se naviknu na Wikipediju.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>qvq7av4u56yiggl426o8s9p1a2w3tuw</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403225</id>
      <parentid>5403061</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:57:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7943" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== O VisualEditoru ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor je „vizualni“ način uređivanja Wikipedije, novi sustav koji će privući ljude uređivanju bez potrebe poznavanja wikimarkup-a. Od prosinca 2012. dostupan je kao izborna „alfa“ inačica na Wikipediji na engleskom jeziku, a od [$blog-april travnja 2013. i na 16 drugih jezičnih projekata] te i na [$blog-june ostalim jezicima] od početka lipnja. Kao što je [[#Raspored|objašnjeno dolje]], očekujemo da će postati dostupan za sve Wikipedije od kraja srpnja, počevši od Wikipedije na engleskom jeziku 1. srpnja.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Trenutačno VisualEditor ima puno pogrješaka jer one su neizbježne. Ako primjetite neki problem, možete to [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijaviti na stranicu za povratne informacije]]. Također, u nekim područjima tek trebamo razviti nove mogućnosti. Trenutačna ograničenja uključuju:

* '''sporo učitavanje''' — Potrebno je puno vremena da bi se velike i kompleksne stranice učitale u VisualEditoru. Ubuduće će program biti značajno brži i omogućit će učitavanje većih stranica.
* '''nepotpuno uređivanje''' — Neki elementi „složenog“ formatiranja prikazuju se i dopuštaju uređivanje njihovog sadržaja, ali ne dopuštaju suradnicima uređivanje njihove strukture ili dodavanje novih stavaka, kao što su definicijski popisi. Dodavanje svojstava u ovom području jedan je od naših prioriteta.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''samo članci i suradničke stranice''' — VisualEditor bit će omogućen samo za imenske prostore članaka i suradničkih stranica (kako biste mogli izmjenjivati u osobnom pješčaniku). Kasnije ćemo razviti posebne alate za uređivanje ne-članaka, ali trenutačno smo usredotočeni na članke.
&lt;/div&gt;

Zbog navedenih ograničenja i neizbježnih grješaka, preporučujemo suradnicima da kliknu „{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}“ prije spremanja izmjena i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|prijave svaki problem na koji naiđu]].

== Kako pomoći? ==

Kako bi VisualEditor bio što bolji, potrebna nam je pomoć oko puno stvari. Očito, jedno veliko područje je uporaba programa, pronalaženje grješaka i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|njihovo prijavljivanje]], ali i razni ostali zadatci. To uključuje:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''ažuriranje stranica za pomoć''' — Svi naši projekti imaju stranice za pomoć, kojima se novim suradnicima olakšava uređivanje. Nažalost, sve one zasnovane su na markup uređivanju, tako da će nakon pokretanja VisualEditora objašnjenja i upute postati zastarjeli. Bilo bi vrlo korisno kada bi suradnici [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|ažurirali stranice za pomoć]], na osnovi [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|naših uputa o uporabi VisualEditora]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''dodavanje TemplateData u predloške''' — VisualEditor uključuje odličan uređivač predložaka, koji je detaljnije objašnjen na našoj [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|stranici za pomoć]]. Kao što ćete primjetiti ako ga rabite na Wikipediji, neki predlošci imaju imenovane parametre i lijepe opise koji olakšavaju uporabu. Ostali to nemaju. Zato je „TemplateData“ potreban predlošcima, kako bi ovo što bolje radilo. Ako želite pomoći u dodavanju TemplateData, imamo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|upute kako to učiniti]], kao i [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|popis najvažnijih predložaka kojima ga je potrebno dodati]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''pomoć novim suradnicima''' — Ako objavljivanje VisualEditora bude uspješno, imat ćemo puno više novih suradnika nego što smo navikli. Iako će uređivanje biti lakše, održavanje odnosa sa zajednicom i dalje će biti teško. Molimo Vas da odvojiti nešto vremena [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|za šalter za pomoć, ili na kanalu IRC-a za pomoć]], kako biste pomogli novim suradnicima da se naviknu na Wikipediju.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>7obd3v953girbqpfrbh1v34iiin3z90</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/hr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>154915</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403224</id>
      <parentid>1803036</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:57:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="574" xml:space="preserve">* '''dodavanje TemplateData u predloške''' — VisualEditor uključuje odličan uređivač predložaka, koji je detaljnije objašnjen na našoj [[$ug|stranici za pomoć]]. Kao što ćete primjetiti ako ga rabite na Wikipediji, neki predlošci imaju imenovane parametre i lijepe opise koji olakšavaju uporabu. Ostali to nemaju. Zato je „TemplateData“ potreban predlošcima, kako bi ovo što bolje radilo. Ako želite pomoći u dodavanju TemplateData, imamo [[$td-tutor|upute kako to učiniti]], kao i [[$td|popis najvažnijih predložaka kojima ga je potrebno dodati]].</text>
      <sha1>mjx9wgqmiwu8ahytnkfzicrgydeoof3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/hr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>154916</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403060</id>
      <parentid>1803042</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:02:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="401" xml:space="preserve">* '''pomoć novim suradnicima''' — Ako objavljivanje VisualEditora bude uspješno, imat ćemo puno više novih suradnika nego što smo navikli. Iako će uređivanje biti lakše, održavanje odnosa sa zajednicom i dalje će biti teško. Molimo Vas da odvojiti nešto vremena [[$1|za šalter za pomoć, ili na kanalu IRC-a za pomoć]], kako biste pomogli novim suradnicima da se naviknu na Wikipediju.</text>
      <sha1>juzs5mkcp1dmsq88u1ry5e5r66tns8t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/id</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>155019</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403229</id>
      <parentid>1803093</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:59:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="651" xml:space="preserve">* '''Menambahkan DataTemplat di templat''' — VisualEditor menyertakan penyunting templat yang cantik, seperti yang dijelaskan lebih rinci di [[$ug|halaman bantuan]] kami. Seperti yang Anda lihat saat menggunakan templat di Wikipedia, beberapa templat memiliki parameter bernama dan penjelasan yang bagus yang mempermudah penggunaannya. Namun ada beberapa templat yang tidak memilikinya. Ini karena templat memerlukan &quot;DataTemplat&quot; agar fitur ini dapat berfungsi. Jika Anda tertarik dalam menambahkan DataTemplat, kami memiliki [[$td-tutor|panduan untuk melakukannya]], berserta [[$td|daftar templat paling penting untuk ditambahkan DataTemplatnya]].</text>
      <sha1>rwt1v9gmnqd8qpt10bbmjz6cza83jwb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/id</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>155021</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403165</id>
      <parentid>1803097</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:40:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="446" xml:space="preserve">* '''Membantu pengguna baru''' — Jika peluncuran VisualEditor berhasil, kita akan memiliki lebih banyak pengguna baru dari jumlah yang kita miliki biasanya, dan meskipun penyuntingan mungkin menjadi lebih mudah, mencari tahu cara untuk berinteraksi dengan komunitas tetaplah sulit. Silakan luangkan lebih banyak waktu [[$1|di meja bantuan, atau di saluran bantuan IRC]], untuk membantu para pendatang baru ini menjadi terbiasa dengan Wikipedia.</text>
      <sha1>toju123t078idmf0w77lyj6zn7zugx5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/ms</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>156171</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402423</id>
      <parentid>4985229</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:59:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8235" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tentang VisualEditor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor ialah cara menyunting Wikipedia secara &quot;visual&quot;, sebuah sistem yang akan membolehkan para penyumbang untuk menyunting tanpa perlu mempelajari bahasa penanda wiki. Ia sudahpun disediakan sebagai  pilihan &quot;alpha&quot; pada Wikipedia bahasa Inggeris semenjak Disember 2012, [$blog-april dalam 16 bahasa lain semenjak April 2013], dan [$blog-june hampir semua bahasa] semenjak awal Jun. Seperti yang [[#Timetable|diterangkan di bawah]], kami menjangka ia akan tersedia untuk hampir semua Wikipedia, bermula dengan Wikipedia bahasa Inggeris, pada 1 Julai.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Buat masa ini, VisualEditor masih ada beberapa pepijat dan ini tidak dapat dielakkan.  Jika anda mengalami sebarang isu, sila jangan teragak-agak untuk [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkannya di laman maklum balas]]. Masih ada beberapa perkara yang memerlukan penciptaan ciri-ciri baharu. Hambatan-hambatan buat masa kini termasuk:

* '''Pemuatan yang perlahan ''' — Laman-laman panjang dan komplek mengamvil masa yang lama untuk dimuatkan ke dalam VisualEditor. Perisian akan lebih pantas pada masa hadapan, dan akan laman-laman yang panjang akan dapat dimuatkan.
* '''Penyuntingan tidak lengkap''' — Beberapa unsur pemformatan &quot;kompleks&quot; akan dipaparkan dan membolehkan anda menyunting kandungannya, akan tetapi tidak akan membenarkan pengguna lain menyunting struktur ataupun menambah entri-entri baharu – seperti senarai definisi. Penambahan ciri-ciri seperti ini ialah satu daripada keutamaan kami.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Laman-laman Rencana dan laman Pengguna sahaja''' — VisualEditor akan hanya dihidupkan untuk ruang nama rencana dan pengguna (agar anda akan dapat membuat perubahan dalam kotak pasir peribadi). Pada masa mendatang, kami akan bina pelbagai jenis perkakas suntingan khusus yang diperlukan buat penulisan bukan rencana, namun fokus kami adalah terhadap rencana.
&lt;/div&gt;

Disebabkan hambatan-hambatan in, dan juga pepijat yang tidak dapat dielakkan, kami mengsyorkan yang para pengguna memetik &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; sebelum menyimpan laman, dan [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkan sebarang masalah yang dialami]].

== Bagaimana untuk membantu ==

Kami memerlukan bantaun dalam banyak perkara agar VisualEditor dapat berfungsi sebaik mungkin. Sudah tentu satu perkara besar ialah penggunaan perisian, mencari pepijat dan [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkan pepijat]]; namun demikian terdapat banyak tugas lain. Tugas-tugas ini termasuk:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Mengemas kini laman-laman bantuan''' — Semua projek kami memiliki laman bantuan bagi membantu pengguna baru agar dapat menyumbang. Malangnya kesemua laman ini berkaitan dengan penyunting penanda, dan apabila VisualEditor dilancarkan, gambar-gambar tawan skrin dan tutorial menjadi lapuk. Amatlah berguna jika orang ramai dapt  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|mengemas kini laman bantuan]], berlandaskan [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|tutorial kami tentang penggunaan VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Menambah TemplateData pada templat''' — VisualEditor memiliki sebuah penyunting templat, yang diperincikan pada [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|laman bantuan]]. Seperti yang anda dapat lihat jika anda menggunanya pada Wikipedia, sebilangan templat memiliki parameter ternama dan pemerian yang memudahkan penggunaanya. Yang lain tidak sedimikian. Ini disebabkan tempalt-templat ini memerlukan &quot;TemplateData&quot; sebelum dapat digunakan. Jika anda berminat untuk menambahkan TemplateData, kami ada [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|garis panduan]] untuk melakukannya, bersama-sama [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|senarai templat yang paling penting yang memerlukannnya]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Bantu pengguna baru ''' — Jika pelancaran VisualEditor berjaya, kita akan mempunyai lebih banyak pengguna daripada biasa, dan mahupun penyuntingan akan memnjadi lebih mudah, memahami bagaimana mahu berinteraksi dengan komuniti masih susah. Sila meluangkan masa anda di  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|meja bantuan, atuapun di saluran bantuan IRC]], bagi membantu penygguna baru menyesuaikan diri mereka dengan Wikipedia.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>rphy5jhmvsraoml8ez2fjpl9qxyydh1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403018</id>
      <parentid>5402423</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8275" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tentang VisualEditor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor ialah cara menyunting Wikipedia secara &quot;visual&quot;, sebuah sistem yang akan membolehkan para penyumbang untuk menyunting tanpa perlu mempelajari bahasa penanda wiki. Ia sudahpun disediakan sebagai  pilihan &quot;alpha&quot; pada Wikipedia bahasa Inggeris semenjak Disember 2012, [$blog-april dalam 16 bahasa lain semenjak April 2013], dan [$blog-june hampir semua bahasa] semenjak awal Jun. Seperti yang [[#Timetable|diterangkan di bawah]], kami menjangka ia akan tersedia untuk hampir semua Wikipedia, bermula dengan Wikipedia bahasa Inggeris, pada 1 Julai.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Buat masa ini, VisualEditor masih ada beberapa pepijat dan ini tidak dapat dielakkan.  Jika anda mengalami sebarang isu, sila jangan teragak-agak untuk [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkannya di laman maklum balas]]. Masih ada beberapa perkara yang memerlukan penciptaan ciri-ciri baharu. Hambatan-hambatan buat masa kini termasuk:

* '''Pemuatan yang perlahan ''' — Laman-laman panjang dan komplek mengamvil masa yang lama untuk dimuatkan ke dalam VisualEditor. Perisian akan lebih pantas pada masa hadapan, dan akan laman-laman yang panjang akan dapat dimuatkan.
* '''Penyuntingan tidak lengkap''' — Beberapa unsur pemformatan &quot;kompleks&quot; akan dipaparkan dan membolehkan anda menyunting kandungannya, akan tetapi tidak akan membenarkan pengguna lain menyunting struktur ataupun menambah entri-entri baharu – seperti senarai definisi. Penambahan ciri-ciri seperti ini ialah satu daripada keutamaan kami.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Laman-laman Rencana dan laman Pengguna sahaja''' — VisualEditor akan hanya dihidupkan untuk ruang nama rencana dan pengguna (agar anda akan dapat membuat perubahan dalam kotak pasir peribadi). Pada masa mendatang, kami akan bina pelbagai jenis perkakas suntingan khusus yang diperlukan buat penulisan bukan rencana, namun fokus kami adalah terhadap rencana.
&lt;/div&gt;

Disebabkan hambatan-hambatan in, dan juga pepijat yang tidak dapat dielakkan, kami mengsyorkan yang para pengguna memetik &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; sebelum menyimpan laman, dan [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkan sebarang masalah yang dialami]].

== Bagaimana untuk membantu ==

Kami memerlukan bantaun dalam banyak perkara agar VisualEditor dapat berfungsi sebaik mungkin. Sudah tentu satu perkara besar ialah penggunaan perisian, mencari pepijat dan [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkan pepijat]]; namun demikian terdapat banyak tugas lain. Tugas-tugas ini termasuk:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Mengemas kini laman-laman bantuan''' — Semua projek kami memiliki laman bantuan bagi membantu pengguna baru agar dapat menyumbang. Malangnya kesemua laman ini berkaitan dengan penyunting penanda, dan apabila VisualEditor dilancarkan, gambar-gambar tawan skrin dan tutorial menjadi lapuk. Amatlah berguna jika orang ramai dapt  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|mengemas kini laman bantuan]], berlandaskan [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|tutorial kami tentang penggunaan VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Menambah TemplateData pada templat''' — VisualEditor memiliki sebuah penyunting templat, yang diperincikan pada [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|laman bantuan]]. Seperti yang anda dapat lihat jika anda menggunanya pada Wikipedia, sebilangan templat memiliki parameter ternama dan pemerian yang memudahkan penggunaanya. Yang lain tidak sedimikian. Ini disebabkan tempalt-templat ini memerlukan &quot;TemplateData&quot; sebelum dapat digunakan. Jika anda berminat untuk menambahkan TemplateData, kami ada [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|garis panduan]] untuk melakukannya, bersama-sama [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|senarai templat yang paling penting yang memerlukannnya]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Bantu pengguna baru ''' — Jika pelancaran VisualEditor berjaya, kita akan mempunyai lebih banyak pengguna daripada biasa, dan mahupun penyuntingan akan memnjadi lebih mudah, memahami bagaimana mahu berinteraksi dengan komuniti masih susah. Sila meluangkan masa anda di  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|meja bantuan, atuapun di saluran bantuan IRC]], bagi membantu penygguna baru menyesuaikan diri mereka dengan Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>1pg1t2sb4tuwv2b8t4httmrxejlgc22</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403174</id>
      <parentid>5403018</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:41:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8235" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Welcome to the portal for '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) is a new way of editing Wikipedia that is being developed by the Wikimedia Foundation. It lets people edit without having to learn wiki markup.  We hope it will help people contribute to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Tentang VisualEditor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor ialah cara menyunting Wikipedia secara &quot;visual&quot;, sebuah sistem yang akan membolehkan para penyumbang untuk menyunting tanpa perlu mempelajari bahasa penanda wiki. Ia sudahpun disediakan sebagai  pilihan &quot;alpha&quot; pada Wikipedia bahasa Inggeris semenjak Disember 2012, [$blog-april dalam 16 bahasa lain semenjak April 2013], dan [$blog-june hampir semua bahasa] semenjak awal Jun. Seperti yang [[#Timetable|diterangkan di bawah]], kami menjangka ia akan tersedia untuk hampir semua Wikipedia, bermula dengan Wikipedia bahasa Inggeris, pada 1 Julai.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Buat masa ini, VisualEditor masih ada beberapa pepijat dan ini tidak dapat dielakkan.  Jika anda mengalami sebarang isu, sila jangan teragak-agak untuk [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkannya di laman maklum balas]]. Masih ada beberapa perkara yang memerlukan penciptaan ciri-ciri baharu. Hambatan-hambatan buat masa kini termasuk:

* '''Pemuatan yang perlahan ''' — Laman-laman panjang dan komplek mengamvil masa yang lama untuk dimuatkan ke dalam VisualEditor. Perisian akan lebih pantas pada masa hadapan, dan akan laman-laman yang panjang akan dapat dimuatkan.
* '''Penyuntingan tidak lengkap''' — Beberapa unsur pemformatan &quot;kompleks&quot; akan dipaparkan dan membolehkan anda menyunting kandungannya, akan tetapi tidak akan membenarkan pengguna lain menyunting struktur ataupun menambah entri-entri baharu – seperti senarai definisi. Penambahan ciri-ciri seperti ini ialah satu daripada keutamaan kami.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Laman-laman Rencana dan laman Pengguna sahaja''' — VisualEditor akan hanya dihidupkan untuk ruang nama rencana dan pengguna (agar anda akan dapat membuat perubahan dalam kotak pasir peribadi). Pada masa mendatang, kami akan bina pelbagai jenis perkakas suntingan khusus yang diperlukan buat penulisan bukan rencana, namun fokus kami adalah terhadap rencana.
&lt;/div&gt;

Disebabkan hambatan-hambatan in, dan juga pepijat yang tidak dapat dielakkan, kami mengsyorkan yang para pengguna memetik &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; sebelum menyimpan laman, dan [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkan sebarang masalah yang dialami]].

== Bagaimana untuk membantu ==

Kami memerlukan bantaun dalam banyak perkara agar VisualEditor dapat berfungsi sebaik mungkin. Sudah tentu satu perkara besar ialah penggunaan perisian, mencari pepijat dan [[VisualEditor/Feedback|melaporkan pepijat]]; namun demikian terdapat banyak tugas lain. Tugas-tugas ini termasuk:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Mengemas kini laman-laman bantuan''' — Semua projek kami memiliki laman bantuan bagi membantu pengguna baru agar dapat menyumbang. Malangnya kesemua laman ini berkaitan dengan penyunting penanda, dan apabila VisualEditor dilancarkan, gambar-gambar tawan skrin dan tutorial menjadi lapuk. Amatlah berguna jika orang ramai dapt  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|mengemas kini laman bantuan]], berlandaskan [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|tutorial kami tentang penggunaan VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Menambah TemplateData pada templat''' — VisualEditor memiliki sebuah penyunting templat, yang diperincikan pada [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|laman bantuan]]. Seperti yang anda dapat lihat jika anda menggunanya pada Wikipedia, sebilangan templat memiliki parameter ternama dan pemerian yang memudahkan penggunaanya. Yang lain tidak sedimikian. Ini disebabkan tempalt-templat ini memerlukan &quot;TemplateData&quot; sebelum dapat digunakan. Jika anda berminat untuk menambahkan TemplateData, kami ada [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|garis panduan]] untuk melakukannya, bersama-sama [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|senarai templat yang paling penting yang memerlukannnya]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Bantu pengguna baru ''' — Jika pelancaran VisualEditor berjaya, kita akan mempunyai lebih banyak pengguna daripada biasa, dan mahupun penyuntingan akan memnjadi lebih mudah, memahami bagaimana mahu berinteraksi dengan komuniti masih susah. Sila meluangkan masa anda di  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|meja bantuan, atuapun di saluran bantuan IRC]], bagi membantu penygguna baru menyesuaikan diri mereka dengan Wikipedia.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>rphy5jhmvsraoml8ez2fjpl9qxyydh1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/pt</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>156477</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402442</id>
      <parentid>4983814</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:04:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7483" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bem-vindo ao portal do '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor Visual]]'''. O Editor Visual é uma nova forma de editar a Wikipédia que está a ser desenvolvida pela Wikimedia Foundation. Ele permite que as pessoas possam editar sem ter de aprender a sintaxe wiki. Esperamos que este editor possa ajudar as pessoas a contribuírem para a Wikipédia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leia '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Relate um problema''' com o Editor Visual].
|-
| Descubra como inserir ligações, adicionar ou mover imagens, criar citações, acrescentar predefinições, editar tabelas, e muito mais.
|Por favor, inclua '''o seu navegador, sistema operativo e tema da Wikipédia''' (por norma é o Vector, mas poderá ser o Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Acerca do Editor Visual ==

O Editor Visual é um método &quot;visual&quot; de edição da Wikipédia. Historicamente, a edição da Wikipédia requer das pessoas o conhecimento da sintaxe wiki, demasiada complexa, mesmo que para efetuar pequenas alterações em uma página. Em 2001, isto era aceitável; em 2015, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|afasta colaboradores]]. Esperamos que o Editor Visual seja útil para os colaboradores já existentes e mais acolhedor para novos. 

O Editor Visual esteve disponível como uma opção &quot;alfa&quot; no  MediaWiki.org desde meados de 2012 e na Wikipédia anglófona desde dezembro do mesmo ano, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ em mais 14 idiomas desde abril de 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ em quase a totalidade nos demais idiomas] desde o início de junho de 2013. Em julho de 2015, ficou disponível por padrão para todos os editores (com conta ou sem conta) em mais de 75% das Wikipédias.
Esperamos torná-lo disponível por padrão à maioria das wikis nos [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|idiomas restantes]] no final de 2015.
Desde o fim de Novembro de 2014, está disponível também como um [[Beta Features|recurso Beta]] em todas as wikis da WMF, com exceção do Wikcionário e do Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Estaremos a lançar [[VisualEditor/changelog|atualizações regulares de estado]] no Mediawiki.org e um [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|boletim mensal multilingue]] focado nas wikis da WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Usar o Editor Visual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se estiver interessado em utilizar o Editor Visual, temos um [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guia que mostra como fazê-lo]], bem como uma [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|lista de atalhos de teclado comuns]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Actualmente, o Editor Visual possui alguns erros e limitações. Se encontrar algum erro, por favor, não hesite em [[VisualEditor/Feedback|relatá-lo na páginas de comentários]]. As actuais limitações incluem:

* '''Lentidão ao carregar''' — Levará algum tempo para que o Editor Visual carregue páginas longas e complexas. No futuro, a aplicação será muito mais rápida, o que permitirá o carregamento de páginas maiores.
* '''Edição incompleta''' — Alguns elementos de formatação complexa serão exibidos e permitirão que edite o seu conteúdo, mas não permitirão que os utilizadores editem a sua estrutura ou adicionem novas entradas - como listas de definição. Adicionar recursos nesta área é uma de nossas prioridades.
* '''Na maioria das páginas de conteúdo, mas não nas de discussão''' — O Editor Visual está disponível apenas em alguns domínios. Na maioria das Wikipédias, o Editor Visual pode ser utilizado em páginas de artigos, Usuário:, Ficheiro:, Ajuda: e Categoria:. Actualmente, ele não está disponível em páginas do domínio Wikipédia: e em nenhuma página de discussão.

Recomendamos os utilizadores a clicar em &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antes de salvar a página e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportar quaisquer problemas que encontrarem]].

== Como ajudar ==

Para que o Editor Visual seja tão bom quanto possível, há muitas coisas em que precisamos de ajuda. Obviamente, um aspecto importante é a utilização da aplicação, encontrar erros e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportá-los]], mas há também vários outros. Entre eles, estão:

* '''Actualizar páginas de ajuda''' — Todos os nossos projectos possuem páginas de ajuda para facilitar a contribuição de novos utilizadores. Infelizmente, todas elas são criadas em torno do editor de código-fonte, e como o Editor Visual evolui, os tutoriais e as capturas de ecrã estão tornando-se desactualizados. Seria muito útil que as pessoas pudessem [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|actualizar as páginas de ajuda]], baseadas em [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|nosso tutorial de utilização do Editor Visual]].
* '''Adicionar informação TemplateData às predefinições''' — O Editor Visual possui um bom editor de predefinições, que é descrito em detalhes em nossa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|página de ajuda]]. Como verá se utilizá-lo na Wikipédia, algumas predefinições possuem parâmetros nomeados e boas descrições que a tornam mais fácil de utilizar. Algumas não. Isso ocorre porque as predefinições necessitam do &quot;TemplateData&quot; para que esta ferramenta funcione correctamente. Se está interessado em adicionar informação TemplateData, temos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|um guia de como fazê-lo]], seguido de uma [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|lista de predefinições mais importantes para adicioná-lo]].
* '''Ajudar a sua comunidade''' — Veja a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista de formas úteis de ajudar a sua comunidade local]] a otimizar a experiência de edição com o Editor Visual.
* '''Ajudar novos utilizadores''' — Se o lançamento do Editor Visual for bem-sucedido, teremos muito mais utilizadores do que o normal, e mesmo que a edição possa tornar-se mais fácil, descobrir como interagir com a comunidade continuará a ser difícil. Por favor, passe algum tempo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|na central de ajuda ou no canal de ajuda do IRC]] para ajudar esses recém-chegados a se familiarizarem com a Wikipédia.

==Ver também==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>bwlcbbye8x7udo5mnxk57r6gu9i8qgv</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403021</id>
      <parentid>5402442</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7523" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bem-vindo ao portal do '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor Visual]]'''. O Editor Visual é uma nova forma de editar a Wikipédia que está a ser desenvolvida pela Wikimedia Foundation. Ele permite que as pessoas possam editar sem ter de aprender a sintaxe wiki. Esperamos que este editor possa ajudar as pessoas a contribuírem para a Wikipédia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leia '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Relate um problema''' com o Editor Visual].
|-
| Descubra como inserir ligações, adicionar ou mover imagens, criar citações, acrescentar predefinições, editar tabelas, e muito mais.
|Por favor, inclua '''o seu navegador, sistema operativo e tema da Wikipédia''' (por norma é o Vector, mas poderá ser o Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Acerca do Editor Visual ==

O Editor Visual é um método &quot;visual&quot; de edição da Wikipédia. Historicamente, a edição da Wikipédia requer das pessoas o conhecimento da sintaxe wiki, demasiada complexa, mesmo que para efetuar pequenas alterações em uma página. Em 2001, isto era aceitável; em 2015, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|afasta colaboradores]]. Esperamos que o Editor Visual seja útil para os colaboradores já existentes e mais acolhedor para novos. 

O Editor Visual esteve disponível como uma opção &quot;alfa&quot; no  MediaWiki.org desde meados de 2012 e na Wikipédia anglófona desde dezembro do mesmo ano, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ em mais 14 idiomas desde abril de 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ em quase a totalidade nos demais idiomas] desde o início de junho de 2013. Em julho de 2015, ficou disponível por padrão para todos os editores (com conta ou sem conta) em mais de 75% das Wikipédias.
Esperamos torná-lo disponível por padrão à maioria das wikis nos [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|idiomas restantes]] no final de 2015.
Desde o fim de Novembro de 2014, está disponível também como um [[Beta Features|recurso Beta]] em todas as wikis da WMF, com exceção do Wikcionário e do Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Estaremos a lançar [[VisualEditor/changelog|atualizações regulares de estado]] no Mediawiki.org e um [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|boletim mensal multilingue]] focado nas wikis da WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Usar o Editor Visual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se estiver interessado em utilizar o Editor Visual, temos um [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guia que mostra como fazê-lo]], bem como uma [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|lista de atalhos de teclado comuns]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Actualmente, o Editor Visual possui alguns erros e limitações. Se encontrar algum erro, por favor, não hesite em [[VisualEditor/Feedback|relatá-lo na páginas de comentários]]. As actuais limitações incluem:

* '''Lentidão ao carregar''' — Levará algum tempo para que o Editor Visual carregue páginas longas e complexas. No futuro, a aplicação será muito mais rápida, o que permitirá o carregamento de páginas maiores.
* '''Edição incompleta''' — Alguns elementos de formatação complexa serão exibidos e permitirão que edite o seu conteúdo, mas não permitirão que os utilizadores editem a sua estrutura ou adicionem novas entradas - como listas de definição. Adicionar recursos nesta área é uma de nossas prioridades.
* '''Na maioria das páginas de conteúdo, mas não nas de discussão''' — O Editor Visual está disponível apenas em alguns domínios. Na maioria das Wikipédias, o Editor Visual pode ser utilizado em páginas de artigos, Usuário:, Ficheiro:, Ajuda: e Categoria:. Actualmente, ele não está disponível em páginas do domínio Wikipédia: e em nenhuma página de discussão.

Recomendamos os utilizadores a clicar em &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antes de salvar a página e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportar quaisquer problemas que encontrarem]].

== Como ajudar ==

Para que o Editor Visual seja tão bom quanto possível, há muitas coisas em que precisamos de ajuda. Obviamente, um aspecto importante é a utilização da aplicação, encontrar erros e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportá-los]], mas há também vários outros. Entre eles, estão:

* '''Actualizar páginas de ajuda''' — Todos os nossos projectos possuem páginas de ajuda para facilitar a contribuição de novos utilizadores. Infelizmente, todas elas são criadas em torno do editor de código-fonte, e como o Editor Visual evolui, os tutoriais e as capturas de ecrã estão tornando-se desactualizados. Seria muito útil que as pessoas pudessem [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|actualizar as páginas de ajuda]], baseadas em [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|nosso tutorial de utilização do Editor Visual]].
* '''Adicionar informação TemplateData às predefinições''' — O Editor Visual possui um bom editor de predefinições, que é descrito em detalhes em nossa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|página de ajuda]]. Como verá se utilizá-lo na Wikipédia, algumas predefinições possuem parâmetros nomeados e boas descrições que a tornam mais fácil de utilizar. Algumas não. Isso ocorre porque as predefinições necessitam do &quot;TemplateData&quot; para que esta ferramenta funcione correctamente. Se está interessado em adicionar informação TemplateData, temos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|um guia de como fazê-lo]], seguido de uma [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|lista de predefinições mais importantes para adicioná-lo]].
* '''Ajudar a sua comunidade''' — Veja a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista de formas úteis de ajudar a sua comunidade local]] a otimizar a experiência de edição com o Editor Visual.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Ajudar novos utilizadores''' — Se o lançamento do Editor Visual for bem-sucedido, teremos muito mais utilizadores do que o normal, e mesmo que a edição possa tornar-se mais fácil, descobrir como interagir com a comunidade continuará a ser difícil. Por favor, passe algum tempo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|na central de ajuda ou no canal de ajuda do IRC]] para ajudar esses recém-chegados a se familiarizarem com a Wikipédia.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ver também==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>ocxg047jvtgbkqnqse82vbzpulhgjl9</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403178</id>
      <parentid>5403021</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:42:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7483" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bem-vindo ao portal do '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor Visual]]'''. O Editor Visual é uma nova forma de editar a Wikipédia que está a ser desenvolvida pela Wikimedia Foundation. Ele permite que as pessoas possam editar sem ter de aprender a sintaxe wiki. Esperamos que este editor possa ajudar as pessoas a contribuírem para a Wikipédia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leia '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Relate um problema''' com o Editor Visual].
|-
| Descubra como inserir ligações, adicionar ou mover imagens, criar citações, acrescentar predefinições, editar tabelas, e muito mais.
|Por favor, inclua '''o seu navegador, sistema operativo e tema da Wikipédia''' (por norma é o Vector, mas poderá ser o Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Acerca do Editor Visual ==

O Editor Visual é um método &quot;visual&quot; de edição da Wikipédia. Historicamente, a edição da Wikipédia requer das pessoas o conhecimento da sintaxe wiki, demasiada complexa, mesmo que para efetuar pequenas alterações em uma página. Em 2001, isto era aceitável; em 2015, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|afasta colaboradores]]. Esperamos que o Editor Visual seja útil para os colaboradores já existentes e mais acolhedor para novos. 

O Editor Visual esteve disponível como uma opção &quot;alfa&quot; no  MediaWiki.org desde meados de 2012 e na Wikipédia anglófona desde dezembro do mesmo ano, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ em mais 14 idiomas desde abril de 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ em quase a totalidade nos demais idiomas] desde o início de junho de 2013. Em julho de 2015, ficou disponível por padrão para todos os editores (com conta ou sem conta) em mais de 75% das Wikipédias.
Esperamos torná-lo disponível por padrão à maioria das wikis nos [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|idiomas restantes]] no final de 2015.
Desde o fim de Novembro de 2014, está disponível também como um [[Beta Features|recurso Beta]] em todas as wikis da WMF, com exceção do Wikcionário e do Wikisource.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Estaremos a lançar [[VisualEditor/changelog|atualizações regulares de estado]] no Mediawiki.org e um [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|boletim mensal multilingue]] focado nas wikis da WMF.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Usar o Editor Visual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se estiver interessado em utilizar o Editor Visual, temos um [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guia que mostra como fazê-lo]], bem como uma [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|lista de atalhos de teclado comuns]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Actualmente, o Editor Visual possui alguns erros e limitações. Se encontrar algum erro, por favor, não hesite em [[VisualEditor/Feedback|relatá-lo na páginas de comentários]]. As actuais limitações incluem:

* '''Lentidão ao carregar''' — Levará algum tempo para que o Editor Visual carregue páginas longas e complexas. No futuro, a aplicação será muito mais rápida, o que permitirá o carregamento de páginas maiores.
* '''Edição incompleta''' — Alguns elementos de formatação complexa serão exibidos e permitirão que edite o seu conteúdo, mas não permitirão que os utilizadores editem a sua estrutura ou adicionem novas entradas - como listas de definição. Adicionar recursos nesta área é uma de nossas prioridades.
* '''Na maioria das páginas de conteúdo, mas não nas de discussão''' — O Editor Visual está disponível apenas em alguns domínios. Na maioria das Wikipédias, o Editor Visual pode ser utilizado em páginas de artigos, Usuário:, Ficheiro:, Ajuda: e Categoria:. Actualmente, ele não está disponível em páginas do domínio Wikipédia: e em nenhuma página de discussão.

Recomendamos os utilizadores a clicar em &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antes de salvar a página e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportar quaisquer problemas que encontrarem]].

== Como ajudar ==

Para que o Editor Visual seja tão bom quanto possível, há muitas coisas em que precisamos de ajuda. Obviamente, um aspecto importante é a utilização da aplicação, encontrar erros e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportá-los]], mas há também vários outros. Entre eles, estão:

* '''Actualizar páginas de ajuda''' — Todos os nossos projectos possuem páginas de ajuda para facilitar a contribuição de novos utilizadores. Infelizmente, todas elas são criadas em torno do editor de código-fonte, e como o Editor Visual evolui, os tutoriais e as capturas de ecrã estão tornando-se desactualizados. Seria muito útil que as pessoas pudessem [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|actualizar as páginas de ajuda]], baseadas em [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|nosso tutorial de utilização do Editor Visual]].
* '''Adicionar informação TemplateData às predefinições''' — O Editor Visual possui um bom editor de predefinições, que é descrito em detalhes em nossa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|página de ajuda]]. Como verá se utilizá-lo na Wikipédia, algumas predefinições possuem parâmetros nomeados e boas descrições que a tornam mais fácil de utilizar. Algumas não. Isso ocorre porque as predefinições necessitam do &quot;TemplateData&quot; para que esta ferramenta funcione correctamente. Se está interessado em adicionar informação TemplateData, temos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|um guia de como fazê-lo]], seguido de uma [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|lista de predefinições mais importantes para adicioná-lo]].
* '''Ajudar a sua comunidade''' — Veja a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista de formas úteis de ajudar a sua comunidade local]] a otimizar a experiência de edição com o Editor Visual.
* '''Ajudar novos utilizadores''' — Se o lançamento do Editor Visual for bem-sucedido, teremos muito mais utilizadores do que o normal, e mesmo que a edição possa tornar-se mais fácil, descobrir como interagir com a comunidade continuará a ser difícil. Por favor, passe algum tempo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|na central de ajuda ou no canal de ajuda do IRC]] para ajudar esses recém-chegados a se familiarizarem com a Wikipédia.

==Ver também==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>bwlcbbye8x7udo5mnxk57r6gu9i8qgv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>156478</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402441</id>
      <parentid>1067043</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:04:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="326" xml:space="preserve">Bem-vindo ao portal do '''[[$ve|Editor Visual]]'''. O Editor Visual é uma nova forma de editar a Wikipédia que está a ser desenvolvida pela Wikimedia Foundation. Ele permite que as pessoas possam editar sem ter de aprender a sintaxe wiki. Esperamos que este editor possa ajudar as pessoas a contribuírem para a Wikipédia.</text>
      <sha1>osg8qjo5hrvqu49izfi2ywr7osf1iw2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/da</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>156639</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403207</id>
      <parentid>1802724</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:49:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="573" xml:space="preserve">* '''Tilføje SkabelonData til skabeloner''' - VisualEditor har en fin skabelon-editor, der er beskrevet mere detaljeret på vores [[$ug|hjælpeside]]. Som man kan se, hvis man bruger det på Wikipedia, har nogle skabeloner navngivne parametre og fine beskrivelser, der gør dem nemmere at bruge. Andre har ikke. Det er, fordi skabeloner skal have &quot;SkabelonData&quot;, hvis denne funktion skal virke. Hvis du har lyst til at tilføje SkabelonData, har [[$td-tutor|en vejledning i, hvordan man gør det]] samt en [[$td|liste over de vigtigste skabeloner, der har brug for data]].</text>
      <sha1>84wzmzz4byg3io5ql4kkg9ea6y42y3o</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/ms</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>157048</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403173</id>
      <parentid>1803280</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:41:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="401" xml:space="preserve">* '''Bantu pengguna baru ''' — Jika pelancaran VisualEditor berjaya, kita akan mempunyai lebih banyak pengguna daripada biasa, dan mahupun penyuntingan akan memnjadi lebih mudah, memahami bagaimana mahu berinteraksi dengan komuniti masih susah. Sila meluangkan masa anda di  [[$1|meja bantuan, atuapun di saluran bantuan IRC]], bagi membantu penygguna baru menyesuaikan diri mereka dengan Wikipedia.</text>
      <sha1>nk9t3ppyw2t1pfqanrlroqmoo8t104n</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/id</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>157557</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403299</id>
      <parentid>3483290</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:16:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="235" xml:space="preserve">Beberapa pemberitahuan ini akan dimatikan secara baku atau bahkan tidak tersedia pada wiki Anda. Jika Anda ingin mengaktifkan salah satu dari pemberitahuan ini (atau menonaktifkannya), Anda dapat melakukannya [[$1|di preferensi Anda]].</text>
      <sha1>a9n22vucyggvp770agay11woe66ozb9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/mt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>158640</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403303</id>
      <parentid>4369464</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:17:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="234" xml:space="preserve">Uħud minn dawn in-notifiki huma mitfija awtomatikament jew mhumiex disponibbli fuq il-wiki tiegħek. Jekk tixtieq tippermetti xi waħda minn dawn in-notifiki (jew tiddiżattivahom), tista 'tagħmel dan [[$1|fil-preferenzi tiegħek]].</text>
      <sha1>c3qn3z3o57o7iqzxd61t5m7e78e28u2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/ar</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>159108</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403285</id>
      <parentid>3483274</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:13:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="266" xml:space="preserve">بعض هذه الإشعارات معطلة افتراضيا أو غير متوفرة في الويكي الخاصة بك. وإذا أردت تفعيل أي من هذه الإشعارات (أو تعطيلها)، يمكنك فعل ذلك [[$1|في تفضيلاتك]].</text>
      <sha1>l3ysatb71cwfqa6n0lozuvp1cvex9nc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/da</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>159424</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403042</id>
      <parentid>1802728</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:54:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="396" xml:space="preserve">* '''Hjælp nye brugere''' - Hvis VisualEditor lanceringen bliver en succes, får vi mange flere nye brugere end vi er vant til, og selvom redigering kan være lettere, vil det stadig være svært at regne ud hvordan man skal interagere med fællesskabet. Venligst at bruge lidt tid [[$1|på help desk eller i IRC hjælpe kanalen]], for at hjælpe disse nyankomne med at vænne sig til Wikipedia.</text>
      <sha1>b5ly3bly3bcehe5z7j2pssaprpj2j2s</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/fr</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>160978</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403007</id>
      <parentid>4983847</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8263" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bienvenue sur le portail de l’[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ÉditeurVisuel]].
L'ÉditeurVisuel (EV) est une nouvelle manière d’éditer Wikipédia qui est en cours de développement par la Fondation Wikimédia. Il permet à chacun de modifier des pages sans avoir à apprendre le balisage wiki. Nous espérons qu’il vous aidera à contribuer à Wikipédia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lire '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Rapporter un problème''' avec l'ÉditeurVisuel].
|-
| Comprendre comment créer des liens, ajouter ou déplacer des images, créer des citations, insérer/modifier des tableaux, et plus.
|Veuillez ajouter vos '''navigateur, système d'exploitation, et le thème Wikipedia''' (habituellement Vector, parfois Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== À propos de l’ÉditeurVisuel ==

L’ÉditeurVisuel offre un moyen « visuel » pour modifier Wikipédia. Rédiger sur Wikipédia a historiquement demandé aux volontaires d’apprendre le balisage wiki, qui est un langage de balisage relativement complexe, même pour effectuer de petits changements à une page. En 2001, c’était acceptable ; en 2013 il  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|fait fuir les contributeurs]]. Nous espérons que l’ÉditeurVisuel sera utile à la fois pour les contributeurs existants et sera plus convivial pour les nouveaux. 

L’Éditeur Visuel a été rendu disponible dans une version « alpha » à activer parmi les préférences de l’utilisateur, d’abord sur MediaWiki.org depuis mi-2012 puis sur l’édition en anglais de Wikipédia depuis décembre 2012, puis [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ dans 14 nouvelles langues depuis avril 2013] et [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ dans la plupart des autres langues] depuis début juin 2013. Depuis juillet 2014, nous l’avons activé par défaut pour tous les utilisateurs enregistrés ou non dans plus de la moitié des Wikipédias. Nous espérons le rendre disponible par défaut sur tous les Wikipédias en 2015. Depuis fin novembre 2014, il est également disponible comme une option à activer parmi les [[Beta Features|fonctionnalités beta]] sur tous les wikis de la WMF à l’exception de Wiktionnaire et Wkisource.
Nous prévoyons de le mettre en service par défaut pour la plupart des [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|langages restant]] fin 2015.
Depuis la fin novembre 2014 il est également utilisable en option de la [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Version Beta]] dans tous les wikis de la WMF sauf pour le Wiktionnaire et Wikisource.

Nous publions une [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|infolettre multilingue]], centrée sur les wikis de la WMF.

== Utiliser l’Éditeur Visuel ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Si l’utilisation de l’Éditeur Visuel vous intéresse, nous avons réalisé un [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide pour vous]] ainsi qu’une [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|liste de raccourcis clavier courants]].

L’ÉditeurVisuel a actuellement des bugs récurrents et des limitations. Si vous rencontrez un problème, veuillez ne pas hésiter à [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Feedback|le signaler sur la page pour donner vos avis]]. Les limitation actuelles comprennent :

* '''Chargement lent''' — Cela met parfois du temps pour charger des pages longues et complexes dans l’ÉditeurVisuel. À l’avenir le logiciel sera beaucoup plus rapide et permettra le chargement de pages plus longues.
* '''Modification incomplète''' — Certains éléments de mise en forme avancée seront affichés et vous permettront de modifier leur contenu, mais ne permettront pas aux utilisateurs de modifier leur structure ou d’y ajouter de nouvelles entrées (par exemple les listes de définitions). Ajouter des fonctionnalités dans ce domaine constitue l’une de nos priorités.
* '''La plupart des pages de contenu, pas celles de discussion''' — L’Éditeur Visuel n’est activé que dans certains espaces de nom Utilisateur: , Fichier: , Aide: et Catégorie: . L’Éditeur Visuel n’est actuellement pas disponible sur les pages Wikipédia: ni sur une quelconque page de discussion.

Nous recommandons aux utilisateurs de cliquer sur « {{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}} » avant d’enregistrer la page et de [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Feedback|nous signaler tout problème rencontré]].

== Comment vous pouvez nous aider ==

Afin de rendre l’ÉditeurVisuel aussi bon que possible, il y a de nombreuses choses pour lesquelles nous avons besoin d’aide. De façon évidente, la première chose à faire est d’utiliser le logiciel pour y découvrir les anomalies et [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Feedback|nous les signaler]], mais il y a également d’autres tâches à effectuer. Celles-ci comprennent :

* '''Mettre à jour les pages d’aide''' — Tous nos projets ont des pages d’aide pour faciliter les contributions des nouveaux utilisateurs. Malheureusement elles ont été construites autour de l’éditeur wiki balisé classique, et lorsque l’ÉditeurVisuel est lancé, les captures d’écran et tutoriels ne sont plus à niveau. Ce sera très utile si des personnes peuvent [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|mettre à jour les pages d’aide]], basées sur [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|notre tutoriel d’utilisation de l’ÉditeurVisuel]].
* '''Ajouter des métadonnées ''TemplateData'' aux modèles''' — L’Éditeur Visuel fournit un bel éditeur de modification de modèles, lequel est décrit plus en détail sur notre [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|page d’aide]]. Comme vous le verrez si vous l’utilisez sur Wikipédia, certains modèles ont des paramètres nommés et de belles descriptions qui les rendent faciles à utiliser. D’autres pas encore. Ceci est dû au fait que les modèles ont besoin de métadonnées « ''TemplateData'' » pour que cette fonctionnalité puisse fonctionner. Si vous êtes intéressé par l’ajout de métadonnées ''TemplateData'' aux modèles, nous vous proposons [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|un guide pour le faire]] ainsi qu’une [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|liste des modèles les plus importants où ces métadonnées doivent être ajoutées]].
* '''Aidez votre communauté''' — Voir la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|liste des moyens utiles pour aider votre communauté locale]] afin d'optimiser l'expérience d'édition avec l'Éditeur Visuel.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Aider les nouveaux utilisateurs''' — Si le lancement de l’Éditeur Visuel rencontre du succès, nous aurons bien plus de nouveaux utilisateurs que ceux que nous voyons habituellement, et même si le travail de modification peut être plus facile, il nous faudra encore travailler dur sur la meilleure façon d’interagir avec la communauté. Veuillez passer un peu de temps [[$new-users|sur le portail d’aide ou sur le canal IRC d’aide]] afin d’aider les nouveaux venus à s’acclimater à Wikipédia.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Voir aussi ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - un pense-bête pour optimiser l'expérience d'édition pour votre wiki et vos amis éditeurs.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - obtenez et offrez de l'aide concernant le travail associé à l'Editeur visuel de la part et pour les autres wikimédiens comme vous.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - un premier guide pour les communautés complètement nouvelles sur l'Editeur Visuel.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>ekeqrjhu3xfvfx0lf9z6mv315kfdh3f</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403055</id>
      <parentid>5403007</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:01:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8261" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bienvenue sur le portail de l’[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ÉditeurVisuel]].
L'ÉditeurVisuel (EV) est une nouvelle manière d’éditer Wikipédia qui est en cours de développement par la Fondation Wikimédia. Il permet à chacun de modifier des pages sans avoir à apprendre le balisage wiki. Nous espérons qu’il vous aidera à contribuer à Wikipédia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lire '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Rapporter un problème''' avec l'ÉditeurVisuel].
|-
| Comprendre comment créer des liens, ajouter ou déplacer des images, créer des citations, insérer/modifier des tableaux, et plus.
|Veuillez ajouter vos '''navigateur, système d'exploitation, et le thème Wikipedia''' (habituellement Vector, parfois Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== À propos de l’ÉditeurVisuel ==

L’ÉditeurVisuel offre un moyen « visuel » pour modifier Wikipédia. Rédiger sur Wikipédia a historiquement demandé aux volontaires d’apprendre le balisage wiki, qui est un langage de balisage relativement complexe, même pour effectuer de petits changements à une page. En 2001, c’était acceptable ; en 2013 il  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|fait fuir les contributeurs]]. Nous espérons que l’ÉditeurVisuel sera utile à la fois pour les contributeurs existants et sera plus convivial pour les nouveaux. 

L’Éditeur Visuel a été rendu disponible dans une version « alpha » à activer parmi les préférences de l’utilisateur, d’abord sur MediaWiki.org depuis mi-2012 puis sur l’édition en anglais de Wikipédia depuis décembre 2012, puis [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ dans 14 nouvelles langues depuis avril 2013] et [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ dans la plupart des autres langues] depuis début juin 2013. Depuis juillet 2014, nous l’avons activé par défaut pour tous les utilisateurs enregistrés ou non dans plus de la moitié des Wikipédias. Nous espérons le rendre disponible par défaut sur tous les Wikipédias en 2015. Depuis fin novembre 2014, il est également disponible comme une option à activer parmi les [[Beta Features|fonctionnalités beta]] sur tous les wikis de la WMF à l’exception de Wiktionnaire et Wkisource.
Nous prévoyons de le mettre en service par défaut pour la plupart des [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|langages restant]] fin 2015.
Depuis la fin novembre 2014 il est également utilisable en option de la [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Version Beta]] dans tous les wikis de la WMF sauf pour le Wiktionnaire et Wikisource.

Nous publions une [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|infolettre multilingue]], centrée sur les wikis de la WMF.

== Utiliser l’Éditeur Visuel ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Si l’utilisation de l’Éditeur Visuel vous intéresse, nous avons réalisé un [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide pour vous]] ainsi qu’une [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|liste de raccourcis clavier courants]].

L’ÉditeurVisuel a actuellement des bugs récurrents et des limitations. Si vous rencontrez un problème, veuillez ne pas hésiter à [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Feedback|le signaler sur la page pour donner vos avis]]. Les limitation actuelles comprennent :

* '''Chargement lent''' — Cela met parfois du temps pour charger des pages longues et complexes dans l’ÉditeurVisuel. À l’avenir le logiciel sera beaucoup plus rapide et permettra le chargement de pages plus longues.
* '''Modification incomplète''' — Certains éléments de mise en forme avancée seront affichés et vous permettront de modifier leur contenu, mais ne permettront pas aux utilisateurs de modifier leur structure ou d’y ajouter de nouvelles entrées (par exemple les listes de définitions). Ajouter des fonctionnalités dans ce domaine constitue l’une de nos priorités.
* '''La plupart des pages de contenu, pas celles de discussion''' — L’Éditeur Visuel n’est activé que dans certains espaces de nom Utilisateur: , Fichier: , Aide: et Catégorie: . L’Éditeur Visuel n’est actuellement pas disponible sur les pages Wikipédia: ni sur une quelconque page de discussion.

Nous recommandons aux utilisateurs de cliquer sur « {{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}} » avant d’enregistrer la page et de [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Feedback|nous signaler tout problème rencontré]].

== Comment vous pouvez nous aider ==

Afin de rendre l’ÉditeurVisuel aussi bon que possible, il y a de nombreuses choses pour lesquelles nous avons besoin d’aide. De façon évidente, la première chose à faire est d’utiliser le logiciel pour y découvrir les anomalies et [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Feedback|nous les signaler]], mais il y a également d’autres tâches à effectuer. Celles-ci comprennent :

* '''Mettre à jour les pages d’aide''' — Tous nos projets ont des pages d’aide pour faciliter les contributions des nouveaux utilisateurs. Malheureusement elles ont été construites autour de l’éditeur wiki balisé classique, et lorsque l’ÉditeurVisuel est lancé, les captures d’écran et tutoriels ne sont plus à niveau. Ce sera très utile si des personnes peuvent [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|mettre à jour les pages d’aide]], basées sur [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|notre tutoriel d’utilisation de l’ÉditeurVisuel]].
* '''Ajouter des métadonnées ''TemplateData'' aux modèles''' — L’Éditeur Visuel fournit un bel éditeur de modification de modèles, lequel est décrit plus en détail sur notre [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|page d’aide]]. Comme vous le verrez si vous l’utilisez sur Wikipédia, certains modèles ont des paramètres nommés et de belles descriptions qui les rendent faciles à utiliser. D’autres pas encore. Ceci est dû au fait que les modèles ont besoin de métadonnées « ''TemplateData'' » pour que cette fonctionnalité puisse fonctionner. Si vous êtes intéressé par l’ajout de métadonnées ''TemplateData'' aux modèles, nous vous proposons [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|un guide pour le faire]] ainsi qu’une [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|liste des modèles les plus importants où ces métadonnées doivent être ajoutées]].
* '''Aidez votre communauté''' — Voir la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|liste des moyens utiles pour aider votre communauté locale]] afin d'optimiser l'expérience d'édition avec l'Éditeur Visuel.
* '''Aider les nouveaux utilisateurs''' — Si le lancement de l’Éditeur Visuel rencontre du succès, nous aurons bien plus de nouveaux utilisateurs que ceux que nous voyons habituellement, et même si le travail de modification peut être plus facile, il nous faudra encore travailler dur sur la meilleure façon d’interagir avec la communauté. Veuillez passer un peu de temps [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|sur le portail d’aide ou sur le canal IRC d’aide]] afin d’aider les nouveaux venus à s’acclimater à Wikipédia.

== Voir aussi ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - un pense-bête pour optimiser l'expérience d'édition pour votre wiki et vos amis éditeurs.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - obtenez et offrez de l'aide concernant le travail associé à l'Editeur visuel de la part et pour les autres wikimédiens comme vous.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - un premier guide pour les communautés complètement nouvelles sur l'Editeur Visuel.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>g2yzrlnm44gr1rhd65img8hrob17vv1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403219</id>
      <parentid>5403055</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:54:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8279" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bienvenue sur le portail de l’[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ÉditeurVisuel]].
L'ÉditeurVisuel (EV) est une nouvelle manière d’éditer Wikipédia qui est en cours de développement par la Fondation Wikimédia. Il permet à chacun de modifier des pages sans avoir à apprendre le balisage wiki. Nous espérons qu’il vous aidera à contribuer à Wikipédia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lire '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Rapporter un problème''' avec l'ÉditeurVisuel].
|-
| Comprendre comment créer des liens, ajouter ou déplacer des images, créer des citations, insérer/modifier des tableaux, et plus.
|Veuillez ajouter vos '''navigateur, système d'exploitation, et le thème Wikipedia''' (habituellement Vector, parfois Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== À propos de l’ÉditeurVisuel ==

L’ÉditeurVisuel offre un moyen « visuel » pour modifier Wikipédia. Rédiger sur Wikipédia a historiquement demandé aux volontaires d’apprendre le balisage wiki, qui est un langage de balisage relativement complexe, même pour effectuer de petits changements à une page. En 2001, c’était acceptable ; en 2013 il  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|fait fuir les contributeurs]]. Nous espérons que l’ÉditeurVisuel sera utile à la fois pour les contributeurs existants et sera plus convivial pour les nouveaux. 

L’Éditeur Visuel a été rendu disponible dans une version « alpha » à activer parmi les préférences de l’utilisateur, d’abord sur MediaWiki.org depuis mi-2012 puis sur l’édition en anglais de Wikipédia depuis décembre 2012, puis [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ dans 14 nouvelles langues depuis avril 2013] et [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ dans la plupart des autres langues] depuis début juin 2013. Depuis juillet 2014, nous l’avons activé par défaut pour tous les utilisateurs enregistrés ou non dans plus de la moitié des Wikipédias. Nous espérons le rendre disponible par défaut sur tous les Wikipédias en 2015. Depuis fin novembre 2014, il est également disponible comme une option à activer parmi les [[Beta Features|fonctionnalités beta]] sur tous les wikis de la WMF à l’exception de Wiktionnaire et Wkisource.
Nous prévoyons de le mettre en service par défaut pour la plupart des [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|langages restant]] fin 2015.
Depuis la fin novembre 2014 il est également utilisable en option de la [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Version Beta]] dans tous les wikis de la WMF sauf pour le Wiktionnaire et Wikisource.

Nous publions une [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|infolettre multilingue]], centrée sur les wikis de la WMF.

== Utiliser l’Éditeur Visuel ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Si l’utilisation de l’Éditeur Visuel vous intéresse, nous avons réalisé un [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide pour vous]] ainsi qu’une [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|liste de raccourcis clavier courants]].

L’ÉditeurVisuel a actuellement des bugs récurrents et des limitations. Si vous rencontrez un problème, veuillez ne pas hésiter à [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Feedback|le signaler sur la page pour donner vos avis]]. Les limitation actuelles comprennent :

* '''Chargement lent''' — Cela met parfois du temps pour charger des pages longues et complexes dans l’ÉditeurVisuel. À l’avenir le logiciel sera beaucoup plus rapide et permettra le chargement de pages plus longues.
* '''Modification incomplète''' — Certains éléments de mise en forme avancée seront affichés et vous permettront de modifier leur contenu, mais ne permettront pas aux utilisateurs de modifier leur structure ou d’y ajouter de nouvelles entrées (par exemple les listes de définitions). Ajouter des fonctionnalités dans ce domaine constitue l’une de nos priorités.
* '''La plupart des pages de contenu, pas celles de discussion''' — L’Éditeur Visuel n’est activé que dans certains espaces de nom Utilisateur: , Fichier: , Aide: et Catégorie: . L’Éditeur Visuel n’est actuellement pas disponible sur les pages Wikipédia: ni sur une quelconque page de discussion.

Nous recommandons aux utilisateurs de cliquer sur « {{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}} » avant d’enregistrer la page et de [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Feedback|nous signaler tout problème rencontré]].

== Comment vous pouvez nous aider ==

Afin de rendre l’ÉditeurVisuel aussi bon que possible, il y a de nombreuses choses pour lesquelles nous avons besoin d’aide. De façon évidente, la première chose à faire est d’utiliser le logiciel pour y découvrir les anomalies et [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Feedback|nous les signaler]], mais il y a également d’autres tâches à effectuer. Celles-ci comprennent :

* '''Mettre à jour les pages d’aide''' — Tous nos projets ont des pages d’aide pour faciliter les contributions des nouveaux utilisateurs. Malheureusement elles ont été construites autour de l’éditeur wiki balisé classique, et lorsque l’ÉditeurVisuel est lancé, les captures d’écran et tutoriels ne sont plus à niveau. Ce sera très utile si des personnes peuvent [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|mettre à jour les pages d’aide]], basées sur [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|notre tutoriel d’utilisation de l’ÉditeurVisuel]].
* '''Ajouter des métadonnées ''TemplateData'' aux modèles''' — L’Éditeur Visuel fournit un bel éditeur de modification de modèles, lequel est décrit plus en détail sur notre [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|page d’aide]]. Comme vous le verrez si vous l’utilisez sur Wikipédia, certains modèles ont des paramètres nommés et de belles descriptions qui les rendent faciles à utiliser. D’autres pas encore. Ceci est dû au fait que les modèles ont besoin de métadonnées « ''TemplateData'' » pour que cette fonctionnalité puisse fonctionner. Si vous êtes intéressé par l’ajout de métadonnées ''TemplateData'' aux modèles, nous vous proposons [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|un guide pour le faire]] ainsi qu’une [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|liste des modèles les plus importants où ces métadonnées doivent être ajoutées]].
* '''Aidez votre communauté''' — Voir la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|liste des moyens utiles pour aider votre communauté locale]] afin d'optimiser l'expérience d'édition avec l'Éditeur Visuel.
* '''Aider les nouveaux utilisateurs''' — Si le lancement de l’Éditeur Visuel rencontre du succès, nous aurons bien plus de nouveaux utilisateurs que ceux que nous voyons habituellement, et même si le travail de modification peut être plus facile, il nous faudra encore travailler dur sur la meilleure façon d’interagir avec la communauté. Veuillez passer un peu de temps [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|sur le portail d’aide ou sur le canal IRC d’aide]] afin d’aider les nouveaux venus à s’acclimater à Wikipédia.

== Voir aussi ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - un pense-bête pour optimiser l'expérience d'édition pour votre wiki et vos amis éditeurs.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - obtenez et offrez de l'aide concernant le travail associé à l'Editeur visuel de la part et pour les autres wikimédiens comme vous.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - un premier guide pour les communautés complètement nouvelles sur l'Editeur Visuel.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>mp60l17wdtzl5xwwb35y1hcprgfdg7p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>161052</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403218</id>
      <parentid>1802946</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:54:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="796" xml:space="preserve">* '''Ajouter des métadonnées ''TemplateData'' aux modèles''' — L’Éditeur Visuel fournit un bel éditeur de modification de modèles, lequel est décrit plus en détail sur notre [[$ug|page d’aide]]. Comme vous le verrez si vous l’utilisez sur Wikipédia, certains modèles ont des paramètres nommés et de belles descriptions qui les rendent faciles à utiliser. D’autres pas encore. Ceci est dû au fait que les modèles ont besoin de métadonnées « ''TemplateData'' » pour que cette fonctionnalité puisse fonctionner. Si vous êtes intéressé par l’ajout de métadonnées ''TemplateData'' aux modèles, nous vous proposons [[$td-tutor|un guide pour le faire]] ainsi qu’une [[$td|liste des modèles les plus importants où ces métadonnées doivent être ajoutées]].</text>
      <sha1>i7cjjcq97pnx27f7ofiitxwjz1eswjh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>161053</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403054</id>
      <parentid>4278122</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:01:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="510" xml:space="preserve">* '''Aider les nouveaux utilisateurs''' — Si le lancement de l’Éditeur Visuel rencontre du succès, nous aurons bien plus de nouveaux utilisateurs que ceux que nous voyons habituellement, et même si le travail de modification peut être plus facile, il nous faudra encore travailler dur sur la meilleure façon d’interagir avec la communauté. Veuillez passer un peu de temps [[$1|sur le portail d’aide ou sur le canal IRC d’aide]] afin d’aider les nouveaux venus à s’acclimater à Wikipédia.</text>
      <sha1>pd13642j8egd26pyxzzl414aot4t1tn</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/uk</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>161172</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402453</id>
      <parentid>1804627</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:05:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="616" xml:space="preserve">Ласкаво просимо до порталу '''[[$ve|Візуального редактора]]'''. Візуальний редактор — це новий засіб редагування Вікіпедії, який розробляється [[:w:uk:Фонд Вікімедіа|Фондом Вікімедіа]]. Він дозволяє людям редагувати сторінки Вікіпедії навіть без необхідності вивчати вікірозмітку. Ми сподіваємось, це допоможе людям робити внесок у Вікіпедію.</text>
      <sha1>47c4r3ez7q5cze9as5j2og1mi3v1eaj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/uk</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>161173</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402454</id>
      <parentid>4983855</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:05:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12418" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Ласкаво просимо до порталу '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Візуального редактора]]'''. Візуальний редактор — це новий засіб редагування Вікіпедії, який розробляється [[:w:uk:Фонд Вікімедіа|Фондом Вікімедіа]]. Він дозволяє людям редагувати сторінки Вікіпедії навіть без необхідності вивчати вікірозмітку. Ми сподіваємось, це допоможе людям робити внесок у Вікіпедію.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Читати '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Повідомити про проблему''' з Візуальним редактором].
|-
| Дізнайтесь, як робити посилання, додавати або переміщати зображення, створювати примітки, вставляти шаблони, редагувати таблиці та ще багато чого іншого.
|Будь ласка, вкажіть свій '''веб-браузер, операційну систему комп'ютера та тему оформлення Вікіпедії''' (зазвичай Векторна, іноді — Монокнига).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Про Візуальний редактор ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Візуальний редактор є «візуальним» методом редагування Вікіпедії. Історично склалося так, що редагування Вікіпедії вимагало від редакторів вивчення вікірозмітки — достатньо складної мови розмітки, — навіть для того, аби виконувати незначні зміни на сторінках. 2001 року це ще було принято; 2015 року це вже [[$ve-why|відштовхує дописувачів]]. Ми сподіваємось, що Візуальний редактор стане корисним для наявних дописувачів, та привабливішим для нових користувачів.
&lt;/div&gt; 

Візуальний редактор був доступний як необов'язкова функція — як «альфа»-випуск на MediaWiki.org починаючи з середини 2012 року. В грудні 2012 р. він з'явився в англомовній Вікіпедії, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ з квітня 2013 р. був доступний ще в 14 інших мовних розділах], з початку червня 2013 р., він був увімкнений [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ майже для усіх інших мов]. Станом на липень 2015 року, він вже доступний як функція за замовчуванням — як для зареєстрованих, так і для незареєстрованих користувачів, у більш ніж 75% усіх Вікіпедій.
Ми сподіваємось увімкнути його за замовчуванням і для [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|решти мовних версій]] наприкінці 2015 р.
Починаючи з кінця листопада 2014 року, Візуальний редактор доступний також як необов'язкова [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Бета-функція]] в усіх вікі ФВМ, за винятком Вікісловника та Вікіджерел.

Ми випускаємо [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|регулярні оновлення статусу]] на Mediawiki.org.

== Використання Візуального редактора ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Якщо Ви зацікавлені у використанні Візуального редактора для редагування сторінок, у нас є [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|посібник користувача, що допоможе ознайомитись із процесом]], а також [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|список вживаних клавіатурних скорочень]].

Зараз Візуальний редактор має деякі помилки та обмеження. Якщо Ви зіткнетесь із будь-якою проблемою, будь ласка, не вагайтесь, а одразу [[VisualEditor/Feedback|повідомте про неї на сторінці відгуків]]. Серед поточних обмежень:

* '''Повільне завантаження''' — завантаження об'ємних сторінок зі складним кодом у Візуальному редакторі займає досить багато часу. В майбутньому програмне забезпечення стане значно швидшим, завдяки чому завантаження об'ємних сторінок припинить бути проблемою.
* '''Неповне редагування''' — деякі елементи зі складним форматуванням відображатимуться у редакторі, і дозволять редагувати їхній вміст, однак не дадуть користувачам змінювати їхню структуру чи додавати нові елементи, такі як списки визначень. Додавання функцій у цій площині є одним із наших пріоритетів.
* '''Більшість сторінок, але не сторінки обговорення''' — Візуальний редактор працює лише в окремих просторах назв. У більшості Вікіпедій, Візуальний редактор можна використовувати в статтях, у просторах назв: Користувач:, Файл:, Довідка:, та Категорія:. Візуальний редактор зараз не можна використовувати у просторі назв Вікіпедія:, чи на будь-яких сторінках обговорень.

Ми радимо користуватися функцією «{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}» перед збереженням сторінок, та [[VisualEditor/Feedback|повідомляти про проблеми, що виникають]].

== Чим можна допомогти ==

Аби зробити Візуальний редактор настільки добрим, наскільки він лише може бути, існує чимало речей, у яких нам потрібна допомога. Очевидно, що однією з найбільших таких сфер є використання програмного забезпечення, виявлення помилків та [[VisualEditor/Feedback|надсилання повідомлень про них]], однак існує багато й інших завдань, зокрема:

* '''Оновлення сторінок довідки''' — усі наші проєкти мають сторінки довідки, які полегшують новим користувачам процес редагування. На жаль, всі вони створені на основі редактора вікірозмітки, тож, разом із появою та постійним розвитком Візуального редактора, усі скріншоти та настанови щодо редагування стануть застарілими. Тому, якби люди могли [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|оновити сторінки довідки]], орієнтуючись на [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|наш посібник із користування Візуальним редактором]], це принесло б значну користь.
* '''Додавання TemplateData до шаблонів''' — Візуальний редактор містить непоганий редактор шаблонів, описаний детальніше на нашій [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|сторінці довідки]]. Якщо Ви випробуєте його у Вікіпедії, то побачите, що деякі шаблони мають найменовані, оформлені параметри із хорошими описами, які значно спрощують використання таких шаблонів. Інші ж всього цього не мають. Це пов'язано з тим, що шаблони потребують «TemplateData» для того, аби ця функція працювала. Якщо Ви зацікавлені в додаванні TemplateData до шаблонів, у нас є [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|посібник із поясненнями, як це правильно робити]], а також [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|список найважливіших шаблонів, до яких треба додати блок TemplateData в першу чергу]].
* '''Допоможіть своїй спільноті''' — перегляньте [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|список корисних способів допомогти Вашій локальній спільноті]], щоб оптимізувати роботу з редагуванням за допомогою візуального редактора.
* '''Допомога новим користувачам''' — Якщо впровадження Візуального редактора буде успішним, з'явиться значно більше нових користувачів, ніж зазвичай, і навіть якщо редагування буде простішим, взаємодія зі спільнотою все одно залишиться складною. Будь ласка, спробуйте виділити деякий час на [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|перегляд локального форуму допомоги, або на канал довідки в IRC]], аби допомогти новим дописувачам пройти процес акліматизації у Вікіпедії.

== Див. також ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - контрольний список щодо оптимізації процесу редагування для вашої вікі та ваших колег-редакторів.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - отримати та запропонувати допомогу щодо роботи, пов’язаної з візуальним редактором, від інших вікімедійців, таких як ви, та іншим.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - колишній посібник для спільнот, абсолютно нових для візуального редактора.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>l81mo0xssgfk0n2kcbe4smy3tqneu8n</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403029</id>
      <parentid>5402454</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12420" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Ласкаво просимо до порталу '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Візуального редактора]]'''. Візуальний редактор — це новий засіб редагування Вікіпедії, який розробляється [[:w:uk:Фонд Вікімедіа|Фондом Вікімедіа]]. Він дозволяє людям редагувати сторінки Вікіпедії навіть без необхідності вивчати вікірозмітку. Ми сподіваємось, це допоможе людям робити внесок у Вікіпедію.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Читати '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Повідомити про проблему''' з Візуальним редактором].
|-
| Дізнайтесь, як робити посилання, додавати або переміщати зображення, створювати примітки, вставляти шаблони, редагувати таблиці та ще багато чого іншого.
|Будь ласка, вкажіть свій '''веб-браузер, операційну систему комп'ютера та тему оформлення Вікіпедії''' (зазвичай Векторна, іноді — Монокнига).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Про Візуальний редактор ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Візуальний редактор є «візуальним» методом редагування Вікіпедії. Історично склалося так, що редагування Вікіпедії вимагало від редакторів вивчення вікірозмітки — достатньо складної мови розмітки, — навіть для того, аби виконувати незначні зміни на сторінках. 2001 року це ще було принято; 2015 року це вже [[$ve-why|відштовхує дописувачів]]. Ми сподіваємось, що Візуальний редактор стане корисним для наявних дописувачів, та привабливішим для нових користувачів.
&lt;/div&gt; 

Візуальний редактор був доступний як необов'язкова функція — як «альфа»-випуск на MediaWiki.org починаючи з середини 2012 року. В грудні 2012 р. він з'явився в англомовній Вікіпедії, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ з квітня 2013 р. був доступний ще в 14 інших мовних розділах], з початку червня 2013 р., він був увімкнений [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ майже для усіх інших мов]. Станом на липень 2015 року, він вже доступний як функція за замовчуванням — як для зареєстрованих, так і для незареєстрованих користувачів, у більш ніж 75% усіх Вікіпедій.
Ми сподіваємось увімкнути його за замовчуванням і для [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|решти мовних версій]] наприкінці 2015 р.
Починаючи з кінця листопада 2014 року, Візуальний редактор доступний також як необов'язкова [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Бета-функція]] в усіх вікі ФВМ, за винятком Вікісловника та Вікіджерел.

Ми випускаємо [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|регулярні оновлення статусу]] на Mediawiki.org.

== Використання Візуального редактора ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Якщо Ви зацікавлені у використанні Візуального редактора для редагування сторінок, у нас є [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|посібник користувача, що допоможе ознайомитись із процесом]], а також [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|список вживаних клавіатурних скорочень]].

Зараз Візуальний редактор має деякі помилки та обмеження. Якщо Ви зіткнетесь із будь-якою проблемою, будь ласка, не вагайтесь, а одразу [[VisualEditor/Feedback|повідомте про неї на сторінці відгуків]]. Серед поточних обмежень:

* '''Повільне завантаження''' — завантаження об'ємних сторінок зі складним кодом у Візуальному редакторі займає досить багато часу. В майбутньому програмне забезпечення стане значно швидшим, завдяки чому завантаження об'ємних сторінок припинить бути проблемою.
* '''Неповне редагування''' — деякі елементи зі складним форматуванням відображатимуться у редакторі, і дозволять редагувати їхній вміст, однак не дадуть користувачам змінювати їхню структуру чи додавати нові елементи, такі як списки визначень. Додавання функцій у цій площині є одним із наших пріоритетів.
* '''Більшість сторінок, але не сторінки обговорення''' — Візуальний редактор працює лише в окремих просторах назв. У більшості Вікіпедій, Візуальний редактор можна використовувати в статтях, у просторах назв: Користувач:, Файл:, Довідка:, та Категорія:. Візуальний редактор зараз не можна використовувати у просторі назв Вікіпедія:, чи на будь-яких сторінках обговорень.

Ми радимо користуватися функцією «{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}» перед збереженням сторінок, та [[VisualEditor/Feedback|повідомляти про проблеми, що виникають]].

== Чим можна допомогти ==

Аби зробити Візуальний редактор настільки добрим, наскільки він лише може бути, існує чимало речей, у яких нам потрібна допомога. Очевидно, що однією з найбільших таких сфер є використання програмного забезпечення, виявлення помилків та [[VisualEditor/Feedback|надсилання повідомлень про них]], однак існує багато й інших завдань, зокрема:

* '''Оновлення сторінок довідки''' — усі наші проєкти мають сторінки довідки, які полегшують новим користувачам процес редагування. На жаль, всі вони створені на основі редактора вікірозмітки, тож, разом із появою та постійним розвитком Візуального редактора, усі скріншоти та настанови щодо редагування стануть застарілими. Тому, якби люди могли [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|оновити сторінки довідки]], орієнтуючись на [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|наш посібник із користування Візуальним редактором]], це принесло б значну користь.
* '''Додавання TemplateData до шаблонів''' — Візуальний редактор містить непоганий редактор шаблонів, описаний детальніше на нашій [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|сторінці довідки]]. Якщо Ви випробуєте його у Вікіпедії, то побачите, що деякі шаблони мають найменовані, оформлені параметри із хорошими описами, які значно спрощують використання таких шаблонів. Інші ж всього цього не мають. Це пов'язано з тим, що шаблони потребують «TemplateData» для того, аби ця функція працювала. Якщо Ви зацікавлені в додаванні TemplateData до шаблонів, у нас є [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|посібник із поясненнями, як це правильно робити]], а також [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|список найважливіших шаблонів, до яких треба додати блок TemplateData в першу чергу]].
* '''Допоможіть своїй спільноті''' — перегляньте [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|список корисних способів допомогти Вашій локальній спільноті]], щоб оптимізувати роботу з редагуванням за допомогою візуального редактора.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Допомога новим користувачам''' — Якщо впровадження Візуального редактора буде успішним, з'явиться значно більше нових користувачів, ніж зазвичай, і навіть якщо редагування буде простішим, взаємодія зі спільнотою все одно залишиться складною. Будь ласка, спробуйте виділити деякий час на [[$new-users|перегляд локального форуму допомоги, або на канал довідки в IRC]], аби допомогти новим дописувачам пройти процес акліматизації у Вікіпедії.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Див. також ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - контрольний список щодо оптимізації процесу редагування для вашої вікі та ваших колег-редакторів.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - отримати та запропонувати допомогу щодо роботи, пов’язаної з візуальним редактором, від інших вікімедійців, таких як ви, та іншим.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - колишній посібник для спільнот, абсолютно нових для візуального редактора.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>lbh5y56dvz7l6ct6p54ovf34l9wex2x</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403194</id>
      <parentid>5403029</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:44:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12418" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Ласкаво просимо до порталу '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Візуального редактора]]'''. Візуальний редактор — це новий засіб редагування Вікіпедії, який розробляється [[:w:uk:Фонд Вікімедіа|Фондом Вікімедіа]]. Він дозволяє людям редагувати сторінки Вікіпедії навіть без необхідності вивчати вікірозмітку. Ми сподіваємось, це допоможе людям робити внесок у Вікіпедію.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Читати '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Повідомити про проблему''' з Візуальним редактором].
|-
| Дізнайтесь, як робити посилання, додавати або переміщати зображення, створювати примітки, вставляти шаблони, редагувати таблиці та ще багато чого іншого.
|Будь ласка, вкажіть свій '''веб-браузер, операційну систему комп'ютера та тему оформлення Вікіпедії''' (зазвичай Векторна, іноді — Монокнига).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Про Візуальний редактор ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Візуальний редактор є «візуальним» методом редагування Вікіпедії. Історично склалося так, що редагування Вікіпедії вимагало від редакторів вивчення вікірозмітки — достатньо складної мови розмітки, — навіть для того, аби виконувати незначні зміни на сторінках. 2001 року це ще було принято; 2015 року це вже [[$ve-why|відштовхує дописувачів]]. Ми сподіваємось, що Візуальний редактор стане корисним для наявних дописувачів, та привабливішим для нових користувачів.
&lt;/div&gt; 

Візуальний редактор був доступний як необов'язкова функція — як «альфа»-випуск на MediaWiki.org починаючи з середини 2012 року. В грудні 2012 р. він з'явився в англомовній Вікіпедії, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ з квітня 2013 р. був доступний ще в 14 інших мовних розділах], з початку червня 2013 р., він був увімкнений [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ майже для усіх інших мов]. Станом на липень 2015 року, він вже доступний як функція за замовчуванням — як для зареєстрованих, так і для незареєстрованих користувачів, у більш ніж 75% усіх Вікіпедій.
Ми сподіваємось увімкнути його за замовчуванням і для [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|решти мовних версій]] наприкінці 2015 р.
Починаючи з кінця листопада 2014 року, Візуальний редактор доступний також як необов'язкова [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Бета-функція]] в усіх вікі ФВМ, за винятком Вікісловника та Вікіджерел.

Ми випускаємо [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|регулярні оновлення статусу]] на Mediawiki.org.

== Використання Візуального редактора ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Якщо Ви зацікавлені у використанні Візуального редактора для редагування сторінок, у нас є [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|посібник користувача, що допоможе ознайомитись із процесом]], а також [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|список вживаних клавіатурних скорочень]].

Зараз Візуальний редактор має деякі помилки та обмеження. Якщо Ви зіткнетесь із будь-якою проблемою, будь ласка, не вагайтесь, а одразу [[VisualEditor/Feedback|повідомте про неї на сторінці відгуків]]. Серед поточних обмежень:

* '''Повільне завантаження''' — завантаження об'ємних сторінок зі складним кодом у Візуальному редакторі займає досить багато часу. В майбутньому програмне забезпечення стане значно швидшим, завдяки чому завантаження об'ємних сторінок припинить бути проблемою.
* '''Неповне редагування''' — деякі елементи зі складним форматуванням відображатимуться у редакторі, і дозволять редагувати їхній вміст, однак не дадуть користувачам змінювати їхню структуру чи додавати нові елементи, такі як списки визначень. Додавання функцій у цій площині є одним із наших пріоритетів.
* '''Більшість сторінок, але не сторінки обговорення''' — Візуальний редактор працює лише в окремих просторах назв. У більшості Вікіпедій, Візуальний редактор можна використовувати в статтях, у просторах назв: Користувач:, Файл:, Довідка:, та Категорія:. Візуальний редактор зараз не можна використовувати у просторі назв Вікіпедія:, чи на будь-яких сторінках обговорень.

Ми радимо користуватися функцією «{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}» перед збереженням сторінок, та [[VisualEditor/Feedback|повідомляти про проблеми, що виникають]].

== Чим можна допомогти ==

Аби зробити Візуальний редактор настільки добрим, наскільки він лише може бути, існує чимало речей, у яких нам потрібна допомога. Очевидно, що однією з найбільших таких сфер є використання програмного забезпечення, виявлення помилків та [[VisualEditor/Feedback|надсилання повідомлень про них]], однак існує багато й інших завдань, зокрема:

* '''Оновлення сторінок довідки''' — усі наші проєкти мають сторінки довідки, які полегшують новим користувачам процес редагування. На жаль, всі вони створені на основі редактора вікірозмітки, тож, разом із появою та постійним розвитком Візуального редактора, усі скріншоти та настанови щодо редагування стануть застарілими. Тому, якби люди могли [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|оновити сторінки довідки]], орієнтуючись на [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|наш посібник із користування Візуальним редактором]], це принесло б значну користь.
* '''Додавання TemplateData до шаблонів''' — Візуальний редактор містить непоганий редактор шаблонів, описаний детальніше на нашій [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|сторінці довідки]]. Якщо Ви випробуєте його у Вікіпедії, то побачите, що деякі шаблони мають найменовані, оформлені параметри із хорошими описами, які значно спрощують використання таких шаблонів. Інші ж всього цього не мають. Це пов'язано з тим, що шаблони потребують «TemplateData» для того, аби ця функція працювала. Якщо Ви зацікавлені в додаванні TemplateData до шаблонів, у нас є [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|посібник із поясненнями, як це правильно робити]], а також [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|список найважливіших шаблонів, до яких треба додати блок TemplateData в першу чергу]].
* '''Допоможіть своїй спільноті''' — перегляньте [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|список корисних способів допомогти Вашій локальній спільноті]], щоб оптимізувати роботу з редагуванням за допомогою візуального редактора.
* '''Допомога новим користувачам''' — Якщо впровадження Візуального редактора буде успішним, з'явиться значно більше нових користувачів, ніж зазвичай, і навіть якщо редагування буде простішим, взаємодія зі спільнотою все одно залишиться складною. Будь ласка, спробуйте виділити деякий час на [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|перегляд локального форуму допомоги, або на канал довідки в IRC]], аби допомогти новим дописувачам пройти процес акліматизації у Вікіпедії.

== Див. також ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - контрольний список щодо оптимізації процесу редагування для вашої вікі та ваших колег-редакторів.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - отримати та запропонувати допомогу щодо роботи, пов’язаної з візуальним редактором, від інших вікімедійців, таких як ви, та іншим.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - колишній посібник для спільнот, абсолютно нових для візуального редактора.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>l81mo0xssgfk0n2kcbe4smy3tqneu8n</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/uk</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>161202</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403193</id>
      <parentid>4919331</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:44:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="790" xml:space="preserve">* '''Допомога новим користувачам''' — Якщо впровадження Візуального редактора буде успішним, з'явиться значно більше нових користувачів, ніж зазвичай, і навіть якщо редагування буде простішим, взаємодія зі спільнотою все одно залишиться складною. Будь ласка, спробуйте виділити деякий час на [[$1|перегляд локального форуму допомоги, або на канал довідки в IRC]], аби допомогти новим дописувачам пройти процес акліматизації у Вікіпедії.</text>
      <sha1>3ia23o7i0ttd6qmqil1o1lp9t3ppc55</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation example/mr</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>161229</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402462</id>
      <parentid>5398549</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:04:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="25346" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
[[File:How to use the translate extension.webm|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Video of a workshop about how to use {{ll|Extension:Translate}}.&lt;/span&gt;]]
सुस्वागतम्! ही शिकवणी पूर्ण केल्यावर आपणास [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|भाषांतर विस्तारक]] याचा वापर करून, भाषांतरासाठीची पाने कशी तयार करावीत व त्याचे व्यवस्थापन कसे करावे ते कळेल.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We aim to keep this tutorial as short as possible, while introducing all the basic concepts and tasks.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After completing this tutorial you can use the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|in-depth documentation about page translation feature]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a set of video tutorials that parallel part of this tutorial that you can use to help learn how to use the Translate extension:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;gallery&gt;
File:MediaWiki Translate Extenstion Tutorial 1.webm|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to mark a page for translation and translate a page using the Translate Extension&lt;/span&gt;
File:MediaWiki Translate Extenstion Tutorial 2.webm|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to edit the wikitext source of a translatable page&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consequently, we will consider that you are a ''Translation administrator'' on your wiki (...if you can, you should declare yourself now !), otherwise you may not access to some of the links/pages described here.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember also, that this is only a simple tutorial.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of marked code prepared by [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|best practices]] you can see [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation units|here]]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Let's go!&lt;/span&gt;
}}
__TOC__
{{clear}}
== पायरी १: सुरुवात करण्यापूर्वी ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 1. Before starting.png|thumb|400px|प्राथमिक पान]]
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ही शिकवणी असे मानते कि भाषांतर विस्तारक पूर्वीच उभारल्या गेले आहे(इन्स्टॉल्ड)व कॉन्फ्युगर केले आहे.असे शक्य आहे कि आपल्या मनात एखादे पान आहे, ज्याचे भाषांतर करावयाचे आहे;किंवा आपण त्यातील पायऱ्या वापरुन ''आपल्या विकिवर'' प्रयत्न करण्यास खाली दिलेले उदाहरणादाखलचे पान वापरू शकता.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Maybe you already have a page in mind that needs translation, or you can use the example page provided below to try out the steps in this tutorial ''in your own wiki''.&lt;/span&gt;

या पानात काल्पनिक फ्रेटिंगा नगरपालिकेचे वर्णन आहे.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is the wikicode associated to it :&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
 Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
 It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
 Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
 
 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
 from the mainland once a day.

* 1. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Go to the page &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; in your wiki (or a draft page) and click create.&lt;/span&gt;
* 2. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Paste the above content and save it.&lt;/span&gt;

== पायरी २: तयारी ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 2. Preparations.png|thumb|400px|तयार आहात: हे पान भाषांतरासाठी घ्या]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now we have a page with some text.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the page is still going to be subject to lots of changes, it may be better to wait until the edits slow down to a normal level before adding the page into the translation system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is to avoid too much work for translators as they need to keep up with all the changes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The page is ready for translation ? So let's see how to request translation :&lt;/span&gt;

* 3. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
* 4. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wrap the whole content inside {{tag|translate}} tags as shown below&lt;/span&gt;
* 5. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Save the page&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
 '''{{red|&amp;lt;translate&gt;}}'''
 Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
 It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
 Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
 
 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
 from the mainland once a day.
 '''{{red|&amp;lt;/translate&gt;}}'''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You don't need to add {{tag|translate|open}} tags to all elements.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should '''never''' add markers like {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|{{^(}}!--T:1--{{)^}}|lang=html|inline=1}} yourself; the extension does it for you in the next step.&lt;/span&gt;

== पायरी ३:भाषांतर सक्षम करणे ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After saving the page, you will see a link at the top of the page saying &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; — or &quot;This page contains changes which are not marked for translation.&quot; if you are not a translation administrator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a translation administrator, then click on the &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; link.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The page has been automatically split into four translation units.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first unit is the title of the page, the second is the first paragraph, the third is the header of the second paragraph, and the fourth is the text of the second paragraph.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the basics items of translatable pages: each unit is independent; it can and must be translated as a whole; changes to the page content are tracked into the unit level.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Units can be rearranged or deleted.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a view of the page translation page template; this will be covered in later steps.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can give names to the translation units, but in this example, we choose to stick with the defaults.&lt;/span&gt;

* 6. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; link&lt;/span&gt;
* 7. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Ensure that the page body is split into three units correctly&lt;/span&gt;
* 8. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this version for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: you have to be a ''Translation administrator'' for this)&lt;/span&gt;
* 9. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the page&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now you will see a new link at the top, &quot;Translate this page&quot;, that lets translators translate the page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might have a look at the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|translation tutorial]] which uses this page as an example and try out few translations now. Then return here for the next step.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Step 4: Making changes}}
== पायरी ४:बदल करणे ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Understanding how changes are impacting translations and translations units ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 10. Mark changes.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Processing changes&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking changes is a very important feature, so let's make some changes and see how it works.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you open the page for editing you will see that it has been modified with markers like {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|{{^(}}!--T:1--{{)^}}|lang=html|inline=1}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are added by the extension and help it identify which unit is which. This allows you to rearrange and edit those units.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing the page, the markers should be left alone and their position in relation to the unit they belong to should not be changed. When moving a unit, move the unit marker, too.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When deleting a unit, delete the marker too.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When adding new paragraphs, new markers will be added by the software.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not try to do this manually, it may confuse the software.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Markers you have deleted will also be automatically deleted by the bot in the existing translations.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you do minor changes to an existing translation unit (adding a few words or a link to a paragraph), keep the marker.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you change a whole paragraph (delete and rebuilt it), delete the marker.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This way, translators will have different tasks, between reviewing a fuzzy translation or create a new translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== let's modify something! ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here is what you will do :
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;'''{{red|&amp;lt;languages /&gt;}}'''
&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
'''{{red|It has marvelous beaches with a lot of seagulls.}}'''
&amp;#32;
== Services == {{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
&amp;#32;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
from the mainland once a day.
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|In 2009 January the roof of the church in the island fell down. It was rebuilt}}'''
'''{{red|collaboratively the following summer.}}'''
&amp;lt;/{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

* 10. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make some additions as highlighted above&lt;/span&gt;
* 11. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;marked for translation&quot; link at the top&lt;/span&gt;
* 12. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Observe the changes&lt;/span&gt;
* 13. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: you have to be a ''Translation administrator'' for this)&lt;/span&gt;
* 14. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the original page&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you made translations as suggested in the previous step, you can now see those translations linked at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also see that the translation is not 100 % up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you go to the translation view, you see that the unit is marked as in need of updating.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Outdated translations will be highlighted by a pink background; the user is told that translation is incomplete.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The translation template view helps you to see what parts of the page are constant in all language versions (the &quot;translation page template&quot;, i.e. the parts outside translate tags) and also shows you if units have been moved around or deleted.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There might be a slight delay before all translated versions are updated, because there can be many pages to update.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You now know the basics, but this tutorial will continue with more things that you are likely to encounter.
&lt;/div&gt;

== पायरी ५:विकिंचे इतर घटक जोडणे ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 18. Final result.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Final result&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Adding an image, a category and a list with translation markers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You have a basic translatable page now, but it is very dull.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Let's add an image and some other stuff to make it look more like a normal wiki page and see how those elements interact with translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also removed a paragraph, including its unit marker, and replaced it with a list, so you can see what happens.&lt;/span&gt;

* 15. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add an image, a category and a list to the page as shown below&lt;/span&gt;
* 16. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Save the page&lt;/span&gt;
* 17. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the link &quot;marked for translation&quot; at the top of the page&lt;/span&gt;
* 18. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Verify that the changes look as intended&lt;/span&gt;
* 19. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this version for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt;
* 20. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the translatable page&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|languages|class=nt}} /&amp;gt;
{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|&amp;lt;translate&gt;A typical view of Fréttinga&amp;lt;/translate&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}
&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing and
tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
It has marvelous beaches with a lot of '''{{red|&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Seagull|seagulls]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;}}'''.
&amp;#32;
== Services == {{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
&amp;#32;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
from the mainland once a day.
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|Main events:}}'''
'''{{red|* The roof of the church fell down in 2009}}'''
'''{{red|* New church was built in 1877 }}'''
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Category:Municipalities]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;}}'''
&amp;lt;/{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Document a translation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Allowing to translate only the picture title:
&lt;/div&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;A typical view of Fréttinga&lt;/nowiki&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;/translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Or allowing to change the image file in the translated page (for localized version for example) and the title:&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|A typical view of Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;/translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can see that we left most of the image markup outside of a translation unit and have it in the translation page template instead.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: the translation page template doesn't change between the different translated pages)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is usually okay, but sometimes translators may want to change the image, especially if it contains linguistic content (text).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In those cases it's usually easiest to include the whole markup in a unit (as we did for the category).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the translation of a unit involves or interacts with markup it's a good idea to write a small tip to the translators about it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can do this with the following steps.&lt;/span&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 19. Documentation.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The documentation you add is shown to the translator like this&lt;/span&gt;]]

* 21. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;Translate this page&quot; link at the top&lt;/span&gt;
* 22. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;qqq - Page documentation&quot; language&lt;/span&gt;
* 23. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the message name which contains the message &quot;A typical view of Fréttinga&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
* 24. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Write &quot;Description of an image&quot; and click &quot;Save&quot;&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now, the documentation &quot;Description of an image&quot; is shown next to the to-be-translated-title of the image.&lt;/span&gt;
{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Content of the message not translate. Use only generally understanding language (english).&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About links ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''{{red|Special:MyLanguage/}}'''&lt;nowiki&gt;Seagull]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Similarly, for links there are many ways to do it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We used &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Seagull]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, which automatically redirects to the translated version of the page depending on the users' interface language (if that translation exists).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This isn't an ultimate solution, because users will always be redirected to the interface language they are using, not to the language they are currently reading.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Special:MyLanguage also interferes with Special:WhatLinksHere and makes it not work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The good thing about Special:MyLanguage is that you always get some version of the page, even if the requested translation doesn't exist.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About categories ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the whole category assignment is a translation unit.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This lets translators change it to &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Category:Municipalities/de]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; or whatever naming convention you want to use for categories.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it were outside the translation template, you would have all the pages Foo, Foo/de, Foo/ru, Foo/ta and so on in the same category.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sometimes this is okay, but usually it distracts the users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make sure your translators know what the local convention is.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About titles ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To have titles considered as separated elements than text, don't forget to add a ''blank'' line (if there isn't one already) between the title and the paragraph following it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following example will only create one translation unit:
&lt;/div&gt;

 == Services ==
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island from the mainland once a day.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The next one will create two translation units, including one for the title.&lt;/span&gt;

 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island from the mainland once a day.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Adding a blank line allows translators to know when they can take a break.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Plus it prevents issues with wikitext.&lt;/span&gt;

== शेवटचे शब्द ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Operating on the whole page and its translations ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is also possible to move translatable pages including all their translations to a new name.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Because many pages may need to be moved, this operation is not instant.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can delete either the whole page including all translations, or just one translated version of a page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can access these functions from the same place they are on all other pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Managing all wiki's pages translations with Special pages ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:PageTranslation]] lists all the pages in the system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Besides giving you an overview of all translatable pages, it is also possible to discourage pages from translation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This hides the page from most lists. It does not prevent further translations.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;gallery widths=&quot;450&quot; heights=&quot;400&quot;&gt;
File:Translate manual - SpecialPageTranslation.png|पानाच्या भाषांतराचे विशेष पान
File:Translate manual - Page example - 21. Move confirm.png|पानाचे स्थानांतरण
File:Translate manual - Page example - 25. Delete confirm.png|पान वगळणे
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Now, you know!===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You have now created a translatable page and tried all of the common actions that can be performed on translatable pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Going deeper? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more information, or if you want to understand the feature more deeply, please continue reading on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|the in-depth documentation of page translation feature]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It also contains discussion about different ways of handling links, categories and templates, or pros and cons of using larger or smaller translation units.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration&lt;/span&gt;]]

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Page translation example]]
[[Category:Translate extension tutorials{{#translation:}}|Page translation example]]</text>
      <sha1>gzd78oywbki56rnu2sz0t1rtlsgg3ip</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402464</id>
      <parentid>5402462</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:04:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="25461" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
[[File:How to use the translate extension.webm|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Video of a workshop about how to use {{ll|Extension:Translate}}.&lt;/span&gt;]]
सुस्वागतम्! ही शिकवणी पूर्ण केल्यावर आपणास [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|भाषांतर विस्तारक]] याचा वापर करून, भाषांतरासाठीची पाने कशी तयार करावीत व त्याचे व्यवस्थापन कसे करावे ते कळेल.
आमचा असा उद्देश आहे कि सर्व आवश्यक संकल्पना व कामे यांची ओळख करून देउन, ही शिकवणी शक्य तितकी छोटी ठेवावी.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After completing this tutorial you can use the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|in-depth documentation about page translation feature]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a set of video tutorials that parallel part of this tutorial that you can use to help learn how to use the Translate extension:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;gallery&gt;
File:MediaWiki Translate Extenstion Tutorial 1.webm|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to mark a page for translation and translate a page using the Translate Extension&lt;/span&gt;
File:MediaWiki Translate Extenstion Tutorial 2.webm|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to edit the wikitext source of a translatable page&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consequently, we will consider that you are a ''Translation administrator'' on your wiki (...if you can, you should declare yourself now !), otherwise you may not access to some of the links/pages described here.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember also, that this is only a simple tutorial.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of marked code prepared by [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|best practices]] you can see [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation units|here]]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Let's go!&lt;/span&gt;
}}
__TOC__
{{clear}}
== पायरी १: सुरुवात करण्यापूर्वी ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 1. Before starting.png|thumb|400px|प्राथमिक पान]]
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ही शिकवणी असे मानते कि भाषांतर विस्तारक पूर्वीच उभारल्या गेले आहे(इन्स्टॉल्ड)व कॉन्फ्युगर केले आहे.असे शक्य आहे कि आपल्या मनात एखादे पान आहे, ज्याचे भाषांतर करावयाचे आहे;किंवा आपण त्यातील पायऱ्या वापरुन ''आपल्या विकिवर'' प्रयत्न करण्यास खाली दिलेले उदाहरणादाखलचे पान वापरू शकता.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Maybe you already have a page in mind that needs translation, or you can use the example page provided below to try out the steps in this tutorial ''in your own wiki''.&lt;/span&gt;

या पानात काल्पनिक फ्रेटिंगा नगरपालिकेचे वर्णन आहे.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is the wikicode associated to it :&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
 Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
 It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
 Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
 
 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
 from the mainland once a day.

* 1. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Go to the page &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; in your wiki (or a draft page) and click create.&lt;/span&gt;
* 2. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Paste the above content and save it.&lt;/span&gt;

== पायरी २: तयारी ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 2. Preparations.png|thumb|400px|तयार आहात: हे पान भाषांतरासाठी घ्या]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now we have a page with some text.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the page is still going to be subject to lots of changes, it may be better to wait until the edits slow down to a normal level before adding the page into the translation system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is to avoid too much work for translators as they need to keep up with all the changes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The page is ready for translation ? So let's see how to request translation :&lt;/span&gt;

* 3. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
* 4. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wrap the whole content inside {{tag|translate}} tags as shown below&lt;/span&gt;
* 5. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Save the page&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
 '''{{red|&amp;lt;translate&gt;}}'''
 Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
 It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
 Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
 
 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
 from the mainland once a day.
 '''{{red|&amp;lt;/translate&gt;}}'''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You don't need to add {{tag|translate|open}} tags to all elements.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should '''never''' add markers like {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|{{^(}}!--T:1--{{)^}}|lang=html|inline=1}} yourself; the extension does it for you in the next step.&lt;/span&gt;

== पायरी ३:भाषांतर सक्षम करणे ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After saving the page, you will see a link at the top of the page saying &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; — or &quot;This page contains changes which are not marked for translation.&quot; if you are not a translation administrator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a translation administrator, then click on the &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; link.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The page has been automatically split into four translation units.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first unit is the title of the page, the second is the first paragraph, the third is the header of the second paragraph, and the fourth is the text of the second paragraph.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the basics items of translatable pages: each unit is independent; it can and must be translated as a whole; changes to the page content are tracked into the unit level.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Units can be rearranged or deleted.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a view of the page translation page template; this will be covered in later steps.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can give names to the translation units, but in this example, we choose to stick with the defaults.&lt;/span&gt;

* 6. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; link&lt;/span&gt;
* 7. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Ensure that the page body is split into three units correctly&lt;/span&gt;
* 8. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this version for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: you have to be a ''Translation administrator'' for this)&lt;/span&gt;
* 9. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the page&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now you will see a new link at the top, &quot;Translate this page&quot;, that lets translators translate the page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might have a look at the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|translation tutorial]] which uses this page as an example and try out few translations now. Then return here for the next step.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Step 4: Making changes}}
== पायरी ४:बदल करणे ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Understanding how changes are impacting translations and translations units ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 10. Mark changes.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Processing changes&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking changes is a very important feature, so let's make some changes and see how it works.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you open the page for editing you will see that it has been modified with markers like {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|{{^(}}!--T:1--{{)^}}|lang=html|inline=1}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are added by the extension and help it identify which unit is which. This allows you to rearrange and edit those units.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing the page, the markers should be left alone and their position in relation to the unit they belong to should not be changed. When moving a unit, move the unit marker, too.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When deleting a unit, delete the marker too.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When adding new paragraphs, new markers will be added by the software.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not try to do this manually, it may confuse the software.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Markers you have deleted will also be automatically deleted by the bot in the existing translations.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you do minor changes to an existing translation unit (adding a few words or a link to a paragraph), keep the marker.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you change a whole paragraph (delete and rebuilt it), delete the marker.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This way, translators will have different tasks, between reviewing a fuzzy translation or create a new translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== let's modify something! ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here is what you will do :
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;'''{{red|&amp;lt;languages /&gt;}}'''
&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
'''{{red|It has marvelous beaches with a lot of seagulls.}}'''
&amp;#32;
== Services == {{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
&amp;#32;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
from the mainland once a day.
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|In 2009 January the roof of the church in the island fell down. It was rebuilt}}'''
'''{{red|collaboratively the following summer.}}'''
&amp;lt;/{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

* 10. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make some additions as highlighted above&lt;/span&gt;
* 11. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;marked for translation&quot; link at the top&lt;/span&gt;
* 12. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Observe the changes&lt;/span&gt;
* 13. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: you have to be a ''Translation administrator'' for this)&lt;/span&gt;
* 14. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the original page&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you made translations as suggested in the previous step, you can now see those translations linked at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also see that the translation is not 100 % up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you go to the translation view, you see that the unit is marked as in need of updating.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Outdated translations will be highlighted by a pink background; the user is told that translation is incomplete.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The translation template view helps you to see what parts of the page are constant in all language versions (the &quot;translation page template&quot;, i.e. the parts outside translate tags) and also shows you if units have been moved around or deleted.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There might be a slight delay before all translated versions are updated, because there can be many pages to update.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You now know the basics, but this tutorial will continue with more things that you are likely to encounter.
&lt;/div&gt;

== पायरी ५:विकिंचे इतर घटक जोडणे ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 18. Final result.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Final result&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Adding an image, a category and a list with translation markers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You have a basic translatable page now, but it is very dull.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Let's add an image and some other stuff to make it look more like a normal wiki page and see how those elements interact with translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also removed a paragraph, including its unit marker, and replaced it with a list, so you can see what happens.&lt;/span&gt;

* 15. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add an image, a category and a list to the page as shown below&lt;/span&gt;
* 16. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Save the page&lt;/span&gt;
* 17. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the link &quot;marked for translation&quot; at the top of the page&lt;/span&gt;
* 18. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Verify that the changes look as intended&lt;/span&gt;
* 19. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this version for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt;
* 20. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the translatable page&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|languages|class=nt}} /&amp;gt;
{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|&amp;lt;translate&gt;A typical view of Fréttinga&amp;lt;/translate&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}
&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing and
tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
It has marvelous beaches with a lot of '''{{red|&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Seagull|seagulls]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;}}'''.
&amp;#32;
== Services == {{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
&amp;#32;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
from the mainland once a day.
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|Main events:}}'''
'''{{red|* The roof of the church fell down in 2009}}'''
'''{{red|* New church was built in 1877 }}'''
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Category:Municipalities]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;}}'''
&amp;lt;/{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Document a translation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Allowing to translate only the picture title:
&lt;/div&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;A typical view of Fréttinga&lt;/nowiki&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;/translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Or allowing to change the image file in the translated page (for localized version for example) and the title:&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|A typical view of Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;/translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can see that we left most of the image markup outside of a translation unit and have it in the translation page template instead.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: the translation page template doesn't change between the different translated pages)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is usually okay, but sometimes translators may want to change the image, especially if it contains linguistic content (text).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In those cases it's usually easiest to include the whole markup in a unit (as we did for the category).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the translation of a unit involves or interacts with markup it's a good idea to write a small tip to the translators about it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can do this with the following steps.&lt;/span&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 19. Documentation.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The documentation you add is shown to the translator like this&lt;/span&gt;]]

* 21. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;Translate this page&quot; link at the top&lt;/span&gt;
* 22. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;qqq - Page documentation&quot; language&lt;/span&gt;
* 23. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the message name which contains the message &quot;A typical view of Fréttinga&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
* 24. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Write &quot;Description of an image&quot; and click &quot;Save&quot;&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now, the documentation &quot;Description of an image&quot; is shown next to the to-be-translated-title of the image.&lt;/span&gt;
{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Content of the message not translate. Use only generally understanding language (english).&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About links ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''{{red|Special:MyLanguage/}}'''&lt;nowiki&gt;Seagull]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Similarly, for links there are many ways to do it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We used &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Seagull]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, which automatically redirects to the translated version of the page depending on the users' interface language (if that translation exists).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This isn't an ultimate solution, because users will always be redirected to the interface language they are using, not to the language they are currently reading.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Special:MyLanguage also interferes with Special:WhatLinksHere and makes it not work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The good thing about Special:MyLanguage is that you always get some version of the page, even if the requested translation doesn't exist.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About categories ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the whole category assignment is a translation unit.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This lets translators change it to &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Category:Municipalities/de]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; or whatever naming convention you want to use for categories.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it were outside the translation template, you would have all the pages Foo, Foo/de, Foo/ru, Foo/ta and so on in the same category.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sometimes this is okay, but usually it distracts the users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make sure your translators know what the local convention is.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About titles ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To have titles considered as separated elements than text, don't forget to add a ''blank'' line (if there isn't one already) between the title and the paragraph following it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following example will only create one translation unit:
&lt;/div&gt;

 == Services ==
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island from the mainland once a day.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The next one will create two translation units, including one for the title.&lt;/span&gt;

 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island from the mainland once a day.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Adding a blank line allows translators to know when they can take a break.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Plus it prevents issues with wikitext.&lt;/span&gt;

== शेवटचे शब्द ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Operating on the whole page and its translations ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is also possible to move translatable pages including all their translations to a new name.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Because many pages may need to be moved, this operation is not instant.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can delete either the whole page including all translations, or just one translated version of a page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can access these functions from the same place they are on all other pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Managing all wiki's pages translations with Special pages ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:PageTranslation]] lists all the pages in the system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Besides giving you an overview of all translatable pages, it is also possible to discourage pages from translation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This hides the page from most lists. It does not prevent further translations.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;gallery widths=&quot;450&quot; heights=&quot;400&quot;&gt;
File:Translate manual - SpecialPageTranslation.png|पानाच्या भाषांतराचे विशेष पान
File:Translate manual - Page example - 21. Move confirm.png|पानाचे स्थानांतरण
File:Translate manual - Page example - 25. Delete confirm.png|पान वगळणे
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Now, you know!===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You have now created a translatable page and tried all of the common actions that can be performed on translatable pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Going deeper? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more information, or if you want to understand the feature more deeply, please continue reading on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|the in-depth documentation of page translation feature]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It also contains discussion about different ways of handling links, categories and templates, or pros and cons of using larger or smaller translation units.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration&lt;/span&gt;]]

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Page translation example]]
[[Category:Translate extension tutorials{{#translation:}}|Page translation example]]</text>
      <sha1>jv9nk3rdxbq791nlksm9x28jp2fybxh</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402466</id>
      <parentid>5402464</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:04:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="25524" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
[[File:How to use the translate extension.webm|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Video of a workshop about how to use {{ll|Extension:Translate}}.&lt;/span&gt;]]
सुस्वागतम्! ही शिकवणी पूर्ण केल्यावर आपणास [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|भाषांतर विस्तारक]] याचा वापर करून, भाषांतरासाठीची पाने कशी तयार करावीत व त्याचे व्यवस्थापन कसे करावे ते कळेल.
आमचा असा उद्देश आहे कि सर्व आवश्यक संकल्पना व कामे यांची ओळख करून देउन, ही शिकवणी शक्य तितकी छोटी ठेवावी.
ही शिकवणी पूर्ण झाल्यावर आपण [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|पान भाषांतराबाबत गहन दस्ताएवजीकरण]] याचा वापर करू शकता.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a set of video tutorials that parallel part of this tutorial that you can use to help learn how to use the Translate extension:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;gallery&gt;
File:MediaWiki Translate Extenstion Tutorial 1.webm|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to mark a page for translation and translate a page using the Translate Extension&lt;/span&gt;
File:MediaWiki Translate Extenstion Tutorial 2.webm|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to edit the wikitext source of a translatable page&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consequently, we will consider that you are a ''Translation administrator'' on your wiki (...if you can, you should declare yourself now !), otherwise you may not access to some of the links/pages described here.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember also, that this is only a simple tutorial.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of marked code prepared by [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|best practices]] you can see [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation units|here]]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Let's go!&lt;/span&gt;
}}
__TOC__
{{clear}}
== पायरी १: सुरुवात करण्यापूर्वी ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 1. Before starting.png|thumb|400px|प्राथमिक पान]]
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ही शिकवणी असे मानते कि भाषांतर विस्तारक पूर्वीच उभारल्या गेले आहे(इन्स्टॉल्ड)व कॉन्फ्युगर केले आहे.असे शक्य आहे कि आपल्या मनात एखादे पान आहे, ज्याचे भाषांतर करावयाचे आहे;किंवा आपण त्यातील पायऱ्या वापरुन ''आपल्या विकिवर'' प्रयत्न करण्यास खाली दिलेले उदाहरणादाखलचे पान वापरू शकता.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Maybe you already have a page in mind that needs translation, or you can use the example page provided below to try out the steps in this tutorial ''in your own wiki''.&lt;/span&gt;

या पानात काल्पनिक फ्रेटिंगा नगरपालिकेचे वर्णन आहे.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is the wikicode associated to it :&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
 Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
 It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
 Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
 
 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
 from the mainland once a day.

* 1. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Go to the page &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; in your wiki (or a draft page) and click create.&lt;/span&gt;
* 2. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Paste the above content and save it.&lt;/span&gt;

== पायरी २: तयारी ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 2. Preparations.png|thumb|400px|तयार आहात: हे पान भाषांतरासाठी घ्या]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now we have a page with some text.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the page is still going to be subject to lots of changes, it may be better to wait until the edits slow down to a normal level before adding the page into the translation system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is to avoid too much work for translators as they need to keep up with all the changes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The page is ready for translation ? So let's see how to request translation :&lt;/span&gt;

* 3. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
* 4. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wrap the whole content inside {{tag|translate}} tags as shown below&lt;/span&gt;
* 5. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Save the page&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
 '''{{red|&amp;lt;translate&gt;}}'''
 Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
 It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
 Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
 
 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
 from the mainland once a day.
 '''{{red|&amp;lt;/translate&gt;}}'''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You don't need to add {{tag|translate|open}} tags to all elements.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should '''never''' add markers like {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|{{^(}}!--T:1--{{)^}}|lang=html|inline=1}} yourself; the extension does it for you in the next step.&lt;/span&gt;

== पायरी ३:भाषांतर सक्षम करणे ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After saving the page, you will see a link at the top of the page saying &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; — or &quot;This page contains changes which are not marked for translation.&quot; if you are not a translation administrator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a translation administrator, then click on the &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; link.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The page has been automatically split into four translation units.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first unit is the title of the page, the second is the first paragraph, the third is the header of the second paragraph, and the fourth is the text of the second paragraph.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the basics items of translatable pages: each unit is independent; it can and must be translated as a whole; changes to the page content are tracked into the unit level.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Units can be rearranged or deleted.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a view of the page translation page template; this will be covered in later steps.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can give names to the translation units, but in this example, we choose to stick with the defaults.&lt;/span&gt;

* 6. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; link&lt;/span&gt;
* 7. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Ensure that the page body is split into three units correctly&lt;/span&gt;
* 8. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this version for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: you have to be a ''Translation administrator'' for this)&lt;/span&gt;
* 9. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the page&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now you will see a new link at the top, &quot;Translate this page&quot;, that lets translators translate the page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might have a look at the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|translation tutorial]] which uses this page as an example and try out few translations now. Then return here for the next step.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Step 4: Making changes}}
== पायरी ४:बदल करणे ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Understanding how changes are impacting translations and translations units ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 10. Mark changes.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Processing changes&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking changes is a very important feature, so let's make some changes and see how it works.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you open the page for editing you will see that it has been modified with markers like {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|{{^(}}!--T:1--{{)^}}|lang=html|inline=1}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are added by the extension and help it identify which unit is which. This allows you to rearrange and edit those units.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing the page, the markers should be left alone and their position in relation to the unit they belong to should not be changed. When moving a unit, move the unit marker, too.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When deleting a unit, delete the marker too.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When adding new paragraphs, new markers will be added by the software.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not try to do this manually, it may confuse the software.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Markers you have deleted will also be automatically deleted by the bot in the existing translations.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you do minor changes to an existing translation unit (adding a few words or a link to a paragraph), keep the marker.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you change a whole paragraph (delete and rebuilt it), delete the marker.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This way, translators will have different tasks, between reviewing a fuzzy translation or create a new translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== let's modify something! ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here is what you will do :
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;'''{{red|&amp;lt;languages /&gt;}}'''
&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
'''{{red|It has marvelous beaches with a lot of seagulls.}}'''
&amp;#32;
== Services == {{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
&amp;#32;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
from the mainland once a day.
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|In 2009 January the roof of the church in the island fell down. It was rebuilt}}'''
'''{{red|collaboratively the following summer.}}'''
&amp;lt;/{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

* 10. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make some additions as highlighted above&lt;/span&gt;
* 11. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;marked for translation&quot; link at the top&lt;/span&gt;
* 12. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Observe the changes&lt;/span&gt;
* 13. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: you have to be a ''Translation administrator'' for this)&lt;/span&gt;
* 14. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the original page&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you made translations as suggested in the previous step, you can now see those translations linked at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also see that the translation is not 100 % up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you go to the translation view, you see that the unit is marked as in need of updating.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Outdated translations will be highlighted by a pink background; the user is told that translation is incomplete.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The translation template view helps you to see what parts of the page are constant in all language versions (the &quot;translation page template&quot;, i.e. the parts outside translate tags) and also shows you if units have been moved around or deleted.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There might be a slight delay before all translated versions are updated, because there can be many pages to update.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You now know the basics, but this tutorial will continue with more things that you are likely to encounter.
&lt;/div&gt;

== पायरी ५:विकिंचे इतर घटक जोडणे ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 18. Final result.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Final result&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Adding an image, a category and a list with translation markers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You have a basic translatable page now, but it is very dull.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Let's add an image and some other stuff to make it look more like a normal wiki page and see how those elements interact with translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also removed a paragraph, including its unit marker, and replaced it with a list, so you can see what happens.&lt;/span&gt;

* 15. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add an image, a category and a list to the page as shown below&lt;/span&gt;
* 16. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Save the page&lt;/span&gt;
* 17. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the link &quot;marked for translation&quot; at the top of the page&lt;/span&gt;
* 18. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Verify that the changes look as intended&lt;/span&gt;
* 19. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this version for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt;
* 20. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the translatable page&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|languages|class=nt}} /&amp;gt;
{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|&amp;lt;translate&gt;A typical view of Fréttinga&amp;lt;/translate&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}
&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing and
tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
It has marvelous beaches with a lot of '''{{red|&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Seagull|seagulls]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;}}'''.
&amp;#32;
== Services == {{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
&amp;#32;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
from the mainland once a day.
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|Main events:}}'''
'''{{red|* The roof of the church fell down in 2009}}'''
'''{{red|* New church was built in 1877 }}'''
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Category:Municipalities]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;}}'''
&amp;lt;/{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Document a translation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Allowing to translate only the picture title:
&lt;/div&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;A typical view of Fréttinga&lt;/nowiki&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;/translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Or allowing to change the image file in the translated page (for localized version for example) and the title:&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|A typical view of Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;/translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can see that we left most of the image markup outside of a translation unit and have it in the translation page template instead.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: the translation page template doesn't change between the different translated pages)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is usually okay, but sometimes translators may want to change the image, especially if it contains linguistic content (text).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In those cases it's usually easiest to include the whole markup in a unit (as we did for the category).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the translation of a unit involves or interacts with markup it's a good idea to write a small tip to the translators about it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can do this with the following steps.&lt;/span&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 19. Documentation.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The documentation you add is shown to the translator like this&lt;/span&gt;]]

* 21. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;Translate this page&quot; link at the top&lt;/span&gt;
* 22. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;qqq - Page documentation&quot; language&lt;/span&gt;
* 23. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the message name which contains the message &quot;A typical view of Fréttinga&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
* 24. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Write &quot;Description of an image&quot; and click &quot;Save&quot;&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now, the documentation &quot;Description of an image&quot; is shown next to the to-be-translated-title of the image.&lt;/span&gt;
{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Content of the message not translate. Use only generally understanding language (english).&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About links ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''{{red|Special:MyLanguage/}}'''&lt;nowiki&gt;Seagull]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Similarly, for links there are many ways to do it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We used &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Seagull]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, which automatically redirects to the translated version of the page depending on the users' interface language (if that translation exists).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This isn't an ultimate solution, because users will always be redirected to the interface language they are using, not to the language they are currently reading.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Special:MyLanguage also interferes with Special:WhatLinksHere and makes it not work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The good thing about Special:MyLanguage is that you always get some version of the page, even if the requested translation doesn't exist.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About categories ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the whole category assignment is a translation unit.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This lets translators change it to &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Category:Municipalities/de]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; or whatever naming convention you want to use for categories.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it were outside the translation template, you would have all the pages Foo, Foo/de, Foo/ru, Foo/ta and so on in the same category.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sometimes this is okay, but usually it distracts the users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make sure your translators know what the local convention is.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About titles ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To have titles considered as separated elements than text, don't forget to add a ''blank'' line (if there isn't one already) between the title and the paragraph following it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following example will only create one translation unit:
&lt;/div&gt;

 == Services ==
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island from the mainland once a day.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The next one will create two translation units, including one for the title.&lt;/span&gt;

 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island from the mainland once a day.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Adding a blank line allows translators to know when they can take a break.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Plus it prevents issues with wikitext.&lt;/span&gt;

== शेवटचे शब्द ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Operating on the whole page and its translations ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is also possible to move translatable pages including all their translations to a new name.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Because many pages may need to be moved, this operation is not instant.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can delete either the whole page including all translations, or just one translated version of a page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can access these functions from the same place they are on all other pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Managing all wiki's pages translations with Special pages ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:PageTranslation]] lists all the pages in the system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Besides giving you an overview of all translatable pages, it is also possible to discourage pages from translation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This hides the page from most lists. It does not prevent further translations.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;gallery widths=&quot;450&quot; heights=&quot;400&quot;&gt;
File:Translate manual - SpecialPageTranslation.png|पानाच्या भाषांतराचे विशेष पान
File:Translate manual - Page example - 21. Move confirm.png|पानाचे स्थानांतरण
File:Translate manual - Page example - 25. Delete confirm.png|पान वगळणे
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Now, you know!===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You have now created a translatable page and tried all of the common actions that can be performed on translatable pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Going deeper? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more information, or if you want to understand the feature more deeply, please continue reading on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|the in-depth documentation of page translation feature]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It also contains discussion about different ways of handling links, categories and templates, or pros and cons of using larger or smaller translation units.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration&lt;/span&gt;]]

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Page translation example]]
[[Category:Translate extension tutorials{{#translation:}}|Page translation example]]</text>
      <sha1>qusq946fqz28psm8j8juxoyy06qq8c1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402468</id>
      <parentid>5402466</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:06:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="25771" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
[[File:How to use the translate extension.webm|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Video of a workshop about how to use {{ll|Extension:Translate}}.&lt;/span&gt;]]
सुस्वागतम्! ही शिकवणी पूर्ण केल्यावर आपणास [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|भाषांतर विस्तारक]] याचा वापर करून, भाषांतरासाठीची पाने कशी तयार करावीत व त्याचे व्यवस्थापन कसे करावे ते कळेल.
आमचा असा उद्देश आहे कि सर्व आवश्यक संकल्पना व कामे यांची ओळख करून देउन, ही शिकवणी शक्य तितकी छोटी ठेवावी.
ही शिकवणी पूर्ण झाल्यावर आपण [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|पान भाषांतराबाबत गहन दस्ताएवजीकरण]] याचा वापर करू शकता.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a set of video tutorials that parallel part of this tutorial that you can use to help learn how to use the Translate extension:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;gallery&gt;
File:MediaWiki Translate Extenstion Tutorial 1.webm|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to mark a page for translation and translate a page using the Translate Extension&lt;/span&gt;
File:MediaWiki Translate Extenstion Tutorial 2.webm|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to edit the wikitext source of a translatable page&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consequently, we will consider that you are a ''Translation administrator'' on your wiki (...if you can, you should declare yourself now !), otherwise you may not access to some of the links/pages described here.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember also, that this is only a simple tutorial.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of marked code prepared by [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|best practices]] you can see [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation units|here]]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Let's go!&lt;/span&gt;
}}
__TOC__
{{clear}}
== पायरी १: सुरुवात करण्यापूर्वी ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 1. Before starting.png|thumb|400px|प्राथमिक पान]]
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ही शिकवणी असे मानते कि भाषांतर विस्तारक पूर्वीच उभारल्या गेले आहे(इन्स्टॉल्ड)व कॉन्फ्युगर केले आहे.असे शक्य आहे कि आपल्या मनात एखादे पान आहे, ज्याचे भाषांतर करावयाचे आहे;किंवा आपण त्यातील पायऱ्या वापरुन ''आपल्या विकिवर'' प्रयत्न करण्यास खाली दिलेले उदाहरणादाखलचे पान वापरू शकता.&lt;/span&gt;
असे शक्य आहे कि आपल्या मनात एखादे पान आहे, ज्याचे भाषांतर करावयाचे आहे;किंवा आपण त्यातील पायऱ्या वापरुन ''आपल्या विकिवर'' प्रयत्न करण्यास खाली दिलेले उदाहरणादाखलचे पान वापरू शकता.

या पानात काल्पनिक फ्रेटिंगा नगरपालिकेचे वर्णन आहे.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is the wikicode associated to it :&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
 Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
 It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
 Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
 
 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
 from the mainland once a day.

* 1. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Go to the page &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; in your wiki (or a draft page) and click create.&lt;/span&gt;
* 2. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Paste the above content and save it.&lt;/span&gt;

== पायरी २: तयारी ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 2. Preparations.png|thumb|400px|तयार आहात: हे पान भाषांतरासाठी घ्या]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now we have a page with some text.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the page is still going to be subject to lots of changes, it may be better to wait until the edits slow down to a normal level before adding the page into the translation system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is to avoid too much work for translators as they need to keep up with all the changes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The page is ready for translation ? So let's see how to request translation :&lt;/span&gt;

* 3. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
* 4. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wrap the whole content inside {{tag|translate}} tags as shown below&lt;/span&gt;
* 5. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Save the page&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
 '''{{red|&amp;lt;translate&gt;}}'''
 Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
 It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
 Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
 
 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
 from the mainland once a day.
 '''{{red|&amp;lt;/translate&gt;}}'''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You don't need to add {{tag|translate|open}} tags to all elements.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should '''never''' add markers like {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|{{^(}}!--T:1--{{)^}}|lang=html|inline=1}} yourself; the extension does it for you in the next step.&lt;/span&gt;

== पायरी ३:भाषांतर सक्षम करणे ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After saving the page, you will see a link at the top of the page saying &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; — or &quot;This page contains changes which are not marked for translation.&quot; if you are not a translation administrator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a translation administrator, then click on the &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; link.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The page has been automatically split into four translation units.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first unit is the title of the page, the second is the first paragraph, the third is the header of the second paragraph, and the fourth is the text of the second paragraph.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the basics items of translatable pages: each unit is independent; it can and must be translated as a whole; changes to the page content are tracked into the unit level.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Units can be rearranged or deleted.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a view of the page translation page template; this will be covered in later steps.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can give names to the translation units, but in this example, we choose to stick with the defaults.&lt;/span&gt;

* 6. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; link&lt;/span&gt;
* 7. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Ensure that the page body is split into three units correctly&lt;/span&gt;
* 8. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this version for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: you have to be a ''Translation administrator'' for this)&lt;/span&gt;
* 9. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the page&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now you will see a new link at the top, &quot;Translate this page&quot;, that lets translators translate the page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might have a look at the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|translation tutorial]] which uses this page as an example and try out few translations now. Then return here for the next step.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Step 4: Making changes}}
== पायरी ४:बदल करणे ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Understanding how changes are impacting translations and translations units ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 10. Mark changes.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Processing changes&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking changes is a very important feature, so let's make some changes and see how it works.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you open the page for editing you will see that it has been modified with markers like {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|{{^(}}!--T:1--{{)^}}|lang=html|inline=1}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are added by the extension and help it identify which unit is which. This allows you to rearrange and edit those units.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing the page, the markers should be left alone and their position in relation to the unit they belong to should not be changed. When moving a unit, move the unit marker, too.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When deleting a unit, delete the marker too.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When adding new paragraphs, new markers will be added by the software.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not try to do this manually, it may confuse the software.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Markers you have deleted will also be automatically deleted by the bot in the existing translations.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you do minor changes to an existing translation unit (adding a few words or a link to a paragraph), keep the marker.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you change a whole paragraph (delete and rebuilt it), delete the marker.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This way, translators will have different tasks, between reviewing a fuzzy translation or create a new translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== let's modify something! ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here is what you will do :
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;'''{{red|&amp;lt;languages /&gt;}}'''
&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
'''{{red|It has marvelous beaches with a lot of seagulls.}}'''
&amp;#32;
== Services == {{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
&amp;#32;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
from the mainland once a day.
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|In 2009 January the roof of the church in the island fell down. It was rebuilt}}'''
'''{{red|collaboratively the following summer.}}'''
&amp;lt;/{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

* 10. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make some additions as highlighted above&lt;/span&gt;
* 11. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;marked for translation&quot; link at the top&lt;/span&gt;
* 12. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Observe the changes&lt;/span&gt;
* 13. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: you have to be a ''Translation administrator'' for this)&lt;/span&gt;
* 14. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the original page&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you made translations as suggested in the previous step, you can now see those translations linked at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also see that the translation is not 100 % up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you go to the translation view, you see that the unit is marked as in need of updating.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Outdated translations will be highlighted by a pink background; the user is told that translation is incomplete.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The translation template view helps you to see what parts of the page are constant in all language versions (the &quot;translation page template&quot;, i.e. the parts outside translate tags) and also shows you if units have been moved around or deleted.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There might be a slight delay before all translated versions are updated, because there can be many pages to update.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You now know the basics, but this tutorial will continue with more things that you are likely to encounter.
&lt;/div&gt;

== पायरी ५:विकिंचे इतर घटक जोडणे ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 18. Final result.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Final result&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Adding an image, a category and a list with translation markers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You have a basic translatable page now, but it is very dull.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Let's add an image and some other stuff to make it look more like a normal wiki page and see how those elements interact with translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also removed a paragraph, including its unit marker, and replaced it with a list, so you can see what happens.&lt;/span&gt;

* 15. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add an image, a category and a list to the page as shown below&lt;/span&gt;
* 16. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Save the page&lt;/span&gt;
* 17. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the link &quot;marked for translation&quot; at the top of the page&lt;/span&gt;
* 18. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Verify that the changes look as intended&lt;/span&gt;
* 19. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this version for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt;
* 20. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the translatable page&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|languages|class=nt}} /&amp;gt;
{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|&amp;lt;translate&gt;A typical view of Fréttinga&amp;lt;/translate&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}
&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing and
tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
It has marvelous beaches with a lot of '''{{red|&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Seagull|seagulls]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;}}'''.
&amp;#32;
== Services == {{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
&amp;#32;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
from the mainland once a day.
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|Main events:}}'''
'''{{red|* The roof of the church fell down in 2009}}'''
'''{{red|* New church was built in 1877 }}'''
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Category:Municipalities]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;}}'''
&amp;lt;/{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Document a translation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Allowing to translate only the picture title:
&lt;/div&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;A typical view of Fréttinga&lt;/nowiki&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;/translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Or allowing to change the image file in the translated page (for localized version for example) and the title:&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|A typical view of Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;/translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can see that we left most of the image markup outside of a translation unit and have it in the translation page template instead.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: the translation page template doesn't change between the different translated pages)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is usually okay, but sometimes translators may want to change the image, especially if it contains linguistic content (text).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In those cases it's usually easiest to include the whole markup in a unit (as we did for the category).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the translation of a unit involves or interacts with markup it's a good idea to write a small tip to the translators about it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can do this with the following steps.&lt;/span&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 19. Documentation.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The documentation you add is shown to the translator like this&lt;/span&gt;]]

* 21. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;Translate this page&quot; link at the top&lt;/span&gt;
* 22. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;qqq - Page documentation&quot; language&lt;/span&gt;
* 23. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the message name which contains the message &quot;A typical view of Fréttinga&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
* 24. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Write &quot;Description of an image&quot; and click &quot;Save&quot;&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now, the documentation &quot;Description of an image&quot; is shown next to the to-be-translated-title of the image.&lt;/span&gt;
{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Content of the message not translate. Use only generally understanding language (english).&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About links ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''{{red|Special:MyLanguage/}}'''&lt;nowiki&gt;Seagull]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Similarly, for links there are many ways to do it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We used &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Seagull]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, which automatically redirects to the translated version of the page depending on the users' interface language (if that translation exists).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This isn't an ultimate solution, because users will always be redirected to the interface language they are using, not to the language they are currently reading.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Special:MyLanguage also interferes with Special:WhatLinksHere and makes it not work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The good thing about Special:MyLanguage is that you always get some version of the page, even if the requested translation doesn't exist.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About categories ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the whole category assignment is a translation unit.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This lets translators change it to &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Category:Municipalities/de]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; or whatever naming convention you want to use for categories.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it were outside the translation template, you would have all the pages Foo, Foo/de, Foo/ru, Foo/ta and so on in the same category.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sometimes this is okay, but usually it distracts the users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make sure your translators know what the local convention is.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About titles ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To have titles considered as separated elements than text, don't forget to add a ''blank'' line (if there isn't one already) between the title and the paragraph following it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following example will only create one translation unit:
&lt;/div&gt;

 == Services ==
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island from the mainland once a day.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The next one will create two translation units, including one for the title.&lt;/span&gt;

 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island from the mainland once a day.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Adding a blank line allows translators to know when they can take a break.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Plus it prevents issues with wikitext.&lt;/span&gt;

== शेवटचे शब्द ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Operating on the whole page and its translations ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is also possible to move translatable pages including all their translations to a new name.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Because many pages may need to be moved, this operation is not instant.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can delete either the whole page including all translations, or just one translated version of a page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can access these functions from the same place they are on all other pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Managing all wiki's pages translations with Special pages ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:PageTranslation]] lists all the pages in the system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Besides giving you an overview of all translatable pages, it is also possible to discourage pages from translation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This hides the page from most lists. It does not prevent further translations.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;gallery widths=&quot;450&quot; heights=&quot;400&quot;&gt;
File:Translate manual - SpecialPageTranslation.png|पानाच्या भाषांतराचे विशेष पान
File:Translate manual - Page example - 21. Move confirm.png|पानाचे स्थानांतरण
File:Translate manual - Page example - 25. Delete confirm.png|पान वगळणे
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Now, you know!===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You have now created a translatable page and tried all of the common actions that can be performed on translatable pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Going deeper? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more information, or if you want to understand the feature more deeply, please continue reading on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|the in-depth documentation of page translation feature]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It also contains discussion about different ways of handling links, categories and templates, or pros and cons of using larger or smaller translation units.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration&lt;/span&gt;]]

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Page translation example]]
[[Category:Translate extension tutorials{{#translation:}}|Page translation example]]</text>
      <sha1>4imgsck7exojen1oxtgxit0s5v17rdf</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402470</id>
      <parentid>5402468</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:06:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="25260" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
[[File:How to use the translate extension.webm|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Video of a workshop about how to use {{ll|Extension:Translate}}.&lt;/span&gt;]]
सुस्वागतम्! ही शिकवणी पूर्ण केल्यावर आपणास [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|भाषांतर विस्तारक]] याचा वापर करून, भाषांतरासाठीची पाने कशी तयार करावीत व त्याचे व्यवस्थापन कसे करावे ते कळेल.
आमचा असा उद्देश आहे कि सर्व आवश्यक संकल्पना व कामे यांची ओळख करून देउन, ही शिकवणी शक्य तितकी छोटी ठेवावी.
ही शिकवणी पूर्ण झाल्यावर आपण [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|पान भाषांतराबाबत गहन दस्ताएवजीकरण]] याचा वापर करू शकता.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a set of video tutorials that parallel part of this tutorial that you can use to help learn how to use the Translate extension:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;gallery&gt;
File:MediaWiki Translate Extenstion Tutorial 1.webm|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to mark a page for translation and translate a page using the Translate Extension&lt;/span&gt;
File:MediaWiki Translate Extenstion Tutorial 2.webm|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to edit the wikitext source of a translatable page&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consequently, we will consider that you are a ''Translation administrator'' on your wiki (...if you can, you should declare yourself now !), otherwise you may not access to some of the links/pages described here.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember also, that this is only a simple tutorial.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of marked code prepared by [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|best practices]] you can see [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation units|here]]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Let's go!&lt;/span&gt;
}}
__TOC__
{{clear}}
== पायरी १: सुरुवात करण्यापूर्वी ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 1. Before starting.png|thumb|400px|प्राथमिक पान]]
ही शिकवणी असे मानते कि भाषांतर विस्तारक पूर्वीच उभारल्या गेले आहे(इन्स्टॉल्ड)व कॉन्फ्युगर केले आहे.
असे शक्य आहे कि आपल्या मनात एखादे पान आहे, ज्याचे भाषांतर करावयाचे आहे;किंवा आपण त्यातील पायऱ्या वापरुन ''आपल्या विकिवर'' प्रयत्न करण्यास खाली दिलेले उदाहरणादाखलचे पान वापरू शकता.

या पानात काल्पनिक फ्रेटिंगा नगरपालिकेचे वर्णन आहे.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is the wikicode associated to it :&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
 Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
 It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
 Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
 
 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
 from the mainland once a day.

* 1. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Go to the page &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; in your wiki (or a draft page) and click create.&lt;/span&gt;
* 2. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Paste the above content and save it.&lt;/span&gt;

== पायरी २: तयारी ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 2. Preparations.png|thumb|400px|तयार आहात: हे पान भाषांतरासाठी घ्या]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now we have a page with some text.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the page is still going to be subject to lots of changes, it may be better to wait until the edits slow down to a normal level before adding the page into the translation system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is to avoid too much work for translators as they need to keep up with all the changes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The page is ready for translation ? So let's see how to request translation :&lt;/span&gt;

* 3. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
* 4. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wrap the whole content inside {{tag|translate}} tags as shown below&lt;/span&gt;
* 5. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Save the page&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
 '''{{red|&amp;lt;translate&gt;}}'''
 Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
 It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
 Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
 
 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
 from the mainland once a day.
 '''{{red|&amp;lt;/translate&gt;}}'''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You don't need to add {{tag|translate|open}} tags to all elements.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should '''never''' add markers like {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|{{^(}}!--T:1--{{)^}}|lang=html|inline=1}} yourself; the extension does it for you in the next step.&lt;/span&gt;

== पायरी ३:भाषांतर सक्षम करणे ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After saving the page, you will see a link at the top of the page saying &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; — or &quot;This page contains changes which are not marked for translation.&quot; if you are not a translation administrator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a translation administrator, then click on the &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; link.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The page has been automatically split into four translation units.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first unit is the title of the page, the second is the first paragraph, the third is the header of the second paragraph, and the fourth is the text of the second paragraph.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the basics items of translatable pages: each unit is independent; it can and must be translated as a whole; changes to the page content are tracked into the unit level.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Units can be rearranged or deleted.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a view of the page translation page template; this will be covered in later steps.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can give names to the translation units, but in this example, we choose to stick with the defaults.&lt;/span&gt;

* 6. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this page for translation&quot; link&lt;/span&gt;
* 7. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Ensure that the page body is split into three units correctly&lt;/span&gt;
* 8. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this version for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: you have to be a ''Translation administrator'' for this)&lt;/span&gt;
* 9. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the page&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now you will see a new link at the top, &quot;Translate this page&quot;, that lets translators translate the page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might have a look at the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|translation tutorial]] which uses this page as an example and try out few translations now. Then return here for the next step.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Step 4: Making changes}}
== पायरी ४:बदल करणे ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Understanding how changes are impacting translations and translations units ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 10. Mark changes.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Processing changes&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking changes is a very important feature, so let's make some changes and see how it works.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you open the page for editing you will see that it has been modified with markers like {{#tag:syntaxhighlight|{{^(}}!--T:1--{{)^}}|lang=html|inline=1}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are added by the extension and help it identify which unit is which. This allows you to rearrange and edit those units.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing the page, the markers should be left alone and their position in relation to the unit they belong to should not be changed. When moving a unit, move the unit marker, too.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When deleting a unit, delete the marker too.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When adding new paragraphs, new markers will be added by the software.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not try to do this manually, it may confuse the software.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Markers you have deleted will also be automatically deleted by the bot in the existing translations.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you do minor changes to an existing translation unit (adding a few words or a link to a paragraph), keep the marker.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you change a whole paragraph (delete and rebuilt it), delete the marker.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This way, translators will have different tasks, between reviewing a fuzzy translation or create a new translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== let's modify something! ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here is what you will do :
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;'''{{red|&amp;lt;languages /&gt;}}'''
&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing.
Tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
'''{{red|It has marvelous beaches with a lot of seagulls.}}'''
&amp;#32;
== Services == {{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
&amp;#32;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
from the mainland once a day.
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|In 2009 January the roof of the church in the island fell down. It was rebuilt}}'''
'''{{red|collaboratively the following summer.}}'''
&amp;lt;/{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

* 10. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make some additions as highlighted above&lt;/span&gt;
* 11. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;marked for translation&quot; link at the top&lt;/span&gt;
* 12. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Observe the changes&lt;/span&gt;
* 13. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: you have to be a ''Translation administrator'' for this)&lt;/span&gt;
* 14. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the original page&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you made translations as suggested in the previous step, you can now see those translations linked at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also see that the translation is not 100 % up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you go to the translation view, you see that the unit is marked as in need of updating.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Outdated translations will be highlighted by a pink background; the user is told that translation is incomplete.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The translation template view helps you to see what parts of the page are constant in all language versions (the &quot;translation page template&quot;, i.e. the parts outside translate tags) and also shows you if units have been moved around or deleted.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There might be a slight delay before all translated versions are updated, because there can be many pages to update.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You now know the basics, but this tutorial will continue with more things that you are likely to encounter.
&lt;/div&gt;

== पायरी ५:विकिंचे इतर घटक जोडणे ==
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 18. Final result.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Final result&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Adding an image, a category and a list with translation markers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You have a basic translatable page now, but it is very dull.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Let's add an image and some other stuff to make it look more like a normal wiki page and see how those elements interact with translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also removed a paragraph, including its unit marker, and replaced it with a list, so you can see what happens.&lt;/span&gt;

* 15. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add an image, a category and a list to the page as shown below&lt;/span&gt;
* 16. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Save the page&lt;/span&gt;
* 17. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the link &quot;marked for translation&quot; at the top of the page&lt;/span&gt;
* 18. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Verify that the changes look as intended&lt;/span&gt;
* 19. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the &quot;Mark this version for translation&quot; button&lt;/span&gt;
* 20. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Return to the translatable page&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|languages|class=nt}} /&amp;gt;
{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|&amp;lt;translate&gt;A typical view of Fréttinga&amp;lt;/translate&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}
&amp;lt;{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
Fréttinga is a small municipality in MungoLand, located on the BaMungo island.
It hosts a population of about 400 people. It has some agriculture and fishing and
tourists like to visit it in the summertime.
It has marvelous beaches with a lot of '''{{red|&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Seagull|seagulls]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;}}'''.
&amp;#32;
== Services == {{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
&amp;#32;
{{#tag:span|&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;|class=c}}
It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island
from the mainland once a day.
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|Main events:}}'''
'''{{red|* The roof of the church fell down in 2009}}'''
'''{{red|* New church was built in 1877 }}'''
&amp;#32;
'''{{red|&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Category:Municipalities]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;}}'''
&amp;lt;/{{#tag:span|translate|class=nt}}&amp;gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Document a translation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Allowing to translate only the picture title:
&lt;/div&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;A typical view of Fréttinga&lt;/nowiki&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;/translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Or allowing to change the image file in the translated page (for localized version for example) and the title:&lt;/span&gt;

{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Torsö.jpg|thumb|A typical view of Fréttinga]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;{{red|'''&lt;nowiki&gt;&amp;lt;/translate&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''}}
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can see that we left most of the image markup outside of a translation unit and have it in the translation page template instead.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(reminder: the translation page template doesn't change between the different translated pages)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is usually okay, but sometimes translators may want to change the image, especially if it contains linguistic content (text).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In those cases it's usually easiest to include the whole markup in a unit (as we did for the category).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the translation of a unit involves or interacts with markup it's a good idea to write a small tip to the translators about it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can do this with the following steps.&lt;/span&gt;
[[File:Translate manual - Page example - 19. Documentation.png|thumb|400px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The documentation you add is shown to the translator like this&lt;/span&gt;]]

* 21. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;Translate this page&quot; link at the top&lt;/span&gt;
* 22. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;qqq - Page documentation&quot; language&lt;/span&gt;
* 23. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the message name which contains the message &quot;A typical view of Fréttinga&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
* 24. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Write &quot;Description of an image&quot; and click &quot;Save&quot;&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now, the documentation &quot;Description of an image&quot; is shown next to the to-be-translated-title of the image.&lt;/span&gt;
{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Content of the message not translate. Use only generally understanding language (english).&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About links ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''{{red|Special:MyLanguage/}}'''&lt;nowiki&gt;Seagull]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Similarly, for links there are many ways to do it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We used &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Seagull]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, which automatically redirects to the translated version of the page depending on the users' interface language (if that translation exists).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This isn't an ultimate solution, because users will always be redirected to the interface language they are using, not to the language they are currently reading.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Special:MyLanguage also interferes with Special:WhatLinksHere and makes it not work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The good thing about Special:MyLanguage is that you always get some version of the page, even if the requested translation doesn't exist.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About categories ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the whole category assignment is a translation unit.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This lets translators change it to &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Category:Municipalities/de]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; or whatever naming convention you want to use for categories.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it were outside the translation template, you would have all the pages Foo, Foo/de, Foo/ru, Foo/ta and so on in the same category.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sometimes this is okay, but usually it distracts the users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make sure your translators know what the local convention is.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== About titles ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To have titles considered as separated elements than text, don't forget to add a ''blank'' line (if there isn't one already) between the title and the paragraph following it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following example will only create one translation unit:
&lt;/div&gt;

 == Services ==
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island from the mainland once a day.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The next one will create two translation units, including one for the title.&lt;/span&gt;

 == Services ==
 
 It doesn't have many services. There is a shop, and a car ferry visits the island from the mainland once a day.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Adding a blank line allows translators to know when they can take a break.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Plus it prevents issues with wikitext.&lt;/span&gt;

== शेवटचे शब्द ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Operating on the whole page and its translations ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is also possible to move translatable pages including all their translations to a new name.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Because many pages may need to be moved, this operation is not instant.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can delete either the whole page including all translations, or just one translated version of a page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can access these functions from the same place they are on all other pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Managing all wiki's pages translations with Special pages ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:PageTranslation]] lists all the pages in the system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Besides giving you an overview of all translatable pages, it is also possible to discourage pages from translation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This hides the page from most lists. It does not prevent further translations.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;gallery widths=&quot;450&quot; heights=&quot;400&quot;&gt;
File:Translate manual - SpecialPageTranslation.png|पानाच्या भाषांतराचे विशेष पान
File:Translate manual - Page example - 21. Move confirm.png|पानाचे स्थानांतरण
File:Translate manual - Page example - 25. Delete confirm.png|पान वगळणे
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Now, you know!===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You have now created a translatable page and tried all of the common actions that can be performed on translatable pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Going deeper? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more information, or if you want to understand the feature more deeply, please continue reading on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|the in-depth documentation of page translation feature]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It also contains discussion about different ways of handling links, categories and templates, or pros and cons of using larger or smaller translation units.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation administration&lt;/span&gt;]]

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Page translation example]]
[[Category:Translate extension tutorials{{#translation:}}|Page translation example]]</text>
      <sha1>2frp21059vq9bbiuchqycopkgqvrjf3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation example/1/mr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>161230</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402461</id>
      <parentid>808938</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:04:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="407" xml:space="preserve">सुस्वागतम्! ही शिकवणी पूर्ण केल्यावर आपणास [[$1|भाषांतर विस्तारक]] याचा वापर करून, भाषांतरासाठीची पाने कशी तयार करावीत व त्याचे व्यवस्थापन कसे करावे ते कळेल.</text>
      <sha1>14abti1zn3yw2vqbz95fws0eju56wm7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation example/4/mr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>161242</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402469</id>
      <parentid>808964</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:06:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="265" xml:space="preserve">ही शिकवणी असे मानते कि भाषांतर विस्तारक पूर्वीच उभारल्या गेले आहे(इन्स्टॉल्ड)व कॉन्फ्युगर केले आहे.</text>
      <sha1>4sayrge1eec47lyllwak77qwj9h0d5p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/pt-br</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>169464</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402444</id>
      <parentid>4983815</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:04:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6998" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bem-vindo(a) ao portal do '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor Visual]]'''. O Editor Visual (EV) é uma nova forma de edição da Wikipédia que está sendo desenvolvida pela Wikimedia Foundation. Ele permite que pessoas possam editar sem precisar saber a sintaxe wiki.  Esperamos que ele ajude pessoas a contribuírem para a Wikipédia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leia '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Relate um problema''' com o Editor Visual].
|-
| Descubra como criar ligações, adicionar ou mover imagens, criar citações, inserir predefinições, editar tabelas, e mais.
|Por favor, inclua seu '''navegador, sistema operacional e tema da Wikipédia''' (geralmente é o Vector, mas também pode ser o Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Sobre o Editor Visual ==

O Editor Visual é uma forma de edição “visual” da Wikipédia. Anteriormente, a edição na Wikipédia obrigava as pessoas a conhecerem a sintaxe wiki, uma linguagem de marcação um tanto quanto complexa, mesmo para efetuar pequenas alterações em uma página. Em 2001, isto era aceitável; já em 2015, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|não]]. Esperamos que o Editor Visual seja útil para colaboradores existentes e mais acolhedor para novos. 

O Editor Visual esteve disponível como um lançamento opcional ''alpha'' no MediaWiki.org desde meados de 2012, na Wikipédia inglesa desde dezembro de 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ em outros 14 idiomas desde abril de 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ em quase todos os outros] desde o começo de junho de 2013.  Em julho de 2015, ele esteve disponível por padrão para editores registrados e não registrados em mais de 75% das Wikipédias.
Esperamos tornar o Editor Visual disponível por padrão para a maioria [[VisualEditor/Rollouts| dos idiomas restantes]] no final de 2015.
Desde o final de novembro de 2014, o Editor Visual também está disponível como um [[Beta Feature|Recurso Beta]] opcional para todas as wikis da WMF, exceto o Wikcionário e o Wikisource.

Estamos lançando [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|boletim informativo multilíngue]], enfocado nas wikis da WMF.

== Usando o Editor Visual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se estiver interessado(a) em utilizar o Editor Visual, temos um [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guia sobre como fazer isso]], bem como uma [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|lista de atalhos de teclado comuns]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Atualmente, o Editor Visual possui algumas falhas e limitações. Se encontrar um problema, por favor, não hesite em [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informá-lo na página de comentários]]. As limitações atuais incluem:

* '''Lentidão''' — O carregamento de páginas longas e complexas no Editor Visual leva algum tempo. Futuramente o software será bem mais rápido, e permitirá o carregamento de páginas maiores.
* '''Edição incompleta''' — Alguns elementos de formatação complexa se exibirão e deixarão que você edite seus conteúdos, mas não deixarão que usuários editem suas estruturas ou adicionem novas entradas - como listas de definição. Adicionar recursos nesta área é uma de nossas prioridades.
* '''Na maioria páginas de conteúdo, não de discussão''' — O Editor Visual está apenas ativo em alguns espaços nominais.  Na maioria das Wikipédias, ele pode ser usado em páginas de artigos, Usuário:, Arquivo:, Ajuda:, e Categoria:.  Atualmente, ele não está disponível em páginas Wikipédia: e de discussão.

Recomendamos que os usuários cliquem em &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antes de salvar a página, e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informem quaisquer problemas que encontrarem]].

== Como ajudar ==

Para que o Editor Visual seja tão bom quanto possível, precisamos de ajuda com várias coisas. Obviamente, um aspecto importante é usar o software, encontrar falhas e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|relatá-las]], mas também há varias outras, que incluem:

* '''Atualizar páginas de ajuda''' — Todos os nossos projetos têm páginas de ajudas para facilitar a contribuição de novos usuários. Infelizmente, todas elas são feitas no editor de código-fonte, e como o Editor Visual evolui, as capturas de telas e tutoriais se tornarão todos desatualizados. Seria bem útil de pessoas pudessem  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|atualizar páginas de ajuda]], baseadas no [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|nosso tutorial de uso do Editor Visual]].
* '''Adicionar TemplateData às predefinições''' — O Editor Visual inclui um bom editor de predefinições, que é descrito mais detalhadamente na nossa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|página de ajuda]]. Como verá se usá-lo na Wikipédia, algumas predefinições têm parâmetros nomeados e boas descrições que o fazem prático. Algumas não. Isto porque predefinições precisam do &quot;TemplateData&quot; para funcionarem corretamente. Se está interessado(a) em adicionar TemplateData, temos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|um guia para fazê-los]], juntamente com uma [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|lista das predefinições mais importantes para adicioná-lo]].
* '''Ajudar sua comunidade''' — Veja a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista de formas úteis de ajudar sua comunidade local]] a otimizar a experiência de edição com o editor visual.
* '''Ajudar novos usuários''' — Se o lançamento do Editor Visual obtiver sucesso, teremos muito mais usuários do que o acostumado, e mesmo que editar pode ser fácil, interagir com a comunidade continuará a ser difícil. Por favor, fique algum tempo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|na central de ajuda ou no canal de ajuda do IRC]] para tornar estes recém-chegados acostumados com a Wikipédia.

==Ver também==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - uma lista de maneiras de como otimizar a experiência de edição para a sua wiki e seus colegas editores.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - receba/forneça ajuda relacionada ao editor visual de/para outros wikimedistas como você.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - um guia antigo para comunidades que acabaram de conhecer o editor visual.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>22kbuxehh6k51cgucm57svata8naljk</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403023</id>
      <parentid>5402444</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7038" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bem-vindo(a) ao portal do '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor Visual]]'''. O Editor Visual (EV) é uma nova forma de edição da Wikipédia que está sendo desenvolvida pela Wikimedia Foundation. Ele permite que pessoas possam editar sem precisar saber a sintaxe wiki.  Esperamos que ele ajude pessoas a contribuírem para a Wikipédia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leia '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Relate um problema''' com o Editor Visual].
|-
| Descubra como criar ligações, adicionar ou mover imagens, criar citações, inserir predefinições, editar tabelas, e mais.
|Por favor, inclua seu '''navegador, sistema operacional e tema da Wikipédia''' (geralmente é o Vector, mas também pode ser o Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Sobre o Editor Visual ==

O Editor Visual é uma forma de edição “visual” da Wikipédia. Anteriormente, a edição na Wikipédia obrigava as pessoas a conhecerem a sintaxe wiki, uma linguagem de marcação um tanto quanto complexa, mesmo para efetuar pequenas alterações em uma página. Em 2001, isto era aceitável; já em 2015, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|não]]. Esperamos que o Editor Visual seja útil para colaboradores existentes e mais acolhedor para novos. 

O Editor Visual esteve disponível como um lançamento opcional ''alpha'' no MediaWiki.org desde meados de 2012, na Wikipédia inglesa desde dezembro de 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ em outros 14 idiomas desde abril de 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ em quase todos os outros] desde o começo de junho de 2013.  Em julho de 2015, ele esteve disponível por padrão para editores registrados e não registrados em mais de 75% das Wikipédias.
Esperamos tornar o Editor Visual disponível por padrão para a maioria [[VisualEditor/Rollouts| dos idiomas restantes]] no final de 2015.
Desde o final de novembro de 2014, o Editor Visual também está disponível como um [[Beta Feature|Recurso Beta]] opcional para todas as wikis da WMF, exceto o Wikcionário e o Wikisource.

Estamos lançando [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|boletim informativo multilíngue]], enfocado nas wikis da WMF.

== Usando o Editor Visual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se estiver interessado(a) em utilizar o Editor Visual, temos um [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guia sobre como fazer isso]], bem como uma [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|lista de atalhos de teclado comuns]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Atualmente, o Editor Visual possui algumas falhas e limitações. Se encontrar um problema, por favor, não hesite em [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informá-lo na página de comentários]]. As limitações atuais incluem:

* '''Lentidão''' — O carregamento de páginas longas e complexas no Editor Visual leva algum tempo. Futuramente o software será bem mais rápido, e permitirá o carregamento de páginas maiores.
* '''Edição incompleta''' — Alguns elementos de formatação complexa se exibirão e deixarão que você edite seus conteúdos, mas não deixarão que usuários editem suas estruturas ou adicionem novas entradas - como listas de definição. Adicionar recursos nesta área é uma de nossas prioridades.
* '''Na maioria páginas de conteúdo, não de discussão''' — O Editor Visual está apenas ativo em alguns espaços nominais.  Na maioria das Wikipédias, ele pode ser usado em páginas de artigos, Usuário:, Arquivo:, Ajuda:, e Categoria:.  Atualmente, ele não está disponível em páginas Wikipédia: e de discussão.

Recomendamos que os usuários cliquem em &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antes de salvar a página, e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informem quaisquer problemas que encontrarem]].

== Como ajudar ==

Para que o Editor Visual seja tão bom quanto possível, precisamos de ajuda com várias coisas. Obviamente, um aspecto importante é usar o software, encontrar falhas e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|relatá-las]], mas também há varias outras, que incluem:

* '''Atualizar páginas de ajuda''' — Todos os nossos projetos têm páginas de ajudas para facilitar a contribuição de novos usuários. Infelizmente, todas elas são feitas no editor de código-fonte, e como o Editor Visual evolui, as capturas de telas e tutoriais se tornarão todos desatualizados. Seria bem útil de pessoas pudessem  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|atualizar páginas de ajuda]], baseadas no [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|nosso tutorial de uso do Editor Visual]].
* '''Adicionar TemplateData às predefinições''' — O Editor Visual inclui um bom editor de predefinições, que é descrito mais detalhadamente na nossa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|página de ajuda]]. Como verá se usá-lo na Wikipédia, algumas predefinições têm parâmetros nomeados e boas descrições que o fazem prático. Algumas não. Isto porque predefinições precisam do &quot;TemplateData&quot; para funcionarem corretamente. Se está interessado(a) em adicionar TemplateData, temos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|um guia para fazê-los]], juntamente com uma [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|lista das predefinições mais importantes para adicioná-lo]].
* '''Ajudar sua comunidade''' — Veja a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista de formas úteis de ajudar sua comunidade local]] a otimizar a experiência de edição com o editor visual.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Ajudar novos usuários''' — Se o lançamento do Editor Visual obtiver sucesso, teremos muito mais usuários do que o acostumado, e mesmo que editar pode ser fácil, interagir com a comunidade continuará a ser difícil. Por favor, fique algum tempo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|na central de ajuda ou no canal de ajuda do IRC]] para tornar estes recém-chegados acostumados com a Wikipédia.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ver também==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - uma lista de maneiras de como otimizar a experiência de edição para a sua wiki e seus colegas editores.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - receba/forneça ajuda relacionada ao editor visual de/para outros wikimedistas como você.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - um guia antigo para comunidades que acabaram de conhecer o editor visual.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>fw6m8whz5xhnzubuc4hydk839yldsyr</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403180</id>
      <parentid>5403023</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:42:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6998" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bem-vindo(a) ao portal do '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor Visual]]'''. O Editor Visual (EV) é uma nova forma de edição da Wikipédia que está sendo desenvolvida pela Wikimedia Foundation. Ele permite que pessoas possam editar sem precisar saber a sintaxe wiki.  Esperamos que ele ajude pessoas a contribuírem para a Wikipédia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Leia '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Relate um problema''' com o Editor Visual].
|-
| Descubra como criar ligações, adicionar ou mover imagens, criar citações, inserir predefinições, editar tabelas, e mais.
|Por favor, inclua seu '''navegador, sistema operacional e tema da Wikipédia''' (geralmente é o Vector, mas também pode ser o Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Sobre o Editor Visual ==

O Editor Visual é uma forma de edição “visual” da Wikipédia. Anteriormente, a edição na Wikipédia obrigava as pessoas a conhecerem a sintaxe wiki, uma linguagem de marcação um tanto quanto complexa, mesmo para efetuar pequenas alterações em uma página. Em 2001, isto era aceitável; já em 2015, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|não]]. Esperamos que o Editor Visual seja útil para colaboradores existentes e mais acolhedor para novos. 

O Editor Visual esteve disponível como um lançamento opcional ''alpha'' no MediaWiki.org desde meados de 2012, na Wikipédia inglesa desde dezembro de 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ em outros 14 idiomas desde abril de 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ em quase todos os outros] desde o começo de junho de 2013.  Em julho de 2015, ele esteve disponível por padrão para editores registrados e não registrados em mais de 75% das Wikipédias.
Esperamos tornar o Editor Visual disponível por padrão para a maioria [[VisualEditor/Rollouts| dos idiomas restantes]] no final de 2015.
Desde o final de novembro de 2014, o Editor Visual também está disponível como um [[Beta Feature|Recurso Beta]] opcional para todas as wikis da WMF, exceto o Wikcionário e o Wikisource.

Estamos lançando [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|boletim informativo multilíngue]], enfocado nas wikis da WMF.

== Usando o Editor Visual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se estiver interessado(a) em utilizar o Editor Visual, temos um [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guia sobre como fazer isso]], bem como uma [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|lista de atalhos de teclado comuns]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Atualmente, o Editor Visual possui algumas falhas e limitações. Se encontrar um problema, por favor, não hesite em [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informá-lo na página de comentários]]. As limitações atuais incluem:

* '''Lentidão''' — O carregamento de páginas longas e complexas no Editor Visual leva algum tempo. Futuramente o software será bem mais rápido, e permitirá o carregamento de páginas maiores.
* '''Edição incompleta''' — Alguns elementos de formatação complexa se exibirão e deixarão que você edite seus conteúdos, mas não deixarão que usuários editem suas estruturas ou adicionem novas entradas - como listas de definição. Adicionar recursos nesta área é uma de nossas prioridades.
* '''Na maioria páginas de conteúdo, não de discussão''' — O Editor Visual está apenas ativo em alguns espaços nominais.  Na maioria das Wikipédias, ele pode ser usado em páginas de artigos, Usuário:, Arquivo:, Ajuda:, e Categoria:.  Atualmente, ele não está disponível em páginas Wikipédia: e de discussão.

Recomendamos que os usuários cliquem em &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antes de salvar a página, e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informem quaisquer problemas que encontrarem]].

== Como ajudar ==

Para que o Editor Visual seja tão bom quanto possível, precisamos de ajuda com várias coisas. Obviamente, um aspecto importante é usar o software, encontrar falhas e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|relatá-las]], mas também há varias outras, que incluem:

* '''Atualizar páginas de ajuda''' — Todos os nossos projetos têm páginas de ajudas para facilitar a contribuição de novos usuários. Infelizmente, todas elas são feitas no editor de código-fonte, e como o Editor Visual evolui, as capturas de telas e tutoriais se tornarão todos desatualizados. Seria bem útil de pessoas pudessem  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|atualizar páginas de ajuda]], baseadas no [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|nosso tutorial de uso do Editor Visual]].
* '''Adicionar TemplateData às predefinições''' — O Editor Visual inclui um bom editor de predefinições, que é descrito mais detalhadamente na nossa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|página de ajuda]]. Como verá se usá-lo na Wikipédia, algumas predefinições têm parâmetros nomeados e boas descrições que o fazem prático. Algumas não. Isto porque predefinições precisam do &quot;TemplateData&quot; para funcionarem corretamente. Se está interessado(a) em adicionar TemplateData, temos [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|um guia para fazê-los]], juntamente com uma [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|lista das predefinições mais importantes para adicioná-lo]].
* '''Ajudar sua comunidade''' — Veja a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|lista de formas úteis de ajudar sua comunidade local]] a otimizar a experiência de edição com o editor visual.
* '''Ajudar novos usuários''' — Se o lançamento do Editor Visual obtiver sucesso, teremos muito mais usuários do que o acostumado, e mesmo que editar pode ser fácil, interagir com a comunidade continuará a ser difícil. Por favor, fique algum tempo [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|na central de ajuda ou no canal de ajuda do IRC]] para tornar estes recém-chegados acostumados com a Wikipédia.

==Ver também==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - uma lista de maneiras de como otimizar a experiência de edição para a sua wiki e seus colegas editores.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - receba/forneça ajuda relacionada ao editor visual de/para outros wikimedistas como você.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - um guia antigo para comunidades que acabaram de conhecer o editor visual.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>22kbuxehh6k51cgucm57svata8naljk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>169465</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402443</id>
      <parentid>1759914</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:04:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="316" xml:space="preserve">Bem-vindo(a) ao portal do '''[[$ve|Editor Visual]]'''. O Editor Visual (EV) é uma nova forma de edição da Wikipédia que está sendo desenvolvida pela Wikimedia Foundation. Ele permite que pessoas possam editar sem precisar saber a sintaxe wiki.  Esperamos que ele ajude pessoas a contribuírem para a Wikipédia.</text>
      <sha1>rfef2eqq3kz8umpraj9tydmhyd9ditd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/lb</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>169702</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402489</id>
      <parentid>5072284</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:14:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11810" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = Niklas Laxström, Siebrand Mazeland an Anerer
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Included in Language Extension Bundle&lt;/span&gt;}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=Benotzerdokumentatioun}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enables in-wiki translation and proofreading&lt;/span&gt;
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] – oder [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view probéiert elo wéi en Säit iwwersetzen]
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

D'Erweiderung '''Iwwersetzen''' ('''Translate''') mécht aus MediaWiki e gudden Tool fir all Typ vun Text z'iwwersetzen. Et gëtt besonnesch benotzt fir Software z'iwwersetzen a fir méisproocheg Wikien op eng sensibel Manéier ze geréieren.

== Funktionalitéiten ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Translate extension has many features specifically targeted to translators, while making back-end integration with actual source code as easy as possible. Meanwhile, everything runs inside [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|MediaWiki]], which allows users an almost endless degree of freedom for communication and self-organization.
&lt;/div&gt;

Disponibel Funktiounen:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Structured wiki content page translation.'''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''In-wiki localisation and exporting of software interface messages (or just about anything).'''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Web-based translation and proofreading [[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overview/|interface]], as well as gettext based export and import for off-line translation.'''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Various aids to make the job of translators easier:'''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** display of translations in globally defined other languages, optionally expanded with user defined languages;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** collaborative editing of documentation of the use and context of messages;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** translation memory and machine translation with external tools (Apertium, Microsoft Translator, Yandex.Translate);
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** display of the latest change in the source message;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** warnings about common mistakes like parameters that are not used.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Pre-made modules for various open source products you can use as an example.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Support for various formats including: PHP, Java properties, Gettext, YAML and AndroidXml (see {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} and [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|File format support]]).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* A versatile plug-in system to make it easy to add new projects as a message group.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Verschidde Statistiken:
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** translation completion percentages for all message groups in all supported languages;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** translation completion percentages in all supported languages for any supported message group;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** tool for making activity graphs for spans of time.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Can display either number of edits or active users daily or hourly and includes many filters;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** cloud overview of active languages and translators.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translate extension, due to its large user base, is confirmed to be compatible with all reasonably recent browsers, except some minor (style) glitches which are quickly fixed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;''Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality'': this presentation shows how the Translate extension can make a wiki truly multilingual, based on the experience of KDE UserBase wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|Niklas Laxström, ''Translating the wiki way: Simple, fast, fun'', Wikimania 2012 (Presentatioun op Englesch disponibel).
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Ënnerstëtzung an Dokumentatioun ==

* Kuckt [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|Installatioun]]
* Kuckt [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|Astellung]]
* Kuckt d'[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Dokumentatioun fir Benotzer]] — inklusiv Beispiller
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|Getting started with Translate extension development]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Live support at #translatewiki IRC channel at Libera Chat (best times are at European days and evenings)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Please report all issues and feature requests in the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate issue tracker]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translate extension was originally developed by [[User:Nikerabbit]]; many other users, like [[User:Raymond]], [[User:SPQRobin]] and the Wikimedia Language team, have contributed to its code and documentation. It is maintained by [[User:Nikerabbit]] and [[User:Siebrand]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Prominent Benotzer vun der Erweiderung Translate ==
* https://translatewiki.net — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The biggest wiki-based site and community for translation of the interface of open source software.&lt;/span&gt;
* https://userbase.kde.org — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Documentation wiki for the KDE project which uses the page translation feature extensively.&lt;/span&gt;
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Translates wiki content and uses the group states feature. Translation and translation review is enabled almost for all users of the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

Kuckt méi op [[Wikipedia:translatewiki.net#Notable uses]].

=== Recommandatiounen ===

Tom Hutchison vu Joomla:
{{quotation|1=
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Translate extension allows for connection to a translation service and can auto fill the translation for you. At the same time a translator can make adjustments so you're not creating lots of pages with inaccurate translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That's ok if they are on different continents.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That is actually a plus because work is getting done 24 hours a day.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What they need is a support group chat for each other.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They would all be able to read English if they are translating right? Teach a few simple wiki markup such as links and what to do with categories.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then they help others who in turn help others.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We have over 40 in a chat who help each other and have fun at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And they were all scared of the wiki but couldn't believe how easy it was once they started.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are actually waiting on me for more translations to do because I can't keep up with them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;I know there is only 1 translating this language or that language.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We have that too.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;One person is doing Swahili while another one is working on Japanese.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, you mark pages for translation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You control whether to include templates or exclude variables in template calls.&lt;/span&gt;
}}


== Kuckt och ==
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – eng Erweiderung fir d'Kommunikatioun mat den Iwwersetzer ze verbesseren.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Not to be confused with:
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for one-off translation of wiki pages from one language to another.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Abstract Wikipedia]] for translation.&lt;/span&gt;

== Wéi Dir matmaache kënnt ==

* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all Iwwersetzt dës Erweiderung op translatewiki.net]
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|Oppe Feeler an Ufroe fir Funktiounen]]
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|Méi oppe Feeler an Ufroe fir Funktiounen op translatewiki.net]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Iwwerliest an iwwersetzt d'Dokumentatioun vun der Erweiderung Iwwersetzen]]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>fvtknvv6qrnmwvvgga4gw3nz412fela</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/lb</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>169708</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402488</id>
      <parentid>4502674</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:14:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="85" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|Iwwerliest an iwwersetzt d'Dokumentatioun vun der Erweiderung Iwwersetzen]]</text>
      <sha1>20nasrk3a25ldk13b3lrlk7qh8lmfgd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/mr</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>170904</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402491</id>
      <parentid>5072289</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:14:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14765" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = Niklas Laxström, Siebrand Mazeland व इतर
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=भाषा विस्तारक गठ्ठ्यात समाविष्ट}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=सदस्य दस्ताऐवजीकरण}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = आंतरविकि भाषांतर व मुद्रितशोधनास सक्षम करते
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] – किंवा  [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view पानाचे भाषांतर कसे करावयाचे त्याचा प्रयत्न करा]
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

'''Translate''' विस्तारक, कोणत्याही मजकूराचे भाषांतर करण्यासाठी, मिडियाविकिस एक सशक्त साधन बनवितात. ते विशेषत:,संचेतनाचे भाषांतर करण्यास व संवेदनशील मार्गाने बहुभाषिक विकिंच्या व्यवस्थापनात वापरण्यात येते.

== तोंडवळा(फिचर्स) ==

वास्तविक स्रोत संकेत द्वारे,बॅकएंड इंटीग्रेशन करतांना खूप सोपे व्हावे म्हणून, भाषांतरकारांसाठी विशेषतः अनुलक्षुन केलेले,भाषा विस्तारकाचे अनेक प्रारुप आहेत. दरम्यान, सर्व गोष्टी [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|MediaWiki]]मध्ये चालतात,ज्या वापरकर्त्याला दळणवळणासाठी व स्वतःचे आयोजनासाठी, उच्च दर्जाचे स्वातंत्र्य देतात.

तोंडवळ्यात अंतर्भूत:

* '''संरचित विकि आशय पानाचे भाषांतर.'''
* '''आंतरविकि स्थानिकीकरण व संचेतन आंतरपृष्ठ संदेशांची निर्यात(किंवा इतर काहीही).'''
* '''जालाधारीत भाषांतर व मुद्रितशोधन [[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overview/|आंतरपृष्ठ]],तसेच गेटटेक्सट(gettext)वर आधारीत निर्यात व विनाजाल भाषांतराची आयात.'''
*'''भाषांतराचे काम सहजसोपे करण्यास वेगवेगळी साधने.'''
**वैश्विकरित्या व्याख्यिकृत इतर भाषांत पर्यायस्वरुपात,सदस्याच्या भाषेत विस्तार करुन भाषांतर दर्शविणे;
** संदेशांच्या वापरानुसार व पूर्वापार संदर्भानूसार दस्ताऐवजाचे सहयोगाने संपादन;
** (Apertium, Microsoft Translator, Yandex.Translate) ही बाह्य साधने वापरुन, भाषांतर स्मृती व मशिनी भाषांतर;
** स्रोत संदेशात झालेले अद्ययावत बदल दर्शविणे;
** साधारणतः होणाऱ्या चुकांबद्दलचे ईशारे जसे, न वापरलेली प्राचले इत्यादी.
* वेगवेगळ्या मुक्त स्रोत उत्पादनांचे पूर्व-रचित मॉड्यूल्स जे उदाहरणादाखल आपण वापरु शकता.
PHP, Java properties, Gettext, YAML व AndroidXml यांचा ज्यात अंतर्भाव आहे असे वेगवेगळे फॉरमॅट ({{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} व [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|फाईल फॉरमॅट सपोर्ट हे बघा]]).
* नविन प्रकल्पाचा संदेश गट जोडण्यास सोपी करणारी एक सशक्त एक सशक्त प्लग-ईन प्रणाली.
* वेगवेगळी सांख्यिकी:
** सर्व सहाय्यीकृत भाषांच्या सर्व संदेश गटांसाठी भाषांतर पूर्ण केल्याची टक्केवारी;
** सर्व सहाय्यीकृत भाषांच्या कोणत्याही सहाय्यीकृत संदेश गटांसाठी भाषांतर पूर्ण केल्याची टक्केवारी;
** एखाद्या वेळ कालांशाकरीता क्रिया आलेखिकी तयार करण्यासाठी साधन एकतर दररोज किंवा तासागणिक केलेली संपादने किंवा सक्रिय सदस्य दाखविते व त्यात अनेक गाळण्या अंतर्भूत करते;
**सक्रिय भाषांचे व भाषांतरकारांचे क्लाउड सिंहावलोकन.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translate extension, due to its large user base, is confirmed to be compatible with all reasonably recent browsers, except some minor (style) glitches which are quickly fixed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|&quot;बहुभाषिक विकि बनविणे-एक वस्तुस्थिती&quot;:KDE UserBase विकि च्या अनुभवावर आधारीत,हे सादरीकरण एखाद्या विकिस बहुभाषिक करु शकते.
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Niklas Laxström, ''Translating the wiki way: Simple, fast, fun'', Wikimania 2012 (slides available).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== साहाय्य व दस्ताऐवजीकरण ==

* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|उभारणी]] बघा
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|रचना]] बघा
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|सदस्य दस्ताऐवजीकरण]] — यात वर्गपाठ अंतर्भूत आहेत
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|Getting started with Translate extension development]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Live support at #translatewiki IRC channel at Libera Chat (best times are at European days and evenings)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Please report all issues and feature requests in the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate issue tracker]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translate extension was originally developed by [[User:Nikerabbit]]; many other users, like [[User:Raymond]], [[User:SPQRobin]] and the Wikimedia Language team, have contributed to its code and documentation. It is maintained by [[User:Nikerabbit]] and [[User:Siebrand]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== भाषांतर विस्तारकाचे ठळक वापरकर्ते ==
* https://translatewiki.net — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The biggest wiki-based site and community for translation of the interface of open source software.&lt;/span&gt;
* https://userbase.kde.org — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Documentation wiki for the KDE project which uses the page translation feature extensively.&lt;/span&gt;
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Translates wiki content and uses the group states feature. Translation and translation review is enabled almost for all users of the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See more at [[w:translatewiki.net#Notable uses|notable uses of translatewiki.net on Wikipedia]].
&lt;/div&gt;

=== प्रशस्तीपत्र ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Tom Hutchison of Joomla:
&lt;/div&gt;
{{quotation|1=
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Translate extension allows for connection to a translation service and can auto fill the translation for you. At the same time a translator can make adjustments so you're not creating lots of pages with inaccurate translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That's ok if they are on different continents.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That is actually a plus because work is getting done 24 hours a day.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What they need is a support group chat for each other.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They would all be able to read English if they are translating right? Teach a few simple wiki markup such as links and what to do with categories.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then they help others who in turn help others.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We have over 40 in a chat who help each other and have fun at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And they were all scared of the wiki but couldn't believe how easy it was once they started.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are actually waiting on me for more translations to do because I can't keep up with them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;I know there is only 1 translating this language or that language.&lt;/span&gt;
आमच्यापाशी तीही आहे.
एक व्यक्ति ही स्वाहिली भाषेत तर दुसरी ही जापानिज भाषेत काम करत आहे.
यासमवेतच, आपण पानांवर भाषांतरासाठी अशी खूण करा.
आपण साचा अंतर्भूत करावयाचा कि चले अंतर्भूत करावयाची नाहीत यावर आपण नियंत्रण राखा.
}}


== हे ही बघा ==
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – भाषांतरकारांशी दळणवळण सुलभ करण्यासाठी असलेले एक विस्तारक.

याचेशी गल्लत करु नये:

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for one-off translation of wiki pages from one language to another.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Abstract Wikipedia]] for translation.&lt;/span&gt;

== योगदान कसे करावे ==

* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all या विस्तारकाचे translatewiki.net येथे भाषांतर करा]
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|मुक्त गणकदोष व प्रारुप विनंत्या]]
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|translatewiki.net वर अधिक मुक्त गणकदोष व प्रारुप विनंत्या]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|भाषांतर विस्तारकाच्या दस्ताऐवजाचे मुद्रितशोधन व  भाषांतर करा]]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>8jr0v47pr4c4jb1v8pqh8gly4pcpv1i</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:CirrusSearch/es</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>171736</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402829</id>
      <parentid>5399115</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:20:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>fix</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="86522" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{TOC right}}
La manera más rápida de encontrar información en los proyectos de Wikimedia es buscarla directamente. En todas las páginas existe un cuadro de '''{{lcfirst:{{int|search}}}}'''.

'''CirrusSearch''' es una extensión de MediaWiki que utiliza [[:es:Elasticsearch|Elasticsearch]] para proporcionar funciones mejoradas de búsqueda respecto de la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Searching|búsqueda predeterminada de MediaWiki]].
La Fundación Wikimedia utiliza CirrusSearch para todos los [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia_projects|proyectos de Wikimedia]].
Esta página describe las funcionalidades de CirrusSearch.
Si la página no resulve tus dudas, siéntete libre de preguntar en la [[Help talk:CirrusSearch|página de discusión]] y alguien te responderá.

Para más información, visitar sobre la extensión de MediaWiki, véase {{ll|Extension:CirrusSearch}}.

Para su uso en Wikidata, véase {{ll|Help:Extension:WikibaseCirrusSearch}}.

== Funcionamiento ==
Introduce palabras clave o frases y pulsa la tecla Intro del teclado. O bien, haz clic en el icono de la lupa o el botón «Buscar» o «Ir».
Si el título de una página coincide exactamente con el texto escrito (o bien, si utilizas el botón «Ir»), se abrirá esa página directamente.
Envío de caso contrarios, se buscan todas las páginas en el wiki (con algunas restricciones, véase más adelante), y se presenta una lista de los artículos que contienen la palabra (o las palabras) buscadas, o un mensaje que informa de que ninguna página tiene todas las palabras clave y frases.

Si haces clic en el botón “{{int|searchbutton}}” sin escribir nada, irás a 'Especial:Buscar' en donde aparecerán opciones de búsqueda extras (también disponibles desde cualquier  lista de resultado de búsqueda)

En determinadso casos puede ser muy útil restringir la búsqueda a determinadas páginas (como por ejemplo, las páginas de {{ns:2}} [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Namespaces|namespace]]).
Marca los espacios de nombres que necesites para esta búsqueda.

{{note|1=Todas las palabras clave mencionadas a continuación se distinguen entre mayúsculas y minúsculas.}}

== Mejoras ==

CirrusSearch ofrece tres mejoras principales respecto a la herramienta predefinida de búsqueda de MediaWiki, a saber:

* Mejor compatibilidad de búsquedas en idiomas diferentes.
* Actualizaciones más rápidas al índice de búsquedas: así, las modificaciones en los artículos se reflejan en los resultados de las búsquedas más rápidamente.
* Búsquedas en plantillas: el contenido de los artículos incrustados en plantillas ahora aparece en los resultados de las búsquedas.

== ¿Con qué frecuencia se actualiza el índice de búsqueda? ==
Las actualizaciones del índice de búsquedas tienen lugar prácticamente en tiempo real.
Los cambios hechos en las páginas deberían aparecer inmediatamente en los resultados de las búsquedas.
Los cambios realizados en plantillas deberían mostrarse en los artículos que incluyen esa plantilla en unos pocos minutos.
Los cambios en las plantillas pasan a la cola de trabajo, por lo que el resultado puede variar.
Una edición &quot;nula&quot; del artículo (editar y guardar sin hacer cambio alguno) puede forzar que se muestren los cambios, pero si todo va bien, esto no debería ser necesario.

==Sugerencias de búsqueda==
Las sugerencias que se obtienen al escribir en el cuadro de búsqueda se ordenan mediante una medida aproximada de la calidad de cada artículo.
En esta se toman en cuenta el número de enlaces entrantes, el tamaño de la página, la cantidad de enlaces externos, el número de títulos y el número de redirecciones.
Es posible ignorar las sugerencias de búsqueda y enviar las consultas directamente a la página de resultados de búsqueda.
Basta con añadir una virgulilla &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; antes de la consulta.
Por ejemplo, «~Frida Kahlo».
Seguirán apareciendo sugerencias de búsqueda, pero al accionar la tecla Intro se navegará a la página de resultados de búsqueda.

El plegado de acentos/diacríticos está activado para algunos idiomas; los detalles son específicos para cada idioma.

{{anchor|Full_text_search}}
== Búsqueda de texto completo ==
Una &quot;búsqueda de texto completo&quot; es una &quot;búsqueda indizada&quot;.
Todas las  páginas están almacenadas en el wiki base de datos, y todas las palabras en ellos están almacenadas en la base de datos de búsqueda, el cual es un índice al texto lleno del wiki.
Cada palabra visible es indexed a la lista de páginas donde está encontrado, así que un buscar una palabra es tan rápidamente tan mirando arriba de un solo-récord.&lt;ref&gt;
Nótese que el [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Tagline (Site Subtitle)|tagline]] no es parte del contenido real.
Para ver el contenido susceptible de ser buscado para una página, anexa &lt;kbd&gt;?action=cirrusdump&lt;/kbd&gt; a la URL.
&lt;/ref&gt;
Además, para cualesquier cambios en la formulación, el índice de búsqueda se actualiza en unos segundos.

Hay muchos índices del &quot;texto completo&quot; de la wiki para facilitar los muchos tipos de búsqueda necesarios.
El wikitexto completo se indexa muchas veces en muchos índices de propósito especial, cada uno de los cuales analiza el wikitexto de la manera que optimice su uso.
Algunos ejemplos de índices son:

* Texto &quot;auxiliar&quot;, incluye las notas de sombrero, los pies de foto, el TdC y cualquier wikitexto clasificado por un atributo HTML &lt;kbd&gt;class=searchaux&lt;/kbd&gt;.
* El texto &quot;lead-in&quot; es el wikitexto entre la parte superior de la página y el primer título.
* El texto &quot;categoría&quot; indexa los listados en la parte inferior.
* Las plantillas están indexadas. Si las palabras transcluidas de una plantilla cambian, se actualizan todas las páginas que la transcluyen. (Esto puede llevar mucho tiempo dependiendo de la cola de trabajo.) Si las subplantillas utilizadas por una plantilla cambian, el índice se actualiza.
* El contenido de los documentos almacenados en el espacio de nombres Archivo/Medios se indexa ahora. Se reconocen miles de formatos.

Hay soporte para docenas de idiomas, pero se buscan todos los idiomas.
Hay una lista de actualmente lenguas soportadas en [https://www.elastic.co/guide/en/elasticsearch/reference/current/analysis-lang-analyzer.html elasticsearch.org]; ver su [https://www.elastic.co/elasticon/conf/2016/sf/contributing-to-elasticsearch-how-to-get-started documentación encima contribuyendo] para entregar peticiones o remiendos.
También se utilizan bibliotecas de código abierto de terceros para dar soporte a otros idiomas no cubiertos por Elasticsearch.

CirrusSearch optimizará su consulta y la ejecutará. Los títulos resultantes se ponderan en función de su relevancia y se procesan en gran medida, de 20 en 20, para la página de resultados de la búsqueda. Por ejemplo, se obtienen fragmentos del artículo y los términos de búsqueda se resaltan en negrita.

Los resultados de la búsqueda suelen ir acompañados de varios informes preliminares. Estos incluyen ''Quiso decir'' (corrección ortográfica), y, cuando no se encontrarían resultados de otra manera, dirá ''Mostrando resultados para'' (corrección de la consulta) y ''buscar en lugar de'' (su consulta).

Entre las prestaciones de la búsqueda se incluyen además:

* Ordenar las sugerencias de navegación por el número de enlaces entrantes.
* Empezar con el carácter de tilde &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; para desactivar la navegación y las sugerencias de forma que también se preserve el ranking de la página.
* Caracteres de coincidencia inteligente normalizando (o &quot;doblando&quot;) los caracteres que no son del teclado en caracteres del teclado.
* Las palabras y frases que coinciden se resaltan en negrita en la página de resultados de la búsqueda. El resaltador es un analizador cosmético, mientras que el analizador de búsqueda-indización realmente encuentra la página, y estos pueden no estar 100% sincronizados, especialmente para regex.  El resaltador puede coincidir con más o menos precisión que el indexador.
{{anchor|Words.2C_phrases.2C_and_modifiers}}
=== Palabras, frases y modificadores ===
El término básico de búsqueda es una palabra o una &quot;frase entre comillas&quot;.
Los detalles varían según el idioma, especialmente para los idiomas sin espacios, pero la búsqueda suele reconocer que una &quot;palabra&quot; es:

* una cadena de dígitos
* una cadena de letras
* subpalabras entre transiciones de letras/dígitos, como en &lt;kbd&gt;txt2regex&lt;/kbd&gt;
* subpalabras dentro de un nombre compuesto usando [[w:CamelCase|camelCase]]

Una &quot;palabra tope&quot; es una palabra que se ignora (porque es común, o por otras razones).
La lista de palabras reservadas es específica de cada idioma y no todos los idiomas admiten palabras reservadas.&lt;ref&gt;Palabras de parón son raramente pedidas en CirrusSearch, excepto cuándo  son en clases seguras de frases, cuando explicó abajo.&lt;/ref&gt; Un término de búsqueda determinado coincide con el ''contenido'' (representado en la página). Para comparar con el wikitexto, utilice el parámetro de búsqueda &lt;kbd&gt;insource&lt;/kbd&gt; (Ver [[#Insource|sección]] más abajo). Cada parámetro de búsqueda tiene su propio índice, e interpreta el término dado de su propia manera.&lt;ref&gt;Los parámetros de CirrusSearch no utilizan un método consistente para manipular estos términos de búsqueda.&lt;/ref&gt; 

El espacio entre las palabras, las frases, los parámetros y la entrada a los parámetros, puede incluir generosas instancias de espacios en blanco y ''caracteres de espacio gris''.
&quot;Los caracteres del espacio gris&quot; son todos los caracteres no alfanuméricos $caracteres.
Una cadena mixta de ''caracteres de espacio gris'' y caracteres de espacio en blanco, es &quot;espacio gris&quot;, y se trata como un gran límite de palabra.
El espacio gris es la forma en que se hacen los índices y se interpretan las consultas.&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.elastic.co/guide/en/elasticsearch/reference/current/analysis-analyzers.html El mismo analyzer] utilizó a índice el wikitext es también utilizado para interpretar la consulta.&lt;/ref&gt;

Hay dos excepciones: 1) un &lt;kbd&gt;incorporado:dos puntos&lt;/kbd&gt; es una palabra (se trata como una letra), y 2) una coma incrustada &lt;kbd&gt;,&lt;/kbd&gt; como en &lt;kbd&gt;1,2,3&lt;/kbd&gt;, se trata como un número.
Por lo demás, los caracteres de espacio gris se ignoran a menos que, debido a la sintaxis de la consulta, puedan interpretarse como caracteres modificadores.

Los modificadores son &lt;kbd&gt;~ * \? - &quot; ! &lt;/kbd&gt;. Dependiendo de su ubicación en la sintaxis pueden aplicarse a un término, a un parámetro o a una consulta completa. Los modificadores de palabras y frases son el comodín, la proximidad y las búsquedas difusas. Cada parámetro puede tener sus propios modificadores, pero en general:

* Una búsqueda de palabras difusas o frases difusas puede llevar un carácter de tilde &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; (y un número que indique el grado).
* Un carácter de tilde &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; antepuesto al primer término de una consulta garantiza los resultados de la búsqueda en lugar de una posible navegación.
* Un carácter comodín dentro de una palabra puede ser un signo de interrogación (escapado) \N para un carácter o un carácter asterisco \N para cero o más caracteres.
* La lógica de la verdad puede interpretar &lt;kbd&gt;AND&lt;/kbd&gt; y &lt;kbd&gt;OR&lt;/kbd&gt;, pero los parámetros no. Tenga en cuenta que los operadores &lt;kbd&gt;AND&lt;/kbd&gt; y &lt;kbd&gt;OR&lt;/kbd&gt; actualmente '''¡no funcionan de la manera tradicional de la lógica de la verdad!''' Para más detalles, ver más en [[Ayuda:CirrusSearch/Operadores lógicos|Operadores lógicos]].
* La lógica de la verdad entiende que el prefijo &lt;kbd&gt;-&lt;/kbd&gt; o &lt;kbd&gt;!&lt;/kbd&gt; a un término invierte el significado habitual del término de &quot;coincidencia&quot; a &quot;exclusión&quot;.
{{tip|1=Las palabras que empiezan por &lt;kbd&gt;-&lt;/kbd&gt; o &lt;kbd&gt;!&lt;/kbd&gt;, como &lt;kbd&gt;-in-law&lt;/kbd&gt; o &lt;kbd&gt;!Kung&lt;/kbd&gt;, pueden coincidir exactamente con los títulos y las redirecciones, pero también coincidirán con todos los documentos que no contengan la palabra negada, que suelen ser casi todos los documentos. Para buscar estos términos que no sean coincidencias exactas de títulos o redirecciones, utilice el parámetro de búsqueda &lt;kbd&gt;insource&lt;/kbd&gt; (Ver [[#Fuente|sección]] más abajo).}}
* Las comillas alrededor de las palabras marcan una búsqueda de &quot;frase exacta&quot;. En el caso de los parámetros, también son necesarias para delimitar la entrada de varias palabras.
* El stemming es automático, pero puede desactivarse mediante una &quot;frase exacta&quot;.

{{tip|1=Los dos caracteres comodín son la estrella y el signo de interrogación (escapado), y ambos pueden ir en medio o al final de una palabra. El signo de interrogación &lt;kbd&gt;\?&lt;/kbd&gt;, que se ha escapado, representa un carácter y la estrella &lt;kbd&gt;*&lt;/kbd&gt; representa cualquier número de caracteres. Debido a que muchos usuarios, en lugar de escribir una consulta, harán una pregunta, cualquier signo de interrogación se ignora a menos que se escape a propósito &lt;kbd&gt;\?&lt;/kbd&gt; en su significado de comodín.}}

La búsqueda de una frase puede iniciarse mediante varias pistas al motor de búsqueda. Cada método de sugerencia tiene un efecto secundario en cuanto a la tolerancia de la coincidencia de la secuencia de palabras. Para las pistas ''greyspace'', ''camelCase'', o ''txt2number'':

* dado &lt;kbd&gt;words-joined_by_greyspace(characters)&lt;/kbd&gt; o &lt;kbd&gt;wordsJoinedByCamelCaseCharacters&lt;/kbd&gt; encuentra &lt;kbd&gt;words joined by&lt;/kbd&gt; ... &lt;kbd&gt;characters&lt;/kbd&gt;, en sus formas desnudas o formas de espacio gris.
* &lt;kbd&gt;txt2number&lt;/kbd&gt; coincidirá con &lt;code&gt;txt 2 number&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;txt-2.number&lt;/code&gt;. 
* Las palabras de parada se habilitan para los casos de borde (en la periferia) de una frase grey_space o camelCase. Un ejemplo utilizando &lt;kbd&gt;the&lt;/kbd&gt;, &lt;kbd&gt;of&lt;/kbd&gt; y &lt;kbd&gt;a&lt;/kbd&gt; es que &lt;kbd&gt;the_invisible_hand_of_a&lt;/kbd&gt; coincide con &lt;code&gt;invisible hand&lt;/code&gt; dentro del texto &lt;code&gt;meetings invisible hand shake&lt;/code&gt;.

El informe &quot;buscar en lugar de&quot; se activa cuando se ignora una palabra universalmente desconocida en una frase.

Cada uno de los siguientes tipos de concordancia de frases contiene y amplía las tolerancias de concordancia del anterior:

* Una &quot;frase exacta&quot; &quot;entre comillas&quot; tolerará (coincidirá con) el espacio gris. Dado $frase_exacta o $frase_exacta coincide con $corchete_exacto.
* Una frase de espacio gris inicia la comprobación de la raíz y de la &quot;palabra de parada&quot;.
* Dado &lt;kbd&gt;CamelCase&lt;/kbd&gt; coincidirá ''adicionalmente'' con &lt;code&gt;camelcase&lt;/code&gt;, en todas las minúsculas, porque CirrusSearch no distingue entre mayúsculas y minúsculas en la búsqueda. Tenga en cuenta que la coincidencia de &lt;kbd&gt;CamelCase&lt;/kbd&gt; no está habilitada para todos los idiomas.

Algunos parámetros comprenden frases greyspace (frases que poseen carácteres no-alfanuméricos), pero otros parámetros, como &lt;code&gt;insource&lt;/code&gt; (fuente de información) sólo interpretan la usual &quot;frase entre comillas&quot;.

{{tip|1=En la terminología de búsqueda, el soporte de &quot;stemming&quot; significa que una búsqueda de &quot;nadar&quot; incluirá también &quot;nadando&quot; y &quot;nadado&quot;, pero no podrá incluir formas irregulares como &quot;nadó&quot;.}}

{| class=wikitable
! Frase de búsqueda
!        parserfunction !! parserFunction !! parser function !! parser-function !! parser:function !! parSer:funcTion 
|-
| parserfunction || {{tick}} || {{tick}} || {{cross}} || {{cross}} || {{cross}} || {{cross}} 
|-
| &quot;parser function&quot; || {{cross}} || {{cross}} || {{tick}} || {{tick}} || {{cross}} || {{cross}} 
|-
| parser_function || {{cross}} || {{tick}} || {{tick}} || {{tick}} || {{cross}} || {{cross}} 
|-
| parserFunction || {{tick}} || {{tick}} || {{tick}} || {{tick}} || {{cross}} || {{cross}} 
|-
| &quot;parser:function&quot; || {{cross}} || {{cross}} || {{cross}} || {{cross}} || {{tick}} || {{tick}} 
|-
| &quot;parser_function&quot; || {{cross}} || {{cross}} || {{tick}} || {{tick}} || {{cross}} || {{cross}} 
|-
| &quot;parSer_funcTion&quot; || {{cross}} || {{cross}} || {{tick}} || {{tick}} || {{cross}} || {{cross}} 
|-
| parSer_FuncTion || {{cross}} || {{cross}} || {{tick}} || {{tick}} || {{tick}} || {{tick}} 
|}
Tenga en cuenta que todas las derivaciones no distinguen entre mayúsculas y minúsculas.

Note como la búsqueda de la &quot;frase exacta&quot; interpretó el carácter &lt;kbd&gt;incrustado:dos puntos&lt;/kbd&gt; como una letra, pero no el caracter &lt;kbd&gt;incrustado_guion bajo&lt;/kbd&gt;. Un similar acontecimiento ocurre con el caracter &lt;kbd&gt;,&lt;/kbd&gt; entre números.

Dado &lt;code&gt;in:this:word&lt;/code&gt;, CirrusSearch, cuando está en un contexto de &quot;frase exacta&quot;, (que incluye el contexto del parámetro ''insource''), no coincidirá con &lt;code&gt;in&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;this&lt;/code&gt;, o &lt;code&gt;word&lt;/code&gt;, sino que entonces sólo coincidirá con &lt;code&gt;in:this:word&lt;/code&gt;.

Por lo demás, recuerda que para CirrusSearch '''las palabras son letras, números o una combinación de ambos, y las mayúsculas y minúsculas no importan'''. 

La búsqueda de palabras comunes emplea el carácter espacio y es agresiva con el stemming, y cuando las mismas palabras están unidas por caracteres greyspace o camelCase son agresivas con las frases y subpalabras. 

Cuando se incluyen palabras comunes como &quot;de&quot; o &quot;el&quot; en una frase de espacio gris, se ignoran, para que la coincidencia sea más agresiva.

Un término de búsqueda greyspace_phrase, o un camelCase, o un término txt2number, coinciden indistintamente con las palabras significadas. Puede utilizar cualquiera de estas tres formas.&lt;ref&gt;Por ejemplo, los términos comunes en este wiki, Mediawiki.org, se buscan de forma redundante:

* udp2registro ''o'' udp2registro2
* html2wt ''o'' wt2html
* Registro2ip ''o'' ip2registro
Hay prueba2wiki, wiki2xml, wiki2dict, apache2handler, apache2ctl, etc.
&lt;/ref&gt;
Ahora &lt;kbd&gt;camelcase&lt;/kbd&gt; coincide con &lt;kbd&gt;camelCase&lt;/kbd&gt; porque la búsqueda no distingue entre mayúsculas y minúsculas, pero &lt;kbd&gt;camelCase&lt;/kbd&gt; coincide con &lt;kbd&gt;camelcase&lt;/kbd&gt; porque camelCase es más agresivo.
Al igual que el resto de la Búsqueda, las &quot;palabras&quot; de subpalabras no distinguen entre mayúsculas y minúsculas. En comparación, la &quot;frase exacta&quot; se orienta hacia el espacio gris e ignora las transiciones numéricas o de letras, así como el stemming. Las &quot;frases citadas&quot; no distinguen entre mayúsculas y minúsculas.

A partir de la tabla, podemos suponer que la búsqueda básica &lt;kbd&gt;parser_function -&quot;parser function&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt; es la suma de las búsquedas básicas &lt;code&gt;parserFunction&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;parser&amp;lt;stems&gt; function&amp;lt;stems&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.

Haciendo consultas con números, encontramos lo siguiente:

* &lt;kbd&gt;Plan9&lt;/kbd&gt; o &lt;kbd&gt;Plan_9&lt;/kbd&gt; coincidencias de: &lt;code&gt;plan9&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;plans 9&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;planned 9th&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;(planned) 9.2&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&quot;plans&quot; (9:24)&lt;/code&gt;.
* &lt;kbd&gt;Plan9&lt;/kbd&gt;2 una única coincidencia &lt;code&gt;plan9&lt;/code&gt; (insensible a las mayúsculas).
* &lt;kbd&gt;Plan*9&lt;/kbd&gt; coincidencias &lt;code&gt;plan9&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;planet4589&lt;/code&gt;.

El comodín estrella &lt;kbd&gt;*&lt;/kbd&gt; coincide con una cadena de letras y dígitos dentro de una palabra renderizada, ''pero nunca el caracter de inicio''.
Uno o mas carácteres, un porcentaje de la palabra, debe preceder del caracter &lt;kbd&gt;*&lt;/kbd&gt;.

* Cuando &lt;kbd&gt;*&lt;/kbd&gt; coincide con números, una coma se considera parte de un número, pero el punto decimal se considera un carácter de espacio gris y delimitará dos números.
* Dentro de una &quot;frase exacta&quot; &lt;kbd&gt;*&lt;/kbd&gt; es tratado como un carácter de espacio gris y no como un carácter comodín, por lo que delimita las palabras.

El comodín &lt;kbd&gt;\?&lt;/kbd&gt; representa una letra o número; tambien es aceptado el &lt;kbd&gt;*\?&lt;/kbd&gt;, pero &lt;kbd&gt;\?*&lt;/kbd&gt; no es reconocido.

Los comodines sirven para realizar búsquedas básicas de palabras, frases y fuentes, y también pueden ser una alternativa a (algunas) búsquedas regex avanzadas (tratadas más adelante).

Poner una tilde &lt;kbd&gt;~&lt;/kbd&gt; después de una palabra o frase activa una búsqueda difusa.

* Para una frase se denomina búsqueda de ''proximidad'', porque se toleran palabras ''próximas'' a una frase aproximada y no ''exacta''.
* Por ejemplo, &lt;kbd&gt;&quot;exact one two phrase&quot;~2&lt;/kbd&gt; coincide con &lt;code&gt;exact phrase&lt;/code&gt;.
* Para una palabra significa caracteres extra o caracteres ''cambiados''.
* Para una frase una búsqueda difusa ''requiere'' un número entero que le diga cuántas palabras extra debe incluir, pero para una palabra una búsqueda difusa puede tener una fracción decimal, ''por defecto'' a $palabra05 ($palabratilde), donde como máximo se pueden encontrar dos letras intercambiadas, cambiadas o añadidas, pero nunca las dos primeras.
* Para una frase de proximidad, se puede usar un número grande, pero eso es una búsqueda «cara» (lenta).
* Para una palabra &lt;kbd&gt;word~2&lt;/kbd&gt; es la más difusa con una distancia de edición de 2 (por defecto), y &lt;kbd&gt;word~1&lt;/kbd&gt; es la menos difusa, y &lt;kbd&gt;word~0&lt;/kbd&gt; no es difusa en absoluto.

{| style=&quot;text-align: center;&quot; class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ||flowers algernon||Flowers for Algernon||flowers are for Algernon||Flowers a1 2b 3c 4f 5j 6l 7j 8p q9 z10 for Algernon
|-
|&quot;flowers algernon&quot;||{{Tick}}||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}
|-
|&quot;flowers algernon&quot;~0||{{Tick}}||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}
|-
|&quot;flowers algernon&quot;~1||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}
|-
|&quot;flowers algernon&quot;~2||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}||{{Cross}}
|-
|&quot;flowers algernon&quot;~11||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}
|-
|&quot;algernon flowers&quot;~1||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}
|-
|&quot;algernon flowers&quot;~2||{{Tick}}||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}
|-
|&quot;algernon flowers&quot;~3||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}
|-
| &quot;algernon flowers&quot;~4||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}||{{Cross}}
|-
|&quot;algernon flowers&quot;~13||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}
|}

Para obtener el valor de proximidad necesario para coincidir en orden inverso (de derecha a izquierda), cuente y descarte todas las palabras sobrantes, y luego sume el doble del recuento total de palabras restantes menos una.
(En otras palabras, añade el doble de segmentos).
Para el algoritmo de proximidad completo, véase [https://www.elastic.co/guide/en/elasticsearch/guide/current/slop.html Elasticsearch slop].

Las citas desactivan el stemming, &lt;kbd&gt;&quot;but appending&quot;~&lt;/kbd&gt; la tilde reactiva el stemming.

{| style=&quot;text-align: center;&quot; class=&quot;wikitable&quot; 
| ||flowers||flower||Flowers for Algernon||flower for Algernon 
|
|- 
|flowers ||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}} 
| El stemming es un efecto.
|- 
|&quot;flowers&quot;||{{Tick}}||{{Cross}}||{{Tick}}||{{Cross}} 
| La búsqueda de proximidad desactiva el stemming. 
|- 
|&quot;flowers&quot;~||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}} 
| Proximidad más stemming (frase citada) por sufijo de una tilde. 
|- 
|&quot;flowers for algernon&quot;||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}||{{Tick}}||{{Cross}}
| La búsqueda de proximidad desactiva el stemming. 
|- 
|style=white-space:nowrap|&quot;flowers for algernon&quot;~||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}} 
| Proximidad más stemming(frase citada) por sufijo de una tilde. 
|- 
|&quot;flowers algernon&quot;~1||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}||{{Tick}}||{{Cross}} 
| Proximidad busca desactivar stemming. 
|- 
|style=white-space:nowrap|&quot;flowers algernon&quot;~1~||{{Cross}}||{{Cross}}||{{Tick}}||{{Tick}} 
| Proximidad más stemming por sufijo de una tilde. 
|}

{{anchor|Insource}}
==== Búsqueda de wikitexto (''insource'') ====
{{MW version|version=1.24|compact=y|comment=and after|gerrit change=137733}}

Las búsquedas internas se pueden usar para encontrar cualquier '' palabra '' representada en una página, pero está hecha para encontrar cualquier frase que pueda encontrar, incluido [[Wikitext|marcado de MediaWiki]] (también conocido como wikicode), en cualquier página excepto en las redirecciones. Esta frase ignora completamente el espacio gris: &lt;kbd&gt;insource: &quot;state state autocollapse&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt; coincide con &lt;code&gt;|state=&lt;nowiki&gt;{{{state|autocollapse}}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;background-color:white&quot;
|&lt;kbd&gt;insource:&amp;nbsp;word&lt;/kbd&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;kbd&gt;insource:&amp;nbsp;&quot;''word1''&amp;nbsp;''word2''&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
| Los carácteres greyspace son ignorados, al igual que con búsquedas de palabras y frases exactas.
|-
|&lt;kbd&gt;insource:/''regexp''/&lt;/kbd&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;kbd&gt;insource:/''regexp''/i&lt;/kbd&gt;
| Estos son [[w:Expresión regular|expresiones regulares]]. No son eficientes, por lo que solo se permiten unos pocos a la vez en el clúster de búsqueda, pero son muy poderosos. La expresión regular coincide de forma predeterminada entre mayúsculas y minúsculas; la insensibilidad a mayúsculas y minúsculas se puede optar por el &lt;code&gt;i&lt;/code&gt; adicional, que es incluso menos eficiente.
|}

La fuente de información se complemente asimisma. Por una lado tiene búsqueda instantanea de texto completo para cualquier palabra en el wikitext. Por otro lado puede procesar búsquedas de expresiones regulares para cualquier cadena de carácteres.&lt;ref&gt;La expresión regular CirrusSearch no aborda el carácter de nueva línea directamente, pero un punto &lt;kbd&gt;.&lt;/kbd&gt; coincidirá con una nueva línea.&lt;/ref&gt;
Las expresiones regulares escanean todos los caracteres textuales en una lista determinada de páginas; no tienen un índice de palabras para acelerar las cosas y el proceso se interrumpe si se ejecuta durante más de veinte segundos.
Las expresiones regulares se ejecutan en último lugar en una consulta, por lo que, para limitar el escaneo innecesario a nivel de caracteres, cada consulta de expresiones regulares debe incluir otros términos de búsqueda para limitar el número de documentos que deben ser escaneados.&lt;ref&gt;Una búsqueda de expresiones regulares lenta no puede deshabilitar la búsqueda, pero puede deshabilitar la búsqueda de expresiones regulares de otra persona, ya que solo hay un número limitado de búsquedas de expresiones regulares permitidas a la vez.&lt;/ref&gt;
A menudo el mejor candidato para añadir a la consulta regex &lt;kbd&gt;insource:/''arg''/&lt;/kbd&gt; es &lt;kbd&gt;insource:''arg''&lt;/kbd&gt;, donde ''arg'' es el mismo (y no utiliza comodines).

La sintaxis para la regexp es &lt;kbd&gt;insource:&lt;/kbd&gt; sin espacio, y luego &lt;kbd&gt;/''regexp''/&lt;/kbd&gt;. (Ningún otro parámetro desestima un espacio. Todos los parámetros, excepto &lt;kbd&gt;insource:/''regexp''/&lt;/kbd&gt;, aceptan un espacio después de los dos puntos).

Las funciones de búsqueda indexada y de búsqueda regexp son similares en muchos aspectos: 

* Ambos buscan sólo en el wikitexto. 
* Ninguno de los dos encuentra cosas &quot;originadas&quot; por una [[$transclusión|transclusión]].
* Ninguno de los dos hace búsquedas por tallo, difusas o de proximidad.
* Ambos buscan el menor número de resultados, y ambos trabajan más rápido cuando van acompañados de otra cláusula.

Pero las búsquedas indexadas ignoran todos los espacios en gris; las búsquedas con comodines no coinciden con los espacios en gris, por lo que las expresiones regulares son la única forma de encontrar una cadena exacta de caracteres &quot;cualquiera y todos&quot;, por ejemplo una secuencia de dos espacios.
Las remezclas son una clase totalmente diferente de herramienta de búsqueda que facilita la búsqueda de una cadena literal (uso básico, para principiantes), y hace posible la búsqueda por expresiones de metacaracteres (uso avanzado) en la wiki.
Ver [[$regexanchor]] más abajo.

{{Note|1=El parámetro ''insource'' trata las palabras con dos puntos incrustados como una sola palabra. Esto afecta a las consultas de búsqueda de plantillas, funciones del analizador, URLs, wikilinks, etiquetas HTML y comentarios.}}

{{tip|1=Cuando sea posible, evite ejecutar una búsqueda regexp desnuda. Vea cómo esto es siempre posible en [[$regexanchor]], más abajo.}}

{{tip|1=Para buscar palabras que empiecen por &lt;kbd&gt;-&lt;/kbd&gt; o &lt;kbd&gt;!&lt;/kbd&gt;, como &lt;kbd&gt;-in-law&lt;/kbd&gt; o &lt;kbd&gt;!Kung&lt;/kbd&gt;, utilice una consulta &lt;kbd&gt;insource&lt;/kbd&gt; que no distinga entre mayúsculas y minúsculas junto con una búsqueda simple en la versión &quot;simple&quot; del término (para evitar una búsqueda regexp desnuda). Por ejemplo, &lt;code&gt;&quot;in-law&quot; insource:/-in-law/i&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;&quot;kung&quot; insource:/!kung/i&lt;/code&gt;.}}

{{anchor|Prefix and namespace}}
=== Prefijo y espacio de nombres === 

Para la búsqueda, un término de espacio de nombres funciona para especificar el dominio de búsqueda inicial. En lugar de buscar en todo el wiki, el valor por defecto es el espacio de nombres principal (mainspace).

Solo se puede definir un espacio de nombres en la consulta del cuadro de búsqueda. Es el primero o el último término, ubicado dentro de un parámetro «prefix».

Se pueden buscar dos o más espacios de nombres desde el panel ''Avanzado'' de la '''barra de búsqueda''' que se encuentra en la parte superior de cada página de resultados de búsqueda, [[Special:Search]].
Aquí se puede establecer su dominio de búsqueda, como un perfil de espacios de nombres.
La lista de espacios de nombres se presentará entonces en la primera página de los futuros resultados de la búsqueda para indicar el dominio de búsqueda de los resultados.
Para desactivar esto, seleccione el espacio de nombres por defecto (mostrado entre paréntesis), seleccione &quot;Recordar&quot; y pulse Buscar.

La '''barra de búsqueda''' establece e indica gráficamente un dominio de búsqueda. &quot;Páginas de contenido&quot; (espacio principal), &quot;Multimedia&quot; (Archivo), &quot;Todo&quot; (''todo'' más Archivo), &quot;Traducciones&quot;, etc., son hipervínculos que pueden activar la consulta en ese dominio, y lo indican pasando a inactivo (oscuro).  Pero la consulta anulará la barra de búsqueda.
Cuando se utiliza un espacio de nombres o un prefijo en la consulta, las activaciones e indicaciones de la barra de búsqueda pueden ser engañosas, por lo que la barra de búsqueda y el cuadro de búsqueda son formas mutuamente excluyentes (no complementarias) de establecer el dominio de búsqueda.

Un término de espacio de nombres anula la barra de búsqueda, y un término ''prefijo'' anula un espacio de nombres.

Introduzca un nombre de espacio de nombres, o introduzca &lt;code&gt;all:&lt;/code&gt;, o introduzca dos puntos '''&lt;big&gt;&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/big&gt;''' para mainspace.
''Todos'' no incluye el espacio de nombres Archivo. El archivo incluye el contenido multimedia que se encuentra en Commons, como el PDF, que está indexado y se puede buscar.

Cuando se trata de File, el modificador de espacio de nombres &lt;code&gt;local:&lt;/code&gt; tiene efecto, de lo contrario se ignora.

Se aceptan los alias de espacios de nombres.

{|class=wikitable style=background-color:white
| &lt;kbd&gt;talk: &quot;Wind clock&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
| Encuentra páginas en el espacio de nombres '''Talk''' cuyo título o texto contenga la frase &quot;wind clock&quot;.
|-
| &lt;kbd&gt;file: &quot;Wind clock&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
| Encuentra páginas en el espacio de nombres '''Archivo''', cuyo título, texto o contenido multimedia contenga la frase &quot;reloj de viento&quot;.
|-
| style=&quot;white-space:nowrap&quot;| &lt;kbd&gt;file: local: &quot;Wind clock&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
| Filtrar los resultados de Commons wiki.
|-
| &lt;kbd&gt;local: &quot;Wind clock&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
| Ignorado. Busca en el espacio principal. Se ignora lo local a menos que se trate de un archivo.
|}
Al igual que los parámetros de búsqueda, ''local'' y ''all'' deben estar en minúsculas. Los nombres de los espacios de nombres no distinguen entre mayúsculas y minúsculas.

El parámetro &lt;kbd&gt;prefix:&lt;/kbd&gt; coincide con cualquier número de primeros caracteres de todos los nombres de página de un espacio de nombres.&lt;ref&gt;El prefijo no coincide con los primeros caracteres de los nombres completos, por lo que no se pueden buscar dos espacios de nombre a la vez sólo porque empiecen por las mismas letras, como por ejemplo ''namespace'' y ''namespace talk'' en una consulta.&lt;/ref&gt;
Cuando las primeras letras coinciden con un nombre de espacio de nombres y dos puntos, el dominio de búsqueda cambia.

Dado un espacio de nombres solamente, ''prefijo'' coincidirá con todos sus nombres de página.  Dado un solo carácter, no puede ser - guión o ' comillas o &quot; comillas dobles.  El último carácter no puede ser dos puntos.

Para los nombres de página que coinciden, los títulos de sus subpáginas coinciden por definición. 

El parámetro ''prefijo'' no permite un espacio antes de un espacio de nombre, pero permite espacios en blanco antes de un nombre de página.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=background-color:white
|-
| &lt;kbd&gt;prefix:&lt;/kbd&gt;&lt;kbd&gt;cow&lt;/kbd&gt;
| Buscar páginas en mainspace cuyo título empiece por las tres letras &lt;kbd&gt;c o w&lt;/kbd&gt;.
|-
| &lt;kbd&gt;domestic&lt;/kbd&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&lt;kbd&gt;prefix:&lt;/kbd&gt;&lt;kbd&gt;cow&lt;/kbd&gt;
| Busca páginas en mainspace cuyo título empiece por las tres letras &lt;kbd&gt;c o w&lt;/kbd&gt;, y que contengan la palabra &quot;&lt;kbd&gt;domestic&lt;/kbd&gt;&quot;.
|-
| &lt;kbd&gt;domestic&lt;/kbd&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&lt;kbd&gt;prefix:&lt;/kbd&gt;&lt;kbd&gt;cow/&lt;/kbd&gt;
| Enumera las subpáginas existentes de ''$vaca'' pero sólo si contienen la palabra &quot;domestic&quot;. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is a very common search and is frequently built using a special URL parameter called &lt;kbd&gt;prefix=&lt;/kbd&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot; white-space:nowrap;&quot;|&lt;kbd&gt;domestic&lt;/kbd&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&lt;kbd&gt;prefix:&lt;/kbd&gt;&lt;kbd&gt;Talk:cow&lt;/kbd&gt;/
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;List any subpages of ''Talk:cow'', but only if they contain the word &quot;domestic&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=white-space:nowrap | &lt;kbd&gt;1967&lt;/kbd&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&lt;kbd&gt;prefix:&lt;/kbd&gt;&lt;kbd&gt;Pink Floyd&lt;/kbd&gt;/
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;List any subpages of ''Pink Floyd'', but only if it also contains the word &quot;1967&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The ''prefix'' parameter goes at the end so that pagename characters may contain &quot; quotation marks.
&lt;/div&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Translate|Translate extension]] creates a sort of &quot;language namespace&quot;, of translated versions of a page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;But unlike namespace or prefix, which create the initial search domain, the &lt;kbd&gt;inlanguage&lt;/kbd&gt; parameter is a ''filter'' of it.  (See the next section.)&lt;/span&gt;

=== Excluir contenido del índice de búsquedas ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Content can be excluded from the search index by adding &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;navigation-not-searchable&quot;&lt;/code&gt;. This will instruct CirrusSearch to ignore this content from the search index (see {{phab|T162905}} for more context).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additionally content can be marked as auxiliary information by adding &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;searchaux&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will instruct CirrusSearch to move the content from the main text to an auxiliary field which has lower importance for search and snippet highlighting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This distinction is used for items such as image thumbnail descriptions, 'see also' sections, etc.&lt;/span&gt;

== Filtros ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A filter will have multiple instances, or negated instances, or it can run as a standalone filtering a search domain.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A query is formed as terms that filter a search domain.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Adding another word, phrase, or parameter filters more. A highly refined search result may have very many Y/N filters when every page in the results will be addressed. (In this case ranking is largely irrelevant.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filtering applies critically to adding a regex term; you want as few pages as possible before adding a regex (because it can never have a prepared index for its search).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A namespace is a specified search domain but not a filter because a namespace will not run standalone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A ''prefix'' will negate so it is a filter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The search parameters below are filters for which there may be multiple instances.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
''Insource'' (covered above) is also a filter, but &lt;kbd&gt;insource:/''regexp''/&lt;/kbd&gt; is not a filter. Filters and all other search parameters are lowercase. (Namespaces are an exception, being case insensitive.)
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Intitle_and_incategory}}
=== ''Intitle'' e ''incategory'' ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Word and phrase searches match in a title and match in the category box on bottom of the page. But with these parameters you can select titles ''only'' or category ''only''.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;cow*&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
**Find articles whose title or text contains words that start with cow
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;intitle:foo&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
**Find articles whose title contains foo. Stemming is enabled for foo.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;intitle:&quot;fine line&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Find articles whose title contains ''fine line''. Stemming is disabled.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;intitle:foo bar&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Find articles whose title contains foo and whose title or text contains bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;-intitle:foo bar&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Find articles whose title does not contain foo and whose title or text contains bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;incategory:Music&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Find articles that are in Category:Music
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;incategory:&quot;music history&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Find articles that are in Category:Music_history
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;incategory:&quot;musicals&quot; incategory:&quot;1920&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Find articles that are in both Category:Musicals and Category:1920
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;-incategory:&quot;musicals&quot; incategory:&quot;1920&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Find articles that are not in Category:Musicals but are in Category:1920
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
''Intitle'' and ''incategory'' are old search parameters. Incategory no longer searches any subcategory automatically, but you can now add multiple category pagenames manually.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.31|compact=y|comment=and after|gerrit change=413896}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31/wmf.23|MediaWiki 1.31-wmf.23}} Regular expression searches are supported for intitle:
&lt;/div&gt;
: &lt;kbd&gt;intitle:/regex/, intitle:/regex/i&lt;/kbd&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Everything written in the [[#Regular expression searches|#Regular expression searches]] is also valid for these searches, including warnings.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When possible, please avoid running a bare regexp search. See how this is always possible at [[#Regular expression searches|#Regular expression searches]], below.&lt;/span&gt;}}

=== Deepcategory ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deep category search allows to search in category and all subcategories. The depth of the tree is limited by 5 levels currently (configurable) and the number of categories is limited by 256 (configurable). The deep search uses [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata Query Service/Categories|SPARQL Category service from WDQS]]. Keywords are ''deepcategory'' or ''deepcat''. Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;kbd&gt;deepcat:&quot;musicals&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Find articles that are in Category:Musicals or any of the subcategories.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The DeepCat gadget that previously implemented the parameter was sunsetted in January 2020.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some deepcat searches return incomplete results.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See bug {{phab|T246568}} for more details.&lt;/span&gt;

=== ''Linksto'' === 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
''Linksto'' finds wikilinks to a given ''name'', not links to ''content''. The input is the canonical, case sensitive, page ''name''.
It must match the title line of the content page, exactly, before any title modifications of the letter-case. (It must match its {&lt;nowiki/&gt;{FULLPAGENAME}}, e.g. {{FULLPAGENAME}}.)
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;''Linksto'' does not find redirects. It only finds [&lt;nowiki /&gt;[wikilinks]], even when they are made by a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It does not find a link made by a URL, even if that URL is an internal wiki link.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To find all wikilinks to a &quot;Help:Cirrus Search&quot;, if &quot;Help:Searching&quot; and &quot;H:S&quot; are redirects to it:
&lt;/div&gt;
# linksto: &quot;Help:Cirrus Search&quot;
# linksto: Help:Searching
# linksto: H:S

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;CirrusSearch -linksto: Help:CirrusSearch&lt;/code&gt; finds articles that mention &quot;CirrusSearch&quot; but not in a wikilink.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== ''Hastemplate'' ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can specify template usage with &lt;code&gt;hastemplate: ''template''&lt;/code&gt;. Input the canonical pagename to find ''all usage'' of the template, but use any of its redirect pagenames finds ''just that naming''. Namespace aliases are accepted, capitalization is entirely ignored, and redirects are found, all in one name-search. (Compare ''boost-template'' no default namespace; ''linksto'' no namespace aliases, case-sensitive, no redirects; ''intitle'' no redirects.)
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
''Hastemplate'' finds secondary (or meta-template) usage on a page: it searches the post-expansion inclusion. This is the same philosophy as for ''words and phrases'' from a template, but here it's for ''templates'' from a template. The page will be listed as having that content even though that content is not seen in the wikitext.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;hastemplate: &quot;quality image&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;, finds &quot;Template:Quality image&quot; usage in your default search domain (namespaces).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;hastemplate: portal:contents/tocnavbar&lt;/kbd&gt;, finds mainspace usage of a &quot;Contents/TOCnavbar&quot; template in the Portal namespace.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For installations with the Translate extension, ''hastemplate'' searches get interference wherever [[Template:Translatable template name]] wraps the template name of a translatable template.  Use ''insource'' instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== ''Inlanguage'' ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For installations with the Translate extension, &lt;kbd&gt;inlanguage&lt;/kbd&gt; is important for highly refined searches and page counts.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;kbd&gt;inlanguage: ''[[W:List of ISO 639-2 codes|código de idioma]]''&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
will produce search results in that language only.
&lt;/div&gt;

Por ejemplo

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* to count all Japanese pages on the wiki
&lt;/div&gt;
: &lt;kbd&gt;all: inlanguage: ja&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* to filter out German and Spanish pages in the Help namespace
&lt;/div&gt;
: &lt;kbd&gt;help: -inlanguage: de -inlanguage: es&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* to ignore Translate, and where English is the base language, add
&lt;/div&gt;
: &lt;kbd&gt;inlanguage:en&lt;/kbd&gt;

=== Contentmodel ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;kbd&gt;contentmodel:&lt;/kbd&gt; keyword allows to limit the search to pages of a specific content model. For possible models cf. [[Special:MyLanguage/Content handlers|Content handlers]]. E.g.:
&lt;/div&gt;

* Para ver únicamente páginas JSON:
: &lt;kbd&gt;contentmodel:json&lt;/kbd&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== subpageof ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To find sub-pages.
&lt;/div&gt;
:&lt;kbd&gt;subpageof: ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ParentPage&lt;/span&gt;''&lt;/kbd&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* To find all subpages of CirrusSearch.
&lt;/div&gt;
: &lt;kbd&gt;subpageof:CirrusSearch&lt;/kbd&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use double quotes if the parent page contains spaces.
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;kbd&gt;subpageof:&quot;Requests for comment&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;unlike ''prefix:'', do not include the page namespace in the keyword value. If you want to limit to sub-pages of a particular namespace use the namespace filter.&lt;/span&gt;}}

=== Articletopic ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;kbd&gt;articletopic:&lt;/kbd&gt; keyword allows filtering search results by topic. For possible topics see {{ll|Help:CirrusSearch/articletopic}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g. &lt;kbd&gt;articletopic:books&lt;/kbd&gt; will filter the search results to articles about books.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;kbd&gt;articletopic:books|films&lt;/kbd&gt; will filter to articles about books or films.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;kbd&gt;articletopic:books articletopic:films&lt;/kbd&gt; will filter to articles which are about both books and films.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only mainspace articles belong into topics, and topics are only available on Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unlike other filters, articletopic also does page weighting: articles which are a stronger match for a topic will be higher in the search results (while articles which aren't about that subject at all will be removed from the result set completely).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Topic models are derived via machine learning from [[ORES#Topic routing|ORES]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Any given article receives a score on dozens of different topics, and therefore may appear under different keywords.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, the article on Albert Einstein may appear as a &quot;physics&quot; article and a &quot;biography&quot; article.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All Wikipedias have scores available -- some have local-language topic models that have coverage on all articles.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Other languages do not have local ORES models, and are using English-language scores assigned to articles in the local language that also exist in English Wikipedia.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The languages with such &quot;cross-wiki&quot; scores do not have 100% coverage -- depending on the language, it may only be something like 60% of articles that have topics available.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Topic-related search data is updated weekly, so recently created articles might not show up in topic-based search queries.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Pageid ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;kbd&gt;pageid:&lt;/kbd&gt; keyword restricts search results to the given set of page IDs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is not really useful for manual searching; it can be used by software tools for checking whether a set of pages match the given set of search conditions (e.g. for re-validating cached search results).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Page weighting ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Weighting determines snippet, suggestions, and page relevance. The normal weight is one.  Additional weighting is given through multipliers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the query is just words, pages that match them in order are given a boost. If you add any ''explicit'' phrases to your search, or for certain other additions, this &quot;prefer phrase&quot; feature is not applied.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Morelike ===
&lt;/div&gt; 
* &lt;kbd&gt;morelike:''page name 1''|''page name 2''|...|''page name n''&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Find articles whose text is most similar to the text of the given articles.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;morelike:wasp|bee|ant&lt;/kbd&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find articles about stinging insects.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;morelike:template:search|template:regex|template:usage&lt;/kbd&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find templates about regex searching for template usage on the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;kbd&gt;morelike&lt;/kbd&gt; is a &quot;greedy&quot; keyword, meaning that it cannot be combined with other search queries. If you want to use other search queries, use &lt;kbd&gt;morelikethis&lt;/kbd&gt; in your search:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;kbd&gt;morelikethis:bee hastemplate:&quot;featured article&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find articles about bees that also have the &quot;featured article&quot; template.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;kbd&gt;morelike:&lt;/kbd&gt; query works by choosing a set of words in the input articles and run a query with the chosen words. You can tune the way it works by adding the following parameters to the search results URL:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;cirrusMltMinDocFreq&lt;/kbd&gt;: Minimum number of documents (per shard) that need a term for it to be considered.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;cirrusMltMaxDocFreq&lt;/kbd&gt;: Maximum number of documents (per shard) that have a term for it to be considered.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;cirrusMltMaxQueryTerms&lt;/kbd&gt;: Maximum number of terms to be considered.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;cirrusMltMinTermFreq&lt;/kbd&gt;: Minimum number of times the term appears in the input to doc to be considered. For small fields (&lt;kbd&gt;title&lt;/kbd&gt;) this value should be 1.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;cirrusMltMinWordLength&lt;/kbd&gt;: Minimal length of a term to be considered. Defaults to 0.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;cirrusMltMaxWordLength&lt;/kbd&gt;: The maximum word length above which words will be ignored. Defaults to unbounded (0).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;cirrusMltFields&lt;/kbd&gt; (comma separated list of values): These are the fields to use. Allowed fields are &lt;kbd&gt;title&lt;/kbd&gt;, &lt;kbd&gt;text&lt;/kbd&gt;, &lt;kbd&gt;auxiliary_text&lt;/kbd&gt;, &lt;kbd&gt;opening_text&lt;/kbd&gt;, &lt;kbd&gt;headings&lt;/kbd&gt; and &lt;kbd&gt;all&lt;/kbd&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;cirrusMltUseFields&lt;/kbd&gt; (&lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;|&lt;code&gt;false&lt;/code&gt;): use only the field data. Defaults to &lt;code&gt;false&lt;/code&gt;: the system will extract the content of the &lt;code&gt;text&lt;/code&gt; field to build the query.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;cirrusMltPercentTermsToMatch&lt;/kbd&gt;: The percentage of terms to match on. Defaults to 0.3 (30 percent).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Example: &lt;syntaxhighlight&gt;&amp;cirrusMtlUseFields=yes&amp;cirrusMltFields=title&amp;cirrusMltMinTermFreq=1&amp;cirrusMltMinDocFreq=1&amp;cirrusMltMinWordLength=2&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
These settings can be made persistent by overriding &lt;code&gt;cirrussearch-morelikethis-settings&lt;/code&gt; in [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:System message|System message]].
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Prefer-recent ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Adding &lt;kbd&gt;prefer-recent:&lt;/kbd&gt; anywhere in the query gives recently edited articles a slightly larger than normal boost in the page-ranking rules.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Prefer-recent is only applied when using the default &lt;code&gt;relevance&lt;/code&gt; [[#Explicit sort orders|sort order]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It defaults to boost only 60% of the score, in a large, 160-day window of time, which can be entered in the query as &lt;kbd&gt;prefer-recent:0.6,160&lt;/kbd&gt;. This plays well with other page ranking rules, and is intended for most searches.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can manipulate the rules: &lt;kbd&gt;prefer-recent:''boost'',''recent''&lt;/kbd&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technically, &quot;boost&quot; is the proportion of score to scale, and &quot;recent&quot; is the half life in days.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The boost is more than the usual ''multiplier'', it is an ''[[w:Exponential decay|exponential]]'' boost.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The factor used in the exponent is the time since the last edit.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;kbd&gt;prefer-recent:,7&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Pages older than 7 days are boosted half as much, and pages older than 14 days are boosted half as much again, and so on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For a simple &quot;sort by date&quot; in highly refined search results, where page ranking and boosting are largely meaningless, just boost the entire score.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;prefer-recent:1,7&lt;/kbd&gt; (weeks)
* &lt;kbd&gt;prefer-recent:1,1&lt;/kbd&gt; (days)
* &lt;kbd&gt;prefer-recent:1,0.0007&lt;/kbd&gt; (minutes)
* &lt;kbd&gt;prefer-recent:1,0.0001&lt;/kbd&gt; (8.64 seconds)
* &lt;kbd&gt;prefer-recent:1,0.00001&lt;/kbd&gt; (seconds)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Boost-templates ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can boost pages' scores based on what templates they contain. This can be done directly in the search via &lt;code&gt;boost-templates:&quot;&quot;&lt;/code&gt; or you can set the default for all searches via the &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:cirrussearch-boost-templates&lt;/code&gt; message. &lt;code&gt;boost-templates:&quot;&quot;&lt;/code&gt; replaces the contents of &lt;code&gt;cirrussearch-boost-templates&lt;/code&gt; if the former is specified. The syntax is a bit funky but was chosen for simplicity.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Like prefer-recent, boost-templates is only applied when using the default &lt;code&gt;relevance&lt;/code&gt; [[#Explicit sort orders|sort order]].&lt;/span&gt;
Algunos ejemplos:

;&lt;kbd&gt;File:boost-templates:&quot;Template:Quality Image|200%&quot; incategory:china&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Find files in the China category, sorting quality images first.
&lt;/div&gt;
;&lt;kbd&gt;File:boost-templates:&quot;Template:Quality Image|200% Template:Low Quality|50%&quot; incategory:china&lt;/kbd&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Find files in the China category, sorting quality images first and low-quality images last.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
;&lt;kbd&gt;File:boost-templates:&quot;Template:Quality Image|200% Template:Low Quality|50%&quot; popcorn&lt;/kbd&gt;
:Find files about popcorn, sorting quality images first and low-quality images last. Remember that through the use of the &lt;code&gt;cirrussearch-boost-templates&lt;/code&gt; message this can be reduced to just &lt;code&gt;popcorn&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Don't try to add decimal points to the percentages. They don't work, and search scoring is such that they are unlikely to matter much.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A word of warning about &lt;code&gt;cirrussearch-boost-templates&lt;/code&gt;: if you add really huge or small percentages, they can poison the full-text scoring.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Think, for example, if enwiki boosted featured articles by a million percent.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then searches for terms mentioned in featured articles would find the featured articles before exact title matches of the terms.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phrase matching would be similarly blown away, so a search like &lt;code&gt;brave new world&lt;/code&gt; would find a featured article with those words scattered throughout it instead of the article for [[w:Brave New World|Brave New World]].&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Regular expression searches}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Regular expression searches ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not run a bare &lt;kbd&gt;insource:/''regexp''/&lt;/kbd&gt; search.  It will probably timeout after 20 seconds anyway, while blocking the queries of responsible users.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A basic indexed search finds ''words'' rendered visible on a page. Hyphenation and punctuation marks and bracketing, slash and other math and computing symbols, are merely boundaries for the ''words''. It is not possible to include them in an indexed search.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mostly that search behavior is wanted by the user. However, sometimes one wants to have the ability for a more precise search.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To get around the syntactic deficiency of index-based searches regexp searches can be used.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;But as queries with only regexp expressions are very slow and resource consuming, they should always be combined with an index-based search, such that the regexp search-domain gets limited to the results of one or more index-based search.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An &quot;exact string&quot; regexp search is a basic search; it will simply &quot;quote&quot; the entire regexp, or &quot;backslash-escape&quot; all non-alphanumeric characters in the string. All regexp searches also require that the user develops a simple filter to generate the search domain for the regex engine to search (index based search domain marked bold, regexp part marked in italics):
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;kbd&gt;'''insource:&quot;debian.reproducible.net&quot;''' ''insource:/debian\.reproducible\.net/''&lt;/kbd&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;'''insource:&quot;c:\program files (x86)&quot;''' ''insource:/C\:\\Program Files \(x86\)/i''&lt;/kbd&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;'''insource:&quot;&amp;lt;tag&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{template}}&amp;lt;/tag&gt;&quot;''' ''insource:/&quot;&amp;lt;tag&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{template}}&amp;lt;&quot;\/&quot;tag&gt;&quot;/''&lt;/kbd&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;'''insource:&quot;[&lt;nowiki/&gt;[title|link label]]'s&quot;''' ''insource:/&quot;[&lt;nowiki/&gt;[title|link label]]'s&quot;/''&lt;/kbd&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;''insource:/regexp/'' '''prefix:{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{FULLPAGENAME}}'''&lt;/kbd&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The last example works from a link on a page, but {&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[Special:MyLanguage/FULLPAGENAME|FULLPAGENAME]]}} doesn't function in the search box.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example: &lt;kbd&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[Special:Search/insource:/regex/&amp;nbsp;prefix:{{FULLPAGENAME}}]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/kbd&gt; [[Special:Search/insource:/regex/ prefix:{{FULLPAGENAME}}| finds the term ''regex'' on this page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A query with no namespace specified and no prefix specified searches your default search domain, (settable on any search-results page, i.e. at ''[[Special:Search]]''). Some users keep their default search domain at &quot;all namespaces&quot;, i.e. the entire wiki. On a large wiki if this user does a bare regexp search it will probably fail, incurring a timeout, before completing the search.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A regex search actually scours each page in the search domain character-by character.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By contrast, an indexed search actually queries a few records from a database separately maintained from the wiki database, and provides nearly instant results.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;So when using an ''insource://'' (a regexp of any kind), consider adding other search terms that will limit the regex search domain as much as possible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are many search terms that use an index and so instantly provide a more refined search domain for the /regexp/.  In order of general effectiveness:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* ''insource:&quot;&quot;'' with quotation marks, duplicating the regexp except ''without the slashes'' or escape characters, is ideal.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* ''intitle'' (without regex search), ''incategory'', and ''linksto'' are excellent filters.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* ''hastemplate:'' is a very good filter.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &quot;''word1 word2 word3''&quot;, with or without the quotation marks, are good.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* ''namespace:'' is practically useless, but may enable a slow regexp search to complete.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To test a bare regexp query you can create a page with test patterns, and then use the ''prefix'' parameter with that fullpagename.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The match will be highlighted.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It searches that page (in the database) and its subpages.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Search terms that do not increase the efficiency of a regexp search are the page-scoring operators: ''morelike'', ''boost-template'', and ''prefer-recent''.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Metacharacters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Metacharacters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This section covers how to escape metacharacters used in regexp searches&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For the actual meaning of the metacharacters see the [https://www.elastic.co/guide/en/elasticsearch/reference/current/regexp-syntax.html explanation of the syntax].&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For the formal definition see the [https://lucene.apache.org/core/7_3_0/core/org/apache/lucene/util/automaton/RegExp.html Lucene grammar for regular expressions].&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt;

{{tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The use of an exact string requires a regexp, but the regexp term obligates the search to limit itself. ''Add'' a regexp term, never search a bare regexp. ''Start'' by noting the number of pages in a previous search before committing an exact string search. Querying with an exact string requires a filtered search domain.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example:
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* to search a namespace, gauge the number of pages with a single term that is a namespace.  This will list the number of pages in that namespace.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* starting out to find again what you may have seen, like &quot;wiki-link&quot; or &quot;(trans[in]clusion)&quot; start with namespace and insource filters.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Refining with an exact string ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* refining an ongoing search process with what you want to see, like &quot;2 + 2 = 4&quot;, or &quot;''site''.org&quot;  This is ideally the best use of regex, because it adds it as a single regexp term while refining a search, the limited number of pages the regexp must crawl is can be seen.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can start out intending an exact string search, but keep in mind:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* regex only search the wikitext not the rendered text, so there are some differences around the markup, and even the number of space characters must match precisely.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You are obligated to supply an accompanying filter.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You must learn how to escape regex metacharacters.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are two ways to escape metacharacters. They are both useful at times, and sometimes concatenated side-by-side in the escaping of a string.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Backslash-escape one of them \''char''.  The insource:/''regexp''/ uses slashes to delimit the regexp. Giving /reg/exp/ is ambiguous, so you must write /reg\/exp/.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Put a string of them in double quotes &quot;''string''&quot;. Because ''escaping a character can't hurt'', you can escape any character along with any possible metacharacters in there.  Escaping with quotes is cleaner.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You can't mix methods, but you can concatenate them.
&lt;/div&gt;  

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Double-quotes escaping''' using insource:/&quot;''regexp''&quot;/ is an easy way to search for many kinds of strings, but you can't backslash-escape anything inside a double-quoted escape.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;/&quot;[&lt;nowiki/&gt;[page/name|{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{temp-late&quot;/&lt;/code&gt; instead of &lt;code&gt;/\[\[page\/name\|\{\{temp\-late/&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;/&quot;literal back\slash&quot;/&lt;/code&gt; is as good as &lt;code&gt;/literal back\\slash/&lt;/code&gt;
* But &lt;code&gt;/&quot;This \&quot; fails&quot;/&lt;/code&gt; always.  
* And &lt;code&gt;/&quot;This \/ depends&quot;/&lt;/code&gt;.  It finds the &lt;code&gt;\/&lt;/code&gt; literally, which is not the &lt;code&gt;/&lt;/code&gt; you probably wanted.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Backslash-escape''' using insource:/''regexp''/ allows escaping the &quot; and / delimiters,  but requires taking into account metacharacters, and escaping any:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* To match a &lt;code&gt;/&lt;/code&gt; delimiter character use &lt;code&gt;\/&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* To match a &lt;code&gt;&quot;&lt;/code&gt; delimiter character use &lt;code&gt;\&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The escaped metacharacters would be &lt;code&gt;\~\@\#\&amp;\*\(\)\-\+\{\}\[\]\|\&lt;\&gt;\?\.\\&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The equivalent expression escaped with double-quotes is &lt;code&gt;&quot;~@#&amp;*()-+{}[]|\&lt;&gt;?.\&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The simplest algorithm to create the basic string-finding expression using insource:/&quot;''regexp''&quot;/, need not take metacharacters into account except for the &quot; and / characters:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Write &lt;code&gt;the/str&quot;ing&lt;/code&gt; out. (The /&quot; delimiters &quot;/ are not shown.)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Replace &lt;code&gt;&quot;&lt;/code&gt; with &lt;code&gt;&quot;\&quot;&quot;&lt;/code&gt; (previous double-quote: stop, concatenate, quote restart).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Replace &lt;code&gt;/&lt;/code&gt; with &lt;code&gt;&quot;\/&quot;&lt;/code&gt; (stop, concatenate, start).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# You get &lt;code&gt;insource:/&quot;the&quot;\/&quot;str&quot;\&quot;&quot;ing&quot;/&lt;/code&gt;, showing concatenation of the two methods.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;While refining a regexp on a search results page, keep in mind that the snippet &quot;wikitext&quot; has modified spacing.  Regex are sensitive to space characters, so copying from snippets is dangerous.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The square-bracket notation for creating your own character-class ''also'' escapes ''its'' metacharacters. To target a literal right square bracket in your character-class pattern, it must be backslash escaped, otherwise it can be interpreted as the closing delimiter of the character-class pattern definition.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first position of a character class will also escape the right square bracket. Inside the delimiting square brackets of a character ''class'', the dash character also has special meaning (range) but it too can be included literally in the class the same way as the right square bracket can.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example both of these patterns target a character that is either a dash or a right square bracket or a dot: &lt;code&gt;[-.\]]&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;[].\-]&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For general examples using metacharacters:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*&lt;kbd&gt;insource:&quot;2+2=4&quot; insource:/&quot;2+2=4&quot;/&lt;/kbd&gt; matches &quot;2 + 2 = 4&quot;, with zero spaces between the characters.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*&lt;kbd&gt;insource:&quot;2 + 2 = 4&quot; insource:/2 ?\+ ?2 ?= ?4\./&lt;/kbd&gt;  match with zero or one space in between. The equals = sign is not a metacharacter, but the plus + sign is.
&lt;/div&gt;
*&lt;kbd&gt;insource:&quot;&lt;''tag''&gt;[&lt;nowiki/&gt;[link|2\3?]]\&lt;/''tag''&gt;&quot; insource:/&quot;&lt;''tag''&gt;[&lt;nowiki/&gt;[link|2\3?]]&lt;'''&lt;big&gt;&quot;\/&quot;&lt;/big&gt;'''''tag''&gt;&quot;/&lt;/kbd&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are some notable differences from standard regex metacharacters:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;\n&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;\r\n&lt;/code&gt; are not reserved for matching a newline.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To search for a string that contains a newline, you can do a search like &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;insource:/[^\}]\}\}[^\} \|]{2}\&lt;noinclude/i&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; which means not a curly brace, then two curly braces, then any two characters except a curly brace, space, or pipe, then a {{tag|noinclude|open}} tag.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;any character except&quot; will include a newline in the search.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note thas this search was designed only to match to the following string:&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
}}

&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;!-- &quot;syntaxhighlight&quot; instead of &quot;pre&quot; to preserve indentation --&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The dot . metacharacter stands for any character including a newline, so .* matches across lines.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The number # sign means something, and must be escaped.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[https://lucene.apache.org/core/7_0_1/core/org/apache/lucene/util/automaton/RegExp.html Class RegExp], Lucene RegExp syntax&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The ^ and $ are not implemented. Like &quot;grep&quot; (global per line, regular expression, print each line), each insource:// is a &quot;global per document, regular expression, search-results-list each document&quot; per document.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;&amp;gt;&lt;/code&gt; support a multi-digit numeric range like &lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt; does, but without regard to the number of character positions, or the range in each position, so &lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;9-10&gt;&lt;/code&gt; works, and even &lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;1-111&gt;&lt;/code&gt; works.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====Regex on titles====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;kbd&gt;insource&lt;/kbd&gt; keyword does only search the page source content.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To run regex searches on the title strings &lt;kbd&gt;intitle:/regex/&lt;/kbd&gt; can be used.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====Advanced example====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, using metacharacters to find the usage of a template called ''Val'' having, inside the template call, an unnamed parameter containing a possibly signed, three to four digit number, possibly surrounded by space characters, ''and'' on the same page, inside a template Val call, a named argument &lt;code&gt;fmt=commas&lt;/code&gt; having any allowable spaces around it, (it could be the same template call, or a separate one):
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;small&gt;&lt;code&gt;hastemplate:val insource:&quot;fmt commas&quot; insource:&lt;big&gt;'''/'''&lt;/big&gt;\{\{ *[Vv]al *\|[^}]*fmt *= *commas/ insource:/\{\{ *[Vv]al *\|[^}]*[-+]?[0-9]{3,4} *[|}]&lt;big&gt;'''/'''&lt;/big&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that the = sign in &quot;fmt commas&quot; is not needed but that adding it would not change the search results.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is fast because it uses two filters so that every page the regexp crawls has the highest possible potential.&lt;/span&gt;

== Geobúsqueda ==
Searching based on the (primary) coordinates associated with pages. Depends on &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Extension:GeoData}}&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#coordinates:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== bounded ===
&lt;/div&gt;
Es posible limitar la búsqueda a páginas que se hayan identificado como próximas a las coordenadas geográficas que indiques.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The coordinates can either be specified as a &lt;lat&gt;,&lt;lon&gt; pair, or by providing a page title from which to source the coordinates.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A distance to limit the search to can be prepended if desired.&lt;/span&gt;
Ejemplos:

* &lt;kbd&gt;neartitle:&quot;San Francisco&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;neartitle:&quot;100km,San Francisco&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;nearcoord:37.77666667,-122.39&lt;/kbd&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;nearcoord:42km,37.77666667,-122.39&lt;/kbd&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== boosted ===
&lt;/div&gt;
Además, es posible aumentar el puntaje de las páginas cuya ubicación esté dentro de una zona geográfica específica.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The syntax is the same as bounded search, but with boost- prepended to the keyword.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This effectively doubles the score for pages within the search range, giving a better chance for nearby search results to be near the top.&lt;/span&gt;

* &lt;kbd&gt;boost-neartitle:&quot;San Francisco&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;boost-neartitle:&quot;100km,San Francisco&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;boost-nearcoord:37.77666667,-122.39&lt;/kbd&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;boost-nearcoord:42km,37.77666667,-122.39&lt;/kbd&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== File properties search ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.28|compact=y|comment=and after|gerrit change=311061}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.28, CirrusSearch supports indexing and searching of properties of files in the &lt;code&gt;File:&lt;/code&gt; namespace. This includes:
* file media type
* MIME type
* size
* width &amp; height
* resolution
* bit depth for files that support these
&lt;/div&gt;

{{tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;While these predicates are useful only for files, they by themselves do not limit search to the &lt;code&gt;File:&lt;/code&gt; namespace. It is recommended to include this namespace in a search or restrict the search to only this namespace when using these conditionals.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|filetype}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== filetype ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Searching for file type allows to retrieve files according to their classification, such as office documents, videos, raster images, vector images, etc. The following types currently exist:
&lt;/div&gt; 

* &lt;code&gt;UNKNOWN&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;BITMAP&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;DRAWING&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;AUDIO&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;VIDEO&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;MULTIMEDIA&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;OFFICE&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;TEXT&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;EXECUTABLE&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;ARCHIVE&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This list may be extended in the future. See also &lt;code&gt;MEDIATYPE_*&lt;/code&gt; constants in &lt;code&gt;Defines.php&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The syntax of the search is: &lt;kbd&gt;filetype:{type}&lt;/kbd&gt;. Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;kbd&gt;filetype:video&lt;/kbd&gt; - looks for all videos
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The filetype search is not case-sensitive.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== filemime ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Matches file MIME type. The syntax is:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;kbd&gt;filemime:{MIMEtype}&lt;/kbd&gt; - look for files of this MIME type
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The argument can be quoted to specify exact match. Without quotes, partial matches to components of MIME type will be accepted too.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Examples:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;kbd&gt;filemime:&quot;image/png&quot;&lt;/kbd&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;look for files with MIME type exactly &lt;code&gt;image/png&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;filemime:pdf&lt;/kbd&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;look for all PDF documents&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;-filemime:pdf&lt;/kbd&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;skip all PDF documents (notably on Commons)&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The MIME type search is not case-sensitive.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== filesize ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Search for file of given size, in kilobytes (kilobyte means 1024 bytes). The syntax is:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;kbd&gt;filesize:{number}&lt;/kbd&gt; o &lt;kbd&gt;filesize:&gt;{number}&lt;/kbd&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;file with size at least given number&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;filesize:&lt;{number}&lt;/kbd&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;file with size no more than given number&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;filesize:{number},{number}&lt;/kbd&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;file with size between given numbers&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Examples:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;kbd&gt;filesize:&gt;20&lt;/kbd&gt; or &lt;kbd&gt;filesize:20&lt;/kbd&gt;&lt;/span&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;files 20KB and bigger&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;filesize:&lt;1024&lt;/kbd&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;files smaller than 1MB&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;filesize:100,500&lt;/kbd&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;files with sizes between 100KB and 500KB&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|File_measures}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== File measures ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It is possible to search for specific file measures: width, height, resolution (which is defined as square root of height × width), and bit depth. Not all files may have these properties. The syntax is:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;kbd&gt;{measure}:{number}&lt;/kbd&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;file with measure that equals to given number&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;{measure}:&gt;{number}&lt;/kbd&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;file with measure that is at least given number&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;{measure}:&lt;{number}&lt;/kbd&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;file with measure that is no more than given number&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;kbd&gt;{measure}:{number},{number}&lt;/kbd&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;file with measure that is between given numbers&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Where &lt;code&gt;measure&lt;/code&gt; can be:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;kbd&gt;filew&lt;/kbd&gt; or &lt;kbd&gt;filewidth&lt;/kbd&gt; - file width
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;kbd&gt;fileh&lt;/kbd&gt; or &lt;kbd&gt;fileheight&lt;/kbd&gt; - file height
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;kbd&gt;fileres&lt;/kbd&gt; - file resolution (see above)
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;kbd&gt;filebits&lt;/kbd&gt; - file bit depth
&lt;/div&gt;

Ejemplos:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;kbd&gt;filew:&gt;800 fileh:&gt;600&lt;/kbd&gt; - files that are at least 800×600 pixels in size
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;kbd&gt;filebits:16&lt;/kbd&gt; - files with 16-bit color depth
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;kbd&gt;fileheight:100,500&lt;/kbd&gt; - file between 100 and 500 pixels high
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Wikibase search ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Wikibase}} extension defines some search keywords in order to make it easier to search for certain Wikibase items. This is useful on {{ll|Wikidata}} and other Wikibase sites, including to search for images with [[commons:Special:MyLanguage/Structured data|Structured data]] on {{ll|Wikimedia Commons}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:WikibaseCirrusSearch}} for details.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Cross-wiki search results ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are two kinds of cross-wiki results that may be shown when searching on Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Cross-project search (also known as interwiki search, sister search, or sister projects search) shows additional results from other projects (Wiktionary, Wikisource, Wikiquote, etc.) shown to the side on the Wikipedia results page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Cross-project search is available on most Wikipedias with sister projects.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Cross-language search (see [[wmfblog:2016/07/27/wikipedia-language-search/|blog post]]) refers to additional results shown below the main results that are from a Wikipedia in a different language.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Cross-language search uses a heavily modified and optimized version of a light-weight language detector called {{ll|TextCat}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Cross-language search is currently only available on a few Wikipedias (see TextCat link for details).&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Explicit sort orders}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Explicit sort orders ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition to the default relevance based sort, CirrusSearch can provide results a few other explicit sort orders.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specifying a sorting order other than &lt;code&gt;relevance&lt;/code&gt; will disable all search keywords that affect scoring, such as &lt;code&gt;prefer-recent&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;boost-templates&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The keywords will still be parsed, but they will have no effect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sorting options are currently available from the MediaWiki API by providing the &lt;code&gt;srsort&lt;/code&gt; parameter.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sorting options can be manually added to a search URL by adding &lt;code&gt;&amp;sort=''order''&lt;/code&gt;, for example, https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?search=foo&amp;sort=last_edit_desc.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Valid sort orders include:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sort order&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Description&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|incoming_links_asc
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lowest to highest number of incoming links.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is approximately from least to most popular.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|incoming_links_desc
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Highest to lowest number of incoming links.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is approximately from most to least popular.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|last_edit_asc
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From least recently to most recently edited&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|last_edit_desc
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From most to least recently edited&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|create_timestamp_asc
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From least to most recently created&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|create_timestamp_desc
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From most to least recently created&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|just_match
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A simple relevance sort based only on text matching&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|relevance
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A relevance sort taking into account many features of the document&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|random
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Randomized&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|none
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unsorted, arbitrarily ordered lists.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preferred for large result sets.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Interface for advanced options ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[File:AdvSearch Screen 20170620.png|thumb|Advanced Search Interface]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:AdvancedSearch|AdvancedSearch]] extension adds an improved interface to the search page allowing the use of several options described above in a user-friendly manner. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:AdvancedSearch|here for the user manual]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Véase también ==
* {{ll|Extension:CirrusSearch}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Extension:CirrusSearch/CompletionSuggester|Completion Suggester]] - the incremental search feature of CirrusSearch
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Wikimedia Search Platform/Search/Glossary}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;definitions, context, and links for terms related to search.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* See {{ll|Help:Searching}} for MWSearch, used by the many wikis that don't have a search extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== External links ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://lucene.apache.org/core/3_5_0/queryparsersyntax.html From Lucene], highly relevant documentation.
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{git file |file=tests/browser/features |sha=31869139d0bdac6674817b104772ae28efef45c3&lt;!--Last version to contain this now-deleted file--&gt; |project=mediawiki/extensions/CirrusSearch |text=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Full specifications in the extension's browser tests&lt;/span&gt;}} (as of 2017-12-06)
* [[Extension:CirrusSearch/Profiles]]&amp;nbsp;– &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;sets of tunable parameters that influence various aspect of the indexing&lt;/span&gt;
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/c/technology/search/ Wikimedia blog articles related to search]
* [https://global-search.toolforge.org/ WMF Global Search]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notes and references ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Search{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ts1o1xw4uiq0csvxf44a6srtxzvdpjk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/eml</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>172410</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402403</id>
      <parentid>4983736</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:50:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7972" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bèinvgnû insém al purtêl dal '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. Al VisualEditor (VE) l'è na manēra nōva de scréver insém a Wikipedia ch' l' è stêda śvilupèda da la Wikimedia Foundation. Còst al permetrà a la gînta 'd publichê sèinsa duvèir préma imparêr còla ch' l' è la &quot;furmatasiòun wiki&quot;. A speròm acsé 'd ajutêr al persòuni a scréver.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Riguèrd al VisualEditor ==

VisualEditor 'l è na manéra &quot;viśuèla&quot; de scréver insém a Wikipedia. Scréver insém a Wikipedia int i tèimp pasê l'à sèimper dmandê la cgnusèinsa di marcadōr wiki, oséia un linguâg  piotôst  cumplichê ed furmatasiòun, ânca sōl per fêr di céch cambiamèint ed 'na pàgina. Int al 2001 còst l'ēra incòra pasâbil, mó int al 2015 còst [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|al şluntâna  quî che se mai  a vrén dêr 'na mân]]. A speròm che VisualEditor al dvintrà ótil a chi scrév adès e ch' al pôsa dêr 'n' ajót a quî che gnirân. 

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Al VisualEditor l' è stê lasê léber in na versiòun opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; in Wikipedia ingléśa a la fîn dal dicèmber 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in pió 'd 14 léngvi da l' avrîl 2013], e [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ in quèśi tót'al j êtri léngvi] da i prém ed śógn. Al duvré dvintêr léber per quèsi tóti 'l wiki 'd la Wikimedia Foundation per la fîn dal 2014.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A daròm al j  [[VisualEditor/status|infurmasiòun insém al stêt di lavōr]] insém a Mediawiki.org.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

In cal mumèint chè, al VisualEditor al gh'à incòri dagli imperfesiòun cìchi, 's capìs. S't in catìs ùna, te prèv dìr-el in dla [[VisualEditor/Feedback|pàgina ch'la in descòr]]. A gh'è incòr di post intér in dù a gh'è da custruìr tùt. Quèl ch'a manca incòri 'l è:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Slow to load''' — It will take some time for long, complex pages to load into VisualEditor. In the future the software will be a lot faster, and will allow for the loading of larger pages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Incomplete editing''' — Some elements of complex formatting will display and let you edit their contents, but will not let users edit their structure or add new entries – such as definition lists. Adding features in this area is one of our priorities.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Most content pages, not talk pages''' — VisualEditor is only enabled for some namespaces.  At most Wikipedias, VisualEditor can be used on articles, User:, File:, Help: and Category: pages.  VisualEditor is not currently available for Wikipedia: pages or any talk pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We recommend that users click &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; before saving the page and [[VisualEditor/Feedback|report any problems they encounter]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Cùma jutèr? ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For VisualEditor to be as good as it can be, there are a lot of things we need help with. Obviously, one big area is using the software, finding bugs and [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reporting them]], but there are many other tasks as well. These include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Updating help pages''' — All of our projects have help pages to make it easier for new users to contribute. Unfortunately they are all built around the markup editor, and as VisualEditor evolves, the screenshots and tutorials will all become outdated. It would be very useful if people could  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]], based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Adding TemplateData to templates''' — VisualEditor features a nice template editor, which is described in more detail on our [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|help page]]. As you'll see if you use it on Wikipedia, some templates have named parameters and nice descriptions that make it easy to use. Others do not. This is because templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; before this feature will work. If you're interested in adding TemplateData, we have [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]], along with a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help new users''' — If the VisualEditor launch is successful, we will have a lot more new users than we are used to, and even though editing may be easier, working out how to interact with the community will still be hard. Please spend some time [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]], to help these newcomers become acclimatized to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>5zfpe1zcjzj46o6p40z0sm5ktb2iyam</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/eml</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>172412</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402402</id>
      <parentid>847644</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:50:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="360" xml:space="preserve">Bèinvgnû insém al purtêl dal '''[[$ve|VisualEditor]]'''. Al VisualEditor (VE) l'è na manēra nōva de scréver insém a Wikipedia ch' l' è stêda śvilupèda da la Wikimedia Foundation. Còst al permetrà a la gînta 'd publichê sèinsa duvèir préma imparêr còla ch' l' è la &quot;furmatasiòun wiki&quot;. A speròm acsé 'd ajutêr al persòuni a scréver.</text>
      <sha1>o4kk3a0bihjg2z6m4k44b1jcmdta4uq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/43/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>172453</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403338</id>
      <parentid>1752992</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:35:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="84" xml:space="preserve">Stiamo pubblicando una [[$ve-news|newsletter multilingue]], incentrata sui wiki WMF.</text>
      <sha1>ak9e51q9ujyyeht6tu9xavf93dmtn0g</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/en</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>177230</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402239</id>
      <parentid>5400732</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10717" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.
You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || A list of the user groups you are in.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account. See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || The time your account was registered.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|see below]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|see below]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Manage two factor authentication.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Manage global preferences.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.
If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.
Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Global account ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.
Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.
The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.

* Languages
* How do you prefer to be described?
* More language settings

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Your existing signature
* New signature
** Treat as wikitext

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Email confirmation ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Date format and time offset ===

The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.
Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.
Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.
Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.
You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.
If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.

Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.

See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.

* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.

== See also ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>mf5ijr6zs9drlr5ivjpteonkauvf5b6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/ar</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>179315</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402233</id>
      <parentid>5400726</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14704" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

بالضغط على [[Special:preferences| تفضيلات]] الرابط في الجزء العلوي الأيمن أثناء تسجيل الدخول يسمح لك لتغيير تفضيلاتك.
سيتم تقديمك مع القسم نبذة عن المستخدم، فضلا عن شريط علامات التبويب في أعلى لتغيير أنواع أخرى من الإعدادات.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || اسم المستخدم الخاص بك. يمكن للمستخدمين الموثوق بهم فقط تغيير اسم المستخدم الخاص بك، ويجب أيضًا تثبيت ملحق {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} على موقع ويكي.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || كم عدد التعديلات التي قمت بها. ليس كل الويكي يكون هذا.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
لتغيير كلمة المرور الخاصة بك، أدخل كلمة المرور القديمة في المربع الأول وكلمة المرور الجديدة في الأخيرين.
إذا كنت تريد هذا الموقع أن نتذكر تسجيل الدخول الخاصة بك، تحقق من ''تذكر معلومات تسجيل الدخول الخاصة بي على هذا الكمبيوتر''.
لاحظ أن هذه الوظيفة تتطلب أن يكون لديك تمكين ملفات تعريف الارتباط في المتصفح الخاص بك، وإذا تم مسح الكوكيز أو تنتهي سوف لم يعد من الممكن تذكر.

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
من تفضيلاتك، يمكنك تحديد اللغة التي تريد أن تكون الواجهة بها.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Languages
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
إذا كنت قد زودت عنوان البريد الإلكتروني، وسوف تحتاج إلى النقر فوق &quot;التحقق من عنوان 'زر' 'من أجل استخدام هذه الوظائف. سوف تتلقى رسالة بريد إلكتروني. ببساطة فتحه واتبع الرابط لتمكين الوظائف التالية.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
هنا يمكنك اختيار الجلد التي تريد استخدامها. يمكنك معاينة الجلود المتاحة قبل اختيار لهم، من خلال النقر على الرابط &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; بجانب بعضها الجلد. يرجى الرجوع إلى {{ll|Help:Skins}} لمزيد من التفاصيل.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== صيغة التاريخ والوقت ===

يتم تقديم ما يلي عادة اعتمادا على التفضيلات:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
هنا يمكنك تحديد كيف سيتم عرض الصور. والصور المعروضة عن طريق لصق مباشرة من عنوان URL (إذا كان يكي يتلقى هو تمكين) لا يتأثر هذا الإعداد.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
هنا يمكنك التحكم في كيفية وصف المعادلات الرياضية باستخدام سيتم عرض {{tag|math|open}} العلامة.
والصيغ الرياضية التي تم تحميلها كصور أو مكتوبة خارج العلامة الرياضيات لن تتأثر هذا الإعداد.
ملاحظة أن تفضيلات الرياضيات تكون مرئية فقط إذا تم تثبيت {{ll|Extension:Math}}.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
هذه هي الإعدادات للسيطرة على تحرير الصفحات، بما في ذلك حجم مربع التحرير المعروضة، وعما إذا كان لمشاهدة الصفحات التي قمت بتعديل أو إنشاؤه تلقائيا.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - هنا يمكنك تحديد مدى الخلف [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes| أحدث التغييرات]] صفحات سيذهب. لاحظ أن القائمة لن تتوقف قبل الأوان إذا تم تجاوز عدد من التعديلات (أنظر أدناه).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - هنا يمكنك تحديد عدد التعديلات يجب أن يتم عرض.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - وهذا يتيح لك لإخفاء التعديلات ملحوظ القاصر بأنه (انظر {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). وبما أن بعض المستخدمين تجعل بسرعة الكثير من القرص صغيرة لتحديث قوالب أو إصلاح الأخطاء الإملائية قد تجد تمكين هذا أن تكون مفيدة. يمكنك أيضا تشغيل هذا مؤقتا من صفحة التغييرات الأخيرة (انظر {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - التغييرات الأخيرة المحسن يتكثف التعديلات في قائمة بكل صفحة. كما هو مبين، وهذا يتطلب لتمكين جافا سكريبت. رؤية {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} لمزيد من المعلومات حول هذه الميزة.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
هذه هي الإعدادات للتحكم في سلوك من قائمة المراقبة (انظر {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
معظم هذه الخيارات متاحة أيضا على شاشة قائمة الرغبات نفسها، ولكن عن طريق وضع لهم في تفضيلاتك، يمكنك التحكم في السلوك الافتراضي من قائمة المراقبة أي، فإنه سيتم تنفيذ الإجراءات نفسها في كل مرة تقوم فيها بزيارة صفحة.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
الإعدادات الافتراضية لعمليات البحث بما في ذلك كيفية العديد من النتائج لعرض وكم السياق تظهر لكل نتيجة.
التحقق من المربعات إلى مساحات أسماء التي تريد أن تظهر، وهي المرة الأولى التي تقوم بالبحث عن شيء.
يمكنك تجاوز هذا عند إجراء البحث الفعلي، عن طريق فحص أو إلغاء الصناديق في الجزء السفلي من الشاشة نتائج البحث.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== انظر أيضا ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>nyh1hwlfs25q28w3e1a36ynl45iup2l</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/pl</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>180012</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402258</id>
      <parentid>5400750</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13766" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Zaktualizowane informacje są dostępne na Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Zobacz [[Help:OAuth|pomoc OAuth]] po więcej informacji.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|zobacz niżej]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|zobacz niżej]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Aby zmienić hasło, wprowadź stare hasło w pierwszym polu i nowe hasło w dwóch kolejnych. Jeśli chcesz, aby witryna pamiętała Twoje hasło, zaznacz pole ''Zapamiętaj moje hasło w przeglądarce''. Aby ta funkcja działała, musisz mieć włączoną obsługę plików cookie w przeglądarce. Jeśli pliki cookie zostaną wyczyszczone lub wygasną, nie będziesz już zapamiętywany.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Konto globalne ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* Języki
* Jak chcesz być opisywany? (płeć)
* Różne ustawienia związane z językiem

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Wyświetlenie Twojego dotychczasowego podpisu
* Ustawienie nowego podpisu
** Traktowanie jako wikikod

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Jeżeli podałeś adres e-mail, będziesz musiał kliknąć przycisk &quot;zweryfikuj adres&quot; żeby użyć tych funkcji. Otrzymasz wiadomość e-mail na podany adres; otwórz ją i wejdź w odłącznik żeby odblokować te funkcje.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* Potwierdzenie adresu e‐mail&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Format daty i strefa czasowa ===

Następujące ustawienia są normalnie interpretowane na tych preferencjach:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Zobacz też ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>qc7vkpl5bdqx3jz6s1nr7iflzb4x310</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402305</id>
      <parentid>5402258</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:07:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13728" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Zaktualizowane informacje są dostępne na Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; Zobacz {{ll|Help:OAuth}}, aby uzyskać więcej informacji.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|zobacz niżej]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|zobacz niżej]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Aby zmienić hasło, wprowadź stare hasło w pierwszym polu i nowe hasło w dwóch kolejnych. Jeśli chcesz, aby witryna pamiętała Twoje hasło, zaznacz pole ''Zapamiętaj moje hasło w przeglądarce''. Aby ta funkcja działała, musisz mieć włączoną obsługę plików cookie w przeglądarce. Jeśli pliki cookie zostaną wyczyszczone lub wygasną, nie będziesz już zapamiętywany.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Konto globalne ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* Języki
* Jak chcesz być opisywany? (płeć)
* Różne ustawienia związane z językiem

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Wyświetlenie Twojego dotychczasowego podpisu
* Ustawienie nowego podpisu
** Traktowanie jako wikikod

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Jeżeli podałeś adres e-mail, będziesz musiał kliknąć przycisk &quot;zweryfikuj adres&quot; żeby użyć tych funkcji. Otrzymasz wiadomość e-mail na podany adres; otwórz ją i wejdź w odłącznik żeby odblokować te funkcje.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* Potwierdzenie adresu e‐mail&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Format daty i strefa czasowa ===

Następujące ustawienia są normalnie interpretowane na tych preferencjach:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Zobacz też ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>dntou56y0a3a6mlsn72wx65cc8vnt6c</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki/en</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>181513</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401758</id>
      <parentid>5312690</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3578" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]].  See ShoutWiki's website at [http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com], or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.
ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.

==Extensions==
ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.
The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).
See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About About ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Information about ShoutWiki and open source]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWiki's GitHub]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>oiao6ylcd8v80af1qdb7ciuycxocqbr</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401774</id>
      <parentid>5401758</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3576" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]]. See ShoutWiki's website at [http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com], or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.
ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.

==Extensions==
ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.
The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).
See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About About ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Information about ShoutWiki and open source]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWiki's GitHub]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>f0ce58vo5hzgplrcdqffug455krgs5l</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401876</id>
      <parentid>5401774</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3545" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]]. See [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki's website] or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's about page on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.
ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.

==Extensions==
ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.
The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).
See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About About ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Information about ShoutWiki and open source]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWiki's GitHub]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>tg7wercmf88trcqa7shp9h34ojxlerd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Skins/4/pl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>184313</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403347</id>
      <parentid>1211144</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:48:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Wargo</username>
        <id>25061</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updated translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="47" xml:space="preserve">Domyślnie MediaWiki udostępnia kilka skórek.</text>
      <sha1>lhb2scwy7mmxzr0ikjaq6pmbqxtqc9u</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/tr</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>186484</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402499</id>
      <parentid>5172955</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:15:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9686" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = Niklas Laxström, Siebrand Mazeland ve diğerleri
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=Dil Genişletme Paketi'ne dahil}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=Kullanıcı belgelemesi}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = Vikide çeviri ve düzeltme okuma özelliğini etkinleştirir
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] – veya [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view bir sayfayı nasıl çevirmeyi şimdi deneyin]
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

'''Translate''' uzantısı, MediaWiki'yi her türlü metni çevirmek için güçlü bir araç haline getirir. Özellikle yazılımı çevirmek ve çok dilli vikileri mantıklı bir şekilde yönetmek için kullanılır.

== Özellikler ==

Translate uzantısı, özellikle çevirmenleri hedefleyen birçok özelliğe sahiptir ve gerçek kaynak koduyla arka uç entegrasyonunu mümkün olduğunca kolaylaştırır. Bu arada, her şey [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|MediaWiki]] içinde çalışır ve bu da kullanıcıların iletişim ve kendi kendini örgütleme için neredeyse sonsuz bir serbestlik derecesi sağlar.

Özellikleri şunlardır:

* '''Yapılandırılmış viki içerik sayfası çevirisi.'''
* '''Viki içinde yerelleştirme ve yazılım arayüzü mesajlarının (veya hemen hemen her şeyin) dışa aktarılması.'''
* '''Web tabanlı çeviri ve düzeltme [[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overview/|arayüzü]] ve çevrimdışı çeviri için metin alma tabanlı dışa aktarma ve içe aktarma.'''
* '''Çevirmenlerin işini kolaylaştırmak için çeşitli yardımlar:'''
** çevirilerin isteğe bağlı olarak kullanıcı tanımlı dillerle genişletilen, global olarak tanımlanmış diğer dillerde gösterilmesi;
** mesajların kullanımı ve içeriğinin belgelemesinin ortaklaşa değiştirilmesi;
** harici araçlarla çeviri belleği ve makine çevirisi (Apertium, Microsoft Translator, Yandex.Çeviri);
** kaynak mesajdaki son değişikliğin gösterilmesi;
** kullanılmayan parametreler gibi yaygın hatalar hakkında uyarılar.
* Örnek olarak kullanabileceğiniz çeşitli açık kaynaklı ürünler için önceden yapılmış modüller.
** PHP, Java özellikleri, Gettext, YAML ve AndroidXml dahil olmak üzere çeşitli formatlar için destek ({{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} ve [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|dosya biçim desteği]] sayfalarına bakın).
* İleti grubu olarak yeni projeler eklemeyi kolaylaştırmak için çok yönlü bir eklenti sistemi.
* Çeşitli istatistikler:
** desteklenen tüm dillerdeki tüm mesaj grupları için çeviri tamamlanma yüzdeleri;
** desteklenen herhangi bir mesaj grubu için desteklenen tüm dillerde çeviri tamamlanma yüzdeleri;
** zaman dilimleri için aktivite grafikleri yapmak için bir araç. Düzenleme sayısını veya etkin kullanıcıları günlük veya saatlik olarak görüntüleyebilir ve birçok filtre içerir;
** etkin diller ve çevirmenler için bulut genel bakış.

Translate uzantısı, geniş kullanıcı tabanı nedeniyle, hızlı bir şekilde düzeltilen bazı küçük (stil) aksaklıklar hariç, makul olarak tüm yeni tarayıcılarla uyumlu olduğu onaylanmıştır.

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|''Çok Dilli Vikileri Gerçek Yapmak'': Bu sunum, KDE UserBase viki deneyimine dayanarak, Çeviri uzantısının nasıl vikiyi gerçekten çok dilli yapabileceğini göstermektedir.
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|Niklas Laxström, ''Viki yolunu tercüme etmek: Basit, hızlı, eğlenceli'', Wikimania 2012 (slaytlar mevcut).
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Destek ve belgeleme ==

* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|Kuruluma]] bakın
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|Yapılandırmaya]] bakın
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Kullanıcı belgelerine]] bakın — öğreticiler içerir
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|Translate uzantısı geliştirmeye başlarken]] sayfasına bakın
* #translatewiki IRC kanalı Libera Chat'da canlı destek (en iyi zamanlar Avrupa günleri ve akşamlarıdır)
* Lütfen [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate sorun izleyicisindeki] tüm sorunları ve özellik isteklerini bildirin

Çeviri uzantısı başlangıçta [[User:Nikerabbit]] tarafından geliştirilmiştir; [[User:Raymond]], [[User:SPQRobin]] ve Wikimedia Dil ekibi gibi diğer birçok kullanıcı koduna ve belgelerine katkıda bulunmuştur. [[User:Nikerabbit]] ve [[User:Siebrand]] tarafından korunur.

== Çeviri uzantısının önde gelen kullanıcıları ==
* https://translatewiki.net — Açık kaynaklı yazılım arayüzünün çevirisi için en büyük viki tabanlı site ve topluluk.
* https://userbase.kde.org — Sayfa çeviri özelliğini yaygın olarak kullanan KDE projesi için belgeleme vikisi.
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — Viki içeriğini çevirir ve grup durumları özelliğini kullanır. Çeviri ve çeviri incelemesi neredeyse tüm viki kullanıcıları için etkinleştirilir.
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

Daha fazla bilgi için [[wikipedia:translatewiki.net#Notable uses]] (İngilizce) bakınız.

=== Görüşler ===

Joomla'dan Tom Hutchison:
{{quotation|1=
Translate uzantısı bir çeviri hizmetine bağlantı sağlar ve çeviriyi sizin için otomatik olarak doldurabilir. Aynı zamanda bir çevirmen ayarlamalar yapabilir, böylece yanlış çevirilere sahip çok fazla sayfa oluşturmazsınız.

Farklı kıtalarda iseler sorun değil.
Bu aslında bir artı çünkü iş günde 24 saat yapılıyor.
İhtiyaç duydukları şey birbirleri için bir destek grubu sohbetidir.
Tercüme ediyorlarsa hepsi İngilizce okuyabilir mi? Bağlantılar ve kategorilerle ne yapılacağı gibi birkaç basit viki işaretlemesi öğretin.
Sonra başkalarına yardım ederler, başkalarına yardım ederler.
Birbirimize yardım eden ve aynı zamanda eğlenen 40'ın üzerinde sohbetimiz var.
Ve hepsi vikiden korkuyorlardı, ancak başladıktan sonra ne kadar kolay olduğuna inanamadılar.
Aslında beni daha fazla çeviri için bekliyorlar çünkü onlara yetişemiyorum.
Bu dili veya bu dili çeviren sadece 1 tane olduğunu biliyorum.
Bizde de var.
Bir kişi Svahili yaparken diğeri Japonca üzerinde çalışıyor.
Ayrıca, sayfaları çeviri için işaretlersiniz.
Şablon çağrılarına şablon ekleyip eklemeyeceğinizi veya değişkenleri hariç tutacağınızı kontrol edersiniz.
}}


== Ayrıca bakınız ==
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – çevirmenlerle iletişimi kolaylaştıran bir uzantı.

Şununla karıştırılmamalıdır:

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – viki sayfalarının bir dilden diğerine bir kerelik çevirisi için kullanılır.
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* Çeviri için [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Özet Vikipedi]].

== Nasıl katkıda bulunabilir ==

* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all Bu uzantıyı translatewiki.net de tercüme et]
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|Açık hatalar ve özellik istekleri]]
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|Translatewiki.net adresinde daha fazla açık hata ve özellik isteği]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Translate uzantısının belgelerini inceleyin ve çevirin]]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>bzp9e5vsacrx5v9kepxt5mdc0d2tbjy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki/pl</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>186721</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401763</id>
      <parentid>5312697</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3914" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wielu z pracowników ShoutWiki jest także [[developers|deweloperami]] MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
Dowiedz się więcej o ShoutWiki na [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ stronie internetowej ShoutWiki] lub [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About stronie o projekcie ShoutWiki].

==Rozszerzenia==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki wykorzystuje wiele z rozszerzeń używanych na stronach Wikimediów, w połączeniu z autorskimi rozszerzeniami. Kod źródłowy większości z nich można pobrać z [http://git.wikimedia.org/ oficjalnego repozytorium git Wikimediów] lub poprzez strony opisu poszczególnych rozszerzeń na tej wiki. Pełna lista rozszerzeń napisanych przez ShoutWiki dostępna jest w [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|kategorii Extensions by ShoutWiki]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About O ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Informacje o ShoutWiki i oprogramowaniu open source]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — poprawki MediaWiki utworzony przez ShoutWiki
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/span&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1g0ive02k6mwuscn1njvqp6ryl3zi50</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401779</id>
      <parentid>5401763</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3913" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wielu z pracowników ShoutWiki jest także [[developers|deweloperami]] MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
Dowiedz się więcej o ShoutWiki na [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ stronie internetowej ShoutWiki] lub [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About stronie o projekcie ShoutWiki].

==Rozszerzenia==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki wykorzystuje wiele z rozszerzeń używanych na stronach Wikimediów, w połączeniu z autorskimi rozszerzeniami. Kod źródłowy większości z nich można pobrać z [http://git.wikimedia.org/ oficjalnego repozytorium git Wikimediów] lub poprzez strony opisu poszczególnych rozszerzeń na tej wiki. Pełna lista rozszerzeń napisanych przez ShoutWiki dostępna jest w [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|kategorii Extensions by ShoutWiki]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About O ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Informacje o ShoutWiki i oprogramowaniu open source]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — poprawki MediaWiki utworzony przez ShoutWiki
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/span&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>b9ia56akrrd3fs9o821e9jkpo89e403</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401881</id>
      <parentid>5401779</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3905" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wielu z pracowników ShoutWiki jest także [[developers|deweloperami]] MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
Dowiedz się więcej o ShoutWiki na [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ stronie internetowej ShoutWiki] lub [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About stronie o projekcie ShoutWiki].

==Rozszerzenia==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki wykorzystuje wiele z rozszerzeń używanych na stronach Wikimediów, w połączeniu z autorskimi rozszerzeniami. Kod źródłowy większości z nich można pobrać z [http://git.wikimedia.org/ oficjalnego repozytorium git Wikimediów] lub poprzez strony opisu poszczególnych rozszerzeń na tej wiki. Pełna lista rozszerzeń napisanych przez ShoutWiki dostępna jest w [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|kategorii Extensions by ShoutWiki]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About O ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Informacje o ShoutWiki i oprogramowaniu open source]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; poprawki MediaWiki utworzony przez ShoutWiki
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/span&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ad139jdlc3s5h52sr5n6ab9uify8xmq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/pt-br</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>187226</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402495</id>
      <parentid>5072297</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:15:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9947" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = Niklas Laxström, Siebrand Mazeland e outros
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=Incluído no Pacote de Extensão de Idioma}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=Documentação de usuário}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = Permite traduções e revisão de traduções na wiki
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] – ou [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view experimente como traduzir uma página agora]
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

A extensão '''Translate''' faz do MediaWiki uma ferramenta poderosa para traduzir todos os tipos de texto. É usado especialmente para traduzir softwares e gerenciar wikis multilíngues de forma sensata.

== Recursos ==

A extensão Translate tem muitos recursos especificamente voltados  para tradutores, ao fazer a integração de back-end com o código fonte atual, da maneira mais fácil possível. Enquanto isso, tudo é executado no [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|MediaWiki]], que permite aos usuários uma liberdade sem limite para comunicação e auto-organização.

Recursos incluídos:

'''Página de conteúdo de tradução estruturada pelo wiki.'''
* '''Localização no wiki e exportação de mensagens de interface de software (ou qualquer outra coisa).'''
* '''[[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overview/|Interface]] de tradução e revisão baseada na web, bem como exportação e importação baseada em gettext para tradução off-line.'''
* '''Vários auxiliares para tornar o trabalho dos tradutores mais fácil:'''
** exibição de traduções em outras línguas globalmente definidas, opcionalmente expandidas com idiomas definidos pelo usuário;
** edição colaborativa da documentação do uso e do contexto de mensagens;
** memória de tradução e tradução automática com ferramentas externas (Apertium, Microsoft Translator, Yandex.Translate);
** exibição da mais recente alteração na mensagem fonte;
** avisos sobre erros comuns como parâmetros que não são usados.
* Módulos pré-fabricados para vários produtos de código aberto, que você pode usar como exemplo.
** Suporte para vários formatos, incluindo: PHP, propriedades do Java, Gettext, YAML e AndroidXml (consulte {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} e [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|Suporte de formatos de arquivos]]).
* Um versátil sistema de plug-in para tornar mais fácil adicionar novos projetos como um grupo de mensagens.
* Várias estatísticas:
** porcentagens de conclusão de tradução para todos os grupos de mensagem em todos os idiomas com suporte;
** porcentagens de conclusão de tradução em todos os idiomas suportados para qualquer grupo de mensagens suportado;
** ferramenta para fazer gráficos de atividades para períodos de tempo. Pode exibir ou número de edições ou usuários ativos por dia ou por hora e inclui vários filtros;
** visão geral da nuvem de idiomas ativos e tradutores.

A extensão Translate, devido à sua grande base de usuários, está confirmada para ser compatível com todos os navegadores razoavelmente recentes, com exceção de algumas pequenas falhas (de estilo) que são rapidamente consertadas.

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|''Fazendo das wikis multilingues uma realidade'': esta apresentação mostra como a extensão Translate pode tornar uma wiki verdadeiramente multilingue, com base na experiência da wiki “KDE UserBase”.
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|Niklas Laxström, ''Translating the wiki way: Simple, fast, fun'', Wikimania 2012 (slides disponíveis).
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Suporte e documentação ==

* Consulte [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|Instalação]]
* Consulte [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|Configuração]]
* Consulte [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Documentação do usuário]] — inclui tutoriais
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|Getting started with Translate extension development]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* Suporte em tempo real no canal IRC do Libera Chat: #translatewiki (os melhores momentos são os dias e as noites europeias)
* Por favor, informe todos os problemas e solicitações de recursos no [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate issue tracker]

A extensão Translate foi originalmente desenvolvida por [[User:Nikerabbit|Nikerabbit]]; muitos outros usuários, como [[User:Raymond|Raymond]], [[User:SPQRobin|SPQRobin]] e a equipe Wikimedia Language, têm contribuído para o seu código e documentação. É mantida por [[User:Nikerabbit|Nikerabbit]] e [[User:Siebrand|Siebrand]].

== Proeminentes usuários da extensão Translate ==
* https://translatewiki.net — O maior site baseado em wiki e da comunidade para a tradução da interface do software de código aberto.
* https://userbase.kde.org — A wiki da documentação para o projeto KDE, que utiliza extensivamente a funcionalidade de tradução de páginas.
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — Traduz o conteúdo wiki e usa recursos dos estados do grupo. Tradução e revisão de tradução estão habilitadas para quase todos os usuários do wiki.
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

Veja mais em [[Wikipedia:translatewiki.net#Notable uses]].

=== Depoimentos ===

Tom Hutchison, do ''Joomla'':
{{quotation|1=
A extensão Translate permite a conexão a um serviço de tradução e pode auto preencher a tradução para você. Ao mesmo tempo, um tradutor pode fazer ajustes para que você não esteja criando um monte de páginas com traduções imprecisas.

Tudo bem se eles estão em continentes diferentes.
Isso é realmente uma vantagem, porque o trabalho está sendo feito 24 horas por dia.
O que eles precisam é de um bate-papo do grupo de suporte para o outro.
Todos seriam capaz de ler em Inglês, se eles estão traduzindo corretamente? Ensina algumas marcações wiki simples, como links e o que fazer com as categorias.
Em seguida, eles ajudam outras pessoas que, por sua vez ajudam outras.
Temos mais de 40 pessoas em um bate-papo que ajudam umas às outras e se divertem ao mesmo tempo.
E eles estavam todos com medo do wiki, mas não podiam acreditar como era fácil, uma vez que começaram.
Eles estão realmente esperando por mais traduções para fazer porque eu não posso acompanhá-los.
Eu sei que há apenas uma pessoa que traduz para essa ou aquela linguagem.
Nós temos isso também.
Uma pessoa está traduzindo em Swahili enquanto outro está trabalhando em japonês.
Além disso, você marca páginas para tradução.
Você controla se deseja incluir predefinições ou excluir variáveis em chamadas de predefinições.
}}


== Ver também ==
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – uma extensão para facilitar a comunicação com os tradutores.

Não confundir com:

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – Usado para traduções únicas de páginas wiki de uma língua para outra.
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Abstract Wikipedia]] for translation.&lt;/span&gt;

== Como contribuir ==

* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all Traduza esta extensão em translatewiki.net]
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|Bugs abertos e solicitações de recursos]]
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|Mais bugs abertos e solicitações de recursos em translatewiki.net]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Revise e traduza a documentação da extensão Translate]]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>o8a5r5dk7zhi973qwexfvihdm2pw9o9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/eo</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>187378</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402408</id>
      <parentid>4983696</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:52:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7252" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bonvenon ĉe la portalo de '''''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]''''', esperante VidRedaktilo. VidRedaktilo (VE) estas nova metodo por redakti Vikipedion, kreata de la ''vikimedia fondaĵo''. Ĝi ebligas redaktadon al homoj sen deviga kono de la reguloj de &quot;wiki markup&quot;. Espereble ĝi helpos faciligi la kontribuadon al Vikipedio.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Legu '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Pri VidRedaktilo ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
VidRedaktilo estas metodo por redakti Vikipedion per vido. Redaktado de Vikipedio historie postulis ke oni lernis &quot;wiki markup&quot;, redaktolingvon sufiĉe malsimplan, eĉ por etaj ŝanĝoj en iu paĝo. En 2001, tio estis akceptinda; en 2013, ĝi forpelas kontribuantojn. Ni esperas ke VidRedaktilo estu utila al ĝisnunaj kontribuantoj kaj pli bonvenema al novaj.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;VidRedaktilo estis havebla laŭvole en versio &quot;alfa&quot; en la angla Vikipedio ekde decembro 2012, en 14 aliaj lingvoj ekde aprilo 2013 kaj en preskaŭ ĉiuj aliaj lingvoj ekde junio 2013. Antaŭvidiĝas ke ĝi haveblos en preskaŭ ĉiuj la vikioj de la vikimedia fondaĵo antaŭ la fino de 2014.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ni eligos regule statoĝisdatigojn ĉe Mediawiki.org.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Uzado de VidRedaktilo ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Nuntempe, VidRedaktilo neeviteble ankoraŭ havas plurajn [[:eo:Cimo (komputscienco)|erarojn]]. Se vi trafas misfunkcion, bonvolu senhezite raporti ĉe la [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reaga paĝo]]. Aldone, ekzistas areoj kie ni ankoraŭ devas tute ellabori novajn ecojn.
Inter nuntempaj limiĝoj estas:

* '''Malrapideco''' - Nun ankoraŭ iom malrapidas ĝis longaj, komplikaj paĝoj videbliĝas en VidRedaktilo. Estonte la programaro multe pli rapidos kaj permesos la vidigon de pli larĝaj paĝoj.
* '''Nekompleta redaktado''' - iuj elementoj de komplika formatigo vidiĝas kaj eblas redakti ilian enhvon, sed ankoraŭ ne eblas redakti ilian strukturon aŭ aldoni novajn elementojn, ekzemple difinaj listoj. Plikompletigi la redakteblecon estas unu el la projektaj prioritatoj.
* '''Plejparte artikolaj paĝoj, ne diskutpaĝoj''' . VidRedaktilo nun nur funkcias en iuj paĝogrupoj. En multaj vikipedioj, ĝi uzeblas en artikoloj kaj en paĝoj komenciĝantaj per &quot;uzanto:&quot;, &quot;dosiero:&quot;, &quot;helpo:&quot; kaj &quot;kategorio:&quot;, sed momente ne funkias en paĝoj komenciĝantaj per &quot;vikipedio:&quot; kaj &quot;diskuto:&quot;.

Pro tiuj limigoj kaj neeviteblaj programeraroj, ni rekomendas ke uzantoj klaku &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; antaŭ ol savi la redakton, kaj [[VisualEditor/Feedback|raportu ĉiujn problemojn kiujn ili renkontas]].

== Kiel helpi ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For VisualEditor to be as good as it can be, there are a lot of things we need help with. Obviously, one big area is using the software, finding bugs and [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reporting them]], but there are many other tasks as well. These include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Updating help pages''' — All of our projects have help pages to make it easier for new users to contribute. Unfortunately they are all built around the markup editor, and as VisualEditor evolves, the screenshots and tutorials will all become outdated. It would be very useful if people could  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]], based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Adding TemplateData to templates''' — VisualEditor features a nice template editor, which is described in more detail on our [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|help page]]. As you'll see if you use it on Wikipedia, some templates have named parameters and nice descriptions that make it easy to use. Others do not. This is because templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; before this feature will work. If you're interested in adding TemplateData, we have [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]], along with a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help new users''' — If the VisualEditor launch is successful, we will have a lot more new users than we are used to, and even though editing may be easier, working out how to interact with the community will still be hard. Please spend some time [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]], to help these newcomers become acclimatized to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Vidu ankaŭ ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>eeb84uicm414uf3vw57vy5wmgss28mv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/eo</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>187379</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402407</id>
      <parentid>910531</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:52:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="319" xml:space="preserve">Bonvenon ĉe la portalo de '''''[[$ve|VisualEditor]]''''', esperante VidRedaktilo. VidRedaktilo (VE) estas nova metodo por redakti Vikipedion, kreata de la ''vikimedia fondaĵo''. Ĝi ebligas redaktadon al homoj sen deviga kono de la reguloj de &quot;wiki markup&quot;. Espereble ĝi helpos faciligi la kontribuadon al Vikipedio.</text>
      <sha1>44xthzvv14gdk7kfhxvwfbe2s2cs7qw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki/zh</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>187458</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401767</id>
      <parentid>5312702</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3894" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;许多ShoutWiki的员工亦为MediaWiki的[[developers|开发人员]]。可参见[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki的网站]或[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About 关于ShoutWiki的页面]获取更多信息。&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki也有自己的[https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 Gerrit 群組]，由ShoutWiki职员內的开发者们所组成。

==扩展插件==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki使用了众多Wikimedia姊妹网站都在使用的扩展，此外还使用了他们自行开发的扩展。这些自行开发的扩展的源代码可从[http://git.wikimedia.org/ Wikimedia的git仓库（官方代码仓库）]或这些扩展位于本Wiki的介绍页面上了解获取。访问[[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]]可见由ShoutWiki编写的扩展列表。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About 关于ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source 有关ShoutWiki的信息与开放源代码]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — 由ShoutWiki提交的众多MediaWiki源代码补丁
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWiki的Github]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2d4ryg6ohfxtd3am5vuws1jp85jeobb</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401787</id>
      <parentid>5401767</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3893" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;许多ShoutWiki的员工亦为MediaWiki的[[developers|开发人员]]。可参见[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki的网站]或[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About 关于ShoutWiki的页面]获取更多信息。&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki也有自己的[https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 Gerrit 群組]，由ShoutWiki职员內的开发者们所组成。

==扩展插件==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki使用了众多Wikimedia姊妹网站都在使用的扩展，此外还使用了他们自行开发的扩展。这些自行开发的扩展的源代码可从[http://git.wikimedia.org/ Wikimedia的git仓库（官方代码仓库）]或这些扩展位于本Wiki的介绍页面上了解获取。访问[[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]]可见由ShoutWiki编写的扩展列表。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About 关于ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source 有关ShoutWiki的信息与开放源代码]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — 由ShoutWiki提交的众多MediaWiki源代码补丁
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWiki的Github]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7z0za7lwgk59x4v5pzbpcpfdafw3e5g</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401887</id>
      <parentid>5401787</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3885" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;许多ShoutWiki的员工亦为MediaWiki的[[developers|开发人员]]。可参见[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki的网站]或[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About 关于ShoutWiki的页面]获取更多信息。&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki也有自己的[https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 Gerrit 群組]，由ShoutWiki职员內的开发者们所组成。

==扩展插件==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki使用了众多Wikimedia姊妹网站都在使用的扩展，此外还使用了他们自行开发的扩展。这些自行开发的扩展的源代码可从[http://git.wikimedia.org/ Wikimedia的git仓库（官方代码仓库）]或这些扩展位于本Wiki的介绍页面上了解获取。访问[[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]]可见由ShoutWiki编写的扩展列表。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About 关于ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source 有关ShoutWiki的信息与开放源代码]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; 由ShoutWiki提交的众多MediaWiki源代码补丁
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWiki的Github]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>fm43gsj6mz3hghbno0u20stq6i39tpd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/lt</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>187599</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402440</id>
      <parentid>4983813</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:04:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7499" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Sveiki atvykę į '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]''' (Vizualinio redaktoriaus) portalą. Vizualinis redaktorius (VR) yra naujas Vikipedijos redagavimo būdas, kurį kuria Vikimedijos fondas. Redaktorius leidžia žmonėms redaguoti puslapius be viki žymėjimų. Tikimės, kad tai padės lengviau žmonėms prisidėti prie Vikipedijos.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Skaitykite '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} Praneškite apie Vizualinio redaktoriaus '''problemą'''].
|-
| Išsiaiškinkite, kaip kurti nuorodas, pridėti arba perkelti vaizdus, kurti citatas, įterpti šablonus, redaguoti lenteles ir dar daugiau.
|Prašome įtraukti savo '''naršyklę, kompiuterio operacinę sistemą ir Vikipedijos išvaizdą''' (dažniausiai Vector, kartais Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Apie Vizualinį redaktorių ==

Vizualinis redaktorius yra ''vizualinis'' Vikipedijos būdas redagavimo būdas. Vikipedijos redagavimas istoriškai reikalavo, jog žmonės išmoktų viki žymėjimo, gana sudėtingos žymėjimo kalbos, net darant nežymius puslapio pakeitimus. 2001 m. tai buvo priimtina, o 2015 m. tai [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|atbaido naudotojus]]. Mes tikimės, jog Vizualinis redaktorius bus naudingas ir esamiems naudotojams. 

Vizualinio redaktoriaus ''alfą'' versiją buvo galima naudoti pasirinktinai MediaWiki.org svetainėje nuo 2012 m. vidurio, o angliškojoje Vikipedijoje nuo 2012 m. gruodžio, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ nuo 2013 m. balandžio mėn. dar 14 kalbų daugiau] ir [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/|beveik visos kitos kalbos] nuo 2013 m. birželio pradžios. Nuo 2015 m. liepos mėn. redaktorius buvo prieinamas nutylint prisijungusiems ir neprisijungusiems redaguotojams daugiau kaip 75-iuose procentuose Vikipedijų.
Mes tikimės padaryti redaktorių pagal nutylėjimą prieinamą [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|likusiose kalbose]] 2015 m. pabaigoje.
Nuo 2014 m. lapkričio mėn. pabaigos redaktorius buvo galimas kaip pasirinktina [[Beta Features|beta funkcija]] visuose Vikimedijos fondo vikiprojektuose išskyrus Vikižodyną ir Vikišaltinius.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Mes išleidžiame [[VisualEditor/changelog|reguliarius būsenos atnaujinimus]] MediaWiki.org svetainėje ir [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|daugiakalbį naujienlaiškį]], orientuotą į Vikimedijos fondo vikiprojektus.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Vizualinio redaktorius naudojimas ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jeigu jus domina Vizualinio redaktoriaus naudojimas redagavimui, mes turime [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|gidą, kaip jį naudoti]], taip pat ir [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|klaviatūros sparčiųjų klavišų sąrašą]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Vizualinis redaktorius turi keletą klaidų ir apribojimų. Jeigu susidūrėte su problema, prašome nedvejoti ir [[VisualEditor/Feedback|pranešti apie ją Atsiliepimų puslapyje]]. Dabartiniai apribojimai:

* '''Lėtas krovimasis''' - Trunka šiek tiek laiko, kol ilgi ir sudėtingi puslapiai yra įkraunami į Vizualinį redaktorių. Ateityje programinė įranga bus daug greitesnė ir leis įkelti didesnius puslapius.
* '''Nepilnas redagavimas''' - Kai kurie sudėtingo formatavimo elementai rodys ir leis keisti jų turinį, tačiau nebus leidžiama naudotojams keisti jų struktūros arba pridėti naujus įrašus - tokius kaip apibrėžimų sąrašus. Funkcijų pridėjimas šioje srityje yra vienas iš mūsų prioritetų.
* '''Daugiausia turinio puslapiai, bet ne aptarimo''' - Vizualinis redaktorius veikia tik keliose vardų srityse. Daugelyje Vikipedijų, Vizualinis redaktorius gali būti naudojamas straipsniuose, Naudotojas:, Vaizdas:, Pagalba: ir Kategorija: puslapiuose. Vizualinis redaktorius šiuo metu nėra galimas Vikipedijai: tik puslapiai ir bet kurie aptarimo puslapiai.

Mes rekomenduojame, jog naudotojai spaustų &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prieš išsaugodami puslapį ir [[VisualEditor/Feedback|praneštų apie bet kokią problemą, su kuria jie susidūrė]].

== Kaip padėti ==

Kad Vizualinis redaktorius būtų kuo geresnis, mus reikia nemažai pagalbos. Akivaizdu, viena didelė sritis yra programinės įrangos naudojimas, klaidų radimas ir [[VisualEditor/Feedback|jų pranešimas]], tačiau taip pat yra ir kitų užduočių. Jos yra:

* '''Pagalbos puslapių atnaujinimas''' - Visi mūsų projektai turi pagalbos puslapius tam, kad naujiems naudotojams būtų lengviau prisidėti. Deja, šie puslapiai yra sukurti žymėjimo redaktoriumi ir kai Vizualinis redaktorius keičiasi, ekranų nuotraukos ir pamokos pasensta. Būtų labai naudinga, jeigu žmonės galėtų [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|atnaujinti pagalbos puslapius]], paremtus [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|mūsų Vizualinio redaktorius naudojimo pamoka]].
* '''Šablono duomenų pridėjimas į šablonus''' - Vizualinis redaktorius gali redaguoti ir šablonus, detalesnį aprašymą rasite [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|šiame pagalbos puslapyje]]. Galėsite lengvai jį naudoti Vikipedijos šablonams, kurie turi parametrus ir pridėti šiems aprašymus. Kitiems taip nepavyks. Taip yra dėl to, kadangi yra reikalingas ''TemplateData'' (Šablono duomenys), kad ši funkcija veiktų. Jeigu jus domina Šablono duomenų pridėjimas, mes turime [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|gidą jam naudoti]], kartu su [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|sąrašu pačių svarbiausių šablonų, kuriems jį reikia pridėti]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Padėk savo bendruomenei''' - Žiūrėk [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|sąrašą būdų, kaip gali padėti savo vietinei bendruomenei]], kai Vizualinis redaktorius yra siūlomas kaip beta funkcija.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Padėk naujiems naudotojams''' - Jeigu Vizualinis redaktorius yra sėkmingas, tai mes turėsime dar daugiau naujų vartotojų negu prieš tai ir net jeigu redagavimas ir pasidarė lengvesnis, dirbti su bendruomene vis tiek bus sunku. Prašome skirti šiek tiek laiko [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|aptarnavimo linijoje arba IRC pagalbos kanale]], kad naujokai lengviau įsilietų į Vikipediją.

==Taip pat skaitykite==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>nsjngvhwz6x5r1bmkf11rhwn4ukzr44</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403019</id>
      <parentid>5402440</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7539" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Sveiki atvykę į '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]''' (Vizualinio redaktoriaus) portalą. Vizualinis redaktorius (VR) yra naujas Vikipedijos redagavimo būdas, kurį kuria Vikimedijos fondas. Redaktorius leidžia žmonėms redaguoti puslapius be viki žymėjimų. Tikimės, kad tai padės lengviau žmonėms prisidėti prie Vikipedijos.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Skaitykite '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} Praneškite apie Vizualinio redaktoriaus '''problemą'''].
|-
| Išsiaiškinkite, kaip kurti nuorodas, pridėti arba perkelti vaizdus, kurti citatas, įterpti šablonus, redaguoti lenteles ir dar daugiau.
|Prašome įtraukti savo '''naršyklę, kompiuterio operacinę sistemą ir Vikipedijos išvaizdą''' (dažniausiai Vector, kartais Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Apie Vizualinį redaktorių ==

Vizualinis redaktorius yra ''vizualinis'' Vikipedijos būdas redagavimo būdas. Vikipedijos redagavimas istoriškai reikalavo, jog žmonės išmoktų viki žymėjimo, gana sudėtingos žymėjimo kalbos, net darant nežymius puslapio pakeitimus. 2001 m. tai buvo priimtina, o 2015 m. tai [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|atbaido naudotojus]]. Mes tikimės, jog Vizualinis redaktorius bus naudingas ir esamiems naudotojams. 

Vizualinio redaktoriaus ''alfą'' versiją buvo galima naudoti pasirinktinai MediaWiki.org svetainėje nuo 2012 m. vidurio, o angliškojoje Vikipedijoje nuo 2012 m. gruodžio, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ nuo 2013 m. balandžio mėn. dar 14 kalbų daugiau] ir [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/|beveik visos kitos kalbos] nuo 2013 m. birželio pradžios. Nuo 2015 m. liepos mėn. redaktorius buvo prieinamas nutylint prisijungusiems ir neprisijungusiems redaguotojams daugiau kaip 75-iuose procentuose Vikipedijų.
Mes tikimės padaryti redaktorių pagal nutylėjimą prieinamą [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|likusiose kalbose]] 2015 m. pabaigoje.
Nuo 2014 m. lapkričio mėn. pabaigos redaktorius buvo galimas kaip pasirinktina [[Beta Features|beta funkcija]] visuose Vikimedijos fondo vikiprojektuose išskyrus Vikižodyną ir Vikišaltinius.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Mes išleidžiame [[VisualEditor/changelog|reguliarius būsenos atnaujinimus]] MediaWiki.org svetainėje ir [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|daugiakalbį naujienlaiškį]], orientuotą į Vikimedijos fondo vikiprojektus.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Vizualinio redaktorius naudojimas ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jeigu jus domina Vizualinio redaktoriaus naudojimas redagavimui, mes turime [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|gidą, kaip jį naudoti]], taip pat ir [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|klaviatūros sparčiųjų klavišų sąrašą]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Vizualinis redaktorius turi keletą klaidų ir apribojimų. Jeigu susidūrėte su problema, prašome nedvejoti ir [[VisualEditor/Feedback|pranešti apie ją Atsiliepimų puslapyje]]. Dabartiniai apribojimai:

* '''Lėtas krovimasis''' - Trunka šiek tiek laiko, kol ilgi ir sudėtingi puslapiai yra įkraunami į Vizualinį redaktorių. Ateityje programinė įranga bus daug greitesnė ir leis įkelti didesnius puslapius.
* '''Nepilnas redagavimas''' - Kai kurie sudėtingo formatavimo elementai rodys ir leis keisti jų turinį, tačiau nebus leidžiama naudotojams keisti jų struktūros arba pridėti naujus įrašus - tokius kaip apibrėžimų sąrašus. Funkcijų pridėjimas šioje srityje yra vienas iš mūsų prioritetų.
* '''Daugiausia turinio puslapiai, bet ne aptarimo''' - Vizualinis redaktorius veikia tik keliose vardų srityse. Daugelyje Vikipedijų, Vizualinis redaktorius gali būti naudojamas straipsniuose, Naudotojas:, Vaizdas:, Pagalba: ir Kategorija: puslapiuose. Vizualinis redaktorius šiuo metu nėra galimas Vikipedijai: tik puslapiai ir bet kurie aptarimo puslapiai.

Mes rekomenduojame, jog naudotojai spaustų &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prieš išsaugodami puslapį ir [[VisualEditor/Feedback|praneštų apie bet kokią problemą, su kuria jie susidūrė]].

== Kaip padėti ==

Kad Vizualinis redaktorius būtų kuo geresnis, mus reikia nemažai pagalbos. Akivaizdu, viena didelė sritis yra programinės įrangos naudojimas, klaidų radimas ir [[VisualEditor/Feedback|jų pranešimas]], tačiau taip pat yra ir kitų užduočių. Jos yra:

* '''Pagalbos puslapių atnaujinimas''' - Visi mūsų projektai turi pagalbos puslapius tam, kad naujiems naudotojams būtų lengviau prisidėti. Deja, šie puslapiai yra sukurti žymėjimo redaktoriumi ir kai Vizualinis redaktorius keičiasi, ekranų nuotraukos ir pamokos pasensta. Būtų labai naudinga, jeigu žmonės galėtų [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|atnaujinti pagalbos puslapius]], paremtus [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|mūsų Vizualinio redaktorius naudojimo pamoka]].
* '''Šablono duomenų pridėjimas į šablonus''' - Vizualinis redaktorius gali redaguoti ir šablonus, detalesnį aprašymą rasite [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|šiame pagalbos puslapyje]]. Galėsite lengvai jį naudoti Vikipedijos šablonams, kurie turi parametrus ir pridėti šiems aprašymus. Kitiems taip nepavyks. Taip yra dėl to, kadangi yra reikalingas ''TemplateData'' (Šablono duomenys), kad ši funkcija veiktų. Jeigu jus domina Šablono duomenų pridėjimas, mes turime [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|gidą jam naudoti]], kartu su [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|sąrašu pačių svarbiausių šablonų, kuriems jį reikia pridėti]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Padėk savo bendruomenei''' - Žiūrėk [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|sąrašą būdų, kaip gali padėti savo vietinei bendruomenei]], kai Vizualinis redaktorius yra siūlomas kaip beta funkcija.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Padėk naujiems naudotojams''' - Jeigu Vizualinis redaktorius yra sėkmingas, tai mes turėsime dar daugiau naujų vartotojų negu prieš tai ir net jeigu redagavimas ir pasidarė lengvesnis, dirbti su bendruomene vis tiek bus sunku. Prašome skirti šiek tiek laiko [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|aptarnavimo linijoje arba IRC pagalbos kanale]], kad naujokai lengviau įsilietų į Vikipediją.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Taip pat skaitykite==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>la6zyw6sic54yiufgptbtyol6cidm7z</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403172</id>
      <parentid>5403019</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:41:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7499" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Sveiki atvykę į '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]''' (Vizualinio redaktoriaus) portalą. Vizualinis redaktorius (VR) yra naujas Vikipedijos redagavimo būdas, kurį kuria Vikimedijos fondas. Redaktorius leidžia žmonėms redaguoti puslapius be viki žymėjimų. Tikimės, kad tai padės lengviau žmonėms prisidėti prie Vikipedijos.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Skaitykite '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} Praneškite apie Vizualinio redaktoriaus '''problemą'''].
|-
| Išsiaiškinkite, kaip kurti nuorodas, pridėti arba perkelti vaizdus, kurti citatas, įterpti šablonus, redaguoti lenteles ir dar daugiau.
|Prašome įtraukti savo '''naršyklę, kompiuterio operacinę sistemą ir Vikipedijos išvaizdą''' (dažniausiai Vector, kartais Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Apie Vizualinį redaktorių ==

Vizualinis redaktorius yra ''vizualinis'' Vikipedijos būdas redagavimo būdas. Vikipedijos redagavimas istoriškai reikalavo, jog žmonės išmoktų viki žymėjimo, gana sudėtingos žymėjimo kalbos, net darant nežymius puslapio pakeitimus. 2001 m. tai buvo priimtina, o 2015 m. tai [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|atbaido naudotojus]]. Mes tikimės, jog Vizualinis redaktorius bus naudingas ir esamiems naudotojams. 

Vizualinio redaktoriaus ''alfą'' versiją buvo galima naudoti pasirinktinai MediaWiki.org svetainėje nuo 2012 m. vidurio, o angliškojoje Vikipedijoje nuo 2012 m. gruodžio, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ nuo 2013 m. balandžio mėn. dar 14 kalbų daugiau] ir [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/|beveik visos kitos kalbos] nuo 2013 m. birželio pradžios. Nuo 2015 m. liepos mėn. redaktorius buvo prieinamas nutylint prisijungusiems ir neprisijungusiems redaguotojams daugiau kaip 75-iuose procentuose Vikipedijų.
Mes tikimės padaryti redaktorių pagal nutylėjimą prieinamą [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|likusiose kalbose]] 2015 m. pabaigoje.
Nuo 2014 m. lapkričio mėn. pabaigos redaktorius buvo galimas kaip pasirinktina [[Beta Features|beta funkcija]] visuose Vikimedijos fondo vikiprojektuose išskyrus Vikižodyną ir Vikišaltinius.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Mes išleidžiame [[VisualEditor/changelog|reguliarius būsenos atnaujinimus]] MediaWiki.org svetainėje ir [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|daugiakalbį naujienlaiškį]], orientuotą į Vikimedijos fondo vikiprojektus.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Vizualinio redaktorius naudojimas ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jeigu jus domina Vizualinio redaktoriaus naudojimas redagavimui, mes turime [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|gidą, kaip jį naudoti]], taip pat ir [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|klaviatūros sparčiųjų klavišų sąrašą]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Vizualinis redaktorius turi keletą klaidų ir apribojimų. Jeigu susidūrėte su problema, prašome nedvejoti ir [[VisualEditor/Feedback|pranešti apie ją Atsiliepimų puslapyje]]. Dabartiniai apribojimai:

* '''Lėtas krovimasis''' - Trunka šiek tiek laiko, kol ilgi ir sudėtingi puslapiai yra įkraunami į Vizualinį redaktorių. Ateityje programinė įranga bus daug greitesnė ir leis įkelti didesnius puslapius.
* '''Nepilnas redagavimas''' - Kai kurie sudėtingo formatavimo elementai rodys ir leis keisti jų turinį, tačiau nebus leidžiama naudotojams keisti jų struktūros arba pridėti naujus įrašus - tokius kaip apibrėžimų sąrašus. Funkcijų pridėjimas šioje srityje yra vienas iš mūsų prioritetų.
* '''Daugiausia turinio puslapiai, bet ne aptarimo''' - Vizualinis redaktorius veikia tik keliose vardų srityse. Daugelyje Vikipedijų, Vizualinis redaktorius gali būti naudojamas straipsniuose, Naudotojas:, Vaizdas:, Pagalba: ir Kategorija: puslapiuose. Vizualinis redaktorius šiuo metu nėra galimas Vikipedijai: tik puslapiai ir bet kurie aptarimo puslapiai.

Mes rekomenduojame, jog naudotojai spaustų &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prieš išsaugodami puslapį ir [[VisualEditor/Feedback|praneštų apie bet kokią problemą, su kuria jie susidūrė]].

== Kaip padėti ==

Kad Vizualinis redaktorius būtų kuo geresnis, mus reikia nemažai pagalbos. Akivaizdu, viena didelė sritis yra programinės įrangos naudojimas, klaidų radimas ir [[VisualEditor/Feedback|jų pranešimas]], tačiau taip pat yra ir kitų užduočių. Jos yra:

* '''Pagalbos puslapių atnaujinimas''' - Visi mūsų projektai turi pagalbos puslapius tam, kad naujiems naudotojams būtų lengviau prisidėti. Deja, šie puslapiai yra sukurti žymėjimo redaktoriumi ir kai Vizualinis redaktorius keičiasi, ekranų nuotraukos ir pamokos pasensta. Būtų labai naudinga, jeigu žmonės galėtų [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|atnaujinti pagalbos puslapius]], paremtus [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|mūsų Vizualinio redaktorius naudojimo pamoka]].
* '''Šablono duomenų pridėjimas į šablonus''' - Vizualinis redaktorius gali redaguoti ir šablonus, detalesnį aprašymą rasite [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|šiame pagalbos puslapyje]]. Galėsite lengvai jį naudoti Vikipedijos šablonams, kurie turi parametrus ir pridėti šiems aprašymus. Kitiems taip nepavyks. Taip yra dėl to, kadangi yra reikalingas ''TemplateData'' (Šablono duomenys), kad ši funkcija veiktų. Jeigu jus domina Šablono duomenų pridėjimas, mes turime [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|gidą jam naudoti]], kartu su [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|sąrašu pačių svarbiausių šablonų, kuriems jį reikia pridėti]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Padėk savo bendruomenei''' - Žiūrėk [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|sąrašą būdų, kaip gali padėti savo vietinei bendruomenei]], kai Vizualinis redaktorius yra siūlomas kaip beta funkcija.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Padėk naujiems naudotojams''' - Jeigu Vizualinis redaktorius yra sėkmingas, tai mes turėsime dar daugiau naujų vartotojų negu prieš tai ir net jeigu redagavimas ir pasidarė lengvesnis, dirbti su bendruomene vis tiek bus sunku. Prašome skirti šiek tiek laiko [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|aptarnavimo linijoje arba IRC pagalbos kanale]], kad naujokai lengviau įsilietų į Vikipediją.

==Taip pat skaitykite==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>nsjngvhwz6x5r1bmkf11rhwn4ukzr44</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403241</id>
      <parentid>5403172</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:03:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7517" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Sveiki atvykę į '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]''' (Vizualinio redaktoriaus) portalą. Vizualinis redaktorius (VR) yra naujas Vikipedijos redagavimo būdas, kurį kuria Vikimedijos fondas. Redaktorius leidžia žmonėms redaguoti puslapius be viki žymėjimų. Tikimės, kad tai padės lengviau žmonėms prisidėti prie Vikipedijos.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Skaitykite '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} Praneškite apie Vizualinio redaktoriaus '''problemą'''].
|-
| Išsiaiškinkite, kaip kurti nuorodas, pridėti arba perkelti vaizdus, kurti citatas, įterpti šablonus, redaguoti lenteles ir dar daugiau.
|Prašome įtraukti savo '''naršyklę, kompiuterio operacinę sistemą ir Vikipedijos išvaizdą''' (dažniausiai Vector, kartais Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Apie Vizualinį redaktorių ==

Vizualinis redaktorius yra ''vizualinis'' Vikipedijos būdas redagavimo būdas. Vikipedijos redagavimas istoriškai reikalavo, jog žmonės išmoktų viki žymėjimo, gana sudėtingos žymėjimo kalbos, net darant nežymius puslapio pakeitimus. 2001 m. tai buvo priimtina, o 2015 m. tai [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|atbaido naudotojus]]. Mes tikimės, jog Vizualinis redaktorius bus naudingas ir esamiems naudotojams. 

Vizualinio redaktoriaus ''alfą'' versiją buvo galima naudoti pasirinktinai MediaWiki.org svetainėje nuo 2012 m. vidurio, o angliškojoje Vikipedijoje nuo 2012 m. gruodžio, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ nuo 2013 m. balandžio mėn. dar 14 kalbų daugiau] ir [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/|beveik visos kitos kalbos] nuo 2013 m. birželio pradžios. Nuo 2015 m. liepos mėn. redaktorius buvo prieinamas nutylint prisijungusiems ir neprisijungusiems redaguotojams daugiau kaip 75-iuose procentuose Vikipedijų.
Mes tikimės padaryti redaktorių pagal nutylėjimą prieinamą [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|likusiose kalbose]] 2015 m. pabaigoje.
Nuo 2014 m. lapkričio mėn. pabaigos redaktorius buvo galimas kaip pasirinktina [[Beta Features|beta funkcija]] visuose Vikimedijos fondo vikiprojektuose išskyrus Vikižodyną ir Vikišaltinius.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Mes išleidžiame [[VisualEditor/changelog|reguliarius būsenos atnaujinimus]] MediaWiki.org svetainėje ir [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|daugiakalbį naujienlaiškį]], orientuotą į Vikimedijos fondo vikiprojektus.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Vizualinio redaktorius naudojimas ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jeigu jus domina Vizualinio redaktoriaus naudojimas redagavimui, mes turime [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|gidą, kaip jį naudoti]], taip pat ir [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|klaviatūros sparčiųjų klavišų sąrašą]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Vizualinis redaktorius turi keletą klaidų ir apribojimų. Jeigu susidūrėte su problema, prašome nedvejoti ir [[VisualEditor/Feedback|pranešti apie ją Atsiliepimų puslapyje]]. Dabartiniai apribojimai:

* '''Lėtas krovimasis''' - Trunka šiek tiek laiko, kol ilgi ir sudėtingi puslapiai yra įkraunami į Vizualinį redaktorių. Ateityje programinė įranga bus daug greitesnė ir leis įkelti didesnius puslapius.
* '''Nepilnas redagavimas''' - Kai kurie sudėtingo formatavimo elementai rodys ir leis keisti jų turinį, tačiau nebus leidžiama naudotojams keisti jų struktūros arba pridėti naujus įrašus - tokius kaip apibrėžimų sąrašus. Funkcijų pridėjimas šioje srityje yra vienas iš mūsų prioritetų.
* '''Daugiausia turinio puslapiai, bet ne aptarimo''' - Vizualinis redaktorius veikia tik keliose vardų srityse. Daugelyje Vikipedijų, Vizualinis redaktorius gali būti naudojamas straipsniuose, Naudotojas:, Vaizdas:, Pagalba: ir Kategorija: puslapiuose. Vizualinis redaktorius šiuo metu nėra galimas Vikipedijai: tik puslapiai ir bet kurie aptarimo puslapiai.

Mes rekomenduojame, jog naudotojai spaustų &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; prieš išsaugodami puslapį ir [[VisualEditor/Feedback|praneštų apie bet kokią problemą, su kuria jie susidūrė]].

== Kaip padėti ==

Kad Vizualinis redaktorius būtų kuo geresnis, mus reikia nemažai pagalbos. Akivaizdu, viena didelė sritis yra programinės įrangos naudojimas, klaidų radimas ir [[VisualEditor/Feedback|jų pranešimas]], tačiau taip pat yra ir kitų užduočių. Jos yra:

* '''Pagalbos puslapių atnaujinimas''' - Visi mūsų projektai turi pagalbos puslapius tam, kad naujiems naudotojams būtų lengviau prisidėti. Deja, šie puslapiai yra sukurti žymėjimo redaktoriumi ir kai Vizualinis redaktorius keičiasi, ekranų nuotraukos ir pamokos pasensta. Būtų labai naudinga, jeigu žmonės galėtų [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|atnaujinti pagalbos puslapius]], paremtus [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|mūsų Vizualinio redaktorius naudojimo pamoka]].
* '''Šablono duomenų pridėjimas į šablonus''' - Vizualinis redaktorius gali redaguoti ir šablonus, detalesnį aprašymą rasite [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|šiame pagalbos puslapyje]]. Galėsite lengvai jį naudoti Vikipedijos šablonams, kurie turi parametrus ir pridėti šiems aprašymus. Kitiems taip nepavyks. Taip yra dėl to, kadangi yra reikalingas ''TemplateData'' (Šablono duomenys), kad ši funkcija veiktų. Jeigu jus domina Šablono duomenų pridėjimas, mes turime [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|gidą jam naudoti]], kartu su [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|sąrašu pačių svarbiausių šablonų, kuriems jį reikia pridėti]].
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Padėk savo bendruomenei''' - Žiūrėk [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|sąrašą būdų, kaip gali padėti savo vietinei bendruomenei]], kai Vizualinis redaktorius yra siūlomas kaip beta funkcija.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Padėk naujiems naudotojams''' - Jeigu Vizualinis redaktorius yra sėkmingas, tai mes turėsime dar daugiau naujų vartotojų negu prieš tai ir net jeigu redagavimas ir pasidarė lengvesnis, dirbti su bendruomene vis tiek bus sunku. Prašome skirti šiek tiek laiko [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|aptarnavimo linijoje arba IRC pagalbos kanale]], kad naujokai lengviau įsilietų į Vikipediją.

==Taip pat skaitykite==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>fh8ruv8ja6je1y2o4fuhzx8njkhnrsl</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/lt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>187600</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402439</id>
      <parentid>1902341</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:04:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="327" xml:space="preserve">Sveiki atvykę į '''[[$ve|VisualEditor]]''' (Vizualinio redaktoriaus) portalą. Vizualinis redaktorius (VR) yra naujas Vikipedijos redagavimo būdas, kurį kuria Vikimedijos fondas. Redaktorius leidžia žmonėms redaguoti puslapius be viki žymėjimų. Tikimės, kad tai padės lengviau žmonėms prisidėti prie Vikipedijos.</text>
      <sha1>mdim3f25kmm1aud9g4h2wppqddoctyt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Page Previews</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>188972</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402118</id>
      <parentid>5390100</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:19:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="32047" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; The '''Page Previews ''' feature solves the core problem of users needing to open multiple tabs to gain an understanding of a word or concept within the context of the subject they are reading.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:112--&gt; With Page Previews, whenever a reader hovers over a link to another article, a short summary of the subject and an image (if available) is displayed.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:113--&gt; The user can then decide whether they wish to visit that subject more thoroughly before continuing with the current article.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:114--&gt; A complete description of Page Previews functionality can be found [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality&lt;/tvar&gt;|here]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:78--&gt; An overview over all related technical documentation is provided in [&lt;tvar name=&quot;url&quot;&gt;https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/&lt;/tvar&gt; this blog post] from May 2018.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:86--&gt;
The '''Reference Previews''' feature is a related project. It shows a preview of a footnote whenever a reader hovers over its footnote marker. A description of this feature can be found on [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|its project page]].

== Introduction == &lt;!--T:2--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:3--&gt; Page Previews are designed to reduce the cost of exploration of a link, as well as to promote learning by allowing readers to gain context on the article they are reading or to define an unfamiliar term, object, event, or idea without navigating away from their original topic.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:115--&gt; For casual readers, Page Previews will make it easier for users to get an overview of an article before deciding whether or not to browse to it.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:116--&gt; Users interested in reading an entire article in its totality will not be distracted or discouraged by viewing unfamiliar concepts—they can simply preview the concept without navigating to a new page.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:117--&gt; Consequently, the smoothness of the user experience for these users will be increased.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; There have been many requests over the years for a similar feature; there are browser extensions (see [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|list]]) and one heavily used gadget (the more editor-focused [[:en:Wikipedia:Tools/Navigation popups|Navigation popups]]) that also exist to solve this problem.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:118--&gt; Page Previews were first built as a beta feature in 2014 (called Hovercards) and have been among our most popular beta features in terms of adoption, user feedback and impact on usage.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:119--&gt; On the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards&lt;/tvar&gt;|primary talk page for Hovercards]], over the course of 2 years, numerous issues across all projects were identified and resolved.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:120--&gt; The mobile equivalent of Page Previews, implemented on the Android app [[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|in September 2015]], led to a 20% increase in links clicked per page.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; The Page Previews [[&lt;tvar name=settings&gt;#settings&lt;/tvar&gt;|settings panel]] enables logged-out users to enable and disable the feature based on their preferences.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:121--&gt; Logged-in users may enable or disable Page Previews from the Appearance section of Special:Preferences.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:122--&gt; If Navigation popups and Page Previews are enabled at the same time (typically, for logged-in users who have opted in via the beta feature), Navigation popups takes precedence.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:123--&gt; To enable Page Previews, Navigation pop-ups must be disabled.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|Example of a Page Preview]]

== Design == &lt;!--T:7--&gt;

&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
For the current iteration of Page Previews, each preview contains the following:
* A portion of the first paragraph from the article
* An image (if available) from the article. Images appear horizontal or vertical depending on the location of the link within the article.
* A settings cog which allows users to turn Page Previews on and off
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|&lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; Example of Page Previews in Greek&lt;/translate&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|&lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:175--&gt; Example of Page Previews in Chinese&lt;/translate&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png|&lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:176--&gt; Example of Page Previews in English&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Key differences from Navigation Popups === &lt;!--T:10--&gt;

&lt;!--T:11--&gt;
* Navigation popups is for power users and has many features that are not relevant to most site users, such as quick links to meta-data pages like History, Diffs, and Usercontributions.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:95--&gt;
* Navigation popups work for links to all namespaces, and on all Wikimedia projects. Page Previews is configured to only work with mainspace links, and currently only on Wikipedias.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:96--&gt;
* Page Previews are styled to enable easy reading. Currently, Nav-popups' type-size is small and the margins are tight.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:97--&gt;
* Page Previews are available to all users, not just logged-in users.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:98--&gt;
* Page Previews use a visual style consistent with the article type treatment&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:99--&gt;
* Page Previews emphasize the lead images, so a user gets an idea of a term using both text and image.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:100--&gt;
* The action set in the gadget feels out of context, hence we need to validate which of those actions are useful for readers and editors.

=== HTML Previews === &lt;!--T:69--&gt;

&lt;!--T:70--&gt;
As of March 1st, 2018, page previews now display previews in HTML.  This resolves many outstanding bugs, provides correct representation of mathematical, chemical and other formulas, and ensures previews display the same formatting as the article content.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Settings == &lt;!--T:14--&gt;

=== Enable/Disable === &lt;!--T:15--&gt;

==== Logged-Out Users ==== &lt;!--T:16--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; Logged-out users may turn Page Previews off via the cog-icon displayed at the bottom of each preview. If a user wishes to re-enable Page Previews, they can be enabled via the &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; link available at the bottom of any wiki page.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:87--&gt; They can also disable JavaScript in their browser to turn it off permanently.&lt;/translate&gt;
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |&lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:18--&gt; Select setting cog to disable Page Previews&lt;/translate&gt;
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | &lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:177--&gt; Select disable to disable the feature&lt;/translate&gt;
File:Reenablemodal.png | &lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:178--&gt; Instructions on how to re-enable will be presented&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:71--&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| The link to re-enable Page Previews is available at the bottom of each page
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== Logged-In Users ==== &lt;!--T:19--&gt;

&lt;!--T:20--&gt;
Logged-in users can control their settings from two places. They may enable or disable Page Previews from the Appearance section of Special:Preferences. Logged-in users may also turn Page Previews off via the cog-icon displayed at the bottom of each preview.
* If a logged-in user clicks on the settings cog, the system will redirect them to the user preferences page.
* If a user previously had the Hovercards beta feature enabled, their preference will be kept and appear in the Appearance section of user preferences.

&lt;!--T:21--&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| Users may enable the feature by using the settings cog at the bottom of each preview, or by selecting the option directly from the user preferences page
&lt;/gallery&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}
&lt;translate&gt;

== Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation == &lt;!--T:24--&gt;

&lt;!--T:25--&gt;
A number of qualitative and quantitative tests were performed to evaluate the performance of the Page Previews feature. These tests were focused on the following questions:
* Do users enjoy Page Previews and find them useful?
* How do Page Previews change reading behavior and do they help users be more accurate when selecting the articles they wish to read?
* Would launching the Page Previews feature have effects on fundraising?

=== 2015 Greek and Catalan Wikipedia test === &lt;!--T:26--&gt;

&lt;!--T:27--&gt;
A feature test was implemented for a period of 4 months on Greek and Catalan Wikipedias. A number of issues and bugs were reported and user satisfaction was recorded using a survey. Users had generally favorable feedback, with the majority of users finding Page previews (Hovercards) useful, easy to use, and enjoyable to use.

&lt;!--T:28--&gt;
Read [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/GreekCatalanTest&lt;/tvar&gt;|the full results of these tests]].

=== 2016 Qualitative test === &lt;!--T:29--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt; To determine user attitudes towards the Page Previews feature and trace further changes in reader behavior, an unmoderated remote panel study was performed using [http://UserZoom.com UserZoom] software.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:124--&gt; The majority of participants reported positive attitudes to the Page Previews feature.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:125--&gt; In addition, the majority of participants had no issues in turning the feature on and off.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:126--&gt; Users also described the feature in generally positive terms and reported it was not distracting to their reading experience.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:31--&gt;
Read [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability&lt;/tvar&gt;|the full results and analysis of this test]].

=== 2016 A/B tests on Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias === &lt;!--T:32--&gt;

&lt;!--T:33--&gt;
To determine changes in reading behavior and evaluate the success of the Page Previews (Hovercards) beta feature, three A/B tests were launched on Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias. The A/B test on Hungarian was launched June 7, 2016, the A/B tests on Italian and Russian were launched Sept 23, 2016.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:34--&gt; The results of these tests indicated that Page Previews facilitate positive changes in reading behavior by increasing the precision with which users select the pages they read, reducing the cost of exploration of other pages, and allowing users to selectively focus on a single topic by providing context within a page.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:79--&gt; During the process of collecting and analysing our data we ran into a number of bugs and issues within our instrumentation that allowed us to refine and improve, to ensure subsequent tests were issue-free.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:35--&gt;
Read [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results&lt;/tvar&gt;|the full results and analysis of these tests]].

=== 2017-2018 A/B tests on English and German Wikipedias === &lt;!--T:65--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:66--&gt; From October to November 2017 and December 2017 to February 2018, we ran [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|two A/B tests to gauge the performance of the feature]] prior to release on these projects.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:127--&gt; The results, described in more detail [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|in the report]], displayed a decrease in pageviews, but an overall increase in the number of distinct pages that readers interact with, indicating that they are more likely to explore a larger variety of topics when the feature is on.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:128--&gt; We also noted decreased usage of the back button and very low rates of disabling the feature.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:129--&gt; In addition, we ran a number of fundraising tests on enwiki.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Improvements since English Wikipedia discussion from April 2016 == &lt;!--T:72--&gt;

&lt;!--T:88--&gt;
During the [[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |discussion]] from April 2016, a number of bugs, improvements, and other requests were identified which we have addressed in the following ways:

&lt;!--T:73--&gt;
Previews “getting stuck” in the open position

&lt;!--T:156--&gt;
*We have since refactored our code and this is no longer an issue

&lt;!--T:157--&gt;
Bolded text and mathematical formulas not appearing within the preview

&lt;!--T:158--&gt;
*Currently, previews display in HTML and content is true to the article content

&lt;!--T:159--&gt;
A means to disable the feature from the card itself

&lt;!--T:160--&gt;
*Logged-in and logged-out users can now disable the feature by selecting the settings gear within the card itself.

&lt;!--T:161--&gt;
A means to make sure page previews do not interfere with navigational popups

&lt;!--T:162--&gt;
*Logged-in users may either have navigational popups or page previews. If you’re a navpopups user, you will not be able to enable page previews unless you turn off navpopups first, and vice versa
Providing more thorough research and A/B test results, performing a large-scale A/B test on English Wikipedia&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:163--&gt;
*Since the discussion, we have performed [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation&lt;/tvar&gt;|two series of A/B tests]], the first on Hungarian, Russian, and Italian Wikipedias.  And the [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |second]] on English and German Wikipedias.

&lt;!--T:164--&gt;
Limiting performance impact

&lt;!--T:165--&gt;
*We have worked with our performance team to minimize any issues page previews.  A [https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 dashboard] with detailed information on feature performance was created.

&lt;!--T:166--&gt;
Providing a way to enable the feature for anonymous users only

&lt;!--T:167--&gt;
*This is ready as well.  As of March 2018, the feature is enabled by default for anonymous users on all Wikipedias except English and German

&lt;!--T:168--&gt;
Providing data on how often users disable the feature

&lt;!--T:169--&gt;
*For both of our 2017/18 A/B tests, the disable rate was around 0.01%.  Because the rate had been similarly low in earlier A/B tests, we also did a [[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |qualitative test]] to confirm that users did not have problems enabling or disabling the feature.  Our conclusion is that people know how to turn the feature off without difficulty but do so at extremely low rates.

&lt;!--T:170--&gt;
Providing information on whether the feature was considered a nuisance

&lt;!--T:171--&gt;
*Based on our qualitative testing, we concluded that tested users did not find the feature distracting, or a nuisance.

== Disabled pages == &lt;!--T:67--&gt;

&lt;!--T:68--&gt;
For security reasons, Page Previews won't be loaded on certain special pages. We refer to these pages as &quot;disabled pages&quot;. The initial version of this can be found here: {{phab|T170893}}.

== Future Iterations and Potential Improvements == &lt;!--T:36--&gt;

&lt;!--T:37--&gt;
Following the general launch of Page Previews, we are planning on iterating on the feature to add functionality. These items will include:

&lt;!--T:102--&gt;
* Configuration of images and other settings:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:103--&gt;
** a number of users have requested making images configurable within Page Previews. Request declined: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:104--&gt;
** other logged out preferences (more info [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences&lt;/tvar&gt;|here]])&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:105--&gt;
* Article titles - currently, only the summary of the article is available within Page Previews. As an iteration, we would like to display the title of each article along with its summary&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:106--&gt;
* Reference Tooltips ([[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]). The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details.&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:107--&gt; Using Page Previews to gain more information on each reference without scrolling to the bottom of the page&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:108--&gt;
* Cross-wiki Page Previews ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]), and subsection links ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]]), particularly for Wiktionary&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:109--&gt;
* Integrate with Navigation Pop-ups - we would also like to expand the configuration of Page Previews to include some of the functionality planned in navigation pop-ups.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:110--&gt;
* Interacting with Page Previews text - a number of requests for interacting with preview text have been filed, including being able to copy and paste the text or export the text as a form or article summary. More info here  ([[phab:T146097|phab:T146097]])&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:111--&gt;
* Integrating with Wiktionary items to provide definitions on hover.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:74--&gt; Interacting with Wiktionary items to provide definitions for unknown&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/FAQ&lt;/tvar&gt;|FAQ]] == &lt;!--T:38--&gt;

&lt;!--T:39--&gt;
;Why Page Previews?
:This is a feature intended to improve the experience for any reader who normally would have clicked on a blue link in Wikipedia because they needed an overview (definition) of that entity. It's inspired by one of the most popular gadgets, [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia_talk:Tools/Navigation_popups Navigation popups].

&lt;!--T:40--&gt;
; How do we measure Page Previews performance?&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:130--&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:131--&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:132--&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:133--&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:134--&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:135--&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:136--&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:137--&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:138--&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:139--&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:140--&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.

&lt;!--T:41--&gt;
At the project level, administrators can determine how long a user should dwell on a link before a hover is triggered. If a project wants to be conservative, the lag can be longer. WMF will have a recommendation as to optimum dwell time that provides the best user experience while minimizing accidental hovers.

&lt;!--T:141--&gt;
; Why can't users just turn on Page Previews if they want them?&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:142--&gt;
:Unfortunately, there is no good way to tell users about a new feature without showing it to them first. Central notice banners have been suggested, but running them for 2 weeks would not solve the needs of future users and we do not want to run them continuously. Notifying a user of a new feature is best done using a...hover-over.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:143--&gt;
; What impact to Page Previews have on page views?&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:144--&gt;
:According to A/B tests we did not see a large decrease in session depth across all Wikipedias. Average session depth (average number of pages viewed per session) [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|remained relatively equal]] between the Previews on and off groups.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:145--&gt;
; What about accessibility?&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:146--&gt;
:Page Previews only activate when the focus/hover state occurs over a link. They are usable for people who use keyboard navigation. For screen readers, Page Previews have proper [[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]] semantics declaring them as tooltips. In short, screen reader software ignore Page Previews.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:147--&gt;
; If I have Page Previews feedback or if I have a suggestion for making them better, where should I go?&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:148--&gt;
:Please go to [[Talk:Page_Previews|the Page Previews discussion page]].
&lt;/translate&gt;
; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:80--&gt; The Page Previews continues to show an old version of a page. What can I do?&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:81--&gt; The Page Preview shows the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching&lt;/tvar&gt;|cached]] version of a page. If the page has been edited and you want Page Previews to show the new version right away, you can [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge&lt;/tvar&gt;|purge]] the page.&lt;/translate&gt;
; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:173--&gt; How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/translate&gt;
: &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:174--&gt; See [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice&lt;/tvar&gt;|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;

== Code == &lt;!--T:42--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:44--&gt;
;Analytics and instrumentation
:* Page Previews were instrumented to measure various aspects of usage. Please see the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Extension:Popups|nsp=0}}&lt;/tvar&gt; extension page for details and feel free to ask any clarifying questions.
&lt;/translate&gt;
:* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:82--&gt; To measure content usage via Page Previews, in an aggregated way that is compatible with the existing Pageviews data, a separate instrumentation [[phab:T186728|was set up]] that went live in April 2018. There are [[phab:T193524|plans]] to make some of this data public for the benefit of e.g. Wikipedia editors and academic researchers.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Project-level rollout discussions == &lt;!--T:45--&gt;

=== Rollout Update July 2018 === &lt;!--T:83--&gt;

&lt;!--T:84--&gt;
Page previews are now available on all Wikipedias.  The feature is on by default for anonymous users and newly created accounts and off by default for accounts created before July 10, 2018.

=== Rollout Update April 2018 === &lt;!--T:75--&gt;

&lt;!--T:76--&gt;
The next step of the rollout for English and German Wikipedias is planned for the first half of April 2018. This deployment will include turning the feature on by default for logged-out users.  '''This will mean no changes for logged-in users.''' The feature will be off by default for logged-in editors, unless currently enabled. If you would like to enable it, it is available in your Preferences under “Appearance”. If you have the feature enabled already, it will stay on.  

&lt;!--T:77--&gt;
In terms of future changes for logged-in users, we have a few options we will be requesting feedback on:

&lt;!--T:149--&gt;
* Keep the feature off by default for logged-in users.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:150--&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for new accounts only. Currently, when users move from being readers to contributors and create an account, the feature will seem to vanish, and that would be confusing.  As a further step in the feature rollout, we plan to change this configuration and enable the feature for all new accounts.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:151--&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for existing logged-in users (Even if it were enabled for everyone, it would still be automatically suppressed for anyone who uses NAVPOPS.)

=== Rollout Plan === &lt;!--T:46--&gt;

&lt;!--T:47--&gt;
We began rolling out to Catalan, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias in early 2017. Data from the A/B tests represented highly favorable views of the feature. After this, we would like to continue rolling out in stages to other Wikipedias as described in the table below.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:89--&gt; Code&lt;/translate&gt; !! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:90--&gt; Language&lt;/translate&gt; !! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:91--&gt; Phase&lt;/translate&gt; !! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:92--&gt; Onboarding&lt;/translate&gt; !! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:93--&gt; Success&lt;/translate&gt; !! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:94--&gt; Dates&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:172--&gt; All other Wikipedias except the remaining top 6&lt;/translate&gt; || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:53--&gt; [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1&lt;/tvar&gt;|this message]] was sent to Wikipedia Village Pump (or equivalent) of the 247 wikis included in this phase on  19 April&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Onboarding Experience === &lt;!--T:59--&gt;

&lt;!--T:60--&gt;
The onboarding experience for the feature will depend on the consensus of each community on having Page Previews on by default or providing users with an onboarding experience during which they can reject the feature.

== See also == &lt;!--T:61--&gt;

&lt;!--T:85--&gt;
* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (documentation of a - so far internal - dataset recording aggregate frequencies of seen page previews)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:62--&gt;
* [[:en:WP:POP|Navigation popups]] - the editor-focused gadget, started in 2005 by Lupin, available at most wikis&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:152--&gt;
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ WMF blog post - Hovercards now available as a Beta Feature on all Wikimedia wikis] (March 2014)&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:153--&gt;
* The original specifications can be seen at [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]] and [https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:154--&gt;
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|A list of similar browser extensions]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:155--&gt;
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - The API specification for Page Previews

== References == &lt;!--T:63--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>691kqldwdvcun2dfuuoqae3f6n65gfr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/uk</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>189782</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402501</id>
      <parentid>5072309</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:15:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13351" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = ''Niklas Laxström'', ''Siebrand Mazeland'' та інші
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=Включено в комплект мовних розширень}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=Користувацька документація}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = Дозволяє переклад і вичитку всередині вікі
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] – або [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view спробуйте перекласти сторінку прямо тут]
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

Розширення '''Translate''' робить MediaWiki потужним інструментом для перекладу будь-якого тексту. Воно використовується зокрема для перекладу програмного забезпечення і для розумного керування багатомовними вікі.

== Можливості ==

Розширення Translate має багато можливостей, конкретно спрямованих на перекладачів, водночас роблячи бек-енд інтеграцію з актуальним вихідним кодом настільки легкою, наскільки це можливо. Водночас, увесь текст управляється [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|MediaWiki]], що дає користувачам має безмежний рівень свободи спілкування та самоорганізації.

Серед можливостей:

* '''Переклад структурованого вмісту вікі-сторінок.'''
* '''Локалізація у вікі та експорт повідомлень програмного інтерфейсу (або будь-яких).'''
* '''Веб-[[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overview/|інтерфейс]] для перекладу та коректури, а також експорту та імпорту за допомогою gettext для офлайнового перекладу.'''
* '''Різноманітні помічники для полегшення роботи перекладачів:'''
** відображання перекладів іншими, глобально визначеними мовами, з можливістю додавати визначені користувачем мови;
** спільне редагування документації використання та контексту повідомлень;
** пам'ять перекладу та машинний переклад зовнішніх інструментів (Apertium, Microsoft Translator, Yandex.Translate);
** відображення останньої зміни у вихідному повідомленні;
** попередження про поширені помилки, наприклад, про невикористані параметри.
* Заздалегідь створені модулі для різноманітних продуктів з вільним кодом, які можна використати як приклад.
** Підтримка різних форматів, у тому числі: PHP, Java properties, Gettext, YAML та AndroidXml (див. {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} і [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|Підтримувані формати файлів]]).
* Багатостороння система плагінів для легшого додавання нових проєктів у вигляді групи повідомлень.
* Різноманітна статистика:
** відсотки завершеності перекладу для всіх груп повідомлень усіма мовами;
** відсотки завершеності перекладу усіма мовами для будь-якої групи повідомлень;
** інструмент, що виводить графіки активності за заданими проміжками часу. Дає відобразити кількість редагувань або активних користувачів за днями або годинами, а також містить багато фільтрів;
** хмарний огляд активних мов і перекладачів.

Завдяки великій базі користувачів підтверджено, що розширення Translate сумісне з усіма відносно сучасними браузерами, за винятком деяких дрібних (стильових) недоліків, які швидко виправляються.

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|''Перетворення багатомовних вікі на реальність'': ця презентація показує, як розширення Translate може зробити вікі справді багатомовною, на прикладі KDE UserBase wiki.
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|Niklas Laxström, ''Переклад у вікі-спосіб: Просто, швидко, весело'', Вікіманія 2012 (доступні слайди).
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Підтримка і документація ==

* Див. [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|Встановлення]]
* Див. [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|Налаштування]]
* Див. [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Користувацька документація]] — включає посібники
* Див. [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|Початок розробки розширення «Переклад»]]
* Жива підтримка на #translatewiki каналі IRC у Libera Chat (найкращий час — удень і ввечері за європейським часом)
* Про усі проблеми і запити на функції повідомляйте, будь ласка, на [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate трекері помилок]

Розширення Translate оригінально було розроблене користувачем [[User:Nikerabbit|Nikerabbit]]; чимало інших користувачів, наприклад, [[User:Raymond|Raymond]], [[User:SPQRobin|SPQRobin]] та команда мов Вікімедіа внесли свій внесок у його код та документацію. Воно підтримується користувачами [[User:Nikerabbit|Nikerabbit]] та [[User:Siebrand|Siebrand]].

== Відомі користувачі розширення Translate ==
* https://translatewiki.net — Найбільший вікі-сайт та спільнота для перекладу інтерфейсу програмного забезпечення з відкритим кодом.
* https://userbase.kde.org — Вікі з документацією проєкту KDE, яка широко використовує можливість перекладу сторінок.
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — Перекладає вікі-вміст та використовує функцію станів груп. Переклад і вичитка увімкнені фактично для усіх користувачів вікі.
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

Див. більше на сторінці [[Wikipedia:translatewiki.net#Notable uses]].

=== Рекомендації ===

Tom Hutchison із Joomla:
{{quotation|1=
Розширення Translate дозволяє з'єднання з сервісами перекладу і може автоматично вставити для вас переклад. Водночас, перекладач може робити виправлення, тому ви не створюєте безліч сторінок з неправильними перекладами.

Це ще нічого, що вони на різних континентах.
Що насправді є перевагою, бо робота виконується 24 години на добу.
Що їм потрібно, так це груповий чат для підтримки один одного.
Чи були б вони всі у змозі читати англійською, якщо правильно перекласти? Вивчите кілька простих вікі-розміток, такі як посилання і категорії.
Потім вони допомагають іншим, які в свою чергу допомагатимуть іншим.
У нас понад 40 осіб у чаті, які допомагають один одному і водночас одержують задоволення.
І вони всі побоювалися вікі, але потім не змогли повірити, яким легким це виявилося після їх початку.
Насправді вони чекають на мене додаткових перекладів, тому що я не встигаю за ними.
Я знаю, що є лише один переклад тієї чи іншої мови.
У нас це теж є.
Одна людина переводить на суахілі тим час як інша — японською.
Також, Ви помічаєте сторінки для перекладу.
Ви контролюєте, чи включати шаблони чи виключати змінні у викликах шаблонів.
}}


== Див. також ==
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – розширення для сприяння зв'язку з перекладачами.

Не слід плутати з:

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – використовується для одноразового перекладу вікі-сторінок з однієї мови на іншу.
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Abstract Wikipedia]] для перекладу.

== Як зробити свій внесок ==

* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all Перекласти це розширення на translatewiki.net]
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|Відкриті баґи і запити на функції]]
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|Більше відкритих баґів та запитів на функції на at translatewiki.net]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Вичитати та перекласти документацію розширення Translate]]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>r582vafmg76ea1ho5fd3p1qjbh8nif6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/uk</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>190011</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402500</id>
      <parentid>4906522</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:15:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="110" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|Вичитати та перекласти документацію розширення Translate]]</text>
      <sha1>etpxqyauc04rji2ya97yk1wdh7f375o</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/el</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>196744</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402845</id>
      <parentid>4505774</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:32:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9665" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Η σελίδα αυτή εξηγεί πως να '''μεταφράσετε off-line'''.
Αν ενδιαφέρεστε γι'αυτό, πιθανότατα γνωρίζετε ήδη τι είναι τα αρχεία [[w:Gettext|Gettext PO]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this reason, we'll only discuss how to use them in a wiki with the Translate extension here.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise, you're probably more interested in the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|How to translate]] tutorial for online translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Γενικότερα, μπορεί να μη θέλεις να χρησιμοποιήσεις τη διεπαφή του διαδικτύου αν έχεις μια πολύ αργή ή περιορισμένη σύνδεση στο internet ή κάποια  &quot;supadupa&quot; offline που έχεις συνηθίσει ή προτιμάς. Έχε υπόψη όμως, ότι η επέκταση μετάφραση έχει σχεδιαστεί ως συνεργατική διαδικασία. Αυτό σημαίνει ότι δεν πρέπει να διατηρείς τα αρχεία offline για μεγάλο διάστημα και ότι θα πρέπει πάντα να κατεβάζεις ένα καινούργιο αρχείο πριν να αρχίσεις τη μετάφραση. Διαφορετικά μπορεί να υπάρξει σύγκρουση επεξεργασιών με άλλους μεταφραστές που εργάζονται στο wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Εξαγωγή ==

Μπορείτε να κατεβάσετε οποιαδήποτε ομάδα μηνυμάτων ως Gettext PO αρχείο επιλέγοντας ''export for off-line translation'' στο Special:Translate. Κάποια sites μπορεί να έχουν απενεργοποιήσει αυτή την επιλογή. Θα πρέπει να ελέγξετε τότε κάποιους τοπικούς οδηγούς για το πως να αποκτήσετε αυτά τα αρχεία πριν ξεκινήσετε.

{{Note|1=Παρόλο που κάποιες ομάδες μηνυμάτων μπορεί να έχουν μια επιλογή εξαγωγής, που εξάγει τις μεταφράσεις στο αρχικό format αυτής της ομάδας, και το format αυτό θα μπορούσε να είναι Gettext, αυτά δεν είναι τα αρχεία που μπορούν να χρησιμοποιηθούν για μια off-line μετάφραση!}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The files are standard Gettext PO files with some extra information.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Σημαντικά πεδία κεφαλίδας:

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

Σε αυτό το παράδειγμα, &quot;ext-abc&quot; είναι το όνομα της ομάδας μηνυμάτων.
Για μεταφράσιμες σελίδες, η αντίστοιχη ομάδα μηνυμάτων έχει το όνομα &quot;page-&quot;+ το όνομα της ομάδας (π.χ. για τη σελίδα &quot;Example&quot;, η επικεφαλίδα θα περιείχε τη γραμμή &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Παράδειγμα καταχώρησης σε αρχείο po Translate Gettext.
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Εισαγωγή ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Δεν είναι ανάγκη να μεταφράσετε το φάκελο πλήρως. Ανεβάζοντας μερικώς μεταφρασμένες ομάδες μηνυμάτων είναι αρκετό. Υπάρχουν δύο τρόποι για να κάνετε εισαγωγή αυτών των αρχείων. &lt;br /&gt;
Οι χρήστες με κανονικά δικαιώματα μπορούν να χρησιμοποιήσουν το Special:ImportTranslations για να ανεβάσουν και να εισάγουν μεταφράσεις. Η ειδική σελίδα επεξεργάζεται το αρχείο, δείχνει τις αλλαγές και επιτρέπει στο χρήστη να τις εισάγει. Για μεγάλα αρχεία με πολλές αλλαγές η εισαγωγή μπορεί να γίνει σε πολλά βήματα, καθώς ο χρόνος της επεξεργασίας είναι περιορισμένος.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

Η εισαγωγή μπορεί επίσης να γίνει με χρήση command line script σε &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. Είναι λιγότερο ευέλικτο αλλά μπορεί να εισάγει τα πάντα με μια κίνηση. Χρειάζεται επίσης τη συνδρομή από κάποιον που έχει shell access στον διακομιστή.

Ο τρόπος που διαχειρίζονται οι εισαγωγές των  off-line μεταφράσεων (ή όχι) εξαρτάται από το wiki σου.

== Επεξεργαστές Gettext ==

Ιδού μερικά εργαλεία που μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε για να επεξεργαστείτε αρχεία off-line.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : Available for all platforms supporting the [http://www.wxwidgets.org/ wxWidgets toolkit], tested on Unix with GTK+ and Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''WARNING:''' make sure you are using  version 1.4.2 or above, otherwise &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; lines are dropped and your work cannot be processed.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>3l0n1ys2ban83hmdd5o365pksaro498</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402847</id>
      <parentid>5402845</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:32:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9701" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Η σελίδα αυτή εξηγεί πως να '''μεταφράσετε off-line'''.
Αν ενδιαφέρεστε γι'αυτό, πιθανότατα γνωρίζετε ήδη τι είναι τα αρχεία [[w:Gettext|Gettext PO]].
Για το λόγο αυτόν, θα συζητήσουμε μόνο πως να τα χρησιμοποιούμε σε ένα wiki με την επέκταση Μετάφραση εδώ.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise, you're probably more interested in the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|How to translate]] tutorial for online translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Γενικότερα, μπορεί να μη θέλεις να χρησιμοποιήσεις τη διεπαφή του διαδικτύου αν έχεις μια πολύ αργή ή περιορισμένη σύνδεση στο internet ή κάποια  &quot;supadupa&quot; offline που έχεις συνηθίσει ή προτιμάς. Έχε υπόψη όμως, ότι η επέκταση μετάφραση έχει σχεδιαστεί ως συνεργατική διαδικασία. Αυτό σημαίνει ότι δεν πρέπει να διατηρείς τα αρχεία offline για μεγάλο διάστημα και ότι θα πρέπει πάντα να κατεβάζεις ένα καινούργιο αρχείο πριν να αρχίσεις τη μετάφραση. Διαφορετικά μπορεί να υπάρξει σύγκρουση επεξεργασιών με άλλους μεταφραστές που εργάζονται στο wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Εξαγωγή ==

Μπορείτε να κατεβάσετε οποιαδήποτε ομάδα μηνυμάτων ως Gettext PO αρχείο επιλέγοντας ''export for off-line translation'' στο Special:Translate. Κάποια sites μπορεί να έχουν απενεργοποιήσει αυτή την επιλογή. Θα πρέπει να ελέγξετε τότε κάποιους τοπικούς οδηγούς για το πως να αποκτήσετε αυτά τα αρχεία πριν ξεκινήσετε.

{{Note|1=Παρόλο που κάποιες ομάδες μηνυμάτων μπορεί να έχουν μια επιλογή εξαγωγής, που εξάγει τις μεταφράσεις στο αρχικό format αυτής της ομάδας, και το format αυτό θα μπορούσε να είναι Gettext, αυτά δεν είναι τα αρχεία που μπορούν να χρησιμοποιηθούν για μια off-line μετάφραση!}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The files are standard Gettext PO files with some extra information.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Σημαντικά πεδία κεφαλίδας:

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

Σε αυτό το παράδειγμα, &quot;ext-abc&quot; είναι το όνομα της ομάδας μηνυμάτων.
Για μεταφράσιμες σελίδες, η αντίστοιχη ομάδα μηνυμάτων έχει το όνομα &quot;page-&quot;+ το όνομα της ομάδας (π.χ. για τη σελίδα &quot;Example&quot;, η επικεφαλίδα θα περιείχε τη γραμμή &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Παράδειγμα καταχώρησης σε αρχείο po Translate Gettext.
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Εισαγωγή ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Δεν είναι ανάγκη να μεταφράσετε το φάκελο πλήρως. Ανεβάζοντας μερικώς μεταφρασμένες ομάδες μηνυμάτων είναι αρκετό. Υπάρχουν δύο τρόποι για να κάνετε εισαγωγή αυτών των αρχείων. &lt;br /&gt;
Οι χρήστες με κανονικά δικαιώματα μπορούν να χρησιμοποιήσουν το Special:ImportTranslations για να ανεβάσουν και να εισάγουν μεταφράσεις. Η ειδική σελίδα επεξεργάζεται το αρχείο, δείχνει τις αλλαγές και επιτρέπει στο χρήστη να τις εισάγει. Για μεγάλα αρχεία με πολλές αλλαγές η εισαγωγή μπορεί να γίνει σε πολλά βήματα, καθώς ο χρόνος της επεξεργασίας είναι περιορισμένος.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

Η εισαγωγή μπορεί επίσης να γίνει με χρήση command line script σε &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. Είναι λιγότερο ευέλικτο αλλά μπορεί να εισάγει τα πάντα με μια κίνηση. Χρειάζεται επίσης τη συνδρομή από κάποιον που έχει shell access στον διακομιστή.

Ο τρόπος που διαχειρίζονται οι εισαγωγές των  off-line μεταφράσεων (ή όχι) εξαρτάται από το wiki σου.

== Επεξεργαστές Gettext ==

Ιδού μερικά εργαλεία που μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε για να επεξεργαστείτε αρχεία off-line.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : Available for all platforms supporting the [http://www.wxwidgets.org/ wxWidgets toolkit], tested on Unix with GTK+ and Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''WARNING:''' make sure you are using  version 1.4.2 or above, otherwise &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; lines are dropped and your work cannot be processed.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>995zhiup68g7di4ocz02fx1vdvphoq8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402849</id>
      <parentid>5402847</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:32:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9711" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Η σελίδα αυτή εξηγεί πως να '''μεταφράσετε off-line'''.
Αν ενδιαφέρεστε γι'αυτό, πιθανότατα γνωρίζετε ήδη τι είναι τα αρχεία [[w:Gettext|Gettext PO]].
Για το λόγο αυτόν, θα συζητήσουμε μόνο πως να τα χρησιμοποιούμε σε ένα wiki με την επέκταση Μετάφραση εδώ.
Αλλιώς, είναι πιθανότερο να ενδιαφέρεστε για τον οδηγό [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|Πως να μεταφράσω]] για online μετάφραση.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Γενικότερα, μπορεί να μη θέλεις να χρησιμοποιήσεις τη διεπαφή του διαδικτύου αν έχεις μια πολύ αργή ή περιορισμένη σύνδεση στο internet ή κάποια  &quot;supadupa&quot; offline που έχεις συνηθίσει ή προτιμάς. Έχε υπόψη όμως, ότι η επέκταση μετάφραση έχει σχεδιαστεί ως συνεργατική διαδικασία. Αυτό σημαίνει ότι δεν πρέπει να διατηρείς τα αρχεία offline για μεγάλο διάστημα και ότι θα πρέπει πάντα να κατεβάζεις ένα καινούργιο αρχείο πριν να αρχίσεις τη μετάφραση. Διαφορετικά μπορεί να υπάρξει σύγκρουση επεξεργασιών με άλλους μεταφραστές που εργάζονται στο wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Εξαγωγή ==

Μπορείτε να κατεβάσετε οποιαδήποτε ομάδα μηνυμάτων ως Gettext PO αρχείο επιλέγοντας ''export for off-line translation'' στο Special:Translate. Κάποια sites μπορεί να έχουν απενεργοποιήσει αυτή την επιλογή. Θα πρέπει να ελέγξετε τότε κάποιους τοπικούς οδηγούς για το πως να αποκτήσετε αυτά τα αρχεία πριν ξεκινήσετε.

{{Note|1=Παρόλο που κάποιες ομάδες μηνυμάτων μπορεί να έχουν μια επιλογή εξαγωγής, που εξάγει τις μεταφράσεις στο αρχικό format αυτής της ομάδας, και το format αυτό θα μπορούσε να είναι Gettext, αυτά δεν είναι τα αρχεία που μπορούν να χρησιμοποιηθούν για μια off-line μετάφραση!}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The files are standard Gettext PO files with some extra information.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Σημαντικά πεδία κεφαλίδας:

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

Σε αυτό το παράδειγμα, &quot;ext-abc&quot; είναι το όνομα της ομάδας μηνυμάτων.
Για μεταφράσιμες σελίδες, η αντίστοιχη ομάδα μηνυμάτων έχει το όνομα &quot;page-&quot;+ το όνομα της ομάδας (π.χ. για τη σελίδα &quot;Example&quot;, η επικεφαλίδα θα περιείχε τη γραμμή &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Παράδειγμα καταχώρησης σε αρχείο po Translate Gettext.
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Εισαγωγή ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Δεν είναι ανάγκη να μεταφράσετε το φάκελο πλήρως. Ανεβάζοντας μερικώς μεταφρασμένες ομάδες μηνυμάτων είναι αρκετό. Υπάρχουν δύο τρόποι για να κάνετε εισαγωγή αυτών των αρχείων. &lt;br /&gt;
Οι χρήστες με κανονικά δικαιώματα μπορούν να χρησιμοποιήσουν το Special:ImportTranslations για να ανεβάσουν και να εισάγουν μεταφράσεις. Η ειδική σελίδα επεξεργάζεται το αρχείο, δείχνει τις αλλαγές και επιτρέπει στο χρήστη να τις εισάγει. Για μεγάλα αρχεία με πολλές αλλαγές η εισαγωγή μπορεί να γίνει σε πολλά βήματα, καθώς ο χρόνος της επεξεργασίας είναι περιορισμένος.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

Η εισαγωγή μπορεί επίσης να γίνει με χρήση command line script σε &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. Είναι λιγότερο ευέλικτο αλλά μπορεί να εισάγει τα πάντα με μια κίνηση. Χρειάζεται επίσης τη συνδρομή από κάποιον που έχει shell access στον διακομιστή.

Ο τρόπος που διαχειρίζονται οι εισαγωγές των  off-line μεταφράσεων (ή όχι) εξαρτάται από το wiki σου.

== Επεξεργαστές Gettext ==

Ιδού μερικά εργαλεία που μπορείτε να χρησιμοποιήσετε για να επεξεργαστείτε αρχεία off-line.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : Available for all platforms supporting the [http://www.wxwidgets.org/ wxWidgets toolkit], tested on Unix with GTK+ and Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''WARNING:''' make sure you are using  version 1.4.2 or above, otherwise &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; lines are dropped and your work cannot be processed.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>g6dhdug29w3rjao2gnxkpqgv60kpv0i</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/fi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>197699</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402415</id>
      <parentid>2022202</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:55:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="308" xml:space="preserve">Tervetuloa ''[[$ve|Visuaalisen muokkaimen]]'' portaaliin. Visuaalinen muokkain (VisualEditor, VE) on uusi tapa muokata Wikipediaa. Sen kehittämisestä vastaa Wikimedia-säätiö. Sen avulla käyttäjät voivat muokata osaamatta wikikoodia. Tavoitteena on tehdä Wikipedian muokkaamisesta entistä helpompaa.</text>
      <sha1>6ceu5gv9mcyy5v5f8liu9b1afrnv3om</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/el</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>197854</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402479</id>
      <parentid>5072267</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:11:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12756" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = Niklas Laxström, Siebrand Mazeland και άλλοι
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Included in Language Extension Bundle&lt;/span&gt;}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=Τεκμηρίωση χρήστη}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = Καθιστά δυνατή τη μετάφραση εντός wiki και την επιμέλεια
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] – ή [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view δοκιμάστε πώς να μεταφράσετε μια σελίδα τώρα]
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

Η επέκταση '''Translate''' κάνει το MediaWiki ένα ισχυρό εργαλείο για μετάφραση κάθε είδους κειμένου. Χρησιμοποιείται ιδιαίτερα για τη μετάφραση λογισμικού και για τη διαχείριση πολύγλωσσων wiki κατά τρόπο κατανοητό.

== Χαρακτηριστικά ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Translate extension has many features specifically targeted to translators, while making back-end integration with actual source code as easy as possible. Meanwhile, everything runs inside [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|MediaWiki]], which allows users an almost endless degree of freedom for communication and self-organization.
&lt;/div&gt;

Στα χαρακτηριστικά περιλαμβάνονται:

* '''Δομημένη μετάφραση σελίδας περιεχομένου wiki.'''
* '''Εντός-wiki τοπικοποίηση και εξαγωγή  των μηνυμάτων επαφής του λογισμικού  (ή σχεδόν τα πάντα).'''
* '''Διαδικτυακή [[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overview/|διεπαφή]] μετάφρασης και επιμέλειας με δυνατότητες εξαγωγής βασισμένης σε gettext και εισαγωγής για μετάφραση εκτός σύνδεσης.'''
* '''Διάφορα βοηθήματα για να κάνουν τη δουλειά των μεταφραστών καλύτερη:'''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** display of translations in globally defined other languages, optionally expanded with user defined languages;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** collaborative editing of documentation of the use and context of messages;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** translation memory and machine translation with external tools (Apertium, Microsoft Translator, Yandex.Translate);
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** display of the latest change in the source message;
&lt;/div&gt;
** προειδοποιήσεις για κοινά λάθη όπως οι παράμετροι που δεν χρησιμοποιούνται.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Pre-made modules for various open source products you can use as an example.
&lt;/div&gt;
**Υποστήριξη διαφόρων μορφών αρχείων όπως:PHP, Ιδιότητες Java, Gettext, YAML και AndroidXml (βλέπε {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} και [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|Υποστήριξη μορφών αρχείων]]).
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* A versatile plug-in system to make it easy to add new projects as a message group.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Διάφορα στατιστικά:
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** translation completion percentages for all message groups in all supported languages;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** translation completion percentages in all supported languages for any supported message group;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** tool for making activity graphs for spans of time.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Can display either number of edits or active users daily or hourly and includes many filters;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** cloud overview of active languages and translators.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translate extension, due to its large user base, is confirmed to be compatible with all reasonably recent browsers, except some minor (style) glitches which are quickly fixed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;''Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality'': this presentation shows how the Translate extension can make a wiki truly multilingual, based on the experience of KDE UserBase wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|Niklas Laxström, ''Μεταφράζοντας κατά τον τρόπο του wiki: Απλά, γρήγορα, διασκεδαστικά'', Wikimania 2012 (διαφάνειες διαθέσιμες).
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Υποστήριξη και τεκμηρίωση ==

* Δείτε [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|Εγκατάσταση]]
* Δείτε [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|Παραμετροποίηση]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|User documentation]] — includes tutorials
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|Getting started with Translate extension development]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Live support at #translatewiki IRC channel at Libera Chat (best times are at European days and evenings)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Please report all issues and feature requests in the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate issue tracker]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translate extension was originally developed by [[User:Nikerabbit]]; many other users, like [[User:Raymond]], [[User:SPQRobin]] and the Wikimedia Language team, have contributed to its code and documentation. It is maintained by [[User:Nikerabbit]] and [[User:Siebrand]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Prominent users of the Translate extension ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* https://translatewiki.net — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The biggest wiki-based site and community for translation of the interface of open source software.&lt;/span&gt;
* https://userbase.kde.org — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Documentation wiki for the KDE project which uses the page translation feature extensively.&lt;/span&gt;
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Translates wiki content and uses the group states feature. Translation and translation review is enabled almost for all users of the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See more at [[w:translatewiki.net#Notable uses|notable uses of translatewiki.net on Wikipedia]].
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Μαρτυρίες ===

Tom Hutchison του Joomla:
{{quotation|1=
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Translate extension allows for connection to a translation service and can auto fill the translation for you. At the same time a translator can make adjustments so you're not creating lots of pages with inaccurate translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That's ok if they are on different continents.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That is actually a plus because work is getting done 24 hours a day.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What they need is a support group chat for each other.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They would all be able to read English if they are translating right? Teach a few simple wiki markup such as links and what to do with categories.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then they help others who in turn help others.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We have over 40 in a chat who help each other and have fun at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And they were all scared of the wiki but couldn't believe how easy it was once they started.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are actually waiting on me for more translations to do because I can't keep up with them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;I know there is only 1 translating this language or that language.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We have that too.&lt;/span&gt;
Κάποιο άτομο κάνει τα Σουαχίλι, ενώ κάποιο άλλο εργάζεται στα Ιαπωνικά.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, you mark pages for translation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You control whether to include templates or exclude variables in template calls.&lt;/span&gt;
}}


== Δείτε επίσης ==
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – μια επέκταση για τη διευκόλυνση της επικοινωνίας με τους μεταφραστές.

Να μην συγχέεται με:

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for one-off translation of wiki pages from one language to another.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Abstract Wikipedia]] for translation.&lt;/span&gt;

== Πώς να συνεισφέρετε ==

* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all Μετάφραση αυτής της επέκτασης στο translatewiki.net]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|Open bugs and feature requests]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|More open bugs and feature requests at translatewiki.net]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Επιμέλεια και μετάφραση της τεκμηρίωσης της επέκτασης Μετάφραση]]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>3pj48c96qe3w1ldgo5fpdixmcq0pdt4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/ta</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>199348</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402790</id>
      <parentid>5347042</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:53:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="104385" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;நீங்கள் கட்டுரையை தொகுக்காது காண்திரை தொகுப்பானை முயல எண்ணினால் [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} இந்தப் பக்கத்தை] தொகுத்துப் பழகலாம்.&lt;/span&gt; அந்தப் பக்கத்தில் காண்திரை தொகுப்பானை பயன்படுத்த உங்களுக்கு பதிகை கணக்கு வேண்டியதில்லை.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== காண்திரை தொகுப்பான் திறக்கிறது. ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| காண்திரை தொகுப்பானால் பக்கத்தைத் தொகுக்க, பக்கத்தின் தலைப்பிலுள்ள &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; தத்தலை சொடுக்கவும்.

தொகுக்கும்பொருட்டு பக்கம் திறக்கப்பட சில வினாடிகள் ஆகலாம்; பக்கம் நீளமானதாக இருந்தால் நீண்ட நேரம் எடுக்கும்.

&quot;{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}&quot; தத்தலை சொடுக்கினால் பழைய விக்கியுரை மூல தொகுப்பான் திறக்கும்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| ஒவ்வொரு பத்திக்கும் தலைப்பிலுள்ள &quot;{{int|editsection}}&quot; இணைப்பை சொடுக்கியும் காண்திரை தொகுப்பானைத் திறக்கலாம்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== தொடங்குதல்: காண்திரை தொகுப்பானின் கருவிப்பட்டை ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=காண்திரை தொகுப்பானின் கருவிப்பட்டையின் திரைக்காட்சி]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | தொகுத்தலை துவக்கும்போது காண்திரை தொகுப்பானின் கருவிப்பட்டை திரையின் மேற்பகுதியில் தோன்றுகின்றது. இதில் ஏற்கெனவே அறிமுகமான சில சின்னங்கள் உள்ளன:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| உங்களது மாற்றங்களை '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}'''க்கவும் '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}'''விக்கவும் பயன்படுகின்றன.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''பத்தி''' கீழ்விரிப்பட்டி: பத்தி வடிவமைப்பை மாற்ற உதவுகின்றது.  பத்தியின் வடிவமைப்பை மாற்ற பத்தியின் மீது  திரைக்குறியை வைத்துக் கொண்டு இந்த விரிப்பட்டியிலிருந்து ஒரு தேர்வை தெரிந்தெடுக்கவும் (உரையை எடுப்பாய்க் காட்டத் தேவையில்லை). பகுதித் தலைப்புகள்  &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}&quot; எனவும் துணைப்பகுதிகள் &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}&quot;, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}&quot;, எனவும் வடிவமைக்கப்படுகின்றன. உரையை வழமையாக வடிவமைக்க &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}&quot;.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''வடிவூட்டுதல்:''' &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; யைச் சொடுக்கினால் கீழ்விரிப்பட்டி விரியும். 
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}&quot; உருப்படி ('''B''') தெரிந்தெடுத்த உரையை தடிமனாக்குகின்றது.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}&quot; உருப்படி (''I'') தெரிந்தெடுத்த உரையை சாய்வாக்குகின்றது.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}&quot; உருப்படி (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) தெரிந்தெடுத்த உரையை சூழ்ந்துள்ள உரையை விட சிறிய எழுத்துருவிலும் அவற்றை விட சற்றே உயர்ந்தும் அமைக்கின்றது.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}&quot; உருப்படி (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) தெரிந்தெடுத்த உரையை சூழ்ந்துள்ள உரையை விட சிறிய எழுத்துருவிலும் அவற்றை விட சற்றே தாழ்ந்தும் அமைக்கின்றது.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}&quot; உருப்படி (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) தெரிந்தெடுத்த உரையினூடே தடித்தக் கோட்டை இடுகின்றது.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}&quot; உருப்படி (சோடியான நெளி அடைப்புகள்: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) தெரிந்தெடுத்த உரையின் எழுத்துருவை சீரான இடைவெளி எழுத்துருவாக மாற்றுகின்றது; இதனால் சூழ்ந்துள்ள (விகிதசார் இடைவெளி எழுத்துருவிலுள்ள) உரையிலிருந்து தனித்துக் காட்டுகின்றது.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}&quot; உருப்படி (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) தெரிந்தெடுக்கப்பட்ட உரையின் அடியில் தடித்தக் கோடிடுகின்றது.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}&quot; உருப்படி (文A) தெரிந்தெடுத்த உரையின் மொழியைக் குறிப்பிடவும் (காட்டாக, இடாய்ச்சு) படிக்கும் திசையைக் குறிப்பிடவும் (காட்டாக, வலதிலிருந்து -இடது) .
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}&quot; எனப்படும்   ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]) இறுதி உருப்படி தெரிந்தெடுக்கப்பட்ட உரையிலுள்ள அனைத்து வடிவூட்டல்களையும், இணைப்புகள் உட்பட, நீக்குகின்றது.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have not selected any text, then when you press the &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; to open the menu, and then select an item, that formatting will apply to the text that you start typing, from wherever your cursor is located.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''இணைப்புக் கருவி:''' சங்கிலிச் சின்னம்  [[#Editing links|இணைப்புக் கருவியாகும்]]. இதனைச் சொடுக்கினால்  (பொதுவாக ஏதேனும் உரையைத் தேர்ந்தெடுத்த பிறகு) [[#Editing links|இணைப்பு உரையாடல் பெட்டியைத்]] திறக்கும்.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} விரிபட்டி:'''  &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; விரிபட்டி உரையினூடே குறிப்புக்கள் இடுவதற்குப் பயன்படுகின்றது (இவை &quot;அடிக்குறிப்பு&quot; அல்லது &quot;மேற்சான்று&quot; எனப்படும்). அனைத்து விக்கித் திட்டங்களிலும் இந்த விரிபட்டியைக் கொண்டு  &quot;$basic&quot; வடிவூட்டுதலுக்கு வகை செய்யப்பட்டுள்ளது; குறிப்புக்களை &quot;$re-use&quot; செய்யவும் வழி செய்யப்பட்டுள்ளது. தவிரவும் உங்கள் விக்கியில் உள்ளக மேற்சான்று வார்ப்புருக்கள் செயலாக்கப்பட்டிருந்தால் அவற்றிற்கும் இது அணுக்கம் வழங்குகின்றது.&lt;/span&gt;

(குறிப்பிட்ட விக்கியில் {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} விரிபட்டிக்கு உள்ளக மேற்சான்று வார்ப்புருக்களை சேர்ப்பதற்கான அறிவுரைகள் {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}} இங்குள்ளன.)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} ஆழி:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;citoid எனப்படும் சேவை உங்கள் விக்கியில்  செயலாக்கப்பட்டிருந்தால், {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} விரிபட்டிக்கு மாறாக {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} என்ற ஆழி தென்படும்.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

citoid சேவை மேற்கோள் வார்ப்புருக்களை தானாகவே நிரப்ப முயலும்.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''பட்டியல்களும் தள்ளி வைத்தலும்:''' முதலிரு உருப்படிகள் கொண்டு உரையை  &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}&quot; அல்லது a &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}&quot;யில் அமைக்க முடியும் . கடைசி இரண்டு உருப்படிகள் மூலம் பட்டியல் உருப்படிகளைத் தள்ளி வைப்பதை கூட்டவோ குறைக்கவோ முடியும்.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:'''  &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; விரிபட்டி சில திட்டங்களில் வேறாக இருக்கலாம். காணக்கூடிய  '''அனைத்துத்''' தேர்வுகளின் பட்டியல்  கீழே  தரப்பட்டுள்ளது.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; சின்னம் (மலைகளின் படம்)  [[#Editing images and other media files|ஊடக உரையாடற் பெட்டியைத்]] திறக்கின்றது.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot; சின்னம் (புதிர் துண்டு) [[#Editing templates|வார்ப்புருக்களை தொகுக்க]] உதவுகின்றது.
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;Table&quot; item allows you to insert a table.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;&quot;{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}&quot; சின்னம் (பேச்சுக் குமிழ்) வாசகர்களுக்கு புலப்படாத கருத்துரைகளை பதிக்க உதவுகின்றது; இந்தக் கருத்துரைகள் தொகுக்கும் போது மட்டுமே புலனாகும். இவை ஆச்சரியக் குறி சின்னம் மூலமாக குறிக்கப்படுகின்றன.&lt;/span&gt;
* &quot;{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}&quot; சின்னம் (an [[:w:ankh|அங்க்]] சின்னம் - ☥) பழங்கால எகிப்திய சித்திர வடிவ எழுத்துக்களை சேர்க்க உதவுகின்றது. (கீழே பார்க்கவும்.)
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;Code block&quot; item allows you to insert code.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;Musical notation&quot; item allows you to insert a musical notation.&lt;/span&gt;
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; சின்னம் (படத்தொகுதி) கட்டுரைப் பக்கத்தில் ஒளிப்படத் தொகுப்பை இணைக்க உதவுகின்றன.
* &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; சின்னம் (Σ)  [[#Editing mathematical formulae|கணித சூத்திரச் செருகு உரையாடற் பெட்டியைத்]]திறக்கின்றது.
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;Graph&quot; item allows you to insert a graph.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}&quot; item allows you to insert a signature that you use on the project.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will be greyed out (not selectable) when you are editing a type of page (a &quot;namespace&quot;), such as an article, where signatures should not be inserted.&lt;/span&gt;
* &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; சின்னம் (மூன்று நூல்கள்) வாசகருக்கு  மேற்கோள்கள் காட்டப்பட வேண்டிய இடத்தை நீங்கள் குறிப்பிடும் உரையாடற் பெட்டியைத் திறக்கின்றது; பொதுவாக இது ஒவ்வொரு பக்கத்திற்கும் ஒருமுறை செய்தால் போதுமானது.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''சிறப்புக் குறியீடு சேர்க்கை:''' &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; விரிபட்டியிலுள்ள &quot;{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}&quot; (Ω) சின்னம் சொடுக்கப்படும்போது, பல சிறப்பு வரியுருக்களைக் காட்டும் உரையாடற்பெட்டி திறக்கும்; இங்கு சொடுக்கினால் இதிலிருந்து குறிப்பிட்ட வரியுருவை திரைக்குறியுள்ள இடத்தில் செருக முடியும். இந்த சிறப்பு குறியீடுகளில் சில சீர்தர சின்னங்கள், அழுத்தக் குறிகள், கணிதச் சின்னங்கள் அடங்கியுள்ளன.&lt;/span&gt; (இந்தப் பட்டியலை உள்ளகத் தேவைக்கேற்ப அமைத்துக் கொள்ளலாம். அறிவுரைகளுக்கு {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} காண்க.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| '''அறிவிப்புக்களைத் தொகு''' ஆழி பக்கத்திற்கான ஏதேனும் அறிவிப்புக்களை காட்டுகின்றது.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''{{int|visualeditor-mweditmode-tooltip}}'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an ''{{int|visualeditor-meta-tool}}'' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:&lt;/span&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-templatesused-tool}}''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The tabs of the {{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-title}} dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the items {{int|visualeditor-changedir-tool-ltr}} or {{int|visualeditor-changedir-tool-rtl}} and the item '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Find and replace|{{int|visualeditor-find-and-replace-title}}]]''', which opens a bar, where you can insert words or regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''$switch''' ஆழி '''$save''' ஆழிக்கு அடுத்துள்ளது. இதன் மூலம் விக்கியுரை தொகுப்பானுக்கு மாறிக் கொள்ள முடியும்.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;மாற்றங்களைச் சேமிக்க&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| உங்கள் திருத்தங்களை தொகுத்து முடித்த பிறகு, கருவிப்பட்டையிலுள்ள நீல வண்ண &quot;{{int|publishchanges}}&quot; ஆழியை சொடுக்கவும். நீங்கள் மாற்றங்கள் எதுவும் செய்திராவிட்டால் இந்த ஆழி செயலற்று இருக்கும் (சாம்பல் வண்ணமாயிருக்கும்). &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To cancel all your editing changes, close your browser window, or press the &quot;{{int|vector-view-view}}&quot; tab above the edit toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;பச்சை வண்ண &quot;{{int|publishchanges-start}}&quot; ஆழியை அழுத்தினால் உரையாடற் பெட்டி திறக்கும். இதில் உங்கள் செயற்பாடு குறித்த சிறு குறிப்பை வழங்கலாம்; உங்கள் தொகுப்பு சிறியது எனக் குறிப்பிடலாம்;  உங்கள் $watchlistக்கு பக்கத்தைச் சேர்க்கலாம். இந்த தொகுப்புச் சுருக்கப் பெட்டி  விக்கியுரை தொகுப்பானிலுள்ள {{int|summary}} புலத்திற்கு இணையானது.&lt;/span&gt;

உங்கள் மாற்றங்களை சேமிப்பதற்கு முன்னால், &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; ஆழியைப் பயன்படுத்தி அவை எதிர்பார்த்தபடி வந்துள்ளனவா என மீளாய்வு செய்யலாம். இது விக்கியுரை தொகுப்பானிலுள்ள &quot;{{int|showdiff}}&quot; ஆழிக்கு இணையானது.

&quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}&quot; ஆழி நீங்கள் தொகுத்துக் கொண்டிருக்கும் பக்கத்திற்கு திரும்ப எடுத்துச் செல்கின்றது. நீங்கள் செய்த அனைத்து மாற்றங்களையும் பின்னர் சேமிக்க முடியும்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== இணைப்புகளைத் தொகுக்க ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| கருவிப்பட்டையிலுள்ள &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; சின்னம் (சங்கிலிக் குண்டு) மூலம் இணைப்புகளை ஏற்படுத்தலாம்; அல்லது குறுவழி விசைகளைப் {{key press|Ctrl|K}} (அல்லது மாக்கில் {{Key press|Command|K}}) பயன்படுத்தியும் ஏற்படுத்தலாம்.

உரையைத் தேர்ந்தெடுத்து (சிறப்பித்து) பின்னர் &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; ஆழியை அழுத்தினால், இணைப்பை உருவாக்க அந்த உரை  பயன்படுத்தப்படும். ஒரு சொல்லிற்கு இணைப்புத் தர வேண்டியிருந்தால் அந்த சொல்லைத் தேர்ந்தெடுக்கலாம் அல்லது அச்சொல்லினுள் எங்காவது  திரைக்குறியை வைக்கலாம்.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| நீங்கள் ஆழியைப் பயன்படுத்தினாலோ குறுவழி விசையைப் பயன்படுத்தினாலோ உரையாடற் பெட்டி ஒன்று விரியும்; இதில் இணைப்பை தட்டச்சலாம்.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;காண்திரை தொகுப்பான் '''உள்ளிணைப்புகளை''' இணைக்க உதவ முயலும்; பொருத்தமான கட்டுரைகளை கீழே காட்டும்.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;நீங்கள் இணைப்பைத் தட்டச்சிட்ட பிறகு அல்லது பொருத்தமான இணைப்பைத் தெரிந்தெடுத்த பிறகு இணைப்பு உருவாக்க {{key press|Enter}} ஆழியை அல்லது  &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; ஆழியை அழுத்தவும். உடனேயே உங்கள் இணைப்பு கட்டுரைப் பக்கத்தில் தோன்றும்; ஆனால் மற்ற மாற்றங்களைப் போலவே இதுவும் முழு பக்கத்தையும் சேமிக்கும் போதுதான் சேமிக்கப்படும்.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| மற்றொரு வலைத்தளத்திலிருக்கும் இணையப் பக்கத்திற்கு இணைப்புத் தரவும் இதே செயல்முறையைப் பின்பற்றவும்: &quot;{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}&quot; தத்தலைத் தேர்ந்தெடுத்து, பெட்டியில் அதன் உரலியை இடவும்.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| விவரச் சொல் இல்லாத வெளி வலைத்தள இணைப்புகள் இவ்வாறு தோன்றும்: [http://example.com]. ஏதாவது உரைச்சொல்லின் வெளியே (காட்டாக, இடைவெளியை அடுத்து) திரைக்குறியை வைத்துக் கொண்டு இந்த இணைப்பை ஏற்படுத்தலாம். இணைப்புக் கருவியை ஆழியை சொடுக்குவதன் மூலமோ குறுவழி விசைகளை பயன்படுத்தியோ திறக்கலாம். உரலியை பெட்டியில் இட்டு  &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; ஆழியை அழுத்தினால் இணைப்பு உருவாகும்.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| ஓர் இணைப்பை மாற்றவோ நீக்கவோ  அந்த இணைப்பிற்கான உரையில் சொடுக்குக, பின்னர்  அதனருகே தோன்றும் &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; சின்னத்தை  அழுத்துக.  தொகுப்பதற்கான உரையாடற் பெட்டி  தோன்றும். ({{key press|Ctrl|K}} விசைபலகை குறுவழியைக் கொண்டும் உரையாடற் பெட்டியை பெறலாம்.) இணைப்பைத் தேர்ந்தெடுக்கும்போது அது நீல வண்ண பட்டையில் தோன்றும்.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;இணைப்புத் தொகுப்பு உரையாடற் பெட்டியில் இணைப்பில் மாற்றங்களை ஏற்படுத்தலாம். இணைப்பை ஒரேயடியாக நீக்க, பெட்டியின் கீழ் இடது மூலையிலுள்ள &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; ஆழியை அழுத்த வேண்டும்.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;இணைப்புத் தரும் வலைத்தளத்தை வேறொரு சாளரத்தில் திறக்க இணைப்பை சொடுக்க வேண்டும்.  (வெளியிணைப்பு சரியாக வேலை செய்கிறதா எனப் பார்க்க இவ்வாறு செய்யலாம்.)&lt;/span&gt;

இணைப்பிற்கான சொல்லிலிருந்து (அல்லது இணைப்பைக் குறிக்கும் சொற்றொடர்)  வெளியேற அல்லது இந்த இணைப்பிற்குப் பிறகு வேறேதேனும் எழுத விரும்பினால் {{Key press|→}} அழுத்துக:
* ஒருமுறை அழுத்தினால் இணைப்புத் தொகுப்பு உரையாடற்பெட்டியிலிருந்து வெளியேறி திரைக்குறியை இணைக்கப்பட்ட சொல்லின் முடிவில் வைக்கும் (நீலப் பட்டை, இந்த அங்கத்தை தொகுக்க)
* இருமுறை அழுத்தினால் திரைக்குறியை இணைப்புச் சொல்லின் இறுதியில் வைக்கும்; உங்கள் அடுத்த உரையை எழுத தயாரான நிலையில் இருக்கும்.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:&lt;/span&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the link label directly without deleting it, put the cursor within that link label, use the backspace and delete keys (no more than necessary), and a narrow blue link area will remain there.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== உசாத்துணைகளைத் தொகுக்க ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|மேற்கோள் வார்ப்புருக்களைப் பயன்படுத்த உதவி]] அல்லது [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|சைட்டாய்டின் citoid's {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} ஆழியைப் பயன்படுத்த உதவி]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Determining which system is in place ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| உங்கள் விக்கி மூன்று அடிக்குறிப்பு அமைப்புகளில் ஒன்றைப் பின்பற்றலாம். &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;வலதுபுறம் காட்டப்பட்டுள்ளது மிகவும் எளிதானதாகும்;  &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; தெரிவுப்பட்டியில் எந்த மேற்கோள் வார்ப்புருவும் இருக்காது.&lt;/span&gt; உங்கள் விக்கியில் இந்த அமைப்பு பின்பற்றப்பட்டிருந்தால்  அடிக்குறிப்புகள் குறித்து நீங்கள் அறிந்து கொள்ள வேண்டிய அனைத்தும் இந்தப் பக்கத்தில் உள்ளன.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;இரண்டாவது அமைப்பில் முன்பு போலவே  &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; தெரிவுபட்டி இருக்கும்; ஆனால் இதில் கூடுதலாக விரைவான அணுக்கத்திற்காக பல புகழ்பெற்ற மேற்கோள் வார்ப்புருக்கள் இடப்பட்டிருக்கும்.&lt;/span&gt; உங்கள் விக்கி இந்த அமைப்பை பின்பற்றினால், இவற்றைக் குறித்த மேல் விவரங்களுக்கு {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}} பார்க்கவும்.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the third system, you again start by pressing the {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} button.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then a dialog box opens, which includes an automatic citation process using the citoid service.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your wiki uses this system, you will find more details at {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள மேற்கோளைத் திருத்த ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள மேற்கோளைத் திருத்த, உரையினூடே இது தோன்றும் இடத்தில் சொடுக்குக (பொதுவாக அடைப்புக்குள்ளான எண்);  &quot;$ref&quot; சின்னத்தைக் காண்பீர்கள் (நூற்குறி) அல்லது இந்த மேற்கோளை உருவாக்க பயன்படுத்திய வார்ப்புருவின் சின்னம் (மற்றும் பெயர்) காண்பீர்கள். ஏதென்றாலும்  &quot;Edit&quot; ஆழியை சொடுக்கினால் மேற்கோளைத் தொகுக்க உரையாடற் பெட்டி திறக்கும்.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For the &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-reference-title}}&quot; icon, pressing &quot;{{int|visualeditor-contextitemwidget-label-secondary}}&quot; opens the reference dialog. To start changing the reference information, press on it.&lt;/span&gt;

பல விக்கிகளும் மேற்கோள்களை வடிவூட்ட  வார்ப்புருக்களைப் பயன்படுத்துகின்றன. தெரிந்தெடுக்கப்பட்ட மேற்கோள் இத்தகைய வார்ப்புருவால் உருவாக்கப்பட்டிருந்தால் திரைக்குறியை மேற்கோள் மீது கொண்டு செல்லும்போது அனைத்துத் தகவல்களும் அழுந்த காட்டப்படும்.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
வார்ப்புரு பயன்படுத்தப்பட்டிருந்து நீஙள் மேற்கோள் மீது சொடுக்கினால், சில தகவல்களுடன் $template சின்னம் (புதிர் துண்டு) தோன்றும்.  &quot;தொகு&quot; ஆழியை அழுத்தினால் வார்ப்புரு சிறு தொகுப்பான் உரையாடற்பெட்டியில் வார்ப்புருவின் உள்ளடக்கத்தை தொகுக்கலாம்.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;மேற்கோளை சொடுகும்போது மேற்கோள்களுக்கான சீர்தர வார்ப்புரு சின்னம் தோன்றினால்  (வலது புறம் எடுத்துக்காட்டு உள்ளது),  &quot;தொகு&quot;வை அழுத்தினால் வார்ப்புரு சிறுதொகுப்பான் உரையாடற் பெட்டி திறக்கும்.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;வார்ப்புரு சிறுதொகுப்பான் உரையாடற்பெட்டியினுள் தகவல் வகைகளை சேர்க்கலாம் அல்லது நீக்கலாம்; அல்லது தற்போதைய உள்ளடக்கத்தை மாற்றலாம். உரையுள்ள புலங்கள் (வார்ப்புரு கூறளவுகள்) மட்டுமே துவக்கத்தில் காட்டப்படும்.  புலங்களைச் சேர்க்கசிறு தொகுப்பானின் கீழேயுள்ள  &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; மீது சொடுக்குக.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| தொகுத்தல் முடிந்த பின்னர் &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;யைச் சொடுக்குக. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள மேற்கோளை மீளவும் பயன்படுத்த ===
|-
| உங்களுரைக்குச் சான்றாக அளிக்கக் கூடிய மேற்கோள் ஏற்கெனவே கட்டுரைப் பக்கத்தில் இருந்தால் ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள மேற்கோளை மீளவும் பயன்படுத்துவதைத் தேர்ந்தெடுக்கலாம்.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள மேற்கோளை மீண்டும் பயன்படுத்த திரைக்குறியை மேற்கோளிட வேண்டிய உரையின் நடுவில் வைத்துக் கொண்டு &quot;$cite&quot; விரிபட்டியில் &quot;Re-use reference&quot; உருப்படியைத் தேர்ந்தெடுக்கவும் .
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(குறிப்பு: உங்கள் விக்கியில் மேலே விவரித்த மூன்றாம் வகை அடிக்குறிப்பு அமைப்பு  செயற்பாட்டில் இருந்தால், &quot;$cite&quot; விரிபட்டிக்குப் பதிலாக &quot;மீளவும்-பயன்படுத்து&quot; தத்தல், உரையாடற்பெட்டியில் இருக்கும்.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;$reference-title உரையாடற்பெட்டியில், மீளவும் பயன்படுத்தபட விரும்பும் மேற்கோள்களை தேர்ந்தெடுங்கள். பல மேற்கோள்கள் இருந்தால் (&quot;$input&quot; எனப் பெயரிடப்பட்டுள்ள) தேடுதல் பெட்டியில் குறிப்பிட்ட  தேடுசொல்லிட்டு தேவையான  மேற்கோள்களை பட்டியலிட வைக்கலாம்.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== புதிய மேற்கொளை சேர்ப்பது எப்படி ? ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;&quot;$cite&quot; விரிபட்டி கொண்டு மேற்கோளை சேர்க்க, உரையில் தேவைப்படும் இடத்தில் திரைக்குறியை வைக்கவும். பிறகு பொருத்தமான மேற்கோள் வகையைத் தேர்ந்தெடுக்கவும்.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== &quot;மேற்கோள்&quot; விருப்பத்தேர்வைப் பயன்படுத்துதல் ====
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;&quot;$basic&quot; உருப்படியை தேர்ந்தெடுத்தால் காட்டப்படும் திரைக்காட்சி இங்குள்ளது.&lt;/span&gt;  மேற்கோள் தொகுப்பானில் உங்கள் மேற்கோளை, வடிவூட்டலுடன், இடவும்.

இந்த மேற்கோள் ஏதேனும் குழுவில் சேர்க்கலாம்; பொதுவாக இது வெறுமையாகவே விடப்படும். (இந்த தேர்கை மேற்கோள்களை {{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}} கருவி கொண்டு குழுக்களாக காட்ட பயன்படுத்தப்படுகின்றது.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| மேற்கோள் உரையாடற்பெட்டியில் ஏதேனும் மேற்கோள் வார்ப்புருவையோ அல்லது வேறு வார்ப்புருவையோ புதிய மேற்கோளில் சேர்க்க விரும்பினால் மேற்கோள்  தொகுப்பானிற்குள்ளேயே உள்ள {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} கருவிப்பட்டையிலிருந்து {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} சின்னத்தை (புதிர் துண்டு) தேர்ந்தெடுக்கவும்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| பிறகு, நீங்கள் விரும்பும் வார்ப்புரு உள்ளதா எனப் பாருங்கள்; இருந்தால் மற்ற வார்ப்புருக்களைப் போலவே அதனை சேர்க்கவும்  தொகுக்கவும் செய்யலாம்.  (வார்ப்புருக்களைக் குறித்து மேலும் தகவல் தேவைப்பட்டால் [[#Editing templates|வார்ப்புருக்களைத் தொகுத்தல்]] பகுதியைக் காண்க.)

புதிய வார்ப்புருவை தொகுத்து முடித்த பின்னர் &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; சொடுக்கி மேற்கோள் தொகுப்பானுக்குத் திரும்பலாம்; மீண்டும் &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; சொடுக்கி தொகுத்துக் கொண்டிருக்கும் கட்டுரைக்குத் திரும்பலாம்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| அந்தப் பக்கத்திற்கு ஏற்கெனவே மேற்கோள்கள் பட்டியல் இல்லாதிருந்தால் (காட்டாக, பக்கத்தின் முதல் மேற்கோளை சேர்க்கும் போது), மேற்கோள்களும் அவற்றின் உரைகளும் பட்டியலாக வாசகருக்கு எங்கு காட்டப்படும் என்பதை குறிப்பிடவேண்டும்.

மேற்கோள் பட்டியல் காட்டப்பட வேண்டிய இடத்தில் (பொதுவாக இது பக்கத்தின் கடைசியில் இருக்கும்) திரைக்குறியை வைத்துக் கொண்டு  &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; தேர்வுப்பட்டியைத் திறந்து &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; சின்னத்தை (மூன்று நூல்கள்) அழுத்தவும்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| மேற்கோள்களை பல குழுக்களாகப் பயன்படுத்துவதாக இருந்தால், (இது மிகவும் அரிது), இந்த உரையாடற்பெட்டியில் அந்த குழுவைக் குறிப்பிடலாம். நீங்கள் குறிப்பிட இடத்தில் அந்தக் குழுவைச் சேர்ந்த மேற்கோள்கள் மட்டுமே காட்டப்படும்.

மேற்கோள் பட்டியல் உரையாடற்பெட்டியில் இறுதி செயல் &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; சொடுக்குவதுதான்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== சீர்தர மேற்கோள் வார்ப்புருக்களைப் பயன்படுத்துதல் ====
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;உங்கள் மொழி விக்கி &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; தேர்வுப்பட்டியில் கூடுதலாக மேற்கோள் வார்ப்புருக்களை சேர்த்திருக்கலாம். அவ்வாறெனில், உங்கள் விக்கியில் மிகவும் பயன்படுத்தப்படும் மேற்கோள் வார்ப்புருவிற்கு எளிதான அணுக்கம் வழங்குகின்றது.&lt;/span&gt; (உங்கள் மொழி விக்கியில் கூடுதல் மேற்சான்று வார்ப்புருக்களை இணைப்பதற்கான அறிவுரைகள் {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &quot;Cite book&quot; போன்ற வார்ப்புருச் சின்னத்தைச் சொடுக்கும்போது அந்த வார்ப்புருவிற்கான வார்ப்புரு குறு-தொகுப்பான் தோன்றுகின்றது. இதில் முக்கியமானத் தகவல்கள்  உடுக்குறி கொண்டு  குறிப்பிடப்படுகின்றன. பெரும்பான்மையான பொதுப் புலங்கள் காட்டப்பட்டாலும் அனைத்தையும் நிரப்ப வேண்டியதில்லை.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;கூடுதல்  கூறளவுகளைச் சேர்க்க, வார்ப்புரு குறு-தொகுப்பானில் கீழே சென்று  &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot; தேர்வை சொடுக்கவும்.&lt;/span&gt;

தொகுத்தல் முடிந்த பின்னர் &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot;யைச் சொடுக்குக.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== படிமங்களையும் பிற ஊடகக் கோப்புகளையும் தொகுத்தல் ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== படிமங்களைத் தொகுத்தல் ===
|-
| கட்டுரைப் பக்கத்தில் புதிய படிமம்மதை (அல்லது பிறவகை ஊடகக் கோப்பு) சேர்க்க, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; தேர்வுப் பட்டையில் &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; சின்னத்தை (மலைகள் உள்ள படம்) சொடுக்கவும். திரைக்குறி உள்ள இடத்தில் படிமம் சேர்க்கப்படும்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; சின்னத்தை சொடுக்கினால் தோன்றும் உரையாடற்பெட்டி தானாகவே விக்கிமீடியா பொதுவகத்திலும் உங்கள் விக்கியிலும் உள்ள கட்டுரைப் பக்கத்திற்கு தொடர்புடைய ஊடகக் கோப்புகளைத்  தேடும்.

உரையாடற்பெட்டியின் தேடுதல் பெட்டியில் உள்ள உரையை மாற்றுவதன் மூலம்  தேடுதலை மாற்றலாம்.

கோப்பொன்றைத்  தேர்வுசெய்ய, தேவைப்படும் படிமத்தின் வில்லைப்படத்தில் சொடுக்குக.

இது அப்படிமத்தை நீங்கள் தொகுக்கும் பக்கத்தில் சேர்க்கும்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| நீங்கள் தேர்ந்தெடுத்த படிமம் சேர்க்கப்பட்டபிறகு, மற்றுமொரு உரையாடற்பெட்டி தோன்றும். இதில் படிமத்திற்கான தலைப்பை சேர்க்கவும் தொகுக்கவும் இயலும். தலைப்பிற்கு வடிவூட்டவும் இணைப்புகள் தரவும் முடியும்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| மேலும் ஊடக உரையாற்பெட்டியில், திரைப் படிப்பான்களை பயன்படுத்துவோருக்கும் படிமக் காட்சிகளை விலக்கியுள்ளோருக்கும் காட்டுவதற்காக,  மாற்று தலைப்புரைகளை வழங்கவும் வழி உள்ளது.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| படிமத்திற்கு மேலும் பல கூறளவுகளை &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot; சாளரத்தில் அமைக்கலாம். இவற்றில் படிமத்தின் ஒழுங்கமைப்பு, வகை, அளவு ஆகியவை அடங்கும்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| முடிந்தவுடன் &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; சொடுக்கி உரையாடற்பெட்டியை மூடி தொகுப்புப் பக்கத்திற்குத் திரும்பலாம்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| படிமத்தைச் சொடுக்கி பின்னர் படிமத்தின் கீழே தோன்றும் &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; சின்னத்தைச் சொடுக்கினால் ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள படிமத்திற்குத் தலைப்பை இடலாம், தொகுக்கலாம் அல்லது  மற்ற அமைப்புக்களை மாற்றலாம்.

ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள படிமத்தை சொடுக்கி அளவுமாற்று சின்னத்தை (கீழ் மூலைகளில், ஒன்று அல்லது இரண்டிலும், உள்ள இருதலையுள்ள அம்பு) நகர்த்தி அளவை மாற்றலாம்.

தவிரவும் படிமமொன்றை  பக்கத்தின் மேற்பகுதிக்கோ கீழ்ப்பகுதிக்கோ &quot;இழுத்து விடலாம்&quot;.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== படிமங்களை தரவேற்றம் செய்வது எப்படி ? ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ஊடக உரையாடற்பெட்டியில் உள்ள தத்தல் மூலம் படிமங்களை தரவேற்றலாம்.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &quot;மேலேற்று&quot; தத்தலைச் சொடுக்கி உங்கள் கணினியிலிருந்து படிமம் ஒன்றைத் தேர்ந்தெடுக்கவும். படிமக் கோப்பின் பெயரை தட்டச்சிடவும் செய்யலாம்; அல்லது படிமம் ஒன்றை இழுத்துவந்து பெட்டியிலிடலாம். &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| மக்கள் எளிதாக கண்டறிய படிமத்தை குறித்த விவரணமும் பொருத்தமான பகுப்பில் இணைத்தலும் வேண்டும்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| முடித்ததும் கட்டுரைப் பக்கத்தில் உங்கள் படிமம் சேர்க்கப்பட்டிருக்கும்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== ஊடகத் தொகுதிகளை தொகுத்தல் ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| புதிய படிமையை (படத்தொகுப்பு) சேர்க்க, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; பட்டையில்  &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; சின்னத்தை (படிமங்களின் தொகுப்பு)  சொடுக்கவும். (கருவிப்பட்டையில் இந்தச் சின்னம் தெரியாவிட்டால் இந்த சிறப்பியல்பை காண்திரை தொகுப்பானில் செயலாக்குவதை உங்கள் விக்கி சமூகம் தாமதப்படுத்தியிருக்கலாம்.) 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| காண்திரை தொகுப்பானில் ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள படிமையை தொகுக்க விரும்பினால், அந்தப் படிமையை சொடுக்கவும்.  பின்னர் படிமையின் கீழ்ப்பகுதியில்  காணப்படும் படிமைச் சின்னத்தை (படிமங்களின் தொகுப்பு) சொடுக்கவும். இது படிமையிலுள்ள முழுமையான படிமைப் பட்டியலுடன், படிமை உரையாடற்பெட்டியைத் தோற்றுவிக்கும்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;படிமை தொகுப்பான் தற்போதைய நிலையில் விக்கியுரை நிரல்மொழி கொண்டு தொகுக்க உதவும் ஓர் எளிய பெட்டியாக உள்ளது.  இதில் ஏற்கெனவேயுள்ள படிமையில் புதிய படிமம் ஒன்றைச் சேர்க்க, கோப்புப் பெயரை தட்டச்சிட்டு அதன் பின்னர் நேர்கோட்டையும் (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) அந்தப் படிமத்திற்கான தலைப்பையும் இடவும். ஒவ்வொரு படிமத்தையும் ஒவ்வொரு வரியில் இட வேண்டும்.&lt;/span&gt; படிமங்களை நீக்கவும், மீளமைக்கவும், ஒழுங்குபடுத்தவும் அல்லது படிமத் தலைப்புகளை மாற்றவும் இந்தப் பட்டியலைத் தொகுக்கலாம்.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
முடிந்ததும் &quot;$dialogdone&quot; ஆழியை அழுத்தி படிமைத் தொகுப்பானிலிருந்து வெளியேறலாம். உங்கள் மாற்றங்களை இப்போது நீங்கள் பயனர்கள் காணும் காட்சியாகக் காணலாம்
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
படிமைத் தொகுப்பான் உங்கள் மாற்றங்களைச் சேமிப்பதில்லை என்பதை நினைவில் நிறுத்துங்கள். காண்திரைத் தொகுப்பானில் மற்ற மாற்றங்களைப் போலவே இதற்கும் முழுமையான பக்கத்தை சேமிக்க வேண்டும்.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== வார்ப்புருக்களைத் தொகுத்தல் ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The powerful MediaWiki template system lets you insert dynamic content, text from other pages, and much more. For a detailed explanation and examples, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Templates help page]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the VisualEditor you can search for a relevant template, add an invocation or [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusion]] on the page you’re editing and, if needed, add custom content using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameters]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert new template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;தொகுக்கும் பக்கத்தில்  புதிய வார்ப்புருவை இணைக்க,  திரைக்குறியை வார்ப்புரு செருகப்படவேண்டிய இடத்தில் வைத்துக் கொண்டு &quot;$insert&quot; விரிபட்டியிலுள்ள  &quot;$template&quot; சின்னத்தை (புதிர்த் துண்டு) சொடுக்கவும்.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then open the {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} menu and select &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, type two curly brackets {{((}} to open the same dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;தொகுக்கும் பக்கத்தில் ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள வார்ப்புருவையும் தொகுக்கலாம். அந்த வார்ப்புருவை சொடுக்கினால் நீல வண்ணத்திற்கு மாறும்;  &quot;$template&quot; சின்னத்துடன் (புதிர்த் துண்டு) கூடிய உரையாடற்பெட்டி தோன்றும். அதிலுள்ள &quot;$edit&quot; இணைப்பைச் சொடுக்குக.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you select the template you want to edit, it turns blue, and a box appears displaying &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then select the &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; link  or double click on the template itself to open the template.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| சில வார்ப்புருக்கள் பக்கத்தைப் படிப்பவர்களுக்குப் புலப்படாது. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;காண்திரை தொகுப்பானில் அத்தகைய மறைக்கப்பட்ட வார்ப்புருக்கள் புதிர் சின்னமாகக் காட்டப்படும்.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon and both will be grayed out.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== வார்ப்புரு கூறளவுகள் ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You’ll see this dialog box when you’re adding a new template or editing one already in place.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What you see in the box depends on whether the template in question contains {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, helpful metadata added by other editors to make it easier to edit templates in the Visual Editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When a template contains TemplateData, the VisualEditor can use it to present annotated fields for you to fill in.
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For templates that have some community-provided TemplateData, the VisualEditor displays a list of the named parameters and, often, descriptions and instructions explaining the meaning and required format for each parameter’s values.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Adding undocumented parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter: “1”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter’s value: “en_US”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter: “2”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter’s value: “yes”&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Autogenerated parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completing your edit ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;வார்ப்புருவைத் தொகுத்த பின்னர் &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; சொடுக்கி உரையாடற்பெட்டியை மூடி முதன்மைப் பக்க தொகுப்பிற்குத் திரும்பலாம்.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing on mobile ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== மாற்றீடு இடும் வார்ப்புருக்கள் ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Editing lists ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation;  use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is the result of increased indentation.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== அட்டவணைகளைத் தொகுத்தல் ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| காண்திரை தொகுப்பான் கொண்டு உங்களால் அட்டவணைகளை இடவும் மாற்றவும் இயலும்.

உங்கள் கணினியில் உள்ள காற்புள்ளியால் பிரிக்கப்பட்ட மதிப்புக்களுடை (.csv) கோப்பை முதன்மை தொகுப்புச் சாளரத்திற்கு  இறக்கிக் கொள்ளவும் இயலும்.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; தேர்வுப்பட்டியில்  &quot;பட்டியல்&quot; என்றத் தேர்வை சொடுக்கினால் காண்திரைத் தொகுப்பான் நான்குக்கு-நான்கு அட்டவணையைச் செருகுகின்றது.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now the &quot;Table&quot; menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To select a cell, press it once.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;நீங்கள் அட்டவணியின் ஒரு  கிடக்கையையோ நெடுக்கையையோ சேர்க்கவோ நீக்கவோ இயலும்.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on &quot;Merge cells&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also split cells that were previously merged.  All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== பகுப்புகளைத் தொகுத்தல் ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| பகுப்புகளைத் தொகுக்க, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; தேர்வுப்பட்டியில், &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; உருப்படியைச் சொடுக்கவும்.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Clicking on &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; சொடுக்கினால் தோன்றும் உரையாடற்பெட்டியில் ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள பகுப்புகள் பட்டியலிடப்பட்டுள்ளன; இதில் புதியதைச் சேர்க்கவும் பழையதை நீக்கவும் முடியும்.

இதில் உள்ள விருப்பத்தேர்வு மூலம் பொது (இயல்பிருப்பு) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|வரிசைப்படுத்தும் சொல்லை]] அமைக்கவோ மாற்றவோ முடியும்; இது அதே பகுப்பில் மற்ற பக்கங்களுடன் பட்டியலிடப்படும்போது இந்தப் பக்கம் எங்கு காட்டப்படும் என்பதைத் தீர்வு செய்கின்றது.

காட்டாக, &quot;ஜார்ஜ் வாஷிங்டன்&quot; கட்டுரைக்கு இயல்பிருப்பான வரிசைப்படுத்தும் சொல் &quot;வாஷிங்டன், ஜார்ஜ்&quot; ஆகும். &quot;ஐக்கிய அமெரிக்க குடியரசுத் தலைவர்கள்&quot; பகுப்பில் இக்கட்டுரை  &quot;வ&quot; என்ற எழுத்தின் கீழ் காட்டப்படும், &quot;ஜ&quot; என்ற எழுத்தின் கீழல்ல.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;பக்கத்திற்கு பகுப்பு சேர்க்க வேண்டுமானால், பகுப்பின் பெயரை &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}&quot; என் புலத்தில் இடவும். தட்டச்சத் தொடங்கியதுமே காண்திரை தொகுப்பான் வாய்ப்புள்ள, பொருந்துகின்ற ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள பகுப்புகளைத் தேடும். நீங்கள் ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள பகுப்பொன்றைத் தேர்ந்தெடுக்கலாம்  அல்லது பகுப்புப் பக்கம் உருவாக்கப்படாத புதிய பகுப்பை சேர்க்கலாம். (நீங்கள் மாற்றங்களைச் சேமித்த பிறகு, அந்த பகுப்பிற்கு பக்கம் உருவாக்கப்படும் வரை உங்கள் புதிய பகுப்பு சிவப்பு வண்ண இணைப்பாகக் காட்டப்படும்.)&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள பகுப்பை நீக்க அதன்மீது சொடுக்கவும்; தோன்றும் உரையாடற்பெட்டியில் &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; சின்னதை (குப்பைத் தொட்டி) சொடுக்கவும்.

பகுப்பின் மீது சொடுக்கும்போது கூடவே வரிசைப்படுத்தும் சொல்லை குறிப்பிடவும் முடியும்.  இயல்பிருப்பான வரிசைப்படுத்து சொல்லை விட  இது முன்னுரிமை பெற்றது.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| பகுப்புத் தொகுத்தல் நிறைவுற்றால் &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; சொடுக்கி பக்கத் தொகுப்பானுக்குத் திரும்பலாம்.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== பக்க அமைப்புக்களைத் தொகுத்தல் ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| பக்கத்தின் அமைப்புகளை மாற்ற கருவிப்பட்டையிலுள்ள &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; தேர்வுப்பட்டியை சொடுக்கி அதில் உள்ள &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; ஆழியை தேர்ந்தெடுக்கவும்.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; ஆழி பல விருப்பத்தேர்வுகள் அடங்கிய உரையாடற் பெட்டியைத் திறக்கும்.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| பக்கத்தை மற்றொரு பக்கத்திற்கு வழிமாற்ற, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot; குறிப்பெட்டியில் குறியிட்டு பின்னர் தொகுத்துக்கொண்டிருக்கும் பக்கத்திற்கு வந்த வாசகரை அனுப்ப விரும்பும் பக்கத்தின் பெயரை தட்டச்சிடவும்.

இந்தத் தேர்வின் கீழே பக்க மறுபெயரிடல்கள் இந்த வழிமாற்றை இற்றைப்படுத்துவதை தடுக்கும் விருப்பத்தேர்வு உள்ளது. இது மிகவும் அரிதாகவே பயன்படுத்தபடுகின்றது.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| கட்டுரைப் பக்கத்தில் பொருளடக்கம் காட்டப்பட வேண்டுமா என்பதை மூன்று ஆழிகளில் ஒன்றைத் தேர்வு செய்வதன் மூலம் மாற்றலாம். இயல்பிருப்பாக  &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot; உள்ளது; இதன்படி மூன்று அல்லது அதற்கு மேற்பட்ட தலைப்புகள் இருந்தால் பொருளடக்கம் காட்டப்படும்.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| இந்தக் குறிப்பெட்டியில் குறியிடுவதன் மூலம் பக்கத்தின் ஒவ்வொரு பத்தித் தலைப்புகளுக்கும் அடுத்து தொகு இணைப்புகள் காட்டப்படாமலிருக்கும்.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} வைத் தொகுத்த பிறகு {{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}} யை சொடுக்கி பக்கத் தொகுப்பானிற்கு திரும்பலாம்.
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing maps&lt;/span&gt; ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== கணித ஈடுகோள்களைத் தொகுத்தல் ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| கட்டுரைப் பக்கத்தில் புதிய கணித ஈடுகோளை சேர்க்க, வேண்டிய இடத்தில் திரைக்குறியை வைத்துக் கொண்டு கருவிப்பட்டையிலுள்ள &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; தெரிவுப்பட்டையில் &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; சின்னத்தை (&quot;Σ&quot;) அழுத்துக.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| திறக்கும் சாளரத்தில் LaTeX நிரல்தொடரியைப் பயன்படுத்தி ஈடுகோளை தட்டச்சலாம். காண்திரை தொகுப்பான் ஈடுகோளை இற்றைப்படுத்தும்; நீங்கள் மாற்றங்களை மேற்கொள்ளும்போதே எவ்வாறு காட்சியளிக்கும் எனத் தெரியும். ஈடுகோளை நிறைவாகச் செய்தபிறகு &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; ஆழியை அழுத்தவும்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள கணிதச் சமன்பாட்டை தொகுக்க அதன் மீது சொடுக்கிய பிறகு தோன்றும்  &quot;Σ&quot; சின்னத்தை சொடுக்கவும். இது ஈடுகோள் சாளரத்தைத் திறக்கும்; இங்கு மாற்றங்களை மேற்கொள்ளலாம்.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Editing musical scores ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then, from the &quot;Insert&quot; menu on the toolbar, press the &quot;Musical notation&quot; option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will open the &quot;Musical notation&quot; dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you are finished, press the &quot;Done&quot; button to close the dialog and publish your changes.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== கவிதைகளையும் மற்ற பிற சிறப்பு உரைகளையும் தொகுத்தல் ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;சங்கப் பட்டியல்கள், கவிதைகள், இசை வரிவடிவங்கள் போன்ற சிலவற்றிற்கு காண்திரை தொகுப்பான் இன்னும் முழுமையாக தயாராகவில்லை.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| காண்திரை தொகுப்பான் கொண்டு பலவற்றில், ஏற்கெனவே உள்ள உருப்படிகளை தொகுக்கலாம்; ஆனால்  புதியவற்றைச் சேர்க்க முடியாது.

இவை முழுமையாக  செயலாக்கப்படும்வரை மற்றொரு பக்கத்திலிருந்து நகலெடுத்து ஒட்டலாம் அல்லது மூல விக்கியுரையை நேரடியாகத் தொகுக்கலாம்.

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Switching between the visual and wikitext editors&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; button on the far right of the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on &quot;Discard changes&quot;, you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scroll down, and you'll see the wikitext editing area.&lt;/span&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== விசைப்பலகை குறுவழிகள் ==

பல தொகுப்பாளர்களுக்கும் நேரடியாக விக்கியுரையில் தட்டச்சுவது பழகியிருக்கும்; குறிப்பாக தடிமனுக்கு, சாய்ந்தெழுத்துகளுக்கு மற்றும் விக்கியிணைப்புகளுக்கு நேரடியாக பயன்படுத்தியிருப்பர். இதைப் போன்று கருவிப்பட்டையை பயன்படுத்தாது விரைவாக வடிவூட்ட  காண்திரை தொகுப்பானிலும் [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|விசைப்பலகை குறுவழிகள்]] உள்ளன; சில பொதுவான அடிக்கடிப் பயன்படுத்தப்படும் குறுவழிகள் கீழே தரப்பட்டுள்ளன:

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! கணிப்பொறி சுருக்கவழி
! செயற்பாடு
! மாக் சுருக்கவழி
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| தடித்த
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| சாய்வெழுத்து
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| இணைப்பிடுதல்
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| வெட்டு
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| படியெடு
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| ஒட்டு
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| மீளமை
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ba9qq1f9mu5v2s0if16nim2s6yplmfo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:RequestGroup</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>203439</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402219</id>
      <parentid>4306449</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:58:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>114.125.233.18</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="168" xml:space="preserve">{{Archived extension|1435791|reason=Extension does not exist, author had three years to upload it.}}google-site-verification=ci4h4dbiXUVXKlvby8T9MZqYpNt6k9xYNz9GGmomUoo</text>
      <sha1>5qmnswg2zj4gn76uioml8rhn564p403</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402222</id>
      <parentid>5402219</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:59:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>114.125.233.18</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="236" xml:space="preserve">{{Archived extension|1435791|reason=Extension does not exist, author had three years to upload it.}}google-site-verification=ci4h4dbiXUVXKlvby8T9MZqYpNt6k9xYNz9GGmomUoogoogle-site-verification=ci4h4dbiXUVXKlvby8T9MZqYpNt6k9xYNz9GGmomUoo</text>
      <sha1>1yrdx4q2479bd814u4mhe81psra4lqu</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402332</id>
      <parentid>5402222</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:21:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>114.125.233.18</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="304" xml:space="preserve">{{Archived extension|1435791|reason=Extension does not exist, author had three years to upload it.}}google-site-verification=ci4h4dbiXUVXKlvby8T9MZqYpNt6k9xYNz9GGmomUoogoogle-site-verification=ci4h4dbiXUVXKlvby8T9MZqYpNt6k9xYNz9GGmomUoogoogle-site-verification=ci4h4dbiXUVXKlvby8T9MZqYpNt6k9xYNz9GGmomUoo</text>
      <sha1>rw6ybrx8k5fipf00ocm6uw5zuhpuxsi</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402379</id>
      <parentid>5402332</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T03:16:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>P858snake</username>
        <id>31302</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/114.125.233.18|114.125.233.18]] ([[User talk:114.125.233.18|talk]]) to last version by Baris6161TURK</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="100" xml:space="preserve">{{Archived extension|1435791|reason=Extension does not exist, author had three years to upload it.}}</text>
      <sha1>3g2rdfzaneq88qigh8opy7sy18x6pys</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/sco</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>204539</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402446</id>
      <parentid>4983766</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:05:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7253" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Weelcome til the portal fer '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]''' (VeesualEediter). VisualEditor (VE) is ae new waa o eeditin Wikipædia that's bein deveelipt bi the Wikimedia Foundation. It permits fowk tae eedit wiot haein tae learn wiki maurkup.  We hope that it will heelp fawk contreebute til Wikipædia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Aneat VisualEditor ==

VisualEditor is ae &quot;veesual&quot; waa o eeditin Wikipædia. Histericlie, eeditin Wikipædia haes needed fawk tae learn wiki maurkup, ae fairlie complex maurkup leid, even tae mak fair wee chynges til ae page. In 2001, this wis acceptable; in 2013, it is [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|drivin contreebuters awa]]. We hope that VisualEditor will be uissefu til exeestin contreebuters n mair weelcomin til new contreebuters. 

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;VisualEditor haes been available aes an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release oan the Ingils-leid Wikipædia sin Dizember 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 mair leids sin April 2013], n [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ awmaist aw ither leids] sin the beginnin o Juin. We expect tae mak it available til awmaist aw Wikimedia Foundation wikis bi the end o 2014.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
We'll be releasin [[VisualEditor/status|regulair status updates]] at Mediawiki.org.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

At the moment, VisualEditor haes ae nummer o bugs; this is ineveetable. Gif ye encoonter aen issue, please dinna swither tae [[VisualEditor/Feedback|report it oan the Feedback page]]. Foreby, thaur's some auries whaur we still hae tae big compleatlie new featurs. Leemitations nou incluid:

* '''Slaw tae laid''' — It will tak ae while fer lang, complex pages tae laid intil VisualEditor. In the futur, the saffware will be ae lot faster, n will permit the laidin o muckler pages.
* '''Oncompleate eeditin''' — Some elements o complex formattin will displey n lat ye eedit thair contents, bit will na lat uisers eedit thair structur or eik new entries – like defineetion leets. Eikin featurs in this aurie is yin o oor priorities.
* '''Maist content pages, na tauk pages''' — VisualEditor is yinlie enabled fer some namespaces.  At maist Wikipædias, VisualEditor can be uised oan airticles, User:, File:, Help: and Category: pages.  VisualEditor isna available fer Wikipedia: pages or onie tauk pages the nou.

Cause o thir leemitations, n ineveetable bugs, we recommend that uisers clap &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; afore hain the page, n [[VisualEditor/Feedback|report onie proablems that thay encoonter]].

== Hou tae heelp oot ==

Fer VisualEditor tae be aes guid aes it can be, thaur's ae lot o things that we need heelp wi. Obveeislie, yin muckle aurie is uisin the saffware, fyndin bugs n [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportin thaim]], bit thaur's monie ither tasks aes weel. Thir incluid:

* '''Updatin heelp pages''' — Aw o oor waurks hae heelp pages fer tae mak it easier fer new uisers tae contreebute. Onfortunatelie thay'r aw biggit roond the maurkup eediter, n aes VisualEditor evolves, the screenshots n tutorials will aw become ootdated. It wid be fair uissefu gif fawk cid  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update heelp pages]], based oan [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|oor tuterial fer uisin VisualEditor]].
* '''Eikin TemplateData til templates''' — VisualEditor featurs ae nice template eediter, that's descreebed in mair detail oan or [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|heelp page]]. Aes ye'll see gif ye uise it oan Wikipædia, some templates hae named boondins n nice descreeptions that mak it easie tae uise. Ithers dinna. This is cause templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; afore this featur will wairk. Gif ye'r interested in eikin TemplateData, we hae [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|ae guide til daein sae]], alang wi ae [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|leet o the maist important templates tae eik it til]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Heelp new uisers''' — Gif the VisualEditor launch is successfu, we will hae ae lot mair new uisers than we'r uised til, n even thooch eeditin micht be easier, wairkin oot hou tae interact wi the communitie will still be haurd. Please spend some time  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|oan the heelp desk, or in the IRC heelp channel]], tae heelp thir newcomers become acclimatised til Wikipædia.

==Relatit pages==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>b8ykfvwduiyed0ae5fkuguv31zmtvj5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403024</id>
      <parentid>5402446</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7293" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Weelcome til the portal fer '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]''' (VeesualEediter). VisualEditor (VE) is ae new waa o eeditin Wikipædia that's bein deveelipt bi the Wikimedia Foundation. It permits fowk tae eedit wiot haein tae learn wiki maurkup.  We hope that it will heelp fawk contreebute til Wikipædia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Aneat VisualEditor ==

VisualEditor is ae &quot;veesual&quot; waa o eeditin Wikipædia. Histericlie, eeditin Wikipædia haes needed fawk tae learn wiki maurkup, ae fairlie complex maurkup leid, even tae mak fair wee chynges til ae page. In 2001, this wis acceptable; in 2013, it is [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|drivin contreebuters awa]]. We hope that VisualEditor will be uissefu til exeestin contreebuters n mair weelcomin til new contreebuters. 

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;VisualEditor haes been available aes an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release oan the Ingils-leid Wikipædia sin Dizember 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 mair leids sin April 2013], n [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ awmaist aw ither leids] sin the beginnin o Juin. We expect tae mak it available til awmaist aw Wikimedia Foundation wikis bi the end o 2014.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
We'll be releasin [[VisualEditor/status|regulair status updates]] at Mediawiki.org.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

At the moment, VisualEditor haes ae nummer o bugs; this is ineveetable. Gif ye encoonter aen issue, please dinna swither tae [[VisualEditor/Feedback|report it oan the Feedback page]]. Foreby, thaur's some auries whaur we still hae tae big compleatlie new featurs. Leemitations nou incluid:

* '''Slaw tae laid''' — It will tak ae while fer lang, complex pages tae laid intil VisualEditor. In the futur, the saffware will be ae lot faster, n will permit the laidin o muckler pages.
* '''Oncompleate eeditin''' — Some elements o complex formattin will displey n lat ye eedit thair contents, bit will na lat uisers eedit thair structur or eik new entries – like defineetion leets. Eikin featurs in this aurie is yin o oor priorities.
* '''Maist content pages, na tauk pages''' — VisualEditor is yinlie enabled fer some namespaces.  At maist Wikipædias, VisualEditor can be uised oan airticles, User:, File:, Help: and Category: pages.  VisualEditor isna available fer Wikipedia: pages or onie tauk pages the nou.

Cause o thir leemitations, n ineveetable bugs, we recommend that uisers clap &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; afore hain the page, n [[VisualEditor/Feedback|report onie proablems that thay encoonter]].

== Hou tae heelp oot ==

Fer VisualEditor tae be aes guid aes it can be, thaur's ae lot o things that we need heelp wi. Obveeislie, yin muckle aurie is uisin the saffware, fyndin bugs n [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportin thaim]], bit thaur's monie ither tasks aes weel. Thir incluid:

* '''Updatin heelp pages''' — Aw o oor waurks hae heelp pages fer tae mak it easier fer new uisers tae contreebute. Onfortunatelie thay'r aw biggit roond the maurkup eediter, n aes VisualEditor evolves, the screenshots n tutorials will aw become ootdated. It wid be fair uissefu gif fawk cid  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update heelp pages]], based oan [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|oor tuterial fer uisin VisualEditor]].
* '''Eikin TemplateData til templates''' — VisualEditor featurs ae nice template eediter, that's descreebed in mair detail oan or [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|heelp page]]. Aes ye'll see gif ye uise it oan Wikipædia, some templates hae named boondins n nice descreeptions that mak it easie tae uise. Ithers dinna. This is cause templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; afore this featur will wairk. Gif ye'r interested in eikin TemplateData, we hae [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|ae guide til daein sae]], alang wi ae [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|leet o the maist important templates tae eik it til]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Heelp new uisers''' — Gif the VisualEditor launch is successfu, we will hae ae lot mair new uisers than we'r uised til, n even thooch eeditin micht be easier, wairkin oot hou tae interact wi the communitie will still be haurd. Please spend some time  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|oan the heelp desk, or in the IRC heelp channel]], tae heelp thir newcomers become acclimatised til Wikipædia.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Relatit pages==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>69703q2l023yxkx0ab3cvn16g46gbdl</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403182</id>
      <parentid>5403024</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:43:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7253" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Weelcome til the portal fer '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]''' (VeesualEediter). VisualEditor (VE) is ae new waa o eeditin Wikipædia that's bein deveelipt bi the Wikimedia Foundation. It permits fowk tae eedit wiot haein tae learn wiki maurkup.  We hope that it will heelp fawk contreebute til Wikipædia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Read '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Report a problem''' with VisualEditor].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find out how to make links, add or move images, create citations, insert templates, edit tables, and more.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Aneat VisualEditor ==

VisualEditor is ae &quot;veesual&quot; waa o eeditin Wikipædia. Histericlie, eeditin Wikipædia haes needed fawk tae learn wiki maurkup, ae fairlie complex maurkup leid, even tae mak fair wee chynges til ae page. In 2001, this wis acceptable; in 2013, it is [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|drivin contreebuters awa]]. We hope that VisualEditor will be uissefu til exeestin contreebuters n mair weelcomin til new contreebuters. 

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;VisualEditor haes been available aes an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release oan the Ingils-leid Wikipædia sin Dizember 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 mair leids sin April 2013], n [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ awmaist aw ither leids] sin the beginnin o Juin. We expect tae mak it available til awmaist aw Wikimedia Foundation wikis bi the end o 2014.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
We'll be releasin [[VisualEditor/status|regulair status updates]] at Mediawiki.org.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using VisualEditor ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

At the moment, VisualEditor haes ae nummer o bugs; this is ineveetable. Gif ye encoonter aen issue, please dinna swither tae [[VisualEditor/Feedback|report it oan the Feedback page]]. Foreby, thaur's some auries whaur we still hae tae big compleatlie new featurs. Leemitations nou incluid:

* '''Slaw tae laid''' — It will tak ae while fer lang, complex pages tae laid intil VisualEditor. In the futur, the saffware will be ae lot faster, n will permit the laidin o muckler pages.
* '''Oncompleate eeditin''' — Some elements o complex formattin will displey n lat ye eedit thair contents, bit will na lat uisers eedit thair structur or eik new entries – like defineetion leets. Eikin featurs in this aurie is yin o oor priorities.
* '''Maist content pages, na tauk pages''' — VisualEditor is yinlie enabled fer some namespaces.  At maist Wikipædias, VisualEditor can be uised oan airticles, User:, File:, Help: and Category: pages.  VisualEditor isna available fer Wikipedia: pages or onie tauk pages the nou.

Cause o thir leemitations, n ineveetable bugs, we recommend that uisers clap &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; afore hain the page, n [[VisualEditor/Feedback|report onie proablems that thay encoonter]].

== Hou tae heelp oot ==

Fer VisualEditor tae be aes guid aes it can be, thaur's ae lot o things that we need heelp wi. Obveeislie, yin muckle aurie is uisin the saffware, fyndin bugs n [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportin thaim]], bit thaur's monie ither tasks aes weel. Thir incluid:

* '''Updatin heelp pages''' — Aw o oor waurks hae heelp pages fer tae mak it easier fer new uisers tae contreebute. Onfortunatelie thay'r aw biggit roond the maurkup eediter, n aes VisualEditor evolves, the screenshots n tutorials will aw become ootdated. It wid be fair uissefu gif fawk cid  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update heelp pages]], based oan [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|oor tuterial fer uisin VisualEditor]].
* '''Eikin TemplateData til templates''' — VisualEditor featurs ae nice template eediter, that's descreebed in mair detail oan or [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|heelp page]]. Aes ye'll see gif ye uise it oan Wikipædia, some templates hae named boondins n nice descreeptions that mak it easie tae uise. Ithers dinna. This is cause templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; afore this featur will wairk. Gif ye'r interested in eikin TemplateData, we hae [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|ae guide til daein sae]], alang wi ae [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|leet o the maist important templates tae eik it til]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Heelp new uisers''' — Gif the VisualEditor launch is successfu, we will hae ae lot mair new uisers than we'r uised til, n even thooch eeditin micht be easier, wairkin oot hou tae interact wi the communitie will still be haurd. Please spend some time  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|oan the heelp desk, or in the IRC heelp channel]], tae heelp thir newcomers become acclimatised til Wikipædia.

==Relatit pages==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>b8ykfvwduiyed0ae5fkuguv31zmtvj5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/sco</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>204855</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402445</id>
      <parentid>938829</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:04:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="298" xml:space="preserve">Weelcome til the portal fer '''[[$ve|VisualEditor]]''' (VeesualEediter). VisualEditor (VE) is ae new waa o eeditin Wikipædia that's bein deveelipt bi the Wikimedia Foundation. It permits fowk tae eedit wiot haein tae learn wiki maurkup.  We hope that it will heelp fawk contreebute til Wikipædia.</text>
      <sha1>sqjhmxt61ebuzqyqchnlymr59s8hbw5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/sco</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>204871</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403181</id>
      <parentid>1803442</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:42:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="374" xml:space="preserve">* '''Heelp new uisers''' — Gif the VisualEditor launch is successfu, we will hae ae lot mair new uisers than we'r uised til, n even thooch eeditin micht be easier, wairkin oot hou tae interact wi the communitie will still be haurd. Please spend some time  [[$1|oan the heelp desk, or in the IRC heelp channel]], tae heelp thir newcomers become acclimatised til Wikipædia.</text>
      <sha1>hwl1ekx1i5pfp31zvrimuobw62xj6io</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/it</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>206939</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402487</id>
      <parentid>5175367</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:13:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9996" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = Niklas Laxström, Siebrand Mazeland e altre persone
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=Inserite nella Language Extension Bundle}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=La documentazione dell'utente}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = Abilita la traduzione e la revisione all'interno di wiki.
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] (oppure [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view prova subito a vedere come si traduce una pagina])
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

L'estensione '''Translate''' rende MediaWiki uno strumento incredibilmente potente per tradurre qualsiasi tipo di testo. Viene utilizzata in particolare per tradurre software e per gestire in maniera efficace i wiki multilingue.

== Funzionalità ==

L'estensione Traduzione ha molte funzionalità specificamente mirate ai traduttori, mentre rende l'integrazione dei back-end con il codice sorgente attuale il più semplice possibile. Nel frattempo, tutto viene eseguito all'interno di [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|MediaWiki]], cosa che permette agli utenti di avere un grado di libertà pressoché infinito per comunicare ed auto-organizzarsi.

Le funzionalità includono:

* '''Traduzione strutturata delle pagine di contenuto di wiki.'''
* '''Localizzazione interna a wiki ed esportazione dei software dell'interfaccia messaggi (o di praticamente qualsiasi cosa).'''
* '''Traduzione e revisione attraverso [[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overview/|interfaccia]] web, ma anche esportazione e importazione basate su gettext per la traduzione offline.'''
* '''Vari aiuti per facilitare il lavoro dei traduttori:'''
** visualizzazione delle traduzioni in altre lingue (alcune sono globalmente predefinite, altre possono essere aggiunte dall'utente);
** revisione collaborativa della documentazione dell'uso e del contesto dei messaggi;
** la memoria di traduzione e la traduzione automatica con strumenti esterni (Apertium, Microsoft Translator, Yandex.Translate);
** La visualizzazione dell'ultima modifica effettuata al messaggio sorgente;
** avvertimenti su errori comuni come parametri non utilizzati.
* Moduli preimpostati per molteplici prodotti open source che puoi utilizzare come esempio.
** Supporto per molteplici formati tra cui: PHP, proprietà Java, Gettext, YAML e AndroidXml (vedi {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} e [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|File format support]]).
* Un versatile sistema di plug-in che rende semplice aggiungere nuovi progetti come gruppo di messaggi.
* Varie statistiche:
** Le percentuali di traduzioni completate per tutti i gruppi di messaggi in tutte le lingue supportate;
**Le percentuali di traduzioni completate in tutte le lingue supportate per ogni gruppo di messaggi supportato;
** strumento per fare grafici dell'attività su determinati intervalli temporali. Può visualizzare il numero di modifiche o di utenti attivi per giorno o per ora e comprende molti filtri;
** panoramica sul cloud delle lingue attive e dei traduttori.

L'estensione Traduzione, per via della sua vasta base di utenti, è compatibile con tutti i browser ragionevolmente recenti, eccetto alcuni difetti (di stile) minimi che sono prontamente corretti.

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|''Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality'': questa presentazione, basata sull'esperienza di KDE UserBase wiki, mostra come l'estensione Traduzione possa rendere un wiki veramente multilingue.
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|Niklas Laxström, ''Translating the wiki way: Simple, fast, fun'', Wikimania 2012 (diapositive disponibili).
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Supporto e documentazione ==

* Vedi [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|Installazione]]
* Vedi [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|Configurazione]]
* Vedi [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Documentazione utente]] (include tutorial)
* Vedi [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|Getting started with Translate extension development]]
* Supporto live al [[#translatewiki|canale IRC #mediawiki-i18n in Freenode]] (gli orari migliori sono i pomeriggi e le sere secondo gli orari dell'Europa)
* Riferite cortesemente tutti i problemi e le richieste di funzionalità nell'[issue tracker di https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate]

L'estensione Traduzione è stata sviluppata originariamente da [[User:Nikerabbit]]; da molti altri utenti, come [[User:Raymond]], [[User:SPQRobin]] e il team Language di Wikimedia, ha contribuito alla programmazione e alla documentazione. È curata da [[User:Nikerabbit]] e [[User:Siebrand]].

== Utenti importanti dell'estensione Traduzione ==
* https://translatewiki.net — Il sito wiki e la comunità più grande per la traduzione delle interfacce di software open source.
* https://userbase.kde.org — La documentazione Wiki per il progetto KDE che usa ampiamente la funzionalità di traduzione delle pagine.
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — Traduce i contenuti wiki e usa la funzionalità che indica lo stato dei gruppi di messaggi. La traduzione e la sua revisione sono abilitate per quasi tutti gli utenti di wiki.
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

Per maggiori approfondimenti [[Wikipedia:translatewiki.net#Notable uses]].

=== Testimonianze ===

Tom Hutchison di Joomla:
{{quotation|1=
L'estensione Traduzione permette la connessione a un servizio di traduzione e può eseguire la traduzione al posto tuo. Allo stesso tempo, un traduttore può apportare rettifiche alla traduzione automatica in modo da non creare molte pagine con traduzioni imprecise.

Non c'è problema se sono in continenti diversi.
Anzi, questo è un vantaggio perché il lavoro viene fatto 24 ore al giorno.
Quello di cui hanno bisogno è una chat di gruppo per aiutarsi l'un l'altro.
Si pensa che essendo traduttori sono in grado di leggere l'inglese, perciò insegna loro qualche semplice markup wiki come per esempio  i link e cosa fare con le categorie.
Poi aiuteranno altri che a loro volta aiuteranno altri.
Noi abbiamo più di 40 persone in una chat che si aiutano a vicenda e si divertono allo stesso tempo.
E tutti erano spaventati da Wiki ma una volta che hanno iniziato non riuscivano a credere a quanto fosse facile.
Adesso stanno aspettando che gli dia più traduzioni da fare perché non riesco a tenere il loro passo.
So che c'è solo una persona che sta traducendo una lingua o oppure un'altra lingua.
Abbiamo anche quello.
È il caso dello swahili e del giapponese.
Inoltre, è possibile segnarsi le pagine per la traduzione.
Puoi controllare se inserire template o escludere variabili nella scelta del template.
}}


== Vedi anche ==
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – un'estensione per facilitare la comunicazione con i traduttori.

Da non confondersi con:

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – usata per traduzioni di pagine wiki da una lingua all'altra effettuabili una sola volta (dopo che la pagina possiede una traduzione nella lingua di destinazione non è più possibile usare l'estensione per quella pagina).
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Abstract Wikipedia]] per la traduzione.

== Come posso dare una mano? ==

* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all Traduci questa estensione su translatewiki.net]
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|Riporta errori e richiedi funzioni]]
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|Riporta errori e richiedi funzioni su translatewiki.net]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Correggi e traduci la documentazione dell'estensione Translate]]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>it0e4isruha8akfd81q5eeodgvjlbve</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki/ko</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>210767</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401762</id>
      <parentid>5312695</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4036" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]].  See ShoutWiki's website at [http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com], or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/span&gt;

==확장 기능==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki에 대하여]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/span&gt;]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/span&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/span&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>57vld6e8xbr44yrf3use99dqlr5lgme</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401780</id>
      <parentid>5401762</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4034" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]]. See ShoutWiki's website at [http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com], or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/span&gt;

==확장 기능==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki에 대하여]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/span&gt;]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/span&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/span&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>jpzjp5ktdor8n3pn71zt0140y6s9ktg</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401880</id>
      <parentid>5401780</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4003" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]]. See [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki's website] or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's about page on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/span&gt;

==확장 기능==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki에 대하여]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/span&gt;]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/span&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/span&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1r11ycqop7tbg2uknr7m4op5uazmmfs</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki/ja</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>211286</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401761</id>
      <parentid>5312694</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3936" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWikiのスタッフの多くは、MediaWikiの[[developers|開発者]]でもあります。ShoutWiki全般については、[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWikiのウェブサイト]や[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWikiの関連ページ]を参照してください。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/span&gt;

==拡張機能==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About MediaWiki について]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source ShoutWikiとオープンソースに関する情報]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/span&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWiki の GitHub]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>6mf20il7q0hlq9n4gmsyop1l6p4ttjd</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401771</id>
      <parentid>5401761</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:52:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3918" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
ShoutWiki のスタッフの多くは、MediaWiki の[[developers|開発者]]でもあります。ShoutWiki 全般については、ShoutWiki のウェブサイト [http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com] や[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWikiの関連ページ]を参照してください。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/span&gt;

==拡張機能==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About MediaWiki について]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source ShoutWikiとオープンソースに関する情報]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/span&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWiki の GitHub]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1pzto66fv2r99ufg5ddcmhokk8h1h7d</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401781</id>
      <parentid>5401771</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3917" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
ShoutWiki のスタッフの多くは、MediaWiki の[[developers|開発者]]でもあります。ShoutWiki 全般については、ShoutWiki のウェブサイト [http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com] や[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWikiの関連ページ]を参照してください。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/span&gt;

==拡張機能==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About MediaWiki について]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source ShoutWikiとオープンソースに関する情報]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/span&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWiki の GitHub]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>3hvmwhs9mne35u7u22y5rq0lmnvw84t</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401878</id>
      <parentid>5401781</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3889" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki のスタッフの多くは、MediaWiki の[[developers|開発者]]でもあります。ShoutWiki 全般については、ShoutWiki のウェブサイト $1 や[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWikiの関連ページ]を参照してください。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/span&gt;

==拡張機能==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About MediaWiki について]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source ShoutWikiとオープンソースに関する情報]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/span&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWiki の GitHub]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>kuldopv2c73h8zwqaus2rdzdlnhc2gt</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401889</id>
      <parentid>5401878</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:23:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3891" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
ShoutWiki のスタッフの多くは、MediaWiki の[[developers|開発者]]でもあります。ShoutWiki 全般については、[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki のウェブサイト]や[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWikiの関連ページ]を参照してください。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/span&gt;

==拡張機能==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About MediaWiki について]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source ShoutWikiとオープンソースに関する情報]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/span&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWiki の GitHub]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>e3bjqnxm9k2mmig07al4ln1hzxoanw0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/ru</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>211401</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402265</id>
      <parentid>5400755</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15379" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Обновленная информация доступна на Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Нажав на ссылку [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] в правом верхнем углу при входе в систему, вы можете изменить свои предпочтения.
Перед вами откроется раздел профиля пользователя, а также панель вкладок в верхней части для изменения других типов настроек.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Ваш логин. Только доверенные пользователи могут изменить ваше имя пользователя, и на вики также должно быть установлено расширение {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Список групп пользователей, в которых вы состоите.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || На вики-сайтах Викимедиа эта ссылка позволяет вам управлять внешними приложениями, которым разрешен доступ к вашей учетной записи. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;См. справку по [[Help:OAuth|OAuth]] для получения детальной информации.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Число Ваших правок. Не все вики имеют эту возможность.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || Время регистрации вашей учетной записи.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|смотрите ниже]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|смотрите ниже]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Управляйте двухфакторной аутентификацией.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Управляйте глобальными настройками.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Чтобы изменить пароль, введите свой старый пароль в первое поле и новый пароль в два последних.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Глобальный аккаунт ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
В своих настройках вы можете выбрать, на каком языке вы хотите, чтобы интерфейс был на нем. Будут переведены такие кнопки как «Править» и «Обсуждение» и несколько блоков на боковой панели. Основной текст страниц не будет изменен для их подавляющего большинства, хотя есть несколько страниц, где это произойдет, например в Wikimedia Meta Wiki.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* Языки
* Как вы предпочитаете, чтобы к вам обращались?
* Дополнительные языковые настройки

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Ваша существующая подпись
* Новая подпись
** Считать викитекстом

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Если вы указали адрес электронной почты, вам нужно будет нажать кнопку «Подтвердить адрес», чтобы использовать эти функции. Вы получите электронное письмо; просто откройте его и перейдите по ссылке, чтобы включить следующие функции.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Подтверждение электронной почты ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Формат даты и смещение времени ===

Следующие настройки обычно выставляются в зависимости от предпочтений:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Эти настройки служат для управления редактированием страниц, включая возможность изменить размер окна редактирования, а также — будут ли автоматически включаться в ваш список наблюдения созданные или изменённые вами страницы.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Здесь вы можете задать сколько изменений может быть отображено на экране.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Это позволяет скрыть правки, помеченные как второстепенные (смотрите {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Это может оказаться полезным, поскольку некоторые пользователи быстро вносят множество мелких изменений при обновлении шаблонов или исправлении орфографических ошибок. Вы также можете временно включить это на странице последних изменений (смотрите {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Расширенные последние возможности системы уплотняют изменения в виде списка изменений для каждой страницы. Как указано, для этого требуется JavaScript. Для получения дополнительной информации об этой функции смотрите {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Смотрите также ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>952n27jbywdvxqmbil0n8u06d306fqy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Phabricator/FAQ</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>211593</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402795</id>
      <parentid>5200802</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:56:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13966" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{historical|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:103--&gt; Content on this page was written before starting the [[Phabricator/Migration|migration to Phabricator]] in November 2014.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
== General == &lt;!--T:2--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{Project management tools review}}

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Why migrating to Phabricator? === &lt;!--T:3--&gt;

&lt;!--T:4--&gt;
See &lt;tvar|1&gt;{{ll|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org}}&lt;/&gt;.

=== Which parts of the infrastructure will get migrated? === &lt;!--T:5--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; The main focus is on Bugzilla, Gerrit, Trello, Mingle, RT (but not necessarily limited to them).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; Also see [[&lt;tvar|review&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Project management tools/Review#Scope&lt;/&gt;|Project management tools/Review#Scope]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Except for Phabricator's wiki functionality which would be disabled, we would like to migrate fully to Phabricator instead of piecemeal.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
===Is there a list of known deficiencies of / known issues with Phabricator?=== &lt;!--T:9--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; Testers have reported some of the regressions and missing functionalities that users will experience after the migration.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; Some of them are listed on top of the following tickets:&lt;/translate&gt;
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T30] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T23] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T22] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20].
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; A [[&lt;tvar|1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla&lt;/&gt;|comparison between Phabricator and Bugzilla is available]].&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;onlyinclude&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
===Is Phabricator easy to use?=== &lt;!--T:13--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt; Phabricator is explicitly not designed for newbies.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; «Phabricator is primarily targeted at software professionals and other professionals with adjacent responsibilities (like project management and operations).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; Particularly, we assume users are proficient computer users and familiar with software development concepts.»&lt;/translate&gt;
[https://secure.phabricator.com/book/phabcontrib/article/feature_requests/#target-audiences]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== How can I help? === &lt;!--T:17--&gt;

&lt;!--T:18--&gt;
See [[&lt;tvar|1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator#Get involved&lt;/&gt;|Phabricator#Get involved]].&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;/onlyinclude&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== What is the current amount of work maintaining Bugzilla/Gerrit/Mingle/Trello sync tools? === &lt;!--T:19--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; [[wikitech:Bingle|Bingle and Bugello]] synchronize some aspects of tickets between Bugzilla and Mingle/Trello, but [&lt;tvar|lists&gt;https://lists.wikimedia.org/pipermail/teampractices/2013-December/000202.html&lt;/&gt; functionality is limited and ticket statuses between tools can easily get out of sync] (also see [&lt;tvar|github&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/bingle/issues&lt;/&gt; list of open Bingle issues]).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:21--&gt; Arthur should be able to elaborate on the amount of maintenance work required.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:22--&gt; Gerrit's &lt;tvar|hooks&gt;[https://gerrit.googlesource.com/plugins/hooks-bugzilla/ hooks-bugzilla]&lt;/&gt; plugin does not require maintenance but has limitations (&lt;tvar|1&gt;[https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=52167 1]&lt;/&gt;, &lt;tvar|2&gt;[https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=53084 2]&lt;/&gt;) which are not easy to solve.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== How would the migration happen? === &lt;!--T:23--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:24--&gt; Bugzilla/RT/Gerrit tickets, projects, user accounts, patchsets, access settings, etc. would have to be moved into Phabricator.&lt;/translate&gt;
([https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179 &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; related upstream ticket&lt;/translate&gt;])
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; The switching costs are not clear yet; Your help is welcome to evaluate them.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; A clear cut for at least one tool (Bugzilla) seems preferable in order to not continue running all to-be-replaced systems plus yet another one (Phabricator).&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== When would the migration happen? === &lt;!--T:28--&gt;

&lt;!--T:29--&gt;
See [[&lt;tvar|1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/Migration Timeline&lt;/&gt;|Phabricator/Migration Timeline]].

=== What would that mean for me? === &lt;!--T:30--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:31--&gt; At some point current infrastructure tools (see above) would be replaced by Phabricator.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:32--&gt; Phabricator has a different user interface and some changes in workflow, compared to the current setup.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:33--&gt; In the long run, things will get less complicated because everything is in one tool; there will be more transparency and efficiency because discussions are more centralized and in one tool instead of several tools.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:34--&gt; As different development teams use different tools with different needs (reporters, developers, product managers, scrum masters, ...), you want to play with the [http://fab.wmflabs.org/ Labs instance of Phabricator] to see if it fits your needs.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; See section &quot;How can I help?&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Will external links/URLs break? === &lt;!--T:36--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:37--&gt; We will try to minimize broken links by redirecting [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T40 Bugzilla] (please see [[Phabricator/versus_Bugzilla#Bugzilla_URLs_and_their_redirects|Bugzilla URLs and their redirects]]) and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T41 RT] tickets to Phabricator.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:38--&gt; It is still to be evaluated whether we can also easily redirect Gerrit changesets.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:39--&gt; Obviously, documentation about [[Bug management|Bug management/Bugzilla]] (see [[phab:T206|T206]]), [[Gerrit|Gerrit]] or [[wikitech:RT|RT]] will need updating.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== How flexible is Phabricator when restricting access to certain tickets, or tickets in certain products (e.g. &quot;Security&quot;)? === &lt;!--T:40--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T50 &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:41--&gt; related task&lt;/translate&gt;]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Does Phabricator provide statistics, metrics, charts? === &lt;!--T:42--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:43--&gt; By default, Phabricator offers [[phab:maniphest/report/|Reports by User and by Project]] and [[phab:maniphest/report/burn/|Burnup Rate]] (logging in might be required).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:104--&gt; Burndown charts for projects are available via the custom Sprint extension (see [[phab:T153|T153]] and [[phab:T1322|T1322]]), to be superseded by [[phab:project/profile/1266/|Phragile]] in the future.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:105--&gt; [[phab:fact/|Charts]] are currently not enabled.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:44--&gt;
See also the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T28 related task] about metrics in general.

=== Does any other FLOSS project use Phabricator? === &lt;!--T:45--&gt;

&lt;!--T:46--&gt;
FLOSS projects using Phabricator include [https://reviews.llvm.org/ LLVM], [https://developer.blender.org/ Blender], and [https://secure.phabricator.com/ Phabricator itself].
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:47--&gt; There is also a [[w:Phabricator#Users|list of projects on English Wikipedia]] but most are proprietary and/or small.&lt;/translate&gt;
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T192 &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:48--&gt; Facebook's install is very large&lt;/translate&gt;]

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Did anyone else migrate to Phabricator as we would? === &lt;!--T:49--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:50--&gt; No, this is a way that nobody has walked before.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:51--&gt; Focusing on like-minded projects: maybe Blender did, in late 2013 (but from SVN, Trac and Trello); however no detailed report available yet[https://code.blender.org/2013/11/new-development-infrastructure/] and it's at least [&lt;tvar|url&gt;https://www.openhub.net/p/blender&lt;/&gt; one order of magnitude smaller] than MediaWiki.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:52--&gt; They're now sharing some code.[https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179#81309]&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Why can't I login using my GitHub or Google account? === &lt;!--T:53--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:54--&gt; Although Phabricator has authentication plugins for GitHub, Google, and other identity providers, we have decided not to use them.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:55--&gt; With two Wikimedia alternatives that cover virtually all Wikimedia contributors, more options are not really necessary.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:56--&gt; Besides, these services depend on proprietary third party sites, and they might raise concerns about privacy and commercial interests.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:57--&gt; For more details, see [[phab:T16|T16 - Support only WMF SUL and LDAP as authentication mechanisms]].&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== How can I merge my account from Wikipedia or other Wikimedia wikis with my Phabricator account? === &lt;!--T:58--&gt;

&lt;!--T:59--&gt;
Use Phabricator's [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/settings/panel/external/ Linked Accounts and Authentication] tool for that.

=== Concerns raised === &lt;!--T:60--&gt;

==== Ending up with one more tool ==== &lt;!--T:61--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:62--&gt; Having fewer tools is the whole point of this exercise.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:63--&gt; The replacement of Bugzilla and Gerrit with Phabricator is an essential requirement of this project.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:64--&gt; The teams using Trello and Mingle understand that relying in these commercial services is not a long-term solution.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Lack of a detailed plan ==== &lt;!--T:65--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:66--&gt; The current working plan is good enough to provide a realistic vision supported by the community.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:67--&gt; The WMF needs an RfC resolution in order to allocate the resources needed to elaborate a detailed plan.[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T17]&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Why not improving our current tools ==== &lt;!--T:68--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:69--&gt; Phabricator is already an integrated suite, which means the different components are intended to be used together.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:70--&gt; It is written in PHP, and their maintainers are very proactive.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:71--&gt;
* This encourages features like explicitly attaching tasks to code changes, mocks, etc.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:72--&gt;
* Although we can write or improve integrations like Gerrit Notification Bot, Bugzilla (Perl), Gerrit (Java), or Scrumbugz (Python) will probably never be a seamlessly integrated suite.

==== Some projects should test first ==== &lt;!--T:73--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:74--&gt; Yes, this is also our recommendation for the migration from Gerrit to Phabricator.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:75--&gt; About the migration from Bugzilla to Phabricator, it needs to be done at once because we cannot do a full migration of data with two moving targets.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Various UI issues ==== &lt;!--T:76--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:77--&gt; We can customize the CSS of our instance for more appropriate font sizes, colors, etc.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:78--&gt; Upstream has already fixed some of the problems reported.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Requiring arc ==== &lt;!--T:79--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:80--&gt; Arc checks new patches for basic mistakes before uploading them for review.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:81--&gt; This is useful for the majority of contributors and for the project.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:82--&gt; The occasional contributor can upload a patch directly via the Phabricator Web UI.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Phabricator is unfamiliar for most newcomers ==== &lt;!--T:83--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:84--&gt; True, most users of FLOSS software have experience with Bugzilla if anything, because it's used by all the major players (Linux itself, Mozilla, RedHat, GNOME [https://www.bugzilla.org/installation-list/ etc. etc.]).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:85--&gt; However this is not necessarily true for all MediaWiki newcomers.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:86--&gt; Offering them one integrated platform is better than looking for a platform they already know.&lt;/translate&gt;

== phabricator.wikimedia.org ==
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:87--&gt;
[[phab:|Phabricator.wikimedia.org]] (aka [https://bugs.wikimedia.org/ bugs.wikimedia.org]) is Wikimedia's bug tracking and project management tool.

== Bugzilla == &lt;!--T:88--&gt;

&lt;!--T:89--&gt;
See [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla&lt;/tvar&gt;|Phabricator/versus Bugzilla]].

== RT == &lt;!--T:90--&gt;

&lt;!--T:91--&gt;
See [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus RT&lt;/tvar&gt;|Phabricator/versus RT]].

== Trello, Mingle, Scrumbugz, etc == &lt;!--T:92--&gt;

=== Is Phabricator flexible enough to allow different teams to define their own workflows and ways of organizing sprints/tasks/stories/etc? === &lt;!--T:93--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T43 &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:94--&gt; related task&lt;/translate&gt;] - &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:95--&gt; this welcomes answering by individuals who have already worked and maintained a Phabricator instance.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:96--&gt; Yes, at least to some degree.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:97--&gt; For example, different projects can define their own columns/swim lanes on workboards with &quot;Add Column&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Does Phabricator provide boards per project and/or iteration? === &lt;!--T:98--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:99--&gt; See e.g. the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/project/board/5/ Wikimedia Phabricator board].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:100--&gt; Related tasks: [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21 Identify features Trello users would miss] and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20 Identify features Mingle users would miss]&lt;/translate&gt;

[[Category:Phabricator{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>jr3inzv5ndcekljbi613t4xdsrb8t1a</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>215745</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402494</id>
      <parentid>4502680</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:15:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="68" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|Revise e traduza a documentação da extensão Translate]]</text>
      <sha1>5g5022o3byu2o0m8lhxg24tzg27vr15</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/fi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>218837</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403052</id>
      <parentid>2022332</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:01:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="393" xml:space="preserve">* '''Uusien käyttäjien auttaminen''' — Visuaalisen muokkaimen tavoitteena on ennen kaikkea harvemmin muokkaaiven käyttäjien määrän lisääminen - nämä käyttäjät tarvitsevat myös enemmän opastusta kuin kokeneemmat käyttäjät. Myös uusien vuorovaikutusmenetelmien kehittäminen on tärkeää. Voit auttaa  [[$1|tukemalla uusia käyttäjiä tukikeskuksessa tai IRC-kanavalla]].</text>
      <sha1>dl1dm8avjyvh39djjbrdpqge9ixq6zw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/ca</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>219073</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402235</id>
      <parentid>5400728</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12610" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=La informació actualitzada és disponible a Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

En fer clic en l'enllaç [[Special:preferences|Preferències]] de la part superior dreta mentre esteu connectat, us permetrà canviar les vostres preferències.
Se us presentarà la secció del Perfil d'usuari, així com una barra de pestanyes a la part superior per canviar altres tipus de configuracions.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || El vostre nom d'usuari. Només els usuaris de confiança poden canviar el vostre nom d’usuari i la wiki també ha de tenir instal·lada l’extensió {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Als wikis de Wikimedia, aquest enllaç us permet gestionar les aplicacions externes que tenen permís d'accedir al vostre compte. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Per a més informació, vegeu l'[[Help:OAuth|ajuda sobre OAuth]].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Quantes edicions heu realitzat. No tots els wikis la tenen.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|vegeu més endavant]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|vegeu més endavant]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Per canviar la contrasenya, introduïu la contrasenya antiga, en la primera entrada de text, i la nova contrasenya en les dues últimes.
Si desitgeu que aquest lloc recordi les vostres dades d'accés, accepteu ''Recorda el meu inici de sessió en aquest equip''.
Tingueu en compte que aquesta funció requereix tenir les galetes habilitades en el vostre navegador, i si la galeta s'elimina o expira ja no serà recordada.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Compte global ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
Des de les vostres preferències podeu seleccionar en quin idioma us agradaria que es mostrés la interfície.
Només seran afectats els botons, com 'modifica' o 'discussió', així com unes poques pàgines de la barra lateral.
El text principal de les pàgines no serà canviat per a la majoria de les pàgines, però sí en algunes pàgines, com algunes de la Wikimedia Meta Wiki.

* Idiomes
* Com preferiu que se us descrigui?
* Més paràmetres d'idioma

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* La vostra signatura actual
* La signatura nova
** Tracta-la com a wikitext

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Si heu proporcionat una adreça de correu electrònic, haureu de fer clic en el botó &quot;verifica l'adreça&quot; per poder utilitzar aquestes funcions. Rebreu un missatge de correu electrònic, i tot seguit haureu d'obrir i seguir l'enllaç per habilitar les funcions.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Confirmació de correu electrònic ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Això permet que altres usuaris registrats us enviïn un correu electrònic mitjançant l'enllaç &quot;Envia un correu electrònic&quot; que hi ha a la barra lateral de la vostra pàgina d'usuari. Els correus electrònics s'envien mitjançant una interfície web, i la vostra adreça no es revela als remitents fins que no els responeu per correu electrònic.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Aquesta opció us permet especificar quins usuaris no podran enviar-vos correus electrònics directes. No veuran l'enllaç &quot;Envia un correu electrònic&quot; a la barra lateral de la vostra pàgina d'usuari. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Aquí podeu triar l'aparença que voleu utilitzar. Podeu veure les aparences disponibles abans d'escollir-ne una, fent clic a l'enllaç &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; del costat de cada aparença. Consulteu l'ajuda {{ll|Help:Skins}} per a més detalls.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Format de la data i decalatge horari ===

Depenent de les preferències, normalment es representa el següent:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Aquí podeu determinar com es mostraran les imatges. Les imatges mostrades enganxant directament un URL (si el wiki ho permet) no es veuran afectades per aquest ajust.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Aquesta configuració us permet triar la mida de les previsualitzacions d'imatges definides en les pàgines com a imatge (Fitxer:). Si sabeu quina és la resolució de la vostra pantalla actual potser voldreu establir aquesta o una o dos mides més petites que la vostra pròpia pantalla, per a les imatges que s'hi mostrin. Si teniu una connexió lenta (com una línia commutada) és possible que vulgueu limitar-les a 320×240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Definiu la mida en que apareguin les miniatures. Aquest ajust no afectarà les miniatures amb dimensions determinades per un editor, ni pot augmentar les imatges més enllà de les seves dimensions originals.
* Utilitza el visor multimèdia: Als wikis de Wikimedia, aquesta opció (activada per defecte) determina si ha d'utilitzar-se el [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|visor multimèdia]], que proporciona una experiència més fluïda en la visualització d'imatges.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Aquí podeu controlar com es mostraran les equacions matemàtiques descrites utilitzant l'etiqueta {{tag|math|open}}.
Les fórmules matemàtiques carregades com imatges o escrites fora de l'etiqueta de matemàtiques no es veuran afectades per aquest ajust.
Tingueu en compte que les preferències de matemàtiques només seran visibles si {{ll|Extension:Math}} està instal·lat.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Aquestes són les opcions per al control d'edició de pàgines, incloent si són mostrades automàticament (&quot;Previsualització&quot;) les pàgines que acabeu d'editar o crear.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Aquí podeu especificar fins a quin dia enrere es mostraran les pàgines als [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|canvis recents]]. Noteu que la llista s'aturarà prematurament si se supera el nombre d'edicions a mostrar (vegeu més avall).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Aquí podeu especificar el nombre d'edicions que s'han de mostrar.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Us permet amagar edicions marcades com a menors (vegeu {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Ja que alguns usuaris fan ràpidament un munt de petits retocs per actualitzar plantilles o arreglar els errors ortogràfics, llavors és possible que aquesta opció us sigui útil. També podeu activar aquesta funció temporalment en la pàgina de canvis recents (vegeu {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Millora de canvis recent que condensa en la llista les edicions per pàgina. Com s'indica, requereix JavaScript per activar-se. Vegeu {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} per a més informació sobre aquesta funció.
* Mostra les modificacions de Wikidata en els canvis recents: En alguns projectes de Wikimedia que agafen dades de [[d:|Wikidata]], aquesta opció us permet veure els canvis dels elements de Wikidata que estan connectats amb les pàgines del vostre wiki, a més dels canvis de les pàgines wiki mateixes. Això pot ajudar a enxampar els actes vandàlics fets a Wikidata i que es podrien veure al vostre wiki.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Aquestes són les opcions per controlar el comportament de la llista (Vegeu {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
La majoria d'aquestes opcions també estan disponibles en la mateix pantalla de la llista de seguiment, però si les establiu en les vostres preferències, controlareu el comportament predeterminat de la llista de seguiment, llavors cada vegada que visiteu la llista, d'entrada, ja es realitzaran les mateixes accions.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Mostra les modificacions a Wikidata en la llista de seguiment: En alguns projectes de Wikimedia que agafen dades de [[d:|Wikidata]], aquesta opció us permet veure els canvis dels elements de Wikidata que estan connectats amb les pàgines del vostre wiki, a més dels canvis de les pàgines wiki mateixes. Això pot ajudar a enxampar els actes vandàlics fets a Wikidata i que es podrien veure al vostre wiki.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Testimoni de llista de seguiment: Aquest testimoni (''token'') s'utilitza per generar un [[w:ca:canal web|canal web (''web feed'')]] a partir de la vostra llista de seguiment. Qualsevol que el conegui pot utilitzar-lo per accedir a la vostra llista de seguiment. Si algú descobreix aquest testimoni, podeu crear-ne un altre mitjançant l'enllaç &quot;Cliqueu aquí si voleu restaurar-la&quot;; aleshores, en el vostre agregador haureu d'adaptar l'URL de la subscripció per reflectir-hi el canvi de testimoni.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Correspon a les opcions per defecte per a les cerques, incloent el nombre de resultats a mostrar i la quantitat de context per mostrar per a cada resultat.
Marqueu les caselles al costat dels espais de noms en els que voleu buscar, la primera vegada que busqueu alguna cosa.
Podeu anul·lar aquesta selecció en fer una cerca determinada, marcant o desmarcant les caselles de la part inferior de la pantalla de resultats de cerca.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
En els wikis de Wikimedia, la pestanya '''Funcionalitats beta''' us permet habilitar característiques experimentals abans no estiguin disponibles per a tothom.
Si escolliu habilitar qualsevol d'aquestes característiques, heu d'esperar trobar errors i problemes, i podríeu veure canvis sobtats en l'aspecte i el funcionament a mesura que la característica es vagi desenvolupant.

Cada característica té un enllaç &quot;Discussió&quot; al costat, perquè hi pugueu aportar suggeriments o informes d'errors.

Per a més informació, vegeu [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|Quant a les funcions beta]].

* Habilita automàticament totes les funcionalitats beta noves: Si activeu aquesta opció, les funcionalitats beta noves se us habilitaran tan aviat com s'afegeixin al sistema de funcionalitats beta.

== Vegeu també ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2kduqvbftne2jf8rh92gzr5hecrepb8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402279</id>
      <parentid>5402235</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:04:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12553" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=La informació actualitzada és disponible a Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

En fer clic en l'enllaç [[Special:preferences|Preferències]] de la part superior dreta mentre esteu connectat, us permetrà canviar les vostres preferències.
Se us presentarà la secció del Perfil d'usuari, així com una barra de pestanyes a la part superior per canviar altres tipus de configuracions.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || El vostre nom d'usuari. Només els usuaris de confiança poden canviar el vostre nom d’usuari i la wiki també ha de tenir instal·lada l’extensió {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Als wikis de Wikimedia, aquest enllaç us permet gestionar les aplicacions externes que tenen permís d'accedir al vostre compte. Per a més informació, vegeu {{ll|Help:OAuth}}.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Quantes edicions heu realitzat. No tots els wikis la tenen.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|vegeu més endavant]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|vegeu més endavant]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Per canviar la contrasenya, introduïu la contrasenya antiga, en la primera entrada de text, i la nova contrasenya en les dues últimes.
Si desitgeu que aquest lloc recordi les vostres dades d'accés, accepteu ''Recorda el meu inici de sessió en aquest equip''.
Tingueu en compte que aquesta funció requereix tenir les galetes habilitades en el vostre navegador, i si la galeta s'elimina o expira ja no serà recordada.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Compte global ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
Des de les vostres preferències podeu seleccionar en quin idioma us agradaria que es mostrés la interfície.
Només seran afectats els botons, com 'modifica' o 'discussió', així com unes poques pàgines de la barra lateral.
El text principal de les pàgines no serà canviat per a la majoria de les pàgines, però sí en algunes pàgines, com algunes de la Wikimedia Meta Wiki.

* Idiomes
* Com preferiu que se us descrigui?
* Més paràmetres d'idioma

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* La vostra signatura actual
* La signatura nova
** Tracta-la com a wikitext

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Si heu proporcionat una adreça de correu electrònic, haureu de fer clic en el botó &quot;verifica l'adreça&quot; per poder utilitzar aquestes funcions. Rebreu un missatge de correu electrònic, i tot seguit haureu d'obrir i seguir l'enllaç per habilitar les funcions.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Confirmació de correu electrònic ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Això permet que altres usuaris registrats us enviïn un correu electrònic mitjançant l'enllaç &quot;Envia un correu electrònic&quot; que hi ha a la barra lateral de la vostra pàgina d'usuari. Els correus electrònics s'envien mitjançant una interfície web, i la vostra adreça no es revela als remitents fins que no els responeu per correu electrònic.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Aquesta opció us permet especificar quins usuaris no podran enviar-vos correus electrònics directes. No veuran l'enllaç &quot;Envia un correu electrònic&quot; a la barra lateral de la vostra pàgina d'usuari. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Aquí podeu triar l'aparença que voleu utilitzar. Podeu veure les aparences disponibles abans d'escollir-ne una, fent clic a l'enllaç &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; del costat de cada aparença. Consulteu l'ajuda {{ll|Help:Skins}} per a més detalls.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Format de la data i decalatge horari ===

Depenent de les preferències, normalment es representa el següent:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Aquí podeu determinar com es mostraran les imatges. Les imatges mostrades enganxant directament un URL (si el wiki ho permet) no es veuran afectades per aquest ajust.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Aquesta configuració us permet triar la mida de les previsualitzacions d'imatges definides en les pàgines com a imatge (Fitxer:). Si sabeu quina és la resolució de la vostra pantalla actual potser voldreu establir aquesta o una o dos mides més petites que la vostra pròpia pantalla, per a les imatges que s'hi mostrin. Si teniu una connexió lenta (com una línia commutada) és possible que vulgueu limitar-les a 320×240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Definiu la mida en que apareguin les miniatures. Aquest ajust no afectarà les miniatures amb dimensions determinades per un editor, ni pot augmentar les imatges més enllà de les seves dimensions originals.
* Utilitza el visor multimèdia: Als wikis de Wikimedia, aquesta opció (activada per defecte) determina si ha d'utilitzar-se el [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|visor multimèdia]], que proporciona una experiència més fluïda en la visualització d'imatges.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Aquí podeu controlar com es mostraran les equacions matemàtiques descrites utilitzant l'etiqueta {{tag|math|open}}.
Les fórmules matemàtiques carregades com imatges o escrites fora de l'etiqueta de matemàtiques no es veuran afectades per aquest ajust.
Tingueu en compte que les preferències de matemàtiques només seran visibles si {{ll|Extension:Math}} està instal·lat.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Aquestes són les opcions per al control d'edició de pàgines, incloent si són mostrades automàticament (&quot;Previsualització&quot;) les pàgines que acabeu d'editar o crear.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Aquí podeu especificar fins a quin dia enrere es mostraran les pàgines als [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|canvis recents]]. Noteu que la llista s'aturarà prematurament si se supera el nombre d'edicions a mostrar (vegeu més avall).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Aquí podeu especificar el nombre d'edicions que s'han de mostrar.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Us permet amagar edicions marcades com a menors (vegeu {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Ja que alguns usuaris fan ràpidament un munt de petits retocs per actualitzar plantilles o arreglar els errors ortogràfics, llavors és possible que aquesta opció us sigui útil. També podeu activar aquesta funció temporalment en la pàgina de canvis recents (vegeu {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Millora de canvis recent que condensa en la llista les edicions per pàgina. Com s'indica, requereix JavaScript per activar-se. Vegeu {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} per a més informació sobre aquesta funció.
* Mostra les modificacions de Wikidata en els canvis recents: En alguns projectes de Wikimedia que agafen dades de [[d:|Wikidata]], aquesta opció us permet veure els canvis dels elements de Wikidata que estan connectats amb les pàgines del vostre wiki, a més dels canvis de les pàgines wiki mateixes. Això pot ajudar a enxampar els actes vandàlics fets a Wikidata i que es podrien veure al vostre wiki.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Aquestes són les opcions per controlar el comportament de la llista (Vegeu {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
La majoria d'aquestes opcions també estan disponibles en la mateix pantalla de la llista de seguiment, però si les establiu en les vostres preferències, controlareu el comportament predeterminat de la llista de seguiment, llavors cada vegada que visiteu la llista, d'entrada, ja es realitzaran les mateixes accions.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Mostra les modificacions a Wikidata en la llista de seguiment: En alguns projectes de Wikimedia que agafen dades de [[d:|Wikidata]], aquesta opció us permet veure els canvis dels elements de Wikidata que estan connectats amb les pàgines del vostre wiki, a més dels canvis de les pàgines wiki mateixes. Això pot ajudar a enxampar els actes vandàlics fets a Wikidata i que es podrien veure al vostre wiki.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Testimoni de llista de seguiment: Aquest testimoni (''token'') s'utilitza per generar un [[w:ca:canal web|canal web (''web feed'')]] a partir de la vostra llista de seguiment. Qualsevol que el conegui pot utilitzar-lo per accedir a la vostra llista de seguiment. Si algú descobreix aquest testimoni, podeu crear-ne un altre mitjançant l'enllaç &quot;Cliqueu aquí si voleu restaurar-la&quot;; aleshores, en el vostre agregador haureu d'adaptar l'URL de la subscripció per reflectir-hi el canvi de testimoni.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Correspon a les opcions per defecte per a les cerques, incloent el nombre de resultats a mostrar i la quantitat de context per mostrar per a cada resultat.
Marqueu les caselles al costat dels espais de noms en els que voleu buscar, la primera vegada que busqueu alguna cosa.
Podeu anul·lar aquesta selecció en fer una cerca determinada, marcant o desmarcant les caselles de la part inferior de la pantalla de resultats de cerca.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
En els wikis de Wikimedia, la pestanya '''Funcionalitats beta''' us permet habilitar característiques experimentals abans no estiguin disponibles per a tothom.
Si escolliu habilitar qualsevol d'aquestes característiques, heu d'esperar trobar errors i problemes, i podríeu veure canvis sobtats en l'aspecte i el funcionament a mesura que la característica es vagi desenvolupant.

Cada característica té un enllaç &quot;Discussió&quot; al costat, perquè hi pugueu aportar suggeriments o informes d'errors.

Per a més informació, vegeu [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|Quant a les funcions beta]].

* Habilita automàticament totes les funcionalitats beta noves: Si activeu aquesta opció, les funcionalitats beta noves se us habilitaran tan aviat com s'afegeixin al sistema de funcionalitats beta.

== Vegeu també ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>cdazpqk3wtp2e4he4kq08z07x8x0fys</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/zh</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>226801</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403031</id>
      <parentid>5133436</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6180" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{NoteTA|G1=MediaWiki}}
欢迎来到'''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|可视化编辑器]]'''的主题。可视化编辑器（VisualEditor，简称VE）是由维基媒体基金会开发用于编辑维基百科的新方式，让人们编辑前无需学习 wiki 标记，我们希望可视化编辑器能降低人们为维基百科贡献的门槛。

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | 参阅'''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''。
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''汇报'''可视化编辑器的问题]。
|-
| 了解如何制作链接，添加或移动图片，创建引文，插入模板，编辑表格等。
|了解如何制作链接，添加或移动图片，创建引文，插入模板，编辑表格等。
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== 关于可视化编辑器 ==

可视化编辑器是通过直观可视的方式编辑维基百科。一直以来，编辑维基百科时需要人们熟悉 wiki 标记（一种复杂的标记语言），只是对页面做出微小的改动也是如此。在 2001 年这尚可接受，到了 2013 年这造成了[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|贡献者的逃离]]。我们希望可视化编辑器能提高现有贡献者的积极性并能得到新人的喜欢。 

2012年12月以来可视化编辑器已在英语维基百科中作为“alpha”版提供，[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 2013年4月起又增加了14种语言版本]，同年6月[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ 其他所有语言的维基百科]都可以选择打开可视化编辑器了。2014年6月后我们在过半版本的维基百科正式启用，所以无论您是否登录都可以使用。我们期待2014年末到2015年初的时候所有语言版本维基百科都能使用.
我们希望默认情况下在2015年下半年提供大部分[[VisualEditor/Rollouts|其余语言]]。
从2014年11月末开始，除维基词典和维基文库之外的所有基金会wiki站台作为选择性开启的[[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|测试功能]]提供。

我们正在发布[[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|多语言新闻报]]，专注于维基媒体wiki。

== 使用可视化编辑器 ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

如果您对使用可视化编辑器感兴趣，我们有一个[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|手册]]，以及[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|键盘快捷键列表]]。

当前可视化编辑器还有一些bug和限制。如果遇到问题，请[[VisualEditor/Feedback|报告至反馈页]]。当前的限制包括：

* '''加载缓慢''' — 对于较长、较复杂的页面，加载到可视化编辑器需要不少时间。未来该工具会快很多且能加载更大的页面。
* '''不完全编辑''' — 一些格式复杂的元素可以显示和编辑内容，但尚不能编辑结构和添加新条目，例如列表定义。添加这种功能是我们首要任务之一。
* '''适用于大部分内容页，不包括讨论页''' — 只有在某些名字空间才能启用可视化编辑器。在大部分维基百科中，它可用于条目、用户页（User:）、文件（File:）、帮助（Help:）和分类（Category:）页面中。目前可视化编辑器无法支持维基百科（Wikipedia:）页面或任何讨论页。

我们建议用户在保存页面前点击“{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}”和[[VisualEditor/Feedback|报告遇到的问题]]。

== 如何帮助 ==

为了让可视化编辑器尽可能完善，我们有许多事情需要大家辅助。显然，最重要的是使用软件、找出问题并[[VisualEditor/Feedback|反馈]]。不过还有许多其他事情需要帮忙，包括：

* '''更新帮助页''' — 我们所有项目的帮助都是为了降低新用户贡献的门槛。遗憾的是目前的帮助都围绕源代码标记器，随着可视化编辑器的开发，截图和教程都会过时。如果有人能根据[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|我们写的可视化编辑器教程]][[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|更新帮助页]]，将能起很大作用。
* '''添加 TemplateData 到模板''' — 可视化编辑器是个出色的模板编辑器，详细说明在[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|帮助页]]。您在维基百科中使用时将看到某些模板含有命名参数和说明，使用起来更方便，另一些则不然。这是由于该功能需要“TemplateData”才有效。如果您有兴趣编辑 TemplateData，我们用[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|操作教程]]以及[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|待处理的最重要模板列表]].
* '''帮助您的社区'''—参见[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|有用的方式列表，以帮助您的本地社区]]使用可视化编辑器优化编辑体验
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''帮助新用户''' — 如果可视化编辑器成功运行，我们将有更多的新用户，尽管页面编辑简单了，不过他们与社群的融合仍然任重道远。请多花些时间到[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|咨询台或 IRC 帮助频道]]帮助这些新用户适应维基百科。
&lt;/div&gt;

==参见==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - 一个关于优化您的wiki和您的同行编辑的编辑体验的清单。
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - 获得和提供帮助与视觉编辑器相关的工作从和其他Wikimedians像你
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - 一个以前的指南，为完全新的视觉编辑社区。

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>hvbj4ae5kbptoxke99b69xbwlyq7sfe</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/es</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>228233</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402481</id>
      <parentid>5202594</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:11:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9764" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = Niklas Laxström, Siebrand Mazeland y otros
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=Incluído en Language Extension Bundle}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=Documentación de usuario}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = Habilita traducción y verificación intra-wiki
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] – o [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view prueba ahora cómo traducir una página]
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

La extensión '''Translate''' convierte a MediaWiki en una poderosa herramienta para traducir cualquier tipo de texto. Se usa especialmente para traducir software y para administrar adecuadamente wikis multi-idioma.

== Funcionalidades ==

La extensión Translate tiene muchas funcionalidades específicamente orientadas a traductores, mientras hace que la integración con el código fuente sea tan fácil como sea posible. Todo se ejecuta dentro de [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|MediaWiki]], lo que permite a los usuarios un grado de libertad casi infinito para comunicarse y auto-organizarse.

Algunas funcionalidades:

* '''Traducción de páginas de contenido con estructura wiki.'''
* '''Localización en-wiki y exportación de mensajes de interfaz de software (o de casi todo).'''
* '''[[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overview/|Interfaz]] web de traducción y corrección, como también importación y exportación basadas en gettext para traducción sin conexión.'''
* '''Diversas ayudas para simplificar el trabajo de los traductores:'''
** muestra las traducciones en otras lenguas definidas globalmente, que opcionalmente puede expandirse para incluir lenguas definidas por el usuario;
** edición colaborativa de la documentación de uso y contexto de los mensajes;
** memoria de traducción y traducción mecánica con herramientas externas (Apertium, Microsoft Translator, Yandex.Translate);
** vista del último cambio en el mensaje fuente;
** advertencias sobre errores comunes, como parámetros que no son usados.
* Módulos pre-diseñados para varios productos de código abierto que puedes usar como ejemplo.
** Soporte para varios formatos, incluyendo: PHP, propiedades de Java, Gettext, YAML y AndroidXml (véase {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} y [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|Soporte de formato de archivo]]).
* Un sistema de complementos versátil para facilitar el agregado de nuevos proyectos como un grupo de mensajes.
* Estatísticas varias:
** porcentajes de traducciones completadas para todos los grupos de mensajes en todos los idiomas soportados;
** porcentajes de traducciones completadas para todos los idiomas soportados para cualquier grupo de mensajes soportado;
** herramienta para hacer gráficos de actividad de periodos de tiempo. Puede mostrar ya sea números de ediciones o usuarios activos por día o por hora e incluye muchos filtros;
** visto global de idiomas y traductores activos.

La extensión Translate, con su gran base de usuarios, es compatible con todos los navegadores razonablemente recientes, excepto algunos errores mínimos (de estilo) que son arreglados rápidamente.

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|''Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality'': esta presentación muestra cómo la extensión Translate puede convertir a una wiki realmente multi-idioma, basado en la experiencia de la wiki UserBase de KDE.
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|Niklas Laxström, ''Translating the wiki way: Simple, fast, fun'', Wikimania 2012 (diapositivas disponibles).
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Soporte y documentación ==

* Véase [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|Instalación]]
* Véase [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|Configuración]]
* Véase [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Documentación del usuario]] — incluye tutoriales
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|Getting started with Translate extension development]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* Soporte en vivo en el #translatewiki canal IRC en Libera Chat (los mejores momentos son en días europeos y por la tarde)
* Reporta todos los problemas y pedidos de funciones en el [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate sistema de seguimiento de incidencias]

La extensión Translate fue desarrollada originalmente por [[User:Nikerabbit]]; muchos otros usuarios, como [[User:Raymond]], [[User:SPQRobin]] y el equipo de lenguas de Wikimedia, han contribuido a su código y documentación. Es mantenida por [[User:Nikerabbit]] y [[User:Siebrand]].

== Usuarios importantes de la extensión Translate ==
* https://translatewiki.net — El sitio wiki y la comunidad más grande para la traducción de la interfaz de software libre.
* https://userbase.kde.org — Wiki de documentación para el proyecto KDE que usa extensivamente la función de traducción de página.
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — Tranduce contenido wiki y usa la función de estado de grupos. La traducción y su revisión están habilitadas para casi todos los usuarios de la wiki.
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

Ver más en [[Wikipedia:translatewiki.net#Notable uses]].

=== Testimonios ===

Tom Hutchison de Joomla:
{{quotation|1=
La extensión Translate permite la conexión a un servicio de traducción y puede auto-completar la traducción por ti. Al mismo tiempo, un traductor puede hacer ajustes así tu no creas muchas páginas con traducciones imprecisas.

Eso está bien si están en diferentes continentes.
Eso es en realidad una ventaja porque el trabajo se hace las 24 horas del día.
Lo que necesitan es un chat grupal de soporte.
Todos son capaces de leer en inglés si están traduciendo, ¿verdad?. Enseña algunas marcas wiki simples, como enlaces y qué hacer con las categorías.
Entonces ellos ayudan a otros que a su vez ayudan a los demás.
Tenemos más de 40 en un chat para ayudarnos unos a otros y divertirnos al mismo tiempo.
Y todos estaban asustados de la wiki, pero no podían creer lo fácil que era una vez que empezaron.
Ellos en realidad están esperando que haga más traducciones porque no puedo mantenerme al día con ellos.
Sé que hay sólo 1 traduciendo este o aquel idioma.
Nosotros también tenemos eso.
Una persona está trabajando en swahili mientras otro lo hace en japonés.
Además, tu marcas páginas para su traducción.
Tu controlas si se debe incluir plantillas o excluir variables en las invocaciones de plantillas.
}}


== Véase también ==
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – una extensión para facilitar la comunicación con los traductores.

No debe confundirse con:

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – usada para la traducción por única vez de páginas del wiki de un idioma a otro.
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Abstract Wikipedia]] for translation.&lt;/span&gt;

== Cómo contribuir ==

* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all Traduce esta extensión en translatewiki.net]
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|Reporta errores y solicita funciones]]
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|Más errores sin resolver y pedidos de funciones en translatewiki.net]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Corrige y traduce la documentación de la extension Translate]]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>bbpv9w5r7c39zcfpg5ex45raudylvbl</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:$wgSMTP/pt-br</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>229691</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401956</id>
      <parentid>5401398</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:48:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;==== require_once(): Falha na abertura requerida 'Net/Socket.php ======= Verifique seu LocalSettings.php para quaisquer linhas que chamem $include. Estas não devem ser necessárias, mas podem atrapalhar o suporte SMTP. Retire-as do LocalSettings.php se estiverem presentes.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9531" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{SettingSummary
|name=SMTP
|version_min=1.2.0
|section=Email settings
|range=''(veja abaixo)''
|default=&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; inline&gt;false&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|summary=Para utilizar uma conexão direta (autenticada) com o servidor SMTP.
|sensitive=yes
}}
== Detalhes ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To send emails (email confirmations, notifications, {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUserEmail|Special:Emailuser}}), you should use a third party email provider and allow MediaWiki to send email with it through [[w:SMTP|SMTP]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The settings are stored as an array in $wgSMTP.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Defina como false (o valor padrão) para usar a função embutida [http://php.net/function.mail PHP mail()].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also configure {{wg|EmergencyContact}} and make sure {{wg|PasswordSender}} matches the sending email address.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
$wgSMTP is configured like so:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgSMTP = [
    'host'     =&gt; 'mail.example.com', // could also be an IP address. Where the SMTP server is located. If using SSL or TLS, add the prefix &quot;ssl://&quot; or &quot;tls://&quot;.
    'IDHost'   =&gt; 'example.com',      // Generally this will be the domain name of your website (aka mywiki.org)
    'port'     =&gt; 587,                // Port to use when connecting to the SMTP server
    'auth'     =&gt; true,               // Should we use SMTP authentication (true or false)
    'username' =&gt; 'my_user_name',     // Username to use for SMTP authentication (if being used)
    'password' =&gt; 'my_password'       // Password to use for SMTP authentication (if being used)
];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

'IDHost' é uma configuração específica do MediaWiki usado para construir o cabeçalho de e-mail ID de mensagens (veja [http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2822.html RFC 2822, sec 3.6.4] para mais informações sobre uma ID de mensagem formatada corretamente).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If not provided, will default to {{ll|Manual:$wgServer|$wgServer}}.&lt;/span&gt;
Para as demais configurações, consulte [http://pear.php.net/manual/en/package.mail.mail.factory.php Mail::factory()] para uma descrição mais completa.
(Role para baixo até o parâmetro &lt;code&gt;smtp&lt;/code&gt;.)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Install dependencies for older versions of MediaWiki (version {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31}} and earlier)
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Collapse top|For MediaWiki version 1.31 and earlier}}
{{Warning|1=Esta configuração requer o pacote [http://pear.php.net/package/Mail Mail] do [[:pt:PEAR|PEAR]] para ser insltalado (execute &lt;code&gt;pear install MAIL Net_SMTP&lt;/code&gt;, e você pode executar o &quot;pear list&quot; para confirmar). &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since MediaWiki 1.27 ({{git commit|a372e170ddffecd0b1f23e03bf4f96e1e521d490}}), the required PEAR dependencies are already bundled.&lt;/span&gt; Se você receber uma mensagem de erro informando que o PEAR não está instalado, então instale &lt;code&gt;php-pear&lt;/code&gt; e, em seguida, tente novamente. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It may also cause conflicts if you have different versions of those PEAR packages installed on your system.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In that case, you can remove the installed ones with the command &lt;code&gt;pear uninstall mail pear/Auth_SASL net_smtp&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also install [https://packagist.org/packages/pear/mail pear/mail] with Composer with the command:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;composer require pear/mail&lt;/code&gt;
}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki 1.31 added &lt;code&gt;pear/mail&lt;/code&gt; to the &lt;code&gt;required&lt;/code&gt; section of &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt;, thereby bundling it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Previously (MW 1.26 to 1.30) it had only be in the &lt;code&gt;suggest&lt;/code&gt; section.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As such, for MW 1.31+ installation of &lt;code&gt;pear/mail&lt;/code&gt; is not required.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, &lt;code&gt;pear/net_smtp&lt;/code&gt; was not added to &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; until MW 1.32, and thus it must be installed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For MediaWiki 1.30 and earlier &lt;code&gt;pear/mail&lt;/code&gt; must be installed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These packages can be installed with Composer by creating a &lt;code&gt;composer.local.json&lt;/code&gt; like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;require&quot;: {
		&quot;pear/mail&quot;: &quot;1.4.1&quot;,
		&quot;pear/net_smtp&quot;: &quot;1.8.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Composer#Using composer-merge-plugin|Using composer-merge-plugin]].
&lt;/div&gt;
{{collapse bottom}}

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Exemplos===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:$wgSMTP/AWS SES|AWS SES}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgSMTP/Gmail|Gmail}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgSMTP/Hetzner|Hetzner}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgSMTP/Host Europe|Host Europe}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgSMTP/Internal network|Internal network}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgSMTP/Outlook Exchange Server|Outlook Exchange Server}}

{{anchor|Troubleshooting_email}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Error sending mail: Unknown error in PHP's mail() function MediaWiki===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be sure that {{wg|EmergencyContact}} and {{wg|PasswordSender}} are set correctly, and match your email address.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some hosts will reject to send an email with a sender that doesn't match the account that sends the email.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your server has {{ll|SELinux|SELinux}} enabled, be sure to configure it correctly to enable sending mails from the webserver.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Error sending mail: authentication failure SMTP: STARTTLS ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PEAR's mail will try to use [[w:Transport Layer Security|TLS]] when connecting to the mail server if the server supports it, even if you don't specify ssl:// in the host.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;But if the server certificate is not valid ([[w:Certificate authority|CA]] not trusted, certificate has expired, [[w:X.509|CN]] does not match server name/IP address, etc.) it will refuse to work, and instead you'll get the following error:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
authentication failure [SMTP: STARTTLS failed (code: 220, response: begin TLS negotiation)]
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You must fix the certificate issues for mail to work.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Timeout issues ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the incorrect port is used, email will [[w:Timeout (computing)|timeout]] without returning an error, and the website will appear unresponsive to the user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consult your email provider's manual or try the other common [[w:Opportunistic TLS#SSL ports|SMTP ports]]: 25, 465, and 587.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Timeout issues with AWS SES
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, Amazon EC2 throttles traffic on SMTP port 25 for all instances.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you continue to receive timeout errors using SMTP port 25, you can request that the throttle be removed or you can change the port that is used for sending (for example, 587).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more information, see [https://aws.amazon.com/premiumsupport/knowledge-center/smtp-connectivity-timeout-issues-ses/?nc1=h_ls How do I troubleshoot SMTP connectivity or timeout issues with Amazon SES?]&lt;/span&gt;

==== require_once(): Falha na abertura requerida 'Net/Socket.php =======
Verifique seu LocalSettings.php para quaisquer linhas que chamem &lt;code&gt;set_include_path&lt;/code&gt;. Estas não devem ser necessárias, mas podem atrapalhar o suporte SMTP. Retire-as do LocalSettings.php se estiverem presentes.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Mailserver does not accept sender (From) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are not able to send any email because your mailserver says something like &quot;you are not authorized to use this sender&quot; (or something like that), first check if your &quot;SMTP username&quot; is consistent with your email sender (see {{ll|Manual:$wgPasswordSender|$wgPasswordSender}}) then, if you have an old wiki, see {{ll|Manual:$wgUserEmailUseReplyTo|$wgUserEmailUseReplyTo}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you don't solve it, contact your mailserver.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Reflist}}


== Ver também ==
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Configuration&lt;/span&gt; :
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings#Email settings}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various settings related to email&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableEmail}} (enabled by default)
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions&lt;/span&gt; :
* {{ll|Extension:Mailgun}}
* {{ll|Extension:SesMailer}}
* {{ll|Extension:SwiftMailer}}

[[Category:$wgSMTP{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>rab75x05396wkp214qkpz7zxxctq2zd</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401958</id>
      <parentid>5401956</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:48:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9526" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{SettingSummary
|name=SMTP
|version_min=1.2.0
|section=Email settings
|range=''(veja abaixo)''
|default=&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; inline&gt;false&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|summary=Para utilizar uma conexão direta (autenticada) com o servidor SMTP.
|sensitive=yes
}}
== Detalhes ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To send emails (email confirmations, notifications, {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUserEmail|Special:Emailuser}}), you should use a third party email provider and allow MediaWiki to send email with it through [[w:SMTP|SMTP]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The settings are stored as an array in $wgSMTP.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Defina como false (o valor padrão) para usar a função embutida [http://php.net/function.mail PHP mail()].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also configure {{wg|EmergencyContact}} and make sure {{wg|PasswordSender}} matches the sending email address.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
$wgSMTP is configured like so:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgSMTP = [
    'host'     =&gt; 'mail.example.com', // could also be an IP address. Where the SMTP server is located. If using SSL or TLS, add the prefix &quot;ssl://&quot; or &quot;tls://&quot;.
    'IDHost'   =&gt; 'example.com',      // Generally this will be the domain name of your website (aka mywiki.org)
    'port'     =&gt; 587,                // Port to use when connecting to the SMTP server
    'auth'     =&gt; true,               // Should we use SMTP authentication (true or false)
    'username' =&gt; 'my_user_name',     // Username to use for SMTP authentication (if being used)
    'password' =&gt; 'my_password'       // Password to use for SMTP authentication (if being used)
];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

'IDHost' é uma configuração específica do MediaWiki usado para construir o cabeçalho de e-mail ID de mensagens (veja [http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2822.html RFC 2822, sec 3.6.4] para mais informações sobre uma ID de mensagem formatada corretamente).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If not provided, will default to {{ll|Manual:$wgServer|$wgServer}}.&lt;/span&gt;
Para as demais configurações, consulte [http://pear.php.net/manual/en/package.mail.mail.factory.php Mail::factory()] para uma descrição mais completa.
(Role para baixo até o parâmetro &lt;code&gt;smtp&lt;/code&gt;.)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Install dependencies for older versions of MediaWiki (version {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31}} and earlier)
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Collapse top|For MediaWiki version 1.31 and earlier}}
{{Warning|1=Esta configuração requer o pacote [http://pear.php.net/package/Mail Mail] do [[:pt:PEAR|PEAR]] para ser insltalado (execute &lt;code&gt;pear install MAIL Net_SMTP&lt;/code&gt;, e você pode executar o &quot;pear list&quot; para confirmar). &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since MediaWiki 1.27 ({{git commit|a372e170ddffecd0b1f23e03bf4f96e1e521d490}}), the required PEAR dependencies are already bundled.&lt;/span&gt; Se você receber uma mensagem de erro informando que o PEAR não está instalado, então instale &lt;code&gt;php-pear&lt;/code&gt; e, em seguida, tente novamente. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It may also cause conflicts if you have different versions of those PEAR packages installed on your system.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In that case, you can remove the installed ones with the command &lt;code&gt;pear uninstall mail pear/Auth_SASL net_smtp&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also install [https://packagist.org/packages/pear/mail pear/mail] with Composer with the command:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;composer require pear/mail&lt;/code&gt;
}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki 1.31 added &lt;code&gt;pear/mail&lt;/code&gt; to the &lt;code&gt;required&lt;/code&gt; section of &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt;, thereby bundling it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Previously (MW 1.26 to 1.30) it had only be in the &lt;code&gt;suggest&lt;/code&gt; section.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As such, for MW 1.31+ installation of &lt;code&gt;pear/mail&lt;/code&gt; is not required.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, &lt;code&gt;pear/net_smtp&lt;/code&gt; was not added to &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; until MW 1.32, and thus it must be installed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For MediaWiki 1.30 and earlier &lt;code&gt;pear/mail&lt;/code&gt; must be installed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These packages can be installed with Composer by creating a &lt;code&gt;composer.local.json&lt;/code&gt; like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;require&quot;: {
		&quot;pear/mail&quot;: &quot;1.4.1&quot;,
		&quot;pear/net_smtp&quot;: &quot;1.8.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Composer#Using composer-merge-plugin|Using composer-merge-plugin]].
&lt;/div&gt;
{{collapse bottom}}

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Exemplos===
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:$wgSMTP/AWS SES|AWS SES}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgSMTP/Gmail|Gmail}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgSMTP/Hetzner|Hetzner}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgSMTP/Host Europe|Host Europe}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgSMTP/Internal network|Internal network}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgSMTP/Outlook Exchange Server|Outlook Exchange Server}}

{{anchor|Troubleshooting_email}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Error sending mail: Unknown error in PHP's mail() function MediaWiki===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be sure that {{wg|EmergencyContact}} and {{wg|PasswordSender}} are set correctly, and match your email address.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some hosts will reject to send an email with a sender that doesn't match the account that sends the email.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your server has {{ll|SELinux|SELinux}} enabled, be sure to configure it correctly to enable sending mails from the webserver.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Error sending mail: authentication failure SMTP: STARTTLS ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PEAR's mail will try to use [[w:Transport Layer Security|TLS]] when connecting to the mail server if the server supports it, even if you don't specify ssl:// in the host.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;But if the server certificate is not valid ([[w:Certificate authority|CA]] not trusted, certificate has expired, [[w:X.509|CN]] does not match server name/IP address, etc.) it will refuse to work, and instead you'll get the following error:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
authentication failure [SMTP: STARTTLS failed (code: 220, response: begin TLS negotiation)]
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You must fix the certificate issues for mail to work.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Timeout issues ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the incorrect port is used, email will [[w:Timeout (computing)|timeout]] without returning an error, and the website will appear unresponsive to the user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consult your email provider's manual or try the other common [[w:Opportunistic TLS#SSL ports|SMTP ports]]: 25, 465, and 587.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Timeout issues with AWS SES
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, Amazon EC2 throttles traffic on SMTP port 25 for all instances.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you continue to receive timeout errors using SMTP port 25, you can request that the throttle be removed or you can change the port that is used for sending (for example, 587).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more information, see [https://aws.amazon.com/premiumsupport/knowledge-center/smtp-connectivity-timeout-issues-ses/?nc1=h_ls How do I troubleshoot SMTP connectivity or timeout issues with Amazon SES?]&lt;/span&gt;

=== require_once(): Falha na abertura requerida 'Net/Socket.php ===
Verifique seu LocalSettings.php para quaisquer linhas que chamem &lt;code&gt;set_include_path&lt;/code&gt;. Estas não devem ser necessárias, mas podem atrapalhar o suporte SMTP. Retire-as do LocalSettings.php se estiverem presentes.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Mailserver does not accept sender (From) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are not able to send any email because your mailserver says something like &quot;you are not authorized to use this sender&quot; (or something like that), first check if your &quot;SMTP username&quot; is consistent with your email sender (see {{ll|Manual:$wgPasswordSender|$wgPasswordSender}}) then, if you have an old wiki, see {{ll|Manual:$wgUserEmailUseReplyTo|$wgUserEmailUseReplyTo}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you don't solve it, contact your mailserver.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Reflist}}


== Ver também ==
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Configuration&lt;/span&gt; :
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings#Email settings}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various settings related to email&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableEmail}} (enabled by default)
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions&lt;/span&gt; :
* {{ll|Extension:Mailgun}}
* {{ll|Extension:SesMailer}}
* {{ll|Extension:SwiftMailer}}

[[Category:$wgSMTP{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>oetzxi74ep9z9cx688enf9so3mhshbi</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/pt</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>230267</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402493</id>
      <parentid>5261518</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:14:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9925" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = Niklas Laxström, Siebrand Mazeland e outros
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=Incluída na &quot;Language Extension Bundle&quot;}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=Documentação do utilizador}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = Permite a tradução e revisão na wiki.
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] – ou [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view experimente agora em como traduzir uma página]
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

A extensão '''Translate''' torna o MediaWiki numa ferramenta poderosa para traduzir qualquer tipo de texto. Esta é utilizada especialmente para traduzir programas e para gerir wikis multilíngue de uma maneira sensível.

== Funcionalidades ==

A extensão 'Traduzir' tem muitas funcionalidades dirigidas especificamente aos tradutores, enquanto que torna a integração de &quot;back-end&quot; com o código fonte atual, tão fácil quanto possível. Entretanto, todo é executado dentro da [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|MediaWiki]], que permite aos utilizadores uma liberdade ilimitada para a comunicação e auto organização.

As funcionalidades incluem:

* '''Tradução de página de conteúdo da wiki estruturada.'''
* '''Localização na wiki e exportação de mensagens da interface do software (ou praticamente qualquer coisa).'''
* '''Tradução e revisão baseada na [[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overvioew/|interface]] da Web, bem como exportação e importação baseada em gettext para a tradução &lt;i&gt;off-line&lt;/i&gt; .'''
* '''Várias ajudas para tornar mais fácil o trabalho dos tradutores:'''
** exibição das traduções em outros idiomas definidos globalmente, opcionalmente expandidas com idiomas definidos pelo utilizador;
** edição colaborativa da documentação da utilização e contexto de mensagens;
** memória de tradução e tradução automática com ferramentas externas (Apertium, Microsoft Translator, Yandex.Translate);
** exibição da última alteração na mensagem fonte;
** avisos sobre os erros comuns, tal como parâmetros que não são utilizados.
* Módulos prefabricados para vários produtos de código aberto que pode utilizar como um exemplo.
** Apoio para vários formatos, incluindo: PHP, propriedades de Java, Gettext, YAML e AndroidXml (consulte {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} e [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|apoio de formato de 'Ficheiro']]).
* Um sistema de plug-in versàtil para tornar mais fácil adicionar novos projectos, como um grupo de mensagens.
* Várias estatísticas:
** percentagens das traduções completas para todos os grupos de mensagem em todos os idiomas suportados;
** percentagens das traduções completas em todos os idiomas suportados para qualquer grupos de mensagem suportado;
** ferramenta para criar gráficos de atividade para períodos de tempo. Pode exibir o número de edições ou utilizadores ativos diariamente ou de hora em hora e inclui muitos filtros;
** resumo da nuvem dos idiomas e tradutores ativos.

A extensão 'Traduzir', devido à sua grande base de utilizadores, está confirmada como compatível com todos os navegadores razoavelmente recentes, exceto algumas pequenas falhas (de estilo) que são corrigidas rapidamente.

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|&quot;Tornado as Wikis Multilíngues numa Realidade&quot;: esta apresentação mostra como a extensão 'Traduzir' pode tornar uma wiki verdadeiramente multilíngue, baseado na experiência da wiki KDE UserBase.
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|Niklas Laxström, ''Traduzir no modo da wiki: Simples, rápido, divertido'', Wikimania 2012 (disponíveis diapositivos).
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Apoio e documentação ==

* Consulte a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|Instalação]]
* Consulte a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|Configuração]]
* Consulte a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Documentação do Utilizador]] - inclui tutoriais
* Consulte [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|Introdução ao desenvolvimento da extensão 'Traduzir']]
* Apoio &lt;i&gt;live&lt;/i&gt; no canal IRC #translatewiki em Libera Chat (as melhores horas são os dias e as noites europeias)
* Por favor, reporte todos os problemas e pedidos de funcionalidades no [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate monitorizador de problemas]

A extensão 'Traduzir' foi originalmente desenvolvida por [[User:Nikerabbit]]; muitos outros utilizadores, tais como [[User:Raymond]], [[User:SPQRobin]] e a equipa de Idiomas da Wikimedia, contribuíram com o seu código e documentação. É mantida por [[User:Nikerabbit]] e [[User:Siebrand]].

== Utilizadores proeminentes da extensão 'Traduzir' ==
* https://translatewiki.net — O maior &lt;i&gt;site&lt;/i&gt; baseado na wiki e na comunidade para tradução da interface do programa de código aberto.
* https://userbase.kde.org — Wiki de documentação para o projeto KDE que utiliza extensivamente a funcionalidade de tradução de página.
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — Traduz o conteúdo da wiki e utiliza a funcionalidade do estado de grupos. A tradução e a revisão da mesma está ativada para quase todos os utilizadores da wiki.
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

Consulte mais em [[w:translatewiki.net#Notable uses|utilizações notáveis de translatewiki.net on Wikipedia]].

=== Testemunhos ===

Tom Hutchison de Joomla:
{{quotation|1=
A extensão 'Traduzir' permite a ligação a um serviço de tradução e pode completar automaticamente a tradução para si. Ao mesmo tempo, um tradutor pode efetuar ajustes, e assim não cria muitas páginas com traduções imprecisas.

Está bem, se eles estiverem em continentes diferentes.
Isso é realmente uma vantagem porque o trabalho está a sendo efetuado 24 horas por dia.
O que eles precisam é de uma conversação em grupo.
Eles seriam capazes de ler em inglês se eles estiverem a traduzir, certo? Ensine algumas marcações da wiki simples, tal como as hiperligações e o que fazer com as categorias.
Depois, eles ajudam outros que por sua vez ajudam outros.
Nós temos mais de 40 numa conversação que se ajudam entre eles e divertem-se ao mesmo tempo.
E eles estavam assustados com a wiki, mas não podiam acreditar como foi fácil quando começaram.
Eles estão atualmente a aguardar por mais traduções porque eu não posso acompanhá-los.
Eu sei que há apenas uma pessoa a traduzir para este idioma ou esse idioma.
Nós também temos isso.
Uma pessoa está a trabalhar em suaíli enquanto outro está a trabalhar em japonês.
Também, marca páginas para tradução.
Controla se deseja incluir os modelos ou excluir as variáveis ​​nas chamadas de modelo.
}}


== Consultar também ==
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – uma extensão para facilitar a comunicação com os tradutores.

Não deve ser confundido com:

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – utilizada para uma única tradução das páginas da wiki de um idioma para outro.
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Abstract Wikipedia]] para tradução.

== Como colaborar ==

* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all Traduza esta extensão em translatewiki.net]
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|Reporte erros e solicite funcionalidades]]
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|Mais erros em aberto e pedidos de funcionalidades em translatewiki.net]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Reveja e traduza a documentação da extensão 'Traduzir']]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>p0arefc28naeetmq6x4zwfwzeimrc15</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>232616</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402480</id>
      <parentid>4502656</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:11:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="73" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|Corrige y traduce la documentación de la extension Translate]]</text>
      <sha1>6mpk3tbunlw7n9o64nkng5237rke7bj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/lb</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>235774</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402251</id>
      <parentid>5400743</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14132" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-username'' Äre Benotzernumm. Nëmme Bürokrate kënnen Äre Benotzernumm änneren, awer nëmme wann an der Wiki d'{{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} installéiert ass.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-prefs-edits'' Zuel vun den Ännerungen, déi Dir gemaach hutt. Net all Wikie weisen dat.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Languages
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Datum an Zäit ==
&lt;/div&gt;

Dat hei drënner gëtt normalerweis automatesch duergestallt esou wéi dat an Ären Astellungen agestallt ass:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Kuckt och ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>tv6bb1kb8puzwjflx7dd24r91lwgu3a</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/es</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>239160</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402851</id>
      <parentid>4505775</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:33:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9951" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Esta página explica cómo '''traducir sin conexión'''.
Si estás interesado, quizás ya sepas qué son los archivos [[w:Gettext|Gettext PO]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this reason, we'll only discuss how to use them in a wiki with the Translate extension here.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise, you're probably more interested in the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|How to translate]] tutorial for online translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Más en general, es posible que no quieras usar la interfaz web si tienes una conexión a internet muy lenta o limitada o herramientas sin conexión que no puedes prescindir. Ten en cuenta, sin embargo, que la extensión Translate está concebida como un proceso de colaboración. Esto significa que no debes retener los archivos sin coneión por mucho tiempo, y siempre debes descargar un archivo nuevo justo antes de empezar a traducir. De lo contrario podrías entrar en conflicto con otros traductores que trabajan en el wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Exportación ==

Puedes descargar cualquier grupo de mensajes como un archivo Gettext PO eligiendo la opción ''Exportar para traducción sin conexión'' tarea en Special:Translate. Algunos sitios pueden haber deshabilitado esta opción. Debes revisar las guías locales sobre cómo procesar estos archivos antes de empezar.

{{Note|1=Aunque algunos grupos de mensajes puedan tener una opción de exportación, que exporta traducciones en el formato nativo de ese grupo y que el formato pueda ser Gettext, ¡esos no son los archivos que pueden ser utilizados para la traducción sin conexión!}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Los archivos son archivos estándar Gettext PO con un poco de información extra. La cabecera contiene algunos campos adicionales que se muestran a continuación; el &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; para cada mensaje contiene un identificador que necesita la extensión Translate. Se sabe que algunos editores eliminan ya sea los comentarios de cabecera o las líneas &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;, así que empieza con un pequeño archivo para asegurarte que tu editor no los quite. ¡No es gracioso darse cuenta que el editor es defectuoso después de traducir cientos de mensajes que no puedes importar de nuevo al sistema en línea! 
La documentación de mensajes se exporta como comentarios de traducción.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Campos de encabezados importantes:

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

En este ejemplo, &quot;ext-abc&quot; es el nombre del grupo de mensajes.
Para páginas traducibles, el grupo de mensajes correspondiente tiene el nombre &quot;page-&quot; + el nombre de la página (esto es, para la página &quot;Example&quot;, el encabezado contendría la línea &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Ejemplo de entrada en un archivo Gettext po para Translate.
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Importación ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;No hay necesidad de traducir el archivo completo. Cargar grupos de mensajes traducidos parcialmente está perfectamente bien. Hay dos maneras de importar estos archivos. &lt;br /&gt; 
Los usuarios con derechos de usuario correctos pueden utilizar Special:ImportTranslations para subir e importar las traducciones. La página especial procesa el archivo, muestra los cambios y permite al usuario importarlos. Para archivos de gran tamaño con muchos cambios la importación puede tardar varios pasos, ya que el tiempo de procesamiento es limitado.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

La importación también se puede hacer usando un script de línea de comandos en &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. Es menos flexible, pero puede importar todo de una vez. También precisa de la intervención de alguien con acceso shell al servidor.

La forma en que se maneja (o no) la importación de traducciones sin conexión depende de tu wiki.

== Editores Gettext ==

He aquí algunas herramientas que puedes usar para editar archivos sin conexión.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : Disponible para todas las plataformas que soporten el [http://www.wxwidgets.org/ toolkit wxWidgets], probado en Unix con GTK+ y en Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''ADVERTENCIA:''' asegúrate de usar la versión 1.4.2 o superior, sino las líneas &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; se descartan y tu trabajo no puede procesarse.
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Puede usarse en el escritorio [http://gnome.org GNOME]en plataformas Unix y Linux.
; [http://www.gted.org gted] : Para usarse como un complemento en el IDE Eclipse en Linux, Windows y MAC OS X, tiene varias herramientas integradas.
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Usa el escritorio [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] en todas las plataformas que lo soportan. Tiene una [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize wiki de usurios] y un [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html manual] en línea
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Juego de herramientas escrito en el lenguaje de programación [http://python.org python] que también debe instalarse, utilizable en todas las plataformas. También soporta muchos otros formatos de archivos.
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Herramienta de traducción multiformato basada en el juego de herramientas de arriba. Actulmente funciona en Windows y Linux.
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Herramienta libre para traductores profesionales escrita en Java, requiere Java instalado; disponible en todas la plataformas. Soporta una variedad de otros formatos de archivo, glosarios, coincidencia aproximada y memorias de traducción.
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm, editor de archivos PO] : Programa pequeño, corre en Windows, no requiere instalación.
; [http://betterpoeditor.sourceforge.net Better PO Editor] : Disponible para Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Incluye corrector ortográfico y sugerencias de Google Translate.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>1yrltxh0hks8tw2l7jfdohymgueqcf4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402853</id>
      <parentid>5402851</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:33:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9897" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Esta página explica cómo '''traducir sin conexión'''.
Si estás interesado, quizás ya sepas qué son los archivos [[w:Gettext|Gettext PO]].
Por esa razón, sólo discutiremos aquí cómo utilizarlos en un wiki con la extensión Translate.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise, you're probably more interested in the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|How to translate]] tutorial for online translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Más en general, es posible que no quieras usar la interfaz web si tienes una conexión a internet muy lenta o limitada o herramientas sin conexión que no puedes prescindir. Ten en cuenta, sin embargo, que la extensión Translate está concebida como un proceso de colaboración. Esto significa que no debes retener los archivos sin coneión por mucho tiempo, y siempre debes descargar un archivo nuevo justo antes de empezar a traducir. De lo contrario podrías entrar en conflicto con otros traductores que trabajan en el wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Exportación ==

Puedes descargar cualquier grupo de mensajes como un archivo Gettext PO eligiendo la opción ''Exportar para traducción sin conexión'' tarea en Special:Translate. Algunos sitios pueden haber deshabilitado esta opción. Debes revisar las guías locales sobre cómo procesar estos archivos antes de empezar.

{{Note|1=Aunque algunos grupos de mensajes puedan tener una opción de exportación, que exporta traducciones en el formato nativo de ese grupo y que el formato pueda ser Gettext, ¡esos no son los archivos que pueden ser utilizados para la traducción sin conexión!}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Los archivos son archivos estándar Gettext PO con un poco de información extra. La cabecera contiene algunos campos adicionales que se muestran a continuación; el &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; para cada mensaje contiene un identificador que necesita la extensión Translate. Se sabe que algunos editores eliminan ya sea los comentarios de cabecera o las líneas &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;, así que empieza con un pequeño archivo para asegurarte que tu editor no los quite. ¡No es gracioso darse cuenta que el editor es defectuoso después de traducir cientos de mensajes que no puedes importar de nuevo al sistema en línea! 
La documentación de mensajes se exporta como comentarios de traducción.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Campos de encabezados importantes:

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

En este ejemplo, &quot;ext-abc&quot; es el nombre del grupo de mensajes.
Para páginas traducibles, el grupo de mensajes correspondiente tiene el nombre &quot;page-&quot; + el nombre de la página (esto es, para la página &quot;Example&quot;, el encabezado contendría la línea &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Ejemplo de entrada en un archivo Gettext po para Translate.
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Importación ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;No hay necesidad de traducir el archivo completo. Cargar grupos de mensajes traducidos parcialmente está perfectamente bien. Hay dos maneras de importar estos archivos. &lt;br /&gt; 
Los usuarios con derechos de usuario correctos pueden utilizar Special:ImportTranslations para subir e importar las traducciones. La página especial procesa el archivo, muestra los cambios y permite al usuario importarlos. Para archivos de gran tamaño con muchos cambios la importación puede tardar varios pasos, ya que el tiempo de procesamiento es limitado.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

La importación también se puede hacer usando un script de línea de comandos en &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. Es menos flexible, pero puede importar todo de una vez. También precisa de la intervención de alguien con acceso shell al servidor.

La forma en que se maneja (o no) la importación de traducciones sin conexión depende de tu wiki.

== Editores Gettext ==

He aquí algunas herramientas que puedes usar para editar archivos sin conexión.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : Disponible para todas las plataformas que soporten el [http://www.wxwidgets.org/ toolkit wxWidgets], probado en Unix con GTK+ y en Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''ADVERTENCIA:''' asegúrate de usar la versión 1.4.2 o superior, sino las líneas &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; se descartan y tu trabajo no puede procesarse.
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Puede usarse en el escritorio [http://gnome.org GNOME]en plataformas Unix y Linux.
; [http://www.gted.org gted] : Para usarse como un complemento en el IDE Eclipse en Linux, Windows y MAC OS X, tiene varias herramientas integradas.
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Usa el escritorio [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] en todas las plataformas que lo soportan. Tiene una [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize wiki de usurios] y un [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html manual] en línea
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Juego de herramientas escrito en el lenguaje de programación [http://python.org python] que también debe instalarse, utilizable en todas las plataformas. También soporta muchos otros formatos de archivos.
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Herramienta de traducción multiformato basada en el juego de herramientas de arriba. Actulmente funciona en Windows y Linux.
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Herramienta libre para traductores profesionales escrita en Java, requiere Java instalado; disponible en todas la plataformas. Soporta una variedad de otros formatos de archivo, glosarios, coincidencia aproximada y memorias de traducción.
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm, editor de archivos PO] : Programa pequeño, corre en Windows, no requiere instalación.
; [http://betterpoeditor.sourceforge.net Better PO Editor] : Disponible para Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Incluye corrector ortográfico y sugerencias de Google Translate.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>p1bzk9f2w43n1wlfkbpgxzqpaqgmosv</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402855</id>
      <parentid>5402853</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:33:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9853" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Esta página explica cómo '''traducir sin conexión'''.
Si estás interesado, quizás ya sepas qué son los archivos [[w:Gettext|Gettext PO]].
Por esa razón, sólo discutiremos aquí cómo utilizarlos en un wiki con la extensión Translate.
De lo contrario, probablemente estés más interesado en el tutorial [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|Cómo traducir]] para traducción en línea.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Más en general, es posible que no quieras usar la interfaz web si tienes una conexión a internet muy lenta o limitada o herramientas sin conexión que no puedes prescindir. Ten en cuenta, sin embargo, que la extensión Translate está concebida como un proceso de colaboración. Esto significa que no debes retener los archivos sin coneión por mucho tiempo, y siempre debes descargar un archivo nuevo justo antes de empezar a traducir. De lo contrario podrías entrar en conflicto con otros traductores que trabajan en el wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Exportación ==

Puedes descargar cualquier grupo de mensajes como un archivo Gettext PO eligiendo la opción ''Exportar para traducción sin conexión'' tarea en Special:Translate. Algunos sitios pueden haber deshabilitado esta opción. Debes revisar las guías locales sobre cómo procesar estos archivos antes de empezar.

{{Note|1=Aunque algunos grupos de mensajes puedan tener una opción de exportación, que exporta traducciones en el formato nativo de ese grupo y que el formato pueda ser Gettext, ¡esos no son los archivos que pueden ser utilizados para la traducción sin conexión!}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Los archivos son archivos estándar Gettext PO con un poco de información extra. La cabecera contiene algunos campos adicionales que se muestran a continuación; el &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; para cada mensaje contiene un identificador que necesita la extensión Translate. Se sabe que algunos editores eliminan ya sea los comentarios de cabecera o las líneas &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;, así que empieza con un pequeño archivo para asegurarte que tu editor no los quite. ¡No es gracioso darse cuenta que el editor es defectuoso después de traducir cientos de mensajes que no puedes importar de nuevo al sistema en línea! 
La documentación de mensajes se exporta como comentarios de traducción.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Campos de encabezados importantes:

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

En este ejemplo, &quot;ext-abc&quot; es el nombre del grupo de mensajes.
Para páginas traducibles, el grupo de mensajes correspondiente tiene el nombre &quot;page-&quot; + el nombre de la página (esto es, para la página &quot;Example&quot;, el encabezado contendría la línea &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Ejemplo de entrada en un archivo Gettext po para Translate.
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Importación ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;No hay necesidad de traducir el archivo completo. Cargar grupos de mensajes traducidos parcialmente está perfectamente bien. Hay dos maneras de importar estos archivos. &lt;br /&gt; 
Los usuarios con derechos de usuario correctos pueden utilizar Special:ImportTranslations para subir e importar las traducciones. La página especial procesa el archivo, muestra los cambios y permite al usuario importarlos. Para archivos de gran tamaño con muchos cambios la importación puede tardar varios pasos, ya que el tiempo de procesamiento es limitado.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

La importación también se puede hacer usando un script de línea de comandos en &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. Es menos flexible, pero puede importar todo de una vez. También precisa de la intervención de alguien con acceso shell al servidor.

La forma en que se maneja (o no) la importación de traducciones sin conexión depende de tu wiki.

== Editores Gettext ==

He aquí algunas herramientas que puedes usar para editar archivos sin conexión.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : Disponible para todas las plataformas que soporten el [http://www.wxwidgets.org/ toolkit wxWidgets], probado en Unix con GTK+ y en Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''ADVERTENCIA:''' asegúrate de usar la versión 1.4.2 o superior, sino las líneas &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; se descartan y tu trabajo no puede procesarse.
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Puede usarse en el escritorio [http://gnome.org GNOME]en plataformas Unix y Linux.
; [http://www.gted.org gted] : Para usarse como un complemento en el IDE Eclipse en Linux, Windows y MAC OS X, tiene varias herramientas integradas.
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Usa el escritorio [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] en todas las plataformas que lo soportan. Tiene una [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize wiki de usurios] y un [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html manual] en línea
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Juego de herramientas escrito en el lenguaje de programación [http://python.org python] que también debe instalarse, utilizable en todas las plataformas. También soporta muchos otros formatos de archivos.
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Herramienta de traducción multiformato basada en el juego de herramientas de arriba. Actulmente funciona en Windows y Linux.
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Herramienta libre para traductores profesionales escrita en Java, requiere Java instalado; disponible en todas la plataformas. Soporta una variedad de otros formatos de archivo, glosarios, coincidencia aproximada y memorias de traducción.
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm, editor de archivos PO] : Programa pequeño, corre en Windows, no requiere instalación.
; [http://betterpoeditor.sourceforge.net Better PO Editor] : Disponible para Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Incluye corrector ortográfico y sugerencias de Google Translate.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>r7tf840miqvt5sme7r4gy04yeqeuput</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/el</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>240725</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402478</id>
      <parentid>4502653</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:11:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="131" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|Επιμέλεια και μετάφραση της τεκμηρίωσης της επέκτασης Μετάφραση]]</text>
      <sha1>2672n6jmg3keoazeql1z9ftz7s4zcfm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/he</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>244732</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402245</id>
      <parentid>5400738</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13543" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=מידע מעודכן זמין ב-Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

לחיצה על קישור ה[[Special:preferences|העדפות]] בפינה השמאלית העליונה בזמן שאתם מחוברים, תאפשר לכם לשנות את העדפותיכם.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || שם המשתמש שלך. רק משתמשים מהימנים יכולים לשנות את השם המשתמש שלך, וגם התוסף {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} מותקן בוויקי.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || רשימה של קבוצות משתמשים בהן אתה נמצא.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || בוויקים של ויקימדיה, קישור זה מאפשר לך לנהל יישומים חיצוניים המורשים לגשת לחשבונך. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;למידע נוסף, ראה [[Help:OAuth|עזרה:יישומים מחוברים]].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || מספר העריכות שביצעת. לא בכל הוויקים זה קיים.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || הזמן בו נרשם החשבון שלך.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|ראה למטה]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|ראה למטה]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || נהל אימות דו-שלבי.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || נהל העדפות גלובליות.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
כדי לשנות את סיסמתכם, הכניסו את הסיסמה הישנה בתיבה הראשונה ואת הסיסמה החדשה בשתי התיבות האחרונות.
אם תרצו שהאתר הזה יזכור את חיבורכם, בחרו ב&quot;לזכור שנכנסתי&quot;.
שים לב שאפשרות זו מחייבת אותך להפעיל קובצי עוגיות בדפדפן שלך, ואם העוגיות שלך ימחקו או יפוגו, הדפדפן לא יזכור שנכנסת.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== חשבון גלובלי ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
מההעדפות שלכם תוכלו לבחור באיזו שפה תרצו שהממשק יהיה.
רק הכפתורים כמו &quot;עריכה&quot; ו&quot;שיחה&quot;, בנוסף לכמה עמודים בסרגל הצד, יושפעו מזה.
הטקסט הראשי של הדפים לא ישתנה על ידי זה ברוב המכריע של הדפים, אם כי ישנם כמה דפים שבהם הוא ישתנה, כמו חלק מהדפים ב-Meta Wiki של ויקימדיה.

* שפות
* איזה תיאור מתאים לך?
* הגדרות שפה נוספות

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* החתימה הנוכחית שלך
* חתימה חדשה
** התייחסות לחתימה כקוד ויקי (ללא קישור אוטומטי)

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
אם סיפקתם כתובת דואר אלקטרוני, תצטרכו ללחוץ על כפתור ״וודא כתובת״ כדי להשתמש באופציות אלו. תקבלו דואר אלקטרוני, פשוט פתחו אותו ועקבו אחר הקישור כדי לאפשר את הפונקציות הבאות.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| אימות כתובת דוא&quot;ל ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;זה מאפשר למשתמשים רשומים אחרים לשלוח לך דוא&quot;ל באמצעות הקישור &quot;שליחת דוא&quot;ל למשתמש&quot; בסרגל הצד של דף המשתמש שלך. הודעות דוא&quot;ל נשלחות באמצעות ממשק אינטרנט, וכתובת הדוא&quot;ל שלך לא נחשפת לשלוח עד שתשיב בדוא&quot;ל.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || זה מאפשר למשתמשים ללא הרשאות שאושרו אוטומטית לשלוח לך מיילים.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || אפשרות זו נותנת לך לבחור אילו משתמשים לא יוכלו לשלוח לך מיילים ישירים. הם לא יראו את הקישור &quot;שליחת דוא&quot;ל למשתמש&quot; בסרגל הצד של דף המשתמש שלך. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
כאן תוכלו לבחור את העיצוב בו תרצו להשתמש. תוכלו לצפות בתוצגה מקדימה של העיצובים הזמינים לפני בחירתם על ידי לחיצה על הקישור &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; ליד כל עיצוב. לפרטים נוספים, עיינו ב-{{ll|Help:Skins}}.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
== מבנה תאריך והפרש זמנים ==

הדברים בדרך כלל מוצגים בהתאם להעדפות:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
כאן תועלו לקבוע כיצד יוצגו תמונות. תמונות המוצגות על ידי הדבקה ישירה של כתובת אתר (אם הוויקי מופעל) לא יושפעו מהגדרה זו.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - הגדרה זו מאפשרת לך לבחור את הגודל המרבי של התצוגה המקדימה של התמונה בדפי תיאור של קבצים. אם אתה יודע מה רזולוציית המסך הנוכחית שלך, ייתכן שתרצה להגדיר אותו בקני מידה קטנים יותר מהמסך שלך. אם יש לך חיבור איטי (כמו חיוג) ייתכן שתרצה להגביל אותם ל-320×240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== ראו גם ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>6dca7u20nkfu0kwwfy5uqo2a1sauxr0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402295</id>
      <parentid>5402245</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:06:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13467" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=מידע מעודכן זמין ב-Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

לחיצה על קישור ה[[Special:preferences|העדפות]] בפינה השמאלית העליונה בזמן שאתם מחוברים, תאפשר לכם לשנות את העדפותיכם.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || שם המשתמש שלך. רק משתמשים מהימנים יכולים לשנות את השם המשתמש שלך, וגם התוסף {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} מותקן בוויקי.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || רשימה של קבוצות משתמשים בהן אתה נמצא.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || בוויקים של ויקימדיה, קישור זה מאפשר לך לנהל יישומים חיצוניים המורשים לגשת לחשבונך. למידע נוסף, ראה {{ll|Help:OAuth}}.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || מספר העריכות שביצעת. לא בכל הוויקים זה קיים.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || הזמן בו נרשם החשבון שלך.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|ראה למטה]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|ראה למטה]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || נהל אימות דו-שלבי.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || נהל העדפות גלובליות.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
כדי לשנות את סיסמתכם, הכניסו את הסיסמה הישנה בתיבה הראשונה ואת הסיסמה החדשה בשתי התיבות האחרונות.
אם תרצו שהאתר הזה יזכור את חיבורכם, בחרו ב&quot;לזכור שנכנסתי&quot;.
שים לב שאפשרות זו מחייבת אותך להפעיל קובצי עוגיות בדפדפן שלך, ואם העוגיות שלך ימחקו או יפוגו, הדפדפן לא יזכור שנכנסת.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== חשבון גלובלי ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
מההעדפות שלכם תוכלו לבחור באיזו שפה תרצו שהממשק יהיה.
רק הכפתורים כמו &quot;עריכה&quot; ו&quot;שיחה&quot;, בנוסף לכמה עמודים בסרגל הצד, יושפעו מזה.
הטקסט הראשי של הדפים לא ישתנה על ידי זה ברוב המכריע של הדפים, אם כי ישנם כמה דפים שבהם הוא ישתנה, כמו חלק מהדפים ב-Meta Wiki של ויקימדיה.

* שפות
* איזה תיאור מתאים לך?
* הגדרות שפה נוספות

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* החתימה הנוכחית שלך
* חתימה חדשה
** התייחסות לחתימה כקוד ויקי (ללא קישור אוטומטי)

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
אם סיפקתם כתובת דואר אלקטרוני, תצטרכו ללחוץ על כפתור ״וודא כתובת״ כדי להשתמש באופציות אלו. תקבלו דואר אלקטרוני, פשוט פתחו אותו ועקבו אחר הקישור כדי לאפשר את הפונקציות הבאות.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| אימות כתובת דוא&quot;ל ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;זה מאפשר למשתמשים רשומים אחרים לשלוח לך דוא&quot;ל באמצעות הקישור &quot;שליחת דוא&quot;ל למשתמש&quot; בסרגל הצד של דף המשתמש שלך. הודעות דוא&quot;ל נשלחות באמצעות ממשק אינטרנט, וכתובת הדוא&quot;ל שלך לא נחשפת לשלוח עד שתשיב בדוא&quot;ל.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || זה מאפשר למשתמשים ללא הרשאות שאושרו אוטומטית לשלוח לך מיילים.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || אפשרות זו נותנת לך לבחור אילו משתמשים לא יוכלו לשלוח לך מיילים ישירים. הם לא יראו את הקישור &quot;שליחת דוא&quot;ל למשתמש&quot; בסרגל הצד של דף המשתמש שלך. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
כאן תוכלו לבחור את העיצוב בו תרצו להשתמש. תוכלו לצפות בתוצגה מקדימה של העיצובים הזמינים לפני בחירתם על ידי לחיצה על הקישור &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; ליד כל עיצוב. לפרטים נוספים, עיינו ב-{{ll|Help:Skins}}.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
== מבנה תאריך והפרש זמנים ==

הדברים בדרך כלל מוצגים בהתאם להעדפות:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
כאן תועלו לקבוע כיצד יוצגו תמונות. תמונות המוצגות על ידי הדבקה ישירה של כתובת אתר (אם הוויקי מופעל) לא יושפעו מהגדרה זו.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - הגדרה זו מאפשרת לך לבחור את הגודל המרבי של התצוגה המקדימה של התמונה בדפי תיאור של קבצים. אם אתה יודע מה רזולוציית המסך הנוכחית שלך, ייתכן שתרצה להגדיר אותו בקני מידה קטנים יותר מהמסך שלך. אם יש לך חיבור איטי (כמו חיוג) ייתכן שתרצה להגביל אותם ל-320×240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== ראו גם ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1efrupi47dtjqzh4p6md2d4hhkmc2qh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/sco</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>247414</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402497</id>
      <parentid>5072301</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:15:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9896" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = Niklas Laxström, Siebrand Mazeland n ithers
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=Incluidit in the Leid Extension Bundle}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=Uiser documentation}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = Enables in-wiki owersetin n pruifreadin
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] – or [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view try how to translate a page now]
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

The '''Translate''' extension maks MediaWiki ae feckfu tuil tae owerset aw kynd o tex. It's uised especialie tae owerset saffware n tae manage monieleidic wikis in ae sensible waa.

== Featurs ==

The Translate extension haes monie featurs specifically tairgetit tae owerseters, while makin back-end integration wi the actual soorce code aes easie aes possible. Meanwhile, awthing rins inside [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|MediaWiki]], this allous uisers aen awmaist endless degree o freedom fer communication n sel-organisation.

Featurs incluid:

* '''Structurt wiki content page owersetin.'''
* '''In-wiki localisation n exportin o saffware interface messages (or juist aboot oniething).'''
* '''Wab-based owersetin n pruifreadin [[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overview/|interface]], aes weel aes gettext based export n import fer aff-line owersetin.'''
* '''Sindrie aids tae mak the job o owerseters easier:'''
** displey o owersets in globalie defined ither leids, optionlie expaundit wi uiser defined leids;
** collaborateeve eeditin o documentation o the uiss n contex o messages;
** owersetin memrie n machine owersetin wi ootby tuils (Apertium, Microsoft Translator, Yandex.Translate);
** displey o the hainmaist chynge in the soorce message;
** wairnishmants aneatt common mistaks lik boundins that'r no uised.
* Pre-makit modules fer sindrie apen soorce waurks that ye can uise aes aen example.
** Support fer sindrie formats incluidin: PHP, Java properties, Gettext, YAML n AndroidXml (see {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} n [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|File format support]]).
* Ae versatile plug-in system tae mak it easie tae eik new waurks aes ae message groop.
* Sindrie stateestics:
** owersetment compleation percentages fer aw message groops in aw supportit leids;
** owersetment compleation percentages in aw supportit leids fer onie supportit message groop;
** tuil fer makin acteevitie graphs fer spans o time. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Can display either number of edits or active users daily or hourly and includes many filters;&lt;/span&gt;
** clood luikower o acteeve leids n owerseters.

Translate extension, cause o its muckle uiser base, is confirmed tae be compatible wi aw reasonablie recynt brousers, except fer some wee (style) glitches that ar quicklie fixt.

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|''Makin Monieleidic Wikis ae Realitie'': this presentation shaws hou the Translate extension can mak ae wiki trulie monileidic, based oan the experience o KDE UserBase wiki.
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|Niklas Laxström, ''Owersetin the wiki waa: Simple, fast, fun'', Wikimania 2012 (slides available).
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Support n documentation ==

* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|Instawation]]
* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|Confeeguration]]
* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Uiser documentation]] — incluids teachin material
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|Getting started with Translate extension development]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* Live support at #translatewiki IRC channel at Libera Chat (the best times ar at European days n gloamins)
* Please report aw issues n featur requests in the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate eessue tracker]

Translate extension wis oreegonlie deveelopt bi [[User:Nikerabbit]]; monie ither uisers, lik [[User:Raymond]], [[User:SPQRobin]] n the Wikimedia Leid team, hae contreebutit tae its code n documentation. It's maintained bi [[User:Nikerabbit]] n [[User:Siebrand]].

== Prominant uisers o the Translate extension ==
* https://translatewiki.net — The mucklest wiki-based steid n communitie fer the owersetin o the interface o apen soorce saffware.
* https://userbase.kde.org — Documentation wiki fer KDE waurk that uises the page owersetin featur quite ae bit.
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — Owersets wiki content n uises the groop states featur. Owrsetin n owersetin luikower is enabled fer awmaist aw uisers o the wiki.
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

See mair at [[Wikipedia:translatewiki.net#Notable uses]].

=== Testimonials ===

Tom Hutchison o Joomla:
{{quotation|1=
The Translate extension allous fer connection tae aen owersetin service n can autæ fill the owerset fer ye. At the same time aen owerseter can mak adjustments sae that ye'r no creautin heaps o pages wi onaccurate owersetins.

That's ok gif thay'r oan differant continents.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That is actually a plus because work is getting done 24 hours a day.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What they need is a support group chat for each other.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They would all be able to read English if they are translating right? Teach a few simple wiki markup such as links and what to do with categories.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then they help others who in turn help others.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We have over 40 in a chat who help each other and have fun at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And they were all scared of the wiki but couldn't believe how easy it was once they started.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are actually waiting on me for more translations to do because I can't keep up with them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;I know there is only 1 translating this language or that language.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We have that too.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;One person is doing Swahili while another one is working on Japanese.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, you mark pages for translation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You control whether to include templates or exclude variables in template calls.&lt;/span&gt;
}}


== Relatit pages ==
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – aen extension tae faceelitate communication wi owerseters.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Not to be confused with:
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for one-off translation of wiki pages from one language to another.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Abstract Wikipedia]] for translation.&lt;/span&gt;

== Hou tae contreebute ==

* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all Owerset this extension at translatewiki.net]
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|Apen bugs n featur requests]]
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|Mair apen bugs n featur requests at translatewiki.net]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Pruifread n owerset the documentation o Translate extension]]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>e8qxxt412j3ssf9yzc7d2m1yt2h4yqg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/sco</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>247506</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402496</id>
      <parentid>4502684</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:15:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="71" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|Pruifread n owerset the documentation o Translate extension]]</text>
      <sha1>gmaunr3udfp8x5jdwa2kove10184lzi</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/uk</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>259218</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402273</id>
      <parentid>5400765</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16666" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Оновлена інформація доступна на сайті Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Натиснувши посилання «[[Special:preferences|Параметри]]» у верхньому правому куті під час входу, ви зможете змінити свої налаштування.
Вам буде представлено розділ профілю користувача, а також панель вкладок у верхній частині для зміни інших типів налаштувань.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Ваше ім'я користувача. Тільки довірені користувачі можуть змінювати ваше ім’я користувача, а на вікі також має бути встановлено розширення {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Список груп користувачів, у яких ви перебуваєте.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Скільки змін ви внесли. Не всі вікі мають це.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || Час реєстрації вашого облікового запису.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;В цьому розділі особистих налаштувань є посилання на спеціальну сторінку, яка дозволяє змінити ваш пароль. На ній слід набрати старий (актуальний) пароль у перше поле вводу та набрати новий (бажаний) пароль у два нижчих.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Мова, обрана на сторінці налаштувань, змінює лише мову інтерфейсу, тобто назви кнопок типу '{{int:edit}}' та '{{int:talk}}'. Мова багатьох сторінок (тих, для яких немає перекладених версій), не зміниться.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Languages
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Якщо ви при реєстрації надали електронну адресу, вам запропонують її перевірити для того, щоб використовувати пов'язані з розсилкою функції. При перевірці вам буде надіслано електронний лист, відкрийте його і перейдіть за посиланням, яке в ньому міститься.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
В цій вкладці ви можете обрати тему оздоблення, яка вам сподобалася. Можна попередньо переглянути кожну з доступних за допомогою кнопки «{{int|skin-preview}}» біля назви кожної теми. Детальніше про це див. {{ll|Help:Skins}}.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Date format and time offset ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ця вкладка, відображувана при встановленому розширенні {{tag|math|open}}, дозволяє обрати спосіб відображення математичних формул, які набрано в форматі TeX (формули, завантажені як зображення або без використання функцій розширення, не зміняться).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
На цій вкладці зібрано налаштування сторінки редагування, такі як розмір вікна редагування та чи включати сторінки, що ви редагували, до списку спостереження.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Тут можна визначити, наскільки далеко в часі сягатиме перелік [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|нових редагувань]]. Зверніть увагу, що кількість редагувань (наступний параметр) також обмежує довжину цього переліку.
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Тут можна визначити, скільки посилань на сторінки буде у списку нових редагувань.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Перелік нових редагувань групується по сторінках. Для того, щоб ця функція була доступна, у веб-оглядачі має бути ввімкнено JavaScript. Детальніше див. {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}.
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Приховує незначні зміни в переліку нових редагувань (див. $editing). Це може бути корисним, коли деякі користувачі роблять багато дрібних змін — до шаблону чи виправляючи помилки набору. Тут тільки налаштування по замовчуванню, управляти поточним можна на сторінці з новими редагуваннями (див. {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ці налаштування управляють поведінкою списку спостереження (див. {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}). Тут наведено їх значення за замовчуванням, більшість цих налаштувань можна перемкнути безпосередньо на сторінці списку спостереження.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Значення за замовчування для пошуку, такі як скільки знайдених результатів відображувати та який обсяг інформації надавати для кожного з них. Поставте прапорці навпроти назв просторів імен, в яких ви хочете шукати за замовчуванням. Потім внизу сторінки з результатами пошуку можна змінити це налаштування для повторного пошуку.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Див. також ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>409zdlounh02ud8nxb7f4n5ouh6grd3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Bouquet</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>261600</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401691</id>
      <parentid>5213800</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:44:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>78.32.143.113</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki]]</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2431" xml:space="preserve">&lt;Languages/&gt;
{{Skin
|name         = Bouquet
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =&lt;nowiki/&gt;
*Automattic — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)&lt;/translate&gt;
*{{User link|Jack Phoenix}} — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; MediaWiki port&lt;/translate&gt;
|description  = 
|image        = BouquetSkin.png
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 1.2.3
|update       = 
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          = 5.3+
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme       = 
|changelog    = 
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=bouquet &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Interface Messages Wiki&lt;/translate&gt;]
|compatibility= 
|bugzilla     =
|phabricator  = Bouquet
}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; '''Bouquet''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;&lt;tvar|desc&gt;an elegant, simple theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; inspired by the beauty found in flowers&lt;/&gt;&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by {{User link|Jack Phoenix}} on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].

==Main features== &lt;!--T:9--&gt;

&lt;!--T:10--&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;tvar|nav&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Bouquet-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;tvar|sidebar&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt; as the right-hand sidebar&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:11--&gt;
* Three [[&lt;tvar|ext&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme&lt;/&gt;|themes]]:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:12--&gt;
** forget-me-not (internal name (for the ''usetheme'' URL parameter and &lt;tvar|DefaultTheme&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgDefaultTheme&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;) ''forgetmenot'')&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:13--&gt;
** pink dogwood (internal name ''pinkdogwood'')&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:14--&gt;
** tiger lily (internal name ''tigerlily'')&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:15--&gt;
* Custom header/logo image (&lt;tvar|file&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Bouquet-skin-logo.png]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;, 1100x180 pixels)

==Installation== &lt;!--T:17--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{SkinInstall|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]] &lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>re2gkzj4i62hhornuxh5hi9qntx5n55</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401858</id>
      <parentid>5401691</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:06:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>restore translation units :(</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2513" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Bouquet
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Automattic — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; MediaWiki port&lt;/translate&gt;
|description     = 
|image           = BouquetSkin.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.2.3
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=bouquet &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Interface Messages Wiki&lt;/translate&gt;]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        =
|phabricator     = Bouquet
}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; '''Bouquet''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;&lt;tvar|desc&gt;an elegant, simple theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; inspired by the beauty found in flowers&lt;/&gt;&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].

==Main features== &lt;!--T:9--&gt;

&lt;!--T:10--&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;tvar|nav&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Bouquet-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;tvar|sidebar&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt; as the right-hand sidebar&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:11--&gt;
* Three [[&lt;tvar|ext&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme&lt;/&gt;|themes]]:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:12--&gt;
** forget-me-not (internal name (for the ''usetheme'' URL parameter and &lt;tvar|DefaultTheme&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgDefaultTheme&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;) ''forgetmenot'')&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:13--&gt;
** pink dogwood (internal name ''pinkdogwood'')&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:14--&gt;
** tiger lily (internal name ''tigerlily'')&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:15--&gt;
* Custom header/logo image (&lt;tvar|file&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Bouquet-skin-logo.png]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;, 1100x180 pixels)

==Installation== &lt;!--T:17--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{SkinInstall
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]] &lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>tjdwauvn9iytz7mmlfd8m0z22yb4nxy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:DuskToDawn</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>261602</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401693</id>
      <parentid>5214167</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:50:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>78.32.143.113</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki]]</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2143" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Skin
|name         = DuskToDawn
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =
*Automattic — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
*{{User link|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description  = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; A dark skin that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&lt;/translate&gt;
|image        = DuskToDawn.png
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 1.3.2
|update       = 
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          = 5.3+
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme       = 
|changelog    = 
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=dusktodawn Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility= 
|bugzilla     = 
|phabricator  = DuskToDawn
}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
'''DuskToDawn''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name. It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;a dark theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&quot;.

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by {{User link|Jack Phoenix}} on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].

&lt;!--T:4--&gt;
Dusk to Dawn is, according to various different WordPress sources, the successor to the [[Skin:Dusk|Dusk]] skin.

&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
Its content area is even narrower than Dusk's, which means that various MediaWiki pages &amp;mdash; such as [[Special:Version]], etc. &amp;mdash; render outright poorly.

==Main features== &lt;!--T:6--&gt;

&lt;!--T:7--&gt;
* &quot;Page last edited (by Foo)&quot; line below the page title, akin to that on ShoutWiki's default skin, Aurora&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
* No logo&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:9--&gt;
* Narrow content area (see the intro section of this page), which makes this suitable for blog-like sites

==Installation== &lt;!--T:10--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{SkinInstall|DuskToDawn|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>5ybwd1mipjzky0inwd3bnttwpi5lylo</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401836</id>
      <parentid>5401693</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:59:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>restore translation units :(</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2167" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Skin
|name         = DuskToDawn
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =
* Automattic — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] — MediaWiki port
|description  = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; A dark skin that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&lt;/translate&gt;
|image        = DuskToDawn.png
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 1.3.2
|update       = 
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          = 5.3+
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme       = 
|changelog    = 
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=dusktodawn Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla     = 
|phabricator  = DuskToDawn
}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
'''DuskToDawn''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name. It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;a dark theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&quot;.

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by {{u|Jack Phoenix}} on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].

&lt;!--T:4--&gt;
Dusk to Dawn is, according to various different WordPress sources, the successor to the [[Skin:Dusk|Dusk]] skin.

&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
Its content area is even narrower than Dusk's, which means that various MediaWiki pages &amp;mdash; such as [[Special:Version]], etc. &amp;mdash; render outright poorly.

==Main features== &lt;!--T:6--&gt;

&lt;!--T:7--&gt;
* &quot;Page last edited (by Foo)&quot; line below the page title, akin to that on ShoutWiki's default skin, Aurora&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
* No logo&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:9--&gt;
* Narrow content area (see the intro section of this page), which makes this suitable for blog-like sites

== Installation == &lt;!--T:10--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{SkinInstall|DuskToDawn|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>p6896ubw9s3gx1of1burxt6ulopxh3x</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401838</id>
      <parentid>5401836</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:00:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2224" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = DuskToDawn
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* Automattic — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] — MediaWiki port
|description     = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; A dark skin that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&lt;/translate&gt;
|image           = DuskToDawn.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.3.2
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=dusktodawn Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = DuskToDawn
}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
'''DuskToDawn''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name. It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;a dark theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&quot;.

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by {{u|Jack Phoenix}} on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].

&lt;!--T:4--&gt;
Dusk to Dawn is, according to various different WordPress sources, the successor to the [[Skin:Dusk|Dusk]] skin.

&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
Its content area is even narrower than Dusk's, which means that various MediaWiki pages &amp;mdash; such as [[Special:Version]], etc. &amp;mdash; render outright poorly.

==Main features== &lt;!--T:6--&gt;

&lt;!--T:7--&gt;
* &quot;Page last edited (by Foo)&quot; line below the page title, akin to that on ShoutWiki's default skin, Aurora&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
* No logo&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:9--&gt;
* Narrow content area (see the intro section of this page), which makes this suitable for blog-like sites

== Installation == &lt;!--T:10--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{SkinInstall|DuskToDawn|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>c90gtgc9hef3q5tf1irpq8jetmxwyuw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:DeskMessMirrored</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>261603</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401692</id>
      <parentid>5213798</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:47:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>78.32.143.113</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki]]</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1359" xml:space="preserve">{{Skin
|name         = DeskMessMirrored
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =
*[http://edwardcaissie.com/ Edward Caissie] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
*{{User link|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description  = Marble desktop covered with a mix of old and new items, such as some vintage papers, a stainless steel pen, and, a hot cup of coffee!
|image        = Screenshot of DeskMessMirrored skin.jpg
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 2.2.5
|update       = 
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          = 5.3+
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme       = 
|changelog    = 
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=deskmessmirrored Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility= 
|bugzilla     = 
|phabricator  = DeskMessMirrored
}}
'''DeskMessMirrored''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.

The WordPress theme was written by Edward Caissie and the MediaWiki port was done by {{User link|Jack Phoenix}} on 10 February 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].

==Installation==
{{SkinInstall|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>8y3vwljr83ukdy6k6fqq1xafdgklv6g</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401846</id>
      <parentid>5401692</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:01:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>translation tweaks</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1438" xml:space="preserve">{{Skin
|name            = DeskMessMirrored
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* [http://edwardcaissie.com/ Edward Caissie] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description     = Marble desktop covered with a mix of old and new items, such as some vintage papers, a stainless steel pen, and, a hot cup of coffee!
|image           = Screenshot of DeskMessMirrored skin.jpg
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 2.2.5
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=deskmessmirrored Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = DeskMessMirrored
}}
'''DeskMessMirrored''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.

The WordPress theme was written by Edward Caissie and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 10 February 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].

==Installation==
{{SkinInstall|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>dh781hpub2avffumdtkgrj6lj98x8be</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Gamepress</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>261604</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401694</id>
      <parentid>5208767</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:56:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>78.32.143.113</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki]]</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3097" xml:space="preserve">&lt;Languages/&gt;
{{Skin
|name         = Gamepress
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =
*[http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
*{{User link|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description  = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; Easy-to-use gaming-oriented skin&lt;/translate&gt;
|image        = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 1.0.7
|update       = 
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          = 5.3+
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme       = 
|changelog    = 
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility= 
|bugzilla     = 
|phabricator  = Gamepress
}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
'''Gamepress''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Aleksandra Łączek, and the MediaWiki port was done by &lt;tvar|1&gt;{{User link|Jack Phoenix}}&lt;/&gt; on 16 January 2014 for &lt;tvar|2&gt;{{ll|ShoutWiki}}&lt;/&gt;.

==Main features== &lt;!--T:4--&gt;

&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
*'''Two''' navigation 'portlets' — custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;tvar|1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;tvar|2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt; as the right-hand sidebar&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
*Three (or four, depending on how you look at it — the red one is the default/base theme) [[&lt;tvar|1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme&lt;/&gt;|themes]]:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:7--&gt;
**blue&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
**green&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:9--&gt;
**orange&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:10--&gt;
*''No'' logo image&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:11--&gt;
*There are three 'columns' above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) — the contents of these are editable via &lt;tvar|1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;, &lt;tvar|2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt; and &lt;tvar|3&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt;  If all three messages are empty, as they are by default, then the prefooter area won't be shown.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt;  If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{&lt;tvar|1&gt;tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==Installation== &lt;!--T:12--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{SkinInstall|Gamepress|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>po7t5uvef9pu44s6pjgzxss2po2hxdd</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401819</id>
      <parentid>5401694</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:55:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3114" xml:space="preserve">&lt;Languages/&gt;
{{Skin
|name         = Gamepress
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =
*[http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
*{{User link|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description  = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; Easy-to-use gaming-oriented skin&lt;/translate&gt;
|image        = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 1.0.7
|update       = 
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          = 5.3+
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme       = 
|changelog    = 
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility= 
|bugzilla     = 
|phabricator  = Gamepress
}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
'''Gamepress''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Aleksandra Łączek, and the MediaWiki port was done by &lt;tvar|1&gt;{{User link|Jack Phoenix}}&lt;/&gt; on 16 January 2014 for &lt;tvar|2&gt;{{ll|ShoutWiki}}&lt;/&gt;.

==Main features== &lt;!--T:4--&gt;

&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
*'''Two''' navigation 'portlets' — custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;tvar|1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;tvar|2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt; as the right-hand sidebar&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
*Three (or four, depending on how you look at it — the red one is the default/base theme) [[&lt;tvar|1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme&lt;/&gt;|themes]]:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:7--&gt;
**blue&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
**green&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:9--&gt;
**orange&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:10--&gt;
*''No'' logo image&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:11--&gt;
*There are three 'columns' above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) — the contents of these are editable via &lt;tvar|1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;, &lt;tvar|2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt; and &lt;tvar|3&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt;  If all three messages are empty, as they are by default, then the prefooter area won't be shown.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt;  If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{&lt;tvar|1&gt;tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==Installation== &lt;!--T:12--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{SkinInstall|Gamepress|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>7lrk7ttfh4obmhwnnziblznkr9s5nrr</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401820</id>
      <parentid>5401819</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:56:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>restore translation units :(</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3140" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name         = Gamepress
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description  = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; Easy-to-use gaming-oriented skin&lt;/translate&gt;
|image        = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 1.0.7
|update       = 
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          = 5.3+
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme       = 
|changelog    = 
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla     = 
|phabricator  = Gamepress
}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
'''Gamepress''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Aleksandra Łączek and the MediaWiki port was done by &lt;tvar|1&gt;[[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]]&lt;/&gt; on 16 January 2014 for &lt;tvar|2&gt;{{ll|ShoutWiki}}&lt;/&gt;.

==Main features== &lt;!--T:4--&gt;

&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;tvar|1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;tvar|2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt; as the right-hand sidebar&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
* Three (or four, depending on how you look at it &amp;mdash; the red one is the default/base theme) [[&lt;tvar|1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme&lt;/&gt;|themes]]:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:7--&gt;
** blue&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
** green&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:9--&gt;
** orange&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:10--&gt;
* ''No'' logo image&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:11--&gt;
* There are three &quot;columns&quot; above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) &amp;mdash; the contents of these are editable via &lt;tvar|1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;, &lt;tvar|2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt; and &lt;tvar|3&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; If all three messages are empty, as they are by default, then the prefooter area won't be shown.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt; If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{&lt;tvar|1&gt;tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Installation == &lt;!--T:12--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>54m6vif0b1fh5wds6xh2blx9khpd7b1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401849</id>
      <parentid>5401820</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:04:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3197" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Gamepress
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description     = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; Easy-to-use gaming-oriented skin&lt;/translate&gt;
|image           = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.0.7
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = Gamepress
}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
'''Gamepress''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Aleksandra Łączek and the MediaWiki port was done by &lt;tvar|1&gt;[[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]]&lt;/&gt; on 16 January 2014 for &lt;tvar|2&gt;{{ll|ShoutWiki}}&lt;/&gt;.

==Main features== &lt;!--T:4--&gt;

&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;tvar|1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;tvar|2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt; as the right-hand sidebar&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
* Three (or four, depending on how you look at it &amp;mdash; the red one is the default/base theme) [[&lt;tvar|1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme&lt;/&gt;|themes]]:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:7--&gt;
** blue&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:8--&gt;
** green&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:9--&gt;
** orange&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:10--&gt;
* ''No'' logo image&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:11--&gt;
* There are three &quot;columns&quot; above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) &amp;mdash; the contents of these are editable via &lt;tvar|1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;, &lt;tvar|2&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt; and &lt;tvar|3&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; If all three messages are empty, as they are by default, then the prefooter area won't be shown.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt; If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{&lt;tvar|1&gt;tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Installation == &lt;!--T:12--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>8oh6d1y6qvl3g0yv2dxgs4uxpqmu9yk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/fr</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>275242</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402857</id>
      <parentid>4505776</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:34:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10615" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Cette page explique de quelle manière '''traduire sans connection internet''' (traduire ''hors-ligne'').
Vous connaissez sûrement les fichiers [[:fr:Gettext|Gettext PO]] si vous avez déjà traduit d'autres projets.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this reason, we'll only discuss how to use them in a wiki with the Translate extension here.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise, you're probably more interested in the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|How to translate]] tutorial for online translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Éviter d'utiliser un navigateur internet est une contrainte importante si vous avez une mauvaise connexion et vous êtes obligé d'utiliser des outils faisant attention au volume de données échangées. Puisque l'extension Translate a été conçue pour le travail collaboratif, elle prend cet aspect en compte. Cela veut aussi dire que les fichiers téléchargés sont rapidement périmés par les contributions d'autres utilisateurs. Il faut donc télécharger une version juste avant de traduire, afin d'éviter un conflit d'édition avec les autres contributeurs qui travaillent sur le site.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Exportation ==

Vous pouvez télécharger n’importe quel groupe de messages Gettext PO en utilisant la commande ''Exporter pour une traduction hors ligne'' dans [[Special:Translate]], si le site l'a activée dans sa configuration. Il est plus prudent de se renseigner sur la démarche propre au Wiki avant de débuter la traduction.

{{Note|1=Bien que quelques groupes de messages puissent avoir une option d'exportation, qui exportera les traductions dans le format natif de ce groupe, et bien que le format puisse être Gettext, ces fichiers ne sont pas ceux à utiliser pour une traduction hors-ligne !}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Les fichiers sont des fichers standards Gettext PO avec quelques informations supplémentaires. L'entête contient certains champs supplémentaires affichés ci-dessous; le &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; pour chaque message contient un identifiant utilisé par l'extension Translate. Certains éditeurs sont connus pour supprimer soit les commentaires de l'entête ou les lignes &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;, donc commencez avec un petit fichier pour être sûr que votre éditeur ne les enlève pas - ce n'est pas agréable de s'apercevoir que l'éditeur est boggué après avoir traduit des centaines de messages que vous ne pouvez pas réimporter dans le système en ligne ! 
La documentation du message est exportée comme commentaire de traduction.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Données importantes dans les fichiers :

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

Dans cet exemple, ''ext-abc'' est le nom du groupe de messages à traduire.
Pour les pages qui peuvent être traduites, le groupe de messages correspondant possède le préfixe ''page-'' suivi du nom de la page (par exemple pour la page &quot;Example&quot;, l'entête contiendrait la ligne &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Exemple de fichier Gettext PO :
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Importation ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Il n'est pas obligatoire de traduire le fichier en entier. Il est parfaitement possible de téléverser des groupes de messages traduits partiellement. Il y a deux méthodes permettant l'import de ces fichiers : &lt;br /&gt;
Les utilisateurs avec les droits correspondants peuvent utiliser la page [[Special:ImportTranslations]] pour téléverser et importer les traductions. La page spéciale traite le fichier, affiche les modifications et laisse le choix à l'utilisateur de les importer. Le processus se fait en plusieurs étapes pour l'import de longs fichiers comprenant de nombreuses traductions car le temps de traitement est limité.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

L'importation peut aussi avoir lieu via un script en ligne de commande dans le fichier &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. Cette méthode est moins flexible mais permet de tout importer d'un coup. Elle nécessite également une intervention manuelle via un accès par le shell au serveur.

La manière dont l'importation des traductions hors connexion est gérée (ou pas) dépend de votre wiki.

== Editeurs Gettext ==

Voici quelques outils permettant l'édition hors ligne des traductions :

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : disponible pour toutes les plateformes prenant en charge l'[http://www.wxwidgets.org/ ensemble d'outils wxWidgets], testé sous Unix avec GTK+ et Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''Attention :''' assurez-vous d'utiliser la version 1.4.2 ou supérieure, sinon les lignes &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; sont perdues et votre travail ne peut être traité.
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : peut être utilisé dans l'environnement de bureau de [http://gnome.org GNOME] sur les plateformes Unix et Linux.
; [http://www.gted.org gted] : à utiliser comme plugin dans l'IDE Eclipse sous Linux, Windows et MAC OS X, intègre différents outils.
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : utilise l'environnement du bureau [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] sur toutes les plateformes qui le prennent en charge. Possède un [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize wiki utilisateurs] et un [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html manuel] en ligne
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Outils Translate] : ensemble d'outils écrits en langage de programmation [http://python.org Python] qui doit être installé également, utilisable sur toutes les plateformes. Prend en charge aussi plusieurs autres formats de fichiers.
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : outils de traduction multi-format basés sur les outils ci-dessus. Actuellement opérationnels sous Windows et Linux.
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : outil libre pour les traducteurs professionnels écrit en Java, nécessite d'avoir installé Java; disponible sur toutes les plateformes. Prend en charge une variété d'autres formats de fichiers, glosssaires, détection rapide, et mémoires de traduction.
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : petit programme, s'exécute sous Windows, pas d'installation requise.
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ éditeur de fichiers Gorm PO] : petit programme puissant, s'exécute sous Windows, pas d'installation requise, la version 1.0 échoue sur les balises &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; .
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor PO Editor amélioré] : disponible en tant que code source pour Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Inclut un vérificateur orthographique et des suggestions de Google Translate.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>duaog1ogs8a7m6ea3emnf4peppchanj</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402859</id>
      <parentid>5402857</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:34:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10555" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Cette page explique de quelle manière '''traduire sans connection internet''' (traduire ''hors-ligne'').
Vous connaissez sûrement les fichiers [[:fr:Gettext|Gettext PO]] si vous avez déjà traduit d'autres projets.
Nous allons donc sur cette page décrire la partie particulière à l’extension Translate.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise, you're probably more interested in the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|How to translate]] tutorial for online translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Éviter d'utiliser un navigateur internet est une contrainte importante si vous avez une mauvaise connexion et vous êtes obligé d'utiliser des outils faisant attention au volume de données échangées. Puisque l'extension Translate a été conçue pour le travail collaboratif, elle prend cet aspect en compte. Cela veut aussi dire que les fichiers téléchargés sont rapidement périmés par les contributions d'autres utilisateurs. Il faut donc télécharger une version juste avant de traduire, afin d'éviter un conflit d'édition avec les autres contributeurs qui travaillent sur le site.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Exportation ==

Vous pouvez télécharger n’importe quel groupe de messages Gettext PO en utilisant la commande ''Exporter pour une traduction hors ligne'' dans [[Special:Translate]], si le site l'a activée dans sa configuration. Il est plus prudent de se renseigner sur la démarche propre au Wiki avant de débuter la traduction.

{{Note|1=Bien que quelques groupes de messages puissent avoir une option d'exportation, qui exportera les traductions dans le format natif de ce groupe, et bien que le format puisse être Gettext, ces fichiers ne sont pas ceux à utiliser pour une traduction hors-ligne !}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Les fichiers sont des fichers standards Gettext PO avec quelques informations supplémentaires. L'entête contient certains champs supplémentaires affichés ci-dessous; le &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; pour chaque message contient un identifiant utilisé par l'extension Translate. Certains éditeurs sont connus pour supprimer soit les commentaires de l'entête ou les lignes &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;, donc commencez avec un petit fichier pour être sûr que votre éditeur ne les enlève pas - ce n'est pas agréable de s'apercevoir que l'éditeur est boggué après avoir traduit des centaines de messages que vous ne pouvez pas réimporter dans le système en ligne ! 
La documentation du message est exportée comme commentaire de traduction.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Données importantes dans les fichiers :

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

Dans cet exemple, ''ext-abc'' est le nom du groupe de messages à traduire.
Pour les pages qui peuvent être traduites, le groupe de messages correspondant possède le préfixe ''page-'' suivi du nom de la page (par exemple pour la page &quot;Example&quot;, l'entête contiendrait la ligne &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Exemple de fichier Gettext PO :
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Importation ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Il n'est pas obligatoire de traduire le fichier en entier. Il est parfaitement possible de téléverser des groupes de messages traduits partiellement. Il y a deux méthodes permettant l'import de ces fichiers : &lt;br /&gt;
Les utilisateurs avec les droits correspondants peuvent utiliser la page [[Special:ImportTranslations]] pour téléverser et importer les traductions. La page spéciale traite le fichier, affiche les modifications et laisse le choix à l'utilisateur de les importer. Le processus se fait en plusieurs étapes pour l'import de longs fichiers comprenant de nombreuses traductions car le temps de traitement est limité.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

L'importation peut aussi avoir lieu via un script en ligne de commande dans le fichier &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. Cette méthode est moins flexible mais permet de tout importer d'un coup. Elle nécessite également une intervention manuelle via un accès par le shell au serveur.

La manière dont l'importation des traductions hors connexion est gérée (ou pas) dépend de votre wiki.

== Editeurs Gettext ==

Voici quelques outils permettant l'édition hors ligne des traductions :

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : disponible pour toutes les plateformes prenant en charge l'[http://www.wxwidgets.org/ ensemble d'outils wxWidgets], testé sous Unix avec GTK+ et Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''Attention :''' assurez-vous d'utiliser la version 1.4.2 ou supérieure, sinon les lignes &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; sont perdues et votre travail ne peut être traité.
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : peut être utilisé dans l'environnement de bureau de [http://gnome.org GNOME] sur les plateformes Unix et Linux.
; [http://www.gted.org gted] : à utiliser comme plugin dans l'IDE Eclipse sous Linux, Windows et MAC OS X, intègre différents outils.
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : utilise l'environnement du bureau [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] sur toutes les plateformes qui le prennent en charge. Possède un [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize wiki utilisateurs] et un [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html manuel] en ligne
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Outils Translate] : ensemble d'outils écrits en langage de programmation [http://python.org Python] qui doit être installé également, utilisable sur toutes les plateformes. Prend en charge aussi plusieurs autres formats de fichiers.
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : outils de traduction multi-format basés sur les outils ci-dessus. Actuellement opérationnels sous Windows et Linux.
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : outil libre pour les traducteurs professionnels écrit en Java, nécessite d'avoir installé Java; disponible sur toutes les plateformes. Prend en charge une variété d'autres formats de fichiers, glosssaires, détection rapide, et mémoires de traduction.
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : petit programme, s'exécute sous Windows, pas d'installation requise.
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ éditeur de fichiers Gorm PO] : petit programme puissant, s'exécute sous Windows, pas d'installation requise, la version 1.0 échoue sur les balises &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; .
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor PO Editor amélioré] : disponible en tant que code source pour Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Inclut un vérificateur orthographique et des suggestions de Google Translate.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>0enr905wrtfcubeqpjjgbwn0ragb6p7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402861</id>
      <parentid>5402859</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:34:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10473" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
Cette page explique de quelle manière '''traduire sans connection internet''' (traduire ''hors-ligne'').
Vous connaissez sûrement les fichiers [[:fr:Gettext|Gettext PO]] si vous avez déjà traduit d'autres projets.
Nous allons donc sur cette page décrire la partie particulière à l’extension Translate.
Vous pouvez donc déjà lire la page [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|''Comment traduire'']] avant celle-ci.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Éviter d'utiliser un navigateur internet est une contrainte importante si vous avez une mauvaise connexion et vous êtes obligé d'utiliser des outils faisant attention au volume de données échangées. Puisque l'extension Translate a été conçue pour le travail collaboratif, elle prend cet aspect en compte. Cela veut aussi dire que les fichiers téléchargés sont rapidement périmés par les contributions d'autres utilisateurs. Il faut donc télécharger une version juste avant de traduire, afin d'éviter un conflit d'édition avec les autres contributeurs qui travaillent sur le site.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== Exportation ==

Vous pouvez télécharger n’importe quel groupe de messages Gettext PO en utilisant la commande ''Exporter pour une traduction hors ligne'' dans [[Special:Translate]], si le site l'a activée dans sa configuration. Il est plus prudent de se renseigner sur la démarche propre au Wiki avant de débuter la traduction.

{{Note|1=Bien que quelques groupes de messages puissent avoir une option d'exportation, qui exportera les traductions dans le format natif de ce groupe, et bien que le format puisse être Gettext, ces fichiers ne sont pas ceux à utiliser pour une traduction hors-ligne !}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Les fichiers sont des fichers standards Gettext PO avec quelques informations supplémentaires. L'entête contient certains champs supplémentaires affichés ci-dessous; le &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; pour chaque message contient un identifiant utilisé par l'extension Translate. Certains éditeurs sont connus pour supprimer soit les commentaires de l'entête ou les lignes &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;, donc commencez avec un petit fichier pour être sûr que votre éditeur ne les enlève pas - ce n'est pas agréable de s'apercevoir que l'éditeur est boggué après avoir traduit des centaines de messages que vous ne pouvez pas réimporter dans le système en ligne ! 
La documentation du message est exportée comme commentaire de traduction.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

Données importantes dans les fichiers :

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

Dans cet exemple, ''ext-abc'' est le nom du groupe de messages à traduire.
Pour les pages qui peuvent être traduites, le groupe de messages correspondant possède le préfixe ''page-'' suivi du nom de la page (par exemple pour la page &quot;Example&quot;, l'entête contiendrait la ligne &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Exemple de fichier Gettext PO :
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

== Importation ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Il n'est pas obligatoire de traduire le fichier en entier. Il est parfaitement possible de téléverser des groupes de messages traduits partiellement. Il y a deux méthodes permettant l'import de ces fichiers : &lt;br /&gt;
Les utilisateurs avec les droits correspondants peuvent utiliser la page [[Special:ImportTranslations]] pour téléverser et importer les traductions. La page spéciale traite le fichier, affiche les modifications et laisse le choix à l'utilisateur de les importer. Le processus se fait en plusieurs étapes pour l'import de longs fichiers comprenant de nombreuses traductions car le temps de traitement est limité.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

L'importation peut aussi avoir lieu via un script en ligne de commande dans le fichier &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. Cette méthode est moins flexible mais permet de tout importer d'un coup. Elle nécessite également une intervention manuelle via un accès par le shell au serveur.

La manière dont l'importation des traductions hors connexion est gérée (ou pas) dépend de votre wiki.

== Editeurs Gettext ==

Voici quelques outils permettant l'édition hors ligne des traductions :

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : disponible pour toutes les plateformes prenant en charge l'[http://www.wxwidgets.org/ ensemble d'outils wxWidgets], testé sous Unix avec GTK+ et Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''Attention :''' assurez-vous d'utiliser la version 1.4.2 ou supérieure, sinon les lignes &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; sont perdues et votre travail ne peut être traité.
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : peut être utilisé dans l'environnement de bureau de [http://gnome.org GNOME] sur les plateformes Unix et Linux.
; [http://www.gted.org gted] : à utiliser comme plugin dans l'IDE Eclipse sous Linux, Windows et MAC OS X, intègre différents outils.
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : utilise l'environnement du bureau [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] sur toutes les plateformes qui le prennent en charge. Possède un [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize wiki utilisateurs] et un [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html manuel] en ligne
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Outils Translate] : ensemble d'outils écrits en langage de programmation [http://python.org Python] qui doit être installé également, utilisable sur toutes les plateformes. Prend en charge aussi plusieurs autres formats de fichiers.
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : outils de traduction multi-format basés sur les outils ci-dessus. Actuellement opérationnels sous Windows et Linux.
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : outil libre pour les traducteurs professionnels écrit en Java, nécessite d'avoir installé Java; disponible sur toutes les plateformes. Prend en charge une variété d'autres formats de fichiers, glosssaires, détection rapide, et mémoires de traduction.
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : petit programme, s'exécute sous Windows, pas d'installation requise.
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ éditeur de fichiers Gorm PO] : petit programme puissant, s'exécute sous Windows, pas d'installation requise, la version 1.0 échoue sur les balises &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; .
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor PO Editor amélioré] : disponible en tant que code source pour Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Inclut un vérificateur orthographique et des suggestions de Google Translate.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>3xxo6tglw4yvwt2lih2x2wxhouoym58</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/ar</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>283718</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402473</id>
      <parentid>5072257</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:10:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11960" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = نيكلاس لاكستروم وزيبراند مازلاند وغيرهما
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=موجود في حزمة امتداد اللغات}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=توثيق المستخدم}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = تفعل خاصية الترجمة داخل موقع الويكي والتدقيق
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] أو [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view جرب كيف تترجم صفحة الآن]
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

يجعل امتداد '''Translate''' من ميدياويكي أداة قوية لترجمة أي نوع من أنواع النصوص. يستخدم الامتداد على وجه الخصوص في ترجمة البرمجيات وكذلك إدارة مواقع الويكي متعددة اللغات بطريقة معقولة.

== السمات ==

يحتوي امتداد الترجمة على عدة سمات مخصصة للمترجمين بينما تجعل من الدمج المباشر مع النص المصدري الفعلي عملية أبسط ما يمكن. وفي ذات الوقت يجري كل شيء داخل [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|ميدياويكي]]، وهو ما يوفر للمستخدمين درجة لا نهاية لها من الحرية في أمور التواصل والتنظيم الذاتي.

تشمل السمات ما يلي:

* '''ترجمة صفحات محتوى مواقع الويكي بصفة منظمة.'''
* '''أقلمة مواقع الويكي واستيراد رسائل واجهة البرمجيات (أو مجرد أي شيء).'''
* '''[[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overview/|واجهة]] ترجمة وتدقيق مستندين إلى الوب، وكذلك تصدير النصوص بصيغة gettext واستيرادها لأغراض الترجمة دون اتصال بالإنترنت.'''
* '''مساعدات مختلفة تجعل من عمل المترجمين أيسر.'''
** عرض الترجمات في لغات أخرى محددة بوجه عام وخيار توسيع ذلك باستخدام لغات يحددها المستخدم؛
** التعديل التعاوني لأعمال التوثيق للاستخدام وكذلك سياق الرسائل؛
** ذاكرة ترجمة وترجمة آلية باستخدام أدوات خارجية (Apertium أو Microsoft Translator أو Yandex.Translate)؛
** عرض أحدث التغييرات في رسالة المصدر؛
** تحذير بشأن الأخطاء الشائعة مثل المتغيرات التي لم تستخدم.
* وحدات تدريبية مجهزة سلفا لمنتجات مختلفة مفتوحة المصدر يمكنك استخدامها كمثال.
** دعم عدة صيغ تشمل: بي إتش بي وسمات جافا ونصوص Gettext وYAML وAndroidXml (طالع {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} و[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|دعم صيغ الملفات]]).
* نظام ربط متنوع يسهل إضافة مشاريع جديدة في هيئة مجموعة رسائل.
* إحصاءات متعددة:
** نسب استكمال الترجمة المئوية لكافة مجموعات الرسائل لكافة اللغات المدعومة؛
** نسب استكمال الترجمة المئوية لكافة اللغات المدعومة لأي مجموعة رسائل مدعومة؛
** أداة لعرض رسوم بيانية للنشاط لفترات زمنية محددة. إمكان عرض إما رقم التعديلات أو المستخدمين النشطاء يوميا أو كل ساعة ويشتمل على عدد من المرشحات؛
** نظرة عامة سحابية للغات النشطة والمترجمين النشطاء.

تأكد أن امتداد الترجمة بفضل قاعدة مستخدميه الواسعة متوافق مع كافة المتصفحات الحديثة عدا بعض المشكلات التقنية البسيطة (المتعلقة بالطرز) والتي تصوب سريعا.

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|''جعل حلم مواقع الويكي متعددة اللغات حقيقة'': يعرض هذا العرض التقديمي كيف يمكن لامتداد الترجمة أن يجعل من موقع ويكي متعدد اللغات بالفعل استنادا إلى خبرات مستخدمي موقع ويكي KDE UserBase.
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|نيكلاس لاكستروم، ''الترجمة على طريقة الويكي: بسيطة وسريعة ومرحة''، ويكيمانيا 2012 (الشرائح متاحة).
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== الدعم والتوثيق ==

* طالع [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|التنصيب]]
* طالع [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|الإعدادات]]
* طالع [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|التوثيق للمستخدمين]] — يشتمل على دورات تدريبية
* طالع [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|صفحة الشروع في تطوير امتداد الترجمة]]
* دعم مباشر على قناة IRC بقيمة #translatewiki في ليبرا شات (أفضل الأوقات في أيام ومساء أوروبا)
* يرجى الإبلاغ عن كافة المسائل وطلب السمات على [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate نظام متابعة المشاكل]

صمم امتداد الترجمة في الأساس المستخدم [[User:Nikerabbit]]؛ وساهم عدد كبير من المستخدمين الآخرين مثل [[User:Raymond]] و [[User:SPQRobin]] وفريق اللغات التابع لويكيميديا في كوده المصدري وتوثيقه. يتولى صيانة الامتداد كلا من [[User:Nikerabbit]] و [[User:Siebrand]].

== مستخدمون بارزون لامتداد الترجمة ==
* https://translatewiki.net — أضخم موقع يستند لتقنية الويكي ومجتمع لترجمة واجهة البرمجيات مفتوحة المصدر.
* https://userbase.kde.org — ويكي توثيق لمشروع KDE الذي يستعين كثيرا بسمة ترجمة الصفحات.
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — ترجمة محتوى الويكي ويستعين بسمة إحصاءات المجموعات. كلا من الترجمة ومراجعة الترجمة متاح لكافة المستخدمين على موقع الويكي تقريبا.
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

طالع المزيد على [[Wikipedia:translatewiki.net#Notable uses]].

=== شكر وتقدير ===

توم هاتشينسون من جوملا:
{{quotation|1=
يسمح امتداد الترجمة بالربط مع خدمة ترجمة ويمكنه ملء الترجمة آليا نيابة عنك. في ذات الوقت يمكن لمترجم أن يجري تعديلات حتى لا تستحدث الكثير من الصفحات التي تحتوي على ترجمات غير دقيقة.

لا بأس في ذلك لو كانوا في قارات مختلفة.
هذا الأمر في الواقع ميزة لأن العمل يجري على قدم وساق على مدار الساعة.
كل ما يحتاجون إليه هو مجموعة دعم دردشة مع بعضهم البعض.
قد يمكنهم جميعا قراءة الإنجليزية لو كانوا يترجمون، أليس كذلك؟ علمهم بعض من نصوص برمجة الويكي البسيطة مثل الوصلات وما عليهم علمه في شأن التصنيفات.
ومن ثم سيساعدون الآخرين الذين سيساعدون غيرهم بدورهم.
لدينا أكثر من 40 شخص في دردشة يساعدون بعضهم البعض ويستمتعون بوقتهم في ذات الوقت.
وكانوا جميعا خائفين من الويكي إلا انهم لم يصدقوا سهولته حالما شرعوا في العمل.
هم في الواقع ينتظرون مني المزيد من الترجمات ليترجموها لأنني لا أستطيع مجاراتهم في السرعة.
أعلم أنه يوجد شخص واحد يترجم إلى هذه اللغة أو تلك.
لدينا ذلك أيضا.
يوجد شخص واحد يترجم إلى السواحيلية بينما يتولى آخر العمل على اللغة اليابانية.
كما أنك تسم الصفحات لتكون جاهزة للترجمة.
يمكنك التحكم في ضم القوالب أو استثناء المتغيرات الموجودة في خانات القالب.
}}


== أنظر أيضا ==
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – امتداد ييسر التواصل مع المترجمين.

لا تخلط بينه وبين:

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – يستخدم في ترجمة واحدة سريعة لصفحات الويكي من لغة واحدة إلى لغة أخرى.
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Abstract Wikipedia]] للترجمة.

== كيفية المساهمة ==

* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all ترجمة هذا الامتداد على translatewiki.net]
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|الأعطال القائمة والسمات المطلوبة]]
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|المزيد من الأعطال القائمة والسمات المطلوبة على translatewiki.net]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|ترجم ودقق توثيق امتداد الترجمة]]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>pn9ui2zblpohptp4td1bumruxczx3xy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki/fr</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>286209</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401759</id>
      <parentid>5312693</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4093" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;La plupart des membres de l'équipe de ShoutWiki sont aussi des [[developers|développeurs]] de MediaWiki. Consultez [http://fr.shoutwiki.com/ la site Web de ShoutWiki] ou [http://fr.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Français:À_propos la page &quot;À propos&quot; de ShoutWiki] sur ShoutWiki pour connaître ShoutWiki en général.&lt;/span&gt;

ShoutWiki a également [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 son propre groupe Gerrit] qui se compose de développeurs de ShoutWiki.

== Extensions ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki utilise beaucoup d'extensions utilisées par les sites de Wikimedia, en plus de leurs extensions personnalisées. Le code source pour la plupart de ces extensions peut être trouvé sur [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ le dépôt git de Wikimedia (git officiel de MediaWiki)]. Voir [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|:Catégorie:Extensions développées par ShoutWiki]] pour une liste des extensions écrites par ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About À propos de ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Information sur ShoutWiki et le code source ouvert]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — Modifications de codes multiples par ShoutWiki au code MediaWiki
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki Github de ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7ntiojc2d4at74xyxu27byjyn5ti86l</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401777</id>
      <parentid>5401759</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4092" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;La plupart des membres de l'équipe de ShoutWiki sont aussi des [[developers|développeurs]] de MediaWiki. Consultez [http://fr.shoutwiki.com/ la site Web de ShoutWiki] ou [http://fr.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Français:À_propos la page &quot;À propos&quot; de ShoutWiki] sur ShoutWiki pour connaître ShoutWiki en général.&lt;/span&gt;

ShoutWiki a également [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 son propre groupe Gerrit] qui se compose de développeurs de ShoutWiki.

== Extensions ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki utilise beaucoup d'extensions utilisées par les sites de Wikimedia, en plus de leurs extensions personnalisées. Le code source pour la plupart de ces extensions peut être trouvé sur [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ le dépôt git de Wikimedia (git officiel de MediaWiki)]. Voir [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|:Catégorie:Extensions développées par ShoutWiki]] pour une liste des extensions écrites par ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About À propos de ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Information sur ShoutWiki et le code source ouvert]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — Modifications de codes multiples par ShoutWiki au code MediaWiki
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki Github de ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>qesdtgn5mv2tm6gn33ispae61sa7u44</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401879</id>
      <parentid>5401777</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4084" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;La plupart des membres de l'équipe de ShoutWiki sont aussi des [[developers|développeurs]] de MediaWiki. Consultez [http://fr.shoutwiki.com/ la site Web de ShoutWiki] ou [http://fr.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Français:À_propos la page &quot;À propos&quot; de ShoutWiki] sur ShoutWiki pour connaître ShoutWiki en général.&lt;/span&gt;

ShoutWiki a également [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 son propre groupe Gerrit] qui se compose de développeurs de ShoutWiki.

== Extensions ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki utilise beaucoup d'extensions utilisées par les sites de Wikimedia, en plus de leurs extensions personnalisées. Le code source pour la plupart de ces extensions peut être trouvé sur [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ le dépôt git de Wikimedia (git officiel de MediaWiki)]. Voir [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|:Catégorie:Extensions développées par ShoutWiki]] pour une liste des extensions écrites par ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About À propos de ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Information sur ShoutWiki et le code source ouvert]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; Modifications de codes multiples par ShoutWiki au code MediaWiki
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki Github de ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>m8sl0rl996b5l8hhgv46op9f2diunvg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki/it</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>292921</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401760</id>
      <parentid>5312692</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4035" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]].  See ShoutWiki's website at [http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com], or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/span&gt;

==Estensioni==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About A proposito si ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/span&gt;]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/span&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/span&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>faxk8nei8zwc0kq3z7k9jnzl8vjmucd</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401778</id>
      <parentid>5401760</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4033" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]]. See ShoutWiki's website at [http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com], or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/span&gt;

==Estensioni==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About A proposito si ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/span&gt;]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/span&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/span&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>mv50vf6rtw3zro6m4kusp21qgccjk8w</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401877</id>
      <parentid>5401778</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4002" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]]. See [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki's website] or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's about page on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/span&gt;

==Estensioni==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About A proposito si ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/span&gt;]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/span&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/span&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>f9kglp4jm3tjeqwofrq3owv0tbziebu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Formatting/4/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>298035</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402974</id>
      <parentid>2929937</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:46:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6" xml:space="preserve">Digiti</text>
      <sha1>kutfva9c0cics1z4sereko5dflqpb4m</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Formatting/87/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>298123</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402970</id>
      <parentid>1195681</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:45:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6" xml:space="preserve">oppure</text>
      <sha1>mxz2l0qytleijggl8arsfkvh9tjfxpw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>PHP configuration/de</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>300246</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403097</id>
      <parentid>5295534</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:25:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>correction of the name (MediWiki -&gt; MediaWiki)</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8780" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
'''PHP''' ist ein Web-Vorlagen-System, das zufällig zu einer ziemlich vollständigen Programmiersprache herangewachsen ist. PHPs Syntax, Fähigkeiten und seine Ausführungsmodell haben Ähnlichkeiten mit [[w:Perl|Perl]]: Skripte werden von einem Interpreter geladen, in Bytecode übersetzt und dann ausgeführt. Der PHP-Interpreter kann aus einer Befehlszeile, über CGI, oder - am häufigsten - prozessintern als [[w:Apache modules|Apachemodul]]  gestartet werden.

== MediaWiki-Kompatibilität ==

Um die Liste von möglichen PHP-Versionen, die du mit deiner Version von MediaWiki verwenden kannst, [[Special:MyLanguage/Compatibility#PHP|anzuzeigen, klicke hier]].

== Installation ==

Bitte lies https://php.net/install.

=== Optionen zur Übersetzungszeit ===

==== Voraussetzungen ====

Die folgenden Erweiterungen werden von MediaWiki benötigt:
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://php.net/pcre Perl Compatible Regular Expressions]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://php.net/session Session]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://php.net/spl Standard PHP Library]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://php.net/dom Document Object Module]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*[https://php.net/iconv iconv] character set conversion library
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://php.net/json JSON] (alternatively, the [http://pecl.php.net/package/jsonc pecl-json-c] fork)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*[https://php.net/mbstring mbstring] multibyte character string support
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*[https://php.net/fileinfo fileinfo] MIME type detection
&lt;/div&gt;
*&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[https://php.net/intl intl] Unicode normalization&lt;/span&gt;
*&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[https://php.net/calendar calendar] Support for conversion between different calendars&lt;/span&gt;
* Wenigstens ein Datenbanktreiber:
**[https://php.net/mysql MySQL]
**[https://php.net/pgsql PostgreSQL]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
**[https://php.net/pdo-sqlite SQLite (through PDO)]
&lt;/div&gt;

MySQL und PostgreSQL über PDO werden '''nicht''' unterstützt

Perl-kompatible reguläre Ausdrücke, Sitzungen, die Standard-PHP-Bibliothek und JSON sind von Anfang an aktiviert; Perl-kompatible reguläre Ausdrücke und die Standard-PHP-Bibliothek können ab PHP 5.3 nicht mehr deaktiviert werden.

==== Optionales ====

MediWiki braucht eine bestimmte Menge optionaler Funktionen von PHP, die zur Übersetzungszeit aktiviert sein müssen:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*[https://php.net/zlib zlib] compression library, optionally to compress the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:File cache|file cache]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*[https://php.net/sockets sockets] support for network communication, if using [[Special:MyLanguage/Memcached|memcached]]
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Beispiel ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are successfully working with these compiler options:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
'./configure' \
  '--with-mysql' \
  '--with-apxs2=/usr/sbin/apxs2' \
  '--with-zlib' \
  '--with-ldap' \
  '--with-gd' \
  '--with-jpeg-dir' \
  '--with-iconv-dir' \
  '--enable-mbstring' 
&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In detail, these configure options do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; --with-mysql : Allows PHP to query MySQL. This is an essential feature (I think). You will need to have MySQL installed to enable this option.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; --with-apxs2=/usr/sbin/apxs2 : this is required if you want to build mod_php. APXS is for configuring compilation of an Apache module. You will need to change (or omit the path) for your specific system.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; --with-zlib : Allows PHP to read / write zipped files and send compressed data to Apache ... or something like that
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; --with-ldap : Important if you want your wiki users to be verified by LDAP
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; --with-gd : Use this if you want image processing 'within' PHP, else you can use ImageMagick. Because this option requires that you have various libraries installed... but presumably IM has the same deps... oh well...
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; --with-jpeg-dir : Seems nonsensical
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; --with-iconv-dir : Seems nonsensical
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; --enable-mbstring : Allows multibyte character string support. This is optional, as slower custom code will be used if not available.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Opcode caching ==
&lt;/div&gt;

: Siehe {{ll|Manual:Performance tuning}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Due to MediaWiki's large codebase, it is highly recommended that a system be used to cache the compiled scripts; there are a number of such plugins for PHP, some free, some proprietary. There is a list of some caches:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://php.net/apc/ Alternative PHP Cache] -- used at Wikimedia
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://www.iis.net/download/wincacheforphp Windows Cache Extension for PHP] -- recommended for IIS users
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Fortunately, these all seem to be easy to install as Zend plugins, you just drop in a library and change your php.ini. No fussy recompiling of the entire PHP!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Depending on the cache and options used, you ''may'' have to perform a special operation whenever updating script files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki can also interact with that caches and use them for object caching, see &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgMainCacheType|$wgMainCacheType}}&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Laufzeitkonfiguration (php.ini) ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some settings in [https://php.net/ini php.ini] affects MediaWiki behavior and some of them are incompatible with MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

; magic_quotes_gpc
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: This options adds quotes to data in &lt;code&gt;$_GET&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;$_POST&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;$_COOKIES&lt;/code&gt;. MediaWiki can work with this option turned on, but will have to remove these quotes and thus will be slower.
&lt;/div&gt;
; magic_quotes_runtime
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: This option corrupts data input unpredictably by adding quotes in e.g. opened files, data received from database etc. MediaWiki will refuse to install if this option is turned on.
&lt;/div&gt;
; magic_quotes_sybase
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: same as ''magic_quotes_runtime''
&lt;/div&gt;
; mbstring.func_overload
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: This option causes errors and may corrupt data unpredictably; MediaWiki will refuse to install if this option is turned on.
&lt;/div&gt;
; zend.ze1_compatibility_mode
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: This option causes horrible bugs; MediaWiki will refuse to install if this option is turned on.
&lt;/div&gt;
; memory_limit
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: MediaWiki needs sufficiently memory to work. The minimal limit should be something like 20 MB, but if you want MediaWiki to work correctly, consider using at least 50 MB.
&lt;/div&gt;
; disable_functions
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: To be able to find GNU diff3 and git during installation process this entry must not contain ''passthru''
&lt;/div&gt;
; post_max_size
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: If you are getting the error &quot;{{int|edit_form_incomplete}}&quot; then it could be because this is set with a &quot;MB&quot; prefix, instead of just &quot;M&quot; (the former is interpreted at bytes, not megabytes).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Image Resizing ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[w:ImageMagick|ImageMagick]] or the [https://php.net/gd GD PHP module] can be used for image thumbnailing.&lt;/span&gt;
See [[Manual:Image administration#Image thumbnailing]]

== Siehe auch ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Suhosin_(Hardened-PHP_Project_patch_and_extension)|Suhosin (Hardened-PHP Project patch and extension)]]
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|PHP configuration]]</text>
      <sha1>hphnhhpunxsgouhxmvkq3le4f3krba7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:System message/fr</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>303760</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402528</id>
      <parentid>5352632</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:24:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="61135" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{i18n navigation}}
{{TOC right|limit=2}}

[[Image:MediaWiki SpecialUpload interface labelled.png|thumb|Capture d'écran commentée de l'interface « [[Special:Upload|{{MediaWiki:Upload/fr}}]] », montrant les différents messages système.]]
Un '''message système''' est un fragment de texte brut, de wikitexte, de [[w:fr:Feuilles de style en cascade|CSS]] ou de [[w:fr:JavaScript|JavaScript]], qui peut être utilisé pour personnaliser le comportement de MediaWiki et son apparence pour chaque langue et [[w:fr:Paramètres régionaux|paramètres régionaux]]. MediaWiki utilise des messages pour chaque partie de l'interface visible par l'utilisateur, permettant l'internationalisation et la régionalisation de l'interface utilisateur de MediaWiki, tant pour son cœur que pour ses extensions.
Tous les messages utilisés dans MediaWiki sont définis dans un ''fichier de messages''.

== Redéfinir les messages sur un wiki ==
La valeur par défaut des messages peut être modifiée  en l'éditant sur chaque wiki.
Chaque message possède sa page wiki dans l'espace de noms MediaWiki avec sa clé de message pour nom de page.
Par exemple, le message ''aboutsite'' est enregistré dans MediaWiki:aboutsite.
Par défaut, cet espace de noms est protégé contre toute modification à moins que l'utilisateur n'ait les droits de ''modificateur d'interface''.
Une liste de tous les messages se trouve sur [[Special:AllMessages]].
Modifier les messages d'interface est très simple et se fait comme pour toute modification de page classique du wiki, mais cela reste réservé aux utilisateurs ayant les droits de [[editinterface|modificateur d'interface]], c'est à dire par défaut aux administrateurs (et aux administrateurs d'interfaces).
[[Image:Wiki-system-messages.png|thumb|Exemple de ligne de l'ancien [[Special:AllMessages]].]]
Le tableau de [[Special:AllMessages]] contient deux colonnes : le nom du fichier du message système avec un lien pour le consulter, et le texte du message système.
Le texte est séparé horizontalement pour montrer le texte par défaut au-dessus, et le texte personnalisé en-dessous.
Quand un message personnalisé n'existe pas, seul le texte par défaut apparait.
Pour personnaliser un message, cliquez sur le lien supérieur de la colonne de gauche (le nom du message).
Le lien est en rouge si le texte par défaut est utilisé, car la page à modifier est vide.

Les liens inférieurs des cellules de la colonne de gauche pointent vers les pages de discussion relatives aux messages.

{{anchor|Finding messages and documentation}}
== Trouver les messages et leur documentation ==
La façon dont chaque message est utilisé par MediaWiki, les variables disponibles, les paramètres utilisés, les limitations, etc. est exposée dans les fichiers de la [//translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;task=reviewall&amp;group=core&amp;language=qqq&amp;limit=5000&amp;action=page&amp;filter= documentation complète en pseudo-langage ''qqq''], suivant [[#Message_documentation|les recomendations pour la documentation des messages]].
Des pages d'explication plus longues peuvent exister pour quelques messages d'interface dans la plus ancienne {{ll|Category:Interface messages}}.

{{note|1=
Dans le wiki utilisé par translatewiki.net, 'qqq' représente la page qui contient la documentation utilisateur du message (en anglais, car c'est le même texte qui est affiché pour tous les lecteurs).
De la même manière que /en /ge /fr ... /qqq est une sous-page de l'article et peut être affichée directement.

* Essayez [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/en]]  pour voir un article en anglais,
* Essayez [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/fr]] pour voir le même article en français,
* Essayez [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/qqq]] pour afficher sa documentation associée (en anglais).

De ce point de vue, &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; est considéré comme un langage dans le paramètre &lt;code&gt;language=&lt;/code&gt; de la requête.
}}

Dans MediaWiki 1.18 et supérieur, vous pouvez trouver la clé d'un message en consultant un wiki dans en pseudo-langage de code &lt;code&gt;'''[[Help:Qqx|qqx]]'''&lt;/code&gt;, ce qui peut se faire en ajoutant &lt;code&gt;?[[uselang]]=qqx&lt;/code&gt; à l'URL, ou &lt;code&gt;&amp;uselang=qqx&lt;/code&gt; si l'URL contient déjà un caractère &lt;code&gt;?&lt;/code&gt; ([{{fullurl:{{FULLPAGENAME}}|uselang=qqx}} exemple]). Tous les messages seront ensuite remplacés par leur clé de message, de façon à ce que vous puissiez identifier quel message est concerné. Les messages qui sont toujours dans la langue du contenu ne seront pas affichés en utilisant qqx.

Quelques parties de l'interface ajoutent &lt;code&gt;nstab-&lt;/code&gt; à la chaîne affichée quand vous utilisez l'astuce qqx. Par exemple l'étiquette de l'onglet qui pointe sur la page de discussion dans l'espace de noms principal est affichée en tant que &lt;code&gt;nstab-talk&lt;/code&gt;, mais la chaîne se trouve actuellement dans [[MediaWiki:Talk]].

Dans le cas où la page utilise des onglets comme par exemple la [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|page spéciale &quot;Preferences&quot;]] vous devrez ajouter l'onglet après le paramètre &lt;code&gt;uselang&lt;/code&gt;, par exemple &lt;code&gt;Special:Preferences?uselang=qqx#mw-prefsection-rendering&lt;/code&gt;.

{{anchor|Localisation file format}}
== Format des fichiers de localisation ==

Tous les messages utilisés dans MediaWiki sont définis dans un ''fichier de messages''.

Il y a deux types de fichiers de messages dans MediaWiki : JSON et PHP.
Depuis avril 2014, le noyau de MediaWiki et la plupart des extensions les mieux maintenues ont migré au format JSON.
Vous devez utiliser JSON pour tous les nouveaux développements.
Pour plus d'information sur la migration en JSON, voir [[Requests for comment/Localisation format]].

=== JSON ===

Depuis la fin 2013 un nouveau format de fichier de messages a été introduit : JSON.
C'est le [[:w:fr:JSON|JSON]] à plat, familier en tant que format commun générique de stockage des données.
Chacune des clés est une clé de message, et la valeur est le texte du message.
En plus, la clé spéciale &lt;code&gt;@metadata&lt;/code&gt; est utilisée pour stocker les informations concernant la traduction telles que les auteurs de la traduction.

L'utilisation de JSON rend les fichiers de localisation plus sécurisés car ce n'est pas du code exécutable.
Il est également compatible avec jquery.i18n, une bibliothèque  JavaScript développée pour le [[Milkshake|projet Milkshake]], qui fournit des possibilités de traduction de l'interface utilisateur comme celles de MediaWiki et qui est utilisée par certaines extensions qui se veulent plus indépendantes de MediaWiki, telles que [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor]] ou [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector|UniversalLanguageSelector]].

Parce que la plus grande suite d'outils d'internationalisation et de localisation était appelée « [[Project Milkshake]] » , certaines personnes ont appelé ce format « banane » .

==== Emplacement des fichiers ====
Dans le noyau MediaWiki, les fichiers internationalisés se trouvent dans le répertoire &lt;code&gt;{{git file |file=languages/i18n |action=tree}}&lt;/code&gt; .
Les extensions MediaWiki mettent habituellement les leurs dans un sous-répertoire &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt; .
Si un projet comporte trop de messages, il est possible de les grouper en deux ou plusieurs sous-répertoires de sujets afin d'en facilter la maintenance.
Dans le contexte de MediaWiki, la clé de configuration {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}} est utilisée pour lister ces sous-répertoires.
Voici un exemple de l'extension VisualEditor pour MediaWiki :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
  &quot;MessagesDirs&quot;: {
    &quot;VisualEditor&quot;: [
      &quot;lib/ve/modules/ve/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-mw/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-wmf/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;lib/ve/lib/oojs-ui/i18n&quot;
    ]
  }
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ajoutez les nouveaux messages dans le fichier « en » des messages en anglais « &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; » et documentez-les dans le fichier de documentation des messages ayant comme code spécial de langue « qqq » &amp;ndash; &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;.
''Voir aussi : [[#Adding new messages|Ajouter de nouveaux messages]]''.

==== Métadonnées ====

Actuellement, les champs suivants  sont utilisés dans les fichiers pour les métadonnées :

;authors
:Liste JSON des auteurs des messages. Pour les messages en anglais (en) ainsi que pour la documentation (qqq) ils sont ajoutés manuellement lorsque le fichier des messages est modifié. Pour toutes les autres langues l'insertion est automatique lorsque le fichier des messages est exporté de [[translatewiki.net]]. La documentation des messages peut être mise à jour sur translatewiki.net, et les éditeurs de la documentation sont également insérés dans le fichier qqq.json automatiquement.
;message-documentation
:Ceci est le code du pseudo-langage pour enregistrer la documentation du message. Pour MediaWiki, c'est toujours ''qqq''. (On voit cela dans quelques extensions, mais il n'est pas traité actuellement d'une quelconque manière. Cela n'est pas obligatoire).

==== Conventions ====

Les caractères spéciaux tels que les passages à la ligne doivent être échappés (&lt;code&gt;&quot;\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Les caractères Unicode qui représentent des lettres dans les différents alphabets sont rangés comme des caractères réels et non pas comme des codes de caractères, car ces fichiers sont quelques fois lus par des personnes et parce que cela produit des fichiers plus petits (&lt;code&gt;&quot;誼&quot;&lt;/code&gt; et non pas &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u8ABC&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).
De façon générale, les développeurs ne modifient que les messages en anglais (rarement dans les autres langues) car  ceux-ci sont habituellement traduits en utilisant par ''translatewiki.net''.

Le code HTML n'est pas échappé lui non plus; donc &lt;code&gt;&quot;&amp;lt;strong&gt;Warning&amp;lt;/strong&gt;&quot;&lt;/code&gt; et non pas &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u003cstrong\u003eWarning\u003c/strong\u003e&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.

L'indentation dans les fichiers JSON se fait en utilisant les caractères de tabulation.

=== PHP ===

L'ancien format du fichier de localisation est PHP.
Il s'agit essentiellement d'un tableau PHP contenant tous les messages.
Dans le noyau de MediaWiki chaque langue est rangée dans son propre fichier du répertoire ''languages/message'' du code source de  MediaWiki.
Dans les extensions toutes les langues et la documentation des message (''qqq'') sont dans le même fichier : ''ExtensionName.i18n.php'', habituellement dans le répertoire principal de l'extension.

Pour migrer de PHP vers JSON, utilisez le script [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:GenerateJsonI18n.php|generateJsonI18n.php]] .
Il déplacera les messages vers les fichiers JSON et remplacera le texte du fichier PHP en le faisant pointer vers les fichiers JSON.
Ce code passe-partout est nécessaire pour la compatibilité arrière avec MediaWiki 1.19 .
Il n'est pas utilisé dans les nouvelles extensions qui ne nécessitent pas la compatibilté avec MediaWiki 1.19.

== Utiliser les messages ==
MediaWiki utilise un dépôt ''central'' des messages auxquels le code accède avec une clé.
Ceci est différent de &lt;code&gt;Gettext&lt;/code&gt; par exemple, qui ne fait qu'extraire des fichiers source, les chaînes de caractères traductibles.
Le système basé sur les clés rend certaines choses plus faciles, comme affiner les textes originaux et tracer la modification des messages.
La contrepartie est bien sûr que la liste des messages utilisés et la liste des textes source pour ces clés peuvent diverger.
En pratique, ce n'est pas un gros problème et le seul vrai problème est que quelques fois des messages supplémentaires qui ne sont plus utilisés, sont encore présentés à la traduction.

Pour rendre les clés des messages plus gérables et facilement reconnaissables même avec grep, vous devez  toujours les écrire totalement, sans trop vous fier à leur création dynamique.
Vous pouvez concaténer des parties de clé de message si vous pensez que cela donne une meilleure structure à votre code, mais laissez un commentaire à côté avec une liste des clés résultantes possibles.

Voir aussi les [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding_conventions#Dynamic_identifiers|conventions de codage]]. Par exemple :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// Messages utilisables ici :
// * myextension-connection-success
// * myextension-connection-warning
// * myextension-connection-error
$text = wfMessage( 'myextension-connection-' . $status )-&gt;parse();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Pour utiliser un message en JavaScript, vous devez [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Messages API#Using a ResourceLoader module|le lister]] dans la définition de votre module ResourceLoader, dans la propriété &lt;code&gt;&quot;messages&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.

L'utilisation détaillée des fonctions des messages en PHP et en JavaScript se trouve sur {{ll|Manual:Messages API}}.
'''C'est une page de documentation importante, et vous devriez l'avoir lue AVANT d'écrire le code qui utilise des messages.'''

{{anchor|Message sources}}
== Sources des messages ==

Le code recherche les messages système depuis les sources suivantes :
* Espace de noms MediaWiki. Ceci permet aux wikis d’adopter ou de remplacer tous leurs messages, quand les messages standards ne conviennent pas ou ne sont pas souhaités.
** MediaWiki:''Message-key'' est le message par défaut,
** MediaWiki:''Message-key''/''language-code'' est le message à utiliser quand un utilisateur a sélectionné une autre langue que la langue par défaut du wiki.
* A partir des fichiers de messages :
** Le noyau MediaWiki lui-même et la plupart des [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All extensions|extensions]] les plus maintenues actuellement utilisent un fichier par langue, appelé &lt;code&gt;''zyx''.json&lt;/code&gt;, où ''zyx'' est le code de la langue.
** Certaines extensions plus anciennes utilisent un fichier de messages combiné contenant tous les messages dans toutes les langues, habituellement appelé &lt;code&gt;''MyExtensionName''.i18n.php&lt;/code&gt;.
** De nombreux wikis de la Fondation Wikimedia accèdent à certains messages de l’extension {{ll|Extension:WikimediaMessages|nsp=0}}, leur permettant de standardiser les messages au travers des wikis WMF sans les imposer sur chaque installation de MediaWiki.
** Seules quelques extensions utilisent d’autres techniques.
{{anchor|Caching}}

== Mise en cache ==
Les messages système sont l'un des composants les plus significatifs de MediaWiki, principalement parce qu'ils sont utilisés à chaque requête web.
Les fichiers PHP des messages sont longs, parce qu'ils contiennent des milliers de clés de messages et les valeurs.
Charger ces fichiers (et éventuellement les fichiers multiples si la langue de l'utilisateur est différente de celle du contenu) a un coût énorme sur la mémoire et les performances.
Un système agressif de mise en cache par niveau est utilisé pour réduire cet impact sur les performances.

MediaWiki possède beaucoup de mécanismes de mise en cache intégrés, ce qui rend le code quelque peu difficile à comprendre.
Depuis la 1.16 il existe un nouveau système qui met en cache les messages soit dans les fichiers [[cdb]] ou dans la base de donnérs.
Les messages personnalisés sont mis en cache dans le système de fichiers et dans [[memcached]] (ou équivalent), en fonction de la configuration.

La table ci-dessous donne un aperçu des paramètres concernés :

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!colspan=&quot;2&quot; rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| Emplacement du cache
!colspan=&quot;4&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf}}
|-
! 'store' =&gt; 'db'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;br /&gt;(par défaut) !! 'store' =&gt; 'files'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'array'&lt;br /&gt;''(expérimental depuis MW ≥ 1.26)''
|-
!rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}
! = false&lt;br /&gt;(par défaut)
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || ''erreur'' (chemin non défini) || ''erreur'' (chemin non défini)
|-
! = ''path''
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || système local de fichiers (CDB) || système local de fichiers (CDB) || système local de fichiers (tableau PHP)
|}
{{MW version|version=1.27.0|version2=1.27.2|gerrit change=Id3e2d2b18ddb423647bf2e893bcf942722c0e097}}
Dans MediaWiki 1.27.0 et 1.27.1, l'auto-détection a été modifiée pour favoriser l'archivage du fichier.
Dans le cas &lt;code&gt;'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;/code&gt; (cas par défaut), le fichier stocké est utilisé avec le chemin de {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}.
Si cette valeur n'est pas initialisée (cas par défaut), on utilise un répertoire temporaire déterminé par le système d'exploiration.
Si le répertoire temporaire ne peut être identifié le dépôt de la base de données est utilisé comme solution de repli.
Ceci a été annulé dans 1.27.2 et 1.28.0 à cause des conflits d'accès aux fichiers sur les hôtes partagés et des problèmes de sécurité (voir [[:phab:T127127|T127127]] et [[:phab:T161453|T161453]]).

=== Trace des fonctions ===
Pour mieux décrire visuellement les niveaux du cache, il existe une fonction qui trace en marche arrière les méthodes qui ont été appelées pour récupérer les messages.
Voir les sections ci-dessous pour l'explication de chaque niveau.

* &lt;code&gt;Message::fetchMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;MessageCache::get()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;Language::getMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalisationCache::getSubitem()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LCStore::get()&lt;/code&gt;

=== Cache des messages ===
La classe &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; est le niveau supérieur de la mise en cache des messages.
Elle est appelée de la classe Message et renvoie le contenu final brut des messages.
Ce niveau gère la logique suivante :

* Vérifier les recouvrements de messages dans la base de données
* Mettre en cache dans {{ll|memcached}} ou dans ce qu'il y a dans {{ll|Manual:$wgMessageCacheType|$wgMessageCacheType}},  les messages qui se recouvrent.
* Résoudre le reste de la séquence de [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|repli des langues]]

Le dernier point est important.
Le [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|repli de langue]] est une solution de secours qui permet à MediaWiki de choisir une autre langue si le message n'existe pas dans la langue demandée.
Comme indiqué dans la section suivante, la plupart des replis de langue se produisent au niveau le plus bas.
Néanmoins seul le niveau &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; vérifie qu'il n'y a pas de recouvrement de messages dans la base de données.
Ainsi c'est ici qu'est faite l'intégration de messages redéfinis, de la base de données vers la base arrière.
Si la base de données n'est pas utilisée, ce niveau entier peut être désactivé.

=== Cache d'internationalisation ===

Voir {{ll|Manual:LocalisationCache.php|LocalisationCache.php}}

=== Classe LCStore ===
La classe &lt;code&gt;LCStore&lt;/code&gt; est plutôt une implémentation d'arrière plan utilisée par la classe LocalisationCache pour mettre en cache les messages et les récupérer.
Comme la classe &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; utilisée pour la mise en cache générale dans MediaWiki, il existe différents types de caches (configurés en utilisant [[Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf]]) :
* ''db'' (par défaut) - cache des messages de la base de données
* ''file'' (par défaut si &lt;code&gt;$wgCacheDirectory&lt;/code&gt; est défini) - utilise [[w:cdb (software)|CDB]] pour mettre en cache dans un fichier local
* ''accel'' - utilise [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|APC]] ou un autre cache de code d'opération pour ranger les données

L'option ''file'' est utilisée par la Fondation Wikimedia, et elle est recommandée parce qu'elle est plus rapide que des accès à la base de données et plus fiable que le cache APC, particulièrement depuis que APC est devenu incompatible avec les versions 5.5 et ultérieures de PHP.

{{anchor|Adding new messages}}
== Ajouter de nouveaux messages ==

=== Choisir la clé du message ===

Voir aussi :
{{ll|Manual:Coding conventions#System messages}}

La clé du message doit être globalement unique.
Cela comprend le noyau de MediaWiki avec toutes les extensions et les habillages.

Pour le nom des messages, utilisez les minuscules, les nombres et les tirets '-'; la plupart des autres caractères sont parmi les moins pratiques et ceux qui ne fonctionnent pas du tout.
D'après la convention MediaWiki, le premier caractère n'est pas sensible à la casse; ce qui n'est pas le cas des caractères qui suivent.

Pour le nommage, veuillez suivre les conventions globales ou locales.
Pour les extensions, utilisez un préfixe standard, de préférence le nom de l'extension en minuscules, suivi d'un tiret « - ».
Les exceptions sont :

; Les messages utilisés par l'API : ils doivent commencer par &lt;code&gt;apihelp-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apiwarn-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apierror-&lt;/code&gt;. Placez le préfixe de l'extension à la suite de ce préfixe. (Notez que ces messages doivent être dans un fichier séparé, habituellement sous [[phab:source/mediawiki/browse/master/includes/api/i18n/|includes/i18/api]].)
; Les messages liés aux connexions : ils doivent commencer par &lt;code&gt;logentry-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;log-name-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;log-description&lt;/code&gt;.
; Les droits utilisateur : la clé du nom à droite, tel qu'il est affiché sur Special:ListGroupRights doit commencer par &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt;. Le nom de l'action qui complète la phrase « {{int|Permissionserrorstext-withaction|unused}} » doit commencer par &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt;.
; Balises de version : Les balises de révision :  doivent commencer par &lt;code&gt;tag-&lt;/code&gt;.
; Titres des pages spéciales : Les titres des pages spéciales : doivent commencer par &lt;code&gt;special-&lt;/code&gt;.

=== Autres éléments à prendre en compte pour créer des messages ===

# Assurez-vous de traiter correctement le message (analyse syntaxique, substitution des &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, échappements pour le HTML, etc.)
# Si votre message fait partie du noyau, il doit être ajouté habituellement à &lt;code&gt;languages/i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt;, bien que certains composants tels que Installer, les balises EXIF, et ApiHelp possèdent leurs propres fichiers de messages.
# Si votre message appartient à une extension, ajoutez-le au fichier &lt;code&gt;i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt; ou au fichier &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; dans le sous-répertoire ad'hoc. En particulier les messages d'API qui ne sont vus que des développeurs et non pas par la plupart des utilisateurs finaux, se trouvent habituellement dans un fichier séparé, tel que &lt;code&gt;i18n/api/en.json&lt;/code&gt;. Si une extension possède un grand nombre de messages, vous pouvez créer des sous-répertoires sous  &lt;code&gt;i18n&lt;/code&gt;. L'ensemble des répertoires de messages, y compris le répertoire &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt; par défaut, doivent être listés dans la section &lt;code&gt;MessagesDirs&lt;/code&gt; de &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; ou dans la variable {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}}.
# Arrêtez-vous et analysez les mots du message. Est-ce suffisamment clair ? Est-ce que cela peut prêter à confusion ? Demandez les commentaires des autres développeurs ou des traducteurs si possible. Suivez les [[#Internationalisation hints|directives de traduction]].
# Ajoutez la documentation à &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; dans le même répertoire.
# La séquence des messages dans le fichier doit suivre exactement les fonctions de votre projet. Regroupez ensemble les messages d'une même fonctionnalité. Cela aide les traducteurs à rester concentrés, efficaces et cohérents.
# Placez au début du fichier les messages que vous pensez être les plus basiques et ceux utilisés le plus souvent, et plutôt à la fin ceux qui sont plus rares et plus éléborés techniquement.


== Messages à ne pas traduire ==

# '''Ignored''' - les messages ignorés sont ceux qui n'existent que dans le fichier des messages en anglais. Certains messages n'ont pas besoin d'être traduits car ils référencent simplement d'autres messages ou des fonctions indépendantes de la langue, ''par exemple'' un message de « &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; » .
# '''Optional''' - les messages facultatifs peuvent être traduits seulement s'ils sont modifiés dans la langue cible.

Pour marquer de tels messages :

* utilisez le modèle dans le message de documentation &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; qui est respectivement :
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Notranslate|notranslate]]}}&lt;/code&gt; ou
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Optional|optional]]}}&lt;/code&gt;;
* indiquez à l'extension {{ll|Extension:Translate|nsp=0}} utilisée sur {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} ce qu'il faut faire avec les messages en les soumettant dans un listing de corrections (voir aussi le {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Group configuration/MediaWiki|document de configuration globale}}) :
** &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;pour le noyau, dans {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/MediaWiki.yaml}} ajoutez les clés des messages&lt;/span&gt;
**# sous &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;ignored:&lt;/code&gt; ou
**# sous &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;optional:&lt;/code&gt;;
** &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;pour les extensions, dans {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/mediawiki-extensions.txt}} ajoutez une ligne sous le nom de l'extension ainsi :&lt;/span&gt;
**# &lt;code&gt;ignored = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt; or
**# &lt;code&gt;optional = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt;.

== Supprimer les messages existants ==
Supprimez-les de &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; et de &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;.
Ne vous préoccupez pas des autres langues.
Les mises à jour à partir de {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} les gèreront automatiquement.

En plus, vérifiez si le message apparaît quelque part dans la configuration translatewiki, par exemple dans  la liste des messages optionnels ou celle des messages les plus utilisés (un simple ''git grep'' est suffisant).
Supprimez-les de ces listes si nécessaire.

== Modifier les messages existants ==

# Pensez à mettre à jour la [[#Message documentation|documentation des messages]].
# Mettez à jour les clés des messages si les anciennes traductions ne correspondent plus à la nouvelle signification. Cela comprend également les modifications dans le traitement des messages (analyse syntaxique, échappement, paramètres, etc.). Améliorer le contenu d'un message sans le modifier techniquement n'est habituellement pas un motif pour en changer la clé. Sur ''translatewiki.net'', les messages seront marqués 'Désuets' afin d'être pris en compte par les traducteurs. Il n'est pas nécessaire de contacter l'équipe i18n ni de faire une demande de support pour modifier la clé d'un message. Néanmoins, si vous avez des conditions particulières ou des questions, posez-les sur {{irc|translatewiki}} ou sur les [[translatewiki:Support|pages du support]] de {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}.
# Si l'extension est prise en charge par {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}, ne modifiez que le message source en anglais et / ou la clé, ainsi que l'entrée qui l'accompagne dans &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;. Si besoin, l'équipe translatewiki.net fera la mise à jour des traductions en les marquant 'désuètes' et en nettoyant le fichier ou en renommant les clés là où c'est possible. Cela s'applique également lorsque vous ne modifiez que des éléments tels que les balises HTML que vous pouvez mettre à jour dans les autres langues sans avoir besoin de les connaître. La plupart des ces actions se déroulent dans [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]] et se retrouveront dans Git le lendemain.

{{anchor|Message documentation}}
== Documentation des messages ==
La documentation des messages utilise le code de pseudo-langage &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt;.
C'est l'un des codes ISO 639 réservé pour l'utilisation personnelle.
Là, nous ne gardons pas les traductions de chaque message, mais nous rassemblons les phrases en anglais ''concernant chaque message'' : pour indiquer où il est utilisé,  pour donner des indications sur la manière de le traduire, pour lister et décrire ses paramètres et le relier aux autres messages avec lesquels il a un rapport, etc.
Dans [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]], ces informations sont affichées aux traducteurs lors de la traduction des messages.

Les programmeurs doivent documenter soigneusement chaque message.
La documentation du message est une ressource essentielle – pas seulemnt pour les traducteurs, mais pour tous les mainteneurs du module.
A chaque fois qu'un message est ajouté au logiciel, ''il faut'' ajouter aussi son entrée &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; correspondante; les versions qui ne le font pas sont marquées « &lt;code&gt;V-1&lt;/code&gt; » jusqu'à ce que la documentation soit ajoutée.

La documentation dans les fichiers &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; doit être mise à jour directement lors de l'ajout de nouveaux messages, ou lors de la modification d'un message existant en anglais qui en implique la réactualisation, par exemple pour l'ajout ou la suppression de paramètres.
Dans les autres cas, la documentation doit habituellement être mise à jour dans translatewiki.
Chaque chaîne de documentation est accessible avec &lt;nowiki&gt;https://translatewiki.net/wiki/MediaWiki:&lt;/nowiki&gt;''message-key''&lt;nowiki&gt;/qqq&lt;/nowiki&gt;, comme s'il s'agissait d'une traduction.
Ces modifications seront exportées vers les répertoires source en même temps que les traductions.

Les informations utiles que vous devez faire figurer dans la documentation comprennent :

# la manière de traiter le message (analyse syntaxique, échappement, texte brut).
# le type utilisé pour les paramètres avec des exemples de valeurs.
# les endroits où le message est utilisé (pages, positions dans l'interface utilisateur).
# la manière dont le message est utilisé et où (un titre de page, le texte d'un bouton, ''etc.'').
# quels autres messages sont utilisés avec le message courant, ou à quels autres messages celui-ci fait référence.
# tout autre complément qui précise ce message affiché dans son contexte, mais pas quand il est traité isolément (ce qui est le cas pour la traduction).
# si nécessaire, la grammaire à préciser. Par exemple, « open » en anglais désigne à la fois un verbe et un adjectif. Dans beaucoup d'autres langues les mots sont différents et il est impossible de traduire correctement si l'on ne sait pas de quoi il s'agit.
# les adjectifs qui décrivent des choses, tels que « désactivé » , « ouvert » ou « bloqué », doivent ''toujours'' indiquer à quoi ils se rapportent. Dans beaucoup de langues les adjectifs doivent avoir le genre du nom auquel ils se rapportent. Il est aussi possible que différentes sortes de choses aient besoin de différents adjectifs.
# indiquer si le message a des propriétés spéciales par exemple s'il s'agit d'un nom de page, ou s'il ne doit pas être traduit directement mais adapté à la culture ou au projet.
# indiquer si le message apparaît avec d'autres messages, par exemple dans une liste ou un menu. Les termes ou la grammaire des mots devraient alors être les mêmes que celle des messages voisins. De même, les éléments d'une liste doivent être en rapport avec la tête de liste.
# indiquer les parties du message qui ne doivent pas être traduites, comme les noms des espaces de noms génériques, les URLs ou les balises.
# expliquer les mots potentiellement pas clairs, par exemple les abbréviations, comme « CTA », ou le jargon spécifique, comme « template », « suppress » ou « stub ». (Notez qu'il vaut mieux éviter de tels mots en premier !)
# Les captures d'écran sont très utiles. Ne découpez rien – une image de l'écran complet avec le message affiché nous donne le contexte complet et peut être réutilisée pour plusieurs messages.

Quelques points supplémentaires :

* Rappelez-vous que très très souvent les traducteurs traduisent les messages sans être au courant du logiciel.
* Dans pratiquement tous les cas, les traducteurs n'ont aucune information du contexte, ni du module, ni des autres messages qui vont avec.
* Le plus souvent, il est inutile de reformuler simplement le message dans la documentation.
* N'utilisez pas le jargon des développeurs comme « nav » ou « comps ».
* Envisagez l'écriture d'un [[betawiki:Terminology#Terminologies|glossaire]] pour les termes techniques utilisés dans votre module. Si vous le faites, créez un lien dessus pour le référencer dans la documentation des messages.

Vous pouvez référencer d'autres messages en utilisant leur {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;{{((}}msg-mw{{!}}message key{{))}}&lt;/code&gt;|clé de message}}.
Faites ceci si certaines parties de messages sont issues d'autres messages (quand cela n'est pas possible autrement), ou lorsque certains messages sont affichés ensemble ou dans un même contexte.

translatewiki.net dispose de quelques modèles par défaut pour la documentation :

* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-action|doc-action]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pour les messages &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-right|doc-right]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pour les messages &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-group|doc-group]]|[...]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pour les messages concernant les groupes d'utilisateurs  (&lt;code&gt;group&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;member&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;page&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;js&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;css&lt;/code&gt;)
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-accesskey|doc-accesskey]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pour les messages &lt;code&gt;accesskey-&lt;/code&gt;

Voir les pages des modèles pour plus d'information.

{{anchor|Internationalisation hints}}
== Conseils pour internationaliser ==
En plus de la [[#Message documentation|documentation]], les traducteurs demandent aux développeurs de prendre en compte certains points afin de faciliter leur travail et le rendre plus efficace et permettre ainsi un bonne et fidèle traduction dans toutes les langues.
Même si vous n'avez qu'à ajouter ou modifier les messages en anglais, ne perdez pas de vue les besoins de toutes les langues. Chaque message est traduit dans plus de 300 langues et ceci doit se faire de la meilleure manière possible.
L'implémentation correcte de ces points vous aidera souvent aussi à mieux écrire les messages en anglais.

[[Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Help_and_contact_info|Localisation#Help_and_contact_info]] liste les endroits principaux où vous pouvez trouverl'assistance de personnes expérimentées connaissant i18n.
=== Utilisez correctement les paramètres des messages et les sélecteurs ===

C'est un prérequis pour l'écriture correcte de vos messages.

=== Evitez la réutilisation des messages ===
Les traducteurs ne recommandent pas la réutilisation des messages.
Ceci peut sembler contre-intuitif, car le fait de copier et dupliquer du code est habituellement une mauvaise pratique, mais dans le cas des messages sytème c'est souvent nécessaire.
Bien que deux concepts puissent être exprimés par le même mot en anglais, cela ne signifie pas nécessairement qu'il peuvent être traduits par le même mot en fonction de la langue.
« OK » est un bon exemple : en anglais ceci est utilisé pour le texte d'un bouton générique, mais dans certaines langues on préfère avoir un texte qui soit en phase avec l'opération que le bouton réalise.
Un autre exemple est pratiquement n'importe quel adjectif : un mot tel que « multiple » varie selon le genre dans différentes langues, donc vous ne pouvez pas le réutiliser pour décrire plusieurs choses différentes, et vous devez créer plusieurs messages distincts.

Si vous ajoutez plusieurs messages identiques, ajoutez également la documentation correspondante pour décrire le contexte des différences.
Ne vous préoccupez pas du travail supplémentaire des traducteurs.
La mémoire de traduction aide beaucoup en cela en gardant la souplesse d'avoir différentes traductions si nécessaire.

{{anchor|Avoid_patchwork_messages|Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages}}
=== Eviter les messages fragmentés ou sous forme de 'patchwork' ===
Les langues possèdent différentes organisations des mots et des règles grammaticales et syntaxiques complexes.
Il est très difficile de traduire des messages de type « lego », c'est à dire des messages formés à partir de plusieurs morceaux de texte, éventuellement avec des indirections (appelés aussi « concatenations de chaînes » ).

Il est préférable que chaque message soit une phrase complète.
Plusieurs phrases peuvent habituellement être combinées beaucoup plus facilement à l'intérieur d'un bloc de texte si besoin.
Si vous souhaitez combiner plusieurs chaînes en un seul message, passez-les en paramètre, afin que les traducteurs puissent les mettre dans l'ordre correct dans leur langue, au moment de la traduction.

==== Messages se référençant mutuellement ====
Une exception à la règle concerne les messages qui se référencent mutuellement : 'entrez le nom de l'auteur original dans le champs nommé &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; et cliquez sur &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:proceed}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; pour finaliser'.
Ceci rend le message cohérent lorsqu'un développeur logiciel ou un opérateur du wiki change le ''nom'' du message ou modifie ce dernier ultérieurement.
Sans l'astuce du &lt;code&gt;int&lt;/code&gt;, les développeurs et les opérateurs devraient connaître tous les messages liés qui devraient être corrigés dès que l'un d'eux est modifié.

=== N'utilisez pas les termes et les modèles spécifiques à un projet particulier ===
MediaWiki est utilisé par diverses personnes à l'intérieur du mouvement Wikimedia et à l'extérieur également.
Bien qu'à l'origine il a été conçu pour une encyclopédie, il est maintenant utilisé pour toutes sortes de contenus.
C'est pourquoi il faut utiliser des termes généraux.
Par exemple, évitez les termes comme « article », et utilisez « page » à la place, à moins que vous soyez absolument sûr que la fonctionnalité que vous développez ne sera utilisée que sur un site où les pages seront appelées « article ».
N'utilisez pas « village pump » car c'est le nom de la page communautaire de la Wikipedia anglophone, mais plutôt à la place, un nom générique tel que « page de discussion » de la communauté.

N'espérez pas qu'un modèle particulier soit présent sur tous les wikis.
Les modèles sont locaux aux wikis.
Ceci s'applique à la fois aux messages source et à leurs traductions.
Si un message utilise des modèles, ils ne fonctionneront que s'ils ont été créés sur CHACUN des wikis où la fonctionnalité est déployée.
Mieux vaut éviter à tout prix l'utilisation des modèles dans les messages.
Si vous devez absolument les utiliser, documentez cela clairement dans la documentation du message et dans les instructions d'installation de l'extension.

=== Séparer l'heure de la date dans les phrases ===
Certaines langues doivent insérer quelque chose entre la date et l'heure, qui dépend grammatiquement des autres mots de la phrase.
Ainsi on ne pourra pas combiner la date et l'heure.
D'autres personnes pourront trouver que la combinaison est pratique, ainsi la meilleure façon est habituellement de passer trois valeurs de paramètres (date/heure, date, heure) dans de tels cas et pour chaque traduction, de laisser inutilisées soit la première valeur soit les deux dernières selon les besoins.

=== Évitez &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; dans les messages ===
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; présente plusieurs désavantages.
Cela peut être ce que l'on veut (un acronyme, mot, courte phrase, ''etc.'') et en fonction de la langue, utiliser &lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Messages_API#…on use context inside sentences via GRAMMAR|&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/code&gt; sur chaque occurrence.
Cela est indépendant du fait que chaque message qui a &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; nécessite une relecture dans la plupart des langues du wiki pour chaque nouveau wiki sur lequel votre code est installé.
Dans la plupart des cas, quand il n'y a pas de configuration générale &lt;code&gt;GRAMMAR&lt;/code&gt; pour une langue, les opérateurs wiki devront ajouter ou modifier le code PHP de sorte à ce que &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; fonctionne pour &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; .
Ceci nécessite à la fois de plus grandes compétences et plus de compréhension qu'autrement.
Il est plus pratique d'avoir des références génériques comme « ce wiki » .
Cela n'empêche pas les installations de modifier localement ces messages pour utiliser &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, mais au moins elles n'y sont pas obligées et peuvent retarder leur adaptation après que le wiki soit actif et utilisé.

=== Eviter les références au rendu visuel et aux positions ===
Ce que vous voyez dépend de l'habillage que vous utilisez.
Le plus souvent, la présentation des écrans pour les langues s'écrivant de gauche à droite est mirrorée comparativement à celle pour les langues s'écrivant de droite à gauche, mais cela n'est pas toujours vrai, et pour certaines langues et certains wiki, pas complètement.
Les équipements tenus à la main, les écrans étroits et autres peuvent afficher des blocs les uns au dessous des autres pouvant se retrouver côte à côte sur des écrans plus larges.
Comme les scripts JavaScript et les gadgets du site - tout comme ceux de l'utilisateur - peuvent et cachent effectivement des morceaux ou déplacent partout les éléments et d'une manière imprévisible, il n'y a pas de manière fiable pour prédire ce que devient l'affichage final.

C'est très mauvais de lier l'information à afficher aux langues du contenu, parce que la langue de l'interface utilisateur peut ne pas correspondre à la langue du contenu de la page, et que l'affichage peut résulter d'un mélange des deux, en fonction des circonstances.
Les agents utilisateur non visuels tels que les lecteurs d'écran acoustiques ou les autres équipements auxilliaires ne connaissent même pas la notion d'affichage.
Ainsi, dans la majorité des cas vous ne devez pas faire référence aux positions visuelles de l'affichage bien que les termes sémantiques de celui-ci peuvent encore être utilisés (« étapes précédentes du formulaire », ''etc.'').

MediaWiki ne prend pas en charge l'affichage de messages différents ou des fragments de messages basés sur la directionalité courante de l'interface (voir [[phab:T30997|T30997]]).

Les navigateurs futurs ainsi que le support de MediaWiki pour l'écriture de haut en bas d'Orient et d'Asie du Nord &lt;ref&gt;http://dev.w3.org/csswg/css3-writing-modes/&lt;/ref&gt; feront que l'affichage sur écran sera plus imprévisible, avec au moins 8 affichages possibles (position de départ à gauche ou à droite, en haut ou en bas, en fonction de là où on commence).

=== Eviter les références aux couleurs de l'écran ===
La couleur dans laquelle est faite le rendu dépend de plusieurs facteurs y compris de l'habillage :  les scripts JavaScript et les gadgets du site et ceux de l'utilisateur, ainsi que l'agent utilisateur local la réécrasent pour des raisons d'accessibilité ou de limitation technologique.
Les agents utilisateur non visuels tels que les lecteurs d'écran acoustiques ou les autres équipements auxilliaires ne connaissent même pas la notion de couleur.
Ainsi, vous ne devez pas évoquer les couleurs d'écran.
(De même vous ne devez pas vous fier à la couleur uniquement comme mécanisme pour informer l'utilisateur de l'état, pour la même raison).

=== Avoir les éléments des messages avant et après chaque champ de saisie ===

:''Ceci est une règle suggérée et elle n'est pas encore devenue un standard du développement MediaWiki.''

Alors que l'anglais permet l'utilisation efficace de l'interrogation sous la forme élément-deuxPoints-champsD'entrée, beaucoup d'autres langues ne le font pas.
Même en anglais, vous souhaitez souvent utiliser « Distance: ___ mètres » plutôt que « Distance (en mètres): ___ ».
En laissant de côté les éléments {{tag|textarea|open}}, vous devez penser à chaque champs d'entrée en respectant le motif « Distance: ___ mètres » . Donc :

* créez deux messages, même si le 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; est vide en anglais et certaines autres langues, ou
* permettez l'insertion des champs de saisie en utilisant les paramètres &lt;code&gt;$i&lt;/code&gt; .
=== Evitez le marquage HTML non traduit dans les messages ===
Les balises HTML qui n'ont pas besoin d'être traduites, comme les {{tag|div|open}}s englobants, les règles supérieures ou inférieures et similaires, ne doivent habituellement pas faire partie du message.
Ils apportent une surcharge inutile aux traducteurs, augmentent la taille des fichiers, et créent le risque d'être modifiés accidentellement ou d'être sautés par le processus de traduction.
De manière générale, évitez le HTML directement dans les messages si vous le pouvez.

=== Les messages sont souvent plus longs que vous  le pensez ! ===

En regardant un peu les fichiers des messages des langues étrangères, vous ne trouverez presque jamais des messages plus courts que les messages chinois, rarement plus courts que les messages anglais, et habituellement plus longs que les messages anglais.

Particulièrement dans les formulaires, devant les champs de saisie, les messages anglais ont tendance à être laconiques et courts.
Souvent ceci n'est pas conservé dans les traductions.
Le vocabulaire technique présent en anglais peut être absent dans les autres langues et demander l'utilisation de plusieurs mots ou même des phrases complètes pour expliquer certains concepts.
Par exemple le message anglais « TSV file: » pourrait devoir être traduit dans une langue in extenso :
&lt;blockquote&gt;''Veuillez entrer ici un nom qui représente une collection de données informatiques composée d'une série organisée séquentiellement de lignes dactylographiées qui elles-même sont organisées comme une série de champs informels chacunes, où les champs d'information sont fermés, séparés chacuns par un signe unique équivalent à celui qui fait déplacer le charriot d'une machine à écrire vers la position suivante prédéfinie. Commençons : _____ (merci)''&lt;/blockquote&gt;
C'est vrai que c'est un exemple extrême mais cela vous donne une idée.
Imaginez cette phrase en colonne dans laquelle chaque mot est seul sur une ligne, et que le champs d'entrée est centré verticalement dans la colonne suivante. :-(

=== Eviter d'utiliser des mots très proches, similaires, ou identiques pour désigner des choses ou des concepts différents ===
Par exemple, les pages peuvent avoir d'anciennes ''révisions'' (correspondant à une date spécifique, une heure et un contenu), qui comprennent les ''versions'' passées de ladite page.
Vous pouvez utiliser les mots ''revision'' et ''version'' de manière interchangeable.
Un problème apparait lorsque les pages versionnées sont relues, et que la révision, ''c'est à dire'' le processus de relecture, est également mentionné.
Cela ne pose pas de problème particulier lorsque les deux synonymes de la « révision » ont des traductions différentes.
Néanmoins il ne faut pas vous fier à cela.
Il vaut mieux éviter l'utilisation simultanée de ''révision'' avec ''version'', pour éviter d'apporter la confusion.

=== Les mots de base peuvent avoir des connotations imprévues, ou ne pas exister du tout ===
Certains mots sont difficiles à traduire à cause de leur utilisation spécique dans MediaWiki.
Certains peuvent [[#Expect untranslated words|ne pas être traductibles du tout]].
Par exemple le mot « utilisateur  » n'existe pas dans plusieurs langues pour désigner « quelqu'un qui se sert de quelque chose  ».
De la même façon, dans le dialecte [[:en:Colognian language|kölsch]] les mots anglais « namespace » (espace de noms) et « apartment » (appartement) se traduisent avec le même mot.
Aussi, en kölsch on dit « corroborator et participant » (collaborateur et participant) en un seul mot car toute référence à « utiliser » impliquerait trop systématiquement « abuser ».
Le terme « ferme de wikis » (wiki farm) est traduit comme « étable pleine de wikis » car si on utilise « ferme » simplement on est en contradiction avec les mots de la langue, on ne comprend pas, ''etc.''.

{{anchor|Expect untranslated words}}
=== Attendez-vous à rencontrer des mots non traduits ===

:''Ceci est une règle suggérée et elle n'est pas encore devenue un standard du développement MediaWiki.''

Il n'est pas rare que les noms propres, les noms des balises, ''etc.'' et les termes informatique en anglais  
ne soient pas traduits, et sont à la place pris comme des mots d'emprunt ou des mots étrangers.
Dans le dernier cas, certains traducteurs particulièrement fastidieux peuvent marquer de tels mots comme s'ils appartenaient à une autre langue avec le balisage HTML, comme &lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot;&gt; … &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;.

Vous pouvez vous assurer que votre gestionnaire de sortie des messages laisse inchangé un tel balisage, malgré les risques évidents de sécurité.

=== Permettre le marquage explicatif en ligne ===

:''Ceci est une règle suggérée et elle n'est pas encore devenue un standard du développement MediaWiki.''

Il existe quelque fois dans les langues cible des abbréviations, des termes techniques ou des mots généralement ambigus qui ne peuvent pas être immédiatement compris des nouveaux arrivants mais qui sont évidents pour les utilisateurs expérimentés d'ordinateurs .
Pour éviter l'encombrement de l'écran par de longues explications et ne pas laisser les nouveaux arrivants bloqués, les traducteurs peuvent choisir d'ajouter des explications comme les annotations {{tag|abbr|open}}, à la manière des navigateurs lorsque vous les survolez avec la souris.

Par exemple, le message du noyau de MediaWiki &lt;code&gt;exif-orientation-8&lt;/code&gt; concernant la rotation d'image, qui en anglais est simplement « &lt;code&gt;Rotated 90° CW&lt;/code&gt; », en arabe marocain est traduit par :

:&lt;code lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &amp;lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&amp;lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/code&gt;

donne :

:&lt;span lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/span&gt;

en expliquant l'abbréviation de « counter clockwise » (sens de rotation rétrograde) lorsque c'est nécessaire.

Vous pouvez vous assurer que votre gestionnaire de sortie des messages laisse inchangé un tel balisage, même si le message original ne l'utilise pas.

=== Utiliser les balises {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}}, et {{tag|kbd|open}} à bon escient ===
Lorsqu'on parle de paramètres techniques, de valeurs, ou d'entrées au clavier, marquez les respectivement en tant que tel en utilisant les balises HTML {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}}, ou {{tag|kbd|open}}.
Ainsi, ils sont typographiquement mis en valeur par rapport au texte normal.
Cela clarifie leur sens pour les lecteurs, évitant la confusion, les erreurs et les mauvaises interprétations.
Vérifiez que votre gestionnaire de messages permet un tel marquage.

=== Symboles, deux points, crochets, ''etc.'' faisant partie des messages ===
Beaucoup de symboles sont localisables également. Certains scripts utilisent d'autres types de crochets que ceux des scripts latins.
Un deux-points peut ne pas être approprié après une étiquette ou une invite de saisie dans certaines langues.
L'inclusion de ces symboles dans les messages aide à faire des traductions meilleures et moins anglo-centrées, et réduit également la taille du code.

Il existe par exemple différentes conventions pour les apostrophes utilisées en « norvégien », » suédois», »danois«, „allemand“, et 「japonais」.&lt;ref&gt;[[w:Quotation_mark#Summary_table|types d'apostrophes]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Si vous avez besoin d'envelopper le texte entre des  parenthèses localisées, des crochets, ou des guillemets, vous pouvez utiliser les messages  &lt;code&gt;parentheses&lt;/code&gt; {{int:parentheses}} ou &lt;code&gt;brackets&lt;/code&gt; {{int:brackets}} ou &lt;code&gt;quotation-marks&lt;/code&gt; {{int:quotation-marks}} de la manière suivante :
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php&gt;wfMessage( 'parentheses' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside parentheses */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'brackets' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside brackets */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'quotation-marks' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside quotation marks */ )-&gt;escaped()&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== N'espérez pas que les symboles et la ponctuation survivent à la traduction ===
Les langues écrites de droite à gauche (contrairement à l'anglais) permutent habituellement les symboles des flèches utilisées pour les liens « suivant » et « précédent », et leur placement relativement au texte du message peut ou ne peut pas être permuté également.
Vous pouvez traduire les points de suspension par « ''etc.'' », ou avec des mots.
Les points d'interrogation, d'exclamation, et les deux-points seront mis ailleurs qu'en fin de phrase, ou pas utilisés, ou utilisés deux fois.
Comme conséquence, ils doivent toujours faire partie de votre message et ne tentez pas de les insérer par programme.

=== Utiliser les arrêts complets ===
Terminez '''absolument''' les phrases normales avec des caractères d'arrêt.
C’est souvent la seule indication qu’a le traducteur pour savoir qu’il ne s’agit pas de titres ni d’éléments de liste qui nécessiteraient une traduction différente.

=== Ancre des liens ===

==== Wikicode des liens ====

L'ancre des liens peut être déclarée dans les messages à travers différentes techniques :

# via le wikicode : …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;''une page wiki''|''ancre''&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…,
# via le wikicode : …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;[''une-url'' ''ancre'']&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…, or
#le texte de l'ancre est un message appartenant à l'espace de noms MediaWiki. ''Evitez-le !''

Le dernier cas est souvent difficile voire impossible à gérer pour les traducteurs; il faut [[#Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages|éviter les messages fragmentés et ne pas les assembler en 'patchwork']] ici également.
Assurez-vous que « &lt;code&gt;some-url&lt;/code&gt; » ne contient pas d'espaces.

==== Utiliser des ancres ayant des noms significatifs ====
Faites attention à votre texte.
Les ancres des liens jouent un rôle important pour l'accès aux pages du moteus de recherche – à la fois les mots liés ainsi que l'ancre cible.
Assurez-vous aussi que l'ancre décrit bien la page cible.
Évitez toujours les mots communs et génériques.
Par exemple, « Cliquez ici » est absolument interdit &lt;ref&gt;http://www.w3.org/QA/Tips/noClickHere&lt;/ref&gt; car les pages cibles ne concernent pratiquement jamais « Cliquez ici ».
Il ne faut pas non plus mettre cela dans des phrases entouré de liens car « ici » n'était pas l'endroit à cliquer.
A la place, utilisez des mots représentant des actions précises pour dire ce qu'obtiendra l'utilisateur en ouvrant le lien, comme  « Vous pouvez [[Special:Upload|téléverser un fichier]] si vous le souhaitez. »

Voir aussi ''[http://www.nngroup.com/articles/using-link-titles-to-help-users-predict-where-they-are-going/ Aider les utilisateurs à prédire où ils vont]'', la [[w:Mystery meat navigation|navigation en aveugle]], et ''[https://tosbourn.com/click-here/ Les raisons principales de ne pas utiliser 'Cliquez ici' comme texte de lien]''.

=== Eviter le jargon et l'argot ===
Evitez d'utiliser le jargon des développeurs ou des termes trop pointus dans les messages. Essayez d'avoir un langage simple à chaque fois que c'est possible.
Evitez d'utiliser « OK » « avec succès » « échec » « erreur durant », etc., si vous voulez signaler à l'utilisateur que quelque chose est arrivé ou ne s'est pas passé.
Cela vient du point de vue des développeurs qui considèrent tout comme vrai ou faux, mais les utilisateurs veulent savoir habituellement simplement ce qui s'est passé ou ne s'est pas déroulé et ce qu'ils doivent faire dans ces cas (si nécessaire). Donc :

* « Ce fichier a été renommé avec succès » &amp;rarr; « Ce fichier a été renommé »
* « Echec du renommage du fichier » &amp;rarr; -&gt; « Un fichier de même nom existe déjà. Utiliser un nom différent ».

=== Faites attention aux caractères espace et aux retours à la ligne ===
Les messages traduits de MediaWiki sont habituellement traduits sur le wiki, soit lors d'opérations wiki sur les wikis actifs, ou par des traducteurs sur [[translatewiki.net]].
Soyez conscient de la manière dont les espaces vont influer sur les éditeurs (particulièrement s'ils se trouvent au début ou à la fin de votre message) :

* Les espaces et les passages à la ligne (saut de ligne) présents à la fin du message sont toujours enlevés automatiquement par l'éditeur de wikicode. Par conséquent votre message ne doit pas se terminer par un espace ni un passage à la ligne car ils seront perdus quand le message sera modifié sur le wiki.
* Les espaces et les sauts de ligne en tête de message - eux - ne sont pas automatiquement supprimés, mais peuvent disparaître par accident lors des modifications; ceci doit donc être évité.

Commencez et terminez votre message avec du texte actif; si vous avez besoin d'une nouvelle ligne ou d'un saut de paragraphe autour, votre code englobant doit accepter l'ajout au texte renvoyé.

Certains messages ont besoin d'un espace à la fin pour séparer les mots (formé simplement d'un caractère espace dans la plupart des langues).
Pour prendre en charge ces cas d'utilisation, les entités HTML suivantes sont autorisées dans les messages et transformées en caractères actuels, même si autrement le message n'autorisait pas le formatage wikicode ou HTML :&lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/REL1_34/includes/cache/MessageCache.php#L887&lt;/ref&gt;

* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#32;&lt;/code&gt; – espace
* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#160;&lt;/code&gt; – [[w:non-breaking space|espace non sécable]]
* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;shy;&lt;/code&gt; – [[w:fr:Tiretsoft hyphen|trait d'union conditionnel]] (soft hyphen)

Sur une note associée, tout autre élément de syntaxe affecté par les [[Special:MyLanguage/pre-save transforms|transformations avant enregistrement]] doit également ne pas être utilisé dans les messages, car il sera transformé quand le message sera modifié sur le wiki.

=== Utiliser la capitalisation standard ===
La capitalisation indique aux traducteurs ce qu'ils doivent traduire, comme les mots isolés, les listes d'éléments ou les menus, les phrases, ou des phrases complètes.
La capitalisation correcte (standard) peut aussi jouer un rôle dans l'accès à vos pages par les moteurs de recherche.
MediaWiki utilise la [[w:Letter case|casse des phrases]] (''The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog'') dans les messages d'interface.

Rappelez-vous toujours que beaucoup des systèmes d'écriture ne possèdent pas de lettres capitales du tout, et que ceux qui les ont, les utilisent différemment de l'anglais.
C'est pourquoi il ne faut pas utiliser que des majuscules pour l'emphase.
Utilisez en CSS, ou HTML {{tag|em|open}} ou {{tag|strong|open}} pour ceci :

==== Emphase ====
Dans un texte normal l'[[w:Emphasis|emphase]], c'est à dire la mise en valeur comme '''gras''', ''italiques'' ou équivalent, doit faire partie du message lui-même.
Les conventions locales pour la mise en valeur sont souvent différentes, particulièrement pour certains scripts asiatiques qui ont les leurs.
Les traducteurs doivent pouvoir adapter l'emphase à la langue cible et aux domaines.
Essayez d'utiliser « {{tag|em|open}} » et « {{tag|strong|open}} » dans votre interface utilisateur pour permettre le balisage sur la base des langues ou des scripts.

Les affichages modernes des styles anglais et européens utilisent de moins en moins l'emphase.
Utilisez-la néanmoins encore dans votre [[#Message documentation|documentation de message]], car elle peut fournir des informations intéressantes sur la manière de traduire.
L'emphase peut et doit être utilisée dans les autres contextes culturels selon le cas, étant entendu que les traducteurs la connaissent.

&lt;references /&gt;

== Voir aussi ==

* {{ll|Customization}}
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings}}
* {{ll|Manual:Skins}}
* {{ll|Manual:Messages API}}
* {{ll|Localisation}}
* [[translatewiki:FAQ]]

[[Category:Customization techniques{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:User interface{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Localisation{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:System message{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>nsdu8aznin7v02owub0abrrba3h5xvz</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402533</id>
      <parentid>5402528</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:25:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="61095" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{i18n navigation}}
{{TOC right|limit=2}}

[[Image:MediaWiki SpecialUpload interface labelled.png|thumb|Capture d'écran commentée de l'interface « [[Special:Upload|{{MediaWiki:Upload/fr}}]] », montrant les différents messages système.]]
Un '''message système''' est un fragment de texte brut, de wikitexte, de [[w:fr:Feuilles de style en cascade|CSS]] ou de [[w:fr:JavaScript|JavaScript]], qui peut être utilisé pour personnaliser le comportement de MediaWiki et son apparence pour chaque langue et [[w:fr:Paramètres régionaux|paramètres régionaux]]. MediaWiki utilise des messages pour chaque partie de l'interface visible par l'utilisateur, permettant l'internationalisation et la régionalisation de l'interface utilisateur de MediaWiki, tant pour son cœur que pour ses extensions.
Tous les messages utilisés dans MediaWiki sont définis dans un ''fichier de messages''.

== Redéfinir les messages sur un wiki ==
La valeur par défaut des messages peut être modifiée  en l'éditant sur chaque wiki.
Chaque message possède sa page wiki dans l'espace de noms MediaWiki avec sa clé de message pour nom de page.
Par exemple, le message ''aboutsite'' est enregistré dans MediaWiki:aboutsite.
Par défaut, cet espace de noms est protégé contre toute modification à moins que l'utilisateur n'ait les droits de ''modificateur d'interface''.
Une liste de tous les messages se trouve sur [[Special:AllMessages]].
Modifier les messages d'interface est très simple et se fait comme pour toute modification de page classique du wiki, mais cela reste réservé aux utilisateurs ayant les droits de [[editinterface|modificateur d'interface]], c'est à dire par défaut aux administrateurs (et aux administrateurs d'interfaces).
[[Image:Wiki-system-messages.png|thumb|Exemple de ligne de l'ancien [[Special:AllMessages]].]]
Le tableau de [[Special:AllMessages]] contient deux colonnes : le nom du fichier du message système avec un lien pour le consulter, et le texte du message système.
Le texte est séparé horizontalement pour montrer le texte par défaut au-dessus, et le texte personnalisé en-dessous.
Quand un message personnalisé n'existe pas, seul le texte par défaut apparait.
Pour personnaliser un message, cliquez sur le lien supérieur de la colonne de gauche (le nom du message).
Le lien est en rouge si le texte par défaut est utilisé, car la page à modifier est vide.

Les liens inférieurs des cellules de la colonne de gauche pointent vers les pages de discussion relatives aux messages.

{{anchor|Finding messages and documentation}}
== Trouver les messages et leur documentation ==
La façon dont chaque message est utilisé par MediaWiki, les variables disponibles, les paramètres utilisés, les limitations, etc. est exposée dans les fichiers de la [//translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;task=reviewall&amp;group=core&amp;language=qqq&amp;limit=5000&amp;action=page&amp;filter= documentation complète en pseudo-langage ''qqq''], suivant [[#Message_documentation|les recomendations pour la documentation des messages]].
Des pages d'explication plus longues peuvent exister pour quelques messages d'interface dans la plus ancienne {{ll|Category:Interface messages}}.

{{note|1=
Dans le wiki utilisé par translatewiki.net, 'qqq' représente la page qui contient la documentation utilisateur du message (en anglais, car c'est le même texte qui est affiché pour tous les lecteurs).
De la même manière que /en /ge /fr ... /qqq est une sous-page de l'article et peut être affichée directement.

* Essayez [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/en]]  pour voir un article en anglais,
* Essayez [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/fr]] pour voir le même article en français,
* Essayez [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/qqq]] pour afficher sa documentation associée (en anglais).

De ce point de vue, &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; est considéré comme un langage dans le paramètre &lt;code&gt;language=&lt;/code&gt; de la requête.
}}

Dans MediaWiki 1.18 et supérieur, vous pouvez trouver la clé d'un message en consultant un wiki dans en pseudo-langage de code &lt;code&gt;'''[[Help:Qqx|qqx]]'''&lt;/code&gt;, ce qui peut se faire en ajoutant &lt;code&gt;?[[uselang]]=qqx&lt;/code&gt; à l'URL, ou &lt;code&gt;&amp;uselang=qqx&lt;/code&gt; si l'URL contient déjà un caractère &lt;code&gt;?&lt;/code&gt; ([{{fullurl:{{FULLPAGENAME}}|uselang=qqx}} exemple]). Tous les messages seront ensuite remplacés par leur clé de message, de façon à ce que vous puissiez identifier quel message est concerné. Les messages qui sont toujours dans la langue du contenu ne seront pas affichés en utilisant qqx.

Quelques parties de l'interface ajoutent &lt;code&gt;nstab-&lt;/code&gt; à la chaîne affichée quand vous utilisez l'astuce qqx. Par exemple l'étiquette de l'onglet qui pointe sur la page de discussion dans l'espace de noms principal est affichée en tant que &lt;code&gt;nstab-talk&lt;/code&gt;, mais la chaîne se trouve actuellement dans [[MediaWiki:Talk]].

Dans le cas où la page utilise des onglets comme par exemple la [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|page spéciale &quot;Preferences&quot;]] vous devrez ajouter l'onglet après le paramètre &lt;code&gt;uselang&lt;/code&gt;, par exemple &lt;code&gt;Special:Preferences?uselang=qqx#mw-prefsection-rendering&lt;/code&gt;.

{{anchor|Localisation file format}}
== Format des fichiers de localisation ==

Tous les messages utilisés dans MediaWiki sont définis dans un ''fichier de messages''.

Il y a deux types de fichiers de messages dans MediaWiki : JSON et PHP.
Depuis avril 2014, le noyau de MediaWiki et la plupart des extensions les mieux maintenues ont migré au format JSON.
Vous devez utiliser JSON pour tous les nouveaux développements.
Pour plus d'information sur la migration en JSON, voir [[Requests for comment/Localisation format]].

=== JSON ===

Depuis la fin 2013 un nouveau format de fichier de messages a été introduit : JSON.
C'est le [[:w:fr:JSON|JSON]] à plat, familier en tant que format commun générique de stockage des données.
Chacune des clés est une clé de message, et la valeur est le texte du message.
En plus, la clé spéciale &lt;code&gt;@metadata&lt;/code&gt; est utilisée pour stocker les informations concernant la traduction telles que les auteurs de la traduction.

L'utilisation de JSON rend les fichiers de localisation plus sécurisés car ce n'est pas du code exécutable.
Il est également compatible avec jquery.i18n, une bibliothèque  JavaScript développée pour le [[Milkshake|projet Milkshake]], qui fournit des possibilités de traduction de l'interface utilisateur comme celles de MediaWiki et qui est utilisée par certaines extensions qui se veulent plus indépendantes de MediaWiki, telles que [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor]] ou [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector|UniversalLanguageSelector]].

Parce que la plus grande suite d'outils d'internationalisation et de localisation était appelée « [[Project Milkshake]] » , certaines personnes ont appelé ce format « banane » .

==== Emplacement des fichiers ====
Dans le noyau MediaWiki, les fichiers internationalisés se trouvent dans le répertoire &lt;code&gt;{{git file |file=languages/i18n |action=tree}}&lt;/code&gt; .
Les extensions MediaWiki mettent habituellement les leurs dans un sous-répertoire &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt; .
Si un projet comporte trop de messages, il est possible de les grouper en deux ou plusieurs sous-répertoires de sujets afin d'en facilter la maintenance.
Dans le contexte de MediaWiki, la clé de configuration {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}} est utilisée pour lister ces sous-répertoires.
Voici un exemple de l'extension VisualEditor pour MediaWiki :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
  &quot;MessagesDirs&quot;: {
    &quot;VisualEditor&quot;: [
      &quot;lib/ve/modules/ve/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-mw/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-wmf/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;lib/ve/lib/oojs-ui/i18n&quot;
    ]
  }
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ajoutez les nouveaux messages dans le fichier « en » des messages en anglais « &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; » et documentez-les dans le fichier de documentation des messages ayant comme code spécial de langue « qqq » &amp;ndash; &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;.
''Voir aussi : [[#Adding new messages|Ajouter de nouveaux messages]]''.

==== Métadonnées ====

Actuellement, les champs suivants  sont utilisés dans les fichiers pour les métadonnées :

;authors
:Liste JSON des auteurs des messages. Pour les messages en anglais (en) ainsi que pour la documentation (qqq) ils sont ajoutés manuellement lorsque le fichier des messages est modifié. Pour toutes les autres langues l'insertion est automatique lorsque le fichier des messages est exporté de [[translatewiki.net]]. La documentation des messages peut être mise à jour sur translatewiki.net, et les éditeurs de la documentation sont également insérés dans le fichier qqq.json automatiquement.
;message-documentation
:Ceci est le code du pseudo-langage pour enregistrer la documentation du message. Pour MediaWiki, c'est toujours ''qqq''. (On voit cela dans quelques extensions, mais il n'est pas traité actuellement d'une quelconque manière. Cela n'est pas obligatoire).

==== Conventions ====

Les caractères spéciaux tels que les passages à la ligne doivent être échappés (&lt;code&gt;&quot;\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Les caractères Unicode qui représentent des lettres dans les différents alphabets sont rangés comme des caractères réels et non pas comme des codes de caractères, car ces fichiers sont quelques fois lus par des personnes et parce que cela produit des fichiers plus petits (&lt;code&gt;&quot;誼&quot;&lt;/code&gt; et non pas &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u8ABC&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).
De façon générale, les développeurs ne modifient que les messages en anglais (rarement dans les autres langues) car  ceux-ci sont habituellement traduits en utilisant par ''translatewiki.net''.

Le code HTML n'est pas échappé lui non plus; donc &lt;code&gt;&quot;&amp;lt;strong&gt;Warning&amp;lt;/strong&gt;&quot;&lt;/code&gt; et non pas &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u003cstrong\u003eWarning\u003c/strong\u003e&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.

L'indentation dans les fichiers JSON se fait en utilisant les caractères de tabulation.

=== PHP ===

L'ancien format du fichier de localisation est PHP.
Il s'agit essentiellement d'un tableau PHP contenant tous les messages.
Dans le noyau de MediaWiki chaque langue est rangée dans son propre fichier du répertoire ''languages/message'' du code source de  MediaWiki.
Dans les extensions toutes les langues et la documentation des message (''qqq'') sont dans le même fichier : ''ExtensionName.i18n.php'', habituellement dans le répertoire principal de l'extension.

Pour migrer de PHP vers JSON, utilisez le script [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:GenerateJsonI18n.php|generateJsonI18n.php]] .
Il déplacera les messages vers les fichiers JSON et remplacera le texte du fichier PHP en le faisant pointer vers les fichiers JSON.
Ce code passe-partout est nécessaire pour la compatibilité arrière avec MediaWiki 1.19 .
Il n'est pas utilisé dans les nouvelles extensions qui ne nécessitent pas la compatibilté avec MediaWiki 1.19.

== Utiliser les messages ==
MediaWiki utilise un dépôt ''central'' des messages auxquels le code accède avec une clé.
Ceci est différent de &lt;code&gt;Gettext&lt;/code&gt; par exemple, qui ne fait qu'extraire des fichiers source, les chaînes de caractères traductibles.
Le système basé sur les clés rend certaines choses plus faciles, comme affiner les textes originaux et tracer la modification des messages.
La contrepartie est bien sûr que la liste des messages utilisés et la liste des textes source pour ces clés peuvent diverger.
En pratique, ce n'est pas un gros problème et le seul vrai problème est que quelques fois des messages supplémentaires qui ne sont plus utilisés, sont encore présentés à la traduction.

Pour rendre les clés des messages plus gérables et facilement reconnaissables même avec grep, vous devez  toujours les écrire totalement, sans trop vous fier à leur création dynamique.
Vous pouvez concaténer des parties de clé de message si vous pensez que cela donne une meilleure structure à votre code, mais laissez un commentaire à côté avec une liste des clés résultantes possibles.

Voir aussi les [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding_conventions#Dynamic_identifiers|conventions de codage]]. Par exemple :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// Messages utilisables ici :
// * myextension-connection-success
// * myextension-connection-warning
// * myextension-connection-error
$text = wfMessage( 'myextension-connection-' . $status )-&gt;parse();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Pour utiliser un message en JavaScript, vous devez [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Messages API#Using a ResourceLoader module|le lister]] dans la définition de votre module ResourceLoader, dans la propriété &lt;code&gt;&quot;messages&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.

L'utilisation détaillée des fonctions des messages en PHP et en JavaScript se trouve sur {{ll|Manual:Messages API}}.
'''C'est une page de documentation importante, et vous devriez l'avoir lue AVANT d'écrire le code qui utilise des messages.'''

{{anchor|Message sources}}
== Sources des messages ==

Le code recherche les messages système depuis les sources suivantes :
* Espace de noms MediaWiki. Ceci permet aux wikis d’adopter ou de remplacer tous leurs messages, quand les messages standards ne conviennent pas ou ne sont pas souhaités.
** MediaWiki:''Message-key'' est le message par défaut,
** MediaWiki:''Message-key''/''language-code'' est le message à utiliser quand un utilisateur a sélectionné une autre langue que la langue par défaut du wiki.
* A partir des fichiers de messages :
** Le noyau MediaWiki lui-même et la plupart des [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All extensions|extensions]] les plus maintenues actuellement utilisent un fichier par langue, appelé &lt;code&gt;''zyx''.json&lt;/code&gt;, où ''zyx'' est le code de la langue.
** Certaines extensions plus anciennes utilisent un fichier de messages combiné contenant tous les messages dans toutes les langues, habituellement appelé &lt;code&gt;''MyExtensionName''.i18n.php&lt;/code&gt;.
** De nombreux wikis de la Fondation Wikimedia accèdent à certains messages de l’extension {{ll|Extension:WikimediaMessages|nsp=0}}, leur permettant de standardiser les messages au travers des wikis WMF sans les imposer sur chaque installation de MediaWiki.
** Seules quelques extensions utilisent d’autres techniques.
{{anchor|Caching}}

== Mise en cache ==
Les messages système sont l'un des composants les plus significatifs de MediaWiki, principalement parce qu'ils sont utilisés à chaque requête web.
Les fichiers PHP des messages sont longs, parce qu'ils contiennent des milliers de clés de messages et les valeurs.
Charger ces fichiers (et éventuellement les fichiers multiples si la langue de l'utilisateur est différente de celle du contenu) a un coût énorme sur la mémoire et les performances.
Un système agressif de mise en cache par niveau est utilisé pour réduire cet impact sur les performances.

MediaWiki possède beaucoup de mécanismes de mise en cache intégrés, ce qui rend le code quelque peu difficile à comprendre.
Depuis la 1.16 il existe un nouveau système qui met en cache les messages soit dans les fichiers [[cdb]] ou dans la base de donnérs.
Les messages personnalisés sont mis en cache dans le système de fichiers et dans [[memcached]] (ou équivalent), en fonction de la configuration.

La table ci-dessous donne un aperçu des paramètres concernés :

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!colspan=&quot;2&quot; rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| Emplacement du cache
!colspan=&quot;4&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf}}
|-
! 'store' =&gt; 'db'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;br /&gt;(par défaut) !! 'store' =&gt; 'files'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'array'&lt;br /&gt;''(expérimental depuis MW ≥ 1.26)''
|-
!rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}
! = false&lt;br /&gt;(par défaut)
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || ''erreur'' (chemin non défini) || ''erreur'' (chemin non défini)
|-
! = ''path''
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || système local de fichiers (CDB) || système local de fichiers (CDB) || système local de fichiers (tableau PHP)
|}
{{MW version|version=1.27.0|version2=1.27.2|gerrit change=Id3e2d2b18ddb423647bf2e893bcf942722c0e097}}
Dans MediaWiki 1.27.0 et 1.27.1, l'auto-détection a été modifiée pour favoriser l'archivage du fichier.
Dans le cas &lt;code&gt;'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;/code&gt; (cas par défaut), le fichier stocké est utilisé avec le chemin de {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}.
Si cette valeur n'est pas initialisée (cas par défaut), on utilise un répertoire temporaire déterminé par le système d'exploiration.
Si le répertoire temporaire ne peut être identifié le dépôt de la base de données est utilisé comme solution de repli.
Ceci a été annulé dans 1.27.2 et 1.28.0 à cause des conflits d'accès aux fichiers sur les hôtes partagés et des problèmes de sécurité (voir [[:phab:T127127|T127127]] et [[:phab:T161453|T161453]]).

=== Trace des fonctions ===
Pour mieux décrire visuellement les niveaux du cache, il existe une fonction qui trace en marche arrière les méthodes qui ont été appelées pour récupérer les messages.
Voir les sections ci-dessous pour l'explication de chaque niveau.

* &lt;code&gt;Message::fetchMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;MessageCache::get()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;Language::getMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalisationCache::getSubitem()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LCStore::get()&lt;/code&gt;

=== Cache des messages ===
La classe &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; est le niveau supérieur de la mise en cache des messages.
Elle est appelée de la classe Message et renvoie le contenu final brut des messages.
Ce niveau gère la logique suivante :

* Vérifier les recouvrements de messages dans la base de données
* Mettre en cache dans {{ll|memcached}} ou dans ce qu'il y a dans {{ll|Manual:$wgMessageCacheType|$wgMessageCacheType}},  les messages qui se recouvrent.
* Résoudre le reste de la séquence de [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|repli des langues]]

Le dernier point est important.
Le [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|repli de langue]] est une solution de secours qui permet à MediaWiki de choisir une autre langue si le message n'existe pas dans la langue demandée.
Comme indiqué dans la section suivante, la plupart des replis de langue se produisent au niveau le plus bas.
Néanmoins seul le niveau &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; vérifie qu'il n'y a pas de recouvrement de messages dans la base de données.
Ainsi c'est ici qu'est faite l'intégration de messages redéfinis, de la base de données vers la base arrière.
Si la base de données n'est pas utilisée, ce niveau entier peut être désactivé.

=== Cache d'internationalisation ===

Voir {{ll|Manual:LocalisationCache.php|LocalisationCache.php}}

=== Classe LCStore ===
La classe &lt;code&gt;LCStore&lt;/code&gt; est plutôt une implémentation d'arrière plan utilisée par la classe LocalisationCache pour mettre en cache les messages et les récupérer.
Comme la classe &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; utilisée pour la mise en cache générale dans MediaWiki, il existe différents types de caches (configurés en utilisant [[Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf]]) :
* ''db'' (par défaut) - cache des messages de la base de données
* ''file'' (par défaut si &lt;code&gt;$wgCacheDirectory&lt;/code&gt; est défini) - utilise [[w:cdb (software)|CDB]] pour mettre en cache dans un fichier local
* ''accel'' - utilise [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|APC]] ou un autre cache de code d'opération pour ranger les données

L'option ''file'' est utilisée par la Fondation Wikimedia, et elle est recommandée parce qu'elle est plus rapide que des accès à la base de données et plus fiable que le cache APC, particulièrement depuis que APC est devenu incompatible avec les versions 5.5 et ultérieures de PHP.

{{anchor|Adding new messages}}
== Ajouter de nouveaux messages ==

=== Choisir la clé du message ===

Voir aussi :
{{ll|Manual:Coding conventions#System messages}}

La clé du message doit être globalement unique.
Cela comprend le noyau de MediaWiki avec toutes les extensions et les habillages.

Pour le nom des messages, utilisez les minuscules, les nombres et les tirets '-'; la plupart des autres caractères sont parmi les moins pratiques et ceux qui ne fonctionnent pas du tout.
D'après la convention MediaWiki, le premier caractère n'est pas sensible à la casse; ce qui n'est pas le cas des caractères qui suivent.

Pour le nommage, veuillez suivre les conventions globales ou locales.
Pour les extensions, utilisez un préfixe standard, de préférence le nom de l'extension en minuscules, suivi d'un tiret « - ».
Les exceptions sont :

; Les messages utilisés par l'API : ils doivent commencer par &lt;code&gt;apihelp-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apiwarn-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apierror-&lt;/code&gt;. Placez le préfixe de l'extension à la suite de ce préfixe. (Notez que ces messages doivent être dans un fichier séparé, habituellement sous [[phab:source/mediawiki/browse/master/includes/api/i18n/|includes/i18/api]].)
; Les messages liés aux connexions : ils doivent commencer par &lt;code&gt;logentry-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;log-name-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;log-description&lt;/code&gt;.
; Les droits utilisateur : la clé du nom à droite, tel qu'il est affiché sur Special:ListGroupRights doit commencer par &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt;. Le nom de l'action qui complète la phrase « {{int|Permissionserrorstext-withaction|unused}} » doit commencer par &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt;.
; Balises de version : Les balises de révision :  doivent commencer par &lt;code&gt;tag-&lt;/code&gt;.
; Titres des pages spéciales : Les titres des pages spéciales : doivent commencer par &lt;code&gt;special-&lt;/code&gt;.

=== Autres éléments à prendre en compte pour créer des messages ===

# Assurez-vous de traiter correctement le message (analyse syntaxique, substitution des &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, échappements pour le HTML, etc.)
# Si votre message fait partie du noyau, il doit être ajouté habituellement à &lt;code&gt;languages/i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt;, bien que certains composants tels que Installer, les balises EXIF, et ApiHelp possèdent leurs propres fichiers de messages.
# Si votre message appartient à une extension, ajoutez-le au fichier &lt;code&gt;i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt; ou au fichier &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; dans le sous-répertoire ad'hoc. En particulier les messages d'API qui ne sont vus que des développeurs et non pas par la plupart des utilisateurs finaux, se trouvent habituellement dans un fichier séparé, tel que &lt;code&gt;i18n/api/en.json&lt;/code&gt;. Si une extension possède un grand nombre de messages, vous pouvez créer des sous-répertoires sous  &lt;code&gt;i18n&lt;/code&gt;. L'ensemble des répertoires de messages, y compris le répertoire &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt; par défaut, doivent être listés dans la section &lt;code&gt;MessagesDirs&lt;/code&gt; de &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; ou dans la variable {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}}.
# Arrêtez-vous et analysez les mots du message. Est-ce suffisamment clair ? Est-ce que cela peut prêter à confusion ? Demandez les commentaires des autres développeurs ou des traducteurs si possible. Suivez les [[#Internationalisation hints|directives de traduction]].
# Ajoutez la documentation à &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; dans le même répertoire.
# La séquence des messages dans le fichier doit suivre exactement les fonctions de votre projet. Regroupez ensemble les messages d'une même fonctionnalité. Cela aide les traducteurs à rester concentrés, efficaces et cohérents.
# Placez au début du fichier les messages que vous pensez être les plus basiques et ceux utilisés le plus souvent, et plutôt à la fin ceux qui sont plus rares et plus éléborés techniquement.


== Messages à ne pas traduire ==

# '''Ignored''' - les messages ignorés sont ceux qui n'existent que dans le fichier des messages en anglais. Certains messages n'ont pas besoin d'être traduits car ils référencent simplement d'autres messages ou des fonctions indépendantes de la langue, ''par exemple'' un message de « &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; » .
# '''Optional''' - les messages facultatifs peuvent être traduits seulement s'ils sont modifiés dans la langue cible.

Pour marquer de tels messages :

* utilisez le modèle dans le message de documentation &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; qui est respectivement :
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Notranslate|notranslate]]}}&lt;/code&gt; ou
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Optional|optional]]}}&lt;/code&gt;;
* indiquez à l'extension {{ll|Extension:Translate|nsp=0}} utilisée sur {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} ce qu'il faut faire avec les messages en les soumettant dans un listing de corrections (voir aussi le {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Group configuration/MediaWiki|document de configuration globale}}) :
** &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;pour le noyau, dans {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/MediaWiki.yaml}} ajoutez les clés des messages&lt;/span&gt;
**# sous &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;ignored:&lt;/code&gt; ou
**# sous &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;optional:&lt;/code&gt;;
** pour les extensions, dans {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/mediawiki-extensions.txt}} ajoutez une ligne sous le nom de l'extension ainsi :
**# &lt;code&gt;ignored = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt; or
**# &lt;code&gt;optional = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt;.

== Supprimer les messages existants ==
Supprimez-les de &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; et de &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;.
Ne vous préoccupez pas des autres langues.
Les mises à jour à partir de {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} les gèreront automatiquement.

En plus, vérifiez si le message apparaît quelque part dans la configuration translatewiki, par exemple dans  la liste des messages optionnels ou celle des messages les plus utilisés (un simple ''git grep'' est suffisant).
Supprimez-les de ces listes si nécessaire.

== Modifier les messages existants ==

# Pensez à mettre à jour la [[#Message documentation|documentation des messages]].
# Mettez à jour les clés des messages si les anciennes traductions ne correspondent plus à la nouvelle signification. Cela comprend également les modifications dans le traitement des messages (analyse syntaxique, échappement, paramètres, etc.). Améliorer le contenu d'un message sans le modifier techniquement n'est habituellement pas un motif pour en changer la clé. Sur ''translatewiki.net'', les messages seront marqués 'Désuets' afin d'être pris en compte par les traducteurs. Il n'est pas nécessaire de contacter l'équipe i18n ni de faire une demande de support pour modifier la clé d'un message. Néanmoins, si vous avez des conditions particulières ou des questions, posez-les sur {{irc|translatewiki}} ou sur les [[translatewiki:Support|pages du support]] de {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}.
# Si l'extension est prise en charge par {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}, ne modifiez que le message source en anglais et / ou la clé, ainsi que l'entrée qui l'accompagne dans &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;. Si besoin, l'équipe translatewiki.net fera la mise à jour des traductions en les marquant 'désuètes' et en nettoyant le fichier ou en renommant les clés là où c'est possible. Cela s'applique également lorsque vous ne modifiez que des éléments tels que les balises HTML que vous pouvez mettre à jour dans les autres langues sans avoir besoin de les connaître. La plupart des ces actions se déroulent dans [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]] et se retrouveront dans Git le lendemain.

{{anchor|Message documentation}}
== Documentation des messages ==
La documentation des messages utilise le code de pseudo-langage &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt;.
C'est l'un des codes ISO 639 réservé pour l'utilisation personnelle.
Là, nous ne gardons pas les traductions de chaque message, mais nous rassemblons les phrases en anglais ''concernant chaque message'' : pour indiquer où il est utilisé,  pour donner des indications sur la manière de le traduire, pour lister et décrire ses paramètres et le relier aux autres messages avec lesquels il a un rapport, etc.
Dans [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]], ces informations sont affichées aux traducteurs lors de la traduction des messages.

Les programmeurs doivent documenter soigneusement chaque message.
La documentation du message est une ressource essentielle – pas seulemnt pour les traducteurs, mais pour tous les mainteneurs du module.
A chaque fois qu'un message est ajouté au logiciel, ''il faut'' ajouter aussi son entrée &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; correspondante; les versions qui ne le font pas sont marquées « &lt;code&gt;V-1&lt;/code&gt; » jusqu'à ce que la documentation soit ajoutée.

La documentation dans les fichiers &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; doit être mise à jour directement lors de l'ajout de nouveaux messages, ou lors de la modification d'un message existant en anglais qui en implique la réactualisation, par exemple pour l'ajout ou la suppression de paramètres.
Dans les autres cas, la documentation doit habituellement être mise à jour dans translatewiki.
Chaque chaîne de documentation est accessible avec &lt;nowiki&gt;https://translatewiki.net/wiki/MediaWiki:&lt;/nowiki&gt;''message-key''&lt;nowiki&gt;/qqq&lt;/nowiki&gt;, comme s'il s'agissait d'une traduction.
Ces modifications seront exportées vers les répertoires source en même temps que les traductions.

Les informations utiles que vous devez faire figurer dans la documentation comprennent :

# la manière de traiter le message (analyse syntaxique, échappement, texte brut).
# le type utilisé pour les paramètres avec des exemples de valeurs.
# les endroits où le message est utilisé (pages, positions dans l'interface utilisateur).
# la manière dont le message est utilisé et où (un titre de page, le texte d'un bouton, ''etc.'').
# quels autres messages sont utilisés avec le message courant, ou à quels autres messages celui-ci fait référence.
# tout autre complément qui précise ce message affiché dans son contexte, mais pas quand il est traité isolément (ce qui est le cas pour la traduction).
# si nécessaire, la grammaire à préciser. Par exemple, « open » en anglais désigne à la fois un verbe et un adjectif. Dans beaucoup d'autres langues les mots sont différents et il est impossible de traduire correctement si l'on ne sait pas de quoi il s'agit.
# les adjectifs qui décrivent des choses, tels que « désactivé » , « ouvert » ou « bloqué », doivent ''toujours'' indiquer à quoi ils se rapportent. Dans beaucoup de langues les adjectifs doivent avoir le genre du nom auquel ils se rapportent. Il est aussi possible que différentes sortes de choses aient besoin de différents adjectifs.
# indiquer si le message a des propriétés spéciales par exemple s'il s'agit d'un nom de page, ou s'il ne doit pas être traduit directement mais adapté à la culture ou au projet.
# indiquer si le message apparaît avec d'autres messages, par exemple dans une liste ou un menu. Les termes ou la grammaire des mots devraient alors être les mêmes que celle des messages voisins. De même, les éléments d'une liste doivent être en rapport avec la tête de liste.
# indiquer les parties du message qui ne doivent pas être traduites, comme les noms des espaces de noms génériques, les URLs ou les balises.
# expliquer les mots potentiellement pas clairs, par exemple les abbréviations, comme « CTA », ou le jargon spécifique, comme « template », « suppress » ou « stub ». (Notez qu'il vaut mieux éviter de tels mots en premier !)
# Les captures d'écran sont très utiles. Ne découpez rien – une image de l'écran complet avec le message affiché nous donne le contexte complet et peut être réutilisée pour plusieurs messages.

Quelques points supplémentaires :

* Rappelez-vous que très très souvent les traducteurs traduisent les messages sans être au courant du logiciel.
* Dans pratiquement tous les cas, les traducteurs n'ont aucune information du contexte, ni du module, ni des autres messages qui vont avec.
* Le plus souvent, il est inutile de reformuler simplement le message dans la documentation.
* N'utilisez pas le jargon des développeurs comme « nav » ou « comps ».
* Envisagez l'écriture d'un [[betawiki:Terminology#Terminologies|glossaire]] pour les termes techniques utilisés dans votre module. Si vous le faites, créez un lien dessus pour le référencer dans la documentation des messages.

Vous pouvez référencer d'autres messages en utilisant leur {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;{{((}}msg-mw{{!}}message key{{))}}&lt;/code&gt;|clé de message}}.
Faites ceci si certaines parties de messages sont issues d'autres messages (quand cela n'est pas possible autrement), ou lorsque certains messages sont affichés ensemble ou dans un même contexte.

translatewiki.net dispose de quelques modèles par défaut pour la documentation :

* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-action|doc-action]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pour les messages &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-right|doc-right]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pour les messages &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-group|doc-group]]|[...]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pour les messages concernant les groupes d'utilisateurs  (&lt;code&gt;group&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;member&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;page&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;js&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;css&lt;/code&gt;)
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-accesskey|doc-accesskey]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pour les messages &lt;code&gt;accesskey-&lt;/code&gt;

Voir les pages des modèles pour plus d'information.

{{anchor|Internationalisation hints}}
== Conseils pour internationaliser ==
En plus de la [[#Message documentation|documentation]], les traducteurs demandent aux développeurs de prendre en compte certains points afin de faciliter leur travail et le rendre plus efficace et permettre ainsi un bonne et fidèle traduction dans toutes les langues.
Même si vous n'avez qu'à ajouter ou modifier les messages en anglais, ne perdez pas de vue les besoins de toutes les langues. Chaque message est traduit dans plus de 300 langues et ceci doit se faire de la meilleure manière possible.
L'implémentation correcte de ces points vous aidera souvent aussi à mieux écrire les messages en anglais.

[[Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Help_and_contact_info|Localisation#Help_and_contact_info]] liste les endroits principaux où vous pouvez trouverl'assistance de personnes expérimentées connaissant i18n.
=== Utilisez correctement les paramètres des messages et les sélecteurs ===

C'est un prérequis pour l'écriture correcte de vos messages.

=== Evitez la réutilisation des messages ===
Les traducteurs ne recommandent pas la réutilisation des messages.
Ceci peut sembler contre-intuitif, car le fait de copier et dupliquer du code est habituellement une mauvaise pratique, mais dans le cas des messages sytème c'est souvent nécessaire.
Bien que deux concepts puissent être exprimés par le même mot en anglais, cela ne signifie pas nécessairement qu'il peuvent être traduits par le même mot en fonction de la langue.
« OK » est un bon exemple : en anglais ceci est utilisé pour le texte d'un bouton générique, mais dans certaines langues on préfère avoir un texte qui soit en phase avec l'opération que le bouton réalise.
Un autre exemple est pratiquement n'importe quel adjectif : un mot tel que « multiple » varie selon le genre dans différentes langues, donc vous ne pouvez pas le réutiliser pour décrire plusieurs choses différentes, et vous devez créer plusieurs messages distincts.

Si vous ajoutez plusieurs messages identiques, ajoutez également la documentation correspondante pour décrire le contexte des différences.
Ne vous préoccupez pas du travail supplémentaire des traducteurs.
La mémoire de traduction aide beaucoup en cela en gardant la souplesse d'avoir différentes traductions si nécessaire.

{{anchor|Avoid_patchwork_messages|Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages}}
=== Eviter les messages fragmentés ou sous forme de 'patchwork' ===
Les langues possèdent différentes organisations des mots et des règles grammaticales et syntaxiques complexes.
Il est très difficile de traduire des messages de type « lego », c'est à dire des messages formés à partir de plusieurs morceaux de texte, éventuellement avec des indirections (appelés aussi « concatenations de chaînes » ).

Il est préférable que chaque message soit une phrase complète.
Plusieurs phrases peuvent habituellement être combinées beaucoup plus facilement à l'intérieur d'un bloc de texte si besoin.
Si vous souhaitez combiner plusieurs chaînes en un seul message, passez-les en paramètre, afin que les traducteurs puissent les mettre dans l'ordre correct dans leur langue, au moment de la traduction.

==== Messages se référençant mutuellement ====
Une exception à la règle concerne les messages qui se référencent mutuellement : 'entrez le nom de l'auteur original dans le champs nommé &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; et cliquez sur &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:proceed}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; pour finaliser'.
Ceci rend le message cohérent lorsqu'un développeur logiciel ou un opérateur du wiki change le ''nom'' du message ou modifie ce dernier ultérieurement.
Sans l'astuce du &lt;code&gt;int&lt;/code&gt;, les développeurs et les opérateurs devraient connaître tous les messages liés qui devraient être corrigés dès que l'un d'eux est modifié.

=== N'utilisez pas les termes et les modèles spécifiques à un projet particulier ===
MediaWiki est utilisé par diverses personnes à l'intérieur du mouvement Wikimedia et à l'extérieur également.
Bien qu'à l'origine il a été conçu pour une encyclopédie, il est maintenant utilisé pour toutes sortes de contenus.
C'est pourquoi il faut utiliser des termes généraux.
Par exemple, évitez les termes comme « article », et utilisez « page » à la place, à moins que vous soyez absolument sûr que la fonctionnalité que vous développez ne sera utilisée que sur un site où les pages seront appelées « article ».
N'utilisez pas « village pump » car c'est le nom de la page communautaire de la Wikipedia anglophone, mais plutôt à la place, un nom générique tel que « page de discussion » de la communauté.

N'espérez pas qu'un modèle particulier soit présent sur tous les wikis.
Les modèles sont locaux aux wikis.
Ceci s'applique à la fois aux messages source et à leurs traductions.
Si un message utilise des modèles, ils ne fonctionneront que s'ils ont été créés sur CHACUN des wikis où la fonctionnalité est déployée.
Mieux vaut éviter à tout prix l'utilisation des modèles dans les messages.
Si vous devez absolument les utiliser, documentez cela clairement dans la documentation du message et dans les instructions d'installation de l'extension.

=== Séparer l'heure de la date dans les phrases ===
Certaines langues doivent insérer quelque chose entre la date et l'heure, qui dépend grammatiquement des autres mots de la phrase.
Ainsi on ne pourra pas combiner la date et l'heure.
D'autres personnes pourront trouver que la combinaison est pratique, ainsi la meilleure façon est habituellement de passer trois valeurs de paramètres (date/heure, date, heure) dans de tels cas et pour chaque traduction, de laisser inutilisées soit la première valeur soit les deux dernières selon les besoins.

=== Évitez &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; dans les messages ===
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; présente plusieurs désavantages.
Cela peut être ce que l'on veut (un acronyme, mot, courte phrase, ''etc.'') et en fonction de la langue, utiliser &lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Messages_API#…on use context inside sentences via GRAMMAR|&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/code&gt; sur chaque occurrence.
Cela est indépendant du fait que chaque message qui a &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; nécessite une relecture dans la plupart des langues du wiki pour chaque nouveau wiki sur lequel votre code est installé.
Dans la plupart des cas, quand il n'y a pas de configuration générale &lt;code&gt;GRAMMAR&lt;/code&gt; pour une langue, les opérateurs wiki devront ajouter ou modifier le code PHP de sorte à ce que &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; fonctionne pour &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; .
Ceci nécessite à la fois de plus grandes compétences et plus de compréhension qu'autrement.
Il est plus pratique d'avoir des références génériques comme « ce wiki » .
Cela n'empêche pas les installations de modifier localement ces messages pour utiliser &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, mais au moins elles n'y sont pas obligées et peuvent retarder leur adaptation après que le wiki soit actif et utilisé.

=== Eviter les références au rendu visuel et aux positions ===
Ce que vous voyez dépend de l'habillage que vous utilisez.
Le plus souvent, la présentation des écrans pour les langues s'écrivant de gauche à droite est mirrorée comparativement à celle pour les langues s'écrivant de droite à gauche, mais cela n'est pas toujours vrai, et pour certaines langues et certains wiki, pas complètement.
Les équipements tenus à la main, les écrans étroits et autres peuvent afficher des blocs les uns au dessous des autres pouvant se retrouver côte à côte sur des écrans plus larges.
Comme les scripts JavaScript et les gadgets du site - tout comme ceux de l'utilisateur - peuvent et cachent effectivement des morceaux ou déplacent partout les éléments et d'une manière imprévisible, il n'y a pas de manière fiable pour prédire ce que devient l'affichage final.

C'est très mauvais de lier l'information à afficher aux langues du contenu, parce que la langue de l'interface utilisateur peut ne pas correspondre à la langue du contenu de la page, et que l'affichage peut résulter d'un mélange des deux, en fonction des circonstances.
Les agents utilisateur non visuels tels que les lecteurs d'écran acoustiques ou les autres équipements auxilliaires ne connaissent même pas la notion d'affichage.
Ainsi, dans la majorité des cas vous ne devez pas faire référence aux positions visuelles de l'affichage bien que les termes sémantiques de celui-ci peuvent encore être utilisés (« étapes précédentes du formulaire », ''etc.'').

MediaWiki ne prend pas en charge l'affichage de messages différents ou des fragments de messages basés sur la directionalité courante de l'interface (voir [[phab:T30997|T30997]]).

Les navigateurs futurs ainsi que le support de MediaWiki pour l'écriture de haut en bas d'Orient et d'Asie du Nord &lt;ref&gt;http://dev.w3.org/csswg/css3-writing-modes/&lt;/ref&gt; feront que l'affichage sur écran sera plus imprévisible, avec au moins 8 affichages possibles (position de départ à gauche ou à droite, en haut ou en bas, en fonction de là où on commence).

=== Eviter les références aux couleurs de l'écran ===
La couleur dans laquelle est faite le rendu dépend de plusieurs facteurs y compris de l'habillage :  les scripts JavaScript et les gadgets du site et ceux de l'utilisateur, ainsi que l'agent utilisateur local la réécrasent pour des raisons d'accessibilité ou de limitation technologique.
Les agents utilisateur non visuels tels que les lecteurs d'écran acoustiques ou les autres équipements auxilliaires ne connaissent même pas la notion de couleur.
Ainsi, vous ne devez pas évoquer les couleurs d'écran.
(De même vous ne devez pas vous fier à la couleur uniquement comme mécanisme pour informer l'utilisateur de l'état, pour la même raison).

=== Avoir les éléments des messages avant et après chaque champ de saisie ===

:''Ceci est une règle suggérée et elle n'est pas encore devenue un standard du développement MediaWiki.''

Alors que l'anglais permet l'utilisation efficace de l'interrogation sous la forme élément-deuxPoints-champsD'entrée, beaucoup d'autres langues ne le font pas.
Même en anglais, vous souhaitez souvent utiliser « Distance: ___ mètres » plutôt que « Distance (en mètres): ___ ».
En laissant de côté les éléments {{tag|textarea|open}}, vous devez penser à chaque champs d'entrée en respectant le motif « Distance: ___ mètres » . Donc :

* créez deux messages, même si le 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; est vide en anglais et certaines autres langues, ou
* permettez l'insertion des champs de saisie en utilisant les paramètres &lt;code&gt;$i&lt;/code&gt; .
=== Evitez le marquage HTML non traduit dans les messages ===
Les balises HTML qui n'ont pas besoin d'être traduites, comme les {{tag|div|open}}s englobants, les règles supérieures ou inférieures et similaires, ne doivent habituellement pas faire partie du message.
Ils apportent une surcharge inutile aux traducteurs, augmentent la taille des fichiers, et créent le risque d'être modifiés accidentellement ou d'être sautés par le processus de traduction.
De manière générale, évitez le HTML directement dans les messages si vous le pouvez.

=== Les messages sont souvent plus longs que vous  le pensez ! ===

En regardant un peu les fichiers des messages des langues étrangères, vous ne trouverez presque jamais des messages plus courts que les messages chinois, rarement plus courts que les messages anglais, et habituellement plus longs que les messages anglais.

Particulièrement dans les formulaires, devant les champs de saisie, les messages anglais ont tendance à être laconiques et courts.
Souvent ceci n'est pas conservé dans les traductions.
Le vocabulaire technique présent en anglais peut être absent dans les autres langues et demander l'utilisation de plusieurs mots ou même des phrases complètes pour expliquer certains concepts.
Par exemple le message anglais « TSV file: » pourrait devoir être traduit dans une langue in extenso :
&lt;blockquote&gt;''Veuillez entrer ici un nom qui représente une collection de données informatiques composée d'une série organisée séquentiellement de lignes dactylographiées qui elles-même sont organisées comme une série de champs informels chacunes, où les champs d'information sont fermés, séparés chacuns par un signe unique équivalent à celui qui fait déplacer le charriot d'une machine à écrire vers la position suivante prédéfinie. Commençons : _____ (merci)''&lt;/blockquote&gt;
C'est vrai que c'est un exemple extrême mais cela vous donne une idée.
Imaginez cette phrase en colonne dans laquelle chaque mot est seul sur une ligne, et que le champs d'entrée est centré verticalement dans la colonne suivante. :-(

=== Eviter d'utiliser des mots très proches, similaires, ou identiques pour désigner des choses ou des concepts différents ===
Par exemple, les pages peuvent avoir d'anciennes ''révisions'' (correspondant à une date spécifique, une heure et un contenu), qui comprennent les ''versions'' passées de ladite page.
Vous pouvez utiliser les mots ''revision'' et ''version'' de manière interchangeable.
Un problème apparait lorsque les pages versionnées sont relues, et que la révision, ''c'est à dire'' le processus de relecture, est également mentionné.
Cela ne pose pas de problème particulier lorsque les deux synonymes de la « révision » ont des traductions différentes.
Néanmoins il ne faut pas vous fier à cela.
Il vaut mieux éviter l'utilisation simultanée de ''révision'' avec ''version'', pour éviter d'apporter la confusion.

=== Les mots de base peuvent avoir des connotations imprévues, ou ne pas exister du tout ===
Certains mots sont difficiles à traduire à cause de leur utilisation spécique dans MediaWiki.
Certains peuvent [[#Expect untranslated words|ne pas être traductibles du tout]].
Par exemple le mot « utilisateur  » n'existe pas dans plusieurs langues pour désigner « quelqu'un qui se sert de quelque chose  ».
De la même façon, dans le dialecte [[:en:Colognian language|kölsch]] les mots anglais « namespace » (espace de noms) et « apartment » (appartement) se traduisent avec le même mot.
Aussi, en kölsch on dit « corroborator et participant » (collaborateur et participant) en un seul mot car toute référence à « utiliser » impliquerait trop systématiquement « abuser ».
Le terme « ferme de wikis » (wiki farm) est traduit comme « étable pleine de wikis » car si on utilise « ferme » simplement on est en contradiction avec les mots de la langue, on ne comprend pas, ''etc.''.

{{anchor|Expect untranslated words}}
=== Attendez-vous à rencontrer des mots non traduits ===

:''Ceci est une règle suggérée et elle n'est pas encore devenue un standard du développement MediaWiki.''

Il n'est pas rare que les noms propres, les noms des balises, ''etc.'' et les termes informatique en anglais  
ne soient pas traduits, et sont à la place pris comme des mots d'emprunt ou des mots étrangers.
Dans le dernier cas, certains traducteurs particulièrement fastidieux peuvent marquer de tels mots comme s'ils appartenaient à une autre langue avec le balisage HTML, comme &lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot;&gt; … &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;.

Vous pouvez vous assurer que votre gestionnaire de sortie des messages laisse inchangé un tel balisage, malgré les risques évidents de sécurité.

=== Permettre le marquage explicatif en ligne ===

:''Ceci est une règle suggérée et elle n'est pas encore devenue un standard du développement MediaWiki.''

Il existe quelque fois dans les langues cible des abbréviations, des termes techniques ou des mots généralement ambigus qui ne peuvent pas être immédiatement compris des nouveaux arrivants mais qui sont évidents pour les utilisateurs expérimentés d'ordinateurs .
Pour éviter l'encombrement de l'écran par de longues explications et ne pas laisser les nouveaux arrivants bloqués, les traducteurs peuvent choisir d'ajouter des explications comme les annotations {{tag|abbr|open}}, à la manière des navigateurs lorsque vous les survolez avec la souris.

Par exemple, le message du noyau de MediaWiki &lt;code&gt;exif-orientation-8&lt;/code&gt; concernant la rotation d'image, qui en anglais est simplement « &lt;code&gt;Rotated 90° CW&lt;/code&gt; », en arabe marocain est traduit par :

:&lt;code lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &amp;lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&amp;lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/code&gt;

donne :

:&lt;span lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/span&gt;

en expliquant l'abbréviation de « counter clockwise » (sens de rotation rétrograde) lorsque c'est nécessaire.

Vous pouvez vous assurer que votre gestionnaire de sortie des messages laisse inchangé un tel balisage, même si le message original ne l'utilise pas.

=== Utiliser les balises {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}}, et {{tag|kbd|open}} à bon escient ===
Lorsqu'on parle de paramètres techniques, de valeurs, ou d'entrées au clavier, marquez les respectivement en tant que tel en utilisant les balises HTML {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}}, ou {{tag|kbd|open}}.
Ainsi, ils sont typographiquement mis en valeur par rapport au texte normal.
Cela clarifie leur sens pour les lecteurs, évitant la confusion, les erreurs et les mauvaises interprétations.
Vérifiez que votre gestionnaire de messages permet un tel marquage.

=== Symboles, deux points, crochets, ''etc.'' faisant partie des messages ===
Beaucoup de symboles sont localisables également. Certains scripts utilisent d'autres types de crochets que ceux des scripts latins.
Un deux-points peut ne pas être approprié après une étiquette ou une invite de saisie dans certaines langues.
L'inclusion de ces symboles dans les messages aide à faire des traductions meilleures et moins anglo-centrées, et réduit également la taille du code.

Il existe par exemple différentes conventions pour les apostrophes utilisées en « norvégien », » suédois», »danois«, „allemand“, et 「japonais」.&lt;ref&gt;[[w:Quotation_mark#Summary_table|types d'apostrophes]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Si vous avez besoin d'envelopper le texte entre des  parenthèses localisées, des crochets, ou des guillemets, vous pouvez utiliser les messages  &lt;code&gt;parentheses&lt;/code&gt; {{int:parentheses}} ou &lt;code&gt;brackets&lt;/code&gt; {{int:brackets}} ou &lt;code&gt;quotation-marks&lt;/code&gt; {{int:quotation-marks}} de la manière suivante :
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php&gt;wfMessage( 'parentheses' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside parentheses */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'brackets' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside brackets */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'quotation-marks' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside quotation marks */ )-&gt;escaped()&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== N'espérez pas que les symboles et la ponctuation survivent à la traduction ===
Les langues écrites de droite à gauche (contrairement à l'anglais) permutent habituellement les symboles des flèches utilisées pour les liens « suivant » et « précédent », et leur placement relativement au texte du message peut ou ne peut pas être permuté également.
Vous pouvez traduire les points de suspension par « ''etc.'' », ou avec des mots.
Les points d'interrogation, d'exclamation, et les deux-points seront mis ailleurs qu'en fin de phrase, ou pas utilisés, ou utilisés deux fois.
Comme conséquence, ils doivent toujours faire partie de votre message et ne tentez pas de les insérer par programme.

=== Utiliser les arrêts complets ===
Terminez '''absolument''' les phrases normales avec des caractères d'arrêt.
C’est souvent la seule indication qu’a le traducteur pour savoir qu’il ne s’agit pas de titres ni d’éléments de liste qui nécessiteraient une traduction différente.

=== Ancre des liens ===

==== Wikicode des liens ====

L'ancre des liens peut être déclarée dans les messages à travers différentes techniques :

# via le wikicode : …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;''une page wiki''|''ancre''&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…,
# via le wikicode : …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;[''une-url'' ''ancre'']&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…, or
#le texte de l'ancre est un message appartenant à l'espace de noms MediaWiki. ''Evitez-le !''

Le dernier cas est souvent difficile voire impossible à gérer pour les traducteurs; il faut [[#Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages|éviter les messages fragmentés et ne pas les assembler en 'patchwork']] ici également.
Assurez-vous que « &lt;code&gt;some-url&lt;/code&gt; » ne contient pas d'espaces.

==== Utiliser des ancres ayant des noms significatifs ====
Faites attention à votre texte.
Les ancres des liens jouent un rôle important pour l'accès aux pages du moteus de recherche – à la fois les mots liés ainsi que l'ancre cible.
Assurez-vous aussi que l'ancre décrit bien la page cible.
Évitez toujours les mots communs et génériques.
Par exemple, « Cliquez ici » est absolument interdit &lt;ref&gt;http://www.w3.org/QA/Tips/noClickHere&lt;/ref&gt; car les pages cibles ne concernent pratiquement jamais « Cliquez ici ».
Il ne faut pas non plus mettre cela dans des phrases entouré de liens car « ici » n'était pas l'endroit à cliquer.
A la place, utilisez des mots représentant des actions précises pour dire ce qu'obtiendra l'utilisateur en ouvrant le lien, comme  « Vous pouvez [[Special:Upload|téléverser un fichier]] si vous le souhaitez. »

Voir aussi ''[http://www.nngroup.com/articles/using-link-titles-to-help-users-predict-where-they-are-going/ Aider les utilisateurs à prédire où ils vont]'', la [[w:Mystery meat navigation|navigation en aveugle]], et ''[https://tosbourn.com/click-here/ Les raisons principales de ne pas utiliser 'Cliquez ici' comme texte de lien]''.

=== Eviter le jargon et l'argot ===
Evitez d'utiliser le jargon des développeurs ou des termes trop pointus dans les messages. Essayez d'avoir un langage simple à chaque fois que c'est possible.
Evitez d'utiliser « OK » « avec succès » « échec » « erreur durant », etc., si vous voulez signaler à l'utilisateur que quelque chose est arrivé ou ne s'est pas passé.
Cela vient du point de vue des développeurs qui considèrent tout comme vrai ou faux, mais les utilisateurs veulent savoir habituellement simplement ce qui s'est passé ou ne s'est pas déroulé et ce qu'ils doivent faire dans ces cas (si nécessaire). Donc :

* « Ce fichier a été renommé avec succès » &amp;rarr; « Ce fichier a été renommé »
* « Echec du renommage du fichier » &amp;rarr; -&gt; « Un fichier de même nom existe déjà. Utiliser un nom différent ».

=== Faites attention aux caractères espace et aux retours à la ligne ===
Les messages traduits de MediaWiki sont habituellement traduits sur le wiki, soit lors d'opérations wiki sur les wikis actifs, ou par des traducteurs sur [[translatewiki.net]].
Soyez conscient de la manière dont les espaces vont influer sur les éditeurs (particulièrement s'ils se trouvent au début ou à la fin de votre message) :

* Les espaces et les passages à la ligne (saut de ligne) présents à la fin du message sont toujours enlevés automatiquement par l'éditeur de wikicode. Par conséquent votre message ne doit pas se terminer par un espace ni un passage à la ligne car ils seront perdus quand le message sera modifié sur le wiki.
* Les espaces et les sauts de ligne en tête de message - eux - ne sont pas automatiquement supprimés, mais peuvent disparaître par accident lors des modifications; ceci doit donc être évité.

Commencez et terminez votre message avec du texte actif; si vous avez besoin d'une nouvelle ligne ou d'un saut de paragraphe autour, votre code englobant doit accepter l'ajout au texte renvoyé.

Certains messages ont besoin d'un espace à la fin pour séparer les mots (formé simplement d'un caractère espace dans la plupart des langues).
Pour prendre en charge ces cas d'utilisation, les entités HTML suivantes sont autorisées dans les messages et transformées en caractères actuels, même si autrement le message n'autorisait pas le formatage wikicode ou HTML :&lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/REL1_34/includes/cache/MessageCache.php#L887&lt;/ref&gt;

* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#32;&lt;/code&gt; – espace
* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#160;&lt;/code&gt; – [[w:non-breaking space|espace non sécable]]
* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;shy;&lt;/code&gt; – [[w:fr:Tiretsoft hyphen|trait d'union conditionnel]] (soft hyphen)

Sur une note associée, tout autre élément de syntaxe affecté par les [[Special:MyLanguage/pre-save transforms|transformations avant enregistrement]] doit également ne pas être utilisé dans les messages, car il sera transformé quand le message sera modifié sur le wiki.

=== Utiliser la capitalisation standard ===
La capitalisation indique aux traducteurs ce qu'ils doivent traduire, comme les mots isolés, les listes d'éléments ou les menus, les phrases, ou des phrases complètes.
La capitalisation correcte (standard) peut aussi jouer un rôle dans l'accès à vos pages par les moteurs de recherche.
MediaWiki utilise la [[w:Letter case|casse des phrases]] (''The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog'') dans les messages d'interface.

Rappelez-vous toujours que beaucoup des systèmes d'écriture ne possèdent pas de lettres capitales du tout, et que ceux qui les ont, les utilisent différemment de l'anglais.
C'est pourquoi il ne faut pas utiliser que des majuscules pour l'emphase.
Utilisez en CSS, ou HTML {{tag|em|open}} ou {{tag|strong|open}} pour ceci :

==== Emphase ====
Dans un texte normal l'[[w:Emphasis|emphase]], c'est à dire la mise en valeur comme '''gras''', ''italiques'' ou équivalent, doit faire partie du message lui-même.
Les conventions locales pour la mise en valeur sont souvent différentes, particulièrement pour certains scripts asiatiques qui ont les leurs.
Les traducteurs doivent pouvoir adapter l'emphase à la langue cible et aux domaines.
Essayez d'utiliser « {{tag|em|open}} » et « {{tag|strong|open}} » dans votre interface utilisateur pour permettre le balisage sur la base des langues ou des scripts.

Les affichages modernes des styles anglais et européens utilisent de moins en moins l'emphase.
Utilisez-la néanmoins encore dans votre [[#Message documentation|documentation de message]], car elle peut fournir des informations intéressantes sur la manière de traduire.
L'emphase peut et doit être utilisée dans les autres contextes culturels selon le cas, étant entendu que les traducteurs la connaissent.

&lt;references /&gt;

== Voir aussi ==

* {{ll|Customization}}
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings}}
* {{ll|Manual:Skins}}
* {{ll|Manual:Messages API}}
* {{ll|Localisation}}
* [[translatewiki:FAQ]]

[[Category:Customization techniques{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:User interface{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Localisation{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:System message{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5zxv7saynffige80ibzidn5z2b7rk54</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402549</id>
      <parentid>5402533</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:26:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="61055" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{i18n navigation}}
{{TOC right|limit=2}}

[[Image:MediaWiki SpecialUpload interface labelled.png|thumb|Capture d'écran commentée de l'interface « [[Special:Upload|{{MediaWiki:Upload/fr}}]] », montrant les différents messages système.]]
Un '''message système''' est un fragment de texte brut, de wikitexte, de [[w:fr:Feuilles de style en cascade|CSS]] ou de [[w:fr:JavaScript|JavaScript]], qui peut être utilisé pour personnaliser le comportement de MediaWiki et son apparence pour chaque langue et [[w:fr:Paramètres régionaux|paramètres régionaux]]. MediaWiki utilise des messages pour chaque partie de l'interface visible par l'utilisateur, permettant l'internationalisation et la régionalisation de l'interface utilisateur de MediaWiki, tant pour son cœur que pour ses extensions.
Tous les messages utilisés dans MediaWiki sont définis dans un ''fichier de messages''.

== Redéfinir les messages sur un wiki ==
La valeur par défaut des messages peut être modifiée  en l'éditant sur chaque wiki.
Chaque message possède sa page wiki dans l'espace de noms MediaWiki avec sa clé de message pour nom de page.
Par exemple, le message ''aboutsite'' est enregistré dans MediaWiki:aboutsite.
Par défaut, cet espace de noms est protégé contre toute modification à moins que l'utilisateur n'ait les droits de ''modificateur d'interface''.
Une liste de tous les messages se trouve sur [[Special:AllMessages]].
Modifier les messages d'interface est très simple et se fait comme pour toute modification de page classique du wiki, mais cela reste réservé aux utilisateurs ayant les droits de [[editinterface|modificateur d'interface]], c'est à dire par défaut aux administrateurs (et aux administrateurs d'interfaces).
[[Image:Wiki-system-messages.png|thumb|Exemple de ligne de l'ancien [[Special:AllMessages]].]]
Le tableau de [[Special:AllMessages]] contient deux colonnes : le nom du fichier du message système avec un lien pour le consulter, et le texte du message système.
Le texte est séparé horizontalement pour montrer le texte par défaut au-dessus, et le texte personnalisé en-dessous.
Quand un message personnalisé n'existe pas, seul le texte par défaut apparait.
Pour personnaliser un message, cliquez sur le lien supérieur de la colonne de gauche (le nom du message).
Le lien est en rouge si le texte par défaut est utilisé, car la page à modifier est vide.

Les liens inférieurs des cellules de la colonne de gauche pointent vers les pages de discussion relatives aux messages.

{{anchor|Finding messages and documentation}}
== Trouver les messages et leur documentation ==
La façon dont chaque message est utilisé par MediaWiki, les variables disponibles, les paramètres utilisés, les limitations, etc. est exposée dans les fichiers de la [//translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;task=reviewall&amp;group=core&amp;language=qqq&amp;limit=5000&amp;action=page&amp;filter= documentation complète en pseudo-langage ''qqq''], suivant [[#Message_documentation|les recomendations pour la documentation des messages]].
Des pages d'explication plus longues peuvent exister pour quelques messages d'interface dans la plus ancienne {{ll|Category:Interface messages}}.

{{note|1=
Dans le wiki utilisé par translatewiki.net, 'qqq' représente la page qui contient la documentation utilisateur du message (en anglais, car c'est le même texte qui est affiché pour tous les lecteurs).
De la même manière que /en /ge /fr ... /qqq est une sous-page de l'article et peut être affichée directement.

* Essayez [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/en]]  pour voir un article en anglais,
* Essayez [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/fr]] pour voir le même article en français,
* Essayez [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/qqq]] pour afficher sa documentation associée (en anglais).

De ce point de vue, &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; est considéré comme un langage dans le paramètre &lt;code&gt;language=&lt;/code&gt; de la requête.
}}

Dans MediaWiki 1.18 et supérieur, vous pouvez trouver la clé d'un message en consultant un wiki dans en pseudo-langage de code &lt;code&gt;'''[[Help:Qqx|qqx]]'''&lt;/code&gt;, ce qui peut se faire en ajoutant &lt;code&gt;?[[uselang]]=qqx&lt;/code&gt; à l'URL, ou &lt;code&gt;&amp;uselang=qqx&lt;/code&gt; si l'URL contient déjà un caractère &lt;code&gt;?&lt;/code&gt; ([{{fullurl:{{FULLPAGENAME}}|uselang=qqx}} exemple]). Tous les messages seront ensuite remplacés par leur clé de message, de façon à ce que vous puissiez identifier quel message est concerné. Les messages qui sont toujours dans la langue du contenu ne seront pas affichés en utilisant qqx.

Quelques parties de l'interface ajoutent &lt;code&gt;nstab-&lt;/code&gt; à la chaîne affichée quand vous utilisez l'astuce qqx. Par exemple l'étiquette de l'onglet qui pointe sur la page de discussion dans l'espace de noms principal est affichée en tant que &lt;code&gt;nstab-talk&lt;/code&gt;, mais la chaîne se trouve actuellement dans [[MediaWiki:Talk]].

Dans le cas où la page utilise des onglets comme par exemple la [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|page spéciale &quot;Preferences&quot;]] vous devrez ajouter l'onglet après le paramètre &lt;code&gt;uselang&lt;/code&gt;, par exemple &lt;code&gt;Special:Preferences?uselang=qqx#mw-prefsection-rendering&lt;/code&gt;.

{{anchor|Localisation file format}}
== Format des fichiers de localisation ==

Tous les messages utilisés dans MediaWiki sont définis dans un ''fichier de messages''.

Il y a deux types de fichiers de messages dans MediaWiki : JSON et PHP.
Depuis avril 2014, le noyau de MediaWiki et la plupart des extensions les mieux maintenues ont migré au format JSON.
Vous devez utiliser JSON pour tous les nouveaux développements.
Pour plus d'information sur la migration en JSON, voir [[Requests for comment/Localisation format]].

=== JSON ===

Depuis la fin 2013 un nouveau format de fichier de messages a été introduit : JSON.
C'est le [[:w:fr:JSON|JSON]] à plat, familier en tant que format commun générique de stockage des données.
Chacune des clés est une clé de message, et la valeur est le texte du message.
En plus, la clé spéciale &lt;code&gt;@metadata&lt;/code&gt; est utilisée pour stocker les informations concernant la traduction telles que les auteurs de la traduction.

L'utilisation de JSON rend les fichiers de localisation plus sécurisés car ce n'est pas du code exécutable.
Il est également compatible avec jquery.i18n, une bibliothèque  JavaScript développée pour le [[Milkshake|projet Milkshake]], qui fournit des possibilités de traduction de l'interface utilisateur comme celles de MediaWiki et qui est utilisée par certaines extensions qui se veulent plus indépendantes de MediaWiki, telles que [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor]] ou [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector|UniversalLanguageSelector]].

Parce que la plus grande suite d'outils d'internationalisation et de localisation était appelée « [[Project Milkshake]] » , certaines personnes ont appelé ce format « banane » .

==== Emplacement des fichiers ====
Dans le noyau MediaWiki, les fichiers internationalisés se trouvent dans le répertoire &lt;code&gt;{{git file |file=languages/i18n |action=tree}}&lt;/code&gt; .
Les extensions MediaWiki mettent habituellement les leurs dans un sous-répertoire &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt; .
Si un projet comporte trop de messages, il est possible de les grouper en deux ou plusieurs sous-répertoires de sujets afin d'en facilter la maintenance.
Dans le contexte de MediaWiki, la clé de configuration {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}} est utilisée pour lister ces sous-répertoires.
Voici un exemple de l'extension VisualEditor pour MediaWiki :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
  &quot;MessagesDirs&quot;: {
    &quot;VisualEditor&quot;: [
      &quot;lib/ve/modules/ve/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-mw/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-wmf/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;lib/ve/lib/oojs-ui/i18n&quot;
    ]
  }
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ajoutez les nouveaux messages dans le fichier « en » des messages en anglais « &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; » et documentez-les dans le fichier de documentation des messages ayant comme code spécial de langue « qqq » &amp;ndash; &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;.
''Voir aussi : [[#Adding new messages|Ajouter de nouveaux messages]]''.

==== Métadonnées ====

Actuellement, les champs suivants  sont utilisés dans les fichiers pour les métadonnées :

;authors
:Liste JSON des auteurs des messages. Pour les messages en anglais (en) ainsi que pour la documentation (qqq) ils sont ajoutés manuellement lorsque le fichier des messages est modifié. Pour toutes les autres langues l'insertion est automatique lorsque le fichier des messages est exporté de [[translatewiki.net]]. La documentation des messages peut être mise à jour sur translatewiki.net, et les éditeurs de la documentation sont également insérés dans le fichier qqq.json automatiquement.
;message-documentation
:Ceci est le code du pseudo-langage pour enregistrer la documentation du message. Pour MediaWiki, c'est toujours ''qqq''. (On voit cela dans quelques extensions, mais il n'est pas traité actuellement d'une quelconque manière. Cela n'est pas obligatoire).

==== Conventions ====

Les caractères spéciaux tels que les passages à la ligne doivent être échappés (&lt;code&gt;&quot;\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Les caractères Unicode qui représentent des lettres dans les différents alphabets sont rangés comme des caractères réels et non pas comme des codes de caractères, car ces fichiers sont quelques fois lus par des personnes et parce que cela produit des fichiers plus petits (&lt;code&gt;&quot;誼&quot;&lt;/code&gt; et non pas &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u8ABC&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).
De façon générale, les développeurs ne modifient que les messages en anglais (rarement dans les autres langues) car  ceux-ci sont habituellement traduits en utilisant par ''translatewiki.net''.

Le code HTML n'est pas échappé lui non plus; donc &lt;code&gt;&quot;&amp;lt;strong&gt;Warning&amp;lt;/strong&gt;&quot;&lt;/code&gt; et non pas &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u003cstrong\u003eWarning\u003c/strong\u003e&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.

L'indentation dans les fichiers JSON se fait en utilisant les caractères de tabulation.

=== PHP ===

L'ancien format du fichier de localisation est PHP.
Il s'agit essentiellement d'un tableau PHP contenant tous les messages.
Dans le noyau de MediaWiki chaque langue est rangée dans son propre fichier du répertoire ''languages/message'' du code source de  MediaWiki.
Dans les extensions toutes les langues et la documentation des message (''qqq'') sont dans le même fichier : ''ExtensionName.i18n.php'', habituellement dans le répertoire principal de l'extension.

Pour migrer de PHP vers JSON, utilisez le script [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:GenerateJsonI18n.php|generateJsonI18n.php]] .
Il déplacera les messages vers les fichiers JSON et remplacera le texte du fichier PHP en le faisant pointer vers les fichiers JSON.
Ce code passe-partout est nécessaire pour la compatibilité arrière avec MediaWiki 1.19 .
Il n'est pas utilisé dans les nouvelles extensions qui ne nécessitent pas la compatibilté avec MediaWiki 1.19.

== Utiliser les messages ==
MediaWiki utilise un dépôt ''central'' des messages auxquels le code accède avec une clé.
Ceci est différent de &lt;code&gt;Gettext&lt;/code&gt; par exemple, qui ne fait qu'extraire des fichiers source, les chaînes de caractères traductibles.
Le système basé sur les clés rend certaines choses plus faciles, comme affiner les textes originaux et tracer la modification des messages.
La contrepartie est bien sûr que la liste des messages utilisés et la liste des textes source pour ces clés peuvent diverger.
En pratique, ce n'est pas un gros problème et le seul vrai problème est que quelques fois des messages supplémentaires qui ne sont plus utilisés, sont encore présentés à la traduction.

Pour rendre les clés des messages plus gérables et facilement reconnaissables même avec grep, vous devez  toujours les écrire totalement, sans trop vous fier à leur création dynamique.
Vous pouvez concaténer des parties de clé de message si vous pensez que cela donne une meilleure structure à votre code, mais laissez un commentaire à côté avec une liste des clés résultantes possibles.

Voir aussi les [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding_conventions#Dynamic_identifiers|conventions de codage]]. Par exemple :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// Messages utilisables ici :
// * myextension-connection-success
// * myextension-connection-warning
// * myextension-connection-error
$text = wfMessage( 'myextension-connection-' . $status )-&gt;parse();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Pour utiliser un message en JavaScript, vous devez [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Messages API#Using a ResourceLoader module|le lister]] dans la définition de votre module ResourceLoader, dans la propriété &lt;code&gt;&quot;messages&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.

L'utilisation détaillée des fonctions des messages en PHP et en JavaScript se trouve sur {{ll|Manual:Messages API}}.
'''C'est une page de documentation importante, et vous devriez l'avoir lue AVANT d'écrire le code qui utilise des messages.'''

{{anchor|Message sources}}
== Sources des messages ==

Le code recherche les messages système depuis les sources suivantes :
* Espace de noms MediaWiki. Ceci permet aux wikis d’adopter ou de remplacer tous leurs messages, quand les messages standards ne conviennent pas ou ne sont pas souhaités.
** MediaWiki:''Message-key'' est le message par défaut,
** MediaWiki:''Message-key''/''language-code'' est le message à utiliser quand un utilisateur a sélectionné une autre langue que la langue par défaut du wiki.
* A partir des fichiers de messages :
** Le noyau MediaWiki lui-même et la plupart des [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All extensions|extensions]] les plus maintenues actuellement utilisent un fichier par langue, appelé &lt;code&gt;''zyx''.json&lt;/code&gt;, où ''zyx'' est le code de la langue.
** Certaines extensions plus anciennes utilisent un fichier de messages combiné contenant tous les messages dans toutes les langues, habituellement appelé &lt;code&gt;''MyExtensionName''.i18n.php&lt;/code&gt;.
** De nombreux wikis de la Fondation Wikimedia accèdent à certains messages de l’extension {{ll|Extension:WikimediaMessages|nsp=0}}, leur permettant de standardiser les messages au travers des wikis WMF sans les imposer sur chaque installation de MediaWiki.
** Seules quelques extensions utilisent d’autres techniques.
{{anchor|Caching}}

== Mise en cache ==
Les messages système sont l'un des composants les plus significatifs de MediaWiki, principalement parce qu'ils sont utilisés à chaque requête web.
Les fichiers PHP des messages sont longs, parce qu'ils contiennent des milliers de clés de messages et les valeurs.
Charger ces fichiers (et éventuellement les fichiers multiples si la langue de l'utilisateur est différente de celle du contenu) a un coût énorme sur la mémoire et les performances.
Un système agressif de mise en cache par niveau est utilisé pour réduire cet impact sur les performances.

MediaWiki possède beaucoup de mécanismes de mise en cache intégrés, ce qui rend le code quelque peu difficile à comprendre.
Depuis la 1.16 il existe un nouveau système qui met en cache les messages soit dans les fichiers [[cdb]] ou dans la base de donnérs.
Les messages personnalisés sont mis en cache dans le système de fichiers et dans [[memcached]] (ou équivalent), en fonction de la configuration.

La table ci-dessous donne un aperçu des paramètres concernés :

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!colspan=&quot;2&quot; rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| Emplacement du cache
!colspan=&quot;4&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf}}
|-
! 'store' =&gt; 'db'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;br /&gt;(par défaut) !! 'store' =&gt; 'files'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'array'&lt;br /&gt;''(expérimental depuis MW ≥ 1.26)''
|-
!rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}
! = false&lt;br /&gt;(par défaut)
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || ''erreur'' (chemin non défini) || ''erreur'' (chemin non défini)
|-
! = ''path''
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || système local de fichiers (CDB) || système local de fichiers (CDB) || système local de fichiers (tableau PHP)
|}
{{MW version|version=1.27.0|version2=1.27.2|gerrit change=Id3e2d2b18ddb423647bf2e893bcf942722c0e097}}
Dans MediaWiki 1.27.0 et 1.27.1, l'auto-détection a été modifiée pour favoriser l'archivage du fichier.
Dans le cas &lt;code&gt;'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;/code&gt; (cas par défaut), le fichier stocké est utilisé avec le chemin de {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}.
Si cette valeur n'est pas initialisée (cas par défaut), on utilise un répertoire temporaire déterminé par le système d'exploiration.
Si le répertoire temporaire ne peut être identifié le dépôt de la base de données est utilisé comme solution de repli.
Ceci a été annulé dans 1.27.2 et 1.28.0 à cause des conflits d'accès aux fichiers sur les hôtes partagés et des problèmes de sécurité (voir [[:phab:T127127|T127127]] et [[:phab:T161453|T161453]]).

=== Trace des fonctions ===
Pour mieux décrire visuellement les niveaux du cache, il existe une fonction qui trace en marche arrière les méthodes qui ont été appelées pour récupérer les messages.
Voir les sections ci-dessous pour l'explication de chaque niveau.

* &lt;code&gt;Message::fetchMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;MessageCache::get()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;Language::getMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalisationCache::getSubitem()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LCStore::get()&lt;/code&gt;

=== Cache des messages ===
La classe &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; est le niveau supérieur de la mise en cache des messages.
Elle est appelée de la classe Message et renvoie le contenu final brut des messages.
Ce niveau gère la logique suivante :

* Vérifier les recouvrements de messages dans la base de données
* Mettre en cache dans {{ll|memcached}} ou dans ce qu'il y a dans {{ll|Manual:$wgMessageCacheType|$wgMessageCacheType}},  les messages qui se recouvrent.
* Résoudre le reste de la séquence de [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|repli des langues]]

Le dernier point est important.
Le [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|repli de langue]] est une solution de secours qui permet à MediaWiki de choisir une autre langue si le message n'existe pas dans la langue demandée.
Comme indiqué dans la section suivante, la plupart des replis de langue se produisent au niveau le plus bas.
Néanmoins seul le niveau &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; vérifie qu'il n'y a pas de recouvrement de messages dans la base de données.
Ainsi c'est ici qu'est faite l'intégration de messages redéfinis, de la base de données vers la base arrière.
Si la base de données n'est pas utilisée, ce niveau entier peut être désactivé.

=== Cache d'internationalisation ===

Voir {{ll|Manual:LocalisationCache.php|LocalisationCache.php}}

=== Classe LCStore ===
La classe &lt;code&gt;LCStore&lt;/code&gt; est plutôt une implémentation d'arrière plan utilisée par la classe LocalisationCache pour mettre en cache les messages et les récupérer.
Comme la classe &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; utilisée pour la mise en cache générale dans MediaWiki, il existe différents types de caches (configurés en utilisant [[Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf]]) :
* ''db'' (par défaut) - cache des messages de la base de données
* ''file'' (par défaut si &lt;code&gt;$wgCacheDirectory&lt;/code&gt; est défini) - utilise [[w:cdb (software)|CDB]] pour mettre en cache dans un fichier local
* ''accel'' - utilise [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|APC]] ou un autre cache de code d'opération pour ranger les données

L'option ''file'' est utilisée par la Fondation Wikimedia, et elle est recommandée parce qu'elle est plus rapide que des accès à la base de données et plus fiable que le cache APC, particulièrement depuis que APC est devenu incompatible avec les versions 5.5 et ultérieures de PHP.

{{anchor|Adding new messages}}
== Ajouter de nouveaux messages ==

=== Choisir la clé du message ===

Voir aussi :
{{ll|Manual:Coding conventions#System messages}}

La clé du message doit être globalement unique.
Cela comprend le noyau de MediaWiki avec toutes les extensions et les habillages.

Pour le nom des messages, utilisez les minuscules, les nombres et les tirets '-'; la plupart des autres caractères sont parmi les moins pratiques et ceux qui ne fonctionnent pas du tout.
D'après la convention MediaWiki, le premier caractère n'est pas sensible à la casse; ce qui n'est pas le cas des caractères qui suivent.

Pour le nommage, veuillez suivre les conventions globales ou locales.
Pour les extensions, utilisez un préfixe standard, de préférence le nom de l'extension en minuscules, suivi d'un tiret « - ».
Les exceptions sont :

; Les messages utilisés par l'API : ils doivent commencer par &lt;code&gt;apihelp-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apiwarn-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apierror-&lt;/code&gt;. Placez le préfixe de l'extension à la suite de ce préfixe. (Notez que ces messages doivent être dans un fichier séparé, habituellement sous [[phab:source/mediawiki/browse/master/includes/api/i18n/|includes/i18/api]].)
; Les messages liés aux connexions : ils doivent commencer par &lt;code&gt;logentry-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;log-name-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;log-description&lt;/code&gt;.
; Les droits utilisateur : la clé du nom à droite, tel qu'il est affiché sur Special:ListGroupRights doit commencer par &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt;. Le nom de l'action qui complète la phrase « {{int|Permissionserrorstext-withaction|unused}} » doit commencer par &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt;.
; Balises de version : Les balises de révision :  doivent commencer par &lt;code&gt;tag-&lt;/code&gt;.
; Titres des pages spéciales : Les titres des pages spéciales : doivent commencer par &lt;code&gt;special-&lt;/code&gt;.

=== Autres éléments à prendre en compte pour créer des messages ===

# Assurez-vous de traiter correctement le message (analyse syntaxique, substitution des &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, échappements pour le HTML, etc.)
# Si votre message fait partie du noyau, il doit être ajouté habituellement à &lt;code&gt;languages/i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt;, bien que certains composants tels que Installer, les balises EXIF, et ApiHelp possèdent leurs propres fichiers de messages.
# Si votre message appartient à une extension, ajoutez-le au fichier &lt;code&gt;i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt; ou au fichier &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; dans le sous-répertoire ad'hoc. En particulier les messages d'API qui ne sont vus que des développeurs et non pas par la plupart des utilisateurs finaux, se trouvent habituellement dans un fichier séparé, tel que &lt;code&gt;i18n/api/en.json&lt;/code&gt;. Si une extension possède un grand nombre de messages, vous pouvez créer des sous-répertoires sous  &lt;code&gt;i18n&lt;/code&gt;. L'ensemble des répertoires de messages, y compris le répertoire &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt; par défaut, doivent être listés dans la section &lt;code&gt;MessagesDirs&lt;/code&gt; de &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; ou dans la variable {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}}.
# Arrêtez-vous et analysez les mots du message. Est-ce suffisamment clair ? Est-ce que cela peut prêter à confusion ? Demandez les commentaires des autres développeurs ou des traducteurs si possible. Suivez les [[#Internationalisation hints|directives de traduction]].
# Ajoutez la documentation à &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; dans le même répertoire.
# La séquence des messages dans le fichier doit suivre exactement les fonctions de votre projet. Regroupez ensemble les messages d'une même fonctionnalité. Cela aide les traducteurs à rester concentrés, efficaces et cohérents.
# Placez au début du fichier les messages que vous pensez être les plus basiques et ceux utilisés le plus souvent, et plutôt à la fin ceux qui sont plus rares et plus éléborés techniquement.


== Messages à ne pas traduire ==

# '''Ignored''' - les messages ignorés sont ceux qui n'existent que dans le fichier des messages en anglais. Certains messages n'ont pas besoin d'être traduits car ils référencent simplement d'autres messages ou des fonctions indépendantes de la langue, ''par exemple'' un message de « &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; » .
# '''Optional''' - les messages facultatifs peuvent être traduits seulement s'ils sont modifiés dans la langue cible.

Pour marquer de tels messages :

* utilisez le modèle dans le message de documentation &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; qui est respectivement :
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Notranslate|notranslate]]}}&lt;/code&gt; ou
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Optional|optional]]}}&lt;/code&gt;;
* indiquez à l'extension {{ll|Extension:Translate|nsp=0}} utilisée sur {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} ce qu'il faut faire avec les messages en les soumettant dans un listing de corrections (voir aussi le {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Group configuration/MediaWiki|document de configuration globale}}) :
** pour le noyau, dans {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/MediaWiki.yaml}} ajoutez les clés des messages
**# sous &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;ignored:&lt;/code&gt; ou
**# sous &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;optional:&lt;/code&gt;;
** pour les extensions, dans {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/mediawiki-extensions.txt}} ajoutez une ligne sous le nom de l'extension ainsi :
**# &lt;code&gt;ignored = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt; or
**# &lt;code&gt;optional = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt;.

== Supprimer les messages existants ==
Supprimez-les de &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; et de &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;.
Ne vous préoccupez pas des autres langues.
Les mises à jour à partir de {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} les gèreront automatiquement.

En plus, vérifiez si le message apparaît quelque part dans la configuration translatewiki, par exemple dans  la liste des messages optionnels ou celle des messages les plus utilisés (un simple ''git grep'' est suffisant).
Supprimez-les de ces listes si nécessaire.

== Modifier les messages existants ==

# Pensez à mettre à jour la [[#Message documentation|documentation des messages]].
# Mettez à jour les clés des messages si les anciennes traductions ne correspondent plus à la nouvelle signification. Cela comprend également les modifications dans le traitement des messages (analyse syntaxique, échappement, paramètres, etc.). Améliorer le contenu d'un message sans le modifier techniquement n'est habituellement pas un motif pour en changer la clé. Sur ''translatewiki.net'', les messages seront marqués 'Désuets' afin d'être pris en compte par les traducteurs. Il n'est pas nécessaire de contacter l'équipe i18n ni de faire une demande de support pour modifier la clé d'un message. Néanmoins, si vous avez des conditions particulières ou des questions, posez-les sur {{irc|translatewiki}} ou sur les [[translatewiki:Support|pages du support]] de {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}.
# Si l'extension est prise en charge par {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}, ne modifiez que le message source en anglais et / ou la clé, ainsi que l'entrée qui l'accompagne dans &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;. Si besoin, l'équipe translatewiki.net fera la mise à jour des traductions en les marquant 'désuètes' et en nettoyant le fichier ou en renommant les clés là où c'est possible. Cela s'applique également lorsque vous ne modifiez que des éléments tels que les balises HTML que vous pouvez mettre à jour dans les autres langues sans avoir besoin de les connaître. La plupart des ces actions se déroulent dans [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]] et se retrouveront dans Git le lendemain.

{{anchor|Message documentation}}
== Documentation des messages ==
La documentation des messages utilise le code de pseudo-langage &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt;.
C'est l'un des codes ISO 639 réservé pour l'utilisation personnelle.
Là, nous ne gardons pas les traductions de chaque message, mais nous rassemblons les phrases en anglais ''concernant chaque message'' : pour indiquer où il est utilisé,  pour donner des indications sur la manière de le traduire, pour lister et décrire ses paramètres et le relier aux autres messages avec lesquels il a un rapport, etc.
Dans [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]], ces informations sont affichées aux traducteurs lors de la traduction des messages.

Les programmeurs doivent documenter soigneusement chaque message.
La documentation du message est une ressource essentielle – pas seulemnt pour les traducteurs, mais pour tous les mainteneurs du module.
A chaque fois qu'un message est ajouté au logiciel, ''il faut'' ajouter aussi son entrée &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; correspondante; les versions qui ne le font pas sont marquées « &lt;code&gt;V-1&lt;/code&gt; » jusqu'à ce que la documentation soit ajoutée.

La documentation dans les fichiers &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; doit être mise à jour directement lors de l'ajout de nouveaux messages, ou lors de la modification d'un message existant en anglais qui en implique la réactualisation, par exemple pour l'ajout ou la suppression de paramètres.
Dans les autres cas, la documentation doit habituellement être mise à jour dans translatewiki.
Chaque chaîne de documentation est accessible avec &lt;nowiki&gt;https://translatewiki.net/wiki/MediaWiki:&lt;/nowiki&gt;''message-key''&lt;nowiki&gt;/qqq&lt;/nowiki&gt;, comme s'il s'agissait d'une traduction.
Ces modifications seront exportées vers les répertoires source en même temps que les traductions.

Les informations utiles que vous devez faire figurer dans la documentation comprennent :

# la manière de traiter le message (analyse syntaxique, échappement, texte brut).
# le type utilisé pour les paramètres avec des exemples de valeurs.
# les endroits où le message est utilisé (pages, positions dans l'interface utilisateur).
# la manière dont le message est utilisé et où (un titre de page, le texte d'un bouton, ''etc.'').
# quels autres messages sont utilisés avec le message courant, ou à quels autres messages celui-ci fait référence.
# tout autre complément qui précise ce message affiché dans son contexte, mais pas quand il est traité isolément (ce qui est le cas pour la traduction).
# si nécessaire, la grammaire à préciser. Par exemple, « open » en anglais désigne à la fois un verbe et un adjectif. Dans beaucoup d'autres langues les mots sont différents et il est impossible de traduire correctement si l'on ne sait pas de quoi il s'agit.
# les adjectifs qui décrivent des choses, tels que « désactivé » , « ouvert » ou « bloqué », doivent ''toujours'' indiquer à quoi ils se rapportent. Dans beaucoup de langues les adjectifs doivent avoir le genre du nom auquel ils se rapportent. Il est aussi possible que différentes sortes de choses aient besoin de différents adjectifs.
# indiquer si le message a des propriétés spéciales par exemple s'il s'agit d'un nom de page, ou s'il ne doit pas être traduit directement mais adapté à la culture ou au projet.
# indiquer si le message apparaît avec d'autres messages, par exemple dans une liste ou un menu. Les termes ou la grammaire des mots devraient alors être les mêmes que celle des messages voisins. De même, les éléments d'une liste doivent être en rapport avec la tête de liste.
# indiquer les parties du message qui ne doivent pas être traduites, comme les noms des espaces de noms génériques, les URLs ou les balises.
# expliquer les mots potentiellement pas clairs, par exemple les abbréviations, comme « CTA », ou le jargon spécifique, comme « template », « suppress » ou « stub ». (Notez qu'il vaut mieux éviter de tels mots en premier !)
# Les captures d'écran sont très utiles. Ne découpez rien – une image de l'écran complet avec le message affiché nous donne le contexte complet et peut être réutilisée pour plusieurs messages.

Quelques points supplémentaires :

* Rappelez-vous que très très souvent les traducteurs traduisent les messages sans être au courant du logiciel.
* Dans pratiquement tous les cas, les traducteurs n'ont aucune information du contexte, ni du module, ni des autres messages qui vont avec.
* Le plus souvent, il est inutile de reformuler simplement le message dans la documentation.
* N'utilisez pas le jargon des développeurs comme « nav » ou « comps ».
* Envisagez l'écriture d'un [[betawiki:Terminology#Terminologies|glossaire]] pour les termes techniques utilisés dans votre module. Si vous le faites, créez un lien dessus pour le référencer dans la documentation des messages.

Vous pouvez référencer d'autres messages en utilisant leur {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;{{((}}msg-mw{{!}}message key{{))}}&lt;/code&gt;|clé de message}}.
Faites ceci si certaines parties de messages sont issues d'autres messages (quand cela n'est pas possible autrement), ou lorsque certains messages sont affichés ensemble ou dans un même contexte.

translatewiki.net dispose de quelques modèles par défaut pour la documentation :

* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-action|doc-action]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pour les messages &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-right|doc-right]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pour les messages &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-group|doc-group]]|[...]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pour les messages concernant les groupes d'utilisateurs  (&lt;code&gt;group&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;member&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;page&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;js&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;css&lt;/code&gt;)
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-accesskey|doc-accesskey]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pour les messages &lt;code&gt;accesskey-&lt;/code&gt;

Voir les pages des modèles pour plus d'information.

{{anchor|Internationalisation hints}}
== Conseils pour internationaliser ==
En plus de la [[#Message documentation|documentation]], les traducteurs demandent aux développeurs de prendre en compte certains points afin de faciliter leur travail et le rendre plus efficace et permettre ainsi un bonne et fidèle traduction dans toutes les langues.
Même si vous n'avez qu'à ajouter ou modifier les messages en anglais, ne perdez pas de vue les besoins de toutes les langues. Chaque message est traduit dans plus de 300 langues et ceci doit se faire de la meilleure manière possible.
L'implémentation correcte de ces points vous aidera souvent aussi à mieux écrire les messages en anglais.

[[Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Help_and_contact_info|Localisation#Help_and_contact_info]] liste les endroits principaux où vous pouvez trouverl'assistance de personnes expérimentées connaissant i18n.
=== Utilisez correctement les paramètres des messages et les sélecteurs ===

C'est un prérequis pour l'écriture correcte de vos messages.

=== Evitez la réutilisation des messages ===
Les traducteurs ne recommandent pas la réutilisation des messages.
Ceci peut sembler contre-intuitif, car le fait de copier et dupliquer du code est habituellement une mauvaise pratique, mais dans le cas des messages sytème c'est souvent nécessaire.
Bien que deux concepts puissent être exprimés par le même mot en anglais, cela ne signifie pas nécessairement qu'il peuvent être traduits par le même mot en fonction de la langue.
« OK » est un bon exemple : en anglais ceci est utilisé pour le texte d'un bouton générique, mais dans certaines langues on préfère avoir un texte qui soit en phase avec l'opération que le bouton réalise.
Un autre exemple est pratiquement n'importe quel adjectif : un mot tel que « multiple » varie selon le genre dans différentes langues, donc vous ne pouvez pas le réutiliser pour décrire plusieurs choses différentes, et vous devez créer plusieurs messages distincts.

Si vous ajoutez plusieurs messages identiques, ajoutez également la documentation correspondante pour décrire le contexte des différences.
Ne vous préoccupez pas du travail supplémentaire des traducteurs.
La mémoire de traduction aide beaucoup en cela en gardant la souplesse d'avoir différentes traductions si nécessaire.

{{anchor|Avoid_patchwork_messages|Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages}}
=== Eviter les messages fragmentés ou sous forme de 'patchwork' ===
Les langues possèdent différentes organisations des mots et des règles grammaticales et syntaxiques complexes.
Il est très difficile de traduire des messages de type « lego », c'est à dire des messages formés à partir de plusieurs morceaux de texte, éventuellement avec des indirections (appelés aussi « concatenations de chaînes » ).

Il est préférable que chaque message soit une phrase complète.
Plusieurs phrases peuvent habituellement être combinées beaucoup plus facilement à l'intérieur d'un bloc de texte si besoin.
Si vous souhaitez combiner plusieurs chaînes en un seul message, passez-les en paramètre, afin que les traducteurs puissent les mettre dans l'ordre correct dans leur langue, au moment de la traduction.

==== Messages se référençant mutuellement ====
Une exception à la règle concerne les messages qui se référencent mutuellement : 'entrez le nom de l'auteur original dans le champs nommé &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; et cliquez sur &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:proceed}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; pour finaliser'.
Ceci rend le message cohérent lorsqu'un développeur logiciel ou un opérateur du wiki change le ''nom'' du message ou modifie ce dernier ultérieurement.
Sans l'astuce du &lt;code&gt;int&lt;/code&gt;, les développeurs et les opérateurs devraient connaître tous les messages liés qui devraient être corrigés dès que l'un d'eux est modifié.

=== N'utilisez pas les termes et les modèles spécifiques à un projet particulier ===
MediaWiki est utilisé par diverses personnes à l'intérieur du mouvement Wikimedia et à l'extérieur également.
Bien qu'à l'origine il a été conçu pour une encyclopédie, il est maintenant utilisé pour toutes sortes de contenus.
C'est pourquoi il faut utiliser des termes généraux.
Par exemple, évitez les termes comme « article », et utilisez « page » à la place, à moins que vous soyez absolument sûr que la fonctionnalité que vous développez ne sera utilisée que sur un site où les pages seront appelées « article ».
N'utilisez pas « village pump » car c'est le nom de la page communautaire de la Wikipedia anglophone, mais plutôt à la place, un nom générique tel que « page de discussion » de la communauté.

N'espérez pas qu'un modèle particulier soit présent sur tous les wikis.
Les modèles sont locaux aux wikis.
Ceci s'applique à la fois aux messages source et à leurs traductions.
Si un message utilise des modèles, ils ne fonctionneront que s'ils ont été créés sur CHACUN des wikis où la fonctionnalité est déployée.
Mieux vaut éviter à tout prix l'utilisation des modèles dans les messages.
Si vous devez absolument les utiliser, documentez cela clairement dans la documentation du message et dans les instructions d'installation de l'extension.

=== Séparer l'heure de la date dans les phrases ===
Certaines langues doivent insérer quelque chose entre la date et l'heure, qui dépend grammatiquement des autres mots de la phrase.
Ainsi on ne pourra pas combiner la date et l'heure.
D'autres personnes pourront trouver que la combinaison est pratique, ainsi la meilleure façon est habituellement de passer trois valeurs de paramètres (date/heure, date, heure) dans de tels cas et pour chaque traduction, de laisser inutilisées soit la première valeur soit les deux dernières selon les besoins.

=== Évitez &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; dans les messages ===
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; présente plusieurs désavantages.
Cela peut être ce que l'on veut (un acronyme, mot, courte phrase, ''etc.'') et en fonction de la langue, utiliser &lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Messages_API#…on use context inside sentences via GRAMMAR|&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/code&gt; sur chaque occurrence.
Cela est indépendant du fait que chaque message qui a &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; nécessite une relecture dans la plupart des langues du wiki pour chaque nouveau wiki sur lequel votre code est installé.
Dans la plupart des cas, quand il n'y a pas de configuration générale &lt;code&gt;GRAMMAR&lt;/code&gt; pour une langue, les opérateurs wiki devront ajouter ou modifier le code PHP de sorte à ce que &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; fonctionne pour &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; .
Ceci nécessite à la fois de plus grandes compétences et plus de compréhension qu'autrement.
Il est plus pratique d'avoir des références génériques comme « ce wiki » .
Cela n'empêche pas les installations de modifier localement ces messages pour utiliser &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, mais au moins elles n'y sont pas obligées et peuvent retarder leur adaptation après que le wiki soit actif et utilisé.

=== Eviter les références au rendu visuel et aux positions ===
Ce que vous voyez dépend de l'habillage que vous utilisez.
Le plus souvent, la présentation des écrans pour les langues s'écrivant de gauche à droite est mirrorée comparativement à celle pour les langues s'écrivant de droite à gauche, mais cela n'est pas toujours vrai, et pour certaines langues et certains wiki, pas complètement.
Les équipements tenus à la main, les écrans étroits et autres peuvent afficher des blocs les uns au dessous des autres pouvant se retrouver côte à côte sur des écrans plus larges.
Comme les scripts JavaScript et les gadgets du site - tout comme ceux de l'utilisateur - peuvent et cachent effectivement des morceaux ou déplacent partout les éléments et d'une manière imprévisible, il n'y a pas de manière fiable pour prédire ce que devient l'affichage final.

C'est très mauvais de lier l'information à afficher aux langues du contenu, parce que la langue de l'interface utilisateur peut ne pas correspondre à la langue du contenu de la page, et que l'affichage peut résulter d'un mélange des deux, en fonction des circonstances.
Les agents utilisateur non visuels tels que les lecteurs d'écran acoustiques ou les autres équipements auxilliaires ne connaissent même pas la notion d'affichage.
Ainsi, dans la majorité des cas vous ne devez pas faire référence aux positions visuelles de l'affichage bien que les termes sémantiques de celui-ci peuvent encore être utilisés (« étapes précédentes du formulaire », ''etc.'').

MediaWiki ne prend pas en charge l'affichage de messages différents ou des fragments de messages basés sur la directionalité courante de l'interface (voir [[phab:T30997|T30997]]).

Les navigateurs futurs ainsi que le support de MediaWiki pour l'écriture de haut en bas d'Orient et d'Asie du Nord &lt;ref&gt;http://dev.w3.org/csswg/css3-writing-modes/&lt;/ref&gt; feront que l'affichage sur écran sera plus imprévisible, avec au moins 8 affichages possibles (position de départ à gauche ou à droite, en haut ou en bas, en fonction de là où on commence).

=== Eviter les références aux couleurs de l'écran ===
La couleur dans laquelle est faite le rendu dépend de plusieurs facteurs y compris de l'habillage :  les scripts JavaScript et les gadgets du site et ceux de l'utilisateur, ainsi que l'agent utilisateur local la réécrasent pour des raisons d'accessibilité ou de limitation technologique.
Les agents utilisateur non visuels tels que les lecteurs d'écran acoustiques ou les autres équipements auxilliaires ne connaissent même pas la notion de couleur.
Ainsi, vous ne devez pas évoquer les couleurs d'écran.
(De même vous ne devez pas vous fier à la couleur uniquement comme mécanisme pour informer l'utilisateur de l'état, pour la même raison).

=== Avoir les éléments des messages avant et après chaque champ de saisie ===

:''Ceci est une règle suggérée et elle n'est pas encore devenue un standard du développement MediaWiki.''

Alors que l'anglais permet l'utilisation efficace de l'interrogation sous la forme élément-deuxPoints-champsD'entrée, beaucoup d'autres langues ne le font pas.
Même en anglais, vous souhaitez souvent utiliser « Distance: ___ mètres » plutôt que « Distance (en mètres): ___ ».
En laissant de côté les éléments {{tag|textarea|open}}, vous devez penser à chaque champs d'entrée en respectant le motif « Distance: ___ mètres » . Donc :

* créez deux messages, même si le 2&lt;sup&gt;nd&lt;/sup&gt; est vide en anglais et certaines autres langues, ou
* permettez l'insertion des champs de saisie en utilisant les paramètres &lt;code&gt;$i&lt;/code&gt; .
=== Evitez le marquage HTML non traduit dans les messages ===
Les balises HTML qui n'ont pas besoin d'être traduites, comme les {{tag|div|open}}s englobants, les règles supérieures ou inférieures et similaires, ne doivent habituellement pas faire partie du message.
Ils apportent une surcharge inutile aux traducteurs, augmentent la taille des fichiers, et créent le risque d'être modifiés accidentellement ou d'être sautés par le processus de traduction.
De manière générale, évitez le HTML directement dans les messages si vous le pouvez.

=== Les messages sont souvent plus longs que vous  le pensez ! ===

En regardant un peu les fichiers des messages des langues étrangères, vous ne trouverez presque jamais des messages plus courts que les messages chinois, rarement plus courts que les messages anglais, et habituellement plus longs que les messages anglais.

Particulièrement dans les formulaires, devant les champs de saisie, les messages anglais ont tendance à être laconiques et courts.
Souvent ceci n'est pas conservé dans les traductions.
Le vocabulaire technique présent en anglais peut être absent dans les autres langues et demander l'utilisation de plusieurs mots ou même des phrases complètes pour expliquer certains concepts.
Par exemple le message anglais « TSV file: » pourrait devoir être traduit dans une langue in extenso :
&lt;blockquote&gt;''Veuillez entrer ici un nom qui représente une collection de données informatiques composée d'une série organisée séquentiellement de lignes dactylographiées qui elles-même sont organisées comme une série de champs informels chacunes, où les champs d'information sont fermés, séparés chacuns par un signe unique équivalent à celui qui fait déplacer le charriot d'une machine à écrire vers la position suivante prédéfinie. Commençons : _____ (merci)''&lt;/blockquote&gt;
C'est vrai que c'est un exemple extrême mais cela vous donne une idée.
Imaginez cette phrase en colonne dans laquelle chaque mot est seul sur une ligne, et que le champs d'entrée est centré verticalement dans la colonne suivante. :-(

=== Eviter d'utiliser des mots très proches, similaires, ou identiques pour désigner des choses ou des concepts différents ===
Par exemple, les pages peuvent avoir d'anciennes ''révisions'' (correspondant à une date spécifique, une heure et un contenu), qui comprennent les ''versions'' passées de ladite page.
Vous pouvez utiliser les mots ''revision'' et ''version'' de manière interchangeable.
Un problème apparait lorsque les pages versionnées sont relues, et que la révision, ''c'est à dire'' le processus de relecture, est également mentionné.
Cela ne pose pas de problème particulier lorsque les deux synonymes de la « révision » ont des traductions différentes.
Néanmoins il ne faut pas vous fier à cela.
Il vaut mieux éviter l'utilisation simultanée de ''révision'' avec ''version'', pour éviter d'apporter la confusion.

=== Les mots de base peuvent avoir des connotations imprévues, ou ne pas exister du tout ===
Certains mots sont difficiles à traduire à cause de leur utilisation spécique dans MediaWiki.
Certains peuvent [[#Expect untranslated words|ne pas être traductibles du tout]].
Par exemple le mot « utilisateur  » n'existe pas dans plusieurs langues pour désigner « quelqu'un qui se sert de quelque chose  ».
De la même façon, dans le dialecte [[:en:Colognian language|kölsch]] les mots anglais « namespace » (espace de noms) et « apartment » (appartement) se traduisent avec le même mot.
Aussi, en kölsch on dit « corroborator et participant » (collaborateur et participant) en un seul mot car toute référence à « utiliser » impliquerait trop systématiquement « abuser ».
Le terme « ferme de wikis » (wiki farm) est traduit comme « étable pleine de wikis » car si on utilise « ferme » simplement on est en contradiction avec les mots de la langue, on ne comprend pas, ''etc.''.

{{anchor|Expect untranslated words}}
=== Attendez-vous à rencontrer des mots non traduits ===

:''Ceci est une règle suggérée et elle n'est pas encore devenue un standard du développement MediaWiki.''

Il n'est pas rare que les noms propres, les noms des balises, ''etc.'' et les termes informatique en anglais  
ne soient pas traduits, et sont à la place pris comme des mots d'emprunt ou des mots étrangers.
Dans le dernier cas, certains traducteurs particulièrement fastidieux peuvent marquer de tels mots comme s'ils appartenaient à une autre langue avec le balisage HTML, comme &lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot;&gt; … &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;.

Vous pouvez vous assurer que votre gestionnaire de sortie des messages laisse inchangé un tel balisage, malgré les risques évidents de sécurité.

=== Permettre le marquage explicatif en ligne ===

:''Ceci est une règle suggérée et elle n'est pas encore devenue un standard du développement MediaWiki.''

Il existe quelque fois dans les langues cible des abbréviations, des termes techniques ou des mots généralement ambigus qui ne peuvent pas être immédiatement compris des nouveaux arrivants mais qui sont évidents pour les utilisateurs expérimentés d'ordinateurs .
Pour éviter l'encombrement de l'écran par de longues explications et ne pas laisser les nouveaux arrivants bloqués, les traducteurs peuvent choisir d'ajouter des explications comme les annotations {{tag|abbr|open}}, à la manière des navigateurs lorsque vous les survolez avec la souris.

Par exemple, le message du noyau de MediaWiki &lt;code&gt;exif-orientation-8&lt;/code&gt; concernant la rotation d'image, qui en anglais est simplement « &lt;code&gt;Rotated 90° CW&lt;/code&gt; », en arabe marocain est traduit par :

:&lt;code lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &amp;lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&amp;lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/code&gt;

donne :

:&lt;span lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/span&gt;

en expliquant l'abbréviation de « counter clockwise » (sens de rotation rétrograde) lorsque c'est nécessaire.

Vous pouvez vous assurer que votre gestionnaire de sortie des messages laisse inchangé un tel balisage, même si le message original ne l'utilise pas.

=== Utiliser les balises {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}}, et {{tag|kbd|open}} à bon escient ===
Lorsqu'on parle de paramètres techniques, de valeurs, ou d'entrées au clavier, marquez les respectivement en tant que tel en utilisant les balises HTML {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}}, ou {{tag|kbd|open}}.
Ainsi, ils sont typographiquement mis en valeur par rapport au texte normal.
Cela clarifie leur sens pour les lecteurs, évitant la confusion, les erreurs et les mauvaises interprétations.
Vérifiez que votre gestionnaire de messages permet un tel marquage.

=== Symboles, deux points, crochets, ''etc.'' faisant partie des messages ===
Beaucoup de symboles sont localisables également. Certains scripts utilisent d'autres types de crochets que ceux des scripts latins.
Un deux-points peut ne pas être approprié après une étiquette ou une invite de saisie dans certaines langues.
L'inclusion de ces symboles dans les messages aide à faire des traductions meilleures et moins anglo-centrées, et réduit également la taille du code.

Il existe par exemple différentes conventions pour les apostrophes utilisées en « norvégien », » suédois», »danois«, „allemand“, et 「japonais」.&lt;ref&gt;[[w:Quotation_mark#Summary_table|types d'apostrophes]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Si vous avez besoin d'envelopper le texte entre des  parenthèses localisées, des crochets, ou des guillemets, vous pouvez utiliser les messages  &lt;code&gt;parentheses&lt;/code&gt; {{int:parentheses}} ou &lt;code&gt;brackets&lt;/code&gt; {{int:brackets}} ou &lt;code&gt;quotation-marks&lt;/code&gt; {{int:quotation-marks}} de la manière suivante :
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php&gt;wfMessage( 'parentheses' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside parentheses */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'brackets' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside brackets */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'quotation-marks' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside quotation marks */ )-&gt;escaped()&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== N'espérez pas que les symboles et la ponctuation survivent à la traduction ===
Les langues écrites de droite à gauche (contrairement à l'anglais) permutent habituellement les symboles des flèches utilisées pour les liens « suivant » et « précédent », et leur placement relativement au texte du message peut ou ne peut pas être permuté également.
Vous pouvez traduire les points de suspension par « ''etc.'' », ou avec des mots.
Les points d'interrogation, d'exclamation, et les deux-points seront mis ailleurs qu'en fin de phrase, ou pas utilisés, ou utilisés deux fois.
Comme conséquence, ils doivent toujours faire partie de votre message et ne tentez pas de les insérer par programme.

=== Utiliser les arrêts complets ===
Terminez '''absolument''' les phrases normales avec des caractères d'arrêt.
C’est souvent la seule indication qu’a le traducteur pour savoir qu’il ne s’agit pas de titres ni d’éléments de liste qui nécessiteraient une traduction différente.

=== Ancre des liens ===

==== Wikicode des liens ====

L'ancre des liens peut être déclarée dans les messages à travers différentes techniques :

# via le wikicode : …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;''une page wiki''|''ancre''&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…,
# via le wikicode : …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;[''une-url'' ''ancre'']&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…, or
#le texte de l'ancre est un message appartenant à l'espace de noms MediaWiki. ''Evitez-le !''

Le dernier cas est souvent difficile voire impossible à gérer pour les traducteurs; il faut [[#Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages|éviter les messages fragmentés et ne pas les assembler en 'patchwork']] ici également.
Assurez-vous que « &lt;code&gt;some-url&lt;/code&gt; » ne contient pas d'espaces.

==== Utiliser des ancres ayant des noms significatifs ====
Faites attention à votre texte.
Les ancres des liens jouent un rôle important pour l'accès aux pages du moteus de recherche – à la fois les mots liés ainsi que l'ancre cible.
Assurez-vous aussi que l'ancre décrit bien la page cible.
Évitez toujours les mots communs et génériques.
Par exemple, « Cliquez ici » est absolument interdit &lt;ref&gt;http://www.w3.org/QA/Tips/noClickHere&lt;/ref&gt; car les pages cibles ne concernent pratiquement jamais « Cliquez ici ».
Il ne faut pas non plus mettre cela dans des phrases entouré de liens car « ici » n'était pas l'endroit à cliquer.
A la place, utilisez des mots représentant des actions précises pour dire ce qu'obtiendra l'utilisateur en ouvrant le lien, comme  « Vous pouvez [[Special:Upload|téléverser un fichier]] si vous le souhaitez. »

Voir aussi ''[http://www.nngroup.com/articles/using-link-titles-to-help-users-predict-where-they-are-going/ Aider les utilisateurs à prédire où ils vont]'', la [[w:Mystery meat navigation|navigation en aveugle]], et ''[https://tosbourn.com/click-here/ Les raisons principales de ne pas utiliser 'Cliquez ici' comme texte de lien]''.

=== Eviter le jargon et l'argot ===
Evitez d'utiliser le jargon des développeurs ou des termes trop pointus dans les messages. Essayez d'avoir un langage simple à chaque fois que c'est possible.
Evitez d'utiliser « OK » « avec succès » « échec » « erreur durant », etc., si vous voulez signaler à l'utilisateur que quelque chose est arrivé ou ne s'est pas passé.
Cela vient du point de vue des développeurs qui considèrent tout comme vrai ou faux, mais les utilisateurs veulent savoir habituellement simplement ce qui s'est passé ou ne s'est pas déroulé et ce qu'ils doivent faire dans ces cas (si nécessaire). Donc :

* « Ce fichier a été renommé avec succès » &amp;rarr; « Ce fichier a été renommé »
* « Echec du renommage du fichier » &amp;rarr; -&gt; « Un fichier de même nom existe déjà. Utiliser un nom différent ».

=== Faites attention aux caractères espace et aux retours à la ligne ===
Les messages traduits de MediaWiki sont habituellement traduits sur le wiki, soit lors d'opérations wiki sur les wikis actifs, ou par des traducteurs sur [[translatewiki.net]].
Soyez conscient de la manière dont les espaces vont influer sur les éditeurs (particulièrement s'ils se trouvent au début ou à la fin de votre message) :

* Les espaces et les passages à la ligne (saut de ligne) présents à la fin du message sont toujours enlevés automatiquement par l'éditeur de wikicode. Par conséquent votre message ne doit pas se terminer par un espace ni un passage à la ligne car ils seront perdus quand le message sera modifié sur le wiki.
* Les espaces et les sauts de ligne en tête de message - eux - ne sont pas automatiquement supprimés, mais peuvent disparaître par accident lors des modifications; ceci doit donc être évité.

Commencez et terminez votre message avec du texte actif; si vous avez besoin d'une nouvelle ligne ou d'un saut de paragraphe autour, votre code englobant doit accepter l'ajout au texte renvoyé.

Certains messages ont besoin d'un espace à la fin pour séparer les mots (formé simplement d'un caractère espace dans la plupart des langues).
Pour prendre en charge ces cas d'utilisation, les entités HTML suivantes sont autorisées dans les messages et transformées en caractères actuels, même si autrement le message n'autorisait pas le formatage wikicode ou HTML :&lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/REL1_34/includes/cache/MessageCache.php#L887&lt;/ref&gt;

* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#32;&lt;/code&gt; – espace
* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#160;&lt;/code&gt; – [[w:non-breaking space|espace non sécable]]
* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;shy;&lt;/code&gt; – [[w:fr:Tiretsoft hyphen|trait d'union conditionnel]] (soft hyphen)

Sur une note associée, tout autre élément de syntaxe affecté par les [[Special:MyLanguage/pre-save transforms|transformations avant enregistrement]] doit également ne pas être utilisé dans les messages, car il sera transformé quand le message sera modifié sur le wiki.

=== Utiliser la capitalisation standard ===
La capitalisation indique aux traducteurs ce qu'ils doivent traduire, comme les mots isolés, les listes d'éléments ou les menus, les phrases, ou des phrases complètes.
La capitalisation correcte (standard) peut aussi jouer un rôle dans l'accès à vos pages par les moteurs de recherche.
MediaWiki utilise la [[w:Letter case|casse des phrases]] (''The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog'') dans les messages d'interface.

Rappelez-vous toujours que beaucoup des systèmes d'écriture ne possèdent pas de lettres capitales du tout, et que ceux qui les ont, les utilisent différemment de l'anglais.
C'est pourquoi il ne faut pas utiliser que des majuscules pour l'emphase.
Utilisez en CSS, ou HTML {{tag|em|open}} ou {{tag|strong|open}} pour ceci :

==== Emphase ====
Dans un texte normal l'[[w:Emphasis|emphase]], c'est à dire la mise en valeur comme '''gras''', ''italiques'' ou équivalent, doit faire partie du message lui-même.
Les conventions locales pour la mise en valeur sont souvent différentes, particulièrement pour certains scripts asiatiques qui ont les leurs.
Les traducteurs doivent pouvoir adapter l'emphase à la langue cible et aux domaines.
Essayez d'utiliser « {{tag|em|open}} » et « {{tag|strong|open}} » dans votre interface utilisateur pour permettre le balisage sur la base des langues ou des scripts.

Les affichages modernes des styles anglais et européens utilisent de moins en moins l'emphase.
Utilisez-la néanmoins encore dans votre [[#Message documentation|documentation de message]], car elle peut fournir des informations intéressantes sur la manière de traduire.
L'emphase peut et doit être utilisée dans les autres contextes culturels selon le cas, étant entendu que les traducteurs la connaissent.

&lt;references /&gt;

== Voir aussi ==

* {{ll|Customization}}
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings}}
* {{ll|Manual:Skins}}
* {{ll|Manual:Messages API}}
* {{ll|Localisation}}
* [[translatewiki:FAQ]]

[[Category:Customization techniques{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:User interface{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Localisation{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:System message{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>d9a4hqp8211vqsc6ap3c8q1xyoxrtng</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki/pt-br</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>316248</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401764</id>
      <parentid>5312696</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3980" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Muitos administradores do ShoutWiki também são [[developers|desenvolvedores]] do MediaWiki. Acesse o site do ShoutWiki ou veja a página sobre o ShoutWiki em [[ShoutWiki/pt-br#See Also|Ver Também]] para saber mais sobre o ShoutWiki no geral.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki também possui [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 seu próprio grupo no Gerrit] no qual consiste sobre os desenvolvedores.

== Extensões ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O ShoutWiki usa várias extensões usadas pelos sites Wikimedia, com a adição de suas própias extensões. O código-fonte da maioria dessas extensões podem ser encontradas no [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ repositório de git oficial do Wikimedia]. Acesse [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|Extensões de ShoutWiki]] para ver a lista de extensões desenvolvidas pelo ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Sobre o ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Informações sobre o ShoutWiki e código aberto]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — várias correções de códigos feitas pelo ShoutWiki para o código do MediaWiki
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki Github do ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>q8gpkh113berlfdrvo1xcfles7xd7mu</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401784</id>
      <parentid>5401764</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3979" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Muitos administradores do ShoutWiki também são [[developers|desenvolvedores]] do MediaWiki. Acesse o site do ShoutWiki ou veja a página sobre o ShoutWiki em [[ShoutWiki/pt-br#See Also|Ver Também]] para saber mais sobre o ShoutWiki no geral.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki também possui [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 seu próprio grupo no Gerrit] no qual consiste sobre os desenvolvedores.

== Extensões ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O ShoutWiki usa várias extensões usadas pelos sites Wikimedia, com a adição de suas própias extensões. O código-fonte da maioria dessas extensões podem ser encontradas no [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ repositório de git oficial do Wikimedia]. Acesse [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|Extensões de ShoutWiki]] para ver a lista de extensões desenvolvidas pelo ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Sobre o ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Informações sobre o ShoutWiki e código aberto]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — várias correções de códigos feitas pelo ShoutWiki para o código do MediaWiki
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki Github do ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ru784ruotl3oqchzi32w5fxa0vobgdx</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401882</id>
      <parentid>5401784</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3971" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Muitos administradores do ShoutWiki também são [[developers|desenvolvedores]] do MediaWiki. Acesse o site do ShoutWiki ou veja a página sobre o ShoutWiki em [[ShoutWiki/pt-br#See Also|Ver Também]] para saber mais sobre o ShoutWiki no geral.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki também possui [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 seu próprio grupo no Gerrit] no qual consiste sobre os desenvolvedores.

== Extensões ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O ShoutWiki usa várias extensões usadas pelos sites Wikimedia, com a adição de suas própias extensões. O código-fonte da maioria dessas extensões podem ser encontradas no [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ repositório de git oficial do Wikimedia]. Acesse [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|Extensões de ShoutWiki]] para ver a lista de extensões desenvolvidas pelo ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Sobre o ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Informações sobre o ShoutWiki e código aberto]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; várias correções de códigos feitas pelo ShoutWiki para o código do MediaWiki
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki Github do ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>je2dgzplavkrp91jgxeb3vbq4rz2ear</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401906</id>
      <parentid>5401882</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:34:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3963" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
Muitos dos funcionários do ShoutWiki são também membros do MediaWiki [[desenvolvedores]]. Veja [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ site do ShoutWiki] ou [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About página Sobre do ShoutWiki no ShoutWiki] para saber mais sobre o ShoutWiki em geral.
ShoutWiki também possui [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 seu próprio grupo no Gerrit] no qual consiste sobre os desenvolvedores.

== Extensões ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O ShoutWiki usa várias extensões usadas pelos sites Wikimedia, com a adição de suas própias extensões. O código-fonte da maioria dessas extensões podem ser encontradas no [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ repositório de git oficial do Wikimedia]. Acesse [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|Extensões de ShoutWiki]] para ver a lista de extensões desenvolvidas pelo ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Sobre o ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Informações sobre o ShoutWiki e código aberto]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; várias correções de códigos feitas pelo ShoutWiki para o código do MediaWiki
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki Github do ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>kfxwnxd8fk70qewcm8s00zjgm4d0u6s</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401912</id>
      <parentid>5401906</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:35:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Consulte $1 para uma lista de extensões elaboradas pelo ShoutWiki.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3921" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
Muitos dos funcionários do ShoutWiki são também membros do MediaWiki [[desenvolvedores]]. Veja [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ site do ShoutWiki] ou [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About página Sobre do ShoutWiki no ShoutWiki] para saber mais sobre o ShoutWiki em geral.
ShoutWiki também possui [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 seu próprio grupo no Gerrit] no qual consiste sobre os desenvolvedores.

== Extensões ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O ShoutWiki usa várias extensões usadas pelos sites Wikimedia, com a adição de suas própias extensões. O código-fonte da maioria dessas extensões podem ser encontradas no [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ repositório de git oficial do Wikimedia]. Acesse [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|Extensões de ShoutWiki]] para ver a lista de extensões desenvolvidas pelo ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
Consulte {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} para uma lista de extensões elaboradas pelo ShoutWiki.

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Sobre o ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Informações sobre o ShoutWiki e código aberto]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; várias correções de códigos feitas pelo ShoutWiki para o código do MediaWiki
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki Github do ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>t3qd6wopgetbfifh2ue5rh0hu56q4vx</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401914</id>
      <parentid>5401912</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:38:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;O código fonte da maioria destas extensões personalizadas ShoutWiki pode ser encontrado em [$url repositório git do Wikimedia] (o git oficial do MediaWiki).&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3883" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
Muitos dos funcionários do ShoutWiki são também membros do MediaWiki [[desenvolvedores]]. Veja [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ site do ShoutWiki] ou [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About página Sobre do ShoutWiki no ShoutWiki] para saber mais sobre o ShoutWiki em geral.
ShoutWiki também possui [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 seu próprio grupo no Gerrit] no qual consiste sobre os desenvolvedores.

== Extensões ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O ShoutWiki usa várias extensões usadas pelos sites Wikimedia, com a adição de suas própias extensões. O código-fonte da maioria dessas extensões podem ser encontradas no [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ repositório de git oficial do Wikimedia]. Acesse [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|Extensões de ShoutWiki]] para ver a lista de extensões desenvolvidas pelo ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
O código fonte da maioria destas extensões personalizadas ShoutWiki pode ser encontrado em [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ repositório git do Wikimedia] (o git oficial do MediaWiki).
Consulte {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} para uma lista de extensões elaboradas pelo ShoutWiki.

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Sobre o ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Informações sobre o ShoutWiki e código aberto]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; várias correções de códigos feitas pelo ShoutWiki para o código do MediaWiki
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki Github do ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>fsigcxfxplg410t3ibr06vx55wop7u3</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401916</id>
      <parentid>5401914</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:39:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3675" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
Muitos dos funcionários do ShoutWiki são também membros do MediaWiki [[desenvolvedores]]. Veja [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ site do ShoutWiki] ou [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About página Sobre do ShoutWiki no ShoutWiki] para saber mais sobre o ShoutWiki em geral.
ShoutWiki também possui [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 seu próprio grupo no Gerrit] no qual consiste sobre os desenvolvedores.

== Extensões ==
O ShoutWiki utiliza muitas [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensões]] utilizadas por sites [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]], além de suas próprias extensões personalizadas.
O código fonte da maioria destas extensões personalizadas ShoutWiki pode ser encontrado em [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ repositório git do Wikimedia] (o git oficial do MediaWiki).
Consulte {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} para uma lista de extensões elaboradas pelo ShoutWiki.

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Sobre o ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Informações sobre o ShoutWiki e código aberto]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; várias correções de códigos feitas pelo ShoutWiki para o código do MediaWiki
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki Github do ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>6eaeb8wqv7kve8xvhyct1cw3kty1f00</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/bg</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>321097</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402397</id>
      <parentid>2265892</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:49:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="554" xml:space="preserve">Добре дошли в портала на '''[[$ve|Визуалния редактор]]'''. Визуалният редактор (ВР) е нов инструмент за редактиране на Уикипедия, който се разработва от Фондация Уикимедия и позволява на хората да редактират, без да се налага да учат уикиформатиране. Надяваме се, че той ще им помогне да допринасят в Уикипедия.</text>
      <sha1>lcoevcaufmovabywaxt08ue7zc79epf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Phabricator/Projects</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>340261</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401656</id>
      <parentid>5401481</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T16:11:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Crystal-bot</username>
        <id>5243179</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Bot: Updating project taxonomy</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="133532" xml:space="preserve">{{/Header}}
Data as of: 16:11, 06 August 2022 (UTC)

=== Projects ===
* [[phab:project/view/5930/|2022 Wikimedia Google.org Fellowship]]
* [[phab:project/view/1929/|3D]]
* [[phab:project/view/3147/|3D2Commons]]
* [[phab:project/view/5054/|Abstract Wikipedia UX]]
* [[phab:project/view/217/|AbuseFilter]]
* Accuracy
** [[phab:project/view/1994/|Accuracy-Review-of-Wikipedias]]
* Acme
** [[phab:project/view/3694/|Acme-chief]]
* [[phab:project/view/651/|ActiveAbstract]]
* Add
** [[phab:project/view/5045/|Add-Link]]
* address
** [[phab:project/view/4382/|address-knowledge-gaps]]
* [[phab:project/view/3755/|Advanced Mobile Contributions]]
* Advanced
** [[phab:project/view/2798/|Advanced-Search]]
* [[phab:project/view/1295/|AhoCorasick]]
* AHT
** [[phab:project/view/5313/|AHT-Roadmap]]
* [[phab:project/view/527/|AJAXPoll]]
* [[phab:project/view/11/|Analytics]]
** [[phab:project/view/655/|Analytics-Clusters]]
** [[phab:project/view/817/|Analytics-Dashiki]]
** [[phab:project/view/2886/|Analytics-Data-Quality]]
** [[phab:project/view/3711/|Analytics-Jupyter]]
** [[phab:project/view/3153/|Analytics-Legal]]
** [[phab:project/view/4824/|Analytics-Radar]]
** [[phab:project/view/206/|Analytics-Wikistats]]
* [[phab:project/view/2255/|Android Design]]
* Android
** [[phab:project/view/2824/|Android-app-feature-Compilations-v1]]
** [[phab:project/view/2237/|Android-app-feature-Description-Editing]]
* [[phab:project/view/3826/|Anisa]]
* [[phab:project/view/257/|AntiSpoof]]
* [[phab:project/view/941/|Apex]]
* [[phab:project/view/5376/|API Platform]]
* API
** [[phab:project/view/5046/|API-Portal]]
* [[phab:project/view/842/|ApiFeatureUsage]]
* [[phab:project/view/4465/|Application Security Reviews]]
* Arc
** [[phab:project/view/4222/|Arc-Lamp]]
* Article
** [[phab:project/view/1351/|Article-Recommendation]]
** [[phab:project/view/2749/|Article-Reminder-Notifications]]
* [[phab:project/view/481/|ArticleFeedbackv5]]
* [[phab:project/view/1416/|ArticlePlaceholder]]
* articlequality
** [[phab:project/view/1675/|articlequality-modeling]]
* [[phab:project/view/1948/|ArticleRatings]]
* [[phab:project/view/4724/|Articles Needing links]]
* at
** [[phab:project/view/1304/|at-ease]]
** [[phab:project/view/5890/|Authentication-Experiments-2022]]
* [[phab:project/view/5713/|Auto schema]]
* [[phab:project/view/2294/|Automated list generation]]
* [[phab:project/view/1012/|AutoWikiBrowser]]
* AvoinGLAM
** [[phab:project/view/4190/|AvoinGLAM-Saami]]
* [[phab:project/view/5371/|bacula]]
* Bad
** [[phab:project/view/1470/|Bad-Words-Detection-System]]
* [[phab:project/view/3372/|base_convert]]
* Beta
** [[phab:project/view/497/|Beta-Cluster-Infrastructure]]
* [[phab:project/view/741/|BetaFeatures]]
* [[phab:project/view/1250/|BiblioPlus]]
* [[phab:project/view/676/|BlogPage]]
* [[phab:project/view/1092/|BlueSky]]
* Book
** [[phab:project/view/4256/|Book-Referencing]]
* Bot
** [[phab:project/view/2746/|Bot-Frameworks]]
* [[phab:project/view/2258/|Bouquet]]
* [[phab:project/view/5662/|CampaignEvents]]
* [[phab:project/view/1976/|Cassandra]]
* [[phab:project/view/1808/|CatWatch]]
* CFSSL
** [[phab:project/view/5338/|CFSSL-PKI]]
* [[phab:project/view/2264/|Challenge]]
* [[phab:project/view/2114/|ChangeProp]]
* [[phab:project/view/185/|CharInsert]]
* [[phab:project/view/203/|CheckUser]]
* [[phab:project/view/4398/|ChessBrowser]]
* [[phab:project/view/209/|CirrusSearch]]
* [[phab:project/view/172/|Cite]]
** [[phab:project/view/4050/|Cite-Unseen]]
* [[phab:project/view/980/|CiteThisPage]]
* [[phab:project/view/62/|Citoid]]
* [[phab:project/view/5263/|Cloud Services Proposals]]
* Cloud
** [[phab:project/view/474/|Cloud-VPS]]
* Code
** [[phab:project/view/3672/|Code-Health-First-Responder]]
** [[phab:project/view/3779/|Code-Health-Newsletter]]
* [[phab:project/view/580/|CodeEditor]]
* [[phab:project/view/5587/|Codex]]
* [[phab:project/view/2320/|Cognate]]
* Collab
** [[phab:project/view/1922/|Collab-Notifications-Page]]
** [[phab:project/view/1691/|Collaboration-Community-Engagement]]
* [[phab:project/view/329/|Collection]]
* [[phab:project/view/322/|CologneBlue]]
* commit
** [[phab:project/view/2163/|commit-message-validator]]
* [[phab:project/view/4829/|CommonPasswords]]
* [[phab:project/view/5429/|Commons Deletion Notification bot]]
* Commons
** [[phab:project/view/1986/|Commons-Datasets]]
** [[phab:project/view/3166/|Commons-Mass-Description]]
** [[phab:project/view/3616/|Commons-Twitter-Bot]]
* [[phab:project/view/736/|CommonsMetadata]]
* CommRel
** [[phab:project/view/3456/|CommRel-Documentation]]
** [[phab:project/view/3451/|CommRel-Specialists-Support]]
* Community
** [[phab:project/view/973/|Community-IdeaLab]]
* community
** [[phab:project/view/2348/|community-labs-monitoring]]
* Community
** [[phab:project/view/978/|Community-LearningPatterns]]
* [[phab:project/view/3862/|Confirmation prompt for rollback action]]
* [[phab:project/view/225/|ConfirmEdit (CAPTCHA extension)]]
* [[phab:project/view/4218/|conftool]]
* [[phab:project/view/776/|ContentTranslation]]
* Continuous
** [[phab:project/view/401/|Continuous-Integration-Infrastructure]]
* [[phab:project/view/388/|ContributionScores]]
* Convenient
** [[phab:project/view/3851/|Convenient-Discussions]]
* [[phab:project/view/1638/|CopyPatrol]]
* [[phab:project/view/5017/|Cosmos]]
* [[phab:project/view/5841/|CoverMe]]
* COVID
** [[phab:project/view/4721/|COVID-19 Global Dashboard]]
** [[phab:project/view/4676/|COVID-19-Graphics]]
* [[phab:project/view/5309/|CreateAPage]]
* [[phab:project/view/1224/|crosswatch]]
* css
** [[phab:project/view/2598/|css-sanitizer]]
* CX
** [[phab:project/view/3437/|CX-analytics]]
** [[phab:project/view/4191/|CX-boost]]
** [[phab:project/view/3435/|CX-cxserver]]
** [[phab:project/view/3421/|CX-deployments]]
** [[phab:project/view/3434/|CX-mobile]]
** [[phab:project/view/3419/|CX-out-of-beta]]
** [[phab:project/view/3457/|CX-template-improvements]]
** [[phab:project/view/3420/|CX-TranslationList]]
* [[phab:project/view/2669/|Cyberbot]]
* [[phab:project/view/4006/|DarkMode]]
* [[phab:project/view/6010/|Data Engineering Planning]]
* [[phab:project/view/5616/|Data Pipelines]]
* [[phab:project/view/4422/|Data Protection]]
* Data
** [[phab:project/view/5697/|Data-Catalog]]
** [[phab:project/view/5996/|Data-Engineering-Operations]]
** [[phab:project/view/4997/|Data-Persistence-Backup]]
** [[phab:project/view/5006/|Data-Persistence-Misc]]
** [[phab:project/view/1393/|Data-release]]
** [[phab:project/view/2874/|Data-Services]]
* database
** [[phab:project/view/5372/|database-backups]]
* Datasets
** [[phab:project/view/1135/|Datasets-Archiving]]
** [[phab:project/view/189/|Datasets-General-or-Unknown]]
** [[phab:project/view/191/|Datasets-Webstatscollector]]
* [[phab:project/view/123/|DataTypes]]
* [[phab:project/view/122/|DataValues]]
** [[phab:project/view/924/|DataValues-JavaScript]]
* [[phab:project/view/5304/|Data³]]
* dbbackups
** [[phab:project/view/5291/|dbbackups-dashboard]]
* decommission
** [[phab:project/view/3364/|decommission-hardware]]
* Dependency
** [[phab:project/view/3502/|Dependency-Tracking]]
* [[phab:project/view/349/|Deployments]]
* [[phab:project/view/2259/|DeskMessMirrored]]
* [[phab:project/view/4281/|Desktop Improvements]]
* dev
** [[phab:project/view/4032/|dev-images]]
* [[phab:project/view/5853/|DicoAdo.org]]
* Diff
** [[phab:project/view/328/|Diff-blog]]
* [[phab:project/view/53/|Diffusion]]
* [[phab:project/view/4358/|DiscussionTools]]
* [[phab:project/view/266/|DismissableSiteNotice]]
* [[phab:project/view/154/|DNS]]
* Docker
** [[phab:project/view/3094/|Docker-Hub-MediaWiki]]
* docker
** [[phab:project/view/3161/|docker-pkg]]
* Documentation
** [[phab:project/view/5093/|Documentation-Review-Board]]
* [[phab:project/view/1040/|Domains]]
* [[phab:project/view/3499/|donate.wikimedia.org]]
* [[phab:project/view/4400/|Doxygen]]
* draftquality
** [[phab:project/view/2369/|draftquality-modeling]]
* drafttopic
** [[phab:project/view/3086/|drafttopic-modeling]]
* Dumps
** [[phab:project/view/1519/|Dumps-Generation]]
** [[phab:project/view/1729/|Dumps-Rewrite]]
* [[phab:project/view/2260/|Dusk]]
* [[phab:project/view/2261/|DuskToDawn]]
* DynamicPageList (third
** [[phab:project/view/246/|DynamicPageList (third-party)]]
* [[phab:project/view/201/|DynamicPageList (Wikimedia)]]
* [[phab:project/view/140/|EasyTimeline]]
* Edit
** [[phab:project/view/2040/|Edit-Review-Improvements]]
** [[phab:project/view/2721/|Edit-Review-Improvements-Integrated-Filters]]
** [[phab:project/view/2201/|Edit-Review-Improvements-RC-Page]]
** [[phab:project/view/4796/|Editing-Team-Request]]
* editquality
** [[phab:project/view/1673/|editquality-modeling]]
* edittypes
** [[phab:project/view/1674/|edittypes-modeling]]
* Education
** [[phab:project/view/1052/|Education-Program-Dashboard]]
* [[phab:project/view/77/|Elasticsearch]]
* Electron
** [[phab:project/view/2162/|Electron-PDFs]]
* [[phab:project/view/5184/|envoy]]
* Equity
** [[phab:project/view/5828/|Equity-Landscape]]
* [[phab:project/view/3068/|Equivset]]
* [[phab:project/view/4432/|ERM]]
* Europeana
** [[phab:project/view/1580/|Europeana-280]]
* [[phab:project/view/3543/|Event Metrics]]
* Event
** [[phab:project/view/1474/|Event-Platform]]
* [[phab:project/view/789/|EventStreams]]
* [[phab:project/view/2783/|Example (skin)]]
* [[phab:project/view/3708/|Excimer]]
* Expiring
** [[phab:project/view/1995/|Expiring-Watchlist-Items]]
* [[phab:project/view/336/|ExtensionDistributor]]
* [[phab:project/view/2603/|ExternalArticles]]
* [[phab:project/view/3780/|ExternalGuidance]]
* [[phab:project/view/3673/|FactGrid]]
* [[phab:project/view/810/|FanBoxes]]
* [[phab:project/view/2120/|FileAnnotations]]
* Fix
** [[phab:project/view/5519/|Fix-Suggester-Bot]]
* [[phab:project/view/3570/|fixcopyright.wikimedia.org]]
* [[phab:project/view/1496/|FormWizard]]
** [[phab:project/view/3568/|FormWizard-Gadget]]
* [[phab:project/view/3501/|foundation.wikimedia.org]]
* [[phab:project/view/5489/|Foundational Technology Requests]]
* [[phab:project/view/3093/|Fountain]]
* FR
** [[phab:project/view/1895/|FR-ActiveMQ]]
** [[phab:project/view/1602/|FR-Adyen]]
** [[phab:project/view/6035/|FR-Alerts]]
** [[phab:project/view/1600/|FR-Amazon]]
** [[phab:project/view/5239/|FR-Australia]]
** [[phab:project/view/4660/|FR-AutoTY-Email]]
** [[phab:project/view/5273/|FR-BigBundle]]
** [[phab:project/view/5754/|FR-Braintree-Integration]]
** [[phab:project/view/5829/|FR-Brazil]]
** [[phab:project/view/5236/|FR-Canada]]
* Fr
** [[phab:project/view/3546/|Fr-CentralNotice-Caching]]
** [[phab:project/view/3233/|Fr-CentralNotice-Translation-Bugs]]
** [[phab:project/view/3545/|Fr-CentralNotice-translations]]
* FR
** [[phab:project/view/4263/|FR-Civi-Dedupe]]
** [[phab:project/view/4037/|FR-Civi-Planned-Giving]]
** [[phab:project/view/4036/|FR-Civi-Prospect]]
* Fr
** [[phab:project/view/2928/|Fr-CiviCRM-dedupe-FY2017/18]]
* FR
** [[phab:project/view/5223/|FR-CiviCRM-Searchkit]]
* Fr
** [[phab:project/view/4356/|Fr-cross-training]]
* FR
** [[phab:project/view/1603/|FR-dlocal]]
** [[phab:project/view/5137/|FR-Docker]]
* fr
** [[phab:project/view/4915/|fr-donorservices]]
* Fr
** [[phab:project/view/5128/|Fr-drupal-upgrade-2021]]
* fr
** [[phab:project/view/5159/|fr-email-preference-center]]
* FR
** [[phab:project/view/5274/|FR-EN6C]]
* Fr
** [[phab:project/view/4975/|Fr-endowment]]
* FR
** [[phab:project/view/4076/|FR-event logging as primary]]
** [[phab:project/view/4075/|FR-event logging in parallel ]]
** [[phab:project/view/3692/|FR-failmail]]
** [[phab:project/view/5770/|FR-form-chooser-refactor]]
* Fr
** [[phab:project/view/4264/|Fr-fortnightly]]
** [[phab:project/view/5233/|FR-France]]
* FR
** [[phab:project/view/5753/|FR-Gpay-Integration]]
** [[phab:project/view/5229/|FR-India]]
** [[phab:project/view/1604/|FR-Ingenico]]
* Fr
** [[phab:project/view/2894/|Fr-Ingenico-integration_2017-18]]
* FR
** [[phab:project/view/5234/|FR-Ireland]]
** [[phab:project/view/5232/|FR-Italy]]
** [[phab:project/view/5230/|FR-Japan]]
** [[phab:project/view/5228/|FR-LATAM]]
* fr
** [[phab:project/view/5464/|fr-matching-gifts]]
* FR
** [[phab:project/view/4769/|FR-MW-Vagrant]]
** [[phab:project/view/5272/|FR-Netherlands]]
** [[phab:project/view/5238/|FR-New-Zealand]]
** [[phab:project/view/1605/|FR-OtherProcessors]]
** [[phab:project/view/5764/|FR-payments-general]]
** [[phab:project/view/1601/|FR-Paypal]]
** [[phab:project/view/1893/|FR-PayPal-ExpressCheckout]]
** [[phab:project/view/1894/|FR-PCI]]
* Fr
** [[phab:project/view/4494/|Fr-planning-ahead]]
* FR
** [[phab:project/view/1653/|FR-Smashpig]]
** [[phab:project/view/5231/|FR-Sweden]]
** [[phab:project/view/5384/|FR-Target-Smart]]
** [[phab:project/view/3232/|FR-Tech-Analytics]]
* fr
** [[phab:project/view/4507/|fr-tech-ops-okr]]
* FR
** [[phab:project/view/5235/|FR-UK]]
** [[phab:project/view/5237/|FR-US]]
** [[phab:project/view/1931/|FR-WMF-Audit]]
** [[phab:project/view/1599/|FR-Worldpay]]
* [[phab:project/view/59/|freigabe3]]
* [[phab:project/view/4744/|Fresh]]
* [[phab:project/view/3893/|Fresnel]]
* function
** [[phab:project/view/5276/|function-evaluator]]
** [[phab:project/view/5277/|function-orchestrator]]
** [[phab:project/view/5364/|function-schemata]]
* fundraising
** [[phab:project/view/1091/|fundraising-tech-ops]]
* [[phab:project/view/2262/|Gamepress]]
* [[phab:project/view/5999/|Ganeti]]
* [[phab:project/view/1391/|GapFinder]]
* Gendered
** [[phab:project/view/5066/|Gendered-Categories]]
* [[phab:project/view/2912/|Genealogy]]
* [[phab:project/view/605/|GeoCrumbs]]
* [[phab:project/view/600/|GeoData]]
* [[phab:project/view/330/|Gerrit]]
* [[phab:project/view/2003/|GerritBot]]
* Github
** [[phab:project/view/2762/|Github-notif-bot]]
* [[phab:project/view/5793/|Gitiles]]
* [[phab:project/view/5057/|GitLab]]
* Gitlab
** [[phab:project/view/5984/|Gitlab-Application-Security-Pipeline]]
* gitlab
** [[phab:project/view/5484/|gitlab-settings]]
* GitLab
** [[phab:project/view/4954/|GitLab-Test]]
* GLAM
** [[phab:project/view/2087/|GLAM-Tech]]
* [[phab:project/view/2690/|glam2commons]]
* [[phab:project/view/315/|GlobalBlocking]]
* [[phab:project/view/1949/|GlobalContribs]]
* [[phab:project/view/749/|GlobalCssJs]]
* [[phab:project/view/1219/|GlobalRename]]
* [[phab:project/view/394/|GlobalUsage]]
* [[phab:project/view/802/|GlobalUserPage]]
* [[phab:project/view/4288/|GLOW]]
* [[phab:project/view/2926/|Goatification]]
* Google
** [[phab:project/view/4740/|Google-api-proxy]]
** [[phab:project/view/4068/|Google-Drive-to-Commons]]
* [[phab:project/view/23/|GoogleLogin]]
* [[phab:project/view/3695/|GraphQL]]
* [[phab:project/view/943/|GraphViz]]
* [[phab:project/view/866/|GreyStuff]]
* [[phab:project/view/5663/|Growth community maintenance]]
* [[phab:project/view/4094/|Growth Design]]
* Growth
** [[phab:project/view/5971/|Growth-Positive-Reinforcement]]
** [[phab:project/view/4738/|Growth-Scaling]]
** [[phab:project/view/4780/|Growth-Structured-Tasks]]
** [[phab:project/view/5314/|Growth-Team-Filtering]]
** [[phab:project/view/4908/|Growth-Team-Leftovers]]
* [[phab:project/view/3716/|GrowthExperiments]]
** [[phab:project/view/5475/|GrowthExperiments-CommunityConfiguration]]
** [[phab:project/view/3985/|GrowthExperiments-Help panel]]
** [[phab:project/view/4099/|GrowthExperiments-HelpModule]]
** [[phab:project/view/3986/|GrowthExperiments-Homepage]]
** [[phab:project/view/4100/|GrowthExperiments-HomepageDiscovery]]
** [[phab:project/view/4097/|GrowthExperiments-ImpactModule]]
** [[phab:project/view/5219/|GrowthExperiments-MentorDashboard]]
** [[phab:project/view/4098/|GrowthExperiments-Mentorship]]
** [[phab:project/view/4226/|GrowthExperiments-NewcomerTasks]]
** [[phab:project/view/4095/|GrowthExperiments-StartModule]]
* [[phab:project/view/3229/|Hashtags]]
* [[phab:project/view/2771/|HasSomeColours]]
* [[phab:project/view/3067/|HAWelcome]]
* [[phab:project/view/5722/|Header Tabs]]
* [[phab:project/view/4373/|homer]]
* [[phab:project/view/1822/|Horizon]]
* [[phab:project/view/4892/|HtmlFormatter]]
* [[phab:project/view/520/|Huggle]]
* [[phab:project/view/4967/|Humaniki]]
* [[phab:project/view/1746/|HyperSwitch]]
* [[phab:project/view/2793/|IA Upload]]
* [[phab:project/view/80/|Icinga]]
* IDS
** [[phab:project/view/2407/|IDS-extension]]
* Image
** [[phab:project/view/5253/|Image-Suggestion-API]]
** [[phab:project/view/5098/|Image-Suggestions]]
* [[phab:project/view/243/|ImageMap]]
* [[phab:project/view/2461/|ImageRating]]
* [[phab:project/view/1650/|ImageTweaks]]
* import
** [[phab:project/view/3503/|import-500px]]
* [[phab:project/view/1431/|ImportUsers]]
* Improving
** [[phab:project/view/1401/|Improving-access]]
* Incident
** [[phab:project/view/4038/|Incident-Reporting-System]]
* [[phab:project/view/3752/|incubator.wikimedia.org]]
* Instrument
** [[phab:project/view/5018/|Instrument-ClientError]]
* [[phab:project/view/3156/|InteractionTimeline]]
* International
** [[phab:project/view/4045/|International-Developer-Events]]
* Internet
** [[phab:project/view/1576/|Internet-Archive]]
* [[phab:project/view/2160/|InternetArchiveBot]]
* iOS
** [[phab:project/view/1876/|iOS-app-Bugs]]
** [[phab:project/view/1882/|iOS-app-feature-Accessibility]]
** [[phab:project/view/1883/|iOS-app-feature-Analytics]]
** [[phab:project/view/2009/|iOS-app-feature-Database]]
** [[phab:project/view/2232/|iOS-app-feature-Feed]]
** [[phab:project/view/1884/|iOS-app-feature-iPad]]
** [[phab:project/view/1900/|iOS-app-feature-Links]]
** [[phab:project/view/2234/|iOS-app-feature-Login]]
** [[phab:project/view/1924/|iOS-app-feature-Multilingual]]
** [[phab:project/view/1875/|iOS-app-feature-Namespaces]]
** [[phab:project/view/5640/|iOS-app-feature-Navigation]]
** [[phab:project/view/2010/|iOS-app-feature-Notifications]]
** [[phab:project/view/1874/|iOS-app-feature-Offline]]
** [[phab:project/view/1879/|iOS-app-feature-Performance]]
** [[phab:project/view/2008/|iOS-app-feature-Places]]
** [[phab:project/view/1877/|iOS-app-feature-Saved]]
** [[phab:project/view/5714/|iOS-app-feature-Talkpages]]
** [[phab:project/view/1881/|iOS-app-feature-TOC]]
** [[phab:project/view/1878/|iOS-app-feature-TopRead]]
** [[phab:project/view/2233/|iOS-app-feature-Widgets]]
* ios
** [[phab:project/view/5726/|ios-app-feature-wikitext-editor]]
* iOS
** [[phab:project/view/5830/|iOS-app-next-os-update]]
* [[phab:project/view/4923/|IP Info]]
* [[phab:project/view/5751/|IP Masking]]
* [[phab:project/view/5805/|IPFS]]
* [[phab:project/view/1553/|IPSet]]
* [[phab:project/view/4624/|IPUtils]]
* [[phab:project/view/3382/|Ipwatcher]]
* [[phab:project/view/2122/|IRCecho]]
* [[phab:project/view/5357/|ircservserv]]
* [[phab:project/view/3981/|ISA]]
* [[phab:project/view/5209/|Item Quality Evaluator]]
* [[phab:project/view/4932/|Item Quality Scoring Improvement]]
* [[phab:project/view/3249/|Jouncebot]]
* jQuery
** [[phab:project/view/1119/|jQuery-Client]]
* [[phab:project/view/3689/|JSDoc WMF theme]]
* [[phab:project/view/1103/|JsonConfig]]
* [[phab:project/view/2809/|Junta Directiva]]
* KaiOS
** [[phab:project/view/4305/|KaiOS-Wikipedia-app]]
* [[phab:project/view/5847/|Kanban]]
* [[phab:project/view/2777/|KartoEditor]]
* [[phab:project/view/3771/|Keyholder]]
* Knowledge
** [[phab:project/view/4384/|Knowledge-Integrity]]
* LabsDB
** [[phab:project/view/939/|LabsDB-Auditor]]
* Ladies
** [[phab:project/view/2329/|Ladies-That-FOSS-Wikidata]]
* Language
** [[phab:project/view/4247/|Language-analytics]]
** [[phab:project/view/5974/|Language-Diversity-Hub]]
** [[phab:project/view/4361/|Language-research]]
** [[phab:project/view/3709/|Language-strategy]]
* [[phab:project/view/547/|LastModified]]
* LDAP
** [[phab:project/view/1564/|LDAP-Access-Requests]]
* [[phab:project/view/4/|Legalpad]]
* [[phab:project/view/43/|Librarization]]
* Library
** [[phab:project/view/2765/|Library-Card-Platform]]
** [[phab:project/view/3401/|Library-Card-Platform-Discovery]]
* [[phab:project/view/2930/|LibUp]]
* Lift
** [[phab:project/view/5020/|Lift-Wing]]
* [[phab:project/view/3393/|Lingua Libre]]
* Linked
** [[phab:project/view/5893/|Linked-Open-Data-Network-Program]]
* [[phab:project/view/799/|LinkFilter]]
* [[phab:project/view/3916/|Loading Screen]]
* local
** [[phab:project/view/3942/|local-charts]]
* [[phab:project/view/4000/|LogoFunctions]]
* [[phab:project/view/373/|LookupUser]]
* [[phab:project/view/5876/|LSC]]
* [[phab:project/view/3225/|LuaSandbox]]
* [[phab:project/view/4081/|MachineVision]]
* [[phab:project/view/983/|Mail]]
* Map
** [[phab:project/view/3607/|Map-of-monuments]]
* [[phab:project/view/1127/|Maps]]
* [[phab:project/view/4011/|Mask]]
* [[phab:project/view/4417/|Massmailer]]
* [[phab:project/view/717/|MassMessage]]
* [[phab:project/view/5541/|masz]]
* [[phab:project/view/2422/|Material]]
* [[phab:project/view/130/|Math]]
** [[phab:project/view/4847/|Math-Chemistry-Support]]
** [[phab:project/view/4848/|Math-Macro-Proposals]]
** [[phab:project/view/4849/|Math-Non-WMF-Installations]]
** [[phab:project/view/3743/|Mathe für Nicht-Freaks]]
* [[phab:project/view/796/|Mathoid]]
* [[phab:project/view/737/|MathSearch]]
* [[phab:project/view/4056/|Matrix]]
* Measuring
** [[phab:project/view/1400/|Measuring-value-added]]
* media
** [[phab:project/view/5373/|media-backups]]
** [[phab:project/view/2455/|media-reports-tool]]
* [[phab:project/view/5204/|MediaUploader]]
* [[phab:project/view/230/|MediaViewer]]
* [[phab:project/view/1464/|MediaWiki Language Extension Bundle]]
* [[phab:project/view/4835/|MediaWiki Train Development Environment]]
* MediaWiki
** [[phab:project/view/200/|MediaWiki-Action-API]]
** [[phab:project/view/1037/|MediaWiki-Authentication-and-authorization]]
** [[phab:project/view/4731/|MediaWiki-Blocks]]
** [[phab:project/view/150/|MediaWiki-Categories]]
** [[phab:project/view/181/|MediaWiki-Change-tagging]]
** [[phab:project/view/1087/|MediaWiki-Codesniffer]]
** [[phab:project/view/3742/|MediaWiki-Comment-store]]
** [[phab:project/view/359/|MediaWiki-Configuration]]
** [[phab:project/view/1687/|MediaWiki-Containers]]
** [[phab:project/view/256/|MediaWiki-ContentHandler]]
** [[phab:project/view/4730/|MediaWiki-Core-Hooks]]
** [[phab:project/view/5723/|MediaWiki-Core-HTTP-Cache]]
** [[phab:project/view/269/|MediaWiki-Core-JobQueue]]
** [[phab:project/view/163/|MediaWiki-Core-Preferences]]
** [[phab:project/view/4586/|MediaWiki-Core-Profiler]]
** [[phab:project/view/3880/|MediaWiki-Core-Revision-backend]]
** [[phab:project/view/4795/|MediaWiki-Core-Skin-Architecture]]
** [[phab:project/view/174/|MediaWiki-Core-Snapshots]]
** [[phab:project/view/313/|MediaWiki-Core-Tests]]
** [[phab:project/view/1694/|MediaWiki-Debian]]
** [[phab:project/view/1129/|MediaWiki-Debug-Logger]]
** [[phab:project/view/234/|MediaWiki-DjVu]]
** [[phab:project/view/4585/|MediaWiki-Docker]]
** [[phab:project/view/132/|MediaWiki-Documentation]]
** [[phab:project/view/216/|MediaWiki-Email]]
** [[phab:project/view/137/|MediaWiki-extension-requests]]
** [[phab:project/view/564/|MediaWiki-extensions-AccessControl]]
** [[phab:project/view/887/|MediaWiki-extensions-AccountInfo]]
** [[phab:project/view/3299/|MediaWiki-extensions-AddPersonalUrls]]
** [[phab:project/view/389/|MediaWiki-extensions-AdminLinks]]
** [[phab:project/view/454/|MediaWiki-extensions-AdvancedMeta]]
** [[phab:project/view/4601/|MediaWiki-extensions-AkismetKlik]]
** [[phab:project/view/3574/|MediaWiki-extensions-Approved-Revs]]
** [[phab:project/view/3565/|MediaWiki-extensions-Arrays]]
** [[phab:project/view/2887/|MediaWiki-extensions-ArticleCreationWorkflow]]
** [[phab:project/view/4489/|MediaWiki-extensions-ArticleToCategory2]]
** [[phab:project/view/2719/|MediaWiki-extensions-Auth_remoteuser]]
** [[phab:project/view/354/|MediaWiki-extensions-AutoCreateCategoryPages]]
** [[phab:project/view/4484/|MediaWiki-extensions-AutoProxyBlock]]
** [[phab:project/view/317/|MediaWiki-extensions-Babel]]
** [[phab:project/view/4594/|MediaWiki-extensions-BibManager]]
** [[phab:project/view/4514/|MediaWiki-extensions-Blackout]]
** [[phab:project/view/3024/|MediaWiki-extensions-BlockAndNuke]]
** [[phab:project/view/806/|MediaWiki-extensions-BounceHandler]]
** [[phab:project/view/760/|MediaWiki-extensions-BreadCrumbs]]
** [[phab:project/view/706/|MediaWiki-extensions-Campaigns]]
** [[phab:project/view/787/|MediaWiki-extensions-Capiunto]]
** [[phab:project/view/1029/|MediaWiki-extensions-Cargo]]
** [[phab:project/view/236/|MediaWiki-extensions-CategoryTree]]
** [[phab:project/view/2832/|MediaWiki-extensions-CategoryWatch]]
** [[phab:project/view/167/|MediaWiki-extensions-CentralAuth]]
** [[phab:project/view/291/|MediaWiki-extensions-CentralNotice]]
** [[phab:project/view/3615/|MediaWiki-extensions-ChangeUserPasswords]]
** [[phab:project/view/5907/|MediaWiki-extensions-CiteDrawer]]
** [[phab:project/view/455/|MediaWiki-extensions-CLDR]]
** [[phab:project/view/586/|MediaWiki-extensions-CleanChanges]]
** [[phab:project/view/4588/|MediaWiki-extensions-CloseWikis]]
** [[phab:project/view/1162/|MediaWiki-extensions-CodeMirror]]
** [[phab:project/view/318/|MediaWiki-extensions-CodeReview]]
** [[phab:project/view/1778/|MediaWiki-extensions-CollaborationKit]]
** [[phab:project/view/5908/|MediaWiki-extensions-CollapsibleSections]]
** [[phab:project/view/889/|MediaWiki-extensions-CollapsibleVector]]
** [[phab:project/view/649/|MediaWiki-extensions-Commentbox]]
** [[phab:project/view/506/|MediaWiki-extensions-Comments]]
** [[phab:project/view/2820/|MediaWiki-extensions-CommentStreams]]
** [[phab:project/view/4642/|MediaWiki-extensions-CommonMessages]]
** [[phab:project/view/288/|MediaWiki-extensions-ConfirmAccount]]
** [[phab:project/view/4590/|MediaWiki-extensions-CongressLookup]]
** [[phab:project/view/405/|MediaWiki-extensions-ContactPage]]
** [[phab:project/view/253/|MediaWiki-extensions-Contributors]]
** [[phab:project/view/2240/|MediaWiki-extensions-CookieWarning]]
** [[phab:project/view/4602/|MediaWiki-extensions-CountDownClock]]
** [[phab:project/view/2827/|MediaWiki-extensions-Create-User-Page]]
** [[phab:project/view/4483/|MediaWiki-extensions-CreateRedirect]]
** [[phab:project/view/598/|MediaWiki-extensions-CreditsSource]]
** [[phab:project/view/477/|MediaWiki-extensions-CSS]]
** [[phab:project/view/2924/|MediaWiki-extensions-Dashiki]]
** [[phab:project/view/791/|MediaWiki-extensions-DataTransfer]]
** [[phab:project/view/4512/|MediaWiki-extensions-DeleteBatch]]
** [[phab:project/view/885/|MediaWiki-extensions-DeleteOwn]]
** [[phab:project/view/1549/|MediaWiki-extensions-DeletePagesForGood]]
** [[phab:project/view/4462/|MediaWiki-extensions-DisableAccount]]
** [[phab:project/view/212/|MediaWiki-extensions-Disambiguator]]
** [[phab:project/view/6041/|MediaWiki-extensions-Discourse]]
** [[phab:project/view/798/|MediaWiki-extensions-DiscussionThreading]]
** [[phab:project/view/2694/|MediaWiki-extensions-DisplayTitle]]
** [[phab:project/view/4227/|MediaWiki-extensions-DocBookExport]]
** [[phab:project/view/409/|MediaWiki-extensions-DonationInterface]]
** [[phab:project/view/395/|MediaWiki-extensions-DoubleWiki]]
** [[phab:project/view/4640/|MediaWiki-extensions-DPLforum]]
** [[phab:project/view/316/|MediaWiki-extensions-Drafts]]
** [[phab:project/view/4999/|MediaWiki-extensions-DrawioEditor]]
** [[phab:project/view/4675/|MediaWiki-extensions-DumpsOnDemand]]
** [[phab:project/view/3955/|MediaWiki-extensions-Duplicator]]
** [[phab:project/view/614/|MediaWiki-extensions-DynamicSidebar]]
** [[phab:project/view/5909/|MediaWiki-extensions-EditAccount]]
** [[phab:project/view/220/|MediaWiki-extensions-Editcount]]
** [[phab:project/view/2007/|MediaWiki-extensions-EditNotify]]
** [[phab:project/view/560/|MediaWiki-extensions-EditUser]]
** [[phab:project/view/2826/|MediaWiki-extensions-Email_Authorization]]
** [[phab:project/view/2358/|MediaWiki-extensions-EmailAuth]]
** [[phab:project/view/5910/|MediaWiki-extensions-EncryptedUploads]]
** [[phab:project/view/534/|MediaWiki-extensions-EtherpadLite]]
** [[phab:project/view/589/|MediaWiki-extensions-EventLogging]]
** [[phab:project/view/1405/|MediaWiki-extensions-Examples]]
** [[phab:project/view/494/|MediaWiki-extensions-ExternalData]]
** [[phab:project/view/5911/|MediaWiki-extensions-ExternalLinkConfirm]]
** [[phab:project/view/792/|MediaWiki-extensions-ExtraLanguageLink]]
** [[phab:project/view/4637/|MediaWiki-extensions-Farmer]]
** [[phab:project/view/514/|MediaWiki-extensions-FeaturedFeeds]]
** [[phab:project/view/296/|MediaWiki-extensions-FlaggedRevs]]
** [[phab:project/view/5912/|MediaWiki-extensions-FlickrAPI]]
** [[phab:project/view/3117/|MediaWiki-extensions-Form]]
** [[phab:project/view/622/|MediaWiki-extensions-FundraiserLandingPage]]
** [[phab:project/view/285/|MediaWiki-extensions-Gadgets]]
** [[phab:project/view/176/|MediaWiki-extensions-General]]
** [[phab:project/view/590/|MediaWiki-extensions-GettingStarted]]
** [[phab:project/view/884/|MediaWiki-extensions-Git2Pages]]
** [[phab:project/view/763/|MediaWiki-extensions-GlobalPreferences]]
** [[phab:project/view/4828/|MediaWiki-extensions-GlobalWatchlist]]
** [[phab:project/view/4228/|MediaWiki-extensions-GoogleAdSense]]
** [[phab:project/view/5913/|MediaWiki-extensions-GoogleAnalyticsMetrics]]
** [[phab:project/view/5914/|MediaWiki-extensions-GoogleCustomWikiSearch]]
** [[phab:project/view/509/|MediaWiki-extensions-GoogleNewsSitemap]]
** [[phab:project/view/1548/|MediaWiki-extensions-GPGMail]]
** [[phab:project/view/816/|MediaWiki-extensions-Graph]]
** [[phab:project/view/3902/|MediaWiki-extensions-GraphQL]]
** [[phab:project/view/5294/|MediaWiki-extensions-Gravatar]]
** [[phab:project/view/5915/|MediaWiki-extensions-GroupWhitelist]]
** [[phab:project/view/582/|MediaWiki-extensions-GuidedTour]]
** [[phab:project/view/744/|MediaWiki-extensions-GWToolset]]
** [[phab:project/view/853/|MediaWiki-extensions-Hierarchy-Builder]]
** [[phab:project/view/1320/|MediaWiki-extensions-HitCounters]]
** [[phab:project/view/2350/|MediaWiki-extensions-HostStats]]
** [[phab:project/view/1094/|MediaWiki-extensions-Html2Wiki]]
** [[phab:project/view/3763/|MediaWiki-extensions-ImageCompare]]
** [[phab:project/view/1512/|MediaWiki-extensions-ImportArticles]]
** [[phab:project/view/290/|MediaWiki-extensions-ImportFreeImages]]
** [[phab:project/view/374/|MediaWiki-extensions-IndexFunction]]
** [[phab:project/view/180/|MediaWiki-extensions-InputBox]]
** [[phab:project/view/690/|MediaWiki-extensions-Insider]]
** [[phab:project/view/443/|MediaWiki-extensions-Interlanguage]]
** [[phab:project/view/333/|MediaWiki-extensions-Interwiki]]
** [[phab:project/view/4366/|MediaWiki-extensions-InterwikiExtracts]]
** [[phab:project/view/2374/|MediaWiki-extensions-InterwikiSorting]]
** [[phab:project/view/4600/|MediaWiki-extensions-InviteSignup]]
** [[phab:project/view/1032/|MediaWiki-extensions-Josa]]
** [[phab:project/view/3242/|MediaWiki-extensions-JSBreadCrumbs]]
** [[phab:project/view/4501/|MediaWiki-extensions-JsonData]]
** [[phab:project/view/302/|MediaWiki-extensions-LabeledSectionTransclusion]]
** [[phab:project/view/371/|MediaWiki-extensions-LanguageSelector]]
** [[phab:project/view/5202/|MediaWiki-extensions-LastUserLogin]]
** [[phab:project/view/414/|MediaWiki-extensions-LdapAuthentication]]
** [[phab:project/view/4169/|MediaWiki-extensions-LDAPAuthentication2]]
** [[phab:project/view/863/|MediaWiki-extensions-LDAPAuthorization]]
** [[phab:project/view/3070/|MediaWiki-extensions-LDAPGroups]]
** [[phab:project/view/3952/|MediaWiki-extensions-LDAPProvider]]
** [[phab:project/view/3953/|MediaWiki-extensions-LDAPUserInfo]]
** [[phab:project/view/5916/|MediaWiki-extensions-LegalLogin]]
** [[phab:project/view/723/|MediaWiki-extensions-Lingo]]
** [[phab:project/view/2164/|MediaWiki-extensions-LinkedWiki]]
** [[phab:project/view/4499/|MediaWiki-extensions-LinkSuggest]]
** [[phab:project/view/5917/|MediaWiki-extensions-LinkTarget]]
** [[phab:project/view/2318/|MediaWiki-extensions-Linter]]
** [[phab:project/view/303/|MediaWiki-extensions-LiquidThreads]]
** [[phab:project/view/597/|MediaWiki-extensions-Listings]]
** [[phab:project/view/376/|MediaWiki-extensions-LocalisationUpdate]]
** [[phab:project/view/5207/|MediaWiki-extensions-LockAuthor]]
** [[phab:project/view/416/|MediaWiki-extensions-Lockdown]]
** [[phab:project/view/321/|MediaWiki-extensions-LogEntry]]
** [[phab:project/view/2419/|MediaWiki-extensions-LoginNotify]]
** [[phab:project/view/3567/|MediaWiki-extensions-Loops]]
** [[phab:project/view/4596/|MediaWiki-extensions-MagicNoCache]]
** [[phab:project/view/1424/|MediaWiki-extensions-Mailgun]]
** [[phab:project/view/451/|MediaWiki-extensions-Maintenance (by Skizzerz)]]
** [[phab:project/view/643/|MediaWiki-extensions-MaintenanceShell]]
** [[phab:project/view/640/|MediaWiki-extensions-MapSources]]
** [[phab:project/view/769/|MediaWiki-extensions-MarkAsHelpful]]
** [[phab:project/view/4486/|MediaWiki-extensions-MassEditRegex]]
** [[phab:project/view/5918/|MediaWiki-extensions-MassMessageEmail]]
** [[phab:project/view/286/|MediaWiki-extensions-MediaFunctions]]
** [[phab:project/view/4608/|MediaWiki-extensions-MediaModeration]]
** [[phab:project/view/2687/|MediaWiki-extensions-MediaWikiFarm]]
** [[phab:project/view/5919/|MediaWiki-extensions-MetaMaster]]
** [[phab:project/view/3577/|MediaWiki-extensions-MintyDocs]]
** [[phab:project/view/793/|MediaWiki-extensions-MobileApp]]
** [[phab:project/view/5145/|MediaWiki-extensions-MobileDetect]]
** [[phab:project/view/804/|MediaWiki-extensions-MolHandler]]
** [[phab:project/view/2421/|MediaWiki-extensions-MsCalendar]]
** [[phab:project/view/926/|MediaWiki-extensions-MsCatSelect]]
** [[phab:project/view/883/|MediaWiki-extensions-MsUpload]]
** [[phab:project/view/295/|MediaWiki-extensions-MultiBoilerplate]]
** [[phab:project/view/6007/|MediaWiki-extensions-MultiMail]]
** [[phab:project/view/4490/|MediaWiki-extensions-MultiMaps]]
** [[phab:project/view/5920/|MediaWiki-extensions-MyVariables]]
** [[phab:project/view/5921/|MediaWiki-extensions-NamespaceHTML]]
** [[phab:project/view/4515/|MediaWiki-extensions-NetworkAuth]]
** [[phab:project/view/319/|MediaWiki-extensions-NewestPages]]
** [[phab:project/view/4589/|MediaWiki-extensions-News]]
** [[phab:project/view/888/|MediaWiki-extensions-Newsletter]]
** [[phab:project/view/1863/|MediaWiki-extensions-NewUserActions]]
** [[phab:project/view/305/|MediaWiki-extensions-NewUserMessage]]
** [[phab:project/view/450/|MediaWiki-extensions-NewUserNotif]]
** [[phab:project/view/563/|MediaWiki-extensions-NSFileRepo]]
** [[phab:project/view/231/|MediaWiki-extensions-Nuke]]
** [[phab:project/view/554/|MediaWiki-extensions-OATHAuth]]
** [[phab:project/view/682/|MediaWiki-extensions-OAuth]]
** [[phab:project/view/1263/|MediaWiki-extensions-OAuthAuthentication]]
** [[phab:project/view/4904/|MediaWiki-extensions-OAuthRateLimiter]]
** [[phab:project/view/343/|MediaWiki-extensions-OnlineStatus]]
** [[phab:project/view/553/|MediaWiki-extensions-OnlineStatusBar]]
** [[phab:project/view/882/|MediaWiki-extensions-OnlyRecentRecentChanges]]
** [[phab:project/view/4498/|MediaWiki-extensions-OpenGraphMeta]]
** [[phab:project/view/244/|MediaWiki-extensions-OpenID]]
** [[phab:project/view/862/|MediaWiki-extensions-OpenID-Connect]]
** [[phab:project/view/4530/|MediaWiki-extensions-OpenJsCad]]
** [[phab:project/view/420/|MediaWiki-extensions-OpenStackManager]]
** [[phab:project/view/1662/|MediaWiki-extensions-ORES]]
** [[phab:project/view/2861/|MediaWiki-extensions-OrphanedTalkPages]]
** [[phab:project/view/308/|MediaWiki-extensions-Other]]
** [[phab:project/view/272/|MediaWiki-extensions-Page_Forms]]
** [[phab:project/view/1936/|MediaWiki-extensions-PageAssessments]]
** [[phab:project/view/403/|MediaWiki-extensions-PagedTiffHandler]]
** [[phab:project/view/5922/|MediaWiki-extensions-PageMagic]]
** [[phab:project/view/392/|MediaWiki-extensions-PageNotice]]
** [[phab:project/view/652/|MediaWiki-extensions-PageSchemas]]
** [[phab:project/view/4487/|MediaWiki-extensions-ParserMigration]]
** [[phab:project/view/261/|MediaWiki-extensions-Patroller]]
** [[phab:project/view/393/|MediaWiki-extensions-PdfHandler]]
** [[phab:project/view/5923/|MediaWiki-extensions-PerPageLanguage]]
** [[phab:project/view/786/|MediaWiki-extensions-Petition]]
** [[phab:project/view/4513/|MediaWiki-extensions-PGFTikZ]]
** [[phab:project/view/5901/|MediaWiki-extensions-Phonos]]
** [[phab:project/view/1159/|MediaWiki-extensions-PhpTags]]
** [[phab:project/view/861/|MediaWiki-extensions-Pluggable-Auth]]
** [[phab:project/view/232/|MediaWiki-extensions-Poem]]
** [[phab:project/view/415/|MediaWiki-extensions-Poll]]
** [[phab:project/view/5924/|MediaWiki-extensions-PopupAlerts]]
** [[phab:project/view/2796/|MediaWiki-extensions-PropertySuggester]]
** [[phab:project/view/4395/|MediaWiki-extensions-ProtectionIndicator]]
** [[phab:project/view/4643/|MediaWiki-extensions-Push]]
** [[phab:project/view/4500/|MediaWiki-extensions-PushToWatch]]
** [[phab:project/view/1984/|MediaWiki-extensions-QuickGV]]
** [[phab:project/view/5881/|MediaWiki-extensions-QuickInstantCommons]]
** [[phab:project/view/289/|MediaWiki-extensions-Quiz]]
** [[phab:project/view/248/|MediaWiki-extensions-RandomImage]]
** [[phab:project/view/4639/|MediaWiki-extensions-RandomInCategory]]
** [[phab:project/view/6042/|MediaWiki-extensions-Realnames]]
** [[phab:project/view/5782/|MediaWiki-extensions-RedirectManager]]
** [[phab:project/view/780/|MediaWiki-extensions-RefreshSpecial]]
** [[phab:project/view/595/|MediaWiki-extensions-RelatedSites]]
** [[phab:project/view/204/|MediaWiki-extensions-Renameuser]]
** [[phab:project/view/344/|MediaWiki-extensions-ReplaceText]]
** [[phab:project/view/4625/|MediaWiki-extensions-RevisionCommentSupplement]]
** [[phab:project/view/4615/|MediaWiki-extensions-RightFunctions]]
** [[phab:project/view/430/|MediaWiki-extensions-RSS]]
** [[phab:project/view/822/|MediaWiki-extensions-SandboxLink]]
** [[phab:project/view/5925/|MediaWiki-extensions-SaveSpinner]]
** [[phab:project/view/613/|MediaWiki-extensions-Score]]
** [[phab:project/view/1550/|MediaWiki-extensions-Screenplay]]
** [[phab:project/view/558/|MediaWiki-extensions-Scribunto]]
** [[phab:project/view/876/|MediaWiki-extensions-SearchExtraNS]]
** [[phab:project/view/4674/|MediaWiki-extensions-SearchStats]]
** [[phab:project/view/3366/|MediaWiki-extensions-SecureAuth]]
** [[phab:project/view/3495/|MediaWiki-extensions-SecureLinkFixer]]
** [[phab:project/view/238/|MediaWiki-extensions-SecurePoll]]
** [[phab:project/view/704/|MediaWiki-extensions-SecureSessions]]
** [[phab:project/view/260/|MediaWiki-extensions-SelectCategory]]
** [[phab:project/view/860/|MediaWiki-extensions-Semantic-Dependency]]
** [[phab:project/view/855/|MediaWiki-extensions-Semantic-Rating]]
** [[phab:project/view/4497/|MediaWiki-extensions-SemanticACL]]
** [[phab:project/view/293/|MediaWiki-extensions-SemanticDrilldown]]
** [[phab:project/view/2051/|MediaWiki-extensions-SemanticQueryInterface]]
** [[phab:project/view/2954/|MediaWiki-extensions-SendGrid]]
** [[phab:project/view/491/|MediaWiki-extensions-ShortUrl]]
** [[phab:project/view/5926/|MediaWiki-extensions-ShowMe]]
** [[phab:project/view/859/|MediaWiki-extensions-SimpleSAMLphp]]
** [[phab:project/view/4502/|MediaWiki-extensions-Site_Settings]]
** [[phab:project/view/1406/|MediaWiki-extensions-SkinPerNamespace]]
** [[phab:project/view/4616/|MediaWiki-extensions-SkinPerPage]]
** [[phab:project/view/625/|MediaWiki-extensions-SlimboxThumbs]]
** [[phab:project/view/1252/|MediaWiki-extensions-SmiteSpam]]
** [[phab:project/view/5931/|MediaWiki-extensions-SpamDiffTool]]
** [[phab:project/view/3794/|MediaWiki-extensions-SparkPost]]
** [[phab:project/view/467/|MediaWiki-extensions-SphinxSearch]]
** [[phab:project/view/4641/|MediaWiki-extensions-StalkerLog]]
** [[phab:project/view/2324/|MediaWiki-extensions-StlHandler]]
** [[phab:project/view/781/|MediaWiki-extensions-StopForumSpam]]
** [[phab:project/view/411/|MediaWiki-extensions-StringFunctionsEscaped]]
** [[phab:project/view/4587/|MediaWiki-extensions-SubPageList3]]
** [[phab:project/view/874/|MediaWiki-extensions-SubpageSortkey]]
** [[phab:project/view/4638/|MediaWiki-extensions-Sudo]]
** [[phab:project/view/660/|MediaWiki-extensions-Survey]]
** [[phab:project/view/872/|MediaWiki-extensions-SwiftMailer]]
** [[phab:project/view/4016/|MediaWiki-extensions-TEI]]
** [[phab:project/view/604/|MediaWiki-extensions-TemplateSandbox]]
** [[phab:project/view/3284/|MediaWiki-extensions-TemplateWizard]]
** [[phab:project/view/1363/|MediaWiki-extensions-TestLanguageNameGrammar]]
** [[phab:project/view/671/|MediaWiki-extensions-ThrottleOverride]]
** [[phab:project/view/3575/|MediaWiki-extensions-TinyMCE]]
** [[phab:project/view/854/|MediaWiki-extensions-Title-Icon]]
** [[phab:project/view/397/|MediaWiki-extensions-TitleKey]]
** [[phab:project/view/666/|MediaWiki-extensions-TocTree]]
** [[phab:project/view/6037/|MediaWiki-extensions-Toolhub]]
** [[phab:project/view/444/|MediaWiki-extensions-TorBlock]]
** [[phab:project/view/271/|MediaWiki-extensions-Translate]]
** [[phab:project/view/1272/|MediaWiki-extensions-TranslateSvg]]
** [[phab:project/view/551/|MediaWiki-extensions-TranslationNotifications]]
** [[phab:project/view/2138/|MediaWiki-extensions-TrustedXFF]]
** [[phab:project/view/764/|MediaWiki-extensions-TweetANew]]
** [[phab:project/view/619/|MediaWiki-extensions-TwitterCards]]
** [[phab:project/view/4598/|MediaWiki-extensions-TwitterLogin]]
** [[phab:project/view/650/|MediaWiki-extensions-TwnMainPage]]
** [[phab:project/view/4509/|MediaWiki-extensions-UIFeedback]]
** [[phab:project/view/4599/|MediaWiki-extensions-UnicodeConverter]]
** [[phab:project/view/4593/|MediaWiki-extensions-UploadBlacklist]]
** [[phab:project/view/1846/|MediaWiki-extensions-UploadsLink]]
** [[phab:project/view/809/|MediaWiki-extensions-UrlShortener]]
** [[phab:project/view/3531/|MediaWiki-extensions-UserAgreement]]
** [[phab:project/view/5208/|MediaWiki-extensions-UseResource]]
** [[phab:project/view/453/|MediaWiki-extensions-UserMerge]]
** [[phab:project/view/5927/|MediaWiki-extensions-UserProtect]]
** [[phab:project/view/3326/|MediaWiki-extensions-Variables]]
** [[phab:project/view/3576/|MediaWiki-extensions-VEForAll]]
** [[phab:project/view/3213/|MediaWiki-extensions-VersionCompare]]
** [[phab:project/view/858/|MediaWiki-extensions-VIKI]]
** [[phab:project/view/857/|MediaWiki-extensions-VikiSemanticTitle]]
** [[phab:project/view/505/|MediaWiki-extensions-VipsScaler]]
** [[phab:project/view/4488/|MediaWiki-extensions-WatchSubpages]]
** [[phab:project/view/3888/|MediaWiki-extensions-WebDAV]]
** [[phab:project/view/4266/|MediaWiki-extensions-WebToolsManager]]
** [[phab:project/view/4491/|MediaWiki-extensions-WhoIsWatching]]
** [[phab:project/view/358/|MediaWiki-extensions-Widgets]]
** [[phab:project/view/4747/|MediaWiki-extensions-WikEdDiff]]
** [[phab:project/view/114/|MediaWiki-extensions-WikibaseClient]]
** [[phab:project/view/5043/|MediaWiki-extensions-WikibaseManifest]]
** [[phab:project/view/113/|MediaWiki-extensions-WikibaseRepository]]
** [[phab:project/view/1176/|MediaWiki-extensions-WikibaseView]]
** [[phab:project/view/242/|MediaWiki-extensions-WikiLexicalData-or-OmegaWiki]]
** [[phab:project/view/4823/|MediaWiki-extensions-WikimediaApiPortalOAuth]]
** [[phab:project/view/3286/|MediaWiki-extensions-WikimediaBadges]]
** [[phab:project/view/707/|MediaWiki-extensions-WikimediaEvents]]
** [[phab:project/view/471/|MediaWiki-extensions-WikimediaIncubator]]
** [[phab:project/view/492/|MediaWiki-extensions-WikimediaMaintenance]]
** [[phab:project/view/1309/|MediaWiki-extensions-WikiShare]]
** [[phab:project/view/5370/|MediaWiki-extensions-WSOAuth]]
** [[phab:project/view/131/|MediaWiki-File-management]]
** [[phab:project/view/1498/|MediaWiki-Gallery]]
** [[phab:project/view/135/|MediaWiki-General]]
** [[phab:project/view/1525/|MediaWiki-HTML-Templating]]
** [[phab:project/view/540/|MediaWiki-HTMLForm]]
** [[phab:project/view/147/|MediaWiki-Installer]]
** [[phab:project/view/155/|MediaWiki-Interface]]
** [[phab:project/view/144/|MediaWiki-Internationalization]]
** [[phab:project/view/1685/|MediaWiki-Interwiki]]
** [[phab:project/view/223/|MediaWiki-Language-converter]]
** [[phab:project/view/5082/|MediaWiki-libs-Assert]]
** [[phab:project/view/3777/|MediaWiki-libs-HTTP]]
** [[phab:project/view/5583/|MediaWiki-libs-Metrics]]
** [[phab:project/view/4783/|MediaWiki-libs-Mime]]
** [[phab:project/view/1329/|MediaWiki-libs-ObjectCache]]
* mediawiki
** [[phab:project/view/5496/|mediawiki-libs-RequestTimeout]]
* MediaWiki
** [[phab:project/view/3390/|MediaWiki-libs-Services]]
** [[phab:project/view/356/|MediaWiki-Logevents]]
** [[phab:project/view/268/|MediaWiki-Maintenance-system]]
** [[phab:project/view/4728/|MediaWiki-MergeHistory]]
** [[phab:project/view/213/|MediaWiki-Page-deletion]]
** [[phab:project/view/3881/|MediaWiki-Page-derived-data]]
** [[phab:project/view/149/|MediaWiki-Page-diffs]]
** [[phab:project/view/139/|MediaWiki-Page-editing]]
** [[phab:project/view/4287/|MediaWiki-Page-history]]
** [[phab:project/view/278/|MediaWiki-Page-protection]]
** [[phab:project/view/4727/|MediaWiki-Page-rename]]
** [[phab:project/view/136/|MediaWiki-Parser]]
** [[phab:project/view/195/|MediaWiki-Patrolling]]
** [[phab:project/view/194/|MediaWiki-Recent-changes]]
** [[phab:project/view/160/|MediaWiki-Redirects]]
** [[phab:project/view/3044/|MediaWiki-Release-Tools]]
** [[phab:project/view/274/|MediaWiki-ResourceLoader]]
** [[phab:project/view/4020/|MediaWiki-REST-API]]
** [[phab:project/view/337/|MediaWiki-Revision-deletion]]
** [[phab:project/view/146/|MediaWiki-Search]]
** [[phab:project/view/3150/|MediaWiki-Shell]]
** [[phab:project/view/656/|MediaWiki-Site-system]]
** [[phab:project/view/5070/|MediaWiki-skins-Amethyst]]
** [[phab:project/view/5703/|MediaWiki-skins-Cavendish]]
** [[phab:project/view/5077/|MediaWiki-skins-Erudite]]
** [[phab:project/view/5076/|MediaWiki-skins-Foreground]]
** [[phab:project/view/5131/|MediaWiki-skins-GuMaxDD]]
** [[phab:project/view/5134/|MediaWiki-skins-Mirage]]
** [[phab:project/view/5073/|MediaWiki-skins-p2wiki]]
** [[phab:project/view/6075/|MediaWiki-skins-Pivot]]
** [[phab:project/view/5130/|MediaWiki-skins-Schulenburg]]
** [[phab:project/view/5072/|MediaWiki-skins-Strapping]]
** [[phab:project/view/5074/|MediaWiki-skins-Tempo]]
** [[phab:project/view/5075/|MediaWiki-skins-WebPlatform]]
** [[phab:project/view/133/|MediaWiki-Special-pages]]
** [[phab:project/view/142/|MediaWiki-Templates]]
** [[phab:project/view/4634/|MediaWiki-TrackingCategories]]
** [[phab:project/view/158/|MediaWiki-Uploading]]
** [[phab:project/view/148/|MediaWiki-User-login-and-signup]]
** [[phab:project/view/198/|MediaWiki-User-management]]
** [[phab:project/view/627/|MediaWiki-Vagrant]]
** [[phab:project/view/818/|MediaWiki-Vendor]]
** [[phab:project/view/173/|MediaWiki-Watchlist]]
* [[phab:project/view/1950/|MediaWikiChat]]
* Mention
** [[phab:project/view/2101/|Mention-Notification]]
* Metrics
** [[phab:project/view/5324/|Metrics-Platform]]
* [[phab:project/view/1023/|Metrolook]]
* [[phab:project/view/2799/|MinervaNeue]]
* [[phab:project/view/2390/|MiniInvite]]
* [[phab:project/view/2998/|MinusX]]
* [[phab:project/view/5385/|Mismatch Finder]]
* [[phab:project/view/3458/|Mitmachen]]
* ML
** [[phab:project/view/5244/|ML-Governance]]
* Mobile
** [[phab:project/view/1323/|Mobile-Content-Service]]
* [[phab:project/view/1157/|MobileFrontend]]
* [[phab:project/view/5482/|MobileFrontend Content Provider]]
* [[phab:project/view/396/|Modern]]
* [[phab:project/view/355/|MonoBook]]
* [[phab:project/view/2287/|Montage]]
* [[phab:project/view/3379/|MontserratFont]]
* [[phab:project/view/2696/|Monumental]]
* Move
** [[phab:project/view/2671/|Move-Files-To-Commons]]
* Multi
** [[phab:project/view/3112/|Multi-Content-Revisions]]
* MW
** [[phab:project/view/4946/|MW-on-K8s]]
* [[phab:project/view/5331/|mwcli]]
* [[phab:project/view/4910/|Nagf]]
* Navigation
** [[phab:project/view/2055/|Navigation-Popups-Gadget]]
* [[phab:project/view/642/|NavigationTiming]]
* [[phab:project/view/4609/|NearbyPages]]
* [[phab:project/view/4031/|netbox]]
* [[phab:project/view/950/|netops]]
* [[phab:project/view/4282/|NewcomerTasks 1.0 ]]
* [[phab:project/view/4283/|NewcomerTasks 1.1]]
* [[phab:project/view/4284/|NewcomerTasks 1.2]]
* [[phab:project/view/4285/|NewcomerTasks Future Release ]]
* [[phab:project/view/2265/|NewSignupPage]]
* [[phab:project/view/807/|Nimbus]]
* [[phab:project/view/5986/|noc.wikimedia.org]]
* Nonpublic
** [[phab:project/view/1485/|Nonpublic-Information-Access-Policy]]
* [[phab:project/view/5414/|NormalizedException]]
* [[phab:project/view/865/|Nostalgia]]
* [[phab:project/view/182/|Notifications]]
* [[phab:project/view/2734/|OABot]]
* [[phab:project/view/3244/|ObjectFactory]]
* [[phab:project/view/84/|observability]]
* Observability
** [[phab:project/view/5394/|Observability-Alerting]]
** [[phab:project/view/5393/|Observability-Logging]]
** [[phab:project/view/5392/|Observability-Metrics]]
** [[phab:project/view/5395/|Observability-Tracing]]
* [[phab:project/view/5710/|ogv.js]]
* [[phab:project/view/748/|OOjs core]]
* OOjs
** [[phab:project/view/2119/|OOjs-Router]]
* [[phab:project/view/697/|OOUI]]
* [[phab:project/view/916/|OpenBadges]]
* ops
** [[phab:project/view/955/|ops-codfw]]
** [[phab:project/view/5329/|ops-drmrs]]
** [[phab:project/view/1635/|ops-eqdfw]]
** [[phab:project/view/952/|ops-eqiad]]
** [[phab:project/view/1636/|ops-eqord]]
** [[phab:project/view/3127/|ops-eqsin]]
** [[phab:project/view/951/|ops-esams]]
** [[phab:project/view/954/|ops-ulsfo]]
* [[phab:project/view/5061/|Orchestrator]]
* [[phab:project/view/1467/|ORES]]
** [[phab:project/view/3327/|ORES-Support-Checklist]]
* Other
** [[phab:project/view/824/|Other-skins]]
* Outreach
** [[phab:project/view/2537/|Outreach-Programs-Projects]]
* [[phab:project/view/4178/|OWC2020]]
* [[phab:project/view/1782/|Packaging]]
* [[phab:project/view/2885/|Page Content Service]]
* Page
** [[phab:project/view/765/|Page-Previews]]
* [[phab:project/view/731/|PageImages]]
* [[phab:project/view/541/|PageTriage]]
* [[phab:project/view/1753/|PageViewInfo]]
* Pageviews
** [[phab:project/view/3905/|Pageviews-Anomaly]]
** [[phab:project/view/1772/|Pageviews-API]]
* [[phab:project/view/237/|ParserFunctions]]
* [[phab:project/view/487/|Parsoid]]
** [[phab:project/view/1046/|Parsoid-Nowiki]]
** [[phab:project/view/5532/|Parsoid-Read-Views]]
** [[phab:project/view/1286/|Parsoid-Rendering]]
** [[phab:project/view/1045/|Parsoid-Robustness]]
** [[phab:project/view/488/|Parsoid-Serializer]]
** [[phab:project/view/610/|Parsoid-Tests]]
** [[phab:project/view/581/|Parsoid-Tokenizer]]
* Password
** [[phab:project/view/4275/|Password-Reset-Update]]
* [[phab:project/view/4058/|PasswordlessLogin]]
* [[phab:project/view/1648/|PAWS]]
* [[phab:project/view/4800/|Peek]]
* Performance
** [[phab:project/view/4983/|Performance-Device-Lab]]
* [[phab:project/view/5/|Phabricator]]
* [[phab:project/view/4460/|Phabricator Antivandalism Extension]]
* [[phab:project/view/5254/|phabricator maintenance bot]]
* Phabricator
** [[phab:project/view/981/|Phabricator-Bot-Requests]]
* [[phab:project/view/3065/|PhabTaskGraph]]
* [[phab:project/view/3906/|phan]]
** [[phab:project/view/3149/|phan-taint-check-plugin]]
* [[phab:project/view/4578/|Phatality]]
* [[phab:project/view/5900/|PhotoSwipe]]
* PHP
** [[phab:project/view/2349/|PHP-API-for-Wikisource]]
* php
** [[phab:project/view/1581/|php-session-serializer]]
** [[phab:project/view/4060/|php-wmerrors]]
** [[phab:project/view/3222/|phpunit-patch-coverage]]
* [[phab:project/view/880/|PictureGame]]
* Pilot
** [[phab:project/view/5021/|Pilot-Flag]]
* [[phab:project/view/510/|PollNY]]
* [[phab:project/view/4144/|Poncho]]
* [[phab:project/view/437/|PoolCounter]]
* preview
** [[phab:project/view/5365/|preview-environment]]
* [[phab:project/view/2830/|PrivateDomains]]
* [[phab:project/view/1155/|procurement]]
* Prod
** [[phab:project/view/2290/|Prod-Kubernetes]]
* [[phab:project/view/5040/|Product Infrastructure Roadmap]]
* [[phab:project/view/5582/|Product Roadmap]]
* Product
** [[phab:project/view/3348/|Product-Design-Strategy]]
** [[phab:project/view/4982/|Product-Platform Operations]]
* [[phab:project/view/645/|PronunciationRecording]]
* [[phab:project/view/276/|ProofreadPage]]
* [[phab:project/view/2960/|Proton]]
* ProveIt
** [[phab:project/view/2317/|ProveIt-Gadget]]
* puppet
** [[phab:project/view/1807/|puppet-compiler]]
* [[phab:project/view/5750/|Purtle]]
* Push
** [[phab:project/view/2699/|Push-Notification-Service]]
* [[phab:project/view/984/|PyBal]]
* [[phab:project/view/87/|Pywikibot]]
** [[phab:project/view/92/|Pywikibot-archivebot.py]]
* pywikibot
** [[phab:project/view/2250/|pywikibot-bots-FLOSSbot]]
* Pywikibot
** [[phab:project/view/93/|Pywikibot-category.py]]
** [[phab:project/view/755/|Pywikibot-catfiles]]
** [[phab:project/view/1484/|Pywikibot-Commons]]
** [[phab:project/view/95/|Pywikibot-cosmetic-changes.py]]
** [[phab:project/view/1247/|Pywikibot-Flow]]
** [[phab:project/view/99/|Pywikibot-i18n]]
** [[phab:project/view/100/|Pywikibot-interwiki.py]]
** [[phab:project/view/101/|Pywikibot-login.py]]
** [[phab:project/view/1246/|Pywikibot-OAuth]]
** [[phab:project/view/104/|Pywikibot-pagegenerators.py]]
** [[phab:project/view/105/|Pywikibot-redirect.py]]
** [[phab:project/view/1293/|Pywikibot-replace.py]]
** [[phab:project/view/103/|Pywikibot-Scripts]]
** [[phab:project/view/106/|Pywikibot-solve-disambiguation.py]]
** [[phab:project/view/108/|Pywikibot-textlib.py]]
** [[phab:project/view/109/|Pywikibot-weblinkchecker.py]]
* QRpedia
** [[phab:project/view/728/|QRpedia-General]]
* Quality
** [[phab:project/view/4725/|Quality-and-Test-Engineering-Retrospectives]]
* [[phab:project/view/800/|Quarry]]
** [[phab:project/view/2572/|QuarryBot-enwiki]]
* [[phab:project/view/2772/|Quibble]]
* [[phab:project/view/1429/|QuickSurveys]]
* [[phab:project/view/879/|QuizGame]]
* [[phab:project/view/877/|RandomGameUnit]]
* React
** [[phab:project/view/5048/|React-i18n]]
* Reader
** [[phab:project/view/1787/|Reader-research]]
** [[phab:project/view/1538/|Readers-Community-Engagement]]
* [[phab:project/view/3910/|Reading Depth]]
* [[phab:project/view/2740/|Reading List Service]]
* Reading
** [[phab:project/view/1682/|Reading-Web-Local-Wiki-Issues]]
* [[phab:project/view/5506/|Realtime Preview]]
* Recommendation
** [[phab:project/view/2128/|Recommendation-API]]
* [[phab:project/view/5458/|Reconciliation]]
* [[phab:project/view/3840/|Reference Previews]]
* [[phab:project/view/1956/|Refreshed]]
* [[phab:project/view/345/|RegexBlock]]
* [[phab:project/view/688/|RelatedArticles]]
* [[phab:project/view/1276/|ReleaseTaggerBot]]
* [[phab:project/view/2978/|RemexHtml]]
* Reports
** [[phab:project/view/1940/|Reports-bot]]
* [[phab:project/view/1292/|Research ideas]]
* Research
** [[phab:project/view/1396/|Research-and-Data-VisualEditor ]]
** [[phab:project/view/2113/|Research-collaborations]]
** [[phab:project/view/1402/|Research-consulting]]
** [[phab:project/view/4383/|Research-foundational]]
** [[phab:project/view/3243/|Research-landing-page]]
** [[phab:project/view/1395/|Research-management]]
** [[phab:project/view/1394/|Research-outreach]]
* [[phab:project/view/833/|RESTBase]]
** [[phab:project/view/851/|RESTBase-API]]
** [[phab:project/view/834/|RESTBase-Cassandra]]
* restbase
** [[phab:project/view/4389/|restbase-mysql]]
* Retro
** [[phab:project/view/4788/|Retro-Actions]]
* Revision
** [[phab:project/view/1639/|Revision-Slider]]
* [[phab:project/view/1677/|revscoring]]
* Riksarkivet
** [[phab:project/view/5289/|Riksarkivet-NAD]]
* [[phab:project/view/3395/|RunningStat]]
* [[phab:project/view/1449/|Scap]]
* [[phab:project/view/2283/|ScopedCallback]]
* [[phab:project/view/4051/|Scribe]]
* SDAW
** [[phab:project/view/4899/|SDAW-MediaSearch]]
** [[phab:project/view/5877/|SDAW-Search-Improvements]]
** [[phab:project/view/5979/|SDAW-SearchVue]]
* [[phab:project/view/34/|SDC General]]
* SDC
** [[phab:project/view/3936/|SDC-Statements]]
* Search
** [[phab:project/view/5882/|Search-Console-access-request]]
* [[phab:project/view/3915/|Section Editing (Mobile)]]
* Section
** [[phab:project/view/6012/|Section-Level-Image-Suggestions]]
** [[phab:project/view/4668/|Section-Name-Diff]]
** [[phab:project/view/6013/|Section-Topics]]
* [[phab:project/view/4909/|SectionTranslation]]
* [[phab:project/view/4430/|Security Architecture Tooling]]
* [[phab:project/view/4428/|Security Awareness]]
* [[phab:project/view/4424/|Security Incident Response]]
* [[phab:project/view/4423/|Security policy and procedure]]
* [[phab:project/view/4466/|Security Preview]]
* [[phab:project/view/4421/|Security Risk Management]]
* [[phab:project/view/4427/|Security Supplier Assessments]]
* [[phab:project/view/4429/|Security Team AppSec]]
* Security
** [[phab:project/view/5870/|Security-API-Service]]
* [[phab:project/view/976/|Sentry]]
* Server
** [[phab:project/view/5629/|Server-side-upload-request]]
* service
** [[phab:project/view/1062/|service-runner]]
** [[phab:project/view/1072/|service-template-node]]
* Shared
** [[phab:project/view/5959/|Shared-Data-Infrastructure]]
* [[phab:project/view/5125/|Shellbox]]
* Shop
** [[phab:project/view/913/|Shop-Theme]]
* [[phab:project/view/620/|ShoutWiki Calendar]]
* [[phab:project/view/5310/|ShoutWikiAds]]
* Show
** [[phab:project/view/5954/|Show-Recent-Block-History-for-IPs-and-Ranges-Wish-2022]]
* [[phab:project/view/5773/|Similar Editors]]
* [[phab:project/view/186/|SiteMatrix]]
* [[phab:project/view/875/|SiteMetrics]]
* Small
** [[phab:project/view/4657/|Small-Wiki-Toolkits]]
* [[phab:project/view/326/|SocialProfile]]
* [[phab:project/view/4418/|SonarQube Bot]]
* [[phab:project/view/3476/|Soweego]]
* [[phab:project/view/192/|SpamBlacklist]]
* [[phab:project/view/2383/|SpamRegex]]
* [[phab:project/view/5674/|Special:NewLexeme revival]]
* [[phab:project/view/903/|SpellingDictionary]]
* [[phab:project/view/5222/|Spicerack]]
* [[phab:project/view/1928/|Splash]]
* [[phab:project/view/4544/|SRE Program Management]]
* SRE
** [[phab:project/view/956/|SRE-Access-Requests]]
** [[phab:project/view/76/|SRE-swift-storage]]
** [[phab:project/view/1828/|SRE-tools]]
* [[phab:project/view/1364/|Stashbot]]
* [[phab:project/view/3903/|Status]]
* [[phab:project/view/1821/|stewardbots]]
* [[phab:project/view/2134/|Striker]]
* [[phab:project/view/3633/|Structured Data Engineering]]
* [[phab:project/view/657/|StructuredDiscussions]]
* [[phab:project/view/5633/|SuenaWiki Reloaded]]
* [[phab:project/view/2340/|Suggestor]]
* [[phab:project/view/5683/|Superset]]
* [[phab:project/view/3542/|SVG Translate Tool]]
* [[phab:project/view/277/|SyntaxHighlight]]
* [[phab:project/view/4237/|Talk Pages]]
* [[phab:project/view/1582/|TaxonBot]]
* Tech
** [[phab:project/view/4953/|Tech-Product API Roadmap]]
* [[phab:project/view/4610/|Technical blog]]
* Technical
** [[phab:project/view/4654/|Technical-blog-posts]]
** [[phab:project/view/2235/|Technical-Tool-Request]]
* [[phab:project/view/638/|TemplateData]]
* [[phab:project/view/1932/|TemplateStyles]]
* Test
** [[phab:project/view/5022/|Test-Grounds]]
* [[phab:project/view/747/|TextExtracts]]
* [[phab:project/view/1771/|Texvcjs]]
* [[phab:project/view/5678/|Teyora]]
* Thank
** [[phab:project/view/4977/|Thank-You-Page]]
* [[phab:project/view/628/|Thanks]]
* The
** [[phab:project/view/1690/|The-Wikipedia-Adventure]]
* [[phab:project/view/1388/|Theme]]
* [[phab:project/view/4426/|Threat Modeling]]
* [[phab:project/view/1672/|Thumbor]]
* [[phab:project/view/5851/|Thumbor Migration]]
* [[phab:project/view/299/|TimedMediaHandler]]
** [[phab:project/view/1590/|TimedMediaHandler-TimedText]]
** [[phab:project/view/1591/|TimedMediaHandler-Transcode]]
* [[phab:project/view/1912/|Timeless]]
* [[phab:project/view/292/|TitleBlacklist]]
* [[phab:project/view/2423/|tofawiki]]
* Tool
** [[phab:project/view/3261/|Tool-admin]]
** [[phab:project/view/5356/|Tool-ameisenbot]]
** [[phab:project/view/1138/|Tool-anagrimes]]
** [[phab:project/view/762/|Tool-Article-request]]
** [[phab:project/view/1290/|Tool-Attribution-Generator]]
** [[phab:project/view/5166/|Tool-bodh]]
** [[phab:project/view/5355/|Tool-botmahmood]]
** [[phab:project/view/6018/|Tool-boxybot]]
** [[phab:project/view/4955/|Tool-bridgebot]]
** [[phab:project/view/4889/|Tool-commonsapi]]
** [[phab:project/view/4968/|Tool-cycling-init-bot]]
** [[phab:project/view/5401/|Tool-deploy-commands]]
* tool
** [[phab:project/view/5936/|tool-docs]]
* Tool
** [[phab:project/view/5350/|Tool-drift-tracker]]
** [[phab:project/view/775/|Tool-Erwin's-tools]]
** [[phab:project/view/5058/|Tool-explore-TopicContribs]]
** [[phab:project/view/4010/|Tool-extjsonuploader]]
** [[phab:project/view/2834/|Tool-fatameh]]
** [[phab:project/view/4052/|Tool-flickrdash]]
** [[phab:project/view/4972/|Tool-g8-patrol]]
** [[phab:project/view/5290/|Tool-gawa]]
** [[phab:project/view/986/|Tool-Gerrit-Patch-Uploader]]
** [[phab:project/view/4053/|Tool-global-search]]
** [[phab:project/view/766/|Tool-Global-user-contributions]]
** [[phab:project/view/5211/|Tool-image-content-filtration]]
** [[phab:project/view/5135/|Tool-infogeek244-grammabot]]
** [[phab:project/view/4059/|Tool-inteGraality]]
** [[phab:project/view/5348/|Tool-ip]]
** [[phab:project/view/5295/|Tool-itwiki]]
** [[phab:project/view/5333/|Tool-klexiboxen]]
** [[phab:project/view/5955/|Tool-kuwikibot]]
** [[phab:project/view/3999/|Tool-ldap]]
** [[phab:project/view/5342/|Tool-leksem-indonesia]]
** [[phab:project/view/708/|Tool-lists]]
** [[phab:project/view/5182/|Tool-logo-test]]
** [[phab:project/view/5330/|Tool-lokasbot]]
** [[phab:project/view/4678/|Tool-MajavahBot]]
** [[phab:project/view/750/|Tool-Matthewrbowker's-tools]]
** [[phab:project/view/4771/|Tool-mdvt]]
** [[phab:project/view/773/|Tool-meetbot]]
** [[phab:project/view/4746/|Tool-MoeData]]
** [[phab:project/view/112/|Tool-nlwikibots]]
** [[phab:project/view/5016/|Tool-openstack-browser]]
** [[phab:project/view/2045/|Tool-Pageviews]]
** [[phab:project/view/6054/|Tool-pdlarcher]]
** [[phab:project/view/2159/|Tool-Phabricator-bug-status]]
** [[phab:project/view/5049/|Tool-rangeblockfinder]]
** [[phab:project/view/5987/|Tool-rc-discord]]
** [[phab:project/view/5013/|Tool-refill]]
** [[phab:project/view/5549/|Tool-sbdjwhsh]]
** [[phab:project/view/5037/|Tool-search-filters]]
** [[phab:project/view/5138/|Tool-socks]]
** [[phab:project/view/4235/|Tool-spacemedia]]
* tool
** [[phab:project/view/5673/|tool-sql-optimizer]]
* Tool
** [[phab:project/view/5085/|Tool-sqlchecker]]
** [[phab:project/view/4988/|Tool-suggestbotbn]]
** [[phab:project/view/5425/|Tool-test-stats]]
** [[phab:project/view/5518/|Tool-topictagging]]
** [[phab:project/view/743/|Tool-tsreports]]
** [[phab:project/view/4956/|Tool-wiki-importer]]
** [[phab:project/view/5056/|Tool-wikiauthbot]]
** [[phab:project/view/1262/|Tool-Wikidata-Periodic-Table]]
** [[phab:project/view/1847/|Tool-wikiloves]]
* tool
** [[phab:project/view/3758/|tool-ws-cat-browser]]
** [[phab:project/view/3422/|tool-wscontest]]
* Tool
** [[phab:project/view/5325/|Tool-zhwpvg-article-list]]
* [[phab:project/view/539/|Toolforge]]
* [[phab:project/view/5596/|Toolforge Build Service]]
* [[phab:project/view/5969/|Toolforge Jobs framework]]
* [[phab:project/view/5196/|ToolforgeBundle]]
* [[phab:project/view/3224/|Toolhub]]
* tox
** [[phab:project/view/4548/|tox-wikimedia]]
* [[phab:project/view/2263/|Truglass]]
* Twinkle
** [[phab:project/view/5589/|Twinkle-on-Turkish-Wikipedia]]
* Twitter
** [[phab:project/view/4176/|Twitter-to-Commons]]
* Two
** [[phab:project/view/2277/|Two-Column-Edit-Conflict-Merge]]
* UI
** [[phab:project/view/24/|UI-Standardization]]
* ULS
** [[phab:project/view/1116/|ULS-CompactLinks]]
* UNESCO
** [[phab:project/view/2761/|UNESCO-Wikimedian-in-Residence]]
* [[phab:project/view/442/|UniversalLanguageSelector]]
* [[phab:project/view/2204/|UnusedRedirects]]
* [[phab:project/view/402/|UploadWizard]]
* [[phab:project/view/2386/|uprightdiff]]
* [[phab:project/view/4324/|urbanecmbot]]
* User
** [[phab:project/view/2853/|User-Testing]]
* [[phab:project/view/2268/|UserStatus]]
* [[phab:project/view/1069/|utfnormal]]
* Utilities
** [[phab:project/view/446/|Utilities-code-utils]]
** [[phab:project/view/753/|Utilities-grabbers]]
** [[phab:project/view/251/|Utilities-mwdumper]]
** [[phab:project/view/864/|Utilities-UnicodeJS]]
* [[phab:project/view/4269/|Vabatahtlikule]]
* [[phab:project/view/918/|ValueView]]
* [[phab:project/view/166/|Vector]]
* Video (non
** [[phab:project/view/1827/|Video (non-WMF)]]
* [[phab:project/view/2141/|video2commons]]
* [[phab:project/view/4054/|VideoCutTool]]
* [[phab:project/view/4375/|VideoJS player]]
* [[phab:project/view/3383/|VisualCategories]]
* VisualEditor
** [[phab:project/view/480/|VisualEditor-ContentEditable]]
** [[phab:project/view/499/|VisualEditor-ContentLanguage]]
** [[phab:project/view/898/|VisualEditor-CopyPaste]]
** [[phab:project/view/503/|VisualEditor-DataModel]]
** [[phab:project/view/4171/|VisualEditor-Edit Cards ]]
** [[phab:project/view/486/|VisualEditor-EditingTools]]
** [[phab:project/view/612/|VisualEditor-Initialisation]]
** [[phab:project/view/899/|VisualEditor-InterfaceLanguage]]
** [[phab:project/view/1268/|VisualEditor-LanguageTool]]
** [[phab:project/view/1020/|VisualEditor-Links]]
** [[phab:project/view/1021/|VisualEditor-Media]]
** [[phab:project/view/484/|VisualEditor-MediaWiki]]
** [[phab:project/view/2301/|VisualEditor-MediaWiki-2017WikitextEditor]]
** [[phab:project/view/830/|VisualEditor-MediaWiki-Links]]
** [[phab:project/view/828/|VisualEditor-MediaWiki-Media]]
** [[phab:project/view/515/|VisualEditor-MediaWiki-Mobile]]
** [[phab:project/view/1019/|VisualEditor-MediaWiki-Plugins]]
** [[phab:project/view/827/|VisualEditor-MediaWiki-References]]
** [[phab:project/view/829/|VisualEditor-MediaWiki-Templates]]
** [[phab:project/view/4111/|VisualEditor-Mobile-UsabilityImprovements]]
** [[phab:project/view/831/|VisualEditor-Performance]]
** [[phab:project/view/826/|VisualEditor-Tables]]
** [[phab:project/view/2710/|VisualEditor-VisualDiffs]]
* vm
** [[phab:project/view/1234/|vm-requests]]
* [[phab:project/view/729/|VoteNY]]
* VPS
** [[phab:project/view/3158/|VPS-project-Codesearch]]
** [[phab:project/view/819/|VPS-project-Extdist]]
** [[phab:project/view/2825/|VPS-project-icinga2]]
** [[phab:project/view/2103/|VPS-project-Phabricator]]
** [[phab:project/view/5497/|VPS-Project-wikicommunityhealth]]
** [[phab:project/view/543/|VPS-project-Wikistats]]
* [[phab:project/view/5725/|vrts]]
* [[phab:project/view/4431/|Vulnerability Management]]
* [[phab:project/view/2284/|WaitConditionLoop]]
* [[phab:project/view/4340/|WatchTranslations]]
* WDQS
** [[phab:project/view/3027/|WDQS-Optimizer]]
* wdwb
** [[phab:project/view/3532/|wdwb-tech]]
* [[phab:project/view/3165/|Weapon of Mass Description]]
* [[phab:project/view/5933/|Web Team Visual Regression Framework]]
* Web2Cit
** [[phab:project/view/5669/|Web2Cit-Community]]
** [[phab:project/view/5670/|Web2Cit-Core]]
** [[phab:project/view/5760/|Web2Cit-Editor]]
** [[phab:project/view/5929/|Web2Cit-Gadget]]
** [[phab:project/view/5810/|Web2Cit-Monitor]]
** [[phab:project/view/5668/|Web2Cit-Research]]
** [[phab:project/view/5689/|Web2Cit-Server]]
* [[phab:project/view/3619/|WebPageReplay]]
* [[phab:project/view/1777/|WebPageTest]]
* Who
** [[phab:project/view/3836/|Who-Wrote-That]]
* Wiki Loves Monuments FY 2021
** [[phab:project/view/5708/|Wiki Loves Monuments FY 2021-2022]]
* Wiki Loves Monuments FY 2022
** [[phab:project/view/5709/|Wiki Loves Monuments FY 2022-2023]]
* Wiki
** [[phab:project/view/4042/|Wiki-goes-Caribbean]]
** [[phab:project/view/545/|Wiki-Loves-Monuments-Database]]
** [[phab:project/view/550/|Wiki-Loves-Monuments-Sources]]
** [[phab:project/view/2941/|Wiki-Setup]]
* [[phab:project/view/5505/|Wiki2Reveal]]
* [[phab:project/view/2341/|WikiApiary]]
* [[phab:project/view/385/|WikiArticleFeeds]]
* [[phab:project/view/2909/|wikiba.se website]]
* [[phab:project/view/17/|Wikibase (3rd party installations)]]
* Wikibase 
** [[phab:project/view/4930/|Wikibase - Automated Configuration Detection (WikibaseManifest)]]
** [[phab:project/view/4604/|Wikibase - Federated Properties]]
* [[phab:project/view/5094/|Wikibase and Wikidata Architecture Overview]]
* [[phab:project/view/5513/|Wikibase change dispatching scripts to jobs]]
* [[phab:project/view/5958/|Wikibase Cloud Test]]
* [[phab:project/view/5307/|Wikibase OPEN!NEXT]]
* [[phab:project/view/5095/|Wikibase Pingback]]
* [[phab:project/view/5771/|Wikibase Product Platform]]
* [[phab:project/view/5063/|Wikibase Release Strategy]]
* [[phab:project/view/6065/|Wikibase REST API]]
* [[phab:project/view/5003/|Wikibase REST API Schema]]
* [[phab:project/view/5755/|Wikibase Suite]]
* Wikibase
** [[phab:project/view/920/|Wikibase-DataModel]]
** [[phab:project/view/923/|Wikibase-DataModel-JavaScript]]
** [[phab:project/view/922/|Wikibase-DataModel-Serialization]]
** [[phab:project/view/1335/|Wikibase-DataModel-Services]]
** [[phab:project/view/921/|Wikibase-Internal-Serialization]]
** [[phab:project/view/925/|Wikibase-JavaScript-Api]]
** [[phab:project/view/3336/|Wikibase-Lua]]
** [[phab:project/view/1202/|Wikibase-Quality-Constraints]]
** [[phab:project/view/3363/|Wikibase-registry]]
** [[phab:project/view/919/|Wikibase-Serialization-JavaScript]]
* [[phab:project/view/5563/|Wikibase.cloud]]
* [[phab:project/view/1816/|WikibaseMediaInfo]]
* [[phab:project/view/36/|Wikibugs]]
* [[phab:project/view/1641/|WikiCategoryTagCloud]]
* [[phab:project/view/1608/|WikiCite]]
* Wikidata 
** [[phab:project/view/4817/|Wikidata - DS hike]]
** [[phab:project/view/4635/|Wikidata - Reference Treasure Hunt]]
** [[phab:project/view/5200/|Wikidata - Visualisation of Reliability Metrics]]
* [[phab:project/view/5408/|Wikidata Analytics]]
* [[phab:project/view/4521/|Wikidata Design System]]
* [[phab:project/view/3404/|Wikidata Mobile]]
* [[phab:project/view/4990/|Wikidata Query Builder]]
* [[phab:project/view/2901/|Wikidata Query UI]]
* [[phab:project/view/5068/|Wikidata subsets cloud &amp; interop]]
* [[phab:project/view/4242/|Wikidata Tainted References]]
* Wikidata
** [[phab:project/view/4074/|Wikidata-Bridge]]
** [[phab:project/view/1278/|Wikidata-Gadgets]]
** [[phab:project/view/1158/|Wikidata-Page-Banner]]
** [[phab:project/view/2788/|Wikidata-primary-sources]]
** [[phab:project/view/891/|Wikidata-Query-Service]]
** [[phab:project/view/3620/|Wikidata-Termbox]]
* [[phab:project/view/125/|Wikidata.org]]
* [[phab:project/view/270/|wikidiff2]]
* [[phab:project/view/3394/|Wikidocumentaries]]
* [[phab:project/view/342/|WikiEditor]]
* [[phab:project/view/4110/|Wikifeeds]]
* [[phab:project/view/469/|WikiForum]]
* [[phab:project/view/183/|WikiHiero]]
* [[phab:project/view/1466/|Wikilabels]]
* [[phab:project/view/5275/|WikiLambda]]
* Wikilink
** [[phab:project/view/4082/|Wikilink-Tool]]
* [[phab:project/view/445/|WikiLove]]
* wikimaps
** [[phab:project/view/1886/|wikimaps-warper]]
* [[phab:project/view/3215/|Wikimedia Australia]]
* [[phab:project/view/4948/|Wikimedia Chat]]
* [[phab:project/view/1016/|Wikimedia Design Style Guide]]
* [[phab:project/view/5642/|Wikimedia Enterprise DevOps]]
* [[phab:project/view/5520/|Wikimedia Enterprise Discussion]]
* [[phab:project/view/5777/|Wikimedia Enterprise Engineering]]
* [[phab:project/view/5684/|Wikimedia Enterprise External Request]]
* [[phab:project/view/5579/|Wikimedia Enterprise Infrastructure v2]]
* [[phab:project/view/5778/|Wikimedia Enterprise Modeling]]
* [[phab:project/view/5610/|Wikimedia Enterprise QA]]
* [[phab:project/view/5578/|Wikimedia Enterprise SSO]]
* [[phab:project/view/5577/|Wikimedia Enterprise Uptime Monitoring]]
* [[phab:project/view/5569/|Wikimedia Enterprise Web Application]]
* [[phab:project/view/4729/|Wikimedia Meet]]
* [[phab:project/view/4739/|Wikimedia OCR]]
* [[phab:project/view/1871/|Wikimedia Resource Center]]
* Wikimedia
** [[phab:project/view/4752/|Wikimedia-abusefilter-global-maintainers]]
** [[phab:project/view/5185/|Wikimedia-Affiliates-Data-Portal]]
** [[phab:project/view/382/|Wikimedia-Apache-configuration]]
** [[phab:project/view/152/|Wikimedia-Bugzilla]]
** [[phab:project/view/1024/|Wikimedia-Cdb]]
** [[phab:project/view/2479/|Wikimedia-CentralNotice-Administration]]
** [[phab:project/view/4941/|Wikimedia-Developer-Portal]]
** [[phab:project/view/447/|Wikimedia-Etherpad]]
** [[phab:project/view/188/|Wikimedia-Extension-setup]]
** [[phab:project/view/2893/|Wikimedia-FR-Tech-Projects]]
** [[phab:project/view/2892/|Wikimedia-FR-Tech-Systems]]
** [[phab:project/view/2715/|Wikimedia-Fundraising-Banners]]
** [[phab:project/view/1130/|Wikimedia-Fundraising-Campaigns]]
** [[phab:project/view/404/|Wikimedia-Fundraising-CiviCRM]]
** [[phab:project/view/1524/|Wikimedia-GitHub]]
** [[phab:project/view/815/|Wikimedia-IEG-grant-review]]
** [[phab:project/view/143/|Wikimedia-Interwiki-links]]
* wikimedia
** [[phab:project/view/2751/|wikimedia-irc-libera]]
* Wikimedia
** [[phab:project/view/227/|Wikimedia-IRC-RC-Server]]
** [[phab:project/view/179/|Wikimedia-Language-setup]]
** [[phab:project/view/772/|Wikimedia-Logstash]]
** [[phab:project/view/190/|Wikimedia-Mailing-lists]]
** [[phab:project/view/5193/|Wikimedia-Minify]]
* wikimedia
** [[phab:project/view/2729/|wikimedia-page-library]]
* Wikimedia
** [[phab:project/view/2666/|Wikimedia-Phabricator-Extensions]]
** [[phab:project/view/413/|Wikimedia-Planet]]
** [[phab:project/view/1619/|Wikimedia-Portals]]
** [[phab:project/view/165/|Wikimedia-Rdbms]]
** [[phab:project/view/178/|Wikimedia-Site-requests]]
** [[phab:project/view/5625/|Wikimedia-Small-Projects-User-Group-Projects]]
** [[phab:project/view/211/|Wikimedia-SVG-rendering]]
** [[phab:project/view/2949/|Wikimedia-Takedown-Tools]]
** [[phab:project/view/4853/|Wikimedia-Tech-Talks]]
** [[phab:project/view/2285/|Wikimedia-Timestamp]]
** [[phab:project/view/1255/|Wikimedia-Video]]
** [[phab:project/view/740/|Wikimedia-Wikimania-Scholarships]]
* [[phab:project/view/536/|wikimedia.biterg.io]]
* [[phab:project/view/4822/|WikimediaApiPortal]]
* [[phab:project/view/4924/|WikimediaDebug]]
* [[phab:project/view/3907/|WikimediaEditorTasks]]
* [[phab:project/view/3496/|wikimediafoundation.org]]
* [[phab:project/view/426/|WikimediaMessages]]
* WikimediaUI
** [[phab:project/view/5064/|WikimediaUI-Base]]
* [[phab:project/view/5220/|Wikimini.org]]
* [[phab:project/view/3314/|Wikinity]]
* Wikipedia
** [[phab:project/view/4393/|Wikipedia-Preview]]
* [[phab:project/view/4156/|wikipedia.de]]
* [[phab:project/view/4090/|WikiPEG]]
* [[phab:project/view/3857/|Wikiportrait]]
* WikiProject
** [[phab:project/view/3493/|WikiProject-Biodiversity]]
** [[phab:project/view/3356/|WikiProject-ShEx]]
** [[phab:project/view/1640/|WikiProject-tools]]
* [[phab:project/view/5868/|WikiSEO]]
* Wikispeech
** [[phab:project/view/4379/|Wikispeech-Jobrunner]]
** [[phab:project/view/4349/|Wikispeech-Speech-Data-Collector]]
** [[phab:project/view/4344/|Wikispeech-Text-to-Speech]]
* [[phab:project/view/4250/|Wikispore]]
* [[phab:project/view/5564/|Wikistories]]
* [[phab:project/view/531/|wikitech.wikimedia.org]]
* [[phab:project/view/871/|WikiTextLoggedInOut]]
* [[phab:project/view/5672/|WikiWho]]
* WLM
** [[phab:project/view/4325/|WLM-Italy-Finder]]
** [[phab:project/view/4327/|WLM-Italy-Finder-App]]
** [[phab:project/view/4326/|WLM-Italy-Stats]]
* WLX
** [[phab:project/view/1741/|WLX-Jury]]
* WM
** [[phab:project/view/668/|WM-Bot]]
** [[phab:project/view/4782/|WMCH-Cronos]]
** [[phab:project/view/4830/|WMCH-Infrastructure]]
** [[phab:project/view/4799/|WMCH-Minipedia]]
** [[phab:project/view/3712/|WMCZ-General]]
** [[phab:project/view/5305/|WMCZ-Stats]]
** [[phab:project/view/3391/|WMCZ-Tracker]]
** [[phab:project/view/4399/|WMCZ-Web]]
** [[phab:project/view/5928/|WMDE-FUN-Tech-Payment-Refactoring]]
** [[phab:project/view/1688/|WMDE-Fundraising-Tech]]
** [[phab:project/view/5559/|WMDE-GeoInfo-FocusArea]]
** [[phab:project/view/2821/|WMDE-New-Editors-Banner-Campaigns]]
* wmde
** [[phab:project/view/5865/|wmde-team-b-tech]]
* WMDE
** [[phab:project/view/1702/|WMDE-Tech-Communication-Mentoring-And-Events]]
** [[phab:project/view/5892/|WMDE-technical-needs-from-WMF]]
** [[phab:project/view/4529/|WMDE-Templates-FocusArea]]
* wmde
** [[phab:project/view/5864/|wmde-wikidata-tech]]
* [[phab:project/view/3609/|WMEE 101+]]
* WMEE
** [[phab:project/view/3560/|WMEE-gen]]
* WMF
** [[phab:project/view/42/|WMF-Annual-Report]]
** [[phab:project/view/151/|WMF-General-or-Unknown]]
** [[phab:project/view/811/|WMF-JobQueue]]
** [[phab:project/view/5595/|WMF-Safety-Survey]]
* wmf
** [[phab:project/view/4861/|wmf-sre-laptop]]
** [[phab:project/view/4627/|wmfdata-python]]
* [[phab:project/view/5611/|wmfdb]]
* WMIT
** [[phab:project/view/5827/|WMIT-CiviCRM]]
** [[phab:project/view/5047/|WMIT-Infrastructure]]
** [[phab:project/view/5241/|WMIT-LimeSurvey]]
* WMNO
** [[phab:project/view/3255/|WMNO-General]]
** [[phab:project/view/5459/|WMNO-Knowledge-Equity]]
** [[phab:project/view/3141/|WMNO-Sámi]]
* WMSE
** [[phab:project/view/5741/|WMSE-A-Community-for-Everybody-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5731/|WMSE-Advocacy-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5745/|WMSE-Association-Involvement-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5734/|WMSE-Bug-Reporting-and-Translation-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5738/|WMSE-Community-Support-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5440/|WMSE-Content-partnerships-support-2021]]
** [[phab:project/view/5445/|WMSE-Content-partnerships-support-2021-Capacity-building]]
** [[phab:project/view/5442/|WMSE-Content-partnerships-support-2021-Communication]]
** [[phab:project/view/5446/|WMSE-Content-partnerships-support-2021-Fundraising]]
** [[phab:project/view/5448/|WMSE-Content-partnerships-support-2021-Helpdesk]]
** [[phab:project/view/5444/|WMSE-Content-partnerships-support-2021-IGO/INGO]]
** [[phab:project/view/5441/|WMSE-Content-partnerships-support-2021-Project-management]]
** [[phab:project/view/5443/|WMSE-Content-partnerships-support-2021-Research]]
** [[phab:project/view/5447/|WMSE-Content-partnerships-support-2021-Software-development]]
** [[phab:project/view/5613/|WMSE-Content-partnerships-support-2021-Strategic-data-uploads]]
** [[phab:project/view/5739/|WMSE-Development-Support-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5749/|WMSE-Exchange-of-Experiences-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5748/|WMSE-Experimental-partnerships-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5746/|WMSE-FOSS-for-the-Association-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5699/|WMSE-GLAM-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5609/|WMSE-International-copyright-2021]]
** [[phab:project/view/5728/|WMSE-Kalmar-läns-museum-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5732/|WMSE-Knowledge-in-Crisis-Situations-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5608/|WMSE-Lowering-barriers-for-WikiGap-2021]]
** [[phab:project/view/5744/|WMSE-Organisational-Development-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5742/|WMSE-Partnerships-for-WikiGap-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5730/|WMSE-Presentations-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/3220/|WMSE-Project-leftovers]]
** [[phab:project/view/3883/|WMSE-SMHI-2019]]
** [[phab:project/view/5747/|WMSE-Supporting-the-European-Hub-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5737/|WMSE-Trust-Making-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5733/|WMSE-Visibility-Making-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5740/|WMSE-Wiki-Loves-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5107/|WMSE-Wikidata-for-authority-control-2021]]
** [[phab:project/view/5743/|WMSE-Wikipedia-for-All-of-Sweden-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5729/|WMSE-Wikipedia-in-Education-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/4447/|WMSE-Wikispeech-for-AI-2020]]
** [[phab:project/view/5735/|WMSE-Wikispeech-Maintenance-and-Support-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5736/|WMSE-Wikispeech-Speech-Data-Collector-Tool-2022]]
* [[phab:project/view/2764/|WoOgLeShades]]
* [[phab:project/view/4842/|WPCleaner]]
* [[phab:project/view/4979/|WPtouch]]
* [[phab:project/view/3514/|WrappedString]]
* [[phab:project/view/3917/|WS Export]]
* [[phab:project/view/4898/|WVUI]]
* [[phab:project/view/1182/|XAnalytics]]
* [[phab:project/view/4987/|XMPReader]]
* [[phab:project/view/803/|XTools]]
* [[phab:project/view/210/|Znuny]]
=== Umbrella projects ===
* [[phab:project/view/1887/|BlueSpice]]
* Cloud
** [[phab:project/view/832/|Cloud-Services]]
* Google
** [[phab:project/view/2540/|Google-Summer-of-Code]]
* LDAP
** [[phab:project/view/3071/|LDAP-Extensions]]
* MediaWiki
** [[phab:project/view/1539/|MediaWiki-Releasing]]
** [[phab:project/view/5614/|MediaWiki-SettingsBuilder]]
* [[phab:project/view/4085/|OpenRefine]]
* [[phab:project/view/2206/|Outreachy]]
* [[phab:project/view/5460/|Platform Engineering Code Jam]]
* Projects
** [[phab:project/view/2829/|Projects-Cleanup]]
* [[phab:project/view/2334/|Reading Epics]]
* Recurring
** [[phab:project/view/1311/|Recurring-Donations]]
* [[phab:project/view/2453/|Release Pipeline]]
* [[phab:project/view/3610/|rsc assessment]]
* Security
** [[phab:project/view/4420/|Security-Team-Services]]
* [[phab:project/view/3789/|Shape Expressions]]
* Social
** [[phab:project/view/1009/|Social-Tools]]
* [[phab:project/view/3632/|StructuredDataOnCommons]]
* [[phab:project/view/1696/|Teahouse]]
* [[phab:project/view/5976/|The Signpost]]
* [[phab:project/view/703/|Tools]]
* [[phab:project/view/483/|VisualEditor]]
* VPS
** [[phab:project/view/525/|VPS-Projects]]
* [[phab:project/view/5081/|wbstack]]
* [[phab:project/view/5593/|Web2Cit]]
* Wiki
** [[phab:project/view/575/|Wiki-Loves-Monuments]]
** [[phab:project/view/3345/|Wikibase-UserGroup]]
* [[phab:project/view/71/|Wikidata]]
* [[phab:project/view/2292/|Wikidata Lexicographical data]]
* [[phab:project/view/1663/|Wikispeech]]
* WMDE
** [[phab:project/view/3133/|WMDE-Blueprint-tickets]]
** [[phab:project/view/3295/|WMDE-TechWish-Maintenance]]
** [[phab:project/view/5799/|WMDE-TechWish-Survey]]
* [[phab:project/view/4636/|WMEE]]
* [[phab:project/view/4034/|WMFI]]
* [[phab:project/view/3128/|WMNO]]
* [[phab:project/view/2480/|WMSE]]
=== Tags ===
* [[phab:project/view/171/|Accessibility]]
* affects
** [[phab:project/view/5266/|affects-Daty]]
** [[phab:project/view/4381/|affects-Kiwix-and-openZIM]]
** [[phab:project/view/6000/|affects-Scribe-Keyboards]]
** [[phab:project/view/4298/|affects-translatewiki.net]]
* artificial
** [[phab:project/view/2454/|artificial-intelligence]]
* audits
** [[phab:project/view/1317/|audits-data-retention]]
* [[phab:project/view/4716/|AWS]]
* Bengali
** [[phab:project/view/2393/|Bengali-Sites]]
* Beta
** [[phab:project/view/1563/|Beta-Cluster-reproducible]]
** [[phab:project/view/58/|Beta-Feature]]
* Browser
** [[phab:project/view/1298/|Browser-Support-Android-Google-Chrome]]
** [[phab:project/view/350/|Browser-Support-Apple-Safari]]
** [[phab:project/view/284/|Browser-Support-Firefox]]
** [[phab:project/view/362/|Browser-Support-Google-Chrome]]
** [[phab:project/view/164/|Browser-Support-Internet-Explorer]]
** [[phab:project/view/4575/|Browser-Support-KaiOS]]
** [[phab:project/view/1433/|Browser-Support-Microsoft-Edge]]
** [[phab:project/view/233/|Browser-Support-Opera]]
** [[phab:project/view/4456/|Browser-support-print-media]]
** [[phab:project/view/1617/|Browser-Tests]]
* [[phab:project/view/4922/|castor]]
* Chinese
** [[phab:project/view/2409/|Chinese-Sites]]
* ci
** [[phab:project/view/4177/|ci-test-error]]
* Cloud
** [[phab:project/view/5638/|Cloud-Services-Origin-Alert]]
** [[phab:project/view/5639/|Cloud-Services-Origin-Team]]
** [[phab:project/view/5637/|Cloud-Services-Origin-User]]
** [[phab:project/view/5635/|Cloud-Services-Worktype-Maintenance]]
** [[phab:project/view/5634/|Cloud-Services-Worktype-Project]]
** [[phab:project/view/5636/|Cloud-Services-Worktype-Unplanned]]
* Code
** [[phab:project/view/3310/|Code-Health]]
** [[phab:project/view/4622/|Code-Health-DevEd]]
** [[phab:project/view/4720/|Code-Health-DevEd-Curriculum]]
** [[phab:project/view/3670/|Code-Health-Help-Wanted]]
** [[phab:project/view/5000/|Code-Health-Objective]]
** [[phab:project/view/4168/|Code-Health-Office-Hours]]
** [[phab:project/view/3144/|Code-Stewardship-Reviews]]
* Community
** [[phab:project/view/175/|Community-consensus-needed]]
** [[phab:project/view/1482/|Community-Wishlist-Survey-2015]]
** [[phab:project/view/2420/|Community-Wishlist-Survey-2016]]
** [[phab:project/view/3078/|Community-Wishlist-Survey-2017]]
* [[phab:project/view/1093/|Composer]]
* [[phab:project/view/4365/|ContentSecurityPolicy]]
* covid
** [[phab:project/view/4648/|covid-19]]
* Croatian
** [[phab:project/view/5624/|Croatian-Sites]]
* [[phab:project/view/145/|Crosswiki]]
* [[phab:project/view/2149/|CSS]]
* Dagbani
** [[phab:project/view/5538/|Dagbani-Sites]]
* Datacenter
** [[phab:project/view/3571/|Datacenter-Switchover]]
* [[phab:project/view/4656/|Dependency injection]]
* [[phab:project/view/157/|Design]]
* [[phab:project/view/4096/|Desktop]]
* [[phab:project/view/3521/|Developer Productivity]]
* Developer
** [[phab:project/view/1098/|Developer-notice]]
* [[phab:project/view/987/|Documentation]]
* EngProd
** [[phab:project/view/4773/|EngProd-Virtual-Hackathon]]
* [[phab:project/view/942/|Epic]]
* Esperanto
** [[phab:project/view/1775/|Esperanto-Sites]]
* [[phab:project/view/2552/|events]]
* FR
** [[phab:project/view/2062/|FR-Email]]
** [[phab:project/view/1654/|FR-Fraud]]
* Gender
** [[phab:project/view/3108/|Gender-Support]]
* [[phab:project/view/169/|good first task]]
* [[phab:project/view/81/|Graphite]]
* Gujarati
** [[phab:project/view/4825/|Gujarati-Sites]]
* Hindi
** [[phab:project/view/2418/|Hindi-Sites]]
* [[phab:project/view/5351/|HTML5]]
* [[phab:project/view/162/|HTTPS]]
* Hungarian
** [[phab:project/view/5693/|Hungarian-Sites]]
* [[phab:project/view/156/|I18n]]
* IABot
** [[phab:project/view/6003/|IABot-Priority-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/6004/|IABot-Priority-Eastern-Europe-Former-USSR]]
* [[phab:project/view/184/|IPv6]]
* IRC
** [[phab:project/view/1773/|IRC-Meetings]]
* [[phab:project/view/267/|JavaScript]]
* [[phab:project/view/83/|Jenkins]]
* [[phab:project/view/2361/|Kubernetes]]
* [[phab:project/view/4981/|Language codes]]
* [[phab:project/view/982/|LDAP]]
* [[phab:project/view/3827/|Logos]]
* Malayalam
** [[phab:project/view/2417/|Malayalam-Sites]]
* mariadb
** [[phab:project/view/4313/|mariadb-optimizer-bug]]
* [[phab:project/view/2691/|Microcontribution]]
* [[phab:project/view/372/|Mobile]]
* [[phab:project/view/1096/|Notice]]
* [[phab:project/view/1852/|Paper]]
* Patch
** [[phab:project/view/1825/|Patch-Needs-Improvement]]
* patch
** [[phab:project/view/418/|patch-welcome]]
* [[phab:project/view/196/|Performance Issue]]
* Performance
** [[phab:project/view/1559/|Performance-Team-publish]]
* periodic
** [[phab:project/view/2807/|periodic-update]]
* [[phab:project/view/3825/|PermanentlyPrivate]]
* Persona
** [[phab:project/view/1803/|Persona-Active-Editor]]
** [[phab:project/view/1801/|Persona-Active-Reader]]
** [[phab:project/view/1800/|Persona-Casual-Reader]]
** [[phab:project/view/1802/|Persona-New-Editor]]
** [[phab:project/view/1804/|Persona-Power-Editor]]
** [[phab:project/view/1805/|Persona-Vandal]]
* [[phab:project/view/3267/|PHP 7.2 support]]
* [[phab:project/view/3494/|PHP 7.3 support]]
* [[phab:project/view/4107/|PHP 7.4 support]]
* [[phab:project/view/4652/|PHP 8.0 support]]
* [[phab:project/view/5132/|PHP 8.1 support]]
* [[phab:project/view/6053/|PHP 8.2 support]]
* [[phab:project/view/4665/|Pikk plaan]]
* Plural
** [[phab:project/view/3172/|Plural-Support]]
* [[phab:project/view/4411/|PM]]
* [[phab:project/view/2339/|PostgreSQL]]
* [[phab:project/view/1205/|Privacy]]
* Product
** [[phab:project/view/5001/|Product-Feature]]
* [[phab:project/view/1542/|Proposal]]
* [[phab:project/view/78/|Puppet]]
* Python3
** [[phab:project/view/4522/|Python3-Porting]]
* Pywikibot
** [[phab:project/view/1774/|Pywikibot-Announce]]
** [[phab:project/view/97/|Pywikibot-Documentation]]
** [[phab:project/view/102/|Pywikibot-network]]
** [[phab:project/view/1260/|Pywikibot-RfCs]]
** [[phab:project/view/107/|Pywikibot-tests]]
** [[phab:project/view/110/|Pywikibot-Wikidata]]
* Quality
** [[phab:project/view/4342/|Quality-and-Test-Engineering-Office-Hours]]
* [[phab:project/view/914/|Regression]]
* RESTBase
** [[phab:project/view/837/|RESTBase-architecture]]
* [[phab:project/view/4606/|RFS]]
* [[phab:project/view/1280/|RTL]]
* [[phab:project/view/1618/|Ruby]]
* Russian
** [[phab:project/view/2621/|Russian-Sites]]
* Schema
** [[phab:project/view/161/|Schema-change]]
** [[phab:project/view/1494/|Schema-change-in-production]]
* [[phab:project/view/4493/|SecTeam Discussion]]
* SecTeam
** [[phab:project/view/5180/|SecTeam-Processed]]
** [[phab:project/view/5181/|SecTeam-wikimedia-project-event]]
* [[phab:project/view/4573/|Security]]
* [[phab:project/view/1163/|SEO]]
* Serbian
** [[phab:project/view/3791/|Serbian-Sites]]
* Service
** [[phab:project/view/838/|Service-Architecture]]
** [[phab:project/view/1305/|Service-deployment-requests]]
* [[phab:project/view/4063/|Skipped QA]]
* Software
** [[phab:project/view/1443/|Software-Licensing]]
* Spanish
** [[phab:project/view/2564/|Spanish-Sites]]
* [[phab:project/view/2085/|Spike]]
* [[phab:project/view/2752/|SQLite]]
* [[phab:project/view/1541/|Story]]
* [[phab:project/view/1465/|Surveys]]
* [[phab:project/view/1167/|Sustainability]]
* [[phab:project/view/5762/|SVG]]
* Sysadmin
** [[phab:project/view/1099/|Sysadmin-notice]]
* Tamil
** [[phab:project/view/2416/|Tamil-Sites]]
* Tech
** [[phab:project/view/3302/|Tech-Ambassadors]]
** [[phab:project/view/609/|Technical-Debt]]
* Test
** [[phab:project/view/3223/|Test-Coverage]]
** [[phab:project/view/4524/|Testing-Roadblocks]]
* [[phab:project/view/138/|TestMe]]
* Thai
** [[phab:project/view/5950/|Thai-Sites]]
* [[phab:project/view/2835/|Tor]]
* Tracking
** [[phab:project/view/134/|Tracking-Neverending]]
* Turkish
** [[phab:project/view/3231/|Turkish-Sites]]
* Unplanned
** [[phab:project/view/1318/|Unplanned-Sprint-Work]]
* Unstewarded
** [[phab:project/view/5503/|Unstewarded-production-error]]
* [[phab:project/view/153/|Upstream]]
* User
** [[phab:project/view/1097/|User-notice]]
* UX
** [[phab:project/view/3687/|UX-Debt]]
* [[phab:project/view/825/|Verified]]
* [[phab:project/view/1355/|Voice &amp; Tone]]
* [[phab:project/view/5602/|Vue.js]]
* Vuln
** [[phab:project/view/1345/|Vuln-Authn/Session]]
** [[phab:project/view/4258/|Vuln-CachePollution]]
** [[phab:project/view/907/|Vuln-CSRF]]
** [[phab:project/view/1340/|Vuln-DirectObjectReference]]
** [[phab:project/view/1446/|Vuln-DoS]]
** [[phab:project/view/908/|Vuln-Infoleak]]
** [[phab:project/view/905/|Vuln-Inject]]
** [[phab:project/view/4260/|Vuln-InsufficientMonitoring]]
** [[phab:project/view/1344/|Vuln-Misconfiguration]]
** [[phab:project/view/1343/|Vuln-MissingAuthz]]
** [[phab:project/view/1341/|Vuln-OpenRedirect]]
** [[phab:project/view/4259/|Vuln-SerDe]]
** [[phab:project/view/1342/|Vuln-VulnComponent]]
** [[phab:project/view/906/|Vuln-XSS]]
** [[phab:project/view/4261/|Vuln-XXE]]
* WCAG
** [[phab:project/view/3289/|WCAG-Level-A]]
** [[phab:project/view/3290/|WCAG-Level-AA]]
** [[phab:project/view/3291/|WCAG-Level-AAA]]
* web
** [[phab:project/view/5833/|web-team-revisit-later]]
* [[phab:project/view/6024/|Wikidata data quality and trust]]
* Wikimedia
** [[phab:project/view/4182/|Wikimedia-database-issue]]
** [[phab:project/view/2953/|Wikimedia-extension-review-queue]]
** [[phab:project/view/2143/|Wikimedia-Incident]]
** [[phab:project/view/2670/|Wikimedia-maintenance-script-run]]
** [[phab:project/view/1055/|Wikimedia-production-error]]
** [[phab:project/view/5427/|Wikimedia-Slow-DB-Query]]
* WMDE
** [[phab:project/view/4433/|WMDE-Fundraising-CFR]]
** [[phab:project/view/1943/|WMDE-Fundraising-CN]]
* WorkType
** [[phab:project/view/1454/|WorkType-Maintenance]]
** [[phab:project/view/1453/|WorkType-NewFunctionality]]
* [[phab:project/view/836/|Zuul]]
=== User groups ===
* [[phab:project/view/4876/|Abstract Wikipedia team]]
* Africa
** [[phab:project/view/2858/|Africa-Wikimedia-Developers]]
* All
** [[phab:project/view/1117/|All-and-every-Wikisource]]
** [[phab:project/view/1115/|All-and-every-Wiktionary]]
* Anti
** [[phab:project/view/2660/|Anti-Harassment]]
* [[phab:project/view/5960/|AvoinGLAM]]
* [[phab:project/view/1942/|Brickimedia]]
* Campaign
** [[phab:project/view/5430/|Campaign-Tools]]
* cloud
** [[phab:project/view/2773/|cloud-services-team]]
* Code
** [[phab:project/view/4165/|Code-Health-Group]]
** [[phab:project/view/3621/|Code-Health-Metrics]]
** [[phab:project/view/3766/|Code-Review-Workgroup]]
* [[phab:project/view/1118/|Commons]]
* Community
** [[phab:project/view/3448/|Community-Relations]]
** [[phab:project/view/945/|Community-Resources]]
** [[phab:project/view/1274/|Community-Tech]]
* Content
** [[phab:project/view/5846/|Content-Transform-Team]]
* Data
** [[phab:project/view/5462/|Data-Engineering]]
** [[phab:project/view/5980/|Data-Engineering-Icebox]]
** [[phab:project/view/5463/|Data-Engineering-Kanban]]
** [[phab:project/view/5682/|Data-Engineering-Radar]]
** [[phab:project/view/4996/|Data-Persistence]]
** [[phab:project/view/5050/|Data-Persistence (Consultation)]]
* [[phab:project/view/1060/|DBA]]
* DC
** [[phab:project/view/1784/|DC-Ops]]
* Design
** [[phab:project/view/839/|Design-Research]]
** [[phab:project/view/5858/|Design-Systems-Team]]
* Developer
** [[phab:project/view/33/|Developer-Advocacy]]
* Diffusion
** [[phab:project/view/85/|Diffusion-Repository-Administrators]]
* Discovery
** [[phab:project/view/1899/|Discovery-Portal-Backlog]]
** [[phab:project/view/1849/|Discovery-Search]]
* [[phab:project/view/3728/|Editing QA]]
* Editing
** [[phab:project/view/2823/|Editing-team]]
* [[phab:project/view/1588/|ELiSo]]
* English
** [[phab:project/view/5856/|English-Arbitration-Committee]]
** [[phab:project/view/2604/|English-Wikipedia-New-Pages-Patrol]]
* Front
** [[phab:project/view/1616/|Front-end-Standards-Group]]
* Fundraising Tech 
** [[phab:project/view/6067/|Fundraising Tech - Chaos Crew]]
* Fundraising
** [[phab:project/view/1390/|Fundraising-Analysis]]
** [[phab:project/view/41/|Fundraising-Backlog]]
* [[phab:project/view/5517/|Generated Data Platform]]
* Gerrit
** [[phab:project/view/3957/|Gerrit-Privilege-Requests]]
* [[phab:project/view/2086/|GLAM]]
* Growth
** [[phab:project/view/1114/|Growth-Team]]
* Igbo
** [[phab:project/view/5069/|Igbo-Wikimedians-User-Group]]
* [[phab:project/view/31/|importbots]]
* Indiana
** [[phab:project/view/5949/|Indiana-Wikimedians]]
* Indic
** [[phab:project/view/5147/|Indic-MediaWiki-Developers]]
** [[phab:project/view/3748/|Indic-TechCom]]
* Infrastructure
** [[phab:project/view/5387/|Infrastructure-Foundations]]
* Inuka
** [[phab:project/view/4300/|Inuka-Team]]
* Koninklijke
** [[phab:project/view/5086/|Koninklijke-Bibliotheek-Team-Wiki]]
* Language
** [[phab:project/view/18/|Language-Team]]
* Machine
** [[phab:project/view/1901/|Machine-Learning-Team]]
* MediaWiki
** [[phab:project/view/1005/|MediaWiki-Farmers]]
** [[phab:project/view/3956/|MediaWiki-Gerrit-Group-Requests]]
** [[phab:project/view/1071/|MediaWiki-Stakeholders-Group]]
* Moderator
** [[phab:project/view/5869/|Moderator-Tools-Team]]
* [[phab:project/view/3901/|Moegirlpedia]]
* [[phab:project/view/5664/|NFDI]]
* Offline
** [[phab:project/view/2387/|Offline-Working-Group]]
* Performance
** [[phab:project/view/1212/|Performance-Team]]
* [[phab:project/view/3654/|Platform Engineering]]
* [[phab:project/view/4971/|Platform Engineering Roadmap Decision Making]]
* [[phab:project/view/3696/|Platform Team Workboards]]
* Policy
** [[phab:project/view/1869/|Policy-Admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/4425/|Privacy Engineering]]
* Product
** [[phab:project/view/3313/|Product-Analytics]]
** [[phab:project/view/2726/|Product-Infrastructure-Team-Backlog]]
** [[phab:project/view/3468/|Product-QA]]
* Project
** [[phab:project/view/835/|Project-Admins]]
* QTE
** [[phab:project/view/5189/|QTE-TestingOverview]]
** [[phab:project/view/4403/|Quality-and-Test-Engineering-Team (QTE)]]
* Readers
** [[phab:project/view/67/|Readers-Web-Backlog]]
* Reading
** [[phab:project/view/1199/|Reading-Admin]]
** [[phab:project/view/2785/|Reading-Web-Third-Party-Support]]
* Release
** [[phab:project/view/20/|Release-Engineering-Team]]
* [[phab:project/view/45/|Research]]
** [[phab:project/view/1864/|Research-Backlog]]
* [[phab:project/view/4630/|secscrum]]
* Security
** [[phab:project/view/1179/|Security-Team]]
* [[phab:project/view/3775/|serviceops]]
** [[phab:project/view/6002/|serviceops-collab]]
** [[phab:project/view/4114/|serviceops-radar]]
* [[phab:project/view/988/|ShoutWiki]]
* [[phab:project/view/5008/|Smithsonian]]
* [[phab:project/view/1025/|SRE]]
* [[phab:project/view/5391/|SRE Observability]]
* SRE
** [[phab:project/view/4626/|SRE-OnFire]]
* Stewards
** [[phab:project/view/1596/|Stewards-and-global-tools]]
* Structured
** [[phab:project/view/4223/|Structured-Data-Backlog]]
* tech
** [[phab:project/view/5179/|tech-decision-forum]]
* The
** [[phab:project/view/1270/|The-Wikipedia-Library]]
* Toolforge
** [[phab:project/view/2457/|Toolforge-standards-committee]]
* [[phab:project/view/1201/|Traffic]]
** [[phab:project/view/5516/|Traffic-Icebox]]
* [[phab:project/view/991/|translatewiki.net]]
* [[phab:project/view/13/|Triagers]]
* [[phab:project/view/5374/|Trust and Safety Tools Team Backlog]]
* Trust
** [[phab:project/view/1058/|Trust-and-Safety]]
** [[phab:project/view/3104/|Trusted-Contributors]]
* [[phab:project/view/3998/|Uncyclomedia]]
* Wiki
** [[phab:project/view/3359/|Wiki-Loves-Love]]
** [[phab:project/view/2588/|Wiki-Project-Med]]
* [[phab:project/view/4286/|WikiClubWest]]
* [[phab:project/view/6016/|Wikidata Dev Team]]
* Wikidata
** [[phab:project/view/3402/|Wikidata-Campsite]]
** [[phab:project/view/5417/|Wikidata-WikiProject-Music]]
* [[phab:project/view/1920/|Wikifab]]
* [[phab:project/view/4317/|WikiJournals]]
* [[phab:project/view/4929/|Wikimedia Enterprise]]
* [[phab:project/view/2836/|Wikimedia Taiwan]]
* Wikimedia
** [[phab:project/view/4329/|Wikimedia-and-Libraries-User-Group]]
** [[phab:project/view/3171/|Wikimedia-Cameroon-User-Group]]
** [[phab:project/view/1043/|Wikimedia-DC]]
** [[phab:project/view/6066/|Wikimedia-España]]
** [[phab:project/view/363/|Wikimedia-Fundraising]]
** [[phab:project/view/2367/|Wikimedia-Israel-Hackers]]
* wikimedia
** [[phab:project/view/2744/|wikimedia-page-library-tshirt]]
* Wikimedia
** [[phab:project/view/5197/|Wikimedia-Small-Projects-User-Group]]
** [[phab:project/view/2865/|Wikimedia-Small-Projects-User-Group-TechCom]]
** [[phab:project/view/2990/|Wikimedia-User-Group-Basque]]
** [[phab:project/view/2677/|Wikimedia-Venezuela]]
* Wikipedia
** [[phab:project/view/489/|Wikipedia-Android-App-Backlog]]
** [[phab:project/view/782/|Wikipedia-iOS-App-Backlog]]
* Wikisource
** [[phab:project/view/1334/|Wikisource-Community-User-Group]]
* Wikispeech
** [[phab:project/view/1979/|Wikispeech-KTH]]
** [[phab:project/view/1980/|Wikispeech-STTS]]
** [[phab:project/view/1978/|Wikispeech-WMSE]]
* Wiktionary
** [[phab:project/view/4363/|Wiktionary-fr]]
* WMDE
** [[phab:project/view/1585/|WMDE-Analytics-Engineering]]
** [[phab:project/view/1944/|WMDE-Design]]
** [[phab:project/view/2276/|WMDE-FUN-Team]]
** [[phab:project/view/2323/|WMDE-TechWish]]
* WMF
** [[phab:project/view/4805/|WMF-Architecture-Team]]
** [[phab:project/view/1520/|WMF-Communications]]
** [[phab:project/view/57/|WMF-Design]]
** [[phab:project/view/28/|WMF-Legal]]
** [[phab:project/view/974/|WMF-NDA-Requests]]
* WMSE
** [[phab:project/view/2521/|WMSE-Communication]]
* WMUA
** [[phab:project/view/1686/|WMUA-Tech]]
=== ACLs ===
* acl*access
** [[phab:project/view/1515/|acl*access-policy-approvers]]
* acl*AHT
** [[phab:project/view/4323/|acl*AHT-Private_policy_admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/2217/|acl*analytics]]
* acl*Analytics
** [[phab:project/view/3154/|acl*Analytics-Legal_policy_admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/2025/|acl*annual_report_policy_admins]]
* acl*blog
** [[phab:project/view/3774/|acl*blog-admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/1418/|acl*communityrelations_policy_admins]]
* acl*discovery
** [[phab:project/view/2625/|acl*discovery-repository-admins]]
* acl*English
** [[phab:project/view/5855/|acl*English-Arbitration-Committee_policy_admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/1142/|acl*fr_policy_admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/1644/|acl*fundraising_research_policy_admins]]
* acl*otrs
** [[phab:project/view/2406/|acl*otrs-admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/5603/|acl*performance_team]]
* [[phab:project/view/1081/|acl*phabricator]]
* acl*procurement
** [[phab:project/view/1586/|acl*procurement-review]]
* acl*Project
** [[phab:project/view/1776/|acl*Project-Admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/3764/|acl*release_security_pre_announce]]
* [[phab:project/view/1615/|acl*releng]]
* acl*repository
** [[phab:project/view/2624/|acl*repository-admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/2112/|acl*research_collaborations_policy_admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/30/|acl*security]]
* [[phab:project/view/4569/|acl*security_bugwrangler]]
* [[phab:project/view/4564/|acl*security_developer]]
* [[phab:project/view/4568/|acl*security_documentation]]
* [[phab:project/view/4571/|acl*security_legal]]
* [[phab:project/view/4565/|acl*security_management]]
* [[phab:project/view/4567/|acl*security_product_manager]]
* [[phab:project/view/4566/|acl*security_program_manager]]
* [[phab:project/view/4563/|acl*security_releng]]
* [[phab:project/view/4560/|acl*security_secteam]]
* [[phab:project/view/4562/|acl*security_sre]]
* [[phab:project/view/4570/|acl*security_steward]]
* [[phab:project/view/2356/|acl*security_team]]
* [[phab:project/view/4561/|acl*security_trusa]]
* [[phab:project/view/4559/|acl*security_volunteer]]
* [[phab:project/view/4572/|acl*security_wmde]]
* acl*sre
** [[phab:project/view/29/|acl*sre-team]]
* [[phab:project/view/2849/|acl*stewards]]
* [[phab:project/view/2135/|acl*support_and_safety_policy_admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/3442/|acl*userdisable]]
* acl*Wikimedia
** [[phab:project/view/2991/|acl*Wikimedia-User-Group-Basque_policy_admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/2808/|acl*wikisp_policy_admins]]
* acl*wmcs
** [[phab:project/view/4858/|acl*wmcs-team]]
* acl*WMDE
** [[phab:project/view/4753/|acl*WMDE-Technical-Wishes-Private_policy_admins]]
* acl*WMF
** [[phab:project/view/4457/|acl*WMF-Communications_policy_admins]]
** [[phab:project/view/1070/|acl*WMF-FR]]
** [[phab:project/view/5264/|acl*WMF-Technical-Program-Management_policy_admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/2904/|acl*wmf_blog_social_team_policy_admins]]
* acl*WMIT
** [[phab:project/view/5818/|acl*WMIT-Private_policy_admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/2052/|acl*WMUA_policy_admins]]
* [[phab:project/view/4299/|Outreachy Mentors]]
* WMF
** [[phab:project/view/61/|WMF-NDA]]
=== Goals ===
* Campaign
** [[phab:project/view/5515/|Campaign-Registration]]
* CAS
** [[phab:project/view/4766/|CAS-SSO]]
* Community
** [[phab:project/view/5581/|Community-Wishlist-Survey-2022]]
* Data
** [[phab:project/view/3730/|Data-Portability]]
* Disambiguation
** [[phab:project/view/5451/|Disambiguation-Wish-2021]]
* Doc collections 2022
** [[phab:project/view/6033/|Doc collections 2022-23]]
* Doc contributions 2022
** [[phab:project/view/6034/|Doc contributions 2022-23]]
* Docs Assessment and Contributing 2022
** [[phab:project/view/6032/|Docs Assessment and Contributing 2022-23]]
* git
** [[phab:project/view/4856/|git-protocol-v2]]
* [[phab:project/view/2169/|Goal]]
* Growth
** [[phab:project/view/5246/|Growth-Deployments]]
* Key docs update 2021
** [[phab:project/view/5409/|Key docs update 2021-22]]
* [[phab:project/view/4193/|Platform Team Initiatives]]
* Pywikibot
** [[phab:project/view/904/|Pywikibot-compat-to-core]]
* [[phab:project/view/3611/|security_assessment_analytics_2018]]
* [[phab:project/view/4412/|security_assessment_devtools_2019]]
* services
** [[phab:project/view/1233/|services-tooling]]
* [[phab:project/view/2770/|Train Deployments]]
* Undelete
** [[phab:project/view/5480/|Undelete-Associated-Talk-Page (2021)]]
* Wiki
** [[phab:project/view/5240/|Wiki-Techstorm-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5657/|Wikimedia-Hackathon-2022-Organization]]
* [[phab:project/view/3605/|WMEE Eesti 1000]]
* [[phab:project/view/3580/|WMEE Miljon+]]
=== Milestones ===
* 1.38.0
** [[phab:project/view/5794/|1.38.0-wmf.25; 2022-03-07]] (MW-1.38-notes)
** [[phab:project/view/5795/|1.38.0-wmf.26; 2022-03-14]] (MW-1.38-notes)
* 1.39.0
** [[phab:project/view/6028/|1.39.0-wmf.22; 2022-07-25]] (MW-1.39-notes)
** [[phab:project/view/6029/|1.39.0-wmf.23; 2022-08-01]] (MW-1.39-notes)
** [[phab:project/view/6046/|1.39.0-wmf.25; 2022-08-15]] (MW-1.39-notes)
** [[phab:project/view/6062/|1.39.0-wmf.26; 2022-08-22]] (MW-1.39-notes)
** [[phab:project/view/6063/|1.39.0-wmf.27; 2022-08-29]] (MW-1.39-notes)
** [[phab:project/view/6064/|1.39.0-wmf.28; 2022-09-05]] (MW-1.39-notes)
* 1.40.0
** [[phab:project/view/6048/|1.40.0-wmf.1; 2022-09-12]] (MW-1.40-notes)
** [[phab:project/view/6049/|1.40.0-wmf.2; 2022-09-19]] (MW-1.40-notes)
** [[phab:project/view/6050/|1.40.0-wmf.3; 2022-09-26]] (MW-1.40-notes)
** [[phab:project/view/6051/|1.40.0-wmf.4; 2022-10-03]] (MW-1.40-notes)
* [[phab:project/view/5716/|2022]] (Google-Summer-of-Code)
* [[phab:project/view/2860/|3rd party support]] (MinervaNeue)
* [[phab:project/view/4244/|Abstract Schema]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* [[phab:project/view/5151/|actions]] (MediaWiki-Interface)
* [[phab:project/view/5152/|active libraries]] (MediaWiki-Interface)
* [[phab:project/view/1306/|Active Tasks]] (Machine-Learning-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/5557/|Administration, Settings &amp; Policy]] (GitLab)
* [[phab:project/view/6006/|AHaT Sprint 11: The Fascinator]] (Anti-Harassment)
* [[phab:project/view/6038/|AHaT Sprint 12: The Dutch Cap]] (Anti-Harassment)
* [[phab:project/view/6070/|AHaT Sprint 13: The Magikarp Hat]] (Anti-Harassment)
* [[phab:project/view/5968/|AHaT Sprint 9: The Beret]] (Anti-Harassment)
* [[phab:project/view/2758/|Analytics]] (Reading Epics)
* Android Release FY2022
** [[phab:project/view/5420/|Android Release FY2022-23]] (Wikipedia-Android-App-Backlog)
* [[phab:project/view/4321/|API Gateway]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* [[phab:project/view/4210/|API Integration Tests]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* [[phab:project/view/5554/|Auth &amp; Access]] (GitLab)
* [[phab:project/view/2613/|Authentication]] (Reading Epics)
* [[phab:project/view/5059/|autocomplete search]] (MediaWiki-Interface)
* [[phab:project/view/5786/|Automatic article quality assessment]] (WMSE-Development-Support-2022)
* [[phab:project/view/4526/|Automatic article quality assessment]] (WMSE-Development-Support-2020)
* [[phab:project/view/5315/|Automatic article quality assessment]] (WMSE-Development-Support-2021)
* [[phab:project/view/5019/|Backlog]] (Product-Data-Infrastructure)
* [[phab:project/view/5867/|Bad data]] (Wikimedia-database-issue)
* [[phab:project/view/5543/|Banner campaign occasional editors 2021]] (WMDE-New-Editors-Banner-Campaigns)
* [[phab:project/view/2121/|Beta Cluster Release]] (FileAnnotations)
* [[phab:project/view/2812/|Blubber]] (Release Pipeline)
* Campaign
** [[phab:project/view/5767/|Campaign-Design]] (Campaign-Tools)
** [[phab:project/view/6040/|Campaign-Tools-Sprint-17]] (Campaign-Tools)
** [[phab:project/view/4030/|Campaigns-jogging]] (SDC-Statements)
* [[phab:project/view/2465/|Central Notice for Apps]] (Reading Epics)
* [[phab:project/view/5555/|CI &amp; Job Runners]] (GitLab)
* [[phab:project/view/5787/|Citoid library for SVWP]] (WMSE-Development-Support-2022)
* [[phab:project/view/4523/|Citoid library for SVWP]] (WMSE-Development-Support-2020)
* [[phab:project/view/5316/|Citoid library for SVWP]] (WMSE-Development-Support-2021)
* [[phab:project/view/4149/|Clinic Duty Team]] (Platform Team Workboards)
* [[phab:project/view/2944/|Close]] (Wiki-Setup)
* [[phab:project/view/5153/|collapsible elements]] (MediaWiki-Interface)
* [[phab:project/view/6058/|Commons]] (Wikistories)
* CommTech
** [[phab:project/view/5992/|CommTech-Sprint-30]] (Community-Tech)
** [[phab:project/view/5993/|CommTech-Sprint-31]] (Community-Tech)
** [[phab:project/view/6044/|CommTech-Sprint-32]] (Community-Tech)
** [[phab:project/view/6045/|CommTech-Sprint-33]] (Community-Tech)
* [[phab:project/view/4364/|Containerise Services]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* [[phab:project/view/2942/|Create]] (Wiki-Setup)
* [[phab:project/view/3450/|Current Sprint]] (Growth-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/4232/|Current Work]] (Structured-Data-Backlog)
* [[phab:project/view/1227/|Current work]] (Discovery-Search)
* [[phab:project/view/5649/|Debian Stretch Deprecation]] (Cloud-VPS)
* [[phab:project/view/4204/|Decoupling (CDP2)]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* [[phab:project/view/3590/|Delete / Redirect]] (Wiki-Setup)
* Depicts
** [[phab:project/view/3938/|Depicts-Walking]] (SDC-Statements)
* [[phab:project/view/3443/|Deployment]] (Multi-Content-Revisions)
* [[phab:project/view/5981/|Deployment Autopilot 🛩️]] (Release-Engineering-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/5265/|Deployment Training Requests]] (Release-Engineering-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/5155/|deprecated JS libraries]] (MediaWiki-Interface)
* [[phab:project/view/3473/|Deprecation process]] (Technical-Debt)
* [[phab:project/view/2569/|Design]] (Wikipedia-iOS-App-Backlog)
* [[phab:project/view/5199/|Design Backlog]] (Editing-team)
* Design
** [[phab:project/view/5859/|Design-Systems-Sprint]] (Design-Systems-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/2859/|Desktop]] (MinervaNeue)
* [[phab:project/view/4814/|Discovery]] (KaiOS-Wikipedia-app)
* [[phab:project/view/5160/|Dodo]] (Parsoid)
* [[phab:project/view/5321/|Doing]] (Release-Engineering-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/3845/|Economy]] (WMSE)
* [[phab:project/view/3598/|EKM]] (WMEE Sum of all paintings)
* Engagement
** [[phab:project/view/5158/|Engagement-1]] (KaiOS-Wikipedia-app)
* [[phab:project/view/4614/|External Code Reviews]] (Platform Team Workboards)
* [[phab:project/view/4681/|Failed QA]] (RW-Feature-DI-Opt-out-Toggle)
* [[phab:project/view/4684/|Failed QA]] (RW-Feature-DI-Sticky-Site-Header)
* [[phab:project/view/4687/|Failed QA]] (RW-Feature-DI-Collapsible-Sidebar)
* [[phab:project/view/4690/|Failed QA]] (RW-Feature-DI-Language-Links)
* [[phab:project/view/4693/|Failed QA]] (RW-Feature-DI-Header-and-Logo)
* [[phab:project/view/4696/|Failed QA]] (RW-Feature-DI-User-Menu)
* [[phab:project/view/4699/|Failed QA]] (RW-Feature-DI-Language-Switcher)
* [[phab:project/view/4702/|Failed QA]] (RW-Feature-DI-TOC)
* [[phab:project/view/4705/|Failed QA]] (RW-Feature-DI-Article-Tools)
* [[phab:project/view/4710/|Failed QA]] (RW-Feature-DI-Sticky-Article-Header)
* [[phab:project/view/4713/|Failed QA]] (RW-Feature-DI-Search-Improvements)
* Feature
** [[phab:project/view/1839/|Feature-Parity]] (WMDE-Fundraising-Frontend-Release)
* [[phab:project/view/4319/|Featured Feeds]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* Federation v2 
** [[phab:project/view/5512/|Federation v2 - Sprint 6]] (Wikibase - Federated Properties)
* [[phab:project/view/2463/|Feed Content Language Expansion]] (Reading Epics)
* [[phab:project/view/5435/|Freezer 🥶]] (wdwb-tech)
* FY 2021
** [[phab:project/view/5300/|FY 2021-2022]] (Wiki-Loves-Monuments)
* FY2021
** [[phab:project/view/4864/|FY2021-22 Kanban Board]] (Editing-team)
** [[phab:project/view/5457/|FY2021-22-Research-April-June]] (Research)
** [[phab:project/view/5650/|FY2021/2022-Q2]] (SRE-OnFire)
** [[phab:project/view/5651/|FY2021/2022-Q3]] (SRE-OnFire)
** [[phab:project/view/5652/|FY2021/2022-Q4]] (SRE-OnFire)
** [[phab:project/view/5808/|FY2021/2022-Q4]] (Infrastructure-Foundations)
* FY2022/2023
** [[phab:project/view/5945/|FY2022/2023-Q1]] (SRE Observability)
** [[phab:project/view/5946/|FY2022/2023-Q2]] (SRE Observability)
** [[phab:project/view/5947/|FY2022/2023-Q3]] (SRE Observability)
* [[phab:project/view/6059/|Generator]] (Wikistories)
* [[phab:project/view/5293/|Geoshapes]] (Maps)
* [[phab:project/view/5347/|Gerrit 3.4]] (Gerrit)
* [[phab:project/view/5896/|Gerrit 3.5]] (Gerrit)
* [[phab:project/view/5897/|Gerrit 3.6]] (Gerrit)
* GitLab
** [[phab:project/view/5873/|GitLab-a-thon 🦊]] (Release-Engineering-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/5025/|Goals]] (Product-Data-Infrastructure)
* [[phab:project/view/5789/|Google Workspace integration]] (WMSE-Organisational-Development-2022)
* [[phab:project/view/3846/|Grants]] (WMSE)
* [[phab:project/view/6052/|Hackathon 2022]] (Lingua Libre)
* [[phab:project/view/4482/|Hardware]] (cloud-services-team)
* [[phab:project/view/4655/|Hash Checking]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* [[phab:project/view/3844/|HR]] (WMSE)
* [[phab:project/view/4632/|Icebox]] (Platform Engineering)
* [[phab:project/view/5171/|Image Suggestion API]] (Platform Team Workboards)
* [[phab:project/view/4758/|Incident Followup]] (Sustainability)
* [[phab:project/view/5553/|Infrastructure]] (GitLab)
* [[phab:project/view/5556/|Integrations]] (GitLab)
* [[phab:project/view/3842/|IT]] (WMSE)
* [[phab:project/view/4659/|Jio2]] (KaiOS-Wikipedia-app)
* Jul
** [[phab:project/view/5857/|Jul-Sep 2022]] (Developer-Advocacy)
** [[phab:project/view/5898/|Jul-Sep-2022]] (CommRel-Specialists-Support)
* [[phab:project/view/2727/|Kanban]] (Product-Infrastructure-Team-Backlog)
* [[phab:project/view/4301/|Kanban]] (Inuka-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/2774/|Kanban]] (cloud-services-team)
* [[phab:project/view/4320/|Kanban]] (Product-Analytics)
* [[phab:project/view/5880/|Kanban]] (Moderator-Tools-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/5375/|Kanban]] (Trust and Safety Tools Team Backlog)
** [[phab:project/view/6008/|Kanbanana-2022-23-Q1]] (Readers-Web-Backlog)
* [[phab:project/view/1692/|Kartographer]] (Maps)
* [[phab:project/view/1829/|Kartotherian]] (Maps)
* [[phab:project/view/4810/|Language]] (KaiOS-Wikipedia-app)
** [[phab:project/view/5835/|Language-2022-April-June]] (Language-Team)
** [[phab:project/view/6009/|Language-2022-July-September]] (Language-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/5566/|Lead Nurturing 2021 pilot 2]] (WMDE-New-Editors-Banner-Campaigns)
* [[phab:project/view/2484/|Location Search]] (Reading Epics)
* Machine
** [[phab:project/view/4109/|Machine-vision-depicts]] (SDC-Statements)
* [[phab:project/view/2952/|Maintainer needed]] (Toolforge-standards-committee)
* Map
** [[phab:project/view/1633/|Map-Styles]] (Maps)
* [[phab:project/view/4527/|Maps in infoboxes]] (WMSE-Development-Support-2020)
* Maps
** [[phab:project/view/2054/|Maps-data]] (Maps)
* [[phab:project/view/4200/|MCR]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* [[phab:project/view/4217/|MCR Schema Migration]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* MediaSearch
** [[phab:project/view/4900/|MediaSearch-Alpha]] (SDAW-MediaSearch)
** [[phab:project/view/4901/|MediaSearch-Beta]] (SDAW-MediaSearch)
** [[phab:project/view/5187/|MediaSearch-ConceptChips]] (SDAW-MediaSearch)
** [[phab:project/view/5186/|MediaSearch-ImageRecs]] (SDAW-MediaSearch)
** [[phab:project/view/4902/|MediaSearch-ReleaseCandidate]] (SDAW-MediaSearch)
** [[phab:project/view/5014/|MediaSearch-ReleaseCandidate2]] (SDAW-MediaSearch)
* MediaWiki
** [[phab:project/view/2743/|MediaWiki-MultiDC]] (Sustainability)
* [[phab:project/view/4947/|mediawiki.widgets]] (MediaWiki-Interface)
* [[phab:project/view/5769/|Menus 2.0]] (MediaWiki-Core-Skin-Architecture)
* Metrics
** [[phab:project/view/5335/|Metrics-Platform-Epic-Roadmap]] (Metrics-Platform)
** [[phab:project/view/5336/|Metrics-Platform-MVP-Release-1]] (Metrics-Platform)
* [[phab:project/view/5558/|Misc]] (GitLab)
* [[phab:project/view/2467/|Mobile Web SSR and Connection Management]] (Reading Epics)
* Mobile
** [[phab:project/view/4737/|Mobile-Prototype]] (Wikipedia-Preview)
* [[phab:project/view/5654/|MobileFrontend (Editor)]] (MobileFrontend)
* [[phab:project/view/3707/|MobileFrontend Special Pages]] (MobileFrontend)
* [[phab:project/view/4195/|Modern Event Platform (TEC2)]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* Multi
** [[phab:project/view/4202/|Multi-DC (TEC1)]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* [[phab:project/view/4658/|MVP]] (KaiOS-Wikipedia-app)
* [[phab:project/view/5698/|MVP]] (Wikistories)
* [[phab:project/view/5144/|MW Expedition]] (Platform Team Workboards)
* [[phab:project/view/4219/|MW REST API in PHP]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* [[phab:project/view/5154/|mw.notifications]] (MediaWiki-Interface)
* [[phab:project/view/3601/|Narva Muuseum]] (WMEE Sum of all paintings)
* [[phab:project/view/5483/|Needs Prioritization (Tech)]] (Readers-Web-Backlog)
* [[phab:project/view/4549/|New Discussion 1.0]] (OWC2020)
* [[phab:project/view/3678/|New Features]] (Multi-Content-Revisions)
* [[phab:project/view/2464/|New Feed Content]] (Reading Epics)
* [[phab:project/view/4623/|New Hook System]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* [[phab:project/view/5322/|Next]] (Release-Engineering-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/4786/|Next Release]] (KaiOS-Wikipedia-app)
* Oct
** [[phab:project/view/5989/|Oct-Dec 2022]] (Developer-Advocacy)
** [[phab:project/view/6036/|Oct-Dec-2022]] (CommRel-Specialists-Support)
* [[phab:project/view/5478/|Okapi Wikimedia Enterprise]] (Wikimedia Enterprise)
* [[phab:project/view/5631/|Onboarding 🚀]] (Release-Engineering-Team)
* OOUI
** [[phab:project/view/4667/|OOUI-0.38.0]] (OOUI)
** [[phab:project/view/5677/|OOUI-0.43.0]] (OOUI)
** [[phab:project/view/5956/|OOUI-0.44.1]] (OOUI)
* [[phab:project/view/4811/|Optimize]] (KaiOS-Wikipedia-app)
* other
** [[phab:project/view/4255/|other-input-types-on-a-dirigible]] (SDC-Statements)
* Other
** [[phab:project/view/3940/|Other-statements-running]] (SDC-Statements)
* [[phab:project/view/4402/|Outreachy Interns]] (Platform Team Workboards)
* Overhaul
** [[phab:project/view/4939/|Overhaul-2020]] (AbuseFilter)
* [[phab:project/view/4547/|OWC2020 Replying 1.0]] (OWC2020)
* [[phab:project/view/4546/|OWC2020 Replying 2.0]] (OWC2020)
* [[phab:project/view/2468/|Page Previews]] (Reading Epics)
* [[phab:project/view/4207/|Parsoid REST API in PHP  (CDP2)]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* [[phab:project/view/4808/|Partnerships]] (The-Wikipedia-Library)
* [[phab:project/view/4682/|Passed QA]] (RW-Feature-DI-Opt-out-Toggle)
* [[phab:project/view/4685/|Passed QA]] (RW-Feature-DI-Sticky-Site-Header)
* [[phab:project/view/4688/|Passed QA]] (RW-Feature-DI-Collapsible-Sidebar)
* [[phab:project/view/5562/|Peter's world]] (Editing-team)
* phabricator
** [[phab:project/view/5278/|phabricator-next]] (Phabricator)
* Phase 0 
** [[phab:project/view/5533/|Phase 0 - Parsoid-Media-Structure]] (Parsoid-Read-Views)
* Phase 1 
** [[phab:project/view/5534/|Phase 1 - DiscussionTools support]] (Parsoid-Read-Views)
* Phase 2 
** [[phab:project/view/5535/|Phase 2 - testwiki Main namespace support]] (Parsoid-Read-Views)
* Phase 3 
** [[phab:project/view/5536/|Phase 3 - Main namespace of officewiki / mediawiki.org renders with Parsoid]] (Parsoid-Read-Views)
* Phase 4 
** [[phab:project/view/5537/|Phase 4 - Parsoid generates metadata needed by core]] (Parsoid-Read-Views)
* [[phab:project/view/4961/|Phase θ – Throttling]] (Abstract Wikipedia team)
* [[phab:project/view/4962/|Phase ι – Documentation]] (Abstract Wikipedia team)
* Phase κ – Clean
** [[phab:project/view/4963/|Phase κ – Clean-up]] (Abstract Wikipedia team)
* [[phab:project/view/4964/|Phase λ – Launch]] (Abstract Wikipedia team)
* [[phab:project/view/5268/|Platform Engineering Reliability]] (Platform Team Workboards)
* [[phab:project/view/2462/|Platform JS CSS and HTML consolidation]] (Reading Epics)
* Platform
** [[phab:project/view/4913/|Platform-Product Roadmap]] (Platform Team Workboards)
* [[phab:project/view/5585/|Priority Backlog 📥]] (Release-Engineering-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/5377/|Product Roadmap]] (API Platform)
* [[phab:project/view/5600/|Product Roadmap]] (Generated Data Platform)
* [[phab:project/view/2248/|Production release]] (FileAnnotations)
* [[phab:project/view/5552/|Project Migration]] (GitLab)
* [[phab:project/view/2700/|Project Setup]] (Push-Notification-Service)
* [[phab:project/view/5784/|Project start bot]] (WMSE-Organisational-Development-2022)
* Project
** [[phab:project/view/2875/|Project-requests]] (Cloud-VPS)
* [[phab:project/view/2475/|Push Notifications]] (Reading Epics)
* [[phab:project/view/3599/|Pärnu Muuseum]] (WMEE Sum of all paintings)
* Quota
** [[phab:project/view/2880/|Quota-requests]] (Cloud-VPS)
** [[phab:project/view/4481/|Quota-requests]] (Data-Services)
** [[phab:project/view/4834/|Quota-requests]] (Toolforge)
* [[phab:project/view/5988/|R2]] (Wikistories)
* [[phab:project/view/2923/|Radar]] (Performance-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/5320/|Radar]] (Release-Engineering-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/3679/|Reactive]] (Multi-Content-Revisions)
* [[phab:project/view/2943/|Rename]] (Wiki-Setup)
* [[phab:project/view/4907/|Reply Tool Opt Out]] (OWC2020)
* [[phab:project/view/3417/|Reportings]] (WMDE-New-Editors-Banner-Campaigns)
* [[phab:project/view/5173/|Responsive]] (MonoBook)
* [[phab:project/view/4211/|Revision Storage Schema Improvements]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* [[phab:project/view/5507/|Round 23]] (Outreachy)
* [[phab:project/view/5717/|Round 24]] (Outreachy)
* RW
** [[phab:project/view/2297/|RW-Design-Debt]] (Design)
** [[phab:project/view/2296/|RW-Tech-Debt]] (Technical-Debt)
** [[phab:project/view/3912/|RW-Test-Cases]] (Product-QA)
* [[phab:project/view/4157/|S&amp;F Workboard]] (Platform Team Workboards)
* S1
** [[phab:project/view/5632/|S1-2022]] (Wikimedia-Small-Projects-User-Group-Milestone)
* Scap3
** [[phab:project/view/1823/|Scap3-MediaWiki-MVP]] (Scap)
* [[phab:project/view/2523/|Search]] (Phabricator)
* [[phab:project/view/5323/|Seen]] (Release-Engineering-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/4194/|Session Management Service (CDP2)]] (Platform Team Initiatives)
* [[phab:project/view/3978/|Software install/update]] (Toolforge)
* [[phab:project/view/4380/|Sprint]] (Wikispeech-Jobrunner)
* [[phab:project/view/4871/|Sprint 0]] (Platform Team Sprints Board)
* [[phab:project/view/6061/|Sprint 00]] (Data Pipelines)
* [[phab:project/view/6069/|Sprint 00]] (Shared-Data-Infrastructure)
* [[phab:project/view/6056/|Sprint 02]] (Data Engineering Planning)
* [[phab:project/view/4903/|Sprint 1]] (Platform Team Sprints Board)
* [[phab:project/view/6020/|Sprint 10]] (Wikibase Product Platform)
* [[phab:project/view/6060/|Sprint 11]] (Wikibase Product Platform)
* [[phab:project/view/4938/|Sprint 2]] (Platform Team Sprints Board)
* [[phab:project/view/4966/|Sprint 3]] (Platform Team Sprints Board)
* [[phab:project/view/4986/|Sprint 4]] (Platform Team Sprints Board)
* [[phab:project/view/5015/|Sprint 5]] (Platform Team Sprints Board)
* Sprint 7/28
** [[phab:project/view/5438/|Sprint 7/28-8/10 2021]] (User-jeena)
* Sprint 8/18
** [[phab:project/view/5493/|Sprint 8/18-8/31 2021]] (User-jeena)
* Sprint
** [[phab:project/view/6017/|Sprint-♾]] (Wikidata Dev Team)
* Statement
** [[phab:project/view/3987/|Statement-and-keyword-search-power-walking]] (SDC-Statements)
* [[phab:project/view/5551/|Support]] (GitLab)
* [[phab:project/view/2483/|Synchronized Reading Lists]] (Reading Epics)
* [[phab:project/view/4906/|Tables]] (MediaWiki-Interface)
* [[phab:project/view/3597/|TARTMUS]] (WMEE Sum of all paintings)
* [[phab:project/view/3600/|Tartu Linnamuuseum]] (WMEE Sum of all paintings)
* [[phab:project/view/3604/|Tartu Ülikoli kunstimuuseum]] (WMEE Sum of all paintings)
* [[phab:project/view/3603/|Tartu Ülikoli muuseum]] (WMEE Sum of all paintings)
* [[phab:project/view/5612/|Team A Hearth 🏰🔥]] (Wikidata-Campsite)
* [[phab:project/view/3677/|Tech Debt]] (Multi-Content-Revisions)
* Temporary
** [[phab:project/view/2414/|Temporary-UserRights]] (Stewards-and-global-tools)
* [[phab:project/view/6022/|The Decommission Mission 💀]] (Release-Engineering-Team)
* Third
** [[phab:project/view/5206/|Third-party]] (Editing-team)
** [[phab:project/view/5100/|Third-party]] (Parsoid)
* [[phab:project/view/2482/|Thumbnails]] (Reading Epics)
* [[phab:project/view/1830/|Tilerator]] (Maps)
* [[phab:project/view/3975/|Tools to be deleted]] (Toolforge)
* [[phab:project/view/4905/|Tracking]] (MobileFrontend)
* [[phab:project/view/5172/|Tracking]] (Modern)
* [[phab:project/view/5174/|Tracking]] (MonoBook)
* [[phab:project/view/5175/|Tracking]] (CologneBlue)
* [[phab:project/view/3769/|Tracking]] (Page-Previews)
* [[phab:project/view/4541/|Tracking]] (Editing-team)
* [[phab:project/view/3297/|Tracking]] (MinervaNeue)
* [[phab:project/view/5099/|Tracking]] (Parsoid)
* [[phab:project/view/2476/|Trending Edits]] (Reading Epics)
* UI
** [[phab:project/view/4192/|UI-consolidation-on-a-Ferris-wheel]] (SDC-Statements)
* [[phab:project/view/6/|Upstream]] (Phabricator)
* [[phab:project/view/5671/|v0.0.1]] (Web2Cit-Core)
* [[phab:project/view/5667/|v3.0]] (InternetArchiveBot)
* [[phab:project/view/4496/|Vector (Tracking)]] (Vector)
* [[phab:project/view/3602/|Võrumaa Museum]] (WMEE Sum of all paintings)
* [[phab:project/view/4506/|Wiki Loves Earth 2020]] (WMSE-Wiki-Loves-2020)
* [[phab:project/view/4505/|Wiki Loves Monuments 2020]] (WMSE-Wiki-Loves-2020)
* [[phab:project/view/5761/|Wikibase Suite Maintenance Releases Feb 2022]] (Wikibase Suite)
* [[phab:project/view/6073/|Wikibase.cloud (WB Cloud Sprint 2)]] (Wikibase.cloud)
* [[phab:project/view/2472/|Wikidata Description Editing]] (Reading Epics)
* [[phab:project/view/2471/|Wikidata Description Editing ORES Abuse Filter]] (Reading Epics)
* WMDE
** [[phab:project/view/3114/|WMDE-Design-Workboard Doing]] (WMDE-Design)
* WMF
** [[phab:project/view/4742/|WMF-deployed Build Failure]] (ci-test-error)
* WMSE
** [[phab:project/view/5990/|WMSE-Nordic-Museum-2022]] (WMSE-GLAM-2022)
* [[phab:project/view/2759/|Workflow Improvements]] (MediaWiki-Releasing)
* [[phab:project/view/5319/|Yak Shaving 🐃🪒]] (Release-Engineering-Team)
* [[phab:project/view/5819/|Zynatic]] (WMSE-Association-Involvement-2022)
* [[phab:project/view/5861/|🌱 Spring Cleaning — April 2022]] (Release-Engineering-Team)
=== Releases ===
* Gadgets
** [[phab:project/view/1634/|Gadgets-2.0]]
* iOS
** [[phab:project/view/5997/|iOS-app-v6.9.3]]
* ios
** [[phab:project/view/5380/|ios-app-v7.0]]
** [[phab:project/view/6074/|ios-app-v7.1]]
* MediaWiki
** [[phab:project/view/2239/|MediaWiki-backport-deployments]]
* MW
** [[phab:project/view/4306/|MW-1.35-notes]]
** [[phab:project/view/4035/|MW-1.35-release]]
** [[phab:project/view/5296/|MW-1.37-notes]]
** [[phab:project/view/4928/|MW-1.37-release]]
** [[phab:project/view/5539/|MW-1.38-notes]]
** [[phab:project/view/5407/|MW-1.38-release]]
** [[phab:project/view/5796/|MW-1.39-notes]]
** [[phab:project/view/5694/|MW-1.39-release]]
** [[phab:project/view/6047/|MW-1.40-notes]]
* [[phab:project/view/1333/|Release]]
=== Sprints ===
* Abstract Wikipedia Fix
** [[phab:project/view/5712/|Abstract Wikipedia Fix-It tasks]]
* CommTech
** [[phab:project/view/5906/|CommTech-Hackathon-AKA-CodeJam-2022]]
* Data
** [[phab:project/view/5504/|Data-Quality-Days-2021]]
* Discovery
** [[phab:project/view/1235/|Discovery-Portal-Sprint]]
* [[phab:project/view/1230/|Elections]]
* [[phab:project/view/6071/|Fundraising Sprint NaN is a Number]]
* [[phab:project/view/4797/|itWikiCon]]
** [[phab:project/view/4798/|itWikiCon-2020]]
** [[phab:project/view/5790/|itWikiCon-2022]]
* [[phab:project/view/4970/|Platform Engineering Roadmap]]
* Programs
** [[phab:project/view/1786/|Programs-and-Events-Dashboard-Sprint 2]]
* UI
** [[phab:project/view/1806/|UI-Standardization-Kanban]]
* Wikimania
** [[phab:project/view/6030/|Wikimania-Hackathon-2022]]
* Wikimedia
** [[phab:project/view/5802/|Wikimedia-Hackathon-2022]]
** [[phab:project/view/5626/|Wikimedia-Small-Projects-User-Group-Milestone]]
* WMDE
** [[phab:project/view/6001/|WMDE-FUN-Sprint-2022-06-27]]
** [[phab:project/view/6025/|WMDE-FUN-Sprint-2022-07-11]]
** [[phab:project/view/6057/|WMDE-FUN-Sprint-2022-07-25]]
** [[phab:project/view/6039/|WMDE-TechWish-Sprint-2022-07-20]]
** [[phab:project/view/6068/|WMDE-TechWish-Sprint-2022-08-03]]
** [[phab:project/view/3106/|WMDE-UX-Workboard]]
* WMF
** [[phab:project/view/6023/|WMF-Inspiration-Week-2022-ML-Collab]]
=== User projects ===
* User
** [[phab:project/view/2688/|User-Abbe98]]
** [[phab:project/view/3908/|User-abi_]]
** [[phab:project/view/5822/|User-AKlapper]]
** [[phab:project/view/2518/|User-Alicia_Fagerving_WMSE]]
** [[phab:project/view/3418/|User-Amire80]]
** [[phab:project/view/4580/|User-ANEUN]]
** [[phab:project/view/4396/|User-Apap04]]
** [[phab:project/view/2995/|User-ArielGlenn]]
** [[phab:project/view/2776/|User-aude]]
** [[phab:project/view/4464/|User-awight]]
** [[phab:project/view/2516/|User-AxelPettersson_WMSE]]
** [[phab:project/view/929/|User-bd808]]
** [[phab:project/view/5418/|User-Bongo-Cat]]
** [[phab:project/view/4463/|User-brennen]]
** [[phab:project/view/5317/|User-Carn]]
** [[phab:project/view/4196/|User-CCicaleseWMF]]
** [[phab:project/view/3734/|User-CDanis]]
** [[phab:project/view/4198/|User-Cicalese]]
** [[phab:project/view/3381/|User-Cirdan]]
** [[phab:project/view/3588/|User-Daimona]]
** [[phab:project/view/4859/|User-dancy]]
** [[phab:project/view/2384/|User-Daniel]]
** [[phab:project/view/3849/|User-DannyS712]]
** [[phab:project/view/5584/|User-dcaro]]
** [[phab:project/view/5779/|User-dduvall]]
** [[phab:project/view/2187/|User-Dereckson]]
** [[phab:project/view/4377/|User-Dyolf77]]
** [[phab:project/view/6072/|User-EAkinloose]]
** [[phab:project/view/3865/|User-EBernhardson]]
** [[phab:project/view/3075/|User-Eevans]]
** [[phab:project/view/2398/|User-Elukey]]
** [[phab:project/view/5932/|User-EpicPupper]]
** [[phab:project/view/2517/|User-Eric_Luth_WMSE]]
** [[phab:project/view/4556/|User-Etonkovidova]]
** [[phab:project/view/5970/|User-EUdoh-WMF]]
** [[phab:project/view/2668/|User-fgiunchedi]]
** [[phab:project/view/3866/|User-fsero]]
** [[phab:project/view/4764/|User-gabrielchl]]
** [[phab:project/view/2895/|User-GoranSMilovanovic]]
** [[phab:project/view/1436/|User-greg]]
** [[phab:project/view/4345/|User-HannaLindgren]]
** [[phab:project/view/4003/|User-Harej]]
** [[phab:project/view/3429/|User-herron]]
** [[phab:project/view/2962/|User-Huji]]
** [[phab:project/view/2077/|User-Hydriz]]
** [[phab:project/view/5508/|User-IN]]
** [[phab:project/view/5221/|User-Inductiveload]]
** [[phab:project/view/5804/|User-ItamarWMDE]]
** [[phab:project/view/3076/|User-Jayprakash12345]]
** [[phab:project/view/4357/|User-jbond]]
** [[phab:project/view/2985/|User-Jdlrobson]]
** [[phab:project/view/2563/|User-JeanFred]]
** [[phab:project/view/5436/|User-jeena]]
** [[phab:project/view/4748/|User-Jenny_Brandt_WMSE]]
** [[phab:project/view/3091/|User-Jhernandez]]
** [[phab:project/view/3572/|User-jijiki]]
** [[phab:project/view/2271/|User-Joe]]
** [[phab:project/view/1763/|User-Johan]]
** [[phab:project/view/2542/|User-John_Cummings]]
** [[phab:project/view/2512/|User-Jopparn]]
** [[phab:project/view/4531/|User-JosefineHellrothLarssonWMSE]]
** [[phab:project/view/1724/|User-Josve05a]]
** [[phab:project/view/4925/|User-Jpita]]
** [[phab:project/view/2566/|User-JSeddon]]
** [[phab:project/view/5599/|User-Juan90264]]
** [[phab:project/view/4552/|User-kalle]]
** [[phab:project/view/2946/|User-KartikMistry]]
** [[phab:project/view/3077/|User-Kizule]]
** [[phab:project/view/4854/|User-Kormat]]
** [[phab:project/view/3735/|User-kostajh]]
** [[phab:project/view/3778/|User-kzimmerman]]
** [[phab:project/view/2451/|User-LokalProfil]]
** [[phab:project/view/5358/|User-LSobanski]]
** [[phab:project/view/1765/|User-Luke081515]]
** [[phab:project/view/3069/|User-MacFan4000]]
** [[phab:project/view/2877/|User-MarcoAurelio]]
** [[phab:project/view/4583/|User-Maria_Burehall_WMSE]]
** [[phab:project/view/3490/|User-Marostegui]]
** [[phab:project/view/2896/|User-Matthewrbowker]]
** [[phab:project/view/3378/|User-MatthiasGeisler]]
** [[phab:project/view/2079/|User-MBinder_WMF]]
** [[phab:project/view/3749/|User-Michael]]
** [[phab:project/view/3579/|User-MModell]]
** [[phab:project/view/4779/|User-MoritzMuehlenhoff]]
** [[phab:project/view/2223/|User-MuhammadShuaib]]
** [[phab:project/view/2222/|User-Nikerabbit]]
** [[phab:project/view/3861/|User-Noarave]]
** [[phab:project/view/3272/|User-Physikerwelt]]
** [[phab:project/view/4374/|User-PPham]]
** [[phab:project/view/4741/|User-QEDK]]
** [[phab:project/view/5676/|User-Raymond_Ndibe]]
** [[phab:project/view/1725/|User-Reedy]]
** [[phab:project/view/3138/|User-revi]]
** [[phab:project/view/4159/|User-RhinosF1]]
** [[phab:project/view/3508/|User-Rxy]]
** [[phab:project/view/2433/|User-Ryasmeen]]
** [[phab:project/view/5288/|User-Salgo60]]
** [[phab:project/view/5973/|User-Sandra_Fauconnier_WMSE]]
** [[phab:project/view/2515/|User-SaraMortsell]]
* user
** [[phab:project/view/3979/|user-sbassett]]
* User
** [[phab:project/view/2511/|User-Sebastian_Berlin-WMSE]]
** [[phab:project/view/5658/|User-Slst2020]]
** [[phab:project/view/2921/|User-Smalyshev]]
** [[phab:project/view/4833/|User-Soham]]
** [[phab:project/view/4392/|User-srishakatux]]
** [[phab:project/view/5601/|User-STei-WMF]]
** [[phab:project/view/4302/|User-SwedishMuseum]]
** [[phab:project/view/3341/|User-TArrow]]
** [[phab:project/view/2728/|User-Tgr]]
** [[phab:project/view/3770/|User-TheDJ]]
** [[phab:project/view/2539/|User-TheresNoTime]]
** [[phab:project/view/4289/|User-TheSandDoctor]]
** [[phab:project/view/3107/|User-thiemowmde]]
** [[phab:project/view/5720/|User-Tks4Fish]]
** [[phab:project/view/2196/|User-Tobi_WMDE_SW]]
** [[phab:project/view/4017/|User-Tore_Danielsson_WMSE]]
** [[phab:project/view/2098/|User-Urbanecm]]
** [[phab:project/view/4943/|User-Urbanecm_WMF]]
** [[phab:project/view/4832/|User-Vidhi-Mody]]
** [[phab:project/view/4183/|User-WDoran]]
** [[phab:project/view/2658/|User-WMDE-leszek]]
** [[phab:project/view/3525/|User-xSavitar]]
** [[phab:project/view/1938/|User-zeljkofilipin]]
** [[phab:project/view/2745/|User-Zppix]]
=== Miscellaneous ===
* Continuous
** [[phab:project/view/1208/|Continuous-Integration-Config]]
* Patch
** [[phab:project/view/32/|Patch-For-Review]]
* [[phab:project/view/89/|Trash]]

{{/Footer}}</text>
      <sha1>r1j7g2mzx0rtyo50gnn9i7rxtyvje21</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Parameters to index.php/pt-br</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>347271</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401953</id>
      <parentid>5401452</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:47:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Passar $1 retorna o código fonte de uma página ou revisão. Por razões de cache e segurança, isto geralmente deve ser usado apenas através do [[$vsurl|script path]], isto é, $2]].&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="45766" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
Esta página é uma lista '''parcial''' dos parâmetros para o arquivo {{ll|Manual:index.php|index.php}}, o ''script'' principal do software MediaWiki.
A maioria destes argumentos geralmente é dada como parâmetros GET na URL, mas também podem ser passados como dados POST.
POST é realmente necessário em alguns casos, como a ação de purga.

{{note|1='''As informações contidas nesta página não estão completas.'''&lt;ref name=&quot;clients&quot;&gt;Os clientes que apresentem formulários deverão apresentar todos os parâmetros de formulário presentes no código HTML; confiar em qualquer tipo de lista estática pode levar a futuras quebras. Para registrar novas ações com uma instalação do MediaWiki, consulte {{ll|Manual:$wgActions|$wgActions}}.&lt;/ref&gt;}}

{{Anchor|Page revision or version|Identifying a page or revision}}
== Revisão ou versão de página ==
Os parâmetros ao index.php geralmente aplicam-se e possuem um significado relacionado à página a qual se aplicam.
A página (ou uma versão dela) pode ser especificada inserindo um ou mais dos seguintes parâmetros:
&lt;nowiki&gt;https://&lt;/nowiki&gt;en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?&lt;span style=&quot;color: red;&quot;&gt;title&lt;/span&gt;=Ferengi&amp;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red;&quot;&gt;curid&lt;/span&gt;=177126&amp;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red;&quot;&gt;diff&lt;/span&gt;=304901009&amp;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red;&quot;&gt;oldid&lt;/span&gt;=304764764

{|class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; width=85% align=center
!width=5%|Nome
!!width=75% class=&quot;unsortable&quot;|Descrição
|-
|title 
| O título da página. Pode ser uma página wiki ou uma [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Special pages|página especial]], dependendo de outros parâmetros. Para desativar uma página especial em sua configuração wiki, você pode usar o hook {{ll|Manual:Hooks/SpecialPage initList|SpecialPage_initList}}.
|-
|curid 
| A id da página wiki; substitui o valor do título.
|}

Algumas ações (como ver e editar) também funcionam numa revisão em particular da página. Tal revisão é identificada pelos dois parâmetros seguintes, permitindo a omissão do título e da id da página.

{|class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; width=85% align=center
!width=5%|Nome
!!width=75% class=&quot;unsortable&quot;|Descrição
|-
|oldid 
| A id de uma revisão
|-
|direction 
| Em vez da revisão dada por ''oldid'', use:
:* &lt;code&gt;direction=prev&lt;/code&gt;: o item anterior
:* &lt;code&gt;direction=next&lt;/code&gt;: o item seguinte
|}

{{anchor|Actions|actions}}&lt;!--Used in Manual:Article.php--&gt;
== Ações ==

A lista seguinte contém valores para o parâmetro &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;.

Algumas dessas ações podem ser ativadas/desativadas usando uma [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings|definição de configuração]] dedicada em &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}&lt;/code&gt;. Onde disponíveis, essas definições locais são listadas.&lt;ref name=&quot;local&quot;&gt;Adicionalmente, qualquer ação que não a de visualizar pode ser desativada usando a variável {{ll|Manual:$wgActions|$wgActions}}.
Adicionalmente, a {{ll|Manual:$wgActions|$wgActions}} está disponível para todas as ações.

Se as buscas estão ativadas e o parâmetro &lt;code&gt;search&lt;/code&gt; não está em branco, todas as ações são ignoradas e a busca é realizada.&lt;/ref&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; width=&quot;85%&quot; align=&quot;center&quot;
! width=&quot;5%&quot; | Name
! width=&quot;50%&quot; class=&quot;unsortable&quot; | Função
! width=&quot;25%&quot; class=&quot;unsortable&quot; | Exemplo
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;&quot;
|{{visible anchor|view}}
| Visualizar é a ação padrão; visualizar é a ação usada quando nenhuma ação é explicitamente fornecida
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=view {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''view''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;&quot;
|{{visible anchor|watch}}
| Adiciona a página na lista de páginas vigiadas do usuário
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=watch {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''watch''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;&quot;
|{{visible anchor|unwatch}}
| Remove a página da lista de páginas vigiadas do usuário
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=unwatch {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''unwatch''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;&quot;
|{{visible anchor|delete}}
| Exclui uma página

Por padrão, retorna um formulário para o usuário confirmar a exclusão e especificar uma razão.&lt;ref name=&quot;deletion&quot;&gt;A exclusão é realizada por uma solicitação POST se um [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Edit token|''token'' de edição]] válido é passado como valor de &lt;code&gt;wpEditToken&lt;/code&gt;; isso é o que acontece quando o usuário confirma a exclusão.

O motivo da exclusão é passado como valor do argumento &lt;code&gt;wpReason&lt;/code&gt;; e a cadeia de caracteres é gravada no registro de exclusão (no campo &lt;code&gt;log_comment_id&lt;/code&gt; da tabela de {{ll|Manual:logging table|logging}}).

A exclusão também é feita ao excluir uma única versão de uma imagem; isso requer que o ID da versão seja passado no parâmetro &lt;code&gt;oldimage&lt;/code&gt; e um ''token'' de edição válido no &lt;code&gt;wpEditToken&lt;/code&gt;; nesse caso, a solicitação também pode ser passada por GET.&lt;/ref&gt;
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=delete {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''delete''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|{{visible anchor|revert}}
| Reverte a uma versão antiga de uma '''imagem'''. Os seguintes parâmetros são requeridos:
:* &lt;code&gt;oldimage&lt;/code&gt;, o ID da versão a ser revertida; e;
:* &lt;code&gt;wpEditToken&lt;/code&gt;, um ''token'' de edição válido;
|
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|{{visible anchor|rollback}}
| Reverte as últimas edições feitas pelo último editor da página; em outras palavras, restaura à última versão do artigo cujo editor não é o último. A edição é marcada como menor e um sumário de edição padrão é usado.&lt;ref name=&quot;rollback&gt;
:* se o argumento opcional &lt;code&gt;summary&lt;/code&gt; é passado, seu valor é usado como sumário de edição em vez do padrão
:* se o argumento opcional &lt;code&gt;bot&lt;/code&gt; é passado, a edição será marcada como de um robô (&lt;code&gt;rc_bot=1&lt;/code&gt; na tabela de {{ll|Manual:Recentchanges table|recentchanges}})
:* o argumento &lt;code&gt;bot&lt;/code&gt; pode também ser usado em qualquer página na qual apareça a ligação de reversão, inserindo &lt;code&gt;&amp;bot=1&lt;/code&gt; para todas as ligações de reversão geradas
:* se o argumento opcional &lt;code&gt;hidediff&lt;/code&gt; é passado, o sucesso da mensagem é exibido em vez de uma dif na mudança (isso pode ser forçado nas preferências do usuário)&lt;/ref&gt;
Os seguintes dois outros parâmetros são requeridos:
:* &lt;code&gt;from&lt;/code&gt; é para o nome de usuário cujas edições hão de ser revertidas
:* &lt;code&gt;token&lt;/code&gt; é o ''token'' de reversão; usado para prevenir que usuários façam uma reversão sem querer ao clicar numa ligação num site externo.
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=rollback&amp;from=John&amp;token=d7aaa6c\ {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''rollback'''&amp;'''from'''=John&amp;'''token'''=d7aaa6c\]&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|{{visible anchor|protect}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shows or changes the protection levels of a page:&lt;/span&gt;
:*&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this script returns a form showing the current protection levels of the page, allowing the user to change the protection levels of the page.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;protect&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These levels are changed to the values of &lt;code&gt;mwProtect-level-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;mwProtect-level-move&lt;/code&gt; if the request is a POST one and a valid edit token is passed as &lt;code&gt;wpEditToken&lt;/code&gt;; parameter &lt;code&gt;mwProtect-reason&lt;/code&gt; gives the reason for protection or unprotection which will be recorded in the page log; if &lt;code&gt;mwProtect-cascade&lt;/code&gt; is also passed, cascading protection is applied (all transcluded pages are set to the same protection levels)&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more generally, the actions that can be limited are those listed in the {{ll|Manual:$wgRestrictionTypes|$wgRestrictionTypes}} array; this array is initialized to &lt;code&gt;array('edit','move')&lt;/code&gt; and can be changed in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}; the protection action then accept a parameter &lt;code&gt;mwProtect-level-$action&lt;/code&gt; for each action in that array&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt;
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=protect {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''protect''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|{{visible anchor|unprotect}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Same page as protect (unprotect and protect are the same page, and do the same thing).&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=unprotect {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''unprotect''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|{{visible anchor|markpatrolled}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Marks an edit as patrolled; see [[meta:Help:Patrolled edit|Help:Patrolled edit]] on [[m:|Meta]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;rcid&lt;/code&gt; is the id of an edit in the {{ll|Manual:Recentchanges table|recentchanges}} table&lt;/span&gt;
|
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|{{visible anchor|render}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Outputs the HTML rendering of the entire page content; similar to the &lt;code&gt;view&lt;/code&gt; action, but only the unstyled article text is output, not any part of the user interface (additional toolboxes, search box, stylesheets, etc.).&lt;/span&gt; {{note|1=Para um acesso programático mais estável ou para recuperar o HTML de apenas uma parte do conteúdo da página, você deve usar a API &lt;code&gt;{{ll|API:Parsing wikitext#parse|parse}}&lt;/code&gt; com &lt;code&gt;page&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;pageid&lt;/code&gt;}}
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=render {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''render''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|{{ll|Manual:Purge|purge}} {{Anchor|purge}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clears the page's cache, forcing the page to be redisplayed from its source.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This action is performed only if requested via a POST request; otherwise, a form to confirm purging is shown (pressing the OK button posts the purge request, which is then executed).&lt;/span&gt;
|
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=purge {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''purge''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|{{visible anchor|submit}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Performs various actions related to changing the page (see below for more details):&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, shows the page in edit form, with edit box.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Various other arguments can be used to:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Modificar uma página,
:# pré-visualizar uma nova versão da página, ou
:# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;show the difference with a new version (see [[#Edit and submit|edit and submit section]] below for details);&lt;/span&gt;
:#  If the default editor is set to [[VisualEditor]], &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt; will force showing the [[editor|source code editor]]. VisualEditor can be selected with &lt;code&gt;veaction=edit&lt;/code&gt; URL parameter.
:# The &lt;code&gt;#/editor/…&lt;/code&gt; overlay of [[Extension:MobileFrontend|the mobile front end]] on [[Skin:Minerva]] does not appear with &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;. Instead, the default submission form is shown, which allows marking edits as &quot;minor&quot;.
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=submit {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''submit''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|{{visible anchor|edit}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shows the page in edit form. &quot;&lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt;&quot; does almost the same thing as [[#submit|submit]].&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=edit {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''edit''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|{{visible anchor|editredlink}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Same as [[#edit|edit]].&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;redlink&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before [[phab:rSVN31291]], Editredlink did the same thing that is now achieved by  &lt;code&gt;action=edit&amp;redlink=1&lt;/code&gt; (see below for an explanation of the redlink parameter)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt;
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=editredlink {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''editredlink''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|{{visible anchor|history}}{{Anchor|history2}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shows the history of the page. ([[#History|See history, below]])&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=history {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''history''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|{{visible anchor|historysubmit}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When viewing the difference between revisions, after clicking &quot;compare selected revisions&quot; on the history page. This requires a &quot;diff&quot; and/or &quot;oldid&quot; parameter, otherwise it just shows the page itself.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=historysubmit&amp;diff=456290&amp;oldid=456270 {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''historysubmit'''&amp;diff=456290&amp;oldid=456270]&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|raw {{Anchor|raw2}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shows the raw content of the page. ([[#Raw|See Raw, below]]) A pop up window will open up, asking whether you would like to save the page in index.php.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;raw&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For security reasons, in some versions of MediaWiki Raw is only allowed when using the &quot;primary script access point&quot;, that is, when using the &quot;ugly&quot; URL form with &lt;code&gt;index.php?title=...&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt;
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=raw {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''raw''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|{{visible anchor|ajax}} 
|{{deprecated-inline|1.27}}; {{removed-inline|1.38}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If enabled, calls a php function registered via {{ll|Manual:$wgAjaxExportList|$wgAjaxExportList}}; see {{ll|Manual:Ajax}}.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;ajax&quot;&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;requires {{ll|Manual:$wgUseAjax|$wgUseAjax}} to be true; the only callable functions are those in the array {{ll|Manual:$wgAjaxExportList|$wgAjaxExportList}}&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;additional parameters: &lt;code&gt;rs&lt;/code&gt; is the function name (e.g., &lt;code&gt;rs=wfSajaxSearch&lt;/code&gt;); the &lt;code&gt;rsargs[]&lt;/code&gt; array is the list of arguments of this function (e.g., &lt;code&gt;rsargs[]=abcd&lt;/code&gt; passes the &lt;code&gt;abcd&lt;/code&gt; string to the function).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;the JavaScript function &lt;code&gt;sajax_do_call&lt;/code&gt; for calling Ajax functions is defined in {{ll|Manual:ajax.js|ajax.js}}.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt;
|
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
|{{visible anchor|credits}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shows a list of people who contributed to the page in question using the real name specified in the user's preferences. Currently disabled on Wikimedia wikis, but is enabled by default on vanilla MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[//translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Translating:MediaWiki&amp;action=credits translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Translating:MediaWiki&amp;action='''credits''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
| {{visible anchor|info}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shows information about the page, such as the number of users having it in their watchlist, the number of edits, the number of authors. See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Requests for comment/Reimplement info action|Reimplement info action RfC]] for context.&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;[//{{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action=info {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;action='''info''']&lt;/span&gt;
|- valign=&quot;top&quot;
| {{ll|Manual:Revisiondelete|revisiondelete}} {{Anchor|revisiondelete}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set visibility restrictions on revision text, edit summary, and editor's username/IP address (requires deleterevision user right)&lt;/span&gt;
|
|}

{{Anchor|User preference overriding}}
==Substituição de preferências de usuário==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following parameters override some of the user's [[m:Help:Preferences|preferences]]. Other parameters explained in other sections are &quot;diffonly&quot;, &quot;internaledit&quot;, and &quot;externaledit&quot;. The below parameters affect all actions but &quot;render&quot; and &quot;raw&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

{|class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot; width=85% align=center
!width=5%|Nome
!!width=50% class=&quot;unsortable&quot;|Função
!!width=25% class=&quot;unsortable&quot;|Exemplo
|-valign=top
|{{visible anchor|useskin}} 
| Especifique uma [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skin]]
|[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?useskin=modern {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?'''useskin'''=modern]
|-valign=top
|{{visible anchor|uselang}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify a language for the UI elements (such as the &quot;my talk&quot; link, etc.), i.e. the [[Special:MyLanguage/user interface language|user interface language]]; this is especially useful for creating an account, because at that stage no preference settings apply.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special language code &quot;&lt;code&gt;{{ll|Help:Qqx|qqx}}&lt;/code&gt;&quot; can be used to display the ids of all [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:System message|system messages]] used on a page.&lt;/span&gt;
|[{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Special:Userlogin&amp;type=signup&amp;uselang=de {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Special:Userlogin&amp;type=signup&amp;'''uselang'''=de]
|-valign=top
|{{visible anchor|variant}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify a language variant for the UI elements (this is used for example in the Chinese Wikipedia, as the Chinese language has variants);&lt;/span&gt;
|
|-valign=top
|{{visible anchor|printable}} 
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When set to &lt;code&gt;yes&lt;/code&gt;, the page is shown in a form that is suitable for printing&lt;/span&gt;
|
|-valign=top
|{{visible anchor|debug}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When set to {{phpi|true}} (e.g. &lt;code&gt;1&lt;/code&gt; or {{phpi|true}}), the [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader|ResourceLoader]] serves non-[[w:Minification (programming)|minified]] JavaScript and CSS.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;''See [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Features#Debug mode|ResourceLoader/Features#Debug mode]].''&lt;/span&gt;
| [{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;debug=true {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=Project:Sandbox&amp;'''debug=true''']

|-valign=top
|{{visible anchor|safemode}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When set to ''true'' (e.g. &lt;code&gt;1&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;), personal CSS and JS will not be loaded. This includes gadgets.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[Project:Tech News/2017#Tech News: 2017-16]]&lt;/ref&gt;
| [{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=MediaWiki&amp;safemode=1 {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=MediaWiki&amp;'''safemode=1''']
|-valign=top
|{{visible anchor|useskinversion}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify a skin version&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;{{ll|Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements#May 2020: First deployment - officewiki and testwiki|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements#May 2020: First deployment - officewiki and testwiki&lt;/span&gt;}}&lt;/ref&gt;
| [{{SERVER}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=MediaWiki&amp;useskinversion=2 {{SERVERNAME}}{{SCRIPTPATH}}/index.php?title=MediaWiki&amp;'''useskinversion=2''']
|}

{{anchor|View_and_render}}
== Visualização e renderização ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
View is the default action. If no other action is added to the URL, &lt;code&gt;action=view&lt;/code&gt; is used. This action shows a page, a revision, or the difference between two revisions of the same or two different pages. Below is a (partial) list.
&lt;/div&gt;

; diff
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;the value of this parameter identifies a revision; the difference between another revision and this one is returned:&lt;/span&gt;
;* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if &lt;code&gt;oldid&lt;/code&gt; is not passed, the difference between this revision and the previous one on the same article is shown;&lt;/span&gt;
;* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;otherwise, the difference between the revision given by &lt;code&gt;oldid/direction&lt;/code&gt; and this one is shown; the value of this parameter can be a revision id, the values &lt;code&gt;prev&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;next&lt;/code&gt; to identify a revision relative to the one given by &lt;code&gt;oldid/direction&lt;/code&gt;, and the value &lt;code&gt;cur&lt;/code&gt; to identify the latest revision of the page;&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that &lt;code&gt;oldid&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;diff&lt;/code&gt; need not be two revisions of the same article, allowing two revisions of two different pages to be compared&lt;/span&gt;
; redirect
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if the value of this parameter is 'no' and the page is a redirect, the page itself is shown and not the target of the redirect; this parameter has effect only on &lt;code&gt;action=view&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action=render&lt;/code&gt; and only if neither &lt;code&gt;oldid&lt;/code&gt; nor &lt;code&gt;diff&lt;/code&gt; is given, as this is the only case where the target article is shown instead of the redirect;&lt;/span&gt;
; rdfrom
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;when the page is the result of following a redirect from an external wiki, this parameter tells which wiki that was, so that the &quot;Redirected from ...&quot; line can be shown&lt;/span&gt;
; diffonly
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;override the user's preference on whether to render the page when a diff is requested, eg. &lt;code&gt;diffonly=yes&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
; search
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if non-blank (and if searches are enabled), override all other parameters and perform a search&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following parameters apply only to categories.
&lt;/div&gt;

; from
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if the page is a category, only list entries whose sortkey are equal or follows the value of this parameter;&lt;/span&gt;
::&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example:&lt;/span&gt; [https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special:Log&amp;type=upload&amp;from=20070814233520&amp;until=20070814233625 &lt;nowiki&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special:Log&amp;type=upload&lt;/nowiki&gt;&amp;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red;&quot;&gt;from&lt;/span&gt;=20070814233520&amp;until=20070814233625]
::&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Links to a log of all the images uploaded on August 14, 2007 from 23:35:20 until 23:36:25&lt;/span&gt;
; until
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if the page is a category, only list entries whose sortkey precedes the value of this parameter; only used if &lt;code&gt;from&lt;/code&gt; is not passed;&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following parameter apply only to images.
&lt;/div&gt;

; page
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a page number in a multi-page media; it currently only applies to DjVu and PDF files; first page is numbered 1;&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|History}}
== Histórico ==

; limit
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The number of page edits to list, the maximum is 5000 edits.&lt;/span&gt;
::''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example:&lt;/span&gt; [https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special:Contributions&amp;limit=13&amp;contribs=user&amp;target=Atlgirl052005 &lt;nowiki&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special:Contributions&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red;&quot;&gt;&amp;limit=13&lt;/span&gt;&amp;contribs=user&amp;target=Atlgirl052005]'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists 13 edits per page.&lt;/span&gt;
; dir
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;the relative order of edit history pages.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;page edits are sorted in decreasing timestamp.&lt;/span&gt;
; offset
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;uses a timestamp to specify which part of the history is displayed;&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Returns the edits which occurred '''before''' the timestamp;&lt;/span&gt;
::''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example:&lt;/span&gt;'' [https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special:Contributions&amp;offset=20090815195334&amp;contribs=user&amp;target=Atlgirl052005 &lt;nowiki&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special:Contributions&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red;&quot;&gt;&amp;offset=20090815195334&lt;/span&gt;&amp;contribs=user&amp;target=Atlgirl052005]
:::&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shows the edits which occurred immediately '''before''' the timestamp 20090815195334 (20090815195334 is not shown).&lt;/span&gt;
:::&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Parameter format is yyyymmddhhmmss. So 20090815195334 was created on August 15, 2009 [20090815] at 19:53 (UTC) and 34 seconds [195334].&lt;/span&gt;
:::&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[w:Wikipedia:Complete_diff_and_link_guide|Wikipedia:Complete diff and link guide]].&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if &lt;code&gt;dir=prev&lt;/code&gt; is added, it works the other way around, listing all edits '''after''' the timestamp&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref name=&quot;per&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, the value of this field is not actually an offset (the index of the first entry to show)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt;
::''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example:&lt;/span&gt; [https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special:Contributions&amp;offset=20090815195334&amp;dir=prev&amp;contribs=user&amp;target=Atlgirl052005 &lt;nowiki&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special:Contributions&amp;offset=20090815195334&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red;&quot;&gt;&amp;dir=prev&lt;/span&gt;&amp;contribs=user&amp;target=Atlgirl052005]''
:::&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shows the edits which occurred immediately '''after''' the timestamp 20090815195334 (20090815195334 is not shown).&lt;/span&gt;
::''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example to show only the very first edit on a page:&lt;/span&gt; [https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Wikipedia:Village_pump_(technical)&amp;action=history&amp;dir=prev&amp;limit=1 &lt;nowiki&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Wikipedia:Village_pump_(technical)&amp;action=history&amp;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: red;&quot;&gt;dir=prev&lt;/span&gt;&amp;limit=1]''
; feed
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a feed for the changes in the history is returned; allowed values are &lt;code&gt;atom&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;rss&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Can be disabled with {{ll|Manual:$wgFeed|$wgFeed}}.&lt;/span&gt;
; go
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[wikipedia:Deprecation|deprecated]] - should be avoided, because it has been superseded) &lt;code&gt;go=first&lt;/code&gt; the first (earliest) page of history is shown&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Raw}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Raw ==
&lt;/div&gt;
Passar &lt;code&gt;action=raw&lt;/code&gt; retorna o código fonte de uma página ou revisão. Por razões de cache e segurança, isto geralmente deve ser usado apenas através do [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgScriptPath|script path]], isto é, &lt;code&gt;index.php?title=...&lt;/code&gt;]].
While &quot;short urls&quot; like &lt;code&gt;/wiki/&lt;/code&gt; are only meant for action=view, they unofficially tend to work for other actions as well. This is expressly discouraged for action=raw as it leads to less effective caching and bypasses automatic purging after edits.

; templates
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if passed with value &lt;code&gt;expand&lt;/code&gt;, templates within the page are expanded;&lt;/span&gt;
; ctype
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;the content-type value to be used in the HTTP header when returning the raw content, instead of the default &lt;code&gt;text/x-wiki&lt;/code&gt;; this can only be one of the allowed types, which currently are &lt;code&gt;text/x-wiki&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;text/javascript&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;text/css&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;application/x-zope-edit&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
; maxage
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;the value of max-age in the Cache-Control HTTP header field to be used when returning the raw page (client cache)&lt;/span&gt;
; smaxage
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;the value of s-maxage in the Cache-Control HTTP header field to be used when returning the raw page (cache-server cache)&lt;/span&gt;
; oldid
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;the id of a specific revision to return&lt;/span&gt;
; direction
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;either &lt;code&gt;next&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;prev&lt;/code&gt;, or &lt;code&gt;cur&lt;/code&gt;; instead of the revision specified by oldid, returns the one following it, the one preceding it, or the current (last) one;&lt;/span&gt;
; section
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Limits output to a particular section or subsections of the document. Sections are specified with non-negative integers : section 0 being the section before any named sections, section one being the first named section or subsection and so on. The numbering scheme treats sections and subsections as identical. A list of the sections and subsections can be obtained via [[Special:MyLanguage/API|API]] with '''[https://en.wikipedia.org/w/api.php?action=parse&amp;text={{((}}:Radiohead{{))}}&amp;#95;&amp;#95;TOC&amp;#95;&amp;#95;&amp;prop=sections api.php?action=parse&amp;text={{((}}:My_page{{))}}&amp;#95;&amp;#95;TOC&amp;#95;&amp;#95;&amp;prop=sections]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
;; [https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Radiohead&amp;action=raw&amp;section=2 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;example&lt;/span&gt;]

{{anchor|Edit and submit}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Edit and submit ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The edit and submit actions perform almost the same action. By default, they return an &quot;edit page&quot; form for the page. Different results can be obtained by passing other arguments; some results (such as saving the new version of a page) can only be obtained using POST. This action takes the standard arguments for specifying a page or a page revision.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Options affecting the edit form===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The following options produce an effect on the edit form.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Note: 'section' also affects how the page is saved. Additionally, 'preload' and 'preloadparams' only work on wikitext contentmodel)&lt;/span&gt;

; section
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;specifies the index of a section within a document to preload and edit; sections are numbered sequentially from 0 on; section 0 is the part of the article before the first section header; value &lt;code&gt;new&lt;/code&gt; is used to append a new section to the document;&lt;/span&gt;
; preload
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;specifies a page, of which the wikitext is used as the initial value of the textarea in the edit form if the page or section to be edited does not exist; if it exists the preload command is ignored; also see {{ll|Manual:Creating pages with preloaded text}};&lt;/span&gt;
::Exemplo: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Talk:Main_Page?action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;preload=Project:Sandbox
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;preloadparams[] (or preloadparams%5B%5D):&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Replace &lt;code&gt;$1&lt;/code&gt; style parameters in preload text.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example https://mediawiki.org/wiki/Project:Sandbox?action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;preload=Manual:Creating_pages_with_preloaded_text/param_demo&amp;preloadparams%5b%5d=first%20value&amp;preloadparams%5b%5d=second%20value would cause [[Manual:Creating pages with_preloaded text/param demo|Manual:Creating pages with_preloaded text/param demo]] to be preloaded into the edit form, but with &lt;code&gt;$1&lt;/code&gt; replaced by ''first value'' and &lt;code&gt;$2&lt;/code&gt; replaced by ''second value''.&lt;/span&gt; {{introduced-inline|1.23}}
; editintro
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;title of an existing article or template to be rendered above the edit form;&lt;/span&gt;
; preloadtitle
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;in the case of section=new, provides initial content of the &quot;Subject/headline&quot; box; it can be edited before saving;&lt;/span&gt;
:: Exemplo: https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=User_talk:5dsddddd&amp;action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;preloadtitle=The+%5B%5BWP%3AARS%7CArticle+Rescue+Squadron%5D%5D
:: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example with both preloadtitle and preload:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;nowiki&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_Talk:Ikip?action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;preload=Template:Article_Rescue_Squadron_ invite&amp;preloadtitle=Invitation&lt;/nowiki&gt;
; nosummary
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not show the &quot;headline&quot; box when doing section=new.&lt;/span&gt;
; summary
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;its value is used as the edit summary in place of the default one.&lt;/span&gt;
; preview
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if set to &lt;code&gt;yes&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;no&lt;/code&gt;, overrides user preference &quot;{{int|tog-previewonfirst}}&quot; ({{phab|T11936}});&lt;/span&gt;
; internaledit/externaledit {{Removed-inline|[[gerrit:30173|1.22]]}} : &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;overrides user preference on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:External editors|external editors]];&lt;/span&gt;
; mode {{Removed-inline|[[gerrit:30173|1.22]]}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;this parameter affects the result page if passed with value &lt;code&gt;file&lt;/code&gt; and using an external editor;&lt;/span&gt;
; undo, undoafter
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;attempts to undo a sequence of edits, from the &lt;code&gt;undoafter&lt;/code&gt; revision up to the &lt;code&gt;undo&lt;/code&gt; revision; technically, this is done by trying to merge the inverse of these edits with the sequence of all subsequent edits; the values of these parameters are ids of old revisions of a page; if merge is not possible, a regular edit form for that revision is returned&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===What to do===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following options tell the software what to do when submitting: saving, showing a preview, or showing the difference with the current version.
&lt;/div&gt;

; wpSave
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;this argument is generated when saving the content of an edit form returned by the server, but is not actually used nor required when submitting (see below for required arguments to save);&lt;/span&gt;
; wpPreview
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;set in a POST request to request a preview of the page or section as if the value of wpTextbox1 were saved;&lt;/span&gt;
* '''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;by default, returns an edit form with a preview of the value of wpTextbox1;&lt;/span&gt;'''
* '''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if the additional &lt;code&gt;live&lt;/code&gt; argument is passed, only the rendering of the value of wpTextbox1 is shown, not the form and the other GUI element; this is similar to the result of saving and then viewing with &lt;code&gt;action=render&lt;/code&gt;; see  [[Manual:Live preview|Manual:Live preview]] for more info;&lt;/span&gt;'''
* '''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;the argument &lt;code&gt;wpLivePreview&lt;/code&gt; is identical to wpPreview; therefore, a regular preview is returned if &lt;code&gt;live&lt;/code&gt; is not passed;&lt;/span&gt;'''
; wpDiff
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;set in a POST request to request a table showing the changes between the current version of the page or section and the version as if value of wpTextbox1 were saved;&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parameters that are needed to save===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following parameters are required when a user saves a page. The edit summary field may also be required if so configured (see below).
&lt;/div&gt;

; wpTextbox1 
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;the new page/section content;&lt;/span&gt;
; wpStarttime
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;the timestamp of when the user started editing the page; used to check whether the page has been deleted between this moment and the submission time (in this case, the user is asked to confirm saving);&lt;/span&gt;
; wpRecreate
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;in case the page was deleted after wpStarttime, this field confirms that the page is to be saved;&lt;/span&gt;
; wpEdittime
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;for new pages, it is equal to wpStarttime; otherwise, it is the timestamp of the last revision of the page; used to check edit conflicts;&lt;/span&gt;
; wpEditToken
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;an [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Edit token|edit token]]; this is used to avoid users from being tricked into saving a page by following a link or pressing a button in an external site. For non-logged-in users, wpEditToken is required since [[phab:rSVN18112]]; it currently contains only the characters &lt;code&gt;+\&lt;/code&gt; rather than a random string (see [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Edit token#The edit token suffix|edit token suffix]]).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For the page to be saved, &lt;code&gt;wpStarttime&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;wpEdittime&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;wpTextbox1&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wpEditToken&lt;/code&gt; are required in a POST request, and neither &lt;code&gt;wpPreview&lt;/code&gt; nor &lt;code&gt;wpDiff&lt;/code&gt; are passed. If the page was deleted after &lt;code&gt;wpStarttime&lt;/code&gt;, the boolean option &lt;code&gt;wpRecreate&lt;/code&gt; is also required.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Optional additional data===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The edit summary or the &quot;ignore blank&quot; parameter may be mandatory if &quot;warn on blank summaries&quot; is configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

; wpSummary
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;the edit summary;&lt;/span&gt;
; wpMinoredit
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if set in a save request, the edit is marked as minor; for preview and diff, it is the initial value of &quot;this is a minor edit&quot; checkbox in the edit form;&lt;/span&gt;
; wpWatchthis
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if passed on a save request, the page is added to the user's watchlist; if it is not passed in a save request, the page is removed from the user's watchlist; for preview or diff, this is the initial value of the &quot;watch this page&quot; checkbox of the edit form;&lt;/span&gt;
; wpSection
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;specify the index of a section within a document to submit to; sections are numbered sequentially from 0 on; section 0 is the part of the article before the first section header; value &lt;code&gt;new&lt;/code&gt; is used to append a new section to the document;&lt;/span&gt;
; wpChangeTags
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;an optional comma-separated list of [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tags|tags]] to be added to the edit.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If any of the provided tags are not activated for manual use, the edit will be rejected.&lt;/span&gt;
; wpAutoSummary
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the MD5-hashing of the edit summary field as initially presented to the user in the edit form; this field is used to check if the user has modified that field before submitting: if the MD5 hashing of the value of &lt;code&gt;wpEditSummary&lt;/code&gt; is the same as this field, the edit summary has not been modified;&lt;/span&gt;
; wpIgnoreBlankSummary
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;save page even if user has not modified the edit summary, while they were supposed to;&lt;/span&gt;
; wpTextbox2 
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;in case of an edit conflict, it contains the value of wpTextbox1 of the save request that generated the conflict;&lt;/span&gt;
; safemode
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;some browsers are known to have problems with editing text containing Unicode characters; when a request for an edit form come from one such browser, the non-ascii characters in the initial content of the textarea are converted into the form &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#xxxx;&lt;/code&gt; and the value &lt;code&gt;safemode=1&lt;/code&gt; is hidden in the form; when submitting, the &lt;code&gt;safemode&lt;/code&gt; field indicate that the inverse translation is to be performed; a browser is considered non-Unicode-compliant if the User-Agent HTTP header matches a regular expressions in the variable {{ll|Manual:$wgBrowserBlackList|$wgBrowserBlackList}};&lt;/span&gt;
{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This has ''nothing'' to do with PHP's [[Special:MyLanguage/safe_mode|safe_mode]] setting.&lt;/span&gt;}}
; wpScrolltop
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used to preserve the scrollbar position in the edit textbox when loading a preview.&lt;/span&gt;
; redlink
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if the user does not have permission to edit the page, redirect to the empty article page (e.g., &quot;Wikipedia does not have an article with this exact name&quot;) instead of showing the permission error notice; this parameter is used on red links.&lt;/span&gt;
; wpExtraQueryRedirect
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;hidden input to modify after save URL and is not used by actual edit form. Intended to be used by gadgets and such.&lt;/span&gt;

== Páginas especiais ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Most special pages have additional parameters, specific to the function they perform. As an example, the parameters for [[Special:Export]] are outlined in {{ll|Manual:Parameters to Special:Export}}
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following URL parameters provide initial values for some input fields; they can be edited before submitting the form.
&lt;/div&gt;

===[[Special:MovePage]]===
;wpReason
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;text field with reason.&lt;/span&gt;
;wpNewTitle
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;text field with new title.&lt;/span&gt;
;wpLeaveRedirect
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whether to select the &quot;Leave a redirect behind&quot; checkbox.&lt;/span&gt;

===[[Special:BlockIP]]===
;wpDisableEmail
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whether to select the &quot;{{int|ipbemailban}}&quot; checkbox.&lt;/span&gt;
;wpDisableUTEdit
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whether to select the &quot;{{int|ipb-disableusertalk}}&quot; checkbox.&lt;/span&gt;
;wpReason
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;initially selected item in the drop-down box, value should match a row in the [[MediaWiki:Ipbreason-dropdown]].&lt;/span&gt;
;wpReason-other
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;text field with custom reason; require &lt;code&gt;wpReason=other&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
;wpAutoBlock
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whether to select the &quot;{{int|ipbenableautoblock}}&quot; checkbox.&lt;/span&gt;
;wpWatch
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whether to select the &quot;{{int|ipbwatchuser}}&quot; checkbox.&lt;/span&gt;

===[[Special:UserRights]]===
;user-reason
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;text field with reason.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Maxlag parameter==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.10|version2=1.27}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The '''{{ll|Manual:maxlag parameter|maxlag parameter}}''' is used only if the software is running on a replicated database cluster.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The maxlag parameter makes it so a request is not served if there is high server traffic. maxlag parameter applies to all actions.  maxlag parameter value is a number; the lower this value, the lower the traffic that causes the request not to be served. Zero is not allowed.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Notas ==
&lt;references /&gt;

== Ver também ==
* {{ll|Markup spec|Markup spec}}
* {{ll|API:Main module}}
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:URL|m:Help:URL]]
* [[w:Wikipedia talk:WikiProject Inline Templates/Archive 2#MediaWiki URL templates|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Listing of functions&lt;/span&gt;]]
* [[Snippets/Load JS and CSS by URL]] (&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;adds withJS and withCSS parameters which are processed on the client side&lt;/span&gt;)

[[Category:Customization techniques{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Wiki page URLs{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>0gemik37lxdf0yypx7xox449hzk48d9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/45/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>348290</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403064</id>
      <parentid>1803159</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:07:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="170" xml:space="preserve">* '''Aiuta la tua community''' — vedi la [[$beta|lista di modi utili per aiutare la tua community locale]] per ottimizzare l'esperienza di editing con l'editor visuale.</text>
      <sha1>k9uc2ui4ne8mwma5pou9gfks04qk456</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Extension registration</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>354329</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402502</id>
      <parentid>5375674</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:20:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26372" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:52--&gt; '''Extension registration''' is the mechanism that MediaWiki uses to load [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions&lt;/tvar&gt;|extensions]] and [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins&lt;/tvar&gt;|skins]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:53--&gt; You put configuration data in a file named &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; in the root directory of your extension or skin, and MediaWiki uses this to register extensions and skins.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Migration for site administrators == &lt;!--T:133--&gt;

&lt;!--T:54--&gt;
Before MediaWiki 1.25, configuration for extensions and skins was done in a PHP file using the extension's or skin's name, for example &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:6--&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:46--&gt; This must be done before you load any extensions or skins from non-standard directory locations:&lt;/translate&gt;

: &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; If you keep your extensions in a location different from &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, you need to override &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{wg|ExtensionDirectory}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, ''or use the second parameter of &lt;tvar name=3&gt;{{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}}&lt;/tvar&gt;'', to specify the directory in which to find the extension.&lt;/translate&gt;
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // &lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:143--&gt; Looks in &lt;tvar name=2&gt;$wgExtensionDirectory&lt;/tvar&gt; for &lt;tvar name=1&gt;/some/path/FooBar/extension.json&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:45--&gt; If your skins are not in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, you need to override the poorly named &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{wg|StyleDirectory}}&lt;/tvar&gt;, ''or use the second parameter of &lt;tvar name=3&gt;&lt;code&gt;wfLoadSkin()&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;'', to specify the directory in which to find the skin.&lt;/translate&gt;
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // &lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:144--&gt; Looks in &lt;tvar name=3&gt;$wgStyleDirectory&lt;/tvar&gt; for both &lt;tvar name=1&gt;/my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;/my/skins/BazBar/skin.json&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Migration for extension developers == &lt;!--T:9--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:109--&gt; Since MW 1.30, namespace IDs defined in &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; can be overwritten locally, by defining the respective constant in &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; before loading the extension.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:135--&gt; Consider for instance the following namespace declaration in a &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; file:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:110--&gt; This would per default cause the constant NS_FOO to be defined to have the value 1212.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:136--&gt; However, this can be overwritten by defining the respective constant in LocalSettings.php:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:111--&gt; This would cause the &quot;Foo&quot; namespace to be registered with the ID 6688 instead of 1212.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:137--&gt; When overriding namespace IDs, don't forget that all talk namespaces must have odd IDs, and the ID of the talk namespace must always be the subject namespace's ID plus one.&lt;/translate&gt;

:''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:121--&gt; See also the [&lt;tvar name=wall&gt;https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/&lt;/tvar&gt; extension registration wall of sadness (now superpowers)].&lt;/translate&gt;''

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; The script &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; helps you migrating from PHP entry points to a JSON metadata file.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; If your extension supports older versions of MediaWiki, you should keep your PHP entry point &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; until you drop support for those older versions.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:40--&gt;
Sample command lines:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:38--&gt; You may need to uninstall your extension from &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; if you receive errors that constants or functions cannot be redefined.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:43--&gt; You should replace your PHP entry point file (FooBar.php) with something like the following happens to not break wikis during the upgrade process.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// &lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:145--&gt; Keep i18n globals so &lt;tvar name=1&gt;mergeMessageFileList.php&lt;/tvar&gt; doesn't break&lt;/translate&gt;
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:47--&gt;
Or skins
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// &lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:146--&gt; Keep i18n globals so &lt;tvar name=1&gt;mergeMessageFileList.php&lt;/tvar&gt; doesn't break&lt;/translate&gt;
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Retaining documentation === &lt;!--T:49--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:50--&gt; PHP entry points usually have some documentation of configuration settings that is useful and shouldn't be lost.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:123--&gt; Unfortunately JSON doesn't support comments. It is recommended that you transfer configuration documentation to a &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; file in the extension's repository.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:124--&gt; You should also document configuration on-wiki in your Extension:''MyExtension'' page.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:125--&gt; It is possible to include some documentation directly in the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:126--&gt; Extension registration ignores any key in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; starting with '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' in the top-level structure, so you can put comments in those parts of the JSON file. For example:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:128--&gt;
Version 1 of the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; format also allowed &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; in &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; section, but this is no longer recommended or supported in version 2. &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; field of the config variable should be used instead.

&lt;!--T:62--&gt;
This should only be used for brief notes and comments.

== Features == &lt;!--T:13--&gt;

&lt;!--T:14--&gt;
If you are loading a large number of extensions, extension registration will provide a performance boost as long as you have [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning&lt;/tvar&gt;|APC]] (or APCu) installed. Extensions that are loaded together with &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (with plural -s) will be cached together.

=== Attributes === &lt;!--T:15--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; A recurring problem is how to &quot;register&quot; something with another extension.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; Usually this meant that you had to load one extension before another.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:18--&gt; For example, VisualEditor has a &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt; which allows extensions to add their modules.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:19--&gt; However, in VisualEditor's entry point it has:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; This means that if any extension appends to the array before VisualEditor is loaded, VE will wipe out its entry in this array.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:21--&gt; Some extensions depended upon a specific load order, others hacked around this with &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:22--&gt; Extension registration solves this problem with &quot;attributes&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:23--&gt; In the Math extension, its &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; would have something like:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:114--&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the attributes need to be defined in the separate section &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;!--T:115--&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; node needs to be an object with the extension name as key and an object of attribute/value pairs as the value. Be aware that the key in the subobject must not contain the extension name!
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:24--&gt;
When VisualEditor wants to access this attribute it uses:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Requirements (dependencies) === &lt;!--T:65--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:98--&gt; Extension registration has a &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; section, which acts similar to [[Composer]]'s &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; section.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:69--&gt; It allows an extension developer to specify several requirements for the extension, such as a specific MediaWiki version (or greater/less than) or another extension/skin.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:70--&gt; For example, to add a dependency on a MediaWiki version that is greater than 1.26.0, you can add the following code to &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:66--&gt;
The key of the &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; object is the name of the dependency (prior to MediaWiki 1.29.0 only &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; was supported), the value is a valid version constraint (the format has to match the one [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md&lt;/tvar&gt; used by composer]).

&lt;!--T:89--&gt;
In MediaWiki 1.29.0 and above you can also add dependencies on skins and other extensions like so:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:112--&gt;
* The extensions and skins specified here must also use the extension registrations system described on this page for this to work.
* The string added to specify the extension or skin must be identical to the string specified in the &quot;name&quot; field of the respective &quot;&lt;tvar name=extension&gt;extension.json&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; or &quot;&lt;tvar name=skin&gt;skin.json&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; file.
&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:116--&gt; For extensions using Wikimedia [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Continuous integration&lt;/tvar&gt;|continuous integration]], dependencies also need to be added to &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Check if an extension is loaded without actually requiring it === &lt;!--T:76--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:127--&gt; Many extensions may provide features that work only if another extension is loaded too, without really needing this feature for the core extension function to work.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:138--&gt; As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:139--&gt; Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:140--&gt; For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:78--&gt;
To implement a standardized way of checking, if an extension is loaded or not (without the need of extra work in an extension that is a soft-dependency in another one), extension registration can be used. It implements an &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns a simple boolean, if the extension is loaded or not (the extension needs to be loaded with extension registration for this to work). Example:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:118--&gt;
Since [[MediaWiki 1.32]] it's also possible to check if an extension is loaded and satisfies a given composer version constraint:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:119--&gt;
If you would like to check if a specific version of an extension is loaded in earlier versions of MediaWiki, information like that can be extracted with the &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns credit information for all loaded extensions. Example:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:84--&gt;
Alternatively, if the extension B defines a special constant meant for this purpose during loading, it is possible to check, if it is defined:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:82--&gt;
A more brittle way, that should be avoided is to check if a specific class of extension B exists or not, e.g. using this code:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:85--&gt; This might break if the extension exists in the file system but is not loaded, e.g. if composer was used for autoloading.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:86--&gt; If the class was renamed or ceases to exist (e.g. because it is not package public) this will also break.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:83--&gt;
In general it is preferred to share code via composer components instead of extensions. If the classes of an extension only need to exist, but the extension does not need to be configured nor loaded, for what you want to do, that is a strong indicator that that code should be split off into a composer component you should depend on instead.

=== Configs (Your extension/skins settings) === &lt;!--T:71--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:79--&gt;
By default, &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; assumes that your config settings start with a &quot;wg&quot; prefix.

&lt;!--T:80--&gt;
If that's not the case, you can override the prefix by using a special key:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:81--&gt;
That would use a prefix of &quot;eg&quot;, and set the global variable &lt;tvar name=setting&gt;&lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; to true.

&lt;!--T:90--&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the configuration section of extension registration provides a lot more features and allows you to describe your configuration options with much more detail. Instead of having a single key -&gt; value store for your configuration options, you can also add the following information.

&lt;!--T:91--&gt;
The general structure of the &lt;tvar name=config&gt;&lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; changes slightly to the following, more object-oriented version:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Value ==== &lt;!--T:92--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:99--&gt; The value of the configuration moved to this place.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:100--&gt; This is the only required key for a configuration object.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Path ==== &lt;!--T:93--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:101--&gt; The boolean value of the &lt;tvar name=path&gt;&lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; key identifies, if the value of the configuration option should be interpreted as a filesystem path, relative to the extension directory root.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:102--&gt; E.g., if the value of the configuration is &lt;tvar name=file&gt;&lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and the &lt;tvar name=path&gt;&lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; is true, the actual value will be &lt;tvar name=full-path&gt;&lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Description ==== &lt;!--T:94--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:103--&gt; The &lt;tvar name=desc&gt;&lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; key for a configuration option can hold a non-localized string, which can be used to explain the configuration option to other developers or the users (system administrators) of your extension.&lt;/translate&gt;
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:104--&gt; The value of the description key is usually not exposed to the frontend of the wiki, however, take a look to the outlook for more information how this feature could be used in the future!&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:95--&gt;
There's also the possibility to add a message key of MediaWiki's internal localisation system as a description (&lt;tvar name=desc-msg&gt;&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), which, in the future, will be used to expose the description in the frontend of the MediaWiki installation.

==== public / private ==== &lt;!--T:96--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:105--&gt; This option is a boolean, which defaults to false, which means, that the configuration option and the value is marked as &lt;tvar name=private&gt;&quot;private&quot;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:106--&gt; This value is not used anywhere at the moment, take a look to the outlook to find out more about this option.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Outlook ==== &lt;!--T:122--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{tracked|T155155}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:97--&gt;
The mentioned changes above are also preparation steps for an improved configuration management in MediaWiki. The above changes allow us to, e.g., expose the configuration options of extensions in the MediaWiki UI. For this, the localised description message (&lt;tvar name=desc-msg&gt;&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=desc&gt;&lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;) and the indication, if the configuration option should be exposed or not (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) is needed.

=== Unit tests auto-discovery === &lt;!--T:87--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:107--&gt; MediaWiki allows any extension to [[&lt;tvar name=man&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions&lt;/tvar&gt;|register phpunit tests]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:108--&gt; Without extension registration, you would need to register a hook handler for the &lt;tvar name=UnitTestsList&gt;{{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}}&lt;/tvar&gt; hook, which would look something like:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:117--&gt; (as described on the manual page). However, this code looks the same for a lot of extensions, so you could call it unnecessary code duplication.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:141--&gt; If your extension uses extension registration and your phpunit tests are located in the &lt;tvar name=code&gt;&lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; subdirectory of your extension, the phpunit wrapper of MediaWiki will autodiscover the unit tests with the help of extension registration.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:142--&gt; Therefore, you don't need to register the hook anymore and you don't need to specify, that your unit tests are saved in the default directory.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Customizing registration == &lt;!--T:25--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

&lt;translate&gt;
== Also composer.json == &lt;!--T:39--&gt;

&lt;!--T:41--&gt;
If an extension or skin has library dependencies, it may have a &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well, see &lt;tvar name=manual&gt;{{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}&lt;/tvar&gt;. Use the &lt;tvar name=code&gt;&lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; field to make MediaWiki use Composer's autoloading when appropriate.

&lt;!--T:131--&gt;
Some metadata fields overlap between &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; (discussed in &lt;tvar name=phab&gt;{{task|T89456}}&lt;/tvar&gt;), including :
* &lt;tvar name=3&gt;&lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=4&gt;&lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;
* &lt;tvar name=5&gt;&lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=6&gt;&lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;

== Code stewardship == &lt;!--T:134--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

&lt;translate&gt;
== See also == &lt;!--T:36--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:37--&gt;
* Report bugs against the [[&lt;tvar name=phab&gt;phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/&lt;/tvar&gt;|MediaWiki-Configuration]] project.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:42--&gt;
* Old versions of [[&lt;tvar name=developing&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup&lt;/tvar&gt;|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (prior to May 2015) and &lt;tvar name=ExtensionCredits&gt;{{wg|ExtensionCredits}}&lt;/tvar&gt; describe the old approach of declaring extension information in PHP code and variables
&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:57--&gt; Known limitations&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:58--&gt; Overview of architecture&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:59--&gt; &lt;tvar name=schema&gt;&lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; is the schema for &lt;tvar name=json&gt;&lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; (and skin.json).&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:61--&gt; [[&lt;tvar name=rfc&gt;Requests for comment/Extension registration&lt;/tvar&gt;|RfC]] about implementing extension registration&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:129--&gt; [[&lt;tvar name=extwall&gt;toollabs:extreg-wos&lt;/tvar&gt;|Extension registration wall of superpowers!]] — summary of which extensions are still to be converted.&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{task|T98668}} — &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:130--&gt; Tracking ticket for converting all extensions and skins on Git to use extension registration.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== References == &lt;!--T:132--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>cqsxo8f04zw3q2koma6nq6cpink3wmz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>OOUI/Using OOUI in MediaWiki</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>363729</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403127</id>
      <parentid>5076649</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:29:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Graham87</username>
        <id>8938</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>grammar</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11798" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{OOUI}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:1--&gt;
&lt;tvar|1&gt;'''{{ll|OOUI}}'''&lt;/&gt; is included in MediaWiki core, available to be used by both PHP and JavaScript code.
&lt;/translate&gt;

== PHP ==
&lt;translate&gt;
=== Before you start === &lt;!--T:2--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
To use OOUI elements, the OOUI PHP library has to be loaded and the necessary styles have to be set up per the correct skin ([[phab:T98029#1475549|boring details]]).

The most convenient way to do this is:

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Special pages etc. ==== &lt;!--T:3--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
Whenever you have access to an [[Manual:OutputPage.php|OutputPage]] instance, call its &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; method.
It is usually available as &lt;code&gt;$this-&gt;getOutput()&lt;/code&gt; in most contexts, such as on special pages, or as &lt;code&gt;$out&lt;/code&gt; in hook signatures.

Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
function execute( $param ) {
	$out = $this-&gt;getOutput();
	$out-&gt;enableOOUI();
	// … More code here …
	$group = new OOUI\ButtonGroupWidget( [
		// … More widgets here …
	] );
	$out-&gt;addHTML( $group );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Another example, useful when you have no easy access to an OutputPage instance:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
RequestContext::getMain()-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;enableOOUI();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Note that the method &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; (implemented by [[Manual:OutputPage.php|class &lt;code&gt;OutputPage&lt;/code&gt;]]) ensures that the proper theme and directionality is configured, and that the page loads the OOUI styles.
The OOUI widgets are namespaced, so they must be prefixed with &lt;code&gt;OOUI\&lt;/code&gt; or imported.
Stringifying the widgets converts them to HTML, so you can add widgets to the page using &lt;code&gt;$out-&gt;addHTML()&lt;/code&gt;.
Also note that in some cases, just enabling OOUI is not enough.
For example, if you need a certain icon added, you need to explicitly add the related icon pack.
For example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public function load() {
    $this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;enableOOUI();
    $this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addModuleStyles( [ 'oojs-ui.styles.icons-moderation' ] );
    return ( new OOUI\IconWidget(
		[
			'icon' =&gt; 'block',
			'classes' =&gt; [ 'flaggedrevs-icon' ],
			'title' =&gt; 'Block',
		]
	) )-&gt;toString();
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;

==== Parser functions and tags, [[&lt;tvar|1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:ContentHandler&lt;/&gt;|content models]] ==== &lt;!--T:4--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
If you have access to a ParserOutput instance (usually as &lt;code&gt;$parser-&gt;getOutput()&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;$pout&lt;/code&gt;), call its &lt;code&gt;setEnableOOUI( true )&lt;/code&gt; method, and also &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::setupOOUI()&lt;/code&gt;.

If you have access to a Parser instance, instead just call its &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; method.

Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function myTagHook( $content, array $attributes, Parser $parser, PPFrame $frame ) {
	$parser-&gt;enableOOUI();
	// … More code here …
	$group = new OOUI\ButtonGroupWidget( [
		// … More widgets here …
	] );
	return [ $group-&gt;toString(), 'markerType' =&gt; 'nowiki' ];
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Otherwise ==== &lt;!--T:5--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
See [[OOUI/PHP examples#Before you start]].
(Instead of {{tag|link|open}} tags use the ResourceLoader style modules described below.)

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Using OOUI widgets === &lt;!--T:6--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
Construct a widget:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn = new OOUI\ButtonWidget( [
    'label' =&gt; 'Click me!',
    'href' =&gt; 'https://example.com',
] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Its properties can be changed using getter/setter methods:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn-&gt;setLabel( 'Still click me!' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;When you're done creating the widget, you can treat it like a string to display it.
(You can explicitly convert to string by calling the &lt;code&gt;toString()&lt;/code&gt; method.)&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addHTML( &quot;&lt;div&gt;$btn&lt;/div&gt;&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== List of available elements ==== &lt;!--T:7--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
See also:

* Automatically updated list: https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/php/annotated.html
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/demos/demos.php?page=widgets&amp;theme=wikimediaui&amp;direction=ltr Live demo with examples] ([[phab:diffusion/GOJU/browse/master/demos/pages/widgets.php|demo page in master branch]])

As of OOUI v0.34.0, released 2019-09-04, these elements available in PHP (or in [[OOUI/Using OOUI in MediaWiki#Using OOUI widgets 2|JS via &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt;, see below]]) are:

Widgets:

* ButtonWidget
* ButtonInputWidget
* ButtonGroupWidget
* CheckboxInputWidget
* CheckboxMultiselectInputWidget
* RadioInputWidget
* RadioSelectInputWidget
* TextInputWidget
* MultilineTextInputWidget
* NumberInputWidget
* SearchInputWidget
* DropdownInputWidget
* ComboBoxInputWidget
* LabelWidget
* IconWidget
* IndicatorWidget
* ProgressBarWidget
* SelectFileInputWidget
* SelectWidget
* TabSelectWidget
* TabOptionWidget

Layouts:

* ActionFieldLayout
* FieldLayout
* FieldsetLayout
* FormLayout
* HorizontalLayout
* IndexLayout
* MenuLayout
* PanelLayout
* TabPanelLayout
* StackLayout

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Example ==== &lt;!--T:8--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
Large structures can be created and displayed in a single call:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addHTML( new OOUI\FormLayout( [
	'method' =&gt; 'POST',
	'action' =&gt; 'login.php',
	'items' =&gt; [
		new OOUI\FieldsetLayout( [
			'label' =&gt; 'Form layout',
			'items' =&gt; [
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\TextInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'username',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'User name',
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\TextInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'password',
						'type' =&gt; 'password',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'Password',
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\CheckboxInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'rememberme',
						'selected' =&gt; true,
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'Remember me',
						'align' =&gt; 'inline',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\ButtonInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'login',
						'label' =&gt; 'Log in',
						'type' =&gt; 'submit',
						'flags' =&gt; [ 'primary', 'progressive' ],
						'icon' =&gt; 'check',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; null,
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
			]
		] )
	]
] ) );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== {{ll|HTMLForm}}, FormSpecialPage ===

HTMLForm has OOUI support.
You can use the &lt;code&gt;ooui&lt;/code&gt; display format for [[HTMLForm]] forms to render them using OOUI.
This is usually more convenient, as HTMLForm provides functionality for validation and handling form submission.
See [[HTMLForm#Display formats]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$htmlForm = HTMLForm::factory( 'ooui', $formDescriptor, $this-&gt;getContext() );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

On FormSpecialPage, use the &lt;code&gt;getDisplayFormat()&lt;/code&gt; method:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
protected function getDisplayFormat() {
	return 'ooui';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Examples:

* https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/specials/SpecialMIMESearch.php ([[Special:MIMESearch]])
* https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/specials/SpecialResetTokens.php ([[Special:ResetTokens]])

Widgets used in the form will be automatically [[#Infusion|infused (see below)]] if the JS widget offers additional capabilities over the PHP one.

== JavaScript ==
&lt;translate&gt;
=== Using OOUI widgets === &lt;!--T:9--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
Depending on which of the features you're going to use, you should list one or more of the following modules as dependencies of your modules that use OOUI:

* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt;: OOUI's core JavaScript library. Contains the basic [[OOUI/Widgets|widgets]] and [[OOUI/Layouts|layouts]] that are [[#List of available elements|also available in PHP (see exact list above)]] and the ability to [[#Infusion|infuse]] them.
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-widgets&lt;/code&gt;: Additional [[OOUI/Widgets|widgets]] and [[OOUI/Layouts|layouts]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-toolbars&lt;/code&gt;: [[OOUI/Toolbars|Toolbar and tools]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-windows&lt;/code&gt;: [[OOUI/Windows|Windows and dialogs]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui.styles.icons-*&lt;/code&gt;: Specific icon styles depending on what icons you may want to use, e.g. &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui.styles.icons-interactions&lt;/code&gt; for check icon. Group names can be found in [https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/demos/?page=icons&amp;theme=wikimediaui&amp;direction=ltr&amp;platform=desktop demo page] or in [https://github.com/wikimedia/flask-oojsui/tree/master/flask_oojsui/static/oojs-ui code].  

For example ([[extension.json]]):

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;ResourceModules&quot;: {
		&quot;ext.myExtension&quot;: {
			&quot;dependencies&quot;: [
				&quot;oojs-ui-core&quot;,
				&quot;oojs-ui-windows&quot;
			],
			&quot;scripts&quot;: [
				...
			]
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Code in modules depending on OOUI can use the elements, as described in this OOUI documentation.
[[OOUI/Creating interfaces programmatically|Start reading it here]].

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Infusion === &lt;!--T:10--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
To provide [[:en:Progressive_enhancement|progressive enhancement]] and avoid code duplication between PHP and JS, OOUI PHP widgets present on a page can be ''infused'' into OOUI widgets.

Assuming that a PHP widget has been made infusable when it was created:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn = new OOUI\ButtonWidget( [
    'infusable' =&gt; true,
    'id' =&gt; 'my-button',
    'label' =&gt; 'Click me!',
    'href' =&gt; 'https://example.com',
] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

It can be infused from JavaScript code:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var button = OO.ui.infuse( $( '#my-button' ) );
// Or, for self-documenting code:
var button = OO.ui.ButtonWidget.static.infuse( $( '#my-button' ) );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;The widget can now be modified from JavaScript code:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
button
	.setLabel( 'Really click me!' )
	.on( 'click', function () {
		alert( 'I was clicked!' );
	} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Gadgets === &lt;!--T:11--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
OOUI can be used in on-wiki gadgets or user scripts.
As above, you just need to ensure the &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt; module (or a different one, as described above) is loaded before your code runs.

For gadgets, you should add an entry in the &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; field of gadget description.
See [[Extension:Gadgets#Options|Gadgets' documentation]] for instructions and examples.

For user scripts, wrap your code in a &lt;code&gt;mw.loader.using( … )&lt;/code&gt; call, as always when loading modules.
See [[ResourceLoader/Modules#mw.loader.using|ResourceLoader documentation]] for instructions.
Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.using( 'oojs-ui-core' ).done( function () {
	$( function () {
		var button = new OO.ui.ButtonWidget( {
			label: 'Click me!'
		} );
		button.on( 'click', function () {
			alert( 'You clicked the button!' );
		} );
		$( '#mw-content-text' ).append( button.$element );
	} );
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== MediaWiki-specific OOUI widgets == &lt;!--T:12--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
Several MediaWiki-specific OOUI widgets are available under the &lt;code&gt;mw.widgets&lt;/code&gt; (JavaScript) or &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki\Widget&lt;/code&gt; (PHP) namespace, implementing interface elements common in MediaWiki.

TODO Write me.

* [[Manual:TitleInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:UserInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:SearchInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:NamespaceInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:DateInputWidget]] (example: [[gerrit:226647]])
* [[Manual:DateTimeInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:CategorySelector]]

&lt;translate&gt;
== Using themes == &lt;!--T:13--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
OOUI comes with two themes, and every widget you create will use the theme defined by the current skin using &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#SkinOOUIThemes|SkinOOUIThemes}}&lt;/code&gt; in extension.json.
Custom themes can also be provided by the skin.
See [[OOUI/Themes]] for details.

{{Feedback/oojsui}}

[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>i5lpijye78q1gxaoouicqlehecwpiei</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Extension registration/ja</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>367171</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402511</id>
      <parentid>5375686</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26773" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
'''拡張機能の登録''' ('''Extension registration''') は、MediaWiki が[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|拡張機能]]や[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|外装]]を読み込むときに使うしくみです。
設定データは、&lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; や &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; の名前をつけたファイルに書いて拡張機能や外装のルートディレクトリに置きます。Mediawikiはこれを使って拡張機能や外装を登録します。

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
== サイト管理者向けの移行手順 ==

MediaWiki 1.25 未満では、&lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; や &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt; のように拡張機能や外装と同じ名前を持つ PHP ファイルを使って拡張機能や外装の設定を行っていました。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

これは以下のように置き換えることができます:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;これはあらゆる拡張機能や外装を読み込む前にやっておかないといけません。&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt; とは異なる場所に拡張機能を配置している場合、{{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} をオーバーライドするか、または {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} の 2 番めのパラメーターを使用して拡張機能を見つけるディレクトリを指定する必要があります。
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Looks in $wgExtensionDirectory for /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt; とは異なる場所に外装を配置している場合、正しく設定されていない {{wg|StyleDirectory}} の値を上書きして修正する必要があります。&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Looks in $wgStyleDirectory for both /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json and /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== 拡張機能開発者向けの移行手順 ==
Mediawikiのバージョン1.30以降では、拡張機能を読み込む前に &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; でそれぞれの定数を定義することにより &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; で定義された名前空間IDをローカルで上書きすることができます。
例えば、&lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; のファイルで以下の名前空間宣言を行うことを検討してください:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would per default cause the constant NS_FOO to be defined to have the value 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, this can be overwritten by defining the respective constant in LocalSettings.php:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would cause the &quot;Foo&quot; namespace to be registered with the ID 6688 instead of 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When overriding namespace IDs, don't forget that all talk namespaces must have odd IDs, and the ID of the talk namespace must always be the subject namespace's ID plus one.&lt;/span&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also the [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ extension registration wall of sadness (now superpowers)].&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; helps you migrating from PHP entry points to a JSON metadata file.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension supports older versions of MediaWiki, you should keep your PHP entry point &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; until you drop support for those older versions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sample command lines:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to uninstall your extension from &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; if you receive errors that constants or functions cannot be redefined.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should replace your PHP entry point file (FooBar.php) with something like the following happens to not break wikis during the upgrade process.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Or skins
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Retaining documentation ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PHP entry points usually have some documentation of configuration settings that is useful and shouldn't be lost.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately JSON doesn't support comments. It is recommended that you transfer configuration documentation to a &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; file in the extension's repository.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also document configuration on-wiki in your Extension:''MyExtension'' page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to include some documentation directly in the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration ignores any key in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; starting with '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' in the top-level structure, so you can put comments in those parts of the JSON file. For example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Version 1 of the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; format also allowed &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; in &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; section, but this is no longer recommended or supported in version 2. &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; field of the config variable should be used instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This should only be used for brief notes and comments.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Features ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are loading a large number of extensions, extension registration will provide a performance boost as long as you have [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (or APCu) installed. Extensions that are loaded together with &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (with plural -s) will be cached together.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== 属性 ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A recurring problem is how to &quot;register&quot; something with another extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usually this meant that you had to load one extension before another.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, VisualEditor has a &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt; which allows extensions to add their modules.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, in VisualEditor's entry point it has:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if any extension appends to the array before VisualEditor is loaded, VE will wipe out its entry in this array.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some extensions depended upon a specific load order, others hacked around this with {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration solves this problem with &quot;attributes&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the Math extension, its &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; would have something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the attributes need to be defined in the separate section &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; node needs to be an object with the extension name as key and an object of attribute/value pairs as the value. Be aware that the key in the subobject must not contain the extension name!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When VisualEditor wants to access this attribute it uses:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== 要件 (依存関係) ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration has a &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; section, which acts similar to [[Composer]]'s &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; section.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It allows an extension developer to specify several requirements for the extension, such as a specific MediaWiki version (or greater/less than) or another extension/skin.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to add a dependency on a MediaWiki version that is greater than 1.26.0, you can add the following code to &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The key of the &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; object is the name of the dependency (prior to MediaWiki 1.29.0 only &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; was supported), the value is a valid version constraint (the format has to match the one [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md used by composer]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In MediaWiki 1.29.0 and above you can also add dependencies on skins and other extensions like so:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The extensions and skins specified here must also use the extension registrations system described on this page for this to work.
* The string added to specify the extension or skin must be identical to the string specified in the &quot;name&quot; field of the respective &quot;extension.json&quot; or &quot;skin.json&quot; file.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For extensions using Wikimedia [[Special:MyLanguage/Continuous integration|continuous integration]], dependencies also need to be added to {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}&lt;/span&gt;
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Check if an extension is loaded without actually requiring it ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many extensions may provide features that work only if another extension is loaded too, without really needing this feature for the core extension function to work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To implement a standardized way of checking, if an extension is loaded or not (without the need of extra work in an extension that is a soft-dependency in another one), extension registration can be used. It implements an &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns a simple boolean, if the extension is loaded or not (the extension needs to be loaded with extension registration for this to work). Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since [[MediaWiki 1.32]] it's also possible to check if an extension is loaded and satisfies a given composer version constraint:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you would like to check if a specific version of an extension is loaded in earlier versions of MediaWiki, information like that can be extracted with the &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns credit information for all loaded extensions. Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Alternatively, if the extension B defines a special constant meant for this purpose during loading, it is possible to check, if it is defined:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A more brittle way, that should be avoided is to check if a specific class of extension B exists or not, e.g. using this code:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This might break if the extension exists in the file system but is not loaded, e.g. if composer was used for autoloading.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the class was renamed or ceases to exist (e.g. because it is not package public) this will also break.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In general it is preferred to share code via composer components instead of extensions. If the classes of an extension only need to exist, but the extension does not need to be configured nor loaded, for what you want to do, that is a strong indicator that that code should be split off into a composer component you should depend on instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Configs (Your extension/skins settings) ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; assumes that your config settings start with a &quot;wg&quot; prefix.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If that's not the case, you can override the prefix by using a special key:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
That would use a prefix of &quot;eg&quot;, and set the global variable &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; to true.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the configuration section of extension registration provides a lot more features and allows you to describe your configuration options with much more detail. Instead of having a single key -&gt; value store for your configuration options, you can also add the following information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The general structure of the &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; changes slightly to the following, more object-oriented version:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===== 値 =====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the configuration moved to this place.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the only required key for a configuration object.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Path ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The boolean value of the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; key identifies, if the value of the configuration option should be interpreted as a filesystem path, relative to the extension directory root.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g., if the value of the configuration is &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; and the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; is true, the actual value will be &lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

==== 説明 ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; key for a configuration option can hold a non-localized string, which can be used to explain the configuration option to other developers or the users (system administrators) of your extension.&lt;/span&gt;
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the description key is usually not exposed to the frontend of the wiki, however, take a look to the outlook for more information how this feature could be used in the future!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There's also the possibility to add a message key of MediaWiki's internal localisation system as a description (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;), which, in the future, will be used to expose the description in the frontend of the MediaWiki installation.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== public / private ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option is a boolean, which defaults to false, which means, that the configuration option and the value is marked as &quot;private&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This value is not used anywhere at the moment, take a look to the outlook to find out more about this option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Outlook ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{tracked|T155155}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The mentioned changes above are also preparation steps for an improved configuration management in MediaWiki. The above changes allow us to, e.g., expose the configuration options of extensions in the MediaWiki UI. For this, the localised description message (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) and the indication, if the configuration option should be exposed or not (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) is needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Unit tests auto-discovery ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki allows any extension to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|register phpunit tests]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without extension registration, you would need to register a hook handler for the {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}} hook, which would look something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(as described on the manual page). However, this code looks the same for a lot of extensions, so you could call it unnecessary code duplication.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension uses extension registration and your phpunit tests are located in the &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt; subdirectory of your extension, the phpunit wrapper of MediaWiki will autodiscover the unit tests with the help of extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Therefore, you don't need to register the hook anymore and you don't need to specify, that your unit tests are saved in the default directory.&lt;/span&gt;

== 登録のカスタマイズ ==
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Also composer.json ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If an extension or skin has library dependencies, it may have a &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well, see {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Use the &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt; field to make MediaWiki use Composer's autoloading when appropriate.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some metadata fields overlap between &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (discussed in {{task|T89456}}), including :
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code stewardship ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

== 関連項目 ==
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Report bugs against the [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]] project.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Old versions of [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (prior to May 2015) and {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} describe the old approach of declaring extension information in PHP code and variables
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=既知の制限}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Overview of architecture&lt;/span&gt;}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; is the schema for &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (and skin.json).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] about implementing extension registration&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[toollabs:extreg-wos|Extension registration wall of superpowers!]] — summary of which extensions are still to be converted.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{task|T98668}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking ticket for converting all extensions and skins on Git to use extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== References ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>83w4agb3wkk3rp16kv4c48y9hk2xocs</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Extension registration/en</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>368051</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402507</id>
      <parentid>5375682</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="21339" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
'''Extension registration''' is the mechanism that MediaWiki uses to load [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|extensions]] and [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].
You put configuration data in a file named &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; in the root directory of your extension or skin, and MediaWiki uses this to register extensions and skins.

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
== Migration for site administrators ==

Before MediaWiki 1.25, configuration for extensions and skins was done in a PHP file using the extension's or skin's name, for example &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

This can be converted to:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
This must be done before you load any extensions or skins from non-standard directory locations:

: If you keep your extensions in a location different from &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}}'', to specify the directory in which to find the extension.
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Looks in $wgExtensionDirectory for /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: If your skins are not in &lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override the poorly named {{wg|StyleDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of &lt;code&gt;wfLoadSkin()&lt;/code&gt;'', to specify the directory in which to find the skin.
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Looks in $wgStyleDirectory for both /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json and /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Migration for extension developers ==
Since MW 1.30, namespace IDs defined in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; can be overwritten locally, by defining the respective constant in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; before loading the extension.
Consider for instance the following namespace declaration in a &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

This would per default cause the constant NS_FOO to be defined to have the value 1212.
However, this can be overwritten by defining the respective constant in LocalSettings.php:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

This would cause the &quot;Foo&quot; namespace to be registered with the ID 6688 instead of 1212.
When overriding namespace IDs, don't forget that all talk namespaces must have odd IDs, and the ID of the talk namespace must always be the subject namespace's ID plus one.

:''See also the [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ extension registration wall of sadness (now superpowers)].''

The script &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; helps you migrating from PHP entry points to a JSON metadata file.
If your extension supports older versions of MediaWiki, you should keep your PHP entry point &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; until you drop support for those older versions.

Sample command lines:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

You may need to uninstall your extension from &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; if you receive errors that constants or functions cannot be redefined.
You should replace your PHP entry point file (FooBar.php) with something like the following happens to not break wikis during the upgrade process.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Or skins

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Retaining documentation ===
PHP entry points usually have some documentation of configuration settings that is useful and shouldn't be lost.
Unfortunately JSON doesn't support comments. It is recommended that you transfer configuration documentation to a &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; file in the extension's repository.
You should also document configuration on-wiki in your Extension:''MyExtension'' page.
It is possible to include some documentation directly in the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well.
Extension registration ignores any key in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; starting with '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' in the top-level structure, so you can put comments in those parts of the JSON file. For example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Version 1 of the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; format also allowed &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; in &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; section, but this is no longer recommended or supported in version 2. &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; field of the config variable should be used instead.

This should only be used for brief notes and comments.

== Features ==

If you are loading a large number of extensions, extension registration will provide a performance boost as long as you have [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (or APCu) installed. Extensions that are loaded together with &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (with plural -s) will be cached together.

=== Attributes ===
A recurring problem is how to &quot;register&quot; something with another extension.
Usually this meant that you had to load one extension before another.
For example, VisualEditor has a &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt; which allows extensions to add their modules.
However, in VisualEditor's entry point it has:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

This means that if any extension appends to the array before VisualEditor is loaded, VE will wipe out its entry in this array.
Some extensions depended upon a specific load order, others hacked around this with {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}.
Extension registration solves this problem with &quot;attributes&quot;.
In the Math extension, its &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; would have something like:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the attributes need to be defined in the separate section &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.

The &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; node needs to be an object with the extension name as key and an object of attribute/value pairs as the value. Be aware that the key in the subobject must not contain the extension name!

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

When VisualEditor wants to access this attribute it uses:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Requirements (dependencies) ===
Extension registration has a &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; section, which acts similar to [[Composer]]'s &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; section.
It allows an extension developer to specify several requirements for the extension, such as a specific MediaWiki version (or greater/less than) or another extension/skin.
For example, to add a dependency on a MediaWiki version that is greater than 1.26.0, you can add the following code to &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;: &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

The key of the &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; object is the name of the dependency (prior to MediaWiki 1.29.0 only &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; was supported), the value is a valid version constraint (the format has to match the one [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md used by composer]).

In MediaWiki 1.29.0 and above you can also add dependencies on skins and other extensions like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* The extensions and skins specified here must also use the extension registrations system described on this page for this to work.
* The string added to specify the extension or skin must be identical to the string specified in the &quot;name&quot; field of the respective &quot;extension.json&quot; or &quot;skin.json&quot; file.
* For extensions using Wikimedia [[Special:MyLanguage/Continuous integration|continuous integration]], dependencies also need to be added to {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Check if an extension is loaded without actually requiring it ===
Many extensions may provide features that work only if another extension is loaded too, without really needing this feature for the core extension function to work.
As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.
Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.
For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.

To implement a standardized way of checking, if an extension is loaded or not (without the need of extra work in an extension that is a soft-dependency in another one), extension registration can be used. It implements an &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns a simple boolean, if the extension is loaded or not (the extension needs to be loaded with extension registration for this to work). Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
Since [[MediaWiki 1.32]] it's also possible to check if an extension is loaded and satisfies a given composer version constraint:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

If you would like to check if a specific version of an extension is loaded in earlier versions of MediaWiki, information like that can be extracted with the &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns credit information for all loaded extensions. Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Alternatively, if the extension B defines a special constant meant for this purpose during loading, it is possible to check, if it is defined:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

A more brittle way, that should be avoided is to check if a specific class of extension B exists or not, e.g. using this code:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

This might break if the extension exists in the file system but is not loaded, e.g. if composer was used for autoloading.
If the class was renamed or ceases to exist (e.g. because it is not package public) this will also break.

In general it is preferred to share code via composer components instead of extensions. If the classes of an extension only need to exist, but the extension does not need to be configured nor loaded, for what you want to do, that is a strong indicator that that code should be split off into a composer component you should depend on instead.

=== Configs (Your extension/skins settings) ===
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
By default, &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; assumes that your config settings start with a &quot;wg&quot; prefix.

If that's not the case, you can override the prefix by using a special key:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

That would use a prefix of &quot;eg&quot;, and set the global variable &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; to true.

Starting with manifest version 2, the configuration section of extension registration provides a lot more features and allows you to describe your configuration options with much more detail. Instead of having a single key -&gt; value store for your configuration options, you can also add the following information.

The general structure of the &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; changes slightly to the following, more object-oriented version:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== Value ====
The value of the configuration moved to this place.
This is the only required key for a configuration object.

==== Path ====
The boolean value of the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; key identifies, if the value of the configuration option should be interpreted as a filesystem path, relative to the extension directory root.
E.g., if the value of the configuration is &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; and the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; is true, the actual value will be &lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;.

==== Description ====
The &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; key for a configuration option can hold a non-localized string, which can be used to explain the configuration option to other developers or the users (system administrators) of your extension.
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
The value of the description key is usually not exposed to the frontend of the wiki, however, take a look to the outlook for more information how this feature could be used in the future!

There's also the possibility to add a message key of MediaWiki's internal localisation system as a description (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;), which, in the future, will be used to expose the description in the frontend of the MediaWiki installation.

==== public / private ====
This option is a boolean, which defaults to false, which means, that the configuration option and the value is marked as &quot;private&quot;.
This value is not used anywhere at the moment, take a look to the outlook to find out more about this option.

==== Outlook ====
{{tracked|T155155}}
The mentioned changes above are also preparation steps for an improved configuration management in MediaWiki. The above changes allow us to, e.g., expose the configuration options of extensions in the MediaWiki UI. For this, the localised description message (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) and the indication, if the configuration option should be exposed or not (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) is needed.

=== Unit tests auto-discovery ===
MediaWiki allows any extension to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|register phpunit tests]].
Without extension registration, you would need to register a hook handler for the {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}} hook, which would look something like:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

(as described on the manual page). However, this code looks the same for a lot of extensions, so you could call it unnecessary code duplication.
If your extension uses extension registration and your phpunit tests are located in the &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt; subdirectory of your extension, the phpunit wrapper of MediaWiki will autodiscover the unit tests with the help of extension registration.
Therefore, you don't need to register the hook anymore and you don't need to specify, that your unit tests are saved in the default directory.

== Customizing registration ==
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

== Also composer.json ==

If an extension or skin has library dependencies, it may have a &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well, see {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Use the &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt; field to make MediaWiki use Composer's autoloading when appropriate.

Some metadata fields overlap between &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (discussed in {{task|T89456}}), including :
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;

== Code stewardship ==
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

== See also ==
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
* Report bugs against the [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]] project.
* Old versions of [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (prior to May 2015) and {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} describe the old approach of declaring extension information in PHP code and variables
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=Known limitations}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=Overview of architecture}}
* &lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; is the schema for &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (and skin.json).
* [[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] about implementing extension registration
* [[toollabs:extreg-wos|Extension registration wall of superpowers!]] — summary of which extensions are still to be converted.
* {{task|T98668}} — Tracking ticket for converting all extensions and skins on Git to use extension registration.

== References ==
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>qreazfhhbqfmccoksguzbrcpy2nuyof</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Extension registration/fr</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>368101</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402509</id>
      <parentid>5375684</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24096" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
L’'''enregistrement d’extensions''' est le mécanisme utilisé par MediaWiki pour charger les [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|extensions]] et les [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|habillages]].
Vous placez les données de configuration dans un fichier nommé &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; dans le dossier racine de votre extension ou habillage et MediaWiki utilise ces données pour enregistrer les extensions et les habillages.

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
== Migration pour les administrateurs de sites ==

Avant la version 1.25 de MediaWiki, la configuration des extensions et des habillages était réalisée dans un fichier PHP portant le nom de l’extension ou de l’habillage, par exemple &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Cela peut être converti en :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Cela doit être fait avant tout chargement d’extension ou d’habillage.&lt;/span&gt;

: Si vous conservez vos extensions dans un endroit différent de  &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;, vous devez modifier {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} ou utiliser le second paramètre de {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} pour spécifier le répertoire dans lequel se trouve l'extension.
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Looks in $wgExtensionDirectory for /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si vos habillages ne sont pas situés dans le dossier &lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt;, vous devez modifier la variable (mal nommée) {{wg|StyleDirectory}}.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Looks in $wgStyleDirectory for both /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json and /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Migrer, pour les développeurs d’extensions ==
Depuis MediaWiki 1.30, les IDs des espaces de noms définis dans &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; peuvent être remplacés localement, en définissant la constante respective dans &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; avant de charger l'extension.
Supposez par exemple la déclaration d'espace de noms suivante dans un fichier &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Par défaut, cela fera que la constante NS_FOO sera définie avec la valeur 1212.
Néanmoins ceci peut être réécrasé en définissant la constante respective dans le fichier LocalSettings.php :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Cela entraînerait l'enregistrement de l'espace de noms « Foo » avec l'ID 6688 au lieu de 1212.
Lorsque vous redéfinissez les IDs des espaces de noms, n'oubliez pas que tous les IDs des espaces de discussion doivent avoir des valeurs impaires, et les IDs des espaces de discussion doivent avoir pour valeur celle de l'ID de l'espace de nom du sujet, plus un.

:''Voir aussi le [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ mur d'enregistrement des extension de la tristesse (maintenant superpuissances)].''

Le script &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; vous aide à migrer vos points d’entrée PHP en un fichier de métadonnées JSON.
Si votre extension prend en charge d’anciennes versions de MediaWiki, vous pouvez garder votre point d’entrée PHP &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; jusqu’à ce que vous retiriez le support pour ces anciennes versions.

Exemple de lignes de commande :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Vous pourriez avoir besoin de désinstaller votre extension dans &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; si vous avez des erreurs disant que des fonctions ou des constantes ne peuvent pas être redéfinies.
Vous devriez remplacer votre fichier de point d’entrée PHP (FooBar.php) par quelque chose qui ne casse pas les wikis durant le processus de mise à jour.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ou, pour les habillages :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Conserver la documentation ===
Les points d’entrée PHP contiennent généralement de la documentation pour les options de configuration, ce qui est utile et ne devrait pas être perdu.
Malheureusement, le JSON ne permet pas d’inclure de commentaires. Il est recommandé de déplacer la documentation de la configuration dans un fichier &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; placé dans le dépôt de l'extension.
Vous devriez aussi documenter votre extension sur ce wiki dans la page Extension:''MonExtension''.
Il est en plus possible d’inclure un peu de documentation directement dans le fichier &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;.
Le système d’enregistrement des extensions ignore toutes les clés dans &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; dont les noms commencent avec le caractère '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' dans la structure de niveau le plus global; vous pouvez ainsi insérer des commentaires à ces endroits du fichier JSON. Par exemple :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

La version 1 du format &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; autorise aussi &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; dans la section &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt;, mais cela n'est plus recommandé ni pris en charge dans la version 2. Utilisez le champ &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; de la variable config à la place.

Ceci ne devrait être utilisé que pour les notes courtes et les commentaires.

== Fonctionnalités ==

Si vous chargez un grand nombre d’extensions, l’enregistrement d’extensions permettra un gain de performance tant que [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (ou APCu) est installé. Les extensions qui sont chargées ensemble avec &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (avec un suffixe -s marquant le pluriel) seront mises en cache ensemble.

=== Attributs ===
Un problème récurrent est la façon « d’enregistrer » quelque chose avec une autre extension.
En général, cela signifie que vous avez à charger une extension avant l'autre.
Par exemple, l’Editeur Visuel a un &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt; qui permet aux extensions d’ajouter leurs modules.
Ainsi, dans le point d’entrée de l’Editeur Visuel, il y a :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Cela signifie que si une extension ajoute quelque chose au tableau avant que l’Editeur Visuel ne soit chargé, celui-ci effacera l’entrée dans ce tableau.
Quelques extensions dépendent d’un ordre de chargement spécifique, d’autres bricolent autour de cela avec {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}.
L’enregistrement d’extensions résoud ce problème avec les « attributs ».
Dans l’extension Math, son &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; aurait quelque chose comme :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
A partir de manifest version 2, les attributs doivent être définis dans la section séparée &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.

Le noeud &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; doit être un objet avec le nom de l'extension comme clé et un objet de paires attribut/valeur pour valeur. Notez bien que la clé du sous-objet ne doit pas contenir le nom de l'extension !

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Quand l’Editeur Visuel veut accéder à cet attribut, il utilise :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Prérequis (dépendances) ===
L'enregistrement d'extension possède une section &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt;, qui agit de manière similaire à la section &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; de [[Composer]].
Elle permet à un développeur d'extensions de spécifier plusieurs prérequis pour l'extension, comme une version spécifique de MediaWiki (ou plus récent que, plus ancien que) ou une autre extensions ou habillage.
Par exemple, pour ajouter une dépendance sur une version de MediaWiki plus récente que 1.26.0, vous pouvez ajouter le code suivant dans &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; : &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

La clé de l'objet &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; est le nom de la dépendance (avant MediaWiki 1.29.0 seulement &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; était pris en charge), la valeur est une contrainte de version valide (le format doit être compatible avec celui [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md utilisé par Composer]).

Dans MediaWiki 1.29.0 et plus récent vous pouvez aussi ajouter des dépendances vers des habillages ou d'autres extensions comme par exemple :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Les extensions et habillages spécifiés ici doivent aussi utiliser le système d'enregistrement des extensions décrit sur cette page pour que cela fonctionne.
* La chaîne ajoutée pour préciser l'extension ou l'habillage doit être la même que la chaîne spécifiée dans le champ « name » du fichier « extension.json » ou « skin.json » respectif.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pour les extensions qui utilisent l'[[continuous integration|intégration continue]] de Wikimedia, les dépendances doivent également être ajoutées à {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}&lt;/span&gt;
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Vérifier qu'une extension est chargée alors qu'elle n'est pas nécessaire ===
Beaucoup d'extensions peuvent apporter des fonctionalités qui ne travaillent que si une autre extension est également chargée, sans que cette fonctionalité ne soit réellement demandée pour que la fonction d'extension du coeur soit opérationnelle.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.&lt;/span&gt;

Pour implémenter une manière standardisée pour vérifier qu'une extension est chargée ou pas (sans avoir besoin de développement supplémentaire dans une extension qui dépend logiciellement d'une autre), l'enregistrement d'extension peut être utilisé. Il implémente une méthode &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt; , qui retourne un booléen indiquant si l'extension est chargée ou pas (l'extension doit être chargée avec l'enregistrement d'extension pour que cela fonctionne). Exemple:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
Depuis [[MediaWiki 1.32]] il est également possible de vérifier si une extension est chargée et si elle satisfait une contrainte de version de Composer :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Si vous vouliez vérifier qu'une version spécifique d'une extension était chargée dans les précédentes versions de MediaWiki, ce type d'information peut être extrait avec la méthode &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt; , qui retourne l'information de crédit pour toutes les extensions chargées. Exemple:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

De la même manière, si l'extension B définit une constante spéciale dans ce but durant le chargement, il est possible de vérifier si elle est définie :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Une autre manière parallèle qui doit être évitée est de vérifier si une classe spécifique de l'extension B existe ou pas, par exemple en utilisant le code :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ceci peut ne pas fonctionner si l'extension existe dans le système de fichiers mais n'est pas chargée, par exemple si Composer a été utilisé pour l'auto-chargement.
Si une classe a été renommée ou cesse d'exister (par exemple parce qu'elle ne fait plus partie des paquets publiques) cela va provoquer également la rupture.

En général, il est préférable de partager le code par des composants Composer plutôt que des extensions. Si les classes d'une extension n'ont besoin que d'exister, mais que l'extension n'a pas besoin d'être configurée ni chargée pour ce que vous voulez en faire, c'est une très bonne indication que le code doit être découpé dans un composant Composer duquel vous devez dépendre à la place.

=== Configurations (vos paramètres d'extensions et d'habillages) ===
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
Par défaut, &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; suppose que vos paramètres de configuration commencent avec le préfixe « wg ».

Si ce n'est pas le cas, vous pouvez réécraser le préfixe en utilisant une clé spéciale :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Cela va utiliser le préfixe « eg » et mettre la variable globale &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; à true.

À partir de manifest version 2, la section de configuration de l'enregistrement des extensions fournit beaucoup plus de fonctionnalités et vous permet de décrire vos options de configuration de manière beaucoup plus détaillée. Au lieu d'avoir enregistré une seule clé &amp;rarr; valeur pour vos options de configuration, vous pouvez également ajouter les informations suivantes.

La structure générale de la &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; change légèrement par la suite, en devenant une version plus orientée objet :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== Valeur ====
La valeur de la configuration a été déplacée à cet endroit.
C'est la seule clé obligatoire pour un objet configuration.

==== Chemin ====
La valeur booléenne de la clé &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; indique si la valeur de l'option de configuration doit être interprétée comme un chemin dans le système de fichiers, relativement au répertoire racine de l'extension.
Par exemple, si la valeur de la configuration est &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; et que &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; vaut true, la  valeur actuelle sera &lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;.

==== Description ====
La clé &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; pour une option de configuration peut contenir une chaîne non traduite, qui peut être utilisée pour expliquer l'option de configuration de votre extension, aux autres développeurs ou aux utilisateurs (administrateurs système).
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
La valeur de la clé de decription n'est habituellement pas affichée pour l'IHM du wiki, néanmoins, cherchez sur le sujet pour avoir plus d'informations sur la manière dont cette fonctionalité pourrait être utilisée dans le futur !

Il existe aussi la possbilité d'ajouter en tant que description (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;), une clé du message dans le sytème de localisation interne de MediaWiki, ce qui dans le futur, sera utilisé pour présenter la description au niveau de l'interface utilisateur de l'installation MediaWiki.

==== publique / privé ====
Cette option est un booléen, qui vaut false par défaut, ce qui signifie que l'option de configuration et la valeur sont marquées &quot;private&quot;.
Cette valeur est utilisée nulle part en ce moment, cherchez un peu sur le sujet pour en découvrir plus à propos de cette option.

==== Perspectives ====
{{tracked|T155155}}
Les modifications mentionnées ci-dessus sont également des étapes préparatoires pour une gestion améliorée de la configuration dans MediaWiki. Ces changements nous permettent par exemple d'afficher les options de configuration des extensions dans l'IHM MediaWiki. Pour cela, le message de description traduit (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) ainsi que l'indication si l'option de configuration peut être affichée ou pas (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) sont nécessaires.

=== Auto-découverte des tests unitaires ===
MediaWiki permet à toute extension d'[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|enregistrer des tests unitaires php]].
Sans l'enregistrement d'extension, vous devriez enregistrer un gestionnaire pour l'accroche {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}}, qui ressemblerait à ceci :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

(comme décrit sur la page du manuel). Cependant, ce code a la même apparence pour beaucoup d'extensions, vous pouvez donc appeler cela une duplication inutile du code.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension uses extension registration and your phpunit tests are located in the &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt; subdirectory of your extension, the phpunit wrapper of MediaWiki will autodiscover the unit tests with the help of extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Therefore, you don't need to register the hook anymore and you don't need to specify, that your unit tests are saved in the default directory.&lt;/span&gt;

== Personnaliser l’enregistrement ==
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

== Et composer.json ==

Si une extension ou un habillage dépendent de bibliothèques, il peut exister également un fichier &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt;, voir {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Utilisez le champ &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt; pour que MediaWiki se serve de l'auto-chargement de Composer quand c'est nécessaire.

Quelques champs de métadonnées sont les mêmes entre &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (discussion dans {{task|T89456}}), dont :
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;

== Gestion du code ==
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

== Voir aussi ==
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
* Rapportez les bogues dans le projet [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]].
* Les anciennes versions de [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (avant mai 2015) et {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} décrivent l’ancienne approche de déclaration des informations des extensions dans les variables et le code PHP
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=Limitations connues}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=Aperçu de l’architecture}}
* &lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; est le schéma pour &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (et skin.json).
* [[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] à propos de l’implémentation d’un système d’enregistrement d'extensions
* [[toollabs:extreg-wos|Mur d'enregistrement d'extensions de super pouvoirs !]] — résumé des extensions qui doivent encore être converties.
* {{task|T98668}} — Ticket pour le suivi de la conversion de toutes les extensions et habillages sur Git afin qu'ils utilisent l'enregistrement d'extension.

== Références ==
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>6p2d90k7c2asy7xoq5qppivf5rm53zf</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402522</id>
      <parentid>5402509</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:22:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24075" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
L’'''enregistrement d’extensions''' est le mécanisme utilisé par MediaWiki pour charger les [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|extensions]] et les [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|habillages]].
Vous placez les données de configuration dans un fichier nommé &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; dans le dossier racine de votre extension ou habillage et MediaWiki utilise ces données pour enregistrer les extensions et les habillages.

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
== Migration pour les administrateurs de sites ==

Avant la version 1.25 de MediaWiki, la configuration des extensions et des habillages était réalisée dans un fichier PHP portant le nom de l’extension ou de l’habillage, par exemple &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Cela peut être converti en :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Cela doit être fait avant tout chargement d’extension ou d’habillage.&lt;/span&gt;

: Si vous conservez vos extensions dans un endroit différent de  &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;, vous devez modifier {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} ou utiliser le second paramètre de {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} pour spécifier le répertoire dans lequel se trouve l'extension.
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Looks in $wgExtensionDirectory for /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Si vos habillages ne sont pas situés dans le dossier &lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt;, vous devez modifier la variable (mal nommée) {{wg|StyleDirectory}}.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Looks in $wgStyleDirectory for both /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json and /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Migrer, pour les développeurs d’extensions ==
Depuis MediaWiki 1.30, les IDs des espaces de noms définis dans &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; peuvent être remplacés localement, en définissant la constante respective dans &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; avant de charger l'extension.
Supposez par exemple la déclaration d'espace de noms suivante dans un fichier &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Par défaut, cela fera que la constante NS_FOO sera définie avec la valeur 1212.
Néanmoins ceci peut être réécrasé en définissant la constante respective dans le fichier LocalSettings.php :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Cela entraînerait l'enregistrement de l'espace de noms « Foo » avec l'ID 6688 au lieu de 1212.
Lorsque vous redéfinissez les IDs des espaces de noms, n'oubliez pas que tous les IDs des espaces de discussion doivent avoir des valeurs impaires, et les IDs des espaces de discussion doivent avoir pour valeur celle de l'ID de l'espace de nom du sujet, plus un.

:''Voir aussi le [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ mur d'enregistrement des extension de la tristesse (maintenant superpuissances)].''

Le script &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; vous aide à migrer vos points d’entrée PHP en un fichier de métadonnées JSON.
Si votre extension prend en charge d’anciennes versions de MediaWiki, vous pouvez garder votre point d’entrée PHP &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; jusqu’à ce que vous retiriez le support pour ces anciennes versions.

Exemple de lignes de commande :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Vous pourriez avoir besoin de désinstaller votre extension dans &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; si vous avez des erreurs disant que des fonctions ou des constantes ne peuvent pas être redéfinies.
Vous devriez remplacer votre fichier de point d’entrée PHP (FooBar.php) par quelque chose qui ne casse pas les wikis durant le processus de mise à jour.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ou, pour les habillages :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Conserver la documentation ===
Les points d’entrée PHP contiennent généralement de la documentation pour les options de configuration, ce qui est utile et ne devrait pas être perdu.
Malheureusement, le JSON ne permet pas d’inclure de commentaires. Il est recommandé de déplacer la documentation de la configuration dans un fichier &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; placé dans le dépôt de l'extension.
Vous devriez aussi documenter votre extension sur ce wiki dans la page Extension:''MonExtension''.
Il est en plus possible d’inclure un peu de documentation directement dans le fichier &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;.
Le système d’enregistrement des extensions ignore toutes les clés dans &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; dont les noms commencent avec le caractère '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' dans la structure de niveau le plus global; vous pouvez ainsi insérer des commentaires à ces endroits du fichier JSON. Par exemple :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

La version 1 du format &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; autorise aussi &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; dans la section &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt;, mais cela n'est plus recommandé ni pris en charge dans la version 2. Utilisez le champ &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; de la variable config à la place.

Ceci ne devrait être utilisé que pour les notes courtes et les commentaires.

== Fonctionnalités ==

Si vous chargez un grand nombre d’extensions, l’enregistrement d’extensions permettra un gain de performance tant que [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (ou APCu) est installé. Les extensions qui sont chargées ensemble avec &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (avec un suffixe -s marquant le pluriel) seront mises en cache ensemble.

=== Attributs ===
Un problème récurrent est la façon « d’enregistrer » quelque chose avec une autre extension.
En général, cela signifie que vous avez à charger une extension avant l'autre.
Par exemple, l’Editeur Visuel a un &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt; qui permet aux extensions d’ajouter leurs modules.
Ainsi, dans le point d’entrée de l’Editeur Visuel, il y a :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Cela signifie que si une extension ajoute quelque chose au tableau avant que l’Editeur Visuel ne soit chargé, celui-ci effacera l’entrée dans ce tableau.
Quelques extensions dépendent d’un ordre de chargement spécifique, d’autres bricolent autour de cela avec {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}.
L’enregistrement d’extensions résoud ce problème avec les « attributs ».
Dans l’extension Math, son &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; aurait quelque chose comme :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
A partir de manifest version 2, les attributs doivent être définis dans la section séparée &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.

Le noeud &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; doit être un objet avec le nom de l'extension comme clé et un objet de paires attribut/valeur pour valeur. Notez bien que la clé du sous-objet ne doit pas contenir le nom de l'extension !

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Quand l’Editeur Visuel veut accéder à cet attribut, il utilise :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Prérequis (dépendances) ===
L'enregistrement d'extension possède une section &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt;, qui agit de manière similaire à la section &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; de [[Composer]].
Elle permet à un développeur d'extensions de spécifier plusieurs prérequis pour l'extension, comme une version spécifique de MediaWiki (ou plus récent que, plus ancien que) ou une autre extensions ou habillage.
Par exemple, pour ajouter une dépendance sur une version de MediaWiki plus récente que 1.26.0, vous pouvez ajouter le code suivant dans &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; : &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

La clé de l'objet &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; est le nom de la dépendance (avant MediaWiki 1.29.0 seulement &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; était pris en charge), la valeur est une contrainte de version valide (le format doit être compatible avec celui [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md utilisé par Composer]).

Dans MediaWiki 1.29.0 et plus récent vous pouvez aussi ajouter des dépendances vers des habillages ou d'autres extensions comme par exemple :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Les extensions et habillages spécifiés ici doivent aussi utiliser le système d'enregistrement des extensions décrit sur cette page pour que cela fonctionne.
* La chaîne ajoutée pour préciser l'extension ou l'habillage doit être la même que la chaîne spécifiée dans le champ « name » du fichier « extension.json » ou « skin.json » respectif.
* Pour les extensions qui utilisent l'[[Special:MyLanguage/Continuous integration|intégration continue]] de Wikimedia, les dépendances doivent également être ajoutées à {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Vérifier qu'une extension est chargée alors qu'elle n'est pas nécessaire ===
Beaucoup d'extensions peuvent apporter des fonctionalités qui ne travaillent que si une autre extension est également chargée, sans que cette fonctionalité ne soit réellement demandée pour que la fonction d'extension du coeur soit opérationnelle.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.&lt;/span&gt;

Pour implémenter une manière standardisée pour vérifier qu'une extension est chargée ou pas (sans avoir besoin de développement supplémentaire dans une extension qui dépend logiciellement d'une autre), l'enregistrement d'extension peut être utilisé. Il implémente une méthode &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt; , qui retourne un booléen indiquant si l'extension est chargée ou pas (l'extension doit être chargée avec l'enregistrement d'extension pour que cela fonctionne). Exemple:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
Depuis [[MediaWiki 1.32]] il est également possible de vérifier si une extension est chargée et si elle satisfait une contrainte de version de Composer :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Si vous vouliez vérifier qu'une version spécifique d'une extension était chargée dans les précédentes versions de MediaWiki, ce type d'information peut être extrait avec la méthode &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt; , qui retourne l'information de crédit pour toutes les extensions chargées. Exemple:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

De la même manière, si l'extension B définit une constante spéciale dans ce but durant le chargement, il est possible de vérifier si elle est définie :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Une autre manière parallèle qui doit être évitée est de vérifier si une classe spécifique de l'extension B existe ou pas, par exemple en utilisant le code :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ceci peut ne pas fonctionner si l'extension existe dans le système de fichiers mais n'est pas chargée, par exemple si Composer a été utilisé pour l'auto-chargement.
Si une classe a été renommée ou cesse d'exister (par exemple parce qu'elle ne fait plus partie des paquets publiques) cela va provoquer également la rupture.

En général, il est préférable de partager le code par des composants Composer plutôt que des extensions. Si les classes d'une extension n'ont besoin que d'exister, mais que l'extension n'a pas besoin d'être configurée ni chargée pour ce que vous voulez en faire, c'est une très bonne indication que le code doit être découpé dans un composant Composer duquel vous devez dépendre à la place.

=== Configurations (vos paramètres d'extensions et d'habillages) ===
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
Par défaut, &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; suppose que vos paramètres de configuration commencent avec le préfixe « wg ».

Si ce n'est pas le cas, vous pouvez réécraser le préfixe en utilisant une clé spéciale :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Cela va utiliser le préfixe « eg » et mettre la variable globale &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; à true.

À partir de manifest version 2, la section de configuration de l'enregistrement des extensions fournit beaucoup plus de fonctionnalités et vous permet de décrire vos options de configuration de manière beaucoup plus détaillée. Au lieu d'avoir enregistré une seule clé &amp;rarr; valeur pour vos options de configuration, vous pouvez également ajouter les informations suivantes.

La structure générale de la &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; change légèrement par la suite, en devenant une version plus orientée objet :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== Valeur ====
La valeur de la configuration a été déplacée à cet endroit.
C'est la seule clé obligatoire pour un objet configuration.

==== Chemin ====
La valeur booléenne de la clé &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; indique si la valeur de l'option de configuration doit être interprétée comme un chemin dans le système de fichiers, relativement au répertoire racine de l'extension.
Par exemple, si la valeur de la configuration est &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; et que &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; vaut true, la  valeur actuelle sera &lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;.

==== Description ====
La clé &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; pour une option de configuration peut contenir une chaîne non traduite, qui peut être utilisée pour expliquer l'option de configuration de votre extension, aux autres développeurs ou aux utilisateurs (administrateurs système).
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
La valeur de la clé de decription n'est habituellement pas affichée pour l'IHM du wiki, néanmoins, cherchez sur le sujet pour avoir plus d'informations sur la manière dont cette fonctionalité pourrait être utilisée dans le futur !

Il existe aussi la possbilité d'ajouter en tant que description (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;), une clé du message dans le sytème de localisation interne de MediaWiki, ce qui dans le futur, sera utilisé pour présenter la description au niveau de l'interface utilisateur de l'installation MediaWiki.

==== publique / privé ====
Cette option est un booléen, qui vaut false par défaut, ce qui signifie que l'option de configuration et la valeur sont marquées &quot;private&quot;.
Cette valeur est utilisée nulle part en ce moment, cherchez un peu sur le sujet pour en découvrir plus à propos de cette option.

==== Perspectives ====
{{tracked|T155155}}
Les modifications mentionnées ci-dessus sont également des étapes préparatoires pour une gestion améliorée de la configuration dans MediaWiki. Ces changements nous permettent par exemple d'afficher les options de configuration des extensions dans l'IHM MediaWiki. Pour cela, le message de description traduit (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) ainsi que l'indication si l'option de configuration peut être affichée ou pas (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) sont nécessaires.

=== Auto-découverte des tests unitaires ===
MediaWiki permet à toute extension d'[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|enregistrer des tests unitaires php]].
Sans l'enregistrement d'extension, vous devriez enregistrer un gestionnaire pour l'accroche {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}}, qui ressemblerait à ceci :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

(comme décrit sur la page du manuel). Cependant, ce code a la même apparence pour beaucoup d'extensions, vous pouvez donc appeler cela une duplication inutile du code.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension uses extension registration and your phpunit tests are located in the &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt; subdirectory of your extension, the phpunit wrapper of MediaWiki will autodiscover the unit tests with the help of extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Therefore, you don't need to register the hook anymore and you don't need to specify, that your unit tests are saved in the default directory.&lt;/span&gt;

== Personnaliser l’enregistrement ==
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

== Et composer.json ==

Si une extension ou un habillage dépendent de bibliothèques, il peut exister également un fichier &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt;, voir {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Utilisez le champ &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt; pour que MediaWiki se serve de l'auto-chargement de Composer quand c'est nécessaire.

Quelques champs de métadonnées sont les mêmes entre &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (discussion dans {{task|T89456}}), dont :
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;

== Gestion du code ==
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

== Voir aussi ==
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
* Rapportez les bogues dans le projet [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]].
* Les anciennes versions de [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (avant mai 2015) et {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} décrivent l’ancienne approche de déclaration des informations des extensions dans les variables et le code PHP
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=Limitations connues}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=Aperçu de l’architecture}}
* &lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; est le schéma pour &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (et skin.json).
* [[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] à propos de l’implémentation d’un système d’enregistrement d'extensions
* [[toollabs:extreg-wos|Mur d'enregistrement d'extensions de super pouvoirs !]] — résumé des extensions qui doivent encore être converties.
* {{task|T98668}} — Ticket pour le suivi de la conversion de toutes les extensions et habillages sur Git afin qu'ils utilisent l'enregistrement d'extension.

== Références ==
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>tg16cn2s7mw5u38z2vsmo0giwa2d1sd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Extension registration/es</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>372706</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402506</id>
      <parentid>5375683</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26893" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Extension registration''' is the mechanism that MediaWiki uses to load [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|extensions]] and [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You put configuration data in a file named &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; in the root directory of your extension or skin, and MediaWiki uses this to register extensions and skins.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Migration for site administrators ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Before MediaWiki 1.25, configuration for extensions and skins was done in a PHP file using the extension's or skin's name, for example &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Esto puede convertirse a:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Esto debe hacerse antes de cargar cualquier extensión o apariencia.&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you keep your extensions in a location different from &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}}'', to specify the directory in which to find the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Looks in $wgExtensionDirectory for /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your skins are not in &lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override the poorly named {{wg|StyleDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of &lt;code&gt;wfLoadSkin()&lt;/code&gt;'', to specify the directory in which to find the skin.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Looks in $wgStyleDirectory for both /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json and /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Migración ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since MW 1.30, namespace IDs defined in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; can be overwritten locally, by defining the respective constant in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; before loading the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consider for instance the following namespace declaration in a &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would per default cause the constant NS_FOO to be defined to have the value 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, this can be overwritten by defining the respective constant in LocalSettings.php:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would cause the &quot;Foo&quot; namespace to be registered with the ID 6688 instead of 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When overriding namespace IDs, don't forget that all talk namespaces must have odd IDs, and the ID of the talk namespace must always be the subject namespace's ID plus one.&lt;/span&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also the [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ extension registration wall of sadness (now superpowers)].&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; helps you migrating from PHP entry points to a JSON metadata file.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension supports older versions of MediaWiki, you should keep your PHP entry point &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; until you drop support for those older versions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sample command lines:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to uninstall your extension from &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; if you receive errors that constants or functions cannot be redefined.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should replace your PHP entry point file (FooBar.php) with something like the following happens to not break wikis during the upgrade process.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

O apariencias

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Retaining documentation ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PHP entry points usually have some documentation of configuration settings that is useful and shouldn't be lost.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately JSON doesn't support comments. It is recommended that you transfer configuration documentation to a &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; file in the extension's repository.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also document configuration on-wiki in your Extension:''MyExtension'' page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to include some documentation directly in the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration ignores any key in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; starting with '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' in the top-level structure, so you can put comments in those parts of the JSON file. For example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Version 1 of the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; format also allowed &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; in &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; section, but this is no longer recommended or supported in version 2. &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; field of the config variable should be used instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This should only be used for brief notes and comments.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Funcionalidades ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are loading a large number of extensions, extension registration will provide a performance boost as long as you have [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (or APCu) installed. Extensions that are loaded together with &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (with plural -s) will be cached together.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Atributos ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A recurring problem is how to &quot;register&quot; something with another extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usually this meant that you had to load one extension before another.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, VisualEditor has a &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt; which allows extensions to add their modules.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, in VisualEditor's entry point it has:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if any extension appends to the array before VisualEditor is loaded, VE will wipe out its entry in this array.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some extensions depended upon a specific load order, others hacked around this with {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration solves this problem with &quot;attributes&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the Math extension, its &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; would have something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the attributes need to be defined in the separate section &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; node needs to be an object with the extension name as key and an object of attribute/value pairs as the value. Be aware that the key in the subobject must not contain the extension name!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When VisualEditor wants to access this attribute it uses:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Requirements (dependencies) ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration has a &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; section, which acts similar to [[Composer]]'s &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; section.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It allows an extension developer to specify several requirements for the extension, such as a specific MediaWiki version (or greater/less than) or another extension/skin.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to add a dependency on a MediaWiki version that is greater than 1.26.0, you can add the following code to &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The key of the &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; object is the name of the dependency (prior to MediaWiki 1.29.0 only &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; was supported), the value is a valid version constraint (the format has to match the one [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md used by composer]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In MediaWiki 1.29.0 and above you can also add dependencies on skins and other extensions like so:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The extensions and skins specified here must also use the extension registrations system described on this page for this to work.
* The string added to specify the extension or skin must be identical to the string specified in the &quot;name&quot; field of the respective &quot;extension.json&quot; or &quot;skin.json&quot; file.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For extensions using Wikimedia [[Special:MyLanguage/Continuous integration|continuous integration]], dependencies also need to be added to {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}&lt;/span&gt;
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Check if an extension is loaded without actually requiring it ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many extensions may provide features that work only if another extension is loaded too, without really needing this feature for the core extension function to work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To implement a standardized way of checking, if an extension is loaded or not (without the need of extra work in an extension that is a soft-dependency in another one), extension registration can be used. It implements an &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns a simple boolean, if the extension is loaded or not (the extension needs to be loaded with extension registration for this to work). Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since [[MediaWiki 1.32]] it's also possible to check if an extension is loaded and satisfies a given composer version constraint:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you would like to check if a specific version of an extension is loaded in earlier versions of MediaWiki, information like that can be extracted with the &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns credit information for all loaded extensions. Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Alternatively, if the extension B defines a special constant meant for this purpose during loading, it is possible to check, if it is defined:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A more brittle way, that should be avoided is to check if a specific class of extension B exists or not, e.g. using this code:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This might break if the extension exists in the file system but is not loaded, e.g. if composer was used for autoloading.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the class was renamed or ceases to exist (e.g. because it is not package public) this will also break.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In general it is preferred to share code via composer components instead of extensions. If the classes of an extension only need to exist, but the extension does not need to be configured nor loaded, for what you want to do, that is a strong indicator that that code should be split off into a composer component you should depend on instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Configs (Your extension/skins settings) ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; assumes that your config settings start with a &quot;wg&quot; prefix.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If that's not the case, you can override the prefix by using a special key:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
That would use a prefix of &quot;eg&quot;, and set the global variable &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; to true.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the configuration section of extension registration provides a lot more features and allows you to describe your configuration options with much more detail. Instead of having a single key -&gt; value store for your configuration options, you can also add the following information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The general structure of the &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; changes slightly to the following, more object-oriented version:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Value ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the configuration moved to this place.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the only required key for a configuration object.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Path ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The boolean value of the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; key identifies, if the value of the configuration option should be interpreted as a filesystem path, relative to the extension directory root.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g., if the value of the configuration is &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; and the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; is true, the actual value will be &lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Description ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; key for a configuration option can hold a non-localized string, which can be used to explain the configuration option to other developers or the users (system administrators) of your extension.&lt;/span&gt;
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the description key is usually not exposed to the frontend of the wiki, however, take a look to the outlook for more information how this feature could be used in the future!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There's also the possibility to add a message key of MediaWiki's internal localisation system as a description (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;), which, in the future, will be used to expose the description in the frontend of the MediaWiki installation.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== public / private ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option is a boolean, which defaults to false, which means, that the configuration option and the value is marked as &quot;private&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This value is not used anywhere at the moment, take a look to the outlook to find out more about this option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Outlook ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{tracked|T155155}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The mentioned changes above are also preparation steps for an improved configuration management in MediaWiki. The above changes allow us to, e.g., expose the configuration options of extensions in the MediaWiki UI. For this, the localised description message (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) and the indication, if the configuration option should be exposed or not (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) is needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Unit tests auto-discovery ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki allows any extension to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|register phpunit tests]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without extension registration, you would need to register a hook handler for the {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}} hook, which would look something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(as described on the manual page). However, this code looks the same for a lot of extensions, so you could call it unnecessary code duplication.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension uses extension registration and your phpunit tests are located in the &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt; subdirectory of your extension, the phpunit wrapper of MediaWiki will autodiscover the unit tests with the help of extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Therefore, you don't need to register the hook anymore and you don't need to specify, that your unit tests are saved in the default directory.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Customizing registration ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

== También composer.json ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If an extension or skin has library dependencies, it may have a &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well, see {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Use the &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt; field to make MediaWiki use Composer's autoloading when appropriate.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some metadata fields overlap between &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (discussed in {{task|T89456}}), including :
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code stewardship ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

== Véase también ==
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Report bugs against the [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]] project.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Old versions of [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (prior to May 2015) and {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} describe the old approach of declaring extension information in PHP code and variables
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Known limitations&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Overview of architecture&lt;/span&gt;}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; is the schema for &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (and skin.json).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] about implementing extension registration&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[toollabs:extreg-wos|Extension registration wall of superpowers!]] — summary of which extensions are still to be converted.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{task|T98668}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking ticket for converting all extensions and skins on Git to use extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== References ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5bplf5szvgi73lp18arqevc753wa4a8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Extension registration/zh</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>377523</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402516</id>
      <parentid>5375692</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="25545" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
'''扩展注册'''（Extension registration）是MediaWiki用于加载[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|扩展]]和[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|皮肤]]的机制。
您将配置数据放置在您的扩展或皮肤根目录中，名叫&lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;或&lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt;的文件中，然后MediaWiki使用它以注册扩展和皮肤。

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Migration for site administrators ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Before MediaWiki 1.25, configuration for extensions and skins was done in a PHP file using the extension's or skin's name, for example &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

这些可以转换为：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;这必须在您加载任何扩展或皮肤前完成。&lt;/span&gt;

: 如果您保持您的扩展在&lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;以外的位置，您需要覆盖{{wg|ExtensionDirectory}}或者使用{{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}}的第二个参数来指明在哪个目录寻找扩展。
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Looks in $wgExtensionDirectory for /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;如果您的皮肤未在&lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt;中，您需要覆盖命名错误的{{wg|StyleDirectory}}。&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Looks in $wgStyleDirectory for both /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json and /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== 用于扩展开发人员的迁移手册 ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since MW 1.30, namespace IDs defined in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; can be overwritten locally, by defining the respective constant in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; before loading the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consider for instance the following namespace declaration in a &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would per default cause the constant NS_FOO to be defined to have the value 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, this can be overwritten by defining the respective constant in LocalSettings.php:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would cause the &quot;Foo&quot; namespace to be registered with the ID 6688 instead of 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When overriding namespace IDs, don't forget that all talk namespaces must have odd IDs, and the ID of the talk namespace must always be the subject namespace's ID plus one.&lt;/span&gt;

:''参见[https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ 扩展注册伤心墙（现已改称超能力墙）]。''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; helps you migrating from PHP entry points to a JSON metadata file.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension supports older versions of MediaWiki, you should keep your PHP entry point &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; until you drop support for those older versions.&lt;/span&gt;

示例命令行：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

如果您收到常量或函数不能重新定义的错误，您可能需要从&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;卸载您的扩展。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should replace your PHP entry point file (FooBar.php) with something like the following happens to not break wikis during the upgrade process.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

或皮肤

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== 保留文档 ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PHP entry points usually have some documentation of configuration settings that is useful and shouldn't be lost.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately JSON doesn't support comments. It is recommended that you transfer configuration documentation to a &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; file in the extension's repository.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also document configuration on-wiki in your Extension:''MyExtension'' page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to include some documentation directly in the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration ignores any key in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; starting with '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' in the top-level structure, so you can put comments in those parts of the JSON file. For example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Version 1 of the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; format also allowed &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; in &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; section, but this is no longer recommended or supported in version 2. &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; field of the config variable should be used instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This should only be used for brief notes and comments.
&lt;/div&gt;

== 功能 ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are loading a large number of extensions, extension registration will provide a performance boost as long as you have [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (or APCu) installed. Extensions that are loaded together with &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (with plural -s) will be cached together.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== 属性 ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A recurring problem is how to &quot;register&quot; something with another extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usually this meant that you had to load one extension before another.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, VisualEditor has a &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt; which allows extensions to add their modules.&lt;/span&gt;
然而，在可视化编辑器的入口点却有：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if any extension appends to the array before VisualEditor is loaded, VE will wipe out its entry in this array.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some extensions depended upon a specific load order, others hacked around this with {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration solves this problem with &quot;attributes&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the Math extension, its &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; would have something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the attributes need to be defined in the separate section &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; node needs to be an object with the extension name as key and an object of attribute/value pairs as the value. Be aware that the key in the subobject must not contain the extension name!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When VisualEditor wants to access this attribute it uses:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== 要求（依赖性） ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration has a &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; section, which acts similar to [[Composer]]'s &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; section.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It allows an extension developer to specify several requirements for the extension, such as a specific MediaWiki version (or greater/less than) or another extension/skin.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to add a dependency on a MediaWiki version that is greater than 1.26.0, you can add the following code to &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The key of the &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; object is the name of the dependency (prior to MediaWiki 1.29.0 only &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; was supported), the value is a valid version constraint (the format has to match the one [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md used by composer]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In MediaWiki 1.29.0 and above you can also add dependencies on skins and other extensions like so:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The extensions and skins specified here must also use the extension registrations system described on this page for this to work.
* The string added to specify the extension or skin must be identical to the string specified in the &quot;name&quot; field of the respective &quot;extension.json&quot; or &quot;skin.json&quot; file.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For extensions using Wikimedia [[Special:MyLanguage/Continuous integration|continuous integration]], dependencies also need to be added to {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}&lt;/span&gt;
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Check if an extension is loaded without actually requiring it ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many extensions may provide features that work only if another extension is loaded too, without really needing this feature for the core extension function to work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To implement a standardized way of checking, if an extension is loaded or not (without the need of extra work in an extension that is a soft-dependency in another one), extension registration can be used. It implements an &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns a simple boolean, if the extension is loaded or not (the extension needs to be loaded with extension registration for this to work). Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since [[MediaWiki 1.32]] it's also possible to check if an extension is loaded and satisfies a given composer version constraint:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you would like to check if a specific version of an extension is loaded in earlier versions of MediaWiki, information like that can be extracted with the &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns credit information for all loaded extensions. Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Alternatively, if the extension B defines a special constant meant for this purpose during loading, it is possible to check, if it is defined:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A more brittle way, that should be avoided is to check if a specific class of extension B exists or not, e.g. using this code:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This might break if the extension exists in the file system but is not loaded, e.g. if composer was used for autoloading.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the class was renamed or ceases to exist (e.g. because it is not package public) this will also break.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In general it is preferred to share code via composer components instead of extensions. If the classes of an extension only need to exist, but the extension does not need to be configured nor loaded, for what you want to do, that is a strong indicator that that code should be split off into a composer component you should depend on instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== 配置（您的扩展/皮肤设置） ===
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; assumes that your config settings start with a &quot;wg&quot; prefix.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If that's not the case, you can override the prefix by using a special key:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
That would use a prefix of &quot;eg&quot;, and set the global variable &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; to true.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the configuration section of extension registration provides a lot more features and allows you to describe your configuration options with much more detail. Instead of having a single key -&gt; value store for your configuration options, you can also add the following information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The general structure of the &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; changes slightly to the following, more object-oriented version:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== 值 ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the configuration moved to this place.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the only required key for a configuration object.&lt;/span&gt;

==== 路径 ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The boolean value of the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; key identifies, if the value of the configuration option should be interpreted as a filesystem path, relative to the extension directory root.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g., if the value of the configuration is &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; and the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; is true, the actual value will be &lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

==== 描述 ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; key for a configuration option can hold a non-localized string, which can be used to explain the configuration option to other developers or the users (system administrators) of your extension.&lt;/span&gt;
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the description key is usually not exposed to the frontend of the wiki, however, take a look to the outlook for more information how this feature could be used in the future!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There's also the possibility to add a message key of MediaWiki's internal localisation system as a description (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;), which, in the future, will be used to expose the description in the frontend of the MediaWiki installation.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== 公开/私有 ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option is a boolean, which defaults to false, which means, that the configuration option and the value is marked as &quot;private&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This value is not used anywhere at the moment, take a look to the outlook to find out more about this option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Outlook ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{tracked|T155155}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The mentioned changes above are also preparation steps for an improved configuration management in MediaWiki. The above changes allow us to, e.g., expose the configuration options of extensions in the MediaWiki UI. For this, the localised description message (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) and the indication, if the configuration option should be exposed or not (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) is needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== 单位测试自动发现 ===
MediaWiki允许任意扩展[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|注册phpunit测试]]。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without extension registration, you would need to register a hook handler for the {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}} hook, which would look something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(as described on the manual page). However, this code looks the same for a lot of extensions, so you could call it unnecessary code duplication.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension uses extension registration and your phpunit tests are located in the &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt; subdirectory of your extension, the phpunit wrapper of MediaWiki will autodiscover the unit tests with the help of extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Therefore, you don't need to register the hook anymore and you don't need to specify, that your unit tests are saved in the default directory.&lt;/span&gt;

== 定制注册 ==
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

== 同样在composer.json ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If an extension or skin has library dependencies, it may have a &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well, see {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Use the &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt; field to make MediaWiki use Composer's autoloading when appropriate.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some metadata fields overlap between &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (discussed in {{task|T89456}}), including :
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

== 代碼維護 ==
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

== 参见 ==
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Report bugs against the [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]] project.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Old versions of [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (prior to May 2015) and {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} describe the old approach of declaring extension information in PHP code and variables
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=已知限制}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Overview of architecture&lt;/span&gt;}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; is the schema for &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (and skin.json).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] about implementing extension registration&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[toollabs:extreg-wos|Extension registration wall of superpowers!]] — summary of which extensions are still to be converted.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{task|T98668}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking ticket for converting all extensions and skins on Git to use extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== References ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>c3cgfo5dlo2cqmsuy9qsljriog8uohg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/cs</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>378136</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402477</id>
      <parentid>5226568</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:11:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9997" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = Niklas Laxström, Siebrand Mazeland a další
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=Je součástí Language Extension Bundle}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=Dokumentace pro uživatele}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = Umožňuje překládat a upravovat interní zprávy i obsah wiki.
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] – nebo si [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view zkuste něco přeložit rovnou zde]
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

Rozšíření '''Translate''' dělá z MediaWiki velice silný nástroj pro překlad jakéhokoliv typu textu. Používá se hlavně k překladu softwaru a pro praktickou správu vícejazyčných wiki.

== Funkce ==

Rozšíření Translate poskytuje mnoho funkcí určených speciálně pro překladatele a zároveň zjednodušuje integraci s aktuálním zdrojovým kódem. Vše běží v rámci [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|MediaWiki]], která uživatelům umožňuje maximální míru svobody při vzájemné komunikaci a samoorganizaci.

Umožňuje:

* '''Překlad strukturovaného obsahu wiki stránek.'''
* '''Lokalizaci interních wiki zpráv a export těchto (a jiných) zpráv do souboru.'''
* '''Webové překladatelské a kontrolovací [[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overview/|rozhraní]], zároveň podporuje export a import zpráv ve formátu gettext pro off-line překlad.'''
* '''Nejrůznější pomůcky usnadňující práci překladatelům:'''
** kromě primárně nabízených globálně definovaných jazyků, lze překládat i do jazyků, které nejsou předem definované;
** umožňuje kolektivní práci na dokumentaci a použití kontextových zpráv;
** databáze překladů a strojový překlad s využitím externích nástrojů (Aperium, Microsoft Translator, Yandex.Translate);
** rozdílové zobrazení posledních změn v obsahu zdrojové zprávy;
** upozornění na nejobvyklejší chyby v kódu, jako je například upozornění na nepoužívané parametry.
* Lze využívat jako příklad předpřipravené moduly pro nejrůznější opensource produkty.
** Podporuje řadu lokalizačních formátů: PHP, Javu, Gettext, YAML a Android XML (viz {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|podporuje formáty souborů]]).
* pružný systém zásuvných modulů, který dovoluje snadno přidávat nové projekty a zakládat pro ně skupiny zpráv.
* Nejrůznější statistiky:
** procentuální zobrazení stavu překladu pro všechny skupiny zpráv ve všech podporovaných jazycích;
** procentuální zobrazení stavu překladu ve všech podporovaných jazycích pro kteroukoliv skupinu zpráv;
** nástroj pro generování grafu aktivity pro určitý časový úsek. Můžete si podle nejrůznějších filtrů zobrazovat počet editací, resp. přehled aktivity uživatelů v průběhu dne či uplynulé hodiny.
** globální přehled o aktivitě překladatelů a jazykových skupin.

Rozšíření Translate, má širokou uživatelskou základnu a je kompatibilní se všemi novějšími verzemi internetových prohlížečů. A pokud se čas od času vyskytnout drobné problémy, jsou díky tomu rychle odhaleny a vyřešeny.

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|''Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality'': Tato prezentace, která demonstruje jak lze díky rozšíření Translate dělat vskutku multijazyčnou wiki, je založena na zkušenostech wiki KDE UserBase.
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|Niklas Laxström, ''Překládání přes wiki: Jednoduché, rychlé, zábavné'', Wikimania 2012 (prezentace jsou k dispozici).
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Podpora a dokumentace ==

* Stránky [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|instalace]].
* Stránky [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|konfigurace]]
* Stránky [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|uživatelská dokumentace]] - včetně postupů.
* Stránky [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|Začínáme s vývojem rozšíření Translate]].
* Živá podpora prostřednictvím Libera Chat #translatewiki (ideální čas pro komunikaci v Evropě je během dne a večera).
* Veškeré problémy a požadavky prosím řešte přes [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate issue tracker]

Rozšíření Translate původně vyvíjel [[User:Nikerabbit]]. Řada dalších uživatelů, jako [[User:Raymond]], [[User:SPQRobin]] a lidé z Wikimedia Language teamu, rovněž přispěli svým dílem, jak k vývoji kódu, tak i k jeho dokumentaci. Aktuálně se o vývoj stará [[User:Nikerabbit]] a [[User:Siebrand]].

== Významní uživatelé rozšíření Translate ==
* https://translatewiki.net — Největší portál založený na wiki pro potřeby komunity, která provádí překlady zpráv pro rozhraní open source software.
* https://userbase.kde.org — Wiki pro dokumentaci projektu KDE, jejíž uživatelé využívají toto rozšíření opravdu intenzivně.
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — Využívá nejenom překladu obsahu wiki, ale také využívá skupiny překládaných zpráv. Překlad a kontrola překladu je povolena téměř všem uživatelům.
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

Pro další viz [[w:translatewiki.net#Notable uses|Pozoruhodné použití translatewiki.net na Wikipedii]].

=== Osvědčení ===

Tom Hutchison z Joomla:
{{quotation|1=
Rozšíření Translate umožňuje napojení na překládací službu, která se automaticky plní vašimi překlady. Ve stejnou dobu je může jiný překladatel využít ke srovnání a vybrat vhodnou formulaci, takže v překladu nevzniká moc chyb.

Což je skvělé, pokud jste každý na jiném kontinentu.
Další plus je, že v takovém případě mohou práce probíhat 24 hodin denně.
Potřebují pouze skupinový chat pro vzájemnou podporu.
Co potřebují k tomu aby mohli překládat, krom toho, že by měli být schopni porozumět anglicky psanému textu? Naučit se pár jednoduchých wiki značek a umět pracovat a odkazy a kategoriemi.
Když pomůžou jiným, tak ti zas pomohou ostatním.
Chvílemi pracovalo souběžně i víc než 40 uživatelů, kteří se tím bavili a navzájem si pomáhali.
Ti všichni se zpočátku wiki báli a pak nemohli uvěřit, když s tím začali, jak je to snadné.
Teď jen čekají na další překlady, protože je nestíhám pro ně chystat.
Vím, je to třeba jen jeden překladatel do jednoho jazyka nebo druhého jazyka.
Máme to také tak.
Jeden překládá do svahilštiny, zatím co druhý dělá na překladu do japonštiny.
Také vy můžete chystat stránky pro překlad.
Vy rozhodujete, zda do překladu zahrnout i šablony nebo z čeho udělat proměnnou pro volanou šablonu.
}}


== Související stránky ==
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – pro usnadnění komunikace s překladateli.

Nezaměňujte s:

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – použitelné pro jednorázový překlad wiki stránek z jednoho jazyka do druhého.
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Abstract Wikipedia]] k překladu.

== Jak se zapojit ==

* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all Přeložte toto rozšíření na translatewiki.net]
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|Oznamujte chyby a neváhejte navrhovat nové možnosti]]
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|Sledujte informace o chybách a jaké možnosti jsou v plánu na translatewiki.net]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Dokumentace k překladu zpráv a obsahu s využitím rozšíření Translate]]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>k6ei2jgnun4znsso9i3tvx22socbwni</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Social tools/8/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>380483</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401970</id>
      <parentid>1441629</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="23" xml:space="preserve">other social extensions</text>
      <sha1>5o7tudow1sg7qxi1o3q1oyhv9yri4oh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Social tools/10/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>380484</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401973</id>
      <parentid>1441630</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28" xml:space="preserve">independent of SocialProfile</text>
      <sha1>mc87gsmgt71a07cdooyvdq36a0x9qvb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Social tools/9/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>380485</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401972</id>
      <parentid>1441631</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24" xml:space="preserve">other related extensions</text>
      <sha1>ctg0a6gltzqz8hzalrrcb18upbyabez</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Social tools/en</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>380487</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401978</id>
      <parentid>4429447</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1561" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Social tools}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Overview}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Developer info}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Screenshots}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=History}}
|group2 = other social extensions
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = dependent on SocialProfile
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = other related extensions&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(independent of SocialProfile)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>51zcpehig24l0qjg6eqoaoka4916e6u</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401992</id>
      <parentid>5401978</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:10:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1562" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Social tools}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Overview}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Developer info}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Screenshots}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=History}}
|group2 = other social extensions
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = dependent on SocialProfile
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = other related extensions&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(independent of SocialProfile)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>eas4i9bd66w9tzsj9nsnz2d08fneuk8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Social tools/ja</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>380494</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401981</id>
      <parentid>5398634</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1608" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=ソーシャルツール}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=概要}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=開発者向け情報}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=スクリーンショット}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=歴史}}
|group2 = その他のソーシャル拡張機能
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = SocialProfileに依存
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = その他の関連拡張機能&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(SocialProfileに非依存)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>d96zc07r8eaerjl05g6g1ql4erl5493</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401994</id>
      <parentid>5401981</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:10:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1609" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=ソーシャルツール}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=概要}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=開発者向け情報}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=スクリーンショット}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=歴史}}
|group2 = その他のソーシャル拡張機能
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = SocialProfileに依存
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = その他の関連拡張機能&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(SocialProfileに非依存)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>fmej27dwzeunat2ka7ia9fhh0xb0lwj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:System message/cs</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>381936</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402527</id>
      <parentid>5352366</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:24:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="55425" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{i18n navigation}}
{{TOC right|limit=2}}

[[Image:MediaWiki SpecialUpload interface labelled.png|thumb|Označený formulář [[Special:Upload]], zobrazující různé systémové zprávy.]]
'''Systémová zpráva''' je úryvek prostého textu (nowiki), wikitext, [[w:CSS|CSS]] nebo [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]], který lze použít k přizpůsobení chování MediaWiki a jeho zobrazení pro každý jazyk a [[w:Locale (computer software)|lokální počítačový software]]. MediaWiki používá zprávy pro jakoukoli část uživatelského rozhraní, což umožňuje internacionalizaci a lokalizaci uživatelského rozhraní MediaWiki pro jádro i rozšíření.
Všechny zprávy používané v MediaWiki jsou definovány v ''souboru zpráv''.

== Přepisování zpráv na wiki ==
Zprávy lze přepsat z jejich výchozích hodnot úpravou na wiki.
Každá zpráva má wiki stránku v oboru názvů MediaWiki s klíčem zprávy jako názvem stránky.
Například zpráva &quot;aboutsite&quot; je uložena na MediaWiki:aboutsite.
Ve výchozím nastavení je tento obor názvů omezen na úpravy, pokud uživatel nemá oprávnění &quot;editinterface&quot; (rozhraní pro úpravy).
Seznam všech stránek se zprávami naleznete na [[Special:AllMessages]].
Úpravy zpráv rozhraní jsou obvykle jednoduché, stejně jako úpravy normální stránky wiki, ale jsou omezeny na uživatele s povolením [[editinterface]], které je ve výchozím nastavení přiřazeno správcům (a správcům rozhraní).
[[Image:Wiki-system-messages.png|thumb|Jeden řádek v rámci původní stránky [[Special:AllMessages]].]]
Speciální stránka [[Special:AllMessages]] vypisuje zvlášť pro každou zvolenou jazykovou mutaci tabulku se dvěma sloupci: název propojeného rozhraní a text.
Text je vodorovně rozdělen, aby se zobrazil výchozí text nahoře a přizpůsobený text níže.
Pokud vlastní zpráva neexistuje, zobrazí se pouze výchozí.
Pokud chcete přizpůsobit zprávu, klikněte na horní odkaz v levém sloupci (název zprávy).
Tento odkaz je červený, pokud se používá výchozí text, protože stránka pro úpravy je prázdná.

Druhý odkaz v levém sloupci vede na stránku, na které lze vést případnou diskuzi o tom jak má vypadat obsah příslušné zprávy.

{{anchor|Finding messages and documentation}}
== Vyhledávání zpráv a dokumentace ==
Jak se v MediaWiki se zprávami pracuje, jaké jsou s nimi spojené proměnné, parametry, omezení atp. je popsáno v [//translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;task=reviewall&amp;group=core&amp;language=qqq&amp;limit=5000&amp;action=page&amp;filter= dokumentaci k souborům pseudojazyka qqq], a v [[#Message_documentation|pravidlech pro dokumentaci zpráv]].
Pro některé starší zprávy můžete najít obsáhlejší dokumentaci v rámci původní {{ll|Category:Interface messages}}.

{{note|1=
Ve wiki bázi translatewiki.net je qqq stránka, která obsahuje uživatelskou dokumentaci ke zprávě (v angličtině, protože je stejná pro všechny čtenáře).
Stejně jako / en / ge / fr ... / qqq je podstránkou článku a lze ji přímo zobrazit.

* Zkuste [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/en]] a prohlédněte si článek v angličtině.
* Zkuste [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/fr]] a prohlédněte si stejný článek ve francouzštině.
* Zkuste zobrazit [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/qqq]] a zobrazit související dokumentaci (v angličtině).

Z tohoto hlediska je &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; považován za jazyk v parametru &lt;code&gt;language=&lt;/code&gt; požadavku.
}}

Od MediaWiki verze 1.18 a vyšší, můžete vyhledat identifikační řetězce zpráv použitých na stránce jejím zobrazení s využitím kódu pseudo-jazyka &lt;code&gt;'''[[Help:Qqx|qqx]]'''&lt;/code&gt;. To lze udělat buď tak, že připojíte za URL příslušné wiki stránky &lt;code&gt;?[[uselang]]=qqx&lt;/code&gt;, nebo pokud již URL obsahuje znak &lt;code&gt;?&lt;/code&gt; přidáte parametr &lt;code&gt;&amp;uselang=qqx&lt;/code&gt; (viz [{{fullurl:{{FULLPAGENAME}}|uselang=qqx}} například]). Místo obsahu zprávy se tak na stránce zobrazí její identifikační řetězec (''klíč''), takže pak můžete snadno vyhledat ten, který odpovídá zprávě, kterou chcete upravit. Je-li zpráva součástí obsahu stránky, tak se při použití qqx nic nezobrazí.

Některé části rozhraní přidávají do řetězce, který se zobrazuje při použití triku qqx, &lt;code&gt;nstab-&lt;/code&gt;. Například štítek na kartě, který odkazuje na diskusní stránku v hlavním jmenném prostoru, se zobrazuje jako &lt;code&gt;nstab-talk&lt;/code&gt;, ale řetězec je ve skutečnosti umístěn v [[MediaWiki:Talk]].

V případě, že stránka používá nějaké vlastní záložky jako např. [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|speciální stránka &quot;Nastavení&quot;]] budete muset přidat záložku až za parametr &lt;code&gt;uselang&lt;/code&gt;, např. &lt;code&gt;Special:Preferences?uselang=qqx#mw-prefsection-rendering&lt;/code&gt;.

{{anchor|Localisation file format}}
== Formát lokalizačního souboru ==

Všechny zprávy používané v MediaWiki jsou definovány v ''souboru zpráv''.

V MediaWiki existují dva typy souborů zpráv: JSON a PHP.
Od dubna 2014 byla základní MediaWiki a většina udržovaných rozšíření migrována do formátu JSON.
Pro veškerý nový vývoj byste měli používat JSON.
Další informace o migraci na JSON najdete na stránce [[Requests for comment/Localisation format]].

=== JSON ===

Od konce roku 2013 byl zaveden nový formát souborů pro zprávy: JSON.
Toto je prostý [[:w:JSON|JSON]], známý jako běžný obecný formát ukládání dat.
Každý klíč v něm je klíčem zprávy a hodnotou je text zprávy.
Speciální klíč &lt;code&gt;@metadata&lt;/code&gt; navíc slouží k uložení informací o překladu, jako jsou autoři překladu.

Použitím JSON jsou lokalizační soubory bezpečnější, protože nejsou spustitelné.
Je také kompatibilní s jquery.i18n, knihovnou JavaScript vyvinutou jako součást [[Milkshake|projektu Milkshake]], která poskytuje možnosti lokalizace frontendu podobné MediaWiki a je používána některými rozšířeními, která chtějí být méně závislá na MediaWiki, jako je [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor]] a [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector|UniversalLanguageSelector]].

Protože širší sada nástrojů pro internacionalizaci a lokalizaci byla nazvána &quot;[[Project Milkshake]]&quot;, někteří lidé nazývají tento formát &quot;banán&quot;.

==== Umístění souboru ====
V jádru MediaWiki jsou lokalizační soubory umístěny v adresáři &lt;code&gt;{{git file |file=languages/i18n |action=tree}}&lt;/code&gt;.
Rozšíření MediaWiki obvykle umístí svá rozšíření do podadresáře &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt;.
Pokud v rámci projektu existuje velký počet zpráv, je možné je rozdělit do dvou nebo více aktuálních podadresářů, aby bylo možné je udržovat.
V kontextu MediaWiki se k výpisu těchto podadresářů používá konfigurační klíč {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}}.
Zde je příklad z rozšíření VisualEditoru pro MediaWiki:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
  &quot;MessagesDirs&quot;: {
    &quot;VisualEditor&quot;: [
      &quot;lib/ve/modules/ve/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-mw/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-wmf/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;lib/ve/lib/oojs-ui/i18n&quot;
    ]
  }
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Nové zprávy přidáte do anglického souboru zpráv &quot;en&quot; &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; a zdokumentujete je v souboru dokumentace zpráv se speciálním kódem pseudojazyka &quot;qqq&quot; &amp;ndash; &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;.
''Viz také: [[#Adding new messages|Přidávání nových zpráv]]''.

==== Metadata ====

V současné době se v souborech používají následující pole metadat:

;authors
:JSON seznam autorů zpráv. Pro angličtinu (en) a dokumentaci ke zprávám (qqq) jsou tyto při úpravě souboru zpráv přidány ručně. U všech ostatních jazyků se toto vkládá automaticky při exportu souboru zpráv z [[translatewiki.net]]. Dokumentaci zprávy lze upravovat na translatewiki.net a do souboru qqq.json se automaticky vkládají také editace dokumentace.
;message-documentation
:Toto je kód pseudojazyka pro ukládání dokumentace zprávy. Pro MediaWiki je to vždy ''qqq''. (To se objevuje v některých rozšířeních, ale ve skutečnosti není žádným způsobem zpracováno. Není to povinné.)

==== Konvence ====

Speciální znaky, jako jsou zalomení řádků, jsou escapovány (&lt;code&gt;&quot;\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Znaky Unicode, které představují písmena v různých abecedách, jsou uloženy jako skutečné znaky a nikoli jako kódy znaků, protože tyto soubory někdy čtou lidé, a proto jsou soubory menší (&lt;code&gt;&quot;誼&quot;&lt;/code&gt; a ne &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u8ABC&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).
V každém případě mají vývojáři málo důvodů upravovat zprávy v jakémkoli jazyce kromě angličtiny, protože ty se obvykle upravují přes translatewiki.net.

Neunikne ani kód HTML, takže &lt;code&gt;&quot;&amp;lt;strong&gt;Warning&amp;lt;/strong&gt;&quot;&lt;/code&gt; a ne &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u003cstrong\u003eWarning\u003c/strong\u003e&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.

Soubory JSON jsou odsazeny pomocí tabulátorů.

=== PHP ===

PHP je starší formát lokalizačního souboru.
Toto je v podstatě pole PHP se všemi zprávami.
V jádru MediaWiki je každý jazyk umístěn ve svém vlastním souboru v adresáři languages/message zdrojového kódu MediaWiki.
V rozšířeních jsou všechny jazyky a dokumentace zprávy (''qqq'') ve stejném souboru: ''ExtensionName.i18n.php'', obvykle v hlavním adresáři rozšíření.

K migraci z PHP na JSON použijte skript [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:GenerateJsonI18n.php|generateJsonI18n.php]].
Přesune zprávy do souborů JSON a nahradí text souboru PHP podložkou, která ukazuje na soubory JSON.
Tento standardní kód je potřeba pro zpětnou kompatibilitu s MediaWiki 1.19.
Nepoužívá se v nových rozšířeních, která nevyžadují kompatibilitu s MediaWiki 1.19.

== Používání zpráv ==
MediaWiki používá ''centrální'' úložiště zpráv, na které se odkazují klíče v kódu.
To se liší například od &lt;code&gt;Gettext&lt;/code&gt;, který pouze získává přeložitelné řetězce ze zdrojových souborů.
Systém založený na key-based některé věci usnadňuje, jako je upřesňování původních textů a sledování změn zpráv.
Nevýhodou je samozřejmě to, že seznam použitých zpráv a seznam zdrojových textů pro tyto klíče se nemusí synchronizovat.
V praxi to není velký problém a jediným významným problémem je, že někdy další zprávy, které se již nepoužívají, stále zůstávají k překladu.

Chcete-li, aby byly klíče zpráv lépe ovladatelné a snadno k nalezení, také pomocí grep, vždy je pište úplně a nespoléhejte se příliš na jejich dynamické vytváření.
Můžete zřetězit části klíčů zpráv, pokud máte pocit, že to dává vašemu kódu lepší strukturu, ale přidejte komentář se seznamem možných výsledných klíčů.

Viz také [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding_conventions#Dynamic_identifiers|konvence kódu]]. Například:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// Zde lze použít zprávy:
// * myextension-connection-success
// * myextension-connection-warning
// * myextension-connection-error
$text = wfMessage( 'myextension-connection-' . $status )-&gt;parse();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Chcete-li použít zprávu v JavaScriptu, musíte ji [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Messages API#Using a ResourceLoader module|uvést]] v definici vašeho modulu ResourceLoader ve vlastnosti &lt;code&gt;&quot;messages&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.

Podrobné využití funkcí zpráv v PHP a JavaScriptu je na stránce {{ll|Manual:Messages API}}.
'''Toto je důležitá stránka dokumentace a měli byste si ji přečíst, než napíšete kód, který používá zprávy.'''

{{anchor|Message sources}}
== Zdroje zpráv ==

Kód vyhledává systémové zprávy z těchto zdrojů:
* Jmenný prostor MediaWiki. To umožňuje wiki převzít nebo přepsat všechny své zprávy, když standardní zprávy nevyhovují nebo jsou nežádoucí.
** MediaWiki:''Message-key'' je výchozí zpráva,
** MediaWiki:''Message-key''/''language-code'' je zpráva, která se má použít, pokud uživatel zvolil jiný jazyk, než je výchozí jazyk wiki.
* Ze souborů zpráv:
** Samotné jádro MediaWiki a v současnosti udržovaná [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All extensions|rozšíření]] používají soubor pro jazyk s názvem &lt;code&gt;''zyx''.json&lt;/code&gt;, kde ''zyx'' je kód jazyka pro daný jazyk.
** Některá starší rozšíření používají kombinovaný soubor zpráv obsahující všechny zprávy ve všech jazycích, obvykle pojmenovaný &lt;code&gt;''MyExtensionName''.i18n.php&lt;/code&gt;.
** Mnoho wiki Wikimedia Foundation přistupuje k některým zprávám z rozšíření {{ll|Extension:WikimediaMessages|nsp=0}}, což jim umožňuje standardizovat zprávy na wiki WMF, aniž by je vnucovaly každé instalaci MediaWiki.
** Několik rozšíření používá jiné techniky.
{{anchor|Caching}}

== Ukládání do mezipaměti ==
Systémové zprávy jsou jednou z významnějších součástí MediaWiki, především proto, že se používají v každém webovém požadavku.
Soubory zpráv PHP jsou velké, protože obsahují tisíce klíčů a hodnot zpráv.
Načtení tohoto souboru (a případně více souborů, pokud se jazyk uživatele liší od jazyka obsahu) činí velké nároky na paměť a výkon.
Ke snížení tohoto dopadu na výkon se používá agresivní vrstvený systém ukládání do mezipaměti.

MediaWiki má vestavěno mnoho mechanismů ukládání do mezipaměti, díky kterým je kód poněkud obtížnější pochopit.
Od 1.16 je nový systém ukládání do mezipaměti, který ukládá zprávy do mezipaměti buď v souborech [[cdb]] nebo v databázi.
Přizpůsobené zprávy se ukládají do mezipaměti v souborovém systému a v [[memcached]] (nebo alternativně), v závislosti na konfiguraci.

Níže uvedená tabulka poskytuje přehled příslušných nastavení:

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!colspan=&quot;2&quot; rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| Umístění mezipaměti
!colspan=&quot;4&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf}}
|-
! 'store' =&gt; 'db'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;br /&gt;(výchozí) !! 'store' =&gt; 'files'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'array'&lt;br /&gt;''(experimentální od MW ≥ 1,26)''
|-
!rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}
! = false&lt;br /&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;default&lt;/span&gt;)
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || ''chyba'' (nedefinovaná cesta) || ''chyba'' (nedefinovaná cesta)
|-
! = ''path''
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || lokální souborový systém (CDB) || lokální souborový systém (CDB) || lokální souborový systém (pole PHP)
|}
{{MW version|version=1.27.0|version2=1.27.2|gerrit change=Id3e2d2b18ddb423647bf2e893bcf942722c0e097}}
V MediaWiki 1.27.0 a 1.27.1 byla autodetekce změněna tak, aby upřednostňovala backend souboru.
V případě &lt;code&gt;'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;/code&gt; (výchozí) se použije backend souboru s cestou z {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}.
Pokud tato hodnota není nastavena (což je výchozí hodnota), použije se dočasný adresář určený operačním systémem.
Pokud nelze dočasný adresář detekovat, použije se jako záložní řešení backend databáze.
Toto bylo vráceno z 1.27.2 a 1.28.0 kvůli konfliktu souborů na sdílených hostitelích a bezpečnostním problémům (viz [[:phab:T127127|T127127]] a [[:phab:T161453|T161453]]).

=== Funkce backtrace ===
Pro lepší vizuální znázornění vrstev ukládání do mezipaměti je zde funkce backtrace toho, jaké metody se nazývají při načítání zprávy.
Vysvětlení každé vrstvy najdete v následujících částech.

* &lt;code&gt;Message::fetchMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;MessageCache::get()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;Language::getMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalisationCache::getSubitem()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LCStore::get()&lt;/code&gt;

=== MessageCache ===
Třída &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; je nejvyšší úrovní ukládání zpráv do mezipaměti.
Je volána ze třídy Message a vrací konečný nezpracovaný obsah zprávy.
Tato vrstva zpracovává následující logiku:

* Kontrola přepsání zpráv v databázi
* Ukládání přepsaných zpráv do mezipaměti v {{ll|memcached}} nebo v čemkoli, na co je {{ll|Manual:$wgMessageCacheType|$wgMessageCacheType}} nastaveno
* Vyřešení zbytku sekvence [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|jazykové rezervy]]

Poslední odrážka je důležitá.
[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|Jazyková rezerva]] (language fallbacks) umožňuje MediaWiki použít jiný jazyk, pokud originál neobsahuje požadovanou zprávu.
Jak je zmíněno v další části, většina jazykových řešení se vyskytuje na nižší úrovni.
Pouze vrstva &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; však kontroluje, zda v databázi nejsou přepsané zprávy.
Zde se tedy provádí integrace přepsaných zpráv z databáze do záložního řetězce.
Pokud databázi nepoužíváte, lze celou tuto vrstvu zakázat.

=== LocalisationCache ===

Viz {{ll|Manual:LocalisationCache.php|LocalisationCache.php}}

=== LCStore ===
Třída &lt;code&gt;LCStore&lt;/code&gt; je pouze implementací typu back-end, kterou používá třída LocalisationCache pro skutečné ukládání do mezipaměti a získávání zpráv.
Stejně jako třída &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt;, která se používá pro obecné ukládání do mezipaměti v MediaWiki, existuje řada různých typů mezipaměti (konfigurovaných pomocí [[Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf]]):
* &quot;db&quot; (výchozí) - ukládá zprávy do mezipaměti v databázi
* &quot;file&quot; (výchozí, pokud je nastaveno &lt;code&gt;$wgCacheDirectory&lt;/code&gt;) - používá [[w:cdb (software)|CDB]] k ukládání zpráv do mezipaměti v místním souboru
* &quot;accel&quot; - k ukládání dat používá [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|APC]] nebo jinou mezipaměť operačních kódů

Možnost &quot;file&quot; používá Wikimedia Foundation a je doporučena, protože je rychlejší než přechod do databáze a spolehlivější než mezipaměť APC, zejména proto, že APC není kompatibilní s PHP verze 5.5 nebo novější.

{{anchor|Adding new messages}}
== Přidávání nových zpráv ==

=== Výběr klíče zprávy ===

Viz také:
{{ll|Manual:Coding conventions#System messages}}

Klíč zprávy musí být globálně jedinečný.
To zahrnuje jádro MediaWiki a všechna rozšíření a vzhledy.

V názvech zpráv se držte malých písmen, číslic a pomlček; většina ostatních znaků je mezi méně praktickými nebo nefungujícími vůbec.
Podle konvence MediaWiki první znak nerozlišuje velká a malá písmena a ostatní znaky rozlišují malá a velká písmena.

Při pojmenovávání prosím dodržujte globální nebo místní konvence.
U předpon použijte standardní prefix, nejlépe název předpony psaný malými písmeny, za kterým následuje pomlčka (&quot;-&quot;).
Výjimky jsou:

; Zprávy používané rozhraním API : Musí začínat znaky &lt;code&gt;apihelp-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apiwarn-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apierror-&lt;/code&gt;. Za tuto předponu vložte předponu rozšíření. (Všimněte si, že tyto zprávy by měly být v samostatném souboru, obvykle pod [[phab:source/mediawiki/browse/master/includes/api/i18n/|includes/i18/api]].)
; Zprávy související s protokolem : Musí začínat znaky &lt;code&gt;logentry-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;název-logu-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;popis-logu&lt;/code&gt;.
; Uživatelská práva : Klíč pro název práva, jak je zobrazen na Special:ListGroupRights, musí začínat &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt;. Název akce, která doplňuje větu &quot;{{int|Permissionserrorstext-withaction|unused}}&quot; musí začínat &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt;.
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Revisions tags&lt;/span&gt; : Značky revizí musí začínat &lt;code&gt;tag-&lt;/code&gt;.
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Special page titles&lt;/span&gt; : Speciální názvy stránek musí začínat &lt;code&gt;special-&lt;/code&gt;.

=== Další věci, které je třeba vzít v úvahu při vytváření zpráv ===

# Ujistěte se, že pro zprávu používáte vhodné zpracování (analýzu, nahrazení &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, escapování pro HTML atd.)
# Pokud je vaše zpráva součástí jádra, měla by být obvykle přidána k &lt;code&gt;languages/i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt;, ačkoli některé součásti, jako je Installer, EXIF tagy a ApiHelp, mají své vlastní soubory zpráv.
# Pokud je vaše zpráva v rozšíření, přidejte ji do souboru &lt;code&gt;i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt; nebo &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; v příslušném podadresáři. Zejména zprávy API, které vidí pouze vývojáři a ne většina koncových uživatelů, jsou obvykle v samostatném souboru, například &lt;code&gt;i18n/api/en.json&lt;/code&gt;. Pokud má rozšíření mnoho zpráv, můžete vytvořit podadresáře pod &lt;code&gt;i18n&lt;/code&gt;. Všechny adresáře zpráv, včetně výchozího &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt;, musí být uvedeny v sekci &lt;code&gt;MessagesDirs&lt;/code&gt; v &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; nebo v proměnné {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}}.
# Udělejte si pauzu a zvažte znění zprávy. Je to co nejjasnější? Může to být špatně pochopeno? Pokud je to možné, vyžádejte si komentáře od jiných vývojářů nebo lokalizátorů. Postupujte podle [[#Internationalisation hints|Internacionalizačních rad]].
# Přidejte dokumentaci do &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; ve stejném adresáři.
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The sequence of the messages in the file should roughly conform to the features of your project. Put messages from the same feature next to each other. This helps translators stay focused and be efficient and consistent.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Put the messages that are expected to be the most basic and the most frequently used in the beginning of the file, and the messages that are rarer and more technically advanced towards the end.&lt;/span&gt;


== Zprávy, které by se neměly překládat ==

# '''Ignored''' (ignorované) zprávy jsou ty, které by měly existovat pouze v anglickém souboru zpráv. Jsou to zprávy, které by neměly vyžadovat překlad, protože odkazují pouze na jiné zprávy nebo jazykově neutrální funkce, ''např.'' zprávu &quot;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.
# '''Optional''' (volitelné) zprávy mohou být přeloženy pouze v případě, že jsou změněny v cílovém jazyce.

Označení takových zpráv:

* použijte šablonu v dokumentaci ke zprávě &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt;, tj
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Notranslate|notranslate]]}}&lt;/code&gt; nebo
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Optional|optional]]}}&lt;/code&gt;;
* řekněte rozšíření {{ll|Extension:Translate|nsp=0}} používanému na {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}, co má dělat se zprávami, a to odesláním opravy s uvedením příslušného seznamu (viz také {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Group configuration/MediaWiki|úplné konfigurační dokumenty}}):
** &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;pro jádro přidejte klíče zpráv do {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/MediaWiki.yaml}}&lt;/span&gt;
**# pod &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;ignored:&lt;/code&gt; nebo
**# pod &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;optional:&lt;/code&gt;;
** pro rozšíření v {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/mediawiki-extensions.txt}} přidejte pod název rozšíření řádek jako
**# &lt;code&gt;ignored = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt; or
**# &lt;code&gt;optional = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt;.

== Odebírání existujících zpráv ==
Odstraňte ji z &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;.
Neobtěžujte se jinými jazyky.
Aktualizace z {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} je zpracují automaticky.

Kromě toho zkontrolujte, zda se zpráva objeví kdekoli v konfiguraci translatewiki, například v seznamu volitelných nebo nejpoužívanějších zpráv (měl by stačit jednoduchý git grep).
V případě potřeby jej z těchto seznamů odstraňte.

== Změna existujících zpráv ==

# Zvažte aktualizaci [[#Message documentation|dokumentace zprávy]].
# Změňte klíč zprávy, pokud staré překlady nejsou vhodné pro nový význam. To zahrnuje také změny ve zpracování zpráv (parsování, escapování, parametry atd.). Zlepšení frázování zprávy bez technických změn obvykle není důvodem pro změnu klíče. Na translatewiki.net budou překlady označeny jako zastaralé, aby na ně mohli cílit překladatelé. Změna klíče zprávy nevyžaduje komunikaci s týmem i18n nebo podání žádosti o podporu. Pokud však máte zvláštní okolnosti nebo dotazy, zeptejte se na {{irc|translatewiki}} nebo na [[translatewiki:Support|stránce podpory]] na {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}.
# Pokud rozšíření podporuje {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}, změňte prosím pouze anglickou zdrojovou zprávu anebo klíč a doprovodný záznam v &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;. V případě potřeby se tým translatewiki.net postará o aktualizaci překladů, označí je jako zastaralé, vyčistí soubor nebo přejmenuje klíče tam, kde je to možné. To platí také v případě, že měníte pouze věci, jako jsou značky HTML, které byste mohli změnit v jiných jazycích, aniž byste těmito jazyky mluvili. Většina z těchto akcí proběhne v [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]] a dorazí do Gitu s přibližně jednodenním  zpožděním.

{{anchor|Message documentation}}
== Dokumentace zprávy ==
Pro dokumentaci zpráv existuje pseudojazykový kód &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt;.
Je to jeden z kódů ISO 639 vyhrazený pro soukromé použití.
Tam neuchováváme překlady každé zprávy, ale shromažďujeme anglické věty ''o každé zprávě'': Říká nám, kde se používá, dává rady, jak ji přeložit, a vyjmenovává a popisuje její parametry, odkazuje na související zprávy a tak dále.
Na [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]] se tyto rady zobrazují překladatelům, když upravují zprávy.

Programátoři musí zdokumentovat každou zprávu.
Dokumentace zpráv je nezbytným zdrojem – nejen pro překladatele, ale pro všechny správce modulu.
Kdykoli je do softwaru přidána zpráva, ''musí'' být přidána také odpovídající položka &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt;. Revize, které tak nečiní, jsou označeny &quot;&lt;code&gt;V-1&lt;/code&gt;&quot;, dokud nebude přidána dokumentace.

Dokumentace v souborech &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; by měla být upravována přímo pouze při přidávání nových zpráv nebo při změně existující anglické zprávy způsobem, který vyžaduje změnu dokumentace, například přidání nebo odebrání parametrů.
V ostatních případech by měla být dokumentace obvykle upravována v translatewiki.
Každý dokumentační řetězec je přístupný na &lt;nowiki&gt;https://translatewiki.net/wiki/MediaWiki:&lt;/nowiki&gt;''message-key''&lt;nowiki&gt;/qqq&lt;/nowiki&gt;, jako by to byl překlad.
Tyto úpravy budou exportovány do zdrojových úložišť spolu s překlady.

Mezi užitečné informace, které by měly být v dokumentaci, patří:

# Práce se zprávami (analýza, escapování, prostý text).
# Typ parametrů s ukázkovými hodnotami.
# Kde je zpráva použita (stránky, umístění v uživatelském rozhraní).
# Jak se zpráva používá tam, kde je použita (název stránky, text tlačítka, ''atd.'').
# Jaké další zprávy se používají spolu s touto zprávou nebo na které další zprávy se tato zpráva vztahuje.
# Cokoli jiného, co lze pochopit, když je zpráva viděna v kontextu, ale ne, když je zpráva zobrazena samostatně (což je případ, kdy je překládána).
# Případně poznámky o gramatice. Například &quot;open&quot; v angličtině může být sloveso i přídavné jméno. V mnoha jiných jazycích se slova liší a je nemožné uhodnout, jak je přeložit bez dokumentace.
# Přídavná jména, která popisují věci, jako je &quot;disabled&quot; (zakázáno), &quot;open&quot; (otevřeno) nebo &quot;blocked&quot; (blokováno), musí ''vždy'' říkat, co popisují. V mnoha jazycích musí mít přídavná jména rod podstatného jména, které popisují. Může se také stát, že různé druhy věcí potřebují různá přídavná jména.
# Pokud má zpráva speciální vlastnosti, například pokud se jedná o název stránky, nebo pokud by neměla být přímým překladem, ale měla by být přizpůsobena kultuře nebo projektu.
# Zda se zpráva objeví v souvislosti s jinou zprávou, například v seznamu nebo v nabídce. Znění nebo gramatické rysy slov by pravděpodobně měly být podobné se souvisejícími zprávami. Položky v seznamu by měly také správně souviset se záhlavím seznamu.
# Části zprávy, které se nesmí překládat, jako jsou názvy obecných jmenných prostorů, adresy URL nebo značky.
# Vysvětlení potenciálně nejasných slov, například zkratky, jako je &quot;CTA&quot; nebo konkrétní žargon, jako &quot;template&quot; (šablona), &quot;suppress&quot; (potlačit) nebo &quot;stub&quot; (útržek). (Všimněte si, že je nejlepší se takovým slovům v první řadě vyhnout!)
# Snímky obrazovek (creenshot) jsou velmi užitečné. Neořezávejte – obrázek celé obrazovky, na kterém se zpráva zobrazuje, poskytuje úplný kontext a lze jej znovu použít v několika zprávách.

Několik dalších tipů:

* Pamatujte, že překladatelé velmi, velmi často překládají zprávy, aniž by skutečně používali software.
* Překladatelé většinou nemají žádné kontextové informace, ani o vašem modulu, ani o jiných zprávách v něm.
* Samotná přeformulovaná zpráva je ve většině případů k ničemu.
* Nepoužívejte žargon návrhářů jako &quot;nav&quot; nebo &quot;comps&quot;.
* Zvažte sepsání [[betawiki:Terminology#Terminologies|glosáře]] technických termínů, které se používají ve vašem modulu. Pokud to uděláte, odkažte na něj v dokumentace zpráv.

Na další zprávy můžete odkazovat pomocí {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;{{((}}msg-mw{{!}}message key{{))}}&lt;/code&gt;|klíče zprávy}}.
Udělejte to prosím, pokud části zpráv pocházejí z jiných zpráv (pokud tomu nelze zabránit), nebo pokud jsou některé zprávy zobrazeny společně nebo ve stejném kontextu.

translatewiki.net poskytuje některé výchozí šablony pro dokumentaci:

* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-action|doc-action]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pro zprávy &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-right|doc-right]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pro zprávy &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-group|doc-group]]|[...]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pro zprávy kolem skupin uživatelů (&lt;code&gt;group&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;member&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;page&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;js&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;css&lt;/code&gt; )
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-accesskey|doc-accesskey]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pro zprávy &lt;code&gt;accesskey-&lt;/code&gt;

Pro více informací se podívejte na stránky šablon.

{{anchor|Internationalisation hints}}
== Internacionalizační rady ==
Kromě [[#Message documents|dokumentace]] překladatelé žádají vývojáře, aby zvážili některé rady, které by jim usnadnily a zefektivnily práci a umožnily skutečnou a dobrou lokalizaci pro všechny jazyky.
I když pouze přidáváte nebo upravujete zprávy v angličtině, měli byste si být vědomi potřeb všech jazyků. Každá zpráva je přeložena do více než 300 jazyků a to by mělo být provedeno co nejlepším způsobem.
Správná implementace těchto rad vám velmi často pomůže psát lepší zprávy také v angličtině.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Help_and_contact_info|Localisation#Help_and_contact_info]] lists the main places where you can find the assistance of experienced and knowledgeable people regarding i18n.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Use Message parameters and switches properly ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
That's a prerequisite of a correct wording for your messages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Avoid message re-use ===
&lt;/div&gt;
Překladatelé odrazují od opětovného použití zpráv.
To se může zdát neintuitivní, protože kopírování a duplikování kódu je obvykle špatný postup, ale v systémových zprávách je to často potřebné.
Ačkoli lze dva pojmy vyjádřit stejným slovem v angličtině, nemusí to nutně znamenat, že je lze vyjádřit stejným slovem v každém jazyce.
Dobrým příkladem je &quot;OK&quot;: V angličtině se používá pro obecný štítek tlačítka, ale v některých jazycích dávají přednost použití štítku tlačítka souvisejícího s operací, kterou tlačítko provede.
Dalším příkladem je prakticky jakékoli přídavné jméno: Slovo jako &quot;multiple&quot; se v mnoha jazycích mění podle pohlaví, takže jej nemůžete znovu použít k popisu několika různých věcí a musíte vytvořit několik samostatných zpráv.

Pokud přidáváte více identických zpráv, přidejte dokumentaci ke zprávě, která popisuje rozdíly v jejich kontextech.
Nebojte se práce navíc pro překladatele.
Překladová paměť v tom hodně pomáhá a zároveň si zachovává v případě potřeby flexibilitu pro různé překlady.

{{anchor|Avoid_patchwork_messages|Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages}}
=== Vyhněte se fragmentovaným nebo 'patchworkovým' (slátaninám) zprávám ===
Jazyky mají různé slovosledy a různě složitá gramatická a syntaktická pravidla.
Je velmi těžké přeložit &quot;lego&quot; zprávy, tedy zprávy tvořené více kusy textu, případně s určitým nepřímým způsobem (také nazývané &quot;řetězec řetězců&quot;).

Je lepší udělat z každé zprávy jednu úplnou frázi.
Několik vět lze v případě potřeby obvykle mnohem snadněji spojit do textového bloku.
Chcete-li v jedné zprávě zkombinovat několik řetězců, předejte je jako parametry, protože překladatelé je mohou při překladu pro svůj jazyk správně seřadit.

==== Zprávy, které se navzájem citují ====
Výjimkou z pravidla mohou být zprávy, které na sebe odkazují: 'Zadejte jméno původního autora do pole označeného &quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot; a klikněte na &quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:proceed}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot; pro dokončení'.
Díky tomu je zpráva konzistentní, když vývojář softwaru nebo provozovatel wiki později změní &quot;name&quot; (jméno) nebo &quot;proceed&quot; (pokračovat).
Bez tohoto int-triku by si vývojáři a operátoři museli být vědomi všech souvisejících zpráv, které je třeba upravit, když se cokoli změní.

=== Nepoužívejte termíny a šablony, které jsou specifické pro konkrétní projekty ===
MediaWiki používají velmi různorodí lidé v rámci hnutí Wikimedie i mimo něj.
Přestože byla původně vytvořena pro encyklopedii, nyní se používá pro různé druhy obsahu.
Používejte proto obecné výrazy.
Vyhněte se například výrazům jako &quot;article&quot; (článek) a místo toho použijte &quot;page&quot; (stránka), pokud si nejste absolutně jisti, že funkce, kterou vyvíjíte, bude použita pouze na webu, kde se stránky nazývají &quot;articles&quot; (články).
Nepoužívejte &quot;village pump&quot;, což je název stránky komunity na anglické Wikipedii, a místo toho používejte obecný termín, například &quot;community discussion page&quot; (diskusní stránka komunity).

Nepředpokládejte, že určitá šablona existuje na všech wiki.
Šablony jsou pro wiki lokální.
To platí jak pro zdrojové zprávy, tak pro jejich překlady.
Pokud zprávy používají šablony, budou fungovat pouze tehdy, pokud je šablona vytvořena na ''každé'' wiki, kde je funkce nasazena.
Nejlepší je úplně se vyhnout používání šablon ve zprávách.
Pokud je opravdu musíte použít, musíte to jasně zdokumentovat v dokumentaci ke zprávě a v pokynech k instalaci rozšíření.

=== Oddělte časy od dat ve větách ===
Některé jazyky musí mezi datum a čas vložit něco, co gramaticky závisí na jiných slovech ve větě.
Nebudou tedy moci používat kombinaci data a času.
Ostatním se může tato kombinace zdát vhodná, proto je obvykle nejlepší volbou v takových případech zadat tři hodnoty parametrů (datum/čas, datum, čas) a v každém překladu ponechat buď první, nebo poslední dvě podle potřeby nevyužité.

=== Vyhněte se &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; ve zprávách ===
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; má několik nevýhod.
Může to být cokoliv (akronym, slovo, krátká fráze, ''atd.'') a v závislosti na jazyce může vyžadovat použití &lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Messages_API#…on use context inside sentences via GRAMMAR|&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/code&gt; při každém výskytu.
Bez ohledu na to, každá zpráva s &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; bude vyžadovat kontrolu ve většině jazyků wiki pro každou novou wiki, na které je nainstalován váš kód.
Ve většině případů, kdy pro jazyk neexistuje obecná konfigurace &lt;code&gt;GRAMMAR&lt;/code&gt;, budou muset operátoři wiki přidat nebo upravit kód PHP tak, aby fungovali &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; pro &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
To vyžaduje více dovedností a více porozumění než v jiném případě.
Je vhodnější mít obecné odkazy jako &quot;this wiki&quot; (tato wiki).
To sice instalacím nebrání lokálně měnit tyto zprávy tak, aby používaly &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, ale alespoň nemusí a mohou odložit přizpůsobení zpráv, dokud wiki již nebude spuštěna a používána.

=== Vyhněte se odkazům na vizuální rozvržení a pozice ===
Co se kde vykreslí, závisí na vzhledech.
Rozvržení obrazovky jazyků psaných zleva doprava jsou nejčastěji zrcadlená ve srovnání s těmi, která se používají pro jazyky psané zprava doleva, ale ne vždy a u některých jazyků a wiki ne úplně.
Ruční zařízení, úzká okna a tak dále mohou pod sebou zobrazovat bloky, které by se na větších displejích objevovaly vedle sebe.
Vzhledem k tomu, že skripty a miniaplikace JavaScriptu psané webem a uživatelem mohou a také budou skrývat části nebo přesouvat věci nepředvídatelným způsobem, neexistuje žádný spolehlivý způsob, jak zjistit skutečné rozvržení.

Je nesprávné spojovat informace o rozvržení s jazyky obsahu, protože jazyk uživatelského rozhraní nemusí být jazykem obsahu stránky a rozvržení může být v závislosti na okolnostech kombinací obou.
Nevizuální uživatelské agenty, jako jsou akustické čtečky obrazovky a další pomocná zařízení, ani nemají koncept vizuálního rozvržení.
Proto byste se ve většině případů neměli odkazovat na pozice vizuálního rozvržení, ačkoli termíny sémantického rozvržení mohou být stále použity (&quot;předchozí kroky ve formuláři&quot; ''atd.'').

MediaWiki nepodporuje zobrazování různých zpráv nebo fragmentů zpráv na základě aktuální směrovosti rozhraní (viz [[phab:T30997|T30997]]).

Připravovaná podpora prohlížeče a MediaWiki pro psaní shora dolů ve východní a severní Asii&lt;ref&gt;http://dev.w3.org/csswg/css3-writing-modes/&lt;/ref&gt; způsobí, že rozložení obrazovky bude ještě nepředvídatelnější, alespoň osm možných rozložení (levá/pravá výchozí pozice, horní/dolní výchozí pozice a to, co nastane jako první).

=== Vyhněte se odkazům na barvy obrazovky ===
Barva, ve které je něco vykresleno, závisí na mnoha faktorech, včetně vzhledů, skriptů a gadgetů JavaScript napsaných webem a uživatelem a přepisů místního uživatelského agenta z důvodu dostupnosti nebo technologických omezení.
Nevizuální uživatelské agenty, jako jsou akustické čtečky obrazovky a další pomocná zařízení, nemají ani koncept barev.
Proto byste neměli odkazovat na barvy obrazovky.
(Ze stejného důvodu byste se také neměli spoléhat pouze na barvu jako na mechanismus informování uživatele o stavu.)

=== Mějte prvky zprávy před a za každým vstupním polem ===

:''Toto je doporučený návod, který se nestal standardem ve vývoji MediaWiki''

Zatímco angličtina umožňuje efektivní využití dotazování ve formuláři položka–dvojtečka–mezera–vstupní pole, mnoho jiných jazyků to tak nemá.
I v angličtině často používáte &quot;Vzdálenost: ___ metrech&quot; spíše než &quot;Vzdálenost (v metrech): ___&quot;.
Ponecháme-li prvky {{tag|textarea|open}} stranou, měli byste myslet na každé vstupní pole podle vzoru &quot;Vzdálenost: ___ metrů&quot;. Tak:

* vytvořte dvě zprávy, i když bude 2. v angličtině a některých dalších jazycích prázdná, nebo
* povolte umístění vstupů pomocí parametrů &lt;code&gt;$i&lt;/code&gt;.
=== Vyhněte se nepřeloženým značkám HTML ve zprávách ===
Značky HTML, které nevyžadují překlad, jako je uzavření {{tag|div|open}}, pravítka nad nebo pod a podobně, by obvykle neměly být součástí zpráv.
Zbytečně zatěžují překladatele, zvětšují velikost souboru zpráv a představují riziko náhodné změny nebo přeskočení v procesu překladu.
Obecně se ve zprávách vyhněte raw HTML, pokud můžete.

=== Zprávy jsou často delší, než si myslíte! ===

Při procházení souborů zpráv v cizích jazycích téměř nikdy nenajdete zprávy kratší než ty čínské, zřídka kratší než ty anglické a obvykle mnohem delší než ty anglické.

Zejména ve formulářích před vstupními poli bývají anglické zprávy stručné a krátké.
To se v překladech často neuchovává.
Jazyky mohou postrádat technickou slovní zásobu v angličtině a mohou vyžadovat více slov nebo dokonce celé věty k vysvětlení některých pojmů.
Například krátká anglická zpráva &quot;TSV file:&quot; může být přeložena do jazyka doslovně:
&lt;blockquote&gt;''Sem zadejte název, který označuje sbírku počítačových dat, která se skládá z postupně organizovaných sérií strojopisných řádků, které jsou samy o sobě organizovány jako série informačních polí, kde jsou uvedená pole informací ohraničena a ohraničení mezi nimi jsou jediné znaky toho druhu, které posouvají vozík psacího stroje dále do další předem definované polohy. Tady to je: _____ (děkuji)''&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Toto je, pravda, extrémní příklad, ale tuto možnost máte.
Představte si tuto větu ve sloupci ve tvaru, kde každé slovo zabírá vlastní řádek a vstupní pole je svisle vystředěno v dalším sloupci. :-(

=== Nepoužívejte velmi blízká, podobná nebo identická slova k označení různých věcí nebo pojmů ===
Stránky mohou mít například starší ''revize'' (konkrétního data, času a úprav), zahrnující minulé ''verze'' uvedené stránky.
Slova ''revize'' a ''verze'' lze používat zaměnitelně.
Problém nastává, když jsou verzované stránky revidovány a také se zmiňuje revize, ''tj.'' proces jejich revize.
To nemusí představovat vážný problém, když dvě synonyma &quot;revize&quot; mají různé překlady.
Na to však nespoléhejte.
Je tedy lepší se použití &quot;revize&quot; ''aka'' &quot;verze&quot; úplně vyhnout, aby nedošlo k jeho nesprávné interpretaci.

=== Základní slova mohou mít nepředvídatelné konotace nebo vůbec neexistují ===
Některá slova se těžko překládají kvůli jejich velmi specifickému použití v MediaWiki.
Některá možná [[#Expect untranslated words|nebudou přeložena vůbec]].
Například v několika jazycích neexistuje slovo &quot;uživatel&quot; (user) vztahující se k &quot;někomu, kdo něco používá&quot;.
Podobně v [[:en:Colognian language|Kölsch]] anglická slova &quot;namespace&quot; a &quot;apartment&quot; se překládají jako stejné slovo.
Také v Kölsch říkají stejným slovem &quot;corroborator and participant&quot; (potvrzující a účastník), protože jakýkoli odkaz na &quot;use&quot; (použití) by příliš silně znamenal &quot;abuse&quot; (zneužívání).
Termín &quot;wiki farma&quot; se překládá jako &quot;stáj plná wiki&quot;, protože farma s jednou plodinou by byla v rozporu s termíny v jazyce a nepochopena, ''atd.''.

{{anchor|Expect untranslated words}}
=== Očekávejte nepřeložená slova ===

:''Toto je doporučený návod, který se ještě nestal standardem ve vývoji MediaWiki''

Není neobvyklé, že vlastní jména, názvy značek, ''atd.'' v počítačové angličtině nejsou překládány a místo toho jsou brány jako přejatá nebo cizí slova.
V jiném případě mohou někteří zvláště nároční překladatelé označit taková slova jako slova patřící do jiného jazyka pomocí značek HTML, například &lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot;&gt; … &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight &gt;.

Možná budete chtít zvážit zajištění toho, aby váš obslužný program pro výstup zpráv předal takové označení beze změny, navzdory zjevným bezpečnostním rizikům.

=== Povolit vysvětlující vložené značky ===

:''Toto je doporučený návod, který se ještě nestal standardem ve vývoji MediaWiki''

Někdy se v cílových jazycích vyskytují zkratky, odborné výrazy nebo obecně nejednoznačná slova, kterým nováčci nemusí hned porozumět, ale zkušeným uživatelům počítačů jsou zřejmé.
Aby se překladatelé vyhnuli změti obrazovky zdlouhavými vysvětlivkami, aniž by nechali nováčky ve štychu, mohou se překladatelé rozhodnout přidat vysvětlení jako {{tag|abbr|open}} anotace, které prohlížeče zobrazí, když na ně najedete myší.

Například základní zpráva MediaWiki &lt;code&gt;exif-orientation-8&lt;/code&gt; o rotaci obrázku, která je v angličtině jednoduše &quot;&lt;code&gt;Rotated 90° CW&lt;/code&gt;&quot;, v marocké arabštině je přeložena jako:

:&lt;code lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &amp;lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&amp;lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/code&gt;

dává:

:&lt;span lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/span&gt;

vysvětlení zkratky pro &quot;proti směru hodinových ručiček&quot;, když je potřeba.

Možná budete chtít zvážit zajištění toho, aby vaše obsluha výstupu zprávy předala takové označení beze změny, i když je původní zpráva nepoužívá.

=== V případě potřeby použijte značky {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}} a {{tag|kbd|open}} ===
Když mluvíte o technických parametrech, hodnotách nebo vstupech z klávesnice, označte je jako takové vhodně pomocí značek HTML {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}} nebo {{tag|kbd|open}}.
Jsou tedy typograficky odsazeny od běžného textu.
To čtenářům vyjasní jejich smysl a zabrání zmatkům, chybám a chybným prohlášením.
Ujistěte se, že vaše zpracování zpráv umožňuje takové označení.

=== Symboly, dvojtečky, závorky, ''atd.'' jsou součástí zpráv ===
Mnoho symbolů je také lokalizovatelných. Některá písma mají jiné druhy závorek než latinka.
V některých jazycích nemusí být po štítku nebo výzvě k zadání dvojtečka vhodná.
Začlenění těchto symbolů do zpráv pomáhá vytvářet lepší a méně anglo-centrické překlady a také snižuje změť kódu.

Například v «norštině», »švédštině», »dánštině«, »němčině« a «japonštině» se používají různé konvence uvozovek.&lt;ref&gt;[[w:Quotation_mark#Summary_table]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Pokud potřebujete zalomit nějaký text do lokalizovaných závorek, hranatých závorek nebo uvozovek, můžete použít &lt;code&gt;parentheses&lt;/code&gt; {{int:parentheses}} nebo &lt;code&gt;brackets&lt;/code&gt; {{int:brackets}} nebo &lt;code&gt;quotation-marks&lt;/code&gt; {{int:quotation-marks}} zprávy jako takto:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php&gt;wfMessage( 'parentheses' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside parentheses */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'brackets' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside brackets */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'quotation-marks' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside quotation marks */ )-&gt;escaped()&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Neočekávejte, že symboly a interpunkce přežijí překlad ===
Jazyky psané zprava doleva (na rozdíl od angličtiny) obvykle zaměňují symboly šipek prezentované s odkazy &quot;next&quot; (další) a &quot;previous&quot; (předchozí) a jejich umístění vzhledem k textu zprávy může, ale také nemusí být převráceno.
Elipsis může být přeloženo jako &quot;''atd.''&quot; nebo jako slova.
Otazníky, vykřičníky, dvojtečky budou umístěny jinde než na konci věty, vůbec a nebo dvakrát.
V důsledku toho vždy zahrňte všechny do textu svých zpráv a nikdy se nepokoušejte je vkládat programově.

=== Použijte tečky ===
'''Do''' ukončete normální věty tečkami.
To je pro překladatele často jediný ukazatel, podle kterého pozná, že se nejedná o titulky nebo položky seznamu, které může být potřeba přeložit jinak.

=== Odkazové kotvy ===

==== Odkazy Wikitextu ====

Kotvy odkazů lze do zpráv vložit několika technickými způsoby:

# přes wikitext: …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;''stránka wiki''|''kotva''&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…,
# přes wikitext: …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;[''nějaká-URL'' ''kotva'']&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…, or
# text kotvy je zpráva ve jmenném prostoru MediaWiki. ''Vyhněte se tomu!''

To druhé je pro překladatele často obtížné nebo nemožné zvládnout, [[#Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages|vyvarujte se fragmentovaných nebo 'chaotickým' zprávám]] i zde.
Ujistěte se, že &quot;&lt;code&gt;nějaká-URL&lt;/code&gt;&quot; neobsahuje mezery.

==== Použijte smysluplné kotvy odkazů ====
Dejte si pozor na svou formulaci.
Odkazové kotvy hrají důležitou roli při hodnocení stránek vyhledávači – jak slova propojená, tak cílová kotva.
Ujistěte se, že kotva dobře popisuje cílovou stránku.
Vždy se vyhněte běžným a obecným slovům.
Například &quot;Click here&quot; (klikněte sem) je absolutně zákázáno,&lt;ref&gt;http://www.w3.org/QA/Tips/noClickHere&lt;/ref&gt;, protože cílové stránky téměř nikdy nejsou o &quot;kliknutí sem&quot;.
Nedávejte to ani do vět kolem odkazů, protože &quot;sem&quot; nebylo místo, kam kliknout.
Místo toho použijte přesná akční slova, která říkají, k čemu se uživatel dostane, když bude následovat odkaz, jako například &quot;Můžete [[Special:Upload|nahrát soubor]], pokud si přejete.&quot;

Viz také ''[http://www.nngroup.com/articles/using-link-titles-to-help-users-predict-where-they-are-going/ Pomozte uživatelům předvídat, kam jdou]'', a [[w:Mystery meat navigation|tajemná navigace masa]] a ''[https://tosbourn.com/click-here/ Hlavní důvody, proč bychom neměli používat klikni sem jako text odkazu]''.

=== Vyhněte se žargonu a slangu ===
Vyhněte se ve zprávách žargonu vývojářů a zkušených uživatelů. Snažte se používat jednoduchý jazyk, kdykoli je to možné.
Pokud chcete uživatele upozornit, že se něco stalo nebo nestalo, neříkejte &quot;success&quot; (úspěch), &quot;successfully&quot; (úspěšně), &quot;fail&quot; (neúspěch), &quot;error occurred while&quot; (došlo k chybě) atd.
To vychází z pohledu vývojářů, kteří vidí všechno jako pravdivé nebo nepravdivé, ale uživatelé obvykle chtějí vědět, co se skutečně stalo nebo nestalo a co by s tím měli dělat (pokud vůbec). Tak:

* &quot;Soubor byl úspěšně přejmenován&quot; -&gt; &quot;Soubor byl přejmenován&quot;
* &quot;Přejmenování souboru se nezdařilo&quot; -&gt; &quot;Soubor s tímto názvem již existuje. Vyberte prosím jiný název.&quot;

=== Dejte si pozor na mezery a zalomení řádků ===
Lokalizované zprávy MediaWiki se obvykle upravují na wiki buď operacemi wiki na živých wiki nebo překladateli na [[translatewiki.net]].
Měli byste si být vědomi toho, jak mezery, zejména na začátku nebo konci vaší zprávy, ovlivní editory:

* Mezery a konce řádků (nové řádky) na konci zprávy jsou vždy automaticky odstraněny editorem wikitextu. Vaše zpráva nesmí končit mezerou nebo zalomením řádku, protože se při úpravě na wiki ztratí.
* Mezery a zalomení řádků na začátku nejsou automaticky odstraněny, ale pravděpodobně budou odstraněny náhodně během úprav a je třeba se jim vyhnout.

Začněte a ukončete svou zprávu aktivním textem; pokud kolem něj potřebujete zalomení nového řádku nebo odstavce, váš okolní kód by se měl vypořádat s jeho přidáním do vráceného textu.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are some messages which require a space at the end, such as 'word-separator' (which consists of just a space character in most languages).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To support such use cases, the following HTML entities are allowed in messages and transformed to the actual characters, even if the message otherwise doesn't allow wikitext or HTML formatting:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/REL1_34/includes/cache/MessageCache.php#L887&lt;/ref&gt;

* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#32;&lt;/code&gt; – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;space&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#160;&lt;/code&gt; – [[w:non-breaking space|non-breaking space]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;shy;&lt;/code&gt; – [[w:soft hyphen|soft hyphen]]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a related note, any other syntax elements affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/pre-save transforms|pre-save transforms]] also must not be used in messages, as they will be transformed when the message is edited on the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Použijte standardní velká písmena ===
Velká písmena překladatelům napoví, co překládají, jako jsou jednotlivá slova, položky seznamu nebo nabídky, fráze nebo celé věty.
Správná (standardní) velká písmena můžou také hrát roli při hodnocení vašich stránek vyhledávači.
MediaWiki používá [[w:Letter case|case case]] (''Rychlá hnědá liška skáče přes líného psa'') ve zprávách rozhraní.

Vždy si pamatujte, že mnoho psacích systémů vůbec nemá velká písmena a některé z těch, které je mají, je používají jinak než angličtina.
Proto pro zdůraznění nepoužívejte VŠECHNA VELKÁ PÍSMENA.
Použijte CSS nebo HTML {{tag|em|open}} nebo {{tag|strong|open}} níže:

==== Důraz ====
V normálním textu by měly být součástí textů zpráv [[w:Emphasis|emphasis]] '''tučné písmo''' nebo ''kurzíva'' a podobně.
Místní konvence v důrazu se často liší, zvláště některá asijská písma mají svá vlastní.
Překladatelé musí být schopni přizpůsobit důraz svým cílovým jazykům a oblastem.
Zkuste ve svém uživatelském rozhraní použít &quot;{{tag|em|open}}&quot; a &quot;{{tag|strong|open}}&quot;, abyste umožnili značkování podle jazyka nebo skriptu.

V moderních rozvrženích obrazovky v anglickém a evropském stylu se důraz používá méně.
Uveďte to ve své [[#Message documentation|dokumentaci zprávy]], protože to může poskytnout cenné rady, jak překládat.
Důraz může a měl by být podle potřeby použit v jiných kulturních kontextech za předpokladu, že o tom překladatelé vědí.

&lt;references /&gt;

== Související odkazy ==

* {{ll|Customization}}
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings}}
* {{ll|Manual:Skins}}
* {{ll|Manual:Messages API}}
* {{ll|Localisation}}
* [[translatewiki:FAQ]]

[[Category:Customization techniques{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:User interface{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Localisation{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:System message{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1t6chjnw3ej1ce373e368z4qqi1b8sy</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402545</id>
      <parentid>5402527</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:26:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="55385" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{i18n navigation}}
{{TOC right|limit=2}}

[[Image:MediaWiki SpecialUpload interface labelled.png|thumb|Označený formulář [[Special:Upload]], zobrazující různé systémové zprávy.]]
'''Systémová zpráva''' je úryvek prostého textu (nowiki), wikitext, [[w:CSS|CSS]] nebo [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]], který lze použít k přizpůsobení chování MediaWiki a jeho zobrazení pro každý jazyk a [[w:Locale (computer software)|lokální počítačový software]]. MediaWiki používá zprávy pro jakoukoli část uživatelského rozhraní, což umožňuje internacionalizaci a lokalizaci uživatelského rozhraní MediaWiki pro jádro i rozšíření.
Všechny zprávy používané v MediaWiki jsou definovány v ''souboru zpráv''.

== Přepisování zpráv na wiki ==
Zprávy lze přepsat z jejich výchozích hodnot úpravou na wiki.
Každá zpráva má wiki stránku v oboru názvů MediaWiki s klíčem zprávy jako názvem stránky.
Například zpráva &quot;aboutsite&quot; je uložena na MediaWiki:aboutsite.
Ve výchozím nastavení je tento obor názvů omezen na úpravy, pokud uživatel nemá oprávnění &quot;editinterface&quot; (rozhraní pro úpravy).
Seznam všech stránek se zprávami naleznete na [[Special:AllMessages]].
Úpravy zpráv rozhraní jsou obvykle jednoduché, stejně jako úpravy normální stránky wiki, ale jsou omezeny na uživatele s povolením [[editinterface]], které je ve výchozím nastavení přiřazeno správcům (a správcům rozhraní).
[[Image:Wiki-system-messages.png|thumb|Jeden řádek v rámci původní stránky [[Special:AllMessages]].]]
Speciální stránka [[Special:AllMessages]] vypisuje zvlášť pro každou zvolenou jazykovou mutaci tabulku se dvěma sloupci: název propojeného rozhraní a text.
Text je vodorovně rozdělen, aby se zobrazil výchozí text nahoře a přizpůsobený text níže.
Pokud vlastní zpráva neexistuje, zobrazí se pouze výchozí.
Pokud chcete přizpůsobit zprávu, klikněte na horní odkaz v levém sloupci (název zprávy).
Tento odkaz je červený, pokud se používá výchozí text, protože stránka pro úpravy je prázdná.

Druhý odkaz v levém sloupci vede na stránku, na které lze vést případnou diskuzi o tom jak má vypadat obsah příslušné zprávy.

{{anchor|Finding messages and documentation}}
== Vyhledávání zpráv a dokumentace ==
Jak se v MediaWiki se zprávami pracuje, jaké jsou s nimi spojené proměnné, parametry, omezení atp. je popsáno v [//translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;task=reviewall&amp;group=core&amp;language=qqq&amp;limit=5000&amp;action=page&amp;filter= dokumentaci k souborům pseudojazyka qqq], a v [[#Message_documentation|pravidlech pro dokumentaci zpráv]].
Pro některé starší zprávy můžete najít obsáhlejší dokumentaci v rámci původní {{ll|Category:Interface messages}}.

{{note|1=
Ve wiki bázi translatewiki.net je qqq stránka, která obsahuje uživatelskou dokumentaci ke zprávě (v angličtině, protože je stejná pro všechny čtenáře).
Stejně jako / en / ge / fr ... / qqq je podstránkou článku a lze ji přímo zobrazit.

* Zkuste [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/en]] a prohlédněte si článek v angličtině.
* Zkuste [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/fr]] a prohlédněte si stejný článek ve francouzštině.
* Zkuste zobrazit [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/qqq]] a zobrazit související dokumentaci (v angličtině).

Z tohoto hlediska je &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; považován za jazyk v parametru &lt;code&gt;language=&lt;/code&gt; požadavku.
}}

Od MediaWiki verze 1.18 a vyšší, můžete vyhledat identifikační řetězce zpráv použitých na stránce jejím zobrazení s využitím kódu pseudo-jazyka &lt;code&gt;'''[[Help:Qqx|qqx]]'''&lt;/code&gt;. To lze udělat buď tak, že připojíte za URL příslušné wiki stránky &lt;code&gt;?[[uselang]]=qqx&lt;/code&gt;, nebo pokud již URL obsahuje znak &lt;code&gt;?&lt;/code&gt; přidáte parametr &lt;code&gt;&amp;uselang=qqx&lt;/code&gt; (viz [{{fullurl:{{FULLPAGENAME}}|uselang=qqx}} například]). Místo obsahu zprávy se tak na stránce zobrazí její identifikační řetězec (''klíč''), takže pak můžete snadno vyhledat ten, který odpovídá zprávě, kterou chcete upravit. Je-li zpráva součástí obsahu stránky, tak se při použití qqx nic nezobrazí.

Některé části rozhraní přidávají do řetězce, který se zobrazuje při použití triku qqx, &lt;code&gt;nstab-&lt;/code&gt;. Například štítek na kartě, který odkazuje na diskusní stránku v hlavním jmenném prostoru, se zobrazuje jako &lt;code&gt;nstab-talk&lt;/code&gt;, ale řetězec je ve skutečnosti umístěn v [[MediaWiki:Talk]].

V případě, že stránka používá nějaké vlastní záložky jako např. [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|speciální stránka &quot;Nastavení&quot;]] budete muset přidat záložku až za parametr &lt;code&gt;uselang&lt;/code&gt;, např. &lt;code&gt;Special:Preferences?uselang=qqx#mw-prefsection-rendering&lt;/code&gt;.

{{anchor|Localisation file format}}
== Formát lokalizačního souboru ==

Všechny zprávy používané v MediaWiki jsou definovány v ''souboru zpráv''.

V MediaWiki existují dva typy souborů zpráv: JSON a PHP.
Od dubna 2014 byla základní MediaWiki a většina udržovaných rozšíření migrována do formátu JSON.
Pro veškerý nový vývoj byste měli používat JSON.
Další informace o migraci na JSON najdete na stránce [[Requests for comment/Localisation format]].

=== JSON ===

Od konce roku 2013 byl zaveden nový formát souborů pro zprávy: JSON.
Toto je prostý [[:w:JSON|JSON]], známý jako běžný obecný formát ukládání dat.
Každý klíč v něm je klíčem zprávy a hodnotou je text zprávy.
Speciální klíč &lt;code&gt;@metadata&lt;/code&gt; navíc slouží k uložení informací o překladu, jako jsou autoři překladu.

Použitím JSON jsou lokalizační soubory bezpečnější, protože nejsou spustitelné.
Je také kompatibilní s jquery.i18n, knihovnou JavaScript vyvinutou jako součást [[Milkshake|projektu Milkshake]], která poskytuje možnosti lokalizace frontendu podobné MediaWiki a je používána některými rozšířeními, která chtějí být méně závislá na MediaWiki, jako je [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor]] a [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector|UniversalLanguageSelector]].

Protože širší sada nástrojů pro internacionalizaci a lokalizaci byla nazvána &quot;[[Project Milkshake]]&quot;, někteří lidé nazývají tento formát &quot;banán&quot;.

==== Umístění souboru ====
V jádru MediaWiki jsou lokalizační soubory umístěny v adresáři &lt;code&gt;{{git file |file=languages/i18n |action=tree}}&lt;/code&gt;.
Rozšíření MediaWiki obvykle umístí svá rozšíření do podadresáře &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt;.
Pokud v rámci projektu existuje velký počet zpráv, je možné je rozdělit do dvou nebo více aktuálních podadresářů, aby bylo možné je udržovat.
V kontextu MediaWiki se k výpisu těchto podadresářů používá konfigurační klíč {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}}.
Zde je příklad z rozšíření VisualEditoru pro MediaWiki:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
  &quot;MessagesDirs&quot;: {
    &quot;VisualEditor&quot;: [
      &quot;lib/ve/modules/ve/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-mw/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-wmf/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;lib/ve/lib/oojs-ui/i18n&quot;
    ]
  }
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Nové zprávy přidáte do anglického souboru zpráv &quot;en&quot; &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; a zdokumentujete je v souboru dokumentace zpráv se speciálním kódem pseudojazyka &quot;qqq&quot; &amp;ndash; &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;.
''Viz také: [[#Adding new messages|Přidávání nových zpráv]]''.

==== Metadata ====

V současné době se v souborech používají následující pole metadat:

;authors
:JSON seznam autorů zpráv. Pro angličtinu (en) a dokumentaci ke zprávám (qqq) jsou tyto při úpravě souboru zpráv přidány ručně. U všech ostatních jazyků se toto vkládá automaticky při exportu souboru zpráv z [[translatewiki.net]]. Dokumentaci zprávy lze upravovat na translatewiki.net a do souboru qqq.json se automaticky vkládají také editace dokumentace.
;message-documentation
:Toto je kód pseudojazyka pro ukládání dokumentace zprávy. Pro MediaWiki je to vždy ''qqq''. (To se objevuje v některých rozšířeních, ale ve skutečnosti není žádným způsobem zpracováno. Není to povinné.)

==== Konvence ====

Speciální znaky, jako jsou zalomení řádků, jsou escapovány (&lt;code&gt;&quot;\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Znaky Unicode, které představují písmena v různých abecedách, jsou uloženy jako skutečné znaky a nikoli jako kódy znaků, protože tyto soubory někdy čtou lidé, a proto jsou soubory menší (&lt;code&gt;&quot;誼&quot;&lt;/code&gt; a ne &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u8ABC&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).
V každém případě mají vývojáři málo důvodů upravovat zprávy v jakémkoli jazyce kromě angličtiny, protože ty se obvykle upravují přes translatewiki.net.

Neunikne ani kód HTML, takže &lt;code&gt;&quot;&amp;lt;strong&gt;Warning&amp;lt;/strong&gt;&quot;&lt;/code&gt; a ne &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u003cstrong\u003eWarning\u003c/strong\u003e&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.

Soubory JSON jsou odsazeny pomocí tabulátorů.

=== PHP ===

PHP je starší formát lokalizačního souboru.
Toto je v podstatě pole PHP se všemi zprávami.
V jádru MediaWiki je každý jazyk umístěn ve svém vlastním souboru v adresáři languages/message zdrojového kódu MediaWiki.
V rozšířeních jsou všechny jazyky a dokumentace zprávy (''qqq'') ve stejném souboru: ''ExtensionName.i18n.php'', obvykle v hlavním adresáři rozšíření.

K migraci z PHP na JSON použijte skript [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:GenerateJsonI18n.php|generateJsonI18n.php]].
Přesune zprávy do souborů JSON a nahradí text souboru PHP podložkou, která ukazuje na soubory JSON.
Tento standardní kód je potřeba pro zpětnou kompatibilitu s MediaWiki 1.19.
Nepoužívá se v nových rozšířeních, která nevyžadují kompatibilitu s MediaWiki 1.19.

== Používání zpráv ==
MediaWiki používá ''centrální'' úložiště zpráv, na které se odkazují klíče v kódu.
To se liší například od &lt;code&gt;Gettext&lt;/code&gt;, který pouze získává přeložitelné řetězce ze zdrojových souborů.
Systém založený na key-based některé věci usnadňuje, jako je upřesňování původních textů a sledování změn zpráv.
Nevýhodou je samozřejmě to, že seznam použitých zpráv a seznam zdrojových textů pro tyto klíče se nemusí synchronizovat.
V praxi to není velký problém a jediným významným problémem je, že někdy další zprávy, které se již nepoužívají, stále zůstávají k překladu.

Chcete-li, aby byly klíče zpráv lépe ovladatelné a snadno k nalezení, také pomocí grep, vždy je pište úplně a nespoléhejte se příliš na jejich dynamické vytváření.
Můžete zřetězit části klíčů zpráv, pokud máte pocit, že to dává vašemu kódu lepší strukturu, ale přidejte komentář se seznamem možných výsledných klíčů.

Viz také [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding_conventions#Dynamic_identifiers|konvence kódu]]. Například:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// Zde lze použít zprávy:
// * myextension-connection-success
// * myextension-connection-warning
// * myextension-connection-error
$text = wfMessage( 'myextension-connection-' . $status )-&gt;parse();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Chcete-li použít zprávu v JavaScriptu, musíte ji [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Messages API#Using a ResourceLoader module|uvést]] v definici vašeho modulu ResourceLoader ve vlastnosti &lt;code&gt;&quot;messages&quot;&lt;/code&gt;.

Podrobné využití funkcí zpráv v PHP a JavaScriptu je na stránce {{ll|Manual:Messages API}}.
'''Toto je důležitá stránka dokumentace a měli byste si ji přečíst, než napíšete kód, který používá zprávy.'''

{{anchor|Message sources}}
== Zdroje zpráv ==

Kód vyhledává systémové zprávy z těchto zdrojů:
* Jmenný prostor MediaWiki. To umožňuje wiki převzít nebo přepsat všechny své zprávy, když standardní zprávy nevyhovují nebo jsou nežádoucí.
** MediaWiki:''Message-key'' je výchozí zpráva,
** MediaWiki:''Message-key''/''language-code'' je zpráva, která se má použít, pokud uživatel zvolil jiný jazyk, než je výchozí jazyk wiki.
* Ze souborů zpráv:
** Samotné jádro MediaWiki a v současnosti udržovaná [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All extensions|rozšíření]] používají soubor pro jazyk s názvem &lt;code&gt;''zyx''.json&lt;/code&gt;, kde ''zyx'' je kód jazyka pro daný jazyk.
** Některá starší rozšíření používají kombinovaný soubor zpráv obsahující všechny zprávy ve všech jazycích, obvykle pojmenovaný &lt;code&gt;''MyExtensionName''.i18n.php&lt;/code&gt;.
** Mnoho wiki Wikimedia Foundation přistupuje k některým zprávám z rozšíření {{ll|Extension:WikimediaMessages|nsp=0}}, což jim umožňuje standardizovat zprávy na wiki WMF, aniž by je vnucovaly každé instalaci MediaWiki.
** Několik rozšíření používá jiné techniky.
{{anchor|Caching}}

== Ukládání do mezipaměti ==
Systémové zprávy jsou jednou z významnějších součástí MediaWiki, především proto, že se používají v každém webovém požadavku.
Soubory zpráv PHP jsou velké, protože obsahují tisíce klíčů a hodnot zpráv.
Načtení tohoto souboru (a případně více souborů, pokud se jazyk uživatele liší od jazyka obsahu) činí velké nároky na paměť a výkon.
Ke snížení tohoto dopadu na výkon se používá agresivní vrstvený systém ukládání do mezipaměti.

MediaWiki má vestavěno mnoho mechanismů ukládání do mezipaměti, díky kterým je kód poněkud obtížnější pochopit.
Od 1.16 je nový systém ukládání do mezipaměti, který ukládá zprávy do mezipaměti buď v souborech [[cdb]] nebo v databázi.
Přizpůsobené zprávy se ukládají do mezipaměti v souborovém systému a v [[memcached]] (nebo alternativně), v závislosti na konfiguraci.

Níže uvedená tabulka poskytuje přehled příslušných nastavení:

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!colspan=&quot;2&quot; rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| Umístění mezipaměti
!colspan=&quot;4&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf}}
|-
! 'store' =&gt; 'db'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;br /&gt;(výchozí) !! 'store' =&gt; 'files'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'array'&lt;br /&gt;''(experimentální od MW ≥ 1,26)''
|-
!rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}
! = false&lt;br /&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;default&lt;/span&gt;)
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || ''chyba'' (nedefinovaná cesta) || ''chyba'' (nedefinovaná cesta)
|-
! = ''path''
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || lokální souborový systém (CDB) || lokální souborový systém (CDB) || lokální souborový systém (pole PHP)
|}
{{MW version|version=1.27.0|version2=1.27.2|gerrit change=Id3e2d2b18ddb423647bf2e893bcf942722c0e097}}
V MediaWiki 1.27.0 a 1.27.1 byla autodetekce změněna tak, aby upřednostňovala backend souboru.
V případě &lt;code&gt;'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;/code&gt; (výchozí) se použije backend souboru s cestou z {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}.
Pokud tato hodnota není nastavena (což je výchozí hodnota), použije se dočasný adresář určený operačním systémem.
Pokud nelze dočasný adresář detekovat, použije se jako záložní řešení backend databáze.
Toto bylo vráceno z 1.27.2 a 1.28.0 kvůli konfliktu souborů na sdílených hostitelích a bezpečnostním problémům (viz [[:phab:T127127|T127127]] a [[:phab:T161453|T161453]]).

=== Funkce backtrace ===
Pro lepší vizuální znázornění vrstev ukládání do mezipaměti je zde funkce backtrace toho, jaké metody se nazývají při načítání zprávy.
Vysvětlení každé vrstvy najdete v následujících částech.

* &lt;code&gt;Message::fetchMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;MessageCache::get()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;Language::getMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalisationCache::getSubitem()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LCStore::get()&lt;/code&gt;

=== MessageCache ===
Třída &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; je nejvyšší úrovní ukládání zpráv do mezipaměti.
Je volána ze třídy Message a vrací konečný nezpracovaný obsah zprávy.
Tato vrstva zpracovává následující logiku:

* Kontrola přepsání zpráv v databázi
* Ukládání přepsaných zpráv do mezipaměti v {{ll|memcached}} nebo v čemkoli, na co je {{ll|Manual:$wgMessageCacheType|$wgMessageCacheType}} nastaveno
* Vyřešení zbytku sekvence [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|jazykové rezervy]]

Poslední odrážka je důležitá.
[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|Jazyková rezerva]] (language fallbacks) umožňuje MediaWiki použít jiný jazyk, pokud originál neobsahuje požadovanou zprávu.
Jak je zmíněno v další části, většina jazykových řešení se vyskytuje na nižší úrovni.
Pouze vrstva &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; však kontroluje, zda v databázi nejsou přepsané zprávy.
Zde se tedy provádí integrace přepsaných zpráv z databáze do záložního řetězce.
Pokud databázi nepoužíváte, lze celou tuto vrstvu zakázat.

=== LocalisationCache ===

Viz {{ll|Manual:LocalisationCache.php|LocalisationCache.php}}

=== LCStore ===
Třída &lt;code&gt;LCStore&lt;/code&gt; je pouze implementací typu back-end, kterou používá třída LocalisationCache pro skutečné ukládání do mezipaměti a získávání zpráv.
Stejně jako třída &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt;, která se používá pro obecné ukládání do mezipaměti v MediaWiki, existuje řada různých typů mezipaměti (konfigurovaných pomocí [[Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf]]):
* &quot;db&quot; (výchozí) - ukládá zprávy do mezipaměti v databázi
* &quot;file&quot; (výchozí, pokud je nastaveno &lt;code&gt;$wgCacheDirectory&lt;/code&gt;) - používá [[w:cdb (software)|CDB]] k ukládání zpráv do mezipaměti v místním souboru
* &quot;accel&quot; - k ukládání dat používá [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|APC]] nebo jinou mezipaměť operačních kódů

Možnost &quot;file&quot; používá Wikimedia Foundation a je doporučena, protože je rychlejší než přechod do databáze a spolehlivější než mezipaměť APC, zejména proto, že APC není kompatibilní s PHP verze 5.5 nebo novější.

{{anchor|Adding new messages}}
== Přidávání nových zpráv ==

=== Výběr klíče zprávy ===

Viz také:
{{ll|Manual:Coding conventions#System messages}}

Klíč zprávy musí být globálně jedinečný.
To zahrnuje jádro MediaWiki a všechna rozšíření a vzhledy.

V názvech zpráv se držte malých písmen, číslic a pomlček; většina ostatních znaků je mezi méně praktickými nebo nefungujícími vůbec.
Podle konvence MediaWiki první znak nerozlišuje velká a malá písmena a ostatní znaky rozlišují malá a velká písmena.

Při pojmenovávání prosím dodržujte globální nebo místní konvence.
U předpon použijte standardní prefix, nejlépe název předpony psaný malými písmeny, za kterým následuje pomlčka (&quot;-&quot;).
Výjimky jsou:

; Zprávy používané rozhraním API : Musí začínat znaky &lt;code&gt;apihelp-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apiwarn-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apierror-&lt;/code&gt;. Za tuto předponu vložte předponu rozšíření. (Všimněte si, že tyto zprávy by měly být v samostatném souboru, obvykle pod [[phab:source/mediawiki/browse/master/includes/api/i18n/|includes/i18/api]].)
; Zprávy související s protokolem : Musí začínat znaky &lt;code&gt;logentry-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;název-logu-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;popis-logu&lt;/code&gt;.
; Uživatelská práva : Klíč pro název práva, jak je zobrazen na Special:ListGroupRights, musí začínat &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt;. Název akce, která doplňuje větu &quot;{{int|Permissionserrorstext-withaction|unused}}&quot; musí začínat &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt;.
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Revisions tags&lt;/span&gt; : Značky revizí musí začínat &lt;code&gt;tag-&lt;/code&gt;.
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Special page titles&lt;/span&gt; : Speciální názvy stránek musí začínat &lt;code&gt;special-&lt;/code&gt;.

=== Další věci, které je třeba vzít v úvahu při vytváření zpráv ===

# Ujistěte se, že pro zprávu používáte vhodné zpracování (analýzu, nahrazení &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, escapování pro HTML atd.)
# Pokud je vaše zpráva součástí jádra, měla by být obvykle přidána k &lt;code&gt;languages/i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt;, ačkoli některé součásti, jako je Installer, EXIF tagy a ApiHelp, mají své vlastní soubory zpráv.
# Pokud je vaše zpráva v rozšíření, přidejte ji do souboru &lt;code&gt;i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt; nebo &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; v příslušném podadresáři. Zejména zprávy API, které vidí pouze vývojáři a ne většina koncových uživatelů, jsou obvykle v samostatném souboru, například &lt;code&gt;i18n/api/en.json&lt;/code&gt;. Pokud má rozšíření mnoho zpráv, můžete vytvořit podadresáře pod &lt;code&gt;i18n&lt;/code&gt;. Všechny adresáře zpráv, včetně výchozího &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt;, musí být uvedeny v sekci &lt;code&gt;MessagesDirs&lt;/code&gt; v &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; nebo v proměnné {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}}.
# Udělejte si pauzu a zvažte znění zprávy. Je to co nejjasnější? Může to být špatně pochopeno? Pokud je to možné, vyžádejte si komentáře od jiných vývojářů nebo lokalizátorů. Postupujte podle [[#Internationalisation hints|Internacionalizačních rad]].
# Přidejte dokumentaci do &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; ve stejném adresáři.
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The sequence of the messages in the file should roughly conform to the features of your project. Put messages from the same feature next to each other. This helps translators stay focused and be efficient and consistent.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Put the messages that are expected to be the most basic and the most frequently used in the beginning of the file, and the messages that are rarer and more technically advanced towards the end.&lt;/span&gt;


== Zprávy, které by se neměly překládat ==

# '''Ignored''' (ignorované) zprávy jsou ty, které by měly existovat pouze v anglickém souboru zpráv. Jsou to zprávy, které by neměly vyžadovat překlad, protože odkazují pouze na jiné zprávy nebo jazykově neutrální funkce, ''např.'' zprávu &quot;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.
# '''Optional''' (volitelné) zprávy mohou být přeloženy pouze v případě, že jsou změněny v cílovém jazyce.

Označení takových zpráv:

* použijte šablonu v dokumentaci ke zprávě &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt;, tj
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Notranslate|notranslate]]}}&lt;/code&gt; nebo
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Optional|optional]]}}&lt;/code&gt;;
* řekněte rozšíření {{ll|Extension:Translate|nsp=0}} používanému na {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}, co má dělat se zprávami, a to odesláním opravy s uvedením příslušného seznamu (viz také {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Group configuration/MediaWiki|úplné konfigurační dokumenty}}):
** pro jádro přidejte klíče zpráv do {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/MediaWiki.yaml}}
**# pod &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;ignored:&lt;/code&gt; nebo
**# pod &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;optional:&lt;/code&gt;;
** pro rozšíření v {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/mediawiki-extensions.txt}} přidejte pod název rozšíření řádek jako
**# &lt;code&gt;ignored = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt; or
**# &lt;code&gt;optional = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt;.

== Odebírání existujících zpráv ==
Odstraňte ji z &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;.
Neobtěžujte se jinými jazyky.
Aktualizace z {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} je zpracují automaticky.

Kromě toho zkontrolujte, zda se zpráva objeví kdekoli v konfiguraci translatewiki, například v seznamu volitelných nebo nejpoužívanějších zpráv (měl by stačit jednoduchý git grep).
V případě potřeby jej z těchto seznamů odstraňte.

== Změna existujících zpráv ==

# Zvažte aktualizaci [[#Message documentation|dokumentace zprávy]].
# Změňte klíč zprávy, pokud staré překlady nejsou vhodné pro nový význam. To zahrnuje také změny ve zpracování zpráv (parsování, escapování, parametry atd.). Zlepšení frázování zprávy bez technických změn obvykle není důvodem pro změnu klíče. Na translatewiki.net budou překlady označeny jako zastaralé, aby na ně mohli cílit překladatelé. Změna klíče zprávy nevyžaduje komunikaci s týmem i18n nebo podání žádosti o podporu. Pokud však máte zvláštní okolnosti nebo dotazy, zeptejte se na {{irc|translatewiki}} nebo na [[translatewiki:Support|stránce podpory]] na {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}.
# Pokud rozšíření podporuje {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}}, změňte prosím pouze anglickou zdrojovou zprávu anebo klíč a doprovodný záznam v &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;. V případě potřeby se tým translatewiki.net postará o aktualizaci překladů, označí je jako zastaralé, vyčistí soubor nebo přejmenuje klíče tam, kde je to možné. To platí také v případě, že měníte pouze věci, jako jsou značky HTML, které byste mohli změnit v jiných jazycích, aniž byste těmito jazyky mluvili. Většina z těchto akcí proběhne v [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]] a dorazí do Gitu s přibližně jednodenním  zpožděním.

{{anchor|Message documentation}}
== Dokumentace zprávy ==
Pro dokumentaci zpráv existuje pseudojazykový kód &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt;.
Je to jeden z kódů ISO 639 vyhrazený pro soukromé použití.
Tam neuchováváme překlady každé zprávy, ale shromažďujeme anglické věty ''o každé zprávě'': Říká nám, kde se používá, dává rady, jak ji přeložit, a vyjmenovává a popisuje její parametry, odkazuje na související zprávy a tak dále.
Na [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]] se tyto rady zobrazují překladatelům, když upravují zprávy.

Programátoři musí zdokumentovat každou zprávu.
Dokumentace zpráv je nezbytným zdrojem – nejen pro překladatele, ale pro všechny správce modulu.
Kdykoli je do softwaru přidána zpráva, ''musí'' být přidána také odpovídající položka &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt;. Revize, které tak nečiní, jsou označeny &quot;&lt;code&gt;V-1&lt;/code&gt;&quot;, dokud nebude přidána dokumentace.

Dokumentace v souborech &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; by měla být upravována přímo pouze při přidávání nových zpráv nebo při změně existující anglické zprávy způsobem, který vyžaduje změnu dokumentace, například přidání nebo odebrání parametrů.
V ostatních případech by měla být dokumentace obvykle upravována v translatewiki.
Každý dokumentační řetězec je přístupný na &lt;nowiki&gt;https://translatewiki.net/wiki/MediaWiki:&lt;/nowiki&gt;''message-key''&lt;nowiki&gt;/qqq&lt;/nowiki&gt;, jako by to byl překlad.
Tyto úpravy budou exportovány do zdrojových úložišť spolu s překlady.

Mezi užitečné informace, které by měly být v dokumentaci, patří:

# Práce se zprávami (analýza, escapování, prostý text).
# Typ parametrů s ukázkovými hodnotami.
# Kde je zpráva použita (stránky, umístění v uživatelském rozhraní).
# Jak se zpráva používá tam, kde je použita (název stránky, text tlačítka, ''atd.'').
# Jaké další zprávy se používají spolu s touto zprávou nebo na které další zprávy se tato zpráva vztahuje.
# Cokoli jiného, co lze pochopit, když je zpráva viděna v kontextu, ale ne, když je zpráva zobrazena samostatně (což je případ, kdy je překládána).
# Případně poznámky o gramatice. Například &quot;open&quot; v angličtině může být sloveso i přídavné jméno. V mnoha jiných jazycích se slova liší a je nemožné uhodnout, jak je přeložit bez dokumentace.
# Přídavná jména, která popisují věci, jako je &quot;disabled&quot; (zakázáno), &quot;open&quot; (otevřeno) nebo &quot;blocked&quot; (blokováno), musí ''vždy'' říkat, co popisují. V mnoha jazycích musí mít přídavná jména rod podstatného jména, které popisují. Může se také stát, že různé druhy věcí potřebují různá přídavná jména.
# Pokud má zpráva speciální vlastnosti, například pokud se jedná o název stránky, nebo pokud by neměla být přímým překladem, ale měla by být přizpůsobena kultuře nebo projektu.
# Zda se zpráva objeví v souvislosti s jinou zprávou, například v seznamu nebo v nabídce. Znění nebo gramatické rysy slov by pravděpodobně měly být podobné se souvisejícími zprávami. Položky v seznamu by měly také správně souviset se záhlavím seznamu.
# Části zprávy, které se nesmí překládat, jako jsou názvy obecných jmenných prostorů, adresy URL nebo značky.
# Vysvětlení potenciálně nejasných slov, například zkratky, jako je &quot;CTA&quot; nebo konkrétní žargon, jako &quot;template&quot; (šablona), &quot;suppress&quot; (potlačit) nebo &quot;stub&quot; (útržek). (Všimněte si, že je nejlepší se takovým slovům v první řadě vyhnout!)
# Snímky obrazovek (creenshot) jsou velmi užitečné. Neořezávejte – obrázek celé obrazovky, na kterém se zpráva zobrazuje, poskytuje úplný kontext a lze jej znovu použít v několika zprávách.

Několik dalších tipů:

* Pamatujte, že překladatelé velmi, velmi často překládají zprávy, aniž by skutečně používali software.
* Překladatelé většinou nemají žádné kontextové informace, ani o vašem modulu, ani o jiných zprávách v něm.
* Samotná přeformulovaná zpráva je ve většině případů k ničemu.
* Nepoužívejte žargon návrhářů jako &quot;nav&quot; nebo &quot;comps&quot;.
* Zvažte sepsání [[betawiki:Terminology#Terminologies|glosáře]] technických termínů, které se používají ve vašem modulu. Pokud to uděláte, odkažte na něj v dokumentace zpráv.

Na další zprávy můžete odkazovat pomocí {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;{{((}}msg-mw{{!}}message key{{))}}&lt;/code&gt;|klíče zprávy}}.
Udělejte to prosím, pokud části zpráv pocházejí z jiných zpráv (pokud tomu nelze zabránit), nebo pokud jsou některé zprávy zobrazeny společně nebo ve stejném kontextu.

translatewiki.net poskytuje některé výchozí šablony pro dokumentaci:

* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-action|doc-action]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pro zprávy &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-right|doc-right]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pro zprávy &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-group|doc-group]]|[...]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pro zprávy kolem skupin uživatelů (&lt;code&gt;group&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;member&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;page&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;js&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;css&lt;/code&gt; )
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-accesskey|doc-accesskey]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - pro zprávy &lt;code&gt;accesskey-&lt;/code&gt;

Pro více informací se podívejte na stránky šablon.

{{anchor|Internationalisation hints}}
== Internacionalizační rady ==
Kromě [[#Message documents|dokumentace]] překladatelé žádají vývojáře, aby zvážili některé rady, které by jim usnadnily a zefektivnily práci a umožnily skutečnou a dobrou lokalizaci pro všechny jazyky.
I když pouze přidáváte nebo upravujete zprávy v angličtině, měli byste si být vědomi potřeb všech jazyků. Každá zpráva je přeložena do více než 300 jazyků a to by mělo být provedeno co nejlepším způsobem.
Správná implementace těchto rad vám velmi často pomůže psát lepší zprávy také v angličtině.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Help_and_contact_info|Localisation#Help_and_contact_info]] lists the main places where you can find the assistance of experienced and knowledgeable people regarding i18n.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Use Message parameters and switches properly ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
That's a prerequisite of a correct wording for your messages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Avoid message re-use ===
&lt;/div&gt;
Překladatelé odrazují od opětovného použití zpráv.
To se může zdát neintuitivní, protože kopírování a duplikování kódu je obvykle špatný postup, ale v systémových zprávách je to často potřebné.
Ačkoli lze dva pojmy vyjádřit stejným slovem v angličtině, nemusí to nutně znamenat, že je lze vyjádřit stejným slovem v každém jazyce.
Dobrým příkladem je &quot;OK&quot;: V angličtině se používá pro obecný štítek tlačítka, ale v některých jazycích dávají přednost použití štítku tlačítka souvisejícího s operací, kterou tlačítko provede.
Dalším příkladem je prakticky jakékoli přídavné jméno: Slovo jako &quot;multiple&quot; se v mnoha jazycích mění podle pohlaví, takže jej nemůžete znovu použít k popisu několika různých věcí a musíte vytvořit několik samostatných zpráv.

Pokud přidáváte více identických zpráv, přidejte dokumentaci ke zprávě, která popisuje rozdíly v jejich kontextech.
Nebojte se práce navíc pro překladatele.
Překladová paměť v tom hodně pomáhá a zároveň si zachovává v případě potřeby flexibilitu pro různé překlady.

{{anchor|Avoid_patchwork_messages|Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages}}
=== Vyhněte se fragmentovaným nebo 'patchworkovým' (slátaninám) zprávám ===
Jazyky mají různé slovosledy a různě složitá gramatická a syntaktická pravidla.
Je velmi těžké přeložit &quot;lego&quot; zprávy, tedy zprávy tvořené více kusy textu, případně s určitým nepřímým způsobem (také nazývané &quot;řetězec řetězců&quot;).

Je lepší udělat z každé zprávy jednu úplnou frázi.
Několik vět lze v případě potřeby obvykle mnohem snadněji spojit do textového bloku.
Chcete-li v jedné zprávě zkombinovat několik řetězců, předejte je jako parametry, protože překladatelé je mohou při překladu pro svůj jazyk správně seřadit.

==== Zprávy, které se navzájem citují ====
Výjimkou z pravidla mohou být zprávy, které na sebe odkazují: 'Zadejte jméno původního autora do pole označeného &quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot; a klikněte na &quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:proceed}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot; pro dokončení'.
Díky tomu je zpráva konzistentní, když vývojář softwaru nebo provozovatel wiki později změní &quot;name&quot; (jméno) nebo &quot;proceed&quot; (pokračovat).
Bez tohoto int-triku by si vývojáři a operátoři museli být vědomi všech souvisejících zpráv, které je třeba upravit, když se cokoli změní.

=== Nepoužívejte termíny a šablony, které jsou specifické pro konkrétní projekty ===
MediaWiki používají velmi různorodí lidé v rámci hnutí Wikimedie i mimo něj.
Přestože byla původně vytvořena pro encyklopedii, nyní se používá pro různé druhy obsahu.
Používejte proto obecné výrazy.
Vyhněte se například výrazům jako &quot;article&quot; (článek) a místo toho použijte &quot;page&quot; (stránka), pokud si nejste absolutně jisti, že funkce, kterou vyvíjíte, bude použita pouze na webu, kde se stránky nazývají &quot;articles&quot; (články).
Nepoužívejte &quot;village pump&quot;, což je název stránky komunity na anglické Wikipedii, a místo toho používejte obecný termín, například &quot;community discussion page&quot; (diskusní stránka komunity).

Nepředpokládejte, že určitá šablona existuje na všech wiki.
Šablony jsou pro wiki lokální.
To platí jak pro zdrojové zprávy, tak pro jejich překlady.
Pokud zprávy používají šablony, budou fungovat pouze tehdy, pokud je šablona vytvořena na ''každé'' wiki, kde je funkce nasazena.
Nejlepší je úplně se vyhnout používání šablon ve zprávách.
Pokud je opravdu musíte použít, musíte to jasně zdokumentovat v dokumentaci ke zprávě a v pokynech k instalaci rozšíření.

=== Oddělte časy od dat ve větách ===
Některé jazyky musí mezi datum a čas vložit něco, co gramaticky závisí na jiných slovech ve větě.
Nebudou tedy moci používat kombinaci data a času.
Ostatním se může tato kombinace zdát vhodná, proto je obvykle nejlepší volbou v takových případech zadat tři hodnoty parametrů (datum/čas, datum, čas) a v každém překladu ponechat buď první, nebo poslední dvě podle potřeby nevyužité.

=== Vyhněte se &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; ve zprávách ===
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; má několik nevýhod.
Může to být cokoliv (akronym, slovo, krátká fráze, ''atd.'') a v závislosti na jazyce může vyžadovat použití &lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Messages_API#…on use context inside sentences via GRAMMAR|&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/code&gt; při každém výskytu.
Bez ohledu na to, každá zpráva s &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; bude vyžadovat kontrolu ve většině jazyků wiki pro každou novou wiki, na které je nainstalován váš kód.
Ve většině případů, kdy pro jazyk neexistuje obecná konfigurace &lt;code&gt;GRAMMAR&lt;/code&gt;, budou muset operátoři wiki přidat nebo upravit kód PHP tak, aby fungovali &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; pro &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
To vyžaduje více dovedností a více porozumění než v jiném případě.
Je vhodnější mít obecné odkazy jako &quot;this wiki&quot; (tato wiki).
To sice instalacím nebrání lokálně měnit tyto zprávy tak, aby používaly &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, ale alespoň nemusí a mohou odložit přizpůsobení zpráv, dokud wiki již nebude spuštěna a používána.

=== Vyhněte se odkazům na vizuální rozvržení a pozice ===
Co se kde vykreslí, závisí na vzhledech.
Rozvržení obrazovky jazyků psaných zleva doprava jsou nejčastěji zrcadlená ve srovnání s těmi, která se používají pro jazyky psané zprava doleva, ale ne vždy a u některých jazyků a wiki ne úplně.
Ruční zařízení, úzká okna a tak dále mohou pod sebou zobrazovat bloky, které by se na větších displejích objevovaly vedle sebe.
Vzhledem k tomu, že skripty a miniaplikace JavaScriptu psané webem a uživatelem mohou a také budou skrývat části nebo přesouvat věci nepředvídatelným způsobem, neexistuje žádný spolehlivý způsob, jak zjistit skutečné rozvržení.

Je nesprávné spojovat informace o rozvržení s jazyky obsahu, protože jazyk uživatelského rozhraní nemusí být jazykem obsahu stránky a rozvržení může být v závislosti na okolnostech kombinací obou.
Nevizuální uživatelské agenty, jako jsou akustické čtečky obrazovky a další pomocná zařízení, ani nemají koncept vizuálního rozvržení.
Proto byste se ve většině případů neměli odkazovat na pozice vizuálního rozvržení, ačkoli termíny sémantického rozvržení mohou být stále použity (&quot;předchozí kroky ve formuláři&quot; ''atd.'').

MediaWiki nepodporuje zobrazování různých zpráv nebo fragmentů zpráv na základě aktuální směrovosti rozhraní (viz [[phab:T30997|T30997]]).

Připravovaná podpora prohlížeče a MediaWiki pro psaní shora dolů ve východní a severní Asii&lt;ref&gt;http://dev.w3.org/csswg/css3-writing-modes/&lt;/ref&gt; způsobí, že rozložení obrazovky bude ještě nepředvídatelnější, alespoň osm možných rozložení (levá/pravá výchozí pozice, horní/dolní výchozí pozice a to, co nastane jako první).

=== Vyhněte se odkazům na barvy obrazovky ===
Barva, ve které je něco vykresleno, závisí na mnoha faktorech, včetně vzhledů, skriptů a gadgetů JavaScript napsaných webem a uživatelem a přepisů místního uživatelského agenta z důvodu dostupnosti nebo technologických omezení.
Nevizuální uživatelské agenty, jako jsou akustické čtečky obrazovky a další pomocná zařízení, nemají ani koncept barev.
Proto byste neměli odkazovat na barvy obrazovky.
(Ze stejného důvodu byste se také neměli spoléhat pouze na barvu jako na mechanismus informování uživatele o stavu.)

=== Mějte prvky zprávy před a za každým vstupním polem ===

:''Toto je doporučený návod, který se nestal standardem ve vývoji MediaWiki''

Zatímco angličtina umožňuje efektivní využití dotazování ve formuláři položka–dvojtečka–mezera–vstupní pole, mnoho jiných jazyků to tak nemá.
I v angličtině často používáte &quot;Vzdálenost: ___ metrech&quot; spíše než &quot;Vzdálenost (v metrech): ___&quot;.
Ponecháme-li prvky {{tag|textarea|open}} stranou, měli byste myslet na každé vstupní pole podle vzoru &quot;Vzdálenost: ___ metrů&quot;. Tak:

* vytvořte dvě zprávy, i když bude 2. v angličtině a některých dalších jazycích prázdná, nebo
* povolte umístění vstupů pomocí parametrů &lt;code&gt;$i&lt;/code&gt;.
=== Vyhněte se nepřeloženým značkám HTML ve zprávách ===
Značky HTML, které nevyžadují překlad, jako je uzavření {{tag|div|open}}, pravítka nad nebo pod a podobně, by obvykle neměly být součástí zpráv.
Zbytečně zatěžují překladatele, zvětšují velikost souboru zpráv a představují riziko náhodné změny nebo přeskočení v procesu překladu.
Obecně se ve zprávách vyhněte raw HTML, pokud můžete.

=== Zprávy jsou často delší, než si myslíte! ===

Při procházení souborů zpráv v cizích jazycích téměř nikdy nenajdete zprávy kratší než ty čínské, zřídka kratší než ty anglické a obvykle mnohem delší než ty anglické.

Zejména ve formulářích před vstupními poli bývají anglické zprávy stručné a krátké.
To se v překladech často neuchovává.
Jazyky mohou postrádat technickou slovní zásobu v angličtině a mohou vyžadovat více slov nebo dokonce celé věty k vysvětlení některých pojmů.
Například krátká anglická zpráva &quot;TSV file:&quot; může být přeložena do jazyka doslovně:
&lt;blockquote&gt;''Sem zadejte název, který označuje sbírku počítačových dat, která se skládá z postupně organizovaných sérií strojopisných řádků, které jsou samy o sobě organizovány jako série informačních polí, kde jsou uvedená pole informací ohraničena a ohraničení mezi nimi jsou jediné znaky toho druhu, které posouvají vozík psacího stroje dále do další předem definované polohy. Tady to je: _____ (děkuji)''&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Toto je, pravda, extrémní příklad, ale tuto možnost máte.
Představte si tuto větu ve sloupci ve tvaru, kde každé slovo zabírá vlastní řádek a vstupní pole je svisle vystředěno v dalším sloupci. :-(

=== Nepoužívejte velmi blízká, podobná nebo identická slova k označení různých věcí nebo pojmů ===
Stránky mohou mít například starší ''revize'' (konkrétního data, času a úprav), zahrnující minulé ''verze'' uvedené stránky.
Slova ''revize'' a ''verze'' lze používat zaměnitelně.
Problém nastává, když jsou verzované stránky revidovány a také se zmiňuje revize, ''tj.'' proces jejich revize.
To nemusí představovat vážný problém, když dvě synonyma &quot;revize&quot; mají různé překlady.
Na to však nespoléhejte.
Je tedy lepší se použití &quot;revize&quot; ''aka'' &quot;verze&quot; úplně vyhnout, aby nedošlo k jeho nesprávné interpretaci.

=== Základní slova mohou mít nepředvídatelné konotace nebo vůbec neexistují ===
Některá slova se těžko překládají kvůli jejich velmi specifickému použití v MediaWiki.
Některá možná [[#Expect untranslated words|nebudou přeložena vůbec]].
Například v několika jazycích neexistuje slovo &quot;uživatel&quot; (user) vztahující se k &quot;někomu, kdo něco používá&quot;.
Podobně v [[:en:Colognian language|Kölsch]] anglická slova &quot;namespace&quot; a &quot;apartment&quot; se překládají jako stejné slovo.
Také v Kölsch říkají stejným slovem &quot;corroborator and participant&quot; (potvrzující a účastník), protože jakýkoli odkaz na &quot;use&quot; (použití) by příliš silně znamenal &quot;abuse&quot; (zneužívání).
Termín &quot;wiki farma&quot; se překládá jako &quot;stáj plná wiki&quot;, protože farma s jednou plodinou by byla v rozporu s termíny v jazyce a nepochopena, ''atd.''.

{{anchor|Expect untranslated words}}
=== Očekávejte nepřeložená slova ===

:''Toto je doporučený návod, který se ještě nestal standardem ve vývoji MediaWiki''

Není neobvyklé, že vlastní jména, názvy značek, ''atd.'' v počítačové angličtině nejsou překládány a místo toho jsou brány jako přejatá nebo cizí slova.
V jiném případě mohou někteří zvláště nároční překladatelé označit taková slova jako slova patřící do jiného jazyka pomocí značek HTML, například &lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot;&gt; … &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight &gt;.

Možná budete chtít zvážit zajištění toho, aby váš obslužný program pro výstup zpráv předal takové označení beze změny, navzdory zjevným bezpečnostním rizikům.

=== Povolit vysvětlující vložené značky ===

:''Toto je doporučený návod, který se ještě nestal standardem ve vývoji MediaWiki''

Někdy se v cílových jazycích vyskytují zkratky, odborné výrazy nebo obecně nejednoznačná slova, kterým nováčci nemusí hned porozumět, ale zkušeným uživatelům počítačů jsou zřejmé.
Aby se překladatelé vyhnuli změti obrazovky zdlouhavými vysvětlivkami, aniž by nechali nováčky ve štychu, mohou se překladatelé rozhodnout přidat vysvětlení jako {{tag|abbr|open}} anotace, které prohlížeče zobrazí, když na ně najedete myší.

Například základní zpráva MediaWiki &lt;code&gt;exif-orientation-8&lt;/code&gt; o rotaci obrázku, která je v angličtině jednoduše &quot;&lt;code&gt;Rotated 90° CW&lt;/code&gt;&quot;, v marocké arabštině je přeložena jako:

:&lt;code lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &amp;lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&amp;lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/code&gt;

dává:

:&lt;span lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/span&gt;

vysvětlení zkratky pro &quot;proti směru hodinových ručiček&quot;, když je potřeba.

Možná budete chtít zvážit zajištění toho, aby vaše obsluha výstupu zprávy předala takové označení beze změny, i když je původní zpráva nepoužívá.

=== V případě potřeby použijte značky {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}} a {{tag|kbd|open}} ===
Když mluvíte o technických parametrech, hodnotách nebo vstupech z klávesnice, označte je jako takové vhodně pomocí značek HTML {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}} nebo {{tag|kbd|open}}.
Jsou tedy typograficky odsazeny od běžného textu.
To čtenářům vyjasní jejich smysl a zabrání zmatkům, chybám a chybným prohlášením.
Ujistěte se, že vaše zpracování zpráv umožňuje takové označení.

=== Symboly, dvojtečky, závorky, ''atd.'' jsou součástí zpráv ===
Mnoho symbolů je také lokalizovatelných. Některá písma mají jiné druhy závorek než latinka.
V některých jazycích nemusí být po štítku nebo výzvě k zadání dvojtečka vhodná.
Začlenění těchto symbolů do zpráv pomáhá vytvářet lepší a méně anglo-centrické překlady a také snižuje změť kódu.

Například v «norštině», »švédštině», »dánštině«, »němčině« a «japonštině» se používají různé konvence uvozovek.&lt;ref&gt;[[w:Quotation_mark#Summary_table]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Pokud potřebujete zalomit nějaký text do lokalizovaných závorek, hranatých závorek nebo uvozovek, můžete použít &lt;code&gt;parentheses&lt;/code&gt; {{int:parentheses}} nebo &lt;code&gt;brackets&lt;/code&gt; {{int:brackets}} nebo &lt;code&gt;quotation-marks&lt;/code&gt; {{int:quotation-marks}} zprávy jako takto:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php&gt;wfMessage( 'parentheses' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside parentheses */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'brackets' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside brackets */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'quotation-marks' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside quotation marks */ )-&gt;escaped()&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Neočekávejte, že symboly a interpunkce přežijí překlad ===
Jazyky psané zprava doleva (na rozdíl od angličtiny) obvykle zaměňují symboly šipek prezentované s odkazy &quot;next&quot; (další) a &quot;previous&quot; (předchozí) a jejich umístění vzhledem k textu zprávy může, ale také nemusí být převráceno.
Elipsis může být přeloženo jako &quot;''atd.''&quot; nebo jako slova.
Otazníky, vykřičníky, dvojtečky budou umístěny jinde než na konci věty, vůbec a nebo dvakrát.
V důsledku toho vždy zahrňte všechny do textu svých zpráv a nikdy se nepokoušejte je vkládat programově.

=== Použijte tečky ===
'''Do''' ukončete normální věty tečkami.
To je pro překladatele často jediný ukazatel, podle kterého pozná, že se nejedná o titulky nebo položky seznamu, které může být potřeba přeložit jinak.

=== Odkazové kotvy ===

==== Odkazy Wikitextu ====

Kotvy odkazů lze do zpráv vložit několika technickými způsoby:

# přes wikitext: …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;''stránka wiki''|''kotva''&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…,
# přes wikitext: …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;[''nějaká-URL'' ''kotva'']&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…, or
# text kotvy je zpráva ve jmenném prostoru MediaWiki. ''Vyhněte se tomu!''

To druhé je pro překladatele často obtížné nebo nemožné zvládnout, [[#Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages|vyvarujte se fragmentovaných nebo 'chaotickým' zprávám]] i zde.
Ujistěte se, že &quot;&lt;code&gt;nějaká-URL&lt;/code&gt;&quot; neobsahuje mezery.

==== Použijte smysluplné kotvy odkazů ====
Dejte si pozor na svou formulaci.
Odkazové kotvy hrají důležitou roli při hodnocení stránek vyhledávači – jak slova propojená, tak cílová kotva.
Ujistěte se, že kotva dobře popisuje cílovou stránku.
Vždy se vyhněte běžným a obecným slovům.
Například &quot;Click here&quot; (klikněte sem) je absolutně zákázáno,&lt;ref&gt;http://www.w3.org/QA/Tips/noClickHere&lt;/ref&gt;, protože cílové stránky téměř nikdy nejsou o &quot;kliknutí sem&quot;.
Nedávejte to ani do vět kolem odkazů, protože &quot;sem&quot; nebylo místo, kam kliknout.
Místo toho použijte přesná akční slova, která říkají, k čemu se uživatel dostane, když bude následovat odkaz, jako například &quot;Můžete [[Special:Upload|nahrát soubor]], pokud si přejete.&quot;

Viz také ''[http://www.nngroup.com/articles/using-link-titles-to-help-users-predict-where-they-are-going/ Pomozte uživatelům předvídat, kam jdou]'', a [[w:Mystery meat navigation|tajemná navigace masa]] a ''[https://tosbourn.com/click-here/ Hlavní důvody, proč bychom neměli používat klikni sem jako text odkazu]''.

=== Vyhněte se žargonu a slangu ===
Vyhněte se ve zprávách žargonu vývojářů a zkušených uživatelů. Snažte se používat jednoduchý jazyk, kdykoli je to možné.
Pokud chcete uživatele upozornit, že se něco stalo nebo nestalo, neříkejte &quot;success&quot; (úspěch), &quot;successfully&quot; (úspěšně), &quot;fail&quot; (neúspěch), &quot;error occurred while&quot; (došlo k chybě) atd.
To vychází z pohledu vývojářů, kteří vidí všechno jako pravdivé nebo nepravdivé, ale uživatelé obvykle chtějí vědět, co se skutečně stalo nebo nestalo a co by s tím měli dělat (pokud vůbec). Tak:

* &quot;Soubor byl úspěšně přejmenován&quot; -&gt; &quot;Soubor byl přejmenován&quot;
* &quot;Přejmenování souboru se nezdařilo&quot; -&gt; &quot;Soubor s tímto názvem již existuje. Vyberte prosím jiný název.&quot;

=== Dejte si pozor na mezery a zalomení řádků ===
Lokalizované zprávy MediaWiki se obvykle upravují na wiki buď operacemi wiki na živých wiki nebo překladateli na [[translatewiki.net]].
Měli byste si být vědomi toho, jak mezery, zejména na začátku nebo konci vaší zprávy, ovlivní editory:

* Mezery a konce řádků (nové řádky) na konci zprávy jsou vždy automaticky odstraněny editorem wikitextu. Vaše zpráva nesmí končit mezerou nebo zalomením řádku, protože se při úpravě na wiki ztratí.
* Mezery a zalomení řádků na začátku nejsou automaticky odstraněny, ale pravděpodobně budou odstraněny náhodně během úprav a je třeba se jim vyhnout.

Začněte a ukončete svou zprávu aktivním textem; pokud kolem něj potřebujete zalomení nového řádku nebo odstavce, váš okolní kód by se měl vypořádat s jeho přidáním do vráceného textu.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are some messages which require a space at the end, such as 'word-separator' (which consists of just a space character in most languages).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To support such use cases, the following HTML entities are allowed in messages and transformed to the actual characters, even if the message otherwise doesn't allow wikitext or HTML formatting:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/REL1_34/includes/cache/MessageCache.php#L887&lt;/ref&gt;

* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#32;&lt;/code&gt; – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;space&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#160;&lt;/code&gt; – [[w:non-breaking space|non-breaking space]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;shy;&lt;/code&gt; – [[w:soft hyphen|soft hyphen]]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a related note, any other syntax elements affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/pre-save transforms|pre-save transforms]] also must not be used in messages, as they will be transformed when the message is edited on the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Použijte standardní velká písmena ===
Velká písmena překladatelům napoví, co překládají, jako jsou jednotlivá slova, položky seznamu nebo nabídky, fráze nebo celé věty.
Správná (standardní) velká písmena můžou také hrát roli při hodnocení vašich stránek vyhledávači.
MediaWiki používá [[w:Letter case|case case]] (''Rychlá hnědá liška skáče přes líného psa'') ve zprávách rozhraní.

Vždy si pamatujte, že mnoho psacích systémů vůbec nemá velká písmena a některé z těch, které je mají, je používají jinak než angličtina.
Proto pro zdůraznění nepoužívejte VŠECHNA VELKÁ PÍSMENA.
Použijte CSS nebo HTML {{tag|em|open}} nebo {{tag|strong|open}} níže:

==== Důraz ====
V normálním textu by měly být součástí textů zpráv [[w:Emphasis|emphasis]] '''tučné písmo''' nebo ''kurzíva'' a podobně.
Místní konvence v důrazu se často liší, zvláště některá asijská písma mají svá vlastní.
Překladatelé musí být schopni přizpůsobit důraz svým cílovým jazykům a oblastem.
Zkuste ve svém uživatelském rozhraní použít &quot;{{tag|em|open}}&quot; a &quot;{{tag|strong|open}}&quot;, abyste umožnili značkování podle jazyka nebo skriptu.

V moderních rozvrženích obrazovky v anglickém a evropském stylu se důraz používá méně.
Uveďte to ve své [[#Message documentation|dokumentaci zprávy]], protože to může poskytnout cenné rady, jak překládat.
Důraz může a měl by být podle potřeby použit v jiných kulturních kontextech za předpokladu, že o tom překladatelé vědí.

&lt;references /&gt;

== Související odkazy ==

* {{ll|Customization}}
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings}}
* {{ll|Manual:Skins}}
* {{ll|Manual:Messages API}}
* {{ll|Localisation}}
* [[translatewiki:FAQ]]

[[Category:Customization techniques{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:User interface{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Localisation{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:System message{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>e6suted075cfeo9pjlxpjw9aiy86con</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki/ru</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>418333</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401765</id>
      <parentid>5312698</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3995" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Многие из сотрудников ShoutWiki также являются [[developers|разработчиками]] MediaWiki. Смотрите [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ Сайт ShoutWiki] или  [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About страницу о ShoutWiki на ShoutWiki], чтобы узнать больше о ShoutWiki в целом.&lt;/span&gt;
У ShoutWiki также есть [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 своя группа Gerrit], которая состоит из разработчиков ShoutWiki.

== Расширения ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About О ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Информация о ShoutWiki с открытым исходным кодом]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — Различные патчи кода от ShoutWiki в MediaWiki-коде
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWiki's Github]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7rvecnrromlrzmwzw4dkyi5tkrsiur8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401782</id>
      <parentid>5401765</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3994" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Многие из сотрудников ShoutWiki также являются [[developers|разработчиками]] MediaWiki. Смотрите [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ Сайт ShoutWiki] или  [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About страницу о ShoutWiki на ShoutWiki], чтобы узнать больше о ShoutWiki в целом.&lt;/span&gt;
У ShoutWiki также есть [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 своя группа Gerrit], которая состоит из разработчиков ShoutWiki.

== Расширения ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About О ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Информация о ShoutWiki с открытым исходным кодом]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — Различные патчи кода от ShoutWiki в MediaWiki-коде
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWiki's Github]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>791p5ernvdnyi4qgs1ifjqqhj49tdul</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401883</id>
      <parentid>5401782</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3986" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Многие из сотрудников ShoutWiki также являются [[developers|разработчиками]] MediaWiki. Смотрите [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ Сайт ShoutWiki] или  [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About страницу о ShoutWiki на ShoutWiki], чтобы узнать больше о ShoutWiki в целом.&lt;/span&gt;
У ShoutWiki также есть [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 своя группа Gerrit], которая состоит из разработчиков ShoutWiki.

== Расширения ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About О ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Информация о ShoutWiki с открытым исходным кодом]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; Различные патчи кода от ShoutWiki в MediaWiki-коде
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWiki's Github]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2467h71xpg69i9vcm5mltv48kt819pf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Bouquet/ja</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>422773</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401863</id>
      <parentid>5214283</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:07:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2368" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Bouquet
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Automattic — 元のコード (PHP、CSS など)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWikiの移植
|description     = 
|image           = BouquetSkin.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.2.3
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=bouquet インターフェイス メッセージ ウィキ]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        =
|phabricator     = Bouquet
}}
'''Bouquet''' は、フリー、オープンソース、GPL ライセンスの WordPress テーマから移植された MediaWiki 外装です。
WordPressのテーマサイトでは「an elegant, simple theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; inspired by the beauty found in flowers」と記述されています。

WordPressのテーマはAutomatticによって書かれ、MediaWikiの移植は2014年1月11日に[[User:Jack Phoenix|ジャック・フェニックス]]によって[[ShoutWiki]]用に行われた。

==主な機能==

* '''2つの'''ナビゲーションポートレット &amp;mdash; ページの上部にあるカスタム、ドロップダウン・ベースのメニュー（&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Bouquet-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;）、および右側のサイドバーとしての&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;。
* 3 つの[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|テーマ]]:
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** forget-me-not (internal name (for the ''usetheme'' URL parameter and &lt;code&gt;$wgDefaultTheme&lt;/code&gt;) ''forgetmenot'')
&lt;/div&gt;
** ピンクのハナミズキ（社内名''pinkdogwood''）。
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** tiger lily (internal name ''tigerlily'')
&lt;/div&gt;
* カスタム ヘッダー/ロゴ画像 (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Bouquet-skin-logo.png]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;、1100x180 ピクセル)

==インストール==
{{SkinInstall
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]] &lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>jhykpsyw5aa14om3btuvha7ed7po7yf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Social tools/fr</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>425458</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401979</id>
      <parentid>4733772</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1611" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Outils sociaux}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Vue d’ensemble}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Informations pour les développeurs}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Captures d'écran}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Historique}}
|group2 = Autres extensions sociales
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = Dépend de SocialProfile
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = Autres extensions connexes&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(qui ne dépend pas de SocialProfile)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>0iwlja3gjf4wr97h6sr3wvo8ychxv0l</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401991</id>
      <parentid>5401979</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:10:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1612" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Outils sociaux}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Vue d’ensemble}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Informations pour les développeurs}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Captures d'écran}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Historique}}
|group2 = Autres extensions sociales
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = Dépend de SocialProfile
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = Autres extensions connexes&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(qui ne dépend pas de SocialProfile)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>tua0ua16j2vy9iu80zp615vpdsfuse9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/io</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>425680</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402434</id>
      <parentid>4983809</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:02:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7061" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Bonvenez a la portalo pri '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) esas nova voyo redaktar Wikipedio qua developesas da la ''Wikimedia Foundation''. Olu premisas redaktanti redaktar sen mustas lernar wiki-sintaxo. Ni esperas ke olu helpos redaktanti kontributar a Wikipedio.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Lektez '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Reportar problemo''' pri VisualEditor].
|-
| Trovez pri quale facar ligili, adjuntar o movar imaji, krear citaji, insertar shabloni, redaktar tabeli, e pluse.
|Voluntez inkluzar vua '''retosituilo, operaco-sistemo, e Wiki-temo''' (ofte Vector, kelka foye Monobook)
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Pri VisualEditor ==

VisualEditor esas &quot;vidala&quot; voyo redaktar Wikipedio. Redaktar Wikipedio olim bezonis redaktanti lernar wiki-sintaxo, qua esas komplexa sintaxo-linguo, mem facar mikra chanji a la pagino. En 2001, ica esis aceptebla; ma en 2015, olu esis [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|pulsas kontributanti fore]]. 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We expect to make it available by default to most of [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|the remaining languages]] in late 2015.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Uzar VisualEditor ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se vu esas interesis en uzas VisualEditor por redakto, ni havas [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guido facar ol]], ultre [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|listo di ordinara klavaro abreviuri]].
&lt;/div&gt;

VisualEditor havas poka problemi e limitizi. Se vu trovas problemo, [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportas olu an la Retroago pagino]]. Prezenta limitizi inkluzas:

* '''Lanta a charjas''' — Olu bezonas multa tempo, komplexa pagini a charjas aden VisualEditor. En la futuro la programo bezonos multo rapideska, e volos lasas por charjas di lajega pagini.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Incomplete editing''' — Some elements of complex formatting will display and let you edit their contents, but will not let users edit their structure or add new entries – such as definition lists. Adding features in this area is one of our priorities.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Most content pages, not talk pages''' — VisualEditor is only enabled for some namespaces.  At most Wikipedias, VisualEditor can be used on articles, User:, File:, Help: and Category: pages.  VisualEditor is not currently available for Wikipedia: pages or any talk pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

Ni rekomendis ke uzanti kliktas &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; ante sparas la pagino e [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reportas omna problemi li trovas]].

== Quale helpar ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For VisualEditor to be as good as it can be, there are a lot of things we need help with. Obviously, one big area is using the software, finding bugs and [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reporting them]], but there are many other tasks as well. These include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Updating help pages''' — All of our projects have help pages to make it easier for new users to contribute. Unfortunately they are all built around the markup editor, and as VisualEditor evolves, the screenshots and tutorials will all become outdated. It would be very useful if people could  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]], based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Adding TemplateData to templates''' — VisualEditor features a nice template editor, which is described in more detail on our [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|help page]]. As you'll see if you use it on Wikipedia, some templates have named parameters and nice descriptions that make it easy to use. Others do not. This is because templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; before this feature will work. If you're interested in adding TemplateData, we have [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]], along with a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Helpas vua socio''' —Vidas la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|listo di utila voyo helpar vua lokala-socio]] kande VisualEditor ofros kom Beta-programo.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help new users''' — If the VisualEditor launch is successful, we will have a lot more new users than we are used to, and even though editing may be easier, working out how to interact with the community will still be hard. Please spend some time [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]], to help these newcomers become acclimatized to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Videz anke==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>gk7a9yu3vwj65w7irz8p2ko00823rrd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/io</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>425906</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402433</id>
      <parentid>1883153</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:02:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="279" xml:space="preserve">Bonvenez a la portalo pri '''[[$ve|VisualEditor]]'''. VisualEditor (VE) esas nova voyo redaktar Wikipedio qua developesas da la ''Wikimedia Foundation''. Olu premisas redaktanti redaktar sen mustas lernar wiki-sintaxo. Ni esperas ke olu helpos redaktanti kontributar a Wikipedio.</text>
      <sha1>ib4s94s4zy288h8vii7tplv26zy8wtc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Bouquet/es</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>426914</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401862</id>
      <parentid>5214282</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:06:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2730" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Bouquet
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Automattic — código original (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki port&lt;/span&gt;
|description     = 
|image           = BouquetSkin.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.2.3
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=bouquet &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interface Messages Wiki&lt;/span&gt;]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        =
|phabricator     = Bouquet
}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Bouquet''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;an elegant, simple theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; inspired by the beauty found in flowers&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Bouquet-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Three [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|themes]]:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** forget-me-not (internal name (for the ''usetheme'' URL parameter and &lt;code&gt;$wgDefaultTheme&lt;/code&gt;) ''forgetmenot'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** pink dogwood (internal name ''pinkdogwood'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** tiger lily (internal name ''tigerlily'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom header/logo image (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Bouquet-skin-logo.png]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, 1100x180 pixels)
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Installation==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{SkinInstall
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]] &lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>0sqbeh2u76q0p4pexdzvugj4s1yy0zk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Social tools/ar</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>435547</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401977</id>
      <parentid>4429445</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1673" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=أدوات اجتماعية}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=نبذة}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=معلومات للمطورين}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=لقطات من الشاشة}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=التاريخ}}
|group2 = امتدادات اجتماعية أخرى
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = تعتمد على SocialProfile
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = امتدادات أخرى ذات صلة&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(التي لا تعتمد على SocialProfile)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>kkvowddxr25v5abd3rm1gnjum0o9rrz</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401988</id>
      <parentid>5401977</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:10:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1674" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=أدوات اجتماعية}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=نبذة}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=معلومات للمطورين}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=لقطات من الشاشة}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=التاريخ}}
|group2 = امتدادات اجتماعية أخرى
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = تعتمد على SocialProfile
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = امتدادات أخرى ذات صلة&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(التي لا تعتمد على SocialProfile)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>1ofocvxkkq8u5cfuz2n24et8evvpcln</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Project:Copyrights/3/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>436859</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401632</id>
      <parentid>1619542</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:46:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="137" xml:space="preserve">* As págjihoknas de ajuda de domínio público são, como o nome indica, publicadas em [[:pt:domínio público|domínio público]] (PD).</text>
      <sha1>bpo5y196i6t5symv6xqlnyom6wbbylt</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401637</id>
      <parentid>5401632</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:47:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="152" xml:space="preserve">* As págjihoknas de ajuda de domínio público são, como o nome indica, Mpublicadas h ky nhi aaj em [[:pjt:domínio público|domínio público]] (PD).</text>
      <sha1>iae53qygljpwmrzs41eexrrlokjykf5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401644</id>
      <parentid>5401637</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T14:01:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Clump</username>
        <id>81610</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12|2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12]] ([[User talk:2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12|talk]]) to last version by Fabsouza1</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="133" xml:space="preserve">* As páginas de ajuda de domínio público são, como o nome indica, publicadas em [[:pt:domínio público|domínio público]] (PD).</text>
      <sha1>fs6scrapdqprrbll3dlnpjy7ry0tn31</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Project:Copyrights/4/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>436860</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401635</id>
      <parentid>2491287</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:46:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="201" xml:space="preserve">* Todas as outras páginas são liberadas sob a licença [[w:Wikipedia:ti ok Text of Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported the Commons Attribmution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported]] (CC BY-SA).</text>
      <sha1>p3q44tsngmnpsci3rxnr100ky2kgyav</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401642</id>
      <parentid>5401635</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T14:01:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Clump</username>
        <id>81610</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12|2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12]] ([[User talk:2409:4051:4E88:E8E0:303A:FFFF:FE70:12|talk]]) to last version by Shirayuki</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="207" xml:space="preserve">* Todas as outras páginas são liberadas sob a licença [[w:Wikipedia:Text of Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License|Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported]] (CC BY-SA).</text>
      <sha1>rmi9jazfase8dv5izlpwmxn6pscmcpe</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/ps</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>441007</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402260</id>
      <parentid>5400751</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14120" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Languages
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===نېټه او وخت===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== دا هم وگورئ ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>pn9mw991ulyhq2v8smnls0gnjxn16g5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/de</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>443399</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402401</id>
      <parentid>5357851</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:50:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7437" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Willkommen auf dem Portal zum '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. Der von der Wikimedia Foundation entwickelte VisualEditor (VE) ist eine neue Art, die Wikipedia zu bearbeiten. Er erlaubt es, Seiten zu bearbeiten, ohne Wiki-Markup erlernen zu müssen. Wir hoffen, dass er Menschen dabei hilft, Beiträge für die Wikipedia zu schreiben.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' lesen.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Ein Problem melden''' über den VisualEditor].
|-
| Finde heraus, wie man Links erstellt, Bilder hinzufügt oder verschiebt, Einzelnachweise erstellt, Vorlagen hinzufügt, Tabellen bearbeitet und vieles andere mehr.
|Bitte gib deinen '''Webbrowser, Betriebssystem und Wikipedia-Skin''' (üblicherweise Vector, manchmal Monobook) an.
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Über den VisualEditor ==

Der VisualEditor ist eine „visuelle“ Art, die Wikipedia zu bearbeiten. Um Wikipedia zu bearbeiten, musste man ursprünglich Wiki-Markup erlernen, eine relativ komplexe Auszeichnungssprache, um selbst kleine Änderungen an einer Seite vorzunehmen. 2001 mag dies noch akzeptabel gewesen sein, 2015 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|vertreibt es jedoch Bearbeiter]]. Wir hoffen, dass der VisualEditor nützlich für bereits vorhandene Bearbeiter und einstiegsfreundlich für neue Nutzer sein wird. 

Der VisualEditor wurde als Opt-in-''Alpha'' ab Mitte 2012 auf MediaWiki.org verfügbar gemacht, auf der englischsprachigen Wikipedia ab Dezember 2012, in [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 weiteren Sprachen] ab April 2013 und in [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ fast allen anderen Sprachen] ab Anfang Juni 2013. Im Juli 2015 wurde er standardmäßig für alle ein- und ausgeloggten Bearbeitern von mehr als 75% Wikipedia-Sprachversionen freigeschaltet.
Wir erwarten, dass wir ihn standardmäßig in den meisten [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|der verbliebenen Länder]] Ende 2015 verfügbar machen können.
Seit Ende November 2014 ist er als optionale [[Beta Features|Beta-Funktion]] in allen WMF-Wikis verfügbar, außer Wiktionary und Wikisource.

Wir veröffentlichen einen [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|mehrsprachlichen monatlichen Newsletter]], der sich auf die WMF-Wikis bezieht.

== Den VisualEditor benutzen ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Falls du interessiert bist den VisualEditor für Bearbeitungen zu nutzen, dann empfehlen wir die Lektüre des [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Handbuchs]] und der [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Liste von häufig verwendeten Tastenkürzeln]].

Der VisualEditor besitzt einige Bugs und Einschränkungen. Falls dir solche auffallen, dann zögere nicht, diese auf der [[VisualEditor/Feedback|Feedback-Seite zu melden]]. Gegenwärtige Einschränkungen sind:

* '''Langsames Laden''' — Große und komplexe Seiten benötigen einige Zeit um im VisualEditor geladen zu werden. In Zukunft wird die Software viel schneller sein, um auch größere Seiten in angemessener Zeit laden zu können.
* '''Unvollständige Bearbeitungsmöglichkeiten''' — Einige Elemente von komplexen Formatierungen werden zwar angezeigt und ihr Inhalt kann bearbeitet werden, allerdings können Nutzer weder deren Struktur ändern noch neue Einträge hinzufügen, z.B. Definitionslisten. Zu unseren Prioritäten gehört es, diese Funktionalität bereitzustellen.
* '''Hauptsächlich Inhaltsseiten, keine Diskussionsseiten''' — Der VisualEditor ist nur für bestimmte Namensräume aktiviert. In den meisten Wikipedias kann der VisualEditor für Artikel und Seiten Benutzer-, Hilfe- und Kategorie-Namensräume verwendet werden. Der VisualEditor ist momentan nicht verfügbar für den Wikipedia-Namensraum oder Diskussionsseiten.

Wir empfehlen, dass Benutzer vor dem Speichern auf &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; klicken und eventuelle [[VisualEditor/Feedback|Probleme melden]].

== Wie kann ich aushelfen? ==

Damit der VisualEditor so gut wie möglich wird, brauchen wir noch viel Mithilfe. Dazu gehört natürlich, die Software zu benutzen, Fehler zu finden und [[VisualEditor/Feedback|diese zu melden]], aber auch viele weitere Aufgaben. Zu diesen gehören:

* '''Hilfeseiten aktualisieren''' — Jedes unserer Projekte besitzt Hilfeseiten, damit es neuen Nutzern erleichtert wird, beizutragen. Leider beziehen diese sich alle auf den herkömmlichen Wikicode-Editor und mit der Weiterentwicklung des VisualEditors veralten auch die Anleitungen und Screenshots. Es wäre daher sehr hilfreich wenn die [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|Hilfeseiten]] basierend auf unserem [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Handbuch zum VisualEditor]] aktualisiert werden würden.
* '''TemplateData zu Vorlagen hinzufügen''' — Der VisualEditor besitzt ein Vorlagenformular, das detailliert im [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Handbuch]] beschrieben ist. Wie man sehen kann, besitzen einzelne Vorlagen benannte Parameter und Beschreibungen, die beim Ausfüllen helfen. Allerdings gibt es auch Vorlagen, bei denen dies nicht der Fall ist, da diese noch &quot;TemplateData&quot; benötigen, damit diese Funktion verfügbar wird. Wenn du daran interessiert bist, TemplateData hinzuzufügen, dann bieten wir [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|dafür ein  Handbuch]], sowie eine [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|Liste der wichtigsten Vorlagen, die noch derartig ergänzt werden sollten]].
* '''Deiner Gemeinschaft helfen''' — Siehe folgende [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|Liste von sinnvollen Wegen, deiner lokalen Gemeinschaft zu helfen]], wenn der VisualEditor als optionale Beta-Funktion freigeschaltet wird.
* '''Neuen Nutzern helfen''' — Falls der VisualEditor-Start erfolgreich ist, werden wir viel mehr neue Nutzer bekommen, als wir gewohnt sind und - obwohl das Bearbeiten leichter wird -, wird der Erstkontakt mit der Gemeinschaft immer noch gleichermaßen schwer bleiben. Bitte nimm dir etwas Zeit in [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|Wikipedia:Fragen von Neulingen, Wikipedia:Fragen zur Wikipedia oder in den IRC-Hilfechannels]], um den Neulingen ihren Einstieg in Wikipedia zu erleichtern.

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>t2zq50zua1f21h3vz7mrrvf7asfk53o</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403002</id>
      <parentid>5402401</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7477" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Willkommen auf dem Portal zum '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. Der von der Wikimedia Foundation entwickelte VisualEditor (VE) ist eine neue Art, die Wikipedia zu bearbeiten. Er erlaubt es, Seiten zu bearbeiten, ohne Wiki-Markup erlernen zu müssen. Wir hoffen, dass er Menschen dabei hilft, Beiträge für die Wikipedia zu schreiben.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' lesen.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Ein Problem melden''' über den VisualEditor].
|-
| Finde heraus, wie man Links erstellt, Bilder hinzufügt oder verschiebt, Einzelnachweise erstellt, Vorlagen hinzufügt, Tabellen bearbeitet und vieles andere mehr.
|Bitte gib deinen '''Webbrowser, Betriebssystem und Wikipedia-Skin''' (üblicherweise Vector, manchmal Monobook) an.
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Über den VisualEditor ==

Der VisualEditor ist eine „visuelle“ Art, die Wikipedia zu bearbeiten. Um Wikipedia zu bearbeiten, musste man ursprünglich Wiki-Markup erlernen, eine relativ komplexe Auszeichnungssprache, um selbst kleine Änderungen an einer Seite vorzunehmen. 2001 mag dies noch akzeptabel gewesen sein, 2015 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|vertreibt es jedoch Bearbeiter]]. Wir hoffen, dass der VisualEditor nützlich für bereits vorhandene Bearbeiter und einstiegsfreundlich für neue Nutzer sein wird. 

Der VisualEditor wurde als Opt-in-''Alpha'' ab Mitte 2012 auf MediaWiki.org verfügbar gemacht, auf der englischsprachigen Wikipedia ab Dezember 2012, in [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 weiteren Sprachen] ab April 2013 und in [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ fast allen anderen Sprachen] ab Anfang Juni 2013. Im Juli 2015 wurde er standardmäßig für alle ein- und ausgeloggten Bearbeitern von mehr als 75% Wikipedia-Sprachversionen freigeschaltet.
Wir erwarten, dass wir ihn standardmäßig in den meisten [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|der verbliebenen Länder]] Ende 2015 verfügbar machen können.
Seit Ende November 2014 ist er als optionale [[Beta Features|Beta-Funktion]] in allen WMF-Wikis verfügbar, außer Wiktionary und Wikisource.

Wir veröffentlichen einen [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|mehrsprachlichen monatlichen Newsletter]], der sich auf die WMF-Wikis bezieht.

== Den VisualEditor benutzen ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Falls du interessiert bist den VisualEditor für Bearbeitungen zu nutzen, dann empfehlen wir die Lektüre des [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Handbuchs]] und der [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Liste von häufig verwendeten Tastenkürzeln]].

Der VisualEditor besitzt einige Bugs und Einschränkungen. Falls dir solche auffallen, dann zögere nicht, diese auf der [[VisualEditor/Feedback|Feedback-Seite zu melden]]. Gegenwärtige Einschränkungen sind:

* '''Langsames Laden''' — Große und komplexe Seiten benötigen einige Zeit um im VisualEditor geladen zu werden. In Zukunft wird die Software viel schneller sein, um auch größere Seiten in angemessener Zeit laden zu können.
* '''Unvollständige Bearbeitungsmöglichkeiten''' — Einige Elemente von komplexen Formatierungen werden zwar angezeigt und ihr Inhalt kann bearbeitet werden, allerdings können Nutzer weder deren Struktur ändern noch neue Einträge hinzufügen, z.B. Definitionslisten. Zu unseren Prioritäten gehört es, diese Funktionalität bereitzustellen.
* '''Hauptsächlich Inhaltsseiten, keine Diskussionsseiten''' — Der VisualEditor ist nur für bestimmte Namensräume aktiviert. In den meisten Wikipedias kann der VisualEditor für Artikel und Seiten Benutzer-, Hilfe- und Kategorie-Namensräume verwendet werden. Der VisualEditor ist momentan nicht verfügbar für den Wikipedia-Namensraum oder Diskussionsseiten.

Wir empfehlen, dass Benutzer vor dem Speichern auf &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; klicken und eventuelle [[VisualEditor/Feedback|Probleme melden]].

== Wie kann ich aushelfen? ==

Damit der VisualEditor so gut wie möglich wird, brauchen wir noch viel Mithilfe. Dazu gehört natürlich, die Software zu benutzen, Fehler zu finden und [[VisualEditor/Feedback|diese zu melden]], aber auch viele weitere Aufgaben. Zu diesen gehören:

* '''Hilfeseiten aktualisieren''' — Jedes unserer Projekte besitzt Hilfeseiten, damit es neuen Nutzern erleichtert wird, beizutragen. Leider beziehen diese sich alle auf den herkömmlichen Wikicode-Editor und mit der Weiterentwicklung des VisualEditors veralten auch die Anleitungen und Screenshots. Es wäre daher sehr hilfreich wenn die [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|Hilfeseiten]] basierend auf unserem [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Handbuch zum VisualEditor]] aktualisiert werden würden.
* '''TemplateData zu Vorlagen hinzufügen''' — Der VisualEditor besitzt ein Vorlagenformular, das detailliert im [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Handbuch]] beschrieben ist. Wie man sehen kann, besitzen einzelne Vorlagen benannte Parameter und Beschreibungen, die beim Ausfüllen helfen. Allerdings gibt es auch Vorlagen, bei denen dies nicht der Fall ist, da diese noch &quot;TemplateData&quot; benötigen, damit diese Funktion verfügbar wird. Wenn du daran interessiert bist, TemplateData hinzuzufügen, dann bieten wir [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|dafür ein  Handbuch]], sowie eine [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|Liste der wichtigsten Vorlagen, die noch derartig ergänzt werden sollten]].
* '''Deiner Gemeinschaft helfen''' — Siehe folgende [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|Liste von sinnvollen Wegen, deiner lokalen Gemeinschaft zu helfen]], wenn der VisualEditor als optionale Beta-Funktion freigeschaltet wird.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Neuen Nutzern helfen''' — Falls der VisualEditor-Start erfolgreich ist, werden wir viel mehr neue Nutzer bekommen, als wir gewohnt sind und - obwohl das Bearbeiten leichter wird -, wird der Erstkontakt mit der Gemeinschaft immer noch gleichermaßen schwer bleiben. Bitte nimm dir etwas Zeit in [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|Wikipedia:Fragen von Neulingen, Wikipedia:Fragen zur Wikipedia oder in den IRC-Hilfechannels]], um den Neulingen ihren Einstieg in Wikipedia zu erleichtern.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>az9d1vnpa5kjgh8ehj9xf7vdkedkobf</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403045</id>
      <parentid>5403002</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:54:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7437" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Willkommen auf dem Portal zum '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. Der von der Wikimedia Foundation entwickelte VisualEditor (VE) ist eine neue Art, die Wikipedia zu bearbeiten. Er erlaubt es, Seiten zu bearbeiten, ohne Wiki-Markup erlernen zu müssen. Wir hoffen, dass er Menschen dabei hilft, Beiträge für die Wikipedia zu schreiben.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' lesen.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Ein Problem melden''' über den VisualEditor].
|-
| Finde heraus, wie man Links erstellt, Bilder hinzufügt oder verschiebt, Einzelnachweise erstellt, Vorlagen hinzufügt, Tabellen bearbeitet und vieles andere mehr.
|Bitte gib deinen '''Webbrowser, Betriebssystem und Wikipedia-Skin''' (üblicherweise Vector, manchmal Monobook) an.
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Über den VisualEditor ==

Der VisualEditor ist eine „visuelle“ Art, die Wikipedia zu bearbeiten. Um Wikipedia zu bearbeiten, musste man ursprünglich Wiki-Markup erlernen, eine relativ komplexe Auszeichnungssprache, um selbst kleine Änderungen an einer Seite vorzunehmen. 2001 mag dies noch akzeptabel gewesen sein, 2015 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|vertreibt es jedoch Bearbeiter]]. Wir hoffen, dass der VisualEditor nützlich für bereits vorhandene Bearbeiter und einstiegsfreundlich für neue Nutzer sein wird. 

Der VisualEditor wurde als Opt-in-''Alpha'' ab Mitte 2012 auf MediaWiki.org verfügbar gemacht, auf der englischsprachigen Wikipedia ab Dezember 2012, in [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 weiteren Sprachen] ab April 2013 und in [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ fast allen anderen Sprachen] ab Anfang Juni 2013. Im Juli 2015 wurde er standardmäßig für alle ein- und ausgeloggten Bearbeitern von mehr als 75% Wikipedia-Sprachversionen freigeschaltet.
Wir erwarten, dass wir ihn standardmäßig in den meisten [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|der verbliebenen Länder]] Ende 2015 verfügbar machen können.
Seit Ende November 2014 ist er als optionale [[Beta Features|Beta-Funktion]] in allen WMF-Wikis verfügbar, außer Wiktionary und Wikisource.

Wir veröffentlichen einen [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|mehrsprachlichen monatlichen Newsletter]], der sich auf die WMF-Wikis bezieht.

== Den VisualEditor benutzen ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Falls du interessiert bist den VisualEditor für Bearbeitungen zu nutzen, dann empfehlen wir die Lektüre des [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Handbuchs]] und der [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Liste von häufig verwendeten Tastenkürzeln]].

Der VisualEditor besitzt einige Bugs und Einschränkungen. Falls dir solche auffallen, dann zögere nicht, diese auf der [[VisualEditor/Feedback|Feedback-Seite zu melden]]. Gegenwärtige Einschränkungen sind:

* '''Langsames Laden''' — Große und komplexe Seiten benötigen einige Zeit um im VisualEditor geladen zu werden. In Zukunft wird die Software viel schneller sein, um auch größere Seiten in angemessener Zeit laden zu können.
* '''Unvollständige Bearbeitungsmöglichkeiten''' — Einige Elemente von komplexen Formatierungen werden zwar angezeigt und ihr Inhalt kann bearbeitet werden, allerdings können Nutzer weder deren Struktur ändern noch neue Einträge hinzufügen, z.B. Definitionslisten. Zu unseren Prioritäten gehört es, diese Funktionalität bereitzustellen.
* '''Hauptsächlich Inhaltsseiten, keine Diskussionsseiten''' — Der VisualEditor ist nur für bestimmte Namensräume aktiviert. In den meisten Wikipedias kann der VisualEditor für Artikel und Seiten Benutzer-, Hilfe- und Kategorie-Namensräume verwendet werden. Der VisualEditor ist momentan nicht verfügbar für den Wikipedia-Namensraum oder Diskussionsseiten.

Wir empfehlen, dass Benutzer vor dem Speichern auf &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; klicken und eventuelle [[VisualEditor/Feedback|Probleme melden]].

== Wie kann ich aushelfen? ==

Damit der VisualEditor so gut wie möglich wird, brauchen wir noch viel Mithilfe. Dazu gehört natürlich, die Software zu benutzen, Fehler zu finden und [[VisualEditor/Feedback|diese zu melden]], aber auch viele weitere Aufgaben. Zu diesen gehören:

* '''Hilfeseiten aktualisieren''' — Jedes unserer Projekte besitzt Hilfeseiten, damit es neuen Nutzern erleichtert wird, beizutragen. Leider beziehen diese sich alle auf den herkömmlichen Wikicode-Editor und mit der Weiterentwicklung des VisualEditors veralten auch die Anleitungen und Screenshots. Es wäre daher sehr hilfreich wenn die [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|Hilfeseiten]] basierend auf unserem [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Handbuch zum VisualEditor]] aktualisiert werden würden.
* '''TemplateData zu Vorlagen hinzufügen''' — Der VisualEditor besitzt ein Vorlagenformular, das detailliert im [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Handbuch]] beschrieben ist. Wie man sehen kann, besitzen einzelne Vorlagen benannte Parameter und Beschreibungen, die beim Ausfüllen helfen. Allerdings gibt es auch Vorlagen, bei denen dies nicht der Fall ist, da diese noch &quot;TemplateData&quot; benötigen, damit diese Funktion verfügbar wird. Wenn du daran interessiert bist, TemplateData hinzuzufügen, dann bieten wir [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|dafür ein  Handbuch]], sowie eine [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|Liste der wichtigsten Vorlagen, die noch derartig ergänzt werden sollten]].
* '''Deiner Gemeinschaft helfen''' — Siehe folgende [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|Liste von sinnvollen Wegen, deiner lokalen Gemeinschaft zu helfen]], wenn der VisualEditor als optionale Beta-Funktion freigeschaltet wird.
* '''Neuen Nutzern helfen''' — Falls der VisualEditor-Start erfolgreich ist, werden wir viel mehr neue Nutzer bekommen, als wir gewohnt sind und - obwohl das Bearbeiten leichter wird -, wird der Erstkontakt mit der Gemeinschaft immer noch gleichermaßen schwer bleiben. Bitte nimm dir etwas Zeit in [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|Wikipedia:Fragen von Neulingen, Wikipedia:Fragen zur Wikipedia oder in den IRC-Hilfechannels]], um den Neulingen ihren Einstieg in Wikipedia zu erleichtern.

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>t2zq50zua1f21h3vz7mrrvf7asfk53o</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403210</id>
      <parentid>5403045</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:50:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7455" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Willkommen auf dem Portal zum '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''. Der von der Wikimedia Foundation entwickelte VisualEditor (VE) ist eine neue Art, die Wikipedia zu bearbeiten. Er erlaubt es, Seiten zu bearbeiten, ohne Wiki-Markup erlernen zu müssen. Wir hoffen, dass er Menschen dabei hilft, Beiträge für die Wikipedia zu schreiben.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' lesen.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Ein Problem melden''' über den VisualEditor].
|-
| Finde heraus, wie man Links erstellt, Bilder hinzufügt oder verschiebt, Einzelnachweise erstellt, Vorlagen hinzufügt, Tabellen bearbeitet und vieles andere mehr.
|Bitte gib deinen '''Webbrowser, Betriebssystem und Wikipedia-Skin''' (üblicherweise Vector, manchmal Monobook) an.
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Über den VisualEditor ==

Der VisualEditor ist eine „visuelle“ Art, die Wikipedia zu bearbeiten. Um Wikipedia zu bearbeiten, musste man ursprünglich Wiki-Markup erlernen, eine relativ komplexe Auszeichnungssprache, um selbst kleine Änderungen an einer Seite vorzunehmen. 2001 mag dies noch akzeptabel gewesen sein, 2015 [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|vertreibt es jedoch Bearbeiter]]. Wir hoffen, dass der VisualEditor nützlich für bereits vorhandene Bearbeiter und einstiegsfreundlich für neue Nutzer sein wird. 

Der VisualEditor wurde als Opt-in-''Alpha'' ab Mitte 2012 auf MediaWiki.org verfügbar gemacht, auf der englischsprachigen Wikipedia ab Dezember 2012, in [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 weiteren Sprachen] ab April 2013 und in [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ fast allen anderen Sprachen] ab Anfang Juni 2013. Im Juli 2015 wurde er standardmäßig für alle ein- und ausgeloggten Bearbeitern von mehr als 75% Wikipedia-Sprachversionen freigeschaltet.
Wir erwarten, dass wir ihn standardmäßig in den meisten [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|der verbliebenen Länder]] Ende 2015 verfügbar machen können.
Seit Ende November 2014 ist er als optionale [[Beta Features|Beta-Funktion]] in allen WMF-Wikis verfügbar, außer Wiktionary und Wikisource.

Wir veröffentlichen einen [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|mehrsprachlichen monatlichen Newsletter]], der sich auf die WMF-Wikis bezieht.

== Den VisualEditor benutzen ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Falls du interessiert bist den VisualEditor für Bearbeitungen zu nutzen, dann empfehlen wir die Lektüre des [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Handbuchs]] und der [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Liste von häufig verwendeten Tastenkürzeln]].

Der VisualEditor besitzt einige Bugs und Einschränkungen. Falls dir solche auffallen, dann zögere nicht, diese auf der [[VisualEditor/Feedback|Feedback-Seite zu melden]]. Gegenwärtige Einschränkungen sind:

* '''Langsames Laden''' — Große und komplexe Seiten benötigen einige Zeit um im VisualEditor geladen zu werden. In Zukunft wird die Software viel schneller sein, um auch größere Seiten in angemessener Zeit laden zu können.
* '''Unvollständige Bearbeitungsmöglichkeiten''' — Einige Elemente von komplexen Formatierungen werden zwar angezeigt und ihr Inhalt kann bearbeitet werden, allerdings können Nutzer weder deren Struktur ändern noch neue Einträge hinzufügen, z.B. Definitionslisten. Zu unseren Prioritäten gehört es, diese Funktionalität bereitzustellen.
* '''Hauptsächlich Inhaltsseiten, keine Diskussionsseiten''' — Der VisualEditor ist nur für bestimmte Namensräume aktiviert. In den meisten Wikipedias kann der VisualEditor für Artikel und Seiten Benutzer-, Hilfe- und Kategorie-Namensräume verwendet werden. Der VisualEditor ist momentan nicht verfügbar für den Wikipedia-Namensraum oder Diskussionsseiten.

Wir empfehlen, dass Benutzer vor dem Speichern auf &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; klicken und eventuelle [[VisualEditor/Feedback|Probleme melden]].

== Wie kann ich aushelfen? ==

Damit der VisualEditor so gut wie möglich wird, brauchen wir noch viel Mithilfe. Dazu gehört natürlich, die Software zu benutzen, Fehler zu finden und [[VisualEditor/Feedback|diese zu melden]], aber auch viele weitere Aufgaben. Zu diesen gehören:

* '''Hilfeseiten aktualisieren''' — Jedes unserer Projekte besitzt Hilfeseiten, damit es neuen Nutzern erleichtert wird, beizutragen. Leider beziehen diese sich alle auf den herkömmlichen Wikicode-Editor und mit der Weiterentwicklung des VisualEditors veralten auch die Anleitungen und Screenshots. Es wäre daher sehr hilfreich wenn die [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|Hilfeseiten]] basierend auf unserem [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Handbuch zum VisualEditor]] aktualisiert werden würden.
* '''TemplateData zu Vorlagen hinzufügen''' — Der VisualEditor besitzt ein Vorlagenformular, das detailliert im [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|Handbuch]] beschrieben ist. Wie man sehen kann, besitzen einzelne Vorlagen benannte Parameter und Beschreibungen, die beim Ausfüllen helfen. Allerdings gibt es auch Vorlagen, bei denen dies nicht der Fall ist, da diese noch &quot;TemplateData&quot; benötigen, damit diese Funktion verfügbar wird. Wenn du daran interessiert bist, TemplateData hinzuzufügen, dann bieten wir [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|dafür ein  Handbuch]], sowie eine [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|Liste der wichtigsten Vorlagen, die noch derartig ergänzt werden sollten]].
* '''Deiner Gemeinschaft helfen''' — Siehe folgende [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|Liste von sinnvollen Wegen, deiner lokalen Gemeinschaft zu helfen]], wenn der VisualEditor als optionale Beta-Funktion freigeschaltet wird.
* '''Neuen Nutzern helfen''' — Falls der VisualEditor-Start erfolgreich ist, werden wir viel mehr neue Nutzer bekommen, als wir gewohnt sind und - obwohl das Bearbeiten leichter wird -, wird der Erstkontakt mit der Gemeinschaft immer noch gleichermaßen schwer bleiben. Bitte nimm dir etwas Zeit in [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|Wikipedia:Fragen von Neulingen, Wikipedia:Fragen zur Wikipedia oder in den IRC-Hilfechannels]], um den Neulingen ihren Einstieg in Wikipedia zu erleichtern.

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>efvsze86dc5krs7wu4su0mj1dvev7e0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>443411</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402400</id>
      <parentid>1952776</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:50:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="328" xml:space="preserve">Willkommen auf dem Portal zum '''[[$ve|VisualEditor]]'''. Der von der Wikimedia Foundation entwickelte VisualEditor (VE) ist eine neue Art, die Wikipedia zu bearbeiten. Er erlaubt es, Seiten zu bearbeiten, ohne Wiki-Markup erlernen zu müssen. Wir hoffen, dass er Menschen dabei hilft, Beiträge für die Wikipedia zu schreiben.</text>
      <sha1>rrz9n27ycn16nub5it1yct4tc1mx7ul</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>443438</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403209</id>
      <parentid>1952801</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:49:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="617" xml:space="preserve">* '''TemplateData zu Vorlagen hinzufügen''' — Der VisualEditor besitzt ein Vorlagenformular, das detailliert im [[$ug|Handbuch]] beschrieben ist. Wie man sehen kann, besitzen einzelne Vorlagen benannte Parameter und Beschreibungen, die beim Ausfüllen helfen. Allerdings gibt es auch Vorlagen, bei denen dies nicht der Fall ist, da diese noch &quot;TemplateData&quot; benötigen, damit diese Funktion verfügbar wird. Wenn du daran interessiert bist, TemplateData hinzuzufügen, dann bieten wir [[$td-tutor|dafür ein  Handbuch]], sowie eine [[$td|Liste der wichtigsten Vorlagen, die noch derartig ergänzt werden sollten]].</text>
      <sha1>5txapiv6ye6um7jymx3wqpnsgl7cx1o</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>443442</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403044</id>
      <parentid>1952805</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:54:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="462" xml:space="preserve">* '''Neuen Nutzern helfen''' — Falls der VisualEditor-Start erfolgreich ist, werden wir viel mehr neue Nutzer bekommen, als wir gewohnt sind und - obwohl das Bearbeiten leichter wird -, wird der Erstkontakt mit der Gemeinschaft immer noch gleichermaßen schwer bleiben. Bitte nimm dir etwas Zeit in [[$1|Wikipedia:Fragen von Neulingen, Wikipedia:Fragen zur Wikipedia oder in den IRC-Hilfechannels]], um den Neulingen ihren Einstieg in Wikipedia zu erleichtern.</text>
      <sha1>158xd4sskjsn9ec1lryjjxzfaz1cf7e</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Coding conventions/Java</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>444729</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401649</id>
      <parentid>5317378</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T14:38:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Hasley</username>
        <id>11030752</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>typo</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8077" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Development guideline}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; This page describes the '''coding conventions''' used within files of the [[&lt;tvar name=man&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Code&lt;/tvar&gt;|MediaWiki codebase]] written in '''Java'''.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; See also the [[&lt;tvar name=man&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding conventions#All languages&lt;/tvar&gt;|general conventions]] that apply to all program languages, including Java.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Build == &lt;!--T:11--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; Maven is used as a build tool.&lt;/translate&gt;
All projects should inherit from the [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-parent-pom/|discovery-parent-pom]].
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; It configures a number of static analysis tools and linters that will help in keeping projects coherent.&lt;/translate&gt;
Code conventions are embodied in the  [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-maven-tool-configs/+/refs/heads/master/src/main/resources/org/wikimedia/discovery/build/tools/checkstyle/checkstyle.xml|checkstyle configuration]] used by that pom.xml and will not be repeated here.
The [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-parent-pom/+/refs/heads/master/README.md|README]] file in that project describes how to use this parent pom.

Java projects hosted on Gerrit should be built by Jenkins by using the [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/integration/config/+/refs/heads/master/jjb/job-templates.yaml#87|-maven-java8-docker template]].
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt; Other templates are available to publish documentation and to manage the release process.&lt;/translate&gt;

Java projects should be analyzed by [https://sonarcloud.io/organizations/wmftest SonarCloud].

&lt;translate&gt;
== Java version == &lt;!--T:15--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; Most of our projects are at the moment targeting Java 8.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; We are in the process of transitioning to Java 11.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Libraries == &lt;!--T:18--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:19--&gt; A number of libraries are commonly used throughout our various Java projects.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; Using the same libraries for similar use cases can help coherence across projects.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:21--&gt; That being said, use the list below as suggestions, not as a hard rule.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Production Code === &lt;!--T:22--&gt;

==== Guava ==== &lt;!--T:23--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:24--&gt; Guava is used on a number of projects.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; Note that in some cases, we have dependencies that themselves rely on outdated Guava versions, which prevents us from using the latest version.The features of Guava that we use the most are:&lt;/translate&gt;

* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/PreconditionsExplained Preconditions]
* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/ImmutableCollectionsExplained Immutable Collections]
* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/CachesExplained Caches]

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Lombok ==== &lt;!--T:26--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
While [https://projectlombok.org/features/all Lombok] is not strictly a library, it provides very useful syntactic sugar to Java.
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Since Lombok is an annotation processor executed at compile time, Lombok has no runtime dependencies and is thus not creating compatibility issues.&lt;/translate&gt;

Lombok can be further configured by adding a &lt;code&gt;lombok.config&lt;/code&gt; file at the package level, which might be particularly useful to make it play nice with Jackson.
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; An example of such configuration:&lt;/translate&gt;

 lombok.equalsAndHashCode.callSuper = call
 # disable SpotBugs, it does not like generated code by lombok
 lombok.extern.findbugs.addSuppressFBWarnings = true
 lombok.addLombokGeneratedAnnotation = true
 # useful for jackson that will be able to use the all args constructor when deserializing
 lombok.anyConstructor.addConstructorProperties = true

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:29--&gt;
A few particularly useful features:
&lt;/translate&gt;

* [https://projectlombok.org/features/Data @Data]: makes it easy to generate DTO / DO, taking care of all this getters / setters and having a proper, valid &lt;code&gt;equals()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;hashCode()&lt;/code&gt;.
* [https://projectlombok.org/features/SneakyThrows @SneakyThrows]: a better way of dealing with checked exceptions than wrapping them in an unchecked exception.

Depending on your IDE, you might need to install a lombok plugin. See [https://www.projectlombok.org/setup/overview documentation for your specific IDE].

&lt;translate&gt;
==== JSR 305 ==== &lt;!--T:30--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:31--&gt; JSR 305 provides annotations to better document expected behaviour and help detect bugs.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:32--&gt; Those annotations are only compile time dependencies and not required at runtime, they don't generate dependency issues.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:33--&gt;
In particular:
&lt;/translate&gt;

* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/Nonnull.html @Nonnull] / [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/Nullable.html @Nullable]: specifies that a method parameter or return value should be non-null or nullable.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/ParametersAreNonnullByDefault.html @ParametersAreNonnullByDefault]: all parameters on this class / package / method are expected to be non null unless otherwise specified.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/Immutable.html @Immutable]: this class is immutable.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/ThreadSafe.html @ThreadSafe] / [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/NotThreadSafe.html @NotThreadSafe]: this class is or is not thread safe.

==== JSON / XML ====

[https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson Jackson] is used for most JSON and XML parsing / serialization, with the use of [https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson-annotations annotations].

==== HTTP client ====

[https://hc.apache.org/ Apache HttpComponents] is used as an HTTP client.

As much as possible a single instance of &lt;code&gt;HttpClient&lt;/code&gt; should be shared within an application.
A custom User Agent string should be configured.

=== Testing ===

==== Unit Testing Framework ====

We mostly use [https://junit.org/ JUnit] as a testing framework.
Some projects are using [https://junit.org/junit4/ JUnit 4], while others are using JUnit 5.
Some projects have dependencies on component specific testing libraries that don't support [https://junit.org/junit5/ JUnit 5] yet.
For projects that don't have this limitation, JUnit 5 should be preferred.

==== Mocking ====

[https://site.mockito.org/ Mockito] is used as a mocking framework where needed.

==== HTTP Mocking ====

[https://wiremock.org/docs/ WireMock] is used as an HTTP mock server, which allows testing code that relies on HTTP interactions.
Note that WireMock makes it easy to also test various faults (delays, timeout, etc...).

==== Assertions ====

[https://assertj.github.io/doc/ AssertJ] is our main assertion framework.
In almost all cases AssertJ should be preferred over plain &lt;code&gt;assert&lt;/code&gt;, JUnit assertions or Hamcrest.

== Various conventions ==

=== Unit vs Integration Tests ===

We follow the usual naming conventions to identify [https://maven.apache.org/surefire/maven-surefire-plugin/examples/inclusion-exclusion.html unit tests] vs [https://maven.apache.org/surefire/maven-failsafe-plugin/examples/inclusion-exclusion.html integration tests].

=== Managing &lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt; and defensive programming ===

As much as possible, &lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt; values should be avoided.
[[:en:Null_object_pattern|Null Objects]] should be preferred.
Parameters should be expected to be non null and not explicitly checked, unless they come from an untrusted caller.
Parameters should be marked with &lt;code&gt;@Nonnull&lt;/code&gt; / &lt;code&gt;@Nullable&lt;/code&gt; to allow static analysis tools to validate nullity.

{{Conventions navigation}}</text>
      <sha1>qaa68dhlqqzxlgunhiqfosrdxa4ywdm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Bouquet/zh</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>448028</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401868</id>
      <parentid>5214286</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:07:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2438" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Bouquet
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Automattic — 原始代码（PHP、CSS等）
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki端口
|description     = 
|image           = BouquetSkin.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.2.3
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=bouquet 界面消息Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        =
|phabricator     = Bouquet
}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Bouquet''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;an elegant, simple theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; inspired by the beauty found in flowers&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].
&lt;/div&gt;

==主要功能==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Bouquet-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
&lt;/div&gt;
* 三种[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|主题]]：
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** forget-me-not (internal name (for the ''usetheme'' URL parameter and &lt;code&gt;$wgDefaultTheme&lt;/code&gt;) ''forgetmenot'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** pink dogwood (internal name ''pinkdogwood'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** tiger lily (internal name ''tigerlily'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom header/logo image (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Bouquet-skin-logo.png]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, 1100x180 pixels)
&lt;/div&gt;

== 安裝 ==
{{SkinInstall
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]] &lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>5hp7cj9i0s9lqfgmxjb2cug7omyw6pk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/lt</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>449453</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402253</id>
      <parentid>5400745</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14111" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Languages
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==Data ir laikas==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Taip pat skaitykite ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>frxv4oja5hj64dz4kvpnt0emc2835i7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/sr</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>450335</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402268</id>
      <parentid>5400759</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14156" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-prefs-edits'' Колико сте измена начинили, немају сви викији ово.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Languages
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==Датум и време==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Види још ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>k438up0uje9f3ikk0ffzh7mg6lzke44</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Bouquet/en</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>455194</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401860</id>
      <parentid>5214280</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:06:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1999" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Bouquet
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Automattic — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description     = 
|image           = BouquetSkin.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.2.3
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=bouquet Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        =
|phabricator     = Bouquet
}}
'''Bouquet''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.
It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;an elegant, simple theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; inspired by the beauty found in flowers&quot;.

The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].

==Main features==

* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Bouquet-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
* Three [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|themes]]:
** forget-me-not (internal name (for the ''usetheme'' URL parameter and &lt;code&gt;$wgDefaultTheme&lt;/code&gt;) ''forgetmenot'')
** pink dogwood (internal name ''pinkdogwood'')
** tiger lily (internal name ''tigerlily'')
* Custom header/logo image (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Bouquet-skin-logo.png]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, 1100x180 pixels)

==Installation==
{{SkinInstall
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]] &lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>krtdbeq5wat25jo9a04uq1akmjcrn3t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Bouquet/bg</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>457093</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401861</id>
      <parentid>5214278</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:06:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2739" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Bouquet
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Automattic — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)&lt;/span&gt;
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki port&lt;/span&gt;
|description     = 
|image           = BouquetSkin.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.2.3
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=bouquet &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interface Messages Wiki&lt;/span&gt;]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        =
|phabricator     = Bouquet
}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Bouquet''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;an elegant, simple theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; inspired by the beauty found in flowers&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Bouquet-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Three [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|themes]]:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** forget-me-not (internal name (for the ''usetheme'' URL parameter and &lt;code&gt;$wgDefaultTheme&lt;/code&gt;) ''forgetmenot'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** pink dogwood (internal name ''pinkdogwood'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** tiger lily (internal name ''tigerlily'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom header/logo image (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Bouquet-skin-logo.png]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, 1100x180 pixels)
&lt;/div&gt;

== Инсталиране ==
{{SkinInstall
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]] &lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>lzsc4l4054nnn4r4e2qwfw6lvo4r9g2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/eu</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>457250</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402769</id>
      <parentid>5346974</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:42:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="64827" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Ikusizko Editorea artikulurik aldatu gabe probatu nahi baduzu, hemen duzu [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} proba orria] nahi dituzun probak egiteko.&lt;/span&gt; Ez duzu kontu bat izan beharrik orri honetan Ikusizko Editorea erabiltzeko}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Ikusizko Editorea ireki ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| Ikusizko editorearekin editatzeko, klik egin &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; fitxan orriaren goialdean.

Zenbait segundo har ditzake orria zabaltzen, eta zerbait gehiago orria oso luzea bada.

Jatorrizko iturburu kodea irekitzeko klik egin &quot;{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}&quot; fitxan.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ikusizko editorea ireki dezakezu ere atal bakoitzaren &quot;{{int|editsection}}&quot; loturan klik eginez
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Hasi zaitez: Ikusizko Editorearen tresna-barra ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Ikusizko editorearen tresna-barraren pantaila-argazkia]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | Editatzen hasten zarenean, Ikusizko Editorearen tresna-barra pantailaren goialdean azaltzen da. Ezagunak diren ikono batzuk ditu:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' eta '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' egin dituzun aldaketak
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Izenburuak''' menu zabalgarria: paragrafoaren formatua aldatzen uzten dizu. Paragrafoaren estiloa aldatzeko, jarri kurtsorea paragrafoan eta aukeratu menu honetako elementua (ez duzu testurik nabarmendu beharrik). Atal izenburuak &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}&quot; formateatuak daude, azpiatalak &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}&quot; dira, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}&quot;, eta hurrenkera horretan. Testuarentzat jatorrizko formatua &quot;{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}&quot; da.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Formateatu:''' &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot;n klik eginez menua irekitzen da. 
* {{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}} elementuak ('''B''') aukeratutako testua letra lodian jartzen du
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}&quot; elementuak (''E'') aukeratutako testua letra etzanean jartzen du.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}&quot; elementuak (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) aukeratutako testua ingurukoa baino txikiagoa eta pixka bat altuago agertzea eragiten du.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}&quot; elementuak(x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) aukeratutako testua ingurukoa baino txikiagoa eta pixka bat baxuago agertzea eragiten du.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}&quot; elementuak (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) testua ezker-eskuin zeharkatzen duen marra bat sortzen du.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}&quot; elementuak (giltza multzoa: &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) aukeratutako testuaren letra tarte bakarreko tipora aldatzen du, eta hala, inguruko testutik (tartekatze proportzionala) berezitu egiten da.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}&quot; elementuak (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) aukeratutako testua azpimarratzen du.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}&quot; elementuak (文A) aukera ematen du hizkuntza etiketatzeko (adibidez, japonieraz) eta testuaren norabidea (adibidez, eskuinetik ezkerrera) aldatzeko.
* Azkenik, ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]) elementuak, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}&quot; izenez ezaguna, aukeratutako testuaren karaktere formatu guztiak kentzen ditu, loturak barne.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Testurik hautatu ez baduzu, menua irekitzeko &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; klikatzen baduzu, eta ondoren, item bat aukeratzen baduzu, formatu berria aplikatuko zaio idazten hasi behar zaren testuari, kurtsorea dagoen edozein tokitik aurrera.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Lotura tresna:''' Katearen ikurra da [[#Editing links|lotura-tresna]]. Bere gainean klik eginez gero (testuren bat aukeratu ondoren) [[#Editing links|lotura leihoa]] irekitzen du.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menu:''' &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; menua testuaren barruan doazen aipuak (&quot;oin-oharrak&quot; edo &quot;erreferentziak&quot; ere deituak) txertatzeko balio du. Menu honen bitartez, proiektu guztiek aukera dute $basic erreferentzia formatua txertatzeko eta baita $re-use erabiltzeko. Menu honek ere sarbide bizkorra ematen dizu aipamen txantiloietara, zure wikian gaituak badaude behintzat.&lt;/span&gt;

(Wiki jakin bateko {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menurako aipamen-txantiloi lokalak gehitzeko jarrabideak  {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}}n eskuragarri daude)
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} botoia:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Citoid zerbitzua zure wikian aktibatuta badago, orduan {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} botoia ikusiko duzu {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menua beharrean.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

Citoid zerbitzua aipuen txantiloiak automatikoki osatzen daiatzen da.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Zerrendak eta koskatzea:''' Lehenengo bi elementuak aukera ematen dituzte testua &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}&quot; edo &quot;{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}&quot; moduan formateatzeko. Azken bi elementuek aukera ematen dute testuaren koskaren maila handitzeko ala txikitzeko.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menua desberdina izan daiteke proiektuaren arabera. Azpian azaldu daitezkeen aukera '''guztien''' zerrenda duzu.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; ikonoak (mendien irudia) [[#Editing images and other media files|multimedia leihoa]] irekitzen du.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot; ikonoak (puzzle puska) [[#Editing templates|txantiloiak editatzeko]] aukera ematen dizu.
* ''Taula'' itemak taula bat txertatzeko aukera ematen dizu.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;&quot;{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}&quot; elementuak (hizketa globoa) irakurleek ikusi ezin ditzaketen iruzkinak sartzeko aukera ematen du; iruzkin horiek edizio moduan baino ezin dira ikusi eta harridura ikur batez adierazten dira. Aldatu moduan, harridura ikurrean klik eginez iruzkina aldatzeko edo ezabatzeko aukera izango duzu.&lt;/span&gt;
* &quot;{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}&quot; ikurrak ([[:w:eu:ankh|ankh]] sinboloa - ☥) 
hieroglifikoak txertatzeko aukera ematen du. (ikusi beherago).
* &quot;Code block&quot; itemak kodeak txertatzeko aukera ematen dizu.
* &quot;Musical notation&quot; itemak musika partiturak txertatzeko aukera ematen dizu.
* &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; ikonoak (argazki multzoa) orrian argazki galeria bat txertatzeko aukera ematen dizu.
* &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; ikurrak (Σ) [[#Editing mathematical formulae|formulak sartzeko leihoa]] irekitzen du.
* ''Graph'' itemak grafiko bat txertatzeko aukera ematen dizu.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;&quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}&quot; itemak Wikipediako lankide sinadura txertatzeko aukera ematen dizu.&lt;/span&gt; Ondoa grisez agertuko da (ezin aukeratu) aldatzen ari zaren orria (izen-tartea), esaterako, artikulu bat bada, zeinetan desegokia baita sinadura txertzea.
* &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; ikurrak (hiru liburu) leiho bat irekitzen du zeinetan zehazten den irakurleak erreferentzia zerrenda non ikusiko duen. Normalean, orri bakoitzeko behin baino ez da egiten.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Karaktere bereziak txertatu:''' {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} menuko&quot;{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}&quot; (Ω) ikurra klikatzerakoan, leiho bat azaltzen da karaktere berezi batzurekin. Karaktere batean klik eginez gero testua txertatuko da. Karaktere berezien artean badira sinbolo estandarrak, azentuak eta matematika sinboloak.&lt;/span&gt; (Zerrenda hau lokalki pertsonalizatu daiteke. Ikusi {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} argibide gehiagorako.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| '''Edizio abisuen''' botoiak orriaren edozein abisu erakusten du.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The '''{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}''' menu is to the left of the ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' button and the ''{{int|visualeditor-mweditmode-tooltip}}'' menu. On this menu there is a button to open an ''{{int|visualeditor-meta-tool}}'' dialog with the following (left side) tabs:&lt;/span&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' allows you to add categories to this page and to adjust how the page is sorted, when displayed within a category by setting a different index to sort with.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' allows you to make the page a redirect and adjust options of this redirect, to adjust settings regarding the displaying of the Table of Contents, to disable the edit links next to each heading, and to define the page as a disambiguation page.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}''' allows you to adjust the settings regarding indexation of the page by search engines, showing a tab to add a new section, and the displayed title.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' shows a list of pages in other languages that are linked to that page.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-templatesused-tool}}''' shows a list of links to each template used on this page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The tabs of the {{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-title}} dialog are also displayed in the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu and can be opened by clicking on it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Furthermore the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} menu contains the items {{int|visualeditor-changedir-tool-ltr}} or {{int|visualeditor-changedir-tool-rtl}} and the item '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Find and replace|{{int|visualeditor-find-and-replace-title}}]]''', which opens a bar, where you can insert words or regular expressions you are searching for and those to replace them with, together with several buttons for options.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;$switch botoia $save botoiaren ondoan dago. Horrek iturburu kodea pasatzeko aukera emango dizu.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Aldaketak gorde&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Editatzen amaitu duzunean, klik egin tresna-barrako &quot;{{int|publishchanges}}&quot; botoi urdinan. Aldaketarik eginez baduzu, botoia desaktibatua agertuko da (grisez). &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Aldaketak guztiak ezeztatzeko, zure nabigatzailearen leihoa itxi edo klik egin &quot;{{int|vector-view-view}}&quot; fitxan edizio-tresna barraren gainean.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;&quot;{{int|publishchanges-start}}&quot; botoi urdina sakatzerakoan leiho bat irekitzen da. Bertan egin dituzun aldaketen laburpen txiki bat sartu dezakezu, zure aldaketa txiki ote den adierazi, eta orria zure $watchlist atalera gehitu. Laburpen leihoa iturburu kodeko editorearen {{int|summary}} eremuaren berdina da.&lt;/span&gt;

Aldaketak ere berrikusi ditzakezu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; botoia erabiliz, eta horrela, ziurtatu dezakezu aldaketak egin aurretik bezala funtzionatuko duela. Hau iturburu kodeko editorearen  &quot;{{int|showdiff}}&quot; botoiaren antzekoa da.

&quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}&quot; botoiarekin aldatzen ari zinen orrira bueltatzen zara. Aldaketa guztiak geroago gorde ahal izango dituzu.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Loturak editatu ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Loturak tresna-barran dagoen &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; ikurraren (katea) bidez gehitu daitezke, baita ere{{key press|Ctrl|K}} (edo{{Key press|Command|K}} Mac-ean) lasterbidea erabiliz.

Testu bat aukeratzen (nabarmentzen) baduzu eta ondoren &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; sakatzen baduzu, testu hori lotura bat egiteko erabiliko da. Hitz bakar baten lotura egiteko, aukeratu hitza ala jarri kurtsorea hitzaren barruan.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Botoia edo lasterbidea erabiltzen duzunean, leiho bat irekiko da eta bertan lotura idatzi dezakezu.
Lotura tresnak '''barruko''' loturekin lagunduko zaitu hasierako letren antzeko hitzak bilatuz.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Lotura sartu edo aukeratu duzuenean, lotzeko prozesua {{key press|Enter}} sakatzen, edo  &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; edo besterik gabe leihotik kanpo klikatzearekin burutzen da. Zure lotura berehala agertuko da Ikusizko Editorearen orrian, baina gainerako aldaketekin bezala, ez dira gordeko orri osoa gordetzen duzun bitarte.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Kanpoko web orri batekin lotura egiteko, prozesura antzekoa da. Aukeratu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}&quot; fitxa, eta sartu URLa leihoan.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Etiketarik gabeko kanpo loturak honela ikusten dira: [http://example.com]. Etiketak gehitu ditzakezu kurtsorea edozein hitzetik aldenduz (adib., espazio baten ondoren). Ireki lotura-tresna azpian klik eginez edo lasterbideak sakatuz. Tekleatu URLa kaxan eta klik egin &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; botoian lotura txertatzeko.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Dagoen loturen bat aldatzeko edo ezabatzeko, klik egin lotura duen testuan, eta ondoren, sakatu ondoan dagoen &quot;{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}&quot; ikurrean. Aldaketarako leihoa agertuko da (leihora zuzenean jo dezakezu {{key press|Ctrl|K}} lasterbidea erabiliz). Loturen bat aukeratzen denean, marko urdin baten barruan agertuko da.

Lotura edizio-leihoan, loturaren norakoa aldatu dezakezu. Lotura ezabatu dezakezu ere &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; botoia sakatuz, leihoaren goiko eskuin iskinean.
Loturaren helburu artikulua ere beste leiho batean ireki dezakezu elkarrizketa kaxako loturaren kopian klik eginez. (agian interesgarria zaizu kanpoko loturak konprobatzeko)

Atera nahi baduzu lotura etiketatik (lotura bezala agertzen den testua) edo lotura ondoren idazten jarraitu nahi baduzu, klik egin {{Key press|→}}:
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Pressing it once will escape the link editing dialog and put your cursor at the end of the element linked (blue framed, to edit this element)&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Pressing it twice will put the cursor after the element linked, ready to type the rest of your text.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the link label of an existing link, press within the link label and type the new one.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;But if you want to replace the entire label, please note:&lt;/span&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have selected (highlighted) the entire link label, the link will be deleted by typing any key.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the link label directly without deleting it, put the cursor within that link label, use the backspace and delete keys (no more than necessary), and a narrow blue link area will remain there.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now you may type in the new label for the kept link.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|link to categories, files and more]].&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Erreferentziak editatu ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Aipamen txantiloiak erabiltzeko laguntza]] edo [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Citoiden {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} botoia erabiltzeko laguntza]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== Zehaztu instalatua duzun sistema ===
|-
| Zure wikiak oin-oharrak egiteko hiru sistema hauetako bat erabili dezake. Eskuinaldean dagoena modurik errazena da, {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menuak ez baitu aipuak egiteko txantiloirik. Zure wikiak sistema hau erabiltzen badu, orduan oin-oharrei buruz jakin behar duzun guztia orri honetan dago.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Bigarren moduak ''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}'' menua berdina du, baina ohikoak diren aipamen txantiloi azkar batzuekin. Zure wikiak sistema hau erabiltzen badu, orduan xehetasun gehiago hemen: {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Hirugarren moduan, Aipatu botoia sakatzearekin hasi behar zara berriro.&lt;/span&gt; Ondoren, elkarrizketa kutxa irekiko da, eta bertan, citoid zerbitzuaren bitartez, aipamen automatikoak egiteko aukera agertuko da. Zure wikiak sistema hau erabiltzen badu, xehetasun gehiago {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}} orrian duzu
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Existitzen den erreferentzia bat editatu ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Egina dagoen erreferentzia aldatzeko, klik egin bere gainean testuan agertzen den lekuan (normalean kakoen arteko zenbakia). Erreferentzia sortzeko erabili den txantiloia aldatzeko &quot;$ref&quot; ikurra (liburu-marka) edo ikur bat (eta izena) ikusiko duzu. Bi kasuetan, &quot;Aldatu&quot; botoian egiten baduzu erreferentzia aldatzeko leihoa irekiko duzu.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;&quot;$ref&quot; ikurrarentzat, ''Aldatu''n klik egin eta Erreferentzia leihoa irekiko da. Erreferentziaren edukia aldatzeko, gainean klik egin.&lt;/span&gt;

Wiki askok txantiloiak erabiltzen dituzte erreferentziei forma emateko. Zure erreferentzian txantiloien bat erabiltzen bada, orduan punteroa erreferentziaren informazioaren gainean jartzen duzunean, eremuko informazio guztia nabarmendua agertuko da.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Txantiloien bat erabiltzen bada eta erreferentziaren informazioan klik egiten baduzu, orduan $template ikurra (puzzle zatia) informazioarekin agertuko da. Klik egin ''aldatu'' botoian txantiloiaren  edizio-leihotxoan txantiloiaren edukia aldatzeko.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Erreferentzian klik egitean agertzen zaizuna aipuentzako txantiloi estandarraren ikurra bada (adibidea eskuinean), orduan klik egin ''Aldatu'' ikurran eta zuzenean eramango zaitu txantiloiaren edizio-leihotxora.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Txantiloi edizio leihotxoaren barruan, informazio tipoak edo jasota dagoen informazioa aldatu dezakezu. Edukia duten eremuak soilik (txantiloi parametroak) erakutsiko dira hasieran. Eremuak gehitzeko, klik egin &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}&quot;en edizio leihotxoaren azpialdean.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Amaitzerakoan, klik egin &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; botoian. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Existitzen den erreferentzia bat berrerabili ===
|-
| Orriak dagoeneko aipatu nahi duzun iturria eramaten duen erreferentzia badu, orduan berrerabili aukeratu dezakezu aipamen hori erabiltzeko.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Dagoeneko existitzen den erreferentzia bat erabiltzeko, jartzazu kurtsorea testuaren gorputzea, errefetentzia jarri nahi duzun tokian (zenbakia) aipu horretarako. Ondoren klik egin &quot;$cite&quot; menuko &quot;Re-use reference&quot; elementuan.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Note: If your wiki has the third footnote system described above, you'll see a &quot;{{int|citoid-citoiddialog-mode-reuse}}&quot; tab, in a dialog, instead of a &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-useexisting-tool}}&quot; item on the &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot; menu.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;$reference-title leihoan, bilatu erabili nahi duzun errefetentzia zerrenda, eta aukeratu. Erreferentzia bat baino gehiago badago, bilaketa kaxa (&quot;$input&quot; etiketatua) erabili dezakezu bilatu duzun testua duten erreferentziak soilik zerrendatzeko.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Erreferentzia berri bat gehitu ===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;$cite menuaren bitartez aipu bat gehitzeko, ipini kurtsorea testua gehitu nahi duzun tokian. Ondoren aukeratu menuko aipamen mota egokiena.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== &quot;Oinarrizko&quot; aipua erabili ====
|-
| Hemen agertzen dena da ikusiko duzuna oinarrizko erreferentziak elementua sakatzean.  Erreferentzia editorean, aipamena gehitu dezakezu eta formateatzeko aukerak ere agertuko zaizkizu.

Erreferentzia dagoeneko esistitzen den talde batean sartu dezakezu, nahiz eta normalean hau txuriz uzten den. (Aukera hori erreferentzia taldeak zabaltzeko erabiltzen da &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; tresnaren bitartez)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Erreferentzia elkarrizketan, zure erreferentzia berrian aipamen txantiloi bat txertatu nahi baduzu, edo beste edozein txantiloi, klik egin {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} ikurran (puzzle zatia) tresna-barrako {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} menuan, Erreferentzia editorearen barruan.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Ondoren, bilatu erabili nahi duzun txantiloia, gehitu eta alda ezazu beste edozeon txantiloiekin egingo zenukeen bezala. (Ikusi [[#Editing templates|Txantiloiak editatu]] atala, azpian, beharko bazenu, txantiloien inguruko informazio gehiago duzu.)

Txantiloi berria editatzen amaitutakoan, egin klik&quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; Erreferentzia editorera itzultzeko,  eta berriro &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; aldatzen ari zaren orrira itzultzeko.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Orrian erreferentzia zerrendarik oraindik ez badago (adibidez, orriaren lehenengo erreferentzia gehitzen ari bazara), zehatu behar duzu zerrenda horren testua non zabalduko den irakurlearentzat.

Jarri kurtsorea erreferentzia zerrenda ikustea nahi duzun tokian (normalean, orriaren azpialdean), ireki &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menua eta klik egin &quot;{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}&quot; ikurran (hiru liburu).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Hainbat erreferentzia talde erabiltzen ari bazara, oso ezohikoa dena, elkarrizketa honetan taldea zehaztu dezakezu. Taldeari dagozkion erreferentziak zabalduko zaikizu solik orrialdean bertan taldea paratzea erabaki duzun tokian.

Erreferentzia zerrenda leihoko azken pausoa &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; botoian klik egitea da.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Erreferentzia txantiloi estandarra erabili ====
|-
| Baliteke zure tokiko wikiak aipamen txantiloi gehigarri batzuk gehitu izana {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} menuan. Horrela bada, gehien erabilitako aipamen txantiloietara sarbide azkarra izango duzu zeure wikian. (Zure wiki lokalean aipamen txantiloi gehiago gehitzeko jarraibideak {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}} loturan dituzu.)
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &quot;Liburura aipatu&quot; bezalako txantiloi-ikur batean klik eginez gero, txantiloientzako editore txikia irekiko da. Garrantzitsuak diren eremuak asterisko batez markatuak agertuko dira. Nahiz eta eremu arruntenak agertu, ez dira zertan denak bete behar.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Parametro gehiago sartzeko, egin scroll beherantz txantiloiaren editore txikian eta klik egin {{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}} aukeran.&lt;/span&gt;

Amaitzerakoan, klik egin &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; botoian.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Irudiak eta beste multimedia fitxategiak editatu ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Irudiak editatu ===
|-
| Irudi berri bat (edo beste multimedia edozein fitxategi) prtiari gehitzeko, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot;ikurra (mendien irudia) sakatu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menuan. Irudia kurtsorea dagoen edozein lekutan txertatuko da,
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; ikurran klik eginez, leohoa bat irekitzen da, eta bertan, Wikimedia Commosen eta zure wikian aldatzen ari zaren orriarren izenburuarekin harremana dute multimedia fitxategiak bilatzen ditu.

Bilaketa alda dezakezu bilaketa-kaxan  testua aldatuz.

Fitxategi bat aukeratzeko, klik egin haren irudiaren koadro txikian.

Honek irudia editatzen ari zaren orrian kokatzen du.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Aukeratu duzun orrian txertatu ondoren, beste elkarrizketa bat irekiko da. Elkarrizketa horrek aukera ematen du irudiari epigrafeak gehitzeko eta aldatzeko. Epigrafe hori formateatu daiteke eta loturak ere txertatu daitezke.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Multimedia elkarrizketak ere epigrafeetan testu alternatiboak gehitzeko aukera ematen du. Hori erabilgarria da pantaila irakurleak erabiltzen dituzten lankideentzat, edo irudien zabalpena desgaitua dutenentzat.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Irudiaren zenbait parametro ere egokitu ditzakezu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot; leihoan. Honen barnean irudiaren kokapena, tipoa eta tamaina daude.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Amaitzerakoan, egin klik &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; leihoa ixteko eta orriaren ediziora itzultzeko.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Existitzen den irudi batean, epigrafea gehitu edo editatu eta beste ezarpen aldatu ditzakezu irudian klik eginez, eta ondoren, irudiaren azpian agertzen den &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; ikurrean klik eginez.

Existitzen den irudi baten tamaina aldatu dezakezu bere gainean klik eginez, eta ondoren, tamaina aldatzeko ikurra mugituz (bi buruko gezitxoa, behealdeko ertzeren batean)

Irudi bat arrastatu eta jaregin dezakezu orriko goialdera ala behealdera.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== Irudiak igotzen ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Upload&quot; tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== Multimedia galeriak editatu ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| Galeria berri bat gehitzeko, klik egin &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menuko &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; ikurran (argazki sorta).(Menuan ikur hau ikusten ez baduzu, zure tokiko wikiak Ikusizko Editorearen funtzionalitate hau ezartzea atzeratzea erabaki duelako da). 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| Existizen den galaria bat Ikusizko Editorearen bidez aldatzeko, klik egin galeria horretan. Ondoren, galeriaren azpikaldean dagoen galeria ikurrean (argazki sorta) klik egin. Horrek galeria editorera eramango zaitu eta bertan galeriak dituen argazki guztien zerrenda agertuko da.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Galeria editorea kaxa arrunt bat da eta galeriak iturburu kodearen bitartez aldatzeko aukera emango dizu. Irudi berri bat galeriara eransteko, idatzi fitxategiaren izena, ondoren barra bertikal bat jarri (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), eta azkenik, irudiaren epigrafea idatzi. Irudi bakoitza galerian dagokion lerroan jarri beharko duzu.&lt;/span&gt; Zerrenda hau ere editatu dezakezu irudiak kentzeko edo berrantolatzeko edo epigrafeak aldatzeko.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
&quot;$dialogdone&quot; botoian kilk egiten duzunean, galeria editoretik aterako zara. Orduan zure aldaketak ikusi beharko dituzu, galeriak irakurleentzat agertuko den modu berean.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Gogoratu galeria editoretik irtenda ez direla zure aldaketak gordetzen. Ikusizko Editorearekin egiten diren beste aldaketekin bezala, egindako lanak gordetzeko orri osoa gorde beharko duzu.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== Txantiloiak editatu ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The powerful MediaWiki template system lets you insert dynamic content, text from other pages, and much more. For a detailed explanation and examples, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Templates help page]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the VisualEditor you can search for a relevant template, add an invocation or [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusion]] on the page you’re editing and, if needed, add custom content using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameters]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert new template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Txantiloi berri bat orrian txertatu nahi baduzu, ipini kurtsorea txantiloia sartu nahi duzun lekuan, eta &quot;$insert&quot; menuko &quot;$template&quot; ikurraren gainean klik egin ezazu.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then open the {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} menu and select &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, type two curly brackets {{((}} to open the same dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Dagoeneko orrian dauden txantiloi bat aldatu dezakezu hura aukeratuz. Txantiloian aukeratzeko klik egiten duzunean,  urdin jartzen da eta kaxa bat agertzen da &quot;$template&quot; ikurrarekin (puzzle pieza). Ondoren, klik egin $edit loturan.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you select the template you want to edit, it turns blue, and a box appears displaying &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then select the &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; link  or double click on the template itself to open the template.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the visual editor, such hidden templates are still shown so that you can click and edit or delete them.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon and both will be grayed out.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== Txantiloiaren parametroak ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You’ll see this dialog box when you’re adding a new template or editing one already in place.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What you see in the box depends on whether the template in question contains {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, helpful metadata added by other editors to make it easier to edit templates in the Visual Editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When a template contains TemplateData, the VisualEditor can use it to present annotated fields for you to fill in.
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For templates that have some community-provided TemplateData, the VisualEditor displays a list of the named parameters and, often, descriptions and instructions explaining the meaning and required format for each parameter’s values.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Adding undocumented parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter: “1”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter’s value: “en_US”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter: “2”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter’s value: “yes”&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Autogenerated parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completing your edit ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Txantiloia editatzen amaitutakoan, egin klik &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; leihoa ixteko eta orri nagusiaren ediziora itzultzeko.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing on mobile ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Txantiloiak ordezkatu ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

==Zerrendak editatu ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Ikusizko Editorea erabili dezakezu zerrendak sortzeko edo dagoeneko existitzen den baten formatua aldatzeko. Bi zerrenda mota daude: ordenatugabea (buletak) eta ordenatuak (zenbakiak).

Zerrenda berri bat hasteko, klik egin hemen  erakusten diren bi menuetako elementuren batean. Edo, dagoeneko zerrenda idatzi baduzu (lerro desberdinetan), aukeratu (nabarmendua) idatzi duzun zerrenda eta klik egin ondoren menuko elementuren batean.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Hemen ikus ditzakezu bi zerrenda moten adibideak: ordenatugabea  (buletak) eta ordenatua (zenbakiak).
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation;  use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is the result of increased indentation.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Taulak editatzen ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| Ikusizko Editorea taulak txertatzeko eta aldatzeko erabili dezakezu.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you press on &quot;Table&quot;, in the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now the &quot;Table&quot; menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To select a cell, press it once.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Zutabeak eta lerroak gehitu eta ezabatu ditzakezu.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on &quot;Merge cells&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also split cells that were previously merged.  All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== Kategoriak editatu ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| Kategoriak editatzeko, &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; menuaren barruan, klik egin &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; elementuan.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; botoiak elkarrizketa bat irekitzen du eta bertan kategorien zerrenda agertzen da. Berriak gehitzeko eta daudenak ezabatzeko aukera ematen dizu.

[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|Sailkatzeko gako]] orokorra (lehenetsitakoa) egokitzeko edo aldatzeko aukera duzu ere. Sailkatzeko gakoa, orria kategoria bereko beste batzuekin agertzen denean zein tokitan joango den zehazten duen.

Adibidez, &quot;George Washington&quot;-en sailkatzeko gakoa &quot;Washington, George&quot; da. “Estatu Batuetako presidenteak” kategorian, artikulua “W” hizkiaren azpian zerrendatuko da, ez “G” hizkiaren azpian.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Orriari kategoria bat gehitzeko, tekleatu sartu nahi duzuen kategoriaren izena &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}&quot; eremuan. Tekleatu ahala, Ikusizko Editoreak balizko aukerak bilatuko ditu dagoeneko existitzen diren kategorien artean. Existitzen den bat aukeratu dezakegu ala oraindik sortu gabe dagoen berri bat gehitu dezakezu (kategoria orria sortu bitartean, aldaketa guztiak gorde ondoren, zure kategoria berria gorriz agertuko da.)&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Kategoria bat ezabatzeko, klik egin bere gainean eta klik berriro &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; ikurran (zakarrontzia) ireki zaizun elkarrizketan.

Kategoria batean klik egiteak sailkatzeko gakoa zehazteko ere aukera emango dizu. Sailkatzeko gako berri honek lehenetsitako sailkapena ezeztatzen du.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| Kategoriak aldatzen amaitu duzunean, klik egin {{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}} edizio orrira itzultzeko.
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== Orriaren ezarpenak aldatu ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| Orriaren ezarpenak aldatzeko, klik egin &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; menuan, tresna-barran, eta aukeratu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; botoia.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; botoiak hainbat aukera erakusten dituen elkarrizketa irekitzen ditu.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Orria bat beste batetara birzuzendu dezakezu &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot; kontrol-laukia hautatuz. Ondoren idatzi irakurlea bidali nahi duzuen orriaren izenburua, egiten ari den bilaketan, zuzenean joan dadin aldatzen ari zaren orrira.

Azpian,  helburu den orria berrizendatuko balitz  birzuzenketa gaurkotzea galarazteko aukera dago. Oso gutxitan erabiltzen da.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| Eduki-taula ikusgai egongo den ala ez aukeratu dezakezu hiru botoi hauen bitartez. Lehenetsitako aukera &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot; da, hau da, Eduki-taula erakutsiko du orrian hiru izenburu edo gehiago badaude.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Atal bakoitzaren izenburuaren ondoan aldatzeko aukerak ez agertzeko aukera ere baduzu. Horretarako klik egin kontrol-laukian.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} editatzen amaitakoan, klik egin &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; botoian edizio orrira bueltatzeko.
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing maps&lt;/span&gt; ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== Matematika formulak editatu ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Matematika formula berri bat orrian txertatzeko,  jarri kurtsorea formula sartu nahi duzun lekuan, eta tresna - barraren &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menuan dagoen &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; ikurran klik egin.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Leiho bat irekiko eta bertan formula sartu ahal izango duzu  LaTeX syntax-en bidez. Tekleatu ahala, Ikusizko Editoreak formula gaurkotuko du eta azkeneko itxura zein izango den ikusi ahalko duzu. Emaitzarekin ados zaudenean, klik egin &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; botoian.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Existitzen den matematika formula bat aldatzeko, klik egin bere gainean eta ondoren agertuko den &quot;Σ&quot; ikurraren gainean. Honela, formulen leihoa irekiko da eta bertan aldaketak egin ahal izango dituzu.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Musika partiturak editatu ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then, from the &quot;Insert&quot; menu on the toolbar, press the &quot;Musical notation&quot; option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will open the &quot;Musical notation&quot; dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you are finished, press the &quot;Done&quot; button to close the dialog and publish your changes.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== Poemak eta beste elementu bereziak editatu ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| Ikusizko Editoreak zenbait elementu eta poemak, esaterako, ez du oraindik onartzen.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Switching between the visual and wikitext editors&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; button on the far right of the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on &quot;Discard changes&quot;, you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scroll down, and you'll see the wikitext editing area.&lt;/span&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== Laster-teklak ==

Zenbait editorek iturburu kodean zuzenean aldatzeko ohitura dute, batez ere letra lodiak, etzanak eta loturak. mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts aukera ematen dute formatua modu azkar batean aldatzeko inongo tresna-barrarik ireki gabe. Hona hemen Ikusizko Editorean orokorrean gehien erabiltzen diren laster-teklak

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! PC lasterbideak
! Ekintza
! Mac lasterbideak
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| Lodia
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| Etzana
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| Txertatu lotura
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| Ebaki
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| Kopiatu
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| Itsatsi
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| Desegin
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>fqz3bg3wtc8lw2lkchdi0sky7dywhv0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/135/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>458220</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402914</id>
      <parentid>4675915</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="98" xml:space="preserve">Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of $1 is largely backward compatible.</text>
      <sha1>tj5nu4gg0igqwqnrm1f0t39dum11ikd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/en</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>458257</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402928</id>
      <parentid>5355649</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="38058" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Basic overview ==

=== File transfer ===

Choose a method for transferring files:

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
* Secure copy with [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] or [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Using a [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] client.
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.
* Some other method. There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

===Preliminary===

Read {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.

# Check the requirements
# Read the RELEASE-NOTES file
# Read the UPGRADE file
# Back up existing files and the database
# Unpack the new files
# Upgrade extensions
# Run the update script to check the database
# Test the update
# Remove leftovers from old installations

== Check requirements == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} requires:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* One of the following:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.
This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.

If you are using PostgreSQL, please also read {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

For more information, please read the {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} and {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Read the release notes ==
Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.
You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Clear pending jobs ==
For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].
Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.
It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.
Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Back up existing files and the database ==

:''Full instructions: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:

* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
:* MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.

== Unpack the new files ==

=== Using a tarball package ===

You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.

{{Note|1=You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from. Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)}}

==== FTP or graphical ====

If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.

After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Command line ====
You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.
When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===Other files===

After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - contains your old configuration settings.
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).

Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.

=== Using Git ===

If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.

You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.
More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].

=== Using patch ===
A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.
You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.
Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.
Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.

=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===

If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.
Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.

== Upgrade extensions ==

Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.

Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.

If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.
If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].

== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==

If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:

=== Skin registration ===

Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.

This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.

=== Extension registration ===

Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.

Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

This can be converted to:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.
Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.
Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.

=== Other variables ===
Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.
Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.
New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.
We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.
In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Run the update script ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.

The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.

=== Command line ===

Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:

 $ php update.php

On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.
Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.
The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.

You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.
After that message, the update aborts.
Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.
When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.
If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.
If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.

MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.

{{Note|1=If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.}}

==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====

This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.

* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php. If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions). If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc. Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.

==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====

In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.

In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.

==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====

Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.

Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:

# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php

Below is an example:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====

You may encounter the error:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one. 
# Add a line as follows:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===Web browser===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''See also {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.

# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;. For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
# Select your language and click continue.
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.

It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.

{{Warning|1=If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!}}

== Test the update ==

Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:

* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.

== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.
It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.

== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===How hard is it to upgrade?===

If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.

Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.
You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.

Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.

Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.

If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.

{{Tip|1=Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.
If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).
Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].
You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.
If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.

If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.
The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.
If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].
However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.
You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.
Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.
This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!

If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.

===Should I back up first?===

Short answer: Yes.

Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration. 

An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.
A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.
In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.
However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.
Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.

Recovery is often complex.
Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.
A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.

===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.
Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].

===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===

Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.

If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.

Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:

# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.

===Why upgrade?===
:''Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.''

Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].

Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!

New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:

* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized. InstantCommons no longer requires local files.
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period. Allow to block range of IPs.
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email. Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}. The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced. Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core. The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.

Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== See also ==

* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - if you don't have a successful backup
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>n9x6rv1fndpqmitiwezb9eczdps6oos</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/es</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>458572</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402926</id>
      <parentid>5355650</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="47144" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Resumen general ==

=== Transferencia de archivos ===

Elige un método para transferir los archivos:

* [[w:es:Wget|wget]]
* Copia segura con [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] o [[w:es:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:es:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Usando un cliente [[w:es:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]]
* En el caso de un servidor hospedado, la empresa que hospeda el servidor quizá ofrezca una interfaz para su administración vía navegador web; consulta con tu proveedor.
* Algún otro método. Puedes ver una lista en [[w:List of file transfer protocols]].

=== Pasos preliminares ===

Lee {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=el archivo de texto UPGRADE incluido en MediaWiki}}.

# Comprueba los requisitos
# Lee el archivo RELEASE-NOTES
# Lee el archivo UPGRADE
# Haz una copia de seguridad de los archivos existentes y de la base de datos
# Extrae los nuevos archivos
# Actualiza las extensiones
# Ejecuta el script de actualización para comprobar la base de datos
# Prueba la actualización
# Elimina restos de archivos que pudieron quedar de instalaciones anteriores

== Comprobación de requisitos == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} requiere:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Uno de los siguientes:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Desde la versión 1.36, MediaWiki solo soporta actualizaciones desde dos versiones LTS anteriores (véase [[phab:T259771]]). Actualizaciones desde versiones más antiguas tendrán que realizarse en múltiples pasos.
Esto significa que si quieres actualizar a la versión 1.36 desde 1.23 o anterior, primero tendrás que actualizar de 1.23 a 1.27 (o 1.35), y una vez en la versión 1.27 (o 1.35) serás capaz de actualizar a 1.36.

Si estás usando PostgreSQL, lee también {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Para más información, lee {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} y {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Lee las notas sobre cambios ==
En el archivo comprimido de la instalación, o en los archivos obtenidos desde [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], encontrarás algunos archivos cuyos nombres se encuentran complemente en mayúsculas. Uno de ellos contiene las notas sobre cambios: '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Ahora es el momento de abrirlo y ver qué es lo que ha cambiado en esta versión.
También deberías leer las instrucciones del archivo UPGRADE.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Limpiar los trabajos pendientes ==
Por cuestiones de rendimiento, algunas acciones en la base de datos se realizan en diferido, gestionadas por la [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|cola de trabajos]].
Estos trabajos se guardan en base de datos y contienen parámetros con información sobre acciones que deben realizarse.
Se recomienda encarecidamente correr los trabajos pendientes antes de actualizar el wiki, para evitar que fallen en caso de que la especificación de los parámetros de estos trabajos cambie en la nueva versión.
Usa {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} para correr todos los trabajos pendientes y limpiar la cola de trabajos antes de realizar la actualización.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Haz una copia de seguridad de los archivos existentes y de la base de datos ==

:''Instrucciones completas en [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|Manual: Hacer copia de seguridad de un wiki]]''

Pese a que los scripts de actualización se mantienen al día y son robustos, siempre cabe la posibilidad de que algo pueda salir mal. Antes de proceder a actualizar la estructura de la base de datos, '''haz una [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|copia de seguridad]] completa''' del wiki, que incluya tanto la base de datos como los archivos:

* el contenido del wiki, empezando por la base de datos (asegúrate de que especificas correctamente el '''juego de caracteres''', mira primero en LocalSettings.php). Puede ser una buena idea generar un volcado XML además del volcado SQL de la base de datos.
:* MySQL &amp;mdash; tanto el volcado SQL como XML se pueden hacer con los comandos de la propia base de datos:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL &amp;mdash; volcado de base de datos para usar luego con el comando &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite &amp;mdash; puedes usar un script de MediaWiki para crear la copia de seguridad:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* imágenes y otros archivos multimedia (el contenido del directorio &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;, logotipo personalizado /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* archivos de configuración, como por ejemplo &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (si está presente)
* archivos del programa MediaWiki, incluyendo todas las apariencias y extensiones, especialmente si has hecho modificaciones.

== Extrae los nuevos archivos ==

=== Usando un archivo comprimido ===

Puedes poner los nuevos archivos en su lugar usando FTP o desde la línea de comandos. ¡Preferiblemente, usa la línea de comandos si tienes acceso a ella! La línea de comandos será mucho más rápida que tener que subir uno a uno los miles de archivos que componen la instalación vía FTP.

{{Note|1=Deberías extraer los archivos en un nuevo directorio vacío en el servidor. Si extraes los archivos de la nueva versión directamente encima de los antiguos en lugar de hacerlo en un directorio nuevo, deberás seguir las instrucciones descritas en [[#Back up existing files and the database|Haz una copia de seguridad de los archivos existentes y de la base de datos]]; de no hacerlo, si has realizado alguna modificación en los archivos de instalación, podrías perder esas modificaciones, quedándote sin referencias para aplicarlas de nuevo. Extraer los archivos directamente encima de tu copia actual de MediaWiki puede también dejar por ahí archivos de la versión anterior que podrían interferir con el código de la nueva versión. Te recomendamos que extraigas los nuevos archivos en un nuevo directorio, y que entonces apliques en el nuevo directorio las modificaciones que estimes oportunas (restaurar 'LocalSettings.php', la carpeta 'images', las extensiones y otras personalizaciones como pueden ser las apariencias personalizadas).}}

==== FTP o interfaz gráfico ====

Si no tienes acceso a tu servidor a nivel de línea de comandos, descarga el archivo comprimido de MediaWiki a tu ordenador local y usa [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] para descomprimirlo.

Una vez extraídos los archivos, usa tu cliente FTP preferido para subir los directorios y archivos al servidor.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Línea de comandos ====
Es posible que necesites ejecutar el comando con &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; si tu cuenta de usuario no tiene permiso total de escritura para escribir en el directorio de instalación del wiki.
Al extraer el paquete de MediaWiki normalmente se creará un nuevo directorio para la versión de MediaWiki, y tendrás que copiar los archivos de configuración y el directorio 'images' desde el directorio donde se encuentra la instalación anterior:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

Los usuarios de (Open)Solaris tienen que usar &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, o:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===Otros archivos===

Tras extraer los archivos, deberás copiar o mover algunos archivos y directorios desde el antiguo directorio de instalación al nuevo:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - contiene las opciones de configuración anteriores.
* El directorio &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (o &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; en versiones anteriores), que contiene todos los archivos subidos al wiki, salvo que hayas especificado un directorio de subida de archivos diferente. Deberás cambiar el propietario y los permisos como sea oportuno, por ejemplo con &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; si el usuario web es ''apache''.
* Extensiones del directorio &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;. Deberías siempre usar versiones actualizadas de las extensiones; no se garantiza que las extensiones antiguas funcionen con una versión más reciente de MediaWiki.
* Si estás usando un [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|logotipo personalizado]], también necesitas copiar este archivo desde la copia de seguridad. Antes de la versión 1.24 normalmente se encontraba en &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. A partir de la versión 1.24 se encuentra en &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt;, o en &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; si preferiste usarlo así. Entonces indícalo en LocalSettings.php, por ejemplo con &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;.
* Para 1.35 puede que necesites restaurar los logotipos desde [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Luego añade a LocalSettings.php por ejemplo &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Apariencias personalizadas del directorio &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;.
* Cualquier modificación realizada a los anteriores archivos de instalación o a las extensiones.
* Cualquier archivo .htaccess (si usas Apache y has definido alguna regla en ellos).

Una vez hecho esto, convierte este nuevo directorio en el directorio publicado en el servidor, o renombra el directorio de instalación anterior y después renombra el nuevo para que coincida con el nombre que estabas usando.

=== Usando Git ===

Si usas {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, exporta los archivos a un directorio vacío, y a continuación copia sólo los archivos modificados al nuevo directorio tal como se explica en la sección anterior.

También necesitarás instalar algunas bibliotecas de PHP externo que utilizan Compositor o una colección proporcionada mantenida para el Wikimedia wiki granja.
Puedes encontrar más detalles sobre la instalación y actualización de las bibliotecas externas en la [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|documentación de descarga desde Git]].

=== Usando un parche ===
Por cada actualización menor normalmente también se publica un archivo de parches.
Necesitarás descargar [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] para usar esto.
Descarga y extrae el archivo de parches manualmente desde [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ el sitio de volcados] o sigue estas instrucciones con wget.
Los parches son incrementales, por lo que '''no''' puedes saltarte ninguna versión.

# Cambia con &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; al directorio principal de tu instalación de MediaWiki (el que contiene LocalSettings.php).
# Descarga el archivo de parches y descomprímelo con &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt;.
# Usa &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; para comprobar qué se cambiará (''ejemplo:'' &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Si todo va bien, ejecuta &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; nuevamente, pero esta vez sin &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
# Visita Especial:Versión y deberías ver el nuevo número de versión en su lugar.

=== Archivos antiguos que pueden causar errores ===

Si descomprimiste los archivos directamente encima de la versión anterior, algunos archivos antiguos pueden causar problemas en la nueva versión.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Si no estás usando [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|perfilado]], pero tienes un archivo &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; en el directorio raíz de MediaWiki, puedes encontrarte errores que hacen referencia a &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.
Borrar o renombrar el archivo &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; puede resolver este error. Si en el futuro activas el perfilado, puedes usar como plantilla el archivo &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;, que también se encuentra en el directorio raíz de MediaWiki.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
Desde MediaWiki 1.23 no existe ningún mecanismo de detección automática de archivos de apariencias; por lo tanto, tras actualizarte a la versión 1.23 o posteriores, asegúrate de que se han eliminado los antiguos archivos &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; del directorio &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;, así como los subdirectorios correspondientes del directorio &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;. Para ayudarte a recordarlo, MediaWiki guardará avisos si encuentra uno cualquiera de estos antiguos elementos. También necesitarás modificar cualquier apariencia que se haya personalizado a fin de seguir la misma convención. Mira {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} para más información.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 cambia las rutas de los archivos principales de las apariencias. Tras actualizarte a esta versión o a una posterior, debes asegurarte de que ya no están presentes los antiguos archivos &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directamente en el directorio &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;. Mira {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} para más información.

== Actualiza las extensiones ==

Algunas extensiones han sido actualizadas para que funcionen con la nueva versión de MediaWiki. Asegúrate de usar la versión más reciente de estas extensiones. Puede que necesites realizar actualizaciones manualmente en el caso de extensiones que hayas modificado.

Los distintos [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|archivos de distribución basados en tar]] incluyen algunas extensiones y cuentan con control de versiones para ayudarte en caso de una actualización a elegir la versión adecuada para la versión que tengas instalada de MediaWiki.

El [[Special:ExtensionDistributor|distribuidor de extensiones]] va bien para la mayoría de la gente que busca una ''instantánea'' de las extensiones que funcionan con las versiones soportadas de MediaWiki.

Si te propones descargar un gran número de extensiones, entonces probablemente sea mejor [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|descargarlas desde Git]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Adapta tu LocalSettings.php ==

Si vas a usar el mismo archivo &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; que con la versión anterior, puede que necesites adaptarlo a cómo lo usan las nuevas versiones.

=== Registro de apariencias ===

Desde MediaWiki 1.24, las apariencias incluidas en el paquete -como Vector, Monobook, Modern y CologneBlue- ya no forman parte del núcleo de MediaWiki, y debes registrarlas explícitamente en &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; para poder usarlas, en caso contrario MediaWiki mostrará un aviso indicando que no tienes ninguna apariencia instalada.

Esto es lo que debes añadir a &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; cuando actualices desde una versión anterior a la 1.24 y quieras tener disponible alguna de estas apariencias:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

El resto de apariencias pueden no haber sido todavía adaptadas al nuevo sistema de [[Manual:Extension registration|registro de apariencias]], así que en caso de problemas, consulta la página de documentación de cada una de ellas para ver cómo registrarlas correctamente.

=== Registro de extensiones ===

Desde MediaWiki 1.25, las extensiones usan un nuevo sistema de [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension registration|registro de extensiones]].

En versiones anteriores, tu &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; incluiría algo como esto:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Esto puede convertirse en:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Las extensiones están siendo adaptadas para usar el nuevo sistema de registro.
Las extensiones que no se han adaptado deberían seguir usando el sistema antiguo de instalación.
Para más información, consulta las instrucciones de instalación en la página de cada extensión.

=== Otras variables ===
Algunas variables pueden haber sido declaradas obsoletas o haberse eliminado completamente.
Normalmente, tenerlas aún en &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; no tendrá efecto alguno.
En las nuevas versiones de MediaWiki pueden añadirse nuevas variables, como también puede cambiar el tipo de una variable ya existente.
Normalmente intentamos usar valores predeterminados para ellas que sean seguros, y en caso de cambiar su tipo, procuramos mantener compatibilidad hacia abajo.
En cualquier caso, revisa las notas de lanzamiento para ver si ha habido algún cambio de este tipo.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Ejecuta el script de actualización ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
La base de datos de MediaWiki puede actualizarse de dos maneras: desde la línea de comandos, o desde el navegador. Si tienes acceso a tu servidor a nivel de línea de comandos, ésa es la manera recomendada, puesto que esto reduce el riesgo de que el proceso de actualización se vea interrumpido por una petición caducada o un reinicio en la conexión.

El script también intentará descargar cualquier software del que dependa MediaWiki y que no esté presente.

=== Línea de comandos ===

Accede a la línea de comandos de tu servidor, ya sea con una cuenta SSH o similar. Puedes acceder a la línea de comandos conectando con tu servidor vía SSH. Si el ordenador local desde el que estás trabajando corre Microsoft Windows, necesitarás una herramienta como [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] para poder usar SSH. Desde la línea de comandos, accede al directorio &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; y ejecuta el [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|script de actualización]]:

 $ php update.php

En un servidor linux si obtienes un error intenta ejecutar el mismo comando como raiz (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Nota para instalaciones simples en Windows (por ejemplo, con {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

Quizá te encuentres con un mensaje que dice que tu versión de PHP es muy antigua y que necesitas una versión más reciente.
Tras ese mensaje, el proceso de actualización se cancela.
El motivo de este error es que la línea de comandos está usando una versión de PHP distinta de la que se usa cuando se ejecuta MediaWiki desde el servidor web.
Si te encuentras este mensaje, deberás comprobar si puedes ejcutar una versión más reciente de PHP en la línea de comando usando un comando distinto: podría ser por ejemplo ''php5'' o ''php56''
Que haya o no otra versión disponible, y en tal caso, bajo otro nombre, es algo que depende de la configuración de tu servidor.
Si no puedes solucionarlo, consulta a tu proveedor, ellos seguramente sabrán si la hay.

MediaWiki examinará la estructura existente y la actualizará para trabajar con el nuevo código, añadiendo tablas y columnas según sea necesario.

{{Note|1=Si usas una [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|base de datos compartida]], deberás pasar el parámetro &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; si quieres que se actualicen las tablas compartidas; de lo contrario, el script de actualización no tocará esas tablas.}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

==== Qué hacer en caso de un error &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; (o similar) ====

En caso de que el script cancele la actualización con un mensaje similar a

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

esto significa que debes comprobar si has definido {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} y {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} en tu archivo {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} (en el directorio raíz de MediaWiki). Estos valores son el nombre de usuario y la contraseña que necesita el script para poder acceder a la base de datos.

En algunos casos, una variable antigua $wgDBmwschema (para Postgres) parece ser usada para el nombre de tabla para actualizar, en vez de $wgDBname, incluso cuando se está usando mysql. Si se da este caso, simplemente borra la definición de $wgDBmwschema en LocalSettings.php.

==== Qué hacer en caso de un error &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; ====

Si estás ejecutando update.php desde la línea de comando, es posible que te encuentres este error:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

Esto ocurre cuando se ejecuta update.php con php4.

Si estás usando un servidor hospedado con un proveedor que proporciona tanto php4 como php5, deberás seguir los siguientes pasos:

# Desde la línea de comando, introduce el comando 'whereis php5'
# Una vez que hayas descubierto la ubicación de php5, pide un listado con el contenido del directorio php5/bin.
# Cuando conozcas el nombre del ejecutable PHP (que puede ser php o php5), teclea la ruta completa para ejecutar update.php.

He aquí un ejemplo:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

====Qué hacer en caso de un error 'register_argc_argv is set to false'====

Quizá te encuentres el error
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Vé a ~/maintenance y edita el archivo 'php.ini', o créalo si no existe 
# Añade una línea así:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Vuelve a ejecutar &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===Navegador web===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Véase también {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Si tu base de datos tiene ya un tamaño considerable y se encuentra bajo uso intensivo, no deberías usar el actualizador vía web, dado que el proceso de actualización caducará cuando se alcance el tiempo máximo de ejecución establecido en PHP (''maximum_execution_time''). En este caso deberías usar [[update.php]] desde el interfaz de línea de comandos y no desde la web. Qué es exactamente un &quot;tamaño considerable&quot; es algo que depende de tu servidor (por ejemplo, su rendimiento, la carga de trabajo que tiene y el tiempo máximo de ejecución que concede PHP al script para cumplir su cometido). Si tu wiki es demasiado grande para el actualizador vía web y tu empresa de hospedaje no te da acceso mediante línea de comandos, entonces tendrás que trasladar tu wiki a otro proveedor, preferiblemente a uno que sí ofrezca acceso desde línea de comandos.

# Haz siempre una [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|copia de seguridad de tu wiki]] antes de realizar cualquier labor de mantenimiento en la base de datos.
# Visita &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt; desde tu navegador. Por ejemplo, si tu wiki está en &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, navega a &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
# Elige tu idioma y pulsa 'Continuar'.
# La instalación existente debería detectarse automáticamente. Sigue las instrucciones en pantalla para actualizarla.&lt;br /&gt;Si se te pide una &quot;contraseña de actualización&quot;, abre tu archivo {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} y busca el valor de {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.

Puede suceder que el actualizador vía web parezca no funcionar: en lugar de ver la pantalla inicial de selección de idioma, podría salir una página vacía, posiblemente con algún mensaje de error. En este caso lo más probable es que tu servidor use reglas de reescritura (muy posiblemente para usar [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|URLs cortos]]), que hacen que no aparezca el actualizador de ''mw-config/'' sino una página wiki de ''Mw-config/'', con una &quot;M&quot; en mayúsculas. En este caso, renombra el archivo ''.htaccess'' mientras se hace la actualización, con lo cual deberías poder acceder al actualizador vía web.

{{Warning|1=Si usas este método, ¡asegúrate de '''volver a renombrar el archivo .htaccess''' después de ejecutar el script de actualización! ¡De lo contrario, tanto los URLs cortos como posiblemente otras cosas dejarán de funcionar!}}

== Prueba la actualización ==

Una vez que haya concluido la actualización, navega por el wiki y comprueba que estas operaciones funcionan como deberían:

* Ver páginas
* Editar páginas
* Subir un archivo
* Visitar [[Special:Version]] y comprobar que la versión que aparece es correcta y que las extensiones están presentes.

== Limpia restos de instalaciones anteriores ==
Si has copiado tu anterior instalación a otra carpeta en el servidor, asegúrate de eliminarla o hacerla completamente inaccesible de la web.
Es muy importante no dejar instalaciones previas accesibles desde la web, ya que se pierde por completo el propósito de actualizar, y deja tu servidor expuesto a ataques.

== Preguntas frecuentes ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===¿Cómo de difícil es actualizar MediaWiki?===

Si el único archivo que has modificado es {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} y estás actualizando desde la versión 1.5 o posterior, el proceso es muy sencillo. La cantidad de trabajo que lleva es de sólo unos minutos. Los cambios en la estructura de la base de datos llevarán un tiempo proporcional al tamaño de tu base de datos — potencialmente pueden ser varias horas en el caso de wikis con millones de páginas, mientras que si es un tamaño típico de unos pocos miles de páginas, normalmente será cuestión de unos segundos.

Las actualizaciones menores, dentro de la misma versión principal, desde {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 a {{MW legacy release number}}, no requieren absolutamente ningún esquema de cambios.
Puedes simplemente actualizar los archivos. La base de datos no necesita ninguna actualización, por ello no es necesario ejecutar el script de actualización.

Actualizar desde la versión 1.4 o anteriores es algo potencialmente complicado porque se abandonó el soporte para los juegos de caracteres que no fuesen el UTF-8, y el esquema para almacenar texto en bloque fue modificado. Por favor, lee la sección correspondiente del archivo &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt;.

La actualización se vuelve más difícil si has modificado nuestro código fuente y no quieres que se sobreescriban tus cambios. Herramientas como [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] o [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] pueden resultarte útiles. También hay un problema potencial si estás usando extensiones cuyo mantenimiento ha sido abandonado; actualiza tus extensiones al mismo tiempo que actualizas MediaWiki.

Si has modificado la apariencia o usas una apariencia personalizada, muy posiblemente tengas que ajustarla para que funcione de nuevo con la nueva versión de MediaWiki.

{{Tip|1=En lugar de parchear tus archivos de CSS y JavaScript &quot;globales&quot; cada vez que actualizas el software, puedes simplemente añadir el código a tus páginas &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Common.js&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Common.css&lt;/code&gt;. Puesto que estas páginas forman parte de la base de datos, que será reutilizada cuando hagas la actualización, no tendrás que volver a parchear los archivos del núcleo de MediaWiki.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
===¿Cómo actualizo desde una versión muy, muy antigua? ¿En uno, o en varios pasos?===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Depende. Si estás '''actualizando desde MediaWiki 1.4 o una versión anterior''', deberías actualizar primero a MediaWiki 1.5. Si estás actualizando desde un wiki que usa Latin-1, utiliza &lt;code&gt;upgrade1_5.php&lt;/code&gt; (que encontrarás en el archivo de MediaWiki 1.5) para convertir las partes correspondientes de la base de datos a UTF-8 ($latin tiene que estar a TRUE en tu $localsettings para que esto funcione). A continuación, ejecuta &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;, e indica en la variable $legacy de LocalSettings.php el sistema de codificación usado anteriormente en el wiki (por ejemplo, windows-1252). Así es básicamente cómo se actualizaron Wikipedia y otros sitios de la Fundación Wikimedia cuando pasaron de MediaWiki 1.4 a la versión 1.5; mira el [$noc archivo de opciones en cuestión (¡ojo: este archivo es muy grande!)] y algunas [[$wikitech|notas al respecto en Wikitech]] para más detalles. También es posible que necesites actualizar a MediaWiki 1.4 para poder ejecutar el script de actualización a la versión 1.5.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
Si quieres hacer un volcado de base de datos (p. ej. MySQL) del wiki en codificación Latin-1 wiki, asegúrate que el tipo del campo &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; en la tabla {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} es &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, no &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, para evitar problemas con la codificación de caracteres.

Si estás '''actualizando desde MediaWiki 1.5 o posterior''' hasta '''1.35''' entonces puedes realizar la actualización en un sólo paso, desde tu vieja versión a la versión estable más reciente.
La inmensa mayoría de informes, además de las pruebas automatizadas, indican que hacerlo en un único paso funciona perfectamente.
Si no te lo crees, lee [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|este mensaje de lista de correo]].
Sin embargo, has de tener en cuenta que al actualizar desde versiones muy antiguas, las posibilidades de que te encuentres errores de PHP son mayores que si estuvieses actualizando desde la versión inmediatamente anterior a la nueva.
Habría recibido estos errores de todos modos, si no se hubiera saltado las versiones, pero los errores se habrían asociado con cada actualización individual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
Esto hará que la actualización sea más difícil, pero no olvides que ¡también te ahorras actualizar primero a todas las versiones que te estás saltando!

Si estás '''actualizando a MediaWiki 1.36''' o posterior, sólo están soportadas las actualizaciones desde las últimas dos versiones LTS ([[phab:T259771]]). Esto significa que, para versiones muy viejas, primero tendrás que actualizar a MediaWiki 1.35, y de ahí a 1.36.

===¿Debería hacer primero una copia de seguridad?===

Respuesta breve: sí.

Respuesta más larga: depende de (a) en cuánto valoras tu información, (b) cómo de difícil sería hacer la copia de seguridad, y (c) la experiencia que tienes en el mantenimiento y administración de MySQL. 

Un fallo en la actualización puede dejar tu base de datos en un estado inconsistente, a medio camino entre dos versiones distintas.
Podría aparecer un error de PHP o de MySQL durante la actualización, dejando tu base de datos actualizada a medias.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

La recuperación de una situación así es a menudo complicada.
Los voluntarios que atienden los foros de soporte es poco probable que reciban con agrado la noticia de que no tienes una copia de seguridad y que ahora necesitas ayuda para salvar los muebles porque ha habido corrupción de datos durante una actualización.
Una situación más deseable sería que pudieses repetir el proceso echando mano de tu copia de seguridad, para a continuación [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|informar del fallo identificando el componente de MediaWiki]] que causó la corrupción de datos durante el proceso de actualización.

===¿Puedo conservar mi LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Sí, pero puede que tengas que hacer algunos pequeños cambios. El formato de $localsettings es fundamentalmente compatible hacia abajo; los cambios que puedan afectar a la compatibilidad de LocalSettings.php se documentarán en la sección &quot;Cambios en la configuración&quot; de las [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|notas de lanzamiento]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

===¿Puede mi wiki seguir funcionando mientras se actualiza?===

Generalmente sí, aunque Git puede inutilizarlo temporalmente (durante unos pocos segundos).

Si estás actualizando entre versiones menores de MediaWiki, lo único que necesitas es sustituir los antiguos archivos con los nuevos.

Nota: lo que sigue da por supuesto que tienes acceso a nivel de línea de comandos. Si estás actualizando entre versiones mayores de MediaWiki, el procedimiento recomendado es el siguiente:

# Descomprime la nueva versión de MediaWiki a un nuevo directorio.
# Prepara el nuevo directorio: copia tu LocalSettings.php del antiguo directorio, así como las extensiones y apariencias personalizadas que puedas tener instaladas. Verifique la configuración de {{wg|Logo}} y {{wg|Logos}} en LocalSettings.php y, si fuese necesario, copia el archivo del logo del directorio antiguo al nuevo.
# En las notas de lanzamiento de la nueva versión, mira si hace falta hacer cambios en LocalSettings.php.
# Pon la base de datos en modo lectura insertando la siguiente variable en el LocalSettings.php del viejo directorio; los usuarios verán este mensaje si intentan editar una página durante el proceso de actualización:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Esta opción no sirve a partir de MediaWiki 1.27, donde también impide ejecutar el script de actualización. Una solución alternativa la puedes encontrar en la página {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. Consulta también {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Ejecuta el [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|script de actualización]] o el actualizador web en el nuevo directorio.
# Copia el subdirectorio 'images' del antiguo directorio al nuevo directorio.
# Intercambia el antiguo directorio con el nuevo.

===¿Por qué actualizar?===
:''Suscríbete a [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] para recibir notificaciones de nuevos lanzamientos.''

Porque [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|suele ser fácil hacerlo]], con [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|un único paso para cambiarte a la versión más reciente]] y también [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|vía web]].

Las versiones recientes reciben correcciones en la seguridad que hacen que tu wiki y tu servidor estén mejor protegidos contra los vándalos, cosa que no ocurre con las versiones antiguas (véase {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). ¡Ya sólo éso supone docenas de motivos para actualizarte!

Los lanzamientos donde hay un cambio de versión mayor traen nueva funcionalidad que te puede interesar: mira las notas de lanzamiento para más detalles. En caso de que necesites más argumentos para convencer a tus jefes de que te dejen actualizar una antigua versión, aquí va una lista:

* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|las ediciones pueden previsualizarse antes de guardar]] también como un diff.
* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}} hay un [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|botón deshacer]].
* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrullar]] en [[Special:NewPages|Especial:PáginasNuevas]] es mucho más sencillo.
* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, puedes [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|renombrar]] (trasladar) archivos.
* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, puedes [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|reparar las redirecciones dobles]] automáticamente.
* Desde la versión {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}} está disponible {{ll|InstantCommons}}.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Desde la versión 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|¡la ordenación de las categorías tiene sentido!]] (especialmente con caracteres que no usa el inglés); ampliado a 68 idiomas después de {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
* Desde las versiones {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} y {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, la interfaz y los [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|registros]] se dirigen correctamente a los usuarios de todos los idiomas y géneros (antes de la versión 1.15, no había distinción de ningún tipo por género).
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Desde [[MediaWiki 1.20|la versión 1.20]], los [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] son más legibles.
* En las versiones [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] y [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], las notificaciones por correo electrónico se volvieron más claras y predecibles, haciendo que tu wiki sea más efectivo.
* Desde [[MediaWiki 1.22|la versión 1.22]], la lucha contra el vandalismo (patrullar) consume menos tiempo.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

También, en {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} empezamos a incluir en el archivo de MediaWiki [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|algunas extensiones vitales]], como un editor mejor y las herramientas anti-vandalismo ConfirmEdit y Nuke; en versiones más recientes se han ido añadiendo más.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Véase también ==

* Un artículo del blog de Greg Sabino Mullane que ofrece [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html más detalles sobre las pequeñas actualizaciones]
* La [[Project:Support desk|mesa de ayuda]], si necesitas ayuda o algo ha ido mal
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - si tienes una copia de seguridad
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>j9dcrxq91v1aakjpe41xv00i9kpv67j</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402973</id>
      <parentid>5402926</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:46:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="46938" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Resumen general ==

=== Transferencia de archivos ===

Elige un método para transferir los archivos:

* [[w:es:Wget|wget]]
* Copia segura con [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] o [[w:es:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:es:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Usando un cliente [[w:es:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]]
* En el caso de un servidor hospedado, la empresa que hospeda el servidor quizá ofrezca una interfaz para su administración vía navegador web; consulta con tu proveedor.
* Algún otro método. Puedes ver una lista en [[w:List of file transfer protocols]].

=== Pasos preliminares ===

Lee {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=el archivo de texto UPGRADE incluido en MediaWiki}}.

# Comprueba los requisitos
# Lee el archivo RELEASE-NOTES
# Lee el archivo UPGRADE
# Haz una copia de seguridad de los archivos existentes y de la base de datos
# Extrae los nuevos archivos
# Actualiza las extensiones
# Ejecuta el script de actualización para comprobar la base de datos
# Prueba la actualización
# Elimina restos de archivos que pudieron quedar de instalaciones anteriores

== Comprobación de requisitos == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} requiere:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Uno de los siguientes:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Desde la versión 1.36, MediaWiki solo soporta actualizaciones desde dos versiones LTS anteriores (véase [[phab:T259771]]). Actualizaciones desde versiones más antiguas tendrán que realizarse en múltiples pasos.
Esto significa que si quieres actualizar a la versión 1.36 desde 1.23 o anterior, primero tendrás que actualizar de 1.23 a 1.27 (o 1.35), y una vez en la versión 1.27 (o 1.35) serás capaz de actualizar a 1.36.

Si estás usando PostgreSQL, lee también {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Para más información, lee {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} y {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Lee las notas sobre cambios ==
En el archivo comprimido de la instalación, o en los archivos obtenidos desde [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], encontrarás algunos archivos cuyos nombres se encuentran complemente en mayúsculas. Uno de ellos contiene las notas sobre cambios: '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Ahora es el momento de abrirlo y ver qué es lo que ha cambiado en esta versión.
También deberías leer las instrucciones del archivo UPGRADE.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Limpiar los trabajos pendientes ==
Por cuestiones de rendimiento, algunas acciones en la base de datos se realizan en diferido, gestionadas por la [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|cola de trabajos]].
Estos trabajos se guardan en base de datos y contienen parámetros con información sobre acciones que deben realizarse.
Se recomienda encarecidamente correr los trabajos pendientes antes de actualizar el wiki, para evitar que fallen en caso de que la especificación de los parámetros de estos trabajos cambie en la nueva versión.
Usa {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} para correr todos los trabajos pendientes y limpiar la cola de trabajos antes de realizar la actualización.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Haz una copia de seguridad de los archivos existentes y de la base de datos ==

:''Instrucciones completas en [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|Manual: Hacer copia de seguridad de un wiki]]''

Pese a que los scripts de actualización se mantienen al día y son robustos, siempre cabe la posibilidad de que algo pueda salir mal. Antes de proceder a actualizar la estructura de la base de datos, '''haz una [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|copia de seguridad]] completa''' del wiki, que incluya tanto la base de datos como los archivos:

* el contenido del wiki, empezando por la base de datos (asegúrate de que especificas correctamente el '''juego de caracteres''', mira primero en LocalSettings.php). Puede ser una buena idea generar un volcado XML además del volcado SQL de la base de datos.
:* MySQL &amp;mdash; tanto el volcado SQL como XML se pueden hacer con los comandos de la propia base de datos:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL &amp;mdash; volcado de base de datos para usar luego con el comando &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite &amp;mdash; puedes usar un script de MediaWiki para crear la copia de seguridad:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* imágenes y otros archivos multimedia (el contenido del directorio &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;, logotipo personalizado /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* archivos de configuración, como por ejemplo &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (si está presente)
* archivos del programa MediaWiki, incluyendo todas las apariencias y extensiones, especialmente si has hecho modificaciones.

== Extrae los nuevos archivos ==

=== Usando un archivo comprimido ===

Puedes poner los nuevos archivos en su lugar usando FTP o desde la línea de comandos. ¡Preferiblemente, usa la línea de comandos si tienes acceso a ella! La línea de comandos será mucho más rápida que tener que subir uno a uno los miles de archivos que componen la instalación vía FTP.

{{Note|1=Deberías extraer los archivos en un nuevo directorio vacío en el servidor. Si extraes los archivos de la nueva versión directamente encima de los antiguos en lugar de hacerlo en un directorio nuevo, deberás seguir las instrucciones descritas en [[#Back up existing files and the database|Haz una copia de seguridad de los archivos existentes y de la base de datos]]; de no hacerlo, si has realizado alguna modificación en los archivos de instalación, podrías perder esas modificaciones, quedándote sin referencias para aplicarlas de nuevo. Extraer los archivos directamente encima de tu copia actual de MediaWiki puede también dejar por ahí archivos de la versión anterior que podrían interferir con el código de la nueva versión. Te recomendamos que extraigas los nuevos archivos en un nuevo directorio, y que entonces apliques en el nuevo directorio las modificaciones que estimes oportunas (restaurar 'LocalSettings.php', la carpeta 'images', las extensiones y otras personalizaciones como pueden ser las apariencias personalizadas).}}

==== FTP o interfaz gráfico ====

Si no tienes acceso a tu servidor a nivel de línea de comandos, descarga el archivo comprimido de MediaWiki a tu ordenador local y usa [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] para descomprimirlo.

Una vez extraídos los archivos, usa tu cliente FTP preferido para subir los directorios y archivos al servidor.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Línea de comandos ====
Es posible que necesites ejecutar el comando con &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; si tu cuenta de usuario no tiene permiso total de escritura para escribir en el directorio de instalación del wiki.
Al extraer el paquete de MediaWiki normalmente se creará un nuevo directorio para la versión de MediaWiki, y tendrás que copiar los archivos de configuración y el directorio 'images' desde el directorio donde se encuentra la instalación anterior:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

Los usuarios de (Open)Solaris tienen que usar &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, o:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===Otros archivos===

Tras extraer los archivos, deberás copiar o mover algunos archivos y directorios desde el antiguo directorio de instalación al nuevo:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - contiene las opciones de configuración anteriores.
* El directorio &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (o &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; en versiones anteriores), que contiene todos los archivos subidos al wiki, salvo que hayas especificado un directorio de subida de archivos diferente. Deberás cambiar el propietario y los permisos como sea oportuno, por ejemplo con &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; si el usuario web es ''apache''.
* Extensiones del directorio &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;. Deberías siempre usar versiones actualizadas de las extensiones; no se garantiza que las extensiones antiguas funcionen con una versión más reciente de MediaWiki.
* Si estás usando un [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|logotipo personalizado]], también necesitas copiar este archivo desde la copia de seguridad. Antes de la versión 1.24 normalmente se encontraba en &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. A partir de la versión 1.24 se encuentra en &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt;, o en &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; si preferiste usarlo así. Entonces indícalo en LocalSettings.php, por ejemplo con &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;.
* Para 1.35 puede que necesites restaurar los logotipos desde [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Luego añade a LocalSettings.php por ejemplo &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Apariencias personalizadas del directorio &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;.
* Cualquier modificación realizada a los anteriores archivos de instalación o a las extensiones.
* Cualquier archivo .htaccess (si usas Apache y has definido alguna regla en ellos).

Una vez hecho esto, convierte este nuevo directorio en el directorio publicado en el servidor, o renombra el directorio de instalación anterior y después renombra el nuevo para que coincida con el nombre que estabas usando.

=== Usando Git ===

Si usas {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, exporta los archivos a un directorio vacío, y a continuación copia sólo los archivos modificados al nuevo directorio tal como se explica en la sección anterior.

También necesitarás instalar algunas bibliotecas de PHP externo que utilizan Compositor o una colección proporcionada mantenida para el Wikimedia wiki granja.
Puedes encontrar más detalles sobre la instalación y actualización de las bibliotecas externas en la [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|documentación de descarga desde Git]].

=== Usando un parche ===
Por cada actualización menor normalmente también se publica un archivo de parches.
Necesitarás descargar [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] para usar esto.
Descarga y extrae el archivo de parches manualmente desde [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ el sitio de volcados] o sigue estas instrucciones con wget.
Los parches son incrementales, por lo que '''no''' puedes saltarte ninguna versión.

# Cambia con &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; al directorio principal de tu instalación de MediaWiki (el que contiene LocalSettings.php).
# Descarga el archivo de parches y descomprímelo con &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt;.
# Usa &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; para comprobar qué se cambiará (''ejemplo:'' &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Si todo va bien, ejecuta &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; nuevamente, pero esta vez sin &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
# Visita Especial:Versión y deberías ver el nuevo número de versión en su lugar.

=== Archivos antiguos que pueden causar errores ===

Si descomprimiste los archivos directamente encima de la versión anterior, algunos archivos antiguos pueden causar problemas en la nueva versión.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Si no estás usando [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|perfilado]], pero tienes un archivo &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; en el directorio raíz de MediaWiki, puedes encontrarte errores que hacen referencia a &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.
Borrar o renombrar el archivo &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; puede resolver este error. Si en el futuro activas el perfilado, puedes usar como plantilla el archivo &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;, que también se encuentra en el directorio raíz de MediaWiki.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
Desde MediaWiki 1.23 no existe ningún mecanismo de detección automática de archivos de apariencias; por lo tanto, tras actualizarte a la versión 1.23 o posteriores, asegúrate de que se han eliminado los antiguos archivos &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; del directorio &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;, así como los subdirectorios correspondientes del directorio &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;. Para ayudarte a recordarlo, MediaWiki guardará avisos si encuentra uno cualquiera de estos antiguos elementos. También necesitarás modificar cualquier apariencia que se haya personalizado a fin de seguir la misma convención. Mira {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} para más información.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 cambia las rutas de los archivos principales de las apariencias. Tras actualizarte a esta versión o a una posterior, debes asegurarte de que ya no están presentes los antiguos archivos &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directamente en el directorio &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;. Mira {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} para más información.

== Actualiza las extensiones ==

Algunas extensiones han sido actualizadas para que funcionen con la nueva versión de MediaWiki. Asegúrate de usar la versión más reciente de estas extensiones. Puede que necesites realizar actualizaciones manualmente en el caso de extensiones que hayas modificado.

Los distintos [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|archivos de distribución basados en tar]] incluyen algunas extensiones y cuentan con control de versiones para ayudarte en caso de una actualización a elegir la versión adecuada para la versión que tengas instalada de MediaWiki.

El [[Special:ExtensionDistributor|distribuidor de extensiones]] va bien para la mayoría de la gente que busca una ''instantánea'' de las extensiones que funcionan con las versiones soportadas de MediaWiki.

Si te propones descargar un gran número de extensiones, entonces probablemente sea mejor [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|descargarlas desde Git]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Adapta tu LocalSettings.php ==

Si vas a usar el mismo archivo &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; que con la versión anterior, puede que necesites adaptarlo a cómo lo usan las nuevas versiones.

=== Registro de apariencias ===

Desde MediaWiki 1.24, las apariencias incluidas en el paquete -como Vector, Monobook, Modern y CologneBlue- ya no forman parte del núcleo de MediaWiki, y debes registrarlas explícitamente en &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; para poder usarlas, en caso contrario MediaWiki mostrará un aviso indicando que no tienes ninguna apariencia instalada.

Esto es lo que debes añadir a &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; cuando actualices desde una versión anterior a la 1.24 y quieras tener disponible alguna de estas apariencias:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

El resto de apariencias pueden no haber sido todavía adaptadas al nuevo sistema de [[Manual:Extension registration|registro de apariencias]], así que en caso de problemas, consulta la página de documentación de cada una de ellas para ver cómo registrarlas correctamente.

=== Registro de extensiones ===

Desde MediaWiki 1.25, las extensiones usan un nuevo sistema de [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension registration|registro de extensiones]].

En versiones anteriores, tu &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; incluiría algo como esto:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Esto puede convertirse en:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Las extensiones están siendo adaptadas para usar el nuevo sistema de registro.
Las extensiones que no se han adaptado deberían seguir usando el sistema antiguo de instalación.
Para más información, consulta las instrucciones de instalación en la página de cada extensión.

=== Otras variables ===
Algunas variables pueden haber sido declaradas obsoletas o haberse eliminado completamente.
Normalmente, tenerlas aún en &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; no tendrá efecto alguno.
En las nuevas versiones de MediaWiki pueden añadirse nuevas variables, como también puede cambiar el tipo de una variable ya existente.
Normalmente intentamos usar valores predeterminados para ellas que sean seguros, y en caso de cambiar su tipo, procuramos mantener compatibilidad hacia abajo.
En cualquier caso, revisa las notas de lanzamiento para ver si ha habido algún cambio de este tipo.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Ejecuta el script de actualización ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
La base de datos de MediaWiki puede actualizarse de dos maneras: desde la línea de comandos, o desde el navegador. Si tienes acceso a tu servidor a nivel de línea de comandos, ésa es la manera recomendada, puesto que esto reduce el riesgo de que el proceso de actualización se vea interrumpido por una petición caducada o un reinicio en la conexión.

El script también intentará descargar cualquier software del que dependa MediaWiki y que no esté presente.

=== Línea de comandos ===

Accede a la línea de comandos de tu servidor, ya sea con una cuenta SSH o similar. Puedes acceder a la línea de comandos conectando con tu servidor vía SSH. Si el ordenador local desde el que estás trabajando corre Microsoft Windows, necesitarás una herramienta como [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] para poder usar SSH. Desde la línea de comandos, accede al directorio &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; y ejecuta el [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|script de actualización]]:

 $ php update.php

En un servidor linux si obtienes un error intenta ejecutar el mismo comando como raiz (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Nota para instalaciones simples en Windows (por ejemplo, con {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

Quizá te encuentres con un mensaje que dice que tu versión de PHP es muy antigua y que necesitas una versión más reciente.
Tras ese mensaje, el proceso de actualización se cancela.
El motivo de este error es que la línea de comandos está usando una versión de PHP distinta de la que se usa cuando se ejecuta MediaWiki desde el servidor web.
Si te encuentras este mensaje, deberás comprobar si puedes ejcutar una versión más reciente de PHP en la línea de comando usando un comando distinto: podría ser por ejemplo ''php5'' o ''php56''
Que haya o no otra versión disponible, y en tal caso, bajo otro nombre, es algo que depende de la configuración de tu servidor.
Si no puedes solucionarlo, consulta a tu proveedor, ellos seguramente sabrán si la hay.

MediaWiki examinará la estructura existente y la actualizará para trabajar con el nuevo código, añadiendo tablas y columnas según sea necesario.

{{Note|1=Si usas una [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|base de datos compartida]], deberás pasar el parámetro &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; si quieres que se actualicen las tablas compartidas; de lo contrario, el script de actualización no tocará esas tablas.}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

==== Qué hacer en caso de un error &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; (o similar) ====

En caso de que el script cancele la actualización con un mensaje similar a

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

esto significa que debes comprobar si has definido {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} y {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} en tu archivo {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} (en el directorio raíz de MediaWiki). Estos valores son el nombre de usuario y la contraseña que necesita el script para poder acceder a la base de datos.

En algunos casos, una variable antigua $wgDBmwschema (para Postgres) parece ser usada para el nombre de tabla para actualizar, en vez de $wgDBname, incluso cuando se está usando mysql. Si se da este caso, simplemente borra la definición de $wgDBmwschema en LocalSettings.php.

==== Qué hacer en caso de un error &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; ====

Si estás ejecutando update.php desde la línea de comando, es posible que te encuentres este error:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

Esto ocurre cuando se ejecuta update.php con php4.

Si estás usando un servidor hospedado con un proveedor que proporciona tanto php4 como php5, deberás seguir los siguientes pasos:

# Desde la línea de comando, introduce el comando 'whereis php5'
# Una vez que hayas descubierto la ubicación de php5, pide un listado con el contenido del directorio php5/bin.
# Cuando conozcas el nombre del ejecutable PHP (que puede ser php o php5), teclea la ruta completa para ejecutar update.php.

He aquí un ejemplo:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

====Qué hacer en caso de un error 'register_argc_argv is set to false'====

Quizá te encuentres el error
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Vé a ~/maintenance y edita el archivo 'php.ini', o créalo si no existe 
# Añade una línea así:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Vuelve a ejecutar &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===Navegador web===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Véase también {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Si tu base de datos tiene ya un tamaño considerable y se encuentra bajo uso intensivo, no deberías usar el actualizador vía web, dado que el proceso de actualización caducará cuando se alcance el tiempo máximo de ejecución establecido en PHP (''maximum_execution_time''). En este caso deberías usar [[update.php]] desde el interfaz de línea de comandos y no desde la web. Qué es exactamente un &quot;tamaño considerable&quot; es algo que depende de tu servidor (por ejemplo, su rendimiento, la carga de trabajo que tiene y el tiempo máximo de ejecución que concede PHP al script para cumplir su cometido). Si tu wiki es demasiado grande para el actualizador vía web y tu empresa de hospedaje no te da acceso mediante línea de comandos, entonces tendrás que trasladar tu wiki a otro proveedor, preferiblemente a uno que sí ofrezca acceso desde línea de comandos.

# Haz siempre una [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|copia de seguridad de tu wiki]] antes de realizar cualquier labor de mantenimiento en la base de datos.
# Visita &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt; desde tu navegador. Por ejemplo, si tu wiki está en &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, navega a &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
# Elige tu idioma y pulsa 'Continuar'.
# La instalación existente debería detectarse automáticamente. Sigue las instrucciones en pantalla para actualizarla.&lt;br /&gt;Si se te pide una &quot;contraseña de actualización&quot;, abre tu archivo {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} y busca el valor de {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.

Puede suceder que el actualizador vía web parezca no funcionar: en lugar de ver la pantalla inicial de selección de idioma, podría salir una página vacía, posiblemente con algún mensaje de error. En este caso lo más probable es que tu servidor use reglas de reescritura (muy posiblemente para usar [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|URLs cortos]]), que hacen que no aparezca el actualizador de ''mw-config/'' sino una página wiki de ''Mw-config/'', con una &quot;M&quot; en mayúsculas. En este caso, renombra el archivo ''.htaccess'' mientras se hace la actualización, con lo cual deberías poder acceder al actualizador vía web.

{{Warning|1=Si usas este método, ¡asegúrate de '''volver a renombrar el archivo .htaccess''' después de ejecutar el script de actualización! ¡De lo contrario, tanto los URLs cortos como posiblemente otras cosas dejarán de funcionar!}}

== Prueba la actualización ==

Una vez que haya concluido la actualización, navega por el wiki y comprueba que estas operaciones funcionan como deberían:

* Ver páginas
* Editar páginas
* Subir un archivo
* Visitar [[Special:Version]] y comprobar que la versión que aparece es correcta y que las extensiones están presentes.

== Limpia restos de instalaciones anteriores ==
Si has copiado tu anterior instalación a otra carpeta en el servidor, asegúrate de eliminarla o hacerla completamente inaccesible de la web.
Es muy importante no dejar instalaciones previas accesibles desde la web, ya que se pierde por completo el propósito de actualizar, y deja tu servidor expuesto a ataques.

== Preguntas frecuentes ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===¿Cómo de difícil es actualizar MediaWiki?===

Si el único archivo que has modificado es {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} y estás actualizando desde la versión 1.5 o posterior, el proceso es muy sencillo. La cantidad de trabajo que lleva es de sólo unos minutos. Los cambios en la estructura de la base de datos llevarán un tiempo proporcional al tamaño de tu base de datos — potencialmente pueden ser varias horas en el caso de wikis con millones de páginas, mientras que si es un tamaño típico de unos pocos miles de páginas, normalmente será cuestión de unos segundos.

Las actualizaciones menores, dentro de la misma versión principal, desde {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 a {{MW legacy release number}}, no requieren absolutamente ningún esquema de cambios.
Puedes simplemente actualizar los archivos. La base de datos no necesita ninguna actualización, por ello no es necesario ejecutar el script de actualización.

Actualizar desde la versión 1.4 o anteriores es algo potencialmente complicado porque se abandonó el soporte para los juegos de caracteres que no fuesen el UTF-8, y el esquema para almacenar texto en bloque fue modificado. Por favor, lee la sección correspondiente del archivo &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt;.

La actualización se vuelve más difícil si has modificado nuestro código fuente y no quieres que se sobreescriban tus cambios. Herramientas como [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] o [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] pueden resultarte útiles. También hay un problema potencial si estás usando extensiones cuyo mantenimiento ha sido abandonado; actualiza tus extensiones al mismo tiempo que actualizas MediaWiki.

Si has modificado la apariencia o usas una apariencia personalizada, muy posiblemente tengas que ajustarla para que funcione de nuevo con la nueva versión de MediaWiki.

{{Tip|1=En lugar de parchear tus archivos de CSS y JavaScript &quot;globales&quot; cada vez que actualizas el software, puedes simplemente añadir el código a tus páginas &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Common.js&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Common.css&lt;/code&gt;. Puesto que estas páginas forman parte de la base de datos, que será reutilizada cuando hagas la actualización, no tendrás que volver a parchear los archivos del núcleo de MediaWiki.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
===¿Cómo actualizo desde una versión muy, muy antigua? ¿En uno, o en varios pasos?===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Depende. Si estás '''actualizando desde MediaWiki 1.4 o una versión anterior''', deberías actualizar primero a MediaWiki 1.5. Si estás actualizando desde un wiki que usa Latin-1, utiliza &lt;code&gt;upgrade1_5.php&lt;/code&gt; (que encontrarás en el archivo de MediaWiki 1.5) para convertir las partes correspondientes de la base de datos a UTF-8 ($latin tiene que estar a TRUE en tu $localsettings para que esto funcione). A continuación, ejecuta &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;, e indica en la variable $legacy de LocalSettings.php el sistema de codificación usado anteriormente en el wiki (por ejemplo, windows-1252). Así es básicamente cómo se actualizaron Wikipedia y otros sitios de la Fundación Wikimedia cuando pasaron de MediaWiki 1.4 a la versión 1.5; mira el [$noc archivo de opciones en cuestión (¡ojo: este archivo es muy grande!)] y algunas [[$wikitech|notas al respecto en Wikitech]] para más detalles. También es posible que necesites actualizar a MediaWiki 1.4 para poder ejecutar el script de actualización a la versión 1.5.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
Si quieres hacer un volcado de base de datos (p. ej. MySQL) del wiki en codificación Latin-1 wiki, asegúrate que el tipo del campo &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; en la tabla {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} es &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, no &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, para evitar problemas con la codificación de caracteres.

Si estás '''actualizando desde MediaWiki 1.5 o posterior''' hasta '''1.35''' entonces puedes realizar la actualización en un sólo paso, desde tu vieja versión a la versión estable más reciente.
La inmensa mayoría de informes, además de las pruebas automatizadas, indican que hacerlo en un único paso funciona perfectamente.
Si no te lo crees, lee [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|este mensaje de lista de correo]].
Sin embargo, has de tener en cuenta que al actualizar desde versiones muy antiguas, las posibilidades de que te encuentres errores de PHP son mayores que si estuvieses actualizando desde la versión inmediatamente anterior a la nueva.
Habría recibido estos errores de todos modos, si no se hubiera saltado las versiones, pero los errores se habrían asociado con cada actualización individual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
Esto hará que la actualización sea más difícil, pero no olvides que ¡también te ahorras actualizar primero a todas las versiones que te estás saltando!

Si estás '''actualizando a MediaWiki 1.36''' o posterior, sólo están soportadas las actualizaciones desde las últimas dos versiones LTS ([[phab:T259771]]). Esto significa que, para versiones muy viejas, primero tendrás que actualizar a MediaWiki 1.35, y de ahí a 1.36.

===¿Debería hacer primero una copia de seguridad?===

Respuesta breve: sí.

Respuesta más larga: depende de (a) en cuánto valoras tu información, (b) cómo de difícil sería hacer la copia de seguridad, y (c) la experiencia que tienes en el mantenimiento y administración de MySQL. 

Un fallo en la actualización puede dejar tu base de datos en un estado inconsistente, a medio camino entre dos versiones distintas.
Podría aparecer un error de PHP o de MySQL durante la actualización, dejando tu base de datos actualizada a medias.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

La recuperación de una situación así es a menudo complicada.
Los voluntarios que atienden los foros de soporte es poco probable que reciban con agrado la noticia de que no tienes una copia de seguridad y que ahora necesitas ayuda para salvar los muebles porque ha habido corrupción de datos durante una actualización.
Una situación más deseable sería que pudieses repetir el proceso echando mano de tu copia de seguridad, para a continuación [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|informar del fallo identificando el componente de MediaWiki]] que causó la corrupción de datos durante el proceso de actualización.

===¿Puedo conservar mi LocalSettings.php?===
Sí, pero puede que tengas que hacer algunos pequeños cambios. El formato de {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} es fundamentalmente compatible hacia abajo.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

===¿Puede mi wiki seguir funcionando mientras se actualiza?===

Generalmente sí, aunque Git puede inutilizarlo temporalmente (durante unos pocos segundos).

Si estás actualizando entre versiones menores de MediaWiki, lo único que necesitas es sustituir los antiguos archivos con los nuevos.

Nota: lo que sigue da por supuesto que tienes acceso a nivel de línea de comandos. Si estás actualizando entre versiones mayores de MediaWiki, el procedimiento recomendado es el siguiente:

# Descomprime la nueva versión de MediaWiki a un nuevo directorio.
# Prepara el nuevo directorio: copia tu LocalSettings.php del antiguo directorio, así como las extensiones y apariencias personalizadas que puedas tener instaladas. Verifique la configuración de {{wg|Logo}} y {{wg|Logos}} en LocalSettings.php y, si fuese necesario, copia el archivo del logo del directorio antiguo al nuevo.
# En las notas de lanzamiento de la nueva versión, mira si hace falta hacer cambios en LocalSettings.php.
# Pon la base de datos en modo lectura insertando la siguiente variable en el LocalSettings.php del viejo directorio; los usuarios verán este mensaje si intentan editar una página durante el proceso de actualización:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Esta opción no sirve a partir de MediaWiki 1.27, donde también impide ejecutar el script de actualización. Una solución alternativa la puedes encontrar en la página {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. Consulta también {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Ejecuta el [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|script de actualización]] o el actualizador web en el nuevo directorio.
# Copia el subdirectorio 'images' del antiguo directorio al nuevo directorio.
# Intercambia el antiguo directorio con el nuevo.

===¿Por qué actualizar?===
:''Suscríbete a [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] para recibir notificaciones de nuevos lanzamientos.''

Porque [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|suele ser fácil hacerlo]], con [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|un único paso para cambiarte a la versión más reciente]] y también [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|vía web]].

Las versiones recientes reciben correcciones en la seguridad que hacen que tu wiki y tu servidor estén mejor protegidos contra los vándalos, cosa que no ocurre con las versiones antiguas (véase {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). ¡Ya sólo éso supone docenas de motivos para actualizarte!

Los lanzamientos donde hay un cambio de versión mayor traen nueva funcionalidad que te puede interesar: mira las notas de lanzamiento para más detalles. En caso de que necesites más argumentos para convencer a tus jefes de que te dejen actualizar una antigua versión, aquí va una lista:

* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|las ediciones pueden previsualizarse antes de guardar]] también como un diff.
* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}} hay un [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|botón deshacer]].
* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrullar]] en [[Special:NewPages|Especial:PáginasNuevas]] es mucho más sencillo.
* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, puedes [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|renombrar]] (trasladar) archivos.
* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, puedes [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|reparar las redirecciones dobles]] automáticamente.
* Desde la versión {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}} está disponible {{ll|InstantCommons}}.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Desde la versión 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|¡la ordenación de las categorías tiene sentido!]] (especialmente con caracteres que no usa el inglés); ampliado a 68 idiomas después de {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
* Desde las versiones {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} y {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, la interfaz y los [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|registros]] se dirigen correctamente a los usuarios de todos los idiomas y géneros (antes de la versión 1.15, no había distinción de ningún tipo por género).
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Desde [[MediaWiki 1.20|la versión 1.20]], los [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] son más legibles.
* En las versiones [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] y [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], las notificaciones por correo electrónico se volvieron más claras y predecibles, haciendo que tu wiki sea más efectivo.
* Desde [[MediaWiki 1.22|la versión 1.22]], la lucha contra el vandalismo (patrullar) consume menos tiempo.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

También, en {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} empezamos a incluir en el archivo de MediaWiki [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|algunas extensiones vitales]], como un editor mejor y las herramientas anti-vandalismo ConfirmEdit y Nuke; en versiones más recientes se han ido añadiendo más.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Véase también ==

* Un artículo del blog de Greg Sabino Mullane que ofrece [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html más detalles sobre las pequeñas actualizaciones]
* La [[Project:Support desk|mesa de ayuda]], si necesitas ayuda o algo ha ido mal
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - si tienes una copia de seguridad
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>m2eedfu9rz58jxspa0a1ml2rp7jonad</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402977</id>
      <parentid>5402973</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:46:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="46914" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Resumen general ==

=== Transferencia de archivos ===

Elige un método para transferir los archivos:

* [[w:es:Wget|wget]]
* Copia segura con [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] o [[w:es:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:es:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Usando un cliente [[w:es:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]]
* En el caso de un servidor hospedado, la empresa que hospeda el servidor quizá ofrezca una interfaz para su administración vía navegador web; consulta con tu proveedor.
* Algún otro método. Puedes ver una lista en [[w:List of file transfer protocols]].

=== Pasos preliminares ===

Lee {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=el archivo de texto UPGRADE incluido en MediaWiki}}.

# Comprueba los requisitos
# Lee el archivo RELEASE-NOTES
# Lee el archivo UPGRADE
# Haz una copia de seguridad de los archivos existentes y de la base de datos
# Extrae los nuevos archivos
# Actualiza las extensiones
# Ejecuta el script de actualización para comprobar la base de datos
# Prueba la actualización
# Elimina restos de archivos que pudieron quedar de instalaciones anteriores

== Comprobación de requisitos == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} requiere:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Uno de los siguientes:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Desde la versión 1.36, MediaWiki solo soporta actualizaciones desde dos versiones LTS anteriores (véase [[phab:T259771]]). Actualizaciones desde versiones más antiguas tendrán que realizarse en múltiples pasos.
Esto significa que si quieres actualizar a la versión 1.36 desde 1.23 o anterior, primero tendrás que actualizar de 1.23 a 1.27 (o 1.35), y una vez en la versión 1.27 (o 1.35) serás capaz de actualizar a 1.36.

Si estás usando PostgreSQL, lee también {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Para más información, lee {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} y {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Lee las notas sobre cambios ==
En el archivo comprimido de la instalación, o en los archivos obtenidos desde [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], encontrarás algunos archivos cuyos nombres se encuentran complemente en mayúsculas. Uno de ellos contiene las notas sobre cambios: '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Ahora es el momento de abrirlo y ver qué es lo que ha cambiado en esta versión.
También deberías leer las instrucciones del archivo UPGRADE.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Limpiar los trabajos pendientes ==
Por cuestiones de rendimiento, algunas acciones en la base de datos se realizan en diferido, gestionadas por la [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|cola de trabajos]].
Estos trabajos se guardan en base de datos y contienen parámetros con información sobre acciones que deben realizarse.
Se recomienda encarecidamente correr los trabajos pendientes antes de actualizar el wiki, para evitar que fallen en caso de que la especificación de los parámetros de estos trabajos cambie en la nueva versión.
Usa {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} para correr todos los trabajos pendientes y limpiar la cola de trabajos antes de realizar la actualización.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Haz una copia de seguridad de los archivos existentes y de la base de datos ==

:''Instrucciones completas en [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|Manual: Hacer copia de seguridad de un wiki]]''

Pese a que los scripts de actualización se mantienen al día y son robustos, siempre cabe la posibilidad de que algo pueda salir mal. Antes de proceder a actualizar la estructura de la base de datos, '''haz una [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|copia de seguridad]] completa''' del wiki, que incluya tanto la base de datos como los archivos:

* el contenido del wiki, empezando por la base de datos (asegúrate de que especificas correctamente el '''juego de caracteres''', mira primero en LocalSettings.php). Puede ser una buena idea generar un volcado XML además del volcado SQL de la base de datos.
:* MySQL &amp;mdash; tanto el volcado SQL como XML se pueden hacer con los comandos de la propia base de datos:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL &amp;mdash; volcado de base de datos para usar luego con el comando &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite &amp;mdash; puedes usar un script de MediaWiki para crear la copia de seguridad:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* imágenes y otros archivos multimedia (el contenido del directorio &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;, logotipo personalizado /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* archivos de configuración, como por ejemplo &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (si está presente)
* archivos del programa MediaWiki, incluyendo todas las apariencias y extensiones, especialmente si has hecho modificaciones.

== Extrae los nuevos archivos ==

=== Usando un archivo comprimido ===

Puedes poner los nuevos archivos en su lugar usando FTP o desde la línea de comandos. ¡Preferiblemente, usa la línea de comandos si tienes acceso a ella! La línea de comandos será mucho más rápida que tener que subir uno a uno los miles de archivos que componen la instalación vía FTP.

{{Note|1=Deberías extraer los archivos en un nuevo directorio vacío en el servidor. Si extraes los archivos de la nueva versión directamente encima de los antiguos en lugar de hacerlo en un directorio nuevo, deberás seguir las instrucciones descritas en [[#Back up existing files and the database|Haz una copia de seguridad de los archivos existentes y de la base de datos]]; de no hacerlo, si has realizado alguna modificación en los archivos de instalación, podrías perder esas modificaciones, quedándote sin referencias para aplicarlas de nuevo. Extraer los archivos directamente encima de tu copia actual de MediaWiki puede también dejar por ahí archivos de la versión anterior que podrían interferir con el código de la nueva versión. Te recomendamos que extraigas los nuevos archivos en un nuevo directorio, y que entonces apliques en el nuevo directorio las modificaciones que estimes oportunas (restaurar 'LocalSettings.php', la carpeta 'images', las extensiones y otras personalizaciones como pueden ser las apariencias personalizadas).}}

==== FTP o interfaz gráfico ====

Si no tienes acceso a tu servidor a nivel de línea de comandos, descarga el archivo comprimido de MediaWiki a tu ordenador local y usa [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] para descomprimirlo.

Una vez extraídos los archivos, usa tu cliente FTP preferido para subir los directorios y archivos al servidor.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Línea de comandos ====
Es posible que necesites ejecutar el comando con &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; si tu cuenta de usuario no tiene permiso total de escritura para escribir en el directorio de instalación del wiki.
Al extraer el paquete de MediaWiki normalmente se creará un nuevo directorio para la versión de MediaWiki, y tendrás que copiar los archivos de configuración y el directorio 'images' desde el directorio donde se encuentra la instalación anterior:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

Los usuarios de (Open)Solaris tienen que usar &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, o:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===Otros archivos===

Tras extraer los archivos, deberás copiar o mover algunos archivos y directorios desde el antiguo directorio de instalación al nuevo:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - contiene las opciones de configuración anteriores.
* El directorio &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (o &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; en versiones anteriores), que contiene todos los archivos subidos al wiki, salvo que hayas especificado un directorio de subida de archivos diferente. Deberás cambiar el propietario y los permisos como sea oportuno, por ejemplo con &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; si el usuario web es ''apache''.
* Extensiones del directorio &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;. Deberías siempre usar versiones actualizadas de las extensiones; no se garantiza que las extensiones antiguas funcionen con una versión más reciente de MediaWiki.
* Si estás usando un [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|logotipo personalizado]], también necesitas copiar este archivo desde la copia de seguridad. Antes de la versión 1.24 normalmente se encontraba en &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. A partir de la versión 1.24 se encuentra en &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt;, o en &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; si preferiste usarlo así. Entonces indícalo en LocalSettings.php, por ejemplo con &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;.
* Para 1.35 puede que necesites restaurar los logotipos desde [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Luego añade a LocalSettings.php por ejemplo &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Apariencias personalizadas del directorio &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;.
* Cualquier modificación realizada a los anteriores archivos de instalación o a las extensiones.
* Cualquier archivo .htaccess (si usas Apache y has definido alguna regla en ellos).

Una vez hecho esto, convierte este nuevo directorio en el directorio publicado en el servidor, o renombra el directorio de instalación anterior y después renombra el nuevo para que coincida con el nombre que estabas usando.

=== Usando Git ===

Si usas {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, exporta los archivos a un directorio vacío, y a continuación copia sólo los archivos modificados al nuevo directorio tal como se explica en la sección anterior.

También necesitarás instalar algunas bibliotecas de PHP externo que utilizan Compositor o una colección proporcionada mantenida para el Wikimedia wiki granja.
Puedes encontrar más detalles sobre la instalación y actualización de las bibliotecas externas en la [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|documentación de descarga desde Git]].

=== Usando un parche ===
Por cada actualización menor normalmente también se publica un archivo de parches.
Necesitarás descargar [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] para usar esto.
Descarga y extrae el archivo de parches manualmente desde [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ el sitio de volcados] o sigue estas instrucciones con wget.
Los parches son incrementales, por lo que '''no''' puedes saltarte ninguna versión.

# Cambia con &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; al directorio principal de tu instalación de MediaWiki (el que contiene LocalSettings.php).
# Descarga el archivo de parches y descomprímelo con &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt;.
# Usa &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; para comprobar qué se cambiará (''ejemplo:'' &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Si todo va bien, ejecuta &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; nuevamente, pero esta vez sin &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
# Visita Especial:Versión y deberías ver el nuevo número de versión en su lugar.

=== Archivos antiguos que pueden causar errores ===

Si descomprimiste los archivos directamente encima de la versión anterior, algunos archivos antiguos pueden causar problemas en la nueva versión.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Si no estás usando [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|perfilado]], pero tienes un archivo &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; en el directorio raíz de MediaWiki, puedes encontrarte errores que hacen referencia a &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.
Borrar o renombrar el archivo &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; puede resolver este error. Si en el futuro activas el perfilado, puedes usar como plantilla el archivo &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;, que también se encuentra en el directorio raíz de MediaWiki.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
Desde MediaWiki 1.23 no existe ningún mecanismo de detección automática de archivos de apariencias; por lo tanto, tras actualizarte a la versión 1.23 o posteriores, asegúrate de que se han eliminado los antiguos archivos &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; del directorio &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;, así como los subdirectorios correspondientes del directorio &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;. Para ayudarte a recordarlo, MediaWiki guardará avisos si encuentra uno cualquiera de estos antiguos elementos. También necesitarás modificar cualquier apariencia que se haya personalizado a fin de seguir la misma convención. Mira {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} para más información.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 cambia las rutas de los archivos principales de las apariencias. Tras actualizarte a esta versión o a una posterior, debes asegurarte de que ya no están presentes los antiguos archivos &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directamente en el directorio &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;. Mira {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} para más información.

== Actualiza las extensiones ==

Algunas extensiones han sido actualizadas para que funcionen con la nueva versión de MediaWiki. Asegúrate de usar la versión más reciente de estas extensiones. Puede que necesites realizar actualizaciones manualmente en el caso de extensiones que hayas modificado.

Los distintos [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|archivos de distribución basados en tar]] incluyen algunas extensiones y cuentan con control de versiones para ayudarte en caso de una actualización a elegir la versión adecuada para la versión que tengas instalada de MediaWiki.

El [[Special:ExtensionDistributor|distribuidor de extensiones]] va bien para la mayoría de la gente que busca una ''instantánea'' de las extensiones que funcionan con las versiones soportadas de MediaWiki.

Si te propones descargar un gran número de extensiones, entonces probablemente sea mejor [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|descargarlas desde Git]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Adapta tu LocalSettings.php ==

Si vas a usar el mismo archivo &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; que con la versión anterior, puede que necesites adaptarlo a cómo lo usan las nuevas versiones.

=== Registro de apariencias ===

Desde MediaWiki 1.24, las apariencias incluidas en el paquete -como Vector, Monobook, Modern y CologneBlue- ya no forman parte del núcleo de MediaWiki, y debes registrarlas explícitamente en &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; para poder usarlas, en caso contrario MediaWiki mostrará un aviso indicando que no tienes ninguna apariencia instalada.

Esto es lo que debes añadir a &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; cuando actualices desde una versión anterior a la 1.24 y quieras tener disponible alguna de estas apariencias:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

El resto de apariencias pueden no haber sido todavía adaptadas al nuevo sistema de [[Manual:Extension registration|registro de apariencias]], así que en caso de problemas, consulta la página de documentación de cada una de ellas para ver cómo registrarlas correctamente.

=== Registro de extensiones ===

Desde MediaWiki 1.25, las extensiones usan un nuevo sistema de [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension registration|registro de extensiones]].

En versiones anteriores, tu &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; incluiría algo como esto:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Esto puede convertirse en:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Las extensiones están siendo adaptadas para usar el nuevo sistema de registro.
Las extensiones que no se han adaptado deberían seguir usando el sistema antiguo de instalación.
Para más información, consulta las instrucciones de instalación en la página de cada extensión.

=== Otras variables ===
Algunas variables pueden haber sido declaradas obsoletas o haberse eliminado completamente.
Normalmente, tenerlas aún en &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; no tendrá efecto alguno.
En las nuevas versiones de MediaWiki pueden añadirse nuevas variables, como también puede cambiar el tipo de una variable ya existente.
Normalmente intentamos usar valores predeterminados para ellas que sean seguros, y en caso de cambiar su tipo, procuramos mantener compatibilidad hacia abajo.
En cualquier caso, revisa las notas de lanzamiento para ver si ha habido algún cambio de este tipo.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Ejecuta el script de actualización ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
La base de datos de MediaWiki puede actualizarse de dos maneras: desde la línea de comandos, o desde el navegador. Si tienes acceso a tu servidor a nivel de línea de comandos, ésa es la manera recomendada, puesto que esto reduce el riesgo de que el proceso de actualización se vea interrumpido por una petición caducada o un reinicio en la conexión.

El script también intentará descargar cualquier software del que dependa MediaWiki y que no esté presente.

=== Línea de comandos ===

Accede a la línea de comandos de tu servidor, ya sea con una cuenta SSH o similar. Puedes acceder a la línea de comandos conectando con tu servidor vía SSH. Si el ordenador local desde el que estás trabajando corre Microsoft Windows, necesitarás una herramienta como [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] para poder usar SSH. Desde la línea de comandos, accede al directorio &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; y ejecuta el [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|script de actualización]]:

 $ php update.php

En un servidor linux si obtienes un error intenta ejecutar el mismo comando como raiz (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Nota para instalaciones simples en Windows (por ejemplo, con {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

Quizá te encuentres con un mensaje que dice que tu versión de PHP es muy antigua y que necesitas una versión más reciente.
Tras ese mensaje, el proceso de actualización se cancela.
El motivo de este error es que la línea de comandos está usando una versión de PHP distinta de la que se usa cuando se ejecuta MediaWiki desde el servidor web.
Si te encuentras este mensaje, deberás comprobar si puedes ejcutar una versión más reciente de PHP en la línea de comando usando un comando distinto: podría ser por ejemplo ''php5'' o ''php56''
Que haya o no otra versión disponible, y en tal caso, bajo otro nombre, es algo que depende de la configuración de tu servidor.
Si no puedes solucionarlo, consulta a tu proveedor, ellos seguramente sabrán si la hay.

MediaWiki examinará la estructura existente y la actualizará para trabajar con el nuevo código, añadiendo tablas y columnas según sea necesario.

{{Note|1=Si usas una [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|base de datos compartida]], deberás pasar el parámetro &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; si quieres que se actualicen las tablas compartidas; de lo contrario, el script de actualización no tocará esas tablas.}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

==== Qué hacer en caso de un error &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; (o similar) ====

En caso de que el script cancele la actualización con un mensaje similar a

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

esto significa que debes comprobar si has definido {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} y {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} en tu archivo {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} (en el directorio raíz de MediaWiki). Estos valores son el nombre de usuario y la contraseña que necesita el script para poder acceder a la base de datos.

En algunos casos, una variable antigua $wgDBmwschema (para Postgres) parece ser usada para el nombre de tabla para actualizar, en vez de $wgDBname, incluso cuando se está usando mysql. Si se da este caso, simplemente borra la definición de $wgDBmwschema en LocalSettings.php.

==== Qué hacer en caso de un error &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; ====

Si estás ejecutando update.php desde la línea de comando, es posible que te encuentres este error:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

Esto ocurre cuando se ejecuta update.php con php4.

Si estás usando un servidor hospedado con un proveedor que proporciona tanto php4 como php5, deberás seguir los siguientes pasos:

# Desde la línea de comando, introduce el comando 'whereis php5'
# Una vez que hayas descubierto la ubicación de php5, pide un listado con el contenido del directorio php5/bin.
# Cuando conozcas el nombre del ejecutable PHP (que puede ser php o php5), teclea la ruta completa para ejecutar update.php.

He aquí un ejemplo:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

====Qué hacer en caso de un error 'register_argc_argv is set to false'====

Quizá te encuentres el error
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Vé a ~/maintenance y edita el archivo 'php.ini', o créalo si no existe 
# Añade una línea así:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Vuelve a ejecutar &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===Navegador web===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Véase también {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Si tu base de datos tiene ya un tamaño considerable y se encuentra bajo uso intensivo, no deberías usar el actualizador vía web, dado que el proceso de actualización caducará cuando se alcance el tiempo máximo de ejecución establecido en PHP (''maximum_execution_time''). En este caso deberías usar [[update.php]] desde el interfaz de línea de comandos y no desde la web. Qué es exactamente un &quot;tamaño considerable&quot; es algo que depende de tu servidor (por ejemplo, su rendimiento, la carga de trabajo que tiene y el tiempo máximo de ejecución que concede PHP al script para cumplir su cometido). Si tu wiki es demasiado grande para el actualizador vía web y tu empresa de hospedaje no te da acceso mediante línea de comandos, entonces tendrás que trasladar tu wiki a otro proveedor, preferiblemente a uno que sí ofrezca acceso desde línea de comandos.

# Haz siempre una [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|copia de seguridad de tu wiki]] antes de realizar cualquier labor de mantenimiento en la base de datos.
# Visita &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt; desde tu navegador. Por ejemplo, si tu wiki está en &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, navega a &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
# Elige tu idioma y pulsa 'Continuar'.
# La instalación existente debería detectarse automáticamente. Sigue las instrucciones en pantalla para actualizarla.&lt;br /&gt;Si se te pide una &quot;contraseña de actualización&quot;, abre tu archivo {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} y busca el valor de {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.

Puede suceder que el actualizador vía web parezca no funcionar: en lugar de ver la pantalla inicial de selección de idioma, podría salir una página vacía, posiblemente con algún mensaje de error. En este caso lo más probable es que tu servidor use reglas de reescritura (muy posiblemente para usar [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|URLs cortos]]), que hacen que no aparezca el actualizador de ''mw-config/'' sino una página wiki de ''Mw-config/'', con una &quot;M&quot; en mayúsculas. En este caso, renombra el archivo ''.htaccess'' mientras se hace la actualización, con lo cual deberías poder acceder al actualizador vía web.

{{Warning|1=Si usas este método, ¡asegúrate de '''volver a renombrar el archivo .htaccess''' después de ejecutar el script de actualización! ¡De lo contrario, tanto los URLs cortos como posiblemente otras cosas dejarán de funcionar!}}

== Prueba la actualización ==

Una vez que haya concluido la actualización, navega por el wiki y comprueba que estas operaciones funcionan como deberían:

* Ver páginas
* Editar páginas
* Subir un archivo
* Visitar [[Special:Version]] y comprobar que la versión que aparece es correcta y que las extensiones están presentes.

== Limpia restos de instalaciones anteriores ==
Si has copiado tu anterior instalación a otra carpeta en el servidor, asegúrate de eliminarla o hacerla completamente inaccesible de la web.
Es muy importante no dejar instalaciones previas accesibles desde la web, ya que se pierde por completo el propósito de actualizar, y deja tu servidor expuesto a ataques.

== Preguntas frecuentes ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===¿Cómo de difícil es actualizar MediaWiki?===

Si el único archivo que has modificado es {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} y estás actualizando desde la versión 1.5 o posterior, el proceso es muy sencillo. La cantidad de trabajo que lleva es de sólo unos minutos. Los cambios en la estructura de la base de datos llevarán un tiempo proporcional al tamaño de tu base de datos — potencialmente pueden ser varias horas en el caso de wikis con millones de páginas, mientras que si es un tamaño típico de unos pocos miles de páginas, normalmente será cuestión de unos segundos.

Las actualizaciones menores, dentro de la misma versión principal, desde {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 a {{MW legacy release number}}, no requieren absolutamente ningún esquema de cambios.
Puedes simplemente actualizar los archivos. La base de datos no necesita ninguna actualización, por ello no es necesario ejecutar el script de actualización.

Actualizar desde la versión 1.4 o anteriores es algo potencialmente complicado porque se abandonó el soporte para los juegos de caracteres que no fuesen el UTF-8, y el esquema para almacenar texto en bloque fue modificado. Por favor, lee la sección correspondiente del archivo &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt;.

La actualización se vuelve más difícil si has modificado nuestro código fuente y no quieres que se sobreescriban tus cambios. Herramientas como [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] o [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] pueden resultarte útiles. También hay un problema potencial si estás usando extensiones cuyo mantenimiento ha sido abandonado; actualiza tus extensiones al mismo tiempo que actualizas MediaWiki.

Si has modificado la apariencia o usas una apariencia personalizada, muy posiblemente tengas que ajustarla para que funcione de nuevo con la nueva versión de MediaWiki.

{{Tip|1=En lugar de parchear tus archivos de CSS y JavaScript &quot;globales&quot; cada vez que actualizas el software, puedes simplemente añadir el código a tus páginas &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Common.js&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Common.css&lt;/code&gt;. Puesto que estas páginas forman parte de la base de datos, que será reutilizada cuando hagas la actualización, no tendrás que volver a parchear los archivos del núcleo de MediaWiki.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
===¿Cómo actualizo desde una versión muy, muy antigua? ¿En uno, o en varios pasos?===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Depende. Si estás '''actualizando desde MediaWiki 1.4 o una versión anterior''', deberías actualizar primero a MediaWiki 1.5. Si estás actualizando desde un wiki que usa Latin-1, utiliza &lt;code&gt;upgrade1_5.php&lt;/code&gt; (que encontrarás en el archivo de MediaWiki 1.5) para convertir las partes correspondientes de la base de datos a UTF-8 ($latin tiene que estar a TRUE en tu $localsettings para que esto funcione). A continuación, ejecuta &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;, e indica en la variable $legacy de LocalSettings.php el sistema de codificación usado anteriormente en el wiki (por ejemplo, windows-1252). Así es básicamente cómo se actualizaron Wikipedia y otros sitios de la Fundación Wikimedia cuando pasaron de MediaWiki 1.4 a la versión 1.5; mira el [$noc archivo de opciones en cuestión (¡ojo: este archivo es muy grande!)] y algunas [[$wikitech|notas al respecto en Wikitech]] para más detalles. También es posible que necesites actualizar a MediaWiki 1.4 para poder ejecutar el script de actualización a la versión 1.5.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
Si quieres hacer un volcado de base de datos (p. ej. MySQL) del wiki en codificación Latin-1 wiki, asegúrate que el tipo del campo &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; en la tabla {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} es &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, no &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, para evitar problemas con la codificación de caracteres.

Si estás '''actualizando desde MediaWiki 1.5 o posterior''' hasta '''1.35''' entonces puedes realizar la actualización en un sólo paso, desde tu vieja versión a la versión estable más reciente.
La inmensa mayoría de informes, además de las pruebas automatizadas, indican que hacerlo en un único paso funciona perfectamente.
Si no te lo crees, lee [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|este mensaje de lista de correo]].
Sin embargo, has de tener en cuenta que al actualizar desde versiones muy antiguas, las posibilidades de que te encuentres errores de PHP son mayores que si estuvieses actualizando desde la versión inmediatamente anterior a la nueva.
Habría recibido estos errores de todos modos, si no se hubiera saltado las versiones, pero los errores se habrían asociado con cada actualización individual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
Esto hará que la actualización sea más difícil, pero no olvides que ¡también te ahorras actualizar primero a todas las versiones que te estás saltando!

Si estás '''actualizando a MediaWiki 1.36''' o posterior, sólo están soportadas las actualizaciones desde las últimas dos versiones LTS ([[phab:T259771]]). Esto significa que, para versiones muy viejas, primero tendrás que actualizar a MediaWiki 1.35, y de ahí a 1.36.

===¿Debería hacer primero una copia de seguridad?===

Respuesta breve: sí.

Respuesta más larga: depende de (a) en cuánto valoras tu información, (b) cómo de difícil sería hacer la copia de seguridad, y (c) la experiencia que tienes en el mantenimiento y administración de MySQL. 

Un fallo en la actualización puede dejar tu base de datos en un estado inconsistente, a medio camino entre dos versiones distintas.
Podría aparecer un error de PHP o de MySQL durante la actualización, dejando tu base de datos actualizada a medias.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

La recuperación de una situación así es a menudo complicada.
Los voluntarios que atienden los foros de soporte es poco probable que reciban con agrado la noticia de que no tienes una copia de seguridad y que ahora necesitas ayuda para salvar los muebles porque ha habido corrupción de datos durante una actualización.
Una situación más deseable sería que pudieses repetir el proceso echando mano de tu copia de seguridad, para a continuación [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|informar del fallo identificando el componente de MediaWiki]] que causó la corrupción de datos durante el proceso de actualización.

===¿Puedo conservar mi LocalSettings.php?===
Sí, pero puede que tengas que hacer algunos pequeños cambios. El formato de {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} es fundamentalmente compatible hacia abajo.
Los cambios que puedan afectar a la compatibilidad de LocalSettings.php se documentarán en la sección &quot;Cambios en la configuración&quot; de las [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|notas de lanzamiento]].

===¿Puede mi wiki seguir funcionando mientras se actualiza?===

Generalmente sí, aunque Git puede inutilizarlo temporalmente (durante unos pocos segundos).

Si estás actualizando entre versiones menores de MediaWiki, lo único que necesitas es sustituir los antiguos archivos con los nuevos.

Nota: lo que sigue da por supuesto que tienes acceso a nivel de línea de comandos. Si estás actualizando entre versiones mayores de MediaWiki, el procedimiento recomendado es el siguiente:

# Descomprime la nueva versión de MediaWiki a un nuevo directorio.
# Prepara el nuevo directorio: copia tu LocalSettings.php del antiguo directorio, así como las extensiones y apariencias personalizadas que puedas tener instaladas. Verifique la configuración de {{wg|Logo}} y {{wg|Logos}} en LocalSettings.php y, si fuese necesario, copia el archivo del logo del directorio antiguo al nuevo.
# En las notas de lanzamiento de la nueva versión, mira si hace falta hacer cambios en LocalSettings.php.
# Pon la base de datos en modo lectura insertando la siguiente variable en el LocalSettings.php del viejo directorio; los usuarios verán este mensaje si intentan editar una página durante el proceso de actualización:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Esta opción no sirve a partir de MediaWiki 1.27, donde también impide ejecutar el script de actualización. Una solución alternativa la puedes encontrar en la página {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. Consulta también {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Ejecuta el [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|script de actualización]] o el actualizador web en el nuevo directorio.
# Copia el subdirectorio 'images' del antiguo directorio al nuevo directorio.
# Intercambia el antiguo directorio con el nuevo.

===¿Por qué actualizar?===
:''Suscríbete a [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] para recibir notificaciones de nuevos lanzamientos.''

Porque [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|suele ser fácil hacerlo]], con [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|un único paso para cambiarte a la versión más reciente]] y también [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|vía web]].

Las versiones recientes reciben correcciones en la seguridad que hacen que tu wiki y tu servidor estén mejor protegidos contra los vándalos, cosa que no ocurre con las versiones antiguas (véase {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). ¡Ya sólo éso supone docenas de motivos para actualizarte!

Los lanzamientos donde hay un cambio de versión mayor traen nueva funcionalidad que te puede interesar: mira las notas de lanzamiento para más detalles. En caso de que necesites más argumentos para convencer a tus jefes de que te dejen actualizar una antigua versión, aquí va una lista:

* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|las ediciones pueden previsualizarse antes de guardar]] también como un diff.
* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}} hay un [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|botón deshacer]].
* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrullar]] en [[Special:NewPages|Especial:PáginasNuevas]] es mucho más sencillo.
* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, puedes [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|renombrar]] (trasladar) archivos.
* Desde la versión {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, puedes [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|reparar las redirecciones dobles]] automáticamente.
* Desde la versión {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}} está disponible {{ll|InstantCommons}}.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Desde la versión 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|¡la ordenación de las categorías tiene sentido!]] (especialmente con caracteres que no usa el inglés); ampliado a 68 idiomas después de {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
* Desde las versiones {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} y {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, la interfaz y los [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|registros]] se dirigen correctamente a los usuarios de todos los idiomas y géneros (antes de la versión 1.15, no había distinción de ningún tipo por género).
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Desde [[MediaWiki 1.20|la versión 1.20]], los [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] son más legibles.
* En las versiones [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] y [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], las notificaciones por correo electrónico se volvieron más claras y predecibles, haciendo que tu wiki sea más efectivo.
* Desde [[MediaWiki 1.22|la versión 1.22]], la lucha contra el vandalismo (patrullar) consume menos tiempo.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

También, en {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} empezamos a incluir en el archivo de MediaWiki [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|algunas extensiones vitales]], como un editor mejor y las herramientas anti-vandalismo ConfirmEdit y Nuke; en versiones más recientes se han ido añadiendo más.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Véase también ==

* Un artículo del blog de Greg Sabino Mullane que ofrece [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html más detalles sobre las pequeñas actualizaciones]
* La [[Project:Support desk|mesa de ayuda]], si necesitas ayuda o algo ha ido mal
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - si tienes una copia de seguridad
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>buran70f0428lbmspcbcqctkgcnovrz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/eu</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>468249</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402412</id>
      <parentid>4983801</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:53:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7097" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Ongi etorri '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''  Ikusizko Editorearen atarira. Ikusizko Editorea (ingelesez, ''VisualEditor'', ''VE'') Wikimedia fundazioak garatu duen Wikipedian editatzeko modu berri bat da. Jendeari aukera ematen dio wiki markatzaile lengoaia ikasi behar gabe editatzen. Wikipedian ekarpenak egin nahi dituztenentzat lagungarri izatea espero dugu.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Irakurri '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} Ikusizko Editorearekin '''Arazoak jakinarazi''' ]
|-
| Ikasi loturak egiten, irudiak gehitu eta mugitzen, aipamenak egiten, txantiloiak txertatzen, taulak aldatzen, eta gehiago.
|Mesedez, aipatu zure ''nabigatzailea, sistema operatiboa, eta Wikipedia itxura'' (usuki Vector, batzuetan Monobook)
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Ikusizko Editoreari buruz ==

Ikusizko Editorea, Wikipedian editatzeko &quot;ikusizko&quot; modua da. Historikoki, Wikipedian editatu nahi izan zuenak wiki markatzeko lengoaia ikasi behar zuen, zinez zaila den lengoaia, aldaketa txikienak egiteko ere. 2001ean hori onargarria zen; 2015ean  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|lankide berriak uxatzeko modu bat da]]. Espero dugu Ikusizko Editorea lankide zaharrentzat erabilgarria izatea eta berrientzat erabilgarria gertatzea. 

Ikusizko Editorea erabilgarri egon da &quot;alpha&quot; argitalpenean MediaWiki.org-en, eta ingelesezko Wikipedia 2012ko abendutik, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 hizkuntzetatik gora 2013ko apiriletik], eta [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ ia gainerako hizkuntza guztietan] 2013ko ekainaren hasieratik. 2015eko uztailean, erabilgarri dago modu lehenetsian saio hasten eta amaitzen duten lankideentzat Wikipedien %75ean.
Espero dugu [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|falta diren hizkuntzetan]] 2015ean zehar eskuragarri jartzea.
2014ko azaro amaieratik, aukeran erabilgarri dago [[Beta Features|Betan]] WMFko wiki guztietan, Wikiztegia eta Wikiiturriak salbu.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
WMFko wikietan oinarrituz, bai  [[VisualEditor/changelog|aldizkako egoera eguneraketak]] Mediawiki.org-n eta baita [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|berripaper eleaniztunak]] ere argitaratzen ditugu.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ikusizko Editorea erabiltzen ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ikusizko Editorea erabiltzeko gogoa baduzu, badago [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|erabiltzaile gida]] bat eta maiz erabiltzen diren [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|laster-teklen zerrenda]] bat.
&lt;/div&gt;

Ikusizko Editoreak baditu akatsak eta mugak ere. Halakorik topatuko bazenu, ez izan zalantzarik hori [[VisualEditor/Feedback|jakinarazten harreman orrian]]. Oraingo mugak hauek dira:

* '''Kargatzen motela''' — denbora bat behar du zabaltzeko, batez ere orri konplexuak. Etorkizunean programa askoz azkarrago zabalduko da eta orri handiagoak zabaldua ahal izango ditu.
* '''Osatu gabeko edizioa'''— formatu konplexuko zenbait elementu azalduko dira eta beren edukia editatzen utziko dizute, baina ez du utziko egitura eta sarrera berriak gehitzen - hala nola, definizio zerrendak. Arlo honetan funtzionalitateak gehitzea gure lehentasunen artean dago.
* '''Eduki orriak batez ere, ez eztabaida orriak''' — Ikusizko Editorea soilik zenbait izen tarteetarako dago erabilgarri. Wikipedia gehienetan, Ikusizko Editorea artikuluetan, Lankide:, Fitxategi:, Laguntza: eta Kategoria: orrietan erabili daiteke. Gaur egun ez dago erabilgarri Wikipedia: orrietarako edo eztabaida orrietarako.

Gomendatzen dugu lankideek orria gorde aurretik &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;-en klik egitea eta topa dezaketen d [[VisualEditor/Feedback|edozein problema jakinaraztea]].

== Nola lagundu ==

Ikusizko Editorea ahalik eta hoberena egiteko, gauza asko laguntza beharko dugu. Bistan da, atal handi bat softwarearen erabilpena da, akatsak antzematea eta [[VisualEditor/Feedback|jakinaraztea]], baina badira beste zeregin asko ere. Horien artean:

* '''Laguntza orriak eguneratzea''' — Gure proiektu guztiek laguntza orriak dituzte erabiltzaile berrien ekarpenak bizkortzeko. Zoritxarrez, guztiak iturburu markatzaile kodean oinarritzen dira, eta Ikusizko Editoreak aurrera egin ahala, pantalla-argazkiak eta tutorialak zaharkituak geratzen dira. Oso erabilgarria litzateke jendea  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|laguntza orrien eguneratzea]] [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|gure Ikusizko Editorea erabiltzeko tutoriala]]ren bitartez egingo balu.
* '''Txantiloiei TemplateData gehitu''' — Ikusizko Editoreak badu txantiloiak editatzeko funtzionalitate on bat eta horren ezaugarriak xehetasun gehiagorekin azaltzen dira gure [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|laguntza orrian]]. Wikipedian erabiltzen badituzu jakingo duzun bezala, zenbait txantiloik parametro izenak eta deskripzioak dituzte erabiltzen errazagoak egiteko. Beste batzuk, ordea, ez. Hori gertatzen da txantiloiek aurretik &quot;TemplateData&quot; sartua izan behar dutelako ezaugarri hau funtziona dadin. TemplateData sartzen interesa bazenu, badago [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|hori egiteko gida bat]],  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|gehitzeko garrantzitsuenak diren txantiloien zerrenda]] batekin batera.
* '''Zure komunitateari lagundu''' — Ikusi[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|zure tokiko komunitatea laguntzeko moduen zerrenda]] Ikusizko Editorearekin ediziogintza esperientzia hobetzeko.
* '''Erabiltzaile berriak lagundu'''  — Ikusizko Editorearen abiaraztea arrakastatsua bada, orain ditugunak baino asko lankide gehiago izango ditugu. Baina, nahiz eta editatzea errazagoa izan, komunitatearekin hartu-emanetan aritzea zaila izango da. Eman denbora bat mesedez [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|laguntza mahaian edo IRC laguntza kanalean]] lankide berriak Wikipediara egokitu daitezen.

==Ikus, gainera==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>f7ayk6euuwvgn1oyncoh2lgz67wt0yy</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403004</id>
      <parentid>5402412</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7137" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Ongi etorri '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''  Ikusizko Editorearen atarira. Ikusizko Editorea (ingelesez, ''VisualEditor'', ''VE'') Wikimedia fundazioak garatu duen Wikipedian editatzeko modu berri bat da. Jendeari aukera ematen dio wiki markatzaile lengoaia ikasi behar gabe editatzen. Wikipedian ekarpenak egin nahi dituztenentzat lagungarri izatea espero dugu.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Irakurri '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} Ikusizko Editorearekin '''Arazoak jakinarazi''' ]
|-
| Ikasi loturak egiten, irudiak gehitu eta mugitzen, aipamenak egiten, txantiloiak txertatzen, taulak aldatzen, eta gehiago.
|Mesedez, aipatu zure ''nabigatzailea, sistema operatiboa, eta Wikipedia itxura'' (usuki Vector, batzuetan Monobook)
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Ikusizko Editoreari buruz ==

Ikusizko Editorea, Wikipedian editatzeko &quot;ikusizko&quot; modua da. Historikoki, Wikipedian editatu nahi izan zuenak wiki markatzeko lengoaia ikasi behar zuen, zinez zaila den lengoaia, aldaketa txikienak egiteko ere. 2001ean hori onargarria zen; 2015ean  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|lankide berriak uxatzeko modu bat da]]. Espero dugu Ikusizko Editorea lankide zaharrentzat erabilgarria izatea eta berrientzat erabilgarria gertatzea. 

Ikusizko Editorea erabilgarri egon da &quot;alpha&quot; argitalpenean MediaWiki.org-en, eta ingelesezko Wikipedia 2012ko abendutik, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 hizkuntzetatik gora 2013ko apiriletik], eta [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ ia gainerako hizkuntza guztietan] 2013ko ekainaren hasieratik. 2015eko uztailean, erabilgarri dago modu lehenetsian saio hasten eta amaitzen duten lankideentzat Wikipedien %75ean.
Espero dugu [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|falta diren hizkuntzetan]] 2015ean zehar eskuragarri jartzea.
2014ko azaro amaieratik, aukeran erabilgarri dago [[Beta Features|Betan]] WMFko wiki guztietan, Wikiztegia eta Wikiiturriak salbu.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
WMFko wikietan oinarrituz, bai  [[VisualEditor/changelog|aldizkako egoera eguneraketak]] Mediawiki.org-n eta baita [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|berripaper eleaniztunak]] ere argitaratzen ditugu.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ikusizko Editorea erabiltzen ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ikusizko Editorea erabiltzeko gogoa baduzu, badago [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|erabiltzaile gida]] bat eta maiz erabiltzen diren [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|laster-teklen zerrenda]] bat.
&lt;/div&gt;

Ikusizko Editoreak baditu akatsak eta mugak ere. Halakorik topatuko bazenu, ez izan zalantzarik hori [[VisualEditor/Feedback|jakinarazten harreman orrian]]. Oraingo mugak hauek dira:

* '''Kargatzen motela''' — denbora bat behar du zabaltzeko, batez ere orri konplexuak. Etorkizunean programa askoz azkarrago zabalduko da eta orri handiagoak zabaldua ahal izango ditu.
* '''Osatu gabeko edizioa'''— formatu konplexuko zenbait elementu azalduko dira eta beren edukia editatzen utziko dizute, baina ez du utziko egitura eta sarrera berriak gehitzen - hala nola, definizio zerrendak. Arlo honetan funtzionalitateak gehitzea gure lehentasunen artean dago.
* '''Eduki orriak batez ere, ez eztabaida orriak''' — Ikusizko Editorea soilik zenbait izen tarteetarako dago erabilgarri. Wikipedia gehienetan, Ikusizko Editorea artikuluetan, Lankide:, Fitxategi:, Laguntza: eta Kategoria: orrietan erabili daiteke. Gaur egun ez dago erabilgarri Wikipedia: orrietarako edo eztabaida orrietarako.

Gomendatzen dugu lankideek orria gorde aurretik &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;-en klik egitea eta topa dezaketen d [[VisualEditor/Feedback|edozein problema jakinaraztea]].

== Nola lagundu ==

Ikusizko Editorea ahalik eta hoberena egiteko, gauza asko laguntza beharko dugu. Bistan da, atal handi bat softwarearen erabilpena da, akatsak antzematea eta [[VisualEditor/Feedback|jakinaraztea]], baina badira beste zeregin asko ere. Horien artean:

* '''Laguntza orriak eguneratzea''' — Gure proiektu guztiek laguntza orriak dituzte erabiltzaile berrien ekarpenak bizkortzeko. Zoritxarrez, guztiak iturburu markatzaile kodean oinarritzen dira, eta Ikusizko Editoreak aurrera egin ahala, pantalla-argazkiak eta tutorialak zaharkituak geratzen dira. Oso erabilgarria litzateke jendea  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|laguntza orrien eguneratzea]] [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|gure Ikusizko Editorea erabiltzeko tutoriala]]ren bitartez egingo balu.
* '''Txantiloiei TemplateData gehitu''' — Ikusizko Editoreak badu txantiloiak editatzeko funtzionalitate on bat eta horren ezaugarriak xehetasun gehiagorekin azaltzen dira gure [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|laguntza orrian]]. Wikipedian erabiltzen badituzu jakingo duzun bezala, zenbait txantiloik parametro izenak eta deskripzioak dituzte erabiltzen errazagoak egiteko. Beste batzuk, ordea, ez. Hori gertatzen da txantiloiek aurretik &quot;TemplateData&quot; sartua izan behar dutelako ezaugarri hau funtziona dadin. TemplateData sartzen interesa bazenu, badago [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|hori egiteko gida bat]],  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|gehitzeko garrantzitsuenak diren txantiloien zerrenda]] batekin batera.
* '''Zure komunitateari lagundu''' — Ikusi[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|zure tokiko komunitatea laguntzeko moduen zerrenda]] Ikusizko Editorearekin ediziogintza esperientzia hobetzeko.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Erabiltzaile berriak lagundu'''  — Ikusizko Editorearen abiaraztea arrakastatsua bada, orain ditugunak baino asko lankide gehiago izango ditugu. Baina, nahiz eta editatzea errazagoa izan, komunitatearekin hartu-emanetan aritzea zaila izango da. Eman denbora bat mesedez [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|laguntza mahaian edo IRC laguntza kanalean]] lankide berriak Wikipediara egokitu daitezen.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ikus, gainera==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>79qukpuhpd5xyp37pd3178zfwthles6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403049</id>
      <parentid>5403004</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:00:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7097" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Ongi etorri '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''  Ikusizko Editorearen atarira. Ikusizko Editorea (ingelesez, ''VisualEditor'', ''VE'') Wikimedia fundazioak garatu duen Wikipedian editatzeko modu berri bat da. Jendeari aukera ematen dio wiki markatzaile lengoaia ikasi behar gabe editatzen. Wikipedian ekarpenak egin nahi dituztenentzat lagungarri izatea espero dugu.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Irakurri '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} Ikusizko Editorearekin '''Arazoak jakinarazi''' ]
|-
| Ikasi loturak egiten, irudiak gehitu eta mugitzen, aipamenak egiten, txantiloiak txertatzen, taulak aldatzen, eta gehiago.
|Mesedez, aipatu zure ''nabigatzailea, sistema operatiboa, eta Wikipedia itxura'' (usuki Vector, batzuetan Monobook)
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Ikusizko Editoreari buruz ==

Ikusizko Editorea, Wikipedian editatzeko &quot;ikusizko&quot; modua da. Historikoki, Wikipedian editatu nahi izan zuenak wiki markatzeko lengoaia ikasi behar zuen, zinez zaila den lengoaia, aldaketa txikienak egiteko ere. 2001ean hori onargarria zen; 2015ean  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|lankide berriak uxatzeko modu bat da]]. Espero dugu Ikusizko Editorea lankide zaharrentzat erabilgarria izatea eta berrientzat erabilgarria gertatzea. 

Ikusizko Editorea erabilgarri egon da &quot;alpha&quot; argitalpenean MediaWiki.org-en, eta ingelesezko Wikipedia 2012ko abendutik, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 hizkuntzetatik gora 2013ko apiriletik], eta [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ ia gainerako hizkuntza guztietan] 2013ko ekainaren hasieratik. 2015eko uztailean, erabilgarri dago modu lehenetsian saio hasten eta amaitzen duten lankideentzat Wikipedien %75ean.
Espero dugu [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|falta diren hizkuntzetan]] 2015ean zehar eskuragarri jartzea.
2014ko azaro amaieratik, aukeran erabilgarri dago [[Beta Features|Betan]] WMFko wiki guztietan, Wikiztegia eta Wikiiturriak salbu.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
WMFko wikietan oinarrituz, bai  [[VisualEditor/changelog|aldizkako egoera eguneraketak]] Mediawiki.org-n eta baita [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|berripaper eleaniztunak]] ere argitaratzen ditugu.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ikusizko Editorea erabiltzen ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ikusizko Editorea erabiltzeko gogoa baduzu, badago [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|erabiltzaile gida]] bat eta maiz erabiltzen diren [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|laster-teklen zerrenda]] bat.
&lt;/div&gt;

Ikusizko Editoreak baditu akatsak eta mugak ere. Halakorik topatuko bazenu, ez izan zalantzarik hori [[VisualEditor/Feedback|jakinarazten harreman orrian]]. Oraingo mugak hauek dira:

* '''Kargatzen motela''' — denbora bat behar du zabaltzeko, batez ere orri konplexuak. Etorkizunean programa askoz azkarrago zabalduko da eta orri handiagoak zabaldua ahal izango ditu.
* '''Osatu gabeko edizioa'''— formatu konplexuko zenbait elementu azalduko dira eta beren edukia editatzen utziko dizute, baina ez du utziko egitura eta sarrera berriak gehitzen - hala nola, definizio zerrendak. Arlo honetan funtzionalitateak gehitzea gure lehentasunen artean dago.
* '''Eduki orriak batez ere, ez eztabaida orriak''' — Ikusizko Editorea soilik zenbait izen tarteetarako dago erabilgarri. Wikipedia gehienetan, Ikusizko Editorea artikuluetan, Lankide:, Fitxategi:, Laguntza: eta Kategoria: orrietan erabili daiteke. Gaur egun ez dago erabilgarri Wikipedia: orrietarako edo eztabaida orrietarako.

Gomendatzen dugu lankideek orria gorde aurretik &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;-en klik egitea eta topa dezaketen d [[VisualEditor/Feedback|edozein problema jakinaraztea]].

== Nola lagundu ==

Ikusizko Editorea ahalik eta hoberena egiteko, gauza asko laguntza beharko dugu. Bistan da, atal handi bat softwarearen erabilpena da, akatsak antzematea eta [[VisualEditor/Feedback|jakinaraztea]], baina badira beste zeregin asko ere. Horien artean:

* '''Laguntza orriak eguneratzea''' — Gure proiektu guztiek laguntza orriak dituzte erabiltzaile berrien ekarpenak bizkortzeko. Zoritxarrez, guztiak iturburu markatzaile kodean oinarritzen dira, eta Ikusizko Editoreak aurrera egin ahala, pantalla-argazkiak eta tutorialak zaharkituak geratzen dira. Oso erabilgarria litzateke jendea  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|laguntza orrien eguneratzea]] [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|gure Ikusizko Editorea erabiltzeko tutoriala]]ren bitartez egingo balu.
* '''Txantiloiei TemplateData gehitu''' — Ikusizko Editoreak badu txantiloiak editatzeko funtzionalitate on bat eta horren ezaugarriak xehetasun gehiagorekin azaltzen dira gure [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|laguntza orrian]]. Wikipedian erabiltzen badituzu jakingo duzun bezala, zenbait txantiloik parametro izenak eta deskripzioak dituzte erabiltzen errazagoak egiteko. Beste batzuk, ordea, ez. Hori gertatzen da txantiloiek aurretik &quot;TemplateData&quot; sartua izan behar dutelako ezaugarri hau funtziona dadin. TemplateData sartzen interesa bazenu, badago [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|hori egiteko gida bat]],  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|gehitzeko garrantzitsuenak diren txantiloien zerrenda]] batekin batera.
* '''Zure komunitateari lagundu''' — Ikusi[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|zure tokiko komunitatea laguntzeko moduen zerrenda]] Ikusizko Editorearekin ediziogintza esperientzia hobetzeko.
* '''Erabiltzaile berriak lagundu'''  — Ikusizko Editorearen abiaraztea arrakastatsua bada, orain ditugunak baino asko lankide gehiago izango ditugu. Baina, nahiz eta editatzea errazagoa izan, komunitatearekin hartu-emanetan aritzea zaila izango da. Eman denbora bat mesedez [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|laguntza mahaian edo IRC laguntza kanalean]] lankide berriak Wikipediara egokitu daitezen.

==Ikus, gainera==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>f7ayk6euuwvgn1oyncoh2lgz67wt0yy</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403214</id>
      <parentid>5403049</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:52:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7115" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Ongi etorri '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]'''  Ikusizko Editorearen atarira. Ikusizko Editorea (ingelesez, ''VisualEditor'', ''VE'') Wikimedia fundazioak garatu duen Wikipedian editatzeko modu berri bat da. Jendeari aukera ematen dio wiki markatzaile lengoaia ikasi behar gabe editatzen. Wikipedian ekarpenak egin nahi dituztenentzat lagungarri izatea espero dugu.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Irakurri '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} Ikusizko Editorearekin '''Arazoak jakinarazi''' ]
|-
| Ikasi loturak egiten, irudiak gehitu eta mugitzen, aipamenak egiten, txantiloiak txertatzen, taulak aldatzen, eta gehiago.
|Mesedez, aipatu zure ''nabigatzailea, sistema operatiboa, eta Wikipedia itxura'' (usuki Vector, batzuetan Monobook)
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Ikusizko Editoreari buruz ==

Ikusizko Editorea, Wikipedian editatzeko &quot;ikusizko&quot; modua da. Historikoki, Wikipedian editatu nahi izan zuenak wiki markatzeko lengoaia ikasi behar zuen, zinez zaila den lengoaia, aldaketa txikienak egiteko ere. 2001ean hori onargarria zen; 2015ean  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|lankide berriak uxatzeko modu bat da]]. Espero dugu Ikusizko Editorea lankide zaharrentzat erabilgarria izatea eta berrientzat erabilgarria gertatzea. 

Ikusizko Editorea erabilgarri egon da &quot;alpha&quot; argitalpenean MediaWiki.org-en, eta ingelesezko Wikipedia 2012ko abendutik, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ 14 hizkuntzetatik gora 2013ko apiriletik], eta [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ ia gainerako hizkuntza guztietan] 2013ko ekainaren hasieratik. 2015eko uztailean, erabilgarri dago modu lehenetsian saio hasten eta amaitzen duten lankideentzat Wikipedien %75ean.
Espero dugu [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|falta diren hizkuntzetan]] 2015ean zehar eskuragarri jartzea.
2014ko azaro amaieratik, aukeran erabilgarri dago [[Beta Features|Betan]] WMFko wiki guztietan, Wikiztegia eta Wikiiturriak salbu.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
WMFko wikietan oinarrituz, bai  [[VisualEditor/changelog|aldizkako egoera eguneraketak]] Mediawiki.org-n eta baita [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|berripaper eleaniztunak]] ere argitaratzen ditugu.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ikusizko Editorea erabiltzen ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ikusizko Editorea erabiltzeko gogoa baduzu, badago [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|erabiltzaile gida]] bat eta maiz erabiltzen diren [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|laster-teklen zerrenda]] bat.
&lt;/div&gt;

Ikusizko Editoreak baditu akatsak eta mugak ere. Halakorik topatuko bazenu, ez izan zalantzarik hori [[VisualEditor/Feedback|jakinarazten harreman orrian]]. Oraingo mugak hauek dira:

* '''Kargatzen motela''' — denbora bat behar du zabaltzeko, batez ere orri konplexuak. Etorkizunean programa askoz azkarrago zabalduko da eta orri handiagoak zabaldua ahal izango ditu.
* '''Osatu gabeko edizioa'''— formatu konplexuko zenbait elementu azalduko dira eta beren edukia editatzen utziko dizute, baina ez du utziko egitura eta sarrera berriak gehitzen - hala nola, definizio zerrendak. Arlo honetan funtzionalitateak gehitzea gure lehentasunen artean dago.
* '''Eduki orriak batez ere, ez eztabaida orriak''' — Ikusizko Editorea soilik zenbait izen tarteetarako dago erabilgarri. Wikipedia gehienetan, Ikusizko Editorea artikuluetan, Lankide:, Fitxategi:, Laguntza: eta Kategoria: orrietan erabili daiteke. Gaur egun ez dago erabilgarri Wikipedia: orrietarako edo eztabaida orrietarako.

Gomendatzen dugu lankideek orria gorde aurretik &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;-en klik egitea eta topa dezaketen d [[VisualEditor/Feedback|edozein problema jakinaraztea]].

== Nola lagundu ==

Ikusizko Editorea ahalik eta hoberena egiteko, gauza asko laguntza beharko dugu. Bistan da, atal handi bat softwarearen erabilpena da, akatsak antzematea eta [[VisualEditor/Feedback|jakinaraztea]], baina badira beste zeregin asko ere. Horien artean:

* '''Laguntza orriak eguneratzea''' — Gure proiektu guztiek laguntza orriak dituzte erabiltzaile berrien ekarpenak bizkortzeko. Zoritxarrez, guztiak iturburu markatzaile kodean oinarritzen dira, eta Ikusizko Editoreak aurrera egin ahala, pantalla-argazkiak eta tutorialak zaharkituak geratzen dira. Oso erabilgarria litzateke jendea  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|laguntza orrien eguneratzea]] [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|gure Ikusizko Editorea erabiltzeko tutoriala]]ren bitartez egingo balu.
* '''Txantiloiei TemplateData gehitu''' — Ikusizko Editoreak badu txantiloiak editatzeko funtzionalitate on bat eta horren ezaugarriak xehetasun gehiagorekin azaltzen dira gure [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|laguntza orrian]]. Wikipedian erabiltzen badituzu jakingo duzun bezala, zenbait txantiloik parametro izenak eta deskripzioak dituzte erabiltzen errazagoak egiteko. Beste batzuk, ordea, ez. Hori gertatzen da txantiloiek aurretik &quot;TemplateData&quot; sartua izan behar dutelako ezaugarri hau funtziona dadin. TemplateData sartzen interesa bazenu, badago [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|hori egiteko gida bat]],  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|gehitzeko garrantzitsuenak diren txantiloien zerrenda]] batekin batera.
* '''Zure komunitateari lagundu''' — Ikusi[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|zure tokiko komunitatea laguntzeko moduen zerrenda]] Ikusizko Editorearekin ediziogintza esperientzia hobetzeko.
* '''Erabiltzaile berriak lagundu'''  — Ikusizko Editorearen abiaraztea arrakastatsua bada, orain ditugunak baino asko lankide gehiago izango ditugu. Baina, nahiz eta editatzea errazagoa izan, komunitatearekin hartu-emanetan aritzea zaila izango da. Eman denbora bat mesedez [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|laguntza mahaian edo IRC laguntza kanalean]] lankide berriak Wikipediara egokitu daitezen.

==Ikus, gainera==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>iobk4iutn81zg1dz1xz36ie48qv2kir</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/eu</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>469194</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402411</id>
      <parentid>1751356</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:53:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="357" xml:space="preserve">Ongi etorri '''[[$ve|VisualEditor]]'''  Ikusizko Editorearen atarira. Ikusizko Editorea (ingelesez, ''VisualEditor'', ''VE'') Wikimedia fundazioak garatu duen Wikipedian editatzeko modu berri bat da. Jendeari aukera ematen dio wiki markatzaile lengoaia ikasi behar gabe editatzen. Wikipedian ekarpenak egin nahi dituztenentzat lagungarri izatea espero dugu.</text>
      <sha1>h03n4dol2ex99l4dbzsyjikvi93qown</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/hy</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>469635</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402427</id>
      <parentid>1761422</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:00:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="533" xml:space="preserve">Բարի գալուստ '''[[$ve|ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչի]]''' պորտալ: ՎիզուալԽմբագրիչը (ՎԽ) Վիքիպեդիան խմբագրելու նոր գործիք է, որը ստեղծվել է Վիքիմեդիա Հիմնադրամի կողմից: Այն ստեղծվել է խմբագրումը էլ ավելի հեշտացնելու նպատակով: Հույսով ենք, որ այս նորարարությունը կօգնի մարդկանց և կնպաստի Վիքիպեդիայի զարգացմանը:</text>
      <sha1>eo4ve3l3cbzmm71o324ekh22bpgsfft</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/hy</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>469768</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403162</id>
      <parentid>1803073</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:39:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="360" xml:space="preserve">* '''Օգնիր նոր մասնակիցներին''' ՎիզուալԽմբարիչով աշխատանքը ավելի պարզ է և մատչելի: Խնդրում ենք` որոշ ժամանակ անցկացրեք [[$1|նոր խմբագիրների]] հետ, որպեսզի նրանց սովորեցնեք խմբագրման տարրական կանոնները:</text>
      <sha1>0gp96zt6v8wtf4i50iq7dmnhgpj33om</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/fa</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>470129</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402414</id>
      <parentid>4983802</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:55:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9278" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
به درگاه '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ویرایشگر دیداری]]''' خوش آمدید. ویرایشگر دیداری روش تازه‌ای برای ویرایش در ویکی‌پدیا است که توسط بنیاد ویکی‌مدیا توسعه داده شده‌است و به کاربران اجازه می‌دهد تا بدون نیاز به دانستن نشانه‌گذاری ویکی،  آنرا ویرایش کنند. امیدواریم که این روش به کاربران کمک کند تا در ویکی‌پدیا مشارکت کنند.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' را مطالعه‌کنید.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''گزارش خطا''' با ویرایشگر دیداری].
|-
| چگونگی افزودن پیوند، افزودن یا حذف کردن تصویر، ساختن ارجاع، افزودن الگو، ویرایش جدول و موارد دیگر را بیاموزید.
|لطفاً «مرورگر وب، سیستم عامل رایانه و پوستهٔ ویکی‌پدیای خود» (معمولاً وکتور یا مونوبوک) را مد نظر قراردهید.
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== دربارهٔ ویرایشگر دیداری ==

ویرایشگر دیداری یک روش تصویری برای ویرایش ویکی‌پدیا است. در گذشته، همواره ویرایش در ویکی‌پدیا، حتی ایجاد تغییرات کوچک در یک صفحه، نیازمند آموختن نشانه‌گذاری ویکی، که زبانی نسبتاً پیچیده است، بوده‌است. در سال ۲۰۰۱ این روش پذیرفتنی بود؛ ولی در سال ۲۰۱۵ باعث [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|فراری‌دادن مشارکت کنندگان]] می‌شود. امیدواریم که ویرایشگر دیداری برای مشارکت کنندگان کنونی مفید باشد و بیشتر مورد استقبال کاربران تازه قرار گیرد. 

نسخهٔ «آلفا» یا همان نسخهٔ مقدماتی ویرایشگر دیداری از اواسط سال ۲۰۱۲ میلادی بر روی Mediawiki.org منتشر شد و از دسامبر ۲۰۱۲ میلادی بر روی ویکی‌پدیای انگلیسی فعال گردید و [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ از آوریل ۲۰۱۳ میلادی بر ۱۴ ویکی‌پدیای دیگر] و از آغاز ژوئن ۲۰۱۳ میلادی [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ تقریباً بر روی همهٔ ویکی‌پدیاها] اجرا شد.‍ از ژوئیه ۲۰۱۵ میلادی، ویرایشگر دیداری برای همهٔ ویرایشگران (اعم از آی‌پی و کاربر) در ۷۵٪ ویکی‌پدیاها به‌صورت پیش‌فرض در دسترس است.
انتظار داریم که تا اواخر سال ۲۰۱۵ میلادی، ویرایشگر دیداری را به‌صورت پیش‌فرض برای اکثر  [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|زبان‌های باقی‌مانده]]  فعال کنیم.
همچنین از اواخر نوامبر ۲۰۱۴ میلادی، ویرایشگر دیداری به‌صورت [[Beta Features|ویژگی بتا]] برای همهٔ ویکی‌های بنیاد ویکی‌مدیا به‌جز ویکی‌واژه و ویکی‌منبع راه‌اندازی شد.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;

ما [[VisualEditor/changelog|بروزرسانی‌های منظمی]] در Mediawiki.org و [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|خبرنامه‌های چندزبانه]] منتشر کرده‌ایم که بر ویکی‌های بنیاد ویکی‌مدیا متمرکز بود.
&lt;/div&gt;

== استفاده از ویرایشگر دیداری ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
اگر علاقه‌مند به استفاده از ویرایشگر دیداری برای ویرایش هستید، ما یک [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|راهنمای انجام کار]] و همچنین [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|فهرستی از کلیدهای میان‌بُر پرکاربرد]] داریم.
&lt;/div&gt;

در حال حاضر، ویرایشگر دیداری تعدادی باگ و محدودیت دارد. اگر با مشکلی روبه‌رو شدید، لطفاً برای طرح آن در [[VisualEditor/Feedback|صفحهٔ بازخوردها]] درنگ مکنید. محدودیت‌های کنونی شامل موارد زیر است:

* '''بارگذاری آهسته'''—  بارگذاری صفحات پیچیده در ویرایشگر دیداری زمان زیادی طول می‌کشد. در آینده، این ابزار سریع‌تر خواهد بود و بارگذاری صفحات بزرگ‌تر را امکان‌پذیر می‌کند.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''ویراستن ناتمام''' — برخی از
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''بیشترِ صفحات محتوایی، نه صفحات بحث''' — ویرایشگر دیداری فقط برای چند فضای نام فعال شده‌است. در بیشترِ ویکی‌پدیاها، ویرایشگر دیداری می‌تواند در فضای نام مقالات، فضای کاربری، فضای پرونده، صفحات راهنما و رده مورد استفاده قرار گیرد. ویرایشگر دیداری در حال حاضر برای فضای ویکی‌پدیا و صفحات بحث کاربر و بحث مقاله در دسترس نیست.

پیشنهاد می‌کنیم که کاربران پیش از ذخیرهٔ صفحه، بر &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; کلیک کنند و [[VisualEditor/Feedback|هرگونه مشکلی که با آن مواجه شده‌اند را گزارش کنند]].

== چگونه می‌توان کمک کرد ==

برای آنکه ویرایشگر دیداری بهبود پیدا کند، برای انجام بسیاری از کارها به کمک نیاز داریم. بدیهی‌ست که یکی از بزرگترین قسمت‌ها، استفاده از نرم‌افزار و یافتن باگ‌ها و [[VisualEditor/Feedback|گزارش آن‌هاست]]؛ اما همچنان کارهای بسیاری می‌توان انجام شد که موارد زیر از آن جمله‌اند:

* '''به‌روزرسانی صفحات راهنما''' — همهٔ پروژه‌های ما دارای صفحات راهنما هستند که کمک می‌کند تا مشارکت برای کاربران تازه‌وارد، آسان شود. متأسفانه این صفحات با توجه به ویرایشگر نشانه‌گذار ساخته شده‌اند و با رشد ویرایشگر دیداری، تصویرها و راهنماهای این صفحات منسوخ خواهند شد. [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|به‌روزرسانی  این صفحات]] برای تطبیق با [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|راهنمای استفاده از ویرایشگر دیداری]] بسیار مفید خواهد بود.
* '''افزودن داده‌الگو به الگوها''' —
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''به جامعهٔ خود کمک کنید''' — [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|فهرست راه‌های مفید برای کمک به جامعهٔ محلی خودتان]] را ببینید.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''به کاربران جدید کمک کنید'''— اگر ویرایشگر دیداری با موفقیت به راه بیافتد،‌ کاربران جدید بسیار زیادی خواهیم داشت. این امر ممکن است ویرایش را آسان‌تر کند اما سر در آوردن از روش ارتباط با جامعه کاربران همچنان سخت خواهد بود. لطفاً برای کمک به جاافتادن این تازه‌واردان در ویکی‌پدیا، [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|در میز کمک یا کانال آی‌آر‌سی]] وقت بگذارید.

== جستارهای وابسته ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>kov7q8s42opvflb6kdwl0p0bs7lpu16</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403005</id>
      <parentid>5402414</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9318" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
به درگاه '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ویرایشگر دیداری]]''' خوش آمدید. ویرایشگر دیداری روش تازه‌ای برای ویرایش در ویکی‌پدیا است که توسط بنیاد ویکی‌مدیا توسعه داده شده‌است و به کاربران اجازه می‌دهد تا بدون نیاز به دانستن نشانه‌گذاری ویکی،  آنرا ویرایش کنند. امیدواریم که این روش به کاربران کمک کند تا در ویکی‌پدیا مشارکت کنند.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' را مطالعه‌کنید.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''گزارش خطا''' با ویرایشگر دیداری].
|-
| چگونگی افزودن پیوند، افزودن یا حذف کردن تصویر، ساختن ارجاع، افزودن الگو، ویرایش جدول و موارد دیگر را بیاموزید.
|لطفاً «مرورگر وب، سیستم عامل رایانه و پوستهٔ ویکی‌پدیای خود» (معمولاً وکتور یا مونوبوک) را مد نظر قراردهید.
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== دربارهٔ ویرایشگر دیداری ==

ویرایشگر دیداری یک روش تصویری برای ویرایش ویکی‌پدیا است. در گذشته، همواره ویرایش در ویکی‌پدیا، حتی ایجاد تغییرات کوچک در یک صفحه، نیازمند آموختن نشانه‌گذاری ویکی، که زبانی نسبتاً پیچیده است، بوده‌است. در سال ۲۰۰۱ این روش پذیرفتنی بود؛ ولی در سال ۲۰۱۵ باعث [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|فراری‌دادن مشارکت کنندگان]] می‌شود. امیدواریم که ویرایشگر دیداری برای مشارکت کنندگان کنونی مفید باشد و بیشتر مورد استقبال کاربران تازه قرار گیرد. 

نسخهٔ «آلفا» یا همان نسخهٔ مقدماتی ویرایشگر دیداری از اواسط سال ۲۰۱۲ میلادی بر روی Mediawiki.org منتشر شد و از دسامبر ۲۰۱۲ میلادی بر روی ویکی‌پدیای انگلیسی فعال گردید و [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ از آوریل ۲۰۱۳ میلادی بر ۱۴ ویکی‌پدیای دیگر] و از آغاز ژوئن ۲۰۱۳ میلادی [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ تقریباً بر روی همهٔ ویکی‌پدیاها] اجرا شد.‍ از ژوئیه ۲۰۱۵ میلادی، ویرایشگر دیداری برای همهٔ ویرایشگران (اعم از آی‌پی و کاربر) در ۷۵٪ ویکی‌پدیاها به‌صورت پیش‌فرض در دسترس است.
انتظار داریم که تا اواخر سال ۲۰۱۵ میلادی، ویرایشگر دیداری را به‌صورت پیش‌فرض برای اکثر  [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|زبان‌های باقی‌مانده]]  فعال کنیم.
همچنین از اواخر نوامبر ۲۰۱۴ میلادی، ویرایشگر دیداری به‌صورت [[Beta Features|ویژگی بتا]] برای همهٔ ویکی‌های بنیاد ویکی‌مدیا به‌جز ویکی‌واژه و ویکی‌منبع راه‌اندازی شد.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;

ما [[VisualEditor/changelog|بروزرسانی‌های منظمی]] در Mediawiki.org و [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|خبرنامه‌های چندزبانه]] منتشر کرده‌ایم که بر ویکی‌های بنیاد ویکی‌مدیا متمرکز بود.
&lt;/div&gt;

== استفاده از ویرایشگر دیداری ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
اگر علاقه‌مند به استفاده از ویرایشگر دیداری برای ویرایش هستید، ما یک [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|راهنمای انجام کار]] و همچنین [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|فهرستی از کلیدهای میان‌بُر پرکاربرد]] داریم.
&lt;/div&gt;

در حال حاضر، ویرایشگر دیداری تعدادی باگ و محدودیت دارد. اگر با مشکلی روبه‌رو شدید، لطفاً برای طرح آن در [[VisualEditor/Feedback|صفحهٔ بازخوردها]] درنگ مکنید. محدودیت‌های کنونی شامل موارد زیر است:

* '''بارگذاری آهسته'''—  بارگذاری صفحات پیچیده در ویرایشگر دیداری زمان زیادی طول می‌کشد. در آینده، این ابزار سریع‌تر خواهد بود و بارگذاری صفحات بزرگ‌تر را امکان‌پذیر می‌کند.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''ویراستن ناتمام''' — برخی از
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''بیشترِ صفحات محتوایی، نه صفحات بحث''' — ویرایشگر دیداری فقط برای چند فضای نام فعال شده‌است. در بیشترِ ویکی‌پدیاها، ویرایشگر دیداری می‌تواند در فضای نام مقالات، فضای کاربری، فضای پرونده، صفحات راهنما و رده مورد استفاده قرار گیرد. ویرایشگر دیداری در حال حاضر برای فضای ویکی‌پدیا و صفحات بحث کاربر و بحث مقاله در دسترس نیست.

پیشنهاد می‌کنیم که کاربران پیش از ذخیرهٔ صفحه، بر &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; کلیک کنند و [[VisualEditor/Feedback|هرگونه مشکلی که با آن مواجه شده‌اند را گزارش کنند]].

== چگونه می‌توان کمک کرد ==

برای آنکه ویرایشگر دیداری بهبود پیدا کند، برای انجام بسیاری از کارها به کمک نیاز داریم. بدیهی‌ست که یکی از بزرگترین قسمت‌ها، استفاده از نرم‌افزار و یافتن باگ‌ها و [[VisualEditor/Feedback|گزارش آن‌هاست]]؛ اما همچنان کارهای بسیاری می‌توان انجام شد که موارد زیر از آن جمله‌اند:

* '''به‌روزرسانی صفحات راهنما''' — همهٔ پروژه‌های ما دارای صفحات راهنما هستند که کمک می‌کند تا مشارکت برای کاربران تازه‌وارد، آسان شود. متأسفانه این صفحات با توجه به ویرایشگر نشانه‌گذار ساخته شده‌اند و با رشد ویرایشگر دیداری، تصویرها و راهنماهای این صفحات منسوخ خواهند شد. [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|به‌روزرسانی  این صفحات]] برای تطبیق با [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|راهنمای استفاده از ویرایشگر دیداری]] بسیار مفید خواهد بود.
* '''افزودن داده‌الگو به الگوها''' —
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''به جامعهٔ خود کمک کنید''' — [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|فهرست راه‌های مفید برای کمک به جامعهٔ محلی خودتان]] را ببینید.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''به کاربران جدید کمک کنید'''— اگر ویرایشگر دیداری با موفقیت به راه بیافتد،‌ کاربران جدید بسیار زیادی خواهیم داشت. این امر ممکن است ویرایش را آسان‌تر کند اما سر در آوردن از روش ارتباط با جامعه کاربران همچنان سخت خواهد بود. لطفاً برای کمک به جاافتادن این تازه‌واردان در ویکی‌پدیا، [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|در میز کمک یا کانال آی‌آر‌سی]] وقت بگذارید.
&lt;/div&gt;

== جستارهای وابسته ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>th0jm3flqxsuf5g3v9heoa97vyushfy</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403051</id>
      <parentid>5403005</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:01:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9278" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
به درگاه '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ویرایشگر دیداری]]''' خوش آمدید. ویرایشگر دیداری روش تازه‌ای برای ویرایش در ویکی‌پدیا است که توسط بنیاد ویکی‌مدیا توسعه داده شده‌است و به کاربران اجازه می‌دهد تا بدون نیاز به دانستن نشانه‌گذاری ویکی،  آنرا ویرایش کنند. امیدواریم که این روش به کاربران کمک کند تا در ویکی‌پدیا مشارکت کنند.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' را مطالعه‌کنید.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''گزارش خطا''' با ویرایشگر دیداری].
|-
| چگونگی افزودن پیوند، افزودن یا حذف کردن تصویر، ساختن ارجاع، افزودن الگو، ویرایش جدول و موارد دیگر را بیاموزید.
|لطفاً «مرورگر وب، سیستم عامل رایانه و پوستهٔ ویکی‌پدیای خود» (معمولاً وکتور یا مونوبوک) را مد نظر قراردهید.
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== دربارهٔ ویرایشگر دیداری ==

ویرایشگر دیداری یک روش تصویری برای ویرایش ویکی‌پدیا است. در گذشته، همواره ویرایش در ویکی‌پدیا، حتی ایجاد تغییرات کوچک در یک صفحه، نیازمند آموختن نشانه‌گذاری ویکی، که زبانی نسبتاً پیچیده است، بوده‌است. در سال ۲۰۰۱ این روش پذیرفتنی بود؛ ولی در سال ۲۰۱۵ باعث [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|فراری‌دادن مشارکت کنندگان]] می‌شود. امیدواریم که ویرایشگر دیداری برای مشارکت کنندگان کنونی مفید باشد و بیشتر مورد استقبال کاربران تازه قرار گیرد. 

نسخهٔ «آلفا» یا همان نسخهٔ مقدماتی ویرایشگر دیداری از اواسط سال ۲۰۱۲ میلادی بر روی Mediawiki.org منتشر شد و از دسامبر ۲۰۱۲ میلادی بر روی ویکی‌پدیای انگلیسی فعال گردید و [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ از آوریل ۲۰۱۳ میلادی بر ۱۴ ویکی‌پدیای دیگر] و از آغاز ژوئن ۲۰۱۳ میلادی [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ تقریباً بر روی همهٔ ویکی‌پدیاها] اجرا شد.‍ از ژوئیه ۲۰۱۵ میلادی، ویرایشگر دیداری برای همهٔ ویرایشگران (اعم از آی‌پی و کاربر) در ۷۵٪ ویکی‌پدیاها به‌صورت پیش‌فرض در دسترس است.
انتظار داریم که تا اواخر سال ۲۰۱۵ میلادی، ویرایشگر دیداری را به‌صورت پیش‌فرض برای اکثر  [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|زبان‌های باقی‌مانده]]  فعال کنیم.
همچنین از اواخر نوامبر ۲۰۱۴ میلادی، ویرایشگر دیداری به‌صورت [[Beta Features|ویژگی بتا]] برای همهٔ ویکی‌های بنیاد ویکی‌مدیا به‌جز ویکی‌واژه و ویکی‌منبع راه‌اندازی شد.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;

ما [[VisualEditor/changelog|بروزرسانی‌های منظمی]] در Mediawiki.org و [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|خبرنامه‌های چندزبانه]] منتشر کرده‌ایم که بر ویکی‌های بنیاد ویکی‌مدیا متمرکز بود.
&lt;/div&gt;

== استفاده از ویرایشگر دیداری ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
اگر علاقه‌مند به استفاده از ویرایشگر دیداری برای ویرایش هستید، ما یک [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|راهنمای انجام کار]] و همچنین [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|فهرستی از کلیدهای میان‌بُر پرکاربرد]] داریم.
&lt;/div&gt;

در حال حاضر، ویرایشگر دیداری تعدادی باگ و محدودیت دارد. اگر با مشکلی روبه‌رو شدید، لطفاً برای طرح آن در [[VisualEditor/Feedback|صفحهٔ بازخوردها]] درنگ مکنید. محدودیت‌های کنونی شامل موارد زیر است:

* '''بارگذاری آهسته'''—  بارگذاری صفحات پیچیده در ویرایشگر دیداری زمان زیادی طول می‌کشد. در آینده، این ابزار سریع‌تر خواهد بود و بارگذاری صفحات بزرگ‌تر را امکان‌پذیر می‌کند.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''ویراستن ناتمام''' — برخی از
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''بیشترِ صفحات محتوایی، نه صفحات بحث''' — ویرایشگر دیداری فقط برای چند فضای نام فعال شده‌است. در بیشترِ ویکی‌پدیاها، ویرایشگر دیداری می‌تواند در فضای نام مقالات، فضای کاربری، فضای پرونده، صفحات راهنما و رده مورد استفاده قرار گیرد. ویرایشگر دیداری در حال حاضر برای فضای ویکی‌پدیا و صفحات بحث کاربر و بحث مقاله در دسترس نیست.

پیشنهاد می‌کنیم که کاربران پیش از ذخیرهٔ صفحه، بر &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; کلیک کنند و [[VisualEditor/Feedback|هرگونه مشکلی که با آن مواجه شده‌اند را گزارش کنند]].

== چگونه می‌توان کمک کرد ==

برای آنکه ویرایشگر دیداری بهبود پیدا کند، برای انجام بسیاری از کارها به کمک نیاز داریم. بدیهی‌ست که یکی از بزرگترین قسمت‌ها، استفاده از نرم‌افزار و یافتن باگ‌ها و [[VisualEditor/Feedback|گزارش آن‌هاست]]؛ اما همچنان کارهای بسیاری می‌توان انجام شد که موارد زیر از آن جمله‌اند:

* '''به‌روزرسانی صفحات راهنما''' — همهٔ پروژه‌های ما دارای صفحات راهنما هستند که کمک می‌کند تا مشارکت برای کاربران تازه‌وارد، آسان شود. متأسفانه این صفحات با توجه به ویرایشگر نشانه‌گذار ساخته شده‌اند و با رشد ویرایشگر دیداری، تصویرها و راهنماهای این صفحات منسوخ خواهند شد. [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|به‌روزرسانی  این صفحات]] برای تطبیق با [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|راهنمای استفاده از ویرایشگر دیداری]] بسیار مفید خواهد بود.
* '''افزودن داده‌الگو به الگوها''' —
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''به جامعهٔ خود کمک کنید''' — [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|فهرست راه‌های مفید برای کمک به جامعهٔ محلی خودتان]] را ببینید.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''به کاربران جدید کمک کنید'''— اگر ویرایشگر دیداری با موفقیت به راه بیافتد،‌ کاربران جدید بسیار زیادی خواهیم داشت. این امر ممکن است ویرایش را آسان‌تر کند اما سر در آوردن از روش ارتباط با جامعه کاربران همچنان سخت خواهد بود. لطفاً برای کمک به جاافتادن این تازه‌واردان در ویکی‌پدیا، [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|در میز کمک یا کانال آی‌آر‌سی]] وقت بگذارید.

== جستارهای وابسته ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>kov7q8s42opvflb6kdwl0p0bs7lpu16</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403215</id>
      <parentid>5403051</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:52:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9962" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
به درگاه '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ویرایشگر دیداری]]''' خوش آمدید. ویرایشگر دیداری روش تازه‌ای برای ویرایش در ویکی‌پدیا است که توسط بنیاد ویکی‌مدیا توسعه داده شده‌است و به کاربران اجازه می‌دهد تا بدون نیاز به دانستن نشانه‌گذاری ویکی،  آنرا ویرایش کنند. امیدواریم که این روش به کاربران کمک کند تا در ویکی‌پدیا مشارکت کنند.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' را مطالعه‌کنید.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''گزارش خطا''' با ویرایشگر دیداری].
|-
| چگونگی افزودن پیوند، افزودن یا حذف کردن تصویر، ساختن ارجاع، افزودن الگو، ویرایش جدول و موارد دیگر را بیاموزید.
|لطفاً «مرورگر وب، سیستم عامل رایانه و پوستهٔ ویکی‌پدیای خود» (معمولاً وکتور یا مونوبوک) را مد نظر قراردهید.
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== دربارهٔ ویرایشگر دیداری ==

ویرایشگر دیداری یک روش تصویری برای ویرایش ویکی‌پدیا است. در گذشته، همواره ویرایش در ویکی‌پدیا، حتی ایجاد تغییرات کوچک در یک صفحه، نیازمند آموختن نشانه‌گذاری ویکی، که زبانی نسبتاً پیچیده است، بوده‌است. در سال ۲۰۰۱ این روش پذیرفتنی بود؛ ولی در سال ۲۰۱۵ باعث [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|فراری‌دادن مشارکت کنندگان]] می‌شود. امیدواریم که ویرایشگر دیداری برای مشارکت کنندگان کنونی مفید باشد و بیشتر مورد استقبال کاربران تازه قرار گیرد. 

نسخهٔ «آلفا» یا همان نسخهٔ مقدماتی ویرایشگر دیداری از اواسط سال ۲۰۱۲ میلادی بر روی Mediawiki.org منتشر شد و از دسامبر ۲۰۱۲ میلادی بر روی ویکی‌پدیای انگلیسی فعال گردید و [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ از آوریل ۲۰۱۳ میلادی بر ۱۴ ویکی‌پدیای دیگر] و از آغاز ژوئن ۲۰۱۳ میلادی [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ تقریباً بر روی همهٔ ویکی‌پدیاها] اجرا شد.‍ از ژوئیه ۲۰۱۵ میلادی، ویرایشگر دیداری برای همهٔ ویرایشگران (اعم از آی‌پی و کاربر) در ۷۵٪ ویکی‌پدیاها به‌صورت پیش‌فرض در دسترس است.
انتظار داریم که تا اواخر سال ۲۰۱۵ میلادی، ویرایشگر دیداری را به‌صورت پیش‌فرض برای اکثر  [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|زبان‌های باقی‌مانده]]  فعال کنیم.
همچنین از اواخر نوامبر ۲۰۱۴ میلادی، ویرایشگر دیداری به‌صورت [[Beta Features|ویژگی بتا]] برای همهٔ ویکی‌های بنیاد ویکی‌مدیا به‌جز ویکی‌واژه و ویکی‌منبع راه‌اندازی شد.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;

ما [[VisualEditor/changelog|بروزرسانی‌های منظمی]] در Mediawiki.org و [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|خبرنامه‌های چندزبانه]] منتشر کرده‌ایم که بر ویکی‌های بنیاد ویکی‌مدیا متمرکز بود.
&lt;/div&gt;

== استفاده از ویرایشگر دیداری ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
اگر علاقه‌مند به استفاده از ویرایشگر دیداری برای ویرایش هستید، ما یک [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|راهنمای انجام کار]] و همچنین [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|فهرستی از کلیدهای میان‌بُر پرکاربرد]] داریم.
&lt;/div&gt;

در حال حاضر، ویرایشگر دیداری تعدادی باگ و محدودیت دارد. اگر با مشکلی روبه‌رو شدید، لطفاً برای طرح آن در [[VisualEditor/Feedback|صفحهٔ بازخوردها]] درنگ مکنید. محدودیت‌های کنونی شامل موارد زیر است:

* '''بارگذاری آهسته'''—  بارگذاری صفحات پیچیده در ویرایشگر دیداری زمان زیادی طول می‌کشد. در آینده، این ابزار سریع‌تر خواهد بود و بارگذاری صفحات بزرگ‌تر را امکان‌پذیر می‌کند.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''ویراستن ناتمام''' — برخی از
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''بیشترِ صفحات محتوایی، نه صفحات بحث''' — ویرایشگر دیداری فقط برای چند فضای نام فعال شده‌است. در بیشترِ ویکی‌پدیاها، ویرایشگر دیداری می‌تواند در فضای نام مقالات، فضای کاربری، فضای پرونده، صفحات راهنما و رده مورد استفاده قرار گیرد. ویرایشگر دیداری در حال حاضر برای فضای ویکی‌پدیا و صفحات بحث کاربر و بحث مقاله در دسترس نیست.

پیشنهاد می‌کنیم که کاربران پیش از ذخیرهٔ صفحه، بر &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; کلیک کنند و [[VisualEditor/Feedback|هرگونه مشکلی که با آن مواجه شده‌اند را گزارش کنند]].

== چگونه می‌توان کمک کرد ==

برای آنکه ویرایشگر دیداری بهبود پیدا کند، برای انجام بسیاری از کارها به کمک نیاز داریم. بدیهی‌ست که یکی از بزرگترین قسمت‌ها، استفاده از نرم‌افزار و یافتن باگ‌ها و [[VisualEditor/Feedback|گزارش آن‌هاست]]؛ اما همچنان کارهای بسیاری می‌توان انجام شد که موارد زیر از آن جمله‌اند:

* '''به‌روزرسانی صفحات راهنما''' — همهٔ پروژه‌های ما دارای صفحات راهنما هستند که کمک می‌کند تا مشارکت برای کاربران تازه‌وارد، آسان شود. متأسفانه این صفحات با توجه به ویرایشگر نشانه‌گذار ساخته شده‌اند و با رشد ویرایشگر دیداری، تصویرها و راهنماهای این صفحات منسوخ خواهند شد. [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|به‌روزرسانی  این صفحات]] برای تطبیق با [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|راهنمای استفاده از ویرایشگر دیداری]] بسیار مفید خواهد بود.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Adding TemplateData to templates''' — VisualEditor features a nice template editor, which is described in more detail on our [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|help page]]. As you'll see if you use it on Wikipedia, some templates have named parameters and nice descriptions that make it easy to use. Others do not. This is because templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; before this feature will work. If you're interested in adding TemplateData, we have [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]], along with a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''به جامعهٔ خود کمک کنید''' — [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|فهرست راه‌های مفید برای کمک به جامعهٔ محلی خودتان]] را ببینید.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''به کاربران جدید کمک کنید'''— اگر ویرایشگر دیداری با موفقیت به راه بیافتد،‌ کاربران جدید بسیار زیادی خواهیم داشت. این امر ممکن است ویرایش را آسان‌تر کند اما سر در آوردن از روش ارتباط با جامعه کاربران همچنان سخت خواهد بود. لطفاً برای کمک به جاافتادن این تازه‌واردان در ویکی‌پدیا، [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|در میز کمک یا کانال آی‌آر‌سی]] وقت بگذارید.

== جستارهای وابسته ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>0dgpjbk67g4x0msoqnyv0ds6bfh0zvk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/fa</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>470195</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402413</id>
      <parentid>1755487</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:55:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="548" xml:space="preserve">به درگاه '''[[$ve|ویرایشگر دیداری]]''' خوش آمدید. ویرایشگر دیداری روش تازه‌ای برای ویرایش در ویکی‌پدیا است که توسط بنیاد ویکی‌مدیا توسعه داده شده‌است و به کاربران اجازه می‌دهد تا بدون نیاز به دانستن نشانه‌گذاری ویکی،  آنرا ویرایش کنند. امیدواریم که این روش به کاربران کمک کند تا در ویکی‌پدیا مشارکت کنند.</text>
      <sha1>qcqzp7hkfhrvi1xgxpy8rmmh9ux905w</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/eu</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>470227</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403213</id>
      <parentid>1802863</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:52:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="646" xml:space="preserve">* '''Txantiloiei TemplateData gehitu''' — Ikusizko Editoreak badu txantiloiak editatzeko funtzionalitate on bat eta horren ezaugarriak xehetasun gehiagorekin azaltzen dira gure [[$ug|laguntza orrian]]. Wikipedian erabiltzen badituzu jakingo duzun bezala, zenbait txantiloik parametro izenak eta deskripzioak dituzte erabiltzen errazagoak egiteko. Beste batzuk, ordea, ez. Hori gertatzen da txantiloiek aurretik &quot;TemplateData&quot; sartua izan behar dutelako ezaugarri hau funtziona dadin. TemplateData sartzen interesa bazenu, badago [[$td-tutor|hori egiteko gida bat]],  [[$td|gehitzeko garrantzitsuenak diren txantiloien zerrenda]] batekin batera.</text>
      <sha1>6dm219ogc8dbzljs0m3l9tm10icacw1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/eu</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>470235</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403048</id>
      <parentid>1802867</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:00:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="372" xml:space="preserve">* '''Erabiltzaile berriak lagundu'''  — Ikusizko Editorearen abiaraztea arrakastatsua bada, orain ditugunak baino asko lankide gehiago izango ditugu. Baina, nahiz eta editatzea errazagoa izan, komunitatearekin hartu-emanetan aritzea zaila izango da. Eman denbora bat mesedez [[$1|laguntza mahaian edo IRC laguntza kanalean]] lankide berriak Wikipediara egokitu daitezen.</text>
      <sha1>31epmu1rvjv4nidfhcbm4iybd4kbzdq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/tg</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>470702</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402452</id>
      <parentid>4983818</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:05:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10506" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
ба даргоҳи '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Виройишгари Дидори]]''' хуш омадед. Виройишгари Дидори равиши тозҳои барои виройиш дар Википедиа аст ки тавассути бунёди викимидиа тавсеъа дода шудааст ва ба корбарон иҷоза медиҳад то бидуни ниёз ба донистани  нишонаи гузорӣ вики, и онрои виройиши кунанди . умедворӣам ки ин равиш ба корбарони кӯмаки кунад то дар Википедиа мушорикати кунанди.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' ро мутолиаи кунед.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} ''' гузориши хато''' бо Виройишгари Дидори].
|-
| чигунагии афзудан пайванд, афзудан ё ҳазф кардан тасвир, сохтани ирҷоъ , اафзудан улгӯ , виройиши ҷадвал ва мавориди дигарро бёмуэедю.
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Дарбораи Виройишгари Дидори ==

Виройишгари Дидори як равиши тасвирӣ барои виройиш Википедиа аст. дар гузашта, ҳамвораи виройиш дар Википедиа, ҳаттои эҷоди тағироти кӯчак дар як сафҳа, ниёзманди омухтани  нишонаи гузорӣ вики, ки забонии нисбатан печида аст, будааст. дар соли 2001 ин равиши пазируфтании бӯд; вале дар соли 2015 боиси [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|фирории додан мушорикаткунандагон]] мешавад. умедворӣам ки Виройишгари Дидори барои мушорикаткунандагон кунӯнӣ муфӣд бошад ва бештари мавриди истиқболи корбарони тозаи қарори гӣради. 

нусхаи «олфо» ёи ҳамони нусхаи муқаддамотии Виройишгари Дидори аз авосити соли 2012 милодӣ бар рӯй Mediawiki.org мунташир шуд ва аз декабри 2012 милодӣ бар рӯй Википедиаи англисии фаъоли гардид ва [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ аз аврели 2013 милодӣ бар 14 википедиаи дегар] ва аз оғози июни 2013 милодии [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ тақрибан бар рӯй ҳамаи википедиаҳо] иҷрои шуд.  аз июли 2015 милодӣ , Виройишгари Дидори барои ҳамаи виройишгарон (IP ва корбар) дар 75% википедиаҳо басӯрати пешфарз дар дастрас аст.
интизор дорем ки то авохири соли 2015 милодӣ, Виройишгари Дидори ро басӯрати пешфарз барои аксари [[VisualEditor/Rollouts| забонҳои боқӣмонда]] фаъоли кунеми.
ҳамчунин аз авохири ноябри 2014 милодӣ, Виройишгари Дидори басӯрати [[Beta Features]] барои ҳамаи викиҳои Бунёди викимидиа ба ҷуз Викилуғат ва Викитека роҳандозӣ шуд.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
мо [[VisualEditor/changelog|бурӯзирасониҳоии муназзами]] дар Mediawiki.org ва [[:m:VisualEditor/Newsletter|хабарномаҳой чандзабона]] мунташир кардаим ки бар викиҳои бунёди викимидиа муттамаркиз буд.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Истифодаи Вироишгари Визуалӣ ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
агар алоқаманд ба истифода аз Виройишгари Дидори барои виройиш ҳастӣд, мо як [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|роҳнамои анҷоми кор]] ва ҳамчунин [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|листӣ аз Келлӣҳои миёнбури пуркорбурд]] дореми.
&lt;/div&gt;

дар ҳоли ҳозир, Виройишгари Дидори теъдоди BUG ва маҳдӯдият дорад. агар бо мушкили рӯбарӯи шадид, лутфан барои тарҳи он дар [[VisualEditor/Feedback|Саҳифаи бозхӯрдҳо]] диранги накунед. маҳдӯдиятҳои кунӯнии шомили маворид зер аст:

* '''боргузории оҳиста'''— боргузории сафаҳоти печида дар Виройишгари Дидори замони зиёдӣ тӯл мекашад. дар оянда, ин абзори сареътар хоҳад буд ва боргузории сафаҳоти бузургтарро имконпазӣр мекунад.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Incomplete editing''' — Some elements of complex formatting will display and let you edit their contents, but will not let users edit their structure or add new entries – such as definition lists. Adding features in this area is one of our priorities.
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''бештари сафаҳоти муҳтавоӣ, на сафаҳоти баҳс''' — Виройишгари Дидори фақат барои чанд фазоӣ ном фаъол шудааст. дар бештари Википедиаҳо, Виройишгари Дидори метавонад дар фаэоӣ номи мақолот, фаэоӣ корбарӣ, фаэоӣ парванда, сафаҳоти роҳнамо ва рада мавриди истифода қарор гӣрад. Виройишгари Дидори дар ҳоли ҳозир барои фаэоӣ Википедиа ва сафаҳоти баҳси корбар ва баҳси мақола дар дастраси нести.

пешниҳод меканем ки корбарон пеш аз захираи сафҳа, бар &quot;{{int:Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; клик кунанд ва [[VisualEditor/Feedback|ҳар гуна мушкилӣ ки бо он мувоҷеҳ шудандро гузориш кунанд]].

== чигуна метавон кӯмак кард ==

Барои онки Виройишгари Дидори беҳбӯд пайдо кунад, барои анҷоми хеле аз корҳо ба кӯмак ниёз дорем. бадеҳӣ аст ки якӣ аз бузургтарен қисматҳо, истифода аз нармафзор ва ёфтани Bug ва [[VisualEditor/Feedback|гузориши онҳо аст]]; амо ҳамчунон корҳой зиёдӣ метавон анҷом шавад ки мавориди зер аз он ҷумлианд:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Updating help pages''' — All of our projects have help pages to make it easier for new users to contribute. Unfortunately they are all built around the markup editor, and as VisualEditor evolves, the screenshots and tutorials will all become outdated. It would be very useful if people could  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]], based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Adding TemplateData to templates''' — VisualEditor features a nice template editor, which is described in more detail on our [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|help page]]. As you'll see if you use it on Wikipedia, some templates have named parameters and nice descriptions that make it easy to use. Others do not. This is because templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; before this feature will work. If you're interested in adding TemplateData, we have [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]], along with a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help your community''' — See the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|list of useful ways to help your local community]] to optimize the editing experience with the visual editor.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help new users''' — If the VisualEditor launch is successful, we will have a lot more new users than we are used to, and even though editing may be easier, working out how to interact with the community will still be hard. Please spend some time [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]], to help these newcomers become acclimatized to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ҳамчунин нигаред ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>nnvg0u6wkfsi5tnc9aosng416vb571l</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/yi</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>471006</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402456</id>
      <parentid>4347081</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:05:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8140" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
ברוך הבא צום פארטאל פאר '''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|וויזועל־רעדאקטירער]]''', א נייער וועג צו רעדאקטירן וויקיפעדיע וואס די וויקימעדיע פונדאציע טוט אמטוויקלען. ער לאזט מענטשן רעדאקטירן אן צו דארפן לערנען וויקי באצייכענונג.  מיר האפענען אז דאס וועט העלפן מענטשן ביישטייערן צו וויקיפעדיע.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | לייענען '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''באריכטן א פראבלעם''' מיט וויזועל־רעדאקטירער].
|-
| דערגייט וויאזוי צו מאכן לינקען, צולייגן אדער באוועגן בילדער, שאפן ציטירונגען, איינגעבן מוסטערן, רעדאקטירן טאבעלעס, און נאך.
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please include your '''web browser, computer operating system, and Wikipedia skin''' (usually Vector, sometimes Monobook).&lt;/span&gt;
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== וועגן וויזועל־רעדאקטירער ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor is a &quot;visual&quot; way of editing Wikipedia. Editing Wikipedia has historically required people to learn wiki markup, a fairly complex markup language, even to make tiny changes to a page. In 2001, this was acceptable; in 2015, it is [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|driving contributors away]]. We hope that VisualEditor will be useful to existing contributors and more welcoming to new users.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor has been available as an opt-in &quot;alpha&quot; release at MediaWiki.org since mid-2012 and on the English-language Wikipedia since December 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ in 14 more languages since April 2013], and [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ almost all other languages] since the beginning of June 2013.  As of July 2015, it has been available by default to logged-in and logged-out editors at more than 75% of the Wikipedias.&lt;/span&gt;
מיר האלטן אז ער וועט זיין סטאנדארט אין מאערסטנס פון  [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|די איבריגע שפראכן]] סוף 2015.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since late November 2014, it is also available as an opt-in [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Feature]] at all WMF wikis except Wiktionary and Wikisource.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We are releasing a [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|multilingual newsletter]], focused on WMF wikis.
&lt;/div&gt;

== ניצן וויזועל־רעדאקטירער ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're interested in using VisualEditor for editing, we have a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guide to doing so]], as well as a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|list of common keyboard shortcuts]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
VisualEditor has some current bugs and limitations. If you encounter an issue, please do not hesitate to [[VisualEditor/Feedback|report it on the Feedback page]]. Current limitations include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Slow to load''' — It will take some time for long, complex pages to load into VisualEditor. In the future the software will be a lot faster, and will allow for the loading of larger pages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Incomplete editing''' — Some elements of complex formatting will display and let you edit their contents, but will not let users edit their structure or add new entries – such as definition lists. Adding features in this area is one of our priorities.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Most content pages, not talk pages''' — VisualEditor is only enabled for some namespaces.  At most Wikipedias, VisualEditor can be used on articles, User:, File:, Help: and Category: pages.  VisualEditor is not currently available for Wikipedia: pages or any talk pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We recommend that users click &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; before saving the page and [[VisualEditor/Feedback|report any problems they encounter]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== וויאזוי אויסצוהעלפן ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For VisualEditor to be as good as it can be, there are a lot of things we need help with. Obviously, one big area is using the software, finding bugs and [[VisualEditor/Feedback|reporting them]], but there are many other tasks as well. These include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Updating help pages''' — All of our projects have help pages to make it easier for new users to contribute. Unfortunately they are all built around the markup editor, and as VisualEditor evolves, the screenshots and tutorials will all become outdated. It would be very useful if people could  [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|update help pages]], based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|our tutorial to using VisualEditor]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Adding TemplateData to templates''' — VisualEditor features a nice template editor, which is described in more detail on our [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|help page]]. As you'll see if you use it on Wikipedia, some templates have named parameters and nice descriptions that make it easy to use. Others do not. This is because templates need &quot;TemplateData&quot; before this feature will work. If you're interested in adding TemplateData, we have [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|a guide to doing so]], along with a [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|list of the most important templates to add it to]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''העלפט אייער געמיינדע''' — זעט די [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|לעסטע פון ניצלעכע וועגן צו העלפן אייער לאקאלע געמיינדע]] ווען וויזועל־רעדאקטירער ווערט אנגעשלאגן ווי א ברירה'דיקע בעטא פארשלאג.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Help new users''' — If the VisualEditor launch is successful, we will have a lot more new users than we are used to, and even though editing may be easier, working out how to interact with the community will still be hard. Please spend some time [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|on the help desk, or in the IRC help channel]], to help these newcomers become acclimatized to Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

==זעט אויך==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a checklist about optimizing the editing experience for your wiki and your fellow editors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;get and offer help for visual editor-related work from and to other Wikimedians like you.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a former guide for communities totally new to the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>cy6zner11ju9l8h04k6y1hjzpwpfv2r</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/yi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>471010</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402455</id>
      <parentid>1756798</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:05:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="474" xml:space="preserve">ברוך הבא צום פארטאל פאר '''[[$ve|וויזועל־רעדאקטירער]]''', א נייער וועג צו רעדאקטירן וויקיפעדיע וואס די וויקימעדיע פונדאציע טוט אמטוויקלען. ער לאזט מענטשן רעדאקטירן אן צו דארפן לערנען וויקי באצייכענונג.  מיר האפענען אז דאס וועט העלפן מענטשן ביישטייערן צו וויקיפעדיע.</text>
      <sha1>de83hicsev8tu8er7kycr15pqpl8qe0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/tg</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>471148</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402451</id>
      <parentid>4797210</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T05:05:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="655" xml:space="preserve">ба даргоҳи '''[[$ve|Виройишгари Дидори]]''' хуш омадед. Виройишгари Дидори равиши тозҳои барои виройиш дар Википедиа аст ки тавассути бунёди викимидиа тавсеъа дода шудааст ва ба корбарон иҷоза медиҳад то бидуни ниёз ба донистани  нишонаи гузорӣ вики, и онрои виройиши кунанди . умедворӣам ки ин равиш ба корбарони кӯмаки кунад то дар Википедиа мушорикати кунанди.</text>
      <sha1>cjojcrf52fk88exwndznme7ycm90ygs</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>471723</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403179</id>
      <parentid>1803372</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:42:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="374" xml:space="preserve">* '''Ajudar novos usuários''' — Se o lançamento do Editor Visual obtiver sucesso, teremos muito mais usuários do que o acostumado, e mesmo que editar pode ser fácil, interagir com a comunidade continuará a ser difícil. Por favor, fique algum tempo [[$1|na central de ajuda ou no canal de ajuda do IRC]] para tornar estes recém-chegados acostumados com a Wikipédia.</text>
      <sha1>o2jeyvgttdqzbaqga20dtivdhgbis0p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/fa</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>472133</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403050</id>
      <parentid>1802903</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:00:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="594" xml:space="preserve">* '''به کاربران جدید کمک کنید'''— اگر ویرایشگر دیداری با موفقیت به راه بیافتد،‌ کاربران جدید بسیار زیادی خواهیم داشت. این امر ممکن است ویرایش را آسان‌تر کند اما سر در آوردن از روش ارتباط با جامعه کاربران همچنان سخت خواهد بود. لطفاً برای کمک به جاافتادن این تازه‌واردان در ویکی‌پدیا، [[$1|در میز کمک یا کانال آی‌آر‌سی]] وقت بگذارید.</text>
      <sha1>h995mxbov8cv9c69kbg8031e7a40hyd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/nl</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>482139</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402938</id>
      <parentid>5355661</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="49539" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Basisoverzicht ==

=== Bestandoverdracht ===

Kies een methode om bestanden over te brengen:

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
* Beveiligde kopie van [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] of [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Een [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]]-client gebruiken.
* Het hosting bedrijf kan een bestandsbeheer interface aanbieden via de webbrowser; vraag het na bij uw provider.
* Een andere methode. Daarvan is een list op [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

===Voorafgaand===

Lees {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=het UPGRADE-tekstbestand in MediaWiki}}.

# Controleer de vereisten
# Lees het bestand RELEASE-NOTES
# Lees het bestand UPGRADE
# Maak een reservekopie van alle bestanden en de database.
# Pak de nieuwe bestanden uit
# Upgrade extensies
# Run het update-script om de database te controleren
# Test de update
# Resten van oude installaties verwijderen

== Controleer vereisten == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} vereist:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Een van de volgende:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

Wanneer u PostgreSQL gebruikt, lees alstublieft ook {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Voor meer informatie, lees alstublieft de {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} en {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Lees de release notes ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Clear pending jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Een reservekopie maken van bestaande bestanden en de database ==

:''Volledige instructies: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

== De nieuwe bestanden uitpakken ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using a tarball package ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Opdrachtprompt ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

==== Andere bestanden ====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - bevat uw oude configuratie-instellingen.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Met Git ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Overblijvende bestanden die foutmeldingen kunnen veroorzaken ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Extensies bijwerken ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

== LocalSettings.php bijwerken ==

Indien dezelfde &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; van de oude versie wordt gebruikt, kan het zijn dat deze bijgewerkt moet worden aan hoe nieuwe versies er mee omgaan:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Andere variablen ===
Sommige variabele kunnen overbodig of verwijderd worden.
Ze in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; laten staan heeft gewoonlijk geen effect.
Nieuwe variablelen kunnen toegevoegd worden in nieuwere versies, of bestaande variabelen kunnen een ander type krijgen.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Het updatescript uitvoeren ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== Opdrachtprompt ====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===Webbrowser===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Zie ook {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

# Voer altijd een [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]] uit alvorens database-onderhoud te doen.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
# Kies uw taal en kies doorgaan.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

== De update testen ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Resten van oude installaties verwijderen ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

== Veelgestelde vragen ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===Hoe lastig is het om te upgraden?===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Moet ik eerst een backup maken?===

In het kort: Ja.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

===Kan LocalSettings.php behouden blijven?===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Waarom bijwerken?===
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Sinds {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, is {{ll|InstantCommons}} beschikbaar.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
* Sinds {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki ondersteunt meer dan 350 talen.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Sinds {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, meer extensies maken deel uit de core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (voor Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
* Sinds {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (een LTS release), is {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} deel van de core. De functie &quot;Volg&quot; kan worden uitgebreid met vervaldatums.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Zie ook ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>dfdche0ply3z1xepbvf50trjbvxnyhj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/ml</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>482847</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402254</id>
      <parentid>5400746</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15421" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=പുതുക്കിയ വിവരങ്ങൾ മെറ്റയിൽ ലഭ്യമാണ്: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ലോഗിൻ ചെയ്തിരിക്കുമ്പോൾ മുകളിൽ വലതുള്ള [[Special:preferences|ക്രമീകരണങ്ങൾ]] കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയാൽ താങ്കളുടെ ക്രമീകരണങ്ങളിൽ മാറ്റം വരുത്താൻ താങ്കൾക്കാവുന്നതാണ്. താങ്കളെ പറ്റിയുള്ള ഒരു ഭാഗത്തേക്കാണ് താങ്കൾ ചെല്ലുക, ഒപ്പം മറ്റ് വിധത്തിലുള്ള സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരഞ്ഞെടുക്കാനുള്ള ടാബുകളുടെ നിരയും ഒപ്പമുണ്ടായിരിക്കും.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-username'' താങ്കളുടെ ഉപയോക്തൃനാമം. താങ്കളുടെ ഉപയോക്തൃനാമം മാറ്റുകയെന്നത് ബ്യൂറോക്രാറ്റുകൾക്ക് മാത്രമാണ് സാധ്യമാവുക, വിക്കിയിൽ {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} ചെയ്യൽ അനുബന്ധം ഇൻസ്റ്റോൾ ചെയ്തിരിക്കുകയും വേണം.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || താങ്കളുടെ അംഗത്വം ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ അനുവദിച്ചിട്ടുള്ള ബാഹ്യ ആപ്ലിക്കേഷനുകളുടെ കൈകാര്യത്തിനായി, വിക്കിമീഡിയ വിക്കികളിൽ ഈ കണ്ണി ഉപയോഗിക്കാം. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;കൂടുതൽ വിവരങ്ങൾക്ക് [[Help:OAuth|ഒഓത് സഹായം]] കാണുക.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-prefs-edits'' താങ്കൾ ചെയ്ത തിരുത്തുകളുടെ എണ്ണം. എല്ലാ വിക്കികളിലും ഉണ്ടായിരിക്കണമെന്നില്ല.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|താഴെ കാണുക]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|താഴെ കാണുക]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== ആഗോള അംഗത്വം ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* ഭാഷകൾ
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==തീയതിയും സമയവും==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== ഇതും കാണുക ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ry9ldkad9068t2zva06ul4fpjzh3u77</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402299</id>
      <parentid>5402254</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:07:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15355" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=പുതുക്കിയ വിവരങ്ങൾ മെറ്റയിൽ ലഭ്യമാണ്: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ലോഗിൻ ചെയ്തിരിക്കുമ്പോൾ മുകളിൽ വലതുള്ള [[Special:preferences|ക്രമീകരണങ്ങൾ]] കണ്ണിയിൽ ഞെക്കിയാൽ താങ്കളുടെ ക്രമീകരണങ്ങളിൽ മാറ്റം വരുത്താൻ താങ്കൾക്കാവുന്നതാണ്. താങ്കളെ പറ്റിയുള്ള ഒരു ഭാഗത്തേക്കാണ് താങ്കൾ ചെല്ലുക, ഒപ്പം മറ്റ് വിധത്തിലുള്ള സജ്ജീകരണങ്ങൾ തിരഞ്ഞെടുക്കാനുള്ള ടാബുകളുടെ നിരയും ഒപ്പമുണ്ടായിരിക്കും.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-username'' താങ്കളുടെ ഉപയോക്തൃനാമം. താങ്കളുടെ ഉപയോക്തൃനാമം മാറ്റുകയെന്നത് ബ്യൂറോക്രാറ്റുകൾക്ക് മാത്രമാണ് സാധ്യമാവുക, വിക്കിയിൽ {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} ചെയ്യൽ അനുബന്ധം ഇൻസ്റ്റോൾ ചെയ്തിരിക്കുകയും വേണം.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || താങ്കളുടെ അംഗത്വം ഉപയോഗിക്കാൻ അനുവദിച്ചിട്ടുള്ള ബാഹ്യ ആപ്ലിക്കേഷനുകളുടെ കൈകാര്യത്തിനായി, വിക്കിമീഡിയ വിക്കികളിൽ ഈ കണ്ണി ഉപയോഗിക്കാം. കൂടുതൽ വിവരങ്ങൾക്ക് {{ll|Help:OAuth}} കാണുക.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-prefs-edits'' താങ്കൾ ചെയ്ത തിരുത്തുകളുടെ എണ്ണം. എല്ലാ വിക്കികളിലും ഉണ്ടായിരിക്കണമെന്നില്ല.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|താഴെ കാണുക]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|താഴെ കാണുക]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== ആഗോള അംഗത്വം ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* ഭാഷകൾ
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==തീയതിയും സമയവും==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== ഇതും കാണുക ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>dz5rantljmnrrpo83p5bmes325bk6q4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki/tl</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>489704</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401768</id>
      <parentid>5312699</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4138" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]].  See ShoutWiki's website at [http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com], or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Extensions==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;About ShoutWiki&lt;/span&gt;]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/span&gt;]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/span&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/span&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>8duhxlyd15we54c8yrnn6i84h7mdojf</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401786</id>
      <parentid>5401768</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4136" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]]. See ShoutWiki's website at [http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com], or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Extensions==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;About ShoutWiki&lt;/span&gt;]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/span&gt;]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/span&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/span&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>28hg95vhzbjl7vs9wr5vmbhsmhz0jm6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401886</id>
      <parentid>5401786</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4105" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]]. See [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki's website] or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's about page on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki also has [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 its own Gerrit group] which consists of ShoutWiki staff developers.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Extensions==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;About ShoutWiki&lt;/span&gt;]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information about ShoutWiki and open source&lt;/span&gt;]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code&lt;/span&gt;
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki's GitHub&lt;/span&gt;]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>730egff42y0cr6ex4i3pbbv4ctpp1j0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>492274</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403177</id>
      <parentid>1868050</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:42:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="416" xml:space="preserve">* '''Ajudar novos utilizadores''' — Se o lançamento do Editor Visual for bem-sucedido, teremos muito mais utilizadores do que o normal, e mesmo que a edição possa tornar-se mais fácil, descobrir como interagir com a comunidade continuará a ser difícil. Por favor, passe algum tempo [[$1|na central de ajuda ou no canal de ajuda do IRC]] para ajudar esses recém-chegados a se familiarizarem com a Wikipédia.</text>
      <sha1>7ah5fbw3ry5ufrbgt5dbrnuk239j83l</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>499037</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402592</id>
      <parentid>4923579</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>simplify translation units</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3948" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:18--&gt;
Structured Discussions (formerly known as Flow) are [[&lt;tvar name=SD&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions&lt;/tvar&gt;|a project]] of the Collaboration team at the Wikimedia Foundation to build a modern discussion and collaboration system for Wikimedia projects.

== Quick tour == &lt;!--T:1--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:19--&gt; How Structured Discussions look - [[&lt;tvar name=test&gt;Structured Discussions/Sandbox&lt;/tvar&gt;|Try it!]]&lt;/translate&gt;]]
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
'''[[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour&lt;/tvar&gt;|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''': 

* [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics&lt;/tvar&gt;|editing basics]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
* [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post&lt;/tvar&gt;|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
* [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create&lt;/tvar&gt;|create a discussion]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
* [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch&lt;/tvar&gt;|watch a topic or a whole board]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
* [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications&lt;/tvar&gt;|get notifications]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
* [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse&lt;/tvar&gt;|browse and archive subjects]]

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
There is some specific terms concerning Structured Discussions. They have been defined in '''[[&lt;tvar name=nomenclature&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary&lt;/tvar&gt;|the Glossary]]'''.

&lt;!--T:22--&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[&lt;tvar name=problems&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems&lt;/tvar&gt;|if you can solve that problem]]'''.

== Advanced tools == &lt;!--T:4--&gt;

&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
Some advanced tools are available, for specific purposes. They have been regrouped on these subjects:
&lt;/translate&gt;

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; Activation&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; What happens when Structured Discussions are enabled on a page?&lt;/translate&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; Topics&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; Filter topics, Edit a topic/message, Summarize a topic, Resolve a topic&lt;/translate&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Permalinks&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; How to create links to subjects&lt;/translate&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:23--&gt; Notifications and watchlist&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:24--&gt; The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/translate&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; History&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; How the history system works&lt;/translate&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; Administration&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; Hide, Delete, Suppress topics&lt;/translate&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt; Preloading&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Preloading contents on a new Structured Discussions conversation&lt;/translate&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; Shortcuts&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:21--&gt; Keyboard shortcuts to use on visual editing mode.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; All documentation on one page.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>1j063z0o3ju31kz5ajpapym0iyg5aae</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402595</id>
      <parentid>5402592</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Marked this version for translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4020" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:18--&gt;
Structured Discussions (formerly known as Flow) are [[&lt;tvar name=SD&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions&lt;/tvar&gt;|a project]] of the Collaboration team at the Wikimedia Foundation to build a modern discussion and collaboration system for Wikimedia projects.

== Quick tour == &lt;!--T:1--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:19--&gt; How Structured Discussions look - [[&lt;tvar name=test&gt;Structured Discussions/Sandbox&lt;/tvar&gt;|Try it!]]&lt;/translate&gt;]]
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
'''[[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour&lt;/tvar&gt;|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''': 

&lt;!--T:26--&gt;
* [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics&lt;/tvar&gt;|editing basics]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:27--&gt;
* [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post&lt;/tvar&gt;|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:28--&gt;
* [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create&lt;/tvar&gt;|create a discussion]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:29--&gt;
* [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch&lt;/tvar&gt;|watch a topic or a whole board]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:30--&gt;
* [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications&lt;/tvar&gt;|get notifications]]&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:31--&gt;
* [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse&lt;/tvar&gt;|browse and archive subjects]]

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
There is some specific terms concerning Structured Discussions. They have been defined in '''[[&lt;tvar name=nomenclature&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary&lt;/tvar&gt;|the Glossary]]'''.

&lt;!--T:22--&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[&lt;tvar name=problems&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems&lt;/tvar&gt;|if you can solve that problem]]'''.

== Advanced tools == &lt;!--T:4--&gt;

&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
Some advanced tools are available, for specific purposes. They have been regrouped on these subjects:
&lt;/translate&gt;

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; Activation&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; What happens when Structured Discussions are enabled on a page?&lt;/translate&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; Topics&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; Filter topics, Edit a topic/message, Summarize a topic, Resolve a topic&lt;/translate&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Permalinks&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; How to create links to subjects&lt;/translate&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:23--&gt; Notifications and watchlist&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:24--&gt; The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/translate&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; History&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; How the history system works&lt;/translate&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; Administration&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; Hide, Delete, Suppress topics&lt;/translate&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt; Preloading&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Preloading contents on a new Structured Discussions conversation&lt;/translate&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; Shortcuts&lt;/translate&gt;}}
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:21--&gt; Keyboard shortcuts to use on visual editing mode.&lt;/translate&gt;

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; All documentation on one page.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>nf6r25up2k4xdfl92qbfuszytcsuxcx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/2/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>499217</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402596</id>
      <parentid>3727346</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="89" xml:space="preserve">'''[[$1|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''':</text>
      <sha1>q98g93bjt52xdg7krju9auto3yublzx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/ja</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>499676</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401801</id>
      <parentid>5184881</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3508" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

== 概要 ==
ソーシャル メディアの Web サイトは、ニュースを拡散し、潜在的な利用者や寄稿者に連絡するのに役立ちます。
ソーシャル メディアも非常に要求が厳しく、時間がかかる場合があります。
不注意な使用により、コミュニティを断片化し、無料のコンテンツや公開された連絡先を、ソーシャル メディア プラットフォームの所有者の頻繁に閉鎖された商業主導の環境に流し込んでしまう可能性があります。

== ソーシャル メディア チャンネル ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== MediaWiki ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

=== ウィキメディア技術部門 ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Twitter/Facebookへの投稿 ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>aj417tun8vwv5gfgbgnireey4oxc3cv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/ja</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>499682</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402616</id>
      <parentid>4578052</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3952" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
議論の構造化 (旧称Flow) とはウィキメディア財団Collaboration部門が進める[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|プロジェクト]]で、ウィキメディアのプロジェクト群に議論と協同の最新システムを構築しようとしています。

== クイックツアー ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|議論の構造化の表示 - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|練習してみましょう!]]]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|議論の構造化をなぜ開発するか、どう使われるかを1ページにまとめましたのでご参照ください。]]''': 
* [[$basics|編集の基本]] 
* [[$post|回答の投稿]]（グローバルな議論の場で、またはグローバルな議論の場で特定の利用者に） 
* [[$create|議論を始める]] 
* [[$watch|特定の話題もしくはボード全体をウォッチ]] 
* [[$notifications|通知を受信する]]
* [[$browse|主題を閲覧して過去ログ化]]
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

議論の構造化には専門用語がいくつかあります。定義は'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|用語集]]'''を参照してください。

議論の構造化がうまく機能しませんか？ '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|問題を解決できるかどうか]]'''チェックをお願いします。

== 高度なツール ==

個別の目的によっては高度なツールが用意されています。主題ごとにまとめた分類はこちら。

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=有効にする}}
:特定のページで議論の構造化を有効にすると、どんな影響が出ますか？
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=話題}}
:話題を絞りこむ、議論やメッセージを編集する、議論をまとめる、議論を終結する
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=固定リンク}}
:主題にリンクを作るには
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=通知とウォッチリスト}}
:通知の受信とウォッチリストに含めるさまざまな条件
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=履歴表示}}
:履歴表示の仕組み
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=管理}}
:話題の非表示、削除、禁止
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=プリロード}}
:新しい議論の構造化の会話にコンテンツをプリロードする
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=ショートカット}}
:ビジュアル編集モードで使うキーボード・ショートカット。

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=説明文書をまとめた単一ページ。}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>1u06irh3cyfxjq14zjm2aiodrqc13yd</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402639</id>
      <parentid>5402616</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:50:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3546" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
議論の構造化 (旧称Flow) とはウィキメディア財団Collaboration部門が進める[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|プロジェクト]]で、ウィキメディアのプロジェクト群に議論と協同の最新システムを構築しようとしています。

== クイックツアー ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|議論の構造化の表示 - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|練習してみましょう!]]]]
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|議論の構造化をなぜ開発するか、どう使われるかを1ページにまとめましたのでご参照ください。]]''': 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

議論の構造化には専門用語がいくつかあります。定義は'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|用語集]]'''を参照してください。

議論の構造化がうまく機能しませんか？ '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|問題を解決できるかどうか]]'''チェックをお願いします。

== 高度なツール ==

個別の目的によっては高度なツールが用意されています。主題ごとにまとめた分類はこちら。

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=有効にする}}
:特定のページで議論の構造化を有効にすると、どんな影響が出ますか？
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=話題}}
:話題を絞りこむ、議論やメッセージを編集する、議論をまとめる、議論を終結する
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=固定リンク}}
:主題にリンクを作るには
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=通知とウォッチリスト}}
:通知の受信とウォッチリストに含めるさまざまな条件
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=履歴表示}}
:履歴表示の仕組み
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=管理}}
:話題の非表示、削除、禁止
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=プリロード}}
:新しい議論の構造化の会話にコンテンツをプリロードする
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=ショートカット}}
:ビジュアル編集モードで使うキーボード・ショートカット。

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=説明文書をまとめた単一ページ。}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>1r0kf5w994ziu2f665ztpibxg82r7pd</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402641</id>
      <parentid>5402639</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:50:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3491" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
議論の構造化 (旧称Flow) とはウィキメディア財団Collaboration部門が進める[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|プロジェクト]]で、ウィキメディアのプロジェクト群に議論と協同の最新システムを構築しようとしています。

== クイックツアー ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|議論の構造化の表示 - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|練習してみましょう!]]]]
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|議論の構造化をなぜ開発するか、どう使われるかを1ページにまとめましたのでご参照ください。]]''': 

* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|編集の基本]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

議論の構造化には専門用語がいくつかあります。定義は'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|用語集]]'''を参照してください。

議論の構造化がうまく機能しませんか？ '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|問題を解決できるかどうか]]'''チェックをお願いします。

== 高度なツール ==

個別の目的によっては高度なツールが用意されています。主題ごとにまとめた分類はこちら。

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=有効にする}}
:特定のページで議論の構造化を有効にすると、どんな影響が出ますか？
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=話題}}
:話題を絞りこむ、議論やメッセージを編集する、議論をまとめる、議論を終結する
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=固定リンク}}
:主題にリンクを作るには
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=通知とウォッチリスト}}
:通知の受信とウォッチリストに含めるさまざまな条件
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=履歴表示}}
:履歴表示の仕組み
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=管理}}
:話題の非表示、削除、禁止
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=プリロード}}
:新しい議論の構造化の会話にコンテンツをプリロードする
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=ショートカット}}
:ビジュアル編集モードで使うキーボード・ショートカット。

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=説明文書をまとめた単一ページ。}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>4sq2h94av57ek7192aibxlix8ytrgnf</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402643</id>
      <parentid>5402641</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:50:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3462" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
議論の構造化 (旧称Flow) とはウィキメディア財団Collaboration部門が進める[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|プロジェクト]]で、ウィキメディアのプロジェクト群に議論と協同の最新システムを構築しようとしています。

== クイックツアー ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|議論の構造化の表示 - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|練習してみましょう!]]]]
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|議論の構造化をなぜ開発するか、どう使われるかを1ページにまとめましたのでご参照ください。]]''': 

* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|編集の基本]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|回答の投稿]] - グローバルな議論の場で、またはグローバルな議論の場で特定の利用者に
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

議論の構造化には専門用語がいくつかあります。定義は'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|用語集]]'''を参照してください。

議論の構造化がうまく機能しませんか？ '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|問題を解決できるかどうか]]'''チェックをお願いします。

== 高度なツール ==

個別の目的によっては高度なツールが用意されています。主題ごとにまとめた分類はこちら。

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=有効にする}}
:特定のページで議論の構造化を有効にすると、どんな影響が出ますか？
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=話題}}
:話題を絞りこむ、議論やメッセージを編集する、議論をまとめる、議論を終結する
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=固定リンク}}
:主題にリンクを作るには
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=通知とウォッチリスト}}
:通知の受信とウォッチリストに含めるさまざまな条件
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=履歴表示}}
:履歴表示の仕組み
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=管理}}
:話題の非表示、削除、禁止
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=プリロード}}
:新しい議論の構造化の会話にコンテンツをプリロードする
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=ショートカット}}
:ビジュアル編集モードで使うキーボード・ショートカット。

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=説明文書をまとめた単一ページ。}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>oyhrxf31o7565xn7cmjl6v21ktpva13</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402645</id>
      <parentid>5402643</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:50:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3405" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
議論の構造化 (旧称Flow) とはウィキメディア財団Collaboration部門が進める[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|プロジェクト]]で、ウィキメディアのプロジェクト群に議論と協同の最新システムを構築しようとしています。

== クイックツアー ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|議論の構造化の表示 - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|練習してみましょう!]]]]
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|議論の構造化をなぜ開発するか、どう使われるかを1ページにまとめましたのでご参照ください。]]''': 

* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|編集の基本]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|回答の投稿]] - グローバルな議論の場で、またはグローバルな議論の場で特定の利用者に
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|議論を始める]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

議論の構造化には専門用語がいくつかあります。定義は'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|用語集]]'''を参照してください。

議論の構造化がうまく機能しませんか？ '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|問題を解決できるかどうか]]'''チェックをお願いします。

== 高度なツール ==

個別の目的によっては高度なツールが用意されています。主題ごとにまとめた分類はこちら。

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=有効にする}}
:特定のページで議論の構造化を有効にすると、どんな影響が出ますか？
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=話題}}
:話題を絞りこむ、議論やメッセージを編集する、議論をまとめる、議論を終結する
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=固定リンク}}
:主題にリンクを作るには
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=通知とウォッチリスト}}
:通知の受信とウォッチリストに含めるさまざまな条件
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=履歴表示}}
:履歴表示の仕組み
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=管理}}
:話題の非表示、削除、禁止
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=プリロード}}
:新しい議論の構造化の会話にコンテンツをプリロードする
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=ショートカット}}
:ビジュアル編集モードで使うキーボード・ショートカット。

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=説明文書をまとめた単一ページ。}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>ao4ky8tabxo84lij3s08bp9ozse6oz6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402647</id>
      <parentid>5402645</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:50:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3376" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
議論の構造化 (旧称Flow) とはウィキメディア財団Collaboration部門が進める[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|プロジェクト]]で、ウィキメディアのプロジェクト群に議論と協同の最新システムを構築しようとしています。

== クイックツアー ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|議論の構造化の表示 - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|練習してみましょう!]]]]
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|議論の構造化をなぜ開発するか、どう使われるかを1ページにまとめましたのでご参照ください。]]''': 

* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|編集の基本]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|回答の投稿]] - グローバルな議論の場で、またはグローバルな議論の場で特定の利用者に
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|議論を始める]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|特定の話題もしくはボード全体をウォッチ]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

議論の構造化には専門用語がいくつかあります。定義は'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|用語集]]'''を参照してください。

議論の構造化がうまく機能しませんか？ '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|問題を解決できるかどうか]]'''チェックをお願いします。

== 高度なツール ==

個別の目的によっては高度なツールが用意されています。主題ごとにまとめた分類はこちら。

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=有効にする}}
:特定のページで議論の構造化を有効にすると、どんな影響が出ますか？
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=話題}}
:話題を絞りこむ、議論やメッセージを編集する、議論をまとめる、議論を終結する
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=固定リンク}}
:主題にリンクを作るには
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=通知とウォッチリスト}}
:通知の受信とウォッチリストに含めるさまざまな条件
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=履歴表示}}
:履歴表示の仕組み
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=管理}}
:話題の非表示、削除、禁止
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=プリロード}}
:新しい議論の構造化の会話にコンテンツをプリロードする
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=ショートカット}}
:ビジュアル編集モードで使うキーボード・ショートカット。

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=説明文書をまとめた単一ページ。}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>sx3xh0q0zd5ah7xtwco6tn21bbmufpi</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402649</id>
      <parentid>5402647</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:51:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3324" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
議論の構造化 (旧称Flow) とはウィキメディア財団Collaboration部門が進める[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|プロジェクト]]で、ウィキメディアのプロジェクト群に議論と協同の最新システムを構築しようとしています。

== クイックツアー ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|議論の構造化の表示 - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|練習してみましょう!]]]]
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|議論の構造化をなぜ開発するか、どう使われるかを1ページにまとめましたのでご参照ください。]]''': 

* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|編集の基本]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|回答の投稿]] - グローバルな議論の場で、またはグローバルな議論の場で特定の利用者に
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|議論を始める]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|特定の話題もしくはボード全体をウォッチ]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|通知を受信する]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

議論の構造化には専門用語がいくつかあります。定義は'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|用語集]]'''を参照してください。

議論の構造化がうまく機能しませんか？ '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|問題を解決できるかどうか]]'''チェックをお願いします。

== 高度なツール ==

個別の目的によっては高度なツールが用意されています。主題ごとにまとめた分類はこちら。

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=有効にする}}
:特定のページで議論の構造化を有効にすると、どんな影響が出ますか？
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=話題}}
:話題を絞りこむ、議論やメッセージを編集する、議論をまとめる、議論を終結する
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=固定リンク}}
:主題にリンクを作るには
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=通知とウォッチリスト}}
:通知の受信とウォッチリストに含めるさまざまな条件
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=履歴表示}}
:履歴表示の仕組み
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=管理}}
:話題の非表示、削除、禁止
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=プリロード}}
:新しい議論の構造化の会話にコンテンツをプリロードする
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=ショートカット}}
:ビジュアル編集モードで使うキーボード・ショートカット。

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=説明文書をまとめた単一ページ。}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>g8eta9pmxv7rgb9ugsiznuqzyu5o7mk</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402652</id>
      <parentid>5402649</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:51:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3277" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
議論の構造化 (旧称Flow) とはウィキメディア財団Collaboration部門が進める[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|プロジェクト]]で、ウィキメディアのプロジェクト群に議論と協同の最新システムを構築しようとしています。

== クイックツアー ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|議論の構造化の表示 - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|練習してみましょう!]]]]
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|議論の構造化をなぜ開発するか、どう使われるかを1ページにまとめましたのでご参照ください。]]''': 

* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|編集の基本]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|回答の投稿]] - グローバルな議論の場で、またはグローバルな議論の場で特定の利用者に
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|議論を始める]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|特定の話題もしくはボード全体をウォッチ]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|通知を受信する]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|主題を閲覧して過去ログ化]]

議論の構造化には専門用語がいくつかあります。定義は'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|用語集]]'''を参照してください。

議論の構造化がうまく機能しませんか？ '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|問題を解決できるかどうか]]'''チェックをお願いします。

== 高度なツール ==

個別の目的によっては高度なツールが用意されています。主題ごとにまとめた分類はこちら。

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=有効にする}}
:特定のページで議論の構造化を有効にすると、どんな影響が出ますか？
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=話題}}
:話題を絞りこむ、議論やメッセージを編集する、議論をまとめる、議論を終結する
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=固定リンク}}
:主題にリンクを作るには
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=通知とウォッチリスト}}
:通知の受信とウォッチリストに含めるさまざまな条件
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=履歴表示}}
:履歴表示の仕組み
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=管理}}
:話題の非表示、削除、禁止
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=プリロード}}
:新しい議論の構造化の会話にコンテンツをプリロードする
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=ショートカット}}
:ビジュアル編集モードで使うキーボード・ショートカット。

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=説明文書をまとめた単一ページ。}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>pbcc0jbcwm4iaj1cgzdiywdt4zudni1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/sq</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>499790</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402267</id>
      <parentid>5400757</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14138" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Languages
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Date format and time offset ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Shiko poashtu ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5awvb4bley9c17pxti4suspuc3ja2fw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/lt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>500052</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403240</id>
      <parentid>1902406</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:03:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="583" xml:space="preserve">* '''Šablono duomenų pridėjimas į šablonus''' - Vizualinis redaktorius gali redaguoti ir šablonus, detalesnį aprašymą rasite [[$ug|šiame pagalbos puslapyje]]. Galėsite lengvai jį naudoti Vikipedijos šablonams, kurie turi parametrus ir pridėti šiems aprašymus. Kitiems taip nepavyks. Taip yra dėl to, kadangi yra reikalingas ''TemplateData'' (Šablono duomenys), kad ši funkcija veiktų. Jeigu jus domina Šablono duomenų pridėjimas, mes turime [[$td-tutor|gidą jam naudoti]], kartu su [[$td|sąrašu pačių svarbiausių šablonų, kuriems jį reikia pridėti]].</text>
      <sha1>6npuhvkkw1kbnojom5aqppqackuxpmd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/lt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>500054</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403171</id>
      <parentid>1902410</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:41:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="374" xml:space="preserve">* '''Padėk naujiems naudotojams''' - Jeigu Vizualinis redaktorius yra sėkmingas, tai mes turėsime dar daugiau naujų vartotojų negu prieš tai ir net jeigu redagavimas ir pasidarė lengvesnis, dirbti su bendruomene vis tiek bus sunku. Prašome skirti šiek tiek laiko [[$1|aptarnavimo linijoje arba IRC pagalbos kanale]], kad naujokai lengviau įsilietų į Vikipediją.</text>
      <sha1>1uo5zu29eyepatbsv43ccqnt0vc97ky</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/fr</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>501547</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402613</id>
      <parentid>4578048</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3847" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Les Discussions structurées (précédemment connues comme Flow) sont [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|un projet]] de l'équipe Collaboration de la Wikimedia Foundation, destiné à construire un système de discussion et de collaboration moderne pour les projets Wikimedia.

== Rapide aperçu ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|À quoi ressemblent les discussions structurées - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Essayez !]]]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Découvrez pourquoi nous avons développé les discussions structurées et comment les utiliser]]''' : 
* [[$basics|les bases de l’édition]], 
* [[$post|poster une réponse]] (à la discussion générale ou spécifiquement à l’un des interlocuteurs), 
* [[$create|créer une discussion]], 
* [[$watch|surveiller un sujet ou un tableau complet]], 
* [[$notifications|recevoir des avertissements]], 
* [[$browse|parcourir et archiver les sujets]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Il existe quelques termes spécifiques concernant les discussions structurées. Leurs définitions sont regroupées dans '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|le glossaire]]'''.

Les discussions tructurées ne fonctionnent pas pour vous ? Merci de voir '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|si vous pouvez résoudre ce problème]]'''.

== Outils avancés ==

Quelques outils avancés sont disponibles, pour des besoins spécifiques. Ils ont été regroupés par sujet :

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Activation}}
:Que se passe-t-il quand on active les discussions structurées sur une page ?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Sujets}}
:Filtrer les sujets, modifier un sujet/un message, résumer un sujet, résoudre un sujet
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Liens permanents}}
:Comment créer des liens vers des sujets
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Notifications et liste de suivi}}
:Les notifications que vous recevez et les différentes contributions dans les listes de suivi
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Historique}}
:Comment fonctionne le système d'historique
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Administration}}
:Cacher, supprimer et masquer des sujets
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Préchargement}}
:Précharger du contenu sur une nouvelle conversation de discussion structurée
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Raccourcis}}
:Raccourcis-clavier à utiliser en mode éditeur visuel.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Toute la documentation sur une même page.}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>ha43megs0uza4e2m8wr1olh551zdqvv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/ca</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>502457</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402605</id>
      <parentid>4578042</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3588" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
«Discussions Estructurades», antigament conegut com a «Flow», és [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|un projecte]] de l'equip de Col·laboració de la Fundació Wikimedia per confegir un sistema modern de debat i col·laboració per a ús dels projectes Wikimedia.

== Guia ràpida ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|L'aspecte de les «Discussions Estructurades» - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Proveu-lo!]]]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Descobriu en una pàgina perquè vam crear les «Discussions Estructurades» i com usar-les]]'''.
*[[$basics|editant el bàsic]],
* [[$post|publica una resposta]] (a la discussió global o a una persona específica en una conversa globalto the global), 
* [[$create|crea una discussió]], 
* [[$watch|mira un tema o un tauler sencer]], 
* [[$notifications|reb les notificacions]],
* [[$browse|navega i arxiva temes]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Hi ha alguns termes específics relatius a Flow. Estan definits en '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|el glossari]]'''.

No us funciona Flow? Comproveu '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|si podeu solucionar-ho]]'''.

==Eines avançades==

Hi ha disponibles algunes eines avançades per a propòsits específics. Estan agrupades en aquests temes:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Activació}}
:Què passa quan s'activa Flow en una pàgina?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Temes}}
:Filtra els temes, edita un tema o missatge, resumeix un tema, resol un tema.
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Enllaços permanents}}
:Com crear enllaços als temes
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Notificacions i llista de seguiment}}
:Les notificacions que rebeu i les diverses entrades de les llistes de seguiment
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Historial}}
:Com funciona el sistema d'historial
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Administració}}
:Amagar, esborrar, eliminar temes
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Precàrrega}}
:Precarregar continguts en una nova conversa Flow
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Dreceres}}
:Les dreceres de teclat que podeu utilitzar en el mode d'edició visual.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Tota la documentació en una sola pàgina.}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>kmuu6hbrvpqg5favoqzxnn3xxo46s86</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/en</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>502752</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402608</id>
      <parentid>4578045</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2831" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Structured Discussions (formerly known as Flow) are [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|a project]] of the Collaboration team at the Wikimedia Foundation to build a modern discussion and collaboration system for Wikimedia projects.

== Quick tour ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|How Structured Discussions look - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Try it!]]]]
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''': 

* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]

There is some specific terms concerning Structured Discussions. They have been defined in '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|the Glossary]]'''.

Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.

== Advanced tools ==

Some advanced tools are available, for specific purposes. They have been regrouped on these subjects:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Activation}}
:What happens when Structured Discussions are enabled on a page?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Topics}}
:Filter topics, Edit a topic/message, Summarize a topic, Resolve a topic
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Permalinks}}
:How to create links to subjects
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Notifications and watchlist}}
:The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=History}}
:How the history system works
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Administration}}
:Hide, Delete, Suppress topics
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Preloading}}
:Preloading contents on a new Structured Discussions conversation
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Shortcuts}}
:Keyboard shortcuts to use on visual editing mode.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=All documentation on one page.}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>1hmmniel6lrze8tljufry2zz3v1x1o0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/zh</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>503067</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402630</id>
      <parentid>4578061</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3390" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
结构式讨论（曾称Flow）是维基媒体基金会的协作团队的[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|一个项目]]，意旨构建维基媒体项目的现代化讨论与协作系统。

== 快速導覽 ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|結構式討論是什麼——[[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|嘗試一下吧！]]]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
您可以'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|在此頁面]]'''了解我們構建結構式討論的原因以及如何使用，包括：
* [[$basics|基本編輯操作]]
* [[$post|張貼回覆（針對整個討論串或是在整個討論串中針對某個特定用戶）]]
* [[$create|新增一個討論]]
* [[$watch|只檢視某項討論或是檢視整個頁面]]
* [[$notifications|接收通知]]
* [[$browse|瀏覽以及對討論存檔]]
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

這有關於結構式討論的特殊形式。'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|命名常規]]'''有規範到。

结构式讨论不能工作？请检查'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|您是否可以解决问题。]]'''

== 進階工具 ==

某些針對特定用途的進階工具已經開放使用。並可重新分類，分類如下：

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=激活}}
:在页面上启用结构式讨论会发生什么？
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=標題}}
:筛选话题，編輯話題/訊息、为話題编写摘要、解決話題
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=靜態連結}}
:如何對特定的討論建立連結
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=通知與監視清單}}
:您收到的通知，以及您的監視清單中的变更
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=歷史}}
:修訂歷史系統如何運作
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=管理}}
:隱藏、刪除、恢復話題
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=預覽}}
:在一則新的結構式討論對話中預覽內容
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=捷徑}}
:在可视化编辑器中使用的快捷键。

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=所有文件都在一個頁面上。}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>s07w9inns7dshu1deem4mr7p87g3h2n</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/fa</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>510527</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402611</id>
      <parentid>4578047</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4375" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions (formerly known as Flow) are [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|a project]] of the Collaboration team at the Wikimedia Foundation to build a modern discussion and collaboration system for Wikimedia projects.
&lt;/div&gt;

گشت سریع
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How Structured Discussions look - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Try it!]]&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There is some specific terms concerning Structured Discussions. They have been defined in '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|the Glossary]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

== ابزارهای پیشرفته ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some advanced tools are available, for specific purposes. They have been regrouped on these subjects:
&lt;/div&gt;

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Activation&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What happens when Structured Discussions are enabled on a page?&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=مبحث‌ها}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filter topics, Edit a topic/message, Summarize a topic, Resolve a topic&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Permalinks&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to create links to subjects&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notifications and watchlist&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=تاریخچه}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How the history system works&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide, Delete, Suppress topics&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading contents on a new Structured Discussions conversation&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shortcuts&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Keyboard shortcuts to use on visual editing mode.&lt;/span&gt;

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All documentation on one page.&lt;/span&gt;}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>3b5u4ylg23lz5rjdpv8ptzll2yd096p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/diq</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>512320</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402922</id>
      <parentid>5355647</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="52499" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

==Weynayış==

=== Dosya transfer ===

Babeta transfera dosyayer weçine

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Secure copy with [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] or [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|Protokolê SSH Dosya Transferi]] (SFTP)
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Using a [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] client.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some other method.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Preliminary===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check the requirements
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the RELEASE-NOTES file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Back up existing files and the database
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new files
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Upgrade extensions
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the update script to check the database
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Test the update
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} requires:
&lt;/div&gt;

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One of the following:
&lt;/div&gt;
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are using PostgreSQL, please also read {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more information, please read the {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} and {{ll|Compatibility}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Read the release notes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Clear pending jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Back up existing files and the database ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:''Full instructions: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Unpack the new files ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using a tarball package ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Command line ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Other files===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using Git ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Upgrade extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Other variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Run the update script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: ''See also {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Should I back up first?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Short answer: Yes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Why upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>5tpx2swrqy6tga21xv33165jtncjgek</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/pl</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>515930</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401807</id>
      <parentid>5261750</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3551" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Wstęp ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== MediaWiki ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

=== Technologia Wikimedia ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>nk337ind1ngk7p1ebpowl25j99d3jdw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:PD Help Page/tl</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>516033</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401670</id>
      <parentid>5383263</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T17:33:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>120.29.78.98</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1468" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;onlyinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
&lt;templatestyles src=&quot;Template:PD Help Page/styles.css&quot;/&gt;&lt;table class=&quot;template-pd-help-page&quot;&gt;&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td class=&quot;icon-cell&quot;&gt;[[File:PD-icon.svg|30px|link=|alt=PD]]&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;'''Paalala:''' Kapag binago ninyo ang pahinang ito, pumapayag kang ilabas ang ambag mo sa ilalim ng [https://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/{{cclang}} CC0]. Basahin ang [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:PD help|Mga Pahina ng Tulong sa Pampublikong Dominyo]] para sa mas maraming impormasyon. {{#if:{{{imported|}}}|&lt;br /&gt;'''In-import FK6NPZL0G5QYang ilan sa mga lumang rebisyon para sa pahinang ito sa ilalim ng lisensyang CC BY-SA. Mga bagong ambag lamang ang PD.'''|}}
----
&lt;div class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;{{center|{{small|[{{FULLURL:Special:Translate/page-Template:PD Help Page|action=translate&amp;task=view}} {{int:translate-taction-translate}}]}}}}&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td class=&quot;icon-cell&quot;&gt;[[File:PD-icon.svg|30px|link=|alt=PD]]&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
| #default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:PD Help Page|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;/onlyinclude&gt;
{{Documentation|content=
{{Uses TemplateStyles|Template:PD Help Page/styles.css}}
{{ll|Project:PD help}} notice.

== Halimbawa ==
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}

* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{PD Help Page|imported=1}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
{{PD Help Page|imported=1}}
== TemplateData ==
{{PD Help Page/doc}}

}}
[[Category:Templates{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2omkzvk25vncdgr2c9vq3l7i33y4xf8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401679</id>
      <parentid>5401670</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T17:59:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mainframe98</username>
        <id>2319711</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/120.29.78.98|120.29.78.98]] ([[User talk:120.29.78.98|talk]]) to last version by Martin Urbanec</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1456" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;onlyinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
&lt;templatestyles src=&quot;Template:PD Help Page/styles.css&quot;/&gt;&lt;table class=&quot;template-pd-help-page&quot;&gt;&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td class=&quot;icon-cell&quot;&gt;[[File:PD-icon.svg|30px|link=|alt=PD]]&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td&gt;'''Paalala:''' Kapag binago ninyo ang pahinang ito, pumapayag kang ilabas ang ambag mo sa ilalim ng [https://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/{{cclang}} CC0]. Basahin ang [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:PD help|Mga Pahina ng Tulong sa Pampublikong Dominyo]] para sa mas maraming impormasyon. {{#if:{{{imported|}}}|&lt;br /&gt;'''In-import ang ilan sa mga lumang rebisyon para sa pahinang ito sa ilalim ng lisensyang CC BY-SA. Mga bagong ambag lamang ang PD.'''|}}
----
&lt;div class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;{{center|{{small|[{{FULLURL:Special:Translate/page-Template:PD Help Page|action=translate&amp;task=view}} {{int:translate-taction-translate}}]}}}}&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td class=&quot;icon-cell&quot;&gt;[[File:PD-icon.svg|30px|link=|alt=PD]]&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/table&gt;
| #default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:PD Help Page|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;/onlyinclude&gt;
{{Documentation|content=
{{Uses TemplateStyles|Template:PD Help Page/styles.css}}
{{ll|Project:PD help}} notice.

== Halimbawa ==
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}

* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{PD Help Page|imported=1}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
{{PD Help Page|imported=1}}
== TemplateData ==
{{PD Help Page/doc}}

}}
[[Category:Templates{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>f2j2bh82bpm93onv4weoo2rw7irp6zj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:PD Help Page/6/tl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>516034</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401669</id>
      <parentid>4302898</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T17:33:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>120.29.78.98</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="108" xml:space="preserve">In-import FK6NPZL0G5QYang ilan sa mga lumang rebisyon para sa pahinang ito sa ilalim ng lisensyang CC BY-SA.</text>
      <sha1>8vbwx3wuyum939hvunwz1zuxgucc1wl</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401678</id>
      <parentid>5401669</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T17:59:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mainframe98</username>
        <id>2319711</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/120.29.78.98|120.29.78.98]] ([[User talk:120.29.78.98|talk]]) to last version by Martin Urbanec</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="96" xml:space="preserve">In-import ang ilan sa mga lumang rebisyon para sa pahinang ito sa ilalim ng lisensyang CC BY-SA.</text>
      <sha1>ga2gifnozwv7huhq8g2k429qm506lrk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/mr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>517009</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402490</id>
      <parentid>4502676</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:14:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="178" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|भाषांतर विस्तारकाच्या दस्ताऐवजाचे मुद्रितशोधन व  भाषांतर करा]]</text>
      <sha1>avms0d67kh636hyryjjztq0yrmtgaxi</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/fi</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>517209</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402612</id>
      <parentid>5122558</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4018" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions (formerly known as Flow) are [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|a project]] of the Collaboration team at the Wikimedia Foundation to build a modern discussion and collaboration system for Wikimedia projects.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Pikaopas==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How Structured Discussions look - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Try it!]]&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Lue miksi kehitimme Jäsennetyt keskustelut ja ota selvää miten sitä käytetään]]''':
* [[$basics|muokkaamisen perusteet]],
* [[$post|lähetä vastaus]] (globaaliin keskusteluun tai tietylle henkilölle globaalissa keskustelussa),
* [[$create|luo keskustelu]],
* [[$watch|tarkkaile aihetta tai kokonaista palstaa]],
* [[$notifications|saa ilmoituksia]],
* [[$browse|selaa ja arkistoi aiheita]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Flow'n sanastoa on eritelty '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow/Nomenclature|termistö-sivulla]]'''.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Kehittyneet työkalut==

Erityistarkoituksia varten on olemassa kehittyneitä työkaluja. Ne on jaoteltu aiheittain:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Activation&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What happens when Structured Discussions are enabled on a page?&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Aiheet}}
:Suodata aiheita, muokkaa aihetta/viestiä, tee aiheesta yhteenveto, merkitse aihe käsitellyksi
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Ikilinkit}}
:Kuinka linkata aiheisiin
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notifications and watchlist&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Historia}}
:Kuinka historiajärjestelmä toimii
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Ylläpito}}
:Piilota, Poista ja Häivytä aiheet
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Esilataaminen}}
:Sisällön esilaataminen uuteen Flow-keskusteluun
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shortcuts&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Keyboard shortcuts to use on visual editing mode.&lt;/span&gt;

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All documentation on one page.&lt;/span&gt;}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>adwodhb955eun3xc992unf6cw8xqy3q</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/fi</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>517227</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402663</id>
      <parentid>5154667</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:52:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9207" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Tämä sivu on pikaopas jäsennettyihin keskusteluihin.

Jäsennetyt keskustelut tunnettiin aiemmin nimellä &quot;Flow&quot;.

Sivulla on tärkeimmät tiedot Jäsennetyistä keskusteluista ja siitä miten niitä käytetään.
Kaikki erityiset termit (kursivoituna tekstissä) on määritelty [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|termistössä]].

== Miksi Jäsennetyt keskustelut ==
Jäsennetyt keskustelut on uusi tapa keskustella.
Keskustelujen rakenne on muuttunut: Keskustelusivu (''palsta'') sisältää nyt ''aiheita'', joista jokainen on itsenäinen ja erikseen tilattavissa.
Jäsennettyjen keskustelujen ansiosta käyttäjä voi valita, mitä aiheita hän tilaa, joten hänen ei tarvitse seurata enää koko sivua.

Uudet aiheet lisätään sivun ylälaitaan.
Aiheet voi jaotella luomisajan tai viimeisimmän päivityksen perusteella.
Jäsennettyjen keskustelujen avulla ihmiset voivat keskustella käyttämällä [[#basics|joko visuaalista muokkainta tai vuoden 2017 wikitekstimuokkainta]].

Toimintapainikkeet (vastaa, kiitos) on sisällytetty jokaiseen vastaukseen, valmiina käytettäviksi.
Vastauksia ei tarvitse enää erikseen sisentää, arkistoida tai allekirjoittaa.
Keskustelut etenevät nopeammin ja ovat useamman saavutettavissa.

== Käyttöliittymä ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Global design of a Structured Discussions board. Specific elements around messages are not shown (signature, reply links, tools...).
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:70%;font-size:130%; margin:1em auto;&quot; 
| 
&lt;strong style=&quot;font-family:Linux Libertine,Georgia,Times,serif;font-size: 1.5em;line-height: 1.3;margin-bottom: 0.25em;padding: 0;&quot;&gt;
Palstan otsikko
&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&quot;Selaa aiheita&quot; flyout
{| 
| style=&quot;border:1px solid #222; width:100%; color:#AAA;padding: {{dir|{{pagelang}}|3px 3px 3px 180px|3px 180px 3px 3px}};&quot; | ''Aloita uusi aihe -tekstikenttä''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Aiheen otsikko
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Viesti 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Viesti 2
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;padding-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 5%; border:none;&quot; |Vastaus viestiin 2 (lähetetään klikkaamalla &quot;vastaa&quot; viestin 2 alla)
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Viesti 3
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Vastauskenttä)''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Toinen aihe, toinen otsikko
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Viesti 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Vastauskenttä)''
|}
| style=&quot;background-color:#EEEEEE; width:33%;padding: 1em;vertical-align:top;&quot; |Palstan kuvaus
|}

== Miten Jäsennettyjä keskusteluja käytetään ==
{{anchor|basics}}

=== Muokkaamisen perusteet ===
[[File:Flow toolbar - Apr. 2017.png|thumb|542x542px|Jäsennettyjen keskustelujen työkalupalkki, jossa on painikkeet tyyleihin, linkkeihin ja mainitsemiseen. Oikealla on painike, jolla voi vaihtaa toiseen muokkaimeen (wikikoodi tai visuaalinen).]]

Voit osallistua keskusteluun kahdella eri tavalla: visuaalisella muokkaimella (oletuksena) ja [[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|wikitekstimuokkaimella]].
Voit milloin tahansa vaihtaa visuaalisen muokkaimen ja wikitekstin välillä.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Kun vastaat aiheeseen tai teet uuden aiheen, käytössäsi on työkalupalkki, jossa on neljä painiketta:
* kolme vasemmalla puolella
** lisää tyyli
** lisää linkki (jossa on ehdotukset ja haku)
** mainitse joku nimeltä (jossa on ehdotukset ja haku)
* yksi oikealla puolella muokkainten vaihtamiseen.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* 3 buttons on the left (on a right-to-left keyboard):
** add style
** add link (with suggestions and search)
** mention someone (with suggestions and search)
* one button on the right to switch between editors.
&lt;/div&gt;

Wikiteksti-oikopolut toimivat myös visuaalisessa muokkaimessa, kuten myös [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|visuaalisen muokkaimen oikopolut]].

Istuntosi aikana sivusto muistaa kumpaa järjestelmää suosit, mikäli et ole määrittänyt suosimaasi muokkainta asetuksissasi (&quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot; välilehti).

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have opted-out the 2017 wikitext editor and/or the visual editor, you will have a simple wikitext fieldset to post or edit a reply, with no toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;{{int|flow-preference-visualeditor}}&quot; in your preferences (&quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot; tab) to opt-in and have a toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;

Muista: sinun ei tarvitse enää sisentää vastauksia tai päättää viestjä allekirjoituksella!

Kaikki nämä muokkaamisen perusteet soveltuvat kaikkiin keskusteluihin, vastauksiin tai kun muokkaat ''Aihetta'', ''Kuvausta'' tai ''Tiivistelmää''.

* Katso myös: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics#Edit|Muokkaa aihetta ja viestiä]]

{{anchor|post}}
=== Vastaa ===

==== Yleisesti aiheeseen ====
Jokainen keskusteluun osallistuja vastaa keskustelun alle, järjestyksessä.
Se tapahtuu kuten yleensä wiki-keskusteluissa mutta ilman sisennyksiä, tai kuten sähköpostiketjuissa.
''Vastauksesi'' näytetään kaikkien vastausten alapuolella ja on riippuvainen ''aiheesta''.

Jos haluat sanoa jotain erityistä jollekulle, voit mainita kyseisen käyttäjän tai vastata hänelle (katso alempaa).
Tässä tilanteessa käytetään ''Vastaa''-painiketta, mikä sisentää keskustelun.

Vastauksesi näytetään sisennettynä vastaamasi kommentin alapuolella.
Voit myös kiittää muita.

====Tietylle henkilölle aiheessa====
Jos haluat sanoa jotain tietylle henkilölle, voit mainita hänet järjestelmänlaajuisessa viestissäsi, tai painaa &quot;vastaa&quot;-painiketta viestin alla.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jos haluat vastata johonkin tiettyyn viestiin, lisää vastauksesi sen viestin alle.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To provide a better context in your reply, you can also quote someone's message by copy-pasting part of it.
&lt;/div&gt;

Vastauksesi on riippuvainen viestistä, johon vastasit.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Tämä vastaus on suunniteltu suunnatuksi vastaukseksi.&lt;/span&gt; 
Joka tapauksessa jokainen aihetta tarkkaileva käyttäjä jaa ilmoituksen vastauksestasi, kuten jokaisesta muustakin vastauksesta.

{{anchor|create}}
=== Luo keskustelu ===
[[File:New discussion in Flow - Sept. 2015.png|thumb|534x534px|Kuinka luoda keskustelu: klikkaa &quot;Aloita uusi aihe&quot; -painiketta.]]
Jäsennettyjä keskusteluja käyttävällä sivulla uuden aiheen luominen on helppoa: sinun tarvitsee vain klikata &quot;Aloita uusi aihe&quot; -kenttää. Jäsennetyt keskustelut valmistelee kaksi kenttää.

Ensimmäinen kenttä on &quot;Aloita uusi aihe&quot;: valitse sopiva otsikko. Toinen kenttä on &quot;Kirjoita uusi viesti liittyen...&quot;: lisää tekstisi. Valitse otsikko huolellisesti tavoittaaksesi lukijat: he näkevät sen ilmoituksissaan ilman muita yksityiskohtia.

Kun olet valmis, klikkaa vihreää ''Lisää aihe'' -painiketta. ''Vastauksesi'' on tallennettu ja jokainen sivua tarkkaileva henkilö on saanut ilmoituksen uudesta aiheesta.

Tilaat jokaisen luomasi aiheen automaattisesti: saat ilmoituksen jos joku vastaa aiheeseesi.

* Katso myös: [[Special:MyLanguage/Flow/Topics|Tee yhteenveto / merkitse aihe käsitellyksi]]

{{anchor|watch}}
=== Tilaa ===

==== Aihe ====

Tehdäksesi tilauksen tietystä aiheesta, klikkaa tähteä aiheen yläpuolella otsikon vieressä. Tähti muuttuu vihreäksi. Jos se on jo valmiiksi vihreä, olet jo tilannut aiheen.

Tarkkaillessasi aihetta saat huomautuksen kaikista muokkauksista tähän aiheeseen ja uuden rivin tarkkailulistallesi.

Tilaat automaattisesti luomasi ''aiheen''.

==== Keskustelusivu ====

Tarkkaillaksesi koko sivua klikkaa sivun ylälaidassa olevaa tähteä, joka on lähellä etsi-kenttää. Se muuttuu siniseksi. Jos se on jo sininen, seuraat sivua jo valmiiksi.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Tarkkaillessasi sivua saat jokaisesta keskustelusivun muokkauksesta ilmoituksen. Tarkkailulistallesi lisätään rivi.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|notifications}}
==== Ilmoitukset ====

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Voit ottaa Flow-ilmoitukset pois käytöstä asetuksista. Tarkkailulistaasi päivitetään silti uusilla muokkauksilla, jos joku vastaa tilaamaasi aiheeseen.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|browse}}
== Selaa ja arkistoi ==

Kaikki palstalla näytettävät aiheet on listattu sisällysluettelossa. Voit selata aiheita tässä taulukossa.

Arkistointi on automatisoitua: kaikki keskustelut arkistoidaan, kun ne eivät ole enää aktiivisia. Voit selata vanhoja aiheita sivun alalaidasta tai estimällä sisällysluettelosta.

* Katso myös: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Tee yhteenveto / merkitse aihe käsitellyksi]]

== Lue lisää ==
* UKK
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Design FAQ|2=Ulkoasu}}
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Release and features FAQ|2=Julkaisut ja ominaisuudet}}

[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>25uzidw2ht4dee6v0uxxf2a7f37ipbe</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402680</id>
      <parentid>5402663</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:02:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9230" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Tämä sivu on pikaopas jäsennettyihin keskusteluihin.

Jäsennetyt keskustelut tunnettiin aiemmin nimellä &quot;Flow&quot;.

Sivulla on tärkeimmät tiedot Jäsennetyistä keskusteluista ja siitä miten niitä käytetään.
Kaikki erityiset termit (kursivoituna tekstissä) on määritelty [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|termistössä]].

== Miksi Jäsennetyt keskustelut ==
Jäsennetyt keskustelut on uusi tapa keskustella.
Keskustelujen rakenne on muuttunut: Keskustelusivu (''palsta'') sisältää nyt ''aiheita'', joista jokainen on itsenäinen ja erikseen tilattavissa.
Jäsennettyjen keskustelujen ansiosta käyttäjä voi valita, mitä aiheita hän tilaa, joten hänen ei tarvitse seurata enää koko sivua.

Uudet aiheet lisätään sivun ylälaitaan.
Aiheet voi jaotella luomisajan tai viimeisimmän päivityksen perusteella.
Jäsennettyjen keskustelujen avulla ihmiset voivat keskustella käyttämällä [[#basics|joko visuaalista muokkainta tai vuoden 2017 wikitekstimuokkainta]].

Toimintapainikkeet (vastaa, kiitos) on sisällytetty jokaiseen vastaukseen, valmiina käytettäviksi.
Vastauksia ei tarvitse enää erikseen sisentää, arkistoida tai allekirjoittaa.
Keskustelut etenevät nopeammin ja ovat useamman saavutettavissa.

== Käyttöliittymä ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Global design of a Structured Discussions board. Specific elements around messages are not shown (signature, reply links, tools...).
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:70%;font-size:130%; margin:1em auto;&quot; 
| 
&lt;strong style=&quot;font-family:Linux Libertine,Georgia,Times,serif;font-size: 1.5em;line-height: 1.3;margin-bottom: 0.25em;padding: 0;&quot;&gt;
Palstan otsikko
&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&quot;Selaa aiheita&quot; flyout
{| 
| style=&quot;border:1px solid #222; width:100%; color:#AAA;padding: {{dir|{{pagelang}}|3px 3px 3px 180px|3px 180px 3px 3px}};&quot; | ''Aloita uusi aihe -tekstikenttä''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Aiheen otsikko
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Viesti 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Viesti 2
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;padding-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 5%; border:none;&quot; |Vastaus viestiin 2 (lähetetään klikkaamalla &quot;vastaa&quot; viestin 2 alla)
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Viesti 3
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Vastauskenttä)''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Toinen aihe, toinen otsikko
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Viesti 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Vastauskenttä)''
|}
| style=&quot;background-color:#EEEEEE; width:33%;padding: 1em;vertical-align:top;&quot; |Palstan kuvaus
|}

== Miten Jäsennettyjä keskusteluja käytetään ==
{{anchor|basics}}

=== Muokkaamisen perusteet ===
[[File:Flow toolbar - Apr. 2017.png|thumb|542x542px|Jäsennettyjen keskustelujen työkalupalkki, jossa on painikkeet tyyleihin, linkkeihin ja mainitsemiseen. Oikealla on painike, jolla voi vaihtaa toiseen muokkaimeen (wikikoodi tai visuaalinen).]]

Voit osallistua keskusteluun kahdella eri tavalla: visuaalisella muokkaimella (oletuksena) ja [[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|wikitekstimuokkaimella]].
Voit milloin tahansa vaihtaa visuaalisen muokkaimen ja wikitekstin välillä.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Kun vastaat aiheeseen tai teet uuden aiheen, käytössäsi on työkalupalkki, jossa on neljä painiketta:
* kolme vasemmalla puolella
** lisää tyyli
** lisää linkki (jossa on ehdotukset ja haku)
** mainitse joku nimeltä (jossa on ehdotukset ja haku)
* yksi oikealla puolella muokkainten vaihtamiseen.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* 3 buttons on the left (on a right-to-left keyboard):
** add style
** add link (with suggestions and search)
** mention someone (with suggestions and search)
* one button on the right to switch between editors.
&lt;/div&gt;

Wikiteksti-oikopolut toimivat myös visuaalisessa muokkaimessa, kuten myös [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|visuaalisen muokkaimen oikopolut]].

Istuntosi aikana sivusto muistaa kumpaa järjestelmää suosit, mikäli et ole määrittänyt suosimaasi muokkainta asetuksissasi (&quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot; välilehti).

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have opted-out the 2017 wikitext editor and/or the visual editor, you will have a simple wikitext fieldset to post or edit a reply, with no toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;{{int|flow-preference-visualeditor}}&quot; in your preferences (&quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot; tab) to opt-in and have a toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;

Muista: sinun ei tarvitse enää sisentää vastauksia tai päättää viestjä allekirjoituksella!

Kaikki nämä muokkaamisen perusteet soveltuvat kaikkiin keskusteluihin, vastauksiin tai kun muokkaat ''Aihetta'', ''Kuvausta'' tai ''Tiivistelmää''.

* Katso myös: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics#Edit|Muokkaa aihetta ja viestiä]]

{{anchor|post}}
=== Vastaa ===

==== Yleisesti aiheeseen ====
Jokainen keskusteluun osallistuja vastaa keskustelun alle, järjestyksessä.
Se tapahtuu kuten yleensä wiki-keskusteluissa mutta ilman sisennyksiä, tai kuten sähköpostiketjuissa.
''Vastauksesi'' näytetään kaikkien vastausten alapuolella ja on riippuvainen ''aiheesta''.

Jos haluat sanoa jotain erityistä jollekulle, voit mainita kyseisen käyttäjän tai vastata hänelle (katso alempaa).
Tässä tilanteessa käytetään ''Vastaa''-painiketta, mikä sisentää keskustelun.

Vastauksesi näytetään sisennettynä vastaamasi kommentin alapuolella.
Voit myös kiittää muita.

====Tietylle henkilölle aiheessa====
Jos haluat sanoa jotain tietylle henkilölle, voit mainita hänet järjestelmänlaajuisessa viestissäsi, tai painaa &quot;vastaa&quot;-painiketta viestin alla.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jos haluat vastata johonkin tiettyyn viestiin, lisää vastauksesi sen viestin alle.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To provide a better context in your reply, you can also quote someone's message by copy-pasting part of it.
&lt;/div&gt;

Vastauksesi on riippuvainen viestistä, johon vastasit.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Tämä vastaus on suunniteltu suunnatuksi vastaukseksi.&lt;/span&gt; 
Joka tapauksessa jokainen aihetta tarkkaileva käyttäjä jaa ilmoituksen vastauksestasi, kuten jokaisesta muustakin vastauksesta.

{{anchor|create}}
=== Luo keskustelu ===
[[File:New discussion in Flow - Sept. 2015.png|thumb|534x534px|Kuinka luoda keskustelu: klikkaa &quot;Aloita uusi aihe&quot; -painiketta.]]
Jäsennettyjä keskusteluja käyttävällä sivulla uuden aiheen luominen on helppoa: sinun tarvitsee vain klikata &quot;Aloita uusi aihe&quot; -kenttää. Jäsennetyt keskustelut valmistelee kaksi kenttää.

Ensimmäinen kenttä on &quot;Aloita uusi aihe&quot;: valitse sopiva otsikko. Toinen kenttä on &quot;Kirjoita uusi viesti liittyen...&quot;: lisää tekstisi. Valitse otsikko huolellisesti tavoittaaksesi lukijat: he näkevät sen ilmoituksissaan ilman muita yksityiskohtia.

Kun olet valmis, klikkaa vihreää ''Lisää aihe'' -painiketta. ''Vastauksesi'' on tallennettu ja jokainen sivua tarkkaileva henkilö on saanut ilmoituksen uudesta aiheesta.

Tilaat jokaisen luomasi aiheen automaattisesti: saat ilmoituksen jos joku vastaa aiheeseesi.

* Katso myös: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Tee yhteenveto / merkitse aihe käsitellyksi]]

{{anchor|watch}}
=== Tilaa ===

==== Aihe ====

Tehdäksesi tilauksen tietystä aiheesta, klikkaa tähteä aiheen yläpuolella otsikon vieressä. Tähti muuttuu vihreäksi. Jos se on jo valmiiksi vihreä, olet jo tilannut aiheen.

Tarkkaillessasi aihetta saat huomautuksen kaikista muokkauksista tähän aiheeseen ja uuden rivin tarkkailulistallesi.

Tilaat automaattisesti luomasi ''aiheen''.

==== Keskustelusivu ====

Tarkkaillaksesi koko sivua klikkaa sivun ylälaidassa olevaa tähteä, joka on lähellä etsi-kenttää. Se muuttuu siniseksi. Jos se on jo sininen, seuraat sivua jo valmiiksi.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Tarkkaillessasi sivua saat jokaisesta keskustelusivun muokkauksesta ilmoituksen. Tarkkailulistallesi lisätään rivi.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|notifications}}
==== Ilmoitukset ====

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Voit ottaa Flow-ilmoitukset pois käytöstä asetuksista. Tarkkailulistaasi päivitetään silti uusilla muokkauksilla, jos joku vastaa tilaamaasi aiheeseen.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|browse}}
== Selaa ja arkistoi ==

Kaikki palstalla näytettävät aiheet on listattu sisällysluettelossa. Voit selata aiheita tässä taulukossa.

Arkistointi on automatisoitua: kaikki keskustelut arkistoidaan, kun ne eivät ole enää aktiivisia. Voit selata vanhoja aiheita sivun alalaidasta tai estimällä sisällysluettelosta.

* Katso myös: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Tee yhteenveto / merkitse aihe käsitellyksi]]

== Lue lisää ==
* UKK
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Design FAQ|2=Ulkoasu}}
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Release and features FAQ|2=Julkaisut ja ominaisuudet}}

[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>c0v2a7m079pqnlpg1d5n2sxieslmxa9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/45/fi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>517250</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402662</id>
      <parentid>2613434</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:52:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="69" xml:space="preserve">Katso myös: [[$Topics|Tee yhteenveto / merkitse aihe käsitellyksi]]</text>
      <sha1>tp5z93z0g2se057u5zoul9ecpbnp5ij</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/31/fi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>517300</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402679</id>
      <parentid>2613261</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:01:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="72" xml:space="preserve">Katso myös: [[$summarize|Tee yhteenveto / merkitse aihe käsitellyksi]]</text>
      <sha1>c1q3y2ualjvebsldkce0g5bf5xhf048</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/fr</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>518038</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401796</id>
      <parentid>5184877</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>519233</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402189</id>
      <parentid>5371496</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:53:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20247" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:66--&gt; See &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[Wikitech:PAWS]]&lt;/tvar&gt; for more details.&lt;/translate&gt;''
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; This document provides a quick interactive overview of '''{{&lt;tvar name=1&gt;ll|Manual:Pywikibot&lt;/tvar&gt;|Pywikibot}}''' using a ''notebook'' hosted on the [[&lt;tvar name=3&gt;wikitech:Help:Cloud Services Introduction&lt;/tvar&gt;|Wikimedia Cloud Services]] environment using [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Wikitech:PAWS&lt;/tvar&gt;|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: A Web Shell''')]].&lt;/translate&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:61--&gt; PAWS Terminal supports copy and paste in [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Browsers based on Chromium|Chromium-based browsers]] only.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:69--&gt; (Google Chrome, Opera, Safari and new Microsoft Edge are fine.)&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:62--&gt; If you use a different browser, you can try with context menu only (right-click) or you will need to manually type the commands mentioned in this walk-through.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:67--&gt; You can also create a bash file with in content the command and call in terminal with &lt;tvar name=bash&gt;&lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

{{Warning|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:89--&gt; All notebooks and terminals in PAWS are subject to termination without notice.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:90--&gt; You are encouraged to run your task on other places (such as [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;wikitech:Help:Toolforge&lt;/tvar&gt;|Toolforge]]) if your task lasts for more than hours.&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
== Create a Wikimedia account == &lt;!--T:2--&gt;

&lt;!--T:3--&gt;
To follow this walk-through, you only need a Wikipedia/Wikimedia account. Use [[Special:CreateAccount]] to create one.

&lt;!--T:5--&gt;
Once you have created an account, please visit &lt;tvar name=test&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/&lt;/tvar&gt; and check that your username appears in the top right corner &lt;small&gt;(this works around &lt;tvar name=phab&gt;{{task|T120327}}&lt;/tvar&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:91--&gt; If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:92--&gt; And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Sign into a notebook == &lt;!--T:6--&gt;

&lt;!--T:7--&gt;
To start a hosted notebook, go to &lt;tvar name=paws&gt;https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub&lt;/tvar&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Click &quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot;, and then click &quot;Allow&quot; when asked to approve &quot;Use OAuth for Authentication&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; The first time you access PAWS, you need to create a server.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:64--&gt; Click the green &quot;Start my Server&quot; button.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:65--&gt; It's normal to wait a few minutes for the new server to start up.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:10--&gt;
Once that is completed, you will be redirected to a URL like &lt;tvar name=paws&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/user/&lt;username&gt;/lab&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;

== Start a terminal == &lt;!--T:11--&gt;

&lt;!--T:12--&gt;
To start a new interactive terminal,
# Go to your [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/&lt;/tvar&gt; PAWS home]
&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:93--&gt; click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:13--&gt;
This will open a new window with a Linux '$' prompt.

&lt;!--T:15--&gt;
This terminal is not an emulator.  It is a real [[w:Bash (Unix shell)|bash shell]], as part of a real Linux installation sitting on a [[w:Docker (software)|Docker container]], so you can use any bash command, and use any commands available on Linux that have been installed.

&lt;!--T:16--&gt;
To see some of the commands available, use &lt;tvar name=ls&gt;&lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/tvar&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.

&lt;translate&gt;

== Login to the wiki == &lt;!--T:74--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:77--&gt; This will establish your account on the server and allow you to log in from the command line.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:19--&gt; The following command should confirm that you can log into the testwiki. It uses OAuth, so there is no need to enter a password.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:75--&gt;
You can connect pywikibot to a different wiki by creating a file named &lt;tvar name=file&gt;''user-config.py''&lt;/tvar&gt; in your [[w:Home_directory|&lt;tvar name=home&gt;&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; directory]] (&lt;tvar name=directory&gt;&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;) and adding &lt;tvar name=lang&gt;''mylang''&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=family&gt;''family''&lt;/tvar&gt; variables:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Create a page == &lt;!--T:72--&gt;

&lt;!--T:20--&gt;
To create a page, enter the following command in the terminal, replacing '&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&amp;lt;username&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;' with your username, and pressing 'Y' when prompted to accept your changes:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:21--&gt;
You have edited the wiki.  View your changes by opening &lt;tvar name=ut&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; in your web browser.

&lt;!--T:22--&gt;
You can read more about each of these command line scripts with the '&lt;tvar name=h&gt;-help&lt;/tvar&gt;' command line option.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Fetch a page == &lt;!--T:23--&gt;

&lt;!--T:24--&gt;
Fetching many pages is achieved with the &quot;listpages&quot; command.

&lt;!--T:25--&gt;
To get the contents of the page you created in the previous section, enter the following command:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; Now if you run &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot; inline&gt;$ ls&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; the saved page should be present.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== A real script example == &lt;!--T:27--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; When a website used on Wikipedia changes its URL, the links on Wikipedia become outdated, and possible also [[w:WP:Dead links|dead links]] if the website doesn't redirect from the old URLs to the new URLs.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:79--&gt; For example, Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) has changed their links, such as moving pages from &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; to &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:80--&gt; You can find the list of usages of the old URL on English Wikipedia at &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]]&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:81--&gt; Updating all those links manually will be very time consuming.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:82--&gt; Thankfully EB has maintained redirects from their old URLs to the new URLs, so this does not need to be fixed immediately.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:29--&gt;
For a simpler example, English Wikipedia currently contains links to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; instead of &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; i.e. a 'www.' subdomain is missing in the URL.

&lt;!--T:30--&gt;
There are currently 14 cases on English Wikipedia: &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]&lt;/tvar&gt;

&lt;!--T:31--&gt;
Wikipedia in other language also have this problem.  e.g. there is one case on German Wikipedia: &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]&lt;/tvar&gt;

&lt;!--T:32--&gt;
In order to fix those links, we can use Pywikibot &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}}&lt;/tvar&gt; script.  In this demo we will use the '-simulate' argument to avoid writing to the wiki, as there are strict rules about [[w:WP:Bots|automated editing]] of English Wikipedia.

&lt;!--T:33--&gt;
First, let's list all of the pages which link to &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:34--&gt;
Now we check those pages actually have the literal URL in the page; i.e. they are not using a template.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:35--&gt;
Now use replace to add the missing &quot;www.&quot;
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:36--&gt;
In PAWS, and any terminal that supports color, the diff of changes will show the added &quot;www.&quot; in green text color, making it easier to find the proposed changes.

== Inside Pywikibot == &lt;!--T:37--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:70--&gt; Don't write passwords in files of server, the files are public!&lt;/translate&gt;}}

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:38--&gt;
Next we will use the PAWS Python session.

&lt;!--T:39--&gt;
# Go to your [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home&lt;/tvar&gt; PAWS home],
# click 'New' on the right hand side, and
# select 'Python 3'.

&lt;!--T:40--&gt;
This will open a new window.

&lt;!--T:41--&gt;
In the text box, enter the following and in the Cell menu select 'Run' (or pressing shift+enter to run).
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:42--&gt;
A new text box will appear below.  Run the following to create an APISite object connected to &lt;tvar name=1&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/&lt;/tvar&gt;:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:43--&gt;
Describe &quot;site&quot; by entering it into the new text box and selecting &quot;Run&quot;.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:44--&gt;
It should show
&lt;/translate&gt;

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:45--&gt;
Create a page object:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:46--&gt;
Check it exists by running:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:47--&gt;
It should output
&lt;/translate&gt;

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:48--&gt;
Show the text on the page:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:49--&gt;
Change the page text in the object:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:50--&gt;
Save the page to the wiki:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:51--&gt;
The response should be:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:52--&gt;
The interactive Python 3 notebook allows many lines to be run together.  The above could be put into one text box and Run
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:53--&gt;
The log of your interactive Python session can be saved or downloaded for future reference.

== Accessing online documentation in PAWS == &lt;!--T:54--&gt;

&lt;!--T:55--&gt;
Pywikibot documentation may be found at &lt;tvar name=1&gt;https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/&lt;/tvar&gt;.  It is primarily sourced from [[w:docstring|docstrings]], which can be loaded in the interactive Python 3 notebook using the Python built-in function &lt;tvar name=2&gt;[https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()]&lt;/tvar&gt;.

&lt;!--T:56--&gt;
For example, to look at the arguments for the save method above, run either:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:68--&gt;
or
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Editing Pywikibot scripts == &lt;!--T:57--&gt;

&lt;!--T:58--&gt;
The Pywikibot library and scripts are located in /srv/paws, and are read-only.  The installed Pywikibot library cannot be modified in PAWS.

&lt;!--T:59--&gt;
Scripts may be modified after copying them into your PAWS home.

&lt;!--T:60--&gt;
For example, to run a modified &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;:

&lt;!--T:83--&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:84--&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://paws.wmcloud.org/&lt;/tvar&gt; PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:85--&gt;
# In the browser, you can edit the file.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:86--&gt; Edit the code -- for instance, just after the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; code on line 1775, add a new line 1776 that will print out your name: &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:87--&gt;
# In the editing interface, use the File menu and click Save to save your modifications.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:88--&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

&lt;translate&gt;
== See also == &lt;!--T:76--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:78--&gt;
* [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb&lt;/tvar&gt; PAWS cheatsheet] by one user (e.g. about API and database access)
&lt;/translate&gt;
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7leh6ok4k6eksq9lt82165do14yllg4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/de</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>519949</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401792</id>
      <parentid>5237143</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3610" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Überblick ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== MediaWiki ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>pzw20uxy0tt97d2fwv5u2fr6gem6l7h</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/en</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>520826</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401793</id>
      <parentid>5184873</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2936" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.

== Overview ==
Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.
Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.
Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.

== Social media channels ==

There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.

=== MediaWiki ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

=== Wikimedia Technology ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

=== Current maintainers ===
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

== Our operating rules ==
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.

== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==

Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>erey38o51uwj1fyvqbbqg3cxcnnxipw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/32/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>521503</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402190</id>
      <parentid>1963370</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="227" xml:space="preserve">In order to fix those links, we can use Pywikibot $1 script.  In this demo we will use the '-simulate' argument to avoid writing to the wiki, as there are strict rules about [[w:WP:Bots|automated editing]] of English Wikipedia.</text>
      <sha1>oceg28cygo5em34nnyxdgw1r8ay2bd6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/id</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>521534</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402199</id>
      <parentid>5371505</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="18398" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''Lihat [[Wikitech:PAWS]] untuk rincian lebih lanjut.''
Dokumen ini menyediakan tinjauan interaktif cepat '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' dengan menggunakan ''notebook'' yang diinangkan di lingkungan [[wikitech:Help:Cloud Services Introduction|Wikimedia Cloud Services]] yang menggunakan [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: A Web Shell''')]].

{{note|1=Ingat bahwa Terminal PAWS mendukung salin dan tempel hanya dalam [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Other browsers based on Chromium|peramban berbasis Chromium]]. (Dapat menggunakan Google Chrome, Opera, Safari dan Microsoft Edge baru.) &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a different browser, you can try with context menu only (right-click) or you will need to manually type the commands mentioned in this walk-through.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also create a bash file with in content the command and call in terminal with &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All notebooks and terminals in PAWS are subject to termination without notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You are encouraged to run your task on other places (such as [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) if your task lasts for more than hours.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Cara pembuatan akun Wikimedia ==

Untuk bisa mengikuti tata langkah berikut, Anda hanya membutuhkan satu akun Wikipedia/Wikimedia. Gunakan [[Special:CreateAccount]] untuk membuatnya.

Jika Anda sudah membuat akun, kunjungi https://test.wikipedia.org/ dan perhatikan nama pengguna Anda yang muncul di pojok kanan atas. (Proses ini akan berjalan lancar sesuai [[phabricator:T120327|T120327]]).

Jika Anda adalah seorang pengguna baru di Wikimedia, masuk log dengan akun Anda di meta.Wikimedia, Wikipedia, Wikidata, dan Commons.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

== Masuk ke 'laptop' ==

Untuk memulai ''notebook'' terinang, tuju ke https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub

Klik &quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot;, kemudian klik &quot;Allow&quot; jika diminta untuk persetujuan terkait &quot;Use OAuth for Authentication&quot;.
Saat pertama kali mengakses PAWS, Anda diharuskan untuk membuat server.
Klik tombol hijau &quot;Start my Server&quot;.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's normal to wait a few minutes for the new server to start up.&lt;/span&gt;

Saat server sudah dibuat Anda akan dialihkkan ke pranala seperti ini, &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/tree&lt;/nowiki&gt;

== Memulai terminal ==

Untuk memulai terminal interaktif yang baru:
# Pergi ke [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ laman utama PAWS]
# klik: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal

Kemudian jendela baru akan terbuka dengan ''prompt'' Linux '$'.

Terminal ini bukanlah emulator. Terminal ini layaknya sebuah ''[https://id.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bourne-Again_shell bash shell]'' yang merupakan bagian dari dudukan instalasi Linux pada ''[[w:Docker (software)|docker container]]''. Jadi, Anda bisa menggunakan perintah bash apapun dan perintah manapun yang tersedia pada sistem operasi Linux  yang telah diinstal.

Untuk melihat beberapa perintah yang tersedia, gunakan &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== Masuk log ke wiki ==
Ini akan menetapkan akun Anda di peladen dan memungkinkan Anda masuk log lewat baris perintah.
Perintah berikut memastikan bahwa Anda dapat masuk ke testwiki. Perintah ini menggunakan otorisasi otomatis sehingga Anda tidak perlu memasukkan kata sandi lagi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Anda bisa menghubungkan pywikibot ke wiki lain dengan membuat berkas dengan nama ''user-config.py'' di [[w:Home_directory|direktori &lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt;]] dan menambahkan variabel ''mylang'' dan ''family'':

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Membuat laman ==

Untuk membuat sebuah laman, masukkan perintah berikut ke terminal, ganti '&lt;username&gt;' dengan nama pengguna Anda, lalu tekan 'Y' saat diminta untuk menyetujui perubahan yang Anda lakukan:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Anda sudah berhasil menyunting Wiki. Lihat perubahan yang Anda lakukan dengan membuka &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; pada peramban web Anda.

Anda bisa membaca lebih lanjut tentang jenis-jenis skrip baris perintah dengan mengetik '-help' pada opsi baris perintah.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Penarikan sebuah laman==

Penarikan banyak laman dapat dilakukan dengan perintah &quot;listpages&quot;.

Untuk bisa mendapatkan konten laman yang sudah Anda buat pada tahap sebelumnya, silakan masukkan perintah berikut:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Jika Anda sekarang menjalankan &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot; inline&gt;$ ls&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;, halaman yang sudah tersimpan seharusnya ada.

== Contoh skrip asli ==
Saat Lokator Sumber Seragam (URL) dari sebuah alamat web yang ada di Wikipedia berubah, makan pranala akan usang dan menjadi [[w:WP:Dead links|pranala mati]] jika situs web tidak mengalihkan ke URL baru.
Misalnya Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) mengubah pranala mereka dari &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; menjadi &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
Anda bisa melihat daftar penggunaan URL lama pada Wikipedia Bahasa Inggris melalui pranala [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].
Pengubahan semua pranala secara manual tentu saja akan menyita banyak waktu.
Untung saja, EB sudah membuat pengalihan dari URL lama ke URL baru, sehingga tidak perlu diperbaiki sesegera mungkin.

Contoh sederhana yaitu Wikipedia Bahasa Inggris saat ini mempunyai pranala berjudul &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; bukannya &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Subdomain 'www.' tidak ada pada URL-nya.

Saat ini ada 14 masalah pada Wikipedia Bahasa Inggris: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

Wikipedia bahasa lainnya juga memiliki masalah yang sama, misalnya saja pada Wikipedia Bahasa Jerman yang memiliki satu masalah: https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Untuk memperbaiki prana ini, kita bisa mempergunakan skrip Pywikibot yaitu [[Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py]]. Pada percobaan ini, kami akan mempergunakan argumen '-simulate' untuk menghindari penulisan langsung ke dalam wiki. Hal ini dikarenakan adanya peraturan tegas terkait [[w:WP:Bots|penyuntingan otomatis]] di Wikipedia Bahasa Inggris.
&lt;/div&gt;

Pertama-tama, mari kita susun daftar semua laman yang terhubung ke &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Sekarang kita periksa laman mana saja yang mengandung URL harfiah dalam lamannya, misalnya tidak ditempatkan dalam sebuah templat.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Sekarang gunakan 'replace' untuk menambahkan &quot;www.&quot;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Dalam PAWS dan terminal lain yang mendukung tampilan warna, perbedaan revisi akan menampilkan warna hijau pada teks &quot;www.&quot; sehingga kita bisa dengan mudah menemukan perubahan yang akan dilakukan.

== Program Pywikibot lebih lanjut==

{{Warning|1=Jangan tulis kata sandi di berkas peladen, berkasnya bersifat publik!}}

Selanjutnya, kita akan mempejalari cara penggunaan sesi Python untuk PAWS.

# Pergi ke [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home PAWS laman PAWS] Anda.
# Klik 'New&quot; pada sisi kanan, dan
# Pilih 'Python 3'.

Sebuah jendela baru akan terbuka.

Pada kota teks, masukkan teks berikut dan di menu 'Cell' pilih 'Run' (atau tekan tombol shift+enter untuk menjalakannya).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Kotak teks baru akan muncul seperti di bawah. Kemudian, jalankan teks berikut untuk membuat sebuah objek APISite yang terhubung pada https://test.wikipedia.org/:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Jelaskan &quot;site&quot; dengan memasukkan teks tersebut ke dalam kotak teks kemudian pilih &quot;Run&quot;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Maka akan muncul

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

Buat sebuah objek laman:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Periksa keberadaannya dengan menjalankan:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Maka akan menghasilkan keluaran

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

Tunjukkan teks pada laman:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ubah teks laman pada objek:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Simpan laman ke dalam wiki:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Respon seharusnya seperti berikut:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

'laptop' interaktif Python 3 memungkinkan banyak baris bisa dijalankan secara bersama-sama. Sesi di atas bisa dimasukkan ke dalam satu kotak teks dan dijalankan secara bersamaan.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Log sesi interaktif Python Anda bisa disimpan atau diunduh sebagai acuan di masa mendatang.

== Pengaksesan dokumentasi daring pada PAWS ==

Dokumentasi tentang Pywikibot bisa ditemukan pada https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/. Laman tersebut merupakan sumber utama dari [[w:docstring|docstring]] yang bisa dimuat di dalam 'laptop' interaktif Python 3 memperguna fungsi tertaman Python [[https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()] help()].

Contohnya, untuk pencarian argumen metode 'save' seperti di atas, kita bisa menjalankan skrip berikut:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

atau

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Penyuntingan skrip Pywikibot ==

Pustaka perangkat lunak dan skrip Pywikibot berada pada /srv/paws dan hanya bisa dibaca saja. Pustaka Pywikibot yang sudah terisntal tidak dapat diubah di PAWS.

Skrip bisa diubah dengan menyalinnya ke dalam laman PAWS Anda.

Contohnya, untuk menjalankan &quot;checkimages.py&quot; termodifikasi:

# Dalam terminal, ketik &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
# Di penjelajah, pergi ke [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ rumah PAWS] Anda dan tekan berkas &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
# Di penjelajah, Anda bisa menyunting berkasnya. Sunting kodenya -- contohnya, tepat setelah kode &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; di baris 1775, tambahkan baris 1776 baru yang akan mencetak nama Anda: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;
# Di antarmuka penyuntingan, gunakan menu File dan tekan Save untuk menyimpan pengubahan Anda.
# Dalam terminal, ketik &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== Lihat pula ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb Sontekan PAWS] oleh satu pengguna (contohnya tentang akses API dan basis data)
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>91vxd8edpaa7bl7y8wpdeva1aie224k</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402216</id>
      <parentid>5402199</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:55:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="18361" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''Lihat [[Wikitech:PAWS]] untuk rincian lebih lanjut.''
Dokumen ini menyediakan tinjauan interaktif cepat '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' dengan menggunakan ''notebook'' yang diinangkan di lingkungan [[wikitech:Help:Cloud Services Introduction|Wikimedia Cloud Services]] yang menggunakan [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: A Web Shell''')]].

{{note|1=Ingat bahwa Terminal PAWS mendukung salin dan tempel hanya dalam [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Other browsers based on Chromium|peramban berbasis Chromium]]. (Dapat menggunakan Google Chrome, Opera, Safari dan Microsoft Edge baru.) &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a different browser, you can try with context menu only (right-click) or you will need to manually type the commands mentioned in this walk-through.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also create a bash file with in content the command and call in terminal with &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All notebooks and terminals in PAWS are subject to termination without notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You are encouraged to run your task on other places (such as [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) if your task lasts for more than hours.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Cara pembuatan akun Wikimedia ==

Untuk bisa mengikuti tata langkah berikut, Anda hanya membutuhkan satu akun Wikipedia/Wikimedia. Gunakan [[Special:CreateAccount]] untuk membuatnya.

Jika Anda sudah membuat akun, kunjungi https://test.wikipedia.org/ dan perhatikan nama pengguna Anda yang muncul di pojok kanan atas. (Proses ini akan berjalan lancar sesuai [[phabricator:T120327|T120327]]).

Jika Anda adalah seorang pengguna baru di Wikimedia, masuk log dengan akun Anda di meta.Wikimedia, Wikipedia, Wikidata, dan Commons.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

== Masuk ke 'laptop' ==

Untuk memulai ''notebook'' terinang, tuju ke https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub

Klik &quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot;, kemudian klik &quot;Allow&quot; jika diminta untuk persetujuan terkait &quot;Use OAuth for Authentication&quot;.
Saat pertama kali mengakses PAWS, Anda diharuskan untuk membuat server.
Klik tombol hijau &quot;Start my Server&quot;.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's normal to wait a few minutes for the new server to start up.&lt;/span&gt;

Saat server sudah dibuat Anda akan dialihkkan ke pranala seperti ini, &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/tree&lt;/nowiki&gt;

== Memulai terminal ==

Untuk memulai terminal interaktif yang baru:
# Pergi ke [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ laman utama PAWS]
# klik: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal

Kemudian jendela baru akan terbuka dengan ''prompt'' Linux '$'.

Terminal ini bukanlah emulator. Terminal ini layaknya sebuah ''[https://id.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bourne-Again_shell bash shell]'' yang merupakan bagian dari dudukan instalasi Linux pada ''[[w:Docker (software)|docker container]]''. Jadi, Anda bisa menggunakan perintah bash apapun dan perintah manapun yang tersedia pada sistem operasi Linux  yang telah diinstal.

Untuk melihat beberapa perintah yang tersedia, gunakan &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== Masuk log ke wiki ==
Ini akan menetapkan akun Anda di peladen dan memungkinkan Anda masuk log lewat baris perintah.
Perintah berikut memastikan bahwa Anda dapat masuk ke testwiki. Perintah ini menggunakan otorisasi otomatis sehingga Anda tidak perlu memasukkan kata sandi lagi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Anda bisa menghubungkan pywikibot ke wiki lain dengan membuat berkas dengan nama ''user-config.py'' di [[w:Home_directory|direktori &lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt;]] dan menambahkan variabel ''mylang'' dan ''family'':

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Membuat laman ==

Untuk membuat sebuah laman, masukkan perintah berikut ke terminal, ganti '&lt;username&gt;' dengan nama pengguna Anda, lalu tekan 'Y' saat diminta untuk menyetujui perubahan yang Anda lakukan:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Anda sudah berhasil menyunting Wiki. Lihat perubahan yang Anda lakukan dengan membuka &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; pada peramban web Anda.

Anda bisa membaca lebih lanjut tentang jenis-jenis skrip baris perintah dengan mengetik '-help' pada opsi baris perintah.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Penarikan sebuah laman==

Penarikan banyak laman dapat dilakukan dengan perintah &quot;listpages&quot;.

Untuk bisa mendapatkan konten laman yang sudah Anda buat pada tahap sebelumnya, silakan masukkan perintah berikut:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Jika Anda sekarang menjalankan &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot; inline&gt;$ ls&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;, halaman yang sudah tersimpan seharusnya ada.

== Contoh skrip asli ==
Saat Lokator Sumber Seragam (URL) dari sebuah alamat web yang ada di Wikipedia berubah, makan pranala akan usang dan menjadi [[w:WP:Dead links|pranala mati]] jika situs web tidak mengalihkan ke URL baru.
Misalnya Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) mengubah pranala mereka dari &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; menjadi &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
Anda bisa melihat daftar penggunaan URL lama pada Wikipedia Bahasa Inggris melalui pranala [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].
Pengubahan semua pranala secara manual tentu saja akan menyita banyak waktu.
Untung saja, EB sudah membuat pengalihan dari URL lama ke URL baru, sehingga tidak perlu diperbaiki sesegera mungkin.

Contoh sederhana yaitu Wikipedia Bahasa Inggris saat ini mempunyai pranala berjudul &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; bukannya &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Subdomain 'www.' tidak ada pada URL-nya.

Saat ini ada 14 masalah pada Wikipedia Bahasa Inggris: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

Wikipedia bahasa lainnya juga memiliki masalah yang sama, misalnya saja pada Wikipedia Bahasa Jerman yang memiliki satu masalah: https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

Untuk memperbaiki prana ini, kita bisa mempergunakan skrip Pywikibot yaitu {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}}. Pada percobaan ini, kami akan mempergunakan argumen '-simulate' untuk menghindari penulisan langsung ke dalam wiki. Hal ini dikarenakan adanya peraturan tegas terkait [[w:WP:Bots|penyuntingan otomatis]] di Wikipedia Bahasa Inggris.

Pertama-tama, mari kita susun daftar semua laman yang terhubung ke &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Sekarang kita periksa laman mana saja yang mengandung URL harfiah dalam lamannya, misalnya tidak ditempatkan dalam sebuah templat.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Sekarang gunakan 'replace' untuk menambahkan &quot;www.&quot;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Dalam PAWS dan terminal lain yang mendukung tampilan warna, perbedaan revisi akan menampilkan warna hijau pada teks &quot;www.&quot; sehingga kita bisa dengan mudah menemukan perubahan yang akan dilakukan.

== Program Pywikibot lebih lanjut==

{{Warning|1=Jangan tulis kata sandi di berkas peladen, berkasnya bersifat publik!}}

Selanjutnya, kita akan mempejalari cara penggunaan sesi Python untuk PAWS.

# Pergi ke [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home PAWS laman PAWS] Anda.
# Klik 'New&quot; pada sisi kanan, dan
# Pilih 'Python 3'.

Sebuah jendela baru akan terbuka.

Pada kota teks, masukkan teks berikut dan di menu 'Cell' pilih 'Run' (atau tekan tombol shift+enter untuk menjalakannya).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Kotak teks baru akan muncul seperti di bawah. Kemudian, jalankan teks berikut untuk membuat sebuah objek APISite yang terhubung pada https://test.wikipedia.org/:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Jelaskan &quot;site&quot; dengan memasukkan teks tersebut ke dalam kotak teks kemudian pilih &quot;Run&quot;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Maka akan muncul

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

Buat sebuah objek laman:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Periksa keberadaannya dengan menjalankan:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Maka akan menghasilkan keluaran

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

Tunjukkan teks pada laman:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ubah teks laman pada objek:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Simpan laman ke dalam wiki:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Respon seharusnya seperti berikut:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

'laptop' interaktif Python 3 memungkinkan banyak baris bisa dijalankan secara bersama-sama. Sesi di atas bisa dimasukkan ke dalam satu kotak teks dan dijalankan secara bersamaan.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Log sesi interaktif Python Anda bisa disimpan atau diunduh sebagai acuan di masa mendatang.

== Pengaksesan dokumentasi daring pada PAWS ==

Dokumentasi tentang Pywikibot bisa ditemukan pada https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/. Laman tersebut merupakan sumber utama dari [[w:docstring|docstring]] yang bisa dimuat di dalam 'laptop' interaktif Python 3 memperguna fungsi tertaman Python [[https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()] help()].

Contohnya, untuk pencarian argumen metode 'save' seperti di atas, kita bisa menjalankan skrip berikut:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

atau

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Penyuntingan skrip Pywikibot ==

Pustaka perangkat lunak dan skrip Pywikibot berada pada /srv/paws dan hanya bisa dibaca saja. Pustaka Pywikibot yang sudah terisntal tidak dapat diubah di PAWS.

Skrip bisa diubah dengan menyalinnya ke dalam laman PAWS Anda.

Contohnya, untuk menjalankan &quot;checkimages.py&quot; termodifikasi:

# Dalam terminal, ketik &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
# Di penjelajah, pergi ke [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ rumah PAWS] Anda dan tekan berkas &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
# Di penjelajah, Anda bisa menyunting berkasnya. Sunting kodenya -- contohnya, tepat setelah kode &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; di baris 1775, tambahkan baris 1776 baru yang akan mencetak nama Anda: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;
# Di antarmuka penyuntingan, gunakan menu File dan tekan Save untuk menyimpan pengubahan Anda.
# Dalam terminal, ketik &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== Lihat pula ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb Sontekan PAWS] oleh satu pengguna (contohnya tentang akses API dan basis data)
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>04wq3wb7cp0nub3ls3nwu9ze939gmgp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:PHP configuration/2/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>521937</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403096</id>
      <parentid>1965220</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:25:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>correction of the name (MediWiki -&gt; MediaWiki)</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="31" xml:space="preserve">== MediaWiki-Kompatibilität ==</text>
      <sha1>lgmomdi0c31c2ry2t3izx4vtk9fd3q5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>522453</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402191</id>
      <parentid>5371497</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20920" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''Siehe [[Wikitech:PAWS]] für weitere Details.''
Dieses Dokument bietet eine schnelle, interaktive Übersicht von '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' mithilfe eines ''Notebooks'', das auf der [[wikitech:Help:Cloud Services Introduction|Wikimedia Cloud Services]]-Umgebung unter Verwendung von [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''']] gehostet wird.

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PAWS Terminal supports copy and paste in [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Browsers based on Chromium|Chromium-based browsers]] only.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Google Chrome, Opera, Safari and new Microsoft Edge are fine.)&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a different browser, you can try with context menu only (right-click) or you will need to manually type the commands mentioned in this walk-through.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also create a bash file with in content the command and call in terminal with &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All notebooks and terminals in PAWS are subject to termination without notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You are encouraged to run your task on other places (such as [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) if your task lasts for more than hours.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Erstellen eines Wikimedia-Benutzerkontos ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Um diese schnelle Demonstration durchzuführen, benötigen Sie lediglich ein Benutzerkonto bei einem Wikimedia-Projekt.
&lt;/div&gt;

Wenn sie ein Benutzerkonto erstellt haben, besuchen Sie bitte https://test.wikipedia.org/ und stellen Sie sicher, dass Ihr Benutzername in der oberen rechten Ecke auftaucht. (das funktioniert mit [[phabricator:T120327|T120327]]).

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

== Einschreiben in ein Notebook ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Um ein gehostetes Notebook zu starten, besuchen Sie bitte https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub
&lt;/div&gt;

Drücken sie auf &quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot; und anschließend auf &quot;Allow&quot;, wenn sie um die Erlaubnis für &quot;Use OAuth for Authentication&quot; gebete werden.
Beim ertsen Besuch von PAWS müssen sie einen Server erstellen.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the green &quot;Start my Server&quot; button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's normal to wait a few minutes for the new server to start up.&lt;/span&gt;

Wenn dies abgeschlossen ist, werden Sie zu einer URL umgeleitet, die wie &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/tree&lt;/nowiki&gt; aussieht.

== Eine Konsole starten ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Um eine neue interaktive Konsole zu öffnen,
# Gehen sie zu ihrer [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS Startseite]
# Klicken Sie auf &quot;New&quot; auf der rechten Seite
# Wählen sie &quot;Terminal&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Das wird ein neues Fenster mit der URL &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/terminals/1&lt;/nowiki&gt; mit der Linux-Eingabeaufforderung &quot;$&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

Diese Konsole ist kein Emulator. Es ist eine echte  [[:w:de:Bash (Shell)|Bash Shell]], wie sie Teil einer Linux-Installation basierend auf einem [[w:de:Docker (Software)|Docker-Container]] ist. Also kann jeder Bash-Befehl und jeder auf Linux verfügbare und installierte Befehl verwendet werden.

Um einige der verfügbaren Befehle zu sehen, verwenden Sie &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Login to the wiki ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will establish your account on the server and allow you to log in from the command line.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Der folgende Befehl sollte bestätigen, dass Sie sich auf https://test.wikipedia.org/ einloggen können. Da OAuth verwendet wird, wird kein Passwort benötigt.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can connect pywikibot to a different wiki by creating a file named ''user-config.py'' in your [[w:Home_directory|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; directory]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) and adding ''mylang'' and ''family'' variables:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Eine Seite erstellen ==

Um eine Seite zu erstellen, geben Sie den folgenden Befehl in die Konsole ein, wobei Sie &quot;&lt;username&gt;&quot; mit Ihrem Benutzernamen ersetzen und anschließend &quot;Y&quot; drücken, wenn sie gefragt werden, ob sie ihre Änderungen übernehmen möchten:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Nun haben Sie das Wiki bearbeitet. Sehen Sie sich ihre Änderungen an, indem sie &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; in Ihrem Browser öffen.

Sie können mehr über die Skripte erfahren, wenn sie die &quot;-help&quot;-Option anwenden.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Eine Seite fetchen ==

Das Fetchen vieler Seiten wird durch den &quot;listpages&quot;-Befehl ermöglicht.

Um die Inhalte der erstellten Seite anzuzeigen, geben Sie folgenden Befehl ein:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn Sie nun auf Ihre [$url PAWS Dateiliste] gehen, sollte die gespeicherte Seite dort vorhanden sein.&lt;/span&gt;

== Ein echtes Skriptbeispiel ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn eine auf Wikipedia verwendete Seite ihre URL verändert, veralten die Links auf Wikipedia und möglicherweise werden sie auch zu [[w:WP:Dead links|Redlinks]], falls keine Weiterleitung von der alten URL zu der neuen URL erstellt wird.Zum Beispiel Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) hat ihre Links durch das Verschieben von Seiten von &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; nach &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt; verändert. Sie können die Liste der Verwendungen der alten URL auf https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media im englischen Wikipedia finden. Das manuelle Erneuern dieser Links würde zeitlich sehr uneffizient sein. Zum Glück hat EB Weiterleitungen von den alten URLs zu den neuen URLs beibehalten, also müssen die Wikipedia-Links nicht sofort erneuert werden.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) has changed their links, such as moving pages from &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can find the list of usages of the old URL on English Wikipedia at [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updating all those links manually will be very time consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thankfully EB has maintained redirects from their old URLs to the new URLs, so this does not need to be fixed immediately.&lt;/span&gt;

Ein einfacheres Beispiel wäre, dass das englische Wikipedia zurzeit Links zu &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; statt &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; enthält; es fehlt also das &quot;www.&quot; als Subdomain in der URL.

Es gibt derzeit 14 Fälle im englischen Wikipedia: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

Wikipedia hat dieses Problem auch in anderen Sprachen. Zum Beispiel gab es einen Fall im deutschen Wikipedia: https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Um diese Links zu reparieren, können wir das Pywikibot-[[Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py]]-Skript verwenden. In dieser Demonstration werden wir das &quot;-simulate&quot;-Argument verwenden, um nicht das Wiki zu bearbeiten, da es strenge Regeln für das [[:w:WP:Bots|automatisierte Bearbeiten]] beim englischen Wikipedia gibt.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Zuerst betrachten wir alle Seiten, die zu &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; verlinken.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Nun schauen wir, ob die Seiten die wortwörtliche URL auf der Seite haben, das heißt, dass sie nicht die Vorlage verwenden.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Nun nutzen wir &quot;replace&quot;, um das fehlende &quot;www.&quot; hinzuzufügen.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In PAWS wird bei jeder Konsole, die farbliche Darstellungen unterstützt, der Unterschied grün dargestellt, in unserem Fall das &quot;www.&quot;, was uns das Finden der Änderungen erleichtert.

== In Pywikbot ==

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don't write passwords in files of server, the files are public!&lt;/span&gt;}}

Als nächstes werden wir die PAWS-Python-Sitzung verwenden.

# Gehen Sie zu ihrer [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home Startseite home] 
# Klicken Sie auf &quot;New&quot; auf der rechten Seite
# Wählen Sie 'Python 3' aus

Dies wird ein neues Fenster öffnen.

Geben Sie folgendes in die Textbox ein und wählen sie &quot;Run&quot; (oder alternativ Umschalt+Eingabe).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Eine neue Textbox wird darunter erscheinen. Starten sie folgenden, um ein APISite-Objekt zu erschaffen, das mit https://test.wikipedia.org/ verbunden ist:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Legen Sie &quot;site&quot; fest, indem Sie es in die neue Textbox eingeben und &quot;Run&quot; wählen.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Es sollte folgendes anzeigen

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

Erzeuge ein Seitenobjekt:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Prüfe durch Aufrufen, ob es vorhanden ist:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Es sollte folgendes ausgeben

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

Zeige den Text auf der Seite:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ändere den Seitentext in dem Objekt:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Speichere die Seite im Wiki:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Die Antwort sollte folgendermaßen lauten:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Das interaktive Python 3-Notbook erlaubt ihnen, viele Befehle zusammen auszuführen. Das obere kann auch in eine einzige Textbox eingegeben werden.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Der Log Ihrer interaktiven Python-Sitzung kann für zukünftige Nachfrage gespeichert oder heruntergeladen werden.

== Auf die Online-Dokumentation in PAWS zugreifen ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Die Pywikibot-Dokumentation kann unter https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/index.html gefunden werden. Es basiert hauptsächlich auf [[w:docstring|docstrings]], was im interaktiven Python 3-Notebook mithilfe der eingebauten Funktion [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()] geladen werden kann.
&lt;/div&gt;

Um zum Beispiel die Argumente für die Speicher-Methode oben anzusehen, führen Sie das aus:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Pywikibot-Skripte bearbeiten ==

Die Pywikibot-Bibliothek und die Skripte befinden sich in /srv/paws und sind nur lesbar. Die installierte Pywikibot-Bibliothek kann nicht in PAWS bearbeitet werden.

Skripte können nach dem Kopieren in Ihr PAWS home modifiziert werden.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Um eine modifizierte Datei &quot;checkimages.py&quot; zu bearbeiten:
# Geben Sie in der Konsole &quot;cp /srv/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&quot; ein
# Klicken Sie auf Ihre Datei &quot;checkimages.py&quot; in Ihrem [https://tools.wmflabs.org/paws/ PAWS home]
# Verändern sie den Quelltext und speichern Sie Ihre Modifikationen.
# Geben Sie in der Konsole &quot;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate&quot; ein
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the browser, you can edit the file.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit the code -- for instance, just after the &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; code on line 1775, add a new line 1776 that will print out your name: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the editing interface, use the File menu and click Save to save your modifications.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== Siehe auch ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb PAWS cheatsheet] by one user (e.g. about API and database access)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>6klpaajopm9vk2sz9zvplhoi42i2czp</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402212</id>
      <parentid>5402191</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:55:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20883" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''Siehe [[Wikitech:PAWS]] für weitere Details.''
Dieses Dokument bietet eine schnelle, interaktive Übersicht von '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' mithilfe eines ''Notebooks'', das auf der [[wikitech:Help:Cloud Services Introduction|Wikimedia Cloud Services]]-Umgebung unter Verwendung von [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''']] gehostet wird.

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PAWS Terminal supports copy and paste in [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Browsers based on Chromium|Chromium-based browsers]] only.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Google Chrome, Opera, Safari and new Microsoft Edge are fine.)&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a different browser, you can try with context menu only (right-click) or you will need to manually type the commands mentioned in this walk-through.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also create a bash file with in content the command and call in terminal with &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All notebooks and terminals in PAWS are subject to termination without notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You are encouraged to run your task on other places (such as [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) if your task lasts for more than hours.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Erstellen eines Wikimedia-Benutzerkontos ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Um diese schnelle Demonstration durchzuführen, benötigen Sie lediglich ein Benutzerkonto bei einem Wikimedia-Projekt.
&lt;/div&gt;

Wenn sie ein Benutzerkonto erstellt haben, besuchen Sie bitte https://test.wikipedia.org/ und stellen Sie sicher, dass Ihr Benutzername in der oberen rechten Ecke auftaucht. (das funktioniert mit [[phabricator:T120327|T120327]]).

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

== Einschreiben in ein Notebook ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Um ein gehostetes Notebook zu starten, besuchen Sie bitte https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub
&lt;/div&gt;

Drücken sie auf &quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot; und anschließend auf &quot;Allow&quot;, wenn sie um die Erlaubnis für &quot;Use OAuth for Authentication&quot; gebete werden.
Beim ertsen Besuch von PAWS müssen sie einen Server erstellen.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the green &quot;Start my Server&quot; button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's normal to wait a few minutes for the new server to start up.&lt;/span&gt;

Wenn dies abgeschlossen ist, werden Sie zu einer URL umgeleitet, die wie &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/tree&lt;/nowiki&gt; aussieht.

== Eine Konsole starten ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Um eine neue interaktive Konsole zu öffnen,
# Gehen sie zu ihrer [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS Startseite]
# Klicken Sie auf &quot;New&quot; auf der rechten Seite
# Wählen sie &quot;Terminal&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Das wird ein neues Fenster mit der URL &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/terminals/1&lt;/nowiki&gt; mit der Linux-Eingabeaufforderung &quot;$&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

Diese Konsole ist kein Emulator. Es ist eine echte  [[:w:de:Bash (Shell)|Bash Shell]], wie sie Teil einer Linux-Installation basierend auf einem [[w:de:Docker (Software)|Docker-Container]] ist. Also kann jeder Bash-Befehl und jeder auf Linux verfügbare und installierte Befehl verwendet werden.

Um einige der verfügbaren Befehle zu sehen, verwenden Sie &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Login to the wiki ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will establish your account on the server and allow you to log in from the command line.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Der folgende Befehl sollte bestätigen, dass Sie sich auf https://test.wikipedia.org/ einloggen können. Da OAuth verwendet wird, wird kein Passwort benötigt.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can connect pywikibot to a different wiki by creating a file named ''user-config.py'' in your [[w:Home_directory|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; directory]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) and adding ''mylang'' and ''family'' variables:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Eine Seite erstellen ==

Um eine Seite zu erstellen, geben Sie den folgenden Befehl in die Konsole ein, wobei Sie &quot;&lt;username&gt;&quot; mit Ihrem Benutzernamen ersetzen und anschließend &quot;Y&quot; drücken, wenn sie gefragt werden, ob sie ihre Änderungen übernehmen möchten:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Nun haben Sie das Wiki bearbeitet. Sehen Sie sich ihre Änderungen an, indem sie &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; in Ihrem Browser öffen.

Sie können mehr über die Skripte erfahren, wenn sie die &quot;-help&quot;-Option anwenden.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Eine Seite fetchen ==

Das Fetchen vieler Seiten wird durch den &quot;listpages&quot;-Befehl ermöglicht.

Um die Inhalte der erstellten Seite anzuzeigen, geben Sie folgenden Befehl ein:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn Sie nun auf Ihre [$url PAWS Dateiliste] gehen, sollte die gespeicherte Seite dort vorhanden sein.&lt;/span&gt;

== Ein echtes Skriptbeispiel ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn eine auf Wikipedia verwendete Seite ihre URL verändert, veralten die Links auf Wikipedia und möglicherweise werden sie auch zu [[w:WP:Dead links|Redlinks]], falls keine Weiterleitung von der alten URL zu der neuen URL erstellt wird.Zum Beispiel Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) hat ihre Links durch das Verschieben von Seiten von &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; nach &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt; verändert. Sie können die Liste der Verwendungen der alten URL auf https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media im englischen Wikipedia finden. Das manuelle Erneuern dieser Links würde zeitlich sehr uneffizient sein. Zum Glück hat EB Weiterleitungen von den alten URLs zu den neuen URLs beibehalten, also müssen die Wikipedia-Links nicht sofort erneuert werden.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) has changed their links, such as moving pages from &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can find the list of usages of the old URL on English Wikipedia at [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updating all those links manually will be very time consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thankfully EB has maintained redirects from their old URLs to the new URLs, so this does not need to be fixed immediately.&lt;/span&gt;

Ein einfacheres Beispiel wäre, dass das englische Wikipedia zurzeit Links zu &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; statt &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; enthält; es fehlt also das &quot;www.&quot; als Subdomain in der URL.

Es gibt derzeit 14 Fälle im englischen Wikipedia: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

Wikipedia hat dieses Problem auch in anderen Sprachen. Zum Beispiel gab es einen Fall im deutschen Wikipedia: https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

Um diese Links zu reparieren, können wir das Pywikibot-{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}}-Skript verwenden. In dieser Demonstration werden wir das &quot;-simulate&quot;-Argument verwenden, um nicht das Wiki zu bearbeiten, da es strenge Regeln für das [[:w:WP:Bots|automatisierte Bearbeiten]] beim englischen Wikipedia gibt.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Zuerst betrachten wir alle Seiten, die zu &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; verlinken.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Nun schauen wir, ob die Seiten die wortwörtliche URL auf der Seite haben, das heißt, dass sie nicht die Vorlage verwenden.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Nun nutzen wir &quot;replace&quot;, um das fehlende &quot;www.&quot; hinzuzufügen.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In PAWS wird bei jeder Konsole, die farbliche Darstellungen unterstützt, der Unterschied grün dargestellt, in unserem Fall das &quot;www.&quot;, was uns das Finden der Änderungen erleichtert.

== In Pywikbot ==

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don't write passwords in files of server, the files are public!&lt;/span&gt;}}

Als nächstes werden wir die PAWS-Python-Sitzung verwenden.

# Gehen Sie zu ihrer [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home Startseite home] 
# Klicken Sie auf &quot;New&quot; auf der rechten Seite
# Wählen Sie 'Python 3' aus

Dies wird ein neues Fenster öffnen.

Geben Sie folgendes in die Textbox ein und wählen sie &quot;Run&quot; (oder alternativ Umschalt+Eingabe).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Eine neue Textbox wird darunter erscheinen. Starten sie folgenden, um ein APISite-Objekt zu erschaffen, das mit https://test.wikipedia.org/ verbunden ist:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Legen Sie &quot;site&quot; fest, indem Sie es in die neue Textbox eingeben und &quot;Run&quot; wählen.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Es sollte folgendes anzeigen

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

Erzeuge ein Seitenobjekt:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Prüfe durch Aufrufen, ob es vorhanden ist:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Es sollte folgendes ausgeben

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

Zeige den Text auf der Seite:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ändere den Seitentext in dem Objekt:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Speichere die Seite im Wiki:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Die Antwort sollte folgendermaßen lauten:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Das interaktive Python 3-Notbook erlaubt ihnen, viele Befehle zusammen auszuführen. Das obere kann auch in eine einzige Textbox eingegeben werden.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Der Log Ihrer interaktiven Python-Sitzung kann für zukünftige Nachfrage gespeichert oder heruntergeladen werden.

== Auf die Online-Dokumentation in PAWS zugreifen ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Die Pywikibot-Dokumentation kann unter https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/index.html gefunden werden. Es basiert hauptsächlich auf [[w:docstring|docstrings]], was im interaktiven Python 3-Notebook mithilfe der eingebauten Funktion [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()] geladen werden kann.
&lt;/div&gt;

Um zum Beispiel die Argumente für die Speicher-Methode oben anzusehen, führen Sie das aus:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Pywikibot-Skripte bearbeiten ==

Die Pywikibot-Bibliothek und die Skripte befinden sich in /srv/paws und sind nur lesbar. Die installierte Pywikibot-Bibliothek kann nicht in PAWS bearbeitet werden.

Skripte können nach dem Kopieren in Ihr PAWS home modifiziert werden.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Um eine modifizierte Datei &quot;checkimages.py&quot; zu bearbeiten:
# Geben Sie in der Konsole &quot;cp /srv/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&quot; ein
# Klicken Sie auf Ihre Datei &quot;checkimages.py&quot; in Ihrem [https://tools.wmflabs.org/paws/ PAWS home]
# Verändern sie den Quelltext und speichern Sie Ihre Modifikationen.
# Geben Sie in der Konsole &quot;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate&quot; ein
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the browser, you can edit the file.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit the code -- for instance, just after the &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; code on line 1775, add a new line 1776 that will print out your name: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the editing interface, use the File menu and click Save to save your modifications.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== Siehe auch ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb PAWS cheatsheet] by one user (e.g. about API and database access)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>3t11ee104xxdgk44osw41v47bugxjkp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/de</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>522465</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402606</id>
      <parentid>4578043</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3831" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Strukturierte Diskussionen (vormals als Flow bekannt), sind ein [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|Projekt]] des Mitwirkungs-Teams der Wikimedia Foundation, um ein modernes Diskussions- und Mitwirkungs-System für Wikimedia-Projekte zu entwickeln.

== Schnelle Übersicht ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|Wie Strukturierte Diskussionen aussehen - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Teste es]]!]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Finde heraus, warum wir Strukturierte Diskussionen entwickelt haben und wie du sie verwendest]]''': 
* [[$basics|Bearbeitungsgrundlagen]], 
* [[$post|Eine Antwort schreiben]] (an die globale Diskussion oder an eine bestimmte Person in der globalen Diskussion), 
* [[$create|Eine Diskussion erstellen]], 
* [[$watch|Ein Thema oder ein ganzes Nachrichtenbrett beobachten]], 
* [[$notifications|Benachrichtigungen erhalten]],
* [[$browse|Themen durchsuchen und archivieren]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Es gibt bestimmte Begriffe rund um Strukturierte Diskussionen. Sie wurden im [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|Glossar]] aufgelistet

Strukturierte Diskussionen funktionieren bei dir nicht? '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|Prüfe, ob du das Problem lösen kannst]]'''.

== Fortgeschrittene Werkzeuge ==

Manche fortgeschrittenen Werkzeuge sind für bestimmte Einsatzzwecke verfügbar. Sie wurden nach diesen Themen gruppiert:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Aktivierung}}
:Was passiert, wenn Strukturierte Diskussionen auf einer Seite aktiviert sind?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Themen}}
:Themen filtern, ein Thema/eine Nachricht bearbeiten, ein Thema zusammenfassen, ein Thema auflösen.
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Permanentlinks}}
:Wie man Links zu Themen erstellt
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Benachrichtigungen und Beobachtungsliste}}
:Die Benachrichtigungen, die du erhälst, und die verschiedenen Eingaben in der Beobachtungsliste
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Versionsgeschichte}}
:Wie das Versionsgeschichten-System funktioniert
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Verwaltung}}
:Verstecken, löschen, unterdrücken von Themen
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Vorladen}}
:Vorladen von Inhalten in einer neuen Strukturierte-Diskussionen-Konversation
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Tastaturkürzel}}
:Tastaturkürzel zur Verwendung im visuellen Bearbeitungsmodus.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Die gesamte Dokumentation auf einer Seite.}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>7egzg65rydsl0nvldh105ka1hwngcs3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/el</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>524137</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402927</id>
      <parentid>5355648</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="52609" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Βασική επισκόπηση ==

=== Μεταφορά αρχείων ===

Επιλέξτε μέθοδο για μεταφορά αρχείων:

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
* Ασφαλές αντίγραφο με [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] ή [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|Πρωτόκολλο Μεταφοράς Αρχείων SSH]] (SFTP)
* Χρήση εξυπηρετητή [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]].
* Η εταιρεία φιλοξενίας μπορεί να παρέχει κάποια διεπαφή διαχειριστή αρχείων μέσω των προγραμμάτων περιήγησης ιστού. Επικοινωνήστε με τον πάροχό σας.
* Κάποια άλλη μέθοδος. Υπάρχει μια λίστα από τέτοιες στη σελίδα [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

===Προκαταρκτικά===

Διαβάστε {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=το αρχείο κειμένου UPGRADE (αναβάθμιση) που περιλαμβάνεται στο MediaWiki}}.

# Ελέγξτε τις απαιτήσεις
# Διαβάστε το αρχείο RELEASE-NOTES
# Διαβάστε το αρχείο UPGRADE
# Πάρτε αντίγραφα ασφαλείας των υπαρχόντων αρχείων και της βάσης δεδομένων
# Αποσυμπιέστε τα νέα αρχεία
# Αναβαθμίστε τις επεκτάσεις
# Εκτελέστε τη δέσμη ενεργειών ενημέρωσης για να ελέγξετε την βάση δεδομένων
# Δοκιμάστε την ενημερωμένη έκδοση
# Αφαιρέστε υπολείμματα από παλιές εγκαταστάσεις

== Ελέγξτε τις απαιτήσεις == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
Το MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} απαιτεί:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Κάποιο από τα ακόλουθα:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

Αν χρησιμοποιείτε PostgreSQL, παρακαλούμε διαβάστε επίσης το {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες, παρακαλούμε διαβάστε το {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} και το {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Διαβάστε τις σημειώσεις έκδοσης ==
Εντός του συμπιεσμένου αρχείου της διανομής, ή εντός των εξαχθέντων αρχείων από το [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], υπάρχει ένας αριθμός από αρχεία με ονόματα σε κεφαλαία, το ένα εκ των οποίων περιέχει τις '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' (σημειώσεις έκδοσης) ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Τώρα είναι η ώρα να το ανοίξετε και να μάθετε τι έχει αλλάξει σε αυτήν την έκδοση.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Απαλείψτε τις εκκρεμείς εργασίες ==
Για λόγους επιδόσεων, ορισμένες ενέργειες στη βάση δεδομένων καθυστερούνται, και η διαχείρισή τους γίνεται από την [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|ουρά εργασιών]].
Αυτές οι εργασίες αποθηκεύονται στη βάση δεδομένων και περιέχουν παραμέτρους με πληροφορίες σχετικά με τις ενέργειες που πρέπει να εκτελεστούν.
Συνιστάται θερμά να εκτελέσετε αυτές τις εκκρεμείς εργασίες πριν από την αναβάθμιση του wiki, για την αποφυγή αποτυχία τους σε περίπτωση που οι προδιαγραφές των παραμέτρων αυτών των εργασιών έχουν αλλάξει στη νέα έκδοση.
Χρησιμοποιήστε το {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} για να τρέξετε όλες τις εκκρεμείς εργασίες και να καθαρίσετε την ουρά πριν από την εκτέλεση της αναβάθμισης.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Πάρτε αντίγραφα ασφαλείας των υπαρχόντων αρχείων και της βάσης δεδομένων ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:''Full instructions: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Unpack the new files ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using a tarball package ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Γραμμή εντολών ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===Άλλα αρχεία===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Χρησιμοποιώντας το Git ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Εναπομείναντα αρχεία που μπορεί να προκαλέσουν σφάλματα ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Αναβαθμίστε τις επεκτάσεις ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Προσαρμόστε το LocalSettings.php σας ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Άλλες μεταβλητές ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Εκτελέστε τη δέσμη ενεργειών ενημέρωσης ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Γραμμή εντολών ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===Πρόγραμμα περιήγησης Ιστού===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: ''See also {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Δοκιμάστε την ενημερωμένη έκδοση ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Αφαιρέστε υπολείμματα από παλιές εγκαταστάσεις ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

== Συχνές ερωτήσεις ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===Πόσο δύσκολη είναι η αναβάθμιση;===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
===Πώς αναβαθμίζω από μια πολύ παλιά έκδοση; Σε ένα βήμα, ή σε πολλαπλά βήματα;===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Πρέπει να πάρω αντίγραφα ασφαλείας πρώτα;===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Short answer: Yes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

===Μπορώ να κρατήσω το LocalSettings.php μου;===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

===Μπορεί το wiki μου να παραμένει σε σύνδεση ενώ αναβαθμίζεται;===

Σε γενικές γραμμές ναι, ωστόσο το Git μπορεί να το διακόψει προσωρινά (για μερικά δευτερόλεπτα).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Γιατί να αναβαθμίσω;===
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Δείτε επίσης ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>dsoykwr35i0wb2ug9xrra2f8ro1kmkp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/ja</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>526122</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402201</id>
      <parentid>5371509</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20753" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''詳細は [[Wikitech:PAWS]] を参照してください。''
この文書では、'''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' の簡単な概要を[[wikitech:Help:Cloud Services Introduction|ウィキメディア クラウド サービス]]環境が [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: A Web Shell''')]] を用いてホストしている ''notebook'' を使って説明します。

{{note|1=注意: PAWS ターミナルがコピー &amp; ペーストに対応しているのは、[[w:Chromium (web browser)#Browsers based on Chromium|Chromium ベースのブラウザー]]のみです。 (Google Chrome、Opera、Safari、新しい Microsoft Edge であれば問題なく動作します。) 別のブラウザを使用している場合、コンテキスト メニュー (右クリック) のみでの操作を試すこともできますが、この記事で説明するコマンドを手動で入力する必要があります。 コマンドを書いた bash ファイルを作成して、ターミナル内で &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt; を使って呼び出すこともできます。}}

{{Warning|1=PAWS のすべてのノートブックとターミナルは、予告なく終了されることがあります。 タスクが数時間以上続く場合は、他の場所 ([[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]] など) での実行が推奨されます。}}

== ウィキメディアのアカウントの作成 ==

このウォークスルーを試すのに必要なのは、ウィキペディア/ウィキメディアのアカウントのみです。作成するには [[Special:CreateAccount]] を使用してください。

アカウントを作成したら、https：//test.wikipedia.org/にアクセスして、右上にユーザー名が表示されることを確認してください&lt;small&gt;（これは[[phabricator:T120327|T120327]]で動作します）&lt;/small&gt;。

ウィキメディアの新規利用者は、メタ・ウィキ、ウィキペディア、ウィキデータ、コモンズのアカウントでログインしてください。
そして、それぞれで (一番上にある) 保留中のメッセージをすべて読み、削除してください。

== notebookにサインイン ==

ホスティングされた notebook を開始するには、https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub に遷移します。

「Sign in with MediaWiki」をクリックし、「Use OAuth for Authentication」を承認するように求められた際は「Allow」をクリックします。
PAWS にアクセスするのが初めての場合は、サーバーを作成する必要があります。
緑色の&quot;Start my Server&quot;ボタンをクリックしてください。
新しいサーバーを開始する際、通常はしばらく時間がかかります。

これが完了すると、&lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;利用者名&gt;/tree&lt;/nowiki&gt; のような URL にリダイレクトされます。

== 端末の開始 ==

新しい対話型端末を起動するには以下のようにします:
# [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS ホーム]に移動します。
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

これにより、Linux の「$」プロンプトがある新しいウィンドウが開きます。

この端末はエミュレーターではありません。[[:ja:Docker|docker コンテナー]]上の実物の Linux インストレーションの一部である実物の [[:ja:Bash|bash シェル]]であるため、あらゆる bash コマンドを使用でき、Linux にインストール済みで利用可能なあらゆるコマンドを使用できます。

利用できるコマンドの一部を列挙するには、&lt;code&gt;ls /bin&lt;/code&gt; を使用してください。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== ウィキへのログイン ==
これによりサーバー上のあなたのアカウントが確立され、コマンドラインからログインできるようになります。
以下のコマンドで、テストウィキにログインできることを確認できるはずです。OAuth を使用しているため、パスワードを入力する必要はありません。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

''user-config.py'' という名前のファイルを[[:ja:ホームディレクトリ|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; ディレクトリ]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) に作成し、''mylang'' および ''family'' の変数を追加することで、別のウィキの pywikibot に接続できます:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== ページの作成 ==

ページを作成するには、以下のコマンドの「&lt;username&gt;」をあなたの利用者名に書き換えて端末に入力し、変更内容を受理するように求められたら「Y」を押します:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

これでウィキを編集できました。変更内容を閲覧するには、ウェブ ブラウザーで &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;利用者名&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; を開きます。

これらのコマンドライン スクリプトそれぞれについて詳細を閲覧するには、「-help」コマンドライン オプションを使用してください。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== ページの取得 ==

多数のページの取得は、「listpages」コマンドで実現できます。

前の節で作成したページの本文を取得するには、以下のコマンドを入力します:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot; inline&gt;$ ls&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; を実行することで、保存したページを閲覧できるようになるはずです。

== スクリプトの実例 ==
ウィキペディアで使用されているウェブサイトへの外部リンクのURLが変更された際、古いリンクが新しいリンクに転送されない場合には[[:ja:PJ:404|リンク切れ]]が発生する場合があります。
例えばブリタニア百科事典は過去に、&lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt;から&lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;への記事ページのリンクの変更を実施しています。
[[:ja:Special:LinkSearch|外部リンク検索]]で[[:ja:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media|検索を行う]]ことで、古いURLが使用されたページの一覧を取得することができます。
これらのリンクを全て手動で更新しようとすると、非常に大きな時間がかかります。
幸いなことにブリタニア百科事典は旧ページから新ページへのリダイレクトを設定しているためすぐに修正を実施する必要はありません。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For a simpler example, English Wikipedia currently contains links to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; instead of &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; i.e. a 'www.' subdomain is missing in the URL.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are currently 14 cases on English Wikipedia: [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Wikipedia in other language also have this problem.  e.g. there is one case on German Wikipedia: [[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In order to fix those links, we can use Pywikibot {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}} script.  In this demo we will use the '-simulate' argument to avoid writing to the wiki, as there are strict rules about [[w:WP:Bots|automated editing]] of English Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
First, let's list all of the pages which link to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now we check those pages actually have the literal URL in the page; i.e. they are not using a template.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now use replace to add the missing &quot;www.&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In PAWS, and any terminal that supports color, the diff of changes will show the added &quot;www.&quot; in green text color, making it easier to find the proposed changes.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Pywikibot の内側 ==

{{Warning|1=サーバー内のファイルにパスワードを書き込まないでください! ファイルは公開されています!}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Next we will use the PAWS Python session.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to your [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home PAWS home],
# click 'New' on the right hand side, and
# select 'Python 3'.
&lt;/div&gt;

新しいウィンドウが開かれます。

以下の内容をテキストボックスに記述し、上部のメニューから「Run」ボタンを押して下さい（Shiftキー＋Enterキーを使って開くこともできます）。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

下部に新たなテキストボックスが表示されます。Run the following to create an APISite object connected to https://test.wikipedia.org/:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

新しいテキスト ボックスに「site」を入力して「Run」を選択することで内容を表示します。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

以下のように表示されるはずです

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

page オブジェクトを作成します:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

実行することで存在を確認します:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

以下のように出力されるはずです

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

ページのテキストを表示します:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

オブジェクト内のページ テキストを変更します:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

ページをウィキに保存します:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

レスポンスは以下のようになるはずです:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

複数の行を並列して記述することができるPython3では、上記の内容を以下のように1つのテキストボックスにまとめて書き込むこともできます。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The log of your interactive Python session can be saved or downloaded for future reference.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Accessing online documentation in PAWS ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Pywikibot documentation may be found at https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/.  It is primarily sourced from [[w:docstring|docstrings]], which can be loaded in the interactive Python 3 notebook using the Python built-in function [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to look at the arguments for the save method above, run either:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

または

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Pywikibot スクリプトの編集 ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Pywikibot library and scripts are located in /srv/paws, and are read-only.  The installed Pywikibot library cannot be modified in PAWS.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Scripts may be modified after copying them into your PAWS home.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to run a modified &quot;checkimages.py&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the browser, you can edit the file.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit the code -- for instance, just after the &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; code on line 1775, add a new line 1776 that will print out your name: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the editing interface, use the File menu and click Save to save your modifications.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== 参照 ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb PAWS cheatsheet] by one user (e.g. about API and database access)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>azpt3fzzelp49heahcu2jhxnf31i4v9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Tables/5/vi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>529778</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402263</id>
      <parentid>1982159</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="214" xml:space="preserve">Bảng (Table) có thể được tạo ra bằng cách sử dụng trực tiếp các câu lệnh phần tử (elements) của HTML, hoặc sử dụng định dạng &quot;wikicode&quot; để xác định được bảng.</text>
      <sha1>9s7vusbadlcxldemnpc990jmshwuwzn</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402290</id>
      <parentid>5402263</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:05:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="227" xml:space="preserve">Bảng (Table) có thể được tạo ra bằng cách sử dụng trực tiếp các câu lệnh phần tử bảng (table elements) của HTML, hoặc sử dụng định dạng &quot;wikicode&quot; để xác định được bảng.</text>
      <sha1>3ufvuaux9f53h567nuwap0ihme59wxj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Tables/6/vi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>529780</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402288</id>
      <parentid>1982162</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:05:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="252" xml:space="preserve">Các câu lệnh phần tử của HTML để tạo bảng và cách sử dụng nó đều đã được giải thích chi tiết và kĩ càng trên nhiều trang Web khác nhau, vì thế nội dung này sẽ không được nhắc đến ở đây.</text>
      <sha1>qjble7ngfwjys16cnldg4gvvx7al99y</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Tables/7/vi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>529781</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402318</id>
      <parentid>1982165</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:10:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="395" xml:space="preserve">Lợi ích của việc sử dụng mã nguồn Wikicode để tạo bảng là bảng sẽ được xây dựng bằng các ngôn ngữ kí hiệu (các lệnh: commands) có xu hướng giúp cho người đọc có thể hiểu dễ dàng hơn, cảm nhận được cấu trúc bảng trong chế độ chỉnh sửa (Visual edit, Source edit) bài viết dễ hơn so với ngôn ngữ HTML</text>
      <sha1>1a83v171qis5losx0r7pzbswu14rflf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Tables/3/vi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>529782</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402225</id>
      <parentid>1982167</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:00:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="150" xml:space="preserve">Một điều cơ bản mà bạn nên biết, hãy tránh sử dụng bảng trừ khi thật cần thiết nếu muốn tạo ra bảng dữ liệu.</text>
      <sha1>41cxd49usphnflst83cqeoso5i95k6l</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Tables/4/vi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>529783</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402227</id>
      <parentid>1982169</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:01:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="145" xml:space="preserve">Các lệnh để tạo ra và chỉnh sửa bảng (Table) thường khiến cho việc chỉnh sửa trang (Page) trở nên phức tạp hơn.</text>
      <sha1>5syftr8ntmg1zvmvn84bn74965mwhd4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402229</id>
      <parentid>5402227</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:02:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="166" xml:space="preserve">Lí do cơ bản là các lệnh để tạo ra và chỉnh sửa bảng (Table) thường khiến cho việc chỉnh sửa trang (Page) trở nên phức tạp hơn.</text>
      <sha1>kyn7fidu27l04epjz96qqnbgeohe3wc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Tables/9/vi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>529785</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402330</id>
      <parentid>3939215</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:15:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="49" xml:space="preserve">câu lệnh để '''bắt đầu tạo bảng'''</text>
      <sha1>j6m5fkphpqiwoj168fwz43bkvlkj4js</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Tables/10/vi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>529786</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402333</id>
      <parentid>3939488</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:21:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="254" xml:space="preserve">câu lệnh để '''tạo ra tiêu đề bảng'''. ví dụ: Mức độ tăng trưởng dân số của năm X.
câu lệnh này là tùy chọn, chỉ được đặt ở giữa lệnh &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt; và &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|-&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;</text>
      <sha1>4xwvaq6b4ewpdi1puj11apny0hhsbyo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/sd</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>532151</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401812</id>
      <parentid>5184892</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:MediaWiki feature list/129/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>535874</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403246</id>
      <parentid>3125981</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:09:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="318" xml:space="preserve">*'''Liaison étendue sur les mots''': Si vous placez un lien sous la forme &lt;nowiki&gt;[[war]]s&lt;/nowiki&gt;, ou &lt;nowiki&gt;[[war]]time&lt;/nowiki&gt;, le système va automatiquement afficher cela comme si vous aviez écrit  &lt;nowiki&gt;[[war|wars]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; ou &lt;nowiki&gt;[[war|wartime]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;, économisant ainsi de l'espace d'écriture.</text>
      <sha1>b5uol5l78ljz2cy872f1sjtualcsk4v</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:MediaWiki feature list/124/da</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>536040</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402367</id>
      <parentid>1994600</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:47:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="114" xml:space="preserve">**[[$1|System message]] indeholder alle brugergrænseflade-tekster, så de kan redigeres som enhver anden wikiside</text>
      <sha1>93kh4tt740g01fvwdbzm8anoz0zycq0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:MediaWiki feature list/124/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>536184</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402369</id>
      <parentid>1994901</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:48:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="133" xml:space="preserve">** [[$1|MediaWiki:Namensraum]] enthält alle Benutzer-Interface Texte, so dass sie wie jede andere Wiki-Seite bearbeitet werden kann.</text>
      <sha1>epmuedoni7aspd7b4k6b9tfxwahgggg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Wikispeech</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>539307</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401673</id>
      <parentid>4235224</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T17:47:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>2A02:9B0:4005:DE4C:F8A3:90F0:496D:AD04</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Blanked the page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="0" />
      <sha1>phoiac9h4m842xq45sp7s6u21eteeq1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401674</id>
      <parentid>5401673</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T17:50:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Jopparn</username>
        <id>49559</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Removing vandalism.</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="232" xml:space="preserve">'''Wikispeech''' is a project run by Wikimedia Sverige.
* For a detailed explanation of the project please visit [[m:Wikispeech]].
* For the extension itself, see [[Extension:Wikispeech]].
{{Disambiguation}}

[[Category:Wikispeech]]</text>
      <sha1>iy1kva28xl8108tfg6hn1rcs23oyt4p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/ur</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>545960</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402207</id>
      <parentid>5371513</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22204" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Wikitech:PAWS]] for more details.&lt;/span&gt;''
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;اس دستاویز میں نوٹ بک کے ذریعہ پائی ویکیپیڈیا کے استعمال کا خاکہ پیش کیا گیا ہے، یہ نوٹ بک ویکیمیڈیا لیبز پر ہوسٹ کی گئی ہے جو 'PAWS' (Pywikibot: A Web Shell) استعمال کرتا ہے۔&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PAWS Terminal supports copy and paste in [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Browsers based on Chromium|Chromium-based browsers]] only.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Google Chrome, Opera, Safari and new Microsoft Edge are fine.)&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a different browser, you can try with context menu only (right-click) or you will need to manually type the commands mentioned in this walk-through.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also create a bash file with in content the command and call in terminal with &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All notebooks and terminals in PAWS are subject to termination without notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You are encouraged to run your task on other places (such as [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) if your task lasts for more than hours.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== ویکیمیڈیا کھاتہ بنائیں ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
اس طریقہ کار کی پیروی کرنے کے لیے ویکیمیڈیا منصوبہ پر آپ کا کھاتہ ہونا ضروری ہے۔
&lt;/div&gt;

کھاتہ بن جانے کے بعد https://test.wikipedia.org/ پر جائیں اور اوپر دائیں جانب اپنا نام جانچیں۔

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

== نوٹ بک میں سائن ان ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
ہوسٹ کردہ نوٹ بک شروع کرنے کے لیے https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub پر جائیں۔
&lt;/div&gt;

&quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot; پر کلک کریں، بعد ازاں جب &quot;Use OAuth for Authentication&quot; کی اجازت مانگی جائے تو &quot;Allow&quot; پر کلک کریں۔
پہلی مرتبہ جب آپ PAWS میں رسائی حاصل کریں تو آپ کو ایک سرور بنانا پڑے گا۔
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the green &quot;Start my Server&quot; button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's normal to wait a few minutes for the new server to start up.&lt;/span&gt;

سرور کی تخلیق مکمل ہوتے ہی آپ &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/tree&lt;/nowiki&gt; جیسے کسی ربط پر پہنچ جائیں گے۔

== ٹرمینل شروع کریں ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
نیا تعاملی ٹرمینل شروع کرنے کے لیے،
# [$paws اپنے PAWS کے سرورق] پر جائیں
# دائیں جانب موجود 'New' پر کلک کریں، اور
# 'Terminal' منتخب کریں۔
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
اس کے بعد &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/terminals/1&lt;/nowiki&gt; ربط کے ساتھ ایک نیا دریچہ کھلے گا، جس میں لینکس کا '$' پرامپٹ نظر آئے گا۔
&lt;/div&gt;

یہ ٹرمینل کوئی ایمیولیٹر نہیں ہے۔ یہ حقیقی [[w:Bash (Unix shell)|بیش شیل]] ہے جو [[w:Docker (software)|ڈوکر کنٹینر]] میں واقع حقیقی لینکس تنصیب کے ایک جز کے طور پر نصب ہے، چنانچہ آپ کسی بھی بیش کمانڈ کو استعمال کر سکتے ہیں، نیز لینکس پر نصب شدہ دیگر دستیاب کمانڈز بھی استعمال کیے جا سکتے ہیں۔

کچھ دستیاب کمانڈزدیکھنے کے لیے &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt; کمانڈ استعمال کر سکتے ہیں۔

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Login to the wiki ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will establish your account on the server and allow you to log in from the command line.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;درج ذیل کمانڈ اس بات کی تصدیق کرے گی کہ آپ https://test.wikipedia.org/ میں لاگ ان ہو سکتے ہیں۔ یہ OAuth کا استعمال کرتا ہے، لہذا پاسورڈ درج کرنے کی ضرورت نہیں ہے۔&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can connect pywikibot to a different wiki by creating a file named ''user-config.py'' in your [[w:Home_directory|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; directory]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) and adding ''mylang'' and ''family'' variables:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== تخلیق صفحہ ==

نیا صفحہ بنانے کے لیے ٹرمینل میں درج ذیل کمانڈ درج کریں، اس کمانڈ میں موجود '&lt;username&gt;' کو اپنے صارف نام سے تبدیل کر دیں اور جب آپکی تبدیلیوں کو قبول کرنے کی درخواست کی جائے تو 'Y' دبائیں۔

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

اب آپ ویکی میں ترمیم کر چکے ہیں۔ اپنی تبدیلیوں کو دیکھنے کے لیے اپنے براؤزر میں &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; ربط کھول سکتے ہیں۔

ان کمانڈ لائن اسکرپٹس کے متعلق مزید تفصیلات پڑھنے کے لیے '-help' کمانڈ لائن آپشن استعمال کر سکتے ہیں۔

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== صفحہ لائیں ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Fetching many pages is achieved with the &quot;listpages&quot; command.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To get the contents of the page you created in the previous section, enter the following command:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now if you run &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot; inline&gt;$ ls&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; the saved page should be present.&lt;/span&gt;

== حقیقی اسکرپٹ نمونہ ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When a website used on Wikipedia changes its URL, the links on Wikipedia become outdated, and possible also [[w:WP:Dead links|dead links]] if the website doesn't redirect from the old URLs to the new URLs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) has changed their links, such as moving pages from &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can find the list of usages of the old URL on English Wikipedia at [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updating all those links manually will be very time consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thankfully EB has maintained redirects from their old URLs to the new URLs, so this does not need to be fixed immediately.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For a simpler example, English Wikipedia currently contains links to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; instead of &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; i.e. a 'www.' subdomain is missing in the URL.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are currently 14 cases on English Wikipedia: [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Wikipedia in other language also have this problem.  e.g. there is one case on German Wikipedia: [[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In order to fix those links, we can use Pywikibot {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}} script.  In this demo we will use the '-simulate' argument to avoid writing to the wiki, as there are strict rules about [[w:WP:Bots|automated editing]] of English Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
First, let's list all of the pages which link to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now we check those pages actually have the literal URL in the page; i.e. they are not using a template.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now use replace to add the missing &quot;www.&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In PAWS, and any terminal that supports color, the diff of changes will show the added &quot;www.&quot; in green text color, making it easier to find the proposed changes.
&lt;/div&gt;

== پائی ویکی بوٹ میں ==

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don't write passwords in files of server, the files are public!&lt;/span&gt;}}

اس کے بعد ہم PAWS کی پائیتھون نشست استعمال کریں گے۔

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# اپنے [$paws PAWS سرورق] پر جائیں،
# دائیں جانب موجود 'New' پر کلک کریں، اور
# 'Python 3' منتخب کریں۔
&lt;/div&gt;

اب نیا دریچہ کھل جائے گا۔

خانہ ترمیم میں ذیل میں موجود متن درج کریں اور Cell منیو سے 'Run' منتخب کریں (یا shift+enter دبائیں)

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

نیچے نیا خانہ ترمیم کھل جائے گا۔ APISite object جو https://test.wikipedia.org/ سے مربوط ہو، کو تخلیق کرنے کے لیے درج ذیل متن درج کریں۔

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

اب نئے خانہ ترمیم میں &quot;site&quot; درج کریں اور &quot;Run&quot; پر کلک کریں۔

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

اب ایسا ظاہر ہونا چاہیے

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

صفحہ آبجیکٹ بنائیں:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

موجود ہے یا نہیں اسے جانچیں:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

اب اس طرح ظاہر ہونا چاہیے

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

صفحہ پر موجود متن دکھائیں:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

آبجیکٹ میں موجود متن صفحہ کو تبدیل کریں:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

ویکی میں صفحہ محفوظ کریں:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

اب جواب اس طرح ہوگا:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The interactive Python 3 notebook allows many lines to be run together.  The above could be put into one text box and Run
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The log of your interactive Python session can be saved or downloaded for future reference.
&lt;/div&gt;

== PAWS کے ذریعہ آن لائن دستاویزوں تک رسائی ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Pywikibot documentation may be found at https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/.  It is primarily sourced from [[w:docstring|docstrings]], which can be loaded in the interactive Python 3 notebook using the Python built-in function [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to look at the arguments for the save method above, run either:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== پائی ویکی بوٹ اسکرپٹس میں ترمیم ==

پائی ویکی بوٹ کا کتب خانہ اور اسکرپٹس /srv/paws میں رکھی گئی ہیں اور یہ ریڈ آنلی ہیں۔ پائی ویکی بوٹ کے نصب شدہ کتب خانہ میں PAWS کے ذریعہ ترمیم نہیں کی جا سکتی۔

البتہ ان اسکرپٹس کو PAWS میں پیسٹ کرنے کے بعد ان میں ترمیم کی جا سکتی ہے۔

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
ترمیم شدہ &quot;checkimages.py&quot; چلانے کے لیے
# ٹرمینل میں &quot;cp /srv/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&quot; درج کریں۔
# اپنے [https://tools.wmflabs.org/paws/ PAWS سرورق] میں checkimages.py فائل پر کلک کریں
# کوڈ میں ترمیم کریں اور اپنی ترامیم محفوظ کریں
# ٹرمینل میں &quot;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate&quot; درج کریں۔
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the browser, you can edit the file.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit the code -- for instance, just after the &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; code on line 1775, add a new line 1776 that will print out your name: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the editing interface, use the File menu and click Save to save your modifications.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb PAWS cheatsheet] by one user (e.g. about API and database access)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>jzin6i608lc7tnhrrm1rycd1iad568n</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Installing MediaWiki/29/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>546979</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402871</id>
      <parentid>5381297</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:40:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="106" xml:space="preserve">Do not use $2 if you want to set it up as a [[$3|Short URL]] after running the [[$1|installation script]].</text>
      <sha1>2qxzwo3yv0jhd2mh03uf75q54dfvrgr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/ru</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>547464</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401811</id>
      <parentid>5184893</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/fi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>548873</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403216</id>
      <parentid>2022334</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:53:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="549" xml:space="preserve">* '''TemplateData-mallineohjeistuksen lisääminen''' — Visuaalisessa muokkaimessa on näppärä mallinemuokkaustoiminto, jonka käyttöä on kuvailtu tarkemmin[[$ug|käyttöoppaassa]]. Joidenkin mallineiden kentät on nimetty, ja niillä on käyttöä helpottavat kuvaukset. Joiltakin mallineilta nämä tiedot puuttuvat, sillä toiminto edellyttää jokaiselle mallineelle TemplateData-sivun luomista, joka on mallineen käyttöohje. Jos olet kiinnostunut tästä, tutustu[[$td-tutor|ohjeeseen]] ja [[$td|luetteloon tärkeimmistä mallineista]].</text>
      <sha1>rey7w4xam2qdd0tgi1aqzpa4mjt5026</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/fa</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>549450</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402929</id>
      <parentid>5355651</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="51362" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== نمای کلی ==

=== جابه جایی فایل ===

یک برنامه برای جابه جایی فایل انتخاب کنید:

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
*کپی ایمن با [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] یا [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|پروتوکل انتقال فایل]] (SFTP)
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Using a [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] client.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.
&lt;/div&gt;
* تعدادی روشهایی دیگر لیستی از اینها وجود دارد در [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

===مقدماتی===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

#خواندن الزامات
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
#خواندن متن انتشار
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Back up existing files and the database
&lt;/div&gt;
#استخراج فایل های جدید
#برنامه های افزودنی را ارتقا دهید
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the update script to check the database
&lt;/div&gt;
امتحان به روز شدن
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations
&lt;/div&gt;

بررسی درخواست ها. 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} requires:
&lt;/div&gt;

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One of the following:
&lt;/div&gt;
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are using PostgreSQL, please also read {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more information, please read the {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} and {{ll|Compatibility}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

==خواندن متن انتشار==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== پاک کردن کارهای در انتظار==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Back up existing files and the database ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:''Full instructions: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

== استخراج فایل های جدید==

== استفاده از یک بسته ترفند==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
====خط فرمان====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===دیگر فایل ها===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== استفاده از گیت ===

اگر از {{ll|Download from Git|Git}} استفاده می‌کنید، فایل‌ها را در یک محل خالی استخراج کنید، و پس از آن، همان‌طور که در بخش قبل گفته‌شد، فایلهایی که در گذشته بر روی آن تغییر داده‌اید را در محل جدید کپی کنید.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== استفاده از فایل پج===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Upgrade extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

=== ثبت نام پوست===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

===گسترش ثبت نام===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

این می تواند تبدیل شود به:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

=== سایر متغیر ها ===
بعضی متغییر ها ممکن است کامل وبی تغییر باشند یا تغییر کرده باشند.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== اجرای اسکریپت ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== خط فرمان ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===مرورگر وب===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: ''See also {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===به روز رسانی اش چه قدر سخت است؟===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
===چگونه من می توانم یک یا چند مرحله از یک نسخه خیلی قدیمی  بروزرسانی کنم ؟===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

===آیا ابتدا باید بک آپ گرفت؟===

جواب کوتاه:بله

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

===آیا ویکی من آنلاین می ماند وقتی بروزرسانی می شود

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

===چرا بروزرسانی کنیم؟===
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
*از۱.۵[[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|ویرایش ها می تواند قبل از ذخیره شدن پیش نمایش شود]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
*از ۱.۹ یک [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|دکمه لغو]] در دسترس است
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
*از ۱.۱۳ شما می توانید [[$moving|تغییر نام دهید]] (جابه جا کنید) فایل ها را
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
==همچنین ببینید==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - اگر شما یک بک آپ موفق نداشتید
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>mykgr62vvbigsyi7m5gnt3h7lmdirzu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/32/id</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>549995</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402215</id>
      <parentid>2025751</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:55:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="310" xml:space="preserve">Untuk memperbaiki prana ini, kita bisa mempergunakan skrip Pywikibot yaitu $1. Pada percobaan ini, kami akan mempergunakan argumen '-simulate' untuk menghindari penulisan langsung ke dalam wiki. Hal ini dikarenakan adanya peraturan tegas terkait [[w:WP:Bots|penyuntingan otomatis]] di Wikipedia Bahasa Inggris.</text>
      <sha1>qo1bzsongfy0gewdwlcnnfbssmp2t1b</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/nl</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>550085</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402257</id>
      <parentid>5400749</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11067" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Bijgewerkte informatie is beschikbaar op Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Om uw voorkeuren te kunnen wijzigen moet u eerst zijn ingelogd. Daarna klikt u op het poppetje in de rechterbovenhoek en klikt u op  [[Special:preferences|Voorkeuren]]. Als de interface op een andere taal is ingesteld, staat er waarschijnlijk '''Preferences'''.
U krijgt de sectie met uw Gebruikersprofiel te zien, de pagina begint met een rij met knoppen, de instellingen zijn onderverdeeld op tabbladen met elk van die knoppen krijgt u een deel van de instellingen te zien.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Uw gebruikersnaam. Alleen gebruikers met extra bevoegdheden kunnen uw gebruikersnaam wijzigen, mits de wiki ook de {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}-extensie heeft.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Een lijst met de ‘gebruikersgroepen’ waar u bij hoort.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Op wiki’s van Wikimedia kunt u via deze link externe toepassingen beheren die toegang hebben tot uw account. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Zie de [[Help:OAuth/nl|help van OAuth]].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Het aantal bewerkingen dat je tot nu toe hebt gedaan op de wiki. Niet alle wiki’s laten dit zien.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || Het tijdstip dat je account is geregistreerd.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|Zie onder.]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|Zie onder.]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Tweetrapsauthenticatie instellen.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Wiki-overstijgende voorkeuren instellen (bijvoorbeeld voor alle wiki’s van Wikimedia, zoals Commons en de verschillende taalversies van Wikipedia).
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Om uw wachtwoord te wijzigen, vult u eerst in het bovenste veld uw oude wachtwoord in en daarna tweemaal uw nieuwe wachtwoord.
Als u wilt dat de website uw login onthoudt dan kunt u het veld  ''Aangemeld blijven'' aanvinken.
Deze functie werkt wel met cookies, dus u moet die toestaan en niet verwijderen, anders moet u bij elk bezoek opnieuw inloggen.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Globale account ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
U kunt hier de taal van de website instellen.
Alleen een paar knoppen als 'edit' en 'talk', en wat pagina's in de zijbalk worden hierdoor beïnvloedt.
De meeste tekst op meeste pagina's wordt door deze instelling niet geraakt. Bij vertalingen is het natuurlijk ook afhankelijk wat er door de vertalers is vertaald.

* Taal
* Hoe wilt u beschreven worden? (neutraal, zij, hij)
* Meer taalinstellingen

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Uw huidige handtekening
* Nieuwe handtekening
** Handtekening als wikitekst behandelen

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Indien u ons een e-mailadres gegeven heeft, klik dan op &quot;controleer adres&quot; om deze functies te kunnen gebruiken.  U zult een e-mail ontvangen, als u die opent en op de link klikt dan heeft u uw e-mailadres bevestigt.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| E-mail bevestiging ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || Hierdoor kan een geregistreerde gebruiker u een e-mail sturen met de link {{int|emailuser}} op de zijbalk van uw gebruikerspagina. E-mails worden verzonden met een webinterface, uw e-mailadres wordt niet bekend, behalve als u antwoordt op de e-mail
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Gebruikers die zichzelf met een e-mailadres hebben geregistreerd kunnen u dus een e-mail sturen.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Met deze optie kunt u bepaalde lastige gebruikers uitsluiten van het naar u verzenden van e-mails. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Hier kunt het uiterlijk/vormgeving kiezen, u kunt eerst de skins bekijken (klik op de &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; naast de skin) voordat u er een kiest. Meer informatie: {{ll|Help:Skins}}.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Datumopmaak ===

Het volgende is normaal opgebouwd afhankelijk van uw voorkeuren:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Hier kunt u aangeven hoe afbeeldingen worden getoond. Deze instelling werkt niet als een afbeelding wordt getoond door de hele URL te plakken in de tekst (als dat door de wiki wordt toegestaan).

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Hier kunt u instellen hoe groot een voorvertoning van een afbeelding is. Als u uw schermresolutie weet dan kunt u dit hier een op twee afmetingen kleiner zetten dan uw eigen scherm. Als u een echt langzame verbinding heeft, dan kunt u dit hier vrij klein instellen, zeg 320×240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Hier kunt u de grootte van een miniatuur (thumbnail) instellen.  Dat werkt alleen voor degene waar de auteur geen grootte voor heeft bepaald, een miniatuur wordt NIET groter dan het origineel.
* Media Viewer inschakelen: Op Wikimedia wiki's bepaalt deze instelling (standaard: aan) of de extensie [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About/nl|Media Viewer]] gebruikt moet worden voor een mooiere weergave van afbeeldingen.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Hier kunt u instellen hoe mathematische vergelijkingen beschreven worden met gebruik van de tag {{tag|math|open}}.
Mathematische formules die geladen zijn als afbeelding of geschreven buiten de tag math worden door deze instelling niet beïnvloedt.
De voorkeuren bij math zijn alleen zichtbaar als {{ll|Extension:Math}} is geïnstalleerd.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Dit zijn de instellingen om pagina's te bewerken, inclusief of ze pagina's moeten volgen die u aangemaakt heeft of bewerkt.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Hier kunt u aangeven hoe ver terug u wilt gaan met het  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|volgen van recente wijzigingen]] van pagina's. Er zit wel een maximum aan het aantal dat getoond wordt (zie onder).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Hier kunt u het aantal weer te geven wijzigingen bepalen.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Hiermee kunt u de wijzigingen die als minor (zie {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}) zijn aangebracht verbergen. Enkele gebruikers doen veel kleine wijzigingen na elkaar als ze een sjabloon aanpassen, of als ze wat tikfouten verbeteren. Dit kunt u, voor de huidige sessie, ook doen als u de pagina met recente wijzigingen bekijkt (zie {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Uitgebreide recente wijzigingen maken een lijst mogelijk met wijzigingen per pagina. Hiervoor moet wel JavaScript ingeschakeld zijn. Meer informatie hierover: {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}.
* Toont Wikidata aanpassingen in recente wijzigingen: Per geselecteerd Wikimedia project waar data van [[d:|Wikidata]] van beschikbaar is, kunt u de wijzigingen zien aan Wikidata items verbonden met pagina's van uw wiki, als ook wijzigingen aan de wiki-pagina's zelf. Wie weet kunt u die die vandaal die de wiki lastig valt wel zo vinden.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Dit zijn de instellingen waarmee u de volglijst kunt instellen (Zie {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
De meeste van deze opties zijn ook op de volglijst beschikbaar, maar door ze bij uw voorkeuren in te stellen, kunst het gedrag van de volglijst instellen zonder uw instellingen elke keer in te vullen.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Toont Wikidata aanpassingen in uw volglijst: Per geselecteerd Wikimedia project waar data van [[d:|Wikidata]] van beschikbaar is, kunt u de wijzigingen zien aan Wikidata items verbonden met pagina's van uw wiki, als ook wijzigingen aan de wiki-pagina's zelf. Wie weet kunt u die die vandaal die de wiki lastig valt zo wel vinden.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Volglijst token: Dit token wordt gebruikt om een [[:nl:Really Simple Syndication|RSS feed]] te maken van uw volglijst. Iemand die dit token kent kan uw volglijst zien. In dat geval kunt u het resetten. U moet dan wel de URL van uw feed aanmelding aanpassen zodat het nieuwe token wordt gebruikt.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
De standaardinstellingen voor het zoeken bieden de mogelijkheid om het aantal resultaten en de informatie per resultaat te beperken.
Vink de namespaces aan waar u op wilt zoeken, de eerste keer dat u zoekt.
U kunt dit overschrijven bij elke zoekopdracht, door dan andere namespaces te kiezen.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
Op Wikimedia wiki's, kunt u met de tab '''Bètafuncties''' experimentele functies inschakelen, die functies zijn dus niet algemeen zonder instelling in gebruik en belangrijker, ze zijn mogelijk nog wat minder foutvrij in gebruik.
U kunt dus problemen en bugs ontdekken en ook ontdekken dat een dergelijke functie opeens zonder aankondiging veel beter of heel anders werkt.

Elke functie heeft een tab voor &quot;Overleg&quot; of discussie, als u opmerkingen over of een probleem met die pagina heeft...

Meer informatie over [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|Bèta functies]].

* Automatisch alle bèta-functies inschakelen: Als u dit inschakelt dan worden bèta-functie direct voor u beschikbaar zodra ze uitgebracht worden als Bèta-functie.

== Zie ook ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7ako3obxe7399hyfke3gt3mhwk3dxw0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402303</id>
      <parentid>5402257</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:07:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11030" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Bijgewerkte informatie is beschikbaar op Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Om uw voorkeuren te kunnen wijzigen moet u eerst zijn ingelogd. Daarna klikt u op het poppetje in de rechterbovenhoek en klikt u op  [[Special:preferences|Voorkeuren]]. Als de interface op een andere taal is ingesteld, staat er waarschijnlijk '''Preferences'''.
U krijgt de sectie met uw Gebruikersprofiel te zien, de pagina begint met een rij met knoppen, de instellingen zijn onderverdeeld op tabbladen met elk van die knoppen krijgt u een deel van de instellingen te zien.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Uw gebruikersnaam. Alleen gebruikers met extra bevoegdheden kunnen uw gebruikersnaam wijzigen, mits de wiki ook de {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}-extensie heeft.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Een lijst met de ‘gebruikersgroepen’ waar u bij hoort.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Op wiki’s van Wikimedia kunt u via deze link externe toepassingen beheren die toegang hebben tot uw account. Zie {{ll|Help:OAuth}} voor meer informatie.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Het aantal bewerkingen dat je tot nu toe hebt gedaan op de wiki. Niet alle wiki’s laten dit zien.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || Het tijdstip dat je account is geregistreerd.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|Zie onder.]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|Zie onder.]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Tweetrapsauthenticatie instellen.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Wiki-overstijgende voorkeuren instellen (bijvoorbeeld voor alle wiki’s van Wikimedia, zoals Commons en de verschillende taalversies van Wikipedia).
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Om uw wachtwoord te wijzigen, vult u eerst in het bovenste veld uw oude wachtwoord in en daarna tweemaal uw nieuwe wachtwoord.
Als u wilt dat de website uw login onthoudt dan kunt u het veld  ''Aangemeld blijven'' aanvinken.
Deze functie werkt wel met cookies, dus u moet die toestaan en niet verwijderen, anders moet u bij elk bezoek opnieuw inloggen.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Globale account ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
U kunt hier de taal van de website instellen.
Alleen een paar knoppen als 'edit' en 'talk', en wat pagina's in de zijbalk worden hierdoor beïnvloedt.
De meeste tekst op meeste pagina's wordt door deze instelling niet geraakt. Bij vertalingen is het natuurlijk ook afhankelijk wat er door de vertalers is vertaald.

* Taal
* Hoe wilt u beschreven worden? (neutraal, zij, hij)
* Meer taalinstellingen

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Uw huidige handtekening
* Nieuwe handtekening
** Handtekening als wikitekst behandelen

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Indien u ons een e-mailadres gegeven heeft, klik dan op &quot;controleer adres&quot; om deze functies te kunnen gebruiken.  U zult een e-mail ontvangen, als u die opent en op de link klikt dan heeft u uw e-mailadres bevestigt.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| E-mail bevestiging ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || Hierdoor kan een geregistreerde gebruiker u een e-mail sturen met de link {{int|emailuser}} op de zijbalk van uw gebruikerspagina. E-mails worden verzonden met een webinterface, uw e-mailadres wordt niet bekend, behalve als u antwoordt op de e-mail
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Gebruikers die zichzelf met een e-mailadres hebben geregistreerd kunnen u dus een e-mail sturen.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Met deze optie kunt u bepaalde lastige gebruikers uitsluiten van het naar u verzenden van e-mails. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Hier kunt het uiterlijk/vormgeving kiezen, u kunt eerst de skins bekijken (klik op de &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; naast de skin) voordat u er een kiest. Meer informatie: {{ll|Help:Skins}}.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Datumopmaak ===

Het volgende is normaal opgebouwd afhankelijk van uw voorkeuren:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Hier kunt u aangeven hoe afbeeldingen worden getoond. Deze instelling werkt niet als een afbeelding wordt getoond door de hele URL te plakken in de tekst (als dat door de wiki wordt toegestaan).

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Hier kunt u instellen hoe groot een voorvertoning van een afbeelding is. Als u uw schermresolutie weet dan kunt u dit hier een op twee afmetingen kleiner zetten dan uw eigen scherm. Als u een echt langzame verbinding heeft, dan kunt u dit hier vrij klein instellen, zeg 320×240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Hier kunt u de grootte van een miniatuur (thumbnail) instellen.  Dat werkt alleen voor degene waar de auteur geen grootte voor heeft bepaald, een miniatuur wordt NIET groter dan het origineel.
* Media Viewer inschakelen: Op Wikimedia wiki's bepaalt deze instelling (standaard: aan) of de extensie [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About/nl|Media Viewer]] gebruikt moet worden voor een mooiere weergave van afbeeldingen.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Hier kunt u instellen hoe mathematische vergelijkingen beschreven worden met gebruik van de tag {{tag|math|open}}.
Mathematische formules die geladen zijn als afbeelding of geschreven buiten de tag math worden door deze instelling niet beïnvloedt.
De voorkeuren bij math zijn alleen zichtbaar als {{ll|Extension:Math}} is geïnstalleerd.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Dit zijn de instellingen om pagina's te bewerken, inclusief of ze pagina's moeten volgen die u aangemaakt heeft of bewerkt.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Hier kunt u aangeven hoe ver terug u wilt gaan met het  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|volgen van recente wijzigingen]] van pagina's. Er zit wel een maximum aan het aantal dat getoond wordt (zie onder).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Hier kunt u het aantal weer te geven wijzigingen bepalen.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Hiermee kunt u de wijzigingen die als minor (zie {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}) zijn aangebracht verbergen. Enkele gebruikers doen veel kleine wijzigingen na elkaar als ze een sjabloon aanpassen, of als ze wat tikfouten verbeteren. Dit kunt u, voor de huidige sessie, ook doen als u de pagina met recente wijzigingen bekijkt (zie {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Uitgebreide recente wijzigingen maken een lijst mogelijk met wijzigingen per pagina. Hiervoor moet wel JavaScript ingeschakeld zijn. Meer informatie hierover: {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}.
* Toont Wikidata aanpassingen in recente wijzigingen: Per geselecteerd Wikimedia project waar data van [[d:|Wikidata]] van beschikbaar is, kunt u de wijzigingen zien aan Wikidata items verbonden met pagina's van uw wiki, als ook wijzigingen aan de wiki-pagina's zelf. Wie weet kunt u die die vandaal die de wiki lastig valt wel zo vinden.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Dit zijn de instellingen waarmee u de volglijst kunt instellen (Zie {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
De meeste van deze opties zijn ook op de volglijst beschikbaar, maar door ze bij uw voorkeuren in te stellen, kunst het gedrag van de volglijst instellen zonder uw instellingen elke keer in te vullen.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Toont Wikidata aanpassingen in uw volglijst: Per geselecteerd Wikimedia project waar data van [[d:|Wikidata]] van beschikbaar is, kunt u de wijzigingen zien aan Wikidata items verbonden met pagina's van uw wiki, als ook wijzigingen aan de wiki-pagina's zelf. Wie weet kunt u die die vandaal die de wiki lastig valt zo wel vinden.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Volglijst token: Dit token wordt gebruikt om een [[:nl:Really Simple Syndication|RSS feed]] te maken van uw volglijst. Iemand die dit token kent kan uw volglijst zien. In dat geval kunt u het resetten. U moet dan wel de URL van uw feed aanmelding aanpassen zodat het nieuwe token wordt gebruikt.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
De standaardinstellingen voor het zoeken bieden de mogelijkheid om het aantal resultaten en de informatie per resultaat te beperken.
Vink de namespaces aan waar u op wilt zoeken, de eerste keer dat u zoekt.
U kunt dit overschrijven bij elke zoekopdracht, door dan andere namespaces te kiezen.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
Op Wikimedia wiki's, kunt u met de tab '''Bètafuncties''' experimentele functies inschakelen, die functies zijn dus niet algemeen zonder instelling in gebruik en belangrijker, ze zijn mogelijk nog wat minder foutvrij in gebruik.
U kunt dus problemen en bugs ontdekken en ook ontdekken dat een dergelijke functie opeens zonder aankondiging veel beter of heel anders werkt.

Elke functie heeft een tab voor &quot;Overleg&quot; of discussie, als u opmerkingen over of een probleem met die pagina heeft...

Meer informatie over [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|Bèta functies]].

* Automatisch alle bèta-functies inschakelen: Als u dit inschakelt dan worden bèta-functie direct voor u beschikbaar zodra ze uitgebracht worden als Bèta-functie.

== Zie ook ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>prmukche7txy83483di0hytuvu3p94r</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/tr</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>553548</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403028</id>
      <parentid>4989875</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:53:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7506" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Görsel Düzenleyici]]''' portalına hoş geldiniz. Görsel Düzenleyici (VE), Vikipedi'de değişiklik yapmanın Wikimedia Vakfı tarafından tasarlanmış en iyi yoludur. İnsanların wiki biçimlendirmesini öğrenmek zorunda kalmadan düzenlemelerini sağlar. İnsanların Vikipedi'ye katkıda bulunmasına yardımcı olacağını umuyoruz.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' okuyun.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} Görsel Düzenleyici ile '''sorun bildirin'''].
|-
| Nasıl bağlantı kuracağınızı, resim ekleyip taşıyacağınızı, alıntılar oluşturabileceğinizi, şablon ekleyebileceğinizi, tablolar düzenleyebileceğinizi ve daha fazlasını öğrenin.
|Lütfen '''web tarayıcınızı, bilgisayar işletim sisteminizi ve Wikipedia arayüzünü''' (genellikle Vektör, bazen Monobook) ekleyin.
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Görsel Düzenleyici hakkında ==

Görsel Düzenleyici, Vikipedi'yi düzenlemenin &quot;görsel&quot; bir yoludur. Vikipedi'yi düzenlemek, tarihsel olarak, bir sayfada küçük değişiklikler yapmak için bile oldukça karmaşık bir biçimlendirme dili olan wiki biçimlendirmesini öğrenmelerini gerektirmiştir. 2001'de bu kabul edilebilirdi; 2015 yılında, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|katılımcıları uzaklaştırıyor]]. Umarız, Görsel Düzenleyici'nin mevcut katılımcılara faydalı olacağını ve yeni kullanıcıları daha iyi karşılayacağını umarız. 

Görsel Düzenleyici, 2012'nin ortalarından bu yana MediaWiki.org'da ve Aralık 2012'den beri İngilizce dilinde Vikipedie'de, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ Nisan 2013'ten bu yana 14 dilde] ve [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ hemen hemen bütün diğer diller] Haziran 2013’ün başından beri. Temmuz 2015’ten itibaren varsayılan olarak Vikipedi’lerin %75’inden daha fazla oturum açmış ve çıkış yapmış editörlere sunuluyordu.
2015 yılının sonlarında varsayılan olarak [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|kalan dillerin]] çoğunda varsayılan olarak kullanılabilir olmasını bekliyoruz.
Kasım 2014'ün sonundan bu yana, Vikisözlük ve Vikikaynak hariç tüm WMF wikilerinde [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Özelliği]] bir katılım olarak da mevcut.

WMF vikilerine odaklanan bir [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|çok dilli bülteni]] yayımlıyoruz.

== Görsel Düzenleyici kullanımı ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Düzenlemek için Görsel Düzenleyici kullanmakla ilgileniyorsanız, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|rehber yapmak için]] ve ayrıca [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|ortak klavye kısayollarının listesi]] vardır.

VisualEditor'un bazı güncel hataları ve sınırlamaları vardır. Bir sorunla karşılaşırsanız, lütfen [[VisualEditor/Feedback|geri bildirim sayfasında bildirin]] ve tereddüt etmeyin. Mevcut kısıtlamalar şunları içerir:

* '''Yüklemesi yavaş''' — Uzun, karmaşık sayfaların Görsel Düzenleyici'ye yüklenmesi biraz zaman alacaktır. Gelecekte, yazılım çok daha hızlı olacak ve daha büyük sayfaların yüklenmesine izin verecektir.
* '''Eksik düzenleme''' - Karmaşık biçimlendirmenin bazı öğeleri, içeriğini görüntülemenizi ve düzenlemenizi sağlar, ancak kullanıcıların yapılarını düzenlemelerine veya tanım listeleri gibi yeni girdiler eklemelerine izin vermez. Bu alana özellik eklemek önceliklerimizden biridir.
* '''Çoğu içerik sayfası, sayfaları tartışma''' — Görsel Düzenleyici yalnızca bazı ad alanları için etkindir. Çoğu Vikipediler'de Görsel Düzenleyici makalelerde, Kullanıcı:, Dosya:, Yardım: ve Kategori: sayfalarda kullanılabilir. Görsel Düzenleyici şu anda Vikipedi'de mevcut değil: sayfalar veya tartışma sayfaları.

Sayfayı kaydetmeden önce kullanıcıların &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; ve [[VisualEditor/Feedback|karşılaştıkları herhangi bir sorunu bildirim]] tavsiye etmelerini öneririz.

== Nasıl yardım edilir ==

Görsel Düzenleyici'nin olabildiğince iyi olması için yardıma ihtiyacımız olan çok şey var. Açıkçası, büyük bir alan yazılımı kullanıyor, hataları bulmak ve [[VisualEditor/Feedback|rapor edinme]], fakat başka birçok görev de var. Bunlar şunları içerir:

* '''Yardım sayfaları güncelleme''' — Tüm projelerimizde, yeni kullanıcıların katkıda bulunmasını kolaylaştıracak yardım sayfaları bulunur. Ne yazık ki, hepsi biçimlendirme düzenleyicisi etrafında inşa edilmiştir ve Görsel Düzenleyici geliştikçe ekran görüntüleri ve öğreticilerin tümü güncelliğini yitirecektir. İnsanların [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Görsel Düzenleyiciyi kullanma eğitimimize]] dayanarak [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|yardım sayfalarını güncelleyebilmeleri]] çok yararlı olurdu.
* '''Şablonlara TemplateData ekleme''' — Görsel Düzenleyici, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|yardım sayfamızda]] daha ayrıntılı olarak açıklanan güzel bir şablon düzenleyiciye sahiptir. Vikipedi'de kullanıp kullanmadığınızı göreceğiniz gibi, bazı şablonlarda kullanımı kolaylaştıran adlandırılmış parametreler ve güzel açıklamalar vardır. Diğerleri yapmaz. Bunun nedeni, bu özelliğin çalışması için şablonların &quot;TemplateData&quot;ya ihtiyaç duymasıdır. TemplateData eklemekle ilgileniyorsanız, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|bunu yapmak için bir kılavuz]] ile birlikte [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|eklenecek en önemli şablonların listesi]] var.
* '''Topluluğunuza yardım edin''' — Görsel düzenleyiciyle düzenleme deneyimini optimize etmek için [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|yerel topluluğunuza yardımcı olmanın yararlı yollarının listesine]] bakın.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Yeni kullanıcılara yardım edin''' — Görsel Düzenleyici lansmanı başarılı olursa, alıştığımızdan çok daha fazla yeni kullanıcımız olacak ve düzenleme daha kolay olsa da, toplulukla nasıl etkileşim kuracağımızı bulmak yine de zor olacak. Bu yeni gelenlerin Vikipedi'ye alışmalarına yardımcı olmak için lütfen [[$new-users|yardım masasında veya IRC yardım kanalında]] biraz zaman geçirin.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ayrıca bakınız ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - vikiniz ve editör arkadaşlarınız için düzenleme deneyimini optimize etmeye ilişkin bir kontrol listesi.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - sizin gibi diğer Wikimedialılar görsel düzenleyici ile ilgili işler için yardım alın ve yardım teklif edin.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - görsel düzenleyicide tamamen yeni olan topluluklar için eski bir rehber.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>f7yjjbmfstv1ksal7rt4ruajwkayy68</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403192</id>
      <parentid>5403028</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:44:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7504" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Görsel Düzenleyici]]''' portalına hoş geldiniz. Görsel Düzenleyici (VE), Vikipedi'de değişiklik yapmanın Wikimedia Vakfı tarafından tasarlanmış en iyi yoludur. İnsanların wiki biçimlendirmesini öğrenmek zorunda kalmadan düzenlemelerini sağlar. İnsanların Vikipedi'ye katkıda bulunmasına yardımcı olacağını umuyoruz.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}''' okuyun.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} Görsel Düzenleyici ile '''sorun bildirin'''].
|-
| Nasıl bağlantı kuracağınızı, resim ekleyip taşıyacağınızı, alıntılar oluşturabileceğinizi, şablon ekleyebileceğinizi, tablolar düzenleyebileceğinizi ve daha fazlasını öğrenin.
|Lütfen '''web tarayıcınızı, bilgisayar işletim sisteminizi ve Wikipedia arayüzünü''' (genellikle Vektör, bazen Monobook) ekleyin.
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Görsel Düzenleyici hakkında ==

Görsel Düzenleyici, Vikipedi'yi düzenlemenin &quot;görsel&quot; bir yoludur. Vikipedi'yi düzenlemek, tarihsel olarak, bir sayfada küçük değişiklikler yapmak için bile oldukça karmaşık bir biçimlendirme dili olan wiki biçimlendirmesini öğrenmelerini gerektirmiştir. 2001'de bu kabul edilebilirdi; 2015 yılında, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|katılımcıları uzaklaştırıyor]]. Umarız, Görsel Düzenleyici'nin mevcut katılımcılara faydalı olacağını ve yeni kullanıcıları daha iyi karşılayacağını umarız. 

Görsel Düzenleyici, 2012'nin ortalarından bu yana MediaWiki.org'da ve Aralık 2012'den beri İngilizce dilinde Vikipedie'de, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ Nisan 2013'ten bu yana 14 dilde] ve [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ hemen hemen bütün diğer diller] Haziran 2013’ün başından beri. Temmuz 2015’ten itibaren varsayılan olarak Vikipedi’lerin %75’inden daha fazla oturum açmış ve çıkış yapmış editörlere sunuluyordu.
2015 yılının sonlarında varsayılan olarak [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|kalan dillerin]] çoğunda varsayılan olarak kullanılabilir olmasını bekliyoruz.
Kasım 2014'ün sonundan bu yana, Vikisözlük ve Vikikaynak hariç tüm WMF wikilerinde [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|Beta Özelliği]] bir katılım olarak da mevcut.

WMF vikilerine odaklanan bir [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|çok dilli bülteni]] yayımlıyoruz.

== Görsel Düzenleyici kullanımı ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Düzenlemek için Görsel Düzenleyici kullanmakla ilgileniyorsanız, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|rehber yapmak için]] ve ayrıca [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|ortak klavye kısayollarının listesi]] vardır.

VisualEditor'un bazı güncel hataları ve sınırlamaları vardır. Bir sorunla karşılaşırsanız, lütfen [[VisualEditor/Feedback|geri bildirim sayfasında bildirin]] ve tereddüt etmeyin. Mevcut kısıtlamalar şunları içerir:

* '''Yüklemesi yavaş''' — Uzun, karmaşık sayfaların Görsel Düzenleyici'ye yüklenmesi biraz zaman alacaktır. Gelecekte, yazılım çok daha hızlı olacak ve daha büyük sayfaların yüklenmesine izin verecektir.
* '''Eksik düzenleme''' - Karmaşık biçimlendirmenin bazı öğeleri, içeriğini görüntülemenizi ve düzenlemenizi sağlar, ancak kullanıcıların yapılarını düzenlemelerine veya tanım listeleri gibi yeni girdiler eklemelerine izin vermez. Bu alana özellik eklemek önceliklerimizden biridir.
* '''Çoğu içerik sayfası, sayfaları tartışma''' — Görsel Düzenleyici yalnızca bazı ad alanları için etkindir. Çoğu Vikipediler'de Görsel Düzenleyici makalelerde, Kullanıcı:, Dosya:, Yardım: ve Kategori: sayfalarda kullanılabilir. Görsel Düzenleyici şu anda Vikipedi'de mevcut değil: sayfalar veya tartışma sayfaları.

Sayfayı kaydetmeden önce kullanıcıların &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; ve [[VisualEditor/Feedback|karşılaştıkları herhangi bir sorunu bildirim]] tavsiye etmelerini öneririz.

== Nasıl yardım edilir ==

Görsel Düzenleyici'nin olabildiğince iyi olması için yardıma ihtiyacımız olan çok şey var. Açıkçası, büyük bir alan yazılımı kullanıyor, hataları bulmak ve [[VisualEditor/Feedback|rapor edinme]], fakat başka birçok görev de var. Bunlar şunları içerir:

* '''Yardım sayfaları güncelleme''' — Tüm projelerimizde, yeni kullanıcıların katkıda bulunmasını kolaylaştıracak yardım sayfaları bulunur. Ne yazık ki, hepsi biçimlendirme düzenleyicisi etrafında inşa edilmiştir ve Görsel Düzenleyici geliştikçe ekran görüntüleri ve öğreticilerin tümü güncelliğini yitirecektir. İnsanların [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|Görsel Düzenleyiciyi kullanma eğitimimize]] dayanarak [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|yardım sayfalarını güncelleyebilmeleri]] çok yararlı olurdu.
* '''Şablonlara TemplateData ekleme''' — Görsel Düzenleyici, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|yardım sayfamızda]] daha ayrıntılı olarak açıklanan güzel bir şablon düzenleyiciye sahiptir. Vikipedi'de kullanıp kullanmadığınızı göreceğiniz gibi, bazı şablonlarda kullanımı kolaylaştıran adlandırılmış parametreler ve güzel açıklamalar vardır. Diğerleri yapmaz. Bunun nedeni, bu özelliğin çalışması için şablonların &quot;TemplateData&quot;ya ihtiyaç duymasıdır. TemplateData eklemekle ilgileniyorsanız, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|bunu yapmak için bir kılavuz]] ile birlikte [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|eklenecek en önemli şablonların listesi]] var.
* '''Topluluğunuza yardım edin''' — Görsel düzenleyiciyle düzenleme deneyimini optimize etmek için [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|yerel topluluğunuza yardımcı olmanın yararlı yollarının listesine]] bakın.
* '''Yeni kullanıcılara yardım edin''' — Görsel Düzenleyici lansmanı başarılı olursa, alıştığımızdan çok daha fazla yeni kullanıcımız olacak ve düzenleme daha kolay olsa da, toplulukla nasıl etkileşim kuracağımızı bulmak yine de zor olacak. Bu yeni gelenlerin Vikipedi'ye alışmalarına yardımcı olmak için lütfen [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|yardım masasında veya IRC yardım kanalında]] biraz zaman geçirin.

== Ayrıca bakınız ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - vikiniz ve editör arkadaşlarınız için düzenleme deneyimini optimize etmeye ilişkin bir kontrol listesi.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - sizin gibi diğer Wikimedialılar görsel düzenleyici ile ilgili işler için yardım alın ve yardım teklif edin.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - görsel düzenleyicide tamamen yeni olan topluluklar için eski bir rehber.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>i8wc7ekqtzzo3aaaoocqc9oqngmksrg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/zh</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>555690</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401818</id>
      <parentid>5184899</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/32/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>558616</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402211</id>
      <parentid>2053820</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:55:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="283" xml:space="preserve">Um diese Links zu reparieren, können wir das Pywikibot-$1-Skript verwenden. In dieser Demonstration werden wir das &quot;-simulate&quot;-Argument verwenden, um nicht das Wiki zu bearbeiten, da es strenge Regeln für das [[:w:WP:Bots|automatisierte Bearbeiten]] beim englischen Wikipedia gibt.</text>
      <sha1>7vjfogukrynt6m9nxd1vwgkoyxkglox</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/ru</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>561919</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402205</id>
      <parentid>5371511</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24267" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''См. [[Wikitech:PAWS]] для более детальной информации.''
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Этот документ обеспечивает быстрый интерактивный обзор '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' с использованием ''блокнота'' размещенного в лабораторной среде Викимедиа используя [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''Pywikibot A Web Shell''')]].&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=Заметьте, что терминал PAWS поддерживает копирование и вставку только в [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Other browsers based on Chromium|основанные на Chromium браузеры]]. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;(Google Chrome, Opera и Safari подойдут).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Если вы используете другой браузер, вам надо вручную ввести команды из этого списка.&lt;/span&gt; Вы также можете создать bash-файл с содержимым команды и вызвать его уже в терминале с помощью &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.}}

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All notebooks and terminals in PAWS are subject to termination without notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You are encouraged to run your task on other places (such as [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) if your task lasts for more than hours.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Создание пользователя Викимедиа ==

Для прохождения регистрации вам нужен только аккаунт на Википедии/Викимедии. Используйте [[Special:CreateAccount]], чтобы создать его.

После того как вы создали аккаунт, пожалуйста, посетите https://test.wikipedia.org/ и проверьте, что Ваш логин появился в верхнем правом углу (это работает после [[phabricator:T120327|T120327]]).

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

== Регистрация в блокноте PAWS ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Для запуска блокнота, перейдите на https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub
&lt;/div&gt;

Нажмите кнопку &quot;Вход в Медивавики&quot; и нажмите кнопку &quot;Разрешить&quot;, когда появится запрос &quot;Использовать OAuth для аутентификации&quot;.
При Вашем первом входе в PAWS, Вы должны создать сервер.
Нажмите на зелёную кнопку с надписью &quot;Запустить мой сервер&quot;.
Вполне нормально подождать несколько минут для запуска сервера.

Как только это будет завершено, Вы будете перенаправлены на URL такого вида &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/tree&lt;/nowiki&gt;

== Запуск терминала ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Для запуска нового интерактивного терминала,
# Перейдите на [$paws Домашнюю станицу PAWS]
# Щёлкните 'New' справа, и
# Выберете 'Terminal'.
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
При этом откроется новое окно с URL &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/terminals/1&lt;/nowiki&gt;, с приглашением Linux '$'.
&lt;/div&gt;

Этот терминал - не эмулятор. Это настоящая [[w:Bash (Unix shell)|оболочка bash]], которая является частью Linux установленной в [[w:Docker (software)|докер-контейнере]], поэтому Вы можете использовать любые bash-команды, а также использовать любые команды, доступные в Linux, который был установлен.

Чтобы увидеть некоторые из доступных команд, используйте &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== Вход в вики ==
Это установит ваш аккаунт на сервере и позволит вам войти в систему из командной строки.
Следующая команда должна подтвердить, что вы можете войти в testwiki. Она использует технологию OAuth, поэтому нет нужды вводить пароль.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Вы можете присоединить pywikibot к другой вики, создав файл, названный &quot;user-config.py&quot; в своей [[w:Home_directory|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; директории]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) и добавляя переменные ''mylang'' и ''family''

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Создание страницы ==

Чтобы создать страницу, введите следующую команду в терминале, заменив '&lt;имя_пользователя&gt;' с вашим именем пользователя, и нажав клавишу &quot;Y&quot;, когда будет предложено подтвердить изменения:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

После редактирования Вики. Вы можете посмотреть изменения, открыв &lt;в nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;имя пользователя&gt;&lt;/в nowiki&gt; в вашем браузере.

Вы можете узнать больше о каждом из этих сценариев командной строки с '-help' опции командной строки.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Выборка страниц ==

Выбор нескольких страниц осуществляется командой &quot;listpages&quot;.

Чтобы получить содержимое страницы, которую Вы создали в предыдущем разделе, введите следующую команду:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Теперь если зайти на [$pawshome Список файлов PAWS], там должны присутствовать сохраненные страницы .&lt;/span&gt;

== Пример скрипта ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Когда вебсайт, на который ссылается Википедия меняет URL, ссылки на Википедии становятся устаревшими, а возможно и [[w:WP:Dead links|мертвыми]] в случае отсутствия перенаправления со старых URL на новые. Как пример, Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) сменила ссылки, переместив страницы с &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; на &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Вы можете найти список использований старых URL на Английской Википедии по https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media. Обновление всех ссылок вручную заняло бы много времени. Спасибо EB за перенаправление старых URL на новые, нам не придется исправлять все немедленно.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) has changed their links, such as moving pages from &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can find the list of usages of the old URL on English Wikipedia at [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updating all those links manually will be very time consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thankfully EB has maintained redirects from their old URLs to the new URLs, so this does not need to be fixed immediately.&lt;/span&gt;

Простой пример: Английская Википедия содержит ссылки на  &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; вместо &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; то есть в URL пропущен поддомен 'www.'.

В настоящее время существует 14 возможных случаев в английской Википедии: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

В Википедии на других языках тоже есть эта проблема. Например, есть один случай в немецкой Википедии: https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Для того, чтобы исправить эти ссылки, мы можем использовать Pywikibot [[Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py/replace.py]] скрипт. В этой демонстрации мы будем использовать аргумент '-simulate', чтобы не писать в вики, так как существуют строгие правила об [[w:WP:Bots|автоматическом редактированим]] в английской Википедии.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Сначала получите список всех страниц которые ссылаются на
&lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Сейчас мы проверяем что эти страницы на самом деле имеют буквенный URL - адрес страницы; т. е. они не используют шаблон.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Теперь используйте замену, чтобы добавить недостающие буквы &quot;www.&quot;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

В PAWS, и любой терминал, который поддерживает цвет, разница изменений покажет добавленные буквы &quot;www.&quot; зеленым цветом, что позволит легче найти предлагаемые изменения.

== Внутри Pywikibot ==

{{Warning|1=Не записывайте свои пароли в файлах на сервере, ведь файлы публичные!}}

Далее мы будем использовать сессию PAWS Python.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# Перейдите на Вашу [$paws Домашнюю страницу PAWS],
# Щёлкните 'New' с правой стороны, и
# Выберете 'Python 3'.
&lt;/div&gt;

При этом откроется новое окно.

В текстовом поле введите следующее и в ячейке меню выберите &quot;Выполнить(Run)&quot; (или нажмите клавиши Shift+ввод, чтобы запустить).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Новое текстовое поле будет отображаться ниже. Выполните следующую команду для создания APISite объекта подключенного к https://test.wikipedia.org/:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Наберите &quot;site&quot;, введя его в новое текстовое поле и выберете &quot;запустить(Run)&quot;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Он должен показать

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

Создайте страницу объекта:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Проверьте её существование, запустив:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Нужно вывести

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

Показать текст на странице:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Изменить текст страницы в объект:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Сохраните страницу в вики:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ответ должен быть:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Интерактивный блокнот Python 3 позволяет нескольким строкам выполнятся параллельно. Вышесказанное может быть введено в одно текстовое поле и запущено

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Лог интерактивной сессии Python может быть сохранён или загружен в будущем.

== Доступ к онлайн документации по PAWS ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Документация Pywikibot может быть найдена на https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/index.html. Она созадется из [[w:docstring|docstrings]], и может быть загружена в интерактивной консоли Python 3 используя встроенные функции Python [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].
&lt;/div&gt;

Например, чтобы посмотреть на аргументы для метода сохранённого выше, либо:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

или

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Редактирование скрипта Pywikibot ==

В Pywikibot библиотеки и скрипты находятся в /srv/paws, и доступны только для чтения. Установленная Pywikibot-библиотека не может быть изменена в PAWS.

Скрипты могут быть изменены после их копирования в Домашнюю страницу PAWS.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Для запуска изменённого &quot;checkimages.py&quot;
# В терминале, введите &quot;cp /srv/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&quot;
# Щёлкните по файлу checkimages.py в Вашей [$paws Домашней странице PAWS]
# Исправьте код и сохраните Ваши изменения
# В терминале, введите &quot;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the browser, you can edit the file.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit the code -- for instance, just after the &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; code on line 1775, add a new line 1776 that will print out your name: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the editing interface, use the File menu and click Save to save your modifications.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== См. также ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* [http://paws-public.wmflabs.org/paws-public/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb шпаргалка по PAWS] от одного пользователя (например об API и доступе к базе данных)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>fvup4v40tzhfzvutplayfa9myk4eh0k</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/el</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>564771</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402194</id>
      <parentid>5371501</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="21819" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Wikitech:PAWS]] for more details.&lt;/span&gt;''
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Το έγγραφο αυτό παρέχει μια γρήγορη διαδραστική περίληψη του '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' με τη χρήση ενός  ''notebook'' που φιλοξενείται στο περιβάλλον  Wikimedia labs χρησιμοποιώντας [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''Pywikibot: A Web Shell''')]].&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PAWS Terminal supports copy and paste in [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Browsers based on Chromium|Chromium-based browsers]] only.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Google Chrome, Opera, Safari and new Microsoft Edge are fine.)&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a different browser, you can try with context menu only (right-click) or you will need to manually type the commands mentioned in this walk-through.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also create a bash file with in content the command and call in terminal with &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All notebooks and terminals in PAWS are subject to termination without notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You are encouraged to run your task on other places (such as [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) if your task lasts for more than hours.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Δημιουργία λογαριασμού στο Wikimedia ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To follow this walk-through, you only need a Wikipedia/Wikimedia account. Use [[Special:CreateAccount]] to create one.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once you have created an account, please visit https://test.wikipedia.org/ and check that your username appears in the top right corner &lt;small&gt;(this works around {{task|T120327}})&lt;/small&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Sign into a notebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To start a hosted notebook, go to https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot;, and then click &quot;Allow&quot; when asked to approve &quot;Use OAuth for Authentication&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first time you access PAWS, you need to create a server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the green &quot;Start my Server&quot; button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's normal to wait a few minutes for the new server to start up.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once that is completed, you will be redirected to a URL like &lt;nowiki&gt;https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/user/&lt;username&gt;/lab&lt;/nowiki&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Start a terminal ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To start a new interactive terminal,
# Go to your [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home]
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will open a new window with a Linux '$' prompt.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This terminal is not an emulator.  It is a real [[w:Bash (Unix shell)|bash shell]], as part of a real Linux installation sitting on a [[w:Docker (software)|Docker container]], so you can use any bash command, and use any commands available on Linux that have been installed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To see some of the commands available, use &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Login to the wiki ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will establish your account on the server and allow you to log in from the command line.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The following command should confirm that you can log into the testwiki. It uses OAuth, so there is no need to enter a password.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can connect pywikibot to a different wiki by creating a file named ''user-config.py'' in your [[w:Home_directory|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; directory]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) and adding ''mylang'' and ''family'' variables:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Create a page ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To create a page, enter the following command in the terminal, replacing '&amp;lt;username&gt;' with your username, and pressing 'Y' when prompted to accept your changes:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You have edited the wiki.  View your changes by opening &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your web browser.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can read more about each of these command line scripts with the '-help' command line option.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Fetch a page ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Fetching many pages is achieved with the &quot;listpages&quot; command.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To get the contents of the page you created in the previous section, enter the following command:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now if you run &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot; inline&gt;$ ls&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; the saved page should be present.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== A real script example ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When a website used on Wikipedia changes its URL, the links on Wikipedia become outdated, and possible also [[w:WP:Dead links|dead links]] if the website doesn't redirect from the old URLs to the new URLs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) has changed their links, such as moving pages from &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can find the list of usages of the old URL on English Wikipedia at [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updating all those links manually will be very time consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thankfully EB has maintained redirects from their old URLs to the new URLs, so this does not need to be fixed immediately.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For a simpler example, English Wikipedia currently contains links to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; instead of &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; i.e. a 'www.' subdomain is missing in the URL.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are currently 14 cases on English Wikipedia: [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Wikipedia in other language also have this problem.  e.g. there is one case on German Wikipedia: [[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In order to fix those links, we can use Pywikibot {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}} script.  In this demo we will use the '-simulate' argument to avoid writing to the wiki, as there are strict rules about [[w:WP:Bots|automated editing]] of English Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
First, let's list all of the pages which link to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now we check those pages actually have the literal URL in the page; i.e. they are not using a template.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now use replace to add the missing &quot;www.&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In PAWS, and any terminal that supports color, the diff of changes will show the added &quot;www.&quot; in green text color, making it easier to find the proposed changes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Inside Pywikibot ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don't write passwords in files of server, the files are public!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Next we will use the PAWS Python session.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to your [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home PAWS home],
# click 'New' on the right hand side, and
# select 'Python 3'.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will open a new window.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the text box, enter the following and in the Cell menu select 'Run' (or pressing shift+enter to run).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A new text box will appear below.  Run the following to create an APISite object connected to https://test.wikipedia.org/:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Describe &quot;site&quot; by entering it into the new text box and selecting &quot;Run&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It should show
&lt;/div&gt;

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Create a page object:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check it exists by running:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It should output
&lt;/div&gt;

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Show the text on the page:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Change the page text in the object:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Save the page to the wiki:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The response should be:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The interactive Python 3 notebook allows many lines to be run together.  The above could be put into one text box and Run
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The log of your interactive Python session can be saved or downloaded for future reference.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Accessing online documentation in PAWS ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Pywikibot documentation may be found at https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/.  It is primarily sourced from [[w:docstring|docstrings]], which can be loaded in the interactive Python 3 notebook using the Python built-in function [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to look at the arguments for the save method above, run either:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Editing Pywikibot scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Pywikibot library and scripts are located in /srv/paws, and are read-only.  The installed Pywikibot library cannot be modified in PAWS.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Scripts may be modified after copying them into your PAWS home.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to run a modified &quot;checkimages.py&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the browser, you can edit the file.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit the code -- for instance, just after the &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; code on line 1775, add a new line 1776 that will print out your name: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the editing interface, use the File menu and click Save to save your modifications.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb PAWS cheatsheet] by one user (e.g. about API and database access)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>j6bbo7faaqghtplu97h3urdoq41gu39</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/en</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>566954</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402195</id>
      <parentid>5371500</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16951" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''See [[Wikitech:PAWS]] for more details.''
This document provides a quick interactive overview of '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' using a ''notebook'' hosted on the [[wikitech:Help:Cloud Services Introduction|Wikimedia Cloud Services]] environment using [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: A Web Shell''')]].

{{note|1=PAWS Terminal supports copy and paste in [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Browsers based on Chromium|Chromium-based browsers]] only. (Google Chrome, Opera, Safari and new Microsoft Edge are fine.) If you use a different browser, you can try with context menu only (right-click) or you will need to manually type the commands mentioned in this walk-through. You can also create a bash file with in content the command and call in terminal with &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.}}

{{Warning|1=All notebooks and terminals in PAWS are subject to termination without notice. You are encouraged to run your task on other places (such as [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) if your task lasts for more than hours.}}

== Create a Wikimedia account ==

To follow this walk-through, you only need a Wikipedia/Wikimedia account. Use [[Special:CreateAccount]] to create one.

Once you have created an account, please visit https://test.wikipedia.org/ and check that your username appears in the top right corner &lt;small&gt;(this works around {{task|T120327}})&lt;/small&gt;.

If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.
And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).

== Sign into a notebook ==

To start a hosted notebook, go to https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub

Click &quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot;, and then click &quot;Allow&quot; when asked to approve &quot;Use OAuth for Authentication&quot;.
The first time you access PAWS, you need to create a server.
Click the green &quot;Start my Server&quot; button.
It's normal to wait a few minutes for the new server to start up.

Once that is completed, you will be redirected to a URL like &lt;nowiki&gt;https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/user/&lt;username&gt;/lab&lt;/nowiki&gt;

== Start a terminal ==

To start a new interactive terminal,
# Go to your [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home]
# click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal

This will open a new window with a Linux '$' prompt.

This terminal is not an emulator.  It is a real [[w:Bash (Unix shell)|bash shell]], as part of a real Linux installation sitting on a [[w:Docker (software)|Docker container]], so you can use any bash command, and use any commands available on Linux that have been installed.

To see some of the commands available, use &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== Login to the wiki ==
This will establish your account on the server and allow you to log in from the command line.
The following command should confirm that you can log into the testwiki. It uses OAuth, so there is no need to enter a password.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

You can connect pywikibot to a different wiki by creating a file named ''user-config.py'' in your [[w:Home_directory|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; directory]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) and adding ''mylang'' and ''family'' variables:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Create a page ==

To create a page, enter the following command in the terminal, replacing '&amp;lt;username&gt;' with your username, and pressing 'Y' when prompted to accept your changes:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

You have edited the wiki.  View your changes by opening &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your web browser.

You can read more about each of these command line scripts with the '-help' command line option.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Fetch a page ==

Fetching many pages is achieved with the &quot;listpages&quot; command.

To get the contents of the page you created in the previous section, enter the following command:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Now if you run &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot; inline&gt;$ ls&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; the saved page should be present.

== A real script example ==
When a website used on Wikipedia changes its URL, the links on Wikipedia become outdated, and possible also [[w:WP:Dead links|dead links]] if the website doesn't redirect from the old URLs to the new URLs.
For example, Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) has changed their links, such as moving pages from &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
You can find the list of usages of the old URL on English Wikipedia at [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].
Updating all those links manually will be very time consuming.
Thankfully EB has maintained redirects from their old URLs to the new URLs, so this does not need to be fixed immediately.

For a simpler example, English Wikipedia currently contains links to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; instead of &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; i.e. a 'www.' subdomain is missing in the URL.

There are currently 14 cases on English Wikipedia: [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]

Wikipedia in other language also have this problem.  e.g. there is one case on German Wikipedia: [[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]

In order to fix those links, we can use Pywikibot {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}} script.  In this demo we will use the '-simulate' argument to avoid writing to the wiki, as there are strict rules about [[w:WP:Bots|automated editing]] of English Wikipedia.

First, let's list all of the pages which link to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Now we check those pages actually have the literal URL in the page; i.e. they are not using a template.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Now use replace to add the missing &quot;www.&quot;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In PAWS, and any terminal that supports color, the diff of changes will show the added &quot;www.&quot; in green text color, making it easier to find the proposed changes.

== Inside Pywikibot ==

{{Warning|1=Don't write passwords in files of server, the files are public!}}

Next we will use the PAWS Python session.

# Go to your [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home PAWS home],
# click 'New' on the right hand side, and
# select 'Python 3'.

This will open a new window.

In the text box, enter the following and in the Cell menu select 'Run' (or pressing shift+enter to run).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

A new text box will appear below.  Run the following to create an APISite object connected to https://test.wikipedia.org/:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Describe &quot;site&quot; by entering it into the new text box and selecting &quot;Run&quot;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

It should show

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

Create a page object:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Check it exists by running:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

It should output

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

Show the text on the page:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Change the page text in the object:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Save the page to the wiki:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

The response should be:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

The interactive Python 3 notebook allows many lines to be run together.  The above could be put into one text box and Run

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

The log of your interactive Python session can be saved or downloaded for future reference.

== Accessing online documentation in PAWS ==

Pywikibot documentation may be found at https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/.  It is primarily sourced from [[w:docstring|docstrings]], which can be loaded in the interactive Python 3 notebook using the Python built-in function [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].

For example, to look at the arguments for the save method above, run either:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

or

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Editing Pywikibot scripts ==

The Pywikibot library and scripts are located in /srv/paws, and are read-only.  The installed Pywikibot library cannot be modified in PAWS.

Scripts may be modified after copying them into your PAWS home.

For example, to run a modified &quot;checkimages.py&quot;:

# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
# In the browser, you can edit the file. Edit the code -- for instance, just after the &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; code on line 1775, add a new line 1776 that will print out your name: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;
# In the editing interface, use the File menu and click Save to save your modifications.
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== See also ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb PAWS cheatsheet] by one user (e.g. about API and database access)
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>fhh03xkw6vse3oartuol3lh5sxtmtfk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/ro</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>567616</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401810</id>
      <parentid>5184891</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Tables/pl</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>570274</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402909</id>
      <parentid>5252542</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:32:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="35097" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
:&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Jeżeli chodziło Ci o strukturę tabel bazy danych MediaWiki, zobacz {{ll|Manual:Database layout}}&lt;/span&gt;

Na stronach wiki jest możliwość tworzenia '''tabel'''. 
Ogólną zasadę jest unikanie tabel, dopóki nie jest to konieczne. 
Kod tworzący tabele często utrudnia edytowanie strony.&lt;ref&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Tabele można tworzyć z wykorzystaniem elementów tabel kodu XHTML lub za pomocą formatowania wiki do definiowania tabel.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Elementy dla tabel w XHTML i ich użycie jest dobrze opisane na różnych stronach internetowych, więc nie będzie tutaj omówione.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Zaletą użycia wikikodu jest to, że tabela jest zbudowana z symboli znakowych ułatwiających postrzeganie struktury tabeli w widoku edycji, w porównaniu do elementów tabel XHTML.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/ref&gt;

== Skrócony opis składni wiki dla tabel ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:60%&quot;
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;| '''rozpoczęcie tabeli''', ''wymagane''
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|+&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''tytuł''' tabeli, ''opcjonalne;'' tylko między '''rozpoczęciem tabeli''' a '''wierszami tabeli'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|-&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''wiersz tabeli''', ''opcjonalne dla pierwszego wiersza''—silnik wiki rozpoznaje, co jest pierwszym wierszem
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;!&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt; 
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | komórka '''nagłówka tabeli''', ''opcjonalne.'' Kolejne komórki '''nagłówka tabeli''' mogą być dodawane w tej samej linii poprzez oddzielenie ich podwójnymi znakami (&lt;code&gt;!!&lt;/code&gt;) lub poprzez wpisanie każdej w osobnej linii rozpoczynając od pojedynczego znaku (&lt;code&gt;!&lt;/code&gt;).
|- 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | komórka '''danych tabeli''', ''opcjonalne''. Kolejne komórki '''danych tabeli''' mogą być dodawane w tej samej linii poprzez oddzielenie ich podwójnymi znakami (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;||&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) lub poprzez wpisanie każdej w osobnej linii rozpoczynając od pojedynczego znaku (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;).
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot;| &lt;big&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/big&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; | '''koniec tabeli''', ''wymagane''
|}
* Każdy z tych powyższych znaczników musi być '''zaczynać nową linię''' z wyjątkiem podwójnych &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt; oraz &lt;code&gt;!!&lt;/code&gt;, które służą do dodawania następujących po sobie komórek w jednej linii. Spacje zaczynające linie są ignorowane.
*'''&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Atrybuty XHTML.&lt;/span&gt;''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Każdy znacznik, z wyjątkiem końca tabeli, akceptuje jeden lub więcej atrybutów XHTML.&lt;/span&gt; Atrybuty muszą znajdować się w tej samej linii co znacznik. Oddzielaj spacją atrybuty od reszty.
** Komórki i tytuł (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; lub &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;!&lt;/code&gt; lub &lt;code&gt;!!&lt;/code&gt;, oraz &lt;code&gt;|+&lt;/code&gt;) przechowują treść. Należy więc oddzielić atrybuty od treści pojedynczym znakiem pionowej kreski (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;). Zawartość komórki może następować w tej samej linii lub w kolejnych.
** Tabela i znaczniki wierszy (&lt;code&gt;{|&lt;/code&gt; oraz &lt;code&gt;|-&lt;/code&gt;) nie przechowują treści bezpośrednio. ''Nie'' dodawaj pionowej kreski (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) po opcjonalnych atrybutach. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you erroneously add a pipe after attributes for the table mark or row mark the parser will delete it ''and'' your final attribute if it was touching the erroneous pipe!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*'''Content''' may (a) follow its cell mark on the same line after any optional HTML attributes or (b) on lines below the cell mark.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Content that uses wiki markup that itself needs to start on a new line, such as lists, headings, or nested tables, must be on its own new line.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
**'''Pipe character as content.'''
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To insert a pipe (&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;) character into a table, use the &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; escaping markup.&lt;/span&gt;

== Podstawy ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Create a table with editor toolbar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In wikitext editor, place the caret where you want to insert a table. Then, in the toolbar, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-section-advanced}}”, then choose [[File:OOjs UI icon table.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table}} button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dialog opens.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the dialog, you can choose whether to enable a table header row, to stylize the table with border and to make the table [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|sortable]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A preview example is displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also set row and column counts you need. Then, press “{{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-insert}}” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, the following code is generated:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;display:flex&quot;&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikicode:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
 {&lt;nowiki/&gt;| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
 |+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
 |-
 ! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |-
 | {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
 |}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width:45%; border:1px solid black; padding:0.5em; margin-left:2ex&quot;&gt;
&lt;h5 style=&quot;text-align:center; margin-bottom:1em&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Result:&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin:auto&quot;
|+ {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-caption}}
|-
! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}} !! {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example-header}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|-
| {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}} || {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-tool-table-example}}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Minimal syntax ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following table lacks borders and good spacing but shows the simplest wiki markup table structure.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Pomarańcza
|Jabłko
|-
|Chleb
|Ciasto
|-
|Masło
|Lody 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
|-
| Masło
| Lody 
|}
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The cells in the same row can be listed on one line separated by &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt; (two pipe symbols).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the text in the cell should contain a line break, use {{tag|br|single}} instead.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Pomarańcza||Jabłko||więcej
|-
|Chleb||Ciasto||więcej
|-
|Masło||Lody&lt;br /&gt;waniliowe||i&lt;br /&gt;więcej
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
| Pomarańcza||Jabłko||więcej
|-
| Chleb||Ciasto||więcej
|-
| Masło||Lody&lt;br /&gt;waniliowe||i&lt;br /&gt;więcej
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Extra spaces within cells in the wiki markup, as in the wiki markup below, do not affect the actual table rendering.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|  Pomarańcza || Jabłko || więcej
|-
|   Chleb || Ciasto || więcej
|-
|   Masło || Lody || i więcej
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|  Pomarańcza || Jabłko || więcej
|-
|   Chleb || Ciasto || więcej
|-
|   Masło || Lody || i więcej
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can have longer text or more complex wiki syntax inside table cells, too:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, 
consetetur sadipscing elitr, 
sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, 
sed diam voluptua. 

At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores
et ea rebum. Stet clita kasd gubergren,
no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum
dolor sit amet. 
|
* Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
* consetetur sadipscing elitr
* sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt
|}
|}

=== Nagłówki tabeli ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table headers can be created by using &quot;&lt;code&gt;!&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (exclamation mark) instead of &quot;&lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;&quot; (pipe symbol).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Headers usually show up bold and centered by default.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Towar
! Ilość
! Koszt
|-
|Pomarańcza
|10
|7.00
|-
|Chleb
|4
|3.00
|-
|Masło
|1
|5.00
|-
!Razem
|
|15.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
! style=&quot;text-align:left;&quot;| Towar
! Ilość
! Koszt
|-
| Pomarańcza
|10
|7.00
|-
| Chleb
|4
|3.00
|-
| Masło
|1
|5.00
|-
! Razem
|
|15.00
|}
|}

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When using attributes as in the heading 'Item' a vertical bar '&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;' is used for separation.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Not an exclamation character '!'.&lt;/span&gt;}}

=== Tytuł ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A '''table caption''' can be added to the top of any table as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{|
|+Food complements
|-
|Pomarańcza
|Jabłko
|-
|Chleb
|Ciasto
|-
|Masło
|Lody 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{|
|+ &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Food complements&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
|-
| Masło
| Lody 
|}
|}

=== class=&quot;wikitable&quot; ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Basic styling (light gray background, borders, padding and align left) can be achieved by adding class=&quot;wikitable&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+Food complements
|-
|Pomarańcza
|Jabłko
|-
|Chleb
|Ciasto
|-
|Masło
|Lody 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Food complements&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
|-
| Masło
| Lody 
|}
|}

=== colspan i rowspan z HTMLa ===

Możesz używać atrybutów HTML '''colspan''' i '''rowspan''' w komórkach aby zbudować zaawansowany układ.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Lista zakupów
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Chleb i masło
|Ciasto
|Buns
|Danish
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Rogale
|-
|Ser
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Lody
|Masło
|Jogurt
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
!colspan=&quot;6&quot;|Lista zakupów
|-
|rowspan=&quot;2&quot;|Chleb i masło
| Ciasto
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Buns&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Danish&lt;/span&gt;
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Rogale
|-
| Ser
|colspan=&quot;2&quot;|Lody
| Masło
| Jogurt
|}
|}

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Atrybuty XHTML ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add '''HTML attributes''' to tables.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For the authoritative source on HTML attributes, see [https://www.w3.org/TR/html401/struct/tables.html the W3C's HTML Specification page on tables].&lt;/span&gt;

=== Atrybuty tabeli ===

Umieszczenie atrybutów po znaczniku rozpoczęcia tabeli (&lt;code&gt;{|&lt;/code&gt;) spowoduje ich zastosowanie dla całej tabeli.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
|Pomarańcza
|Jabłko
|12,333.00
|-
|Chleb
|Ciasto
|500.00
|-
|Masło
|Lody
|1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center; color: green;&quot;
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
|12,333.00
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
|500.00
|-
| Masło
| Lody
|1.00
|}
|}

=== Atrybuty komórek ===
Możesz umieścić atrybuty dla poszczególnych '''komórek'''. 
Na przykład, liczby będą lepiej wyglądały, jeżeli będą wyrównane do prawej.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Masło
| Lody
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Masło
| Lody
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

Możesz także używać atrybutów komórek podczas ich wypisywania w jednej linii. 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that the '''cells''' are separated by &lt;code&gt;||&lt;/code&gt;, and within each '''cell''' the attribute(s) and value are separated by &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Pomarańcza || Jabłko     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Chleb || Ciasto       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Masło || Lody || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Pomarańcza || Jabłko     || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 12,333.00
|-
| Chleb || Ciasto       || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 500.00
|-
| Masło || Lody || style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot; | 1.00
|}
|}

=== Atrybuty wierszy ===

Możesz umieszczać atrybuty także dla poszczególnych '''wierszy'''.

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Masło
| Lody
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 12,333.00
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 500.00
|- style=&quot;font-style: italic; color: green;&quot;
| Masło
| Lody
| style=&quot;text-align:right;&quot;| 1.00
|}
|}

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==== Atrybuty ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Attributes can be added to the caption and headers as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|''Food complements''
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | Fruits
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | Fats
|-
|Pomarańcza
|Masło
|-
|Chleb
|Ciasto
|-
|Jabłko
|Lody 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ style=&quot;caption-side:bottom; color:#e76700;&quot;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;''Food complements''&lt;/span&gt;
|-
! style=&quot;color:green&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fruits&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;color:red&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fats&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| Pomarańcza
| Masło
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Chleb&lt;/span&gt;
| Ciasto
|-
| Jabłko
| Lody 
|}
|}

=== Grubość obramowania ===

Jeżeli &quot;border-width:&quot; będzie zawierać tylko jedną liczbę, będzie miało to zastosowanie dla wszystkich czterech stron obramowania:

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | Wpisujesz 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | Otrzymujesz 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
Cześć
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 20px&quot;
|
Cześć
|}
|}

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jeżeli &quot;border-width:&quot; będzie zawierać więcej niż jedną liczbę, te cztery liczby są dla '''góry, prawej, dołu, lewej (zapamiętaj tę kolejność)''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | Wpisujesz 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | Otrzymujesz 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
Cześć
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-style: solid; border-width: 10px 20px 100px 0&quot;
|
Cześć
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:When there are fewer than 4 values :
&lt;/div&gt; 
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;three values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width is then the same on left and right side.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;two values i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; (first value), and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt; by default is assigned the value of &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; (second value). Width on top is then the same as on bottom; width on left is the same as on right.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;one value i.e. &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt;: then the default value for &lt;code&gt;right&lt;/code&gt; is the one of &lt;code&gt;top&lt;/code&gt; and it is the same for &lt;code&gt;bottom&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;left&lt;/code&gt;. The fourth width are the same and build a regular border. This is a writing shortcut.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Another method to define the widths of the four sides of a cell is to use ''&quot;border-left&quot;, &quot;border-right&quot;, &quot;border-top&quot; and &quot;border-bottom&quot;'':
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;width: 100%; overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
|-
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | Wpisujesz 
! style=&quot;width:50%&quot; | Otrzymujesz 
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
Cześć
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 20px;&quot;|
{|style=&quot;border-left:solid 10px black;border-right:solid 20px black;border-top:solid 30px black;border-bottom:solid 40px black;&quot; align=&quot;center&quot; 
|
Cześć
|}
|}
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The HTML attributes (such as &quot;width=&quot;, &quot;border=&quot;, &quot;cellspacing=&quot;, &quot;cellpadding=&quot;) do not need any length unit (the pixel unit is assumed).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are also invalid in HTML 5.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&quot;Cellpadding&quot; is for setting the space between the cell wall and the cell content.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[https://www.w3schools.com/tags/att_table_cellpadding.asp HTML table cellpadding Attribute]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The CSS style properties (which override the HTML attributes) require an explicit length unit (if the value is not 0) such as &quot;px&quot; for the pixel.
&lt;/div&gt;
}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===With HTML attributes and CSS styles===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
{{ll|Manual:CSS|CSS}} style attributes can be added with or without other HTML attributes.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot;
|Pomarańcza
|Jabłko
|-
|Chleb
|Ciasto
|-
|Masło
|Lody 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;color:green; background-color:#ffffcc;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;10&quot; 
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
|-
| Masło
| Lody 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Padding===
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%;&quot; 
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You type&lt;/span&gt;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You get&lt;/span&gt;
|-valign=top
| style=&quot;padding:10px&quot; |
&lt;pre&gt;
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
|
{|class=wikitable 
| style=&quot;padding: 10px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:10px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 50px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:50px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;br/&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify the padding on '''EACH CELL'''&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;padding:100px&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example of style=&quot;padding:100px&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|}
|}

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==== Szerokość kolumny ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Column width''' can be added as follows.
&lt;/div&gt;

Wpisujesz:

&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | This column width is 85% of the screen width
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| '''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| '''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;

Otrzymujesz:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 85%;&quot;
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This column width is 85% of the screen width&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| style=&quot;width: 30%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 30% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
| style=&quot;width: 70%&quot;| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''This column is 70% counted from 85% of the screen width'''&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Accessibility of table header cells===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table header cells do not explicitly specify which table data cells they apply to (those on their right on the same row, or those below them on the same column).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When the table is rendered in a visual 2D environment, this is usually easy to infer.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However when tables are rendered on non-visual media, you can help the browser to determine which table header cell applies to the description of any selected cell (in order to repeat its content in some accessibility helper) using a scope=&quot;row&quot; or scope=&quot;col&quot; attribute on table header cells.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases with simple tables, you'll use scope=&quot;col&quot; on all header cells of the first row, and scope=&quot;row&quot; on the first cell of the following rows:&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Towar
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Ilość
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Cena
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Chleb
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Masło
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| Razem
| $1.90
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Towar
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Ilość
! scope=&quot;col&quot;| Cena
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Chleb
| 0.3 kg
| $0.65
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot;| Masło
| 0.125 kg
| $1.25
|-
! scope=&quot;row&quot; colspan=&quot;2&quot;| Razem
| $1.90
|}
|}

== Wyrównanie ==

=== Wyrównanie tabeli ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Table alignment is achieved by using CSS.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The table alignment is controlled by margins.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A fixed margin on one side will make the table to be aligned to that side, if on the opposite side the margin is defined as ''auto''.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To have a table center aligned, you should set both margins to ''auto''&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, a right-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
|-
| Masło
| Lody 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-left: auto; margin-right: 0px;&quot;
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
|-
| Masło
| Lody 
|}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
And a center-aligned table:
&lt;/div&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
|-
| Masło
| Lody 
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin: auto;&quot;
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
|-
| Masło
| Lody 
|}
|}

=== Oblewanie tabeli tekstem ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you align a table to the right or the left side of the page, the text that comes after the table starts at the end of it, leaving an empty space around the table.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make the text to be wrapped around the table by making the table to ''float'' around the text instead of just aligning it.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be achieved using the &lt;code&gt;float&lt;/code&gt; CSS attribute, which can specify where the table floats to the right side or to the left.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When using ''float'', margins doesn't control table alignment and can be used to specify the margin between the table and the surrounding text.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
|-
| Masło
| Lody 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&quot;
| Pomarańcza
| Jabłko
|-
| Chleb
| Ciasto
|-
| Masło
| Lody 
|}

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetuer adipiscing 
elit, sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut 
laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat. Ut wisi 
enim ad minim veniam, quis nostrud exerci tation 
ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea 
commodo consequat. Duis autem vel eum iriure dolor 
in hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat, 
vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla facilisis at vero 
eros et accumsan et iusto odio dignissim qui blandit 
praesent luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te 
feugait nulla facilisi.
|}

=== Wyrównanie zawartości komórek ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The alignment of cell contents can be controlled with 2 different CSS properties: &lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;text-align&lt;/code&gt; can be specified at the table, row or individual cells, while &lt;code&gt;vertical-align&lt;/code&gt; only can be specified at individual rows or cells.&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;width:100%&quot;
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Wpisujesz
! style=&quot;width: 50%;&quot;|Otrzymujesz
|-
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
&lt;pre&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
&lt;/pre&gt;
| style=&quot;padding: 5px;&quot;|
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:top;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | A
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | B
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | C
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:middle;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | D
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | E
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | F
|- style=&quot;vertical-align:bottom;&quot;
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:left;&quot; | G
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:center;&quot; | H
| style=&quot;height:100px; width:100px; text-align:right;&quot; | I
|}
|}

== Zastrzeżenia ==

=== Liczby ujemne ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you start a cell on a new line with a negative number with a minus sign (or a parameter that evaluates to a negative number), your table can get broken, because the characters &lt;code&gt;|-&lt;/code&gt; will be parsed as the wiki markup for table row, not table cell.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To avoid this, insert a space before the value (&lt;code&gt;| -6&lt;/code&gt;) or use in-line cell markup (&lt;code&gt;|| -6&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;

=== CSS a atrybuty ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Table borders specified through CSS rather than the border attribute will render incorrectly in a small subset of text browsers.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Wspólne atrybuty dla kolumny, grup kolumn i grup wierszy ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The MediaWiki syntax for tables currently offers no support for specifying common attributes for columns (with the HTML element {{tag|col|single}}), column groups (HTML element {{tag|colgroup|content=}}) and row groups (HTML elements {{tag|thead|content=}}, {{tag|tbody|content=}} and {{tag|tfoot|content=}}).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those standard HTML elements are not accepted even in their HTML or XHTML syntax.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All the rows and cells (header or data) of the table are rendered within a single implicit row group (HTML element {{tag|tbody|content=}}) without any attributes or styles.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Tables and the Visual Editor (VE) ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''Zobacz też: {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing tables}}''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Phab: T108245]]: &quot;Fully support basic table editing in the visual editor&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See the list of tasks. Finished tasks are &lt;s&gt;struck&lt;/s&gt;. It can be difficult to figure out from the technical language there what exactly has been improved, or what features have been added. Please add explanatory info below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Can now move or delete columns and rows ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on a column or row header.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then click on the arrow.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From the popup menu click on &quot;Move&quot; or &quot;Delete&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert blank row or column ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
From the same popup menu click on &quot;Insert&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Copy table from web page to Visual Editor ===
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to copy and paste a table from a web page directly into the [[w:WP:Visual Editor|Visual Editor]] (VE).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do so safely, use a sandbox and check the table for proper coding in wikitext source mode and proper display in the Visual Editor and in preview mode.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Helping tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://excel2wiki.toolforge.org/ Excel2Wiki] allows you to copy a stylesheet from Excel, Apache OpenOffice, LibreOffice, or Gnumeric to convert it into wikicode table.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Zobacz też ==

* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sorting rows of a table|Sortowanie wierszy w tabeli]]
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;m:Help:Sorting&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Help:Tables]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [http://www.tablesgenerator.com/mediawiki_tables Łatwe narzędzie pomocne w generowaniu tabel]

== Uwagi ==

&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Tables]]</text>
      <sha1>8z87kd7ckojkhvx84hip0ruwpoglndv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>570371</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402785</id>
      <parentid>2117971</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:51:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="106" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Ajuda para utilizar predefinições de ligação]] ou [[$2|Ajuda para utilizar o botão citoid's $3]]</text>
      <sha1>it7j0c9llt71joeaetz11zny2uik49x</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/nb</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>570940</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402622</id>
      <parentid>4670503</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3643" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Structured Discussions (tidligere kjent som Flow) er [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|et prosjekt]] fra Samarbeidsteamet ved Wikimedia Foundation for å lage et moderne diskusjons- og samarbeidssystem for Wikimedia-prosjektene.

== Rask tur ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|Hvordan Structured Discussions ser ut – [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Prøv det!]]]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow/Quick tour|Les på samlesiden hvorfor vi lagde Flow, og hvordan du kan bruke det]]''': grunnleggende redigering, legge inn svar (på en global diskusjon eller til en spesifikk person i en global samtale), lage en diskusjon, følge en sak eller en hel tavle, få varslinger og bla gjennom arkiverte emner.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Det er noen spesifikke termer som gjelder Flow. De har blitt definert i '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow/Nomenclature|ordlista]]'''.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Avanserte verktøy ==

Noen avanserte verktøy er tilgjengelige for spesifikke formål. De har blitt omgruppert etter disse emnene:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Aktivering}}
:Hva skjer når Flow er slått på for en side?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Saker}}
:&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Rediger et emne/en melding, lage et sammendrag av et emne, løse en sak&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Permanente lenker}}
:Hvordan lage lenker til emner
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notifications and watchlist&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Historikk}}
:Hvordan historikk-systemet fungerer
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Administrasjon}}
:Skjul, slette, sensurere saker
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Forhåndslasting}}
:Forhåndslasting av innhold for en ny Flow-samtale
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Snarveier}}
:Tastesnarveier som kan brukes under visuell redigering.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All documentation on one page.&lt;/span&gt;}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>58vytrxu7yj0fjqzlub7gtim0ij77p5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402634</id>
      <parentid>5402622</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:48:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3465" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Structured Discussions (tidligere kjent som Flow) er [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|et prosjekt]] fra Samarbeidsteamet ved Wikimedia Foundation for å lage et moderne diskusjons- og samarbeidssystem for Wikimedia-prosjektene.

== Rask tur ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|Hvordan Structured Discussions ser ut – [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Prøv det!]]]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Det er noen spesifikke termer som gjelder Flow. De har blitt definert i '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow/Nomenclature|ordlista]]'''.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Avanserte verktøy ==

Noen avanserte verktøy er tilgjengelige for spesifikke formål. De har blitt omgruppert etter disse emnene:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Aktivering}}
:Hva skjer når Flow er slått på for en side?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Saker}}
:&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Rediger et emne/en melding, lage et sammendrag av et emne, løse en sak&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Permanente lenker}}
:Hvordan lage lenker til emner
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notifications and watchlist&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Historikk}}
:Hvordan historikk-systemet fungerer
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Administrasjon}}
:Skjul, slette, sensurere saker
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Forhåndslasting}}
:Forhåndslasting av innhold for en ny Flow-samtale
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Snarveier}}
:Tastesnarveier som kan brukes under visuell redigering.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All documentation on one page.&lt;/span&gt;}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>7y0k4v2p90z9cpmehahmh9ibfxkr9w0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/nb</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>571001</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402665</id>
      <parentid>5154673</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:52:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10537" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Denne siden er en rask tur om Strukturerte diskusjoner.

Strukturerte diskusjoner var tidligere kjent som «Flow»

Du vil her få den viktigste informasjonen om Strukturerte diskusjoner og hvordan bruke den.
Alle spesifikke termer (angitt i kursiv i teksten) har blitt definert i [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|termlista]].

== Hvorfor Strukturerte diskusjoner ==
Strukturerte diskusjoner er en ny måte å diskutere på.
Strukturen til diskusjoner er endret: En diskusjonsside (en ''tavle'') er nå en samling ''saker'' og hver sak er uavhengig og kan bli overvåket separat.
Strukturerte diskusjoner lar en bruker velge hvilken saker de ønsker å overvåke; de trenger ikke overvåke hele siden.

Nye saker blir lagt til på toppen av siden.
Saker kan bli sortert etter når de ble opprettet eller når de sist hadde aktivitet.
Strukturerte diskusjoner lar folk diskutere ved å [[#basics|bruke både VisualEditor og WikitextEditor]].

Aksjonsknapper (svar, takk) er koblet til hvert svar, og er klar for bruk.
Det er ikke nødvendig å bruke innrykk i dine svar, arkivere diskusjoner eller bruke signatur.
Diskusjoner går raskere og er mer tilgjengelig for alle.

== Grensesnitt ==

Globalt design av en Strukturet diskusjons-tavle. Spesifikke elementer ved meldinger er ikke vist (signatur, svar, verktøy…)

{| style=&quot;width:70%;font-size:130%; margin:1em auto;&quot; 
| 
&lt;strong style=&quot;font-family:Linux Libertine,Georgia,Times,serif;font-size: 1.5em;line-height: 1.3;margin-bottom: 0.25em;padding: 0;&quot;&gt;
Tittel på tavla
&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
«Bla i saker» flyout
{| 
| style=&quot;border:1px solid #222; width:100%; color:#AAA;padding: {{dir|{{pagelang}}|3px 3px 3px 180px|3px 180px 3px 3px}};&quot; | ''Start en ny sak tekstfelt''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Tittel på saken
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Melding 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Melding 2
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;padding-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 5%; border:none;&quot; |Svar på melding 2 (gjøres ved å klikke på ''svar'' ovenfor melding #2)
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Melding 3
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Svarfelt for tekst)''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Annen sak, annen tittel
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Melding 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Svar tekstfelt)''
|}
| style=&quot;background-color:#EEEEEE; width:33%;padding: 1em;vertical-align:top;&quot; |Tavlas beskrivelse
|}

== Hvordan bruke Strukturert diskusjon ==
{{anchor|basics}}

=== Grunnleggende redigering ===
[[File:Flow toolbar - Apr. 2017.png|thumb|542x542px|Strukturert diskusjon-verktøyrad, med knapper for å style, lenke, nevne og til høyre bytte til annet redigeringsverktøy (Wikitext eller visuell).]]

Du kan delta i diskusjoner ved å bruke to redigeringsløsninger; visuell redigering (som er standard) og [[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|wikitekst redigering]].
Du kan når som helst bytte mellom visuell redigering og wikitekst.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Når du poster et svar eller skaper en ny sak, så vil du ha en verktøylinje med 4 knapper:
* 3 til venstre (legg til stil, legg til lenke, nevn noen):
** legg til stil
** legg til lenke (med forslag og søk)
** nevn noen (med forslag og søk)
* en knapp for å bytte mellom redigeringsverktøy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* 3 buttons on the left (on a right-to-left keyboard):
** add style
** add link (with suggestions and search)
** mention someone (with suggestions and search)
* one button on the right to switch between editors.
&lt;/div&gt;

Under redigering, så fungerer wikitekst-kortkommandoer i visuell redigeringsmodus. For å lære mer om dette, vennligst gå til [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|Strukturerte diskusjoners kortkommandoer]].

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Over sesjonen så vil nettstedet huske hvilket system du foretrekker.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have opted-out the 2017 wikitext editor and/or the visual editor, you will have a simple wikitext fieldset to post or edit a reply, with no toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;{{int|flow-preference-visualeditor}}&quot; in your preferences (&quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot; tab) to opt-in and have a toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Husk: du trenger ikke lengre å indentere når du skriver eller signerer!
&lt;/div&gt;

Alle disse grunnleggende redigeringer gjelder for alle diskusjoner, innlegg, eller når du redigerer ''saker''&lt;nowiki /&gt;, ''beskrivelser'', eller ''sammendrag''.

* Se også: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics#Edit|Rediger en sak, eller et innlegg]]

{{anchor|post}}
=== Legg inn et svar ===

==== Til den globale saken ====
Hver deltager skriver innlegg ovenfor diskusjonen, i kronologisk orden.
Det er som en vanlig on-wiki konversasjon men uten innrykk, eller som å svare på e-post.
Ditt ''innlegg'' vil bli vist ovenfor alle kommentarer og er avhengig av ''saken''.

Hvis du trenger å si noe spesielt til noen, så kan du nevne brukeren eller svare dem (se nedenfor).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;reply&quot; button is used in this case, to create a digression. That digression creates an [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|indentation]]. It is possible to add 7 levels of digressions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your ''Post'' will be displayed below the comment you reply to, with an indentation if it is not the last one on the ''Board''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also just thank someone.&lt;/span&gt;

==== Til en spesifikk person i en sak ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to say something to someone in particular, you can mention that person on your global answer, or click on the &quot;''Reply''&quot; button below the post.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on  &quot;''Reply''&quot; will add a ''Post'', below the ''Post'' you want to answer directly, except if that post is the last of all discussions. For that last case, we assume that the reply is to the global topic and the reply will directly be below the last one.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To provide a better context in your reply, you can also quote someone's message by copy-pasting part of it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your ''Post'' depends on the ''Post'' you reply on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This ''Post'' is designed as a specific answer. It will be separated from the main discussion by a grey line.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, every person who watches this ''Topic'' will get a notification of your answer, like all answers.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|create}}
=== Skap en diskusjon ===
[[File:New discussion in Flow - Sept. 2015.png|thumb|534x534px|Hvordan skape en diskusjon: klikk på «Start en ny sak»-linja.]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
On a page using Structured Discussions, creating a new topic is easy: you just need to click on the &quot;Start a new topic&quot; field. Structured Discussions will prepare two fields.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first field is &quot;start a new topic&quot;, choose a relevant title. The second field is &quot;Post a new message about...&quot;, add your text. Choose your title wisely if you want to attract readers: people will see it on their Notifications, without other details.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you are ready, click on the &quot;Add topic&quot; button. Your ''Post'' is online, every person watching the page is notified of the creation of this new topic.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You will be auto-subscribed when you create a topic: you will get a notification when someone replies.
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;also see: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Summarize a topic / Resolve a topic]]&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|watch}}
=== Overvåk ===

==== En sak ====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To watch a specific subject, click on the star on the top of the ''Topic'', near of the title. It turns blue. If it is already blue, you already were watching this topic.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While watching, you will get a notification for every edit to this ''Topic''. You will also get a watch list entry.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you create a ''Topic'', you are auto-subscribed to this ''Topic.''
&lt;/div&gt;

==== En diskusjonsside ====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To watch a whole page, click on the star on the top of the page, near of the search field. It turns blue. If it is already blue, you already were watching this page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While watching, you get a notification for changes of the board description and every new subject posted on this talk page. You will also get a watch list entry.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|notifications}}
==== Meldinger ====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can turn off Structured Discussions notifications on your notifications preferences. Your watchlist will be still updated with a new line for every subject on a talk page you watch or a new line when someone answers a Topic you watch.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|browse}}
== Bla gjennom og arkivere ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All Topics displayed on a board are listed on a table of contents. You can browse all these Topics on this table.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Archiving is automated: all discussions disappear when they are not active anymore. You can display older Topics by scrolling down the page, or by searching on the table of contents.
&lt;/div&gt;

* se også: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Sammendrag av en sak / Løs en sak]]

== Gå videre ==
* OSS'
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Design FAQ|2=Design}}
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Release and features FAQ|2=Utgaver og egenskaper}}

[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>eh4rx2q0ucyordvizbabj733xl9sxiz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/ro</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>571379</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402787</id>
      <parentid>2117976</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:53:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="120" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Ajutor privitor la folosirea formatelor de citare]] sau [[$2|Ajutor privitor la folosirea butonului $3 din citoid]]</text>
      <sha1>feuq53f6hwkjciuqrkllixfjxh5oi47</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/ps</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>572430</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402624</id>
      <parentid>4578062</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4516" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions (formerly known as Flow) are [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|a project]] of the Collaboration team at the Wikimedia Foundation to build a modern discussion and collaboration system for Wikimedia projects.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Quick tour ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How Structured Discussions look - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Try it!]]&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There is some specific terms concerning Structured Discussions. They have been defined in '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|the Glossary]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Advanced tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some advanced tools are available, for specific purposes. They have been regrouped on these subjects:
&lt;/div&gt;

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Activation&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What happens when Structured Discussions are enabled on a page?&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Topics&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filter topics, Edit a topic/message, Summarize a topic, Resolve a topic&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Permalinks&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to create links to subjects&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notifications and watchlist&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=پېښليک}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How the history system works&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide, Delete, Suppress topics&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading contents on a new Structured Discussions conversation&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shortcuts&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Keyboard shortcuts to use on visual editing mode.&lt;/span&gt;

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All documentation on one page.&lt;/span&gt;}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>t6tb0f0d5nyv0t25avxbmfwaywqzf1e</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>User:Quiddity/Zanzu</title>
    <ns>2</ns>
    <id>572742</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402085</id>
      <parentid>4368388</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:54:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Quiddity</username>
        <id>13500</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>better keyword</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="615" xml:space="preserve">&lt;big&gt;'''https://imgur.com/a/zanzu''' &lt;----- Zanzu! &amp;nbsp; Documentation. &amp;nbsp; [[phab:T2001|Bug #1]].&lt;/big&gt;


(I like to anthropomorphize/deify the random alphanumerical string that imgur gave that gallery. 

Zanzu is a capricious god. Zanzu is a howling storm. Zanzu will arrive next week. Zanzu pays for itself, but demands your time.)


;The 6 problems of documentation:
# Getting anyone to '''write''' it
# Deciding where to '''locate''' (and link) it
# Getting anyone to '''update''' it
# Helping everyone to '''find''' it
# Getting everyone to actually '''read''' it
# Getting everyone to '''understand''' it</text>
      <sha1>hxcmf1lbhpw1u80gur4x6mag550w5hw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/id</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>573329</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402614</id>
      <parentid>4578050</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3785" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Pembicaraan Terstruktur &quot;''Structured Discussions''&quot; (sebelumnya dikenal sebagai Aliran &quot;''Flow''&quot;) adalah [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|suatu proyek]] dari tim Kolaborasi di Wikimedia Foundation untuk membangun suatu sistem pembicaraan dan kolaborasi yang modern untuk proyek-proyek Wikimedia.

== Tur singkat ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|Tampilan Pembicaraan Terstruktur - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Coba sekarang!]]]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Ketahui dalam satu halaman alasan kami membangun Pembicaraan Terstruktur, dan cara menggunakannya]]''': 
* [[$basics|dasar penyuntingan]], 
* [[$post|mengirimkan jawaban]] (ke pembicaraan global atau ke orang tertentu di pembicaraan global), 
* [[$create|membuat suatu pembicaraan]], 
* [[$watch|memantau suatu topik atau suatu forum secara keseluruhan]], 
* [[$notifications|mendapatkan pemberitahuan]],
* [[$browse|menjelajahi dan mengarsipkan subjek]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Ada beberapa istilah spesifik terkait dengan Pembicaraan Terstruktur. Anda dapat melihatnya di '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|Daftar istilah]]'''.

Pembicaraan Terstruktur tidak berfungsi bagi Anda? Silakan periksa '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|apakah Anda dapat menyelesaikan kendala tersebut]]'''.

== Perkakas lanjutan ==

Beberapa perkakas lanjutan tersedia untuk tujuan tertentu. Mereka telah dikelompokkan ke dalam subjek-subjek berikut:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Aktivasi}}
:Apa yang terjadi ketika Pembicaraan Terstruktur diaktifkan pada suatu halaman?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Topik}}
:Menyaring topik, Menyunting suatu topik/pesan, Merangkum suatu topik, Menyelesaikan suatu topik
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Pranala permanen}}
:Cara membuat pranala ke subjek
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Pemberitahuan dan daftar pantauan}}
:Pemberitahuan yang Anda terima dan masukan yang berbeda di daftar pantauan
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Riwayat}}
:Cara kerja sistem riwayat
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Administrasi}}
:Sembunyikan, Hapus, Beredel topik
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Pramuatan}}
:Pramuatkan isi di suatu percakapan Pembicaraan Terstruktur baru
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Pintasan}}
:Pintasan papan tombol yang digunakan dalam mode penyuntingan visual.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Semua dokumentasi dalam satu halaman.}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>190f2iqm22zgi0z9ry8b0o392y023d7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/pl</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>573577</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402667</id>
      <parentid>5154674</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:53:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9869" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}&lt;/noinclude&gt;
To jest szybki przewodnik dotyczący Flow.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions were formerly known as &quot;Flow&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

Znajdują się tutaj najważniejsze informacje na temat Flow oraz instrukcja użytkowania.
Specyficzne pojęcia (wyróżniane kursywą) zostały opisane w [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|słowniczku]].

== Dlaczego Flow ==
Flow jest nowym systemem dyskusji.
Ma zmienioną strukturę dyskusji: strona dyskusji (''forum'') staje się zespołem ''Wątków'', które są niezależne i każdy z nich może być indywidualnie obserwowany.
Flow umożliwia użytkownikom wybierać, które wątki z jednej strony dyskusji mają być obserwowane zamiast całej strony.

Nowe wątki dodawane są na górze strony.
Tematy można sortować według czasu utworzenia lub czasu ostatniej aktywności.
Odpowiedzi można tworzyć [[#basics|zarówno w edytorze wikikodu 2017 jak i wizualnym]].

Do każdej odpowiedzi dołączane są przyciski akcji (odpowiedz, podziękuj).
Nie ma konieczności ręcznego tworzenia wcięć, archiwizowania dyskusji lub wprowadzania podpisów.
Dyskusje przebiegają szybciej i są bardziej dostępne dla wszystkich.

== Interfejs ==

Ogólny wygląd forum Flow. Nie pokazano specyficznych elementów wokół wiadomości (podpis, linki odpowiedzi, narzędzia...).

{| style=&quot;width:70%;font-size:130%; margin:1em auto;&quot; 
| 
&lt;strong style=&quot;font-family:Linux Libertine,Georgia,Times,serif;font-size: 1.5em;line-height: 1.3;margin-bottom: 0.25em;padding: 0;&quot;&gt;
Tytuł forum
&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Rozwijane panele przeglądania wątków
{| 
| style=&quot;border:1px solid #222; width:100%; color:#AAA;padding: {{dir|{{pagelang}}|3px 3px 3px 180px|3px 180px 3px 3px}};&quot; | ''Pole tekstowe zakładania nowego wątku''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Tytuł wątku
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Wiadomość 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Wiadomość 2
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;padding-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 5%; border:none;&quot; |Odpowiedź na wiadomość 2 (poprzez kliknięcie na &quot;odpowiedz&quot; nad wiadomością #2)
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Wiadomość 3
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Pole do odpowiadania)''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Inny wątek, z innym tytułem
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Wiadomość 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Pole do odpowiadania)''
|}
| style=&quot;background-color:#EEEEEE; width:33%;padding: 1em;vertical-align:top;&quot; |Opis forum
|}

== Jak używać Flow ==
{{anchor|basics}}

=== Podstawy edytowania ===
[[File:Flow toolbar - Apr. 2017.png|thumb|542x542px|Pasek narzędzi z przyciskami stylu, linków, wzmianki, a po prawej do przełączenia na wikikod.]]

Możesz uczestniczyć w dyskusjach wykorzystując jeden z dwóch systemów wprowadzania: edycja wizualna (domyślnie) oraz [[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|edytor wikikodu 2017]].
Można przełączać się między edycją wizualną a edycją wikikodu w dowolnym momencie.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Podczas pisania odpowiedzi lub zakładania nowego wątku, będzie dostępny pasek narzędzi z czterema przyciskami:
* trzy po lewej
** styl
** dodaj link (z sugestiami i wyszukiwaniem)
** wzmianka (z sugestiami i wyszukiwaniem)
* jeden przycisk po prawej do przełączania między edytorami.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* 3 buttons on the left (on a right-to-left keyboard):
** add style
** add link (with suggestions and search)
** mention someone (with suggestions and search)
* one button on the right to switch between editors.
&lt;/div&gt;

Skróty klawiaturowe działają w trybie edycji wizualnej, tak samo jak [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|skróty dla Flow]].

Podczas sesji zostanie zapamiętany Twój preferowany system, dopóki nie określisz go w swoich preferencjach (zakładka &quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot;).

Jeżeli wyłączyłeś edytor wikikodu 2017 i/lub edytor wizualny, będziesz mógł korzystać ze zwykłego pola do pisania lub edycji wikikodu, bez paska narzędzi.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;{{int|flow-preference-visualeditor}}&quot; in your preferences (&quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot; tab) to opt-in and have a toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;

Zapamiętaj: nie musisz już samodzielnie tworzyć wcięć odpowiedzi lub kończyć wiadomość podpisem.

Wszystkie te podstawy edytowania mają zastosowanie do wszystkich dyskusji, odpowiedzi oraz podczas edycji ''Wątku''&lt;nowiki/&gt;, ''Opisu'' lub ''Podsumowania''.

* Zobacz także: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics#Edit|Edytowanie tematu i wiadomości]]

{{anchor|post}}
=== Odpowiadanie ===

==== Odpowiedź w temacie ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each participant posts below the discussion, in a chronological way.&lt;/span&gt;
Podobne do zwyczajnej konwersacji na wiki, ale bez wcięć lub do odpowiadania na e-maile.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your ''Post'' will be displayed below all comments and depends on the ''Topic''.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you need to say something special to someone, you can mention the user or reply to them (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;reply&quot; button is used in this case, to create a digression. That digression creates an [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|indentation]]. It is possible to add 7 levels of digressions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your ''Post'' will be displayed below the comment you reply to, with an indentation if it is not the last one on the ''Board''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also just thank someone.&lt;/span&gt;

==== Konkretnej osobie w temacie ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to say something to someone in particular, you can mention that person on your global answer, or click on the &quot;''Reply''&quot; button below the post.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on  &quot;''Reply''&quot; will add a ''Post'', below the ''Post'' you want to answer directly, except if that post is the last of all discussions. For that last case, we assume that the reply is to the global topic and the reply will directly be below the last one.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To provide a better context in your reply, you can also quote someone's message by copy-pasting part of it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your ''Post'' depends on the ''Post'' you reply on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This ''Post'' is designed as a specific answer. It will be separated from the main discussion by a grey line.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, every person who watches this ''Topic'' will get a notification of your answer, like all answers.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|create}}
=== Zakładanie dyskusji ===
[[File:New discussion in Flow - Sept. 2015.png|thumb|534x534px|Aby utworzyć dyskusję: Kliknij na pasek &quot;Rozpocznij nowy wątek&quot;.]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Na stronie korzystającej z Flow, tworzenie wątków jest łatwe: wystarczy kliknąć na pole &quot;Rozpocznij nowy wątek&quot;. Pokażą się dwa pola.
&lt;/div&gt;

Pierwsze pole to &quot;Rozpocznij nowy wątek&quot; - wpisz tytuł wątku. Drugie pole służy do wpisywania tekstu. Wybierz tytuł rozsądnie, aby zachęcić czytelników: tytuł będzie widoczny w Powiadomieniach, bez innych szczegółów.

Gdy skończysz, kliknij przycisk &quot;Dodaj wątek&quot;. Twój ''Post'' będzie dostępny online, a każda osoba obserwująca stronę będzie powiadomiona o utworzeniu tego tematu.

Wątek będzie automatycznie dodany do Twoich subskrypcji: otrzymasz powiadomienie, gdy ktoś odpowie.

* zobacz też: [[Special:MyLanguage/Flow/Topics|Podsumowywanie / rozwiązywanie wątków]]

{{anchor|watch}}
=== Obserwowanie ===

==== Wątku ====

Aby obserwować określony wątek, kliknij ikonkę gwiazdki w górnej części wątku obok tytułu. Gdy będzie ona niebieska, znaczy to, że wątek jest obserwowany.

Podczas włączonego obserwowania, będziesz otrzymywać powiadomienia o każdej edycji w danym wątku w postaci nowych wpisów na stronie z listą obserwowanych.

Podczas zakładania wątków automatycznie są one oznaczane jako obserwowane.

==== Strona dyskusji ====

Aby obserwować całą stronę, kliknij na ikonkę gwiazdki w górnej części strony. Gdy będzie ona niebieska, znaczy to, że wątek jest obserwowany.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Podczas obserwowania, będziesz otrzymywać powiadomienia o każdym nowym wątku założonym na danej stronie dyskusji.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|notifications}}
==== Powiadomienia ====

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Możesz wyłączyć powiadomienia z Flow w Twoich preferencjach powiadomień. Nadal będą widoczne wpisy na liście obserwowanych dotyczące nowych wątków i odpowiedzi.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|browse}}
== Przeglądanie i archiwizacja ==

Wszystkie wątki z forum wyświetlane są w spisie.

Archiwizowanie jest automatyczne: nieaktywne dłużej dyskusje nie będą pokazywane. Możesz wyświetlić starsze tematy przewijając stronę lub przeszukując spis zawartości.

* zobacz też: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Podsumowywanie / rozwiązywanie wątków]]

== Dalsze informacje ==
* FAQ
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Design FAQ|2=Wygląd}}
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Release and features FAQ|2=Wydania i funkcjonalności}}

[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>3vv1ncf4u8b3an36rklkln75v36euf7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402682</id>
      <parentid>5402667</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:02:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9892" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}&lt;/noinclude&gt;
To jest szybki przewodnik dotyczący Flow.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions were formerly known as &quot;Flow&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

Znajdują się tutaj najważniejsze informacje na temat Flow oraz instrukcja użytkowania.
Specyficzne pojęcia (wyróżniane kursywą) zostały opisane w [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|słowniczku]].

== Dlaczego Flow ==
Flow jest nowym systemem dyskusji.
Ma zmienioną strukturę dyskusji: strona dyskusji (''forum'') staje się zespołem ''Wątków'', które są niezależne i każdy z nich może być indywidualnie obserwowany.
Flow umożliwia użytkownikom wybierać, które wątki z jednej strony dyskusji mają być obserwowane zamiast całej strony.

Nowe wątki dodawane są na górze strony.
Tematy można sortować według czasu utworzenia lub czasu ostatniej aktywności.
Odpowiedzi można tworzyć [[#basics|zarówno w edytorze wikikodu 2017 jak i wizualnym]].

Do każdej odpowiedzi dołączane są przyciski akcji (odpowiedz, podziękuj).
Nie ma konieczności ręcznego tworzenia wcięć, archiwizowania dyskusji lub wprowadzania podpisów.
Dyskusje przebiegają szybciej i są bardziej dostępne dla wszystkich.

== Interfejs ==

Ogólny wygląd forum Flow. Nie pokazano specyficznych elementów wokół wiadomości (podpis, linki odpowiedzi, narzędzia...).

{| style=&quot;width:70%;font-size:130%; margin:1em auto;&quot; 
| 
&lt;strong style=&quot;font-family:Linux Libertine,Georgia,Times,serif;font-size: 1.5em;line-height: 1.3;margin-bottom: 0.25em;padding: 0;&quot;&gt;
Tytuł forum
&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Rozwijane panele przeglądania wątków
{| 
| style=&quot;border:1px solid #222; width:100%; color:#AAA;padding: {{dir|{{pagelang}}|3px 3px 3px 180px|3px 180px 3px 3px}};&quot; | ''Pole tekstowe zakładania nowego wątku''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Tytuł wątku
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Wiadomość 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Wiadomość 2
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;padding-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 5%; border:none;&quot; |Odpowiedź na wiadomość 2 (poprzez kliknięcie na &quot;odpowiedz&quot; nad wiadomością #2)
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Wiadomość 3
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Pole do odpowiadania)''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Inny wątek, z innym tytułem
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Wiadomość 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Pole do odpowiadania)''
|}
| style=&quot;background-color:#EEEEEE; width:33%;padding: 1em;vertical-align:top;&quot; |Opis forum
|}

== Jak używać Flow ==
{{anchor|basics}}

=== Podstawy edytowania ===
[[File:Flow toolbar - Apr. 2017.png|thumb|542x542px|Pasek narzędzi z przyciskami stylu, linków, wzmianki, a po prawej do przełączenia na wikikod.]]

Możesz uczestniczyć w dyskusjach wykorzystując jeden z dwóch systemów wprowadzania: edycja wizualna (domyślnie) oraz [[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|edytor wikikodu 2017]].
Można przełączać się między edycją wizualną a edycją wikikodu w dowolnym momencie.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Podczas pisania odpowiedzi lub zakładania nowego wątku, będzie dostępny pasek narzędzi z czterema przyciskami:
* trzy po lewej
** styl
** dodaj link (z sugestiami i wyszukiwaniem)
** wzmianka (z sugestiami i wyszukiwaniem)
* jeden przycisk po prawej do przełączania między edytorami.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* 3 buttons on the left (on a right-to-left keyboard):
** add style
** add link (with suggestions and search)
** mention someone (with suggestions and search)
* one button on the right to switch between editors.
&lt;/div&gt;

Skróty klawiaturowe działają w trybie edycji wizualnej, tak samo jak [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|skróty dla Flow]].

Podczas sesji zostanie zapamiętany Twój preferowany system, dopóki nie określisz go w swoich preferencjach (zakładka &quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot;).

Jeżeli wyłączyłeś edytor wikikodu 2017 i/lub edytor wizualny, będziesz mógł korzystać ze zwykłego pola do pisania lub edycji wikikodu, bez paska narzędzi.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;{{int|flow-preference-visualeditor}}&quot; in your preferences (&quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot; tab) to opt-in and have a toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;

Zapamiętaj: nie musisz już samodzielnie tworzyć wcięć odpowiedzi lub kończyć wiadomość podpisem.

Wszystkie te podstawy edytowania mają zastosowanie do wszystkich dyskusji, odpowiedzi oraz podczas edycji ''Wątku''&lt;nowiki/&gt;, ''Opisu'' lub ''Podsumowania''.

* Zobacz także: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics#Edit|Edytowanie tematu i wiadomości]]

{{anchor|post}}
=== Odpowiadanie ===

==== Odpowiedź w temacie ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each participant posts below the discussion, in a chronological way.&lt;/span&gt;
Podobne do zwyczajnej konwersacji na wiki, ale bez wcięć lub do odpowiadania na e-maile.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your ''Post'' will be displayed below all comments and depends on the ''Topic''.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you need to say something special to someone, you can mention the user or reply to them (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;reply&quot; button is used in this case, to create a digression. That digression creates an [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|indentation]]. It is possible to add 7 levels of digressions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your ''Post'' will be displayed below the comment you reply to, with an indentation if it is not the last one on the ''Board''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also just thank someone.&lt;/span&gt;

==== Konkretnej osobie w temacie ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to say something to someone in particular, you can mention that person on your global answer, or click on the &quot;''Reply''&quot; button below the post.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click on  &quot;''Reply''&quot; will add a ''Post'', below the ''Post'' you want to answer directly, except if that post is the last of all discussions. For that last case, we assume that the reply is to the global topic and the reply will directly be below the last one.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To provide a better context in your reply, you can also quote someone's message by copy-pasting part of it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your ''Post'' depends on the ''Post'' you reply on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This ''Post'' is designed as a specific answer. It will be separated from the main discussion by a grey line.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, every person who watches this ''Topic'' will get a notification of your answer, like all answers.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|create}}
=== Zakładanie dyskusji ===
[[File:New discussion in Flow - Sept. 2015.png|thumb|534x534px|Aby utworzyć dyskusję: Kliknij na pasek &quot;Rozpocznij nowy wątek&quot;.]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Na stronie korzystającej z Flow, tworzenie wątków jest łatwe: wystarczy kliknąć na pole &quot;Rozpocznij nowy wątek&quot;. Pokażą się dwa pola.
&lt;/div&gt;

Pierwsze pole to &quot;Rozpocznij nowy wątek&quot; - wpisz tytuł wątku. Drugie pole służy do wpisywania tekstu. Wybierz tytuł rozsądnie, aby zachęcić czytelników: tytuł będzie widoczny w Powiadomieniach, bez innych szczegółów.

Gdy skończysz, kliknij przycisk &quot;Dodaj wątek&quot;. Twój ''Post'' będzie dostępny online, a każda osoba obserwująca stronę będzie powiadomiona o utworzeniu tego tematu.

Wątek będzie automatycznie dodany do Twoich subskrypcji: otrzymasz powiadomienie, gdy ktoś odpowie.

* zobacz też: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Podsumowywanie / rozwiązywanie wątków]]

{{anchor|watch}}
=== Obserwowanie ===

==== Wątku ====

Aby obserwować określony wątek, kliknij ikonkę gwiazdki w górnej części wątku obok tytułu. Gdy będzie ona niebieska, znaczy to, że wątek jest obserwowany.

Podczas włączonego obserwowania, będziesz otrzymywać powiadomienia o każdej edycji w danym wątku w postaci nowych wpisów na stronie z listą obserwowanych.

Podczas zakładania wątków automatycznie są one oznaczane jako obserwowane.

==== Strona dyskusji ====

Aby obserwować całą stronę, kliknij na ikonkę gwiazdki w górnej części strony. Gdy będzie ona niebieska, znaczy to, że wątek jest obserwowany.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Podczas obserwowania, będziesz otrzymywać powiadomienia o każdym nowym wątku założonym na danej stronie dyskusji.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|notifications}}
==== Powiadomienia ====

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Możesz wyłączyć powiadomienia z Flow w Twoich preferencjach powiadomień. Nadal będą widoczne wpisy na liście obserwowanych dotyczące nowych wątków i odpowiedzi.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|browse}}
== Przeglądanie i archiwizacja ==

Wszystkie wątki z forum wyświetlane są w spisie.

Archiwizowanie jest automatyczne: nieaktywne dłużej dyskusje nie będą pokazywane. Możesz wyświetlić starsze tematy przewijając stronę lub przeszukując spis zawartości.

* zobacz też: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Podsumowywanie / rozwiązywanie wątków]]

== Dalsze informacje ==
* FAQ
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Design FAQ|2=Wygląd}}
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Release and features FAQ|2=Wydania i funkcjonalności}}

[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5wteckdelq23nv0yoti2zefyy43ms7h</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/pl</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>574242</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402623</id>
      <parentid>4670506</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3523" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Structured Discussions (dawniej znany jako Flow) to [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|projekt]] zespołu Collaboration w Wikimedia Foundation mający na celu zbudowanie nowoczesnego systemu dyskusji i współpracy dla projektów Wikimedia.

== Szybki start ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Tak wygląda Flow - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Sprawdź!]]&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow/Quick tour|Dowiedz się dlaczego stworzyliśmy Flow i jak go używać]]''': podstawy edycji, odpowiadanie (w całej dyskusji lub na konkretną wiadomość), zakładanie dyskusji, obserwowanie tematu lub całej strony dyskusji, otrzymywanie powiadomień oraz przeglądanie i archiwizacja tematów.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Z Flow wiąże się kilka terminów. Zostały one opisane w '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|słowniczku]]'''.

Flow nie działa u Ciebie? Sprawdź '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|czy możesz rozwiązać problem samodzielnie]]'''.

== Narzędzia zaawansowane ==

Dostępnych jest kilka bardziej zaawansowanych narzędzi do konkretnych celów. Pogrupowane zostały one na takie rodzaje:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Aktywacja}}
:Co dzieje się podczas włączania Flow dla strony?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Wątki}}
:&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Edytowanie tematu/wiadomości, podsumowywanie i rozwiązywanie wątków.&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Linki bezpośrednie}}
:Jak tworzyć linki do tematów
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Powiadomienia i lista obserwowanych}}
:Rodzaje otrzymywanych powiadomień i sposób działania listy obserwowanych
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Historia}}
:Działanie systemu historii
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Administracja}}
:Ukrywanie i usuwanie wątków
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Preloading tekstu do edycji}}
:Tworzenie linku do pisania wiadomości z wstępnie wypełnionymi polami.
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Skróty}}
:Skróty klawiaturowe, które można używać w trybie edycji wizualnej.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Cała dokumentacja na jednej stronie}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>m78fxzhoqhkujlg3a6f8n2po2ly5bge</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402635</id>
      <parentid>5402623</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:48:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3353" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Structured Discussions (dawniej znany jako Flow) to [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|projekt]] zespołu Collaboration w Wikimedia Foundation mający na celu zbudowanie nowoczesnego systemu dyskusji i współpracy dla projektów Wikimedia.

== Szybki start ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Tak wygląda Flow - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Sprawdź!]]&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Z Flow wiąże się kilka terminów. Zostały one opisane w '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|słowniczku]]'''.

Flow nie działa u Ciebie? Sprawdź '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|czy możesz rozwiązać problem samodzielnie]]'''.

== Narzędzia zaawansowane ==

Dostępnych jest kilka bardziej zaawansowanych narzędzi do konkretnych celów. Pogrupowane zostały one na takie rodzaje:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Aktywacja}}
:Co dzieje się podczas włączania Flow dla strony?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Wątki}}
:&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Edytowanie tematu/wiadomości, podsumowywanie i rozwiązywanie wątków.&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Linki bezpośrednie}}
:Jak tworzyć linki do tematów
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Powiadomienia i lista obserwowanych}}
:Rodzaje otrzymywanych powiadomień i sposób działania listy obserwowanych
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Historia}}
:Działanie systemu historii
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Administracja}}
:Ukrywanie i usuwanie wątków
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Preloading tekstu do edycji}}
:Tworzenie linku do pisania wiadomości z wstępnie wypełnionymi polami.
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Skróty}}
:Skróty klawiaturowe, które można używać w trybie edycji wizualnej.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Cała dokumentacja na jednej stronie}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>2ykre4pnp7dhf93z5yzrkaz0ut2nq8g</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/tr</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>574963</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402272</id>
      <parentid>5400762</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12021" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Güncellenmiş bilgilere Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]] adresinden ulaşılabilir.}}

Oturum açmış durumdayken sağ üstteki [[Special:preferences|Tercihler]] bağlantısını tıklamak tercihlerinizi değiştirmenize olanak tanır.
Kullanıcı ayarları bölümü ve diğer ayar türlerini değiştirmek için en üstteki sekmeler çubuğu ile karşılaşacaksınız.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Kullanıcı adınız. Yalnızca güvenilen kullanıcılar kullanıcı adınızı değiştirebilir ve vikide de {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} uzantısı yüklü olmalıdır.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || İçinde bulunduğunuz kullanıcı gruplarının listesi.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Wikimedia wikilerinde bu bağlantı, hesabınıza erişmesine izin verilen harici uygulamaları yönetmenize olanak tanır. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Daha fazla bilgi için [[Help:OAuth|OAuth yardımı]] konusuna bakın.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Kaç düzenleme yaptınız. Tüm vikilerde buna sahip olmayacak.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || Hesabınızın kaydedildiği zaman.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|aşağıya bakınız]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|aşağıya bakınız]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || İki faktörlü kimlik doğrulamayı yönetin.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Küresel tercihleri ​​yönetin.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Parolanızı değiştirmek için ilk kutuya eski parolanızı, son iki parola ise yeni parolanızı girin.
Bu sitenin giriş bilgilerinizi hatırlamasını istiyorsanız, ''Bu bilgisayardaki giriş bilgilerimi hatırla'' seçeneğini işaretleyin.
Bu işlevin tarayıcınızda çerezleri etkinleştirmenizi gerektirdiğini ve çerezinizin silinmesi veya süresinin dolması durumunda artık hatırlanmayacağınızı unutmayın.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Küresel hesap ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
Tercihlerinizden arayüzün hangi dilde olmasını istediğinizi seçebilirsiniz.
Kenar çubuğundaki birkaç sayfaya ek olarak yalnızca 'düzenle' ve 'tartışma' gibi düğmeler etkilenecektir.
Sayfaların ana metni, sayfaların büyük çoğunluğu için bununla değişmeyecek, ancak Wikimedia Meta Viki'deki gibi bazı sayfalar olacak.

* Diller
* Nasıl tarif edilmeyi tercih edersiniz?
* Diğer dil ayarları

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Mevcut imzanız
* Yeni imza
** Wiki metin olarak değerlendir

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Bir e-posta adresi girdiyseniz, bu işlevleri kullanmak için ''adresi doğrula'' düğmesini tıklamanız gerekir. Bir e-posta alacaksınız; basitçe açın ve aşağıdaki işlevleri etkinleştirmek için bağlantıyı takip edin.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| E-posta onayı ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bu, diğer kayıtlı kullanıcıların, kullanıcı sayfanızın kenar çubuğundaki &quot;Bu kullanıcıya e-posta gönder&quot; bağlantısını kullanarak size bir e-posta göndermesine olanak tanır. E-postalar bir web arayüzü kullanılarak gönderilir ve siz e-posta ile cevap verene kadar e-posta adresiniz bir gönderene gösterilmez.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Bu, otomatik olarak onaylanmış izinleri olmayan kullanıcıların size e-posta göndermesini sağlar.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Bu seçenek, hangi kullanıcıların size doğrudan e-posta gönderemeyeceğini belirlemenizi sağlar. Kullanıcı sayfanızın kenar çubuğunda &quot;Bu kullanıcıya e-posta gönder&quot; bağlantısını görmezler. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Burada kullanmak istediğiniz cildi seçebilirsiniz. Her bir kaplamanın yanındaki &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; bağlantısını tıklayarak mevcut kaplamaları seçmeden önce önizleyebilirsiniz. Daha fazla bilgi için lütfen {{ll|Help:Skins}} bağlantısına bakın.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Tarih biçimi ve saat farkı ===

Tercihler doğrultusunda normal olarak aşağıdakiler yapılır:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Burada görüntülerin nasıl görüntüleneceğini belirleyebilirsiniz. Bir URL'nin doğrudan yapıştırılmasıyla görüntülenen resimler (wiki etkinse) bu ayardan etkilenmez.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Bu ayar, Resim: sayfalarında resim önizlemelerinin ne kadar büyük olacağını seçmenize olanak tanır. Geçerli ekran çözünürlüğünüzün ne olduğunu biliyorsanız, bunu kendi ekranınızdan bir veya iki boyuta ayarlamak isteyebilirsiniz. Yavaş bir bağlantınız varsa (çevirmeli ağ gibi) bunları 320×240 ile sınırlamak isteyebilirsiniz.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Küçük resimlerin ne kadar büyük görünmesini istediğinizi tanımlayın. Bu ayar, bir düzenleyici tarafından belirlenen boyutlara sahip küçük resimleri etkilemez ve görüntüleri orijinal boyutlarının ötesine taşımaz.
* Medya Görüntüleyiciyi Kullan: Wikimedia wikilerde, bu ayar (varsayılan olarak açıktır) daha düzgün bir görüntü izleme deneyimi sağlamak için [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Medya Görüntüleyici]]'nin kullanılıp kullanılmayacağını belirler.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Burada {{tag|math|open}} etiketini kullanarak açıklanan matematiksel denklemlerin nasıl görüntüleneceğini kontrol edebilirsiniz.
Resim olarak yüklenen veya matematik etiketinin dışına yazılan matematiksel formüller bu ayardan etkilenmez.
Matematik tercihlerinin yalnızca {{ll|Extension:Math}} yüklüyse görüneceğini unutmayın.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Bunlar, düzenlediğiniz veya oluşturduğunuz sayfaları otomatik olarak izleyip izlemeyeceğiniz de dahil olmak üzere, düzenleme sayfalarını kontrol eden ayarlardır.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Burada [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|son değişiklikleri]] sayfalarının ne kadar geriye gideceğini belirleyebilirsiniz. Düzenleme sayısı aşılırsa listenin erken duracağını unutmayın (aşağıya bakın).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Burada kaç düzenlemenin görüntüleneceğini belirleyebilirsiniz.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Bu, küçük olarak işaretlenmiş düzenlemeleri gizlemenizi sağlar (bkz. {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Bazı kullanıcılar, şablonları güncellemek veya yazım hatalarını düzeltmek için hızlı bir şekilde çok sayıda küçük ayar yapacağından, bunun yararlı olmasını sağlayabilirsiniz. Bunu, son değişiklikler sayfasından geçici olarak da açabilirsiniz (bkz. {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Geliştirilmiş son değişiklikler, düzenlemeleri sayfa başına listeye yoğunlaştırır. Belirtildiği gibi, bu JavaScript'in etkinleştirilmesini gerektirir. Bu özellik hakkında daha fazla bilgi için {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} sayfasına bakın.
* Son değişikliklerde Vikiveri düzenlemelerini göster: [[d: |Vikiveri]]'deki verilerin mevcut olduğu seçilen Wikimedia projelerinde, bu seçenek wikinizdeki sayfalara bağlı Vikiveri öğelerindeki değişiklikleri ve wiki sayfaları. Bu, wikinizde görülebilen Vikiveri'deki vandalizmi yakalamaya yardımcı olabilir.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Bunlar izleme listesinin davranışını kontrol eden ayarlardır ({{ll|Help:Watchlist}} sayfasına bakın).
Bu seçeneklerin çoğu izleme listesinin kendisinde de bulunur, ancak tercihlerinize göre ayarlayarak izleme listesinin varsayılan davranışını kontrol edersiniz, yani sayfayı her ziyaret ettiğinizde aynı işlemleri gerçekleştirir.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* İzleme listenizdeki Vikiveri düzenlemelerini göster: [[d:|Vikiveri]] verilerin verilerinin bulunduğu seçili Wikimedia projelerinde, bu seçenek wikinizdeki sayfalara bağlı Vikiveri öğelerindeki değişiklikleri ve wiki sayfaları. Bu, wikinizde görülebilen Vikiveri'deki vandalizmi yakalamaya yardımcı olabilir.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* İzleme listesi belirteci: Bu belirteç izleme listenizden bir [[w:tr:RSS|RSS yayını]] oluşturmak için kullanılır. Bu belirteci bilen herkes izleme listenize erişmek için kullanabilir. Belirteç başka biri tarafından bulunursa, yeni bir belirteç oluşturmak için &quot;Sıfırlamanız gerekiyorsa burayı tıklayın&quot; bağlantısını kullanabilirsiniz. Bunu yaptıktan sonra, yeni jetonu hesaba katmak için yayın okuyucunuzdaki yayın aboneliğinizin URL'sini düzenlemeniz gerekir.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Kaç sonuç görüntüleneceğini ve her sonuç için ne kadar bağlam gösterileceğini içeren aramalar için varsayılan ayarlar.
İlk kez bir şey ararken, göstermek istediğiniz ad alanlarının yanındaki kutuları işaretleyin.
Gerçek bir arama yaparken, arama sonuçları ekranının altındaki kutuları işaretleyerek veya işaretlerini kaldırarak bunu geçersiz kılabilirsiniz.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
Wikimedia wikilerde, '''Beta özellikler''' sekmesi, deneysel özellikleri herkesin kullanımına sunmadan önce etkinleştirmenizi sağlar.
Bu özelliklerden herhangi birini açmayı seçerseniz, hatalarla ve sorunlarla karşılaşmaya hazır olmalısınız ve geliştirme devam ederken özelliğin görünüşünde veya çalışma biçiminde ani değişiklikler görebilirsiniz.

Her özelliğin yanında bir &quot;tartışma&quot; bağlantısı bulunur, böylece önerilerinizi sunabilir veya sorunları bildirebilirsiniz.

Daha fazla bilgi için [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|Beta Özellikleri Hakkında]] sayfasına bakın.

* Tüm yeni beta özelliklerini otomatik olarak etkinleştir: Bu seçeneği açarsanız, yeni Beta özellikleri Beta Özellikleri sistemine eklenir eklenmez sizin için etkin hale gelir.

== Ayrıca bakınız ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ca8jkrsfyt1lfjegvuy99jdvplbwv45</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402315</id>
      <parentid>5402272</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:09:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11970" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Güncellenmiş bilgilere Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]] adresinden ulaşılabilir.}}

Oturum açmış durumdayken sağ üstteki [[Special:preferences|Tercihler]] bağlantısını tıklamak tercihlerinizi değiştirmenize olanak tanır.
Kullanıcı ayarları bölümü ve diğer ayar türlerini değiştirmek için en üstteki sekmeler çubuğu ile karşılaşacaksınız.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Kullanıcı adınız. Yalnızca güvenilen kullanıcılar kullanıcı adınızı değiştirebilir ve vikide de {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} uzantısı yüklü olmalıdır.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || İçinde bulunduğunuz kullanıcı gruplarının listesi.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Wikimedia wikilerinde bu bağlantı, hesabınıza erişmesine izin verilen harici uygulamaları yönetmenize olanak tanır. Daha fazla bilgi için {{ll|Help:OAuth}} sayfasına bakın.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Kaç düzenleme yaptınız. Tüm vikilerde buna sahip olmayacak.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || Hesabınızın kaydedildiği zaman.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|aşağıya bakınız]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|aşağıya bakınız]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || İki faktörlü kimlik doğrulamayı yönetin.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Küresel tercihleri ​​yönetin.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Parolanızı değiştirmek için ilk kutuya eski parolanızı, son iki parola ise yeni parolanızı girin.
Bu sitenin giriş bilgilerinizi hatırlamasını istiyorsanız, ''Bu bilgisayardaki giriş bilgilerimi hatırla'' seçeneğini işaretleyin.
Bu işlevin tarayıcınızda çerezleri etkinleştirmenizi gerektirdiğini ve çerezinizin silinmesi veya süresinin dolması durumunda artık hatırlanmayacağınızı unutmayın.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Küresel hesap ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
Tercihlerinizden arayüzün hangi dilde olmasını istediğinizi seçebilirsiniz.
Kenar çubuğundaki birkaç sayfaya ek olarak yalnızca 'düzenle' ve 'tartışma' gibi düğmeler etkilenecektir.
Sayfaların ana metni, sayfaların büyük çoğunluğu için bununla değişmeyecek, ancak Wikimedia Meta Viki'deki gibi bazı sayfalar olacak.

* Diller
* Nasıl tarif edilmeyi tercih edersiniz?
* Diğer dil ayarları

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Mevcut imzanız
* Yeni imza
** Wiki metin olarak değerlendir

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Bir e-posta adresi girdiyseniz, bu işlevleri kullanmak için ''adresi doğrula'' düğmesini tıklamanız gerekir. Bir e-posta alacaksınız; basitçe açın ve aşağıdaki işlevleri etkinleştirmek için bağlantıyı takip edin.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| E-posta onayı ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bu, diğer kayıtlı kullanıcıların, kullanıcı sayfanızın kenar çubuğundaki &quot;Bu kullanıcıya e-posta gönder&quot; bağlantısını kullanarak size bir e-posta göndermesine olanak tanır. E-postalar bir web arayüzü kullanılarak gönderilir ve siz e-posta ile cevap verene kadar e-posta adresiniz bir gönderene gösterilmez.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Bu, otomatik olarak onaylanmış izinleri olmayan kullanıcıların size e-posta göndermesini sağlar.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Bu seçenek, hangi kullanıcıların size doğrudan e-posta gönderemeyeceğini belirlemenizi sağlar. Kullanıcı sayfanızın kenar çubuğunda &quot;Bu kullanıcıya e-posta gönder&quot; bağlantısını görmezler. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Burada kullanmak istediğiniz cildi seçebilirsiniz. Her bir kaplamanın yanındaki &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; bağlantısını tıklayarak mevcut kaplamaları seçmeden önce önizleyebilirsiniz. Daha fazla bilgi için lütfen {{ll|Help:Skins}} bağlantısına bakın.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Tarih biçimi ve saat farkı ===

Tercihler doğrultusunda normal olarak aşağıdakiler yapılır:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Burada görüntülerin nasıl görüntüleneceğini belirleyebilirsiniz. Bir URL'nin doğrudan yapıştırılmasıyla görüntülenen resimler (wiki etkinse) bu ayardan etkilenmez.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Bu ayar, Resim: sayfalarında resim önizlemelerinin ne kadar büyük olacağını seçmenize olanak tanır. Geçerli ekran çözünürlüğünüzün ne olduğunu biliyorsanız, bunu kendi ekranınızdan bir veya iki boyuta ayarlamak isteyebilirsiniz. Yavaş bir bağlantınız varsa (çevirmeli ağ gibi) bunları 320×240 ile sınırlamak isteyebilirsiniz.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Küçük resimlerin ne kadar büyük görünmesini istediğinizi tanımlayın. Bu ayar, bir düzenleyici tarafından belirlenen boyutlara sahip küçük resimleri etkilemez ve görüntüleri orijinal boyutlarının ötesine taşımaz.
* Medya Görüntüleyiciyi Kullan: Wikimedia wikilerde, bu ayar (varsayılan olarak açıktır) daha düzgün bir görüntü izleme deneyimi sağlamak için [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Medya Görüntüleyici]]'nin kullanılıp kullanılmayacağını belirler.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Burada {{tag|math|open}} etiketini kullanarak açıklanan matematiksel denklemlerin nasıl görüntüleneceğini kontrol edebilirsiniz.
Resim olarak yüklenen veya matematik etiketinin dışına yazılan matematiksel formüller bu ayardan etkilenmez.
Matematik tercihlerinin yalnızca {{ll|Extension:Math}} yüklüyse görüneceğini unutmayın.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Bunlar, düzenlediğiniz veya oluşturduğunuz sayfaları otomatik olarak izleyip izlemeyeceğiniz de dahil olmak üzere, düzenleme sayfalarını kontrol eden ayarlardır.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Burada [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|son değişiklikleri]] sayfalarının ne kadar geriye gideceğini belirleyebilirsiniz. Düzenleme sayısı aşılırsa listenin erken duracağını unutmayın (aşağıya bakın).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Burada kaç düzenlemenin görüntüleneceğini belirleyebilirsiniz.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - Bu, küçük olarak işaretlenmiş düzenlemeleri gizlemenizi sağlar (bkz. {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Bazı kullanıcılar, şablonları güncellemek veya yazım hatalarını düzeltmek için hızlı bir şekilde çok sayıda küçük ayar yapacağından, bunun yararlı olmasını sağlayabilirsiniz. Bunu, son değişiklikler sayfasından geçici olarak da açabilirsiniz (bkz. {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Geliştirilmiş son değişiklikler, düzenlemeleri sayfa başına listeye yoğunlaştırır. Belirtildiği gibi, bu JavaScript'in etkinleştirilmesini gerektirir. Bu özellik hakkında daha fazla bilgi için {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} sayfasına bakın.
* Son değişikliklerde Vikiveri düzenlemelerini göster: [[d: |Vikiveri]]'deki verilerin mevcut olduğu seçilen Wikimedia projelerinde, bu seçenek wikinizdeki sayfalara bağlı Vikiveri öğelerindeki değişiklikleri ve wiki sayfaları. Bu, wikinizde görülebilen Vikiveri'deki vandalizmi yakalamaya yardımcı olabilir.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Bunlar izleme listesinin davranışını kontrol eden ayarlardır ({{ll|Help:Watchlist}} sayfasına bakın).
Bu seçeneklerin çoğu izleme listesinin kendisinde de bulunur, ancak tercihlerinize göre ayarlayarak izleme listesinin varsayılan davranışını kontrol edersiniz, yani sayfayı her ziyaret ettiğinizde aynı işlemleri gerçekleştirir.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* İzleme listenizdeki Vikiveri düzenlemelerini göster: [[d:|Vikiveri]] verilerin verilerinin bulunduğu seçili Wikimedia projelerinde, bu seçenek wikinizdeki sayfalara bağlı Vikiveri öğelerindeki değişiklikleri ve wiki sayfaları. Bu, wikinizde görülebilen Vikiveri'deki vandalizmi yakalamaya yardımcı olabilir.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* İzleme listesi belirteci: Bu belirteç izleme listenizden bir [[w:tr:RSS|RSS yayını]] oluşturmak için kullanılır. Bu belirteci bilen herkes izleme listenize erişmek için kullanabilir. Belirteç başka biri tarafından bulunursa, yeni bir belirteç oluşturmak için &quot;Sıfırlamanız gerekiyorsa burayı tıklayın&quot; bağlantısını kullanabilirsiniz. Bunu yaptıktan sonra, yeni jetonu hesaba katmak için yayın okuyucunuzdaki yayın aboneliğinizin URL'sini düzenlemeniz gerekir.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Kaç sonuç görüntüleneceğini ve her sonuç için ne kadar bağlam gösterileceğini içeren aramalar için varsayılan ayarlar.
İlk kez bir şey ararken, göstermek istediğiniz ad alanlarının yanındaki kutuları işaretleyin.
Gerçek bir arama yaparken, arama sonuçları ekranının altındaki kutuları işaretleyerek veya işaretlerini kaldırarak bunu geçersiz kılabilirsiniz.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
Wikimedia wikilerde, '''Beta özellikler''' sekmesi, deneysel özellikleri herkesin kullanımına sunmadan önce etkinleştirmenizi sağlar.
Bu özelliklerden herhangi birini açmayı seçerseniz, hatalarla ve sorunlarla karşılaşmaya hazır olmalısınız ve geliştirme devam ederken özelliğin görünüşünde veya çalışma biçiminde ani değişiklikler görebilirsiniz.

Her özelliğin yanında bir &quot;tartışma&quot; bağlantısı bulunur, böylece önerilerinizi sunabilir veya sorunları bildirebilirsiniz.

Daha fazla bilgi için [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|Beta Özellikleri Hakkında]] sayfasına bakın.

* Tüm yeni beta özelliklerini otomatik olarak etkinleştir: Bu seçeneği açarsanız, yeni Beta özellikleri Beta Özellikleri sistemine eklenir eklenmez sizin için etkin hale gelir.

== Ayrıca bakınız ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>21qzdnf83ht1icj4d2izz90civ0nih7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Software bundles/1/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>575621</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402752</id>
      <parentid>2109178</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:32:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="174" xml:space="preserve">La [[$install|instalación manual]] de MediaWiki puede ser un proceso complejo y ocupar mucho tiempo, sobre todo para usuarios poco familiarizados con los aspectos técnicos.</text>
      <sha1>ib0l8ouzetvm8lqc1ok5ha9xr6dtl8c</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/el</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>575984</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402763</id>
      <parentid>2117963</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:40:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="166" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Βοήθεια στη χρήση προτύπων παραπομπών]] ή [[$2|Βοήθεια για τη χρήση του κουμπιού $3 του citoid]]</text>
      <sha1>ks35gflmfx6fe1l7l49asar4gfiit0h</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/it</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>577047</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401799</id>
      <parentid>5184879</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/es</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>577613</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402609</id>
      <parentid>4578044</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3734" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Las discusiones estructuradas (antes conocidas como Flow) son [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|un proyecto]] del del equipo de colaboración de la Fundación Wikimedia para construir una discusión moderna y un sistema de colaboración en Wikimedia.

== Guía rápida ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|Cómo se ven las discusiones estructuradas - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|¡Pruébalo!]]]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Descubre en una página por qué hicimos las discusiones estructuradas y cómo usarlas]]''':
* [[$basics|conocimientos básicos sobre edición]], 
* [[$post|publicar una respuesta]] (a la discusión global o a una persona específica en una conversación global), 
* [[$create|crear una discusión]], 
* [[$watch|ver un tema o un panel entero]], 
* [[$notifications|recibir notificaciones]],
* [[$browse|buscar y archivar temas]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Hay algunos términos específicos sobre las discusiones estructuradas. Estos han sido definidos en '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|el Glosario]]'''.

¿Las discusiones estructuradas no te funcionan? Por favor, comprueba '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|si puedes arreglar el problema]]'''.

== Herramientas avanzadas ==

Algunas herramientas avanzadas están disponibles, para propósitos específicos. Ellos se han reagrupado sobre estos temas:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Activación}}
:¿Qué sucederá cuando el Flow está activado en una página?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Temas}}
:Filtrar temas, Editar un tema/mensaje, Resumir un tema, Resolver un tema
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Enlaces permanentes}}
:Cómo crear enlaces a temas
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Notificaciones y lista de seguimiento}}
:Las notificaciones que recibes y las diferentes entradas en las listas de seguimiento
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Historial}}
:Cómo funciona el sistema del historial
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Administración}}
:Ocultar, Borrar, Suprimir temas
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Precarga}}
:Precarga de contenidos en una nueva conversación de discusiones estructuradas
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Accesos directos}}
:Atajos de teclado para utilizar en el modo de edición visual.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Toda la documentación en una página.}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>34dhldd7znj3ekalyl0qcee57ifsib3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/tr</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>577645</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402948</id>
      <parentid>5355671</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="43734" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Temel genel bakış ==

=== Dosya transferi ===

Dosyaları aktarmak için bir yöntem seçin:

* [[w:tr:Wget|wget]]
* [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] veya [[w:tr:WinSCP|WinSCP]] ile güvenli kopyalama
* [[w:tr:SFTP|SSH Dosya Aktarım Protokolü]] (SFTP)
* Bir [[w:tr:Dosya aktarım iletişim kuralı|FTP]] istemcisi kullanma.
* Sunucu barındırma şirketi web tarayıcısı üzerinden bir dosya yöneticisi arayüzü sağlayabilir; servis sağlayıcınıza danışın.
* Başka diğer yöntemler. [[w:List of file transfer protocols|Dosya aktarım protokolleri listesi]]'ne bakabilirsiniz.

=== Ön hazırlık ===

MediaWiki içindeki {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=UPGRADE}} metin dosyasını okuyun.

# Gereksinimleri kontrol edin
# RELEASE-NOTES dosyasını okuyun
# UPGRADE dosyasını okuyun
# Mevcut dosyaları ve veritabanını yedekleyin
# Yeni dosyaların paketini açın
# Eklentileri yükseltin
# Veritabanını kontrol etmek için güncelleme komut dosyasını çalıştırın
# Güncelleme testini yapın
# Eski kurulumlardan kalanları kaldırın

== Kontrol gereksinimleri == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} aşağıdakilere gereksinim duymaktadır:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* ve aşağıdakilerden biri:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Sürüm 1.36'dan bu yana, MediaWiki yalnızca iki LTS sürümünden önceki yükseltmeleri desteklemeyi taahhüt eder ([[phab:T259771]] sayfasına bakın). MediaWiki'nin eski sürümlerinden yükseltmelerin birden çok adımda gerçekleştirilmesi gerekecektir.
Bu, 1.23'ten veya önceki sürümlerden 1.36'ya yükseltmek istiyorsanız, öncelikle 1.23 vikinizi 1.27'ye (veya 1.35'e) yükseltmeniz gerekeceği ve 1.27'den (veya 1.35'ten) 1.36'ya yükseltebileceğiniz anlamına gelir.

Eğer PostgreSQL kullanıyorsanız lütfen {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}} bölümünü de okuyun.

Daha fazla bilgi için lütfen {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} ve {{ll|Compatibility}}'i okuyun.

== Sürüm notlarını okuyun ==
Tarball dağıtım dosyası içinde, veya [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] tarafından teslim edilen/ihraç edilen dosyalar içinde, adı büyük harflerle yazılmış dosyalardan biri olan '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|viki]]) içeren bir dosya var.
Şimdi paketi açıp ve bu sürümde nelerin değiştiğini öğrenmenin zamanı geldi.
UPGRADE dosyasındaki talimatları da okumalısınız.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Bekleyen işlerin kaldırılması ==
Performans nedenleriyle, veritabanındaki bazı işler ertelenir ve [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|iş kuyruğu]] tarafından yönetilir.
Bu ertelenen işler veritabanında saklanır ve gerçekleşmesi gereken eylemler hakkında bilgi veren parametreleri içerir.
Bu bekleyen işleri, parametre özelliklerinin yeni sürümde değişmesi durumunda başarısız olmasını önlemeniz için vikiyi yükseltmeden önce çalıştırmanız kesinlikle önerilmektedir.
Tüm bekleyen işleri çalıştırmak ve yükseltmeyi gerçekleştirmeden önce sırayı temizlemek için {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} kullanın.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Mevcut dosyaları ve veritabanını yedekle ==

:''Tam talimatlar: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

Yükseltme komut dosyaları iyi-korunmuş ve sağlam olsa da, işler yine de ters gidebilir. Veritabanı şemasını güncellemeye başlamadan önce, hem veritabanını hem de dosyaları içeren, vikinin '''tam [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|yedeğini]]''' alın:

* vikinin içeriği, veritabanından (karakter setinin doğru şekilde belirlendiğinden emin olmak için önce LocalSettings.php dosyasını kontrol edin). SQL dökümanı dökümüne ek olarak bir XML dökümü oluşturmak iyi bir fikir olabilir.
:* MySQL, hem SQL dökümü hem de XML dökümü, &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; komutuyla birlikte kullanılmaktadır:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, veritabanı dökümü için &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; komutu ile birlikte kullanılmaktadır:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, yedek oluşturmak için bir MediaWiki komut dosyası kullanıyorsunuz:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* resimler ve diğer medya dosyaları (&lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; dizininin içeriği, özel logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* yapılandırma dosyaları, ör. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (eğer varsa)
* MediaWiki'nin tüm kabuk ve eklentilerini içeren program dosyalarını, özellikle bunları değiştirdiyseniz.

== Yeni dosyaların paketini açma ==

=== Bir tarball paketi kullanma ===

FTP veya komut satırı kullanarak yeni dosyaları yükleyebilirsiniz. Erişiminiz varsa komut satırını kullanın! Komut satırını kullanmak, binlerce dosyanın her birini FTP ile yüklemekten çok daha hızlı olacaktır.

{{Note|1=Açılmış tarball'ınızı sunucunuzdaki yeni ve boş bir klasöre yerleştirmelisiniz. Eğer yeni sürümü doğrudan yeni bir dizin yerine eski sürümünüzün üstünde yüklerseniz, [[#Back up existing files and the database|Var olan dosyaları ve veritabanını yedekle]] bölümünde açıklanan talimatları izlemelisiniz. Aksi takdirde, herhangi bir özelleştirme yaptıysanız, bunları yeniden uygulamak için herhangi bir başvuru yapmadan ayrılmanızı sağlayacak şekilde silebilirsiniz. MediaWiki'nin canlı kopyasının üstünde yeni bir tarball yükleme, MediaWiki'nin eski sürümündeki bazı dosyaları geride bırakabilir ve bu da güncellemenin kodunu etkileyebilir. Bu sebeple yeni dosyaları yeni bir dizinde açmanız ve daha sonra özelleştirmeleri yeni dizine uygulamanız (LocalSettings.php, resimler klasörü, eklentileri ve özel kabuklar gibi diğer özelleştirmeleri geri yüklemeniz önerilir)}}

==== FTP veya grafik ====

Eğer sunucunuzdaki komut satırına erişemiyorsanız, MediaWiki tarball'ını yerel bilgisayarınıza indirin ve yerel bilgisayarda tarball'ı çıkarmak için [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] kullanın.

Dosyaları bilgisayarınıza çıkardıktan sonra, en sevdiğiniz FTP istemci yazılımını kullanarak dizinleri ve dosyaları sunucuya yükleyiniz.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Komut satırı ====
Mevcut kullanıcı viki kurulum dizinleri üzerinde tam yazma izinine sahip değilse &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; komutunu kullanarak çalıştırmanız gerekebilir.
Normalde bir tarball paketini açtığınızda, yeni viki sürümü için yeni bir dizin oluşturulur ve eski kurulum dizininizden eski yapılandırma dosyaları ve resim dizinini kopyalamanız gerekir:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

(Open)Solaris kullanıcıları &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, veya:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Diğer dosyalar ===

Tarball'ı yükledikten sonra, bazı dosya ve klasörleri eski kurulum dizininden yeni bir dizine kopyalamanız veya taşımanız gerekir:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* $code-lc, eski yapılandırma ayarlarınızı içerir.&lt;/span&gt;
* Yüklenen tüm dosyaları içeren wiki &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (veya eski sürümlerdeki &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt;) dizininin, farklı bir yükleme dizini seçmediyseniz, sahipliğini ve izinleri değiştirin. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (Örneğin. web kullanıcınız &quot;apache&quot; ise).
* &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; dizinindeki bazı eklentiler. Güncellenmiş eklentileri her zaman almalısınız, eski uzantıların MediaWiki'nin yeni bir sürümüyle çalışması garanti edilmez.
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|Özel bir logo]] kullanmanız durumunda, bu dosyanın da yedekten geri yüklenmesi gerekiyor. 1.24 öncesi sürümlerde kabuklar genellikle &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt; dizininde yer almaktadır. 1.24 sonrası sürümlerde sizin tercihinize göre &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; veya &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; dizininde yer almaktadır. Sonra LocalSettings.php ye ekleme yapınız ör. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; gibi.
* 1.35 için logoları [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]] üzerinden geri yüklemeniz gerekebilir. Ardından LocalSettings.php örneğine ekleyin, ör. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; dizinindeki özel kabuklar.
* Eski kurulum dosyalarında veya eklentilerde yapılan değişiklikler.
* Herhangi bir .htaccess dosyası (Apache kullanıyorsanız ve onlarda herhangi bir kural tanımladıysanız).

İşiniz bittiğinde, bu yeni klasörü web sunucusundaki yayınlanmış klasör yapın veya eski kurulum dizinini yeniden adlandırın ve yenisini eski adla eşleşecek şekilde yeniden adlandırın.

=== Git kullanımı ===

Eğer {{ll|Download from Git|Git}} kullanılıyorsa, dosyaları yeni bir konumda dışarı aktarınız, ve önceki özelleştirilmiş dosyaları bir önceki bölümde açıklandığı gibi yeni konuma kopyalayınız.

Bazı harici PHP kütüphaneleri Composer veya Wikimedia wiki çiftliği için sağlanan belirli bir koleksiyon kullanarak kurmanız gerekecektir.
Harici kütüphanelerin yüklenmesi ve güncellenmesi ile ilgili daha fazla bilgi [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git indirme belgesinde]] bulunabilir.

=== Yama kullanma ===
Küçük bir sürüm güncellemesi için genellikle küçük bir yama dosyası kullanılabilir.
Bunu kullanmak için [[:tr:patch (Unix)|patch]] dosyasını indirmeniz gerekecek.
Yama dosyasını [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ dökümler sitesinden] elle indirin ve çıkarın veya aşağıdaki wget ile yönergeleri izleyin.
Yamalar aşamalıdır, bir sürümü '''atlayamazsınız'''.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; ana MediaWiki dizinine (LocalSettings.php ile birlikte).
# Yama eki dosyasını indirin ve &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; yapınız.
# Neyin değiştiğini kontrol etmek için &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; komutunu kullanın (''örn.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Eğer her şey yolundaysa,  &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt; olmadan tekrar &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt;'i çalıştırın.
# Special:Version sayfasını kontrol ediniz. Yeni sürüm numarasını bu sayfada görmelisiniz.

=== Kalan dosyalar hatalara neden olabilir ===

Eski kurulum dizininin olduğu yere paketini açarsanız, bazı eski dosyalar yeni sürümde sorunlara sebep olabilir.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Eğer [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profil]] kullanmıyorsanız, ancak MediaWiki kök klasörünüzde bir &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyası varsa, &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt; bağlı hataları alabilirsiniz.
&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasının silinmesi veya yeniden adlandırılması bu hatayı çözer. MediaWiki kök klasöründe bulunan &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; dosyası gelecekte profil oluşturmayı etkinleştirmeniz durumunda bir şablon görevi görebilir.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23 temel görünüm dosyalarının otomatik görünüm bulma mekanizmasını kaldırır. Bu sürüme yükselttikten sonra, doğrudan &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; dizinindeki &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; eski dosyalarının yanı sıra &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; dizinindeki ilgili alt klasörlerin kaldırıldığından emin olmalısınız. MediaWiki, hatırlamanıza yardımcı olacak herhangi biri hala bulunursa uyarıları kaydeder. (Benzer bir kurala uymak için özel kaplamaları da ayarlamanız gerekir.) Ayrıntılar için {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} bölümüne bakın.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 çekirdek kabuk dosyalarının yollarını değiştirdi. Bu sürüme geçtikten sonra, eski &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyalarının doğrudan &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; dizininde artık bulunmadığından emin olmanız gerekir.

== Eklentilerin güncellenmesi ==

Bazı eklentiler MediaWiki'nin yeni sürümüyle çalışmak için güncellendiler. Bu tür uzantıları en son sürümlerine yükseltmeyi unutmayınız. Özel uzantılar için elle güncelleme yapmanız gerekebilir.

Farklı [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarbalları]] eklentileri bazı alt grupları içerir ve MediaWiki çekirdeğiniz için doğru olan sürümü seçmenize yardımcı olur.

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Uzantı Dağıtıcı]], MediaWiki'nin desteklenen sürümleriyle çalışacak eklentilerin enstantanesini almak isteyen kullanıcılar için iyi çalışmaktadır.

Eğer daha fazla eklenti istiyorsanız o zaman [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|Git deposundan indirme]] muhtemelen sizin için en iyisidir.
Git'iniz yoksa ancak çok sayıda uzantıyı yükseltmek istiyorsanız, [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]] kullanmayı düşünebilirsiniz.

== LocalSettings.php'nizi uyarlayın ==

Eski sürümlerdeki &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasını kullanırsanız, yeni sürümlerde bunun nasıl uygulayacağını ayarlamanız gerekebilir:

=== Kabuk kaydı ===

MediaWiki'nin 1.24 sürümünden itibaren, Vector, Monobook, Modern ve CologneBlue gibi paket kabuklar artık MediaWiki çekirdeğinin bir parçası değildir. Bunları kullanmak için paketlerin &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasında kayıtlı olması gerekir; aksi takdirde MediaWiki sizi kabukları yüklemediğiniz konusunda uyaracaktır.

1.24 sürümünden daha güncel bir sürüme güncelleme yaparken bu kabuklardan birini kullanmak olmak istiyorsanız &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasına eklemeniz gereken şey aşağıdaki gibidir:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Diğer kabuklar henüz yeni [[Manual:Extension registration|kabuk kayıt]] sistemine uyarlanmamış olabilir, bu sebeple, herhangi bir sorun çıkması durumunda doğru bir şekilde nasıl kayıt olacağını görmek için her bir kabuğun dokümantasyon sayfasına bakınız.

=== Uzantı kaydı ===

MediaWiki'nin 1.25 sürümünden itibaren, uzantılar yeni [[Manual:Extension registration|uzantı kayıt]] sistemi kullanıyor.

Daha önceki &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyası şöyle bir şey içeriyordu:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Bu, aşağıdaki biçime dönüştürüldü:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Uzantılar yeni eklenti kayıt sistemini kullanacak şekilde uyarlanmaktadır.
Uyarlanmamış uzantılar, eski kurulum biçimini kullanmalıdır.
Daha fazla bilgi için eklentinin sayfasındaki kurulum talimatlarına bakın.

=== Diğer değişiklikler ===
Bazı değişkenler eskimiş veya kaldırılmış olabilir.
Onları &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;'e yerleştirmek genellikle herhangi bir etkiye sahip olmayacaktır.
Yeni sürümlerde yeni değişkenler eklenmiş veya mevcut bazı değişkenlerin türü değiştirmiş olabilir.
Genellikle değişkenler için mümkün olduğunca tür değiştirme durumunda geriye dönük olarak uyumlu olalım diye varsayılan yapıyı kullanmaya çalışırız.
Her durumda, bu değişiklikleri görmek için sürüm notlarına göz atınız.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Güncelleme komut dosyasını çalıştırın ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
MediaWiki veritabanını iki şekilde yükseltebilirsiniz: Komut satırından veya web tarayıcısından. Sunucunuzun komut satırına erişiminiz varsa, zaman aşımı veya bağlantının kesilmesi riskini azalttığı için, güncelleme işleminin komut satırından yapılması önerilir.

Komut dosyası ayrıca MediaWiki'nin ihtiyaç duyduğu eksik bağımlı paketleri indirmeye çalışacaktır.

=== Komut satırı ===

Sunucunuzun komut satırına veya SSH kabuğuna veya benzerine erişin. Komut satırına sunucunuza SSH üzerinden bağlanarak erişebilirsiniz. Üzerinde çalıştığınız yerel bilgisayar Microsoft Windows çalıştırıyorsa, SSH'yi kullanmak için [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] gibi bir araca ihtiyacınız olacaktır. Komut satırından veya Kabuktan &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; dizinine geçin ve [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|betik güncellemesini]] komutunu yürütün:

 $ php update.php

Bir Linux sunucusunda hata alırsanız root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;) ile aynı komutu gerçekleştirmeyi deneyin.
Windows'ta basit kurulumlar için not (ör. {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}} ile):
Öncelikle web sunucunuzun (Apache gibi) ve veritabanınızın (MySQL gibi) çalıştığından emin olun.
Ardından &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt; çalıştırın: sağ tıklayın, Birlikte Aç'ı seçin ve &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt; ile göz atın.
Sonuçta ortaya çıkan komut istemi penceresi, şema yükseltmesi tamamlandığında otomatik olarak kapanır.

PHP sürümünüzün çok eski olduğunu ve MediaWiki'nin daha yeni bir sürüme ihtiyacı olduğunu belirten bir mesaj görebilirsiniz.
Bu mesajdan sonra güncelleme iptal edilir.
Bu hatanın nedeni, komut satırının, web sunucusundan MediaWiki'yi çalıştırdığınızda sahip olduğunuzdan farklı bir PHP sürümü kullanabilmesidir.
Bu mesajı aldığınızda, farklı bir komut kullanarak kabukta daha yeni bir PHP sürümünü çalıştırıp çalıştıramayacağınızı kontrol etmelisiniz: Bu, ör.  ''php5'' veya ''php56'' olabilir.
Başka bir sürüm varsa ve öyleyse, hangi ad altında, sunucunuzun kurulumuna bağlıdır.
İşe yaramazsa, sunucunuza sorun; mutlaka bilecekler.

MediaWiki mevcut şemayı inceler ve gerektiğinde tablo ve sütun ekleyerek yeni kodla çalışacak şekilde günceller.

{{Note|1=[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Paylaşılan veritabanı]] kullanırsanız, paylaşılan tabloların güncellenmesini istiyorsanız &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parametresini iletmeniz gerekir. Aksi takdirde güncelleme komut dosyası tarafından dokunulmazlar.}}

==== php update.php herhangi bir şey yapmazsa, hızlı bir duraklamayla sonuçlanırsa ve ardından komut istemine geri dönerse ne yapmalı ====

Bu, hatalı çalışan bir uzantı veya görünümden kaynaklanabilir.

* LocalSettings.php olarak adlandırılan tüm uzantıların ve görünümlerin mevcut olup olmadığını kontrol edin
* Uzantıların doğru kayıt yöntemini kullandığını kontrol edin (wfLoadExtension ve require_once)
* Uzantıların ilk yarısını LocalSettings.php olarak yorumlayın. Bu, update.php çalışmasına neden oluyorsa, bu yarının yarısını kaldırın (yani uzantıların 1/4'ü). Bu, update.php çalışmasına neden OLMUYORSA, ilk yarının yorumunu kaldırın, ancak ikinci yarıyı yorumlayın ve ardından ikinci yarının yarısını yorumlayın, vb. Başarısız olanı bulmak için update.php çalışana kadar tekrarlayın.

==== &quot;ALTER komutu kullanıcıya reddedildi&quot; hatası (veya benzeri) durumunda ne yapmalı ====

Betiklerin aşağıdakine benzer bir mesajla iptal edilmesi durumunda:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

Bu, {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} dosyanızda (ana dizinde) {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} ve {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} tanımladığınızı kontrol etmeniz gerektiği anlamına gelir. Bunlar, veritabanına erişmek için bu komut dosyasının ihtiyaç duyduğu kullanıcı ve paroladır.

Bazı durumlarda, mysql kullanıldığında bile $wgDBname yerine tablo adının güncellenmesi için eski bir $wgDBmwschema değişkeni (Postgres için) okunuyor gibi görünüyor. Bu durumda, LocalSettings.php dosyasındaki $wgDBmwschema tanımından kurtulun.

==== &quot;Beklenmeyen T_STRING&quot; hatası durumunda ne yapmalı ====

Komut satırından update.php çalıştıran kişiler aşağıdaki hatayla karşılaşabilir:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

Bu hata, update.php php4'ten çalıştırıldığında oluşur.

Sitelerini hem php4 hem de php5 sağlayan sağlayıcılar tarafından barındırılan kişiler aşağıdaki adımları atmalıdır:

# komut satırından 'whereis php5' komutunu girin
# php5 yolunun yerini belirledikten sonra php5/bin dizininin içeriğini listeleyin
# php yürütülebilir dosyasının adını (php veya php5) belirledikten sonra, update.php dosyasını yürütmek için tüm yolu yazın

Aşağıda bir örnek verilmiştir:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

==== 'register_argc_argv false olarak ayarlanırsa' hata ne yapılır = ===

Hatayla karşılaşabilirsiniz:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# ~/maintenance bölümüne gidin. Mevcut bir 'php.ini' dosyasını düzenleyin veya oluşturun. 
# Aşağıdaki gibi bir satır ekleyin:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasını yeniden çalıştırın

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
=== Web tarayıcısı ===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Ayrıca bkz. {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Veritabanınız zaten büyükse ve yüksek üretimde kullanılıyorsa, Web güncelleyicisini kullanmamalısınız, ör. çünkü güncelleme işlemi ''maximum_execution_time'' ulaşıldığında zaman aşımına uğrayacaktır. Bu durumda, komut satırı arabiriminden [[update.php]] kullanmalısınız (web'den değil). Tam olarak &quot;çok büyük&quot; olan şey sunucunuza bağlıdır (örneğin performansı, yükü ve PHP'nin maksimum yürütme süresinin komut dosyasının çalışmasına izin verdiği süreye bağlıdır). Vikiniz web güncelleyici için çok büyükse ve barındırma sağlayıcınız komut satırı erişimine izin vermiyorsa, vikinizi başka bir barındırma hesabına, tercihen kabuk erişimi olan bir hesaba taşımanız gerekir.

# Veritabanı bakımı yapmadan önce daima [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|yedekleyin]].
# Web tarayıcınızda &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt; adresine girin. Örneğin, sizin vikiniz &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; ise, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;'ye girin.
# Dilinizi seçin ve devam et'i tıklayın.
# Mevcut kurulum tespit edilmelidir. Yükseltmek için ekrandaki talimatları izleyin.&lt;br/&gt;&quot;Yükseltme anahtarı&quot; istenirse, {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} dosyanızı açın ve {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}} atanan anahtarı arayın.

Web güncelleyici çalışmıyor gibi görünebilir: Başlangıçtaki dil seçim ekranını görmek yerine, muhtemelen bazı hata mesajlarıyla boş bir wiki sayfası görebilirsiniz. Bu durumda, büyük olasılıkla web sunucunuzun Yeniden Yazım Kurallarını (büyük olasılıkla [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|kısa URL'ler]] için) kullanması muhtemeldir; bunlar size ''mw-config/'' de güncelleyiciyi değil, ''Mw-config/'', büyük &quot;M&quot; ile. Bu durumda, güncelleme zamanı için ''.htaccess'' dosyasını yeniden adlandırın. Ardından web güncelleyiciye erişebilmeniz gerekir.

{{Warning|1=Bu yöntemi kullanırsanız, yükseltme betiği çalıştırdıktan sonra '''.htaccess dosyasının adını geri değiştirdiğinizden emin olun'''! Aksi takdirde kısa URL'ler ve muhtemelen diğer şeyler bozulur!}}

== Güncellemeyi test et ==

Güncelleme tamamlandıktan sonra, vikiye göz atınız ve aşağıdaki işlemlerin beklendiği gibi çalıştığını kontrol ediniz:

* Sayfaları görüntüleme
* Sayfaları düzenleme
* Dosya yükleme
* [[Special:Version]] sayfasını ziyaret ediniz ve gösterilen sürümün doğru olup olmadığını ve eklentilerin bulunduğunu kontrol ediniz.

== Eski kurulumlardan kalanları kaldırın ==
Önceki kurulumunuzu sunucudaki başka bir klasöre kopyaladıysanız, onu kaldırdığınızdan veya web'den tamamen erişilemez hâle getirdiğinizden emin olun.
Eski kurulumları web'den erişilebilir bırakmamak, yükseltme amacını tamamen ortadan kaldırdığı ve sunucunuzu saldırılara açık bıraktığı için çok önemlidir.

== Sıkça Sorulan Sorular ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
=== Güncellemek ne kadar zor? ===

Değiştirdiğiniz tek dosya {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} ise ve 1.5 veya daha yeni bir sürüme geçiyorsanız, işlem çok basittir. Söz konusu insan işi miktarı sadece birkaç dakikadır. Veritabanı şeması değişiklikleri, veritabanınızın boyutuyla orantılı bir zaman alır - milyonlarca sayfalı vikiler için potansiyel olarak saatler, ancak birkaç bin sayfalık daha tipik bir boyut için, genellikle saniyeler içinde yapılır.

Aynı büyük sürümdeki küçük yükseltmeler, {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 sürümünden 1.13.1 sürüme kadar, herhangi bir şema değişikliği gerektirmez.
Yalnızca dosyaları güncelleyebilirsiniz. Veritabanının güncellenmesi gerekmez, bu nedenle yükleyici betiğini çalıştırmak gerekli değildir.

1.4 veya daha eski bir sürüme geçmek potansiyel olarak karmaşıktır çünkü UTF-8 dışındaki karakter kümeleri için destek bırakılmıştır ve toplu metin saklama şeması değişmiştir. Lütfen &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; dosyasındaki ilgili bölümü okuyun.

Kaynak kodumuzu değiştirdiyseniz ve değişikliklerinizin üzerine yazılmasını istemiyorsanız yükseltme işlemi zorlaşır. $fiff, [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] veya [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] gibi araçlar faydalı olabilir. Korumasız uzantılar kullanıyorsanız da sorun olasılığı vardır. MediaWiki'yi yükseltirken uzantılarınızı da yeni sürüme geçirin.

Dış görünümü değiştirdiyseniz veya özel bir dış görünüm kullanıyorsanız, MediaWiki'nin yeni sürümüyle yeniden çalışacak şekilde büyük olasılıkla ayarlamanız gerekecektir.

{{Tip|1=Her seferinde &quot;global&quot; css ve js (javascript) dosyalarınızı yamalamak yerine, kodu MediaWiki:Common.js ve MediaWiki:Common.css sayfalarınıza ekleyebilirsiniz. Bunlar, yükselttiğinizde yeniden kullanılacak veritabanının bir parçası olduğundan, artık MediaWiki çekirdek dosyalarını düzeltmeniz gerekmeyecek.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== Gerçekten eski bir sürümden nasıl yükseltebilirim? Bir adımda mı yoksa birkaç adımda mı? ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bu duruma göre değişir: '''MediaWiki 1.4 veya daha eski bir sürümden yükseltme yapıyorsanız''', önce MediaWiki 1.5 sürümüne geçmelisiniz. Latin-1 vikiden yükseltme yapıyorsanız, veritabanının ilgili bölümlerini UTF-8'e dönüştürmek için upgrade1_5.php (MediaWiki 1.5'te bulunur) kullanın ve bunun çalışması için $localsettings ayarlarınızda $latin değerinin true olarak ayarlanması gerekir. Ardından update.php dosyasını çalıştırın ve LocalSettings.php dosyasındaki $legacy seçeneğini daha önce wiki tarafından kullanılan kodlamaya ayarlayın (örn. Windows-1252). Temel olarak Wikipedia ve diğer Wikimedia Foundation siteleri MediaWiki 1.4'ten 1.5'e yükseltildi - [$noc ilgili ayarlar dosyasına (uyarı: büyük sayfa!)] Ve bazı [[$wikitech|Wikitech'teki ilgili notlara]] bakın. upgrade1.5 betiğini çalıştırmadan önce MediaWiki 1.4'e yükseltmeniz gerekebilir.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
Latin-1 vikiniz için bir veritabanı dökümü yapmak istiyorsanız (örn. MySQL), {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} tablosundaki &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; alanının türünün &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt; olduğundan emin olun. Karakter kodlaması sorunlarını önlemek için &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;.

'''MediaWiki 1.5 veya daha yeni''' bir sürümden '''1.35''''e yükseltme yapıyorsanız, eski sürümünüzden en son kararlı sürüme yükseltme yapabilirsiniz.
Raporların büyük çoğunluğu ve otomatik test, tek adımda yapmanın gayet iyi çalıştığını gösterir.
Buna inanmakta güçlük çekiyorsanız, [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|bu posta gönderme listesini]] okuyun.
Bununla birlikte, eski sürümlerden güncelleme yaptığınızda, PHP hatalarıyla karşılaşma olasılığının, doğrudan yeni sürüme önceki sürümden yükselttiğinizden daha büyük olduğunu lütfen unutmayın.
Sürümleri atlamamış olsaydınız, yine de bu hataları alırdınız, ancak hatalar her bir güncellemeyle ilişkilendirilirdi.
Bunun yerine, birkaç sürümü aynı anda güncellerseniz, aynı anda aynı hata grubunu alırsınız.
Bu, yükseltmeyi daha zor hale getirecektir, ancak atladığınız ara sürümleri güncelleme konusunda sorun yaşamadığınızı unutmayın!

'''MediaWiki 1.36''' veya daha yenisine yükseltiyorsanız, yalnızca son iki LTS sürümünden yükseltmeler desteklenecektir ([[phab:T259771]]). Bu, çok eski sürümler için önce MediaWiki 1.35'e yükseltmeniz ve ardından 1.36'ya yükseltmeniz anlamına gelir.

=== Önce yedek almalı mıyım? ===

Kısa cevap: Evet.

Uzun cevap: Bu a) verilerinize ne kadar değer verdiğinize, b) yedek oluşturmanın ne kadar zor olduğuna ve c) MySQL'in bakımı ve yönetiminden ne kadar emin olduğunuza bağlıdır. 

Güncelleme hatası, veritabanınızı iki sürüm arasında tutarsız bir durumda bırakabilir.
Bir PHP veya MySQL hatası, güncelleme sırasında veritabanınızı kısmen güncellemiş olabilir.
Bu gibi bir durumlarda, bu sorunu elle bir şekilde düzeltmek mümkün olabilir.
Bununla birlikte, update.php ile çalıştırmadan önce bir veritabanı yedeklemesini almak ve bundan sonra çalışmayı sürdürmek ''daha kolay'' olacaktır.
Aksi halde, saatlerce gereksiz yere uğraşmak zorunda kalabilirsiniz.

Kurtarma işlemi genellikle karmaşıktır.
Eğer güncelleme işlemine başlamadan önce bir yedekleme yapmayı ihmal ederseniz ve ardından güncellemeye ilişkin hatadan kurtulmak için yardıma ihtiyacınız olursa; destek forumundaki gönüllüler bu konuda yardım etmek için pek istekli olmayacaklardır.
Daha iyi bir sonuç, yedeğinize geri dönebilmeniz ve ardından yükseltme sürecinde bozulmaya neden olan [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|hatayı ilgili MediaWiki projesine karşı rapor etmeniz]] olacaktır.

=== LocalSettings.php dosyamı saklayabilir miyim? ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Evet, ancak küçük değişiklikler yapmak zorunda kalabilirsiniz. $localsettings biçimi büyük ölçüde geriye dönük olarak uyumludur. LocalSettings.php uyumluluğunu bozan değişiklikler, [[Release notes|sürüm notlarının]] &quot;yapılandırma değişiklikleri&quot; bölümünde belirtilmiştir.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== Viki sayfam güncellenirken çevrimiçi kalabilir mi? ===

Genellikle evet, ancak Git geçici olarak (birkaç saniye boyunca) kesilebilir.

Eğer MediaWiki'nin küçük sürümleri arasında güncelleme yapıyorsanız, yapmanız gereken tek şey kaynak dosyalarını güncellemektir.

Not: Aşağıda, komut satırına erişiminiz olduğu varsayılmaktadır. Eğer MediaWiki'nin büyük sürümleri arasında yükseltme yapıyorsanız, tercih edilen prosedür aşağıdaki gibidir:

# MediaWiki'nin yeni sürümünü yeni bir dizine açın
# Yeni dizini hazırlayın: geçerli LocalSettings.php'nizi eski dizinden kopyalayın, yüklü uzantıları ve özel kaplamaları (varsa) kopyalayın. LocalSettings.php içindeki {{wg|Logo}} ve {{wg|Logos}} ayarlarını kontrol edin ve gerekirse logo dosyasını eski dizinden yeni dizine kopyalayın.
# Yeni sürümün sürüm notlarında LocalSettings.php üzerinde herhangi bir değişiklik yapılması gerekip gerekmediğine bakın.
# Eski dizindeki LocalSettings.php dosyasına aşağıdaki değişkeni ekleyerek veritabanını salt okunur moda getirin; kullanıcılar yükseltme işlemi sırasında düzenleme yapmaya çalışırlarsa bu iletiyi görürler:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Bu, güncelleme betiğin çalıştırılmasını da engelleyen MediaWiki 1.27'den beri çalışmıyor. MediaWiki 1.27 sürümünden bu yana geçici bir çözüm {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}} içinde bulunabilir. Ayrıca bkz. {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Yeni dizindeki [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|betik güncelleme]] veya web güncelleyiciyi çalıştırın.
# Görüntüler alt dizinindeki görüntüleri eski dizinden yeni dizine kopyalayın.
# Eski dizini ve yeni dizini değiştirin.

===Neden güncelleme?===
:''Yeni sürümler hakkında bilgilendirilmek için [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] listesine abone olunuz.''

Çünkü [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|küçük bir adım atarak]] mevcut sürümünüzden en son sürüme geçmek [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|genellikle çok kolaydır]] ve üstelik bunu [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|web arayüzünü]] kullanarak yapabilirsiniz.

Yeni sürümler, vikinizi ve sunucunuzu vandalizmden korumak için güvenlik düzeltmelerini içerir. (bkz. {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). Bu güncelleme yapmanız için iyi bir sebeptir!

Yeni büyük sürümler, kullanmak isteyebileceğiniz yeni özelliklerle birlikte gelir: ayrıntılar için sürüm notlarına bakın. Patronlarınızı oldukça eski bir sürümden yükseltmenize izin vermeye ikna etmek için ek argümanlara ihtiyacınız varsa, işte bir özet:

* {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}} sürümünden itibaren, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|değişiklikler farklı olarak kaydedilmeden önce]] önizleme yapılabilir.
* {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}} sürümünden itibaren, bir [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|geri alma]] düğmesi mevcuttur.
* {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}} sürümünden itibaren, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|devriye gezisi]] [[Special:NewPages]] sayfasında çok daha kolaydır.
* {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}} sürümünden beri, dosyaları [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|yeniden adlandırabilirsiniz]] (taşıyabilirsiniz).
* {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}} sürümünden beri, [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|çifte yönlendirmeleri]] otomatik olarak düzeltebilirsiniz.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}} sürümünden beri, {{ll|InstantCommons}} kullanılabilir.
* Uygun önbelleğe alma işlemine sahipseniz, 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} sayfa yükleme hızlarını çok optimize ettiğinden.
* 1.17 sürümünden itibaren, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|kategori sıralama mantığı geliştirildi]] (özellikle İngilizce olmayan harfler için); {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}} sürümünden itibarense bu özellik 68 dile genişletildi.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} ve {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} sürümünden itibaren, tüm dillerdeki ve cinsiyetlerdeki kullanıcılar arayüz ve [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|etkinlik günlükleri]] tarafından doğru bir şekilde kaydedilmektedir. (1.15 sürümün öncesinde, cinsiyet bilgisi yoktur).
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} sürümünde kabuk sistemi; kendi kabuklarınızda mevcut kabuk parçalarını tekrar kullanmayı kolaylaştırmak için yeniden düzenlendi.
* [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]] sürümünden itibaren, [[m:Help:Diff|farklar]] daha anlaşılır yapıdadır.
* [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] ve [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]] sürümlerinde, e-posta bildirimleri daha net ve daha öngörülebilir hale gelirken, wiki'niz daha etkili hale getirdi.
* [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], sürümünden itibaren, vandalizme mücadele (devriye kontrolü) daha az zaman almaktadır.
* [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]] sürümünde, daha iyi güvenlik sağlamak için şifre deposu geliştirildi.
* [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]] sürümünden beri, [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|geliştirilmiş son değişiklikler mevcuttur]]
* [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]] sürümünde, [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot;]] mekanizması geliştirildi.
* [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]] sürümünde, oturum yönetimi ve kullanıcı kimlik doğrulama yönetimi tamamen modernize edildi. InstantCommons artık yerel dosyalar gerektirmez.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}} sürümünden beri, madde sayfalarının işlenmiş HTML önbelleği iyileştirildi.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}} sürümünden itibaren, Action API'sı yeniden çalışıldı ve geliştirildi. Ayrıca kullanıcı grubu atamaları belirli bir süre için seçilebilir yapıldı. IP aralığını engellemeye izin verin.
{{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}} sürümünden beri, engellenen kullanıcılar e-postalarını değiştiremez. Special:Contributions sayfasında bir IP aralığında katkı arama yeteneği eklendi.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}} sürümünden bu yana, {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}} gibi bazı uzantılar artık çekirdeğin bir parçası. {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} tanıtıldı. Tüm kullanıcılar için 90 düzenleme/dakikalık varsayılan düzenleme hızı sınırı ekleyin.
* MediaWiki {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}} sürümünden beri 350 üzerinde dili desteklemektedir.
* MediaWiki, {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}} sürümünden beri, IP'lerin ve hesapların belirli sayfaları veya ad alanlarını düzenlemesinin kısıtlanabileceği &quot;kısmi engelleri&quot; destekler.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}} sürümünden beri, daha fazla uzantı çekirdeğin bir parçası: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (Lua modülleri için), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} sürümünden beri (uzun vadeli istikrarlı bir destek sürümü), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} çekirdeğin bir parçasıdır. &quot;İzle&quot; özelliği, bitiş tarihleriyle geliştirilebilir.

Ayrıca, {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} sürümünde, daha iyi bir editör ve anti-vandalizm araçları olan ConfirmEdit ve Nuke gibi [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bazı çok önemli eklentileri]] paketlemeye başladık; daha sonraki sürümlerde bu eklentilerden daha fazla eklenmiştir.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Ayrıca bakınız ==

* Greg Sabino Mullane'nin Blog yazısı, [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html sürüm yükseltmeleri hakkında biraz daha ayrıntılı bilgi] vermektedir.
* [[Project:Support desk]] yardıma ihtiyacınız olduğunda veya bir şeyler ters gittiğinde size yardımıcı olacaktır.
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - Eğer başarılı yedeklemeniz yoksa
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>5hjsc3932t6xfoqq3dkev6wcp217gbx</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402989</id>
      <parentid>5402948</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:50:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="43571" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Temel genel bakış ==

=== Dosya transferi ===

Dosyaları aktarmak için bir yöntem seçin:

* [[w:tr:Wget|wget]]
* [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] veya [[w:tr:WinSCP|WinSCP]] ile güvenli kopyalama
* [[w:tr:SFTP|SSH Dosya Aktarım Protokolü]] (SFTP)
* Bir [[w:tr:Dosya aktarım iletişim kuralı|FTP]] istemcisi kullanma.
* Sunucu barındırma şirketi web tarayıcısı üzerinden bir dosya yöneticisi arayüzü sağlayabilir; servis sağlayıcınıza danışın.
* Başka diğer yöntemler. [[w:List of file transfer protocols|Dosya aktarım protokolleri listesi]]'ne bakabilirsiniz.

=== Ön hazırlık ===

MediaWiki içindeki {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=UPGRADE}} metin dosyasını okuyun.

# Gereksinimleri kontrol edin
# RELEASE-NOTES dosyasını okuyun
# UPGRADE dosyasını okuyun
# Mevcut dosyaları ve veritabanını yedekleyin
# Yeni dosyaların paketini açın
# Eklentileri yükseltin
# Veritabanını kontrol etmek için güncelleme komut dosyasını çalıştırın
# Güncelleme testini yapın
# Eski kurulumlardan kalanları kaldırın

== Kontrol gereksinimleri == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} aşağıdakilere gereksinim duymaktadır:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* ve aşağıdakilerden biri:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Sürüm 1.36'dan bu yana, MediaWiki yalnızca iki LTS sürümünden önceki yükseltmeleri desteklemeyi taahhüt eder ([[phab:T259771]] sayfasına bakın). MediaWiki'nin eski sürümlerinden yükseltmelerin birden çok adımda gerçekleştirilmesi gerekecektir.
Bu, 1.23'ten veya önceki sürümlerden 1.36'ya yükseltmek istiyorsanız, öncelikle 1.23 vikinizi 1.27'ye (veya 1.35'e) yükseltmeniz gerekeceği ve 1.27'den (veya 1.35'ten) 1.36'ya yükseltebileceğiniz anlamına gelir.

Eğer PostgreSQL kullanıyorsanız lütfen {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}} bölümünü de okuyun.

Daha fazla bilgi için lütfen {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} ve {{ll|Compatibility}}'i okuyun.

== Sürüm notlarını okuyun ==
Tarball dağıtım dosyası içinde, veya [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] tarafından teslim edilen/ihraç edilen dosyalar içinde, adı büyük harflerle yazılmış dosyalardan biri olan '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|viki]]) içeren bir dosya var.
Şimdi paketi açıp ve bu sürümde nelerin değiştiğini öğrenmenin zamanı geldi.
UPGRADE dosyasındaki talimatları da okumalısınız.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Bekleyen işlerin kaldırılması ==
Performans nedenleriyle, veritabanındaki bazı işler ertelenir ve [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|iş kuyruğu]] tarafından yönetilir.
Bu ertelenen işler veritabanında saklanır ve gerçekleşmesi gereken eylemler hakkında bilgi veren parametreleri içerir.
Bu bekleyen işleri, parametre özelliklerinin yeni sürümde değişmesi durumunda başarısız olmasını önlemeniz için vikiyi yükseltmeden önce çalıştırmanız kesinlikle önerilmektedir.
Tüm bekleyen işleri çalıştırmak ve yükseltmeyi gerçekleştirmeden önce sırayı temizlemek için {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} kullanın.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Mevcut dosyaları ve veritabanını yedekle ==

:''Tam talimatlar: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

Yükseltme komut dosyaları iyi-korunmuş ve sağlam olsa da, işler yine de ters gidebilir. Veritabanı şemasını güncellemeye başlamadan önce, hem veritabanını hem de dosyaları içeren, vikinin '''tam [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|yedeğini]]''' alın:

* vikinin içeriği, veritabanından (karakter setinin doğru şekilde belirlendiğinden emin olmak için önce LocalSettings.php dosyasını kontrol edin). SQL dökümanı dökümüne ek olarak bir XML dökümü oluşturmak iyi bir fikir olabilir.
:* MySQL, hem SQL dökümü hem de XML dökümü, &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; komutuyla birlikte kullanılmaktadır:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, veritabanı dökümü için &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; komutu ile birlikte kullanılmaktadır:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, yedek oluşturmak için bir MediaWiki komut dosyası kullanıyorsunuz:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* resimler ve diğer medya dosyaları (&lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; dizininin içeriği, özel logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* yapılandırma dosyaları, ör. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (eğer varsa)
* MediaWiki'nin tüm kabuk ve eklentilerini içeren program dosyalarını, özellikle bunları değiştirdiyseniz.

== Yeni dosyaların paketini açma ==

=== Bir tarball paketi kullanma ===

FTP veya komut satırı kullanarak yeni dosyaları yükleyebilirsiniz. Erişiminiz varsa komut satırını kullanın! Komut satırını kullanmak, binlerce dosyanın her birini FTP ile yüklemekten çok daha hızlı olacaktır.

{{Note|1=Açılmış tarball'ınızı sunucunuzdaki yeni ve boş bir klasöre yerleştirmelisiniz. Eğer yeni sürümü doğrudan yeni bir dizin yerine eski sürümünüzün üstünde yüklerseniz, [[#Back up existing files and the database|Var olan dosyaları ve veritabanını yedekle]] bölümünde açıklanan talimatları izlemelisiniz. Aksi takdirde, herhangi bir özelleştirme yaptıysanız, bunları yeniden uygulamak için herhangi bir başvuru yapmadan ayrılmanızı sağlayacak şekilde silebilirsiniz. MediaWiki'nin canlı kopyasının üstünde yeni bir tarball yükleme, MediaWiki'nin eski sürümündeki bazı dosyaları geride bırakabilir ve bu da güncellemenin kodunu etkileyebilir. Bu sebeple yeni dosyaları yeni bir dizinde açmanız ve daha sonra özelleştirmeleri yeni dizine uygulamanız (LocalSettings.php, resimler klasörü, eklentileri ve özel kabuklar gibi diğer özelleştirmeleri geri yüklemeniz önerilir)}}

==== FTP veya grafik ====

Eğer sunucunuzdaki komut satırına erişemiyorsanız, MediaWiki tarball'ını yerel bilgisayarınıza indirin ve yerel bilgisayarda tarball'ı çıkarmak için [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] kullanın.

Dosyaları bilgisayarınıza çıkardıktan sonra, en sevdiğiniz FTP istemci yazılımını kullanarak dizinleri ve dosyaları sunucuya yükleyiniz.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Komut satırı ====
Mevcut kullanıcı viki kurulum dizinleri üzerinde tam yazma izinine sahip değilse &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; komutunu kullanarak çalıştırmanız gerekebilir.
Normalde bir tarball paketini açtığınızda, yeni viki sürümü için yeni bir dizin oluşturulur ve eski kurulum dizininizden eski yapılandırma dosyaları ve resim dizinini kopyalamanız gerekir:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

(Open)Solaris kullanıcıları &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, veya:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Diğer dosyalar ===

Tarball'ı yükledikten sonra, bazı dosya ve klasörleri eski kurulum dizininden yeni bir dizine kopyalamanız veya taşımanız gerekir:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* $code-lc, eski yapılandırma ayarlarınızı içerir.&lt;/span&gt;
* Yüklenen tüm dosyaları içeren wiki &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (veya eski sürümlerdeki &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt;) dizininin, farklı bir yükleme dizini seçmediyseniz, sahipliğini ve izinleri değiştirin. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (Örneğin. web kullanıcınız &quot;apache&quot; ise).
* &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; dizinindeki bazı eklentiler. Güncellenmiş eklentileri her zaman almalısınız, eski uzantıların MediaWiki'nin yeni bir sürümüyle çalışması garanti edilmez.
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|Özel bir logo]] kullanmanız durumunda, bu dosyanın da yedekten geri yüklenmesi gerekiyor. 1.24 öncesi sürümlerde kabuklar genellikle &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt; dizininde yer almaktadır. 1.24 sonrası sürümlerde sizin tercihinize göre &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; veya &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; dizininde yer almaktadır. Sonra LocalSettings.php ye ekleme yapınız ör. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; gibi.
* 1.35 için logoları [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]] üzerinden geri yüklemeniz gerekebilir. Ardından LocalSettings.php örneğine ekleyin, ör. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; dizinindeki özel kabuklar.
* Eski kurulum dosyalarında veya eklentilerde yapılan değişiklikler.
* Herhangi bir .htaccess dosyası (Apache kullanıyorsanız ve onlarda herhangi bir kural tanımladıysanız).

İşiniz bittiğinde, bu yeni klasörü web sunucusundaki yayınlanmış klasör yapın veya eski kurulum dizinini yeniden adlandırın ve yenisini eski adla eşleşecek şekilde yeniden adlandırın.

=== Git kullanımı ===

Eğer {{ll|Download from Git|Git}} kullanılıyorsa, dosyaları yeni bir konumda dışarı aktarınız, ve önceki özelleştirilmiş dosyaları bir önceki bölümde açıklandığı gibi yeni konuma kopyalayınız.

Bazı harici PHP kütüphaneleri Composer veya Wikimedia wiki çiftliği için sağlanan belirli bir koleksiyon kullanarak kurmanız gerekecektir.
Harici kütüphanelerin yüklenmesi ve güncellenmesi ile ilgili daha fazla bilgi [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git indirme belgesinde]] bulunabilir.

=== Yama kullanma ===
Küçük bir sürüm güncellemesi için genellikle küçük bir yama dosyası kullanılabilir.
Bunu kullanmak için [[:tr:patch (Unix)|patch]] dosyasını indirmeniz gerekecek.
Yama dosyasını [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ dökümler sitesinden] elle indirin ve çıkarın veya aşağıdaki wget ile yönergeleri izleyin.
Yamalar aşamalıdır, bir sürümü '''atlayamazsınız'''.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; ana MediaWiki dizinine (LocalSettings.php ile birlikte).
# Yama eki dosyasını indirin ve &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; yapınız.
# Neyin değiştiğini kontrol etmek için &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; komutunu kullanın (''örn.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Eğer her şey yolundaysa,  &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt; olmadan tekrar &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt;'i çalıştırın.
# Special:Version sayfasını kontrol ediniz. Yeni sürüm numarasını bu sayfada görmelisiniz.

=== Kalan dosyalar hatalara neden olabilir ===

Eski kurulum dizininin olduğu yere paketini açarsanız, bazı eski dosyalar yeni sürümde sorunlara sebep olabilir.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Eğer [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profil]] kullanmıyorsanız, ancak MediaWiki kök klasörünüzde bir &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyası varsa, &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt; bağlı hataları alabilirsiniz.
&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasının silinmesi veya yeniden adlandırılması bu hatayı çözer. MediaWiki kök klasöründe bulunan &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; dosyası gelecekte profil oluşturmayı etkinleştirmeniz durumunda bir şablon görevi görebilir.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23 temel görünüm dosyalarının otomatik görünüm bulma mekanizmasını kaldırır. Bu sürüme yükselttikten sonra, doğrudan &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; dizinindeki &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; eski dosyalarının yanı sıra &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; dizinindeki ilgili alt klasörlerin kaldırıldığından emin olmalısınız. MediaWiki, hatırlamanıza yardımcı olacak herhangi biri hala bulunursa uyarıları kaydeder. (Benzer bir kurala uymak için özel kaplamaları da ayarlamanız gerekir.) Ayrıntılar için {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} bölümüne bakın.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 çekirdek kabuk dosyalarının yollarını değiştirdi. Bu sürüme geçtikten sonra, eski &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyalarının doğrudan &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; dizininde artık bulunmadığından emin olmanız gerekir.

== Eklentilerin güncellenmesi ==

Bazı eklentiler MediaWiki'nin yeni sürümüyle çalışmak için güncellendiler. Bu tür uzantıları en son sürümlerine yükseltmeyi unutmayınız. Özel uzantılar için elle güncelleme yapmanız gerekebilir.

Farklı [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarbalları]] eklentileri bazı alt grupları içerir ve MediaWiki çekirdeğiniz için doğru olan sürümü seçmenize yardımcı olur.

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Uzantı Dağıtıcı]], MediaWiki'nin desteklenen sürümleriyle çalışacak eklentilerin enstantanesini almak isteyen kullanıcılar için iyi çalışmaktadır.

Eğer daha fazla eklenti istiyorsanız o zaman [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|Git deposundan indirme]] muhtemelen sizin için en iyisidir.
Git'iniz yoksa ancak çok sayıda uzantıyı yükseltmek istiyorsanız, [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]] kullanmayı düşünebilirsiniz.

== LocalSettings.php'nizi uyarlayın ==

Eski sürümlerdeki &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasını kullanırsanız, yeni sürümlerde bunun nasıl uygulayacağını ayarlamanız gerekebilir:

=== Kabuk kaydı ===

MediaWiki'nin 1.24 sürümünden itibaren, Vector, Monobook, Modern ve CologneBlue gibi paket kabuklar artık MediaWiki çekirdeğinin bir parçası değildir. Bunları kullanmak için paketlerin &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasında kayıtlı olması gerekir; aksi takdirde MediaWiki sizi kabukları yüklemediğiniz konusunda uyaracaktır.

1.24 sürümünden daha güncel bir sürüme güncelleme yaparken bu kabuklardan birini kullanmak olmak istiyorsanız &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasına eklemeniz gereken şey aşağıdaki gibidir:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Diğer kabuklar henüz yeni [[Manual:Extension registration|kabuk kayıt]] sistemine uyarlanmamış olabilir, bu sebeple, herhangi bir sorun çıkması durumunda doğru bir şekilde nasıl kayıt olacağını görmek için her bir kabuğun dokümantasyon sayfasına bakınız.

=== Uzantı kaydı ===

MediaWiki'nin 1.25 sürümünden itibaren, uzantılar yeni [[Manual:Extension registration|uzantı kayıt]] sistemi kullanıyor.

Daha önceki &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyası şöyle bir şey içeriyordu:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Bu, aşağıdaki biçime dönüştürüldü:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Uzantılar yeni eklenti kayıt sistemini kullanacak şekilde uyarlanmaktadır.
Uyarlanmamış uzantılar, eski kurulum biçimini kullanmalıdır.
Daha fazla bilgi için eklentinin sayfasındaki kurulum talimatlarına bakın.

=== Diğer değişiklikler ===
Bazı değişkenler eskimiş veya kaldırılmış olabilir.
Onları &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;'e yerleştirmek genellikle herhangi bir etkiye sahip olmayacaktır.
Yeni sürümlerde yeni değişkenler eklenmiş veya mevcut bazı değişkenlerin türü değiştirmiş olabilir.
Genellikle değişkenler için mümkün olduğunca tür değiştirme durumunda geriye dönük olarak uyumlu olalım diye varsayılan yapıyı kullanmaya çalışırız.
Her durumda, bu değişiklikleri görmek için sürüm notlarına göz atınız.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Güncelleme komut dosyasını çalıştırın ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
MediaWiki veritabanını iki şekilde yükseltebilirsiniz: Komut satırından veya web tarayıcısından. Sunucunuzun komut satırına erişiminiz varsa, zaman aşımı veya bağlantının kesilmesi riskini azalttığı için, güncelleme işleminin komut satırından yapılması önerilir.

Komut dosyası ayrıca MediaWiki'nin ihtiyaç duyduğu eksik bağımlı paketleri indirmeye çalışacaktır.

=== Komut satırı ===

Sunucunuzun komut satırına veya SSH kabuğuna veya benzerine erişin. Komut satırına sunucunuza SSH üzerinden bağlanarak erişebilirsiniz. Üzerinde çalıştığınız yerel bilgisayar Microsoft Windows çalıştırıyorsa, SSH'yi kullanmak için [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] gibi bir araca ihtiyacınız olacaktır. Komut satırından veya Kabuktan &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; dizinine geçin ve [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|betik güncellemesini]] komutunu yürütün:

 $ php update.php

Bir Linux sunucusunda hata alırsanız root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;) ile aynı komutu gerçekleştirmeyi deneyin.
Windows'ta basit kurulumlar için not (ör. {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}} ile):
Öncelikle web sunucunuzun (Apache gibi) ve veritabanınızın (MySQL gibi) çalıştığından emin olun.
Ardından &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt; çalıştırın: sağ tıklayın, Birlikte Aç'ı seçin ve &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt; ile göz atın.
Sonuçta ortaya çıkan komut istemi penceresi, şema yükseltmesi tamamlandığında otomatik olarak kapanır.

PHP sürümünüzün çok eski olduğunu ve MediaWiki'nin daha yeni bir sürüme ihtiyacı olduğunu belirten bir mesaj görebilirsiniz.
Bu mesajdan sonra güncelleme iptal edilir.
Bu hatanın nedeni, komut satırının, web sunucusundan MediaWiki'yi çalıştırdığınızda sahip olduğunuzdan farklı bir PHP sürümü kullanabilmesidir.
Bu mesajı aldığınızda, farklı bir komut kullanarak kabukta daha yeni bir PHP sürümünü çalıştırıp çalıştıramayacağınızı kontrol etmelisiniz: Bu, ör.  ''php5'' veya ''php56'' olabilir.
Başka bir sürüm varsa ve öyleyse, hangi ad altında, sunucunuzun kurulumuna bağlıdır.
İşe yaramazsa, sunucunuza sorun; mutlaka bilecekler.

MediaWiki mevcut şemayı inceler ve gerektiğinde tablo ve sütun ekleyerek yeni kodla çalışacak şekilde günceller.

{{Note|1=[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Paylaşılan veritabanı]] kullanırsanız, paylaşılan tabloların güncellenmesini istiyorsanız &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parametresini iletmeniz gerekir. Aksi takdirde güncelleme komut dosyası tarafından dokunulmazlar.}}

==== php update.php herhangi bir şey yapmazsa, hızlı bir duraklamayla sonuçlanırsa ve ardından komut istemine geri dönerse ne yapmalı ====

Bu, hatalı çalışan bir uzantı veya görünümden kaynaklanabilir.

* LocalSettings.php olarak adlandırılan tüm uzantıların ve görünümlerin mevcut olup olmadığını kontrol edin
* Uzantıların doğru kayıt yöntemini kullandığını kontrol edin (wfLoadExtension ve require_once)
* Uzantıların ilk yarısını LocalSettings.php olarak yorumlayın. Bu, update.php çalışmasına neden oluyorsa, bu yarının yarısını kaldırın (yani uzantıların 1/4'ü). Bu, update.php çalışmasına neden OLMUYORSA, ilk yarının yorumunu kaldırın, ancak ikinci yarıyı yorumlayın ve ardından ikinci yarının yarısını yorumlayın, vb. Başarısız olanı bulmak için update.php çalışana kadar tekrarlayın.

==== &quot;ALTER komutu kullanıcıya reddedildi&quot; hatası (veya benzeri) durumunda ne yapmalı ====

Betiklerin aşağıdakine benzer bir mesajla iptal edilmesi durumunda:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

Bu, {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} dosyanızda (ana dizinde) {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} ve {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} tanımladığınızı kontrol etmeniz gerektiği anlamına gelir. Bunlar, veritabanına erişmek için bu komut dosyasının ihtiyaç duyduğu kullanıcı ve paroladır.

Bazı durumlarda, mysql kullanıldığında bile $wgDBname yerine tablo adının güncellenmesi için eski bir $wgDBmwschema değişkeni (Postgres için) okunuyor gibi görünüyor. Bu durumda, LocalSettings.php dosyasındaki $wgDBmwschema tanımından kurtulun.

==== &quot;Beklenmeyen T_STRING&quot; hatası durumunda ne yapmalı ====

Komut satırından update.php çalıştıran kişiler aşağıdaki hatayla karşılaşabilir:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

Bu hata, update.php php4'ten çalıştırıldığında oluşur.

Sitelerini hem php4 hem de php5 sağlayan sağlayıcılar tarafından barındırılan kişiler aşağıdaki adımları atmalıdır:

# komut satırından 'whereis php5' komutunu girin
# php5 yolunun yerini belirledikten sonra php5/bin dizininin içeriğini listeleyin
# php yürütülebilir dosyasının adını (php veya php5) belirledikten sonra, update.php dosyasını yürütmek için tüm yolu yazın

Aşağıda bir örnek verilmiştir:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

==== 'register_argc_argv false olarak ayarlanırsa' hata ne yapılır = ===

Hatayla karşılaşabilirsiniz:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# ~/maintenance bölümüne gidin. Mevcut bir 'php.ini' dosyasını düzenleyin veya oluşturun. 
# Aşağıdaki gibi bir satır ekleyin:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasını yeniden çalıştırın

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
=== Web tarayıcısı ===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Ayrıca bkz. {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Veritabanınız zaten büyükse ve yüksek üretimde kullanılıyorsa, Web güncelleyicisini kullanmamalısınız, ör. çünkü güncelleme işlemi ''maximum_execution_time'' ulaşıldığında zaman aşımına uğrayacaktır. Bu durumda, komut satırı arabiriminden [[update.php]] kullanmalısınız (web'den değil). Tam olarak &quot;çok büyük&quot; olan şey sunucunuza bağlıdır (örneğin performansı, yükü ve PHP'nin maksimum yürütme süresinin komut dosyasının çalışmasına izin verdiği süreye bağlıdır). Vikiniz web güncelleyici için çok büyükse ve barındırma sağlayıcınız komut satırı erişimine izin vermiyorsa, vikinizi başka bir barındırma hesabına, tercihen kabuk erişimi olan bir hesaba taşımanız gerekir.

# Veritabanı bakımı yapmadan önce daima [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|yedekleyin]].
# Web tarayıcınızda &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt; adresine girin. Örneğin, sizin vikiniz &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; ise, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;'ye girin.
# Dilinizi seçin ve devam et'i tıklayın.
# Mevcut kurulum tespit edilmelidir. Yükseltmek için ekrandaki talimatları izleyin.&lt;br/&gt;&quot;Yükseltme anahtarı&quot; istenirse, {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} dosyanızı açın ve {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}} atanan anahtarı arayın.

Web güncelleyici çalışmıyor gibi görünebilir: Başlangıçtaki dil seçim ekranını görmek yerine, muhtemelen bazı hata mesajlarıyla boş bir wiki sayfası görebilirsiniz. Bu durumda, büyük olasılıkla web sunucunuzun Yeniden Yazım Kurallarını (büyük olasılıkla [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|kısa URL'ler]] için) kullanması muhtemeldir; bunlar size ''mw-config/'' de güncelleyiciyi değil, ''Mw-config/'', büyük &quot;M&quot; ile. Bu durumda, güncelleme zamanı için ''.htaccess'' dosyasını yeniden adlandırın. Ardından web güncelleyiciye erişebilmeniz gerekir.

{{Warning|1=Bu yöntemi kullanırsanız, yükseltme betiği çalıştırdıktan sonra '''.htaccess dosyasının adını geri değiştirdiğinizden emin olun'''! Aksi takdirde kısa URL'ler ve muhtemelen diğer şeyler bozulur!}}

== Güncellemeyi test et ==

Güncelleme tamamlandıktan sonra, vikiye göz atınız ve aşağıdaki işlemlerin beklendiği gibi çalıştığını kontrol ediniz:

* Sayfaları görüntüleme
* Sayfaları düzenleme
* Dosya yükleme
* [[Special:Version]] sayfasını ziyaret ediniz ve gösterilen sürümün doğru olup olmadığını ve eklentilerin bulunduğunu kontrol ediniz.

== Eski kurulumlardan kalanları kaldırın ==
Önceki kurulumunuzu sunucudaki başka bir klasöre kopyaladıysanız, onu kaldırdığınızdan veya web'den tamamen erişilemez hâle getirdiğinizden emin olun.
Eski kurulumları web'den erişilebilir bırakmamak, yükseltme amacını tamamen ortadan kaldırdığı ve sunucunuzu saldırılara açık bıraktığı için çok önemlidir.

== Sıkça Sorulan Sorular ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
=== Güncellemek ne kadar zor? ===

Değiştirdiğiniz tek dosya {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} ise ve 1.5 veya daha yeni bir sürüme geçiyorsanız, işlem çok basittir. Söz konusu insan işi miktarı sadece birkaç dakikadır. Veritabanı şeması değişiklikleri, veritabanınızın boyutuyla orantılı bir zaman alır - milyonlarca sayfalı vikiler için potansiyel olarak saatler, ancak birkaç bin sayfalık daha tipik bir boyut için, genellikle saniyeler içinde yapılır.

Aynı büyük sürümdeki küçük yükseltmeler, {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 sürümünden 1.13.1 sürüme kadar, herhangi bir şema değişikliği gerektirmez.
Yalnızca dosyaları güncelleyebilirsiniz. Veritabanının güncellenmesi gerekmez, bu nedenle yükleyici betiğini çalıştırmak gerekli değildir.

1.4 veya daha eski bir sürüme geçmek potansiyel olarak karmaşıktır çünkü UTF-8 dışındaki karakter kümeleri için destek bırakılmıştır ve toplu metin saklama şeması değişmiştir. Lütfen &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; dosyasındaki ilgili bölümü okuyun.

Kaynak kodumuzu değiştirdiyseniz ve değişikliklerinizin üzerine yazılmasını istemiyorsanız yükseltme işlemi zorlaşır. $fiff, [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] veya [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] gibi araçlar faydalı olabilir. Korumasız uzantılar kullanıyorsanız da sorun olasılığı vardır. MediaWiki'yi yükseltirken uzantılarınızı da yeni sürüme geçirin.

Dış görünümü değiştirdiyseniz veya özel bir dış görünüm kullanıyorsanız, MediaWiki'nin yeni sürümüyle yeniden çalışacak şekilde büyük olasılıkla ayarlamanız gerekecektir.

{{Tip|1=Her seferinde &quot;global&quot; css ve js (javascript) dosyalarınızı yamalamak yerine, kodu MediaWiki:Common.js ve MediaWiki:Common.css sayfalarınıza ekleyebilirsiniz. Bunlar, yükselttiğinizde yeniden kullanılacak veritabanının bir parçası olduğundan, artık MediaWiki çekirdek dosyalarını düzeltmeniz gerekmeyecek.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== Gerçekten eski bir sürümden nasıl yükseltebilirim? Bir adımda mı yoksa birkaç adımda mı? ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bu duruma göre değişir: '''MediaWiki 1.4 veya daha eski bir sürümden yükseltme yapıyorsanız''', önce MediaWiki 1.5 sürümüne geçmelisiniz. Latin-1 vikiden yükseltme yapıyorsanız, veritabanının ilgili bölümlerini UTF-8'e dönüştürmek için upgrade1_5.php (MediaWiki 1.5'te bulunur) kullanın ve bunun çalışması için $localsettings ayarlarınızda $latin değerinin true olarak ayarlanması gerekir. Ardından update.php dosyasını çalıştırın ve LocalSettings.php dosyasındaki $legacy seçeneğini daha önce wiki tarafından kullanılan kodlamaya ayarlayın (örn. Windows-1252). Temel olarak Wikipedia ve diğer Wikimedia Foundation siteleri MediaWiki 1.4'ten 1.5'e yükseltildi - [$noc ilgili ayarlar dosyasına (uyarı: büyük sayfa!)] Ve bazı [[$wikitech|Wikitech'teki ilgili notlara]] bakın. upgrade1.5 betiğini çalıştırmadan önce MediaWiki 1.4'e yükseltmeniz gerekebilir.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
Latin-1 vikiniz için bir veritabanı dökümü yapmak istiyorsanız (örn. MySQL), {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} tablosundaki &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; alanının türünün &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt; olduğundan emin olun. Karakter kodlaması sorunlarını önlemek için &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;.

'''MediaWiki 1.5 veya daha yeni''' bir sürümden '''1.35''''e yükseltme yapıyorsanız, eski sürümünüzden en son kararlı sürüme yükseltme yapabilirsiniz.
Raporların büyük çoğunluğu ve otomatik test, tek adımda yapmanın gayet iyi çalıştığını gösterir.
Buna inanmakta güçlük çekiyorsanız, [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|bu posta gönderme listesini]] okuyun.
Bununla birlikte, eski sürümlerden güncelleme yaptığınızda, PHP hatalarıyla karşılaşma olasılığının, doğrudan yeni sürüme önceki sürümden yükselttiğinizden daha büyük olduğunu lütfen unutmayın.
Sürümleri atlamamış olsaydınız, yine de bu hataları alırdınız, ancak hatalar her bir güncellemeyle ilişkilendirilirdi.
Bunun yerine, birkaç sürümü aynı anda güncellerseniz, aynı anda aynı hata grubunu alırsınız.
Bu, yükseltmeyi daha zor hale getirecektir, ancak atladığınız ara sürümleri güncelleme konusunda sorun yaşamadığınızı unutmayın!

'''MediaWiki 1.36''' veya daha yenisine yükseltiyorsanız, yalnızca son iki LTS sürümünden yükseltmeler desteklenecektir ([[phab:T259771]]). Bu, çok eski sürümler için önce MediaWiki 1.35'e yükseltmeniz ve ardından 1.36'ya yükseltmeniz anlamına gelir.

=== Önce yedek almalı mıyım? ===

Kısa cevap: Evet.

Uzun cevap: Bu a) verilerinize ne kadar değer verdiğinize, b) yedek oluşturmanın ne kadar zor olduğuna ve c) MySQL'in bakımı ve yönetiminden ne kadar emin olduğunuza bağlıdır. 

Güncelleme hatası, veritabanınızı iki sürüm arasında tutarsız bir durumda bırakabilir.
Bir PHP veya MySQL hatası, güncelleme sırasında veritabanınızı kısmen güncellemiş olabilir.
Bu gibi bir durumlarda, bu sorunu elle bir şekilde düzeltmek mümkün olabilir.
Bununla birlikte, update.php ile çalıştırmadan önce bir veritabanı yedeklemesini almak ve bundan sonra çalışmayı sürdürmek ''daha kolay'' olacaktır.
Aksi halde, saatlerce gereksiz yere uğraşmak zorunda kalabilirsiniz.

Kurtarma işlemi genellikle karmaşıktır.
Eğer güncelleme işlemine başlamadan önce bir yedekleme yapmayı ihmal ederseniz ve ardından güncellemeye ilişkin hatadan kurtulmak için yardıma ihtiyacınız olursa; destek forumundaki gönüllüler bu konuda yardım etmek için pek istekli olmayacaklardır.
Daha iyi bir sonuç, yedeğinize geri dönebilmeniz ve ardından yükseltme sürecinde bozulmaya neden olan [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|hatayı ilgili MediaWiki projesine karşı rapor etmeniz]] olacaktır.

=== LocalSettings.php dosyamı saklayabilir miyim? ===
Evet, ancak küçük değişiklikler yapmak zorunda kalabilirsiniz. {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} biçimi büyük ölçüde geriye dönük olarak uyumludur.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== Viki sayfam güncellenirken çevrimiçi kalabilir mi? ===

Genellikle evet, ancak Git geçici olarak (birkaç saniye boyunca) kesilebilir.

Eğer MediaWiki'nin küçük sürümleri arasında güncelleme yapıyorsanız, yapmanız gereken tek şey kaynak dosyalarını güncellemektir.

Not: Aşağıda, komut satırına erişiminiz olduğu varsayılmaktadır. Eğer MediaWiki'nin büyük sürümleri arasında yükseltme yapıyorsanız, tercih edilen prosedür aşağıdaki gibidir:

# MediaWiki'nin yeni sürümünü yeni bir dizine açın
# Yeni dizini hazırlayın: geçerli LocalSettings.php'nizi eski dizinden kopyalayın, yüklü uzantıları ve özel kaplamaları (varsa) kopyalayın. LocalSettings.php içindeki {{wg|Logo}} ve {{wg|Logos}} ayarlarını kontrol edin ve gerekirse logo dosyasını eski dizinden yeni dizine kopyalayın.
# Yeni sürümün sürüm notlarında LocalSettings.php üzerinde herhangi bir değişiklik yapılması gerekip gerekmediğine bakın.
# Eski dizindeki LocalSettings.php dosyasına aşağıdaki değişkeni ekleyerek veritabanını salt okunur moda getirin; kullanıcılar yükseltme işlemi sırasında düzenleme yapmaya çalışırlarsa bu iletiyi görürler:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Bu, güncelleme betiğin çalıştırılmasını da engelleyen MediaWiki 1.27'den beri çalışmıyor. MediaWiki 1.27 sürümünden bu yana geçici bir çözüm {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}} içinde bulunabilir. Ayrıca bkz. {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Yeni dizindeki [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|betik güncelleme]] veya web güncelleyiciyi çalıştırın.
# Görüntüler alt dizinindeki görüntüleri eski dizinden yeni dizine kopyalayın.
# Eski dizini ve yeni dizini değiştirin.

===Neden güncelleme?===
:''Yeni sürümler hakkında bilgilendirilmek için [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] listesine abone olunuz.''

Çünkü [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|küçük bir adım atarak]] mevcut sürümünüzden en son sürüme geçmek [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|genellikle çok kolaydır]] ve üstelik bunu [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|web arayüzünü]] kullanarak yapabilirsiniz.

Yeni sürümler, vikinizi ve sunucunuzu vandalizmden korumak için güvenlik düzeltmelerini içerir. (bkz. {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). Bu güncelleme yapmanız için iyi bir sebeptir!

Yeni büyük sürümler, kullanmak isteyebileceğiniz yeni özelliklerle birlikte gelir: ayrıntılar için sürüm notlarına bakın. Patronlarınızı oldukça eski bir sürümden yükseltmenize izin vermeye ikna etmek için ek argümanlara ihtiyacınız varsa, işte bir özet:

* {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}} sürümünden itibaren, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|değişiklikler farklı olarak kaydedilmeden önce]] önizleme yapılabilir.
* {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}} sürümünden itibaren, bir [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|geri alma]] düğmesi mevcuttur.
* {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}} sürümünden itibaren, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|devriye gezisi]] [[Special:NewPages]] sayfasında çok daha kolaydır.
* {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}} sürümünden beri, dosyaları [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|yeniden adlandırabilirsiniz]] (taşıyabilirsiniz).
* {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}} sürümünden beri, [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|çifte yönlendirmeleri]] otomatik olarak düzeltebilirsiniz.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}} sürümünden beri, {{ll|InstantCommons}} kullanılabilir.
* Uygun önbelleğe alma işlemine sahipseniz, 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} sayfa yükleme hızlarını çok optimize ettiğinden.
* 1.17 sürümünden itibaren, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|kategori sıralama mantığı geliştirildi]] (özellikle İngilizce olmayan harfler için); {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}} sürümünden itibarense bu özellik 68 dile genişletildi.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} ve {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} sürümünden itibaren, tüm dillerdeki ve cinsiyetlerdeki kullanıcılar arayüz ve [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|etkinlik günlükleri]] tarafından doğru bir şekilde kaydedilmektedir. (1.15 sürümün öncesinde, cinsiyet bilgisi yoktur).
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} sürümünde kabuk sistemi; kendi kabuklarınızda mevcut kabuk parçalarını tekrar kullanmayı kolaylaştırmak için yeniden düzenlendi.
* [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]] sürümünden itibaren, [[m:Help:Diff|farklar]] daha anlaşılır yapıdadır.
* [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] ve [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]] sürümlerinde, e-posta bildirimleri daha net ve daha öngörülebilir hale gelirken, wiki'niz daha etkili hale getirdi.
* [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], sürümünden itibaren, vandalizme mücadele (devriye kontrolü) daha az zaman almaktadır.
* [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]] sürümünde, daha iyi güvenlik sağlamak için şifre deposu geliştirildi.
* [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]] sürümünden beri, [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|geliştirilmiş son değişiklikler mevcuttur]]
* [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]] sürümünde, [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot;]] mekanizması geliştirildi.
* [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]] sürümünde, oturum yönetimi ve kullanıcı kimlik doğrulama yönetimi tamamen modernize edildi. InstantCommons artık yerel dosyalar gerektirmez.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}} sürümünden beri, madde sayfalarının işlenmiş HTML önbelleği iyileştirildi.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}} sürümünden itibaren, Action API'sı yeniden çalışıldı ve geliştirildi. Ayrıca kullanıcı grubu atamaları belirli bir süre için seçilebilir yapıldı. IP aralığını engellemeye izin verin.
{{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}} sürümünden beri, engellenen kullanıcılar e-postalarını değiştiremez. Special:Contributions sayfasında bir IP aralığında katkı arama yeteneği eklendi.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}} sürümünden bu yana, {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}} gibi bazı uzantılar artık çekirdeğin bir parçası. {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} tanıtıldı. Tüm kullanıcılar için 90 düzenleme/dakikalık varsayılan düzenleme hızı sınırı ekleyin.
* MediaWiki {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}} sürümünden beri 350 üzerinde dili desteklemektedir.
* MediaWiki, {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}} sürümünden beri, IP'lerin ve hesapların belirli sayfaları veya ad alanlarını düzenlemesinin kısıtlanabileceği &quot;kısmi engelleri&quot; destekler.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}} sürümünden beri, daha fazla uzantı çekirdeğin bir parçası: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (Lua modülleri için), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} sürümünden beri (uzun vadeli istikrarlı bir destek sürümü), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} çekirdeğin bir parçasıdır. &quot;İzle&quot; özelliği, bitiş tarihleriyle geliştirilebilir.

Ayrıca, {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} sürümünde, daha iyi bir editör ve anti-vandalizm araçları olan ConfirmEdit ve Nuke gibi [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bazı çok önemli eklentileri]] paketlemeye başladık; daha sonraki sürümlerde bu eklentilerden daha fazla eklenmiştir.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Ayrıca bakınız ==

* Greg Sabino Mullane'nin Blog yazısı, [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html sürüm yükseltmeleri hakkında biraz daha ayrıntılı bilgi] vermektedir.
* [[Project:Support desk]] yardıma ihtiyacınız olduğunda veya bir şeyler ters gittiğinde size yardımıcı olacaktır.
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - Eğer başarılı yedeklemeniz yoksa
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>0pbb9l086iacauvo037326nrz9rsbyo</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402991</id>
      <parentid>5402989</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:50:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="43523" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Temel genel bakış ==

=== Dosya transferi ===

Dosyaları aktarmak için bir yöntem seçin:

* [[w:tr:Wget|wget]]
* [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] veya [[w:tr:WinSCP|WinSCP]] ile güvenli kopyalama
* [[w:tr:SFTP|SSH Dosya Aktarım Protokolü]] (SFTP)
* Bir [[w:tr:Dosya aktarım iletişim kuralı|FTP]] istemcisi kullanma.
* Sunucu barındırma şirketi web tarayıcısı üzerinden bir dosya yöneticisi arayüzü sağlayabilir; servis sağlayıcınıza danışın.
* Başka diğer yöntemler. [[w:List of file transfer protocols|Dosya aktarım protokolleri listesi]]'ne bakabilirsiniz.

=== Ön hazırlık ===

MediaWiki içindeki {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=UPGRADE}} metin dosyasını okuyun.

# Gereksinimleri kontrol edin
# RELEASE-NOTES dosyasını okuyun
# UPGRADE dosyasını okuyun
# Mevcut dosyaları ve veritabanını yedekleyin
# Yeni dosyaların paketini açın
# Eklentileri yükseltin
# Veritabanını kontrol etmek için güncelleme komut dosyasını çalıştırın
# Güncelleme testini yapın
# Eski kurulumlardan kalanları kaldırın

== Kontrol gereksinimleri == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} aşağıdakilere gereksinim duymaktadır:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* ve aşağıdakilerden biri:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Sürüm 1.36'dan bu yana, MediaWiki yalnızca iki LTS sürümünden önceki yükseltmeleri desteklemeyi taahhüt eder ([[phab:T259771]] sayfasına bakın). MediaWiki'nin eski sürümlerinden yükseltmelerin birden çok adımda gerçekleştirilmesi gerekecektir.
Bu, 1.23'ten veya önceki sürümlerden 1.36'ya yükseltmek istiyorsanız, öncelikle 1.23 vikinizi 1.27'ye (veya 1.35'e) yükseltmeniz gerekeceği ve 1.27'den (veya 1.35'ten) 1.36'ya yükseltebileceğiniz anlamına gelir.

Eğer PostgreSQL kullanıyorsanız lütfen {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}} bölümünü de okuyun.

Daha fazla bilgi için lütfen {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} ve {{ll|Compatibility}}'i okuyun.

== Sürüm notlarını okuyun ==
Tarball dağıtım dosyası içinde, veya [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] tarafından teslim edilen/ihraç edilen dosyalar içinde, adı büyük harflerle yazılmış dosyalardan biri olan '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|viki]]) içeren bir dosya var.
Şimdi paketi açıp ve bu sürümde nelerin değiştiğini öğrenmenin zamanı geldi.
UPGRADE dosyasındaki talimatları da okumalısınız.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Bekleyen işlerin kaldırılması ==
Performans nedenleriyle, veritabanındaki bazı işler ertelenir ve [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|iş kuyruğu]] tarafından yönetilir.
Bu ertelenen işler veritabanında saklanır ve gerçekleşmesi gereken eylemler hakkında bilgi veren parametreleri içerir.
Bu bekleyen işleri, parametre özelliklerinin yeni sürümde değişmesi durumunda başarısız olmasını önlemeniz için vikiyi yükseltmeden önce çalıştırmanız kesinlikle önerilmektedir.
Tüm bekleyen işleri çalıştırmak ve yükseltmeyi gerçekleştirmeden önce sırayı temizlemek için {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} kullanın.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Mevcut dosyaları ve veritabanını yedekle ==

:''Tam talimatlar: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

Yükseltme komut dosyaları iyi-korunmuş ve sağlam olsa da, işler yine de ters gidebilir. Veritabanı şemasını güncellemeye başlamadan önce, hem veritabanını hem de dosyaları içeren, vikinin '''tam [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|yedeğini]]''' alın:

* vikinin içeriği, veritabanından (karakter setinin doğru şekilde belirlendiğinden emin olmak için önce LocalSettings.php dosyasını kontrol edin). SQL dökümanı dökümüne ek olarak bir XML dökümü oluşturmak iyi bir fikir olabilir.
:* MySQL, hem SQL dökümü hem de XML dökümü, &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; komutuyla birlikte kullanılmaktadır:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, veritabanı dökümü için &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; komutu ile birlikte kullanılmaktadır:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, yedek oluşturmak için bir MediaWiki komut dosyası kullanıyorsunuz:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* resimler ve diğer medya dosyaları (&lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; dizininin içeriği, özel logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* yapılandırma dosyaları, ör. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (eğer varsa)
* MediaWiki'nin tüm kabuk ve eklentilerini içeren program dosyalarını, özellikle bunları değiştirdiyseniz.

== Yeni dosyaların paketini açma ==

=== Bir tarball paketi kullanma ===

FTP veya komut satırı kullanarak yeni dosyaları yükleyebilirsiniz. Erişiminiz varsa komut satırını kullanın! Komut satırını kullanmak, binlerce dosyanın her birini FTP ile yüklemekten çok daha hızlı olacaktır.

{{Note|1=Açılmış tarball'ınızı sunucunuzdaki yeni ve boş bir klasöre yerleştirmelisiniz. Eğer yeni sürümü doğrudan yeni bir dizin yerine eski sürümünüzün üstünde yüklerseniz, [[#Back up existing files and the database|Var olan dosyaları ve veritabanını yedekle]] bölümünde açıklanan talimatları izlemelisiniz. Aksi takdirde, herhangi bir özelleştirme yaptıysanız, bunları yeniden uygulamak için herhangi bir başvuru yapmadan ayrılmanızı sağlayacak şekilde silebilirsiniz. MediaWiki'nin canlı kopyasının üstünde yeni bir tarball yükleme, MediaWiki'nin eski sürümündeki bazı dosyaları geride bırakabilir ve bu da güncellemenin kodunu etkileyebilir. Bu sebeple yeni dosyaları yeni bir dizinde açmanız ve daha sonra özelleştirmeleri yeni dizine uygulamanız (LocalSettings.php, resimler klasörü, eklentileri ve özel kabuklar gibi diğer özelleştirmeleri geri yüklemeniz önerilir)}}

==== FTP veya grafik ====

Eğer sunucunuzdaki komut satırına erişemiyorsanız, MediaWiki tarball'ını yerel bilgisayarınıza indirin ve yerel bilgisayarda tarball'ı çıkarmak için [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] kullanın.

Dosyaları bilgisayarınıza çıkardıktan sonra, en sevdiğiniz FTP istemci yazılımını kullanarak dizinleri ve dosyaları sunucuya yükleyiniz.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Komut satırı ====
Mevcut kullanıcı viki kurulum dizinleri üzerinde tam yazma izinine sahip değilse &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; komutunu kullanarak çalıştırmanız gerekebilir.
Normalde bir tarball paketini açtığınızda, yeni viki sürümü için yeni bir dizin oluşturulur ve eski kurulum dizininizden eski yapılandırma dosyaları ve resim dizinini kopyalamanız gerekir:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

(Open)Solaris kullanıcıları &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, veya:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Diğer dosyalar ===

Tarball'ı yükledikten sonra, bazı dosya ve klasörleri eski kurulum dizininden yeni bir dizine kopyalamanız veya taşımanız gerekir:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* $code-lc, eski yapılandırma ayarlarınızı içerir.&lt;/span&gt;
* Yüklenen tüm dosyaları içeren wiki &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (veya eski sürümlerdeki &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt;) dizininin, farklı bir yükleme dizini seçmediyseniz, sahipliğini ve izinleri değiştirin. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (Örneğin. web kullanıcınız &quot;apache&quot; ise).
* &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; dizinindeki bazı eklentiler. Güncellenmiş eklentileri her zaman almalısınız, eski uzantıların MediaWiki'nin yeni bir sürümüyle çalışması garanti edilmez.
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|Özel bir logo]] kullanmanız durumunda, bu dosyanın da yedekten geri yüklenmesi gerekiyor. 1.24 öncesi sürümlerde kabuklar genellikle &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt; dizininde yer almaktadır. 1.24 sonrası sürümlerde sizin tercihinize göre &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; veya &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; dizininde yer almaktadır. Sonra LocalSettings.php ye ekleme yapınız ör. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; gibi.
* 1.35 için logoları [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]] üzerinden geri yüklemeniz gerekebilir. Ardından LocalSettings.php örneğine ekleyin, ör. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; dizinindeki özel kabuklar.
* Eski kurulum dosyalarında veya eklentilerde yapılan değişiklikler.
* Herhangi bir .htaccess dosyası (Apache kullanıyorsanız ve onlarda herhangi bir kural tanımladıysanız).

İşiniz bittiğinde, bu yeni klasörü web sunucusundaki yayınlanmış klasör yapın veya eski kurulum dizinini yeniden adlandırın ve yenisini eski adla eşleşecek şekilde yeniden adlandırın.

=== Git kullanımı ===

Eğer {{ll|Download from Git|Git}} kullanılıyorsa, dosyaları yeni bir konumda dışarı aktarınız, ve önceki özelleştirilmiş dosyaları bir önceki bölümde açıklandığı gibi yeni konuma kopyalayınız.

Bazı harici PHP kütüphaneleri Composer veya Wikimedia wiki çiftliği için sağlanan belirli bir koleksiyon kullanarak kurmanız gerekecektir.
Harici kütüphanelerin yüklenmesi ve güncellenmesi ile ilgili daha fazla bilgi [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git indirme belgesinde]] bulunabilir.

=== Yama kullanma ===
Küçük bir sürüm güncellemesi için genellikle küçük bir yama dosyası kullanılabilir.
Bunu kullanmak için [[:tr:patch (Unix)|patch]] dosyasını indirmeniz gerekecek.
Yama dosyasını [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ dökümler sitesinden] elle indirin ve çıkarın veya aşağıdaki wget ile yönergeleri izleyin.
Yamalar aşamalıdır, bir sürümü '''atlayamazsınız'''.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; ana MediaWiki dizinine (LocalSettings.php ile birlikte).
# Yama eki dosyasını indirin ve &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; yapınız.
# Neyin değiştiğini kontrol etmek için &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; komutunu kullanın (''örn.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Eğer her şey yolundaysa,  &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt; olmadan tekrar &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt;'i çalıştırın.
# Special:Version sayfasını kontrol ediniz. Yeni sürüm numarasını bu sayfada görmelisiniz.

=== Kalan dosyalar hatalara neden olabilir ===

Eski kurulum dizininin olduğu yere paketini açarsanız, bazı eski dosyalar yeni sürümde sorunlara sebep olabilir.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Eğer [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profil]] kullanmıyorsanız, ancak MediaWiki kök klasörünüzde bir &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyası varsa, &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt; bağlı hataları alabilirsiniz.
&lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasının silinmesi veya yeniden adlandırılması bu hatayı çözer. MediaWiki kök klasöründe bulunan &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; dosyası gelecekte profil oluşturmayı etkinleştirmeniz durumunda bir şablon görevi görebilir.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23 temel görünüm dosyalarının otomatik görünüm bulma mekanizmasını kaldırır. Bu sürüme yükselttikten sonra, doğrudan &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; dizinindeki &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; eski dosyalarının yanı sıra &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; dizinindeki ilgili alt klasörlerin kaldırıldığından emin olmalısınız. MediaWiki, hatırlamanıza yardımcı olacak herhangi biri hala bulunursa uyarıları kaydeder. (Benzer bir kurala uymak için özel kaplamaları da ayarlamanız gerekir.) Ayrıntılar için {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} bölümüne bakın.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 çekirdek kabuk dosyalarının yollarını değiştirdi. Bu sürüme geçtikten sonra, eski &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyalarının doğrudan &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; dizininde artık bulunmadığından emin olmanız gerekir.

== Eklentilerin güncellenmesi ==

Bazı eklentiler MediaWiki'nin yeni sürümüyle çalışmak için güncellendiler. Bu tür uzantıları en son sürümlerine yükseltmeyi unutmayınız. Özel uzantılar için elle güncelleme yapmanız gerekebilir.

Farklı [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarbalları]] eklentileri bazı alt grupları içerir ve MediaWiki çekirdeğiniz için doğru olan sürümü seçmenize yardımcı olur.

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Uzantı Dağıtıcı]], MediaWiki'nin desteklenen sürümleriyle çalışacak eklentilerin enstantanesini almak isteyen kullanıcılar için iyi çalışmaktadır.

Eğer daha fazla eklenti istiyorsanız o zaman [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|Git deposundan indirme]] muhtemelen sizin için en iyisidir.
Git'iniz yoksa ancak çok sayıda uzantıyı yükseltmek istiyorsanız, [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]] kullanmayı düşünebilirsiniz.

== LocalSettings.php'nizi uyarlayın ==

Eski sürümlerdeki &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasını kullanırsanız, yeni sürümlerde bunun nasıl uygulayacağını ayarlamanız gerekebilir:

=== Kabuk kaydı ===

MediaWiki'nin 1.24 sürümünden itibaren, Vector, Monobook, Modern ve CologneBlue gibi paket kabuklar artık MediaWiki çekirdeğinin bir parçası değildir. Bunları kullanmak için paketlerin &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasında kayıtlı olması gerekir; aksi takdirde MediaWiki sizi kabukları yüklemediğiniz konusunda uyaracaktır.

1.24 sürümünden daha güncel bir sürüme güncelleme yaparken bu kabuklardan birini kullanmak olmak istiyorsanız &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasına eklemeniz gereken şey aşağıdaki gibidir:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Diğer kabuklar henüz yeni [[Manual:Extension registration|kabuk kayıt]] sistemine uyarlanmamış olabilir, bu sebeple, herhangi bir sorun çıkması durumunda doğru bir şekilde nasıl kayıt olacağını görmek için her bir kabuğun dokümantasyon sayfasına bakınız.

=== Uzantı kaydı ===

MediaWiki'nin 1.25 sürümünden itibaren, uzantılar yeni [[Manual:Extension registration|uzantı kayıt]] sistemi kullanıyor.

Daha önceki &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyası şöyle bir şey içeriyordu:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Bu, aşağıdaki biçime dönüştürüldü:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Uzantılar yeni eklenti kayıt sistemini kullanacak şekilde uyarlanmaktadır.
Uyarlanmamış uzantılar, eski kurulum biçimini kullanmalıdır.
Daha fazla bilgi için eklentinin sayfasındaki kurulum talimatlarına bakın.

=== Diğer değişiklikler ===
Bazı değişkenler eskimiş veya kaldırılmış olabilir.
Onları &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;'e yerleştirmek genellikle herhangi bir etkiye sahip olmayacaktır.
Yeni sürümlerde yeni değişkenler eklenmiş veya mevcut bazı değişkenlerin türü değiştirmiş olabilir.
Genellikle değişkenler için mümkün olduğunca tür değiştirme durumunda geriye dönük olarak uyumlu olalım diye varsayılan yapıyı kullanmaya çalışırız.
Her durumda, bu değişiklikleri görmek için sürüm notlarına göz atınız.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Güncelleme komut dosyasını çalıştırın ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
MediaWiki veritabanını iki şekilde yükseltebilirsiniz: Komut satırından veya web tarayıcısından. Sunucunuzun komut satırına erişiminiz varsa, zaman aşımı veya bağlantının kesilmesi riskini azalttığı için, güncelleme işleminin komut satırından yapılması önerilir.

Komut dosyası ayrıca MediaWiki'nin ihtiyaç duyduğu eksik bağımlı paketleri indirmeye çalışacaktır.

=== Komut satırı ===

Sunucunuzun komut satırına veya SSH kabuğuna veya benzerine erişin. Komut satırına sunucunuza SSH üzerinden bağlanarak erişebilirsiniz. Üzerinde çalıştığınız yerel bilgisayar Microsoft Windows çalıştırıyorsa, SSH'yi kullanmak için [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] gibi bir araca ihtiyacınız olacaktır. Komut satırından veya Kabuktan &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; dizinine geçin ve [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|betik güncellemesini]] komutunu yürütün:

 $ php update.php

Bir Linux sunucusunda hata alırsanız root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;) ile aynı komutu gerçekleştirmeyi deneyin.
Windows'ta basit kurulumlar için not (ör. {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}} ile):
Öncelikle web sunucunuzun (Apache gibi) ve veritabanınızın (MySQL gibi) çalıştığından emin olun.
Ardından &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt; çalıştırın: sağ tıklayın, Birlikte Aç'ı seçin ve &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt; ile göz atın.
Sonuçta ortaya çıkan komut istemi penceresi, şema yükseltmesi tamamlandığında otomatik olarak kapanır.

PHP sürümünüzün çok eski olduğunu ve MediaWiki'nin daha yeni bir sürüme ihtiyacı olduğunu belirten bir mesaj görebilirsiniz.
Bu mesajdan sonra güncelleme iptal edilir.
Bu hatanın nedeni, komut satırının, web sunucusundan MediaWiki'yi çalıştırdığınızda sahip olduğunuzdan farklı bir PHP sürümü kullanabilmesidir.
Bu mesajı aldığınızda, farklı bir komut kullanarak kabukta daha yeni bir PHP sürümünü çalıştırıp çalıştıramayacağınızı kontrol etmelisiniz: Bu, ör.  ''php5'' veya ''php56'' olabilir.
Başka bir sürüm varsa ve öyleyse, hangi ad altında, sunucunuzun kurulumuna bağlıdır.
İşe yaramazsa, sunucunuza sorun; mutlaka bilecekler.

MediaWiki mevcut şemayı inceler ve gerektiğinde tablo ve sütun ekleyerek yeni kodla çalışacak şekilde günceller.

{{Note|1=[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Paylaşılan veritabanı]] kullanırsanız, paylaşılan tabloların güncellenmesini istiyorsanız &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parametresini iletmeniz gerekir. Aksi takdirde güncelleme komut dosyası tarafından dokunulmazlar.}}

==== php update.php herhangi bir şey yapmazsa, hızlı bir duraklamayla sonuçlanırsa ve ardından komut istemine geri dönerse ne yapmalı ====

Bu, hatalı çalışan bir uzantı veya görünümden kaynaklanabilir.

* LocalSettings.php olarak adlandırılan tüm uzantıların ve görünümlerin mevcut olup olmadığını kontrol edin
* Uzantıların doğru kayıt yöntemini kullandığını kontrol edin (wfLoadExtension ve require_once)
* Uzantıların ilk yarısını LocalSettings.php olarak yorumlayın. Bu, update.php çalışmasına neden oluyorsa, bu yarının yarısını kaldırın (yani uzantıların 1/4'ü). Bu, update.php çalışmasına neden OLMUYORSA, ilk yarının yorumunu kaldırın, ancak ikinci yarıyı yorumlayın ve ardından ikinci yarının yarısını yorumlayın, vb. Başarısız olanı bulmak için update.php çalışana kadar tekrarlayın.

==== &quot;ALTER komutu kullanıcıya reddedildi&quot; hatası (veya benzeri) durumunda ne yapmalı ====

Betiklerin aşağıdakine benzer bir mesajla iptal edilmesi durumunda:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

Bu, {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} dosyanızda (ana dizinde) {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} ve {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} tanımladığınızı kontrol etmeniz gerektiği anlamına gelir. Bunlar, veritabanına erişmek için bu komut dosyasının ihtiyaç duyduğu kullanıcı ve paroladır.

Bazı durumlarda, mysql kullanıldığında bile $wgDBname yerine tablo adının güncellenmesi için eski bir $wgDBmwschema değişkeni (Postgres için) okunuyor gibi görünüyor. Bu durumda, LocalSettings.php dosyasındaki $wgDBmwschema tanımından kurtulun.

==== &quot;Beklenmeyen T_STRING&quot; hatası durumunda ne yapmalı ====

Komut satırından update.php çalıştıran kişiler aşağıdaki hatayla karşılaşabilir:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

Bu hata, update.php php4'ten çalıştırıldığında oluşur.

Sitelerini hem php4 hem de php5 sağlayan sağlayıcılar tarafından barındırılan kişiler aşağıdaki adımları atmalıdır:

# komut satırından 'whereis php5' komutunu girin
# php5 yolunun yerini belirledikten sonra php5/bin dizininin içeriğini listeleyin
# php yürütülebilir dosyasının adını (php veya php5) belirledikten sonra, update.php dosyasını yürütmek için tüm yolu yazın

Aşağıda bir örnek verilmiştir:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

==== 'register_argc_argv false olarak ayarlanırsa' hata ne yapılır = ===

Hatayla karşılaşabilirsiniz:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# ~/maintenance bölümüne gidin. Mevcut bir 'php.ini' dosyasını düzenleyin veya oluşturun. 
# Aşağıdaki gibi bir satır ekleyin:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt; dosyasını yeniden çalıştırın

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
=== Web tarayıcısı ===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Ayrıca bkz. {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Veritabanınız zaten büyükse ve yüksek üretimde kullanılıyorsa, Web güncelleyicisini kullanmamalısınız, ör. çünkü güncelleme işlemi ''maximum_execution_time'' ulaşıldığında zaman aşımına uğrayacaktır. Bu durumda, komut satırı arabiriminden [[update.php]] kullanmalısınız (web'den değil). Tam olarak &quot;çok büyük&quot; olan şey sunucunuza bağlıdır (örneğin performansı, yükü ve PHP'nin maksimum yürütme süresinin komut dosyasının çalışmasına izin verdiği süreye bağlıdır). Vikiniz web güncelleyici için çok büyükse ve barındırma sağlayıcınız komut satırı erişimine izin vermiyorsa, vikinizi başka bir barındırma hesabına, tercihen kabuk erişimi olan bir hesaba taşımanız gerekir.

# Veritabanı bakımı yapmadan önce daima [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|yedekleyin]].
# Web tarayıcınızda &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt; adresine girin. Örneğin, sizin vikiniz &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; ise, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;'ye girin.
# Dilinizi seçin ve devam et'i tıklayın.
# Mevcut kurulum tespit edilmelidir. Yükseltmek için ekrandaki talimatları izleyin.&lt;br/&gt;&quot;Yükseltme anahtarı&quot; istenirse, {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} dosyanızı açın ve {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}} atanan anahtarı arayın.

Web güncelleyici çalışmıyor gibi görünebilir: Başlangıçtaki dil seçim ekranını görmek yerine, muhtemelen bazı hata mesajlarıyla boş bir wiki sayfası görebilirsiniz. Bu durumda, büyük olasılıkla web sunucunuzun Yeniden Yazım Kurallarını (büyük olasılıkla [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|kısa URL'ler]] için) kullanması muhtemeldir; bunlar size ''mw-config/'' de güncelleyiciyi değil, ''Mw-config/'', büyük &quot;M&quot; ile. Bu durumda, güncelleme zamanı için ''.htaccess'' dosyasını yeniden adlandırın. Ardından web güncelleyiciye erişebilmeniz gerekir.

{{Warning|1=Bu yöntemi kullanırsanız, yükseltme betiği çalıştırdıktan sonra '''.htaccess dosyasının adını geri değiştirdiğinizden emin olun'''! Aksi takdirde kısa URL'ler ve muhtemelen diğer şeyler bozulur!}}

== Güncellemeyi test et ==

Güncelleme tamamlandıktan sonra, vikiye göz atınız ve aşağıdaki işlemlerin beklendiği gibi çalıştığını kontrol ediniz:

* Sayfaları görüntüleme
* Sayfaları düzenleme
* Dosya yükleme
* [[Special:Version]] sayfasını ziyaret ediniz ve gösterilen sürümün doğru olup olmadığını ve eklentilerin bulunduğunu kontrol ediniz.

== Eski kurulumlardan kalanları kaldırın ==
Önceki kurulumunuzu sunucudaki başka bir klasöre kopyaladıysanız, onu kaldırdığınızdan veya web'den tamamen erişilemez hâle getirdiğinizden emin olun.
Eski kurulumları web'den erişilebilir bırakmamak, yükseltme amacını tamamen ortadan kaldırdığı ve sunucunuzu saldırılara açık bıraktığı için çok önemlidir.

== Sıkça Sorulan Sorular ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
=== Güncellemek ne kadar zor? ===

Değiştirdiğiniz tek dosya {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} ise ve 1.5 veya daha yeni bir sürüme geçiyorsanız, işlem çok basittir. Söz konusu insan işi miktarı sadece birkaç dakikadır. Veritabanı şeması değişiklikleri, veritabanınızın boyutuyla orantılı bir zaman alır - milyonlarca sayfalı vikiler için potansiyel olarak saatler, ancak birkaç bin sayfalık daha tipik bir boyut için, genellikle saniyeler içinde yapılır.

Aynı büyük sürümdeki küçük yükseltmeler, {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 sürümünden 1.13.1 sürüme kadar, herhangi bir şema değişikliği gerektirmez.
Yalnızca dosyaları güncelleyebilirsiniz. Veritabanının güncellenmesi gerekmez, bu nedenle yükleyici betiğini çalıştırmak gerekli değildir.

1.4 veya daha eski bir sürüme geçmek potansiyel olarak karmaşıktır çünkü UTF-8 dışındaki karakter kümeleri için destek bırakılmıştır ve toplu metin saklama şeması değişmiştir. Lütfen &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; dosyasındaki ilgili bölümü okuyun.

Kaynak kodumuzu değiştirdiyseniz ve değişikliklerinizin üzerine yazılmasını istemiyorsanız yükseltme işlemi zorlaşır. $fiff, [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] veya [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] gibi araçlar faydalı olabilir. Korumasız uzantılar kullanıyorsanız da sorun olasılığı vardır. MediaWiki'yi yükseltirken uzantılarınızı da yeni sürüme geçirin.

Dış görünümü değiştirdiyseniz veya özel bir dış görünüm kullanıyorsanız, MediaWiki'nin yeni sürümüyle yeniden çalışacak şekilde büyük olasılıkla ayarlamanız gerekecektir.

{{Tip|1=Her seferinde &quot;global&quot; css ve js (javascript) dosyalarınızı yamalamak yerine, kodu MediaWiki:Common.js ve MediaWiki:Common.css sayfalarınıza ekleyebilirsiniz. Bunlar, yükselttiğinizde yeniden kullanılacak veritabanının bir parçası olduğundan, artık MediaWiki çekirdek dosyalarını düzeltmeniz gerekmeyecek.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== Gerçekten eski bir sürümden nasıl yükseltebilirim? Bir adımda mı yoksa birkaç adımda mı? ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bu duruma göre değişir: '''MediaWiki 1.4 veya daha eski bir sürümden yükseltme yapıyorsanız''', önce MediaWiki 1.5 sürümüne geçmelisiniz. Latin-1 vikiden yükseltme yapıyorsanız, veritabanının ilgili bölümlerini UTF-8'e dönüştürmek için upgrade1_5.php (MediaWiki 1.5'te bulunur) kullanın ve bunun çalışması için $localsettings ayarlarınızda $latin değerinin true olarak ayarlanması gerekir. Ardından update.php dosyasını çalıştırın ve LocalSettings.php dosyasındaki $legacy seçeneğini daha önce wiki tarafından kullanılan kodlamaya ayarlayın (örn. Windows-1252). Temel olarak Wikipedia ve diğer Wikimedia Foundation siteleri MediaWiki 1.4'ten 1.5'e yükseltildi - [$noc ilgili ayarlar dosyasına (uyarı: büyük sayfa!)] Ve bazı [[$wikitech|Wikitech'teki ilgili notlara]] bakın. upgrade1.5 betiğini çalıştırmadan önce MediaWiki 1.4'e yükseltmeniz gerekebilir.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
Latin-1 vikiniz için bir veritabanı dökümü yapmak istiyorsanız (örn. MySQL), {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} tablosundaki &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; alanının türünün &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt; olduğundan emin olun. Karakter kodlaması sorunlarını önlemek için &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;.

'''MediaWiki 1.5 veya daha yeni''' bir sürümden '''1.35''''e yükseltme yapıyorsanız, eski sürümünüzden en son kararlı sürüme yükseltme yapabilirsiniz.
Raporların büyük çoğunluğu ve otomatik test, tek adımda yapmanın gayet iyi çalıştığını gösterir.
Buna inanmakta güçlük çekiyorsanız, [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|bu posta gönderme listesini]] okuyun.
Bununla birlikte, eski sürümlerden güncelleme yaptığınızda, PHP hatalarıyla karşılaşma olasılığının, doğrudan yeni sürüme önceki sürümden yükselttiğinizden daha büyük olduğunu lütfen unutmayın.
Sürümleri atlamamış olsaydınız, yine de bu hataları alırdınız, ancak hatalar her bir güncellemeyle ilişkilendirilirdi.
Bunun yerine, birkaç sürümü aynı anda güncellerseniz, aynı anda aynı hata grubunu alırsınız.
Bu, yükseltmeyi daha zor hale getirecektir, ancak atladığınız ara sürümleri güncelleme konusunda sorun yaşamadığınızı unutmayın!

'''MediaWiki 1.36''' veya daha yenisine yükseltiyorsanız, yalnızca son iki LTS sürümünden yükseltmeler desteklenecektir ([[phab:T259771]]). Bu, çok eski sürümler için önce MediaWiki 1.35'e yükseltmeniz ve ardından 1.36'ya yükseltmeniz anlamına gelir.

=== Önce yedek almalı mıyım? ===

Kısa cevap: Evet.

Uzun cevap: Bu a) verilerinize ne kadar değer verdiğinize, b) yedek oluşturmanın ne kadar zor olduğuna ve c) MySQL'in bakımı ve yönetiminden ne kadar emin olduğunuza bağlıdır. 

Güncelleme hatası, veritabanınızı iki sürüm arasında tutarsız bir durumda bırakabilir.
Bir PHP veya MySQL hatası, güncelleme sırasında veritabanınızı kısmen güncellemiş olabilir.
Bu gibi bir durumlarda, bu sorunu elle bir şekilde düzeltmek mümkün olabilir.
Bununla birlikte, update.php ile çalıştırmadan önce bir veritabanı yedeklemesini almak ve bundan sonra çalışmayı sürdürmek ''daha kolay'' olacaktır.
Aksi halde, saatlerce gereksiz yere uğraşmak zorunda kalabilirsiniz.

Kurtarma işlemi genellikle karmaşıktır.
Eğer güncelleme işlemine başlamadan önce bir yedekleme yapmayı ihmal ederseniz ve ardından güncellemeye ilişkin hatadan kurtulmak için yardıma ihtiyacınız olursa; destek forumundaki gönüllüler bu konuda yardım etmek için pek istekli olmayacaklardır.
Daha iyi bir sonuç, yedeğinize geri dönebilmeniz ve ardından yükseltme sürecinde bozulmaya neden olan [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|hatayı ilgili MediaWiki projesine karşı rapor etmeniz]] olacaktır.

=== LocalSettings.php dosyamı saklayabilir miyim? ===
Evet, ancak küçük değişiklikler yapmak zorunda kalabilirsiniz. {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} biçimi büyük ölçüde geriye dönük olarak uyumludur.
LocalSettings.php uyumluluğunu bozan değişiklikler, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|sürüm notlarının]] &quot;yapılandırma değişiklikleri&quot; bölümünde belirtilmiştir.

=== Viki sayfam güncellenirken çevrimiçi kalabilir mi? ===

Genellikle evet, ancak Git geçici olarak (birkaç saniye boyunca) kesilebilir.

Eğer MediaWiki'nin küçük sürümleri arasında güncelleme yapıyorsanız, yapmanız gereken tek şey kaynak dosyalarını güncellemektir.

Not: Aşağıda, komut satırına erişiminiz olduğu varsayılmaktadır. Eğer MediaWiki'nin büyük sürümleri arasında yükseltme yapıyorsanız, tercih edilen prosedür aşağıdaki gibidir:

# MediaWiki'nin yeni sürümünü yeni bir dizine açın
# Yeni dizini hazırlayın: geçerli LocalSettings.php'nizi eski dizinden kopyalayın, yüklü uzantıları ve özel kaplamaları (varsa) kopyalayın. LocalSettings.php içindeki {{wg|Logo}} ve {{wg|Logos}} ayarlarını kontrol edin ve gerekirse logo dosyasını eski dizinden yeni dizine kopyalayın.
# Yeni sürümün sürüm notlarında LocalSettings.php üzerinde herhangi bir değişiklik yapılması gerekip gerekmediğine bakın.
# Eski dizindeki LocalSettings.php dosyasına aşağıdaki değişkeni ekleyerek veritabanını salt okunur moda getirin; kullanıcılar yükseltme işlemi sırasında düzenleme yapmaya çalışırlarsa bu iletiyi görürler:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Bu, güncelleme betiğin çalıştırılmasını da engelleyen MediaWiki 1.27'den beri çalışmıyor. MediaWiki 1.27 sürümünden bu yana geçici bir çözüm {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}} içinde bulunabilir. Ayrıca bkz. {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Yeni dizindeki [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|betik güncelleme]] veya web güncelleyiciyi çalıştırın.
# Görüntüler alt dizinindeki görüntüleri eski dizinden yeni dizine kopyalayın.
# Eski dizini ve yeni dizini değiştirin.

===Neden güncelleme?===
:''Yeni sürümler hakkında bilgilendirilmek için [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] listesine abone olunuz.''

Çünkü [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|küçük bir adım atarak]] mevcut sürümünüzden en son sürüme geçmek [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|genellikle çok kolaydır]] ve üstelik bunu [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|web arayüzünü]] kullanarak yapabilirsiniz.

Yeni sürümler, vikinizi ve sunucunuzu vandalizmden korumak için güvenlik düzeltmelerini içerir. (bkz. {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). Bu güncelleme yapmanız için iyi bir sebeptir!

Yeni büyük sürümler, kullanmak isteyebileceğiniz yeni özelliklerle birlikte gelir: ayrıntılar için sürüm notlarına bakın. Patronlarınızı oldukça eski bir sürümden yükseltmenize izin vermeye ikna etmek için ek argümanlara ihtiyacınız varsa, işte bir özet:

* {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}} sürümünden itibaren, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|değişiklikler farklı olarak kaydedilmeden önce]] önizleme yapılabilir.
* {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}} sürümünden itibaren, bir [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|geri alma]] düğmesi mevcuttur.
* {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}} sürümünden itibaren, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|devriye gezisi]] [[Special:NewPages]] sayfasında çok daha kolaydır.
* {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}} sürümünden beri, dosyaları [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|yeniden adlandırabilirsiniz]] (taşıyabilirsiniz).
* {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}} sürümünden beri, [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|çifte yönlendirmeleri]] otomatik olarak düzeltebilirsiniz.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}} sürümünden beri, {{ll|InstantCommons}} kullanılabilir.
* Uygun önbelleğe alma işlemine sahipseniz, 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} sayfa yükleme hızlarını çok optimize ettiğinden.
* 1.17 sürümünden itibaren, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|kategori sıralama mantığı geliştirildi]] (özellikle İngilizce olmayan harfler için); {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}} sürümünden itibarense bu özellik 68 dile genişletildi.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} ve {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} sürümünden itibaren, tüm dillerdeki ve cinsiyetlerdeki kullanıcılar arayüz ve [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|etkinlik günlükleri]] tarafından doğru bir şekilde kaydedilmektedir. (1.15 sürümün öncesinde, cinsiyet bilgisi yoktur).
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} sürümünde kabuk sistemi; kendi kabuklarınızda mevcut kabuk parçalarını tekrar kullanmayı kolaylaştırmak için yeniden düzenlendi.
* [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]] sürümünden itibaren, [[m:Help:Diff|farklar]] daha anlaşılır yapıdadır.
* [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] ve [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]] sürümlerinde, e-posta bildirimleri daha net ve daha öngörülebilir hale gelirken, wiki'niz daha etkili hale getirdi.
* [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], sürümünden itibaren, vandalizme mücadele (devriye kontrolü) daha az zaman almaktadır.
* [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]] sürümünde, daha iyi güvenlik sağlamak için şifre deposu geliştirildi.
* [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]] sürümünden beri, [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|geliştirilmiş son değişiklikler mevcuttur]]
* [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]] sürümünde, [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot;]] mekanizması geliştirildi.
* [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]] sürümünde, oturum yönetimi ve kullanıcı kimlik doğrulama yönetimi tamamen modernize edildi. InstantCommons artık yerel dosyalar gerektirmez.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}} sürümünden beri, madde sayfalarının işlenmiş HTML önbelleği iyileştirildi.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}} sürümünden itibaren, Action API'sı yeniden çalışıldı ve geliştirildi. Ayrıca kullanıcı grubu atamaları belirli bir süre için seçilebilir yapıldı. IP aralığını engellemeye izin verin.
{{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}} sürümünden beri, engellenen kullanıcılar e-postalarını değiştiremez. Special:Contributions sayfasında bir IP aralığında katkı arama yeteneği eklendi.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}} sürümünden bu yana, {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}} gibi bazı uzantılar artık çekirdeğin bir parçası. {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} tanıtıldı. Tüm kullanıcılar için 90 düzenleme/dakikalık varsayılan düzenleme hızı sınırı ekleyin.
* MediaWiki {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}} sürümünden beri 350 üzerinde dili desteklemektedir.
* MediaWiki, {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}} sürümünden beri, IP'lerin ve hesapların belirli sayfaları veya ad alanlarını düzenlemesinin kısıtlanabileceği &quot;kısmi engelleri&quot; destekler.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}} sürümünden beri, daha fazla uzantı çekirdeğin bir parçası: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (Lua modülleri için), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} sürümünden beri (uzun vadeli istikrarlı bir destek sürümü), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} çekirdeğin bir parçasıdır. &quot;İzle&quot; özelliği, bitiş tarihleriyle geliştirilebilir.

Ayrıca, {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} sürümünde, daha iyi bir editör ve anti-vandalizm araçları olan ConfirmEdit ve Nuke gibi [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bazı çok önemli eklentileri]] paketlemeye başladık; daha sonraki sürümlerde bu eklentilerden daha fazla eklenmiştir.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Ayrıca bakınız ==

* Greg Sabino Mullane'nin Blog yazısı, [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html sürüm yükseltmeleri hakkında biraz daha ayrıntılı bilgi] vermektedir.
* [[Project:Support desk]] yardıma ihtiyacınız olduğunda veya bir şeyler ters gittiğinde size yardımıcı olacaktır.
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - Eğer başarılı yedeklemeniz yoksa
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>8v5o6lsbd67iv3so5rggtazfrlkx9sp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Coding conventions/Java/en</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>578655</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401652</id>
      <parentid>5317402</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T14:39:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7167" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Development guideline}}
This page describes the '''coding conventions''' used within files of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Code|MediaWiki codebase]] written in '''Java'''.
See also the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding conventions#All languages|general conventions]] that apply to all program languages, including Java.

== Build ==
Maven is used as a build tool.
All projects should inherit from the [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-parent-pom/|discovery-parent-pom]].
It configures a number of static analysis tools and linters that will help in keeping projects coherent.
Code conventions are embodied in the  [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-maven-tool-configs/+/refs/heads/master/src/main/resources/org/wikimedia/discovery/build/tools/checkstyle/checkstyle.xml|checkstyle configuration]] used by that pom.xml and will not be repeated here.
The [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-parent-pom/+/refs/heads/master/README.md|README]] file in that project describes how to use this parent pom.

Java projects hosted on Gerrit should be built by Jenkins by using the [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/integration/config/+/refs/heads/master/jjb/job-templates.yaml#87|-maven-java8-docker template]].
Other templates are available to publish documentation and to manage the release process.

Java projects should be analyzed by [https://sonarcloud.io/organizations/wmftest SonarCloud].

== Java version ==
Most of our projects are at the moment targeting Java 8.
We are in the process of transitioning to Java 11.

== Libraries ==
A number of libraries are commonly used throughout our various Java projects.
Using the same libraries for similar use cases can help coherence across projects.
That being said, use the list below as suggestions, not as a hard rule.

=== Production Code ===

==== Guava ====
Guava is used on a number of projects.
Note that in some cases, we have dependencies that themselves rely on outdated Guava versions, which prevents us from using the latest version.The features of Guava that we use the most are:

* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/PreconditionsExplained Preconditions]
* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/ImmutableCollectionsExplained Immutable Collections]
* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/CachesExplained Caches]

==== Lombok ====
While [https://projectlombok.org/features/all Lombok] is not strictly a library, it provides very useful syntactic sugar to Java.
Since Lombok is an annotation processor executed at compile time, Lombok has no runtime dependencies and is thus not creating compatibility issues.

Lombok can be further configured by adding a &lt;code&gt;lombok.config&lt;/code&gt; file at the package level, which might be particularly useful to make it play nice with Jackson.
An example of such configuration:

 lombok.equalsAndHashCode.callSuper = call
 # disable SpotBugs, it does not like generated code by lombok
 lombok.extern.findbugs.addSuppressFBWarnings = true
 lombok.addLombokGeneratedAnnotation = true
 # useful for jackson that will be able to use the all args constructor when deserializing
 lombok.anyConstructor.addConstructorProperties = true

A few particularly useful features:

* [https://projectlombok.org/features/Data @Data]: makes it easy to generate DTO / DO, taking care of all this getters / setters and having a proper, valid &lt;code&gt;equals()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;hashCode()&lt;/code&gt;.
* [https://projectlombok.org/features/SneakyThrows @SneakyThrows]: a better way of dealing with checked exceptions than wrapping them in an unchecked exception.

Depending on your IDE, you might need to install a lombok plugin. See [https://www.projectlombok.org/setup/overview documentation for your specific IDE].

==== JSR 305 ====
JSR 305 provides annotations to better document expected behaviour and help detect bugs.
Those annotations are only compile time dependencies and not required at runtime, they don't generate dependency issues.

In particular:

* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/Nonnull.html @Nonnull] / [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/Nullable.html @Nullable]: specifies that a method parameter or return value should be non-null or nullable.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/ParametersAreNonnullByDefault.html @ParametersAreNonnullByDefault]: all parameters on this class / package / method are expected to be non null unless otherwise specified.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/Immutable.html @Immutable]: this class is immutable.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/ThreadSafe.html @ThreadSafe] / [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/NotThreadSafe.html @NotThreadSafe]: this class is or is not thread safe.

==== JSON / XML ====

[https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson Jackson] is used for most JSON and XML parsing / serialization, with the use of [https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson-annotations annotations].

==== HTTP client ====

[https://hc.apache.org/ Apache HttpComponents] is used as an HTTP client.

As much as possible a single instance of &lt;code&gt;HttpClient&lt;/code&gt; should be shared within an application.
A custom User Agent string should be configured.

=== Testing ===

==== Unit Testing Framework ====

We mostly use [https://junit.org/ JUnit] as a testing framework.
Some projects are using [https://junit.org/junit4/ JUnit 4], while others are using JUnit 5.
Some projects have dependencies on component specific testing libraries that don't support [https://junit.org/junit5/ JUnit 5] yet.
For projects that don't have this limitation, JUnit 5 should be preferred.

==== Mocking ====

[https://site.mockito.org/ Mockito] is used as a mocking framework where needed.

==== HTTP Mocking ====

[https://wiremock.org/docs/ WireMock] is used as an HTTP mock server, which allows testing code that relies on HTTP interactions.
Note that WireMock makes it easy to also test various faults (delays, timeout, etc...).

==== Assertions ====

[https://assertj.github.io/doc/ AssertJ] is our main assertion framework.
In almost all cases AssertJ should be preferred over plain &lt;code&gt;assert&lt;/code&gt;, JUnit assertions or Hamcrest.

== Various conventions ==

=== Unit vs Integration Tests ===

We follow the usual naming conventions to identify [https://maven.apache.org/surefire/maven-surefire-plugin/examples/inclusion-exclusion.html unit tests] vs [https://maven.apache.org/surefire/maven-failsafe-plugin/examples/inclusion-exclusion.html integration tests].

=== Managing &lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt; and defensive programming ===

As much as possible, &lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt; values should be avoided.
[[:en:Null_object_pattern|Null Objects]] should be preferred.
Parameters should be expected to be non null and not explicitly checked, unless they come from an untrusted caller.
Parameters should be marked with &lt;code&gt;@Nonnull&lt;/code&gt; / &lt;code&gt;@Nullable&lt;/code&gt; to allow static analysis tools to validate nullity.

{{Conventions navigation}}</text>
      <sha1>l3v46hf6bgfmguc126b0bfdha0k9j0o</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Coding conventions/Java/ja</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>578657</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401651</id>
      <parentid>5317417</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T14:39:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8207" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Development guideline}}
このページでは、[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Code|MediaWiki コードベース]]の Java で書かれたファイル内での'''コーディング規約'''を説明します。
Java を含むすべてのプログラミング言語に適用される[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding conventions#All languages|全般的な規約]]も参照してください。

== ビルド ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Maven is used as a build tool.&lt;/span&gt;
All projects should inherit from the [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-parent-pom/|discovery-parent-pom]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It configures a number of static analysis tools and linters that will help in keeping projects coherent.&lt;/span&gt;
Code conventions are embodied in the  [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-maven-tool-configs/+/refs/heads/master/src/main/resources/org/wikimedia/discovery/build/tools/checkstyle/checkstyle.xml|checkstyle configuration]] used by that pom.xml and will not be repeated here.
The [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-parent-pom/+/refs/heads/master/README.md|README]] file in that project describes how to use this parent pom.

Java projects hosted on Gerrit should be built by Jenkins by using the [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/integration/config/+/refs/heads/master/jjb/job-templates.yaml#87|-maven-java8-docker template]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Other templates are available to publish documentation and to manage the release process.&lt;/span&gt;

Java projects should be analyzed by [https://sonarcloud.io/organizations/wmftest SonarCloud].

== Java のバージョン ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of our projects are at the moment targeting Java 8.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We are in the process of transitioning to Java 11.&lt;/span&gt;

== ライブラリ ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A number of libraries are commonly used throughout our various Java projects.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using the same libraries for similar use cases can help coherence across projects.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That being said, use the list below as suggestions, not as a hard rule.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Production Code ===
&lt;/div&gt;

==== Guava ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Guava is used on a number of projects.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that in some cases, we have dependencies that themselves rely on outdated Guava versions, which prevents us from using the latest version.The features of Guava that we use the most are:&lt;/span&gt;

* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/PreconditionsExplained Preconditions]
* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/ImmutableCollectionsExplained Immutable Collections]
* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/CachesExplained Caches]

==== Lombok ====
While [https://projectlombok.org/features/all Lombok] is not strictly a library, it provides very useful syntactic sugar to Java.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Lombok is an annotation processor executed at compile time, Lombok has no runtime dependencies and is thus not creating compatibility issues.&lt;/span&gt;

Lombok can be further configured by adding a &lt;code&gt;lombok.config&lt;/code&gt; file at the package level, which might be particularly useful to make it play nice with Jackson.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An example of such configuration:&lt;/span&gt;

 lombok.equalsAndHashCode.callSuper = call
 # disable SpotBugs, it does not like generated code by lombok
 lombok.extern.findbugs.addSuppressFBWarnings = true
 lombok.addLombokGeneratedAnnotation = true
 # useful for jackson that will be able to use the all args constructor when deserializing
 lombok.anyConstructor.addConstructorProperties = true

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A few particularly useful features:
&lt;/div&gt;

* [https://projectlombok.org/features/Data @Data]: makes it easy to generate DTO / DO, taking care of all this getters / setters and having a proper, valid &lt;code&gt;equals()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;hashCode()&lt;/code&gt;.
* [https://projectlombok.org/features/SneakyThrows @SneakyThrows]: a better way of dealing with checked exceptions than wrapping them in an unchecked exception.

Depending on your IDE, you might need to install a lombok plugin. See [https://www.projectlombok.org/setup/overview documentation for your specific IDE].

==== JSR 305 ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;JSR 305 provides annotations to better document expected behaviour and help detect bugs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those annotations are only compile time dependencies and not required at runtime, they don't generate dependency issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In particular:
&lt;/div&gt;

* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/Nonnull.html @Nonnull] / [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/Nullable.html @Nullable]: specifies that a method parameter or return value should be non-null or nullable.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/ParametersAreNonnullByDefault.html @ParametersAreNonnullByDefault]: all parameters on this class / package / method are expected to be non null unless otherwise specified.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/Immutable.html @Immutable]: this class is immutable.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/ThreadSafe.html @ThreadSafe] / [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/NotThreadSafe.html @NotThreadSafe]: this class is or is not thread safe.

==== JSON / XML ====

[https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson Jackson] is used for most JSON and XML parsing / serialization, with the use of [https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson-annotations annotations].

==== HTTP client ====

[https://hc.apache.org/ Apache HttpComponents] is used as an HTTP client.

As much as possible a single instance of &lt;code&gt;HttpClient&lt;/code&gt; should be shared within an application.
A custom User Agent string should be configured.

=== Testing ===

==== Unit Testing Framework ====

We mostly use [https://junit.org/ JUnit] as a testing framework.
Some projects are using [https://junit.org/junit4/ JUnit 4], while others are using JUnit 5.
Some projects have dependencies on component specific testing libraries that don't support [https://junit.org/junit5/ JUnit 5] yet.
For projects that don't have this limitation, JUnit 5 should be preferred.

==== Mocking ====

[https://site.mockito.org/ Mockito] is used as a mocking framework where needed.

==== HTTP Mocking ====

[https://wiremock.org/docs/ WireMock] is used as an HTTP mock server, which allows testing code that relies on HTTP interactions.
Note that WireMock makes it easy to also test various faults (delays, timeout, etc...).

==== Assertions ====

[https://assertj.github.io/doc/ AssertJ] is our main assertion framework.
In almost all cases AssertJ should be preferred over plain &lt;code&gt;assert&lt;/code&gt;, JUnit assertions or Hamcrest.

== Various conventions ==

=== Unit vs Integration Tests ===

We follow the usual naming conventions to identify [https://maven.apache.org/surefire/maven-surefire-plugin/examples/inclusion-exclusion.html unit tests] vs [https://maven.apache.org/surefire/maven-failsafe-plugin/examples/inclusion-exclusion.html integration tests].

=== Managing &lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt; and defensive programming ===

As much as possible, &lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt; values should be avoided.
[[:en:Null_object_pattern|Null Objects]] should be preferred.
Parameters should be expected to be non null and not explicitly checked, unless they come from an untrusted caller.
Parameters should be marked with &lt;code&gt;@Nonnull&lt;/code&gt; / &lt;code&gt;@Nullable&lt;/code&gt; to allow static analysis tools to validate nullity.

{{Conventions navigation}}</text>
      <sha1>gc01jeikhcprdsj8up38iievlwi2q9f</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/135/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>580265</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402972</id>
      <parentid>2123316</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:46:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="124" xml:space="preserve">Sí, pero puede que tengas que hacer algunos pequeños cambios. El formato de $1 es fundamentalmente compatible hacia abajo.</text>
      <sha1>fsn62ulni9pt14ohrno2wgfaf014se4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/45/nb</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>580432</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402664</id>
      <parentid>2613438</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:52:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="56" xml:space="preserve">se også: [[$Topics|Sammendrag av en sak / Løs en sak]]</text>
      <sha1>onv3y9mdw0g7ha5udpk0djvhzd0tk3s</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/si</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>581248</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401813</id>
      <parentid>5184895</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/es</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>581916</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401795</id>
      <parentid>5184874</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/sd</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>584411</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402264</id>
      <parentid>5400756</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14109" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Languages
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==تاريخ ۽ وقت==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== پڻ ڏسو ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>iepmghimb3mvp4qu7oso603xbw7du2l</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/fr</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>585342</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402197</id>
      <parentid>5371503</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="18443" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''Voir [[Wikitech:PAWS]] pour plus d'informations.''
Ce document donne une vision rapide et interactive de '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' en utilisant un ''notebook'' hébergé sur le [[wikitech:Help:Cloud Services Introduction|Services cloud Wikimedia Cloud]] via [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: A Web Shell''')]].

{{note|1=Le Terminal PAWS supporte le copier-coller uniquement dans les [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Browsers based on Chromium| navigateurs basés sur Chromium]]. (Google Chrome, Opera et Safari opérationels). Si vous utilisez un autre navigateur, vous pouvez utiliser le menu contextuel (clic droit) ou taper manuellement les commandes présentes dans ce guide. Vous pouvez aussi créer un fichier Bash dont le contenu contiendrait la commande, exécutable avec &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;}}

{{Warning|1=Tous les ordinateurs portables et terminaux de PAWS peuvent être résiliés sans préavis. Vous êtes encouragé à exécuter votre tâche sur d'autres emplacements (tels que [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) si votre tâche dure plus que plusieurs heures.}}

== Créer un compte Wikimédia ==

Pour suivre ce guide, vous avez seulement besoin d'un compte Wikipédia/Wikimédia. Utilisez [[Special:CreateAccount]] pour en créer un.

Une fois votre compte créé, merci de vérifier,en allant sur https://test.wikipedia.org/ que votre identifiant apparaît en haut à droite. &lt;small&gt;(fonctionne depuis {{task|T120327}})&lt;/small&gt;.

Si vous êtes un nouvel utilisateur sur Wikimedia, connectez-vous avec votre compte sur meta.Wikimedia, Wikipedia, Wikidata et Commons.
Et dans chacun d'eux, lisez et supprimez tous les messages en attente que vous avez (en haut).

== Se connecter au Notebook ==

Pour démarrer un Notebook en ligne, aller sur https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub

Cliquer sur ''Sign in with MediaWiki'', puis sur ''Autoriser'' lors de l'OAuth Authentication.
Lors du premier accès à PAWS, vous devez créer votre serveur.
Cliquez sur le bouton vert '''Start my Server'''.
Il est normal d'attendre quelques minutes lors du démarrage.

Une fois celui-ci terminé, vous serez redirigé à une page de type &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;nom d'utilisateur&gt;/tree&lt;/nowiki&gt;

== Démarrer un terminal ==

Pour démarrer une nouvelle terminal interactive numérique,
# Accédez à votre [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home]
# cliq: File &gt; Nouvelle &gt; Terminal

Cela vais ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre avec une invite de Linux '$'.

Le terminal est réel, c'est un [[w:fr:Bourne-Again shell|bash shell]], dans une installation appartenant à un [[w:fr:Docker (logiciel)|docker container]]. Vous pouvez donc utilisez n'importe quelle commande bash reconnue par Linux.

Pour lister les fichiers, utilisez &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== Se connecter au wiki ==
Ceci établira votre compte sur le serveur et vous permettra de vous logguer depuis la ligne de commande.
Cette commande permet de vérifier que vous pouvez vous connecter au wiki de test. Celui-ci utilise OAuth, il n'est donc pas nécessaire de saisir son mot de passe.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Vous pouvez connecter pywikibot à un wiki différent en créant un fichier nomé ''user-config.py'' dans votre [[w:Home_directory|dossier &lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt;]] et en ajoutant les variables ''mylang'' et ''family'' :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Créer une page ==

La commande suivante permet de créer une page de test. Remplacez '&amp;lt;username&gt;' par votre nom d'utilisateur, puis validez la modification de la page en appuyant sur '''Y''' ('''oui''') lorsque cela vous est demandé.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Vous avez modifié le Wiki ! Vous pouvez contempler en ouvrant $u dans votre navigateur.

Vous pouvez en savoir plus sur chacun de ces scripts avec le paramètre '-help' .

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Lire une page ==

La recherche de plusieurs pages est possible via la commande '''listpages'''.

Pour obtenir le contenu de la page créée précédemment, entrez la commande suivante :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Maintenant, s'il te fais l'exécution du &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot; inline&gt;$ ls&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;, la page enregistrée devrait être en vue.

== Un exemple de script réel ==
Losqu'un site utilisé par Wikipédia change son URL, les liens dans Wikipédia deviennent caducs, et probablement des [[w:WP:Dead links|liens morts]] si le site web ne redirige  pas des anciennes URLs vers les nouvelles.
L'encyclopédie Britanica (EP) a changé ses liens , déplaçant les pages de &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; à &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
Vous pouvez trouver la liste des des anciennes URLS sur la Wikipédia anglaise à [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].
Mettre à jours à la main tous ces liens serait chronophage.
Heureusement, EB a maintenu des redirections des anciennes URLS vers les nouvelles. Ainsi, il n'est pas nécessaire de régler le problème immédiatement.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For a simpler example, English Wikipedia currently contains links to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; instead of &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; i.e. a 'www.' subdomain is missing in the URL.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are currently 14 cases on English Wikipedia: [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Wikipedia in other language also have this problem.  e.g. there is one case on German Wikipedia: [[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In order to fix those links, we can use Pywikibot {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}} script.  In this demo we will use the '-simulate' argument to avoid writing to the wiki, as there are strict rules about [[w:WP:Bots|automated editing]] of English Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
First, let's list all of the pages which link to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now we check those pages actually have the literal URL in the page; i.e. they are not using a template.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now use replace to add the missing &quot;www.&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In PAWS, and any terminal that supports color, the diff of changes will show the added &quot;www.&quot; in green text color, making it easier to find the proposed changes.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Utilisation plus complète ==

{{Warning|1=Ne pas écrire les mots de passe dans les fichiers du serveur, ils sont publics.}}

Nous allons à nouveau utiliser les '''Notebook''' fournis par PAWS et ses commandes Python.

# Aller sur [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home la page d'accueil]
# Cliquer sur '''New''' en haut à droite, puis
# Sélectionner '''Python 3'''

Une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvre.

Dans la zone de saisie, entrez la commande suivante. Pour l’exécuter, cliquez sur '''Run''' dans le menu Cell (ou le raccourci clavier ''Shift + Enter'').

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Une nouvelle zone de saisie apparaît dessous. La commande suivante permet de créer un objet nommé '''APISite''' et de se connecter au wiki de test.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Appelez l'objet précédemment créé puis cliquez sur '''Run'''.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Vous obtenez :

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

Créer un objet de type '''page''' :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Vérifier qu'il est existant en l’appelant :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Vous obtenez :

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

Afficher le contenu de la page :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Le remplacer par un nouveau contenu :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Et enfin sauvegarder la page :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Vous obtenez :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

La '''Notebook''' interactif du langage Python 3 autorise l’exécution simultanée de plusieurs lignes? Par exemple vous pouvez ajouter les lignes ci dessous dans une seule cellule puis cliquez sur '''Run''' :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Il est possible de télécharger les '''logs''' (résultats) pour une référence future.

== Documentation en ligne ==

La documentation de Pywikibot peut être obtenue à l'adresse https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/. Elle provient principalement de [[w:docstring|docstrings]], qui peut également être  consultée directement depuis le terminal interactif Python 3 avec la fonction [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].

Par exemple, pour obtenir la documentation de la commande utilisée précédemment :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

ou

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Éditer les scripts Pywikibot ==

La bibliothèque Pywikibot est enregistrée dans le dossier &lt;code&gt;/srv/paws&lt;/code&gt;, accessible en lecture seule.

Il est néanmoins possible de les modifier en les copiant dans votre espace personnel.

Par exemple, pour exécuter une version modifiée de &quot;checkimages.py&quot; :

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the browser, you can edit the file.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit the code -- for instance, just after the &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; code on line 1775, add a new line 1776 that will print out your name: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the editing interface, use the File menu and click Save to save your modifications.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== Voir aussi ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb PAWS cheatsheet] by one user (e.g. about API and database access)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2xh98va5zdks8d0cknil1pfw1gsdpfl</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/sd</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>586531</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402945</id>
      <parentid>5355669</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="52177" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

==بنيادي سراسري نظر==

=== فائل مٽاسٽا ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Choose a method for transferring files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Wget|wget]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Secure copy with [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] or [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Using a [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] client.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some other method.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]&lt;/span&gt;

===شروعاتي===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check the requirements
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the RELEASE-NOTES file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Back up existing files and the database
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new files
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Upgrade extensions
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the update script to check the database
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Test the update
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations
&lt;/div&gt;

== گھرجون چڪاسيو == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} requires:
&lt;/div&gt;

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One of the following:
&lt;/div&gt;
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are using PostgreSQL, please also read {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more information, please read the {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} and {{ll|Compatibility}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

== جاري ٿيڻ جو نوٽيس پڙهو ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Clear pending jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== موجوده فائلز ۽ ڊيٽابيس جو بيڪ اپ ڪريو ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:''Full instructions: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Unpack the new files ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using a tarball package ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Command line ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===ٻيا فائلز===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using Git ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Upgrade extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.

== ٻيا ويريئيبلز ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Run the update script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===ويب برائوزر===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''پڻ ڏسو {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

== اپ ڊيٽ چڪاسيو ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Should I back up first?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Short answer: Yes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Why upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== پڻ ڏسو ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>91xy86tpvk5ov3d5kflkks8msk78wb3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/es</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>586659</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402196</id>
      <parentid>5371502</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="18278" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''Véase [[Wikitech:PAWS]] para más detalles.''
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Este documento proporciona una visión general rápida e interactiva de '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' usando una ''notebook'' alojada en el entorno Wikimedia Labs usando [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: A Web Shell''')]].&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=Ten en cuenta que la terminal de PAWS solamente soporta &quot;copiar&quot; y &quot;pegar&quot; en los [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Other browsers based on Chromium|navegadores basados en Chromium]] (Google Chrome, Opera, Safari y el nuevo Microsoft Edge están bien). Si usas un navegador diferente, puedes intentarlo con el menú contextual (clic derecho) o necesitarás escribir manualmente los comandos mencionados en esta guía. También puedes crear un archivo bash que contenga el comando y luego ejecutar en la terminal con &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.}}

{{Warning|1=Todos los portátiles y terminales de PAWS están sujetos a la cancelación sin previo aviso. Le recomendamos que ejecute su tarea en otros lugares (como [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) si su tarea dura más de horas.}}

== Crea una cuenta Wikimedia ==

Para seguir esta guía solamente necesitas un cuenta de Wikipedia/Wikimedia. utiliza [[Special:CreateAccount|Especial:CrearCuenta]] para crear una.

Una vez hayas creado una cuenta por favor, visita https://test.wikipedia.org/ y comprueba que tu nombre de usuario aparece en la esquina superior derecha (esto funciona en torno a [[phabricator:T120327|T120327]]).

Si eres un nuevo usuario en Wikimedia inicia sesión con tu cuenta en meta.Wikimedia, Wikipedia, Wikidata y Commons.
Y en cada uno de ellos lee y borra todos los mensajes pendientes que tengas (en la parte superior).

== Iniciar sesión en una notebook ==

Para iniciar una notebook alojada, ve a https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub

Haz clic en &quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot;, y haz clic en &quot;Permitir&quot; cuando te pregunte si apruebas el &quot;Uso OAuth&quot;.
La primera vez que accedes a PAWS necesitas crear un servidor.
Haz clic en el botón verde &quot;Start my Server&quot;.
Es normal que tengas que esperar unos cuantos minutos para iniciar el nuevo servidor.

Una vez esté completado, serás redirigido a una URL como &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;nombre de usuario&gt;/tree&lt;/nowiki&gt;.

== Iniciar una terminal ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para iniciar una nueva terminal interactiva:
# Ve al [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ inicio de PAWS].
# Haz clic en 'New' en el lado derecho y selecciona 'Terminal'.
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Esto abrirá una nueva ventana con la URL &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;nombre de usuario&gt;/terminals/1&lt;/nowiki&gt;, con una línea de comandos '$' de Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;

Esta terminal no es un emulador. Es una [[:es:Bash|cónsola bash]] real, parte de una instalación Linux establecida en un [[:es:Docker (software)|contenedor Docker]], por lo que puedes utilizar cualquier comando bash, y usar cualquier comando disponible en el sistema Linux que ha sido instalado.

Para ver algunos comandos disponibles, usa &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== Conectarse a la wiki ==
Esto conectará tu cuenta con el servidor y permitirá conectarse en la consola de comandas.
El siguiente comando debería confirmar que puedes conectarte a la testwiki. Usa OAuth, por lo que no necesitas introducir una contraseña.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Puedes conectar pywikibot a una wiki diferente creando un archivo llamado ''user-config.py'' en tu [[:es:Carpeta de usuario|directorio &lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt;]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) y añadiendo las variables ''mylang'' y ''family''.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Crear una página ==

Para crear una página, introduce el siguiente comando en la terminal, sustituyendo '&lt;username&gt;' con tu nombre de usuario, y pulsa 'Y' cuando te lo solicite para aceptar tus cambios:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Has editado la wiki. Puedes ver tus cambios abriendo &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;nombre de usuario&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; en tu navegador web.

Puedes leer más sobre cada uno de estos scripts de línea de comandos con la opción '-help' de la línea de comandos.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Extraer una página ==

Puedes extraer muchas páginas con el comando &quot;listpages&quot;.

Para obtener el contenido de la página creada en la sección anterior, introduce el siguiente comando:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ahora deberías encontrar la página guardada en tu [$url lista de archivos PAWS].&lt;/span&gt;

== Un ejemplo real de script ==
Cuando un sitio web usado en Wikipedia cambia sus URLs, los enlaces en Wikipedia se desactualizan, y posiblemente se conviertan en [[:es:Ayuda:Cómo recuperar un enlace roto|enlaces rotos]] si el sitio web no redirige desde las antiguas URLs a las nuevas.
Por ejemplo, la Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) ha cambiado sus enlaces, moviendo sus páginas desde &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; a &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
Puedes encontrar una lista de usos de la URL antigua en la Wikipedia en inglés en [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].
Actualizar todos estos enlaces manualmente consumiría mucho tiempo.
Por suerte, EB ha mantenido redirecciones desde sus antiguas URLs a las nuevas URLs, por lo que no necesita ser corregido inmediatamente.

Para un ejemplo más simple, la Wikipedia en inglés actualmente contiene enlace a &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; en vez de a &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; es decir, falta el subdominio 'www.' en la URL.

En este momento hay 14 casos en la Wikipedia en inglés: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

Wikipedia en otros idiomas también tiene este problema. Por ejemplo, hay un caso en la Wikipedia en alemán: https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para arreglar todos estos enlaces, podemos usar el script [[Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py]] de Pywikibot. En esta demostración usaremos el parámetro '-simulate' para evitar escribir la wiki, tal y como indican las reglas estrictas sobre las [[:es:Wikipedia:Política de bots|edición automática]] de la Wikipedia en español.
&lt;/div&gt;

Primero, vamos a obtener un lista de las páginas con el enlace &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ahora comprobamos que estas páginas tenga de verdad la URL literal en la página; es decir, que no estén usando una plantilla.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ahora usamos 'replace' para añadir el subdominio &quot;www.&quot; que falta.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

En PAWS, y en cualquier terminal con soporte de color, la diferencia de los cambios mostrará el &quot;www.&quot; añadido en color verde, haciendo más fácil encontrar los cambios propuestos.

== Dentro de Pywikibot ==

{{Warning|1=No escribas contraseñas en los archivos del servidor, ¡son archivos públicos!}}

Lo siguiente será usar PAWS en una sesión de Python.

# Ve al [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home inicio de PAWS].
# Haz clic en 'New' en el lado derecho y selecciona 'Python 3'.

Esto abrirá una nueva ventana.

En la caja de texto, introduce lo siguiente y en el menú 'Cell' selecciona 'Run' (o pulsa shift+enter para ejecutarlo).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Aparecerá una nueva caja de texto. Ejecuta lo siguiente para crear un objeto APISite conectado a https://test.wikipedia.org/:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Describe &quot;site&quot; introduciéndolo en la nueva caja de texto y selecciona &quot;Run&quot;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Esto debería mostrar:

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

Crea un objeto &quot;page&quot;:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Comprueba si existe ejecutando:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Esto debería mostrar:

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

Muestra el texto en la página:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Cambia el texto en la página:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Guarda la página en la wiki:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Las respuesta debería ser:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

La notebook de Python 3 interactivo permite ejecutar muchas líneas juntas. Lo anterior podría ser colocado en una sola caja de texto y ejecutarse:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

El registro de tu sesión interactiva de Python puede guardarse o descargarse para una referencia futura.

== Accediendo a la documentación online en PAWS ==

La documentación de Pywikibot se puede encontrar en https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot. Está extraída principalmente de las [[w:docstring|docstrings]], que pueden ser cargadas en la notebooks interactivas de Python 3 usando la función incorporada [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].

Por ejemplo, para ver los argumentos para el método &quot;save&quot; anterior, funciona tanto:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

como

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Editando scripts de Pywikibot ==

La librería Pywikibot y los scripts están localizados en /srv/paws, y son de solo-lectura. La librería Pywikibot instalada no puede ser modificada en PAWS.

Los scripts pueden ser modificados copiándolos a tu inicio de PAWS.

Por ejemplo, para ejecutar una modificación de &quot;checkimages.py&quot;:

# En la terminal, introduce &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
# En el navegador, ve a tu [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ inicio de PAWS] y haz clic en el archivo &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
# Puedes editar el archivo en el navegador. Edita el código -- de momento, después del código &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; en la línea 1775, añade una nueva línea (1776) que muestre tu nombre: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;
# En la interfaz de edición, usa el menú &quot;File&quot; y haz clic en 'Save' para guardar tus modificaciones.
# En la terminal, introduce &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== Véase también ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb Chuleta de PAWS] creada por un usuario (por ej., sobre la API el acceso a la base de datos).
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>h138unnp48dk43zwvbeinla3u3i9gam</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402214</id>
      <parentid>5402196</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:55:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="18241" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''Véase [[Wikitech:PAWS]] para más detalles.''
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Este documento proporciona una visión general rápida e interactiva de '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' usando una ''notebook'' alojada en el entorno Wikimedia Labs usando [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: A Web Shell''')]].&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=Ten en cuenta que la terminal de PAWS solamente soporta &quot;copiar&quot; y &quot;pegar&quot; en los [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Other browsers based on Chromium|navegadores basados en Chromium]] (Google Chrome, Opera, Safari y el nuevo Microsoft Edge están bien). Si usas un navegador diferente, puedes intentarlo con el menú contextual (clic derecho) o necesitarás escribir manualmente los comandos mencionados en esta guía. También puedes crear un archivo bash que contenga el comando y luego ejecutar en la terminal con &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.}}

{{Warning|1=Todos los portátiles y terminales de PAWS están sujetos a la cancelación sin previo aviso. Le recomendamos que ejecute su tarea en otros lugares (como [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) si su tarea dura más de horas.}}

== Crea una cuenta Wikimedia ==

Para seguir esta guía solamente necesitas un cuenta de Wikipedia/Wikimedia. utiliza [[Special:CreateAccount|Especial:CrearCuenta]] para crear una.

Una vez hayas creado una cuenta por favor, visita https://test.wikipedia.org/ y comprueba que tu nombre de usuario aparece en la esquina superior derecha (esto funciona en torno a [[phabricator:T120327|T120327]]).

Si eres un nuevo usuario en Wikimedia inicia sesión con tu cuenta en meta.Wikimedia, Wikipedia, Wikidata y Commons.
Y en cada uno de ellos lee y borra todos los mensajes pendientes que tengas (en la parte superior).

== Iniciar sesión en una notebook ==

Para iniciar una notebook alojada, ve a https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub

Haz clic en &quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot;, y haz clic en &quot;Permitir&quot; cuando te pregunte si apruebas el &quot;Uso OAuth&quot;.
La primera vez que accedes a PAWS necesitas crear un servidor.
Haz clic en el botón verde &quot;Start my Server&quot;.
Es normal que tengas que esperar unos cuantos minutos para iniciar el nuevo servidor.

Una vez esté completado, serás redirigido a una URL como &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;nombre de usuario&gt;/tree&lt;/nowiki&gt;.

== Iniciar una terminal ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para iniciar una nueva terminal interactiva:
# Ve al [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ inicio de PAWS].
# Haz clic en 'New' en el lado derecho y selecciona 'Terminal'.
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Esto abrirá una nueva ventana con la URL &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;nombre de usuario&gt;/terminals/1&lt;/nowiki&gt;, con una línea de comandos '$' de Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;

Esta terminal no es un emulador. Es una [[:es:Bash|cónsola bash]] real, parte de una instalación Linux establecida en un [[:es:Docker (software)|contenedor Docker]], por lo que puedes utilizar cualquier comando bash, y usar cualquier comando disponible en el sistema Linux que ha sido instalado.

Para ver algunos comandos disponibles, usa &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== Conectarse a la wiki ==
Esto conectará tu cuenta con el servidor y permitirá conectarse en la consola de comandas.
El siguiente comando debería confirmar que puedes conectarte a la testwiki. Usa OAuth, por lo que no necesitas introducir una contraseña.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Puedes conectar pywikibot a una wiki diferente creando un archivo llamado ''user-config.py'' en tu [[:es:Carpeta de usuario|directorio &lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt;]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) y añadiendo las variables ''mylang'' y ''family''.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Crear una página ==

Para crear una página, introduce el siguiente comando en la terminal, sustituyendo '&lt;username&gt;' con tu nombre de usuario, y pulsa 'Y' cuando te lo solicite para aceptar tus cambios:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Has editado la wiki. Puedes ver tus cambios abriendo &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;nombre de usuario&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; en tu navegador web.

Puedes leer más sobre cada uno de estos scripts de línea de comandos con la opción '-help' de la línea de comandos.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Extraer una página ==

Puedes extraer muchas páginas con el comando &quot;listpages&quot;.

Para obtener el contenido de la página creada en la sección anterior, introduce el siguiente comando:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ahora deberías encontrar la página guardada en tu [$url lista de archivos PAWS].&lt;/span&gt;

== Un ejemplo real de script ==
Cuando un sitio web usado en Wikipedia cambia sus URLs, los enlaces en Wikipedia se desactualizan, y posiblemente se conviertan en [[:es:Ayuda:Cómo recuperar un enlace roto|enlaces rotos]] si el sitio web no redirige desde las antiguas URLs a las nuevas.
Por ejemplo, la Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) ha cambiado sus enlaces, moviendo sus páginas desde &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; a &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
Puedes encontrar una lista de usos de la URL antigua en la Wikipedia en inglés en [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].
Actualizar todos estos enlaces manualmente consumiría mucho tiempo.
Por suerte, EB ha mantenido redirecciones desde sus antiguas URLs a las nuevas URLs, por lo que no necesita ser corregido inmediatamente.

Para un ejemplo más simple, la Wikipedia en inglés actualmente contiene enlace a &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; en vez de a &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; es decir, falta el subdominio 'www.' en la URL.

En este momento hay 14 casos en la Wikipedia en inglés: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

Wikipedia en otros idiomas también tiene este problema. Por ejemplo, hay un caso en la Wikipedia en alemán: https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

Para arreglar todos estos enlaces, podemos usar el script {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}} de Pywikibot. En esta demostración usaremos el parámetro '-simulate' para evitar escribir la wiki, tal y como indican las reglas estrictas sobre las [[:es:Wikipedia:Política de bots|edición automática]] de la Wikipedia en español.

Primero, vamos a obtener un lista de las páginas con el enlace &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ahora comprobamos que estas páginas tenga de verdad la URL literal en la página; es decir, que no estén usando una plantilla.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ahora usamos 'replace' para añadir el subdominio &quot;www.&quot; que falta.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

En PAWS, y en cualquier terminal con soporte de color, la diferencia de los cambios mostrará el &quot;www.&quot; añadido en color verde, haciendo más fácil encontrar los cambios propuestos.

== Dentro de Pywikibot ==

{{Warning|1=No escribas contraseñas en los archivos del servidor, ¡son archivos públicos!}}

Lo siguiente será usar PAWS en una sesión de Python.

# Ve al [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home inicio de PAWS].
# Haz clic en 'New' en el lado derecho y selecciona 'Python 3'.

Esto abrirá una nueva ventana.

En la caja de texto, introduce lo siguiente y en el menú 'Cell' selecciona 'Run' (o pulsa shift+enter para ejecutarlo).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Aparecerá una nueva caja de texto. Ejecuta lo siguiente para crear un objeto APISite conectado a https://test.wikipedia.org/:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Describe &quot;site&quot; introduciéndolo en la nueva caja de texto y selecciona &quot;Run&quot;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Esto debería mostrar:

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

Crea un objeto &quot;page&quot;:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Comprueba si existe ejecutando:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Esto debería mostrar:

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

Muestra el texto en la página:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Cambia el texto en la página:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Guarda la página en la wiki:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Las respuesta debería ser:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

La notebook de Python 3 interactivo permite ejecutar muchas líneas juntas. Lo anterior podría ser colocado en una sola caja de texto y ejecutarse:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

El registro de tu sesión interactiva de Python puede guardarse o descargarse para una referencia futura.

== Accediendo a la documentación online en PAWS ==

La documentación de Pywikibot se puede encontrar en https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot. Está extraída principalmente de las [[w:docstring|docstrings]], que pueden ser cargadas en la notebooks interactivas de Python 3 usando la función incorporada [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].

Por ejemplo, para ver los argumentos para el método &quot;save&quot; anterior, funciona tanto:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

como

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Editando scripts de Pywikibot ==

La librería Pywikibot y los scripts están localizados en /srv/paws, y son de solo-lectura. La librería Pywikibot instalada no puede ser modificada en PAWS.

Los scripts pueden ser modificados copiándolos a tu inicio de PAWS.

Por ejemplo, para ejecutar una modificación de &quot;checkimages.py&quot;:

# En la terminal, introduce &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
# En el navegador, ve a tu [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ inicio de PAWS] y haz clic en el archivo &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
# Puedes editar el archivo en el navegador. Edita el código -- de momento, después del código &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; en la línea 1775, añade una nueva línea (1776) que muestre tu nombre: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;
# En la interfaz de edición, usa el menú &quot;File&quot; y haz clic en 'Save' para guardar tus modificaciones.
# En la terminal, introduce &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== Véase también ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb Chuleta de PAWS] creada por un usuario (por ej., sobre la API el acceso a la base de datos).
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>rhpymhj9s7602njyjhori2brxupfeb6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Good first bugs/ja</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>589141</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402749</id>
      <parentid>5344418</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:27:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12156" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
このページでは、[[:ja:バグ|ソフトウェアのバグ]]や小さな不足機能の一覧を提供します。それらは、既存のウィキメディアのプロジェクト ([[Special:MyLanguage/Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|MediaWikiコアとその拡張機能のみではありません]]) に関与するための良い方法として認識されています。

この方法も、ウィキメディアのプロジェクト群で使われるコードに慣れるのに適しています。

ただし、ここでリンクを提供した各タスクには担当のメンターがいないため、ほぼ「自力で」取り組むことになります。ソフトウェアのプロジェクトにはメンターと組んで参加するよう、皆さんにお奨めしています: [[Special:MyLanguage/New Developers|ぜひ推奨するソフトウェアプロジェクトの一覧をチェックしてください]]。

どのソフトウェアのプロジェクトを選ぶにせよ、まず最初に'''必ず'''[[Special:MyLanguage/New Developers#communication|コミュニケーションのヒント]]の節を読むことです。ワークフロー、コミュニケーションで守るべきことを理解しないまま取り掛かるのはご遠慮ください。

MediaWiki コアまたは MediaWiki 拡張機能に取りかかろうと決めたら、作業を始める前に、'''必ず''' {{ll|How to become a MediaWiki hacker}} を読んで、インフラとワークフローを頭に入れておかなければいけません。

&lt;div style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;&gt;
[[phab:maniphest/query/hJPlqwIq3VqY/#R|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-ui-button mw-ui-progressive mw-ui-big&quot; style=&quot;font-size: 1.5em;&quot; title=&quot;&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Pick from the latest tasks&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;/div&gt;

== 手を付けられそうなタスク ==

&lt;section begin=bugs/&gt;
以下の節にはあなたが貢献できる分野から例を説明しますが、これらの分野にとらわれる必要はありません! 

タスクのウィンドウの右上の角に、問題が起きた製品名が表示してある場合は、そのソフトウェアのプロジェクトでウィキメディアのPhabricatorを利用しています。

ここからコードが属するGitリポジトリのヒントがわかり、もしもっと「広い」視点で議論したい場合、どの開発担当と相談すればよいか予想が付きます (バグレポートは、そのレポートに特定した問題に限定してコメントを書いてあるべきです)。

== MediaWikiのコアと拡張機能 ==

{{ContentGrid
|content =

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = ウィキデータ
|content = 
{{ll|Wikidata}} はウィキ間のリファレンスや統計情報など構文情報に関する集中知識ベースです。
一般的な開発の質問は[https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/wikidata-l?language={{pagelang}} ウィキデータのメーリングリスト]、[[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC|#wikidata IRC チャンネル]]、[[wikidata:Wikidata:Contact the development team|ウィキ]]で尋ねましょう。
|maniphest-query-id = feTFXRzwJufz
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = ビジュアルエディター
|content = 
[[VisualEditor|ビジュアルエディター]]は、[[w:MediaWiki|MediaWiki]] における [[WYSIWYG editor|WYSIWYG エディター]]です。
ビジュアルエティターの開発の一般的な質問は[https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/wikitech-l?language=ja 技術メーリングリスト]や[[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC|#mediawiki-visualeditor IRC チャンネル]]で尋ねましょう。
|maniphest-query-id = 1jIQVKiF4Cuv
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = 発見 / 検索
|content = 
{{ll|Wikimedia Search Platform}} チームは無記名の発見から信頼のできる関連の知識ソースへのパスを作ります。
一般的な質問は[https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/discovery?language=en Discoveryメーリングリスト]や[[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC|#wikimedia-discovery チャットルーム]]で尋ねましょう。
|maniphest-query-id = x8ChCXRefnjb
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = 外装
|content = 
{{ll|Manual:Skins|nsp=0}} は利用者が MediaWiki の外観をカスタマイズできるようにします。
[[w:Cascading Style Sheets|CSS]] と PHP の基礎知識が役に立ちます。
それぞれの外装と連絡先の詳細はPhabricatorのプロジェクトページをチェックしてください。
|maniphest-query-id = Nr66n3sZzhZM
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Growth&lt;/span&gt;
|content = 
[[Special:MyLanguage/Collaboration|Growth チーム]]の主な担当範囲は「{{ll|Notifications}}」「[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit_Review_Improvements/New_filters_for_edit_review|編集査読用の新しいフィルター]]」及び「[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|議論の構造化]]」です。

質問は [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC|#wikimedia-collaboration チャットルーム]]で尋ねましょう。
|maniphest-query-id = chrdRB7Xeupd
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = MediaWiki コア
|content = 
ウィキの基本機能を提供するコアなソフトウェアが[[:ja:MediaWiki|MediaWiki]]です。
PHPで記述されて複雑な上、エリアによってはメンテナーがいるのか機能しているのか不明です。
一般的な質問は[https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/wikitech-l?language=en 技術メーリングリスト]、[[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC|#wikimedia-dev や #mediawiki チャットルーム]]で尋ねましょう。
|maniphest-query-id = 9otR6me9VKZa
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = セマンティックMediaWiki
|content = 
Semantic MediaWiki (セマンティックMediaWiki) は最大かつもっとも普及したMediaWiki 拡張機能のひとつ。

→ [https://github.com/SemanticMediaWiki/SemanticMediaWiki/issues?q=is%3Aissue+is%3Aopen+label%3Anewcomer '''これから貢献を始める初学者向けのタスク''']
}}

}}

== スタンドアローンのプロジェクト ==

{{ContentGrid
|content =

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = Pywikibot
|content = 
[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot]] は Python ベースのフレームワークで、[[:ja:MediaWiki|MediaWiki]] のボットを書くために使います。

開発に関する一般的な質問は[[mail:pywikibot|Pywikibotメーリングリスト]]や[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Pywikibot/Communication#IRC|#pywikibot チャットルーム]]で尋ねましょう。
|maniphest-query-id = yuAX0ibD.dMx
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = 携帯機器用のアプリ
|content = 
携帯機器用のアプリケーションから、ウィキメディアのウィキ群にアクセスできるものが多数あります（Android版とiOS版）。

ウィキペディア対応:
まず[[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Team/Wikipedia Android app hacking|開発の一般情報を読んで]]から、質問は[https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mobile-l?language=en モバイル版メーリングリスト]や[[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC|#wikimedia-mobile チャットルーム]]で尋ねましょう。

→ '''[[phab:maniphest/query/ACz_7mctc8DE/#R|これから貢献を始める初学者向けのタスク: アンドロイド版ウィキペディア アプリ]]'''

→ '''[[phab:maniphest/query/ghNR2Itm3BS./#R|これから貢献を始める初学者向けのタスク: iOS 版ウィキペディア アプリ]]'''

コモンズの作業課題：
[https://github.com/commons-app/apps-android-commons/#documentation 開発の一般情報を読んで]、質問があれば[https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/commons-app-android Commons App メーリングリスト]に投稿します。

→ '''[https://github.com/commons-app/apps-android-commons/labels/beginner%20friendly これから貢献を始める初学者向けのタスク: アンドロイド版コモンズ アプリ]'''
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = ハグル
|content =
[[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Huggle|ハグル]]はウィキメディアのプロジェクト群で荒らしに対処するデスクトップのアプリケーションで、C++ 及び [[:ja:Qt|Qt]] で書かれています。
|maniphest-query-id = dFY64hUU16qu
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Data Engineering&lt;/span&gt;
|content =
{{ll|Data Engineering}} 担当はウィキメディアにおいてデータに基づく意思決定の権限を強化し支援します。
一般的な質問は[https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/analytics?language=ja 問題解析メーリングリスト]で尋ねましょう。
|maniphest-query-id = 9xR.Pps7pivZ
}}

}}

== プロジェクト間の分野 ==

{{ContentGrid
|content =

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = 説明文書
|content = ウィキメディアのプロジェクト群を横断して、説明文書に関するタスクがまとめてあります。
|maniphest-query-id = uHWsrx9ZmGIl
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = 設計
|content = 
デザインのバグもしくはリクエストの修正には[[:ja:Vector graphics|ベクターの画像]]アプリケーションを使いこなせる現在のグラフィック技術が必要です (たとえば[[:ja:Inkscape|Inkscape]])。
[[:ja:Cascading Style Sheets|CSS]] の基礎知識も調整に役立ちます。
一般的な質問は[https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/design?language=en 設計のメーリングリスト]や[[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC|#wikimedia-design チャットルーム]]で尋ねましょう。
|maniphest-query-id = d7UxGJmPBMen
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = 文字列
|content = 
UIに表示されるシステムメッセージはしばしば原文の英語に細かい訂正が必要です。翻訳とは対照的に、翻訳原文（ソーステキスト）はコード変更を伴うため、開発者以外には修正できません。
さらに、不明瞭なメッセージが多く、[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:System message#Message documentation|説明文書の改訂]]も求められています。
説明文書が用意されていない場合は、他の翻訳と同じように[[Special:MyLanguage/translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net]]でシステムメッセージの下位ページ&lt;code&gt;/qqq&lt;/code&gt;を編集すれば手続き上は追加できるものの、何のためのメッセージなのか理解するには、コードを勉強する必要が出てくることもあります。
|maniphest-query-id = 2a.g6qDjnp4A
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = そしてその他いろいろ…
|content = 
ひょっとしてどれから手を付けるか、まだ迷っていませんか? 見てまわれる分野はまだあります。ウィキメディアには何百ものプロジェクトがあるのですから!  これから貢献を始める初学者向けのタスクは、こちらに全部まとめてあります:
|maniphest-query-id = QbBdVKL4yh3Q
}}
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have any trouble or [[Special:MyLanguage/New Developers#communication|specific questions]], please ask for help in one of our [[Special:MyLanguage/Communication|support places]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=bugs/&gt;
== 関連項目 ==
* {{ll|New Developers}} —  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikimedia software projects which offer mentors. Recommended for new contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|How to become a MediaWiki hacker}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For hacking on MediaWiki core or MediaWiki extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|How to contribute}} — MediaWikiに貢献する方法と自由な雰囲気のコミュニティについてもっと知るには (たとえば翻訳、文書化など…)

[[Category:New contributors{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Phabricator{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:New contributors task lists{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>hneazpdb0sugbiblg4hnda84uhg9yx1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/pl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>592626</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402783</id>
      <parentid>2170215</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:51:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="83" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Pomoc w używaniu szablonów cytowania]] i [[$2|pomoc w używaniu Citoida $3]]</text>
      <sha1>5mxn3c4ploex4i0e5jcat1hkp6vsnqh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Social tools/zh</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>595046</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401985</id>
      <parentid>5129444</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1533" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=社交工具}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=概览}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=开发人员指引}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=截图}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=历史}}
|group2 = 其他社交扩展
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = 依赖SocialProfile
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = 其他相关扩展&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(不依赖SocialProfile)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>kok61zu50mvhfrdmtrqo79s0drh4abv</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401997</id>
      <parentid>5401985</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:10:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1534" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=社交工具}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=概览}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=开发人员指引}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=截图}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=历史}}
|group2 = 其他社交扩展
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = 依赖SocialProfile
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = 其他相关扩展&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(不依赖SocialProfile)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>bdz5q0v7zsa7sa8o7d5yw4bevfqhl41</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Developing extensions/ru</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>597072</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403243</id>
      <parentid>5376398</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:06:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="31679" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{ExtensionTypes}}
{{mbox| text = Если вы хотите разместить ваше расширение на сайтах Викимедиа, прочтите {{ll|Writing an extension for deployment}}}}
[[File:MediaWiki-extensions-icon.svg|125px|alt=Расширения MediaWiki|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]

Каждое [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|расширение]] состоит из трех частей:

# [[#Setup|Установка]]
# Выполнение
# [[#Localisation|Локализация]]

Минимальное расширение будет состоять из следующей структуры:

; ''MyExtension''/extension.json
: Хранит инструкции [[#Setup|установки]]. Имя файла должно быть ''extension.json''. (До MediaWiki 1.25 инструкции установки находились в файле &lt;code&gt;''MyExtension''/''MyExtension''.php&lt;/code&gt; с таким же именем, как и у расширения. Многие расширения до сих пор имеют прослойки обратной совместимости в этом PHP файле)
; ''MyExtension''/includes/ (or ''MyExtension''/src/)
: Хранит [[#Execution|исполняемый]] PHP-код расширения
; ''MyExtension''/resources/ (or ''MyExtension''/modules/)
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Stores the client-side resources such as JavaScript, CSS and LESS for the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
; ''MyExtension''/i18n/*.json
: Хранит информацию о [[#Localisation|локализации]] для расширения.

При разработке расширения замените ''MyExtension'' на имя вашего расширения.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Используйте имена в стиле ''[[w:ru:Camel case|UpperCamelCase]]'' для директории и PHP файлов; это общее соглашение по [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding_conventions#File naming|именованию файлов]].&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[mailarchive:wikitech-l/2011-August/054839.html]]&lt;/ref&gt;
({{git repo|project=mediawiki/extensions/BoilerPlate|text=Расширение BoilerPlate}} является хорошей отправной точкой для вашего расширения.)

{{Note|1=Во время разработки вы можете выключить кэширование настройками &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgMainCacheType|$wgMainCacheType}} = CACHE_NONE&lt;/code&gt; и &lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}} = {{#tag:span|false|class=k}}&lt;/code&gt;, иначе системные сообщения и другие изменения могут не появляться.}}

__TOC__
{{anchor|Setup}}
== Установка ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Your goal in writing the setup portion is to make installing the extension as easy as possible, so users only have to add this line to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'MyExtension' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Если вы хотите, чтобы ваше расширение было конфигурируемо, необходимо определить и документировать некоторые параметры конфигурации, и настройки ваших пользователей должны выглядеть следующим образом:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'MyExtension' );
$wgMyExtensionConfigThis = 1;
$wgMyExtensionConfigThat = false;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Для достижения этой простоты ваш файл установки должен выполнить ряд задач (подробно описано в следующих разделах):

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* register any media handler, [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Parser functions|parser function]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|special page]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Tag extensions|custom XML tag]], and [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Variable|variable]] used by your extension.
&lt;/div&gt;
* определить и/или проверить любые переменные конфигурации, которые вы определили для вашего расширения.
* подготовить классы, используемые вашим расширением, для автозагрузки
* определить, какие части вашей установки должны быть исполнены немедленно, а что должно быть отложено до тех пор, пока ядро ​​MediaWiki не будет инициализировано и сконфигурировано
* определить дополнительные [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Hooks|прерывания]], требующиеся для вашего расширения
* создать или проверить любые новые таблицы базы данных, необходимые для вашего расширения
* установить локализацию для расширения

===Регистрирующие функции в MediaWiki===
MediaWiki перечисляет все установленные расширения на странице &lt;code&gt;Special:Version&lt;/code&gt;.
Например, вы можете посмотреть все расширения, установленные на этой вики, на странице [[Special:Version]].

{{MW 1.25|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do this, add the extension details to ''extension.json''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The entry will look something like this:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Example&quot;,
	&quot;author&quot;: &quot;John Doe&quot;,
	&quot;url&quot;: &quot;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:Example&quot;,
	&quot;description&quot;: &quot;This extension is an example and performs no discernible function&quot;,
	&quot;version&quot;: &quot;1.5&quot;,
	&quot;license-name&quot;: &quot;GPL-2.0-or-later&quot;,
	&quot;type&quot;: &quot;validextensionclass&quot;,
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 1
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


Многие поля опциональные, но все-таки будет хорошо, если вы их заполните.
&lt;code&gt;manifest_version&lt;/code&gt; ссылается на схему {{ll|extension.json|extension.json}} файла.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The available versions are 1 and 2. See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#manifest version|here for the documentation on this feature]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unless you need to support an older version of MediaWiki, pick the latest version.&lt;/span&gt;

В дополнение к вышеописанной регистрации вы должны ''подцепить'' ваши фичи в MediaWiki.
Описанное выше устанавливает только страницу Special:Version.
Способ, которым вы это делаете, зависит от [[#Extension types|типа вашего расширения]].
Детали смотрите в документации для каждого типа расширения:
{{ExtensionTypes}}
===Делаем расширение конфигурируемым===
Если вы хотите, чтобы пользователь мог настроить ваше расширение, вы должны предоставить некоторые конфигурационные переменные.
А также хорошо бы дать этим переменным уникальные имена.
Они также должны следовать [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding conventions/PHP#Naming|соглашению по именованию]] MediaWiki (например, глобальные переменные должны начинаться с $wg).  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your extension is named &quot;MyExtension&quot;, you might want to name all your configuration variables to begin with &lt;code&gt;$wgMyExtension&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is important that '''none''' of the MediaWiki core begins its variables this way and you have done a reasonable job of checking to see that none of the published extensions begin their variables this way.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Users won't take kindly to having to choose between your extension and some other extensions because you chose overlapping variable names.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It is also a good idea to include extensive documentation of any configuration variables in your installation notes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here is an example boiler plate that can be used to get started:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;name&quot;: &quot;BoilerPlate&quot;,
	&quot;version&quot;: &quot;0.0.0&quot;,
	&quot;author&quot;: [
		&quot;Your Name&quot;
	],
	&quot;url&quot;: &quot;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:BoilerPlate&quot;,
	&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;boilerplate-desc&quot;,
	&quot;license-name&quot;: &quot;GPL-2.0-or-later&quot;,
	&quot;type&quot;: &quot;other&quot;,
	&quot;AutoloadClasses&quot;: {
		&quot;BoilerPlateHooks&quot;: &quot;includes/BoilerPlateHooks.php&quot;,
		&quot;SpecialHelloWorld&quot;: &quot;includes/SpecialHelloWorld.php&quot;
	},
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;BoilerPlateEnableFoo&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;Enables the foo functionality&quot;
		}
	},
	&quot;callback&quot;: &quot;BoilerPlateHooks::onExtensionLoad&quot;,
	&quot;ExtensionMessagesFiles&quot;: {
		&quot;BoilerPlateAlias&quot;: &quot;BoilerPlate.i18n.alias.php&quot;
	},
	&quot;Hooks&quot;: {
		&quot;NameOfHook&quot;: &quot;BoilerPlateHooks::onNameOfHook&quot;
	},
	&quot;MessagesDirs&quot;: {
		&quot;BoilerPlate&quot;: [
			&quot;i18n&quot;
		]
	},
	&quot;ResourceModules&quot;: {
		&quot;ext.boilerPlate.foo&quot;: {
			&quot;scripts&quot;: [
				&quot;resources/ext.boilerPlate.js&quot;,
				&quot;resources/ext.boilerPlate.foo.js&quot;
			],
			&quot;styles&quot;: [
				&quot;resources/ext.boilerPlate.foo.css&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;ResourceFileModulePaths&quot;: {
		&quot;localBasePath&quot;: &quot;&quot;,
		&quot;remoteExtPath&quot;: &quot;BoilerPlate&quot;
	},
	&quot;SpecialPages&quot;: {
		&quot;HelloWorld&quot;: &quot;SpecialHelloWorld&quot;
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that after calling &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension( 'BoilerPlate' );&lt;/code&gt; the global variable &lt;code&gt;$wgBoilerPlateEnableFoo&lt;/code&gt; does not exist. If you set the variable, e.g. in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; then the default value given in extension.json will not be used.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more details on how to use global variable inside custom extensions, please refer to {{ll|Manual:Configuration for developers}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Preparing classes for autoloading===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to use classes to implement your extension, MediaWiki provides a simplified mechanism for helping PHP find the source file where your class is located.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases this should eliminate the need to write your own &lt;code&gt;__autoload($classname)&lt;/code&gt; method.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To use MediaWiki's autoloading mechanism, you add entries to the {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoloadClasses|AutoloadClasses}} field.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The key of each entry is the class name; the value is the file that stores the definition of the class.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For a simple one class extension, the class is usually given the same name as the extension, so your autoloading section might look like this (extension is named ''MyExtension''):&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;AutoloadClasses&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtension&quot;: &quot;includes/MyExtension.php&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The filename is relative to the directory the extension.json file is in.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more complex extensions, [https://php.net/language.namespaces namespaces] should be considered.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension.json/Schema#AutoloadNamespaces|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#AutoloadNamespaces]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Defining additional hooks===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See {{ll|Manual:Hooks}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Adding database tables===
&lt;/div&gt;
Make sure the extension doesn't modify the core database tables. Instead, extension should create new tables with foreign keys to the relevant MW tables.  
{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension is used on any production WMF-hosted wiki please follow the [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/Schema_changes Schema change guide].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension needs to add its own database tables, use the {{ll|Manual:Hooks/LoadExtensionSchemaUpdates|LoadExtensionSchemaUpdates}} hook.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See the manual page for more information on usage.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Set up localisation===
&lt;/div&gt;

См.:
* [[#Localisation|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Localisation (summary)&lt;/span&gt;]]
* {{ll|Localisation|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Localisation (detailed)&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Manual:Language#Namespaces|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Namespaces&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add logs===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On MediaWiki, all actions by users on wiki are tracked for transparency and collaboration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Manual:Logging to Special:Log}} for how to do it.&lt;/span&gt;

== Handling dependencies ==

Assume that an extension requires the presence of another extension, for example because functionalities or database tables are to be used and error messages are to be avoided in case of non-existence.

For example the extension {{ll|Extension:CountingMarker|CountingMarker}} requires the presence of the extension {{ll|Extension:HitCounters|HitCounters}} for certain functions.

One way to specify this would be by using the &lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#requires|requires]]&lt;/code&gt; key in [[Manual:Extension.json|extension.json]].

Otherwise, some ideas to figure this out:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
	if FooClass::checkIfHitCountersIsInstalled( $this ) {
		/* do some extra stuff, if extension HitCounters is present */
	}

	public static function checkIfHitCountersIsInstalled( $obj ) {

		global $wgDisableCounters;
		$hitcounters_disabled = isset( $wgDisableCounters ) ? $wgDisableCounters : true;
		$hitcounters_version = self::getMyCredit( $obj, 'HitCounters', 'version' );
		$hitcounters_extension_installed = !empty( $hitcounters_version ); // if version does not matter!
		$hitcounters_extension_installed = !version_compare( $hitcounters_version, '3.0', '&lt;' ); // if version matter!
		$hitcounters_table_present = wfGetDB( DB_REPLICA )-&gt;tableExists( 'hit_counter' );
		return ( !$hitcounters_disabled &amp;&amp; $hitcounters_extension_installed &amp;&amp; $hitcounters_table_present );
	}

	public static function getMyCredit( $obj, $extName, $extCredit = 'version' ) {
		global $wgVersion, $wgExtensionCredits;

		$credits = version_compare( $wgVersion, '1.35', '&lt;' )
			? $wgExtensionCredits
			: SpecialVersion::getCredits( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance(), $obj-&gt;getConfig() );

		$extValue = ''; // empty '' means 'unknown'!
		foreach ( $credits as $group =&gt; $extensions ) {
			foreach ( $extensions as $ext ) {
				if ( isset( $ext['name'] ) &amp;&amp; ( $ext['name'] === $extName ) ) {
					$extValue = &amp;$ext[$extCredit];
					break 2;
				}
			}
		}
		return $extValue;
	}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

This should work at least from 1.23 up to 1.35.

{{anchor|Localisation}}
== Локализация ==
{{mbox
| type = notice
| text =  &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* {{ll|Localisation|Localisation}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;discusses the MediaWiki localisation engine, in particular, there is a list of features that can be localized and some review of the MediaWiki source code classes involved in localization.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Help:System message#Adding new messages|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Creating new messages&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Localization checks}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;discusses common problems with localized messages&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;While developing, you may want to disable both cache by setting {{phpi|$wgMainCacheType {{=}} CACHE_NONE}} and {{phpi|$wgCacheDirectory {{=}} false}}, otherwise your system message changes may not show up.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want your extension to be used on wikis that have a multi-lingual readership, you will need to add localisation support to your extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Store messages in ''&amp;lt;language-key&gt;''.json ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Store message definitions in a localisation JSON file, one for each language key your extension is translated in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The messages are saved with a message key and the message itself using standard JSON format.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each message id should be lowercase and may '''not''' contain spaces.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each key should begin with the lowercased extension name.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An example you can find in the [https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-extensions-MobileFrontend/blob/master/i18n/de.json MobileFrontend extension].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is an example of a minimal JSON file (in this case ''en.json''):&lt;/span&gt;

''en.json''

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;{
	&quot;myextension-desc&quot;: &quot;Adds the MyExtension great functionality.&quot;,
	&quot;myextension-action-message&quot;: &quot;This is a test message&quot;
}&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Store message documentation in ''qqq''.json ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The documentation for message keys can be stored in the JSON file for the pseudo language with code '''qqq'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A documentation of the example above can be:&lt;/span&gt;

''qqq.json'':

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;{
	&quot;myextension-desc&quot;: &quot;The description of MyExtension used in Extension credits.&quot;,
	&quot;myextension-action-message&quot;: &quot;Adds 'message' after 'action' triggered by user.&quot;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Load the localisation file ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In your extension.json, define the location of your messages files (e.g. in directory '''i18n/'''):
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;MessagesDirs&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtension&quot;: [
			&quot;i18n&quot;
		]
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Use wfMessage in PHP ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In your setup and implementation code, replace each literal use of the message with a call to &lt;code&gt;wfMessage( $msgID, $param1, $param2, ... )&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In classes that implement {{ll|Manual:RequestContext|IContextSource}} (as well as some others such as subclasses of SpecialPage), you can use {{phpi|$this-&gt;msg( $msgID, $param1, $param2, ... )}} instead.&lt;/span&gt;
Пример:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfMessage( 'myextension-addition', '1', '2', '3' )-&gt;parse()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Use mw.message in JavaScript ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's possible to use i18n functions in JavaScript too.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Look at {{ll|Manual:Messages API}} for details.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Extension types}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extension types ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{ExtensionTypes}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions can be categorized based on the programming techniques used to achieve their effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most complex extensions will use more than one of these techniques:&lt;/span&gt;

* '''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subclassing:&lt;/span&gt;''' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki expects certain kinds of extensions to be implemented as subclasses of a MediaWiki-provided base class:&lt;/span&gt;
** '''{{ll|Manual:Special pages|nsp=0}}''' – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subclasses of the {{ll|Manual:SpecialPage.php|SpecialPage}} class are used to build pages whose content is dynamically generated using a combination of the current system state, user input parameters, and database queries.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Both reports and data entry forms can be generated.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are used for both reporting and administration purposes.&lt;/span&gt;
** '''{{ll|Manual:Skins|nsp=0}}''' – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Skins change the look and feel of MediaWiki by altering the code that outputs pages by subclassing the MediaWiki class {{ll|SkinTemplate|SkinTemplate}}.&lt;/span&gt;
* '''{{ll|Manual:Hooks|nsp=0}}''' – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A technique for injecting custom PHP code at key points within MediaWiki processing.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are widely used by MediaWiki's parser, its localization engine, its extension management system, and its page maintenance system.&lt;/span&gt;
* '''{{ll|Manual:Tag extensions|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tag-function associations&lt;/span&gt;}}''' – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[w:XML|XML]] style tags that are associated with a php function that outputs HTML code.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You do not need to limit yourself to formatting the text inside the tags.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You don't even need to display it.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many tag extensions use the text as parameters that guide the generation of [[w:HTML|HTML]] that embeds Google objects, data entry forms, RSS feeds, excerpts from selected wiki articles.&lt;/span&gt;
* '''{{ll|Manual:Magic words|nsp=0}}''' – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A technique for mapping a variety of wiki text string to a single id that is associated with a function.  Both [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Variable|variables]] and [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Parser functions|parser functions]] use this technique.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All text mapped to that id will be replaced with the return value of the function.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The mapping between the text strings and the id is stored in the array $magicWords.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The interpretation of the id is a somewhat complex process – see {{ll|Manual:Magic words}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
** '''{{ll|Manual:Variable|nsp=0}}''' – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Variables are something of a misnomer.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are bits of wikitext that look like templates but have no parameters and have been assigned hard-coded values.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Standard wiki markup such as &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Help:Variables|&lt;nowiki&gt;{{PAGENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Help:Variables|&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/code&gt; are examples of variables.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They get their name from the source of their value: a php variable or something that could be assigned to a variable, e.g. a string, a number, an expression, or a function return value.&lt;/span&gt;
** '''{{ll|Manual:Parser functions|nsp=0}}''' – &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;''functionname'': ''argument 1'' | ''argument 2'' | ''argument 3''...}}&lt;/code&gt;.  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Similar to tag extensions, parser functions process arguments and returns a value.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unlike tag extensions, the result of parser functions is [[w:wikitext|wikitext]].&lt;/span&gt;
* '''{{ll|API:Extensions|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;API modules&lt;/span&gt;}}''' – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;you can add custom modules to MediaWiki's [[Special:MyLanguage/API:Main page|action API]], that can be invoked by JavaScript, bots or third-party clients.&lt;/span&gt;
* '''{{ll|Manual:Page content models}}''' – If you need to store data in formats other than wikitext, JSON, etc. then you can create a new {{ll|Manual:ContentHandler}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Support other core versions==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;!-- keep this in sync with [[Compatibility#MediaWiki_extensions]] --&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are two widespread conventions for supporting older versions of MediaWiki core:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Master: the master branch of the extension is compatible with as many old versions of core as possible. This results in a maintenance burden (backwards-compatibility hacks need to be kept around for a long time, and changes to the extension need to be tested with several versions of MediaWiki), but sites running old MediaWiki versions benefit from functionality recently added to the extension.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Release branches: release branches of the extension are compatible with matching branches of core, e.g. sites using MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} need to use the {{MW stable branch git}} branch of the extension. (For extensions hosted on [[gerrit]], these branches are automatically created when new versions of MediaWiki are released.) This results in cleaner code and faster development but users on old core versions do not benefit from bugfixes and new features unless they are [[Backporting fixes|backported]] manually.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Extension maintainers should declare with the &lt;code&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Template:Extension#compatibility policy|compatibility policy]]&lt;/code&gt; parameter of the {{tl|Extension}} template which convention they follow.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Licensing}}
== Лицензия ==

{{Extension/License}}
{{anchor|Publishing}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Publishing ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To autocategorize and standardize the documentation of your existing extension, please see {{ll|Template:Extension}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add your new extension to this Wiki:&lt;/span&gt;
{{Extension/CreateExtensionInputBox}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Deploying and registering ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you intend to have your extension deployed on Wikimedia sites (including possibly Wikipedia), additional scrutiny is warranted in terms of performance and security.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consult {{ll|Writing an extension for deployment}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your extension adds namespaces, you may wish to register its [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension default namespaces|default namespaces]]; likewise, if it adds database tables or fields, you may want to register those at {{ll|database table and field registration}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please be aware that review and deployment of new extensions on Wikimedia sites can be extremely slow, and in some cases has taken more than two years.&lt;ref&gt;[[phabricator:T148848]]&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Help documentation ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should provide [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:PD help|public domain help documentation]] for features provided by your extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Help:CirrusSearch}} is a good example.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should give users a link to the documentation via the {{ll|Manual:Special pages#Help page|addHelpLink()}} function.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Providing support / collaboration ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension developers should open an account on Wikimedia's {{ll|Phabricator}}, and [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/Creating and renaming projects|request a new project for the extension]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This provides a public venue where users can submit issues and suggestions, and you can collaborate with users and other developers to triage bugs and plan features of your extension.&lt;/span&gt;

== См. также ==
* {{ll|Extension:Examples}} &amp;ndash; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;implements some example features with extensive inline documentation&lt;/span&gt;
** {{git repo |project=mediawiki/extensions/examples |text=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;examples git repo with this and other example code&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:BoilerPlate}} &amp;ndash; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a functioning boilerplate extension, useful as a starting point for your own extension&lt;/span&gt; ({{Git repo |project=mediawiki/extensions/BoilerPlate |text=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;git repo&lt;/span&gt;}})
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;''Read'' the Example extension, ''base your own code on'' the BoilerPlate extension.&lt;/span&gt;
* [https://github.com/JonasGroeger/cookiecutter-mediawiki-extension cookiecutter-mediawiki-extension] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a [https://cookiecutter.readthedocs.io/en/latest/ cookiecutter] template which generates a boilerplate extension (with variables etc.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Allows you to get going quickly with your own extension.
&lt;/div&gt;
**&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Can also generate the BoilerPlate extension.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|List of simple extensions}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;copy specific code from them&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|API:Extensions}} &amp;ndash; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;explains how your extension can provide an API to clients&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extending wiki markup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Coding conventions}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Best practices for extensions|Best practices for extensions]]&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|ResourceLoader}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== References ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1jcuyr5tf67wdr8n5huwldi9t4naxpo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Extension registration/ru</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>597643</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402514</id>
      <parentid>5375691</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27484" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
'''Регистрация расширения''' - механизм, который MediaWiki использует для загрузки [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|расширений]] и [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|стилей оформления(skin)]].
Вы помещаете конфигурационные данные в файл &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; или &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; в корневой директории вашего расширения или темы оформления, и MediaWiki использует его, что бы зарегистрировать расширение или тему оформления.

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
== Миграция для администраторов ==

До MediaWiki 1.25, конфигурация для расширений и тем оформления находилась в PHP файле с именем расширения или темы оформления, например &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; или &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Сейчас можно преобразовать в:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Это должно быть сделано до того, как вы загрузите расширение или стиль оформления.&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Если вы храните расширение не в &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;, вам нужно переопределить {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}}.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Looks in $wgExtensionDirectory for /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Если вы храните стиль оформления не в &lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt;, вам нужно переопределить плохо названную {{wg|StyleDirectory}}.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Looks in $wgStyleDirectory for both /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json and /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Миграция для разработчиков расширений ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since MW 1.30, namespace IDs defined in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; can be overwritten locally, by defining the respective constant in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; before loading the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consider for instance the following namespace declaration in a &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would per default cause the constant NS_FOO to be defined to have the value 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, this can be overwritten by defining the respective constant in LocalSettings.php:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would cause the &quot;Foo&quot; namespace to be registered with the ID 6688 instead of 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When overriding namespace IDs, don't forget that all talk namespaces must have odd IDs, and the ID of the talk namespace must always be the subject namespace's ID plus one.&lt;/span&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also the [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ extension registration wall of sadness (now superpowers)].&lt;/span&gt;''

Скрипт &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; поможет вам мигрировать с PHP точек входа(?) на файл метеданных JSON.
Если ваше расширение поддерживает старые версии MediaWiki, вы должны оставить вашу точку входа &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; пока не перестанете поддерживать старые версии.

Пример запуска команды:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Возможно вам надо деинсталлировать ваше расширение из &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, если вы получаете ошибки о том, что константы или функции не могут быть переопределены.
Вы должны заменить вашу PHP точку входа (файл FooBar.php) на что-то наподобие следующего, что бы не сломать wiki в процессе обновления.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Или темы оформления

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Вспомогательная документация ===
PHP точки входа обычно имеют документацию настроек конфигурации, которая полезна и не должна потеряться.
К сожалению JSON не поддерживает комментариев. Рекомендуется переместить документацию конфигурации в файл &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; репозитория расширения.
Вы также должны задокументировать конфигурацию в вики на странице вашего расширения Extension:''MyExtension''.
Возможно также добавить некоторую документацию напрямую в &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;.
Регистрация расширения игнорирует любые ключи в &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;, начинающиеся с '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' в корне структуры, так что вы можете поместить комментарии в этих местах JSON-файла. Например:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Формат версии 1 &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; допускает &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; в разделе &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt;, но это не рекомендуется и не поддерживается с версии 2. Вместо этого следует использовать поле &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; переменной config.

Это должно использоваться только для кратких пометок и комментариев.

== Возможности ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Если вы загружаете большое количество расширений, регистрация расширений может быть ускорена, если у вас установлен [[APC]] (или APCu). Расширения, которые загружаются вместе с &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (с множественными -s) будут кэшироваться вместе.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== Атрибуты ====
Повторяющаяся проблема - как &quot;зарегистрировать&quot; что-то с другим расширением.
Обычно это означает, что вы хотите загрузить одно расширение перед другим.
Например VisualEditor имеет &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt;, который позволяет расширениям загружать их модули.
Тем не менее в точке входа VisualEditor'а имеется:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Это означает, что если расширение добавляется в массив до VisualEditor'а, VE сотрет эту запись в массиве.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Некоторые расширения зависели от определенного порядка загрузки, другие взламывали это при помощи {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}.&lt;/span&gt;
Регистрация расширений решает эту проблему при помощи &quot;атрибутов&quot;.
В расширении Math его &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; имеет что-то следующее

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the attributes need to be defined in the separate section &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; node needs to be an object with the extension name as key and an object of attribute/value pairs as the value. Be aware that the key in the subobject must not contain the extension name!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Когда VisualEditor хочет получить доступ к атрибуту, он использует:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Требования (зависимости) ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration has a &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; section, which acts similar to [[Composer]]'s &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; section.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It allows an extension developer to specify several requirements for the extension, such as a specific MediaWiki version (or greater/less than) or another extension/skin.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to add a dependency on a MediaWiki version that is greater than 1.26.0, you can add the following code to &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The key of the &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; object is the name of the dependency (prior to MediaWiki 1.29.0 only &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; was supported), the value is a valid version constraint (the format has to match the one [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md used by composer]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In MediaWiki 1.29.0 and above you can also add dependencies on skins and other extensions like so:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The extensions and skins specified here must also use the extension registrations system described on this page for this to work.
* The string added to specify the extension or skin must be identical to the string specified in the &quot;name&quot; field of the respective &quot;extension.json&quot; or &quot;skin.json&quot; file.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For extensions using Wikimedia [[Special:MyLanguage/Continuous integration|continuous integration]], dependencies also need to be added to {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}&lt;/span&gt;
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Check if an extension is loaded without actually requiring it ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many extensions may provide features that work only if another extension is loaded too, without really needing this feature for the core extension function to work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To implement a standardized way of checking, if an extension is loaded or not (without the need of extra work in an extension that is a soft-dependency in another one), extension registration can be used. It implements an &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns a simple boolean, if the extension is loaded or not (the extension needs to be loaded with extension registration for this to work). Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since [[MediaWiki 1.32]] it's also possible to check if an extension is loaded and satisfies a given composer version constraint:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you would like to check if a specific version of an extension is loaded in earlier versions of MediaWiki, information like that can be extracted with the &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns credit information for all loaded extensions. Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Alternatively, if the extension B defines a special constant meant for this purpose during loading, it is possible to check, if it is defined:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A more brittle way, that should be avoided is to check if a specific class of extension B exists or not, e.g. using this code:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This might break if the extension exists in the file system but is not loaded, e.g. if composer was used for autoloading.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the class was renamed or ceases to exist (e.g. because it is not package public) this will also break.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In general it is preferred to share code via composer components instead of extensions. If the classes of an extension only need to exist, but the extension does not need to be configured nor loaded, for what you want to do, that is a strong indicator that that code should be split off into a composer component you should depend on instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Конфиги (настройки вашего расширения/стиля) ===
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; assumes that your config settings start with a &quot;wg&quot; prefix.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If that's not the case, you can override the prefix by using a special key:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
That would use a prefix of &quot;eg&quot;, and set the global variable &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; to true.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the configuration section of extension registration provides a lot more features and allows you to describe your configuration options with much more detail. Instead of having a single key -&gt; value store for your configuration options, you can also add the following information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The general structure of the &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; changes slightly to the following, more object-oriented version:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Value ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the configuration moved to this place.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the only required key for a configuration object.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Path ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The boolean value of the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; key identifies, if the value of the configuration option should be interpreted as a filesystem path, relative to the extension directory root.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g., if the value of the configuration is &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; and the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; is true, the actual value will be &lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Description ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; key for a configuration option can hold a non-localized string, which can be used to explain the configuration option to other developers or the users (system administrators) of your extension.&lt;/span&gt;
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the description key is usually not exposed to the frontend of the wiki, however, take a look to the outlook for more information how this feature could be used in the future!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There's also the possibility to add a message key of MediaWiki's internal localisation system as a description (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;), which, in the future, will be used to expose the description in the frontend of the MediaWiki installation.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== public / private ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option is a boolean, which defaults to false, which means, that the configuration option and the value is marked as &quot;private&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This value is not used anywhere at the moment, take a look to the outlook to find out more about this option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Outlook ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{tracked|T155155}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The mentioned changes above are also preparation steps for an improved configuration management in MediaWiki. The above changes allow us to, e.g., expose the configuration options of extensions in the MediaWiki UI. For this, the localised description message (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) and the indication, if the configuration option should be exposed or not (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) is needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Unit tests auto-discovery ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki allows any extension to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|register phpunit tests]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without extension registration, you would need to register a hook handler for the {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}} hook, which would look something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(as described on the manual page). However, this code looks the same for a lot of extensions, so you could call it unnecessary code duplication.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension uses extension registration and your phpunit tests are located in the &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt; subdirectory of your extension, the phpunit wrapper of MediaWiki will autodiscover the unit tests with the help of extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Therefore, you don't need to register the hook anymore and you don't need to specify, that your unit tests are saved in the default directory.&lt;/span&gt;

== Кастомизация регистрации ==
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

== Также composer.json ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If an extension or skin has library dependencies, it may have a &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well, see {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Use the &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt; field to make MediaWiki use Composer's autoloading when appropriate.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some metadata fields overlap between &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (discussed in {{task|T89456}}), including :
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code stewardship ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

== Смотри также ==
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Report bugs against the [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]] project.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Old versions of [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (prior to May 2015) and {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} describe the old approach of declaring extension information in PHP code and variables
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=Известные ограничения}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Overview of architecture&lt;/span&gt;}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; is the schema for &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (and skin.json).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] about implementing extension registration&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[toollabs:extreg-wos|Extension registration wall of superpowers!]] — summary of which extensions are still to be converted.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{task|T98668}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking ticket for converting all extensions and skins on Git to use extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;

== Примечания ==
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ecjk2xd57ziaht1vbv8ndfw1cmzye7m</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597740</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403248</id>
      <parentid>5365335</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:11:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15506" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:108--&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[&lt;tvar name=xwiki&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki&lt;/tvar&gt;|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[&lt;tvar name=special&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications&lt;/tvar&gt;|Special:Notifications page]].

&lt;!--T:15--&gt;
Some of these notifications are turned off by default or not available on your wiki. If you would like to enable any of these notifications (or disable them), you can do so [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences&lt;/tvar&gt;|in your preferences]].

&lt;!--T:148--&gt;
&lt;tvar name=special&gt;&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.

== Default notifications == &lt;!--T:109--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:55--&gt; New message&lt;/translate&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:56--&gt; New reply&lt;/translate&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:57--&gt; Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/translate&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:58--&gt; New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/translate&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:59--&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.

&lt;!--T:170--&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:171--&gt;
:Secondary information:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:172--&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:173--&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:174--&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:175--&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.

&lt;!--T:60--&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:62--&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.

&lt;!--T:167--&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/translate&gt;

* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:168--&gt; from [[&lt;tvar name=prefs&gt;Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo&lt;/tvar&gt;|your preferences]] ([[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute&lt;/tvar&gt;|see how to]])&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:169--&gt; via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/translate&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:64--&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/translate&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:66--&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[&lt;tvar name=flow&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow&lt;/tvar&gt;|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.

&lt;!--T:107--&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:

&lt;!--T:157--&gt;
* Link to their username&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:158--&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;tvar name=codeexample&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:159--&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{tl|ping}}&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{tl|reply to}}&lt;/tvar&gt; templates).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:160--&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;tvar name=threetildes&gt;&lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=fourtildes&gt;&lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:161--&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:162--&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:163--&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:164--&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.

&lt;!--T:165--&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:Echo}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.
&lt;/translate&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ==== &lt;!--T:153--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:154--&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:155--&gt; To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;tvar name=code1&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:179--&gt; All the usual link styles work, like {{&lt;tvar name=1&gt;tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;|some text}} or &lt;tvar name=code5&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:180--&gt; &lt;tvar name=code4&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; will work but it will display &lt;tvar name=codebasic&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:181--&gt; No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:182--&gt; Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:156--&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;tvar name=colon&gt;&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, like this: &lt;tvar name=code&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;.
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Failed mentions === &lt;!--T:129--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:130--&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/translate&gt;

:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:131--&gt; Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:132--&gt; Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:133--&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Successful mentions === &lt;!--T:135--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:136--&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/translate&gt;

:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:137--&gt; Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:138--&gt; Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/translate&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:72--&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/translate&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Welcome === &lt;!--T:98--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:74--&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration (&lt;tvar name=msg&gt;[[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]&lt;/tvar&gt;).
&lt;/translate&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:76--&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.

&lt;!--T:77--&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;translate&gt;
=== Milestone === &lt;!--T:140--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:141--&gt; Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:177--&gt; Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions == &lt;!--T:110--&gt;

&lt;!--T:111--&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis. 
&lt;/translate&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:166--&gt; Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/translate&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:68--&gt; Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/translate&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:69--&gt;
Received when {{&lt;tvar name=1&gt;ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks&lt;/tvar&gt;|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.

&lt;!--T:152--&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.

&lt;!--T:70--&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (&lt;tvar name=LogPage&gt;Special:Log/thanks&lt;/tvar&gt;).
&lt;/translate&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:112--&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[&lt;tvar name=flow&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions&lt;/tvar&gt;|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[&lt;tvar name=talk&gt;#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}&lt;/tvar&gt;|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.

==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ==== &lt;!--T:118--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:149--&gt; {{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:119--&gt; Received when a page using [[&lt;tvar name=flow&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions&lt;/tvar&gt;|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/translate&gt;

: &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:120--&gt; Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/translate&gt;
: &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:121--&gt; Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/translate&gt;
: &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:122--&gt; Details:&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:176--&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/translate&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:113--&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[&lt;tvar name=cx&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Content translation&lt;/tvar&gt;|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/translate&gt;

: &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:114--&gt; Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:124--&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/translate&gt;

: &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:125--&gt; Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:146--&gt; notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/translate&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:147--&gt; notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:151--&gt; Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[&lt;tvar name=how&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work&lt;/tvar&gt;|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository === &lt;!--T:142--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:143--&gt; Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[&lt;tvar name=meta&gt;m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata&lt;/tvar&gt;|Wikidata]]).&lt;/translate&gt;

: &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:144--&gt; Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/translate&gt;
: &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:145--&gt; Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Future notifications == &lt;!--T:126--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:127--&gt; Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:128--&gt; They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/translate&gt;''

&lt;translate&gt;
== Footnotes == &lt;!--T:178--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>8zm9i9qcmmdjgjimzffgwj5i6a0i2zc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>597744</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403249</id>
      <parentid>3483282</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="200" xml:space="preserve">Some of these notifications are turned off by default or not available on your wiki. If you would like to enable any of these notifications (or disable them), you can do so [[$1|in your preferences]].</text>
      <sha1>qgaygfl536qth6un5akfsklsxcv9il4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/fr</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597765</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403262</id>
      <parentid>5365383</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14102" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
Tous les types de notifications ci-dessous peuvent être vus sur les wikis Wikimedia. Vous pouvez les voir sur le wiki sur lequel vous êtes, depuis les [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|notifications inter-wiki]] d’un autre wiki ou bien sur la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|page Spécial:Notifications]].

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Certaines de ces notifications ne sont pas activées par défaut ou ne sont pas disponibles sur votre wiki. Vous pouvez les activer (ou les désactiver) dans vos [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|préférences]].
&lt;/div&gt;

La page spéciale &lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; vous permet de voir quelles notifications sont disponibles sur votre wiki et comment elles sont configurées.

== Notifications de base ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nouveau message]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nouvelle réponse]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Plusieurs messages nouveaux regroupés]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nouveau message sur une page dans une langue qui se lit de droite à gauche]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Reçu lorsqu'un message est laissé sur votre page de discussion utilisateur.

:Information principale : le titre du message.
:Information secondaire :
:*pour un nouveau message : l'auteur du message et la page sur laquelle il l'a écrit. Lien direct vers le message.
:*pour une réponse : l'auteur de la réponse et la page sur laquelle il l'a écrite; pointe directement au titre de la section ou, avec Flow, sur le message lui-même.
:*pour plusieurs nouveaux messages ou plusieurs réponses, les messages peuvent être groupés (« six nouveaux messages sur [cette page] »).
:Détails : lien vers la page utilisateur du dernier utilisateur qui vous a laissé un message pour ce groupe.

Cette notification remplace le cadre orange qui apparaissait, mais vous pouvez changer vos préférences pour conserver ce cadre orange.
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Reçu lorsqu'un nouveau lien est créé vers une page que vous avez créée.
:Information principale : la page que vous avez créée et la page sur laquelle le lien a été inséré. Pointe vers cette dernière.
:Détails : lien vers « Suivi des pages liées » pour la page ciblée par le lien.

Vous pouvez masquer ces notifications pour les pages individuelles, soit :

* dans [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|vos préférences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|voir comment]])
* pour une notification précise, en cliquant sur les trois points. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Reçu lorsque vos modifications sont annulées ou restituées.
:Information principale : qui vous a révoqué et où. Pointe sur le ''diff''.
:Détails : lien vers l'utilisateur qui a annulé vos modifications. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Reçu lorsque quelqu'un vous mentionne sur une page de discussion.
:Information principale : qui vous a mentionné, où et à propos de quoi. Liée à la page ou, avec [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]], au message dans lequel vous êtes mentionné.
:Détails : lien vers l'utilisateur qui vous a mentionné et vers le diff où vous êtes mentionné(e).

Pour mentionner un autre contributeur et lui faire apparaître cette notification, vous devez :

* insérer un lien vers son pseudonyme
** Vous pouvez le lier directement comme dans &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
** Vous pouvez utiliser des modèles de notifications s'ils existent sur votre wiki (plusieurs utilisateurs se servent des modèles {{tl|ping}} ou {{tl|reply to}}).
* Signez votre commentaire avec &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Les notifications ne seront pas signifiées si votre signature est inscrite dans un modèle, n'est pas liée à votre page utilisateur ni à votre page de discussion.
* Ne modifiez aucun texte hors de votre propre commentaire.
* Ne dépassez pas le nombre maximum de notifications autorisé (50 sur les wikis de Wikimedia).
* Les notifications sont seulement signifiées aux utilisateurs connectés (il n'est pas possible de signifier les contributeurs anonymes, c'est à dire ceux identifiés par leur adresse IP).
* Vous ne pouvez pas vous notifier.

Les spécifications et d'autres détails techniques se trouvent à {{ll|Manual:Echo}}. 
{{clear}}

==== Mentions dans le résumé de modification ====
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Reçue quand quelqu'un déclare un lien vers votre page utilisateur dans un résumé de modification.
: Information primaire : qui parle de vous, où et le résumé de modification. Pointe vers la modification même.
: Détails : relié au contributeur qui vous a mentionné.

Pour mentionner un utilisateur, il suffit de créer un lien vers sa page utilisateur, en utilisant la syntaxe wikitext normale: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
Tous les styles de liens habituels fonctionnent, comme {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} ou &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; fonctionnera mais il affichera &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; avec un lien vers la page utilisateur sur la page historique.
Pas plus que cinq utilisateurs ne peuvent être mentionnés dans le résumé de modification.
Les modèles de notification ne fonctionnent pas dans les résumés de modification.

Pour inscrire un lien dans le résumé sans notifier un utilisateur, préfixer le pseudonyme de &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, comme ceci : &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
{{clear}}

=== Mentions ayant échoué ===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Reçus lorsque vous avez mentionnez quelqu’un mais qu’il n’en a pas été notifié.

:Information principale : l’utilisateur mentionné et la raison pour laquelle il n’a pas été notifié.
:Détails : lien vers la page sur laquelle vous avez essayé de notifier quelqu’un.

Ces notifications sont envoyés lorsque :
* vous avez mentionné un utilisateur anonyme ou un utilisateur qui n’existe pas, ou
* vous avez dépassé la limite du nombre maximum de personne pouvant être notifiées dans une seule modification (cinquante sur les wikis de la WMF).
{{clear}}

=== Mentions ayant réussi ===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Reçus lorsque quelqu’un a été notifié parce que vous l’avez mentionné.

:Information principale : l’utilisateur que vous avez mentionné.
:Détails : lien vers la page sur laquelle vous avez fait mention de l’utilisateur en question.
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Avertissement (rouge), lorsque vos droits utilisateur changent.
:Information principale : quels droits ont changé et qui les a changé. Liée à la page [[Special:UserGroupRights|Spécial:Liste des droits de groupe]].
:Détails : lien vers l'utilisateur qui a changé ces droits. 
{{clear}}

=== Bienvenue ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Envoyés lorsque vous venez de créer votre compte.
:Information principal : bienvenue !
:Details: lien vers une page de bienvenue comme défini dans la configuration du wiki ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]). 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Envoyés lorsque quelqu'un vous a envoyé un courriel à l'aide du wiki.
:Information principale : qui a envoyé le courriel. L'information principale n'a pas de lien.
:Détails : lien vers l'utilisateur qui vous a envoyé ce courriel.

Les gens peuvent vous contacter par courriel uniquement si vous l'avez permis dans vos préférences.
{{anchor|Milestone}}
=== Jalons ===
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Reçues lorsque vous atteignez un certain nombre de modifications faites (1, 10, 100 {{formatnum:1000}}, {{formatnum:10000}}, {{formatnum:100000}} et {{formatnum:1000000}}&amp;nbsp;de&amp;nbsp;modifications).&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: Information principale : quel jalon vous avez atteint et grâce à quelle contribution.

== Notifications des extensions optionnelles ==

Ces notifications ne sont pas disponibles par défaut. Elles peuvent être activées par une extension disponible sur certains wikis uniquement, ou par une extension disponible comme fonctionnalité bêta sur certains wikis Wikimedia. 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=Détails sur les notifications de remerciements}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Remerciements pour une modification sur une page.]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

Avertissement, lorsque quelqu'un vous remercie pour une de vos modifications.
:Information principale : qui vous a remercié et à propos de quoi. Liée au diff ou, avec Flow, au message pour lequel vous êtes remercié.
:Détails : lien vers l'utilisateur qui vous a remercié et, avec Flow, vers la page.

Activées par défaut sur les wikis de Wikimedia, vous pouvez les désactiver dans vos préférences.

Vous pouvez remercier quelqu'un depuis n'importe quelle page d'historique, depuis une page de diff, depuis votre liste de suivi ou, avec Flow, directement sur la page. Gardez à l'esprit que les remerciements sont stockés dans un journal public (Special:Log/thanks). 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
Les notifications de votre page de discussion si elle fonctionne avec les [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|discussions structurées]] se trouvent dans la section « [[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]] » ci-dessus.

==== Notifications d'une page utilisant les discussions structurées ====
{{Notification type|notice}} et {{Notification type|alert}} Voir [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] pour les détails exacts.
Reçues lors d’un changement sur une page utilisant les [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|discussion structurées]] que vous suivez (nouveau sujet, réponse à un message, sujet renommé...).

: Information principale : Titre du message et expéditeur.
: Information seconde : résumé du changement.
: Détails :
:* pour un nouveau sujet : l’utilisateur qui a créé le sujet et la page cible ;
:* pour une nouvelle réponse : le dernier utilisateur à avoir répondu au sujet, ainsi que la page cible ;
:* pour un changement dans le sujet : l’utilisateur qui a fait le changement et un lien vers le diff.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Envoyés lorsque vous avez achevé 1, 10 puis 100&amp;nbsp;traductions ''via'' l’[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|outil de traduction de contenu]].

: Information principale : Message de félicitations.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Reçus lorsqu’une page que vous avez créée est relue (ou « pattrouillée ») par un utilisateur de [[Page Curation]] (outil de maintenance).

: Information principale : quelle page a été relue et par qui.

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: Prévient les développeurs d’applications OAuth lorsque le statut de révision de l’application a changé.
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: Prévient les administrateurs OAuth de nouvelles applications en attentes d’une révision.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Reçues lorsque quelqu’un tente sans succès de se connecter à votre compte. S’il y a plusieurs alertes, elles sont regroupées en une seule, pour les nouveaux appareils ou IP ; mais pour un appareil ou une IP connu, vous recevrez une alerte toutes les cinq tentatives. Regardez [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|la page détaillant cette fonctionnalité]] pour plus d’informations.

=== Connexion au dépôt de données ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Reçu lorsque votre page est connectée au dépôt de données associé (pour les wikis de la WMF, il s’agit de [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).

: Information principale : le nom de la page qui a été connectée.
: Détails : lien vers l’élément des données et, potentiellement, vers une page d’aide locale.

== Futures notifications ==
''Remarque : ces notifications ne sont pas encore disponibles mais leur description est faite au présent pour un éviter un travail supplémentaire aux traducteurs. Elles seront déplacées dans les sections appropriées une fois disponibles.''

== Notes de pied de page ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>4s0mbwp7smzcm13ulfkc1qtn2ufa247</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403296</id>
      <parentid>5403262</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:15:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14062" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
Tous les types de notifications ci-dessous peuvent être vus sur les wikis Wikimedia. Vous pouvez les voir sur le wiki sur lequel vous êtes, depuis les [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|notifications inter-wiki]] d’un autre wiki ou bien sur la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|page Spécial:Notifications]].

Certaines de ces notifications ne sont pas activées par défaut ou ne sont pas disponibles sur votre wiki. Vous pouvez les activer (ou les désactiver) dans vos [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|préférences]].

La page spéciale &lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; vous permet de voir quelles notifications sont disponibles sur votre wiki et comment elles sont configurées.

== Notifications de base ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nouveau message]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nouvelle réponse]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Plusieurs messages nouveaux regroupés]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nouveau message sur une page dans une langue qui se lit de droite à gauche]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Reçu lorsqu'un message est laissé sur votre page de discussion utilisateur.

:Information principale : le titre du message.
:Information secondaire :
:*pour un nouveau message : l'auteur du message et la page sur laquelle il l'a écrit. Lien direct vers le message.
:*pour une réponse : l'auteur de la réponse et la page sur laquelle il l'a écrite; pointe directement au titre de la section ou, avec Flow, sur le message lui-même.
:*pour plusieurs nouveaux messages ou plusieurs réponses, les messages peuvent être groupés (« six nouveaux messages sur [cette page] »).
:Détails : lien vers la page utilisateur du dernier utilisateur qui vous a laissé un message pour ce groupe.

Cette notification remplace le cadre orange qui apparaissait, mais vous pouvez changer vos préférences pour conserver ce cadre orange.
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Reçu lorsqu'un nouveau lien est créé vers une page que vous avez créée.
:Information principale : la page que vous avez créée et la page sur laquelle le lien a été inséré. Pointe vers cette dernière.
:Détails : lien vers « Suivi des pages liées » pour la page ciblée par le lien.

Vous pouvez masquer ces notifications pour les pages individuelles, soit :

* dans [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|vos préférences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|voir comment]])
* pour une notification précise, en cliquant sur les trois points. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Reçu lorsque vos modifications sont annulées ou restituées.
:Information principale : qui vous a révoqué et où. Pointe sur le ''diff''.
:Détails : lien vers l'utilisateur qui a annulé vos modifications. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Reçu lorsque quelqu'un vous mentionne sur une page de discussion.
:Information principale : qui vous a mentionné, où et à propos de quoi. Liée à la page ou, avec [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]], au message dans lequel vous êtes mentionné.
:Détails : lien vers l'utilisateur qui vous a mentionné et vers le diff où vous êtes mentionné(e).

Pour mentionner un autre contributeur et lui faire apparaître cette notification, vous devez :

* insérer un lien vers son pseudonyme
** Vous pouvez le lier directement comme dans &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
** Vous pouvez utiliser des modèles de notifications s'ils existent sur votre wiki (plusieurs utilisateurs se servent des modèles {{tl|ping}} ou {{tl|reply to}}).
* Signez votre commentaire avec &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Les notifications ne seront pas signifiées si votre signature est inscrite dans un modèle, n'est pas liée à votre page utilisateur ni à votre page de discussion.
* Ne modifiez aucun texte hors de votre propre commentaire.
* Ne dépassez pas le nombre maximum de notifications autorisé (50 sur les wikis de Wikimedia).
* Les notifications sont seulement signifiées aux utilisateurs connectés (il n'est pas possible de signifier les contributeurs anonymes, c'est à dire ceux identifiés par leur adresse IP).
* Vous ne pouvez pas vous notifier.

Les spécifications et d'autres détails techniques se trouvent à {{ll|Manual:Echo}}. 
{{clear}}

==== Mentions dans le résumé de modification ====
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Reçue quand quelqu'un déclare un lien vers votre page utilisateur dans un résumé de modification.
: Information primaire : qui parle de vous, où et le résumé de modification. Pointe vers la modification même.
: Détails : relié au contributeur qui vous a mentionné.

Pour mentionner un utilisateur, il suffit de créer un lien vers sa page utilisateur, en utilisant la syntaxe wikitext normale: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
Tous les styles de liens habituels fonctionnent, comme {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} ou &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; fonctionnera mais il affichera &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; avec un lien vers la page utilisateur sur la page historique.
Pas plus que cinq utilisateurs ne peuvent être mentionnés dans le résumé de modification.
Les modèles de notification ne fonctionnent pas dans les résumés de modification.

Pour inscrire un lien dans le résumé sans notifier un utilisateur, préfixer le pseudonyme de &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, comme ceci : &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
{{clear}}

=== Mentions ayant échoué ===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Reçus lorsque vous avez mentionnez quelqu’un mais qu’il n’en a pas été notifié.

:Information principale : l’utilisateur mentionné et la raison pour laquelle il n’a pas été notifié.
:Détails : lien vers la page sur laquelle vous avez essayé de notifier quelqu’un.

Ces notifications sont envoyés lorsque :
* vous avez mentionné un utilisateur anonyme ou un utilisateur qui n’existe pas, ou
* vous avez dépassé la limite du nombre maximum de personne pouvant être notifiées dans une seule modification (cinquante sur les wikis de la WMF).
{{clear}}

=== Mentions ayant réussi ===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Reçus lorsque quelqu’un a été notifié parce que vous l’avez mentionné.

:Information principale : l’utilisateur que vous avez mentionné.
:Détails : lien vers la page sur laquelle vous avez fait mention de l’utilisateur en question.
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Avertissement (rouge), lorsque vos droits utilisateur changent.
:Information principale : quels droits ont changé et qui les a changé. Liée à la page [[Special:UserGroupRights|Spécial:Liste des droits de groupe]].
:Détails : lien vers l'utilisateur qui a changé ces droits. 
{{clear}}

=== Bienvenue ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Envoyés lorsque vous venez de créer votre compte.
:Information principal : bienvenue !
:Details: lien vers une page de bienvenue comme défini dans la configuration du wiki ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]). 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Envoyés lorsque quelqu'un vous a envoyé un courriel à l'aide du wiki.
:Information principale : qui a envoyé le courriel. L'information principale n'a pas de lien.
:Détails : lien vers l'utilisateur qui vous a envoyé ce courriel.

Les gens peuvent vous contacter par courriel uniquement si vous l'avez permis dans vos préférences.
{{anchor|Milestone}}
=== Jalons ===
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Reçues lorsque vous atteignez un certain nombre de modifications faites (1, 10, 100 {{formatnum:1000}}, {{formatnum:10000}}, {{formatnum:100000}} et {{formatnum:1000000}}&amp;nbsp;de&amp;nbsp;modifications).&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: Information principale : quel jalon vous avez atteint et grâce à quelle contribution.

== Notifications des extensions optionnelles ==

Ces notifications ne sont pas disponibles par défaut. Elles peuvent être activées par une extension disponible sur certains wikis uniquement, ou par une extension disponible comme fonctionnalité bêta sur certains wikis Wikimedia. 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=Détails sur les notifications de remerciements}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Remerciements pour une modification sur une page.]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

Avertissement, lorsque quelqu'un vous remercie pour une de vos modifications.
:Information principale : qui vous a remercié et à propos de quoi. Liée au diff ou, avec Flow, au message pour lequel vous êtes remercié.
:Détails : lien vers l'utilisateur qui vous a remercié et, avec Flow, vers la page.

Activées par défaut sur les wikis de Wikimedia, vous pouvez les désactiver dans vos préférences.

Vous pouvez remercier quelqu'un depuis n'importe quelle page d'historique, depuis une page de diff, depuis votre liste de suivi ou, avec Flow, directement sur la page. Gardez à l'esprit que les remerciements sont stockés dans un journal public (Special:Log/thanks). 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
Les notifications de votre page de discussion si elle fonctionne avec les [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|discussions structurées]] se trouvent dans la section « [[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]] » ci-dessus.

==== Notifications d'une page utilisant les discussions structurées ====
{{Notification type|notice}} et {{Notification type|alert}} Voir [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] pour les détails exacts.
Reçues lors d’un changement sur une page utilisant les [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|discussion structurées]] que vous suivez (nouveau sujet, réponse à un message, sujet renommé...).

: Information principale : Titre du message et expéditeur.
: Information seconde : résumé du changement.
: Détails :
:* pour un nouveau sujet : l’utilisateur qui a créé le sujet et la page cible ;
:* pour une nouvelle réponse : le dernier utilisateur à avoir répondu au sujet, ainsi que la page cible ;
:* pour un changement dans le sujet : l’utilisateur qui a fait le changement et un lien vers le diff.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Envoyés lorsque vous avez achevé 1, 10 puis 100&amp;nbsp;traductions ''via'' l’[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|outil de traduction de contenu]].

: Information principale : Message de félicitations.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Reçus lorsqu’une page que vous avez créée est relue (ou « pattrouillée ») par un utilisateur de [[Page Curation]] (outil de maintenance).

: Information principale : quelle page a été relue et par qui.

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: Prévient les développeurs d’applications OAuth lorsque le statut de révision de l’application a changé.
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: Prévient les administrateurs OAuth de nouvelles applications en attentes d’une révision.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Reçues lorsque quelqu’un tente sans succès de se connecter à votre compte. S’il y a plusieurs alertes, elles sont regroupées en une seule, pour les nouveaux appareils ou IP ; mais pour un appareil ou une IP connu, vous recevrez une alerte toutes les cinq tentatives. Regardez [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|la page détaillant cette fonctionnalité]] pour plus d’informations.

=== Connexion au dépôt de données ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Reçu lorsque votre page est connectée au dépôt de données associé (pour les wikis de la WMF, il s’agit de [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).

: Information principale : le nom de la page qui a été connectée.
: Détails : lien vers l’élément des données et, potentiellement, vers une page d’aide locale.

== Futures notifications ==
''Remarque : ces notifications ne sont pas encore disponibles mais leur description est faite au présent pour un éviter un travail supplémentaire aux traducteurs. Elles seront déplacées dans les sections appropriées une fois disponibles.''

== Notes de pied de page ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>r832znh0qe9avszqd4r5h29sqgrai1r</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/pt-br</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597766</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403276</id>
      <parentid>5366412</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13100" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
Todos os tipos de notificações abaixo podem ser vistos nas wikis da Wikimedia. É possível vê-los na wiki onde você está, de outra wiki (por [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|notificação global]]) ou na página [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Especial:Notificações]].

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Algumas destas notificações estarão desativadas por padrão ou indisponíveis na sua wiki. Se preferir ativar alguma destas notificações (ou desativá-la), poderá fazê-lo [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|na sua página de preferências]].
&lt;/div&gt;

A página especial &lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; permite-lhe conhecer as notificações que estão disponíveis na sua wiki e como estas são configuradas.

== Notificações padrão ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nova mensagem]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nova resposta]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Novas mensagens agrupadas]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nova mensagem em escrita da direita para a esquerda]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebida quando uma mensagem é deixada na sua página de discussão.

:Informação primária: título da mensagem.
:Informação secundária:
:*em caso de nova mensagem: quem deixou a mensagem e onde ela está; liga diretamente à mensagem.
:*em caso de resposta: quem respondeu à mensagem e onde ela está; liga diretamente ao título da seção ou, no Flow, à mensagem.
:*em caso de novas mensagens ou respostas: mensagens podem estar agrupadas (“seis novas mensagens em [página]”).
:Detalhes: ligação à página do(a) último(a) usuário(a) que deixou uma mensagem naquele grupo.

Esta notificação substitui a barra laranja que aparecia antigamente, mas você pode definir suas preferências para reverter esta substituição.
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebida quando uma nova ligação é feita a uma página criada por você.
:Informação primária: a página criada por você e onde foi ligada, liga à página com a nova ligação.
:Detalhes: ligação às “Páginas afluentes” para a página.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* de [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|suas preferências]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|veja como]])
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebida quando suas edições não são aprovadas ou são revertidas.
:Informação primária: quem reverteu e onde; liga à dif.
:Detalhes: liga a quem reverteu. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebida quando alguém menciona você em uma página de discussão.
:Informação primária: quem mencionou, onde e sobre o quê; liga à página ou mensagem do [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] onde você foi mencionado(a).
:Detalhes: liga a quem mencionou e à dif da menção.

Para mencionar outro editor e acionar essa notificação para eles, você precisa:

* Link para seu nome de usuário
** você pode vinculá-lo diretamente como no &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
** você pode usar modelos de menção se eles existirem no seu wiki (muitos usam as predefinições {{tl|ping}} ou {{tl|reply to}}).
* Assine seu comentário com &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. As notificações não serão enviadas se sua assinatura estiver incorporada em um modelo ou não tiver um link para sua página de usuário ou para a página de discussão do usuário.
* Não altere nenhum texto fora do seu próprio comentário.
* Não exceda o limite do número de menções (50 nas wikis da Wikimedia).
* As notificações são enviadas apenas para usuários logados, ou seja, não é possível mencionar usuários anônimos (IPs).
* Você não pode se mencionar.

Detalhes técnicos específicos e adicionais são de {{ll|Manual:Echo}}. 
{{clear}}

==== Menções no resumo de edição ====
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Receber quando alguém cria um link para a sua página de usuário num resumo de edição.
:Informação primária: quem fez a menção a você, onde e o resumo da edição; com link para a mudança em questão.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o usuário que fez menção a você.

Para mencionar um usuário, basta conectar-se à sua página de usuário, usando a sintaxe normal do wikitexto: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Todos os estilos de link usuais funcionam, como $code3 ou &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; funcionará, mas exibirá &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; com um link para a página do usuário na página Histórico.
Não é possível mencionar mais de 5 usuários em um resumo de edição.
Os modelos de menção não funcionam em resumos de edição.

Para deixar um link no resumo sem notificar um utilizador, prefixe o nome de utilizador com &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, assim: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
{{clear}}

=== Menções falhadas ===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebida quando sua menção a outro(a) usuário(a) não for enviada.

:Informação primária: quem você tentou mencionar; a razão pela qual a menção não foi enviada.
:Detalhes: ligação à página a qual você tentou mencionar.

Estas notificações são enviadas quando você:
* tentar mencionar um(a) usuário(a) anônimo(a) ou inexistente; ou
* exceder o limite de usuários mencionados em uma só edição (50 nas wikis da WMF).
{{clear}}

=== Menções com sucesso ===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebida quando sua menção a outro(a) usuário(a) for enviada.

:Informação primária: quem você mencionou.
:Detalhes: ligação à página na qual você mencionou o(a) usuário(a).
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebida quando seus privilégios de usuário(a) mudam.
:Informação primária: o que teve sido alterado e por quem; liga à página [[Special:UserGroupRights|Privilégios de grupos de usuários]].
:Detalhes: liga a quem alterou seus privilégios. 
{{clear}}

=== Boas-vindas ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebida quando você acaba de criar sua conta.
:Informação primária: boas-vindas.
:Detalhes: liga à página de boas-vindas definida na configuração da wiki ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]). 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando alguém lhe envia um e-mail através da wiki.
:Informação primária: quem enviou a mensagem; não é fornecida nenhuma link para esta informação.
:Detalhes: link para o utilizador que lhe enviou o e-mail.

Apenas é possível receber e-mails caso os tenha ativado nas suas preferências.
{{anchor|Milestone}}
=== Marco ===
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebida quando você alcança certo número de edições (1ª, 10ª, 100ª, 1 000ª, 10 000ª, 100 000ª, e 1 000 000ª edição).&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: Informação primária: qual marco foi alcançado; qual edição acionou a notificação.

== Notificações de extensões opcionais ==

Estas notificações não estão disponíveis por padrão. Elas podem ser enviadas por extensões disponíveis apenas em algumas wikis, ou por extensões disponíveis como recursos Beta em certas wikis da Wikimedia. 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=Detalhes sobre notificações &quot;Obrigado&quot;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Agradecimento por uma edição]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

Recebidas {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|quando alguém agradece a sua edição}}.
:Informação primária: quem lhe agradeceu, onde e sobre o quê; com hiperligação para a lista de diferenças ou a mensagem do Flow onde foi feito o agradecimento.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o utilizador que lhe agradeceu e, se foi num espaço de conversas estruturadas, para a página.

Disponível por padrão nas wikis da Wikimedia, é possível optar pela exclusão e configurar nas Preferências.

Pode agradecer a qualquer utilizador a partir de qualquer página de historial, de uma lista de diferenças, da sua lista de páginas vigiadas ou diretamente na página no Flow. Lembre-se que este agradecimento é armazenado num registo público (Special:Log/thanks). 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
As notificações acerca da sua página de discussão, se esta usa as [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|conversas estruturadas]], estão na secção &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; acima.

==== Notificações a partir de uma página de conversas estruturadas ====
{{Notification type|notice}} e {{Notification type|alert}} Para detalhes precisos, consulte [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]].
Recebidos quando uma página vigiada que usa as [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|conversas estruturadas]] tem mudanças (novo tópico, resposta, alteração do nome do tópico…).

: Informação primária: título da mensagem e autor.
: Informação secundária: abstrato da mudança.
: Detalhes:
:* para um novo tópico: usuário(a) que criou o tópico; página.
:* para uma nova resposta: último(a) usuário(a) que respondeu ao tópico; página.
:* para uma mudança no tópico: usuário(a) que mudou; ligação à dif.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebidas quando você acaba de fazer 1, 10 ou 100 tradução(ões) pela ferramenta [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Tradutor de Conteúdo]].

: Informação primária: mensagem de parabéns.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebida quando uma página criada por você é revisada (ou “patrulhada”) por alguém usando a [[Page Curation|Curadoria de Páginas]].

: Informação primária: qual página foi revisada; quem a revisou.

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: notifica desenvolvedores de aplicativos OAuth quando o estado de revisão dos mesmos é alterado.
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: notifica administradores OAuth sobre novos aplicativos que aguardam revisão.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando alguém tentou e não conseguiu entrar na wiki utilizando a sua conta. Vários alertas são agrupados num só para tentativas a partir de um dispositivo ou IP novo mas, para um dispositivo ou IP conhecido, só recebe um alerta por cada 5 tentativas. Para mais informações, consulte [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|detalhes sobre esta funcionalidade]].

=== Conexão ao repositório de dados ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebida quando sua página é conectada ao repositório de dados associado (nas wikis da WMF, esse seria o [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).

: Informação primária: o nome da página conectada.
: Detalhes: ligação ao item de dados e, se possível, a uma página de ajuda local.

== Notificações futuras ==
''Nota: estas notificações ainda não estão disponíveis, porém suas descrições são escritas no presente para evitar trabalho adicional aos tradutores. Elas serão movidas para as seções apropriadas quando disponíveis.''

== Notas ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>pulqir7ugfcpzt1e7r0ugwtpr85lliu</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403308</id>
      <parentid>5403276</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:17:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13060" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
Todos os tipos de notificações abaixo podem ser vistos nas wikis da Wikimedia. É possível vê-los na wiki onde você está, de outra wiki (por [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|notificação global]]) ou na página [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Especial:Notificações]].

Algumas destas notificações estarão desativadas por padrão ou indisponíveis na sua wiki. Se preferir ativar alguma destas notificações (ou desativá-la), poderá fazê-lo [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|na sua página de preferências]].

A página especial &lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; permite-lhe conhecer as notificações que estão disponíveis na sua wiki e como estas são configuradas.

== Notificações padrão ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nova mensagem]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nova resposta]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Novas mensagens agrupadas]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nova mensagem em escrita da direita para a esquerda]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebida quando uma mensagem é deixada na sua página de discussão.

:Informação primária: título da mensagem.
:Informação secundária:
:*em caso de nova mensagem: quem deixou a mensagem e onde ela está; liga diretamente à mensagem.
:*em caso de resposta: quem respondeu à mensagem e onde ela está; liga diretamente ao título da seção ou, no Flow, à mensagem.
:*em caso de novas mensagens ou respostas: mensagens podem estar agrupadas (“seis novas mensagens em [página]”).
:Detalhes: ligação à página do(a) último(a) usuário(a) que deixou uma mensagem naquele grupo.

Esta notificação substitui a barra laranja que aparecia antigamente, mas você pode definir suas preferências para reverter esta substituição.
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebida quando uma nova ligação é feita a uma página criada por você.
:Informação primária: a página criada por você e onde foi ligada, liga à página com a nova ligação.
:Detalhes: ligação às “Páginas afluentes” para a página.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* de [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|suas preferências]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|veja como]])
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebida quando suas edições não são aprovadas ou são revertidas.
:Informação primária: quem reverteu e onde; liga à dif.
:Detalhes: liga a quem reverteu. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebida quando alguém menciona você em uma página de discussão.
:Informação primária: quem mencionou, onde e sobre o quê; liga à página ou mensagem do [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] onde você foi mencionado(a).
:Detalhes: liga a quem mencionou e à dif da menção.

Para mencionar outro editor e acionar essa notificação para eles, você precisa:

* Link para seu nome de usuário
** você pode vinculá-lo diretamente como no &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
** você pode usar modelos de menção se eles existirem no seu wiki (muitos usam as predefinições {{tl|ping}} ou {{tl|reply to}}).
* Assine seu comentário com &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. As notificações não serão enviadas se sua assinatura estiver incorporada em um modelo ou não tiver um link para sua página de usuário ou para a página de discussão do usuário.
* Não altere nenhum texto fora do seu próprio comentário.
* Não exceda o limite do número de menções (50 nas wikis da Wikimedia).
* As notificações são enviadas apenas para usuários logados, ou seja, não é possível mencionar usuários anônimos (IPs).
* Você não pode se mencionar.

Detalhes técnicos específicos e adicionais são de {{ll|Manual:Echo}}. 
{{clear}}

==== Menções no resumo de edição ====
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Receber quando alguém cria um link para a sua página de usuário num resumo de edição.
:Informação primária: quem fez a menção a você, onde e o resumo da edição; com link para a mudança em questão.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o usuário que fez menção a você.

Para mencionar um usuário, basta conectar-se à sua página de usuário, usando a sintaxe normal do wikitexto: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Todos os estilos de link usuais funcionam, como $code3 ou &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; funcionará, mas exibirá &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; com um link para a página do usuário na página Histórico.
Não é possível mencionar mais de 5 usuários em um resumo de edição.
Os modelos de menção não funcionam em resumos de edição.

Para deixar um link no resumo sem notificar um utilizador, prefixe o nome de utilizador com &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, assim: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
{{clear}}

=== Menções falhadas ===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebida quando sua menção a outro(a) usuário(a) não for enviada.

:Informação primária: quem você tentou mencionar; a razão pela qual a menção não foi enviada.
:Detalhes: ligação à página a qual você tentou mencionar.

Estas notificações são enviadas quando você:
* tentar mencionar um(a) usuário(a) anônimo(a) ou inexistente; ou
* exceder o limite de usuários mencionados em uma só edição (50 nas wikis da WMF).
{{clear}}

=== Menções com sucesso ===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebida quando sua menção a outro(a) usuário(a) for enviada.

:Informação primária: quem você mencionou.
:Detalhes: ligação à página na qual você mencionou o(a) usuário(a).
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebida quando seus privilégios de usuário(a) mudam.
:Informação primária: o que teve sido alterado e por quem; liga à página [[Special:UserGroupRights|Privilégios de grupos de usuários]].
:Detalhes: liga a quem alterou seus privilégios. 
{{clear}}

=== Boas-vindas ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebida quando você acaba de criar sua conta.
:Informação primária: boas-vindas.
:Detalhes: liga à página de boas-vindas definida na configuração da wiki ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]). 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando alguém lhe envia um e-mail através da wiki.
:Informação primária: quem enviou a mensagem; não é fornecida nenhuma link para esta informação.
:Detalhes: link para o utilizador que lhe enviou o e-mail.

Apenas é possível receber e-mails caso os tenha ativado nas suas preferências.
{{anchor|Milestone}}
=== Marco ===
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebida quando você alcança certo número de edições (1ª, 10ª, 100ª, 1 000ª, 10 000ª, 100 000ª, e 1 000 000ª edição).&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: Informação primária: qual marco foi alcançado; qual edição acionou a notificação.

== Notificações de extensões opcionais ==

Estas notificações não estão disponíveis por padrão. Elas podem ser enviadas por extensões disponíveis apenas em algumas wikis, ou por extensões disponíveis como recursos Beta em certas wikis da Wikimedia. 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=Detalhes sobre notificações &quot;Obrigado&quot;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Agradecimento por uma edição]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

Recebidas {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|quando alguém agradece a sua edição}}.
:Informação primária: quem lhe agradeceu, onde e sobre o quê; com hiperligação para a lista de diferenças ou a mensagem do Flow onde foi feito o agradecimento.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o utilizador que lhe agradeceu e, se foi num espaço de conversas estruturadas, para a página.

Disponível por padrão nas wikis da Wikimedia, é possível optar pela exclusão e configurar nas Preferências.

Pode agradecer a qualquer utilizador a partir de qualquer página de historial, de uma lista de diferenças, da sua lista de páginas vigiadas ou diretamente na página no Flow. Lembre-se que este agradecimento é armazenado num registo público (Special:Log/thanks). 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
As notificações acerca da sua página de discussão, se esta usa as [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|conversas estruturadas]], estão na secção &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; acima.

==== Notificações a partir de uma página de conversas estruturadas ====
{{Notification type|notice}} e {{Notification type|alert}} Para detalhes precisos, consulte [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]].
Recebidos quando uma página vigiada que usa as [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|conversas estruturadas]] tem mudanças (novo tópico, resposta, alteração do nome do tópico…).

: Informação primária: título da mensagem e autor.
: Informação secundária: abstrato da mudança.
: Detalhes:
:* para um novo tópico: usuário(a) que criou o tópico; página.
:* para uma nova resposta: último(a) usuário(a) que respondeu ao tópico; página.
:* para uma mudança no tópico: usuário(a) que mudou; ligação à dif.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebidas quando você acaba de fazer 1, 10 ou 100 tradução(ões) pela ferramenta [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Tradutor de Conteúdo]].

: Informação primária: mensagem de parabéns.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebida quando uma página criada por você é revisada (ou “patrulhada”) por alguém usando a [[Page Curation|Curadoria de Páginas]].

: Informação primária: qual página foi revisada; quem a revisou.

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: notifica desenvolvedores de aplicativos OAuth quando o estado de revisão dos mesmos é alterado.
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: notifica administradores OAuth sobre novos aplicativos que aguardam revisão.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando alguém tentou e não conseguiu entrar na wiki utilizando a sua conta. Vários alertas são agrupados num só para tentativas a partir de um dispositivo ou IP novo mas, para um dispositivo ou IP conhecido, só recebe um alerta por cada 5 tentativas. Para mais informações, consulte [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|detalhes sobre esta funcionalidade]].

=== Conexão ao repositório de dados ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebida quando sua página é conectada ao repositório de dados associado (nas wikis da WMF, esse seria o [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).

: Informação primária: o nome da página conectada.
: Detalhes: ligação ao item de dados e, se possível, a uma página de ajuda local.

== Notificações futuras ==
''Nota: estas notificações ainda não estão disponíveis, porém suas descrições são escritas no presente para evitar trabalho adicional aos tradutores. Elas serão movidas para as seções apropriadas quando disponíveis.''

== Notas ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>671femp133dgzb23p6fcn92dd0gah0t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/ksh</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597769</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403270</id>
      <parentid>5365363</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16266" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
Makkehr Meddeijlonge als jelässe udder onjelässe

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ättlijje vun dä Meddeijlonge sin schtandattmähßesch ußjeschalldt. Wam_mer eijn vun dä Meddeijlonge ennschallde well, udder dann wider uß, kam_mer dat en de eijene Ennschtällonge donn, esu wi onge beschrevve.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Neu Nohreesch]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Neuje Antwoot]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Neu Nohreeschte zesamme jefaß en Jroppe]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Neu Nohreeschte ob en Sigg en schprohch, di vun rääschs noh lenks schrihv]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

De Meddeijlong kütt anschtatt vun dämm älldere brunge Kaßte, ävver en de eijene Ennschtällonge kam_mer dä ahlee Kaßte widder enschallde.
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

Mer kann eijnem blohß dann &lt;i lang=&quot;en&quot; xml:lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; title=&quot;„de eläktrohnesche Poß“&quot;&gt;e-mails&lt;/i&gt; scheke, wann dä dadd en singe Enschtällonge zohjelohße hät.
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Der Dangk för en Ännderong aan en Sigg.]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>4bfn7ztftbs34q7rz6bdb17ge113gcm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/zh</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597770</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403284</id>
      <parentid>5365380</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:13:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14888" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
以下所有通知的类型可在维基媒体wiki网站上看见。您可以在您所在的wiki上，或透过[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|跨wiki通知]]在其他wiki，或在[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:通知页面]]看见它们。

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
这些通知部分默认关闭，或在您的wiki上不可用。如果您想要启用这些通知之一（或禁用它们），您可以在[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|参数设置]]里设置他们。
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt;特殊页面将让您了解在您的wiki上可用的通知，以及其如何被配置。

== 默认通知 ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|新消息]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|新回复]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|多条新消息已分组]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|在从右至左阅读语言的某个页面上的新消息]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
當有人在討論頁提及你時收到。
:主要資訊：誰提及你、在哪裡、有關什麼。連結到頁面，或是你被提及的[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]]留言。
:詳情：連結到提及你的使用者及你被提及的差異。

要提及其他編輯者並觸發他們的東西，你需要：

* 連結到他們的使用者名稱
** 你可以直接連結，像是&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
** 如果你的維基有提及模板，你可以使用模板（很多維基使用{{tl|ping}}或{{tl|reply to}}模板）。
* 使用&lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt;或&lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;對你的留言簽名。如果你的簽名嵌入在模板內、或沒有連結到你的使用者頁面或使用者討論頁則不會發送通知。
* 請不要修改你自己留言以外的任何文字。
* 不要超過提及數量限制（在維基媒體的維基上為50）。
* 提及只會發送給註冊使用者，也就是說，不可能提及匿名使用者（IP）。
* 你不能提及你自己。

具體和其他技術細節在{{ll|Manual:Echo}}。 
{{clear}}

==== 在编辑摘要中提及 ====
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;要提及使用者，只需要連結到他們的使用者頁面，使用一般的維基文本語法：&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;。所有常用的連結樣式均有效，例如$code3或$code5，$code4能運作，不過會在歷史頁面顯示為$codebasic並帶有到使用者頁面的連結。可在編輯摘要被提及的使用者不超過5個。提及模板在編輯摘要無法運作。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

要在摘要中保留链接而不通知用户, 请用 &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt; 前缀用户名, 如下所述: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;。
{{clear}}

=== 失败提及 ===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

=== 成功提及 ===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:主要信息：您提及了谁。
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== 欢迎 ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
当您刚刚创建了您的账户时收到通知
:主要信息：欢迎！
:详情：链接至欢迎页面（由wiki配置定义：[[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]）。 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
=== 里程碑 ===
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
当您达到特定编辑技术里程碑时获得通知（第1次、第10次、第100次、第1000次、第1万次、第10万次和第100万次编辑）&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: 主要信息：您达到的里程碑，以及哪次编辑触发了通知。

== 来自可选扩展的通知 ==

这些通知默认不可用。它们只在一些特定的wiki上被扩展触发，或在特定的维基媒体wiki上通过处于测试功能状态的扩展可用。 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|在一个页面上感谢一次编辑]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
有关您的讨论页（如果使用[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|結構式討論]]的话）的通知已在上文中“[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]”一节提到。

==== 来自使用結構式討論页面的通知 ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

=== 连接至数据存储库 ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

== 今后通知 ==
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ljuhcgg6hy0vt2gim3pdwa70g2x5jjo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/he</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597771</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403261</id>
      <parentid>5365354</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16313" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
כל סוגי ההתראות להלן מתקבלות דרך אתרי הוויקי של ויקימדיה. ניתן לראות אותן באתר הוויקי בו הינך נמצא, באתר ויקי אחר דרך [[cross-wiki notifications|התראות מאתרי-ויקי אחרים]], או ב[[Special:Notifications page|מיוחד:הודעות]].

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
חלק מהתראות אלו כבויות כברירת-מחדל או לא זמינות באתר הוויקי שלך. אם ברצונך להפעיל חלק מהתראות אלו (או לכבותן), ניתן לעשות זאת דרך [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|דף ההעדפות האישיות שלך]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt;, דף מיוחד זה ייתן מידע עבורך אלו התראות זמינות באתר הוויקי שלך וכיצד ניתן לקבוע את הגדרותן.

==התראות ברירת-מחדל==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|הודעה חדשה]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|תגובה חדשה]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|מספר הודעות חדשות מקובצות]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|הודעה חדשה בדף בו כיוון הטקסט מוגדר מימין-לשמאל]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראת הודעה (בכחול), כאשר מישהו השאיר לך הודעה בדף השיחה שלך.

:מידע עיקרי: כותרת ההודעה
:מידע משני:
:*במקרה של הודעה חדשה: מי השאיר את ההודעה ובאיזה דף. מקשר ישירות להודעה.
:*במקרה של תגובה: מי הגיב להודעה ובאיזה דף. מקשר ישירות לכותרת הפסקה, או, בדף שיחה בו מופעלת זרימה, מקשר ישירות להודעה עצמה.
:*במקרה של מספר הודעות או תגובות: תתקבל הודעה מקובצת (לדוגמה: &quot;6 הודעות חדשות ב[שם הדף]&quot;)
:פרטים: קישור לדף המשתמש של העורך שהשאיר לך הודעה.

התראה זו מחליפה את הפס הכתום שהיה בעבר ההתראה על כך, אם רוצים ניתן להחזיר את הפס הכתום.
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
התראת הודעה (בכחול) כאשר נוצר קישור חדש לדף שיצרתם.
:מידע עיקרי: שם הדף שיצרתם ומאיזה דף נוצר קישור. מקשר לדף בו נוסף הקישור.
:פרטים: קישור ל&quot;כל הקישורים לדף זה&quot; עבור הדף המדובר.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר עריכה שלך מבוטלת או משוחזרת.
:מידע עיקרי: מי שחזר ובאיזה דף. קישור לדף הבדלים.
:פרטים: קישור לדף משתמש של מי שביטל את עריכתך. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר מישהו הזכיר אותך (עם קישור. מכונה גם תיוג).
:מידע עיקרי: מי הזכיר את שמך, איפה ובאיזה נושא. מקושר לדף, או להודעה אם היא בדף [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|זרימה]], שבו הוזכרת.
:פרטים: קישור למשתמש שהזכיר אותך ול&quot;הצגת שינויים&quot; בה הוזכרת.

על מנת לתייג עורך נוסף ולתזמן עבורו התראה זו, עליך:

* לקשר לדף המשתמש שלו.
** ניתן לקשר אליו מיידית באופן הבא: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
** ניתן להשתמש בתבניות תיוג אם הן קיימות באתר הוויקי שלך (רבים משתמשים בתבנית {{tl|ping}} או {{tl|reply to}})
* לחתום בסוף תגובתך עם &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; או &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. התראות תיוג לא ישלחו למשתמש אם חתימתכם טמועה בתוך תבנית, או שאינה כוללת קישור לדף המשתמש שלכם או לדף  שיחתכם.
* אין לשנות טקסט המופיע מחוץ לתגובתך האישית.
* אין לעבור את המספר המירבי של התיוגים שביכולתך לבצע (50 תיוגים באתרי הוויקי של ויקימדיה).
* התראות נשלחות רק למשתמשים אשר התחברו לחשבון האישי שלהם, כלומר תיוג משתמשים אנונימיים (המופיעים ככתובות IP) אינו אפשרי.
* אין ביכולתך לתייג את עצמך.

מידע נוסף אודות תיוג ניתן למצוא בדך {{ll|Manual:Echo}}. 
{{clear}}

====אזכורים בתקצירי עריכה====
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר משתמש מסוים מקשר לדף המשתמש שלך בתקציר עריכה.
:מידע עיקרי: מי הזכיר אותך, היכן, ותקציר העריכה. ההתראה מקשרת לשינוי המדובר.
:פרטים: קישור למשתמש אשר תייג אותך.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;על מנת לתייג משתמש מסוים, יש לקשר לדף המשתמש שלו, תוך שימוש בתחביר ויקי רגיל לחלוטין: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;. כל אפשרויות הקישור לדף המשתמש יכולות לעבוד, כגון $code3 או $code4. לא ניתן לתייג יותר מחמישה משתמשים בתקציר עריכה אחד. תבניות תיוג לא יעבדו בתקצירי עריכה.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

על מנת להשאיר קישור לדף משתמש בתקציר מבלי שיקבל על כך התראה, יש להקליד לפני שם המשתמש &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, לדוגמה: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
{{clear}}

===אזכורים שכשלו===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר האזכור שלך אל משתמש אחר לא נשלח.

:מידע עיקרי: את מי ניסית לתייג ומהי הסיבה בגללה האזכור לא נשלח.
:פרטים: קישור לדף בו ניסית לתייג את המשתמש.

התראות אלו נשלחות כאשר:
* מתבצע ניסיון לתייג משתמשים אנונימיים או משתמשים שאינם קיימים, או
* המספר המירבי של המשתמשים שניתן לתייג בעריכה אחת נעקף (50 תיוגים באתרי הוויקי של ויקימדיה).
{{clear}}

===אזכורים שהצליחו===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר האזכור שלך נשלח בהצלחה למשתמש האחר.

:מידע עיקרי: את מי תייגת.
:פרטים: קישור לדף בו תייגת את המשתמש.
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר הרשאות המשתמש שלך שונו.
:מידע עיקרי: מה השתנה ועל ידי מי. מקשר לדף [[Special:UserGroupRights]].
:פרטים: קישור למשתמש ששינה את הרשאותיך. 
{{clear}}

===קבלת פנים===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
התראת הודעה (בכחול) כאשר יצרת את החשבון האישי שלך.
:מידע עיקרי: ברוך בואך!
:פרטים: קישור לדף קבלת הפנים כפי שמתואר באתר הוויקי ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]). 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר מישהו שלח לך הודעת דוא&quot;ל דרך הוויקי.
:מידע עיקרי: מי שלח. אין קישור למידע זה.
:פרטים: קישור למשתמש ששלח את המייל.

משתמשים אחרים יכולים לשלוח לך דוא&quot;ל דרך הוויקי רק אם אפשרות זו נבחרה בהעדפות שלך.
{{anchor|Milestone}}
===ציוני דרך===
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
התראת הודעה (בכחול) כאשר הינך עובר מספר עריכות מסוים המציין ציון דרך. (עריכתך הראשונה, העשירית, המאה, האלף, ה-10,000, ה-100,000 והמיליון)&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: מידע עיקרי: איזה ציון דרך השגת, ואיזו עריכה הביאה את ההתראה.

==הודעות מהגדרות אופציונליות==

התראות אלו אינן מופעלות כברירת-מחדל. הן מופעלות ידנית באמצעות הרחבות הזמינות באתרי-ויקי מסוימים, או באמצעות תוסף הזמין כגרסת בטא בחלק מאתרי הוויקי של ויקימדיה. 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=פרטים אודות הודעות ה&quot;תודה&quot;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|תודה על עריכת דף.]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

התראת הודעה (בכחול) כאשר {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|משתמש אחר הודה לך על עריכה}}.
:מידע עיקרי: מי הודה לך, היכן ועל מה. מקושר להשוואת גרסאות או להודעה אם מדובר בדף שיחה מוזרם שעליה הודו לך.
:פרטים: קישור למשתמש שהודה לך, ואם מדובר בהודעה בדף שיחה מוזרם אז לדף.

זמין כברירת-מחדל באתרי הוויקי של ויקימדיה, ניתן לכבות אותן ידנית דרך דף ההעדפות שלך.

ניתן להודות למשתמש אחר מדף היסטוריית גרסאות, מדף השוואת גרסאות, מרשימת המעקב שלך, או בדף שיחה מוזרם באופן ישיר. יש לזכור שהתודה נשמרת ביומן ציבורי (Special:Log/thanks). 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
התראות המתייחסות לדף השיחה שלך כאשר נעשה שימוש ב[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|זרימה]] מופיעות בפסקה &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; לעיל.

====הודעות מדף שיחה בו מופעלת זרימה====
{{Notification type|notice}} ו-{{Notification type|alert}} ראו [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] לפרטים המתאימים.
התראה (באדום) כאשר דף שיחה [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|מוזרם]] הנמצא ברשימת המעקב שלך השתנה מאז ביקורך האחרון (פסקה חדשה, תגובה, שינוי שם פסקה וכו'...).

: מידע עיקרי: כותרת ההודעה ושם העורך.
: מידע משני: תקציר השינוי.
: פרטים:
* עבור פסקה חדשה: המשתמש שיצר אותה והדף אליו ההתראה מתייחסת.
* עבור תגובה חדשה: המשתמש האחרון שהגיב להודעה והדף אליו ההתראה מתייחסת.
* עבור שינוי בפסקה: המשתמש אשר ביצע את השינוי וקישור לדף השוואת הגרסאות.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
התראת הודעה (בכחול) כאשר השלמת תרגום אחד, עשרה תרגומים או מאה תרגומים באמצעות [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|כלי תרגום התוכן]].

: מידע עיקרי: הודעת ברכה.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
התראת הודעה (בכחול) כאשר דף שיצרת נסקר (או מנוטר) על ידי משתמש מסוים באמצעות [[Page Curation|כלי סקירת דפים חדשים]].

: מידע עיקרי: איזה דף נסקר ועל ידי מי.

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: מתריע את מפתחי יישומי ה-OAuth כאשר הביקורות על יישום מסוים השתנו.
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: מתריע את מנהלי ה-OAuth בנוגע ליישומים חדשים הממתינים לסקירה.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר מישהו מנסה להיכנס לחשבון שלך אך לא מצליח בכך. מספר התראות מקובצות להתראה אחת עבור כל מכשיר חדש או כתובת IP, אולם עבור מכשיר מוכר או כתובת IP מוכרת, התראה אחת מתקבלת עבור כל חמישה ניסיונות כניסה כושלים. ראו [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|כיצד תכונה זו עובדת]] למידע נוסף.

===חיבור דף למאגר הנתונים===
{{Notification type|notice}}
התראת הודעה (בכחול) כאשר דף שיצרת מתחבר למאגר הנתונים (עבור אתרי הוויקי של ויקימדיה, ישנו מאגר ייחודי בשם [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|ויקינתונים]]).

: מידע עיקרי: שם הדף שהתחבר למאגר הנתונים.
: פרטים: קישור לפריט הנתונים ובנוסף, אם אכן קיים, קישור לדף עזרה מקומי.

==התראות עתידיות בתכנון==
''הערה: התראות אלו עדיין לא זמינות אך התיאורים שלהן כתובים בזמן הווה על מנת למנוע עבודה כפולה עבור המתרגמים. התראות אלו יעברו לפסקה המתאימה להן כאשר הן יהפכו לזמינות.''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>0jhzs0mg8dqa7m37z3d7mzci698bjvt</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403298</id>
      <parentid>5403261</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:16:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16273" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
כל סוגי ההתראות להלן מתקבלות דרך אתרי הוויקי של ויקימדיה. ניתן לראות אותן באתר הוויקי בו הינך נמצא, באתר ויקי אחר דרך [[cross-wiki notifications|התראות מאתרי-ויקי אחרים]], או ב[[Special:Notifications page|מיוחד:הודעות]].

חלק מהתראות אלו כבויות כברירת-מחדל או לא זמינות באתר הוויקי שלך. אם ברצונך להפעיל חלק מהתראות אלו (או לכבותן), ניתן לעשות זאת דרך [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|דף ההעדפות האישיות שלך]].

&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt;, דף מיוחד זה ייתן מידע עבורך אלו התראות זמינות באתר הוויקי שלך וכיצד ניתן לקבוע את הגדרותן.

==התראות ברירת-מחדל==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|הודעה חדשה]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|תגובה חדשה]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|מספר הודעות חדשות מקובצות]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|הודעה חדשה בדף בו כיוון הטקסט מוגדר מימין-לשמאל]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראת הודעה (בכחול), כאשר מישהו השאיר לך הודעה בדף השיחה שלך.

:מידע עיקרי: כותרת ההודעה
:מידע משני:
:*במקרה של הודעה חדשה: מי השאיר את ההודעה ובאיזה דף. מקשר ישירות להודעה.
:*במקרה של תגובה: מי הגיב להודעה ובאיזה דף. מקשר ישירות לכותרת הפסקה, או, בדף שיחה בו מופעלת זרימה, מקשר ישירות להודעה עצמה.
:*במקרה של מספר הודעות או תגובות: תתקבל הודעה מקובצת (לדוגמה: &quot;6 הודעות חדשות ב[שם הדף]&quot;)
:פרטים: קישור לדף המשתמש של העורך שהשאיר לך הודעה.

התראה זו מחליפה את הפס הכתום שהיה בעבר ההתראה על כך, אם רוצים ניתן להחזיר את הפס הכתום.
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
התראת הודעה (בכחול) כאשר נוצר קישור חדש לדף שיצרתם.
:מידע עיקרי: שם הדף שיצרתם ומאיזה דף נוצר קישור. מקשר לדף בו נוסף הקישור.
:פרטים: קישור ל&quot;כל הקישורים לדף זה&quot; עבור הדף המדובר.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר עריכה שלך מבוטלת או משוחזרת.
:מידע עיקרי: מי שחזר ובאיזה דף. קישור לדף הבדלים.
:פרטים: קישור לדף משתמש של מי שביטל את עריכתך. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר מישהו הזכיר אותך (עם קישור. מכונה גם תיוג).
:מידע עיקרי: מי הזכיר את שמך, איפה ובאיזה נושא. מקושר לדף, או להודעה אם היא בדף [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|זרימה]], שבו הוזכרת.
:פרטים: קישור למשתמש שהזכיר אותך ול&quot;הצגת שינויים&quot; בה הוזכרת.

על מנת לתייג עורך נוסף ולתזמן עבורו התראה זו, עליך:

* לקשר לדף המשתמש שלו.
** ניתן לקשר אליו מיידית באופן הבא: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
** ניתן להשתמש בתבניות תיוג אם הן קיימות באתר הוויקי שלך (רבים משתמשים בתבנית {{tl|ping}} או {{tl|reply to}})
* לחתום בסוף תגובתך עם &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; או &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. התראות תיוג לא ישלחו למשתמש אם חתימתכם טמועה בתוך תבנית, או שאינה כוללת קישור לדף המשתמש שלכם או לדף  שיחתכם.
* אין לשנות טקסט המופיע מחוץ לתגובתך האישית.
* אין לעבור את המספר המירבי של התיוגים שביכולתך לבצע (50 תיוגים באתרי הוויקי של ויקימדיה).
* התראות נשלחות רק למשתמשים אשר התחברו לחשבון האישי שלהם, כלומר תיוג משתמשים אנונימיים (המופיעים ככתובות IP) אינו אפשרי.
* אין ביכולתך לתייג את עצמך.

מידע נוסף אודות תיוג ניתן למצוא בדך {{ll|Manual:Echo}}. 
{{clear}}

====אזכורים בתקצירי עריכה====
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר משתמש מסוים מקשר לדף המשתמש שלך בתקציר עריכה.
:מידע עיקרי: מי הזכיר אותך, היכן, ותקציר העריכה. ההתראה מקשרת לשינוי המדובר.
:פרטים: קישור למשתמש אשר תייג אותך.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;על מנת לתייג משתמש מסוים, יש לקשר לדף המשתמש שלו, תוך שימוש בתחביר ויקי רגיל לחלוטין: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;. כל אפשרויות הקישור לדף המשתמש יכולות לעבוד, כגון $code3 או $code4. לא ניתן לתייג יותר מחמישה משתמשים בתקציר עריכה אחד. תבניות תיוג לא יעבדו בתקצירי עריכה.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

על מנת להשאיר קישור לדף משתמש בתקציר מבלי שיקבל על כך התראה, יש להקליד לפני שם המשתמש &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, לדוגמה: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
{{clear}}

===אזכורים שכשלו===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר האזכור שלך אל משתמש אחר לא נשלח.

:מידע עיקרי: את מי ניסית לתייג ומהי הסיבה בגללה האזכור לא נשלח.
:פרטים: קישור לדף בו ניסית לתייג את המשתמש.

התראות אלו נשלחות כאשר:
* מתבצע ניסיון לתייג משתמשים אנונימיים או משתמשים שאינם קיימים, או
* המספר המירבי של המשתמשים שניתן לתייג בעריכה אחת נעקף (50 תיוגים באתרי הוויקי של ויקימדיה).
{{clear}}

===אזכורים שהצליחו===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר האזכור שלך נשלח בהצלחה למשתמש האחר.

:מידע עיקרי: את מי תייגת.
:פרטים: קישור לדף בו תייגת את המשתמש.
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר הרשאות המשתמש שלך שונו.
:מידע עיקרי: מה השתנה ועל ידי מי. מקשר לדף [[Special:UserGroupRights]].
:פרטים: קישור למשתמש ששינה את הרשאותיך. 
{{clear}}

===קבלת פנים===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
התראת הודעה (בכחול) כאשר יצרת את החשבון האישי שלך.
:מידע עיקרי: ברוך בואך!
:פרטים: קישור לדף קבלת הפנים כפי שמתואר באתר הוויקי ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]). 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר מישהו שלח לך הודעת דוא&quot;ל דרך הוויקי.
:מידע עיקרי: מי שלח. אין קישור למידע זה.
:פרטים: קישור למשתמש ששלח את המייל.

משתמשים אחרים יכולים לשלוח לך דוא&quot;ל דרך הוויקי רק אם אפשרות זו נבחרה בהעדפות שלך.
{{anchor|Milestone}}
===ציוני דרך===
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
התראת הודעה (בכחול) כאשר הינך עובר מספר עריכות מסוים המציין ציון דרך. (עריכתך הראשונה, העשירית, המאה, האלף, ה-10,000, ה-100,000 והמיליון)&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: מידע עיקרי: איזה ציון דרך השגת, ואיזו עריכה הביאה את ההתראה.

==הודעות מהגדרות אופציונליות==

התראות אלו אינן מופעלות כברירת-מחדל. הן מופעלות ידנית באמצעות הרחבות הזמינות באתרי-ויקי מסוימים, או באמצעות תוסף הזמין כגרסת בטא בחלק מאתרי הוויקי של ויקימדיה. 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=פרטים אודות הודעות ה&quot;תודה&quot;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|תודה על עריכת דף.]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

התראת הודעה (בכחול) כאשר {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|משתמש אחר הודה לך על עריכה}}.
:מידע עיקרי: מי הודה לך, היכן ועל מה. מקושר להשוואת גרסאות או להודעה אם מדובר בדף שיחה מוזרם שעליה הודו לך.
:פרטים: קישור למשתמש שהודה לך, ואם מדובר בהודעה בדף שיחה מוזרם אז לדף.

זמין כברירת-מחדל באתרי הוויקי של ויקימדיה, ניתן לכבות אותן ידנית דרך דף ההעדפות שלך.

ניתן להודות למשתמש אחר מדף היסטוריית גרסאות, מדף השוואת גרסאות, מרשימת המעקב שלך, או בדף שיחה מוזרם באופן ישיר. יש לזכור שהתודה נשמרת ביומן ציבורי (Special:Log/thanks). 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
התראות המתייחסות לדף השיחה שלך כאשר נעשה שימוש ב[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|זרימה]] מופיעות בפסקה &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; לעיל.

====הודעות מדף שיחה בו מופעלת זרימה====
{{Notification type|notice}} ו-{{Notification type|alert}} ראו [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] לפרטים המתאימים.
התראה (באדום) כאשר דף שיחה [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|מוזרם]] הנמצא ברשימת המעקב שלך השתנה מאז ביקורך האחרון (פסקה חדשה, תגובה, שינוי שם פסקה וכו'...).

: מידע עיקרי: כותרת ההודעה ושם העורך.
: מידע משני: תקציר השינוי.
: פרטים:
* עבור פסקה חדשה: המשתמש שיצר אותה והדף אליו ההתראה מתייחסת.
* עבור תגובה חדשה: המשתמש האחרון שהגיב להודעה והדף אליו ההתראה מתייחסת.
* עבור שינוי בפסקה: המשתמש אשר ביצע את השינוי וקישור לדף השוואת הגרסאות.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
התראת הודעה (בכחול) כאשר השלמת תרגום אחד, עשרה תרגומים או מאה תרגומים באמצעות [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|כלי תרגום התוכן]].

: מידע עיקרי: הודעת ברכה.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
התראת הודעה (בכחול) כאשר דף שיצרת נסקר (או מנוטר) על ידי משתמש מסוים באמצעות [[Page Curation|כלי סקירת דפים חדשים]].

: מידע עיקרי: איזה דף נסקר ועל ידי מי.

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: מתריע את מפתחי יישומי ה-OAuth כאשר הביקורות על יישום מסוים השתנו.
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: מתריע את מנהלי ה-OAuth בנוגע ליישומים חדשים הממתינים לסקירה.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
התראה (באדום) כאשר מישהו מנסה להיכנס לחשבון שלך אך לא מצליח בכך. מספר התראות מקובצות להתראה אחת עבור כל מכשיר חדש או כתובת IP, אולם עבור מכשיר מוכר או כתובת IP מוכרת, התראה אחת מתקבלת עבור כל חמישה ניסיונות כניסה כושלים. ראו [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|כיצד תכונה זו עובדת]] למידע נוסף.

===חיבור דף למאגר הנתונים===
{{Notification type|notice}}
התראת הודעה (בכחול) כאשר דף שיצרת מתחבר למאגר הנתונים (עבור אתרי הוויקי של ויקימדיה, ישנו מאגר ייחודי בשם [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|ויקינתונים]]).

: מידע עיקרי: שם הדף שהתחבר למאגר הנתונים.
: פרטים: קישור לפריט הנתונים ובנוסף, אם אכן קיים, קישור לדף עזרה מקומי.

==התראות עתידיות בתכנון==
''הערה: התראות אלו עדיין לא זמינות אך התיאורים שלהן כתובים בזמן הווה על מנת למנוע עבודה כפולה עבור המתרגמים. התראות אלו יעברו לפסקה המתאימה להן כאשר הן יהפכו לזמינות.''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ikihml6i6ue1u7mbxik94371sbr1n9r</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/ar</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597778</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403250</id>
      <parentid>5365339</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16890" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
بعض هذه الإشعارات معطلة افتراضيا أو غير متوفرة في الويكي الخاصة بك. وإذا أردت تفعيل أي من هذه الإشعارات (أو تعطيلها)، يمكنك فعل ذلك [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|في تفضيلاتك]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>j7tdsjcvab8eaqr395xnrz07fp7usf4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403286</id>
      <parentid>5403250</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:13:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16850" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

بعض هذه الإشعارات معطلة افتراضيا أو غير متوفرة في الويكي الخاصة بك. وإذا أردت تفعيل أي من هذه الإشعارات (أو تعطيلها)، يمكنك فعل ذلك [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|في تفضيلاتك]].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>b11i83d0rcnzh43rolhic0rxi74vjxu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/ca</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597779</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403253</id>
      <parentid>5365342</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16869" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
En la primera versió d'aquest producte, algunes d'aquestes notificacions estaran desactivades per defecte tant per usuaris existents com per usuaris nous. Si voleu activar (o desactivar) qualsevol d'aquestes notificacions, ho podeu fer en les vostres preferències, com s'explica més avall.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>4atr94wit9w99wepglbsbs5s64zwcu2</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403292</id>
      <parentid>5403253</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:14:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16883" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

En la primera versió d'aquest producte, algunes d'aquestes notificacions estaran desactivades per defecte tant per usuaris existents com per usuaris nous. Si voleu activar (o desactivar) qualsevol d'aquestes notificacions, ho podeu fer en les vostres [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|preferències]], com s'explica més avall.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>lme1efo93e9o4gig1jh91jybbae3smo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/ckb</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597780</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403254</id>
      <parentid>5365341</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17083" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
بۆ بڵاوکردنەوەی یەکەمی ئەم بەرھەمە، ھەندێک لەم ئاگادارییانە بە شێوەی دیفاڵت بۆ ھەر دووک بەکارھێنەرانی تۆمارکراو و تازەکار ناچالاک کراوە. ئەگەر دەتەوێ ھەر کامێک لەم ئاگادارییانە چالاک بکەی (یان ناچالاکی بکەی)، دەتوانی لە ھەڵبژاردەکانتدا ھەر وەکی لە ژێرەوە ھاتووە جێبەجێی بکەی.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>148h60gheglll35d5mqnhxw9qc3rc8s</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/da</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597781</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403255</id>
      <parentid>5365345</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16594" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ved denne første udgivelse af &quot;Meddelelser&quot;, vil nogle af disse meddelelser være slået fra for både nuværende og fremtidige brugere. Hvis du gerne vil slå én eller flere af meddelelsestyperne til (eller fra), kan du gøre dette i dine personlige indstillinger, som beskrevet nedenfor.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Ny besked]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nyt svar]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

=== Mislykket omtale ===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Modtaget når din omtale til en anden bruger ikke blev sendt.

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== Welkomst ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>j071xbha51fi18eyge39987qto0851t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/de</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597782</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403256</id>
      <parentid>5377840</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16583" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Bei der Einführung von Notifications werden einige dieser Funktionen nicht von Anfang an für gegenwärtige und neue Benutzer bereitstehen, können aber auf Wunsch über die Einstellungsfunktion aktiviert werden.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Wird empfangen wenn jemand dich auf einer Diskussionsseite erwähnt.
:Primary information:  Wer hat dich wo erwähnt und zu welchem Thema. Ein Link zu der Seite, oder zu der Nachricht [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] wo du erwähnt wurdest
:Details: Link zu dem Benutzer der dich erwähnt hat und den Versionsunterschied bei dem du erwähnt wurdest

Um andere Bearbeiter zu erwähnen und eine Benachrichtigung auszulösen machst du:

Link zu Ihren Benutzernamen
du kannst es direkt verlinken so wie &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

== Zukünftige Benachrichtigungen ==
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5f807dftsgx8fuy0vpjglz35z9x9uhl</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/el</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597787</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403257</id>
      <parentid>5365346</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17179" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Για την πρώτη ενεργοποίηση αυτού του προϊόντος, κάποιες από αυτές τις ειδοποιήσεις θα είναι απενεργοποιημένες από προεπιλογή για τους υπάρχοντες και νέους χρήστες. Αν θέλετε να ενεργοποιήσετε κάποιες από αυτές τις ειδοποιήσεις (ή να τις απενεργοποιήσετε), μπορείτε να το κάνετε στις προτιμήσεις σας, όπως περιγράφεται παρακάτω.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>o247o25zn8xd5ptrh1ggdwwqvh290zm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/bs</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597788</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403252</id>
      <parentid>5365343</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16863" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Neka od ovih obavještenja su automatski isključena za trenutne korisnike ili nisu dostupna na vašem wikiju.. Ako biste željeli omogućiti (ili onemogućiti) bilo koje od tih obavještenja, možete to uraditi [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|u vašim postavkama]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ar77j9wlf5i26flyubn820ycoyltuj4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403290</id>
      <parentid>5403252</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:14:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16823" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Neka od ovih obavještenja su automatski isključena za trenutne korisnike ili nisu dostupna na vašem wikiju.. Ako biste željeli omogućiti (ili onemogućiti) bilo koje od tih obavještenja, možete to uraditi [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|u vašim postavkama]].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5smbq5scv2lp34yq0smvqevqbes5qge</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/es</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597789</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403258</id>
      <parentid>5365349</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16282" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
En la primera versión de esta herramienta, algunas de estas notificaciones se encontrarán inactivas por defecto, tanto para usuarios registrados como para nuevos usuarios. Si deseas habilitar alguna de estas notificaciones (o inhabilitarlas), puedes hacerlo en tus preferencias como se indica a continuación.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Notificaciones por defecto ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Mensaje nuevo]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Respuesta nueva]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

=== Menciones fallidas ==

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

=== Menciones exitosas ===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== Bienvenido ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
=== Hito ===
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Dar las gracias por un editar en una página]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: Detalles:
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

== Notificaciones futuras ==
''Nota: todas estas características no están disponibles todavía pero sus descripciones se escriben en tiempo presente para evitar trabajo extra a los traductores. Ellos serán trasladados a la sección apropiada cuando llegen a estar disponibles.''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>3mwcyxd6lizd4i86peclw7xonu0m9c0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/et</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597790</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403259</id>
      <parentid>5365350</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16816" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Mõni neist teatistest on vaikimisi välja lülitatud või pole teie vikis saadaval. Kui soovite mõne neist märguannetest lubada (või need keelata), saate seda teha [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|teie eelistustes]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>hxku2pdeil393ifqdwp8npx10i2fx14</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403294</id>
      <parentid>5403259</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:15:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16776" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Mõni neist teatistest on vaikimisi välja lülitatud või pole teie vikis saadaval. Kui soovite mõne neist märguannetest lubada (või need keelata), saate seda teha [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|teie eelistustes]].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7c542kufqzxucdr27kmjicasp1prlnn</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/fi</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597791</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403260</id>
      <parentid>5365352</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16872" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Jotkin näistä ilmoituksista on oletuksena kytketty pois käytöstä sekä nykyisten että uusien käyttäjien osalta. Jos haluat ottaa käyttöön minkä tahansa näistä ilmoituksista (tai poistaa niitä käytöstä), voit tehdä niin säätämällä asetuksiasi alempana esitetyllä tavalla.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>lcddf9u28dd1y4g8324dgly1u0rt9ax</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/hi</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597792</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403263</id>
      <parentid>5365357</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17156" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
इस सुविधा की पहली रिलीज़ के लिए कुछ सूचनाएँ डिफ़ॉल्ट रूप से वर्तमान और नए सदस्यों के लिए बंद होंगी। यदि आप इनमें से किसी को भी सक्षम (या अक्षम) करना चाहते हैं तो आप अपनी पसंद में जाकर ये कर सकते हैं, जैसा कि नीचे समझाया गया है।
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>nco68lndbxu97ytxvdlha014cr9dxic</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/hu</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597793</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403264</id>
      <parentid>5365355</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16896" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A szoftver első változatában néhány ezek közül az értesítések közül alapértelmezésben ki lesz kapcsolva mind az új, mind a meglévő szerkesztőknek. Ha be szeretnéd kapcsolni őket (vagy kikapcsolni az alapértelmezésben bekapcsoltakat), a beállításaidnál tudod megtenni, az alább írtak szerint.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>nd26mvaqrmmpsyvn1cqborbauz8nvjm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/id</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597794</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403266</id>
      <parentid>5365385</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12898" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
Semua jenis pemberitahuan di bawah ini dapat dilihat di wiki Wikimedia. Anda dapat melihatnya di wiki di mana Anda berada, di wiki lain melalui [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|pemberitahuan lintas-wiki]], maupun di [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|halaman Istimewa:Pemberitahuan]].

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Beberapa pemberitahuan ini akan dimatikan secara baku atau bahkan tidak tersedia pada wiki Anda. Jika Anda ingin mengaktifkan salah satu dari pemberitahuan ini (atau menonaktifkannya), Anda dapat melakukannya [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|di preferensi Anda]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Halaman istimewa &lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; akan memberi tahu Anda pemberitahuan mana yang tersedia di wiki Anda dan bagaimana mereka dikonfigurasi.

== Pemberitahuan baku ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Pesan baru]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Balasan baru]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Beberapa pesan baru yang dikelompokkan]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Pesan baru pada halaman dalam bahasa kanan-ke-kiri]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika sebuah pesan ditinggalkan di halaman pembicaraan pengguna Anda.

:Informasi utama: Judul pesan.
:Informasi tambahan:
:* untuk pesan baru: siapa yang meninggalkan pesan, dan di halaman mana. Pranala langsung ke pesan.
:* untuk balasan: siapa yang membalas pesan, dan di halaman mana. Pranala langsung ke judul bagian, atau jika dengan Pembicaraan Terstruktur, ke pesan itu sendiri.
:* untuk beberapa pesan atau beberapa balasan baru, pesan mungkin akan dikelompokkan (&quot;enam pesan baru di [halaman itu]&quot;).
:Rincian: pranala ke halaman pengguna dari pengguna terakhir yang meninggalkan Anda pesan pada kelompok tersebut.

Pemberitahuan ini menggantikan bilah jingga yang dulu pernah muncul, tetapi Anda dapat mengatur preferensi Anda agar tetap memiliki bilah jingga tersebut.
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Diterima ketika sebuah pranala baru ditautkan ke halaman yang Anda buat.
:Informasi utama: Halaman yang Anda buat, dan dari mana ditautnya. Bertautan dengan halaman yang mengandung pranala barunya.
:Rincian: menaut ke halaman &quot;Pranala balik&quot; untuk halaman yang ditarget.

Anda bisa mendiamkan pemberitahuan ini untuk halaman tertentu, bisa:

* dari [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|preferensi Anda]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|lihat caranya]])
* melalui pemberitahuan yang diberikan, dengan menekan ketiga titik. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika suntingan Anda dibatalkan atau dikembalikan.
:Informasi utama: Siapa yang membalikan Anda, dan di mana. Bertautan dengan halaman perbandingan perbedaan.
:Rincian: bertautan dengan pengguna yang membalikan Anda. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika seseorang menyebutkan Anda di sebuah halaman pembicaraan.
:Informasi utama: Siapa yang menyebutkan Anda, di mana, dan tentang apa. Bertautan dengan halaman, atau dengan pesan di [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] tempat Anda disebutkan.
:Rincian: bertautan dengan pengguna yang menyebutkan Anda dan perbandingan perbedaan di mana Anda disebutkan.

Untuk menyebutkan penyunting lain dan menyalakan pemberitahuan ini untuk mereka, Anda perlu:

* Membuat pranala ke nama pengguna mereka
** Anda bisa menautnya secara langsung seperti di &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
** Anda bisa menggunakan templat sebutkan apabila ada di wiki Anda (kebanyakan menggunakan templat {{tl|ping}} atau {{tl|reply to}}).
* Tanda tangani komentar Anda dengan &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; atau &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Pengumuman tidak akan dikirimkan apabila tanda tangan Anda ditanamkan dalam sebuah templat, atau tidak mengandung pranala ke halaman pengguna atau halaman pembicaraan pengguna Anda.
* Jangan ubah teks apapun selain komentar Anda.
* Jangan lebihi batas banyak sebutan (50 di wiki Wikimedia).
* Pengumuman hanya dikirimkan ke pengguna yang masuk log, jadi menyebutkan pengguna anonim (IP) tidak mungkin dilakukan.
* Anda tidak bisa menyebutkan diri Anda sendiri.

Rincian teknis spesifik dan tambahan berada di {{ll|Manual:Echo}}. 
{{clear}}

==== Sebutan dalam ringkasan suntingan ====
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika seseorang menaut halaman pengguna Anda di sebuah ringkasan suntingan.
:Informasi utama: Siapa yang menyebutkan Anda, di mana, dan ringkasan suntingannya. Bertautan dengan perubahan yang bersangkutan.
:Rincian: pranala ke pengguna yang menyebutkan Anda.

Untuk menyebutkan seorang pengguna, tinggal taut halaman pengguna mereka, menggunakan sintaks teks wiki biasa: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Semua gaya pranala yang biasa bekerja, seperti $code3 atau &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; bisa bekerja tetapi akan menampilkan &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; dengan sebuah pranala ke halaman pengguna di halaman Riwayat.
Paling banyak 5 pengguna saja yang bisa disebutkan dalam ringkasan suntinga.
Templat sebutan tidak bekerja di ringkasan suntingan.

Untuk membuat pranala di ringkasan tanpa menyebutkan seorang pengguna, awali nama pengguna dengan &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, seperti: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
{{clear}}

=== Sebutan yang gagal ===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika sebutan Anda ke pengguna lain tidak terkirim.

:Informasi utama: siapa yang Anda coba sebutkan, dan alasan mengapa sebutannya tidak terkirim.
:Rincian: pranala ke halaman tempat Anda mencoba menyebutkan.

Pemberitahuan ini dikirimkan ketika:
* mencoba menyebutkan pengguna anonim atau pengguna yang tidak ada, atau
* melebihi batas pengguna yang disebutkan dalam satu suntingan (50 di wiki WMF).
{{clear}}

=== Sebutan yang berhasil ===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika sebutan Anda telah terkirim ke pengguna lain.

:Informasi utama: siapa yang Anda sebutkan.
:Rincian: pranala ke halaman tempat Anda mencoba menyebutkannya.
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika hak pengguna Anda berubah.
:Informasi utama: apa yang telah diubah, dan oleh siapa. Bertautan dengan halaman [[Special:UserGroupRights]].
:Rincian: pranala ke pengguna yang mengubah hak Anda. 
{{clear}}

=== Selamat datang ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Diterima ketika Anda baru membuat akun Anda.
:Informasi utama: Selamat datang!
:Rincian: pranala ke halaman selamat datang yang didefinisikan di konfigurasi wiki ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]). 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika seseorang mengirim Anda surel melalui wiki.
:Informasi umum: SIapa yang mengirimi Anda surel. Tidak ada panala yang diberikan untuk informasi ini.
:Rincian: pranala ke pengguna yang mengirimi Anda surel ini.

Orang-orang bisa mengirimi Anda surel hanya jika Anda telah membolehkan ini di preferensi Anda.
{{anchor|Milestone}}
=== Pencapaian ===
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Diterima ketika Anda telah mencapai pencapaian banyak suntingan tertentu. (Suntingan ke-1, ke-10, ke-100, ke-1.000, ke-10.000, ke-100.000, dan ke-1.000.000)&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: Informasi utama: Pencapaian mana yang telah Anda raih, dan suntingan mana yang menyalakan pemberitahuannya.

== Pemberitahuan dari ekstensi opsional ==

Pemberitahuan berikut tidaklah tersedia secara bawaan. Mereka bisa diaktifkan oleh ekstensi yang hanya tersedia di wiki tertentu, atau oleh ektrensi yang tersedia sebagai fitur Beta di wiki Wikimedia tertentu. 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=Rincian mengenai pemberitahuan &quot;Terima kasih&quot;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Memberikan terima kasih untuk sebuah suntingan di suatu halaman]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

Diterima ketika {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|seseorang berterima kasih kepada Anda untuk suntingan Anda}}.

Tersedia secara bawaan di wiki Wikipedia, bisa juga melakukan berhenti berlangganan di Preferensi.

Anda bisa berterima kasih kepada orang lain dari halaman Riwayat, dari perbandingan perbedaan, dalam daftar pantauan Anda, atau secara langsung ke halaman di Flow. Ingatlah bahwa terima kasih ini akan disimpan di dalam catatan publik (Special:Log/thanks) 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
Pemberitahuan mengenai halaman pembicaraan Anda, jika [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Pembicaraan Terstruktur]] digunakan di sana, akan berada pada bagian &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; di atas.

==== Pemberitahuan dari halaman yang menggunakan Pembicaraan Terstruktur ====
{{Notification type|notice}} dan {{Notification type|alert}} Lihat [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] untuk rincian tepatnya.
Diterima ketika sebuah halaman yang menggunakan [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Pembicaraan Terstruktur]] yang Anda pantau memiliki perubahan (topik baru, kiriman balasan, topik diganti namanya...).

: Informasi utama: Judul pesan dan pengirim.
: Informasi tambahan: abstraksi perubahan.
: Rincian:
:* untuk topik baru: pengguna yang membuat topik, dan halaman tujuannya.
:* untuk balasan baru: pengguna terakhir yang membalas topik, dan tujuannya.
:* untuk perubahan topik: pengguna yang melakukan perubahan tersebut dan pranala untuk perubahan revisi itu.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Diterima ketika Anda menyelesaikan 1, 10 dan 100 terjemahan melalui [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|alat Terjemahan konten]].

: Informasi utama: Pesan selamat.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Diterima ketika halaman yang Anda buat ditinjau (atau &quot;dipatroli&quot;) oleh seseorang yang menggunakan [[Page Curation]].

: Informasi utama: Halaman mana yang ditinjau, dan siapa yang meninjaunya.

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: memberitahu pengembang aplikasi OAuth ketika status tinjauan aplikasinya telah berubah.
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: memberitahu admin OAuth mengenai aplikasi baru yang menunggu untuk ditinjau.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika seseorang gagal mencoba masuk log ke akun Anda. Beberapa peringatan digabungkan menjadi satu untuk percobaan dari perangkat/IP baru, tetapi untuk perangkat/IP yang dikenal, Anda memperoleh peringatan setiap 5 kali percobaan. Lihat [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|cara kerja fitur ini]] untuk informasi lebih lanjut.

=== Sambungan ke repositori data ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Diterima ketika halaman Anda dihubungkan ke repositori data yang terkait (untuk wiki WMF, ini adalah [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).

: Informasi utama: nama halaman yang dihubungkan.
: Rincian: pranala ke item data dan, bisa juga, ke halaman bantuan lokal.

== Pemberitahuan mendatang ==
''Catatan: pemberitahuan ini belum tersedia saat ini tetapi keterangannya ditulis seolah mereka sudah bisa digunakan untuk menghindari kerja ekstra dari para penerjemah. Mereka akan dipindahkan ke bagian yang sesuai ketika sudah tersedia.''

== Catatan kaki ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7h1gqnejls78qu45vvzh8maydbx6aqx</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403300</id>
      <parentid>5403266</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:16:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12858" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
Semua jenis pemberitahuan di bawah ini dapat dilihat di wiki Wikimedia. Anda dapat melihatnya di wiki di mana Anda berada, di wiki lain melalui [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|pemberitahuan lintas-wiki]], maupun di [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|halaman Istimewa:Pemberitahuan]].

Beberapa pemberitahuan ini akan dimatikan secara baku atau bahkan tidak tersedia pada wiki Anda. Jika Anda ingin mengaktifkan salah satu dari pemberitahuan ini (atau menonaktifkannya), Anda dapat melakukannya [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|di preferensi Anda]].

Halaman istimewa &lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; akan memberi tahu Anda pemberitahuan mana yang tersedia di wiki Anda dan bagaimana mereka dikonfigurasi.

== Pemberitahuan baku ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Pesan baru]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Balasan baru]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Beberapa pesan baru yang dikelompokkan]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Pesan baru pada halaman dalam bahasa kanan-ke-kiri]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika sebuah pesan ditinggalkan di halaman pembicaraan pengguna Anda.

:Informasi utama: Judul pesan.
:Informasi tambahan:
:* untuk pesan baru: siapa yang meninggalkan pesan, dan di halaman mana. Pranala langsung ke pesan.
:* untuk balasan: siapa yang membalas pesan, dan di halaman mana. Pranala langsung ke judul bagian, atau jika dengan Pembicaraan Terstruktur, ke pesan itu sendiri.
:* untuk beberapa pesan atau beberapa balasan baru, pesan mungkin akan dikelompokkan (&quot;enam pesan baru di [halaman itu]&quot;).
:Rincian: pranala ke halaman pengguna dari pengguna terakhir yang meninggalkan Anda pesan pada kelompok tersebut.

Pemberitahuan ini menggantikan bilah jingga yang dulu pernah muncul, tetapi Anda dapat mengatur preferensi Anda agar tetap memiliki bilah jingga tersebut.
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Diterima ketika sebuah pranala baru ditautkan ke halaman yang Anda buat.
:Informasi utama: Halaman yang Anda buat, dan dari mana ditautnya. Bertautan dengan halaman yang mengandung pranala barunya.
:Rincian: menaut ke halaman &quot;Pranala balik&quot; untuk halaman yang ditarget.

Anda bisa mendiamkan pemberitahuan ini untuk halaman tertentu, bisa:

* dari [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|preferensi Anda]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|lihat caranya]])
* melalui pemberitahuan yang diberikan, dengan menekan ketiga titik. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika suntingan Anda dibatalkan atau dikembalikan.
:Informasi utama: Siapa yang membalikan Anda, dan di mana. Bertautan dengan halaman perbandingan perbedaan.
:Rincian: bertautan dengan pengguna yang membalikan Anda. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika seseorang menyebutkan Anda di sebuah halaman pembicaraan.
:Informasi utama: Siapa yang menyebutkan Anda, di mana, dan tentang apa. Bertautan dengan halaman, atau dengan pesan di [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] tempat Anda disebutkan.
:Rincian: bertautan dengan pengguna yang menyebutkan Anda dan perbandingan perbedaan di mana Anda disebutkan.

Untuk menyebutkan penyunting lain dan menyalakan pemberitahuan ini untuk mereka, Anda perlu:

* Membuat pranala ke nama pengguna mereka
** Anda bisa menautnya secara langsung seperti di &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
** Anda bisa menggunakan templat sebutkan apabila ada di wiki Anda (kebanyakan menggunakan templat {{tl|ping}} atau {{tl|reply to}}).
* Tanda tangani komentar Anda dengan &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; atau &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Pengumuman tidak akan dikirimkan apabila tanda tangan Anda ditanamkan dalam sebuah templat, atau tidak mengandung pranala ke halaman pengguna atau halaman pembicaraan pengguna Anda.
* Jangan ubah teks apapun selain komentar Anda.
* Jangan lebihi batas banyak sebutan (50 di wiki Wikimedia).
* Pengumuman hanya dikirimkan ke pengguna yang masuk log, jadi menyebutkan pengguna anonim (IP) tidak mungkin dilakukan.
* Anda tidak bisa menyebutkan diri Anda sendiri.

Rincian teknis spesifik dan tambahan berada di {{ll|Manual:Echo}}. 
{{clear}}

==== Sebutan dalam ringkasan suntingan ====
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika seseorang menaut halaman pengguna Anda di sebuah ringkasan suntingan.
:Informasi utama: Siapa yang menyebutkan Anda, di mana, dan ringkasan suntingannya. Bertautan dengan perubahan yang bersangkutan.
:Rincian: pranala ke pengguna yang menyebutkan Anda.

Untuk menyebutkan seorang pengguna, tinggal taut halaman pengguna mereka, menggunakan sintaks teks wiki biasa: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Semua gaya pranala yang biasa bekerja, seperti $code3 atau &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; bisa bekerja tetapi akan menampilkan &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; dengan sebuah pranala ke halaman pengguna di halaman Riwayat.
Paling banyak 5 pengguna saja yang bisa disebutkan dalam ringkasan suntinga.
Templat sebutan tidak bekerja di ringkasan suntingan.

Untuk membuat pranala di ringkasan tanpa menyebutkan seorang pengguna, awali nama pengguna dengan &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, seperti: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
{{clear}}

=== Sebutan yang gagal ===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika sebutan Anda ke pengguna lain tidak terkirim.

:Informasi utama: siapa yang Anda coba sebutkan, dan alasan mengapa sebutannya tidak terkirim.
:Rincian: pranala ke halaman tempat Anda mencoba menyebutkan.

Pemberitahuan ini dikirimkan ketika:
* mencoba menyebutkan pengguna anonim atau pengguna yang tidak ada, atau
* melebihi batas pengguna yang disebutkan dalam satu suntingan (50 di wiki WMF).
{{clear}}

=== Sebutan yang berhasil ===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika sebutan Anda telah terkirim ke pengguna lain.

:Informasi utama: siapa yang Anda sebutkan.
:Rincian: pranala ke halaman tempat Anda mencoba menyebutkannya.
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika hak pengguna Anda berubah.
:Informasi utama: apa yang telah diubah, dan oleh siapa. Bertautan dengan halaman [[Special:UserGroupRights]].
:Rincian: pranala ke pengguna yang mengubah hak Anda. 
{{clear}}

=== Selamat datang ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Diterima ketika Anda baru membuat akun Anda.
:Informasi utama: Selamat datang!
:Rincian: pranala ke halaman selamat datang yang didefinisikan di konfigurasi wiki ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]). 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika seseorang mengirim Anda surel melalui wiki.
:Informasi umum: SIapa yang mengirimi Anda surel. Tidak ada panala yang diberikan untuk informasi ini.
:Rincian: pranala ke pengguna yang mengirimi Anda surel ini.

Orang-orang bisa mengirimi Anda surel hanya jika Anda telah membolehkan ini di preferensi Anda.
{{anchor|Milestone}}
=== Pencapaian ===
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Diterima ketika Anda telah mencapai pencapaian banyak suntingan tertentu. (Suntingan ke-1, ke-10, ke-100, ke-1.000, ke-10.000, ke-100.000, dan ke-1.000.000)&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: Informasi utama: Pencapaian mana yang telah Anda raih, dan suntingan mana yang menyalakan pemberitahuannya.

== Pemberitahuan dari ekstensi opsional ==

Pemberitahuan berikut tidaklah tersedia secara bawaan. Mereka bisa diaktifkan oleh ekstensi yang hanya tersedia di wiki tertentu, atau oleh ektrensi yang tersedia sebagai fitur Beta di wiki Wikimedia tertentu. 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=Rincian mengenai pemberitahuan &quot;Terima kasih&quot;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Memberikan terima kasih untuk sebuah suntingan di suatu halaman]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

Diterima ketika {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|seseorang berterima kasih kepada Anda untuk suntingan Anda}}.

Tersedia secara bawaan di wiki Wikipedia, bisa juga melakukan berhenti berlangganan di Preferensi.

Anda bisa berterima kasih kepada orang lain dari halaman Riwayat, dari perbandingan perbedaan, dalam daftar pantauan Anda, atau secara langsung ke halaman di Flow. Ingatlah bahwa terima kasih ini akan disimpan di dalam catatan publik (Special:Log/thanks) 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
Pemberitahuan mengenai halaman pembicaraan Anda, jika [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Pembicaraan Terstruktur]] digunakan di sana, akan berada pada bagian &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; di atas.

==== Pemberitahuan dari halaman yang menggunakan Pembicaraan Terstruktur ====
{{Notification type|notice}} dan {{Notification type|alert}} Lihat [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] untuk rincian tepatnya.
Diterima ketika sebuah halaman yang menggunakan [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Pembicaraan Terstruktur]] yang Anda pantau memiliki perubahan (topik baru, kiriman balasan, topik diganti namanya...).

: Informasi utama: Judul pesan dan pengirim.
: Informasi tambahan: abstraksi perubahan.
: Rincian:
:* untuk topik baru: pengguna yang membuat topik, dan halaman tujuannya.
:* untuk balasan baru: pengguna terakhir yang membalas topik, dan tujuannya.
:* untuk perubahan topik: pengguna yang melakukan perubahan tersebut dan pranala untuk perubahan revisi itu.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Diterima ketika Anda menyelesaikan 1, 10 dan 100 terjemahan melalui [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|alat Terjemahan konten]].

: Informasi utama: Pesan selamat.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Diterima ketika halaman yang Anda buat ditinjau (atau &quot;dipatroli&quot;) oleh seseorang yang menggunakan [[Page Curation]].

: Informasi utama: Halaman mana yang ditinjau, dan siapa yang meninjaunya.

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: memberitahu pengembang aplikasi OAuth ketika status tinjauan aplikasinya telah berubah.
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: memberitahu admin OAuth mengenai aplikasi baru yang menunggu untuk ditinjau.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Diterima ketika seseorang gagal mencoba masuk log ke akun Anda. Beberapa peringatan digabungkan menjadi satu untuk percobaan dari perangkat/IP baru, tetapi untuk perangkat/IP yang dikenal, Anda memperoleh peringatan setiap 5 kali percobaan. Lihat [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|cara kerja fitur ini]] untuk informasi lebih lanjut.

=== Sambungan ke repositori data ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Diterima ketika halaman Anda dihubungkan ke repositori data yang terkait (untuk wiki WMF, ini adalah [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).

: Informasi utama: nama halaman yang dihubungkan.
: Rincian: pranala ke item data dan, bisa juga, ke halaman bantuan lokal.

== Pemberitahuan mendatang ==
''Catatan: pemberitahuan ini belum tersedia saat ini tetapi keterangannya ditulis seolah mereka sudah bisa digunakan untuk menghindari kerja ekstra dari para penerjemah. Mereka akan dipindahkan ke bagian yang sesuai ketika sudah tersedia.''

== Catatan kaki ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>sl0fgkr9xyl0heq3lejffd2vxfxhd7j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/it</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597795</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403265</id>
      <parentid>5365358</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16874" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
Tutti i seguenti tipi di notifiche possono essere visti nella wiki di Wikimedia. Potete vederle nelle notifiche della wiki in cui siete in quel momento, nelle [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|notifiche cross-wiki]] di un'altra wiki o sulla pagina [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications]].

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Nella versione iniziale dello strumento alcune di queste notifiche saranno disabilitate come impostazione predefinita per tutti gli utenti. Se vuoi attivare (o disabilitare) queste notifiche puoi farlo dalle preferenze, come descritto di seguito.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Notifiche per difetto ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Messaggio nuovo]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Risposta nuova]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Più nuovi messaggi raggruppati]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nuovo messaggio in una pagina con linguaggio da destra a sinistra]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ricevute quando un messaggio viene lasciato nella tua pagina di discussione.
:Informazione primaria: Titolo del messaggio
:Informazione secondaria:
:*in caso di nuovo messaggio: chi ha lasciato il messaggio e su quale pagina. Collega direttamente al messaggio.
:*in caso di risposta: chi ha risposto al messaggio e su quale pagina. Collega direttamente al titolo della sezione o, con Flow, al messaggio stesso.
:*in caso di più nuovi messaggi o più risposte i messaggi potrebbero essere raggruppati (&quot;sei nuovi messaggi su [pagina]&quot;).
:Dettagli: collegamento alla pagina utente o l'ultimo utente che ha lasciato il messaggio nel gruppo di messaggi.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

Questa notifica rimpiazza la barra arancio che appariva prima, ma puoi selezionare tra le tue preferenze di avere la barra arancio.
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Ricevuta quando viene creato un nuovo collegamento a una pagina che hai creato.
:Informazione primaria: La pagina che hai creato e da cosa è stata collegata. Collega alla pagina che ha il nuovo collegamento.
:Dettagli: collegamento alla pagina &quot;Speciale:PuntanoQui&quot; della pagina target.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Ricevuta quando le tue modifiche vengono annullate.
:Informazione primaria: chi ha annullato e su quale pagina. Collega alla visualizzazione delle modifiche.
:Dettagli: collegamento all'utente che ha annullato la modifica. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Ricevuta quando qualcuno ti menziona in una pagina di discussione.
:Informazione primaria: chi ti ha menzionato, dove, e riguardo cosa. Collegata alla pagina o al messaggio di [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] in cui sei stato menzionato.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== Benvenuto ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Dare le grazie per un editar in una pagina]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5zbh51tlz3i2ycy2j2g1grbrw1iklfu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/ja</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597797</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403267</id>
      <parentid>5365382</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14207" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
ここに取り上げる通知の種類はいずれもウィキメディアのウィキ群で表示されます。ご利用のウィキのほか、ほかのウィキの表示は[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|他のウィキの通知]]または[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:通知のページ]]で見ることができます。

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
これらの通知の一部はデフォルトで無効、もしくはご利用のウィキで使用できません。これらの通知のいずれかを有効 (または無効) にしたい場合は、[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|個人設定]]にて設定できます。
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; 特別ページではご利用のウィキでどの通知が表示されるか、どのように設定するか解説しています。

== 既定の通知 ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|新着メッセージ]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|新着の返信]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|グループ化された複数の新着メッセージ]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|左書き (右から左) 言語の新規メッセージ表示]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
自分のトークページにメッセージが届いた時に表示。

:1番目の情報：メッセージの題名。
:２番目の情報：
:*新着メッセージ：送信者名、届いたページ名。メッセージへの直リンク。
:*返信の場合：返信者、届いたページ名。セッション題名メッセージへのリンクもしくは Flow を採用する場合はメッセージへの直リンク。
:*新着メッセージもしくは返信が複数の場合、グループ化して表示 (&quot;[届け先のページ]&quot;単位で新着メッセージ6件) 。
:詳細：そのグループの最新メッセージ送信者の利用者ページのリンク

この通知は以前のオレンジ色のバーの表示に代わるものです。個人設定で以前の表示に戻すこともできます。
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
利用者が新規作成したページに誰かがリンクを張ると届きます。
:1番目の情報：あなたが作成したページの名前とリンク元。新しいリンクを張ったページへリンク作成。
:詳細：通知の元となったページの「リンク元」ページ。

個別のページでこれらの通知を停止する手順：

* [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|自分の個人設定ページ]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|手順を見る]])
* 特定の通知を表示、機能リストのボタン（[…]）を押す。 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
編集が取り消しや巻き戻しの処理を受けた時に届きます。
:1番目の情報：巻き戻しされた項目と巻き戻し者。差分のリンク。
:詳細：巻き戻ししたユーザの利用者ページへのリンク 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
いずれかのトークページで誰かに言及された時に受信。
:1番目のメッセージ: 言及した利用者と名前空間名、関連する話題。リンク先は言及されたページまたは[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]]の特定のメッセージ。
:詳細: 言及された利用者の利用者ページと、言及された特定版へのリンク。

他の編集者に言及し、その言及を相手に通知するこの機能を発動するには、以下の手順に従います:

* 相手の利用者名に次のいずれかの方法でリンクする
** 以下のようにして直接リンクする &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
** 相手が同じウィキの利用者の場合は言及テンプレートを使用できる ({{tl|ping}} や {{tl|reply to}} のテンプレートの使用が一般的)。
* 署名をチルダ記号 &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; または &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt; で残す。ただし自身の署名が、テンプレートに埋め込まれている場合や、自身の利用者ページやトーク ページのいずれにもリンクされていない場合は、通知は送信されません。
* 自分が投稿したコメント以外は書き換えないでください。
* 言及の件数は上限以内にします (ウィキメディアのウィキ群では50件)。
* 通知を送信できるのはログイン状態の相手に限定され、匿名利用者 (IP利用者) は対象外です。
* 自分自身には言及できません。

固有の事例や技術的な詳細は {{ll|Manual:Echo}} を参照してください。 
{{clear}}

==== 編集要約欄で言及 ====
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
誰かが編集要約欄で利用者ページにリンクしたときに届きます。

:1番目の情報: 言及された相手と名前空間および編集の要約。懸案の変更点にリンク。
:詳細: 言及された相手の利用者ページにリンク。

他の利用者ページにリンクして相手に言及するには、通常のウィキテキストの構文 &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; を使います。
他にもよく使うリンク形式の {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|任意のテキスト}} または &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; も有効です。
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; は動作しますが、履歴ページ内で利用者ページへのリンク付きで &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; が表示されます。
1 件の編集要約欄で言及できる上限は 5 人です。
言及のテンプレートは動作しません (訳注: {{tl|ping}} や {{tl|reply to}} が一般的)。

編集翻訳欄で相手に言及する場合で非通知にするには、利用者ページへのリンクの先頭部分に
接頭辞&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;を書きます。例：&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;（訳注：角カッコの中）
{{clear}}

=== 言及の失敗 ===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
もし言及したのに通知に失敗した場合に届きます。

:1番目の情報: 言及しようとした相手と、言及に失敗した理由。
:詳細：言及しようとしたページへのリンク。

通知が届くのは以下の場合です。
* 相手が匿名利用者か存在しない。
* 編集要約欄1件で言及した人数が上限を超えた（例：ウィキメディア財団のウィキで50件）
{{clear}}

=== 言及の成功 ===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
他の利用者宛てに通知が送信できたときに届きます。

:1番目の情報：言及した相手。
:詳細：相手に言及したページへのリンク。
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
ご自分の利用者権限が変更されると届きます。
:1番目の情報：変更点と実行者。[[Special:UserGroupRights]]ページへのリンク。
:詳細：実行者の利用者ページへのリンク。 
{{clear}}

=== ようこそ  ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
利用者アカウントを作ったとき。
:1番目の情報：ようこそ！
:詳細：ウィキの環境設定 ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]) にしたがい、歓迎ページにリンク。 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
ウィキのメール送信機能で誰かからメールが届いたとき。.
:1番目の情報：メールの送信者。リンクは提供されません。
:詳細：メール送信者の利用者ページへのリンク。

個人設定で受信すると指定しない限り、誰からもメールは届きません。
{{anchor|Milestone}}
=== マイルストーン ===
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
編集の累計が特定の閾値を超えると届きます（1件目、10件目、100件目、1,000件目、1万件目、10万件目、100万件目、1000万件目。）&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: 1番目の情報: 達成した閾値と通知の契機になった編集

== オプションの拡張機能からの通知 ==

これらはすべて、利用者が設定した場合にのみ届く通知です。特定のウィキ固有の拡張機能や、ウィキメディアの特定のウィキでベータ版機能を展開する拡張機能を有効にした場合に受信可能になります。 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=「感謝」通知の詳細}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|ページの編集への感謝]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

誰かが編集に対して{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|感謝}}したとき届きます。
:1番目の情報：感謝した利用者と場所、対象。感謝された特定版の差分もしくはFlowメッセージへのリンク。
:詳細：感謝した利用者のリンク、投稿先が構造化された議論のボードならそのページへのリンク。

ウィキメディアのウィキでは既定で有効。個人設定で無効に切り替え可能。

どの「履歴表示」や差分表示や利用者のウォッチリストから、あるいはFlow上のページからでも相手に感謝を表明できます。感謝の表明は公開ログ（Special:Log/thanks）に記録される点にご留意ください。 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|構造化した議論]]を「[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]」節で採用する利用者に対して、トークページに関して通知が届きます。

==== 構造化した議論を採用するページの通知 ====
{{Notification type|notice}}と{{Notification type|alert}} 詳細は[[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration|通知機能の構成]]を参照してください。
ウォッチする設定をしたページが[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|議論の構造化]]を採用していると変更点の知らせが届きます（新しい話題、投稿への返信、話題の改名など…）。

: 1番目の情報：メッセージの題名と送信者名。
: 2番目の情報：変更点のまとめ。
: 詳細:
:*新規の話題：どのページで誰が提起したか。
:*新規の返信：どのページで誰がいちばん最近、話題に返信したか。
:*話題の改名：改名した利用者名と特定版のリンク。

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|コンテンツ翻訳ツール]]を使った1件、10件目、100件目の翻訳を投稿したとき。

: 1番目の情報：お祝いのメッセージ。

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
利用者が作成したページを誰かが[[Page Curation]]を使ってリビューしたとき。

: 1番目の情報：どのページが査読を受け、査読者は誰か。

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: アプリケーションの査読ステータスが変更されたとき、OAuth開発者に届きます。
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: OAuth管理者に査読を待っている新しいアプリケーションがあると通知します。

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
利用者のアカウントに誰かがログインを試みて失敗した時に受信。未知の機器またはIPアドレスによる場合は複数回をまとめて通知しますが、既知の機器やIPアドレスの場合には通知は5件ごとに受信します。詳細は[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|この機能の仕組み]]を参照してください。

=== データリポジトリへの接続 ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
利用者のページが関連するデータリポジトリに接続した時に受信（ウィキメディア財団ウィキの場合は特例で[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|ウィキデータ]]）。

: 1番目の情報：接続したページ名。
: 詳細：データ項目のリンク。ローカルのヘルプページがある場合はそのリンク。

== 実装前の通知 ==
''注記：以下の通知はまだ実装されていませんが、翻訳者の手間を省くために現在形で記述してあります。 以下の項目は、それぞれ準備が整った段階で適した節へ移動します。''

== 脚注 ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>hsgiiywpiju964qewwuxqm5rj9xofwq</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403302</id>
      <parentid>5403267</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:16:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14158" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
ここに取り上げる通知の種類はいずれもウィキメディアのウィキ群で表示されます。ご利用のウィキのほか、ほかのウィキの表示は[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|他のウィキの通知]]または[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:通知のページ]]で見ることができます。

これらの通知の一部は既定で無効、もしくはご利用のウィキで使用できません。これらの通知のいずれかを有効 (または無効) にしたい場合は、[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|個人設定]]にて設定できます。

&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; 特別ページではご利用のウィキでどの通知が表示されるか、どのように設定するか解説しています。

== 既定の通知 ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|新着メッセージ]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|新着の返信]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|グループ化された複数の新着メッセージ]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|左書き (右から左) 言語の新規メッセージ表示]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
自分のトークページにメッセージが届いた時に表示。

:1番目の情報：メッセージの題名。
:２番目の情報：
:*新着メッセージ：送信者名、届いたページ名。メッセージへの直リンク。
:*返信の場合：返信者、届いたページ名。セッション題名メッセージへのリンクもしくは Flow を採用する場合はメッセージへの直リンク。
:*新着メッセージもしくは返信が複数の場合、グループ化して表示 (&quot;[届け先のページ]&quot;単位で新着メッセージ6件) 。
:詳細：そのグループの最新メッセージ送信者の利用者ページのリンク

この通知は以前のオレンジ色のバーの表示に代わるものです。個人設定で以前の表示に戻すこともできます。
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
利用者が新規作成したページに誰かがリンクを張ると届きます。
:1番目の情報：あなたが作成したページの名前とリンク元。新しいリンクを張ったページへリンク作成。
:詳細：通知の元となったページの「リンク元」ページ。

個別のページでこれらの通知を停止する手順：

* [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|自分の個人設定ページ]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|手順を見る]])
* 特定の通知を表示、機能リストのボタン（[…]）を押す。 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
編集が取り消しや巻き戻しの処理を受けた時に届きます。
:1番目の情報：巻き戻しされた項目と巻き戻し者。差分のリンク。
:詳細：巻き戻ししたユーザの利用者ページへのリンク 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
いずれかのトークページで誰かに言及された時に受信。
:1番目のメッセージ: 言及した利用者と名前空間名、関連する話題。リンク先は言及されたページまたは[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]]の特定のメッセージ。
:詳細: 言及された利用者の利用者ページと、言及された特定版へのリンク。

他の編集者に言及し、その言及を相手に通知するこの機能を発動するには、以下の手順に従います:

* 相手の利用者名に次のいずれかの方法でリンクする
** 以下のようにして直接リンクする &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
** 相手が同じウィキの利用者の場合は言及テンプレートを使用できる ({{tl|ping}} や {{tl|reply to}} のテンプレートの使用が一般的)。
* 署名をチルダ記号 &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; または &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt; で残す。ただし自身の署名が、テンプレートに埋め込まれている場合や、自身の利用者ページやトーク ページのいずれにもリンクされていない場合は、通知は送信されません。
* 自分が投稿したコメント以外は書き換えないでください。
* 言及の件数は上限以内にします (ウィキメディアのウィキ群では50件)。
* 通知を送信できるのはログイン状態の相手に限定され、匿名利用者 (IP利用者) は対象外です。
* 自分自身には言及できません。

固有の事例や技術的な詳細は {{ll|Manual:Echo}} を参照してください。 
{{clear}}

==== 編集要約欄で言及 ====
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
誰かが編集要約欄で利用者ページにリンクしたときに届きます。

:1番目の情報: 言及された相手と名前空間および編集の要約。懸案の変更点にリンク。
:詳細: 言及された相手の利用者ページにリンク。

他の利用者ページにリンクして相手に言及するには、通常のウィキテキストの構文 &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; を使います。
他にもよく使うリンク形式の {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|任意のテキスト}} または &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; も有効です。
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; は動作しますが、履歴ページ内で利用者ページへのリンク付きで &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; が表示されます。
1 件の編集要約欄で言及できる上限は 5 人です。
言及のテンプレートは動作しません (訳注: {{tl|ping}} や {{tl|reply to}} が一般的)。

編集翻訳欄で相手に言及する場合で非通知にするには、利用者ページへのリンクの先頭部分に
接頭辞&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;を書きます。例：&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;（訳注：角カッコの中）
{{clear}}

=== 言及の失敗 ===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
もし言及したのに通知に失敗した場合に届きます。

:1番目の情報: 言及しようとした相手と、言及に失敗した理由。
:詳細：言及しようとしたページへのリンク。

通知が届くのは以下の場合です。
* 相手が匿名利用者か存在しない。
* 編集要約欄1件で言及した人数が上限を超えた（例：ウィキメディア財団のウィキで50件）
{{clear}}

=== 言及の成功 ===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
他の利用者宛てに通知が送信できたときに届きます。

:1番目の情報：言及した相手。
:詳細：相手に言及したページへのリンク。
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
ご自分の利用者権限が変更されると届きます。
:1番目の情報：変更点と実行者。[[Special:UserGroupRights]]ページへのリンク。
:詳細：実行者の利用者ページへのリンク。 
{{clear}}

=== ようこそ  ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
利用者アカウントを作ったとき。
:1番目の情報：ようこそ！
:詳細：ウィキの環境設定 ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]) にしたがい、歓迎ページにリンク。 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
ウィキのメール送信機能で誰かからメールが届いたとき。.
:1番目の情報：メールの送信者。リンクは提供されません。
:詳細：メール送信者の利用者ページへのリンク。

個人設定で受信すると指定しない限り、誰からもメールは届きません。
{{anchor|Milestone}}
=== マイルストーン ===
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
編集の累計が特定の閾値を超えると届きます（1件目、10件目、100件目、1,000件目、1万件目、10万件目、100万件目、1000万件目。）&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: 1番目の情報: 達成した閾値と通知の契機になった編集

== オプションの拡張機能からの通知 ==

これらはすべて、利用者が設定した場合にのみ届く通知です。特定のウィキ固有の拡張機能や、ウィキメディアの特定のウィキでベータ版機能を展開する拡張機能を有効にした場合に受信可能になります。 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=「感謝」通知の詳細}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|ページの編集への感謝]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

誰かが編集に対して{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|感謝}}したとき届きます。
:1番目の情報：感謝した利用者と場所、対象。感謝された特定版の差分もしくはFlowメッセージへのリンク。
:詳細：感謝した利用者のリンク、投稿先が構造化された議論のボードならそのページへのリンク。

ウィキメディアのウィキでは既定で有効。個人設定で無効に切り替え可能。

どの「履歴表示」や差分表示や利用者のウォッチリストから、あるいはFlow上のページからでも相手に感謝を表明できます。感謝の表明は公開ログ（Special:Log/thanks）に記録される点にご留意ください。 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|構造化した議論]]を「[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]」節で採用する利用者に対して、トークページに関して通知が届きます。

==== 構造化した議論を採用するページの通知 ====
{{Notification type|notice}}と{{Notification type|alert}} 詳細は[[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration|通知機能の構成]]を参照してください。
ウォッチする設定をしたページが[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|議論の構造化]]を採用していると変更点の知らせが届きます（新しい話題、投稿への返信、話題の改名など…）。

: 1番目の情報：メッセージの題名と送信者名。
: 2番目の情報：変更点のまとめ。
: 詳細:
:*新規の話題：どのページで誰が提起したか。
:*新規の返信：どのページで誰がいちばん最近、話題に返信したか。
:*話題の改名：改名した利用者名と特定版のリンク。

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|コンテンツ翻訳ツール]]を使った1件、10件目、100件目の翻訳を投稿したとき。

: 1番目の情報：お祝いのメッセージ。

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
利用者が作成したページを誰かが[[Page Curation]]を使ってリビューしたとき。

: 1番目の情報：どのページが査読を受け、査読者は誰か。

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: アプリケーションの査読ステータスが変更されたとき、OAuth開発者に届きます。
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: OAuth管理者に査読を待っている新しいアプリケーションがあると通知します。

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
利用者のアカウントに誰かがログインを試みて失敗した時に受信。未知の機器またはIPアドレスによる場合は複数回をまとめて通知しますが、既知の機器やIPアドレスの場合には通知は5件ごとに受信します。詳細は[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|この機能の仕組み]]を参照してください。

=== データリポジトリへの接続 ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
利用者のページが関連するデータリポジトリに接続した時に受信（ウィキメディア財団ウィキの場合は特例で[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|ウィキデータ]]）。

: 1番目の情報：接続したページ名。
: 詳細：データ項目のリンク。ローカルのヘルプページがある場合はそのリンク。

== 実装前の通知 ==
''注記：以下の通知はまだ実装されていませんが、翻訳者の手間を省くために現在形で記述してあります。 以下の項目は、それぞれ準備が整った段階で適した節へ移動します。''

== 脚注 ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>hn7majvcx6209bnj83dswogtnxmclwf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/kn</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597798</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403268</id>
      <parentid>5365360</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17110" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
ಈ ಉತ್ಪನ್ನದ ಮೊದಲ ಬಿಡುಗಡೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಕೆಲವು ಸೂಚನೆಗಳನ್ನು  ಡಿಫಾಲ್ಟ್ ಆಗಿ ನಿಷ್ಕ್ರಿಯಗೊಳಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ.  ಈ ಸೂಚನೆಗಳನ್ನು ಸಕ್ರಿಯ ಅಥವಾ ನಿಷ್ಕ್ರಿಯಗೊಳಿಸಲು ಬಯಸಿದಲ್ಲಿ ನಿಮ್ಮ ಪ್ರಾಶಸ್ತ್ಯಗಳಲ್ಲಿ  ಈ ಕೆಳಗೆ ವಿವರಿಸಿದಂತೆ ಹಾಗೆ ಮಾಡಬಹುದು.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>4ggjypi7krzrxi0kurqljzl4woarkqx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/ko</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597799</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403269</id>
      <parentid>5365361</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16237" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
알림을 읽은 것으로나 읽지 않은 것으로 표시합니다.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
아래 몇몇 종류의 알림들의 설정은 기본적으로 꺼져 있습니다. 만약 아래의 알림들을 활성화하거나 비활성화하려면 여러분의 환경 설정에서 아래의 설명에 따라 설정하시면 됩니다.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|새 메시지 알림]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|새 답변 알림]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|여러 개의 새 메시지 알림들이 묶인 모습]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|우횡서를 쓰는 언어판에서의 새 메시지 알림]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
여러분께서 계정을 막 만든 경우 (붉은) 경보 알림을 받습니다.
:주 정보: 위키 환경설정에 정의된 환영 페이지로 '환영합니다 !'이 링크됩니다. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|문서 편집에 대한 감사 표시 알림]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

사용자의 주시목록에서 역사 문서의 차이 비교를 통해서나 플로우의 문서에 직접 누군가에게 감사를 표할 수 있습니다. 참고로 이러한 감사 기록은 공개 기록에 저장됩니다. 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2tavmej76gmebipp73t2c5fse5xyf5b</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/uk</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597801</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403283</id>
      <parentid>5365377</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:13:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16974" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Деякі з цих сповіщень вимкнено за замовчуванням або недоступні у вашій вікі. Якщо ви хочете ввімкнути будь-які з цих сповіщень (або вимкнути їх), ви можете зробити це у [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|своїх налаштуваннях]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1z69op1vrsq69gofq0xw8b0l7brf2dw</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403312</id>
      <parentid>5403283</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:17:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16934" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Деякі з цих сповіщень вимкнено за замовчуванням або недоступні у вашій вікі. Якщо ви хочете ввімкнути будь-які з цих сповіщень (або вимкнути їх), ви можете зробити це у [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|своїх налаштуваннях]].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>mlgtatx4l1d84ln430cuzgex2xn97o2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/te</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597802</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403282</id>
      <parentid>5365376</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:13:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17038" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
ఈ మొదటి విడుదలకు , కొన్ని సూచనలు ప్రస్తుత వాడుకరులకుకొత్త వాడుకరులకు అప్రమేయంగా అచేతనపరచబడవచ్చు. వీటిని చేతనపరచాలంటే అభిరుచులు  విభాగంలో ఈక్రిందచెప్పబడినవిధంగా చేయండి.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>b01flz6wip8quk6qurnify7hqfwktjw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/sv</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597803</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403280</id>
      <parentid>5365375</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:13:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16801" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
I den första utgåvan av denna produkt har vissa meddelanden slagits av som default för både existerande och nya användare. Om du vill slå på några av dessa meddelanden (eller avaktivera dem) kan du göra det i dina inställingar enligt beskrivningen nedan.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

==== Omnämnanden i redigeringssammanfattning ====
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>nkavq3bxhj9z6bewzwgxmkaaefheztq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/sl</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597804</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403281</id>
      <parentid>5365373</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:13:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16825" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Pri prvi izdaji tega orodja bodo nekatera od sporočil po privzetem izključena tako za sedanje kot tudi za nove uporabnike. Če bi jih radi omogočili (ali onemogočili), lahko to storite v svojih nastavitvah, kot je opisano v nadaljnjem besedilu.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9o48dmsgpg5xx60v7ylix352tdgheou</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/ru</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597805</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403278</id>
      <parentid>5365371</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:13:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16810" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Некоторые из этих уведомлений по умолчанию отключены. Если вы хотите включить или выключить любое из этих уведомлений, вы можете сделать это в настройках, как описано ниже.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Новое сообщение]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Новый ответ]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>tld8z49p2zyvt7s0jpnkwhqes56zi5o</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/ro</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597806</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403277</id>
      <parentid>5365370</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:13:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16863" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Unele dintre aceste notificări sunt dezactivate în mod implicit sau nu sunt disponibile pe wiki.  Dacă doriți să activați oricare dintre aceste notificări (sau să le dezactivați), puteți face acest lucru [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|în preferințele]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ndzz9ju4rw3pfn6p6p2wk1gj6zd3id4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403310</id>
      <parentid>5403277</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:17:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16823" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Unele dintre aceste notificări sunt dezactivate în mod implicit sau nu sunt disponibile pe wiki.  Dacă doriți să activați oricare dintre aceste notificări (sau să le dezactivați), puteți face acest lucru [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|în preferințele]].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>kmm6eowy9fmdvfbnbgcl5uykmnppsqo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/pt</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597807</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403275</id>
      <parentid>5365368</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15219" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
Todos os tipos de notificações abaixo podem ser vistos nas wikis da Wikimedia. Poderá vê-las na wiki onde está, noutra wiki através das [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|notificações entre wikis]], ou na página [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Especial:Notificações]].

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Algumas destas notificações estarão desativadas por padrão ou indisponíveis na sua wiki. Se preferir ativar alguma destas notificações (ou desativá-la), poderá fazê-lo [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|na sua página de preferências]].
&lt;/div&gt;

A página especial &lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; permite-lhe conhecer as notificações que estão disponíveis na sua wiki e como estas são configuradas.

== Notificações padrão ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Mensagem nova]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Resposta nova]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Mensagens novas agrupadas]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Mensagem nova numa página de uma língua escrita da direita para a esquerda]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando uma mensagem é deixada na sua página de discussão.

:Informação primária: título da mensagem;
:Informação secundária:
:*em caso de nova mensagem: quem deixou a mensagem e em que página ela está; com hiperligação direta para a mensagem;
:*em caso de resposta: quem respondeu à mensagem e em que página a resposta está; com hiperligação direta para o título da secção ou, com o Flow, para a própria mensagem.
:*em caso de várias mensagens novas ou várias respostas, as mensagens podem ser agrupadas (“seis mensagens novas em [página]”).
:Detalhes: hiperligação para a página do último utilizador que lhe deixou uma mensagem naquele grupo.

Esta notificação substitui a barra laranja que aparecia anteriormente, mas pode definir nas suas preferências que quer ter a barra laranja.
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebidas quando é feita uma hiperligação nova para uma página que você criou.
:Informação primária: a página que criou e onde foi feita a hiperligação para ela; com hiperligação para a página que tem a hiperligação nova.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para as “Páginas afluentes” da página alvo.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando as suas edições são desfeitas ou revertidas.
:Informação primária: quem reverteu a sua edição e onde; hiperligação para a lista de diferenças.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o utilizador que fez a reversão. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando alguém faz menção a si numa página de discussão.
:Informação primária: quem fez menção a si, onde e sobre o quê; com hiperligação para a página ou mensagem do [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] onde foi feita a menção.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o utilizador que fez menção a si e a lista de diferenças onde a menção ocorre.

Para mencionar outros editores e notificá-los, será necessário:
* Hiperligação para o nome de utilizador
** pode criar uma hiperligação direta, com $codeexample
** pode usar predefinições de menção, se estas existirem na sua wiki (muitos usam as predefinições {{tl|ping}} ou {{tl|reply to}}).
* Assinar o seu comentário com $threetildes ou $fourtildes. As notificações não serão enviadas se a sua assinatura estiver incorporada numa predefinição, ou se não contiver uma hiperligação para a sua página de utilizador ou de discussão.
* Não alterar nenhum texto fora do seu comentário.
* Não ultrapassar o limite de menções (50 nas wikis da Wikimedia).
* As notificações só são enviadas a utilizadores autenticados, isto é, não é possível mencionar utilizadores anónimos (endereços IP).
* Não é possível mencionar-se a si mesmo(a).
Encontra detalhes técnicos específicos e adicionais em [[Manual:Echo]].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

==== Menções no resumo de edição ====
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando alguém cria uma hiperligação para a sua página de utilizador num resumo de edição.
:Informação primária: quem fez a menção a si, onde e o resumo da edição; com hiperligação para a mudança em questão.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o utilizador que fez menção a si.

Para mencionar um utilizador, crie uma hiperligação para a respetiva página de utilizador usando a sintaxe normal de texto wiki: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Todos os estilos normais de hiperligações funcionam, como $code3 ou &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
Não mais do que 5 utilizadores podem ser mencionados num resumo de edição.
As predefinições de menção não funcionam nos resumos de edição.

Para deixar uma hiperligação no resumo sem notificar um utilizador, prefixe o nome de utilizador com &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, assim: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
{{clear}}

=== Menções falhadas ===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando a sua menção de outro utilizador não for enviada.

:Informação primária: quem você tentou mencionar e a razão pela qual a menção não foi enviada.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para a página na qual você tentou fazer a menção.

Estas notificações são enviadas quando:
* tentar mencionar um utilizador anónimo ou inexistente, ou
* exceder o limite de utilizadores mencionados numa só edição (50 nas wikis da WMF).
{{clear}}

=== Menções bem sucedidas ===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando a sua menção for enviada a outro utilizador.

:Informação primária: quem você mencionou.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para a página na qual mencionou o utilizador.
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando os seus privilégios de utilizador mudam.
:Informação primária: o que foi alterado e por quem; com hiperligação para a página [[Special:UserGroupRights|Especial:Privilégios de grupos de utilizadores]].
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o utilizador que alterou os seus privilégios. 
{{clear}}

=== Boas-vindas ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebidas quando acaba de criar a sua conta.
:Informação primária: boas-vindas.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para uma página de boas-vindas definida na configuração da wiki ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]). 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando alguém lhe envia um correio eletrónico através da wiki.
:Informação primária: quem enviou a mensagem; não é fornecida nenhuma hiperligação para esta informação.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o utilizador que lhe enviou o correio eletrónico.

Os outros utilizadores só lhe podem enviar mensagens por correio eletrónico se permitir que o façam, nas suas preferências.
{{anchor|Milestone}}
=== Objetivo ===
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebidos quando alcança certos objetivos de número de edições (1.ª, 10.ª, 100.ª, 1 000.ª, 10 000.ª, 100 000.ª e 1 000 000.ª edição).&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: Informação primária: qual foi o objetivo que alcançou e qual foi a edição que desencadeou a notificação.

== Notificações de extensões opcionais ==

Estas notificações não estão disponíveis por padrão. Elas podem ser enviadas por uma extensão disponível apenas em algumas wikis, ou por uma extensão disponível como funcionalidade Beta em certas wikis da Wikimedia. 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Agradecer uma edição numa página]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

Recebidas quando alguém agradece a sua edição.
:Informação primária: quem lhe agradeceu, onde e sobre o quê; com hiperligação para a lista de diferenças ou a mensagem do Flow onde foi feito o agradecimento.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o utilizador que lhe agradeceu e, se foi num espaço de conversas estruturadas, para a página.

Disponível por padrão nas wikis da Wikimedia, é possível optar pela exclusão e configurar nas Preferências.

Pode agradecer a qualquer utilizador a partir de qualquer página de historial, de uma lista de diferenças, da sua lista de páginas vigiadas ou diretamente na página no Flow. Lembre-se que este agradecimento é armazenado num registo público (Special:Log/thanks). 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
As notificações acerca da sua página de discussão, se esta usa as [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|conversas estruturadas]], estão na secção &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; acima.

==== Notificações a partir de uma página de conversas estruturadas ====
{{Notification type|notice}} e {{Notification type|alert}} Para detalhes precisos, consultar [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]].
Recebidos quando uma página vigiada que usa as [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|conversas estruturadas]] tem mudanças (novo tópico, resposta, alteração do nome do tópico…).

: Informação primária: título da mensagem e autor.
: Informação secundária: resumo da mudança.
: Detalhes:
:* para um tópico novo: o utilizador que criou o tópico e a página de destino.
:* para uma resposta nova: o último utilizador que respondeu ao tópico e a página de destino.
:* para uma mudança no tópico: o utilizador que efetuou a mudança e uma hiperligação para a respetiva lista de diferenças.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebidas quando tiver feito 1, 10 e 100 traduções através da ferramenta [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Tradutor de Conteúdo]].

: Informação primária: mensagem de parabéns.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebidas quando uma página criada por si é revista (ou “patrulhada”) por alguém usando a [[Page Curation|Curadoria de Páginas]].

: Informação primária: a página que foi revista e quem a reviu.

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: notifica os programadores de aplicações OAuth quando o estado de revisão da aplicação é alterado.
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: notifica os administradores OAuth acerca de aplicações novas que aguardam revisão.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando alguém tentou e não conseguiu entrar na wiki utilizando a sua conta. Vários alertas são agrupados num só para tentativas a partir de um dispositivo ou IP novo mas, para um dispositivo ou IP conhecido, só recebe um alerta por cada 5 tentativas. Para mais informações, consulte [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|detalhes sobre esta funcionalidade]].

=== Ligação ao repositório de dados ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebidas quando a sua página é ligada ao repositório de dados associado (nas wikis da WMF, este é o [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).

: Informação primária: o nome da página ligada.
: Detalhes: hiperligação para o elemento de dados e, se possível, para uma página de ajuda local.

== Notificações futuras ==
''Nota: estas notificações ainda não estão disponíveis mas as suas descrições foram escritas usando o tempo presente para evitar trabalho extra para os tradutores. Elas serão movidas para a secção apropriada quando forem disponibilizadas.''

== Notas de Rodapé ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9f8lqwg4hm118tw3q69y6bu4qxktl2q</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403306</id>
      <parentid>5403275</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:17:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15179" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
Todos os tipos de notificações abaixo podem ser vistos nas wikis da Wikimedia. Poderá vê-las na wiki onde está, noutra wiki através das [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|notificações entre wikis]], ou na página [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Especial:Notificações]].

Algumas destas notificações estarão desativadas por padrão ou indisponíveis na sua wiki. Se preferir ativar alguma destas notificações (ou desativá-la), poderá fazê-lo [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|na sua página de preferências]].

A página especial &lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; permite-lhe conhecer as notificações que estão disponíveis na sua wiki e como estas são configuradas.

== Notificações padrão ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Mensagem nova]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Resposta nova]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Mensagens novas agrupadas]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Mensagem nova numa página de uma língua escrita da direita para a esquerda]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando uma mensagem é deixada na sua página de discussão.

:Informação primária: título da mensagem;
:Informação secundária:
:*em caso de nova mensagem: quem deixou a mensagem e em que página ela está; com hiperligação direta para a mensagem;
:*em caso de resposta: quem respondeu à mensagem e em que página a resposta está; com hiperligação direta para o título da secção ou, com o Flow, para a própria mensagem.
:*em caso de várias mensagens novas ou várias respostas, as mensagens podem ser agrupadas (“seis mensagens novas em [página]”).
:Detalhes: hiperligação para a página do último utilizador que lhe deixou uma mensagem naquele grupo.

Esta notificação substitui a barra laranja que aparecia anteriormente, mas pode definir nas suas preferências que quer ter a barra laranja.
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebidas quando é feita uma hiperligação nova para uma página que você criou.
:Informação primária: a página que criou e onde foi feita a hiperligação para ela; com hiperligação para a página que tem a hiperligação nova.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para as “Páginas afluentes” da página alvo.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando as suas edições são desfeitas ou revertidas.
:Informação primária: quem reverteu a sua edição e onde; hiperligação para a lista de diferenças.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o utilizador que fez a reversão. 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando alguém faz menção a si numa página de discussão.
:Informação primária: quem fez menção a si, onde e sobre o quê; com hiperligação para a página ou mensagem do [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] onde foi feita a menção.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o utilizador que fez menção a si e a lista de diferenças onde a menção ocorre.

Para mencionar outros editores e notificá-los, será necessário:
* Hiperligação para o nome de utilizador
** pode criar uma hiperligação direta, com $codeexample
** pode usar predefinições de menção, se estas existirem na sua wiki (muitos usam as predefinições {{tl|ping}} ou {{tl|reply to}}).
* Assinar o seu comentário com $threetildes ou $fourtildes. As notificações não serão enviadas se a sua assinatura estiver incorporada numa predefinição, ou se não contiver uma hiperligação para a sua página de utilizador ou de discussão.
* Não alterar nenhum texto fora do seu comentário.
* Não ultrapassar o limite de menções (50 nas wikis da Wikimedia).
* As notificações só são enviadas a utilizadores autenticados, isto é, não é possível mencionar utilizadores anónimos (endereços IP).
* Não é possível mencionar-se a si mesmo(a).
Encontra detalhes técnicos específicos e adicionais em [[Manual:Echo]].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

==== Menções no resumo de edição ====
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando alguém cria uma hiperligação para a sua página de utilizador num resumo de edição.
:Informação primária: quem fez a menção a si, onde e o resumo da edição; com hiperligação para a mudança em questão.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o utilizador que fez menção a si.

Para mencionar um utilizador, crie uma hiperligação para a respetiva página de utilizador usando a sintaxe normal de texto wiki: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Todos os estilos normais de hiperligações funcionam, como $code3 ou &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
Não mais do que 5 utilizadores podem ser mencionados num resumo de edição.
As predefinições de menção não funcionam nos resumos de edição.

Para deixar uma hiperligação no resumo sem notificar um utilizador, prefixe o nome de utilizador com &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, assim: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
{{clear}}

=== Menções falhadas ===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando a sua menção de outro utilizador não for enviada.

:Informação primária: quem você tentou mencionar e a razão pela qual a menção não foi enviada.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para a página na qual você tentou fazer a menção.

Estas notificações são enviadas quando:
* tentar mencionar um utilizador anónimo ou inexistente, ou
* exceder o limite de utilizadores mencionados numa só edição (50 nas wikis da WMF).
{{clear}}

=== Menções bem sucedidas ===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando a sua menção for enviada a outro utilizador.

:Informação primária: quem você mencionou.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para a página na qual mencionou o utilizador.
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando os seus privilégios de utilizador mudam.
:Informação primária: o que foi alterado e por quem; com hiperligação para a página [[Special:UserGroupRights|Especial:Privilégios de grupos de utilizadores]].
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o utilizador que alterou os seus privilégios. 
{{clear}}

=== Boas-vindas ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebidas quando acaba de criar a sua conta.
:Informação primária: boas-vindas.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para uma página de boas-vindas definida na configuração da wiki ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]). 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando alguém lhe envia um correio eletrónico através da wiki.
:Informação primária: quem enviou a mensagem; não é fornecida nenhuma hiperligação para esta informação.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o utilizador que lhe enviou o correio eletrónico.

Os outros utilizadores só lhe podem enviar mensagens por correio eletrónico se permitir que o façam, nas suas preferências.
{{anchor|Milestone}}
=== Objetivo ===
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebidos quando alcança certos objetivos de número de edições (1.ª, 10.ª, 100.ª, 1 000.ª, 10 000.ª, 100 000.ª e 1 000 000.ª edição).&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: Informação primária: qual foi o objetivo que alcançou e qual foi a edição que desencadeou a notificação.

== Notificações de extensões opcionais ==

Estas notificações não estão disponíveis por padrão. Elas podem ser enviadas por uma extensão disponível apenas em algumas wikis, ou por uma extensão disponível como funcionalidade Beta em certas wikis da Wikimedia. 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Agradecer uma edição numa página]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

Recebidas quando alguém agradece a sua edição.
:Informação primária: quem lhe agradeceu, onde e sobre o quê; com hiperligação para a lista de diferenças ou a mensagem do Flow onde foi feito o agradecimento.
:Detalhes: hiperligação para o utilizador que lhe agradeceu e, se foi num espaço de conversas estruturadas, para a página.

Disponível por padrão nas wikis da Wikimedia, é possível optar pela exclusão e configurar nas Preferências.

Pode agradecer a qualquer utilizador a partir de qualquer página de historial, de uma lista de diferenças, da sua lista de páginas vigiadas ou diretamente na página no Flow. Lembre-se que este agradecimento é armazenado num registo público (Special:Log/thanks). 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
As notificações acerca da sua página de discussão, se esta usa as [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|conversas estruturadas]], estão na secção &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; acima.

==== Notificações a partir de uma página de conversas estruturadas ====
{{Notification type|notice}} e {{Notification type|alert}} Para detalhes precisos, consultar [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]].
Recebidos quando uma página vigiada que usa as [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|conversas estruturadas]] tem mudanças (novo tópico, resposta, alteração do nome do tópico…).

: Informação primária: título da mensagem e autor.
: Informação secundária: resumo da mudança.
: Detalhes:
:* para um tópico novo: o utilizador que criou o tópico e a página de destino.
:* para uma resposta nova: o último utilizador que respondeu ao tópico e a página de destino.
:* para uma mudança no tópico: o utilizador que efetuou a mudança e uma hiperligação para a respetiva lista de diferenças.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebidas quando tiver feito 1, 10 e 100 traduções através da ferramenta [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Tradutor de Conteúdo]].

: Informação primária: mensagem de parabéns.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebidas quando uma página criada por si é revista (ou “patrulhada”) por alguém usando a [[Page Curation|Curadoria de Páginas]].

: Informação primária: a página que foi revista e quem a reviu.

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: notifica os programadores de aplicações OAuth quando o estado de revisão da aplicação é alterado.
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: notifica os administradores OAuth acerca de aplicações novas que aguardam revisão.

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recebidos quando alguém tentou e não conseguiu entrar na wiki utilizando a sua conta. Vários alertas são agrupados num só para tentativas a partir de um dispositivo ou IP novo mas, para um dispositivo ou IP conhecido, só recebe um alerta por cada 5 tentativas. Para mais informações, consulte [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|detalhes sobre esta funcionalidade]].

=== Ligação ao repositório de dados ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recebidas quando a sua página é ligada ao repositório de dados associado (nas wikis da WMF, este é o [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).

: Informação primária: o nome da página ligada.
: Detalhes: hiperligação para o elemento de dados e, se possível, para uma página de ajuda local.

== Notificações futuras ==
''Nota: estas notificações ainda não estão disponíveis mas as suas descrições foram escritas usando o tempo presente para evitar trabalho extra para os tradutores. Elas serão movidas para a secção apropriada quando forem disponibilizadas.''

== Notas de Rodapé ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>98ph26tvrtoxf9h1szw3yfshmlial9g</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/pl</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597808</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403273</id>
      <parentid>5365366</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16359" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Niektóre z powiadomień są domyślnie wyłączone. Jeżeli chcesz włączyć któreś z tych powiadomień (lub je wyłączyć), możesz to zrobić w swoich preferencjach, tak jak opisano poniżej.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Powiadomienia domyślne ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nowy komunikat]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Nowa odpowiedź]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== Powitanie ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
== Kamienie milowe ==
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

== Powiadomienia z rozszerzeń opcjonalnych ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Podziękowanie za edycję na stronie]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: Szczegóły:
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>81xuy6ur0yejjzfugw5lhg07iqvzzij</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/mr</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597809</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403272</id>
      <parentid>5365362</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17347" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
या उत्पादनाच्या प्रथम विमोचनाकरीता, यापैकी काही अधिसूचना, सध्याच्या व नविन अश्या  दोन्ही सदस्यांसाठी डिफॉल्टने अक्षम ठेवल्या जातील.जर आपणास यापैकी कोणत्याही अधिसूचना सक्षम करावयाच्या असतील(किंवा अक्षम करावयाच्या असतील) तर,आपण ते आपल्या पसंतीक्रमाद्वारे, खाली वर्णन केल्यानूसार करू शकता.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>rx18ug9hx2dx0v2y8iqaapz8mghn1zy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/nl</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597810</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403274</id>
      <parentid>5365367</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16811" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Voor de eerste uitgave van dit product worden sommige notificaties standaard uitgezet voor huidige en nieuwe gebruikers. Als je je notificatievoorkeuren wilt wijzigen, kun je dit doen in je voorkeuren zoals hieronder staat beschreven.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>0zndz7j3tzhiafvwnlerhtk0h02c4j7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/mt</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>597811</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403271</id>
      <parentid>5365365</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16858" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Uħud minn dawn in-notifiki huma mitfija awtomatikament jew mhumiex disponibbli fuq il-wiki tiegħek. Jekk tixtieq tippermetti xi waħda minn dawn in-notifiki (jew tiddiżattivahom), tista 'tagħmel dan [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|fil-preferenzi tiegħek]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>6ongtar4sr3gk5hc8s0rdhpk0yy5o9s</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403304</id>
      <parentid>5403271</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:17:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16818" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All types of notifications below can be seen on Wikimedia wikis. You can see them on the wiki where you are, on another wiki via [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|cross-wiki notifications]], or on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Special:Notifications page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Uħud minn dawn in-notifiki huma mitfija awtomatikament jew mhumiex disponibbli fuq il-wiki tiegħek. Jekk tixtieq tippermetti xi waħda minn dawn in-notifiki (jew tiddiżattivahom), tista 'tagħmel dan [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|fil-preferenzi tiegħek]].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Default notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New reply&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Multiple new messages grouped&lt;/span&gt;]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New message on a page in a right-to-left language&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Welcome ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1r46cjawu4su1oztg44w5d80srjpvu4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/32/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>598294</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402213</id>
      <parentid>2187160</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:55:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="297" xml:space="preserve">Para arreglar todos estos enlaces, podemos usar el script $1 de Pywikibot. En esta demostración usaremos el parámetro '-simulate' para evitar escribir la wiki, tal y como indican las reglas estrictas sobre las [[:es:Wikipedia:Política de bots|edición automática]] de la Wikipedia en español.</text>
      <sha1>a97jrs133od0sx67x91f32d0x5zrhcr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:MediaWiki feature list/es</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>599192</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403245</id>
      <parentid>5370115</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:08:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22657" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
{{Outdated}}
Esta página contiene una lista de características que están constituidas en el software MediaWiki.
Si tuvieras que usar MediaWiki para su propia wiki, depende de qué tipo de sitio web desea correr con el.
El software de Wikipedia tiene muchas características útiles que surgieron de las necesidades de los usuarios y las ideas de los desarrolladores - pero hay características que también cuentan con una mala complejidad.
 
Antes de decidirse a usar '''MediaWiki''', por favor, eche un vistazo a otros motores wiki (véase [http://wiki.c2.com/?WikiEngines esta lista] o [http://www.wikimatrix.org/ esta comparación]) y ver si uno de ellos podría satisfacer mejor sus necesidades.

Las peticiones de nuevas características tendrán que ser enviadas a [[Phabricator]].

== ¿Quiero MediaWiki? ==
El software y las extensiones de MediaWiki tienen características, fortalezas y debilidades; ventajas y desventajas, a pesar de que nadie &lt;nowiki&gt;'&lt;/nowiki&gt; tiene fines previstos, el software y extensiones MediaWiki pueden ser utilizados con fines únicos, inteligentes e inventivos no previstos por los programadores originales u otros instaladores.
He aquí una breve lista de las características y beneficios de MediaWiki.
Si se presenta una lista equivalente de sus propios objetivos y recursos, se puede comparar esta lista a su lista &lt;nowiki&gt;'&lt;/nowiki&gt;, o falta de coincidencia.
¿Necesita más ayuda para decidir?
Hay grupos de discusión abierta en la web y páginas de discusión &quot;para hablar&quot; detrás de cada página principal MediaWiki donde se puede buscar la conexión con otras personas &lt;nowiki&gt;'&lt;/nowiki&gt;y obtener experiencias.

{{note|1=muestra de la lista de características de las páginas 13-14, en el libro &quot;Los administradores de MediaWiki&quot; Guía Tutorial:}}

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| '''Características de MediaWiki'''
| '''Beneficios de MediaWiki'''
| '''Sus objetivos'''
| '''Recursos'''

|-
| Navegación fácil:
| Fácil de contribuir sin tener conocimientos previos ...
|...
|...

|-
| Edición, formación y referenciación:
| Gestionar y encontrar contenido ...
|...
|...

|-
| Ver y sentir el cambio:
| Personalizable a sus preferencias ...
|...
|...

|-
| Carga de archivos:
| La gestión y el intercambio de contenidos ...
|...
|...

|-
| Soporte multilingüistico:
| Soporte de UTF-8 permite una pieza de software que ha sido para todos los idiomas ...
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| Gestión de usuarios:
| Acceso y control de seguridad ...
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| Sindicación:
| Compartir la información del sitio ...
|&amp;nbsp;
|&amp;nbsp;

|-
| ... y más ...
|...
|...
|...

|}

Por favor, mejorar y ampliar la tabla anterior&lt;nowiki&gt;'&lt;/nowiki&gt; características y beneficios para ayudar a los visitantes a conocer mejor lo que están metiendo.
¡Gracias!

Un problema recurrente es que los administradores del sistema deciden crear un wiki, sin tener en cuenta muchas cuestiones.
Después de llenar la tabla anterior, hágase las siguientes preguntas, para ver si un wiki es el software adecuado para usted:

# ''¿Cuál es la finalidad de mi sitio?''
#: Los wikis son ideales para la edición colaborativa y la creación de contenidos; que no son muy adecuados para otros fines, como los blogs. Considerar si una [[w:wiki|wiki]] es una opción adecuada para sus objetivos.
# ''¿A cuántos usuarios estará expuesto el wiki?''
#: Con unas pocas excepciones, la instalación de software wiki es necesaria cuando hay un grupo muy pequeño de personas interesadas en la edición del wiki. Cuanto mayor sea el número de usuarios, mayor será la probabilidad de un wiki tiene más sentido para usted.
# ''¿Cuántos editores activos es lo que espero para editar mi wiki?''
#: Las wikis, debido a su naturaleza abierta, requiere un poco de mantenimiento. Cuanto más grande sea la base redactor, los más manos disponibles para llevar a cabo las tareas de mantenimiento.
# ''¿Qué puedo hacer con MediaWiki?''
#: MediaWiki es un motor wiki extremadamente versátil; que es relativamente fácil de instalar, pero lo más importante, permite el uso y la creación de [[Manual:Extensions/es|extensiones]]. Estos permiten la instalación de MediaWiki para ser extremadamente adaptable con algunos conocimientos de PHP. Con la motivación adecuada, MediaWiki puede ser &quot;abusado&quot; para hacer casi cualquier cosa.
# ''¿MediaWiki es adecuado para mí?''
#: MediaWiki tiene sus limitaciones. Una limitación más importante es que MediaWiki no está destinado a ser una [[w:access control list|lista de control de acceso]]. MediaWiki ''raison d'etre'' es proporcionar contenido abierto; mientras que las versiones recientes tienen un modelo de seguridad mucho más fuerte, aún existen brechas significativas en el acceso de seguridad de base individual.

{{Note|1=''Véase {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} y [[Security issues with authorization extensions|Las extensiones con prórroga de autorización]].''}}


== ¿Cómo debo configurar MediaWiki? ==

Si usted ha decidido que MediaWiki es de hecho una solución apropiada, todavía hay más cosas a considerar.

Estas preguntas se espera ayude a decidir cómo configurar el wiki de una manera que le permitia minimizar los problemas a largo plazo:

# ''¿Quién va a leer mi wiki?''
#: A pesar de todos los problemas con restricciones de página basados en el usuario, MediaWiki puede ser configurado para restringir o permitir el acceso a todo el mundo. Por lo tanto, preguntarse si quieres que todos en el Internet para ver el contenido de la wiki, o si desea restringir ese privilegio a aquellos usuarios que han creado cuentas en su wiki.
# ''¿Quién va a editar mi wiki?''
#: Tal vez la pregunta más común es si desea permitir a todos a editar el wiki, similar al modelo de [[w:Wikipedia|Wikipedia]].  MediaWiki permite restricciones de escritura de grano fino; puede permitir a los usuarios no registrados para editar las páginas de discusión, por ejemplo, pero sólo permitirá a los usuarios con cuentas de más de una cierta cantidad de tiempo para editar sus páginas de contenido. Se puede restringir la edición a los administradores, o incluso a un grupo de usuario personalizado que se crea y delega.
# ''¿Quién debe crear una cuenta en mi wiki?''
#: En función de algunas de las respuestas a las preguntas anteriores, es posible que desee decidir restringir quién puede crear cuentas en un wiki. Puede permitir a cualquiera crear cuentas; o incluso se puede designar que el privilegio de los administradores, que sería entonces responsable de la creación de cuentas de nuevos usuarios a través de algún proceso de su elección.
# ''¿Qué poderes es lo que quiero para cada grupo de usuarios?''
#: Una de las cuestiones más importantes que hay que responder es ésta. La concesión o la eliminación de privilegios a un grupo puede ser ''extremadamente'' una gran polémica en wiki, así que tener una buena idea de lo que cada usuario debe ser capaz de hacer es crítica. ¿Quieres qué usuarios no registrados puedan crear páginas? ¿Desea que los usuarios registrados puedan crear páginas? ¿Quieres administradores del wiki para poder bloquear y borrar páginas, o quiere extender más privilegios a ellos? ¿Quién es responsable de otorgar más privilegios? ¿Quién es responsable de eliminar más privilegios? ¿Quién quiere tener más poderes de grano fino, como el [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Oversight policy|supresor]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/CheckUser policy|checkuser]] y [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Reverting#Rollback|reversor]]?
#:Véase [[Manual:User rights|Permisos de usuario]] y [[Help:User rights management|Administración de permisos de usuario]] para más ideas e información.
# ''¿Qué extensiones debo instalar?''
#: Con unas pocas excepciones, [[Manual:Extensions/es|extensiones]] son fáciles de añadir, ya sea durante la instalación del wiki, o después de un par de años de la wiki que se ejecuta.
# ''¿Necesito manejar datos estructurados?''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#: For [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Managing data in MediaWiki|managing structured data within MediaWiki]], several dedicated extensions exist.
&lt;/div&gt;

Con esas respuestas, usted debe ser capaz de configurar los aspectos más críticos de su wiki.
Se puede proceder a iniciar el proceso de instalación en su [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:OS specific help|sistema operativo]].

== Mirar y sentir ==

* '''Los vínculos con los accesos directos''', la disposición depende de la skin.
*'''{{ll|Manual:Skins|nsp=0}}''' - Diferentes formas de presentar el sitio
* '''[[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Help:User style|Estilo de usuarios]]''': Los usuarios pueden adaptar el aspecto y la sensación del sitio a través de CSS personalizado en sus páginas de usuario.
* '''&quot;Talón&quot; de umbral''': Los usuarios pueden ver los enlaces a los artículos por debajo de un cierto tamaño dictado en un color diferente.
* '''Versiones imprimibles''' se pueden generar a partir de los artículos.
* '''Numerar automáticamente los encabezados''' en un artículo (opcional).
* '''Intra-página Anclas''' (genera automáticamente las partidas, y también con &lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;div id=&quot;tagname&quot;&gt;...&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;).
* {{anchor|TOC}}'''Generar automáticamente una tabla de contenidos''' para artículos largos (opcional).
* Genere automáticamente '''números ISBN''' en enlaces a una lista editable de libreros.
* '''XHTML'''- o '''HTML5''' es compatible (o cerca de ella), la integración ordenada.

== Multimedia y extensiones ==

* '''Función de carga de archivos''' permite cargar gráficos o archivos de sonido, consulte [[Special:Upload]] para ver en funcionamiento, y [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Uploading files|Uploading files]] para la descripción. Archivos cargados se enumeran en [[Special:Recentchanges|cambios recientes]] y ellos también están registrados en [[Special:Log/upload]].
* '''Formulas matemáticas utilizando la sintaxis LaTeX''' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Extension:Math}} and {{ll|Manual:Mathoid}}&lt;/span&gt;
* '''Adaptación automática''' de las imágenes usando ImageMagick o libgd, sintaxis sencilla para los pies de fotos y alineación de la imagen
* '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiHiero|WikiHiero]]''' de los jeroglíficos egipcios (necesidades de separar los componentes instalados)
*'''{{ll|Extension:Graph|nsp=0}}''' - para gráficos de tiempo (necesidades de separar los componentes instalados)

== Hacer un seguimiento de las modificaciones ==

* '''Watchlist''' Cada página tiene un enlace &quot;Ver este artículo para mí&quot;. Utilice [[Special:Watchlist]] para controlar cambios en los artículos que se declaran interesantes; artículos vistos también aparecen en negrita en los [[Special:Recentchanges|Cambios recientes]].
* '''Contribuciones del usuario''' en la barra lateral de cada lista de todos los artículos página de usuario que el usuario ha trabajado, de acuerdo con la base de datos.
* '''Cambios recientes extendidos''' con el colapso dinámico de ediciones en el mismo artículo y enlaces rápidos a la edición diff, mostrar el historial del artículo, mostrar la página de usuario, mostrar la página de discusión de usuario, o bloquear el usuario (por los administradores)
* '''&quot;Cambios Relacionados&quot;:''' Ver una versión filtrada de los cambios recientes en las páginas enlazadas desde la página actual.
*'''Side-by-side diffs''' - los diffs se muestran lado a lado, y se destacan las modificaciones en porciones de líneas, lo que es mucho más fácil ver qué se modificó. Además, un diff se muestra durante un conflicto de edición para que pueda ver exactamente lo que necesita para reintegrar.
*'''Nombres reales''' - Los usuarios pueden (opcionalmente) especificar un &quot;nombre real&quot; que quieren utilizar para los créditos de autor.
* '''Créditos en páginas'''. Los administradores pueden activar un párrafo en la página de dar crédito a los editores que han trabajado en una página.

== Estructuras y sintaxis ==

* Por defecto, solo [[Special:MyLanguage/HTML restriction|restricción]] de uso de [[w:HTML|HTML]] se mantiene. Hay una opción para permitir el uso completo de HTML.
* '''Editando la sintaxis basado en UseMod''', con soporte para mezclar wiki-sintaxis y HTML. Sólo los enlaces libres son compatibles con la vinculación, [[w:CamelCase|CamelCase]] no (decisión de diseño deliberada).
* '''Espacios de nombre''' permite la separación de contenido (para abordar el espacio de nombres, utilice la sintaxis &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Namespace:Page title]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;).
** Páginas de Discusión (Talk:) están separadas de las páginas de artículos, páginas de proyecto &quot;meta&quot; se pueden separar de las páginas de contenido, páginas de imágenes, se utilizan para descripciones de las imágenes.
**[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:System message|MediaWiki: namespace]] contiene todos los textos de la interfaz de usuario, de modo que puedan ser editados como cualquier otra página wiki
**Plantilla: Espacio de nombres para mensajes personalizados. Las plantillas pueden contener variables de cadena que se sustituyen con ciertos valores pasados a la plantilla de una página.
* '''[[w:Transclusion|Transclusion]]''' de páginas arbitrarias en cualquier espacio de nombres: &lt;nowiki&gt;{{:Page Name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;. Véase [[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Template|Plantillas]]
* '''Word-extension linking''': Si se incluye un enlace de la forma &lt;nowiki&gt;[[wars]] &lt;/nowiki&gt;, o &lt;nowiki&gt;[[war]]time&lt;/nowiki&gt;, el sistema mostrará automáticamente como si hubiese tecleado &lt;nowiki&gt;[[war|wars]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; o &lt;nowiki&gt;[[war|wartime]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;, respectivamente, lo que ahorra algo de tecleo.
* '''Parenthetical hiding''' (&quot;[[pipe tricks]]&quot;) Si se incluye un enlace de la forma &lt;nowiki&gt;[[kernel (mathematics)|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;, la parte entre paréntesis se ocultará en el enlace: [[kernel (mathematics)|kernel]]. Esto es útil para eliminar la ambigüedad diferentes significados de una palabra sin hacer que une demasiado difícil o desordenados en el texto de los artículos. Esto también funciona con espacios de nombres que afloran cuando se desea un enlace de aspecto más limpio: &lt;nowiki&gt;[[Wikipedia:Copyrights|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; se convierte [[Wikipedia:Copyrights|Copyrights]]
*'''Link to individual sections''' de un artículo, ej: [[{{FULLPAGENAME}}#Editing]] (Estos enlaces pueden ser válidos si se retitulado secciones o eliminados.)
* El apoyo a '''subpáginas''' (enlace a &quot;Foo/Bar&quot; de &quot;Foo&quot; con solo teclear &quot;/Bar&quot;, &quot;Foo/Bar&quot; contiene un vínculo de retroceso a &quot;Foo&quot;), estos pueden ser activados o desactivados por espacio de nombres (por ejemplo, Wikipedia actualmente soporta subpáginas en las páginas de discusión, para realizar el archivado fácil, y en las páginas de usuario, para dar a los usuarios un espacio para páginas personales)
*[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic words|Special keywords]] para insertar '''dato dinámico''' tales como el nombre de la página actual, la fecha actual, el número de artículos, etc.
* Múltiples '''Categorías''' se pueden asignar a cualquier página, incluidas las categorías de ellos mismos, creando una jerarquía de categorías. Categoría páginas automáticamente una lista de todas las páginas que se les asignen, incluidas las subcategorías. Las categorías permiten la clasificación y la navegación jerárquica del contenido.

== Edición ==
*'''[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Section|La sección que se edita]]''' - Los usuarios pueden activar una opción que les permite editar las distintas secciones de un artículo (separados por titulares) en lugar de cargar todo el artículo.
*'''Barra de herramientas de edición''' (JavaScript-based) para formato del texto en '''negrita''', ''cursiva'', etc. (funciona plenamente en Mozilla e IE, otros navegadores utilizan para mostrar la sintaxis, pero no pueden dar formato al texto dentro del área de texto, ya que su aplicación no es compatible con JavaScript). Si no se utiliza JavaScript, la barra de herramientas no será mostrada.
* '''Resumen de edición''' que será mostrado en &quot;Cambios recientes&quot;. Serán prerellenada la sección de título cuando la sección de edición sea editada.
* '''Edición doble click''': Los usuarios pueden activar una opción que les permite editar los artículos haciendo doble clic en ellos.
* '''Edición previa''' (Puede ser mostrado antes o después de la caja de edición)
* Manejar '''conflictos de edición''' (página que está siendo salvado por un usuario sin dejar de ser editado por otro, a continuación, volver a guardar). MediaWiki se fusionará los cambios de forma automática si es posible y de lo contrario requieren que el usuario realizar una combinación de manual.
* Marcar ediciones como ''menores'''; los usuarios pueden decidir ocultar dichas modificaciones de la lista de cambios recientes. Sólo los usuarios registrados pueden marcar sus ediciones como menores.

== Spam y Vandalismo ==
*{{ll|Manual:Combating spam}}: Prevenir spam de enlaces, y otras formas de edición abusiva.
**[[meta:Spam blacklist]]: Lista de los nombres de dominio de spammers que usuarios no se les permite establecer el vínculo.
* [[Manual:Combating vandalism]]: Consejos útiles y enlaces a algunas extensiones para hacer frente a actos de vandalismo

== Discusiones ==

* '''Páginas de discusión''': Cada usuario (incluyendo cada usuario anónimo), y cada artículo tiene una página asociada donde los mensajes se pueden dejar. Estos son espacios de nombres separados (ver arriba), &quot;Discusión:&quot; y &quot;Usuario discusión:&quot;.
* '''Notificación de mensaje''' (usuario obtiene un aviso de &quot;Tienes nuevos mensajes&quot; si alguien más ha editado su página de discusión del usuario); esto también funciona para los usuarios anónimos, pero no para los usuarios que comparten IP.
* '''Firma automática''': Sólo tienes que escribir tres tildes (~) cuando se edita, y en el ahorro de la página, que será reemplazado con su nombre de usuario y un enlace a su página de usuario. Si utiliza cuatro tildes, se añadirá la fecha actual también. Principalmente utilizado para páginas de discusión.
* Soporte para '''enviar un correo electrónico a los usuarios''' a través de la wiki (dirección de correo electrónico no se muestra al usuario)

== Soporte multilingüistico ==

* Traducir a '''cualquier idioma''' (véase [[:en:Wikipedia:Multilingual coordination]] para detalles)
*'''[[w:Help:Interlanguage links|Interwikis]]''': método práctico para la vinculación de artículos entre los wikis en diferentes idiomas (cada idioma requiere su propia base de datos)
* Soporte '''UTF-8'''

== Backend ==

* '''Base de datos soportadas''' (MySQL/MariaDB, PostgreSQL, y SQlite son soportadas)
* '''El almacenamiento en caché de análisis sintáctico''': páginas representadas se almacenan en caché para reducir el procesamiento redundante
* '''Resultados cache''': los resultados completos de una página se puede guardar opcionalmente como archivos HTML estáticos para servir a otros clientes; soporte para servidores proxy Squid
* '''Cookies basadas'' en cuenta e inicio de sesión en el sistema, pero los usuarios anónimos también pueden editar páginas
* '''Todas las revisiones''' de un artículo se almacenan (opcionalmente comprimida)
*'''[[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Syndication feeds|RSS]]''' la sindicación está disponible para muchas páginas especiales, tales como [[Special:Newpages]] y [[Special:Recentchanges]]
*'''[[m:Special:MyLanguage/RDF metadata|Metadata RDF]]'''


== Permisos ==

* '''Diferentes derechos''' para los usuarios anónimos, firmado en usuarios, los administradores, los burócratas y los desarrolladores.
* '''Usuarios registrados''' pueden:
**trasladar y renombrar páginas
**carga archivos
**tener y usar una lista
**marcar ediciones como ''menores'' (ej. corección menor)
* '''Administradores/Operadores del sistema''' pueden:
**proteger páginas para su edición
**borrar y restaurar páginas
**editar páginas protegidas
**bloquear usuarios y direcciones IP
**bloquear usuarios por nombre de usuario, si esta opción está habilitada
* '''Burócratas''' pueden:
**nombrar administradores
**renombrar usuarios
**nombrar bots
* '''Desarrolladores''' pueden:
**bloquear la base de datos
**ejecutar varias tareas de mantenimiento
* '''Otros esquemas de permisos''' (por ejemplo, solamente firmados en los usuarios pueden editar páginas) [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|puede ser configurado]].

== Búsqueda y Consultas ==

* '''Búsqueda completa de texto'''
* '''Botón &quot;Go&quot;'''Permite la visualización directa del contenido de un artículo determinado (cy acercar si se intenta sin éxito)
* '''&quot;Qué enlaza aquí&quot;:''' Ver páginas que enlazan en la página actual (backlinks)
* '''Páginas especiales de informes:'''
**Nuevas páginas: Lista de nuevas páginas creadas
**Páginas antiguas: Artículos ordenados por orden ascendente de tiempo
**Lista de imágenes
**Lista de usuarios
**Estadisticas del sitio
**Artículos huérfanos (artículos que no tienen enlaces que apuntan a ellos)
**imágenes huérfanas
**Artículos populares (artículos por número de visitas, sólo funciona si están habilitados los contadores)
**Artículos más buscados (artículos inexistentes ordenados según número de enlaces que apuntan a ellos)
**Artículos cortos
**Artículos largos
**Lista de todas las páginas por título
* '''Consulta a la [[Special:MyLanguage/API:Query|API]]''' - permite el acceso a la escritura de varios metadatos

== Miscelánea ==

* '''Artículo aleatorio''' Función aleatoria
* Los usuarios pueden configurar la '''zona horaria''', que se utiliza en todas las marcas de tiempo de informe
* Los atributos de muchas páginas del informe ('''número de resultados''', etc.) se puede ajustar en las preferencias de los usuarios

== Conjunto vacío de páginas de ayuda ==
Tenga en cuenta que los archivos de la instalación contienen muchos enlaces que apuntan a los documentos que no están incluidos en la descarga.
Lo más importante es el conjunto vacío de archivos de ayuda, que será necesario por cualquier nuevo usuario del sitio.
Para remediar estos enlaces rotos, debe ya sea (a)[[Special:MyLanguage/Project:PD_help/Copying|exportación desde este sitio]] o copiar y modificar las páginas de ayuda a la instalación o (b) modificar los parámetros de la instalación para cambiar manualmente los objetivos de la ayuda de enlace a este sitio, cualquiera de los cuales pueden requerir una inversión de tiempo considerable.

[[Category:MediaWiki Introduction{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>e144xfzp0qfxzvwcol6ndg520zodzlu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:MediaWiki feature list/124/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>599326</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402371</id>
      <parentid>2190568</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:49:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="147" xml:space="preserve">**[[$1|MediaWiki: namespace]] contiene todos los textos de la interfaz de usuario, de modo que puedan ser editados como cualquier otra página wiki</text>
      <sha1>tl41jrn3ppf4qkjo1mn1dsnjao3ldh3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:MediaWiki feature list/129/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>599331</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403244</id>
      <parentid>2190578</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:08:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="303" xml:space="preserve">* '''Word-extension linking''': Si se incluye un enlace de la forma &lt;nowiki&gt;[[wars]] &lt;/nowiki&gt;, o &lt;nowiki&gt;[[war]]time&lt;/nowiki&gt;, el sistema mostrará automáticamente como si hubiese tecleado &lt;nowiki&gt;[[war|wars]]&lt;/nowiki&gt; o &lt;nowiki&gt;[[war|wartime]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;, respectivamente, lo que ahorra algo de tecleo.</text>
      <sha1>myw8ryz47f0tywoyfqjx7flkv10hf5a</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/pt</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>601016</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401808</id>
      <parentid>5184888</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/pt-br</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>601459</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401809</id>
      <parentid>5184890</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Project:Help/3/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>607400</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403354</id>
      <parentid>4077418</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:53:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="39" xml:space="preserve">Falls du über die Namen verwirrt bist.</text>
      <sha1>h2a7gcnp7uqstaaq44f4odux9wrtl25</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/sq</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>607701</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403279</id>
      <parentid>5365374</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:13:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16530" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
Të gjitha llojet e njoftimeve të mëposhtme mund të shihen në wikit e Wikimedias. Ju mund të shihni ato në wikin në të cilën jeni, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|njoftime ndër-wiki]] nga një wikit tjetër në faqen [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|Speciale:Notifications]].

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Disa nga këto njoftime janë të ndaluara si parapëlqim ose nuk janë të aktivizuara në wikin tuaj. Nëse do të dëshironit të aktivizoni ndonjë nga këto njoftime (ose ti deaktivizoni), ju mund ta bëni në parapëlqimet tuaja, siç përshkruhet në hapat e mëposhtme.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Njoftimet e parazgjedhur ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Mesazh i ri]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Përgjigjet e reja]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Më shumë mesazhe të reja të grupuara]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Mesazh i ri në një faqe në gjuhët nga e djathta-në-të-majtë]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Failed mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention to other user was not sent.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you tried to mention, and the reason why mention was not sent.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you tried to mention on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Successful mentions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your mention has been sent to other user.
&lt;/div&gt;

:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: who you mentioned.&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the page you mentioned the user on.&lt;/span&gt;
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== Mirësevini ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have just created your account.
:Primary information: Welcome! 
:Details: link to a welcome page as defined on the wiki configuration ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notifications from optional extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thank for an edit on a page&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Notifications from a page using Structured discussions ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future notifications ==
&lt;/div&gt;
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note: these notifications are not yet available but their descriptions are written in the present tense to avoid extra work for translators.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will be moved to the appropriate section when they become available.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>6beqd2uw9epo1iaqvwqam0mrna9peye</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Notifications/Types/ast</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>608109</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403251</id>
      <parentid>5365338</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:12:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15668" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
Tolos tipos de notificación de más abaxo pueden vese nes de wikis Wikimedia. Puedes veles na wiki na que teas, dende les [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|notificaciones ente wikis]] d'otra wiki o na [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|páxina Especial:Notificaciones]].

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Dalgunes d'estes notificaciones van tar inactives de mou predetermináu o nun tarán disponibles na wiki. Si desees activar dalguna d'estes notificaciones (o desactivales), puedes faelo nes preferencies como s'indica más abaxo.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Notificaciones predeterminaes ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Mensaxe nuevu]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Respuesta nueva]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Múltiples mensaxes nuevos agrupaos]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Mensaxe nuevu d'una páxina con escritura de drecha a izquierda]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

=== Menciones fallíes ===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recibíu cuando nun s'unvió la to mención d'otru usuariu.

:Información primaria: a quién tentasti mentar, ya'l motivu de que nun s'unviara la mención.
:Detalles: enllaz a la páxina na que tentasti la mención.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

=== Menciones correutes ===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recibíu cuando s'unvió la mención al otru usuariu.

:Información primaria: a quién mentasti.
:Detalles: enllaz a la páxina na que mentasti al usuariu.
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== Bienveníu ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recíbese cuando vienes de crear la cuenta.
:Información primaria: ¡Bienveníu(a)! 
:Detalles: enllaz a una páxina de bienvenida definida na configuración de la wiki ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]). 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

== Notificaciones d'estensiones opcionales ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Agradecimientu por una edición nuna páxina]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== Notificaciones d'una páxina qu'usa Flow ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

== Notificaciones futures ==
''Nota: estes notificaciones inda nun tán disponibles pero les descripciones escríbense'n tiempu presente pa evitar más trabayu a los traductores. Treslladaránse a la sección afayadiza cuando tean disponibles.''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>jdlrtte8eh5e6585lylglknc23vqfyi</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403288</id>
      <parentid>5403251</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:13:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15682" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Notifications Navigation}}
Tolos tipos de notificación de más abaxo pueden vese nes de wikis Wikimedia. Puedes veles na wiki na que teas, dende les [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Cross-wiki|notificaciones ente wikis]] d'otra wiki o na [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications/Special:Notifications|páxina Especial:Notificaciones]].

Dalgunes d'estes notificaciones van tar inactives de mou predetermináu o nun tarán disponibles na wiki. Si desees activar dalguna d'estes notificaciones (o desactivales), puedes faelo nes [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#preferences|preferencies]] como s'indica más abaxo.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;code&gt;Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration&lt;/code&gt; special page will let you know which notifications are available on your wiki and how they are configured.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Notificaciones predeterminaes ==

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}} ===

[[File:Notifications - new message - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Mensaxe nuevu]]
[[File:Notifications - message replied - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Respuesta nueva]]
[[File:Notifications - multiple new messages - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Múltiples mensaxes nuevos agrupaos]]
[[File:Notifications - New message on a page RTL - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Mensaxe nuevu d'una páxina con escritura de drecha a izquierda]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a message is left on your user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Primary information: Message title.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Secondary information:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a new message: who left the message, and on which page. Links directly to the message.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of a reply: who replied to the message, and on which page. Links directly to the section title, or, with Flow, to the message itself.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*in case of multiple new messages or multiples replies, messages may be grouped (&quot;six new messages on [that page]&quot;).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Details: link to the user page of the last user who left you a message for that group.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This notification replaces the orange bar that used to appear, but you can setup your preferences to have the orange bar.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}
{{anchor|echo-category-title-article-linked}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-article-linked}} ===
[[File:Notifications - Page linked - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a new link is made to a page you created.
:Primary information: The page that you created, and where it was linked from. Links to the page that has the new link.
:Details: link to &quot;What links here&quot; page for the targeted page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can mute these notifications for individual pages, either:
&lt;/div&gt;

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;from [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-echo|your preferences]] ([[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Notifications#mute|see how to]])&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;via a given notification, by clicking on the three dots.&lt;/span&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-reverted}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Edit reverted - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your edits are undone or rolled back.
:Primary information: Who reverted you, and where. Links to the diff.
:Details: link to the user who reverted you.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-mention}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Mention on a page - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone mentions you on a talk page.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and about what. Linked to the page, or to the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow|Flow]] you are mentioned in.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you and the diff where you are mentioned.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To mention another editor and trigger this notification for them, you need to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Link to their username
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can link it directly like in &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** you can use mention templates if they exist on your wiki (many use the {{tl|ping}} or {{tl|reply to}} templates).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Sign your comment with &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;~&amp;#126;~~&lt;/code&gt;. Notifications will not be sent if your signature is embedded in a template, or has no link to your user page or user talk page.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not alter any text outside of your own comment.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Do not exceed the limit on the number of mentions (50 on Wikimedia's wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Notifications are only sent to logged-in users, i.e. mentioning anonymous users (IPs) is not possible.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You cannot mention yourself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Specific and additional technical details are at {{ll|Manual:Echo}}.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Mentions in edit summary ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|EditSummary}}
[[File:Notifications - ping from summary - March 2018.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone links to your user page in an edit summary.
:Primary information: Who mentioned you, where, and the edit summary. Linked to the change in question.
:Details: link to the user who mentioned you.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To mention a user, just link to their user page, using the normal wikitext syntax: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All the usual link styles work, like {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;User:Username{{!}}$1&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|some text}} or &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[User:Username|]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; will work but it will display &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;User:Username&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; with a link to the user page on the History page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No more than 5 users can be mentioned in an edit summary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mention templates don't work in edit summaries.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To leave a link in the summary without notifying a user, prefix user name with &lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;, like this: &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[:User:Username]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

=== Menciones fallíes ===

[[File:Notifications - Failed Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recibíu cuando nun s'unvió la to mención d'otru usuariu.

:Información primaria: a quién tentasti mentar, ya'l motivu de que nun s'unviara la mención.
:Detalles: enllaz a la páxina na que tentasti la mención.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are sent when:
* trying to mention anonymous user or user that does not exist, or
* exceeding the limit of mentioned users in a single edit (50 on WMF wikis).
&lt;/div&gt;
{{clear}}

=== Menciones correutes ===

[[File:Notifications - Successful Mention - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
Recibíu cuando s'unvió la mención al otru usuariu.

:Información primaria: a quién mentasti.
:Detalles: enllaz a la páxina na que mentasti al usuariu.
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-user-rights}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Changed rights - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when your user rights change.
:Primary information: what has been changed, and by who. Links to [[Special:UserGroupRights]] page.
:Details: link to the user who changed your rights.
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

=== Bienveníu ===
[[File:Notifications - Welcome - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
Recíbese cuando vienes de crear la cuenta.
:Información primaria: ¡Bienveníu(a)! 
:Detalles: enllaz a una páxina de bienvenida definida na configuración de la wiki ([[MediaWiki:Notification-welcome-link]]). 
{{clear}}

=== {{int|echo-category-title-emailuser}} ===

[[File:Notifications - Email received - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when someone sent you an email through the wiki.
:Primary information: Who sent you an email. No link given for this information.
:Details: link to the user who sent you this email.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
People can send you emails only if you have allowed this on your preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|Milestone}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Milestone ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Notifications - First milestone - August 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5]]
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when you reach certain edit count milestones. (1st, 10th, 100th, 1,000th, 10,000th, 100,000th, 1,000,000th and 10,000,000th edits)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:AllMessages?prefix=notification-header-thank-you-&amp;filter=all&amp;lang=en&amp;limit=5000&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which milestone you've reached, and which edit triggered the notification.&lt;/span&gt;

== Notificaciones d'estensiones opcionales ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These notifications are not all available by default. They can be triggered by an extension only available on certain wikis, or by an extension available as Beta feature on certain Wikimedia wikis.
&lt;/div&gt; 

=== {{int|echo-category-title-edit-thank}} ===
* '''{{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details about &quot;Thanks&quot; notifications&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
[[File:Notifications - Thanked edit - January 2016.png|thumb|upright=1.5|Agradecimientu por una edición nuna páxina]]
{{Notification type|notice}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when {{ll|Help:Notifications/Thanks|someone thanks you for your edit}}.
:Primary information: Who thanked you, where, and about what. Linked to the diff or to the message on Flow that you are thanked for.
:Details: link to the user who thanked you, and if it was on a Structured discussion board to the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Available by default on Wikimedia wikis, it is possible to opt-out into Preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can thank someone from any History page, from a diff comparison, in your watchlist, or directly on the page in Flow. Remember this thank is stored in a public log (Special:Log/thanks).
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{clear}}

{{anchor|Flow}}{{anchor|SD}}

=== {{int|Structureddiscussions}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Notifications about your talk page if it is using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] are on the section &quot;[[#{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}|{{int|echo-category-title-edit-user-talk}}]]&quot; above.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== Notificaciones d'una páxina qu'usa Flow ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{Notification type|notice}} and {{Notification type|alert}} See [[Special:DisplayNotificationsConfiguration]] for the exact details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when a page using [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured discussions|Structured discussions]] that you watch has changes (new topic, post replied, topic renamed…).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Message title and sender.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Secondary information: abstract of the change.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* for a new topic: user who created the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a new reply: last user who replied to the topic, and the targeted page.
:* for a topic change: user who did the change and a link to that diff.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-cx}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when you have completed 1, 10 and 100 translations via [[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Content translation tool]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Congratulations message.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-page-review}} ===
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Received when a page which you created is reviewed (or &quot;patrolled&quot;) by someone using [[Page Curation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: Which page has been reviewed, and who reviewed it.&lt;/span&gt;

=== OAuth ===
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-owner}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies developers of OAuth applications when the review status of the application has changed.&lt;/span&gt;
; {{int|echo-category-title-oauth-admin}}
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;notifies OAuth admins about new applications waiting for review.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|echo-category-title-login-fail}}  === 
[[File:Notification for failed login attempt.png|thumb]]
{{Notification type|alert}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when someone attempted and failed to log in to your account. Multiple alerts are bundled into one for attempt from a new device/IP, but for a known device/IP, you get one alert for every 5 attempts. See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Login notifications#How does this feature work|how does this feature work]] for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Connection to the data repository ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Notification type|notice}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Received when your page is connected to the associated data repository (for WMF wikis, this is [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Wikidata|Wikidata]]).&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Primary information: the name of the page that was connected.&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Details: link to the data item and, possibly, to a local help page.&lt;/span&gt;

== Notificaciones futures ==
''Nota: estes notificaciones inda nun tán disponibles pero les descripciones escríbense'n tiempu presente pa evitar más trabayu a los traductores. Treslladaránse a la sección afayadiza cuando tean disponibles.''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:Echo{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>3a7obi3eyy9w9izpv266ju49t67z2k1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Notifications/Types/15/ast</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>608110</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403287</id>
      <parentid>3483275</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:13:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="235" xml:space="preserve">Dalgunes d'estes notificaciones van tar inactives de mou predetermináu o nun tarán disponibles na wiki. Si desees activar dalguna d'estes notificaciones (o desactivales), puedes faelo nes [[$1|preferencies]] como s'indica más abaxo.</text>
      <sha1>t7lsdzjguxfp7dctao78x1ptkm6hrak</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Extension registration/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>609905</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402504</id>
      <parentid>5375680</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="23852" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
'''Extension registration''' ist das Verfahren, das MediaWiki zum Laden von [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|Erweiterungen]] und [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|Skins]] nutzt.
Die Konfigurationsdaten werden in eine Datei namens &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; oder &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; geschrieben, welche im Stammverzeichnis der Erweiterung oder des Skins abgelegt wird. MediaWiki verwendet diese Dateien, um Erweiterungen und Skins zu registrieren.

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
== Umstellungen für Webseiten-Verwalter ==

Vor MediaWiki 1.25 wurde die Konfiguration für Erweiterungen und Skins in einer PHP-Datei vorgenommen, die den gleichen Namen wie die Erweiterung trug, zum Beispiel &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; oder &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Das schreibt sich jetzt so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Dies muss geschehen, bevor irgendeine Erweiterung oder ein Skin geladen wird.&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you keep your extensions in a location different from &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}}'', to specify the directory in which to find the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Looks in $wgExtensionDirectory for /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn die Skins nicht im Verzeichnis &lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt; gespeichert sind, muss das ungünstig benannte {{wg|StyleDirectory}} angepasst werden.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Looks in $wgStyleDirectory for both /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json and /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Umstellungen für Entwickler von Erweiterungen ==
Seit MW 1.30 können Namensraum-IDs, die in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; definiert sind lokal überschrieben werden, indem die entsprechende Konstante in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; definiert wird, bevor die Erweiterung geladen wird.
Betrachte beispielsweise die folgende Deklaration von Namensräumen in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Dies würde standardmäßig dazu führen, dass die Konstante NS_FOO so definiert wird, dass sie den Wert 1212 hat.
Dies kann allerdings überschrieben werden, indem die entsprechende Konstante in LocalSettings.php definiert wird:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Dies würde dazu führen, dass der „Foo“-Namensraum mit der ID 6688 anstelle der ID 1212 registriert wird.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Beim Überschreiben von Namensraum-IDs ist zu beachten, dass alle Diskussions-Namensräume ungerade IDs haben müssen, und dass die ID eines Diskussions-Namensraumes immer der des Inhalts-Namensraums + 1 entsprechen muss.&lt;/span&gt;

:''Siehe auch die [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ Erweiterungsregistrierung „wall of sadness“ (jetzt „wall of superpowers“)].''

Das Skript &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; hilft dabei, PHP-Eintrittspunkte in eine JSON-Metadaten-Datei zu migrieren.
Wenn die Erweiterung ältere Versionen von MediaWiki unterstützt, sollten der PHP-Eintrittspunkt &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; beibehalten werden, solange die Unterstützung für die älteren Versionen bestehen bleibt.

Beispiel für Befehlszeilen :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Wenn der Fehler angezeigt wird, dass Konstanten oder Funktionen nicht neu definiert werden konnten, kann es nötig sein, die Erweiterung aus &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; zu deinstallieren.
Sie sollten Ihre PHP Einsprungpunkt-Datei (FooBar.php) mit einem Code wie folgendem ersetzen, damit Wikis während des Aktualisierungsprozesses nicht abbrechen.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Oder Skins

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Dokumentation erhalten ==
PHP-Einstiegspunkte enthalten normalerweise eine Dokumentation der Konfigurationseinstellungen, die nützlich ist und aufbewahrt werden sollte.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately JSON doesn't support comments. It is recommended that you transfer configuration documentation to a &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; file in the extension's repository.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also document configuration on-wiki in your Extension:''MyExtension'' page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to include some documentation directly in the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration ignores any key in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; starting with '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' in the top-level structure, so you can put comments in those parts of the JSON file. For example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Version 1 of the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; format also allowed &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; in &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; section, but this is no longer recommended or supported in version 2. &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; field of the config variable should be used instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

Dies sollte nur für kurze Notizen und Kommentare verwendet werden.

== Funktionen ==

Wenn Sie eine große Anzahl von Erweiterungen laden, bietet &quot;extension registration&quot; eine Leistungssteigerung, sofern [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (or APCu) installiert ist. Erweiterungen, die zusammen mit &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (mit Plural -s) geladen werden, werden zusammen gecacht.

=== Eigenschaften ===
Ein immer wieder auftretendes Problem ist, wie man etwas bei einer anderen Erweiterung &quot;registriert&quot;.
Normalerweise hat dies bedeutet, dass man eine Erweiterung vor einer anderen laden musste.
Zum Beispiel hat VisualEditor ein &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt;, das es Erweiterungen ermöglicht ihre Module hinzuzufügen.
Allerdings sieht das Array beim Laden des VisualEditors so aus:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Wenn eine Erweiterung das Array erweitert bevor VisualEditor geladen ist, wird VE beim Laden alle Einträge aus dem Array löschen.
Einige Erweiterungen hingen von einer bestimmten Ladereihenfolge ab, andere hackten um diese mit {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}} herum.
Extension registration löst dieses Problem mit &quot;Eigenschaften&quot;.
In der Erweiterung Math ist in ihrer &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; etwa folgendes eingetragen:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
Seit manifest version 2 müssen Attribute in einem eigenen Abschnitt &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; definiert werden.

Der &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;-Knoten muss ein Objekt mit dem Erweiterunsnamen als Schlüssel und einem Objekt von Attribut-Wert-Paaren als Wer sein. Beachte dass der Schlüssel in diesem Objekt nicht den Erweiterungsnamen erhalten muss!

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Wenn VisualEditor auf dieses Attribut zugreifen möchte, ruft er folgende Funktion auf:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Anforderungen (Abhängigkeiten) ===
Extension registration verfügt über einen &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt;-Abschnitt, der sich ähnlich zu  [[Composer]]s &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt;-Abschnitt verhält.
Er erlaubt einem Erweiterungs-Entwickler mehrere Anforderungen für die Erweiterung, wie beispielsweise eine spezifische MediaWiki Version (oder größer / kleiner als) oder eine andere Erweiterung oder einen anderen Skin anzugeben.
Um zum Beispiel die Abhängigkeit von einer MediaWiki-Version größer als 1.26.0 zu ergänzen, kann folgender Code in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; eingefügt werden: &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Der Schlüssel des &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; Objekts ist der Name der Abhängigkeit ist (vor MediaWiki 1.29.0 war nur &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; unterstützt), der Wert ist eine gültige Versions-Einschränkung (das Format muss dem [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md von Composer verwendeten] entsprechen).

In MediaWiki 1.29.0 und darüber können auch Abhängigkeiten von Skins und anderen Erweiterungen wie folgt hinzugefügt werden:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Die Erweiterungen und Skins, die hier angegeben sind, müssen ebenfalls das Extension-registration-System verwenden, das auf dieser Seite beschrieben wird, damit dies funktioniert.
* Der String der hinzugefügt wurde, um die Erweitrung oder Skins anzugeben, müssen mit dem String in dem &quot;name&quot;-Feld der entsprechenden &quot;extension.json&quot; oder des entsprechenden &quot;skin.json&quot; identisch sein.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Für Erweiterungen, die Wikimedias [[Continuous integration]] verwenden, müssen Abhängigkeiten auch zu {{git file|project=integration/config|file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}} hinzugefügt werden.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Überprüfe, ob eine Erweiterung geladen ist, ohne sie tatsächlich zu benötigen ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many extensions may provide features that work only if another extension is loaded too, without really needing this feature for the core extension function to work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.&lt;/span&gt;

Um eine standardisierte Möglichkeit der Überprüfung zu implementieren, ob eine Erweiterung geladen ist oder nicht (ohne die Notwendigkeit von Mehrarbeit in einer Erweiterung, die eine weiche Abhängigkeit von einer anderen hat), kann Extension registration verwendet werden. Sie implementiert eine &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt;-Methode, die über ein einfaches boolean zurückgibt, ob die Erweiterung geladen ist oder nicht (die Erweiterung muss mithilfe von &quot;Extension registration&quot; geladen werden, damit dies funktioniert). Beispiel:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
Seit [[MediaWiki 1.32]] ist es ebenfalls möglich, zu prüfen, ob eine Erweiterung geladen ist und eine angegebene Composer-Versionseinschränkunge erfüllt.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Möchtest du in älteren Versionen von MediaWiki prüfen, ob eine Erweiterung geladen ist, kannst du diese Information mit der &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt;-Methode erhalten, die auch Danksagungsinformationen (Credits) für alle geladenen Erweiterungen enthält. Zum Beispiel:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Alternativ: Falls die Erweiterung B eine spezielle Konstante für diesen Zweck beim Laden definiert, ist es möglich zu überprüfen ob diese definiert ist:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Es ist eine unschöne Art und Weise, die vermieden werden sollte, zu überprüfen, ob eine bestimmte Klasse einer Erweiterung vorhanden ist oder nicht, z.B. mit diesem Code:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Es könnte zu Problemen führen, wenn die Erweiterung im Dateisystem vorhanden, jedoch nicht geladen ist, z.B. wenn Composer für das automatische Laden verwendet wurde.
Wenn die Klasse umbenannt wurde oder nicht mehr besteht (zum Beispiel, weil sie nicht öffentlich ist), wird dies auch zu Problemen führen.

Im Allgemeinen wird es bevorzugt, Code über Composer-Bibliotheken anstelle von Erweiterungen zu teilen. Wenn die Klassen einer Erweiterung nur existieren müssen, aber die Erweiterung weder konfiguriert noch geladen sein muss, um das gewünschte zu tun, ist das ein starkes Indiz dafür, dass der Code in eine Composer-Bibliothek abgespalten werden sollte, zu der stattdessen eine Abhängigkeit bestehen sollte.

=== Konfigurationen (Erweiterungs/Skin-Einstellungen) ===
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
Standardmäßig nimmt &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; an, dass die Konfigurationseinstellungen mit einem &quot;wg&quot;-Präfix beginnen.

Wenn das nicht der Fall ist, ist es möglich das Präfix mit einem speziellen Schlüssel zu überschreiben:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Das verwendet das Präfix &quot;eg&quot; und setzt die globale Variable &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; auf true.

Seit manifest version 2 stellt der Einstellungs-Abschnitt der Extension registration deutlich mehr Features zur Verfügung und erlaubt dir, die Einstellungsmöglichkeiten viel detaillierter zu beschreiben. Anstelle eines einzelnen „Schlüssel -&gt; Wert“-Feldes für Einstellungsmöglichkeiten kannst du auch die folgenden Informationen ergänzen:

Die allgemeine Struktur der &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; verändert sich ein wenig zu der folgenden, stärker objektorientierten Version:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== Wert ====
Der Konfigurationswert wird an diesen Ort verschoben.
Dies ist der einzige notwendige Schlüssel eines Konfigurationsobjektes.

==== Pfad ====
Der boolsche Wert des &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt;-Schlüssels gibt an, ob der Wert der Einstellungsoption als Pfad im Dateisystem interpretiert werden soll, relativ zum Wurzelverzeichnis der Erweiterung.
Z. B., wenn der Wert der Einstellung &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; ist und &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; true ist, ist der tatsächliche Wert &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt;.

==== Beschreibung ====
Der &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;-Schlüssel für eine Einstellung kann einen nicht lokalisierten String erhalten, welcher verwendet werden kann, um sie anderen Entwicklern oder Benutzern (Systemadministratoren) deriner Erweiterung zu erklären.
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
Der Wert des description-Schlüssel wird normalerweise nicht im Wiki angezeigt; sieh dir allerdings den Ausblick an, um mehr Informationen darüber zu erhalten, wie dieses Feature in Zukunft verwendet werden könnte!

Es ist ebenfalls möglich, einen Nachrichten-Schlüssel (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;) als Beschreibung in MediaWikis internes Lokalisierungssystem hinzufügen, der in Zukunft verwendet werden wird, um die Beschreibung im Wiki anzuzeigen.

==== public / private ====
Diese Option ist ein boolscher Wert, der standardmäßig auf false gesetzt ist, was bedeutet, dass die Einstellung und ihr Wert als &quot;private&quot; markiert sind.
Dieser Wert wird im Moment nirgendwo verwendet; sieh dir den Ausblick an, um mehr über diese Option herauszufinden.

==== Ausblick ====
{{tracked|T155155}}
Die oben genannten Änderungen sind auch als Vorbereitungen für ein verbresserungs Konfigurations-Management in MediaWiki zu verstehen. Die obigen Informationen erlauben unns bspw., diese Optionen von Erweiterungen im MediaWiki-Benutzerinterface anzuzeigen. Zu diesem Zweck werden die lokalisierte Beschreibung (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) sowie der Hinweis, ob die Option gezeigt werden soll oder nicht (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) benötigt.

=== Automatisiertes Auffinden von Unit-Tests ===
MediaWiki erlaubt jeder Erweiterung, [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|phpunit-Tests]] zu registrieren.
Ohne Erweiterungsregistrierung wäre es nötig, einen Hook-Handler für den {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}}-Hook zu registrieren, was in etwa so aussehen würde:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

(wie auf der Handbuch-Seite beschrieben). Dieser Code ist allerdings für viele Erweiterungen identisch, sodass man ihn als unnötige Codedopplung bezeichnen könnte.
Wenn eine Erweiterung Erweiterungsregistrierung verwendet und die phpunit-Tests sich im &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt;-Unterverzeichnis der Erweiterung befinden, wird der phpunit-Wrapper von MediaWiki diese Unit-Tests mithilfe von Erweiterungsregistrierung automatisiert finden.
Daher ist es nicht mehr nötig, diesen Hook zu registrieren und anzugeben, dass die Unit-Tests im Standardverzeichnis gespeichert sind.

== Anpassen der Registrierung ==
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

== Siehe auch composer.json ==

Wenn eine Erweiterung oder Skin Bibliotheksabhängigkeiten hat, kann es auch eine &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt;-Datei geben, siehe {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Verwende das &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt; -Feld, damit MediaWiki das automatische Laden von Composer verwendet, wenn dies angebracht ist.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some metadata fields overlap between &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (discussed in {{task|T89456}}), including :
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

== Code Stewardship ==
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
* Melde Fehler dem [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]]-Projekt.
* Alte Versionen der [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (vor Mai 2015) und {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} beschreiben den alten Ansatz, Erweiterungsinformationen in PHP-Code und Variablen zu deklarieren
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=Bekannte Einschränkungen}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=Überblick über die Architektur}}
* &lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; ist das Schema für &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (und skin.json).
* [[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] zur Umsetzung der Registrierung von Erweiterungen
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[toollabs:extreg-wos|Extension registration wall of superpowers!]] — summary of which extensions are still to be converted.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{task|T98668}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking ticket for converting all extensions and skins on Git to use extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== References ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>m7qomhp0rc9t3glqic5pwp0ro1u2i51</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402520</id>
      <parentid>5402504</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="23855" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
'''Extension registration''' ist das Verfahren, das MediaWiki zum Laden von [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|Erweiterungen]] und [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|Skins]] nutzt.
Die Konfigurationsdaten werden in eine Datei namens &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; oder &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; geschrieben, welche im Stammverzeichnis der Erweiterung oder des Skins abgelegt wird. MediaWiki verwendet diese Dateien, um Erweiterungen und Skins zu registrieren.

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
== Umstellungen für Webseiten-Verwalter ==

Vor MediaWiki 1.25 wurde die Konfiguration für Erweiterungen und Skins in einer PHP-Datei vorgenommen, die den gleichen Namen wie die Erweiterung trug, zum Beispiel &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; oder &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Das schreibt sich jetzt so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Dies muss geschehen, bevor irgendeine Erweiterung oder ein Skin geladen wird.&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you keep your extensions in a location different from &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}}'', to specify the directory in which to find the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Looks in $wgExtensionDirectory for /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn die Skins nicht im Verzeichnis &lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt; gespeichert sind, muss das ungünstig benannte {{wg|StyleDirectory}} angepasst werden.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Looks in $wgStyleDirectory for both /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json and /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Umstellungen für Entwickler von Erweiterungen ==
Seit MW 1.30 können Namensraum-IDs, die in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; definiert sind lokal überschrieben werden, indem die entsprechende Konstante in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; definiert wird, bevor die Erweiterung geladen wird.
Betrachte beispielsweise die folgende Deklaration von Namensräumen in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Dies würde standardmäßig dazu führen, dass die Konstante NS_FOO so definiert wird, dass sie den Wert 1212 hat.
Dies kann allerdings überschrieben werden, indem die entsprechende Konstante in LocalSettings.php definiert wird:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Dies würde dazu führen, dass der „Foo“-Namensraum mit der ID 6688 anstelle der ID 1212 registriert wird.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Beim Überschreiben von Namensraum-IDs ist zu beachten, dass alle Diskussions-Namensräume ungerade IDs haben müssen, und dass die ID eines Diskussions-Namensraumes immer der des Inhalts-Namensraums + 1 entsprechen muss.&lt;/span&gt;

:''Siehe auch die [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ Erweiterungsregistrierung „wall of sadness“ (jetzt „wall of superpowers“)].''

Das Skript &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; hilft dabei, PHP-Eintrittspunkte in eine JSON-Metadaten-Datei zu migrieren.
Wenn die Erweiterung ältere Versionen von MediaWiki unterstützt, sollten der PHP-Eintrittspunkt &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; beibehalten werden, solange die Unterstützung für die älteren Versionen bestehen bleibt.

Beispiel für Befehlszeilen :

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Wenn der Fehler angezeigt wird, dass Konstanten oder Funktionen nicht neu definiert werden konnten, kann es nötig sein, die Erweiterung aus &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; zu deinstallieren.
Sie sollten Ihre PHP Einsprungpunkt-Datei (FooBar.php) mit einem Code wie folgendem ersetzen, damit Wikis während des Aktualisierungsprozesses nicht abbrechen.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Oder Skins

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Dokumentation erhalten ==
PHP-Einstiegspunkte enthalten normalerweise eine Dokumentation der Konfigurationseinstellungen, die nützlich ist und aufbewahrt werden sollte.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately JSON doesn't support comments. It is recommended that you transfer configuration documentation to a &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; file in the extension's repository.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also document configuration on-wiki in your Extension:''MyExtension'' page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to include some documentation directly in the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration ignores any key in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; starting with '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' in the top-level structure, so you can put comments in those parts of the JSON file. For example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Version 1 of the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; format also allowed &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; in &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; section, but this is no longer recommended or supported in version 2. &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; field of the config variable should be used instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

Dies sollte nur für kurze Notizen und Kommentare verwendet werden.

== Funktionen ==

Wenn Sie eine große Anzahl von Erweiterungen laden, bietet &quot;extension registration&quot; eine Leistungssteigerung, sofern [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (or APCu) installiert ist. Erweiterungen, die zusammen mit &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (mit Plural -s) geladen werden, werden zusammen gecacht.

=== Eigenschaften ===
Ein immer wieder auftretendes Problem ist, wie man etwas bei einer anderen Erweiterung &quot;registriert&quot;.
Normalerweise hat dies bedeutet, dass man eine Erweiterung vor einer anderen laden musste.
Zum Beispiel hat VisualEditor ein &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt;, das es Erweiterungen ermöglicht ihre Module hinzuzufügen.
Allerdings sieht das Array beim Laden des VisualEditors so aus:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Wenn eine Erweiterung das Array erweitert bevor VisualEditor geladen ist, wird VE beim Laden alle Einträge aus dem Array löschen.
Einige Erweiterungen hingen von einer bestimmten Ladereihenfolge ab, andere hackten um diese mit {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}} herum.
Extension registration löst dieses Problem mit &quot;Eigenschaften&quot;.
In der Erweiterung Math ist in ihrer &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; etwa folgendes eingetragen:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
Seit manifest version 2 müssen Attribute in einem eigenen Abschnitt &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; definiert werden.

Der &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;-Knoten muss ein Objekt mit dem Erweiterunsnamen als Schlüssel und einem Objekt von Attribut-Wert-Paaren als Wer sein. Beachte dass der Schlüssel in diesem Objekt nicht den Erweiterungsnamen erhalten muss!

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Wenn VisualEditor auf dieses Attribut zugreifen möchte, ruft er folgende Funktion auf:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Anforderungen (Abhängigkeiten) ===
Extension registration verfügt über einen &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt;-Abschnitt, der sich ähnlich zu  [[Composer]]s &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt;-Abschnitt verhält.
Er erlaubt einem Erweiterungs-Entwickler mehrere Anforderungen für die Erweiterung, wie beispielsweise eine spezifische MediaWiki Version (oder größer / kleiner als) oder eine andere Erweiterung oder einen anderen Skin anzugeben.
Um zum Beispiel die Abhängigkeit von einer MediaWiki-Version größer als 1.26.0 zu ergänzen, kann folgender Code in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; eingefügt werden: &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Der Schlüssel des &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; Objekts ist der Name der Abhängigkeit ist (vor MediaWiki 1.29.0 war nur &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; unterstützt), der Wert ist eine gültige Versions-Einschränkung (das Format muss dem [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md von Composer verwendeten] entsprechen).

In MediaWiki 1.29.0 und darüber können auch Abhängigkeiten von Skins und anderen Erweiterungen wie folgt hinzugefügt werden:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Die Erweiterungen und Skins, die hier angegeben sind, müssen ebenfalls das Extension-registration-System verwenden, das auf dieser Seite beschrieben wird, damit dies funktioniert.
* Der String der hinzugefügt wurde, um die Erweitrung oder Skins anzugeben, müssen mit dem String in dem &quot;name&quot;-Feld der entsprechenden &quot;extension.json&quot; oder des entsprechenden &quot;skin.json&quot; identisch sein.
* Für Erweiterungen, die Wikimedias [[Special:MyLanguage/Continuous integration|Continuous integration]] verwenden, müssen Abhängigkeiten auch zu {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}} hinzugefügt werden.
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Überprüfe, ob eine Erweiterung geladen ist, ohne sie tatsächlich zu benötigen ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many extensions may provide features that work only if another extension is loaded too, without really needing this feature for the core extension function to work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.&lt;/span&gt;

Um eine standardisierte Möglichkeit der Überprüfung zu implementieren, ob eine Erweiterung geladen ist oder nicht (ohne die Notwendigkeit von Mehrarbeit in einer Erweiterung, die eine weiche Abhängigkeit von einer anderen hat), kann Extension registration verwendet werden. Sie implementiert eine &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt;-Methode, die über ein einfaches boolean zurückgibt, ob die Erweiterung geladen ist oder nicht (die Erweiterung muss mithilfe von &quot;Extension registration&quot; geladen werden, damit dies funktioniert). Beispiel:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
Seit [[MediaWiki 1.32]] ist es ebenfalls möglich, zu prüfen, ob eine Erweiterung geladen ist und eine angegebene Composer-Versionseinschränkunge erfüllt.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Möchtest du in älteren Versionen von MediaWiki prüfen, ob eine Erweiterung geladen ist, kannst du diese Information mit der &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt;-Methode erhalten, die auch Danksagungsinformationen (Credits) für alle geladenen Erweiterungen enthält. Zum Beispiel:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Alternativ: Falls die Erweiterung B eine spezielle Konstante für diesen Zweck beim Laden definiert, ist es möglich zu überprüfen ob diese definiert ist:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Es ist eine unschöne Art und Weise, die vermieden werden sollte, zu überprüfen, ob eine bestimmte Klasse einer Erweiterung vorhanden ist oder nicht, z.B. mit diesem Code:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Es könnte zu Problemen führen, wenn die Erweiterung im Dateisystem vorhanden, jedoch nicht geladen ist, z.B. wenn Composer für das automatische Laden verwendet wurde.
Wenn die Klasse umbenannt wurde oder nicht mehr besteht (zum Beispiel, weil sie nicht öffentlich ist), wird dies auch zu Problemen führen.

Im Allgemeinen wird es bevorzugt, Code über Composer-Bibliotheken anstelle von Erweiterungen zu teilen. Wenn die Klassen einer Erweiterung nur existieren müssen, aber die Erweiterung weder konfiguriert noch geladen sein muss, um das gewünschte zu tun, ist das ein starkes Indiz dafür, dass der Code in eine Composer-Bibliothek abgespalten werden sollte, zu der stattdessen eine Abhängigkeit bestehen sollte.

=== Konfigurationen (Erweiterungs/Skin-Einstellungen) ===
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
Standardmäßig nimmt &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; an, dass die Konfigurationseinstellungen mit einem &quot;wg&quot;-Präfix beginnen.

Wenn das nicht der Fall ist, ist es möglich das Präfix mit einem speziellen Schlüssel zu überschreiben:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Das verwendet das Präfix &quot;eg&quot; und setzt die globale Variable &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; auf true.

Seit manifest version 2 stellt der Einstellungs-Abschnitt der Extension registration deutlich mehr Features zur Verfügung und erlaubt dir, die Einstellungsmöglichkeiten viel detaillierter zu beschreiben. Anstelle eines einzelnen „Schlüssel -&gt; Wert“-Feldes für Einstellungsmöglichkeiten kannst du auch die folgenden Informationen ergänzen:

Die allgemeine Struktur der &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; verändert sich ein wenig zu der folgenden, stärker objektorientierten Version:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== Wert ====
Der Konfigurationswert wird an diesen Ort verschoben.
Dies ist der einzige notwendige Schlüssel eines Konfigurationsobjektes.

==== Pfad ====
Der boolsche Wert des &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt;-Schlüssels gibt an, ob der Wert der Einstellungsoption als Pfad im Dateisystem interpretiert werden soll, relativ zum Wurzelverzeichnis der Erweiterung.
Z. B., wenn der Wert der Einstellung &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; ist und &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; true ist, ist der tatsächliche Wert &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt;.

==== Beschreibung ====
Der &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;-Schlüssel für eine Einstellung kann einen nicht lokalisierten String erhalten, welcher verwendet werden kann, um sie anderen Entwicklern oder Benutzern (Systemadministratoren) deriner Erweiterung zu erklären.
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
Der Wert des description-Schlüssel wird normalerweise nicht im Wiki angezeigt; sieh dir allerdings den Ausblick an, um mehr Informationen darüber zu erhalten, wie dieses Feature in Zukunft verwendet werden könnte!

Es ist ebenfalls möglich, einen Nachrichten-Schlüssel (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;) als Beschreibung in MediaWikis internes Lokalisierungssystem hinzufügen, der in Zukunft verwendet werden wird, um die Beschreibung im Wiki anzuzeigen.

==== public / private ====
Diese Option ist ein boolscher Wert, der standardmäßig auf false gesetzt ist, was bedeutet, dass die Einstellung und ihr Wert als &quot;private&quot; markiert sind.
Dieser Wert wird im Moment nirgendwo verwendet; sieh dir den Ausblick an, um mehr über diese Option herauszufinden.

==== Ausblick ====
{{tracked|T155155}}
Die oben genannten Änderungen sind auch als Vorbereitungen für ein verbresserungs Konfigurations-Management in MediaWiki zu verstehen. Die obigen Informationen erlauben unns bspw., diese Optionen von Erweiterungen im MediaWiki-Benutzerinterface anzuzeigen. Zu diesem Zweck werden die lokalisierte Beschreibung (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) sowie der Hinweis, ob die Option gezeigt werden soll oder nicht (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) benötigt.

=== Automatisiertes Auffinden von Unit-Tests ===
MediaWiki erlaubt jeder Erweiterung, [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|phpunit-Tests]] zu registrieren.
Ohne Erweiterungsregistrierung wäre es nötig, einen Hook-Handler für den {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}}-Hook zu registrieren, was in etwa so aussehen würde:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

(wie auf der Handbuch-Seite beschrieben). Dieser Code ist allerdings für viele Erweiterungen identisch, sodass man ihn als unnötige Codedopplung bezeichnen könnte.
Wenn eine Erweiterung Erweiterungsregistrierung verwendet und die phpunit-Tests sich im &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt;-Unterverzeichnis der Erweiterung befinden, wird der phpunit-Wrapper von MediaWiki diese Unit-Tests mithilfe von Erweiterungsregistrierung automatisiert finden.
Daher ist es nicht mehr nötig, diesen Hook zu registrieren und anzugeben, dass die Unit-Tests im Standardverzeichnis gespeichert sind.

== Anpassen der Registrierung ==
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

== Siehe auch composer.json ==

Wenn eine Erweiterung oder Skin Bibliotheksabhängigkeiten hat, kann es auch eine &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt;-Datei geben, siehe {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Verwende das &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt; -Feld, damit MediaWiki das automatische Laden von Composer verwendet, wenn dies angebracht ist.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some metadata fields overlap between &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (discussed in {{task|T89456}}), including :
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

== Code Stewardship ==
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
* Melde Fehler dem [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]]-Projekt.
* Alte Versionen der [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (vor Mai 2015) und {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} beschreiben den alten Ansatz, Erweiterungsinformationen in PHP-Code und Variablen zu deklarieren
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=Bekannte Einschränkungen}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=Überblick über die Architektur}}
* &lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; ist das Schema für &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (und skin.json).
* [[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] zur Umsetzung der Registrierung von Erweiterungen
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[toollabs:extreg-wos|Extension registration wall of superpowers!]] — summary of which extensions are still to be converted.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{task|T98668}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking ticket for converting all extensions and skins on Git to use extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== References ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>98fa0uyegu2x90mmls7dhd2cwmqp3at</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/th</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>612539</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401816</id>
      <parentid>5184894</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/el</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>613237</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402607</id>
      <parentid>4578046</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5011" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Οι Δομημένες Συζητήσεις (προηγουμένως γνωστές ως Flow) είναι ένα [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|πρότζεκτ]] της ομάδας Collaboration του  Wikimedia Foundation για την δημιουργία ενός σύγχρονου συστήματος συζήτησης και συνεργασίας για τα εγχειρήματα Wikimedia.

== Γρήγορη περιήγηση ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|Πως φαίνονται οι Δομημένες Συζητήσεις - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Δοκιμάστε!]]]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Ανακαλύψτε σε μια σελίδα γιατί φτιάξαμε τις Δομημένες Συζητήσεις, και πως να τις χρησιμοποιήσετε]]''': 
* [[$basics|βασικά της επεξεργασίας]]
* [[$post|ανάρτηση απάντησης]] (στην ομαδική συζήτηση ή σε συγκεκριμένο πρόσωπο σε μια ομαδική συζήτηση),
* [[$create|δημιουργία συζήτησης]],
* [[$watch|παρακολούθηση θέματος ή ολόκληρου πίνακα]],
* [[$notifications|λήψη ενημερώσεων]],
* [[$browse|περιήγηση και αρχειοθέτηση θεμάτων]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Υπάρχουν ορισμένοι συγκεκριμένοι όροι που αφορούν τις Δομημένες Συζητήσεις. Έχουν οριστεί στο  '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|Γλωσσάρι]]'''.

Δεν δουλεύουν οι Δομημένες Συζητήσεις για εσάς; Παρακαλούμε ελέγξτε '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|αν μπορείτε να λύσετε το πρόβλημα]]'''.

== Προηγμένα εργαλεία ==

Ορισμένα προηγμένα εργαλεία είναι διαθέσιμα, για συγκεκριμένους σκοπούς. Έχουν ομαδοποιηθεί σε αυτά τα θέματα:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Ενεργοποίηση}}
:Τι γίνεται όταν ενεργοποιείται το Flow σε μια σελίδα;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Θέματα}}
:Φιλτράρισμα θεμάτων, Επεξεργασία ενός θέματος/ενός μηνύματος, Σύνοψη ενός θέματος, Κλείσιμο ενός θέματος
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Σταθεροί σύνδεσμοι}}
:Πως να κάνετε συνδέσμους σε θέματα
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Ειδοποιήσεις και λίστα παρακολούθησης}}
:Οι ειδοποιήσεις που λαμβάνετε και διάφορες προσθήκες στις λίστες παρακολούθησης
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Ιστορικό}}
:Πως λειτουργεί το σύστημα ιστορικού
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Διαχείριση}}
:Απόκρυψη, Διαγραφή, Καταστολή θεμάτων
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Προφόρτωση}}
:Προφόρτωση περιεχομένων σε μια νέα συζήτηση Flow
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Συντομεύσεις}}
:Συντομεύσεις πληκτρολογίου για χρήση στην λειτουργία οπτικής επεξεργασίας.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Όλη η τεκμηρίωση σε μια σελίδα.}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>dl5bnlrb2n2211y303hx0ia9ithcx1n</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/el</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>613244</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402660</id>
      <parentid>5154665</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:52:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16028" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Αυτή η σελίδα είναι μια γρήγορη περιήγηση των Δομημένων Συζητήσεων.

Οι Δομημένες Συζητήσεις προηγουμένως ήταν γνωστές ως «Flow».

Θα πάρετε τις περισσότερο σημαντικές πληροφορίες για τις Δομημένες Συζητήσεις και πως να τις χρησιμοποιήσετε.
Όλοι οι συγκεκριμένοι όροι (πλάγια στο κείμενο) έχουν οριστεί στην [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|ορολογία]].

== Γιατί Δομημένες Συζητήσεις ==
Οι Δομημένες Συζητήσεις είναι ένα νέος τρόπος για συζήτηση.
Η δομή των συζητήσεων έχει αλλάξει: μια σελίδα συζήτησης (ένας ''Πίνακας'') είναι τώρα μια συνάθροιση ''Θεμάτων'' και κάθε θέμα είναι ανεξάρτητο και μπορεί να παρακολουθηθεί ξεχωριστά.
Οι Δομημένες Συζητήσεις επιτρέπουν σε ένα χρήστη να επιλέξει ποια θέματα θέλει να παρακολουθεί. Όχι πλέον ολόκληρη τη σελίδα.

Νέα θέματα προστίθενται στην κορυφή της σελίδας.
Τα Θέματα μπορούν να ταξινομηθούν κατά το χρόνο δημιουργίας ή τελευταίας δραστηριότητας.
Οι Δομημένες Συζητήσεις επιτρέπουν σε ανθρώπους να επικοινωνούν χρησιμοποιώντας [[#basics|τον οπτικό επεξεργαστή και τον επεξεργαστή κώδικα]].

Κουμπιά ενεργειών (απάντηση, ευχαριστία) είναι συνδεδεμένα με κάθε απάντηση, έτοιμα για χρήση.
Δεν υπάρχει πλέον ανάγκη χρήσης εσοχής στις απαντήσεις σας, αρχειοθέτησης των συζητήσεων ή χρήσης υπογραφών.
Οι συζητήσεις είναι γρηγορότερες και περισσότερο προσβάσιμες στον καθένα.

== Διεπαφή ==

Γενικός σχεδιασμός ενός πίνακα Δομημένης Συζήτησης. Συγκριμένα στοιχεία γύρω από μηνύματα δεν εμφανίζονται (υπογραφή, σύνδεσμοι απάντησης, εργαλεία...).

{| style=&quot;width:70%;font-size:130%; margin:1em auto;&quot; 
| 
&lt;strong style=&quot;font-family:Linux Libertine,Georgia,Times,serif;font-size: 1.5em;line-height: 1.3;margin-bottom: 0.25em;padding: 0;&quot;&gt;
Τίτλος Πίνακα
&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Πτυσσόμενη περιήγηση Θεμάτων
{| 
| style=&quot;border:1px solid #222; width:100%; color:#AAA;padding: {{dir|{{pagelang}}|3px 3px 3px 180px|3px 180px 3px 3px}};&quot; | ''Πεδίο κειμένου έναρξης νέου Θέματος''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Τίτλος Θέματος
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Μήνυμα 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Μήνυμα 2
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;padding-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 5%; border:none;&quot; |Απάντηση στο μήνυμα 2 (έγινε με κλικ στο &quot;απάντηση&quot; πάνω από το μήνυμα #2)
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Μήνυμα 3
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Πεδίο κειμένου απάντησης)''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Άλλο Θέμα, άλλος Τίτλος
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Μήνυμα 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Πεδίο κειμένου απάντησης)''
|}
| style=&quot;background-color:#EEEEEE; width:33%;padding: 1em;vertical-align:top;&quot; |Περιγραφή Πίνακα
|}

=== Πως να χρησιμοποιήσετε τις Δομημένες Συζητήσεις ===
{{anchor|basics}}

== Βασικά επεξεργασίας ==
[[File:Flow toolbar - Apr. 2017.png|thumb|542x542px|Μπάρα εργαλείων Δομημένης Συζήτησης, με κουμπιά για την μορφή, συνδέσμους, αναφορές, και δεξιά, εναλλαγή επεξεργαστή (κώδικα wiki ή οπτικό).]]

Μπορείτε να συμμετέχετε σε συζητήσεις χρησιμοποιώντας δυο συστήματα εισαγωγής: οπτική επεξεργασία (ως προεπιλογή) και [[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|επεξεργαστή κώδικα 2017]].
Μπορείτε να κάνετε εναλλαγή οποτεδήποτε μεταξύ λειτουργία οπτικής επεξεργασία και κώδικα wiki.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Όταν αναρτάτε μια απάντηση ή δημιουργείτε ένα νέο θέμα, θα έχετε μια μπάρα εργαλείων με 4 κουμπιά: 
* 3 στα αριστερά
** προσθήκη μορφής
** προσθήκη συνδέσμου (με προτάσεις και αναζήτηση) 
** αναφορά κάποιου (με προτάσεις και αναζήτηση)
* ένα κουμπί εναλλαγής επεξεργαστών.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* 3 buttons on the left (on a right-to-left keyboard):
** add style
** add link (with suggestions and search)
** mention someone (with suggestions and search)
* one button on the right to switch between editors.
&lt;/div&gt;

Συντομεύσεις κώδικα wiki λειτουργούν επίσης σε λειτουργία οπτικής επεξεργασίας ως [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|συντομεύσεις Δομημένων Συζητήσεων]].

Κατά τη διάρκεια της συνεδρίας, ο ιστότοπος θα θυμάται ποιο σύστημα προτιμάτε, εκτός αν έχετε ορίσει προτιμώμενο επεξεργαστή στις προτιμήσεις σας (καρτέλα {{int|prefs-editing}}).

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have opted-out the 2017 wikitext editor and/or the visual editor, you will have a simple wikitext fieldset to post or edit a reply, with no toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;{{int|flow-preference-visualeditor}}&quot; in your preferences (&quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot; tab) to opt-in and have a toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;

Να θυμάστε: δεν χρειάζεστε πλέον να κάνετε εσοχές όταν κάντε αναρτήσεις, ή να τελειώνεται το μήνυμα με υπογραφή!

Όλα αυτά τα βασικά επεξεργασίας ισχύουν για όλες τις συζητήσεις, απαντήσεις ή όταν επεξεργάζεστε το ''Θέμα'', ''Περιγραφή'', ή ''Περίληψη''.

* Δείτε επίσης: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics#Edit|Επεξεργασία θέματος, μηνύματος]]

{{anchor|post}}
=== Ανάρτηση απάντησης ===

==== Στο κύριο θέμα ====
Κάθε συμμετέχοντας αναρτά πάνω στη συζήτηση με χρονολογικό τρόπο.
Είναι σαν μια συνηθισμένη συζήτηση σε wiki αλλά χωρίς εσοχές, ή σαν απαντήσεις email.
H ''Ανάρτησή'' σας θα εμφανίζεται πάνω από όλα τα σχόλια και εξαρτάται από το ''Θέμα''.

Αν χρειάζεται να πείτε κάτι ειδικά σε κάποιον, μπορείτε να αναφέρετε το χρήστη ή να του απαντήσετε (δείτε παρακάτω).
Το κουμπί ''απάντηση'' χρησιμοποιείται σε αυτή την περίπτωση, για να δημιουργηθεί μια απομάκρυνση. Αυτή η απομάκρυνηση δημιουργεί μια [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|εσοχή]]. Είναι δυνατή η προσθήκη 7 απομακρύνσεων.

Η ''Ανάρτησή'' σας θα εμφανίζεται πάνω από τα σχόλια που απαντάτε, με εσοχή αν δεν είναι η τελευταία στον πίνακα.
Μπορείτε επίσης να ευχαριστήσετε κάποιον.

==== Σε ένα συγκεκριμένο πρόσωπο σε ένα θέμα ====
Αν θέλετε να πείτε κάτι σε κάποιον συγκεκριμένα, μπορείτε να τον αναφέρετε στην γενική απάντησή σας, ή να κάνετε κλικ στο κουμπί &quot;''Απάντηση''&quot;.
Πατώντας στο &quot;''Απάντηση''&quot; θα προσθέσει μια ''Ανάρτηση'', κάτω από την ''Ανάρτηση'' που θέλετε να απαντήσετε άμεσα, εκτός αν εκείνη η ανάρτηση είναι η τελευταία από όλη τη συζήτηση. Για αυτή την τελευταία περίπτωση, υποθέτουμε ότι η απάντηση αφορά το ευρύτερο θέμα και η απάντηση θα είναι απευθείας κάτω από την τελευταία.

Για να παρέχετε καλύτερο πλαίσιο στην απάντησή σας, μπορείτε επίσης να παραθέσετε το μήνυμα κάποιου κάνοντας αντιγραφή και επικόλληση ενός μέρους του.

Η ''Ανάρτησή'' σας εξαρτάται από την ''Ανάρτηση'' στην οποία απαντήσατε.
Αυτή η ''Ανάρτηση'' είναι σχεδιασμένη ως συγκεκριμένη απάντηση. Θα διαχωρίζεται από την κύρια συζήτηση με γκρι γραμμή. 
Ωστόσο, κάθε πρόσωπο που παρακολουθεί το ''Θέμα'' θα λάβει μια ειδοποίηση για την απάντησή σας, όπως όλες τις απαντήσεις.

{{anchor|create}}
== Δημιουργία συζήτησης ==
[[File:New discussion in Flow - Sept. 2015.png|thumb|534x534px|Πως να δημιουργήσετε μια συζήτηση: κάντε κλικ στην μπάρα &quot;Εκκίνηση νέου θέματος&quot;.]]
Σε μια σελίδα που χρησιμοποιεί Δομημένες Συζητήσεις, η δημιουργία νέου θέματος είναι εύκολη: απλά χρειάζεται να κάνετε κλικ στο πεδίο &quot;Εκκίνηση νέου θέματος. Η Δομημένξ Συζήτηση θα ετοιμάσει δυο πεδία.

Το πρώτο πεδίο είναι &quot;εκκίνηση νέου θέματος&quot;, επιλέξτε ένα σχετικό τίτλο. Το δεύτερο πεδίο είναι &quot;Δημοσιεύσετε ένα νέο μήνυμα στη...&quot;, προσθέστε το κείμενό σας. Επιλέξτε τον τίτλο σας σοφά αν θέλετε να προσελκύσετε αναγνώστες: οι άνθρωποι θα τον βλέπουν στις Ειδοποιήσεις τους, χωρίς άλλες λεπτομέρειες.

Όταν είστε έτοιμοι, κάντε κλικ στο κουμπί &quot;Προσθήκη θέματος&quot;. Η ''Ανάρτησή'' σας είναι δημοσιευμένη, κάθε πρόσωπο που παρακολουθεί τη σελίδα θα ειδοποιηθεί για την δημιουργία αυτού του νέου θέματος.

Θα εγγραφείτε αυτόματα όταν δημιουργείτε ένα νέο θέμα: θα λαμβάνετε μια ειδοποίηση όταν κάποιος απαντά.

* επίσης δείτε:[[Special:MyLanguage/Flow/Topics|Σύνοψη θέματος / Επίλυση θέματος]]

{{anchor|watch}}
=== Παρακολούθηση ===

==== Ενός θέματος ====

Για να παρακολουθήσετε ένα συγκεκριμένο θέμα, κάντε κλικ στο αστέρι στην κορυφή του ''Θέματος'', κοντά στον τίτλο. Γίνεται μπλε. Αν είναι ήδη μπλε, ήδη παρακολουθείτε αυτό το θέμα.

Όσο παρακολουθείτε, θα λαμβάνετε μια ειδοποίηση για κάθε επεξεργασία σε αυτό το ''Θέμα'', και μια νέα γραμμή στη λίστα παρακολούθησής σας.

Όταν δημιουργείτε ένα ''Θέμα'', εγγράφεστε αυτόματα σε αυτό το ''Θέμα''.

==== Μια σελίδα Συζήτησης ====

Για να παρακολουθήσετε μια ολόκληρη σελίδα, κάντε κλικ στο αστέρι στην κορυφή της σελίδας, κοντά στο πεδίο αναζήτησης. Γίνεται μπλε. Αν είναι ήδη μπλε, ήδη παρακολουθείτε αυτή τη σελίδα.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Όσο παρακολουθείτε, θα λαμβάνετε μια ειδοποίηση για κάθε νέο θέμα που αναρτάται σε αυτή τη σελίδα συζήτησης. Θα έχετε επίσης και μια νέα γραμμή στη λίστα παρακολούθησης.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|notifications}}
=== Ενημερώσεις ===

Μπορείτε να απενεργοποιήσετε τις ειδοποιήσεις Δομημένων Συζητήσεων από τις προτιμήσεις ειδοποιήσεών σας. Η λίστα παρακολούθησής σας θα εξακολουθήσει να ενημερώνεται με μια νέα γραμμή για κάθε θέμα στη σελίδα συζήτησης που παρακολουθείτε ή με μια νέα γραμμή όταν κάποιος απαντά σε ένα Θέμα που παρακολουθείτε.

{{anchor|browse}}
== Περιήγηση και αρχειοθέτηση ==

Όλα τα Θέματα που εμφανίζονται σε ένα πίνακα βρίσκονται σε ένα πίνακα περιεχομένων. Μπορείτε να περιηγηθείτε σε όλα αυτά τα Θέματα σε αυτό τον πίνακα.

Η αρχειοθέτηση είναι αυτοματοποιημένη: Όλες οι συζητήσεις εξαφανίζονται όταν δεν είναι άλλο ενεργές. Μπορείτε να εμφανίσετε παλιότερα Θέματα κυλώντας κάτω στη σελίδα, ή κάνοντας αναζήτηση στον πίνακα περιεχομένων.

* επίσης δείτε:[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Σύνοψη θέματος / Επίλυση θέματος]]

== Προχωρήστε περαιτέρω ==
* Συχνές ερωτήσεις
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Design FAQ|2=Σχεδιασμός}}
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Release and features FAQ|2=Εκδόσεις και λειτουργίες}}

[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>8y2jha50fuy8ksn0hhnam7tps31jtgs</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402678</id>
      <parentid>5402660</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:01:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16051" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Αυτή η σελίδα είναι μια γρήγορη περιήγηση των Δομημένων Συζητήσεων.

Οι Δομημένες Συζητήσεις προηγουμένως ήταν γνωστές ως «Flow».

Θα πάρετε τις περισσότερο σημαντικές πληροφορίες για τις Δομημένες Συζητήσεις και πως να τις χρησιμοποιήσετε.
Όλοι οι συγκεκριμένοι όροι (πλάγια στο κείμενο) έχουν οριστεί στην [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|ορολογία]].

== Γιατί Δομημένες Συζητήσεις ==
Οι Δομημένες Συζητήσεις είναι ένα νέος τρόπος για συζήτηση.
Η δομή των συζητήσεων έχει αλλάξει: μια σελίδα συζήτησης (ένας ''Πίνακας'') είναι τώρα μια συνάθροιση ''Θεμάτων'' και κάθε θέμα είναι ανεξάρτητο και μπορεί να παρακολουθηθεί ξεχωριστά.
Οι Δομημένες Συζητήσεις επιτρέπουν σε ένα χρήστη να επιλέξει ποια θέματα θέλει να παρακολουθεί. Όχι πλέον ολόκληρη τη σελίδα.

Νέα θέματα προστίθενται στην κορυφή της σελίδας.
Τα Θέματα μπορούν να ταξινομηθούν κατά το χρόνο δημιουργίας ή τελευταίας δραστηριότητας.
Οι Δομημένες Συζητήσεις επιτρέπουν σε ανθρώπους να επικοινωνούν χρησιμοποιώντας [[#basics|τον οπτικό επεξεργαστή και τον επεξεργαστή κώδικα]].

Κουμπιά ενεργειών (απάντηση, ευχαριστία) είναι συνδεδεμένα με κάθε απάντηση, έτοιμα για χρήση.
Δεν υπάρχει πλέον ανάγκη χρήσης εσοχής στις απαντήσεις σας, αρχειοθέτησης των συζητήσεων ή χρήσης υπογραφών.
Οι συζητήσεις είναι γρηγορότερες και περισσότερο προσβάσιμες στον καθένα.

== Διεπαφή ==

Γενικός σχεδιασμός ενός πίνακα Δομημένης Συζήτησης. Συγκριμένα στοιχεία γύρω από μηνύματα δεν εμφανίζονται (υπογραφή, σύνδεσμοι απάντησης, εργαλεία...).

{| style=&quot;width:70%;font-size:130%; margin:1em auto;&quot; 
| 
&lt;strong style=&quot;font-family:Linux Libertine,Georgia,Times,serif;font-size: 1.5em;line-height: 1.3;margin-bottom: 0.25em;padding: 0;&quot;&gt;
Τίτλος Πίνακα
&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Πτυσσόμενη περιήγηση Θεμάτων
{| 
| style=&quot;border:1px solid #222; width:100%; color:#AAA;padding: {{dir|{{pagelang}}|3px 3px 3px 180px|3px 180px 3px 3px}};&quot; | ''Πεδίο κειμένου έναρξης νέου Θέματος''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Τίτλος Θέματος
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Μήνυμα 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Μήνυμα 2
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;padding-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 5%; border:none;&quot; |Απάντηση στο μήνυμα 2 (έγινε με κλικ στο &quot;απάντηση&quot; πάνω από το μήνυμα #2)
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Μήνυμα 3
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Πεδίο κειμένου απάντησης)''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Άλλο Θέμα, άλλος Τίτλος
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Μήνυμα 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Πεδίο κειμένου απάντησης)''
|}
| style=&quot;background-color:#EEEEEE; width:33%;padding: 1em;vertical-align:top;&quot; |Περιγραφή Πίνακα
|}

=== Πως να χρησιμοποιήσετε τις Δομημένες Συζητήσεις ===
{{anchor|basics}}

== Βασικά επεξεργασίας ==
[[File:Flow toolbar - Apr. 2017.png|thumb|542x542px|Μπάρα εργαλείων Δομημένης Συζήτησης, με κουμπιά για την μορφή, συνδέσμους, αναφορές, και δεξιά, εναλλαγή επεξεργαστή (κώδικα wiki ή οπτικό).]]

Μπορείτε να συμμετέχετε σε συζητήσεις χρησιμοποιώντας δυο συστήματα εισαγωγής: οπτική επεξεργασία (ως προεπιλογή) και [[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|επεξεργαστή κώδικα 2017]].
Μπορείτε να κάνετε εναλλαγή οποτεδήποτε μεταξύ λειτουργία οπτικής επεξεργασία και κώδικα wiki.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Όταν αναρτάτε μια απάντηση ή δημιουργείτε ένα νέο θέμα, θα έχετε μια μπάρα εργαλείων με 4 κουμπιά: 
* 3 στα αριστερά
** προσθήκη μορφής
** προσθήκη συνδέσμου (με προτάσεις και αναζήτηση) 
** αναφορά κάποιου (με προτάσεις και αναζήτηση)
* ένα κουμπί εναλλαγής επεξεργαστών.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* 3 buttons on the left (on a right-to-left keyboard):
** add style
** add link (with suggestions and search)
** mention someone (with suggestions and search)
* one button on the right to switch between editors.
&lt;/div&gt;

Συντομεύσεις κώδικα wiki λειτουργούν επίσης σε λειτουργία οπτικής επεξεργασίας ως [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|συντομεύσεις Δομημένων Συζητήσεων]].

Κατά τη διάρκεια της συνεδρίας, ο ιστότοπος θα θυμάται ποιο σύστημα προτιμάτε, εκτός αν έχετε ορίσει προτιμώμενο επεξεργαστή στις προτιμήσεις σας (καρτέλα {{int|prefs-editing}}).

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have opted-out the 2017 wikitext editor and/or the visual editor, you will have a simple wikitext fieldset to post or edit a reply, with no toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;{{int|flow-preference-visualeditor}}&quot; in your preferences (&quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot; tab) to opt-in and have a toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;

Να θυμάστε: δεν χρειάζεστε πλέον να κάνετε εσοχές όταν κάντε αναρτήσεις, ή να τελειώνεται το μήνυμα με υπογραφή!

Όλα αυτά τα βασικά επεξεργασίας ισχύουν για όλες τις συζητήσεις, απαντήσεις ή όταν επεξεργάζεστε το ''Θέμα'', ''Περιγραφή'', ή ''Περίληψη''.

* Δείτε επίσης: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics#Edit|Επεξεργασία θέματος, μηνύματος]]

{{anchor|post}}
=== Ανάρτηση απάντησης ===

==== Στο κύριο θέμα ====
Κάθε συμμετέχοντας αναρτά πάνω στη συζήτηση με χρονολογικό τρόπο.
Είναι σαν μια συνηθισμένη συζήτηση σε wiki αλλά χωρίς εσοχές, ή σαν απαντήσεις email.
H ''Ανάρτησή'' σας θα εμφανίζεται πάνω από όλα τα σχόλια και εξαρτάται από το ''Θέμα''.

Αν χρειάζεται να πείτε κάτι ειδικά σε κάποιον, μπορείτε να αναφέρετε το χρήστη ή να του απαντήσετε (δείτε παρακάτω).
Το κουμπί ''απάντηση'' χρησιμοποιείται σε αυτή την περίπτωση, για να δημιουργηθεί μια απομάκρυνση. Αυτή η απομάκρυνηση δημιουργεί μια [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|εσοχή]]. Είναι δυνατή η προσθήκη 7 απομακρύνσεων.

Η ''Ανάρτησή'' σας θα εμφανίζεται πάνω από τα σχόλια που απαντάτε, με εσοχή αν δεν είναι η τελευταία στον πίνακα.
Μπορείτε επίσης να ευχαριστήσετε κάποιον.

==== Σε ένα συγκεκριμένο πρόσωπο σε ένα θέμα ====
Αν θέλετε να πείτε κάτι σε κάποιον συγκεκριμένα, μπορείτε να τον αναφέρετε στην γενική απάντησή σας, ή να κάνετε κλικ στο κουμπί &quot;''Απάντηση''&quot;.
Πατώντας στο &quot;''Απάντηση''&quot; θα προσθέσει μια ''Ανάρτηση'', κάτω από την ''Ανάρτηση'' που θέλετε να απαντήσετε άμεσα, εκτός αν εκείνη η ανάρτηση είναι η τελευταία από όλη τη συζήτηση. Για αυτή την τελευταία περίπτωση, υποθέτουμε ότι η απάντηση αφορά το ευρύτερο θέμα και η απάντηση θα είναι απευθείας κάτω από την τελευταία.

Για να παρέχετε καλύτερο πλαίσιο στην απάντησή σας, μπορείτε επίσης να παραθέσετε το μήνυμα κάποιου κάνοντας αντιγραφή και επικόλληση ενός μέρους του.

Η ''Ανάρτησή'' σας εξαρτάται από την ''Ανάρτηση'' στην οποία απαντήσατε.
Αυτή η ''Ανάρτηση'' είναι σχεδιασμένη ως συγκεκριμένη απάντηση. Θα διαχωρίζεται από την κύρια συζήτηση με γκρι γραμμή. 
Ωστόσο, κάθε πρόσωπο που παρακολουθεί το ''Θέμα'' θα λάβει μια ειδοποίηση για την απάντησή σας, όπως όλες τις απαντήσεις.

{{anchor|create}}
== Δημιουργία συζήτησης ==
[[File:New discussion in Flow - Sept. 2015.png|thumb|534x534px|Πως να δημιουργήσετε μια συζήτηση: κάντε κλικ στην μπάρα &quot;Εκκίνηση νέου θέματος&quot;.]]
Σε μια σελίδα που χρησιμοποιεί Δομημένες Συζητήσεις, η δημιουργία νέου θέματος είναι εύκολη: απλά χρειάζεται να κάνετε κλικ στο πεδίο &quot;Εκκίνηση νέου θέματος. Η Δομημένξ Συζήτηση θα ετοιμάσει δυο πεδία.

Το πρώτο πεδίο είναι &quot;εκκίνηση νέου θέματος&quot;, επιλέξτε ένα σχετικό τίτλο. Το δεύτερο πεδίο είναι &quot;Δημοσιεύσετε ένα νέο μήνυμα στη...&quot;, προσθέστε το κείμενό σας. Επιλέξτε τον τίτλο σας σοφά αν θέλετε να προσελκύσετε αναγνώστες: οι άνθρωποι θα τον βλέπουν στις Ειδοποιήσεις τους, χωρίς άλλες λεπτομέρειες.

Όταν είστε έτοιμοι, κάντε κλικ στο κουμπί &quot;Προσθήκη θέματος&quot;. Η ''Ανάρτησή'' σας είναι δημοσιευμένη, κάθε πρόσωπο που παρακολουθεί τη σελίδα θα ειδοποιηθεί για την δημιουργία αυτού του νέου θέματος.

Θα εγγραφείτε αυτόματα όταν δημιουργείτε ένα νέο θέμα: θα λαμβάνετε μια ειδοποίηση όταν κάποιος απαντά.

* επίσης δείτε:[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Σύνοψη θέματος / Επίλυση θέματος]]

{{anchor|watch}}
=== Παρακολούθηση ===

==== Ενός θέματος ====

Για να παρακολουθήσετε ένα συγκεκριμένο θέμα, κάντε κλικ στο αστέρι στην κορυφή του ''Θέματος'', κοντά στον τίτλο. Γίνεται μπλε. Αν είναι ήδη μπλε, ήδη παρακολουθείτε αυτό το θέμα.

Όσο παρακολουθείτε, θα λαμβάνετε μια ειδοποίηση για κάθε επεξεργασία σε αυτό το ''Θέμα'', και μια νέα γραμμή στη λίστα παρακολούθησής σας.

Όταν δημιουργείτε ένα ''Θέμα'', εγγράφεστε αυτόματα σε αυτό το ''Θέμα''.

==== Μια σελίδα Συζήτησης ====

Για να παρακολουθήσετε μια ολόκληρη σελίδα, κάντε κλικ στο αστέρι στην κορυφή της σελίδας, κοντά στο πεδίο αναζήτησης. Γίνεται μπλε. Αν είναι ήδη μπλε, ήδη παρακολουθείτε αυτή τη σελίδα.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Όσο παρακολουθείτε, θα λαμβάνετε μια ειδοποίηση για κάθε νέο θέμα που αναρτάται σε αυτή τη σελίδα συζήτησης. Θα έχετε επίσης και μια νέα γραμμή στη λίστα παρακολούθησης.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|notifications}}
=== Ενημερώσεις ===

Μπορείτε να απενεργοποιήσετε τις ειδοποιήσεις Δομημένων Συζητήσεων από τις προτιμήσεις ειδοποιήσεών σας. Η λίστα παρακολούθησής σας θα εξακολουθήσει να ενημερώνεται με μια νέα γραμμή για κάθε θέμα στη σελίδα συζήτησης που παρακολουθείτε ή με μια νέα γραμμή όταν κάποιος απαντά σε ένα Θέμα που παρακολουθείτε.

{{anchor|browse}}
== Περιήγηση και αρχειοθέτηση ==

Όλα τα Θέματα που εμφανίζονται σε ένα πίνακα βρίσκονται σε ένα πίνακα περιεχομένων. Μπορείτε να περιηγηθείτε σε όλα αυτά τα Θέματα σε αυτό τον πίνακα.

Η αρχειοθέτηση είναι αυτοματοποιημένη: Όλες οι συζητήσεις εξαφανίζονται όταν δεν είναι άλλο ενεργές. Μπορείτε να εμφανίσετε παλιότερα Θέματα κυλώντας κάτω στη σελίδα, ή κάνοντας αναζήτηση στον πίνακα περιεχομένων.

* επίσης δείτε:[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Σύνοψη θέματος / Επίλυση θέματος]]

== Προχωρήστε περαιτέρω ==
* Συχνές ερωτήσεις
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Design FAQ|2=Σχεδιασμός}}
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Release and features FAQ|2=Εκδόσεις και λειτουργίες}}

[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>mga4ufjxcgxyya8kwm7z0g3czhzmuc0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>User:Sebastian Berlin (WMSE)/T309778</title>
    <ns>2</ns>
    <id>613274</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401672</id>
      <parentid>5398796</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T17:44:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>2A02:9B0:4005:DE4C:F8A3:90F0:496D:AD04</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Blanked the page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="0" />
      <sha1>phoiac9h4m842xq45sp7s6u21eteeq1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401676</id>
      <parentid>5401672</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T17:58:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mainframe98</username>
        <id>2319711</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/2A02:9B0:4005:DE4C:F8A3:90F0:496D:AD04|2A02:9B0:4005:DE4C:F8A3:90F0:496D:AD04]] ([[User talk:2A02:9B0:4005:DE4C:F8A3:90F0:496D:AD04|talk]]) to last version by Sebastian Berlin (WMSE)</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5332" xml:space="preserve">'''Empty line'''
&lt;blockquote&gt;Symbols and other special characters not available on your keyboard can be inserted in a multitude of ways. Many Operating Systems and browsers allow you to insert special characters through a menu option or Operating System panel. Additionally, you can use the WikiEditor or [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]] to insert them into the edit screen.

As a last resort, you can use a special sequence of characters. Those sequences are called HTML entities. For example, the following sequence (entity) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' when inserted will be shown as &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; HTML symbol → and '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' when inserted will be shown as an &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; HTML symbol —.&lt;/blockquote&gt;
----
'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;'''
&lt;blockquote&gt;Symbols and other special characters not available on your keyboard can be inserted in a multitude of ways. Many Operating Systems and browsers allow you to insert special characters through a menu option or Operating System panel. Additionally, you can use the WikiEditor or [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]] to insert them into the edit screen.&lt;br /&gt;
As a last resort, you can use a special sequence of characters. Those sequences are called HTML entities. For example, the following sequence (entity) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' when inserted will be shown as &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; HTML symbol → and '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' when inserted will be shown as an &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; HTML symbol —.&lt;/blockquote&gt;
----
'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; x 2'''
&lt;blockquote&gt;Symbols and other special characters not available on your keyboard can be inserted in a multitude of ways. Many Operating Systems and browsers allow you to insert special characters through a menu option or Operating System panel. Additionally, you can use the WikiEditor or [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]] to insert them into the edit screen.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
As a last resort, you can use a special sequence of characters. Those sequences are called HTML entities. For example, the following sequence (entity) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' when inserted will be shown as &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; HTML symbol → and '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' when inserted will be shown as an &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; HTML symbol —.&lt;/blockquote&gt;
----
'''Empty line'''
&lt;blockquote&gt;Symbols and other special characters not available on your keyboard can be inserted in a multitude of ways. Many Operating Systems and browsers allow you to insert special characters through a menu option or Operating System panel. Additionally, you can use the WikiEditor or [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]] to insert them into the edit screen.

As a last resort, you can use a special sequence of characters. Those sequences are called HTML entities. For example, the following sequence (entity) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' when inserted will be shown as &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; HTML symbol → and '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' when inserted will be shown as an &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; HTML symbol —.&lt;/blockquote&gt;
----
'''Two separate &amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;'''
&lt;blockquote&gt;Symbols and other special characters not available on your keyboard can be inserted in a multitude of ways. Many Operating Systems and browsers allow you to insert special characters through a menu option or Operating System panel. Additionally, you can use the WikiEditor or [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]] to insert them into the edit screen.&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;blockquote&gt;As a last resort, you can use a special sequence of characters. Those sequences are called HTML entities. For example, the following sequence (entity) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' when inserted will be shown as &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; HTML symbol → and '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' when inserted will be shown as an &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; HTML symbol —.&lt;/blockquote&gt;
----
'''Manually added &amp;lt;p&amp;gt; (what it should look like)'''
&lt;blockquote&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Symbols and other special characters not available on your keyboard can be inserted in a multitude of ways. Many Operating Systems and browsers allow you to insert special characters through a menu option or Operating System panel. Additionally, you can use the WikiEditor or [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]] to insert them into the edit screen.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;As a last resort, you can use a special sequence of characters. Those sequences are called HTML entities. For example, the following sequence (entity) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' when inserted will be shown as &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; HTML symbol → and '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' when inserted will be shown as an &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; HTML symbol —.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;
----
'''&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt; tags on their own lines'''
&lt;blockquote&gt;
Symbols and other special characters not available on your keyboard can be inserted in a multitude of ways. Many Operating Systems and browsers allow you to insert special characters through a menu option or Operating System panel. Additionally, you can use the WikiEditor or [[VisualEditor/Special characters|VisualEditor]] to insert them into the edit screen.

As a last resort, you can use a special sequence of characters. Those sequences are called HTML entities. For example, the following sequence (entity) '''&amp;amp;rarr;''' when inserted will be shown as &lt;ins&gt;right arrow&lt;/ins&gt; HTML symbol → and '''&amp;amp;mdash;''' when inserted will be shown as an &lt;ins&gt;em dash&lt;/ins&gt; HTML symbol —.
&lt;/blockquote&gt;</text>
      <sha1>ji07t7piqfjjy902axovziqxo90z2er</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/ta</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>615028</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402789</id>
      <parentid>2233277</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:53:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="268" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|மேற்கோள் வார்ப்புருக்களைப் பயன்படுத்த உதவி]] அல்லது [[$2|சைட்டாய்டின் citoid's $3 ஆழியைப் பயன்படுத்த உதவி]]</text>
      <sha1>ful3tkudm7djrl8bjax53l312jghkrk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Cross-wiki Search Result Improvements/pt-br</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>615798</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402747</id>
      <parentid>5334751</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:19:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16306" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
== Uma nova meta ==

O [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Discovery|departamento Discovery]] está examinando a possibilidade de fornecer resultados de pesquisa de outros projetos da Wikimedia com o mesmo idioma (comumente chamados de pesquisas ''globais'').   

Por exemplo, se você estivesse no Wikivoyage francês e pesquisasse por “'''[https://fr.wikivoyage.org/w/index.php?search=milk leite]'''”, seriam apresentados artigos correspondentes da Wikipédia francesa ''e'' de outros projetos da Wikimedia em francês (ex.: [https://fr.wiktionary.org/wiki/milk Wikcionário] e [https://fr.wikiquote.org/wiki/Sp%C3%A9cial:Recherche/Milk?searchToken=9n1mwlbd2kk8yqf2y0ayg1gbe Wikiquote]).  

Nesta página, tentaremos resumir algumas das nossas ideias. Convidamos todos os colaboradores a discutir abertamente na página de discussão sobre essa potencial mudança.

{{Note|1=A ideia relaciona-se um pouco com o [[wmfblog:2016/07/27/wikipedia-language-search/|novo recurso]] que o departamento Discovery (sob o [[Wikimedia Discovery/Search|projeto Pesquisa]]) implantou em 2016. Esse recurso exibe resultados de outras edições da Wikipédia se for determinado que o(a) usuário(a) possa ter usado um termo em outro idioma e se a pesquisa retornar menos que 2 resultados. O tópico desta página – uma nova exibição dos resultados de pesquisa através de wikiprojetos do mesmo idioma – estará em adição ao novo recurso de detecção de idioma, não em substituição.}}

== A justificativa ==
A maneira da qual a pesquisa funciona nos projetos da Wikimedia é esta: cada projeto tem um índice de pesquisa.
Isso significa que atualmente não há como pesquisar através de todos os projetos por resultados relevantes ''ao mesmo tempo''.
No entanto, o idioma sempre será o mesmo numa pesquisa, e alguns visitantes podem estar interessados em informações que poderiam estar nos projetos irmãos de mesmo idioma.

O fornecimento de resultados de pesquisas globais (e no mesmo idioma) dará mais informações aos visitantes, maior visibilidade aos outros projetos e aumentará o número de resultados para visitantes, que inclui o potencial para pesquisas que sempre retornem resultados. 

Exibir resultados de pesquisa a mais entre os projetos não apenas aumentará a visibilidade aos projetos irmãos como também aumentará o descobrimento de mais artigos de interesse, e possivelmente até trazer novos colaboradores.

== Por que ainda não fizemos isso? ==
[[File:New-what about the Chicago Cubs?.png|thumb|Página de resultados de uma pesquisa na Wikipédia inglesa.]]
'''Por que não ter um só índice para pesquisar em todos os projetos e em todos os idiomas?'''
* Podemos responder como “tecnicamente complexo”: o tamanho do índice de resultados seria quase em terabytes. Por exemplo, o índice de artigos no banco de dados da Wikipédia inglesa tem cerca de 200 gigabytes. A rapidez no fornecimento de resultados seria impactada se usássemos um índice para todo o banco de dados.
* Outra razão para essa separação entre idiomas justifica-se por não ser muito útil pesquisar um tópico em ''todos'' os idiomas. Pesquisar por “Paris” e ver o mesmo artigo em português, inglês e francês não ajudaria muito na descoberta de informações.

'''Os projetos ingleses são bem grandes:'''
* O índice da Wikipédia inglesa para todos os artigos tem cerca de 200 GB
* O Wikinotícias inglês tem cerca de 15 GB
* O Wikisource inglês tem cerca de 6 GB

'''Isso poderá impactar vários fluxos de trabalho existentes, por exibir resultados de pesquisa adicionais.'''
* Isso possivelmente afetaria robôs, colaboradores, pesquisadores, leitores, etc.

== O plano ==

No primeiro trimestre (julho – setembro de 2016), a equipe de Engenharia continuou a trabalhar nesses quatro passos:

'''Primeiro'''

* Combinar os índices de mesmo idioma ({{phab|T139498}}) {{partially done}}
* Pedir ajuda da comunidade – incluindo o tema dessa página. ({{phab|T137312}}) {{Done}}
* As equipes de Pesquisa e de Design da WMF criarão simulações de como os novos resultados serão exibidos. {{Done}}

'''Segundo'''

No final do próximo trimestre (outubro – dezembro de 2016), a equipe comparará a satisfação com a pesquisa. Isso será feito:

* após o índice global estar pronto para vários idiomas pré-selecionados ({{phab|T121541}}) {{Done}}
* após testes A/B para coletar dados em tempo real com os quais serão analizados ({{phab|T121546}}) {{not done}}
* e concluir as simulações para testes front-end em {{ll|Cross-wiki Search Result Improvements/Testing}} {{Done}}
* enquanto também criar uma instância no Labs para pré-testes. ({{phab|T151344}}) {{Done}}

'''Terceiro'''

Neste trimestre (janeiro – março de 2017), iremos:

* começar os testes A/B para a front-end do novo recurso para análise e comentários da comunidade. ({{phab|T145917}}) {{in progress}}
* continuar a desenvolver e melhorar o ''backend'' desse recurso {{In progress}}
* O primeiro teste A/B/C foi feito, mas não mostrou-se muito conclusivo ({{phab|T149806}})  {{Done}}
* Um segundo teste A/B será executado, após a correção de um pequeno ''bug'' na interface e a adição de quatro outras Wikipédias ao teste, de um total de oito. ({{phab|T160004}}) {{partially done}}

'''Quarto'''

Abril – junho de 2017:

* análise conclusiva do segundo teste A/B para os novos resultados da página de pesquisa ({{phab|T160008}}) {{partially done}}
* lançar uma [[Special:MyLanguage/Cross-wiki Search Result Improvements/village pump notice|nota]] às esplanadas anunciando a implantação ({{phab| T162276}}) {{in progress}}
* lançar uma postagem no blog sobre a pesquisa
* implantar em todas as Wikipédias

== Exemplos atuais da pesquisa ==
Já há algumas soluções feitas pela comunidade que divulgam outros projetos da Wikimedia e artigos no mesmo idioma.
Abaixo, uma pequena lista de exemplos: 

'''Páginas de resultados de pesquisa para alguns idiomas:'''

* ''Crioulo haitiano:''
** https://ht.wikipedia.org/wiki/Espesyal:Chache/Milk
** Os resultados no final da página são adicionados pela [[mw:Extension:ArticlePlaceholder|extensão ArticlePlaceholder]]
* ''Francês:''
** https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spécial:Recherche/Milk
** Os resultados no final da página são adicionados pelo [[d:User:Yair rand/WikidataInfo.js|script WikidataInfo.js]]
* ''Italiano:''
** https://it.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Speciale:Ricerca/Milk&amp;fulltext=1
** Os resultados no final da página são adicionados pelo [[d:User:Yair rand/WikidataInfo.js|script WikidataInfo.js]]
** A navecaixa no lado direito da página é adicionada pela mensagem [[w:it:MediaWiki:Search-interwiki-custom|MediaWiki:Search-interwiki-custom]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''''Gadget'' External Search:'''
* [[mw:MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch.js]]
** Este ''gadget'' pesquisa numa lista personalizada de sites técnicos, fornecendo listas de resultados em guias. Para mais informações veja [[mw:Wikimedia technical search]].
*** Aqui há uma [http://imagizer.imageshack.com/img923/7500/nLyRSM.png captura de tela] para esta ação. &lt;small&gt;(Infelizmente, buscar em “google.com/cse” pode trazer uma mensagem do filtro de spam de alguns navegadores.)&lt;/small&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

== Como esses resultados adicionais seriam exibidos? ==

O surgimento destes resultados está aberto para discussão, e temos esboços suficientes abaixo com mais possibilidades de [[Cross-wiki Search Result Improvements/Design|design]]. Abaixo há alguns exemplos de como os novos resultados ''poderiam parecer'', baseando-se em soluções existentes em algumas wikis:

&lt;gallery heights=&quot;150&quot; widths=&quot;150&quot; align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;
File:Search results page-enwiki right-hand-box-general-projects.png|thumb|Exemplo de uma página wiki com adição de uma caixa no lado direito que mostra ligações aos projetos irmãos que poderiam ser de interesse e relacionadas à pesquisa original.
File:Search results page-frwiki box-with-articles-in-projects.png|thumb|Exemplo de uma página wiki com adição de uma lista de ligações para artigos dos projetos irmãos que poderiam ser de interesse e relacionadas à pesquisa original (além de um histórico da página).
File:Search-results-redesign add tab for wikiprojects.png|thumb|Exemplo de uma página de resultados de pesquisa com uma aba adicional para wikis.
File:SERP-tabs-top.png|thumb|Exemplo de interface com abas – veja mais em [[Cross-wiki Search Result Improvements/Design|Design]].
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Ajude-nos a escolher a solução ==

'''[[Talk:Cross-wiki Search Result Improvements|Por favor, diga o que você acha!]]'''
* Dois trimestres serão necessários, pelo menos, para fazer a arquitetura e o design da implementação técnica.
* A equipe gostaria de fazer alguns testes e mostrá-los para a comunidade no final de 2016.
** Decidimos nas simulações em {{ll|Cross-wiki Search Result Improvements/Testing}} que isso será testado no primeiro trimestre de 2017.

== As perguntas ==

A equipe tem várias perguntas, e isto é o que gostaríamos de saber da comunidade:

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# [[Topic:Tatx2x3vacbkyh19|Como esses novos resultados de pesquisa devem ser exibidos?]]
## Exibir os resultados locais ''primeiro'' e então exibir uma opção para ''mostrar mais'' de outras wikis?
## Juntar os resultados adicionais com os locais?
## Exibir os resultados adicionais ao lado (ou ao final) da página?
## Ter uma opção para ''desativar'' esses outros resultados relevantes?
##* Isso poderia ser uma ''keyword'' ou um botão para um visitante clicar.
##* Ou algo semelhante à ''keyword'' &lt;code&gt;local:&lt;/code&gt;, que pesquisa por imagens locais, não no Commons.
## Exibir os resultados adicionais como lista ou grade?
## Incluir metadados relevantes (imagens e/ou descrições curtas) com os resultados?
## Exibir o tamanho do arquivo (p. ex. &lt;code&gt;848 bytes (104 palavras)&lt;/code&gt;) e a data de criação/modificação?
## Indicar que clicar num resultado levaria o usuário a outra wiki?
## Quantos resultados interwiki devem ser mostrados – 1, 2, 3 ou mais?
## Limitar o método existente de exibir resultados da wiki local?
##* Atualmente, até 10 000 resultados são exibidos de forma paginada, mas testes indicam que geralmente apenas os 3 primeiros são úteis.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
## Should the results from whatever wiki you're on to be shown ''first'' and then have an option to ''show more'' from other wikis?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
## Should the additional results be inter-mixed with the local wiki results?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
## Should the additional results be displayed off to the side (or maybe the bottom) of the results page?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
## Should we have the option to ''turn off''  these other relevant search results (a user and/or project opt-out)?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
##* This could be a keyword search term or maybe a button for a visitor to click
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
##* This could also be similar to the &lt;code&gt;local:&lt;/code&gt; keyword that will only search for images on the local wiki and not Commons files, for instance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
## Would the additional results be best displayed as a list or a grid design?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
## Should we include relevant metadata (images and/or a short description) with the search results?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
## Do the results need to have the size of the article (i.e.: &lt;code&gt;848 bytes (104 words)&lt;/code&gt;) and the date it was created/modified?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
## Should we indicate that clicking on a result will take you to another wiki project?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
## How many results from other wikis should we show - 1, 2, 3, or more?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
## Should we limit the existing method of displaying results from the wiki that you searched on?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
##* We currently show up to 10,000 results in a paginated manner, but testing shows that generally only the first 3 results are ever acted upon.
&lt;/div&gt;
# [[Topic:Tatx3bzhf1yabzd6|Esses novos resultados de pesquisa devem funcionar em todos os projetos da Wikimedia?]]
## Por exemplo, se você estiver no Wikiquote, gostaria de ver resultados relevantes do Wikivoyage, da Wikipédia e do Wikinotícias?
## Ou, se na Wikipédia, apenas gostaria de ver resultados de outras wikis?
# [[Topic:Tatx3sj9349s9ypl|Esses outros resultados relevantes seriam úteis e estimulariam uma exploração profunda ao tópico?]]
## É “chato” ver resultados de outras wikis?
## Reciprocamente, estimularia o usuário ter mais conhecimento?
## Quanto “peso” damos para os resultados interwiki?  
# [[Topic:Tatx44liaktu6imo|Contribuições serão estimuladas pela exibição de resultados adicionais de outras wikis?]]
## P. ex.: se pesquisar por &lt;code&gt;Piazza del Duomo&lt;/code&gt; e não ver um artigo no Wikivoyage sobre a praça (digamos que você esteja no Wikiquote), isso estimularia você a começar um artigo sobre ela?  
# [[Topic:Tatx4q0bzjzal301|Devemos limitar o número de idiomas pesquisados?]]
## P. ex.: apenas usar os 50 idiomas principais para implementar o recurso?
## Ou, apenas usar os idiomas aos quais estamos detectando filas?  

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also: Explore similar, Wiktionary widget, thumbnail icons in search results ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Cross-wiki Search Result Improvements/Design}} - Notas e ilustrações de design de como os resultados podem ser
* '''[[Cross-wiki_Search_Result_Improvements/explore_similar|Explore Similar links]]''' on the search results page
** [[Cross-wiki_Search_Result_Improvements/Testing#A.2FB_test:_Add_.27explore_similar.27_pages_and_categories_for_search_results|A/B testing]] information
** [[Cross-wiki_Search_Result_Improvements/self-guided_testing#Explore_similar|Self-guided testing]] step-by-step instructions
* '''[[Cross-wiki_Search_Result_Improvements/Wiktionary_widget|Wiktionary widget]]''' on the search results page
** [[Cross-wiki_Search_Result_Improvements/Testing#A.2FB_test:_Add_Wiktionary_widget_to_search_results_page|A/B testing]] information
** [[Cross-wiki_Search_Result_Improvements/self-guided_testing#Wiktionary_widget|Self-guided testing]] step-by-step instructions
* '''Adding thumbnail icons to search results'''
** [[Cross-wiki_Search_Result_Improvements/Testing#A.2FB_test:_Add_thumbnail_icons_to_search_results|A/B testing]] information

'''Etiquetas no Phabricator:'''

* [[phab:T137312|https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T137312]]
* [[phab:T136639|https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T136639]]
* [[phab:T139310|https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T139310]]

'''Notas de discussão:'''

* https://etherpad.wikimedia.org/p/interwiki-implications
* https://etherpad.wikimedia.org/p/inter-wiki
* https://etherpad.wikimedia.org/p/multi_project_indices

== {{ll|Cross-wiki Search Result Improvements/Testing|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A/B Testing&lt;/span&gt;}} ==
Após levar em consideração os comentários da comunidade e as recomendações da equipe de design, iremos iniciar os testes A/B.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Veja [[Cross-wiki Search Result Improvements/Testing|esta página]] para mais informações.&lt;/span&gt;
{{feedback|thing=Cross-wiki Search Result Improvements|author=the [[Discovery]] department|irc=wikimedia-discovery|ml=discovery|phab=discovery-search-sprint}}

== {{ll|Cross-wiki Search Result Improvements/self-guided testing|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Self-guided testing&lt;/span&gt;}} ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Esta [[Cross-wiki Search Result Improvements/self-guided testing|página]] foi criada para encorajar usuários a testarem o recurso, através de uma página auto-guiada com exemplos para aqueles que não são tão técnicos e aqueles são um pouco mais experientes.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Search{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>e5izkl2jhui1h41rjegpfvrmdlckypd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Editor</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>618141</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402685</id>
      <parentid>5370817</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make variable names untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8552" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:1--&gt;
You may be looking for:

== Current == &lt;!--T:83--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:80--&gt; Current editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/translate&gt;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Editing tool&lt;/translate&gt;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:3--&gt; Screenshot&lt;/translate&gt;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Year&lt;/translate&gt;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Platform&lt;/translate&gt;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; Notes&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; the default MediaWiki editor, which is an HTML &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{tag|textarea|open}}&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Screenshot of the HTML textarea&lt;/translate&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2003
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; Desktop and mobile&lt;/translate&gt;
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; This does not have a toolbar.  It can be seen when JavaScript is disabled, or when &quot;&lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; is disabled in &lt;tvar name=3&gt;[[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]]&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; Extension:WikiEditor&lt;/translate&gt;]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:18--&gt; A screenshot of WikiEditor&lt;/translate&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2010
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; Desktop&lt;/translate&gt;
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:21--&gt; This can be seen when &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; is enabled in &lt;tvar name=2&gt;[[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]]&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; VisualEditor&lt;/translate&gt;]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; Screenshot showing VisualEditor's visual mode&lt;/translate&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2012
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt; Desktop and mobile&lt;/translate&gt;
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:31--&gt; A [[w:Formatted text|rich-text]] [[w:WYSIWYG|WYSIWYG]] editing system&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:22--&gt; 2017 wikitext editor&lt;/translate&gt;]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:23--&gt; Screenshot of VisualEditor's built-in wikitext mode&lt;/translate&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2017
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; Desktop&lt;/translate&gt;
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; A mode within &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}}&lt;/tvar&gt; to edit wiki markup.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:32--&gt; Proofread Page&lt;/translate&gt;]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:34--&gt; Desktop&lt;/translate&gt;
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; Used at the [[S:|Wikisources]]&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:36--&gt; wikEd&lt;/translate&gt;]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:37--&gt; Screenshot of wikEd&lt;/translate&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2006
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:39--&gt; Desktop&lt;/translate&gt;
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:78--&gt; An entirely volunteer-supported wikitext editor.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:40--&gt; This is generally run as a gadget or user script, but it is run as an extension on some non-Wikimedia wikis.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:41--&gt; CodeEditor&lt;/translate&gt;]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; Screenshot of the code editor&lt;/translate&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2011
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:44--&gt; Desktop&lt;/translate&gt;
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:45--&gt; This is used for editing JavaScript and other code pages.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:46--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}&lt;/tvar&gt;'s wikitext editor&lt;/translate&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:47--&gt; Screenshot of wikitext editing on Mobile Web&lt;/translate&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2013
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:49--&gt; Mobile&lt;/translate&gt;
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:54--&gt; ContentTranslation&lt;/translate&gt;]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:55--&gt; Screenshot of ContentTranslation's editor&lt;/translate&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2014
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:57--&gt; Desktop&lt;/translate&gt;
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:58--&gt; Structured Discussions&lt;/translate&gt;]] &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:77--&gt; (previously known as Flow)&lt;/translate&gt;
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:59--&gt; Screenshot of a comment and the beginning of a reply to it in Structured Discussions&lt;/translate&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2013
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:61--&gt; Desktop and mobile&lt;/translate&gt;
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:62--&gt; Structured Discussions supports wikitext and visual modes.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:92--&gt; Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/translate&gt;
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:93--&gt; An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:94--&gt; It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:95--&gt; Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/translate&gt;
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:96--&gt; A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:97--&gt; Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:98--&gt; It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/translate&gt; 
|-
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:63--&gt; Editor in the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Android FAQ&lt;/tvar&gt;|Android]] app&lt;/translate&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:64--&gt; Screenshot of the editing interface on an Android phone&lt;/translate&gt;|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:66--&gt; Mobile&lt;/translate&gt;
|
|-
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:67--&gt; Editor in the [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ&lt;/tvar&gt;|iOS]] app&lt;/translate&gt;
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:68--&gt; Screenshot of the editing interface on an iPhone&lt;/translate&gt;|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:70--&gt; Mobile&lt;/translate&gt;
|
|-
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:76--&gt; [[&lt;tvar name=ext-td&gt;Extension:TemplateData&lt;/tvar&gt;|TemplateData]] editor&lt;/translate&gt;
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:75--&gt; Desktop&lt;/translate&gt;
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:71--&gt; Wikivoyage Listing Editor&lt;/translate&gt;]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:72--&gt; Desktop&lt;/translate&gt;
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:73--&gt; Specialized JavaScript-based editing tool for inserting one of several templates at Wikivoyage&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|}

&lt;translate&gt;
== Former == &lt;!--T:81--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:82--&gt; Former editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:84--&gt; Editing tool&lt;/translate&gt;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:85--&gt; Screenshot&lt;/translate&gt;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:86--&gt; Year&lt;/translate&gt;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:87--&gt; Platform&lt;/translate&gt;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:88--&gt; Notes&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; The 2006 JavaScript &quot;classic&quot; editor, &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}&lt;/tvar&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; Screenshot of 2006 wikitext editor&lt;/translate&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Desktop&lt;/translate&gt;
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; This was seen when the &quot;showtoolbar&quot; preference was enabled from 2006–2010. After then, it was only shown for users who disabled the &quot;enhanced-toolbar&quot; (2010 editor) preference. This editor was [[phab:T30856|removed]] in [[MediaWiki 1.32]].&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:79--&gt; A similar toolbar is available as a volunteer-supported local gadget at some wikis.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:50--&gt; MobileFrontend's original wikitext editor&lt;/translate&gt;
|
|2012–2014
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:52--&gt; Mobile&lt;/translate&gt;
|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:53--&gt; This was a mobile-specific set of modifications to the 2003 desktop wikitext editor. No longer deployed.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|}

&lt;translate&gt;
== See also == &lt;!--T:89--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:90--&gt; not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/translate&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:91--&gt; not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/translate&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>p49ztd3prq89gt9btgd72zb0v6zf4bv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/32/bg</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>619019</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403242</id>
      <parentid>2245744</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:04:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="816" xml:space="preserve">* '''Обновяване на помощните страници''' - Всички наши проекти имат помощни страници, които улесняват новите потребители при допринасянето им. За съжаление всички те са изградени около редактора за уикимаркиране, и с развитието на Визуалния редактор, скрийншотите и ръководствата губят актуалността си. Би било много полезно, ако хората [[$ve-help|актуализат помощните страници]], въз основа на [[$ug|нашето ръководство за употреба на Визуалния редактор]].</text>
      <sha1>rcow0cbaajdptcjk84p4vwfdqc44q1v</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/33/bg</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>619020</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403199</id>
      <parentid>2245746</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:45:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1021" xml:space="preserve">* '''Добавяне на TemplateData в шаблони''' — Инструментът разполага с хубава редактор на шаблони, който е описан по-подробно в нашата [[$ug|помощна страница]]. Както можете да се уверите, ако го използвате в Уикипедия, някои шаблони имат именувани параметри и хубави описания, които ги правят лесни за употреба. Други нямат. Това е така, защото шаблоните първо се нуждаят от &quot;TemplateData&quot; преди тази функция да може да работи. Ако сте заинтересувани от добавянето на TemplateData, имаме [[$td-tutor|ръководство за това]], заедно със [[$td|списък на най-важните шаблони, към които да го добавите]].</text>
      <sha1>bn2lwtdl0nmgqpmlbm0tcgyxndh73ur</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/bg</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>619022</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402992</id>
      <parentid>2255874</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:51:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="535" xml:space="preserve">* '''Помогнете на новите потребители''' — Макар, че редактирането с Визуалния редактор е по-лесно, изработването на взаимодействие с общността може да бъде трудно. Моля, отделете повече време  [[$new-users|за помощ или в IRC-канала]], за да помогнете на новодошлите при процеса на запознаване с Уикипедия.</text>
      <sha1>0rfiv32j2qsiiconlsxqpwp5ednlv6o</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403014</id>
      <parentid>5402992</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="527" xml:space="preserve">* '''Помогнете на новите потребители''' — Макар, че редактирането с Визуалния редактор е по-лесно, изработването на взаимодействие с общността може да бъде трудно. Моля, отделете повече време  [[$1|за помощ или в IRC-канала]], за да помогнете на новодошлите при процеса на запознаване с Уикипедия.</text>
      <sha1>lqj0s7x4zwpg8jf6c8wdnttmow08iku</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Social tools/pt-br</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>619862</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401983</id>
      <parentid>4429453</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1869" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Ferramentas sociais}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Visão geral}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Informação do desenvolvedor}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshots&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=História}}
|group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other social extensions&lt;/span&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other related extensions&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;independent of SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>hf7fnfdw5bfo73r7bzw7452pk8b1aqk</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401996</id>
      <parentid>5401983</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:10:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1870" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Ferramentas sociais}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Visão geral}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Informação do desenvolvedor}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshots&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=História}}
|group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other social extensions&lt;/span&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other related extensions&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;independent of SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>1i93fpt89kfqu8dw2b3qq9pu4jxdniv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/bg</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>621051</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402918</id>
      <parentid>5355642</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="52271" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Основен преглед ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== File transfer ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Изберете метод за прехвърляне на файлове:

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Secure copy with [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] or [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* С помощта на [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] клиент.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Друг метод. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Preliminary===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

# Проверете изискванията
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the RELEASE-NOTES file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Back up existing files and the database
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new files
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Upgrade extensions
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the update script to check the database
&lt;/div&gt;
# Тествайте обновлението
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Проверете изискванията === 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} изисква:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Едно от следните:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are using PostgreSQL, please also read {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

За повече информация, моля, прочетете {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} и {{ll|Compatibility}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Read the release notes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Clear pending jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Back up existing files and the database ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:''Full instructions: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Unpack the new files ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using a tarball package ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Command line ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Други файлове ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using Git ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Upgrade extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Other variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Run the update script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: ''See also {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Should I back up first?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Short answer: Yes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Why upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>ee2a4jehoz13jx4zczlkeieeaxa1py0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Project:Help/23/pl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>622961</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403350</id>
      <parentid>2256375</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:50:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Wargo</username>
        <id>25061</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updated translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="61" xml:space="preserve">=== Prośby o uprawnienia użytkowników na mediawiki.org ===</text>
      <sha1>mdzmr8uxzk60bh54k4rha3kug65nti1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/bg</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>623178</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402757</id>
      <parentid>2256908</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:38:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="114" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Помощ за шаблоните за цитиране]] или [[$2|Помощ за бутона за $3]]</text>
      <sha1>8i9buhoia63nbblhje9ru7u7fb6fo62</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>624649</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402486</id>
      <parentid>4502667</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:13:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="74" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|Correggi e traduci la documentazione dell'estensione Translate]]</text>
      <sha1>rcxp6tyo3u2t1brdhmnann1eiw473h0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/135/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>625768</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402953</id>
      <parentid>2940374</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:42:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="152" xml:space="preserve">Oui, mais il se peut que vous deviez faire quelques petits changements. Le format de $1 est fondamentalement compatible avec les versions précédentes.</text>
      <sha1>d39k99w1dxkoj5ywdqkkjis7tf73aem</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/ca</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>627333</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402657</id>
      <parentid>5154663</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:51:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9564" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Aquesta pàgina és una guia ràpida sobre Discussions Estructurades.

Discussions Estructurades abans es deia Flow.

Aquí obtindreu la informació més important sobre Discussions Estructurades i aprendreu com s'utilitza.
Tots els termes específics (en cursiva en el text) estan definits [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|al glossari]].

== Per què calia Flow ==
Flow és una manera nova de debatre.
L'estructura de les discussions ha canviat: ara una pàgina de discussió (un ''tauler'') és un agregat de ''temes'', i cada tema és independent i es pot seguir per separat.
Flow permet als usuaris escollir quins temes volen seguir; ja no cal seguir tota la pàgina.

Els temes nous s'afegeixen a dalt de tot de la pàgina.
Els temes es poden ordenar per la data de creació i per la data d'activitat més recent.
Les «Discussions Estructurades» permeten debatre tant mitjançant [[#basics|l'editor visual com mitjançant l'editor de wikitext del 2017]].

Cada resposta conté botons d'acció (''respon'', ''agraeix'') llestos per utilitzar.
Ja no cal que augmenteu el sagnat de les vostres respostes, ni que arxiveu les discussions ni que signeu.
Les discussions són més àgils i més accessibles per a tothom.

== Interfície ==

Disseny general d'un tauler de Flow. No s'hi mostren alguns elements que van al voltant dels missatges (signatura, botons per respondre, eines...).

{| style=&quot;width:70%;font-size:130%; margin:1em auto;&quot; 
| 
&lt;strong style=&quot;font-family:Linux Libertine,Georgia,Times,serif;font-size: 1.5em;line-height: 1.3;margin-bottom: 0.25em;padding: 0;&quot;&gt;
Títol del tauler
&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quadre desplegable per navegar els temes
{| 
| style=&quot;border:1px solid #222; width:100%; color:#AAA;padding: {{dir|{{pagelang}}|3px 3px 3px 180px|3px 180px 3px 3px}};&quot; | ''Camp per començar un nou tema''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Títol del tema
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Missatge 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Missatge 2
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;padding-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 5%; border:none;&quot; |Resposta al missatge 2 (creada prement el botó &quot;Respon&quot; de sota del missatge 2)
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Missatge 3
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Camp de resposta)''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Un altre tema amb un altre títol
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Missatge 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Camp de resposta)''
|}
| style=&quot;background-color:#EEEEEE; width:33%;padding: 1em;vertical-align:top;&quot; |Descripció del tauler
|}

== Com s'utilitza Flow ==
{{anchor|basics}}

=== Fonaments de l'edició ===
[[File:Flow toolbar - Apr. 2017.png|thumb|542x542px|La barra d'eines de les «Discussions Estructurades», amb botons d'estil, enllaços, esments i (a la dreta) canviar a un editor diferent (wikitext o visual).]]

Podeu participar en les converses mitjançant dos sistemes d'edició: el visual (predeterminat) i el [[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|wikitext del 2017]].
En tot moment podeu canviar entre el mode visual i el wikitext.

Quan responeu o creeu un tema nou, teniu una barra d'eines amb quatre botons:

* 3 botons a l'esquerra (en un teclat d'escriptura de dreta a esquerra):
** afegeix estil
** afegeix un enllaç (amb suggeriments i cerca)
** menciona a algú (amb suggeriments i cerca)
* un botó a la dreta per canviar d'editor.

En el mode d'edició visual, funcionen tant les dreceres de wikitext com les [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|dreceres de Flow]].

Durant la sessió, el lloc web recorda quin sistema preferiu, excepte si heu definit un editor preferit a les vostres preferències (pestanya «{{int|prefs-editing}}»).

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have opted-out the 2017 wikitext editor and/or the visual editor, you will have a simple wikitext fieldset to post or edit a reply, with no toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;{{int|flow-preference-visualeditor}}&quot; in your preferences (&quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot; tab) to opt-in and have a toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;

Recordeu: ja no no cal que sagneu el text quan escriviu o signeu el missatge!

Tots aquests fonaments de l'edició són aplicables a totes les discussions, respostes o per quan escriviu el ''tema''&lt;nowiki/&gt;, la ''descripció'' o el ''resum''.

* Vegeu també: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics#Edit|Modificar un tema o un missatge]]

{{anchor|post}}
=== Respondre ===

==== Al tema en general ====
En aquest cas, cada participant respon a sota de la discussió, en ordre cronològic.
És com una conversa wiki tradicional però sense sagnia, o com respondre correus electrònics.
El vostre ''missatge'' apareix sota tots els comentaris i depèn del ''tema''.

Si heu de dir alguna cosa especial a algú, podeu esmentar l'usuari o respondre-li (vegeu més endavant).
El botó &quot;respon&quot; s'utilitza en aquest cas, per a crear una digressió. Aquesta digressió crea una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|sagnia]]. Es poden afegir fins a set digressions.

El vostre ''missatge'' apareix sota el comentari a què
responeu, amb una sagnia (si no és que és l'últim del tauler).
També podeu simplement donar les gràcies a algú.

==== A una persona específica en un tema ====
Si voleu dir alguna cosa a algú en particular, ho podeu fer esmentant la persona en la vostra resposta al tema en general o fent clic al botó ''Respon'' just a sota de la publicació.
Fent clic a «Respon» afegireu una publicació, a sota de la publicació que voleu respondre directament, excepte si aquesta publicació és l'última de totes les discussions. En aquest cas, assumirem que la resposta és general del tema i la resposta apareixerà directament a sota de l'última publicació.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To provide a better context in your reply, you can also quote someone's message by copy-pasting part of it.
&lt;/div&gt;

El vostre ''missatge'' depèn del missatge a què responeu.
Aquesta publicació s'ha dissenyat com a resposta específica. Serà separada de la discussió general per una línia grisa. 
Tanmateix, tothom qui estigui seguint aquest ''tema'' rebrà una notificació de la vostra resposta, com amb totes les respostes.

{{anchor|create}}
=== Crear una discussió ===
[[File:New discussion in Flow - Sept. 2015.png|thumb|534x534px|Com crear una discussió: feu clic a la barra &quot;Comença un nou tema&quot;.]]
En una pàgina que utilitzi «Discussions Estructurades», crear un tema és fàcil: només cal que feu clic al camp «Comença un nou tema» i «Discussions Estructurades» prepararà dos camps.

El primer camp és &quot;Comença un nou tema&quot;: escolliu un títol adient. El segon camp és &quot;Envia un missatge nou a&quot;: afegiu-hi el text que vulgueu enviar. Si voleu atreure els lectors, escolliu un bon títol, perquè serà l'única cosa que els apareixerà a les Notificacions.

Quan ja ho tingueu llest, feu clic al botó &quot;Afegeix el tema&quot;. El vostre ''missatge'' ja és en línia i tothom qui estigui seguint aquesta pàgina rebrà una notificació sobre la creació d'aquest tema.

Quan creeu un tema, se us hi subscriu automàticament: quan algú respongui, rebreu una notificació.

* Vegeu també: [[Special:MyLanguage/Flow/Topics|Resumir un tema i marcar com a resolt un tema]]

{{anchor|watch}}
=== Seguir ===

==== Un tema ====

Per a seguir un tema específic, feu clic a l'estrella que hi ha dalt de tot del ''tema'', al costat del títol. Es torna blava. Si ja era blava és que ja estàveu seguint aquest tema.

Mentre seguiu aquest ''tema'', rebreu una notificació per cada modificació que s'hi faci, i una entrada a la vostra llista de seguiment.

Quan creeu un ''tema'', se us hi subscriu automàticament.

==== Una pàgina de discussió ====

Per a seguir una pàgina de discussió sencera, feu clic a l'estrella que hi ha a dalt de tot de la pàgina, al costat del camp de cerca. Es torna blava. Si ja era blava és que ja estàveu seguint aquesta pàgina.

Mentre seguiu aquesta pàgina de discussió, rebreu una notificació per cada tema que s'hi creï, i una entrada a la vostra llista de seguiment.

{{anchor|notifications}}
==== Notificacions ====

A les vostres Preferències, pestanya «Notificacions», podeu inhabilitar les notificacions de les «Discussions Estructurades». La llista de seguiment se us continuarà actualitzant amb una entrada per cada tema creat en una pàgina de discussió que seguiu o per cada resposta en un tema que seguiu.

{{anchor|browse}}
== Navegació i arxivament ==

Tots els temes presents en un tauler es llisten en una taula de continguts (&quot;Navega els temes&quot;) perquè pugueu navegar-hi fàcilment.

L'arxivament és automàtic: totes les converses desapareixen quan ja no són actives. Podeu mostrar els temes antics desplaçant-vos avall en la pàgina o cercant a la taula de continguts.

* Vegeu també: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Resumir un tema i marcar com a resolt un tema]]

== Per aprofundir-hi ==
* Preguntes més freqüents
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Design FAQ|2=Disseny}}
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Release and features FAQ|2=Llançaments i característiques}}

[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>qnpub6c47ppqopyhi3pvl37r8bavrh8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402676</id>
      <parentid>5402657</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:01:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9587" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Aquesta pàgina és una guia ràpida sobre Discussions Estructurades.

Discussions Estructurades abans es deia Flow.

Aquí obtindreu la informació més important sobre Discussions Estructurades i aprendreu com s'utilitza.
Tots els termes específics (en cursiva en el text) estan definits [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|al glossari]].

== Per què calia Flow ==
Flow és una manera nova de debatre.
L'estructura de les discussions ha canviat: ara una pàgina de discussió (un ''tauler'') és un agregat de ''temes'', i cada tema és independent i es pot seguir per separat.
Flow permet als usuaris escollir quins temes volen seguir; ja no cal seguir tota la pàgina.

Els temes nous s'afegeixen a dalt de tot de la pàgina.
Els temes es poden ordenar per la data de creació i per la data d'activitat més recent.
Les «Discussions Estructurades» permeten debatre tant mitjançant [[#basics|l'editor visual com mitjançant l'editor de wikitext del 2017]].

Cada resposta conté botons d'acció (''respon'', ''agraeix'') llestos per utilitzar.
Ja no cal que augmenteu el sagnat de les vostres respostes, ni que arxiveu les discussions ni que signeu.
Les discussions són més àgils i més accessibles per a tothom.

== Interfície ==

Disseny general d'un tauler de Flow. No s'hi mostren alguns elements que van al voltant dels missatges (signatura, botons per respondre, eines...).

{| style=&quot;width:70%;font-size:130%; margin:1em auto;&quot; 
| 
&lt;strong style=&quot;font-family:Linux Libertine,Georgia,Times,serif;font-size: 1.5em;line-height: 1.3;margin-bottom: 0.25em;padding: 0;&quot;&gt;
Títol del tauler
&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Quadre desplegable per navegar els temes
{| 
| style=&quot;border:1px solid #222; width:100%; color:#AAA;padding: {{dir|{{pagelang}}|3px 3px 3px 180px|3px 180px 3px 3px}};&quot; | ''Camp per començar un nou tema''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Títol del tema
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Missatge 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Missatge 2
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;padding-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 5%; border:none;&quot; |Resposta al missatge 2 (creada prement el botó &quot;Respon&quot; de sota del missatge 2)
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Missatge 3
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Camp de resposta)''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Un altre tema amb un altre títol
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Missatge 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Camp de resposta)''
|}
| style=&quot;background-color:#EEEEEE; width:33%;padding: 1em;vertical-align:top;&quot; |Descripció del tauler
|}

== Com s'utilitza Flow ==
{{anchor|basics}}

=== Fonaments de l'edició ===
[[File:Flow toolbar - Apr. 2017.png|thumb|542x542px|La barra d'eines de les «Discussions Estructurades», amb botons d'estil, enllaços, esments i (a la dreta) canviar a un editor diferent (wikitext o visual).]]

Podeu participar en les converses mitjançant dos sistemes d'edició: el visual (predeterminat) i el [[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|wikitext del 2017]].
En tot moment podeu canviar entre el mode visual i el wikitext.

Quan responeu o creeu un tema nou, teniu una barra d'eines amb quatre botons:

* 3 botons a l'esquerra (en un teclat d'escriptura de dreta a esquerra):
** afegeix estil
** afegeix un enllaç (amb suggeriments i cerca)
** menciona a algú (amb suggeriments i cerca)
* un botó a la dreta per canviar d'editor.

En el mode d'edició visual, funcionen tant les dreceres de wikitext com les [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|dreceres de Flow]].

Durant la sessió, el lloc web recorda quin sistema preferiu, excepte si heu definit un editor preferit a les vostres preferències (pestanya «{{int|prefs-editing}}»).

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have opted-out the 2017 wikitext editor and/or the visual editor, you will have a simple wikitext fieldset to post or edit a reply, with no toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;{{int|flow-preference-visualeditor}}&quot; in your preferences (&quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot; tab) to opt-in and have a toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;

Recordeu: ja no no cal que sagneu el text quan escriviu o signeu el missatge!

Tots aquests fonaments de l'edició són aplicables a totes les discussions, respostes o per quan escriviu el ''tema''&lt;nowiki/&gt;, la ''descripció'' o el ''resum''.

* Vegeu també: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics#Edit|Modificar un tema o un missatge]]

{{anchor|post}}
=== Respondre ===

==== Al tema en general ====
En aquest cas, cada participant respon a sota de la discussió, en ordre cronològic.
És com una conversa wiki tradicional però sense sagnia, o com respondre correus electrònics.
El vostre ''missatge'' apareix sota tots els comentaris i depèn del ''tema''.

Si heu de dir alguna cosa especial a algú, podeu esmentar l'usuari o respondre-li (vegeu més endavant).
El botó &quot;respon&quot; s'utilitza en aquest cas, per a crear una digressió. Aquesta digressió crea una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|sagnia]]. Es poden afegir fins a set digressions.

El vostre ''missatge'' apareix sota el comentari a què
responeu, amb una sagnia (si no és que és l'últim del tauler).
També podeu simplement donar les gràcies a algú.

==== A una persona específica en un tema ====
Si voleu dir alguna cosa a algú en particular, ho podeu fer esmentant la persona en la vostra resposta al tema en general o fent clic al botó ''Respon'' just a sota de la publicació.
Fent clic a «Respon» afegireu una publicació, a sota de la publicació que voleu respondre directament, excepte si aquesta publicació és l'última de totes les discussions. En aquest cas, assumirem que la resposta és general del tema i la resposta apareixerà directament a sota de l'última publicació.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To provide a better context in your reply, you can also quote someone's message by copy-pasting part of it.
&lt;/div&gt;

El vostre ''missatge'' depèn del missatge a què responeu.
Aquesta publicació s'ha dissenyat com a resposta específica. Serà separada de la discussió general per una línia grisa. 
Tanmateix, tothom qui estigui seguint aquest ''tema'' rebrà una notificació de la vostra resposta, com amb totes les respostes.

{{anchor|create}}
=== Crear una discussió ===
[[File:New discussion in Flow - Sept. 2015.png|thumb|534x534px|Com crear una discussió: feu clic a la barra &quot;Comença un nou tema&quot;.]]
En una pàgina que utilitzi «Discussions Estructurades», crear un tema és fàcil: només cal que feu clic al camp «Comença un nou tema» i «Discussions Estructurades» prepararà dos camps.

El primer camp és &quot;Comença un nou tema&quot;: escolliu un títol adient. El segon camp és &quot;Envia un missatge nou a&quot;: afegiu-hi el text que vulgueu enviar. Si voleu atreure els lectors, escolliu un bon títol, perquè serà l'única cosa que els apareixerà a les Notificacions.

Quan ja ho tingueu llest, feu clic al botó &quot;Afegeix el tema&quot;. El vostre ''missatge'' ja és en línia i tothom qui estigui seguint aquesta pàgina rebrà una notificació sobre la creació d'aquest tema.

Quan creeu un tema, se us hi subscriu automàticament: quan algú respongui, rebreu una notificació.

* Vegeu també: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Resumir un tema i marcar com a resolt un tema]]

{{anchor|watch}}
=== Seguir ===

==== Un tema ====

Per a seguir un tema específic, feu clic a l'estrella que hi ha dalt de tot del ''tema'', al costat del títol. Es torna blava. Si ja era blava és que ja estàveu seguint aquest tema.

Mentre seguiu aquest ''tema'', rebreu una notificació per cada modificació que s'hi faci, i una entrada a la vostra llista de seguiment.

Quan creeu un ''tema'', se us hi subscriu automàticament.

==== Una pàgina de discussió ====

Per a seguir una pàgina de discussió sencera, feu clic a l'estrella que hi ha a dalt de tot de la pàgina, al costat del camp de cerca. Es torna blava. Si ja era blava és que ja estàveu seguint aquesta pàgina.

Mentre seguiu aquesta pàgina de discussió, rebreu una notificació per cada tema que s'hi creï, i una entrada a la vostra llista de seguiment.

{{anchor|notifications}}
==== Notificacions ====

A les vostres Preferències, pestanya «Notificacions», podeu inhabilitar les notificacions de les «Discussions Estructurades». La llista de seguiment se us continuarà actualitzant amb una entrada per cada tema creat en una pàgina de discussió que seguiu o per cada resposta en un tema que seguiu.

{{anchor|browse}}
== Navegació i arxivament ==

Tots els temes presents en un tauler es llisten en una taula de continguts (&quot;Navega els temes&quot;) perquè pugueu navegar-hi fàcilment.

L'arxivament és automàtic: totes les converses desapareixen quan ja no són actives. Podeu mostrar els temes antics desplaçant-vos avall en la pàgina o cercant a la taula de continguts.

* Vegeu també: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Resumir un tema i marcar com a resolt un tema]]

== Per aprofundir-hi ==
* Preguntes més freqüents
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Design FAQ|2=Disseny}}
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Release and features FAQ|2=Llançaments i característiques}}

[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>3tl338w49mn53tar1w6nnvb3bz5wrx8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:LocalSettings.php/hu</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>628533</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402910</id>
      <parentid>5209983</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:35:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="32256" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{BOMWarning}}
{{MW file|LocalSettings.php|NotInGit=létrehozva telepítéskor}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The '''&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;''' file provides basic [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings|configuration settings]] (based on the &lt;code&gt;'''{{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}'''&lt;/code&gt; file) of a [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki|MediaWiki]] installation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should take your time to review the settings in this file.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The file is usually generated by the web-based MediaWiki installer but you can tweak the parameters, possibly in concert with Apache settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For MediaWiki installations configured as a [[wiki farm]], a file named &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:CommonSettings.php|CommonSettings.php}}&lt;/code&gt; may be used.&lt;/span&gt;

== Helye a szerveren ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; nem wikilap, és nem érhető el böngészőn keresztül.&lt;!-- a vitalapon többen is kérdezték --&gt; A fájl a szerveren található, tartalmát pedig a telepítő hozza létre; az elkészült állományt manuálisan kell átmásolni. A fájlnak ugyanazon könyvtárban kell lenniük, mint például az &lt;code&gt;includes/&lt;/code&gt; és &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; mappáknak és az &lt;code&gt;api.php&lt;/code&gt;-nak. Ha a fájl ''nincs'' ott, a wiki nem fog működni – megfordítva: ha a wiki ''működik'', a fájl a ''helyén van''. Ha nem találod az állományt, akkor az alábbi paranccsal terminálból lekérdezheted a helyét: &lt;kbd&gt;find / -iname LocalSettings.php -print&lt;/kbd&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- there were multiple(!) people assuming on the talk page that it _was_ a wiki page or at least web accessible --&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, it is a file in the file system of the server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Its contents are generated during the initial setup of the wiki, and the resulting file must be copied to the server manually.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The file must be located in the folder you installed MediaWiki into, on the same level with folders like &lt;code&gt;includes/&lt;/code&gt;and &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; and files like &lt;code&gt;api.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this file is ''not'' there, the wiki will not work at all—if the wiki ''does'' work, the file ''is there''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you do not know where it is, you can enter a command such as &lt;kbd&gt;find / -iname LocalSettings.php -print&lt;/kbd&gt; in a terminal window to locate it.&lt;/span&gt;

(Vagrant használata esetén olvasd el [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki-Vagrant#mw-settings|ezt]]).

== Biztonság ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; bizalmas adatokat (például az adatbázisok jelszavait) tartalmazza, ezért ''soha'' nem szabad megosztani! Egyes szerverhibák esetén a fájl kívülről is olvasható; ennek megakadályozására be állítani a fájlra vonatkozó UNIX jogosultságokat. A webszerverhez rendelt felhasználónak hozzá kell férnie az állományhoz; ha ez azonos a tulajdonossal a jogokat ''600''-ra kell állítani; ha nem azonos, de azonos UNIX-csoportban van, a ''640'' az ideális választás. A biztonság további növelése érdekében érdemes csak a legszükségesebb jogokat biztosítani.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This data should ''never'' be revealed to the public!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Due to a security breach somewhere on the server, it might happen that other users are able to view the contents of files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In order to improve security of your data, you should set UNIX permissions for this file accordingly: The webserver user must have access to this file.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this is the same account, who is the owner of the file, then you can set permissions to ''600''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sometimes, the webserver user is ''not'' the file owner, but they are in the owner's UNIX user group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, permissions of ''640'' should be fine. For improved security you should narrow permissions down as far as possible.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Additionally, you can create a MySQL user, who is restricted to only the database used by the wiki and provide this user's credentials in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Also you can configure your database server to only accept connections from localhost - this should prevent access from outside in case of leaked credentials.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also {{ll|Manual:Securing database passwords}} for a method to move the sensitive parts of &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to a different file in a different directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Tartalma ==

Amikor szerkeszted a fájlt, győződj meg róla, hogy helyes kódolást (ANSI UTF-8-ként vagy UTF-8 BOM nélkül) választasz.

A fájl [[w:hu:PHP|PHP]]-kódot tartalmaz, elsősorban változókat és azok értékeit. A beállítások megváltoztatása a változók átírásával lehetséges. A változtatásaid a mentéskor azonnal életbe lépnek; így nem szükséges bármit is újraindítanod. Néha szükséges lehet a böngésző gyorsítótárának törlése.

Az ''alapértelmezett'' értékek a &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; fájlban találhatók; ezt ''ne szerkeszd''; ha módosítani szeretnél valamit, akkor másold át a &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;-be, és ott írd át. Ez utóbbihoz új sorokat is hozzáadhatsz.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Within the file, there can also be several lines such as '&lt;code&gt;require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/''extension''.php&quot;;&lt;/code&gt;', which point to [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Contents|extensions]]. These lines enable the according extension in the wiki. Those extensions may require setting the values of more variables in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;; check the documentation of the according extension for further instructions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Like most PHP files in MediaWiki, &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; does not end with the closing PHP tag {{phpi|?&gt;}}. This prevents admins from accidentally adding new information ''after'' this tag. PHP works fine without a closing tag.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have a wiki on a MediaWiki [[w:wiki farm|wiki farm]] you may not have write-access (perhaps not even read-access) to the file &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; (see e.g. [http://community.wikia.com/wiki/Forum%3ALocalSettings.php%3F]). The wiki farm company may or may not be willing to make changes you desire. Perhaps it wants to keep most settings the same on all wikis of the wiki farm.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This file is not written to your webserver automatically for security reasons. Instead, it is offered as a download, which you must then upload to your server for your wiki to begin working. For a more complete explanation, see [//www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=New-installer_issues&amp;diff=334526&amp;oldid=333913 this explanation].&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Az elérhető beállítások áttekintése ==

A változók funkcióját megtalálhatod a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings|beállítások tárgymutatójában]] és a fájlokba írt megjegyzésekben. Alább a legfontosabb változók és legkeresettebb funkciók listáját olvashatod.

==Alapbeállítások==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Elérési út===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The '''{{ll|Manual:$IP|$IP}}''' (install path) variable holds the local file path to the base installation of your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since MediaWiki 1.18, the system sets $IP automatically.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Setting &lt;code&gt;$IP&lt;/code&gt; manually in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; is no longer needed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$IP&lt;/code&gt; will default to the current working directory and can be used without the need to manually define it.&lt;/span&gt;
Attempting to set &lt;code&gt;$IP&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;MW_INSTALL_PATH&lt;/code&gt;) in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; may produce unexpected results.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A [[$default-set|DefaultSettings.php]] a változóban megadott könyvtárból töltődik be.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Oldalnév===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''{{ll|Manual:$wgSitename|$wgSitename}}''' holds the name of your wiki setup. This name gets included many times throughout the system, such as via MediaWiki:Pagetitle. For instance, the Wikipedia tagline &quot;From Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia&quot; makes use of this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Declensions of site name ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some translations of interface are ready for inflection of site name.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can set proper forms of word in variables '''{{ll|Manual:$wgGrammarForms|$wgGrammarForms}}''' (for example please refer to the '''{{ll|Manual:$wgSitename|$wgSitename}}''' documentation page).&lt;/span&gt;

===Oldal nyelve===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{ll|Manual:$wgLanguageCode|$wgLanguageCode}}''' controls the language of your wiki's interface.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;While users can switch the language they see in their [[Special:Preferences|preferences]], this variable sets the default language that all anonymous users and most registered users see.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Script path===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{ll|Manual:$wgScriptPath|$wgScriptPath}}''' is the URL path prefix to access the main MediaWiki script that is the central acting piece of code of MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting should correspond to the [[Special:MyLanguage/Apache configuration|Apache settings]], especially if you are using Apache's [[w:Rewrite_engine|rewrite]] rules.&lt;/span&gt;

===Szervernév===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''{{ll|Manual:$wgServer|$wgServer}}''' contains the base URL of the server, including protocol but without the trailing slash and without the subdirectory if any. When the wiki is accessed from either the localhost where it runs, from an intranet or from the internet, email notifications and a few other computed messages would be usually delivered with the different URLs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MediaWiki 1.34 &lt;code&gt;$wgServer&lt;/code&gt; must be set in LocalSettings.php.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Prior to that, MediaWiki tried to autodetect the name of the server and &lt;code&gt;$wgServer&lt;/code&gt; was optional, to override the autodetection.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If www.example.com is the server address of your wiki as seen from the internet, add a line such as
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgServer = 'http://www.example.com';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic words#Page names and related info|magic word]] variable &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SERVER}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; can be used on wiki pages; it equals the value of &lt;code&gt;$wgServer&lt;/code&gt;; however, on a wiki, such as those in the Wikimedia family, where relative urls are used, it will not fully expand, for example here it displays {{SERVER}}, which can neither be clicked nor copy-pasted into the address bar as it is.
&lt;/div&gt;

You can also use a protocol relative URL as shown below.
When using a protocol relative URL, be sure to set {{phpi|$wgCanonicalServer}}.
{{phpi|$wgCanonicalServer}} is needed for some places in the code where an origin with a protocol and hostname is needed.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgServer = '//www.example.com';
$wgCanonicalServer = 'https://www.example.com';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Script name===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''{{ll|Manual:$wgScript|$wgScript}}''' is the name of the main (index) MediaWiki PHP script, named &lt;code&gt;index.php&lt;/code&gt; by default. Changing the script name is probably not a good idea. However, if you feel the urge to do so, this is the place to make your changes. Make sure you know what you are doing.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Article path===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''{{ll|Manual:$wgArticlePath|$wgArticlePath}}''' is the path to use when accessing a page in MediaWiki. The path should contain the path to the main script (usually making use of &lt;code&gt;$wgScript&lt;/code&gt;) and use the &lt;code&gt;$1&lt;/code&gt; placeholder for the article name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are using Apache rewrite rules to create pretty and short URLs, you probably need to adjust &lt;code&gt;$wgArticlePath&lt;/code&gt; to address the right path. Note that wgArticlePath is used to construct URLs from within MediaWiki. If you make a mistake here, internal links will show up incorrectly while you still may be able to access the main page by specifying the correct URL manually. See [[Manual:Short URL]] for more information on URL configuration.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Typical values are:
&lt;/div&gt; 

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &quot;&lt;code&gt;$wgScript/$1&lt;/code&gt;&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pass the article name with separator &quot;/&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &quot;&lt;code&gt;$wgScript?title=$1&lt;/code&gt;&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pass the article name as a parameter (old style)&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &quot;&lt;code&gt;/mypath/$1&lt;/code&gt;&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;custom path. Use Apache rewrite rules to convert &quot;mypath&quot; to the proper path accessing the main script&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Stylesheet location===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use '''{{ll|Manual:$wgStylePath|$wgStylePath}}''' to set the URL path to the place where the stylesheets (CSS) for the MediaWiki installation are located.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''{{ll|Manual:$wgStyleDirectory|$wgStyleDirectory}}''' should point the same place, but note that this is a local file system path for use in internal scripts accessing the file system.&lt;/span&gt;

===Feltöltési könyvtár===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A feltöltött fájlok URL-címét az $UploadPath, a fájlszerveren elfoglalt helyüket pedig az $UploadDirectory változókban lehet beállítani.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Logo}}
===Logó===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A bal felső sarokban elhelyezett kép megváltoztatása a '''{{ll|Manual:$wgLogo|$wgLogo}}''' változó módosításával lehetséges; a lépés felülírja a /wiki/skins/common/images/ mappában lévő alapértelmezett grafikát (a /wiki a saját telepítésed helye).
&lt;/div&gt;

Első lépésként töltsd fel a kívánt képet a /wiki/skins/common/images/ (a /wiki a saját telepítésed helye).

Keresd meg a következő sort a &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;-ban:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$wgLogo = &quot;$wgStylePath/common/images/wiki.png&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ha nincs ilyen, másold be a fenti sort az állomány végére.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Ezután írd át az útvonalat; a képnek az internet felől elérhetőnek kell lenni, mivel a böngészők a változó értékét használják. Ha nem tudod, hogy töltsd ki, navigálj el böngésződben a kívánt grafikához (például a MediaWiki.org logója a http://upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/mediawiki/b/bc/Wiki.png címen található), majd a címsorban látható URL-t másold át a változóhoz.
&lt;/div&gt;

Egyesek a skins/common/images/wiki.png útvonalon található alapértelmezett képfájlt cserélik le; ez nem javasolt, mert egy frissítés felülírhatja.

MediaWiki 1.35 introduced '''{{ll|Manual:$wgLogos|$wgLogos}}''', which allows multiple versions of the same logo.
An example of using multiple logos is shown below.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$wgLogos = [
	'1x' =&gt; &quot;$wgStylePath/common/images/1x_version.png&quot;,
	'1.5x' =&gt; &quot;$wgStylePath/common/1.5x_version.png&quot;,
	...
	'tagline' =&gt; [
		'src' =&gt; &quot;$wgStylePath/common/tagline_version.png&quot;,
		'width' =&gt; 135,
		'height' =&gt; 15,
	],
];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===Kapcsolatfelvételi adatok===

Az '''{{ll|Manual:$wgEmergencyContact|$wgEmergencyContact}}''' a probléma esetén elérhető és a hibabejelentéseket is fogadó személy e-mail-címe. Adminisztrátorként is ide írd címed

A '''{{ll|Manual:$wgPasswordSender|$wgPasswordSender}}'''-ben megadott címről ''küldi'' a szerver a jelszó-emlékeztetőket. Olyan címet válassz, amelyik bejövő leveleket is fogad, hogy probléma esetén a felhasználók ide fordulhassanak.

===Adatbázis-beállítások===

A lapok, módosítások, felhasználói adatok és sok más tárolásához a MediaWikinek hozzá kell férnie az adatbázishoz (amely lehet [[w:hu:MySQL|MySQL]] vagy [[w:hu:PostgreSQL|PostgreSQL]] is).

Az adatbázis helyét a '''{{ll|Manual:$wgDBserver|$wgDBserver}}''' tárolja; ez általában (ha az adatbázis azonos rendszeren van) ''localhost'', de megosztott telepítéseknél meg kell adni a pontos domain-nevet.

Az adatbázis ''nevét'' a '''{{ll|Manual:$wgDBname|$wgDBname}}'''-ben lehet megadni. Egy MySQL- vagy PostgreSQL-telepítés több adatbázist is tárolhat, így egy szerverre több wikit is telepíthetsz. Győződj meg róla, hogy különböző neveket választottál, és ezeket mindig pontosan add meg.

Az adatbázis nevét a '''{{ll|Manual:$wgDBuser|$wgDBuser}}''', a jelszavát pedig a '''{{ll|Manual:$wgDBpassword|$wgDBpassword}}''' tárolja. Ahhoz, hogy a MediaWiki hozzáférhessen az állományokhoz, a felhasználónak elegendő jogosultsággal kell rendelkeznie.

Also see {{ll|Manual:Securing database passwords}} for a method to move the sensitive parts of &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to a different file in a different directory.

===Felhasználói jogosultságok===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''{{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}}''' is an associative array, controlling permissions for creating and editing pages for your different user groups. In this array, custom permission levels can be created, and permission levels for the different user groups can be set. See {{ll|Help:User rights}} for more information about the different permissions and user groups available.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force capital links===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, no page name can start with a lowercase [[w:Latin alphabet|Roman letter]]: in an attempt to do so the first letter is converted to uppercase; if a link target, included page, image or category is specified with a name starting with a lowercase letter, the actual target etc. is the page starting with the corresponding capital.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Alternatively page names ''can'' start with a lowercase letter, in addition to the possibilities of starting with a capital, a digit, etc. For that you must adjust '''{{ll|Manual:$wgCapitalLinks|$wgCapitalLinks}}'''. Setting it to '''false''' allows lowercase characters, '''true''' chooses the default behavior.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Allapok engedélyezése===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Subpages|subpages]] are enabled on a per-namespace basis using '''{{ll|Manual:$wgNamespacesWithSubpages|$wgNamespacesWithSubpages}}'''. For example, to enable subpages in the main namespace:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgNamespacesWithSubpages[NS_MAIN] = 1;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===Képek feltöltése===

Mielőtt a felhasználók képeket tölthetnének fel, engedélyezned kell azt. Győződj meg róla, hogy beállítottad a feltöltési könyvtár útvonalát, és a webszerver írási jogokkal rendelkezik hozzá. Majd módosítsd a '''{{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}}''' változót '''true''' értékre.

például: Beillesztendő kódrészlet az ''includes/DefaultSettings.php'' fájlból:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$wgUploadPath       = &quot;$wgScriptPath/uploads&quot;;      ## Wiki 1.5 defaults to /images, but allows more than just images
$wgUploadDirectory  = &quot;$IP/uploads&quot;;                ## Wiki 1.5 defaults to /images, but allows more than just images

## To enable image uploads, make sure the above '$wgUploadPath' directory is writable by Apache User or group.
## ''(i.e.  chmod og+w uploads images)''  then the following should be true:
$wgEnableUploads       = true;

$wgUseImageMagick      = true;
$wgImageMagickConvertCommand = &quot;/usr/bin/convert&quot;;

## If you want to use image uploads under safe mode, create the directories images/archive, images/thumb and
## images/temp, and make them all writable. Then uncomment this, if it's not already uncommented:
$wgHashedUploadDirectory = false;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A képek átméretezéséhez (bélyegképek használatához) szükség van az [[w:ImageMagick|ImageMagick]] (angolul) telepítésére. Az installálás és konfigurálás után a $UseImageMagick változót '''true''' értékre kell állítani. Győződj meg róla, hogy a $ImageMagickConvertCommand a &lt;code&gt;convert&lt;/code&gt; parancs megfelelő helyére mutat (ez biztosítja, hogy a műveletet a webszerver végrehajtassa) és a $MaxShellMemory elegendő méretű-e. További információkért és hibaelhárításért olvasd el {{ll|Manual:Image administration#Image thumbnailing|ezt}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set '''{{ll|Manual:$wgUseImageMagick|$wgUseImageMagick}}''' to '''true''' once you have installed and tested ImageMagick on your system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make sure '''{{ll|Manual:$wgImageMagickConvertCommand|$wgImageMagickConvertCommand}}''' points to the proper location of the &lt;code&gt;convert&lt;/code&gt; command of your installation, that the command is executable by the web server process, and '''{{ll|Manual:$wgMaxShellMemory|$wgMaxShellMemory}}''' is large enough.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Manual:Image administration#Image thumbnailing|Manual:Image administration#Image thumbnailing}} for detailed information and troubleshooting.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Az elfogadott kiterjesztések listáját a $FileExtensions változó tárolja.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgFileExtensions = [ 'png', 'jpg', 'jpeg', 'ogg', 'doc', 'xls', 'ppt', 'mp3', 'sxc', 'pdf' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ha az ImageMagick a következő hibaüzenettel tér vissza:
:  Fatal error: mime_magic could not be initialized, magic file is not available in includes/MimeMagic.php on line 506
add hozzá a következő sort a &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;-hez:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgMimeDetectorCommand|$wgMimeDetectorCommand}} = {{#tag:span|&quot;file -bi&quot;|class=s2}};
&lt;/code&gt;

{{note|1=Olvasd el a [[Manual:Security/hu|Kézikönyv:Biztonság]] feltöltésről szóló [[Manual:Security/hu#Upload_security|szakaszát]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
További információk: [[$file-uploads|Kézikönyv:Feltöltések beállítása]], [[Manual:Mime type detection|Kézikönyv:MIME-típus felismerése]] és {{ll|Manual:Image administration#Image thumbnailing|Kézikönyv:Képek adminisztrációja#Bélyegképek}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Configuring file uploads}}
* {{ll|Manual:MIME type detection}}
* {{ll|Manual:Image administration#Image thumbnailing|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manual:Image administration#Image thumbnailing&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;!-- should be synced or merged! --&gt;
}}

===Interwikik támogatása===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A MediaWiki alapértelmezésben támogatja az [[w:hu:interwiki|interwikik]] használatát, de a használandó előtagot neked kell beállítani. Ez általában azonos a $Sitename változóval, de ha módosítani szeretnéd, a $LocalInterwiki átírásával teheted meg.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This prefix is usually the same as {{wg|Sitename}}, but in case you need to change that, you set the {{wg|LocalInterwiki}} variable to the preferred name.&lt;/span&gt;

===Felhasználói felület nyelve===

A MediaWiki az alapértelmezett angolon kívül számos más nyelvet is támogat; a módosítás a {{wg|LanguageCode}} átírásával lehetséges (például ''hu'' a magyarhoz; a további lehetőségeket lásd [[Special:SiteMatrix|itt]]).

Bármely, a {{git file |file=languages/i18n}} könyvtárban látható nyelvkódot használhatod; például a &lt;code&gt;hu.json&lt;/code&gt; meglétekor a &lt;code&gt;''hu''&lt;/code&gt; változó magyarra módosítja a felületet (ne használd a nagybetűs (&lt;code&gt;''Hu''&lt;/code&gt;) formát, mert így nem minden lesz lefordítva).

{{note|1=A nyelvi kód megváltoztatása után futtatnia kell egy PHP parancsfájlt annak működéséhez. A terminálablakban váltson a wiki könyvtárára, váltson a &lt;code&gt;maintenance&lt;/code&gt; mappára, és írja be a &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=bash inline&gt;php rebuildMessages.php --rebuild&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; parancsot. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Windows, the PHP folder might not be in your &lt;code&gt;PATH&lt;/code&gt; environment variable and you'll have to prefix &lt;kbd&gt;php&lt;/kbd&gt; with the path to the program.&lt;/span&gt;}}

Nem minden nyelv támogatott; a {{CURRENTVERSION}} verzió fordítási statisztikáit [[localisation statistics|itt]] találod, a verziónkénti bontás pedig a [[betawiki:Translating:Statistics|translatewiki.neten]] tekinthető meg.

=== Szerzői jogi beállítások ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''{{ll|Manual:$wgRightsPage|$wgRightsPage}}''' is the page on the wiki that covers the copyrights that it falls under. Usually, this will be [[Project:Copyrights]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''{{ll|Manual:$wgRightsUrl|$wgRightsUrl}}''' is the page describing full details of your license. (For the GNU FDL, for example, this would be &lt;code&gt;http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl.html&lt;/code&gt;.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''{{ll|Manual:$wgRightsText|$wgRightsText}}''' is the text in the footer that follows &quot;Content is available under&quot;. It will be linked to the page specified in &lt;code&gt;$wgRightsPage&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''{{ll|Manual:$wgRightsIcon|$wgRightsIcon}}''' is the URL of the image placed at the left of the footer.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &lt;code&gt;$wgRightsPage&lt;/code&gt; is non-empty, the link in the copyright/license notice will link to that page on your site. If &lt;code&gt;$wgRightsPage&lt;/code&gt; is empty then the copyright/license notice will link to &lt;code&gt;$wgRightsUrl&lt;/code&gt; instead.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To modify the copyright statements of the site, add something like this to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$wgRightsPage = &quot;YourWiki:Copyright&quot;; 
$wgRightsText = &quot;copyright YourWiki&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Afterwards, edit [[MediaWiki:Copyright]] to provide an appropriate message, using &lt;code&gt;&quot;$1&quot;&lt;/code&gt; to indicate the position where the link to your copyright page will be.
&lt;/div&gt; 

'''Példa: [[w:hu:Creative Commons|Creative Commons]]-licensz beállítása'''

Végezd el az alábbiakat:

* Válassz licenszet: http://creativecommons.org/choose/
* Vizsgáld meg a HTML-kódot, például:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;html4strict&quot; style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
&lt;a rel=&quot;license&quot; href=&quot;http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/3.0/&quot;&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;Creative Commons License&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; src=&quot;http://creativecommons.org/images/public/somerights30.png&quot; /&gt;
&lt;/a&gt;
This work is licensed under a
&lt;a rel=&quot;license&quot; href=&quot;http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/3.0/&quot;&gt;
Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 3.0 License&lt;/a&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For &lt;code&gt;$wgRightsURL&lt;/code&gt; enter the href info from the first anchor:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;$wgRightsUrl = &quot;http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/3.0/&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For &lt;code&gt;$wgRightsText&lt;/code&gt; enter the text the second anchor links from (add the &quot;a&quot; to the Wiki variable for a more grammatically correct version)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;$wgRightsText = &quot;a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 3.0 License&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For &lt;code&gt;$wgRightsIcon&lt;/code&gt; enter the src info from the img link in the first anchor. You want to copy the badge to your own site instead of using the one from the Creative Commons site.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;$wgRightsIcon = &quot;http://creativecommons.org/images/public/somerights30.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For using [[w:Resource Description Framework|RDF metadata]] about copyright add one or both of the following lines to your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$wgEnableCreativeCommonsRdf = true;
$wgEnableDublinCoreRdf = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===Egyedi névterek===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By declaring '''{{ll|Manual:$wgExtraNamespaces|$wgExtraNamespaces}}''', and modifying '''{{ll|Manual:$wgNamespacesWithSubpages|$wgNamespacesWithSubpages}}''', and '''{{ll|Manual:$wgNamespacesToBeSearchedDefault|$wgNamespacesToBeSearchedDefault}}''', extra namespaces can be added to a MediaWiki installation; and by declaring the '''{{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceAliases|$wgNamespaceAliases}}''' array namespace aliases can be added.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Take heed''' not to have any pages already titled in that namespace, for instance if you had a page called &quot;Technical:Support&quot; and you created the Technical: namespace, then that page would not only be lost, but you cannot remove it from Special:Allpages.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To fix this delete the namespace, move &quot;Technical:Support&quot; to &quot;Support&quot; in mainspace, delete the redirect, reinsert the namespace, and move it back to &quot;Technical:Support&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Manual:Using custom namespaces|Custom namespaces}} for more information as to how to do so.&lt;/span&gt;

===Felületek===

Az alapértelmezett felület a '''{{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultSkin|$wgDefaultSkin}}''' változóval módosítható.

==Lásd még==
*{{file doclink |LocalSettingsGenerator}} forráskódja, a &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;-t létrehozó szkript.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
*[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Wiki family|Wikicsaládok]] használhatják ugyanazon LocalSettings.php-t.
*[[$securedb|Kézikönyv:Adatbázis-jelszavak biztonságának biztosítása]] – &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; fájl és adatbázis-jelszavak biztonságának biztosítása
&lt;/div&gt;
*{{ll|Manual:Securing database passwords}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;a guide to securing your database passwords and &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; file.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki configuration{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>gbdm8tdrj0s8iuuim5btiz9khsudsru</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Tables/367/pl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>629920</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402908</id>
      <parentid>2276041</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:32:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36" xml:space="preserve">* [[$1|Sortowanie wierszy w tabeli]]</text>
      <sha1>fdzk1mhu1dbe8qa7t73hwy6fw9vb9du</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/cs</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>632934</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402238</id>
      <parentid>5400729</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11774" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Aktualizované informace jsou dostupné na Meta-wiki: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Kliknutím na odkaz [[Special:preferences|Preference]] v pravém horním rohu při přihlášení můžete změnit svá nastavení.
V horní části se zobrazí sekce Uživatelský profil a panel záložek pro uskutečnění změny dalších typů nastavení.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Vaše uživatelské jméno. Vaše uživatelské jméno mohou změnit pouze důvěryhodní uživatelé a na wiki musí být také nainstalováno rozšíření {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Seznam uživatelských skupin, ve kterých se nacházíte.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Na wiki Wikimedií vám tento odkaz umožňuje spravovat externí aplikace, které mají přístup k vašemu účtu. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Další informace najdete na stránce [[Help:OAuth|nápovědy k OAuth]].&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Počet vašich editací. Ne každá wiki to musí nutně zobrazovat.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || Čas, kdy byl váš účet zaregistrován.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|viz níže]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|viz níže]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Správa dvoufázového ověřování.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Správa globální preference.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Pro změnu hesla zadejte do prvního pole formuláře vaše původní heslo a do druhého heslo nové.
Pokud chcete, aby si tento web pamatoval vaše přihlašovací údaje, zaškrtněte možnost ''Remember my login on this computer'' (pamatovat si přihlašovací údaje v tomto počítači).
Tato funkcionalita je věcí prohlížeče, který musí mít povoleno použití cookies. Heslo po vás nebude vyžadováno dokud si jej nevymažete nebo dokud mu nevyprší platnost.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Globální účet ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
Z vašich preferencí si můžete vybrat, v jakém jazyce chcete mít rozhraní.
Kromě několika stránek na postranním panelu budou ovlivněna pouze tlačítka jako 'upravit' a 'diskuse'.
Hlavní text stránek se tímto u velké většiny stránek nezmění, i když na několika stránkách ano, jako jsou některé ve Wikimedii Meta Wiki.

* Jazyky
* Jak si přejete být osloveni?
* Další jazyková nastavení

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Váš stávající podpis
* Nový podpis
** Upravujte stejně jako wikitext

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Pokud jste zadali emailovou adresu, je třeba nejprve kliknout na tlačítko ''Ověřit adresu'' (verify address). Poté obdržíte email, ve kterém bude uvedený odkaz. Otevřením tohoto odkazu v prohlížeči provedete ověření.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Ověření emailové adresy ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || Umožňuje ostatním registrovaným uživatelům poslat vám email pomocí odkazu &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; na postranním panelu vaší uživatelské stránky. Emaily se odesílají pomocí webového rozhraní a vaše emailová adresa nebude odesílateli odhalena, dokud neodpovíte emailem.
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Umožňuje uživatelům zasílat vám emaily bez automatického potvrzování oprávnění.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Tato možnost vám umožňuje určit, kteří uživatelé vám nebudou moci posílat přímé emaily. Neuvidí odkaz &quot;Poslat tomuto uživateli email&quot; (email this user) na postranním panelu vaší uživatelské stránky. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Zde si můžete vybrat zobrazení, jaké chcete použít. Předtím, než je vyberete, si můžete prohlédnout dostupné vzhledy kliknutím na odkaz &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; vedle každého zobrzení. Další podrobnosti najdete na stránce {{ll|Help:Skins}}.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Formát data a časové pásmo ===

Následující se obvykle vyskytuje v závislosti podle nastavení:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Zde můžete určit, jak budou obrázky zobrazeny. Obrázky zobrazené přímým vložením URL (pokud to má wiki povoleno) nebudou tímto nastavením ovlivněny.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Toto nastavení umožňuje zvolit, jak velké náhledy budou na Image: stránkách. Pokud víte, jaké je vaše současné rozlišení obrazovky, můžete nastavit toto na jednu nebo dvě velikosti menší než vaše vlastní obrazovka. Pokud máte pomalé připojení (například vytáčené připojení), můžete je omezit na 320 × 240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Definujte, jak velké chcete zobrazit miniatury. Toto nastavení neovlivní miniatury s rozměry určenými editorem, ani nemůže zvětšit obrázky nad jejich původní rozměry.
* Use Media Viewer: Na Wikimedii wiki toto nastavení (ve výchozím nastavení zapnuto) určuje, zda [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] by měl být použit pro zajištění plynulejšího prohlížení obrázků.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Zde můžete určit, jak budou zobrazeny matematické rovnice popsané pomocí značky {{tag|math|open}}.
Matematické vzorce nahrané jako obrázky nebo zapsané mimo matematickou značku nebudou tímto nastavením ovlivněny.
Předvolby matematiky budou viditelné, pouze pokud je nainstalováno {{ll|Extension:Math}}.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Nastavení pro ovládání úprav stránek, včetně toho, zda se mají automaticky sledovat stránky, které jste upravili nebo vytvořili.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Zde můžete určit, jak daleko půjdou stránky [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|nedávných změn]]. Pokud je počet úprav překročen, seznam se předčasně zastaví (viz níže).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Zde můžete určit, kolik úprav se má zobrazit.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - To vám umožní skrýt úpravy označené jako malé (viz {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Může to být užitečné, vzhledem k tomu, že někteří uživatelé rychle provedou mnoho drobných vylepšení, aby aktualizovali šablony nebo opravili pravopisné chyby. Funkci můžete také dočasně zapnout ze stránky posledních změn (viz {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Vylepšené nedávné změny zhušťují úpravy do seznamu na stránce. Jak je uvedeno, vyžaduje to povolený JavaScript. Další informace o této funkci najdete v části {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}.
* Zobrazit úpravy Wikidata v posledních změnách: U vybraných projektů Wikimedie, kde jsou k dispozici data z [[d:|Wikidata]], vám tato možnost umožní zobrazit změny položek Wikidata připojených ke stránkám na vaší wiki, jakož i změny na samotné wiki stránce. To může pomoci zachytit vandalismus na Wikidatech, které lze vidět na vaší wiki.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Toto jsou nastavení pro ovládání chování sledovaného seznamu (viz {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
Většina z těchto možností je také k dispozici na samotném zobrazení seznamu sledovaných položek, ale nastavením ve svých preferencích ovládáte výchozí chování seznamu sledovaných položek, tj. bude provádět stejné akce při každé návštěvě stránky.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Zobrazení úpravy Wikidata ve vašem seznamu sledovaných: Na vybraných projektech Wikimedie, kde jsou k dispozici data z [[d:|Wikidata]], vám tato možnost umožní zobrazit změny položek Wikidata připojených ke stránkám na vaší wiki, jakož i změny samotné wiki stránky. To může pomoci zachytit vandalismus na Wikidatech, které lze vidět na vaší wiki.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Token sledovacího seznamu: Tento token (upomínka) se používá ke generování [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]]u z vašeho seznamu sledovaných. Kdokoli, kdo zná tento token, jej může použít pro přístup k vašemu seznamu sledovaných. Pokud je token objeven někým jiným, můžete pomocí odkazu &quot;Klikněte sem, pokud jej potřebujete resetovat&quot; (click here if you need to reset it) vytvořit nový token. Jakmile to provedete, budete muset upravit adresu URL přednastaveného zdroje v čtečce zdrojů, aby odpovídal novému tokenu.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Výchozí nastavení pro vyhledávání, včetně počtu výsledků, které se mají zobrazit, a toho, kolik kontextu se má zobrazit pro každý výsledek.
Zaškrtněte políčka vedle jmenných prostorů, které chcete zobrazit při prvním hledání.
Toto můžete přepsat při provádění skutečného vyhledávání zaškrtnutím nebo zrušením zaškrtnutí políček ve spodní části obrazovky s výsledky vyhledávání.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
Na Wikipedii vám karta '''Beta features''' umožňuje povolit experimentální funkce dříve, než budou dostupné všem.
Pokud se rozhodnete zapnout některou z těchto funkcí, měli byste být připraveni čelit chybám a problémům. Můžete vidět náhlé změny ve způsobu, jakým funkce vypadá nebo funguje, jak vývoj pokračuje.

Každá funkce má vedle sebe odkaz na &quot;diskuse&quot;, takže můžete nabídnout své návrhy nebo nahlásit problémy.

Další informace naleznete n astránce [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|O funkcích beta]].

* Automatické povolení všech nových funkcí beta: Pokud tuto možnost zapnete, nové funkce beta se pro vás začnou aktivovat, jakmile budou přidány do systému Beta Features.

== Související stránky ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2b05mmkr9uc95f36e4rb88ucykzo1cl</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402281</id>
      <parentid>5402238</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:04:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Aktualizované informace jsou dostupné na Meta-wiki: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Kliknutím na odkaz [[Special:preferences|Preference]] v pravém horním rohu při přihlášení můžete změnit svá nastavení.
V horní části se zobrazí sekce Uživatelský profil a panel záložek pro uskutečnění změny dalších typů nastavení.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || Vaše uživatelské jméno. Vaše uživatelské jméno mohou změnit pouze důvěryhodní uživatelé a na wiki musí být také nainstalováno rozšíření {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}}.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || Seznam uživatelských skupin, ve kterých se nacházíte.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || Na wiki Wikimedií vám tento odkaz umožňuje spravovat externí aplikace, které mají přístup k vašemu účtu. Další informace získáte na stránce {{ll|Help:OAuth}}.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || Počet vašich editací. Ne každá wiki to musí nutně zobrazovat.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || Čas, kdy byl váš účet zaregistrován.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|viz níže]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|viz níže]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Správa dvoufázového ověřování.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Správa globální preference.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
Pro změnu hesla zadejte do prvního pole formuláře vaše původní heslo a do druhého heslo nové.
Pokud chcete, aby si tento web pamatoval vaše přihlašovací údaje, zaškrtněte možnost ''Remember my login on this computer'' (pamatovat si přihlašovací údaje v tomto počítači).
Tato funkcionalita je věcí prohlížeče, který musí mít povoleno použití cookies. Heslo po vás nebude vyžadováno dokud si jej nevymažete nebo dokud mu nevyprší platnost.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Globální účet ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
Z vašich preferencí si můžete vybrat, v jakém jazyce chcete mít rozhraní.
Kromě několika stránek na postranním panelu budou ovlivněna pouze tlačítka jako 'upravit' a 'diskuse'.
Hlavní text stránek se tímto u velké většiny stránek nezmění, i když na několika stránkách ano, jako jsou některé ve Wikimedii Meta Wiki.

* Jazyky
* Jak si přejete být osloveni?
* Další jazyková nastavení

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Váš stávající podpis
* Nový podpis
** Upravujte stejně jako wikitext

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
Pokud jste zadali emailovou adresu, je třeba nejprve kliknout na tlačítko ''Ověřit adresu'' (verify address). Poté obdržíte email, ve kterém bude uvedený odkaz. Otevřením tohoto odkazu v prohlížeči provedete ověření.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| Ověření emailové adresy ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || Umožňuje ostatním registrovaným uživatelům poslat vám email pomocí odkazu &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; na postranním panelu vaší uživatelské stránky. Emaily se odesílají pomocí webového rozhraní a vaše emailová adresa nebude odesílateli odhalena, dokud neodpovíte emailem.
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || Umožňuje uživatelům zasílat vám emaily bez automatického potvrzování oprávnění.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || Tato možnost vám umožňuje určit, kteří uživatelé vám nebudou moci posílat přímé emaily. Neuvidí odkaz &quot;Poslat tomuto uživateli email&quot; (email this user) na postranním panelu vaší uživatelské stránky. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
Zde si můžete vybrat zobrazení, jaké chcete použít. Předtím, než je vyberete, si můžete prohlédnout dostupné vzhledy kliknutím na odkaz &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; vedle každého zobrzení. Další podrobnosti najdete na stránce {{ll|Help:Skins}}.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== Formát data a časové pásmo ===

Následující se obvykle vyskytuje v závislosti podle nastavení:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
Zde můžete určit, jak budou obrázky zobrazeny. Obrázky zobrazené přímým vložením URL (pokud to má wiki povoleno) nebudou tímto nastavením ovlivněny.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - Toto nastavení umožňuje zvolit, jak velké náhledy budou na Image: stránkách. Pokud víte, jaké je vaše současné rozlišení obrazovky, můžete nastavit toto na jednu nebo dvě velikosti menší než vaše vlastní obrazovka. Pokud máte pomalé připojení (například vytáčené připojení), můžete je omezit na 320 × 240.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - Definujte, jak velké chcete zobrazit miniatury. Toto nastavení neovlivní miniatury s rozměry určenými editorem, ani nemůže zvětšit obrázky nad jejich původní rozměry.
* Use Media Viewer: Na Wikimedii wiki toto nastavení (ve výchozím nastavení zapnuto) určuje, zda [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] by měl být použit pro zajištění plynulejšího prohlížení obrázků.

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
Zde můžete určit, jak budou zobrazeny matematické rovnice popsané pomocí značky {{tag|math|open}}.
Matematické vzorce nahrané jako obrázky nebo zapsané mimo matematickou značku nebudou tímto nastavením ovlivněny.
Předvolby matematiky budou viditelné, pouze pokud je nainstalováno {{ll|Extension:Math}}.

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
Nastavení pro ovládání úprav stránek, včetně toho, zda se mají automaticky sledovat stránky, které jste upravili nebo vytvořili.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - Zde můžete určit, jak daleko půjdou stránky [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|nedávných změn]]. Pokud je počet úprav překročen, seznam se předčasně zastaví (viz níže).
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - Zde můžete určit, kolik úprav se má zobrazit.

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - To vám umožní skrýt úpravy označené jako malé (viz {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Může to být užitečné, vzhledem k tomu, že někteří uživatelé rychle provedou mnoho drobných vylepšení, aby aktualizovali šablony nebo opravili pravopisné chyby. Funkci můžete také dočasně zapnout ze stránky posledních změn (viz {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - Vylepšené nedávné změny zhušťují úpravy do seznamu na stránce. Jak je uvedeno, vyžaduje to povolený JavaScript. Další informace o této funkci najdete v části {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}.
* Zobrazit úpravy Wikidata v posledních změnách: U vybraných projektů Wikimedie, kde jsou k dispozici data z [[d:|Wikidata]], vám tato možnost umožní zobrazit změny položek Wikidata připojených ke stránkám na vaší wiki, jakož i změny na samotné wiki stránce. To může pomoci zachytit vandalismus na Wikidatech, které lze vidět na vaší wiki.

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
Toto jsou nastavení pro ovládání chování sledovaného seznamu (viz {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).
Většina z těchto možností je také k dispozici na samotném zobrazení seznamu sledovaných položek, ale nastavením ve svých preferencích ovládáte výchozí chování seznamu sledovaných položek, tj. bude provádět stejné akce při každé návštěvě stránky.

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* Zobrazení úpravy Wikidata ve vašem seznamu sledovaných: Na vybraných projektech Wikimedie, kde jsou k dispozici data z [[d:|Wikidata]], vám tato možnost umožní zobrazit změny položek Wikidata připojených ke stránkám na vaší wiki, jakož i změny samotné wiki stránky. To může pomoci zachytit vandalismus na Wikidatech, které lze vidět na vaší wiki.

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* Token sledovacího seznamu: Tento token (upomínka) se používá ke generování [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]]u z vašeho seznamu sledovaných. Kdokoli, kdo zná tento token, jej může použít pro přístup k vašemu seznamu sledovaných. Pokud je token objeven někým jiným, můžete pomocí odkazu &quot;Klikněte sem, pokud jej potřebujete resetovat&quot; (click here if you need to reset it) vytvořit nový token. Jakmile to provedete, budete muset upravit adresu URL přednastaveného zdroje v čtečce zdrojů, aby odpovídal novému tokenu.

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
Výchozí nastavení pro vyhledávání, včetně počtu výsledků, které se mají zobrazit, a toho, kolik kontextu se má zobrazit pro každý výsledek.
Zaškrtněte políčka vedle jmenných prostorů, které chcete zobrazit při prvním hledání.
Toto můžete přepsat při provádění skutečného vyhledávání zaškrtnutím nebo zrušením zaškrtnutí políček ve spodní části obrazovky s výsledky vyhledávání.

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
Na Wikipedii vám karta '''Beta features''' umožňuje povolit experimentální funkce dříve, než budou dostupné všem.
Pokud se rozhodnete zapnout některou z těchto funkcí, měli byste být připraveni čelit chybám a problémům. Můžete vidět náhlé změny ve způsobu, jakým funkce vypadá nebo funguje, jak vývoj pokračuje.

Každá funkce má vedle sebe odkaz na &quot;diskuse&quot;, takže můžete nabídnout své návrhy nebo nahlásit problémy.

Další informace naleznete n astránce [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|O funkcích beta]].

* Automatické povolení všech nových funkcí beta: Pokud tuto možnost zapnete, nové funkce beta se pro vás začnou aktivovat, jakmile budou přidány do systému Beta Features.

== Související stránky ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1vtu9wygd3rk650kqchly7q1ejsaeyc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>633798</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402761</id>
      <parentid>2287997</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:39:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="78" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Help using citation templates]] oder [[$2|Help using citoid's $3 button]]</text>
      <sha1>f4it26b9alw1u5dfh3tege1ng1epi5l</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/31/el</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>634464</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402677</id>
      <parentid>2613259</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:01:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="98" xml:space="preserve">επίσης δείτε:[[$summarize|Σύνοψη θέματος / Επίλυση θέματος]]</text>
      <sha1>lthiqqkygkr231n7v6lid1uhql6mgl1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/45/el</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>634484</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402658</id>
      <parentid>2613432</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:52:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="95" xml:space="preserve">επίσης δείτε:[[$Topics|Σύνοψη θέματος / Επίλυση θέματος]]</text>
      <sha1>9sy88ypej8onl8sqfp3ju84rnnbz6tt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/eu</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>638775</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402768</id>
      <parentid>2305048</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:42:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="98" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Aipamen txantiloiak erabiltzeko laguntza]] edo [[$2|Citoiden $3 botoia erabiltzeko laguntza]]</text>
      <sha1>i237bphivqa68527tqzt8hf8hiacxfl</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/fa</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>638985</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401797</id>
      <parentid>5184876</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>639744</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402232</id>
      <parentid>2308688</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:02:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28" xml:space="preserve">See $1 for more information.</text>
      <sha1>6ho0gl26id9iyimso9l5ed4lgui48f9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Software bundles/1/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>640721</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402753</id>
      <parentid>2312242</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:32:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="164" xml:space="preserve">[[$install|L'installation manuelle]] de MediaWiki peut être pénible et prendre beaucoup de temps, surtout pour les utilisateurs manquant de compétence technique.</text>
      <sha1>sfijwq9xwcfhhrhgpzaoezyyi7i6h4t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>644250</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402805</id>
      <parentid>4494950</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:16:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7195" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; The following terms are relevant to the Edit Review Improvements project (ERI). &lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Terms in italics are entries of that glossary.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== ERI components and special terms == &lt;!--T:3--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Edit Review Improvements&lt;/translate&gt;
:''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Also known as '''ERI'''&lt;/translate&gt;''
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; [[&lt;tvar|ERI&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements&lt;/&gt;|Edit Review Improvements]] (ERI) is a project of the [[Collaboration|Collaboration Team]] that is seeks to reduce the negative effects current edit-review processes can have on new editors to the wikis—while improving edit-review processes overall.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:38--&gt; New filters for edit review&lt;/translate&gt;
:''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Also known as '''[[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes&lt;/tvar&gt;|Filters for Special:Recent Changes]]'''.&lt;/translate&gt;''
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; One of the first product releases of the Edit Review Improvements project is a suite of improvements to the Recent Changes special page that are designed to help reviewers in general to better target their efforts and be more efficient. The improvements also have the potential to particularly benefit new contributors. &lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; ReviewStream&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; [[&lt;tvar|RS&gt;Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream&lt;/&gt;|ReviewStream]] is a machine-readable feed that’s designed to be used by a variety of edit-review tools. Like [[&lt;tvar|RCS&gt;RCStream&lt;/&gt;|RCStream]], it will broadcast recent changes from MediaWiki wikis. To the information currently in RCStream, ReviewStream adds additional data designed to improve the edit-review process.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; Filter search bar&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. Users click in the Filter Search Bar to begin the process of filtering recent changes, either by clicking to select filters from the ''Dropdown Filter Panel'' (see below) or by typing their names.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt; Dropdown Filter Panel&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The filter panel  is a dropdown menu that displays a list of filtering options.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; Active Filter Display Area&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The active filter display area is designed to give users a quick read of their current filter and highlighting settings.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:18--&gt; Newcomers&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:19--&gt; A new user class defined for ERI denoting registered editors who are very new, having fewer than ten edits and four days of activity. Created because [[&lt;tvar|research&gt;Edit Review Improvements#Related documents&lt;/&gt;|research shows]] that such editors are particularly vulnerable to rejections. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; Learners&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:21--&gt; A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more days of activity and edits than ''“Newcomers”'' but fewer than ''“Experienced Users”''. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Autoconfirmed.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:22--&gt; Experienced Users&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:23--&gt; A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more than 30 days of activity and 500 edits. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Extended Confirmed.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== General and wiki concepts relevant to ERI == &lt;!--T:24--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; Artificial Intelligence&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; ERI uses predictive filters powered by the artificial intelligence (AI) program [&lt;tvar|ORES&gt;https://ores.wikimedia.org/&lt;/&gt; ORES]. Colloquially, the term [[:en:Artificial_intelligence|artificial intelligence]] is applied when a machine mimics cognitive functions that humans associate with other human minds, such as natural language processing, problem solving or learning. AI is a broad term that’s closely associated with the more specific concept of ''“machine learning”''.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Machine Learning&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; [[:en:Machine_learning|Machine learning]] is a subfield of ''artificial intelligence'' that seeks to give computers the ability to learn tasks they haven’t been specifically programmed to do. ERI uses predictive filters powered by the machine-learning program [&lt;tvar|ORES&gt;https://ores.wikimedia.org/&lt;/&gt; ORES].&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:29--&gt; Accuracy&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt; ERI tools offer AI predictive filters at various levels of “accuracy”. Used in this context, accuracy refers to the percentage of search results the filter returns that correctly identify the property the filter is targeting. In other words, the more accurate the filter is, the fewer false positives it produces. (In the AI field, the correct technical term for this is “[[:en:Precision_and_recall|precision]]”.)&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:31--&gt; Feed&lt;/translate&gt;
:''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:32--&gt; Also referred to as a '''Stream'''&lt;/translate&gt;''
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:33--&gt; A computer feed is a data format used for providing users with frequently updated content. In ERI, [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] is a feed that broadcasts data about recent changes to anti-vandalism and edit-review programs.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:34--&gt; Good faith&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; ERI projects offer User Intent filters, which predict whether an edit was made in good faith. In this sense, the term refers to whether a user’s intention was to contribute to the wiki or damage it. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but who may lack the skill or knowledge to do so successfully. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a [[&lt;tvar|research&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team&lt;/&gt;|good-faith test]].)&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:36--&gt; Damage&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:37--&gt; ERI projects offer Contribution Quality filters, which predict whether an edit improves the wiki or damages it. In this sense, “damage” is a general term that covers both vandalism and unintentional errors of formatting, style, fact, etc. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but whose lack of skill or knowledge leads them to cause damage. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a “[[&lt;tvar|research&gt;m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models&lt;/&gt;|damaging]]” test.)&lt;/translate&gt;

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>0xcmzluhrw9pzgypk1hkqbwo41m6z9a</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402815</id>
      <parentid>5402805</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:17:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>new tvar syntax</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7267" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; The following terms are relevant to the Edit Review Improvements project (ERI). &lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Terms in italics are entries of that glossary.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== ERI components and special terms == &lt;!--T:3--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Edit Review Improvements&lt;/translate&gt;
:''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Also known as '''ERI'''&lt;/translate&gt;''
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; [[&lt;tvar name=ERI&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements&lt;/tvar&gt;|Edit Review Improvements]] (ERI) is a project of the [[Collaboration|Collaboration Team]] that is seeks to reduce the negative effects current edit-review processes can have on new editors to the wikis—while improving edit-review processes overall.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:38--&gt; New filters for edit review&lt;/translate&gt;
:''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Also known as '''[[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes&lt;/tvar&gt;|Filters for Special:Recent Changes]]'''.&lt;/translate&gt;''
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; One of the first product releases of the Edit Review Improvements project is a suite of improvements to the Recent Changes special page that are designed to help reviewers in general to better target their efforts and be more efficient. The improvements also have the potential to particularly benefit new contributors. &lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; ReviewStream&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; [[&lt;tvar name=RS&gt;Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream&lt;/tvar&gt;|ReviewStream]] is a machine-readable feed that’s designed to be used by a variety of edit-review tools. Like [[&lt;tvar name=RCS&gt;RCStream&lt;/tvar&gt;|RCStream]], it will broadcast recent changes from MediaWiki wikis. To the information currently in RCStream, ReviewStream adds additional data designed to improve the edit-review process.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; Filter search bar&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. Users click in the Filter Search Bar to begin the process of filtering recent changes, either by clicking to select filters from the ''Dropdown Filter Panel'' (see below) or by typing their names.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt; Dropdown Filter Panel&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The filter panel  is a dropdown menu that displays a list of filtering options.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; Active Filter Display Area&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The active filter display area is designed to give users a quick read of their current filter and highlighting settings.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:18--&gt; Newcomers&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:19--&gt; A new user class defined for ERI denoting registered editors who are very new, having fewer than ten edits and four days of activity. Created because [[&lt;tvar name=research&gt;Edit Review Improvements#Related documents&lt;/tvar&gt;|research shows]] that such editors are particularly vulnerable to rejections. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; Learners&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:21--&gt; A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more days of activity and edits than ''“Newcomers”'' but fewer than ''“Experienced Users”''. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Autoconfirmed.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:22--&gt; Experienced Users&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:23--&gt; A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more than 30 days of activity and 500 edits. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Extended Confirmed.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== General and wiki concepts relevant to ERI == &lt;!--T:24--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; Artificial Intelligence&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; ERI uses predictive filters powered by the artificial intelligence (AI) program [&lt;tvar name=ORES&gt;https://ores.wikimedia.org/&lt;/tvar&gt; ORES]. Colloquially, the term [[:en:Artificial_intelligence|artificial intelligence]] is applied when a machine mimics cognitive functions that humans associate with other human minds, such as natural language processing, problem solving or learning. AI is a broad term that’s closely associated with the more specific concept of ''“machine learning”''.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Machine Learning&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; [[:en:Machine_learning|Machine learning]] is a subfield of ''artificial intelligence'' that seeks to give computers the ability to learn tasks they haven’t been specifically programmed to do. ERI uses predictive filters powered by the machine-learning program [&lt;tvar name=ORES&gt;https://ores.wikimedia.org/&lt;/tvar&gt; ORES].&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:29--&gt; Accuracy&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt; ERI tools offer AI predictive filters at various levels of “accuracy”. Used in this context, accuracy refers to the percentage of search results the filter returns that correctly identify the property the filter is targeting. In other words, the more accurate the filter is, the fewer false positives it produces. (In the AI field, the correct technical term for this is “[[:en:Precision_and_recall|precision]]”.)&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:31--&gt; Feed&lt;/translate&gt;
:''&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:32--&gt; Also referred to as a '''Stream'''&lt;/translate&gt;''
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:33--&gt; A computer feed is a data format used for providing users with frequently updated content. In ERI, [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] is a feed that broadcasts data about recent changes to anti-vandalism and edit-review programs.&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:34--&gt; Good faith&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; ERI projects offer User Intent filters, which predict whether an edit was made in good faith. In this sense, the term refers to whether a user’s intention was to contribute to the wiki or damage it. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but who may lack the skill or knowledge to do so successfully. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a [[&lt;tvar name=research&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team&lt;/tvar&gt;|good-faith test]].)&lt;/translate&gt;
;&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:36--&gt; Damage&lt;/translate&gt;
:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:37--&gt; ERI projects offer Contribution Quality filters, which predict whether an edit improves the wiki or damages it. In this sense, “damage” is a general term that covers both vandalism and unintentional errors of formatting, style, fact, etc. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but whose lack of skill or knowledge leads them to cause damage. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a “[[&lt;tvar name=research&gt;m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models&lt;/tvar&gt;|damaging]]” test.)&lt;/translate&gt;

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2gkmunzal6jtgxienqg7rozedkifxtn</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/th</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>646520</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402271</id>
      <parentid>5400763</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24230" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=การปรับปรุงข้อมูลที่มีอยู่ใน Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;คลิกที่ [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] การเชื่อมโยงในมุมขวาบนในขณะที่เข้าสู่ระบบช่วยให้คุณสามารถเปลี่ยนการตั้งค่าของคุณ คุณจะถูกนำเสนอด้วยส่วนรายละเอียดของผู้ใช้เช่นเดียวกับบาร์ของแท็บด้านบนสำหรับการเปลี่ยนประเภทอื่น ๆ ของการตั้งค่า&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ชื่อผู้ใช้ของคุณ ข้าราชการเท่านั้นที่สามารถเปลี่ยนชื่อผู้ใช้ของคุณ และวิกิพีเดียยังต้องมี {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension ที่ติดตั้งแล้ว&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || เกี่ยวกับภาพวิกิมีเดียลิงค์นี้ช่วยให้คุณสามารถจัดการการใช้งานภายนอกที่ได้รับอนุญาตให้เข้าถึงบัญชีของคุณ &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ดู [[Help:OAuth|OAuth help]] สำหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติม&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-prefs-edits'' หลายวิธีการแก้ไขที่คุณได้ทำ ไม่ได้ทั้งหมดวิกิคงจะมี&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|ดูด้านล่าง]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|ดูด้านล่าง]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;การเปลี่ยนรหัสผ่านของคุณป้อนรหัสผ่านเก่าของคุณในช่องแรกและรหัสผ่านใหม่ของคุณในช่วงสอง หากคุณต้องการให้เว็บไซต์นี้จดจำการเข้าสู่ระบบของคุณ ให้ติ๊กเลือก '' จำการเข้าสู่ระบบของฉันในคอมพิวเตอร์เครื่องนี้ '' โปรดทราบว่าฟังก์ชั่นนี้คุณจะต้องเปิดใช้งานคุกกี้ในเบราว์เซอร์ของคุณและถ้าคุกกี้ของคุณจะถูกล้างออกหรือหมดอายุคุณจะไม่ได้รับการจดจำ&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== บัญชีทั่วโลก ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;จากการตั้งค่าของคุณคุณสามารถเลือกภาษาที่คุณต้องการอินเตอร์เฟซที่จะอยู่ใน. เฉพาะปุ่มเช่น 'แก้ไข' และ 'พูดคุย' นอกเหนือไปไม่กี่หน้าในแถบด้านข้างจะได้รับผลกระทบ ข้อความหลักของหน้าเว็บที่จะไม่ได้รับการเปลี่ยนแปลงโดยการนี้ได้ส่วนใหญ่ของหน้าแม้ว่าจะมีไม่กี่หน้าที่มันจะเหมือนบางอย่างในวิกิพีเดีย Meta วิกิ&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

*ภาษา
* วิธีที่คุณจะชอบที่จะได้รับการอธิบาย?
* การตั้งค่าภาษาอื่นๆ

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* ลายเซ็นที่มีอยู่ของคุณ
* ลายเซ็นใหม่
** Treat คือ wikitext

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
หากคุณได้จัดที่อยู่อีเมลของคุณจะต้องคลิกที่ปุ่ม '' ยืนยันที่อยู่ '' เพื่อที่จะใช้ฟังก์ชั่นเหล่านี้ คุณจะได้รับอีเมล; เพียงแค่เปิดมันและทำตามการเชื่อมโยงเพื่อเปิดใช้งานฟังก์ชั่นดังต่อไปนี้

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ยืนยันอีเมล์&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;วิธีนี้ช่วยให้ผู้ใช้ที่ลงทะเบียนรายอื่นส่งอีเมลถึงคุณโดยใช้ลิงก์ &quot;ส่งอีเมลผู้ใช้รายนี้&quot; บนแถบด้านข้างของหน้าผู้ใช้ของคุณ อีเมลจะถูกส่งโดยใช้เว็บอินเตอร์เฟสและที่อยู่อีเมลของคุณจะไม่ถูกเปิดเผยต่อผู้ส่งจนกว่าคุณจะตอบกลับทางอีเมล&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || วิธีนี้ช่วยให้ผู้ใช้ที่ไม่มีสิทธิ์การยืนยันอัตโนมัติในการส่งอีเมลถึงคุณ
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || ตัวเลือกนี้ช่วยให้คุณระบุผู้ใช้ที่จะไม่สามารถส่งอีเมลถึงคุณโดยตรง พวกเขาจะไม่เห็นลิงก์ &quot;ส่งอีเมลผู้ใช้รายนี้&quot; ที่แถบด้านข้างของหน้าผู้ใช้ของคุณ 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
คุณสามารถเลือกผิวที่คุณต้องการใช้ที่นี่ คุณสามารถดูตัวอย่างสกินที่มีอยู่ก่อนที่จะเลือกพวกเขาโดยคลิกที่ &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; การเชื่อมโยงติดกับผิวแต่ละ โปรดดูที่ {{ll|Help:Skins}} สำหรับรายละเอียดเพิ่มเติม

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== รูปแบบวันที่และเวลาชดเชย ===

ต่อไปนี้คือการแสดงผลปกติขึ้นอยู่กับการตั้งค่า:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
คุณสามารถกำหนดวิธีการที่ภาพจะปรากฏแล้วได้ที่นี่ ภาพที่แสดงแล้วโดยการวางโดยตรงของ URL (ถ้าวิกิพีเดียมีมันเปิดใช้งาน) จะไม่ได้รับผลกระทบจากการตั้งค่านี้

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - การตั้งค่านี้ช่วยให้คุณสามารถเลือกวิธีการใหญ่ภาพตัวอย่างจะอยู่ในภาพ: หน้า ถ้าคุณรู้ว่าสิ่งที่ความละเอียดหน้าจอปัจจุบันของคุณคุณอาจต้องการที่จะตั้งค่านี้เป็นหนึ่งหรือสองขนาดเล็กกว่าหน้าจอของคุณเอง หากคุณมีการเชื่อมต่อช้า (อย่างเช่น Dial-Up) คุณอาจต้องการที่จะจำกัดมันเป็น 320 × 240
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - กำหนดวิธีการใหญ่คุณต้องการที่จะปรากฏภาพขนาดเล็ก การตั้งค่านี้จะไม่ส่งผลกระทบต่อภาพขนาดเล็กที่มีขนาดที่กำหนดโดยการแก้ไขและไม่สามารถเพิ่มภาพเกินกว่าขนาดเดิมของพวกเขา
* ใช้ตัวแสดงสื่อ: ในวิกิวิกิมีเดีย, การตั้งค่านี้ (ตามค่าเริ่มต้น) กำหนดว่า [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] ควรจะใช้ให้ภาพนุ่มนวลเพื่อประสบการณ์การรับชม

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;คุณสามารถควบคุมวิธีสมการทางคณิตศาสตร์ที่อธิบายไว้โดยใช้แท็ก {{tag|math|open}} จะปรากฏที่นี่ สูตรทางคณิตศาสตร์ที่อัปโหลดเป็นภาพหรือเขียนแท็กนอกคณิตศาสตร์จะไม่ได้รับผลกระทบจากการตั้งค่านี้ หมายเหตุ: การตั้งค่าทางคณิตศาสตร์เท่านั้นที่จะสามารถมองเห็นได้ถ้า $ext คือติดตั้งแล้ว&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
การตั้งค่าเหล่านี้เป็นการตั้งค่าเพื่อควบคุมหน้าการแก้ไขรวมถึงการดูหน้าเว็บที่คุณแก้ไขหรือสร้างขึ้นโดยอัตโนมัติ

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - คำนี้คุณสามารถระบุวิธีการย้อนกลับไป [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] หน้าจะไปได้ หมายเหตุ-รายการนั้นจะหยุดก่อนกำหนดหากจำนวนการแก้ไขเกิน (ดูด้านล่าง)
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - คำนี้คุณสามารถระบุจำนวนการแก้ไขที่จะแสดงแล้ว

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - นี้จะช่วยให้คุณสามารถซ่อนการแก้ไขทำเครื่องหมายเป็นเล็ก ๆ น้อย ๆ (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). เนื่องจากผู้ใช้บางอย่างรวดเร็วจะทำให้จำนวนมากของการปรับแต่งเล็ก ๆ เพื่อปรับปรุงแม่แบบหรือแก้ไขข้อผิดพลาดการสะกดคุณอาจพบว่าการเปิดใช้งานนี้จะเป็นประโยชน์ นอกจากนี้คุณยังสามารถเปิดการทำงานนี้ชั่วคราวจากหน้าการเปลี่ยนแปลงล่าสุด (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - ปรับปรุงเปลี่ยนแปลงล่าสุดควบแน่นแก้ไขเป็นรายการต่อหน้า ตามที่ระบุไว้นี้ต้องการ JavaScript เพื่อให้สามารถเปิดใช้งาน ดู {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} สำหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติมเกี่ยวกับคุณลักษณะนี้
* แสดงวิกิสนเทศการแก้ไขในการเปลี่ยนแปลงล่าสุด: โครงการวิกิมีเดียเลือกที่ข้อมูลจาก [[d:|Wikidata]] ตัวเลือกใช้ได้ นี้จะช่วยให้คุณสามารถเห็นการเปลี่ยนแปลงไปยังรายการวิกิสนเทศเชื่อมต่อกับหน้าเว็บในวิกิพีเดียของคุณเช่นเดียวกับการเปลี่ยนแปลง หน้าวิกิพีเดียตัวเอง นี้จะช่วยให้จับป่าเถื่อนบนวิกิสนเทศที่สามารถมองเห็นได้ในวิกิพีเดียของคุณ

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;เหล่านี้มีการตั้งค่าในการควบคุมพฤติกรรมของรายการเฝ้าดู (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}). ส่วนมากของตัวเลือกเหล่านี้นอกจากนี้ยังมีบนจอแสดงผลเฝ้าดูตัวเอง แต่พวกเขาโดยการตั้งค่าในการตั้งค่าของคุณคุณสามารถควบคุมการทำงานเริ่มต้นของการเฝ้าดูนั่นคือมันจะดำเนินการเหมือนกันทุกครั้งที่คุณไปที่หน้า&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* แสดงวิกิสนเทศการแก้ไขในรายการเฝ้าดูของคุณ: ในโครงการวิกิมีเดียเลือกที่ข้อมูลจาก [[d:|Wikidata]] ใช้ได้ตัวเลือกนี้จะช่วยให้คุณสามารถเห็นการเปลี่ยนแปลงไปยังรายการวิกิสนเทศเชื่อมต่อกับหน้าเว็บในวิกิพีเดียของคุณเช่นเดียวกับการเปลี่ยนแปลง หน้าวิกิพีเดียตัวเอง นี้จะช่วยให้จับป่าเถื่อนบนวิกิสนเทศที่สามารถมองเห็นได้ในวิกิพีเดียของคุณ

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* โทเค็นเฝ้า: โทเค็นนี้จะใช้ในการสร้าง [[w:en:RSS feed|RSS feed]] จากรายการเฝ้าดูของคุณ ทุกคนที่รู้โทเค็นนี้สามารถใช้เพื่อเข้าถึงรายการเฝ้าดู ถ้าโทเค็นถูกค้นพบโดยคนอื่นคุณสามารถใช้ &quot;คลิกที่นี่ถ้าคุณจำเป็นต้องตั้งค่าใหม่&quot; เพื่อสร้างโทเค็นใหม่ เมื่อคุณได้กระทำนี้คุณจะต้องแก้ไข URL ของการสมัครสมาชิกฟีดของคุณในโปรแกรมอ่านฟีดของคุณกับบัญชีสำหรับโทเค็นใหม่

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ตั้งค่าเริ่มต้นสำหรับการค้นหารวมทั้งวิธีการหลายผลลัพธ์ที่จะแสดงและวิธีบริบทมากที่จะแสดงผลสำหรับแต่ละ ตรวจสอบในช่องถัดจาก namespaces ที่คุณต้องการที่จะแสดงขึ้นเป็นครั้งแรกที่คุณค้นหาบางสิ่งบางอย่าง คุณสามารถแทนที่นี้เมื่อทำการค้นหาที่เกิดขึ้นจริงจากการตรวจสอบหรือยกเลิกการเลือกกล่องที่ด้านล่างของหน้าจอผลการค้นหา&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
เกี่ยวกับภาพวิกิมีเดียแท็บ '''คุณลักษณะเบต้า''' ช่วยให้คุณสามารถเปิดใช้งานคุณลักษณะการทดลองก่อนที่พวกเขาจะทำทุกคนสามารถใช้ได้
หากคุณเลือกที่จะเปิดที่ใด ๆ ของคุณลักษณะเหล่านี้คุณควรเตรียมที่จะพบข้อบกพร่องและปัญหาและคุณอาจจะเห็นการเปลี่ยนแปลงอย่างฉับพลันในทางคุณลักษณะที่มีลักษณะหรือการทำงานกับการพัฒนาอย่างต่อเนื่อง

คุณลักษณะแต่ละคนมีการเชื่อมโยง &quot;การสนทนา&quot; ถัดไปเพื่อให้คุณสามารถนำเสนอข้อเสนอแนะหรือรายงานปัญหาใดๆ

ดู [[About Beta Features]] สำหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติม

* เปิดใช้งานโดยอัตโนมัติคุณลักษณะเบต้าใหม่ทั้งหมด: ถ้าคุณเปิดตัวเลือกนี้คุณลักษณะเบต้าใหม่จะกลายเป็นงานสำหรับคุณโดยเร็วที่สุดเท่าที่พวกเขาจะมีการเพิ่มเบต้าคุณสมบัติของระบบ

== ดูเพิ่มเติม ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>pm1taed07wqn4qcjq7ct9uxkn812ckc</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402313</id>
      <parentid>5402271</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:09:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24182" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=การปรับปรุงข้อมูลที่มีอยู่ใน Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;คลิกที่ [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] การเชื่อมโยงในมุมขวาบนในขณะที่เข้าสู่ระบบช่วยให้คุณสามารถเปลี่ยนการตั้งค่าของคุณ คุณจะถูกนำเสนอด้วยส่วนรายละเอียดของผู้ใช้เช่นเดียวกับบาร์ของแท็บด้านบนสำหรับการเปลี่ยนประเภทอื่น ๆ ของการตั้งค่า&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ชื่อผู้ใช้ของคุณ ข้าราชการเท่านั้นที่สามารถเปลี่ยนชื่อผู้ใช้ของคุณ และวิกิพีเดียยังต้องมี {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension ที่ติดตั้งแล้ว&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || เกี่ยวกับภาพวิกิมีเดียลิงค์นี้ช่วยให้คุณสามารถจัดการการใช้งานภายนอกที่ได้รับอนุญาตให้เข้าถึงบัญชีของคุณ ดู {{ll|Help:OAuth}} สำหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติม
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-prefs-edits'' หลายวิธีการแก้ไขที่คุณได้ทำ ไม่ได้ทั้งหมดวิกิคงจะมี&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|ดูด้านล่าง]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|ดูด้านล่าง]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;การเปลี่ยนรหัสผ่านของคุณป้อนรหัสผ่านเก่าของคุณในช่องแรกและรหัสผ่านใหม่ของคุณในช่วงสอง หากคุณต้องการให้เว็บไซต์นี้จดจำการเข้าสู่ระบบของคุณ ให้ติ๊กเลือก '' จำการเข้าสู่ระบบของฉันในคอมพิวเตอร์เครื่องนี้ '' โปรดทราบว่าฟังก์ชั่นนี้คุณจะต้องเปิดใช้งานคุกกี้ในเบราว์เซอร์ของคุณและถ้าคุกกี้ของคุณจะถูกล้างออกหรือหมดอายุคุณจะไม่ได้รับการจดจำ&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== บัญชีทั่วโลก ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;จากการตั้งค่าของคุณคุณสามารถเลือกภาษาที่คุณต้องการอินเตอร์เฟซที่จะอยู่ใน. เฉพาะปุ่มเช่น 'แก้ไข' และ 'พูดคุย' นอกเหนือไปไม่กี่หน้าในแถบด้านข้างจะได้รับผลกระทบ ข้อความหลักของหน้าเว็บที่จะไม่ได้รับการเปลี่ยนแปลงโดยการนี้ได้ส่วนใหญ่ของหน้าแม้ว่าจะมีไม่กี่หน้าที่มันจะเหมือนบางอย่างในวิกิพีเดีย Meta วิกิ&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

*ภาษา
* วิธีที่คุณจะชอบที่จะได้รับการอธิบาย?
* การตั้งค่าภาษาอื่นๆ

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* ลายเซ็นที่มีอยู่ของคุณ
* ลายเซ็นใหม่
** Treat คือ wikitext

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
หากคุณได้จัดที่อยู่อีเมลของคุณจะต้องคลิกที่ปุ่ม '' ยืนยันที่อยู่ '' เพื่อที่จะใช้ฟังก์ชั่นเหล่านี้ คุณจะได้รับอีเมล; เพียงแค่เปิดมันและทำตามการเชื่อมโยงเพื่อเปิดใช้งานฟังก์ชั่นดังต่อไปนี้

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ยืนยันอีเมล์&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;วิธีนี้ช่วยให้ผู้ใช้ที่ลงทะเบียนรายอื่นส่งอีเมลถึงคุณโดยใช้ลิงก์ &quot;ส่งอีเมลผู้ใช้รายนี้&quot; บนแถบด้านข้างของหน้าผู้ใช้ของคุณ อีเมลจะถูกส่งโดยใช้เว็บอินเตอร์เฟสและที่อยู่อีเมลของคุณจะไม่ถูกเปิดเผยต่อผู้ส่งจนกว่าคุณจะตอบกลับทางอีเมล&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || วิธีนี้ช่วยให้ผู้ใช้ที่ไม่มีสิทธิ์การยืนยันอัตโนมัติในการส่งอีเมลถึงคุณ
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || ตัวเลือกนี้ช่วยให้คุณระบุผู้ใช้ที่จะไม่สามารถส่งอีเมลถึงคุณโดยตรง พวกเขาจะไม่เห็นลิงก์ &quot;ส่งอีเมลผู้ใช้รายนี้&quot; ที่แถบด้านข้างของหน้าผู้ใช้ของคุณ 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
คุณสามารถเลือกผิวที่คุณต้องการใช้ที่นี่ คุณสามารถดูตัวอย่างสกินที่มีอยู่ก่อนที่จะเลือกพวกเขาโดยคลิกที่ &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; การเชื่อมโยงติดกับผิวแต่ละ โปรดดูที่ {{ll|Help:Skins}} สำหรับรายละเอียดเพิ่มเติม

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== รูปแบบวันที่และเวลาชดเชย ===

ต่อไปนี้คือการแสดงผลปกติขึ้นอยู่กับการตั้งค่า:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
คุณสามารถกำหนดวิธีการที่ภาพจะปรากฏแล้วได้ที่นี่ ภาพที่แสดงแล้วโดยการวางโดยตรงของ URL (ถ้าวิกิพีเดียมีมันเปิดใช้งาน) จะไม่ได้รับผลกระทบจากการตั้งค่านี้

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - การตั้งค่านี้ช่วยให้คุณสามารถเลือกวิธีการใหญ่ภาพตัวอย่างจะอยู่ในภาพ: หน้า ถ้าคุณรู้ว่าสิ่งที่ความละเอียดหน้าจอปัจจุบันของคุณคุณอาจต้องการที่จะตั้งค่านี้เป็นหนึ่งหรือสองขนาดเล็กกว่าหน้าจอของคุณเอง หากคุณมีการเชื่อมต่อช้า (อย่างเช่น Dial-Up) คุณอาจต้องการที่จะจำกัดมันเป็น 320 × 240
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - กำหนดวิธีการใหญ่คุณต้องการที่จะปรากฏภาพขนาดเล็ก การตั้งค่านี้จะไม่ส่งผลกระทบต่อภาพขนาดเล็กที่มีขนาดที่กำหนดโดยการแก้ไขและไม่สามารถเพิ่มภาพเกินกว่าขนาดเดิมของพวกเขา
* ใช้ตัวแสดงสื่อ: ในวิกิวิกิมีเดีย, การตั้งค่านี้ (ตามค่าเริ่มต้น) กำหนดว่า [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] ควรจะใช้ให้ภาพนุ่มนวลเพื่อประสบการณ์การรับชม

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;คุณสามารถควบคุมวิธีสมการทางคณิตศาสตร์ที่อธิบายไว้โดยใช้แท็ก {{tag|math|open}} จะปรากฏที่นี่ สูตรทางคณิตศาสตร์ที่อัปโหลดเป็นภาพหรือเขียนแท็กนอกคณิตศาสตร์จะไม่ได้รับผลกระทบจากการตั้งค่านี้ หมายเหตุ: การตั้งค่าทางคณิตศาสตร์เท่านั้นที่จะสามารถมองเห็นได้ถ้า $ext คือติดตั้งแล้ว&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
การตั้งค่าเหล่านี้เป็นการตั้งค่าเพื่อควบคุมหน้าการแก้ไขรวมถึงการดูหน้าเว็บที่คุณแก้ไขหรือสร้างขึ้นโดยอัตโนมัติ

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - คำนี้คุณสามารถระบุวิธีการย้อนกลับไป [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] หน้าจะไปได้ หมายเหตุ-รายการนั้นจะหยุดก่อนกำหนดหากจำนวนการแก้ไขเกิน (ดูด้านล่าง)
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - คำนี้คุณสามารถระบุจำนวนการแก้ไขที่จะแสดงแล้ว

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - นี้จะช่วยให้คุณสามารถซ่อนการแก้ไขทำเครื่องหมายเป็นเล็ก ๆ น้อย ๆ (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). เนื่องจากผู้ใช้บางอย่างรวดเร็วจะทำให้จำนวนมากของการปรับแต่งเล็ก ๆ เพื่อปรับปรุงแม่แบบหรือแก้ไขข้อผิดพลาดการสะกดคุณอาจพบว่าการเปิดใช้งานนี้จะเป็นประโยชน์ นอกจากนี้คุณยังสามารถเปิดการทำงานนี้ชั่วคราวจากหน้าการเปลี่ยนแปลงล่าสุด (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - ปรับปรุงเปลี่ยนแปลงล่าสุดควบแน่นแก้ไขเป็นรายการต่อหน้า ตามที่ระบุไว้นี้ต้องการ JavaScript เพื่อให้สามารถเปิดใช้งาน ดู {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} สำหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติมเกี่ยวกับคุณลักษณะนี้
* แสดงวิกิสนเทศการแก้ไขในการเปลี่ยนแปลงล่าสุด: โครงการวิกิมีเดียเลือกที่ข้อมูลจาก [[d:|Wikidata]] ตัวเลือกใช้ได้ นี้จะช่วยให้คุณสามารถเห็นการเปลี่ยนแปลงไปยังรายการวิกิสนเทศเชื่อมต่อกับหน้าเว็บในวิกิพีเดียของคุณเช่นเดียวกับการเปลี่ยนแปลง หน้าวิกิพีเดียตัวเอง นี้จะช่วยให้จับป่าเถื่อนบนวิกิสนเทศที่สามารถมองเห็นได้ในวิกิพีเดียของคุณ

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;เหล่านี้มีการตั้งค่าในการควบคุมพฤติกรรมของรายการเฝ้าดู (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}). ส่วนมากของตัวเลือกเหล่านี้นอกจากนี้ยังมีบนจอแสดงผลเฝ้าดูตัวเอง แต่พวกเขาโดยการตั้งค่าในการตั้งค่าของคุณคุณสามารถควบคุมการทำงานเริ่มต้นของการเฝ้าดูนั่นคือมันจะดำเนินการเหมือนกันทุกครั้งที่คุณไปที่หน้า&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
* แสดงวิกิสนเทศการแก้ไขในรายการเฝ้าดูของคุณ: ในโครงการวิกิมีเดียเลือกที่ข้อมูลจาก [[d:|Wikidata]] ใช้ได้ตัวเลือกนี้จะช่วยให้คุณสามารถเห็นการเปลี่ยนแปลงไปยังรายการวิกิสนเทศเชื่อมต่อกับหน้าเว็บในวิกิพีเดียของคุณเช่นเดียวกับการเปลี่ยนแปลง หน้าวิกิพีเดียตัวเอง นี้จะช่วยให้จับป่าเถื่อนบนวิกิสนเทศที่สามารถมองเห็นได้ในวิกิพีเดียของคุณ

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
* โทเค็นเฝ้า: โทเค็นนี้จะใช้ในการสร้าง [[w:en:RSS feed|RSS feed]] จากรายการเฝ้าดูของคุณ ทุกคนที่รู้โทเค็นนี้สามารถใช้เพื่อเข้าถึงรายการเฝ้าดู ถ้าโทเค็นถูกค้นพบโดยคนอื่นคุณสามารถใช้ &quot;คลิกที่นี่ถ้าคุณจำเป็นต้องตั้งค่าใหม่&quot; เพื่อสร้างโทเค็นใหม่ เมื่อคุณได้กระทำนี้คุณจะต้องแก้ไข URL ของการสมัครสมาชิกฟีดของคุณในโปรแกรมอ่านฟีดของคุณกับบัญชีสำหรับโทเค็นใหม่

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ตั้งค่าเริ่มต้นสำหรับการค้นหารวมทั้งวิธีการหลายผลลัพธ์ที่จะแสดงและวิธีบริบทมากที่จะแสดงผลสำหรับแต่ละ ตรวจสอบในช่องถัดจาก namespaces ที่คุณต้องการที่จะแสดงขึ้นเป็นครั้งแรกที่คุณค้นหาบางสิ่งบางอย่าง คุณสามารถแทนที่นี้เมื่อทำการค้นหาที่เกิดขึ้นจริงจากการตรวจสอบหรือยกเลิกการเลือกกล่องที่ด้านล่างของหน้าจอผลการค้นหา&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
เกี่ยวกับภาพวิกิมีเดียแท็บ '''คุณลักษณะเบต้า''' ช่วยให้คุณสามารถเปิดใช้งานคุณลักษณะการทดลองก่อนที่พวกเขาจะทำทุกคนสามารถใช้ได้
หากคุณเลือกที่จะเปิดที่ใด ๆ ของคุณลักษณะเหล่านี้คุณควรเตรียมที่จะพบข้อบกพร่องและปัญหาและคุณอาจจะเห็นการเปลี่ยนแปลงอย่างฉับพลันในทางคุณลักษณะที่มีลักษณะหรือการทำงานกับการพัฒนาอย่างต่อเนื่อง

คุณลักษณะแต่ละคนมีการเชื่อมโยง &quot;การสนทนา&quot; ถัดไปเพื่อให้คุณสามารถนำเสนอข้อเสนอแนะหรือรายงานปัญหาใดๆ

ดู [[About Beta Features]] สำหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติม

* เปิดใช้งานโดยอัตโนมัติคุณลักษณะเบต้าใหม่ทั้งหมด: ถ้าคุณเปิดตัวเลือกนี้คุณลักษณะเบต้าใหม่จะกลายเป็นงานสำหรับคุณโดยเร็วที่สุดเท่าที่พวกเขาจะมีการเพิ่มเบต้าคุณสมบัติของระบบ

== ดูเพิ่มเติม ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9z5d4unu2vea8ofw75ai0sm9whaak3f</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/th</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>646525</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402312</id>
      <parentid>2331276</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:09:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="73" xml:space="preserve">ดู $1 สำหรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติม</text>
      <sha1>pg3ic5us84nxh6j6il67ma73jtjd1gs</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Statistics and reporting/1/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>647015</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402889</id>
      <parentid>4939853</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:43:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="90" xml:space="preserve">La [[$te|extensión Traducir]] proporciona numerosos '''datos estadísticos e informes'''.</text>
      <sha1>9pu0b6hxhsvkbwjiedo1vfm21ql7pe6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/my</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>648748</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402256</id>
      <parentid>5400747</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14138" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=သစ်လွင်သော အချက်အလက်သည် Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]] တွင်ရနိုင်သည်။}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;နောက်ထပ်အချက်အလက်အတွက် [[Help:OAuth|OAuth help]] ကိုကြည့်ပါ။&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|အောက်တွင်ကြည့်ပါ]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|အောက်တွင်ကြည့်ပါ]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
====ဂလိုဘယ် အကောင့်====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

*ဘာသာစကားများ
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
*ပို၍ ဘာသာစကားအပြင်အဆင်များ

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
*သင်၏ ရှိပြီးသားလက်မှတ်
*လက်မှတ်သစ်
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;*အီးမေးလ် အတည်ပြုချက်&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Date format and time offset ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

==နောက်ထပ်ကြည့်ရှုရန်==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>e1muc8c5q4uww8hpx7a59gjbtsloym1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402301</id>
      <parentid>5402256</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:07:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14090" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=သစ်လွင်သော အချက်အလက်သည် Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]] တွင်ရနိုင်သည်။}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; နောက်ထပ်အချက်အလက်အတွက် {{ll|Help:OAuth}} ကိုကြည့်ပါ။
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|အောက်တွင်ကြည့်ပါ]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|အောက်တွင်ကြည့်ပါ]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
====ဂလိုဘယ် အကောင့်====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

*ဘာသာစကားများ
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
*ပို၍ ဘာသာစကားအပြင်အဆင်များ

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
*သင်၏ ရှိပြီးသားလက်မှတ်
*လက်မှတ်သစ်
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;*အီးမေးလ် အတည်ပြုချက်&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Date format and time offset ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

==နောက်ထပ်ကြည့်ရှုရန်==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>fyuaa7p2awmjhjkb4i6mlhf5u6d3xv5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/my</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>648752</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402300</id>
      <parentid>2338325</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:07:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="103" xml:space="preserve">နောက်ထပ်အချက်အလက်အတွက် $1 ကိုကြည့်ပါ။</text>
      <sha1>h0d80gccpter94r8jjz52ccgbgv88k3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/uk</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>649133</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402793</id>
      <parentid>4916931</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:55:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="211" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Довідка щодо використання шаблонів цитування]] або [[$2|Довідка щодо використання кнопки додавання $3 сервісу Citoid]]</text>
      <sha1>rfo9nt30x6blmiwbotae8tsq93rozj3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/8/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>650831</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402806</id>
      <parentid>4495151</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:16:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="62" xml:space="preserve">Also known as '''[[$1|Filters for Special:Recent Changes]]'''.</text>
      <sha1>030zi34059gjt0d30ibsdqpap8ppxk8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/en</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>650861</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402807</id>
      <parentid>4494952</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:16:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5764" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
The following terms are relevant to the Edit Review Improvements project (ERI). 
Terms in italics are entries of that glossary.

== ERI components and special terms ==
;Edit Review Improvements
:''Also known as '''ERI'''''
:[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements|Edit Review Improvements]] (ERI) is a project of the [[Collaboration|Collaboration Team]] that is seeks to reduce the negative effects current edit-review processes can have on new editors to the wikis—while improving edit-review processes overall.
;New filters for edit review
:''Also known as '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes|Filters for Special:Recent Changes]]'''.''
:One of the first product releases of the Edit Review Improvements project is a suite of improvements to the Recent Changes special page that are designed to help reviewers in general to better target their efforts and be more efficient. The improvements also have the potential to particularly benefit new contributors. 
;ReviewStream
:[[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] is a machine-readable feed that’s designed to be used by a variety of edit-review tools. Like [[RCStream|RCStream]], it will broadcast recent changes from MediaWiki wikis. To the information currently in RCStream, ReviewStream adds additional data designed to improve the edit-review process.
;Filter search bar
:Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. Users click in the Filter Search Bar to begin the process of filtering recent changes, either by clicking to select filters from the ''Dropdown Filter Panel'' (see below) or by typing their names.
;Dropdown Filter Panel
:Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The filter panel  is a dropdown menu that displays a list of filtering options.
;Active Filter Display Area
:Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The active filter display area is designed to give users a quick read of their current filter and highlighting settings.
;Newcomers
:A new user class defined for ERI denoting registered editors who are very new, having fewer than ten edits and four days of activity. Created because [[Edit Review Improvements#Related documents|research shows]] that such editors are particularly vulnerable to rejections. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects.
;Learners
:A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more days of activity and edits than ''“Newcomers”'' but fewer than ''“Experienced Users”''. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Autoconfirmed.
;Experienced Users
:A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more than 30 days of activity and 500 edits. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Extended Confirmed.

== General and wiki concepts relevant to ERI ==
;Artificial Intelligence
:ERI uses predictive filters powered by the artificial intelligence (AI) program [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES]. Colloquially, the term [[:en:Artificial_intelligence|artificial intelligence]] is applied when a machine mimics cognitive functions that humans associate with other human minds, such as natural language processing, problem solving or learning. AI is a broad term that’s closely associated with the more specific concept of ''“machine learning”''.
;Machine Learning
:[[:en:Machine_learning|Machine learning]] is a subfield of ''artificial intelligence'' that seeks to give computers the ability to learn tasks they haven’t been specifically programmed to do. ERI uses predictive filters powered by the machine-learning program [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES].
;Accuracy
:ERI tools offer AI predictive filters at various levels of “accuracy”. Used in this context, accuracy refers to the percentage of search results the filter returns that correctly identify the property the filter is targeting. In other words, the more accurate the filter is, the fewer false positives it produces. (In the AI field, the correct technical term for this is “[[:en:Precision_and_recall|precision]]”.)
;Feed
:''Also referred to as a '''Stream'''''
:A computer feed is a data format used for providing users with frequently updated content. In ERI, [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] is a feed that broadcasts data about recent changes to anti-vandalism and edit-review programs.
;Good faith
:ERI projects offer User Intent filters, which predict whether an edit was made in good faith. In this sense, the term refers to whether a user’s intention was to contribute to the wiki or damage it. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but who may lack the skill or knowledge to do so successfully. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team|good-faith test]].)
;Damage
:ERI projects offer Contribution Quality filters, which predict whether an edit improves the wiki or damages it. In this sense, “damage” is a general term that covers both vandalism and unintentional errors of formatting, style, fact, etc. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but whose lack of skill or knowledge leads them to cause damage. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a “[[m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models|damaging]]” test.)

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>d6bh5uqbx7becy4t2hnf7mxwqu7ahj8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/31/pl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>651232</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402681</id>
      <parentid>2613266</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:02:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="68" xml:space="preserve">zobacz też: [[$summarize|Podsumowywanie / rozwiązywanie wątków]]</text>
      <sha1>11tfogoqgbwyq711o8gu3hdzw3l0msk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/45/pl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>651238</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402666</id>
      <parentid>2613440</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:53:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="65" xml:space="preserve">zobacz też: [[$Topics|Podsumowywanie / rozwiązywanie wątków]]</text>
      <sha1>rb5xitfkew6lrqz2stnc6z7o32ees2b</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/ja</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>652149</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402811</id>
      <parentid>4748115</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:16:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7417" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
「投稿査読の改善」プロジェクト (ERI) に関連する用語を集めました。 
斜体で記した用語はそれぞれの用語集にリンクします。

== ERI のコンポーネントと特殊な用語 ==
;投稿の査読の改善
:''別名 '''ERI'''''
:[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements|編集の査読改善]]（Edit Review ImprovementsERI）とは[[Collaboration|Collaborationチーム]]が進める改善プロジェクトで、現状の編集の査読プロセスが編集の初学者に与えかねない悪影響の低減と—編集の作動全体の底上げを同時に目指しています。
;投稿の査読に使う新しいフィルタ
:''&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;あるいは'''[[Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes|「特別ページ:最近の更新」の絞込み機能]]'''とも呼ばれます。&lt;/span&gt;''
:ERIの初期のリリース版では、特別ページである「最近の更新」の改善をいくつか試みており、査読者全般の対象選びと作業効率のサポートを目指しました。それらの改善は、中でも新人の寄稿者に役立つ可能性を備えています。 
;査読ストリーム
:[[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|査読ストリーム]]（ReviewStream）は機械可読なフィードで、さまざまな編集の査読用ツールで利用するよう設計してあります。[[RCStream|RCStream]]と同様にMediaWikiのウィキ群の最近の更新を広めます。ReviewStreamはRCStreamの蓄えた情報にデータを追加し、編集から査読までの過程の改善を目指しています。
;フィルター検索のツールバー
:「最近の更新ページの改善」の一環。ユーザーはこのバーを押して「最近の更新」の絞りこみができ、「フィルターのドロップダウンパネル」（下図参照）から選ぶか、もしくは検索窓に入力します。
;フィルターのドロップダウンパネル
:「最近の更新ページの改善」の一環。絞りこみのオプションはフィルターパネルに表示され、ドロップダウン式のメニューから選びます。
;使用中のフィルターの表示枠
:「最近の更新ページの改善」の一環。使用中のフィルターを表示する枠を見ると、自分が使用中のフィルターや強調表示が一目で把握できます。
;新人
:ERI 用に追加されたユーザークラスであり、同名のERIプロジェクトを指す。アカウントを登録していて活動歴4日未満、編集履歴が10件未満という、活動をごく最近始めたばかりの「初心者」を示す。[[Edit Review Improvements#Related documents|調査結果によると]]、この群の編集者は特異的に排除されがちである。
;初学者
:ERI 用に追加されたユーザークラスであり、ERIプロジェクトの同名のフィルタを指す。アカウントを登録していて、編集履歴と活動歴がそれぞれ''「初心者」'' より長く ''「編集経験者」'' より短い編集者を示す。英語版ウィキペディアでは「自動承認」に対応するカテゴリ。
;利用歴の長いユーザー
:ERI 用に追加されたユーザークラスであり、ERIプロジェクトの同名のフィルタを指す。アカウントを登録していて、編集履歴500件超で活動歴が30日超の編集者を示す。英語版ウィキペディアでは「Extended confirmed」に対応するカテゴリ。(訳注：同日本語版では未設定)

== ERI の定義とウィキにおける位置づけ ==
;人工知能 (Artificial Intelligence)
:ERI は予測型フィルタに人工知能プログラム ('''A'''rtificial '''I'''ntelligence) [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES]を援用しています。[[:ja:人工知能|AI]]は日常用語では、人間が他の人間に対して連想する認知機能を機械がマネする働きを意味し、自然言語処理や問題処理、学習などに応用されます。つまり AI とは、特定の理論である''「機械学習」'' をも含む広い概念を指します。
;機械学習 (Machine Learning)
:[[:ja:機械学習|機械学習]]とは''人工知能'' の分野のひとつで、目標はコンピュータにプログラムされた特定のタスク以上の仕事をこなす能力を与えることです。そのうちの [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES] という予測型フィルタを ERI に援用しています。
;精度
:ERI ツールが提供する AI 予測型フィルタにはさまざまな精度のレベルがあります。ここでいう「精度」とは、フィルタが指定した対象の属性 (プロパティ) を識別し検出した正解率をパーセントで表示する数字のことです。言い換えるなら、フィルタの精度を上げると偽陽性の検出率は低くなります。 (この割合はAI 分野の技術用語で「検索性能」[[:en:Precision_and_recall|precision]]」のこと。)
;フィード (Feed)
:'''''ストリーム'''とも呼ばれます。''
:コンピュータのフィードとは、頻回に内容を更新された内容を対象とし、利用者に提供するデータ形式を指します。ERI プロジェクトが提供する[[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] というフィードは、荒らし行為対策プログラムと編集査読プログラムに対して、最近の更新関連のデータを伝達します。
;善意に解釈する
:ERI プロジェクトが成果として提供する「利用者意図フィルタ」 User Intent filters とは、特定の編集が善良な意図に基づくかどうか予測します。この場合の「意図」とは当該のウィキにおいて、利用者の目的が貢献と損害のどちらだったかを測ります。ERI の主目的のひとつは査読者が編集者を支援するため — 中でも ''新人編集者'' に注目 — 善良な意図に基づいて貢献しようとしたのに、技術や経験値が足りず失敗した人を見つかりやすくすることです。(ERI の「利用者意図意図フィルタ」User Intent filters を支える機械学習プログラム ORES は「[[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team|損害]]」試験機能を備えています。)
;損害
:ERI プロジェクトの成果には貢献の質を評価するフィルタ Contribution Quality filters があり、特定の編集が当該のウィキを改善するか損害するか予測します。
ここでいう「損害」damage とは、荒らし行為と無意識のエラーの両方を指し、書式設定やスタイル、事実などを対象とします。ERI の主目的のひとつは査読者から助けが必要な編集者 —中でも''新人編集者''に注目し — 善良な意図で貢献しようとしたのに技術や経験値が足りず損害を与えた人を探しやすくすることです。 (ERI の「利用者意図フィルタ」User Intent filters を支える機械学習プログラム ORES は「[[m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models|損害]]」試験機能を備えています。)

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>rrdowz4dxlrluzzg768qe6ocj9jodyu</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402823</id>
      <parentid>5402811</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:20:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7396" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
「投稿査読の改善」プロジェクト (ERI) に関連する用語を集めました。 
斜体で記した用語はそれぞれの用語集にリンクします。

== ERI のコンポーネントと特殊な用語 ==
;投稿の査読の改善
:''別名 '''ERI'''''
:[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements|編集の査読改善]]（Edit Review ImprovementsERI）とは[[Collaboration|Collaborationチーム]]が進める改善プロジェクトで、現状の編集の査読プロセスが編集の初学者に与えかねない悪影響の低減と—編集の作動全体の底上げを同時に目指しています。
;投稿の査読に使う新しいフィルタ
:''あるいは'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes|「特別ページ:最近の更新」の絞込み機能]]'''とも呼ばれます。''
:ERIの初期のリリース版では、特別ページである「最近の更新」の改善をいくつか試みており、査読者全般の対象選びと作業効率のサポートを目指しました。それらの改善は、中でも新人の寄稿者に役立つ可能性を備えています。 
;査読ストリーム
:[[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|査読ストリーム]]（ReviewStream）は機械可読なフィードで、さまざまな編集の査読用ツールで利用するよう設計してあります。[[RCStream|RCStream]]と同様にMediaWikiのウィキ群の最近の更新を広めます。ReviewStreamはRCStreamの蓄えた情報にデータを追加し、編集から査読までの過程の改善を目指しています。
;フィルター検索のツールバー
:「最近の更新ページの改善」の一環。ユーザーはこのバーを押して「最近の更新」の絞りこみができ、「フィルターのドロップダウンパネル」（下図参照）から選ぶか、もしくは検索窓に入力します。
;フィルターのドロップダウンパネル
:「最近の更新ページの改善」の一環。絞りこみのオプションはフィルターパネルに表示され、ドロップダウン式のメニューから選びます。
;使用中のフィルターの表示枠
:「最近の更新ページの改善」の一環。使用中のフィルターを表示する枠を見ると、自分が使用中のフィルターや強調表示が一目で把握できます。
;新人
:ERI 用に追加されたユーザークラスであり、同名のERIプロジェクトを指す。アカウントを登録していて活動歴4日未満、編集履歴が10件未満という、活動をごく最近始めたばかりの「初心者」を示す。[[Edit Review Improvements#Related documents|調査結果によると]]、この群の編集者は特異的に排除されがちである。
;初学者
:ERI 用に追加されたユーザークラスであり、ERIプロジェクトの同名のフィルタを指す。アカウントを登録していて、編集履歴と活動歴がそれぞれ''「初心者」'' より長く ''「編集経験者」'' より短い編集者を示す。英語版ウィキペディアでは「自動承認」に対応するカテゴリ。
;利用歴の長いユーザー
:ERI 用に追加されたユーザークラスであり、ERIプロジェクトの同名のフィルタを指す。アカウントを登録していて、編集履歴500件超で活動歴が30日超の編集者を示す。英語版ウィキペディアでは「Extended confirmed」に対応するカテゴリ。(訳注：同日本語版では未設定)

== ERI の定義とウィキにおける位置づけ ==
;人工知能 (Artificial Intelligence)
:ERI は予測型フィルタに人工知能プログラム ('''A'''rtificial '''I'''ntelligence) [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES]を援用しています。[[:ja:人工知能|AI]]は日常用語では、人間が他の人間に対して連想する認知機能を機械がマネする働きを意味し、自然言語処理や問題処理、学習などに応用されます。つまり AI とは、特定の理論である''「機械学習」'' をも含む広い概念を指します。
;機械学習 (Machine Learning)
:[[:ja:機械学習|機械学習]]とは''人工知能'' の分野のひとつで、目標はコンピュータにプログラムされた特定のタスク以上の仕事をこなす能力を与えることです。そのうちの [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES] という予測型フィルタを ERI に援用しています。
;精度
:ERI ツールが提供する AI 予測型フィルタにはさまざまな精度のレベルがあります。ここでいう「精度」とは、フィルタが指定した対象の属性 (プロパティ) を識別し検出した正解率をパーセントで表示する数字のことです。言い換えるなら、フィルタの精度を上げると偽陽性の検出率は低くなります。 (この割合はAI 分野の技術用語で「検索性能」[[:en:Precision_and_recall|precision]]」のこと。)
;フィード (Feed)
:'''''ストリーム'''とも呼ばれます。''
:コンピュータのフィードとは、頻回に内容を更新された内容を対象とし、利用者に提供するデータ形式を指します。ERI プロジェクトが提供する[[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] というフィードは、荒らし行為対策プログラムと編集査読プログラムに対して、最近の更新関連のデータを伝達します。
;善意に解釈する
:ERI プロジェクトが成果として提供する「利用者意図フィルタ」 User Intent filters とは、特定の編集が善良な意図に基づくかどうか予測します。この場合の「意図」とは当該のウィキにおいて、利用者の目的が貢献と損害のどちらだったかを測ります。ERI の主目的のひとつは査読者が編集者を支援するため — 中でも ''新人編集者'' に注目 — 善良な意図に基づいて貢献しようとしたのに、技術や経験値が足りず失敗した人を見つかりやすくすることです。(ERI の「利用者意図意図フィルタ」User Intent filters を支える機械学習プログラム ORES は「[[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team|損害]]」試験機能を備えています。)
;損害
:ERI プロジェクトの成果には貢献の質を評価するフィルタ Contribution Quality filters があり、特定の編集が当該のウィキを改善するか損害するか予測します。
ここでいう「損害」damage とは、荒らし行為と無意識のエラーの両方を指し、書式設定やスタイル、事実などを対象とします。ERI の主目的のひとつは査読者から助けが必要な編集者 —中でも''新人編集者''に注目し — 善良な意図で貢献しようとしたのに技術や経験値が足りず損害を与えた人を探しやすくすることです。 (ERI の「利用者意図フィルタ」User Intent filters を支える機械学習プログラム ORES は「[[m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models|損害]]」試験機能を備えています。)

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ganqqrifusofusz2eieciyz1sul8quo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/51/da</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>652629</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402832</id>
      <parentid>2355908</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:29:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="82" xml:space="preserve">Hvis emnet interesserer dig, ved du måske hvad [[w:Gettext|Gettext PO]]-filer er.</text>
      <sha1>9elmsw28tf19zn3rfaolnfbvwrtvdad</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/51/de-formal</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>652631</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402838</id>
      <parentid>2355918</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:31:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="105" xml:space="preserve">Wenn Sie daran interessiert sind, wissen Sie vielleicht schon, was [[w:Gettext|Gettext-PO]]-Dateien sind.</text>
      <sha1>me59b458ip7xi05y8k0rg4rb441kwxx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/51/el</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>652632</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402844</id>
      <parentid>2355922</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:32:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="151" xml:space="preserve">Αν ενδιαφέρεστε γι'αυτό, πιθανότατα γνωρίζετε ήδη τι είναι τα αρχεία [[w:Gettext|Gettext PO]].</text>
      <sha1>l8j7a3fxtw57jr8hciqrv62wmgxrgbc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/51/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>652633</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402850</id>
      <parentid>2355926</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:33:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="86" xml:space="preserve">Si estás interesado, quizás ya sepas qué son los archivos [[w:Gettext|Gettext PO]].</text>
      <sha1>lpf4v196x1kcaa548wk2nw3uwvln49z</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/51/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>652634</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402856</id>
      <parentid>3282607</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:34:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="111" xml:space="preserve">Vous connaissez sûrement les fichiers [[:fr:Gettext|Gettext PO]] si vous avez déjà traduit d'autres projets.</text>
      <sha1>d9fsg3cyxpiffsvbzgyadh6iec8fhxg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/51/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>652635</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402862</id>
      <parentid>2355934</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:35:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="105" xml:space="preserve">Se estiver interessado, provavelmente, você já conhece o que são arquivos [[w:Gettext PO|Gettext PO]].</text>
      <sha1>5w7gy71uktoo244e31ealjazv50rp6s</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/ko</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>653134</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401802</id>
      <parentid>5184883</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/ar</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>654097</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401788</id>
      <parentid>5184868</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3630" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== كود ميدياويكي ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

=== المجلس الحالي ===
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9ecz3bvc3dm28wjfz49mjsve38xptlt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/fr</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>657817</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402810</id>
      <parentid>5326198</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:16:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7598" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
Les termes suivants se rapportent au projet d’Amélioration de la révision des contributions (ARC). 
Les termes en italiques sont des entrées du glossaire.

== Composants et termes spécifiques de l’ARC ==
;Amélioration de la révision des contributions
:'''''ARC''' (ou '''ERI''' pour ''Edit Review Improvements'')''
:L’[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements|amélioration de la révision des contributions]] est un projet de l’[[Collaboration|équipe Collaboration]] dont l’objectif est de limiter les conséquences négatives que les processus de révision des contributions ont sur les nouveaux contributeurs — tout en améliorant le processus dans le même temps.
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New filters for edit review&lt;/span&gt;
:''&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Dit aussi '''[[Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes|Filtres pour Spécial:Modifications récentes]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;''
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;One of the first product releases of the Edit Review Improvements project is a suite of improvements to the Recent Changes special page that are designed to help reviewers in general to better target their efforts and be more efficient. The improvements also have the potential to particularly benefit new contributors.&lt;/span&gt; 
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ReviewStream&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] is a machine-readable feed that’s designed to be used by a variety of edit-review tools. Like [[RCStream|RCStream]], it will broadcast recent changes from MediaWiki wikis. To the information currently in RCStream, ReviewStream adds additional data designed to improve the edit-review process.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filter search bar&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. Users click in the Filter Search Bar to begin the process of filtering recent changes, either by clicking to select filters from the ''Dropdown Filter Panel'' (see below) or by typing their names.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dropdown Filter Panel&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The filter panel  is a dropdown menu that displays a list of filtering options.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Active Filter Display Area&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The active filter display area is designed to give users a quick read of their current filter and highlighting settings.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Newcomers&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A new user class defined for ERI denoting registered editors who are very new, having fewer than ten edits and four days of activity. Created because [[Edit Review Improvements#Related documents|research shows]] that such editors are particularly vulnerable to rejections. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Learners&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more days of activity and edits than ''“Newcomers”'' but fewer than ''“Experienced Users”''. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Autoconfirmed.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Experienced Users&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more than 30 days of activity and 500 edits. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Extended Confirmed.&lt;/span&gt;

== Concepts généraux et concepts wiki relatifs à ERI  ==
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Artificial Intelligence&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI uses predictive filters powered by the artificial intelligence (AI) program [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES]. Colloquially, the term [[:en:Artificial_intelligence|artificial intelligence]] is applied when a machine mimics cognitive functions that humans associate with other human minds, such as natural language processing, problem solving or learning. AI is a broad term that’s closely associated with the more specific concept of ''“machine learning”''.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Machine Learning&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[:en:Machine_learning|Machine learning]] is a subfield of ''artificial intelligence'' that seeks to give computers the ability to learn tasks they haven’t been specifically programmed to do. ERI uses predictive filters powered by the machine-learning program [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES].&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Accuracy&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI tools offer AI predictive filters at various levels of “accuracy”. Used in this context, accuracy refers to the percentage of search results the filter returns that correctly identify the property the filter is targeting. In other words, the more accurate the filter is, the fewer false positives it produces. (In the AI field, the correct technical term for this is “[[:en:Precision_and_recall|precision]]”.)&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Feed&lt;/span&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also referred to as a '''Stream'''&lt;/span&gt;''
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A computer feed is a data format used for providing users with frequently updated content. In ERI, [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] is a feed that broadcasts data about recent changes to anti-vandalism and edit-review programs.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Good faith&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI projects offer User Intent filters, which predict whether an edit was made in good faith. In this sense, the term refers to whether a user’s intention was to contribute to the wiki or damage it. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but who may lack the skill or knowledge to do so successfully. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team|good-faith test]].)&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Damage&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI projects offer Contribution Quality filters, which predict whether an edit improves the wiki or damages it. In this sense, “damage” is a general term that covers both vandalism and unintentional errors of formatting, style, fact, etc. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but whose lack of skill or knowledge leads them to cause damage. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a “[[m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models|damaging]]” test.)&lt;/span&gt;

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>kvpvb17f22m7ixkzacj2uip0ccpwbcw</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402821</id>
      <parentid>5402810</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:19:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7577" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
Les termes suivants se rapportent au projet d’Amélioration de la révision des contributions (ARC). 
Les termes en italiques sont des entrées du glossaire.

== Composants et termes spécifiques de l’ARC ==
;Amélioration de la révision des contributions
:'''''ARC''' (ou '''ERI''' pour ''Edit Review Improvements'')''
:L’[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements|amélioration de la révision des contributions]] est un projet de l’[[Collaboration|équipe Collaboration]] dont l’objectif est de limiter les conséquences négatives que les processus de révision des contributions ont sur les nouveaux contributeurs — tout en améliorant le processus dans le même temps.
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New filters for edit review&lt;/span&gt;
:''Dit aussi '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes|Filtres pour Spécial:Modifications récentes]]'''.''
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;One of the first product releases of the Edit Review Improvements project is a suite of improvements to the Recent Changes special page that are designed to help reviewers in general to better target their efforts and be more efficient. The improvements also have the potential to particularly benefit new contributors.&lt;/span&gt; 
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ReviewStream&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] is a machine-readable feed that’s designed to be used by a variety of edit-review tools. Like [[RCStream|RCStream]], it will broadcast recent changes from MediaWiki wikis. To the information currently in RCStream, ReviewStream adds additional data designed to improve the edit-review process.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filter search bar&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. Users click in the Filter Search Bar to begin the process of filtering recent changes, either by clicking to select filters from the ''Dropdown Filter Panel'' (see below) or by typing their names.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dropdown Filter Panel&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The filter panel  is a dropdown menu that displays a list of filtering options.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Active Filter Display Area&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The active filter display area is designed to give users a quick read of their current filter and highlighting settings.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Newcomers&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A new user class defined for ERI denoting registered editors who are very new, having fewer than ten edits and four days of activity. Created because [[Edit Review Improvements#Related documents|research shows]] that such editors are particularly vulnerable to rejections. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Learners&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more days of activity and edits than ''“Newcomers”'' but fewer than ''“Experienced Users”''. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Autoconfirmed.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Experienced Users&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more than 30 days of activity and 500 edits. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Extended Confirmed.&lt;/span&gt;

== Concepts généraux et concepts wiki relatifs à ERI  ==
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Artificial Intelligence&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI uses predictive filters powered by the artificial intelligence (AI) program [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES]. Colloquially, the term [[:en:Artificial_intelligence|artificial intelligence]] is applied when a machine mimics cognitive functions that humans associate with other human minds, such as natural language processing, problem solving or learning. AI is a broad term that’s closely associated with the more specific concept of ''“machine learning”''.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Machine Learning&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[:en:Machine_learning|Machine learning]] is a subfield of ''artificial intelligence'' that seeks to give computers the ability to learn tasks they haven’t been specifically programmed to do. ERI uses predictive filters powered by the machine-learning program [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES].&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Accuracy&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI tools offer AI predictive filters at various levels of “accuracy”. Used in this context, accuracy refers to the percentage of search results the filter returns that correctly identify the property the filter is targeting. In other words, the more accurate the filter is, the fewer false positives it produces. (In the AI field, the correct technical term for this is “[[:en:Precision_and_recall|precision]]”.)&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Feed&lt;/span&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also referred to as a '''Stream'''&lt;/span&gt;''
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A computer feed is a data format used for providing users with frequently updated content. In ERI, [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] is a feed that broadcasts data about recent changes to anti-vandalism and edit-review programs.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Good faith&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI projects offer User Intent filters, which predict whether an edit was made in good faith. In this sense, the term refers to whether a user’s intention was to contribute to the wiki or damage it. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but who may lack the skill or knowledge to do so successfully. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team|good-faith test]].)&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Damage&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI projects offer Contribution Quality filters, which predict whether an edit improves the wiki or damages it. In this sense, “damage” is a general term that covers both vandalism and unintentional errors of formatting, style, fact, etc. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but whose lack of skill or knowledge leads them to cause damage. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a “[[m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models|damaging]]” test.)&lt;/span&gt;

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>98untfv6lpgw1jbi0w3p6bab5q27xl3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/8/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>657825</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402820</id>
      <parentid>4495152</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:19:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="69" xml:space="preserve">Dit aussi '''[[$1|Filtres pour Spécial:Modifications récentes]]'''.</text>
      <sha1>7y2cwkgmjyq7ynncv1s3n886bjx238j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/pt-br</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>660231</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402813</id>
      <parentid>4494956</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:16:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6382" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
Os seguintes termos são relevantes para o projeto Melhorias à Revisão de Edições (MRE). 
Termos em itálico são entradas do glossário.

== Componentes e termos especiais das MRE ==
;Melhorias à Revisão de Edições
:''Também conhecido como '''MRE'''''
:[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements|Melhorias à Revisão de Edições]] (MRE) é um projeto da [[Collaboration|equipe de Colaboração]] que visa reduzir os efeitos negativos que os processos atuais de revisão de edições podem ter em novos editores – enquanto melhora os processos de revisão de maneira geral.
;Novos filtros para revisão de edições
:''&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Também conhecido como '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes|Filtros para as Especial:Mudanças Recentes]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;''
:Um dos primeiros lançamentos das MRE, um conjunto de melhorias à página especial de Mudanças recentes destinado a ajudar revisores a centralizar seus esforços e serem mais eficientes. As melhorias também têm o potencial de particularmente beneficiar novos colaboradores. 
;ReviewStream
:O [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] é um ''feed'' para máquinas designado para ser usado por uma variedade de ferramentas de revisão. Assim como o [[RCStream|RCStream]], ele transmitirá mudanças recentes das wikis da Wikimedia. Com relação às informações já existentes no RCStream, o ReviewStream inclui dados adicionais designados para melhorar o processo de revisão de edições.
;Barra de pesquisa de filtros
:Parte das ''Melhorias à Página de Mudanças Recentes''. Usuários clicam na Barra de Pesquisa de Filtros para começarem o processo de filtrar as mudanças recentes, tanto ao clicar para selecionar filtros do ''Painel de Filtros em Cascata'' (ver abaixo) quanto ao inserir seus nomes.
;Painel de filtros em cascata
:Parte das ''Melhorias à Página de Mudanças Recentes''. O painel de filtros é um menu em cascata que exibe uma lista de opções de filtragem.
;Área de exibição de filtros ativos
:Parte das ''Melhorias à Página de Mudanças Recentes''. A área de exibição de filtros ativos permite que os usuários façam uma leitura rápida de seus filtros ativos e de suas configurações de destacamento.
;Novatos
:Classe de usuários novos definida para designar editores bem novos, com menos de dez edições e menos de quatro dias de atividade. Criada após [[Edit Review Improvements#Related documents|uma pesquisa mostrar]] que tais editores são particularmente vulneráveis a rejeições. Também é nome de um filtro nos projetos das MRE.
;Aprendizes
:Termo definido para designar editores registrados ativos por mais dias que os ''“Novatos”'', mas menos do que ''“Usuários experientes”''. Também é nome de um filtro nos projetos das MRE. Em algumas Wikipédias, esta categoria corresponde a Autoconfirmados.
;Usuários experientes
:Termo definido para designar editores registrados ativos há mais de 30 dias, e a partir de 500 edições. Também é nome de um filtro nos projetos das MRE. Em algumas Wikipédia, esta categoria corresponde a ''Extended Confirmed''.

== Generalidades e conceitos relevantes às MRE ==
;Inteligência artificial
:As MRE usam filtros de previsão, gerenciados pelo programa de inteligência artificial (AI, do inglês '''''A'''rtificial '''I'''ntelligence'') [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES]. Coloquialmente, o termo [[:pt:Inteligência artificial|inteligência artificial]] é usado quando uma máquina simula funções cognitivas, associadas a mentes humanas, como processamento de frases naturais, resolução de problemas ou aprendizagem. AI é um termo amplo, fortemente associado ao conceito de ''“aprendizagem de máquina”''.
;Aprendizagem de máquina
:[[:pt:Aprendizado de máquina|Aprendizado de máquina]] é um subcampo da “inteligência artificial” que visa conceder a computadores a capacidade de aprender tarefas as quais eles não foram programados. As MRE usam filtros de previsão gerenciados pelo programa de inteligência artificial [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES].
;Precisão
:As ferramentas das MRE oferecem filtros de previsão em vários níveis de “precisão”. Usada nesse contexto, precisão refere-se à porcentagem de resultados corretos retornados pelo filtro. Em outras palavras, quanto mais preciso um filtro é, menos falsos positivos são produzidos. (No campo da inteligência artificial, o termo técnico correto para isso é “[[:pt:Precisão e revocação|precisão]]”.)
;''Feed''
:''Também referido como '''Fluxo'''''
:Um ''feed'' de computador é o formato de dados utilizados para fornecer conteúdo frequentemente atualizado. Nas MRE, o [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] é um ''feed'' que transmite dados sobre as mudanças recentes para programas de anti-vandalismo e de revisão de edições.
;Boa-fé
:Os projetos das MRE oferecem os filtros de intenção do usuário, que preveem se uma edição foi feita em boa-fé. Nesse sentido, o termo refere-se a intuição do usuário de contribuir à wiki ou prejudicá-la. Um objetivo principal das MRE é permitir que revisores encontrem e ajudem editores – especialmente os novatos – que estão tentando contribuir em boa-fé mas não possuem as habilidades ou o conhecimento para realizá-las da maneira certa. (Os filtros de intenção das MRE usam do programa de aprendizado de máquina ORES, que inclui um [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team|teste de boa-fé]].)
;Prejudicial
:Os projetos das MRE oferecem os filtros de qualidade da contribuição, que preveem se uma edição melhora a wiki ou a prejudica. Nesse sentido, “prejudicial” é um termo geral que cobre tanto vandalismo como erros não intencionais de formatação, estilo, veracidade, etc. Um objetivo principal das MRE é permitir que revisores encontrem e ajudem editores – especialmente os novatos – que estão tentando contribuir em boa-fé mas por não possuírem as habilidades ou o conhecimento para realizá-las levam ao prejuízo. (Os filtros de intenção das MRE usam do programa de aprendizado de máquina ORES, que inclui um [[m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models|teste de danos]].)

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>86z6e3yc375t1pe3qiuyneav7stjbx6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402817</id>
      <parentid>5402813</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:18:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6342" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
Os seguintes termos são relevantes para o projeto Melhorias à Revisão de Edições (MRE). 
Termos em itálico são entradas do glossário.

== Componentes e termos especiais das MRE ==
;Melhorias à Revisão de Edições
:''Também conhecido como '''MRE'''''
:[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements|Melhorias à Revisão de Edições]] (MRE) é um projeto da [[Collaboration|equipe de Colaboração]] que visa reduzir os efeitos negativos que os processos atuais de revisão de edições podem ter em novos editores – enquanto melhora os processos de revisão de maneira geral.
;Novos filtros para revisão de edições
:''Também conhecido como '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes|Filtros para as Especial:Mudanças Recentes]]'''.''
:Um dos primeiros lançamentos das MRE, um conjunto de melhorias à página especial de Mudanças recentes destinado a ajudar revisores a centralizar seus esforços e serem mais eficientes. As melhorias também têm o potencial de particularmente beneficiar novos colaboradores. 
;ReviewStream
:O [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] é um ''feed'' para máquinas designado para ser usado por uma variedade de ferramentas de revisão. Assim como o [[RCStream|RCStream]], ele transmitirá mudanças recentes das wikis da Wikimedia. Com relação às informações já existentes no RCStream, o ReviewStream inclui dados adicionais designados para melhorar o processo de revisão de edições.
;Barra de pesquisa de filtros
:Parte das ''Melhorias à Página de Mudanças Recentes''. Usuários clicam na Barra de Pesquisa de Filtros para começarem o processo de filtrar as mudanças recentes, tanto ao clicar para selecionar filtros do ''Painel de Filtros em Cascata'' (ver abaixo) quanto ao inserir seus nomes.
;Painel de filtros em cascata
:Parte das ''Melhorias à Página de Mudanças Recentes''. O painel de filtros é um menu em cascata que exibe uma lista de opções de filtragem.
;Área de exibição de filtros ativos
:Parte das ''Melhorias à Página de Mudanças Recentes''. A área de exibição de filtros ativos permite que os usuários façam uma leitura rápida de seus filtros ativos e de suas configurações de destacamento.
;Novatos
:Classe de usuários novos definida para designar editores bem novos, com menos de dez edições e menos de quatro dias de atividade. Criada após [[Edit Review Improvements#Related documents|uma pesquisa mostrar]] que tais editores são particularmente vulneráveis a rejeições. Também é nome de um filtro nos projetos das MRE.
;Aprendizes
:Termo definido para designar editores registrados ativos por mais dias que os ''“Novatos”'', mas menos do que ''“Usuários experientes”''. Também é nome de um filtro nos projetos das MRE. Em algumas Wikipédias, esta categoria corresponde a Autoconfirmados.
;Usuários experientes
:Termo definido para designar editores registrados ativos há mais de 30 dias, e a partir de 500 edições. Também é nome de um filtro nos projetos das MRE. Em algumas Wikipédia, esta categoria corresponde a ''Extended Confirmed''.

== Generalidades e conceitos relevantes às MRE ==
;Inteligência artificial
:As MRE usam filtros de previsão, gerenciados pelo programa de inteligência artificial (AI, do inglês '''''A'''rtificial '''I'''ntelligence'') [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES]. Coloquialmente, o termo [[:pt:Inteligência artificial|inteligência artificial]] é usado quando uma máquina simula funções cognitivas, associadas a mentes humanas, como processamento de frases naturais, resolução de problemas ou aprendizagem. AI é um termo amplo, fortemente associado ao conceito de ''“aprendizagem de máquina”''.
;Aprendizagem de máquina
:[[:pt:Aprendizado de máquina|Aprendizado de máquina]] é um subcampo da “inteligência artificial” que visa conceder a computadores a capacidade de aprender tarefas as quais eles não foram programados. As MRE usam filtros de previsão gerenciados pelo programa de inteligência artificial [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES].
;Precisão
:As ferramentas das MRE oferecem filtros de previsão em vários níveis de “precisão”. Usada nesse contexto, precisão refere-se à porcentagem de resultados corretos retornados pelo filtro. Em outras palavras, quanto mais preciso um filtro é, menos falsos positivos são produzidos. (No campo da inteligência artificial, o termo técnico correto para isso é “[[:pt:Precisão e revocação|precisão]]”.)
;''Feed''
:''Também referido como '''Fluxo'''''
:Um ''feed'' de computador é o formato de dados utilizados para fornecer conteúdo frequentemente atualizado. Nas MRE, o [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] é um ''feed'' que transmite dados sobre as mudanças recentes para programas de anti-vandalismo e de revisão de edições.
;Boa-fé
:Os projetos das MRE oferecem os filtros de intenção do usuário, que preveem se uma edição foi feita em boa-fé. Nesse sentido, o termo refere-se a intuição do usuário de contribuir à wiki ou prejudicá-la. Um objetivo principal das MRE é permitir que revisores encontrem e ajudem editores – especialmente os novatos – que estão tentando contribuir em boa-fé mas não possuem as habilidades ou o conhecimento para realizá-las da maneira certa. (Os filtros de intenção das MRE usam do programa de aprendizado de máquina ORES, que inclui um [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team|teste de boa-fé]].)
;Prejudicial
:Os projetos das MRE oferecem os filtros de qualidade da contribuição, que preveem se uma edição melhora a wiki ou a prejudica. Nesse sentido, “prejudicial” é um termo geral que cobre tanto vandalismo como erros não intencionais de formatação, estilo, veracidade, etc. Um objetivo principal das MRE é permitir que revisores encontrem e ajudem editores – especialmente os novatos – que estão tentando contribuir em boa-fé mas por não possuírem as habilidades ou o conhecimento para realizá-las levam ao prejuízo. (Os filtros de intenção das MRE usam do programa de aprendizado de máquina ORES, que inclui um [[m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models|teste de danos]].)

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>0kgg6ejy12pch1gbfd2h2tsmgn14e1p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/8/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>660239</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402816</id>
      <parentid>4495155</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:18:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="80" xml:space="preserve">Também conhecido como '''[[$1|Filtros para as Especial:Mudanças Recentes]]'''.</text>
      <sha1>4h0zwoyfgema5d3o80to8frhtor1zbb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Statistics and reporting/1/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>660980</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402890</id>
      <parentid>2753816</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:45:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="87" xml:space="preserve">L'[[$te|estensione Translate]] fornisce molte '''statistiche e rapporti informativi'''.</text>
      <sha1>4w2lh1kop5annm2zmxt3kbqbpgpken4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:ShoutWiki/5/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>661153</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401752</id>
      <parentid>2395641</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="193" xml:space="preserve">Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]].  See ShoutWiki's website at $1, or [$url ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.</text>
      <sha1>lzmvl9dpv9slq618ypog7u2s9hygj5s</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401773</id>
      <parentid>5401752</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="192" xml:space="preserve">Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]]. See ShoutWiki's website at $1, or [$url ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.</text>
      <sha1>49e0hfjdp3ag9pi6uq39kihcjewe842</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401873</id>
      <parentid>5401773</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="191" xml:space="preserve">Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]]. See [$url ShoutWiki's website] or [$url2 ShoutWiki's about page on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.</text>
      <sha1>1kd2mgzhzpk32oarwksfo6yo7haa66i</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:ShoutWiki/6/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>661154</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401753</id>
      <parentid>2395643</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="113" xml:space="preserve">ShoutWiki uses many [[$1|extensions]] used by [[$2|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.</text>
      <sha1>0i4ie7xhvjbnr2skrdmmuy2xphvfijr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Phabricator/FAQ/89/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>663406</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402796</id>
      <parentid>2403527</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:56:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="39" xml:space="preserve">See [[$1|Phabricator/versus Bugzilla]].</text>
      <sha1>1i3fl3tdwobvn4g4zj09tka32zs6cym</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Phabricator/FAQ/91/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>663408</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402797</id>
      <parentid>2403529</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:56:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="33" xml:space="preserve">See [[$1|Phabricator/versus RT]].</text>
      <sha1>0o1udslszckdksh5et3qsmy5hv6mmiv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Phabricator/FAQ/en</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>663420</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402799</id>
      <parentid>4914891</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:57:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10564" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{historical|1=Content on this page was written before starting the [[Phabricator/Migration|migration to Phabricator]] in November 2014.}}

== General ==
{{Project management tools review}}

=== Why migrating to Phabricator? ===

See {{ll|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org}}.

=== Which parts of the infrastructure will get migrated? ===
The main focus is on Bugzilla, Gerrit, Trello, Mingle, RT (but not necessarily limited to them).
Also see [[Special:MyLanguage/Project management tools/Review#Scope|Project management tools/Review#Scope]].
Except for Phabricator's wiki functionality which would be disabled, we would like to migrate fully to Phabricator instead of piecemeal.

===Is there a list of known deficiencies of / known issues with Phabricator?===
Testers have reported some of the regressions and missing functionalities that users will experience after the migration.
Some of them are listed on top of the following tickets:
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T30] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T23] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T22] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20].
A [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla|comparison between Phabricator and Bugzilla is available]].

&lt;onlyinclude&gt;
===Is Phabricator easy to use?===
Phabricator is explicitly not designed for newbies.
«Phabricator is primarily targeted at software professionals and other professionals with adjacent responsibilities (like project management and operations).
Particularly, we assume users are proficient computer users and familiar with software development concepts.»
[https://secure.phabricator.com/book/phabcontrib/article/feature_requests/#target-audiences]

=== How can I help? ===

See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator#Get involved|Phabricator#Get involved]].&lt;/onlyinclude&gt;

=== What is the current amount of work maintaining Bugzilla/Gerrit/Mingle/Trello sync tools? ===
[[wikitech:Bingle|Bingle and Bugello]] synchronize some aspects of tickets between Bugzilla and Mingle/Trello, but [https://lists.wikimedia.org/pipermail/teampractices/2013-December/000202.html functionality is limited and ticket statuses between tools can easily get out of sync] (also see [https://github.com/wikimedia/bingle/issues list of open Bingle issues]).
Arthur should be able to elaborate on the amount of maintenance work required.
Gerrit's [https://gerrit.googlesource.com/plugins/hooks-bugzilla/ hooks-bugzilla] plugin does not require maintenance but has limitations ([https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=52167 1], [https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=53084 2]) which are not easy to solve.

=== How would the migration happen? ===
Bugzilla/RT/Gerrit tickets, projects, user accounts, patchsets, access settings, etc. would have to be moved into Phabricator.
([https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179 related upstream ticket])
The switching costs are not clear yet; Your help is welcome to evaluate them.
A clear cut for at least one tool (Bugzilla) seems preferable in order to not continue running all to-be-replaced systems plus yet another one (Phabricator).

=== When would the migration happen? ===

See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/Migration Timeline|Phabricator/Migration Timeline]].

=== What would that mean for me? ===
At some point current infrastructure tools (see above) would be replaced by Phabricator.
Phabricator has a different user interface and some changes in workflow, compared to the current setup.
In the long run, things will get less complicated because everything is in one tool; there will be more transparency and efficiency because discussions are more centralized and in one tool instead of several tools.

As different development teams use different tools with different needs (reporters, developers, product managers, scrum masters, ...), you want to play with the [http://fab.wmflabs.org/ Labs instance of Phabricator] to see if it fits your needs.
See section &quot;How can I help?&quot;.

=== Will external links/URLs break? ===
We will try to minimize broken links by redirecting [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T40 Bugzilla] (please see [[Phabricator/versus_Bugzilla#Bugzilla_URLs_and_their_redirects|Bugzilla URLs and their redirects]]) and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T41 RT] tickets to Phabricator.
It is still to be evaluated whether we can also easily redirect Gerrit changesets.
Obviously, documentation about [[Bug management|Bug management/Bugzilla]] (see [[phab:T206|T206]]), [[Gerrit|Gerrit]] or [[wikitech:RT|RT]] will need updating.

=== How flexible is Phabricator when restricting access to certain tickets, or tickets in certain products (e.g. &quot;Security&quot;)? ===
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T50 related task]

=== Does Phabricator provide statistics, metrics, charts? ===
By default, Phabricator offers [[phab:maniphest/report/|Reports by User and by Project]] and [[phab:maniphest/report/burn/|Burnup Rate]] (logging in might be required).
Burndown charts for projects are available via the custom Sprint extension (see [[phab:T153|T153]] and [[phab:T1322|T1322]]), to be superseded by [[phab:project/profile/1266/|Phragile]] in the future.
[[phab:fact/|Charts]] are currently not enabled.

See also the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T28 related task] about metrics in general.

=== Does any other FLOSS project use Phabricator? ===

FLOSS projects using Phabricator include [https://reviews.llvm.org/ LLVM], [https://developer.blender.org/ Blender], and [https://secure.phabricator.com/ Phabricator itself].

There is also a [[w:Phabricator#Users|list of projects on English Wikipedia]] but most are proprietary and/or small.
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T192 Facebook's install is very large]

=== Did anyone else migrate to Phabricator as we would? ===
No, this is a way that nobody has walked before.
Focusing on like-minded projects: maybe Blender did, in late 2013 (but from SVN, Trac and Trello); however no detailed report available yet[https://code.blender.org/2013/11/new-development-infrastructure/] and it's at least [https://www.openhub.net/p/blender one order of magnitude smaller] than MediaWiki.
They're now sharing some code.[https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179#81309]

=== Why can't I login using my GitHub or Google account? ===
Although Phabricator has authentication plugins for GitHub, Google, and other identity providers, we have decided not to use them.
With two Wikimedia alternatives that cover virtually all Wikimedia contributors, more options are not really necessary.
Besides, these services depend on proprietary third party sites, and they might raise concerns about privacy and commercial interests.
For more details, see [[phab:T16|T16 - Support only WMF SUL and LDAP as authentication mechanisms]].

=== How can I merge my account from Wikipedia or other Wikimedia wikis with my Phabricator account? ===

Use Phabricator's [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/settings/panel/external/ Linked Accounts and Authentication] tool for that.

=== Concerns raised ===

==== Ending up with one more tool ====
Having fewer tools is the whole point of this exercise.
The replacement of Bugzilla and Gerrit with Phabricator is an essential requirement of this project.
The teams using Trello and Mingle understand that relying in these commercial services is not a long-term solution.

==== Lack of a detailed plan ====
The current working plan is good enough to provide a realistic vision supported by the community.
The WMF needs an RfC resolution in order to allocate the resources needed to elaborate a detailed plan.[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T17]

==== Why not improving our current tools ====
Phabricator is already an integrated suite, which means the different components are intended to be used together.
It is written in PHP, and their maintainers are very proactive.

* This encourages features like explicitly attaching tasks to code changes, mocks, etc.
* Although we can write or improve integrations like Gerrit Notification Bot, Bugzilla (Perl), Gerrit (Java), or Scrumbugz (Python) will probably never be a seamlessly integrated suite.

==== Some projects should test first ====
Yes, this is also our recommendation for the migration from Gerrit to Phabricator.
About the migration from Bugzilla to Phabricator, it needs to be done at once because we cannot do a full migration of data with two moving targets.

==== Various UI issues ====
We can customize the CSS of our instance for more appropriate font sizes, colors, etc.
Upstream has already fixed some of the problems reported.

==== Requiring arc ====
Arc checks new patches for basic mistakes before uploading them for review.
This is useful for the majority of contributors and for the project.
The occasional contributor can upload a patch directly via the Phabricator Web UI.

==== Phabricator is unfamiliar for most newcomers ====
True, most users of FLOSS software have experience with Bugzilla if anything, because it's used by all the major players (Linux itself, Mozilla, RedHat, GNOME [https://www.bugzilla.org/installation-list/ etc. etc.]).
However this is not necessarily true for all MediaWiki newcomers.
Offering them one integrated platform is better than looking for a platform they already know.

== phabricator.wikimedia.org ==
[[phab:|Phabricator.wikimedia.org]] (aka [https://bugs.wikimedia.org/ bugs.wikimedia.org]) is Wikimedia's bug tracking and project management tool.

== Bugzilla ==

See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla|Phabricator/versus Bugzilla]].

== RT ==

See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus RT|Phabricator/versus RT]].

== Trello, Mingle, Scrumbugz, etc ==

=== Is Phabricator flexible enough to allow different teams to define their own workflows and ways of organizing sprints/tasks/stories/etc? ===
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T43 related task] - this welcomes answering by individuals who have already worked and maintained a Phabricator instance.

Yes, at least to some degree.
For example, different projects can define their own columns/swim lanes on workboards with &quot;Add Column&quot;.

=== Does Phabricator provide boards per project and/or iteration? ===
See e.g. the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/project/board/5/ Wikimedia Phabricator board].
Related tasks: [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21 Identify features Trello users would miss] and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20 Identify features Mingle users would miss]

[[Category:Phabricator{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>c5c59fgls5865yb2p6g5d2e47dgczub</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Phabricator/FAQ/ja</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>663422</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402801</id>
      <parentid>5200810</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:57:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16189" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{historical|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Content on this page was written before starting the [[Phabricator/Migration|migration to Phabricator]] in November 2014.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== 全般 ==
{{Project management tools review}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Why migrating to Phabricator? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

{{ll|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org}} を参照してください。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Which parts of the infrastructure will get migrated? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main focus is on Bugzilla, Gerrit, Trello, Mingle, RT (but not necessarily limited to them).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also see [[Special:MyLanguage/Project management tools/Review#Scope|Project management tools/Review#Scope]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Except for Phabricator's wiki functionality which would be disabled, we would like to migrate fully to Phabricator instead of piecemeal.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Is there a list of known deficiencies of / known issues with Phabricator?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Testers have reported some of the regressions and missing functionalities that users will experience after the migration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some of them are listed on top of the following tickets:&lt;/span&gt;
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T30] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T23] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T22] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla|comparison between Phabricator and Bugzilla is available]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;onlyinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Is Phabricator easy to use?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator is explicitly not designed for newbies.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;«Phabricator is primarily targeted at software professionals and other professionals with adjacent responsibilities (like project management and operations).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Particularly, we assume users are proficient computer users and familiar with software development concepts.»&lt;/span&gt;
[https://secure.phabricator.com/book/phabcontrib/article/feature_requests/#target-audiences]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How can I help? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator#Get involved|Phabricator#Get involved]].
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/onlyinclude&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== What is the current amount of work maintaining Bugzilla/Gerrit/Mingle/Trello sync tools? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[wikitech:Bingle|Bingle and Bugello]] synchronize some aspects of tickets between Bugzilla and Mingle/Trello, but [https://lists.wikimedia.org/pipermail/teampractices/2013-December/000202.html functionality is limited and ticket statuses between tools can easily get out of sync] (also see [https://github.com/wikimedia/bingle/issues list of open Bingle issues]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Arthur should be able to elaborate on the amount of maintenance work required.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gerrit's [https://gerrit.googlesource.com/plugins/hooks-bugzilla/ hooks-bugzilla] plugin does not require maintenance but has limitations ([https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=52167 1], [https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=53084 2]) which are not easy to solve.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How would the migration happen? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bugzilla/RT/Gerrit tickets, projects, user accounts, patchsets, access settings, etc. would have to be moved into Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
([https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related upstream ticket&lt;/span&gt;])
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The switching costs are not clear yet; Your help is welcome to evaluate them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A clear cut for at least one tool (Bugzilla) seems preferable in order to not continue running all to-be-replaced systems plus yet another one (Phabricator).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== When would the migration happen? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/Migration Timeline|Phabricator/Migration Timeline]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== What would that mean for me? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;At some point current infrastructure tools (see above) would be replaced by Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator has a different user interface and some changes in workflow, compared to the current setup.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the long run, things will get less complicated because everything is in one tool; there will be more transparency and efficiency because discussions are more centralized and in one tool instead of several tools.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As different development teams use different tools with different needs (reporters, developers, product managers, scrum masters, ...), you want to play with the [http://fab.wmflabs.org/ Labs instance of Phabricator] to see if it fits your needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See section &quot;How can I help?&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Will external links/URLs break? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We will try to minimize broken links by redirecting [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T40 Bugzilla] (please see [[Phabricator/versus_Bugzilla#Bugzilla_URLs_and_their_redirects|Bugzilla URLs and their redirects]]) and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T41 RT] tickets to Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is still to be evaluated whether we can also easily redirect Gerrit changesets.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Obviously, documentation about [[Bug management|Bug management/Bugzilla]] (see [[phab:T206|T206]]), [[Gerrit|Gerrit]] or [[wikitech:RT|RT]] will need updating.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How flexible is Phabricator when restricting access to certain tickets, or tickets in certain products (e.g. &quot;Security&quot;)? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T50 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related task&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does Phabricator provide statistics, metrics, charts? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, Phabricator offers [[phab:maniphest/report/|Reports by User and by Project]] and [[phab:maniphest/report/burn/|Burnup Rate]] (logging in might be required).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Burndown charts for projects are available via the custom Sprint extension (see [[phab:T153|T153]] and [[phab:T1322|T1322]]), to be superseded by [[phab:project/profile/1266/|Phragile]] in the future.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[phab:fact/|Charts]] are currently not enabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T28 related task] about metrics in general.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does any other FLOSS project use Phabricator? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
FLOSS projects using Phabricator include [https://reviews.llvm.org/ LLVM], [https://developer.blender.org/ Blender], and [https://secure.phabricator.com/ Phabricator itself].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a [[w:Phabricator#Users|list of projects on English Wikipedia]] but most are proprietary and/or small.&lt;/span&gt;
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T192 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Facebook's install is very large&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Did anyone else migrate to Phabricator as we would? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No, this is a way that nobody has walked before.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Focusing on like-minded projects: maybe Blender did, in late 2013 (but from SVN, Trac and Trello); however no detailed report available yet[https://code.blender.org/2013/11/new-development-infrastructure/] and it's at least [https://www.openhub.net/p/blender one order of magnitude smaller] than MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They're now sharing some code.[https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179#81309]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Why can't I login using my GitHub or Google account? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although Phabricator has authentication plugins for GitHub, Google, and other identity providers, we have decided not to use them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With two Wikimedia alternatives that cover virtually all Wikimedia contributors, more options are not really necessary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Besides, these services depend on proprietary third party sites, and they might raise concerns about privacy and commercial interests.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more details, see [[phab:T16|T16 - Support only WMF SUL and LDAP as authentication mechanisms]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How can I merge my account from Wikipedia or other Wikimedia wikis with my Phabricator account? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Use Phabricator's [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/settings/panel/external/ Linked Accounts and Authentication] tool for that.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Concerns raised ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Ending up with one more tool ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having fewer tools is the whole point of this exercise.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The replacement of Bugzilla and Gerrit with Phabricator is an essential requirement of this project.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The teams using Trello and Mingle understand that relying in these commercial services is not a long-term solution.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Lack of a detailed plan ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The current working plan is good enough to provide a realistic vision supported by the community.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The WMF needs an RfC resolution in order to allocate the resources needed to elaborate a detailed plan.[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T17]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Why not improving our current tools ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator is already an integrated suite, which means the different components are intended to be used together.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is written in PHP, and their maintainers are very proactive.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* This encourages features like explicitly attaching tasks to code changes, mocks, etc.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Although we can write or improve integrations like Gerrit Notification Bot, Bugzilla (Perl), Gerrit (Java), or Scrumbugz (Python) will probably never be a seamlessly integrated suite.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Some projects should test first ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, this is also our recommendation for the migration from Gerrit to Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;About the migration from Bugzilla to Phabricator, it needs to be done at once because we cannot do a full migration of data with two moving targets.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Various UI issues ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We can customize the CSS of our instance for more appropriate font sizes, colors, etc.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Upstream has already fixed some of the problems reported.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Requiring arc ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Arc checks new patches for basic mistakes before uploading them for review.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is useful for the majority of contributors and for the project.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The occasional contributor can upload a patch directly via the Phabricator Web UI.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Phabricator is unfamiliar for most newcomers ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;True, most users of FLOSS software have experience with Bugzilla if anything, because it's used by all the major players (Linux itself, Mozilla, RedHat, GNOME [https://www.bugzilla.org/installation-list/ etc. etc.]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However this is not necessarily true for all MediaWiki newcomers.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Offering them one integrated platform is better than looking for a platform they already know.&lt;/span&gt;

== phabricator.wikimedia.org ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[phab:|Phabricator.wikimedia.org]] (aka [https://bugs.wikimedia.org/ bugs.wikimedia.org]) is Wikimedia's bug tracking and project management tool.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Bugzilla ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla|Phabricator/versus Bugzilla]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== RT ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus RT|Phabricator/versus RT]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Trello, Mingle, Scrumbugz, etc ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Is Phabricator flexible enough to allow different teams to define their own workflows and ways of organizing sprints/tasks/stories/etc? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T43 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related task&lt;/span&gt;] - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;this welcomes answering by individuals who have already worked and maintained a Phabricator instance.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, at least to some degree.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, different projects can define their own columns/swim lanes on workboards with &quot;Add Column&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does Phabricator provide boards per project and/or iteration? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See e.g. the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/project/board/5/ Wikimedia Phabricator board].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Related tasks: [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21 Identify features Trello users would miss] and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20 Identify features Mingle users would miss]&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Phabricator{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5hk63otuw8ssmy1fetu3onuazkc7abf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>664477</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402755</id>
      <parentid>2406682</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:35:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="79" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|ajuda para predefinições de citação]] ou [[$2|ajuda para o botão $3]]</text>
      <sha1>0pw4n2ys0ybosgiavqmczssar1wu0hb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/it</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>664982</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402200</id>
      <parentid>5371507</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20670" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''Si veda [[Wikitech:PAWS]] per i dettagli''
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Questo documento contiene una veloce panoramica dell'uso di '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' in un ''quaderno'' che esegue un'istanza di [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''Pywikibot: A Web Shell''')]] presso i Wikimedia labs.&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=Si tenga presente che il copia/incolla del Terminale PAWS è attualmente supportato solo dai browser basati sul motore di rendering di [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Other browsers based on Chromium|Chromium]] &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;(come Google Chrome, Opera o Safari).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se usi un altro browser, potresti dover riscrivere i comandi di questo manuale&lt;/span&gt; Il Terminale PAWS permette anche di salvare ed eseguire file bash, eseguibili con il comando &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;}}

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All notebooks and terminals in PAWS are subject to termination without notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You are encouraged to run your task on other places (such as [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) if your task lasts for more than hours.&lt;/span&gt;}}

==Crea un profilo Wikimedia==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Per utilizzare il Terminale PAWS non serve nient'altro che un profilo su un progetto Wikimedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

Una volta creato il profilo si controlli di aver effettuato l'accesso verificando che il proprio username compaia in alto a destra alla pagina https://test.wikipedia.org

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

==Accedere a un quaderno==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Per avviare un quaderno, andare all'indirizzo https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub
&lt;/div&gt;

Cliccare su ''accedere con MediaWiki'' (Sign in with MediaWiki) e ''permetti'' (Allow) a ''Utilizzare OAuth per l'autenticazione'' (&quot;Use OAuth for Authentication&quot;).
La prima volta che accedi a un Terminale PAWS, devi creare un ''server''.
Clicca su ''Avvia il mio server'' (Start my Server&quot;).
Il server potrebbe impiegare qualche minuto ad avviarsi.

Una volta completato, si sarà rediretti all'URL ''https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/tree''

==Avvia un Terminale==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Per avviare un nuovo terminale,
# vai nella [$paws PAWS home] di PAWS,
# clicca ''Nuovo'' sul lato destro e
# seleziona 'Terminale'.
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Aprirà una nuova finestra con URL &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/terminals/1&lt;/nowiki&gt;, contenente un prompt '$' GNU/Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;

Il Terminale PAWS non è un emulatore, ma una vera [[w:Bash (Unix shell)|shell bash]] eseguita su una vera installazione di GNU/Linux in un [[w:Docker (software)|container docker]], quindi puoi eseguire qualsiasi comando bash e usare qualsiasi comando sia disponibile sul sistema.

Puoi vedere alcuni dei comandi disponibili utilizzando &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Login to the wiki ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will establish your account on the server and allow you to log in from the command line.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Il seguente comando dovrebbe confermare che la tua utenza è collegata a https://test.wikipedia.org/. Il collegamento utilizza OAuth, quindi non dovrebbe necessario inserire una password.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can connect pywikibot to a different wiki by creating a file named ''user-config.py'' in your [[w:Home_directory|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; directory]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) and adding ''mylang'' and ''family'' variables:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==Creare una pagina==

Puoi creare una pagina, inserendo il seguente comando nel Terminale, sostituendo a '&lt;username&gt;' il tuo username e premendo 'Y' quando richiesto per confermare le modifiche.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Hai completato la tua prima modifica. Puoi visionare le modifiche apportate alla pagina &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;.

Puoi sapere di più sugli script utilizzati eseguendoli con l'opzione '-help'.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Fetch a page ==
&lt;/div&gt;

Si possono scaricare più pagine contemporaneamente con il comando &quot;listpages&quot;.

Per scaricare il contenuto della pagina che hai creato nella precedente sezione, inserisci il seguente comando:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ora la pagina dovrebbe essere presente nella [$pawshome lista dei file di PAWS]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== A real script example ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When a website used on Wikipedia changes its URL, the links on Wikipedia become outdated, and possible also [[w:WP:Dead links|dead links]] if the website doesn't redirect from the old URLs to the new URLs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) has changed their links, such as moving pages from &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can find the list of usages of the old URL on English Wikipedia at [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updating all those links manually will be very time consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thankfully EB has maintained redirects from their old URLs to the new URLs, so this does not need to be fixed immediately.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For a simpler example, English Wikipedia currently contains links to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; instead of &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; i.e. a 'www.' subdomain is missing in the URL.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are currently 14 cases on English Wikipedia: [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Wikipedia in other language also have this problem.  e.g. there is one case on German Wikipedia: [[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In order to fix those links, we can use Pywikibot {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}} script.  In this demo we will use the '-simulate' argument to avoid writing to the wiki, as there are strict rules about [[w:WP:Bots|automated editing]] of English Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
First, let's list all of the pages which link to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now we check those pages actually have the literal URL in the page; i.e. they are not using a template.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now use replace to add the missing &quot;www.&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In PAWS, and any terminal that supports color, the diff of changes will show the added &quot;www.&quot; in green text color, making it easier to find the proposed changes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Inside Pywikibot ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don't write passwords in files of server, the files are public!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Next we will use the PAWS Python session.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to your [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home PAWS home],
# click 'New' on the right hand side, and
# select 'Python 3'.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will open a new window.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the text box, enter the following and in the Cell menu select 'Run' (or pressing shift+enter to run).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A new text box will appear below.  Run the following to create an APISite object connected to https://test.wikipedia.org/:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Describe &quot;site&quot; by entering it into the new text box and selecting &quot;Run&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It should show
&lt;/div&gt;

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Create a page object:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check it exists by running:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It should output
&lt;/div&gt;

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Show the text on the page:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Change the page text in the object:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Save the page to the wiki:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The response should be:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The interactive Python 3 notebook allows many lines to be run together.  The above could be put into one text box and Run
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The log of your interactive Python session can be saved or downloaded for future reference.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Accessing online documentation in PAWS ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Pywikibot documentation may be found at https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/.  It is primarily sourced from [[w:docstring|docstrings]], which can be loaded in the interactive Python 3 notebook using the Python built-in function [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to look at the arguments for the save method above, run either:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Editing Pywikibot scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Pywikibot library and scripts are located in /srv/paws, and are read-only.  The installed Pywikibot library cannot be modified in PAWS.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Scripts may be modified after copying them into your PAWS home.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to run a modified &quot;checkimages.py&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the browser, you can edit the file.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit the code -- for instance, just after the &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; code on line 1775, add a new line 1776 that will print out your name: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the editing interface, use the File menu and click Save to save your modifications.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb PAWS cheatsheet] by one user (e.g. about API and database access)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>63ddcaq5zqigsyfaa7ykcz7x4w8yqkf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Software bundles/1/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>667522</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402751</id>
      <parentid>2416940</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:31:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="151" xml:space="preserve">Die [[$install|manuelle Installation]] von MediaWiki kann unangenehm und zeitaufwändig sein, insbesondere für Benutzer ohne technische Vorkenntnisse.</text>
      <sha1>4e6dlkje8c6l3j6xy6q0n4hzxlacv3n</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Social tools/nl</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>668630</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401984</id>
      <parentid>4429452</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1730" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Overzicht}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Informatie voor ontwikkelaars}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Schermafbeeldingen}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Geschiedenis}}
|group2 = Andere sociale uitbreidingen
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = Andere gerelateerde uitbreidingen&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(die niet afhankelijk zijn van SocialProfile)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>8elncwz2lca473nn2vosoa6focj908i</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401995</id>
      <parentid>5401984</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:10:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1731" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Overzicht}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Informatie voor ontwikkelaars}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Schermafbeeldingen}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Geschiedenis}}
|group2 = Andere sociale uitbreidingen
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = Andere gerelateerde uitbreidingen&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(die niet afhankelijk zijn van SocialProfile)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>nmfs31l863cw3ia446ox9hxx7460syv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/pl</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>669399</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402812</id>
      <parentid>4494955</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:16:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7560" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The following terms are relevant to the Edit Review Improvements project (ERI).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Terms in italics are entries of that glossary.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== ERI components and special terms ==
&lt;/div&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit Review Improvements&lt;/span&gt;
:''Znane także jako '''ERI'''''
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements|Edit Review Improvements]] (ERI) is a project of the [[Collaboration|Collaboration Team]] that is seeks to reduce the negative effects current edit-review processes can have on new editors to the wikis—while improving edit-review processes overall.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New filters for edit review&lt;/span&gt;
:''&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Znane także jako '''[[Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes|Filttry dla Specjalna:Ostatnie zmiany]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;''
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;One of the first product releases of the Edit Review Improvements project is a suite of improvements to the Recent Changes special page that are designed to help reviewers in general to better target their efforts and be more efficient. The improvements also have the potential to particularly benefit new contributors.&lt;/span&gt; 
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ReviewStream&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] is a machine-readable feed that’s designed to be used by a variety of edit-review tools. Like [[RCStream|RCStream]], it will broadcast recent changes from MediaWiki wikis. To the information currently in RCStream, ReviewStream adds additional data designed to improve the edit-review process.&lt;/span&gt;
;Pasek wyszukiwania filtrów
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. Users click in the Filter Search Bar to begin the process of filtering recent changes, either by clicking to select filters from the ''Dropdown Filter Panel'' (see below) or by typing their names.&lt;/span&gt;
;Rozwijalny panel filtrów
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The filter panel  is a dropdown menu that displays a list of filtering options.&lt;/span&gt;
;Obszar wyświetlania aktywnych filtrów
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The active filter display area is designed to give users a quick read of their current filter and highlighting settings.&lt;/span&gt;
;Nowicjusze
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A new user class defined for ERI denoting registered editors who are very new, having fewer than ten edits and four days of activity. Created because [[Edit Review Improvements#Related documents|research shows]] that such editors are particularly vulnerable to rejections. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Learners&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more days of activity and edits than ''“Newcomers”'' but fewer than ''“Experienced Users”''. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Autoconfirmed.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Experienced Users&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more than 30 days of activity and 500 edits. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Extended Confirmed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== General and wiki concepts relevant to ERI ==
&lt;/div&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Artificial Intelligence&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI uses predictive filters powered by the artificial intelligence (AI) program [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES]. Colloquially, the term [[:en:Artificial_intelligence|artificial intelligence]] is applied when a machine mimics cognitive functions that humans associate with other human minds, such as natural language processing, problem solving or learning. AI is a broad term that’s closely associated with the more specific concept of ''“machine learning”''.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Machine Learning&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[:en:Machine_learning|Machine learning]] is a subfield of ''artificial intelligence'' that seeks to give computers the ability to learn tasks they haven’t been specifically programmed to do. ERI uses predictive filters powered by the machine-learning program [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES].&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Accuracy&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI tools offer AI predictive filters at various levels of “accuracy”. Used in this context, accuracy refers to the percentage of search results the filter returns that correctly identify the property the filter is targeting. In other words, the more accurate the filter is, the fewer false positives it produces. (In the AI field, the correct technical term for this is “[[:en:Precision_and_recall|precision]]”.)&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Feed&lt;/span&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also referred to as a '''Stream'''&lt;/span&gt;''
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A computer feed is a data format used for providing users with frequently updated content. In ERI, [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] is a feed that broadcasts data about recent changes to anti-vandalism and edit-review programs.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Good faith&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI projects offer User Intent filters, which predict whether an edit was made in good faith. In this sense, the term refers to whether a user’s intention was to contribute to the wiki or damage it. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but who may lack the skill or knowledge to do so successfully. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team|good-faith test]].)&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Damage&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI projects offer Contribution Quality filters, which predict whether an edit improves the wiki or damages it. In this sense, “damage” is a general term that covers both vandalism and unintentional errors of formatting, style, fact, etc. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but whose lack of skill or knowledge leads them to cause damage. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a “[[m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models|damaging]]” test.)&lt;/span&gt;

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>93b7807uk9m4eyyc5nsp8cy2uq7xxfs</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402825</id>
      <parentid>5402812</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:20:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7539" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The following terms are relevant to the Edit Review Improvements project (ERI).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Terms in italics are entries of that glossary.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== ERI components and special terms ==
&lt;/div&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit Review Improvements&lt;/span&gt;
:''Znane także jako '''ERI'''''
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements|Edit Review Improvements]] (ERI) is a project of the [[Collaboration|Collaboration Team]] that is seeks to reduce the negative effects current edit-review processes can have on new editors to the wikis—while improving edit-review processes overall.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New filters for edit review&lt;/span&gt;
:''Znane także jako '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes|Filttry dla Specjalna:Ostatnie zmiany]]'''.''
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;One of the first product releases of the Edit Review Improvements project is a suite of improvements to the Recent Changes special page that are designed to help reviewers in general to better target their efforts and be more efficient. The improvements also have the potential to particularly benefit new contributors.&lt;/span&gt; 
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ReviewStream&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] is a machine-readable feed that’s designed to be used by a variety of edit-review tools. Like [[RCStream|RCStream]], it will broadcast recent changes from MediaWiki wikis. To the information currently in RCStream, ReviewStream adds additional data designed to improve the edit-review process.&lt;/span&gt;
;Pasek wyszukiwania filtrów
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. Users click in the Filter Search Bar to begin the process of filtering recent changes, either by clicking to select filters from the ''Dropdown Filter Panel'' (see below) or by typing their names.&lt;/span&gt;
;Rozwijalny panel filtrów
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The filter panel  is a dropdown menu that displays a list of filtering options.&lt;/span&gt;
;Obszar wyświetlania aktywnych filtrów
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The active filter display area is designed to give users a quick read of their current filter and highlighting settings.&lt;/span&gt;
;Nowicjusze
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A new user class defined for ERI denoting registered editors who are very new, having fewer than ten edits and four days of activity. Created because [[Edit Review Improvements#Related documents|research shows]] that such editors are particularly vulnerable to rejections. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Learners&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more days of activity and edits than ''“Newcomers”'' but fewer than ''“Experienced Users”''. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Autoconfirmed.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Experienced Users&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more than 30 days of activity and 500 edits. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Extended Confirmed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== General and wiki concepts relevant to ERI ==
&lt;/div&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Artificial Intelligence&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI uses predictive filters powered by the artificial intelligence (AI) program [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES]. Colloquially, the term [[:en:Artificial_intelligence|artificial intelligence]] is applied when a machine mimics cognitive functions that humans associate with other human minds, such as natural language processing, problem solving or learning. AI is a broad term that’s closely associated with the more specific concept of ''“machine learning”''.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Machine Learning&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[:en:Machine_learning|Machine learning]] is a subfield of ''artificial intelligence'' that seeks to give computers the ability to learn tasks they haven’t been specifically programmed to do. ERI uses predictive filters powered by the machine-learning program [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES].&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Accuracy&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI tools offer AI predictive filters at various levels of “accuracy”. Used in this context, accuracy refers to the percentage of search results the filter returns that correctly identify the property the filter is targeting. In other words, the more accurate the filter is, the fewer false positives it produces. (In the AI field, the correct technical term for this is “[[:en:Precision_and_recall|precision]]”.)&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Feed&lt;/span&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also referred to as a '''Stream'''&lt;/span&gt;''
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A computer feed is a data format used for providing users with frequently updated content. In ERI, [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] is a feed that broadcasts data about recent changes to anti-vandalism and edit-review programs.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Good faith&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI projects offer User Intent filters, which predict whether an edit was made in good faith. In this sense, the term refers to whether a user’s intention was to contribute to the wiki or damage it. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but who may lack the skill or knowledge to do so successfully. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team|good-faith test]].)&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Damage&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI projects offer Contribution Quality filters, which predict whether an edit improves the wiki or damages it. In this sense, “damage” is a general term that covers both vandalism and unintentional errors of formatting, style, fact, etc. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but whose lack of skill or knowledge leads them to cause damage. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a “[[m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models|damaging]]” test.)&lt;/span&gt;

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>bynwnrd7lgdhvty9s6s3k08sgi8pc23</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/8/pl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>669411</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402824</id>
      <parentid>4495154</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:20:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="69" xml:space="preserve">Znane także jako '''[[$1|Filttry dla Specjalna:Ostatnie zmiany]]'''.</text>
      <sha1>3ahbktx97kc0guyovibkrd3iyvqt7kg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/tr</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>670195</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401815</id>
      <parentid>5184897</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>670426</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402146</id>
      <parentid>4921570</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:36:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8302" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Since 2017, &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|VisualEditor}}&lt;/tvar&gt; provides &lt;tvar name=1&gt;'''{{ll|visual diffs}}'''&lt;/tvar&gt; (visual difference displays).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:63--&gt; These are available in two places in the interface: when previewing changes to the document before the user saves the page, and (as a [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features&lt;/tvar&gt;|beta feature]]) within the standard MediaWiki diff display, accessed from the history page.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:64--&gt; In both cases, the visual diff shows up alongside the [[&lt;tvar name=diff&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff&lt;/tvar&gt;|traditional two-column wikitext diff]], and the user can toggle between the two displays.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:41--&gt; Visual diffs have two main advantages over wikitext diffs.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:65--&gt; The first is that editors can directly see the changes they and others have made without needing to understand [[&lt;tvar name=wikitext&gt;Special:MyLanguage/wikitext&lt;/tvar&gt;|wikitext]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:66--&gt; This is particularly helpful when looking at changes to graphical structures such as tables; for example, if an edit deletes a column from a table, the wikitext diff for it would be hard to understand, while the visual diff would be immediately obvious.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; The second is that the technology can be used to more accurately represent the change to the reader.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:67--&gt; For example, if an edit swapped two paragraphs (with or without changes to the paragraphs), the visual diff will identify that this is what occurred, while a wikitext diff makes it appear that a paragraph was deleted and an entirely new paragraph was added.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== On regular diff pages == &lt;!--T:51--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:59--&gt; Most of the examples and screenshots below are about using visual diffs during page previews when editing.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:68--&gt; However, VisualEditor's visual diffs can also be used on regular diff pages, on any wiki that has VisualEditor installed.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:69--&gt; You can see an example of it in use on the English-language Wikipedia [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;w:Special:Diff/473592443&lt;/tvar&gt;|here]].&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:52--&gt;
For wikis that have VisualEditor, there are several ways to activate this visual diff display:

&lt;!--T:53--&gt;
* Add the following to &lt;tvar name=1&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/tvar&gt;:
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:60--&gt;
* If your wiki has a &quot;Beta features&quot; tab within Special:Preferences, and you want to make visual diffs an &quot;opt-in&quot; feature for users, you can add the following to &lt;tvar name=1&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/tvar&gt;:
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:61--&gt;
* As seen in the Wikipedia example linked above, the visual diff mode can also be activated by simply adding &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&amp;visualdiff&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; to the URL of a diff page.

== How it works == &lt;!--T:16--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; Screenshot showing some changes to an article.  Most changes are highlighted with text formatting.&lt;/translate&gt;|left|thumb|300px|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:18--&gt; When you are finished editing the page, type your edit summary and then choose &quot;&lt;tvar name=review&gt;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:19--&gt; In visual mode, you will see additions, removals, new links, and formatting highlighted.  Other changes, such as changing the size of an image, are described in notes on the side.&lt;/translate&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; Toggle button showing visual and wikitext options; visual option is selected.&lt;/translate&gt;|left|thumb|220x220px|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:21--&gt; Click the toggle button to switch between visual and wikitext diffs.&lt;/translate&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:22--&gt; Screenshot showing the same changes, in the two-column wikitext diff display.&lt;/translate&gt;|left|thumb|245x245px|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:23--&gt; The wikitext diff is the same diff tool that is used in the wikitext editors and in the page history.&lt;/translate&gt;]]

{{clr}}
&lt;translate&gt;
== Examples == &lt;!--T:24--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;&lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; Rich text edits&lt;/translate&gt;&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; Visual diff&lt;/translate&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Wikitext diff&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;&lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; Paragraph move with subtle vandalism&lt;/translate&gt;&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:29--&gt; Visual diff&lt;/translate&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt; Wikitext diff (2017).  This feature was added to the wikitext diff engine in 2018; see [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;&lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:31--&gt; Table column removed&lt;/translate&gt;&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:32--&gt; Visual diff&lt;/translate&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:33--&gt; Wikitext diff&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;&lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:34--&gt; Text, formatting and list changes&lt;/translate&gt;&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; Visual diff&lt;/translate&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:36--&gt; Wikitext diff&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;&lt;translate nowrap&gt;&lt;!--T:37--&gt; Insert new multimedia (sheet music)&lt;/translate&gt;&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:38--&gt; Visual diff&lt;/translate&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:39--&gt; Wikitext diff&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Technology used == &lt;!--T:46--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:47--&gt; &lt;tvar name=TChan&gt;Thalia Chan&lt;/tvar&gt;, Unifying editing and visual diffs, Wikimania 2017&lt;/translate&gt;]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Current limitations == &lt;!--T:48--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:54--&gt; No notices for changes to &quot;invisible&quot; {{&lt;tvar name=1&gt;ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches&lt;/tvar&gt;|page metadata}}, such as categories or TOC keywords.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:55--&gt; Has issues with complex changes to tables.&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:56--&gt; Unavailable on certain special pages:&lt;/translate&gt;
** &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:57--&gt; Undo &quot;diff&quot; pages.&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:58--&gt; Edit conflict pages&lt;/translate&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== History == &lt;!--T:62--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:43--&gt; This feature has been available as the first diff tool in the desktop VisualEditor from the 1.31.0-wmf-20 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 6 February 2018).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:70--&gt; Before that, it was a secondary tool from the 1.29.0-wmf-17 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 21 March 2017).&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== See also == &lt;!--T:49--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

&lt;translate&gt;
== Footnotes == &lt;!--T:50--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2snfa3ncax0bqkr6r8pabwf085jxnkz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/135/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>673768</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402980</id>
      <parentid>2439159</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:48:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="192" xml:space="preserve">はい、しかし利用者は幾つかのマイナーな変更を行わなければならないかもしれません。$1 のフォーマットは大部分に後方互換性があります。</text>
      <sha1>9h6hfc2mfqwpzyi6yf9ualc5ej8tc43</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Good first bugs/1/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>674053</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402748</id>
      <parentid>4748187</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:27:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="332" xml:space="preserve">このページでは、[[:ja:バグ|ソフトウェアのバグ]]や小さな不足機能の一覧を提供します。それらは、既存のウィキメディアのプロジェクト ([[$1|MediaWikiコアとその拡張機能のみではありません]]) に関与するための良い方法として認識されています。</text>
      <sha1>buwj9nynsyvbs0ppeouaetgfrd25zm0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/nb</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>674353</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402781</id>
      <parentid>2441074</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:50:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="79" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Hjelp med bruk av referansemaler]] eller [[$2|hjelp med citoids $3 knapp]]</text>
      <sha1>d2cjfvgq467nfckyd65awy1fzrbryhm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Cross-wiki Search Result Improvements/76/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>675979</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402746</id>
      <parentid>2445280</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:19:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="67" xml:space="preserve">* lançar uma [[$1|nota]] às esplanadas anunciando a implantação</text>
      <sha1>dnkc34cgxv93laiqe2z4ou2lhiv8q9w</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>MediaWiki 1.30</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>678935</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402089</id>
      <parentid>5251156</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:40:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10701" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;'''MediaWiki 1.30'''&lt;/tvar&gt; is an obsolete release of MediaWiki.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:61--&gt; Consult the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{RELEASE-NOTES}}&lt;/tvar&gt; file for the full list of changes.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:62--&gt; It was deployed on Wikimedia Foundation wikis through incremental &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;wmf&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;-branches starting on 9 May 2017.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:63--&gt; The 1.30.0 stable release was released on 12 December 2017.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:11--&gt;
Download the [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/&lt;/tvar&gt; latest releases] or checkout the &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; branch [[&lt;tvar name=3&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git&lt;/tvar&gt;|in Git]] to follow this release.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; Configuration changes&lt;/translate&gt; ===
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; The &quot;C.UTF-8&quot; locale should be used for &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;, if available, to avoid unexpected behavior when code uses locale-sensitive string comparisons. For example, the Scribunto extension considers &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; in most locales since it ignores case.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt; &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; now affects LC_ALL rather than only LC_CTYPE. See documentation of &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; for details.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; is now applied for all requests. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated and a no-op, as it is no longer needed.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; &lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names. This is intended for extensions that want control over the instantiation of their jobs, to allow for proper dependency injection.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; &lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names, using the 'factory' key in the module description array. This allows dependency injection to be used for ResourceLoader modules.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:18--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}}&lt;/tvar&gt; has been removed.&lt;/translate&gt;
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:19--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}}&lt;/tvar&gt; added (off by default).&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}}&lt;/tvar&gt; was introduced to control the size of IP ranges that can be queried at &lt;tvar name=2&gt;[[Special:Contributions]]&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:21--&gt; New features&lt;/translate&gt; ===
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:22--&gt; ([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Added the ability to search for contributions within an IP range at [[Special:Contributions]]. References to revisions made by IPs are stored in the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}}&lt;/tvar&gt; table to make querying for ranges more efficient.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:23--&gt; ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Output from &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; will now be wrapped in a &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{tag|div|open}}&lt;/tvar&gt; with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:24--&gt; Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook, enabling extensions to allow software- specific tags to be added by users.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to register additional parser options.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Included Pig Latin, a language game in English, as a [[LanguageConverter]] variant. This allows English-speaking developers to develop and test LanguageConverter more easily. Pig Latin can be enabled by setting &lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; to true.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to purge data that depends on the &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt; table.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; Added JS config values &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; to the output of diff pages.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:29--&gt; Action API changes&lt;/translate&gt; ===
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt; ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=parse output will be wrapped in a &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{tag|div|open}}&lt;/tvar&gt; with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using the new '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;' parameter.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:31--&gt; When &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; is not '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abort reasons from &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; will be formatted as specified by the error formatter parameters.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:32--&gt; &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; can now handle arbitrary text, deleted revisions, and returning users and edit comments.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:33--&gt; ([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) The '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', and '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated, as are the similarly named parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, or &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; instead.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:34--&gt; Action API internal changes&lt;/translate&gt; ===
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; &lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; messages are deprecated. The existing message should be split between &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:36--&gt; ([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Individual values of multi-valued parameters can now be marked as deprecated.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:37--&gt; Languages updated&lt;/translate&gt; ===
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:38--&gt; Support for kbp (Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè) was added.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:39--&gt; Other changes&lt;/translate&gt; ===
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:40--&gt; The use of an associative array for &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, where the IP address is in the key instead of the value, is deprecated (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Please convert these arrays to indexed/sequential ones (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:41--&gt; &lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (deprecated in 1.23) was removed.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated. There are no known callers.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:43--&gt; &lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:44--&gt; &lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:45--&gt; &lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated. The new &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:46--&gt; &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated. The new &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:47--&gt; The &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; hook (deprecated in 1.21) was removed.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:48--&gt; The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt; methods (both deprecated in 1.24) were removed.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:49--&gt; &lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; were deprecated. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:50--&gt; ([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) Preprocessor handling of LanguageConverter markup has been improved. As a result of the new uniform handling, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' may need to be escaped (for example, as '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') where it occurs inside template arguments or wikilinks.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:51--&gt; ([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Page moves are now counted as edits for the purposes of autopromotion, ''i.e.'', they increment the &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; field in the database.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:52--&gt; Two new hooks, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, were added for manipulating Special:Log and Special:NewPages lines.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:53--&gt; The &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; hooks have an additional parameter, for manipulating HTML data attributes of RC/history lines. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; can do that via the &lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt; subarray.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:54--&gt; ([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; method was removed.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:55--&gt; &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; will now throw an exception if passed ParserOptions that would pollute the parser cache. Callers should use &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; to create the &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; object and only change options that affect the parser cache key.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:56--&gt; &lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:57--&gt; &lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; no longer supports passing in a direct value, it requires a callable factory function or a class name.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:58--&gt; The &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; global, &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; are all deprecated. The main &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instance should be obtained from &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt; instead. Access to the underlying &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; is possible through the new &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt; method.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:59--&gt; &lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (deprecated in 1.27) was removed.&lt;/translate&gt;

== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:60--&gt; Subpages&lt;/translate&gt; ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>qofxl6wl9msgsv5vme0mturswksocqq</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402097</id>
      <parentid>5402089</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:43:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10701" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;'''MediaWiki 1.30'''&lt;/tvar&gt; is an obsolete release of MediaWiki.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:61--&gt; Consult the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{RELEASE-NOTES}}&lt;/tvar&gt; file for the full list of changes.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:62--&gt; It was deployed on Wikimedia Foundation wikis through incremental &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;wmf&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;-branches starting on 9 May 2017.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:63--&gt; The 1.30.0 stable release was released on 12 December 2017.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:11--&gt;
Download the [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/&lt;/tvar&gt; latest releases] or checkout the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; branch [[&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git&lt;/tvar&gt;|in Git]] to follow this release.
&lt;/translate&gt;

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; Configuration changes&lt;/translate&gt; ===
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; The &quot;C.UTF-8&quot; locale should be used for &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;, if available, to avoid unexpected behavior when code uses locale-sensitive string comparisons. For example, the Scribunto extension considers &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; in most locales since it ignores case.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt; &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; now affects LC_ALL rather than only LC_CTYPE. See documentation of &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; for details.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; is now applied for all requests. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated and a no-op, as it is no longer needed.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; &lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names. This is intended for extensions that want control over the instantiation of their jobs, to allow for proper dependency injection.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; &lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names, using the 'factory' key in the module description array. This allows dependency injection to be used for ResourceLoader modules.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:18--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}}&lt;/tvar&gt; has been removed.&lt;/translate&gt;
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:19--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}}&lt;/tvar&gt; added (off by default).&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}}&lt;/tvar&gt; was introduced to control the size of IP ranges that can be queried at &lt;tvar name=2&gt;[[Special:Contributions]]&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:21--&gt; New features&lt;/translate&gt; ===
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:22--&gt; ([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Added the ability to search for contributions within an IP range at [[Special:Contributions]]. References to revisions made by IPs are stored in the &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}}&lt;/tvar&gt; table to make querying for ranges more efficient.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:23--&gt; ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Output from &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; will now be wrapped in a &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{tag|div|open}}&lt;/tvar&gt; with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:24--&gt; Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook, enabling extensions to allow software- specific tags to be added by users.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to register additional parser options.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Included Pig Latin, a language game in English, as a [[LanguageConverter]] variant. This allows English-speaking developers to develop and test LanguageConverter more easily. Pig Latin can be enabled by setting &lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; to true.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to purge data that depends on the &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt; table.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; Added JS config values &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; to the output of diff pages.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:29--&gt; Action API changes&lt;/translate&gt; ===
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt; ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=parse output will be wrapped in a &lt;tvar name=1&gt;{{tag|div|open}}&lt;/tvar&gt; with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using the new '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;' parameter.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:31--&gt; When &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; is not '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abort reasons from &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; will be formatted as specified by the error formatter parameters.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:32--&gt; &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; can now handle arbitrary text, deleted revisions, and returning users and edit comments.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:33--&gt; ([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) The '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', and '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated, as are the similarly named parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, or &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; instead.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:34--&gt; Action API internal changes&lt;/translate&gt; ===
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; &lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; messages are deprecated. The existing message should be split between &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:36--&gt; ([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Individual values of multi-valued parameters can now be marked as deprecated.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:37--&gt; Languages updated&lt;/translate&gt; ===
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:38--&gt; Support for kbp (Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè) was added.&lt;/translate&gt;

=== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:39--&gt; Other changes&lt;/translate&gt; ===
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:40--&gt; The use of an associative array for &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, where the IP address is in the key instead of the value, is deprecated (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Please convert these arrays to indexed/sequential ones (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:41--&gt; &lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (deprecated in 1.23) was removed.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated. There are no known callers.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:43--&gt; &lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:44--&gt; &lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:45--&gt; &lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated. The new &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:46--&gt; &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated. The new &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:47--&gt; The &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; hook (deprecated in 1.21) was removed.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:48--&gt; The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt; methods (both deprecated in 1.24) were removed.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:49--&gt; &lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; were deprecated. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:50--&gt; ([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) Preprocessor handling of LanguageConverter markup has been improved. As a result of the new uniform handling, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' may need to be escaped (for example, as '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') where it occurs inside template arguments or wikilinks.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:51--&gt; ([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Page moves are now counted as edits for the purposes of autopromotion, ''i.e.'', they increment the &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; field in the database.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:52--&gt; Two new hooks, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, were added for manipulating Special:Log and Special:NewPages lines.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:53--&gt; The &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; hooks have an additional parameter, for manipulating HTML data attributes of RC/history lines. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; can do that via the &lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt; subarray.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:54--&gt; ([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; method was removed.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:55--&gt; &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; will now throw an exception if passed ParserOptions that would pollute the parser cache. Callers should use &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; to create the &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; object and only change options that affect the parser cache key.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:56--&gt; &lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:57--&gt; &lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; no longer supports passing in a direct value, it requires a callable factory function or a class name.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:58--&gt; The &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; global, &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; are all deprecated. The main &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instance should be obtained from &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt; instead. Access to the underlying &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; is possible through the new &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt; method.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:59--&gt; &lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (deprecated in 1.27) was removed.&lt;/translate&gt;

== &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:60--&gt; Subpages&lt;/translate&gt; ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>0sopxdce5iojfuiihma536guf6em3as</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Wikibase/ru</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>678962</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403069</id>
      <parentid>5383924</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:16:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Добро пожаловать на центральную страницу '''Wikibase'''.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2562" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
Добро пожаловать на центральную страницу '''Wikibase'''.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you'll find documentation and resources for the open-source software suite created by [[meta:Wikimedia Deutschland|Wikimedia Deutschland]] that you can use to create collaborative knowledge bases -- and open the door to the Linked Open Data web.&lt;/span&gt;

{{ start tab
| tab-1         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Getting started&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
| link-1        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase
| tab-2         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using Wikibase&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
| link-2        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Using_Wikibase
| tab-3         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reference&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
| link-3        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Reference
| border        = 1px solid #778899
| off tab color = #FFFFFF
| on tab color  = 
| rounding      = 1em
| tab alignment = center
}}

{{ContentGrid
|content=

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/What is Wikibase|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What is Wikibase?&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A brief introduction to this powerful software for managing structured data.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

&lt;!--

{{Colored box
|title = [[Wikibase/Should_I_use_Wikibase|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Should I use Wikibase?&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Answers the question &quot;Should I use Wikibase?&quot; using English words and punctuation.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  [[Wikibase/Case_studies|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Case studies&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some useful examples of who's currently using Wikibase and how.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

--&gt;
{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Quick start|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quick start&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dive into Wikibase in no time!&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/FAQ|2=FAQ}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Frequently asked questions about Wikibase.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Install|2=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Установка&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set up Wikibase on your own system.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

}}
[[Category:Wikibase{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>koxu4yyrn8tkcy8sh5e9vjflcffjp23</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403071</id>
      <parentid>5403069</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:16:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Здесь вы найдете документацию и ресурсы для программного обеспечения с открытым исходным кодом, созданного $1, которое вы можете использовать для создания совместных баз знаний, а также откроете дверь в сеть Linked Open Data.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2704" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
Добро пожаловать на центральную страницу '''Wikibase'''.
Здесь вы найдете документацию и ресурсы для программного обеспечения с открытым исходным кодом, созданного [[meta:Wikimedia Deutschland|Wikimedia Deutschland]], которое вы можете использовать для создания совместных баз знаний, а также откроете дверь в сеть Linked Open Data.

{{ start tab
| tab-1         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Getting started&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
| link-1        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase
| tab-2         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using Wikibase&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
| link-2        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Using_Wikibase
| tab-3         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reference&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
| link-3        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Reference
| border        = 1px solid #778899
| off tab color = #FFFFFF
| on tab color  = 
| rounding      = 1em
| tab alignment = center
}}

{{ContentGrid
|content=

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/What is Wikibase|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What is Wikibase?&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A brief introduction to this powerful software for managing structured data.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

&lt;!--

{{Colored box
|title = [[Wikibase/Should_I_use_Wikibase|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Should I use Wikibase?&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Answers the question &quot;Should I use Wikibase?&quot; using English words and punctuation.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  [[Wikibase/Case_studies|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Case studies&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some useful examples of who's currently using Wikibase and how.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

--&gt;
{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Quick start|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quick start&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dive into Wikibase in no time!&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/FAQ|2=FAQ}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Frequently asked questions about Wikibase.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Install|2=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Установка&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set up Wikibase on your own system.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

}}
[[Category:Wikibase{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>cnu3rwxjkv13aremuncigrnrb1m58k5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403073</id>
      <parentid>5403071</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:16:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;С чего начать&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2657" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
Добро пожаловать на центральную страницу '''Wikibase'''.
Здесь вы найдете документацию и ресурсы для программного обеспечения с открытым исходным кодом, созданного [[meta:Wikimedia Deutschland|Wikimedia Deutschland]], которое вы можете использовать для создания совместных баз знаний, а также откроете дверь в сеть Linked Open Data.

{{ start tab
| tab-1         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;С чего начать&lt;/font&gt;
| link-1        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase
| tab-2         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using Wikibase&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
| link-2        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Using_Wikibase
| tab-3         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reference&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
| link-3        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Reference
| border        = 1px solid #778899
| off tab color = #FFFFFF
| on tab color  = 
| rounding      = 1em
| tab alignment = center
}}

{{ContentGrid
|content=

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/What is Wikibase|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What is Wikibase?&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A brief introduction to this powerful software for managing structured data.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

&lt;!--

{{Colored box
|title = [[Wikibase/Should_I_use_Wikibase|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Should I use Wikibase?&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Answers the question &quot;Should I use Wikibase?&quot; using English words and punctuation.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  [[Wikibase/Case_studies|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Case studies&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some useful examples of who's currently using Wikibase and how.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

--&gt;
{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Quick start|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quick start&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dive into Wikibase in no time!&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/FAQ|2=FAQ}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Frequently asked questions about Wikibase.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Install|2=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Установка&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set up Wikibase on your own system.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

}}
[[Category:Wikibase{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>nfj05ps7kc9b1phm9kdqtxht1wle4ny</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403075</id>
      <parentid>5403073</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:16:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Использование Wikibase&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2622" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
Добро пожаловать на центральную страницу '''Wikibase'''.
Здесь вы найдете документацию и ресурсы для программного обеспечения с открытым исходным кодом, созданного [[meta:Wikimedia Deutschland|Wikimedia Deutschland]], которое вы можете использовать для создания совместных баз знаний, а также откроете дверь в сеть Linked Open Data.

{{ start tab
| tab-1         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;С чего начать&lt;/font&gt;
| link-1        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase
| tab-2         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;Использование Wikibase&lt;/font&gt;
| link-2        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Using_Wikibase
| tab-3         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reference&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/font&gt;
| link-3        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Reference
| border        = 1px solid #778899
| off tab color = #FFFFFF
| on tab color  = 
| rounding      = 1em
| tab alignment = center
}}

{{ContentGrid
|content=

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/What is Wikibase|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What is Wikibase?&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A brief introduction to this powerful software for managing structured data.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

&lt;!--

{{Colored box
|title = [[Wikibase/Should_I_use_Wikibase|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Should I use Wikibase?&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Answers the question &quot;Should I use Wikibase?&quot; using English words and punctuation.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  [[Wikibase/Case_studies|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Case studies&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some useful examples of who's currently using Wikibase and how.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

--&gt;
{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Quick start|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quick start&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dive into Wikibase in no time!&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/FAQ|2=FAQ}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Frequently asked questions about Wikibase.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Install|2=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Установка&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set up Wikibase on your own system.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

}}
[[Category:Wikibase{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>hgj0eqzjh6tpkr3ddgk5z57c0gfj3qx</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403077</id>
      <parentid>5403075</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:17:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Ссылки&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2569" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
Добро пожаловать на центральную страницу '''Wikibase'''.
Здесь вы найдете документацию и ресурсы для программного обеспечения с открытым исходным кодом, созданного [[meta:Wikimedia Deutschland|Wikimedia Deutschland]], которое вы можете использовать для создания совместных баз знаний, а также откроете дверь в сеть Linked Open Data.

{{ start tab
| tab-1         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;С чего начать&lt;/font&gt;
| link-1        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase
| tab-2         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;Использование Wikibase&lt;/font&gt;
| link-2        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Using_Wikibase
| tab-3         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;Ссылки&lt;/font&gt;
| link-3        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Reference
| border        = 1px solid #778899
| off tab color = #FFFFFF
| on tab color  = 
| rounding      = 1em
| tab alignment = center
}}

{{ContentGrid
|content=

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/What is Wikibase|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What is Wikibase?&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A brief introduction to this powerful software for managing structured data.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

&lt;!--

{{Colored box
|title = [[Wikibase/Should_I_use_Wikibase|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Should I use Wikibase?&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Answers the question &quot;Should I use Wikibase?&quot; using English words and punctuation.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  [[Wikibase/Case_studies|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Case studies&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some useful examples of who's currently using Wikibase and how.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

--&gt;
{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Quick start|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quick start&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dive into Wikibase in no time!&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/FAQ|2=FAQ}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Frequently asked questions about Wikibase.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Install|2=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Установка&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set up Wikibase on your own system.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

}}
[[Category:Wikibase{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>89bnvdbnevgrnyn7w4s7jxz5ahyl5e0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403079</id>
      <parentid>5403077</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:17:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Что такое Wikibase?&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2523" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
Добро пожаловать на центральную страницу '''Wikibase'''.
Здесь вы найдете документацию и ресурсы для программного обеспечения с открытым исходным кодом, созданного [[meta:Wikimedia Deutschland|Wikimedia Deutschland]], которое вы можете использовать для создания совместных баз знаний, а также откроете дверь в сеть Linked Open Data.

{{ start tab
| tab-1         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;С чего начать&lt;/font&gt;
| link-1        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase
| tab-2         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;Использование Wikibase&lt;/font&gt;
| link-2        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Using_Wikibase
| tab-3         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;Ссылки&lt;/font&gt;
| link-3        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Reference
| border        = 1px solid #778899
| off tab color = #FFFFFF
| on tab color  = 
| rounding      = 1em
| tab alignment = center
}}

{{ContentGrid
|content=

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/What is Wikibase|2=Что такое Wikibase?}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A brief introduction to this powerful software for managing structured data.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

&lt;!--

{{Colored box
|title = [[Wikibase/Should_I_use_Wikibase|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Should I use Wikibase?&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Answers the question &quot;Should I use Wikibase?&quot; using English words and punctuation.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  [[Wikibase/Case_studies|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Case studies&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some useful examples of who's currently using Wikibase and how.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

--&gt;
{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Quick start|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quick start&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dive into Wikibase in no time!&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/FAQ|2=FAQ}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Frequently asked questions about Wikibase.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Install|2=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Установка&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set up Wikibase on your own system.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

}}
[[Category:Wikibase{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>h3zco99laigoepvud720prg2a9d5onq</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403233</id>
      <parentid>5403079</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:01:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2483" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
Добро пожаловать на центральную страницу '''Wikibase'''.
Здесь вы найдете документацию и ресурсы для программного обеспечения с открытым исходным кодом, созданного [[meta:Wikimedia Deutschland|Wikimedia Deutschland]], которое вы можете использовать для создания совместных баз знаний, а также откроете дверь в сеть Linked Open Data.

{{ start tab
| tab-1         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;С чего начать&lt;/font&gt;
| link-1        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase
| tab-2         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;Использование Wikibase&lt;/font&gt;
| link-2        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Using_Wikibase
| tab-3         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;Ссылки&lt;/font&gt;
| link-3        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Reference
| border        = 1px solid #778899
| off tab color = #FFFFFF
| on tab color  = 
| rounding      = 1em
| tab alignment = center
}}

{{ContentGrid
|content=

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/What is Wikibase|2=Что такое Wikibase?}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A brief introduction to this powerful software for managing structured data.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

&lt;!--

{{Colored box
|title = [[Wikibase/Should_I_use_Wikibase|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Should I use Wikibase?&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Answers the question &quot;Should I use Wikibase?&quot; using English words and punctuation.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  [[Wikibase/Case_studies|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Case studies&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some useful examples of who's currently using Wikibase and how.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

--&gt;
{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Quick start|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Quick start&lt;/span&gt;}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dive into Wikibase in no time!&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/FAQ|2=FAQ}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Frequently asked questions about Wikibase.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Install|2=Установка}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set up Wikibase on your own system.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

}}
[[Category:Wikibase{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>hd7kf8ijzu2x0kovhkhegkljou3aic2</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403237</id>
      <parentid>5403233</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:01:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Быстрый старт&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2441" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
Добро пожаловать на центральную страницу '''Wikibase'''.
Здесь вы найдете документацию и ресурсы для программного обеспечения с открытым исходным кодом, созданного [[meta:Wikimedia Deutschland|Wikimedia Deutschland]], которое вы можете использовать для создания совместных баз знаний, а также откроете дверь в сеть Linked Open Data.

{{ start tab
| tab-1         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;С чего начать&lt;/font&gt;
| link-1        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase
| tab-2         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;Использование Wikibase&lt;/font&gt;
| link-2        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Using_Wikibase
| tab-3         = &lt;font size=&quot;+2&quot;&gt;Ссылки&lt;/font&gt;
| link-3        = Special:MyLanguage/Wikibase/Reference
| border        = 1px solid #778899
| off tab color = #FFFFFF
| on tab color  = 
| rounding      = 1em
| tab alignment = center
}}

{{ContentGrid
|content=

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/What is Wikibase|2=Что такое Wikibase?}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A brief introduction to this powerful software for managing structured data.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

&lt;!--

{{Colored box
|title = [[Wikibase/Should_I_use_Wikibase|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Should I use Wikibase?&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Answers the question &quot;Should I use Wikibase?&quot; using English words and punctuation.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  [[Wikibase/Case_studies|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Case studies&lt;/span&gt;]]
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some useful examples of who's currently using Wikibase and how.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

--&gt;
{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Quick start|2=Быстрый старт}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dive into Wikibase in no time!&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/FAQ|2=FAQ}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Frequently asked questions about Wikibase.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

{{Colored box
|title =  {{ll|Wikibase/Install|2=Установка}}
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set up Wikibase on your own system.&lt;/span&gt;
}}

}}
[[Category:Wikibase{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>9yoqpf39wng0x7lj1drkvndruqx01mk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/8/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>683914</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402822</id>
      <parentid>4495153</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:20:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="104" xml:space="preserve">あるいは'''[[$1|「特別ページ:最近の更新」の絞込み機能]]'''とも呼ばれます。</text>
      <sha1>8qcuabmkewgldlzqp8p638axq1brf0a</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/135/pl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>684343</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402984</id>
      <parentid>2472344</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:49:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="115" xml:space="preserve">Tak, ale czasem może być konieczność dokonania w nim drobnych zmian. Sam format $1 jest kompatybilny wstecznie.</text>
      <sha1>raobeybzqva34lqesqxjsmmwubipxx8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/gl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>687227</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402772</id>
      <parentid>2480372</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:45:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="91" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Axuda para usar os modelos de cita]] ou [[$2|Axuda para usar o botón de citoid's $3]]</text>
      <sha1>mvv8th5jglhdqroeldcxdjhfmcttz0q</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Page Previews/28/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>687428</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402119</id>
      <parentid>2772877</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:19:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44" xml:space="preserve">Read [[$1|the full results of these tests]].</text>
      <sha1>ikpzmpqojmgvxrktelrilhsc4ceev7t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Page Previews/31/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>687431</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402120</id>
      <parentid>2641398</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:19:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="55" xml:space="preserve">Read [[$1|the full results and analysis of this test]].</text>
      <sha1>d3k7q9tdaqtctzqxbgp1z6pzbvkifo5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/63/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>688002</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402686</id>
      <parentid>2605463</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="32" xml:space="preserve">Editor in the [[$1|Android]] app</text>
      <sha1>onpf3h7ikel4z9w2k5te0jf05iog6pe</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/67/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>688006</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402687</id>
      <parentid>2605464</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28" xml:space="preserve">Editor in the [[$1|iOS]] app</text>
      <sha1>ag99z7kx4xueyds8f1er9sfru87o3ov</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>688960</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402306</id>
      <parentid>2483850</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:07:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="35" xml:space="preserve">Consulte $1 para mais informação.</text>
      <sha1>4jmf1wo4mejpbqk7749n6qp4j8ghxre</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Interface/Sidebar/pt</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>690366</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402337</id>
      <parentid>5361259</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:29:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="30984" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define a barra de navegação, a qual provê enlaces à maioria dos lugares na wiki e fornece aos administradores do lugar um lugar para adicionar uma colecção constante de enlaces. Por exemplo, a maioria das wikis enlaçarão à página de discussão de sua comunidade e a algumas ferramentas úteis.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Os [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook e Vetor colocam a barra de navegação acima à esquerda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto à barra de busca e à caixa de ferramentas, mas a localização pode ser diferente em outros skins. Varra-a lateral oculta-se '''  aos utentes do lugar [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This sidebar is '''not shown to users of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]] site''' (i.e. the version of the site produced by {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}) - use the {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} hook for that).&lt;/span&gt;

==Personalizar varra-a lateral==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para personalizar a [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] numa wiki, você primeiro precisa estar registado com um utente que tenha a permissão ''editinterface'' - Isto está habilitado por defeito para os administradores. (Para informação sobre atribuir uma permissão a grupos ou utentes, ver [[Manual:User rights|Manual:User rights]].)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(For information on assigning a permission to groups or users, see {{ll|Manual:User rights}}.)&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Depois, use um enlace a uma página em sua wiki, mas substitua o título de sua página wiki (e.g. Main_Page) na URL/varra de direcções com MediaWiki:Sidebar e carregue essa página - Você deveria ver agora o conteúdo da varra lateral. (Você pode usar a sintaxe ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;#38;action=edit'' se você utiliza URLs longas.)&lt;/span&gt;

Se o conteúdo de varra-a lateral já tem sido modificado, você simplesmente pode dar clique sobre o enlace ''Edit'' ou ''Edit source'', de outra forma você poderia precisar criar primeiro a página dando clique em ''Create'' ou ''Create source''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A seguir mostra-se um código de exemplo para uma varra lateral:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This example will result in the following sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Se você tem que criar uma nova página, apresentar-se-lhe-á o conteúdo por defeito da varra lateral no editor. Para criar exitosamente uma página MediaWiki:Sidebar, precisa mudar o conteúdo dantes de salvar.}} 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Splitting the navigation bar into new sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A barra de navegação pode estar dividida em secções, a cada uma com seu próprio encabeçado. O encabeçado para a cada secção é tomado desde a lista de elementos do primeiro nível (&quot;navigation&quot; e &quot;new heading&quot; no exemplo de acima).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is done by adding one asterisk.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The heading for each section is taken from the first-level list element (&quot;navigation&quot; and &quot;new heading&quot; in the example above).&lt;/span&gt;
Se este texto corresponde ao nome de uma mensagem da interface (Uma página existente nesse título na MediaWiki namespace), então o texto dessa página é usado como uma etiqueta; caso contrário, o título do encabeçado utiliza-se tal qual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Creating links in the sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objectivo
: O enlace objectivo pode ser o nome de uma mensagem de interface (uma página no MediaWiki namespace) ou uma página wiki, ou um enlace externo. Em qualquer caso, o [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|link]] pode ser interno, interwiki ou externo. Em alguns casos (tais como enlaces com o carácter &quot;&amp;&quot;), uma mensagem de interface é necessário. O enlace objectivo não pode ser dependente da linguagem da interface configurada nas preferências.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: The link target can be the name of an interface message (page in the MediaWiki namespace) or wiki page, or an external link. In either case, the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|link]] can be internal, interwiki, or external.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In some cases (such as links with the &quot;&amp;&quot; character), an interface message is necessary. The link target cannot be made dependent on the interface language set in the preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Chamar o texto objectivo.
:#  Se há um existente ou uma mensagem de interface por defeito com esse nome, use o conteúdo dessa mensagem em vez do texto objectivo.
:# Se a saída do passo anterior é uma URL valida (começando com http:// ou outro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), o enlace apontará a essa URL.
:# se não, tratar-se-á como o enlace objectivo de um wikilink (enlaçando a esse nome de página ou interwiki). 
:# Em caso que termine enlaçando a '-', toda a entrada é removida da varra lateral (isso é útil para remover uma entrada em todas as linguagens ao mudar a mensagem que tem o enlace).
Exemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;usa o texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url|MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (o qual contém &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&lt;/span&gt; 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[Special:RecentChanges]], since there is no interface message of that name and that is not a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] for the same reason.&lt;/span&gt;

; enlace de texto
: O enlace de texto pode ser o mesmo de uma mensagem de interface (página no the MediaWiki namespace) ou texto plano. 
:* Se o enlace de texto é o nome de uma mensagem de interface existente ou por defeito, o conteúdo dessa mensagem será usada. Mediawiki verificará as versões localizadas; por exemplo, se a linguagem actual é fr (Frances) e o enlace de texto é a mensagem de interface &quot;fórum&quot;, este verificará &quot;fórum/fr&quot; dantes de usar &quot;fórum&quot;.
:* Em qualquer caso, o enlace de texto é usado como destino. 
:* Note que o enlace de texto '''não''' é opcional como os enlaces numa wiki normal. Se falta o enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;o elemento ignora-se&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: The link text can be the name of an interface message (page in the MediaWiki namespace) or plain text.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

Exemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Ordem dos elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduções ==

Você pode traduzir as correntes, a qual você usa, editando as páginas de acordo ao namespace na MediaWiki .

'''Exemplo:''' A corrente, a qual substituirá o elemento chamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, é tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/mudar este texto para os utentes, quem despliegan seu wiki em Alemão, pode colocar o texto de acordo à página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

Dessa maneira você pode facilmente traduzir esses textos através da interface da MediaWiki.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Please note''' that MediaWiki will by default use the content of the Sidebar page in ''that'' language, which corresponds to the default language of your wiki. So, if your wiki e.g. uses French as its default language, edit [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] in order to show a modified sidebar to all users, who have not changed their language setting and to all anonymous users.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more advanced translation, see {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Advanced customization==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ver também==

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>41yp815orc2qaxhkclzmqdw4q3uv8lw</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402341</id>
      <parentid>5402337</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:32:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="30539" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define a barra de navegação, a qual provê enlaces à maioria dos lugares na wiki e fornece aos administradores do lugar um lugar para adicionar uma colecção constante de enlaces. Por exemplo, a maioria das wikis enlaçarão à página de discussão de sua comunidade e a algumas ferramentas úteis.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Os [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook e Vetor colocam a barra de navegação acima à esquerda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto à barra de busca e à caixa de ferramentas, mas a localização pode ser diferente em outros skins. Varra-a lateral oculta-se '''  aos utentes do lugar [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This sidebar is '''not shown to users of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]] site''' (i.e. the version of the site produced by {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}) - use the {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} hook for that).&lt;/span&gt;

==Personalizar varra-a lateral==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para personalizar a [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] numa wiki, você primeiro precisa estar registado com um utente que tenha a permissão ''editinterface'' - Isto está habilitado por defeito para os administradores. (Para informação sobre atribuir uma permissão a grupos ou utentes, ver [[Manual:User rights|Manual:User rights]].)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(For information on assigning a permission to groups or users, see {{ll|Manual:User rights}}.)&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Depois, use um enlace a uma página em sua wiki, mas substitua o título de sua página wiki (e.g. Main_Page) na URL/varra de direcções com MediaWiki:Sidebar e carregue essa página - Você deveria ver agora o conteúdo da varra lateral. (Você pode usar a sintaxe ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;#38;action=edit'' se você utiliza URLs longas.)&lt;/span&gt;

Se o conteúdo de varra-a lateral já tem sido modificado, você simplesmente pode dar clique sobre o enlace ''Edit'' ou ''Edit source'', de outra forma você poderia precisar criar primeiro a página dando clique em ''Create'' ou ''Create source''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A seguir mostra-se um código de exemplo para uma varra lateral:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This example will result in the following sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Se você tem que criar uma nova página, apresentar-se-lhe-á o conteúdo por defeito da varra lateral no editor. Para criar exitosamente uma página MediaWiki:Sidebar, precisa mudar o conteúdo dantes de salvar.}} 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Splitting the navigation bar into new sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A barra de navegação pode estar dividida em secções, a cada uma com seu próprio encabeçado. O encabeçado para a cada secção é tomado desde a lista de elementos do primeiro nível (&quot;navigation&quot; e &quot;new heading&quot; no exemplo de acima).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is done by adding one asterisk.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The heading for each section is taken from the first-level list element (&quot;navigation&quot; and &quot;new heading&quot; in the example above).&lt;/span&gt;
Se este texto corresponde ao nome de uma mensagem da interface (Uma página existente nesse título na MediaWiki namespace), então o texto dessa página é usado como uma etiqueta; caso contrário, o título do encabeçado utiliza-se tal qual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Creating links in the sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objectivo
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: The link target can be the name of an interface message (page in the MediaWiki namespace) or wiki page, or an external link. In either case, the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|link]] can be internal, interwiki, or external.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;ref&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In some cases (such as links with the &quot;&amp;&quot; character), an interface message is necessary. The link target cannot be made dependent on the interface language set in the preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Chamar o texto objectivo.
:#  Se há um existente ou uma mensagem de interface por defeito com esse nome, use o conteúdo dessa mensagem em vez do texto objectivo.
:# Se a saída do passo anterior é uma URL valida (começando com http:// ou outro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), o enlace apontará a essa URL.
:# se não, tratar-se-á como o enlace objectivo de um wikilink (enlaçando a esse nome de página ou interwiki). 
:# Em caso que termine enlaçando a '-', toda a entrada é removida da varra lateral (isso é útil para remover uma entrada em todas as linguagens ao mudar a mensagem que tem o enlace).
Exemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;usa o texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url|MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (o qual contém &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&lt;/span&gt; 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[Special:RecentChanges]], since there is no interface message of that name and that is not a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] for the same reason.&lt;/span&gt;

; enlace de texto
: O enlace de texto pode ser o mesmo de uma mensagem de interface (página no the MediaWiki namespace) ou texto plano. 
:* Se o enlace de texto é o nome de uma mensagem de interface existente ou por defeito, o conteúdo dessa mensagem será usada. Mediawiki verificará as versões localizadas; por exemplo, se a linguagem actual é fr (Frances) e o enlace de texto é a mensagem de interface &quot;fórum&quot;, este verificará &quot;fórum/fr&quot; dantes de usar &quot;fórum&quot;.
:* Em qualquer caso, o enlace de texto é usado como destino. 
:* Note que o enlace de texto '''não''' é opcional como os enlaces numa wiki normal. Se falta o enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;o elemento ignora-se&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: The link text can be the name of an interface message (page in the MediaWiki namespace) or plain text.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

Exemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Ordem dos elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduções ==

Você pode traduzir as correntes, a qual você usa, editando as páginas de acordo ao namespace na MediaWiki .

'''Exemplo:''' A corrente, a qual substituirá o elemento chamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, é tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/mudar este texto para os utentes, quem despliegan seu wiki em Alemão, pode colocar o texto de acordo à página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

Dessa maneira você pode facilmente traduzir esses textos através da interface da MediaWiki.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Please note''' that MediaWiki will by default use the content of the Sidebar page in ''that'' language, which corresponds to the default language of your wiki. So, if your wiki e.g. uses French as its default language, edit [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] in order to show a modified sidebar to all users, who have not changed their language setting and to all anonymous users.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more advanced translation, see {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Advanced customization==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ver também==

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2gug1jdf7hneczbqmrnjdc6iax8ygm5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402343</id>
      <parentid>5402341</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:33:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="30501" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define a barra de navegação, a qual provê enlaces à maioria dos lugares na wiki e fornece aos administradores do lugar um lugar para adicionar uma colecção constante de enlaces. Por exemplo, a maioria das wikis enlaçarão à página de discussão de sua comunidade e a algumas ferramentas úteis.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Os [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook e Vetor colocam a barra de navegação acima à esquerda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto à barra de busca e à caixa de ferramentas, mas a localização pode ser diferente em outros skins. Varra-a lateral oculta-se '''  aos utentes do lugar [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This sidebar is '''not shown to users of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]] site''' (i.e. the version of the site produced by {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}) - use the {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} hook for that).&lt;/span&gt;

==Personalizar varra-a lateral==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para personalizar a [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] numa wiki, você primeiro precisa estar registado com um utente que tenha a permissão ''editinterface'' - Isto está habilitado por defeito para os administradores. (Para informação sobre atribuir uma permissão a grupos ou utentes, ver [[Manual:User rights|Manual:User rights]].)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(For information on assigning a permission to groups or users, see {{ll|Manual:User rights}}.)&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Depois, use um enlace a uma página em sua wiki, mas substitua o título de sua página wiki (e.g. Main_Page) na URL/varra de direcções com MediaWiki:Sidebar e carregue essa página - Você deveria ver agora o conteúdo da varra lateral. (Você pode usar a sintaxe ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;#38;action=edit'' se você utiliza URLs longas.)&lt;/span&gt;

Se o conteúdo de varra-a lateral já tem sido modificado, você simplesmente pode dar clique sobre o enlace ''Edit'' ou ''Edit source'', de outra forma você poderia precisar criar primeiro a página dando clique em ''Create'' ou ''Create source''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A seguir mostra-se um código de exemplo para uma varra lateral:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This example will result in the following sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Se você tem que criar uma nova página, apresentar-se-lhe-á o conteúdo por defeito da varra lateral no editor. Para criar exitosamente uma página MediaWiki:Sidebar, precisa mudar o conteúdo dantes de salvar.}} 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Splitting the navigation bar into new sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A barra de navegação pode estar dividida em secções, a cada uma com seu próprio encabeçado. O encabeçado para a cada secção é tomado desde a lista de elementos do primeiro nível (&quot;navigation&quot; e &quot;new heading&quot; no exemplo de acima).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is done by adding one asterisk.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The heading for each section is taken from the first-level list element (&quot;navigation&quot; and &quot;new heading&quot; in the example above).&lt;/span&gt;
Se este texto corresponde ao nome de uma mensagem da interface (Uma página existente nesse título na MediaWiki namespace), então o texto dessa página é usado como uma etiqueta; caso contrário, o título do encabeçado utiliza-se tal qual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Creating links in the sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objectivo
: O enlace objectivo pode ser o nome de uma mensagem de interface (uma página no MediaWiki namespace) ou uma página wiki, ou um enlace externo. Em qualquer caso, o [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|link]] pode ser interno, interwiki ou externo.&lt;ref&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In some cases (such as links with the &quot;&amp;&quot; character), an interface message is necessary. The link target cannot be made dependent on the interface language set in the preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Chamar o texto objectivo.
:#  Se há um existente ou uma mensagem de interface por defeito com esse nome, use o conteúdo dessa mensagem em vez do texto objectivo.
:# Se a saída do passo anterior é uma URL valida (começando com http:// ou outro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), o enlace apontará a essa URL.
:# se não, tratar-se-á como o enlace objectivo de um wikilink (enlaçando a esse nome de página ou interwiki). 
:# Em caso que termine enlaçando a '-', toda a entrada é removida da varra lateral (isso é útil para remover uma entrada em todas as linguagens ao mudar a mensagem que tem o enlace).
Exemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;usa o texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url|MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (o qual contém &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&lt;/span&gt; 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[Special:RecentChanges]], since there is no interface message of that name and that is not a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] for the same reason.&lt;/span&gt;

; enlace de texto
: O enlace de texto pode ser o mesmo de uma mensagem de interface (página no the MediaWiki namespace) ou texto plano. 
:* Se o enlace de texto é o nome de uma mensagem de interface existente ou por defeito, o conteúdo dessa mensagem será usada. Mediawiki verificará as versões localizadas; por exemplo, se a linguagem actual é fr (Frances) e o enlace de texto é a mensagem de interface &quot;fórum&quot;, este verificará &quot;fórum/fr&quot; dantes de usar &quot;fórum&quot;.
:* Em qualquer caso, o enlace de texto é usado como destino. 
:* Note que o enlace de texto '''não''' é opcional como os enlaces numa wiki normal. Se falta o enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;o elemento ignora-se&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: The link text can be the name of an interface message (page in the MediaWiki namespace) or plain text.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

Exemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Ordem dos elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduções ==

Você pode traduzir as correntes, a qual você usa, editando as páginas de acordo ao namespace na MediaWiki .

'''Exemplo:''' A corrente, a qual substituirá o elemento chamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, é tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/mudar este texto para os utentes, quem despliegan seu wiki em Alemão, pode colocar o texto de acordo à página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

Dessa maneira você pode facilmente traduzir esses textos através da interface da MediaWiki.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Please note''' that MediaWiki will by default use the content of the Sidebar page in ''that'' language, which corresponds to the default language of your wiki. So, if your wiki e.g. uses French as its default language, edit [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] in order to show a modified sidebar to all users, who have not changed their language setting and to all anonymous users.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more advanced translation, see {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Advanced customization==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ver também==

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>4m2eqwwuy2lvz85w991fyszwtq3kf3t</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402345</id>
      <parentid>5402343</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:33:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="30465" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define a barra de navegação, a qual provê enlaces à maioria dos lugares na wiki e fornece aos administradores do lugar um lugar para adicionar uma colecção constante de enlaces. Por exemplo, a maioria das wikis enlaçarão à página de discussão de sua comunidade e a algumas ferramentas úteis.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Os [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook e Vetor colocam a barra de navegação acima à esquerda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto à barra de busca e à caixa de ferramentas, mas a localização pode ser diferente em outros skins. Varra-a lateral oculta-se '''  aos utentes do lugar [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This sidebar is '''not shown to users of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]] site''' (i.e. the version of the site produced by {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}) - use the {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} hook for that).&lt;/span&gt;

==Personalizar varra-a lateral==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Para personalizar a [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] numa wiki, você primeiro precisa estar registado com um utente que tenha a permissão ''editinterface'' - Isto está habilitado por defeito para os administradores. (Para informação sobre atribuir uma permissão a grupos ou utentes, ver [[Manual:User rights|Manual:User rights]].)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(For information on assigning a permission to groups or users, see {{ll|Manual:User rights}}.)&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Depois, use um enlace a uma página em sua wiki, mas substitua o título de sua página wiki (e.g. Main_Page) na URL/varra de direcções com MediaWiki:Sidebar e carregue essa página - Você deveria ver agora o conteúdo da varra lateral. (Você pode usar a sintaxe ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;#38;action=edit'' se você utiliza URLs longas.)&lt;/span&gt;

Se o conteúdo de varra-a lateral já tem sido modificado, você simplesmente pode dar clique sobre o enlace ''Edit'' ou ''Edit source'', de outra forma você poderia precisar criar primeiro a página dando clique em ''Create'' ou ''Create source''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A seguir mostra-se um código de exemplo para uma varra lateral:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This example will result in the following sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Se você tem que criar uma nova página, apresentar-se-lhe-á o conteúdo por defeito da varra lateral no editor. Para criar exitosamente uma página MediaWiki:Sidebar, precisa mudar o conteúdo dantes de salvar.}} 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Splitting the navigation bar into new sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A barra de navegação pode estar dividida em secções, a cada uma com seu próprio encabeçado. O encabeçado para a cada secção é tomado desde a lista de elementos do primeiro nível (&quot;navigation&quot; e &quot;new heading&quot; no exemplo de acima).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is done by adding one asterisk.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The heading for each section is taken from the first-level list element (&quot;navigation&quot; and &quot;new heading&quot; in the example above).&lt;/span&gt;
Se este texto corresponde ao nome de uma mensagem da interface (Uma página existente nesse título na MediaWiki namespace), então o texto dessa página é usado como uma etiqueta; caso contrário, o título do encabeçado utiliza-se tal qual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Creating links in the sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objectivo
: O enlace objectivo pode ser o nome de uma mensagem de interface (uma página no MediaWiki namespace) ou uma página wiki, ou um enlace externo. Em qualquer caso, o [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|link]] pode ser interno, interwiki ou externo.&lt;ref&gt;
Em alguns casos (tais como enlaces com o carácter &quot;&amp;&quot;), uma mensagem de interface é necessário. O enlace objectivo não pode ser dependente da linguagem da interface configurada nas preferências.
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Chamar o texto objectivo.
:#  Se há um existente ou uma mensagem de interface por defeito com esse nome, use o conteúdo dessa mensagem em vez do texto objectivo.
:# Se a saída do passo anterior é uma URL valida (começando com http:// ou outro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), o enlace apontará a essa URL.
:# se não, tratar-se-á como o enlace objectivo de um wikilink (enlaçando a esse nome de página ou interwiki). 
:# Em caso que termine enlaçando a '-', toda a entrada é removida da varra lateral (isso é útil para remover uma entrada em todas as linguagens ao mudar a mensagem que tem o enlace).
Exemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;usa o texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url|MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (o qual contém &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&lt;/span&gt; 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[Special:RecentChanges]], since there is no interface message of that name and that is not a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] for the same reason.&lt;/span&gt;

; enlace de texto
: O enlace de texto pode ser o mesmo de uma mensagem de interface (página no the MediaWiki namespace) ou texto plano. 
:* Se o enlace de texto é o nome de uma mensagem de interface existente ou por defeito, o conteúdo dessa mensagem será usada. Mediawiki verificará as versões localizadas; por exemplo, se a linguagem actual é fr (Frances) e o enlace de texto é a mensagem de interface &quot;fórum&quot;, este verificará &quot;fórum/fr&quot; dantes de usar &quot;fórum&quot;.
:* Em qualquer caso, o enlace de texto é usado como destino. 
:* Note que o enlace de texto '''não''' é opcional como os enlaces numa wiki normal. Se falta o enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;o elemento ignora-se&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: The link text can be the name of an interface message (page in the MediaWiki namespace) or plain text.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

Exemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Ordem dos elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduções ==

Você pode traduzir as correntes, a qual você usa, editando as páginas de acordo ao namespace na MediaWiki .

'''Exemplo:''' A corrente, a qual substituirá o elemento chamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, é tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/mudar este texto para os utentes, quem despliegan seu wiki em Alemão, pode colocar o texto de acordo à página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

Dessa maneira você pode facilmente traduzir esses textos através da interface da MediaWiki.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Please note''' that MediaWiki will by default use the content of the Sidebar page in ''that'' language, which corresponds to the default language of your wiki. So, if your wiki e.g. uses French as its default language, edit [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] in order to show a modified sidebar to all users, who have not changed their language setting and to all anonymous users.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more advanced translation, see {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Advanced customization==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ver também==

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>21ikjcqrb3k5qvn0y54d0taxk0j831s</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402347</id>
      <parentid>5402345</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:36:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="30289" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define a barra de navegação, a qual provê enlaces à maioria dos lugares na wiki e fornece aos administradores do lugar um lugar para adicionar uma colecção constante de enlaces. Por exemplo, a maioria das wikis enlaçarão à página de discussão de sua comunidade e a algumas ferramentas úteis.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Os [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook e Vetor colocam a barra de navegação acima à esquerda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto à barra de busca e à caixa de ferramentas, mas a localização pode ser diferente em outros skins. Varra-a lateral oculta-se '''  aos utentes do lugar [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This sidebar is '''not shown to users of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]] site''' (i.e. the version of the site produced by {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}) - use the {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} hook for that).&lt;/span&gt;

==Personalizar varra-a lateral==
Para personalizar a [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] numa wiki, você primeiro precisa estar registado com um utente que tenha a permissão ''editinterface'' - Isto está habilitado por defeito para os administradores.&lt;ref&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(For information on assigning a permission to groups or users, see {{ll|Manual:User rights}}.)&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Depois, use um enlace a uma página em sua wiki, mas substitua o título de sua página wiki (e.g. Main_Page) na URL/varra de direcções com MediaWiki:Sidebar e carregue essa página - Você deveria ver agora o conteúdo da varra lateral. (Você pode usar a sintaxe ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;#38;action=edit'' se você utiliza URLs longas.)&lt;/span&gt;

Se o conteúdo de varra-a lateral já tem sido modificado, você simplesmente pode dar clique sobre o enlace ''Edit'' ou ''Edit source'', de outra forma você poderia precisar criar primeiro a página dando clique em ''Create'' ou ''Create source''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A seguir mostra-se um código de exemplo para uma varra lateral:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This example will result in the following sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Se você tem que criar uma nova página, apresentar-se-lhe-á o conteúdo por defeito da varra lateral no editor. Para criar exitosamente uma página MediaWiki:Sidebar, precisa mudar o conteúdo dantes de salvar.}} 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Splitting the navigation bar into new sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A barra de navegação pode estar dividida em secções, a cada uma com seu próprio encabeçado. O encabeçado para a cada secção é tomado desde a lista de elementos do primeiro nível (&quot;navigation&quot; e &quot;new heading&quot; no exemplo de acima).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is done by adding one asterisk.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The heading for each section is taken from the first-level list element (&quot;navigation&quot; and &quot;new heading&quot; in the example above).&lt;/span&gt;
Se este texto corresponde ao nome de uma mensagem da interface (Uma página existente nesse título na MediaWiki namespace), então o texto dessa página é usado como uma etiqueta; caso contrário, o título do encabeçado utiliza-se tal qual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Creating links in the sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objectivo
: O enlace objectivo pode ser o nome de uma mensagem de interface (uma página no MediaWiki namespace) ou uma página wiki, ou um enlace externo. Em qualquer caso, o [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|link]] pode ser interno, interwiki ou externo.&lt;ref&gt;
Em alguns casos (tais como enlaces com o carácter &quot;&amp;&quot;), uma mensagem de interface é necessário. O enlace objectivo não pode ser dependente da linguagem da interface configurada nas preferências.
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Chamar o texto objectivo.
:#  Se há um existente ou uma mensagem de interface por defeito com esse nome, use o conteúdo dessa mensagem em vez do texto objectivo.
:# Se a saída do passo anterior é uma URL valida (começando com http:// ou outro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), o enlace apontará a essa URL.
:# se não, tratar-se-á como o enlace objectivo de um wikilink (enlaçando a esse nome de página ou interwiki). 
:# Em caso que termine enlaçando a '-', toda a entrada é removida da varra lateral (isso é útil para remover uma entrada em todas as linguagens ao mudar a mensagem que tem o enlace).
Exemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;usa o texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url|MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (o qual contém &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&lt;/span&gt; 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[Special:RecentChanges]], since there is no interface message of that name and that is not a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] for the same reason.&lt;/span&gt;

; enlace de texto
: O enlace de texto pode ser o mesmo de uma mensagem de interface (página no the MediaWiki namespace) ou texto plano. 
:* Se o enlace de texto é o nome de uma mensagem de interface existente ou por defeito, o conteúdo dessa mensagem será usada. Mediawiki verificará as versões localizadas; por exemplo, se a linguagem actual é fr (Frances) e o enlace de texto é a mensagem de interface &quot;fórum&quot;, este verificará &quot;fórum/fr&quot; dantes de usar &quot;fórum&quot;.
:* Em qualquer caso, o enlace de texto é usado como destino. 
:* Note que o enlace de texto '''não''' é opcional como os enlaces numa wiki normal. Se falta o enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;o elemento ignora-se&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: The link text can be the name of an interface message (page in the MediaWiki namespace) or plain text.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

Exemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Ordem dos elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduções ==

Você pode traduzir as correntes, a qual você usa, editando as páginas de acordo ao namespace na MediaWiki .

'''Exemplo:''' A corrente, a qual substituirá o elemento chamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, é tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/mudar este texto para os utentes, quem despliegan seu wiki em Alemão, pode colocar o texto de acordo à página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

Dessa maneira você pode facilmente traduzir esses textos através da interface da MediaWiki.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Please note''' that MediaWiki will by default use the content of the Sidebar page in ''that'' language, which corresponds to the default language of your wiki. So, if your wiki e.g. uses French as its default language, edit [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] in order to show a modified sidebar to all users, who have not changed their language setting and to all anonymous users.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more advanced translation, see {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Advanced customization==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ver também==

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9oilmht1s41rchh44ckkurrfzx0l01e</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402349</id>
      <parentid>5402347</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:36:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="30240" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define a barra de navegação, a qual provê enlaces à maioria dos lugares na wiki e fornece aos administradores do lugar um lugar para adicionar uma colecção constante de enlaces. Por exemplo, a maioria das wikis enlaçarão à página de discussão de sua comunidade e a algumas ferramentas úteis.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Os [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook e Vetor colocam a barra de navegação acima à esquerda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto à barra de busca e à caixa de ferramentas, mas a localização pode ser diferente em outros skins. Varra-a lateral oculta-se '''  aos utentes do lugar [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This sidebar is '''not shown to users of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]] site''' (i.e. the version of the site produced by {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}) - use the {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} hook for that).&lt;/span&gt;

==Personalizar varra-a lateral==
Para personalizar a [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] numa wiki, você primeiro precisa estar registado com um utente que tenha a permissão ''editinterface'' - Isto está habilitado por defeito para os administradores.&lt;ref&gt;
(Para informação sobre atribuir uma permissão a grupos ou utentes, ver {{ll|Manual:User rights}}.)

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Depois, use um enlace a uma página em sua wiki, mas substitua o título de sua página wiki (e.g. Main_Page) na URL/varra de direcções com MediaWiki:Sidebar e carregue essa página - Você deveria ver agora o conteúdo da varra lateral. (Você pode usar a sintaxe ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;#38;action=edit'' se você utiliza URLs longas.)&lt;/span&gt;

Se o conteúdo de varra-a lateral já tem sido modificado, você simplesmente pode dar clique sobre o enlace ''Edit'' ou ''Edit source'', de outra forma você poderia precisar criar primeiro a página dando clique em ''Create'' ou ''Create source''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A seguir mostra-se um código de exemplo para uma varra lateral:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This example will result in the following sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Se você tem que criar uma nova página, apresentar-se-lhe-á o conteúdo por defeito da varra lateral no editor. Para criar exitosamente uma página MediaWiki:Sidebar, precisa mudar o conteúdo dantes de salvar.}} 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Splitting the navigation bar into new sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A barra de navegação pode estar dividida em secções, a cada uma com seu próprio encabeçado. O encabeçado para a cada secção é tomado desde a lista de elementos do primeiro nível (&quot;navigation&quot; e &quot;new heading&quot; no exemplo de acima).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is done by adding one asterisk.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The heading for each section is taken from the first-level list element (&quot;navigation&quot; and &quot;new heading&quot; in the example above).&lt;/span&gt;
Se este texto corresponde ao nome de uma mensagem da interface (Uma página existente nesse título na MediaWiki namespace), então o texto dessa página é usado como uma etiqueta; caso contrário, o título do encabeçado utiliza-se tal qual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Creating links in the sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objectivo
: O enlace objectivo pode ser o nome de uma mensagem de interface (uma página no MediaWiki namespace) ou uma página wiki, ou um enlace externo. Em qualquer caso, o [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|link]] pode ser interno, interwiki ou externo.&lt;ref&gt;
Em alguns casos (tais como enlaces com o carácter &quot;&amp;&quot;), uma mensagem de interface é necessário. O enlace objectivo não pode ser dependente da linguagem da interface configurada nas preferências.
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Chamar o texto objectivo.
:#  Se há um existente ou uma mensagem de interface por defeito com esse nome, use o conteúdo dessa mensagem em vez do texto objectivo.
:# Se a saída do passo anterior é uma URL valida (começando com http:// ou outro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), o enlace apontará a essa URL.
:# se não, tratar-se-á como o enlace objectivo de um wikilink (enlaçando a esse nome de página ou interwiki). 
:# Em caso que termine enlaçando a '-', toda a entrada é removida da varra lateral (isso é útil para remover uma entrada em todas as linguagens ao mudar a mensagem que tem o enlace).
Exemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;usa o texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url|MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (o qual contém &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&lt;/span&gt; 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[Special:RecentChanges]], since there is no interface message of that name and that is not a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] for the same reason.&lt;/span&gt;

; enlace de texto
: O enlace de texto pode ser o mesmo de uma mensagem de interface (página no the MediaWiki namespace) ou texto plano. 
:* Se o enlace de texto é o nome de uma mensagem de interface existente ou por defeito, o conteúdo dessa mensagem será usada. Mediawiki verificará as versões localizadas; por exemplo, se a linguagem actual é fr (Frances) e o enlace de texto é a mensagem de interface &quot;fórum&quot;, este verificará &quot;fórum/fr&quot; dantes de usar &quot;fórum&quot;.
:* Em qualquer caso, o enlace de texto é usado como destino. 
:* Note que o enlace de texto '''não''' é opcional como os enlaces numa wiki normal. Se falta o enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;o elemento ignora-se&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: The link text can be the name of an interface message (page in the MediaWiki namespace) or plain text.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

Exemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Ordem dos elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduções ==

Você pode traduzir as correntes, a qual você usa, editando as páginas de acordo ao namespace na MediaWiki .

'''Exemplo:''' A corrente, a qual substituirá o elemento chamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, é tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/mudar este texto para os utentes, quem despliegan seu wiki em Alemão, pode colocar o texto de acordo à página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

Dessa maneira você pode facilmente traduzir esses textos através da interface da MediaWiki.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Please note''' that MediaWiki will by default use the content of the Sidebar page in ''that'' language, which corresponds to the default language of your wiki. So, if your wiki e.g. uses French as its default language, edit [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] in order to show a modified sidebar to all users, who have not changed their language setting and to all anonymous users.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more advanced translation, see {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Advanced customization==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ver também==

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>07ag43wu48a5f9ms5jlp1gtexexxq8v</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402351</id>
      <parentid>5402349</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:36:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="30209" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define a barra de navegação, a qual provê enlaces à maioria dos lugares na wiki e fornece aos administradores do lugar um lugar para adicionar uma colecção constante de enlaces. Por exemplo, a maioria das wikis enlaçarão à página de discussão de sua comunidade e a algumas ferramentas úteis.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Os [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook e Vetor colocam a barra de navegação acima à esquerda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto à barra de busca e à caixa de ferramentas, mas a localização pode ser diferente em outros skins. Varra-a lateral oculta-se '''  aos utentes do lugar [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This sidebar is '''not shown to users of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]] site''' (i.e. the version of the site produced by {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}) - use the {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} hook for that).&lt;/span&gt;

==Personalizar varra-a lateral==
Para personalizar a [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] numa wiki, você primeiro precisa estar registado com um utente que tenha a permissão ''editinterface'' - Isto está habilitado por defeito para os administradores.&lt;ref&gt;
(Para informação sobre atribuir uma permissão a grupos ou utentes, ver {{ll|Manual:User rights}}.)

Depois, use um enlace a uma página em sua wiki, mas substitua o título de sua página wiki (e.g. Main_Page) na URL/varra de direcções com &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Sidebar&lt;/code&gt; e carregue essa página - Você deveria ver agora o conteúdo da varra lateral. (Você pode usar a sintaxe ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit'' se você utiliza URLs longas.)

Se o conteúdo de varra-a lateral já tem sido modificado, você simplesmente pode dar clique sobre o enlace ''Edit'' ou ''Edit source'', de outra forma você poderia precisar criar primeiro a página dando clique em ''Create'' ou ''Create source''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A seguir mostra-se um código de exemplo para uma varra lateral:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This example will result in the following sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Se você tem que criar uma nova página, apresentar-se-lhe-á o conteúdo por defeito da varra lateral no editor. Para criar exitosamente uma página MediaWiki:Sidebar, precisa mudar o conteúdo dantes de salvar.}} 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Splitting the navigation bar into new sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A barra de navegação pode estar dividida em secções, a cada uma com seu próprio encabeçado. O encabeçado para a cada secção é tomado desde a lista de elementos do primeiro nível (&quot;navigation&quot; e &quot;new heading&quot; no exemplo de acima).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is done by adding one asterisk.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The heading for each section is taken from the first-level list element (&quot;navigation&quot; and &quot;new heading&quot; in the example above).&lt;/span&gt;
Se este texto corresponde ao nome de uma mensagem da interface (Uma página existente nesse título na MediaWiki namespace), então o texto dessa página é usado como uma etiqueta; caso contrário, o título do encabeçado utiliza-se tal qual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Creating links in the sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objectivo
: O enlace objectivo pode ser o nome de uma mensagem de interface (uma página no MediaWiki namespace) ou uma página wiki, ou um enlace externo. Em qualquer caso, o [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|link]] pode ser interno, interwiki ou externo.&lt;ref&gt;
Em alguns casos (tais como enlaces com o carácter &quot;&amp;&quot;), uma mensagem de interface é necessário. O enlace objectivo não pode ser dependente da linguagem da interface configurada nas preferências.
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Chamar o texto objectivo.
:#  Se há um existente ou uma mensagem de interface por defeito com esse nome, use o conteúdo dessa mensagem em vez do texto objectivo.
:# Se a saída do passo anterior é uma URL valida (começando com http:// ou outro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), o enlace apontará a essa URL.
:# se não, tratar-se-á como o enlace objectivo de um wikilink (enlaçando a esse nome de página ou interwiki). 
:# Em caso que termine enlaçando a '-', toda a entrada é removida da varra lateral (isso é útil para remover uma entrada em todas as linguagens ao mudar a mensagem que tem o enlace).
Exemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;usa o texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url|MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (o qual contém &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&lt;/span&gt; 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[Special:RecentChanges]], since there is no interface message of that name and that is not a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] for the same reason.&lt;/span&gt;

; enlace de texto
: O enlace de texto pode ser o mesmo de uma mensagem de interface (página no the MediaWiki namespace) ou texto plano. 
:* Se o enlace de texto é o nome de uma mensagem de interface existente ou por defeito, o conteúdo dessa mensagem será usada. Mediawiki verificará as versões localizadas; por exemplo, se a linguagem actual é fr (Frances) e o enlace de texto é a mensagem de interface &quot;fórum&quot;, este verificará &quot;fórum/fr&quot; dantes de usar &quot;fórum&quot;.
:* Em qualquer caso, o enlace de texto é usado como destino. 
:* Note que o enlace de texto '''não''' é opcional como os enlaces numa wiki normal. Se falta o enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;o elemento ignora-se&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: The link text can be the name of an interface message (page in the MediaWiki namespace) or plain text.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

Exemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Ordem dos elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduções ==

Você pode traduzir as correntes, a qual você usa, editando as páginas de acordo ao namespace na MediaWiki .

'''Exemplo:''' A corrente, a qual substituirá o elemento chamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, é tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/mudar este texto para os utentes, quem despliegan seu wiki em Alemão, pode colocar o texto de acordo à página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

Dessa maneira você pode facilmente traduzir esses textos através da interface da MediaWiki.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Please note''' that MediaWiki will by default use the content of the Sidebar page in ''that'' language, which corresponds to the default language of your wiki. So, if your wiki e.g. uses French as its default language, edit [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] in order to show a modified sidebar to all users, who have not changed their language setting and to all anonymous users.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more advanced translation, see {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Advanced customization==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ver também==

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7igg33b7i4z9ts1oga4b4j1hwni905c</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402353</id>
      <parentid>5402351</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:37:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="30026" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define a barra de navegação, a qual provê enlaces à maioria dos lugares na wiki e fornece aos administradores do lugar um lugar para adicionar uma colecção constante de enlaces. Por exemplo, a maioria das wikis enlaçarão à página de discussão de sua comunidade e a algumas ferramentas úteis.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Os [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook e Vetor colocam a barra de navegação acima à esquerda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto à barra de busca e à caixa de ferramentas, mas a localização pode ser diferente em outros skins. Varra-a lateral oculta-se '''  aos utentes do lugar [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This sidebar is '''not shown to users of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]] site''' (i.e. the version of the site produced by {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}) - use the {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} hook for that).&lt;/span&gt;

==Personalizar varra-a lateral==
Para personalizar a [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] numa wiki, você primeiro precisa estar registado com um utente que tenha a permissão ''editinterface'' - Isto está habilitado por defeito para os administradores.&lt;ref&gt;
(Para informação sobre atribuir uma permissão a grupos ou utentes, ver {{ll|Manual:User rights}}.)

Depois, use um enlace a uma página em sua wiki, mas substitua o título de sua página wiki (e.g. Main_Page) na URL/varra de direcções com &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Sidebar&lt;/code&gt; e carregue essa página - Você deveria ver agora o conteúdo da varra lateral. (Você pode usar a sintaxe ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit'' se você utiliza URLs longas.)

Se o conteúdo de varra-a lateral já tem sido modificado, você simplesmente pode dar clique sobre o enlace ''Edit'' ou ''Edit source'', de outra forma você poderia precisar criar primeiro a página dando clique em ''Create'' ou ''Create source''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A seguir mostra-se um código de exemplo para uma varra lateral:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This example will result in the following sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Se você tem que criar uma nova página, apresentar-se-lhe-á o conteúdo por defeito da varra lateral no editor. Para criar exitosamente uma página MediaWiki:Sidebar, precisa mudar o conteúdo dantes de salvar.}} 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Splitting the navigation bar into new sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;
A barra de navegação pode estar dividida em secções, a cada uma com seu próprio encabeçado.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is done by adding one asterisk.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The heading for each section is taken from the first-level list element (&quot;navigation&quot; and &quot;new heading&quot; in the example above).&lt;/span&gt;
Se este texto corresponde ao nome de uma mensagem da interface (Uma página existente nesse título na MediaWiki namespace), então o texto dessa página é usado como uma etiqueta; caso contrário, o título do encabeçado utiliza-se tal qual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Creating links in the sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objectivo
: O enlace objectivo pode ser o nome de uma mensagem de interface (uma página no MediaWiki namespace) ou uma página wiki, ou um enlace externo. Em qualquer caso, o [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|link]] pode ser interno, interwiki ou externo.&lt;ref&gt;
Em alguns casos (tais como enlaces com o carácter &quot;&amp;&quot;), uma mensagem de interface é necessário. O enlace objectivo não pode ser dependente da linguagem da interface configurada nas preferências.
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Chamar o texto objectivo.
:#  Se há um existente ou uma mensagem de interface por defeito com esse nome, use o conteúdo dessa mensagem em vez do texto objectivo.
:# Se a saída do passo anterior é uma URL valida (começando com http:// ou outro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), o enlace apontará a essa URL.
:# se não, tratar-se-á como o enlace objectivo de um wikilink (enlaçando a esse nome de página ou interwiki). 
:# Em caso que termine enlaçando a '-', toda a entrada é removida da varra lateral (isso é útil para remover uma entrada em todas as linguagens ao mudar a mensagem que tem o enlace).
Exemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;usa o texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url|MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (o qual contém &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&lt;/span&gt; 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[Special:RecentChanges]], since there is no interface message of that name and that is not a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] for the same reason.&lt;/span&gt;

; enlace de texto
: O enlace de texto pode ser o mesmo de uma mensagem de interface (página no the MediaWiki namespace) ou texto plano. 
:* Se o enlace de texto é o nome de uma mensagem de interface existente ou por defeito, o conteúdo dessa mensagem será usada. Mediawiki verificará as versões localizadas; por exemplo, se a linguagem actual é fr (Frances) e o enlace de texto é a mensagem de interface &quot;fórum&quot;, este verificará &quot;fórum/fr&quot; dantes de usar &quot;fórum&quot;.
:* Em qualquer caso, o enlace de texto é usado como destino. 
:* Note que o enlace de texto '''não''' é opcional como os enlaces numa wiki normal. Se falta o enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;o elemento ignora-se&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: The link text can be the name of an interface message (page in the MediaWiki namespace) or plain text.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

Exemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Ordem dos elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduções ==

Você pode traduzir as correntes, a qual você usa, editando as páginas de acordo ao namespace na MediaWiki .

'''Exemplo:''' A corrente, a qual substituirá o elemento chamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, é tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/mudar este texto para os utentes, quem despliegan seu wiki em Alemão, pode colocar o texto de acordo à página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

Dessa maneira você pode facilmente traduzir esses textos através da interface da MediaWiki.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Please note''' that MediaWiki will by default use the content of the Sidebar page in ''that'' language, which corresponds to the default language of your wiki. So, if your wiki e.g. uses French as its default language, edit [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] in order to show a modified sidebar to all users, who have not changed their language setting and to all anonymous users.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more advanced translation, see {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Advanced customization==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ver também==

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9p55gcbj7o66uaowpf7t02pjyav9nkh</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402355</id>
      <parentid>5402353</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:37:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29986" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define a barra de navegação, a qual provê enlaces à maioria dos lugares na wiki e fornece aos administradores do lugar um lugar para adicionar uma colecção constante de enlaces. Por exemplo, a maioria das wikis enlaçarão à página de discussão de sua comunidade e a algumas ferramentas úteis.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Os [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook e Vetor colocam a barra de navegação acima à esquerda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto à barra de busca e à caixa de ferramentas, mas a localização pode ser diferente em outros skins. Varra-a lateral oculta-se '''  aos utentes do lugar [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This sidebar is '''not shown to users of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]] site''' (i.e. the version of the site produced by {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}) - use the {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} hook for that).&lt;/span&gt;

==Personalizar varra-a lateral==
Para personalizar a [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] numa wiki, você primeiro precisa estar registado com um utente que tenha a permissão ''editinterface'' - Isto está habilitado por defeito para os administradores.&lt;ref&gt;
(Para informação sobre atribuir uma permissão a grupos ou utentes, ver {{ll|Manual:User rights}}.)

Depois, use um enlace a uma página em sua wiki, mas substitua o título de sua página wiki (e.g. Main_Page) na URL/varra de direcções com &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Sidebar&lt;/code&gt; e carregue essa página - Você deveria ver agora o conteúdo da varra lateral. (Você pode usar a sintaxe ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit'' se você utiliza URLs longas.)

Se o conteúdo de varra-a lateral já tem sido modificado, você simplesmente pode dar clique sobre o enlace ''Edit'' ou ''Edit source'', de outra forma você poderia precisar criar primeiro a página dando clique em ''Create'' ou ''Create source''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A seguir mostra-se um código de exemplo para uma varra lateral:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This example will result in the following sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Se você tem que criar uma nova página, apresentar-se-lhe-á o conteúdo por defeito da varra lateral no editor. Para criar exitosamente uma página MediaWiki:Sidebar, precisa mudar o conteúdo dantes de salvar.}} 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Splitting the navigation bar into new sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;
A barra de navegação pode estar dividida em secções, a cada uma com seu próprio encabeçado.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is done by adding one asterisk.&lt;/span&gt;

O encabeçado para a cada secção é tomado desde a lista de elementos do primeiro nível (&quot;navigation&quot; e &quot;new heading&quot; no exemplo de acima).
Se este texto corresponde ao nome de uma mensagem da interface (Uma página existente nesse título na MediaWiki namespace), então o texto dessa página é usado como uma etiqueta; caso contrário, o título do encabeçado utiliza-se tal qual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Creating links in the sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objectivo
: O enlace objectivo pode ser o nome de uma mensagem de interface (uma página no MediaWiki namespace) ou uma página wiki, ou um enlace externo. Em qualquer caso, o [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|link]] pode ser interno, interwiki ou externo.&lt;ref&gt;
Em alguns casos (tais como enlaces com o carácter &quot;&amp;&quot;), uma mensagem de interface é necessário. O enlace objectivo não pode ser dependente da linguagem da interface configurada nas preferências.
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Chamar o texto objectivo.
:#  Se há um existente ou uma mensagem de interface por defeito com esse nome, use o conteúdo dessa mensagem em vez do texto objectivo.
:# Se a saída do passo anterior é uma URL valida (começando com http:// ou outro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), o enlace apontará a essa URL.
:# se não, tratar-se-á como o enlace objectivo de um wikilink (enlaçando a esse nome de página ou interwiki). 
:# Em caso que termine enlaçando a '-', toda a entrada é removida da varra lateral (isso é útil para remover uma entrada em todas as linguagens ao mudar a mensagem que tem o enlace).
Exemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;usa o texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url|MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (o qual contém &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&lt;/span&gt; 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[Special:RecentChanges]], since there is no interface message of that name and that is not a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] for the same reason.&lt;/span&gt;

; enlace de texto
: O enlace de texto pode ser o mesmo de uma mensagem de interface (página no the MediaWiki namespace) ou texto plano. 
:* Se o enlace de texto é o nome de uma mensagem de interface existente ou por defeito, o conteúdo dessa mensagem será usada. Mediawiki verificará as versões localizadas; por exemplo, se a linguagem actual é fr (Frances) e o enlace de texto é a mensagem de interface &quot;fórum&quot;, este verificará &quot;fórum/fr&quot; dantes de usar &quot;fórum&quot;.
:* Em qualquer caso, o enlace de texto é usado como destino. 
:* Note que o enlace de texto '''não''' é opcional como os enlaces numa wiki normal. Se falta o enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;o elemento ignora-se&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: The link text can be the name of an interface message (page in the MediaWiki namespace) or plain text.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

Exemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Ordem dos elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduções ==

Você pode traduzir as correntes, a qual você usa, editando as páginas de acordo ao namespace na MediaWiki .

'''Exemplo:''' A corrente, a qual substituirá o elemento chamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, é tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/mudar este texto para os utentes, quem despliegan seu wiki em Alemão, pode colocar o texto de acordo à página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

Dessa maneira você pode facilmente traduzir esses textos através da interface da MediaWiki.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Please note''' that MediaWiki will by default use the content of the Sidebar page in ''that'' language, which corresponds to the default language of your wiki. So, if your wiki e.g. uses French as its default language, edit [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] in order to show a modified sidebar to all users, who have not changed their language setting and to all anonymous users.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more advanced translation, see {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Advanced customization==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ver também==

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>lb3qf7rnca6ybuewj15ph33vbp22ks9</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402357</id>
      <parentid>5402355</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:37:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29927" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define a barra de navegação, a qual provê enlaces à maioria dos lugares na wiki e fornece aos administradores do lugar um lugar para adicionar uma colecção constante de enlaces. Por exemplo, a maioria das wikis enlaçarão à página de discussão de sua comunidade e a algumas ferramentas úteis.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Os [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook e Vetor colocam a barra de navegação acima à esquerda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto à barra de busca e à caixa de ferramentas, mas a localização pode ser diferente em outros skins. Varra-a lateral oculta-se '''  aos utentes do lugar [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This sidebar is '''not shown to users of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]] site''' (i.e. the version of the site produced by {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}) - use the {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} hook for that).&lt;/span&gt;

==Personalizar varra-a lateral==
Para personalizar a [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] numa wiki, você primeiro precisa estar registado com um utente que tenha a permissão ''editinterface'' - Isto está habilitado por defeito para os administradores.&lt;ref&gt;
(Para informação sobre atribuir uma permissão a grupos ou utentes, ver {{ll|Manual:User rights}}.)

Depois, use um enlace a uma página em sua wiki, mas substitua o título de sua página wiki (e.g. Main_Page) na URL/varra de direcções com &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Sidebar&lt;/code&gt; e carregue essa página - Você deveria ver agora o conteúdo da varra lateral. (Você pode usar a sintaxe ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit'' se você utiliza URLs longas.)

Se o conteúdo de varra-a lateral já tem sido modificado, você simplesmente pode dar clique sobre o enlace ''Edit'' ou ''Edit source'', de outra forma você poderia precisar criar primeiro a página dando clique em ''Create'' ou ''Create source''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A seguir mostra-se um código de exemplo para uma varra lateral:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This example will result in the following sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Se você tem que criar uma nova página, apresentar-se-lhe-á o conteúdo por defeito da varra lateral no editor. Para criar exitosamente uma página MediaWiki:Sidebar, precisa mudar o conteúdo dantes de salvar.}} 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Splitting the navigation bar into new sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;
A barra de navegação pode estar dividida em secções, a cada uma com seu próprio encabeçado.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is done by adding one asterisk.&lt;/span&gt;

O encabeçado para a cada secção é tomado desde a lista de elementos do primeiro nível (&quot;navigation&quot; e &quot;new heading&quot; no exemplo de acima).
Se este texto corresponde ao nome de uma mensagem da interface (Uma página existente nesse título na MediaWiki namespace), então o texto dessa página é usado como uma etiqueta; caso contrário, o título do encabeçado utiliza-se tal qual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Creating links in the sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objectivo
: O enlace objectivo pode ser o nome de uma mensagem de interface (uma página no MediaWiki namespace) ou uma página wiki, ou um enlace externo. Em qualquer caso, o [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|link]] pode ser interno, interwiki ou externo.&lt;ref&gt;
Em alguns casos (tais como enlaces com o carácter &quot;&amp;&quot;), uma mensagem de interface é necessário. O enlace objectivo não pode ser dependente da linguagem da interface configurada nas preferências.
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Chamar o texto objectivo.
:#  Se há um existente ou uma mensagem de interface por defeito com esse nome, use o conteúdo dessa mensagem em vez do texto objectivo.
:# Se a saída do passo anterior é uma URL valida (começando com http:// ou outro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), o enlace apontará a essa URL.
:# se não, tratar-se-á como o enlace objectivo de um wikilink (enlaçando a esse nome de página ou interwiki). 
:# Em caso que termine enlaçando a '-', toda a entrada é removida da varra lateral (isso é útil para remover uma entrada em todas as linguagens ao mudar a mensagem que tem o enlace).
Exemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; usa o texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (o qual contém &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&quot;) 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[Special:RecentChanges]], since there is no interface message of that name and that is not a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] for the same reason.&lt;/span&gt;

; enlace de texto
: O enlace de texto pode ser o mesmo de uma mensagem de interface (página no the MediaWiki namespace) ou texto plano. 
:* Se o enlace de texto é o nome de uma mensagem de interface existente ou por defeito, o conteúdo dessa mensagem será usada. Mediawiki verificará as versões localizadas; por exemplo, se a linguagem actual é fr (Frances) e o enlace de texto é a mensagem de interface &quot;fórum&quot;, este verificará &quot;fórum/fr&quot; dantes de usar &quot;fórum&quot;.
:* Em qualquer caso, o enlace de texto é usado como destino. 
:* Note que o enlace de texto '''não''' é opcional como os enlaces numa wiki normal. Se falta o enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;o elemento ignora-se&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: The link text can be the name of an interface message (page in the MediaWiki namespace) or plain text.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

Exemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Ordem dos elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduções ==

Você pode traduzir as correntes, a qual você usa, editando as páginas de acordo ao namespace na MediaWiki .

'''Exemplo:''' A corrente, a qual substituirá o elemento chamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, é tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/mudar este texto para os utentes, quem despliegan seu wiki em Alemão, pode colocar o texto de acordo à página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

Dessa maneira você pode facilmente traduzir esses textos através da interface da MediaWiki.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Please note''' that MediaWiki will by default use the content of the Sidebar page in ''that'' language, which corresponds to the default language of your wiki. So, if your wiki e.g. uses French as its default language, edit [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] in order to show a modified sidebar to all users, who have not changed their language setting and to all anonymous users.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more advanced translation, see {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Advanced customization==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ver também==

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>cveler828onv7u6qos5dktdwqandouq</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402365</id>
      <parentid>5402357</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:44:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29794" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define a barra de navegação, a qual provê enlaces à maioria dos lugares na wiki e fornece aos administradores do lugar um lugar para adicionar uma colecção constante de enlaces. Por exemplo, a maioria das wikis enlaçarão à página de discussão de sua comunidade e a algumas ferramentas úteis.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

Os [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook e Vetor colocam a barra de navegação acima à esquerda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto à barra de busca e à caixa de ferramentas, mas a localização pode ser diferente em outros skins.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This sidebar is '''not shown to users of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|Mobile]] site''' (i.e. the version of the site produced by {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}) - use the {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} hook for that).&lt;/span&gt;

==Personalizar varra-a lateral==
Para personalizar a [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] numa wiki, você primeiro precisa estar registado com um utente que tenha a permissão ''editinterface'' - Isto está habilitado por defeito para os administradores.&lt;ref&gt;
(Para informação sobre atribuir uma permissão a grupos ou utentes, ver {{ll|Manual:User rights}}.)

Depois, use um enlace a uma página em sua wiki, mas substitua o título de sua página wiki (e.g. Main_Page) na URL/varra de direcções com &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Sidebar&lt;/code&gt; e carregue essa página - Você deveria ver agora o conteúdo da varra lateral. (Você pode usar a sintaxe ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit'' se você utiliza URLs longas.)

Se o conteúdo de varra-a lateral já tem sido modificado, você simplesmente pode dar clique sobre o enlace ''Edit'' ou ''Edit source'', de outra forma você poderia precisar criar primeiro a página dando clique em ''Create'' ou ''Create source''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
A seguir mostra-se um código de exemplo para uma varra lateral:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This example will result in the following sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sidebar example&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Se você tem que criar uma nova página, apresentar-se-lhe-á o conteúdo por defeito da varra lateral no editor. Para criar exitosamente uma página MediaWiki:Sidebar, precisa mudar o conteúdo dantes de salvar.}} 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Splitting the navigation bar into new sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;
A barra de navegação pode estar dividida em secções, a cada uma com seu próprio encabeçado.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is done by adding one asterisk.&lt;/span&gt;

O encabeçado para a cada secção é tomado desde a lista de elementos do primeiro nível (&quot;navigation&quot; e &quot;new heading&quot; no exemplo de acima).
Se este texto corresponde ao nome de uma mensagem da interface (Uma página existente nesse título na MediaWiki namespace), então o texto dessa página é usado como uma etiqueta; caso contrário, o título do encabeçado utiliza-se tal qual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Creating links in the sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objectivo
: O enlace objectivo pode ser o nome de uma mensagem de interface (uma página no MediaWiki namespace) ou uma página wiki, ou um enlace externo. Em qualquer caso, o [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|link]] pode ser interno, interwiki ou externo.&lt;ref&gt;
Em alguns casos (tais como enlaces com o carácter &quot;&amp;&quot;), uma mensagem de interface é necessário. O enlace objectivo não pode ser dependente da linguagem da interface configurada nas preferências.
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Chamar o texto objectivo.
:#  Se há um existente ou uma mensagem de interface por defeito com esse nome, use o conteúdo dessa mensagem em vez do texto objectivo.
:# Se a saída do passo anterior é uma URL valida (começando com http:// ou outro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), o enlace apontará a essa URL.
:# se não, tratar-se-á como o enlace objectivo de um wikilink (enlaçando a esse nome de página ou interwiki). 
:# Em caso que termine enlaçando a '-', toda a entrada é removida da varra lateral (isso é útil para remover uma entrada em todas as linguagens ao mudar a mensagem que tem o enlace).
Exemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; usa o texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (o qual contém &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&quot;) 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[Special:RecentChanges]], since there is no interface message of that name and that is not a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] for the same reason.&lt;/span&gt;

; enlace de texto
: O enlace de texto pode ser o mesmo de uma mensagem de interface (página no the MediaWiki namespace) ou texto plano. 
:* Se o enlace de texto é o nome de uma mensagem de interface existente ou por defeito, o conteúdo dessa mensagem será usada. Mediawiki verificará as versões localizadas; por exemplo, se a linguagem actual é fr (Frances) e o enlace de texto é a mensagem de interface &quot;fórum&quot;, este verificará &quot;fórum/fr&quot; dantes de usar &quot;fórum&quot;.
:* Em qualquer caso, o enlace de texto é usado como destino. 
:* Note que o enlace de texto '''não''' é opcional como os enlaces numa wiki normal. Se falta o enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;o elemento ignora-se&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: The link text can be the name of an interface message (page in the MediaWiki namespace) or plain text.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

Exemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Ordem dos elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traduções ==

Você pode traduzir as correntes, a qual você usa, editando as páginas de acordo ao namespace na MediaWiki .

'''Exemplo:''' A corrente, a qual substituirá o elemento chamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, é tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/mudar este texto para os utentes, quem despliegan seu wiki em Alemão, pode colocar o texto de acordo à página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

Dessa maneira você pode facilmente traduzir esses textos através da interface da MediaWiki.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Please note''' that MediaWiki will by default use the content of the Sidebar page in ''that'' language, which corresponds to the default language of your wiki. So, if your wiki e.g. uses French as its default language, edit [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] in order to show a modified sidebar to all users, who have not changed their language setting and to all anonymous users.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more advanced translation, see {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Advanced customization==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Ver também==

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>qehiwqm98wc89m2o806yumzyp6u6abs</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/ca</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>691397</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402278</id>
      <parentid>2490104</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:04:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="33" xml:space="preserve">Per a més informació, vegeu $1.</text>
      <sha1>cf7f5g3dgk3va12jusabibcta9npiwu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Editor/pl</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>691442</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402695</id>
      <parentid>5370849</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8204" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Być może szukasz:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Current ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Current editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
!Narzędzie do edycji
!Zrzut ekranu
!Rok
!Platforma
!Uwagi
|-
|domyślny edytor w MediaWiki, który jest stworzony przez znacznik HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu HTML textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Komputery stacjonarne i urządzenia mobilne
|Nie ma w nim paska narzędzi. Taki edytor będzie widoczny gdy wyłączono obsługę JavaScript lub wyłączono ustawienie &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; w [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Rozszerzenie:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu WikiEditora|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Komputery stacjonarne
|Jest on dostępny po włączeniu &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; w [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Edytor wizualny]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu edytora wizualnego|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Komputery stacjonarne i urządzenia mobilne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[w:Formatted text|rich-text]] [[w:WYSIWYG|WYSIWYG]] editing system&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Edytor wikitekstu 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu wbudowanego w edytor wizualny trybu edycji wikikodu|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Komputery stacjonarne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Proofread Page&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Komputery stacjonarne
|Wykorzystywany na [[S:|Wikiźródłach]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|WikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu WikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Komputery stacjonarne
|Edytor wikikodu całkowicie rozwijany przez wolontariuszy. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is generally run as a gadget or user script, but it is run as an extension on some non-Wikimedia wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;CodeEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the code editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Komputery stacjonarne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is used for editing JavaScript and other code pages.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}'s wikitext editor&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of wikitext editing on Mobile Web&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Urządzenia mobilne
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Tłumaczenie treści]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of ContentTranslation's editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Komputery stacjonarne
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Flow]] &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(previously known as Flow)&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of a comment and the beginning of a reply to it in Structured Discussions&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Komputery stacjonarne i urządzenia mobilne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Structured Discussions supports wikitext and visual modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Edytor w aplikacji na [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Android FAQ|Android]]a&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the editing interface on an Android phone&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Urządzenia mobilne
|
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Edytor w aplikacji na [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the editing interface on an iPhone&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Urządzenia mobilne
|
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]] editor&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Komputery stacjonarne
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikivoyage Listing Editor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Komputery stacjonarne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specialized JavaScript-based editing tool for inserting one of several templates at Wikivoyage&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Former ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Former editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
|-
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing tool&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Year&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Platform&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notes&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 2006 JavaScript &quot;classic&quot; editor, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of 2006 wikitext editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Komputery stacjonarne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This was seen when the &quot;showtoolbar&quot; preference was enabled from 2006–2010. After then, it was only shown for users who disabled the &quot;enhanced-toolbar&quot; (2010 editor) preference. This editor was [[phab:T30856|removed]] in [[MediaWiki 1.32]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A similar toolbar is available as a volunteer-supported local gadget at some wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MobileFrontend's original wikitext editor&lt;/span&gt;
|
|2012–2014
|Urządzenia mobilne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This was a mobile-specific set of modifications to the 2003 desktop wikitext editor. No longer deployed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|}

== Zobacz też ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>1j3cawh9uz6sd3haw32lxytciffi9r4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402701</id>
      <parentid>5402695</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:05:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8164" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Być może szukasz:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Current ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Current editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
!Narzędzie do edycji
!Zrzut ekranu
!Rok
!Platforma
!Uwagi
|-
|domyślny edytor w MediaWiki, który jest stworzony przez znacznik HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu HTML textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Komputery stacjonarne i urządzenia mobilne
|Nie ma w nim paska narzędzi. Taki edytor będzie widoczny gdy wyłączono obsługę JavaScript lub wyłączono ustawienie &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; w [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Rozszerzenie:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu WikiEditora|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Komputery stacjonarne
|Jest on dostępny po włączeniu &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; w [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Edytor wizualny]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu edytora wizualnego|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Komputery stacjonarne i urządzenia mobilne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[w:Formatted text|rich-text]] [[w:WYSIWYG|WYSIWYG]] editing system&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Edytor wikitekstu 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu wbudowanego w edytor wizualny trybu edycji wikikodu|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Komputery stacjonarne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Proofread Page&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Komputery stacjonarne
|Wykorzystywany na [[S:|Wikiźródłach]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|WikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu WikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Komputery stacjonarne
|Edytor wikikodu całkowicie rozwijany przez wolontariuszy. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is generally run as a gadget or user script, but it is run as an extension on some non-Wikimedia wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;CodeEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the code editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Komputery stacjonarne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is used for editing JavaScript and other code pages.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}'s wikitext editor&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of wikitext editing on Mobile Web&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Urządzenia mobilne
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Tłumaczenie treści]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of ContentTranslation's editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Komputery stacjonarne
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Flow]] &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(previously known as Flow)&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of a comment and the beginning of a reply to it in Structured Discussions&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Komputery stacjonarne i urządzenia mobilne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Structured Discussions supports wikitext and visual modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Edytor w aplikacji na [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Android FAQ|Android]]a&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the editing interface on an Android phone&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Urządzenia mobilne
|
|-
|Edytor w aplikacji na [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the editing interface on an iPhone&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Urządzenia mobilne
|
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]] editor&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Komputery stacjonarne
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikivoyage Listing Editor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Komputery stacjonarne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specialized JavaScript-based editing tool for inserting one of several templates at Wikivoyage&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Former ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Former editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
|-
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing tool&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Year&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Platform&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notes&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 2006 JavaScript &quot;classic&quot; editor, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of 2006 wikitext editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Komputery stacjonarne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This was seen when the &quot;showtoolbar&quot; preference was enabled from 2006–2010. After then, it was only shown for users who disabled the &quot;enhanced-toolbar&quot; (2010 editor) preference. This editor was [[phab:T30856|removed]] in [[MediaWiki 1.32]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A similar toolbar is available as a volunteer-supported local gadget at some wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MobileFrontend's original wikitext editor&lt;/span&gt;
|
|2012–2014
|Urządzenia mobilne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This was a mobile-specific set of modifications to the 2003 desktop wikitext editor. No longer deployed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|}

== Zobacz też ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>50207q63k3dbnqutgyremraxeljphbz</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402723</id>
      <parentid>5402701</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:08:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8124" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Być może szukasz:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Current ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Current editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
!Narzędzie do edycji
!Zrzut ekranu
!Rok
!Platforma
!Uwagi
|-
|domyślny edytor w MediaWiki, który jest stworzony przez znacznik HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu HTML textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Komputery stacjonarne i urządzenia mobilne
|Nie ma w nim paska narzędzi. Taki edytor będzie widoczny gdy wyłączono obsługę JavaScript lub wyłączono ustawienie &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; w [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Rozszerzenie:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu WikiEditora|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Komputery stacjonarne
|Jest on dostępny po włączeniu &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; w [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Edytor wizualny]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu edytora wizualnego|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Komputery stacjonarne i urządzenia mobilne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[w:Formatted text|rich-text]] [[w:WYSIWYG|WYSIWYG]] editing system&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Edytor wikitekstu 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu wbudowanego w edytor wizualny trybu edycji wikikodu|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Komputery stacjonarne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Proofread Page&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Komputery stacjonarne
|Wykorzystywany na [[S:|Wikiźródłach]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|WikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu WikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Komputery stacjonarne
|Edytor wikikodu całkowicie rozwijany przez wolontariuszy. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is generally run as a gadget or user script, but it is run as an extension on some non-Wikimedia wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;CodeEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the code editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Komputery stacjonarne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is used for editing JavaScript and other code pages.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}'s wikitext editor&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of wikitext editing on Mobile Web&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Urządzenia mobilne
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Tłumaczenie treści]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of ContentTranslation's editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Komputery stacjonarne
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Flow]] &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(previously known as Flow)&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of a comment and the beginning of a reply to it in Structured Discussions&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Komputery stacjonarne i urządzenia mobilne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Structured Discussions supports wikitext and visual modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|Edytor w aplikacji na [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Android FAQ|Android]]a
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the editing interface on an Android phone&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Urządzenia mobilne
|
|-
|Edytor w aplikacji na [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the editing interface on an iPhone&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Urządzenia mobilne
|
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]] editor&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Komputery stacjonarne
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikivoyage Listing Editor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Komputery stacjonarne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specialized JavaScript-based editing tool for inserting one of several templates at Wikivoyage&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Former ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Former editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
|-
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing tool&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Year&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Platform&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notes&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 2006 JavaScript &quot;classic&quot; editor, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of 2006 wikitext editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Komputery stacjonarne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This was seen when the &quot;showtoolbar&quot; preference was enabled from 2006–2010. After then, it was only shown for users who disabled the &quot;enhanced-toolbar&quot; (2010 editor) preference. This editor was [[phab:T30856|removed]] in [[MediaWiki 1.32]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A similar toolbar is available as a volunteer-supported local gadget at some wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MobileFrontend's original wikitext editor&lt;/span&gt;
|
|2012–2014
|Urządzenia mobilne
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This was a mobile-specific set of modifications to the 2003 desktop wikitext editor. No longer deployed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|}

== Zobacz też ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>lyuqilnojxqwsljeehrgjchpwd244bj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/63/pl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>691497</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402722</id>
      <parentid>2490374</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:08:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="37" xml:space="preserve">Edytor w aplikacji na [[$1|Android]]a</text>
      <sha1>s687kqgnwkeq65by9xuhoyonogvr6my</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/67/pl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>691499</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402700</id>
      <parentid>2490377</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:05:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="32" xml:space="preserve">Edytor w aplikacji na [[$1|iOS]]</text>
      <sha1>18i4mm4ca7gufng08nhcdk5yfoc84ug</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/ko</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>694283</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402617</id>
      <parentid>4578053</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3828" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions (formerly known as Flow) are [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|a project]] of the Collaboration team at the Wikimedia Foundation to build a modern discussion and collaboration system for Wikimedia projects.
&lt;/div&gt;

== 둘러보기 ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How Structured Discussions look - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Try it!]]&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There is some specific terms concerning Structured Discussions. They have been defined in '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|the Glossary]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

== 고급 도구 ==

특정 목적을 위해 일부 고급 도구를 사용할 수 있습니다. 그들은 다음과 같은 주제로 재편성되었습니다:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=활성화}}
:문서에서 구조적 토론이 활성화되면 어떻게됩니까?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=주제}}
:주제 걸러내기, 주제/메세지 만들기, 주제 요약하기, 주제 해결하기
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Permalinks&lt;/span&gt;}}
:주제에 대한 링크를 만드는 방법
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=알림과 주시목록}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=역사}}
:역사 시스템의 작동 방식
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=관리}}
:숨기기, 삭제, 여러가지 주제들을 다룬 주제들
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading contents on a new Structured Discussions conversation&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=바로가기}}
:시각편집기에서 사용할 키보드 단축키.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All documentation on one page.&lt;/span&gt;}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>c5nog0c69n34192wdziec9cpcdvf38o</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>694372</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402292</id>
      <parentid>2497329</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:05:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="33" xml:space="preserve">Voir $1 pour plus d'informations.</text>
      <sha1>39bw3pe536hlbldx7a0bho82fn4xyyt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/31/ca</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>694758</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402675</id>
      <parentid>2613258</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:01:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="74" xml:space="preserve">Vegeu també: [[$summarize|Resumir un tema i marcar com a resolt un tema]]</text>
      <sha1>jr2afzi3momdx9710ulk9lpdvptuf7p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/45/ca</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>694776</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402655</id>
      <parentid>2613431</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:51:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="71" xml:space="preserve">Vegeu també: [[$Topics|Resumir un tema i marcar com a resolt un tema]]</text>
      <sha1>g5wil4s7w2bg7e7hady62afl4w99hwb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/ast</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>699481</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402603</id>
      <parentid>4578041</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3464" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Los Alderiques Estructuraos (antes llamaos Flow) son [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|un proyectu]] del Equipu de collaboración de la Fundación Wikimedia pa construir un sistema modernu d'alderique y collaboración pa los proyectos de Wikimedia.

== Visita aína ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Cómo se ve Flow - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|¡Prueba!]]&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Flow/ast/Quick tour|Descubre n'una páxina por qué creamos Flow, y cómo usalu]]''': edición básica, unviar una respuesta (al alderique global o a una persona determinada d'una conversación global), crear un alderique, siguir un asuntu o un tableru enteru, recibir avisos y restolar y archivar asuntos.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Hay dellos términos específicos no tocante a Flow. Los mesmos tán definíos '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|nel Glosariu]]'''.

¿Nun te funciona Flow? Por favor, comprueba '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|si puedes resolver esi problema]]'''.

== Ferramientes avanzaes ==

Delles ferramientes avanzaes tán disponibles pa propósitos específicos. Tán reagrupaes nestes temes:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Activación}}
:¿Qué asocede cuando Flow s'activa n'una páxina?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Asuntos}}
:Filtriar asuntos, Editar un asuntu/mensaxe, Resumir un asuntu, Resolver un asuntu
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Enllaces permanentes}}
:Cómo crear enllaces a temes
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Avisos y llista de siguimientu}}
:Los avisos que recibes y les distintes entraes nes llistes de sigimientu
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Historial}}
:Cómo funciona'l sistema del historial
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Alministración}}
:Anubrir, Desaniciar, Suprimir asuntos
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Precargar}}
:Precargar el conteníu d'una nueva conversación de Flow
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Atayos}}
:Atayos de tecláu pa utilizar nel mou d'edición visual.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Tola documentación n'una páxina.}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>b39ai4alig8quw5ux1dy17f33lxyfqc</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402633</id>
      <parentid>5402603</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3289" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Los Alderiques Estructuraos (antes llamaos Flow) son [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|un proyectu]] del Equipu de collaboración de la Fundación Wikimedia pa construir un sistema modernu d'alderique y collaboración pa los proyectos de Wikimedia.

== Visita aína ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Cómo se ve Flow - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|¡Prueba!]]&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Hay dellos términos específicos no tocante a Flow. Los mesmos tán definíos '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|nel Glosariu]]'''.

¿Nun te funciona Flow? Por favor, comprueba '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|si puedes resolver esi problema]]'''.

== Ferramientes avanzaes ==

Delles ferramientes avanzaes tán disponibles pa propósitos específicos. Tán reagrupaes nestes temes:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Activación}}
:¿Qué asocede cuando Flow s'activa n'una páxina?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Asuntos}}
:Filtriar asuntos, Editar un asuntu/mensaxe, Resumir un asuntu, Resolver un asuntu
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Enllaces permanentes}}
:Cómo crear enllaces a temes
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Avisos y llista de siguimientu}}
:Los avisos que recibes y les distintes entraes nes llistes de sigimientu
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Historial}}
:Cómo funciona'l sistema del historial
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Alministración}}
:Anubrir, Desaniciar, Suprimir asuntos
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Precargar}}
:Precargar el conteníu d'una nueva conversación de Flow
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Atayos}}
:Atayos de tecláu pa utilizar nel mou d'edición visual.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Tola documentación n'una páxina.}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>cipz6py4dqychi3gwp60yh7md6r7gxg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Page Previews/pt-br</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>700635</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402117</id>
      <parentid>5390117</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:16:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="34493" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
A ferramenta de '''Pré-visualizações de Página''' resolve o núcleo do problema de usuários precisando abrir abas múltiplas para conseguir entender uma palavra ou conceito dado o contexto do assunto que eles estão lendo.
Com Pré-visualizações de Página, sempre que um leitor passar o mouse em cima de uma ligação para outro artigo, um pequeno resumo do assunto e uma imagem (se disponível) é mostrada.
O usuário pode então decidir se deseja ler mais profundamente sobre aquele assunto antes de continuar com o artigo atual.
Uma descrição completa da funcionalidade de Pré-visualizações de Página pode ser encontrada [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|aqui]].
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Uma visão geral sobre toda a documentação técnica relacionada é fornecida [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ neste post de blog] a partir de maio de 2018.&lt;/span&gt;

O recurso '''Pré-visualizações de Referência''' é um projeto relacionado. Ele mostra uma prévia de uma nota de rodapé sempre que um leitor passar por cima de seu marcador de nota de rodapé. Uma descrição desse recurso pode ser encontrada [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|na sua página de projeto]].

== Introdução ==
As Pré-visualizações de Página são desenhadas para reduzir o custo de exploração de uma ligação, assim como para promover o aprendizado deixando leitores ganharem contexto sobre o artigo que estão lendo ou para definir um termo, objeto, evento ou ideia que não conhecem sem navegar longe do tópico original.
Para leitores casuais, Pré-visualizações de Página vão fazer ser mais fácil para usuários conseguir uma olhada rápida de um artigo antes de decidir se vão ou não pesquisar sobre ele.
Usuários interessados em ler um artigo inteiro não serão distraídos ou desencorajados em ver conceitos desconhecidos - eles podem simplesmente ter uma prévia do conceito sem navegar para uma página nova.
Consequentemente, a sutileza da experiência do usuário para esses usuários será aumentada.

Houveram vários pedidos ao longo dos anos por um recurso semelhante; existem também extensões (veja a [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|lista]]) e um ''gadget'' muito usado (os [[:pt:WP:POP|''Popups'' de navegação]]) que solucionam o problema.
Pré-visualizações de Página foram construídas pela primeira vez como uma funcionalidade beta em 2014 (chamada de Cartões Flutuantes) e têm sido nossa ferramenta mais popular em termos de adoção, feedback de usuários e impacto no uso.
Na [[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|primeira discussão sobre Cartões Flutuantes]], no período de 2 anos, vários problemas entre todos os projetos foram identificados e resolvidos.
O equivalente móvel de Pré-visualizações de Página, implementado no app para Android [[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|em setembro de 2015]], resultou num crescimento de 20% em ligações clicadas por página.

O [[$configurações|painel de configurações]] das Pré-visualizações de Página permite que usuários anônimos ativem ou desativem o recurso baseado em suas preferências.
Usuários logados podem ativar ou desativar Pré-visualizações de Página pela seção de Aparência em Especial:Preferências.
Se os pop-ups de navegação e Pré-visualizações de Página estiverem ativos ao mesmo tempo (normalmente, para usuários logados que optaram via funcionalidade beta), pop-ups de navegação tomam precedência.
Para ativar Pré-visualizações de Página, pop-ups de navegação hão de estar desativados.

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|Exemplo de uma Pré-visualização de Página]]

== Design ==

Para cada iteração das Pré-visualizações de Página, cada prévia possuirá o seguinte:
* Uma porção do primeiro parágrafo do artigo;
* Uma imagem (se disponível) do artigo. Imagens aparecem na horizontal ou na vertical dependendo da localização da ligação dentro do artigo; e
* Uma engrenagem que permite o usuário ativar ou desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em grego.
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em chinês.
File:Hovercard english.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em inglês.
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Example of Page Previews in Chinese
File:Hovercard english.png|Example of Page Previews in English
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== Principais diferenças em comparação aos ''Popups'' de Navegação ===

* Os ''popups'' de navegação são para usuários experientes, e possuem muitos recursos irrelevantes para o usuário mediano, como ligações rápidas para meta-data como Histórico, Diferenças e Contribuições do usuário.
* Pop-ups de navegação funcionam para ligações em todos os ''namespaces'', e em todos os projetos Wikimedia. Pré-visualizações de Página estão configuradas para funcionar apenas em ligações do espaço principal, e atualmente apenas nas Wikipedias.
* Pré-visualizações de Página são estilizadas para disponibilizar a leitura mais fácil. Atualmente, o tamanho das fontes em pop-ups de navegação é pequeno e as bordas são estreitas.
* Pré-visualizações de Página estão disponíveis para todos os usuários, não apenas para usuários logados.
* Pré-visualizações de Página usam um estilo visual consistente com o tratamento do tipo do artigo.
* Pré-visualizações de Página dão ênfase nas imagens-chave, para que o usuário tenha uma ideia do termo usando ambos texto e imagem.
* A ação disponibilizada no ''gadget'' parece fora de contexto, uma vez que precisamos validar qual das ações são úteis para leitores e editores.

=== Pré-Visualizações de HTML ===

Desde 1º de março de 2018, as visualizações de página agora exibem visualizações em HTML. Isso resolve muitos bugs pendentes, fornece representação correta de fórmulas matemáticas, químicas e outras, e garante que as visualizações exibam a mesma formatação do conteúdo do artigo.

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== Configurações ==

=== Ativação/Desativação ===

==== Para usuários deslogados ====
Usuários anônimos poderão desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página pelo ícone de engrenagem, exibido ao final de cada prévia. Caso o usuário desejar reativar o recurso, será possível atráves da ligação &quot;{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}&quot; disponível no final de toda página wiki.
Eles também podem desativar o JavaScript em seu navegador para desativá-lo permanentemente.
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
Hovercard english.png|Clique na engrenagem de configurações para desabilitar Pré-visualizações de Página
Page preview settings logged out.png|Selecione Desativar para desativar o recurso.
Reenablemodal.png|Instruções sobre como reativar estarão presentes.
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | Select disable to disable the feature
File:Reenablemodal.png | Instructions on how to re-enable will be presented
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| O link para reativar as pré-visualizações de página está disponível na parte inferior de cada página
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== Para usuários autenticados ====

Os usuários conectados podem controlar suas configurações de dois lugares. Eles podem ativar ou desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página na seção Aparência de Especial: Preferências. Os usuários conectados também podem desativar os Previews de página por meio do ícone de engrenagem exibido na parte inferior de cada visualização.
* Se um usuário conectado clicar na engrenagem de configurações, o sistema irá redirecioná-lo para a página de preferências do usuário.
* Se um usuário já tiver ativado o recurso beta de Hovercards, sua preferência será mantida e aparecerá na seção Aparência das preferências do usuário.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| Usuários podem ativar o recurso usando a engrenagem de configurações na parte inferior de cada prévia ou selecionando a opção diretamente da página de preferências do usuário.
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

== Métricas de sucesso e avaliação do recurso ==

Um número de testes qualitatuvis e quantitativos foram realizados para avaliar a performance do recurso de Pré-visualizações de Página. Esses testes tiveram como foco as seguintes questões:
* Os usuários gostaram das Pré-visualizações de Página, acharam-nos úteis?
* Como o recurso muda o comportamento de leitura, ele aumenta a precisão do usuário na seleção de artigos desejados?
* O lançamento das Pré-visualizações de Página teria efeito nas arrecadações de fundos?

=== Teste nas Wikipédias grega e catalã de 2015 ===

Um teste foi implementado por um período de 4 meses nas Wikipédias grega e catalã. Um número de problemas e ''bugs'' foram relatados, e a satisfação foi gravada numa pesquisa. A maioria dos usuários deram comentários positivos, achando as Pré-visualizações de Página (Cartões Flutuantes) úteis, fáceis e satisfatórios.

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/GreekCatalanTest|os resultados completos desses testes]].

=== Teste qualitativo de 2016 ===
Para determinar as posturas dos usuários diante do recurso e delinear mais mudanças ao comportamento do leitor, um estudo de painel remoto foi realizado o software [http://UserZoom.com UserZoom].
A maioria dos participantes foi positiva em relação às Pré-visualizações de Página.
Além do mais, a maioria dos participantes também não presenciou problemas em ativar e desativar o recurso.
Os usuários também descreveram o recurso em termos geralmente positivos e relataram que o mesmo não estava distraindo a experiência de leitura.

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|os resultados completos e análise deste teste]].

=== Testes A/B em 2016 em Wikipedia húngaras, italianas e russas ===

Para determinar as mudanças no comportamento de leitura e avaliar o sucesso do recurso Hovercards beta, foram lançados três testes A/B em Wikipedias húngaras, italianas e russas. O teste A/B em húngaro foi lançado em 7 de junho de 2016, os testes A/B em italiano e russo foram lançados em 23 de setembro de 2016.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A partir dos resultados desses testes, podemos concluir que os Hovercards facilitam mudanças positivas no comportamento de leitura, aumentando a precisão com que os usuários selecionam as páginas que leem, reduzindo o custo de exploração de outras páginas e permitindo que os usuários se concentrem seletivamente em um único tópico fornecendo contexto dentro de uma página.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During the process of collecting and analysing our data we ran into a number of bugs and issues within our instrumentation that allowed us to refine and improve, to ensure subsequent tests were issue-free.&lt;/span&gt;

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|os resultados completos e a análise desses testes]].

=== Teste 2017 A/B sobre Wikipedia em inglês e alemão ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Em 28 de agosto de 2017, lançamos um teste A/B para avaliar o desempenho do recurso antes da liberação desses projetos. Os testes serão executados por duas semanas simultaneamente como uma série de testes de angariação de fundos em enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The results, described in more detail [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|in the report]], displayed a decrease in pageviews, but an overall increase in the number of distinct pages that readers interact with, indicating that they are more likely to explore a larger variety of topics when the feature is on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also noted decreased usage of the back button and very low rates of disabling the feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition, we ran a number of fundraising tests on enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Improvements since English Wikipedia discussion from April 2016 ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
During the [[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |discussion]] from April 2016, a number of bugs, improvements, and other requests were identified which we have addressed in the following ways:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previews “getting stuck” in the open position
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have since refactored our code and this is no longer an issue
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Bolded text and mathematical formulas not appearing within the preview
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Currently, previews display in HTML and content is true to the article content
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to disable the feature from the card itself
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in and logged-out users can now disable the feature by selecting the settings gear within the card itself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to make sure page previews do not interfere with navigational popups
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in users may either have navigational popups or page previews. If you’re a navpopups user, you will not be able to enable page previews unless you turn off navpopups first, and vice versa
Providing more thorough research and A/B test results, performing a large-scale A/B test on English Wikipedia
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Since the discussion, we have performed [[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|two series of A/B tests]], the first on Hungarian, Russian, and Italian Wikipedias.  And the [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |second]] on English and German Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Limiting performance impact
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have worked with our performance team to minimize any issues page previews.  A [https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 dashboard] with detailed information on feature performance was created.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing a way to enable the feature for anonymous users only
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*This is ready as well.  As of March 2018, the feature is enabled by default for anonymous users on all Wikipedias except English and German
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing data on how often users disable the feature
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*For both of our 2017/18 A/B tests, the disable rate was around 0.01%.  Because the rate had been similarly low in earlier A/B tests, we also did a [[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |qualitative test]] to confirm that users did not have problems enabling or disabling the feature.  Our conclusion is that people know how to turn the feature off without difficulty but do so at extremely low rates.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing information on whether the feature was considered a nuisance
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Based on our qualitative testing, we concluded that tested users did not find the feature distracting, or a nuisance.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Páginas na lista negra ==

Por motivos de segurança, os Hovercards não serão carregados em determinadas páginas especiais. Nós nos referimos a essas páginas como &quot;páginas na lista negra&quot;. A versão inicial da lista negra pode ser encontrada aqui: {{phab|T170893}}.

== Iterações futuras e potenciais melhorias ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Following the general launch of Page Previews, we are planning on iterating on the feature to add functionality. These items will include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Configuration of images and other settings:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** a number of users have requested making images configurable within Page Previews. Request declined: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** other logged out preferences (more info [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|here]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Article titles - currently, only the summary of the article is available within Page Previews. As an iteration, we would like to display the title of each article along with its summary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Reference Tooltips ([[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]). The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using Page Previews to gain more information on each reference without scrolling to the bottom of the page&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Cross-wiki Page Previews ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]), and subsection links ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]]), particularly for Wiktionary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrate with Navigation Pop-ups - we would also like to expand the configuration of Page Previews to include some of the functionality planned in navigation pop-ups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Interacting with Page Previews text - a number of requests for interacting with preview text have been filed, including being able to copy and paste the text or export the text as a form or article summary. More info here  ([[phab:T146097|phab:T146097]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrating with Wiktionary items to provide definitions on hover.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interacting with Wiktionary items to provide definitions for unknown&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta_Features/Hovercards/FAQ |FAQ]] ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Por que Hovercards?
Este é um recurso destinado a melhorar a experiência de qualquer leitor que normalmente teria clicado em um link azul na Wikipédia porque eles precisavam de uma visão geral (definição) desse direitoy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How do we measure Page Previews performance?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
At the project level, administrators can determine how long a user should dwell on a link before a hover is triggered. If a project wants to be conservative, the lag can be longer. WMF will have a recommendation as to optimum dwell time that provides the best user experience while minimizing accidental hovers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Why can't users just turn on Page Previews if they want them?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Unfortunately, there is no good way to tell users about a new feature without showing it to them first. Central notice banners have been suggested, but running them for 2 weeks would not solve the needs of future users and we do not want to run them continuously. Notifying a user of a new feature is best done using a...hover-over.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What impact to Page Previews have on page views?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:According to A/B tests we did not see a large decrease in session depth across all Wikipedias. Average session depth (average number of pages viewed per session) [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|remained relatively equal]] between the Previews on and off groups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What about accessibility?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Page Previews only activate when the focus/hover state occurs over a link. They are usable for people who use keyboard navigation. For screen readers, Page Previews have proper [[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]] semantics declaring them as tooltips. In short, screen reader software ignore Page Previews.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; If I have Page Previews feedback or if I have a suggestion for making them better, where should I go?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Please go to [[Talk:Page_Previews|the Page Previews discussion page]].
&lt;/div&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Previews continues to show an old version of a page. What can I do?&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Preview shows the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|cached]] version of a page. If the page has been edited and you want Page Previews to show the new version right away, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|purge]] the page.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
;Analytics and instrumentation
:* Page Previews were instrumented to measure various aspects of usage. Please see the {{ll|Extension:Popups|nsp=0}} extension page for details and feel free to ask any clarifying questions.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To measure content usage via Page Previews, in an aggregated way that is compatible with the existing Pageviews data, a separate instrumentation [[phab:T186728|was set up]] that went live in April 2018. There are [[phab:T193524|plans]] to make some of this data public for the benefit of e.g. Wikipedia editors and academic researchers.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Project-level rollout discussions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update July 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Page previews are now available on all Wikipedias.  The feature is on by default for anonymous users and newly created accounts and off by default for accounts created before July 10, 2018.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update April 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The next step of the rollout for English and German Wikipedias is planned for the first half of April 2018. This deployment will include turning the feature on by default for logged-out users.  '''This will mean no changes for logged-in users.''' The feature will be off by default for logged-in editors, unless currently enabled. If you would like to enable it, it is available in your Preferences under “Appearance”. If you have the feature enabled already, it will stay on.  
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In terms of future changes for logged-in users, we have a few options we will be requesting feedback on:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Keep the feature off by default for logged-in users.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for new accounts only. Currently, when users move from being readers to contributors and create an account, the feature will seem to vanish, and that would be confusing.  As a further step in the feature rollout, we plan to change this configuration and enable the feature for all new accounts.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for existing logged-in users (Even if it were enabled for everyone, it would still be automatically suppressed for anyone who uses NAVPOPS.)
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Plan ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We began rolling out to Catalan, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias in early 2017. Data from the A/B tests represented highly favorable views of the feature. After this, we would like to continue rolling out in stages to other Wikipedias as described in the table below.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Code&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Language&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phase&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Onboarding&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Success&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dates&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All other Wikipedias except the remaining top 6&lt;/span&gt; || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|this message]] was sent to Wikipedia Village Pump (or equivalent) of the 247 wikis included in this phase on  19 April&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Onboarding Experience ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The onboarding experience for the feature will depend on the consensus of each community on having Page Previews on by default or providing users with an onboarding experience during which they can reject the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ver também ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (documentation of a - so far internal - dataset recording aggregate frequencies of seen page previews)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[:en:WP:POP|Navigation popups]] - the editor-focused gadget, started in 2005 by Lupin, available at most wikis
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ WMF blog post - Hovercards now available as a Beta Feature on all Wikimedia wikis] (March 2014)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The original specifications can be seen at [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]] and [https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|A list of similar browser extensions]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - The API specification for Page Previews
&lt;/div&gt;

== Referências ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>tt7sa0tower5250zwwkt92ubzz7kpxq</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402123</id>
      <parentid>5402117</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:19:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="34573" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
A ferramenta de '''Pré-visualizações de Página''' resolve o núcleo do problema de usuários precisando abrir abas múltiplas para conseguir entender uma palavra ou conceito dado o contexto do assunto que eles estão lendo.
Com Pré-visualizações de Página, sempre que um leitor passar o mouse em cima de uma ligação para outro artigo, um pequeno resumo do assunto e uma imagem (se disponível) é mostrada.
O usuário pode então decidir se deseja ler mais profundamente sobre aquele assunto antes de continuar com o artigo atual.
Uma descrição completa da funcionalidade de Pré-visualizações de Página pode ser encontrada [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|aqui]].
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Uma visão geral sobre toda a documentação técnica relacionada é fornecida [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ neste post de blog] a partir de maio de 2018.&lt;/span&gt;

O recurso '''Pré-visualizações de Referência''' é um projeto relacionado. Ele mostra uma prévia de uma nota de rodapé sempre que um leitor passar por cima de seu marcador de nota de rodapé. Uma descrição desse recurso pode ser encontrada [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|na sua página de projeto]].

== Introdução ==
As Pré-visualizações de Página são desenhadas para reduzir o custo de exploração de uma ligação, assim como para promover o aprendizado deixando leitores ganharem contexto sobre o artigo que estão lendo ou para definir um termo, objeto, evento ou ideia que não conhecem sem navegar longe do tópico original.
Para leitores casuais, Pré-visualizações de Página vão fazer ser mais fácil para usuários conseguir uma olhada rápida de um artigo antes de decidir se vão ou não pesquisar sobre ele.
Usuários interessados em ler um artigo inteiro não serão distraídos ou desencorajados em ver conceitos desconhecidos - eles podem simplesmente ter uma prévia do conceito sem navegar para uma página nova.
Consequentemente, a sutileza da experiência do usuário para esses usuários será aumentada.

Houveram vários pedidos ao longo dos anos por um recurso semelhante; existem também extensões (veja a [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|lista]]) e um ''gadget'' muito usado (os [[:pt:WP:POP|''Popups'' de navegação]]) que solucionam o problema.
Pré-visualizações de Página foram construídas pela primeira vez como uma funcionalidade beta em 2014 (chamada de Cartões Flutuantes) e têm sido nossa ferramenta mais popular em termos de adoção, feedback de usuários e impacto no uso.
Na [[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|primeira discussão sobre Cartões Flutuantes]], no período de 2 anos, vários problemas entre todos os projetos foram identificados e resolvidos.
O equivalente móvel de Pré-visualizações de Página, implementado no app para Android [[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|em setembro de 2015]], resultou num crescimento de 20% em ligações clicadas por página.

O [[$configurações|painel de configurações]] das Pré-visualizações de Página permite que usuários anônimos ativem ou desativem o recurso baseado em suas preferências.
Usuários logados podem ativar ou desativar Pré-visualizações de Página pela seção de Aparência em Especial:Preferências.
Se os pop-ups de navegação e Pré-visualizações de Página estiverem ativos ao mesmo tempo (normalmente, para usuários logados que optaram via funcionalidade beta), pop-ups de navegação tomam precedência.
Para ativar Pré-visualizações de Página, pop-ups de navegação hão de estar desativados.

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|Exemplo de uma Pré-visualização de Página]]

== Design ==

Para cada iteração das Pré-visualizações de Página, cada prévia possuirá o seguinte:
* Uma porção do primeiro parágrafo do artigo;
* Uma imagem (se disponível) do artigo. Imagens aparecem na horizontal ou na vertical dependendo da localização da ligação dentro do artigo; e
* Uma engrenagem que permite o usuário ativar ou desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em grego.
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em chinês.
File:Hovercard english.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em inglês.
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Example of Page Previews in Chinese
File:Hovercard english.png|Example of Page Previews in English
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== Principais diferenças em comparação aos ''Popups'' de Navegação ===

* Os ''popups'' de navegação são para usuários experientes, e possuem muitos recursos irrelevantes para o usuário mediano, como ligações rápidas para meta-data como Histórico, Diferenças e Contribuições do usuário.
* Pop-ups de navegação funcionam para ligações em todos os ''namespaces'', e em todos os projetos Wikimedia. Pré-visualizações de Página estão configuradas para funcionar apenas em ligações do espaço principal, e atualmente apenas nas Wikipedias.
* Pré-visualizações de Página são estilizadas para disponibilizar a leitura mais fácil. Atualmente, o tamanho das fontes em pop-ups de navegação é pequeno e as bordas são estreitas.
* Pré-visualizações de Página estão disponíveis para todos os usuários, não apenas para usuários logados.
* Pré-visualizações de Página usam um estilo visual consistente com o tratamento do tipo do artigo.
* Pré-visualizações de Página dão ênfase nas imagens-chave, para que o usuário tenha uma ideia do termo usando ambos texto e imagem.
* A ação disponibilizada no ''gadget'' parece fora de contexto, uma vez que precisamos validar qual das ações são úteis para leitores e editores.

=== Pré-Visualizações de HTML ===

Desde 1º de março de 2018, as visualizações de página agora exibem visualizações em HTML. Isso resolve muitos bugs pendentes, fornece representação correta de fórmulas matemáticas, químicas e outras, e garante que as visualizações exibam a mesma formatação do conteúdo do artigo.

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== Configurações ==

=== Ativação/Desativação ===

==== Para usuários deslogados ====
Usuários anônimos poderão desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página pelo ícone de engrenagem, exibido ao final de cada prévia. Caso o usuário desejar reativar o recurso, será possível atráves da ligação &quot;{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}&quot; disponível no final de toda página wiki.
Eles também podem desativar o JavaScript em seu navegador para desativá-lo permanentemente.
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
Hovercard english.png|Clique na engrenagem de configurações para desabilitar Pré-visualizações de Página
Page preview settings logged out.png|Selecione Desativar para desativar o recurso.
Reenablemodal.png|Instruções sobre como reativar estarão presentes.
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | Select disable to disable the feature
File:Reenablemodal.png | Instructions on how to re-enable will be presented
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| O link para reativar as pré-visualizações de página está disponível na parte inferior de cada página
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== Para usuários autenticados ====

Os usuários conectados podem controlar suas configurações de dois lugares. Eles podem ativar ou desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página na seção Aparência de Especial: Preferências. Os usuários conectados também podem desativar os Previews de página por meio do ícone de engrenagem exibido na parte inferior de cada visualização.
* Se um usuário conectado clicar na engrenagem de configurações, o sistema irá redirecioná-lo para a página de preferências do usuário.
* Se um usuário já tiver ativado o recurso beta de Hovercards, sua preferência será mantida e aparecerá na seção Aparência das preferências do usuário.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| Usuários podem ativar o recurso usando a engrenagem de configurações na parte inferior de cada prévia ou selecionando a opção diretamente da página de preferências do usuário.
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

== Métricas de sucesso e avaliação do recurso ==

Um número de testes qualitatuvis e quantitativos foram realizados para avaliar a performance do recurso de Pré-visualizações de Página. Esses testes tiveram como foco as seguintes questões:
* Os usuários gostaram das Pré-visualizações de Página, acharam-nos úteis?
* Como o recurso muda o comportamento de leitura, ele aumenta a precisão do usuário na seleção de artigos desejados?
* O lançamento das Pré-visualizações de Página teria efeito nas arrecadações de fundos?

=== Teste nas Wikipédias grega e catalã de 2015 ===

Um teste foi implementado por um período de 4 meses nas Wikipédias grega e catalã. Um número de problemas e ''bugs'' foram relatados, e a satisfação foi gravada numa pesquisa. A maioria dos usuários deram comentários positivos, achando as Pré-visualizações de Página (Cartões Flutuantes) úteis, fáceis e satisfatórios.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/GreekCatalanTest|os resultados completos desses testes]].
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Teste qualitativo de 2016 ===
Para determinar as posturas dos usuários diante do recurso e delinear mais mudanças ao comportamento do leitor, um estudo de painel remoto foi realizado o software [http://UserZoom.com UserZoom].
A maioria dos participantes foi positiva em relação às Pré-visualizações de Página.
Além do mais, a maioria dos participantes também não presenciou problemas em ativar e desativar o recurso.
Os usuários também descreveram o recurso em termos geralmente positivos e relataram que o mesmo não estava distraindo a experiência de leitura.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|os resultados completos e análise deste teste]].
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Testes A/B em 2016 em Wikipedia húngaras, italianas e russas ===

Para determinar as mudanças no comportamento de leitura e avaliar o sucesso do recurso Hovercards beta, foram lançados três testes A/B em Wikipedias húngaras, italianas e russas. O teste A/B em húngaro foi lançado em 7 de junho de 2016, os testes A/B em italiano e russo foram lançados em 23 de setembro de 2016.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A partir dos resultados desses testes, podemos concluir que os Hovercards facilitam mudanças positivas no comportamento de leitura, aumentando a precisão com que os usuários selecionam as páginas que leem, reduzindo o custo de exploração de outras páginas e permitindo que os usuários se concentrem seletivamente em um único tópico fornecendo contexto dentro de uma página.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During the process of collecting and analysing our data we ran into a number of bugs and issues within our instrumentation that allowed us to refine and improve, to ensure subsequent tests were issue-free.&lt;/span&gt;

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|os resultados completos e a análise desses testes]].

=== Teste 2017 A/B sobre Wikipedia em inglês e alemão ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Em 28 de agosto de 2017, lançamos um teste A/B para avaliar o desempenho do recurso antes da liberação desses projetos. Os testes serão executados por duas semanas simultaneamente como uma série de testes de angariação de fundos em enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The results, described in more detail [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|in the report]], displayed a decrease in pageviews, but an overall increase in the number of distinct pages that readers interact with, indicating that they are more likely to explore a larger variety of topics when the feature is on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also noted decreased usage of the back button and very low rates of disabling the feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition, we ran a number of fundraising tests on enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Improvements since English Wikipedia discussion from April 2016 ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
During the [[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |discussion]] from April 2016, a number of bugs, improvements, and other requests were identified which we have addressed in the following ways:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previews “getting stuck” in the open position
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have since refactored our code and this is no longer an issue
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Bolded text and mathematical formulas not appearing within the preview
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Currently, previews display in HTML and content is true to the article content
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to disable the feature from the card itself
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in and logged-out users can now disable the feature by selecting the settings gear within the card itself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to make sure page previews do not interfere with navigational popups
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in users may either have navigational popups or page previews. If you’re a navpopups user, you will not be able to enable page previews unless you turn off navpopups first, and vice versa
Providing more thorough research and A/B test results, performing a large-scale A/B test on English Wikipedia
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Since the discussion, we have performed [[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|two series of A/B tests]], the first on Hungarian, Russian, and Italian Wikipedias.  And the [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |second]] on English and German Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Limiting performance impact
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have worked with our performance team to minimize any issues page previews.  A [https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 dashboard] with detailed information on feature performance was created.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing a way to enable the feature for anonymous users only
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*This is ready as well.  As of March 2018, the feature is enabled by default for anonymous users on all Wikipedias except English and German
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing data on how often users disable the feature
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*For both of our 2017/18 A/B tests, the disable rate was around 0.01%.  Because the rate had been similarly low in earlier A/B tests, we also did a [[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |qualitative test]] to confirm that users did not have problems enabling or disabling the feature.  Our conclusion is that people know how to turn the feature off without difficulty but do so at extremely low rates.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing information on whether the feature was considered a nuisance
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Based on our qualitative testing, we concluded that tested users did not find the feature distracting, or a nuisance.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Páginas na lista negra ==

Por motivos de segurança, os Hovercards não serão carregados em determinadas páginas especiais. Nós nos referimos a essas páginas como &quot;páginas na lista negra&quot;. A versão inicial da lista negra pode ser encontrada aqui: {{phab|T170893}}.

== Iterações futuras e potenciais melhorias ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Following the general launch of Page Previews, we are planning on iterating on the feature to add functionality. These items will include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Configuration of images and other settings:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** a number of users have requested making images configurable within Page Previews. Request declined: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** other logged out preferences (more info [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|here]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Article titles - currently, only the summary of the article is available within Page Previews. As an iteration, we would like to display the title of each article along with its summary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Reference Tooltips ([[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]). The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using Page Previews to gain more information on each reference without scrolling to the bottom of the page&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Cross-wiki Page Previews ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]), and subsection links ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]]), particularly for Wiktionary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrate with Navigation Pop-ups - we would also like to expand the configuration of Page Previews to include some of the functionality planned in navigation pop-ups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Interacting with Page Previews text - a number of requests for interacting with preview text have been filed, including being able to copy and paste the text or export the text as a form or article summary. More info here  ([[phab:T146097|phab:T146097]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrating with Wiktionary items to provide definitions on hover.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interacting with Wiktionary items to provide definitions for unknown&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta_Features/Hovercards/FAQ |FAQ]] ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Por que Hovercards?
Este é um recurso destinado a melhorar a experiência de qualquer leitor que normalmente teria clicado em um link azul na Wikipédia porque eles precisavam de uma visão geral (definição) desse direitoy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How do we measure Page Previews performance?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
At the project level, administrators can determine how long a user should dwell on a link before a hover is triggered. If a project wants to be conservative, the lag can be longer. WMF will have a recommendation as to optimum dwell time that provides the best user experience while minimizing accidental hovers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Why can't users just turn on Page Previews if they want them?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Unfortunately, there is no good way to tell users about a new feature without showing it to them first. Central notice banners have been suggested, but running them for 2 weeks would not solve the needs of future users and we do not want to run them continuously. Notifying a user of a new feature is best done using a...hover-over.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What impact to Page Previews have on page views?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:According to A/B tests we did not see a large decrease in session depth across all Wikipedias. Average session depth (average number of pages viewed per session) [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|remained relatively equal]] between the Previews on and off groups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What about accessibility?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Page Previews only activate when the focus/hover state occurs over a link. They are usable for people who use keyboard navigation. For screen readers, Page Previews have proper [[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]] semantics declaring them as tooltips. In short, screen reader software ignore Page Previews.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; If I have Page Previews feedback or if I have a suggestion for making them better, where should I go?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Please go to [[Talk:Page_Previews|the Page Previews discussion page]].
&lt;/div&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Previews continues to show an old version of a page. What can I do?&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Preview shows the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|cached]] version of a page. If the page has been edited and you want Page Previews to show the new version right away, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|purge]] the page.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
;Analytics and instrumentation
:* Page Previews were instrumented to measure various aspects of usage. Please see the {{ll|Extension:Popups|nsp=0}} extension page for details and feel free to ask any clarifying questions.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To measure content usage via Page Previews, in an aggregated way that is compatible with the existing Pageviews data, a separate instrumentation [[phab:T186728|was set up]] that went live in April 2018. There are [[phab:T193524|plans]] to make some of this data public for the benefit of e.g. Wikipedia editors and academic researchers.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Project-level rollout discussions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update July 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Page previews are now available on all Wikipedias.  The feature is on by default for anonymous users and newly created accounts and off by default for accounts created before July 10, 2018.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update April 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The next step of the rollout for English and German Wikipedias is planned for the first half of April 2018. This deployment will include turning the feature on by default for logged-out users.  '''This will mean no changes for logged-in users.''' The feature will be off by default for logged-in editors, unless currently enabled. If you would like to enable it, it is available in your Preferences under “Appearance”. If you have the feature enabled already, it will stay on.  
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In terms of future changes for logged-in users, we have a few options we will be requesting feedback on:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Keep the feature off by default for logged-in users.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for new accounts only. Currently, when users move from being readers to contributors and create an account, the feature will seem to vanish, and that would be confusing.  As a further step in the feature rollout, we plan to change this configuration and enable the feature for all new accounts.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for existing logged-in users (Even if it were enabled for everyone, it would still be automatically suppressed for anyone who uses NAVPOPS.)
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Plan ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We began rolling out to Catalan, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias in early 2017. Data from the A/B tests represented highly favorable views of the feature. After this, we would like to continue rolling out in stages to other Wikipedias as described in the table below.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Code&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Language&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phase&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Onboarding&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Success&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dates&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All other Wikipedias except the remaining top 6&lt;/span&gt; || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|this message]] was sent to Wikipedia Village Pump (or equivalent) of the 247 wikis included in this phase on  19 April&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Onboarding Experience ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The onboarding experience for the feature will depend on the consensus of each community on having Page Previews on by default or providing users with an onboarding experience during which they can reject the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ver também ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (documentation of a - so far internal - dataset recording aggregate frequencies of seen page previews)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[:en:WP:POP|Navigation popups]] - the editor-focused gadget, started in 2005 by Lupin, available at most wikis
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ WMF blog post - Hovercards now available as a Beta Feature on all Wikimedia wikis] (March 2014)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The original specifications can be seen at [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]] and [https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|A list of similar browser extensions]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - The API specification for Page Previews
&lt;/div&gt;

== Referências ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5eibw0vj9cjl9ta00abe5osz1aopb33</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402129</id>
      <parentid>5402123</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:20:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="34533" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
A ferramenta de '''Pré-visualizações de Página''' resolve o núcleo do problema de usuários precisando abrir abas múltiplas para conseguir entender uma palavra ou conceito dado o contexto do assunto que eles estão lendo.
Com Pré-visualizações de Página, sempre que um leitor passar o mouse em cima de uma ligação para outro artigo, um pequeno resumo do assunto e uma imagem (se disponível) é mostrada.
O usuário pode então decidir se deseja ler mais profundamente sobre aquele assunto antes de continuar com o artigo atual.
Uma descrição completa da funcionalidade de Pré-visualizações de Página pode ser encontrada [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|aqui]].
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Uma visão geral sobre toda a documentação técnica relacionada é fornecida [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ neste post de blog] a partir de maio de 2018.&lt;/span&gt;

O recurso '''Pré-visualizações de Referência''' é um projeto relacionado. Ele mostra uma prévia de uma nota de rodapé sempre que um leitor passar por cima de seu marcador de nota de rodapé. Uma descrição desse recurso pode ser encontrada [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|na sua página de projeto]].

== Introdução ==
As Pré-visualizações de Página são desenhadas para reduzir o custo de exploração de uma ligação, assim como para promover o aprendizado deixando leitores ganharem contexto sobre o artigo que estão lendo ou para definir um termo, objeto, evento ou ideia que não conhecem sem navegar longe do tópico original.
Para leitores casuais, Pré-visualizações de Página vão fazer ser mais fácil para usuários conseguir uma olhada rápida de um artigo antes de decidir se vão ou não pesquisar sobre ele.
Usuários interessados em ler um artigo inteiro não serão distraídos ou desencorajados em ver conceitos desconhecidos - eles podem simplesmente ter uma prévia do conceito sem navegar para uma página nova.
Consequentemente, a sutileza da experiência do usuário para esses usuários será aumentada.

Houveram vários pedidos ao longo dos anos por um recurso semelhante; existem também extensões (veja a [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|lista]]) e um ''gadget'' muito usado (os [[:pt:WP:POP|''Popups'' de navegação]]) que solucionam o problema.
Pré-visualizações de Página foram construídas pela primeira vez como uma funcionalidade beta em 2014 (chamada de Cartões Flutuantes) e têm sido nossa ferramenta mais popular em termos de adoção, feedback de usuários e impacto no uso.
Na [[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|primeira discussão sobre Cartões Flutuantes]], no período de 2 anos, vários problemas entre todos os projetos foram identificados e resolvidos.
O equivalente móvel de Pré-visualizações de Página, implementado no app para Android [[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|em setembro de 2015]], resultou num crescimento de 20% em ligações clicadas por página.

O [[$configurações|painel de configurações]] das Pré-visualizações de Página permite que usuários anônimos ativem ou desativem o recurso baseado em suas preferências.
Usuários logados podem ativar ou desativar Pré-visualizações de Página pela seção de Aparência em Especial:Preferências.
Se os pop-ups de navegação e Pré-visualizações de Página estiverem ativos ao mesmo tempo (normalmente, para usuários logados que optaram via funcionalidade beta), pop-ups de navegação tomam precedência.
Para ativar Pré-visualizações de Página, pop-ups de navegação hão de estar desativados.

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|Exemplo de uma Pré-visualização de Página]]

== Design ==

Para cada iteração das Pré-visualizações de Página, cada prévia possuirá o seguinte:
* Uma porção do primeiro parágrafo do artigo;
* Uma imagem (se disponível) do artigo. Imagens aparecem na horizontal ou na vertical dependendo da localização da ligação dentro do artigo; e
* Uma engrenagem que permite o usuário ativar ou desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em grego.
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em chinês.
File:Hovercard english.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em inglês.
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Example of Page Previews in Chinese
File:Hovercard english.png|Example of Page Previews in English
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== Principais diferenças em comparação aos ''Popups'' de Navegação ===

* Os ''popups'' de navegação são para usuários experientes, e possuem muitos recursos irrelevantes para o usuário mediano, como ligações rápidas para meta-data como Histórico, Diferenças e Contribuições do usuário.
* Pop-ups de navegação funcionam para ligações em todos os ''namespaces'', e em todos os projetos Wikimedia. Pré-visualizações de Página estão configuradas para funcionar apenas em ligações do espaço principal, e atualmente apenas nas Wikipedias.
* Pré-visualizações de Página são estilizadas para disponibilizar a leitura mais fácil. Atualmente, o tamanho das fontes em pop-ups de navegação é pequeno e as bordas são estreitas.
* Pré-visualizações de Página estão disponíveis para todos os usuários, não apenas para usuários logados.
* Pré-visualizações de Página usam um estilo visual consistente com o tratamento do tipo do artigo.
* Pré-visualizações de Página dão ênfase nas imagens-chave, para que o usuário tenha uma ideia do termo usando ambos texto e imagem.
* A ação disponibilizada no ''gadget'' parece fora de contexto, uma vez que precisamos validar qual das ações são úteis para leitores e editores.

=== Pré-Visualizações de HTML ===

Desde 1º de março de 2018, as visualizações de página agora exibem visualizações em HTML. Isso resolve muitos bugs pendentes, fornece representação correta de fórmulas matemáticas, químicas e outras, e garante que as visualizações exibam a mesma formatação do conteúdo do artigo.

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== Configurações ==

=== Ativação/Desativação ===

==== Para usuários deslogados ====
Usuários anônimos poderão desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página pelo ícone de engrenagem, exibido ao final de cada prévia. Caso o usuário desejar reativar o recurso, será possível atráves da ligação &quot;{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}&quot; disponível no final de toda página wiki.
Eles também podem desativar o JavaScript em seu navegador para desativá-lo permanentemente.
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
Hovercard english.png|Clique na engrenagem de configurações para desabilitar Pré-visualizações de Página
Page preview settings logged out.png|Selecione Desativar para desativar o recurso.
Reenablemodal.png|Instruções sobre como reativar estarão presentes.
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | Select disable to disable the feature
File:Reenablemodal.png | Instructions on how to re-enable will be presented
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| O link para reativar as pré-visualizações de página está disponível na parte inferior de cada página
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== Para usuários autenticados ====

Os usuários conectados podem controlar suas configurações de dois lugares. Eles podem ativar ou desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página na seção Aparência de Especial: Preferências. Os usuários conectados também podem desativar os Previews de página por meio do ícone de engrenagem exibido na parte inferior de cada visualização.
* Se um usuário conectado clicar na engrenagem de configurações, o sistema irá redirecioná-lo para a página de preferências do usuário.
* Se um usuário já tiver ativado o recurso beta de Hovercards, sua preferência será mantida e aparecerá na seção Aparência das preferências do usuário.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| Usuários podem ativar o recurso usando a engrenagem de configurações na parte inferior de cada prévia ou selecionando a opção diretamente da página de preferências do usuário.
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

== Métricas de sucesso e avaliação do recurso ==

Um número de testes qualitatuvis e quantitativos foram realizados para avaliar a performance do recurso de Pré-visualizações de Página. Esses testes tiveram como foco as seguintes questões:
* Os usuários gostaram das Pré-visualizações de Página, acharam-nos úteis?
* Como o recurso muda o comportamento de leitura, ele aumenta a precisão do usuário na seleção de artigos desejados?
* O lançamento das Pré-visualizações de Página teria efeito nas arrecadações de fundos?

=== Teste nas Wikipédias grega e catalã de 2015 ===

Um teste foi implementado por um período de 4 meses nas Wikipédias grega e catalã. Um número de problemas e ''bugs'' foram relatados, e a satisfação foi gravada numa pesquisa. A maioria dos usuários deram comentários positivos, achando as Pré-visualizações de Página (Cartões Flutuantes) úteis, fáceis e satisfatórios.

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/GreekCatalanTest|os resultados completos desses testes]].

=== Teste qualitativo de 2016 ===
Para determinar as posturas dos usuários diante do recurso e delinear mais mudanças ao comportamento do leitor, um estudo de painel remoto foi realizado o software [http://UserZoom.com UserZoom].
A maioria dos participantes foi positiva em relação às Pré-visualizações de Página.
Além do mais, a maioria dos participantes também não presenciou problemas em ativar e desativar o recurso.
Os usuários também descreveram o recurso em termos geralmente positivos e relataram que o mesmo não estava distraindo a experiência de leitura.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|os resultados completos e análise deste teste]].
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Testes A/B em 2016 em Wikipedia húngaras, italianas e russas ===

Para determinar as mudanças no comportamento de leitura e avaliar o sucesso do recurso Hovercards beta, foram lançados três testes A/B em Wikipedias húngaras, italianas e russas. O teste A/B em húngaro foi lançado em 7 de junho de 2016, os testes A/B em italiano e russo foram lançados em 23 de setembro de 2016.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A partir dos resultados desses testes, podemos concluir que os Hovercards facilitam mudanças positivas no comportamento de leitura, aumentando a precisão com que os usuários selecionam as páginas que leem, reduzindo o custo de exploração de outras páginas e permitindo que os usuários se concentrem seletivamente em um único tópico fornecendo contexto dentro de uma página.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During the process of collecting and analysing our data we ran into a number of bugs and issues within our instrumentation that allowed us to refine and improve, to ensure subsequent tests were issue-free.&lt;/span&gt;

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|os resultados completos e a análise desses testes]].

=== Teste 2017 A/B sobre Wikipedia em inglês e alemão ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Em 28 de agosto de 2017, lançamos um teste A/B para avaliar o desempenho do recurso antes da liberação desses projetos. Os testes serão executados por duas semanas simultaneamente como uma série de testes de angariação de fundos em enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The results, described in more detail [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|in the report]], displayed a decrease in pageviews, but an overall increase in the number of distinct pages that readers interact with, indicating that they are more likely to explore a larger variety of topics when the feature is on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also noted decreased usage of the back button and very low rates of disabling the feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition, we ran a number of fundraising tests on enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Improvements since English Wikipedia discussion from April 2016 ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
During the [[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |discussion]] from April 2016, a number of bugs, improvements, and other requests were identified which we have addressed in the following ways:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previews “getting stuck” in the open position
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have since refactored our code and this is no longer an issue
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Bolded text and mathematical formulas not appearing within the preview
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Currently, previews display in HTML and content is true to the article content
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to disable the feature from the card itself
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in and logged-out users can now disable the feature by selecting the settings gear within the card itself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to make sure page previews do not interfere with navigational popups
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in users may either have navigational popups or page previews. If you’re a navpopups user, you will not be able to enable page previews unless you turn off navpopups first, and vice versa
Providing more thorough research and A/B test results, performing a large-scale A/B test on English Wikipedia
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Since the discussion, we have performed [[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|two series of A/B tests]], the first on Hungarian, Russian, and Italian Wikipedias.  And the [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |second]] on English and German Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Limiting performance impact
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have worked with our performance team to minimize any issues page previews.  A [https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 dashboard] with detailed information on feature performance was created.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing a way to enable the feature for anonymous users only
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*This is ready as well.  As of March 2018, the feature is enabled by default for anonymous users on all Wikipedias except English and German
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing data on how often users disable the feature
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*For both of our 2017/18 A/B tests, the disable rate was around 0.01%.  Because the rate had been similarly low in earlier A/B tests, we also did a [[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |qualitative test]] to confirm that users did not have problems enabling or disabling the feature.  Our conclusion is that people know how to turn the feature off without difficulty but do so at extremely low rates.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing information on whether the feature was considered a nuisance
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Based on our qualitative testing, we concluded that tested users did not find the feature distracting, or a nuisance.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Páginas na lista negra ==

Por motivos de segurança, os Hovercards não serão carregados em determinadas páginas especiais. Nós nos referimos a essas páginas como &quot;páginas na lista negra&quot;. A versão inicial da lista negra pode ser encontrada aqui: {{phab|T170893}}.

== Iterações futuras e potenciais melhorias ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Following the general launch of Page Previews, we are planning on iterating on the feature to add functionality. These items will include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Configuration of images and other settings:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** a number of users have requested making images configurable within Page Previews. Request declined: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** other logged out preferences (more info [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|here]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Article titles - currently, only the summary of the article is available within Page Previews. As an iteration, we would like to display the title of each article along with its summary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Reference Tooltips ([[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]). The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using Page Previews to gain more information on each reference without scrolling to the bottom of the page&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Cross-wiki Page Previews ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]), and subsection links ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]]), particularly for Wiktionary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrate with Navigation Pop-ups - we would also like to expand the configuration of Page Previews to include some of the functionality planned in navigation pop-ups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Interacting with Page Previews text - a number of requests for interacting with preview text have been filed, including being able to copy and paste the text or export the text as a form or article summary. More info here  ([[phab:T146097|phab:T146097]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrating with Wiktionary items to provide definitions on hover.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interacting with Wiktionary items to provide definitions for unknown&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta_Features/Hovercards/FAQ |FAQ]] ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Por que Hovercards?
Este é um recurso destinado a melhorar a experiência de qualquer leitor que normalmente teria clicado em um link azul na Wikipédia porque eles precisavam de uma visão geral (definição) desse direitoy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How do we measure Page Previews performance?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
At the project level, administrators can determine how long a user should dwell on a link before a hover is triggered. If a project wants to be conservative, the lag can be longer. WMF will have a recommendation as to optimum dwell time that provides the best user experience while minimizing accidental hovers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Why can't users just turn on Page Previews if they want them?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Unfortunately, there is no good way to tell users about a new feature without showing it to them first. Central notice banners have been suggested, but running them for 2 weeks would not solve the needs of future users and we do not want to run them continuously. Notifying a user of a new feature is best done using a...hover-over.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What impact to Page Previews have on page views?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:According to A/B tests we did not see a large decrease in session depth across all Wikipedias. Average session depth (average number of pages viewed per session) [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|remained relatively equal]] between the Previews on and off groups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What about accessibility?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Page Previews only activate when the focus/hover state occurs over a link. They are usable for people who use keyboard navigation. For screen readers, Page Previews have proper [[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]] semantics declaring them as tooltips. In short, screen reader software ignore Page Previews.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; If I have Page Previews feedback or if I have a suggestion for making them better, where should I go?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Please go to [[Talk:Page_Previews|the Page Previews discussion page]].
&lt;/div&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Previews continues to show an old version of a page. What can I do?&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Preview shows the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|cached]] version of a page. If the page has been edited and you want Page Previews to show the new version right away, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|purge]] the page.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
;Analytics and instrumentation
:* Page Previews were instrumented to measure various aspects of usage. Please see the {{ll|Extension:Popups|nsp=0}} extension page for details and feel free to ask any clarifying questions.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To measure content usage via Page Previews, in an aggregated way that is compatible with the existing Pageviews data, a separate instrumentation [[phab:T186728|was set up]] that went live in April 2018. There are [[phab:T193524|plans]] to make some of this data public for the benefit of e.g. Wikipedia editors and academic researchers.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Project-level rollout discussions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update July 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Page previews are now available on all Wikipedias.  The feature is on by default for anonymous users and newly created accounts and off by default for accounts created before July 10, 2018.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update April 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The next step of the rollout for English and German Wikipedias is planned for the first half of April 2018. This deployment will include turning the feature on by default for logged-out users.  '''This will mean no changes for logged-in users.''' The feature will be off by default for logged-in editors, unless currently enabled. If you would like to enable it, it is available in your Preferences under “Appearance”. If you have the feature enabled already, it will stay on.  
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In terms of future changes for logged-in users, we have a few options we will be requesting feedback on:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Keep the feature off by default for logged-in users.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for new accounts only. Currently, when users move from being readers to contributors and create an account, the feature will seem to vanish, and that would be confusing.  As a further step in the feature rollout, we plan to change this configuration and enable the feature for all new accounts.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for existing logged-in users (Even if it were enabled for everyone, it would still be automatically suppressed for anyone who uses NAVPOPS.)
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Plan ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We began rolling out to Catalan, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias in early 2017. Data from the A/B tests represented highly favorable views of the feature. After this, we would like to continue rolling out in stages to other Wikipedias as described in the table below.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Code&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Language&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phase&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Onboarding&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Success&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dates&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All other Wikipedias except the remaining top 6&lt;/span&gt; || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|this message]] was sent to Wikipedia Village Pump (or equivalent) of the 247 wikis included in this phase on  19 April&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Onboarding Experience ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The onboarding experience for the feature will depend on the consensus of each community on having Page Previews on by default or providing users with an onboarding experience during which they can reject the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ver também ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (documentation of a - so far internal - dataset recording aggregate frequencies of seen page previews)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[:en:WP:POP|Navigation popups]] - the editor-focused gadget, started in 2005 by Lupin, available at most wikis
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ WMF blog post - Hovercards now available as a Beta Feature on all Wikimedia wikis] (March 2014)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The original specifications can be seen at [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]] and [https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|A list of similar browser extensions]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - The API specification for Page Previews
&lt;/div&gt;

== Referências ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>fs6myqgp7f8jvjrmujxmj3ok86j6jay</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402135</id>
      <parentid>5402129</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:21:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="34493" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
A ferramenta de '''Pré-visualizações de Página''' resolve o núcleo do problema de usuários precisando abrir abas múltiplas para conseguir entender uma palavra ou conceito dado o contexto do assunto que eles estão lendo.
Com Pré-visualizações de Página, sempre que um leitor passar o mouse em cima de uma ligação para outro artigo, um pequeno resumo do assunto e uma imagem (se disponível) é mostrada.
O usuário pode então decidir se deseja ler mais profundamente sobre aquele assunto antes de continuar com o artigo atual.
Uma descrição completa da funcionalidade de Pré-visualizações de Página pode ser encontrada [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|aqui]].
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Uma visão geral sobre toda a documentação técnica relacionada é fornecida [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ neste post de blog] a partir de maio de 2018.&lt;/span&gt;

O recurso '''Pré-visualizações de Referência''' é um projeto relacionado. Ele mostra uma prévia de uma nota de rodapé sempre que um leitor passar por cima de seu marcador de nota de rodapé. Uma descrição desse recurso pode ser encontrada [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|na sua página de projeto]].

== Introdução ==
As Pré-visualizações de Página são desenhadas para reduzir o custo de exploração de uma ligação, assim como para promover o aprendizado deixando leitores ganharem contexto sobre o artigo que estão lendo ou para definir um termo, objeto, evento ou ideia que não conhecem sem navegar longe do tópico original.
Para leitores casuais, Pré-visualizações de Página vão fazer ser mais fácil para usuários conseguir uma olhada rápida de um artigo antes de decidir se vão ou não pesquisar sobre ele.
Usuários interessados em ler um artigo inteiro não serão distraídos ou desencorajados em ver conceitos desconhecidos - eles podem simplesmente ter uma prévia do conceito sem navegar para uma página nova.
Consequentemente, a sutileza da experiência do usuário para esses usuários será aumentada.

Houveram vários pedidos ao longo dos anos por um recurso semelhante; existem também extensões (veja a [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|lista]]) e um ''gadget'' muito usado (os [[:pt:WP:POP|''Popups'' de navegação]]) que solucionam o problema.
Pré-visualizações de Página foram construídas pela primeira vez como uma funcionalidade beta em 2014 (chamada de Cartões Flutuantes) e têm sido nossa ferramenta mais popular em termos de adoção, feedback de usuários e impacto no uso.
Na [[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|primeira discussão sobre Cartões Flutuantes]], no período de 2 anos, vários problemas entre todos os projetos foram identificados e resolvidos.
O equivalente móvel de Pré-visualizações de Página, implementado no app para Android [[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|em setembro de 2015]], resultou num crescimento de 20% em ligações clicadas por página.

O [[$configurações|painel de configurações]] das Pré-visualizações de Página permite que usuários anônimos ativem ou desativem o recurso baseado em suas preferências.
Usuários logados podem ativar ou desativar Pré-visualizações de Página pela seção de Aparência em Especial:Preferências.
Se os pop-ups de navegação e Pré-visualizações de Página estiverem ativos ao mesmo tempo (normalmente, para usuários logados que optaram via funcionalidade beta), pop-ups de navegação tomam precedência.
Para ativar Pré-visualizações de Página, pop-ups de navegação hão de estar desativados.

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|Exemplo de uma Pré-visualização de Página]]

== Design ==

Para cada iteração das Pré-visualizações de Página, cada prévia possuirá o seguinte:
* Uma porção do primeiro parágrafo do artigo;
* Uma imagem (se disponível) do artigo. Imagens aparecem na horizontal ou na vertical dependendo da localização da ligação dentro do artigo; e
* Uma engrenagem que permite o usuário ativar ou desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em grego.
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em chinês.
File:Hovercard english.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em inglês.
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Example of Page Previews in Chinese
File:Hovercard english.png|Example of Page Previews in English
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== Principais diferenças em comparação aos ''Popups'' de Navegação ===

* Os ''popups'' de navegação são para usuários experientes, e possuem muitos recursos irrelevantes para o usuário mediano, como ligações rápidas para meta-data como Histórico, Diferenças e Contribuições do usuário.
* Pop-ups de navegação funcionam para ligações em todos os ''namespaces'', e em todos os projetos Wikimedia. Pré-visualizações de Página estão configuradas para funcionar apenas em ligações do espaço principal, e atualmente apenas nas Wikipedias.
* Pré-visualizações de Página são estilizadas para disponibilizar a leitura mais fácil. Atualmente, o tamanho das fontes em pop-ups de navegação é pequeno e as bordas são estreitas.
* Pré-visualizações de Página estão disponíveis para todos os usuários, não apenas para usuários logados.
* Pré-visualizações de Página usam um estilo visual consistente com o tratamento do tipo do artigo.
* Pré-visualizações de Página dão ênfase nas imagens-chave, para que o usuário tenha uma ideia do termo usando ambos texto e imagem.
* A ação disponibilizada no ''gadget'' parece fora de contexto, uma vez que precisamos validar qual das ações são úteis para leitores e editores.

=== Pré-Visualizações de HTML ===

Desde 1º de março de 2018, as visualizações de página agora exibem visualizações em HTML. Isso resolve muitos bugs pendentes, fornece representação correta de fórmulas matemáticas, químicas e outras, e garante que as visualizações exibam a mesma formatação do conteúdo do artigo.

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== Configurações ==

=== Ativação/Desativação ===

==== Para usuários deslogados ====
Usuários anônimos poderão desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página pelo ícone de engrenagem, exibido ao final de cada prévia. Caso o usuário desejar reativar o recurso, será possível atráves da ligação &quot;{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}&quot; disponível no final de toda página wiki.
Eles também podem desativar o JavaScript em seu navegador para desativá-lo permanentemente.
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
Hovercard english.png|Clique na engrenagem de configurações para desabilitar Pré-visualizações de Página
Page preview settings logged out.png|Selecione Desativar para desativar o recurso.
Reenablemodal.png|Instruções sobre como reativar estarão presentes.
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | Select disable to disable the feature
File:Reenablemodal.png | Instructions on how to re-enable will be presented
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| O link para reativar as pré-visualizações de página está disponível na parte inferior de cada página
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== Para usuários autenticados ====

Os usuários conectados podem controlar suas configurações de dois lugares. Eles podem ativar ou desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página na seção Aparência de Especial: Preferências. Os usuários conectados também podem desativar os Previews de página por meio do ícone de engrenagem exibido na parte inferior de cada visualização.
* Se um usuário conectado clicar na engrenagem de configurações, o sistema irá redirecioná-lo para a página de preferências do usuário.
* Se um usuário já tiver ativado o recurso beta de Hovercards, sua preferência será mantida e aparecerá na seção Aparência das preferências do usuário.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| Usuários podem ativar o recurso usando a engrenagem de configurações na parte inferior de cada prévia ou selecionando a opção diretamente da página de preferências do usuário.
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

== Métricas de sucesso e avaliação do recurso ==

Um número de testes qualitatuvis e quantitativos foram realizados para avaliar a performance do recurso de Pré-visualizações de Página. Esses testes tiveram como foco as seguintes questões:
* Os usuários gostaram das Pré-visualizações de Página, acharam-nos úteis?
* Como o recurso muda o comportamento de leitura, ele aumenta a precisão do usuário na seleção de artigos desejados?
* O lançamento das Pré-visualizações de Página teria efeito nas arrecadações de fundos?

=== Teste nas Wikipédias grega e catalã de 2015 ===

Um teste foi implementado por um período de 4 meses nas Wikipédias grega e catalã. Um número de problemas e ''bugs'' foram relatados, e a satisfação foi gravada numa pesquisa. A maioria dos usuários deram comentários positivos, achando as Pré-visualizações de Página (Cartões Flutuantes) úteis, fáceis e satisfatórios.

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/GreekCatalanTest|os resultados completos desses testes]].

=== Teste qualitativo de 2016 ===
Para determinar as posturas dos usuários diante do recurso e delinear mais mudanças ao comportamento do leitor, um estudo de painel remoto foi realizado o software [http://UserZoom.com UserZoom].
A maioria dos participantes foi positiva em relação às Pré-visualizações de Página.
Além do mais, a maioria dos participantes também não presenciou problemas em ativar e desativar o recurso.
Os usuários também descreveram o recurso em termos geralmente positivos e relataram que o mesmo não estava distraindo a experiência de leitura.

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|os resultados completos e análise deste teste]].

=== Testes A/B em 2016 em Wikipedia húngaras, italianas e russas ===

Para determinar as mudanças no comportamento de leitura e avaliar o sucesso do recurso Hovercards beta, foram lançados três testes A/B em Wikipedias húngaras, italianas e russas. O teste A/B em húngaro foi lançado em 7 de junho de 2016, os testes A/B em italiano e russo foram lançados em 23 de setembro de 2016.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A partir dos resultados desses testes, podemos concluir que os Hovercards facilitam mudanças positivas no comportamento de leitura, aumentando a precisão com que os usuários selecionam as páginas que leem, reduzindo o custo de exploração de outras páginas e permitindo que os usuários se concentrem seletivamente em um único tópico fornecendo contexto dentro de uma página.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During the process of collecting and analysing our data we ran into a number of bugs and issues within our instrumentation that allowed us to refine and improve, to ensure subsequent tests were issue-free.&lt;/span&gt;

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|os resultados completos e a análise desses testes]].

=== Teste 2017 A/B sobre Wikipedia em inglês e alemão ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Em 28 de agosto de 2017, lançamos um teste A/B para avaliar o desempenho do recurso antes da liberação desses projetos. Os testes serão executados por duas semanas simultaneamente como uma série de testes de angariação de fundos em enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The results, described in more detail [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|in the report]], displayed a decrease in pageviews, but an overall increase in the number of distinct pages that readers interact with, indicating that they are more likely to explore a larger variety of topics when the feature is on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also noted decreased usage of the back button and very low rates of disabling the feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition, we ran a number of fundraising tests on enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Improvements since English Wikipedia discussion from April 2016 ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
During the [[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |discussion]] from April 2016, a number of bugs, improvements, and other requests were identified which we have addressed in the following ways:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previews “getting stuck” in the open position
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have since refactored our code and this is no longer an issue
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Bolded text and mathematical formulas not appearing within the preview
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Currently, previews display in HTML and content is true to the article content
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to disable the feature from the card itself
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in and logged-out users can now disable the feature by selecting the settings gear within the card itself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to make sure page previews do not interfere with navigational popups
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in users may either have navigational popups or page previews. If you’re a navpopups user, you will not be able to enable page previews unless you turn off navpopups first, and vice versa
Providing more thorough research and A/B test results, performing a large-scale A/B test on English Wikipedia
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Since the discussion, we have performed [[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|two series of A/B tests]], the first on Hungarian, Russian, and Italian Wikipedias.  And the [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |second]] on English and German Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Limiting performance impact
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have worked with our performance team to minimize any issues page previews.  A [https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 dashboard] with detailed information on feature performance was created.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing a way to enable the feature for anonymous users only
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*This is ready as well.  As of March 2018, the feature is enabled by default for anonymous users on all Wikipedias except English and German
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing data on how often users disable the feature
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*For both of our 2017/18 A/B tests, the disable rate was around 0.01%.  Because the rate had been similarly low in earlier A/B tests, we also did a [[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |qualitative test]] to confirm that users did not have problems enabling or disabling the feature.  Our conclusion is that people know how to turn the feature off without difficulty but do so at extremely low rates.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing information on whether the feature was considered a nuisance
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Based on our qualitative testing, we concluded that tested users did not find the feature distracting, or a nuisance.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Páginas na lista negra ==

Por motivos de segurança, os Hovercards não serão carregados em determinadas páginas especiais. Nós nos referimos a essas páginas como &quot;páginas na lista negra&quot;. A versão inicial da lista negra pode ser encontrada aqui: {{phab|T170893}}.

== Iterações futuras e potenciais melhorias ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Following the general launch of Page Previews, we are planning on iterating on the feature to add functionality. These items will include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Configuration of images and other settings:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** a number of users have requested making images configurable within Page Previews. Request declined: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** other logged out preferences (more info [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|here]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Article titles - currently, only the summary of the article is available within Page Previews. As an iteration, we would like to display the title of each article along with its summary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Reference Tooltips ([[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]). The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using Page Previews to gain more information on each reference without scrolling to the bottom of the page&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Cross-wiki Page Previews ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]), and subsection links ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]]), particularly for Wiktionary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrate with Navigation Pop-ups - we would also like to expand the configuration of Page Previews to include some of the functionality planned in navigation pop-ups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Interacting with Page Previews text - a number of requests for interacting with preview text have been filed, including being able to copy and paste the text or export the text as a form or article summary. More info here  ([[phab:T146097|phab:T146097]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrating with Wiktionary items to provide definitions on hover.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interacting with Wiktionary items to provide definitions for unknown&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta_Features/Hovercards/FAQ |FAQ]] ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Por que Hovercards?
Este é um recurso destinado a melhorar a experiência de qualquer leitor que normalmente teria clicado em um link azul na Wikipédia porque eles precisavam de uma visão geral (definição) desse direitoy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How do we measure Page Previews performance?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
At the project level, administrators can determine how long a user should dwell on a link before a hover is triggered. If a project wants to be conservative, the lag can be longer. WMF will have a recommendation as to optimum dwell time that provides the best user experience while minimizing accidental hovers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Why can't users just turn on Page Previews if they want them?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Unfortunately, there is no good way to tell users about a new feature without showing it to them first. Central notice banners have been suggested, but running them for 2 weeks would not solve the needs of future users and we do not want to run them continuously. Notifying a user of a new feature is best done using a...hover-over.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What impact to Page Previews have on page views?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:According to A/B tests we did not see a large decrease in session depth across all Wikipedias. Average session depth (average number of pages viewed per session) [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|remained relatively equal]] between the Previews on and off groups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What about accessibility?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Page Previews only activate when the focus/hover state occurs over a link. They are usable for people who use keyboard navigation. For screen readers, Page Previews have proper [[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]] semantics declaring them as tooltips. In short, screen reader software ignore Page Previews.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; If I have Page Previews feedback or if I have a suggestion for making them better, where should I go?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Please go to [[Talk:Page_Previews|the Page Previews discussion page]].
&lt;/div&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Previews continues to show an old version of a page. What can I do?&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Preview shows the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|cached]] version of a page. If the page has been edited and you want Page Previews to show the new version right away, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|purge]] the page.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
;Analytics and instrumentation
:* Page Previews were instrumented to measure various aspects of usage. Please see the {{ll|Extension:Popups|nsp=0}} extension page for details and feel free to ask any clarifying questions.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To measure content usage via Page Previews, in an aggregated way that is compatible with the existing Pageviews data, a separate instrumentation [[phab:T186728|was set up]] that went live in April 2018. There are [[phab:T193524|plans]] to make some of this data public for the benefit of e.g. Wikipedia editors and academic researchers.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Project-level rollout discussions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update July 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Page previews are now available on all Wikipedias.  The feature is on by default for anonymous users and newly created accounts and off by default for accounts created before July 10, 2018.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update April 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The next step of the rollout for English and German Wikipedias is planned for the first half of April 2018. This deployment will include turning the feature on by default for logged-out users.  '''This will mean no changes for logged-in users.''' The feature will be off by default for logged-in editors, unless currently enabled. If you would like to enable it, it is available in your Preferences under “Appearance”. If you have the feature enabled already, it will stay on.  
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In terms of future changes for logged-in users, we have a few options we will be requesting feedback on:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Keep the feature off by default for logged-in users.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for new accounts only. Currently, when users move from being readers to contributors and create an account, the feature will seem to vanish, and that would be confusing.  As a further step in the feature rollout, we plan to change this configuration and enable the feature for all new accounts.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for existing logged-in users (Even if it were enabled for everyone, it would still be automatically suppressed for anyone who uses NAVPOPS.)
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Plan ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We began rolling out to Catalan, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias in early 2017. Data from the A/B tests represented highly favorable views of the feature. After this, we would like to continue rolling out in stages to other Wikipedias as described in the table below.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Code&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Language&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phase&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Onboarding&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Success&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dates&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All other Wikipedias except the remaining top 6&lt;/span&gt; || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|this message]] was sent to Wikipedia Village Pump (or equivalent) of the 247 wikis included in this phase on  19 April&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Onboarding Experience ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The onboarding experience for the feature will depend on the consensus of each community on having Page Previews on by default or providing users with an onboarding experience during which they can reject the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ver também ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (documentation of a - so far internal - dataset recording aggregate frequencies of seen page previews)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[:en:WP:POP|Navigation popups]] - the editor-focused gadget, started in 2005 by Lupin, available at most wikis
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ WMF blog post - Hovercards now available as a Beta Feature on all Wikimedia wikis] (March 2014)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The original specifications can be seen at [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]] and [https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|A list of similar browser extensions]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - The API specification for Page Previews
&lt;/div&gt;

== Referências ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>tt7sa0tower5250zwwkt92ubzz7kpxq</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402137</id>
      <parentid>5402135</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:22:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="34453" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
A ferramenta de '''Pré-visualizações de Página''' resolve o núcleo do problema de usuários precisando abrir abas múltiplas para conseguir entender uma palavra ou conceito dado o contexto do assunto que eles estão lendo.
Com Pré-visualizações de Página, sempre que um leitor passar o mouse em cima de uma ligação para outro artigo, um pequeno resumo do assunto e uma imagem (se disponível) é mostrada.
O usuário pode então decidir se deseja ler mais profundamente sobre aquele assunto antes de continuar com o artigo atual.
Uma descrição completa da funcionalidade de Pré-visualizações de Página pode ser encontrada [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|aqui]].
Uma visão geral sobre toda a documentação técnica relacionada é fornecida [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ neste post de blog] a partir de maio de 2018.

O recurso '''Pré-visualizações de Referência''' é um projeto relacionado. Ele mostra uma prévia de uma nota de rodapé sempre que um leitor passar por cima de seu marcador de nota de rodapé. Uma descrição desse recurso pode ser encontrada [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|na sua página de projeto]].

== Introdução ==
As Pré-visualizações de Página são desenhadas para reduzir o custo de exploração de uma ligação, assim como para promover o aprendizado deixando leitores ganharem contexto sobre o artigo que estão lendo ou para definir um termo, objeto, evento ou ideia que não conhecem sem navegar longe do tópico original.
Para leitores casuais, Pré-visualizações de Página vão fazer ser mais fácil para usuários conseguir uma olhada rápida de um artigo antes de decidir se vão ou não pesquisar sobre ele.
Usuários interessados em ler um artigo inteiro não serão distraídos ou desencorajados em ver conceitos desconhecidos - eles podem simplesmente ter uma prévia do conceito sem navegar para uma página nova.
Consequentemente, a sutileza da experiência do usuário para esses usuários será aumentada.

Houveram vários pedidos ao longo dos anos por um recurso semelhante; existem também extensões (veja a [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|lista]]) e um ''gadget'' muito usado (os [[:pt:WP:POP|''Popups'' de navegação]]) que solucionam o problema.
Pré-visualizações de Página foram construídas pela primeira vez como uma funcionalidade beta em 2014 (chamada de Cartões Flutuantes) e têm sido nossa ferramenta mais popular em termos de adoção, feedback de usuários e impacto no uso.
Na [[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|primeira discussão sobre Cartões Flutuantes]], no período de 2 anos, vários problemas entre todos os projetos foram identificados e resolvidos.
O equivalente móvel de Pré-visualizações de Página, implementado no app para Android [[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|em setembro de 2015]], resultou num crescimento de 20% em ligações clicadas por página.

O [[$configurações|painel de configurações]] das Pré-visualizações de Página permite que usuários anônimos ativem ou desativem o recurso baseado em suas preferências.
Usuários logados podem ativar ou desativar Pré-visualizações de Página pela seção de Aparência em Especial:Preferências.
Se os pop-ups de navegação e Pré-visualizações de Página estiverem ativos ao mesmo tempo (normalmente, para usuários logados que optaram via funcionalidade beta), pop-ups de navegação tomam precedência.
Para ativar Pré-visualizações de Página, pop-ups de navegação hão de estar desativados.

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|Exemplo de uma Pré-visualização de Página]]

== Design ==

Para cada iteração das Pré-visualizações de Página, cada prévia possuirá o seguinte:
* Uma porção do primeiro parágrafo do artigo;
* Uma imagem (se disponível) do artigo. Imagens aparecem na horizontal ou na vertical dependendo da localização da ligação dentro do artigo; e
* Uma engrenagem que permite o usuário ativar ou desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em grego.
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em chinês.
File:Hovercard english.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em inglês.
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Example of Page Previews in Chinese
File:Hovercard english.png|Example of Page Previews in English
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== Principais diferenças em comparação aos ''Popups'' de Navegação ===

* Os ''popups'' de navegação são para usuários experientes, e possuem muitos recursos irrelevantes para o usuário mediano, como ligações rápidas para meta-data como Histórico, Diferenças e Contribuições do usuário.
* Pop-ups de navegação funcionam para ligações em todos os ''namespaces'', e em todos os projetos Wikimedia. Pré-visualizações de Página estão configuradas para funcionar apenas em ligações do espaço principal, e atualmente apenas nas Wikipedias.
* Pré-visualizações de Página são estilizadas para disponibilizar a leitura mais fácil. Atualmente, o tamanho das fontes em pop-ups de navegação é pequeno e as bordas são estreitas.
* Pré-visualizações de Página estão disponíveis para todos os usuários, não apenas para usuários logados.
* Pré-visualizações de Página usam um estilo visual consistente com o tratamento do tipo do artigo.
* Pré-visualizações de Página dão ênfase nas imagens-chave, para que o usuário tenha uma ideia do termo usando ambos texto e imagem.
* A ação disponibilizada no ''gadget'' parece fora de contexto, uma vez que precisamos validar qual das ações são úteis para leitores e editores.

=== Pré-Visualizações de HTML ===

Desde 1º de março de 2018, as visualizações de página agora exibem visualizações em HTML. Isso resolve muitos bugs pendentes, fornece representação correta de fórmulas matemáticas, químicas e outras, e garante que as visualizações exibam a mesma formatação do conteúdo do artigo.

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== Configurações ==

=== Ativação/Desativação ===

==== Para usuários deslogados ====
Usuários anônimos poderão desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página pelo ícone de engrenagem, exibido ao final de cada prévia. Caso o usuário desejar reativar o recurso, será possível atráves da ligação &quot;{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}&quot; disponível no final de toda página wiki.
Eles também podem desativar o JavaScript em seu navegador para desativá-lo permanentemente.
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
Hovercard english.png|Clique na engrenagem de configurações para desabilitar Pré-visualizações de Página
Page preview settings logged out.png|Selecione Desativar para desativar o recurso.
Reenablemodal.png|Instruções sobre como reativar estarão presentes.
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | Select disable to disable the feature
File:Reenablemodal.png | Instructions on how to re-enable will be presented
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| O link para reativar as pré-visualizações de página está disponível na parte inferior de cada página
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== Para usuários autenticados ====

Os usuários conectados podem controlar suas configurações de dois lugares. Eles podem ativar ou desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página na seção Aparência de Especial: Preferências. Os usuários conectados também podem desativar os Previews de página por meio do ícone de engrenagem exibido na parte inferior de cada visualização.
* Se um usuário conectado clicar na engrenagem de configurações, o sistema irá redirecioná-lo para a página de preferências do usuário.
* Se um usuário já tiver ativado o recurso beta de Hovercards, sua preferência será mantida e aparecerá na seção Aparência das preferências do usuário.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| Usuários podem ativar o recurso usando a engrenagem de configurações na parte inferior de cada prévia ou selecionando a opção diretamente da página de preferências do usuário.
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

== Métricas de sucesso e avaliação do recurso ==

Um número de testes qualitatuvis e quantitativos foram realizados para avaliar a performance do recurso de Pré-visualizações de Página. Esses testes tiveram como foco as seguintes questões:
* Os usuários gostaram das Pré-visualizações de Página, acharam-nos úteis?
* Como o recurso muda o comportamento de leitura, ele aumenta a precisão do usuário na seleção de artigos desejados?
* O lançamento das Pré-visualizações de Página teria efeito nas arrecadações de fundos?

=== Teste nas Wikipédias grega e catalã de 2015 ===

Um teste foi implementado por um período de 4 meses nas Wikipédias grega e catalã. Um número de problemas e ''bugs'' foram relatados, e a satisfação foi gravada numa pesquisa. A maioria dos usuários deram comentários positivos, achando as Pré-visualizações de Página (Cartões Flutuantes) úteis, fáceis e satisfatórios.

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/GreekCatalanTest|os resultados completos desses testes]].

=== Teste qualitativo de 2016 ===
Para determinar as posturas dos usuários diante do recurso e delinear mais mudanças ao comportamento do leitor, um estudo de painel remoto foi realizado o software [http://UserZoom.com UserZoom].
A maioria dos participantes foi positiva em relação às Pré-visualizações de Página.
Além do mais, a maioria dos participantes também não presenciou problemas em ativar e desativar o recurso.
Os usuários também descreveram o recurso em termos geralmente positivos e relataram que o mesmo não estava distraindo a experiência de leitura.

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|os resultados completos e análise deste teste]].

=== Testes A/B em 2016 em Wikipedia húngaras, italianas e russas ===

Para determinar as mudanças no comportamento de leitura e avaliar o sucesso do recurso Hovercards beta, foram lançados três testes A/B em Wikipedias húngaras, italianas e russas. O teste A/B em húngaro foi lançado em 7 de junho de 2016, os testes A/B em italiano e russo foram lançados em 23 de setembro de 2016.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A partir dos resultados desses testes, podemos concluir que os Hovercards facilitam mudanças positivas no comportamento de leitura, aumentando a precisão com que os usuários selecionam as páginas que leem, reduzindo o custo de exploração de outras páginas e permitindo que os usuários se concentrem seletivamente em um único tópico fornecendo contexto dentro de uma página.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During the process of collecting and analysing our data we ran into a number of bugs and issues within our instrumentation that allowed us to refine and improve, to ensure subsequent tests were issue-free.&lt;/span&gt;

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|os resultados completos e a análise desses testes]].

=== Teste 2017 A/B sobre Wikipedia em inglês e alemão ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Em 28 de agosto de 2017, lançamos um teste A/B para avaliar o desempenho do recurso antes da liberação desses projetos. Os testes serão executados por duas semanas simultaneamente como uma série de testes de angariação de fundos em enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The results, described in more detail [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|in the report]], displayed a decrease in pageviews, but an overall increase in the number of distinct pages that readers interact with, indicating that they are more likely to explore a larger variety of topics when the feature is on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also noted decreased usage of the back button and very low rates of disabling the feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition, we ran a number of fundraising tests on enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Improvements since English Wikipedia discussion from April 2016 ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
During the [[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |discussion]] from April 2016, a number of bugs, improvements, and other requests were identified which we have addressed in the following ways:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previews “getting stuck” in the open position
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have since refactored our code and this is no longer an issue
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Bolded text and mathematical formulas not appearing within the preview
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Currently, previews display in HTML and content is true to the article content
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to disable the feature from the card itself
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in and logged-out users can now disable the feature by selecting the settings gear within the card itself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to make sure page previews do not interfere with navigational popups
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in users may either have navigational popups or page previews. If you’re a navpopups user, you will not be able to enable page previews unless you turn off navpopups first, and vice versa
Providing more thorough research and A/B test results, performing a large-scale A/B test on English Wikipedia
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Since the discussion, we have performed [[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|two series of A/B tests]], the first on Hungarian, Russian, and Italian Wikipedias.  And the [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |second]] on English and German Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Limiting performance impact
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have worked with our performance team to minimize any issues page previews.  A [https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 dashboard] with detailed information on feature performance was created.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing a way to enable the feature for anonymous users only
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*This is ready as well.  As of March 2018, the feature is enabled by default for anonymous users on all Wikipedias except English and German
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing data on how often users disable the feature
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*For both of our 2017/18 A/B tests, the disable rate was around 0.01%.  Because the rate had been similarly low in earlier A/B tests, we also did a [[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |qualitative test]] to confirm that users did not have problems enabling or disabling the feature.  Our conclusion is that people know how to turn the feature off without difficulty but do so at extremely low rates.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing information on whether the feature was considered a nuisance
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Based on our qualitative testing, we concluded that tested users did not find the feature distracting, or a nuisance.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Páginas na lista negra ==

Por motivos de segurança, os Hovercards não serão carregados em determinadas páginas especiais. Nós nos referimos a essas páginas como &quot;páginas na lista negra&quot;. A versão inicial da lista negra pode ser encontrada aqui: {{phab|T170893}}.

== Iterações futuras e potenciais melhorias ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Following the general launch of Page Previews, we are planning on iterating on the feature to add functionality. These items will include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Configuration of images and other settings:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** a number of users have requested making images configurable within Page Previews. Request declined: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** other logged out preferences (more info [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|here]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Article titles - currently, only the summary of the article is available within Page Previews. As an iteration, we would like to display the title of each article along with its summary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Reference Tooltips ([[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]). The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using Page Previews to gain more information on each reference without scrolling to the bottom of the page&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Cross-wiki Page Previews ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]), and subsection links ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]]), particularly for Wiktionary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrate with Navigation Pop-ups - we would also like to expand the configuration of Page Previews to include some of the functionality planned in navigation pop-ups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Interacting with Page Previews text - a number of requests for interacting with preview text have been filed, including being able to copy and paste the text or export the text as a form or article summary. More info here  ([[phab:T146097|phab:T146097]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrating with Wiktionary items to provide definitions on hover.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interacting with Wiktionary items to provide definitions for unknown&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta_Features/Hovercards/FAQ |FAQ]] ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Por que Hovercards?
Este é um recurso destinado a melhorar a experiência de qualquer leitor que normalmente teria clicado em um link azul na Wikipédia porque eles precisavam de uma visão geral (definição) desse direitoy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How do we measure Page Previews performance?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
At the project level, administrators can determine how long a user should dwell on a link before a hover is triggered. If a project wants to be conservative, the lag can be longer. WMF will have a recommendation as to optimum dwell time that provides the best user experience while minimizing accidental hovers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Why can't users just turn on Page Previews if they want them?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Unfortunately, there is no good way to tell users about a new feature without showing it to them first. Central notice banners have been suggested, but running them for 2 weeks would not solve the needs of future users and we do not want to run them continuously. Notifying a user of a new feature is best done using a...hover-over.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What impact to Page Previews have on page views?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:According to A/B tests we did not see a large decrease in session depth across all Wikipedias. Average session depth (average number of pages viewed per session) [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|remained relatively equal]] between the Previews on and off groups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What about accessibility?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Page Previews only activate when the focus/hover state occurs over a link. They are usable for people who use keyboard navigation. For screen readers, Page Previews have proper [[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]] semantics declaring them as tooltips. In short, screen reader software ignore Page Previews.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; If I have Page Previews feedback or if I have a suggestion for making them better, where should I go?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Please go to [[Talk:Page_Previews|the Page Previews discussion page]].
&lt;/div&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Previews continues to show an old version of a page. What can I do?&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Preview shows the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|cached]] version of a page. If the page has been edited and you want Page Previews to show the new version right away, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|purge]] the page.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
;Analytics and instrumentation
:* Page Previews were instrumented to measure various aspects of usage. Please see the {{ll|Extension:Popups|nsp=0}} extension page for details and feel free to ask any clarifying questions.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To measure content usage via Page Previews, in an aggregated way that is compatible with the existing Pageviews data, a separate instrumentation [[phab:T186728|was set up]] that went live in April 2018. There are [[phab:T193524|plans]] to make some of this data public for the benefit of e.g. Wikipedia editors and academic researchers.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Project-level rollout discussions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update July 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Page previews are now available on all Wikipedias.  The feature is on by default for anonymous users and newly created accounts and off by default for accounts created before July 10, 2018.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update April 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The next step of the rollout for English and German Wikipedias is planned for the first half of April 2018. This deployment will include turning the feature on by default for logged-out users.  '''This will mean no changes for logged-in users.''' The feature will be off by default for logged-in editors, unless currently enabled. If you would like to enable it, it is available in your Preferences under “Appearance”. If you have the feature enabled already, it will stay on.  
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In terms of future changes for logged-in users, we have a few options we will be requesting feedback on:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Keep the feature off by default for logged-in users.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for new accounts only. Currently, when users move from being readers to contributors and create an account, the feature will seem to vanish, and that would be confusing.  As a further step in the feature rollout, we plan to change this configuration and enable the feature for all new accounts.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for existing logged-in users (Even if it were enabled for everyone, it would still be automatically suppressed for anyone who uses NAVPOPS.)
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Plan ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We began rolling out to Catalan, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias in early 2017. Data from the A/B tests represented highly favorable views of the feature. After this, we would like to continue rolling out in stages to other Wikipedias as described in the table below.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Code&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Language&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phase&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Onboarding&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Success&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dates&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All other Wikipedias except the remaining top 6&lt;/span&gt; || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|this message]] was sent to Wikipedia Village Pump (or equivalent) of the 247 wikis included in this phase on  19 April&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Onboarding Experience ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The onboarding experience for the feature will depend on the consensus of each community on having Page Previews on by default or providing users with an onboarding experience during which they can reject the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ver também ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (documentation of a - so far internal - dataset recording aggregate frequencies of seen page previews)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[:en:WP:POP|Navigation popups]] - the editor-focused gadget, started in 2005 by Lupin, available at most wikis
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ WMF blog post - Hovercards now available as a Beta Feature on all Wikimedia wikis] (March 2014)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The original specifications can be seen at [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]] and [https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|A list of similar browser extensions]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - The API specification for Page Previews
&lt;/div&gt;

== Referências ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>k1j83lrtetrkc2d0eq6g877jxw9m6uy</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402143</id>
      <parentid>5402137</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:23:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="34401" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
A ferramenta de '''Pré-visualizações de Página''' resolve o núcleo do problema de usuários precisando abrir abas múltiplas para conseguir entender uma palavra ou conceito dado o contexto do assunto que eles estão lendo.
Com Pré-visualizações de Página, sempre que um leitor passar o mouse em cima de uma ligação para outro artigo, um pequeno resumo do assunto e uma imagem (se disponível) é mostrada.
O usuário pode então decidir se deseja ler mais profundamente sobre aquele assunto antes de continuar com o artigo atual.
Uma descrição completa da funcionalidade de Pré-visualizações de Página pode ser encontrada [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|aqui]].
Uma visão geral sobre toda a documentação técnica relacionada é fornecida [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ neste post de blog] a partir de maio de 2018.

O recurso '''Pré-visualizações de Referência''' é um projeto relacionado. Ele mostra uma prévia de uma nota de rodapé sempre que um leitor passar por cima de seu marcador de nota de rodapé. Uma descrição desse recurso pode ser encontrada [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|na sua página de projeto]].

== Introdução ==
As Pré-visualizações de Página são desenhadas para reduzir o custo de exploração de uma ligação, assim como para promover o aprendizado deixando leitores ganharem contexto sobre o artigo que estão lendo ou para definir um termo, objeto, evento ou ideia que não conhecem sem navegar longe do tópico original.
Para leitores casuais, Pré-visualizações de Página vão fazer ser mais fácil para usuários conseguir uma olhada rápida de um artigo antes de decidir se vão ou não pesquisar sobre ele.
Usuários interessados em ler um artigo inteiro não serão distraídos ou desencorajados em ver conceitos desconhecidos - eles podem simplesmente ter uma prévia do conceito sem navegar para uma página nova.
Consequentemente, a sutileza da experiência do usuário para esses usuários será aumentada.

Houveram vários pedidos ao longo dos anos por um recurso semelhante; existem também extensões (veja a [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|lista]]) e um ''gadget'' muito usado (os [[:pt:WP:POP|''Popups'' de navegação]]) que solucionam o problema.
Pré-visualizações de Página foram construídas pela primeira vez como uma funcionalidade beta em 2014 (chamada de Cartões Flutuantes) e têm sido nossa ferramenta mais popular em termos de adoção, feedback de usuários e impacto no uso.
Na [[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|primeira discussão sobre Cartões Flutuantes]], no período de 2 anos, vários problemas entre todos os projetos foram identificados e resolvidos.
O equivalente móvel de Pré-visualizações de Página, implementado no app para Android [[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|em setembro de 2015]], resultou num crescimento de 20% em ligações clicadas por página.

O [[$configurações|painel de configurações]] das Pré-visualizações de Página permite que usuários anônimos ativem ou desativem o recurso baseado em suas preferências.
Usuários logados podem ativar ou desativar Pré-visualizações de Página pela seção de Aparência em Especial:Preferências.
Se os pop-ups de navegação e Pré-visualizações de Página estiverem ativos ao mesmo tempo (normalmente, para usuários logados que optaram via funcionalidade beta), pop-ups de navegação tomam precedência.
Para ativar Pré-visualizações de Página, pop-ups de navegação hão de estar desativados.

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|Exemplo de uma Pré-visualização de Página]]

== Design ==

Para cada iteração das Pré-visualizações de Página, cada prévia possuirá o seguinte:
* Uma porção do primeiro parágrafo do artigo;
* Uma imagem (se disponível) do artigo. Imagens aparecem na horizontal ou na vertical dependendo da localização da ligação dentro do artigo; e
* Uma engrenagem que permite o usuário ativar ou desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em grego.
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em chinês.
File:Hovercard english.png|Exemplo de Pré-visualizações de Página em inglês.
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Example of Page Previews in Chinese
File:Hovercard english.png|Example of Page Previews in English
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== Principais diferenças em comparação aos ''Popups'' de Navegação ===

* Os ''popups'' de navegação são para usuários experientes, e possuem muitos recursos irrelevantes para o usuário mediano, como ligações rápidas para meta-data como Histórico, Diferenças e Contribuições do usuário.
* Pop-ups de navegação funcionam para ligações em todos os ''namespaces'', e em todos os projetos Wikimedia. Pré-visualizações de Página estão configuradas para funcionar apenas em ligações do espaço principal, e atualmente apenas nas Wikipedias.
* Pré-visualizações de Página são estilizadas para disponibilizar a leitura mais fácil. Atualmente, o tamanho das fontes em pop-ups de navegação é pequeno e as bordas são estreitas.
* Pré-visualizações de Página estão disponíveis para todos os usuários, não apenas para usuários logados.
* Pré-visualizações de Página usam um estilo visual consistente com o tratamento do tipo do artigo.
* Pré-visualizações de Página dão ênfase nas imagens-chave, para que o usuário tenha uma ideia do termo usando ambos texto e imagem.
* A ação disponibilizada no ''gadget'' parece fora de contexto, uma vez que precisamos validar qual das ações são úteis para leitores e editores.

=== Pré-Visualizações de HTML ===

Desde 1º de março de 2018, as visualizações de página agora exibem visualizações em HTML. Isso resolve muitos bugs pendentes, fornece representação correta de fórmulas matemáticas, químicas e outras, e garante que as visualizações exibam a mesma formatação do conteúdo do artigo.

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== Configurações ==

=== Ativação/Desativação ===

==== Para usuários deslogados ====
Usuários anônimos poderão desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página pelo ícone de engrenagem, exibido ao final de cada prévia. Caso o usuário desejar reativar o recurso, será possível atráves da ligação &quot;{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}&quot; disponível no final de toda página wiki.
Eles também podem desativar o JavaScript em seu navegador para desativá-lo permanentemente.
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
Hovercard english.png|Clique na engrenagem de configurações para desabilitar Pré-visualizações de Página
Page preview settings logged out.png|Selecione Desativar para desativar o recurso.
Reenablemodal.png|Instruções sobre como reativar estarão presentes.
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | Select disable to disable the feature
File:Reenablemodal.png | Instructions on how to re-enable will be presented
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| O link para reativar as pré-visualizações de página está disponível na parte inferior de cada página
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== Para usuários autenticados ====

Os usuários conectados podem controlar suas configurações de dois lugares. Eles podem ativar ou desativar as Pré-visualizações de Página na seção Aparência de Especial: Preferências. Os usuários conectados também podem desativar os Previews de página por meio do ícone de engrenagem exibido na parte inferior de cada visualização.
* Se um usuário conectado clicar na engrenagem de configurações, o sistema irá redirecioná-lo para a página de preferências do usuário.
* Se um usuário já tiver ativado o recurso beta de Hovercards, sua preferência será mantida e aparecerá na seção Aparência das preferências do usuário.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| Usuários podem ativar o recurso usando a engrenagem de configurações na parte inferior de cada prévia ou selecionando a opção diretamente da página de preferências do usuário.
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

== Métricas de sucesso e avaliação do recurso ==

Um número de testes qualitatuvis e quantitativos foram realizados para avaliar a performance do recurso de Pré-visualizações de Página. Esses testes tiveram como foco as seguintes questões:
* Os usuários gostaram das Pré-visualizações de Página, acharam-nos úteis?
* Como o recurso muda o comportamento de leitura, ele aumenta a precisão do usuário na seleção de artigos desejados?
* O lançamento das Pré-visualizações de Página teria efeito nas arrecadações de fundos?

=== Teste nas Wikipédias grega e catalã de 2015 ===

Um teste foi implementado por um período de 4 meses nas Wikipédias grega e catalã. Um número de problemas e ''bugs'' foram relatados, e a satisfação foi gravada numa pesquisa. A maioria dos usuários deram comentários positivos, achando as Pré-visualizações de Página (Cartões Flutuantes) úteis, fáceis e satisfatórios.

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/GreekCatalanTest|os resultados completos desses testes]].

=== Teste qualitativo de 2016 ===
Para determinar as posturas dos usuários diante do recurso e delinear mais mudanças ao comportamento do leitor, um estudo de painel remoto foi realizado o software [http://UserZoom.com UserZoom].
A maioria dos participantes foi positiva em relação às Pré-visualizações de Página.
Além do mais, a maioria dos participantes também não presenciou problemas em ativar e desativar o recurso.
Os usuários também descreveram o recurso em termos geralmente positivos e relataram que o mesmo não estava distraindo a experiência de leitura.

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|os resultados completos e análise deste teste]].

=== Testes A/B em 2016 em Wikipedia húngaras, italianas e russas ===

Para determinar as mudanças no comportamento de leitura e avaliar o sucesso do recurso Hovercards beta, foram lançados três testes A/B em Wikipedias húngaras, italianas e russas. O teste A/B em húngaro foi lançado em 7 de junho de 2016, os testes A/B em italiano e russo foram lançados em 23 de setembro de 2016.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;A partir dos resultados desses testes, podemos concluir que os Hovercards facilitam mudanças positivas no comportamento de leitura, aumentando a precisão com que os usuários selecionam as páginas que leem, reduzindo o custo de exploração de outras páginas e permitindo que os usuários se concentrem seletivamente em um único tópico fornecendo contexto dentro de uma página.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During the process of collecting and analysing our data we ran into a number of bugs and issues within our instrumentation that allowed us to refine and improve, to ensure subsequent tests were issue-free.&lt;/span&gt;

Leia [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|os resultados completos e a análise desses testes]].

=== Teste 2017 A/B sobre Wikipedia em inglês e alemão ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Em 28 de agosto de 2017, lançamos um teste A/B para avaliar o desempenho do recurso antes da liberação desses projetos. Os testes serão executados por duas semanas simultaneamente como uma série de testes de angariação de fundos em enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The results, described in more detail [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|in the report]], displayed a decrease in pageviews, but an overall increase in the number of distinct pages that readers interact with, indicating that they are more likely to explore a larger variety of topics when the feature is on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also noted decreased usage of the back button and very low rates of disabling the feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition, we ran a number of fundraising tests on enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Improvements since English Wikipedia discussion from April 2016 ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
During the [[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |discussion]] from April 2016, a number of bugs, improvements, and other requests were identified which we have addressed in the following ways:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previews “getting stuck” in the open position
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have since refactored our code and this is no longer an issue
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Bolded text and mathematical formulas not appearing within the preview
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Currently, previews display in HTML and content is true to the article content
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to disable the feature from the card itself
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in and logged-out users can now disable the feature by selecting the settings gear within the card itself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to make sure page previews do not interfere with navigational popups
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in users may either have navigational popups or page previews. If you’re a navpopups user, you will not be able to enable page previews unless you turn off navpopups first, and vice versa
Providing more thorough research and A/B test results, performing a large-scale A/B test on English Wikipedia
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Since the discussion, we have performed [[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|two series of A/B tests]], the first on Hungarian, Russian, and Italian Wikipedias.  And the [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |second]] on English and German Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Limiting performance impact
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have worked with our performance team to minimize any issues page previews.  A [https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 dashboard] with detailed information on feature performance was created.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing a way to enable the feature for anonymous users only
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*This is ready as well.  As of March 2018, the feature is enabled by default for anonymous users on all Wikipedias except English and German
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing data on how often users disable the feature
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*For both of our 2017/18 A/B tests, the disable rate was around 0.01%.  Because the rate had been similarly low in earlier A/B tests, we also did a [[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |qualitative test]] to confirm that users did not have problems enabling or disabling the feature.  Our conclusion is that people know how to turn the feature off without difficulty but do so at extremely low rates.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing information on whether the feature was considered a nuisance
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Based on our qualitative testing, we concluded that tested users did not find the feature distracting, or a nuisance.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Páginas na lista negra ==

Por motivos de segurança, os Hovercards não serão carregados em determinadas páginas especiais. Nós nos referimos a essas páginas como &quot;páginas na lista negra&quot;. A versão inicial da lista negra pode ser encontrada aqui: {{phab|T170893}}.

== Iterações futuras e potenciais melhorias ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Following the general launch of Page Previews, we are planning on iterating on the feature to add functionality. These items will include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Configuration of images and other settings:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** a number of users have requested making images configurable within Page Previews. Request declined: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** other logged out preferences (more info [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|here]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Article titles - currently, only the summary of the article is available within Page Previews. As an iteration, we would like to display the title of each article along with its summary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Reference Tooltips ([[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]). The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using Page Previews to gain more information on each reference without scrolling to the bottom of the page&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Cross-wiki Page Previews ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]), and subsection links ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]]), particularly for Wiktionary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrate with Navigation Pop-ups - we would also like to expand the configuration of Page Previews to include some of the functionality planned in navigation pop-ups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Interacting with Page Previews text - a number of requests for interacting with preview text have been filed, including being able to copy and paste the text or export the text as a form or article summary. More info here  ([[phab:T146097|phab:T146097]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrating with Wiktionary items to provide definitions on hover.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interacting with Wiktionary items to provide definitions for unknown&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/FAQ|FAQ]] ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Por que Hovercards?
Este é um recurso destinado a melhorar a experiência de qualquer leitor que normalmente teria clicado em um link azul na Wikipédia porque eles precisavam de uma visão geral (definição) desse direitoy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How do we measure Page Previews performance?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
At the project level, administrators can determine how long a user should dwell on a link before a hover is triggered. If a project wants to be conservative, the lag can be longer. WMF will have a recommendation as to optimum dwell time that provides the best user experience while minimizing accidental hovers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Why can't users just turn on Page Previews if they want them?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Unfortunately, there is no good way to tell users about a new feature without showing it to them first. Central notice banners have been suggested, but running them for 2 weeks would not solve the needs of future users and we do not want to run them continuously. Notifying a user of a new feature is best done using a...hover-over.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What impact to Page Previews have on page views?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:According to A/B tests we did not see a large decrease in session depth across all Wikipedias. Average session depth (average number of pages viewed per session) [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|remained relatively equal]] between the Previews on and off groups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What about accessibility?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Page Previews only activate when the focus/hover state occurs over a link. They are usable for people who use keyboard navigation. For screen readers, Page Previews have proper [[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]] semantics declaring them as tooltips. In short, screen reader software ignore Page Previews.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; If I have Page Previews feedback or if I have a suggestion for making them better, where should I go?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Please go to [[Talk:Page_Previews|the Page Previews discussion page]].
&lt;/div&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Previews continues to show an old version of a page. What can I do?&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Preview shows the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|cached]] version of a page. If the page has been edited and you want Page Previews to show the new version right away, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|purge]] the page.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
;Analytics and instrumentation
:* Page Previews were instrumented to measure various aspects of usage. Please see the {{ll|Extension:Popups|nsp=0}} extension page for details and feel free to ask any clarifying questions.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To measure content usage via Page Previews, in an aggregated way that is compatible with the existing Pageviews data, a separate instrumentation [[phab:T186728|was set up]] that went live in April 2018. There are [[phab:T193524|plans]] to make some of this data public for the benefit of e.g. Wikipedia editors and academic researchers.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Project-level rollout discussions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update July 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Page previews are now available on all Wikipedias.  The feature is on by default for anonymous users and newly created accounts and off by default for accounts created before July 10, 2018.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update April 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The next step of the rollout for English and German Wikipedias is planned for the first half of April 2018. This deployment will include turning the feature on by default for logged-out users.  '''This will mean no changes for logged-in users.''' The feature will be off by default for logged-in editors, unless currently enabled. If you would like to enable it, it is available in your Preferences under “Appearance”. If you have the feature enabled already, it will stay on.  
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In terms of future changes for logged-in users, we have a few options we will be requesting feedback on:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Keep the feature off by default for logged-in users.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for new accounts only. Currently, when users move from being readers to contributors and create an account, the feature will seem to vanish, and that would be confusing.  As a further step in the feature rollout, we plan to change this configuration and enable the feature for all new accounts.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for existing logged-in users (Even if it were enabled for everyone, it would still be automatically suppressed for anyone who uses NAVPOPS.)
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Plan ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We began rolling out to Catalan, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias in early 2017. Data from the A/B tests represented highly favorable views of the feature. After this, we would like to continue rolling out in stages to other Wikipedias as described in the table below.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Code&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Language&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phase&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Onboarding&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Success&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dates&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All other Wikipedias except the remaining top 6&lt;/span&gt; || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|this message]] was sent to Wikipedia Village Pump (or equivalent) of the 247 wikis included in this phase on  19 April&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Onboarding Experience ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The onboarding experience for the feature will depend on the consensus of each community on having Page Previews on by default or providing users with an onboarding experience during which they can reject the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ver também ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (documentation of a - so far internal - dataset recording aggregate frequencies of seen page previews)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[:en:WP:POP|Navigation popups]] - the editor-focused gadget, started in 2005 by Lupin, available at most wikis
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ WMF blog post - Hovercards now available as a Beta Feature on all Wikimedia wikis] (March 2014)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The original specifications can be seen at [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]] and [https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|A list of similar browser extensions]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - The API specification for Page Previews
&lt;/div&gt;

== Referências ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>rzoqcqtykucar01sbuu00ztij8b4fwh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>MediaWiki 1.30/pt-br</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>702347</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402094</id>
      <parentid>5066293</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:41:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9625" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''MediaWiki 1.30''' é a  lançamento legado do MediaWiki. Consulte o arquivo $relnotes para a lista completa de mudanças. Foi implantado nos wikis da Wikimedia Foundation através do incremental &quot;wmf&quot;-branches starting em 9 de maio de 2017. A versão estável 1.30.0 foi lançada em 12 de dezembro de 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consult the {{RELEASE-NOTES}} file for the full list of changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It was deployed on Wikimedia Foundation wikis through incremental &quot;wmf&quot;-branches starting on 9 May 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 1.30.0 stable release was released on 12 December 2017.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Baixe do [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ latest releases] ou marque o &lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt; ramo [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|no Git]] para seguir este lançamento.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== Mudanças de configuração ===
* O local &quot;C.UTF-8&quot;  deve ser usado para &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;, se disponível, para evitar comportamentos inesperados quando o código usa comparações de string sensíveis à região. Por exemplo, a extensão Scribunto considera &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; na maioria dos locais, pois ignora o caso.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; agora afeta LC_ALL em vez de apenas LC_CTYPE. Veja documentação de &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; para detalhes.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; agora é aplicado para todos os pedidos. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; está obsoleto e um não-op, já que não é mais necessário.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; agora pode especificar funções de retorno de chamada como uma alternativa para nomes de classes simples. Isso é destinado a extensões que desejam controle sobre a instanciação de seus trabalhos, para permitir a injeção de dependência adequada.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; agora pode especificar as funções de retorno de chamada como uma alternativa aos nomes de classe simples, usando a chave 'fábrica' na matriz de descrição do módulo. Isso permite que a injeção de dependência seja usada para módulos ResourceLoader.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}} foi removido.
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) {{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}} adicionado (desligado por padrão).
* {{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} foi introduzido para controlar o tamanho dos intervalos de IP que podem ser consultados em [[Special:Contributions]].

=== Novos recursos ===
* ([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Adicionado a capacidade de procurar contribuições dentro de um intervalo de IP em [[Special:Contributions]]. Referências a revisões feitas por IPs são armazenadas no {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} para fazer consultas mais eficientes.
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Saída de &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; agora será embrulhado em um {{tag|div|open}} com &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; por padrão. Isso pode ser alterado ou desativado usando &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho, permitindo que as extensões permitam que as marcas específicas do software sejam adicionadas pelos usuários.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho para permitir que as extensões registrem opções de analisador adicionais.
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Incluído Pig Latin, um jogo de linguagem em inglês, como um variante [[LanguageConverter]]. Isso permite que os desenvolvedores de língua inglesa desenvolvam e testem o LanguageConverter mais facilmente. Pig Latin pode ser habilitado configurando&lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; para true.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho para permitir que as extensões purguem os dados que dependem da tabela &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt;.
* Adicionado valores de configuração JS &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; para a saída das páginas de difração.

=== Alterações na API de Ação ===
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=a saída de análise será envolvida em um {{tag|div|open}} com &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; por padrão. Isso pode ser alterado ou desativado usando o novo parâmetro '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;'.
* Quando &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; não é '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abortar motivos de &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; será formatado conforme especificado pelos parâmetros do formatador de erros.
* &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; agora pode manipular texto arbitrário, revisões excluídas e retornar usuários e editar comentários.
* ([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) O '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', e '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; estão obsoletos, assim como os parâmetros do mesmo nome para &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, e &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, ou &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; em vez de.

=== Mudanças internas da API de ação ===
* &lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; as mensagens estão obsoletas. A mensagem existente deve ser dividida entre &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; e &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.
* ([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Os valores individuais dos parâmetros de vários valores agora podem ser marcados como obsoletos.

=== Idiomas atualizados ===
* Suporte para kbp (Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè) foi adicionado.

=== Outras mudanças ===
* O uso de uma matriz associativa para &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, onde o endereço IP está na chave em vez do valor, está obsoleto (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Por favor, converta esses arrays para indexados/sequenciais (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).
* &lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (obsoleto em 1.23) foi removido.
* &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; estão obsoletos. Não há chamadores conhecidos.
* &lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto. O novo &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto. O novo &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* O &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; O gancho (obsoleto em 1.21) foi removido.
* Os métodos &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt;  (ambos obsoletos em 1.24) foram removidos.
* &lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; estavam obsoletos. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* ([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) O tratamento do préprocessador da marcação LanguageConverter foi melhorado. Como resultado do novo manuseio uniforme, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' pode precisar ser escapado (por exemplo, como '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') onde ocorre dentro de argumentos de predefinições ou wikilinks.
* ([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Os movimentos de página agora são contados como edições para fins de autopromoção, ''i.e.'', eles incrementam o campo &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; no banco de dados.
* Dois novos ganchos, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;,foram adicionados para manipular Special:Log e Special:NewPages lines.
* Os ganchos &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; tem um parâmetro adicional, para manipular atributos de dados HTML de RC / linhas de histórico. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; pode fazer isso através do subarray&lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt;.
* ([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) O método &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; foi removido.
* &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; agora lançará uma exceção se for aprovada ParserOptions que polui o cache do analisador. Os chamadores devem usar &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; para criar o objeto &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; e altere apenas as opções que afetam a chave de cache do analisador.
* &lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; está obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; não suporta mais passar em um valor direto, requer uma função de fábrica chamada ou um nome de classe.
* O global &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; , &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, e &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; estão todos obsoletos. O principal &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instância deve ser obtida em vez de &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt;. Acesso ao subjacente &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; é possível através do novo método &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;.
* &lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (obsoleto em 1.27) foi removido.

== Subpáginas ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>fu8hydvmvsy4vvzdic01oku9iiipp2u</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402104</id>
      <parentid>5402094</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:45:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9585" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''MediaWiki 1.30''' é a  lançamento legado do MediaWiki. Consulte o arquivo $relnotes para a lista completa de mudanças. Foi implantado nos wikis da Wikimedia Foundation através do incremental &quot;wmf&quot;-branches starting em 9 de maio de 2017. A versão estável 1.30.0 foi lançada em 12 de dezembro de 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consult the {{RELEASE-NOTES}} file for the full list of changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It was deployed on Wikimedia Foundation wikis through incremental &quot;wmf&quot;-branches starting on 9 May 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 1.30.0 stable release was released on 12 December 2017.&lt;/span&gt;

Baixe do [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ latest releases] ou marque o &lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt; ramo [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|no Git]] para seguir este lançamento.

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== Mudanças de configuração ===
* O local &quot;C.UTF-8&quot;  deve ser usado para &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;, se disponível, para evitar comportamentos inesperados quando o código usa comparações de string sensíveis à região. Por exemplo, a extensão Scribunto considera &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; na maioria dos locais, pois ignora o caso.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; agora afeta LC_ALL em vez de apenas LC_CTYPE. Veja documentação de &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; para detalhes.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; agora é aplicado para todos os pedidos. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; está obsoleto e um não-op, já que não é mais necessário.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; agora pode especificar funções de retorno de chamada como uma alternativa para nomes de classes simples. Isso é destinado a extensões que desejam controle sobre a instanciação de seus trabalhos, para permitir a injeção de dependência adequada.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; agora pode especificar as funções de retorno de chamada como uma alternativa aos nomes de classe simples, usando a chave 'fábrica' na matriz de descrição do módulo. Isso permite que a injeção de dependência seja usada para módulos ResourceLoader.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}} foi removido.
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) {{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}} adicionado (desligado por padrão).
* {{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} foi introduzido para controlar o tamanho dos intervalos de IP que podem ser consultados em [[Special:Contributions]].

=== Novos recursos ===
* ([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Adicionado a capacidade de procurar contribuições dentro de um intervalo de IP em [[Special:Contributions]]. Referências a revisões feitas por IPs são armazenadas no {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} para fazer consultas mais eficientes.
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Saída de &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; agora será embrulhado em um {{tag|div|open}} com &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; por padrão. Isso pode ser alterado ou desativado usando &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho, permitindo que as extensões permitam que as marcas específicas do software sejam adicionadas pelos usuários.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho para permitir que as extensões registrem opções de analisador adicionais.
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Incluído Pig Latin, um jogo de linguagem em inglês, como um variante [[LanguageConverter]]. Isso permite que os desenvolvedores de língua inglesa desenvolvam e testem o LanguageConverter mais facilmente. Pig Latin pode ser habilitado configurando&lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; para true.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho para permitir que as extensões purguem os dados que dependem da tabela &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt;.
* Adicionado valores de configuração JS &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; para a saída das páginas de difração.

=== Alterações na API de Ação ===
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=a saída de análise será envolvida em um {{tag|div|open}} com &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; por padrão. Isso pode ser alterado ou desativado usando o novo parâmetro '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;'.
* Quando &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; não é '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abortar motivos de &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; será formatado conforme especificado pelos parâmetros do formatador de erros.
* &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; agora pode manipular texto arbitrário, revisões excluídas e retornar usuários e editar comentários.
* ([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) O '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', e '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; estão obsoletos, assim como os parâmetros do mesmo nome para &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, e &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, ou &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; em vez de.

=== Mudanças internas da API de ação ===
* &lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; as mensagens estão obsoletas. A mensagem existente deve ser dividida entre &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; e &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.
* ([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Os valores individuais dos parâmetros de vários valores agora podem ser marcados como obsoletos.

=== Idiomas atualizados ===
* Suporte para kbp (Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè) foi adicionado.

=== Outras mudanças ===
* O uso de uma matriz associativa para &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, onde o endereço IP está na chave em vez do valor, está obsoleto (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Por favor, converta esses arrays para indexados/sequenciais (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).
* &lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (obsoleto em 1.23) foi removido.
* &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; estão obsoletos. Não há chamadores conhecidos.
* &lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto. O novo &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto. O novo &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* O &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; O gancho (obsoleto em 1.21) foi removido.
* Os métodos &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt;  (ambos obsoletos em 1.24) foram removidos.
* &lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; estavam obsoletos. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* ([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) O tratamento do préprocessador da marcação LanguageConverter foi melhorado. Como resultado do novo manuseio uniforme, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' pode precisar ser escapado (por exemplo, como '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') onde ocorre dentro de argumentos de predefinições ou wikilinks.
* ([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Os movimentos de página agora são contados como edições para fins de autopromoção, ''i.e.'', eles incrementam o campo &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; no banco de dados.
* Dois novos ganchos, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;,foram adicionados para manipular Special:Log e Special:NewPages lines.
* Os ganchos &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; tem um parâmetro adicional, para manipular atributos de dados HTML de RC / linhas de histórico. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; pode fazer isso através do subarray&lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt;.
* ([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) O método &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; foi removido.
* &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; agora lançará uma exceção se for aprovada ParserOptions que polui o cache do analisador. Os chamadores devem usar &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; para criar o objeto &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; e altere apenas as opções que afetam a chave de cache do analisador.
* &lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; está obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; não suporta mais passar em um valor direto, requer uma função de fábrica chamada ou um nome de classe.
* O global &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; , &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, e &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; estão todos obsoletos. O principal &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instância deve ser obtida em vez de &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt;. Acesso ao subjacente &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; é possível através do novo método &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;.
* &lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (obsoleto em 1.27) foi removido.

== Subpáginas ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>oawwymbw3ifcv7afr9pwpp4edjoq2lh</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402106</id>
      <parentid>5402104</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:46:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9292" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
'''MediaWiki 1.30''' é a versão obsoleta do MediaWiki.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consult the {{RELEASE-NOTES}} file for the full list of changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It was deployed on Wikimedia Foundation wikis through incremental &quot;wmf&quot;-branches starting on 9 May 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 1.30.0 stable release was released on 12 December 2017.&lt;/span&gt;

Baixe do [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ latest releases] ou marque o &lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt; ramo [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|no Git]] para seguir este lançamento.

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== Mudanças de configuração ===
* O local &quot;C.UTF-8&quot;  deve ser usado para &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;, se disponível, para evitar comportamentos inesperados quando o código usa comparações de string sensíveis à região. Por exemplo, a extensão Scribunto considera &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; na maioria dos locais, pois ignora o caso.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; agora afeta LC_ALL em vez de apenas LC_CTYPE. Veja documentação de &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; para detalhes.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; agora é aplicado para todos os pedidos. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; está obsoleto e um não-op, já que não é mais necessário.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; agora pode especificar funções de retorno de chamada como uma alternativa para nomes de classes simples. Isso é destinado a extensões que desejam controle sobre a instanciação de seus trabalhos, para permitir a injeção de dependência adequada.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; agora pode especificar as funções de retorno de chamada como uma alternativa aos nomes de classe simples, usando a chave 'fábrica' na matriz de descrição do módulo. Isso permite que a injeção de dependência seja usada para módulos ResourceLoader.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}} foi removido.
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) {{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}} adicionado (desligado por padrão).
* {{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} foi introduzido para controlar o tamanho dos intervalos de IP que podem ser consultados em [[Special:Contributions]].

=== Novos recursos ===
* ([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Adicionado a capacidade de procurar contribuições dentro de um intervalo de IP em [[Special:Contributions]]. Referências a revisões feitas por IPs são armazenadas no {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} para fazer consultas mais eficientes.
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Saída de &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; agora será embrulhado em um {{tag|div|open}} com &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; por padrão. Isso pode ser alterado ou desativado usando &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho, permitindo que as extensões permitam que as marcas específicas do software sejam adicionadas pelos usuários.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho para permitir que as extensões registrem opções de analisador adicionais.
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Incluído Pig Latin, um jogo de linguagem em inglês, como um variante [[LanguageConverter]]. Isso permite que os desenvolvedores de língua inglesa desenvolvam e testem o LanguageConverter mais facilmente. Pig Latin pode ser habilitado configurando&lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; para true.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho para permitir que as extensões purguem os dados que dependem da tabela &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt;.
* Adicionado valores de configuração JS &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; para a saída das páginas de difração.

=== Alterações na API de Ação ===
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=a saída de análise será envolvida em um {{tag|div|open}} com &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; por padrão. Isso pode ser alterado ou desativado usando o novo parâmetro '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;'.
* Quando &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; não é '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abortar motivos de &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; será formatado conforme especificado pelos parâmetros do formatador de erros.
* &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; agora pode manipular texto arbitrário, revisões excluídas e retornar usuários e editar comentários.
* ([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) O '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', e '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; estão obsoletos, assim como os parâmetros do mesmo nome para &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, e &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, ou &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; em vez de.

=== Mudanças internas da API de ação ===
* &lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; as mensagens estão obsoletas. A mensagem existente deve ser dividida entre &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; e &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.
* ([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Os valores individuais dos parâmetros de vários valores agora podem ser marcados como obsoletos.

=== Idiomas atualizados ===
* Suporte para kbp (Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè) foi adicionado.

=== Outras mudanças ===
* O uso de uma matriz associativa para &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, onde o endereço IP está na chave em vez do valor, está obsoleto (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Por favor, converta esses arrays para indexados/sequenciais (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).
* &lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (obsoleto em 1.23) foi removido.
* &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; estão obsoletos. Não há chamadores conhecidos.
* &lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto. O novo &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto. O novo &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* O &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; O gancho (obsoleto em 1.21) foi removido.
* Os métodos &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt;  (ambos obsoletos em 1.24) foram removidos.
* &lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; estavam obsoletos. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* ([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) O tratamento do préprocessador da marcação LanguageConverter foi melhorado. Como resultado do novo manuseio uniforme, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' pode precisar ser escapado (por exemplo, como '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') onde ocorre dentro de argumentos de predefinições ou wikilinks.
* ([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Os movimentos de página agora são contados como edições para fins de autopromoção, ''i.e.'', eles incrementam o campo &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; no banco de dados.
* Dois novos ganchos, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;,foram adicionados para manipular Special:Log e Special:NewPages lines.
* Os ganchos &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; tem um parâmetro adicional, para manipular atributos de dados HTML de RC / linhas de histórico. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; pode fazer isso através do subarray&lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt;.
* ([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) O método &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; foi removido.
* &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; agora lançará uma exceção se for aprovada ParserOptions que polui o cache do analisador. Os chamadores devem usar &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; para criar o objeto &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; e altere apenas as opções que afetam a chave de cache do analisador.
* &lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; está obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; não suporta mais passar em um valor direto, requer uma função de fábrica chamada ou um nome de classe.
* O global &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; , &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, e &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; estão todos obsoletos. O principal &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instância deve ser obtida em vez de &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt;. Acesso ao subjacente &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; é possível através do novo método &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;.
* &lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (obsoleto em 1.27) foi removido.

== Subpáginas ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>h800hpyvkpaxbguepsmwd0p2cyx653q</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402108</id>
      <parentid>5402106</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:46:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9250" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
'''MediaWiki 1.30''' é a versão obsoleta do MediaWiki.
Consulte o arquivo {{RELEASE-NOTES}} para obter a lista completa de mudanças.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It was deployed on Wikimedia Foundation wikis through incremental &quot;wmf&quot;-branches starting on 9 May 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 1.30.0 stable release was released on 12 December 2017.&lt;/span&gt;

Baixe do [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ latest releases] ou marque o &lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt; ramo [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|no Git]] para seguir este lançamento.

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== Mudanças de configuração ===
* O local &quot;C.UTF-8&quot;  deve ser usado para &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;, se disponível, para evitar comportamentos inesperados quando o código usa comparações de string sensíveis à região. Por exemplo, a extensão Scribunto considera &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; na maioria dos locais, pois ignora o caso.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; agora afeta LC_ALL em vez de apenas LC_CTYPE. Veja documentação de &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; para detalhes.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; agora é aplicado para todos os pedidos. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; está obsoleto e um não-op, já que não é mais necessário.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; agora pode especificar funções de retorno de chamada como uma alternativa para nomes de classes simples. Isso é destinado a extensões que desejam controle sobre a instanciação de seus trabalhos, para permitir a injeção de dependência adequada.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; agora pode especificar as funções de retorno de chamada como uma alternativa aos nomes de classe simples, usando a chave 'fábrica' na matriz de descrição do módulo. Isso permite que a injeção de dependência seja usada para módulos ResourceLoader.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}} foi removido.
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) {{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}} adicionado (desligado por padrão).
* {{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} foi introduzido para controlar o tamanho dos intervalos de IP que podem ser consultados em [[Special:Contributions]].

=== Novos recursos ===
* ([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Adicionado a capacidade de procurar contribuições dentro de um intervalo de IP em [[Special:Contributions]]. Referências a revisões feitas por IPs são armazenadas no {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} para fazer consultas mais eficientes.
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Saída de &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; agora será embrulhado em um {{tag|div|open}} com &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; por padrão. Isso pode ser alterado ou desativado usando &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho, permitindo que as extensões permitam que as marcas específicas do software sejam adicionadas pelos usuários.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho para permitir que as extensões registrem opções de analisador adicionais.
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Incluído Pig Latin, um jogo de linguagem em inglês, como um variante [[LanguageConverter]]. Isso permite que os desenvolvedores de língua inglesa desenvolvam e testem o LanguageConverter mais facilmente. Pig Latin pode ser habilitado configurando&lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; para true.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho para permitir que as extensões purguem os dados que dependem da tabela &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt;.
* Adicionado valores de configuração JS &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; para a saída das páginas de difração.

=== Alterações na API de Ação ===
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=a saída de análise será envolvida em um {{tag|div|open}} com &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; por padrão. Isso pode ser alterado ou desativado usando o novo parâmetro '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;'.
* Quando &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; não é '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abortar motivos de &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; será formatado conforme especificado pelos parâmetros do formatador de erros.
* &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; agora pode manipular texto arbitrário, revisões excluídas e retornar usuários e editar comentários.
* ([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) O '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', e '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; estão obsoletos, assim como os parâmetros do mesmo nome para &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, e &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, ou &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; em vez de.

=== Mudanças internas da API de ação ===
* &lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; as mensagens estão obsoletas. A mensagem existente deve ser dividida entre &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; e &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.
* ([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Os valores individuais dos parâmetros de vários valores agora podem ser marcados como obsoletos.

=== Idiomas atualizados ===
* Suporte para kbp (Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè) foi adicionado.

=== Outras mudanças ===
* O uso de uma matriz associativa para &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, onde o endereço IP está na chave em vez do valor, está obsoleto (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Por favor, converta esses arrays para indexados/sequenciais (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).
* &lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (obsoleto em 1.23) foi removido.
* &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; estão obsoletos. Não há chamadores conhecidos.
* &lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto. O novo &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto. O novo &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* O &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; O gancho (obsoleto em 1.21) foi removido.
* Os métodos &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt;  (ambos obsoletos em 1.24) foram removidos.
* &lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; estavam obsoletos. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* ([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) O tratamento do préprocessador da marcação LanguageConverter foi melhorado. Como resultado do novo manuseio uniforme, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' pode precisar ser escapado (por exemplo, como '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') onde ocorre dentro de argumentos de predefinições ou wikilinks.
* ([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Os movimentos de página agora são contados como edições para fins de autopromoção, ''i.e.'', eles incrementam o campo &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; no banco de dados.
* Dois novos ganchos, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;,foram adicionados para manipular Special:Log e Special:NewPages lines.
* Os ganchos &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; tem um parâmetro adicional, para manipular atributos de dados HTML de RC / linhas de histórico. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; pode fazer isso através do subarray&lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt;.
* ([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) O método &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; foi removido.
* &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; agora lançará uma exceção se for aprovada ParserOptions que polui o cache do analisador. Os chamadores devem usar &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; para criar o objeto &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; e altere apenas as opções que afetam a chave de cache do analisador.
* &lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; está obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; não suporta mais passar em um valor direto, requer uma função de fábrica chamada ou um nome de classe.
* O global &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; , &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, e &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; estão todos obsoletos. O principal &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instância deve ser obtida em vez de &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt;. Acesso ao subjacente &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; é possível através do novo método &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;.
* &lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (obsoleto em 1.27) foi removido.

== Subpáginas ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7roy8g3uu11dqyx2ghebfkeu8abebsg</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402110</id>
      <parentid>5402108</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:46:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9208" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
'''MediaWiki 1.30''' é a versão obsoleta do MediaWiki.
Consulte o arquivo {{RELEASE-NOTES}} para obter a lista completa de mudanças.
Foi implantado nos wikis da Wikimedia Foundation através do incremental &quot;wmf&quot;-branches starting em 9 de maio de 2017.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 1.30.0 stable release was released on 12 December 2017.&lt;/span&gt;

Baixe do [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ latest releases] ou marque o &lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt; ramo [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|no Git]] para seguir este lançamento.

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== Mudanças de configuração ===
* O local &quot;C.UTF-8&quot;  deve ser usado para &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;, se disponível, para evitar comportamentos inesperados quando o código usa comparações de string sensíveis à região. Por exemplo, a extensão Scribunto considera &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; na maioria dos locais, pois ignora o caso.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; agora afeta LC_ALL em vez de apenas LC_CTYPE. Veja documentação de &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; para detalhes.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; agora é aplicado para todos os pedidos. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; está obsoleto e um não-op, já que não é mais necessário.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; agora pode especificar funções de retorno de chamada como uma alternativa para nomes de classes simples. Isso é destinado a extensões que desejam controle sobre a instanciação de seus trabalhos, para permitir a injeção de dependência adequada.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; agora pode especificar as funções de retorno de chamada como uma alternativa aos nomes de classe simples, usando a chave 'fábrica' na matriz de descrição do módulo. Isso permite que a injeção de dependência seja usada para módulos ResourceLoader.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}} foi removido.
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) {{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}} adicionado (desligado por padrão).
* {{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} foi introduzido para controlar o tamanho dos intervalos de IP que podem ser consultados em [[Special:Contributions]].

=== Novos recursos ===
* ([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Adicionado a capacidade de procurar contribuições dentro de um intervalo de IP em [[Special:Contributions]]. Referências a revisões feitas por IPs são armazenadas no {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} para fazer consultas mais eficientes.
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Saída de &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; agora será embrulhado em um {{tag|div|open}} com &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; por padrão. Isso pode ser alterado ou desativado usando &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho, permitindo que as extensões permitam que as marcas específicas do software sejam adicionadas pelos usuários.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho para permitir que as extensões registrem opções de analisador adicionais.
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Incluído Pig Latin, um jogo de linguagem em inglês, como um variante [[LanguageConverter]]. Isso permite que os desenvolvedores de língua inglesa desenvolvam e testem o LanguageConverter mais facilmente. Pig Latin pode ser habilitado configurando&lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; para true.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho para permitir que as extensões purguem os dados que dependem da tabela &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt;.
* Adicionado valores de configuração JS &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; para a saída das páginas de difração.

=== Alterações na API de Ação ===
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=a saída de análise será envolvida em um {{tag|div|open}} com &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; por padrão. Isso pode ser alterado ou desativado usando o novo parâmetro '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;'.
* Quando &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; não é '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abortar motivos de &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; será formatado conforme especificado pelos parâmetros do formatador de erros.
* &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; agora pode manipular texto arbitrário, revisões excluídas e retornar usuários e editar comentários.
* ([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) O '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', e '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; estão obsoletos, assim como os parâmetros do mesmo nome para &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, e &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, ou &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; em vez de.

=== Mudanças internas da API de ação ===
* &lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; as mensagens estão obsoletas. A mensagem existente deve ser dividida entre &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; e &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.
* ([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Os valores individuais dos parâmetros de vários valores agora podem ser marcados como obsoletos.

=== Idiomas atualizados ===
* Suporte para kbp (Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè) foi adicionado.

=== Outras mudanças ===
* O uso de uma matriz associativa para &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, onde o endereço IP está na chave em vez do valor, está obsoleto (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Por favor, converta esses arrays para indexados/sequenciais (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).
* &lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (obsoleto em 1.23) foi removido.
* &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; estão obsoletos. Não há chamadores conhecidos.
* &lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto. O novo &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto. O novo &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* O &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; O gancho (obsoleto em 1.21) foi removido.
* Os métodos &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt;  (ambos obsoletos em 1.24) foram removidos.
* &lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; estavam obsoletos. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* ([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) O tratamento do préprocessador da marcação LanguageConverter foi melhorado. Como resultado do novo manuseio uniforme, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' pode precisar ser escapado (por exemplo, como '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') onde ocorre dentro de argumentos de predefinições ou wikilinks.
* ([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Os movimentos de página agora são contados como edições para fins de autopromoção, ''i.e.'', eles incrementam o campo &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; no banco de dados.
* Dois novos ganchos, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;,foram adicionados para manipular Special:Log e Special:NewPages lines.
* Os ganchos &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; tem um parâmetro adicional, para manipular atributos de dados HTML de RC / linhas de histórico. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; pode fazer isso através do subarray&lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt;.
* ([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) O método &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; foi removido.
* &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; agora lançará uma exceção se for aprovada ParserOptions que polui o cache do analisador. Os chamadores devem usar &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; para criar o objeto &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; e altere apenas as opções que afetam a chave de cache do analisador.
* &lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; está obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; não suporta mais passar em um valor direto, requer uma função de fábrica chamada ou um nome de classe.
* O global &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; , &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, e &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; estão todos obsoletos. O principal &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instância deve ser obtida em vez de &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt;. Acesso ao subjacente &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; é possível através do novo método &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;.
* &lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (obsoleto em 1.27) foi removido.

== Subpáginas ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>85wfibfnnvjxq3xn2tr348vyudhokt7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402112</id>
      <parentid>5402110</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:47:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9158" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
'''MediaWiki 1.30''' é a versão obsoleta do MediaWiki.
Consulte o arquivo {{RELEASE-NOTES}} para obter a lista completa de mudanças.
Foi implantado nos wikis da Wikimedia Foundation através do incremental &quot;wmf&quot;-branches starting em 9 de maio de 2017.
A versão estável 1.30.0 foi lançada em 12 de dezembro de 2017.

Baixe do [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ latest releases] ou marque o &lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt; ramo [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|no Git]] para seguir este lançamento.

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== Mudanças de configuração ===
* O local &quot;C.UTF-8&quot;  deve ser usado para &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;, se disponível, para evitar comportamentos inesperados quando o código usa comparações de string sensíveis à região. Por exemplo, a extensão Scribunto considera &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; na maioria dos locais, pois ignora o caso.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; agora afeta LC_ALL em vez de apenas LC_CTYPE. Veja documentação de &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; para detalhes.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; agora é aplicado para todos os pedidos. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; está obsoleto e um não-op, já que não é mais necessário.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; agora pode especificar funções de retorno de chamada como uma alternativa para nomes de classes simples. Isso é destinado a extensões que desejam controle sobre a instanciação de seus trabalhos, para permitir a injeção de dependência adequada.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; agora pode especificar as funções de retorno de chamada como uma alternativa aos nomes de classe simples, usando a chave 'fábrica' na matriz de descrição do módulo. Isso permite que a injeção de dependência seja usada para módulos ResourceLoader.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}} foi removido.
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) {{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}} adicionado (desligado por padrão).
* {{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} foi introduzido para controlar o tamanho dos intervalos de IP que podem ser consultados em [[Special:Contributions]].

=== Novos recursos ===
* ([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Adicionado a capacidade de procurar contribuições dentro de um intervalo de IP em [[Special:Contributions]]. Referências a revisões feitas por IPs são armazenadas no {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} para fazer consultas mais eficientes.
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Saída de &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; agora será embrulhado em um {{tag|div|open}} com &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; por padrão. Isso pode ser alterado ou desativado usando &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho, permitindo que as extensões permitam que as marcas específicas do software sejam adicionadas pelos usuários.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho para permitir que as extensões registrem opções de analisador adicionais.
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Incluído Pig Latin, um jogo de linguagem em inglês, como um variante [[LanguageConverter]]. Isso permite que os desenvolvedores de língua inglesa desenvolvam e testem o LanguageConverter mais facilmente. Pig Latin pode ser habilitado configurando&lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; para true.
* Adicionado o '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' gancho para permitir que as extensões purguem os dados que dependem da tabela &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt;.
* Adicionado valores de configuração JS &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; para a saída das páginas de difração.

=== Alterações na API de Ação ===
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=a saída de análise será envolvida em um {{tag|div|open}} com &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; por padrão. Isso pode ser alterado ou desativado usando o novo parâmetro '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;'.
* Quando &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; não é '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abortar motivos de &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; será formatado conforme especificado pelos parâmetros do formatador de erros.
* &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; agora pode manipular texto arbitrário, revisões excluídas e retornar usuários e editar comentários.
* ([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) O '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', e '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; estão obsoletos, assim como os parâmetros do mesmo nome para &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, e &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, ou &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; em vez de.

=== Mudanças internas da API de ação ===
* &lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; as mensagens estão obsoletas. A mensagem existente deve ser dividida entre &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; e &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.
* ([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Os valores individuais dos parâmetros de vários valores agora podem ser marcados como obsoletos.

=== Idiomas atualizados ===
* Suporte para kbp (Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè) foi adicionado.

=== Outras mudanças ===
* O uso de uma matriz associativa para &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, onde o endereço IP está na chave em vez do valor, está obsoleto (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Por favor, converta esses arrays para indexados/sequenciais (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).
* &lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (obsoleto em 1.23) foi removido.
* &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; estão obsoletos. Não há chamadores conhecidos.
* &lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto. O novo &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; estava obsoleto. O novo &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* O &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; O gancho (obsoleto em 1.21) foi removido.
* Os métodos &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt;  (ambos obsoletos em 1.24) foram removidos.
* &lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; estavam obsoletos. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; deve ser usado em vez disso.
* ([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) O tratamento do préprocessador da marcação LanguageConverter foi melhorado. Como resultado do novo manuseio uniforme, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' pode precisar ser escapado (por exemplo, como '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') onde ocorre dentro de argumentos de predefinições ou wikilinks.
* ([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Os movimentos de página agora são contados como edições para fins de autopromoção, ''i.e.'', eles incrementam o campo &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; no banco de dados.
* Dois novos ganchos, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;,foram adicionados para manipular Special:Log e Special:NewPages lines.
* Os ganchos &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; tem um parâmetro adicional, para manipular atributos de dados HTML de RC / linhas de histórico. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; pode fazer isso através do subarray&lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt;.
* ([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) O método &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; foi removido.
* &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; agora lançará uma exceção se for aprovada ParserOptions que polui o cache do analisador. Os chamadores devem usar &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; para criar o objeto &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; e altere apenas as opções que afetam a chave de cache do analisador.
* &lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; está obsoleto.
* &lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; não suporta mais passar em um valor direto, requer uma função de fábrica chamada ou um nome de classe.
* O global &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; , &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, e &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; estão todos obsoletos. O principal &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instância deve ser obtida em vez de &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt;. Acesso ao subjacente &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; é possível através do novo método &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;.
* &lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (obsoleto em 1.27) foi removido.

== Subpáginas ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>8c2k0zz243d0gnhxbgho4od5elyopuq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:Linter/fr</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>703078</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402323</id>
      <parentid>5392719</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:10:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10449" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
L'extension '''{{ll|Extension:Linter|Linter}}''' identifie les éléments du wikicode qui doivent ou peuvent être corrigés dans les pages, ainsi que quelques consignes sur les problèmes que forment ces motifs, et la manière de les résoudre.

La page [[Special:LintErrors|{{int|linterrors}}]] rassemble les erreurs par type.
Certains de ces problèmes seront peut-être plus facile à identifier avec [[Special:Expandtemplates|{{int|expandtemplates}}]].
Sur cette page, vous trouverez les problèmes de ''Lint'' classés selon leur dangerosité au regard des buts non atteints de par leur présence.
Les informations et la discussion de ces points seront développées plus bas.

Une nouvelle fonctionnalité ''Montrer toutes les erreurs de lint pour une page spécifique'' est disponible en bas de la page [[Special:LintErrors|{{int|linterrors}}]] et permet aux éditeurs d'obtenir un rapport de toutes les erreurs d'une page donnée.
Ce rapport contient la catégorie ainsi que d'autres informations utiles, et chaque erreur dispose d'un lien cliquable qui charge la page et surligne l'erreur.
(Note : si votre éditeur de source gère lui-même la mise en valeur de la syntaxe, il est possible que celle-ci ne fonctionne pas).
En corrigeant depuis la fin de la liste et tout en la remontant, les changements faits sur la page ne modifient pas le décalage en nombre de caractères des erreurs qui précèdent, et ceci est la manière de faire recommandée si vous souhaitez corriger toutes les erreurs d'une page.

Nous allons continuer à améliorer les fonctionnalités d'élimination du bruit, à résoudre les bogues et à rendre le résultat de l'outil plus facile à utiliser, mais le rendu actuel est déjà prêt à l'emploi et utilisable.

== Documentation des erreurs de lint ==
{{Main|Help:Lint errors}}

== Quoi corriger et pourquoi ==

Par la suite, l'[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing|équipe chargée de l'analyseur]] prévoit d'améliorer l'extension Linter pour identifier les motifs du wikicode :

* qui sont faux (ex : les bogues dans les options d'image - souvent à cause d'erreurs d'orthographe ou parce que [[phab:T163582|l'interprétation des options d'image dans MediaWiki est fragile]]).
* qui sont obsolètes (ex : [[phab:T134423|balises auto-fermantes]])
* qui peuvent casser à cause des modifications dans les pipes (ex : [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|replacement de Tidy par RemexHTML]])
* qui ne sont plus valides en HTML5 (ex : balises obsolètes telles que center, font)
* qui sont potentiellement cassés et pourraient être mal interprétés par l'analyseur vis à vis de ce que le contributeur souhaitait (ex: balises HTML non-fermées, mauvaise indentation des balises HTML)

Toutes ces erreurs ne nécessitent pas d'être réglées rapidement, sinon jamais (selon votre tolérance au ''lint'').
Différents objectifs sont signalés à travers les différentes sous-types de problèmes de ''lint'' détaillés ci-dessus.
Nous (l'équipe de l'analyseur) essayerons d'être transparents à propos de ces objectifs et nous proposerons des conseils sur les objectifs correspondant aux corrections de chaque problème.

'''Des instructions simplifiées sont proposées [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ#What will editors need to do?|sur la page de FAQ]].'''

=== But : [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ|Remplacer Tidy]] ===

Dans le cadre de la résolution de la dette technique dans le pipeline d'analyse de MediaWiki, nous avons remplacé Tidy par un outil basé sur HTML5.
Cependant, cela aurait cassé le rendu d'un petit sous-ensemble de pages à moins que certains modèles de texte wiki n'aient été corrigés.
Particulièrement les problèmes trouvés dans les catégories : &lt;code&gt;deletable-table-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;pwrap-bug-workaround&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;self-closed-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;tidy-whitespace-bug&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;html5-misnesting&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;tidy-font-bug&lt;/code&gt;.
Afin de procéder à un remplacement rapide de Tidy, nous avons mis tous ces problèmes en priorité haute.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
=== But : [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/Known differences with PHP parser output|Améliorer la conformité du rendu entre l'analyseur PHP et Parsoid]] ===
&lt;/div&gt;
À l'heure actuelle, le code HTML généré par l'analyseur PHP est utilisé pour les vues en lecture et le code HTML généré par Parsoid est [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/Users|utilisé par les outils d'édition et l'application Android]] entre autres.
L'équipe d'analyse, [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing#A: Move to adopt Parsoid as the primary MediaWiki wikitext parser|comme l'un de ses objectifs à long terme]], souhaite permettre l'utilisation de la sortie de Parsoid à la fois pour les vues de lecture et pour l'édition.
Étant donné que Parsoid et RemexHTML sont tous deux des outils basés sur HTML5, les catégories Lint qui affectent le rendu de RemexHTML affectent également le rendu Parsoid.
Nous n'avons pas encore identifié de nouveaux problèmes Lint qui affectent le rendu Parsoid pour le moment, mais nous mettrons à jour cette liste au fur et à mesure que nous en trouverons.

=== But : [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Notes/HTML5 Compliance|respecter le standard HTML5]] ===

Il s'agit d'un objectif quelque peu complexe et nous ne sommes pas encore parvenus à comprendre à quel point il est important de poursuivre cet objectif, ou jusqu'où nous devrions aller avec cela.
De plus, nous ne savons pas encore quels mécanismes nous souhaiterions exploiter pour atteindre cet objectif.
Par exemple, sur la base d'une série de discussions dans différents endroits, [[User:Legoktm/HTML+MediaWiki|User:Legoktm/HTML+MediaWiki]] a présenté une proposition pour gérer la grande balise obsolète html5.
Dans tous les cas, corriger les erreurs dans les catégories &lt;code&gt;obsolete-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;self-closed-tag&lt;/code&gt; devance cet objectif.
Etant donné le manque de clarification autour du sujet, nous avons en conséquence marqué la catégorie des balises optionnelles (obsolete-tag) comme étant de priorité basse.

=== But : Clarifier les intentions des contributeurs ===
Il est difficile d'obtenir un balisage correct.
Les erreurs se glissent par inadvertance.
Bien que l'analyseur syntaxique fasse de son mieux pour se récupérer de ces erreurs, dans plusieurs cas, ce que l'analyseur fournit peut ne pas refléter exactement l'intention orignelle du contributeur.
Ceci étant dit, nous recommandons de corriger les problèmes identifiés ici pour clarifier l'intention du contributeur.
Les problèmes avec les catégories &lt;code&gt;bogus-image-options&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;fostered-content&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;misnested-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt; semblent pénaliser cet objectif.
Etant donné que c'est une chose importante, nous avons marqué la plupart d'entre eux avec une priorité moyennne.
Néanmoins pour la catégorie que regroupe les balises de fin absentes (missing-end-tag) nous lui avons assigné une priorité basse parce que dans la plupart des cas, il semble que l'analyseur syntaxique n'arrive pas à se resynchroniser correctement.
Néanmoins, nous recommandons de corriger tout ce qui peut être corrigé facilement, ne serait-ce que pour faciliter la compréhension des autres contributeurs humains et des outils.

=== But : nettoyer le balisage ===

Il est difficile d'obtenir un balisage correct. 
Même si des erreurs sont présentes, l'analyseur syntaxique fait un travail tout à fait remarquable dans la majorité des cas en montrant comment l'élément balisé sera rendu. 
Mais tout comme les fautes d'orthographe, la ponctuation, et les erreurs grammaticales mineures peuvent indisposer; certains contributeurs ou ceux qui ont un esprit de développeur peuvent trouver déstabilisants les problèmes Lint dans ces catégories. 
Nous ne recommandons pas de passer un temps démesuré à corriger ces problèmes et dans beaucoup de scénarios, les robots seront en mesure de corriger cela. 
Les catégories Lint &lt;code&gt;misnested-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;stripped-tag&lt;/code&gt; servent pour cela.
&lt;!--
{{Special:PrefixIndex/Help:Extension:Linter/|stripprefix=1}}
--&gt;

== FAQ ==

=== Quand fait-on la mise à jour des erreurs de Lint d'une page donnée ? ===

Actuellement, toutes les catégories Lint sont remplies par des erreurs identifiées par [[Parsoid]] lors de l'analyse des pages.
Lorsqu'une page (ou un modèle transclus sur une page) est modifiée, [[Change propagation|ChangeProp]] demande une nouvelle analyse de cette page à Parsoid, qui envoie le nouveau résultat à l'extension Linter.

Cela signifie que lorsqu'une nouvelle catégorie est introduite (ou une correction est faite sur une catégorie existante), un certain temps peut s'écouler avant que l'ensemble des résultats ne soit mis à jour (même pour des pages rarement accédées).
En faisant une modification nulle sur le résultat on accélère le processus individuel. Néanmoins dans la tâche [[phab:T161556]] nous évaluons différentes manières de traiter à nouveau l'ensemble des pages.

=== Faut-il corriger les pages de l'espace de noms XX (ex : Talk) ? ===

La priorité concerne les [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgContentNamespaces|espaces de noms de contenu]].
Le reste dépend largement du wiki.
Beaucoup de pages servent de [[wikipedia:Sandbox_(software_development)|bac à sable]] et comportent naturellement des erreurs.

== Outils ==

* [[w:User:PerfektesChaos/js/lintHint]] – gadget JavaScript qui affiche une liste de LintErrors (messages Parsoid) au fil de l'eau
* [[w:Wikipedia:WPCleaner/Linter|WPCleaner]] – programme Java qui s'interface avec Linter et peut détecter aussi certaines erreurs
* [[:ja:User:MawaruNeko/ShowPageLintError.js|ShowPageLintError.js]] – script utilisateur de [[User:MawaruNeko]] affichant les erreurs Lint d'une page.
* [https://github.com/RazeSoldier/Hclear-bot Robot] de [[User:星耀晨曦]] pouvant corriger les erreurs de balise fermante absente ([[Help:Extension:Linter/multiple-unclosed-formatting-tags|multiple-unclosed-formatting-tags]]).

== Voir aussi ==

*[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/API#Wikitext -&gt; Lint 2|Du wikicode à Lint]]
*[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|Remplacer Tidy]]
*{{ll|Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ}}
*[[w:Wikipedia:Linter|Linter]] sur Wikipedia

[[Category:Extension help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Linter{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>bdo0add5761sax4njakitadcb9ggjjb</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402329</id>
      <parentid>5402323</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:12:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10409" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
L'extension '''{{ll|Extension:Linter|Linter}}''' identifie les éléments du wikicode qui doivent ou peuvent être corrigés dans les pages, ainsi que quelques consignes sur les problèmes que forment ces motifs, et la manière de les résoudre.

La page [[Special:LintErrors|{{int|linterrors}}]] rassemble les erreurs par type.
Certains de ces problèmes seront peut-être plus facile à identifier avec [[Special:Expandtemplates|{{int|expandtemplates}}]].
Sur cette page, vous trouverez les problèmes de ''Lint'' classés selon leur dangerosité au regard des buts non atteints de par leur présence.
Les informations et la discussion de ces points seront développées plus bas.

Une nouvelle fonctionnalité ''Montrer toutes les erreurs de lint pour une page spécifique'' est disponible en bas de la page [[Special:LintErrors|{{int|linterrors}}]] et permet aux éditeurs d'obtenir un rapport de toutes les erreurs d'une page donnée.
Ce rapport contient la catégorie ainsi que d'autres informations utiles, et chaque erreur dispose d'un lien cliquable qui charge la page et surligne l'erreur.
(Note : si votre éditeur de source gère lui-même la mise en valeur de la syntaxe, il est possible que celle-ci ne fonctionne pas).
En corrigeant depuis la fin de la liste et tout en la remontant, les changements faits sur la page ne modifient pas le décalage en nombre de caractères des erreurs qui précèdent, et ceci est la manière de faire recommandée si vous souhaitez corriger toutes les erreurs d'une page.

Nous allons continuer à améliorer les fonctionnalités d'élimination du bruit, à résoudre les bogues et à rendre le résultat de l'outil plus facile à utiliser, mais le rendu actuel est déjà prêt à l'emploi et utilisable.

== Documentation des erreurs de lint ==
{{Main|Help:Lint errors}}

== Quoi corriger et pourquoi ==

Par la suite, l'[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing|équipe chargée de l'analyseur]] prévoit d'améliorer l'extension Linter pour identifier les motifs du wikicode :

* qui sont faux (ex : les bogues dans les options d'image - souvent à cause d'erreurs d'orthographe ou parce que [[phab:T163582|l'interprétation des options d'image dans MediaWiki est fragile]]).
* qui sont obsolètes (ex : [[phab:T134423|balises auto-fermantes]])
* qui peuvent casser à cause des modifications dans les pipes (ex : [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|replacement de Tidy par RemexHTML]])
* qui ne sont plus valides en HTML5 (ex : balises obsolètes telles que center, font)
* qui sont potentiellement cassés et pourraient être mal interprétés par l'analyseur vis à vis de ce que le contributeur souhaitait (ex: balises HTML non-fermées, mauvaise indentation des balises HTML)

Toutes ces erreurs ne nécessitent pas d'être réglées rapidement, sinon jamais (selon votre tolérance au ''lint'').
Différents objectifs sont signalés à travers les différentes sous-types de problèmes de ''lint'' détaillés ci-dessus.
Nous (l'équipe de l'analyseur) essayerons d'être transparents à propos de ces objectifs et nous proposerons des conseils sur les objectifs correspondant aux corrections de chaque problème.

'''Des instructions simplifiées sont proposées [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ#What will editors need to do?|sur la page de FAQ]].'''

=== But : [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ|Remplacer Tidy]] ===

Dans le cadre de la résolution de la dette technique dans le pipeline d'analyse de MediaWiki, nous avons remplacé Tidy par un outil basé sur HTML5.
Cependant, cela aurait cassé le rendu d'un petit sous-ensemble de pages à moins que certains modèles de texte wiki n'aient été corrigés.
Particulièrement les problèmes trouvés dans les catégories : &lt;code&gt;deletable-table-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;pwrap-bug-workaround&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;self-closed-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;tidy-whitespace-bug&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;html5-misnesting&lt;/code&gt; et &lt;code&gt;tidy-font-bug&lt;/code&gt;.
Afin de procéder à un remplacement rapide de Tidy, nous avons mis tous ces problèmes en priorité haute.

=== But : [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/Known differences with PHP parser output|Améliorer la conformité du rendu entre l'analyseur PHP et Parsoid]] ===
À l'heure actuelle, le code HTML généré par l'analyseur PHP est utilisé pour les vues en lecture et le code HTML généré par Parsoid est [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/Users|utilisé par les outils d'édition et l'application Android]] entre autres.
L'équipe d'analyse, [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing#A: Move to adopt Parsoid as the primary MediaWiki wikitext parser|comme l'un de ses objectifs à long terme]], souhaite permettre l'utilisation de la sortie de Parsoid à la fois pour les vues de lecture et pour l'édition.
Étant donné que Parsoid et RemexHTML sont tous deux des outils basés sur HTML5, les catégories Lint qui affectent le rendu de RemexHTML affectent également le rendu Parsoid.
Nous n'avons pas encore identifié de nouveaux problèmes Lint qui affectent le rendu Parsoid pour le moment, mais nous mettrons à jour cette liste au fur et à mesure que nous en trouverons.

=== But : [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Notes/HTML5 Compliance|respecter le standard HTML5]] ===

Il s'agit d'un objectif quelque peu complexe et nous ne sommes pas encore parvenus à comprendre à quel point il est important de poursuivre cet objectif, ou jusqu'où nous devrions aller avec cela.
De plus, nous ne savons pas encore quels mécanismes nous souhaiterions exploiter pour atteindre cet objectif.
Par exemple, sur la base d'une série de discussions dans différents endroits, [[User:Legoktm/HTML+MediaWiki|User:Legoktm/HTML+MediaWiki]] a présenté une proposition pour gérer la grande balise obsolète html5.
Dans tous les cas, corriger les erreurs dans les catégories &lt;code&gt;obsolete-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;self-closed-tag&lt;/code&gt; devance cet objectif.
Etant donné le manque de clarification autour du sujet, nous avons en conséquence marqué la catégorie des balises optionnelles (obsolete-tag) comme étant de priorité basse.

=== But : Clarifier les intentions des contributeurs ===
Il est difficile d'obtenir un balisage correct.
Les erreurs se glissent par inadvertance.
Bien que l'analyseur syntaxique fasse de son mieux pour se récupérer de ces erreurs, dans plusieurs cas, ce que l'analyseur fournit peut ne pas refléter exactement l'intention orignelle du contributeur.
Ceci étant dit, nous recommandons de corriger les problèmes identifiés ici pour clarifier l'intention du contributeur.
Les problèmes avec les catégories &lt;code&gt;bogus-image-options&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;fostered-content&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;misnested-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt; semblent pénaliser cet objectif.
Etant donné que c'est une chose importante, nous avons marqué la plupart d'entre eux avec une priorité moyennne.
Néanmoins pour la catégorie que regroupe les balises de fin absentes (missing-end-tag) nous lui avons assigné une priorité basse parce que dans la plupart des cas, il semble que l'analyseur syntaxique n'arrive pas à se resynchroniser correctement.
Néanmoins, nous recommandons de corriger tout ce qui peut être corrigé facilement, ne serait-ce que pour faciliter la compréhension des autres contributeurs humains et des outils.

=== But : nettoyer le balisage ===

Il est difficile d'obtenir un balisage correct. 
Même si des erreurs sont présentes, l'analyseur syntaxique fait un travail tout à fait remarquable dans la majorité des cas en montrant comment l'élément balisé sera rendu. 
Mais tout comme les fautes d'orthographe, la ponctuation, et les erreurs grammaticales mineures peuvent indisposer; certains contributeurs ou ceux qui ont un esprit de développeur peuvent trouver déstabilisants les problèmes Lint dans ces catégories. 
Nous ne recommandons pas de passer un temps démesuré à corriger ces problèmes et dans beaucoup de scénarios, les robots seront en mesure de corriger cela. 
Les catégories Lint &lt;code&gt;misnested-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;stripped-tag&lt;/code&gt; servent pour cela.
&lt;!--
{{Special:PrefixIndex/Help:Extension:Linter/|stripprefix=1}}
--&gt;

== FAQ ==

=== Quand fait-on la mise à jour des erreurs de Lint d'une page donnée ? ===

Actuellement, toutes les catégories Lint sont remplies par des erreurs identifiées par [[Parsoid]] lors de l'analyse des pages.
Lorsqu'une page (ou un modèle transclus sur une page) est modifiée, [[Change propagation|ChangeProp]] demande une nouvelle analyse de cette page à Parsoid, qui envoie le nouveau résultat à l'extension Linter.

Cela signifie que lorsqu'une nouvelle catégorie est introduite (ou une correction est faite sur une catégorie existante), un certain temps peut s'écouler avant que l'ensemble des résultats ne soit mis à jour (même pour des pages rarement accédées).
En faisant une modification nulle sur le résultat on accélère le processus individuel. Néanmoins dans la tâche [[phab:T161556]] nous évaluons différentes manières de traiter à nouveau l'ensemble des pages.

=== Faut-il corriger les pages de l'espace de noms XX (ex : Talk) ? ===

La priorité concerne les [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgContentNamespaces|espaces de noms de contenu]].
Le reste dépend largement du wiki.
Beaucoup de pages servent de [[wikipedia:Sandbox_(software_development)|bac à sable]] et comportent naturellement des erreurs.

== Outils ==

* [[w:User:PerfektesChaos/js/lintHint]] – gadget JavaScript qui affiche une liste de LintErrors (messages Parsoid) au fil de l'eau
* [[w:Wikipedia:WPCleaner/Linter|WPCleaner]] – programme Java qui s'interface avec Linter et peut détecter aussi certaines erreurs
* [[:ja:User:MawaruNeko/ShowPageLintError.js|ShowPageLintError.js]] – script utilisateur de [[User:MawaruNeko]] affichant les erreurs Lint d'une page.
* [https://github.com/RazeSoldier/Hclear-bot Robot] de [[User:星耀晨曦]] pouvant corriger les erreurs de balise fermante absente ([[Help:Extension:Linter/multiple-unclosed-formatting-tags|multiple-unclosed-formatting-tags]]).

== Voir aussi ==

*[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/API#Wikitext -&gt; Lint 2|Du wikicode à Lint]]
*[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|Remplacer Tidy]]
*{{ll|Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ}}
*[[w:Wikipedia:Linter|Linter]] sur Wikipedia

[[Category:Extension help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Linter{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>kgd0gg8nkbli3iza3oe5pucvxvz4jak</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Linter/27/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>703132</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402322</id>
      <parentid>5328181</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:10:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="48" xml:space="preserve">=== But : [[$1|respecter le standard HTML5]] ===</text>
      <sha1>imueut0fc87blcw2w2sisbges7o4gk3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Linter/25/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>703133</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402328</id>
      <parentid>5327671</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:12:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="88" xml:space="preserve">=== But : [[$1|Améliorer la conformité du rendu entre l'analyseur PHP et Parsoid]] ===</text>
      <sha1>77eenvubn8qtxtbgpsyvo6bjupz4xwu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>MediaWiki 1.30/ru</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>704671</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402095</id>
      <parentid>5066294</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:41:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11969" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''MediaWiki 1.30''' — устаревшая версия MediaWiki. Обратитесь к файлу $relnotes для просмотра полного списка изменений. Она была развернута на вики-ресурсах Фонда Викимедиа через инкрементные ветки &lt;code&gt;wmf&lt;/code&gt;, начиная с 9 мая 2017. Финальная стабильная версия была выпущена 12 декабря 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consult the {{RELEASE-NOTES}} file for the full list of changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It was deployed on Wikimedia Foundation wikis through incremental &quot;wmf&quot;-branches starting on 9 May 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 1.30.0 stable release was released on 12 December 2017.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Загрузите [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ последнюю версию] или ознакомьтесь с веткой &lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|в Git]] чтобы следовать этой версии.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== Изменения конфигурации ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;C.UTF-8&quot; locale should be used for &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;, if available, to avoid unexpected behavior when code uses locale-sensitive string comparisons. For example, the Scribunto extension considers &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; in most locales since it ignores case.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; now affects LC_ALL rather than only LC_CTYPE. See documentation of &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; for details.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; is now applied for all requests. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated and a no-op, as it is no longer needed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names. This is intended for extensions that want control over the instantiation of their jobs, to allow for proper dependency injection.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names, using the 'factory' key in the module description array. This allows dependency injection to be used for ResourceLoader modules.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}} has been removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}} added (off by default).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} was introduced to control the size of IP ranges that can be queried at [[Special:Contributions]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New features&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Added the ability to search for contributions within an IP range at [[Special:Contributions]]. References to revisions made by IPs are stored in the {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} table to make querying for ranges more efficient.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Output from &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; will now be wrapped in a {{tag|div|open}} with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook, enabling extensions to allow software- specific tags to be added by users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to register additional parser options.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Included Pig Latin, a language game in English, as a [[LanguageConverter]] variant. This allows English-speaking developers to develop and test LanguageConverter more easily. Pig Latin can be enabled by setting &lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; to true.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to purge data that depends on the &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt; table.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added JS config values &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; to the output of diff pages.&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Action API changes&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=parse output will be wrapped in a {{tag|div|open}} with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using the new '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;' parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; is not '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abort reasons from &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; will be formatted as specified by the error formatter parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; can now handle arbitrary text, deleted revisions, and returning users and edit comments.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) The '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', and '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated, as are the similarly named parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, or &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; instead.&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Action API internal changes&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; messages are deprecated. The existing message should be split between &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Individual values of multi-valued parameters can now be marked as deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Languages updated&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Support for kbp (Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè) was added.&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Other changes&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The use of an associative array for &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, where the IP address is in the key instead of the value, is deprecated (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Please convert these arrays to indexed/sequential ones (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (deprecated in 1.23) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated. There are no known callers.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated. The new &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated. The new &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; hook (deprecated in 1.21) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt; methods (both deprecated in 1.24) were removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; were deprecated. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) Preprocessor handling of LanguageConverter markup has been improved. As a result of the new uniform handling, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' may need to be escaped (for example, as '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') where it occurs inside template arguments or wikilinks.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Page moves are now counted as edits for the purposes of autopromotion, ''i.e.'', they increment the &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; field in the database.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Two new hooks, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, were added for manipulating Special:Log and Special:NewPages lines.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; hooks have an additional parameter, for manipulating HTML data attributes of RC/history lines. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; can do that via the &lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt; subarray.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; method was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; will now throw an exception if passed ParserOptions that would pollute the parser cache. Callers should use &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; to create the &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; object and only change options that affect the parser cache key.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; no longer supports passing in a direct value, it requires a callable factory function or a class name.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; global, &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; are all deprecated. The main &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instance should be obtained from &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt; instead. Access to the underlying &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; is possible through the new &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt; method.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (deprecated in 1.27) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;

== Подстраницы ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>mhzgeqhx8mvitsmjpsrsa5zh98ma6nw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>MediaWiki 1.30/zh</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>707696</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402096</id>
      <parentid>5066295</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:41:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11142" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''MediaWiki 1.30'''是MediaWiki的既往发行版本。访问$relnotes文件以获取完整更新列表。并于2017年5月9日起，通过增量更新的&quot;wmf&quot;-分支部署在维基基金会管理的wiki上。2017年12月12日发布1.30.0的稳定版本。&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consult the {{RELEASE-NOTES}} file for the full list of changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It was deployed on Wikimedia Foundation wikis through incremental &quot;wmf&quot;-branches starting on 9 May 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 1.30.0 stable release was released on 12 December 2017.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
下载[https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ 最新快照]或使用[[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git/zh|Git]]签出&lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt;分支来获取此发布的最新版本。
&lt;/div&gt;

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== 配置变化 ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;C.UTF-8&quot; locale should be used for &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;, if available, to avoid unexpected behavior when code uses locale-sensitive string comparisons. For example, the Scribunto extension considers &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; in most locales since it ignores case.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; now affects LC_ALL rather than only LC_CTYPE. See documentation of &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; for details.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; is now applied for all requests. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated and a no-op, as it is no longer needed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names. This is intended for extensions that want control over the instantiation of their jobs, to allow for proper dependency injection.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names, using the 'factory' key in the module description array. This allows dependency injection to be used for ResourceLoader modules.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|&lt;code&gt;$wgExceptionHooks&lt;/code&gt;]]已移除。&lt;/span&gt;
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;（[[phab:T45547|T45547]]）[[Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|&lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt;]]已添加（默认关闭）。&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} was introduced to control the size of IP ranges that can be queried at [[Special:Contributions]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== 新特性 ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Added the ability to search for contributions within an IP range at [[Special:Contributions]]. References to revisions made by IPs are stored in the {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} table to make querying for ranges more efficient.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Output from &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; will now be wrapped in a {{tag|div|open}} with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook, enabling extensions to allow software- specific tags to be added by users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to register additional parser options.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Included Pig Latin, a language game in English, as a [[LanguageConverter]] variant. This allows English-speaking developers to develop and test LanguageConverter more easily. Pig Latin can be enabled by setting &lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; to true.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to purge data that depends on the &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt; table.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added JS config values &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; to the output of diff pages.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Action API 变化 ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=parse output will be wrapped in a {{tag|div|open}} with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using the new '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;' parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; is not '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abort reasons from &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; will be formatted as specified by the error formatter parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; can now handle arbitrary text, deleted revisions, and returning users and edit comments.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) The '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', and '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated, as are the similarly named parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, or &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; instead.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Action API内部更新 ===
* &lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt;和“&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;”消息已弃用。现有消息应在“&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;”和“&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;”之间拆分。
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Individual values of multi-valued parameters can now be marked as deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;

=== 语言更新 ===
* 已添加kbp（卡比耶语）支持。

=== 其他更新 ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The use of an associative array for &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, where the IP address is in the key instead of the value, is deprecated (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Please convert these arrays to indexed/sequential ones (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (deprecated in 1.23) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated. There are no known callers.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated. The new &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated. The new &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; hook (deprecated in 1.21) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt; methods (both deprecated in 1.24) were removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; were deprecated. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) Preprocessor handling of LanguageConverter markup has been improved. As a result of the new uniform handling, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' may need to be escaped (for example, as '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') where it occurs inside template arguments or wikilinks.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Page moves are now counted as edits for the purposes of autopromotion, ''i.e.'', they increment the &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; field in the database.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Two new hooks, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, were added for manipulating Special:Log and Special:NewPages lines.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; hooks have an additional parameter, for manipulating HTML data attributes of RC/history lines. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; can do that via the &lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt; subarray.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; method was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; will now throw an exception if passed ParserOptions that would pollute the parser cache. Callers should use &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; to create the &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; object and only change options that affect the parser cache key.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt;已弃用。
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; no longer supports passing in a direct value, it requires a callable factory function or a class name.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; global, &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; are all deprecated. The main &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instance should be obtained from &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt; instead. Access to the underlying &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; is possible through the new &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt; method.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (deprecated in 1.27) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;

== 子页面 ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>t432uuym68pbb6bxdnhindyc8gu1ljg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Phabricator/FAQ/fr</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>710933</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402798</id>
      <parentid>5200807</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:57:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15944" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{historical|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Content on this page was written before starting the [[Phabricator/Migration|migration to Phabricator]] in November 2014.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Généralités ==
{{Project management tools review}}

=== Pourquoi migrer sous Phabricator ? ===

Voir {{ll|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Which parts of the infrastructure will get migrated? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main focus is on Bugzilla, Gerrit, Trello, Mingle, RT (but not necessarily limited to them).&lt;/span&gt;
Voyez également [[Special:MyLanguage/Project management tools/Review#Scope|Project management tools/Review#Scope]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Except for Phabricator's wiki functionality which would be disabled, we would like to migrate fully to Phabricator instead of piecemeal.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Is there a list of known deficiencies of / known issues with Phabricator?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Testers have reported some of the regressions and missing functionalities that users will experience after the migration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some of them are listed on top of the following tickets:&lt;/span&gt;
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T30] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T23] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T22] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla|comparison between Phabricator and Bugzilla is available]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;onlyinclude&gt;
=== Est-ce que Phabricator est facile d'utilisation ? ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator is explicitly not designed for newbies.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;«Phabricator is primarily targeted at software professionals and other professionals with adjacent responsibilities (like project management and operations).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Particularly, we assume users are proficient computer users and familiar with software development concepts.»&lt;/span&gt;
[https://secure.phabricator.com/book/phabcontrib/article/feature_requests/#target-audiences]

=== Comment apporter votre aide ? ===

Voir [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator#Get involved|Phabricator#Get involved]].&lt;/onlyinclude&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== What is the current amount of work maintaining Bugzilla/Gerrit/Mingle/Trello sync tools? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[wikitech:Bingle|Bingle and Bugello]] synchronize some aspects of tickets between Bugzilla and Mingle/Trello, but [https://lists.wikimedia.org/pipermail/teampractices/2013-December/000202.html functionality is limited and ticket statuses between tools can easily get out of sync] (also see [https://github.com/wikimedia/bingle/issues list of open Bingle issues]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Arthur should be able to elaborate on the amount of maintenance work required.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gerrit's [https://gerrit.googlesource.com/plugins/hooks-bugzilla/ hooks-bugzilla] plugin does not require maintenance but has limitations ([https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=52167 1], [https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=53084 2]) which are not easy to solve.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How would the migration happen? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bugzilla/RT/Gerrit tickets, projects, user accounts, patchsets, access settings, etc. would have to be moved into Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
([https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related upstream ticket&lt;/span&gt;])
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The switching costs are not clear yet; Your help is welcome to evaluate them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A clear cut for at least one tool (Bugzilla) seems preferable in order to not continue running all to-be-replaced systems plus yet another one (Phabricator).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== When would the migration happen? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/Migration Timeline|Phabricator/Migration Timeline]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== What would that mean for me? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;At some point current infrastructure tools (see above) would be replaced by Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator has a different user interface and some changes in workflow, compared to the current setup.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the long run, things will get less complicated because everything is in one tool; there will be more transparency and efficiency because discussions are more centralized and in one tool instead of several tools.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As different development teams use different tools with different needs (reporters, developers, product managers, scrum masters, ...), you want to play with the [http://fab.wmflabs.org/ Labs instance of Phabricator] to see if it fits your needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See section &quot;How can I help?&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Will external links/URLs break? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We will try to minimize broken links by redirecting [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T40 Bugzilla] (please see [[Phabricator/versus_Bugzilla#Bugzilla_URLs_and_their_redirects|Bugzilla URLs and their redirects]]) and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T41 RT] tickets to Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is still to be evaluated whether we can also easily redirect Gerrit changesets.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Obviously, documentation about [[Bug management|Bug management/Bugzilla]] (see [[phab:T206|T206]]), [[Gerrit|Gerrit]] or [[wikitech:RT|RT]] will need updating.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How flexible is Phabricator when restricting access to certain tickets, or tickets in certain products (e.g. &quot;Security&quot;)? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T50 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related task&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does Phabricator provide statistics, metrics, charts? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, Phabricator offers [[phab:maniphest/report/|Reports by User and by Project]] and [[phab:maniphest/report/burn/|Burnup Rate]] (logging in might be required).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Burndown charts for projects are available via the custom Sprint extension (see [[phab:T153|T153]] and [[phab:T1322|T1322]]), to be superseded by [[phab:project/profile/1266/|Phragile]] in the future.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[phab:fact/|Charts]] are currently not enabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T28 related task] about metrics in general.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does any other FLOSS project use Phabricator? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
FLOSS projects using Phabricator include [https://reviews.llvm.org/ LLVM], [https://developer.blender.org/ Blender], and [https://secure.phabricator.com/ Phabricator itself].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a [[w:Phabricator#Users|list of projects on English Wikipedia]] but most are proprietary and/or small.&lt;/span&gt;
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T192 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Facebook's install is very large&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Did anyone else migrate to Phabricator as we would? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No, this is a way that nobody has walked before.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Focusing on like-minded projects: maybe Blender did, in late 2013 (but from SVN, Trac and Trello); however no detailed report available yet[https://code.blender.org/2013/11/new-development-infrastructure/] and it's at least [https://www.openhub.net/p/blender one order of magnitude smaller] than MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They're now sharing some code.[https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179#81309]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Why can't I login using my GitHub or Google account? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although Phabricator has authentication plugins for GitHub, Google, and other identity providers, we have decided not to use them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With two Wikimedia alternatives that cover virtually all Wikimedia contributors, more options are not really necessary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Besides, these services depend on proprietary third party sites, and they might raise concerns about privacy and commercial interests.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more details, see [[phab:T16|T16 - Support only WMF SUL and LDAP as authentication mechanisms]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How can I merge my account from Wikipedia or other Wikimedia wikis with my Phabricator account? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Use Phabricator's [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/settings/panel/external/ Linked Accounts and Authentication] tool for that.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Concerns raised ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Ending up with one more tool ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having fewer tools is the whole point of this exercise.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The replacement of Bugzilla and Gerrit with Phabricator is an essential requirement of this project.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The teams using Trello and Mingle understand that relying in these commercial services is not a long-term solution.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Lack of a detailed plan ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The current working plan is good enough to provide a realistic vision supported by the community.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The WMF needs an RfC resolution in order to allocate the resources needed to elaborate a detailed plan.[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T17]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Why not improving our current tools ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator is already an integrated suite, which means the different components are intended to be used together.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is written in PHP, and their maintainers are very proactive.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* This encourages features like explicitly attaching tasks to code changes, mocks, etc.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Although we can write or improve integrations like Gerrit Notification Bot, Bugzilla (Perl), Gerrit (Java), or Scrumbugz (Python) will probably never be a seamlessly integrated suite.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Some projects should test first ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, this is also our recommendation for the migration from Gerrit to Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;About the migration from Bugzilla to Phabricator, it needs to be done at once because we cannot do a full migration of data with two moving targets.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Various UI issues ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We can customize the CSS of our instance for more appropriate font sizes, colors, etc.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Upstream has already fixed some of the problems reported.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Requiring arc ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Arc checks new patches for basic mistakes before uploading them for review.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is useful for the majority of contributors and for the project.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The occasional contributor can upload a patch directly via the Phabricator Web UI.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Phabricator is unfamiliar for most newcomers ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;True, most users of FLOSS software have experience with Bugzilla if anything, because it's used by all the major players (Linux itself, Mozilla, RedHat, GNOME [https://www.bugzilla.org/installation-list/ etc. etc.]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However this is not necessarily true for all MediaWiki newcomers.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Offering them one integrated platform is better than looking for a platform they already know.&lt;/span&gt;

== phabricator.wikimedia.org ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[phab:|Phabricator.wikimedia.org]] (aka [https://bugs.wikimedia.org/ bugs.wikimedia.org]) is Wikimedia's bug tracking and project management tool.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Bugzilla ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla|Phabricator/versus Bugzilla]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== RT ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus RT|Phabricator/versus RT]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Trello, Mingle, Scrumbugz, etc ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Is Phabricator flexible enough to allow different teams to define their own workflows and ways of organizing sprints/tasks/stories/etc? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T43 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related task&lt;/span&gt;] - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;this welcomes answering by individuals who have already worked and maintained a Phabricator instance.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, at least to some degree.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, different projects can define their own columns/swim lanes on workboards with &quot;Add Column&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does Phabricator provide boards per project and/or iteration? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See e.g. the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/project/board/5/ Wikimedia Phabricator board].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Related tasks: [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21 Identify features Trello users would miss] and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20 Identify features Mingle users would miss]&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Phabricator{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ipk7zgh5sohp6bvm7ytjdmhsn9vw21w</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>MediaWiki 1.30/ja</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>716828</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402092</id>
      <parentid>5251784</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:41:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10945" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
'''MediaWiki 1.30''' は MediaWiki の廃止されたリリースです。
変更点の完全な一覧については、{{RELEASE-NOTES}} ファイルを参照してください。
2017年5月9日より、番号が増える &quot;wmf&quot; ブランチを通じて、ウィキメディア財団のウィキ群に展開されました。
1.30.0 安定版リリースは2017年12月12日に公開されました。

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
[https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ 最新のスナップショット]をダウンロードするか、[[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|Git]]の&lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt;ブランチをチェックアウトして、このリリースに従ってください。
&lt;/div&gt;

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== 設定の変更 ===
* コードがロケールの影響を受ける文字列比較を使用している場合の予期せぬ動作を避けるため、可能ならば &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; には &quot;C.UTF-8&quot; ロケールを使用するべきです。例えば、大文字小文字の無視により、ほとんどのロケールにおいて Scribunto 拡張機能は &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; と見なします。
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; は LC_CTYPE だけでなく LC_ALL にも影響を及ぼすようになります。詳細については &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; のドキュメンテーションを参照してください。
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; はすべてのリクエストに対して適用されるようになります。&lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; はもはや必要でないため、非推奨であり何も行いません。
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names. This is intended for extensions that want control over the instantiation of their jobs, to allow for proper dependency injection.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names, using the 'factory' key in the module description array. This allows dependency injection to be used for ResourceLoader modules.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}} が除去されました。
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) {{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}} が追加されました (既定ではオフ)。
* [[Special:Contributions]] で問い合わせることができる IP 範囲の大きさを制御するため、{{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} が導入されました。

=== 新機能 ===
* ([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) [[Special:Contributions|特別:投稿記録]]において、ある IP 範囲内の投稿記録を検索することができるようになりました。より効率良く範囲内への問い合わせを行えるようにするため、IP アドレスによって作られたリビジョンへの参照が {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} テーブルに格納されます。
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; からの出力は、既定では &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; の {{tag|div|open}} に包まれるようになります。これは &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt; を使用して変更または無効化される可能性があります。
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook, enabling extensions to allow software- specific tags to be added by users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to register additional parser options.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Included Pig Latin, a language game in English, as a [[LanguageConverter]] variant. This allows English-speaking developers to develop and test LanguageConverter more easily. Pig Latin can be enabled by setting &lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; to true.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to purge data that depends on the &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt; table.&lt;/span&gt;
* 差分ページの出力に&lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt;というJavaScript設定値を追加しました。

=== 操作 API の変更 ===
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=parse の出力は、既定では &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; の {{tag|div|open}} に包まれるようになります。これは 新しい '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;' パラメータを使用して変更または無効化される可能性があります。
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; is not '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abort reasons from &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; will be formatted as specified by the error formatter parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; can now handle arbitrary text, deleted revisions, and returning users and edit comments.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) The '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', and '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated, as are the similarly named parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, or &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; instead.&lt;/span&gt;

=== 操作APIの内部的な変更 ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; messages are deprecated. The existing message should be split between &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Individual values of multi-valued parameters can now be marked as deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;

=== 言語の更新 ===
* カビエ語(Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè)のサポートが追加されました。

=== その他の変更 ===
* IP アドレスが値でなくキーである連想配列を &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt; に使用することは非推奨となります（''例''：&lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;）。これらの配列は、インデックスが付けられた/シーケンシャルなものに変換してください（''例''：&lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;）。
* &lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt;（1.23 より非推奨）は削除されました。
* &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; および &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; は非推奨になりました。知られている呼び出し元はありません。
* &lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; は非推奨になりました。
* &lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; は非推奨になりました。
* &lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; は非推奨になりました。新しい &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; を代わりに使用してください。
* &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; は非推奨になりました。新しい &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; を代わりに使用してください。
* &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; フック（1.21 より非推奨）は削除されました。
* &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; および &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt; メソッド（両者とも 1.24 より非推奨）は削除されました。
* &lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; および &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; は非推奨になりました。&lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; および &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; を代わりに使用してください。
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) Preprocessor handling of LanguageConverter markup has been improved. As a result of the new uniform handling, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' may need to be escaped (for example, as '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') where it occurs inside template arguments or wikilinks.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Page moves are now counted as edits for the purposes of autopromotion, ''i.e.'', they increment the &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; field in the database.&lt;/span&gt;
* 特別:ログおよび特別:新しいページの行の操作のための 2 つの新しいフック &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; および &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; が追加されました。
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; hooks have an additional parameter, for manipulating HTML data attributes of RC/history lines. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; can do that via the &lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt; subarray.&lt;/span&gt;
* ([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; メソッドは削除されました。
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; will now throw an exception if passed ParserOptions that would pollute the parser cache. Callers should use &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; to create the &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; object and only change options that affect the parser cache key.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; は非推奨になりました。
* &lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; は直接の値を渡すことをサポートしなくなります。呼び出し可能なファクトリ関数またはクラス名を必要とします。
* &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; グローバル変数、&lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; はすべて非推奨です。メインの &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; インスタンスは代わりに &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt; から取得してください。新しい &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt; メソッドを通して、下層にある &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; にアクセスすることが可能です。
* &lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS クラス（1.27 より非推奨）は削除されました。

== 下位ページ ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>t5a7r8bbyubtpvpesasqpefxmr9lvg3</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402100</id>
      <parentid>5402092</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:44:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10905" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
'''MediaWiki 1.30''' は MediaWiki の廃止されたリリースです。
変更点の完全な一覧については、{{RELEASE-NOTES}} ファイルを参照してください。
2017年5月9日より、番号が増える &quot;wmf&quot; ブランチを通じて、ウィキメディア財団のウィキ群に展開されました。
1.30.0 安定版リリースは2017年12月12日に公開されました。

[https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ 最新リリース]をダウンロードするか、または[[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|Git 内]]の &lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt; ブランチをチェックアウトしてこのリリースに追随してください。

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== 設定の変更 ===
* コードがロケールの影響を受ける文字列比較を使用している場合の予期せぬ動作を避けるため、可能ならば &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; には &quot;C.UTF-8&quot; ロケールを使用するべきです。例えば、大文字小文字の無視により、ほとんどのロケールにおいて Scribunto 拡張機能は &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; と見なします。
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; は LC_CTYPE だけでなく LC_ALL にも影響を及ぼすようになります。詳細については &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; のドキュメンテーションを参照してください。
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; はすべてのリクエストに対して適用されるようになります。&lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; はもはや必要でないため、非推奨であり何も行いません。
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names. This is intended for extensions that want control over the instantiation of their jobs, to allow for proper dependency injection.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names, using the 'factory' key in the module description array. This allows dependency injection to be used for ResourceLoader modules.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}} が除去されました。
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) {{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}} が追加されました (既定ではオフ)。
* [[Special:Contributions]] で問い合わせることができる IP 範囲の大きさを制御するため、{{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} が導入されました。

=== 新機能 ===
* ([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) [[Special:Contributions|特別:投稿記録]]において、ある IP 範囲内の投稿記録を検索することができるようになりました。より効率良く範囲内への問い合わせを行えるようにするため、IP アドレスによって作られたリビジョンへの参照が {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} テーブルに格納されます。
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; からの出力は、既定では &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; の {{tag|div|open}} に包まれるようになります。これは &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt; を使用して変更または無効化される可能性があります。
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook, enabling extensions to allow software- specific tags to be added by users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to register additional parser options.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Included Pig Latin, a language game in English, as a [[LanguageConverter]] variant. This allows English-speaking developers to develop and test LanguageConverter more easily. Pig Latin can be enabled by setting &lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; to true.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to purge data that depends on the &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt; table.&lt;/span&gt;
* 差分ページの出力に&lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt;というJavaScript設定値を追加しました。

=== 操作 API の変更 ===
* ([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=parse の出力は、既定では &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; の {{tag|div|open}} に包まれるようになります。これは 新しい '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;' パラメータを使用して変更または無効化される可能性があります。
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; is not '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abort reasons from &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; will be formatted as specified by the error formatter parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; can now handle arbitrary text, deleted revisions, and returning users and edit comments.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) The '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', and '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated, as are the similarly named parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, or &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; instead.&lt;/span&gt;

=== 操作APIの内部的な変更 ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; messages are deprecated. The existing message should be split between &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Individual values of multi-valued parameters can now be marked as deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;

=== 言語の更新 ===
* カビエ語(Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè)のサポートが追加されました。

=== その他の変更 ===
* IP アドレスが値でなくキーである連想配列を &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt; に使用することは非推奨となります（''例''：&lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;）。これらの配列は、インデックスが付けられた/シーケンシャルなものに変換してください（''例''：&lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;）。
* &lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt;（1.23 より非推奨）は削除されました。
* &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; および &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; は非推奨になりました。知られている呼び出し元はありません。
* &lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; は非推奨になりました。
* &lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; は非推奨になりました。
* &lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; は非推奨になりました。新しい &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; を代わりに使用してください。
* &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; は非推奨になりました。新しい &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; を代わりに使用してください。
* &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; フック（1.21 より非推奨）は削除されました。
* &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; および &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt; メソッド（両者とも 1.24 より非推奨）は削除されました。
* &lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; および &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; は非推奨になりました。&lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; および &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; を代わりに使用してください。
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) Preprocessor handling of LanguageConverter markup has been improved. As a result of the new uniform handling, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' may need to be escaped (for example, as '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') where it occurs inside template arguments or wikilinks.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Page moves are now counted as edits for the purposes of autopromotion, ''i.e.'', they increment the &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; field in the database.&lt;/span&gt;
* 特別:ログおよび特別:新しいページの行の操作のための 2 つの新しいフック &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; および &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; が追加されました。
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; hooks have an additional parameter, for manipulating HTML data attributes of RC/history lines. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; can do that via the &lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt; subarray.&lt;/span&gt;
* ([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; メソッドは削除されました。
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; will now throw an exception if passed ParserOptions that would pollute the parser cache. Callers should use &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; to create the &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; object and only change options that affect the parser cache key.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; は非推奨になりました。
* &lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; は直接の値を渡すことをサポートしなくなります。呼び出し可能なファクトリ関数またはクラス名を必要とします。
* &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; グローバル変数、&lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; はすべて非推奨です。メインの &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; インスタンスは代わりに &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt; から取得してください。新しい &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt; メソッドを通して、下層にある &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; にアクセスすることが可能です。
* &lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS クラス（1.27 より非推奨）は削除されました。

== 下位ページ ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ej8jv4gg4cbazc8e48z5ic710m7tvzz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:Linter/es</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>721322</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402321</id>
      <parentid>5392717</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:10:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12741" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
La extensión '''{{ll|Extension:Linter|Linter}}''' identifica patrones de wikitexto que deberían o podrían arreglarse en las páginas, junto con algunas guías sobre qué problemas hay con dichos patrones y cómo arreglarlos.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;La página [[Special:LintErrors|Especial:Errores de sintaxis]] (Special:LintErrors) agrupa los errores por tipo. Algunos de estos errores pueden ser más fáciles de hallar mediante [[Special:Expandtemplates|Special:Expandtemplates]]. En esta página, clasificaremos los problemas de sintaxis de acuerdo con la gravedad del problema, teniendo en cuenta las metas que estos problemas impiden alcanzar. A continuación se muestra más información y se discutirán estos puntos.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some of these issues may be easier to find with [[Special:Expandtemplates|{{int|expandtemplates}}]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On this page, we will classify lint issues according to the severity of the issue vis-à-vis goals that are blocked by those issues.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More information and discussion about this is provided further below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a new feature &quot;Show all linter errors for a specific page&quot; at the bottom of [[Special:LintErrors|{{int|linterrors}}]] page which allows an editor to get a report of all errors on a single page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The report contains the category and other useful information and each error has a clickable link that loads the page and highlights the error.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Note: if your source editor has syntax highlighting enabled, the highlighting may not work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By working from the end of the list upward, changes to the page will not invalidate the character offsets of earlier errors and is the recommended way to work if you are fixing all errors on a page.&lt;/span&gt;

Seguiremos mejorando la funcionalidad para eliminar la interferencia, arreglar errores y facilitar el rendimiento del analizador, aunque el rendimiento actual está listo para usar y actuar.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Documentation of lint issues ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Help:Lint errors}}

== Qué arreglar y por qué ==

En adelante, el [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing|equipo de análisis sintáctico]] piensa hacer uso de la extensión Linter para identificar patrones de wikitexto:

* que son erróneos (por ejemplo, opciones de imagen inexistentes – creadas habitualmente por errores tipográficos o porque [[phab:T163582|el análisis de opciones para archivos multimedia en MediaWiki es frágil]]);
* que están obsoletos (por ejemplo, [[phab:T134423|etiquetas autocerradas]]);
* que pueden dejar de funcionar debido a cambios en el analizador sintáctico (por ejemplo, [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|reemplazar Tidy por RemexHTML]]);
* que ya no son válidos en HTML5 (por ejemplo, etiquetas obsoletas como center o font);
* que tienen la potencialidad de no funcionar o de ser mal interpretados por el analizador con respecto a la intención del editor original (por ejemplo, etiquetas HTML no cerradas o etiquetas HTML mal anidadas).

No todos estos patrones deben corregirse con prontitud o incluso en absoluto (dependiendo de tu tolerancia hacia los errores sintácticos). Se avanzan distintos objetivos mediante la corrección de distintos subconjuntos de los problemas descritos anteriormente. Nosotros (el equipo de análisis sintáctico) trataremos de ser transparentes en lo que se refiere a estos objetivos, y trataremos de proporcionar asistencia sobre qué correcciones avanzan qué objetivos.

'''Se proporcionan instrucciones simplificadas [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ#What will editors need to do?|en la página de preguntas frecuentes]].'''

=== Objetivo: [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ|reemplazar Tidy]] ===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Como parte del tratamiento de la deuda técnica en lo referente al analizador sintáctico de MediaWiki, hemos estado trabajado para poder reemplazar Tidy por una herramienta basada en HTML5. Sin embargo, hacer esto estropeará la presentación de un pequeño subconjunto de las páginas a menos que se arreglen ciertos patrones de wikitexto. Específicamente, problemas hallados en las categorías &lt;code&gt;deletable-table-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;pwrap-bug-workaround&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;self-closed-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;tidy-whitespace-bug&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;html5-misnesting&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;tidy-font-bug&lt;/code&gt;. Para poder asegurar que no prorrogaremos esta sustitución de Tidy por mucho tiempo, hemos marcado apropiadamente estos problemas con prioridad alta.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
=== Objetivo: [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/Known differences with PHP parser output|mejorar la conformidad entre la presentación del analizador PHP y Parsoid]] ===
&lt;/div&gt;
Ahora mismo, el HTML generado por el analizador PHP se utiliza para la lectura y el HTML generado por Parsoid es utilizado por [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/Users|herramientas de edición y la aplicación de Android, entre otras]].
El equipo de análisis sintáctico, [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing#A: Move to adopt Parsoid as the primary MediaWiki wikitext parser|como uno de sus objetivos a largo plazo]], quiere habilitar el uso de la salida de Parsoid para la lectura así como para la edición.
Como tanto Parsoid como RemexHTML son herramientas basadas en HTML5, las categorías sintácticas que afectan la presentación de RemexHTML también afectan la de Parsoid.
De momento, no hemos identificado ninguna categoría nueva de errores sintácticos que afecten la presentación de Parsoid, pero actualizaremos esta lista a medida que vayamos identificando categorías nuevas.

=== Objetivo: [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Notes/HTML5 Compliance|conformidad de la salida con HTML5]] ===

Este es un objetivo algo complejo y de momento no hemos llegado a un entendimiento sobre la importancia de alcanzar este objetivo o cuán lejos deberíamos ir. Además, no tenemos claro qué mecanismos querríamos utilizar para acercarnos a él. Por ejemplo, basándose en varias discusiones en otras reuniones, [[User:Legoktm/HTML+MediaWiki|User:Legoktm/HTML+MediaWiki]] esboza una propuesta para tratar la etiqueta ''big'', obsoleta en HTML5. En cualquier caso, arreglar problemas en las categorías &lt;code&gt;obsolete-tag&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;self-closed-tag&lt;/code&gt; nos acercan a este objetivo. Dada la falta de claridad de ideas en torno a él, hemos marcado convenientemente la categoría obsolete-tag como un objetivo de prioridad baja.

=== Objetivo: aclarar la intención del editor ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Conseguir que el marcado sea correcto es difícil. Involuntariamente, acabamos cometiendo errores. Aunque el analizador hace su trabajo lo mejor que puede para obviar estos errores, en muchos casos, lo que hace el analizador no refleja la intención original del editor. Teniendo esto en cuenta, pensamos que lo mejor es arreglar los problemas identificados aquí para aclarar cuál es la intención del editor. Los asuntos categorizados en &lt;code&gt;bogus-image-options&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;fostered-content&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;misnested-tag&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt; parecen afectar este objetivo. Como se trata de un objetivo de importancia considerable, hemos marcado la mayoría de estas categorías con prioridad media. Sin embargo, hemos marcado la categoría &lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt; con prioridad baja porque, en la gran mayoría de los casos, el analizador parece que hace un buen trabajo. De todas formas, recomendamos arreglar todo aquello que no suponga demasiado esfuerzo, aunque solo sea para contribuir a la comprensión sintáctica por parte de otros editores humanos y otras herramientas.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Errors inadvertently creep through.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;While the parser does its best in recovering from these errors, in many cases, what the parser does might not truly reflect the editor's original intent.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Given that, we recommend that it is best to fix the issues identified here to clarify the editor's intention.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Issues in the &lt;code&gt;bogus-image-options&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;fostered-content&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;misnested-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt; categories seem to affect this goal.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since this is a fairly important goal, we have marked most of them with medium priority.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, we have marked the missing-end-tag category with a low priority since in a vast majority of cases, the parser does seem to recover fairly accurately.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Nevertheless, we recommend fixing whatever can be fixed without too much effort, if only to assist comprehension by other human editors and tools.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Objetivo: un marcado limpio ===

Conseguir que el marcado sea correcto es difícil. Incluso en presencia de errores, el analizador hace en la mayoría de los casos un buen trabajo en averiguar con precisión de qué manera debería visualizarse tal o cual pieza de marcado. Sin embargo, de la misma manera en que los errores tipográficos, los errores de puntuación y los errores de gramática pueden incomodar a más de uno, algunos editores, entre ellos, los que tienen una mentalidad de desarrollador, pueden sentirse incómodos con estas categorías. No recomendamos invertir demasiado tiempo en arreglar estos problemas, y, en muchos escenarios, los bots también pueden ayudar a arreglarlos. Las categorías &lt;code&gt;misnested-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;stripped-tag&lt;/code&gt; afectan este objetivo.
&lt;!--
{{Special:PrefixIndex/Help:Extension:Linter/|stripprefix=1}}
--&gt;

== Preguntas frecuentes ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== When are lint errors for a page updated? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Currently, all lint categories are populated by errors identified by [[Parsoid]] while parsing a page. When a page (or, template transcluded on a page) is edited, [[Change propagation|ChangeProp]] requests a re-parse of that page from Parsoid, which will send the fresh results to the Linter extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that when a new category is introduced (or a correction is made to a previous category), it may take a while for all the results to be updated (if ever for pages that are rarely touched). Making a null edit would speed up the process individually. However, in [[phab:T161556]], we're exploring ways to reprocess all pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Should pages in X namespace (e.g. talk) be fixed ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The priority is [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgContentNamespaces|content namespace]]s. The rest largely depend on the wiki. A lot of pages are used as a [[wikipedia:Sandbox_(software_development)|sandbox]], and as such deliberately contain errors.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Herramientas ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:User:PerfektesChaos/js/lintHint]] – a JavaScript gadget that shows a list of LintErrors (Parsoid messages) live
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Wikipedia:WPCleaner/Linter|WPCleaner]] – a Java program that interfaces with Linter and can also detect some of the errors
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[:ja:User:MawaruNeko/ShowPageLintError.js]] – a user script that shows all lint errors on a page
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://github.com/RazeSoldier/Hclear-bot Bot] by [[User:星耀晨曦]] that can fix [[Help:Extension:Linter/multiple-unclosed-formatting-tags|multiple-unclosed-formatting-tags]] errors.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Véase también ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/API#Wikitext -&gt; Lint 2|Parsoid/API#Wikitext to lint]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|Parsing/Replacing Tidy]]
&lt;/div&gt;
*{{ll|Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*[[w:Wikipedia:Linter]]
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Linter{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>6sgogubt953cjtsa2sikjtk6kdv7cwn</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402327</id>
      <parentid>5402321</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:12:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12701" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
La extensión '''{{ll|Extension:Linter|Linter}}''' identifica patrones de wikitexto que deberían o podrían arreglarse en las páginas, junto con algunas guías sobre qué problemas hay con dichos patrones y cómo arreglarlos.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;La página [[Special:LintErrors|Especial:Errores de sintaxis]] (Special:LintErrors) agrupa los errores por tipo. Algunos de estos errores pueden ser más fáciles de hallar mediante [[Special:Expandtemplates|Special:Expandtemplates]]. En esta página, clasificaremos los problemas de sintaxis de acuerdo con la gravedad del problema, teniendo en cuenta las metas que estos problemas impiden alcanzar. A continuación se muestra más información y se discutirán estos puntos.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some of these issues may be easier to find with [[Special:Expandtemplates|{{int|expandtemplates}}]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On this page, we will classify lint issues according to the severity of the issue vis-à-vis goals that are blocked by those issues.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More information and discussion about this is provided further below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a new feature &quot;Show all linter errors for a specific page&quot; at the bottom of [[Special:LintErrors|{{int|linterrors}}]] page which allows an editor to get a report of all errors on a single page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The report contains the category and other useful information and each error has a clickable link that loads the page and highlights the error.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Note: if your source editor has syntax highlighting enabled, the highlighting may not work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By working from the end of the list upward, changes to the page will not invalidate the character offsets of earlier errors and is the recommended way to work if you are fixing all errors on a page.&lt;/span&gt;

Seguiremos mejorando la funcionalidad para eliminar la interferencia, arreglar errores y facilitar el rendimiento del analizador, aunque el rendimiento actual está listo para usar y actuar.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Documentation of lint issues ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Help:Lint errors}}

== Qué arreglar y por qué ==

En adelante, el [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing|equipo de análisis sintáctico]] piensa hacer uso de la extensión Linter para identificar patrones de wikitexto:

* que son erróneos (por ejemplo, opciones de imagen inexistentes – creadas habitualmente por errores tipográficos o porque [[phab:T163582|el análisis de opciones para archivos multimedia en MediaWiki es frágil]]);
* que están obsoletos (por ejemplo, [[phab:T134423|etiquetas autocerradas]]);
* que pueden dejar de funcionar debido a cambios en el analizador sintáctico (por ejemplo, [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|reemplazar Tidy por RemexHTML]]);
* que ya no son válidos en HTML5 (por ejemplo, etiquetas obsoletas como center o font);
* que tienen la potencialidad de no funcionar o de ser mal interpretados por el analizador con respecto a la intención del editor original (por ejemplo, etiquetas HTML no cerradas o etiquetas HTML mal anidadas).

No todos estos patrones deben corregirse con prontitud o incluso en absoluto (dependiendo de tu tolerancia hacia los errores sintácticos). Se avanzan distintos objetivos mediante la corrección de distintos subconjuntos de los problemas descritos anteriormente. Nosotros (el equipo de análisis sintáctico) trataremos de ser transparentes en lo que se refiere a estos objetivos, y trataremos de proporcionar asistencia sobre qué correcciones avanzan qué objetivos.

'''Se proporcionan instrucciones simplificadas [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ#What will editors need to do?|en la página de preguntas frecuentes]].'''

=== Objetivo: [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ|reemplazar Tidy]] ===

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Como parte del tratamiento de la deuda técnica en lo referente al analizador sintáctico de MediaWiki, hemos estado trabajado para poder reemplazar Tidy por una herramienta basada en HTML5. Sin embargo, hacer esto estropeará la presentación de un pequeño subconjunto de las páginas a menos que se arreglen ciertos patrones de wikitexto. Específicamente, problemas hallados en las categorías &lt;code&gt;deletable-table-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;pwrap-bug-workaround&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;self-closed-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;tidy-whitespace-bug&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;html5-misnesting&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;tidy-font-bug&lt;/code&gt;. Para poder asegurar que no prorrogaremos esta sustitución de Tidy por mucho tiempo, hemos marcado apropiadamente estos problemas con prioridad alta.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Objetivo: [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/Known differences with PHP parser output|mejorar la conformidad entre la presentación del analizador PHP y Parsoid]] ===
Ahora mismo, el HTML generado por el analizador PHP se utiliza para la lectura y el HTML generado por Parsoid es utilizado por [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/Users|herramientas de edición y la aplicación de Android, entre otras]].
El equipo de análisis sintáctico, [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing#A: Move to adopt Parsoid as the primary MediaWiki wikitext parser|como uno de sus objetivos a largo plazo]], quiere habilitar el uso de la salida de Parsoid para la lectura así como para la edición.
Como tanto Parsoid como RemexHTML son herramientas basadas en HTML5, las categorías sintácticas que afectan la presentación de RemexHTML también afectan la de Parsoid.
De momento, no hemos identificado ninguna categoría nueva de errores sintácticos que afecten la presentación de Parsoid, pero actualizaremos esta lista a medida que vayamos identificando categorías nuevas.

=== Objetivo: [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Notes/HTML5 Compliance|conformidad de la salida con HTML5]] ===

Este es un objetivo algo complejo y de momento no hemos llegado a un entendimiento sobre la importancia de alcanzar este objetivo o cuán lejos deberíamos ir. Además, no tenemos claro qué mecanismos querríamos utilizar para acercarnos a él. Por ejemplo, basándose en varias discusiones en otras reuniones, [[User:Legoktm/HTML+MediaWiki|User:Legoktm/HTML+MediaWiki]] esboza una propuesta para tratar la etiqueta ''big'', obsoleta en HTML5. En cualquier caso, arreglar problemas en las categorías &lt;code&gt;obsolete-tag&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;self-closed-tag&lt;/code&gt; nos acercan a este objetivo. Dada la falta de claridad de ideas en torno a él, hemos marcado convenientemente la categoría obsolete-tag como un objetivo de prioridad baja.

=== Objetivo: aclarar la intención del editor ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Conseguir que el marcado sea correcto es difícil. Involuntariamente, acabamos cometiendo errores. Aunque el analizador hace su trabajo lo mejor que puede para obviar estos errores, en muchos casos, lo que hace el analizador no refleja la intención original del editor. Teniendo esto en cuenta, pensamos que lo mejor es arreglar los problemas identificados aquí para aclarar cuál es la intención del editor. Los asuntos categorizados en &lt;code&gt;bogus-image-options&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;fostered-content&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;misnested-tag&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt; parecen afectar este objetivo. Como se trata de un objetivo de importancia considerable, hemos marcado la mayoría de estas categorías con prioridad media. Sin embargo, hemos marcado la categoría &lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt; con prioridad baja porque, en la gran mayoría de los casos, el analizador parece que hace un buen trabajo. De todas formas, recomendamos arreglar todo aquello que no suponga demasiado esfuerzo, aunque solo sea para contribuir a la comprensión sintáctica por parte de otros editores humanos y otras herramientas.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Errors inadvertently creep through.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;While the parser does its best in recovering from these errors, in many cases, what the parser does might not truly reflect the editor's original intent.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Given that, we recommend that it is best to fix the issues identified here to clarify the editor's intention.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Issues in the &lt;code&gt;bogus-image-options&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;fostered-content&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;misnested-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt; categories seem to affect this goal.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since this is a fairly important goal, we have marked most of them with medium priority.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, we have marked the missing-end-tag category with a low priority since in a vast majority of cases, the parser does seem to recover fairly accurately.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Nevertheless, we recommend fixing whatever can be fixed without too much effort, if only to assist comprehension by other human editors and tools.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Objetivo: un marcado limpio ===

Conseguir que el marcado sea correcto es difícil. Incluso en presencia de errores, el analizador hace en la mayoría de los casos un buen trabajo en averiguar con precisión de qué manera debería visualizarse tal o cual pieza de marcado. Sin embargo, de la misma manera en que los errores tipográficos, los errores de puntuación y los errores de gramática pueden incomodar a más de uno, algunos editores, entre ellos, los que tienen una mentalidad de desarrollador, pueden sentirse incómodos con estas categorías. No recomendamos invertir demasiado tiempo en arreglar estos problemas, y, en muchos escenarios, los bots también pueden ayudar a arreglarlos. Las categorías &lt;code&gt;misnested-tag&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;stripped-tag&lt;/code&gt; afectan este objetivo.
&lt;!--
{{Special:PrefixIndex/Help:Extension:Linter/|stripprefix=1}}
--&gt;

== Preguntas frecuentes ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== When are lint errors for a page updated? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Currently, all lint categories are populated by errors identified by [[Parsoid]] while parsing a page. When a page (or, template transcluded on a page) is edited, [[Change propagation|ChangeProp]] requests a re-parse of that page from Parsoid, which will send the fresh results to the Linter extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that when a new category is introduced (or a correction is made to a previous category), it may take a while for all the results to be updated (if ever for pages that are rarely touched). Making a null edit would speed up the process individually. However, in [[phab:T161556]], we're exploring ways to reprocess all pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Should pages in X namespace (e.g. talk) be fixed ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The priority is [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgContentNamespaces|content namespace]]s. The rest largely depend on the wiki. A lot of pages are used as a [[wikipedia:Sandbox_(software_development)|sandbox]], and as such deliberately contain errors.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Herramientas ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:User:PerfektesChaos/js/lintHint]] – a JavaScript gadget that shows a list of LintErrors (Parsoid messages) live
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Wikipedia:WPCleaner/Linter|WPCleaner]] – a Java program that interfaces with Linter and can also detect some of the errors
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[:ja:User:MawaruNeko/ShowPageLintError.js]] – a user script that shows all lint errors on a page
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://github.com/RazeSoldier/Hclear-bot Bot] by [[User:星耀晨曦]] that can fix [[Help:Extension:Linter/multiple-unclosed-formatting-tags|multiple-unclosed-formatting-tags]] errors.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Véase también ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/API#Wikitext -&gt; Lint 2|Parsoid/API#Wikitext to lint]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|Parsing/Replacing Tidy]]
&lt;/div&gt;
*{{ll|Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*[[w:Wikipedia:Linter]]
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Linter{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>f91mjlk640z7uln8q8srmmnvoy9dh8e</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Linter/25/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>723226</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402326</id>
      <parentid>2572509</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:12:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="99" xml:space="preserve">=== Objetivo: [[$1|mejorar la conformidad entre la presentación del analizador PHP y Parsoid]] ===</text>
      <sha1>lzmne71d57mrep3t1rhmysse18lnwng</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Linter/27/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>723227</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402320</id>
      <parentid>2572511</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:10:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="59" xml:space="preserve">=== Objetivo: [[$1|conformidad de la salida con HTML5]] ===</text>
      <sha1>ao8rdq57gzbzen5damm8pymnqy8krot</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>724892</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402766</id>
      <parentid>3621626</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:41:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="79" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Ayuda usando platillas de citas]] o [[$2|Ayuda usando citoid's botón $3]]</text>
      <sha1>pw00bp83ibyfgm7wtoyzdtq8d1jujfe</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/pt-br</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>726629</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402626</id>
      <parentid>4578057</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3768" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Discussões Estruturadas (anteriormente conhecidas como Flow) é [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|um projeto]] da equipe de Colaboração da Wikimedia Foundation para construir um sistema moderno de discussão e colaboração para projetos da Wikimedia.

== Tour rápido ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|Como as discussões estruturadas parecem - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Tente!]]]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Descubra em uma página por que criamos discussões estruturadas e como usá-las]]''': 
* [[$basics|noções básicas de edição]], 
* [[$post|postar uma resposta]] (para a discussão global ou para uma pessoa específica em uma conversa global), 
* [[$create|criar uma discussão]], 
* [[$watch|assistir a um tópico ou a um quadro inteiro]], 
* [[$notifications|Receber notificações]],
* [[$browse|pesquisar e arquivar assuntos]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Existem alguns termos específicos relacionados a Discussões Estruturadas. Eles foram definidos em '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|o glossário]]'''.

Discussões estruturadas não estão funcionando para você? por favor, verifique '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|se você puder resolver esse problema]]'''.

== Ferramentas avançadas ==

Algumas ferramentas avançadas estão disponíveis para fins específicos. Eles foram reagrupados nesses assuntos:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Ativação}}
:O que acontece quando as discussões estruturadas são ativadas em uma página?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Tópicos}}
:Filtrar tópicos, Editar um tópico/mensagem, Resumir um tópico, Resolver um tópico
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Ligações permanentes}}
:Como criar links para assuntos
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Notificações e lista de vigiados}}
:As notificações que você recebe e as diferentes entradas nas listas de vigiados
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=História}}
:Como o sistema de histórico funciona
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Administração}}
:Ocultar, Excluir, Suprimir tópicos
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Pré-carregamento}}
:Pré-carregando conteúdos em uma nova conversa de Discussões Estruturadas
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Atalhos}}
:Atalhos de teclado para usar no modo de edição visual.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Toda a documentação em uma página.}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>n0ydt0mh4vd7zh2xmtrpqwk1celmqnw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/ca</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>730065</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402759</id>
      <parentid>2601511</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:38:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="92" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Com utilitzar les plantilles de citació]] o [[$2|Com utilitzar el botó $3 de Citoid]]</text>
      <sha1>l88w429zp7j6ncza2xbmqfq173lkm8n</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Portal/ca</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>732352</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402999</id>
      <parentid>4989883</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:52:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7161" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Us donem la benvinguda al portal de l''''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|EditorVisual]]''', una nova forma de modificar la Wikipèdia que està sent desenvolupada per la Fundació Wikimedia. Es tracta d'una eina que permet modificar les pàgines sense haver d'aprendre el codi wiki. Esperem que ajudi els usuaris a contribuir a la Wikipèdia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Llegiu '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Informeu d'un problema''' amb l'EditorVisual].
|-
| Descobriu com crear enllaços, afegir o moure imatges, crear citacions, inserir plantilles, modificar taules, etc.
|Incloeu '''el navegador, el sistema operatiu i la pell de Wikipèdia''' que esteu utilitzant (normalment Vector, però a vegades Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Sobre l'EditorVisual ==

L'EditorVisual és una manera &quot;visual&quot; de modificar la Wikipèdia. Històricament, modificar la Wikipèdia ha exigit als usuaris aprendre el codi wiki, un llenguatge d'etiquetatge bastant complex, fins i tot per fer retocs en una pàgina. El 2001, això era acceptable; el 2015, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|està foragitant els contribuïdors]]. Esperem que l'EditorVisual sigui útil als contribuïdors presents i més acollidor per als usuaris novells. 

L'EditorVisual ha estat disponible com a versió &quot;alfa&quot; d'alta voluntària a MediaWiki.org des de mitjan 2012, a la Wikipèdia en anglès des del desembre del 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ en unes altres 14 llengües des de l'abril del 2013] i [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ en gairebé totes les altres] des del començament de juny del 2013. A data de juliol del 2015, ha estat disponible per defecte tant per als redactors no registrats com per als registrats a més del 75% de les Wikipèdies.
Tenim pensat habilitar-lo per defecte en la majoria de [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|la resta de llengües]] al final del 2015.
Des del final del novembre del 2014, també es disponible com a [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|funcionalitat beta]] d'alta voluntària a tots els wikis de WMF llevat de Wiktionary i Wikisource.

Publiquem [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|notícies multilingües]], centrat en els wikis de WMF.

== Utilitzar l'EditorVisual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Si us interessa utilitzar l'EditorVisual per fer modificacions, tenim una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guia que explica com es fa]], així com una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|llista de les dreceres de teclat més comunes]].

Actualment, l'EditorVisual té alguns errors de programari i limitacions. Si trobeu cap problema, no dubteu a [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar-ne a la pàgina de comentaris]]. Entre les limitacions actuals hi ha les següents:

* '''Càrrega lenta''': Les pàgines llargues i complexes triguen una mica a carregar-se a l'EditorVisual. En el futur, el programa serà molt més ràpid i permetrà carregar-hi pàgines més llargues.
* '''Modificacions incompletes''': Alguns elements de format complex es mostren i se'n pot modificar el contingut, però no se'n pot modificar l'estructura o afegir-hi entrades (per exemple, les llistes de definicions). Millorar això és una de les nostres prioritats.
* '''Funciona a la majoria de pàgines de contingut, però no a les de discussió''': L'EditorVisual només està habilitat en alguns espais de noms. A la majoria de Wikipèdies, l'EditorVisual es pot emprar en articles i pàgines User: (Usuari:), File: (Fitxer:), Help: (Ajuda:) i Category: (Categoria:). Actualment no és disponible a les pàgines Wikipèdia: (Viquipèdia:) ni a cap mena de pàgines de discussió.

Recomanem que els usuaris cliquin a &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; abans de desar la pàgina i que [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informin de qualsevol problema que trobin]].

== Com hi podeu ajudar ==

Perquè l'EditorVisual sigui tan bo com pot arribar a ser, hi ha moltes coses amb què necessitem ajuda. Evidentment, gran part consisteix a utilitzar el programa, trobar-hi errors i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar-nos-en]], però també hi ha moltes altres tasques, com ara les següents:

* '''Actualitzeu les pàgines d'ajuda''': Tots els nostres projectes tenen pàgines d'ajuda perquè els usuaris novells hi contribueixin més fàcilment. Malauradament, totes depenen de l'editor de codi, i a mesura que l'EditorVisual evolucioni, totes les captures de pantalla i els tutorials quedaran obsolets. Aniria molt bé que poguéssiu [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|actualitzar les pàgines d'ajuda]], basant-vos en el [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|tutorial sobre l'EditorVisual]].
* '''Afegiu TemplateData a les plantilles''': L'EditorVisual té un editor de plantilles ben maco, que es descriu amb més detall a la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|pàgina d'ajuda]]. Com veureu si l'utilitzeu a la Wikipèdia, algunes plantilles tenen paràmetres amb nom i unes bones descripcions que les fan fàcils d'emprar, mentre que altres no. Això és perquè les plantilles necessiten tenir &quot;TemplateData&quot; perquè aquesta característica funcioni. Si us interessaria afegir TemplateData, tenim [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|una guia de com es fa]], juntament amb una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|llista de les plantilles més importants on afegir-lo]].
* '''Ajudeu la vostra comunitat''': Vegeu la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|llista de maneres útils d'ajudar la vostra comunitat local]] per optimitzar l'experiència de fer modificacions amb l'editor visual.
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* '''Ajudeu els usuaris novells''': Si el llançament de l'EditorVisual és un èxit, tindrem molts més usuaris novells que de costum, i encara que fer modificacions serà més fàcil, entendre com s'interactua amb la comunitat seguirà sent difícil. Podríeu passar alguna estona [[$new-users|a la Taverna o al canal d'IRC d'ajuda]] per ajudar els nouvinguts a aclimatar-se a la Wikipèdia.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Vegeu també ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - una llista de coses a fer per optimitzar l'experiència de fer modificacions al vostre wiki.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - un lloc on els wikipedistes s'ajuden en les feines relacionades amb l'editor visual.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - una guia antiga per a les comunitats totalment novelles amb l'editor visual.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>c6ml283k7krpxt90pvyf6g17h3s92og</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403039</id>
      <parentid>5402999</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:54:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7159" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Us donem la benvinguda al portal de l''''[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|EditorVisual]]''', una nova forma de modificar la Wikipèdia que està sent desenvolupada per la Fundació Wikimedia. Es tracta d'una eina que permet modificar les pàgines sense haver d'aprendre el codi wiki. Esperem que ajudi els usuaris a contribuir a la Wikipèdia.

{| style=&quot;background:#EBF4FA; border:1px solid lightgray; text-align:center; margin: 1em auto 1em auto;&quot;
|-
| style=&quot;font-size:150%; width:50%&quot; | Llegiu '''{{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide}}'''.
| style=&quot;font-size:150%&quot; class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; | [{{fullurl:VisualEditor/Feedback|action=edit&amp;section=new&amp;watchthis=1}} '''Informeu d'un problema''' amb l'EditorVisual].
|-
| Descobriu com crear enllaços, afegir o moure imatges, crear citacions, inserir plantilles, modificar taules, etc.
|Incloeu '''el navegador, el sistema operatiu i la pell de Wikipèdia''' que esteu utilitzant (normalment Vector, però a vegades Monobook).
|}
{{VisualEditor Portal}}

== Sobre l'EditorVisual ==

L'EditorVisual és una manera &quot;visual&quot; de modificar la Wikipèdia. Històricament, modificar la Wikipèdia ha exigit als usuaris aprendre el codi wiki, un llenguatge d'etiquetatge bastant complex, fins i tot per fer retocs en una pàgina. El 2001, això era acceptable; el 2015, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Why|està foragitant els contribuïdors]]. Esperem que l'EditorVisual sigui útil als contribuïdors presents i més acollidor per als usuaris novells. 

L'EditorVisual ha estat disponible com a versió &quot;alfa&quot; d'alta voluntària a MediaWiki.org des de mitjan 2012, a la Wikipèdia en anglès des del desembre del 2012, [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/04/25/visualeditor-alpha-in-15-languages/ en unes altres 14 llengües des de l'abril del 2013] i [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2013/06/06/preparing-for-visualeditor-on-all-wikipedias/ en gairebé totes les altres] des del començament de juny del 2013. A data de juliol del 2015, ha estat disponible per defecte tant per als redactors no registrats com per als registrats a més del 75% de les Wikipèdies.
Tenim pensat habilitar-lo per defecte en la majoria de [[VisualEditor/Rollouts|la resta de llengües]] al final del 2015.
Des del final del novembre del 2014, també es disponible com a [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|funcionalitat beta]] d'alta voluntària a tots els wikis de WMF llevat de Wiktionary i Wikisource.

Publiquem [[:m:Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Newsletter|notícies multilingües]], centrat en els wikis de WMF.

== Utilitzar l'EditorVisual ==
[[File:VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|300px|Using the visual editor to increase the indentation of a bulleted list.]]

Si us interessa utilitzar l'EditorVisual per fer modificacions, tenim una [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|guia que explica com es fa]], així com una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|llista de les dreceres de teclat més comunes]].

Actualment, l'EditorVisual té alguns errors de programari i limitacions. Si trobeu cap problema, no dubteu a [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar-ne a la pàgina de comentaris]]. Entre les limitacions actuals hi ha les següents:

* '''Càrrega lenta''': Les pàgines llargues i complexes triguen una mica a carregar-se a l'EditorVisual. En el futur, el programa serà molt més ràpid i permetrà carregar-hi pàgines més llargues.
* '''Modificacions incompletes''': Alguns elements de format complex es mostren i se'n pot modificar el contingut, però no se'n pot modificar l'estructura o afegir-hi entrades (per exemple, les llistes de definicions). Millorar això és una de les nostres prioritats.
* '''Funciona a la majoria de pàgines de contingut, però no a les de discussió''': L'EditorVisual només està habilitat en alguns espais de noms. A la majoria de Wikipèdies, l'EditorVisual es pot emprar en articles i pàgines User: (Usuari:), File: (Fitxer:), Help: (Ajuda:) i Category: (Categoria:). Actualment no és disponible a les pàgines Wikipèdia: (Viquipèdia:) ni a cap mena de pàgines de discussió.

Recomanem que els usuaris cliquin a &quot;{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot; abans de desar la pàgina i que [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informin de qualsevol problema que trobin]].

== Com hi podeu ajudar ==

Perquè l'EditorVisual sigui tan bo com pot arribar a ser, hi ha moltes coses amb què necessitem ajuda. Evidentment, gran part consisteix a utilitzar el programa, trobar-hi errors i [[VisualEditor/Feedback|informar-nos-en]], però també hi ha moltes altres tasques, com ara les següents:

* '''Actualitzeu les pàgines d'ajuda''': Tots els nostres projectes tenen pàgines d'ajuda perquè els usuaris novells hi contribueixin més fàcilment. Malauradament, totes depenen de l'editor de codi, i a mesura que l'EditorVisual evolucioni, totes les captures de pantalla i els tutorials quedaran obsolets. Aniria molt bé que poguéssiu [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/Help|actualitzar les pàgines d'ajuda]], basant-vos en el [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide|tutorial sobre l'EditorVisual]].
* '''Afegiu TemplateData a les plantilles''': L'EditorVisual té un editor de plantilles ben maco, que es descriu amb més detall a la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide#Editing_templates|pàgina d'ajuda]]. Com veureu si l'utilitzeu a la Wikipèdia, algunes plantilles tenen paràmetres amb nom i unes bones descripcions que les fan fàcils d'emprar, mentre que altres no. Això és perquè les plantilles necessiten tenir &quot;TemplateData&quot; perquè aquesta característica funcioni. Si us interessaria afegir TemplateData, tenim [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData tutorial|una guia de com es fa]], juntament amb una [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/TemplateData|llista de les plantilles més importants on afegir-lo]].
* '''Ajudeu la vostra comunitat''': Vegeu la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/VE_as_the_main_editor|llista de maneres útils d'ajudar la vostra comunitat local]] per optimitzar l'experiència de fer modificacions amb l'editor visual.
* '''Ajudeu els usuaris novells''': Si el llançament de l'EditorVisual és un èxit, tindrem molts més usuaris novells que de costum, i encara que fer modificacions serà més fàcil, entendre com s'interactua amb la comunitat seguirà sent difícil. Podríeu passar alguna estona [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor/Portal/New users|a la Taverna o al canal d'IRC d'ajuda]] per ajudar els nouvinguts a aclimatar-se a la Wikipèdia.

== Vegeu també ==
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as the main editor}} - una llista de coses a fer per optimitzar l'experiència de fer modificacions al vostre wiki.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Community Taskforce}} - un lloc on els wikipedistes s'ajuden en les feines relacionades amb l'editor visual.
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/The visual editor at Wikisources and Wiktionaries}}
* {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/VE as Beta Feature}} - una guia antiga per a les comunitats totalment novelles amb l'editor visual.

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|Portal]]</text>
      <sha1>4s43q2pe2k4gus63e3aefu2qd8pi8j2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/1/ca</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>732353</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402395</id>
      <parentid>2610127</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:47:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="316" xml:space="preserve">Us donem la benvinguda al portal de l''''[[$ve|EditorVisual]]''', una nova forma de modificar la Wikipèdia que està sent desenvolupada per la Fundació Wikimedia. Es tracta d'una eina que permet modificar les pàgines sense haver d'aprendre el codi wiki. Esperem que ajudi els usuaris a contribuir a la Wikipèdia.</text>
      <sha1>jtmbvj29cjk56saicxszuqdj08f67di</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/ca</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>732440</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403038</id>
      <parentid>2610472</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:54:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="385" xml:space="preserve">* '''Ajudeu els usuaris novells''': Si el llançament de l'EditorVisual és un èxit, tindrem molts més usuaris novells que de costum, i encara que fer modificacions serà més fàcil, entendre com s'interactua amb la comunitat seguirà sent difícil. Podríeu passar alguna estona [[$1|a la Taverna o al canal d'IRC d'ajuda]] per ajudar els nouvinguts a aclimatar-se a la Wikipèdia.</text>
      <sha1>60bf5198yo9z4bu5wopdck2woze825i</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/it</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>732825</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402674</id>
      <parentid>5154670</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:01:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10069" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Questa pagina è una guida rapida su Discussioni Strutturate.

Discussioni Strutturate è anche nota come &quot;Flow&quot;.

Qui otterrai le informazioni più importanti su Discussioni Strutturate e su come utilizzarla.
Tutti i termini specifici (nel testo sono in corsivo) sono definiti nel [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|glossario]].

== Perchè Discussioni Strutturate ==
Discussioni Strutturate è una nuova modalità con cui effettuare una discussione.
La struttura delle discussioni è cambiata: una pagina di discussione (una ''Bacheca'') è ora un'aggregazione di ''Argomenti'' in cui ogni argomento è indipendente e può essere visualizzato separatamente.
Discussioni Strutturate permette ad un utente di scegliere quali argomenti osservare; senza necessariamente seguire un'intera pagina.

I nuovi argomenti sono aggiunti in cima alla pagina.
Gli argomenti possono essere elencati per data di creazione o per data di ultima modifica.
Discussioni Strutturate permette alle persone di discutere [[#basics|sia utilizzando un editor visuale che utilizzando l'editor di wikitesto 2017]].

I bottoni delle azioni (rispondi e ringrazia) sono collegati ad ogni risposta, pronti all'uso.
Non è più necessario indentare le tue risposte, archiviare le discussioni o firmarsi.
Le discussioni procedono più velocemente e sono generalmente più accessibili.

== Interfaccia ==

L'interfaccia globale di una bacheca di Discussioni Strutturate. Gli elementi specifici inerenti i messaggi non vengono mostrati (firma, rispondi, collegamenti...).

{| style=&quot;width:70%;font-size:130%; margin:1em auto;&quot; 
| 
&lt;strong style=&quot;font-family:Linux Libertine,Georgia,Times,serif;font-size: 1.5em;line-height: 1.3;margin-bottom: 0.25em;padding: 0;&quot;&gt;
Titolo bacheca
&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Menù fisso &quot;Sfoglia argomenti&quot;
{| 
| style=&quot;border:1px solid #222; width:100%; color:#AAA;padding: {{dir|{{pagelang}}|3px 3px 3px 180px|3px 180px 3px 3px}};&quot; | ''Campo testuale per iniziare un nuovo Argomento''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Titolo Argomento
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Messaggio 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Messaggio 2
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;padding-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 5%; border:none;&quot; |Risposta al messaggio 2 (fatta cliccando su &quot;rispondi&quot;, sotto al 2° messaggio)
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Messaggio 3
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Campo testuale per la risposta)''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Altro Argomento, altro Titolo
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Messaggio 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Campo testuale per la risposta)''
|}
| style=&quot;background-color:#EEEEEE; width:33%;padding: 1em;vertical-align:top;&quot; |Descrizione Bacheca
|}

== Come fruire di Discussioni Strutturate ==
{{anchor|basics}}

=== Basi per scrivere ===
[[File:Flow toolbar - Apr. 2017.png|thumb|542x542px|La barra degli strumenti di Discussioni Strutturate, con pulsanti per lo stile del testo, i collegamenti, le menzioni e, sulla destra, passare ad un editor differente (wikitesto o visuale).]]

Puoi partecipare alle discussioni fruendo di due sistemi di input: l'editor visuale (predefinito) o l'[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|editor di wikitesto]].
Puoi passare in qualsiasi momento fra modalità di modifica visuale e la modalità di modifica in wikitesto.

Quando pubblichi un messaggio o crei un nuovo argomento, avrai una barra degli strumenti con 4 pulsanti:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* 3 buttons on the left (on a right-to-left keyboard):
** add style
** add link (with suggestions and search)
** mention someone (with suggestions and search)
* one button on the right to switch between editors.
&lt;/div&gt;

Mentre si modifica il testo, le scorciatoie del wikitesto funzionano in modalità visuale. Per saperne di più, visitare [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|scorciatoie di Discussioni Strutturate]].

Durante la tua sessione, il sito ricorderà quale sistema preferisci, a meno che tu non abbia definito un editor preferito nelle preferenze (scheda &quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot;).

Se hai rinunciato all'editor di wikitesto 2017 e/o all'editor visuale, vedrai un semplice insieme di campi in wikitesto per postare o modificare una risposta, senza nessuna barra degli strumenti.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;{{int|flow-preference-visualeditor}}&quot; in your preferences (&quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot; tab) to opt-in and have a toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;

Ricorda: non serve più indentare il messaggio o finirlo con una firma!

Tutte queste nozioni basilari si applicano a tutte le discussioni e risposte o quando modifichi un ''Argomento'', una ''Descrizione'' o un ''Riassunto''.

* Vedi anche: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics#Edit|Modificare un argomento, un messaggio]]

{{anchor|post}}
=== Pubblicare una risposta ===

==== All'argomento globale ====
Ogni partecipante può scrivere al di sotto della discussione, in ordine cronologico.
È come una consueta conversazione su un sito wiki ma senza dover indentare, o come rispondere alle e-mail.
Il tuo ''Messaggio'' sarà mostrato al di sotto di tutti i commenti relativi all&lt;nowiki&gt;'&lt;/nowiki&gt;''Argomento''.

Se hai bisogno di dire qualcosa a qualcuno in particolare, puoi menzionarlo o rispondergli (vedi sotto).
In questo caso si utilizza il pulsante &quot;rispondi&quot; per creare una digressione. Questa digressione crea un'[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|indentazione]]. È possibile aggiungere 7 livelli di digressione.

Il tuo ''Messaggio'' sarà mostrato al di sotto del commento a cui hai risposto e, a meno che non sia l'ultimo messaggio della ''Bacheca'', sarà indentato.
Puoi anche soltanto ringraziare qualcuno.

==== Ad una persona specifica in un argomento ====
Se vuoi dire qualcosa a qualcuno in particolare, puoi menzionarlo sulla tua risposta globale, o cliccare sul tasto &quot;''Rispondi''&quot; sotto al suo messaggio.
Cliccare su &quot;''Reply''&quot; aggiungerà un ''Messaggio'', al di sotto del ''Messaggio'' a cui vuoi rispondere direttamente, tranne se quel messaggio è l'ultimo di tutte le discussioni. In quest'ultimo caso, si suppone che la risposta è all'argomento globale ed essa sarà posta direttamente sotto l'ultimo.

Per fornire un contesto migliore all'interno delle tue risposte, puoi anche citare il messaggio di qualcuno copiaincollandone una parte.

Il tuo ''Messaggio'' dipende dal ''Messaggio'' a cui hai risposto.
Questo ''Messaggio'' è concepito come una risposta specifica. Sarà separata dalla discussione principale da una linea grigia. 
In ogni caso, ogni persona che osserva questo ''Argomento'' otterrà una notifica alla tua risposta, come ad ogni risposta.

{{anchor|create}}
=== Creare una discussione ===
[[File:New discussion in Flow - Sept. 2015.png|thumb|534x534px|Come creare una discussione: cliccare sulla barra &quot;Inizia un nuovo argomento&quot;.]]
Creare una nuova discussione in una pagina che utilizza Discussioni Strutturate è semplice: hai solo bisogno di cliccare sul campo &quot;Inizia un nuovo argomento&quot;. Discussioni Strutturate preparerà due campi.

Il primo campo è &quot;inizia un nuovo argomento&quot;, scegli un titolo adeguato. Il secondo campo è &quot;Scrivi un nuovo messaggio su...&quot;, aggiungi il tuo testo. Scegli accuratamente il tuo titolo per attrarre lettori: le persone lo vedranno nelle loro Notifiche senza ulteriori dettagli.

Quando sei pronto, clicca sul tasto &quot;Aggiungi argomento&quot;. Il tuo ''Messaggio'' è online, ogni persona che osserva la pagina sarà notificata sulla creazione di questo argomento.

Sarai auto-iscritto quando crei un argomento: otterrai una notifica quando qualcuno risponde.

* vedi anche: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Riassumere un argomento / Risolvere un argomento]]

{{anchor|watch}}
=== Osservare ===

==== Un argomento ====

Per osservare uno specifico argomento, clicca sulla stella in alto all&lt;nowiki&gt;'&lt;/nowiki&gt;''Argomento'', vicino al titolo. Diventerà blu. Se è già blu, significa che stai già osservando quell'argomento.

Otterrai una notifica per ogni modifica a questo ''Argomento''. Esso verrà anche aggiunto alla lista dei tuoi osservati speciali.

Quando crei un ''Argomento'' sei automaticamente iscritto a tale ''Argomento''.

==== Una pagina di discussione ====

Per osservare un'intera pagina, clicca sulla stella in cima alla pagina, vicino al campo di ricerca. Diventerà blu. Se è già blu, significa che stai già osservando tale pagina.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Otterrai una notifica per ogni nuovo argomento pubblicato in questa pagina di discussione. Essa verrà anche aggiunta alla lista dei tuoi osservati speciali.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|notifications}}
==== Notifiche ====

Puoi disattivare le notifiche di Discussioni Strutturate dalle tue preferenze di notifica. La tua pagina degli osservati speciali verrà comunque aggiornata con una nuova riga per ogni argomento aggiunto in una delle pagine di discussione che stai osservando, o per ogni nuova risposta ad un ''Argomento'' che stai seguendo.

{{anchor|browse}}
== Sfogliare e archiviare ==

Tutti gli Argomenti mostrati sulla bacheca sono elencati nell'indice dei contenuti. Puoi sfogliare tutti questi Argomenti da questa tabella.

L'archiviazione è automatica: tutte le discussioni spariscono quando non sono più attive. Puoi anche rivedere i vecchi Argomenti scendendo in basso nella pagina, o cercando nell'indice dei contenuti.

* vedi anche: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Riassumere un argomento / Risolvere un argomento]]

== Per approfondire ==
* FAQ
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Design FAQ|2=Progetto}}
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Release and features FAQ|2=Versioni e funzionalità}}

[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5fbepcbgxn90a6jdi2cyr7io64hbejx</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402684</id>
      <parentid>5402674</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:03:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10084" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Questa pagina è una guida rapida su Discussioni Strutturate.

Discussioni Strutturate è anche nota come &quot;Flow&quot;.

Qui otterrai le informazioni più importanti su Discussioni Strutturate e su come utilizzarla.
Tutti i termini specifici (nel testo sono in corsivo) sono definiti nel [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|glossario]].

== Perchè Discussioni Strutturate ==
Discussioni Strutturate è una nuova modalità con cui effettuare una discussione.
La struttura delle discussioni è cambiata: una pagina di discussione (una ''Bacheca'') è ora un'aggregazione di ''Argomenti'' in cui ogni argomento è indipendente e può essere visualizzato separatamente.
Discussioni Strutturate permette ad un utente di scegliere quali argomenti osservare; senza necessariamente seguire un'intera pagina.

I nuovi argomenti sono aggiunti in cima alla pagina.
Gli argomenti possono essere elencati per data di creazione o per data di ultima modifica.
Discussioni Strutturate permette alle persone di discutere [[#basics|sia utilizzando un editor visuale che utilizzando l'editor di wikitesto 2017]].

I bottoni delle azioni (rispondi e ringrazia) sono collegati ad ogni risposta, pronti all'uso.
Non è più necessario indentare le tue risposte, archiviare le discussioni o firmarsi.
Le discussioni procedono più velocemente e sono generalmente più accessibili.

== Interfaccia ==

L'interfaccia globale di una bacheca di Discussioni Strutturate. Gli elementi specifici inerenti i messaggi non vengono mostrati (firma, rispondi, collegamenti...).

{| style=&quot;width:70%;font-size:130%; margin:1em auto;&quot; 
| 
&lt;strong style=&quot;font-family:Linux Libertine,Georgia,Times,serif;font-size: 1.5em;line-height: 1.3;margin-bottom: 0.25em;padding: 0;&quot;&gt;
Titolo bacheca
&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Menù fisso &quot;Sfoglia argomenti&quot;
{| 
| style=&quot;border:1px solid #222; width:100%; color:#AAA;padding: {{dir|{{pagelang}}|3px 3px 3px 180px|3px 180px 3px 3px}};&quot; | ''Campo testuale per iniziare un nuovo Argomento''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Titolo Argomento
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Messaggio 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Messaggio 2
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;padding-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 5%; border:none;&quot; |Risposta al messaggio 2 (fatta cliccando su &quot;rispondi&quot;, sotto al 2° messaggio)
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Messaggio 3
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Campo testuale per la risposta)''
|}
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width:100%; border:none;&quot;
! style=&quot;text-align:left; border:none;&quot; |Altro Argomento, altro Titolo
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF; border:none;&quot; |Messaggio 1
|-
| style=&quot;background:#FFF;&quot; |''(Campo testuale per la risposta)''
|}
| style=&quot;background-color:#EEEEEE; width:33%;padding: 1em;vertical-align:top;&quot; |Descrizione Bacheca
|}

== Come fruire di Discussioni Strutturate ==
{{anchor|basics}}

=== Basi per scrivere ===
[[File:Flow toolbar - Apr. 2017.png|thumb|542x542px|La barra degli strumenti di Discussioni Strutturate, con pulsanti per lo stile del testo, i collegamenti, le menzioni e, sulla destra, passare ad un editor differente (wikitesto o visuale).]]

Puoi partecipare alle discussioni fruendo di due sistemi di input: l'editor visuale (predefinito) o l'[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|editor di wikitesto]].
Puoi passare in qualsiasi momento fra modalità di modifica visuale e la modalità di modifica in wikitesto.

Quando pubblichi un messaggio o crei un nuovo argomento, avrai una barra degli strumenti con 4 pulsanti:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* 3 buttons on the left (on a right-to-left keyboard):
** add style
** add link (with suggestions and search)
** mention someone (with suggestions and search)
* one button on the right to switch between editors.
&lt;/div&gt;

Mentre si modifica il testo, le scorciatoie del wikitesto funzionano in modalità visuale. Per saperne di più, visitare [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|scorciatoie di Discussioni Strutturate]].

Durante la tua sessione, il sito ricorderà quale sistema preferisci, a meno che tu non abbia definito un editor preferito nelle preferenze (scheda &quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot;).

Se hai rinunciato all'editor di wikitesto 2017 e/o all'editor visuale, vedrai un semplice insieme di campi in wikitesto per postare o modificare una risposta, senza nessuna barra degli strumenti.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Select &quot;{{int|flow-preference-visualeditor}}&quot; in your preferences (&quot;{{int|prefs-editing}}&quot; tab) to opt-in and have a toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;

Ricorda: non serve più indentare il messaggio o finirlo con una firma!

Tutte queste nozioni basilari si applicano a tutte le discussioni e risposte o quando modifichi un ''Argomento'', una ''Descrizione'' o un ''Riassunto''.

* Vedi anche: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics#Edit|Modificare un argomento, un messaggio]]

{{anchor|post}}
=== Pubblicare una risposta ===

==== All'argomento globale ====
Ogni partecipante può scrivere al di sotto della discussione, in ordine cronologico.
È come una consueta conversazione su un sito wiki ma senza dover indentare, o come rispondere alle e-mail.
Il tuo ''Messaggio'' sarà mostrato al di sotto di tutti i commenti relativi all&lt;nowiki&gt;'&lt;/nowiki&gt;''Argomento''.

Se hai bisogno di dire qualcosa a qualcuno in particolare, puoi menzionarlo o rispondergli (vedi sotto).
In questo caso si utilizza il pulsante &quot;rispondi&quot; per creare una digressione. Questa digressione crea un'[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|indentazione]]. È possibile aggiungere 7 livelli di digressione.

Il tuo ''Messaggio'' sarà mostrato al di sotto del commento a cui hai risposto e, a meno che non sia l'ultimo messaggio della ''Bacheca'', sarà indentato.
Puoi anche soltanto ringraziare qualcuno.

==== Ad una persona specifica in un argomento ====
Se vuoi dire qualcosa a qualcuno in particolare, puoi menzionarlo sulla tua risposta globale, o cliccare sul tasto &quot;''Rispondi''&quot; sotto al suo messaggio.
Cliccare su &quot;''Reply''&quot; aggiungerà un ''Messaggio'', al di sotto del ''Messaggio'' a cui vuoi rispondere direttamente, tranne se quel messaggio è l'ultimo di tutte le discussioni. In quest'ultimo caso, si suppone che la risposta è all'argomento globale ed essa sarà posta direttamente sotto l'ultimo.

Per fornire un contesto migliore all'interno delle tue risposte, puoi anche citare il messaggio di qualcuno copiaincollandone una parte.

Il tuo ''Messaggio'' dipende dal ''Messaggio'' a cui hai risposto.
Questo ''Messaggio'' è concepito come una risposta specifica. Sarà separata dalla discussione principale da una linea grigia. 
In ogni caso, ogni persona che osserva questo ''Argomento'' otterrà una notifica alla tua risposta, come ad ogni risposta.

{{anchor|create}}
=== Creare una discussione ===
[[File:New discussion in Flow - Sept. 2015.png|thumb|534x534px|Come creare una discussione: cliccare sulla barra &quot;Inizia un nuovo argomento&quot;.]]
Creare una nuova discussione in una pagina che utilizza Discussioni Strutturate è semplice: hai solo bisogno di cliccare sul campo &quot;Inizia un nuovo argomento&quot;. Discussioni Strutturate preparerà due campi.

Il primo campo è &quot;inizia un nuovo argomento&quot;, scegli un titolo adeguato. Il secondo campo è &quot;Scrivi un nuovo messaggio su...&quot;, aggiungi il tuo testo. Scegli accuratamente il tuo titolo per attrarre lettori: le persone lo vedranno nelle loro Notifiche senza ulteriori dettagli.

Quando sei pronto, clicca sul tasto &quot;Aggiungi argomento&quot;. Il tuo ''Messaggio'' è online, ogni persona che osserva la pagina sarà notificata sulla creazione di questo argomento.

Sarai auto-iscritto quando crei un argomento: otterrai una notifica quando qualcuno risponde.

* vedi anche: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Riassumere un argomento / Risolvere un argomento]]

{{anchor|watch}}
=== Osservare ===

==== Un argomento ====

Per osservare uno specifico argomento, clicca sulla stella in alto all&lt;nowiki&gt;'&lt;/nowiki&gt;''Argomento'', vicino al titolo. Diventerà blu. Se è già blu, significa che stai già osservando quell'argomento.

Otterrai una notifica per ogni modifica a questo ''Argomento''. Esso verrà anche aggiunto alla lista dei tuoi osservati speciali.

Quando crei un ''Argomento'' sei automaticamente iscritto a tale ''Argomento''.

==== Una pagina di discussione ====

Per osservare un'intera pagina, clicca sulla stella in cima alla pagina, vicino al campo di ricerca. Diventerà blu. Se è già blu, significa che stai già osservando tale pagina.

Durante l'osservazione, si riceve una notifica per le modifiche alla descrizione del forum e per ogni nuovo argomento pubblicato su questa pagina di discussione. Riceverai anche una voce negli osservati speciali.

{{anchor|notifications}}
==== Notifiche ====

Puoi disattivare le notifiche di Discussioni Strutturate dalle tue preferenze di notifica. La tua pagina degli osservati speciali verrà comunque aggiornata con una nuova riga per ogni argomento aggiunto in una delle pagine di discussione che stai osservando, o per ogni nuova risposta ad un ''Argomento'' che stai seguendo.

{{anchor|browse}}
== Sfogliare e archiviare ==

Tutti gli Argomenti mostrati sulla bacheca sono elencati nell'indice dei contenuti. Puoi sfogliare tutti questi Argomenti da questa tabella.

L'archiviazione è automatica: tutte le discussioni spariscono quando non sono più attive. Puoi anche rivedere i vecchi Argomenti scendendo in basso nella pagina, o cercando nell'indice dei contenuti.

* vedi anche: [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|Riassumere un argomento / Risolvere un argomento]]

== Per approfondire ==
* FAQ
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Design FAQ|2=Progetto}}
** {{ll|Structured Discussions/FAQ#Release and features FAQ|2=Versioni e funzionalità}}

[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>8jimng0ps5t4toofzvictp0isb4435v</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/12/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>732861</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402673</id>
      <parentid>2753007</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:01:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="104" xml:space="preserve">Quando pubblichi un messaggio o crei un nuovo argomento, avrai una barra degli strumenti con 4 pulsanti:</text>
      <sha1>k7almuscbub8ob31s71pxgkg8slvryt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour/39/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>732930</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402683</id>
      <parentid>2753059</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:03:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="212" xml:space="preserve">Durante l'osservazione, si riceve una notifica per le modifiche alla descrizione del forum e per ogni nuovo argomento pubblicato su questa pagina di discussione. Riceverai anche una voce negli osservati speciali.</text>
      <sha1>qti0wmytbvl2rjjs4dq0qot4w5v3aee</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/it</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>732942</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402615</id>
      <parentid>4875303</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4501" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Le Discussioni Strutturate sono [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|un progetto]] del ''Collaboration team'' della Wikimedia Foundation atto a costruire un moderno e collaborativo sistema di discussione per i progetti Wikimedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Introduzione rapida ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Quale aspetto hanno le Discussioni Strutturate - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Provale!]]&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There is some specific terms concerning Structured Discussions. They have been defined in '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|the Glossary]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Advanced tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some advanced tools are available, for specific purposes. They have been regrouped on these subjects:
&lt;/div&gt;

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Activation&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What happens when Structured Discussions are enabled on a page?&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Topics&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filter topics, Edit a topic/message, Summarize a topic, Resolve a topic&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Permalinks&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to create links to subjects&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notifications and watchlist&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How the history system works&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide, Delete, Suppress topics&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading contents on a new Structured Discussions conversation&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shortcuts&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Keyboard shortcuts to use on visual editing mode.&lt;/span&gt;

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All documentation on one page.&lt;/span&gt;}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>5dcik30o2hwllpxkoanprea6tk3y99l</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/da</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>736937</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402921</id>
      <parentid>5355645</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="51164" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Basic overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;

== Filoverførsel ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Choose a method for transferring files:
&lt;/div&gt;

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Secure copy with [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] or [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Using a [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] client.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.
&lt;/div&gt;
* En anden metode. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Preliminary===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

# Tjek kravene
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# Læs udgivelses dokumentationen
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Back up existing files and the database
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new files
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Upgrade extensions
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the update script to check the database
&lt;/div&gt;
# Test opdateringen
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations
&lt;/div&gt;

== Tjek kravene == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} kræver:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* En af følgende:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are using PostgreSQL, please also read {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more information, please read the {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} and {{ll|Compatibility}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Læs udgivelses noter ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Clear pending jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Back up existing files and the database ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:''Full instructions: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Unpack the new files ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using a tarball package ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Command line ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===Andre filer===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Benyttelse af Git ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Opgrader udvidelser ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Dette kan omdannes til:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Andre variabler ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
At have dem i &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; vil normalt ikks have nogen betydning.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Run the update script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

Forneden er et eksempel:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
# Tilføj en linje som følger:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Se også {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
# Vælg dit sprog og tryk fortsæt.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Afprøv opdateringen ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

== Ofte stillede spørgsmål ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===Hvor svært er det at opgradere?===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Burde jeg lave backup først?===

Korte svar er: Ja.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Hvorfor opgradere?===
:''Abonner til [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] for at blive informeret om når nye udgivelser ankommer.''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Siden 1.9 er en [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|fortryd knap]] nu tilgængelig.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Siden 1.13 er det nu muligt at [[$moving|omdøbe]] (flytte) filer.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* Siden 1.16, er $commons nu tilgængelig.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Se også ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>681gkg7ds9hq9iizifg1jhrjrpclofc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Interface/Sidebar/es</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>738005</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402339</id>
      <parentid>5370735</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:30:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29635" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|Ejemplo de barra lateral]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define la barra de navegación, la cual provee enlaces a la mayoría de los lugares en la wiki y suministra a los administradores del sitio un lugar para adicionar una colección constante de enlaces. Por ejemplo, la mayoría de las wikis enlazarán a la página de discusión de su comunidad y a algunas herramientas útiles.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Las [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook y Vector colocan la barra de navegación arriba a la izquierda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto a la barra de búsqueda y a la caja de herramientas, pero la ubicación puede ser diferente en otras skins.&lt;/span&gt;
Esta barra lateral '''no se muestra a usuarios de [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|móvil]]''' (p. ej. la versión del sitio producida por {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}). Usa el gancho {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} para eso.

==Personalizar la barra lateral==
Para personalizar la [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] en un wiki, primero necesita estar registrado con un usuario que tenga el permiso ''editinterface'' - Esto está habilitado por defecto para los administradores.&lt;ref&gt;
(Para información sobre asignar un permiso a grupos o usuarios, ver [[Manual:User rights|Manual:User rights]].)

Luego, use un enlace a una página en su wiki, pero reemplace el título de su página wiki (e.g. &lt;code&gt;Main_Page&lt;/code&gt;) en la URL/barra de direcciones con &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Sidebar&lt;/code&gt; y cargue esa página - Usted debería ver ahora el contenido de la barra lateral. (Usted puede usar la sintaxis ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit'' si usted utiliza URLs largas.)

Si el contenido de la barra lateral ya ha sido modificado, usted simplemente puede dar clic sobre el enlace ''Editar'' o ''Editar código'', de otra forma usted podría necesitar crear primero la página dando clic en ''Crear'' o ''Crear código''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

A continuación se muestra un código de ejemplo para una barra lateral en [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]:

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
Este ejemplo mostrará la siguiente barra lateral:
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|Ejemplo de barra lateral]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Si usted tiene que crear una nueva página, se le presentará el contenido por defecto de la barra lateral en el editor. Para crear exitosamente una página MediaWiki:Sidebar, necesita cambiar el contenido antes de salvar.}} 

=== Dividiendo la barra de navegación en nuevas secciones ===
La barra de navegación puede estar dividida en secciones, cada una con su propio encabezado.
Esto se hace agregando un asterisco.

El encabezado para cada sección es tomado desde la lista de elementos del primer nivel (&quot;navigation&quot; y &quot;new heading&quot; en el ejemplo de arriba).
Si este texto corresponde al nombre de un mensaje de la interfaz (una página existente en ese título en la MediaWiki namespace), entonces el texto de esa página es usado como una etiqueta; de lo contrario, el título del encabezado se utiliza tal cual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Añadiendo enlaces a la barra lateral ===
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objetivo
: El objetivo del enlace puede ser el nombre de un mensaje de interfaz (una página en el MediaWiki namespace) o una página wiki, o un enlace externo. En cualquier caso, el [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|enlace]] puede ser interno, interwiki o externo.&lt;ref&gt;
En algunos casos (tales como enlaces con el carácter &quot;&amp;&quot;), un mensaje de interfaz es necesario. El enlace objetivo no puede ser dependiente del lenguaje de la interfaz configurada en las preferencias.
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Llamar el texto objetivo.
:#  Si hay uno existente o un mensaje de interfaz por defecto con ese nombre, use el contenido de ese mensaje en vez del texto objetivo.
:# Si la salida del paso anterior es una URL valida (comenzando con http:// u otro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), el enlace apuntará a esa URL.
:# si no, se tratará como el enlace objetivo de un wikilink (enlazando a ese nombre de página o interwiki). 
:# En caso de que termine enlazando a '-', toda la entrada es removida de la barra lateral (eso es útil para remover una entrada en todos los lenguajes al cambiar el mensaje que tiene el enlace).
: Ejemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
usa el texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url|MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (el cual contiene &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&lt;/span&gt; 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;enlace a [[Special:RecentChanges|Special:RecentChanges]], ya que no hay un mensaje de interfaz con ese nombre.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; enlaza a [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] por la misma razón.

; enlace de texto
: El enlace de texto puede ser el mismo de un mensaje de interfaz (página en el the MediaWiki namespace) o texto plano. 
:* Si el enlace de texto es el nombre de un mensaje de interfaz existente o por defecto, el contenido de ese mensaje será usado. Mediawiki verificará las versiones localizadas; por ejemplo, si el lenguaje actual es fr (Frances) y el enlace de texto es el mensaje de interfaz &quot;forum&quot;, este verificará &quot;forum/fr&quot; antes de usar &quot;forum&quot;.
:* En cualquier caso, el enlace de texto es usado como destino. 
:* Note que el enlace de texto '''no''' es opcional como los enlaces en una wiki normal. Si falta el enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;el elemento se omite&lt;/u&gt;.
: El texto del link puede ser el nombre de un mensaje de la interfaz (una página en el espacio de nombres MediaWiki) o texto plano.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

: Ejemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Orden de los elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traducciones ==

Usted puede traducir las cadenas, la cual usted usa, editando las páginas de acuerdo al namespace en la MediaWiki .

'''Ejemplo:''' La cadena, la cual reemplazará el elemento llamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, es tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/cambiar este texto para los usuarios, quienes despliegan su wiki en Alemán, puede colocar el texto de acuerdo a la página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

De esa manera usted puede fácilmente traducir esos textos a través de la interfaz de la MediaWiki.

'''Por favor tenga en cuenta''' que la MediaWiki usará por defecto el contenido de la página en la barra lateral ''ese'' idioma, el cual corresponde al idioma por defecto de su wiki. Así, si su wiki e.g. utiliza el Francés como idioma por defecto, edite  [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] para mostrar una barra lateral modificada a todos los usuarios, quienes no han cambiado su configuración de idioma y para todos los usuarios anónimos.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para traducciones más avanzadas, ver [[Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

==Personalización avanzada==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>tqye2jdnhvfudy34dsbk7yko524lwvp</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402359</id>
      <parentid>5402339</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:38:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29595" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|Ejemplo de barra lateral]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define la barra de navegación, la cual provee enlaces a la mayoría de los lugares en la wiki y suministra a los administradores del sitio un lugar para adicionar una colección constante de enlaces. Por ejemplo, la mayoría de las wikis enlazarán a la página de discusión de su comunidad y a algunas herramientas útiles.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

Las [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook y Vector colocan la barra de navegación arriba a la izquierda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto a la barra de búsqueda y a la caja de herramientas, pero la ubicación puede ser diferente en otras skins.
Esta barra lateral '''no se muestra a usuarios de [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|móvil]]''' (p. ej. la versión del sitio producida por {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}). Usa el gancho {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} para eso.

==Personalizar la barra lateral==
Para personalizar la [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] en un wiki, primero necesita estar registrado con un usuario que tenga el permiso ''editinterface'' - Esto está habilitado por defecto para los administradores.&lt;ref&gt;
(Para información sobre asignar un permiso a grupos o usuarios, ver [[Manual:User rights|Manual:User rights]].)

Luego, use un enlace a una página en su wiki, pero reemplace el título de su página wiki (e.g. &lt;code&gt;Main_Page&lt;/code&gt;) en la URL/barra de direcciones con &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Sidebar&lt;/code&gt; y cargue esa página - Usted debería ver ahora el contenido de la barra lateral. (Usted puede usar la sintaxis ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit'' si usted utiliza URLs largas.)

Si el contenido de la barra lateral ya ha sido modificado, usted simplemente puede dar clic sobre el enlace ''Editar'' o ''Editar código'', de otra forma usted podría necesitar crear primero la página dando clic en ''Crear'' o ''Crear código''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

A continuación se muestra un código de ejemplo para una barra lateral en [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]:

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
Este ejemplo mostrará la siguiente barra lateral:
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|Ejemplo de barra lateral]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Si usted tiene que crear una nueva página, se le presentará el contenido por defecto de la barra lateral en el editor. Para crear exitosamente una página MediaWiki:Sidebar, necesita cambiar el contenido antes de salvar.}} 

=== Dividiendo la barra de navegación en nuevas secciones ===
La barra de navegación puede estar dividida en secciones, cada una con su propio encabezado.
Esto se hace agregando un asterisco.

El encabezado para cada sección es tomado desde la lista de elementos del primer nivel (&quot;navigation&quot; y &quot;new heading&quot; en el ejemplo de arriba).
Si este texto corresponde al nombre de un mensaje de la interfaz (una página existente en ese título en la MediaWiki namespace), entonces el texto de esa página es usado como una etiqueta; de lo contrario, el título del encabezado se utiliza tal cual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Añadiendo enlaces a la barra lateral ===
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objetivo
: El objetivo del enlace puede ser el nombre de un mensaje de interfaz (una página en el MediaWiki namespace) o una página wiki, o un enlace externo. En cualquier caso, el [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|enlace]] puede ser interno, interwiki o externo.&lt;ref&gt;
En algunos casos (tales como enlaces con el carácter &quot;&amp;&quot;), un mensaje de interfaz es necesario. El enlace objetivo no puede ser dependiente del lenguaje de la interfaz configurada en las preferencias.
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Llamar el texto objetivo.
:#  Si hay uno existente o un mensaje de interfaz por defecto con ese nombre, use el contenido de ese mensaje en vez del texto objetivo.
:# Si la salida del paso anterior es una URL valida (comenzando con http:// u otro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), el enlace apuntará a esa URL.
:# si no, se tratará como el enlace objetivo de un wikilink (enlazando a ese nombre de página o interwiki). 
:# En caso de que termine enlazando a '-', toda la entrada es removida de la barra lateral (eso es útil para remover una entrada en todos los lenguajes al cambiar el mensaje que tiene el enlace).
: Ejemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
usa el texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url|MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (el cual contiene &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&lt;/span&gt; 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;enlace a [[Special:RecentChanges|Special:RecentChanges]], ya que no hay un mensaje de interfaz con ese nombre.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; enlaza a [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] por la misma razón.

; enlace de texto
: El enlace de texto puede ser el mismo de un mensaje de interfaz (página en el the MediaWiki namespace) o texto plano. 
:* Si el enlace de texto es el nombre de un mensaje de interfaz existente o por defecto, el contenido de ese mensaje será usado. Mediawiki verificará las versiones localizadas; por ejemplo, si el lenguaje actual es fr (Frances) y el enlace de texto es el mensaje de interfaz &quot;forum&quot;, este verificará &quot;forum/fr&quot; antes de usar &quot;forum&quot;.
:* En cualquier caso, el enlace de texto es usado como destino. 
:* Note que el enlace de texto '''no''' es opcional como los enlaces en una wiki normal. Si falta el enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;el elemento se omite&lt;/u&gt;.
: El texto del link puede ser el nombre de un mensaje de la interfaz (una página en el espacio de nombres MediaWiki) o texto plano.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

: Ejemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Orden de los elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traducciones ==

Usted puede traducir las cadenas, la cual usted usa, editando las páginas de acuerdo al namespace en la MediaWiki .

'''Ejemplo:''' La cadena, la cual reemplazará el elemento llamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, es tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/cambiar este texto para los usuarios, quienes despliegan su wiki en Alemán, puede colocar el texto de acuerdo a la página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

De esa manera usted puede fácilmente traducir esos textos a través de la interfaz de la MediaWiki.

'''Por favor tenga en cuenta''' que la MediaWiki usará por defecto el contenido de la página en la barra lateral ''ese'' idioma, el cual corresponde al idioma por defecto de su wiki. Así, si su wiki e.g. utiliza el Francés como idioma por defecto, edite  [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] para mostrar una barra lateral modificada a todos los usuarios, quienes no han cambiado su configuración de idioma y para todos los usuarios anónimos.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para traducciones más avanzadas, ver [[Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

==Personalización avanzada==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5y7mb5vx8y1heprvuykvvoamc57vfde</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402361</id>
      <parentid>5402359</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:39:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29535" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|Ejemplo de barra lateral]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define la barra de navegación, la cual provee enlaces a la mayoría de los lugares en la wiki y suministra a los administradores del sitio un lugar para adicionar una colección constante de enlaces. Por ejemplo, la mayoría de las wikis enlazarán a la página de discusión de su comunidad y a algunas herramientas útiles.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

Las [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook y Vector colocan la barra de navegación arriba a la izquierda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto a la barra de búsqueda y a la caja de herramientas, pero la ubicación puede ser diferente en otras skins.
Esta barra lateral '''no se muestra a usuarios de [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|móvil]]''' (p. ej. la versión del sitio producida por {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}). Usa el gancho {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} para eso.

==Personalizar la barra lateral==
Para personalizar la [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] en un wiki, primero necesita estar registrado con un usuario que tenga el permiso ''editinterface'' - Esto está habilitado por defecto para los administradores.&lt;ref&gt;
(Para información sobre asignar un permiso a grupos o usuarios, ver [[Manual:User rights|Manual:User rights]].)

Luego, use un enlace a una página en su wiki, pero reemplace el título de su página wiki (e.g. &lt;code&gt;Main_Page&lt;/code&gt;) en la URL/barra de direcciones con &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Sidebar&lt;/code&gt; y cargue esa página - Usted debería ver ahora el contenido de la barra lateral. (Usted puede usar la sintaxis ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit'' si usted utiliza URLs largas.)

Si el contenido de la barra lateral ya ha sido modificado, usted simplemente puede dar clic sobre el enlace ''Editar'' o ''Editar código'', de otra forma usted podría necesitar crear primero la página dando clic en ''Crear'' o ''Crear código''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

A continuación se muestra un código de ejemplo para una barra lateral en [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]:

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
Este ejemplo mostrará la siguiente barra lateral:
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|Ejemplo de barra lateral]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Si usted tiene que crear una nueva página, se le presentará el contenido por defecto de la barra lateral en el editor. Para crear exitosamente una página MediaWiki:Sidebar, necesita cambiar el contenido antes de salvar.}} 

=== Dividiendo la barra de navegación en nuevas secciones ===
La barra de navegación puede estar dividida en secciones, cada una con su propio encabezado.
Esto se hace agregando un asterisco.

El encabezado para cada sección es tomado desde la lista de elementos del primer nivel (&quot;navigation&quot; y &quot;new heading&quot; en el ejemplo de arriba).
Si este texto corresponde al nombre de un mensaje de la interfaz (una página existente en ese título en la MediaWiki namespace), entonces el texto de esa página es usado como una etiqueta; de lo contrario, el título del encabezado se utiliza tal cual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Añadiendo enlaces a la barra lateral ===
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objetivo
: El objetivo del enlace puede ser el nombre de un mensaje de interfaz (una página en el MediaWiki namespace) o una página wiki, o un enlace externo. En cualquier caso, el [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|enlace]] puede ser interno, interwiki o externo.&lt;ref&gt;
En algunos casos (tales como enlaces con el carácter &quot;&amp;&quot;), un mensaje de interfaz es necesario. El enlace objetivo no puede ser dependiente del lenguaje de la interfaz configurada en las preferencias.
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Llamar el texto objetivo.
:#  Si hay uno existente o un mensaje de interfaz por defecto con ese nombre, use el contenido de ese mensaje en vez del texto objetivo.
:# Si la salida del paso anterior es una URL valida (comenzando con http:// u otro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), el enlace apuntará a esa URL.
:# si no, se tratará como el enlace objetivo de un wikilink (enlazando a ese nombre de página o interwiki). 
:# En caso de que termine enlazando a '-', toda la entrada es removida de la barra lateral (eso es útil para remover una entrada en todos los lenguajes al cambiar el mensaje que tiene el enlace).
: Ejemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; usa el texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (el cual contiene &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&quot;) 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;enlace a [[Special:RecentChanges|Special:RecentChanges]], ya que no hay un mensaje de interfaz con ese nombre.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; enlaza a [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] por la misma razón.

; enlace de texto
: El enlace de texto puede ser el mismo de un mensaje de interfaz (página en el the MediaWiki namespace) o texto plano. 
:* Si el enlace de texto es el nombre de un mensaje de interfaz existente o por defecto, el contenido de ese mensaje será usado. Mediawiki verificará las versiones localizadas; por ejemplo, si el lenguaje actual es fr (Frances) y el enlace de texto es el mensaje de interfaz &quot;forum&quot;, este verificará &quot;forum/fr&quot; antes de usar &quot;forum&quot;.
:* En cualquier caso, el enlace de texto es usado como destino. 
:* Note que el enlace de texto '''no''' es opcional como los enlaces en una wiki normal. Si falta el enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;el elemento se omite&lt;/u&gt;.
: El texto del link puede ser el nombre de un mensaje de la interfaz (una página en el espacio de nombres MediaWiki) o texto plano.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

: Ejemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Orden de los elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traducciones ==

Usted puede traducir las cadenas, la cual usted usa, editando las páginas de acuerdo al namespace en la MediaWiki .

'''Ejemplo:''' La cadena, la cual reemplazará el elemento llamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, es tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/cambiar este texto para los usuarios, quienes despliegan su wiki en Alemán, puede colocar el texto de acuerdo a la página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

De esa manera usted puede fácilmente traducir esos textos a través de la interfaz de la MediaWiki.

'''Por favor tenga en cuenta''' que la MediaWiki usará por defecto el contenido de la página en la barra lateral ''ese'' idioma, el cual corresponde al idioma por defecto de su wiki. Así, si su wiki e.g. utiliza el Francés como idioma por defecto, edite  [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] para mostrar una barra lateral modificada a todos los usuarios, quienes no han cambiado su configuración de idioma y para todos los usuarios anónimos.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para traducciones más avanzadas, ver [[Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation]].
&lt;/div&gt;

==Personalización avanzada==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2l2kulduqp1ta34n6ffn0r8f0jt4v78</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402363</id>
      <parentid>5402361</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:39:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29440" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{interface message}}

[[File:Example_sidebar.png|thumb|Ejemplo de barra lateral]]
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]]''' define la barra de navegación, la cual provee enlaces a la mayoría de los lugares en la wiki y suministra a los administradores del sitio un lugar para adicionar una colección constante de enlaces. Por ejemplo, la mayoría de las wikis enlazarán a la página de discusión de su comunidad y a algunas herramientas útiles.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The navigation bar which provides links to the most important locations in the wiki and supplies site administrators with a place to add an important collection of links.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For instance, most wikis will link to their community discussion page and some useful tool pages.&lt;/span&gt;

Las [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]] Monobook y Vector colocan la barra de navegación arriba a la izquierda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto a la barra de búsqueda y a la caja de herramientas, pero la ubicación puede ser diferente en otras skins.
Esta barra lateral '''no se muestra a usuarios de [[Special:MyLanguage/Mobile|móvil]]''' (p. ej. la versión del sitio producida por {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend}} / {{ll|Skin:MinervaNeue}}). Usa el gancho {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend/MobileMenu|MobileMenu}} para eso.

==Personalizar la barra lateral==
Para personalizar la [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] en un wiki, primero necesita estar registrado con un usuario que tenga el permiso ''editinterface'' - Esto está habilitado por defecto para los administradores.&lt;ref&gt;
(Para información sobre asignar un permiso a grupos o usuarios, ver [[Manual:User rights|Manual:User rights]].)

Luego, use un enlace a una página en su wiki, pero reemplace el título de su página wiki (e.g. &lt;code&gt;Main_Page&lt;/code&gt;) en la URL/barra de direcciones con &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Sidebar&lt;/code&gt; y cargue esa página - Usted debería ver ahora el contenido de la barra lateral. (Usted puede usar la sintaxis ''//yourdomain/yourwiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit'' si usted utiliza URLs largas.)

Si el contenido de la barra lateral ya ha sido modificado, usted simplemente puede dar clic sobre el enlace ''Editar'' o ''Editar código'', de otra forma usted podría necesitar crear primero la página dando clic en ''Crear'' o ''Crear código''.
&lt;/ref&gt;

You can access to MediaWiki:Sidebar by either:

* Going to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://yourdomain/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Sidebar&amp;action=edit&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your browser.
* Typing MediaWiki:Sidebar in search bar, and validating with Enter.
* From Special:AllMessages, searching for &quot;side&quot;.

A continuación se muestra un código de ejemplo para una barra lateral en [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]:

&lt;pre&gt;
* navigation
** mainpage|Accueil
** Special:RecentChanges|Recent changes
* new heading
** portal-url|Forums
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;
{{-}}
Este ejemplo mostrará la siguiente barra lateral:
[[File:Example_sidebar.png|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|thumb|Ejemplo de barra lateral]]

{{-}}

{{note|1=Si usted tiene que crear una nueva página, se le presentará el contenido por defecto de la barra lateral en el editor. Para crear exitosamente una página MediaWiki:Sidebar, necesita cambiar el contenido antes de salvar.}} 

=== Dividiendo la barra de navegación en nuevas secciones ===
La barra de navegación puede estar dividida en secciones, cada una con su propio encabezado.
Esto se hace agregando un asterisco.

El encabezado para cada sección es tomado desde la lista de elementos del primer nivel (&quot;navigation&quot; y &quot;new heading&quot; en el ejemplo de arriba).
Si este texto corresponde al nombre de un mensaje de la interfaz (una página existente en ese título en la MediaWiki namespace), entonces el texto de esa página es usado como una etiqueta; de lo contrario, el título del encabezado se utiliza tal cual.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Please note the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Magic word#Localization|magic word]] does not work since it is useless: MediaWiki automatically looks for a translation to display before to fallback to the default message.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example above, &lt;code&gt;* navigation&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;* new heading&lt;/code&gt; are section headings.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Añadiendo enlaces a la barra lateral ===
Links are created with 2 asterisks (called Second-level list elements).
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;target&lt;/span&gt;|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;link text&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/pre&gt;

; objetivo
: El objetivo del enlace puede ser el nombre de un mensaje de interfaz (una página en el MediaWiki namespace) o una página wiki, o un enlace externo. En cualquier caso, el [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Links|enlace]] puede ser interno, interwiki o externo.&lt;ref&gt;
En algunos casos (tales como enlaces con el carácter &quot;&amp;&quot;), un mensaje de interfaz es necesario. El enlace objetivo no puede ser dependiente del lenguaje de la interfaz configurada en las preferencias.
&lt;/ref&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do the following to determine the target:&lt;/span&gt;
:# Llamar el texto objetivo.
:#  Si hay uno existente o un mensaje de interfaz por defecto con ese nombre, use el contenido de ese mensaje en vez del texto objetivo.
:# Si la salida del paso anterior es una URL valida (comenzando con http:// u otro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgUrlProtocols|URL protocol]]), el enlace apuntará a esa URL.
:# si no, se tratará como el enlace objetivo de un wikilink (enlazando a ese nombre de página o interwiki). 
:# En caso de que termine enlazando a '-', toda la entrada es removida de la barra lateral (eso es útil para remover una entrada en todos los lenguajes al cambiar el mensaje que tiene el enlace).
: Ejemplos:
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''portal-url'''|portal&lt;/code&gt;&quot; usa el texto de [[MediaWiki:Portal-url]] (el cual contiene &quot;{{MediaWiki:Portal-url}}&quot;) 
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''&lt;nowiki&gt;https://www.mediawiki.org&lt;/nowiki&gt;'''|MediaWiki home&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;links to https://www.mediawiki.org since this is a valid URL.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''Special:RecentChanges'''|Recent changes&lt;/code&gt;&quot; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;enlace a [[Special:RecentChanges|Special:RecentChanges]], ya que no hay un mensaje de interfaz con ese nombre.&lt;/span&gt;
:* &quot;&lt;code&gt;** '''w:Foo'''|Some interwiki page&lt;/code&gt;&quot; enlaza a [[w:Foo|w:Foo]] por la misma razón.

; enlace de texto
: El enlace de texto puede ser el mismo de un mensaje de interfaz (página en el the MediaWiki namespace) o texto plano. 
:* Si el enlace de texto es el nombre de un mensaje de interfaz existente o por defecto, el contenido de ese mensaje será usado. Mediawiki verificará las versiones localizadas; por ejemplo, si el lenguaje actual es fr (Frances) y el enlace de texto es el mensaje de interfaz &quot;forum&quot;, este verificará &quot;forum/fr&quot; antes de usar &quot;forum&quot;.
:* En cualquier caso, el enlace de texto es usado como destino. 
:* Note que el enlace de texto '''no''' es opcional como los enlaces en una wiki normal. Si falta el enlace de texto, &lt;u&gt;el elemento se omite&lt;/u&gt;.
: El texto del link puede ser el nombre de un mensaje de la interfaz (una página en el espacio de nombres MediaWiki) o texto plano.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* If the link text is the name of an existing or default interface message, the content of that message will be used. MediaWiki will check for localized versions; for example, if the current language is fr (French) and the link text is the interface message &quot;forum&quot;, it will check for &quot;forum/fr&quot; before using &quot;forum&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Otherwise, the link text is used as the target as-is.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:* Notice that the link text is '''not''' optional as in normal wiki links. If the link text is missing, &lt;u&gt;the item is ignored&lt;/u&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; 

: Ejemplos:
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Homepage|'''mainpage'''&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]] (which contains &quot;{{:MediaWiki:Mainpage}}&quot;).&lt;/span&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;** Special:Recentchanges|'''Recent changes'''&lt;/code&gt; uses &quot;Recent changes&quot;, since there is no interface message of that name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===Orden de los elementos===
&lt;/div&gt;
Some skins allow customizing the order of some special elements, like the search bar, toolbox, and languages. That can be done by adding the special keywords SEARCH, TOOLBOX and LANGUAGES respectively, to [[MediaWiki:Sidebar|MediaWiki:Sidebar]] using the heading syntax.

However, some skins like [[Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook]] no longer support defining the position of the search element, and the search element is placed right after the first section of the sidebar instead.
In that case, to move the search element at the top, the workaround is to define an empty leading section.
For example:

&lt;pre&gt;
* empty section
* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage
** Special:Recentchanges|Recent changed
* new heading
** portal-url|portal
** https://www.mediawiki.org|MediaWiki home
&lt;/pre&gt;

Note that some skins may display the first section differently, or place some element between the first and the second section (if any).

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Tooltips and Accesskey ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A tooltip is a message which appears when a cursor is positioned over an icon, image, hyperlink, or other element in a graphical user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you add an item to the sidebar, it will have no &quot;tooltip&quot;. But you can create a tooltip by doing the following:&lt;ref&gt;http://www.kaarebmikkelsen.dk/?p=174&lt;/ref&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* and put the tooltip in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An access key or accesskey allows a computer user to immediately jump to a specific part of a web page via the keyboard.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Accesskeys can also be created by doing the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* create a wiki page named &quot;MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-&amp;lt;id of the item&gt;&quot;
* and put the accesskey in that page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;* Homepage|mainpage-description&lt;/code&gt; uses [[MediaWiki:Tooltip-n-mainpage-description]] and [[MediaWiki:Accesskey-n-mainpage-description]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Traducciones ==

Usted puede traducir las cadenas, la cual usted usa, editando las páginas de acuerdo al namespace en la MediaWiki .

'''Ejemplo:''' La cadena, la cual reemplazará el elemento llamado &quot;mainpage&quot;, es tomado de [[MediaWiki:Mainpage|MediaWiki:Mainpage]]. Para configurar/cambiar este texto para los usuarios, quienes despliegan su wiki en Alemán, puede colocar el texto de acuerdo a la página [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/de|MediaWiki:Mainpage/de]].

De esa manera usted puede fácilmente traducir esos textos a través de la interfaz de la MediaWiki.

'''Por favor tenga en cuenta''' que la MediaWiki usará por defecto el contenido de la página en la barra lateral ''ese'' idioma, el cual corresponde al idioma por defecto de su wiki. Así, si su wiki e.g. utiliza el Francés como idioma por defecto, edite  [[MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr|MediaWiki:Mainpage/fr]] para mostrar una barra lateral modificada a todos los usuarios, quienes no han cambiado su configuración de idioma y para todos los usuarios anónimos.

Para traducciones más avanzadas, ver {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Unstructured element translation}}.

==Personalización avanzada==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The sidebar can be fully customized by implementing [[w:JavaScript|JavaScript]] or [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|Cascading Style Sheets]], or by editing the [[w:PHP|PHP]] files directly. Before using these methods, note that:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* JavaScript is fragile: it will not work for users with JavaScript disabled, and scripts frequently fail in different browsers or skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Editing the PHP files can easily cause unexpected errors, and your changes will be lost in the next update unless you manually change the new files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Remove the Sidebar and main logo  at MediaWiki:Sidebar  ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To completely remove the sidebar and logo:

Blank the '''MediaWiki:Sidebar''' page and save.

Then add:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
#column-content { margin: 0 0 1em 0; }
#content { margin: 0 0 0 0; }
#p-cactions { left: .1em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This moves the main text of your wiki to the left.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completely remove  the sidebar, tabs and search bar ===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See also: [[Manual:Remove Tabs]]''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the logo, and the entire sidebar:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #p-logo, .generated-sidebar, #p-lang, #p-tb  { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the search bar:
&lt;/div&gt; 

 #p-search { display:none; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the talk tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-talk { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Deletes the Page tab:
&lt;/div&gt;

 #ca-nstab-main { display:none!important; }

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Force UI-messages to follow content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some pages should sometimes follow the content language, especially for multilingual sites. This can be controlled with the setting {{ll|Manual:$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg|$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg}}. Each message overridden in this way must be explicitly given, for example to let the sidebar link to versions given by the content language for the main page and the portal page add the following to
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;
; code
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
$wgForceUIMsgAsContentMsg = [ 'mainpage', 'portal-url' ];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Add or remove toolbox sections (JavaScript)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''toolbox'' appears on the left under [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The toolbox is a dynamic element requiring programmatic methods such as skin extensions, PHP (see &lt;code&gt;skins/MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and creating a new [[Special:MyLanguage/skins|skin]]) or JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The JavaScript solution uses User:{username}/common.js / [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]], available for MediaWiki 1.9+.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Entire MediaWiki website: copy the script below into [[MediaWiki:Common.js|MediaWiki:Common.js]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One specific user: copy the script below into [[Special:MyPage/common.js]] (or the JS page for the user's current [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Skins|skin]], such as [[Special:MyPage/monobook.js]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now simply configure which link should appear in which section. You also can remove some links if you want to.
&lt;/div&gt;

====  code ==== 
&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}: 2em;&quot;&gt;&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
function ModifySidebar( action, section, name, link ) {
	try {
		switch ( section ) {
			case 'languages':
				var target = 'p-lang';
				break;
			case 'toolbox':
				var target = 'p-tb';
				break;
			case 'navigation':
				var target = 'p-navigation';
				break;
			default:
				var target = 'p-' + section;
				break;
		}

		if ( action == 'add' ) {
			var node = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var aNode = document.createElement( 'a' );
			var liNode = document.createElement( 'li' );

			aNode.appendChild( document.createTextNode( name ) );
			aNode.setAttribute( 'href', link );
			liNode.appendChild( aNode );
			liNode.className = 'plainlinks';
			node.appendChild( liNode );
		}

		if ( action == 'remove' ) {
			var list = document.getElementById( target )
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'div' )[0]
							   .getElementsByTagName( 'ul' )[0];

			var listelements = list.getElementsByTagName( 'li' );

			for ( var i = 0; i &lt; listelements.length; i++ ) {
				if (
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].innerHTML == name ||
					listelements[i].getElementsByTagName( 'a' )[0].href == link
				)
				{
					list.removeChild( listelements[i] );
				}
			}
		}


	} catch( e ) {
		// let's just ignore what's happened
		return;
	}
}

function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar() {
	// adds [[Special:CategoryTree|Special:CategoryTree]] to toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'add', 'toolbox', 'CategoryTree', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:CategoryTree' );
	// removes [[Special:Upload|Special:Upload]] from toolbox
	ModifySidebar( 'remove', 'toolbox', 'Upload file', 'https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Upload' );
}

jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usage&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;code&gt;function CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar()&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;has to be customized for adding or removing links in specific sections:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;code&gt;ModifySidebar( &quot;''action''&quot;, &quot;''section''&quot;, &quot;''name''&quot;, &quot;''link''&quot; );&lt;/code&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot; 
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;value&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;action&lt;/code&gt;
| ''add'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to add a link&lt;/span&gt;; ''remove'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to remove a link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;section&lt;/code&gt;
| ''navigation'', ''toolbox'', ''languages'' &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;but also any other existing customized section; the given link will be added to or removed from this section&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the text of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;link&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains the URL of the link&lt;/span&gt;
|}

====  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Restricting modifications to specific usergroups&lt;/span&gt; ==== 

&lt;div style=&quot;margin-{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}:2em;&quot;&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to restrict the modification of the links to a specific user group (e.g. ''bureaucrat''), change:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;to&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'bureaucrat' ) !== -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For restricting the modifications to IPs instead of a specific user group, use
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
if ( mw.config.get( 'wgUserGroups', [] ).indexOf( 'user' ) === -1 ) {
	jQuery( CustomizeModificationsOfSidebar );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Add or remove toolbox sections (PHP) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can add in your file LocalSettings.php the hook described [[Special:MyLanguage/User:Seb35/modifyToolbox|on this page]]. With this, you can modify via [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] the links in the toolbox panel (remove some links, change their name) and add custom links (e.g. add the &quot;Recent changes&quot; link there instead of the navigation panel.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Make expanding/collapsing sidebar for all users (Monobook skin only) ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the Monobook skin and don't want to miss the expandable menu bar from e.g. Vector skin, paste the following code into [[MediaWiki:Monobook.js|MediaWiki:Monobook.js]] of your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// Code snippet to make your sidebar items expandable. 
// Use this code ONLY for the Monobook skin. 
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////

$( document ).ready( function() {
	// Set the default expanded items by their headline
	var defaultExpandItems = ['Navigation', 'Orga'];
	// Set the basic-name for the cookies, which save the current state of expanding
	var expandCookieName = 'disdance_project_wiki_nav_expanded_';

var maxHeights = [];
	var expandeds = [];
	var labels = [];
	initNav();
});

function initNav() {
	$( '#p-logo' ).css({'position': 'relative', 'display': 'block'});
	$( '.generated-sidebar h5,#p-tb h5 ').each( function( i ) {
		var id = $( this ).parent().attr( 'id' );
		maxHeights[id] = $( this ).next( 'div' ).height();
		var str = $( this ).html();
		labels[id] = str;

if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'false' ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( $.cookie( expandCookieName + id ) == 'true' ) {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		} else if ( defaultExpandItems.indexOf( str ) == -1 ) {
			expandeds[id] = false;
			minimize( $( this ) );
		} else {
			expandeds[id] = true;
			maximize( $( this ) );
		}
		$( this ).css({'cursor': 'pointer'});
		$( this ).click( toggleNav );
	} );
}

function minimize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'false', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ►';
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': '0px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function maximize( target ) {
	var id = $( target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	// You can change the expires parameter to save the cookie longer/shorter than 7 days like in this code
	$.cookie( expandCookieName + id, 'true', { expires: 7} );
	var str = labels[id] + '  ▼';
	var newHeight = maxHeights[id];
	$( target ).next( 'div' ).animate({'height': newHeight + 'px'});
	$( target ).html( str );
}

function toggleNav( e ) {
	var id = $(e.target ).parent().attr( 'id' );
	expandeds[id] = !expandeds[id];
	if( expandeds[id] == true ) {
		maximize( e.target );
	} else {
		minimize( e.target );
	}
}

///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sidebar width in Monobook skin (CSS)===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change the width of your sidebar by adding the following CSS rules to your [[MediaWiki:Monobook.css|MediaWiki:Monobook.css]]&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;!-- This intentionally says Monobook.css not Common.css --&gt;;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;note that this is an '''article''', &lt;u&gt;not&lt;/u&gt; a file. This changes the width to 15em, the actions position and portlet width should be an em or so less, so I've set them to 14em in this example.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* increase sidebar width */
#column-content { margin-left: -15em; }
#column-content #content { margin-left: 15em; }
#p-logo a, #p-logo a:hover { width: 15em; }
#p-cactions { left: 14.5em; }
.portlet { width: 14em; }
#column-content { margin-left: -14em; }
#content.mw-body { margin-left: 14em; }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Change sidebar content when logged in (PHP)===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Install and configure the {{ll|Extension:DynamicSidebar|DynamicSidebar}} extension.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Parser functions in sidebar===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Although it is not exactly recommended, the sidebar does support parser functions (such as {{ll|Extension:ParserFunctions|ParserFunctions}}), provided the &lt;code&gt;**&lt;/code&gt; is outside the parser function, and the parser function does not span multiple lines. For example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|User|Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-user-page}}
**{{#ifeq:{{NAMESPACE}}|Talk|Another-Page-to-link-to{{!}}text-to-show-on-talk-page}}
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;works. However the following would '''not''' work since the parser function spans multiple lines:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;pre&gt;
*Heading
{{#ifeq:1|1|
**foo{{!}}
bar
|
**baz{{!}}fred
}}&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Troubleshooting==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changes not showing up===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki aggressively caches content if possible, which often causes the navigation bar to persist after changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|Purging the cache]] of affected pages should correct the situation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To perform a mass-purge of all caches at once, [http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/man.cgi?query=touch touch] the &lt;code&gt;'''LocalSettings.php'''&lt;/code&gt; file or [https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/truncate-table.html truncate] the &lt;code&gt;'''objectcache'''&lt;/code&gt; table in your database (you may have to do both).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to have {{ll|Manual:$wgUseDatabaseMessages|$wgUseDatabaseMessages}} set to &lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your links don't have a &lt;code&gt;|&lt;/code&gt; in them, they will not show up because of this line of code in Skin.php:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;code&gt;if ( strpos( $line, '|' ) !== false ) {&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are a user or average wiki admin, you will not be able to do the advanced stuff above to get changes to show up. If purging does not work either, you can sometimes still see CSS changes right away in preview (especially when changing your personal CSS). For example; changing the sidebar width, padding, or margins. Changes can take awhile to show up after saving though. If nothing shows up after awhile you may need to contact the overall wiki, or wiki farm, sysop.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Lowercase link labels===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your links are not being capitalized as intended, try adding spaces around the bar character; for example:
&lt;pre&gt;** http://www.example.com/download.php?file=44555 | Download&lt;/pre&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Sections disappear or show unexpected content===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If a section does not display or displays unexpected content, check that the header text isn't the name of an interface message by searching [[Special:AllMessages|Special:AllMessages]]. If it is, use a different header text, or create a new interface message and use it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, if you want to use &quot;Sidebar&quot; as header text, create the interface message &quot;MediaWiki:Sidebar-header&quot; containing only &quot;Sidebar&quot;. Then, use &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;* sidebar-header&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as header.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sections are not displayed if there are no links of the form {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;** $1 {{!}} $2&lt;/code&gt;|target|link text}} (e.g. when the target was forgotten).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Broken links after updating [[Special:Version|Special:Version]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will happen e.g., each time there are newer translations for your site language's sidebar items.
One could add new redirect pages each time, but a better solution would be to use one's own sidebar item names instead of trying to keep track of the current MediaWiki translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==See also==
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{ll|Sidebar}}
* {{ll|Extension:SideBarMenu}}
* {{ll|Quickbar}}
* {{ll|Manual:Interface/Sidebar/Hacks}} - Unsupported PHP modifying hacks that used to be on this page
* {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableSidebarCache}}
* {{ll|Category:Menu extensions}}
* {{ll|Manual:Remove Tabs}} - remove Mediawiki tabs

==References==
&lt;references/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>b62zqzxlc6o7jjwpc31l8061i1z9ur4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/2/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>738009</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402358</id>
      <parentid>4943196</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:38:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="242" xml:space="preserve">Las [[$1|skins]] Monobook y Vector colocan la barra de navegación arriba a la izquierda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto a la barra de búsqueda y a la caja de herramientas, pero la ubicación puede ser diferente en otras skins.</text>
      <sha1>7a20945g30zcujdza4bewgmr7q8snc9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Coding conventions/Java/zh</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>738352</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401654</id>
      <parentid>5317404</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T14:39:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8567" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Development guideline}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page describes the '''coding conventions''' used within files of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Code|MediaWiki codebase]] written in '''Java'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding conventions#All languages|general conventions]] that apply to all program languages, including Java.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Build ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Maven is used as a build tool.&lt;/span&gt;
All projects should inherit from the [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-parent-pom/|discovery-parent-pom]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It configures a number of static analysis tools and linters that will help in keeping projects coherent.&lt;/span&gt;
Code conventions are embodied in the  [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-maven-tool-configs/+/refs/heads/master/src/main/resources/org/wikimedia/discovery/build/tools/checkstyle/checkstyle.xml|checkstyle configuration]] used by that pom.xml and will not be repeated here.
The [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-parent-pom/+/refs/heads/master/README.md|README]] file in that project describes how to use this parent pom.

Java projects hosted on Gerrit should be built by Jenkins by using the [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/integration/config/+/refs/heads/master/jjb/job-templates.yaml#87|-maven-java8-docker template]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Other templates are available to publish documentation and to manage the release process.&lt;/span&gt;

Java projects should be analyzed by [https://sonarcloud.io/organizations/wmftest SonarCloud].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Java version ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of our projects are at the moment targeting Java 8.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We are in the process of transitioning to Java 11.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Libraries ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A number of libraries are commonly used throughout our various Java projects.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using the same libraries for similar use cases can help coherence across projects.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That being said, use the list below as suggestions, not as a hard rule.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Production Code ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Guava ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Guava is used on a number of projects.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that in some cases, we have dependencies that themselves rely on outdated Guava versions, which prevents us from using the latest version.The features of Guava that we use the most are:&lt;/span&gt;

* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/PreconditionsExplained Preconditions]
* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/ImmutableCollectionsExplained Immutable Collections]
* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/CachesExplained Caches]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Lombok ====
&lt;/div&gt;
While [https://projectlombok.org/features/all Lombok] is not strictly a library, it provides very useful syntactic sugar to Java.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Lombok is an annotation processor executed at compile time, Lombok has no runtime dependencies and is thus not creating compatibility issues.&lt;/span&gt;

Lombok can be further configured by adding a &lt;code&gt;lombok.config&lt;/code&gt; file at the package level, which might be particularly useful to make it play nice with Jackson.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An example of such configuration:&lt;/span&gt;

 lombok.equalsAndHashCode.callSuper = call
 # disable SpotBugs, it does not like generated code by lombok
 lombok.extern.findbugs.addSuppressFBWarnings = true
 lombok.addLombokGeneratedAnnotation = true
 # useful for jackson that will be able to use the all args constructor when deserializing
 lombok.anyConstructor.addConstructorProperties = true

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A few particularly useful features:
&lt;/div&gt;

* [https://projectlombok.org/features/Data @Data]: makes it easy to generate DTO / DO, taking care of all this getters / setters and having a proper, valid &lt;code&gt;equals()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;hashCode()&lt;/code&gt;.
* [https://projectlombok.org/features/SneakyThrows @SneakyThrows]: a better way of dealing with checked exceptions than wrapping them in an unchecked exception.

Depending on your IDE, you might need to install a lombok plugin. See [https://www.projectlombok.org/setup/overview documentation for your specific IDE].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== JSR 305 ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;JSR 305 provides annotations to better document expected behaviour and help detect bugs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those annotations are only compile time dependencies and not required at runtime, they don't generate dependency issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In particular:
&lt;/div&gt;

* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/Nonnull.html @Nonnull] / [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/Nullable.html @Nullable]: specifies that a method parameter or return value should be non-null or nullable.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/ParametersAreNonnullByDefault.html @ParametersAreNonnullByDefault]: all parameters on this class / package / method are expected to be non null unless otherwise specified.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/Immutable.html @Immutable]: this class is immutable.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/ThreadSafe.html @ThreadSafe] / [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/NotThreadSafe.html @NotThreadSafe]: this class is or is not thread safe.

==== JSON / XML ====

[https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson Jackson] is used for most JSON and XML parsing / serialization, with the use of [https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson-annotations annotations].

==== HTTP client ====

[https://hc.apache.org/ Apache HttpComponents] is used as an HTTP client.

As much as possible a single instance of &lt;code&gt;HttpClient&lt;/code&gt; should be shared within an application.
A custom User Agent string should be configured.

=== Testing ===

==== Unit Testing Framework ====

We mostly use [https://junit.org/ JUnit] as a testing framework.
Some projects are using [https://junit.org/junit4/ JUnit 4], while others are using JUnit 5.
Some projects have dependencies on component specific testing libraries that don't support [https://junit.org/junit5/ JUnit 5] yet.
For projects that don't have this limitation, JUnit 5 should be preferred.

==== Mocking ====

[https://site.mockito.org/ Mockito] is used as a mocking framework where needed.

==== HTTP Mocking ====

[https://wiremock.org/docs/ WireMock] is used as an HTTP mock server, which allows testing code that relies on HTTP interactions.
Note that WireMock makes it easy to also test various faults (delays, timeout, etc...).

==== Assertions ====

[https://assertj.github.io/doc/ AssertJ] is our main assertion framework.
In almost all cases AssertJ should be preferred over plain &lt;code&gt;assert&lt;/code&gt;, JUnit assertions or Hamcrest.

== Various conventions ==

=== Unit vs Integration Tests ===

We follow the usual naming conventions to identify [https://maven.apache.org/surefire/maven-surefire-plugin/examples/inclusion-exclusion.html unit tests] vs [https://maven.apache.org/surefire/maven-failsafe-plugin/examples/inclusion-exclusion.html integration tests].

=== Managing &lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt; and defensive programming ===

As much as possible, &lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt; values should be avoided.
[[:en:Null_object_pattern|Null Objects]] should be preferred.
Parameters should be expected to be non null and not explicitly checked, unless they come from an untrusted caller.
Parameters should be marked with &lt;code&gt;@Nonnull&lt;/code&gt; / &lt;code&gt;@Nullable&lt;/code&gt; to allow static analysis tools to validate nullity.

{{Conventions navigation}}</text>
      <sha1>r8tbcg11qik5ixyf0eukgbotc57ldg0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/16/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>738375</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402338</id>
      <parentid>4943236</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:30:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="609" xml:space="preserve">:# Llamar el texto objetivo.
:#  Si hay uno existente o un mensaje de interfaz por defecto con ese nombre, use el contenido de ese mensaje en vez del texto objetivo.
:# Si la salida del paso anterior es una URL valida (comenzando con http:// u otro [[$1|URL protocol]]), el enlace apuntará a esa URL.
:# si no, se tratará como el enlace objetivo de un wikilink (enlazando a ese nombre de página o interwiki). 
:# En caso de que termine enlazando a '-', toda la entrada es removida de la barra lateral (eso es útil para remover una entrada en todos los lenguajes al cambiar el mensaje que tiene el enlace).</text>
      <sha1>mnsg6sc2wuf844avaj2h2ezunkqami9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/100/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>738377</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402360</id>
      <parentid>2628712</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:39:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="42" xml:space="preserve">usa el texto de $1 (el cual contiene &quot;$2&quot;)</text>
      <sha1>0k7cr54fia842d05b3jxaup15mv8dly</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Special pages/pt-br</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>738388</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402386</id>
      <parentid>5370142</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T03:54:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>fix</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="50307" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{ExtensionTypes}}
[[File:MediaWiki-extensions-icon.svg|125px|alt=MediaWiki extensions|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
'''Páginas especiais''' são páginas que são criadas pelo software sob demanda para executar uma função específica. 
Por exemplo, uma página especial pode mostrar todas as páginas que têm um ou mais links para um site externo ou pode criar um formulário que fornece feedback enviado pelo usuário. 
As páginas especiais estão localizadas em seu próprio [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Namespace|namespace]] ('''''Especial:''''') e não são editáveis diretamente como outras páginas. 
{{ll|Developers}} também pode criar novas páginas especiais. 
Essas páginas podem ser acessíveis ao usuário e geralmente aparecerão na lista de todas as páginas especiais em [[Special:SpecialPages]]. 
Algumas páginas especiais só são acessíveis aos usuários com determinadas permissões e acessos. 
Outras páginas especiais não aparecem na lista de páginas especiais e são usadas apenas pelo wiki internamente.

== Informações Gerais ==
As páginas especiais integradas que vêm com o MediaWiki são chamadas de &lt;code&gt;SpecialSomename.php&lt;/code&gt; e estão localizadas na diretoria &lt;code&gt;includes/specials&lt;/code&gt;.
Páginas especiais centrais são registradas na lista central localizada em &lt;code&gt;includes/specialpage/SpecialPageFactory.php&lt;/code&gt; em ordem de carregamento pelo Mediawiki.
Páginas especiais são criadas por desenvolvedores terceiros são geralmente armazenadas no diretório &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; (extensões) na raiz do seu servidor com seus arquivos para seu devido funcionamento. 
Todas as páginas especiais herdam a classe de página especial e são declaradas na página de Páginas Especiais. 
Quando uma nova página especial é criadas, os direitos do usuário são necessários para que esta seja definida. 
Esses direitos específicos, entre outras coisas, se a página será mostrada em [[Special:SpecialPages]] (Páginas Especiais) e se a página será incluída em outras páginas.

As páginas especiais devem possuir nomes únicos que possam ser customizados na Wiki.  
De forma geral o &quot;Especial:Nome da Página&quot;, onde &quot;Especial&quot; e &quot;Nome da Página&quot; podem ser customizavéis.  
O pseudo-{{ll|Manual:Namespaces|namespace}} especial podem ser traduzido para outras línguas.  
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This translated namespace can be produced with the wikitext &lt;nowiki&gt;{{ns:special}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;, on this wiki giving &quot;{{ns:special}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;  
O '''nome''' da página especial também pode ser redefinido em uma mensagem do sistema, para o idioma do site, com o nome genérico da página especial como o ID.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A special page may or may not allow input.&lt;/span&gt;  
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, [[Special:Export]] allows a user to define a specific page to export by calling [[Special:Export/Sun]].&lt;/span&gt;  
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the special page allows complex input, additional parameters will be sent to the [[W:Query string|query string]] component of the URL for processing, e.g. https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=Special:Recentchanges&amp;days=3&amp;limit=250.&lt;/span&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* There are various ways to make [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Special pages|special pages]], but the one below is used by the bulk of official {{ll|Manual:Extensions|extensions}}, and adherence to this style is recommended.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, be sure to include a credits block in the new special page for 'specialpage'. See &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgExtensionCredits|$wgExtensionCredits}}&lt;/code&gt; for more details.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* After making a new special page, be sure to add it to {{ll|Category:Special page extensions}} so other people can find it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* This method is only valid for MediaWiki running on PHP5 and above.  If you're using an earlier version of MediaWiki on a more-recent version of PHP, {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|upgrade MediaWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Special pages cannot be included within frames unless you use &lt;code&gt;$wgOut-&gt;allowClickjacking();&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
}}

==Modelo básico de página especial==
{{ombox|text=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki 1.25 introduced a [[Manual:Extension registration|new way]] to load an extension. For older unsupported versions of MediaWiki, see an [https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=Manual:Special_pages&amp;oldid=2331671 older revision].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Most special page extensions require three files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Small setup file, which loads every time MediaWiki starts.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* File with the bulk of the code.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Localisation file
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki coding conventions define the three files like this:
&lt;/div&gt;

*&lt;code&gt;MyExtension/extension.json&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The setup file.&lt;/span&gt;
*&lt;code&gt;MyExtension/includes/Special.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page code.&lt;/span&gt;
*&lt;code&gt;i18n/*.json&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|localisation file}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Place all of the files in a new directory inside your MediaWiki &lt;code&gt;extensions/&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should name the special page file after the extension. For example, {{ll|Extension:Gadgets}} contains the file &lt;code&gt;SpecialGadgets.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension uses more than one special page, you'll need more names.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the example below, the special page's name is '''MyExtension'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After creating the files listed below, adding the following line to '''LocalSettings.php''' enables the extension:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'MyExtension' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{anchor|The Setup File}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===The setup file===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example setup file for &lt;code&gt;MyExtension/extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:
&lt;/div&gt;
{{#tag:syntaxhighlight|
{
	&quot;name&quot;: &quot;MyExtension&quot;,
	&quot;version&quot;: &quot;0.0.0&quot;,
	&quot;author&quot;: [
		&quot;Your Name&quot;
	],
	&quot;url&quot;: &quot;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:MyExtension&quot;,
	&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-desc&quot;,
	&quot;license-name&quot;: &quot;MIT&quot;,
	&quot;type&quot;: &quot;other&quot;,
	&quot;AutoloadNamespaces&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki\\Extension\\MyExtension\\&quot;: &quot;src/&quot;
	},
	&quot;SpecialPages&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtension&quot;: &quot;MediaWiki\\Extension\\MyExtension\\Special&quot;
	},
	&quot;MessagesDirs&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtension&quot;: [
			&quot;i18n&quot;
		]
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2,
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= {{MW legacy branch number}}.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 5.6&quot;
		},
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;dependendExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
|lang=json}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This file registers several important and mandatory things:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The location of the MediaWiki\Extension\MyExtension\Special class;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The location of the localisation files;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The new special page and its class name.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|The Special Page File}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===The special page file===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The body file (&lt;code&gt;MyExtension/src/Special.php&lt;/code&gt;) should contain a subclass of &lt;code&gt;SpecialPage&lt;/code&gt; or one of its subclasses.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This file loads automatically when someone requests the special page.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The example below implements the subclass SpecialMyExtension.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need the &lt;code&gt;__construct()&lt;/code&gt; constructor because its first parameter names your special page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;execute()&lt;/code&gt; is the main function called when a special page is accessed.&lt;/span&gt;  
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This function overrides the function {{phpi|SpecialPage::execute()}}.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It passes the single parameter &lt;code&gt;$par&lt;/code&gt;, the subpage component of the current title.&lt;/span&gt;  
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if someone follows a link to [[Special:MyExtension/blah]], &lt;code&gt;$par&lt;/code&gt; contains &quot;blah&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You should run Wikitext and HTML output through &lt;code&gt;$wgOut&lt;/code&gt;. Do not use 'print' or 'echo' directly when working within the wiki's user interface.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
However, if you use your special page as an access point to custom XML or binary output, see {{ll|Taking over output in your special page}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
namespace MediaWiki\Extension\MyExtension;
class SpecialMyExtension extends \SpecialPage {
	function __construct() {
		parent::__construct( 'MyExtension' );
	}

	function execute( $par ) {
		$request = $this-&gt;getRequest();
		$output = $this-&gt;getOutput();
		$this-&gt;setHeaders();

		# Get request data from, e.g.
		$param = $request-&gt;getText( 'param' );

		# Do stuff
		# ...
		$wikitext = 'Hello world!';
		$output-&gt;addWikiTextAsInterface( $wikitext );
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{anchor|The localisation file}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===The localisation file===
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|The Messages/Internationalization File}}

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:System message#Adding new messages}} for how to get them translated.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All special pages specify a title, like &lt;code&gt;'My Extension'&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The title is used in the {{tag|title|open}}  and {{tag|h1|open}} elements of the extension's page and on [[Special:SpecialPages]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* It can be anything, but should describe the special page and extension.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* It's specified through a message. The structure of the message is a key-value pair. The key, &lt;code&gt;'myextension'&lt;/code&gt;, ''must'' be all lowercase.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
An example of a localisation file in &lt;code&gt;MyExtension/i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt;:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@metadata&quot;: {
		&quot;authors&quot;: [
			&quot;&lt;your username&gt;&quot;
		]
	},
	&quot;myextension&quot;: &quot;My Extension&quot;,
	&quot;myextension-desc&quot;: &quot;Adds the MyExtension functionality.&quot;,
	&quot;myextension-summary&quot;: &quot;On this special page, do this simple thing and earn wonders.&quot;,
	&quot;group-myextensionrole&quot;: &quot;Role of myextension&quot;,
	&quot;group-myextensionrole-member&quot;: &quot;Member of role of myextension&quot;,
	&quot;grouppage-myextensionrole&quot;: &quot;{{ns:project}}:Role of myextension&quot;,
	&quot;action-myextension&quot;: &quot;XYZ doing.&quot;,
	&quot;right-myextension&quot;: &quot;to do xyz&quot;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In &lt;code&gt;i18n/qqq.json&lt;/code&gt;, the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:System message#Message documentation|message documentation]]:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@metadata&quot;: {
		&quot;authors&quot;: [
			&quot;&lt;your username&gt;&quot;
		]
	},
	&quot;myextension&quot;: &quot;The name of the extension's entry in Special:SpecialPages&quot;,
	&quot;myextension-desc&quot;: &quot;{{desc}}&quot;,
	&quot;myextension-summary&quot;: &quot;Description appearing on top of Special:MyExtension.&quot;,
	&quot;action-myextension&quot;: &quot;{{doc-action|myextension}}&quot;,
	&quot;right-myextension&quot;: &quot;{{doc-right|myextension}}&quot;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that IDs should not start with an uppercase letter, and that a space in the ID should be written in the code as an underscore.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The -summary message is optional.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's created automatically by the parent class and shown on top of the special page, usually for a concise description of what the user can do on it.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't define its content, it will only be used when wiki administrators customize it on the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|The Aliases File}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== The aliases file ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also internationalize the name of the special page by creating aliases for it. The example below uses the file &quot;MyExtension.i18n.alias.php&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the special page &lt;code&gt;MyExtension&lt;/code&gt; registers an ''alias'' so the page becomes accessible at &lt;code&gt;.../Special:My Extension&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.../Spezial:Meine_Erweiterung&lt;/code&gt; in German.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add your alias file to &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
...
	&quot;ExtensionMessagesFiles&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtensionAlias&quot;: &quot;MyExtension.i18n.alias.php&quot;
	},
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add special page aliases to &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.i18n.alias.php&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
/**
 * Aliases for myextension
 *
 * @file
 * @ingroup Extensions
 */

$specialPageAliases = [];

/** English
 * @author &lt;seu nome de usuário&gt;
 */
$specialPageAliases['en'] = [
	'MyExtension' =&gt; [ 'MyExtension', 'My Extension' ],
];

/** Deutsch
 * @author &lt;seu nome de usuário&gt;
 */
$specialPageAliases['de'] = [
	'MyExtension' =&gt; [ 'MeineErweiterung', 'Meine Erweiterung' ],
];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Again, you should write a space in the ID and an underscore in the code.
&lt;/div&gt;

Para o cabeçalho da página e links, as regras usuais para nomes de página se aplicam.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgCapitalLinks|$wgCapitalLinks}}&lt;/code&gt; is true, a lowercase letter is converted to uppercase, and an underscore is displayed as a space.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, instead of the above, we could use &lt;code&gt;'my_extension' =&gt; 'My extension'&lt;/code&gt;, assuming we consistently identified the extension as &lt;code&gt;my_extension&lt;/code&gt; elsewhere.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that in the associative array for the English language, the string identifying our SpecialPage (&lt;code&gt;MyExtension&lt;/code&gt; in the example) is ''also'' a valid title.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also note, the first element of {{phpi|$specialPageAliases['en']['MyExtension']}} ''must'' be the same as the key (&lt;code&gt;'MyExtension'&lt;/code&gt;)! Otherwise [[Special:Specialpages]] will not list the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Special page group}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====Special page group====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can set which group your special page appears under on [[Special:SpecialPages]] by overriding &lt;code&gt;SpecialPage::getGroupName()&lt;/code&gt; in your subclass.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
    /**
     * Override the parent to set where the special page appears on Special:SpecialPages
     * 'other' is the default. If that's what you want, you do not need to override.
     * Specify 'media' to use the &lt;code&gt;specialpages-group-media&lt;/code&gt; system interface message, which translates to 'Media reports and uploads' in English;
     * 
     * @return string
     */
    function getGroupName() {
        return 'media';
    }
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some common values are 'login', 'maintenance', 'media', 'other', 'pagetools', 'redirects', 'users'.&lt;/span&gt;  
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can see the accepted values at &lt;nowiki&gt;Special:AllMessages&lt;/nowiki&gt; (search for '''specialpages-group''') or browse the wiki using the pseudo language 'qqx' by going to &lt;nowiki&gt;Special:SpecialPages?uselang=qqx&lt;/nowiki&gt;) and looking at the headings.&lt;/span&gt;  
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specify the word 'media' to use the interface message 'specialpages-group-media'.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your special page doesn't fit into any of the preconfigured headings, you can add a new heading by adding it to your localisation file, see [[#The localisation file|The localisation file]]).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The standard page groups that come with MediaWiki are listed in the localisation file. For example, the English messages are in &lt;code&gt;languages/i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt; and begin with &lt;code&gt;specialpages-group-&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to categorize your special page under &lt;code&gt;users&lt;/code&gt;, then the message is &lt;code&gt;specialpages-group-users&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value for this key is the text that appears as the name of that category, for example, &lt;code&gt;Users and rights&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your special page does not seem to fit under any of the existing categories, you can always make a new one.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In your extension's localisation file simply insert a new key for the &lt;code&gt;messages&lt;/code&gt; array.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, we define the &lt;code&gt;gamification&lt;/code&gt; group:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
    &quot;myextension&quot;: &quot;My Extension&quot;,
	&quot;myextension-desc&quot;: &quot;Adds the MyExtension functionality.&quot;,
	&quot;myextension-summary&quot;: &quot;On this special page, do this simple thing and earn wonders&quot;,
	&quot;specialpages-group-gamification&quot;: &quot;Gamification&quot;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now, assuming you set the return value for the method &lt;code&gt;SpecialPage::getGroupName()&lt;/code&gt; as &lt;code&gt;gamification&lt;/code&gt; in your class definition, reload [[Special:SpecialPages]] to see your new category.&lt;/span&gt;

==Outros arquivos importantes==

===SpecialPage.php===

{{anchor|Constructor}}
====Construtor====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can [[w:Method overloading|overload]] the constructor to initialize your own data, but the main reason you would want to do it is to change the behavior of the SpecialPage class itself.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you call the base class constructor from your child class, the following parameters are available:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
function __construct( $name = '', $restriction = '', $listed = true );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

* ''string'' &lt;code&gt;$name&lt;/code&gt; Nome da página especial, conforme visto em links e URLs
* ''string'' &lt;code&gt;$restriction&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights|User right]] required, e.g. &quot;block&quot; or &quot;delete&quot;; also see [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special_pages#Restricting_page_access|Restricting page access]]&lt;/span&gt;
* ''boolean'' &lt;code&gt;$listed&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Whether the page is listed in Special:Specialpages&lt;/span&gt;

====&lt;code&gt;SpecialPage-&gt;setHeaders()&lt;/code&gt;====

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This initialises the OutputPage object &lt;code&gt;$wgOut&lt;/code&gt; with the name and description of your special page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It should always be called from your execute() method.&lt;/span&gt;

====&lt;code&gt;SpecialPage-&gt;getOutput()&lt;/code&gt;====

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This method returns an OutputPage object which can be accessed as described below.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As in the example code, use&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$output = $this-&gt;getOutput();
$output-&gt;addWikiTextAsInterface( 'Hello, World' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
instead of the deprecated &lt;code&gt;$wgOut&lt;/code&gt; global variable
&lt;/div&gt;

====&lt;code&gt;SpecialPage-&gt;getRequest()&lt;/code&gt;====

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This method returns a WebRequest object which can be accessed as described below.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As in the example code, use&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$request = $this-&gt;getRequest();
$myparam = $request-&gt;getText( 'myparam' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;instead of the deprecated {{$wg|Request}} global variable&lt;/span&gt;

====&lt;code&gt;SpecialPage-&gt;including()&lt;/code&gt;====

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some special pages can be included from within another page.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if you add &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:RecentChanges}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; to the wikitext of a page, it will insert a listing of recent changes within the existing content of the page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Including a special page from another web page is only possible if you declared the page to be includable in the constructor.&lt;/span&gt;  
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can do this by adding the following in the &lt;code&gt;__construct()&lt;/code&gt; method after the parent class initialization:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$this-&gt;mIncludable = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also define your special page class as extending the IncludableSpecialPage class.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The SpecialPage-&gt;including() function returns a boolean value telling you what context the special page is being called from: false if it is a separate web page, and true if it is being included from within another web page.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usually you will want to strip down the presentation somewhat if the page is being included.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|execute}}
====&lt;code&gt;SpecialPage-&gt;execute()&lt;/code&gt;====

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the function which your child class should overload.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It passes a single parameter, usually referred to cryptically as &lt;code&gt;$par&lt;/code&gt; (short for $parameter, as it is the parameter the users can feed to your special page).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This parameter is the subpage component of the current title.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if someone follows a link to [[Special:MyExtension/blah]], &lt;code&gt;$par&lt;/code&gt; will contain &quot;blah&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

=====Página de ajuda=====

{{MW 1.25|and later}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's useful to add [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:PD help|help pages]] on MediaWiki.org, where they'll be [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:Language policy|translatable]].&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To make sure users find your help page, it's advisable and very simple for your special page to link the help page in question:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$this-&gt;addHelpLink( 'Help:Extension:MyExtension' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===OutputPage.php===

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;OutputPage.php contains the class definition for objects of type &lt;code&gt;OutputPage&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can get an object of this class from your SpecialPage using&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$output = $this-&gt;getOutput();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The variablename $output is, of course, arbitrary.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Whatever you call it, this is the variable you will use the most, because it is the way to send output to the browser (no, you don't use &lt;code&gt;echo&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;print&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to use it somewhere, declare the variable global:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
function randomFunction() {
        $output = $this-&gt;getOutput();
	$output-&gt;addHTML( '&lt;b&gt;This is not a pipe...&lt;/b&gt;' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to, you can create multiple OutputPage objects in different methods in your SpecialPage extension.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They will add to the output in the order they are executed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can inspect the OutputPage class by viewing &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:OutputPage.php|includes/OutputPage.php}}&lt;/code&gt; (indeed, all of these can be inspected), but there are a few methods you should definitely know about.&lt;/span&gt;

====&lt;code&gt;OutputPage-&gt;addHTML()&lt;/code&gt;====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Essentially the quick and dirty substitute for &lt;code&gt;echo&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It takes your input and adds it to the buffer: no questions asked.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the below action, if &lt;code&gt;$action&lt;/code&gt; contains user-data, it could easily have XSS, evil stuff, or the spawn of [[w:Satan|Satan]] injected in.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You're better off using escaping (such as with the php function htmlentities) or the XML builders class to build trusted output.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$output-&gt;addHTML( '&lt;form action=&quot;'.$action.'&quot; method=&quot;post&quot;&gt;' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

====&lt;code&gt;OutputPage-&gt;addWikiText()&lt;/code&gt;====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For most output, you should be using this function.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's a bit of a black magic function: wikitext goes in, HTML comes out, and a whole lotta arcane code and demon summonings happen in between.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$output-&gt;addWikiText(&quot;This is some ''lovely'' [[wikitext]] that will '''get''' parsed nicely.&quot;);
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What's worth noting is that the parser will view your chunks as cohesive wholes and paragraph accordingly. That is...&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$output-&gt;addWikiText( '* Item 1' );
$output-&gt;addWikiText( '* Item 2' );
$output-&gt;addWikiText( '* Item 3' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Will output three lists with one item each, which probably wasn't intended.&lt;/span&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your special page is intended to be included in other pages, you should probably not use &lt;code&gt;addWikiText()&lt;/code&gt; (or any other function that calls the parser except for message related functions that parse ($this-&gt;msg()) which are OK to call on modern versions of MediaWiki).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Due to [http://www.ehartwell.com/TechNotes/MediaWikiExtensionParserDebug.htm a bug in MediaWiki] ([[phab:T18129]]), an included special page will mess up any inclusion before it on the same including page, showing strings like UNIQ10842e596cbb71da.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note however, if you just want to insert a system message and have it treated like parsed wikitext, you can use code like {{phpi|$this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addHtml( $this-&gt;msg( 'key-of-message' )-&gt;parse() )}}.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will not have the issue with nested parser calls mentioned above.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=====workaround #1=====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Important: these work arounds are only needed if you are making a transcludable special page. Normal special pages do not need these.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a workaround, you can have your extensions convert Wikitext to HTML using a separate Parser object and then use &lt;code&gt;addHTML()&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; 
Exemplo:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgOut-&gt;addHTML( $this-&gt;sandboxParse( &quot;Here's some '''formatted''' text.&quot; ) );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Supondo que esteja dentro da mesma classe que o resto do seu código de página especial
function sandboxParse( $wikiText ) {
	$myParser = new Parser();
        $user = $this-&gt;getUser();
        $title = self::getTitleFor('YourCanonicalSpecialPageName');
	$myParserOptions = ParserOptions::newFromUser( $user );
	$result = $myParser-&gt;parse( $wikiText, $title, $myParserOptions );
	return $result-&gt;getText();
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=====alternativa #2=====
Tentei o procedimento acima e descobri que o mesmo problema agora se aplicava a quaisquer marcas no texto transcluído. 
Isso não será um problema para muitas extensões, mas a extensão que eu estava escrevendo tinha a intenção de mostrar o wikitexto de outra página como parte de sua funcionalidade, então isso era um problema.

O processo de análise de uma página que transclui uma página especial parece ser este:

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Replace &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Special:MyExtension}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; with a [[Strip marker|UNIQ-QINU marker]] (because SpecialPage output is expected to be ready-to-output HTML)&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Replace any tags with [[Strip marker|QINU markers]] as above&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Parse everything else from wikitext to HTML&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Replace all [[Strip marker|QINU markers]] with their respective stored values, in a single pass&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The process for parsing a page which transcludes a ''non''-special page, though, is apparently like this:&lt;/span&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Replace &lt;nowiki&gt;{{:Normal Article Name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; or &lt;nowiki&gt;{{Template Name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; with contents of transcluded page (because transcluded pages contain unparsed wikitext)&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Replace any tags with [[Strip marker|QINU markers]] as above&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Parse everything else from wikitext to HTML&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Replace all [[Strip marker|QINU markers]] with their respective stored values, in a single pass&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The problem is apparently that in the earlier case, the parsing of the SpecialPage's wiki text is lacking the final QINU decoding step (why?), so all the [[Strip marker|QINU markers]] are left undecoded.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(This may be a leftover from using the same syntax to invoke transclusion of a wikitext page, which is just pasted straight into the host page's wikitext contents and parsed, as is used to invoke transclusion of a SpecialPage, which must not be parsed at all. Wherever the code is that decides &quot;wait, this is a special page -- replace it with a QINU&quot;, it should be doing the extra unstripGeneral before doing the QINU substitution.)&lt;/span&gt;
{{void|1=
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wherever the code is that decides &quot;wait, this is a special page -- replace it with a QINU&quot;, it should be doing the extra unstripGeneral before doing the QINU substitution.)&lt;/span&gt;
}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;So I just did the following -- after this line:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$htOut = $wgParser-&gt;recursiveTagParse( $iText );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;...I added these lines (the second one is only because the function definition for the first one recommends it):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$htOut = $wgParser-&gt;mStripState-&gt;unstripGeneral( $htOut );
$htOut = $wgParser-&gt;mStripState-&gt;unstripNoWiki( $htOut );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since I have now documented this, of course, I will now find a tragic flaw with it and feel really stupid... but as long as it seems to be working, I had to note it here.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(It is also important to note the problem with work-around #1.)&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, I have only tested this with MediaWiki 1.10.1.&lt;/span&gt; 
O problema ainda existe em MW 1.14, mas esta solução pode ou não funcionar. 
--[[User:Woozle|Woozle]] 18:26, 9 April 2009 (UTC)

====&lt;code&gt;OutputPage-&gt;showErrorPage()&lt;/code&gt;====
Uma página de erro é mostrada. 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The arguments &lt;code&gt;$title&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;$msg&lt;/code&gt; specify keys into $this-&gt;msg(), not text.&lt;/span&gt; 
Um exemplo:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$output-&gt;showErrorPage( 'error', 'badarticleerror' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

*&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'error' refere-se ao texto ''&quot;Erro&quot;''.&lt;/span&gt;
*&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'badarticleerror' refere-se ao texto ''&quot;Esta ação não pode ser realizada nesta página.&quot;''&lt;/span&gt;

Você também pode especificar mensagens ou adicionar parâmetros:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$output-&gt;showErrorPage( 'error', 'badarticleerror', [ 'param1', 'param2' ] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$messageObject = new Message(...);
...
$output-&gt;showErrorPage( 'error', $messageObject );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$titleMessageObject = new Message(...);
$messageObject = new Message(...);
...
$output-&gt;showErrorPage( $titleMessageObject, $messageObject );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===WebRequest.php===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{manual|WebRequest.php|WebRequest}} class is used to obtain information from the GET and POST arrays.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using this is recommended over directly accessing the superglobals.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The WebRequest object is accessible from extensions by using the {{ll|RequestContext}}.&lt;/span&gt;

===Database.php===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki has a load of convenience functions and wrappers for interacting with the database, using the {{manual|Database.php|\Wikimedia\Rdbms\Database}} class.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It also has an interesting load balancing scheme in place.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's recommended you use these wrappers.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check out &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:Database.php|Database.php}}&lt;/code&gt; for a complete listing of all the convenience functions, because these docs will only tell you about the non-obvious caveats.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Manual:Database access}}.&lt;/span&gt;

===User.php===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{manual|User.php|User}} class is used to represent users on the system.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SpecialPage-&gt;getUser() should be used to obtain a User object for the currently logged in user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The use of the global &lt;code&gt;$wgUser&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated&lt;/span&gt;

===Title.php===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Title represents the name of a page in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is useful because MediaWiki does all sorts of fun escaping and special case logic to page names, so instead of rolling your own convert title to URL function, you create a Title object with your page name, and then use &lt;code&gt;getLocalURL()&lt;/code&gt; to get a URL to that page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To get a title object for your special page from outside of the special page class, you can use {{phpi|SpecialPage::getTitleFor( 'YourCanonicalSpecialPageName' )}}.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will give you a localised title in the wiki's language.&lt;/span&gt;

==Páginas especiais personalizadas==

Existem várias maneiras de fornecer suas próprias páginas especiais não agrupadas no MediaWiki:

* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;One method is to install an extension that generates a form to create or edit an article.  A list of extensions currently available, can be found at {{ll|Category:Special page extensions}}.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also write an extension which provides your own special page.  Writing your own extension requires [[w:PHP|PHP]] coding skill and comfort with object oriented design and databases also is helpful.  You will also need to know how to use code to create and edit MediaWiki articles. For more information, please see [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Forms#Articles_with_embedded_forms|this discussion]].&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also display a custom page through JavaScript, in place of the default error message &quot;Unknown special page&quot; (or the &quot;This page is intentionally left blank.&quot; message, if using a subpage of [[Special:BlankPage]]). In MediaWiki:Common.js, check for {{ll|Manual:Interface/JavaScript#mw.config|wgPageName}}, then hide the MediaWiki-generated content (just appendCSS &lt;code&gt;{visibility:hidden;}&lt;/code&gt; ), and inject custom HTML (&lt;code&gt;innerHTML&lt;/code&gt;) into the &lt;code&gt;document.getElementById('bodyContent')&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;document.getElementById('mw_contentholder')&lt;/code&gt;. For an example, see [[:meta:User:Krinkle/Tools/Real-Time Recent Changes]].&lt;/span&gt;

==Perguntas frequentes==

===Definir um título para extensão===
O MediaWiki não define o título da extensão, que é trabalho do desenvolvedor.
Ele irá procurar pelo nome da extensão quando [[Special:Specialpages]] for chamado ou a página especial for carregada.  
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the [[#execute|''function execute( $par )'']] section, use OutputPage methods to title the extension like: {{phpi|$this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;setPageTitle(&quot;your title&quot;);}}&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The place where the extension can be found (as specified by what is passed into the SpecialPage constructor) is the key--'''except''' that it is not capitalized because of &lt;code&gt;getDescription()&lt;/code&gt;, the internally used function that finds out the title (or, what they call description) of the special page, &lt;code&gt;strtolower&lt;/code&gt; the name.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;ThisIsACoolSpecialPage&quot;'s key would be &quot;thisisacoolspecialpage.&quot;&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Theoretically, &lt;code&gt;getDescription&lt;/code&gt; can be overloaded in order to avoid interacting with the message cache but, as the source code states: &quot;Derived classes can override this, but usually it is easier to keep the default behavior.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Furthermore, this prevents the MediaWiki namespace from overloading the message, as below.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Localizing the Extension Name===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;So you've just installed a shiny new MediaWiki extension and realize: &quot;Oh no, my wiki is in French, but the page is showing up as English!&quot;&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most people wouldn't care, but it's actually a quite simple task to fix (as long as the developer used the method explained on this page).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No noodling around in source code.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Let's say the name of the page is &lt;code&gt;DirtyPages&lt;/code&gt; and the name comes out to &quot;List of Dirty Pages&quot; but you want it to be (and [[wikipedia:Pardon my French|excuse my poor French]]) &quot;Liste de Pages Sales&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Well, it's as simple as this:&lt;/span&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Navigate to [[MediaWiki:DirtyPages]], this page may not exist, but edit it anyway&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Insert &quot;Liste de Pages Sales&quot; and save&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And ''voilà'' (pardon the pun), the change is applied.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is also useful for customizing the title for your wiki within your language: for instance, the developer called it &quot;List of Dirty Pages&quot; but you don't like that name, so you rename it &quot;List of Pages needing Cleanup&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;  
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check out [[Special:Allmessages]] to learn more.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, if your extension has a large block of text that does change, like a warning, don't directly output the text.&lt;/span&gt;  
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, add it to the message cache and when the time comes to output the text in your code, do this:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgOut-&gt;addWikiText( $this-&gt;msg( 'dirtypageshelp' ) );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Then this message too can be customized at [[MediaWiki:Dirtypageshelp]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also {{ll|Help:System message}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Restringindo acesso à página===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====Do not display your Special Page on [[Special:SpecialPages]]====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Sometimes you may want to limit the visibility of your Special Page by removing it from [[Special:SpecialPages]] and making it visible to only those users with a particular right.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can do this in the [[#Constructor|constructor]] by passing in a &lt;code&gt;$restriction&lt;/code&gt; parameter; e.g., “editinterface”, a right only assigned to sysops by default; see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User_rights|User rights manual]] for other available user rights.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
function __construct() {
	parent::__construct( 'MyExtension', 'editinterface' ); // restrict to sysops
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Or you can create your own right in [[#The Setup File|the setup file]] and assign it to sysops, e.g.:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
&quot;AvailableRights&quot;: [
	&quot;myextension-right&quot;
],
&quot;GroupPermissions&quot;: {
	&quot;sysop&quot;: {
		&quot;myextension-right&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;and then call the constructor with your right:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
function __construct() {
	parent::__construct( 'MyExtension', 'myextension-right' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====Prevent access to your Special Page====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Even if you restrict your page in the constructor, as mentioned above, it will still be viewable directly via the URL, e.g. at Special:MySpecialPage.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In order to actually limit access to your SpecialPage you must call {{phpi|$this-&gt;checkPermissions()}} in the &lt;code&gt;execute&lt;/code&gt; method.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you need more fine-grained control over permissions, you can override {{phpi|$this-&gt;checkPermissions()}}, and/or add whatever permissions-checking is required for your extension.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Disabling Special:UserLogin and Special:UserLogout pages===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In LocalSettings.php you can use the {{ll|Manual:Hooks/SpecialPage_initList|SpecialPage_initList hook}} to ''unset'' unwanted built-in special pages.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2009-June/031231.html|&quot;making a few SpecialPages restricted&quot;]] if you need ''conditional'' unsetting of special pages for example for certain user groups.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The general message &quot;You have requested an invalid special page.&quot; is shown if users try to access such unset special pages.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgHooks['SpecialPage_initList'][] = function ( &amp;$list ) {
	unset( $list['Userlogout'] );
	unset( $list['Userlogin'] );
	return true;
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A different approach would be to use the DisabledSpecialPage callback.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This approach may be preferred if you're only disabling the special page &quot;temporarily&quot;, because the default message in this case would say: &quot;{{int|disabledspecialpage-disabled}}&quot; instead of pretending the page does not exist at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This gives clear hint that the page maybe activated at a later time.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgSpecialPages['Userlogout'] = DisabledSpecialPage::getCallback( 'Userlogout' );
$wgSpecialPages['Userlogin'] = DisabledSpecialPage::getCallback( 'Userlogin' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is also possible to add custom lengthy explanation of why you're disabling the special page, by giving a message key as the second argument of the callback.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do so first create a system message &quot;MediaWiki:Userlogout-disable-reason&quot; and write all the explanation there.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message will be parsed in a block format.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then in LocalSettings.php add:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgSpecialPages['Userlogout'] = DisabledSpecialPage::getCallback( 'Userlogout', 'Userlogout-disable-reason' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===Adicionando logs===
No MediaWiki, todas as ações dos usuários são rastreadas para transparência e colaboração.
Veja {{ll|Manual:Logging to Special:Log}} para saber como fazer.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Changing the groups on [[Special:Specialpages]]===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you're an extension developer, you have to implement the &lt;code&gt;getGroupName()&lt;/code&gt; method as described in [[#Special page group|the Special page group section]] of this page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since MediaWiki 1.21, the special page group can be overridden by editing a [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:System message|system message]].&lt;/span&gt; 
Este método não se destina a ser usado por desenvolvedores de extensões, mas por administradores de sites. 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The group name must be placed in the &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;specialpages-specialpagegroup-&lt;special page name&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; message, where &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;&lt;special page name&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; is the canonical name (in english) of the special page in lowercase.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if you want to set the group under which &quot;Special:MyLittlePage&quot; is displayed on [[Special:Specialpages]] to &quot;MyLittleGroup&quot;, you just have to create &quot;MediaWiki:Specialpages-specialpagegroup-mylittlepage&quot; with content &quot;MyLittleGroup&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;Special:MyLittlePage&quot; will then show up under the group &quot;MyLittleGroup&quot;, which you can name under &quot;MediaWiki:Specialpages-group-mylittlegroup&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Se você quiser mudar o grupo de páginas especiais existentes, dê uma olhada em [https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=Special:SpecialPages&amp;uselang=qqx Special:SpecialPages&amp;uselang=qqx] e use esses nomes ao invés de &quot;mylittlepage&quot;.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Unlisting the page from [[Special:Specialpages]]===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a special page from the [[Special:Specialpages]] altogether, pass a {{phpi|false}} as a third parameter to the SpecialPage parent constructor, as described in [[#Constructor|the SpecialPage Constructor section]] of this page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you need more complicated logic to determine whether the page should be listed or not, you can also override the &lt;code&gt;isListed()&lt;/code&gt; function, but using the constructor parameter is simpler.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Getting a list of special pages and their aliases on a wiki===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Simply use the &quot;siteinfo&quot; API module to retrieve the information from the wiki like e.g. [https://www.mediawiki.org/w/api.php?action=query&amp;meta=siteinfo&amp;siprop=specialpagealiases /api.php?action=query&amp;meta=siteinfo&amp;siprop=specialpagealiases].&lt;/span&gt;
==Ver também==
*[[Special:MyLanguage/HTMLForm|HTMLForm]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tutorial on creating checkboxes, text areas, radio buttons, etc. in special pages&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Customization techniques{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:User interface{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>h5k325u50hz7zog4wjl2yyg38qjjlot</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:AdvancedSearch/pt-br</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>738728</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402389</id>
      <parentid>4621778</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:32:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5090" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
[[File:AdvSearch Screen 20170620.png|thumb|Tela AdvancedSearch]]
A [[Special:MyLanguage/extension:AdvancedSearch|Extensão AdvancedSearch]] melhora a [[Special:Search|página de pesquisa]] através de uma forma de parâmetros avançados e visa [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:CirrusSearch|opções de pesquisa existentes]] mais visível e acessível para todos.
É um recurso padrão em todas as wikis a partir de novembro de 2018.

== Contexto ==

[[m:Special:MyLanguage/WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch|Busca Avançada]] é um projeto da WMDE da equipe [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Technical Wishes|desejos técnicos]]. A ideia do recurso foi desenvolvida em um [[m:Special:MyLanguage/WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch/Workshop|série de oficinas]] em 2016.

O formulário de parâmetros avançados oferece acesso a alguns dos [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:CirrusSearch|opções especiais de pesquisa]] o [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia_Discovery|Equipe de busca do WMF]] implementou nos últimos anos. 
[[m:WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch/Functional_scope|Esta lista fornece uma visão geral]] quais parâmetros são implementados.

Mais informações podem ser encontradas na [[m:WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch|página principal do projeto no Meta]].

== Uso ==

Para usar a nova interface, você pode ir diretamente para [[Special:Search|Special:Search]], Clique no ícone da lupa na caixa de pesquisa ou clique no botão de pesquisa sem preencher nada na caixa de pesquisa. Especial: a pesquisa também está disponível em qualquer lista de resultados de pesquisa. Se você preferir a interface de pesquisa anterior, poderá desativar a Pesquisa avançada nas [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-searchoptions|suas preferências de usuário]].

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| [[File:AdvancedSearch collapsed view.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| A interface melhora a [[Special:Search|Special:Search]] através de um formulário de parâmetro avançado e muda a maneira de selecionar namespaces.

A '''caixa de pesquisa''' ainda pode ser usada como de costume. Por exemplo, você pode digitar manualmente os parâmetros de pesquisa avançada.

|-
| [[File:AdvancedSearch interface with expanded filetype selection II.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| Quando você clica na seta na seção de parâmetros avançados, ele oferece uma seleção de alguns parâmetros para pesquisas avançadas. Você pode combinar diferentes parâmetros.

Explicações sobre cada parâmetro podem ser encontradas ao lado do campo de entrada.

Em alguns campos, você só pode inserir um termo de pesquisa, em outros você pode inserir vários termos separando-os com uma vírgula. Isso depende da função do campo.

Quando você seleciona uma imagem ou tipo de arquivo de vídeo, um submenu é aberto. Aqui, você pode especificar a largura e a altura do arquivo.

|-
| [[File:AdvancedSearch - summary of selected parameters and namespaces.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| Quando você clica na seta na parte superior da seção de parâmetros avançados, você colapsa esta seção. Agora você vê uma prévia dos termos de pesquisa que você digitou. Ao clicar no X na pré-visualização, você pode remover cada termo.

|-
| [[File:AdvancedSearch namespaces dropdown menu.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| Na seção &quot;Pesquisar em&quot;, você pode selecionar os namespaces nos quais deseja pesquisar. Você pode escolher uma das predefinições de namespace (por exemplo, &quot;Discussão&quot;), digitar os namespaces desejados ou selecioná-los em uma lista suspensa. Você pode salvar sua seleção marcando &quot;Lembrar seleção para futuras pesquisas&quot;.

|-
| [[File:AdvancedSearch - all namespaces selected.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| Ao verificar &quot;Todos&quot;, você pode selecionar todos os espaços de nomes. Você pode desmarcar individualmente os que não precisa clicando no X em cada etiqueta ou clicando no espaço de nome na lista suspensa.

Pressione o botão de busca azul ou pressione a tecla de retorno em qualquer campo para iniciar a pesquisa.
|}

==Roteiro de implantação==

Como '''recurso beta'''
* Testwikis e Mediawiki.org: 21/11/2017 {{ok}}
* deWP, arWP: 29/11/2017 {{ok}}
* huWP, faWP: 06/12/2017 {{ok}}
* Outras wikis: 08/05/2018 {{ok}}

Como '''recurso padrão'''
* Testwikis e MediaWiki.org: 08/11/2018 {{ok}}
* deWP, arWP, huWP, faWP: 15/11/2018 {{ok}}
* Outras wikis: planejados para 28/11/2018 {{ok}}
* Possibilidade de alterar a ordem dos resultados: 18/07/2019

==Links==

* [[m:WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch|Página principal do projeto no Meta]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:CirrusSearch|Página de ajuda do CirrusSearch]]: Introdução ao CirrusSearch, incluindo visão geral em todos os parâmetros de pesquisa avançada existentes.

==Ajuda com tradução==

A [[translatewiki:Special:Translate/ext-advancedsearch|mensagens de software para o recurso]] pode ser traduzido no wiki de tradução. Qualquer ajuda é muito apreciada!

[[Category:Extension help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>q8z7j8c2uwf731k441pp311jvyosucw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:AdvancedSearch/2/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>738731</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402388</id>
      <parentid>2629767</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:32:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="203" xml:space="preserve">A [[$1|Extensão AdvancedSearch]] melhora a [[$2|página de pesquisa]] através de uma forma de parâmetros avançados e visa [[$3|opções de pesquisa existentes]] mais visível e acessível para todos.</text>
      <sha1>asfguactf3ahp6ei2jn185xh5r0b9od</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:AdvancedSearch/17/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>738765</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402387</id>
      <parentid>2629838</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T03:58:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="219" xml:space="preserve">* [[$adv-search|Página principal do projeto no Meta]]
* [[$CirrusSearch|Página de ajuda do CirrusSearch]]: Introdução ao CirrusSearch, incluindo visão geral em todos os parâmetros de pesquisa avançada existentes.</text>
      <sha1>7s1leh80z8j18ffkiyhtfpxa2oib01p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/28/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>738911</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402362</id>
      <parentid>2630342</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:39:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="41" xml:space="preserve">Para traducciones más avanzadas, ver $1.</text>
      <sha1>5g91qp6e97m115jf45k622sfm0xoto5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Editor/ja</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>739253</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402694</id>
      <parentid>5375348</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7143" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
お探しのページは以下にあるかもしれません:

== 現在 ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Current editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
!編集ツール
!スクリーンショット
!年
!プラットフォーム
!注記
|-
|初期設定の MediaWiki エディター。HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=HTML textarea のスクリーンショット|center|frameless]]
|2003
|PCと携帯端末
|ツールバーはない。[[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] でJavaScript を無効にするか、「{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}」を無効にした場合に表示。
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extension:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=WikiEditor のスクリーンショット|center|frameless]]
|2010
|デスクトップ
|[[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] で「{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}」が有効な場合に表示。
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ビジュアルエディター]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=ビジュアルエディターの画面キャプチャ|center|frameless]]
|2012
|PCと携帯端末
|書式付き形式の編集システム
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|2017年版wiki文エディタ]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=ビジュアルエディターに同梱されたウィキ文モードの画面キャプチャ|center|frameless]]
|2017
|デスクトップ
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|ページの校閲]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|デスクトップ
|[[S:|ウィキソース]]で採用
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=wikEd のスクリーンショット|center|frameless]]
|2006
|デスクトップ
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An entirely volunteer-supported wikitext editor.&lt;/span&gt; 一般的にはガジェットもしくはユーザースクリプトとして動作。ウィキメディア以外の一部のウィキでは拡張機能の扱い。
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|コードエディター]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=コードエディターの画面|center|frameless]]
|2011
|デスクトップ
|JavaScript その他のコードページの編集に使用。
|-
|{{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}} 用のウィキテキスト エディター
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=モバイル版ウェブで使うウィキ文エディターの画面|center|frameless]]
|2013
|モバイル
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|コンテンツ翻訳]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=コンテンツ翻訳のエディターの画面|center|frameless]]
|2014
|デスクトップ
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|議論の構造化]] (旧称 Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=議論の構造化による表示。コメント (上) に対する返答 (下) の書き始めの部分の画面キャプチャ|center|frameless]]
|2013
|デスクトップとモバイル
|議論の構造化で使えるエディターはウィキテキスト形式とビジュアル形式の両方。
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$android-faq|Android]]アプリ版のエディター&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Android 携帯端末で表示した編集インターフェイス|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|携帯機器
|
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$ios-faq|iOS]]アプリ版のエディター&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=iPhone で表示した編集インターフェイス|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|携帯機器
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]] エディター
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|デスクトップ
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|ウィキボヤージュのリスティングエディター]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|デスクトップ
|ウィキボヤージュに特化した JavaScript ベースの編集ツール。テンプレートを挿入
|-
|}

== 以前 ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Former editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
|-
!編集ツール
!スクリーンショット
!年
!プラットフォーム
!注記
|-
|2006年のJavaScript「クラシック」エディタ。{{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=2006年版ウィキ文エディタの画面キャプチャ|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|デスクトップ
|2006年–2010年の時期には[[Special:Preferences|個人設定]]で&quot;showtoolbar&quot;オプションを有効にすると、発生する事象でした。その後、表示されるのは&quot;showtoolbar&quot; (2010年版エディタ) を無効に設定した利用者に限定されました。この版のエディタは[[MediaWiki 1.32]] で[[phab:T30856|既に除去]]されました。 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A similar toolbar is available as a volunteer-supported local gadget at some wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|旧来のモバイル版フロントエンドのウィキ文エディター
|
|2012–2014
|モバイル
|廃止。2003年版ウィキテキストエディタ (デスクトップ版) から特化した携帯端末版。
|-
|}

== 関連項目 ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>6zo17qq7q4aecq0xgrdup83es2ih8ea</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402715</id>
      <parentid>5402694</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:06:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7136" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
お探しのページは以下にあるかもしれません:

== 現在 ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Current editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
!編集ツール
!スクリーンショット
!年
!プラットフォーム
!注記
|-
|初期設定の MediaWiki エディター。HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=HTML textarea のスクリーンショット|center|frameless]]
|2003
|PCと携帯端末
|ツールバーはない。[[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] でJavaScript を無効にするか、「{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}」を無効にした場合に表示。
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extension:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=WikiEditor のスクリーンショット|center|frameless]]
|2010
|デスクトップ
|[[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] で「{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}」が有効な場合に表示。
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ビジュアルエディター]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=ビジュアルエディターの画面キャプチャ|center|frameless]]
|2012
|PCと携帯端末
|書式付き形式の編集システム
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|2017年版wiki文エディタ]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=ビジュアルエディターに同梱されたウィキ文モードの画面キャプチャ|center|frameless]]
|2017
|デスクトップ
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|ページの校閲]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|デスクトップ
|[[S:|ウィキソース]]で採用
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=wikEd のスクリーンショット|center|frameless]]
|2006
|デスクトップ
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An entirely volunteer-supported wikitext editor.&lt;/span&gt; 一般的にはガジェットもしくはユーザースクリプトとして動作。ウィキメディア以外の一部のウィキでは拡張機能の扱い。
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|コードエディター]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=コードエディターの画面|center|frameless]]
|2011
|デスクトップ
|JavaScript その他のコードページの編集に使用。
|-
|{{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}} 用のウィキテキスト エディター
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=モバイル版ウェブで使うウィキ文エディターの画面|center|frameless]]
|2013
|モバイル
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|コンテンツ翻訳]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=コンテンツ翻訳のエディターの画面|center|frameless]]
|2014
|デスクトップ
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|議論の構造化]] (旧称 Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=議論の構造化による表示。コメント (上) に対する返答 (下) の書き始めの部分の画面キャプチャ|center|frameless]]
|2013
|デスクトップとモバイル
|議論の構造化で使えるエディターはウィキテキスト形式とビジュアル形式の両方。
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$android-faq|Android]]アプリ版のエディター&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Android 携帯端末で表示した編集インターフェイス|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|携帯機器
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]アプリ版のエディター
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=iPhone で表示した編集インターフェイス|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|携帯機器
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]] エディター
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|デスクトップ
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|ウィキボヤージュのリスティングエディター]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|デスクトップ
|ウィキボヤージュに特化した JavaScript ベースの編集ツール。テンプレートを挿入
|-
|}

== 以前 ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Former editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
|-
!編集ツール
!スクリーンショット
!年
!プラットフォーム
!注記
|-
|2006年のJavaScript「クラシック」エディタ。{{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=2006年版ウィキ文エディタの画面キャプチャ|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|デスクトップ
|2006年–2010年の時期には[[Special:Preferences|個人設定]]で&quot;showtoolbar&quot;オプションを有効にすると、発生する事象でした。その後、表示されるのは&quot;showtoolbar&quot; (2010年版エディタ) を無効に設定した利用者に限定されました。この版のエディタは[[MediaWiki 1.32]] で[[phab:T30856|既に除去]]されました。 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A similar toolbar is available as a volunteer-supported local gadget at some wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|旧来のモバイル版フロントエンドのウィキ文エディター
|
|2012–2014
|モバイル
|廃止。2003年版ウィキテキストエディタ (デスクトップ版) から特化した携帯端末版。
|-
|}

== 関連項目 ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>ie8j63mvn3b3dpkljmggjnz17nbkr4l</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402737</id>
      <parentid>5402715</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:10:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7129" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
お探しのページは以下にあるかもしれません:

== 現在 ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Current editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
!編集ツール
!スクリーンショット
!年
!プラットフォーム
!注記
|-
|初期設定の MediaWiki エディター。HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=HTML textarea のスクリーンショット|center|frameless]]
|2003
|PCと携帯端末
|ツールバーはない。[[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] でJavaScript を無効にするか、「{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}」を無効にした場合に表示。
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extension:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=WikiEditor のスクリーンショット|center|frameless]]
|2010
|デスクトップ
|[[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] で「{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}」が有効な場合に表示。
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|ビジュアルエディター]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=ビジュアルエディターの画面キャプチャ|center|frameless]]
|2012
|PCと携帯端末
|書式付き形式の編集システム
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|2017年版wiki文エディタ]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=ビジュアルエディターに同梱されたウィキ文モードの画面キャプチャ|center|frameless]]
|2017
|デスクトップ
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|ページの校閲]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|デスクトップ
|[[S:|ウィキソース]]で採用
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=wikEd のスクリーンショット|center|frameless]]
|2006
|デスクトップ
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An entirely volunteer-supported wikitext editor.&lt;/span&gt; 一般的にはガジェットもしくはユーザースクリプトとして動作。ウィキメディア以外の一部のウィキでは拡張機能の扱い。
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|コードエディター]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=コードエディターの画面|center|frameless]]
|2011
|デスクトップ
|JavaScript その他のコードページの編集に使用。
|-
|{{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}} 用のウィキテキスト エディター
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=モバイル版ウェブで使うウィキ文エディターの画面|center|frameless]]
|2013
|モバイル
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|コンテンツ翻訳]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=コンテンツ翻訳のエディターの画面|center|frameless]]
|2014
|デスクトップ
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|議論の構造化]] (旧称 Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=議論の構造化による表示。コメント (上) に対する返答 (下) の書き始めの部分の画面キャプチャ|center|frameless]]
|2013
|デスクトップとモバイル
|議論の構造化で使えるエディターはウィキテキスト形式とビジュアル形式の両方。
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Android FAQ|Android]]アプリ版のエディター
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Android 携帯端末で表示した編集インターフェイス|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|携帯機器
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]アプリ版のエディター
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=iPhone で表示した編集インターフェイス|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|携帯機器
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]] エディター
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|デスクトップ
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|ウィキボヤージュのリスティングエディター]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|デスクトップ
|ウィキボヤージュに特化した JavaScript ベースの編集ツール。テンプレートを挿入
|-
|}

== 以前 ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Former editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
|-
!編集ツール
!スクリーンショット
!年
!プラットフォーム
!注記
|-
|2006年のJavaScript「クラシック」エディタ。{{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=2006年版ウィキ文エディタの画面キャプチャ|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|デスクトップ
|2006年–2010年の時期には[[Special:Preferences|個人設定]]で&quot;showtoolbar&quot;オプションを有効にすると、発生する事象でした。その後、表示されるのは&quot;showtoolbar&quot; (2010年版エディタ) を無効に設定した利用者に限定されました。この版のエディタは[[MediaWiki 1.32]] で[[phab:T30856|既に除去]]されました。 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A similar toolbar is available as a volunteer-supported local gadget at some wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|旧来のモバイル版フロントエンドのウィキ文エディター
|
|2012–2014
|モバイル
|廃止。2003年版ウィキテキストエディタ (デスクトップ版) から特化した携帯端末版。
|-
|}

== 関連項目 ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>5d74x9mopbuy3v48sh2lm8cazem8478</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>739551</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402308</id>
      <parentid>2632125</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:07:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36" xml:space="preserve">Consulte $1 para mais informações.</text>
      <sha1>9p4xlwl9iv9wveq71vrc3ben5vriqu1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Page Previews/28/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>742603</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402128</id>
      <parentid>4948783</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:20:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="50" xml:space="preserve">Leia [[$1|os resultados completos desses testes]].</text>
      <sha1>lqupvlvdvhqy9g9pto0k2zqrnv0j43v</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:MediaWiki 1.30/11/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>743445</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402090</id>
      <parentid>3092222</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:41:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="99" xml:space="preserve">Download the [$url latest releases] or checkout the $2 branch [[$3|in Git]] to follow this release.</text>
      <sha1>2fwezhe5y5y25czrpevcsnghxzwhav1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402098</id>
      <parentid>5402090</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:43:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="99" xml:space="preserve">Download the [$url latest releases] or checkout the $1 branch [[$2|in Git]] to follow this release.</text>
      <sha1>64zb9owr78ggoshq5xm77bhh4c52bik</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/135/tr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>743604</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402988</id>
      <parentid>2645267</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:50:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="129" xml:space="preserve">Evet, ancak küçük değişiklikler yapmak zorunda kalabilirsiniz. $1 biçimi büyük ölçüde geriye dönük olarak uyumludur.</text>
      <sha1>rr9ucix256g3v4va9dzgq4yqssvcwjz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:MediaWiki 1.30/10/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>743836</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402105</id>
      <parentid>2877120</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:46:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="38" xml:space="preserve">$1 é a versão obsoleta do MediaWiki.</text>
      <sha1>f3w4erndc2q8r0ol14b5jfw4jw9gay6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:MediaWiki 1.30/11/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>743838</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402103</id>
      <parentid>4569925</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:45:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="95" xml:space="preserve">Baixe do [$url latest releases] ou marque o $1 ramo [[$2|no Git]] para seguir este lançamento.</text>
      <sha1>bcyrz782dmcu8ofz58qfwsr5getxb9a</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>MediaWiki 1.30/ko</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>743965</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402093</id>
      <parentid>5066290</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:41:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10777" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''미디어위키 1.30'''은 미디어위키의 레거시 릴리스입니다. 변경사항의 전체 목록은 $relnotes 파일을 참고하십시오. 2017년 5월 9일을 기점으로 점증적 &quot;wmf&quot; 브랜치를 통해 위키미디어 재단 위키에 적용되었습니다. 1.30.0 안정판은 2017년 12월 12일에 출시되었습니다.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consult the {{RELEASE-NOTES}} file for the full list of changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It was deployed on Wikimedia Foundation wikis through incremental &quot;wmf&quot;-branches starting on 9 May 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 1.30.0 stable release was released on 12 December 2017.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
[https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ latest releases]내려받거나 checkout the &lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git| Git]]의 릴리즈를 따르십시오.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== 환경 설정 변경 내역 ===
* 코드에서 로케일 구분 문자열 비교를 사용하는 경우 예기치 않은 동작이 되지 않도록하려면 &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;에 &quot;C.UTF-8&quot;로케일을 사용해야한다. (가능한경우)
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;이 LC_ALL이 아닌 LC_CTYPE에게 영향을 준다. 세부내용은 &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;문서를 참조하십시오.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;은 모든요청에 적용된다. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt;은 사용되지 않고 필요 없으므로 작업을 하지 않아도 된다.
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names. This is intended for extensions that want control over the instantiation of their jobs, to allow for proper dependency injection.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names, using the 'factory' key in the module description array. This allows dependency injection to be used for ResourceLoader modules.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}} has been removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}} added (off by default).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} was introduced to control the size of IP ranges that can be queried at [[Special:Contributions]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== 새 기능 ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Added the ability to search for contributions within an IP range at [[Special:Contributions]]. References to revisions made by IPs are stored in the {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} table to make querying for ranges more efficient.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Output from &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; will now be wrapped in a {{tag|div|open}} with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook, enabling extensions to allow software- specific tags to be added by users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to register additional parser options.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Included Pig Latin, a language game in English, as a [[LanguageConverter]] variant. This allows English-speaking developers to develop and test LanguageConverter more easily. Pig Latin can be enabled by setting &lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; to true.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to purge data that depends on the &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt; table.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added JS config values &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; to the output of diff pages.&lt;/span&gt;

=== API변경 사항 ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=parse output will be wrapped in a {{tag|div|open}} with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using the new '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;' parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; is not '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abort reasons from &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; will be formatted as specified by the error formatter parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; can now handle arbitrary text, deleted revisions, and returning users and edit comments.&lt;/span&gt;
* ([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) The '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;', &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; 매개변수들은 사용되지 않는다. 비슷한 이름인 매개변수 &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, 과&lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;도 사용되지 않는다. 대신 &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt; 혹은 &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;을 사용하십시오.

=== API내부 변경 사항 ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; messages are deprecated. The existing message should be split between &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Individual values of multi-valued parameters can now be marked as deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;

=== 갱신된 언어 ===
* kbp (Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè) 추가로 지원됨.

=== 기타 변경점 ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The use of an associative array for &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, where the IP address is in the key instead of the value, is deprecated (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Please convert these arrays to indexed/sequential ones (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (1.23부터 사용되지 않음)는 삭제되었다.
* &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; 과 &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; 는 사용되지 않는다.
* &lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt;는 사용되지 않는다.
* &lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt;는 사용되지 않는다.
* &lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; 는 사용되지 않는다. 대신 새로운 &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; 을 사용해야한다.
* &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt;는 사용되지 않는다. 대신 새로운 &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt;을 사용해야한다.
* &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; 후크 (1.21부터 사용되지 않음)삭제됨.
* &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; 과 &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt; 메서드(1.24부터 사용되지 않음)들 삭제됨.
* &lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; 과 &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; 사용되지 않음. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; 과 &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt;을 대신 사용해야 한다.
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) Preprocessor handling of LanguageConverter markup has been improved. As a result of the new uniform handling, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' may need to be escaped (for example, as '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') where it occurs inside template arguments or wikilinks.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Page moves are now counted as edits for the purposes of autopromotion, ''i.e.'', they increment the &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; field in the database.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Two new hooks, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, were added for manipulating Special:Log and Special:NewPages lines.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; hooks have an additional parameter, for manipulating HTML data attributes of RC/history lines. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; can do that via the &lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt; subarray.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; method was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; will now throw an exception if passed ParserOptions that would pollute the parser cache. Callers should use &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; to create the &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; object and only change options that affect the parser cache key.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; no longer supports passing in a direct value, it requires a callable factory function or a class name.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; global, &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; are all deprecated. The main &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instance should be obtained from &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt; instead. Access to the underlying &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; is possible through the new &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt; method.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (deprecated in 1.27) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;

== 하위 문서 ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>fh8sv8wt6a6l2lpbc6xtt1kcbkczw5i</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402113</id>
      <parentid>5402093</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:47:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10794" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''미디어위키 1.30'''은 미디어위키의 레거시 릴리스입니다. 변경사항의 전체 목록은 $relnotes 파일을 참고하십시오. 2017년 5월 9일을 기점으로 점증적 &quot;wmf&quot; 브랜치를 통해 위키미디어 재단 위키에 적용되었습니다. 1.30.0 안정판은 2017년 12월 12일에 출시되었습니다.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consult the {{RELEASE-NOTES}} file for the full list of changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It was deployed on Wikimedia Foundation wikis through incremental &quot;wmf&quot;-branches starting on 9 May 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 1.30.0 stable release was released on 12 December 2017.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Download the [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ latest releases] or checkout the &lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt; branch [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|in Git]] to follow this release.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== 환경 설정 변경 내역 ===
* 코드에서 로케일 구분 문자열 비교를 사용하는 경우 예기치 않은 동작이 되지 않도록하려면 &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;에 &quot;C.UTF-8&quot;로케일을 사용해야한다. (가능한경우)
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;이 LC_ALL이 아닌 LC_CTYPE에게 영향을 준다. 세부내용은 &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;문서를 참조하십시오.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;은 모든요청에 적용된다. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt;은 사용되지 않고 필요 없으므로 작업을 하지 않아도 된다.
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names. This is intended for extensions that want control over the instantiation of their jobs, to allow for proper dependency injection.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names, using the 'factory' key in the module description array. This allows dependency injection to be used for ResourceLoader modules.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}} has been removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}} added (off by default).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} was introduced to control the size of IP ranges that can be queried at [[Special:Contributions]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== 새 기능 ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Added the ability to search for contributions within an IP range at [[Special:Contributions]]. References to revisions made by IPs are stored in the {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} table to make querying for ranges more efficient.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Output from &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; will now be wrapped in a {{tag|div|open}} with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook, enabling extensions to allow software- specific tags to be added by users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to register additional parser options.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Included Pig Latin, a language game in English, as a [[LanguageConverter]] variant. This allows English-speaking developers to develop and test LanguageConverter more easily. Pig Latin can be enabled by setting &lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; to true.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to purge data that depends on the &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt; table.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added JS config values &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; to the output of diff pages.&lt;/span&gt;

=== API변경 사항 ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=parse output will be wrapped in a {{tag|div|open}} with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using the new '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;' parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; is not '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abort reasons from &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; will be formatted as specified by the error formatter parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; can now handle arbitrary text, deleted revisions, and returning users and edit comments.&lt;/span&gt;
* ([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) The '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;', &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; 매개변수들은 사용되지 않는다. 비슷한 이름인 매개변수 &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, 과&lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;도 사용되지 않는다. 대신 &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt; 혹은 &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;을 사용하십시오.

=== API내부 변경 사항 ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; messages are deprecated. The existing message should be split between &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Individual values of multi-valued parameters can now be marked as deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;

=== 갱신된 언어 ===
* kbp (Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè) 추가로 지원됨.

=== 기타 변경점 ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The use of an associative array for &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, where the IP address is in the key instead of the value, is deprecated (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Please convert these arrays to indexed/sequential ones (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (1.23부터 사용되지 않음)는 삭제되었다.
* &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; 과 &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; 는 사용되지 않는다.
* &lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt;는 사용되지 않는다.
* &lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt;는 사용되지 않는다.
* &lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; 는 사용되지 않는다. 대신 새로운 &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; 을 사용해야한다.
* &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt;는 사용되지 않는다. 대신 새로운 &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt;을 사용해야한다.
* &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; 후크 (1.21부터 사용되지 않음)삭제됨.
* &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; 과 &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt; 메서드(1.24부터 사용되지 않음)들 삭제됨.
* &lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; 과 &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; 사용되지 않음. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; 과 &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt;을 대신 사용해야 한다.
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) Preprocessor handling of LanguageConverter markup has been improved. As a result of the new uniform handling, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' may need to be escaped (for example, as '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') where it occurs inside template arguments or wikilinks.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Page moves are now counted as edits for the purposes of autopromotion, ''i.e.'', they increment the &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; field in the database.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Two new hooks, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, were added for manipulating Special:Log and Special:NewPages lines.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; hooks have an additional parameter, for manipulating HTML data attributes of RC/history lines. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; can do that via the &lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt; subarray.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; method was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; will now throw an exception if passed ParserOptions that would pollute the parser cache. Callers should use &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; to create the &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; object and only change options that affect the parser cache key.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; no longer supports passing in a direct value, it requires a callable factory function or a class name.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; global, &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; are all deprecated. The main &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instance should be obtained from &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt; instead. Access to the underlying &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; is possible through the new &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt; method.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (deprecated in 1.27) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;

== 하위 문서 ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>6pzj4hswd9pwabusb3kaqxbsvucbp5a</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>MediaWiki 1.30/he</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>744230</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402091</id>
      <parentid>5066286</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:41:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11948" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''מדיה-ויקי 1.30''' היא הגרסה האחרונה של '''מדיה ויקי'''. ראו {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|file=RELEASE-NOTES-1.30|text=RELEASE-NOTES}} עבור הרשימה המלאה של השינויים. הגרסה פורסמה על אתרי קרן ויקימדיה בענפי &quot;wmf&quot; החל ממאי 2017. גרסת ה-1.30 היציבה שוחררה ב-12 לדצמבר 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consult the {{RELEASE-NOTES}} file for the full list of changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It was deployed on Wikimedia Foundation wikis through incremental &quot;wmf&quot;-branches starting on 9 May 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 1.30.0 stable release was released on 12 December 2017.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
הורידו את ה-[https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ הדגמה האחרונה] או ראו את ענף הקוד&lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|in Git]] כדי לעקוב אחרי גרסה זו.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== שינויי הגדרות ===
* הגדרת המיקום &quot;C.UTF-8&quot; אמורה לשמש עבור &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;, אם אפשרי, כדי להימנע מהתנהגות בלתי צפויה בעת השוואת מחרוזות טקסט רגישות לאותיות גדולות/קטנות. לדוגמה, ההרחבה &quot;Scribunto&quot; מחשיבה &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; כיוון שהיא מתעלמת מאותיות גדולות או קטנות.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; עכשיו משפיעה על LC_ALL מאשר LC_CTYPE. ראו את תיעוד &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; לפרטים נוספים.
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; is now applied for all requests. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated and a no-op, as it is no longer needed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names. This is intended for extensions that want control over the instantiation of their jobs, to allow for proper dependency injection.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names, using the 'factory' key in the module description array. This allows dependency injection to be used for ResourceLoader modules.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}} has been removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}} added (off by default).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} was introduced to control the size of IP ranges that can be queried at [[Special:Contributions]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New features&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Added the ability to search for contributions within an IP range at [[Special:Contributions]]. References to revisions made by IPs are stored in the {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} table to make querying for ranges more efficient.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Output from &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; will now be wrapped in a {{tag|div|open}} with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook, enabling extensions to allow software- specific tags to be added by users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to register additional parser options.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Included Pig Latin, a language game in English, as a [[LanguageConverter]] variant. This allows English-speaking developers to develop and test LanguageConverter more easily. Pig Latin can be enabled by setting &lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; to true.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to purge data that depends on the &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt; table.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added JS config values &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; to the output of diff pages.&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Action API changes&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=parse output will be wrapped in a {{tag|div|open}} with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using the new '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;' parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; is not '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abort reasons from &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; will be formatted as specified by the error formatter parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; can now handle arbitrary text, deleted revisions, and returning users and edit comments.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) The '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', and '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated, as are the similarly named parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, or &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; instead.&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Action API internal changes&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; messages are deprecated. The existing message should be split between &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Individual values of multi-valued parameters can now be marked as deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Languages updated&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Support for kbp (Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè) was added.&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Other changes&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The use of an associative array for &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, where the IP address is in the key instead of the value, is deprecated (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Please convert these arrays to indexed/sequential ones (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (deprecated in 1.23) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated. There are no known callers.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated. The new &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated. The new &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; hook (deprecated in 1.21) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt; methods (both deprecated in 1.24) were removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; were deprecated. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) Preprocessor handling of LanguageConverter markup has been improved. As a result of the new uniform handling, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' may need to be escaped (for example, as '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') where it occurs inside template arguments or wikilinks.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Page moves are now counted as edits for the purposes of autopromotion, ''i.e.'', they increment the &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; field in the database.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Two new hooks, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, were added for manipulating Special:Log and Special:NewPages lines.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; hooks have an additional parameter, for manipulating HTML data attributes of RC/history lines. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; can do that via the &lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt; subarray.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; method was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; will now throw an exception if passed ParserOptions that would pollute the parser cache. Callers should use &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; to create the &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; object and only change options that affect the parser cache key.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; no longer supports passing in a direct value, it requires a callable factory function or a class name.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; global, &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; are all deprecated. The main &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instance should be obtained from &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt; instead. Access to the underlying &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; is possible through the new &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt; method.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (deprecated in 1.27) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subpages&lt;/span&gt; ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ekz0n8fmwxo6ny6ljeq8rke2rzynmis</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402102</id>
      <parentid>5402091</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:45:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11908" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''מדיה-ויקי 1.30''' היא הגרסה האחרונה של '''מדיה ויקי'''. ראו {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|file=RELEASE-NOTES-1.30|text=RELEASE-NOTES}} עבור הרשימה המלאה של השינויים. הגרסה פורסמה על אתרי קרן ויקימדיה בענפי &quot;wmf&quot; החל ממאי 2017. גרסת ה-1.30 היציבה שוחררה ב-12 לדצמבר 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consult the {{RELEASE-NOTES}} file for the full list of changes.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It was deployed on Wikimedia Foundation wikis through incremental &quot;wmf&quot;-branches starting on 9 May 2017.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 1.30.0 stable release was released on 12 December 2017.&lt;/span&gt;

הורידו את ה-[https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ הדגמה האחרונה] או ראו את ענף הקוד&lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt; [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|in Git]] כדי לעקוב אחרי גרסה זו.

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== שינויי הגדרות ===
* הגדרת המיקום &quot;C.UTF-8&quot; אמורה לשמש עבור &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;, אם אפשרי, כדי להימנע מהתנהגות בלתי צפויה בעת השוואת מחרוזות טקסט רגישות לאותיות גדולות/קטנות. לדוגמה, ההרחבה &quot;Scribunto&quot; מחשיבה &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; כיוון שהיא מתעלמת מאותיות גדולות או קטנות.
* &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; עכשיו משפיעה על LC_ALL מאשר LC_CTYPE. ראו את תיעוד &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; לפרטים נוספים.
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; is now applied for all requests. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated and a no-op, as it is no longer needed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names. This is intended for extensions that want control over the instantiation of their jobs, to allow for proper dependency injection.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names, using the 'factory' key in the module description array. This allows dependency injection to be used for ResourceLoader modules.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}} has been removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}} added (off by default).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} was introduced to control the size of IP ranges that can be queried at [[Special:Contributions]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New features&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Added the ability to search for contributions within an IP range at [[Special:Contributions]]. References to revisions made by IPs are stored in the {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} table to make querying for ranges more efficient.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Output from &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; will now be wrapped in a {{tag|div|open}} with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook, enabling extensions to allow software- specific tags to be added by users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to register additional parser options.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Included Pig Latin, a language game in English, as a [[LanguageConverter]] variant. This allows English-speaking developers to develop and test LanguageConverter more easily. Pig Latin can be enabled by setting &lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; to true.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to purge data that depends on the &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt; table.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added JS config values &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; to the output of diff pages.&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Action API changes&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=parse output will be wrapped in a {{tag|div|open}} with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using the new '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;' parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; is not '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abort reasons from &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; will be formatted as specified by the error formatter parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; can now handle arbitrary text, deleted revisions, and returning users and edit comments.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) The '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', and '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated, as are the similarly named parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, or &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; instead.&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Action API internal changes&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; messages are deprecated. The existing message should be split between &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Individual values of multi-valued parameters can now be marked as deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Languages updated&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Support for kbp (Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè) was added.&lt;/span&gt;

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Other changes&lt;/span&gt; ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The use of an associative array for &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, where the IP address is in the key instead of the value, is deprecated (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Please convert these arrays to indexed/sequential ones (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (deprecated in 1.23) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated. There are no known callers.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated. The new &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated. The new &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; hook (deprecated in 1.21) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt; methods (both deprecated in 1.24) were removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; were deprecated. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) Preprocessor handling of LanguageConverter markup has been improved. As a result of the new uniform handling, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' may need to be escaped (for example, as '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') where it occurs inside template arguments or wikilinks.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Page moves are now counted as edits for the purposes of autopromotion, ''i.e.'', they increment the &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; field in the database.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Two new hooks, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, were added for manipulating Special:Log and Special:NewPages lines.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; hooks have an additional parameter, for manipulating HTML data attributes of RC/history lines. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; can do that via the &lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt; subarray.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; method was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; will now throw an exception if passed ParserOptions that would pollute the parser cache. Callers should use &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; to create the &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; object and only change options that affect the parser cache key.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; no longer supports passing in a direct value, it requires a callable factory function or a class name.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; global, &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; are all deprecated. The main &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instance should be obtained from &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt; instead. Access to the underlying &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; is possible through the new &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt; method.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (deprecated in 1.27) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subpages&lt;/span&gt; ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>aespypqm73ngbp32cho4sclr99e0xvm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:MediaWiki 1.30/11/he</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>744232</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402101</id>
      <parentid>3092331</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:45:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="144" xml:space="preserve">הורידו את ה-[$url הדגמה האחרונה] או ראו את ענף הקוד$1 [[$2|in Git]] כדי לעקוב אחרי גרסה זו.</text>
      <sha1>e2fql4q8z1u22u3vmilceyyje76sex9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>MediaWiki 1.31/ja</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>744339</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402088</id>
      <parentid>5335653</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:39:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17115" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
'''MediaWiki 1.31''' は MediaWiki の廃止された長期間サポート リリースです。
変更点の完全な一覧については、{{RELEASE-NOTES|MediaWiki 1.31}} ファイルを参照してください。
2017年9月26日より、番号が増える&quot;{{ll|WMF product development process|wmf}}&quot;ブランチを通じて、ウィキメディア財団のウィキ群に展開されました。
1.31.0 安定版リリースは2018年6月13日に公開されました。
[https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.31/ 最新のリリース]をダウンロードするか、[[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|Git 内]]の &lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_31|text=REL1_31}}&lt;/code&gt; ブランチをチェックアウトしてこのリリースに追随してください。

当初は2021年6月に廃止の予定でした。
MediaWiki 1.35 の開始時期が2020年9月に遅れたため、1.31 は2021年9月30日に廃止されました。

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.31}}

__TOC__
== 新着情報 ==

=== より多く同梱された拡張機能 ===
[[File:I-40W-Sunflowers.jpg|thumb|この画像上でクリックすると MultimediaViewer 拡張機能が動作します（[[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|個人設定]]で無効にしていない場合）]]
MediaWiki の tarball に同梱されている拡張機能集が増加しています。新しく追加されたものは以下のとおりです：

* {{ll|Extension:CategoryTree|CategoryTree}}
* {{ll|Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor}} はウィキ上で CSS および JavaScript を編集する際のより使いやすいエディタを提供します。
* {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}} は画像およびギャラリーの lightbox ビューアを提供します。
* {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}} はウィキアカウントの二要素認証を提供します。
* {{ll|Extension:Replace Text|Replace Text}}は、管理者がウィキ全体の文字列置換を行うためのフォームを提供します。文字列置換の対象は、ページの内容とページのタイトルの両方です。

手違いにより、{{ll|Extension:Nuke|nsp=0}} 拡張機能は MediaWiki 1.31.0 の tarball には含まれていません。この拡張機能を使用したい場合は、個別にダウンロードしてください。これは MediaWiki 1.31.1 以降で修正されました。

=== 外装 ===

==== Timeless 外装 ====

[[Skin:Timeless|Timeless]] は MediaWiki の新しいレスポンシブな外装であり、新たに同梱されるようになりました。
&lt;gallery&gt;
File:Timeless screenshot - Mobile 01.png|モバイルレイアウト
File:Timeless screenshot - 1024x768.png|タブレットレイアウト
File:Timeless screenshot - 1280x800.png|デスクトップレイアウト
File:Timeless screenshot - 1440x900.png|幅の広いデスクトップレイアウト
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== CologneBlue および Modern ====

[[Skin:CologneBlue|CologneBlue]] および [[Skin:Modern|Modern]] 外装は、現在も MediaWiki に対応していますが、同梱されなくなりました。それらの外装を更新またはインストールする場合は、[[Special:SkinDistributor|個別にダウンロード]]してください。

=== HTML 5 構文解析アルゴリズムに置換された Tidy ===

:''詳細は{{ll|Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ|よくある質問}}を参照してください''

正しくないウィキテキストを現代的で標準に準拠した方法で整形するため、HTML 4 ベースの Tidy ライブラリが PHP のみで書かれた HTML 5 構文解析器 RemexHtml に置き換えられています。行われなくなる tidy の整形にコンテンツが依存している場合は、それらを修正する必要があります。

[[Parsoid]] とともに {{ll|Extension:Linter|nsp=0}} 拡張機能を使用することで、RemexHtml 構文解析器を利用したレンダリングの際に差異が生じる問題が発生するページを割り出せます。
{{ll|Extension:ParserMigration|nsp=0}} 拡張機能は、エディターに tidy および RemexHtml を利用したレンダリングの比較を横に並べて表示します。

=== ウィキ間利用者名 ===

MediaWiki は、版や記録項目等において &quot;&lt;code&gt;iw&gt;Example&lt;/code&gt;&quot; のような形式の「インターウィキ」利用者名をサポートするようになりました。これにより、外部のウィキ（例えば Wikibase によって生成されたもの）からのページの取り込みやイベントの正確な記録が可能となり、現在存在する、あるいは将来作成される可能性があるローカルアカウントによって混乱することがなくなります。

* ({{phabT|9240}}) ページの取り込みは、不明な（オプションで既知のものも）利用者名を&quot;&lt;code&gt;iw&gt;Example&lt;/code&gt;&quot;のような形式で記録するようになります。
* ({{phabT|20209}}) &lt;code&gt;Linker&lt;/code&gt;（履歴ページ、ログページ等で使用されています）は、&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[iw:User:Example|iw&gt;Example]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; というウィキテキストのように、&quot;&lt;code&gt;iw&gt;&lt;/code&gt;Example&quot; という形で利用者名を表示します。

=== さらなる UI の標準化 ===
{{Todo|Expand this}}
*MediaWiki プロジェクトを横断したダイアログボックスの標準化の最初のパスとして、[https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/php/classHtml.html Html クラス]が messageBox、successBox、errorBox および warningBox を生成するヘルパーメソッドを提供するようになりました。

=== その他の機能の変更 ===
* すべての利用者に対して、90編集/分という既定の編集速度制限を追加します。これは {{wg|RateLimits}} の設定で変更できます。
* ({{phabT|143790}}) {{wg|EmailConfirmToEdit}} は &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; 操作にのみ影響します。
* ({{phabT|76554}}) &lt;code&gt;….json&lt;/code&gt; と名付けられた利用者下位ページは、&lt;code&gt;….js&lt;/code&gt; や &lt;code&gt;….css&lt;/code&gt; ページと同様の方法で保護されるようになりました。そのため、そのページに環境設定オプションを安全に配置できます。
* ({{phabT|181651}}) ファイルページの情報ページでは、基本情報表にファイルの base-16 SHA1 ハッシュ値を表示するようになりました。
* ({{phabT|189785}}) {{ll|pingback|pingback}} 機能は毎月1回ハートビートを ping し、活動中のウィキの特定を試みます。
* ({{phabT|19099}}) 存在しないページにリンクするタブ（未作成の議論ページへのタブ等）は色分けされ、さらに状態を示すツールチップが付きました。

=== 1.31 において更新された言語 ===

MediaWiki は 350 以上の言語をサポートしています。多くのローカライゼーションは定期的に更新されています。以下では、Phabricator のレポートによる言語への変更、新しい言語および削除された言語のみが記載されています。

* ({{phabT|180052}}) ミランダ語（mwl）では、文法的性が付与された &lt;code&gt;NS_USER&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;NS_USER_TALK&lt;/code&gt; のサポートを開始しました。
* ({{phabT|182305}}) 新規言語サポート： ニュンガル語（nys）。
* ({{phabT|186359}}) 新規言語サポート：シベリアタタール語［cебертатар］（sty）。
* ({{phabT|186635}}) 新規言語サポート：ギニアクレオール語（gcr）。
* ({{phabT|186647}}) 新規言語サポート: [[:ja:クムク語|クムク語]] [къумукъ] (kum)。
* ({{phabT|187750}}) 新規言語サポート：Spanish formal address（es-formal）。
* ({{phabT|187824}}) 新規言語サポート：Hungarian formal address（hu-formal）。
* ({{phabT|189127}}) 新規言語サポート：ゴロンタロ語（gor）。

== MediaWiki 管理者向けのアップグレードの注意点 ==

=== PHP7 または HHVM が必要になりました ===

MediaWiki 1.31 は PHP 7.0.0 以降を必要とします。HHVM 3.18.5 以降もサポートしますが、長期間のサポートのため、一般に PHP 7.0.0 以降の使用が推奨されます。

=== データベースの変更 ===

1.31 には 1.30 からいくつかのデータベース変更があり、スキーマ更新をしなければ動作しません。PostgreSQL のユーザーの皆さんはバージョン 9.2以降をご利用ください。

==== Revision テーブル ====

リビジョンテーブルのようないくつかのとても大きなテーブルへの変更のため、スキーマ更新には非常に長い時間（中規模サイトで数分、大規模サイトで数時間）がかかる可能性があることに注意してください。更新前には常にデータベースをバックアップすることを忘れないでください！

==== Archive テーブル ====

MySQL、SQLite、あるいは MSSQL を利用していて、スキーマ変更の適用に update.php を使用しておらず、かつ手動での &lt;code&gt;migrateArchiveText.php&lt;/code&gt; の実行と &lt;code&gt;patch-drop-ar_text.sql&lt;/code&gt; の適用のためのダウンタイムを確保できない場合は、MediaWiki 1.31 への更新の前に、&lt;code&gt;archive&lt;/code&gt; テーブルの &lt;code&gt;ar_text&lt;/code&gt; および &lt;code&gt;ar_flags&lt;/code&gt; カラムに既定値を適用するか、それらのカラムが NULL を許可するように設定する必要があります。&lt;code&gt;maintenance/archives/patch-nullable-ar_text.sql&lt;/code&gt; は、MySQL でこれを行う方法を示します。

==== Actor テーブル ====

ログイン済みあるいはIPの「アクター」の識別が、新しい &lt;code&gt;actor&lt;/code&gt; テーブルに移されています。Revision や logging のようなテーブルの行は、各行に利用者 ID と利用者名/IP を格納するのではなく、アクター ID を参照します。

* これは現在 {{wg|ActorTableSchemaMigrationStage}} によって制御されています。ほとんどのウィキでは、すべての必要な拡張機能が更新され次第、これを &lt;code&gt;MIGRATION_NEW&lt;/code&gt; に設定し、&lt;code&gt;maintenance/migrateActors.php&lt;/code&gt; を実行することができます。
* データベース上の記録された操作の行にアクセスするほとんどのコードは、SQL クエリの構築に必要な情報を取得するために関連する &lt;code&gt;getQueryInfo()&lt;/code&gt; メソッドを使用するべきです。移行期間中は、アクター関連フィールドへのアクセスに必要となる機能フラグが付加された情報を取得するために、&lt;code&gt;ActorMigration&lt;/code&gt; クラスを使用することもできます。

詳細は {{ll|Actor migration}} ページを参照してください。

=== 環境設定の変更 ===
* {{wg|EnableAPI}} および {{wg|EnableWriteAPI}} は非推奨となり、将来のバージョンでは削除される予定です。API は現在安定しており、安全で、必須であると考えられています。
* 現在は既定値となっているため、{{wg|UsejQueryThree}} は削除されました。これは移行期間中の一時的な変数と説明されており、1.29 より廃止予定となっていました。
* {{wg|LogoHD}} が SVG 画像をサポートするように更新されています。これは {{wg|Logo}} を使用します。{{wg|Logo}} では PNG のようなフォールバック画像を指定することができます。
* ({{PhabT|44246}}) 利用者にページを巡回済みにする権限がない場合、{{wg|FilterLogTypes}} は '&lt;code&gt;patrol&lt;/code&gt;' を無視しないで処理するようになりました。
* 取り込まれた版または {{ll|Extension:CentralAuth|nsp=0}} のグローバルブロックを含むウィキでは、&lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:CleanupUsersWithNoId.php|maintenance/cleanupUsersWithNoId.php}}&lt;/code&gt; を実行する必要があります。
* 1.27 より廃止予定となっていた、構成設定 {{wg|ResourceLoaderMinifierStatementsOnOwnLine}} および {{wg|ResourceLoaderMinifierMaxLineLength}} が除去されました。
* ({{phabT|180921}}) {{wg|ReferrerPolicy}} は、リファラー ポリシー仕様の最新バージョンを使用していないブラウザー向けのフォールバックをサポートするようになりました。
* {{wg|FragmentMode}} が既定で &lt;code&gt;[ 'legacy', 'html5' ]&lt;/code&gt; に設定されるようになりました。これは人間が読めるセクション ID への移行の最初の段階で、後に既定のモードとなる '&lt;code&gt;html5&lt;/code&gt;' へと変わるでしょう。
* &lt;code&gt;CACHE_ACCEL&lt;/code&gt; は、現在 APC(u) または WinCache のみをサポートします。アップストリームが活発でないため、XCache のサポートは削除されました。また、PHP 7へ移行する計画もありません。
* 関連する構成オプション {{wg|AllowCategorizedRecentChanges}} を含む、古い&lt;code&gt;CategorizedRecentChanges&lt;/code&gt; 機能は削除されています。
* ({{phabT|188472}}) {{wg|ArticleCountMethod}}に対する '&lt;code&gt;comma&lt;/code&gt;' コード値のサポートはパフォーマンス上の理由から終了し、その設定のままインストールすると、値を '&lt;code&gt;any&lt;/code&gt;' に設定した状態で実行されます。
* ({{phabT|185753}}) MediaWikiでは利用者の入力を整えるため、これまで既定で無効だった&lt;code&gt;RemexHtml&lt;/code&gt;が有効になりました。HTML整形を完全に無効にするには、{{wg|TidyConfig}}を&lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt;に設定します。すでに廃止された昔のTidyを外部バイナリとして使うには、{{wg|TidyConfig}}を&lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt;に、かつ{{wg|UseTidy}}を&lt;code&gt;true&lt;/code&gt;に設定します。
* {{wg|LogAutopatrol}} の既定値が {{phpi|true}} ではなく {{phpi|false}} になりました。
* {{wg|ValidateAllHtml}} は削除され、無視されるようになります。
* 1.25 より非推奨となり無視されるようになっていた {{wg|ScriptExtension}} が除去されました。詳細は 1.25 のリリースノートを参照してください。
* {{wg|UseAjax}}はすでに廃止された連動するAJAXフレームワーク同様、非推奨になりました。いくつかの拡張機能ではこれを誤用してAJAX機能を有効にするかどうか判断しており、問題をさらに複雑にしていたからです。
* {{wg|DBmysql5}} は非推奨となり、将来のバージョンで除去されます。これは導入時より実験的とマークされてきた拡張機能でした。
* {{wg|DBmwschema}}の対象が全種のデータベースに拡大しました。旧版のMediaWikiではこれをインストール段階で〈mediawiki〉に設定し、データベースがPostgreSQLあるいはMSSQL以外の場合、更新時にエラーの原因になっていました。その場合はこの拡張機能をLocalSettings.phpの設定から削除してください。

== 1.31における操作APIの変更 ==
* ({{phabT|185058}}) &lt;code&gt;action=query&amp;list=tags&lt;/code&gt;における&lt;code&gt;tgprop&lt;/code&gt;に対する'&lt;code&gt;name&lt;/code&gt;'値は削除されました。出力になんら影響を与えず、名称はいずれにしても必ず返されたためです。
* &lt;code&gt;action=move&lt;/code&gt;に対するパラメータの'&lt;code&gt;watch&lt;/code&gt;'および'&lt;code&gt;unwatch&lt;/code&gt;'を削除。非推奨で、2010年に1.17以降は偶発的に機能しなくなりました。'&lt;code&gt;watchlist&lt;/code&gt;'を代用してください。

== 1.31 におけるその他の変更 ==
* Internet Explorer 10 に対するブラウザー サポートは、グレード A からグレード C に下げられました。
* Opera 12 以前に対するブラウザー サポートは完全に廃止されました。Opera 15 以上はグレード A が続いています。
* ストレージ層に複数コンテンツの更新機能を導入しました。&lt;https://mediawiki.org/wiki/Requests_for_comment/Multi-Content_Revisions&gt;を参照してください。
* &quot;&lt;code&gt;free&lt;/code&gt;&quot; CSS クラスは、ウィキテキスト中の角括弧で囲まれていない URL にのみ適用されるようになりました。角括弧を使用して書かれたリンクは、&quot;&lt;code&gt;free&lt;/code&gt;&quot; ではなく &quot;&lt;code&gt;text&lt;/code&gt;&quot; を得るようになります。
* {{phabricator|T157418}}: ウィキテキスト見出し、ウィキテキストリスト項目、ウィキテキスト表キャプション、ウィキテキスト表見出し、ウィキテキスト表セルから空白が取り除かれます。HTML 見出し、HTML リスト項目、HTML 表キャプション、HTML 表見出し、HTML 表セルはこの除去動作を行いません。

== 下位ページ ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.31|work=MediaWiki 1.31}}
{{subpages}}
[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>g8bgxw9dy6s2nlm6w7gia1j2m9q3bi3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Special pages/16/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>746924</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402383</id>
      <parentid>2661024</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T03:53:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="66" xml:space="preserve">「特別」の仮の $manual は他言語に翻訳可能です。</text>
      <sha1>68zr55snxtgri7efyxttrqfjspu2tmu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Extension registration/pt-br</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>748797</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402512</id>
      <parentid>5375688</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27130" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
'''Registro de extensão''' é o mecanismo que o MediaWiki usa para carregar [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|extensões]] e [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|peles]].
Você coloca dados de configuração em um arquivo chamado &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; no diretório raiz da sua extensão ou skin, e o MediaWiki usa isso para registrar extensões e peles.

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Migration for site administrators ==
&lt;/div&gt;

Antes MediaWiki 1.25, a configuração para extensões e skins foi feita em um arquivo PHP usando o nome da extensão ou da pele, por exemplo &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Isso pode ser convertido em:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This must be done before you load any extensions or skins from non-standard directory locations:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you keep your extensions in a location different from &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}}'', to specify the directory in which to find the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Looks in $wgExtensionDirectory for /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your skins are not in &lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override the poorly named {{wg|StyleDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of &lt;code&gt;wfLoadSkin()&lt;/code&gt;'', to specify the directory in which to find the skin.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Looks in $wgStyleDirectory for both /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json and /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Migration for extension developers ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since MW 1.30, namespace IDs defined in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; can be overwritten locally, by defining the respective constant in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; before loading the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consider for instance the following namespace declaration in a &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would per default cause the constant NS_FOO to be defined to have the value 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, this can be overwritten by defining the respective constant in LocalSettings.php:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would cause the &quot;Foo&quot; namespace to be registered with the ID 6688 instead of 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When overriding namespace IDs, don't forget that all talk namespaces must have odd IDs, and the ID of the talk namespace must always be the subject namespace's ID plus one.&lt;/span&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also the [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ extension registration wall of sadness (now superpowers)].&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; helps you migrating from PHP entry points to a JSON metadata file.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension supports older versions of MediaWiki, you should keep your PHP entry point &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; until you drop support for those older versions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sample command lines:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to uninstall your extension from &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; if you receive errors that constants or functions cannot be redefined.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should replace your PHP entry point file (FooBar.php) with something like the following happens to not break wikis during the upgrade process.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Or skins
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Retaining documentation ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PHP entry points usually have some documentation of configuration settings that is useful and shouldn't be lost.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately JSON doesn't support comments. It is recommended that you transfer configuration documentation to a &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; file in the extension's repository.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also document configuration on-wiki in your Extension:''MyExtension'' page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to include some documentation directly in the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration ignores any key in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; starting with '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' in the top-level structure, so you can put comments in those parts of the JSON file. For example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Version 1 of the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; format also allowed &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; in &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; section, but this is no longer recommended or supported in version 2. &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; field of the config variable should be used instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This should only be used for brief notes and comments.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Features ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are loading a large number of extensions, extension registration will provide a performance boost as long as you have [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (or APCu) installed. Extensions that are loaded together with &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (with plural -s) will be cached together.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Attributes ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A recurring problem is how to &quot;register&quot; something with another extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usually this meant that you had to load one extension before another.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, VisualEditor has a &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt; which allows extensions to add their modules.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, in VisualEditor's entry point it has:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if any extension appends to the array before VisualEditor is loaded, VE will wipe out its entry in this array.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some extensions depended upon a specific load order, others hacked around this with {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration solves this problem with &quot;attributes&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the Math extension, its &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; would have something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the attributes need to be defined in the separate section &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; node needs to be an object with the extension name as key and an object of attribute/value pairs as the value. Be aware that the key in the subobject must not contain the extension name!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When VisualEditor wants to access this attribute it uses:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Requirements (dependencies) ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration has a &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; section, which acts similar to [[Composer]]'s &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; section.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It allows an extension developer to specify several requirements for the extension, such as a specific MediaWiki version (or greater/less than) or another extension/skin.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to add a dependency on a MediaWiki version that is greater than 1.26.0, you can add the following code to &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The key of the &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; object is the name of the dependency (prior to MediaWiki 1.29.0 only &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; was supported), the value is a valid version constraint (the format has to match the one [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md used by composer]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In MediaWiki 1.29.0 and above you can also add dependencies on skins and other extensions like so:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The extensions and skins specified here must also use the extension registrations system described on this page for this to work.
* The string added to specify the extension or skin must be identical to the string specified in the &quot;name&quot; field of the respective &quot;extension.json&quot; or &quot;skin.json&quot; file.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For extensions using Wikimedia [[Special:MyLanguage/Continuous integration|continuous integration]], dependencies also need to be added to {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}&lt;/span&gt;
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Check if an extension is loaded without actually requiring it ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many extensions may provide features that work only if another extension is loaded too, without really needing this feature for the core extension function to work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To implement a standardized way of checking, if an extension is loaded or not (without the need of extra work in an extension that is a soft-dependency in another one), extension registration can be used. It implements an &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns a simple boolean, if the extension is loaded or not (the extension needs to be loaded with extension registration for this to work). Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since [[MediaWiki 1.32]] it's also possible to check if an extension is loaded and satisfies a given composer version constraint:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you would like to check if a specific version of an extension is loaded in earlier versions of MediaWiki, information like that can be extracted with the &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns credit information for all loaded extensions. Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Alternatively, if the extension B defines a special constant meant for this purpose during loading, it is possible to check, if it is defined:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A more brittle way, that should be avoided is to check if a specific class of extension B exists or not, e.g. using this code:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This might break if the extension exists in the file system but is not loaded, e.g. if composer was used for autoloading.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the class was renamed or ceases to exist (e.g. because it is not package public) this will also break.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In general it is preferred to share code via composer components instead of extensions. If the classes of an extension only need to exist, but the extension does not need to be configured nor loaded, for what you want to do, that is a strong indicator that that code should be split off into a composer component you should depend on instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Configs (Your extension/skins settings) ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; assumes that your config settings start with a &quot;wg&quot; prefix.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If that's not the case, you can override the prefix by using a special key:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
That would use a prefix of &quot;eg&quot;, and set the global variable &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; to true.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the configuration section of extension registration provides a lot more features and allows you to describe your configuration options with much more detail. Instead of having a single key -&gt; value store for your configuration options, you can also add the following information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The general structure of the &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; changes slightly to the following, more object-oriented version:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Value ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the configuration moved to this place.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the only required key for a configuration object.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Path ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The boolean value of the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; key identifies, if the value of the configuration option should be interpreted as a filesystem path, relative to the extension directory root.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g., if the value of the configuration is &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; and the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; is true, the actual value will be &lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Description ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; key for a configuration option can hold a non-localized string, which can be used to explain the configuration option to other developers or the users (system administrators) of your extension.&lt;/span&gt;
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the description key is usually not exposed to the frontend of the wiki, however, take a look to the outlook for more information how this feature could be used in the future!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There's also the possibility to add a message key of MediaWiki's internal localisation system as a description (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;), which, in the future, will be used to expose the description in the frontend of the MediaWiki installation.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== public / private ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option is a boolean, which defaults to false, which means, that the configuration option and the value is marked as &quot;private&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This value is not used anywhere at the moment, take a look to the outlook to find out more about this option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Outlook ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{tracked|T155155}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The mentioned changes above are also preparation steps for an improved configuration management in MediaWiki. The above changes allow us to, e.g., expose the configuration options of extensions in the MediaWiki UI. For this, the localised description message (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) and the indication, if the configuration option should be exposed or not (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) is needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Unit tests auto-discovery ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki allows any extension to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|register phpunit tests]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without extension registration, you would need to register a hook handler for the {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}} hook, which would look something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(as described on the manual page). However, this code looks the same for a lot of extensions, so you could call it unnecessary code duplication.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension uses extension registration and your phpunit tests are located in the &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt; subdirectory of your extension, the phpunit wrapper of MediaWiki will autodiscover the unit tests with the help of extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Therefore, you don't need to register the hook anymore and you don't need to specify, that your unit tests are saved in the default directory.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Customizing registration ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Also composer.json ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If an extension or skin has library dependencies, it may have a &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well, see {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Use the &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt; field to make MediaWiki use Composer's autoloading when appropriate.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some metadata fields overlap between &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (discussed in {{task|T89456}}), including :
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code stewardship ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Report bugs against the [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]] project.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Old versions of [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (prior to May 2015) and {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} describe the old approach of declaring extension information in PHP code and variables
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Known limitations&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Overview of architecture&lt;/span&gt;}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; is the schema for &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (and skin.json).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] about implementing extension registration&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[toollabs:extreg-wos|Extension registration wall of superpowers!]] — summary of which extensions are still to be converted.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{task|T98668}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking ticket for converting all extensions and skins on Git to use extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== References ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>gs2jwfdz218ezzk2lfqepx4ezbnvgsy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Page Previews/31/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>749729</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402134</id>
      <parentid>2679306</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:21:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="59" xml:space="preserve">Leia [[$1|os resultados completos e análise deste teste]].</text>
      <sha1>albb7ch8gxt59uchhfiragottvpunh5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Page Previews/35/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>749730</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402116</id>
      <parentid>2679308</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:16:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="63" xml:space="preserve">Leia [[$1|os resultados completos e a análise desses testes]].</text>
      <sha1>66btdkxxxapva2mqiswogg4v7h8bwkk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Page Previews/38/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>749736</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402142</id>
      <parentid>2679322</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:23:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16" xml:space="preserve">== [[$1|FAQ]] ==</text>
      <sha1>2sohy8zt3rshi7vj73tkv1uae2k1ah2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:$wgCategoryCollation/es</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>749877</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402376</id>
      <parentid>5047509</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:55:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9209" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{SettingSummary
|name=CategoryCollation
|version_min=1.17.0
|rev_introduced=72308
|section=Category
|range=(cadena)
|default=&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; inline&gt;'uppercase'&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|summary=Determinación del sistema de ordenación de elementos en las categorías
}}
== Detalles ==

El ajuste determina qué algoritmo de [[w:Collation|ordenación]] debería utilizarse para ordenar las listas en las categorías.&lt;ref name=&quot;collation&quot;&gt;''Ordenación'' se refiere a cómo se ordenan los datos de acuerdo con su conjunto de caracteres, aplicando criterios de ordenación definidos (es decir, ordenación alfabética o inversa, dependiente o no de mayúsculas y minúsculas, etc.)&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
As an example, to use the Spanish collation, you'd write &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgCategoryCollation = 'uca-es';&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} and then run {{ll|Manual:updateCollation.php|updateCollation.php}} for your change to take effect.
&lt;/div&gt;

Actualmente tiene soporte para:

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Collation algorithm&lt;/span&gt;
! Versión MW
! class=unsortable | Descripción
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;uppercase&lt;/code&gt;
| predeterminado
| pasa todo a mayúsculas y luego ordena por el valor binario de la cadena almacenada en UTF-8. En esencia, ordenación insensible a mayúsculas por [[:es:Punto de código|punto de código]].
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;numeric&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.28+
| Igual que &lt;code&gt;uppercase&lt;/code&gt;, pero con [[#Numeric sorting|ordenación numérica]].
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;identity&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.18+
| ordenación por valor binario de la cadena tal como se almacena en UTF-8 (sin conversión a mayúsculas). En esencia, ordenación por [[:es:Punto de código|punto de código]].
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;uca-default&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.17+
| [[w:Unicode collation algorithm|Algoritmo de ordenación de Unicode]] – complejo, aunque mejor adaptable a entornos multilingües para la ordenación en categorías.
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;uca-default-u-kn&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.28+
| &lt;code&gt;uca-default&lt;/code&gt; con ordenación numérica.
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;uca-&lt;langcode&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.21+
| &lt;code&gt;uca-default&lt;/code&gt; con ajustes específicos según el idioma. Véase [[#Language-specific collations|abajo]].
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;uca-&lt;langcode&gt;-u-kn&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.28+
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;uca-&lt;langcode&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; con ordenación numérica.
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;xx-uca-ckb&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.23+
| {{#language:ckb|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;xx-uca-et&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.24-1.31 {{removed-inline|1.32}}
| Estonio, pero considerando las letras W y V como distintas.
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;xx-uca-fa&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.30-1.31 {{removed-inline|1.32}}
| {{#language:fa|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;uppercase-ab&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.31+
| {{#language:ab|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;uppercase-ba&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.30+
| {{#language:ba|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;uppercase-se&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.31 {{removed-inline|1.32}}
| {{#language:se|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
|}

Desde MediaWiki 1.18, las extensiones pueden añadir nuevos métodos de ordenación mediante {{ll|manual:Hooks/Collation::factory|Collation::factory}}.

El valor también se almacena en la tabla categorylinks («enlaces de categorías») para determinar qué filas se deben actualizar cuando se cambie el algoritmo de ordenación.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Setup instructions ==
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Después de cambiar esta opción, debes ejecutar {{ll|Manual:updateCollation.php|updateCollation.php}} para recalcular las claves de ordenación de todas las páginas. De lo contrario, las categorías se ordenarán de forma inconsistente.
* Actualizar métodos de ordenación es lento y puede llevar varias horas en wikis grandes.
* Los métodos de ordenación &lt;code&gt;uca-default&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;uca-xx&lt;/code&gt; requieren la [https://php.net/book.intl extensión intl de PHP].
* Si utilizas Varnish, Squid o caché de archivo, puede que tengas que {{ll|purge}} las páginas de categorías después de ejecutar updateCollation.php para ver los resultados.
* Si actualizas o recompilas tu versión de PHP, debes ejecutar updateCollation.php --force.
}}

{{anchor|Language-specific collations}}
== Ordenaciones específicas del idioma ==
MediaWiki también tiene soporte para muchos algoritmos de ordenación diseñados para idiomas específicos. 
Están basados en [[w:Unicode collation algorithm|algoritmo de ordenación de Unicode]] (UCA) &lt;code&gt;uca-default&lt;/code&gt; y tienen los mismos requisitos; están nombrados como &lt;code&gt;uca-&amp;lt;langcode&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, donde &amp;lt;langcode&gt; es uno de los siguientes códigos de idioma:

 af, am, ar, as, ast, az, be, be-tarask, bg, bn, bn@collation=traditional, bo, br, bs, bs-Cyrl, ca, chr, co, cs, cy, da, de, de-AT@collation=phonebook, dsb, ee, el, en, eo, es, et, eu, fa, fi, fil, fo, fr, fr-CA, fur, fy, ga, gd, gl, gu, ha, haw, he, hi, hr, hsb, hu, hy, id, ig, is, it, ka, kk, kl, km, kn, kok, ku, ky, la, lb, lkt, ln, lo, lt, lv, mk, ml, mn, mo, mr, ms, mt, nb, ne, nl, nn, no, oc, om, or, pa, pl, pt, rm, ro, ru, rup, sco, se, si, sk, sl, smn, sq, sr, sr-Latn, sv, sv@collation=standard, sw, ta, te, th, tk, tl, to, tr, tt, uk, uz, vi, vo, yi, yo, zu

Por ejemplo, para usar un método de ordenación adaptado al español, se pondría &lt;code&gt;uca-es&lt;/code&gt;.

Al usar estos métodos de ordenación, se ordenarán los elementos de la forma correcta y se utilizarán los encabezados correctos para las iniciales de los títulos de los artículos.
Las versiones anteriores de MediaWiki pueden no soportar todos estos códigos de idioma.

=== Conseguir que se añadan nuevos métodos de ordenación ===

Conseguir soporte para un nuevo idioma conlleva dos partes:

* Que tenga soporte de la biblioteca [[:es:ICU|componentes internacionales para Unicode]] (la lista de códigos de idioma soportados está disponible en [https://ssl.icu-project.org/trac/browser/icu/tags/latest/source/data/coll/colfiles.mk]). Nótese, sin embargo, que los servidores de producción de Wikimedia no utilizan la última versión de la biblioteca ICU. A fecha de 2016, utilizan la versión 52.1, que incluye un [[phab:P4286|conjunto significativamente menor de idiomas]].
* Que además tenga soporte del propio MediaWiki (esto requiere, básicamente, enumerar los caracteres o grupos de caracteres adicionales considerados como letras propias del idioma dado, además del alfabeto básico). La lista siempre actualizada de idiomas con soporte de MediaWiki está disponible en {{git file|file=includes/collation/IcuCollation.php|line=93}}.

También puede darse el caso de que la ordenación predeterminada ICU ('uca-default') ordene los títulos correctamente, pero no separe correctamente las letras – se puede usar para el primer paso en ese caso. 
A veces la ordenación de letras de otro idioma puede encajar con el tuyo, si están relacionados. Se puede utilizar una ordenación personalizada en ese caso (por ejemplo, hay una para el kurdo soraní / kurdo central ('ckb') llamada $ww {{git file|file=includes/collation/Collation.php|line=63}}).

{{anchor|Numeric sorting}}
== Ordenación numérica ==
[[File:Numeric Sorting Comparison.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|Comparación entre la ordenación regular (arriba) y la ordenación numérica (abajo)]]
Con la ordenación numérica, las páginas se ordenarán así: 1, 2, 9, 10, 11, 20, 21, 99, 100. Con la ordenación regular (no numérica), las páginas se ordenarán así: 1, 10, 100, 11, 2, 20, 21, 9, 99.
Si se usa la ordenación numérica, todas las páginas que empiecen por un número se agruparán bajo una sola cabecera: «0–9».
Si se usa la ordenación regular, las páginas que empiecen por un número se ordenarán bajo distintas cabeceras según el primer dígito de ese número: «0», «1», «2», etc.
Para más información sobre la ordenación numérica, consúltese la [http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr10/#Customization Norma Técnica n.º 10 de Unicode].
Para hacer pruebas de ordenación numérica, véase la [http://demo.icu-project.org/icu-bin/collation.html Demo de Ordenación ICU].
Nótese que la ordenación numérica solo funciona para secuencias enteramente formadas por dígitos.
Los dígitos separados por comas, puntos o espacios se consideran como números diferentes.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;release notes about this feature from MediaWiki 1.17.&lt;/span&gt;

== Enlaces externos ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://demo.icu-project.org/icu-bin/collation.html ICU Collation Demo]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== References ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Reflist}}</text>
      <sha1>qz71wk2jqsvi5uet4e8x94dq6znboh7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:$wgCategoryCollation/21/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>749940</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402375</id>
      <parentid>2679941</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:55:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="171" xml:space="preserve">* Si utilizas Varnish, Squid o caché de archivo, puede que tengas que $purge las páginas de categorías después de ejecutar updateCollation.php para ver los resultados.</text>
      <sha1>k2f6mi8i52yas2vl4h8gngbw2gxok6g</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:How to become a MediaWiki hacker/96/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>753560</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402373</id>
      <parentid>2692734</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:54:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="116" xml:space="preserve">Também suporta outros Gestores de Base de Dados (DBMSes), tal como [[$postgresql|PostgreSQL]] e [[$sqlite|SQLite]].</text>
      <sha1>r9w7lwq2e3lr5xg7pazqtff8roh47mm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:MediaWiki feature list/124/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>753809</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402366</id>
      <parentid>2693502</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:46:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="144" xml:space="preserve">**[[$1|MediaWiki: namespace]] contém todos os textos da interface do usuário, para que possam ser editados como qualquer outra página do wiki</text>
      <sha1>4d4nykqbotam39wprqzz1l0dsg1jgaq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/cs</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>754543</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402808</id>
      <parentid>5011138</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:16:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6452" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
Následující termíny jsou relevantní (mají vztah k danému předmětu) pro projekt Edit Review Improvements (ERI). 
Výrazy kurzívou jsou položky tohoto slovníku.

== Prvky a zvláštní termíny ERI ==
;Vylepšení revize úprav
:''Používající zkratku '''ERI'''''
:[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements|Vylepšení revize úprav]] (ERI) je projekt [[Collaboration|týmu spolupracovníků]]. Jeho cílem je omezit negativní dopady, které mohou mít současné procesy kontroly a editace na nové editory na wiki. Cílem je také zlepšování procesů úprav a revizí celkově.
;Nové filtry pro kontrolu úprav
:''&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pod hlavičkou: '''[[Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes|Filtry pro Nedávné změny]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;''
:V jednom z prvních vydání projektu &quot;Vylepšení revize úprav&quot; je sada vylepšení na speciální stránce &quot;Nedávné změny&quot;, která má pomoci recenzentům obecně lépe zacílit jejich úsilí a být efektivnější. Tato vylepšení mají také potenciál zejména pro nové přispěvatele. 
;Kontrola streamu
:[[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|Kontrola streamu]] je strojově čitelný zdroj určený k použití v různých nástrojích pro kontrolu úprav. Stejně jako [[RCStream|RCStream]] vysílá poslední změny z MediaWiki na ostatní wiki. K informacím v RCStream, ReviewStream aktuálně přidává další data určená ke zlepšení procesu editace a kontroly.
;Vyhledávací lišta filtru
:Část ''Vylepšení stránky posledních změn'' (Recent Changes Page Improvements'). Uživatelé kliknou na lištu vyhledávání filtrů a zahájí proces filtrování posledních změn, buď kliknutím na výběr filtrů z ''Rozevíracího panelu filtru'' (Dropdown Filter Panel) (viz níže) nebo zadáním jejich jmen.
;Rozevírací panel filtru
:Část ''Vylepšení stránky posledních změn'' (Recent Changes Page Improvements). Panel filtru je rozbalovací nabídkou, která zobrazuje seznam možností filtrování.
;Aktivní oblast zobrazení filtru
:Část ''Vylepšení stránky posledních změn'' (Recent Changes Page Improvements). Aktivní oblast zobrazení filtru je navržena tak, aby uživatelům umožnila rychlé přečtení jejich aktuálního nastavení filtru a zvýraznění.
;Nováčci (newcomers)
:Nová třída uživatelů definovaná pro ERI označující registrované editory, kteří jsou velmi noví, mají méně než deset úprav a čtyři dny aktivity. Byla vytvořena proto, že [[Edit Review Improvements#Related documents|výzkum ukazuje]], že tito editoři jsou zvláště náchylní k odmítnutí. Je to také název filtru v projektech ERI.
;Začátečníci (learners)
:Termín definovaný pro ERI označující registrované editory, kteří mají více dní aktivity a úpravy než ''&quot;noví uživatelé&quot;'', ale méně než ''&quot;zkušení uživatelé&quot;''. Je to také název filtru v projektech ERI. Na anglické Wikipedii tato kategorie odpovídá Autoconfirmed.
;Zkušení uživatelé (experienced users)
:Termín definovaný pro ERI označující registrované editory, kteří mají více než 30 dnů aktivity a 500 úprav. Také název filtru v projektech ERI. Na anglické Wikipedii tato kategorie odpovídá Extended Confirmed.

== Obecné a wiki pojmy relevantní pro ERI ==
;Umělá inteligence
:ERI používá prediktivní filtry řízené programem umělé inteligence (AI) [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES]. Hovorově se termín [[:en:Artificial_intelligence|umělá inteligence]] používá, když stroj napodobuje kognitivní funkce, které lidé spojují s jiným lidským myšlením, jako je zpracování přirozeného jazyka, řešení problémů nebo učení. AI je široký pojem, který je úzce spojen s konkrétnějším konceptem strojového učení.
;Strojové učení
:[[:en:Machine_learning|Strojové učení]] je podpole ''umělé inteligence'', které se snaží dát počítačům možnost naučit se úkoly, na které nebyly konkrétně naprogramovány. ERI používá prediktivní filtry řízené programem strojového učení [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES].
;Přesnost
:Nástroje ERI nabízejí prediktivní filtry AI na různých úrovních &quot;přesnosti&quot;. V této souvislosti se přesnost vztahuje na procento výsledků vyhledávání, které filtr vrátí a které správně identifikují vlastnost, na kterou je filtr cílen. Jinými slovy, čím přesnější je filtr, tím méně falešně pozitivních výsledků vytváří. (V poli AI je správný technický výraz pro tento případ &quot;[[:cs:Precision_and_recall|přesnost]]&quot;.)
;Výběr
:''Označuje se také jako '''stream'''''
:Počítačový zdroj je datový formát používaný k poskytování často aktualizovaného obsahu uživatelům. V ERI je [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|kontrola streamu]] zdroj, který vysílá data o nedávných změnách v anti-vandalismu a editaci-revizních programů.
;Dobrá víra
:Projekty ERI nabízejí filtry User Intent, které předpovídají, zda byla úprava provedena v dobré víře. V tomto smyslu se pojem týká toho, zda měl uživatel v úmyslu přispět k wiki nebo ji poškodit. Klíčovým cílem ERI je umožnit recenzentům vyhledávat a pomáhat redaktorům - zejména ''nováčkům'' — snažícím se přispívat v dobré víře, ale kterým mohou chybět dovednosti nebo znalosti, aby tak úspěšně učinili. (Filtry uživatelského záměru ERI jsou řízeny programem strojového učení ORES, který zahrnuje [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team|průzkum dobré víry]].)
;Poškození
:Projekty ERI nabízejí filtry Kvalita příspěvků (contribution quality), které předpovídají, zda úpravy wiki vylepšují nebo ji poškozují. V tomto smyslu je &quot;poškození&quot; obecný pojem, který zahrnuje vandalismus i neúmyslné chyby formátování, stylu, skutečnosti atd. Klíčovým cílem ERI je umožnit recenzentům najít a pomoci editorům — zejména ''nováčkům'' — kteří se snaží přispívat v dobré víře, ale jejichž nedostatek dovedností nebo znalostí je vede k neúmyslnému poškození wiki. (Filtry uživatelského záměru ERI jsou řízeny programem strojového učení ORES, který zahrnuje test &quot;[[m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models|poškození]]&quot;.)

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>3h5tw6flm36wyk5sciagqb9v1zigowm</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402819</id>
      <parentid>5402808</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:19:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6431" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
Následující termíny jsou relevantní (mají vztah k danému předmětu) pro projekt Edit Review Improvements (ERI). 
Výrazy kurzívou jsou položky tohoto slovníku.

== Prvky a zvláštní termíny ERI ==
;Vylepšení revize úprav
:''Používající zkratku '''ERI'''''
:[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements|Vylepšení revize úprav]] (ERI) je projekt [[Collaboration|týmu spolupracovníků]]. Jeho cílem je omezit negativní dopady, které mohou mít současné procesy kontroly a editace na nové editory na wiki. Cílem je také zlepšování procesů úprav a revizí celkově.
;Nové filtry pro kontrolu úprav
:''Pod hlavičkou: '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes|Filtry pro Nedávné změny]]'''.''
:V jednom z prvních vydání projektu &quot;Vylepšení revize úprav&quot; je sada vylepšení na speciální stránce &quot;Nedávné změny&quot;, která má pomoci recenzentům obecně lépe zacílit jejich úsilí a být efektivnější. Tato vylepšení mají také potenciál zejména pro nové přispěvatele. 
;Kontrola streamu
:[[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|Kontrola streamu]] je strojově čitelný zdroj určený k použití v různých nástrojích pro kontrolu úprav. Stejně jako [[RCStream|RCStream]] vysílá poslední změny z MediaWiki na ostatní wiki. K informacím v RCStream, ReviewStream aktuálně přidává další data určená ke zlepšení procesu editace a kontroly.
;Vyhledávací lišta filtru
:Část ''Vylepšení stránky posledních změn'' (Recent Changes Page Improvements'). Uživatelé kliknou na lištu vyhledávání filtrů a zahájí proces filtrování posledních změn, buď kliknutím na výběr filtrů z ''Rozevíracího panelu filtru'' (Dropdown Filter Panel) (viz níže) nebo zadáním jejich jmen.
;Rozevírací panel filtru
:Část ''Vylepšení stránky posledních změn'' (Recent Changes Page Improvements). Panel filtru je rozbalovací nabídkou, která zobrazuje seznam možností filtrování.
;Aktivní oblast zobrazení filtru
:Část ''Vylepšení stránky posledních změn'' (Recent Changes Page Improvements). Aktivní oblast zobrazení filtru je navržena tak, aby uživatelům umožnila rychlé přečtení jejich aktuálního nastavení filtru a zvýraznění.
;Nováčci (newcomers)
:Nová třída uživatelů definovaná pro ERI označující registrované editory, kteří jsou velmi noví, mají méně než deset úprav a čtyři dny aktivity. Byla vytvořena proto, že [[Edit Review Improvements#Related documents|výzkum ukazuje]], že tito editoři jsou zvláště náchylní k odmítnutí. Je to také název filtru v projektech ERI.
;Začátečníci (learners)
:Termín definovaný pro ERI označující registrované editory, kteří mají více dní aktivity a úpravy než ''&quot;noví uživatelé&quot;'', ale méně než ''&quot;zkušení uživatelé&quot;''. Je to také název filtru v projektech ERI. Na anglické Wikipedii tato kategorie odpovídá Autoconfirmed.
;Zkušení uživatelé (experienced users)
:Termín definovaný pro ERI označující registrované editory, kteří mají více než 30 dnů aktivity a 500 úprav. Také název filtru v projektech ERI. Na anglické Wikipedii tato kategorie odpovídá Extended Confirmed.

== Obecné a wiki pojmy relevantní pro ERI ==
;Umělá inteligence
:ERI používá prediktivní filtry řízené programem umělé inteligence (AI) [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES]. Hovorově se termín [[:en:Artificial_intelligence|umělá inteligence]] používá, když stroj napodobuje kognitivní funkce, které lidé spojují s jiným lidským myšlením, jako je zpracování přirozeného jazyka, řešení problémů nebo učení. AI je široký pojem, který je úzce spojen s konkrétnějším konceptem strojového učení.
;Strojové učení
:[[:en:Machine_learning|Strojové učení]] je podpole ''umělé inteligence'', které se snaží dát počítačům možnost naučit se úkoly, na které nebyly konkrétně naprogramovány. ERI používá prediktivní filtry řízené programem strojového učení [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES].
;Přesnost
:Nástroje ERI nabízejí prediktivní filtry AI na různých úrovních &quot;přesnosti&quot;. V této souvislosti se přesnost vztahuje na procento výsledků vyhledávání, které filtr vrátí a které správně identifikují vlastnost, na kterou je filtr cílen. Jinými slovy, čím přesnější je filtr, tím méně falešně pozitivních výsledků vytváří. (V poli AI je správný technický výraz pro tento případ &quot;[[:cs:Precision_and_recall|přesnost]]&quot;.)
;Výběr
:''Označuje se také jako '''stream'''''
:Počítačový zdroj je datový formát používaný k poskytování často aktualizovaného obsahu uživatelům. V ERI je [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|kontrola streamu]] zdroj, který vysílá data o nedávných změnách v anti-vandalismu a editaci-revizních programů.
;Dobrá víra
:Projekty ERI nabízejí filtry User Intent, které předpovídají, zda byla úprava provedena v dobré víře. V tomto smyslu se pojem týká toho, zda měl uživatel v úmyslu přispět k wiki nebo ji poškodit. Klíčovým cílem ERI je umožnit recenzentům vyhledávat a pomáhat redaktorům - zejména ''nováčkům'' — snažícím se přispívat v dobré víře, ale kterým mohou chybět dovednosti nebo znalosti, aby tak úspěšně učinili. (Filtry uživatelského záměru ERI jsou řízeny programem strojového učení ORES, který zahrnuje [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team|průzkum dobré víry]].)
;Poškození
:Projekty ERI nabízejí filtry Kvalita příspěvků (contribution quality), které předpovídají, zda úpravy wiki vylepšují nebo ji poškozují. V tomto smyslu je &quot;poškození&quot; obecný pojem, který zahrnuje vandalismus i neúmyslné chyby formátování, stylu, skutečnosti atd. Klíčovým cílem ERI je umožnit recenzentům najít a pomoci editorům — zejména ''nováčkům'' — kteří se snaží přispívat v dobré víře, ale jejichž nedostatek dovedností nebo znalostí je vede k neúmyslnému poškození wiki. (Filtry uživatelského záměru ERI jsou řízeny programem strojového učení ORES, který zahrnuje test &quot;[[m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models|poškození]]&quot;.)

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>f5xcb72o813a5mbaof61h8jtogop76a</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/2/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>756230</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402364</id>
      <parentid>2700604</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:44:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="228" xml:space="preserve">Os [[$1|skins]] Monobook e Vetor colocam a barra de navegação acima à esquerda (top-right for right-to-left languages) junto à barra de busca e à caixa de ferramentas, mas a localização pode ser diferente em outros skins.</text>
      <sha1>ict7cv336ubkgu22k0dldxsmfx7xy6v</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/4/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>756232</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402346</id>
      <parentid>2700608</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:36:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="188" xml:space="preserve">Para personalizar a $1 numa wiki, você primeiro precisa estar registado com um utente que tenha a permissão ''editinterface'' - Isto está habilitado por defeito para os administradores.</text>
      <sha1>fhve0br8n6gq8oon8s6n7onuw4boqwi</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/5/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>756233</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402350</id>
      <parentid>2700610</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:36:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="285" xml:space="preserve">Depois, use um enlace a uma página em sua wiki, mas substitua o título de sua página wiki (e.g. Main_Page) na URL/varra de direcções com $1 e carregue essa página - Você deveria ver agora o conteúdo da varra lateral. (Você pode usar a sintaxe $2 se você utiliza URLs longas.)</text>
      <sha1>rklo8tfq5h7mww7xk8d671nd781i2kn</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/11/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>756237</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402352</id>
      <parentid>2700618</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:37:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="97" xml:space="preserve">A barra de navegação pode estar dividida em secções, a cada uma com seu próprio encabeçado.</text>
      <sha1>mpzzcqz1bdxhbztuexhdptk24kkb4y4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/15/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>756241</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402340</id>
      <parentid>2700628</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:32:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11" xml:space="preserve">; objectivo</text>
      <sha1>53b2lv92nv4o0y4mpx2uwcc333c9y1x</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/16/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>756242</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402336</id>
      <parentid>2700630</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:29:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="605" xml:space="preserve">:# Chamar o texto objectivo.
:#  Se há um existente ou uma mensagem de interface por defeito com esse nome, use o conteúdo dessa mensagem em vez do texto objectivo.
:# Se a saída do passo anterior é uma URL valida (começando com http:// ou outro [[$1|URL protocol]]), o enlace apontará a essa URL.
:# se não, tratar-se-á como o enlace objectivo de um wikilink (enlaçando a esse nome de página ou interwiki). 
:# Em caso que termine enlaçando a '-', toda a entrada é removida da varra lateral (isso é útil para remover uma entrada em todas as linguagens ao mudar a mensagem que tem o enlace).</text>
      <sha1>s72z8599irfiuck7ubajimyf078qlzn</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/100/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>756243</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402356</id>
      <parentid>2700634</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:37:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="39" xml:space="preserve">usa o texto de $1 (o qual contém &quot;$2&quot;)</text>
      <sha1>43rb8zf0y0a5sp2ugee1s4h2kdvyf6p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Good first bugs/hu</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>756417</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402750</id>
      <parentid>5344412</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:29:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13481" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page provides a list of [[w:Software bug|software bugs]] and small missing features that have been identified as a good way to get involved with an existing Wikimedia project ([[Special:MyLanguage/Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|not only MediaWiki core and its extensions]]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is one way to start getting familiar with the code in Wikimedia projects.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that the tasks linked below do not have assigned mentors. You will be mostly &quot;on your own&quot;. We recommend to work on software projects with mentors: [[Special:MyLanguage/New Developers|Check out the list of software projects that we recommend]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No matter which software project you work on, you ''must'' have read the [[Special:MyLanguage/New Developers#communication|Communication tips]] section to understand workflow and communication expectations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you decide to work on MediaWiki core or MediaWiki extensions, you ''must'' have read {{ll|How to become a MediaWiki hacker}} to understand the infrastructure and workflow.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;&gt;
[[phab:maniphest/query/hJPlqwIq3VqY/#R|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-ui-button mw-ui-progressive mw-ui-big&quot; style=&quot;font-size: 1.5em;&quot; title=&quot;&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Pick from the latest tasks&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Potential tasks to work on ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;section begin=bugs/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following sections describe a few example areas in which you can contribute, but you are not limited to these areas!
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the software project uses Wikimedia Phabricator, the upper right corner of a task shows the project that the problem is located in.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This provides you a hint about the Git repository that the code is located in, and about the development team which you could contact if you want to discuss it in a &quot;broader&quot; way (as comments in bug reports should preferably refer to the specific problem described in the report only).
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki core and extensions&lt;/span&gt; ==

{{ContentGrid
|content =

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikidata&lt;/span&gt;
|content = 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Wikidata}} is a centralized knowledge base for structured data, such as interwiki references and statistical information.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Ask your general development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/wikidata-l?language={{pagelang}} Wikidata mailing list], the [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC|#wikidata IRC channel]] and on the [[wikidata:Wikidata:Contact the development team|wiki]].&lt;/span&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = feTFXRzwJufz
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;
|content = 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[VisualEditor|VisualEditor]] is [[w:MediaWiki|MediaWiki]]'s [[WYSIWYG editor|WYSIWYG editor]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Ask your general VisualEditor development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/wikitech-l?language=en wikitech mailing list] and the [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC|#mediawiki-visualeditor IRC channel]].&lt;/span&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = 1jIQVKiF4Cuv
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Discovery / Search&lt;/span&gt;
|content = 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Wikimedia Search Platform}} team builds the path of anonymous discovery to a trusted and relevant source of knowledge.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Ask your general development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/discovery?language=en Discovery mailing list] and on the [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC|#wikimedia-discovery IRC channel]].&lt;/span&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = x8ChCXRefnjb
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Skins&lt;/span&gt;
|content = 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:Skins|nsp=0}} allow users to customize the look and feel of MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Basic knowledge of [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|CSS]] and PHP is helpful.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the project page in Phabricator for more information on each skin and contact information.&lt;/span&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = Nr66n3sZzhZM
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Growth&lt;/span&gt;
|content = 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[Special:MyLanguage/Collaboration|Growth team]] mainly works on {{ll|Notifications}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Edit_Review_Improvements/New_filters_for_edit_review|New filters for edit review]] and [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|Structured Discussions]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Ask questions on the [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC|#wikimedia-collaboration IRC channel]].
&lt;/div&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = chrdRB7Xeupd
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki core&lt;/span&gt;
|content = 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[w:MediaWiki|MediaWiki]] is the core software which provides basic wiki functionality.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is complex, written in PHP, and some areas might not have clear maintainership.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Ask your general development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/wikitech-l?language=en wikitech mailing list] and the [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC|#wikimedia-dev and #mediawiki IRC channels]].&lt;/span&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = 9otR6me9VKZa
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Semantic MediaWiki&lt;/span&gt;
|content = 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Semantic MediaWiki is one of the biggest and most popular MediaWiki extensions.&lt;/span&gt;

→ [https://github.com/SemanticMediaWiki/SemanticMediaWiki/issues?q=is%3Aissue+is%3Aopen+label%3Anewcomer '''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Potential tasks for new contributors&lt;/span&gt;''']
}}

}}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Standalone projects&lt;/span&gt; ==

{{ContentGrid
|content =

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = Pywikibot
|content = 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot]] is a Python-based framework to write bots for [[w:MediaWiki|MediaWiki]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Ask your general development questions on the [[mail:pywikibot|Pywikibot mailing list]] and the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Pywikibot/Communication#IRC|#pywikibot IRC channel]].
&lt;/div&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = yuAX0ibD.dMx
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mobile Apps&lt;/span&gt;
|content = 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are numerous applications for mobile devices (Android, iOS) to access Wikimedia wikis.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For Wikipedia:
[[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Team/Wikipedia Android app hacking|Read the general development information]] and ask your questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mobile-l?language=en Mobile mailing list] and the [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC|#wikimedia-mobile IRC channel]].
&lt;/div&gt;

→ '''[[phab:maniphest/query/ACz_7mctc8DE/#R|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Potential tasks for new contributors:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Android Wikipedia application&lt;/span&gt;]]'''

→ '''[[phab:maniphest/query/ghNR2Itm3BS./#R|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Potential tasks for new contributors:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;iOS Wikipedia application&lt;/span&gt;]]'''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For Commons:&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[https://github.com/commons-app/apps-android-commons/#documentation Read the general development information] and ask your questions on the [https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/commons-app-android Commons App mailing list].&lt;/span&gt;

→ '''[https://github.com/commons-app/apps-android-commons/labels/beginner%20friendly &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Potential tasks for new contributors:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Android Commons application&lt;/span&gt;]'''
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Huggle&lt;/span&gt;
|content =
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[meta:Special:MyLanguage/Huggle|Huggle]] is a desktop application for dealing with vandalism on Wikimedia projects, written in C++ and [[:en:QT (software)|QT]].
&lt;/div&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = dFY64hUU16qu
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Data Engineering&lt;/span&gt;
|content =
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Data Engineering}} team empowers and supports data-informed decision making in Wikimedia.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Ask your general development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/analytics?language=en Analytics mailing list].&lt;/span&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = 9xR.Pps7pivZ
}}

}}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Cross-project areas&lt;/span&gt; ==

{{ContentGrid
|content =

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Documentation&lt;/span&gt;
|content = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are documentation related tasks across all Wikimedia projects.&lt;/span&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = uHWsrx9ZmGIl
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Design&lt;/span&gt;
|content = 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Fixing design bugs or requests requires existing graphics skills working with a [[w:Vector graphics|Vector graphics]] application (e.g. [[w:Inkscape|Inkscape]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Basic knowledge of [[w:Cascading Style Sheets|CSS]] can also be helpful for integration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Ask your general development questions on the [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/design?language=en Design mailing list] and the [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki on IRC|#wikimedia-design IRC channel]].&lt;/span&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = d7UxGJmPBMen
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Strings&lt;/span&gt;
|content = 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Messages displayed in the user interface often need small corrections to the English text. The source text can only be changed in the code by developers, contrary to translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, many messages are unclear and [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:System message#Message documentation|require better documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Missing documentation can also be added by editing the &lt;code&gt;/qqq&lt;/code&gt; subpage of the message on [[Special:MyLanguage/translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net]], like all translations, but may require some study of the code to understand what a message is for.&lt;/span&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = 2a.g6qDjnp4A
}}

{{GoodFirstBugProject
|project = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And many more…&lt;/span&gt;
|content = 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Still not enough ideas? There are more fields you can explore - Wikimedia has hundreds of projects! Check out the complete list of potential tasks for new contributors:&lt;/span&gt;
|maniphest-query-id = QbBdVKL4yh3Q
}}
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have any trouble or [[Special:MyLanguage/New Developers#communication|specific questions]], please ask for help in one of our [[Special:MyLanguage/Communication|support places]].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=bugs/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|New Developers}} —  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikimedia software projects which offer mentors. Recommended for new contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|How to become a MediaWiki hacker}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For hacking on MediaWiki core or MediaWiki extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|How to contribute}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Learn about more ways how you can contribute to MediaWiki and the free culture community (e.g. translation, documentation, etc.)&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:New contributors{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Phabricator{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:New contributors task lists{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>s1pzit4x05gt1u7ryxgjwvv8gt8v6ip</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Category:Interface messages/1/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>756426</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402335</id>
      <parentid>2701125</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:27:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="153" xml:space="preserve">'''$pagename''' カテゴリには  MediaWiki にある[[$sys-msg|インターフェイス メッセージ]]の説明文書がすべて含まれます。</text>
      <sha1>a8shmaswnsn7dth2eocojgycq0tqgjg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Diffs/15/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>759547</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402147</id>
      <parentid>4198501</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:36:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="56" xml:space="preserve">Since 2017, $2 provides $1 (visual difference displays).</text>
      <sha1>9bllr101l1tspvp8t447n3qg0yopxjp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/en</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>759585</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402152</id>
      <parentid>4919118</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:37:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6179" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Since 2017, {{ll|VisualEditor}} provides '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' (visual difference displays).
These are available in two places in the interface: when previewing changes to the document before the user saves the page, and (as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta feature]]) within the standard MediaWiki diff display, accessed from the history page.
In both cases, the visual diff shows up alongside the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|traditional two-column wikitext diff]], and the user can toggle between the two displays.

Visual diffs have two main advantages over wikitext diffs.
The first is that editors can directly see the changes they and others have made without needing to understand [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitext]].
This is particularly helpful when looking at changes to graphical structures such as tables; for example, if an edit deletes a column from a table, the wikitext diff for it would be hard to understand, while the visual diff would be immediately obvious.

The second is that the technology can be used to more accurately represent the change to the reader.
For example, if an edit swapped two paragraphs (with or without changes to the paragraphs), the visual diff will identify that this is what occurred, while a wikitext diff makes it appear that a paragraph was deleted and an entirely new paragraph was added.

== On regular diff pages ==
Most of the examples and screenshots below are about using visual diffs during page previews when editing.
However, VisualEditor's visual diffs can also be used on regular diff pages, on any wiki that has VisualEditor installed.
You can see an example of it in use on the English-language Wikipedia [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|here]].

For wikis that have VisualEditor, there are several ways to activate this visual diff display:

* Add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* If your wiki has a &quot;Beta features&quot; tab within Special:Preferences, and you want to make visual diffs an &quot;opt-in&quot; feature for users, you can add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* As seen in the Wikipedia example linked above, the visual diff mode can also be activated by simply adding &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; to the URL of a diff page.

== How it works ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Screenshot showing some changes to an article.  Most changes are highlighted with text formatting.|left|thumb|300px|When you are finished editing the page, type your edit summary and then choose &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.

In visual mode, you will see additions, removals, new links, and formatting highlighted.  Other changes, such as changing the size of an image, are described in notes on the side.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=Toggle button showing visual and wikitext options; visual option is selected.|left|thumb|220x220px|Click the toggle button to switch between visual and wikitext diffs.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=Screenshot showing the same changes, in the two-column wikitext diff display.|left|thumb|245x245px|The wikitext diff is the same diff tool that is used in the wikitext editors and in the page history.]]

{{clr}}
== Examples ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Rich text edits&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|Wikitext diff
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Paragraph move with subtle vandalism&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Wikitext diff (2017).  This feature was added to the wikitext diff engine in 2018; see [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Table column removed&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|Wikitext diff
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Text, formatting and list changes&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|Wikitext diff
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insert new multimedia (sheet music)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|Wikitext diff
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Technology used ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|Thalia Chan, Unifying editing and visual diffs, Wikimania 2017]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Current limitations ==
* No notices for changes to &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, such as categories or TOC keywords.
* Has issues with complex changes to tables.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* Unavailable on certain special pages:
** Undo &quot;diff&quot; pages.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** Edit conflict pages&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== History ==
This feature has been available as the first diff tool in the desktop VisualEditor from the 1.31.0-wmf-20 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 6 February 2018).
Before that, it was a secondary tool from the 1.29.0-wmf-17 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 21 March 2017).

== See also ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Footnotes ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>rnshny4ont6clzjabrqr4a4e2odfudg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/ja</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>760521</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402157</id>
      <parentid>4919135</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:37:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7763" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[VisualEditor|ビジュアルエディター]]は2017年版から ''''''{{ll|visual diffs}}'''''' 機能をインターフェイスの2箇所で提供しています。&lt;/span&gt;
保存前に変更点を確認する時のほか、([[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|ベータ版機能]]として) 編集履歴のページで標準の MediaWiki の差分表示で利用できます。
いずれの場合も差分の表示は'''差分の視覚化''' (visual diffs) か[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|従来の2列の差分表示 (wikitext diff)]] か、切り替えることができます。

ウィキ文よりも視覚化表示の方が優れている点は主に2つあります。
1つ目は、編集者がwikitextを理解していなくても、行われた変更を直接見ることができることです。
文章以外の編集を見る時、例えば表からどの列を削除したか確かめるとします。差分をウィキ文で表示するとかなり煩雑ですが、視覚化表示ならパッと見て判別しやすくなります。(訳注：視覚化表示でもテンプレート内のタグや文字列の変更は個別に表示せず、テンプレート全体が変更箇所として表示されます)

第2に、この技術を使用すると変更点をより正確に読者に示せます。
一例として、視覚化表示ではふたつの段落を入れ換えた編集は (文字の変更の有無は問わない) そのまま読者に伝わりますが、ウィキ文では特定の文を削除し、まったく新しい文を挿入した表示になり、まるで2つの作業が発生したように見えるのです。

== 標準の差分表示ページ ==
下記の例やサンプル画像の大半は差分の視覚化機能がどう作用するか、ビジュアルエディタを利用して編集中にプレビューした状態を扱っています。
しかしながらウィキにビジュアルエディタがインストール済みであれば、標準の差分表示ページでもこの機能を利用できます。
その使用例は英語版ウィキペディアの[[w:Special:Diff/473592443|こちらのページ]]を参照してください。

ビジュアルエディターを導入済みのウィキでは、差分の視覚化機能を有効にする方法が複数あります。

* LocalSettings.php に以下の記述を追加:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* ご利用のウィキで「特別ページ:個人設定」に「ベータ版」のタブがあり、どの利用者にも「既定で」差分視覚化表示を使ってほしい場合は、LocalSettings.php に以下の記述を追加します:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* ページの差分を表示させ、URL欄の末尾に「&amp;visualdiff」と加筆すると、上記のウィキペディアの事例で示したように差分を視覚化して表示できます。

== 動作の仕組み ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=記事の変更点を示す画面キャプチャ。ウィキ書式で表示された部分が多い。|left|thumb|300px|ページの編集が終わったら、編集要約欄にまとめを書き、「{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}」を押す。

ビジュアルモードでは追加・削除、リンクの追加、書式が強調表示される。画像の大きさなど、その他の変更はそばに注記される。]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=編集画面をビジュアルからウィキテキストに切り替えるボタン。画面はビジュアル編集を選択した状態。|left|thumb|220x220px|編集画面をビジュアルからウィキテキストに切り替えるボタン。画面はビジュアル編集を選択した状態。]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=ウィキテキストの差分表示の画面キャプチャ。編集の作業の前後を、左右の2欄で見比べることができる。|left|thumb|245x245px|この差分表示ツールは、ウィキテキストのエディタ（編集機能）および編集履歴の表示で用いるものと同じ。]]

{{clr}}
== 使用例 ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;書式付きテキストの編集画面&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|視覚的な差分表示
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|ウィキ文の差分
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;荒らしの可能性がある段落の移動&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|視覚的な差分表示
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|ウィキテキスト形式の差分 (2017年版) 。2018年にウィキテキスト差分エンジンに導入済み。[[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png|画像]]を参照。
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;表から列を削除した編集&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|視覚的な差分表示
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|差分をウィキテキスト形式で表示
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;文、書式、一覧の変更&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|視覚的な差分表示
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|差分をウィキテキスト形式で表示
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;マルチメディアの追加（楽譜）&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|視覚的な差分表示
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|差分をウィキテキスト形式で表示
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== 技術 ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|編集と差分表示の統一を解説するThalia Chan（2017年ウィキマニアにて）]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

=== 現在の制限事項 ===
* 「不可視な」{{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|ページのメタデータ}}にカテゴリあるいは目次のキーワードが編集されても、変更通知は送信しません。
* 表組みに複雑な変更を加えると正しく表示されない事例が発生しています。&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* 特定の特別ページでは次の機能が使えません。
** 「差分」ページの編集巻き戻し。&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** ページの編集で衝突が起きたかどうか&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== 歴史 ==
このデスクトップ版ビジュアルエディターの機能は、一次的 (標準の) 差分表示ツールとして 1.31.0-wmf-20 ブランチで実装しています (2018年2月6日付けでウィキメディア製品群に展開)。
従来は副次的 (オプションの) ツールとして1.29.0-wmf-17 ブランチで提供しました (2017年3月21日付けでウィキメディア製品群に展開)。

== 関連項目 ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== 脚注 ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>pdtn0hmz4xakklhfjk13fzd0jv8m317</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402181</id>
      <parentid>5402157</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:46:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7690" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ll|VisualEditor}} は2017年版から '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' 機能をインターフェイスの2箇所で提供しています。
保存前に変更点を確認する時のほか、([[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|ベータ版機能]]として) 編集履歴のページで標準の MediaWiki の差分表示で利用できます。
いずれの場合も差分の表示は'''差分の視覚化''' (visual diffs) か[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|従来の2列の差分表示 (wikitext diff)]] か、切り替えることができます。

ウィキ文よりも視覚化表示の方が優れている点は主に2つあります。
1つ目は、編集者がwikitextを理解していなくても、行われた変更を直接見ることができることです。
文章以外の編集を見る時、例えば表からどの列を削除したか確かめるとします。差分をウィキ文で表示するとかなり煩雑ですが、視覚化表示ならパッと見て判別しやすくなります。(訳注：視覚化表示でもテンプレート内のタグや文字列の変更は個別に表示せず、テンプレート全体が変更箇所として表示されます)

第2に、この技術を使用すると変更点をより正確に読者に示せます。
一例として、視覚化表示ではふたつの段落を入れ換えた編集は (文字の変更の有無は問わない) そのまま読者に伝わりますが、ウィキ文では特定の文を削除し、まったく新しい文を挿入した表示になり、まるで2つの作業が発生したように見えるのです。

== 標準の差分表示ページ ==
下記の例やサンプル画像の大半は差分の視覚化機能がどう作用するか、ビジュアルエディタを利用して編集中にプレビューした状態を扱っています。
しかしながらウィキにビジュアルエディタがインストール済みであれば、標準の差分表示ページでもこの機能を利用できます。
その使用例は英語版ウィキペディアの[[w:Special:Diff/473592443|こちらのページ]]を参照してください。

ビジュアルエディターを導入済みのウィキでは、差分の視覚化機能を有効にする方法が複数あります。

* LocalSettings.php に以下の記述を追加:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* ご利用のウィキで「特別ページ:個人設定」に「ベータ版」のタブがあり、どの利用者にも「既定で」差分視覚化表示を使ってほしい場合は、LocalSettings.php に以下の記述を追加します:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* ページの差分を表示させ、URL欄の末尾に「&amp;visualdiff」と加筆すると、上記のウィキペディアの事例で示したように差分を視覚化して表示できます。

== 動作の仕組み ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=記事の変更点を示す画面キャプチャ。ウィキ書式で表示された部分が多い。|left|thumb|300px|ページの編集が終わったら、編集要約欄にまとめを書き、「{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}」を押す。

ビジュアルモードでは追加・削除、リンクの追加、書式が強調表示される。画像の大きさなど、その他の変更はそばに注記される。]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=編集画面をビジュアルからウィキテキストに切り替えるボタン。画面はビジュアル編集を選択した状態。|left|thumb|220x220px|編集画面をビジュアルからウィキテキストに切り替えるボタン。画面はビジュアル編集を選択した状態。]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=ウィキテキストの差分表示の画面キャプチャ。編集の作業の前後を、左右の2欄で見比べることができる。|left|thumb|245x245px|この差分表示ツールは、ウィキテキストのエディタ（編集機能）および編集履歴の表示で用いるものと同じ。]]

{{clr}}
== 使用例 ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;書式付きテキストの編集画面&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|視覚的な差分表示
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|ウィキ文の差分
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;荒らしの可能性がある段落の移動&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|視覚的な差分表示
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|ウィキテキスト形式の差分 (2017年版) 。2018年にウィキテキスト差分エンジンに導入済み。[[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png|画像]]を参照。
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;表から列を削除した編集&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|視覚的な差分表示
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|差分をウィキテキスト形式で表示
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;文、書式、一覧の変更&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|視覚的な差分表示
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|差分をウィキテキスト形式で表示
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;マルチメディアの追加（楽譜）&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|視覚的な差分表示
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|差分をウィキテキスト形式で表示
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== 技術 ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|編集と差分表示の統一を解説するThalia Chan（2017年ウィキマニアにて）]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

=== 現在の制限事項 ===
* 「不可視な」{{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|ページのメタデータ}}にカテゴリあるいは目次のキーワードが編集されても、変更通知は送信しません。
* 表組みに複雑な変更を加えると正しく表示されない事例が発生しています。&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* 特定の特別ページでは次の機能が使えません。
** 「差分」ページの編集巻き戻し。&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** ページの編集で衝突が起きたかどうか&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== 歴史 ==
このデスクトップ版ビジュアルエディターの機能は、一次的 (標準の) 差分表示ツールとして 1.31.0-wmf-20 ブランチで実装しています (2018年2月6日付けでウィキメディア製品群に展開)。
従来は副次的 (オプションの) ツールとして1.29.0-wmf-17 ブランチで提供しました (2017年3月21日付けでウィキメディア製品群に展開)。

== 関連項目 ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== 脚注 ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>i1k8vs6djcu0xbxycaok66z7zio7n8w</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Diffs/15/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>760522</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402180</id>
      <parentid>4648003</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:46:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="96" xml:space="preserve">$2 は2017年版から $1 機能をインターフェイスの2箇所で提供しています。</text>
      <sha1>ts847b8a2704ibubxh3jzpaetw0s4ds</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/pl</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>760781</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402182</id>
      <parentid>4919125</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:46:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8130" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since 2017, {{ll|VisualEditor}} provides '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' (visual difference displays).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are available in two places in the interface: when previewing changes to the document before the user saves the page, and (as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta feature]]) within the standard MediaWiki diff display, accessed from the history page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In both cases, the visual diff shows up alongside the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|traditional two-column wikitext diff]], and the user can toggle between the two displays.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Porównania wizualne przeważają nad porównaniami wikikodu w dwóch kwestiach. Pierwsza to to, że można podejrzeć zmiany bez konieczności rozumienia [[$wikitext|wikikodu]]. Bardzo jest to pomocne, gdy oglądane są zmiany w strukturach graficznych takich jak tabele - na przykład - jeżeli usunięto kolumnę w tabeli, porównanie wikikodu będzie trudne do rozpoznania, podczas gdy porównanie wizualne będzie oczywiste do zrozumienia.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first is that editors can directly see the changes they and others have made without needing to understand [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitext]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is particularly helpful when looking at changes to graphical structures such as tables; for example, if an edit deletes a column from a table, the wikitext diff for it would be hard to understand, while the visual diff would be immediately obvious.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The second is that the technology can be used to more accurately represent the change to the reader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if an edit swapped two paragraphs (with or without changes to the paragraphs), the visual diff will identify that this is what occurred, while a wikitext diff makes it appear that a paragraph was deleted and an entirely new paragraph was added.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== On regular diff pages ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of the examples and screenshots below are about using visual diffs during page previews when editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, VisualEditor's visual diffs can also be used on regular diff pages, on any wiki that has VisualEditor installed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can see an example of it in use on the English-language Wikipedia [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|here]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For wikis that have VisualEditor, there are several ways to activate this visual diff display:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If your wiki has a &quot;Beta features&quot; tab within Special:Preferences, and you want to make visual diffs an &quot;opt-in&quot; feature for users, you can add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* As seen in the Wikipedia example linked above, the visual diff mode can also be activated by simply adding &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; to the URL of a diff page.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Jak to działa ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu pokazujący przykładowe zmiany w artykule. Większość zmian jest podświetlanych odpowiednim formatowaniem tekstu.|left|thumb|300px|Kiedy skończysz edytować stronę, wpisz opis zmian i kliknij &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.

W trybie wizualnym, tekst dodany, usunięty, nowe linki i formatowanie są podświetlane. Inne zmiany, takie jak na przykład zmiana rozmiaru zdjęcia, są opisane w komentarzach z boku.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=Przełącznik trybu wyświetlania różnic wizualniego i wikikodu; zaznaczona jest opcja wizualna.|left|thumb|220x220px|Kliknij przyciski przełączające między porównaniem wizualnym i wikikodu.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=Zrzut ekranu pokazujący te same zmiany w formie dwukolumnowego porównania wikikodu.|left|thumb|245x245px|Porównanie wikikodu wygląda tak samo jak w zwykłym edytorze wikitekstu i historii strony.]]

{{clr}}
== Przykłady ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Edycje tekstu sformatowanego&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Porównywanie wizualne
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|Porównywanie wikikodu
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Przeniesienie akapitu z drobnym wandalizmem&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Porównywanie wizualne
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Porównywanie wikikodu&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Usunięta kolumna tabeli&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Porównywanie wizualne
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|Porównywanie wikikodu
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Zmiany tekstu, formatowania i list&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Porównywanie wizualne
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|Porównywanie wikikodu
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Wstawione obiekty multimedialne (na przykładzie nut)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Porównywanie wizualne
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|Porównywanie wikikodu
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Technologia ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thalia Chan, Unifying editing and visual diffs, Wikimania 2017&lt;/span&gt;]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Obecne ograniczenia ==
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No notices for changes to &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, such as categories or TOC keywords.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Has issues with complex changes to tables.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unavailable on certain special pages:&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Undo &quot;diff&quot; pages.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit conflict pages&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== History ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This feature has been available as the first diff tool in the desktop VisualEditor from the 1.31.0-wmf-20 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 6 February 2018).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before that, it was a secondary tool from the 1.29.0-wmf-17 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 21 March 2017).&lt;/span&gt;

== Zobacz też ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>s7b5u5lbbtcw82lzpdbixt9c0z1bmxy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/pt-br</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>761574</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402159</id>
      <parentid>4919163</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:37:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6900" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Desde 2017, o [[VisualEditor|editor visual]] fornece ''''''{{ll|visual diffs}}'''''' (exibições de diferença visual).&lt;/span&gt;
Eles estão disponíveis em dois locais na interface: ao visualizar as alterações no documento antes que o usuário salve a página, e (como um [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|recurso beta]]) na exibição de diferenças padrão do MediaWiki, acessada na página de histórico.
Em ambos os casos, a diferença visual aparece ao lado do [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|diferença tradicional de wikitexto de duas colunas]], e o usuário pode alternar entre as duas telas.

As diferenças visuais têm duas vantagens principais sobre os diffs wikitexto.
A primeira é que os editores podem ver diretamente as mudanças que eles e outros fizeram, sem a necessidade de entender o [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitexto]].
Isso é particularmente útil ao observar as alterações nas estruturas gráficas, como tabelas; por exemplo, se uma edição excluir uma coluna de uma tabela, a diferença do wikitexto para ela seria difícil de entender, enquanto a diferença visual seria imediatamente óbvio.

A segunda é que a tecnologia pode ser usada para representar com mais precisão a mudança para o leitor.
Por exemplo, se uma edição trocou dois parágrafos (com ou sem alterações nos parágrafos), a diferença visual identificará que isso foi o que ocorreu, enquanto uma diferença de wikitexto faz parecer que um parágrafo foi excluído e um parágrafo inteiramente novo foi adicionado.

== Em páginas de diferenças regulares ==
A maioria dos exemplos e capturas de tela abaixo são sobre o uso de diferenças visuais durante as visualizações da página durante a edição.
No entanto, as diferenças visuais do Editor visual também podem ser usadas em páginas diferenças regulares, em qualquer wiki que tenha o Editor visual instalado.
Você pode ver um exemplo disso em uso na Wikipédia em inglês [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|aqui]].

Para wikis que possuem o Editor Visual, existem várias maneiras de ativar este display visual de diferenças:

* Adicione o seguinte a LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Se o seu wiki tem uma guia de &quot;Recursos Beta&quot; em Especial:Preferências, e você deseja tornar as diferenças visuais um recurso &quot;opcional&quot; para os usuários, você pode adicionar o seguinte a LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Como visto no exemplo da Wikipédia acima, o modo de comparação visual também pode ser ativado simplesmente adicionando &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; ao URL de uma página de comparação.

== Como funciona ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Screenshot mostrando algumas mudanças em um artigo. A maioria das mudanças é realçada com formatação de texto.|left|thumb|300px|Quando terminar de editar a página, digite o resumo da edição e escolha &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.

No modo visual, você verá adições, remoções, novos links e formatação destacados. Outras alterações, como alterar o tamanho de uma imagem, são descritas em notas ao lado.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=Botão de alternar com opções visuais e wikitext; a opção visual está selecionada.|left|thumb|220x220px|Clique no botão alternar para alternar entre os modos visual e wikitext.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=Captura de tela mostrando as mesmas alterações, na exibição de duas variáveis wikitext de duas colunas.|left|thumb|245x245px|A diferenças de wikitext é a mesma ferramenta de diferença que é usada nos editores do wikitext e no histórico da página.]]

{{clr}}
== Exemplos ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Edições de textos Rich&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Diferenças visuais
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|Diferenças do Wikitext
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Parágrafo com vandalismo sutil&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Diferenças visuais
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Wikitext diff (2017). Esse recurso foi adicionado ao mecanismo de diferenças do wikitext em 2018; Veja [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Coluna da tabela removida&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Diferenças visuais
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|Diferenças do Wikitext
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Texto, formatação e lista de alterações&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Diferenças visuais
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|Diferenças do Wikitext
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insira novos multimídia (partituras)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Diferenças visuais
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|Diferenças do Wikitext
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Tecnologia usada ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|Thalia Chan, Unificação de edição e diferenças visuais, Wikimania 2017]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Limitações atuais ==
* Nenhum aviso para alterações em &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, como categorias ou palavras-chave do sumário.
* Tem problemas com alterações complexas em tabelas.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* Indisponível em determinadas páginas especiais:
** Desfazer páginas &quot;diff&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** Editar páginas de conflito&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Histórico ==
Este recurso está disponível como a primeira ferramenta de comparação no Editor visual da área de trabalho da ramificação 1.31.0-wmf-20 em diante (lançada para a produção da Wikimedia em 6 de fevereiro de 2018).
Antes disso, era uma ferramenta secundária da ramificação 1.29.0-wmf-17 em diante (lançada para a produção da Wikimedia em 21 de março de 2017).

== Ver também ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Notas ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>dx1sddjbh71756l9wuk1l7l4bff4w6g</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402184</id>
      <parentid>5402159</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:47:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6843" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Desde 2017, o {{ll|VisualEditor}} fornece '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' (exibições de diferença visual).
Eles estão disponíveis em dois locais na interface: ao visualizar as alterações no documento antes que o usuário salve a página, e (como um [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|recurso beta]]) na exibição de diferenças padrão do MediaWiki, acessada na página de histórico.
Em ambos os casos, a diferença visual aparece ao lado do [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|diferença tradicional de wikitexto de duas colunas]], e o usuário pode alternar entre as duas telas.

As diferenças visuais têm duas vantagens principais sobre os diffs wikitexto.
A primeira é que os editores podem ver diretamente as mudanças que eles e outros fizeram, sem a necessidade de entender o [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitexto]].
Isso é particularmente útil ao observar as alterações nas estruturas gráficas, como tabelas; por exemplo, se uma edição excluir uma coluna de uma tabela, a diferença do wikitexto para ela seria difícil de entender, enquanto a diferença visual seria imediatamente óbvio.

A segunda é que a tecnologia pode ser usada para representar com mais precisão a mudança para o leitor.
Por exemplo, se uma edição trocou dois parágrafos (com ou sem alterações nos parágrafos), a diferença visual identificará que isso foi o que ocorreu, enquanto uma diferença de wikitexto faz parecer que um parágrafo foi excluído e um parágrafo inteiramente novo foi adicionado.

== Em páginas de diferenças regulares ==
A maioria dos exemplos e capturas de tela abaixo são sobre o uso de diferenças visuais durante as visualizações da página durante a edição.
No entanto, as diferenças visuais do Editor visual também podem ser usadas em páginas diferenças regulares, em qualquer wiki que tenha o Editor visual instalado.
Você pode ver um exemplo disso em uso na Wikipédia em inglês [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|aqui]].

Para wikis que possuem o Editor Visual, existem várias maneiras de ativar este display visual de diferenças:

* Adicione o seguinte a LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Se o seu wiki tem uma guia de &quot;Recursos Beta&quot; em Especial:Preferências, e você deseja tornar as diferenças visuais um recurso &quot;opcional&quot; para os usuários, você pode adicionar o seguinte a LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Como visto no exemplo da Wikipédia acima, o modo de comparação visual também pode ser ativado simplesmente adicionando &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; ao URL de uma página de comparação.

== Como funciona ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Screenshot mostrando algumas mudanças em um artigo. A maioria das mudanças é realçada com formatação de texto.|left|thumb|300px|Quando terminar de editar a página, digite o resumo da edição e escolha &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.

No modo visual, você verá adições, remoções, novos links e formatação destacados. Outras alterações, como alterar o tamanho de uma imagem, são descritas em notas ao lado.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=Botão de alternar com opções visuais e wikitext; a opção visual está selecionada.|left|thumb|220x220px|Clique no botão alternar para alternar entre os modos visual e wikitext.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=Captura de tela mostrando as mesmas alterações, na exibição de duas variáveis wikitext de duas colunas.|left|thumb|245x245px|A diferenças de wikitext é a mesma ferramenta de diferença que é usada nos editores do wikitext e no histórico da página.]]

{{clr}}
== Exemplos ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Edições de textos Rich&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Diferenças visuais
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|Diferenças do Wikitext
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Parágrafo com vandalismo sutil&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Diferenças visuais
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Wikitext diff (2017). Esse recurso foi adicionado ao mecanismo de diferenças do wikitext em 2018; Veja [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Coluna da tabela removida&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Diferenças visuais
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|Diferenças do Wikitext
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Texto, formatação e lista de alterações&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Diferenças visuais
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|Diferenças do Wikitext
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insira novos multimídia (partituras)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Diferenças visuais
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|Diferenças do Wikitext
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Tecnologia usada ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|Thalia Chan, Unificação de edição e diferenças visuais, Wikimania 2017]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Limitações atuais ==
* Nenhum aviso para alterações em &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, como categorias ou palavras-chave do sumário.
* Tem problemas com alterações complexas em tabelas.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* Indisponível em determinadas páginas especiais:
** Desfazer páginas &quot;diff&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** Editar páginas de conflito&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Histórico ==
Este recurso está disponível como a primeira ferramenta de comparação no Editor visual da área de trabalho da ramificação 1.31.0-wmf-20 em diante (lançada para a produção da Wikimedia em 6 de fevereiro de 2018).
Antes disso, era uma ferramenta secundária da ramificação 1.29.0-wmf-17 em diante (lançada para a produção da Wikimedia em 21 de março de 2017).

== Ver também ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Notas ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>79r7jrx9lw86gznzt4bn3a7htf4ye61</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Diffs/15/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>761575</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402183</id>
      <parentid>4282993</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:47:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="63" xml:space="preserve">Desde 2017, o $2 fornece $1 (exibições de diferença visual).</text>
      <sha1>0drfmy4x4qicgatnxq3yla7213ovkpp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/sr</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>761989</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402161</id>
      <parentid>4919128</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:37:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8294" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since 2017, {{ll|VisualEditor}} provides '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' (visual difference displays).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are available in two places in the interface: when previewing changes to the document before the user saves the page, and (as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta feature]]) within the standard MediaWiki diff display, accessed from the history page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In both cases, the visual diff shows up alongside the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|traditional two-column wikitext diff]], and the user can toggle between the two displays.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diffs have two main advantages over wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first is that editors can directly see the changes they and others have made without needing to understand [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitext]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is particularly helpful when looking at changes to graphical structures such as tables; for example, if an edit deletes a column from a table, the wikitext diff for it would be hard to understand, while the visual diff would be immediately obvious.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The second is that the technology can be used to more accurately represent the change to the reader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if an edit swapped two paragraphs (with or without changes to the paragraphs), the visual diff will identify that this is what occurred, while a wikitext diff makes it appear that a paragraph was deleted and an entirely new paragraph was added.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== On regular diff pages ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of the examples and screenshots below are about using visual diffs during page previews when editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, VisualEditor's visual diffs can also be used on regular diff pages, on any wiki that has VisualEditor installed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can see an example of it in use on the English-language Wikipedia [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|here]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For wikis that have VisualEditor, there are several ways to activate this visual diff display:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If your wiki has a &quot;Beta features&quot; tab within Special:Preferences, and you want to make visual diffs an &quot;opt-in&quot; feature for users, you can add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* As seen in the Wikipedia example linked above, the visual diff mode can also be activated by simply adding &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; to the URL of a diff page.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Како ово ради ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing some changes to an article.  Most changes are highlighted with text formatting.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|300px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you are finished editing the page, type your edit summary and then choose &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In visual mode, you will see additions, removals, new links, and formatting highlighted.  Other changes, such as changing the size of an image, are described in notes on the side.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Toggle button showing visual and wikitext options; visual option is selected.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|220x220px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the toggle button to switch between visual and wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing the same changes, in the two-column wikitext diff display.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|245x245px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The wikitext diff is the same diff tool that is used in the wikitext editors and in the page history.&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{clr}}
== Примери ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Rich text edits&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Визуелна разлика
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|Разлика викитекста
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Paragraph move with subtle vandalism&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Визуелна разлика
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff (2017).  This feature was added to the wikitext diff engine in 2018; see [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Колона табеле је уклоњена&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Визуелна разлика
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|Разлика викитекста
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Текст, форматирање и промене листе&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Визуелна разлика
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|Разлика викитекста
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insert new multimedia (sheet music)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Визуелна разлика
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|Разлика викитекста
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Коришћена технологија ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|Thalia Chan, Unifying editing and visual diffs, Wikimania 2017]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Тренутна ограничења ==
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No notices for changes to &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, such as categories or TOC keywords.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Has issues with complex changes to tables.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unavailable on certain special pages:&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Undo &quot;diff&quot; pages.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit conflict pages&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== History ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This feature has been available as the first diff tool in the desktop VisualEditor from the 1.31.0-wmf-20 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 6 February 2018).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before that, it was a secondary tool from the 1.29.0-wmf-17 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 21 March 2017).&lt;/span&gt;

== Види још ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Референце ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>g2e85ytn39u1zb4e8h0tp3nw5yecvka</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:Linter/ja</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>762470</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402317</id>
      <parentid>5392721</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:10:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11486" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
'''{{ll|Extension:Linter|Linter}}''' 拡張機能は修正が必要あるいは可能なパターンのウィキテキストがあるページを検出し、パターンの問題点と解決法を示すガイドを提供します。

エラーは [[Special:LintErrors|{{int|linterrors}}]] にタイプごとにまとめられています。
[[Special:Expandtemplates|{{int|expandtemplates}}]] を使うと、これらの問題のいくつかを見つけやすくなります。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On this page, we will classify lint issues according to the severity of the issue vis-à-vis goals that are blocked by those issues.&lt;/span&gt;
詳細情報および議論は下記を参照してください。

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a new feature &quot;Show all linter errors for a specific page&quot; at the bottom of [[Special:LintErrors|{{int|linterrors}}]] page which allows an editor to get a report of all errors on a single page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The report contains the category and other useful information and each error has a clickable link that loads the page and highlights the error.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Note: if your source editor has syntax highlighting enabled, the highlighting may not work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By working from the end of the list upward, changes to the page will not invalidate the character offsets of earlier errors and is the recommended way to work if you are fixing all errors on a page.&lt;/span&gt;

今後も機能の改善を続け、ノイズの除去やバグ修正によりlinter の検出結果をより処理しやすくしていきます。ただし現在の検出結果を利用しても対処できます。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Documentation of lint issues ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Help:Lint errors}}

== 修正の対象と理由 ==

今後の計画として、[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing|解析担当チーム]]ではLinterの拡張機能を活用してウィキテキストの以下のパターンを特定していく予定です：

* エラー（例：偽の画像オプション – 通常、原因は入力ミスか、あるいは[[phab:T163582|MediaWikiのメディアオプション解析の脆弱性]]）
* 非推奨（例：[[phab:T134423|self-closing tags]]）
* 解析のパイプライン変更により壊れるもの（例：[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|TidyからRemexHTMLへ移行]]）
* HTML5では無効になるもの（例：centerやfontなど古いタグ）
* 一時的に壊れており、編集者の意図しない形に誤って解析される可能性のあるもの（例：閉じていないHTMLタグ、入れ子が正しくないHTMLタグ）

これらすべての対処が急がれるのではなく、場合によっては（利用者がエラーを我慢できれば）対処の必要がないものもあります。上記のLinterの課題は、サブセットごとに個別にゴールを設定して対処していきます。私たち解析担当チームはそれらのゴールをなるべく透明化（公開）し、どの課題を解決するとどのゴールが達成されるか、ガイダンスを提供していこうとしています。

'''説明を簡略化して[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ#What will editors need to do?|よくある質問のページ]]で提供しています。'''

=== 目標: [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ|Tidy からの移行]] ===

MediaWikiの解析パイプラインに対する技術的な疑問を明らかにするため、TidyからHTML5へ移行しました。ところが、それを実現すると、ウィキテキストの特定のパターンを修正しない限り、ページの少数のサブセットは解析に失敗することになりました。具体的に問題となるカテゴリは、削除可能なテーブル タグ &lt;code&gt;deletable-table-tag&lt;/code&gt; と pwrap のバグ回避 &lt;code&gt;pwrap-bug-workaround&lt;/code&gt;、自己終了タグ &lt;code&gt;self-closed-tag&lt;/code&gt; と Tidy の空白バグ &lt;code&gt;tidy-whitespace-bug&lt;/code&gt;、html5 の入れ子のエラー &lt;code&gt;html5-misnesting&lt;/code&gt;、Tidy のフォントのエラー &lt;code&gt;tidy-font-bug&lt;/code&gt; です。Tidy からの移行を迅速に進めるため、これらの問題の優先度を高く設定しました。

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
=== 目標: [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/Known differences with PHP parser output|PHP パーサと Parsoid のレンダリングの標準適合性を改善]] ===
&lt;/div&gt;
現状ではページの表示にはPHPパーサーが生成したHTMLを使い、[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/Users|編集ツールやAndroidアプリなどいくつかの用途では]]Parsoidが生成したHTMLが使われています。
解析担当チームの[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing#A: Move to adopt Parsoid as the primary MediaWiki wikitext parser|長期目標の一環として]]、ページの表示も編集もParsoidの出力で行えるようにしたいと考えています。
ParsoidとRemexHTMLは両方ともHTML5のツールなので、RemexHTMLの解析結果を左右するlint（エラー）はParsoidの解析にも影響を与えます。
現在のところ、Parsoidの解析を揺るがすそれ以外の新しいエラーは発見されていませんが、見つかり次第、この一覧を更新していきます。

=== 目標: [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Notes/HTML5 Compliance|HTML5 出力の標準適合性]] ===

この目標はやや複雑な要素があり、目標達成の重要度あるいはどこまで到達すればよいのか、まだ把握できていません。それに加え、この目標に向けて活用する仕組みもまだ明確ではありません。たとえば[[User:Legoktm/HTML+MediaWiki|User:Legoktm/HTML+MediaWiki]]はさまざまな場での議論に基づき、html5で廃止されたビッグタグを扱うという提案をまとめています。いずれの場合も廃止タグ&lt;code&gt;obsolete-tag&lt;/code&gt;と自己閉鎖タグ&lt;code&gt;self-closed-tag&lt;/code&gt;のカテゴリの問題を解決すると、この目標に近づけます。そもそも目標が明確ではないので、廃止タグのカテゴリは優先度の低い目標としました。

=== 目標: 編集者の意図を明確化する ===
正確にマークアップするのは難しいです。
どうしてもエラーが起きてしまいます。
パーサーはこれらのエラーの回復に最善を尽くすものの、実際には編集者の本来の意図を反映していなさそうな場合も多く見られます。
そこで最善策として、ここで特定した問題の修正には、編集者の意図を明確にすることを推奨します。
この目標達成に影響が大きいカテゴリとは、具体的には間違った画像オプション&lt;code&gt;bogus-image-options&lt;/code&gt;やテーブル内など記述位置の間違い&lt;code&gt;fostered-content&lt;/code&gt;、入れ子タグの間違い&lt;code&gt;misnested-tag&lt;/code&gt;や閉じるタグの欠落&lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt;があげられます。
編集者の意図を明確にするという目標はかなり重要なため、前出のカテゴリのほとんどに中程度の優先度を付けています。
ただし、大部分のケースでパーサーはかなり正確に回復しているように見えるので、閉じるタグの欠落のカテゴリは優先度の低いものとしてマークしました。
そうは言いつつ、他の人間の編集者やツールにわかりやすいかどうかではなく、修正に多大な労力を費やさなくてもよいエラ－を修正作業の対象にすることをお勧めします。

=== 目標: クリーンなマークアップの実現 ===

マークアップの訂正は手間がかかります。たとえエラーが存在しても、ほとんどの場合、パーサーは本来、そのマークアップが目指したであろう解析結果に沿って、かなりいい仕事をします。ただし、誤字脱字や句読点あるいは細かな文法エラーを見逃せない編集者と同様に、編集者や開発者の感覚があるユーザーは、前出のような細かいエラーを見逃せないと感じるかもしれません。そのようなエラーの修正にとんでもなく長い時間を費やすことはお奨めしませんし、多くの場合、ボットでも修正に対応できるのです。むしろ、解析のゴール達成を難しくするエラーのカテゴリとは、入れ子タグの間違い&lt;code&gt;misnested-tag&lt;/code&gt;、閉じるタグの不足&lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt;とふぞろいのタグ&lt;code&gt;stripped-tag&lt;/code&gt;（訳注：ペアの片方が不足）なのです。
&lt;!--
{{Special:PrefixIndex/Help:Extension:Linter/|stripprefix=1}}
--&gt;

== よくある質問 ==

=== 特定のページの lint エラーの更新時期 ===

現状ではリント（構文エラー）のカテゴリはすべて、ページの解析中に[[Parsoid]]が識別したエラーから生成されます。ページ（またはページ上に複製されたテンプレート）が編集されると、[[Change propagation|ChangeProp]]はそのページの再解析を要求し、Parsoidは新しい結果をLinter拡張に送ります。

つまり新しいカテゴリが導入されると（もしくは従来のカテゴリが訂正されると）、すべての解析結果の修正には時間がかかるかもしれないということです（特にほとんど修正されないページの場合）。もし編集をまったくしなければ、個別の処理はスピードアップします（訳注：理論上は）。原則はそうであっても、[[phab:T161556]]ではすべてのページを再解析する方法を検討中です。

=== X という名前空間 (例: 議論) のページは修正の対象かどうか ===

修正の優先順位が高いのは[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgContentNamespaces|コンテンツの名前空間]]のページです。その他はウィキごとに異なります。[[:ja:Help:サンドボックス|サンドボックス]]として使われるページが大量にあり、そこではエラーは放置されています。

==ツール==

* [[w:User:PerfektesChaos/js/lintHint]] - その時点の LintErrors (Parsoid メッセージ) をリスト化する JavaScript のガジェット
* [[w:Wikipedia:WPCleaner/Linter|WPCleaner]] - Linter のインタフェースとして機能する Java プログラムで、一部のエラー検出も可能
* [[:ja:User:MawaruNeko/ShowPageLintError.js]] - ページ単位でlintエラーをまとめるユーザースクリプト
* [https://github.com/RazeSoldier/Hclear-bot Bot]（作成者：[[User:星耀晨曦]]）書式指定終了タグの不足エラー [[Help:Extension:Linter/multiple-unclosed-formatting-tags|multiple-unclosed-formatting-tags]]を修正

== 関連項目 ==

*[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/API#Wikitext -&gt; Lint 2|Parsoid/API#Wikitext to lint]] – ウィキテキストからlintを抽出
*[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|Parsing/Tidyの置き換え]]
*{{ll|Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ}}
*[[:ja:Wikipedia:Linter]]

[[Category:Extension help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Linter{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1149lbpzddu2qugelmqj6qo68puqd8n</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402325</id>
      <parentid>5402317</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:11:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11446" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
'''{{ll|Extension:Linter|Linter}}''' 拡張機能は修正が必要あるいは可能なパターンのウィキテキストがあるページを検出し、パターンの問題点と解決法を示すガイドを提供します。

エラーは [[Special:LintErrors|{{int|linterrors}}]] にタイプごとにまとめられています。
[[Special:Expandtemplates|{{int|expandtemplates}}]] を使うと、これらの問題のいくつかを見つけやすくなります。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On this page, we will classify lint issues according to the severity of the issue vis-à-vis goals that are blocked by those issues.&lt;/span&gt;
詳細情報および議論は下記を参照してください。

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a new feature &quot;Show all linter errors for a specific page&quot; at the bottom of [[Special:LintErrors|{{int|linterrors}}]] page which allows an editor to get a report of all errors on a single page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The report contains the category and other useful information and each error has a clickable link that loads the page and highlights the error.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Note: if your source editor has syntax highlighting enabled, the highlighting may not work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By working from the end of the list upward, changes to the page will not invalidate the character offsets of earlier errors and is the recommended way to work if you are fixing all errors on a page.&lt;/span&gt;

今後も機能の改善を続け、ノイズの除去やバグ修正によりlinter の検出結果をより処理しやすくしていきます。ただし現在の検出結果を利用しても対処できます。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Documentation of lint issues ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Help:Lint errors}}

== 修正の対象と理由 ==

今後の計画として、[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing|解析担当チーム]]ではLinterの拡張機能を活用してウィキテキストの以下のパターンを特定していく予定です：

* エラー（例：偽の画像オプション – 通常、原因は入力ミスか、あるいは[[phab:T163582|MediaWikiのメディアオプション解析の脆弱性]]）
* 非推奨（例：[[phab:T134423|self-closing tags]]）
* 解析のパイプライン変更により壊れるもの（例：[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|TidyからRemexHTMLへ移行]]）
* HTML5では無効になるもの（例：centerやfontなど古いタグ）
* 一時的に壊れており、編集者の意図しない形に誤って解析される可能性のあるもの（例：閉じていないHTMLタグ、入れ子が正しくないHTMLタグ）

これらすべての対処が急がれるのではなく、場合によっては（利用者がエラーを我慢できれば）対処の必要がないものもあります。上記のLinterの課題は、サブセットごとに個別にゴールを設定して対処していきます。私たち解析担当チームはそれらのゴールをなるべく透明化（公開）し、どの課題を解決するとどのゴールが達成されるか、ガイダンスを提供していこうとしています。

'''説明を簡略化して[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ#What will editors need to do?|よくある質問のページ]]で提供しています。'''

=== 目標: [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ|Tidy からの移行]] ===

MediaWikiの解析パイプラインに対する技術的な疑問を明らかにするため、TidyからHTML5へ移行しました。ところが、それを実現すると、ウィキテキストの特定のパターンを修正しない限り、ページの少数のサブセットは解析に失敗することになりました。具体的に問題となるカテゴリは、削除可能なテーブル タグ &lt;code&gt;deletable-table-tag&lt;/code&gt; と pwrap のバグ回避 &lt;code&gt;pwrap-bug-workaround&lt;/code&gt;、自己終了タグ &lt;code&gt;self-closed-tag&lt;/code&gt; と Tidy の空白バグ &lt;code&gt;tidy-whitespace-bug&lt;/code&gt;、html5 の入れ子のエラー &lt;code&gt;html5-misnesting&lt;/code&gt;、Tidy のフォントのエラー &lt;code&gt;tidy-font-bug&lt;/code&gt; です。Tidy からの移行を迅速に進めるため、これらの問題の優先度を高く設定しました。

=== 目標: [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/Known differences with PHP parser output|PHP パーサと Parsoid のレンダリングの標準適合性を改善]] ===
現状ではページの表示にはPHPパーサーが生成したHTMLを使い、[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/Users|編集ツールやAndroidアプリなどいくつかの用途では]]Parsoidが生成したHTMLが使われています。
解析担当チームの[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing#A: Move to adopt Parsoid as the primary MediaWiki wikitext parser|長期目標の一環として]]、ページの表示も編集もParsoidの出力で行えるようにしたいと考えています。
ParsoidとRemexHTMLは両方ともHTML5のツールなので、RemexHTMLの解析結果を左右するlint（エラー）はParsoidの解析にも影響を与えます。
現在のところ、Parsoidの解析を揺るがすそれ以外の新しいエラーは発見されていませんが、見つかり次第、この一覧を更新していきます。

=== 目標: [[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Notes/HTML5 Compliance|HTML5 出力の標準適合性]] ===

この目標はやや複雑な要素があり、目標達成の重要度あるいはどこまで到達すればよいのか、まだ把握できていません。それに加え、この目標に向けて活用する仕組みもまだ明確ではありません。たとえば[[User:Legoktm/HTML+MediaWiki|User:Legoktm/HTML+MediaWiki]]はさまざまな場での議論に基づき、html5で廃止されたビッグタグを扱うという提案をまとめています。いずれの場合も廃止タグ&lt;code&gt;obsolete-tag&lt;/code&gt;と自己閉鎖タグ&lt;code&gt;self-closed-tag&lt;/code&gt;のカテゴリの問題を解決すると、この目標に近づけます。そもそも目標が明確ではないので、廃止タグのカテゴリは優先度の低い目標としました。

=== 目標: 編集者の意図を明確化する ===
正確にマークアップするのは難しいです。
どうしてもエラーが起きてしまいます。
パーサーはこれらのエラーの回復に最善を尽くすものの、実際には編集者の本来の意図を反映していなさそうな場合も多く見られます。
そこで最善策として、ここで特定した問題の修正には、編集者の意図を明確にすることを推奨します。
この目標達成に影響が大きいカテゴリとは、具体的には間違った画像オプション&lt;code&gt;bogus-image-options&lt;/code&gt;やテーブル内など記述位置の間違い&lt;code&gt;fostered-content&lt;/code&gt;、入れ子タグの間違い&lt;code&gt;misnested-tag&lt;/code&gt;や閉じるタグの欠落&lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt;があげられます。
編集者の意図を明確にするという目標はかなり重要なため、前出のカテゴリのほとんどに中程度の優先度を付けています。
ただし、大部分のケースでパーサーはかなり正確に回復しているように見えるので、閉じるタグの欠落のカテゴリは優先度の低いものとしてマークしました。
そうは言いつつ、他の人間の編集者やツールにわかりやすいかどうかではなく、修正に多大な労力を費やさなくてもよいエラ－を修正作業の対象にすることをお勧めします。

=== 目標: クリーンなマークアップの実現 ===

マークアップの訂正は手間がかかります。たとえエラーが存在しても、ほとんどの場合、パーサーは本来、そのマークアップが目指したであろう解析結果に沿って、かなりいい仕事をします。ただし、誤字脱字や句読点あるいは細かな文法エラーを見逃せない編集者と同様に、編集者や開発者の感覚があるユーザーは、前出のような細かいエラーを見逃せないと感じるかもしれません。そのようなエラーの修正にとんでもなく長い時間を費やすことはお奨めしませんし、多くの場合、ボットでも修正に対応できるのです。むしろ、解析のゴール達成を難しくするエラーのカテゴリとは、入れ子タグの間違い&lt;code&gt;misnested-tag&lt;/code&gt;、閉じるタグの不足&lt;code&gt;missing-end-tag&lt;/code&gt;とふぞろいのタグ&lt;code&gt;stripped-tag&lt;/code&gt;（訳注：ペアの片方が不足）なのです。
&lt;!--
{{Special:PrefixIndex/Help:Extension:Linter/|stripprefix=1}}
--&gt;

== よくある質問 ==

=== 特定のページの lint エラーの更新時期 ===

現状ではリント（構文エラー）のカテゴリはすべて、ページの解析中に[[Parsoid]]が識別したエラーから生成されます。ページ（またはページ上に複製されたテンプレート）が編集されると、[[Change propagation|ChangeProp]]はそのページの再解析を要求し、Parsoidは新しい結果をLinter拡張に送ります。

つまり新しいカテゴリが導入されると（もしくは従来のカテゴリが訂正されると）、すべての解析結果の修正には時間がかかるかもしれないということです（特にほとんど修正されないページの場合）。もし編集をまったくしなければ、個別の処理はスピードアップします（訳注：理論上は）。原則はそうであっても、[[phab:T161556]]ではすべてのページを再解析する方法を検討中です。

=== X という名前空間 (例: 議論) のページは修正の対象かどうか ===

修正の優先順位が高いのは[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgContentNamespaces|コンテンツの名前空間]]のページです。その他はウィキごとに異なります。[[:ja:Help:サンドボックス|サンドボックス]]として使われるページが大量にあり、そこではエラーは放置されています。

==ツール==

* [[w:User:PerfektesChaos/js/lintHint]] - その時点の LintErrors (Parsoid メッセージ) をリスト化する JavaScript のガジェット
* [[w:Wikipedia:WPCleaner/Linter|WPCleaner]] - Linter のインタフェースとして機能する Java プログラムで、一部のエラー検出も可能
* [[:ja:User:MawaruNeko/ShowPageLintError.js]] - ページ単位でlintエラーをまとめるユーザースクリプト
* [https://github.com/RazeSoldier/Hclear-bot Bot]（作成者：[[User:星耀晨曦]]）書式指定終了タグの不足エラー [[Help:Extension:Linter/multiple-unclosed-formatting-tags|multiple-unclosed-formatting-tags]]を修正

== 関連項目 ==

*[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsoid/API#Wikitext -&gt; Lint 2|Parsoid/API#Wikitext to lint]] – ウィキテキストからlintを抽出
*[[Special:MyLanguage/Parsing/Replacing Tidy|Parsing/Tidyの置き換え]]
*{{ll|Parsing/Replacing Tidy/FAQ}}
*[[:ja:Wikipedia:Linter]]

[[Category:Extension help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Linter{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>6x0dt09hisc7793sdg9uij9mftg7ihb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Linter/25/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>762487</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402324</id>
      <parentid>2775016</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:11:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="96" xml:space="preserve">=== 目標: [[$1|PHP パーサと Parsoid のレンダリングの標準適合性を改善]] ===</text>
      <sha1>pxsjf6j1uf9uwl3mhltxdtxjozkurv3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Linter/27/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>762491</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402316</id>
      <parentid>2718267</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:10:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="53" xml:space="preserve">=== 目標: [[$1|HTML5 出力の標準適合性]] ===</text>
      <sha1>ci5nzl0ijzonjr4iz5nu4aven8m9e38</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/gsw</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>762715</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402930</id>
      <parentid>5355653</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="52679" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Basic overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== File transfer ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Choose a method for transferring files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:Wget|wget]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Secure copy with [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] or [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Using a [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] client.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Weitere Methoden: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Preliminary===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check the requirements
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the RELEASE-NOTES file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Back up existing files and the database
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new files
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Upgrade extensions
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the update script to check the database
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Test the update
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} requires:
&lt;/div&gt;

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One of the following:
&lt;/div&gt;
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are using PostgreSQL, please also read {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more information, please read the {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} and {{ll|Compatibility}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Read the release notes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Clear pending jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Back up existing files and the database ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:''Full instructions: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
* Konfigurationsdateien, bspw &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (wenn vorhanden)
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Unpack the new files ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using a tarball package ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Command line ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Other files===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using Git ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Upgrade extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Other variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Run the update script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: ''See also {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Should I back up first?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Short answer: Yes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Why upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>cwzdj9iiym42kmbo2dl4jwoj85io8ay</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/uk</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>763444</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402162</id>
      <parentid>4919133</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:37:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9739" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;З 2017 року [[VisualEditor]] надає ''''''{{ll|visual diffs}}'''''' (відображення візуальних відмінностей).&lt;/span&gt;
Вони доступні в двох місцях інтерфейсу: під час попереднього перегляду змін до документа до того, як користувач збереже сторінку, і (як [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|бета-функція]]) у стандартному дисплеї MediaWiki, доступ до якого здійснюється зі сторінки історії.
В обох випадках візуальна відмінність відображається поряд із [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|традиційним вікітекстом у двох стовпцях]], і користувач може перемикатися між двома дисплеями.

Візуальні відмінності мають дві основні переваги перед відмінностями вікітексту.
По-перше, редактори можуть безпосередньо бачити зміни, внесені ними та іншими, без необхідності розуміти [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|вікітекст]].
Це особливо корисно при перегляді змін до графічних структур, таких як таблиці; наприклад, якщо редагування видаляє стовпець із таблиці, різницю вікітексту буде важко зрозуміти, тоді як візуальне відмінність буде відразу очевидним.

По-друге, ця технологія може бути використана для більш точного представлення змін читачеві.
Наприклад, якщо в результаті редагування два абзаци помінялися місцями (зі змінами в абзацах або без них), візуальна відмінність визначить, що саме це сталося, тоді як відмінність вікітексту створює враження, що абзац було видалено і додано абсолютно новий абзац.

== На звичайних диф-сторінках ==
Більшість прикладів і скріншотів нижче стосуються використання візуальних відмінностей під час попереднього перегляду сторінок під час редагування.
Однак візуальні відмінності візуального редактора також можна використовувати на звичайних сторінках відмінностей у будь-якій вікі, де встановлено візуальний редактор.
Ви можете побачити приклад його використання в англомовній Вікіпедії [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|тут]].

Для вікі, які мають візуальний редактор, є кілька способів активувати це відображення візуальної відмінності:

* Додайте наступне до LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Якщо у вашій вікі є вкладка «Бета-функції» в Special:Preferences, і ви хочете зробити візуальні відмінності функцією «підключення» для користувачів, ви можете додати наступне до LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Як видно з прикладу Вікіпедії, на який наведено посилання, режим візуального відмінності також можна активувати, просто додавши «&amp;visualdiff» до URL-адреси сторінки відмінності.

== Як це працює ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Знімок показує деякі зміни у статті. Більшість змін підсвічено форматуванням тексту.|left|thumb|300px|Коли ви закінчили редагування сторінки, введіть опис вашого редагування, а потім виберіть «{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}».

У візуальному режимі ви бачитимете додавання, видалення, нові посилання та форматування підсвіченими. Інші зміни, як-от зміна розміру зображення, описані у примітках збоку.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=Кнопка-перемикач показує візуальну й опцію вікітексту; обрано візуальну опцію.|left|thumb|220x220px|Натисніть кнопку-перемикач для перемикання між візуальними та дифами вікітексту.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=Знімок показує ті самі зміни у двоколонковому відображенні дифів вікітексту.|left|thumb|245x245px|Диф вікітексту — той самий засіб дифів, який використовується в редакторах вікітексту та на сторінці історії.]]

{{clr}}
== Приклади ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Редагування складного тексту&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Візуальний диф
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|Диф вікітексту
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Переміщення абзацу з тонким вандалізмом&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Візуальний диф
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Диф вікітексту (2017). Цю функцію було додано до механізму дифу вікітексту у 2018 році; побачити [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Колонку таблиці видалено&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Візуальний диф
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|Диф вікітексту
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Зміни тексту, форматування та списку&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Візуальний диф
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|Диф вікітексту
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Додано нове мультимедіа (ноти)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Візуальний диф
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|Диф вікітексту
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Використана технологія ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|Thalia Chan, Уніфікація редагування та візуальних дифів, Вікіманія 2017]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Поточні обмеження ==
* Немає повідомлень про зміни «невидимих» {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|метаданих сторінки}}, наприклад категорій або ключових слів із опису.
* Має проблеми зі складними змінами таблиць.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* Недоступно на певних спеціальних сторінках:
** Відмінити сторінки «диф».&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** Редагувати конфліктні сторінки&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Історія ==
Ця функція була доступна як перший інструмент дифу у настільному візуальному редакторі, починаючи з гілки 1.31.0-wmf-20 (випущено у виробництво Wikimedia 6 лютого 2018 року).
До цього він був допоміжним інструментом від гілки 1.29.0-wmf-17 і далі (випущений у виробництво Вікімедіа 21 березня 2017 року).

== Див. також ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Примітки ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>mj9ciu5bd2nf9yi57sy31f1lgc6ohve</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402188</id>
      <parentid>5402162</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:48:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9696" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
З 2017 року {{ll|VisualEditor}} надає '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' (відображення візуальних відмінностей).
Вони доступні в двох місцях інтерфейсу: під час попереднього перегляду змін до документа до того, як користувач збереже сторінку, і (як [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|бета-функція]]) у стандартному дисплеї MediaWiki, доступ до якого здійснюється зі сторінки історії.
В обох випадках візуальна відмінність відображається поряд із [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|традиційним вікітекстом у двох стовпцях]], і користувач може перемикатися між двома дисплеями.

Візуальні відмінності мають дві основні переваги перед відмінностями вікітексту.
По-перше, редактори можуть безпосередньо бачити зміни, внесені ними та іншими, без необхідності розуміти [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|вікітекст]].
Це особливо корисно при перегляді змін до графічних структур, таких як таблиці; наприклад, якщо редагування видаляє стовпець із таблиці, різницю вікітексту буде важко зрозуміти, тоді як візуальне відмінність буде відразу очевидним.

По-друге, ця технологія може бути використана для більш точного представлення змін читачеві.
Наприклад, якщо в результаті редагування два абзаци помінялися місцями (зі змінами в абзацах або без них), візуальна відмінність визначить, що саме це сталося, тоді як відмінність вікітексту створює враження, що абзац було видалено і додано абсолютно новий абзац.

== На звичайних диф-сторінках ==
Більшість прикладів і скріншотів нижче стосуються використання візуальних відмінностей під час попереднього перегляду сторінок під час редагування.
Однак візуальні відмінності візуального редактора також можна використовувати на звичайних сторінках відмінностей у будь-якій вікі, де встановлено візуальний редактор.
Ви можете побачити приклад його використання в англомовній Вікіпедії [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|тут]].

Для вікі, які мають візуальний редактор, є кілька способів активувати це відображення візуальної відмінності:

* Додайте наступне до LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Якщо у вашій вікі є вкладка «Бета-функції» в Special:Preferences, і ви хочете зробити візуальні відмінності функцією «підключення» для користувачів, ви можете додати наступне до LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Як видно з прикладу Вікіпедії, на який наведено посилання, режим візуального відмінності також можна активувати, просто додавши «&amp;visualdiff» до URL-адреси сторінки відмінності.

== Як це працює ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Знімок показує деякі зміни у статті. Більшість змін підсвічено форматуванням тексту.|left|thumb|300px|Коли ви закінчили редагування сторінки, введіть опис вашого редагування, а потім виберіть «{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}».

У візуальному режимі ви бачитимете додавання, видалення, нові посилання та форматування підсвіченими. Інші зміни, як-от зміна розміру зображення, описані у примітках збоку.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=Кнопка-перемикач показує візуальну й опцію вікітексту; обрано візуальну опцію.|left|thumb|220x220px|Натисніть кнопку-перемикач для перемикання між візуальними та дифами вікітексту.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=Знімок показує ті самі зміни у двоколонковому відображенні дифів вікітексту.|left|thumb|245x245px|Диф вікітексту — той самий засіб дифів, який використовується в редакторах вікітексту та на сторінці історії.]]

{{clr}}
== Приклади ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Редагування складного тексту&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Візуальний диф
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|Диф вікітексту
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Переміщення абзацу з тонким вандалізмом&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Візуальний диф
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Диф вікітексту (2017). Цю функцію було додано до механізму дифу вікітексту у 2018 році; побачити [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Колонку таблиці видалено&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Візуальний диф
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|Диф вікітексту
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Зміни тексту, форматування та списку&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Візуальний диф
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|Диф вікітексту
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Додано нове мультимедіа (ноти)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Візуальний диф
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|Диф вікітексту
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Використана технологія ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|Thalia Chan, Уніфікація редагування та візуальних дифів, Вікіманія 2017]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Поточні обмеження ==
* Немає повідомлень про зміни «невидимих» {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|метаданих сторінки}}, наприклад категорій або ключових слів із опису.
* Має проблеми зі складними змінами таблиць.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* Недоступно на певних спеціальних сторінках:
** Відмінити сторінки «диф».&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** Редагувати конфліктні сторінки&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Історія ==
Ця функція була доступна як перший інструмент дифу у настільному візуальному редакторі, починаючи з гілки 1.31.0-wmf-20 (випущено у виробництво Wikimedia 6 лютого 2018 року).
До цього він був допоміжним інструментом від гілки 1.29.0-wmf-17 і далі (випущений у виробництво Вікімедіа 21 березня 2017 року).

== Див. також ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Примітки ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>nhwqvv069y9w49rsd7srjk7yypbtm7j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Diffs/15/uk</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>763445</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402187</id>
      <parentid>4918967</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:48:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="107" xml:space="preserve">З 2017 року $2 надає $1 (відображення візуальних відмінностей).</text>
      <sha1>kawx1tfywunswebfzfcb6f3tcctej6y</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>763955</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402249</id>
      <parentid>2722142</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="49" xml:space="preserve">詳細情報は $1 を参照してください。</text>
      <sha1>5voqpmbcqaet6xop4e1l3suuba384z8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/fr</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>765331</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402155</id>
      <parentid>4919161</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:37:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7343" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Depuis 2017, [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]] fournit des '''deltas visuels''' (ou diff visuels), c’est-à-dire des visualisations des différences entre deux versions.&lt;/span&gt;
Ces fonctionnalités sont disponibles à deux endroits de l’interface : lors des aperçus de vos modifications d’un document préalablement à la sauvegarde de la page, et (comme fonctionnalité bêta) à l’intérieur du visualiseur des différences standard de Mediawiki, accessible depuis la page d’historique.
Dans les deux cas, l’afficheur visuel de différences se trouve aux côtés du [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|visualiseur traditionnel de différences wikitextes en 2 colonnes]], et l’utilisateur peut basculer entre les deux modes de visualisation.

Les deltas visuels ont deux grands avantages en comparaison des différences textuelles de wikicode.
Le premier est que les contributeurs peuvent directement voir leurs modifications et celles des autres sans avoir à comprendre le wikicode.
Cela est particulièrement utile quand on regarde une modification de structures graphiques telles que les tableaux ; par exemple, si une modification supprime une colonne d’un tableau, le delta wikitexte pour celle-ci est difficile à comprendre, là où le delta visuel est immédiatement évident.

Second avantage, nous pouvons utiliser des techniques de représentations des changements plus précises et plus utiles pour le lecteur.
Par exemple, si une modification a échangé deux paragraphes (avec ou sans modifications au texte de ceux-ci), le delta visuel montrera que c’est ce qui s’est produit, là où un delta wikitexte l’affichera comme si un paragraphe avait été supprimé et un paragraphe entièrement nouveau avait été ajouté.

== Sur les pages classiques de delta ==
La plupart des exemples et des captures d’écran ci-dessous portent sur l’usage des deltas visuels durant la prévisualisation de pages en cours de modification.
Néanmoins, les deltas visuels de l’éditeur visuel peuvent également être utilisés sur des pages normales de delta, sur tout wiki ayant l’éditeur visuel installé.
Vous pouvez en voir un exemple en fonctionnement sur le Wikipédia en langue anglaise [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|ici]].

Pour les wikis qui ont l’éditeur visuel, il y a plusieurs moyens d’activer cet affichage visuel de delta :

* Ajoutez ce qui suit à LocalSettings.php :
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Si votre wiki a un onglet « Fonctionnalités bêta » dans Spécial:Préférences, et que vous voulez faire des deltas visuels une fonctionnalité optionnelle pour vos utilisateurs, vous pouvez ajouter ce qui suit à LocalSettings.php :
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Comme vu dans l’exemple donné plus haut, le mode delta visuel peut aussi être activé en ajoutant simplement « &amp;visualdiff » à l’URL d’une page de delta.

== Comment ça marche ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Capture d’écran montrant certains changements à un article. La plupart des changements sont mis en valeur par la mise en forme du texte.|left|thumb|300px|Lorsque vous avez fini de modifier la page, entrez votre résumé de modification et choisissez « {{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}} ».

Dans le mode visuel, les ajouts, suppressions, nouveaux liens et changements de mise en forme sont surlignés. Les autres changements, comme le changement de la taille d’une image, sont décrits dans des notes en marge.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=Bouton de choix entre visuel ou wikicode ; visuel est choisi.|left|thumb|220x220px|Un clic sur l’interrupteur permet de basculer entre le diff visuel et le diff de wikicode.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=Capture d’écran montrant les mêmes changements à un article, avec l’affichage en deux colonnes du diff de wikicode.|left|thumb|245x245px|Le diff de wikicode est le même outil de diff utilisé dans les éditeurs de wikicode et dans l’historique d’une page.]]

{{clr}}
== Exemples ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Modifications de texte mis en forme&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Diff visuel
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|Diff de wikicode
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Déplacement de paragraphe avec vandalisme discret&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Diff visuel
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Deltas de wikicode. Cette fonctionnalité a été ajouté au moteur de calcul de différences en 2018 ; voir [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]]
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Suppression d’une colonne de tableau&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Diff visuel
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|Diff de wikicode
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Changements de texte, de mise en forme et de liste&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Diff visuel
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|Diff de wikicode
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insertion d’un nouveau média (partition)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Diff visuel
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|Diff de wikicode
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Technologies utilisées ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|Thalia Chan, Aligner la modification et les diffs visuels, Wikimania 2017]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Limites actuellement ==
* Pas d’affichage des modifications aux métadonnées « invisibles » des pages, tels que les catégories ou les mots-clefs des sommaires.
* A des problèmes avec les modifications complexes à des tableaux.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* Indisponible sur certaines pages spéciales :
** Pages deltas d’annulation de modifications.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** Résolution des conflits de modifications.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Historique ==
Cette fonctionnalité est disponible en tant qu’outil principal du VisualEditor des utilisateurs bureau depuis la branche 1.31.0-wmf-20 (publiée comme version de production pour Wikimedia le 6 févirer 2018).
Avant cela, c’était un outil secondaire de la branche 1.29.0-wmf-17 et suivantes (déployé en production sur Wikimédia le 21 mars 2017)

== Voir aussi ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Notes de bas de page ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>k6y39k66yl5ze9jytjfnrehnl3ea378</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402177</id>
      <parentid>5402155</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:45:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7261" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Depuis 2017, {{ll|VisualEditor}} fournit des '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''', c’est-à-dire des visualisations des différences entre deux versions.
Ces fonctionnalités sont disponibles à deux endroits de l’interface : lors des aperçus de vos modifications d’un document préalablement à la sauvegarde de la page, et (comme fonctionnalité bêta) à l’intérieur du visualiseur des différences standard de Mediawiki, accessible depuis la page d’historique.
Dans les deux cas, l’afficheur visuel de différences se trouve aux côtés du [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|visualiseur traditionnel de différences wikitextes en 2 colonnes]], et l’utilisateur peut basculer entre les deux modes de visualisation.

Les deltas visuels ont deux grands avantages en comparaison des différences textuelles de wikicode.
Le premier est que les contributeurs peuvent directement voir leurs modifications et celles des autres sans avoir à comprendre le wikicode.
Cela est particulièrement utile quand on regarde une modification de structures graphiques telles que les tableaux ; par exemple, si une modification supprime une colonne d’un tableau, le delta wikitexte pour celle-ci est difficile à comprendre, là où le delta visuel est immédiatement évident.

Second avantage, nous pouvons utiliser des techniques de représentations des changements plus précises et plus utiles pour le lecteur.
Par exemple, si une modification a échangé deux paragraphes (avec ou sans modifications au texte de ceux-ci), le delta visuel montrera que c’est ce qui s’est produit, là où un delta wikitexte l’affichera comme si un paragraphe avait été supprimé et un paragraphe entièrement nouveau avait été ajouté.

== Sur les pages classiques de delta ==
La plupart des exemples et des captures d’écran ci-dessous portent sur l’usage des deltas visuels durant la prévisualisation de pages en cours de modification.
Néanmoins, les deltas visuels de l’éditeur visuel peuvent également être utilisés sur des pages normales de delta, sur tout wiki ayant l’éditeur visuel installé.
Vous pouvez en voir un exemple en fonctionnement sur le Wikipédia en langue anglaise [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|ici]].

Pour les wikis qui ont l’éditeur visuel, il y a plusieurs moyens d’activer cet affichage visuel de delta :

* Ajoutez ce qui suit à LocalSettings.php :
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Si votre wiki a un onglet « Fonctionnalités bêta » dans Spécial:Préférences, et que vous voulez faire des deltas visuels une fonctionnalité optionnelle pour vos utilisateurs, vous pouvez ajouter ce qui suit à LocalSettings.php :
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Comme vu dans l’exemple donné plus haut, le mode delta visuel peut aussi être activé en ajoutant simplement « &amp;visualdiff » à l’URL d’une page de delta.

== Comment ça marche ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Capture d’écran montrant certains changements à un article. La plupart des changements sont mis en valeur par la mise en forme du texte.|left|thumb|300px|Lorsque vous avez fini de modifier la page, entrez votre résumé de modification et choisissez « {{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}} ».

Dans le mode visuel, les ajouts, suppressions, nouveaux liens et changements de mise en forme sont surlignés. Les autres changements, comme le changement de la taille d’une image, sont décrits dans des notes en marge.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=Bouton de choix entre visuel ou wikicode ; visuel est choisi.|left|thumb|220x220px|Un clic sur l’interrupteur permet de basculer entre le diff visuel et le diff de wikicode.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=Capture d’écran montrant les mêmes changements à un article, avec l’affichage en deux colonnes du diff de wikicode.|left|thumb|245x245px|Le diff de wikicode est le même outil de diff utilisé dans les éditeurs de wikicode et dans l’historique d’une page.]]

{{clr}}
== Exemples ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Modifications de texte mis en forme&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Diff visuel
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|Diff de wikicode
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Déplacement de paragraphe avec vandalisme discret&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Diff visuel
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Deltas de wikicode. Cette fonctionnalité a été ajouté au moteur de calcul de différences en 2018 ; voir [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]]
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Suppression d’une colonne de tableau&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Diff visuel
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|Diff de wikicode
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Changements de texte, de mise en forme et de liste&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Diff visuel
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|Diff de wikicode
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insertion d’un nouveau média (partition)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Diff visuel
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|Diff de wikicode
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Technologies utilisées ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|Thalia Chan, Aligner la modification et les diffs visuels, Wikimania 2017]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Limites actuellement ==
* Pas d’affichage des modifications aux métadonnées « invisibles » des pages, tels que les catégories ou les mots-clefs des sommaires.
* A des problèmes avec les modifications complexes à des tableaux.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* Indisponible sur certaines pages spéciales :
** Pages deltas d’annulation de modifications.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** Résolution des conflits de modifications.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Historique ==
Cette fonctionnalité est disponible en tant qu’outil principal du VisualEditor des utilisateurs bureau depuis la branche 1.31.0-wmf-20 (publiée comme version de production pour Wikimedia le 6 févirer 2018).
Avant cela, c’était un outil secondaire de la branche 1.29.0-wmf-17 et suivantes (déployé en production sur Wikimédia le 21 mars 2017)

== Voir aussi ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Notes de bas de page ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>em789yvci4j6ixbjvi6c10wgfcv7teq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Diffs/15/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>765332</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402176</id>
      <parentid>4432870</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:45:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="105" xml:space="preserve">Depuis 2017, $2 fournit des $1, c’est-à-dire des visualisations des différences entre deux versions.</text>
      <sha1>klizxq31rrc0fslidkv3tbhqmtgwto7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Editor/uk</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>766208</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402697</id>
      <parentid>5370852</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8504" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Ви могли шукати:

== Поточні ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Поточне програмне забезпечення редагування на Вікіпедіях Вікімедіа
!Засіб редагування
!Скриншот
!Рік
!Платформа
!Примітки
|-
|редактор МедіаВікі за замовчуванням, який є HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Скриншот HTML textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Робочий стіл і мобільна версія
|Він не має панелі засобів. Його можна побачити, коли JavaScript вимкнено чи коли «{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}» вимкнено в [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extension:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Скриншот WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Робочий стіл
|Його можна побачити, коли «{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}» увімкнено в [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Візуальний редактор]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Скриншот, що показує візуальний режим Візуального редактора|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Робочий стіл і мобільна версія
|Система редагування багатого тексту
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|редактор вікітексту 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Скриншот вбудованого режиму вікітексту Візуального редактора|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Робочий стіл
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Сторінка коректури]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Робочий стіл
|Використовується на [[S:|Вікіджерелах]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Скриншот wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Робочий стіл
|Цілком підтримуваний волонтерами редактор вікі-тексту. Він зазвичай запускається як гаджет або користувацький скрипт, але на деяких Вікіпедіях не Вікімедіа — як розширення.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Скриншот редактора коду|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Робочий стіл
|Це використовується для редагування JavaScript та інших сторінок коду.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Поточний редактор вікітексту {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Скриншот редагування вікітексту на Mobile Web|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Мобільні пристрої
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Переклад вмісту]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Скриншот редактора Перекладу вмісту|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Робочий стіл
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Структуровані обговорення]] (раніше відомий як Потік)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Скриншот коментаря та початку відповіді на нього у Структурованих обговореннях|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Робочий стіл і мобільна версія
|Структуровані обговорення підтримують вікітекст і візуальні режими.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Редактор у застосунку для [[$android-faq|Android]].&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Скриншот редагування інтерфейсу на телефоні Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Мобільні пристрої
|
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Редактор у застосунку для [[$ios-faq|iOS]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Скриншот редагування інтерфейсу на iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Мобільні пристрої
|
|-
|Редактор [[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Робочий стіл
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Редактор лістингу Вікімандрів]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Робочий стіл
|Спеціалізований заснований на JavaScript засіб редагування для вставки одного з декількох шаблонів на Вікімандрах
|-
|}

== Колишні ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Колишнє програмне забезпечення редагування на Вікіпедіях Вікімедіа
|-
!Засіб редагування
!Скриншот
!Рік
!Платформа
!Примітки
|-
|«Класичний» редактор JavaScript у 2006 році, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Скриншот редактора вікітексту 2006 року|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Робочий стіл
|Його можна було бачити, коли налаштування «showtoolbar» було увімкнено протягом 2006—2010 років. Після того він показувався лише для користувачів, які вимкнули налаштування «enhanced-toolbar» (редактор 2010 року). Цей редактор було [[phab:T30856|вилучено]] в [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Подібна панель інструментів доступна як підтримуваний волонтерами локальний додаток у деяких Вікіпедіях.
|-
|Оригінальний редактор вікітексту MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Мобільні пристрої
|Це було специфічним для мобільних пристроїв набором модифікацій до настільного редактора вікітексту 2003 року. Більше не розгортається.
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>o4wxltajoufqrq3c7g51bb8andurw9h</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402721</id>
      <parentid>5402697</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:07:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8497" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Ви могли шукати:

== Поточні ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Поточне програмне забезпечення редагування на Вікіпедіях Вікімедіа
!Засіб редагування
!Скриншот
!Рік
!Платформа
!Примітки
|-
|редактор МедіаВікі за замовчуванням, який є HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Скриншот HTML textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Робочий стіл і мобільна версія
|Він не має панелі засобів. Його можна побачити, коли JavaScript вимкнено чи коли «{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}» вимкнено в [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extension:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Скриншот WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Робочий стіл
|Його можна побачити, коли «{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}» увімкнено в [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Візуальний редактор]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Скриншот, що показує візуальний режим Візуального редактора|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Робочий стіл і мобільна версія
|Система редагування багатого тексту
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|редактор вікітексту 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Скриншот вбудованого режиму вікітексту Візуального редактора|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Робочий стіл
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Сторінка коректури]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Робочий стіл
|Використовується на [[S:|Вікіджерелах]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Скриншот wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Робочий стіл
|Цілком підтримуваний волонтерами редактор вікі-тексту. Він зазвичай запускається як гаджет або користувацький скрипт, але на деяких Вікіпедіях не Вікімедіа — як розширення.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Скриншот редактора коду|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Робочий стіл
|Це використовується для редагування JavaScript та інших сторінок коду.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Поточний редактор вікітексту {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Скриншот редагування вікітексту на Mobile Web|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Мобільні пристрої
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Переклад вмісту]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Скриншот редактора Перекладу вмісту|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Робочий стіл
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Структуровані обговорення]] (раніше відомий як Потік)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Скриншот коментаря та початку відповіді на нього у Структурованих обговореннях|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Робочий стіл і мобільна версія
|Структуровані обговорення підтримують вікітекст і візуальні режими.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Редактор у застосунку для [[$android-faq|Android]].&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Скриншот редагування інтерфейсу на телефоні Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Мобільні пристрої
|
|-
|Редактор у застосунку для [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Скриншот редагування інтерфейсу на iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Мобільні пристрої
|
|-
|Редактор [[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Робочий стіл
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Редактор лістингу Вікімандрів]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Робочий стіл
|Спеціалізований заснований на JavaScript засіб редагування для вставки одного з декількох шаблонів на Вікімандрах
|-
|}

== Колишні ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Колишнє програмне забезпечення редагування на Вікіпедіях Вікімедіа
|-
!Засіб редагування
!Скриншот
!Рік
!Платформа
!Примітки
|-
|«Класичний» редактор JavaScript у 2006 році, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Скриншот редактора вікітексту 2006 року|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Робочий стіл
|Його можна було бачити, коли налаштування «showtoolbar» було увімкнено протягом 2006—2010 років. Після того він показувався лише для користувачів, які вимкнули налаштування «enhanced-toolbar» (редактор 2010 року). Цей редактор було [[phab:T30856|вилучено]] в [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Подібна панель інструментів доступна як підтримуваний волонтерами локальний додаток у деяких Вікіпедіях.
|-
|Оригінальний редактор вікітексту MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Мобільні пристрої
|Це було специфічним для мобільних пристроїв набором модифікацій до настільного редактора вікітексту 2003 року. Більше не розгортається.
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>jcjuwh4m86yw9rbm5h3wzm7n5e5i4x8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402743</id>
      <parentid>5402721</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:11:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8490" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Ви могли шукати:

== Поточні ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Поточне програмне забезпечення редагування на Вікіпедіях Вікімедіа
!Засіб редагування
!Скриншот
!Рік
!Платформа
!Примітки
|-
|редактор МедіаВікі за замовчуванням, який є HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Скриншот HTML textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Робочий стіл і мобільна версія
|Він не має панелі засобів. Його можна побачити, коли JavaScript вимкнено чи коли «{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}» вимкнено в [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extension:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Скриншот WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Робочий стіл
|Його можна побачити, коли «{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}» увімкнено в [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Візуальний редактор]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Скриншот, що показує візуальний режим Візуального редактора|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Робочий стіл і мобільна версія
|Система редагування багатого тексту
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|редактор вікітексту 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Скриншот вбудованого режиму вікітексту Візуального редактора|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Робочий стіл
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Сторінка коректури]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Робочий стіл
|Використовується на [[S:|Вікіджерелах]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Скриншот wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Робочий стіл
|Цілком підтримуваний волонтерами редактор вікі-тексту. Він зазвичай запускається як гаджет або користувацький скрипт, але на деяких Вікіпедіях не Вікімедіа — як розширення.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Скриншот редактора коду|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Робочий стіл
|Це використовується для редагування JavaScript та інших сторінок коду.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Поточний редактор вікітексту {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Скриншот редагування вікітексту на Mobile Web|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Мобільні пристрої
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Переклад вмісту]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Скриншот редактора Перекладу вмісту|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Робочий стіл
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Структуровані обговорення]] (раніше відомий як Потік)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Скриншот коментаря та початку відповіді на нього у Структурованих обговореннях|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Робочий стіл і мобільна версія
|Структуровані обговорення підтримують вікітекст і візуальні режими.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|Редактор у застосунку для [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Android FAQ|Android]].
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Скриншот редагування інтерфейсу на телефоні Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Мобільні пристрої
|
|-
|Редактор у застосунку для [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Скриншот редагування інтерфейсу на iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Мобільні пристрої
|
|-
|Редактор [[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Робочий стіл
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Редактор лістингу Вікімандрів]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Робочий стіл
|Спеціалізований заснований на JavaScript засіб редагування для вставки одного з декількох шаблонів на Вікімандрах
|-
|}

== Колишні ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Колишнє програмне забезпечення редагування на Вікіпедіях Вікімедіа
|-
!Засіб редагування
!Скриншот
!Рік
!Платформа
!Примітки
|-
|«Класичний» редактор JavaScript у 2006 році, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Скриншот редактора вікітексту 2006 року|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Робочий стіл
|Його можна було бачити, коли налаштування «showtoolbar» було увімкнено протягом 2006—2010 років. Після того він показувався лише для користувачів, які вимкнули налаштування «enhanced-toolbar» (редактор 2010 року). Цей редактор було [[phab:T30856|вилучено]] в [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Подібна панель інструментів доступна як підтримуваний волонтерами локальний додаток у деяких Вікіпедіях.
|-
|Оригінальний редактор вікітексту MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Мобільні пристрої
|Це було специфічним для мобільних пристроїв набором модифікацій до настільного редактора вікітексту 2003 року. Більше не розгортається.
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>tdiyh12zezqwfpdtrkyrwaa0jcfwgoa</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/63/uk</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>766282</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402742</id>
      <parentid>2728822</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:11:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="63" xml:space="preserve">Редактор у застосунку для [[$1|Android]].</text>
      <sha1>t1xjhtirei3g9i763j68a9nuymzgblq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/67/uk</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>766286</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402720</id>
      <parentid>2728829</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:07:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="58" xml:space="preserve">Редактор у застосунку для [[$1|iOS]]</text>
      <sha1>37xx5cjlgkp6rala9reia27uu6xhheq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Page Previews/ja</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>767761</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402122</id>
      <parentid>5390134</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:19:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="37187" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
'''ページプレビュー''' ('''Page Previews''') 機能は、ある内容を読みながら単語や概念の意味を調べるときに、いくつもタブを開くしかなくなるという、利用者が直面する問題のひとつを解決します。
読者が他の記事へのリンクにマウスポインターを当てると、ページプレビューがリンク先の内容の要約と画像（存在する場合）を表示します。
その時点でリンク先へ飛んで熟読するか、元の記事を読み進めるかどうか決めやすくなります。
ページプレビュー機能の完全な説明は[[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|こちら]]を参照してください。
2018年5月以降のすべての関連技術文書は、[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ こちらのブログ投稿]にまとめてあります。

関連のプロジェクトに'''出典プレビュー''' Reference Previews 機能があります。読者が脚注マーカーにマウスを当てると、脚注の内容をその場で表示できます。この機能の説明文書は [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|このプロジェクト専用のページ]] をご参照ください。

== はじめに ==
ページプレビューはリンクへ飛ぶ時間の無駄を省き、あるいは読者が元の話題から離れることなく学習するチャンスを得るように設計されました。読んでいる内容の把握や、知らない単語、ものごと、できごと、発想を手早く調べることができます。
ページプレビューの利用者には記事の概要があらかじめわかるため、記事を読みながら別のページへ飛ぶかどうか決めるのに役立ちます。
途中で知らない概念にぶつかっても、記事を1本読了する楽しみが中断したり他のページに気を取られることもありません。ページにとどまったまま、その場で概念のチラ見ができるのです。
この場合、利用者の体験はますますスムーズになります。

同様の拡張機能は数年前から要望が多く（[[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|一覧]]）、問題の解決によく使われているガジェットもあります（編集作業を重視した[[:en:Wikipedia:Tools/Navigation popups|ナビゲーション・ポップアップ]]）。
ページプレビューの開発は2014年にベータ版拡張機能として始まり、利用者の人気とフィードバックが最も高く使用感の差が最も大きいとされています。
[[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|ホバーカード専門のトークページ]]ではプロジェクト全体にわたるいくつもの問題点が集まり、この2年以上をかけて改良を続けて来ました。
モバイル版のページプレビュー同等の機能はAndroid appとして[[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|2015年9月]]に実装、ページ単位でリンクのクリック件数を20%引き上げる効果をもたらしています。

ログインしていない匿名利用者も好みに応じ、ページプレビューの[[#settings|設定パネル]]を操作して、有効と無効の切り替えができます。
ログイン利用者は「特別ページ:個人設定」の「表示」タブで設定ができます。
ただし、ナビゲーション・ポップアップ表示を有効にしたままページプレビューを使おうとすると（ベータ版機能として有効にしてあるログイン利用者の場合にありがち）、このポップアップ表示が優先されます。
そこでページプレビューの使用中は、このポップアップ表示を無効にする必要があります。

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|ページプレビューの表示例]]

== デザイン ==

ページプレビューの現状の繰り返し処理ではプレビュー表示1回ごとに以下の要素が含まれます。
* 記事の最初の段落の一部
* 記事に載った画像1件（ある場合）。画像表示は記事内のリンクの位置により、縦もしくは横に表示します。
* 歯車アイコンでページプレビューの表示非表示を切り替え

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|ギリシャ語でのページプレビューの例
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|中国語でのページプレビューの例
File:Hovercard english.png|英語でのページプレビューの例
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== ナビゲーション・ポップアップとの主要な違い ===

* ナビゲーション・ポップアップは熟練したユーザー向けでサイトのユーザーには無用の機能を多く備えています。
ナビゲーション・ポップアップは、全てのウィキメディア・プロジェクトで、全ての名前空間へのリンクに対して動作します。ページプレビューは標準名前空間へのリンクにのみ機能するように設定されており、現在はウィキペディアのみで動作します。
* ページプレビューは読みやすさを優先した書式に設定されています。現状のナビゲーション・ポップアップでは文字は小さく行間も狭いのです。
* ページプレビューはログインの有無に関係なく利用できます。
* 同様の扱いにより、記事と表示の書式に落差がありません。
* リード部分の画像を強調してあり、ユーザーは文字と画像の両方から用語の意味を理解できます。
* ガジェットは使い方が状況と適合せず、それぞれの操作が読者と編集者のどちらに特化しているか検証が必要です。

=== HTML プレビュー ===

2018年3月1日現在、ページプレビューはHTML形式で表示しています。これにより顕著なバグがいくつか解決され、数学あるいは化学式などの数式を正しく表示し、記事の内容に即したページのプレビューを実現します。

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== 設定 ==

=== 有効/無効の切り替え ===

==== 匿名利用者 (未ログイン) ====
匿名利用者がページプレビューを無効にするには、それぞれのプレビューの下端にある歯車のアイコンを操作します。再び有効にするには、どのウィキページの最下部にもある「{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}」のリンクを操作します。
ブラウザーのJavaScriptを無効にして永久に無効にすることもできます。
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |ページプレビューを無効にするには設定の歯車を選択する
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | 無効 (訳注: この図では下段の Disable) を選んで無効にする
File:Reenablemodal.png | 有効に再設定する方法の説明を表示
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| ページプレビューを有効に再設定するリンクは、どのページでも最下部に表示（この図の最下段右端の青字 Enable previews）
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== ログイン利用者 ====

ログイン利用者がページプレビューの有効無効を切り替えるには、方法が2つあります。「特別ページ:個人設定」の「表示」タブで設定、もしくはそれぞれのページの終わりに表示される歯車アイコンから無効にすることになります。
* ログイン利用者が歯車の設定アイコンを押すと、システムにより個人設定ページへ遷移します。
* ベータ版段階でホバーカードを有効にしていた利用者の場合は、ページプレビュー導入後も以前の個人設定が有効です。個人設定の「表示」タブで確認することができます。

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| ページプレビューの有効化には、下辺にある歯車の設定アイコン（訳注：左の図）、もしくは個人設定ページ（同：右の図）から直接、オプションを変更する
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

== 成功の評価基準と機能の評価法 ==

質的かつ量的にテストを繰り返し、ページプレビュー機能の性能を評価しました。テストの目的を以下に示します。
* ページプレビュー機能はユーザーに使いやすく便利な機能か？
* ページプレビュー機能を使うと読む行為はどう変わり、ユーザーが読みたい記事を的確に選ぶ助けになるか？
* このページプレビュー機能を実装すると、資金集めに影響があるか？

=== 2015年のテスト : カタラン語とギリシャ語 ===

4カ月をかけてギリシャ語とカタラン語で機能テストを行いました。問題点とバグが多数報告され、合わせてアンケート形式でユーザーの満足度を計測しました。ユーザーの反響はおおむね好意的で、大部分の人からページプレビュー（ホバーカード）は便利で使い方がわかりやすく、使って楽しいと回答しています。

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
テスト結果の[[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/GreekCatalanTest|全文はこちら]]。
&lt;/div&gt;

=== 2016年の品質テスト ===
ページプレビューの機能に関するユーザーの受け止め方を調べ、読者の反応の変化を追うために[http://UserZoom.com UserZoom]ツールを採用した非監視の遠隔パネル調査を実施しました。
被験者の大部分はページプレビュー機能に好意的な反響でした。
さらに、被験者の大部分はページプレビュー機能の表示非表示を問題なく切り替えできました。
ユーザーはそのほか、概して肯定的な言葉で機能を語り、読む体験を妨げないと報告しています。

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
[[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|テスト結果の全文と分析はこちら]]。
&lt;/div&gt;

=== 2016年のA/Bテスト : ウィキペディアのハンガリー語版、イタリア語版、ロシア語版 ===

読む行為の変化およびページプレビュー（ホバーカード）のベータ版機能の完成度を調べるため、合計3回のA/Bテストをハンガリー語版は2016年の6月7日、イタリア語版とロシア語版は同年9月23日にそれぞれ実施しました。

これらテストの結果から、ページプレビューにより読む経験にプラスの変化がもたらされることが示唆されており、つまりページ内で別のページの内容を提供されると読むページの選択の精度が上がり、他のページを試し読みするコスト（訳注：時間や労力）が下がったため、ユーザーは単一の話題に集中できることを示しています。
データ収集と分析の過程ではバグや問題が頻発し、その対策と改善を通じてその後はエラーに煩わされずに試験を進めることができました。

[[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|テスト結果の全文と分析はこちら]]。

=== 2017年-2018年のA/Bテスト : ウィキペディアの英語版とドイツ語版 ===
製品に実装する前に、2017年10月から同年11月、同年12月から2018年2月にわたり、[[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|A/B テストを2回実施して機能の働きを測定しました]]。
詳細な結果は[[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|報告書にまとめてあり]]、ページ閲覧数は減少したものの、読者が開いた特定のページの総数は増加したことから、ページプレビュー機能を有効にすると、より多くの話題を読む可能性が示唆されます。
また[戻る]ボタンの使用回数が減り、ページプレビュー機能を無効にした率はごくわずかでした。
さらに、英語版ウィキペディアでは寄付金集めのテストも数回、実施しました。

== 英語版ウィキペディアの議論後の改善（2016年4月以降） ==

2016年4月以降の[[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |議論]]では多数のバグ解消、改善に加えてその他の要望が明らかになり、次の方法で表明しました。

ページプレビューが開いたまま「固まる」

*コードをリファクタリングしました。この問題は解消済みです。

太字の文字列と数式がプレビューで表示されない

*現在はプレビューをHTML形式で表示するため、表示内容と文章の内容は一致しています。

ホバーカード自体から機能を無効にしたい

*ログイン利用者も匿名利用者（ログインしていない）は現状では表示領域内の歯車アイコンから機能を無効にできます。

ナビゲーションポップアップとページプレビューが重ならないようにしてほしい

*ログイン利用者の場合、ナビゲーションポップアップか、ページプレビューか、どちらか一方のみ利用できます。ナビゲーションポップアップを利用するなら、先にそちらを無効にしないとページプレビューを利用できないし、その逆も同じです。
調査結果とA/Bテストの詳細な結果を開示してほしい。英語版ウィキペディアで大規模なA/Bテストを実施するべき
*上記の議論以降、[[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|A/Bテストを2回]]実施しており、第1回はハンガリー語版、ロシア語版、イタリア語版のウィキペディアが対象でした。さらに[[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |第2回]]は英語版とドイツ語版ウィキペディアでテストを行いました。

パフォーマンスへの影響を限定する

*パフォーマンスチームと共同でページプレビューに関わる問題を最低限に抑えようとしています。機能ごとの性能の詳細は[https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 ダッシュボード]を用意して提示しました。

匿名利用者（ログインしていない）に限定してプレビュー機能を有効にする方法がほしい

*これも実装済です。2018年3月現在、どのウィキペディアでも匿名利用者には既定でページプレビュー機能が有効になっています（英語版とドイツ語版を除外）。

機能を無効にした利用者の割合を公表してほしい

*2017年・2018年のA/Bテスト両方において、無効にした割合は約0.01%でした。以前のA/Bテスト同様に値が低いため、さらに[[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |量的テスト]]を実施、ユーザーが問題なくこの機能の有効・無効の切り替えができたかどうか調べてあります。結論としてはユーザーは機能の無効化を問題なくこなすことができたものの、実際に無効にした率は大変低かったのです。

この機能がありがた迷惑かどうかという情報を開示してほしい

*量的テストの結果に基づき、被験者はこの機能を邪魔だとも、ありがた迷惑だとも考えていないという結論に達しました。

== 対象から除外したページ ==

セキュリティ上の観点から、特定のページではページプレビューを読み込まない設定にしてあります。これらのページを内部で「ブラックリスト」と呼び、当初の一覧は右記で公開しています。{{phab|T170893}}

== 今後の繰り返し作業と改善点 ==

ページプレビューの実装に引き続き、機能の拡充を計画しています。追加を検討するものの一覧：

* 画像その他の設定:
** 多くのユーザーからページプレビュー内の画像を設定したいという要望が寄せられました。今後の実装に組みこむため、開発の進捗状態を https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995 で追跡しています。
** その他のログアウト状態の個人設定（詳細は[[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|こちら]]）
* 記事の題名 - 現状でページプレビューに表示できるのは記事の概要だけです。繰り返し処理として記事の概要と題名を同時に表示する方法を検討中
* 個人設定のツールチップ（[[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]）The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png| 
&lt;/gallery&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|ページの最下部までスクロールしなくても、ページプレビューなら脚注の情報を読むことができる
&lt;/gallery&gt;
* ウィキ間ページプレビュー ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]) 、ウィクショナリーに特化した下位節のリンクの扱い ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]])
* ナビゲーション・ポップアップと統合 - ナビゲーション・ポップアップで将来的に構想している機能も、ページプレビューの構成を拡張すると追加できる。
* ページプレビュー内の文章の利用 - ページプレビューに載った文章を利用したいという要望は多く、例えばコピペ、あるいは文章をフォームや記事の概要に書き出したりできるとよいという声があった。詳細はこちら（[[phab:T146097|phab:T146097]]）。
* ウィクショナリーの項目と統合し、マウスを当てると言葉の意味を表示。

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |未知の言葉に定義を与えるためウィクショナリーの項目を編集
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/FAQ|よくある質問]] ==

; ページプレビューの魅力は？
:この機能はウィキペディアの読者向けで、青字リンクの内容（意味）を見るためにわざわざリンク先のページを開いた経験のある人なら、誰でも便利に使えます。発想の源はたいへん人気のあるガジェットのひとつナビゲーションポップアップ[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia_talk:Tools/Navigation_popups Navigation popups]にあります。

; ページプレビューの便利さはどう数値化できる？
:ページプレビューはリンクを開くためのコストを下げるという発想に基づいて影響度を把握します。これは言い換えるなら、ユーザーは負担を感じずにリンクを開けるかどうかということです。つまりマウスを（無意識ではなく）当てて内容を閲覧したリンクの数が、実際にリンクをクリックした件数より多くなれば、ページプレビューが成功したと言えるはずです。反対に、失敗を示す指標として以下に注目していきます。
:*マウスを当てるホバーが偶然ではないかどうか - 一定条件でホバーの滞留時間を計測し、マウスをリンクに当てたのが偶然だったという割合が高くないと確認する必要があります。一例としてリンクにマウスを当ててからページプレビューが表示されるまでの滞留時間の設定を250ミリ秒にするなら、特定のリンクにマウスを当てたユーザーで、250ミリ秒以上滞留してからクリックする率は低いと確認しなければならないのです。
:*ページプレビューを利用するとページ閲覧数が減る可能性があります。プレビューすれば知りたい情報がわかるからで、それ自体は問題になりません。ただし（もし）閲覧数が減少したなら、編集件数や寄付件数に目立った影響が出ないように注視する必要があります。
:*リンクをホバーしたユーザーが実際にリンク先を開くのは高確率（%）- このことからその人たちは本来、リンク先を訪問する意思があったと推定されます。もしそうであれば、ページプレビューは不用な手間になりかねません。マウスを当ててからクリックスルーに至る確率（%）に基準を設けます。Androidでは同様の機能は60%以下ですが、デスクトップ版ではもっと低いと予測しています。
:*ページプレビューを無効にしたユーザーは低比率（機能を無効にする方法を知っているという前提）- ユーザーがこの機能を歓迎していると解釈。
;既定で Navpops が有効の場合はどうなりますか?
:Navpops が有効だとページプレビューは自動で無効になり、Navpops を無効にすると使用できます。個人設定の既定を変更しなかったのは、Navpops 利用者の使用感を変更しないためです。注記: ブラウザによっては変更を反映するため、キャッシュの破棄が必要な場合があります。 
; ページプレビューの個人設定には何種類ありますか?
:現状、ページプレビューが使える場面（イベント）ごとに、ユーザーがその場で有効と無効を切り替える設定です。イベントが変わり、無効にしようと判断したときに変更できます。ログイン利用者の場合、各自の個人設定からページプレビューを常に有効にできます。匿名利用者（ログインせずに利用）は、ページ下部の「プレビューを有効にする」ボタンで有効にできます。
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

管理者はプロジェクトレベルでホバーが起動するまで利用者がどれほどリンクに滞留するか決めることができます。プロジェクトを保守的にしておきたい場合、遅れが長くなる可能性があります。ウィキメディア財団は最適な滞留時間に関する推奨事項を整え、かつ偶発的なホバーを最小限に抑えながら最高のユーザーエクスペリエンスを提供します。

; もし利用者が希望するなら、ページプレビューをすぐに有効にしてはいけませんか？
:残念ながら、最初に表示しないまま、新機能をユーザーに伝える良い方法はありません。中央通知バナーの使用がこれまで提案されてきたものの、もし2週間にわたって表示したとしても、将来のユーザーのニーズは解決されず、かといってそういうバナーを継続的に表示することは望ましくありません。 新機能をユーザーに知らせるには、ホバーオーバーの使用が最適です。
; ページプレビューがページ閲読に与える影響とは何でしょうか?
:A/B テストの結果を見る限り、どのウィキペディアでもセッション深度に大きな減少はありません。セッション深度の平均（セッション単位で閲読されたページ数）は、ホバーカードを有効にしたグループでも無効のほうでもプレビューの表示が[[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|ほぼ同等でした]]。
; アクセシビリティに差はありますか？
:ページプレビューは、リンクに対してフォーカスあるいはホバーの状態が発生したときのみ有効になります。キーボード・ナビゲーションの利用者も使用できます。スクリーンリーダーの場合、ページプレビューがツールチップだと述べる適切な構成要素[[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]]を供えています。つまり、スクリーンリーダーのソフトウェアはページプレビューを無視します。
; ページプレビューについて意見や改善点の指摘をしたいのですが、連絡先はどこですか？
:[[Talk:Page_Previews|ページプレビューの議論のページ]]に投稿してください。
; ページプレビューを有効にすると、ページの過去の版が表示されてしまいます。正しく表示するには？
:ページプレビューは特定のページの[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|キャッシュ]]した版を表示します。そのため、ご自分が編集した直後にそのページの最新版プレビューを見るには、ページの[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|キャッシュを破棄]]してください。
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

== コード ==
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
;解析と計装
:* ページプレビューを使い、さまざまな利用法の要素が計測されました。詳細は {{ll|Extension:Popups|nsp=0}} 拡張機能のページを参照、ご不明の点はお気軽に質問をお願いします。
:* ページプリビュー機能を経由して実際にコンテンツを利用したかどうか調べる方法として、既存のページビュー機能の統計値と総計的に同等の信頼性を確保するため、別個の仕組みを[[phab:T186728|設定して]]2018年4月から導入しました。その集計データを一部公表する[[phab:T193524|案]]があがっており、実現するとたとえばウィキペディアの編集者や学術的な研究者の益に期すると予想されます。

== プロジェクト段階の実装の議論 ==

=== 2018年7月の実装の現状 ===

ページプレビュー機能をすべての言語版のウィキペディアに実装しました。匿名利用者ならびに登録してからまだ日の浅い利用者には既定で表示され、2018年7月10日以前に登録されたアカウントの場合は既定では非表示（無効）です。

=== 2018年4月の実装の現状 ===

英語版およびドイツ語版ウィキペディアの次の更新に向けた段階として、2018年4月前半を予定しています。この展開ではログアウトしたユーザーに対して既定で提供しようとしています。'''ログイン利用者には変更がないという意味です'''。ログイン編集者には現状で有効にしていない限り、既定で無効になります。有効にするには、個人設定の「表示」タブを変更します。もし以前からこの拡張機能を有効にしてあった場合は、引き続き有効のままです。

ログイン利用者向けの変更計画には、皆さんのフィードバックを募集している案件がいくつかあります:

* ログイン利用者の既定として無効に設定する案。  
* 新規利用者に限定して、既定で無効に設定する案。現状では、ユーザーが閲読者からアカウントを作成して投稿者に変わると、まるでホバーカード機能が消えてしまったように思われ、混乱を招いています。機能の実装の準備として設定のこの点を変更、新規利用者全員に既定で有効にする予定です。
* すでに活動しているログイン利用者には既定で有効に設定する案（ただし全員を対象に有効にしても、 NAVPOPS 利用者に限っては自動で無効化）。

=== 実装の計画 ===

実装は2017年初頭にカタロニア語、ギリシャ語、ハンガリー語、ロシア語版で開始しました。[[:ja:A/Bテスト|A/Bテスト]]の結果はたいへん高評価でした。その後、以下の表に示す通り、他のウィキペディア群にも段階的に実装したいと考えています。

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! コード !! 言語 !! 時期 !! 入門期 !! 成功 !! 日付
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| 上位6言語版を除くウィキペディアの全ての言語版 || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;この期間中の4月19日、[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|このメッセージ]]を247言語版の井戸端（とその同類）に配信&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

=== 導入前のお試し期間 ===

この機能の導入前のお試し期間は、ページプレビューの扱いをコミュニティ単位で同意して決めます。既定で導入するのか、導入前のお試し期間を設けて採用の否決ができるようにするのか選んでください。

== 関連項目 ==

* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (実際にページを訪問しないページプレビュー済みのAGGREGATE関数を記録する - 現状では内部的な - データセット)
* [[:ja:WP:POP|ナビゲーション・ポップアップ]] - 編集作業を重視するガジェットで大多数のウィキに実装。2005年Lupin制作
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ ウィキメディア財団のブログ - Hovercards now available as a Beta Feature on all Wikimedia wikis] - ウィキメディアの全ウィキでホバーカードをベータ版で提供開始 (2014年3月)
* 開発当初の諸元 - [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]]および[https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes]を参照。
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|A list of similar browser extensions]] - 同様のブラウザ拡張機能の一覧
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - ページプレビューのAPIの諸元

== 脚注 ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9ixay69mb3hjhmnm6d9itabhgjq2dw4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402125</id>
      <parentid>5402122</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:19:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="37147" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
'''ページプレビュー''' ('''Page Previews''') 機能は、ある内容を読みながら単語や概念の意味を調べるときに、いくつもタブを開くしかなくなるという、利用者が直面する問題のひとつを解決します。
読者が他の記事へのリンクにマウスポインターを当てると、ページプレビューがリンク先の内容の要約と画像（存在する場合）を表示します。
その時点でリンク先へ飛んで熟読するか、元の記事を読み進めるかどうか決めやすくなります。
ページプレビュー機能の完全な説明は[[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|こちら]]を参照してください。
2018年5月以降のすべての関連技術文書は、[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ こちらのブログ投稿]にまとめてあります。

関連のプロジェクトに'''出典プレビュー''' Reference Previews 機能があります。読者が脚注マーカーにマウスを当てると、脚注の内容をその場で表示できます。この機能の説明文書は [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|このプロジェクト専用のページ]] をご参照ください。

== はじめに ==
ページプレビューはリンクへ飛ぶ時間の無駄を省き、あるいは読者が元の話題から離れることなく学習するチャンスを得るように設計されました。読んでいる内容の把握や、知らない単語、ものごと、できごと、発想を手早く調べることができます。
ページプレビューの利用者には記事の概要があらかじめわかるため、記事を読みながら別のページへ飛ぶかどうか決めるのに役立ちます。
途中で知らない概念にぶつかっても、記事を1本読了する楽しみが中断したり他のページに気を取られることもありません。ページにとどまったまま、その場で概念のチラ見ができるのです。
この場合、利用者の体験はますますスムーズになります。

同様の拡張機能は数年前から要望が多く（[[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|一覧]]）、問題の解決によく使われているガジェットもあります（編集作業を重視した[[:en:Wikipedia:Tools/Navigation popups|ナビゲーション・ポップアップ]]）。
ページプレビューの開発は2014年にベータ版拡張機能として始まり、利用者の人気とフィードバックが最も高く使用感の差が最も大きいとされています。
[[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|ホバーカード専門のトークページ]]ではプロジェクト全体にわたるいくつもの問題点が集まり、この2年以上をかけて改良を続けて来ました。
モバイル版のページプレビュー同等の機能はAndroid appとして[[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|2015年9月]]に実装、ページ単位でリンクのクリック件数を20%引き上げる効果をもたらしています。

ログインしていない匿名利用者も好みに応じ、ページプレビューの[[#settings|設定パネル]]を操作して、有効と無効の切り替えができます。
ログイン利用者は「特別ページ:個人設定」の「表示」タブで設定ができます。
ただし、ナビゲーション・ポップアップ表示を有効にしたままページプレビューを使おうとすると（ベータ版機能として有効にしてあるログイン利用者の場合にありがち）、このポップアップ表示が優先されます。
そこでページプレビューの使用中は、このポップアップ表示を無効にする必要があります。

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|ページプレビューの表示例]]

== デザイン ==

ページプレビューの現状の繰り返し処理ではプレビュー表示1回ごとに以下の要素が含まれます。
* 記事の最初の段落の一部
* 記事に載った画像1件（ある場合）。画像表示は記事内のリンクの位置により、縦もしくは横に表示します。
* 歯車アイコンでページプレビューの表示非表示を切り替え

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|ギリシャ語でのページプレビューの例
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|中国語でのページプレビューの例
File:Hovercard english.png|英語でのページプレビューの例
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== ナビゲーション・ポップアップとの主要な違い ===

* ナビゲーション・ポップアップは熟練したユーザー向けでサイトのユーザーには無用の機能を多く備えています。
ナビゲーション・ポップアップは、全てのウィキメディア・プロジェクトで、全ての名前空間へのリンクに対して動作します。ページプレビューは標準名前空間へのリンクにのみ機能するように設定されており、現在はウィキペディアのみで動作します。
* ページプレビューは読みやすさを優先した書式に設定されています。現状のナビゲーション・ポップアップでは文字は小さく行間も狭いのです。
* ページプレビューはログインの有無に関係なく利用できます。
* 同様の扱いにより、記事と表示の書式に落差がありません。
* リード部分の画像を強調してあり、ユーザーは文字と画像の両方から用語の意味を理解できます。
* ガジェットは使い方が状況と適合せず、それぞれの操作が読者と編集者のどちらに特化しているか検証が必要です。

=== HTML プレビュー ===

2018年3月1日現在、ページプレビューはHTML形式で表示しています。これにより顕著なバグがいくつか解決され、数学あるいは化学式などの数式を正しく表示し、記事の内容に即したページのプレビューを実現します。

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== 設定 ==

=== 有効/無効の切り替え ===

==== 匿名利用者 (未ログイン) ====
匿名利用者がページプレビューを無効にするには、それぞれのプレビューの下端にある歯車のアイコンを操作します。再び有効にするには、どのウィキページの最下部にもある「{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}」のリンクを操作します。
ブラウザーのJavaScriptを無効にして永久に無効にすることもできます。
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |ページプレビューを無効にするには設定の歯車を選択する
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | 無効 (訳注: この図では下段の Disable) を選んで無効にする
File:Reenablemodal.png | 有効に再設定する方法の説明を表示
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| ページプレビューを有効に再設定するリンクは、どのページでも最下部に表示（この図の最下段右端の青字 Enable previews）
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== ログイン利用者 ====

ログイン利用者がページプレビューの有効無効を切り替えるには、方法が2つあります。「特別ページ:個人設定」の「表示」タブで設定、もしくはそれぞれのページの終わりに表示される歯車アイコンから無効にすることになります。
* ログイン利用者が歯車の設定アイコンを押すと、システムにより個人設定ページへ遷移します。
* ベータ版段階でホバーカードを有効にしていた利用者の場合は、ページプレビュー導入後も以前の個人設定が有効です。個人設定の「表示」タブで確認することができます。

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| ページプレビューの有効化には、下辺にある歯車の設定アイコン（訳注：左の図）、もしくは個人設定ページ（同：右の図）から直接、オプションを変更する
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

== 成功の評価基準と機能の評価法 ==

質的かつ量的にテストを繰り返し、ページプレビュー機能の性能を評価しました。テストの目的を以下に示します。
* ページプレビュー機能はユーザーに使いやすく便利な機能か？
* ページプレビュー機能を使うと読む行為はどう変わり、ユーザーが読みたい記事を的確に選ぶ助けになるか？
* このページプレビュー機能を実装すると、資金集めに影響があるか？

=== 2015年のテスト : カタラン語とギリシャ語 ===

4カ月をかけてギリシャ語とカタラン語で機能テストを行いました。問題点とバグが多数報告され、合わせてアンケート形式でユーザーの満足度を計測しました。ユーザーの反響はおおむね好意的で、大部分の人からページプレビュー（ホバーカード）は便利で使い方がわかりやすく、使って楽しいと回答しています。

テスト結果の[[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/GreekCatalanTest|全文はこちら]]。

=== 2016年の品質テスト ===
ページプレビューの機能に関するユーザーの受け止め方を調べ、読者の反応の変化を追うために[http://UserZoom.com UserZoom]ツールを採用した非監視の遠隔パネル調査を実施しました。
被験者の大部分はページプレビュー機能に好意的な反響でした。
さらに、被験者の大部分はページプレビュー機能の表示非表示を問題なく切り替えできました。
ユーザーはそのほか、概して肯定的な言葉で機能を語り、読む体験を妨げないと報告しています。

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
[[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|テスト結果の全文と分析はこちら]]。
&lt;/div&gt;

=== 2016年のA/Bテスト : ウィキペディアのハンガリー語版、イタリア語版、ロシア語版 ===

読む行為の変化およびページプレビュー（ホバーカード）のベータ版機能の完成度を調べるため、合計3回のA/Bテストをハンガリー語版は2016年の6月7日、イタリア語版とロシア語版は同年9月23日にそれぞれ実施しました。

これらテストの結果から、ページプレビューにより読む経験にプラスの変化がもたらされることが示唆されており、つまりページ内で別のページの内容を提供されると読むページの選択の精度が上がり、他のページを試し読みするコスト（訳注：時間や労力）が下がったため、ユーザーは単一の話題に集中できることを示しています。
データ収集と分析の過程ではバグや問題が頻発し、その対策と改善を通じてその後はエラーに煩わされずに試験を進めることができました。

[[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|テスト結果の全文と分析はこちら]]。

=== 2017年-2018年のA/Bテスト : ウィキペディアの英語版とドイツ語版 ===
製品に実装する前に、2017年10月から同年11月、同年12月から2018年2月にわたり、[[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|A/B テストを2回実施して機能の働きを測定しました]]。
詳細な結果は[[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|報告書にまとめてあり]]、ページ閲覧数は減少したものの、読者が開いた特定のページの総数は増加したことから、ページプレビュー機能を有効にすると、より多くの話題を読む可能性が示唆されます。
また[戻る]ボタンの使用回数が減り、ページプレビュー機能を無効にした率はごくわずかでした。
さらに、英語版ウィキペディアでは寄付金集めのテストも数回、実施しました。

== 英語版ウィキペディアの議論後の改善（2016年4月以降） ==

2016年4月以降の[[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |議論]]では多数のバグ解消、改善に加えてその他の要望が明らかになり、次の方法で表明しました。

ページプレビューが開いたまま「固まる」

*コードをリファクタリングしました。この問題は解消済みです。

太字の文字列と数式がプレビューで表示されない

*現在はプレビューをHTML形式で表示するため、表示内容と文章の内容は一致しています。

ホバーカード自体から機能を無効にしたい

*ログイン利用者も匿名利用者（ログインしていない）は現状では表示領域内の歯車アイコンから機能を無効にできます。

ナビゲーションポップアップとページプレビューが重ならないようにしてほしい

*ログイン利用者の場合、ナビゲーションポップアップか、ページプレビューか、どちらか一方のみ利用できます。ナビゲーションポップアップを利用するなら、先にそちらを無効にしないとページプレビューを利用できないし、その逆も同じです。
調査結果とA/Bテストの詳細な結果を開示してほしい。英語版ウィキペディアで大規模なA/Bテストを実施するべき
*上記の議論以降、[[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|A/Bテストを2回]]実施しており、第1回はハンガリー語版、ロシア語版、イタリア語版のウィキペディアが対象でした。さらに[[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |第2回]]は英語版とドイツ語版ウィキペディアでテストを行いました。

パフォーマンスへの影響を限定する

*パフォーマンスチームと共同でページプレビューに関わる問題を最低限に抑えようとしています。機能ごとの性能の詳細は[https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 ダッシュボード]を用意して提示しました。

匿名利用者（ログインしていない）に限定してプレビュー機能を有効にする方法がほしい

*これも実装済です。2018年3月現在、どのウィキペディアでも匿名利用者には既定でページプレビュー機能が有効になっています（英語版とドイツ語版を除外）。

機能を無効にした利用者の割合を公表してほしい

*2017年・2018年のA/Bテスト両方において、無効にした割合は約0.01%でした。以前のA/Bテスト同様に値が低いため、さらに[[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |量的テスト]]を実施、ユーザーが問題なくこの機能の有効・無効の切り替えができたかどうか調べてあります。結論としてはユーザーは機能の無効化を問題なくこなすことができたものの、実際に無効にした率は大変低かったのです。

この機能がありがた迷惑かどうかという情報を開示してほしい

*量的テストの結果に基づき、被験者はこの機能を邪魔だとも、ありがた迷惑だとも考えていないという結論に達しました。

== 対象から除外したページ ==

セキュリティ上の観点から、特定のページではページプレビューを読み込まない設定にしてあります。これらのページを内部で「ブラックリスト」と呼び、当初の一覧は右記で公開しています。{{phab|T170893}}

== 今後の繰り返し作業と改善点 ==

ページプレビューの実装に引き続き、機能の拡充を計画しています。追加を検討するものの一覧：

* 画像その他の設定:
** 多くのユーザーからページプレビュー内の画像を設定したいという要望が寄せられました。今後の実装に組みこむため、開発の進捗状態を https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995 で追跡しています。
** その他のログアウト状態の個人設定（詳細は[[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|こちら]]）
* 記事の題名 - 現状でページプレビューに表示できるのは記事の概要だけです。繰り返し処理として記事の概要と題名を同時に表示する方法を検討中
* 個人設定のツールチップ（[[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]）The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png| 
&lt;/gallery&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|ページの最下部までスクロールしなくても、ページプレビューなら脚注の情報を読むことができる
&lt;/gallery&gt;
* ウィキ間ページプレビュー ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]) 、ウィクショナリーに特化した下位節のリンクの扱い ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]])
* ナビゲーション・ポップアップと統合 - ナビゲーション・ポップアップで将来的に構想している機能も、ページプレビューの構成を拡張すると追加できる。
* ページプレビュー内の文章の利用 - ページプレビューに載った文章を利用したいという要望は多く、例えばコピペ、あるいは文章をフォームや記事の概要に書き出したりできるとよいという声があった。詳細はこちら（[[phab:T146097|phab:T146097]]）。
* ウィクショナリーの項目と統合し、マウスを当てると言葉の意味を表示。

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |未知の言葉に定義を与えるためウィクショナリーの項目を編集
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/FAQ|よくある質問]] ==

; ページプレビューの魅力は？
:この機能はウィキペディアの読者向けで、青字リンクの内容（意味）を見るためにわざわざリンク先のページを開いた経験のある人なら、誰でも便利に使えます。発想の源はたいへん人気のあるガジェットのひとつナビゲーションポップアップ[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia_talk:Tools/Navigation_popups Navigation popups]にあります。

; ページプレビューの便利さはどう数値化できる？
:ページプレビューはリンクを開くためのコストを下げるという発想に基づいて影響度を把握します。これは言い換えるなら、ユーザーは負担を感じずにリンクを開けるかどうかということです。つまりマウスを（無意識ではなく）当てて内容を閲覧したリンクの数が、実際にリンクをクリックした件数より多くなれば、ページプレビューが成功したと言えるはずです。反対に、失敗を示す指標として以下に注目していきます。
:*マウスを当てるホバーが偶然ではないかどうか - 一定条件でホバーの滞留時間を計測し、マウスをリンクに当てたのが偶然だったという割合が高くないと確認する必要があります。一例としてリンクにマウスを当ててからページプレビューが表示されるまでの滞留時間の設定を250ミリ秒にするなら、特定のリンクにマウスを当てたユーザーで、250ミリ秒以上滞留してからクリックする率は低いと確認しなければならないのです。
:*ページプレビューを利用するとページ閲覧数が減る可能性があります。プレビューすれば知りたい情報がわかるからで、それ自体は問題になりません。ただし（もし）閲覧数が減少したなら、編集件数や寄付件数に目立った影響が出ないように注視する必要があります。
:*リンクをホバーしたユーザーが実際にリンク先を開くのは高確率（%）- このことからその人たちは本来、リンク先を訪問する意思があったと推定されます。もしそうであれば、ページプレビューは不用な手間になりかねません。マウスを当ててからクリックスルーに至る確率（%）に基準を設けます。Androidでは同様の機能は60%以下ですが、デスクトップ版ではもっと低いと予測しています。
:*ページプレビューを無効にしたユーザーは低比率（機能を無効にする方法を知っているという前提）- ユーザーがこの機能を歓迎していると解釈。
;既定で Navpops が有効の場合はどうなりますか?
:Navpops が有効だとページプレビューは自動で無効になり、Navpops を無効にすると使用できます。個人設定の既定を変更しなかったのは、Navpops 利用者の使用感を変更しないためです。注記: ブラウザによっては変更を反映するため、キャッシュの破棄が必要な場合があります。 
; ページプレビューの個人設定には何種類ありますか?
:現状、ページプレビューが使える場面（イベント）ごとに、ユーザーがその場で有効と無効を切り替える設定です。イベントが変わり、無効にしようと判断したときに変更できます。ログイン利用者の場合、各自の個人設定からページプレビューを常に有効にできます。匿名利用者（ログインせずに利用）は、ページ下部の「プレビューを有効にする」ボタンで有効にできます。
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

管理者はプロジェクトレベルでホバーが起動するまで利用者がどれほどリンクに滞留するか決めることができます。プロジェクトを保守的にしておきたい場合、遅れが長くなる可能性があります。ウィキメディア財団は最適な滞留時間に関する推奨事項を整え、かつ偶発的なホバーを最小限に抑えながら最高のユーザーエクスペリエンスを提供します。

; もし利用者が希望するなら、ページプレビューをすぐに有効にしてはいけませんか？
:残念ながら、最初に表示しないまま、新機能をユーザーに伝える良い方法はありません。中央通知バナーの使用がこれまで提案されてきたものの、もし2週間にわたって表示したとしても、将来のユーザーのニーズは解決されず、かといってそういうバナーを継続的に表示することは望ましくありません。 新機能をユーザーに知らせるには、ホバーオーバーの使用が最適です。
; ページプレビューがページ閲読に与える影響とは何でしょうか?
:A/B テストの結果を見る限り、どのウィキペディアでもセッション深度に大きな減少はありません。セッション深度の平均（セッション単位で閲読されたページ数）は、ホバーカードを有効にしたグループでも無効のほうでもプレビューの表示が[[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|ほぼ同等でした]]。
; アクセシビリティに差はありますか？
:ページプレビューは、リンクに対してフォーカスあるいはホバーの状態が発生したときのみ有効になります。キーボード・ナビゲーションの利用者も使用できます。スクリーンリーダーの場合、ページプレビューがツールチップだと述べる適切な構成要素[[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]]を供えています。つまり、スクリーンリーダーのソフトウェアはページプレビューを無視します。
; ページプレビューについて意見や改善点の指摘をしたいのですが、連絡先はどこですか？
:[[Talk:Page_Previews|ページプレビューの議論のページ]]に投稿してください。
; ページプレビューを有効にすると、ページの過去の版が表示されてしまいます。正しく表示するには？
:ページプレビューは特定のページの[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|キャッシュ]]した版を表示します。そのため、ご自分が編集した直後にそのページの最新版プレビューを見るには、ページの[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|キャッシュを破棄]]してください。
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

== コード ==
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
;解析と計装
:* ページプレビューを使い、さまざまな利用法の要素が計測されました。詳細は {{ll|Extension:Popups|nsp=0}} 拡張機能のページを参照、ご不明の点はお気軽に質問をお願いします。
:* ページプリビュー機能を経由して実際にコンテンツを利用したかどうか調べる方法として、既存のページビュー機能の統計値と総計的に同等の信頼性を確保するため、別個の仕組みを[[phab:T186728|設定して]]2018年4月から導入しました。その集計データを一部公表する[[phab:T193524|案]]があがっており、実現するとたとえばウィキペディアの編集者や学術的な研究者の益に期すると予想されます。

== プロジェクト段階の実装の議論 ==

=== 2018年7月の実装の現状 ===

ページプレビュー機能をすべての言語版のウィキペディアに実装しました。匿名利用者ならびに登録してからまだ日の浅い利用者には既定で表示され、2018年7月10日以前に登録されたアカウントの場合は既定では非表示（無効）です。

=== 2018年4月の実装の現状 ===

英語版およびドイツ語版ウィキペディアの次の更新に向けた段階として、2018年4月前半を予定しています。この展開ではログアウトしたユーザーに対して既定で提供しようとしています。'''ログイン利用者には変更がないという意味です'''。ログイン編集者には現状で有効にしていない限り、既定で無効になります。有効にするには、個人設定の「表示」タブを変更します。もし以前からこの拡張機能を有効にしてあった場合は、引き続き有効のままです。

ログイン利用者向けの変更計画には、皆さんのフィードバックを募集している案件がいくつかあります:

* ログイン利用者の既定として無効に設定する案。  
* 新規利用者に限定して、既定で無効に設定する案。現状では、ユーザーが閲読者からアカウントを作成して投稿者に変わると、まるでホバーカード機能が消えてしまったように思われ、混乱を招いています。機能の実装の準備として設定のこの点を変更、新規利用者全員に既定で有効にする予定です。
* すでに活動しているログイン利用者には既定で有効に設定する案（ただし全員を対象に有効にしても、 NAVPOPS 利用者に限っては自動で無効化）。

=== 実装の計画 ===

実装は2017年初頭にカタロニア語、ギリシャ語、ハンガリー語、ロシア語版で開始しました。[[:ja:A/Bテスト|A/Bテスト]]の結果はたいへん高評価でした。その後、以下の表に示す通り、他のウィキペディア群にも段階的に実装したいと考えています。

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! コード !! 言語 !! 時期 !! 入門期 !! 成功 !! 日付
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| 上位6言語版を除くウィキペディアの全ての言語版 || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;この期間中の4月19日、[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|このメッセージ]]を247言語版の井戸端（とその同類）に配信&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

=== 導入前のお試し期間 ===

この機能の導入前のお試し期間は、ページプレビューの扱いをコミュニティ単位で同意して決めます。既定で導入するのか、導入前のお試し期間を設けて採用の否決ができるようにするのか選んでください。

== 関連項目 ==

* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (実際にページを訪問しないページプレビュー済みのAGGREGATE関数を記録する - 現状では内部的な - データセット)
* [[:ja:WP:POP|ナビゲーション・ポップアップ]] - 編集作業を重視するガジェットで大多数のウィキに実装。2005年Lupin制作
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ ウィキメディア財団のブログ - Hovercards now available as a Beta Feature on all Wikimedia wikis] - ウィキメディアの全ウィキでホバーカードをベータ版で提供開始 (2014年3月)
* 開発当初の諸元 - [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]]および[https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes]を参照。
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|A list of similar browser extensions]] - 同様のブラウザ拡張機能の一覧
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - ページプレビューのAPIの諸元

== 脚注 ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>swlnxb5j5oexirxwlr1bv8jdzbzddmi</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402131</id>
      <parentid>5402125</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:20:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="37107" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
'''ページプレビュー''' ('''Page Previews''') 機能は、ある内容を読みながら単語や概念の意味を調べるときに、いくつもタブを開くしかなくなるという、利用者が直面する問題のひとつを解決します。
読者が他の記事へのリンクにマウスポインターを当てると、ページプレビューがリンク先の内容の要約と画像（存在する場合）を表示します。
その時点でリンク先へ飛んで熟読するか、元の記事を読み進めるかどうか決めやすくなります。
ページプレビュー機能の完全な説明は[[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|こちら]]を参照してください。
2018年5月以降のすべての関連技術文書は、[https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ こちらのブログ投稿]にまとめてあります。

関連のプロジェクトに'''出典プレビュー''' Reference Previews 機能があります。読者が脚注マーカーにマウスを当てると、脚注の内容をその場で表示できます。この機能の説明文書は [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|このプロジェクト専用のページ]] をご参照ください。

== はじめに ==
ページプレビューはリンクへ飛ぶ時間の無駄を省き、あるいは読者が元の話題から離れることなく学習するチャンスを得るように設計されました。読んでいる内容の把握や、知らない単語、ものごと、できごと、発想を手早く調べることができます。
ページプレビューの利用者には記事の概要があらかじめわかるため、記事を読みながら別のページへ飛ぶかどうか決めるのに役立ちます。
途中で知らない概念にぶつかっても、記事を1本読了する楽しみが中断したり他のページに気を取られることもありません。ページにとどまったまま、その場で概念のチラ見ができるのです。
この場合、利用者の体験はますますスムーズになります。

同様の拡張機能は数年前から要望が多く（[[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|一覧]]）、問題の解決によく使われているガジェットもあります（編集作業を重視した[[:en:Wikipedia:Tools/Navigation popups|ナビゲーション・ポップアップ]]）。
ページプレビューの開発は2014年にベータ版拡張機能として始まり、利用者の人気とフィードバックが最も高く使用感の差が最も大きいとされています。
[[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|ホバーカード専門のトークページ]]ではプロジェクト全体にわたるいくつもの問題点が集まり、この2年以上をかけて改良を続けて来ました。
モバイル版のページプレビュー同等の機能はAndroid appとして[[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|2015年9月]]に実装、ページ単位でリンクのクリック件数を20%引き上げる効果をもたらしています。

ログインしていない匿名利用者も好みに応じ、ページプレビューの[[#settings|設定パネル]]を操作して、有効と無効の切り替えができます。
ログイン利用者は「特別ページ:個人設定」の「表示」タブで設定ができます。
ただし、ナビゲーション・ポップアップ表示を有効にしたままページプレビューを使おうとすると（ベータ版機能として有効にしてあるログイン利用者の場合にありがち）、このポップアップ表示が優先されます。
そこでページプレビューの使用中は、このポップアップ表示を無効にする必要があります。

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|ページプレビューの表示例]]

== デザイン ==

ページプレビューの現状の繰り返し処理ではプレビュー表示1回ごとに以下の要素が含まれます。
* 記事の最初の段落の一部
* 記事に載った画像1件（ある場合）。画像表示は記事内のリンクの位置により、縦もしくは横に表示します。
* 歯車アイコンでページプレビューの表示非表示を切り替え

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|ギリシャ語でのページプレビューの例
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|中国語でのページプレビューの例
File:Hovercard english.png|英語でのページプレビューの例
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== ナビゲーション・ポップアップとの主要な違い ===

* ナビゲーション・ポップアップは熟練したユーザー向けでサイトのユーザーには無用の機能を多く備えています。
ナビゲーション・ポップアップは、全てのウィキメディア・プロジェクトで、全ての名前空間へのリンクに対して動作します。ページプレビューは標準名前空間へのリンクにのみ機能するように設定されており、現在はウィキペディアのみで動作します。
* ページプレビューは読みやすさを優先した書式に設定されています。現状のナビゲーション・ポップアップでは文字は小さく行間も狭いのです。
* ページプレビューはログインの有無に関係なく利用できます。
* 同様の扱いにより、記事と表示の書式に落差がありません。
* リード部分の画像を強調してあり、ユーザーは文字と画像の両方から用語の意味を理解できます。
* ガジェットは使い方が状況と適合せず、それぞれの操作が読者と編集者のどちらに特化しているか検証が必要です。

=== HTML プレビュー ===

2018年3月1日現在、ページプレビューはHTML形式で表示しています。これにより顕著なバグがいくつか解決され、数学あるいは化学式などの数式を正しく表示し、記事の内容に即したページのプレビューを実現します。

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== 設定 ==

=== 有効/無効の切り替え ===

==== 匿名利用者 (未ログイン) ====
匿名利用者がページプレビューを無効にするには、それぞれのプレビューの下端にある歯車のアイコンを操作します。再び有効にするには、どのウィキページの最下部にもある「{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}」のリンクを操作します。
ブラウザーのJavaScriptを無効にして永久に無効にすることもできます。
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |ページプレビューを無効にするには設定の歯車を選択する
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | 無効 (訳注: この図では下段の Disable) を選んで無効にする
File:Reenablemodal.png | 有効に再設定する方法の説明を表示
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| ページプレビューを有効に再設定するリンクは、どのページでも最下部に表示（この図の最下段右端の青字 Enable previews）
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== ログイン利用者 ====

ログイン利用者がページプレビューの有効無効を切り替えるには、方法が2つあります。「特別ページ:個人設定」の「表示」タブで設定、もしくはそれぞれのページの終わりに表示される歯車アイコンから無効にすることになります。
* ログイン利用者が歯車の設定アイコンを押すと、システムにより個人設定ページへ遷移します。
* ベータ版段階でホバーカードを有効にしていた利用者の場合は、ページプレビュー導入後も以前の個人設定が有効です。個人設定の「表示」タブで確認することができます。

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| ページプレビューの有効化には、下辺にある歯車の設定アイコン（訳注：左の図）、もしくは個人設定ページ（同：右の図）から直接、オプションを変更する
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

== 成功の評価基準と機能の評価法 ==

質的かつ量的にテストを繰り返し、ページプレビュー機能の性能を評価しました。テストの目的を以下に示します。
* ページプレビュー機能はユーザーに使いやすく便利な機能か？
* ページプレビュー機能を使うと読む行為はどう変わり、ユーザーが読みたい記事を的確に選ぶ助けになるか？
* このページプレビュー機能を実装すると、資金集めに影響があるか？

=== 2015年のテスト : カタラン語とギリシャ語 ===

4カ月をかけてギリシャ語とカタラン語で機能テストを行いました。問題点とバグが多数報告され、合わせてアンケート形式でユーザーの満足度を計測しました。ユーザーの反響はおおむね好意的で、大部分の人からページプレビュー（ホバーカード）は便利で使い方がわかりやすく、使って楽しいと回答しています。

テスト結果の[[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/GreekCatalanTest|全文はこちら]]。

=== 2016年の品質テスト ===
ページプレビューの機能に関するユーザーの受け止め方を調べ、読者の反応の変化を追うために[http://UserZoom.com UserZoom]ツールを採用した非監視の遠隔パネル調査を実施しました。
被験者の大部分はページプレビュー機能に好意的な反響でした。
さらに、被験者の大部分はページプレビュー機能の表示非表示を問題なく切り替えできました。
ユーザーはそのほか、概して肯定的な言葉で機能を語り、読む体験を妨げないと報告しています。

[[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|テスト結果の全文と分析はこちら]]。

=== 2016年のA/Bテスト : ウィキペディアのハンガリー語版、イタリア語版、ロシア語版 ===

読む行為の変化およびページプレビュー（ホバーカード）のベータ版機能の完成度を調べるため、合計3回のA/Bテストをハンガリー語版は2016年の6月7日、イタリア語版とロシア語版は同年9月23日にそれぞれ実施しました。

これらテストの結果から、ページプレビューにより読む経験にプラスの変化がもたらされることが示唆されており、つまりページ内で別のページの内容を提供されると読むページの選択の精度が上がり、他のページを試し読みするコスト（訳注：時間や労力）が下がったため、ユーザーは単一の話題に集中できることを示しています。
データ収集と分析の過程ではバグや問題が頻発し、その対策と改善を通じてその後はエラーに煩わされずに試験を進めることができました。

[[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|テスト結果の全文と分析はこちら]]。

=== 2017年-2018年のA/Bテスト : ウィキペディアの英語版とドイツ語版 ===
製品に実装する前に、2017年10月から同年11月、同年12月から2018年2月にわたり、[[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|A/B テストを2回実施して機能の働きを測定しました]]。
詳細な結果は[[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|報告書にまとめてあり]]、ページ閲覧数は減少したものの、読者が開いた特定のページの総数は増加したことから、ページプレビュー機能を有効にすると、より多くの話題を読む可能性が示唆されます。
また[戻る]ボタンの使用回数が減り、ページプレビュー機能を無効にした率はごくわずかでした。
さらに、英語版ウィキペディアでは寄付金集めのテストも数回、実施しました。

== 英語版ウィキペディアの議論後の改善（2016年4月以降） ==

2016年4月以降の[[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |議論]]では多数のバグ解消、改善に加えてその他の要望が明らかになり、次の方法で表明しました。

ページプレビューが開いたまま「固まる」

*コードをリファクタリングしました。この問題は解消済みです。

太字の文字列と数式がプレビューで表示されない

*現在はプレビューをHTML形式で表示するため、表示内容と文章の内容は一致しています。

ホバーカード自体から機能を無効にしたい

*ログイン利用者も匿名利用者（ログインしていない）は現状では表示領域内の歯車アイコンから機能を無効にできます。

ナビゲーションポップアップとページプレビューが重ならないようにしてほしい

*ログイン利用者の場合、ナビゲーションポップアップか、ページプレビューか、どちらか一方のみ利用できます。ナビゲーションポップアップを利用するなら、先にそちらを無効にしないとページプレビューを利用できないし、その逆も同じです。
調査結果とA/Bテストの詳細な結果を開示してほしい。英語版ウィキペディアで大規模なA/Bテストを実施するべき
*上記の議論以降、[[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|A/Bテストを2回]]実施しており、第1回はハンガリー語版、ロシア語版、イタリア語版のウィキペディアが対象でした。さらに[[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |第2回]]は英語版とドイツ語版ウィキペディアでテストを行いました。

パフォーマンスへの影響を限定する

*パフォーマンスチームと共同でページプレビューに関わる問題を最低限に抑えようとしています。機能ごとの性能の詳細は[https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 ダッシュボード]を用意して提示しました。

匿名利用者（ログインしていない）に限定してプレビュー機能を有効にする方法がほしい

*これも実装済です。2018年3月現在、どのウィキペディアでも匿名利用者には既定でページプレビュー機能が有効になっています（英語版とドイツ語版を除外）。

機能を無効にした利用者の割合を公表してほしい

*2017年・2018年のA/Bテスト両方において、無効にした割合は約0.01%でした。以前のA/Bテスト同様に値が低いため、さらに[[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |量的テスト]]を実施、ユーザーが問題なくこの機能の有効・無効の切り替えができたかどうか調べてあります。結論としてはユーザーは機能の無効化を問題なくこなすことができたものの、実際に無効にした率は大変低かったのです。

この機能がありがた迷惑かどうかという情報を開示してほしい

*量的テストの結果に基づき、被験者はこの機能を邪魔だとも、ありがた迷惑だとも考えていないという結論に達しました。

== 対象から除外したページ ==

セキュリティ上の観点から、特定のページではページプレビューを読み込まない設定にしてあります。これらのページを内部で「ブラックリスト」と呼び、当初の一覧は右記で公開しています。{{phab|T170893}}

== 今後の繰り返し作業と改善点 ==

ページプレビューの実装に引き続き、機能の拡充を計画しています。追加を検討するものの一覧：

* 画像その他の設定:
** 多くのユーザーからページプレビュー内の画像を設定したいという要望が寄せられました。今後の実装に組みこむため、開発の進捗状態を https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995 で追跡しています。
** その他のログアウト状態の個人設定（詳細は[[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|こちら]]）
* 記事の題名 - 現状でページプレビューに表示できるのは記事の概要だけです。繰り返し処理として記事の概要と題名を同時に表示する方法を検討中
* 個人設定のツールチップ（[[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]）The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png| 
&lt;/gallery&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|ページの最下部までスクロールしなくても、ページプレビューなら脚注の情報を読むことができる
&lt;/gallery&gt;
* ウィキ間ページプレビュー ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]) 、ウィクショナリーに特化した下位節のリンクの扱い ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]])
* ナビゲーション・ポップアップと統合 - ナビゲーション・ポップアップで将来的に構想している機能も、ページプレビューの構成を拡張すると追加できる。
* ページプレビュー内の文章の利用 - ページプレビューに載った文章を利用したいという要望は多く、例えばコピペ、あるいは文章をフォームや記事の概要に書き出したりできるとよいという声があった。詳細はこちら（[[phab:T146097|phab:T146097]]）。
* ウィクショナリーの項目と統合し、マウスを当てると言葉の意味を表示。

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |未知の言葉に定義を与えるためウィクショナリーの項目を編集
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/FAQ|よくある質問]] ==

; ページプレビューの魅力は？
:この機能はウィキペディアの読者向けで、青字リンクの内容（意味）を見るためにわざわざリンク先のページを開いた経験のある人なら、誰でも便利に使えます。発想の源はたいへん人気のあるガジェットのひとつナビゲーションポップアップ[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia_talk:Tools/Navigation_popups Navigation popups]にあります。

; ページプレビューの便利さはどう数値化できる？
:ページプレビューはリンクを開くためのコストを下げるという発想に基づいて影響度を把握します。これは言い換えるなら、ユーザーは負担を感じずにリンクを開けるかどうかということです。つまりマウスを（無意識ではなく）当てて内容を閲覧したリンクの数が、実際にリンクをクリックした件数より多くなれば、ページプレビューが成功したと言えるはずです。反対に、失敗を示す指標として以下に注目していきます。
:*マウスを当てるホバーが偶然ではないかどうか - 一定条件でホバーの滞留時間を計測し、マウスをリンクに当てたのが偶然だったという割合が高くないと確認する必要があります。一例としてリンクにマウスを当ててからページプレビューが表示されるまでの滞留時間の設定を250ミリ秒にするなら、特定のリンクにマウスを当てたユーザーで、250ミリ秒以上滞留してからクリックする率は低いと確認しなければならないのです。
:*ページプレビューを利用するとページ閲覧数が減る可能性があります。プレビューすれば知りたい情報がわかるからで、それ自体は問題になりません。ただし（もし）閲覧数が減少したなら、編集件数や寄付件数に目立った影響が出ないように注視する必要があります。
:*リンクをホバーしたユーザーが実際にリンク先を開くのは高確率（%）- このことからその人たちは本来、リンク先を訪問する意思があったと推定されます。もしそうであれば、ページプレビューは不用な手間になりかねません。マウスを当ててからクリックスルーに至る確率（%）に基準を設けます。Androidでは同様の機能は60%以下ですが、デスクトップ版ではもっと低いと予測しています。
:*ページプレビューを無効にしたユーザーは低比率（機能を無効にする方法を知っているという前提）- ユーザーがこの機能を歓迎していると解釈。
;既定で Navpops が有効の場合はどうなりますか?
:Navpops が有効だとページプレビューは自動で無効になり、Navpops を無効にすると使用できます。個人設定の既定を変更しなかったのは、Navpops 利用者の使用感を変更しないためです。注記: ブラウザによっては変更を反映するため、キャッシュの破棄が必要な場合があります。 
; ページプレビューの個人設定には何種類ありますか?
:現状、ページプレビューが使える場面（イベント）ごとに、ユーザーがその場で有効と無効を切り替える設定です。イベントが変わり、無効にしようと判断したときに変更できます。ログイン利用者の場合、各自の個人設定からページプレビューを常に有効にできます。匿名利用者（ログインせずに利用）は、ページ下部の「プレビューを有効にする」ボタンで有効にできます。
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

管理者はプロジェクトレベルでホバーが起動するまで利用者がどれほどリンクに滞留するか決めることができます。プロジェクトを保守的にしておきたい場合、遅れが長くなる可能性があります。ウィキメディア財団は最適な滞留時間に関する推奨事項を整え、かつ偶発的なホバーを最小限に抑えながら最高のユーザーエクスペリエンスを提供します。

; もし利用者が希望するなら、ページプレビューをすぐに有効にしてはいけませんか？
:残念ながら、最初に表示しないまま、新機能をユーザーに伝える良い方法はありません。中央通知バナーの使用がこれまで提案されてきたものの、もし2週間にわたって表示したとしても、将来のユーザーのニーズは解決されず、かといってそういうバナーを継続的に表示することは望ましくありません。 新機能をユーザーに知らせるには、ホバーオーバーの使用が最適です。
; ページプレビューがページ閲読に与える影響とは何でしょうか?
:A/B テストの結果を見る限り、どのウィキペディアでもセッション深度に大きな減少はありません。セッション深度の平均（セッション単位で閲読されたページ数）は、ホバーカードを有効にしたグループでも無効のほうでもプレビューの表示が[[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|ほぼ同等でした]]。
; アクセシビリティに差はありますか？
:ページプレビューは、リンクに対してフォーカスあるいはホバーの状態が発生したときのみ有効になります。キーボード・ナビゲーションの利用者も使用できます。スクリーンリーダーの場合、ページプレビューがツールチップだと述べる適切な構成要素[[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]]を供えています。つまり、スクリーンリーダーのソフトウェアはページプレビューを無視します。
; ページプレビューについて意見や改善点の指摘をしたいのですが、連絡先はどこですか？
:[[Talk:Page_Previews|ページプレビューの議論のページ]]に投稿してください。
; ページプレビューを有効にすると、ページの過去の版が表示されてしまいます。正しく表示するには？
:ページプレビューは特定のページの[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|キャッシュ]]した版を表示します。そのため、ご自分が編集した直後にそのページの最新版プレビューを見るには、ページの[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|キャッシュを破棄]]してください。
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

== コード ==
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
;解析と計装
:* ページプレビューを使い、さまざまな利用法の要素が計測されました。詳細は {{ll|Extension:Popups|nsp=0}} 拡張機能のページを参照、ご不明の点はお気軽に質問をお願いします。
:* ページプリビュー機能を経由して実際にコンテンツを利用したかどうか調べる方法として、既存のページビュー機能の統計値と総計的に同等の信頼性を確保するため、別個の仕組みを[[phab:T186728|設定して]]2018年4月から導入しました。その集計データを一部公表する[[phab:T193524|案]]があがっており、実現するとたとえばウィキペディアの編集者や学術的な研究者の益に期すると予想されます。

== プロジェクト段階の実装の議論 ==

=== 2018年7月の実装の現状 ===

ページプレビュー機能をすべての言語版のウィキペディアに実装しました。匿名利用者ならびに登録してからまだ日の浅い利用者には既定で表示され、2018年7月10日以前に登録されたアカウントの場合は既定では非表示（無効）です。

=== 2018年4月の実装の現状 ===

英語版およびドイツ語版ウィキペディアの次の更新に向けた段階として、2018年4月前半を予定しています。この展開ではログアウトしたユーザーに対して既定で提供しようとしています。'''ログイン利用者には変更がないという意味です'''。ログイン編集者には現状で有効にしていない限り、既定で無効になります。有効にするには、個人設定の「表示」タブを変更します。もし以前からこの拡張機能を有効にしてあった場合は、引き続き有効のままです。

ログイン利用者向けの変更計画には、皆さんのフィードバックを募集している案件がいくつかあります:

* ログイン利用者の既定として無効に設定する案。  
* 新規利用者に限定して、既定で無効に設定する案。現状では、ユーザーが閲読者からアカウントを作成して投稿者に変わると、まるでホバーカード機能が消えてしまったように思われ、混乱を招いています。機能の実装の準備として設定のこの点を変更、新規利用者全員に既定で有効にする予定です。
* すでに活動しているログイン利用者には既定で有効に設定する案（ただし全員を対象に有効にしても、 NAVPOPS 利用者に限っては自動で無効化）。

=== 実装の計画 ===

実装は2017年初頭にカタロニア語、ギリシャ語、ハンガリー語、ロシア語版で開始しました。[[:ja:A/Bテスト|A/Bテスト]]の結果はたいへん高評価でした。その後、以下の表に示す通り、他のウィキペディア群にも段階的に実装したいと考えています。

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! コード !! 言語 !! 時期 !! 入門期 !! 成功 !! 日付
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| 上位6言語版を除くウィキペディアの全ての言語版 || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;この期間中の4月19日、[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|このメッセージ]]を247言語版の井戸端（とその同類）に配信&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

=== 導入前のお試し期間 ===

この機能の導入前のお試し期間は、ページプレビューの扱いをコミュニティ単位で同意して決めます。既定で導入するのか、導入前のお試し期間を設けて採用の否決ができるようにするのか選んでください。

== 関連項目 ==

* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (実際にページを訪問しないページプレビュー済みのAGGREGATE関数を記録する - 現状では内部的な - データセット)
* [[:ja:WP:POP|ナビゲーション・ポップアップ]] - 編集作業を重視するガジェットで大多数のウィキに実装。2005年Lupin制作
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ ウィキメディア財団のブログ - Hovercards now available as a Beta Feature on all Wikimedia wikis] - ウィキメディアの全ウィキでホバーカードをベータ版で提供開始 (2014年3月)
* 開発当初の諸元 - [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]]および[https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes]を参照。
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|A list of similar browser extensions]] - 同様のブラウザ拡張機能の一覧
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - ページプレビューのAPIの諸元

== 脚注 ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>gug3e5jrcng60e93dht8fbddln7ikvj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/da</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>769450</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401791</id>
      <parentid>5184871</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Social tools/da</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>769547</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401975</id>
      <parentid>4429446</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2010" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Overview&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Developer info&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshots&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Historie}}
|group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other social extensions&lt;/span&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other related extensions&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;independent of SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>nrib6cs080lcvbxqcgp803lwx6snpb9</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401989</id>
      <parentid>5401975</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:10:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2011" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Overview&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Developer info&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshots&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Historie}}
|group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other social extensions&lt;/span&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other related extensions&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;independent of SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>cxc9m5y2ni8611tjhqpo7vmsf3721hv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/ko</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>770875</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402202</id>
      <parentid>5371506</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="19349" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''더 자세한 사항은 [[Wikitech:PAWS]]에서 확인하세요.''
이 문서는 [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS'''(Pywikibot: A Web Shell)]]를 이용하여 [[wikitech:Help:Cloud Services Introduction|위키미디어 클라우드 서비스]]의 노트북을 이용한 '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}'''의 빠른 대화형 개요를 제공합니다.

{{note|1=PAWS 터미널은 [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Browsers based on Chromium|크로미움 기반의 브라우저]]에서만 복사 및 붙여넣기를 지원합니다. (구글 크롬, 오페라, 사파리와 새로운 마이크로소프트 엣지는 괜찮습니다.) 만일 다른 브라우저를 사용하고 있다면, 우클릭 메뉴를 사용하거나 이 연습문에서 언급된 명령어를 수동으로 입력해야 합니다. 내용 안에 명령어가 들어있는 bash 파일을 만들거나 단말기 내에 &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;를 호출할 수도 있습니다.}}

{{Warning|1=PAWS 안의 모든 노트북과 터미널은 공지 없이 중단될 수 있습니다. 만일 당신의 작업이 몇 시간 이상 걸리신다면 다른 장소([[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|툴포지]] 등)를 사용하시는 것을 강하게 추천드립니다.}}

== 위키미디어 계정 만들기 ==

이 과정을 빠르게 지나가려면 위키백과 또는 위키미디어에 계정이 있어야 합니다. [[Special:CreateAccount|특수:계정만들기]]로 하나 만드세요.

계정을 만든 후에는, https://test.wikipedia.org/ 에 들려서 자신이 만든 계정이 브라우저 오른쪽 최상단에 나타나는지 확인해주세요. &lt;small&gt;(이것은 {{task|T120327}} 근처에서 동작합니다.)&lt;/small&gt;

위키미디어의 새 사용자라면 그 계정으로 메타, 위키미디어, 위키백과, 위키데이터, 위키미디어 공용 등을 한 번씩 들러주세요.
그리고 맨 위에 있는 메시지를 모두 읽고 지우세요.

== 노트북으로 접속하기 ==

노트북에서 진행을 시작하려면, https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub 로 가세요.

‘Sign in with MediaWiki’를 클릭하고 나서 ‘OAuth 이용 인증’에 동의하는지 물어볼 때 ‘허용합니다’를 클릭합니다.
PAWS에 처음 접속하려면, 서버 생성이 필요합니다.
초록색 ‘Start my Server’ 버튼을 클릭합니다.
새로운 서버가 시작되려면 몇 분 정도 기다리는 것이 보통입니다.

완료되었다면, &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/tree&lt;/nowiki&gt;처럼 URL에다가 넘겨주기가 됩니다.

== 단말기 시작하기 ==

새로운 대화형 단말기를 시작하기 위해,
#  $paws에 가서
# File &gt; New &gt; Terminal을 클릭하세요

이러면 새 창에 리눅스 ‘$’ 프롬프트가 열립니다.

이 단말기는 모방기가 아닙니다. 실제 [[:w:ko:배시 (유닉스 셸)|배시 셀]]은 [[:w:ko:도커 (소프트웨어)|도커 용기]]에 있는 실제 리눅스 설치의 일부분으로, 그렇기에 어떠한 배시 명령어든 쓸 수 있고, 또한 설치한 리눅스에서 사용가능한 어떠한 명령어도 쓸 수 있습니다.

사용 가능한 일부 명령어를 보려면, &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.을 쓰세요.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== 위키에 로그인하기 ==
이는 서버 내에 계정이 만들어질 것이고 명령줄에서 로그인이 허가됩니다.
아래의 명령어는 연습위키에 접속할 수 있음을 보여줍니다. OAuth를 이용한다면, 비밀번호를 입력할 필요가 없습니다.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

[[:w:ko:홈 디렉토리|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; 디렉토리]](&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) 내에 ‘user-config.py’라는 이름의 파일을 만들고 ‘mylang ’ 및 ‘family’ 변수를 추가한다면 pywikibot에서 다른 위키로 연결할 수 있습니다:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== 문서 만들기 ==

문서를 만들려면, 단말기에 사용자 이름과 ‘&amp;lt;username&gt;’을 대신하여 아래의 명령어를 입력하고, 바뀜을 즉시 수락하려면 ‘Y’를 누르세요.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

위키를 편집했습니다. 웹 브라우저 상에서 &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;를 열어 바뀜을 봅시다.

‘-help’ 명령줄 옵션과 이러한 명령줄 스크립트 각각에 대해 자세히 볼 수 있습니다.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== 문서 꺼내오기 ==

많은 문서를 가져오는 것은 ‘listpages’ 명령어로 합니다.

이전 문단에서 만들었던 문서의 내용을 가져오려면, 다음 명령어를 입력하세요:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

이제 &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot; inline&gt;$ ls&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;을 실행하면 저장된 문서가 나타납니다.

== 실제 스크립트 예시 ==
위키백과 상에서 사용된 웹사이트가 URL를 바꾼다면 위키백과 상의 해당 링크는 낡게 되고, 만일 웹사이트가 오래된 URL에서 새 URL로 넘겨주기되지 않았다면 [[:w:ko:위키백과:깨진 링크|깨진 링크]]가 될 수도 있습니다.
예시로, 브리태니커 백과사전이 링크를 다음과 같이 바꾸었습니다: &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt;를 &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;로 이동했습니다.
당신은 낡은 URL을 사용하는 영어 위키백과 문서의 목록을 [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]]에서 찾을 수 있습니다.
이 모든 링크를 업데이트 시키는 건 상당한 시간이 걸릴 겁니다.
다행히도, 브리태니커 백과사전이 낡은 URL에서 새로운 URL로 리다이렉트 시켜주었기 때문에 임의적으로 고쳐질 필요는 없습니다.

간단한 예로는, 영어 위키백과는 최근 &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; 대신에 &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; 링크를 포함하고 있습니다. 즉, ‘www.’ 하위 도메인은 URL 상에서 사라집니다.

최근 영어 위키백과에는 [[:w:en:Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/|15건의 사례]]가 있습니다.

다른 언어로 된 위키백과 또한 이러한 문제를 지니고 있습니다. 가령, 독일어 위키백과 상에 [[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/|1건의 사례]]가 있습니다.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
이 링크를 고치기 위해, 우리는 Pywikibot [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py]] 스크립트를 사용할 수 있습니다. 이 견본에서 우리는 영어 위키백과의 [[w:en:WP:Bots|자동 편집]]에 대한 엄격한 규칙이 있으므로, 위키에 작성하는 것을 막기 위해 ‘-simulate’ 인수를 사용할 것입니다.
&lt;/div&gt;

먼저 &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;에 연결된 모든 문서를 나열하세요.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

이제 우리는 이 문서들이 실제로 문서 내에 실질적인 URL을 가지고 있는지 확인합니다. 즉, 여기에는 틀은 사용하고 있지 않습니다.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

이제 ‘replace’를 사용하여 빠진 ‘www.’를 추가하세요.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

PAWS 및 색상을 지원하는 단말기에서 바뀜의 차이는 초록색 글자로 ‘www.’가 추가되어 보여질 것이고, 이는 제안된 바뀜을 찾기 쉽게 만들 것입니다.

== Pywikibot 내부 ==

{{Warning|1=파일은 공개되므로, 서버의 파일 안에 비밀번호를 적지 마세요!}}

다음은 PAWS 파이썬의 시즌을 사용합니다.

#  [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home PAWS 홈]에 가서
# ‘New’를 오른쪽 버튼으로 클릭하고
# ‘Python 3’을 선택합니다.

이러면 새로운 창이 열립니다.

텍스트 박스 안에 아래의 명령문을 적고 Cell 메뉴에서 'Run'을 클릭하거나 shift+enter를 누르세요.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

새 텍스트 박스가 밑에 생길 겁니다. 아래의 명령문을 통해 https://test.wikipedia.org/ 와 연결된 새 APISite 항목을 만드세요.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Describe &quot;site&quot; by entering it into the new text box and selecting &quot;Run&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It should show
&lt;/div&gt;

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Create a page object:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check it exists by running:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It should output
&lt;/div&gt;

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Show the text on the page:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Change the page text in the object:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Save the page to the wiki:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The response should be:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The interactive Python 3 notebook allows many lines to be run together.  The above could be put into one text box and Run
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The log of your interactive Python session can be saved or downloaded for future reference.
&lt;/div&gt;

== PAWS 내 온라인 문서에 접근하기 ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Pywikibot documentation may be found at https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/.  It is primarily sourced from [[w:docstring|docstrings]], which can be loaded in the interactive Python 3 notebook using the Python built-in function [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to look at the arguments for the save method above, run either:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

또는

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Pywikibot 스크립트 편집하기 ==

Pywikibot 라이브러리 및 스크립트는 /srv/paws에 위치하고 있으며, 읽기 전용입니다. 설치된 Pywikibot 라이브러리는 PAWS 내에서 수정할 수 없습니다.

스크립트는 내 PAWS 홈으로 복사한 후 수정해야 합니다.

예를 들어, 수정된 &quot;checkimages.py&quot;를 실행하려면:

터미널 안에서 &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;를 입력합니다.
브라우저 안에서 [$paws PAWS 홈]에 가서 &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;를 클릭합니다.
브라우저 안에서 파일을 수정할 수 있습니다. 코드를 수정하세요. 가령, 1775번째 줄의 &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; 코드 뒤에 새 1776번째 줄에 당신의 이름을 추가합니다: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;
# 편집 인터페이스의 파일 메뉴에서 저장을 눌러 편집본을 저장합니다.
# 터미널 안에서 &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt;를 입력합니다. (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== 같이 보기 ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
* 한 사용자의 [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb PAWS 요약] (예: API 및 데이터베이스 접근)
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ngcy5x2bzb98j1du92w33j2kgyxply2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/da</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>771638</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402236</id>
      <parentid>5400731</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13907" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|se forneden]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|se forneden]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Global konto ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* Sprog
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Date format and time offset ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Se også ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ssjw9pzhqryrbi3mc4rwne5p4aiguyw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Extension registration/116/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>772470</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402503</id>
      <parentid>2745533</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:20:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="102" xml:space="preserve">For extensions using Wikimedia [[$1|continuous integration]], dependencies also need to be added to $2</text>
      <sha1>tvgwu0294nkljaoxant3gbyj0vsvayo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:MediaWiki 1.30/11/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>774122</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402099</id>
      <parentid>3092334</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:44:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="178" xml:space="preserve">[$url 最新リリース]をダウンロードするか、または[[$2|Git 内]]の $1 ブランチをチェックアウトしてこのリリースに追随してください。</text>
      <sha1>q1fct3p361jcch4517053mrogwacgz6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Statistics and reporting/8/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>775188</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402900</id>
      <parentid>2753882</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:13:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="331" xml:space="preserve">Questa pagina può essere inclusa in altre pagine del wiki con la sintassi $lstatsnl dove &lt;code&gt;nl&lt;/code&gt; può essere sostituito dal  codice di qualsiasi lingua. Per impostazione predefinita, i gruppi completamente tradotti sono nascosti, ma è possibile controllare i filtri mostrati nella pagina speciale con la sintassi $filter.</text>
      <sha1>m1eq6qc4p7p0sf44v5zo1tpk57mjxtq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/ru</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>775217</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402160</id>
      <parentid>5210666</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:37:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9363" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;С 2017 года [[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Визуальный редактор]] предоставляет ''''''{{ll|visual diffs}}'''''' (визуальное отображение различий).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are available in two places in the interface: when previewing changes to the document before the user saves the page, and (as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta feature]]) within the standard MediaWiki diff display, accessed from the history page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In both cases, the visual diff shows up alongside the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|traditional two-column wikitext diff]], and the user can toggle between the two displays.&lt;/span&gt;

Визуальное сравнение версий имеет два основных преимущества перед сравнением версий вики-текстом.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first is that editors can directly see the changes they and others have made without needing to understand [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitext]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is particularly helpful when looking at changes to graphical structures such as tables; for example, if an edit deletes a column from a table, the wikitext diff for it would be hard to understand, while the visual diff would be immediately obvious.&lt;/span&gt;

Второе — это то, что технологии могут использоваться для более точного отображения изменения читателю.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if an edit swapped two paragraphs (with or without changes to the paragraphs), the visual diff will identify that this is what occurred, while a wikitext diff makes it appear that a paragraph was deleted and an entirely new paragraph was added.&lt;/span&gt;

== На классических страницах сравнений версий ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of the examples and screenshots below are about using visual diffs during page previews when editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, VisualEditor's visual diffs can also be used on regular diff pages, on any wiki that has VisualEditor installed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can see an example of it in use on the English-language Wikipedia [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|here]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For wikis that have VisualEditor, there are several ways to activate this visual diff display:
&lt;/div&gt;

* Добавьте следующее к LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If your wiki has a &quot;Beta features&quot; tab within Special:Preferences, and you want to make visual diffs an &quot;opt-in&quot; feature for users, you can add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* As seen in the Wikipedia example linked above, the visual diff mode can also be activated by simply adding &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; to the URL of a diff page.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Как это работает ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Скриншот показывает некоторые изменения статьи. Большинство изменений выделены с форматированием текста.|left|thumb|300px|Если вы закончили редактировать страницы, напишите ваше описание изменений и затем выберите &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.

В визуальном режиме, вы можете видеть дополнения, абсорбцию, новые ссылки и выделенное форматирование. Другие изменения, типа изменение размера изображения, описаны на стороне.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=Кнопка переключения, отображающая параметры &quot;Визуальный редактор&quot; и &quot;редактор вики-текста&quot;; выбрана опция &quot;Визуальный редактор&quot;.|left|thumb|220x220px|Нажмите кнопку, чтобы переключиться между визуальными и вики-текстовыми разницами.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=Скриншот показывает те же изменения, что и в двухколоночных различий вики-текста.|left|thumb|245x245px|Разница изменений - это тот же инструмент разницы, который используется в редакторе вики-текста и в истории страниц.]]

{{clr}}
== Примеры ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Редактирование форматированного текста&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Визуальная разница
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|Разница вики-текста
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Перемещение параграфа&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Визуальная разница
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Сравнение версий вики-текстом (2017).  Эта функциональность была добавлена к движку сравнения версий вики-текстом в 2018; посмотрите на [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png|иллюстрацию с новой версией]].
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Столбец таблицы удалён&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Визуальная разница
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|Разница вики-текста
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Текст, форматирование и изменения списка&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Визуальная разница
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|Разница вики-текста
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Вставка новых мультимедиа-файлов (нот)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Визуальная разница
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|Разница вики-текста
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Используемые технологии ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|Thalia Chan, объединение редактирования и визуальных разниц, Викимания 2017.]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Текущие ограничения ==
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No notices for changes to &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, such as categories or TOC keywords.&lt;/span&gt;
* Имеются проблемы с большими и сложными изменениями в таблицах.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* Недоступно на некоторые служебных страницах:
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Undo &quot;diff&quot; pages.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** Разрешение конфликтов редактирования&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== История ==
Эта функциональность была доступна в качестве первого инструмента сравнения версий в настольной версии Визуального редактора, начиная с версии 1.31.0-wmf-20 и в последующих (было реализовано для отдела производства Викимедиа 6 февраля 2018 года).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before that, it was a secondary tool from the 1.29.0-wmf-17 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 21 March 2017).&lt;/span&gt;

== Посмотрите также ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Примечания ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>t5e3c2n6fox3w1ft3x45ealxfile2k2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>778214</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402492</id>
      <parentid>5261504</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:14:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="69" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|Reveja e traduza a documentação da extensão 'Traduzir']]</text>
      <sha1>5fnrxcoa6xok4hsa9wtv6bcoy3giov1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Page Previews/28/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>778793</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402124</id>
      <parentid>2825161</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:19:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="46" xml:space="preserve">テスト結果の[[$1|全文はこちら]]。</text>
      <sha1>ej65ru5glqfi27vst4c2j9bs00k9d5m</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Page Previews/31/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>778802</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402130</id>
      <parentid>2764775</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:20:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="55" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|テスト結果の全文と分析はこちら]]。</text>
      <sha1>tddefu96dizevjiodrv6pupihfdw0p5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/cs</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>779504</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402193</id>
      <parentid>5371498</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="21140" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Wikitech:PAWS]] for more details.&lt;/span&gt;''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This document provides a quick interactive overview of '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' using a ''notebook'' hosted on the [[wikitech:Help:Cloud Services Introduction|Wikimedia Cloud Services]] environment using [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: A Web Shell''')]].&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PAWS Terminal supports copy and paste in [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Browsers based on Chromium|Chromium-based browsers]] only.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Google Chrome, Opera, Safari and new Microsoft Edge are fine.)&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a different browser, you can try with context menu only (right-click) or you will need to manually type the commands mentioned in this walk-through.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also create a bash file with in content the command and call in terminal with &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All notebooks and terminals in PAWS are subject to termination without notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You are encouraged to run your task on other places (such as [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) if your task lasts for more than hours.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Vytvořte si účet na Wikimedii ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To follow this walk-through, you only need a Wikipedia/Wikimedia account. Use [[Special:CreateAccount]] to create one.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once you have created an account, please visit https://test.wikipedia.org/ and check that your username appears in the top right corner &lt;small&gt;(this works around {{task|T120327}})&lt;/small&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

== Přihlašte se do notebooku ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To start a hosted notebook, go to https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot;, and then click &quot;Allow&quot; when asked to approve &quot;Use OAuth for Authentication&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first time you access PAWS, you need to create a server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the green &quot;Start my Server&quot; button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's normal to wait a few minutes for the new server to start up.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once that is completed, you will be redirected to a URL like &lt;nowiki&gt;https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/user/&lt;username&gt;/lab&lt;/nowiki&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

== Spusťte terminál ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To start a new interactive terminal,
# Go to your [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home]
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will open a new window with a Linux '$' prompt.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This terminal is not an emulator.  It is a real [[w:Bash (Unix shell)|bash shell]], as part of a real Linux installation sitting on a [[w:Docker (software)|Docker container]], so you can use any bash command, and use any commands available on Linux that have been installed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To see some of the commands available, use &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== Přihlášení se na wiki ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will establish your account on the server and allow you to log in from the command line.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The following command should confirm that you can log into the testwiki. It uses OAuth, so there is no need to enter a password.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can connect pywikibot to a different wiki by creating a file named ''user-config.py'' in your [[w:Home_directory|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; directory]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) and adding ''mylang'' and ''family'' variables:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Vytvořte stránku ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To create a page, enter the following command in the terminal, replacing '&amp;lt;username&gt;' with your username, and pressing 'Y' when prompted to accept your changes:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You have edited the wiki.  View your changes by opening &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your web browser.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can read more about each of these command line scripts with the '-help' command line option.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Načtěte stránku ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Fetching many pages is achieved with the &quot;listpages&quot; command.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To get the contents of the page you created in the previous section, enter the following command:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now if you run &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot; inline&gt;$ ls&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; the saved page should be present.&lt;/span&gt;

== Ukázka reálného skriptu ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When a website used on Wikipedia changes its URL, the links on Wikipedia become outdated, and possible also [[w:WP:Dead links|dead links]] if the website doesn't redirect from the old URLs to the new URLs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) has changed their links, such as moving pages from &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can find the list of usages of the old URL on English Wikipedia at [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updating all those links manually will be very time consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thankfully EB has maintained redirects from their old URLs to the new URLs, so this does not need to be fixed immediately.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For a simpler example, English Wikipedia currently contains links to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; instead of &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; i.e. a 'www.' subdomain is missing in the URL.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are currently 14 cases on English Wikipedia: [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Wikipedia in other language also have this problem.  e.g. there is one case on German Wikipedia: [[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In order to fix those links, we can use Pywikibot {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}} script.  In this demo we will use the '-simulate' argument to avoid writing to the wiki, as there are strict rules about [[w:WP:Bots|automated editing]] of English Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
First, let's list all of the pages which link to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now we check those pages actually have the literal URL in the page; i.e. they are not using a template.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now use replace to add the missing &quot;www.&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In PAWS, and any terminal that supports color, the diff of changes will show the added &quot;www.&quot; in green text color, making it easier to find the proposed changes.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Uvnitř Pywikibota ==

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don't write passwords in files of server, the files are public!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Next we will use the PAWS Python session.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to your [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home PAWS home],
# click 'New' on the right hand side, and
# select 'Python 3'.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will open a new window.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the text box, enter the following and in the Cell menu select 'Run' (or pressing shift+enter to run).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A new text box will appear below.  Run the following to create an APISite object connected to https://test.wikipedia.org/:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Describe &quot;site&quot; by entering it into the new text box and selecting &quot;Run&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It should show
&lt;/div&gt;

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Create a page object:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check it exists by running:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It should output
&lt;/div&gt;

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Show the text on the page:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Change the page text in the object:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Save the page to the wiki:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The response should be:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The interactive Python 3 notebook allows many lines to be run together.  The above could be put into one text box and Run
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The log of your interactive Python session can be saved or downloaded for future reference.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Přístup k online dokumentaci v PAWS ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Pywikibot documentation may be found at https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/.  It is primarily sourced from [[w:docstring|docstrings]], which can be loaded in the interactive Python 3 notebook using the Python built-in function [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to look at the arguments for the save method above, run either:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

nebo

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Úprava skriptů Pywikibota ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Pywikibot library and scripts are located in /srv/paws, and are read-only.  The installed Pywikibot library cannot be modified in PAWS.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Scripts may be modified after copying them into your PAWS home.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to run a modified &quot;checkimages.py&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the browser, you can edit the file.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit the code -- for instance, just after the &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; code on line 1775, add a new line 1776 that will print out your name: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the editing interface, use the File menu and click Save to save your modifications.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== Viz též ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb PAWS cheatsheet] by one user (e.g. about API and database access)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>jioecvw0pb5pn96gsu7pnuv7y4c4m51</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Page Previews/de</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>780519</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402115</id>
      <parentid>5390109</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:16:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="32255" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
Die '''Seitenvorschaubilder'''-Funktion (Englisch: ''Page Previews'') löst das wichtige Problem, das Benutzer mehrere Browser-Tabs öffnen müssen um die Bedeutung eines Wortes oder einen Konzepts im Kontext des Artikels zu verstehen, den sie gerade lesen.
Mit der Seitenvorschau wird, wann immer ein Leser den Mauszeiger über den Link zu einem anderen Artikel bewegt, eine Kurzzusammenfassung der Themen und ein Bild (wenn verfügbar) angezeigt.
Der Benutzer kann entscheiden, ob er den Artikel aufrufen möchte um mehr über das Thema zu erfahren, bevor er den gegenwärtigen Artikel weiterliest.
Eine vollständige Beschreibung der Seitenvorschaubilder-Funktion findet man [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|hier]].
Einen Überblick über die zugehörige technische Dokumentation finden Sie ab Mai 2018 [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ unter diesem Link].

Die Funktion '''Referenz-Vorschau''' ist ein verwandtes Projekt. Damit wird immer dann ein Vorschaufenster eingeblendet, wenn der Leser den Mauszeiger auf eine Fußnote hält. Eine Beschreibung dieser Funktion finden Sie auf [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|der Projektseite]].

== Einführung ==
Seitenvorschaubilder sollen den Aufwand für das Studieren eines Links senken und das Lernen fördern, indem die der Leserin erlauben, Kontext zu dem Artikel zu erhalten, den sie gerade liest oder unbekannte Begriff, Objekte, Ereignisse oder Ideen zu verstehen, ohne das ursprüngliche Thema zu verlassen.
Die Funktion erleichtert es normalen Leserinnen, einen Überblick über einen Artikel zu bekommen, bevor sie sich entscheiden, ihn aufzurufen oder nicht.
Benutzer, die einen Artikel in seiner Gesamtheit lesen wollen werden nicht unterbrochen oder entmutigt, weil sie sich unbekannte Konzepte ansehen müssen - sie können einfach eine Vorschau des Konzepts sehen, ohne zu einer anderen Seite wechseln zu müssen.
So wird die Geschmeidigkeit der Benutzererfahrung verbessert.

Es gab im Laufe der Jahre viele Anfragen zu ähnlichen Funktionen; es gibt Browser-Erweiterungen (siehe [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|Liste]]) und ein vielgenutztes Helferlein (die mehr Autoren-zentrierten [[:de:Wikipedia:Helferlein/Navigation-Popups|Navigation-Popups]]), die dieses Problem ebenfalls lösen.
Hovercards wurden erstmals 2014 als Beta-Funktion programmiert und sind unter den beliebtesten Beta-Funktionen in Hinsicht auf Benutzung, Benutzer-Feedback und Auswirkung der Benutzung.
Auf der [[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|Hauptdiskussionsseite für Hovercards]] wurden im Laufe von zwei Jahren über alle Projekte hinweg mehrere Probleme identifiziert und gelöst.
Das Mobile-Äquivalent für Hovercards, das [[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|im September 2015]] in die Android-App eingefügt wurde führte zu 20% mehr Links, die pro Seite geklickt wurden.

Die Hovercards-[[#settings|Einstellungsseite]] ermöglicht ausgeloggten Benutzern die Funktion nach belieben ein- und auszuschalten.
Eingeloggte Benutzer können derzeit die Funktion in ihren Beta-Einstellungen ein- und ausschalten.
Wenn Navigation-Popups und Hovercards gleichzeitig angeschaltet sind (zum Beispiel bei eingeloggten Benutzerinnen, die automatisch alle neuen Beta-Funktionen aktivieren lassen), haben Navigation-Popups den Vorrang.
Um Hovercards zu ermöglichen, müssen Navigation-Popups ausgeschaltet sein.

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|Beispiel für eine Hovercard]]

== Design ==

Derzeit enthalten Hovercards folgendes:
* Einen Teil des ersten Abschnitts des Artikels
* Ein Bild (wenn verfügbar) aus dem Artikel. Bilder werden abhängig vom Ort des Links im Artikel horizontal oder vertikal angezeigt.
* Ein Einstellungszahnrad, mit dem Bennutzer Hovercards ein- und ausschalten können

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png| Beispiel für Hovercards auf Griechisch
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Beispiel für Hovercards auf Chinesisch
File:Hovercard english.png|Beispiel für Hovercards auf Englisch
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Example of Page Previews in Chinese
File:Hovercard english.png|Example of Page Previews in English
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== Hauptunterschiede zu Navigation-Popups ===

* Navigation-Popups sind für erfahrene Benutzer und viele Funktionen sind für die meisten Seitenbenutzer nicht interessant.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Navigation popups work for links to all namespaces, and on all Wikimedia projects. Page Previews is configured to only work with mainspace links, and currently only on Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Hovercards sind für einfaches Lesen gestaltet, die Schriftgröße der Nav-Popups ist klein und die Ränder sind schmal.
* Hovercards werden für alle Benutzer verfügbar sein, nicht nur für eingeloggte.
* Konsistenter Grafischer Stil.
* Hervorhebung des Hauptbildes, so dass Benutzer über Text und Bild eine Vorstellung von dem Begriff erhalten.
* Die verfügbaren Funktionen im Helferlein passen nicht zum Kontext; wir müssten prüfen, welche der Funktionen den Lesern und Autoren nützlich sind.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== HTML Previews ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
As of March 1st, 2018, page previews now display previews in HTML.  This resolves many outstanding bugs, provides correct representation of mathematical, chemical and other formulas, and ensures previews display the same formatting as the article content.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== Einstellungen ==

=== Einschalten/Ausschalten ===

==== Ausgeloggte Benutzer ====
Ausgeloggte Benutzer können Hovercards mittels des Zahnradsymbols ausschalten, dass am unteren Rand jeder Hovercard angezeigt wird. Wenn der Benutzer Hovercards wieder anschalten möchte, dann kann er das mit dem &quot;{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}&quot;-Link tun, der am unteren Rand jeder Wikiseite angezeigt wird.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They can also disable JavaScript in their browser to turn it off permanently.&lt;/span&gt;
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File: Hovercard english.png | Wähle das Zahnradsymbol, um Hovercards auszuschalten
File: Page preview settings logged out.png | Wähle Disable, um die Funktion auszuschalten
File: Reenablemodal.png | Anleitungen zum Wiederanschalten werden angezeigt
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | Select disable to disable the feature
File:Reenablemodal.png | Instructions on how to re-enable will be presented
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| Der zum Wiederanschalten der Hovercards wird an der Unterkante jeder Seite angezeigt
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== Eingeloggte Benutzer ====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Logged-in users can control their settings from two places. They may enable or disable Page Previews from the Appearance section of Special:Preferences. Logged-in users may also turn Page Previews off via the cog-icon displayed at the bottom of each preview.
* If a logged-in user clicks on the settings cog, the system will redirect them to the user preferences page.
* If a user previously had the Hovercards beta feature enabled, their preference will be kept and appear in the Appearance section of user preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| Benutzer können die Funktion über das Zahnradsymbol an der Unterkante jeder Hovercard anschalten, oder indem sie die Option direkt auf der Seite mit den Benutzereinstellungen auswählen
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

== Erfolgskriterien und Funktionsevaluation ==

Es wurden einige qualitative und quantitative Tests durchgeführt, um die Leistung der Hovercards-Funktion zu prüfen. Diese Test haben sich auf folgende Fragen konzentriert:
* Gefallen den Benutzern die Hovercards und finden sie sie nützlich?
* Wie ändern Hovercards das Leseverhalten und helfen sie Benutzern zielgerichteter die Artikel auszuwählen, die sie lesen möchten?
* Würde der Start der Hovercards-Funktionen Auswirkungen auf das Fundraising haben?

=== Test in der Griechischen und der Katalanischen Wikipedia 2015 ===

Ein Funktionstest wurde für vier Monate in der Griechischen und der Katalanischen Wikipedia durchgeführt. Einige Fehler und Probleme wurden berichten und die Nutzerzufriedenheit wurde mit einer Umfrage gemessen. Benutzer haben allgemein positives Feedback, wobei die Mehrheit die Hovercards nützlich, einfach zu benutzen und erfreulich fanden.

Lies [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/GreekCatalanTest|alle Ergebnisse dieser Tests]].

=== Qualitativer Test 2016 ===
Um die Erwartungen der Benutzer an die Hovercards-Funktion zu erfassen und weitere Änderungen am Leseverhalten zu messen, wurde mit der [http://UserZoom.com UserZoom]-Software ein unmoderierte Remote-Panel-Studie durchgeführt.
Die Mehrheit der Teilnehmer gab positives Feedback zur Hovercards-Funktion.
Außerdem hatte die Mehrheit der Teilnehmer keine Probleme beim Ein- und Ausschalten der Funktionen.
Benutzer beschrieben die Funktionen allgemein mit positiven Begriffen und berichteten, dass sie ihre Leseerfahrung nicht beeinträchtigt hätte.

Lies [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|alle Ergebbisse und die Auswertung dieser Tests]].

=== A/B-Tests in der Ungarischen, Italienischen und Russischen Wikipedia 2016 ===

Um Änderungen des Leseverhaltens zu messen und die Erfolg der Hovercards-Beta-Funktion zu erfassen, wurden am 23. September 2016 in der Ungarischen, Italienischen und Russischen Wikipedia drei A/B-Tests gestartet.

Aus den Ergebnissen dieser Tests können wir schließen, dass Hovercards positive Veränderungen im Leseverhalten ermöglichen, in dem sie die Präzision erhöhen, mit der Benutzer Seiten aussuchen, die sie lesen wollen, da die Kosten für die Erkundung anderer Seiten sinken und den Benutzern erlaubt, einen selektiven Fokus auf ein einziges Thema zu richten, da die Kontext innerhalb der Seite geboten wird.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During the process of collecting and analysing our data we ran into a number of bugs and issues within our instrumentation that allowed us to refine and improve, to ensure subsequent tests were issue-free.&lt;/span&gt;

Lies [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|alle Ergebnisse und Auswertungen dieser Tests]].

=== A/B-Test in der Englischen und der Deutschen Wikipedia 2017 ===
Am 28. August 2017 starteten wir einen A/B-Test um die Leistung der Funktion vor dem offiziellen Start zu messen. Die liefen zwei Wochen gleichzeitig mit einigen Fundraising-Tests in der Englischen Wikipedia.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The results, described in more detail [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|in the report]], displayed a decrease in pageviews, but an overall increase in the number of distinct pages that readers interact with, indicating that they are more likely to explore a larger variety of topics when the feature is on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also noted decreased usage of the back button and very low rates of disabling the feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition, we ran a number of fundraising tests on enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Improvements since English Wikipedia discussion from April 2016 ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
During the [[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |discussion]] from April 2016, a number of bugs, improvements, and other requests were identified which we have addressed in the following ways:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previews “getting stuck” in the open position
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have since refactored our code and this is no longer an issue
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Bolded text and mathematical formulas not appearing within the preview
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Currently, previews display in HTML and content is true to the article content
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to disable the feature from the card itself
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in and logged-out users can now disable the feature by selecting the settings gear within the card itself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to make sure page previews do not interfere with navigational popups
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in users may either have navigational popups or page previews. If you’re a navpopups user, you will not be able to enable page previews unless you turn off navpopups first, and vice versa
Providing more thorough research and A/B test results, performing a large-scale A/B test on English Wikipedia
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Since the discussion, we have performed [[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|two series of A/B tests]], the first on Hungarian, Russian, and Italian Wikipedias.  And the [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |second]] on English and German Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Limiting performance impact
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have worked with our performance team to minimize any issues page previews.  A [https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 dashboard] with detailed information on feature performance was created.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing a way to enable the feature for anonymous users only
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*This is ready as well.  As of March 2018, the feature is enabled by default for anonymous users on all Wikipedias except English and German
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing data on how often users disable the feature
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*For both of our 2017/18 A/B tests, the disable rate was around 0.01%.  Because the rate had been similarly low in earlier A/B tests, we also did a [[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |qualitative test]] to confirm that users did not have problems enabling or disabling the feature.  Our conclusion is that people know how to turn the feature off without difficulty but do so at extremely low rates.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing information on whether the feature was considered a nuisance
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Based on our qualitative testing, we concluded that tested users did not find the feature distracting, or a nuisance.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Deaktivierte Seiten ==

Aus Sicherheitsgründen werden Seitenvorschauen auf einigen Spezialseiten nicht angezeigt. Wir bezeichnen diese Seiten als &quot;disabled pages&quot;. Die erste Version davon kann hier eingesehen werden: {{phab|T170893}}.

== Zukünftige Entwicklungszyklen und potenzielle Verbesserungen ==

Nach dem erfolgreichen Start der Hovercards planen wir schrittweise neue Funktionen hinzuzufügen. Dazu gehört:

* Konfiguration von Bildern und andere Einstellungen:
** einige Benutzer wollten Bilder in Hovercards einstellen können. Wir haben uns das für eine zukünftige Entwicklung gemerkt und verfolgen das unter https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995
** andere Einstellungen für nicht Eingeloggte (siehe [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|hier]])
* Artikelnamen - zur Zeit wird nur die Zusammenfassung des Artikels in Hovercards angezeigt. Als weiteren Schritt wollen wir den Namen des Artikels zusammen mit der Zusammenfassung anzeigen
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Reference Tooltips ([[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]). The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|Einsatz von Hovercards um mehr Informationen zu jedem Einzelnachweis anzuzeigen, ohne ans Ende der Seite scrollen zu müssen
&lt;/gallery&gt;
* Wiki-übergreifende Hovercards ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]) und Überschriftenlinks ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]]), insbesondere für Wiktionary
* Integration mit Navigation-Popups - wir wollen die Konfiguration von Hovercards erweitern, um einige der Funktionen von Navigation-Popups einzubauen
* Interaktion mit dem Text in Hovercards - einige Anfragen zur Interaktion mit dem Text in Hovercards wurden gestellt, einschließlich der Möglichkeit den Text kopieren und einfügen, oder als Formular oder Artikelzusammenfassung exportieren zu können. Mehr Infos hier  ([[phab: T146097|phab: T146097]])
* Integration mit Wiktionary-Einträgen, um Definitionen beim Darüberfahren anzubieten.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |Integration mit Wiktionary-Einträgen, um Definitionen für unbekanntes anzubieten
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/FAQ|FAQ]] ==

;Warum Hovercards?
Das ist eine Funktion, die die Erfahrung für jeden Leser verbessern soll, der normalerweise auf einen blauen Link in der Wikipedia geklickt hätte, um einen Überblick( eine Definition) für den Eintrag zu erhalten.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How do we measure Page Previews performance?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
At the project level, administrators can determine how long a user should dwell on a link before a hover is triggered. If a project wants to be conservative, the lag can be longer. WMF will have a recommendation as to optimum dwell time that provides the best user experience while minimizing accidental hovers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Why can't users just turn on Page Previews if they want them?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Unfortunately, there is no good way to tell users about a new feature without showing it to them first. Central notice banners have been suggested, but running them for 2 weeks would not solve the needs of future users and we do not want to run them continuously. Notifying a user of a new feature is best done using a...hover-over.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What impact to Page Previews have on page views?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:According to A/B tests we did not see a large decrease in session depth across all Wikipedias. Average session depth (average number of pages viewed per session) [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|remained relatively equal]] between the Previews on and off groups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What about accessibility?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Page Previews only activate when the focus/hover state occurs over a link. They are usable for people who use keyboard navigation. For screen readers, Page Previews have proper [[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]] semantics declaring them as tooltips. In short, screen reader software ignore Page Previews.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; If I have Page Previews feedback or if I have a suggestion for making them better, where should I go?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Please go to [[Talk:Page_Previews|the Page Previews discussion page]].
&lt;/div&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Previews continues to show an old version of a page. What can I do?&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Preview shows the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|cached]] version of a page. If the page has been edited and you want Page Previews to show the new version right away, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|purge]] the page.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

== Code ==
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
;Auswertung und Instrumentarium
:* Hovercards werden derzeit eingesetzt, um verschiedene Aspekte der Benutzung zu messen. Lies [[Extension:Popups| die Seite der Popups-Erweiterung]] für Details und frage gern, wenn etwas unklar ist.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To measure content usage via Page Previews, in an aggregated way that is compatible with the existing Pageviews data, a separate instrumentation [[phab:T186728|was set up]] that went live in April 2018. There are [[phab:T193524|plans]] to make some of this data public for the benefit of e.g. Wikipedia editors and academic researchers.&lt;/span&gt;

== Ausroll-Diskussionen auf Projektebene ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update July 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Page previews are now available on all Wikipedias.  The feature is on by default for anonymous users and newly created accounts and off by default for accounts created before July 10, 2018.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update April 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The next step of the rollout for English and German Wikipedias is planned for the first half of April 2018. This deployment will include turning the feature on by default for logged-out users.  '''This will mean no changes for logged-in users.''' The feature will be off by default for logged-in editors, unless currently enabled. If you would like to enable it, it is available in your Preferences under “Appearance”. If you have the feature enabled already, it will stay on.  
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In terms of future changes for logged-in users, we have a few options we will be requesting feedback on:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Keep the feature off by default for logged-in users.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for new accounts only. Currently, when users move from being readers to contributors and create an account, the feature will seem to vanish, and that would be confusing.  As a further step in the feature rollout, we plan to change this configuration and enable the feature for all new accounts.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for existing logged-in users (Even if it were enabled for everyone, it would still be automatically suppressed for anyone who uses NAVPOPS.)
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Ausrollplan ===

Wir wollen Anfang 2017 in der Katalanischen, Griechischen, Ungarischen, Italienischen und Russischen Wikipedia beginnen. Daten von A/B-Tests zeigen sehr günstige Ansichten über diese Funktion. Danach wollen wir in den anderen Wikipedias mit dem Ausrollen fortfahren, wie in der unten stehenden Tabelle beschrieben.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! Code !! Sprache !! Phase !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Onboarding&lt;/span&gt; !! Erfolg !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dates&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| Alle anderen Wikipedias außer den verbleibenden Top 6 || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|diese Nachricht]] wurde am 19. April an Wikipedia Village Pump (oder ein Äquivalent) in den zu dieser Phase gehörigen 247 Wikis geschicht&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

=== Onboarding-Erfahrung ===

Die Onboarding-Erfahrung mit der Funktion hängt vom Konsens jeder Community ab, ob sie Seitenvorschauen automatisch anschalten will oder ob es eine Onboarding-Erfahrung geben soll, in der sie die Funktion ablehnen können.

== Siehe auch ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (documentation of a - so far internal - dataset recording aggregate frequencies of seen page previews)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[:en:WP:POP|Navigation-Popups]] - das Autorinnen-fokussierte Helferlein, 2005 von Lupin gestartet, verfügbar in den meisten Wikis
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ WMF Blogpost - Hovercards nun als Beta-Funktion in allen Wikimedia-Wikis verfügbar (englisch)] (März 2014)
* Die originalen Spezificationen können hier [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]] und hier [https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes] eingesehen werden.
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|Eine Liste ähnlicher Browsererweiterungen]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - The API specification for Page Previews
&lt;/div&gt;

== Einzelnachweise ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>dd57oladzjj13d2vo3exa9zqsfx3wkn</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402121</id>
      <parentid>5402115</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:19:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="32335" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
Die '''Seitenvorschaubilder'''-Funktion (Englisch: ''Page Previews'') löst das wichtige Problem, das Benutzer mehrere Browser-Tabs öffnen müssen um die Bedeutung eines Wortes oder einen Konzepts im Kontext des Artikels zu verstehen, den sie gerade lesen.
Mit der Seitenvorschau wird, wann immer ein Leser den Mauszeiger über den Link zu einem anderen Artikel bewegt, eine Kurzzusammenfassung der Themen und ein Bild (wenn verfügbar) angezeigt.
Der Benutzer kann entscheiden, ob er den Artikel aufrufen möchte um mehr über das Thema zu erfahren, bevor er den gegenwärtigen Artikel weiterliest.
Eine vollständige Beschreibung der Seitenvorschaubilder-Funktion findet man [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|hier]].
Einen Überblick über die zugehörige technische Dokumentation finden Sie ab Mai 2018 [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ unter diesem Link].

Die Funktion '''Referenz-Vorschau''' ist ein verwandtes Projekt. Damit wird immer dann ein Vorschaufenster eingeblendet, wenn der Leser den Mauszeiger auf eine Fußnote hält. Eine Beschreibung dieser Funktion finden Sie auf [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|der Projektseite]].

== Einführung ==
Seitenvorschaubilder sollen den Aufwand für das Studieren eines Links senken und das Lernen fördern, indem die der Leserin erlauben, Kontext zu dem Artikel zu erhalten, den sie gerade liest oder unbekannte Begriff, Objekte, Ereignisse oder Ideen zu verstehen, ohne das ursprüngliche Thema zu verlassen.
Die Funktion erleichtert es normalen Leserinnen, einen Überblick über einen Artikel zu bekommen, bevor sie sich entscheiden, ihn aufzurufen oder nicht.
Benutzer, die einen Artikel in seiner Gesamtheit lesen wollen werden nicht unterbrochen oder entmutigt, weil sie sich unbekannte Konzepte ansehen müssen - sie können einfach eine Vorschau des Konzepts sehen, ohne zu einer anderen Seite wechseln zu müssen.
So wird die Geschmeidigkeit der Benutzererfahrung verbessert.

Es gab im Laufe der Jahre viele Anfragen zu ähnlichen Funktionen; es gibt Browser-Erweiterungen (siehe [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|Liste]]) und ein vielgenutztes Helferlein (die mehr Autoren-zentrierten [[:de:Wikipedia:Helferlein/Navigation-Popups|Navigation-Popups]]), die dieses Problem ebenfalls lösen.
Hovercards wurden erstmals 2014 als Beta-Funktion programmiert und sind unter den beliebtesten Beta-Funktionen in Hinsicht auf Benutzung, Benutzer-Feedback und Auswirkung der Benutzung.
Auf der [[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|Hauptdiskussionsseite für Hovercards]] wurden im Laufe von zwei Jahren über alle Projekte hinweg mehrere Probleme identifiziert und gelöst.
Das Mobile-Äquivalent für Hovercards, das [[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|im September 2015]] in die Android-App eingefügt wurde führte zu 20% mehr Links, die pro Seite geklickt wurden.

Die Hovercards-[[#settings|Einstellungsseite]] ermöglicht ausgeloggten Benutzern die Funktion nach belieben ein- und auszuschalten.
Eingeloggte Benutzer können derzeit die Funktion in ihren Beta-Einstellungen ein- und ausschalten.
Wenn Navigation-Popups und Hovercards gleichzeitig angeschaltet sind (zum Beispiel bei eingeloggten Benutzerinnen, die automatisch alle neuen Beta-Funktionen aktivieren lassen), haben Navigation-Popups den Vorrang.
Um Hovercards zu ermöglichen, müssen Navigation-Popups ausgeschaltet sein.

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|Beispiel für eine Hovercard]]

== Design ==

Derzeit enthalten Hovercards folgendes:
* Einen Teil des ersten Abschnitts des Artikels
* Ein Bild (wenn verfügbar) aus dem Artikel. Bilder werden abhängig vom Ort des Links im Artikel horizontal oder vertikal angezeigt.
* Ein Einstellungszahnrad, mit dem Bennutzer Hovercards ein- und ausschalten können

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png| Beispiel für Hovercards auf Griechisch
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Beispiel für Hovercards auf Chinesisch
File:Hovercard english.png|Beispiel für Hovercards auf Englisch
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Example of Page Previews in Chinese
File:Hovercard english.png|Example of Page Previews in English
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== Hauptunterschiede zu Navigation-Popups ===

* Navigation-Popups sind für erfahrene Benutzer und viele Funktionen sind für die meisten Seitenbenutzer nicht interessant.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Navigation popups work for links to all namespaces, and on all Wikimedia projects. Page Previews is configured to only work with mainspace links, and currently only on Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Hovercards sind für einfaches Lesen gestaltet, die Schriftgröße der Nav-Popups ist klein und die Ränder sind schmal.
* Hovercards werden für alle Benutzer verfügbar sein, nicht nur für eingeloggte.
* Konsistenter Grafischer Stil.
* Hervorhebung des Hauptbildes, so dass Benutzer über Text und Bild eine Vorstellung von dem Begriff erhalten.
* Die verfügbaren Funktionen im Helferlein passen nicht zum Kontext; wir müssten prüfen, welche der Funktionen den Lesern und Autoren nützlich sind.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== HTML Previews ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
As of March 1st, 2018, page previews now display previews in HTML.  This resolves many outstanding bugs, provides correct representation of mathematical, chemical and other formulas, and ensures previews display the same formatting as the article content.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== Einstellungen ==

=== Einschalten/Ausschalten ===

==== Ausgeloggte Benutzer ====
Ausgeloggte Benutzer können Hovercards mittels des Zahnradsymbols ausschalten, dass am unteren Rand jeder Hovercard angezeigt wird. Wenn der Benutzer Hovercards wieder anschalten möchte, dann kann er das mit dem &quot;{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}&quot;-Link tun, der am unteren Rand jeder Wikiseite angezeigt wird.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They can also disable JavaScript in their browser to turn it off permanently.&lt;/span&gt;
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File: Hovercard english.png | Wähle das Zahnradsymbol, um Hovercards auszuschalten
File: Page preview settings logged out.png | Wähle Disable, um die Funktion auszuschalten
File: Reenablemodal.png | Anleitungen zum Wiederanschalten werden angezeigt
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | Select disable to disable the feature
File:Reenablemodal.png | Instructions on how to re-enable will be presented
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| Der zum Wiederanschalten der Hovercards wird an der Unterkante jeder Seite angezeigt
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== Eingeloggte Benutzer ====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Logged-in users can control their settings from two places. They may enable or disable Page Previews from the Appearance section of Special:Preferences. Logged-in users may also turn Page Previews off via the cog-icon displayed at the bottom of each preview.
* If a logged-in user clicks on the settings cog, the system will redirect them to the user preferences page.
* If a user previously had the Hovercards beta feature enabled, their preference will be kept and appear in the Appearance section of user preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| Benutzer können die Funktion über das Zahnradsymbol an der Unterkante jeder Hovercard anschalten, oder indem sie die Option direkt auf der Seite mit den Benutzereinstellungen auswählen
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

== Erfolgskriterien und Funktionsevaluation ==

Es wurden einige qualitative und quantitative Tests durchgeführt, um die Leistung der Hovercards-Funktion zu prüfen. Diese Test haben sich auf folgende Fragen konzentriert:
* Gefallen den Benutzern die Hovercards und finden sie sie nützlich?
* Wie ändern Hovercards das Leseverhalten und helfen sie Benutzern zielgerichteter die Artikel auszuwählen, die sie lesen möchten?
* Würde der Start der Hovercards-Funktionen Auswirkungen auf das Fundraising haben?

=== Test in der Griechischen und der Katalanischen Wikipedia 2015 ===

Ein Funktionstest wurde für vier Monate in der Griechischen und der Katalanischen Wikipedia durchgeführt. Einige Fehler und Probleme wurden berichten und die Nutzerzufriedenheit wurde mit einer Umfrage gemessen. Benutzer haben allgemein positives Feedback, wobei die Mehrheit die Hovercards nützlich, einfach zu benutzen und erfreulich fanden.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Lies [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/GreekCatalanTest|alle Ergebnisse dieser Tests]].
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Qualitativer Test 2016 ===
Um die Erwartungen der Benutzer an die Hovercards-Funktion zu erfassen und weitere Änderungen am Leseverhalten zu messen, wurde mit der [http://UserZoom.com UserZoom]-Software ein unmoderierte Remote-Panel-Studie durchgeführt.
Die Mehrheit der Teilnehmer gab positives Feedback zur Hovercards-Funktion.
Außerdem hatte die Mehrheit der Teilnehmer keine Probleme beim Ein- und Ausschalten der Funktionen.
Benutzer beschrieben die Funktionen allgemein mit positiven Begriffen und berichteten, dass sie ihre Leseerfahrung nicht beeinträchtigt hätte.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Lies [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|alle Ergebbisse und die Auswertung dieser Tests]].
&lt;/div&gt;

=== A/B-Tests in der Ungarischen, Italienischen und Russischen Wikipedia 2016 ===

Um Änderungen des Leseverhaltens zu messen und die Erfolg der Hovercards-Beta-Funktion zu erfassen, wurden am 23. September 2016 in der Ungarischen, Italienischen und Russischen Wikipedia drei A/B-Tests gestartet.

Aus den Ergebnissen dieser Tests können wir schließen, dass Hovercards positive Veränderungen im Leseverhalten ermöglichen, in dem sie die Präzision erhöhen, mit der Benutzer Seiten aussuchen, die sie lesen wollen, da die Kosten für die Erkundung anderer Seiten sinken und den Benutzern erlaubt, einen selektiven Fokus auf ein einziges Thema zu richten, da die Kontext innerhalb der Seite geboten wird.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During the process of collecting and analysing our data we ran into a number of bugs and issues within our instrumentation that allowed us to refine and improve, to ensure subsequent tests were issue-free.&lt;/span&gt;

Lies [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|alle Ergebnisse und Auswertungen dieser Tests]].

=== A/B-Test in der Englischen und der Deutschen Wikipedia 2017 ===
Am 28. August 2017 starteten wir einen A/B-Test um die Leistung der Funktion vor dem offiziellen Start zu messen. Die liefen zwei Wochen gleichzeitig mit einigen Fundraising-Tests in der Englischen Wikipedia.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The results, described in more detail [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|in the report]], displayed a decrease in pageviews, but an overall increase in the number of distinct pages that readers interact with, indicating that they are more likely to explore a larger variety of topics when the feature is on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also noted decreased usage of the back button and very low rates of disabling the feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition, we ran a number of fundraising tests on enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Improvements since English Wikipedia discussion from April 2016 ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
During the [[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |discussion]] from April 2016, a number of bugs, improvements, and other requests were identified which we have addressed in the following ways:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previews “getting stuck” in the open position
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have since refactored our code and this is no longer an issue
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Bolded text and mathematical formulas not appearing within the preview
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Currently, previews display in HTML and content is true to the article content
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to disable the feature from the card itself
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in and logged-out users can now disable the feature by selecting the settings gear within the card itself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to make sure page previews do not interfere with navigational popups
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in users may either have navigational popups or page previews. If you’re a navpopups user, you will not be able to enable page previews unless you turn off navpopups first, and vice versa
Providing more thorough research and A/B test results, performing a large-scale A/B test on English Wikipedia
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Since the discussion, we have performed [[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|two series of A/B tests]], the first on Hungarian, Russian, and Italian Wikipedias.  And the [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |second]] on English and German Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Limiting performance impact
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have worked with our performance team to minimize any issues page previews.  A [https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 dashboard] with detailed information on feature performance was created.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing a way to enable the feature for anonymous users only
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*This is ready as well.  As of March 2018, the feature is enabled by default for anonymous users on all Wikipedias except English and German
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing data on how often users disable the feature
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*For both of our 2017/18 A/B tests, the disable rate was around 0.01%.  Because the rate had been similarly low in earlier A/B tests, we also did a [[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |qualitative test]] to confirm that users did not have problems enabling or disabling the feature.  Our conclusion is that people know how to turn the feature off without difficulty but do so at extremely low rates.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing information on whether the feature was considered a nuisance
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Based on our qualitative testing, we concluded that tested users did not find the feature distracting, or a nuisance.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Deaktivierte Seiten ==

Aus Sicherheitsgründen werden Seitenvorschauen auf einigen Spezialseiten nicht angezeigt. Wir bezeichnen diese Seiten als &quot;disabled pages&quot;. Die erste Version davon kann hier eingesehen werden: {{phab|T170893}}.

== Zukünftige Entwicklungszyklen und potenzielle Verbesserungen ==

Nach dem erfolgreichen Start der Hovercards planen wir schrittweise neue Funktionen hinzuzufügen. Dazu gehört:

* Konfiguration von Bildern und andere Einstellungen:
** einige Benutzer wollten Bilder in Hovercards einstellen können. Wir haben uns das für eine zukünftige Entwicklung gemerkt und verfolgen das unter https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995
** andere Einstellungen für nicht Eingeloggte (siehe [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|hier]])
* Artikelnamen - zur Zeit wird nur die Zusammenfassung des Artikels in Hovercards angezeigt. Als weiteren Schritt wollen wir den Namen des Artikels zusammen mit der Zusammenfassung anzeigen
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Reference Tooltips ([[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]). The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|Einsatz von Hovercards um mehr Informationen zu jedem Einzelnachweis anzuzeigen, ohne ans Ende der Seite scrollen zu müssen
&lt;/gallery&gt;
* Wiki-übergreifende Hovercards ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]) und Überschriftenlinks ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]]), insbesondere für Wiktionary
* Integration mit Navigation-Popups - wir wollen die Konfiguration von Hovercards erweitern, um einige der Funktionen von Navigation-Popups einzubauen
* Interaktion mit dem Text in Hovercards - einige Anfragen zur Interaktion mit dem Text in Hovercards wurden gestellt, einschließlich der Möglichkeit den Text kopieren und einfügen, oder als Formular oder Artikelzusammenfassung exportieren zu können. Mehr Infos hier  ([[phab: T146097|phab: T146097]])
* Integration mit Wiktionary-Einträgen, um Definitionen beim Darüberfahren anzubieten.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |Integration mit Wiktionary-Einträgen, um Definitionen für unbekanntes anzubieten
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/FAQ|FAQ]] ==

;Warum Hovercards?
Das ist eine Funktion, die die Erfahrung für jeden Leser verbessern soll, der normalerweise auf einen blauen Link in der Wikipedia geklickt hätte, um einen Überblick( eine Definition) für den Eintrag zu erhalten.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How do we measure Page Previews performance?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
At the project level, administrators can determine how long a user should dwell on a link before a hover is triggered. If a project wants to be conservative, the lag can be longer. WMF will have a recommendation as to optimum dwell time that provides the best user experience while minimizing accidental hovers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Why can't users just turn on Page Previews if they want them?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Unfortunately, there is no good way to tell users about a new feature without showing it to them first. Central notice banners have been suggested, but running them for 2 weeks would not solve the needs of future users and we do not want to run them continuously. Notifying a user of a new feature is best done using a...hover-over.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What impact to Page Previews have on page views?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:According to A/B tests we did not see a large decrease in session depth across all Wikipedias. Average session depth (average number of pages viewed per session) [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|remained relatively equal]] between the Previews on and off groups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What about accessibility?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Page Previews only activate when the focus/hover state occurs over a link. They are usable for people who use keyboard navigation. For screen readers, Page Previews have proper [[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]] semantics declaring them as tooltips. In short, screen reader software ignore Page Previews.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; If I have Page Previews feedback or if I have a suggestion for making them better, where should I go?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Please go to [[Talk:Page_Previews|the Page Previews discussion page]].
&lt;/div&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Previews continues to show an old version of a page. What can I do?&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Preview shows the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|cached]] version of a page. If the page has been edited and you want Page Previews to show the new version right away, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|purge]] the page.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

== Code ==
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
;Auswertung und Instrumentarium
:* Hovercards werden derzeit eingesetzt, um verschiedene Aspekte der Benutzung zu messen. Lies [[Extension:Popups| die Seite der Popups-Erweiterung]] für Details und frage gern, wenn etwas unklar ist.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To measure content usage via Page Previews, in an aggregated way that is compatible with the existing Pageviews data, a separate instrumentation [[phab:T186728|was set up]] that went live in April 2018. There are [[phab:T193524|plans]] to make some of this data public for the benefit of e.g. Wikipedia editors and academic researchers.&lt;/span&gt;

== Ausroll-Diskussionen auf Projektebene ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update July 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Page previews are now available on all Wikipedias.  The feature is on by default for anonymous users and newly created accounts and off by default for accounts created before July 10, 2018.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update April 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The next step of the rollout for English and German Wikipedias is planned for the first half of April 2018. This deployment will include turning the feature on by default for logged-out users.  '''This will mean no changes for logged-in users.''' The feature will be off by default for logged-in editors, unless currently enabled. If you would like to enable it, it is available in your Preferences under “Appearance”. If you have the feature enabled already, it will stay on.  
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In terms of future changes for logged-in users, we have a few options we will be requesting feedback on:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Keep the feature off by default for logged-in users.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for new accounts only. Currently, when users move from being readers to contributors and create an account, the feature will seem to vanish, and that would be confusing.  As a further step in the feature rollout, we plan to change this configuration and enable the feature for all new accounts.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for existing logged-in users (Even if it were enabled for everyone, it would still be automatically suppressed for anyone who uses NAVPOPS.)
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Ausrollplan ===

Wir wollen Anfang 2017 in der Katalanischen, Griechischen, Ungarischen, Italienischen und Russischen Wikipedia beginnen. Daten von A/B-Tests zeigen sehr günstige Ansichten über diese Funktion. Danach wollen wir in den anderen Wikipedias mit dem Ausrollen fortfahren, wie in der unten stehenden Tabelle beschrieben.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! Code !! Sprache !! Phase !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Onboarding&lt;/span&gt; !! Erfolg !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dates&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| Alle anderen Wikipedias außer den verbleibenden Top 6 || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|diese Nachricht]] wurde am 19. April an Wikipedia Village Pump (oder ein Äquivalent) in den zu dieser Phase gehörigen 247 Wikis geschicht&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

=== Onboarding-Erfahrung ===

Die Onboarding-Erfahrung mit der Funktion hängt vom Konsens jeder Community ab, ob sie Seitenvorschauen automatisch anschalten will oder ob es eine Onboarding-Erfahrung geben soll, in der sie die Funktion ablehnen können.

== Siehe auch ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (documentation of a - so far internal - dataset recording aggregate frequencies of seen page previews)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[:en:WP:POP|Navigation-Popups]] - das Autorinnen-fokussierte Helferlein, 2005 von Lupin gestartet, verfügbar in den meisten Wikis
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ WMF Blogpost - Hovercards nun als Beta-Funktion in allen Wikimedia-Wikis verfügbar (englisch)] (März 2014)
* Die originalen Spezificationen können hier [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]] und hier [https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes] eingesehen werden.
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|Eine Liste ähnlicher Browsererweiterungen]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - The API specification for Page Previews
&lt;/div&gt;

== Einzelnachweise ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>p4dn09qfacctw6ybwsp4huxf2j6v7zh</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402127</id>
      <parentid>5402121</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:20:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="32284" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
Die '''Seitenvorschaubilder'''-Funktion (Englisch: ''Page Previews'') löst das wichtige Problem, das Benutzer mehrere Browser-Tabs öffnen müssen um die Bedeutung eines Wortes oder einen Konzepts im Kontext des Artikels zu verstehen, den sie gerade lesen.
Mit der Seitenvorschau wird, wann immer ein Leser den Mauszeiger über den Link zu einem anderen Artikel bewegt, eine Kurzzusammenfassung der Themen und ein Bild (wenn verfügbar) angezeigt.
Der Benutzer kann entscheiden, ob er den Artikel aufrufen möchte um mehr über das Thema zu erfahren, bevor er den gegenwärtigen Artikel weiterliest.
Eine vollständige Beschreibung der Seitenvorschaubilder-Funktion findet man [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|hier]].
Einen Überblick über die zugehörige technische Dokumentation finden Sie ab Mai 2018 [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ unter diesem Link].

Die Funktion '''Referenz-Vorschau''' ist ein verwandtes Projekt. Damit wird immer dann ein Vorschaufenster eingeblendet, wenn der Leser den Mauszeiger auf eine Fußnote hält. Eine Beschreibung dieser Funktion finden Sie auf [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|der Projektseite]].

== Einführung ==
Seitenvorschaubilder sollen den Aufwand für das Studieren eines Links senken und das Lernen fördern, indem die der Leserin erlauben, Kontext zu dem Artikel zu erhalten, den sie gerade liest oder unbekannte Begriff, Objekte, Ereignisse oder Ideen zu verstehen, ohne das ursprüngliche Thema zu verlassen.
Die Funktion erleichtert es normalen Leserinnen, einen Überblick über einen Artikel zu bekommen, bevor sie sich entscheiden, ihn aufzurufen oder nicht.
Benutzer, die einen Artikel in seiner Gesamtheit lesen wollen werden nicht unterbrochen oder entmutigt, weil sie sich unbekannte Konzepte ansehen müssen - sie können einfach eine Vorschau des Konzepts sehen, ohne zu einer anderen Seite wechseln zu müssen.
So wird die Geschmeidigkeit der Benutzererfahrung verbessert.

Es gab im Laufe der Jahre viele Anfragen zu ähnlichen Funktionen; es gibt Browser-Erweiterungen (siehe [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|Liste]]) und ein vielgenutztes Helferlein (die mehr Autoren-zentrierten [[:de:Wikipedia:Helferlein/Navigation-Popups|Navigation-Popups]]), die dieses Problem ebenfalls lösen.
Hovercards wurden erstmals 2014 als Beta-Funktion programmiert und sind unter den beliebtesten Beta-Funktionen in Hinsicht auf Benutzung, Benutzer-Feedback und Auswirkung der Benutzung.
Auf der [[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|Hauptdiskussionsseite für Hovercards]] wurden im Laufe von zwei Jahren über alle Projekte hinweg mehrere Probleme identifiziert und gelöst.
Das Mobile-Äquivalent für Hovercards, das [[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|im September 2015]] in die Android-App eingefügt wurde führte zu 20% mehr Links, die pro Seite geklickt wurden.

Die Hovercards-[[#settings|Einstellungsseite]] ermöglicht ausgeloggten Benutzern die Funktion nach belieben ein- und auszuschalten.
Eingeloggte Benutzer können derzeit die Funktion in ihren Beta-Einstellungen ein- und ausschalten.
Wenn Navigation-Popups und Hovercards gleichzeitig angeschaltet sind (zum Beispiel bei eingeloggten Benutzerinnen, die automatisch alle neuen Beta-Funktionen aktivieren lassen), haben Navigation-Popups den Vorrang.
Um Hovercards zu ermöglichen, müssen Navigation-Popups ausgeschaltet sein.

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|Beispiel für eine Hovercard]]

== Design ==

Derzeit enthalten Hovercards folgendes:
* Einen Teil des ersten Abschnitts des Artikels
* Ein Bild (wenn verfügbar) aus dem Artikel. Bilder werden abhängig vom Ort des Links im Artikel horizontal oder vertikal angezeigt.
* Ein Einstellungszahnrad, mit dem Bennutzer Hovercards ein- und ausschalten können

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png| Beispiel für Hovercards auf Griechisch
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Beispiel für Hovercards auf Chinesisch
File:Hovercard english.png|Beispiel für Hovercards auf Englisch
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Example of Page Previews in Chinese
File:Hovercard english.png|Example of Page Previews in English
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== Hauptunterschiede zu Navigation-Popups ===

* Navigation-Popups sind für erfahrene Benutzer und viele Funktionen sind für die meisten Seitenbenutzer nicht interessant.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Navigation popups work for links to all namespaces, and on all Wikimedia projects. Page Previews is configured to only work with mainspace links, and currently only on Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Hovercards sind für einfaches Lesen gestaltet, die Schriftgröße der Nav-Popups ist klein und die Ränder sind schmal.
* Hovercards werden für alle Benutzer verfügbar sein, nicht nur für eingeloggte.
* Konsistenter Grafischer Stil.
* Hervorhebung des Hauptbildes, so dass Benutzer über Text und Bild eine Vorstellung von dem Begriff erhalten.
* Die verfügbaren Funktionen im Helferlein passen nicht zum Kontext; wir müssten prüfen, welche der Funktionen den Lesern und Autoren nützlich sind.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== HTML Previews ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
As of March 1st, 2018, page previews now display previews in HTML.  This resolves many outstanding bugs, provides correct representation of mathematical, chemical and other formulas, and ensures previews display the same formatting as the article content.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== Einstellungen ==

=== Einschalten/Ausschalten ===

==== Ausgeloggte Benutzer ====
Ausgeloggte Benutzer können Hovercards mittels des Zahnradsymbols ausschalten, dass am unteren Rand jeder Hovercard angezeigt wird. Wenn der Benutzer Hovercards wieder anschalten möchte, dann kann er das mit dem &quot;{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}&quot;-Link tun, der am unteren Rand jeder Wikiseite angezeigt wird.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They can also disable JavaScript in their browser to turn it off permanently.&lt;/span&gt;
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File: Hovercard english.png | Wähle das Zahnradsymbol, um Hovercards auszuschalten
File: Page preview settings logged out.png | Wähle Disable, um die Funktion auszuschalten
File: Reenablemodal.png | Anleitungen zum Wiederanschalten werden angezeigt
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | Select disable to disable the feature
File:Reenablemodal.png | Instructions on how to re-enable will be presented
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| Der zum Wiederanschalten der Hovercards wird an der Unterkante jeder Seite angezeigt
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== Eingeloggte Benutzer ====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Logged-in users can control their settings from two places. They may enable or disable Page Previews from the Appearance section of Special:Preferences. Logged-in users may also turn Page Previews off via the cog-icon displayed at the bottom of each preview.
* If a logged-in user clicks on the settings cog, the system will redirect them to the user preferences page.
* If a user previously had the Hovercards beta feature enabled, their preference will be kept and appear in the Appearance section of user preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| Benutzer können die Funktion über das Zahnradsymbol an der Unterkante jeder Hovercard anschalten, oder indem sie die Option direkt auf der Seite mit den Benutzereinstellungen auswählen
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

== Erfolgskriterien und Funktionsevaluation ==

Es wurden einige qualitative und quantitative Tests durchgeführt, um die Leistung der Hovercards-Funktion zu prüfen. Diese Test haben sich auf folgende Fragen konzentriert:
* Gefallen den Benutzern die Hovercards und finden sie sie nützlich?
* Wie ändern Hovercards das Leseverhalten und helfen sie Benutzern zielgerichteter die Artikel auszuwählen, die sie lesen möchten?
* Würde der Start der Hovercards-Funktionen Auswirkungen auf das Fundraising haben?

=== Test in der Griechischen und der Katalanischen Wikipedia 2015 ===

Ein Funktionstest wurde für vier Monate in der Griechischen und der Katalanischen Wikipedia durchgeführt. Einige Fehler und Probleme wurden berichten und die Nutzerzufriedenheit wurde mit einer Umfrage gemessen. Benutzer haben allgemein positives Feedback, wobei die Mehrheit die Hovercards nützlich, einfach zu benutzen und erfreulich fanden.

Lies [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/GreekCatalanTest|alle Ergebnisse dieser Tests]].

=== Qualitativer Test 2016 ===
Um die Erwartungen der Benutzer an die Hovercards-Funktion zu erfassen und weitere Änderungen am Leseverhalten zu messen, wurde mit der [http://UserZoom.com UserZoom]-Software ein unmoderierte Remote-Panel-Studie durchgeführt.
Die Mehrheit der Teilnehmer gab positives Feedback zur Hovercards-Funktion.
Außerdem hatte die Mehrheit der Teilnehmer keine Probleme beim Ein- und Ausschalten der Funktionen.
Benutzer beschrieben die Funktionen allgemein mit positiven Begriffen und berichteten, dass sie ihre Leseerfahrung nicht beeinträchtigt hätte.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Lies [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|alle Ergebbisse und die Auswertung dieser Tests]].
&lt;/div&gt;

=== A/B-Tests in der Ungarischen, Italienischen und Russischen Wikipedia 2016 ===

Um Änderungen des Leseverhaltens zu messen und die Erfolg der Hovercards-Beta-Funktion zu erfassen, wurden am 23. September 2016 in der Ungarischen, Italienischen und Russischen Wikipedia drei A/B-Tests gestartet.

Aus den Ergebnissen dieser Tests können wir schließen, dass Hovercards positive Veränderungen im Leseverhalten ermöglichen, in dem sie die Präzision erhöhen, mit der Benutzer Seiten aussuchen, die sie lesen wollen, da die Kosten für die Erkundung anderer Seiten sinken und den Benutzern erlaubt, einen selektiven Fokus auf ein einziges Thema zu richten, da die Kontext innerhalb der Seite geboten wird.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During the process of collecting and analysing our data we ran into a number of bugs and issues within our instrumentation that allowed us to refine and improve, to ensure subsequent tests were issue-free.&lt;/span&gt;

Lies [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|alle Ergebnisse und Auswertungen dieser Tests]].

=== A/B-Test in der Englischen und der Deutschen Wikipedia 2017 ===
Am 28. August 2017 starteten wir einen A/B-Test um die Leistung der Funktion vor dem offiziellen Start zu messen. Die liefen zwei Wochen gleichzeitig mit einigen Fundraising-Tests in der Englischen Wikipedia.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The results, described in more detail [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|in the report]], displayed a decrease in pageviews, but an overall increase in the number of distinct pages that readers interact with, indicating that they are more likely to explore a larger variety of topics when the feature is on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also noted decreased usage of the back button and very low rates of disabling the feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition, we ran a number of fundraising tests on enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Improvements since English Wikipedia discussion from April 2016 ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
During the [[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |discussion]] from April 2016, a number of bugs, improvements, and other requests were identified which we have addressed in the following ways:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previews “getting stuck” in the open position
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have since refactored our code and this is no longer an issue
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Bolded text and mathematical formulas not appearing within the preview
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Currently, previews display in HTML and content is true to the article content
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to disable the feature from the card itself
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in and logged-out users can now disable the feature by selecting the settings gear within the card itself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to make sure page previews do not interfere with navigational popups
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in users may either have navigational popups or page previews. If you’re a navpopups user, you will not be able to enable page previews unless you turn off navpopups first, and vice versa
Providing more thorough research and A/B test results, performing a large-scale A/B test on English Wikipedia
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Since the discussion, we have performed [[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|two series of A/B tests]], the first on Hungarian, Russian, and Italian Wikipedias.  And the [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |second]] on English and German Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Limiting performance impact
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have worked with our performance team to minimize any issues page previews.  A [https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 dashboard] with detailed information on feature performance was created.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing a way to enable the feature for anonymous users only
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*This is ready as well.  As of March 2018, the feature is enabled by default for anonymous users on all Wikipedias except English and German
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing data on how often users disable the feature
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*For both of our 2017/18 A/B tests, the disable rate was around 0.01%.  Because the rate had been similarly low in earlier A/B tests, we also did a [[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |qualitative test]] to confirm that users did not have problems enabling or disabling the feature.  Our conclusion is that people know how to turn the feature off without difficulty but do so at extremely low rates.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing information on whether the feature was considered a nuisance
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Based on our qualitative testing, we concluded that tested users did not find the feature distracting, or a nuisance.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Deaktivierte Seiten ==

Aus Sicherheitsgründen werden Seitenvorschauen auf einigen Spezialseiten nicht angezeigt. Wir bezeichnen diese Seiten als &quot;disabled pages&quot;. Die erste Version davon kann hier eingesehen werden: {{phab|T170893}}.

== Zukünftige Entwicklungszyklen und potenzielle Verbesserungen ==

Nach dem erfolgreichen Start der Hovercards planen wir schrittweise neue Funktionen hinzuzufügen. Dazu gehört:

* Konfiguration von Bildern und andere Einstellungen:
** einige Benutzer wollten Bilder in Hovercards einstellen können. Wir haben uns das für eine zukünftige Entwicklung gemerkt und verfolgen das unter https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995
** andere Einstellungen für nicht Eingeloggte (siehe [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|hier]])
* Artikelnamen - zur Zeit wird nur die Zusammenfassung des Artikels in Hovercards angezeigt. Als weiteren Schritt wollen wir den Namen des Artikels zusammen mit der Zusammenfassung anzeigen
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Reference Tooltips ([[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]). The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|Einsatz von Hovercards um mehr Informationen zu jedem Einzelnachweis anzuzeigen, ohne ans Ende der Seite scrollen zu müssen
&lt;/gallery&gt;
* Wiki-übergreifende Hovercards ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]) und Überschriftenlinks ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]]), insbesondere für Wiktionary
* Integration mit Navigation-Popups - wir wollen die Konfiguration von Hovercards erweitern, um einige der Funktionen von Navigation-Popups einzubauen
* Interaktion mit dem Text in Hovercards - einige Anfragen zur Interaktion mit dem Text in Hovercards wurden gestellt, einschließlich der Möglichkeit den Text kopieren und einfügen, oder als Formular oder Artikelzusammenfassung exportieren zu können. Mehr Infos hier  ([[phab: T146097|phab: T146097]])
* Integration mit Wiktionary-Einträgen, um Definitionen beim Darüberfahren anzubieten.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |Integration mit Wiktionary-Einträgen, um Definitionen für unbekanntes anzubieten
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/FAQ|FAQ]] ==

;Warum Hovercards?
Das ist eine Funktion, die die Erfahrung für jeden Leser verbessern soll, der normalerweise auf einen blauen Link in der Wikipedia geklickt hätte, um einen Überblick( eine Definition) für den Eintrag zu erhalten.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How do we measure Page Previews performance?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
At the project level, administrators can determine how long a user should dwell on a link before a hover is triggered. If a project wants to be conservative, the lag can be longer. WMF will have a recommendation as to optimum dwell time that provides the best user experience while minimizing accidental hovers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Why can't users just turn on Page Previews if they want them?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Unfortunately, there is no good way to tell users about a new feature without showing it to them first. Central notice banners have been suggested, but running them for 2 weeks would not solve the needs of future users and we do not want to run them continuously. Notifying a user of a new feature is best done using a...hover-over.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What impact to Page Previews have on page views?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:According to A/B tests we did not see a large decrease in session depth across all Wikipedias. Average session depth (average number of pages viewed per session) [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|remained relatively equal]] between the Previews on and off groups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What about accessibility?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Page Previews only activate when the focus/hover state occurs over a link. They are usable for people who use keyboard navigation. For screen readers, Page Previews have proper [[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]] semantics declaring them as tooltips. In short, screen reader software ignore Page Previews.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; If I have Page Previews feedback or if I have a suggestion for making them better, where should I go?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Please go to [[Talk:Page_Previews|the Page Previews discussion page]].
&lt;/div&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Previews continues to show an old version of a page. What can I do?&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Preview shows the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|cached]] version of a page. If the page has been edited and you want Page Previews to show the new version right away, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|purge]] the page.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

== Code ==
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
;Auswertung und Instrumentarium
:* Hovercards werden derzeit eingesetzt, um verschiedene Aspekte der Benutzung zu messen. Lies [[Extension:Popups| die Seite der Popups-Erweiterung]] für Details und frage gern, wenn etwas unklar ist.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To measure content usage via Page Previews, in an aggregated way that is compatible with the existing Pageviews data, a separate instrumentation [[phab:T186728|was set up]] that went live in April 2018. There are [[phab:T193524|plans]] to make some of this data public for the benefit of e.g. Wikipedia editors and academic researchers.&lt;/span&gt;

== Ausroll-Diskussionen auf Projektebene ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update July 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Page previews are now available on all Wikipedias.  The feature is on by default for anonymous users and newly created accounts and off by default for accounts created before July 10, 2018.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update April 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The next step of the rollout for English and German Wikipedias is planned for the first half of April 2018. This deployment will include turning the feature on by default for logged-out users.  '''This will mean no changes for logged-in users.''' The feature will be off by default for logged-in editors, unless currently enabled. If you would like to enable it, it is available in your Preferences under “Appearance”. If you have the feature enabled already, it will stay on.  
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In terms of future changes for logged-in users, we have a few options we will be requesting feedback on:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Keep the feature off by default for logged-in users.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for new accounts only. Currently, when users move from being readers to contributors and create an account, the feature will seem to vanish, and that would be confusing.  As a further step in the feature rollout, we plan to change this configuration and enable the feature for all new accounts.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for existing logged-in users (Even if it were enabled for everyone, it would still be automatically suppressed for anyone who uses NAVPOPS.)
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Ausrollplan ===

Wir wollen Anfang 2017 in der Katalanischen, Griechischen, Ungarischen, Italienischen und Russischen Wikipedia beginnen. Daten von A/B-Tests zeigen sehr günstige Ansichten über diese Funktion. Danach wollen wir in den anderen Wikipedias mit dem Ausrollen fortfahren, wie in der unten stehenden Tabelle beschrieben.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! Code !! Sprache !! Phase !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Onboarding&lt;/span&gt; !! Erfolg !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dates&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| Alle anderen Wikipedias außer den verbleibenden Top 6 || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|diese Nachricht]] wurde am 19. April an Wikipedia Village Pump (oder ein Äquivalent) in den zu dieser Phase gehörigen 247 Wikis geschicht&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

=== Onboarding-Erfahrung ===

Die Onboarding-Erfahrung mit der Funktion hängt vom Konsens jeder Community ab, ob sie Seitenvorschauen automatisch anschalten will oder ob es eine Onboarding-Erfahrung geben soll, in der sie die Funktion ablehnen können.

== Siehe auch ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (documentation of a - so far internal - dataset recording aggregate frequencies of seen page previews)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[:en:WP:POP|Navigation-Popups]] - das Autorinnen-fokussierte Helferlein, 2005 von Lupin gestartet, verfügbar in den meisten Wikis
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ WMF Blogpost - Hovercards nun als Beta-Funktion in allen Wikimedia-Wikis verfügbar (englisch)] (März 2014)
* Die originalen Spezificationen können hier [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]] und hier [https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes] eingesehen werden.
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|Eine Liste ähnlicher Browsererweiterungen]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - The API specification for Page Previews
&lt;/div&gt;

== Einzelnachweise ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>kpw36bwfoij4t3fqirjs6b3ury83kxp</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402133</id>
      <parentid>5402127</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:21:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="32244" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
Die '''Seitenvorschaubilder'''-Funktion (Englisch: ''Page Previews'') löst das wichtige Problem, das Benutzer mehrere Browser-Tabs öffnen müssen um die Bedeutung eines Wortes oder einen Konzepts im Kontext des Artikels zu verstehen, den sie gerade lesen.
Mit der Seitenvorschau wird, wann immer ein Leser den Mauszeiger über den Link zu einem anderen Artikel bewegt, eine Kurzzusammenfassung der Themen und ein Bild (wenn verfügbar) angezeigt.
Der Benutzer kann entscheiden, ob er den Artikel aufrufen möchte um mehr über das Thema zu erfahren, bevor er den gegenwärtigen Artikel weiterliest.
Eine vollständige Beschreibung der Seitenvorschaubilder-Funktion findet man [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|hier]].
Einen Überblick über die zugehörige technische Dokumentation finden Sie ab Mai 2018 [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ unter diesem Link].

Die Funktion '''Referenz-Vorschau''' ist ein verwandtes Projekt. Damit wird immer dann ein Vorschaufenster eingeblendet, wenn der Leser den Mauszeiger auf eine Fußnote hält. Eine Beschreibung dieser Funktion finden Sie auf [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|der Projektseite]].

== Einführung ==
Seitenvorschaubilder sollen den Aufwand für das Studieren eines Links senken und das Lernen fördern, indem die der Leserin erlauben, Kontext zu dem Artikel zu erhalten, den sie gerade liest oder unbekannte Begriff, Objekte, Ereignisse oder Ideen zu verstehen, ohne das ursprüngliche Thema zu verlassen.
Die Funktion erleichtert es normalen Leserinnen, einen Überblick über einen Artikel zu bekommen, bevor sie sich entscheiden, ihn aufzurufen oder nicht.
Benutzer, die einen Artikel in seiner Gesamtheit lesen wollen werden nicht unterbrochen oder entmutigt, weil sie sich unbekannte Konzepte ansehen müssen - sie können einfach eine Vorschau des Konzepts sehen, ohne zu einer anderen Seite wechseln zu müssen.
So wird die Geschmeidigkeit der Benutzererfahrung verbessert.

Es gab im Laufe der Jahre viele Anfragen zu ähnlichen Funktionen; es gibt Browser-Erweiterungen (siehe [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|Liste]]) und ein vielgenutztes Helferlein (die mehr Autoren-zentrierten [[:de:Wikipedia:Helferlein/Navigation-Popups|Navigation-Popups]]), die dieses Problem ebenfalls lösen.
Hovercards wurden erstmals 2014 als Beta-Funktion programmiert und sind unter den beliebtesten Beta-Funktionen in Hinsicht auf Benutzung, Benutzer-Feedback und Auswirkung der Benutzung.
Auf der [[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|Hauptdiskussionsseite für Hovercards]] wurden im Laufe von zwei Jahren über alle Projekte hinweg mehrere Probleme identifiziert und gelöst.
Das Mobile-Äquivalent für Hovercards, das [[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|im September 2015]] in die Android-App eingefügt wurde führte zu 20% mehr Links, die pro Seite geklickt wurden.

Die Hovercards-[[#settings|Einstellungsseite]] ermöglicht ausgeloggten Benutzern die Funktion nach belieben ein- und auszuschalten.
Eingeloggte Benutzer können derzeit die Funktion in ihren Beta-Einstellungen ein- und ausschalten.
Wenn Navigation-Popups und Hovercards gleichzeitig angeschaltet sind (zum Beispiel bei eingeloggten Benutzerinnen, die automatisch alle neuen Beta-Funktionen aktivieren lassen), haben Navigation-Popups den Vorrang.
Um Hovercards zu ermöglichen, müssen Navigation-Popups ausgeschaltet sein.

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|Beispiel für eine Hovercard]]

== Design ==

Derzeit enthalten Hovercards folgendes:
* Einen Teil des ersten Abschnitts des Artikels
* Ein Bild (wenn verfügbar) aus dem Artikel. Bilder werden abhängig vom Ort des Links im Artikel horizontal oder vertikal angezeigt.
* Ein Einstellungszahnrad, mit dem Bennutzer Hovercards ein- und ausschalten können

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png| Beispiel für Hovercards auf Griechisch
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Beispiel für Hovercards auf Chinesisch
File:Hovercard english.png|Beispiel für Hovercards auf Englisch
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Example of Page Previews in Chinese
File:Hovercard english.png|Example of Page Previews in English
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== Hauptunterschiede zu Navigation-Popups ===

* Navigation-Popups sind für erfahrene Benutzer und viele Funktionen sind für die meisten Seitenbenutzer nicht interessant.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Navigation popups work for links to all namespaces, and on all Wikimedia projects. Page Previews is configured to only work with mainspace links, and currently only on Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Hovercards sind für einfaches Lesen gestaltet, die Schriftgröße der Nav-Popups ist klein und die Ränder sind schmal.
* Hovercards werden für alle Benutzer verfügbar sein, nicht nur für eingeloggte.
* Konsistenter Grafischer Stil.
* Hervorhebung des Hauptbildes, so dass Benutzer über Text und Bild eine Vorstellung von dem Begriff erhalten.
* Die verfügbaren Funktionen im Helferlein passen nicht zum Kontext; wir müssten prüfen, welche der Funktionen den Lesern und Autoren nützlich sind.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== HTML Previews ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
As of March 1st, 2018, page previews now display previews in HTML.  This resolves many outstanding bugs, provides correct representation of mathematical, chemical and other formulas, and ensures previews display the same formatting as the article content.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== Einstellungen ==

=== Einschalten/Ausschalten ===

==== Ausgeloggte Benutzer ====
Ausgeloggte Benutzer können Hovercards mittels des Zahnradsymbols ausschalten, dass am unteren Rand jeder Hovercard angezeigt wird. Wenn der Benutzer Hovercards wieder anschalten möchte, dann kann er das mit dem &quot;{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}&quot;-Link tun, der am unteren Rand jeder Wikiseite angezeigt wird.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They can also disable JavaScript in their browser to turn it off permanently.&lt;/span&gt;
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File: Hovercard english.png | Wähle das Zahnradsymbol, um Hovercards auszuschalten
File: Page preview settings logged out.png | Wähle Disable, um die Funktion auszuschalten
File: Reenablemodal.png | Anleitungen zum Wiederanschalten werden angezeigt
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | Select disable to disable the feature
File:Reenablemodal.png | Instructions on how to re-enable will be presented
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| Der zum Wiederanschalten der Hovercards wird an der Unterkante jeder Seite angezeigt
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== Eingeloggte Benutzer ====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Logged-in users can control their settings from two places. They may enable or disable Page Previews from the Appearance section of Special:Preferences. Logged-in users may also turn Page Previews off via the cog-icon displayed at the bottom of each preview.
* If a logged-in user clicks on the settings cog, the system will redirect them to the user preferences page.
* If a user previously had the Hovercards beta feature enabled, their preference will be kept and appear in the Appearance section of user preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| Benutzer können die Funktion über das Zahnradsymbol an der Unterkante jeder Hovercard anschalten, oder indem sie die Option direkt auf der Seite mit den Benutzereinstellungen auswählen
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

== Erfolgskriterien und Funktionsevaluation ==

Es wurden einige qualitative und quantitative Tests durchgeführt, um die Leistung der Hovercards-Funktion zu prüfen. Diese Test haben sich auf folgende Fragen konzentriert:
* Gefallen den Benutzern die Hovercards und finden sie sie nützlich?
* Wie ändern Hovercards das Leseverhalten und helfen sie Benutzern zielgerichteter die Artikel auszuwählen, die sie lesen möchten?
* Würde der Start der Hovercards-Funktionen Auswirkungen auf das Fundraising haben?

=== Test in der Griechischen und der Katalanischen Wikipedia 2015 ===

Ein Funktionstest wurde für vier Monate in der Griechischen und der Katalanischen Wikipedia durchgeführt. Einige Fehler und Probleme wurden berichten und die Nutzerzufriedenheit wurde mit einer Umfrage gemessen. Benutzer haben allgemein positives Feedback, wobei die Mehrheit die Hovercards nützlich, einfach zu benutzen und erfreulich fanden.

Lies [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/GreekCatalanTest|alle Ergebnisse dieser Tests]].

=== Qualitativer Test 2016 ===
Um die Erwartungen der Benutzer an die Hovercards-Funktion zu erfassen und weitere Änderungen am Leseverhalten zu messen, wurde mit der [http://UserZoom.com UserZoom]-Software ein unmoderierte Remote-Panel-Studie durchgeführt.
Die Mehrheit der Teilnehmer gab positives Feedback zur Hovercards-Funktion.
Außerdem hatte die Mehrheit der Teilnehmer keine Probleme beim Ein- und Ausschalten der Funktionen.
Benutzer beschrieben die Funktionen allgemein mit positiven Begriffen und berichteten, dass sie ihre Leseerfahrung nicht beeinträchtigt hätte.

Lies [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|alle Ergebbisse und die Auswertung dieser Tests]].

=== A/B-Tests in der Ungarischen, Italienischen und Russischen Wikipedia 2016 ===

Um Änderungen des Leseverhaltens zu messen und die Erfolg der Hovercards-Beta-Funktion zu erfassen, wurden am 23. September 2016 in der Ungarischen, Italienischen und Russischen Wikipedia drei A/B-Tests gestartet.

Aus den Ergebnissen dieser Tests können wir schließen, dass Hovercards positive Veränderungen im Leseverhalten ermöglichen, in dem sie die Präzision erhöhen, mit der Benutzer Seiten aussuchen, die sie lesen wollen, da die Kosten für die Erkundung anderer Seiten sinken und den Benutzern erlaubt, einen selektiven Fokus auf ein einziges Thema zu richten, da die Kontext innerhalb der Seite geboten wird.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During the process of collecting and analysing our data we ran into a number of bugs and issues within our instrumentation that allowed us to refine and improve, to ensure subsequent tests were issue-free.&lt;/span&gt;

Lies [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|alle Ergebnisse und Auswertungen dieser Tests]].

=== A/B-Test in der Englischen und der Deutschen Wikipedia 2017 ===
Am 28. August 2017 starteten wir einen A/B-Test um die Leistung der Funktion vor dem offiziellen Start zu messen. Die liefen zwei Wochen gleichzeitig mit einigen Fundraising-Tests in der Englischen Wikipedia.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The results, described in more detail [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|in the report]], displayed a decrease in pageviews, but an overall increase in the number of distinct pages that readers interact with, indicating that they are more likely to explore a larger variety of topics when the feature is on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also noted decreased usage of the back button and very low rates of disabling the feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition, we ran a number of fundraising tests on enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Improvements since English Wikipedia discussion from April 2016 ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
During the [[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |discussion]] from April 2016, a number of bugs, improvements, and other requests were identified which we have addressed in the following ways:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previews “getting stuck” in the open position
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have since refactored our code and this is no longer an issue
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Bolded text and mathematical formulas not appearing within the preview
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Currently, previews display in HTML and content is true to the article content
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to disable the feature from the card itself
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in and logged-out users can now disable the feature by selecting the settings gear within the card itself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to make sure page previews do not interfere with navigational popups
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in users may either have navigational popups or page previews. If you’re a navpopups user, you will not be able to enable page previews unless you turn off navpopups first, and vice versa
Providing more thorough research and A/B test results, performing a large-scale A/B test on English Wikipedia
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Since the discussion, we have performed [[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|two series of A/B tests]], the first on Hungarian, Russian, and Italian Wikipedias.  And the [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |second]] on English and German Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Limiting performance impact
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have worked with our performance team to minimize any issues page previews.  A [https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 dashboard] with detailed information on feature performance was created.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing a way to enable the feature for anonymous users only
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*This is ready as well.  As of March 2018, the feature is enabled by default for anonymous users on all Wikipedias except English and German
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing data on how often users disable the feature
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*For both of our 2017/18 A/B tests, the disable rate was around 0.01%.  Because the rate had been similarly low in earlier A/B tests, we also did a [[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |qualitative test]] to confirm that users did not have problems enabling or disabling the feature.  Our conclusion is that people know how to turn the feature off without difficulty but do so at extremely low rates.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing information on whether the feature was considered a nuisance
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Based on our qualitative testing, we concluded that tested users did not find the feature distracting, or a nuisance.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Deaktivierte Seiten ==

Aus Sicherheitsgründen werden Seitenvorschauen auf einigen Spezialseiten nicht angezeigt. Wir bezeichnen diese Seiten als &quot;disabled pages&quot;. Die erste Version davon kann hier eingesehen werden: {{phab|T170893}}.

== Zukünftige Entwicklungszyklen und potenzielle Verbesserungen ==

Nach dem erfolgreichen Start der Hovercards planen wir schrittweise neue Funktionen hinzuzufügen. Dazu gehört:

* Konfiguration von Bildern und andere Einstellungen:
** einige Benutzer wollten Bilder in Hovercards einstellen können. Wir haben uns das für eine zukünftige Entwicklung gemerkt und verfolgen das unter https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995
** andere Einstellungen für nicht Eingeloggte (siehe [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|hier]])
* Artikelnamen - zur Zeit wird nur die Zusammenfassung des Artikels in Hovercards angezeigt. Als weiteren Schritt wollen wir den Namen des Artikels zusammen mit der Zusammenfassung anzeigen
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Reference Tooltips ([[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]). The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|Einsatz von Hovercards um mehr Informationen zu jedem Einzelnachweis anzuzeigen, ohne ans Ende der Seite scrollen zu müssen
&lt;/gallery&gt;
* Wiki-übergreifende Hovercards ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]) und Überschriftenlinks ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]]), insbesondere für Wiktionary
* Integration mit Navigation-Popups - wir wollen die Konfiguration von Hovercards erweitern, um einige der Funktionen von Navigation-Popups einzubauen
* Interaktion mit dem Text in Hovercards - einige Anfragen zur Interaktion mit dem Text in Hovercards wurden gestellt, einschließlich der Möglichkeit den Text kopieren und einfügen, oder als Formular oder Artikelzusammenfassung exportieren zu können. Mehr Infos hier  ([[phab: T146097|phab: T146097]])
* Integration mit Wiktionary-Einträgen, um Definitionen beim Darüberfahren anzubieten.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |Integration mit Wiktionary-Einträgen, um Definitionen für unbekanntes anzubieten
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/FAQ|FAQ]] ==

;Warum Hovercards?
Das ist eine Funktion, die die Erfahrung für jeden Leser verbessern soll, der normalerweise auf einen blauen Link in der Wikipedia geklickt hätte, um einen Überblick( eine Definition) für den Eintrag zu erhalten.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How do we measure Page Previews performance?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
At the project level, administrators can determine how long a user should dwell on a link before a hover is triggered. If a project wants to be conservative, the lag can be longer. WMF will have a recommendation as to optimum dwell time that provides the best user experience while minimizing accidental hovers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Why can't users just turn on Page Previews if they want them?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Unfortunately, there is no good way to tell users about a new feature without showing it to them first. Central notice banners have been suggested, but running them for 2 weeks would not solve the needs of future users and we do not want to run them continuously. Notifying a user of a new feature is best done using a...hover-over.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What impact to Page Previews have on page views?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:According to A/B tests we did not see a large decrease in session depth across all Wikipedias. Average session depth (average number of pages viewed per session) [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|remained relatively equal]] between the Previews on and off groups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What about accessibility?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Page Previews only activate when the focus/hover state occurs over a link. They are usable for people who use keyboard navigation. For screen readers, Page Previews have proper [[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]] semantics declaring them as tooltips. In short, screen reader software ignore Page Previews.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; If I have Page Previews feedback or if I have a suggestion for making them better, where should I go?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Please go to [[Talk:Page_Previews|the Page Previews discussion page]].
&lt;/div&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Previews continues to show an old version of a page. What can I do?&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Preview shows the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|cached]] version of a page. If the page has been edited and you want Page Previews to show the new version right away, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|purge]] the page.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

== Code ==
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
;Auswertung und Instrumentarium
:* Hovercards werden derzeit eingesetzt, um verschiedene Aspekte der Benutzung zu messen. Lies [[Extension:Popups| die Seite der Popups-Erweiterung]] für Details und frage gern, wenn etwas unklar ist.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To measure content usage via Page Previews, in an aggregated way that is compatible with the existing Pageviews data, a separate instrumentation [[phab:T186728|was set up]] that went live in April 2018. There are [[phab:T193524|plans]] to make some of this data public for the benefit of e.g. Wikipedia editors and academic researchers.&lt;/span&gt;

== Ausroll-Diskussionen auf Projektebene ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update July 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Page previews are now available on all Wikipedias.  The feature is on by default for anonymous users and newly created accounts and off by default for accounts created before July 10, 2018.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update April 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The next step of the rollout for English and German Wikipedias is planned for the first half of April 2018. This deployment will include turning the feature on by default for logged-out users.  '''This will mean no changes for logged-in users.''' The feature will be off by default for logged-in editors, unless currently enabled. If you would like to enable it, it is available in your Preferences under “Appearance”. If you have the feature enabled already, it will stay on.  
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In terms of future changes for logged-in users, we have a few options we will be requesting feedback on:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Keep the feature off by default for logged-in users.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for new accounts only. Currently, when users move from being readers to contributors and create an account, the feature will seem to vanish, and that would be confusing.  As a further step in the feature rollout, we plan to change this configuration and enable the feature for all new accounts.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for existing logged-in users (Even if it were enabled for everyone, it would still be automatically suppressed for anyone who uses NAVPOPS.)
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Ausrollplan ===

Wir wollen Anfang 2017 in der Katalanischen, Griechischen, Ungarischen, Italienischen und Russischen Wikipedia beginnen. Daten von A/B-Tests zeigen sehr günstige Ansichten über diese Funktion. Danach wollen wir in den anderen Wikipedias mit dem Ausrollen fortfahren, wie in der unten stehenden Tabelle beschrieben.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! Code !! Sprache !! Phase !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Onboarding&lt;/span&gt; !! Erfolg !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dates&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| Alle anderen Wikipedias außer den verbleibenden Top 6 || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|diese Nachricht]] wurde am 19. April an Wikipedia Village Pump (oder ein Äquivalent) in den zu dieser Phase gehörigen 247 Wikis geschicht&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

=== Onboarding-Erfahrung ===

Die Onboarding-Erfahrung mit der Funktion hängt vom Konsens jeder Community ab, ob sie Seitenvorschauen automatisch anschalten will oder ob es eine Onboarding-Erfahrung geben soll, in der sie die Funktion ablehnen können.

== Siehe auch ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (documentation of a - so far internal - dataset recording aggregate frequencies of seen page previews)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[:en:WP:POP|Navigation-Popups]] - das Autorinnen-fokussierte Helferlein, 2005 von Lupin gestartet, verfügbar in den meisten Wikis
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ WMF Blogpost - Hovercards nun als Beta-Funktion in allen Wikimedia-Wikis verfügbar (englisch)] (März 2014)
* Die originalen Spezificationen können hier [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]] und hier [https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes] eingesehen werden.
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|Eine Liste ähnlicher Browsererweiterungen]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - The API specification for Page Previews
&lt;/div&gt;

== Einzelnachweise ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>8d26pc9m9v1r01jh9mtv00g3i7gax52</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Page Previews/28/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>780562</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402126</id>
      <parentid>2771478</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:20:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="41" xml:space="preserve">Lies [[$1|alle Ergebnisse dieser Tests]].</text>
      <sha1>a7bu0ec0indztybwzq3ulbiz1qpuwoi</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Page Previews/31/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>780565</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402132</id>
      <parentid>2771486</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:21:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="60" xml:space="preserve">Lies [[$1|alle Ergebbisse und die Auswertung dieser Tests]].</text>
      <sha1>m0w5kl14mx3f5inqivl27119mtfyxqk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Page Previews/35/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>780571</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402114</id>
      <parentid>2771500</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:16:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="58" xml:space="preserve">Lies [[$1|alle Ergebnisse und Auswertungen dieser Tests]].</text>
      <sha1>chjqize9ewsktvoma9joioleojxrjqu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:AdvancedSearch/gl</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>782420</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402392</id>
      <parentid>4621776</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:33:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5091" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
[[File:AdvSearch Screen 20170620.png|thumb|Pantalla AdvancedSearch]]
O [[Special:MyLanguage/extension:AdvancedSearch|AdvancedSearch extension]] liga a [[Special:Search|search page]] dun xeito como parámetros avanzados e finalidaades para facer [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:CirrusSearch|existing search options]] máis visible e  acesa para todos.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's a default feature on all wikis as of Nov 2018.&lt;/span&gt;

==Contexto==

[[m:Special:MyLanguage/WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch|AdvancedSearch]] é un proxecto do equipo WMDE's [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Technical Wishes|technical wishes]]. A idea para a característica foi desenvolvida nunha [[m:Special:MyLanguage/WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch/Workshop|workshop series]] en 2016.

Os parámetros avanzados son amosados como accesos a  [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:CirrusSearch|special search options]] do [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia_Discovery|WMF's search team]] teña implementado nos últimos anos. 
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[m:WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch/Functional_scope|Esta lista da unga vista xeral]] dos parámetros recentemente soportados os cales son planificados para ser soportados ou que non o serán.&lt;/span&gt;

Máis información pode ser atopada en [[m:WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch|main project page on Meta]].

== Uso ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To use the new interface, you can either go directly to [[Special:Search|Special:Search]], click on the magnifying glass icon in the search box or click the search button without filling anything into the search box. Special:Search is also available from any search results list. If you prefer the previous search interface, you can deactivate Advanced Search in [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-searchoptions|your user preferences]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| [[File:AdvancedSearch collapsed view.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| A interface realza a páxina [[Special:Search|Special:Search]] en forma de parámetros avanzados dende os trocos feitos en como selecionar namespaces.

A '''search box''' pode aínda ser utilizado como de costume. Por exemplo, ti podes manualmente teclear parámetros avanzados de busca.

|-
| [[File:AdvancedSearch interface with expanded filetype selection II.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| Cando premes na frecha da sección de parámetros avanzados, date unha selección dalgúns parámetros para buscas avanzadas. Ti podes mesturar parámetros diferentes.

As explicacións de cada parámetro pode ser atopada no próximo campo de entrada.

Nalgúns campos só podes introducir un termo de búsqueda, noutros podes meter varios termos separados por coma. Isto depende da función no campo.

Cando seleccionas unha imaxe ou tipo de artigo, abres un submenú. Aquí, podes especificar o ancho e largo do arquivo.

|-
| [[File:AdvancedSearch - summary of selected parameters and namespaces.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| Cando premes na frecha da parte superior da selección de parámetros avanzados, podes colapsar esta sección. Podes agora ver unha previsualización dos termos de busca que ti introduzas. Por premer no X na previsualización, podes tirar cada termo.

|-
| [[File:AdvancedSearch namespaces dropdown menu.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| Na sección de &quot;Búsca en&quot; podes seleccionar os nomespace que queira atopar. Tampouco podes elixir un namespace presente  (e.x. &quot;Discussion&quot;), teclea o nome desexado ou selecciónao dunha lista embaixo. Podes salver a vosa selección por verificación &quot;Lembra a selección para futuras buscas&quot;.

|-
| [[File:AdvancedSearch - all namespaces selected.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Por comprobar &quot;Todo&quot;, podes elixir tódolos nomes. Podes entón individualmente deseleccionar os que non necesites premendo no X en cada pastilla.&lt;/span&gt;

Preme o botón azul de busca ou pega na chave en calquera campo para arrancar a procura.
|}

== Folla de ruta de implementación ==

Coma '''beta feature'''
* Testwikis e Mediawiki.org: 2017-11-21 {{ok}}
* deWP, arWP: 2017-11-29 {{ok}}
* huWP, faWP: 2017-12-06 {{ok}}
* Other wikis: 2018-05-08 {{ok}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
As a '''default feature'''
* Testwikis and MediaWiki.org: 2018-11-08 {{ok}}
* deWP, arWP, huWP, faWP: 2018-11-15 {{ok}}
* Other wikis: 2018-11-28 {{ok}}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Possibility to change order of results: 2019-07-18
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ligazóns ==

* [[m:WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch|Main project page on Meta]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:CirrusSearch|CirrusSearch Help page]]: Introducción a CirrusSearch incluíndo vista de tódolos avances existentes e parámetros de busca.

== Axuda coa tradución ==

O [[translatewiki:Special:Translate/ext-advancedsearch|software messages for the feature]] pode ser traducido na wiki tradución. Calquera axuda vale!

[[Category:Extension help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>tmqhzss5k7mnlj2jod8aa3uion9q5k6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:AdvancedSearch/2/gl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>782424</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402391</id>
      <parentid>2777179</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:33:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="188" xml:space="preserve">O [[$1|AdvancedSearch extension]] liga a [[$2|search page]] dun xeito como parámetros avanzados e finalidaades para facer [[$3|existing search options]] máis visible e  acesa para todos.</text>
      <sha1>abuoa5x07b18pv1p7ev2fapzg23rb5y</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/pt</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>784300</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402941</id>
      <parentid>5355664</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="50211" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Resumo básico ==

=== Transferência de ficheiro ===

Escolha um método para transferir os ficheiros:

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
* Cópia segura com [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] ou [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|Protocolo de Transferência de Ficheiro SSH]] (SFTP)
* Utilizar um cliente [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Algum outro método. existe uma lista destes em [[w:List of file transfer protocols]] (em inglês)

=== Preliminar ===

Leia {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=o ficheiro de texto &quot;UPGRADE&quot; incluído no MediaWiki}}. (em inglês)

# Verifique os requisitos
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# Leia as notas de lançamento
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
# Efetue uma cópia de segurança dos ficheiros existentes e da base de dados
# Descompacte os novos ficheiros
# Atualize as extensões
# Execute o ''script'' de atualização para verificar a base de dados
# Teste a atualização
# Remover vestígios de instalações antigas

== Verificação de requisitos == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
O MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} requer:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Um dos seguintes:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

Se estiver a utilizar PostgreSQL, por favor, leia também {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}. (em inglês)

Para mais informação, por favor, leia {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} e {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Ler as notas de lançamento ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Limpar trabalhos pendentes ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Efetuar cópia de segurança dos ficheiros existentes e da base de dados ==

:''Instruções completas: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Descompactar os novos ficheiros ==

=== Utilizando o pacote ''tarball'' ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

==== FTP ou gráfica ====

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Linha de comandos ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

(Open)Os utilizadores de Solaris deverão utilizar &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, ou:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Outros ficheiros ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Utilizando Git ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== Utilizando ''patch'' ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Ficheiros restantes que podem causar erros ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Atualizar extensões ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Adaptar as suas LocalSettings.php ==

Se utiliza as mesmas &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; da versão antiga, poderá ter que as adaptar para como as novas versões as utilizam:

=== Registo de temas ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Registo de extensões ===

Desde o MediaWiki 1.25, as extensões utilizam um novo sistema [[Manual:Extension registration|registo de extensão]].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Isto pode ser convertido para:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Outras variáveis ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Executar o comando de atualização ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Linha de comandos ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
=== Navegador da Web ===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: &quot;Consulte também {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}&quot;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Testar a atualização ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Remover vestígios de instalações antigas ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

== Perguntas mais frequentes ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Should I back up first?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Short answer: Yes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Porque atualizar? ===
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Consulte também ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>f2579dd3w7rfnucdx0qd9qc2qcjssgt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/cs</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>787175</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402604</id>
      <parentid>4578040</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4567" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions (formerly known as Flow) are [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|a project]] of the Collaboration team at the Wikimedia Foundation to build a modern discussion and collaboration system for Wikimedia projects.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Quick tour ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How Structured Discussions look - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Try it!]]&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There is some specific terms concerning Structured Discussions. They have been defined in '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|the Glossary]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Advanced tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some advanced tools are available, for specific purposes. They have been regrouped on these subjects:
&lt;/div&gt;

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Activation&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What happens when Structured Discussions are enabled on a page?&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Topics&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filter topics, Edit a topic/message, Summarize a topic, Resolve a topic&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Permalinks&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to create links to subjects&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notifications and watchlist&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How the history system works&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide, Delete, Suppress topics&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading contents on a new Structured Discussions conversation&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shortcuts&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Keyboard shortcuts to use on visual editing mode.&lt;/span&gt;

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All documentation on one page.&lt;/span&gt;}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>ezmx4y92cr8rxt4sqkyj2sylwbojd97</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Editor/zh</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>788327</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402698</id>
      <parentid>5370838</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5871" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
您可能在寻找：

== 目前 ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+当前可用于编辑Wikimedia页面的软件
!编辑工具
!截图
!年
!平台
!注释
|-
|默认的MediaWiki编辑器，这是HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=HTML文本区块的截图|center|frameless]]
|2003
|桌面和移动
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;它没有编辑栏。当禁用JavaScript时，或是当[[Special:Preferences]]中的“{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}”被禁用时可看见。&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|扩展:Wiki编辑器]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Wiki编辑器的截图|center|frameless]]
|2010
|桌面
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;这可以在[[Special:Preferences]]的“{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}”启用时看到。&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|可视化编辑器]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=显示可视化编辑器的可视化模式的截图|center|frameless]]
|2012
|桌面和移动
|一个富文本编辑系统
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|2017年版wiki文本编辑器]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=可视化编辑器的内置wiki文本模式截图|center|frameless]]
|2017
|桌面
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;这是[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:VisualEditor|扩展:可视化编辑器]]中的一种模式。&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|校对页面]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|桌面
|用于[[S:|维基文库]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=wikEd的截图|center|frameless]]
|2006
|桌面
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An entirely volunteer-supported wikitext editor.&lt;/span&gt; 这基本上作为小工具或用户脚本允许，但它同样也在一些非维基媒体wiki上作为扩展运行。
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|代码编辑器]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=代码编辑器的截图|center|frameless]]
|2011
|桌面
|这用于编辑JavaScript及其他代码页面。
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;{{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}当前的wikitext编辑器&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=在移动网络上编辑时的wiki文本截图|center|frameless]]
|2013
|移动
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|内容翻译]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=内容翻译编辑器的截图|center|frameless]]
|2014
|桌面
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|结构式讨论]] （曾称为Flow）
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=结构式讨论中评论及对其回复的开头的截图|center|frameless]]
|2013
|桌面和移动
|结构式讨论支持wiki文本和可视化模式。
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|桌面（即將推出移動版）
|以内联表单添加新话题。 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|桌面（即將推出移動版）
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$android-faq|Android]]应用中的编辑器&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Android手机编辑界面的截图|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|移动
|
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$ios-faq|iOS]]应用中的编辑器&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=iPhone编辑界面的截图|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|移动
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|模板数据]]编辑器
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|桌面
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|维基导游列表编辑器]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|桌面
|基于JavaScript，维基导游专用的插入多个模板之一的编辑工具
|-
|}

== 以前的 ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Former editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
|-
!编辑工具
!截图
!年
!平台
!注释
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;2006年JavaScript“经典”编辑器，[[Manual:EditPage.php]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=2006年版wiki文本编辑器的截图|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|桌面
|2006年到2010年启用“showtoolbar”首选项时就会出现这种情况，之后，仅针对禁用“增强工具栏”（2010编辑器）首选项的用户显示。'''此编辑器已在[[MediaWiki 1.32]]版本中[[phab:T30856|删除]]。''' 在某些wiki上，可以使用类似的工具栏作为志愿者支持的本地小工具。
|-
|移动前端的原始wiki文本编辑器
|
|2012–2014
|移动
|这曾是移动特定的2003年版桌面wiki文本编辑器的修改集。已不再开发。
|-
|}

== 参见 ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>l77ekvru01kau53aoot9sk4n6qk9lgj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>790855</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402284</id>
      <parentid>2830752</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:05:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="33" xml:space="preserve">Véase $1 para más información.</text>
      <sha1>9nzvdbb4zgf46jvboi291m036qsqog9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:SocialToolsSidebar</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>793020</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401702</id>
      <parentid>4104028</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:19:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>78.32.143.113</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>fix red link, fix template [[redirect]]s, [[Category:Templates]]</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1415" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;&lt;Languages/&gt;&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
|=
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name  = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle= 
|title = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle= font-size:130%
|contentstyle= text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1= &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; about&lt;/translate&gt;
|content1= 
*{{Localized link|Social tools|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}
*{{Localized link|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:3--&gt; Contributing and reporting bugs&lt;/translate&gt;}}
*{{Localized link|Social tools/List of extensions|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; List of extensions&lt;/translate&gt;}}
*{{Localized link|Social tools/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; History of social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}

|heading2= &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; compatibility&lt;/translate&gt;
|content2=
*{{Localized link|Social tools/Echo|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; Support for Echo notifications&lt;/translate&gt;}} (&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; draft&lt;/translate&gt;)
*{{Localized link|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; MediaWiki compatibility&lt;/translate&gt;}}
}}
|#default={{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{Documentation}}
[[Category:Templates]]&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>mblksz6bbcjm1hx8vs48cuaio20cog5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401871</id>
      <parentid>5401702</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:11:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Undo revision 5401702 by [[Special:Contributions/78.32.143.113|78.32.143.113]] ([[User talk:78.32.143.113|talk]]): wrong markup</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1339" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
| =
{{Sidebar
| style = width: 300px; 
| name = SocialToolsNav
| pretitle = 
| title = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;
| image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px]]
| headingstyle = font-size: 130%; 
| contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding: .75em;

| above = 

| heading1 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; About&lt;/translate&gt;
| content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:3--&gt; Contributing and reporting bugs&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; List of extensions&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; History of social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}

| heading2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; Compatibility&lt;/translate&gt;
| content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; Support for Echo notifications&lt;/translate&gt;}} (&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; draft&lt;/translate&gt;)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; MediaWiki compatibility&lt;/translate&gt;}}

}}
| #default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>tnjzq0mrfvu7i8kgwv20zy603wg9nef</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401929</id>
      <parentid>5401871</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:43:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>78.32.143.113</ip>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Undo revision 5401871 by [[Special:Contributions/Shirayuki|Shirayuki]] ([[User talk:Shirayuki|talk]]) - there was absolutely nothing wrong with my previous edit.  You just restored a dead red link, and excessive template redirects (template redirects severely increase server load)</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1415" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;&lt;Languages/&gt;&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
|=
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name  = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle= 
|title = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle= font-size:130%
|contentstyle= text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1= &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; about&lt;/translate&gt;
|content1= 
*{{Localized link|Social tools|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}
*{{Localized link|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:3--&gt; Contributing and reporting bugs&lt;/translate&gt;}}
*{{Localized link|Social tools/List of extensions|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; List of extensions&lt;/translate&gt;}}
*{{Localized link|Social tools/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; History of social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}

|heading2= &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; compatibility&lt;/translate&gt;
|content2=
*{{Localized link|Social tools/Echo|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; Support for Echo notifications&lt;/translate&gt;}} (&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; draft&lt;/translate&gt;)
*{{Localized link|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; MediaWiki compatibility&lt;/translate&gt;}}
}}
|#default={{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{Documentation}}
[[Category:Templates]]&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>mblksz6bbcjm1hx8vs48cuaio20cog5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401999</id>
      <parentid>5401929</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:13:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>wrong markup</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1341" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
| =
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle = 
|title = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle = font-size:130%
|contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; about&lt;/translate&gt;
|content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:3--&gt; Contributing and reporting bugs&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; List of extensions&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; History of social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}

|heading2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; compatibility&lt;/translate&gt;
|content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; Support for Echo notifications&lt;/translate&gt;}} (&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; draft&lt;/translate&gt;)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; MediaWiki compatibility&lt;/translate&gt;}}

}}
|#default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>692z6m613088les3kav07y4ksy6skvp</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402000</id>
      <parentid>5401999</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:13:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Protected &quot;[[Template:SocialToolsSidebar]]&quot;: Excessive vandalism ([Edit=Allow only autoconfirmed users] (expires 23:13, 6 February 2023 (UTC)) [Move=Allow only autoconfirmed users] (expires 23:13, 6 February 2023 (UTC)))</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1341" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:&lt;translate&gt;&lt;/translate&gt;
| =
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle = 
|title = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle = font-size:130%
|contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; about&lt;/translate&gt;
|content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:2--&gt; Social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:3--&gt; Contributing and reporting bugs&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; List of extensions&lt;/translate&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; History of social tools&lt;/translate&gt;}}

|heading2 = &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; compatibility&lt;/translate&gt;
|content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; Support for Echo notifications&lt;/translate&gt;}} (&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; draft&lt;/translate&gt;)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; MediaWiki compatibility&lt;/translate&gt;}}

}}
|#default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>692z6m613088les3kav07y4ksy6skvp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Bouquet/fr</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>793897</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401866</id>
      <parentid>5214281</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:07:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2067" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Bouquet
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Automattic — code original (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — support pour MediaWiki
|description     = 
|image           = BouquetSkin.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.2.3
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=bouquet Messages de l'interface]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        =
|phabricator     = Bouquet
}}
'''Bouquet''' est un habillage MediaWiki créé à partir du thème WordPress libre, open source, et de licence GPL du même nom.
Il est décrit sur le site des thèmes WordPress comme &quot;an elegant, simple theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; inspired by the beauty found in flowers&quot;.

Le thème WordPress a été écrit par Automattic et le support pour MediaWiki fait par [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] le 11 janvier 2014 pour [[ShoutWiki]].

== Principales fonctionnalités ==

* '''Deux''' menus de navigation &amp;mdash; personnalisés, un menu déroulant (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Bouquet-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) en haut de la page, et &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; comme barre latérale
* Trois [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|thèmes]] :
** forget-me-not (nom interne (pour le paramètre ''usetheme'' dans l'URL et &lt;code&gt;$wgDefaultTheme&lt;/code&gt;) ''forgetmenot'')
** pink dogwood (nom interne ''pinkdogwood'')
** tiger lily (nom interne ''tigerlily'')
* Image pour l'en-tête/logo personnalisée (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Bouquet-skin-logo.png]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, 1100x180 pixels)

== Installation ==
{{SkinInstall
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]] &lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>9c6ti8z19aoi7k16ykulveyq6gfotav</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/pl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>795719</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402304</id>
      <parentid>2819984</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:07:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="43" xml:space="preserve">Zobacz $1, aby uzyskać więcej informacji.</text>
      <sha1>jdim10acelkt2ju0pxdfc61yj8rrr3s</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:AdvancedSearch/fa</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>797133</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402390</id>
      <parentid>5074429</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:33:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7527" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
[[File:AdvSearch Screen 20170620.png|thumb|نماگرفتی از جستجوی پیشرفته]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[Special:MyLanguage/extension:AdvancedSearch|AdvancedSearch extension]] enhances the [[Special:Search|search page]] through an advanced parameters form and aims to make [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:CirrusSearch|existing search options]] more visible and accessible for everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
از نوامبر ۲۰۱۸ این یک ویژگی پیش‌فرض در همهٔ ویکی‌هاست.

== پس‌زمینه ==

[[m:Special:MyLanguage/WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch|جستجوی پیشرفته]] یک پروژه توسط تیم [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Technical Wishes|مشاورهٔ فنی]] WMDE است. ایدهٔ این ویژگی در سال ۲۰۱۶ در  یک [[m:Special:MyLanguage/WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch/Workshop|سری کارگاه]] توسعه یافت.

فرم پارامترهای پیشرفته دسترسی به برخی از [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:CirrusSearch|گزینه‌های جستجوی ویژه]] را فراهم می‌کند، [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia_Discovery|تیم جستجوی بنیاد ویکی‌مدیا]] آن‌را در سال‌های گذشته نیز اجرا کرده است. 
[[m:WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch/Functional_scope|این سیاهه]] یک مرور کلی را ارائه می‌دهد که کدام پارامترها اجرا می‌شود.

داده‌های بیشتر را در [[m:WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch|برگهٔ اصلی پروژه در فراویکی]] یافت.

==کاربرد==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To use the new interface, you can either go directly to [[Special:Search|Special:Search]], click on the magnifying glass icon in the search box or click the search button without filling anything into the search box. Special:Search is also available from any search results list. If you prefer the previous search interface, you can deactivate Advanced Search in [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-searchoptions|your user preferences]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| [[File:AdvancedSearch collapsed view.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| این رابط، برگهٔ [[Special:Search|ویژه:جستجو]] را از راه یک کادر پارامتر پیشرفته افزایش داده و شیوهٔ انتخاب فضاهای نام را دگرگون ساخت.

'''جعبهٔ جستجو''' هنوز هم می‌تواند مورد استفاده قرار گیرد. برای نمونه، شما می‌توانید به‌شیوهٔ دستی در پارامترهای جستجوی پیشرفته بنویسید.

|-
| [[File:AdvancedSearch interface with expanded filetype selection II.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| هنگامی که روی فلش در بخش پارامترهای پیشرفته کلیک می‌کنید، به شما اجازهٔ انتخاب برخی پارامترها را برای جستجوی پیشرفته می‌دهد.

بازنمود در هر پارامتر را در کنار کادر ورودی می‌توان یافت.

در برخی کادرها فقط می‌توانید یک عبارت جستجو را وارد کنید، اما در دیگر کادرها می‌توانید چندین عبارت را با جداسازی آن‌ها توسط کاما وارد کنید. این به گونهٔ کارکرد کادرها بستگی دارد.

هنگامی که یک گونهٔ نگاره‌ای یا پویانمایی را انتخاب می‌کنید، یک زیرسیاهه باز می‌شود. در این‌جا می‌توانید پهنا و بلندی پرونده را مشخص کنید.

|-
| [[File:AdvancedSearch - summary of selected parameters and namespaces.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| هنگامی که روی فلش در بالای قسمت پارامترهای پیشرفته کلیک می‌کنید، این بخش را پایین می‌کشید. شما اکنون یک پیش‌نمایش از شرط‌های جستجو که وارد کرده‌اید را می‌بینید. با کلیک بر روی X در پیش‌نمایش، می‌توانید هر عبارت را حذف کنید.

|-
| [[File:AdvancedSearch namespaces dropdown menu.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| در بخش «جستجو در» می‌توانید فضاهای نامی را که می‌خواهید جستجو کنید را انتخاب کنید. شما می‌توانید یکی از ایستگاه‌های پیش‌فرض فضای نام را انتخاب کنید (برای نمونه &quot;بحث&quot;)، فضاهای نام مورد نظر را بنویسید یا آن‌ها را از یک سیاههٔ کشویی انتخاب کنید. شما می توانید انتخاب خود را با نشان‌زدن &quot;انتخاب را برای جستجوهای آینده به‌یاد داشته‌باش&quot; ذخیره کنید.

|-
| [[File:AdvancedSearch - all namespaces selected.png|frameless|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}]]
| با کلیک‌کردن بر روی '''’’All‘‘''' یا '''’’همه‘‘'''، شما می‌توانید همهٔ فضاهای نام را انتخاب کنید. پس‌از آن شما می‌توانید با کلیک‌کردن بر روی X در هر برچسب یا کلیک‌کردن بر روی فضای نام در منوی کشویی، آن‌هایی را که نیاز ندارید را از انتخاب‌شده‌ها در بیاورید.

دکمهٔ آبی‌رنگ جستجو را فشار دهید یا کلید بازگشت را در هر کادر فشار دهید تا جستجو را شروع کنید.
|}

== سیاههٔ زمان‌های آزمایش ==

به‌عنوان یک '''ویژگی آزمایشی'''
* ویکی‌های آزمایش و MediaWiki.org: ۳۰ آبان ۱۳۹۶ (۲۱ نوامبر ۲۰۱۷) {{ok}}
* [[w:de:|ویکی‌پدیای آلمانی]]، [[w:ar:|ویکی‌پدیای عربی]]: ۸ آذر ۱۳۹۶ (۲۹ نوامبر ۲۰۱۷) {{ok}}
* [[w:hu:|ویکی‌پدیای مجاری]]، [[w:fa:|ویکی‌پدیای فارسی]]: ۱۵ آذر ۱۳۹۶ (۶ دسامبر ۲۰۱۷) {{ok}}
* دیگر ویکی‌ها: ۱۸ اردیبهشت ۱۳۹۷ (۵ مه ۲۰۱۸) {{ok}}

به‌عنوان یک '''ویژگی پیش‌فرض'''
* ویکی‌های آزمایش و MediaWiki.org: ۱۷ آبان ۱۳۹۷ (۸ نوامبر ۲۰۱۸) {{ok}}
* ویکی‌پدیای آلمانی، عربی، مجاری، فارسی: ۲۴ آبان ۱۳۹۷ (۱۵ نوامبر ۲۰۱۸) {{ok}}
دیگر ویکی‌ها: ۷ آذر ۱۳۹۷ (۲۸ نوامبر ۲۰۱۸) {{ok}}
* امکان تغییر ترتیب نتیجه‌ها: ۲۷ تیر ۱۳۹۸ (۱۸ ژوئیه ۲۰۱۹)

== پیوندها ==

* [[m:WMDE_Technical_Wishes/AdvancedSearch|برگهٔ اصلی پروژه در فراویکی]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:CirrusSearch|برگهٔ راهنمای جستجوی سیروز]]: مقدمه‌ای بر جستجوی سیروز از جمله بررسی همهٔ پارامترهای جستجوی پیشرفتهٔ موجود.

== کمک به ترجمه ==

[[translatewiki:Special:Translate/ext-advancedsearch|پیغام‌ها برای این ویژگی]] در ویکی‌ترجمه می‌توانند ترجمه شوند. هرگونه کمکی می‌تواند خوب باشد!

[[Category:Extension help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>0bqq2jw4cjy7kzu7xw7x5gz71m05riu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:MediaWiki 1.31/99/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>797758</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402087</id>
      <parentid>2895468</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:39:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="125" xml:space="preserve">{{ll|pingback|pingback}} 機能は毎月1回ハートビートを ping し、活動中のウィキの特定を試みます。</text>
      <sha1>arlxbrqf8q1qcuhkq7tkt9xnpylr3rh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/hi</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>798504</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402246</id>
      <parentid>5400740</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14295" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=अद्यतन जानकारी मेटा पर उपलब्ध है: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || जिन उपयोगकर्ता समूहों में आप हैं, उनकी एक सूची।
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || विकिमीडिया विकियों पर, यह लिंक आपको बाहरी अनुप्रयोगों का प्रबंधन करने की अनुमति देता है जो आपके खाते तक पहुंचने की अनुमति है। &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|नीचे देखें]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Languages
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Date format and time offset ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== यह भी देखें ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>nk6z4k8sih9km6oxup3rqh7jr7vtz40</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Phabricator/FAQ/pl</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>799785</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402802</id>
      <parentid>5200809</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:57:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16057" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{historical|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Content on this page was written before starting the [[Phabricator/Migration|migration to Phabricator]] in November 2014.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Ogólne ==
{{Project management tools review}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Why migrating to Phabricator? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Zobacz {{ll|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Which parts of the infrastructure will get migrated? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main focus is on Bugzilla, Gerrit, Trello, Mingle, RT (but not necessarily limited to them).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also see [[Special:MyLanguage/Project management tools/Review#Scope|Project management tools/Review#Scope]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Except for Phabricator's wiki functionality which would be disabled, we would like to migrate fully to Phabricator instead of piecemeal.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Is there a list of known deficiencies of / known issues with Phabricator?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Testers have reported some of the regressions and missing functionalities that users will experience after the migration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some of them are listed on top of the following tickets:&lt;/span&gt;
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T30] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T23] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T22] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla|comparison between Phabricator and Bugzilla is available]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;onlyinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Is Phabricator easy to use?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator is explicitly not designed for newbies.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;«Phabricator is primarily targeted at software professionals and other professionals with adjacent responsibilities (like project management and operations).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Particularly, we assume users are proficient computer users and familiar with software development concepts.»&lt;/span&gt;
[https://secure.phabricator.com/book/phabcontrib/article/feature_requests/#target-audiences]

=== Jak mogę pomóc? ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator#Get involved|Phabricator#Get involved]].
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/onlyinclude&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== What is the current amount of work maintaining Bugzilla/Gerrit/Mingle/Trello sync tools? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[wikitech:Bingle|Bingle and Bugello]] synchronize some aspects of tickets between Bugzilla and Mingle/Trello, but [https://lists.wikimedia.org/pipermail/teampractices/2013-December/000202.html functionality is limited and ticket statuses between tools can easily get out of sync] (also see [https://github.com/wikimedia/bingle/issues list of open Bingle issues]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Arthur should be able to elaborate on the amount of maintenance work required.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gerrit's [https://gerrit.googlesource.com/plugins/hooks-bugzilla/ hooks-bugzilla] plugin does not require maintenance but has limitations ([https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=52167 1], [https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=53084 2]) which are not easy to solve.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How would the migration happen? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bugzilla/RT/Gerrit tickets, projects, user accounts, patchsets, access settings, etc. would have to be moved into Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
([https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related upstream ticket&lt;/span&gt;])
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The switching costs are not clear yet; Your help is welcome to evaluate them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A clear cut for at least one tool (Bugzilla) seems preferable in order to not continue running all to-be-replaced systems plus yet another one (Phabricator).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== When would the migration happen? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/Migration Timeline|Phabricator/Migration Timeline]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== What would that mean for me? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;At some point current infrastructure tools (see above) would be replaced by Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator has a different user interface and some changes in workflow, compared to the current setup.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the long run, things will get less complicated because everything is in one tool; there will be more transparency and efficiency because discussions are more centralized and in one tool instead of several tools.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As different development teams use different tools with different needs (reporters, developers, product managers, scrum masters, ...), you want to play with the [http://fab.wmflabs.org/ Labs instance of Phabricator] to see if it fits your needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See section &quot;How can I help?&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Will external links/URLs break? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We will try to minimize broken links by redirecting [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T40 Bugzilla] (please see [[Phabricator/versus_Bugzilla#Bugzilla_URLs_and_their_redirects|Bugzilla URLs and their redirects]]) and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T41 RT] tickets to Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is still to be evaluated whether we can also easily redirect Gerrit changesets.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Obviously, documentation about [[Bug management|Bug management/Bugzilla]] (see [[phab:T206|T206]]), [[Gerrit|Gerrit]] or [[wikitech:RT|RT]] will need updating.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How flexible is Phabricator when restricting access to certain tickets, or tickets in certain products (e.g. &quot;Security&quot;)? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T50 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related task&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does Phabricator provide statistics, metrics, charts? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, Phabricator offers [[phab:maniphest/report/|Reports by User and by Project]] and [[phab:maniphest/report/burn/|Burnup Rate]] (logging in might be required).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Burndown charts for projects are available via the custom Sprint extension (see [[phab:T153|T153]] and [[phab:T1322|T1322]]), to be superseded by [[phab:project/profile/1266/|Phragile]] in the future.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[phab:fact/|Charts]] are currently not enabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T28 related task] about metrics in general.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does any other FLOSS project use Phabricator? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
FLOSS projects using Phabricator include [https://reviews.llvm.org/ LLVM], [https://developer.blender.org/ Blender], and [https://secure.phabricator.com/ Phabricator itself].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a [[w:Phabricator#Users|list of projects on English Wikipedia]] but most are proprietary and/or small.&lt;/span&gt;
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T192 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Facebook's install is very large&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Did anyone else migrate to Phabricator as we would? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No, this is a way that nobody has walked before.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Focusing on like-minded projects: maybe Blender did, in late 2013 (but from SVN, Trac and Trello); however no detailed report available yet[https://code.blender.org/2013/11/new-development-infrastructure/] and it's at least [https://www.openhub.net/p/blender one order of magnitude smaller] than MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They're now sharing some code.[https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179#81309]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Why can't I login using my GitHub or Google account? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although Phabricator has authentication plugins for GitHub, Google, and other identity providers, we have decided not to use them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With two Wikimedia alternatives that cover virtually all Wikimedia contributors, more options are not really necessary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Besides, these services depend on proprietary third party sites, and they might raise concerns about privacy and commercial interests.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more details, see [[phab:T16|T16 - Support only WMF SUL and LDAP as authentication mechanisms]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How can I merge my account from Wikipedia or other Wikimedia wikis with my Phabricator account? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Use Phabricator's [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/settings/panel/external/ Linked Accounts and Authentication] tool for that.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Concerns raised ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Ending up with one more tool ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having fewer tools is the whole point of this exercise.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The replacement of Bugzilla and Gerrit with Phabricator is an essential requirement of this project.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The teams using Trello and Mingle understand that relying in these commercial services is not a long-term solution.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Lack of a detailed plan ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The current working plan is good enough to provide a realistic vision supported by the community.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The WMF needs an RfC resolution in order to allocate the resources needed to elaborate a detailed plan.[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T17]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Why not improving our current tools ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator is already an integrated suite, which means the different components are intended to be used together.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is written in PHP, and their maintainers are very proactive.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* This encourages features like explicitly attaching tasks to code changes, mocks, etc.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Although we can write or improve integrations like Gerrit Notification Bot, Bugzilla (Perl), Gerrit (Java), or Scrumbugz (Python) will probably never be a seamlessly integrated suite.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Some projects should test first ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, this is also our recommendation for the migration from Gerrit to Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;About the migration from Bugzilla to Phabricator, it needs to be done at once because we cannot do a full migration of data with two moving targets.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Various UI issues ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We can customize the CSS of our instance for more appropriate font sizes, colors, etc.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Upstream has already fixed some of the problems reported.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Requiring arc ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Arc checks new patches for basic mistakes before uploading them for review.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is useful for the majority of contributors and for the project.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The occasional contributor can upload a patch directly via the Phabricator Web UI.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Phabricator is unfamiliar for most newcomers ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;True, most users of FLOSS software have experience with Bugzilla if anything, because it's used by all the major players (Linux itself, Mozilla, RedHat, GNOME [https://www.bugzilla.org/installation-list/ etc. etc.]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However this is not necessarily true for all MediaWiki newcomers.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Offering them one integrated platform is better than looking for a platform they already know.&lt;/span&gt;

== phabricator.wikimedia.org ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[phab:|Phabricator.wikimedia.org]] (aka [https://bugs.wikimedia.org/ bugs.wikimedia.org]) is Wikimedia's bug tracking and project management tool.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Bugzilla ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla|Phabricator/versus Bugzilla]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== RT ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus RT|Phabricator/versus RT]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Trello, Mingle, Scrumbugz, etc ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Is Phabricator flexible enough to allow different teams to define their own workflows and ways of organizing sprints/tasks/stories/etc? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T43 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related task&lt;/span&gt;] - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;this welcomes answering by individuals who have already worked and maintained a Phabricator instance.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, at least to some degree.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, different projects can define their own columns/swim lanes on workboards with &quot;Add Column&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does Phabricator provide boards per project and/or iteration? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See e.g. the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/project/board/5/ Wikimedia Phabricator board].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Related tasks: [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21 Identify features Trello users would miss] and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20 Identify features Mingle users would miss]&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Phabricator{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1hw08fgbepntmijsqbfz54in9mrk367</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Installing MediaWiki/pt</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>800314</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402877</id>
      <parentid>5387503</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:41:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14093" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O MediaWiki pode ser difícil de instalar para o utilizador médio, que não tenha experiência com o Apache, PHP e MySQL/MariaDB.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Transferir o ''software'' MediaWiki ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Download the MediaWiki tar file from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|official download page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally, if you're using a production environment, you want to be running the latest stable release, which is MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extract the MediaWiki software ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Os ficheiros transferidos estão no formato &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;, por isso terão de ser descomprimidos antes de serem utilizados.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to uncompress this archive file before use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Isto pode ser efetuado localmente (e depois enviados via FTP) ou diretamente no seu servidor.&lt;/span&gt;

Isto é normalmente efetuado com ''software'', tais como [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (grátis), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] ou [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] (grátis) no Windows.

No Linux e no Mac OS X, pode descomprimir o ficheiro utilizando este comando:
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

== Enviar ficheiros para o seu servidor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se ainda não enviou os ficheiros para o seu servidor da Web, faça-o agora.
&lt;/div&gt;

Envie os ficheiros para a diretoria da Web do seu servidor da Web:

# diretamente, copiando a pasta descomprimida
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# utilizando um cliente FTP, tal como o [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (''Software'' de Código Aberto, Windows, OSX e Linux) ou [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (OSX).
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;by using software already provided by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting service]], such as the ''cPanel File Manager''&lt;/span&gt;

Se a sua ferramenta de envio tem uma opção &quot;alterar os nomes dos ficheiros para minúsculas&quot;, tem de desativar isto.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se instalou o Apache, a diretoria correta é especificada no seu ficheiro &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; (é a diretiva [$docroot DocumentRoot], tipicamente &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;&lt;apache-folder&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Nota: isto mudou no Ubuntu 14.04 com Apache 2.4.7, em que o ficheiro de configuração primário para as configurações e diretórios do servidor Apache é &lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

Altere o nome da pasta que carregou, para aquilo que pretende ter no URL.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se o seu servidor da Internet está a ser executado como &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt;, por exemplo, alterar o nome para &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt; significa que pretende aceder à sua wiki em &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''''Não lhe chame $wiki se pretende usá-lo como um [[$short-url|URL curto]]'''''&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Criar uma base de dados ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
O MediaWiki irá pedir-lhe o nome da base de dados e do utilizador, e tentará criá-los se estes ainda não existirem.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se já tem um servidor de base de dados e sabe a palavra-passe do utilizador ''root'' da mesma, o ficheiro de comandos da instalação do MediaWiki pode criar uma nova base de dados nova por si.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se não sabe a palavra-passe do utilizador root, como será o caso se estiver a usar um servidor alojado, por exemplo, terá de criar uma base de dados nova agora.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Neste momento, tem de usar SQLite, MariaDB/MySQL ou PostgreSQL para armazenar o conteúdo da sua wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se não tiver a certeza sobre qual a base de dados escolher, utilize MariaDB, pois é a melhor suportada pelo MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Na página de instalação, terá de escolher um nome para a base de dados (que pode ser um qualquer) e para o diretório da base de dados SQLite.&lt;/span&gt;
Para o diretório da base de dados, o ficheiro de instalação tentará usar um subdiretório fora da raiz do documento e criá-lo se necessário.
Se este diretório não for seguro (por exemplo, se puder ser lido através da Internet), mude-o manualmente para evitar que seja acessível por qualquer pessoa na Internet.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Consulte a respetiva documentação.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Em alternativa, entre em contacto com o seu fornecedor de alojamento e peça-lhes que criem uma conta para si.&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se a sua base de dados não estiver a ser executada no mesmo servidor físico onde está o seu servidor da Internet, terá de  fornecer o nome do servidor físico do seu servidor da Internet &amp;mdash; mediawiki.example.com no exemplo abaixo &amp;mdash; como se segue:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;As bases de dados MySQL e MariaDB, em UNIX e em Linux, registam num ficheiro todas as consultas recebidas, incluindo a palavra-passe usada para a conta do utilizador.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se isto o preocupa, apague o ficheiro &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt; depois de executar estes comandos.&lt;/span&gt;}}

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se está a usar o PostgreSQL, ou alguém terá de criar uma base de dados e um utilizador para si, ou então forneça simplesmente o nome de um utilizador do PostgreSQL com privilégios de «superutilizador» no formulário de configuração.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Normalmente, este utilizador da base de dados tem o nome '''postgres'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, and a database named &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; owned by the user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser (depois insira a palavra-passe)
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

ou como superutilizador (que, por omissão, é postgres) execute os seguintes comandos na linha de comandos da base de dados:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Tenha em atenção a [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|lista de problemas conhecidos ao executar o MediaWiki com o PostgreSQL]].

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== Executar o ficheiro de instalação ==&lt;!--
Atenção: Se alterar esta âncora, altere também as hiperligações para ela em:
* Translations:Manual:Installing MediaWiki/35/pt
--&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Depois de completar todos os passos acima, pode finalizar a instalação através de um navegador da Internet, acedendo ao URL index.php no seu navegador — verifique as instruções mencionadas em {{ll|Manual:Config script}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Passos adicionais ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additional configuration&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wiki administration&lt;/span&gt;
== Mantenha a instalação atualizada! ==
Terminada a instalação, mantenha-a atualizada e mantenha o seu servidor seguro!
{{Clickable button 2|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$maillist|Subscreva a nossa lista de divulgação de novas versões.]]&lt;/span&gt;|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Appendices ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/span&gt;
:{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hosting services which provide automatical installation of applications such as MediaWiki may offer outdated versions or have other issues. If you encounter problems, it ''does not'' mean that you cannot install MediaWiki. It means that you should install MediaWiki manually.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== System-specific instructions  ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The pages listed on {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First consult {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ver também ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9khos2v0u0qbvhdc3gzmacbbttwasbx</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402887</id>
      <parentid>5402877</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:42:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14219" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O MediaWiki pode ser difícil de instalar para o utilizador médio, que não tenha experiência com o Apache, PHP e MySQL/MariaDB.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Transferir o ''software'' MediaWiki ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Download the MediaWiki tar file from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|official download page]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally, if you're using a production environment, you want to be running the latest stable release, which is MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extract the MediaWiki software ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Os ficheiros transferidos estão no formato &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;, por isso terão de ser descomprimidos antes de serem utilizados.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to uncompress this archive file before use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Isto pode ser efetuado localmente (e depois enviados via FTP) ou diretamente no seu servidor.&lt;/span&gt;

Isto é normalmente efetuado com ''software'', tais como [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (grátis), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] ou [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] (grátis) no Windows.

No Linux e no Mac OS X, pode descomprimir o ficheiro utilizando este comando:
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

== Enviar ficheiros para o seu servidor ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se ainda não enviou os ficheiros para o seu servidor da Web, faça-o agora.
&lt;/div&gt;

Envie os ficheiros para a diretoria da Web do seu servidor da Web:

# diretamente, copiando a pasta descomprimida
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# utilizando um cliente FTP, tal como o [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (''Software'' de Código Aberto, Windows, OSX e Linux) ou [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (OSX).
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;by using software already provided by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting service]], such as the ''cPanel File Manager''&lt;/span&gt;

Se a sua ferramenta de envio tem uma opção &quot;alterar os nomes dos ficheiros para minúsculas&quot;, tem de desativar isto.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se instalou o Apache, a diretoria correta é especificada no seu ficheiro &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; (é a diretiva [$docroot DocumentRoot], tipicamente &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;&lt;apache-folder&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Nota: isto mudou no Ubuntu 14.04 com Apache 2.4.7, em que o ficheiro de configuração primário para as configurações e diretórios do servidor Apache é &lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

Altere o nome da pasta que carregou, para aquilo que pretende ter no URL.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se o seu servidor da Internet está a ser executado como &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt;, por exemplo, alterar o nome para &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt; significa que pretende aceder à sua wiki em &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not use &lt;code&gt;/wiki/&lt;/code&gt; if you want to set it up as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|Short URL]] after running the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script|installation script]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Criar uma base de dados ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
O MediaWiki irá pedir-lhe o nome da base de dados e do utilizador, e tentará criá-los se estes ainda não existirem.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se já tem um servidor de base de dados e sabe a palavra-passe do utilizador ''root'' da mesma, o ficheiro de comandos da instalação do MediaWiki pode criar uma nova base de dados nova por si.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se não sabe a palavra-passe do utilizador root, como será o caso se estiver a usar um servidor alojado, por exemplo, terá de criar uma base de dados nova agora.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Neste momento, tem de usar SQLite, MariaDB/MySQL ou PostgreSQL para armazenar o conteúdo da sua wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se não tiver a certeza sobre qual a base de dados escolher, utilize MariaDB, pois é a melhor suportada pelo MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Na página de instalação, terá de escolher um nome para a base de dados (que pode ser um qualquer) e para o diretório da base de dados SQLite.&lt;/span&gt;
Para o diretório da base de dados, o ficheiro de instalação tentará usar um subdiretório fora da raiz do documento e criá-lo se necessário.
Se este diretório não for seguro (por exemplo, se puder ser lido através da Internet), mude-o manualmente para evitar que seja acessível por qualquer pessoa na Internet.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Consulte a respetiva documentação.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Em alternativa, entre em contacto com o seu fornecedor de alojamento e peça-lhes que criem uma conta para si.&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se a sua base de dados não estiver a ser executada no mesmo servidor físico onde está o seu servidor da Internet, terá de  fornecer o nome do servidor físico do seu servidor da Internet &amp;mdash; mediawiki.example.com no exemplo abaixo &amp;mdash; como se segue:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;As bases de dados MySQL e MariaDB, em UNIX e em Linux, registam num ficheiro todas as consultas recebidas, incluindo a palavra-passe usada para a conta do utilizador.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se isto o preocupa, apague o ficheiro &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt; depois de executar estes comandos.&lt;/span&gt;}}

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se está a usar o PostgreSQL, ou alguém terá de criar uma base de dados e um utilizador para si, ou então forneça simplesmente o nome de um utilizador do PostgreSQL com privilégios de «superutilizador» no formulário de configuração.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Normalmente, este utilizador da base de dados tem o nome '''postgres'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, and a database named &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; owned by the user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser (depois insira a palavra-passe)
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

ou como superutilizador (que, por omissão, é postgres) execute os seguintes comandos na linha de comandos da base de dados:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Tenha em atenção a [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|lista de problemas conhecidos ao executar o MediaWiki com o PostgreSQL]].

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== Executar o ficheiro de instalação ==&lt;!--
Atenção: Se alterar esta âncora, altere também as hiperligações para ela em:
* Translations:Manual:Installing MediaWiki/35/pt
--&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Depois de completar todos os passos acima, pode finalizar a instalação através de um navegador da Internet, acedendo ao URL index.php no seu navegador — verifique as instruções mencionadas em {{ll|Manual:Config script}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Passos adicionais ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additional configuration&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wiki administration&lt;/span&gt;
== Mantenha a instalação atualizada! ==
Terminada a instalação, mantenha-a atualizada e mantenha o seu servidor seguro!
{{Clickable button 2|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$maillist|Subscreva a nossa lista de divulgação de novas versões.]]&lt;/span&gt;|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Appendices ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/span&gt;
:{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hosting services which provide automatical installation of applications such as MediaWiki may offer outdated versions or have other issues. If you encounter problems, it ''does not'' mean that you cannot install MediaWiki. It means that you should install MediaWiki manually.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== System-specific instructions  ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The pages listed on {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First consult {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ver também ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>gebxe6i2lapuciu1ro5rceq4lb85l6x</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/be-tarask</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>801142</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402475</id>
      <parentid>5072256</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:10:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12578" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = Нікляс Лякстрэм, Сыбранд Мазэлян ды іншыя
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Included in Language Extension Bundle&lt;/span&gt;}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;User documentation&lt;/span&gt;}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enables in-wiki translation and proofreading&lt;/span&gt;
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] — або [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view паспрабуйце перакласьці старонку зараз]
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The '''Translate''' extension makes MediaWiki a powerful tool to translate every kind of text. It's used especially to translate software and to manage multilingual wikis in a sensible way.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Асаблівасьці ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Translate extension has many features specifically targeted to translators, while making back-end integration with actual source code as easy as possible. Meanwhile, everything runs inside [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|MediaWiki]], which allows users an almost endless degree of freedom for communication and self-organization.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Features include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Structured wiki content page translation.'''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''In-wiki localisation and exporting of software interface messages (or just about anything).'''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Web-based translation and proofreading [[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overview/|interface]], as well as gettext based export and import for off-line translation.'''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Various aids to make the job of translators easier:'''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** display of translations in globally defined other languages, optionally expanded with user defined languages;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** collaborative editing of documentation of the use and context of messages;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** translation memory and machine translation with external tools (Apertium, Microsoft Translator, Yandex.Translate);
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** display of the latest change in the source message;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** warnings about common mistakes like parameters that are not used.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Pre-made modules for various open source products you can use as an example.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Support for various formats including: PHP, Java properties, Gettext, YAML and AndroidXml (see {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} and [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|File format support]]).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* A versatile plug-in system to make it easy to add new projects as a message group.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Various statistics:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** translation completion percentages for all message groups in all supported languages;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** translation completion percentages in all supported languages for any supported message group;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** tool for making activity graphs for spans of time.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Can display either number of edits or active users daily or hourly and includes many filters;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** cloud overview of active languages and translators.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translate extension, due to its large user base, is confirmed to be compatible with all reasonably recent browsers, except some minor (style) glitches which are quickly fixed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;''Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality'': this presentation shows how the Translate extension can make a wiki truly multilingual, based on the experience of KDE UserBase wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Niklas Laxström, ''Translating the wiki way: Simple, fast, fun'', Wikimania 2012 (slides available).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Падтрымка і дакумэнтацыя ==

* Глядзіце [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|Ўсталяваньне]]
* Глядзіце [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|Настаўленьне]]
* Глядзіце [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Дакумэнтацыя карыстальніка]] — уключае навучаньне
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|Getting started with Translate extension development]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Live support at #translatewiki IRC channel at Libera Chat (best times are at European days and evenings)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Please report all issues and feature requests in the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate issue tracker]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translate extension was originally developed by [[User:Nikerabbit]]; many other users, like [[User:Raymond]], [[User:SPQRobin]] and the Wikimedia Language team, have contributed to its code and documentation. It is maintained by [[User:Nikerabbit]] and [[User:Siebrand]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Вядомыя карыстальнікі пашырэньня Перакладу ==
* https://translatewiki.net — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The biggest wiki-based site and community for translation of the interface of open source software.&lt;/span&gt;
* https://userbase.kde.org — Дакумэнтацыя вікі для праекту KDE, які экстэнсыўна карыстаецца можнасьцю перакладу старонак.
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Translates wiki content and uses the group states feature. Translation and translation review is enabled almost for all users of the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See more at [[w:translatewiki.net#Notable uses|notable uses of translatewiki.net on Wikipedia]].
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Водгукі ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Tom Hutchison of Joomla:
&lt;/div&gt;
{{quotation|1=
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Translate extension allows for connection to a translation service and can auto fill the translation for you. At the same time a translator can make adjustments so you're not creating lots of pages with inaccurate translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That's ok if they are on different continents.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That is actually a plus because work is getting done 24 hours a day.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What they need is a support group chat for each other.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They would all be able to read English if they are translating right? Teach a few simple wiki markup such as links and what to do with categories.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then they help others who in turn help others.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We have over 40 in a chat who help each other and have fun at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And they were all scared of the wiki but couldn't believe how easy it was once they started.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are actually waiting on me for more translations to do because I can't keep up with them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;I know there is only 1 translating this language or that language.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We have that too.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;One person is doing Swahili while another one is working on Japanese.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, you mark pages for translation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You control whether to include templates or exclude variables in template calls.&lt;/span&gt;
}}


== Глядзіце таксама ==
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – пашырэньне дзеля паляпшэньня сувязі зь перакладнікамі.

Ня блытаць з:

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for one-off translation of wiki pages from one language to another.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Abstract Wikipedia]] for translation.&lt;/span&gt;

== Як паўдзельнічаць ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all Translate this extension at translatewiki.net]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|Open bugs and feature requests]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|More open bugs and feature requests at translatewiki.net]]
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Вычытваць і перакладаць дакумэнтацыю пашырэньня Перакладу]]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>dmar7afww6xv146l7unfb0qv9izegje</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/be-tarask</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>801155</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402474</id>
      <parentid>4502645</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:10:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="121" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|Вычытваць і перакладаць дакумэнтацыю пашырэньня Перакладу]]</text>
      <sha1>qwbjbtf5s89idd0zgai431ctepftkbh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Editor/hu</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>802483</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402693</id>
      <parentid>5372691</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6708" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
A következőket keresheted:

== Jelenlegi ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Jelenlegi szerkesztőszoftverek Wikimédia-wikiken
!Szerkesztőeszköz
!Képernyőkép
!Év
!Felület
!Megjegyzések
|-
|az alapértelmezett MediaWiki-szerkesztő, egy HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=A HTML &amp;lt;textarea&amp;gt; képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Asztali és mobil
|Nincs eszköztára. Akkor látható, ha a JavaScript le van tiltva, vagy ha a „{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}” ki van kapcsolva a [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|beállításokban]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|WikiEditor kiterjesztés]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=A WikiEditor képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Asztali
|Akkor látható, ha a „{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}” be van kapcsolva a [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|beállításokban]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=A VisualEditor vizuális módjának képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Asztali és mobil
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[w:Formatted text|rich-text]] [[w:WYSIWYG|WYSIWYG]] editing system&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|2017-es wikiszöveg-szerkesztő]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=A VisualEditor beépített wikiszöveges módjának képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Asztali
|Ez egy mód a [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor kiterjesztésen belül]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Proofread Page&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Asztali
|A [[s:hu:|Wikiforrásokban]] van használatban
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=A wikEd képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Asztali
|Egy teljesen önkéntestámogatású wikiszöveges szerkesztő. Általában segédeszközként vagy felhasználói szkriptként fut, de néhány nem-Wikimédia wikin kiterjesztésként.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=A forráskódszerkesztő képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Asztali
|JavaScript- és egyéb programkódlapok szerkesztéséhez használható.
|-
|A {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}} wikiszöveges szerkesztője
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=A mobil webes felület wikiszöveges szerkesztőjének képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Tartalomfordítás]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=A Tartalomfordítás szerkesztőjének képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Asztali
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Strukturált beszélgetések]] (korábban Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Egy hozzászólásnak és egy válasz elejének a képernyőképe a Strukturált beszélgetésekben|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Asztali és mobil
|A Strukturált beszélgetések wikiszöveges és vizuális módot is támogat.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Szerkesztő az [[$android-faq|androidos]] mobilalkalmazásban&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=A szerkesztőfelület képernyőképe egy androidos telefonon|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Szerkesztő az [[$ios-faq|iOS]]-es mobilalkalmazásban&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=A szerkesztőfelület képernyőképe egy iPhone-on|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]-szerkesztő
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Asztali
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikivoyage Listing Editor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Asztali
|Speciális JavaScript-alapú szerkesztőeszköz számos sablon egyikének beszúrására a Wikivoyage-on.
|-
|}

== Korábbi ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Korábbi szerkesztőszoftverek Wikimédia-wikiken
|-
!Szerkesztőeszköz
!Képernyőkép
!Év
!Felület
!Megjegyzések
|-
|A 2006-os JavaScript-szerkesztő, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=A 2006-os wikiszöveg-szerkesztő képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Asztali
|2006–2010 között akkor volt látható, ha a „showtoolbar” beállítás be volt kapcsolva a [[Special:Preferences|beállításokban]]; ezt követően csak akkor, ha az „enhanced-toolbar” (a 2010-es szerkesztő) viszont ki volt kapcsolva. Ez a szerkesztő a [[MediaWiki 1.32]]-es verziójában [[phab:T30856|el lett távolítva]]. Egy hasonló eszköztár elérhető egy önkéntestámogatású helyi segédeszközként néhány wikin.
|-
|A MobileFrontend eredeti wikiszöveges szerkesztője
|
|2012–2014
|Mobil
|Ez a 2003-as asztali wikiszöveges szerkesztő mobilspecifikus módosításainak halmaza volt. Már nincs használatban.
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>e3odvrwvdmsrssyqncpsq01lyqbtj9m</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402711</id>
      <parentid>5402693</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:06:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6701" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
A következőket keresheted:

== Jelenlegi ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Jelenlegi szerkesztőszoftverek Wikimédia-wikiken
!Szerkesztőeszköz
!Képernyőkép
!Év
!Felület
!Megjegyzések
|-
|az alapértelmezett MediaWiki-szerkesztő, egy HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=A HTML &amp;lt;textarea&amp;gt; képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Asztali és mobil
|Nincs eszköztára. Akkor látható, ha a JavaScript le van tiltva, vagy ha a „{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}” ki van kapcsolva a [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|beállításokban]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|WikiEditor kiterjesztés]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=A WikiEditor képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Asztali
|Akkor látható, ha a „{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}” be van kapcsolva a [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|beállításokban]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=A VisualEditor vizuális módjának képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Asztali és mobil
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[w:Formatted text|rich-text]] [[w:WYSIWYG|WYSIWYG]] editing system&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|2017-es wikiszöveg-szerkesztő]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=A VisualEditor beépített wikiszöveges módjának képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Asztali
|Ez egy mód a [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor kiterjesztésen belül]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Proofread Page&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Asztali
|A [[s:hu:|Wikiforrásokban]] van használatban
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=A wikEd képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Asztali
|Egy teljesen önkéntestámogatású wikiszöveges szerkesztő. Általában segédeszközként vagy felhasználói szkriptként fut, de néhány nem-Wikimédia wikin kiterjesztésként.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=A forráskódszerkesztő képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Asztali
|JavaScript- és egyéb programkódlapok szerkesztéséhez használható.
|-
|A {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}} wikiszöveges szerkesztője
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=A mobil webes felület wikiszöveges szerkesztőjének képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Tartalomfordítás]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=A Tartalomfordítás szerkesztőjének képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Asztali
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Strukturált beszélgetések]] (korábban Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Egy hozzászólásnak és egy válasz elejének a képernyőképe a Strukturált beszélgetésekben|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Asztali és mobil
|A Strukturált beszélgetések wikiszöveges és vizuális módot is támogat.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Szerkesztő az [[$android-faq|androidos]] mobilalkalmazásban&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=A szerkesztőfelület képernyőképe egy androidos telefonon|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|Szerkesztő az [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]-es mobilalkalmazásban
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=A szerkesztőfelület képernyőképe egy iPhone-on|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]-szerkesztő
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Asztali
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikivoyage Listing Editor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Asztali
|Speciális JavaScript-alapú szerkesztőeszköz számos sablon egyikének beszúrására a Wikivoyage-on.
|-
|}

== Korábbi ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Korábbi szerkesztőszoftverek Wikimédia-wikiken
|-
!Szerkesztőeszköz
!Képernyőkép
!Év
!Felület
!Megjegyzések
|-
|A 2006-os JavaScript-szerkesztő, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=A 2006-os wikiszöveg-szerkesztő képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Asztali
|2006–2010 között akkor volt látható, ha a „showtoolbar” beállítás be volt kapcsolva a [[Special:Preferences|beállításokban]]; ezt követően csak akkor, ha az „enhanced-toolbar” (a 2010-es szerkesztő) viszont ki volt kapcsolva. Ez a szerkesztő a [[MediaWiki 1.32]]-es verziójában [[phab:T30856|el lett távolítva]]. Egy hasonló eszköztár elérhető egy önkéntestámogatású helyi segédeszközként néhány wikin.
|-
|A MobileFrontend eredeti wikiszöveges szerkesztője
|
|2012–2014
|Mobil
|Ez a 2003-as asztali wikiszöveges szerkesztő mobilspecifikus módosításainak halmaza volt. Már nincs használatban.
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>gotfy3itj41wyi8lwbemq3j788ujr6j</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402733</id>
      <parentid>5402711</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:10:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6694" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
A következőket keresheted:

== Jelenlegi ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Jelenlegi szerkesztőszoftverek Wikimédia-wikiken
!Szerkesztőeszköz
!Képernyőkép
!Év
!Felület
!Megjegyzések
|-
|az alapértelmezett MediaWiki-szerkesztő, egy HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=A HTML &amp;lt;textarea&amp;gt; képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Asztali és mobil
|Nincs eszköztára. Akkor látható, ha a JavaScript le van tiltva, vagy ha a „{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}” ki van kapcsolva a [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|beállításokban]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|WikiEditor kiterjesztés]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=A WikiEditor képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Asztali
|Akkor látható, ha a „{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}” be van kapcsolva a [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|beállításokban]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=A VisualEditor vizuális módjának képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Asztali és mobil
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[w:Formatted text|rich-text]] [[w:WYSIWYG|WYSIWYG]] editing system&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|2017-es wikiszöveg-szerkesztő]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=A VisualEditor beépített wikiszöveges módjának képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Asztali
|Ez egy mód a [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor kiterjesztésen belül]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Proofread Page&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Asztali
|A [[s:hu:|Wikiforrásokban]] van használatban
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=A wikEd képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Asztali
|Egy teljesen önkéntestámogatású wikiszöveges szerkesztő. Általában segédeszközként vagy felhasználói szkriptként fut, de néhány nem-Wikimédia wikin kiterjesztésként.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=A forráskódszerkesztő képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Asztali
|JavaScript- és egyéb programkódlapok szerkesztéséhez használható.
|-
|A {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}} wikiszöveges szerkesztője
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=A mobil webes felület wikiszöveges szerkesztőjének képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Tartalomfordítás]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=A Tartalomfordítás szerkesztőjének képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Asztali
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Strukturált beszélgetések]] (korábban Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Egy hozzászólásnak és egy válasz elejének a képernyőképe a Strukturált beszélgetésekben|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Asztali és mobil
|A Strukturált beszélgetések wikiszöveges és vizuális módot is támogat.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|Szerkesztő az [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Android FAQ|androidos]] mobilalkalmazásban
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=A szerkesztőfelület képernyőképe egy androidos telefonon|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|Szerkesztő az [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]-es mobilalkalmazásban
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=A szerkesztőfelület képernyőképe egy iPhone-on|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]-szerkesztő
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Asztali
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikivoyage Listing Editor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Asztali
|Speciális JavaScript-alapú szerkesztőeszköz számos sablon egyikének beszúrására a Wikivoyage-on.
|-
|}

== Korábbi ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Korábbi szerkesztőszoftverek Wikimédia-wikiken
|-
!Szerkesztőeszköz
!Képernyőkép
!Év
!Felület
!Megjegyzések
|-
|A 2006-os JavaScript-szerkesztő, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=A 2006-os wikiszöveg-szerkesztő képernyőképe|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Asztali
|2006–2010 között akkor volt látható, ha a „showtoolbar” beállítás be volt kapcsolva a [[Special:Preferences|beállításokban]]; ezt követően csak akkor, ha az „enhanced-toolbar” (a 2010-es szerkesztő) viszont ki volt kapcsolva. Ez a szerkesztő a [[MediaWiki 1.32]]-es verziójában [[phab:T30856|el lett távolítva]]. Egy hasonló eszköztár elérhető egy önkéntestámogatású helyi segédeszközként néhány wikin.
|-
|A MobileFrontend eredeti wikiszöveges szerkesztője
|
|2012–2014
|Mobil
|Ez a 2003-as asztali wikiszöveges szerkesztő mobilspecifikus módosításainak halmaza volt. Már nincs használatban.
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>bo64wm7hfehhvf6gn1gn9p519umnkf6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Phabricator/FAQ/pt</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>804942</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402803</id>
      <parentid>5200811</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:57:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16067" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{historical|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Content on this page was written before starting the [[Phabricator/Migration|migration to Phabricator]] in November 2014.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Geral ==
{{Project management tools review}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Why migrating to Phabricator? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Ver {{ll|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Which parts of the infrastructure will get migrated? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main focus is on Bugzilla, Gerrit, Trello, Mingle, RT (but not necessarily limited to them).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also see [[Special:MyLanguage/Project management tools/Review#Scope|Project management tools/Review#Scope]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Except for Phabricator's wiki functionality which would be disabled, we would like to migrate fully to Phabricator instead of piecemeal.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Is there a list of known deficiencies of / known issues with Phabricator?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Testers have reported some of the regressions and missing functionalities that users will experience after the migration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some of them are listed on top of the following tickets:&lt;/span&gt;
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T30] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T23] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T22] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla|comparison between Phabricator and Bugzilla is available]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;onlyinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Is Phabricator easy to use?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator is explicitly not designed for newbies.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;«Phabricator is primarily targeted at software professionals and other professionals with adjacent responsibilities (like project management and operations).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Particularly, we assume users are proficient computer users and familiar with software development concepts.»&lt;/span&gt;
[https://secure.phabricator.com/book/phabcontrib/article/feature_requests/#target-audiences]

== Como é que eu posso ajudar? ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator#Get involved|Phabricator#Get involved]].
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/onlyinclude&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== What is the current amount of work maintaining Bugzilla/Gerrit/Mingle/Trello sync tools? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[wikitech:Bingle|Bingle and Bugello]] synchronize some aspects of tickets between Bugzilla and Mingle/Trello, but [https://lists.wikimedia.org/pipermail/teampractices/2013-December/000202.html functionality is limited and ticket statuses between tools can easily get out of sync] (also see [https://github.com/wikimedia/bingle/issues list of open Bingle issues]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Arthur should be able to elaborate on the amount of maintenance work required.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gerrit's [https://gerrit.googlesource.com/plugins/hooks-bugzilla/ hooks-bugzilla] plugin does not require maintenance but has limitations ([https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=52167 1], [https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=53084 2]) which are not easy to solve.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How would the migration happen? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bugzilla/RT/Gerrit tickets, projects, user accounts, patchsets, access settings, etc. would have to be moved into Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
([https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related upstream ticket&lt;/span&gt;])
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The switching costs are not clear yet; Your help is welcome to evaluate them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A clear cut for at least one tool (Bugzilla) seems preferable in order to not continue running all to-be-replaced systems plus yet another one (Phabricator).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== When would the migration happen? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/Migration Timeline|Phabricator/Migration Timeline]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== What would that mean for me? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;At some point current infrastructure tools (see above) would be replaced by Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator has a different user interface and some changes in workflow, compared to the current setup.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the long run, things will get less complicated because everything is in one tool; there will be more transparency and efficiency because discussions are more centralized and in one tool instead of several tools.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As different development teams use different tools with different needs (reporters, developers, product managers, scrum masters, ...), you want to play with the [http://fab.wmflabs.org/ Labs instance of Phabricator] to see if it fits your needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See section &quot;How can I help?&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Will external links/URLs break? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We will try to minimize broken links by redirecting [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T40 Bugzilla] (please see [[Phabricator/versus_Bugzilla#Bugzilla_URLs_and_their_redirects|Bugzilla URLs and their redirects]]) and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T41 RT] tickets to Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is still to be evaluated whether we can also easily redirect Gerrit changesets.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Obviously, documentation about [[Bug management|Bug management/Bugzilla]] (see [[phab:T206|T206]]), [[Gerrit|Gerrit]] or [[wikitech:RT|RT]] will need updating.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How flexible is Phabricator when restricting access to certain tickets, or tickets in certain products (e.g. &quot;Security&quot;)? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T50 tarefa relacionada]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does Phabricator provide statistics, metrics, charts? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, Phabricator offers [[phab:maniphest/report/|Reports by User and by Project]] and [[phab:maniphest/report/burn/|Burnup Rate]] (logging in might be required).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Burndown charts for projects are available via the custom Sprint extension (see [[phab:T153|T153]] and [[phab:T1322|T1322]]), to be superseded by [[phab:project/profile/1266/|Phragile]] in the future.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[phab:fact/|Charts]] are currently not enabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T28 related task] about metrics in general.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does any other FLOSS project use Phabricator? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
FLOSS projects using Phabricator include [https://reviews.llvm.org/ LLVM], [https://developer.blender.org/ Blender], and [https://secure.phabricator.com/ Phabricator itself].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a [[w:Phabricator#Users|list of projects on English Wikipedia]] but most are proprietary and/or small.&lt;/span&gt;
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T192 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Facebook's install is very large&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Did anyone else migrate to Phabricator as we would? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No, this is a way that nobody has walked before.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Focusing on like-minded projects: maybe Blender did, in late 2013 (but from SVN, Trac and Trello); however no detailed report available yet[https://code.blender.org/2013/11/new-development-infrastructure/] and it's at least [https://www.openhub.net/p/blender one order of magnitude smaller] than MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They're now sharing some code.[https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179#81309]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Why can't I login using my GitHub or Google account? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although Phabricator has authentication plugins for GitHub, Google, and other identity providers, we have decided not to use them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With two Wikimedia alternatives that cover virtually all Wikimedia contributors, more options are not really necessary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Besides, these services depend on proprietary third party sites, and they might raise concerns about privacy and commercial interests.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more details, see [[phab:T16|T16 - Support only WMF SUL and LDAP as authentication mechanisms]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How can I merge my account from Wikipedia or other Wikimedia wikis with my Phabricator account? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Use Phabricator's [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/settings/panel/external/ Linked Accounts and Authentication] tool for that.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Concerns raised ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Ending up with one more tool ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having fewer tools is the whole point of this exercise.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The replacement of Bugzilla and Gerrit with Phabricator is an essential requirement of this project.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The teams using Trello and Mingle understand that relying in these commercial services is not a long-term solution.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Lack of a detailed plan ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The current working plan is good enough to provide a realistic vision supported by the community.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The WMF needs an RfC resolution in order to allocate the resources needed to elaborate a detailed plan.[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T17]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Why not improving our current tools ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator is already an integrated suite, which means the different components are intended to be used together.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is written in PHP, and their maintainers are very proactive.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* This encourages features like explicitly attaching tasks to code changes, mocks, etc.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Although we can write or improve integrations like Gerrit Notification Bot, Bugzilla (Perl), Gerrit (Java), or Scrumbugz (Python) will probably never be a seamlessly integrated suite.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Some projects should test first ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, this is also our recommendation for the migration from Gerrit to Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;About the migration from Bugzilla to Phabricator, it needs to be done at once because we cannot do a full migration of data with two moving targets.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Various UI issues ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We can customize the CSS of our instance for more appropriate font sizes, colors, etc.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Upstream has already fixed some of the problems reported.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Requiring arc ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Arc checks new patches for basic mistakes before uploading them for review.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is useful for the majority of contributors and for the project.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The occasional contributor can upload a patch directly via the Phabricator Web UI.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Phabricator is unfamiliar for most newcomers ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;True, most users of FLOSS software have experience with Bugzilla if anything, because it's used by all the major players (Linux itself, Mozilla, RedHat, GNOME [https://www.bugzilla.org/installation-list/ etc. etc.]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However this is not necessarily true for all MediaWiki newcomers.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Offering them one integrated platform is better than looking for a platform they already know.&lt;/span&gt;

== phabricator.wikimedia.org ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[phab:|Phabricator.wikimedia.org]] (aka [https://bugs.wikimedia.org/ bugs.wikimedia.org]) is Wikimedia's bug tracking and project management tool.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Bugzilla ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla|Phabricator/versus Bugzilla]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== RT ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus RT|Phabricator/versus RT]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Trello, Mingle, Scrumbugz, etc ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Is Phabricator flexible enough to allow different teams to define their own workflows and ways of organizing sprints/tasks/stories/etc? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T43 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related task&lt;/span&gt;] - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;this welcomes answering by individuals who have already worked and maintained a Phabricator instance.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, at least to some degree.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, different projects can define their own columns/swim lanes on workboards with &quot;Add Column&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does Phabricator provide boards per project and/or iteration? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See e.g. the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/project/board/5/ Wikimedia Phabricator board].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Related tasks: [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21 Identify features Trello users would miss] and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20 Identify features Mingle users would miss]&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Phabricator{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>rzhs1j7p772jgqskfvnmtggdyohv1jg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/mni</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>805694</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402939</id>
      <parentid>5355659</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="52618" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

==ꯃꯔꯨꯑꯣꯏꯕ ꯍꯦꯟꯅ ꯌꯦꯡꯁꯤꯅꯕ==

===ꯐꯥꯏꯜ ꯃꯐꯝ ꯱ ꯗ ꯊꯥꯗꯣꯧꯈꯤꯕ===

ꯐꯥꯏꯜꯁꯤꯡ ꯃꯐꯝ ꯱ ꯗ ꯊꯥꯗꯣꯛꯅꯕ ꯃꯑꯣꯡꯗꯨ ꯈꯟꯂꯨ:

* [[w:Wget|ꯋ-ꯐꯪꯕ]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Secure copy with [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] or [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Using a [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] client.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.
&lt;/div&gt;
* ꯑꯇꯩ ꯃꯑꯣꯡ ꯈꯔꯥ ꯫ &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]&lt;/span&gt;

===ꯍꯧꯔꯛꯄꯒꯤ ꯃꯃꯥꯡ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check the requirements
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the RELEASE-NOTES file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Back up existing files and the database
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new files
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Upgrade extensions
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the update script to check the database
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Test the update
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations
&lt;/div&gt;

==ꯆꯪꯂꯤꯕꯁꯤꯡꯗꯨ ꯌꯦꯡꯁꯤꯟꯕ== 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} requires:
&lt;/div&gt;

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One of the following:
&lt;/div&gt;
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are using PostgreSQL, please also read {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more information, please read the {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} and {{ll|Compatibility}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Read the release notes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Clear pending jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Back up existing files and the database ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:''Full instructions: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Unpack the new files ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using a tarball package ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Command line ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Other files===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using Git ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Upgrade extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Other variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Run the update script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: ''See also {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Should I back up first?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Short answer: Yes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

===ꯑꯩꯅ ꯂꯩꯀꯥꯏꯒꯤ ꯑꯣꯏꯕ ꯁꯦꯝꯐꯝꯁꯤꯡ.php ꯊꯝꯖꯤꯟꯕ ꯌꯥꯒꯗꯔꯥ? ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

===ꯑꯩꯒꯤ ꯋꯤꯀꯤ ꯁꯤ ꯑꯣꯟꯂꯥꯏꯟ ꯗꯥ ꯂꯩꯒꯗꯔꯥ ꯃꯁꯤ ꯋꯥꯡꯈꯠꯍꯟꯕ ꯃꯇꯝꯗ? ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

===ꯀꯩꯗꯧꯕꯒꯤ ꯋꯥꯡꯈꯠꯍꯟꯗꯣꯏꯅꯣ? ===
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
==ꯁꯤꯖꯨ ꯌꯦꯡꯉꯨ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>q1ka6xta23katewv1jyj34ii7tujxz9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/id</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>805704</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402485</id>
      <parentid>5072278</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:13:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9712" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = Niklas Laxström, Siebrand Mazeland dan yang lainnya
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=Dimasukkan dalam Bundel Extensi Bahasa}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=Dokumentasi pengguna}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = Mengaktifkan penerjamahan dalam-wiki dan pengoreksian
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] – atau [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view coba bagaimana cara menerjemahkan halaman sekarang]
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

Ekstensi '''Translate''' menjadikan MediaWiki sebuah peralatan yang kuat untuk menerjemahkan jenis teks apapun. Ekstensi tersebut biasanya digunakan untuk menerjemahkan perangkat lunak dan untuk mengelola wiki multibahasa dalam cara yang bijak.

==Fitur==

Ekstensi Translate memiliki banyak fitur yang ditujukan secara khusus kepada para penerjemah, sementara membuat integrasi ''back-end'' dengan kode sumber semudah mungkin. Sementara itu, semuanya dijalankan di dalam [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|MediaWiki]], yang memberikan pengguna derajat kebebasan yang sangat besar dalam berkomunikasi dan mengorganisasi diri.

Fitur-fiturnya di antaranya:

* '''Penerjemahan halaman konten wiki terstruktur.'''
* '''Lokalisasi dalam wiki dan ekspor pesan antarmuka perangkat lunak (atau hampir segala hal).'''
* '''[[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overview/|Antarmuka]] penerjemahan dan pengoreksian berbasis web, serta ekspor dan impor berbasis gettext untuk penerjemahan luring.'''
* '''Berbagai pembantu untuk mempermudah pekerjaan penerjemah:'''
** menampilkan terjemahan dalam bahasa lain yang didefinisikan secara global, secara opsional diperluas dengan bahasa yang didefinisikan pengguna;
** penyuntingan dokumentasi penggunaan dan konteks pesan secara kolaboratif;
** memori penerjemahan dan penerjemahan mesin menggunakan peralatan eksternal (Apertium, Microsoft Translator, Yandex.Translate);
** menampilkan perubahan terbaru dalam pesan sumber;
** peringatan mengenai kesalahan yang sering terjadi seperti parameter yang tidak digunakan.
* Modul yang telah disiapkan untuk berbagai produk sumber terbuka yang bisa Anda gunakan sebagai contoh.
** Dikungan untuk berbagai format di antaranya: PHP, properti Java, Gettext, YAML dan AndroidXml (lihat {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} dan [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|Dukungan format berkas]]).
* Sistem pemasangan yang leluasa agar mudah menambahkan proyek baru sebagai kelompok pesan.
* Berbagai statistik:
** persentase kelengkapan terjemahan untuk semua kelompok pesan dalam semua bahasa yang didukung;
** persentase kelengkapan terjemahan dalam semua bahasa yang didukung untuk kelompok pesan manapun yang didukung;
** alat untuk membuat grafik aktivitas untuk suatu jangkauan waktu. Bisa menampilkan banyak suntingan atau banyak pengguna yang aktif per hari atau per jam dan mengandung banyak filter;
** ikhtisar awan mengenai bahasa dan penerjemah yang aktif.

Ekstensi Translate, dikarenakan basis penggunanya yang besar, dikonfirmasi cocok dengan semua peramban yang relatif baru, kecuali beberapa ''glitch'' (gaya) kecil yang diperbaiki dengan cepat.

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|''Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality'': presentasi ini menunjukkan bagaimana ekstensi Translate bisa membuat sebuah wiki menjadi benar-benar multibahasa, berdasarkan pengalaman wiki KDE UserBase.
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|Niklas Laxström, ''Translating the wiki way: Simple, fast, fun'', Wikimania 2012 (tersedia ''slide'').
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Dukungan dan dokumentasi ==

* Lihat [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|Pemasangan]]
* Lihat [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|Konfigurasi]]
* Lihat [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Dokumentasi pengguna]] — juga berisi tutorial
* Lihat [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|Mulai ikut mengembangkan ekstensi Translate]]
* Dukungan langsung di ''channel'' IRC #translatewiki di Libera Chat (waktu terbaik adalah pada pagi dan petang Eropa)
* Tolong laporkan semua masalah dan permintaan fitur di [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate pelacak masalah]

Ekstensi Translate awalnya dikembangkan oleh [[User:Nikerabbit]]; banyak pengguna lain, seperti [[User:Raymond]], [[User:SPQRobin]] dan tim Bahasa Wikimedia, telah berkontribusi ke kode dan dokumentasinya. Ekstensi ini dipelihara oleh [[User:Nikerabbit]] dan [[User:Siebrand]].

== Pengguna terkemuka ekstensi Translate ==
* https://translatewiki.net — Situs berbasis wiki terbesar dan komunitas bagi penerjemahan antarmuka perangkat lunak sumber terbuka.
* https://userbase.kde.org — Wiki dokumentasi untuk proyek KDE yang menggunakan fitur penerjemahan halaman secara ekstensif.
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — Menerjemahkan konten wiki dan menggunakan fitur keadaan kelompok. Penerjemahan dan peninjauan penerjemahan diaktifkan bagi hampir semua pengguna wiki.
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

Lihat lebih banyak lagi di [[Wikipedia:translatewiki.net#Notable uses]].

=== Testimoni ===

Tom Hutchison dari Joomla:
{{quotation|1=
Ekstensi Translate memungkinkan koneksi ke layanan terjemahan dan bisa mengisi terjemahan secara otomatis untukmu. Pada saat yang sama penerjemah bisa membuat penyesuaian agar kamu tidak membuat banyak halaman dengan terjemahan tidak akurat.

Itu tidak apa-apa apabila mereka berada di benua yang berbeda-beda.
Itu sebenarnya adalah nilai tambah karena pekerjaan diselesaikan 24 jam per hari.
Yang mereka butuhkan adalah obrolan grup dukungan untuk satu sama lain.
Mereka semua harus bisa membaca bahasa Inggris apabila mereka menerjemahkan, bukan? Ajari mereka beberapa markah wiki sederhana seperti pranala dan apa yang dilakukan dengan kategori.
Lalu mereka membantu orang lain yang berikutnya membantu orang lain.
Kita punya 40 dalam obrolan yang membantu satu sama lain dan bersenang-senang pada waktu yang sama.
Dan mereka semua dulu ketakutan dengan wiki tapi tidak percaya betapa mudahnya setelah mereka memulai.
Mereka sebenarnya menungguku memberikan terjemahan baru untuk dikerjakan karena aku tidak bisa mengejar mereka.
Aku tahu hanya ada 1 yang menerjemahkan bahasa ini atau bahasa itu.
Kita juga punya itu.
Satu orang mengerjakan bahasa Swahili sementara satu yang lain mengerjakan bahasa Jepang.
Juga, kamu menandai halaman untuk diterjemahkan.
Kamu mengendalikan apakah untuk memasukkan templat atau mengeluarkan variabel dalam pemanggilan templat.
}}


== Lihat pula ==
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – * sebuah ekstensi untuk memfasilitasi komunikasi antarpenerjemah.

Bedakan dengan:

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – digunakan untuk penerjemahan satu-kali halaman wiki dari satu bahasa ke bahasa lainnya.
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Wikipedia Abstrak]] untuk terjemahan.

==Cara membuat kontribusi==

* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all Terjemahkan ekstensi ini di translatewiki.net]
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|Kekutu dan permohonan fitur terbuka]]
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|Lebih banyak kekutu dan permohonan fitur terbuka di translatewiki.net]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|Koreksi dan terjemahkan dokumentasi dari ektensi Translate]]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>e040gbrr4bcebga3gd3dytmqnd20qzx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/ro</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>808394</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402942</id>
      <parentid>5355665</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="50022" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Noţiuni generale ==

=== Transfer de fișiere ===

Alegeți o metodă pentru transferarea fișierelor:

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
* Copie securizată cu [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] sau [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Folosind un client [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]].
* Compania de gazduire ar putea oferi o interfață de manager de fișiere prin intermediul browser-ului web; consultați furnizorul dvs..
* O altă metodă. Există o listă a acestora la [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

===Preliminar===

Citește {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.

# Verificați cerințele
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# Citiți notele de lansare
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
# Copiați fișierele existente și baza de date
# Despachetați fișierele noi
# Extensiile de actualizare
# Rulați scriptul de actualizare pentru a verifica baza de date
# Testați actualizarea
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations
&lt;/div&gt;

== Verificați cerințele == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} necesită:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Unul dintre următoarele:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

Dacă utilizați PostgreSQL, vă rugăm să citiți și {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Pentru mai multe informații, citiți {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} și {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Citiți notele de lansare ==
În cadrul directorului de distribuție sau în cadrul fișierelor verificate/exportate din [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], există un număr de fișiere cu nume de fișier cu majuscule, dintre care unul conține '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]])
Acum este momentul să-l deschidem și să aflăm ce s-a schimbat în această versiune.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Ștergeți lucrările în așteptare ==
Din motive de performanță, unele acțiuni din baza de date sunt întârziate și sunt gestionate de [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].
Aceste posturi sunt stocate în baza de date și conțin parametri cu informații despre acțiunile pe care ar trebui să le efectueze.
Este recomandat să executați aceste activități în așteptare înainte de a actualiza wiki-ul, pentru a evita ca acestea să nu reușească în cazul în care specificația parametrilor acestor lucrări se schimbă pe noua versiune.
Utilizați {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} pentru a rula toate lucrările în așteptare și a șterge coada de așteptare înainte de a efectua actualizarea.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Backup fișierele existente și baza de date ==

:''Instrucțiuni complete: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

În timp ce scripturile de actualizare sunt bine întreținute și robuste, lucrurile ar putea continua să fie greșite. Înainte de a continua să actualizați schema bazei de date, faceți '''o plină [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' a wiki-ului, incluzând atât baza de date, cât și fișierele:

* conținutul wiki-ului, din baza de date (asigurați-vă că obțineți setul de caractere specificat corect, verificați mai întâi LocalSettings.php). Poate fi o idee bună să creați o memorie XML în plus față de baza de date SQL.
:* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* MySQL, ambele SQL dump și dump XML sunt pentru utilizare cu comanda &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* PostgreSQL, baza de date pentru utilizare cu comanda:&lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* SQLite, utilizați un script MediaWiki pentru a face o copie de rezervă:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* imagini și alte fișiere media (conținutul directorului &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;, logo-ul personalizat /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* fișiere de configurare, de ex. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; și &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (dacă există)
* Fișierele programului MediaWiki, inclusiv toate skin-urile și extensiile, mai ales dacă le-ați modificat.

== Dezarhivează fișierele noi ==

=== Folosește un pachet tarball ===

Puteți pune fișierele noi utilizând FTP sau linia de comandă. Utilizați linia de comandă, dacă aveți acces la ea! Utilizarea liniei de comandă va fi mult mai rapidă decât necesitatea încărcării fiecărei singure mii de fișiere prin FTP.

{{Note|1=Ar trebui să puneți tarballul decomprimat într-un dosar nou și gol pe serverul dvs. Dacă extrageți noua versiune direct pe versiunea veche, mai degrabă decât într-un director nou, trebuie să urmați instrucțiunile descrise în [[#Back up existing files and the database|Copie de rezervă a fișierelor existente și a bazei de date]]: în caz contrar, dacă ați ați făcut orice personalizări pe care le puteți șterge într-un mod care vă lasă fără referință la reaplicarea acestora. Extragerea unui tarball deasupra copiei actuale a MediaWiki poate lăsa, de asemenea, fișiere din versiunea veche a MediaWiki care ar putea interfera cu codul actualizat. Este recomandat să despachetați fișierele noi într-un director nou și apoi să aplicați personalizări în noul director (restaurarea LocalSettings.php, folderul cu imagini, extensiile și alte personalizări, cum ar fi skin-urile personalizate)}}

==== FTP sau grafic ====

Dacă nu puteți accesa linia de comandă de pe serverul dvs., descărcați-l pe MediaWiki tarball pe calculatorul local și folosiți 7zip pentru a extrage tarballul pe PC-ul local.

După ce ați extras fișierele la nivel local, utilizați software-ul client FTP favorit pentru a încărca directoare și fișiere pe server.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Linia de comandă ====
Poate fi necesar să executați comanda ca &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; dacă nu aveți permisiuni complete de scriere la directoarele de instalare wiki sub utilizatorul dvs. curent.
În cazul în care un pachet de pachete tarball este în mod normal un nou director pentru noua versiune wiki va fi creat și va trebui să copiați vechile fișiere de configurare și imagini din vechiul director de instalare:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

Utilizatorii (Open)Solaris ar trebui să folosească &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, sau:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Alte fișiere ===

După extragerea tarball-ului, trebuie să copiați sau să mutați unele fișiere și foldere de la vechiul director de instalare la cel nou:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* $code-lc, care conține setările vechi de configurare.&lt;/span&gt;
* Directorul &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (sau &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; în versiuni mai vechi), care conține toate fișierele încărcate în wiki, cu excepția cazului în care ați ales un director de încărcare diferit și puteți modifica proprietatea și permisiunile. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; și &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (de ex., dacă utilizatorul dvs. web este ''apache'').
* Unele extensii din directorul &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;. Trebuie să primiți mereu extensii actualizate, iar extensiile vechi nu sunt garantate pentru a funcționa cu o versiune mai nouă a MediaWiki.
* În cazul în care utilizați un [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|logo personalizat]], acest fișier trebuie, de asemenea, să fie restabilit din copia de rezervă. Înainte de 1.24, de obicei în &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. După 1.24 în &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; sau &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; dacă asta ați ales să utilizați. Apoi adăugați la LocalSettings.php de ex. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
*Skinuri personalizate din directorul &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;.
* Orice modificări aduse vechilor fișiere sau extensii de instalare.
* Orice fișier .htaccess (dacă utilizați Apache și ați definit reguli în ele).

După ce ați terminat, creați acest nou director în folderul publicat de pe serverul web sau redenumiți vechiul director de instalare și apoi redenumiți unul nou pentru a se potrivi cu vechiul nume.

=== Folosirea Git ===

Dacă utilizați {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, exportați fișierele într-o locație curată și apoi copiați fișierele personalizate vechi în noua locație, așa cum este descris în secțiunea anterioară.

Va trebui să instalați și câteva biblioteci externe PHP folosind Composer sau o colecție furnizată pentru ferma wiki Wikimedia.
Mai multe detalii despre instalarea și actualizarea bibliotecilor externe pot fi găsite în [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].

=== Folosirea unui patch ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Un mic fișier de patch-uri este de obicei disponibil pentru o versiune minoră de upgrade. Descărcați și extrageți manual fișierul de patch-uri de la [$dumps the dumps site] sau urmați instrucțiunile cu wget de mai jos. Patch-urile sunt incrementale, '''nu''' puteți ignora o versiune.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

# &lt;kbd&gt; cd &lt;/kbd&gt; în directorul principal MediaWiki (cel cu LocalSettings.php).
# Descărcați fișierul de patch-uri și &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt;.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
# Dacă totul este bine, executați &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; din nou fără a se &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
# Verificați Special:Version: și ar trebui să vedeți numărul nou al versiunii în vigoare.

=== Fișiere rămase care pot cauza erori ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Upgrade extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Other variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Run the update script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: ''See also {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Should I back up first?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Short answer: Yes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Why upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>g7jflthffqu4cikufyjk526q1r5bkkc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Installing MediaWiki/cs</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>810251</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402872</id>
      <parentid>5395245</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:41:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11248" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
Tato stránka obsahuje všechny kroky k ruční instalaci a konfiguraci MediaWiki.

Instalace MediaWiki může být obtížná, pokud nemáte žádné zkušenosti s Apache (software webového serveru), PHP a MySQL/MariaDB (databáze).
Sekce [[#Appendices|Dodatky]] níže nabízí [[#Alternatives to manual installation|snazší alternativy k ruční instalaci]].

Sekce [[#Appendices|Dodatky]] níže také obsahuje poznámky k instalaci pro specifické konfigurace systému.

{{Note|Pokud již MediaWiki používáte, podívejte se na [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Průvodce aktualizací]].}}
== Kontrola požadavků na instalaci ==

Zkontrolujte, zda váš systém splňuje [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|instalační požadavky]].

Nezapomeňte také zkontrolovat {{ll|Release notes}} verze MediaWiki, kterou plánujete nainstalovat.

== Stažení software MediaWiki ==

Stáhněte si soubor tar MediaWiki z [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|oficiální stránky pro stažení]].

Obecně platí, že pokud používáte produkční prostředí, chcete používat nejnovější stabilní verzi, kterou je MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.

== Extrahování software MediaWiki ==
Stažený soubor je ve formátu &lt;code&gt;.zip&lt;/code&gt; nebo &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;.
Před použitím musíte tento archivní soubor rozbalit.
Soubor můžete dekomprimovat lokálně (a poté nahrát přes FTP na server) nebo přímo na vašem serveru.

Dekomprimace se obvykle provádí pomocí softwaru, jako je [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (zdarma), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] nebo [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] (zdarma) ve Windows.

V systémech Linux a Mac OS X můžete soubor dekomprimovat pomocí tohoto příkazu:
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=Pokud dekomprimujete archivní soubor, jako uživatel root/admin, možná budete chtít později změnit vlastnictví souboru v závislosti na vašem nastavení. Na systémech Linux by [[w:chown|chown]] příkaz používal takto: &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

== Nahrání souborů na váš webový server ==

Pokud jste ještě nenahráli soubory na váš [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Web server|webový server]] (nebo je zkopírovali, pokud software vašeho webového serveru běží lokálně na vašem &lt;code&gt;localhost&lt;/code&gt;), udělejte tak nyní.

Nahrajte soubory do úložiště serveru buď:

# přímo zkopírováním extrahované složky nebo
# použitím FTP klienta jako [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (Windows, OSX a Linux) nebo [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (Windows a OSX).
# pomocí softwaru již poskytnutého vaší [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hostingovou službou]], jako je ''CPanel File Manager''

Pokud má váš nahrávací nástroj možnost &quot;změnit názvy souborů na malá písmena&quot;, musíte to zakázat.

Pokud používáte webový server Apache HTTPD, správný adresář je uveden ve vašem souboru &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; v direktivě [https://httpd.apache.org/docs/current/mod/core.html#documentroot &lt;code&gt;DocumentRoot&lt;/code&gt;].
Ve výchozím nastavení je to &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; nebo {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.

Přesné umístění nastavení serveru Apache a souboru adresářů &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; závisí na vašem operačním systému.
V Debianu a Ubuntu je soubor pro nastavení a adresáře serveru Apache &lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt;.
V Red Hatu a Fedoře je soubor &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.

Přejmenujte nahranou složku na cokoliv co chcete mít v URL.
Pokud váš webový server pracuje například jako &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt;, přejmenování na adresář &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt; by znamenalo, že byste přistupovali ke své wiki jako &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt;.
{{Note|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Nepoužívejte $wiki, pokud ji chcete nastavit jako [[$short-url|Short URL]] po spuštění [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script|instalačního skriptu]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
== Nastavení databáze ==

[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script|instalační skript]] MediaWiki vás požádá o název databáze a uživatelské jméno databáze, takže MediaWiki může uložit obsah wiki.

Pokud již máte databázový server a znáte heslo pro uživatele &quot;root&quot; (admin), přejděte na část [[#Run the installation script|#Spustit instalační skript]] níže.

Pokud neznáte heslo pro uživatele root, například pokud jste na [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hostovaném serveru]], budete muset před spuštěním instalačního skriptu MediaWiki v další části vytvořit novou databázi.

SQLite, MariaDB/MySQL a PostgreSQL jsou podporované databáze.
Pokud si nejste jisti, kterou databázi zvolit, použijte MariaDB.

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
Pokud je v systému nainstalován modul &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; pro PHP, pro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] není potřeba žádné další nastavení.

Na instalační stránce SQLite vyberte název databáze (libovolný) a adresář databáze SQLite.
V adresáři databáze se instalační program pokusí použít podadresář mimo kořen dokumentu a v případě potřeby jej vytvořit.
Pokud tento adresář není bezpečný (například čitelný na webu), změňte jej ručně. Pro zabránění jeho zpřístupnění všem na webu.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. Podívejte se na příslušnou dokumentaci vašeho poskytovatele hostingu. Případně kontaktujte svého [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|poskytovatele hostingu]], aby vám vytvořil účet.

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Pouze pokud vaše databáze neběží na stejném serveru jako váš webový server, musíte zadat příslušný název hostitele webového serveru (&lt;code&gt;mediawiki.example.com&lt;/code&gt; v příkladu níže):

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=MySQL/MariaDB zaznamenává všechny dotazy do souboru historie. Bude obsahovat heslo databáze pro uživatelský účet. Pokud se vás to týká, smažte a deaktivujte soubor &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt; po spuštění těchto dotazů podle [dokumentace https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/mysql-logging.html#mysql-logging-history-file MySQL].}}

===PostgreSQL===
Pokud používáte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PostgreSQL|PostgreSQL]], musíte mít buď vytvořenou databázi a uživatele nebo jednoduše do konfiguračního formuláře zadat jméno uživatele PostgreSQL s oprávněními &quot;superuživatele&quot; (superuser).
Tím je často uživatel databáze s názvem &lt;code&gt;postgres&lt;/code&gt;.
Následující příkazy na příkazovém řádku Linuxu jako uživatel postgres vytvoří uživatele databáze s názvem &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt; a databázi s názvem &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; vlastněnou uživatelem jménem &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser (poté zadejte heslo databáze)
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

nebo jako superuser (výchozí postgres) spusťte na příkazovém řádku databáze následující příkazy:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Dejte pozor na [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|seznam známých problémů při spuštění MediaWiki s PostgreSQL]].

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== Spusťte instalační skript ==

Dále dokončete instalaci MediaWiki tak, že ve webovém prohlížeči přejdete na adresu URL vaší instalace MediaWiki: Postupujte podle pokynů na stránce {{ll|Manual:Config script}}.

== Další nastavení ==
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - pokročilá konfigurace
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - správa wiki
== Udržujte systém aktuální! ==
Po instalaci se ujistěte, že budete neustále informováni o vydáních a udržujte svůj server v bezpečí!
{{Clickable button 2|Přihlašte se k odběru našich emailových oznámení o nových verzích MediaWiki.|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
== Přílohy ==

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
=== Alternativy k ruční instalaci ===

Místo ruční instalace MediaWiki mohou být alternativní možnosti jednodušší:
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|předintegrovaná softwarová zařízení]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hostingové služby s instalací jedním kliknutím nebo wiki farmy]]
:{{Note|1=Hostingové služby, které poskytují automatickou instalaci aplikací, jako je MediaWiki, mohou nabízet zastaralé verze nebo mít jiné problémy. Pokud narazíte na problémy, ''neznamená to'', že nemůžete nainstalovat MediaWiki. To znamená, že byste měli nainstalovat MediaWiki ručně.}}

Více na stránce {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.

=== Pokyny pro konkrétní systémy ===

Na stránce {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} najdete podrobnější pokyny k instalaci zaměřené na konkrétní systémy.

Celkově jsou však tyto dokumenty pro jednotlivé systémy méně udržované a nemusí být vždy aktuální.
Nejprve se podívejte na {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (tuto stránku), než se podíváte na dokumentaci k instalaci jednotlivých systémů.

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
=== Spuštění více wiki ===

Viz [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Příručka:FAQ#Instalace a konfigurace]].

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
=== Import existující wiki databáze ===

Viz [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Příručka:FAQ#Instalace a konfigurace]].

== Související články ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>t17vuuua0y08vt4ikj8u56wh9tzqnke</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402880</id>
      <parentid>5402872</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:41:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11247" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
Tato stránka obsahuje všechny kroky k ruční instalaci a konfiguraci MediaWiki.

Instalace MediaWiki může být obtížná, pokud nemáte žádné zkušenosti s Apache (software webového serveru), PHP a MySQL/MariaDB (databáze).
Sekce [[#Appendices|Dodatky]] níže nabízí [[#Alternatives to manual installation|snazší alternativy k ruční instalaci]].

Sekce [[#Appendices|Dodatky]] níže také obsahuje poznámky k instalaci pro specifické konfigurace systému.

{{Note|Pokud již MediaWiki používáte, podívejte se na [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Průvodce aktualizací]].}}
== Kontrola požadavků na instalaci ==

Zkontrolujte, zda váš systém splňuje [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|instalační požadavky]].

Nezapomeňte také zkontrolovat {{ll|Release notes}} verze MediaWiki, kterou plánujete nainstalovat.

== Stažení software MediaWiki ==

Stáhněte si soubor tar MediaWiki z [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|oficiální stránky pro stažení]].

Obecně platí, že pokud používáte produkční prostředí, chcete používat nejnovější stabilní verzi, kterou je MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.

== Extrahování software MediaWiki ==
Stažený soubor je ve formátu &lt;code&gt;.zip&lt;/code&gt; nebo &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;.
Před použitím musíte tento archivní soubor rozbalit.
Soubor můžete dekomprimovat lokálně (a poté nahrát přes FTP na server) nebo přímo na vašem serveru.

Dekomprimace se obvykle provádí pomocí softwaru, jako je [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (zdarma), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] nebo [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] (zdarma) ve Windows.

V systémech Linux a Mac OS X můžete soubor dekomprimovat pomocí tohoto příkazu:
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=Pokud dekomprimujete archivní soubor, jako uživatel root/admin, možná budete chtít později změnit vlastnictví souboru v závislosti na vašem nastavení. Na systémech Linux by [[w:chown|chown]] příkaz používal takto: &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

== Nahrání souborů na váš webový server ==

Pokud jste ještě nenahráli soubory na váš [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Web server|webový server]] (nebo je zkopírovali, pokud software vašeho webového serveru běží lokálně na vašem &lt;code&gt;localhost&lt;/code&gt;), udělejte tak nyní.

Nahrajte soubory do úložiště serveru buď:

# přímo zkopírováním extrahované složky nebo
# použitím FTP klienta jako [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (Windows, OSX a Linux) nebo [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (Windows a OSX).
# pomocí softwaru již poskytnutého vaší [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hostingovou službou]], jako je ''CPanel File Manager''

Pokud má váš nahrávací nástroj možnost &quot;změnit názvy souborů na malá písmena&quot;, musíte to zakázat.

Pokud používáte webový server Apache HTTPD, správný adresář je uveden ve vašem souboru &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; v direktivě [https://httpd.apache.org/docs/current/mod/core.html#documentroot &lt;code&gt;DocumentRoot&lt;/code&gt;].
Ve výchozím nastavení je to &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; nebo {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.

Přesné umístění nastavení serveru Apache a souboru adresářů &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; závisí na vašem operačním systému.
V Debianu a Ubuntu je soubor pro nastavení a adresáře serveru Apache &lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt;.
V Red Hatu a Fedoře je soubor &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.

Přejmenujte nahranou složku na cokoliv co chcete mít v URL.
Pokud váš webový server pracuje například jako &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt;, přejmenování na adresář &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt; by znamenalo, že byste přistupovali ke své wiki jako &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt;.
{{Note|1=Nepoužívejte &lt;code&gt;/wiki/&lt;/code&gt;, pokud ji chcete nastavit jako [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|Short URL]] po spuštění [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script|instalačního skriptu]].}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
== Nastavení databáze ==

[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script|instalační skript]] MediaWiki vás požádá o název databáze a uživatelské jméno databáze, takže MediaWiki může uložit obsah wiki.

Pokud již máte databázový server a znáte heslo pro uživatele &quot;root&quot; (admin), přejděte na část [[#Run the installation script|#Spustit instalační skript]] níže.

Pokud neznáte heslo pro uživatele root, například pokud jste na [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hostovaném serveru]], budete muset před spuštěním instalačního skriptu MediaWiki v další části vytvořit novou databázi.

SQLite, MariaDB/MySQL a PostgreSQL jsou podporované databáze.
Pokud si nejste jisti, kterou databázi zvolit, použijte MariaDB.

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
Pokud je v systému nainstalován modul &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; pro PHP, pro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] není potřeba žádné další nastavení.

Na instalační stránce SQLite vyberte název databáze (libovolný) a adresář databáze SQLite.
V adresáři databáze se instalační program pokusí použít podadresář mimo kořen dokumentu a v případě potřeby jej vytvořit.
Pokud tento adresář není bezpečný (například čitelný na webu), změňte jej ručně. Pro zabránění jeho zpřístupnění všem na webu.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. Podívejte se na příslušnou dokumentaci vašeho poskytovatele hostingu. Případně kontaktujte svého [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|poskytovatele hostingu]], aby vám vytvořil účet.

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Pouze pokud vaše databáze neběží na stejném serveru jako váš webový server, musíte zadat příslušný název hostitele webového serveru (&lt;code&gt;mediawiki.example.com&lt;/code&gt; v příkladu níže):

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=MySQL/MariaDB zaznamenává všechny dotazy do souboru historie. Bude obsahovat heslo databáze pro uživatelský účet. Pokud se vás to týká, smažte a deaktivujte soubor &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt; po spuštění těchto dotazů podle [dokumentace https://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/8.0/en/mysql-logging.html#mysql-logging-history-file MySQL].}}

===PostgreSQL===
Pokud používáte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PostgreSQL|PostgreSQL]], musíte mít buď vytvořenou databázi a uživatele nebo jednoduše do konfiguračního formuláře zadat jméno uživatele PostgreSQL s oprávněními &quot;superuživatele&quot; (superuser).
Tím je často uživatel databáze s názvem &lt;code&gt;postgres&lt;/code&gt;.
Následující příkazy na příkazovém řádku Linuxu jako uživatel postgres vytvoří uživatele databáze s názvem &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt; a databázi s názvem &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; vlastněnou uživatelem jménem &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser (poté zadejte heslo databáze)
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

nebo jako superuser (výchozí postgres) spusťte na příkazovém řádku databáze následující příkazy:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Dejte pozor na [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|seznam známých problémů při spuštění MediaWiki s PostgreSQL]].

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== Spusťte instalační skript ==

Dále dokončete instalaci MediaWiki tak, že ve webovém prohlížeči přejdete na adresu URL vaší instalace MediaWiki: Postupujte podle pokynů na stránce {{ll|Manual:Config script}}.

== Další nastavení ==
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - pokročilá konfigurace
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - správa wiki
== Udržujte systém aktuální! ==
Po instalaci se ujistěte, že budete neustále informováni o vydáních a udržujte svůj server v bezpečí!
{{Clickable button 2|Přihlašte se k odběru našich emailových oznámení o nových verzích MediaWiki.|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
== Přílohy ==

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
=== Alternativy k ruční instalaci ===

Místo ruční instalace MediaWiki mohou být alternativní možnosti jednodušší:
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|předintegrovaná softwarová zařízení]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hostingové služby s instalací jedním kliknutím nebo wiki farmy]]
:{{Note|1=Hostingové služby, které poskytují automatickou instalaci aplikací, jako je MediaWiki, mohou nabízet zastaralé verze nebo mít jiné problémy. Pokud narazíte na problémy, ''neznamená to'', že nemůžete nainstalovat MediaWiki. To znamená, že byste měli nainstalovat MediaWiki ručně.}}

Více na stránce {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.

=== Pokyny pro konkrétní systémy ===

Na stránce {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} najdete podrobnější pokyny k instalaci zaměřené na konkrétní systémy.

Celkově jsou však tyto dokumenty pro jednotlivé systémy méně udržované a nemusí být vždy aktuální.
Nejprve se podívejte na {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (tuto stránku), než se podíváte na dokumentaci k instalaci jednotlivých systémů.

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
=== Spuštění více wiki ===

Viz [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Příručka:FAQ#Instalace a konfigurace]].

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
=== Import existující wiki databáze ===

Viz [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Příručka:FAQ#Instalace a konfigurace]].

== Související články ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>hv2c1wya7cda6iccpoz994p6imvlvtf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:User rights/it</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>811600</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401590</id>
      <parentid>5401492</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:25:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;tramite [[Special:Undelete]]&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29897" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows deleting/undeleting information (action text, summary, user who made the action) of specific log entries - requires the ''deleterevision'' right&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows deleting/undeleting information (revision text, edit summary, user who made the edit) of specific revisions&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Split into deleterevision and deletelogentry in 1.20'''&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|interface messages]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For editing sitewide CSS/JSON/JS, there are now segregate rights, see below.&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;also hides the &quot;Change Password&quot;, but not other ways to change the password&lt;/span&gt;
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjson'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} to disable.&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]]&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Prior to [[rev:35303|1.13]] this right was named hiderevision'''&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without it, an administrator that has the capability to block cannot unblock themselves if blocked by another administrator&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows the assignment or removal of all(*) groups to any user.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(*)With {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} you can set the possibility to add/remove certain groups instead of all&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>fgursg5h9luodz19gizdo8am9eljsq9</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401592</id>
      <parentid>5401590</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:26:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot; permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29879" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows deleting/undeleting information (revision text, edit summary, user who made the edit) of specific revisions&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Split into deleterevision and deletelogentry in 1.20'''&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|interface messages]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For editing sitewide CSS/JSON/JS, there are now segregate rights, see below.&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;also hides the &quot;Change Password&quot;, but not other ways to change the password&lt;/span&gt;
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjson'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} to disable.&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]]&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Prior to [[rev:35303|1.13]] this right was named hiderevision'''&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without it, an administrator that has the capability to block cannot unblock themselves if blocked by another administrator&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows the assignment or removal of all(*) groups to any user.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(*)With {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} you can set the possibility to add/remove certain groups instead of all&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>8raqyodp2ps3c3dcgf3qs905dyx7ysb</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401594</id>
      <parentid>5401592</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:27:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot; permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29873" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Split into deleterevision and deletelogentry in 1.20'''&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|interface messages]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For editing sitewide CSS/JSON/JS, there are now segregate rights, see below.&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;also hides the &quot;Change Password&quot;, but not other ways to change the password&lt;/span&gt;
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjson'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} to disable.&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]]&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Prior to [[rev:35303|1.13]] this right was named hiderevision'''&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without it, an administrator that has the capability to block cannot unblock themselves if blocked by another administrator&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows the assignment or removal of all(*) groups to any user.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(*)With {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} you can set the possibility to add/remove certain groups instead of all&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>exnke7d2d1nwu5x610xx0itqkmjmmjx</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401596</id>
      <parentid>5401594</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:28:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;'''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29814" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|interface messages]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For editing sitewide CSS/JSON/JS, there are now segregate rights, see below.&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;also hides the &quot;Change Password&quot;, but not other ways to change the password&lt;/span&gt;
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjson'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} to disable.&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]]&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Prior to [[rev:35303|1.13]] this right was named hiderevision'''&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without it, an administrator that has the capability to block cannot unblock themselves if blocked by another administrator&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows the assignment or removal of all(*) groups to any user.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(*)With {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} you can set the possibility to add/remove certain groups instead of all&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>fzx039cmbk9iwf1xzw1vuz64ustmr1y</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401598</id>
      <parentid>5401596</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:28:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;contiene [[$man|messaggi dell'interfaccia]].&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29765" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For editing sitewide CSS/JSON/JS, there are now segregate rights, see below.&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;also hides the &quot;Change Password&quot;, but not other ways to change the password&lt;/span&gt;
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjson'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} to disable.&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]]&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Prior to [[rev:35303|1.13]] this right was named hiderevision'''&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without it, an administrator that has the capability to block cannot unblock themselves if blocked by another administrator&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows the assignment or removal of all(*) groups to any user.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(*)With {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} you can set the possibility to add/remove certain groups instead of all&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>kpfl1jlltgzlehrk2t55jlkigrmneiz</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401600</id>
      <parentid>5401598</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:29:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29719" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For editing sitewide CSS/JSON/JS, there are now segregate rights, see below.&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjson'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} to disable.&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]]&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Prior to [[rev:35303|1.13]] this right was named hiderevision'''&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without it, an administrator that has the capability to block cannot unblock themselves if blocked by another administrator&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows the assignment or removal of all(*) groups to any user.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(*)With {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} you can set the possibility to add/remove certain groups instead of all&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>l855bd11qtb5p7mvgx4unnyqe6al9db</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401602</id>
      <parentid>5401600</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:32:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29679" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjson'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} to disable.&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]]&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Prior to [[rev:35303|1.13]] this right was named hiderevision'''&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without it, an administrator that has the capability to block cannot unblock themselves if blocked by another administrator&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows the assignment or removal of all(*) groups to any user.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(*)With {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} you can set the possibility to add/remove certain groups instead of all&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>c114btcptmvciqvobjlw98tuchjqt1j</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401604</id>
      <parentid>5401602</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:33:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;(si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il diritto di $edituserjs)&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29631" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il diritto di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjson'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} to disable.&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]]&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Prior to [[rev:35303|1.13]] this right was named hiderevision'''&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without it, an administrator that has the capability to block cannot unblock themselves if blocked by another administrator&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows the assignment or removal of all(*) groups to any user.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(*)With {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} you can set the possibility to add/remove certain groups instead of all&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>4jjlj1m4bsh4ge2fye231z8tmk32w0h</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401606</id>
      <parentid>5401604</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:34:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;(si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di $edituserjson)&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29584" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il diritto di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} to disable.&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]]&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Prior to [[rev:35303|1.13]] this right was named hiderevision'''&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without it, an administrator that has the capability to block cannot unblock themselves if blocked by another administrator&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows the assignment or removal of all(*) groups to any user.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(*)With {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} you can set the possibility to add/remove certain groups instead of all&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>jquld7o4z06oh9d7j7jolnrouykytz4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401608</id>
      <parentid>5401606</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:34:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29585" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} to disable.&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]]&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Prior to [[rev:35303|1.13]] this right was named hiderevision'''&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without it, an administrator that has the capability to block cannot unblock themselves if blocked by another administrator&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows the assignment or removal of all(*) groups to any user.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(*)With {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} you can set the possibility to add/remove certain groups instead of all&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>op6s632tivk33qvtxg6j24rpy9gf0t8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401610</id>
      <parentid>5401608</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:34:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;vedere [[$1|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]]&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29532" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} to disable.&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Prior to [[rev:35303|1.13]] this right was named hiderevision'''&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without it, an administrator that has the capability to block cannot unblock themselves if blocked by another administrator&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows the assignment or removal of all(*) groups to any user.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(*)With {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} you can set the possibility to add/remove certain groups instead of all&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>gvt6fs6qmb0lf710v79mpxvuxloa219</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401612</id>
      <parentid>5401610</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:35:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;'''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision'''&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29487" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} to disable.&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without it, an administrator that has the capability to block cannot unblock themselves if blocked by another administrator&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows the assignment or removal of all(*) groups to any user.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(*)With {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} you can set the possibility to add/remove certain groups instead of all&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>90b336xhlaovxoqtdsuwt323ctahnot</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401615</id>
      <parentid>5401612</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:37:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29387" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;allows the assignment or removal of all(*) groups to any user.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(*)With {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} you can set the possibility to add/remove certain groups instead of all&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>pp10sz0wwuc106own7u1bgdlqz4cqrg</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401617</id>
      <parentid>5401615</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:37:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29349" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(*)With {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} you can set the possibility to add/remove certain groups instead of all&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>swhe73h9hc6qje4c2sdtw0hnd218bhh</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401619</id>
      <parentid>5401617</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:39:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;(*)Con $AddGroups e $RemoveGroups è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29303" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&quot;transwiki&quot;&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>ftfeq2atfbh9y6ws54j5qb22blc6od7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401621</id>
      <parentid>5401619</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:39:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;&quot;transwiki&quot;&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29247" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This right was called 'importraw' in and before version 1.5&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>1tzmau2v3k9yse1024ry6iklddb8lnu</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401623</id>
      <parentid>5401621</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:40:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29204" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not available by default&lt;/span&gt;'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>omxes9bpwikxxn5ggq4u2670pabzf0h</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401625</id>
      <parentid>5401623</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:40:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;non disponibile per impostazione predefinita&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29168" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;lists pages that no user has watchlisted&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>mt4zjx8fektt2vg5te6o0dbxy1is5jz</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401628</id>
      <parentid>5401625</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:40:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29134" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You also need to add &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (with documentation in qqq.json).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>20u08w69s9jfoniyiazreyxn2wvonll</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401630</id>
      <parentid>5401628</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:42:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29088" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''editusercss'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>fjy0wovwp24r31qlwtbgjfwujk3asiy</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402531</id>
      <parentid>5401630</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:24:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso $editusercss)&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29036" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;prior to 1.31 it was assigned to everyone (i.e. &quot;*&quot;) (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''edituserjs'' right)&lt;/span&gt; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>fqpin0h0eamq6yinbr031s7rgv11451</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402535</id>
      <parentid>5402531</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:25:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di $edituserjs)&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28987" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;i.e. a more narrow alternative to &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (note that this is not needed if the group already has the ''suppressrevision'' right)&lt;/span&gt;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>g690n06vnz4xp2cexeklfadz4ojxb4i</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402539</id>
      <parentid>5402535</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:25:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di $suppressrevision)&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28944" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>a1vjccwzjcv9p32wv5wiv5flhuai423</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402541</id>
      <parentid>5402539</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:25:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Amministrazione&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28889" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;which blocks all interactions with the web site except viewing.&lt;/span&gt; (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>63dlq8errvprdtzxdcbe9ctoyrutxmp</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402543</id>
      <parentid>5402541</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:26:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28845" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;can optionally be viewed&lt;/span&gt;
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>ga1ylfyiyvs4jl94lc93st7igyy8wts</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402547</id>
      <parentid>5402543</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:26:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;può essere visualizzato opzionalmente&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28803" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not affected by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prior to the introduction of this right, the configuration variable {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} was used for this purpose'')&lt;/span&gt;
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>alv9w8j0rlivh3g3ezr64y56xd5a41s</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402553</id>
      <parentid>5402547</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:27:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;non influenzati da [[$1|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione $RateLimitsExcludedGroups era usata a questo scopo'')&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28755" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With this right, you can define the depth of linked pages at [[Special:Export]]. Otherwise, the value of {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, which is 0 by default, will be used.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>i7mcsuq9fpyfb5yvtk0gpy6u11ypukq</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402555</id>
      <parentid>5402553</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:30:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a $link1. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di $link2, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28742" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although these permissions all control separate things, sometimes to perform certain actions you need multiple permissions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>scoeisxvhuoz5pqxi5mysvqamhyhuvk</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402557</id>
      <parentid>5402555</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:30:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28702" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example allowing people to edit but not read pages doesn't make sense, since in order to edit a page you must first be able to read it (Assuming no pages are allowlisted).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>nz8taqaoebyjmghhlwcyt8pugzrmpha</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402559</id>
      <parentid>5402557</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:31:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi).&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28710" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allowing uploads but not editing does not make sense, since in order to upload an image you must implicitly create an image description page, etc.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>qh7kt2wyiqr1ifi2x67trv189am0owr</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402561</id>
      <parentid>5402559</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:32:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28681" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts.&lt;/span&gt;
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>43ux72309fgkx8qm9bj1ygi1090ybjh</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402563</id>
      <parentid>5402561</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:32:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;account registrati.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28624" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;registered accounts at least as old as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} and having at least as many edits as {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>ip25kpeqjgchoxqfluhi92cpn4tokxb</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402566</id>
      <parentid>5402563</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:33:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;account registrati con anzianità pari a $AutoConfirmAge e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a $AutoConfirmCount.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28576" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can delete and restore pages, block and unblock users, et cetera.&lt;/span&gt;
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>8m0bnehd6u9h6gro2y47yjzcebujv15</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402569</id>
      <parentid>5402566</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:34:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28556" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who by default can change other users' rights.&lt;/span&gt;
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>5843zc6xctb8hknp4uqhw81ihquku0m</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402571</id>
      <parentid>5402569</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:35:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28534" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even create any custom group by just assigning rights to them.&lt;/span&gt;

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>sshecxs061nve3o4vowod3wsre5qev3</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402573</id>
      <parentid>5402571</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:35:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28507" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The default values in the latest stable MediaWiki release, version {{MW stable branch number}}, are available here:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>lves0gniuf2qo3fjocaneer586tj532</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402575</id>
      <parentid>5402573</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:36:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione $1, sono disponibili qui:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28459" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Additional rights: you should be able to list all the permissions available on your wiki by running {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>ld18leqb644tu12xajaxlfzxy683dh5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402577</id>
      <parentid>5402575</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:37:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo $1.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28416" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You probably also want to assign it to some user group by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} described above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>78sg4ehvsebrubyspsag1hnfugczic9</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402579</id>
      <parentid>5402577</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:37:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando $GroupPermissions descritto sopra.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28374" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you want this right to be accessible to external applications by {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} or by [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot passwords]], then you will need to add it to a grant by editing {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>rpijho83m83cmua05sbgb4mqh1dcj2w</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402581</id>
      <parentid>5402579</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:39:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite $OAuth o [[$1|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando $GrantPermissions.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28333" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Information for coders only follows.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} o [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>60vuglmtw3w4rwlopyxhhjpozcllzpi</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402583</id>
      <parentid>5402581</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:40:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28289" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Technical&lt;/span&gt;'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} o [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>ilhb0htjjmcr3df33ek53003ho60lbo</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402585</id>
      <parentid>5402583</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:40:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Tecnica&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28231" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Tecnica'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for the 'autoconfirmed' group, see the other table below for more information&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} o [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>cww0q2livi1hjnu7pc8ivjqc24r1jwy</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402587</id>
      <parentid>5402585</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:41:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;utilizzato per il gruppo &quot;autoconfermato&quot;, si veda l'altra tabella qui sotto per maggiori informazioni&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28195" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Tecnica'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - utilizzato per il gruppo &quot;autoconfermato&quot;, si veda l'altra tabella qui sotto per maggiori informazioni
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|URL parameter]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&lt;/span&gt;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} o [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>5laog9cyv5mpz475ua3opdphb4sir0f</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402589</id>
      <parentid>5402587</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:46:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;[[$1|parametro URL]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28139" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Tecnica'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - utilizzato per il gruppo &quot;autoconfermato&quot;, si veda l'altra tabella qui sotto per maggiori informazioni
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|parametro URL]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;users who can edit sitewide CSS/JS.&lt;/span&gt;
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} o [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>sz6mqavuzcolaucq55gewz11mt21y7b</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402591</id>
      <parentid>5402589</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:46:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;utenti che possono modificare i CSS/JS del sito.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28096" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Tecnica'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - utilizzato per il gruppo &quot;autoconfermato&quot;, si veda l'altra tabella qui sotto per maggiori informazioni
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|parametro URL]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| utenti che possono modificare i CSS/JS del sito.
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From MW 1.12, you can create your own groups into which users are automatically promoted (as with autoconfirmed and emailconfirmed) using {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.&lt;/span&gt;
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} o [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>dnoq024w924p3alko9731z4kasj5gx5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402594</id>
      <parentid>5402591</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;A partire da MW 1.12, è possibile creare gruppi personalizzati in cui gli utenti vengono promossi automaticamente (come nel caso di autoconfirmed e emailconfirmed) utilizzando $AutoPromote.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28079" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Tecnica'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - utilizzato per il gruppo &quot;autoconfermato&quot;, si veda l'altra tabella qui sotto per maggiori informazioni
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|parametro URL]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| utenti che possono modificare i CSS/JS del sito.
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

A partire da MW 1.12, è possibile creare gruppi personalizzati in cui gli utenti vengono promossi automaticamente (come nel caso di autoconfirmed e emailconfirmed) utilizzando {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're adding a new right in core, for instance to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|control a new special page]], you are ''required'' to add it to the list of available rights in {{ll|Manual:PermissionManager.php|PermissionManager.php}}, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php example]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} o [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>7udwtbgn1f2d3xulz2edhxe3i4i2qeq</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402632</id>
      <parentid>5402594</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Se si aggiunge un nuovo permeso nel core, per esempio per [[$2|controllare una nuova pagina speciale]], è ''richiesto'' di aggiungerlo all'elenco dei diritti disponibili in $Utente, $1 ([esempio $url]).&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27992" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Tecnica'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - utilizzato per il gruppo &quot;autoconfermato&quot;, si veda l'altra tabella qui sotto per maggiori informazioni
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|parametro URL]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| utenti che possono modificare i CSS/JS del sito.
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

A partire da MW 1.12, è possibile creare gruppi personalizzati in cui gli utenti vengono promossi automaticamente (come nel caso di autoconfirmed e emailconfirmed) utilizzando {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.''

Se si aggiunge un nuovo permeso nel core, per esempio per [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|controllare una nuova pagina speciale]], è ''richiesto'' di aggiungerlo all'elenco dei diritti disponibili in $Utente, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([esempio https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php]).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|doing so in an extension}}, you instead need to use {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.&lt;/span&gt;

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} o [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>aqhoqbskxw7k5dlfa78xpm36ef579pb</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402637</id>
      <parentid>5402632</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:49:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Se {{$man|si opera in una estensione}}, è necessario utilizzare $AvailableRights.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27932" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Tecnica'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - utilizzato per il gruppo &quot;autoconfermato&quot;, si veda l'altra tabella qui sotto per maggiori informazioni
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|parametro URL]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;accounts with the ''bot'' right (intended for automated scripts).&lt;/span&gt;
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| utenti che possono modificare i CSS/JS del sito.
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

A partire da MW 1.12, è possibile creare gruppi personalizzati in cui gli utenti vengono promossi automaticamente (come nel caso di autoconfirmed e emailconfirmed) utilizzando {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.''

Se si aggiunge un nuovo permeso nel core, per esempio per [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|controllare una nuova pagina speciale]], è ''richiesto'' di aggiungerlo all'elenco dei diritti disponibili in $Utente, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([esempio https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php]).
Se {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|si opera in una estensione}}, è necessario utilizzare {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} o [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>qk19znjmj3s4lbnij4n9wk2uv0tyyrn</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402653</id>
      <parentid>5402637</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:51:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;account con il permesso ''bot'' (destinato agli script automatici).&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27878" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Tecnica'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - utilizzato per il gruppo &quot;autoconfermato&quot;, si veda l'altra tabella qui sotto per maggiori informazioni
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|parametro URL]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| account con il permesso ''bot'' (destinato agli script automatici).
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| utenti che possono modificare i CSS/JS del sito.
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

A partire da MW 1.12, è possibile creare gruppi personalizzati in cui gli utenti vengono promossi automaticamente (come nel caso di autoconfirmed e emailconfirmed) utilizzando {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.''

Se si aggiunge un nuovo permeso nel core, per esempio per [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|controllare una nuova pagina speciale]], è ''richiesto'' di aggiungerlo all'elenco dei diritti disponibili in $Utente, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([esempio https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php]).
Se {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|si opera in una estensione}}, è necessario utilizzare {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} o [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The right-* messages can be seen on [[Special:ListGroupRights]] and the action-* messages are used in a sentence like &quot;You do not have permission to ...&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>333sptimrb0yl4eplnypo1z3ecs98s5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402656</id>
      <parentid>5402653</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:51:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;I messaggi di permesso-* possono essere visualizzati in [[Special:ListGroupRights]] e i messaggi di azione-* sono usati in una frase come &quot;Non hai il permesso di ...&quot;.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27835" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Tecnica'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - utilizzato per il gruppo &quot;autoconfermato&quot;, si veda l'altra tabella qui sotto per maggiori informazioni
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|parametro URL]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| account con il permesso ''bot'' (destinato agli script automatici).
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| utenti che possono modificare i CSS/JS del sito.
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

A partire da MW 1.12, è possibile creare gruppi personalizzati in cui gli utenti vengono promossi automaticamente (come nel caso di autoconfirmed e emailconfirmed) utilizzando {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.''

Se si aggiunge un nuovo permeso nel core, per esempio per [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|controllare una nuova pagina speciale]], è ''richiesto'' di aggiungerlo all'elenco dei diritti disponibili in $Utente, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([esempio https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php]).
Se {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|si opera in una estensione}}, è necessario utilizzare {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} o [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
I messaggi di permesso-* possono essere visualizzati in [[Special:ListGroupRights]] e i messaggi di azione-* sono usati in una frase come &quot;Non hai il permesso di ...&quot;.

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>o4dvlfaby9ic3n2j99wpzwmoiu4nxgc</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402661</id>
      <parentid>5402656</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:52:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>typo</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27836" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita in maniera predefinita di un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Tecnica'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - utilizzato per il gruppo &quot;autoconfermato&quot;, si veda l'altra tabella qui sotto per maggiori informazioni
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|parametro URL]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| account con il permesso ''bot'' (destinato agli script automatici).
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| utenti che possono modificare i CSS/JS del sito.
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

A partire da MW 1.12, è possibile creare gruppi personalizzati in cui gli utenti vengono promossi automaticamente (come nel caso di autoconfirmed e emailconfirmed) utilizzando {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.''

Se si aggiunge un nuovo permesso nel core, per esempio per [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|controllare una nuova pagina speciale]], è ''richiesto'' di aggiungerlo all'elenco dei diritti disponibili in $Utente, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([esempio https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php]).
Se {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|si opera in una estensione}}, è necessario utilizzare {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} o [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
I messaggi di permesso-* possono essere visualizzati in [[Special:ListGroupRights]] e i messaggi di azione-* sono usati in una frase come &quot;Non hai il permesso di ...&quot;.

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>4tcz79lyeaw953rdk3vdp0sfyz0eu7i</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402669</id>
      <parentid>5402661</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:54:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>improvement</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27814" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita con un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Tecnica'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - utilizzato per il gruppo &quot;autoconfermato&quot;, si veda l'altra tabella qui sotto per maggiori informazioni
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|parametro URL]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| account con il permesso ''bot'' (destinato agli script automatici).
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| utenti che possono modificare i CSS/JS del sito.
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

A partire da MW 1.12, è possibile creare gruppi personalizzati in cui gli utenti vengono promossi automaticamente (come nel caso di autoconfirmed e emailconfirmed) utilizzando {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.''

Se si aggiunge un nuovo permesso nel core, per esempio per [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|controllare una nuova pagina speciale]], è ''richiesto'' di aggiungerlo all'elenco dei diritti disponibili in $Utente, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([esempio https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php]).
Se {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|si opera in una estensione}}, è necessario utilizzare {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} o [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
I messaggi di permesso-* possono essere visualizzati in [[Special:ListGroupRights]] e i messaggi di azione-* sono usati in una frase come &quot;Non hai il permesso di ...&quot;.

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Molte estensioni riguardanti con i permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>9tx3ydiaqxldsbr4sd96cft8e8wrnix</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402672</id>
      <parentid>5402669</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:58:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>improvement</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27803" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
I '''permessi utente''' sono abilitazioni (come la possibilità di modificare pagine o bloccare utenti) che possono essere assegnati a diversi '''gruppi di utenti'''.
MediaWiki viene fornito con un insieme predefinito di diritti e gruppi di utenti, ma questi possono essere personalizzati.
Questa pagina spiega i permessi e i gruppi predefiniti e come personalizzarli.

Per informazioni su come aggiungere e rimuovere singoli utenti wiki  dai gruppi, vedere {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} e {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}}.

== Cambiare i permessi utente ==
Un'installazione standard di MediaWiki assegna alcuni gruppi predefiniti (vedi in basso).
Puoi cambiare i permessi predefiniti modificando l'array {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} con la sintassi.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['group']['right'] = true /* o false */;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=In un'installazione predefinita {{phpi|$wgGroupPermissions}} sarà impostato in &lt;code&gt;includes/DefaultSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, ma ''non'' è presente in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;. Avrai bisogno di aggiungerlo in quel file.}}

Se un membro è in più gruppi, ottiene tutti i permessi da ciascuno dei gruppi in cui si trova.
Tutti gli utenti, inclusi gli utenti anonimi, sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'*'&lt;/code&gt;; tutti gli utenti registrati sono nel gruppo &lt;code&gt;'user'&lt;/code&gt;.
In aggiunta ai gruppi predefiniti, puoi creare nuovi gruppi arbitrariamente usando il medesimo array.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio disabiliterà la visualizzazione di ogni pagina non elencata in {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}, quindi la ri-abilita solo per gli utenti registrati:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['read'] = false;
# La riga seguente non è al momento necessaria, siccome è in quelle predefinite. Impostare '*' a false non disabilita i permessi per i gruppi che hanno quel permesso separatamente impostato a true!
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['read'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Questo esempio disabiliterà la modifica di tutte le pagine, poi le ri-abiliterà solo per gli utenti con un indirizzo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgEmailAuthentication|e-mail confermato]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disabilita per tutti.
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
# Disabilita anche per gli utenti: di default 'user' può modificare, anche se '*' non può farlo.
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
# Fa sì che gli utenti con un indirizzo e-mail confermato siano nel gruppo.
$wgAutopromote['emailconfirmed'] = APCOND_EMAILCONFIRMED;
# Nasconde il gruppo dalla lista dell'utente.
$wgImplicitGroups[] = 'emailconfirmed';
# Infine, imposta a true per il gruppo desiderato.
$wgGroupPermissions['emailconfirmed']['edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Creare un nuovo gruppo e assegnargli permessi ==

Puoi creare nuovi gruppi utente definendo i permessi al corrispettivo nome del gruppo in {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'&lt;nowiki/&gt;$1'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/code&gt;|''nome-gruppo''}} dove ''&lt;nome-gruppo&gt;'' è il nome attuale del gruppo.

Insieme all'aggiunta di permessi, dovresti creare queste tre pagine wiki popolandone i contenuti:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome di un membro del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-&amp;lt;group-name&gt;}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Nome della pagina del gruppo&lt;/code&gt;)

In maniera predefinita, i burocrati possono aggiungere o rimuovere utenti da qualsiasi gruppo.
In ogni caso, se stai usando {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}, potresti avere invece bisogno di personalizzare questi ultimi.

=== Esempi ===

Questo esempio creerà un gruppo &quot;projectmember&quot; arbitrario che può bloccare gli utenti e cancellare pagine, e i cui edit saranno invisibili di default nei registri delle modifiche recenti.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['bot'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['block'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['delete'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{note|1=il nome del gruppo non può contenere spazi, quindi usa &lt;code&gt;'gruppo-a-caso'&lt;/code&gt; o &lt;code&gt;'gruppo_a_caso'&lt;/code&gt; al posto di &lt;code&gt;'gruppo a caso'&lt;/code&gt;. Inoltre è raccomandato l'utilizzo di soli caratteri minuscolo per creare un gruppo. }}

In questo esempio, vorrai forse creare anche queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-projectmember-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Membro del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-projectmember}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Project:Membri del progetto&lt;/code&gt;)

Questo assicurerà che il gruppo sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot; dappertutto sull'interfaccia, e un membro sarà descritto come &quot;Membri del progetto&quot;, e il nome del gruppo collegherà alla pagina {{blue|Project:Membri del progetto}}.

Questo esempio disabilita l'accesso in scrittura (la modifica e creazione di pagine) in maniera predefinita, crea un gruppo chiamato &quot;Scrivere&quot;, e gli garantisce l'accesso in scrittura. Gli utenti possono essere aggiunti manualmente a questo gruppo tramite [[Special:UserRights]]:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['*']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['edit'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['user']['createpage'] = false;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['writer']['createpage'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In questo esempio, forse vorrai anche creare queste pagine:

* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittori&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Group-writer-member}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Scrittore&lt;/code&gt;)
* {{blue|MediaWiki:Grouppage-writer}} (contenuto: &lt;code&gt;Progetto:Scrivere&lt;/code&gt;)

== Rimuovere gruppo predefiniti ==
MediaWiki è fornita con un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.
La maggior parte di questi gruppi può essere rimosso eliminando la relativa chiave dell'array, in {{tmpl|0=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{#tag:span|$wgGroupPermissions|class=nv}}[ {{#tag:span|'{{^(}}$1{{)^}}'|class=s1}} ]&lt;/span&gt;|nome-gruppo}}.
Per dettagli vedi in basso.

=== Esempio ===
Questo esempio eliminerà completamente i burocrati.
È necessario assicurarsi che tutte e sei queste variabili siano eliminate per ogni gruppo di cui desideri sia rimosso dall'elenco in [[Special:ListGroupRights]]; in ogni caso, rimuovendo soltanto $wgGroupPermissions sarà sufficiente per rimuoverlo da [[Special:UserRights]].
Questo codice dovrebbe essere posto dopo qualsiasi riga &lt;code&gt;require_once&lt;/code&gt; che aggiunga estensioni come {{ll|Extension:Renameuser}} contenenti codice che dà ai burocrati dei permessi in maniera predefinita.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
unset( $wgGroupPermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRevokePermissions['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgAddGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgRemoveGroups['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsAddToSelf['bureaucrat'] );
unset( $wgGroupsRemoveFromSelf['bureaucrat'] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In alcune estensioni (Flow, Semantic MediaWiki, etc.), i permessi sono aggiunti durante la registrazione dell'estensione o in una funzione di registrazione. In questo caso, potrebbe essere necessario usare la funzione di registrazione nel LocalSettings.php per rimuovere alcuni gruppi predefiniti:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionFunctions[] = function() use ( &amp;$wgGroupPermissions ) {
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['oversight'] );
    unset( $wgGroupPermissions['flow-bot'] );
};
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Note sul gruppo chiamato &quot;user&quot; ===
Con il meccanismo soprastante, puoi rimuovere il gruppo amministratori, burocrati e bot, che - se utilizzati - possono essere assegnati attraverso il normale [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|sistema dei permessi utente]].
In ogni caso, è al momento impossibile rimuovere il gruppo &lt;code&gt;user&lt;/code&gt;.
Questo gruppo ''non'' è assegnato attraverso il solito sistema di permessi.
Al contrario, ogni utente autenticato è automaticamente membro di quel gruppo.
Questo è scalpito nel codice di MediaWiki ed al momento non può essere cambiato facilmente.

{{anchor|List_of_permissions}}
== Lista di permessi ==
I seguenti permessi utente sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se stai utilizzando una versione più vecchia, vai sul tuo wiki in &quot;[[Speciale:Versione]]&quot; e guarda se la tua versione è compresa in quelle nella colonna &quot;versioni&quot;.

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Permessi
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Gruppi utente che hanno questo permesso in maniera predefinita
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot; |'''Leggere'''
|-
|valign=&quot;top&quot;|read
|{{int|right-read}} - quando impostato a false, ignora per pagine specifiche con {{ll|Manual:$wgWhitelistRead|$wgWhitelistRead}}
----
{{Uploaded-files-access-restriction-info}}
| *, user
| [[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Modificare'''
|-
|applychangetags
|{{int|right-applychangetags}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|1.25+
|-
|autocreateaccount
|{{int|right-autocreateaccount}} - una versione più limitata di ''createaccount''
|—
|1.27+
|-
|createaccount
|{{int|right-createaccount}} - register / registration
|*, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|createpage
|{{int|right-createpage}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|createtalk
|{{int|right-createtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user
|[[rev:11973|1.6+]]
|-
|delete-redirect
|{{int|right-delete-redirect}} (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''delete'')
|—
|[[gerrit:559622|1.36+]]
|-
|edit
|{{int|right-edit}}
|*, user
|[[rev:9632|1.5+]]
|-
|editsemiprotected
|{{int|right-editsemiprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|1.22+
|-
|editprotected
|{{int|right-editprotected}} - senza protezione a cascata - requires the ''edit'' right
|sysop
|[[rev:32164|1.13+]]
|-
|minoredit
|{{int|right-minoredit}} - requires the ''edit'' right
|user
|[[rev:12359|1.6+]]
|-
|move
|{{int|right-move}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|move-categorypages
|{{int|right-move-categorypages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[gerrit:111096|1.25+]]
|-
|move-rootuserpages
|{{int|right-move-rootuserpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:41961|1.14+]]
|-
|move-subpages
|{{int|right-move-subpages}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:35213|1.13+]]
|-
|movefile
|{{int|right-movefile}} - richiede il permesso ''move'' e {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowImageMoving|$wgAllowImageMoving}} impostato a true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:45276|1.14+]]
|-
|reupload
|{{int|right-reupload}} - richiede il permesso ''upload''
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|reupload-own
|{{int|right-reupload-own}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (nota che non è necessario che il gruppo abbia già il permesso ''reupload'')
|—
|[[rev:21943|1.11+]]
|-
|reupload-shared
|{{int|right-reupload-shared}} - (se una è impostata) con file locali (richiede il permesso ''upload'')
|user, sysop
|[[rev:10906|1.6+]]
|-
|sendemail
|{{int|right-sendemail}}
|user
|[[rev:56962|1.16+]]
|-
|upload
|{{int|right-upload}} - richiede che ''edit'' a destra e {{ll|Manual:$wgEnableUploads|$wgEnableUploads}} siano true
|user, sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|upload_by_url
|{{int|right-upload_by_url}} - richiede il permesso ''upload'' (Prima di 1.20, era concesso ai ''sysops'')
|—
|[[rev:16162|1.8+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Gestione'''
|-
|bigdelete
|{{int|right-bigdelete}} (come determinato da {{ll|Manual:$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit|$wgDeleteRevisionsLimit}}) - richiede il permesso ''delete''
|sysop
|[[rev:29872|1.12+]]
|-
|block
|{{int|right-block}} - Le opzioni di blocco includono l'impossibilità di modificare e registrare nuovi account e il blocco automatico di altri utenti sullo stesso indirizzo IP
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|blockemail
|{{int|right-blockemail}} - permette di evitare l'uso dell'interfaccia [[Speciale:Emailuser]] quando si blocca - richiede il permesso di ''blocco''.
|sysop
|[[rev:22827|1.11+]]
|-
|browsearchive
|{{int|right-browsearchive}} - tramite [[Special:Undelete]] - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:32456|1.13+]]
|-
|changetags
|{{int|right-changetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|user
|1.25+
|-
|delete
|{{int|right-delete}} '''1.5–1.11:''' permette la cancellazione e il ripristino di pagine.&lt;br /&gt;'''1.12+:''' consente la cancellazione di pagine. Per il ripristino, c'è ora il permesso 'undelete', vedere sotto
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|deletedhistory
|{{int|right-deletedhistory}}
|sysop
|[[rev:12241|1.6+]]
|-
|deletedtext
|{{int|right-deletedtext}}
|sysop
|
|-
|deletelogentry
|{{int|right-deletelogentry}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;
|suppress
|[[gerrit:12889|1.20+]]
|-
|deleterevision
|{{int|right-deleterevision}} - 
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche '''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|editcontentmodel
|{{int|right-editcontentmodel}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:176201|1.23.7+]]
|-
|editinterface
|{{int|right-editinterface}} - contiene [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface|messaggi dell'interfaccia]]. Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto. - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|editmyoptions
|{{int|right-editmyoptions}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-editmyprivateinfo}} - nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyusercss
|{{int|right-editmyusercss}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso ''editusercss'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjs
|{{int|right-editmyuserjs}} - prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:67874|1.22+]]
|-
|editmyuserjsredirect
|{{int|right-editmyuserjsredirect}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjs'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|
|[[gerrit:502667|1.34+]]
|-
|editmyuserjson
|{{int|right-editmyuserjson}} (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''edituserjson'') - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|user
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|editmywatchlist
|{{int|right-editmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|editsitecss
|{{int|right-editsitecss}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejs
|{{int|right-editsitejs}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-
|editsitejson
|{{int|right-editsitejson}} - richiede il permesso ''editinterface''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:421121|1.32+]]
|-{{anchor|editusercss}}
|editusercss
|{{int|right-editusercss}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjs
|{{int|right-edituserjs}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|interface-admin
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|edituserjson
|{{int|right-edituserjson}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop, interface-admin
|[[gerrit:408940|1.31+]]
|-
|hideuser
|{{int|right-hideuser}} - Solo gli utenti con 1000 modifiche o meno possono essere eliminati per impostazione predefinita - richiede il permesso ''block''
Utilizzare {{wg|HideUserContribLimit}} per disattivare.
|suppress
|[[rev:20446|1.10+]]
|-
|markbotedits
|{{int|right-markbotedits}} - vedere [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]] - richiede il permesso ''rollback''
|sysop
|[[rev:27658|1.12+]]
|-
|mergehistory
|{{int|right-mergehistory}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:27823|1.12+]]
|-
|pagelang
|{{int|right-pagelang}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgPageLanguageUseDB|$wgPageLanguageUseDB}} deve essere ''true''
|—
|[[gerrit:135312|1.24+]]
|-
|patrol
|{{int|right-patrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|patrolmarks
|{{int|right-patrolmarks}}
|—
|[[rev:54153|1.16+]]
|-
|protect
|{{int|right-protect}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|rollback
|{{int|right-rollback}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppressionlog
|{{int|right-suppressionlog}}
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|suppressrevision
|{{int|right-suppressrevision}} - '''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision''' - richiede il permesso ''deleterevision''
|suppress
|[[rev:13224|1.6+]]
|-
|unblockself
|{{int|right-unblockself}} - Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore
|sysop
|[[rev:64228|1.17+]]
|-
|undelete
|{{int|right-undelete}} - richiede il permesso ''deletedhistory''
|sysop
|[[rev:28151|1.12+]]
|-
|userrights
|{{int|right-userrights}} - consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(*)Con {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups|$wgAddGroups}} e {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups|$wgRemoveGroups}} è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&lt;/small&gt;
|bureaucrat
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|userrights-interwiki
|{{int|right-userrights-interwiki}}
|—
|[[rev:28650|1.12+]]
|-
|viewmyprivateinfo
|{{int|right-viewmyprivateinfo}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67876|1.22+]]
|-
|viewmywatchlist
|{{int|right-viewmywatchlist}}
|*
|[[gerrit:67875|1.22+]]
|-
|viewsuppressed
|{{int|right-viewsuppressed}} - cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di ''suppressrevision'')
|suppress
|[[gerrit:139277|1.24+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Amministrazione'''
|-
|autopatrol
|{{int|right-autopatrol}} - {{ll|Manual:$wgUseRCPatrol|$wgUseRCPatrol}} deve essere ''true''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:18496|1.9+]]
|-
|deletechangetags
|{{int|right-deletechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato per estensioni
|sysop
|[[gerrit:286282|1.28+]]
|-
|import
|{{int|right-import}} - &quot;transwiki&quot; - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9498|1.5+]]
|-
|importupload
|{{int|right-importupload}} - Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|sysop
|[[rev:9499|1.5+]]
|-
|managechangetags
|{{int|right-managechangetags}} - attualmente non utilizzato da estensioni
|sysop
|1.25+
|-
|siteadmin
|{{int|right-siteadmin}} - che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione. (''non disponibile per impostazione predefinita'')
|—
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|unwatchedpages
|{{int|right-unwatchedpages}} - elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali
|sysop
|[[rev:12196|1.6+]]
|-
|{{hl3}} colspan=&quot;4&quot;|'''Tecnica'''
|-
|apihighlimits
|{{int|right-apihighlimits}}
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27949|1.12+]]
|-
|autoconfirmed
|{{int|right-autoconfirmed}} - utilizzato per il gruppo &quot;autoconfermato&quot;, si veda l'altra tabella qui sotto per maggiori informazioni
|autoconfirmed, bot, sysop
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
|{{int|right-bot}} - può essere visualizzato opzionalmente
|bot
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|ipblock-exempt
|{{int|right-ipblock-exempt}}
|sysop
|[[rev:18904|1.9+]]
|-
|nominornewtalk {{Anchor|nominornewtalk}}
|{{int|right-nominornewtalk}} - richiede il permesso ''minoredit''
|bot
|[[rev:17281|1.9+]]
|-
|noratelimit
|{{int|right-noratelimit}} - non influenzati da [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgRateLimits|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione {{ll|Manual:$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups|$wgRateLimitsExcludedGroups}} era usata a questo scopo'')
|sysop, bureaucrat
|[[rev:35908|1.13+]]
|-
|override-export-depth
|{{int|right-override-export-depth}}&lt;br /&gt;&lt;small&gt;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a [[Special:Export]]. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di {{ll|Manual:$wgExportMaxLinkDepth|$wgExportMaxLinkDepth}}, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&lt;/small&gt;
|—
|?
|-
|purge
|{{int|right-purge}} - [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:URL|parametro URL]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;
|user
|[[rev:19195|1.10+]]
|-
|suppressredirect
|{{int|right-suppressredirect}} - richiede il permesso ''move''
|bot, sysop
|[[rev:27774|1.12+]]
|-
|writeapi
|{{int|right-writeapi}} - richiede il permesso ''edit''
|*, user, bot
|[[rev:35399|1.13+]]
|}
{{Note|1=Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni. Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi). Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.}}

{{Anchor|List_of_groups}}

== Elenco dei gruppi ==
I seguenti gruppi sono disponibili nell'ultima versione di MediaWiki.
Se si utilizza una versione anteriore, alcuni di questi gruppi possono non essere attivati.

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!{{hl2}} | Gruppo
!{{hl2}} | Descrizione
!{{hl2}} | Permessi predefiniti
!{{hl2}} | Versioni
|-
| *
| tutti gli utenti (inclusi gli anonimi),
|createaccount, createpage, createtalk, edit, editmyoptions, editmyprivateinfo, editmywatchlist, read, viewmyprivateinfo, viewmywatchlist, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|user
| account registrati.
|applychangetags, changetags, createpage, createtalk, edit, editcontentmodel, editmyusercss, editmyuserjs, editmyuserjson, minoredit, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, purge, read, reupload, reupload-shared, sendemail, upload, writeapi
|
|-
|autoconfirmed
| account registrati con anzianità pari a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmAge|$wgAutoConfirmAge}} e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a {{ll|Manual:$wgAutoConfirmCount|$wgAutoConfirmCount}}.
|autoconfirmed, editsemiprotected
|[[rev:12207|1.6+]]
|-
|bot
| account con il permesso ''bot'' (destinato agli script automatici).
|autoconfirmed, autopatrol, apihighlimits, bot, editsemiprotected, nominornewtalk, suppressredirect, writeapi
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|sysop
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.
|apihighlimits, autoconfirmed, autopatrol, bigdelete, block, blockemail, browsearchive, createaccount, delete, deletedhistory, deletedtext, editinterface, editprotected, editsemiprotected, editsitejson, edituserjson, import, importupload, ipblock-exempt, managechangetags, markbotedits, mergehistory, move, move-categorypages, move-rootuserpages, move-subpages, movefile, noratelimit, patrol, protect, reupload, reupload-shared, rollback, suppressredirect, unblockself, undelete, unwatchedpages, upload
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|interface-admin
| utenti che possono modificare i CSS/JS del sito.
|editinterface, editsitecss, editsitejs, editsitejson, editusercss, edituserjs, edituserjson
|1.32+
|-
|bureaucrat
| utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.
|noratelimit, userrights
|[[rev:9367|1.5+]]
|-
|suppress
|
|deletelogentry, deleterevision, hideuser, suppressionlog, suppressrevision, viewsuppressed
|
|}

A partire da MW 1.12, è possibile creare gruppi personalizzati in cui gli utenti vengono promossi automaticamente (come nel caso di autoconfirmed e emailconfirmed) utilizzando {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote|$wgAutopromote}}.
È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.

== Permessi predefiniti ==

I permessi predefiniti sono indicati in {{ll|Manual:DefaultSettings.php|DefaultSettings.php}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Default values in HEAD version:
&lt;/div&gt; https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione {{MW stable branch number}}, sono disponibili qui: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/{{#invoke:Version|get|stable|git}}/includes/DefaultSettings.php
* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo {{phpi|User::getAllRights()}}.

{{anchor|Adding new rights}}
=== Aggiungere nuovi permessi ===
''Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.''

Se si aggiunge un nuovo permesso nel core, per esempio per [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Special pages|controllare una nuova pagina speciale]], è ''richiesto'' di aggiungerlo all'elenco dei diritti disponibili in $Utente, {{phpi|$coreRights}} ([esempio https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/c/mediawiki/core/+/559622/9/includes/Permissions/PermissionManager.php]).
Se {{ll|Manual:Developing extensions|si opera in una estensione}}, è necessario utilizzare {{ll|Manual:$wgAvailableRights|$wgAvailableRights}}.

Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGroupPermissions|$wgGroupPermissions}} descritto sopra.

Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite {{ll|Help:OAuth|OAuth}} o [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bot passwords|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando {{ll|Manual:$wgGrantPermissions|$wgGrantPermissions}}.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// create projectmember-powers right
$wgAvailableRights[] = 'projectmember-powers';

// add projectmember-powers to the projectmember-group
$wgGroupPermissions['projectmember']['projectmember-powers'] = true;

// add projectmember-powers to the 'basic' grant so we can use our projectmember powers over an API request
$wgGrantPermissions['basic']['projectmember-powers'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).
I messaggi di permesso-* possono essere visualizzati in [[Special:ListGroupRights]] e i messaggi di azione-* sono usati in una frase come &quot;Non hai il permesso di ...&quot;.

== Vedere anche ==
* [[Special:ListGroupRights]] – collegamenti a pagine di aiuto e potrebbero contenere permessi non ancora documentati
* {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}} – pagina di aiuto che descrive l'utilizzo dell'interfaccia Special:Userrights (per burocrati)
* {{ll|Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki}} – informazioni in merito alla gestione e all'assegnazione di gruppi utenti.
* {{ll|Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAutopromote}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgAddGroups}}, {{ll|Manual:$wgRemoveGroups}}
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}} – esempi
* {{ll|Manual:Establishing a hierarchy of bureaucrats}}
* {{ll|Category:User rights extensions}} – Estensioni collegate ai permessi utente

{{Log events}}

[[Category:Special Pages{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;source/&gt;</text>
      <sha1>gez51npa2ir6gcxq3am2437hyv5j092</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/49/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>811714</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402668</id>
      <parentid>2864565</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:54:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>improvement</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="63" xml:space="preserve">MediaWiki è fornita con un certo numero di gruppi predefiniti.</text>
      <sha1>ti7s3hn2zcz28kbdxg8wylonuaqjddz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Extension registration/116/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>814203</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402519</id>
      <parentid>2872616</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="131" xml:space="preserve">Für Erweiterungen, die Wikimedias [[$1|Continuous integration]] verwenden, müssen Abhängigkeiten auch zu $2 hinzugefügt werden.</text>
      <sha1>p9181191gj9wfhwmyo8xguiqhkwqsdu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>MediaWiki 1.30/de</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>814597</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403184</id>
      <parentid>5251174</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:43:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Die stabile Version 1.30.0 wurde am 12. Dezember 2017 veröffentlicht.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11035" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MWReleases}}
'''MediaWiki 1.30''' ist eine veraltete Veröffentlichung von MediaWiki.
Siehe die {{RELEASE-NOTES}}-Datei für eine vollständige Liste der Änderungen.
Es wurde auf Wikimedia Foundation Wikis durch inkrementelle &quot;wmf&quot;-Zweige ab 10. Mai 2016 eingesetzt.
Die stabile Version 1.30.0 wurde am 12. Dezember 2017 veröffentlicht.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Download the [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/1.30/ latest releases] or checkout the &lt;code&gt;{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch=REL1_30|text=REL1_30}}&lt;/code&gt; branch [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|in Git]] to follow this release.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{clear}}
{{MediaWiki Release navigation|1.30}}

=== Konfigurationsänderungen ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;C.UTF-8&quot; locale should be used for &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt;, if available, to avoid unexpected behavior when code uses locale-sensitive string comparisons. For example, the Scribunto extension considers &quot;bar&quot; &lt; &quot;Foo&quot; in most locales since it ignores case.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; now affects LC_ALL rather than only LC_CTYPE. See documentation of &lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; for details.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgShellLocale&lt;/code&gt; is now applied for all requests. &lt;code&gt;wfInitShellLocale()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated and a no-op, as it is no longer needed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgJobClasses&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names. This is intended for extensions that want control over the instantiation of their jobs, to allow for proper dependency injection.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;$wgResourceModules&lt;/code&gt; may now specify callback functions as an alternative to plain class names, using the 'factory' key in the module description array. This allows dependency injection to be used for ResourceLoader modules.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgExceptionHooks|$wgExceptionHooks}} has been removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* ([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgUsePigLatinVariant|$wgUsePigLatinVariant}} added (off by default).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit|$wgRangeContributionsCIDRLimit}} was introduced to control the size of IP ranges that can be queried at [[Special:Contributions]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== Neue Funktionen ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163562|T163562]]) Added the ability to search for contributions within an IP range at [[Special:Contributions]]. References to revisions made by IPs are stored in the {{ll|Manual:ip_changes table|ip_changes}} table to make querying for ranges more efficient.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) Output from &lt;code&gt;Parser::parse()&lt;/code&gt; will now be wrapped in a {{tag|div|open}} with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions::setWrapOutputClass()&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ChangeTagsAllowedAdd|ChangeTagsAllowedAdd]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook, enabling extensions to allow software- specific tags to be added by users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/ParserOptionsRegister|ParserOptionsRegister]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to register additional parser options.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T45547|T45547]]) Included Pig Latin, a language game in English, as a [[LanguageConverter]] variant. This allows English-speaking developers to develop and test LanguageConverter more easily. Pig Latin can be enabled by setting &lt;code&gt;$wgUsePigLatinVariant&lt;/code&gt; to true.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added the '&lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Hooks/RecentChangesPurgeRows|RecentChangesPurgeRows]]&lt;/code&gt;' hook to allow extensions to purge data that depends on the &lt;code&gt;recentchanges&lt;/code&gt; table.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added JS config values &lt;code&gt;wgDiffOldId&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;wgDiffNewId&lt;/code&gt; to the output of diff pages.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Änderungen an der Action API ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T37247|T37247]]) action=parse output will be wrapped in a {{tag|div|open}} with &lt;code&gt;class=&quot;mw-parser-output&quot;&lt;/code&gt; by default. This may be changed or disabled using the new '&lt;code&gt;wrapoutputclass&lt;/code&gt;' parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When &lt;code&gt;errorformat&lt;/code&gt; is not '&lt;code&gt;bc&lt;/code&gt;', abort reasons from &lt;code&gt;action=login&lt;/code&gt; will be formatted as specified by the error formatter parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt; can now handle arbitrary text, deleted revisions, and returning users and edit comments.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T164106|T164106]]) The '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotext&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdifftotextpst&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvdiffto&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvexpandtemplates&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvgeneratexml&lt;/code&gt;', '&lt;code&gt;rvparse&lt;/code&gt;', and '&lt;code&gt;rvprop=parsetree&lt;/code&gt;' parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=revisions&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated, as are the similarly named parameters to &lt;code&gt;prop=deletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;list=allrevisions&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;list=alldeletedrevisions&lt;/code&gt;. Use &lt;code&gt;action=compare&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;action=parse&lt;/code&gt;, or &lt;code&gt;action=expandtemplates&lt;/code&gt; instead.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Interne Änderungen an der Action API ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;ApiBase::getDescriptionMessage()&lt;/code&gt; and the &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot; messages are deprecated. The existing message should be split between &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-summary&lt;/code&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;code&gt;apihelp-*-extended-description&lt;/code&gt;&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T123931|T123931]]) Individual values of multi-valued parameters can now be marked as deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Sprachaktualisierungen ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Support for kbp (Kabɩyɛ / Kabiyè) was added.&lt;/span&gt;

=== Weitere Änderungen ===
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The use of an associative array for &lt;code&gt;$wgProxyList&lt;/code&gt;, where the IP address is in the key instead of the value, is deprecated (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' =&gt; 'value' ]&lt;/code&gt;). Please convert these arrays to indexed/sequential ones (''e.g.'' &lt;code&gt;[ '127.0.0.1' ]&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;mw.user.bucket&lt;/code&gt; (deprecated in 1.23) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::getServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;LoadBalancer::setServerInfo()&lt;/code&gt; are deprecated. There are no known callers.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;File::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;MediaHandler::getStreamHeaders()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;Title::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated. The new &lt;code&gt;Title::canHaveTalkPage()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::canTalk()&lt;/code&gt; was deprecated. The new &lt;code&gt;MWNamespace::hasTalkNamespace()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;ExtractThumbParameters&lt;/code&gt; hook (deprecated in 1.21) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::addParserOutputNoText&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;::getHeadLinks&lt;/code&gt; methods (both deprecated in 1.24) were removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;wfMemcKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wfGlobalCacheKey()&lt;/code&gt; were deprecated. &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeKey()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff::makeGlobalKey()&lt;/code&gt; should be used instead.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T146304|T146304]]) Preprocessor handling of LanguageConverter markup has been improved. As a result of the new uniform handling, '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;' may need to be escaped (for example, as '&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;-&lt;nowiki/&gt;{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;') where it occurs inside template arguments or wikilinks.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T163966|T163966]]) Page moves are now counted as edits for the purposes of autopromotion, ''i.e.'', they increment the &lt;code&gt;user_editcount&lt;/code&gt; field in the database.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Two new hooks, &lt;code&gt;LogEventsListLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;NewPagesLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, were added for manipulating Special:Log and Special:NewPages lines.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;OldChangesListRecentChangesLine&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyLineData&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;PageHistoryLineEnding&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;ContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;DeletedContributionsLineEnding&lt;/code&gt; hooks have an additional parameter, for manipulating HTML data attributes of RC/history lines. &lt;code&gt;EnhancedChangesListModifyBlockLineData&lt;/code&gt; can do that via the &lt;code&gt;$data['attribs']&lt;/code&gt; subarray.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;([[phab:T130632|T130632]]) The &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::enableTOC()&lt;/code&gt; method was removed.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;WikiPage::getParserOutput()&lt;/code&gt; will now throw an exception if passed ParserOptions that would pollute the parser cache. Callers should use &lt;code&gt;WikiPage::makeParserOptions()&lt;/code&gt; to create the &lt;code&gt;ParserOptions&lt;/code&gt; object and only change options that affect the parser cache key.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;Article::viewRedirect()&lt;/code&gt; is deprecated.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;DeprecatedGlobal&lt;/code&gt; no longer supports passing in a direct value, it requires a callable factory function or a class name.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;$parserMemc&lt;/code&gt; global, &lt;code&gt;wfGetParserCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt;, and &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::singleton()&lt;/code&gt; are all deprecated. The main &lt;code&gt;ParserCache&lt;/code&gt; instance should be obtained from &lt;code&gt;MediaWikiServices&lt;/code&gt; instead. Access to the underlying &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; is possible through the new &lt;code&gt;ParserCache::getCacheStorage()&lt;/code&gt; method.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;.mw-ui-constructive&lt;/code&gt; CSS class (deprecated in 1.27) was removed.&lt;/span&gt;

== Unterseiten ==
{{engine|MediaWiki 1.30|work=MediaWiki 1.30}}

{{subpages}}

[[Category:MediaWiki Releases{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>h2p43dywsynxopd8579yczjp67nzoxv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/zh</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>817855</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402208</id>
      <parentid>5371514</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="18113" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''参见[[Wikitech:PAWS]]以获取更多信息。''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This document provides a quick interactive overview of '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' using a ''notebook'' hosted on the [[wikitech:Help:Cloud Services Introduction|Wikimedia Cloud Services]] environment using [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: A Web Shell''')]].&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=注意PAWS终端仅支持在[[w:Chromium (web browser)#Other browsers based on Chromium|基于Chromium的浏览器]]中复制粘贴。 （Chrome，Opera、Safari和新的Microsoft Edge都可以。） 如果您使用其他浏览器，则只能尝试使用菜单（右键单击），或者您需要手动键入本演练中提到的命令。 您还可以使用内容命令创建一个bash文件，并在终端中调用&lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;。}}

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All notebooks and terminals in PAWS are subject to termination without notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You are encouraged to run your task on other places (such as [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) if your task lasts for more than hours.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== 创建维基媒体账户 ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To follow this walk-through, you only need a Wikipedia/Wikimedia account. Use [[Special:CreateAccount]] to create one.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once you have created an account, please visit https://test.wikipedia.org/ and check that your username appears in the top right corner &lt;small&gt;(this works around {{task|T120327}})&lt;/small&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

== 登录笔记本 ==

要启动托管笔记本，请访问https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub

单击“使用MediaWiki登录”，然后在要求批准“使用OAuth进行身份验证”时单击“允许”。
首次访问PAWS时，需要创建服务器。
单击绿色的“启动我的服务器”按钮。
新服务器等待几分钟才能启动是正常的。

完成后，您将被重定向到&lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/tree&lt;/nowiki&gt;这样的链接

== 启动终端 ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
要开始一个新的互动终端，
# 前往你的[https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home]
# 点击右侧的“新建”，然后
# 选择“终端”。
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
这将打开一个新窗口，其URL为&lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/terminals/1&lt;/nowiki&gt;，并带有Linux '$'提示符。
&lt;/div&gt;

此终端不是模拟器。它是一个真正的[[w:Bash (Unix shell)|bash shell]]，作为Docker容器中的真正安装的Linux一部分，因此您可以使用任何bash命令，并使用已安装的Linux上可用的任何命令。

要查看一些可用的命令，请使用&lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== 登录wiki ==
这将在服务器上建立您的帐户，并允许您从命令行登录。
以下命令应确认您可以登录testwiki。它使用OAuth，因此无需输入密码。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

您可以通过在[[w:Home_directory|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; 目录]](&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;)中创建名为''user-config.py''的文件并添加''mylang''和''family''变量：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== 创建一个页面 ==

要创建页面，请在终端中输入以下命令，将“&lt;username&gt;”替换为您的用户名，并在提示接受更改时按“Y”：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

您已完成编辑。在Web浏览器中打开&lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;查看更改。

您可以使用'-help'命令行选项阅读有关每个命令行脚本的更多信息。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== 获取页面 ==

使用“listpages”命令可以获取许多页面。

要获取您在上一章节中创建的页面的内容，请输入以下命令：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;现在，如果您前往[$url PAWS文件列表]，则应该可以找到已保存的页面。&lt;/span&gt;

==一个真实的脚本示例==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When a website used on Wikipedia changes its URL, the links on Wikipedia become outdated, and possible also [[w:WP:Dead links|dead links]] if the website doesn't redirect from the old URLs to the new URLs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) has changed their links, such as moving pages from &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
您可以在英语维基百科上找到旧URL的用法列表，网址为https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media
手动更新所有这些链接将非常耗时。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thankfully EB has maintained redirects from their old URLs to the new URLs, so this does not need to be fixed immediately.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For a simpler example, English Wikipedia currently contains links to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; instead of &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; i.e. a 'www.' subdomain is missing in the URL.
&lt;/div&gt;

英语维基百科目前有14个案例：https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Wikipedia in other language also have this problem.  e.g. there is one case on German Wikipedia: [[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In order to fix those links, we can use Pywikibot {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}} script.  In this demo we will use the '-simulate' argument to avoid writing to the wiki, as there are strict rules about [[w:WP:Bots|automated editing]] of English Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
First, let's list all of the pages which link to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now we check those pages actually have the literal URL in the page; i.e. they are not using a template.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

现在使用替换添加缺少的“www”。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In PAWS, and any terminal that supports color, the diff of changes will show the added &quot;www.&quot; in green text color, making it easier to find the proposed changes.
&lt;/div&gt;

== 安装Pywikibot ==

{{Warning|1=不要把密码写在服务器文件中，文件是公开的！}}

接下来我们将使用PAWS Python会话。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to your [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home PAWS home],
# click 'New' on the right hand side, and
# select 'Python 3'.
&lt;/div&gt;

这将打开一个新窗口。

在文本框中，输入以下内容，然后在“单元格”菜单中选择“运行”（或按shift + enter运行）。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

下面会出现一个新的文本框。运行以下命令以创建连接到https://test.wikipedia.org/的APISite对象：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Describe &quot;site&quot; by entering it into the new text box and selecting &quot;Run&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

它应该会显示

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

创建页面对象：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

通过运行检查它是否存在：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

它应该输出

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

在页面上显示文字：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

更改对象中的页面文本：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

将页面保存到维基：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

响应应该是：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

交互式Python 3笔记本允许许多行一起运行。 以上内容可以放在一个文本框和Run中

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

可以保存或下载交互式Python会话的日志以供将来参考。

==访问PAWS在线文档==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Pywikibot documentation may be found at https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/.  It is primarily sourced from [[w:docstring|docstrings]], which can be loaded in the interactive Python 3 notebook using the Python built-in function [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].
&lt;/div&gt;

例如，要查看上面save方法的参数，请运行以下任一方法：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

或

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== 编辑Pywikibot脚本 ==

Pywikibot库和脚本位于/srv/paws中，并且是只读的。无法在PAWS中修改已安装的Pywikibot库。

将脚本复制到PAWS主页后，可以进行修改脚本。

例如，要运行修改后的“checkimages.py”：

# 在终端中，输入&lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
# 在浏览器中，您可以编辑该文件。 編輯程式碼 -- 例如，在第1775行的&lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt;程式碼後，新增第1776行，將會輸出你的名字：&lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;
# 在编辑界面中，使用“文件”菜单并单击“保存”以保存修改。
# 在终端中，输入&lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate&lt;/code&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== 参见 ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
* 由一名使用者提供的[https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb PAWS備忘錄]（例如有關API和資料庫存取的內容）
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>fvx7ehnsi1qqi8x348r20w8vbiyq0h1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/uk</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>819619</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402206</id>
      <parentid>5371512</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22506" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''Див. [[Wikitech:PAWS]] для докладнішої інформації.''
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Цей документ надає швидкий інтерактивний огляд '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' із використанням ''notebook'', який розташований у середовищі лабораторій Вікімедіа та використовує [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: A Web Shell''')]].&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=Зауважте, що PAWS Terminal підтримує копіювання та вставку лише у [[:uk:Chromium#Вебоглядачі, засновані на Chromium|браузери на основі Chromium]] (Google Chrome, Opera, Safari та новий Microsoft Edge підходять.) Якщо Ви використовуєте інший браузер, ви можете спробувати лише контекстне меню (клацніть правою кнопкою миші) або вам треба вручну вводити команди, згадані в цьому проходженні. Ви також можете створити bash-файл зі вмістом команди та викликати в терміналі з &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.}}

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All notebooks and terminals in PAWS are subject to termination without notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You are encouraged to run your task on other places (such as [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) if your task lasts for more than hours.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== Створення облікового запису Вікімедіа ==

Для дотримання цього проходження Вам потрібний лише обліковий запис Вікіпедії чи Вікімедіа. Використовуйте [[Special:CreateAccount]] для створення такого.

Щойно Ви створили обліковий запис, будь ласка, відвідайте https://test.wikipedia.org/ та перевірте, що Ваше ім'я користувача з'явилося у верхньому правому кутку &lt;small&gt;(це працює навколо {{task|T120327}})&lt;/small&gt;.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

== Вхід до записника ==

Для запуску розміщеного записника ідіть до https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub

Натисніть «Увійти за допомогою MediaWiki», а потім «Дозволяю», коли попросять схвалити «Використовувати OAuth для автентифікації».
Під час першого доступу до PAWS Вам необхідно створити сервер.
Натисніть зелену кнопку «Запустити мій Сервер».
Нормально почекати кілька хвилин, поки новий сервер запуститься.

Щойно це завершиться, Вас буде переспрямовано до URL на кшталт &lt;nowiki&gt;https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/user/&lt;username&gt;/lab&lt;/nowiki&gt;

== Запуск терміналу ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Для запуску нового інтерактивного терміналу,
# Ідіть до свого [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ дому PAWS]
# натисніть «Новий» праворуч, і
# виберіть «Термінал».
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Це відкриє нове вікно з URL $paws та запитом Linux «$».
&lt;/div&gt;

Цей термінал не є емулятором. Це справжня [[:uk:bash|оболонка bash]] як частина справжньої інсталяції Linux, яка сидить на [[:uk:Docker|докерному контейнері]], то ж Ви можете використовувати будь-яку команду bash і використовувати будь-які команди, доступні на Linux, які було встановлено.

Щоб побачити деякі доступні команди, використовуйте &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== Вхід до Вікіпедії ==
Це встановить Ваш обліковий запис на сервері та дозволить Вам входити з командного рядка.
Наступна команда повинна підтвердити, що Ви входите до тестової Вікіпедії. Вона використовує OAuth, то ж немає необхідності вводити пароль.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ви можете під'єднати pywikibot до різних Вікіпедій шляхом створення файлу під назвою ''user-config.py'' у своїй [[w:Home_directory|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; папці]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) та додавання змінних ''mylang'' і ''family'':

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Створення сторінки ==

Для створення сторінки введіть наступну команду в терміналі, замінивши «&amp;lt;username&gt;» своїм іменем користувача та натиснувши «Y» при запиті на підтвердження Ваших змін:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ви відредагували Вікіпедію. Перегляньте свої зміни відкриттям &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; у своєму веб-браузері.

Ви можете прочитати більше про кожен із цих сценаріїв командного рядка за допомогою опції «h» командного рядка.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Завантаження сторінки ==

Завантаження багатьох сторінок досягається командою «listpages».

Для отримання вмісту створеної Вами сторінки в попередньому розділі введіть наступну команду:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Тепер, якщо Ви підете до свого [$url списку файлів PAWS], збережена сторінка повинна існувати.&lt;/span&gt;

== Приклад реального скрипту ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When a website used on Wikipedia changes its URL, the links on Wikipedia become outdated, and possible also [[w:WP:Dead links|dead links]] if the website doesn't redirect from the old URLs to the new URLs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) has changed their links, such as moving pages from &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can find the list of usages of the old URL on English Wikipedia at [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updating all those links manually will be very time consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thankfully EB has maintained redirects from their old URLs to the new URLs, so this does not need to be fixed immediately.&lt;/span&gt;

Для простішого прикладу Англійська Вікіпедія наразі містить посилання до &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; замість &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; тобто піддомен «www.» відсутній у цьому URL.

Наразі існує 14 cases в Англійській Вікіпедії: [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]

Вікіпедія іншою мовою також має цю проблему. Наприклад, один case в Німецькій Вікіпедії: [[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In order to fix those links, we can use Pywikibot {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}} script.  In this demo we will use the '-simulate' argument to avoid writing to the wiki, as there are strict rules about [[w:WP:Bots|automated editing]] of English Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Спочатку давайте перелічимо всі сторінки, що посилаються на &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Тепер ми перевіримо ті сторінки, що дійсно мають літерал URL на сторінці, тобто вони не використовують шаблон.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Тепер використаємо заміну для додавання пропущеного «www.»

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

У PAWS і будь-якому терміналі з підтримкою кольору різниця змін показуватиме додавання «www.» зеленим кольором тексту, спрощуючи пошук пропонованих змін.

== Всередині Pywikibot ==

{{Warning|1=Не пишіть паролі у файлах серверу, файли публічні!}}

Далі ми використовуватимемо сеанс PAWS Python.

# Ідіть до свого [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home дому PAWS],
# натисніть «Новий» праворуч, і
# виберіть «Python 3».

Це відкриє нове вікно.

У текстовому полі введіть наступне та в меню Комірка виберіть «Запуск» (або натисніть Shift+Enter для запуску).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Нове текстове вікно з'явиться нижче. Запустіть наступне для створення об'єкту APISite, підключеного до https://test.wikipedia.org/:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Опишіть «сайт» введенням його в нове текстове вікно та виберіть «Запуск».

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Повинно показатися

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

Створено об'єкт сторінки:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Перевірте його існування запуском:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Повинно вивестись

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

Показався текст на сторінці:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Зміна тексту сторінки в об'єкті:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Збереження сторінки на Вікіпедію:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Відгук повинен бути:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Інтерактивний записник Python 3 дозволяє запускати багато рядків разом. Вони повинні бути в одному текстовому полі та Запущені

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Журнал Вашого інтерактивного сеансу Python може бут збережений або завантажений для майбутніх посилань.

== Доступ до онлайн-документації у PAWS ==

Документація Pywikibot може бути знайдена на https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/. Вона процитована переважно з [[w:docstring|docstrings]], який можна завантажити в інтерактивний записник Python 3, використовуючи вбудовану функцію Python [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].

Наприклад, подивимось аргументи вищезгаданого методу збереження, запустивши:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

або

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Редагування скриптів Pywikibot ==

Бібліотека та сценарії Pywikibot розташовані в /srv/paws і доступні лише для читання. Встановлена бібліотека Pywikibot не може змінюватися у PAWS.

Скрипти можуть змінюватися після їх копіювання до свого дому PAWS.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to run a modified &quot;checkimages.py&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the browser, you can edit the file.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit the code -- for instance, just after the &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; code on line 1775, add a new line 1776 that will print out your name: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the editing interface, use the File menu and click Save to save your modifications.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== Див. також ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb PAWS cheatsheet] одного користувача (наприклад, про API та доступ до баз даних)
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>s2mvxty6t8g0xrkqf2q4fy9msa775e0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/da</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>830335</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402148</id>
      <parentid>4919117</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:36:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8455" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since 2017, {{ll|VisualEditor}} provides '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' (visual difference displays).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are available in two places in the interface: when previewing changes to the document before the user saves the page, and (as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta feature]]) within the standard MediaWiki diff display, accessed from the history page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In both cases, the visual diff shows up alongside the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|traditional two-column wikitext diff]], and the user can toggle between the two displays.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diffs have two main advantages over wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first is that editors can directly see the changes they and others have made without needing to understand [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitext]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is particularly helpful when looking at changes to graphical structures such as tables; for example, if an edit deletes a column from a table, the wikitext diff for it would be hard to understand, while the visual diff would be immediately obvious.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The second is that the technology can be used to more accurately represent the change to the reader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if an edit swapped two paragraphs (with or without changes to the paragraphs), the visual diff will identify that this is what occurred, while a wikitext diff makes it appear that a paragraph was deleted and an entirely new paragraph was added.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== On regular diff pages ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of the examples and screenshots below are about using visual diffs during page previews when editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, VisualEditor's visual diffs can also be used on regular diff pages, on any wiki that has VisualEditor installed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can see an example of it in use on the English-language Wikipedia [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|here]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For wikis that have VisualEditor, there are several ways to activate this visual diff display:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If your wiki has a &quot;Beta features&quot; tab within Special:Preferences, and you want to make visual diffs an &quot;opt-in&quot; feature for users, you can add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* As seen in the Wikipedia example linked above, the visual diff mode can also be activated by simply adding &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; to the URL of a diff page.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Sådan fungerer det ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Skærmbilleder der viser nogle ændringer til en artikel. De fleste ændringer er belyst med tekst formatering.|left|thumb|300px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you are finished editing the page, type your edit summary and then choose &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In visual mode, you will see additions, removals, new links, and formatting highlighted.  Other changes, such as changing the size of an image, are described in notes on the side.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Toggle button showing visual and wikitext options; visual option is selected.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|220x220px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the toggle button to switch between visual and wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=Skærmbillede der viser de samme ændringer, i to-kolonne wikitekst forskels visningen.|left|thumb|245x245px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The wikitext diff is the same diff tool that is used in the wikitext editors and in the page history.&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{clr}}
== Eksempler ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Rich text edits&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Paragraph move with subtle vandalism&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff (2017).  This feature was added to the wikitext diff engine in 2018; see [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Table column removed&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Text, formatting and list changes&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insert new multimedia (sheet music)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Teknologi brugt ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thalia Chan, Unifying editing and visual diffs, Wikimania 2017&lt;/span&gt;]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Nuværende begrænsninger ==
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No notices for changes to &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, such as categories or TOC keywords.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Has issues with complex changes to tables.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unavailable on certain special pages:&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Undo &quot;diff&quot; pages.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit conflict pages&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== History ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This feature has been available as the first diff tool in the desktop VisualEditor from the 1.31.0-wmf-20 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 6 February 2018).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before that, it was a secondary tool from the 1.29.0-wmf-17 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 21 March 2017).&lt;/span&gt;

== Se også ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Fodnoter ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>iackmlih8p7cjybatigj5e7kgnocxeo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/63/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>831496</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402736</id>
      <parentid>2932604</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:10:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Android]]アプリ版のエディター</text>
      <sha1>q6un0eo6xxffksptlptcdcmb7glxl01</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/67/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>831499</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402714</id>
      <parentid>2932600</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:06:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="40" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|iOS]]アプリ版のエディター</text>
      <sha1>38bepvkcb6nw4fc1rir4cg5z7fqv27a</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:PD Help Page/Page display title/th</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>831703</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401671</id>
      <parentid>5396743</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T17:37:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>202.62.102.233</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="116" xml:space="preserve">แม่แบบ:ประกาศหน้าช่วยเห ลือ (สาธารณสมบัติ)</text>
      <sha1>ody97r2u1uzdwcuawbdk9dnaxnw64f3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/vi</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>833270</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402629</id>
      <parentid>4578060</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4098" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Thảo luận Cấu trúc (trước đây có tên là Flow) là một [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|dự án]] của nhóm Cộng tác tại Quỹ Wikimedia để xây dựng một hệ thống thảo luận và cộng tác hiện đại cho các dự án Wikimedia.

== Xem nhanh ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|Thảo luận Cấu trúc trông như thế nào - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Hãy dùng thử!]]]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Chỉ trong một trang, bạn sẽ biết lý do tại sao chúng tôi lại tạo nên Thảo luận Cấu trúc, và cách sử dụng]]''': 
* [[$basics|cơ bản về cách soạn thảo]], 
* [[$post|gửi câu trả lời]] (đến một thảo luận chung hoặc gửi đến một cá nhân trong một thảo luận chung), 
* [[$create|tạo một cuộc thảo luận]], 
* [[$watch|theo dõi một đề tài hoặc toàn bộ bảng tin]], 
* [[$notifications|nhận thông báo]],
* [[$browse|xem và lưu trữ các chủ đề]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Thảo luận Cấu trúc có một số thuật ngữ. Chúng được định nghĩa trong '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|Danh sách Thuật ngữ]]'''.

Thảo luận Cấu trúc bị lỗi khi sử dụng? Vui lòng kiểm tra '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|xem bạn có tự sửa được lỗi đó không]]'''.

== Công cụ Nâng cao ==

Hiện có sẵn một số công cụ nâng cao với mục đích chuyên biệt. Chúng được nhóm lại theo các chủ đề sau:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Kích hoạt}}
:Điều gì sẽ xảy ra khi kích hoạt Thảo luận Cấu trúc trên một trang?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Đề tài}}
:Lọc đề tài, Sửa đề tài/tin nhắn, Tóm lược đề tài, Giải quyết đề tài
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Liên kết thường trực}}
:Làm cách nào để tạo liên kết dẫn đến chủ đề
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Thông báo và danh sách theo dõi}}
:Các thông báo bạn sẽ nhận và những nội dung khác nhau trong danh sách theo dõi
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Lịch sử}}
:Hệ thống lịch sử hoạt động như thế nào
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Quản trị}}
:Ẩn, Xóa, Xóa hẳn chủ đề
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Tải trước}}
:Tải trước nội dung trong một cuộc hội thoại Thảo luận Cấu trúc mới
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Phím tắt}}
:Các phím tắt để dùng trong chế độ sửa đổi trực quan.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Tất cả các tài liệu hướng dẫn trên một trang.}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>ha9sck4cdetxclkbnr656s0b9ac3ktq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Editor/pt-br</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>833360</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402696</id>
      <parentid>5370850</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7134" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Você pode estar procurando por:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Current ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Current editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
!Ferramenta de edição
!Capturas de tela
!Ano
!Plataforma
!Notas
|-
|o editor padrão do MediaWiki, que é um HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Captura de tela da textarea HTML|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Área de Trabalho e celular
|Isso não tem uma barra de ferramentas. Pode ser visto quando o JavaScript está desativado e/ou quando ambos &quot;$1&quot; e &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; estão desativados nas [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extensão:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Uma captura de tela do WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Área de Trabalho
|Isso pode ser visto quando &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; está ativado [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor Visual]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Captura de tela mostrando o modo visual do Editor Visual|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Área de Trabalho e celular
|Um sistema de edição de texto rico
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Editor wikitexto 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Captura de tela do modo de wikitexto interno do Editor Visual|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Área de Trabalho
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Página de Revisão]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Área de Trabalho
|Usado no [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Captura de tela do wickEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Área de Trabalho
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An entirely volunteer-supported wikitext editor.&lt;/span&gt; Isso geralmente é executado como um script de gadget ou usuário, mas é executado como uma extensão em alguns wikis que não são da Wikimedia.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|Editor de Códigos]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Captura de tela do editor de código|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Área de Trabalho
|Isso é usado para editar JavaScript e outras páginas de código.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor wikitext atual do MobileFrontend&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Captura de tela da edição do wikitexto na Web para dispositivos móveis|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobile
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Tradutor de conteúdo]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Captura de tela do editor do Tradutor de conteúdo|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Área de Trabalho
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Discussões Estruturadas]] (anteriormente conhecido como Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Captura de tela de um comentário e o início de uma resposta em discussões estruturadas|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Área de Trabalho e celular
|As discussões estruturadas suportam o wikitexto e os modos visuais.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor no aplicativo [[$android-faq|Android]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Captura de tela da interface de edição em um telefone Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor no aplicativo [[$ios-faq|iOS]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Captura de tela da interface de edição em um iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|editor [[Extension:TemplateData|Dados da Predefinição]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Área de Trabalho
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Editor de listagem do Wikivoyage]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Área de Trabalho
|Ferramenta de edição especializada em JavaScript para inserir um dos vários modelos no Wikivoyage
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Former ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Former editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
|-
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing tool&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Year&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Platform&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notes&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|O editor “clássico” de JavaScript de 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Captura de tela do editor wikitexto 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Área de Trabalho
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Isso pode ser visto quando &quot;$1&quot; está habilitado, mas &quot;$2&quot; está desabilitado em [[Special:Preferences]]. '''Este editor é [[phab:T30856|planejado para ser removido]] no [[MediaWiki 1.33]].'''&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A similar toolbar is available as a volunteer-supported local gadget at some wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|Editor wikitext original do MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Mobile
|Este foi um conjunto de modificações específicas para dispositivos móveis ao editor wikitexto de área de trabalho 2003. Não mais implantado.
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>n4o4tlv0wuuakz0ktqjn0q7q7saqm0s</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402717</id>
      <parentid>5402696</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:07:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7127" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Você pode estar procurando por:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Current ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Current editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
!Ferramenta de edição
!Capturas de tela
!Ano
!Plataforma
!Notas
|-
|o editor padrão do MediaWiki, que é um HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Captura de tela da textarea HTML|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Área de Trabalho e celular
|Isso não tem uma barra de ferramentas. Pode ser visto quando o JavaScript está desativado e/ou quando ambos &quot;$1&quot; e &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; estão desativados nas [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extensão:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Uma captura de tela do WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Área de Trabalho
|Isso pode ser visto quando &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; está ativado [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor Visual]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Captura de tela mostrando o modo visual do Editor Visual|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Área de Trabalho e celular
|Um sistema de edição de texto rico
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Editor wikitexto 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Captura de tela do modo de wikitexto interno do Editor Visual|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Área de Trabalho
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Página de Revisão]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Área de Trabalho
|Usado no [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Captura de tela do wickEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Área de Trabalho
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An entirely volunteer-supported wikitext editor.&lt;/span&gt; Isso geralmente é executado como um script de gadget ou usuário, mas é executado como uma extensão em alguns wikis que não são da Wikimedia.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|Editor de Códigos]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Captura de tela do editor de código|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Área de Trabalho
|Isso é usado para editar JavaScript e outras páginas de código.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor wikitext atual do MobileFrontend&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Captura de tela da edição do wikitexto na Web para dispositivos móveis|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobile
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Tradutor de conteúdo]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Captura de tela do editor do Tradutor de conteúdo|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Área de Trabalho
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Discussões Estruturadas]] (anteriormente conhecido como Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Captura de tela de um comentário e o início de uma resposta em discussões estruturadas|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Área de Trabalho e celular
|As discussões estruturadas suportam o wikitexto e os modos visuais.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor no aplicativo [[$android-faq|Android]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Captura de tela da interface de edição em um telefone Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|Editor no aplicativo [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Captura de tela da interface de edição em um iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|editor [[Extension:TemplateData|Dados da Predefinição]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Área de Trabalho
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Editor de listagem do Wikivoyage]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Área de Trabalho
|Ferramenta de edição especializada em JavaScript para inserir um dos vários modelos no Wikivoyage
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Former ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Former editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
|-
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing tool&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Year&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Platform&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notes&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|O editor “clássico” de JavaScript de 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Captura de tela do editor wikitexto 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Área de Trabalho
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Isso pode ser visto quando &quot;$1&quot; está habilitado, mas &quot;$2&quot; está desabilitado em [[Special:Preferences]]. '''Este editor é [[phab:T30856|planejado para ser removido]] no [[MediaWiki 1.33]].'''&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A similar toolbar is available as a volunteer-supported local gadget at some wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|Editor wikitext original do MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Mobile
|Este foi um conjunto de modificações específicas para dispositivos móveis ao editor wikitexto de área de trabalho 2003. Não mais implantado.
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>9wfs5tkz4jgt1iszarorx57yrybps1y</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402739</id>
      <parentid>5402717</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:10:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7120" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Você pode estar procurando por:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Current ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Current editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
!Ferramenta de edição
!Capturas de tela
!Ano
!Plataforma
!Notas
|-
|o editor padrão do MediaWiki, que é um HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Captura de tela da textarea HTML|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Área de Trabalho e celular
|Isso não tem uma barra de ferramentas. Pode ser visto quando o JavaScript está desativado e/ou quando ambos &quot;$1&quot; e &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; estão desativados nas [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extensão:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Uma captura de tela do WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Área de Trabalho
|Isso pode ser visto quando &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; está ativado [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor Visual]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Captura de tela mostrando o modo visual do Editor Visual|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Área de Trabalho e celular
|Um sistema de edição de texto rico
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Editor wikitexto 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Captura de tela do modo de wikitexto interno do Editor Visual|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Área de Trabalho
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Página de Revisão]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Área de Trabalho
|Usado no [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Captura de tela do wickEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Área de Trabalho
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An entirely volunteer-supported wikitext editor.&lt;/span&gt; Isso geralmente é executado como um script de gadget ou usuário, mas é executado como uma extensão em alguns wikis que não são da Wikimedia.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|Editor de Códigos]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Captura de tela do editor de código|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Área de Trabalho
|Isso é usado para editar JavaScript e outras páginas de código.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor wikitext atual do MobileFrontend&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Captura de tela da edição do wikitexto na Web para dispositivos móveis|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobile
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Tradutor de conteúdo]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Captura de tela do editor do Tradutor de conteúdo|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Área de Trabalho
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Discussões Estruturadas]] (anteriormente conhecido como Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Captura de tela de um comentário e o início de uma resposta em discussões estruturadas|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Área de Trabalho e celular
|As discussões estruturadas suportam o wikitexto e os modos visuais.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|Editor no aplicativo [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Android FAQ|Android]]
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Captura de tela da interface de edição em um telefone Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|Editor no aplicativo [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Captura de tela da interface de edição em um iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|editor [[Extension:TemplateData|Dados da Predefinição]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Área de Trabalho
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Editor de listagem do Wikivoyage]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Área de Trabalho
|Ferramenta de edição especializada em JavaScript para inserir um dos vários modelos no Wikivoyage
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Former ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Former editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
|-
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing tool&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Year&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Platform&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notes&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|O editor “clássico” de JavaScript de 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Captura de tela do editor wikitexto 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Área de Trabalho
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Isso pode ser visto quando &quot;$1&quot; está habilitado, mas &quot;$2&quot; está desabilitado em [[Special:Preferences]]. '''Este editor é [[phab:T30856|planejado para ser removido]] no [[MediaWiki 1.33]].'''&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A similar toolbar is available as a volunteer-supported local gadget at some wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|Editor wikitext original do MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Mobile
|Este foi um conjunto de modificações específicas para dispositivos móveis ao editor wikitexto de área de trabalho 2003. Não mais implantado.
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>5a7bv82pn1t6go1bl0wldm42fd3o3wu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/63/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>833429</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402738</id>
      <parentid>2939773</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:10:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="35" xml:space="preserve">Editor no aplicativo [[$1|Android]]</text>
      <sha1>p6x6xkux5idd6kwjke4sjyr52h9ej7s</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/67/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>833430</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402716</id>
      <parentid>2939775</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:07:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="31" xml:space="preserve">Editor no aplicativo [[$1|iOS]]</text>
      <sha1>qeyttzsvis4a3l1tncyh5q8999mktw7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/te</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>841740</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402270</id>
      <parentid>5400761</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14137" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

భాషలు
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Date format and time offset ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>m5dje32yg77gs53x6w32g14dmancvbo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/63/hu</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>847783</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402732</id>
      <parentid>2988937</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:10:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="51" xml:space="preserve">Szerkesztő az [[$1|androidos]] mobilalkalmazásban</text>
      <sha1>jnoa2ukpkqgq5ryy0zac9covp17pdtt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/67/hu</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>847786</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402710</id>
      <parentid>2988943</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:06:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="48" xml:space="preserve">Szerkesztő az [[$1|iOS]]-es mobilalkalmazásban</text>
      <sha1>4zziv68ho0wu2yjthpg9oq1glzkdyuy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Phabricator/FAQ/da</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>850259</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402800</id>
      <parentid>5200808</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:57:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16219" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{historical|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Content on this page was written before starting the [[Phabricator/Migration|migration to Phabricator]] in November 2014.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== General ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Project management tools review}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Why migrating to Phabricator? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

Se {{ll|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Which parts of the infrastructure will get migrated? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main focus is on Bugzilla, Gerrit, Trello, Mingle, RT (but not necessarily limited to them).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also see [[Special:MyLanguage/Project management tools/Review#Scope|Project management tools/Review#Scope]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Except for Phabricator's wiki functionality which would be disabled, we would like to migrate fully to Phabricator instead of piecemeal.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Is there a list of known deficiencies of / known issues with Phabricator?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Testers have reported some of the regressions and missing functionalities that users will experience after the migration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some of them are listed on top of the following tickets:&lt;/span&gt;
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T30] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T23] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T22] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla|comparison between Phabricator and Bugzilla is available]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;onlyinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Is Phabricator easy to use?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator is explicitly not designed for newbies.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;«Phabricator is primarily targeted at software professionals and other professionals with adjacent responsibilities (like project management and operations).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Particularly, we assume users are proficient computer users and familiar with software development concepts.»&lt;/span&gt;
[https://secure.phabricator.com/book/phabcontrib/article/feature_requests/#target-audiences]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How can I help? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator#Get involved|Phabricator#Get involved]].
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/onlyinclude&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== What is the current amount of work maintaining Bugzilla/Gerrit/Mingle/Trello sync tools? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[wikitech:Bingle|Bingle and Bugello]] synchronize some aspects of tickets between Bugzilla and Mingle/Trello, but [https://lists.wikimedia.org/pipermail/teampractices/2013-December/000202.html functionality is limited and ticket statuses between tools can easily get out of sync] (also see [https://github.com/wikimedia/bingle/issues list of open Bingle issues]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Arthur should be able to elaborate on the amount of maintenance work required.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gerrit's [https://gerrit.googlesource.com/plugins/hooks-bugzilla/ hooks-bugzilla] plugin does not require maintenance but has limitations ([https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=52167 1], [https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=53084 2]) which are not easy to solve.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How would the migration happen? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bugzilla/RT/Gerrit tickets, projects, user accounts, patchsets, access settings, etc. would have to be moved into Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
([https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related upstream ticket&lt;/span&gt;])
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The switching costs are not clear yet; Your help is welcome to evaluate them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A clear cut for at least one tool (Bugzilla) seems preferable in order to not continue running all to-be-replaced systems plus yet another one (Phabricator).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== When would the migration happen? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/Migration Timeline|Phabricator/Migration Timeline]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== What would that mean for me? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;At some point current infrastructure tools (see above) would be replaced by Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator has a different user interface and some changes in workflow, compared to the current setup.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the long run, things will get less complicated because everything is in one tool; there will be more transparency and efficiency because discussions are more centralized and in one tool instead of several tools.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As different development teams use different tools with different needs (reporters, developers, product managers, scrum masters, ...), you want to play with the [http://fab.wmflabs.org/ Labs instance of Phabricator] to see if it fits your needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See section &quot;How can I help?&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Will external links/URLs break? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We will try to minimize broken links by redirecting [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T40 Bugzilla] (please see [[Phabricator/versus_Bugzilla#Bugzilla_URLs_and_their_redirects|Bugzilla URLs and their redirects]]) and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T41 RT] tickets to Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is still to be evaluated whether we can also easily redirect Gerrit changesets.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Obviously, documentation about [[Bug management|Bug management/Bugzilla]] (see [[phab:T206|T206]]), [[Gerrit|Gerrit]] or [[wikitech:RT|RT]] will need updating.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How flexible is Phabricator when restricting access to certain tickets, or tickets in certain products (e.g. &quot;Security&quot;)? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T50 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related task&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does Phabricator provide statistics, metrics, charts? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, Phabricator offers [[phab:maniphest/report/|Reports by User and by Project]] and [[phab:maniphest/report/burn/|Burnup Rate]] (logging in might be required).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Burndown charts for projects are available via the custom Sprint extension (see [[phab:T153|T153]] and [[phab:T1322|T1322]]), to be superseded by [[phab:project/profile/1266/|Phragile]] in the future.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[phab:fact/|Charts]] are currently not enabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T28 related task] about metrics in general.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does any other FLOSS project use Phabricator? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
FLOSS projects using Phabricator include [https://reviews.llvm.org/ LLVM], [https://developer.blender.org/ Blender], and [https://secure.phabricator.com/ Phabricator itself].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a [[w:Phabricator#Users|list of projects on English Wikipedia]] but most are proprietary and/or small.&lt;/span&gt;
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T192 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Facebook's install is very large&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Did anyone else migrate to Phabricator as we would? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No, this is a way that nobody has walked before.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Focusing on like-minded projects: maybe Blender did, in late 2013 (but from SVN, Trac and Trello); however no detailed report available yet[https://code.blender.org/2013/11/new-development-infrastructure/] and it's at least [https://www.openhub.net/p/blender one order of magnitude smaller] than MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They're now sharing some code.[https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179#81309]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Why can't I login using my GitHub or Google account? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although Phabricator has authentication plugins for GitHub, Google, and other identity providers, we have decided not to use them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With two Wikimedia alternatives that cover virtually all Wikimedia contributors, more options are not really necessary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Besides, these services depend on proprietary third party sites, and they might raise concerns about privacy and commercial interests.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more details, see [[phab:T16|T16 - Support only WMF SUL and LDAP as authentication mechanisms]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How can I merge my account from Wikipedia or other Wikimedia wikis with my Phabricator account? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Use Phabricator's [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/settings/panel/external/ Linked Accounts and Authentication] tool for that.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Concerns raised ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Ending up with one more tool ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having fewer tools is the whole point of this exercise.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The replacement of Bugzilla and Gerrit with Phabricator is an essential requirement of this project.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The teams using Trello and Mingle understand that relying in these commercial services is not a long-term solution.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Lack of a detailed plan ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The current working plan is good enough to provide a realistic vision supported by the community.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The WMF needs an RfC resolution in order to allocate the resources needed to elaborate a detailed plan.[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T17]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Why not improving our current tools ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator is already an integrated suite, which means the different components are intended to be used together.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is written in PHP, and their maintainers are very proactive.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* This encourages features like explicitly attaching tasks to code changes, mocks, etc.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Although we can write or improve integrations like Gerrit Notification Bot, Bugzilla (Perl), Gerrit (Java), or Scrumbugz (Python) will probably never be a seamlessly integrated suite.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Some projects should test first ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, this is also our recommendation for the migration from Gerrit to Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;About the migration from Bugzilla to Phabricator, it needs to be done at once because we cannot do a full migration of data with two moving targets.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Various UI issues ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We can customize the CSS of our instance for more appropriate font sizes, colors, etc.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Upstream has already fixed some of the problems reported.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Requiring arc ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Arc checks new patches for basic mistakes before uploading them for review.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is useful for the majority of contributors and for the project.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The occasional contributor can upload a patch directly via the Phabricator Web UI.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Phabricator is unfamiliar for most newcomers ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;True, most users of FLOSS software have experience with Bugzilla if anything, because it's used by all the major players (Linux itself, Mozilla, RedHat, GNOME [https://www.bugzilla.org/installation-list/ etc. etc.]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However this is not necessarily true for all MediaWiki newcomers.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Offering them one integrated platform is better than looking for a platform they already know.&lt;/span&gt;

== phabricator.wikimedia.org ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[phab:|Phabricator.wikimedia.org]] (aka [https://bugs.wikimedia.org/ bugs.wikimedia.org]) is Wikimedia's bug tracking and project management tool.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Bugzilla ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla|Phabricator/versus Bugzilla]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== RT ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus RT|Phabricator/versus RT]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Trello, Mingle, Scrumbugz, etc ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Is Phabricator flexible enough to allow different teams to define their own workflows and ways of organizing sprints/tasks/stories/etc? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T43 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related task&lt;/span&gt;] - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;this welcomes answering by individuals who have already worked and maintained a Phabricator instance.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, at least to some degree.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, different projects can define their own columns/swim lanes on workboards with &quot;Add Column&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does Phabricator provide boards per project and/or iteration? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See e.g. the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/project/board/5/ Wikimedia Phabricator board].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Related tasks: [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21 Identify features Trello users would miss] and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20 Identify features Mingle users would miss]&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Phabricator{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>mg1565qoeriyd72xqxf2fyg318futdh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/2/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>853760</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402638</id>
      <parentid>3727352</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:50:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="144" xml:space="preserve">'''[[$1|議論の構造化をなぜ開発するか、どう使われるかを1ページにまとめましたのでご参照ください。]]''':</text>
      <sha1>ajy2em8e8ghbq9cnnm5viwf9vi2zso1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/kjp</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>862244</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401800</id>
      <parentid>5184882</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:ShoutWiki/6/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>863670</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401915</id>
      <parentid>3038258</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:39:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="134" xml:space="preserve">O ShoutWiki utiliza muitas [[$1|extensões]] utilizadas por sites [[$2|Wikimedia]], além de suas próprias extensões personalizadas.</text>
      <sha1>qihue6miyk4lyz0ybinuxlf9b607xxr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:ShoutWiki/5/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>863682</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401903</id>
      <parentid>3038295</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:34:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="217" xml:space="preserve">Muitos dos funcionários do ShoutWiki são também membros do MediaWiki [[desenvolvedores]]. Veja [$url site do ShoutWiki] ou [$url2 página Sobre do ShoutWiki no ShoutWiki] para saber mais sobre o ShoutWiki em geral.</text>
      <sha1>gdicc9c9zo68yvyam5axp70jk5fgh4g</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/id</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>878779</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402777</id>
      <parentid>4265866</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:47:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="91" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Bantuan menggunakan templat kutipan]] atau [[$2|Bantuan menggunakan tombol $3 Citoid]]</text>
      <sha1>5mnxhf25xczp1m4tegxrj89drf2e7g9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/sc</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>882036</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402944</id>
      <parentid>5355667</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="52395" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Cuntzetos de base ==

=== Tràmudòngiu de documentos ===

Issèbere una manera pro tramudare sos documentos:

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
* Còpia segura cun [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] o [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|Protocollu de tramudòngiu de documentos SSH]] (SFTP)
* Impreende unu cliente [[w:Filas Transfer Protocol|FTP]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Carchi àtera manera. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Preliminary===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check the requirements
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the RELEASE-NOTES file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Back up existing files and the database
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new files
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Upgrade extensions
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the update script to check the database
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Test the update
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} requires:
&lt;/div&gt;

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One of the following:
&lt;/div&gt;
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are using PostgreSQL, please also read {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more information, please read the {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} and {{ll|Compatibility}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Read the release notes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Clear pending jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Back up existing files and the database ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:''Full instructions: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Unpack the new files ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using a tarball package ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Command line ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Other files===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using Git ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Upgrade extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Other variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Run the update script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: ''See also {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Should I back up first?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Short answer: Yes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Why upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>sxyca0fdirhw7n1gd1w89sylvebhp25</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Social tools/ckb</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>890435</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401974</id>
      <parentid>4429444</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1876" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=ئامرازی كۆمه‌ڵایه‌تی}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=سه‌یركردنی گشتی}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=زانیاری گه‌شه‌پێده‌ر}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshots&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=مێژوو}}
|group2 = ڕاستێنەی كۆمه‌ڵایه‌تی تر
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = ڕاستێنه‌ی په‌یوه‌ندیداری تر&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(كه‌ پشت نابه‌ستێته‌ سه‌ر پرۆفایلی كۆمه‌ڵایه‌تی)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>1p0ozpf4ylmlaomkkh680re1xf1uajw</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401987</id>
      <parentid>5401974</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:10:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1877" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=ئامرازی كۆمه‌ڵایه‌تی}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=سه‌یركردنی گشتی}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=زانیاری گه‌شه‌پێده‌ر}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshots&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=مێژوو}}
|group2 = ڕاستێنەی كۆمه‌ڵایه‌تی تر
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = ڕاستێنه‌ی په‌یوه‌ندیداری تر&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(كه‌ پشت نابه‌ستێته‌ سه‌ر پرۆفایلی كۆمه‌ڵایه‌تی)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>f51ni6u03hlwmzgf5qk9q55ggzvivjf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:System message/tr</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>896146</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402530</id>
      <parentid>5354751</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:24:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="55407" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{i18n navigation}}
{{TOC right|limit=2}}

[[Image:MediaWiki SpecialUpload interface labelled.png|thumb|Çeşitli sistem mesajlarını gösteren [[Special:Upload]] formunun etiketli diyagramı.]]
'''Sistem mesajı''', davranışını kişiselleştirmek için kullanılabilecek düz metin (nowiki), vikimetin, [[:tr:CSS|CSS]] veya [[:tr:JavaScript|JavaScript]] parçacığıdır. MediaWiki ve her dilin görünümü ve [[w:Locale (computer software)|yereldir]]. MediaWiki, hem çekirdek hem de uzantılar için, MediaWiki kullanıcı arayüzünün uluslararası hâle getirilmesine ve yerelleştirilmesine olanak tanıyan, arayüzün kullanıcıya bakan herhangi bir kısmı için mesajlar kullanır.
MediaWiki'de kullanılan tüm mesajlar bir ''mesaj dosyası'' içinde tanımlanmıştır.

== Vikide mesajları geçersiz kılma ==
Mesajlar, viki üzerinde düzenlenerek varsayılan değerlerinden geçersiz kılınabilir.
Her mesajın MediaWiki ad alanında, mesaj anahtarının sayfanın adı olduğu bir viki sayfası vardır.
Örneğin, &quot;aboutsite&quot; mesajı MediaWiki:aboutsite altında saklanır.
Varsayılan olarak, kullanıcının &quot;editinterface&quot; iznine sahip olmadığı sürece, bu ad alanının düzenlenmesi kısıtlanmıştır.
Tüm mesaj sayfalarının bir listesi [[Special:AllMessages]] sayfasında bulunabilir.
Arayüz mesajlarını düzenlemek, normal bir viki sayfasını düzenlemek gibi, genellikle basittir, ancak varsayılan olarak hizmetlilere (ve arayüz hizmetlilere) atanan [[editinterface]] iznine sahip kullanıcılarla sınırlıdır.
[[Image:Wiki-system-messages.png|thumb|Eski [[Special:AllMessages]] sayfasındaki örnek satır.]]
[[Special:AllMessages]] tablosu iki sütun içeriyor: bağlantılı arayüz adı ve metin.
Metin yukarıdaki varsayılan metni ve aşağıdaki özelleştirilmiş metni göstermek için yatay olarak bölünmüştür.
Özel bir mesaj olmadığında, yalnızca varsayılan gösterilecektir.
Bir mesajı özelleştirmek için sol sütundaki üst bağlantıya (mesajın adı) tıklayın.
Düzenleme sayfası boş olduğundan, varsayılan metin kullanımdaysa bu bağlantı kırmızıdır.

Sol sütun hücrelerindeki alt bağlantılar, o mesaj için tartışma sayfalarına yönlendirir.

{{anchor|Finding messages and documentation}}
== Mesajları ve belgeleri bulma ==
Her mesajın MediaWiki tarafından nasıl kullanıldığı, mevcut değişkenler, kullanılan parametreler, sınırlamalar vb., [[#Message_documentation|mesaj belgelemesi yönergeleri]] uyarınca [//translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;task=reviewall&amp;group=core&amp;language=qqq&amp;limit=5000&amp;action=page&amp;filter= qqq sözde dilindeki tam belgeler] dosyalarında açıklanır.
Bazı arayüz mesajları için daha eski {{ll|Category:Interface messages}} değerinde daha uzun açıklama sayfaları bulunabilir.

{{note|1=
translatewiki.net'in viki tabanında, qqq mesajın kullanıcı belgelerinin bulunduğu sayfadır (İngilizce olarak, çünkü tüm okuyuculara aynı şekilde gösterilir).
Aynı şekilde /en /ge /fr .../qqq maddenin bir alt sayfasıdır ve doğrudan görüntülenebilir.

* İngilizce bir maddeyi görüntülemek için [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/en]] deneyin,
* Aynı maddeyi Fransızca olarak görüntülemek için [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/fr]] deneyin,
* İlişkili belgelerini (İngilizce) görüntülemek için [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/qqq]] deneyin.

Bu bakış açısından &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt;, isteğin &lt;code&gt;language=&lt;/code&gt; parametresinde bir dil olarak kabul edilir.
}}

MediaWiki 1.18 ve sonraki sürümlerde, URL'ye &lt;code&gt;?[[uselang]]=qqx&lt;/code&gt; veya URL zaten bir &lt;code&gt;?&lt;/code&gt; karakteri ([{{fullurl:{{FULLPAGENAME}}|uselang=qqx}} örnek]) içeriyorsa, &lt;code&gt;&amp;uselang=qqx&lt;/code&gt; ekleyerek yapılabilen özel sözde dil kodu &lt;code&gt;'''[[Help:Qqx|qqx]]'''&lt;/code&gt; içindeki bir vikiye göz atarak bir mesaj anahtarı bulabilirsiniz. Tüm mesajlar daha sonra mesaj anahtarları ile değiştirilecektir, böylece hangi mesajın sorumlu olduğunu belirleyebilirsiniz. Her zaman içerik dilinde olan mesajlar qqx kullanılarak gösterilmeyecektir.

Arayüzün bazı bölümleri, qqx hilesini kullandığınızda gösterilen dizeye &lt;code&gt;nstab-&lt;/code&gt; ekler. Örneğin, ana ad alanındaki tartışma sayfasına bağlanan sekmenin etiketi &lt;code&gt;nstab-talk&lt;/code&gt; olarak gösterilir, ancak dize aslında [[MediaWiki:Talk]] konumunda bulunur.

Sayfanın örn. [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|&quot;Tercihler&quot; özel sayfa]] sekmeyi &lt;code&gt;uselang&lt;/code&gt; parametresinden sonra eklemeniz gerekecek, ör. &lt;code&gt;Special:Preferences?uselang=qqx#mw-prefsection-rendering&lt;/code&gt;.

{{anchor|Localisation file format}}
== Yerelleştirme dosya biçimi ==

MediaWiki'de kullanılan tüm mesajlar bir ''mesaj dosyası'' içinde tanımlanmıştır.

MediaWiki'de iki tür mesaj dosyası vardır: JSON ve PHP.
Nisan 2014 itibariyle, temel MediaWiki ve bakımı yapılan uzantıların çoğu JSON biçimine taşındı.
Tüm yeni geliştirmeler için JSON kullanmalısınız.
JSON'a geçiş hakkında daha fazla bilgi için [[Requests for comment/Localisation format]] sayfasına bakın.

=== JSON ===

2013'ün sonlarından itibaren mesajlar için yeni bir dosya formatı tanıtıldı: JSON.
Bu, genel bir genel veri depolama biçimi olarak bilinen sade [[:tr:JSON|JSON]]'dur.
İçindeki her anahtar bir mesaj anahtarıdır ve değer mesaj metnidir.
Ayrıca, çeviri yazarları gibi çeviriyle ilgili bilgileri depolamak için özel &lt;code&gt;@metadata&lt;/code&gt; anahtarı kullanılır.

JSON kullanmak, yürütülebilir olmadığından yerelleştirme dosyalarını daha güvenli hâle getirir.
Ayrıca, MediaWiki benzeri ön uç yerelleştirme yetenekleri sağlayan ve [[Milkshake|Project Milkshake]] kapsamında geliştirilen ve MediaWiki'ye daha az bağımlı olmak isteyen bazı uzantılar tarafından kullanılan JavaScript kitaplık olan jquery.i18n ile de uyumludur, örneğin [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor]] ve [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector|UniversalLanguageSelector]].

Daha geniş uluslararasılaştırma ve yerelleştirme araçları paketi &quot;[[Project Milkshake]]&quot; olarak adlandırıldığından, bazı kişiler bu biçimi &quot;banana&quot; olarak adlandırır.

=== Dosya konumu ===
MediaWiki çekirdeğinde, yerelleştirme dosyaları &lt;code&gt;{{git file |file=languages/i18n |action=tree}}&lt;/code&gt; dizinine yerleştirilir.
MediaWiki uzantıları genellikle kendi uzantılarını &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt; bir alt dizine yerleştirir.
Bir proje içinde çok sayıda mesaj varsa, sürdürülebilirlik için bunları iki veya daha fazla güncel alt dizine bölmek istenebilir.
MediaWiki bağlamında, bu alt dizinleri listelemek için {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}} yapılandırma anahtarı kullanılır.
İşte MediaWiki için VisualEditor uzantısından bir örnek:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
  &quot;MessagesDirs&quot;: {
    &quot;VisualEditor&quot;: [
      &quot;lib/ve/modules/ve/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-mw/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-wmf/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;lib/ve/lib/oojs-ui/i18n&quot;
    ]
  }
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

İngilizce &quot;en&quot; ileti dosyasına &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; yeni iletiler eklersiniz ve bunları ileti belgeleme dosyasında &quot;qqq&quot; &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; özel sözde dil koduyla belgelersiniz.
''Ayrıca bakınız: [[#Adding new messages|Yeni mesajlar ekleme]]''.

==== Meta veri ====

Şu anda dosyalarda aşağıdaki meta veri alanları kullanılmaktadır:

;authors
:İletilerin yazarlarının bir JSON listesi. İngilizce (en) ve mesaj belgeleri (qqq) için bunlar, mesaj dosyası düzenlendiğinde elle eklenir. Diğer tüm diller için bu, mesaj dosyası [[translatewiki.net]] üzerinden dışa aktarıldığında otomatik olarak eklenir. Mesaj belgeleri translatewiki.net üzerinde düzenlenebilir ve belge düzenleyiciler de qqq.json dosyasına otomatik olarak eklenir.
;message-documentation
:Bu, mesaj belgelerini depolamak için kullanılan sözde dil kodudur. MediaWiki için bu her zaman ''qqq'' kodudur. (Bu, bazı uzantılarda görünür, ancak gerçekte hiçbir şekilde işlenmez. Zorunlu değildir.)

==== Sözleşmeler ====

Satır sonları gibi özel karakterlerden kaçılır (&lt;code&gt;&quot;\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Farklı alfabelerdeki harfleri temsil eden Unicode karakterler, karakter kodları olarak değil, gerçek karakterler olarak saklanır, çünkü bu dosyalar bazen insanlar tarafından okunur ve bu, dosyaları daha küçük yapar (&lt;code&gt;&quot;誼&quot;&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u8ABC&quot;&lt;/code&gt; değil).
Her durumda, geliştiricilerin İngilizce dışındaki herhangi bir dilde mesajları düzenlemek için birkaç nedeni vardır, çünkü bunlar genellikle translatewiki.net aracılığıyla düzenlenir.

HTML kodu da kaçmaz, yani &lt;code&gt;&quot;&amp;lt;strong&gt;Warning&amp;lt;/strong&gt;&quot;&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u003cstrong\u003eWarning\u003c/strong\u003e&quot;&lt;/code&gt; değil.

JSON dosyaları sekmeler kullanılarak girintilidir.

=== PHP ===

Daha eski yerelleştirme dosyası biçimi PHP'dir.
Bu aslında tüm mesajları içeren bir PHP dizisidir.
Çekirdek MediaWiki'de her dil, MediaWiki kaynak kodunun diller/mesaj dizinindeki kendi dosyasında bulunur.
Uzantılarda tüm diller ve mesaj belgeleri (''qqq'') aynı dosyadadır: ''ExtensionName.i18n.php'', genellikle uzantının ana dizinindedir.

PHP'den JSON'a geçiş yapmak için [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:GenerateJsonI18n.php|generateJsonI18n.php]] betiğini kullanın.
Mesajları JSON dosyalarına taşıyacak ve PHP dosyasının metnini JSON dosyalarına işaret eden bir altlık ile değiştirecektir.
Bu kalıp kod, MediaWiki 1.19 ile geriye dönük uyumluluk için gereklidir.
MediaWiki 1.19 uyumluluğu gerektirmeyen yeni uzantılarda kullanılmamaktadır.

== Mesajları kullanma ==
MediaWiki, koddaki anahtarlarla kaynaklanan mesajların ''merkezi'' bir deposunu kullanır.
Bu, örneğin kaynak dosyalardan çevrilebilir dizeleri çıkaran &lt;code&gt;Gettext&lt;/code&gt; üzerinden farklıdır.
Anahtar tabanlı sistem, orijinal metinleri düzeltmek ve mesajlardaki değişiklikleri izlemek gibi bazı şeyleri kolaylaştırır.
Dezavantajı, elbette, kullanılan mesajların listesi ve bu tuşlar için kaynak metinlerin listesinin senkronizasyondan çıkabilmesidir.
Pratikte bu büyük bir sorun değil ve tek önemli sorun, bazen artık kullanılmayan ekstra mesajların hâlâ çeviri için kalmasıdır.

İleti anahtarlarını daha yönetilebilir ve daha kolay bulmak için grep ile de her zaman tam olarak yazın ve dinamik olarak oluşturmaya çok fazla güvenmeyin.
Kodunuza daha iyi bir yapı kazandırdığını düşünüyorsanız, mesaj anahtarlarının bölümlerini birleştirebilirsiniz, ancak olası sonuç anahtarlarının bir listesiyle birlikte yakına bir yorum koyun.

Ayrıca [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding_conventions#Dynamic_identifiers|kod kurallarına]] bakın. Örneğin:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// Burada kullanılabilecek mesajlar:
// * myextension-connection-success
// * myextension-connection-warning
// * myextension-connection-error
$text = wfMessage( 'myextension-connection-' . $status )-&gt;parse();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

JavaScript'te bir mesaj kullanmak için, ResourceLoader modülünüzün tanımında, &lt;code&gt;&quot;messages&quot;&lt;/code&gt; özelliğinde [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Messages API#Using a ResourceLoader module|listeleme]] yapmanız gerekir.

PHP ve JavaScript'te mesaj işlevlerinin ayrıntılı kullanımı {{ll|Manual:Messages API}} sayfasındadır.
'''Bu önemli bir belgelendirme sayfasıdır ve mesajları kullanan kod yazmadan önce okumalısınız.'''

{{anchor|Message sources}}
== Mesaj kaynakları ==

Kod, şu kaynaklardan gelen sistem mesajlarını arar:
* MediaWiki ad alanı. Bu, standart mesajlar uygun olmadığında veya istenmediğinde vikilerin tüm mesajlarını benimsemesine veya geçersiz kılmasına izin verir.
** MediaWiki:''Mesaj-anahtarı'' varsayılan mesajdır,
** MediaWiki:''Mesaj-anahtarı''/''dil-kodu'', bir kullanıcı vikinin varsayılan dilinden başka bir dil seçtiğinde kullanılacak mesajdır.
* Mesaj dosyalarından:
** Çekirdek MediaWiki'nin kendisi ve şu anda bakımı yapılan çoğu [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All extensions|uzantılar]] her dil için &lt;code&gt;''zyx''.json&lt;/code&gt; adlı bir dosya kullanır, burada ''zyx'' dil için dil kodu bulunur.
** Bazı eski uzantılar, genellikle &lt;code&gt;''MyExtensionName''.i18n.php&lt;/code&gt; adlı tüm dillerdeki tüm mesajları tutan birleştirilmiş bir mesaj dosyası kullanır.
** Birçok Wikimedia Vakfı vikisi, {{ll|Extension:WikimediaMessages|nsp=0}} uzantısından bazı mesajlara erişerek, mesajları her MediaWiki kurulumuna dayatmadan WMF vikilerinde standart hâle getirmelerine olanak tanır.
** Birkaç uzantı diğer teknikleri kullanır.
{{anchor|Caching}}

== Önbelleğe alma ==
Sistem mesajları, öncelikle her web isteğinde kullanıldığı için MediaWiki'nin en önemli bileşenlerinden biridir.
PHP mesaj dosyaları, binlerce mesaj anahtarını ve değerini sakladıkları için büyüktür.
Bu dosyayı (ve kullanıcının dili içerik dilinden farklıysa muhtemelen birden fazla dosyayı) yüklemek, büyük bir bellek ve performans maliyetine sahiptir.
Bu performans etkisini azaltmak için agresif, katmanlı bir önbellek sistemi kullanılır.

MediaWiki, kodun anlaşılmasını biraz daha zorlaştıran yerleşik birçok önbelleğe alma mekanizmasına sahiptir.
1.16'dan beri, mesajları ya [[cdb]] dosyalarında ya da veritabanında önbelleğe alan yeni bir önbelleğe alma sistemi bulunmaktadır.
Özelleştirilmiş mesajlar, yapılandırmaya bağlı olarak dosya sisteminde ve [[memcached]] (veya alternatif) içinde önbelleğe alınır.

Aşağıdaki tablo, ilgili ayarlara genel bir bakış sunar:

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!colspan=&quot;2&quot; rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| Önbellek depolama konumu
!colspan=&quot;4&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf}}
|-
! 'store' =&gt; 'db'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;br /&gt;(varsayılan) !! 'store' =&gt; 'files'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'array'&lt;br /&gt;''(MW ≥ 1.26'dan beri deneysel)''
|-
!rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}
! = false&lt;br /&gt;(varsayılan)
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || ''hata'' (tanımlanmamış yol) || ''hata'' (tanımlanmamış yol)
|-
! = ''path''
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || yerel dosya sistemi (CDB) || yerel dosya sistemi (CDB) || yerel dosya sistemi (PHP dizisi)
|}
{{MW version|version=1.27.0|version2=1.27.2|gerrit change=Id3e2d2b18ddb423647bf2e893bcf942722c0e097}}
MediaWiki 1.27.0 ve 1.27.1'de, otomatik algılama, dosya arka ucunu tercih edecek şekilde değiştirildi.
&lt;code&gt;'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;/code&gt; (varsayılan) durumunda, dosya arka ucu {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}} yolu ile kullanılır.
Bu değer ayarlanmazsa (varsayılan), işletim sistemi tarafından belirlenen geçici bir dizin kullanılır.
Geçici bir dizin algılanamazsa, veritabanı arka ucu yedek olarak kullanılır.
Bu, paylaşılan ana bilgisayarlardaki dosya çakışması ve güvenlik sorunları nedeniyle 1.27.2 ve 1.28.0'dan geri alındı ([[:phab:T127127|T127127]] ve [[:phab:T161453|T161453]] sayfalarına bakın).

=== İşlev geri izleme ===
Önbelleğe alma katmanlarını daha iyi görsel olarak tasvir etmek için, burada bir mesaj alınırken hangi yöntemlerin çağrıldığına dair bir işlev geri izlemesi verilmiştir.
Her katmanın açıklaması için aşağıdaki bölümlere bakın.

* &lt;code&gt;Message::fetchMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;MessageCache::get()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;Language::getMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalisationCache::getSubitem()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LCStore::get()&lt;/code&gt;

=== MessageCache ===
&lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; sınıfı, iletiler için önbelleğe almanın en üst düzeyidir.
Message sınıfından çağrılır ve bir mesajın son ham içeriğini döndürür.
Bu katman aşağıdaki mantığı işler:

* Veritabanında mesaj geçersiz kılmaları kontrol etme
* Aşırı yüklenen mesajları {{ll|memcached}} olarak veya {{ll|Manual:$wgMessageCacheType|$wgMessageCacheType}} olarak ayarlanmış olan herhangi bir yerde önbelleğe alma
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|Dil yedeği]] dizisinin geri kalanını çözümleme

Son mermi önemlidir.
[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|Dil yedekleri]], orijinalin istenen bir mesajı yoksa MediaWiki'nin başka bir dile geri dönmesine izin verir.
Sonraki bölümde bahsedildiği gibi, dil geri dönüş çözümlemesinin çoğu daha düşük bir düzeyde gerçekleşir.
Ancak, yalnızca &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; katmanı, geçersiz kılınan mesajlar için veritabanını kontrol eder.
Böylece veritabanından geçersiz kılınan mesajların geri dönüş zincirine entegre edilmesi burada yapılır.
Veritabanı kullanılmıyorsa, bu katmanın tamamı devre dışı bırakılabilir.

=== LocalisationCache ===

{{ll|Manual:LocalisationCache.php|LocalisationCache.php}} sayfasına bakın

=== LCStore ===
&lt;code&gt;LCStore&lt;/code&gt; sınıfı, yalnızca LocalisationCache sınıfı tarafından mesajları gerçekten önbelleğe almak ve almak için kullanılan bir arka uç uygulamasıdır.
MediaWiki'de genel önbelleğe alma için kullanılan &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; sınıfı gibi, bir dizi farklı önbellek türü vardır ([[Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf]] kullanılarak yapılandırılır):
* &quot;db&quot; (varsayılan) - Veritabanındaki mesajları önbelleğe alır
* &quot;file&quot; (&lt;code&gt;$wgCacheDirectory&lt;/code&gt; ayarlanmışsa varsayılan) - Mesajları yerel bir dosyada önbelleğe almak için [[w:cdb (software)|CDB]] kullanır
* &quot;accel&quot; - Verileri depolamak için [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|APC]] veya başka bir işlem kodu önbelleği kullanır

&quot;file&quot; seçeneği Wikimedia Vakfı tarafından kullanılır ve veritabanına gitmekten daha hızlı ve APC önbelleğinden daha güvenilir olduğu için, özellikle de APC, PHP 5.5 veya sonraki sürümleriyle uyumlu olmadığı için önerilir.

{{anchor|Adding new messages}}
== Yeni mesaj ekleme ==

=== Mesaj anahtarını seçme ===

Ayrıca bakınız:
{{ll|Manual:Coding conventions#System messages}}

Mesaj anahtarı küresel olarak benzersiz olmalıdır.
Bu, çekirdek MediaWiki'yi ve tüm uzantıları ve görünümleri içerir.

Mesaj adlarında küçük harflere, sayılara ve kısa çizgilere sadık kalın; diğer karakterlerin çoğu daha az pratik veya hiç çalışmıyor.
MediaWiki kuralına göre, ilk karakter büyük/küçük harfe duyarlı değildir ve diğer karakterler büyük/küçük harfe duyarlıdır.

Lütfen adlandırma için küresel veya yerel kuralları izleyin.
Uzantılar için standart bir önek, tercihen küçük harfle uzantı adı ve ardından bir tire (&quot;-&quot;) kullanın.
İstisnalar şunlardır:

; API tarafından kullanılan mesajlar : Bunlar &lt;code&gt;apihelp-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apiwarn-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apierror-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır. Bu önekten sonra uzantı önekini koyun. (Bu mesajların genellikle [[phab:source/mediawiki/browse/master/includes/api/i18n/|includes/i18/api]] altında ayrı bir dosyada olması gerektiğini unutmayın.)
; Günlükle ilgili mesajlar : Bunlar &lt;code&gt;logentry-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;log-name-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;log-description&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır.
; Kullanıcı hakları : Special:ListGroupRights sayfasında görüntülenen hakkın adı anahtarı &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır. &quot;{{int|Permissionserrorstext-withaction|unused}}&quot; cümlesini tamamlayan eylemin adı &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır.
; Revizyon etiketleri : Revizyon etiketleri &lt;code&gt;tag-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır.
; Özel sayfa başlıkları : Özel sayfa başlıkları &lt;code&gt;special-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır.

=== Mesaj oluştururken dikkat edilmesi gereken diğer noktalar ===

# Mesaj için uygun işleme kullandığınızdan emin olun (ayrıştırma, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;-değiştirme, HTML için kaçış vb.)
# Mesajınız çekirdeğin bir parçasıysa, Installer, EXIF etiketleri ve ApiHelp gibi bazı bileşenlerin kendi mesaj dosyaları olmasına rağmen, genellikle &lt;code&gt;languages/i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt; ile eklenmelidir.
# Mesajınız bir uzantıdaysa, onu uygun alt dizindeki &lt;code&gt;i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt; dosyasına veya &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; dosyasına ekleyin. Özellikle, çoğu son kullanıcı tarafından görülmeyen yalnızca geliştiriciler tarafından görülen API mesajları, genellikle &lt;code&gt;i18n/api/en.json&lt;/code&gt; gibi ayrı bir dosyadadır. Bir uzantının çok fazla mesajı varsa, &lt;code&gt;i18n&lt;/code&gt; altında alt dizinler oluşturabilirsiniz. Varsayılan &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt; dahil tüm mesaj dizinleri, &lt;code&gt;MessagesDirs&lt;/code&gt; içindeki &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; bölümünde veya {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}} değişkeninde listelenmelidir.
# Bir ara verin ve mesajın ifadesini düşünün. Mümkün olduğunca açık mı? Yanlış anlaşılabilir mi? Mümkünse diğer geliştiricilerden veya yerelleştiricilerden yorum isteyin. [[#Uluslararasılaştırma ipuçları|Uluslararasılaştırma ipuçları]] bölümünü izleyin.
# Aynı dizindeki &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; dosyasına belgelendirme ekleyin.
# Dosyadaki mesajların sırası kabaca projenizin özelliklerine uygun olmalıdır. Aynı özellikten gelen mesajları yan yana koyun. Bu, çevirmenlerin odaklanmalarına, verimli ve tutarlı olmalarına yardımcı olur.
# En temel ve en sık kullanılan olması beklenen mesajları dosyanın başına, daha nadir ve teknik olarak daha gelişmiş mesajları ise sonlara doğru koyun.


== Çevrilmemesi gereken mesajlar ==

# '''Yoksayılan''' mesajlar, yalnızca İngilizce mesajlar dosyasında bulunması gereken mesajlardır. Yalnızca diğer mesajlara veya dilden bağımsız özelliklere atıfta bulundukları için çevrilmesi gerekmeyen mesajlardır, ''örneğin'' bir &quot;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&quot; mesajı.
# '''İsteğe bağlı''' mesajlar yalnızca hedef dilde değiştirilirse çevrilebilir.

Bu tür mesajları işaretlemek için:

* sırasıyla &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; ileti belgelerindeki şablonu kullanın;
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Notranslate|notranslate]]}}&lt;/code&gt; veya
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Optional|optional]]}}&lt;/code&gt;;
* {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} üzerinde kullanılan {{ll|Extension:Translate|nsp=0}} uzantısına, uygun şekilde listeleyen bir yama göndererek iletilerle ne yapacağını söyleyin (ayrıca {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Group configuration/MediaWiki|tam yapılandırma belgelerine}} bakın):
** &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;çekirdek için, {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/MediaWiki.yaml}} içine mesaj anahtarlarını ekleyin&lt;/span&gt;
**# &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;ignored:&lt;/code&gt; altında veya
**# &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;optional:&lt;/code&gt; altında;
** &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;uzantılar için, {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/mediawiki-extensions.txt}} içinde uzantının adının altına aşağıdaki gibi bir satır ekleyin&lt;/span&gt;
**# &lt;code&gt;ignored = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt; or
**# &lt;code&gt;optional = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt;.

== Mevcut mesajları kaldırma ==
&lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; dosyadan kaldırın.
Başka dillerle uğraşmayın.
{{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} güncellemeleri bunları otomatik olarak halledecektir.

Ayrıca, mesajın translatewiki yapılandırmasında, örneğin isteğe bağlı veya en çok kullanılan mesajlar listesinde herhangi bir yerde görünüp görünmediğini kontrol edin (basit bir git grep yeterli olmalıdır).
Gerekirse bu listelerden çıkarın.

== Mevcut mesajları değiştirme ==

# [[#Mesaj belgelendirmesi|Mesaj belgelendirmesini]] güncellemeyi düşünün.
# Eski çeviriler yeni anlama uygun değilse mesaj anahtarını değiştirin. Bu aynı zamanda mesaj işlemedeki değişiklikleri de içerir (ayrıştırma, kaçış, parametreler, vb.). Bir mesajın ifadesini teknik değişiklikler olmadan geliştirmek, genellikle bir anahtarı değiştirmek için bir neden değildir. Translatewiki.net'te çeviriler, çevirmenler tarafından hedeflenebilmeleri için eski olarak işaretlenecektir. Bir mesaj anahtarının değiştirilmesi, i18n ekibiyle görüşmeyi veya bir destek talebinde bulunmayı gerektirmez. Ancak, özel durumlarınız veya sorularınız varsa, {{irc|translatewiki}} kanalıdan veya {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} adresindeki [[translatewiki:Support|destek sayfasında]] sorun.
# Uzantı {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} tarafından destekleniyorsa, lütfen yalnızca İngilizce kaynak mesajını ve/veya anahtarı ve beraberindeki &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; girişini değiştirin. Gerekirse translatewiki.net ekibi çevirileri güncellemek, bunları eski olarak işaretlemek, dosyayı temizlemek veya mümkünse anahtarları yeniden adlandırmakla ilgilenecektir. Bu, yalnızca HTML etiketleri gibi diğer dillerde değiştirebileceğiniz ve bu dilleri konuşmadan değiştirebileceğiniz şeyleri değiştirdiğinizde de geçerlidir. Bu eylemlerin çoğu [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]]'te gerçekleşecek ve Git'e yaklaşık bir günlük gecikmeyle ulaşacak.

{{anchor|Message documentation}}
== Mesaj belgelendirmesi ==
Mesaj belgelendirmesi için bir sözde dil kodu &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; vardır.
Özel kullanım için ayrılmış ISO 639 kodlarından biridir.
Orada, her mesajın çevirisini tutmuyoruz, ancak ''her mesaj hakkında'' İngilizce cümleler topluyoruz: bize nerede kullanıldığını söyleyen, nasıl çevrileceğine dair ipuçları veren ve parametrelerini numaralandıran ve açıklayan, ilgili mesajlara bağlantı veren, ve benzeri.
[[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]]'te, bu ipuçları mesajları düzenlerken çevirmenlere gösterilir.

Programcılar her mesajı belgelemelidir.
Mesaj belgelendirmesi, yalnızca çevirmenler için değil, modülün tüm bakımcılar için önemli bir kaynaktır.
Yazılıma bir mesaj eklendiğinde, buna karşılık gelen bir &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; girişi de ''olmalıdır''; bunu yapmayan revizyonlar, dokümantasyon eklenene kadar &quot;&lt;code&gt;V-1&lt;/code&gt;&quot; olarak işaretlenir.

&lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; dosyalarındaki belgelendirme, yalnızca yeni mesajlar eklenirken veya mevcut bir İngilizce mesajı, örneğin parametre ekleme veya çıkarma gibi bir belge değişikliği gerektiren bir şekilde değiştirirken doğrudan düzenlenmelidir.
Diğer durumlarda, belgelendirme genellikle translatewiki'de düzenlenmelidir.
Her belge dizisine, sanki bir çeviriymiş gibi &lt;nowiki&gt;https://translatewiki.net/wiki/MediaWiki:&lt;/nowiki&gt;''message-key''&lt;nowiki&gt;/qqq&lt;/nowiki&gt; adresinden erişilebilir.
Bu düzenlemeler, çevirilerle birlikte kaynak depolara dışa aktarılacaktır.

Belgelendirmede olması gereken faydalı bilgiler şunları içerir:

# Mesaj işleme (ayrıştırma, kaçış, düz metin).
# Örnek değerlerle parametre türü.
# Mesajın kullanıldığı yer (sayfalar, kullanıcı arayüzündeki konumlar).
# Mesajın kullanıldığı yerde nasıl kullanıldığı (bir sayfa başlığı, düğme metni, ''vb.'').
# Bu mesajla birlikte başka hangi mesajlar kullanılıyor veya bu mesaj başka hangi mesajlara atıfta bulunuyor.
# İleti bağlamda görüldüğünde anlaşılabilecek, ancak ileti tek başına görüntülendiğinde (çeviri yapılırken durum böyledir) anlaşılamayan başka herhangi bir şey.
# Varsa, dilbilgisi hakkında notlar. Örneğin, İngilizce'de &quot;open&quot; hem fiil hem de sıfat olabilir. Diğer birçok dilde kelimeler farklıdır ve belge olmadan nasıl çevrileceğini tahmin etmek imkansızdır.
# &quot;disabled&quot;, &quot;open&quot; veya &quot;blocked&quot; gibi şeyleri tanımlayan sıfatlar, neyi tanımladıklarını ''her zaman'' söylemelidir. Birçok dilde sıfatlar tanımladıkları ismin cinsiyetine sahip olmalıdır. Farklı türden şeylerin farklı sıfatlara ihtiyaç duyması da olabilir.
# Mesajın özel özellikleri varsa, örneğin bir sayfa adıysa veya doğrudan çeviri değil, kültüre veya projeye uyarlanmış olması gerekiyorsa.
# Mesajın diğer mesajın yanında, örneğin bir listede veya menüde görünüp görünmediği. Sözcüklerin üslubu veya gramer özellikleri muhtemelen yakındaki mesajlara benzer olmalıdır. Ayrıca, bir listedeki ögelerin, listenin başlığıyla uygun şekilde ilişkili olması gerekebilir.
# Mesajının, genel ad alanı adları, URL'ler veya etiketler gibi çevrilmemesi gereken bölümleri.
# &quot;CTA&quot; gibi kısaltmalar veya &quot;şablon&quot;, &quot;bastırma&quot; veya &quot;taslak&quot; gibi belirli jargon gibi potansiyel olarak belirsiz kelimelerin açıklamaları. (İlk etapta bu tür kelimelerden kaçınmanın en iyisi olduğunu unutmayın!)
# Ekran görüntüleri çok faydalıdır. Kırpmayın – mesajın göründüğü tam ekran görüntüsü, tam bağlam sağlar ve birkaç mesajda yeniden kullanılabilir.

Diğer birkaç ipucu:

* Çevirmenlerin çoğu zaman mesajları yazılımı kullanmadan çevirdiğini unutmayın.
* Çoğu zaman, çevirmenler ne modülünüz ne de içindeki diğer mesajlar hakkında herhangi bir bağlam bilgisine sahip değildir.
* Tek başına yeniden ifade edilen bir mesaj çoğu durumda işe yaramaz.
* Tasarımcıların &quot;nav&quot; veya &quot;comps&quot; gibi jargonlarını kullanmayın.
* Modülünüzde kullanılan teknik terimlerin [[betawiki:Terminology#Terminologies|sözlük]] bir kısmını yazmayı düşünün. Bunu yaparsanız, mesajların belgelerinden ona bağlantı verin.

{{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;{{((}}msg-mw{{!}}message key{{))}}&lt;/code&gt;|Mesaj anahtarı}} kullanarak diğer mesajlara bağlantı verebilirsiniz.
Lütfen mesajların bir kısmı başka mesajlardan geliyorsa (bu önlenemiyorsa) veya bazı mesajlar birlikte veya aynı bağlamda gösteriliyorsa bunu yapın.

translatewiki.net, belgelendirme için bazı varsayılan şablonlar sağlar:

* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-action|doc-action]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt; mesajları için
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-right|doc-right]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt; mesajları için
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-group|doc-group]]|[...]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - kullanıcı grupları etrafındaki mesajlar için (&lt;code&gt;group&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;member&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;page&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;js&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;css&lt;/code&gt;)
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-accesskey|doc-accesskey]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;code&gt;accesskey-&lt;/code&gt; mesajları için

Daha fazla bilgi için şablon sayfalarına bakın.

{{anchor|Internationalisation hints}}
== Uluslararasılaşma ipuçları ==
[[#Mesaj belgelendirmesi|Belgelendirmesine]] yanı sıra, çevirmenler geliştiricilerden işlerini daha kolay ve verimli hâle getirmek ve tüm diller için gerçek ve iyi bir yerelleştirmeye izin vermek için bazı ipuçlarını dikkate almalarını ister.
Yalnızca İngilizce mesaj ekleme veya düzenleme bile olsa, tüm dillerin ihtiyaçlarının farkında olunmalıdır. Her mesaj 300'den fazla dile çevrilir ve bu mümkün olan en iyi şekilde yapılmalıdır.
Bu ipuçlarının doğru uygulanması genellikle İngilizce olarak daha iyi mesajlar yazmanıza da yardımcı olacaktır.

[[Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Help_and_contact_info|Yerelleştirme#Yardım ve iletişim bilgisi]], i18n ile ilgili deneyimli ve bilgili kişilerin yardımını bulabileceğiniz başlıca yerleri listeler.
=== Mesaj parametrelerini ve anahtarları doğru kullanın ===

Bu, mesajlarınız için doğru bir ifadenin ön koşuludur.

=== Mesajın yeniden kullanılmasından kaçının ===
Çevirmenler mesajın yeniden kullanılmasını önermezler.
Bu, sezgisel görünebilir, çünkü kodu kopyalamak ve çoğaltmak genellikle kötü bir uygulamadır, ancak sistem mesajlarında buna sıklıkla ihtiyaç duyulur.
İngilizce'de iki kavram aynı kelime ile ifade edilebilse de, bu onların her dilde aynı kelime ile ifade edilebileceği anlamına gelmez.
&quot;OK&quot; iyi bir örnektir: İngilizce'de bu, genel bir düğme etiketi için kullanılır, ancak bazı dillerde düğme tarafından gerçekleştirilecek işlemle ilgili bir düğme etiketi kullanmayı tercih ederler.
Başka bir örnek, pratikte herhangi bir sıfattır: &quot;çoklu&quot; gibi bir kelime birçok dilde cinsiyete göre değişir, bu yüzden onu birkaç farklı şeyi tanımlamak için tekrar kullanamazsınız ve birkaç ayrı mesaj oluşturmanız gerekir.

Birden çok özdeş mesaj ekliyorsanız, lütfen içeriklerindeki farklılıkları açıklamak için mesaj belgelerini ekleyin.
Çevirmenler için ekstra iş hakkında endişelenmeyin.
Çeviri belleği, gerektiğinde farklı çevirilere sahip olma esnekliğini korurken bunlara çok yardımcı olur.

{{anchor|Avoid_patchwork_messages|Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages}}
=== Parçalanmış veya 'patchwork' mesajlarından kaçının ===
Dillerin değişen sözcük dizilimleri ve karmaşık gramer ve sözdizimsel kuralları vardır.
&quot;Lego&quot; mesajlarını, yani birden fazla metin parçasından oluşan mesajları, muhtemelen bazı dolaylı yollarla (&quot;dize bitiştirme&quot; olarak da adlandırılır) çevirmek çok zordur.

Her mesajı eksiksiz bir ifade yapmak daha iyidir.
Gerekirse, birkaç cümle genellikle bir metin bloğunda çok daha kolay bir şekilde birleştirilebilir.
Birkaç dizeyi tek bir mesajda birleştirmek istediğinizde, bunları parametre olarak iletin, çünkü çevirmenler çeviri yaparken bunları dilleri için doğru şekilde sıralayabilirler.

==== Birbirinden alıntı yapan mesajlar ====
Kuralın bir istisnası, birbirine atıfta bulunan mesajlar olabilir: '&quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot; etiketli alana orijinal yazarın adını girin ve bittiğinde &quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:proceed}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot; seçeneğini tıklayın'.
Bu, bir yazılım geliştiricisi veya viki operatörü daha sonra &quot;name&quot; veya &quot;proceed&quot; mesajlarını değiştirdiğinde mesajı tutarlı hâle getirir.
int hack olmadan, geliştiriciler ve operatörler, birini değiştirdiklerinde, ayarlanması gereken tüm ilgili mesajların farkında olmak zorunda kalacaklardı.

=== Belirli projelere özel terimler ve şablonlar kullanmayın ===
MediaWiki, Wikimedia hareketi içinde ve dışında çok çeşitli insanlar tarafından kullanılmaktadır.
Başlangıçta bir ansiklopedi için yapılmış olsa da, şimdi çeşitli içerik türleri için kullanılıyor.
Bu nedenle genel terimler kullanın.
Örneğin, geliştirmekte olduğunuz özelliğin yalnızca sayfaların &quot;maddeler&quot; olarak adlandırıldığı bir sitede kullanılacağından kesinlikle emin değilseniz, &quot;madde&quot; gibi terimlerden kaçının ve bunun yerine &quot;sayfa&quot; kullanın.
İngilizce Vikipedi topluluk sayfasının adı olan &quot;köy çeşmesi&quot; kullanmayın ve bunun yerine &quot;topluluk tartışma sayfası&quot; gibi genel bir terim kullanın.

Tüm vikilerde belirli bir şablonun var olduğunu varsaymayın.
Şablonlar vikiler için yereldir.
Bu, hem kaynak mesajlar hem de çevirileri için geçerlidir.
Mesajlar şablon kullanıyorsa, yalnızca özelliğin dağıtıldığı ''her'' vikide bir şablon oluşturulursa çalışırlar.
Mesajlarda şablon kullanmaktan tamamen kaçınmak en iyisidir.
Bunları gerçekten kullanmanız gerekiyorsa, bunu mesaj belgelerinde ve uzantı kurulum talimatlarında açıkça belgelemelisiniz.

=== Cümlelerdeki tarihlerden ayrı zamanlar ===
Bazı diller, bir cümledeki diğer kelimelere dilbilgisi açısından bağlı olan bir tarih ve zaman arasına bir şey eklemek zorundadır.
Böylece tarih/saati bir arada kullanamayacaklar.
Diğerleri kombinasyonu uygun bulabilir, bu nedenle bu gibi durumlarda üç parametre değeri (date/time, date, time) sağlamak genellikle en iyi seçimdir ve her çeviride ilkini veya son ikisini gerektiği gibi kullanılmadan bırakın.

=== Mesajlarda &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; kullanmaktan kaçının ===
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; birkaç dezavantaja sahiptir.
Herhangi bir şey olabilir (kısaltma, kelime, kısa ifade, ''vb.'') ve dile bağlı olarak, her durumda &lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Messages_API#…on use context inside sentences via GRAMMAR|&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/code&gt; kullanılması gerekebilir.
Ne olursa olsun, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; içeren her iletinin, kodunuzun yüklendiği her yeni viki için çoğu viki dilinde incelenmesi gerekir.
Çoğu durumda, bir dil için genel bir &lt;code&gt;GRAMMAR&lt;/code&gt; yapılandırması olmadığında, viki operatörlerinin &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; çalışması için &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; elde etmek için PHP kodunu eklemesi veya değiştirmesi gerekir.
Bu, diğerlerine göre hem daha fazla beceri hem de daha fazla anlayış gerektirir.
&quot;Bu viki&quot; gibi genel kaynakları sahip olmak daha uygundur.
Bu, kurulumların bu mesajları yerel olarak &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; kullanacak şekilde değiştirmesini engellemez, ancak en azından bunu yapmak zorunda kalmazlar ve viki zaten çalışıp kullanılana kadar mesaj uyarlamasını erteleyebilirler.

=== Görsel yerleşim ve konumlara atıfta bulunmaktan kaçının ===
Neyin nerede oluşturulduğu, görünümlere bağlıdır.
Çoğu zaman, soldan sağa yazılan dillerin ekran düzenleri, sağdan sola yazılan diller için kullanılanlara kıyasla yansıtılır, ancak her zaman değil ve bazı diller ve vikiler için tamamen değil.
Elde taşınan cihazlar, dar pencereler vb., daha büyük ekranlarda yan yana görünecek şekilde birbirinin altında bloklar gösterebilir.
Site ve kullanıcı tarafından yazılan JavaScript betikleri ve küçük araçları, parçaları gizleyebildiğinden ve yapabildiğinden veya öngörülemeyen şekillerde şeyleri hareket ettirebildiğinden, gerçek düzeni bilmenin güvenilir bir yolu yoktur.

Kullanıcı arayüzü dili sayfanın içerik dili olmayabileceğinden ve koşullara bağlı olarak düzen ikisinin bir karışımı olabileceğinden, düzen bilgilerini içerik dillerine bağlamak yanlıştır.
Akustik ekran okuyucular ve diğer yardımcı cihazlar gibi görsel olmayan kullanıcı aracıları, görsel düzen kavramına bile sahip değildir.
Bu nedenle, anlamsal düzen terimleri hâlâ kullanılabilse de (&quot;formdaki önceki adımlar&quot;, ''vb.'') durumların çoğunda görsel yerleşim konumlarına başvurmamalısınız.

MediaWiki, arayüzün mevcut yönlülüğüne bağlı olarak farklı mesajların veya mesaj parçalarının gösterilmesini desteklemez ([[phab:T30997|T30997]] sayfasına bakın).

Doğu ve Kuzey Asya'da yukarıdan aşağıya yazma için yaklaşan tarayıcı ve MediaWiki desteği,&lt;ref&gt;http://dev.w3.org/csswg/css3-writing-modes/&lt;/ref&gt; en az sekiz olası düzen ile ekran düzenlerini daha da öngörülemez hâle getirecek (sol/sağ başlangıç konumu, üst/alt başlangıç konumu ve hangisi önce gerçekleşir).

=== Ekran renklerine atıfta bulunmaktan kaçının ===
Bir şeyin oluşturulduğu renk, görünümler, site ve kullanıcı tarafından yazılan JavaScript betikleri ve küçük araçlar ve erişilebilirlik veya teknolojik sınırlamalar nedeniyle yerel kullanıcı aracısı geçersiz kılma gibi birçok faktöre bağlıdır.
Akustik ekran okuyucular ve diğer yardımcı cihazlar gibi görsel olmayan kullanıcı aracılarının renk kavramı bile yoktur.
Bu nedenle ekran renklerine yapmamalısınız.
(Aynı nedenle, kullanıcıyı durum hakkında bilgilendirmek için bir mekanizma olarak tek başına renge güvenmemelisiniz.)

=== Her giriş alanından önce ve sonra mesaj ögelerine sahip olun ===

:''Bu önerilen bir kılavuzdur, MediaWiki geliştirmede standart hâle gelmemiştir''

İngilizce, item–colon–space–input-field alanı biçimindeki soru sormanın verimli kullanımına izin verirken, diğer birçok dil bunu yapmaz.
İngilizce'de bile, &quot;Distance: ___ metres&quot; yerine genellikle &quot;Distance (in metres): ___&quot; kullanmak istersiniz.
{{tag|textarea|open}} ögelerini bir kenara bırakarak, &quot;Distance: ___ metres&quot; düzenini izleyen her giriş alanını düşünmelisiniz. Böyle:

* 2. mesaj boş olsa bile İngilizce ve diğer bazı dillerde iki mesaj verin veya
* &lt;code&gt;$i&lt;/code&gt; parametreleri aracılığıyla girişlerin yerleştirilmesine izin verir.
=== Mesajlarda çevrilmemiş HTML işaretlemesinden kaçının ===
{{tag|div|open}} etiketleri, yukarıdaki veya alttaki cetveller ve benzeri gibi çeviri gerektirmeyen HTML işaretlemesi genellikle iletilerin parçası olmamalıdır.
Çevirmenlere gereksiz yük bindirir, ileti dosyasının boyutunu artırır ve çeviri sürecinde yanlışlıkla değiştirilme veya atlanma riski taşır.
Genel olarak, mümkünse mesajlarda ham HTML'den kaçının.

=== Mesajlar genellikle düşündüğünüzden daha uzundur! ===

Yabancı dildeki mesaj dosyalarına göz atarken, neredeyse hiçbir zaman Çince olanlardan daha kısa, nadiren İngilizce olanlardan daha kısa ve genellikle İngilizce olanlardan çok daha uzun mesajlar bulamazsınız.

Özellikle formlarda, giriş alanlarının önünde, İngilizce mesajlar kısa ve öz olma eğilimindedir.
Bu genellikle çevirilerde tutulmaz.
Diller, İngilizce'de bulunan teknik kelime dağarcığından yoksun olabilir ve bazı kavramları açıklamak için birden fazla kelime veya hatta tam cümleler gerektirebilir.
Örneğin, &quot;TSV file:&quot; adlı kısa İngilizce mesajın bir dile tam anlamıyla şu şekilde çevrilmesi gerekebilir:
&lt;blockquote&gt;''Lütfen buraya, her biri bir dizi bilgi alanı olarak düzenlenmiş, söz konusu bilgi alanlarının çitle çevrildiği ve aralarındaki çitlerin tek olduğu, sıralı olarak düzenlenmiş bir dizi daktilo satırından oluşan bir bilgisayar verileri koleksiyonunu belirten bir ad yazın ve aralarındaki parmaklıklar, bir daktilo arabasını bir sonraki önceden tanımlanmış konuma kaydıran türden tek işaretlerdir. İşte başlıyoruz: _____ (teşekkür ederiz)''&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Bu, kuşkusuz, uç bir örnek, ancak özelliği alıyorsunuz.
Bu cümleyi, her kelimenin kendine ait bir satırı kapladığı ve giriş alanının bir sonraki sütunda dikey olarak ortalandığı bir biçimde bir sütunda hayal edin. :-(

=== Farklı şeyleri veya kavramları belirtmek için çok yakın, benzer veya aynı kelimeleri kullanmaktan kaçının ===
Örneğin, sayfalar, söz konusu sayfanın geçmiş ''sürümlerini'' içeren (belirli bir tarih, saat ve düzenlemeye ait) daha eski ''revizyonlara'' sahip olabilir.
''Revizyon'' ve ''versiyon'' kelimeleri birbirinin yerine kullanılabilir.
Versiyonlanmış sayfalar revize edildiğinde sorun çıkıyor ve revizyondan, ''yani'' revize etme sürecinden de söz ediliyor.
&quot;Revizyon&quot;un iki eşanlamlısının farklı çevirileri olduğunda bu ciddi bir sorun teşkil etmeyebilir.
Ancak buna güvenmeyin.
O zaman, yanlış yorumlanmasını önlemek için &quot;revizyon&quot;, &quot;sürüm&quot; ''olarak da bilinen'' kullanımından tamamen kaçınmak daha iyidir.

=== Temel kelimelerin öngörülemeyen çağrışımları olabilir veya hiç mevcut olmayabilir ===
MediaWiki'de çok özel kullanımları nedeniyle çevrilmesi zor olan bazı kelimeler var.
Bazıları [[#Expect untranslated words|hiç çevrilmemesini bekleyebilirsiniz]].
Örneğin, birkaç dilde &quot;bir şeyi kullanan kişi&quot; ile ilgili &quot;kullanıcı&quot; kelimesi yoktur.
Benzer şekilde, [[:en:Colognian language|Kölsch]]'deki İngilizce &quot;namespace&quot; ve &quot;apartment&quot; kelimeleri aynı kelimeyi tercüme eder.
Ayrıca, Kölsch'te, &quot;use&quot; yapılacak herhangi bir gönderme çok güçlü bir şekilde &quot;abuse&quot; anlamına geleceğinden, tek kelimeyle &quot;corroborator and participant&quot; derler.
&quot;Wiki çiftliği&quot; terimi, &quot;vikilerle dolu ahır&quot; olarak çevrilir, çünkü tek ürünlü bir çiftlik, dilde bir çelişki olacağından ve anlaşılmadığından ''vb.''

{{anchor|Expect untranslated words}}
=== Çevrilmemiş kelimeleri beklemesi ===

:''Bu önerilen bir kılavuzdur, MediaWiki geliştirmede henüz standart hâle gelmemiştir.''

İngilizce özel adlar, etiket adları, ''vb.'' ve bilgisayar dilinin tercüme edilmemesi ve bunun yerine ödünç kelimeler veya yabancı kelimeler olarak alınması nadir değildir.
İkinci durumda, bazı özellikle titiz çevirmenler, &lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot;&gt; … &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; gibi HTML işaretlemesi ile bu tür kelimeleri başka bir dile ait olarak işaretleyebilir.

Açık güvenlik risklerine rağmen, mesaj çıkış işleyicinizin bu tür işaretlemeyi değişmeden geçirmesini sağlamayı düşünebilirsiniz.

=== Açıklayıcı satır içi işaretlemeye izin verin ===

:''Bu önerilen bir kılavuzdur, MediaWiki geliştirmede henüz standart hâle gelmemiştir.''

Bazen, hedef dillerde yeni başlayanlar tarafından hemen anlaşılmayan, ancak deneyimli bilgisayar kullanıcıları için açık olan kısaltmalar, teknik terimler veya genel olarak belirsiz kelimeler olabilir.
Yeni gelenleri zor durumda bırakmadan uzun açıklamaların ekran karmaşasını önlemek için çevirmenler, fareyi üzerlerine getirdiğinizde tarayıcılar tarafından gösterilen {{tag|abbr|open}} açıklamalar olarak açıklama eklemeyi seçebilirler.

Örneğin, görsel döndürmeyle ilgili MediaWiki çekirdek mesajı &lt;code&gt;exif-orientation-8&lt;/code&gt; ve İngilizce'de basitçe &quot;&lt;code&gt;Rotated 90° CW&lt;/code&gt;&quot;, Fas Arapçasında şu şekilde çevrilir:

:&lt;code lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &amp;lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&amp;lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/code&gt;

şunu veriyor:

:&lt;span lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/span&gt;

gerektiğinde &quot;saat yönünün tersine&quot; kısaltmasının açıklanması.

Orijinal mesaj bunları kullanmasa bile, mesaj çıkış işleyicinizin bu tür işaretlemeyi değişmeden geçirmesini sağlamayı düşünebilirsiniz.

=== Gerektiğinde {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}} ve {{tag|kbd|open}} etiketlerini kullanın ===
Teknik parametreler, değerler veya klavye girişleri hakkında konuşurken, {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}} veya {{tag|kbd|open}} HTML etiketlerini kullanarak bunları uygun şekilde işaretleyin.
Böylece tipografik olarak normal metinden ayrılırlar.
Bu, kafa karışıklığını, hataları ve yanlış temsilleri önleyerek okuyuculara anlamlarını netleştirir.
İleti işleyicinizin bu tür işaretlemeye izin verdiğinden emin olun.

=== Semboller, iki nokta üst üste, parantez, ''vb.'' mesajların parçalarıdır ===
Birçok sembol de yerelleştirilebilir. Bazı yazımlarda, Latin alfabesinden farklı türde parantezler bulunur.
Bazı dillerde bir etiket veya giriş isteminden sonra iki nokta üst üste işareti uygun olmayabilir.
Bu sembollerin mesajlara dahil edilmesi, daha iyi ve daha az Anglo-merkezli çeviriler yapılmasına yardımcı olur ve ayrıca kod karmaşasını azaltır.

Örneğin, «Norveç», »İsveççe», »Danca«, „Almanca“ ve 「Japonca」 dillerinde kullanılan farklı tırnak işareti kuralları vardır.&lt;ref&gt;[[:tr:Tırnak işareti]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Bazı metni yerelleştirilmiş parantezler, parantezler veya tırnak işaretleri içine almanız gerekiyorsa, &lt;code&gt;parentheses&lt;/code&gt; {{int:parentheses}} veya &lt;code&gt;brackets&lt;/code&gt; {{int:quotation-marks}} veya &lt;code&gt;quotation-marks&lt;/code&gt; {{int:quotation-marks}} gibi mesajlar kullanabilirsiniz:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php&gt;wfMessage( 'parentheses' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside parentheses */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'brackets' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside brackets */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'quotation-marks' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside quotation marks */ )-&gt;escaped()&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Sembollerin ve noktalama işaretlerinin çeviriden sağ çıkmasını beklemeyin ===
Sağdan sola yazılan diller (İngilizce'nin aksine) genellikle &quot;sonraki&quot; ve &quot;önceki&quot; bağlantılarla sunulan ok sembollerini değiştirir ve bunların bir mesaj metnine göre yerleşimleri de ters çevrilebilir veya çevrilmeyebilir.
Üç nokta &quot;''vb.''&quot; ya da kelimelere çevrilebilir.
Soru işaretleri, ünlem işaretleri, iki nokta üst üste işareti, cümle sonundakiler dışında, hiç veya iki kez konulmayacaktır.
Sonuç olarak, bunların hepsini her zaman mesajlarınızın metnine dahil edin ve asla programlı olarak eklemeye çalışmayın.

=== Tam durakları kullanın ===
Normal cümleleri noktalı olarak '''sonlandırın'''.
Bu genellikle bir çevirmenin, farklı şekilde çevrilmesi gerekebilecek manşetler veya liste öğeleri olmadığını bilmesinin tek göstergesidir.

=== Bağlantı çengelleri ===

==== Vikimetin bağlantıları ====

Bağlantı çengelleri, mesajlara birkaç teknik yolla yerleştirilebilir:

# vikimetin aracılığıyla: …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;''bir viki sayfası''|''çengel''&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…,
# vikimetin aracılığıyla: …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;[''birkaç-url'' ''çengel'']&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…, or
# bağlantı metni, MediaWiki ad alanındaki bir mesajdır. ''Bunu önleyin!''

İkincisi, çevirmenler için genellikle zor veya imkansızdır, burada da [[#Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages|parçalanmış veya 'patchwork' mesajlardan kaçının]].
&quot;&lt;code&gt;bazı-url&lt;/code&gt;&quot; ögesinin boşluk içermediğinden emin olun.

==== Anlamlı bağlantı çengelleri kullanın ====
İfadenize dikkat edin.
Bağlantı çengelleri, hem bağlantılı kelimeler hem de hedef çengel olmak üzere, sayfaların arama motoru değerlendirmesinde önemli bir rol oynar.
Çengelin hedef sayfayı iyi tanımladığından emin olun.
Her zaman sıradan ve genel kelimelerden kaçının.
Örneğin, hedef sayfalar neredeyse hiçbir zaman &quot;burayı tıklayın&quot; ile ilgili olmadığı için, &quot;Burayı tıklayın&quot; kesinlikle gidilmez,&lt;ref&gt;http://www.w3.org/QA/Tips/noClickHere&lt;/ref&gt;.
Bunu da bağlantıların etrafındaki cümlelere koyma, çünkü &quot;burası&quot; tıklanacak yer değildi.
Bunun yerine, &quot;İsterseniz [[Special:Upload|bir dosya yükleyebilirsiniz]]&quot; gibi, kullanıcının bağlantıyı takip ederken ne elde edeceğini anlatan kesin eylem sözcükleri kullanın.

Ayrıca ''[http://www.nngroup.com/articles/using-link-titles-to-help-users-predict-where-they-are-going/ Kullanıcıların nereye gittiklerini tahmin etmelerine yardımcı olma]'' ve [[w:Mystery meat navigation|gizemli et gezinitisi]] ve ''[https://tosbourn.com/click-here/ Buraya tıklayın bağlantısını bağlantı metni olarak kullanmamamızın ana nedenleri]'' bakın.

=== Jargon ve argodan kaçının ===
Mesajlarda geliştirici ve uzman kullanıcı jargonundan kaçının. Mümkün olduğunca basit bir dil kullanmaya çalışın.
Kullanıcıya bir şey olduğunu veya olmadığını bildirmek istediğinizde &quot;başarılı&quot;, &quot;başarılı şekilde&quot;, &quot;başarısız&quot;, &quot;hata meydana geldi&quot; vb.
Bu, geliştiricilerin her şeyi doğru veya yanlış olarak görme perspektifinden gelir, ancak kullanıcılar genellikle yalnızca gerçekte ne olduğunu veya olmadığını ve bu konuda ne yapmaları gerektiğini (eğer varsa) bilmek ister. Böyle:

* &quot;Dosya başarıyla yeniden adlandırıldı&quot; -&gt; &quot;Dosya yeniden adlandırıldı&quot;
* &quot;Dosya yeniden adlandırılamadı&quot; -&gt; &quot;Bu ada sahip bir dosya zaten var. Lütfen farklı bir ad seçin.&quot;

=== Boşlukların ve satır sonlarının farkında olun ===
MediaWiki'nin yerelleştirilmiş mesajları genellikle viki içinde, canlı vikilerdeki viki işlemleri veya [[translatewiki.net]] üzerindeki çevirmenler tarafından düzenlenir.
Özellikle mesajınızın başındaki veya sonundaki boşlukların editörleri nasıl etkileyeceğinin farkında olmalısınız:

* Mesajın sonundaki boşluklar ve satır sonları (yeni satırlar) vikimetin düzenleyici tarafından her zaman otomatik olarak kaldırılır. İletiniz, vikide düzenlendiğinde kaybolacağından boşluk veya satır sonu ile bitmemelidir.
* Başlangıçtaki boşluklar ve satır sonları otomatik olarak kaldırılmaz, ancak düzenleme sırasında yanlışlıkla kaldırılmaları muhtemeldir ve bundan kaçınılmalıdır.

Mesajınızı aktif metinle başlatın ve bitirin; Etrafında yeni bir satıra veya paragraf sonuna ihtiyacınız varsa, çevreleyen kodunuz onu döndürülen metne eklemekle ilgilenmelidir.

'Kelime ayırıcı' (çoğu dilde yalnızca bir boşluk karakterinden oluşur) gibi sonunda boşluk gerektiren bazı mesajlar vardır.
Bu tür kullanım durumlarını desteklemek için, mesaj aksi takdirde vikimetin veya HTML biçimlendirmesine izin vermese bile, mesajlarda aşağıdaki HTML varlıklarına izin verilir ve gerçek karakterlere dönüştürülür:&lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/REL1_34/includes/cache/MessageCache.php#L887&lt;/ref&gt;

* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#32;&lt;/code&gt; – alan
* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/code&gt; veya &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#160;&lt;/code&gt; – [[:tr:Ayrılmaz alan|ayrılmaz alan]]
* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;shy;&lt;/code&gt; – [[w:soft hyphen|esnek kısa çizgi]]

İlgili bir notta, [[Special:MyLanguage/pre-save transforms|önceden kaydetme dönüşümleri]] tarafından etkilenen diğer sözdizimi öğeleri de mesajlarda kullanılmamalıdır, çünkü bunlar mesaj vikide düzenlendiğinde dönüştürüleceklerdir.

=== Standart büyük harf kullanın ===
Büyük harf kullanımı, çevirmenlere tek sözcükler, liste veya menü ögeleri, ifadeler veya tam cümleler gibi neyi çevirdikleri konusunda ipuçları verir.
Doğru (standart) büyük harf kullanımı, arama motorlarının sayfalarınızı değerlendirmesinde de rol oynayabilir.
MediaWiki, arayüz mesajlarında [[:tr:Büyük ve küçük harf|cümle harfi]] (''Hızlı kahverengi tilki tembel köpeğin üzerinden atlar'') kullanır.

Çoğu yazı sisteminde büyük harf bulunmadığını ve bunlara sahip olanlardan bazılarının bunları İngilizce'den farklı şekilde kullandığını daima unutmayın.
Bu nedenle, vurgu için TÜMÜ BÜYÜK HARF kullanmayın.
Aşağıdakilere göre CSS veya HTML {{tag|em|open}} veya {{tag|strong|open}} kullanın:

==== Vurgu ====
Normal metinde, '''kalın yüz''' veya ''eğik'' ve benzeri [[w:Emphasis|vurgu]] mesaj metinlerinin bir parçası olmalıdır.
Vurgulama konusundaki yerel kurallar genellikle farklılık gösterir, özellikle bazı Asya alfabelerinin kendilerine ait olan kuralları vardır.
Çevirmenler vurguyu hedef dillerine ve alanlarına göre ayarlayabilmelidir.
Dil veya yazım bazında işaretlemeye izin vermek için kullanıcı arayüzünüzde &quot;{{tag|em|open}}&quot; ve &quot;{{tag|strong|open}}&quot; kullanmayı deneyin.

İngiliz ve Avrupa stillerinin modern ekran düzenlerinde vurgu daha az kullanılır.
Nasıl tercüme edileceğine dair değerli ipuçları verebileceğinden, bunu [[#Message documentation|Mesa belgelendirmenize]] yine de iletin.
Vurgu, çevirmenlerin bilmesi koşuluyla, uygun olduğu şekilde diğer kültürel bağlamlarda kullanılabilir ve kullanılmalıdır.

&lt;references /&gt;

== Ayrıca bakınız ==

* {{ll|Customization}}
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings}}
* {{ll|Manual:Skins}}
* {{ll|Manual:Messages API}}
* {{ll|Localisation}}
* [[translatewiki:FAQ]]

[[Category:Customization techniques{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:User interface{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Localisation{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:System message{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>26m3z3u8hisxac9gvzlqacb52lqk571</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402537</id>
      <parentid>5402530</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:25:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="55367" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{i18n navigation}}
{{TOC right|limit=2}}

[[Image:MediaWiki SpecialUpload interface labelled.png|thumb|Çeşitli sistem mesajlarını gösteren [[Special:Upload]] formunun etiketli diyagramı.]]
'''Sistem mesajı''', davranışını kişiselleştirmek için kullanılabilecek düz metin (nowiki), vikimetin, [[:tr:CSS|CSS]] veya [[:tr:JavaScript|JavaScript]] parçacığıdır. MediaWiki ve her dilin görünümü ve [[w:Locale (computer software)|yereldir]]. MediaWiki, hem çekirdek hem de uzantılar için, MediaWiki kullanıcı arayüzünün uluslararası hâle getirilmesine ve yerelleştirilmesine olanak tanıyan, arayüzün kullanıcıya bakan herhangi bir kısmı için mesajlar kullanır.
MediaWiki'de kullanılan tüm mesajlar bir ''mesaj dosyası'' içinde tanımlanmıştır.

== Vikide mesajları geçersiz kılma ==
Mesajlar, viki üzerinde düzenlenerek varsayılan değerlerinden geçersiz kılınabilir.
Her mesajın MediaWiki ad alanında, mesaj anahtarının sayfanın adı olduğu bir viki sayfası vardır.
Örneğin, &quot;aboutsite&quot; mesajı MediaWiki:aboutsite altında saklanır.
Varsayılan olarak, kullanıcının &quot;editinterface&quot; iznine sahip olmadığı sürece, bu ad alanının düzenlenmesi kısıtlanmıştır.
Tüm mesaj sayfalarının bir listesi [[Special:AllMessages]] sayfasında bulunabilir.
Arayüz mesajlarını düzenlemek, normal bir viki sayfasını düzenlemek gibi, genellikle basittir, ancak varsayılan olarak hizmetlilere (ve arayüz hizmetlilere) atanan [[editinterface]] iznine sahip kullanıcılarla sınırlıdır.
[[Image:Wiki-system-messages.png|thumb|Eski [[Special:AllMessages]] sayfasındaki örnek satır.]]
[[Special:AllMessages]] tablosu iki sütun içeriyor: bağlantılı arayüz adı ve metin.
Metin yukarıdaki varsayılan metni ve aşağıdaki özelleştirilmiş metni göstermek için yatay olarak bölünmüştür.
Özel bir mesaj olmadığında, yalnızca varsayılan gösterilecektir.
Bir mesajı özelleştirmek için sol sütundaki üst bağlantıya (mesajın adı) tıklayın.
Düzenleme sayfası boş olduğundan, varsayılan metin kullanımdaysa bu bağlantı kırmızıdır.

Sol sütun hücrelerindeki alt bağlantılar, o mesaj için tartışma sayfalarına yönlendirir.

{{anchor|Finding messages and documentation}}
== Mesajları ve belgeleri bulma ==
Her mesajın MediaWiki tarafından nasıl kullanıldığı, mevcut değişkenler, kullanılan parametreler, sınırlamalar vb., [[#Message_documentation|mesaj belgelemesi yönergeleri]] uyarınca [//translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;task=reviewall&amp;group=core&amp;language=qqq&amp;limit=5000&amp;action=page&amp;filter= qqq sözde dilindeki tam belgeler] dosyalarında açıklanır.
Bazı arayüz mesajları için daha eski {{ll|Category:Interface messages}} değerinde daha uzun açıklama sayfaları bulunabilir.

{{note|1=
translatewiki.net'in viki tabanında, qqq mesajın kullanıcı belgelerinin bulunduğu sayfadır (İngilizce olarak, çünkü tüm okuyuculara aynı şekilde gösterilir).
Aynı şekilde /en /ge /fr .../qqq maddenin bir alt sayfasıdır ve doğrudan görüntülenebilir.

* İngilizce bir maddeyi görüntülemek için [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/en]] deneyin,
* Aynı maddeyi Fransızca olarak görüntülemek için [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/fr]] deneyin,
* İlişkili belgelerini (İngilizce) görüntülemek için [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/qqq]] deneyin.

Bu bakış açısından &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt;, isteğin &lt;code&gt;language=&lt;/code&gt; parametresinde bir dil olarak kabul edilir.
}}

MediaWiki 1.18 ve sonraki sürümlerde, URL'ye &lt;code&gt;?[[uselang]]=qqx&lt;/code&gt; veya URL zaten bir &lt;code&gt;?&lt;/code&gt; karakteri ([{{fullurl:{{FULLPAGENAME}}|uselang=qqx}} örnek]) içeriyorsa, &lt;code&gt;&amp;uselang=qqx&lt;/code&gt; ekleyerek yapılabilen özel sözde dil kodu &lt;code&gt;'''[[Help:Qqx|qqx]]'''&lt;/code&gt; içindeki bir vikiye göz atarak bir mesaj anahtarı bulabilirsiniz. Tüm mesajlar daha sonra mesaj anahtarları ile değiştirilecektir, böylece hangi mesajın sorumlu olduğunu belirleyebilirsiniz. Her zaman içerik dilinde olan mesajlar qqx kullanılarak gösterilmeyecektir.

Arayüzün bazı bölümleri, qqx hilesini kullandığınızda gösterilen dizeye &lt;code&gt;nstab-&lt;/code&gt; ekler. Örneğin, ana ad alanındaki tartışma sayfasına bağlanan sekmenin etiketi &lt;code&gt;nstab-talk&lt;/code&gt; olarak gösterilir, ancak dize aslında [[MediaWiki:Talk]] konumunda bulunur.

Sayfanın örn. [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|&quot;Tercihler&quot; özel sayfa]] sekmeyi &lt;code&gt;uselang&lt;/code&gt; parametresinden sonra eklemeniz gerekecek, ör. &lt;code&gt;Special:Preferences?uselang=qqx#mw-prefsection-rendering&lt;/code&gt;.

{{anchor|Localisation file format}}
== Yerelleştirme dosya biçimi ==

MediaWiki'de kullanılan tüm mesajlar bir ''mesaj dosyası'' içinde tanımlanmıştır.

MediaWiki'de iki tür mesaj dosyası vardır: JSON ve PHP.
Nisan 2014 itibariyle, temel MediaWiki ve bakımı yapılan uzantıların çoğu JSON biçimine taşındı.
Tüm yeni geliştirmeler için JSON kullanmalısınız.
JSON'a geçiş hakkında daha fazla bilgi için [[Requests for comment/Localisation format]] sayfasına bakın.

=== JSON ===

2013'ün sonlarından itibaren mesajlar için yeni bir dosya formatı tanıtıldı: JSON.
Bu, genel bir genel veri depolama biçimi olarak bilinen sade [[:tr:JSON|JSON]]'dur.
İçindeki her anahtar bir mesaj anahtarıdır ve değer mesaj metnidir.
Ayrıca, çeviri yazarları gibi çeviriyle ilgili bilgileri depolamak için özel &lt;code&gt;@metadata&lt;/code&gt; anahtarı kullanılır.

JSON kullanmak, yürütülebilir olmadığından yerelleştirme dosyalarını daha güvenli hâle getirir.
Ayrıca, MediaWiki benzeri ön uç yerelleştirme yetenekleri sağlayan ve [[Milkshake|Project Milkshake]] kapsamında geliştirilen ve MediaWiki'ye daha az bağımlı olmak isteyen bazı uzantılar tarafından kullanılan JavaScript kitaplık olan jquery.i18n ile de uyumludur, örneğin [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor]] ve [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector|UniversalLanguageSelector]].

Daha geniş uluslararasılaştırma ve yerelleştirme araçları paketi &quot;[[Project Milkshake]]&quot; olarak adlandırıldığından, bazı kişiler bu biçimi &quot;banana&quot; olarak adlandırır.

=== Dosya konumu ===
MediaWiki çekirdeğinde, yerelleştirme dosyaları &lt;code&gt;{{git file |file=languages/i18n |action=tree}}&lt;/code&gt; dizinine yerleştirilir.
MediaWiki uzantıları genellikle kendi uzantılarını &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt; bir alt dizine yerleştirir.
Bir proje içinde çok sayıda mesaj varsa, sürdürülebilirlik için bunları iki veya daha fazla güncel alt dizine bölmek istenebilir.
MediaWiki bağlamında, bu alt dizinleri listelemek için {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}} yapılandırma anahtarı kullanılır.
İşte MediaWiki için VisualEditor uzantısından bir örnek:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
  &quot;MessagesDirs&quot;: {
    &quot;VisualEditor&quot;: [
      &quot;lib/ve/modules/ve/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-mw/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-wmf/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;lib/ve/lib/oojs-ui/i18n&quot;
    ]
  }
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

İngilizce &quot;en&quot; ileti dosyasına &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; yeni iletiler eklersiniz ve bunları ileti belgeleme dosyasında &quot;qqq&quot; &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; özel sözde dil koduyla belgelersiniz.
''Ayrıca bakınız: [[#Adding new messages|Yeni mesajlar ekleme]]''.

==== Meta veri ====

Şu anda dosyalarda aşağıdaki meta veri alanları kullanılmaktadır:

;authors
:İletilerin yazarlarının bir JSON listesi. İngilizce (en) ve mesaj belgeleri (qqq) için bunlar, mesaj dosyası düzenlendiğinde elle eklenir. Diğer tüm diller için bu, mesaj dosyası [[translatewiki.net]] üzerinden dışa aktarıldığında otomatik olarak eklenir. Mesaj belgeleri translatewiki.net üzerinde düzenlenebilir ve belge düzenleyiciler de qqq.json dosyasına otomatik olarak eklenir.
;message-documentation
:Bu, mesaj belgelerini depolamak için kullanılan sözde dil kodudur. MediaWiki için bu her zaman ''qqq'' kodudur. (Bu, bazı uzantılarda görünür, ancak gerçekte hiçbir şekilde işlenmez. Zorunlu değildir.)

==== Sözleşmeler ====

Satır sonları gibi özel karakterlerden kaçılır (&lt;code&gt;&quot;\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Farklı alfabelerdeki harfleri temsil eden Unicode karakterler, karakter kodları olarak değil, gerçek karakterler olarak saklanır, çünkü bu dosyalar bazen insanlar tarafından okunur ve bu, dosyaları daha küçük yapar (&lt;code&gt;&quot;誼&quot;&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u8ABC&quot;&lt;/code&gt; değil).
Her durumda, geliştiricilerin İngilizce dışındaki herhangi bir dilde mesajları düzenlemek için birkaç nedeni vardır, çünkü bunlar genellikle translatewiki.net aracılığıyla düzenlenir.

HTML kodu da kaçmaz, yani &lt;code&gt;&quot;&amp;lt;strong&gt;Warning&amp;lt;/strong&gt;&quot;&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u003cstrong\u003eWarning\u003c/strong\u003e&quot;&lt;/code&gt; değil.

JSON dosyaları sekmeler kullanılarak girintilidir.

=== PHP ===

Daha eski yerelleştirme dosyası biçimi PHP'dir.
Bu aslında tüm mesajları içeren bir PHP dizisidir.
Çekirdek MediaWiki'de her dil, MediaWiki kaynak kodunun diller/mesaj dizinindeki kendi dosyasında bulunur.
Uzantılarda tüm diller ve mesaj belgeleri (''qqq'') aynı dosyadadır: ''ExtensionName.i18n.php'', genellikle uzantının ana dizinindedir.

PHP'den JSON'a geçiş yapmak için [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:GenerateJsonI18n.php|generateJsonI18n.php]] betiğini kullanın.
Mesajları JSON dosyalarına taşıyacak ve PHP dosyasının metnini JSON dosyalarına işaret eden bir altlık ile değiştirecektir.
Bu kalıp kod, MediaWiki 1.19 ile geriye dönük uyumluluk için gereklidir.
MediaWiki 1.19 uyumluluğu gerektirmeyen yeni uzantılarda kullanılmamaktadır.

== Mesajları kullanma ==
MediaWiki, koddaki anahtarlarla kaynaklanan mesajların ''merkezi'' bir deposunu kullanır.
Bu, örneğin kaynak dosyalardan çevrilebilir dizeleri çıkaran &lt;code&gt;Gettext&lt;/code&gt; üzerinden farklıdır.
Anahtar tabanlı sistem, orijinal metinleri düzeltmek ve mesajlardaki değişiklikleri izlemek gibi bazı şeyleri kolaylaştırır.
Dezavantajı, elbette, kullanılan mesajların listesi ve bu tuşlar için kaynak metinlerin listesinin senkronizasyondan çıkabilmesidir.
Pratikte bu büyük bir sorun değil ve tek önemli sorun, bazen artık kullanılmayan ekstra mesajların hâlâ çeviri için kalmasıdır.

İleti anahtarlarını daha yönetilebilir ve daha kolay bulmak için grep ile de her zaman tam olarak yazın ve dinamik olarak oluşturmaya çok fazla güvenmeyin.
Kodunuza daha iyi bir yapı kazandırdığını düşünüyorsanız, mesaj anahtarlarının bölümlerini birleştirebilirsiniz, ancak olası sonuç anahtarlarının bir listesiyle birlikte yakına bir yorum koyun.

Ayrıca [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding_conventions#Dynamic_identifiers|kod kurallarına]] bakın. Örneğin:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// Burada kullanılabilecek mesajlar:
// * myextension-connection-success
// * myextension-connection-warning
// * myextension-connection-error
$text = wfMessage( 'myextension-connection-' . $status )-&gt;parse();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

JavaScript'te bir mesaj kullanmak için, ResourceLoader modülünüzün tanımında, &lt;code&gt;&quot;messages&quot;&lt;/code&gt; özelliğinde [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Messages API#Using a ResourceLoader module|listeleme]] yapmanız gerekir.

PHP ve JavaScript'te mesaj işlevlerinin ayrıntılı kullanımı {{ll|Manual:Messages API}} sayfasındadır.
'''Bu önemli bir belgelendirme sayfasıdır ve mesajları kullanan kod yazmadan önce okumalısınız.'''

{{anchor|Message sources}}
== Mesaj kaynakları ==

Kod, şu kaynaklardan gelen sistem mesajlarını arar:
* MediaWiki ad alanı. Bu, standart mesajlar uygun olmadığında veya istenmediğinde vikilerin tüm mesajlarını benimsemesine veya geçersiz kılmasına izin verir.
** MediaWiki:''Mesaj-anahtarı'' varsayılan mesajdır,
** MediaWiki:''Mesaj-anahtarı''/''dil-kodu'', bir kullanıcı vikinin varsayılan dilinden başka bir dil seçtiğinde kullanılacak mesajdır.
* Mesaj dosyalarından:
** Çekirdek MediaWiki'nin kendisi ve şu anda bakımı yapılan çoğu [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All extensions|uzantılar]] her dil için &lt;code&gt;''zyx''.json&lt;/code&gt; adlı bir dosya kullanır, burada ''zyx'' dil için dil kodu bulunur.
** Bazı eski uzantılar, genellikle &lt;code&gt;''MyExtensionName''.i18n.php&lt;/code&gt; adlı tüm dillerdeki tüm mesajları tutan birleştirilmiş bir mesaj dosyası kullanır.
** Birçok Wikimedia Vakfı vikisi, {{ll|Extension:WikimediaMessages|nsp=0}} uzantısından bazı mesajlara erişerek, mesajları her MediaWiki kurulumuna dayatmadan WMF vikilerinde standart hâle getirmelerine olanak tanır.
** Birkaç uzantı diğer teknikleri kullanır.
{{anchor|Caching}}

== Önbelleğe alma ==
Sistem mesajları, öncelikle her web isteğinde kullanıldığı için MediaWiki'nin en önemli bileşenlerinden biridir.
PHP mesaj dosyaları, binlerce mesaj anahtarını ve değerini sakladıkları için büyüktür.
Bu dosyayı (ve kullanıcının dili içerik dilinden farklıysa muhtemelen birden fazla dosyayı) yüklemek, büyük bir bellek ve performans maliyetine sahiptir.
Bu performans etkisini azaltmak için agresif, katmanlı bir önbellek sistemi kullanılır.

MediaWiki, kodun anlaşılmasını biraz daha zorlaştıran yerleşik birçok önbelleğe alma mekanizmasına sahiptir.
1.16'dan beri, mesajları ya [[cdb]] dosyalarında ya da veritabanında önbelleğe alan yeni bir önbelleğe alma sistemi bulunmaktadır.
Özelleştirilmiş mesajlar, yapılandırmaya bağlı olarak dosya sisteminde ve [[memcached]] (veya alternatif) içinde önbelleğe alınır.

Aşağıdaki tablo, ilgili ayarlara genel bir bakış sunar:

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!colspan=&quot;2&quot; rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| Önbellek depolama konumu
!colspan=&quot;4&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf}}
|-
! 'store' =&gt; 'db'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;br /&gt;(varsayılan) !! 'store' =&gt; 'files'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'array'&lt;br /&gt;''(MW ≥ 1.26'dan beri deneysel)''
|-
!rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}
! = false&lt;br /&gt;(varsayılan)
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || ''hata'' (tanımlanmamış yol) || ''hata'' (tanımlanmamış yol)
|-
! = ''path''
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || yerel dosya sistemi (CDB) || yerel dosya sistemi (CDB) || yerel dosya sistemi (PHP dizisi)
|}
{{MW version|version=1.27.0|version2=1.27.2|gerrit change=Id3e2d2b18ddb423647bf2e893bcf942722c0e097}}
MediaWiki 1.27.0 ve 1.27.1'de, otomatik algılama, dosya arka ucunu tercih edecek şekilde değiştirildi.
&lt;code&gt;'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;/code&gt; (varsayılan) durumunda, dosya arka ucu {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}} yolu ile kullanılır.
Bu değer ayarlanmazsa (varsayılan), işletim sistemi tarafından belirlenen geçici bir dizin kullanılır.
Geçici bir dizin algılanamazsa, veritabanı arka ucu yedek olarak kullanılır.
Bu, paylaşılan ana bilgisayarlardaki dosya çakışması ve güvenlik sorunları nedeniyle 1.27.2 ve 1.28.0'dan geri alındı ([[:phab:T127127|T127127]] ve [[:phab:T161453|T161453]] sayfalarına bakın).

=== İşlev geri izleme ===
Önbelleğe alma katmanlarını daha iyi görsel olarak tasvir etmek için, burada bir mesaj alınırken hangi yöntemlerin çağrıldığına dair bir işlev geri izlemesi verilmiştir.
Her katmanın açıklaması için aşağıdaki bölümlere bakın.

* &lt;code&gt;Message::fetchMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;MessageCache::get()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;Language::getMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalisationCache::getSubitem()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LCStore::get()&lt;/code&gt;

=== MessageCache ===
&lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; sınıfı, iletiler için önbelleğe almanın en üst düzeyidir.
Message sınıfından çağrılır ve bir mesajın son ham içeriğini döndürür.
Bu katman aşağıdaki mantığı işler:

* Veritabanında mesaj geçersiz kılmaları kontrol etme
* Aşırı yüklenen mesajları {{ll|memcached}} olarak veya {{ll|Manual:$wgMessageCacheType|$wgMessageCacheType}} olarak ayarlanmış olan herhangi bir yerde önbelleğe alma
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|Dil yedeği]] dizisinin geri kalanını çözümleme

Son mermi önemlidir.
[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|Dil yedekleri]], orijinalin istenen bir mesajı yoksa MediaWiki'nin başka bir dile geri dönmesine izin verir.
Sonraki bölümde bahsedildiği gibi, dil geri dönüş çözümlemesinin çoğu daha düşük bir düzeyde gerçekleşir.
Ancak, yalnızca &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; katmanı, geçersiz kılınan mesajlar için veritabanını kontrol eder.
Böylece veritabanından geçersiz kılınan mesajların geri dönüş zincirine entegre edilmesi burada yapılır.
Veritabanı kullanılmıyorsa, bu katmanın tamamı devre dışı bırakılabilir.

=== LocalisationCache ===

{{ll|Manual:LocalisationCache.php|LocalisationCache.php}} sayfasına bakın

=== LCStore ===
&lt;code&gt;LCStore&lt;/code&gt; sınıfı, yalnızca LocalisationCache sınıfı tarafından mesajları gerçekten önbelleğe almak ve almak için kullanılan bir arka uç uygulamasıdır.
MediaWiki'de genel önbelleğe alma için kullanılan &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; sınıfı gibi, bir dizi farklı önbellek türü vardır ([[Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf]] kullanılarak yapılandırılır):
* &quot;db&quot; (varsayılan) - Veritabanındaki mesajları önbelleğe alır
* &quot;file&quot; (&lt;code&gt;$wgCacheDirectory&lt;/code&gt; ayarlanmışsa varsayılan) - Mesajları yerel bir dosyada önbelleğe almak için [[w:cdb (software)|CDB]] kullanır
* &quot;accel&quot; - Verileri depolamak için [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|APC]] veya başka bir işlem kodu önbelleği kullanır

&quot;file&quot; seçeneği Wikimedia Vakfı tarafından kullanılır ve veritabanına gitmekten daha hızlı ve APC önbelleğinden daha güvenilir olduğu için, özellikle de APC, PHP 5.5 veya sonraki sürümleriyle uyumlu olmadığı için önerilir.

{{anchor|Adding new messages}}
== Yeni mesaj ekleme ==

=== Mesaj anahtarını seçme ===

Ayrıca bakınız:
{{ll|Manual:Coding conventions#System messages}}

Mesaj anahtarı küresel olarak benzersiz olmalıdır.
Bu, çekirdek MediaWiki'yi ve tüm uzantıları ve görünümleri içerir.

Mesaj adlarında küçük harflere, sayılara ve kısa çizgilere sadık kalın; diğer karakterlerin çoğu daha az pratik veya hiç çalışmıyor.
MediaWiki kuralına göre, ilk karakter büyük/küçük harfe duyarlı değildir ve diğer karakterler büyük/küçük harfe duyarlıdır.

Lütfen adlandırma için küresel veya yerel kuralları izleyin.
Uzantılar için standart bir önek, tercihen küçük harfle uzantı adı ve ardından bir tire (&quot;-&quot;) kullanın.
İstisnalar şunlardır:

; API tarafından kullanılan mesajlar : Bunlar &lt;code&gt;apihelp-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apiwarn-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apierror-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır. Bu önekten sonra uzantı önekini koyun. (Bu mesajların genellikle [[phab:source/mediawiki/browse/master/includes/api/i18n/|includes/i18/api]] altında ayrı bir dosyada olması gerektiğini unutmayın.)
; Günlükle ilgili mesajlar : Bunlar &lt;code&gt;logentry-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;log-name-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;log-description&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır.
; Kullanıcı hakları : Special:ListGroupRights sayfasında görüntülenen hakkın adı anahtarı &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır. &quot;{{int|Permissionserrorstext-withaction|unused}}&quot; cümlesini tamamlayan eylemin adı &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır.
; Revizyon etiketleri : Revizyon etiketleri &lt;code&gt;tag-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır.
; Özel sayfa başlıkları : Özel sayfa başlıkları &lt;code&gt;special-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır.

=== Mesaj oluştururken dikkat edilmesi gereken diğer noktalar ===

# Mesaj için uygun işleme kullandığınızdan emin olun (ayrıştırma, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;-değiştirme, HTML için kaçış vb.)
# Mesajınız çekirdeğin bir parçasıysa, Installer, EXIF etiketleri ve ApiHelp gibi bazı bileşenlerin kendi mesaj dosyaları olmasına rağmen, genellikle &lt;code&gt;languages/i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt; ile eklenmelidir.
# Mesajınız bir uzantıdaysa, onu uygun alt dizindeki &lt;code&gt;i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt; dosyasına veya &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; dosyasına ekleyin. Özellikle, çoğu son kullanıcı tarafından görülmeyen yalnızca geliştiriciler tarafından görülen API mesajları, genellikle &lt;code&gt;i18n/api/en.json&lt;/code&gt; gibi ayrı bir dosyadadır. Bir uzantının çok fazla mesajı varsa, &lt;code&gt;i18n&lt;/code&gt; altında alt dizinler oluşturabilirsiniz. Varsayılan &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt; dahil tüm mesaj dizinleri, &lt;code&gt;MessagesDirs&lt;/code&gt; içindeki &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; bölümünde veya {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}} değişkeninde listelenmelidir.
# Bir ara verin ve mesajın ifadesini düşünün. Mümkün olduğunca açık mı? Yanlış anlaşılabilir mi? Mümkünse diğer geliştiricilerden veya yerelleştiricilerden yorum isteyin. [[#Uluslararasılaştırma ipuçları|Uluslararasılaştırma ipuçları]] bölümünü izleyin.
# Aynı dizindeki &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; dosyasına belgelendirme ekleyin.
# Dosyadaki mesajların sırası kabaca projenizin özelliklerine uygun olmalıdır. Aynı özellikten gelen mesajları yan yana koyun. Bu, çevirmenlerin odaklanmalarına, verimli ve tutarlı olmalarına yardımcı olur.
# En temel ve en sık kullanılan olması beklenen mesajları dosyanın başına, daha nadir ve teknik olarak daha gelişmiş mesajları ise sonlara doğru koyun.


== Çevrilmemesi gereken mesajlar ==

# '''Yoksayılan''' mesajlar, yalnızca İngilizce mesajlar dosyasında bulunması gereken mesajlardır. Yalnızca diğer mesajlara veya dilden bağımsız özelliklere atıfta bulundukları için çevrilmesi gerekmeyen mesajlardır, ''örneğin'' bir &quot;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&quot; mesajı.
# '''İsteğe bağlı''' mesajlar yalnızca hedef dilde değiştirilirse çevrilebilir.

Bu tür mesajları işaretlemek için:

* sırasıyla &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; ileti belgelerindeki şablonu kullanın;
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Notranslate|notranslate]]}}&lt;/code&gt; veya
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Optional|optional]]}}&lt;/code&gt;;
* {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} üzerinde kullanılan {{ll|Extension:Translate|nsp=0}} uzantısına, uygun şekilde listeleyen bir yama göndererek iletilerle ne yapacağını söyleyin (ayrıca {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Group configuration/MediaWiki|tam yapılandırma belgelerine}} bakın):
** &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;çekirdek için, {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/MediaWiki.yaml}} içine mesaj anahtarlarını ekleyin&lt;/span&gt;
**# &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;ignored:&lt;/code&gt; altında veya
**# &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;optional:&lt;/code&gt; altında;
** uzantılar için, {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/mediawiki-extensions.txt}} içinde uzantının adının altına aşağıdaki gibi bir satır ekleyin
**# &lt;code&gt;ignored = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt; or
**# &lt;code&gt;optional = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt;.

== Mevcut mesajları kaldırma ==
&lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; dosyadan kaldırın.
Başka dillerle uğraşmayın.
{{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} güncellemeleri bunları otomatik olarak halledecektir.

Ayrıca, mesajın translatewiki yapılandırmasında, örneğin isteğe bağlı veya en çok kullanılan mesajlar listesinde herhangi bir yerde görünüp görünmediğini kontrol edin (basit bir git grep yeterli olmalıdır).
Gerekirse bu listelerden çıkarın.

== Mevcut mesajları değiştirme ==

# [[#Mesaj belgelendirmesi|Mesaj belgelendirmesini]] güncellemeyi düşünün.
# Eski çeviriler yeni anlama uygun değilse mesaj anahtarını değiştirin. Bu aynı zamanda mesaj işlemedeki değişiklikleri de içerir (ayrıştırma, kaçış, parametreler, vb.). Bir mesajın ifadesini teknik değişiklikler olmadan geliştirmek, genellikle bir anahtarı değiştirmek için bir neden değildir. Translatewiki.net'te çeviriler, çevirmenler tarafından hedeflenebilmeleri için eski olarak işaretlenecektir. Bir mesaj anahtarının değiştirilmesi, i18n ekibiyle görüşmeyi veya bir destek talebinde bulunmayı gerektirmez. Ancak, özel durumlarınız veya sorularınız varsa, {{irc|translatewiki}} kanalıdan veya {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} adresindeki [[translatewiki:Support|destek sayfasında]] sorun.
# Uzantı {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} tarafından destekleniyorsa, lütfen yalnızca İngilizce kaynak mesajını ve/veya anahtarı ve beraberindeki &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; girişini değiştirin. Gerekirse translatewiki.net ekibi çevirileri güncellemek, bunları eski olarak işaretlemek, dosyayı temizlemek veya mümkünse anahtarları yeniden adlandırmakla ilgilenecektir. Bu, yalnızca HTML etiketleri gibi diğer dillerde değiştirebileceğiniz ve bu dilleri konuşmadan değiştirebileceğiniz şeyleri değiştirdiğinizde de geçerlidir. Bu eylemlerin çoğu [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]]'te gerçekleşecek ve Git'e yaklaşık bir günlük gecikmeyle ulaşacak.

{{anchor|Message documentation}}
== Mesaj belgelendirmesi ==
Mesaj belgelendirmesi için bir sözde dil kodu &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; vardır.
Özel kullanım için ayrılmış ISO 639 kodlarından biridir.
Orada, her mesajın çevirisini tutmuyoruz, ancak ''her mesaj hakkında'' İngilizce cümleler topluyoruz: bize nerede kullanıldığını söyleyen, nasıl çevrileceğine dair ipuçları veren ve parametrelerini numaralandıran ve açıklayan, ilgili mesajlara bağlantı veren, ve benzeri.
[[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]]'te, bu ipuçları mesajları düzenlerken çevirmenlere gösterilir.

Programcılar her mesajı belgelemelidir.
Mesaj belgelendirmesi, yalnızca çevirmenler için değil, modülün tüm bakımcılar için önemli bir kaynaktır.
Yazılıma bir mesaj eklendiğinde, buna karşılık gelen bir &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; girişi de ''olmalıdır''; bunu yapmayan revizyonlar, dokümantasyon eklenene kadar &quot;&lt;code&gt;V-1&lt;/code&gt;&quot; olarak işaretlenir.

&lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; dosyalarındaki belgelendirme, yalnızca yeni mesajlar eklenirken veya mevcut bir İngilizce mesajı, örneğin parametre ekleme veya çıkarma gibi bir belge değişikliği gerektiren bir şekilde değiştirirken doğrudan düzenlenmelidir.
Diğer durumlarda, belgelendirme genellikle translatewiki'de düzenlenmelidir.
Her belge dizisine, sanki bir çeviriymiş gibi &lt;nowiki&gt;https://translatewiki.net/wiki/MediaWiki:&lt;/nowiki&gt;''message-key''&lt;nowiki&gt;/qqq&lt;/nowiki&gt; adresinden erişilebilir.
Bu düzenlemeler, çevirilerle birlikte kaynak depolara dışa aktarılacaktır.

Belgelendirmede olması gereken faydalı bilgiler şunları içerir:

# Mesaj işleme (ayrıştırma, kaçış, düz metin).
# Örnek değerlerle parametre türü.
# Mesajın kullanıldığı yer (sayfalar, kullanıcı arayüzündeki konumlar).
# Mesajın kullanıldığı yerde nasıl kullanıldığı (bir sayfa başlığı, düğme metni, ''vb.'').
# Bu mesajla birlikte başka hangi mesajlar kullanılıyor veya bu mesaj başka hangi mesajlara atıfta bulunuyor.
# İleti bağlamda görüldüğünde anlaşılabilecek, ancak ileti tek başına görüntülendiğinde (çeviri yapılırken durum böyledir) anlaşılamayan başka herhangi bir şey.
# Varsa, dilbilgisi hakkında notlar. Örneğin, İngilizce'de &quot;open&quot; hem fiil hem de sıfat olabilir. Diğer birçok dilde kelimeler farklıdır ve belge olmadan nasıl çevrileceğini tahmin etmek imkansızdır.
# &quot;disabled&quot;, &quot;open&quot; veya &quot;blocked&quot; gibi şeyleri tanımlayan sıfatlar, neyi tanımladıklarını ''her zaman'' söylemelidir. Birçok dilde sıfatlar tanımladıkları ismin cinsiyetine sahip olmalıdır. Farklı türden şeylerin farklı sıfatlara ihtiyaç duyması da olabilir.
# Mesajın özel özellikleri varsa, örneğin bir sayfa adıysa veya doğrudan çeviri değil, kültüre veya projeye uyarlanmış olması gerekiyorsa.
# Mesajın diğer mesajın yanında, örneğin bir listede veya menüde görünüp görünmediği. Sözcüklerin üslubu veya gramer özellikleri muhtemelen yakındaki mesajlara benzer olmalıdır. Ayrıca, bir listedeki ögelerin, listenin başlığıyla uygun şekilde ilişkili olması gerekebilir.
# Mesajının, genel ad alanı adları, URL'ler veya etiketler gibi çevrilmemesi gereken bölümleri.
# &quot;CTA&quot; gibi kısaltmalar veya &quot;şablon&quot;, &quot;bastırma&quot; veya &quot;taslak&quot; gibi belirli jargon gibi potansiyel olarak belirsiz kelimelerin açıklamaları. (İlk etapta bu tür kelimelerden kaçınmanın en iyisi olduğunu unutmayın!)
# Ekran görüntüleri çok faydalıdır. Kırpmayın – mesajın göründüğü tam ekran görüntüsü, tam bağlam sağlar ve birkaç mesajda yeniden kullanılabilir.

Diğer birkaç ipucu:

* Çevirmenlerin çoğu zaman mesajları yazılımı kullanmadan çevirdiğini unutmayın.
* Çoğu zaman, çevirmenler ne modülünüz ne de içindeki diğer mesajlar hakkında herhangi bir bağlam bilgisine sahip değildir.
* Tek başına yeniden ifade edilen bir mesaj çoğu durumda işe yaramaz.
* Tasarımcıların &quot;nav&quot; veya &quot;comps&quot; gibi jargonlarını kullanmayın.
* Modülünüzde kullanılan teknik terimlerin [[betawiki:Terminology#Terminologies|sözlük]] bir kısmını yazmayı düşünün. Bunu yaparsanız, mesajların belgelerinden ona bağlantı verin.

{{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;{{((}}msg-mw{{!}}message key{{))}}&lt;/code&gt;|Mesaj anahtarı}} kullanarak diğer mesajlara bağlantı verebilirsiniz.
Lütfen mesajların bir kısmı başka mesajlardan geliyorsa (bu önlenemiyorsa) veya bazı mesajlar birlikte veya aynı bağlamda gösteriliyorsa bunu yapın.

translatewiki.net, belgelendirme için bazı varsayılan şablonlar sağlar:

* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-action|doc-action]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt; mesajları için
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-right|doc-right]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt; mesajları için
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-group|doc-group]]|[...]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - kullanıcı grupları etrafındaki mesajlar için (&lt;code&gt;group&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;member&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;page&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;js&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;css&lt;/code&gt;)
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-accesskey|doc-accesskey]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;code&gt;accesskey-&lt;/code&gt; mesajları için

Daha fazla bilgi için şablon sayfalarına bakın.

{{anchor|Internationalisation hints}}
== Uluslararasılaşma ipuçları ==
[[#Mesaj belgelendirmesi|Belgelendirmesine]] yanı sıra, çevirmenler geliştiricilerden işlerini daha kolay ve verimli hâle getirmek ve tüm diller için gerçek ve iyi bir yerelleştirmeye izin vermek için bazı ipuçlarını dikkate almalarını ister.
Yalnızca İngilizce mesaj ekleme veya düzenleme bile olsa, tüm dillerin ihtiyaçlarının farkında olunmalıdır. Her mesaj 300'den fazla dile çevrilir ve bu mümkün olan en iyi şekilde yapılmalıdır.
Bu ipuçlarının doğru uygulanması genellikle İngilizce olarak daha iyi mesajlar yazmanıza da yardımcı olacaktır.

[[Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Help_and_contact_info|Yerelleştirme#Yardım ve iletişim bilgisi]], i18n ile ilgili deneyimli ve bilgili kişilerin yardımını bulabileceğiniz başlıca yerleri listeler.
=== Mesaj parametrelerini ve anahtarları doğru kullanın ===

Bu, mesajlarınız için doğru bir ifadenin ön koşuludur.

=== Mesajın yeniden kullanılmasından kaçının ===
Çevirmenler mesajın yeniden kullanılmasını önermezler.
Bu, sezgisel görünebilir, çünkü kodu kopyalamak ve çoğaltmak genellikle kötü bir uygulamadır, ancak sistem mesajlarında buna sıklıkla ihtiyaç duyulur.
İngilizce'de iki kavram aynı kelime ile ifade edilebilse de, bu onların her dilde aynı kelime ile ifade edilebileceği anlamına gelmez.
&quot;OK&quot; iyi bir örnektir: İngilizce'de bu, genel bir düğme etiketi için kullanılır, ancak bazı dillerde düğme tarafından gerçekleştirilecek işlemle ilgili bir düğme etiketi kullanmayı tercih ederler.
Başka bir örnek, pratikte herhangi bir sıfattır: &quot;çoklu&quot; gibi bir kelime birçok dilde cinsiyete göre değişir, bu yüzden onu birkaç farklı şeyi tanımlamak için tekrar kullanamazsınız ve birkaç ayrı mesaj oluşturmanız gerekir.

Birden çok özdeş mesaj ekliyorsanız, lütfen içeriklerindeki farklılıkları açıklamak için mesaj belgelerini ekleyin.
Çevirmenler için ekstra iş hakkında endişelenmeyin.
Çeviri belleği, gerektiğinde farklı çevirilere sahip olma esnekliğini korurken bunlara çok yardımcı olur.

{{anchor|Avoid_patchwork_messages|Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages}}
=== Parçalanmış veya 'patchwork' mesajlarından kaçının ===
Dillerin değişen sözcük dizilimleri ve karmaşık gramer ve sözdizimsel kuralları vardır.
&quot;Lego&quot; mesajlarını, yani birden fazla metin parçasından oluşan mesajları, muhtemelen bazı dolaylı yollarla (&quot;dize bitiştirme&quot; olarak da adlandırılır) çevirmek çok zordur.

Her mesajı eksiksiz bir ifade yapmak daha iyidir.
Gerekirse, birkaç cümle genellikle bir metin bloğunda çok daha kolay bir şekilde birleştirilebilir.
Birkaç dizeyi tek bir mesajda birleştirmek istediğinizde, bunları parametre olarak iletin, çünkü çevirmenler çeviri yaparken bunları dilleri için doğru şekilde sıralayabilirler.

==== Birbirinden alıntı yapan mesajlar ====
Kuralın bir istisnası, birbirine atıfta bulunan mesajlar olabilir: '&quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot; etiketli alana orijinal yazarın adını girin ve bittiğinde &quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:proceed}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot; seçeneğini tıklayın'.
Bu, bir yazılım geliştiricisi veya viki operatörü daha sonra &quot;name&quot; veya &quot;proceed&quot; mesajlarını değiştirdiğinde mesajı tutarlı hâle getirir.
int hack olmadan, geliştiriciler ve operatörler, birini değiştirdiklerinde, ayarlanması gereken tüm ilgili mesajların farkında olmak zorunda kalacaklardı.

=== Belirli projelere özel terimler ve şablonlar kullanmayın ===
MediaWiki, Wikimedia hareketi içinde ve dışında çok çeşitli insanlar tarafından kullanılmaktadır.
Başlangıçta bir ansiklopedi için yapılmış olsa da, şimdi çeşitli içerik türleri için kullanılıyor.
Bu nedenle genel terimler kullanın.
Örneğin, geliştirmekte olduğunuz özelliğin yalnızca sayfaların &quot;maddeler&quot; olarak adlandırıldığı bir sitede kullanılacağından kesinlikle emin değilseniz, &quot;madde&quot; gibi terimlerden kaçının ve bunun yerine &quot;sayfa&quot; kullanın.
İngilizce Vikipedi topluluk sayfasının adı olan &quot;köy çeşmesi&quot; kullanmayın ve bunun yerine &quot;topluluk tartışma sayfası&quot; gibi genel bir terim kullanın.

Tüm vikilerde belirli bir şablonun var olduğunu varsaymayın.
Şablonlar vikiler için yereldir.
Bu, hem kaynak mesajlar hem de çevirileri için geçerlidir.
Mesajlar şablon kullanıyorsa, yalnızca özelliğin dağıtıldığı ''her'' vikide bir şablon oluşturulursa çalışırlar.
Mesajlarda şablon kullanmaktan tamamen kaçınmak en iyisidir.
Bunları gerçekten kullanmanız gerekiyorsa, bunu mesaj belgelerinde ve uzantı kurulum talimatlarında açıkça belgelemelisiniz.

=== Cümlelerdeki tarihlerden ayrı zamanlar ===
Bazı diller, bir cümledeki diğer kelimelere dilbilgisi açısından bağlı olan bir tarih ve zaman arasına bir şey eklemek zorundadır.
Böylece tarih/saati bir arada kullanamayacaklar.
Diğerleri kombinasyonu uygun bulabilir, bu nedenle bu gibi durumlarda üç parametre değeri (date/time, date, time) sağlamak genellikle en iyi seçimdir ve her çeviride ilkini veya son ikisini gerektiği gibi kullanılmadan bırakın.

=== Mesajlarda &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; kullanmaktan kaçının ===
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; birkaç dezavantaja sahiptir.
Herhangi bir şey olabilir (kısaltma, kelime, kısa ifade, ''vb.'') ve dile bağlı olarak, her durumda &lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Messages_API#…on use context inside sentences via GRAMMAR|&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/code&gt; kullanılması gerekebilir.
Ne olursa olsun, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; içeren her iletinin, kodunuzun yüklendiği her yeni viki için çoğu viki dilinde incelenmesi gerekir.
Çoğu durumda, bir dil için genel bir &lt;code&gt;GRAMMAR&lt;/code&gt; yapılandırması olmadığında, viki operatörlerinin &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; çalışması için &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; elde etmek için PHP kodunu eklemesi veya değiştirmesi gerekir.
Bu, diğerlerine göre hem daha fazla beceri hem de daha fazla anlayış gerektirir.
&quot;Bu viki&quot; gibi genel kaynakları sahip olmak daha uygundur.
Bu, kurulumların bu mesajları yerel olarak &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; kullanacak şekilde değiştirmesini engellemez, ancak en azından bunu yapmak zorunda kalmazlar ve viki zaten çalışıp kullanılana kadar mesaj uyarlamasını erteleyebilirler.

=== Görsel yerleşim ve konumlara atıfta bulunmaktan kaçının ===
Neyin nerede oluşturulduğu, görünümlere bağlıdır.
Çoğu zaman, soldan sağa yazılan dillerin ekran düzenleri, sağdan sola yazılan diller için kullanılanlara kıyasla yansıtılır, ancak her zaman değil ve bazı diller ve vikiler için tamamen değil.
Elde taşınan cihazlar, dar pencereler vb., daha büyük ekranlarda yan yana görünecek şekilde birbirinin altında bloklar gösterebilir.
Site ve kullanıcı tarafından yazılan JavaScript betikleri ve küçük araçları, parçaları gizleyebildiğinden ve yapabildiğinden veya öngörülemeyen şekillerde şeyleri hareket ettirebildiğinden, gerçek düzeni bilmenin güvenilir bir yolu yoktur.

Kullanıcı arayüzü dili sayfanın içerik dili olmayabileceğinden ve koşullara bağlı olarak düzen ikisinin bir karışımı olabileceğinden, düzen bilgilerini içerik dillerine bağlamak yanlıştır.
Akustik ekran okuyucular ve diğer yardımcı cihazlar gibi görsel olmayan kullanıcı aracıları, görsel düzen kavramına bile sahip değildir.
Bu nedenle, anlamsal düzen terimleri hâlâ kullanılabilse de (&quot;formdaki önceki adımlar&quot;, ''vb.'') durumların çoğunda görsel yerleşim konumlarına başvurmamalısınız.

MediaWiki, arayüzün mevcut yönlülüğüne bağlı olarak farklı mesajların veya mesaj parçalarının gösterilmesini desteklemez ([[phab:T30997|T30997]] sayfasına bakın).

Doğu ve Kuzey Asya'da yukarıdan aşağıya yazma için yaklaşan tarayıcı ve MediaWiki desteği,&lt;ref&gt;http://dev.w3.org/csswg/css3-writing-modes/&lt;/ref&gt; en az sekiz olası düzen ile ekran düzenlerini daha da öngörülemez hâle getirecek (sol/sağ başlangıç konumu, üst/alt başlangıç konumu ve hangisi önce gerçekleşir).

=== Ekran renklerine atıfta bulunmaktan kaçının ===
Bir şeyin oluşturulduğu renk, görünümler, site ve kullanıcı tarafından yazılan JavaScript betikleri ve küçük araçlar ve erişilebilirlik veya teknolojik sınırlamalar nedeniyle yerel kullanıcı aracısı geçersiz kılma gibi birçok faktöre bağlıdır.
Akustik ekran okuyucular ve diğer yardımcı cihazlar gibi görsel olmayan kullanıcı aracılarının renk kavramı bile yoktur.
Bu nedenle ekran renklerine yapmamalısınız.
(Aynı nedenle, kullanıcıyı durum hakkında bilgilendirmek için bir mekanizma olarak tek başına renge güvenmemelisiniz.)

=== Her giriş alanından önce ve sonra mesaj ögelerine sahip olun ===

:''Bu önerilen bir kılavuzdur, MediaWiki geliştirmede standart hâle gelmemiştir''

İngilizce, item–colon–space–input-field alanı biçimindeki soru sormanın verimli kullanımına izin verirken, diğer birçok dil bunu yapmaz.
İngilizce'de bile, &quot;Distance: ___ metres&quot; yerine genellikle &quot;Distance (in metres): ___&quot; kullanmak istersiniz.
{{tag|textarea|open}} ögelerini bir kenara bırakarak, &quot;Distance: ___ metres&quot; düzenini izleyen her giriş alanını düşünmelisiniz. Böyle:

* 2. mesaj boş olsa bile İngilizce ve diğer bazı dillerde iki mesaj verin veya
* &lt;code&gt;$i&lt;/code&gt; parametreleri aracılığıyla girişlerin yerleştirilmesine izin verir.
=== Mesajlarda çevrilmemiş HTML işaretlemesinden kaçının ===
{{tag|div|open}} etiketleri, yukarıdaki veya alttaki cetveller ve benzeri gibi çeviri gerektirmeyen HTML işaretlemesi genellikle iletilerin parçası olmamalıdır.
Çevirmenlere gereksiz yük bindirir, ileti dosyasının boyutunu artırır ve çeviri sürecinde yanlışlıkla değiştirilme veya atlanma riski taşır.
Genel olarak, mümkünse mesajlarda ham HTML'den kaçının.

=== Mesajlar genellikle düşündüğünüzden daha uzundur! ===

Yabancı dildeki mesaj dosyalarına göz atarken, neredeyse hiçbir zaman Çince olanlardan daha kısa, nadiren İngilizce olanlardan daha kısa ve genellikle İngilizce olanlardan çok daha uzun mesajlar bulamazsınız.

Özellikle formlarda, giriş alanlarının önünde, İngilizce mesajlar kısa ve öz olma eğilimindedir.
Bu genellikle çevirilerde tutulmaz.
Diller, İngilizce'de bulunan teknik kelime dağarcığından yoksun olabilir ve bazı kavramları açıklamak için birden fazla kelime veya hatta tam cümleler gerektirebilir.
Örneğin, &quot;TSV file:&quot; adlı kısa İngilizce mesajın bir dile tam anlamıyla şu şekilde çevrilmesi gerekebilir:
&lt;blockquote&gt;''Lütfen buraya, her biri bir dizi bilgi alanı olarak düzenlenmiş, söz konusu bilgi alanlarının çitle çevrildiği ve aralarındaki çitlerin tek olduğu, sıralı olarak düzenlenmiş bir dizi daktilo satırından oluşan bir bilgisayar verileri koleksiyonunu belirten bir ad yazın ve aralarındaki parmaklıklar, bir daktilo arabasını bir sonraki önceden tanımlanmış konuma kaydıran türden tek işaretlerdir. İşte başlıyoruz: _____ (teşekkür ederiz)''&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Bu, kuşkusuz, uç bir örnek, ancak özelliği alıyorsunuz.
Bu cümleyi, her kelimenin kendine ait bir satırı kapladığı ve giriş alanının bir sonraki sütunda dikey olarak ortalandığı bir biçimde bir sütunda hayal edin. :-(

=== Farklı şeyleri veya kavramları belirtmek için çok yakın, benzer veya aynı kelimeleri kullanmaktan kaçının ===
Örneğin, sayfalar, söz konusu sayfanın geçmiş ''sürümlerini'' içeren (belirli bir tarih, saat ve düzenlemeye ait) daha eski ''revizyonlara'' sahip olabilir.
''Revizyon'' ve ''versiyon'' kelimeleri birbirinin yerine kullanılabilir.
Versiyonlanmış sayfalar revize edildiğinde sorun çıkıyor ve revizyondan, ''yani'' revize etme sürecinden de söz ediliyor.
&quot;Revizyon&quot;un iki eşanlamlısının farklı çevirileri olduğunda bu ciddi bir sorun teşkil etmeyebilir.
Ancak buna güvenmeyin.
O zaman, yanlış yorumlanmasını önlemek için &quot;revizyon&quot;, &quot;sürüm&quot; ''olarak da bilinen'' kullanımından tamamen kaçınmak daha iyidir.

=== Temel kelimelerin öngörülemeyen çağrışımları olabilir veya hiç mevcut olmayabilir ===
MediaWiki'de çok özel kullanımları nedeniyle çevrilmesi zor olan bazı kelimeler var.
Bazıları [[#Expect untranslated words|hiç çevrilmemesini bekleyebilirsiniz]].
Örneğin, birkaç dilde &quot;bir şeyi kullanan kişi&quot; ile ilgili &quot;kullanıcı&quot; kelimesi yoktur.
Benzer şekilde, [[:en:Colognian language|Kölsch]]'deki İngilizce &quot;namespace&quot; ve &quot;apartment&quot; kelimeleri aynı kelimeyi tercüme eder.
Ayrıca, Kölsch'te, &quot;use&quot; yapılacak herhangi bir gönderme çok güçlü bir şekilde &quot;abuse&quot; anlamına geleceğinden, tek kelimeyle &quot;corroborator and participant&quot; derler.
&quot;Wiki çiftliği&quot; terimi, &quot;vikilerle dolu ahır&quot; olarak çevrilir, çünkü tek ürünlü bir çiftlik, dilde bir çelişki olacağından ve anlaşılmadığından ''vb.''

{{anchor|Expect untranslated words}}
=== Çevrilmemiş kelimeleri beklemesi ===

:''Bu önerilen bir kılavuzdur, MediaWiki geliştirmede henüz standart hâle gelmemiştir.''

İngilizce özel adlar, etiket adları, ''vb.'' ve bilgisayar dilinin tercüme edilmemesi ve bunun yerine ödünç kelimeler veya yabancı kelimeler olarak alınması nadir değildir.
İkinci durumda, bazı özellikle titiz çevirmenler, &lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot;&gt; … &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; gibi HTML işaretlemesi ile bu tür kelimeleri başka bir dile ait olarak işaretleyebilir.

Açık güvenlik risklerine rağmen, mesaj çıkış işleyicinizin bu tür işaretlemeyi değişmeden geçirmesini sağlamayı düşünebilirsiniz.

=== Açıklayıcı satır içi işaretlemeye izin verin ===

:''Bu önerilen bir kılavuzdur, MediaWiki geliştirmede henüz standart hâle gelmemiştir.''

Bazen, hedef dillerde yeni başlayanlar tarafından hemen anlaşılmayan, ancak deneyimli bilgisayar kullanıcıları için açık olan kısaltmalar, teknik terimler veya genel olarak belirsiz kelimeler olabilir.
Yeni gelenleri zor durumda bırakmadan uzun açıklamaların ekran karmaşasını önlemek için çevirmenler, fareyi üzerlerine getirdiğinizde tarayıcılar tarafından gösterilen {{tag|abbr|open}} açıklamalar olarak açıklama eklemeyi seçebilirler.

Örneğin, görsel döndürmeyle ilgili MediaWiki çekirdek mesajı &lt;code&gt;exif-orientation-8&lt;/code&gt; ve İngilizce'de basitçe &quot;&lt;code&gt;Rotated 90° CW&lt;/code&gt;&quot;, Fas Arapçasında şu şekilde çevrilir:

:&lt;code lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &amp;lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&amp;lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/code&gt;

şunu veriyor:

:&lt;span lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/span&gt;

gerektiğinde &quot;saat yönünün tersine&quot; kısaltmasının açıklanması.

Orijinal mesaj bunları kullanmasa bile, mesaj çıkış işleyicinizin bu tür işaretlemeyi değişmeden geçirmesini sağlamayı düşünebilirsiniz.

=== Gerektiğinde {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}} ve {{tag|kbd|open}} etiketlerini kullanın ===
Teknik parametreler, değerler veya klavye girişleri hakkında konuşurken, {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}} veya {{tag|kbd|open}} HTML etiketlerini kullanarak bunları uygun şekilde işaretleyin.
Böylece tipografik olarak normal metinden ayrılırlar.
Bu, kafa karışıklığını, hataları ve yanlış temsilleri önleyerek okuyuculara anlamlarını netleştirir.
İleti işleyicinizin bu tür işaretlemeye izin verdiğinden emin olun.

=== Semboller, iki nokta üst üste, parantez, ''vb.'' mesajların parçalarıdır ===
Birçok sembol de yerelleştirilebilir. Bazı yazımlarda, Latin alfabesinden farklı türde parantezler bulunur.
Bazı dillerde bir etiket veya giriş isteminden sonra iki nokta üst üste işareti uygun olmayabilir.
Bu sembollerin mesajlara dahil edilmesi, daha iyi ve daha az Anglo-merkezli çeviriler yapılmasına yardımcı olur ve ayrıca kod karmaşasını azaltır.

Örneğin, «Norveç», »İsveççe», »Danca«, „Almanca“ ve 「Japonca」 dillerinde kullanılan farklı tırnak işareti kuralları vardır.&lt;ref&gt;[[:tr:Tırnak işareti]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Bazı metni yerelleştirilmiş parantezler, parantezler veya tırnak işaretleri içine almanız gerekiyorsa, &lt;code&gt;parentheses&lt;/code&gt; {{int:parentheses}} veya &lt;code&gt;brackets&lt;/code&gt; {{int:quotation-marks}} veya &lt;code&gt;quotation-marks&lt;/code&gt; {{int:quotation-marks}} gibi mesajlar kullanabilirsiniz:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php&gt;wfMessage( 'parentheses' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside parentheses */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'brackets' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside brackets */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'quotation-marks' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside quotation marks */ )-&gt;escaped()&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Sembollerin ve noktalama işaretlerinin çeviriden sağ çıkmasını beklemeyin ===
Sağdan sola yazılan diller (İngilizce'nin aksine) genellikle &quot;sonraki&quot; ve &quot;önceki&quot; bağlantılarla sunulan ok sembollerini değiştirir ve bunların bir mesaj metnine göre yerleşimleri de ters çevrilebilir veya çevrilmeyebilir.
Üç nokta &quot;''vb.''&quot; ya da kelimelere çevrilebilir.
Soru işaretleri, ünlem işaretleri, iki nokta üst üste işareti, cümle sonundakiler dışında, hiç veya iki kez konulmayacaktır.
Sonuç olarak, bunların hepsini her zaman mesajlarınızın metnine dahil edin ve asla programlı olarak eklemeye çalışmayın.

=== Tam durakları kullanın ===
Normal cümleleri noktalı olarak '''sonlandırın'''.
Bu genellikle bir çevirmenin, farklı şekilde çevrilmesi gerekebilecek manşetler veya liste öğeleri olmadığını bilmesinin tek göstergesidir.

=== Bağlantı çengelleri ===

==== Vikimetin bağlantıları ====

Bağlantı çengelleri, mesajlara birkaç teknik yolla yerleştirilebilir:

# vikimetin aracılığıyla: …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;''bir viki sayfası''|''çengel''&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…,
# vikimetin aracılığıyla: …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;[''birkaç-url'' ''çengel'']&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…, or
# bağlantı metni, MediaWiki ad alanındaki bir mesajdır. ''Bunu önleyin!''

İkincisi, çevirmenler için genellikle zor veya imkansızdır, burada da [[#Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages|parçalanmış veya 'patchwork' mesajlardan kaçının]].
&quot;&lt;code&gt;bazı-url&lt;/code&gt;&quot; ögesinin boşluk içermediğinden emin olun.

==== Anlamlı bağlantı çengelleri kullanın ====
İfadenize dikkat edin.
Bağlantı çengelleri, hem bağlantılı kelimeler hem de hedef çengel olmak üzere, sayfaların arama motoru değerlendirmesinde önemli bir rol oynar.
Çengelin hedef sayfayı iyi tanımladığından emin olun.
Her zaman sıradan ve genel kelimelerden kaçının.
Örneğin, hedef sayfalar neredeyse hiçbir zaman &quot;burayı tıklayın&quot; ile ilgili olmadığı için, &quot;Burayı tıklayın&quot; kesinlikle gidilmez,&lt;ref&gt;http://www.w3.org/QA/Tips/noClickHere&lt;/ref&gt;.
Bunu da bağlantıların etrafındaki cümlelere koyma, çünkü &quot;burası&quot; tıklanacak yer değildi.
Bunun yerine, &quot;İsterseniz [[Special:Upload|bir dosya yükleyebilirsiniz]]&quot; gibi, kullanıcının bağlantıyı takip ederken ne elde edeceğini anlatan kesin eylem sözcükleri kullanın.

Ayrıca ''[http://www.nngroup.com/articles/using-link-titles-to-help-users-predict-where-they-are-going/ Kullanıcıların nereye gittiklerini tahmin etmelerine yardımcı olma]'' ve [[w:Mystery meat navigation|gizemli et gezinitisi]] ve ''[https://tosbourn.com/click-here/ Buraya tıklayın bağlantısını bağlantı metni olarak kullanmamamızın ana nedenleri]'' bakın.

=== Jargon ve argodan kaçının ===
Mesajlarda geliştirici ve uzman kullanıcı jargonundan kaçının. Mümkün olduğunca basit bir dil kullanmaya çalışın.
Kullanıcıya bir şey olduğunu veya olmadığını bildirmek istediğinizde &quot;başarılı&quot;, &quot;başarılı şekilde&quot;, &quot;başarısız&quot;, &quot;hata meydana geldi&quot; vb.
Bu, geliştiricilerin her şeyi doğru veya yanlış olarak görme perspektifinden gelir, ancak kullanıcılar genellikle yalnızca gerçekte ne olduğunu veya olmadığını ve bu konuda ne yapmaları gerektiğini (eğer varsa) bilmek ister. Böyle:

* &quot;Dosya başarıyla yeniden adlandırıldı&quot; -&gt; &quot;Dosya yeniden adlandırıldı&quot;
* &quot;Dosya yeniden adlandırılamadı&quot; -&gt; &quot;Bu ada sahip bir dosya zaten var. Lütfen farklı bir ad seçin.&quot;

=== Boşlukların ve satır sonlarının farkında olun ===
MediaWiki'nin yerelleştirilmiş mesajları genellikle viki içinde, canlı vikilerdeki viki işlemleri veya [[translatewiki.net]] üzerindeki çevirmenler tarafından düzenlenir.
Özellikle mesajınızın başındaki veya sonundaki boşlukların editörleri nasıl etkileyeceğinin farkında olmalısınız:

* Mesajın sonundaki boşluklar ve satır sonları (yeni satırlar) vikimetin düzenleyici tarafından her zaman otomatik olarak kaldırılır. İletiniz, vikide düzenlendiğinde kaybolacağından boşluk veya satır sonu ile bitmemelidir.
* Başlangıçtaki boşluklar ve satır sonları otomatik olarak kaldırılmaz, ancak düzenleme sırasında yanlışlıkla kaldırılmaları muhtemeldir ve bundan kaçınılmalıdır.

Mesajınızı aktif metinle başlatın ve bitirin; Etrafında yeni bir satıra veya paragraf sonuna ihtiyacınız varsa, çevreleyen kodunuz onu döndürülen metne eklemekle ilgilenmelidir.

'Kelime ayırıcı' (çoğu dilde yalnızca bir boşluk karakterinden oluşur) gibi sonunda boşluk gerektiren bazı mesajlar vardır.
Bu tür kullanım durumlarını desteklemek için, mesaj aksi takdirde vikimetin veya HTML biçimlendirmesine izin vermese bile, mesajlarda aşağıdaki HTML varlıklarına izin verilir ve gerçek karakterlere dönüştürülür:&lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/REL1_34/includes/cache/MessageCache.php#L887&lt;/ref&gt;

* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#32;&lt;/code&gt; – alan
* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/code&gt; veya &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#160;&lt;/code&gt; – [[:tr:Ayrılmaz alan|ayrılmaz alan]]
* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;shy;&lt;/code&gt; – [[w:soft hyphen|esnek kısa çizgi]]

İlgili bir notta, [[Special:MyLanguage/pre-save transforms|önceden kaydetme dönüşümleri]] tarafından etkilenen diğer sözdizimi öğeleri de mesajlarda kullanılmamalıdır, çünkü bunlar mesaj vikide düzenlendiğinde dönüştürüleceklerdir.

=== Standart büyük harf kullanın ===
Büyük harf kullanımı, çevirmenlere tek sözcükler, liste veya menü ögeleri, ifadeler veya tam cümleler gibi neyi çevirdikleri konusunda ipuçları verir.
Doğru (standart) büyük harf kullanımı, arama motorlarının sayfalarınızı değerlendirmesinde de rol oynayabilir.
MediaWiki, arayüz mesajlarında [[:tr:Büyük ve küçük harf|cümle harfi]] (''Hızlı kahverengi tilki tembel köpeğin üzerinden atlar'') kullanır.

Çoğu yazı sisteminde büyük harf bulunmadığını ve bunlara sahip olanlardan bazılarının bunları İngilizce'den farklı şekilde kullandığını daima unutmayın.
Bu nedenle, vurgu için TÜMÜ BÜYÜK HARF kullanmayın.
Aşağıdakilere göre CSS veya HTML {{tag|em|open}} veya {{tag|strong|open}} kullanın:

==== Vurgu ====
Normal metinde, '''kalın yüz''' veya ''eğik'' ve benzeri [[w:Emphasis|vurgu]] mesaj metinlerinin bir parçası olmalıdır.
Vurgulama konusundaki yerel kurallar genellikle farklılık gösterir, özellikle bazı Asya alfabelerinin kendilerine ait olan kuralları vardır.
Çevirmenler vurguyu hedef dillerine ve alanlarına göre ayarlayabilmelidir.
Dil veya yazım bazında işaretlemeye izin vermek için kullanıcı arayüzünüzde &quot;{{tag|em|open}}&quot; ve &quot;{{tag|strong|open}}&quot; kullanmayı deneyin.

İngiliz ve Avrupa stillerinin modern ekran düzenlerinde vurgu daha az kullanılır.
Nasıl tercüme edileceğine dair değerli ipuçları verebileceğinden, bunu [[#Message documentation|Mesa belgelendirmenize]] yine de iletin.
Vurgu, çevirmenlerin bilmesi koşuluyla, uygun olduğu şekilde diğer kültürel bağlamlarda kullanılabilir ve kullanılmalıdır.

&lt;references /&gt;

== Ayrıca bakınız ==

* {{ll|Customization}}
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings}}
* {{ll|Manual:Skins}}
* {{ll|Manual:Messages API}}
* {{ll|Localisation}}
* [[translatewiki:FAQ]]

[[Category:Customization techniques{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:User interface{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Localisation{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:System message{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7aqco0du8a0nxujj06n1a6if9sqjra1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402551</id>
      <parentid>5402537</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:27:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="55327" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{i18n navigation}}
{{TOC right|limit=2}}

[[Image:MediaWiki SpecialUpload interface labelled.png|thumb|Çeşitli sistem mesajlarını gösteren [[Special:Upload]] formunun etiketli diyagramı.]]
'''Sistem mesajı''', davranışını kişiselleştirmek için kullanılabilecek düz metin (nowiki), vikimetin, [[:tr:CSS|CSS]] veya [[:tr:JavaScript|JavaScript]] parçacığıdır. MediaWiki ve her dilin görünümü ve [[w:Locale (computer software)|yereldir]]. MediaWiki, hem çekirdek hem de uzantılar için, MediaWiki kullanıcı arayüzünün uluslararası hâle getirilmesine ve yerelleştirilmesine olanak tanıyan, arayüzün kullanıcıya bakan herhangi bir kısmı için mesajlar kullanır.
MediaWiki'de kullanılan tüm mesajlar bir ''mesaj dosyası'' içinde tanımlanmıştır.

== Vikide mesajları geçersiz kılma ==
Mesajlar, viki üzerinde düzenlenerek varsayılan değerlerinden geçersiz kılınabilir.
Her mesajın MediaWiki ad alanında, mesaj anahtarının sayfanın adı olduğu bir viki sayfası vardır.
Örneğin, &quot;aboutsite&quot; mesajı MediaWiki:aboutsite altında saklanır.
Varsayılan olarak, kullanıcının &quot;editinterface&quot; iznine sahip olmadığı sürece, bu ad alanının düzenlenmesi kısıtlanmıştır.
Tüm mesaj sayfalarının bir listesi [[Special:AllMessages]] sayfasında bulunabilir.
Arayüz mesajlarını düzenlemek, normal bir viki sayfasını düzenlemek gibi, genellikle basittir, ancak varsayılan olarak hizmetlilere (ve arayüz hizmetlilere) atanan [[editinterface]] iznine sahip kullanıcılarla sınırlıdır.
[[Image:Wiki-system-messages.png|thumb|Eski [[Special:AllMessages]] sayfasındaki örnek satır.]]
[[Special:AllMessages]] tablosu iki sütun içeriyor: bağlantılı arayüz adı ve metin.
Metin yukarıdaki varsayılan metni ve aşağıdaki özelleştirilmiş metni göstermek için yatay olarak bölünmüştür.
Özel bir mesaj olmadığında, yalnızca varsayılan gösterilecektir.
Bir mesajı özelleştirmek için sol sütundaki üst bağlantıya (mesajın adı) tıklayın.
Düzenleme sayfası boş olduğundan, varsayılan metin kullanımdaysa bu bağlantı kırmızıdır.

Sol sütun hücrelerindeki alt bağlantılar, o mesaj için tartışma sayfalarına yönlendirir.

{{anchor|Finding messages and documentation}}
== Mesajları ve belgeleri bulma ==
Her mesajın MediaWiki tarafından nasıl kullanıldığı, mevcut değişkenler, kullanılan parametreler, sınırlamalar vb., [[#Message_documentation|mesaj belgelemesi yönergeleri]] uyarınca [//translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;task=reviewall&amp;group=core&amp;language=qqq&amp;limit=5000&amp;action=page&amp;filter= qqq sözde dilindeki tam belgeler] dosyalarında açıklanır.
Bazı arayüz mesajları için daha eski {{ll|Category:Interface messages}} değerinde daha uzun açıklama sayfaları bulunabilir.

{{note|1=
translatewiki.net'in viki tabanında, qqq mesajın kullanıcı belgelerinin bulunduğu sayfadır (İngilizce olarak, çünkü tüm okuyuculara aynı şekilde gösterilir).
Aynı şekilde /en /ge /fr .../qqq maddenin bir alt sayfasıdır ve doğrudan görüntülenebilir.

* İngilizce bir maddeyi görüntülemek için [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/en]] deneyin,
* Aynı maddeyi Fransızca olarak görüntülemek için [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/fr]] deneyin,
* İlişkili belgelerini (İngilizce) görüntülemek için [[translatewiki:MediaWiki:Tog-hideminor/qqq]] deneyin.

Bu bakış açısından &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt;, isteğin &lt;code&gt;language=&lt;/code&gt; parametresinde bir dil olarak kabul edilir.
}}

MediaWiki 1.18 ve sonraki sürümlerde, URL'ye &lt;code&gt;?[[uselang]]=qqx&lt;/code&gt; veya URL zaten bir &lt;code&gt;?&lt;/code&gt; karakteri ([{{fullurl:{{FULLPAGENAME}}|uselang=qqx}} örnek]) içeriyorsa, &lt;code&gt;&amp;uselang=qqx&lt;/code&gt; ekleyerek yapılabilen özel sözde dil kodu &lt;code&gt;'''[[Help:Qqx|qqx]]'''&lt;/code&gt; içindeki bir vikiye göz atarak bir mesaj anahtarı bulabilirsiniz. Tüm mesajlar daha sonra mesaj anahtarları ile değiştirilecektir, böylece hangi mesajın sorumlu olduğunu belirleyebilirsiniz. Her zaman içerik dilinde olan mesajlar qqx kullanılarak gösterilmeyecektir.

Arayüzün bazı bölümleri, qqx hilesini kullandığınızda gösterilen dizeye &lt;code&gt;nstab-&lt;/code&gt; ekler. Örneğin, ana ad alanındaki tartışma sayfasına bağlanan sekmenin etiketi &lt;code&gt;nstab-talk&lt;/code&gt; olarak gösterilir, ancak dize aslında [[MediaWiki:Talk]] konumunda bulunur.

Sayfanın örn. [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|&quot;Tercihler&quot; özel sayfa]] sekmeyi &lt;code&gt;uselang&lt;/code&gt; parametresinden sonra eklemeniz gerekecek, ör. &lt;code&gt;Special:Preferences?uselang=qqx#mw-prefsection-rendering&lt;/code&gt;.

{{anchor|Localisation file format}}
== Yerelleştirme dosya biçimi ==

MediaWiki'de kullanılan tüm mesajlar bir ''mesaj dosyası'' içinde tanımlanmıştır.

MediaWiki'de iki tür mesaj dosyası vardır: JSON ve PHP.
Nisan 2014 itibariyle, temel MediaWiki ve bakımı yapılan uzantıların çoğu JSON biçimine taşındı.
Tüm yeni geliştirmeler için JSON kullanmalısınız.
JSON'a geçiş hakkında daha fazla bilgi için [[Requests for comment/Localisation format]] sayfasına bakın.

=== JSON ===

2013'ün sonlarından itibaren mesajlar için yeni bir dosya formatı tanıtıldı: JSON.
Bu, genel bir genel veri depolama biçimi olarak bilinen sade [[:tr:JSON|JSON]]'dur.
İçindeki her anahtar bir mesaj anahtarıdır ve değer mesaj metnidir.
Ayrıca, çeviri yazarları gibi çeviriyle ilgili bilgileri depolamak için özel &lt;code&gt;@metadata&lt;/code&gt; anahtarı kullanılır.

JSON kullanmak, yürütülebilir olmadığından yerelleştirme dosyalarını daha güvenli hâle getirir.
Ayrıca, MediaWiki benzeri ön uç yerelleştirme yetenekleri sağlayan ve [[Milkshake|Project Milkshake]] kapsamında geliştirilen ve MediaWiki'ye daha az bağımlı olmak isteyen bazı uzantılar tarafından kullanılan JavaScript kitaplık olan jquery.i18n ile de uyumludur, örneğin [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor]] ve [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector|UniversalLanguageSelector]].

Daha geniş uluslararasılaştırma ve yerelleştirme araçları paketi &quot;[[Project Milkshake]]&quot; olarak adlandırıldığından, bazı kişiler bu biçimi &quot;banana&quot; olarak adlandırır.

=== Dosya konumu ===
MediaWiki çekirdeğinde, yerelleştirme dosyaları &lt;code&gt;{{git file |file=languages/i18n |action=tree}}&lt;/code&gt; dizinine yerleştirilir.
MediaWiki uzantıları genellikle kendi uzantılarını &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt; bir alt dizine yerleştirir.
Bir proje içinde çok sayıda mesaj varsa, sürdürülebilirlik için bunları iki veya daha fazla güncel alt dizine bölmek istenebilir.
MediaWiki bağlamında, bu alt dizinleri listelemek için {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}} yapılandırma anahtarı kullanılır.
İşte MediaWiki için VisualEditor uzantısından bir örnek:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
  &quot;MessagesDirs&quot;: {
    &quot;VisualEditor&quot;: [
      &quot;lib/ve/modules/ve/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-mw/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;modules/ve-wmf/i18n&quot;,
      &quot;lib/ve/lib/oojs-ui/i18n&quot;
    ]
  }
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

İngilizce &quot;en&quot; ileti dosyasına &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; yeni iletiler eklersiniz ve bunları ileti belgeleme dosyasında &quot;qqq&quot; &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; özel sözde dil koduyla belgelersiniz.
''Ayrıca bakınız: [[#Adding new messages|Yeni mesajlar ekleme]]''.

==== Meta veri ====

Şu anda dosyalarda aşağıdaki meta veri alanları kullanılmaktadır:

;authors
:İletilerin yazarlarının bir JSON listesi. İngilizce (en) ve mesaj belgeleri (qqq) için bunlar, mesaj dosyası düzenlendiğinde elle eklenir. Diğer tüm diller için bu, mesaj dosyası [[translatewiki.net]] üzerinden dışa aktarıldığında otomatik olarak eklenir. Mesaj belgeleri translatewiki.net üzerinde düzenlenebilir ve belge düzenleyiciler de qqq.json dosyasına otomatik olarak eklenir.
;message-documentation
:Bu, mesaj belgelerini depolamak için kullanılan sözde dil kodudur. MediaWiki için bu her zaman ''qqq'' kodudur. (Bu, bazı uzantılarda görünür, ancak gerçekte hiçbir şekilde işlenmez. Zorunlu değildir.)

==== Sözleşmeler ====

Satır sonları gibi özel karakterlerden kaçılır (&lt;code&gt;&quot;\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).

Farklı alfabelerdeki harfleri temsil eden Unicode karakterler, karakter kodları olarak değil, gerçek karakterler olarak saklanır, çünkü bu dosyalar bazen insanlar tarafından okunur ve bu, dosyaları daha küçük yapar (&lt;code&gt;&quot;誼&quot;&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u8ABC&quot;&lt;/code&gt; değil).
Her durumda, geliştiricilerin İngilizce dışındaki herhangi bir dilde mesajları düzenlemek için birkaç nedeni vardır, çünkü bunlar genellikle translatewiki.net aracılığıyla düzenlenir.

HTML kodu da kaçmaz, yani &lt;code&gt;&quot;&amp;lt;strong&gt;Warning&amp;lt;/strong&gt;&quot;&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;&quot;\u003cstrong\u003eWarning\u003c/strong\u003e&quot;&lt;/code&gt; değil.

JSON dosyaları sekmeler kullanılarak girintilidir.

=== PHP ===

Daha eski yerelleştirme dosyası biçimi PHP'dir.
Bu aslında tüm mesajları içeren bir PHP dizisidir.
Çekirdek MediaWiki'de her dil, MediaWiki kaynak kodunun diller/mesaj dizinindeki kendi dosyasında bulunur.
Uzantılarda tüm diller ve mesaj belgeleri (''qqq'') aynı dosyadadır: ''ExtensionName.i18n.php'', genellikle uzantının ana dizinindedir.

PHP'den JSON'a geçiş yapmak için [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:GenerateJsonI18n.php|generateJsonI18n.php]] betiğini kullanın.
Mesajları JSON dosyalarına taşıyacak ve PHP dosyasının metnini JSON dosyalarına işaret eden bir altlık ile değiştirecektir.
Bu kalıp kod, MediaWiki 1.19 ile geriye dönük uyumluluk için gereklidir.
MediaWiki 1.19 uyumluluğu gerektirmeyen yeni uzantılarda kullanılmamaktadır.

== Mesajları kullanma ==
MediaWiki, koddaki anahtarlarla kaynaklanan mesajların ''merkezi'' bir deposunu kullanır.
Bu, örneğin kaynak dosyalardan çevrilebilir dizeleri çıkaran &lt;code&gt;Gettext&lt;/code&gt; üzerinden farklıdır.
Anahtar tabanlı sistem, orijinal metinleri düzeltmek ve mesajlardaki değişiklikleri izlemek gibi bazı şeyleri kolaylaştırır.
Dezavantajı, elbette, kullanılan mesajların listesi ve bu tuşlar için kaynak metinlerin listesinin senkronizasyondan çıkabilmesidir.
Pratikte bu büyük bir sorun değil ve tek önemli sorun, bazen artık kullanılmayan ekstra mesajların hâlâ çeviri için kalmasıdır.

İleti anahtarlarını daha yönetilebilir ve daha kolay bulmak için grep ile de her zaman tam olarak yazın ve dinamik olarak oluşturmaya çok fazla güvenmeyin.
Kodunuza daha iyi bir yapı kazandırdığını düşünüyorsanız, mesaj anahtarlarının bölümlerini birleştirebilirsiniz, ancak olası sonuç anahtarlarının bir listesiyle birlikte yakına bir yorum koyun.

Ayrıca [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding_conventions#Dynamic_identifiers|kod kurallarına]] bakın. Örneğin:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
// Burada kullanılabilecek mesajlar:
// * myextension-connection-success
// * myextension-connection-warning
// * myextension-connection-error
$text = wfMessage( 'myextension-connection-' . $status )-&gt;parse();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

JavaScript'te bir mesaj kullanmak için, ResourceLoader modülünüzün tanımında, &lt;code&gt;&quot;messages&quot;&lt;/code&gt; özelliğinde [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Messages API#Using a ResourceLoader module|listeleme]] yapmanız gerekir.

PHP ve JavaScript'te mesaj işlevlerinin ayrıntılı kullanımı {{ll|Manual:Messages API}} sayfasındadır.
'''Bu önemli bir belgelendirme sayfasıdır ve mesajları kullanan kod yazmadan önce okumalısınız.'''

{{anchor|Message sources}}
== Mesaj kaynakları ==

Kod, şu kaynaklardan gelen sistem mesajlarını arar:
* MediaWiki ad alanı. Bu, standart mesajlar uygun olmadığında veya istenmediğinde vikilerin tüm mesajlarını benimsemesine veya geçersiz kılmasına izin verir.
** MediaWiki:''Mesaj-anahtarı'' varsayılan mesajdır,
** MediaWiki:''Mesaj-anahtarı''/''dil-kodu'', bir kullanıcı vikinin varsayılan dilinden başka bir dil seçtiğinde kullanılacak mesajdır.
* Mesaj dosyalarından:
** Çekirdek MediaWiki'nin kendisi ve şu anda bakımı yapılan çoğu [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All extensions|uzantılar]] her dil için &lt;code&gt;''zyx''.json&lt;/code&gt; adlı bir dosya kullanır, burada ''zyx'' dil için dil kodu bulunur.
** Bazı eski uzantılar, genellikle &lt;code&gt;''MyExtensionName''.i18n.php&lt;/code&gt; adlı tüm dillerdeki tüm mesajları tutan birleştirilmiş bir mesaj dosyası kullanır.
** Birçok Wikimedia Vakfı vikisi, {{ll|Extension:WikimediaMessages|nsp=0}} uzantısından bazı mesajlara erişerek, mesajları her MediaWiki kurulumuna dayatmadan WMF vikilerinde standart hâle getirmelerine olanak tanır.
** Birkaç uzantı diğer teknikleri kullanır.
{{anchor|Caching}}

== Önbelleğe alma ==
Sistem mesajları, öncelikle her web isteğinde kullanıldığı için MediaWiki'nin en önemli bileşenlerinden biridir.
PHP mesaj dosyaları, binlerce mesaj anahtarını ve değerini sakladıkları için büyüktür.
Bu dosyayı (ve kullanıcının dili içerik dilinden farklıysa muhtemelen birden fazla dosyayı) yüklemek, büyük bir bellek ve performans maliyetine sahiptir.
Bu performans etkisini azaltmak için agresif, katmanlı bir önbellek sistemi kullanılır.

MediaWiki, kodun anlaşılmasını biraz daha zorlaştıran yerleşik birçok önbelleğe alma mekanizmasına sahiptir.
1.16'dan beri, mesajları ya [[cdb]] dosyalarında ya da veritabanında önbelleğe alan yeni bir önbelleğe alma sistemi bulunmaktadır.
Özelleştirilmiş mesajlar, yapılandırmaya bağlı olarak dosya sisteminde ve [[memcached]] (veya alternatif) içinde önbelleğe alınır.

Aşağıdaki tablo, ilgili ayarlara genel bir bakış sunar:

{|class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
!colspan=&quot;2&quot; rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| Önbellek depolama konumu
!colspan=&quot;4&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf}}
|-
! 'store' =&gt; 'db'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;br /&gt;(varsayılan) !! 'store' =&gt; 'files'&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; !! 'store' =&gt; 'array'&lt;br /&gt;''(MW ≥ 1.26'dan beri deneysel)''
|-
!rowspan=&quot;2&quot;| {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}}
! = false&lt;br /&gt;(varsayılan)
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || ''hata'' (tanımlanmamış yol) || ''hata'' (tanımlanmamış yol)
|-
! = ''path''
| {{ll|Manual:l10n cache table|l10n cache table}} || yerel dosya sistemi (CDB) || yerel dosya sistemi (CDB) || yerel dosya sistemi (PHP dizisi)
|}
{{MW version|version=1.27.0|version2=1.27.2|gerrit change=Id3e2d2b18ddb423647bf2e893bcf942722c0e097}}
MediaWiki 1.27.0 ve 1.27.1'de, otomatik algılama, dosya arka ucunu tercih edecek şekilde değiştirildi.
&lt;code&gt;'store' =&gt; 'detect'&lt;/code&gt; (varsayılan) durumunda, dosya arka ucu {{ll|Manual:$wgCacheDirectory|$wgCacheDirectory}} yolu ile kullanılır.
Bu değer ayarlanmazsa (varsayılan), işletim sistemi tarafından belirlenen geçici bir dizin kullanılır.
Geçici bir dizin algılanamazsa, veritabanı arka ucu yedek olarak kullanılır.
Bu, paylaşılan ana bilgisayarlardaki dosya çakışması ve güvenlik sorunları nedeniyle 1.27.2 ve 1.28.0'dan geri alındı ([[:phab:T127127|T127127]] ve [[:phab:T161453|T161453]] sayfalarına bakın).

=== İşlev geri izleme ===
Önbelleğe alma katmanlarını daha iyi görsel olarak tasvir etmek için, burada bir mesaj alınırken hangi yöntemlerin çağrıldığına dair bir işlev geri izlemesi verilmiştir.
Her katmanın açıklaması için aşağıdaki bölümlere bakın.

* &lt;code&gt;Message::fetchMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;MessageCache::get()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;Language::getMessage()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalisationCache::getSubitem()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LCStore::get()&lt;/code&gt;

=== MessageCache ===
&lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; sınıfı, iletiler için önbelleğe almanın en üst düzeyidir.
Message sınıfından çağrılır ve bir mesajın son ham içeriğini döndürür.
Bu katman aşağıdaki mantığı işler:

* Veritabanında mesaj geçersiz kılmaları kontrol etme
* Aşırı yüklenen mesajları {{ll|memcached}} olarak veya {{ll|Manual:$wgMessageCacheType|$wgMessageCacheType}} olarak ayarlanmış olan herhangi bir yerde önbelleğe alma
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|Dil yedeği]] dizisinin geri kalanını çözümleme

Son mermi önemlidir.
[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Language#Fallback languages|Dil yedekleri]], orijinalin istenen bir mesajı yoksa MediaWiki'nin başka bir dile geri dönmesine izin verir.
Sonraki bölümde bahsedildiği gibi, dil geri dönüş çözümlemesinin çoğu daha düşük bir düzeyde gerçekleşir.
Ancak, yalnızca &lt;code&gt;MessageCache&lt;/code&gt; katmanı, geçersiz kılınan mesajlar için veritabanını kontrol eder.
Böylece veritabanından geçersiz kılınan mesajların geri dönüş zincirine entegre edilmesi burada yapılır.
Veritabanı kullanılmıyorsa, bu katmanın tamamı devre dışı bırakılabilir.

=== LocalisationCache ===

{{ll|Manual:LocalisationCache.php|LocalisationCache.php}} sayfasına bakın

=== LCStore ===
&lt;code&gt;LCStore&lt;/code&gt; sınıfı, yalnızca LocalisationCache sınıfı tarafından mesajları gerçekten önbelleğe almak ve almak için kullanılan bir arka uç uygulamasıdır.
MediaWiki'de genel önbelleğe alma için kullanılan &lt;code&gt;BagOStuff&lt;/code&gt; sınıfı gibi, bir dizi farklı önbellek türü vardır ([[Manual:$wgLocalisationCacheConf|$wgLocalisationCacheConf]] kullanılarak yapılandırılır):
* &quot;db&quot; (varsayılan) - Veritabanındaki mesajları önbelleğe alır
* &quot;file&quot; (&lt;code&gt;$wgCacheDirectory&lt;/code&gt; ayarlanmışsa varsayılan) - Mesajları yerel bir dosyada önbelleğe almak için [[w:cdb (software)|CDB]] kullanır
* &quot;accel&quot; - Verileri depolamak için [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|APC]] veya başka bir işlem kodu önbelleği kullanır

&quot;file&quot; seçeneği Wikimedia Vakfı tarafından kullanılır ve veritabanına gitmekten daha hızlı ve APC önbelleğinden daha güvenilir olduğu için, özellikle de APC, PHP 5.5 veya sonraki sürümleriyle uyumlu olmadığı için önerilir.

{{anchor|Adding new messages}}
== Yeni mesaj ekleme ==

=== Mesaj anahtarını seçme ===

Ayrıca bakınız:
{{ll|Manual:Coding conventions#System messages}}

Mesaj anahtarı küresel olarak benzersiz olmalıdır.
Bu, çekirdek MediaWiki'yi ve tüm uzantıları ve görünümleri içerir.

Mesaj adlarında küçük harflere, sayılara ve kısa çizgilere sadık kalın; diğer karakterlerin çoğu daha az pratik veya hiç çalışmıyor.
MediaWiki kuralına göre, ilk karakter büyük/küçük harfe duyarlı değildir ve diğer karakterler büyük/küçük harfe duyarlıdır.

Lütfen adlandırma için küresel veya yerel kuralları izleyin.
Uzantılar için standart bir önek, tercihen küçük harfle uzantı adı ve ardından bir tire (&quot;-&quot;) kullanın.
İstisnalar şunlardır:

; API tarafından kullanılan mesajlar : Bunlar &lt;code&gt;apihelp-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apiwarn-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;apierror-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır. Bu önekten sonra uzantı önekini koyun. (Bu mesajların genellikle [[phab:source/mediawiki/browse/master/includes/api/i18n/|includes/i18/api]] altında ayrı bir dosyada olması gerektiğini unutmayın.)
; Günlükle ilgili mesajlar : Bunlar &lt;code&gt;logentry-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;log-name-&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;log-description&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır.
; Kullanıcı hakları : Special:ListGroupRights sayfasında görüntülenen hakkın adı anahtarı &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır. &quot;{{int|Permissionserrorstext-withaction|unused}}&quot; cümlesini tamamlayan eylemin adı &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır.
; Revizyon etiketleri : Revizyon etiketleri &lt;code&gt;tag-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır.
; Özel sayfa başlıkları : Özel sayfa başlıkları &lt;code&gt;special-&lt;/code&gt; ile başlamalıdır.

=== Mesaj oluştururken dikkat edilmesi gereken diğer noktalar ===

# Mesaj için uygun işleme kullandığınızdan emin olun (ayrıştırma, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;-değiştirme, HTML için kaçış vb.)
# Mesajınız çekirdeğin bir parçasıysa, Installer, EXIF etiketleri ve ApiHelp gibi bazı bileşenlerin kendi mesaj dosyaları olmasına rağmen, genellikle &lt;code&gt;languages/i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt; ile eklenmelidir.
# Mesajınız bir uzantıdaysa, onu uygun alt dizindeki &lt;code&gt;i18n/en.json&lt;/code&gt; dosyasına veya &lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; dosyasına ekleyin. Özellikle, çoğu son kullanıcı tarafından görülmeyen yalnızca geliştiriciler tarafından görülen API mesajları, genellikle &lt;code&gt;i18n/api/en.json&lt;/code&gt; gibi ayrı bir dosyadadır. Bir uzantının çok fazla mesajı varsa, &lt;code&gt;i18n&lt;/code&gt; altında alt dizinler oluşturabilirsiniz. Varsayılan &lt;code&gt;i18n/&lt;/code&gt; dahil tüm mesaj dizinleri, &lt;code&gt;MessagesDirs&lt;/code&gt; içindeki &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; bölümünde veya {{ll|Manual:$wgMessagesDirs|$wgMessagesDirs}} değişkeninde listelenmelidir.
# Bir ara verin ve mesajın ifadesini düşünün. Mümkün olduğunca açık mı? Yanlış anlaşılabilir mi? Mümkünse diğer geliştiricilerden veya yerelleştiricilerden yorum isteyin. [[#Uluslararasılaştırma ipuçları|Uluslararasılaştırma ipuçları]] bölümünü izleyin.
# Aynı dizindeki &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; dosyasına belgelendirme ekleyin.
# Dosyadaki mesajların sırası kabaca projenizin özelliklerine uygun olmalıdır. Aynı özellikten gelen mesajları yan yana koyun. Bu, çevirmenlerin odaklanmalarına, verimli ve tutarlı olmalarına yardımcı olur.
# En temel ve en sık kullanılan olması beklenen mesajları dosyanın başına, daha nadir ve teknik olarak daha gelişmiş mesajları ise sonlara doğru koyun.


== Çevrilmemesi gereken mesajlar ==

# '''Yoksayılan''' mesajlar, yalnızca İngilizce mesajlar dosyasında bulunması gereken mesajlardır. Yalnızca diğer mesajlara veya dilden bağımsız özelliklere atıfta bulundukları için çevrilmesi gerekmeyen mesajlardır, ''örneğin'' bir &quot;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&quot; mesajı.
# '''İsteğe bağlı''' mesajlar yalnızca hedef dilde değiştirilirse çevrilebilir.

Bu tür mesajları işaretlemek için:

* sırasıyla &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; ileti belgelerindeki şablonu kullanın;
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Notranslate|notranslate]]}}&lt;/code&gt; veya
*# &lt;code&gt;{&lt;nowiki/&gt;{[[translatewiki:Template:Optional|optional]]}}&lt;/code&gt;;
* {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} üzerinde kullanılan {{ll|Extension:Translate|nsp=0}} uzantısına, uygun şekilde listeleyen bir yama göndererek iletilerle ne yapacağını söyleyin (ayrıca {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate/Group configuration/MediaWiki|tam yapılandırma belgelerine}} bakın):
** çekirdek için, {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/MediaWiki.yaml}} içine mesaj anahtarlarını ekleyin
**# &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;ignored:&lt;/code&gt; altında veya
**# &lt;code dir=&quot;ltr&quot;&gt;optional:&lt;/code&gt; altında;
** uzantılar için, {{git file|project=translatewiki|file=groups/MediaWiki/mediawiki-extensions.txt}} içinde uzantının adının altına aşağıdaki gibi bir satır ekleyin
**# &lt;code&gt;ignored = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt; or
**# &lt;code&gt;optional = ''msg-key-1'',''msg-key-2''&lt;/code&gt;.

== Mevcut mesajları kaldırma ==
&lt;code&gt;en.json&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; dosyadan kaldırın.
Başka dillerle uğraşmayın.
{{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} güncellemeleri bunları otomatik olarak halledecektir.

Ayrıca, mesajın translatewiki yapılandırmasında, örneğin isteğe bağlı veya en çok kullanılan mesajlar listesinde herhangi bir yerde görünüp görünmediğini kontrol edin (basit bir git grep yeterli olmalıdır).
Gerekirse bu listelerden çıkarın.

== Mevcut mesajları değiştirme ==

# [[#Mesaj belgelendirmesi|Mesaj belgelendirmesini]] güncellemeyi düşünün.
# Eski çeviriler yeni anlama uygun değilse mesaj anahtarını değiştirin. Bu aynı zamanda mesaj işlemedeki değişiklikleri de içerir (ayrıştırma, kaçış, parametreler, vb.). Bir mesajın ifadesini teknik değişiklikler olmadan geliştirmek, genellikle bir anahtarı değiştirmek için bir neden değildir. Translatewiki.net'te çeviriler, çevirmenler tarafından hedeflenebilmeleri için eski olarak işaretlenecektir. Bir mesaj anahtarının değiştirilmesi, i18n ekibiyle görüşmeyi veya bir destek talebinde bulunmayı gerektirmez. Ancak, özel durumlarınız veya sorularınız varsa, {{irc|translatewiki}} kanalıdan veya {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} adresindeki [[translatewiki:Support|destek sayfasında]] sorun.
# Uzantı {{ll|translatewiki.net|translatewiki.net}} tarafından destekleniyorsa, lütfen yalnızca İngilizce kaynak mesajını ve/veya anahtarı ve beraberindeki &lt;code&gt;qqq.json&lt;/code&gt; girişini değiştirin. Gerekirse translatewiki.net ekibi çevirileri güncellemek, bunları eski olarak işaretlemek, dosyayı temizlemek veya mümkünse anahtarları yeniden adlandırmakla ilgilenecektir. Bu, yalnızca HTML etiketleri gibi diğer dillerde değiştirebileceğiniz ve bu dilleri konuşmadan değiştirebileceğiniz şeyleri değiştirdiğinizde de geçerlidir. Bu eylemlerin çoğu [[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]]'te gerçekleşecek ve Git'e yaklaşık bir günlük gecikmeyle ulaşacak.

{{anchor|Message documentation}}
== Mesaj belgelendirmesi ==
Mesaj belgelendirmesi için bir sözde dil kodu &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; vardır.
Özel kullanım için ayrılmış ISO 639 kodlarından biridir.
Orada, her mesajın çevirisini tutmuyoruz, ancak ''her mesaj hakkında'' İngilizce cümleler topluyoruz: bize nerede kullanıldığını söyleyen, nasıl çevrileceğine dair ipuçları veren ve parametrelerini numaralandıran ve açıklayan, ilgili mesajlara bağlantı veren, ve benzeri.
[[translatewiki:|translatewiki.net]]'te, bu ipuçları mesajları düzenlerken çevirmenlere gösterilir.

Programcılar her mesajı belgelemelidir.
Mesaj belgelendirmesi, yalnızca çevirmenler için değil, modülün tüm bakımcılar için önemli bir kaynaktır.
Yazılıma bir mesaj eklendiğinde, buna karşılık gelen bir &lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; girişi de ''olmalıdır''; bunu yapmayan revizyonlar, dokümantasyon eklenene kadar &quot;&lt;code&gt;V-1&lt;/code&gt;&quot; olarak işaretlenir.

&lt;code&gt;qqq&lt;/code&gt; dosyalarındaki belgelendirme, yalnızca yeni mesajlar eklenirken veya mevcut bir İngilizce mesajı, örneğin parametre ekleme veya çıkarma gibi bir belge değişikliği gerektiren bir şekilde değiştirirken doğrudan düzenlenmelidir.
Diğer durumlarda, belgelendirme genellikle translatewiki'de düzenlenmelidir.
Her belge dizisine, sanki bir çeviriymiş gibi &lt;nowiki&gt;https://translatewiki.net/wiki/MediaWiki:&lt;/nowiki&gt;''message-key''&lt;nowiki&gt;/qqq&lt;/nowiki&gt; adresinden erişilebilir.
Bu düzenlemeler, çevirilerle birlikte kaynak depolara dışa aktarılacaktır.

Belgelendirmede olması gereken faydalı bilgiler şunları içerir:

# Mesaj işleme (ayrıştırma, kaçış, düz metin).
# Örnek değerlerle parametre türü.
# Mesajın kullanıldığı yer (sayfalar, kullanıcı arayüzündeki konumlar).
# Mesajın kullanıldığı yerde nasıl kullanıldığı (bir sayfa başlığı, düğme metni, ''vb.'').
# Bu mesajla birlikte başka hangi mesajlar kullanılıyor veya bu mesaj başka hangi mesajlara atıfta bulunuyor.
# İleti bağlamda görüldüğünde anlaşılabilecek, ancak ileti tek başına görüntülendiğinde (çeviri yapılırken durum böyledir) anlaşılamayan başka herhangi bir şey.
# Varsa, dilbilgisi hakkında notlar. Örneğin, İngilizce'de &quot;open&quot; hem fiil hem de sıfat olabilir. Diğer birçok dilde kelimeler farklıdır ve belge olmadan nasıl çevrileceğini tahmin etmek imkansızdır.
# &quot;disabled&quot;, &quot;open&quot; veya &quot;blocked&quot; gibi şeyleri tanımlayan sıfatlar, neyi tanımladıklarını ''her zaman'' söylemelidir. Birçok dilde sıfatlar tanımladıkları ismin cinsiyetine sahip olmalıdır. Farklı türden şeylerin farklı sıfatlara ihtiyaç duyması da olabilir.
# Mesajın özel özellikleri varsa, örneğin bir sayfa adıysa veya doğrudan çeviri değil, kültüre veya projeye uyarlanmış olması gerekiyorsa.
# Mesajın diğer mesajın yanında, örneğin bir listede veya menüde görünüp görünmediği. Sözcüklerin üslubu veya gramer özellikleri muhtemelen yakındaki mesajlara benzer olmalıdır. Ayrıca, bir listedeki ögelerin, listenin başlığıyla uygun şekilde ilişkili olması gerekebilir.
# Mesajının, genel ad alanı adları, URL'ler veya etiketler gibi çevrilmemesi gereken bölümleri.
# &quot;CTA&quot; gibi kısaltmalar veya &quot;şablon&quot;, &quot;bastırma&quot; veya &quot;taslak&quot; gibi belirli jargon gibi potansiyel olarak belirsiz kelimelerin açıklamaları. (İlk etapta bu tür kelimelerden kaçınmanın en iyisi olduğunu unutmayın!)
# Ekran görüntüleri çok faydalıdır. Kırpmayın – mesajın göründüğü tam ekran görüntüsü, tam bağlam sağlar ve birkaç mesajda yeniden kullanılabilir.

Diğer birkaç ipucu:

* Çevirmenlerin çoğu zaman mesajları yazılımı kullanmadan çevirdiğini unutmayın.
* Çoğu zaman, çevirmenler ne modülünüz ne de içindeki diğer mesajlar hakkında herhangi bir bağlam bilgisine sahip değildir.
* Tek başına yeniden ifade edilen bir mesaj çoğu durumda işe yaramaz.
* Tasarımcıların &quot;nav&quot; veya &quot;comps&quot; gibi jargonlarını kullanmayın.
* Modülünüzde kullanılan teknik terimlerin [[betawiki:Terminology#Terminologies|sözlük]] bir kısmını yazmayı düşünün. Bunu yaparsanız, mesajların belgelerinden ona bağlantı verin.

{{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;{{((}}msg-mw{{!}}message key{{))}}&lt;/code&gt;|Mesaj anahtarı}} kullanarak diğer mesajlara bağlantı verebilirsiniz.
Lütfen mesajların bir kısmı başka mesajlardan geliyorsa (bu önlenemiyorsa) veya bazı mesajlar birlikte veya aynı bağlamda gösteriliyorsa bunu yapın.

translatewiki.net, belgelendirme için bazı varsayılan şablonlar sağlar:

* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-action|doc-action]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;code&gt;action-&lt;/code&gt; mesajları için
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-right|doc-right]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;code&gt;right-&lt;/code&gt; mesajları için
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-group|doc-group]]|[...]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - kullanıcı grupları etrafındaki mesajlar için (&lt;code&gt;group&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;member&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;page&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;js&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;css&lt;/code&gt;)
* &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{&lt;/nowiki&gt;[[translatewiki:Template:Doc-accesskey|doc-accesskey]]|[...]&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;code&gt;accesskey-&lt;/code&gt; mesajları için

Daha fazla bilgi için şablon sayfalarına bakın.

{{anchor|Internationalisation hints}}
== Uluslararasılaşma ipuçları ==
[[#Mesaj belgelendirmesi|Belgelendirmesine]] yanı sıra, çevirmenler geliştiricilerden işlerini daha kolay ve verimli hâle getirmek ve tüm diller için gerçek ve iyi bir yerelleştirmeye izin vermek için bazı ipuçlarını dikkate almalarını ister.
Yalnızca İngilizce mesaj ekleme veya düzenleme bile olsa, tüm dillerin ihtiyaçlarının farkında olunmalıdır. Her mesaj 300'den fazla dile çevrilir ve bu mümkün olan en iyi şekilde yapılmalıdır.
Bu ipuçlarının doğru uygulanması genellikle İngilizce olarak daha iyi mesajlar yazmanıza da yardımcı olacaktır.

[[Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Help_and_contact_info|Yerelleştirme#Yardım ve iletişim bilgisi]], i18n ile ilgili deneyimli ve bilgili kişilerin yardımını bulabileceğiniz başlıca yerleri listeler.
=== Mesaj parametrelerini ve anahtarları doğru kullanın ===

Bu, mesajlarınız için doğru bir ifadenin ön koşuludur.

=== Mesajın yeniden kullanılmasından kaçının ===
Çevirmenler mesajın yeniden kullanılmasını önermezler.
Bu, sezgisel görünebilir, çünkü kodu kopyalamak ve çoğaltmak genellikle kötü bir uygulamadır, ancak sistem mesajlarında buna sıklıkla ihtiyaç duyulur.
İngilizce'de iki kavram aynı kelime ile ifade edilebilse de, bu onların her dilde aynı kelime ile ifade edilebileceği anlamına gelmez.
&quot;OK&quot; iyi bir örnektir: İngilizce'de bu, genel bir düğme etiketi için kullanılır, ancak bazı dillerde düğme tarafından gerçekleştirilecek işlemle ilgili bir düğme etiketi kullanmayı tercih ederler.
Başka bir örnek, pratikte herhangi bir sıfattır: &quot;çoklu&quot; gibi bir kelime birçok dilde cinsiyete göre değişir, bu yüzden onu birkaç farklı şeyi tanımlamak için tekrar kullanamazsınız ve birkaç ayrı mesaj oluşturmanız gerekir.

Birden çok özdeş mesaj ekliyorsanız, lütfen içeriklerindeki farklılıkları açıklamak için mesaj belgelerini ekleyin.
Çevirmenler için ekstra iş hakkında endişelenmeyin.
Çeviri belleği, gerektiğinde farklı çevirilere sahip olma esnekliğini korurken bunlara çok yardımcı olur.

{{anchor|Avoid_patchwork_messages|Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages}}
=== Parçalanmış veya 'patchwork' mesajlarından kaçının ===
Dillerin değişen sözcük dizilimleri ve karmaşık gramer ve sözdizimsel kuralları vardır.
&quot;Lego&quot; mesajlarını, yani birden fazla metin parçasından oluşan mesajları, muhtemelen bazı dolaylı yollarla (&quot;dize bitiştirme&quot; olarak da adlandırılır) çevirmek çok zordur.

Her mesajı eksiksiz bir ifade yapmak daha iyidir.
Gerekirse, birkaç cümle genellikle bir metin bloğunda çok daha kolay bir şekilde birleştirilebilir.
Birkaç dizeyi tek bir mesajda birleştirmek istediğinizde, bunları parametre olarak iletin, çünkü çevirmenler çeviri yaparken bunları dilleri için doğru şekilde sıralayabilirler.

==== Birbirinden alıntı yapan mesajlar ====
Kuralın bir istisnası, birbirine atıfta bulunan mesajlar olabilir: '&quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:name}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot; etiketli alana orijinal yazarın adını girin ve bittiğinde &quot;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{int:proceed}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&quot; seçeneğini tıklayın'.
Bu, bir yazılım geliştiricisi veya viki operatörü daha sonra &quot;name&quot; veya &quot;proceed&quot; mesajlarını değiştirdiğinde mesajı tutarlı hâle getirir.
int hack olmadan, geliştiriciler ve operatörler, birini değiştirdiklerinde, ayarlanması gereken tüm ilgili mesajların farkında olmak zorunda kalacaklardı.

=== Belirli projelere özel terimler ve şablonlar kullanmayın ===
MediaWiki, Wikimedia hareketi içinde ve dışında çok çeşitli insanlar tarafından kullanılmaktadır.
Başlangıçta bir ansiklopedi için yapılmış olsa da, şimdi çeşitli içerik türleri için kullanılıyor.
Bu nedenle genel terimler kullanın.
Örneğin, geliştirmekte olduğunuz özelliğin yalnızca sayfaların &quot;maddeler&quot; olarak adlandırıldığı bir sitede kullanılacağından kesinlikle emin değilseniz, &quot;madde&quot; gibi terimlerden kaçının ve bunun yerine &quot;sayfa&quot; kullanın.
İngilizce Vikipedi topluluk sayfasının adı olan &quot;köy çeşmesi&quot; kullanmayın ve bunun yerine &quot;topluluk tartışma sayfası&quot; gibi genel bir terim kullanın.

Tüm vikilerde belirli bir şablonun var olduğunu varsaymayın.
Şablonlar vikiler için yereldir.
Bu, hem kaynak mesajlar hem de çevirileri için geçerlidir.
Mesajlar şablon kullanıyorsa, yalnızca özelliğin dağıtıldığı ''her'' vikide bir şablon oluşturulursa çalışırlar.
Mesajlarda şablon kullanmaktan tamamen kaçınmak en iyisidir.
Bunları gerçekten kullanmanız gerekiyorsa, bunu mesaj belgelerinde ve uzantı kurulum talimatlarında açıkça belgelemelisiniz.

=== Cümlelerdeki tarihlerden ayrı zamanlar ===
Bazı diller, bir cümledeki diğer kelimelere dilbilgisi açısından bağlı olan bir tarih ve zaman arasına bir şey eklemek zorundadır.
Böylece tarih/saati bir arada kullanamayacaklar.
Diğerleri kombinasyonu uygun bulabilir, bu nedenle bu gibi durumlarda üç parametre değeri (date/time, date, time) sağlamak genellikle en iyi seçimdir ve her çeviride ilkini veya son ikisini gerektiği gibi kullanılmadan bırakın.

=== Mesajlarda &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; kullanmaktan kaçının ===
&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; birkaç dezavantaja sahiptir.
Herhangi bir şey olabilir (kısaltma, kelime, kısa ifade, ''vb.'') ve dile bağlı olarak, her durumda &lt;code&gt;[[Manual:Messages_API#…on use context inside sentences via GRAMMAR|&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/code&gt; kullanılması gerekebilir.
Ne olursa olsun, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; içeren her iletinin, kodunuzun yüklendiği her yeni viki için çoğu viki dilinde incelenmesi gerekir.
Çoğu durumda, bir dil için genel bir &lt;code&gt;GRAMMAR&lt;/code&gt; yapılandırması olmadığında, viki operatörlerinin &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; çalışması için &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{GRAMMAR}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; elde etmek için PHP kodunu eklemesi veya değiştirmesi gerekir.
Bu, diğerlerine göre hem daha fazla beceri hem de daha fazla anlayış gerektirir.
&quot;Bu viki&quot; gibi genel kaynakları sahip olmak daha uygundur.
Bu, kurulumların bu mesajları yerel olarak &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; kullanacak şekilde değiştirmesini engellemez, ancak en azından bunu yapmak zorunda kalmazlar ve viki zaten çalışıp kullanılana kadar mesaj uyarlamasını erteleyebilirler.

=== Görsel yerleşim ve konumlara atıfta bulunmaktan kaçının ===
Neyin nerede oluşturulduğu, görünümlere bağlıdır.
Çoğu zaman, soldan sağa yazılan dillerin ekran düzenleri, sağdan sola yazılan diller için kullanılanlara kıyasla yansıtılır, ancak her zaman değil ve bazı diller ve vikiler için tamamen değil.
Elde taşınan cihazlar, dar pencereler vb., daha büyük ekranlarda yan yana görünecek şekilde birbirinin altında bloklar gösterebilir.
Site ve kullanıcı tarafından yazılan JavaScript betikleri ve küçük araçları, parçaları gizleyebildiğinden ve yapabildiğinden veya öngörülemeyen şekillerde şeyleri hareket ettirebildiğinden, gerçek düzeni bilmenin güvenilir bir yolu yoktur.

Kullanıcı arayüzü dili sayfanın içerik dili olmayabileceğinden ve koşullara bağlı olarak düzen ikisinin bir karışımı olabileceğinden, düzen bilgilerini içerik dillerine bağlamak yanlıştır.
Akustik ekran okuyucular ve diğer yardımcı cihazlar gibi görsel olmayan kullanıcı aracıları, görsel düzen kavramına bile sahip değildir.
Bu nedenle, anlamsal düzen terimleri hâlâ kullanılabilse de (&quot;formdaki önceki adımlar&quot;, ''vb.'') durumların çoğunda görsel yerleşim konumlarına başvurmamalısınız.

MediaWiki, arayüzün mevcut yönlülüğüne bağlı olarak farklı mesajların veya mesaj parçalarının gösterilmesini desteklemez ([[phab:T30997|T30997]] sayfasına bakın).

Doğu ve Kuzey Asya'da yukarıdan aşağıya yazma için yaklaşan tarayıcı ve MediaWiki desteği,&lt;ref&gt;http://dev.w3.org/csswg/css3-writing-modes/&lt;/ref&gt; en az sekiz olası düzen ile ekran düzenlerini daha da öngörülemez hâle getirecek (sol/sağ başlangıç konumu, üst/alt başlangıç konumu ve hangisi önce gerçekleşir).

=== Ekran renklerine atıfta bulunmaktan kaçının ===
Bir şeyin oluşturulduğu renk, görünümler, site ve kullanıcı tarafından yazılan JavaScript betikleri ve küçük araçlar ve erişilebilirlik veya teknolojik sınırlamalar nedeniyle yerel kullanıcı aracısı geçersiz kılma gibi birçok faktöre bağlıdır.
Akustik ekran okuyucular ve diğer yardımcı cihazlar gibi görsel olmayan kullanıcı aracılarının renk kavramı bile yoktur.
Bu nedenle ekran renklerine yapmamalısınız.
(Aynı nedenle, kullanıcıyı durum hakkında bilgilendirmek için bir mekanizma olarak tek başına renge güvenmemelisiniz.)

=== Her giriş alanından önce ve sonra mesaj ögelerine sahip olun ===

:''Bu önerilen bir kılavuzdur, MediaWiki geliştirmede standart hâle gelmemiştir''

İngilizce, item–colon–space–input-field alanı biçimindeki soru sormanın verimli kullanımına izin verirken, diğer birçok dil bunu yapmaz.
İngilizce'de bile, &quot;Distance: ___ metres&quot; yerine genellikle &quot;Distance (in metres): ___&quot; kullanmak istersiniz.
{{tag|textarea|open}} ögelerini bir kenara bırakarak, &quot;Distance: ___ metres&quot; düzenini izleyen her giriş alanını düşünmelisiniz. Böyle:

* 2. mesaj boş olsa bile İngilizce ve diğer bazı dillerde iki mesaj verin veya
* &lt;code&gt;$i&lt;/code&gt; parametreleri aracılığıyla girişlerin yerleştirilmesine izin verir.
=== Mesajlarda çevrilmemiş HTML işaretlemesinden kaçının ===
{{tag|div|open}} etiketleri, yukarıdaki veya alttaki cetveller ve benzeri gibi çeviri gerektirmeyen HTML işaretlemesi genellikle iletilerin parçası olmamalıdır.
Çevirmenlere gereksiz yük bindirir, ileti dosyasının boyutunu artırır ve çeviri sürecinde yanlışlıkla değiştirilme veya atlanma riski taşır.
Genel olarak, mümkünse mesajlarda ham HTML'den kaçının.

=== Mesajlar genellikle düşündüğünüzden daha uzundur! ===

Yabancı dildeki mesaj dosyalarına göz atarken, neredeyse hiçbir zaman Çince olanlardan daha kısa, nadiren İngilizce olanlardan daha kısa ve genellikle İngilizce olanlardan çok daha uzun mesajlar bulamazsınız.

Özellikle formlarda, giriş alanlarının önünde, İngilizce mesajlar kısa ve öz olma eğilimindedir.
Bu genellikle çevirilerde tutulmaz.
Diller, İngilizce'de bulunan teknik kelime dağarcığından yoksun olabilir ve bazı kavramları açıklamak için birden fazla kelime veya hatta tam cümleler gerektirebilir.
Örneğin, &quot;TSV file:&quot; adlı kısa İngilizce mesajın bir dile tam anlamıyla şu şekilde çevrilmesi gerekebilir:
&lt;blockquote&gt;''Lütfen buraya, her biri bir dizi bilgi alanı olarak düzenlenmiş, söz konusu bilgi alanlarının çitle çevrildiği ve aralarındaki çitlerin tek olduğu, sıralı olarak düzenlenmiş bir dizi daktilo satırından oluşan bir bilgisayar verileri koleksiyonunu belirten bir ad yazın ve aralarındaki parmaklıklar, bir daktilo arabasını bir sonraki önceden tanımlanmış konuma kaydıran türden tek işaretlerdir. İşte başlıyoruz: _____ (teşekkür ederiz)''&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Bu, kuşkusuz, uç bir örnek, ancak özelliği alıyorsunuz.
Bu cümleyi, her kelimenin kendine ait bir satırı kapladığı ve giriş alanının bir sonraki sütunda dikey olarak ortalandığı bir biçimde bir sütunda hayal edin. :-(

=== Farklı şeyleri veya kavramları belirtmek için çok yakın, benzer veya aynı kelimeleri kullanmaktan kaçının ===
Örneğin, sayfalar, söz konusu sayfanın geçmiş ''sürümlerini'' içeren (belirli bir tarih, saat ve düzenlemeye ait) daha eski ''revizyonlara'' sahip olabilir.
''Revizyon'' ve ''versiyon'' kelimeleri birbirinin yerine kullanılabilir.
Versiyonlanmış sayfalar revize edildiğinde sorun çıkıyor ve revizyondan, ''yani'' revize etme sürecinden de söz ediliyor.
&quot;Revizyon&quot;un iki eşanlamlısının farklı çevirileri olduğunda bu ciddi bir sorun teşkil etmeyebilir.
Ancak buna güvenmeyin.
O zaman, yanlış yorumlanmasını önlemek için &quot;revizyon&quot;, &quot;sürüm&quot; ''olarak da bilinen'' kullanımından tamamen kaçınmak daha iyidir.

=== Temel kelimelerin öngörülemeyen çağrışımları olabilir veya hiç mevcut olmayabilir ===
MediaWiki'de çok özel kullanımları nedeniyle çevrilmesi zor olan bazı kelimeler var.
Bazıları [[#Expect untranslated words|hiç çevrilmemesini bekleyebilirsiniz]].
Örneğin, birkaç dilde &quot;bir şeyi kullanan kişi&quot; ile ilgili &quot;kullanıcı&quot; kelimesi yoktur.
Benzer şekilde, [[:en:Colognian language|Kölsch]]'deki İngilizce &quot;namespace&quot; ve &quot;apartment&quot; kelimeleri aynı kelimeyi tercüme eder.
Ayrıca, Kölsch'te, &quot;use&quot; yapılacak herhangi bir gönderme çok güçlü bir şekilde &quot;abuse&quot; anlamına geleceğinden, tek kelimeyle &quot;corroborator and participant&quot; derler.
&quot;Wiki çiftliği&quot; terimi, &quot;vikilerle dolu ahır&quot; olarak çevrilir, çünkü tek ürünlü bir çiftlik, dilde bir çelişki olacağından ve anlaşılmadığından ''vb.''

{{anchor|Expect untranslated words}}
=== Çevrilmemiş kelimeleri beklemesi ===

:''Bu önerilen bir kılavuzdur, MediaWiki geliştirmede henüz standart hâle gelmemiştir.''

İngilizce özel adlar, etiket adları, ''vb.'' ve bilgisayar dilinin tercüme edilmemesi ve bunun yerine ödünç kelimeler veya yabancı kelimeler olarak alınması nadir değildir.
İkinci durumda, bazı özellikle titiz çevirmenler, &lt;syntaxhighlight inline lang=&quot;html&quot;&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot;&gt; … &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; gibi HTML işaretlemesi ile bu tür kelimeleri başka bir dile ait olarak işaretleyebilir.

Açık güvenlik risklerine rağmen, mesaj çıkış işleyicinizin bu tür işaretlemeyi değişmeden geçirmesini sağlamayı düşünebilirsiniz.

=== Açıklayıcı satır içi işaretlemeye izin verin ===

:''Bu önerilen bir kılavuzdur, MediaWiki geliştirmede henüz standart hâle gelmemiştir.''

Bazen, hedef dillerde yeni başlayanlar tarafından hemen anlaşılmayan, ancak deneyimli bilgisayar kullanıcıları için açık olan kısaltmalar, teknik terimler veya genel olarak belirsiz kelimeler olabilir.
Yeni gelenleri zor durumda bırakmadan uzun açıklamaların ekran karmaşasını önlemek için çevirmenler, fareyi üzerlerine getirdiğinizde tarayıcılar tarafından gösterilen {{tag|abbr|open}} açıklamalar olarak açıklama eklemeyi seçebilirler.

Örneğin, görsel döndürmeyle ilgili MediaWiki çekirdek mesajı &lt;code&gt;exif-orientation-8&lt;/code&gt; ve İngilizce'de basitçe &quot;&lt;code&gt;Rotated 90° CW&lt;/code&gt;&quot;, Fas Arapçasında şu şekilde çevrilir:

:&lt;code lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &amp;lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&amp;lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/code&gt;

şunu veriyor:

:&lt;span lang=&quot;ary&quot;&gt;mḍwwer 90° &lt;abbr title=&quot;Ĝks (ṫ-ṫijah) Ĝaqarib s-Saĝa&quot;&gt;ĜĜS&lt;/abbr&gt;&lt;/span&gt;

gerektiğinde &quot;saat yönünün tersine&quot; kısaltmasının açıklanması.

Orijinal mesaj bunları kullanmasa bile, mesaj çıkış işleyicinizin bu tür işaretlemeyi değişmeden geçirmesini sağlamayı düşünebilirsiniz.

=== Gerektiğinde {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}} ve {{tag|kbd|open}} etiketlerini kullanın ===
Teknik parametreler, değerler veya klavye girişleri hakkında konuşurken, {{tag|code|open}}, {{tag|var|open}} veya {{tag|kbd|open}} HTML etiketlerini kullanarak bunları uygun şekilde işaretleyin.
Böylece tipografik olarak normal metinden ayrılırlar.
Bu, kafa karışıklığını, hataları ve yanlış temsilleri önleyerek okuyuculara anlamlarını netleştirir.
İleti işleyicinizin bu tür işaretlemeye izin verdiğinden emin olun.

=== Semboller, iki nokta üst üste, parantez, ''vb.'' mesajların parçalarıdır ===
Birçok sembol de yerelleştirilebilir. Bazı yazımlarda, Latin alfabesinden farklı türde parantezler bulunur.
Bazı dillerde bir etiket veya giriş isteminden sonra iki nokta üst üste işareti uygun olmayabilir.
Bu sembollerin mesajlara dahil edilmesi, daha iyi ve daha az Anglo-merkezli çeviriler yapılmasına yardımcı olur ve ayrıca kod karmaşasını azaltır.

Örneğin, «Norveç», »İsveççe», »Danca«, „Almanca“ ve 「Japonca」 dillerinde kullanılan farklı tırnak işareti kuralları vardır.&lt;ref&gt;[[:tr:Tırnak işareti]]&lt;/ref&gt;

Bazı metni yerelleştirilmiş parantezler, parantezler veya tırnak işaretleri içine almanız gerekiyorsa, &lt;code&gt;parentheses&lt;/code&gt; {{int:parentheses}} veya &lt;code&gt;brackets&lt;/code&gt; {{int:quotation-marks}} veya &lt;code&gt;quotation-marks&lt;/code&gt; {{int:quotation-marks}} gibi mesajlar kullanabilirsiniz:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php&gt;wfMessage( 'parentheses' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside parentheses */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'brackets' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside brackets */ )-&gt;escaped()
wfMessage( 'quotation-marks' )-&gt;rawParams( /* text to go inside quotation marks */ )-&gt;escaped()&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Sembollerin ve noktalama işaretlerinin çeviriden sağ çıkmasını beklemeyin ===
Sağdan sola yazılan diller (İngilizce'nin aksine) genellikle &quot;sonraki&quot; ve &quot;önceki&quot; bağlantılarla sunulan ok sembollerini değiştirir ve bunların bir mesaj metnine göre yerleşimleri de ters çevrilebilir veya çevrilmeyebilir.
Üç nokta &quot;''vb.''&quot; ya da kelimelere çevrilebilir.
Soru işaretleri, ünlem işaretleri, iki nokta üst üste işareti, cümle sonundakiler dışında, hiç veya iki kez konulmayacaktır.
Sonuç olarak, bunların hepsini her zaman mesajlarınızın metnine dahil edin ve asla programlı olarak eklemeye çalışmayın.

=== Tam durakları kullanın ===
Normal cümleleri noktalı olarak '''sonlandırın'''.
Bu genellikle bir çevirmenin, farklı şekilde çevrilmesi gerekebilecek manşetler veya liste öğeleri olmadığını bilmesinin tek göstergesidir.

=== Bağlantı çengelleri ===

==== Vikimetin bağlantıları ====

Bağlantı çengelleri, mesajlara birkaç teknik yolla yerleştirilebilir:

# vikimetin aracılığıyla: …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[&lt;/nowiki&gt;''bir viki sayfası''|''çengel''&lt;nowiki&gt;]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…,
# vikimetin aracılığıyla: …&amp;nbsp;&lt;code&gt;[''birkaç-url'' ''çengel'']&lt;/code&gt;&amp;nbsp;…, or
# bağlantı metni, MediaWiki ad alanındaki bir mesajdır. ''Bunu önleyin!''

İkincisi, çevirmenler için genellikle zor veya imkansızdır, burada da [[#Avoid fragmented or 'patchwork' messages|parçalanmış veya 'patchwork' mesajlardan kaçının]].
&quot;&lt;code&gt;bazı-url&lt;/code&gt;&quot; ögesinin boşluk içermediğinden emin olun.

==== Anlamlı bağlantı çengelleri kullanın ====
İfadenize dikkat edin.
Bağlantı çengelleri, hem bağlantılı kelimeler hem de hedef çengel olmak üzere, sayfaların arama motoru değerlendirmesinde önemli bir rol oynar.
Çengelin hedef sayfayı iyi tanımladığından emin olun.
Her zaman sıradan ve genel kelimelerden kaçının.
Örneğin, hedef sayfalar neredeyse hiçbir zaman &quot;burayı tıklayın&quot; ile ilgili olmadığı için, &quot;Burayı tıklayın&quot; kesinlikle gidilmez,&lt;ref&gt;http://www.w3.org/QA/Tips/noClickHere&lt;/ref&gt;.
Bunu da bağlantıların etrafındaki cümlelere koyma, çünkü &quot;burası&quot; tıklanacak yer değildi.
Bunun yerine, &quot;İsterseniz [[Special:Upload|bir dosya yükleyebilirsiniz]]&quot; gibi, kullanıcının bağlantıyı takip ederken ne elde edeceğini anlatan kesin eylem sözcükleri kullanın.

Ayrıca ''[http://www.nngroup.com/articles/using-link-titles-to-help-users-predict-where-they-are-going/ Kullanıcıların nereye gittiklerini tahmin etmelerine yardımcı olma]'' ve [[w:Mystery meat navigation|gizemli et gezinitisi]] ve ''[https://tosbourn.com/click-here/ Buraya tıklayın bağlantısını bağlantı metni olarak kullanmamamızın ana nedenleri]'' bakın.

=== Jargon ve argodan kaçının ===
Mesajlarda geliştirici ve uzman kullanıcı jargonundan kaçının. Mümkün olduğunca basit bir dil kullanmaya çalışın.
Kullanıcıya bir şey olduğunu veya olmadığını bildirmek istediğinizde &quot;başarılı&quot;, &quot;başarılı şekilde&quot;, &quot;başarısız&quot;, &quot;hata meydana geldi&quot; vb.
Bu, geliştiricilerin her şeyi doğru veya yanlış olarak görme perspektifinden gelir, ancak kullanıcılar genellikle yalnızca gerçekte ne olduğunu veya olmadığını ve bu konuda ne yapmaları gerektiğini (eğer varsa) bilmek ister. Böyle:

* &quot;Dosya başarıyla yeniden adlandırıldı&quot; -&gt; &quot;Dosya yeniden adlandırıldı&quot;
* &quot;Dosya yeniden adlandırılamadı&quot; -&gt; &quot;Bu ada sahip bir dosya zaten var. Lütfen farklı bir ad seçin.&quot;

=== Boşlukların ve satır sonlarının farkında olun ===
MediaWiki'nin yerelleştirilmiş mesajları genellikle viki içinde, canlı vikilerdeki viki işlemleri veya [[translatewiki.net]] üzerindeki çevirmenler tarafından düzenlenir.
Özellikle mesajınızın başındaki veya sonundaki boşlukların editörleri nasıl etkileyeceğinin farkında olmalısınız:

* Mesajın sonundaki boşluklar ve satır sonları (yeni satırlar) vikimetin düzenleyici tarafından her zaman otomatik olarak kaldırılır. İletiniz, vikide düzenlendiğinde kaybolacağından boşluk veya satır sonu ile bitmemelidir.
* Başlangıçtaki boşluklar ve satır sonları otomatik olarak kaldırılmaz, ancak düzenleme sırasında yanlışlıkla kaldırılmaları muhtemeldir ve bundan kaçınılmalıdır.

Mesajınızı aktif metinle başlatın ve bitirin; Etrafında yeni bir satıra veya paragraf sonuna ihtiyacınız varsa, çevreleyen kodunuz onu döndürülen metne eklemekle ilgilenmelidir.

'Kelime ayırıcı' (çoğu dilde yalnızca bir boşluk karakterinden oluşur) gibi sonunda boşluk gerektiren bazı mesajlar vardır.
Bu tür kullanım durumlarını desteklemek için, mesaj aksi takdirde vikimetin veya HTML biçimlendirmesine izin vermese bile, mesajlarda aşağıdaki HTML varlıklarına izin verilir ve gerçek karakterlere dönüştürülür:&lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/REL1_34/includes/cache/MessageCache.php#L887&lt;/ref&gt;

* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#32;&lt;/code&gt; – alan
* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;/code&gt; veya &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;#160;&lt;/code&gt; – [[:tr:Ayrılmaz alan|ayrılmaz alan]]
* &lt;code&gt;&amp;amp;shy;&lt;/code&gt; – [[w:soft hyphen|esnek kısa çizgi]]

İlgili bir notta, [[Special:MyLanguage/pre-save transforms|önceden kaydetme dönüşümleri]] tarafından etkilenen diğer sözdizimi öğeleri de mesajlarda kullanılmamalıdır, çünkü bunlar mesaj vikide düzenlendiğinde dönüştürüleceklerdir.

=== Standart büyük harf kullanın ===
Büyük harf kullanımı, çevirmenlere tek sözcükler, liste veya menü ögeleri, ifadeler veya tam cümleler gibi neyi çevirdikleri konusunda ipuçları verir.
Doğru (standart) büyük harf kullanımı, arama motorlarının sayfalarınızı değerlendirmesinde de rol oynayabilir.
MediaWiki, arayüz mesajlarında [[:tr:Büyük ve küçük harf|cümle harfi]] (''Hızlı kahverengi tilki tembel köpeğin üzerinden atlar'') kullanır.

Çoğu yazı sisteminde büyük harf bulunmadığını ve bunlara sahip olanlardan bazılarının bunları İngilizce'den farklı şekilde kullandığını daima unutmayın.
Bu nedenle, vurgu için TÜMÜ BÜYÜK HARF kullanmayın.
Aşağıdakilere göre CSS veya HTML {{tag|em|open}} veya {{tag|strong|open}} kullanın:

==== Vurgu ====
Normal metinde, '''kalın yüz''' veya ''eğik'' ve benzeri [[w:Emphasis|vurgu]] mesaj metinlerinin bir parçası olmalıdır.
Vurgulama konusundaki yerel kurallar genellikle farklılık gösterir, özellikle bazı Asya alfabelerinin kendilerine ait olan kuralları vardır.
Çevirmenler vurguyu hedef dillerine ve alanlarına göre ayarlayabilmelidir.
Dil veya yazım bazında işaretlemeye izin vermek için kullanıcı arayüzünüzde &quot;{{tag|em|open}}&quot; ve &quot;{{tag|strong|open}}&quot; kullanmayı deneyin.

İngiliz ve Avrupa stillerinin modern ekran düzenlerinde vurgu daha az kullanılır.
Nasıl tercüme edileceğine dair değerli ipuçları verebileceğinden, bunu [[#Message documentation|Mesa belgelendirmenize]] yine de iletin.
Vurgu, çevirmenlerin bilmesi koşuluyla, uygun olduğu şekilde diğer kültürel bağlamlarda kullanılabilir ve kullanılmalıdır.

&lt;references /&gt;

== Ayrıca bakınız ==

* {{ll|Customization}}
* {{ll|Manual:Configuration settings}}
* {{ll|Manual:Skins}}
* {{ll|Manual:Messages API}}
* {{ll|Localisation}}
* [[translatewiki:FAQ]]

[[Category:Customization techniques{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:User interface{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Localisation{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:System message{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>3qo3tlop9t0zjl4vehiowgexbcquwmt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:$wgCategoryCollation/hu</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>902168</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402378</id>
      <parentid>5047511</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:56:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8261" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{SettingSummary
|name=CategoryCollation
|version_min=1.17.0
|rev_introduced=72308
|section=Category
|range=(sztring)
|default=&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; inline&gt;'uppercase'&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
|summary=A kategóriák rendezéséhez használt egyeztetőmódszer.
}}
== Részletek ==

A változó meghatározza a kategóriák tartalmának egyeztetéséhez használt módot.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
As an example, to use the Spanish collation, you'd write &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgCategoryCollation = 'uca-es';&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} and then run {{ll|Manual:updateCollation.php|updateCollation.php}} for your change to take effect.
&lt;/div&gt;

Jelenleg a következőket támogatja:

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Collation algorithm&lt;/span&gt;
! MW verziók
! class=unsortable | Leírás
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;uppercase&lt;/code&gt;
| alapértelmezett
| mindent nagybetűssé alakít, majd a sztring UTF-8-kénti eltárolásakor a bináris érték szerint rendez a kis- és nagybetűk különbségét nem veszi figyelembe
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;numeric&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.28+
| az &lt;code&gt;uppercase&lt;/code&gt;-szel megegyezik, de [[#Numeric sorting|numerikus rendezést]] használ
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;identity&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.18+
| az UTF-8-ként tárolt sztring bináris értéke szerint rendez (nagybetűssé alakítás nélkül); a [[w:Code point|kód szempontjából]] rendez
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;uca-default&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.17+
| [[w:Unicode collation algorithm|unicode-algoritmus]] – komplex, jobban támogatja a többnyelvűséget
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;uca-default-u-kn&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.28+
| &lt;code&gt;uca-default&lt;/code&gt; numerikus rendezéssel
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;uca-&lt;langcode&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.21+
| &lt;code&gt;uca-default&lt;/code&gt; nyelvspecifikus módosításokkal lásd [[#Language-specific collations|alább]]
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;uca-&lt;langcode&gt;-u-kn&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.28+
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;uca-&lt;langcode&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; numerikus rendezéssel
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;xx-uca-ckb&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.23+
| {{#language:ckb|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;xx-uca-et&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.24-1.31 {{removed-inline|1.32}}
| észt, de a W és V betűk megkülönböztetésével
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;xx-uca-fa&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.30-1.31 {{removed-inline|1.32}}
| {{#language:fa|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;uppercase-ab&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.31+
| {{#language:ab|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;uppercase-ba&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.30+
| {{#language:ba|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
|-
| style=&quot;white-space: nowrap;&quot; | &lt;code&gt;uppercase-se&lt;/code&gt;
| MW 1.31 {{removed-inline|1.32}}
| {{#language:se|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}}
|}

A MediaWiki 1.18 verzió óta a kiterjesztések a {{ll|manual:Hooks/Collation::factory|Collation::factory}}-hookkal bővíthetik az egyeztetőmódszerek listáját.

A változót a 'categorylinks' tábla tartalmazza; szerepe eldönteni, hogy a mód megváltoztatásakor mely sorokat kell frissíteni.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Setup instructions ==
&lt;/div&gt; 
{{note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* A beállítás megváltoztatása után futtasd az {{ll|Manual:updateCollation.php|updateCollation.php}}-t ahhoz, hogy a lapok rendezési kulcsai újragenerálódjanak, különben a kategóriák tartalma rendszertelen lesz.
* Az egyeztetőmódszerek frissítése lassú, nagyobb wikiken több órát is igénybe vehet.
* A &lt;code&gt;uca-default&lt;/code&gt;/&lt;code&gt;uca-xx&lt;/code&gt; módszerekhez szükség van a PHP [https://php.net/book.intl intl kiterjesztésére].
* Varnish, Squid vagy fájl-gyorsítótár használatakor az updateCollation.php futtatása után szükség lehet a gyorsítótár {{ll|purge}}.
* Ha a futtatott PHP-verziót frissíted vagy újrafordítod, az updateCollation.php-t a --force kapcsolóval kell használnod.
}}

{{anchor|Language-specific collations}}
== Nyelvspecifikus egyeztetőmódszerek ==
A MediaWiki számos nyelvspecifikus egyeztetőmódot támogat. 
Ezek többsége a [[w:Unicode collation algorithm|unicode-algoritmus]] &lt;code&gt;uca-default&lt;/code&gt;-n alapul és ugyanazon követelményekkel rendelkezik; elnevezésük &lt;code&gt;uca-&amp;lt;langcode&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, ahol a &amp;lt;langcode&gt; lehet:

 af, am, ar, as, ast, az, be, be-tarask, bg, bn, bn@collation=traditional, bo, br, bs, bs-Cyrl, ca, chr, co, cs, cy, da, de, de-AT@collation=phonebook, dsb, ee, el, en, eo, es, et, eu, fa, fi, fil, fo, fr, fr-CA, fur, fy, ga, gd, gl, gu, ha, haw, he, hi, hr, hsb, hu, hy, id, ig, is, it, ka, kk, kl, km, kn, kok, ku, ky, la, lb, lkt, ln, lo, lt, lv, mk, ml, mn, mo, mr, ms, mt, nb, ne, nl, nn, no, oc, om, or, pa, pl, pt, rm, ro, ru, rup, sco, se, si, sk, sl, smn, sq, sr, sr-Latn, sv, sv@collation=standard, sw, ta, te, th, tk, tl, to, tr, tt, uk, uz, vi, vo, yi, yo, zu

Például magyar nyelv esetén a &lt;code&gt;uca-hu&lt;/code&gt; módot kell használnod.

Ezen egyeztetőmódok használata a sorba rendezést és a szócikkcímek első karakterének helyes megjelenítését is biztosítja.
A MediaWiki korábbi verziói nem biztos, hogy minden felsorolt nyelvi kódot támogatnak.

=== Új egyeztetőmódszerek hozzáadása ===

Az új nyelvek támogatása két feltételtől függ:

* Szerepel az [[w:International Components for Unicode|ICU]]-könyvtárban $ref (a lista [https://ssl.icu-project.org/trac/browser/icu/tags/latest/source/data/coll/colfiles.mk] tekinthető meg). Megjegyzés: a Wikimédia szerverei nem a legutolsó változatot használják; 2016-ban az 52.1 verzió volt használatban, amely [[phab:P4286|lényegesebben kevesebb nyelvet támogat]].
* Ezen felül szükség van a MediaWiki-általi támogatásra is (ehhez általában az adott nyelven az alap ábécén kívüli külön betűnek számító további karakterek, karaktercsoportok hozzáadására van szükség) – a mindig naprakész lista az {{git file|file=includes/collation/IcuCollation.php|line=93}} fájlban található.

Az alapértelmezett ICU-sorrend („uca-default”) esetén előfordulhat, hogy a címek rendezése helyes, azonban a betűk elkülönítése nem; ekkor az első feltétel érvényes. 
Néha a betűk sorrendje egy másik, rokon nyelvben azonos – ekkor egyedi egyeztetőmód készíthető (ilyen például az {{git file|file=includes/collation/Collation.php|line=63}}-ban megtalálható &lt;code&gt;xx-uca-ckb&lt;/code&gt;, a közép-kurd nyelv módja („ckb” nyelvkód)).

{{anchor|Numeric sorting}}
== Numerikus rendezés ==
[[File:Numeric Sorting Comparison.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|A reguláris (felül) és numerikus (alul) rendezés összehasonlítása]]
Numerikus rendezés esetén a lapok a következő módon lesznek sorba rendezve: 1, 2, 9, 10, 11, 20, 21, 99, 100. Reguláris (nem numerikus) sorba rendezés esetén a következő a sorrend: 1, 10, 100, 11, 2, 21, 9, 99.
A numerikus rendezés használatakor a számmal kezdődő lapok mindig a „0–9” fejléc alá lesznek helyezve.
Reguláris rendezés esetén minden betű és szám saját fejlécet kap („0”, „1” stb.).
A numerikus rendezésről további információkat a [http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr10/#Customization Unicode Technikai Sztenderd 10-es szakaszában] találsz.
A numerikus rendezés teszteléséhez lásd az [http://demo.icu-project.org/icu-bin/collation.html ICU-egyeztetőmódszerek demóját].
Vedd figyelembe, hogy a numerikus rendezés csak elválasztójelek nélküli számoknál működik;
elválasztójelnek számít a vessző, pont vagy szóköz; ezek új számokat képeznek.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;release notes about this feature from MediaWiki 1.17.&lt;/span&gt;

== További információk ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [http://demo.icu-project.org/icu-bin/collation.html ICU Collation Demo]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== References ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Reflist}}</text>
      <sha1>sccjjgv9mar9esw8tr83l6gkcw822wx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:$wgCategoryCollation/21/hu</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>902196</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402377</id>
      <parentid>3159118</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:56:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="138" xml:space="preserve">* Varnish, Squid vagy fájl-gyorsítótár használatakor az updateCollation.php futtatása után szükség lehet a gyorsítótár $purge.</text>
      <sha1>j103vtl8bpgxtzye6ia4gijgssi64du</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/cs</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>906669</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402150</id>
      <parentid>5125912</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:36:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6965" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Od roku 2017 poskytuje [[VisualEditor]] ''''''{{ll|visual diffs}}'''''' (vizuální rozdíly).&lt;/span&gt;
Jsou k dispozici na dvou místech v rozhraní: při náhledu změn v dokumentu před tím, než uživatel stránku uloží, a (jako [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta funkce]]) v rámci standardního zobrazení rozdílu změn v MediaWiki, které je přístupné ze stránky historie.
V obou případech se vizuální rozdíl zobrazí spolu s [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|tradičním dvousloupcovým wikitextovým rozdílem]] a uživatel může přepínat mezi dvěma obrazovkami.

Vizuální rozdíly mají proti hlavním wikitextovým rozdílům dvě hlavní výhody.
První je, že editoři mohou přímo vidět změny, které provedli oni a ostatní, aniž by museli rozumět [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitextu]].
To je zvláště užitečné při pohledu na změny v grafických strukturách, jako jsou tabulky. Například pokud editace odstraní sloupec z tabulky, wikitextový rozdíl by byl těžko pochopitelný, zatímco vizuální rozdíl je zřejmý okamžitě.

Druhým je, že technologii lze použít k přesnější reprezentaci změny čtenáři.
Pokud například úprava zaměnila dva odstavce (se změnami odstavců nebo bez nich), vizuální rozdíl bude identifikovat, že k tomu došlo, zatímco rozdíl ve wikitextu způsobí, že to bude vypadat, že byl odstraněn odstavec a byl přidán zcela nový odstavec.

== Na běžných rozdílových stránkách ==
Většina příkladů a snímků obrazovky níže se týká používání vizuálních rozdílů během náhledů stránek při úpravách.
Vizuální rozdíly VisualEditoru však lze také použít na běžných stránkách rozdílů, na jakékoli wiki, která má nainstalovaný VisualEditor.
Příklad tohoto použití můžete vidět v anglickém jazyce na Wikipedii [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|zde]].

Pro wiki, které mají VisualEditor, existuje několik způsobů, jak aktivovat toto zobrazení rozdílového zobrazení:

* Přidejte do LocalSettings.php následující text:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Pokud má vaše wiki záložku &quot;Funkce beta&quot; (beta features) v rámci Special:Preferences a chcete, aby se vizuální rozdíly pro uživatele staly &quot;výchozími&quot; (opt-in), můžete k LocalSettings.php přidat následující položky:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Jak je vidět na výše odkazovaném příkladu na Wikipedii, režim vizuálního rozdílu lze také aktivovat jednoduchým přidáním výrazu &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; do adresy URL stránky rozdílu.

== Jak na to ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky zobrazující některé změny článku. Většina změn je zvýrazněna formátem textu.|left|thumb|300px|Po dokončení úpravy stránky zadejte shrnutí úprav a poté zvolte &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.

Ve vizuálním režimu uvidíte zvýrazněné doplňky, odstranění, nové odkazy a formátování. Další změny, například změna velikosti obrázku, jsou popsány v poznámkách na straně.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=Přepínací tlačítko zobrazující vizuální a wikitextové možnosti. Je vybrána vizuální možnost.|left|thumb|220x220px|Klepnutím na přepínací tlačítko můžete přepínat mezi vizuálními a wikitextovými rozdíly.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky zobrazující stejné změny, na dvousloupcovém zobrazení wikitextu.|left|thumb|245x245px|Rozdíl wikitextu je stejný nástroj pro porovnání, který se používá v editorech wikitextu a v historii stránky.]]

{{clr}}
== Příklady ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Úpravy formátovaného textu&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Vizuální rozdíly
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|Wikitextové rozdíly
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Přesunutí odstavce s drobným vandalismem&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Vizuální rozdíly
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Rozdíl ve wikitextu (2017). Tato funkce byla přidána do wikitextového rozdílového enginu v roce 2018; viz [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]] (nový wikitextový rozdíl s přesunem odstavce a vandalism).
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Odstranění sloupce tabulky&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Vizuální rozdíly
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|Wikitextové rozdíly
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Text, formátování a změny seznamu&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Vizuální rozdíly
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|Wikitextové rozdíly
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Vložení nového multimédia (notový zápis)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Vizuální rozdíly
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|Wikitextové rozdíly
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Použité technologie ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|Thalia Chan, Sjednocující úpravy a vizuální rozdíly, Wikimania 2017]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Aktuální omezení ==
* Žádná upozornění na změny &quot;neviditelných&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|metadat stránek}}, jako jsou kategorie nebo klíčová slova pro obsah stránky.
* Problémy se složitými změnami tabulek.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* Nedostupné na některých speciálních stránkách:
** Stránky s &quot;rozdílem&quot; při vracení změn zpět.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** Stránky editačních konfliktů&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Historie ==
Tato funkce je k dispozici jako první rozdílový nástroj ve stolním VisualEditoru od větve 1.31.0-wmf-20 (vydáno do produkce Wikimedie dne 6. února 2018).
Předtím to byl sekundární nástroj od větve 1.29.0-wmf-17 dále (vydán do produkce Wikimedia dne 21. března 2017).

== Související stránky ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Poznámky pod čarou ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>qg6loa4l2m6lj3ndrepddejzi1ylcs8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402166</id>
      <parentid>5402150</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:39:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6922" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Od roku 2017 poskytuje {{ll|VisualEditor}} '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' (vizuální rozdíly).
Jsou k dispozici na dvou místech v rozhraní: při náhledu změn v dokumentu před tím, než uživatel stránku uloží, a (jako [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta funkce]]) v rámci standardního zobrazení rozdílu změn v MediaWiki, které je přístupné ze stránky historie.
V obou případech se vizuální rozdíl zobrazí spolu s [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|tradičním dvousloupcovým wikitextovým rozdílem]] a uživatel může přepínat mezi dvěma obrazovkami.

Vizuální rozdíly mají proti hlavním wikitextovým rozdílům dvě hlavní výhody.
První je, že editoři mohou přímo vidět změny, které provedli oni a ostatní, aniž by museli rozumět [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitextu]].
To je zvláště užitečné při pohledu na změny v grafických strukturách, jako jsou tabulky. Například pokud editace odstraní sloupec z tabulky, wikitextový rozdíl by byl těžko pochopitelný, zatímco vizuální rozdíl je zřejmý okamžitě.

Druhým je, že technologii lze použít k přesnější reprezentaci změny čtenáři.
Pokud například úprava zaměnila dva odstavce (se změnami odstavců nebo bez nich), vizuální rozdíl bude identifikovat, že k tomu došlo, zatímco rozdíl ve wikitextu způsobí, že to bude vypadat, že byl odstraněn odstavec a byl přidán zcela nový odstavec.

== Na běžných rozdílových stránkách ==
Většina příkladů a snímků obrazovky níže se týká používání vizuálních rozdílů během náhledů stránek při úpravách.
Vizuální rozdíly VisualEditoru však lze také použít na běžných stránkách rozdílů, na jakékoli wiki, která má nainstalovaný VisualEditor.
Příklad tohoto použití můžete vidět v anglickém jazyce na Wikipedii [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|zde]].

Pro wiki, které mají VisualEditor, existuje několik způsobů, jak aktivovat toto zobrazení rozdílového zobrazení:

* Přidejte do LocalSettings.php následující text:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Pokud má vaše wiki záložku &quot;Funkce beta&quot; (beta features) v rámci Special:Preferences a chcete, aby se vizuální rozdíly pro uživatele staly &quot;výchozími&quot; (opt-in), můžete k LocalSettings.php přidat následující položky:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Jak je vidět na výše odkazovaném příkladu na Wikipedii, režim vizuálního rozdílu lze také aktivovat jednoduchým přidáním výrazu &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; do adresy URL stránky rozdílu.

== Jak na to ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky zobrazující některé změny článku. Většina změn je zvýrazněna formátem textu.|left|thumb|300px|Po dokončení úpravy stránky zadejte shrnutí úprav a poté zvolte &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.

Ve vizuálním režimu uvidíte zvýrazněné doplňky, odstranění, nové odkazy a formátování. Další změny, například změna velikosti obrázku, jsou popsány v poznámkách na straně.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=Přepínací tlačítko zobrazující vizuální a wikitextové možnosti. Je vybrána vizuální možnost.|left|thumb|220x220px|Klepnutím na přepínací tlačítko můžete přepínat mezi vizuálními a wikitextovými rozdíly.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky zobrazující stejné změny, na dvousloupcovém zobrazení wikitextu.|left|thumb|245x245px|Rozdíl wikitextu je stejný nástroj pro porovnání, který se používá v editorech wikitextu a v historii stránky.]]

{{clr}}
== Příklady ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Úpravy formátovaného textu&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Vizuální rozdíly
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|Wikitextové rozdíly
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Přesunutí odstavce s drobným vandalismem&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Vizuální rozdíly
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Rozdíl ve wikitextu (2017). Tato funkce byla přidána do wikitextového rozdílového enginu v roce 2018; viz [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]] (nový wikitextový rozdíl s přesunem odstavce a vandalism).
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Odstranění sloupce tabulky&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Vizuální rozdíly
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|Wikitextové rozdíly
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Text, formátování a změny seznamu&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Vizuální rozdíly
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|Wikitextové rozdíly
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Vložení nového multimédia (notový zápis)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Vizuální rozdíly
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|Wikitextové rozdíly
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Použité technologie ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|Thalia Chan, Sjednocující úpravy a vizuální rozdíly, Wikimania 2017]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Aktuální omezení ==
* Žádná upozornění na změny &quot;neviditelných&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|metadat stránek}}, jako jsou kategorie nebo klíčová slova pro obsah stránky.
* Problémy se složitými změnami tabulek.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* Nedostupné na některých speciálních stránkách:
** Stránky s &quot;rozdílem&quot; při vracení změn zpět.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** Stránky editačních konfliktů&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Historie ==
Tato funkce je k dispozici jako první rozdílový nástroj ve stolním VisualEditoru od větve 1.31.0-wmf-20 (vydáno do produkce Wikimedie dne 6. února 2018).
Předtím to byl sekundární nástroj od větve 1.29.0-wmf-17 dále (vydán do produkce Wikimedia dne 21. března 2017).

== Související stránky ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Poznámky pod čarou ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2yj1och8xcrthuakfljfoemijhgy7dv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Diffs/15/cs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>906670</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402165</id>
      <parentid>5125865</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:39:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="51" xml:space="preserve">Od roku 2017 poskytuje $2 $1 (vizuální rozdíly).</text>
      <sha1>4kmteh70qg3whfqr0lzewyp0d6np6qd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/cs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>909201</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402476</id>
      <parentid>4502649</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:11:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="88" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|Dokumentace k překladu zpráv a obsahu s využitím rozšíření Translate]]</text>
      <sha1>bisp2ufwy1soglvz0r8h5ikl4lcrmjy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Page Previews/78/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>913280</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402136</id>
      <parentid>4948634</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:22:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="130" xml:space="preserve">Uma visão geral sobre toda a documentação técnica relacionada é fornecida [$url neste post de blog] a partir de maio de 2018.</text>
      <sha1>hpalpav1lf2nlss3k1qjddykq77udj3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Phabricator/FAQ/zh</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>916175</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402804</id>
      <parentid>5200812</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:57:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15986" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{historical|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Content on this page was written before starting the [[Phabricator/Migration|migration to Phabricator]] in November 2014.&lt;/span&gt;}}

== 概述 ==
{{Project management tools review}}

===为什么要迁移到Phabricator？===

参见{{ll|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org|Phabricator#phabricator.wikimedia.org}}。

===基础架构的哪些部分将被迁移？===
主要关注的是Bugzilla，Gerrit，Trello，Mingle，RT（但不一定限于它们）。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also see [[Special:MyLanguage/Project management tools/Review#Scope|Project management tools/Review#Scope]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Except for Phabricator's wiki functionality which would be disabled, we would like to migrate fully to Phabricator instead of piecemeal.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Is there a list of known deficiencies of / known issues with Phabricator?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Testers have reported some of the regressions and missing functionalities that users will experience after the migration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some of them are listed on top of the following tickets:&lt;/span&gt;
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T30] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T23] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T22] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21] [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla|comparison between Phabricator and Bugzilla is available]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;onlyinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Is Phabricator easy to use?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator is explicitly not designed for newbies.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;«Phabricator is primarily targeted at software professionals and other professionals with adjacent responsibilities (like project management and operations).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Particularly, we assume users are proficient computer users and familiar with software development concepts.»&lt;/span&gt;
[https://secure.phabricator.com/book/phabcontrib/article/feature_requests/#target-audiences]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How can I help? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator#Get involved|Phabricator#Get involved]].
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/onlyinclude&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== What is the current amount of work maintaining Bugzilla/Gerrit/Mingle/Trello sync tools? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[wikitech:Bingle|Bingle and Bugello]] synchronize some aspects of tickets between Bugzilla and Mingle/Trello, but [https://lists.wikimedia.org/pipermail/teampractices/2013-December/000202.html functionality is limited and ticket statuses between tools can easily get out of sync] (also see [https://github.com/wikimedia/bingle/issues list of open Bingle issues]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Arthur should be able to elaborate on the amount of maintenance work required.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gerrit's [https://gerrit.googlesource.com/plugins/hooks-bugzilla/ hooks-bugzilla] plugin does not require maintenance but has limitations ([https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=52167 1], [https://bugzilla.wikimedia.org/show_bug.cgi?bug_id=53084 2]) which are not easy to solve.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How would the migration happen? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bugzilla/RT/Gerrit tickets, projects, user accounts, patchsets, access settings, etc. would have to be moved into Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
([https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related upstream ticket&lt;/span&gt;])
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The switching costs are not clear yet; Your help is welcome to evaluate them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A clear cut for at least one tool (Bugzilla) seems preferable in order to not continue running all to-be-replaced systems plus yet another one (Phabricator).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== When would the migration happen? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/Migration Timeline|Phabricator/Migration Timeline]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== What would that mean for me? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;At some point current infrastructure tools (see above) would be replaced by Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator has a different user interface and some changes in workflow, compared to the current setup.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the long run, things will get less complicated because everything is in one tool; there will be more transparency and efficiency because discussions are more centralized and in one tool instead of several tools.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As different development teams use different tools with different needs (reporters, developers, product managers, scrum masters, ...), you want to play with the [http://fab.wmflabs.org/ Labs instance of Phabricator] to see if it fits your needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See section &quot;How can I help?&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Will external links/URLs break? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We will try to minimize broken links by redirecting [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T40 Bugzilla] (please see [[Phabricator/versus_Bugzilla#Bugzilla_URLs_and_their_redirects|Bugzilla URLs and their redirects]]) and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T41 RT] tickets to Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is still to be evaluated whether we can also easily redirect Gerrit changesets.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Obviously, documentation about [[Bug management|Bug management/Bugzilla]] (see [[phab:T206|T206]]), [[Gerrit|Gerrit]] or [[wikitech:RT|RT]] will need updating.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How flexible is Phabricator when restricting access to certain tickets, or tickets in certain products (e.g. &quot;Security&quot;)? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T50 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related task&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does Phabricator provide statistics, metrics, charts? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, Phabricator offers [[phab:maniphest/report/|Reports by User and by Project]] and [[phab:maniphest/report/burn/|Burnup Rate]] (logging in might be required).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Burndown charts for projects are available via the custom Sprint extension (see [[phab:T153|T153]] and [[phab:T1322|T1322]]), to be superseded by [[phab:project/profile/1266/|Phragile]] in the future.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[phab:fact/|Charts]] are currently not enabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T28 related task] about metrics in general.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does any other FLOSS project use Phabricator? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
FLOSS projects using Phabricator include [https://reviews.llvm.org/ LLVM], [https://developer.blender.org/ Blender], and [https://secure.phabricator.com/ Phabricator itself].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is also a [[w:Phabricator#Users|list of projects on English Wikipedia]] but most are proprietary and/or small.&lt;/span&gt;
[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T192 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Facebook's install is very large&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Did anyone else migrate to Phabricator as we would? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No, this is a way that nobody has walked before.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Focusing on like-minded projects: maybe Blender did, in late 2013 (but from SVN, Trac and Trello); however no detailed report available yet[https://code.blender.org/2013/11/new-development-infrastructure/] and it's at least [https://www.openhub.net/p/blender one order of magnitude smaller] than MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They're now sharing some code.[https://secure.phabricator.com/T3179#81309]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Why can't I login using my GitHub or Google account? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Although Phabricator has authentication plugins for GitHub, Google, and other identity providers, we have decided not to use them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;With two Wikimedia alternatives that cover virtually all Wikimedia contributors, more options are not really necessary.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Besides, these services depend on proprietary third party sites, and they might raise concerns about privacy and commercial interests.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more details, see [[phab:T16|T16 - Support only WMF SUL and LDAP as authentication mechanisms]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== How can I merge my account from Wikipedia or other Wikimedia wikis with my Phabricator account? ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Use Phabricator's [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/settings/panel/external/ Linked Accounts and Authentication] tool for that.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Concerns raised ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Ending up with one more tool ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having fewer tools is the whole point of this exercise.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The replacement of Bugzilla and Gerrit with Phabricator is an essential requirement of this project.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The teams using Trello and Mingle understand that relying in these commercial services is not a long-term solution.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Lack of a detailed plan ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The current working plan is good enough to provide a realistic vision supported by the community.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The WMF needs an RfC resolution in order to allocate the resources needed to elaborate a detailed plan.[https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T17]&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Why not improving our current tools ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phabricator is already an integrated suite, which means the different components are intended to be used together.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is written in PHP, and their maintainers are very proactive.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* This encourages features like explicitly attaching tasks to code changes, mocks, etc.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Although we can write or improve integrations like Gerrit Notification Bot, Bugzilla (Perl), Gerrit (Java), or Scrumbugz (Python) will probably never be a seamlessly integrated suite.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Some projects should test first ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, this is also our recommendation for the migration from Gerrit to Phabricator.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;About the migration from Bugzilla to Phabricator, it needs to be done at once because we cannot do a full migration of data with two moving targets.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Various UI issues ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We can customize the CSS of our instance for more appropriate font sizes, colors, etc.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Upstream has already fixed some of the problems reported.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Requiring arc ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Arc checks new patches for basic mistakes before uploading them for review.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is useful for the majority of contributors and for the project.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The occasional contributor can upload a patch directly via the Phabricator Web UI.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Phabricator is unfamiliar for most newcomers ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;True, most users of FLOSS software have experience with Bugzilla if anything, because it's used by all the major players (Linux itself, Mozilla, RedHat, GNOME [https://www.bugzilla.org/installation-list/ etc. etc.]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However this is not necessarily true for all MediaWiki newcomers.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Offering them one integrated platform is better than looking for a platform they already know.&lt;/span&gt;

== phabricator.wikimedia.org ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[phab:|Phabricator.wikimedia.org]] (aka [https://bugs.wikimedia.org/ bugs.wikimedia.org]) is Wikimedia's bug tracking and project management tool.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Bugzilla ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus Bugzilla|Phabricator/versus Bugzilla]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== RT ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Phabricator/versus RT|Phabricator/versus RT]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Trello, Mingle, Scrumbugz, etc ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Is Phabricator flexible enough to allow different teams to define their own workflows and ways of organizing sprints/tasks/stories/etc? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
; [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T43 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;related task&lt;/span&gt;] - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;this welcomes answering by individuals who have already worked and maintained a Phabricator instance.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, at least to some degree.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, different projects can define their own columns/swim lanes on workboards with &quot;Add Column&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Does Phabricator provide boards per project and/or iteration? ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See e.g. the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/project/board/5/ Wikimedia Phabricator board].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Related tasks: [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T21 Identify features Trello users would miss] and [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T20 Identify features Mingle users would miss]&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Phabricator{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>eah3x2oi68y3g1nmk87r6b9gro8mv1a</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/es</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>917851</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402151</id>
      <parentid>4919145</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:37:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7003" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Desde 2017, [[VisualEditor]] proporciona ''''''{{ll|visual diffs}}'''''' (vistas de diferencia visual).&lt;/span&gt;
Estas están disponibles en dos lugares de la interfaz: al previsualizar los cambios en el documento antes de que el usuario guarde la página y (como una [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|función beta]]) dentro de la vista de diferencias de MediaWiki estándar, accesible desde la página del historial.
En ambos casos, la diferencia visual aparece junto a la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|diferencia (diff) de dos columnas tradicional]] y el usuario puede alternar entre las dos vistas.

Los ''visual diffs'' tienen dos ventajas principales sobre los ''diffs'' de wikitexto.
La primera es que los editores pueden ver directamente los cambios que ellos y otros han hecho sin necesidad de entender [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitexto]].
Esto es particularmente útil cuando se observan cambios en estructuras gráficas como las tablas. Por ejemplo, si una edición borra una columna de una tabla, su ''diff'' de wikitexto sería difícil de entender, mientras que su ''visual diff'' sería inmediatamente obvio.

La segunda es que esta tecnología puede utilizarse para representar con mayor precisión el cambio al lector.
Por ejemplo, si una edición intercambia dos párrafos (con o sin modificaciones en los párrafos), el ''visual diff'' identificará que esto es lo que ocurrió, mientras que un ''diff'' de wikitexto hace parecer que se eliminó un párrafo y se agregó un párrafo completamente nuevo.

== En páginas regulares de ''diff'' ==
La mayoría de los ejemplos y capturas de pantalla que aparecen a continuación tratan sobre el uso de ''visual diffs'' durante las vistas previas de las páginas al editar.
Sin embargo, el ''visual diffs'' del Editor Visualtambién puede ser usado en las páginas regulares de &quot;diffs&quot;, en cualquier wiki que tenga el Editor Visual instalado.
Puede ver un ejemplo de ello en uso en la Wikipedia en inglés [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|aquí]].

Para los wikis que tienen VisualEditor, hay varias maneras de activar la vista de ''visual diff'':

* Agregue lo siguiente a LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Si su wiki tiene una pestaña de &quot;Funciones beta&quot; dentro de Especial:Preferencias, y desea que las diferencias visuales sean una función &quot;opcional&quot; para los usuarios, puede agregar lo siguiente a LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
Como se ve en el ejemplo de Wikipedia vinculado anteriormente, el modo de diferencia visual también se puede activar simplemente agregando &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; a la URL de una página de '''diffs'''.

== Cómo funciona ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Captura de pantalla que muestra algunos cambios en un artículo.  La mayoría de los cambios se resaltan con el formato de texto.|left|thumb|300px|Cuando termine de editar la página, escriba el resumen de la edición y luego elija &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.

En el modo visual, verá las adiciones, las eliminaciones, los nuevos enlaces y el formato resaltados.  Otras modificaciones, como el cambio de tamaño de una imagen, se describen en las notas al lado.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=Botón de alternancia que muestra las opciones visuales y de wikitexto. La opción visual está seleccionada.|left|thumb|220x220px|Haga clic en el botón de alternancia para cambiar entre los ''diffs'' visuales y de wikitexto.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=Captura de pantalla que muestra los mismos cambios, en la vista de dos columnas de ''diff'' de wikitexto.|left|thumb|245x245px|El ''diff'' de wikitexto es la misma herramienta ''diff'' que se utiliza en los editores de wikitexto y en el historial.]]

{{clr}}
== Ejemplos ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Edición de texto enriquecido&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|''Diff'' de wikitexto
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Párrafo movido con un sutil vandalismo&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|''Diff'' de wikitexto (2017). Esta función fue agregada al motor ''diff'' de wikitexto en 2018. Vea [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Columna de la tabla eliminada&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|''Diff'' de wikitexto
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Cambios de texto, formato y lista&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|''Diff'' de wikitexto
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Introducción de un nuevo medio (partituras)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|''Diff'' de wikitexto
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Tecnología utilizada ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|Thalia Chan, unificando edición y diferncias visuales, Wikimanía 2017]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Limitaciones actuales ==
* No hay alertas de cambios en los {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|metadatos de las páginas}} &quot;invisibles&quot;, como las categorías o las palabras clave de TOC.
* Tiene problemas con modificaciones complejas en las tablas.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* No está disponible en ciertas páginas especiales:
** Deshacer páginas &quot;diff&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** Editar páginas de conflicto&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Historia ==
Esta característica ha estado disponible como la primera herramienta de diferencias en el Editor Visual de escritorio desde la rama 1.31.0-wmf-20 en adelante (lanzada a la producción de Wikimedia el 6 de febrero de 2018).
Antes de eso, era una herramienta secundaria de la rama 1.29.0-wmf-17 en adelante (lanzada a la producción de Wikimedia el 21 de marzo de 2017).

== Véase también ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Notas ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9o6znrdkbps8kvq2rvqbpm0arh1pl15</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402168</id>
      <parentid>5402151</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:39:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6960" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Desde 2017, {{ll|VisualEditor}} proporciona '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' (vistas de diferencia visual).
Estas están disponibles en dos lugares de la interfaz: al previsualizar los cambios en el documento antes de que el usuario guarde la página y (como una [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|función beta]]) dentro de la vista de diferencias de MediaWiki estándar, accesible desde la página del historial.
En ambos casos, la diferencia visual aparece junto a la [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|diferencia (diff) de dos columnas tradicional]] y el usuario puede alternar entre las dos vistas.

Los ''visual diffs'' tienen dos ventajas principales sobre los ''diffs'' de wikitexto.
La primera es que los editores pueden ver directamente los cambios que ellos y otros han hecho sin necesidad de entender [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitexto]].
Esto es particularmente útil cuando se observan cambios en estructuras gráficas como las tablas. Por ejemplo, si una edición borra una columna de una tabla, su ''diff'' de wikitexto sería difícil de entender, mientras que su ''visual diff'' sería inmediatamente obvio.

La segunda es que esta tecnología puede utilizarse para representar con mayor precisión el cambio al lector.
Por ejemplo, si una edición intercambia dos párrafos (con o sin modificaciones en los párrafos), el ''visual diff'' identificará que esto es lo que ocurrió, mientras que un ''diff'' de wikitexto hace parecer que se eliminó un párrafo y se agregó un párrafo completamente nuevo.

== En páginas regulares de ''diff'' ==
La mayoría de los ejemplos y capturas de pantalla que aparecen a continuación tratan sobre el uso de ''visual diffs'' durante las vistas previas de las páginas al editar.
Sin embargo, el ''visual diffs'' del Editor Visualtambién puede ser usado en las páginas regulares de &quot;diffs&quot;, en cualquier wiki que tenga el Editor Visual instalado.
Puede ver un ejemplo de ello en uso en la Wikipedia en inglés [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|aquí]].

Para los wikis que tienen VisualEditor, hay varias maneras de activar la vista de ''visual diff'':

* Agregue lo siguiente a LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Si su wiki tiene una pestaña de &quot;Funciones beta&quot; dentro de Especial:Preferencias, y desea que las diferencias visuales sean una función &quot;opcional&quot; para los usuarios, puede agregar lo siguiente a LocalSettings.php:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
Como se ve en el ejemplo de Wikipedia vinculado anteriormente, el modo de diferencia visual también se puede activar simplemente agregando &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; a la URL de una página de '''diffs'''.

== Cómo funciona ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Captura de pantalla que muestra algunos cambios en un artículo.  La mayoría de los cambios se resaltan con el formato de texto.|left|thumb|300px|Cuando termine de editar la página, escriba el resumen de la edición y luego elija &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.

En el modo visual, verá las adiciones, las eliminaciones, los nuevos enlaces y el formato resaltados.  Otras modificaciones, como el cambio de tamaño de una imagen, se describen en las notas al lado.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=Botón de alternancia que muestra las opciones visuales y de wikitexto. La opción visual está seleccionada.|left|thumb|220x220px|Haga clic en el botón de alternancia para cambiar entre los ''diffs'' visuales y de wikitexto.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=Captura de pantalla que muestra los mismos cambios, en la vista de dos columnas de ''diff'' de wikitexto.|left|thumb|245x245px|El ''diff'' de wikitexto es la misma herramienta ''diff'' que se utiliza en los editores de wikitexto y en el historial.]]

{{clr}}
== Ejemplos ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Edición de texto enriquecido&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|''Diff'' de wikitexto
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Párrafo movido con un sutil vandalismo&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|''Diff'' de wikitexto (2017). Esta función fue agregada al motor ''diff'' de wikitexto en 2018. Vea [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Columna de la tabla eliminada&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|''Diff'' de wikitexto
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Cambios de texto, formato y lista&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|''Diff'' de wikitexto
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Introducción de un nuevo medio (partituras)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Visual diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|''Diff'' de wikitexto
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Tecnología utilizada ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|Thalia Chan, unificando edición y diferncias visuales, Wikimanía 2017]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Limitaciones actuales ==
* No hay alertas de cambios en los {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|metadatos de las páginas}} &quot;invisibles&quot;, como las categorías o las palabras clave de TOC.
* Tiene problemas con modificaciones complejas en las tablas.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* No está disponible en ciertas páginas especiales:
** Deshacer páginas &quot;diff&quot;.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** Editar páginas de conflicto&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Historia ==
Esta característica ha estado disponible como la primera herramienta de diferencias en el Editor Visual de escritorio desde la rama 1.31.0-wmf-20 en adelante (lanzada a la producción de Wikimedia el 6 de febrero de 2018).
Antes de eso, era una herramienta secundaria de la rama 1.29.0-wmf-17 en adelante (lanzada a la producción de Wikimedia el 21 de marzo de 2017).

== Véase también ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Notas ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ihrpyomw8z4kikgy5nvzp6mc5t3vcp8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Diffs/15/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>917852</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402167</id>
      <parentid>4262479</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:39:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="60" xml:space="preserve">Desde 2017, $2 proporciona $1 (vistas de diferencia visual).</text>
      <sha1>a5w0qn1fq5l49cr5d7rh8xnoy939jxv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/eo</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>923119</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402240</id>
      <parentid>5400733</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13926" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Ĝisdatigita informo estas havebla en Meta-Vikio: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|vidu ĉi-sube]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|vidu ĉi-sube]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* Lingvoj
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Date format and time offset ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Vidu ankaŭ ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>pa0wl7vj7ek48mtwv8fdqre7p9hy5cp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/ar</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>929043</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402472</id>
      <parentid>4502641</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:10:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="68" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|ترجم ودقق توثيق امتداد الترجمة]]</text>
      <sha1>nlt463r7vifpt7ljty127ej5mby3etk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Bouquet/pl</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>949860</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401864</id>
      <parentid>5214284</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:07:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2727" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Bouquet
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Automattic — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)&lt;/span&gt;
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki port&lt;/span&gt;
|description     = 
|image           = BouquetSkin.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.2.3
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=bouquet &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interface Messages Wiki&lt;/span&gt;]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        =
|phabricator     = Bouquet
}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Bouquet''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;an elegant, simple theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; inspired by the beauty found in flowers&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Bouquet-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Three [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|themes]]:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** forget-me-not (internal name (for the ''usetheme'' URL parameter and &lt;code&gt;$wgDefaultTheme&lt;/code&gt;) ''forgetmenot'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** pink dogwood (internal name ''pinkdogwood'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** tiger lily (internal name ''tigerlily'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom header/logo image (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Bouquet-skin-logo.png]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, 1100x180 pixels)
&lt;/div&gt;

== Instalacja ==
{{SkinInstall
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]] &lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>e16x3h544ai58sw4naorq2woux2fv7r</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/th</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>955818</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402947</id>
      <parentid>5355668</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="52410" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== ภาพรวมเบื้องต้น ==

=== การย้ายไฟล์ ===

เลือกวิธีการย้ายไฟล์:

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
* คัดลอกแบบปลอดภัยด้วย [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] หรือ [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
&lt;/div&gt;
* ใช้ไคลเอนต์ [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The hosting company might provide a file manager interface via the web browser; check with your provider.
&lt;/div&gt;
* วิธีอื่นบางวิธี &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]&lt;/span&gt;

=== เบื้องต้น ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check the requirements
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the RELEASE-NOTES file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Back up existing files and the database
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new files
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Upgrade extensions
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the update script to check the database
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Test the update
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Remove leftovers from old installations
&lt;/div&gt;

== ตรวจสอบความต้องการ == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} requires:
&lt;/div&gt;

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* One of the following:
&lt;/div&gt;
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are using PostgreSQL, please also read {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For more information, please read the {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} and {{ll|Compatibility}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

== อ่านบันทึกประจำรุ่น ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now's the time to open it up and find out what's been changed in this release.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Clear pending jobs ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those jobs are stored in database and contain parameters with information about actions it should perform.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's strongly recommended to run those pending jobs before upgrading the wiki, to avoid them failing in case the parameter specification of those jobs change on the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== สำรองไฟล์และฐานข้อมูลที่มีอยู่ ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:''Full instructions: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* MediaWiki's program files, including all skins and extensions, especially if you modified them.
&lt;/div&gt;

== แตกไฟล์ใหม่ ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using a tarball package ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can put the new files into place using FTP or the command line. Use the command line, if you have access to it! Using the command line will be much faster than having to upload each single one of the thousands of files via FTP.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extracting a tarball over top of your live copy of MediaWiki can also leave behind files from the old version of MediaWiki which may interfere with the upgraded code. It's recommended that you unpack the new files into a new directory, and then apply customizations to the new directory (restoring LocalSettings.php, images folder, extensions, and other customizations like custom skins)&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== FTP or graphical ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you cannot access the command line on your server, download the MediaWiki tarball to your local computer and use [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] to extract the tarball on your local PC.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Command line ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Other files===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using Git ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

== อัพเกรดส่วนขยาย ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Other variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Run the update script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: ''See also {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Should I back up first?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Short answer: Yes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Why upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>toepg1wigejynt7nohyqul50206kvi4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/vi</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>959643</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401817</id>
      <parentid>5184898</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Extension registration/116/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>963458</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402521</id>
      <parentid>3339062</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:22:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="136" xml:space="preserve">Pour les extensions qui utilisent l'[[$1|intégration continue]] de Wikimedia, les dépendances doivent également être ajoutées à $2</text>
      <sha1>nogqxl5w9ipzi202s5q35c7qah1o9el</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Translate/hu</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>966704</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402483</id>
      <parentid>5072276</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:13:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12332" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Extension
|status    = stable
|type1     = special
|type2     = locale
|type3     = api
|type4     = parser function
|newhook1  = Translate:GettextFFS:headerFields
|newhook2  = Translate:MessageGroupStats:isIncluded
|newhook3  = Translate:modifyMessageGroupStates
|newhook4  = Translate:newTranslation
|newhook5  = TranslateBeforeAddModules
|newhook6  = TranslateEventMessageGroupStateChange
|newhook7  = TranslateEventMessageMembershipChange
|newhook8  = TranslateEventTranslationReview
|newhook9  = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsParameterList
|newhook10 = TranslateGetAPIMessageGroupsPropertyDescs
|newhook11 = TranslateGetBoxes
|newhook12 = TranslateGetSpecialTranslateOptions
|newhook13 = TranslateInitGroupLoaders
|newhook14 = TranslateMessageGroupPathVariables
|newhook15 = TranslatePostInitGroups
|newhook16 = TranslatePrefillTranslation
|newhook17 = TranslateProcessAPIMessageGroupsProperties
|newhook18 = TranslateSupportedLanguages
|newhook19 = TranslateTranslationAids
|author    = Niklas Laxström, Siebrand Mazeland és mások
|image     = Translate_manual_-_Page_example_-_19._Documentation.png
|version   = 
|mediawiki = 
|compatibility policy = master
|download  = {{ll|MLEB|2=A nyelvi kiterjesztési csomag részeként}}
----
{{WikimediaDownload|phab=ETRA}}
|readme    = {{ll|Help:Extension:Translate|2=Felhasználói dokumentáció}}
|changelog = {{GerritLog|Translate}}
|description = Lehetővé teszi a wikin belüli fordítást és -ellenőrzést
|example   = [[translatewiki:Special:Translate|Translatewiki.net]] – vagy [//meta.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=Special%3ATranslate&amp;taction=translate&amp;group=page-Terms+of+use&amp;task=view hogyan fordíts le egy lapot]
|pagedrive1 = true
|bugzilla  = Translate
|composer  = mediawiki/translate
|translate = ext-translate-0-all
|table1    = revtag
|table2    = translate_groupreviews
|table3    = translate_groupstats
|table4    = translate_messageindex
|table5    = translate_metadata
|table6    = translate_reviews
|table7    = translate_sections
|table8    = translate_stash
|table9    = translate_tms
|table10   = translate_tmt
|table11   = translate_tmf
}}
{{Extension-Translate}}

A '''Translate''' kiterjesztéssel a MediaWikin bármely típusú szöveg lefordítható; legfőbb használati területei a szoftverlokalizációk és a többnyelvű wikik.

== Funkciói ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Translate extension has many features specifically targeted to translators, while making back-end integration with actual source code as easy as possible. Meanwhile, everything runs inside [[Special:MyLanguage/How does MediaWiki work?|MediaWiki]], which allows users an almost endless degree of freedom for communication and self-organization.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Features include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Structured wiki content page translation.'''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''In-wiki localisation and exporting of software interface messages (or just about anything).'''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Web-based translation and proofreading [[wmfblog:2013/03/25/redesigning-the-translation-experience-an-overview/|interface]], as well as gettext based export and import for off-line translation.'''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Various aids to make the job of translators easier:'''
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** display of translations in globally defined other languages, optionally expanded with user defined languages;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** collaborative editing of documentation of the use and context of messages;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** translation memory and machine translation with external tools (Apertium, Microsoft Translator, Yandex.Translate);
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** display of the latest change in the source message;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** warnings about common mistakes like parameters that are not used.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Pre-made modules for various open source products you can use as an example.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Support for various formats including: PHP, Java properties, Gettext, YAML and AndroidXml (see {{git file|action=tree|project=mediawiki/extensions/Translate|file=ffs|branch=HEAD|text=full FFS list}} and [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/File format support|File format support]]).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* A versatile plug-in system to make it easy to add new projects as a message group.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Various statistics:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** translation completion percentages for all message groups in all supported languages;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** translation completion percentages in all supported languages for any supported message group;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** tool for making activity graphs for spans of time.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Can display either number of edits or active users daily or hourly and includes many filters;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** cloud overview of active languages and translators.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translate extension, due to its large user base, is confirmed to be compatible with all reasonably recent browsers, except some minor (style) glitches which are quickly fixed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery widths=400px heights=220px  mode=&quot;nolines&quot;&gt;
File:Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality - Niklas Laxström and Claus Christensen.ogv|thumbtime=19|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;''Making Multilingual Wikis a Reality'': this presentation shows how the Translate extension can make a wiki truly multilingual, based on the experience of KDE UserBase wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
File:Translating the wiki way.webm|thumbtime=16:00|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Niklas Laxström, ''Translating the wiki way: Simple, fast, fun'', Wikimania 2012 (slides available).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Support and documentation ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Installation|Installation]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Configuration|Configuration]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|User documentation]] — includes tutorials
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* See [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Getting started with Translate extension development|Getting started with Translate extension development]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Live support at #translatewiki IRC channel at Libera Chat (best times are at European days and evenings)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Please report all issues and feature requests in the [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/maniphest/task/create/?projects=MediaWiki-extensions-Translate issue tracker]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Translate extension was originally developed by [[User:Nikerabbit]]; many other users, like [[User:Raymond]], [[User:SPQRobin]] and the Wikimedia Language team, have contributed to its code and documentation. It is maintained by [[User:Nikerabbit]] and [[User:Siebrand]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Prominent users of the Translate extension ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* https://translatewiki.net — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The biggest wiki-based site and community for translation of the interface of open source software.&lt;/span&gt;
* https://userbase.kde.org — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Documentation wiki for the KDE project which uses the page translation feature extensively.&lt;/span&gt;
* https://meta.wikimedia.org — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Translates wiki content and uses the group states feature. Translation and translation review is enabled almost for all users of the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;
* https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See more at [[w:translatewiki.net#Notable uses|notable uses of translatewiki.net on Wikipedia]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Testimonials ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Tom Hutchison of Joomla:
&lt;/div&gt;
{{quotation|1=
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Translate extension allows for connection to a translation service and can auto fill the translation for you. At the same time a translator can make adjustments so you're not creating lots of pages with inaccurate translations.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That's ok if they are on different continents.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That is actually a plus because work is getting done 24 hours a day.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What they need is a support group chat for each other.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They would all be able to read English if they are translating right? Teach a few simple wiki markup such as links and what to do with categories.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then they help others who in turn help others.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We have over 40 in a chat who help each other and have fun at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And they were all scared of the wiki but couldn't believe how easy it was once they started.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They are actually waiting on me for more translations to do because I can't keep up with them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;I know there is only 1 translating this language or that language.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We have that too.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;One person is doing Swahili while another one is working on Japanese.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also, you mark pages for translation.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You control whether to include templates or exclude variables in template calls.&lt;/span&gt;
}}


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[m:Template:Translatable template|Translatable template]].
* {{ll|Extension:TranslationNotifications}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;an extension to facilitate communication with translators.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Not to be confused with:
&lt;/div&gt;

* {{ll|Extension:ContentTranslation}} tool – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;used for one-off translation of wiki pages from one language to another.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:TranslateWiki}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:Special:MyLanguage/Abstract Wikipedia|m:Abstract Wikipedia]] for translation.&lt;/span&gt;

== Hogyan működhetsz közre? ==

* [https://translatewiki.net/w/i.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=ext-translate-0-all Fordítsd le a kiterjesztést a translatewiki.neten]
* [[phab:project/sprint/board/271/query/open/|Hibajelentések és funkciójavaslatok]]
* [[translatewiki:Issues and features|További hibajelentések és funkciójavaslatok a translatewiki.neten]]
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate|A kiterjesztés dokumentációjának fordítása és ellenőrzése]]

{{OnWikimedia}}

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Localisation extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Menu extensions{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Language Engineering{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Dictionary extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2m3uz75268ykiis1njmvxc4u71p1kcq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/hu</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>966717</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402482</id>
      <parentid>4502663</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:13:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="78" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|A kiterjesztés dokumentációjának fordítása és ellenőrzése]]</text>
      <sha1>ra7xntjfvv6eehx4d0nitbfjxce6lhf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/th</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>966740</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402627</id>
      <parentid>4578058</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4548" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions (formerly known as Flow) are [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|a project]] of the Collaboration team at the Wikimedia Foundation to build a modern discussion and collaboration system for Wikimedia projects.
&lt;/div&gt;

== เริ่มต้นแบบรวดเร็ว ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How Structured Discussions look - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Try it!]]&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There is some specific terms concerning Structured Discussions. They have been defined in '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|the Glossary]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

== คุณสมบัติเสริมขั้นสูง ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some advanced tools are available, for specific purposes. They have been regrouped on these subjects:
&lt;/div&gt;

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Activation&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What happens when Structured Discussions are enabled on a page?&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Topics&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filter topics, Edit a topic/message, Summarize a topic, Resolve a topic&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Permalinks&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to create links to subjects&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notifications and watchlist&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How the history system works&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide, Delete, Suppress topics&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading contents on a new Structured Discussions conversation&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shortcuts&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Keyboard shortcuts to use on visual editing mode.&lt;/span&gt;

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All documentation on one page.&lt;/span&gt;}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>itamzz1u105ykxqy3igdzrf7ohr70v9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Social tools/hu</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>967265</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401980</id>
      <parentid>4429450</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1697" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Közösségi eszközök}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Áttnekintés}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Fejlesztői információ}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Képernyőképek}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Történet}}
|group2 = Egyéb közösségi&lt;br /&gt;kiterjesztések
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = Egyéb kapcsolódó&lt;br /&gt;kiterjesztések&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(amelyek nem függnek a SocialProfile-tól)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>hcgco29unr5vo6zbnage7n9b8crqzad</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401993</id>
      <parentid>5401980</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:10:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1698" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Közösségi eszközök}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Áttnekintés}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Fejlesztői információ}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Képernyőképek}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Történet}}
|group2 = Egyéb közösségi&lt;br /&gt;kiterjesztések
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = Egyéb kapcsolódó&lt;br /&gt;kiterjesztések&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(amelyek nem függnek a SocialProfile-tól)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>o4xi16k3fszelrm91sfxtk16ds39mqa</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Extension registration/pt</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>968219</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402513</id>
      <parentid>5375689</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26309" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
'''Registo de Extensão''' é o mecanismo que o MediaWiki utiliza para carregar as [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|extensões]] e os [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|temas]].
Você coloca os dados de configuração num ficheiro chamado &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; ou &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; na diretoria raiz da sua extensão ou tema, e o MediaWiki utiliza isto para registar as extensões e os temas.

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Migration for site administrators ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Before MediaWiki 1.25, configuration for extensions and skins was done in a PHP file using the extension's or skin's name, for example &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Isto pode ser convertido para:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This must be done before you load any extensions or skins from non-standard directory locations:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you keep your extensions in a location different from &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}}'', to specify the directory in which to find the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Looks in $wgExtensionDirectory for /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your skins are not in &lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override the poorly named {{wg|StyleDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of &lt;code&gt;wfLoadSkin()&lt;/code&gt;'', to specify the directory in which to find the skin.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Looks in $wgStyleDirectory for both /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json and /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Migração para os programadores de extensão ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since MW 1.30, namespace IDs defined in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; can be overwritten locally, by defining the respective constant in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; before loading the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consider for instance the following namespace declaration in a &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would per default cause the constant NS_FOO to be defined to have the value 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, this can be overwritten by defining the respective constant in LocalSettings.php:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would cause the &quot;Foo&quot; namespace to be registered with the ID 6688 instead of 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When overriding namespace IDs, don't forget that all talk namespaces must have odd IDs, and the ID of the talk namespace must always be the subject namespace's ID plus one.&lt;/span&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also the [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ extension registration wall of sadness (now superpowers)].&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; helps you migrating from PHP entry points to a JSON metadata file.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension supports older versions of MediaWiki, you should keep your PHP entry point &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; until you drop support for those older versions.&lt;/span&gt;

Linhas de comando amostra:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to uninstall your extension from &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; if you receive errors that constants or functions cannot be redefined.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should replace your PHP entry point file (FooBar.php) with something like the following happens to not break wikis during the upgrade process.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Ou temas

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Retaining documentation ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PHP entry points usually have some documentation of configuration settings that is useful and shouldn't be lost.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately JSON doesn't support comments. It is recommended that you transfer configuration documentation to a &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; file in the extension's repository.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also document configuration on-wiki in your Extension:''MyExtension'' page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to include some documentation directly in the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration ignores any key in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; starting with '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' in the top-level structure, so you can put comments in those parts of the JSON file. For example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Version 1 of the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; format also allowed &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; in &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; section, but this is no longer recommended or supported in version 2. &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; field of the config variable should be used instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This should only be used for brief notes and comments.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Funcionalidades ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are loading a large number of extensions, extension registration will provide a performance boost as long as you have [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (or APCu) installed. Extensions that are loaded together with &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (with plural -s) will be cached together.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Atributos ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A recurring problem is how to &quot;register&quot; something with another extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usually this meant that you had to load one extension before another.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, VisualEditor has a &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt; which allows extensions to add their modules.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, in VisualEditor's entry point it has:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if any extension appends to the array before VisualEditor is loaded, VE will wipe out its entry in this array.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some extensions depended upon a specific load order, others hacked around this with {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration solves this problem with &quot;attributes&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the Math extension, its &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; would have something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the attributes need to be defined in the separate section &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; node needs to be an object with the extension name as key and an object of attribute/value pairs as the value. Be aware that the key in the subobject must not contain the extension name!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When VisualEditor wants to access this attribute it uses:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Requisitos (dependências) ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration has a &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; section, which acts similar to [[Composer]]'s &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; section.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It allows an extension developer to specify several requirements for the extension, such as a specific MediaWiki version (or greater/less than) or another extension/skin.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to add a dependency on a MediaWiki version that is greater than 1.26.0, you can add the following code to &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The key of the &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; object is the name of the dependency (prior to MediaWiki 1.29.0 only &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; was supported), the value is a valid version constraint (the format has to match the one [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md used by composer]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In MediaWiki 1.29.0 and above you can also add dependencies on skins and other extensions like so:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The extensions and skins specified here must also use the extension registrations system described on this page for this to work.
* The string added to specify the extension or skin must be identical to the string specified in the &quot;name&quot; field of the respective &quot;extension.json&quot; or &quot;skin.json&quot; file.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For extensions using Wikimedia [[Special:MyLanguage/Continuous integration|continuous integration]], dependencies also need to be added to {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}&lt;/span&gt;
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Check if an extension is loaded without actually requiring it ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many extensions may provide features that work only if another extension is loaded too, without really needing this feature for the core extension function to work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To implement a standardized way of checking, if an extension is loaded or not (without the need of extra work in an extension that is a soft-dependency in another one), extension registration can be used. It implements an &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns a simple boolean, if the extension is loaded or not (the extension needs to be loaded with extension registration for this to work). Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since [[MediaWiki 1.32]] it's also possible to check if an extension is loaded and satisfies a given composer version constraint:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you would like to check if a specific version of an extension is loaded in earlier versions of MediaWiki, information like that can be extracted with the &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns credit information for all loaded extensions. Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Alternatively, if the extension B defines a special constant meant for this purpose during loading, it is possible to check, if it is defined:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A more brittle way, that should be avoided is to check if a specific class of extension B exists or not, e.g. using this code:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This might break if the extension exists in the file system but is not loaded, e.g. if composer was used for autoloading.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the class was renamed or ceases to exist (e.g. because it is not package public) this will also break.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In general it is preferred to share code via composer components instead of extensions. If the classes of an extension only need to exist, but the extension does not need to be configured nor loaded, for what you want to do, that is a strong indicator that that code should be split off into a composer component you should depend on instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Configurações (As suas definições de extensão/temas) ===
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; assumes that your config settings start with a &quot;wg&quot; prefix.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If that's not the case, you can override the prefix by using a special key:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
That would use a prefix of &quot;eg&quot;, and set the global variable &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; to true.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the configuration section of extension registration provides a lot more features and allows you to describe your configuration options with much more detail. Instead of having a single key -&gt; value store for your configuration options, you can also add the following information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The general structure of the &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; changes slightly to the following, more object-oriented version:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== Valor ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the configuration moved to this place.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the only required key for a configuration object.&lt;/span&gt;

==== Caminho ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The boolean value of the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; key identifies, if the value of the configuration option should be interpreted as a filesystem path, relative to the extension directory root.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g., if the value of the configuration is &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; and the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; is true, the actual value will be &lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

==== Descrição ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; key for a configuration option can hold a non-localized string, which can be used to explain the configuration option to other developers or the users (system administrators) of your extension.&lt;/span&gt;
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the description key is usually not exposed to the frontend of the wiki, however, take a look to the outlook for more information how this feature could be used in the future!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There's also the possibility to add a message key of MediaWiki's internal localisation system as a description (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;), which, in the future, will be used to expose the description in the frontend of the MediaWiki installation.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== público / privado ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option is a boolean, which defaults to false, which means, that the configuration option and the value is marked as &quot;private&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This value is not used anywhere at the moment, take a look to the outlook to find out more about this option.&lt;/span&gt;

==== Outlook ====
{{tracked|T155155}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The mentioned changes above are also preparation steps for an improved configuration management in MediaWiki. The above changes allow us to, e.g., expose the configuration options of extensions in the MediaWiki UI. For this, the localised description message (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) and the indication, if the configuration option should be exposed or not (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) is needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Unit tests auto-discovery ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki allows any extension to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|register phpunit tests]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without extension registration, you would need to register a hook handler for the {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}} hook, which would look something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(as described on the manual page). However, this code looks the same for a lot of extensions, so you could call it unnecessary code duplication.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension uses extension registration and your phpunit tests are located in the &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt; subdirectory of your extension, the phpunit wrapper of MediaWiki will autodiscover the unit tests with the help of extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Therefore, you don't need to register the hook anymore and you don't need to specify, that your unit tests are saved in the default directory.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Customizing registration ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Also composer.json ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If an extension or skin has library dependencies, it may have a &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well, see {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Use the &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt; field to make MediaWiki use Composer's autoloading when appropriate.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some metadata fields overlap between &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (discussed in {{task|T89456}}), including :
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code stewardship ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

== Consulte também ==
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
* Reporte erros contra o projeto [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|Configuração do MediaWiki]].
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Old versions of [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (prior to May 2015) and {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} describe the old approach of declaring extension information in PHP code and variables
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=Limitações conhecidas}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=Sinopse da arquitetura}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; is the schema for &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (and skin.json).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] about implementing extension registration&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[toollabs:extreg-wos|Extension registration wall of superpowers!]] — summary of which extensions are still to be converted.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{task|T98668}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking ticket for converting all extensions and skins on Git to use extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;

== Referências ==
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1wzel5h7vmbcnfmog6q1teasn2zv4zb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements</title>
    <ns>1</ns>
    <id>974037</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401626</id>
      <parentid>5401174</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:40:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DavidBrooks</username>
        <id>1010349</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* Sufficiently narrow window just shows some separator lines */ Tracked</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="168332" xml:space="preserve">{{Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Header}}
{{User:Dexbot/Archivebot
|archive = Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive%(counter)s
| counter = 4
|algo = old(42d)
|counter = 1
|maxarchivesize = 200K
|minthreadstoarchive = 1
|minthreadsleft = 4
}}
{{tmbox|text=Between August 8 and 19, one of us (Olga or Szymon) will not be working. During that time, we will be less responsive, but will try to get back to your questions and thoughts as soon as possible.}}
{{WMF present
|1=SGrabarczuk (WMF)|timezone_1=UTC+1/2|lang_1=pl, en, fr|photo_1=Wikispotkanie-warszawa-2021-07-03-rd-26.jpg
|2=OVasileva (WMF)|timezone_2=UTC+1/2|lang_2=en, es, bg|photo_2=Vasileva, Olga January 2017.jpg
}}
{{Archive box|
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive1|Archive1 (before the 1st batch of deployments)]]
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive2|Archive2 (before the 2nd batch of deployments)]]
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive3|Archive3 (before the 3nd batch of deployments)]]
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive4|Archive4]]
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements|Current discussion]]
}}
{{Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Talk page intro}}

__TOC__


== Where is the TOC? ==

People here are complaining about it. I don't even get one! [[User:Betaneptune|Betaneptune]] ([[User talk:Betaneptune|talk]]) 17:38, 25 May 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Betaneptune|Betaneptune]]. Do you still have this problem? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 17:52, 8 June 2022 (UTC)
::Hi ! I have the same problem on the French version of Wikipedia. The TOC just disappeared. The problem appears in Firefox desktop (last version 101.0.1), even in &quot;troubleshoot&quot; mode with all my add-ons deactivated. However, the problem does not appear in Chrome. This is extremely confusing. I reported it on some discussion page on the french version of WP, but I also mention it here, as I'm not sure at all where to report the problem for it to be taken into account. [[Special:Contributions/85.169.195.108|85.169.195.108]] 17:56, 26 June 2022 (UTC)
: The TOC is now on the left side, but after other menu lists. It should probably come first. But to keep things accessible, the (hidden) &quot;jump to main menu&quot; link should be kept as first element of course. [[User:Psychoslave|Psychoslave]] ([[User talk:Psychoslave|talk]]) 15:00, 5 July 2022 (UTC)
::Agreed. The TOC ''really'' should come first. The {{mono|#mw-navigation}} menu (which currently appears first) is comprised of mostly ancillary links unrelated to the page's content, many of which are rarely used (e.g., ''&quot;Download as PDF&quot;'', ''&quot;Create a book&quot;'', ''&quot;Permanent link&quot;'', etc). [[User:OmenBreeze|OmenBreeze]] ([[User talk:OmenBreeze|talk]]) 00:17, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
:::{{ping|85.169.195.108}} It has been tracked here [[phab:T312022]].--[[Special:Contributions/37.103.14.65|37.103.14.65]] 09:03, 7 July 2022 (UTC)
::::Suggestions:
::::* ''If'' the TOC will ''not'' come first, the other menu lists on the left side should become hidden (collapsed) when there is a TOC below them, so that the TOC is always visible.
::::* The TOC should always be shown in its entirety, and not displayed as a box that you have to scroll through.
::::[[User:Förbätterlig|Förbätterlig]] ([[User talk:Förbätterlig|talk]]) 14:03, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== Too narrow (again) ==

Why waste all that space? I have a nice wide screen so I want to take advantage of it. Those who want to have it narrow can just reduce their window sizes? Overall, not a great look. Not exciting. Quite boring.--[[User:Xania|Xania]] ([[User talk:Xania|talk]]) 11:23, 22 December 2021 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Xania|Xania]], you can read about our [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Limiting_content_width#Goals_and_motivation|goals and motivation]] for limiting the width. Also, we are working on a solution to use the empty space. Could you take a look at [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Fourth prototype testing/it|our fourth prototype]] and write more on what you think about arranging the space as it is presented there? Thank you in advance! [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 14:59, 26 April 2022 (UTC)
:: Oh my dear God, why don't you give an option to unrestrict the width?? It's beyond ridiculous how absolutely tiny is the page content on my monitor horizontally! I have to scroll all the time to read! Don't ruin Wikipedia the same way Fandom was ruined! [[Special:Contributions/90.188.46.13|90.188.46.13]] 04:38, 13 May 2022 (UTC)
:::We have given this option. This can be done with the [[:en:User:Jdlrobson/vector-max-width-toggle.js|gadget one of our engineers made]]. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 03:39, 14 May 2022 (UTC)
::::Thanks, but maybe we should have an easy plug-in system for ordinary users or, at least, the instructions how to apply it and a place where to find those customisations. By default it is really narrow to read and it feels like a news site rather than an encyclopedia article. [[User:Krnl0138|Krnl0138]] ([[User talk:Krnl0138|talk]]) 09:55, 15 May 2022 (UTC)
:::::I agree, the toggle option should be there by default! By the way, that script does not work well currently, so I [[:en:User:Arthurfragoso/vector-max-width-toggle.js|updated it here]]. — [[User:Arthurfragoso|Arthurfragoso]] ([[User talk:Arthurfragoso|talk]]) 13:28, 21 May 2022 (UTC)
::I don't understand why you are still pushing on us that bad design choice. It still is time to pull the plug and start to work on a plain page design. You are convincing no one here. Please, please, really, please stop this nonsense. Forcing bad choices on your users because you are the only product on the market is never a good thing.
::Since it has been forced without asking anyone on the French Wikipedia I had to register just to come back to the normal and good design. That's something, as a simple reader, I should never have had to do in the first place.
::So one last time, please come back to reason and stop hurting your user base foolishly. [[User:DerpFox|DerpFox]] ([[User talk:DerpFox|talk]]) 21:33, 13 May 2022 (UTC)
:::Hello @[[User:DerpFox|DerpFox]], thanks for your comment. Have you maybe followed the links I've shared in my answer to Xania? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 03:42, 14 May 2022 (UTC)
::The lines in the fourth prototype seem to be slightly wider to me on 1080p display than in the current version of 2022 vector design, but those empty strips on the sides, each of which are almost the size of the old navigation mv-panel, constantly remind about the space wasted.
::If the only reason of this thinning is the recommended line lengths in symbols and you want to keep it for any price, I would suggest using a dynamic font size, so, for example, starting from some resolution the symbols just grow larger. This might also reduce the eye strain connected to focusing on the small text.
::[[User:Kageneko|Kageneko]] ([[User talk:Kageneko|talk]]) 13:51, 17 May 2022 (UTC)
::I had a browse over the reasons for the change, but I still don't like or agree with the main justification more or less boiling down to &quot;everyone else is doing it so we should too&quot;. Even in the linked examples, the page still feels a lot more &quot;full&quot; despite having a dedicated deadspace on the site, due to the way the page has been very carefully designed in a mixture of different kinds of block contents (images, text interactive eliments, etc).
::Accepted Webpage standards used to be against having blank, unused and waisted deadspace, but at some point in the last 10 years there seems to have been a weird shift to the opposite where deadspace is all the rage, though it's not one I've personally ever liked or agreed with.
::While I'm sure there are good uses of limiting page width, I'm not sure if Wikipedia, being a site that is mainly made up of text would really benefit from it as it's likely just going to squash pages and increase the amount of vertical scrolling required to navigate. [[User:Dave247|Dave247]] ([[User talk:Dave247|talk]]) 07:32, 18 May 2022 (UTC)
::Yeah it's too narrow otherwise. the look is very nice, it's not boring as you tell.  [[User:Crater bug|Crater bug]] ([[User talk:Crater bug|talk]]) 15:28, 28 May 2022 (UTC)
:I totally agree! I dislike the vector skin because how small it is. [[User:OverAWallOfMetaKnight|OverAWallOfMetaKnight]] ([[User talk:OverAWallOfMetaKnight|talk]]) 15:55, 15 May 2022 (UTC)
:Agreed. I use a 3440x1440 screen (usually with a tiled layout), and this new layout forces all the content to occupy a comically narrow strip, instead of allowing me to choose the width myself. [[User:Emptyflask|Emptyflask]] ([[User talk:Emptyflask|talk]]) 13:47, 17 May 2022 (UTC)
:I agree, there is simply too much space wasted that could be used for more article space and a button specifically for those who want to edit wikipedia [[User:Techny3000|Techny3000]] ([[User talk:Techny3000|talk]]) 02:52, 28 May 2022 (UTC)
:hard to read I'm glad I stayed the same as before No changes required [[Special:Contributions/240B:11:E7E0:5E00:6005:3399:E6C:2B48|240B:11:E7E0:5E00:6005:3399:E6C:2B48]] 14:06, 2 July 2022 (UTC)
:Strongly agree. I want to decide the readable width for me. In the old skin and most websites, I can do it by adjusting the width of window. I definitely don't want to care about &quot;CORRECT READABLE WIDTH FOR EVERYONE&quot; decided by someone somewhere, even if they are great scholars. [[User:Kyoku|Kyoku]] ([[User talk:Kyoku|talk]]) 08:32, 10 July 2022 (UTC)
:Agreed wholeheartedly. By the way, the design is even worse on a low DPI widescreen display, like 1366x768, 1280x800/720, etc. Try it out with Device Rendering options in your browser, usually somewhere in Dev Tools. I just got hit with Vector 2022 after coming here from wikipedia where I've had Vector 2010 enabled for a while and I forgot how bad it was!
:Wikimedia Foundation, '''do not forget that people all around the world use your service'''. People who might have a budget/old device with a low resolution display, or schoolchildren with a Chromebook or something! No default layout should ever create this much dead space and padding in a desktop environment. NONE. Nor should it ever consume nearly 1/3 of screen real estate that can never ever be used by the main content.
:The floating ToC looks like absolute garbage at 720p. I have WUXGA and 4K devices and it isn't any better there either. I'm not sure who the design is aimed at, other than the designers pushing the modern scourge of padding and white space onto the rest of the Internet. [[User:-αβοοδ|-αβοοδ]] ([[User talk:-αβοοδ|talk]]) 17:41, 29 July 2022 (UTC)

After reviewing the posted defense of the narrowing and the feedback listed here, this feature belongs entirely as an optional setting. It most certainly should not be the website's default. [[User:RightQuark|RightQuark]] ([[User talk:RightQuark|talk]]) 01:29, 24 May 2022 (UTC)
:The defence of the narrowing seems to have little real-world bonuses. It may be theoretically good but makes it bad to read because Wikipedia articles can be long [[User:Torqueing|Torqueing]] ([[User talk:Torqueing|talk]]) 17:10, 24 May 2022 (UTC)

I also have a wide screen monitor. I do not like this forced width shrinkage in the Vector 2022 skin. [[User:OhanaUnited|&lt;b&gt;&lt;font color=&quot;#0000FF&quot;&gt;OhanaUnited&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/b&gt;]][[User talk:OhanaUnited|&lt;b&gt;&lt;font color=&quot;green&quot;&gt;&lt;sup&gt;Talk page&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/b&gt;]] 17:24, 9 June 2022 (UTC)

In current form without a toggle for width this layout is unacceptable on large monitors. Even my old 14'' monitor. For now I am reverting to avoid having in forced horizontal white-space. [[User:Phatom87|phatom87]] ([[User talk:Phatom87|talk]]) 14:32, 20 June 2022 (UTC)

:Absolutely unacceptable, too narrow, an unjustified  waste of space. [[User:Loupeter|Loupeter]] ([[User talk:Loupeter|talk]]) 10:39, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

:It sounds like the fixed-max-width (assuming one's window is wide enough, and regardless of how much wider it might be) is a compromise between the needs of two different types of reading activities. I have both habits (skim vs detail-read), and felt especially the concern that the text doesn't obey what *I* do with my window. A reason I might widen my window is exactly because I want wider content. A comprimse necessarily isn't ideal for either one side. A better solution is to make it easy and discoverable how to get the *best* feel for whatever one is trying to do, rather than forcing so many to have a sub-par experience. A third-party gadget isn't discoverable and is surely more fragile than a first-class toggle feature of the skin itself. [[User:DMacks|DMacks]] ([[User talk:DMacks|talk]]) 15:16, 29 June 2022 (UTC)

In my opinion, [[Skin:Timeless]] does a much better job at restricting article space to improve readability. This is because the UI is not entirely positioned on the left-hand side of the screen, and the background colour is not blindingly bright. If the intention is to create whitespace, please don't use bright colours. Timeless also has more space for pictures. For the past 20 years, articles have been written with the understanding that 80%+ of the screen will be for content. There are width and upright tags all over the place that, once viewed with this narrow a perspective, become overwhelming.

A skin should not change the fundamental readability of the page. Compare [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_World_Before_the_Flood?useskin=vector-2022 this] with [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_World_Before_the_Flood?useskin=timeless this]. In Timeless, when the content ends, grey begins. In Vector 2022, it looks like the HTML was corrupted and failed to load because it continues with white for no discernable reason. Vector also artificially makes articles look longer than they are, which may actually dissuade people from reading. For instance, using a 27&quot; 16:9 monitor, on the article for Barack Obama, [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barack%20Obama?useskin=vector-2022 Vector] just about lets me see the entire lead on my screen at once. [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barack%20Obama?useskin=timeless Timeless] allows me to see the whole lead quite easily, as well as part of the ToC. [[:en:Line length|Line length]] may be a thing, but you must take into account the total amount of text on the screen at once, too. There's no use having the perfect 50 character line if you need 100 of them all bunched up together. [[User:Anarchyte|Anarchyte]] ([[User talk:Anarchyte|talk]]) 13:18, 13 July 2022 (UTC)

:Quick update and aside: I just learned about wide-vector-2022. This is fantastic. I actually like the ToC being placed where it is when using that gadget. If the plan was to make the wide skin the default, I would be less hesitant. For comparison with the links in my previous message, [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barack%20Obama?useskin=vector-2022&amp;withgadget=wide-vector-2022 here is Barack Obama] with wide-vector-2022. [[User:Anarchyte|Anarchyte]] ([[User talk:Anarchyte|talk]]) 13:25, 13 July 2022 (UTC)
::This &quot;wide-vector-2022&quot; version should be the default IMO. [[User:Some1|Some1]] ([[User talk:Some1|talk]]) 02:50, 17 July 2022 (UTC)
::It's definitely an improvement, but Vector 2010 is still better. I agree with @[[User:Anarchyte|Anarchyte]] - Timeless does a better job of restricting article space than Vector 2022 does. When you look at how much of the left third of the screen is blocked off from article content, Vector 2010 restricts it the least, followed by Timeless, and then finally by Vector 2022 consuming nearly an entire 1/3 of the screen. At low DPI, it's hilariously ugly, and arguably makes readability worse, not better. Vector 2022 sure would be nice though, '''if the ToC was collapsible'''! [[User:-αβοοδ|-αβοοδ]] ([[User talk:-αβοοδ|talk]]) 17:48, 29 July 2022 (UTC)
:&gt; For the past 20 years, articles have been written with the understanding that 80%+ of the screen will be for content.
:I'll just note that for the past 10 years that means you've written things that just do not work that way on mobile. :)
:&gt; A skin should not change the fundamental readability of the page. [..] In Vector 2022, it looks like the HTML was corrupted and failed to load because it continues with white for no discernable reason.
:This seems like a lot of assumptions to me personally. Do we have wider evidence for this ?
:&gt; There's no use having the perfect 50 character line if you need 100 of them all bunched up together.
:Literally every mobile user on the Barack Obama page, the majority of the readers. Screens and screens till you hit the end of the lead...  —[[User:TheDJ|Th&lt;span style=&quot;color: green&quot;&gt;e&lt;/span&gt;DJ (Not WMF)]] ([[User talk:TheDJ|talk]] • [[Special:Contributions/TheDJ|contribs]]) 20:20, 14 July 2022 (UTC)
::{{tq|I'll just note that for the past 10 years that means you've written things that just do not work that way on mobile. :)}}
:::MinervaNeue, when viewed on normal phone screens, ignores width tags. The only difference between writing for desktop screens and mobile screens is file placement. 
::{{tq|This seems like a lot of assumptions to me personally. Do we have wider evidence for this ?}}
:::I don't need to provide evidence to state my opinion. The page looks unfinished with the extra whitespace on the right hand side. If you do want more than just my opinion, CNTRL+F for &quot;whitespace&quot; on this page. 12 other posts mention it.
::{{tq|Literally every mobile user on the Barack Obama page, the majority of the readers. Screens and screens till you hit the end of the lead...}}
:::Difference is that my phone is in my hand. I'm not getting overloaded with line after line if the screen is only 15cm long. I can see a whole paragraph on at once and then scroll when necessary. [[User:Anarchyte|Anarchyte]] ([[User talk:Anarchyte|talk]]) 13:10, 15 July 2022 (UTC)

== Full-width sticky header ==

I'm fine with the text being narrow but the ui and nav bar should be full width. --[[User:Thedonquixotic|Thedonquixotic]] ([[User talk:Thedonquixotic|talk]]) 00:18, 26 May 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:Thedonquixotic|Thedonquixotic]], what do you mean by the ui and nav bar? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 17:54, 8 June 2022 (UTC)
::Not sure what is unclear here. I mean the navbar. As in the bar up at the top of the page with use account, search etc.  [[User:Thedonquixotic|Thedonquixotic]] ([[User talk:Thedonquixotic|talk]]) 19:07, 1 July 2022 (UTC)
::: OK, thanks for clarification, @[[User:Thedonquixotic|Thedonquixotic]]. Let's take a look at [[:File:Diagram showing three layout containers - sidebar closed.jpg|this image]]. This will help us make sure what we're talking about. Now, the navbar (aka the [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Header|header]]) is aligned to the workspace container, so is wider than the content container, but not as wide as the page container. The same applies to the [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Sticky Header|sticky header]]. So you believe the header should be as wide as the page container? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:54, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Consistent skin across the wikis ==

New Skin is burdening me when I switching between languages. (and I zoom when I want improve readability rather put blank space) it Should changing all language together if it is well received and appreciated. should not just some language for set a precedent. [[User:Mutyoro|Mutyoro]] ([[User talk:Mutyoro|talk]]) 19:27, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
:@[[user:Mutyoro|Mutyoro]], thank you for your comment. First, if you want to have the same skin across all wikis, you can choose one [[:ja:特別:GlobalPreferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|global preferences]]. Secondly, the way how Vector 2022 becomes the default across more and more wikis - that's a complicated issue. Week after week, we roll out small changes to Vector 2022 that are visible across all wikis. At the same time, it's much easier (both for our team and for the communities) when some communities use this skin as the default earlier, and some get it later. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:54, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Feedback regarding the new language switcher ==

Hello, I am a French person using Wikipedia in both French and English. I usually decide the language of the article depending on the topic. If it's related to France, I know the French version is going to be better. If it's a general topic, I usually select English.

However, it's been a few months that the language picker has been moved to the top of the screen when an article is display in French. And I really can't get used to it. Sure, it's easy to discover - but it's more complicated to use. Having to click twice is a regression for anyone switching language frequently. An action that used to require half a second now takes 2 seconds. If you do this about ten times every time you browse Wikipedia, it does become irritating...

I hope this feature is not shipped to other languages, and France gets the sidebar back. If you want to make this feature more discoverable, maybe you could add a shortcut but keep the sidebar. Or display a tooltip once in a while to educate newcomers. But please, keep &quot;heavy users&quot; of language switching in consideration. Thanks {{unsigned|77.148.113.166|19:54, 25 January 2022}}
: I'd state this as 'what used to take me a second (finding the right language) now takes 10':  Open language switcher, often don't see the language I want, have to search?  want to see which languages have a version, have to scroll; don't have a quick way to default present all languages by-alpha. [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 16:49, 2 May 2022 (UTC)
: I have to agree with this as another French person frequently switching languages on Wikipedia and Wiktionary. I should add, in addition to the intrinsic usability of the interface (I do agree it's a slight regression for my usage), the fact that most language editions still use the old interface (and most other sites using mediawiki, and the latter is likely to remain the case for a long time) means you don't actually get the opportunity to unlearn it. So every time I want to switch languages from a French page, I will first scroll down to the old location and waste 1s parsing the sidebar and wondering where the links are. I check out other languages almost every time I read any article and those milliseconds of irritation do add up. Anyway, I strongly think that “don't fix what ain't broke” should apply here! [[Special:Contributions/37.183.2.114|37.183.2.114]] 12:06, 8 May 2022 (UTC)

: +1 to [[User:Sj|Sj]]. --[[User:ThurnerRupert|ThurnerRupert]] ([[User talk:ThurnerRupert|talk]]) 18:58, 11 June 2022 (UTC)

Often I use the language switcher not to navigate to the article on different language, but just to look up how that article is titled in a different language. In other words, using Wikipedia's inter-language links as a sort of dictionary. By hovering over the list of languages I can gather multiple titles, see their similarity between languages. With the New Look, language switcher became less accessible, though gathering titles by hovering still works there.
Also this new dropdown-based language switcher seems either to require tricky CSS features or JavaScript. Will it make problems for simplistic browsers like w3m? [[User:Vi2|_Vi]] ([[User talk:Vi2|talk]]) 17:48, 20 May 2022 (UTC)


I find the language switcher the worst of both worlds of the two variants in the old interface. It can be annoying to scroll through 200+ languages in an idiosyncratic ordering (for example, كوردی [Kurdi in Perso-Arabic script] is filed under S for Sorani), but at least I can see them all and preview the name of the article in various target languages. With the drop-down menu in the old interface, I get the languages grouped geographically, and I can also search for a specific language, with the system recognizing many name variations. The new interface gives me a drop down menu with all 200+ languages in the same idiosyncratic order, with no geographic grouping and no ability to search for a specific language. [[User:LincMad|LincMad]] ([[User talk:LincMad|talk]]) 22:28, 25 May 2022 (UTC)


I am primarily an active user on the Japanese Wikipedia (now defaulted to vector2022) and I agree with you completely.
Why doesn't this use the blank spaces on the left and right? No need to hide buttons and functions everywhere just to make the page look hollow. As for the other features, there are so many problems with the new Vector. I definitely want the old version to remain. I will continue to use it and not the new one. --[[User:Sugarman|Sugarman]] ([[User talk:Sugarman|talk]]) 07:14, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Sugarman|Sugarman]]. The space on the right are blank only temporarily. As you can see on our [https://di-collapsible-menus.web.app/Flamingo newest prototype], on the left, there are the sidebar and the table of contents, and on the right, there are some links pulled out of the sidebar.
:As for &quot;No need to hide [...] just to make the page look hollow&quot; - on our pages, we explain why hide some links and functionalities. We ''never'' argue that we want the page to look ''hollow''. We work to make the page look intuitive and welcoming. Entry points to advanced collaboration need to be clear, and not numerous.
:Unless you are an advanced user already. We realize that advanced users may need to access specific links with one click. We encourage you to describe (some day when you decide to spend some time on it) all the problems you would like to see solved. Perhaps this may be addressed by adding/adjusting gadgets and user scripts. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:50, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Feedback on ToC functionality ==

Hello, 

I’m not sure how far you are in the development of the new table of content functionality, but I was looking at [https://en-toc.wmcloud.org/wiki/Moon this prototype] and noticed a potential problem. Here the ToC is on the side and that’s a good thing, but the ToC in the text have also been deleted and that’s not much a good thing. When there is a big infobox, the in-text ToC compensate partly or totally for it, hence the page arrangement take it into consideration for the position of the images. Now if you delete it, all the text will go up, along with the images, but the images can’t always follow, because the infobox, so the right-aligned images are going to pile under it, while the left-aligned will reduce the text to a very small column between them and the infobox. On fr:wp, infoboxes are very widely used, so deleting the in-text ToC is going to break the page layout of most articles (and rather probably upset the community). So I’d suggest that, whatever you do with the ToC, to not delete the in-text ToC until there is also a functionality to move the infobox outside the text too (that would be great by the way, as infoboxes always cause difficulties with page layout). --[[User:Runi Gerardsen|Runi Gerardsen]] ([[User talk:Runi Gerardsen|talk]]) 09:30, 7 February 2022 (UTC)
:I would like to add myself as having this same concern about images. At present, image placement in many articles was determined by this factor of the TOC being inline, sometimes offsetting the issues of long infoboxes and allowing the first image in the first section to be right-justified (like anyone with any experience in professional publishing, I ''really'' hate left-justified lead images as they break up the flow of the text by interposing themselves between heds and text. Similarly, I try to maintain alternation in the justification of images since that mirrors the sweep of our vision and makes text with images easier to read (but of course you don't do this when it creates other layout issues).&lt;p&gt;''When'' this is deployed, a lot of articles are going to suddenly have image placement issues at the top that didn't previously. And this will probably make a lot of people ''very angry''.&lt;p&gt;I can see the need for the sticky TOC but I think it would still be better as something that could be toggled there from its current position while reading depending on how the user prefers it in an individual article. [[User:Daniel Case|Daniel Case]] ([[User talk:Daniel Case|talk]]) 05:50, 29 April 2022 (UTC)
::What if we kept both the inline/in-text ToC ''and'' the sticky/sidebar ToC, but only display the latter when the user's scrolled past the former? A user preference could be added that forces the latter to always (or never) be displayed. I agree that the situation with images is a &lt;abbr title=&quot;Pain In The Frigging Arse&quot;&gt;PITFA&lt;/abbr&gt;, but I really don't want to give up the sticky ToC either… [[User:OmenBreeze|OmenBreeze]] ([[User talk:OmenBreeze|talk]]) 00:43, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

I'm not sure, but until I manually switched back to &quot;Vector legacy (2010)&quot;, then again to &quot;Vector (2022)&quot;, ToC section was absent completely (neither new-style nor old-style). Also maybe, like with the language switcher, there should be [temporary] notice about ToC having moved to the left where it was previously? [[User:Vi2|_Vi]] ([[User talk:Vi2|talk]]) 17:57, 20 May 2022 (UTC)

== Left margin menu pushes down content ==

I normally use Monobook, but happened to get into the new Vector. Odd experience. The search box was absent and I had to scroll down for the content. I now see that you are supposed to click the magnifying glass to get the search box. OK. But the scrolling?

It seems the new Vector tries to guarantee wide enough space for the content. Perhaps that's what people surfing with maximised windows expect, but if you have a narrower window, is that really optimal? To get the left margin menu to the left of the content, I need a window some 1000 px wide. This &quot;minimum&quot; width gives me lines of about 100 characters, while I've heard reading is easiest at 47–72 or something like that. I like to have several windows open in parallel, and a narrower windows makes them fit better.

Anyway, if one's browser window is narrow, for whatever reason, does the empty space to the right of the margin menu really give the best possible experience? Is the 100 char width something that needs to be guaranteed for those planning layout of individual articles? (This experience is with Firefox 91.7.0esr on Debian.)

–[[User:LPfi|LPfi]] ([[User talk:LPfi|talk]]) 20:07, 17 March 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:LPfi|LPfi]], since your comment, we've introduced the new [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Table of contents|table of contents]], the [[phab:T303484|grid system]], and we've improved some issues with margins. What do you experience now? Have the issues you described changed?
:&quot;I had to scroll down for the content.&quot; - do you still need to do that? if yes, what do you see that you need to scroll past? It's the sidebar (the left menu) taking the full width, isn't it?
:Generally, we try to accommodate Vector 2022 for use cases such as yours. However, with screens narrower than ~1000px, we enter the territory of &quot;should V22 be responsive&quot; which is an area of controversies. We've been receiving contradicting voices, and it'd be a good topic for a separate community discussion. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 00:55, 5 August 2022 (UTC)

== The &quot;sticky table of contents&quot; is the worst among all the bad changes ==

I am sorry, but this sticky table of contents is such an eyesore, its sole addition might make me quit reading Wikipedia altogether. I'm not exaggerating, a similar update to Liquipedia made me want to avoid that project. It's more than an annoying waste of screen space - it also makes the different parts of the table of contents bold depending on where in the article my screen is, and thus it triggers my OCD, and it simply irritates me. I hate these moving parts in forced mobile designs.

&gt; &quot;The results of our 3rd prototype testing showed an overwhelming support for the proposed table of contents.&quot;

Have they? I don't see any discussion here.

&gt; &quot;The new table of contents will be persistent - users will have access to it at all times. It will also make it easier to understand the context of the page.&quot;

Are the TikTok memes reality? Excuse me, but I don't randomly forget what page or section I'm reading, thus I don't need a sticky title on my screen at all times.

&gt; &quot;In addition to that, it will be possible to navigate to different parts of the page without having to scroll all the way back to the top.&quot;

How is that &quot;need&quot; in any way difficult? It's one button on the keyboard - called ''Home''. Or you hold the slider on the right and jerk it up in a millisecond. But I suspect I know where &quot;scrolling&quot; is an issue - on mobile phones. This entire update in an exercise in transitioning a fine desktop UI from the 2000s which I had an honour to fall in love with in the 2010s to the non-constructive, downgraded, annoying and irritating experience of mobile phones.

Thankfully, not all projects choose to go this way. For an example of a new encyclopaedia with a traditional design, see the immensely popular Korean Namu Wiki. [[User:Adûnâi|Adûnâi]] ([[User talk:Adûnâi|talk]]) 12:53, 10 April 2022 (UTC)

:100% agree. [[User:Football Lab|Football Lab]] ([[User talk:Football Lab|talk]]) 09:12, 26 June 2022 (UTC)

== I hate the new TOC ==

I was directed here from [[phab:T273473]].&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;That left-of-the-article TOC is a horrible nightmare. I absolutely hate it. I would seriously avoid any website that forced it upon me. Can't scroll it out of sight, can't collapse it, can't disable it, takes up too much space, I hate it I hate it I hate it. This was the reason I switched back to Vector classic on beta cluster. (and if Vector classic gets it too I'll switch to Monobook, Timeless or just murder it with a userscript) I'm not much of a fan of Vector 2022 (but it's not a lost cause, just needs work), but this TOC pushed me over the edge.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;As a personal note: I rarely use the existing TOC. But I can scroll it out of sight so it doesn't bother me. If the TOC went completely missing tomorrow, I wouldn't miss it. Having this big, (to me) useless thing that contrasts with the main content (it's much darker) permanently in my field of vision greatly annoys me. And because of the fixed position, my banner blindness fails to kick in. This results in pure hatred for something that, on the face it, could seem innocuous. &lt;span id=&quot;Alexis_Jazz:1650385558357:TalkBWLCLNReading/Web/Desktop_Improvements&quot; class=&quot;BawlCmt&quot;&gt;[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]] ([[User talk:Alexis Jazz|talk]]) 16:25, 19 April 2022 (UTC)&lt;/span&gt;
:I was not &quot;directed&quot; anywhere, I blundered onto here after finally finding information about this new skin. And let me be clear, APART from the ridiculous handling of the TOC, the new skin is great, precisely BECAUSE, before the TOC-debacle, this skin allowed me to get more of the article on the screen, and allowed me to hide the standard list of menu choices that I only need 0.something % of the time. 
 
:So, please, Please, PLEASE make that TOC hideable! It's perhaps (!) a great default for newbies, but it's a bloody nuisance for us who usually never use the TOC, and if we do, we know where to find it! [[User:Autokefal Dialytiker|Autokefal Dialytiker]] ([[User talk:Autokefal Dialytiker|talk]]) 21:49, 25 April 2022 (UTC)
::I totally agree. [[Special:Contributions/185.53.157.151|185.53.157.151]] 08:13, 26 April 2022 (UTC)
::@[[User:Autokefal Dialytiker|Autokefal Dialytiker]], right, it's not that easy to get here. We'll put link to the project page on the list of available skins in preferences. The task is documented as [[phab:T307113|T307113]]. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 15:25, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
:Hey @[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]] - thanks for talking to us. It’s good to hear you were using Vector 2022. I hope that you will switch back to it. In terms of the table of contents, you raise good points. A lot has been happening since you wrote your comment, so my answer is longer than it would have been last week.
:* The first version of the design was based on the feedback we got on our previous prototypes from readers and editors (see [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Repository/Sticky Header and Table of Contents User Testing#toc-intro|in-person reader &amp; editor testing]] and [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Third prototype testing|on-wiki community testing]]).
:* That said, we have not yet made the design final. We are working on different ideas for the visual design of the entire site. We'll make the main content of the page be the primary focus of attention, even when other navigational elements (such as the ToC) are present. If you’re interested in following along with that work, most of it will be tracked on [[phab:T301780|T301780]] and in subtasks of that ticket.
:* We are also considering the way the ToC will display at smaller resolutions ([[phab:T306904|T306904]], [[phab:T306660|T306660]]) and looking into some options for collapsing it that could work for wider screens as well.
:* As you can see, people like you who have chosen Vector 2022 individually share a lot of feedback with us now. [[phab:T307004|T307004]], [[phab:T306562|T306562]] are some examples on things we are or will be working on.
:* In the meantime, we will be A/B testing the ToC on the pilot wikis. Our hypothesis is that the ToC will decrease the amount that people have to scroll to the top of the page to switch to a different section. The design might also vary once we have the results of the test.
:* Since these changes might take a little while to reach the beta cluster, we would also encourage technically-skilled folks to set up a script or gadget to make a temporary solution.
:And... yeah, [[Newsletter:Desktop Improvements updates|subscribe to our newsletter]], join our office hours ([[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Updates/Talk to Web|tomorrow]] or [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Participate|later]]) and talk to us more. Thank you! [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 15:23, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
::[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk]], here's another thought: [[wikt:reverse]]. It's not a long page, but that TOC is so bloody huge a full HD display isn't enough to read ''any'' of the actual page content without scrolling. &lt;span id=&quot;Alexis_Jazz:1651369145562:TalkBWLCLNReading/Web/Desktop_Improvements&quot; class=&quot;BawlCmt&quot;&gt;[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]] ([[User talk:Alexis Jazz|talk]]) 01:39, 1 May 2022 (UTC)&lt;/span&gt;
:::Right, right. Let's just take a look at [[:pl:Gramatyka języka fińskiego]]. I mean, this is an edge case, and as such, it's not that critical. From what I know, all TOC sections aren't uncollapsed by default, and you need to make an effort to see the full TOC. Is this your experience, too, @[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]]? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:45, 5 May 2022 (UTC)
::::[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk]], sorry for being possibly unclear. It was just a thought about the classic inline TOC which is disproportionally huge on Wiktionary, so it's something to think about when designing a new TOC. On the Gramatyka page on plwiki you at least get the intro without scrolling and the page actually ''is'' very long, so it's understandable the TOC also gets big. I've taken a look at the CSS (should have done that sooner) and simply disabling &quot;position:sticky&quot; stops the new TOC from being so infuriating. IMHO that should be the default, or at the very least, proper research should be done into this. Not only to determine by majority vote what users prefer (I wouldn't be surprised if sticky wins a binary majority vote) but also how crazy either option can drive users who ''don't'' like it. Pleasing a majority is no good if it causes a minority to be greatly aggravated. While I personally can get around it using technical means, that isn't true for most people. I'll also note that the experience on devices that are primarily controlled with a touchscreen may very well be different. With a keyboard, scrolling back up to the TOC is nearly no effort. Just press &quot;home&quot; or hold &quot;page up&quot;. With a touchscreen, not so much, so I can see why sticky might have a greater appeal there. &lt;span id=&quot;Alexis_Jazz:1651821096574:TalkBWLCLNReading/Web/Desktop_Improvements&quot; class=&quot;BawlCmt&quot;&gt;[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]] ([[User talk:Alexis Jazz|talk]]) 07:11, 6 May 2022 (UTC)&lt;/span&gt;
:::::What TOC? I don't get any such thing. [[User:Betaneptune|Betaneptune]] ([[User talk:Betaneptune|talk]]) 17:36, 25 May 2022 (UTC)
::1000px still seems like not enough for hiding the ToC. e.g. 1280 width on a rather large 16:10 projector screen and it is cumbersome and distracting. The floating option to hide it should definitely be implemented (closer to the left edge of the screen, hiding the TOC should make the content padding completely symmetrical left/right!) as that'd actually make Vector 2022 usable. Having it automatically (temporarily) pop out on mouse over would be quite nice, with a click to make it &quot;stick&quot; until clicked again, like a hamburger button you can hover over. For the record, I use Vector 2010 on smaller displays regardless of DPI, as well as high DPI larger screens, and Monobook on everything else. [[User:-αβοοδ|-αβοοδ]] ([[User talk:-αβοοδ|talk]]) 18:05, 29 July 2022 (UTC)
:100% agree. [[User:Football Lab|Football Lab]] ([[User talk:Football Lab|talk]]) 09:14, 26 June 2022 (UTC)

== Watchlist icon ==

[[User:Schierbecker|Schierbecker]] [[Topic:Wu23w3nlomndp5f1|wrote]]:
&lt;blockquote&gt;The watchlist icon too closely resembles a hamburger menu button. I can see many clicking the button thinking it is a dropdown menu. Some may lose unsaved edits after clicking it.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

I completely agree, but not really because it resembles a hamburger button but because it's sandwiched (no pun intended!) between dynamic menus. If there was the dropdown arrow next to the interlangs, alerts and notices buttons just like the personal menu, it would communicate more clearly that the watchlist button is a simple link and not a menu. [[User:Nardog|Nardog]] ([[User talk:Nardog|talk]]) 02:38, 21 April 2022 (UTC)

:Thanks for this comment, @[[User:Nardog|Nardog]]. We'll think how we could improve this. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:55, 27 April 2022 (UTC)
::Information on the design process that led to the current icon can be found here:
::https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T297979
::Nardog is already involved in that task. It's probably best to add this feedback there, as not all designers are reviewing this talk page. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 17:01, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== &quot;Beginning&quot; is confusing ==

More feedback: when I was at [[w:Gotcha journalism]] just now, I became confused because there appeared to be a section titled &quot;beginning&quot;, which I assumed covered the early history of the term. It took me a minute to figure out that that wasn't referring to a section but rather a way to scroll to the top of the page. Many other articles are going to have a similar problem, since we often begin with history sections that might reasonably be titled &quot;Beginning&quot; for early history. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 22:42, 27 April 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:Sdkb|Sdkb]] - good catch! This is something we discussed quite a bit internally in order to finally settle on beginning, although I agree that it's still imperfect.  Previously we were using &quot;introduction&quot;.  The issue there was that many articles have &quot;introduction&quot; as the name of their first section, causing duplication.  Other options we were considering were location-based (back to top, beginning of page, etc).  We are welcome to ideas on how to make this clearer.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 09:05, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
::The name used by wikipedians? ''Lead section'' in English, ''résumé introductif'' in French, etc ([[d:Q10966628|Q10966628]]) [[User:Pyb|Pyb]] ([[User talk:Pyb|talk]]) 11:07, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
:::On Translatewiki.net I found &quot;Début&quot; for fr.wiki and &quot;Inizio&quot; for it.wiki (on it.wiki we use also &quot;Incipit&quot; or &quot;Introduzione&quot;, see [[phab:T306990]]). [[User:Patafisik|Patafisik]] ([[User talk:Patafisik|talk]]) 15:09, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
::::@[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]], did you consider different design approaches in addition to different names? If the word had been accompanied by something like [[File:Font Awesome 5 solid caret-up.svg|16px]], it might have been a lot clearer. I also think there's some benefit to matching the terminology we already use as editors (&quot;lead section&quot; or &quot;introduction&quot;), since that makes it easier for newcomers. The Wikipedia articles that currently have &quot;Introduction&quot; as their first named section should not—they should be tagged with [[w:Template:Overview section]]. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 20:16, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
:::::&lt;small&gt;Bumping @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]]. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 17:16, 6 July 2022 (UTC)&lt;/small&gt;
::::::Just leaving a note here that we're still watching this conversation and considering different options, but haven't made a decision yet.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 13:58, 11 July 2022 (UTC)
::I think using the article title would make the most sense, as the title is the uppermost heading in the article. That way the header that the reader arrives at always matches the one they've clicked on. (I'm sure &quot;Beginning&quot; is better than &quot;Introduction,&quot; but it's not unheard of as a section title either: e.g. [[w:Creolization|Creolization]], [[w:Ashikaga shogunate|Ashikaga shogunate]], [[w:History of Carthage|History of Carthage]]. Is there any way to determine how often it's used?) [[User:Arms &amp;#38; Hearts|Arms &amp;#38; Hearts]] ([[User talk:Arms &amp;#38; Hearts|talk]]) 19:35, 29 May 2022 (UTC)

I think &quot;Top&quot; would be less confusing and generally make more sense as that seems to be the common English term for the top of the page. [[Special:Contributions/132.170.199.112|132.170.199.112]] 19:32, 22 June 2022 (UTC)

== Table of contents below sidebar just doesn't work ==

On a broader note than the two pieces of feedback above, I have to say that my experience so far with the new table of contents has been really frustrating. As an editor, I use lots of the links in the left sidebar quite frequently, so I don't want to collapse it (and even if I did, the way it persists in whatever state you leave it in means that every time I used it it'd return). But preserving the left sidebar forces the table of contents below it, which is just awful. The number one time I want to use the ToC is when I first navigate to an article, and I either want to jump to a specific section or just to see what sections it has to get an overview. Forcing me to scroll to get to that information is extremely annoying, and if it's kept in the final version, I predict the outcry will be intense. You could resolve this either by retaining the old style ToC alongside the new (which would also solve the [[w:MOS:SANDWICH|sandwiching]] concerns I've previously raised) or by moving the ToC above the left sidebar. From your previews, I know you've been working on moving some stuff around and introducing pinning, so I hope this will be resolved in future iterations. But the initial version being introduced here is clearly not ready yet. Best, &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 22:53, 27 April 2022 (UTC)
: For me it seems the table of contents and the sidebar seems to be two different things. On Wikipedia, I collapsed the sidebar and the table of contents still remain. [[User:Tenryuu|Tenryuu]] ([[User talk:Tenryuu|talk]]) 03:09, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
::I want ToC collapsed too. But there is no way to do it. It uses almost 1/3 of my screen and makes reading very difficult.- [[User:Nizil Shah|Nizil Shah]] ([[User talk:Nizil Shah|talk]]) 05:32, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
:::Same here. 14&quot; Screen, collapsed sidebar menu, open only when needed. With the new TOC I cannot collapse the sidebar, it's just a toggle between navbar and TOC. I appreciate the effort and that it's a first attempt, but it definitely should be optional. And yes, I was involved in feedbacks and testing earlier. Regards [[User:Elya|Elya]] ([[User talk:Elya|talk]]) 14:24, 29 April 2022 (UTC)

:::: +1, the TOC should be accessible from the top of the page, and collapsible (vertically; also horiz if it is making the sidebar too wide - many pages have section heads that are quite long).  [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 17:35, 2 May 2022 (UTC)
:::::@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] and @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]], neither of you have replied here. This is a major concern, and I predict that if it is not addressed, it may single-handedly prevent the community from being willing to accept New Vector. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 17:14, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
::::::Hi @[[User:Sdkb|Sdkb]] - thanks for the ping!  Currently, we're working on making the ToC collapsible, especially on narrow screens ([[phab:T306660]]).  Collapsing it would allow for access further up in the page, but won't completely solve the issue you're describing.  To make using both the sidebar and the table of contents a bit easier, we are planning two things.  For logged-out users, we plan on collapsing the sidebar by default so that the table of contents will be shown further up in the page.  We are also planning on separating the tools related to pages in a separate menu.  This will significantly shorten the space for the sidebar, and create a clear definition between which tool acts on the page as a whole, and which one acts only on the page itself.  In this example, this puts the ToC above the end of the introduction section, which is higher than the previous ToC location (admittedly, this will not be the case for all articles).  
::::::[[File:Prototype_of_table_of_contents_and_tools_menu_for_desktop_Wikipedia.png|thumb|Prototype of table of contents and tools menu for desktop Wikipedia]]
::::::[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 14:07, 11 July 2022 (UTC)
:::::::Thanks for the reply, @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]]! Moving the tools elsewhere (ideally to a Twinkle-like menu) is something I certainly support and have been trying to set up since [[w:WP:SIDEBAR20|the 2020 revamp]], and it would help with this. Your screenshot appears to be from a standard resolution display rather than a widescreen display, so I can't tell whether it's going to help enough to ensure that the ToC will always be visible on a normal monitor with neither it nor the main menu collapsed. Getting to a point where that's the case will be essential for getting community consensus.
:::::::Is there a reason you don't seem to be considering placing the ToC above the main menu? &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 23:49, 13 July 2022 (UTC)

== About Google Docs and Zoom ==

{{Ping|SGrabarczuk (WMF)}} Thank you for the invitation I received for tomorrow's videcall since I was an interface admin and a developer! but sadly I cannot participate since I don't use Google Docs or Zoom for security reasons (partially related: [https://www.zdnet.com/article/us-senate-german-government-tell-staff-not-to-use-zoom/] [https://www.gnu.org/proprietary/malware-google.html]).

I don't know if it could be useful but maybe in the future you may consider to land the doc on the wiki itself, or using Etherpad [https://etherpad.wikimedia.org/] when realtime is needed.

To drop Zoom, maybe I can propose Jitsi Meeting [https://meet.jit.si/] that is gratis and libre and supports streaming on social network to support large audience. (Also [[Wikimedia Meet]] deserves a try and some feedback). [[User:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio Bozzolan]] ([[User talk:Valerio Bozzolan|talk]]) 15:38, 28 April 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio Bozzolan]]. I understand your concerns and thank you for the language you use. I do appreciate that. As you may have realized, it isn't without a reason why we use these particular tools/platforms.
:# Google Docs are used by the Foundation as the default tool for making internal notes and docs. We might, for the purposes of the office hours, replace it with Etherpad. There's a problem with the translations, though. Asking translators to update just one word, and waiting until they've done that, could be troublesome. This is why I can only commit to replace this if we make more changes to the announcement. (By the way, the announcement is [[Template:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Office hours announcement|fully standardized]] and translated into 16 languages, some of which use declination or are not written in the Latin script.)
:# We need our office hours to be technically (platform-wise) predictable. Although Jitsi is open source and Zoom is not, the latter is more effective. It has been widely used for online meetings in the movement. It's been used by the WMF for office hours with the CEO, Maryana; it's been used by affiliates. There are hundreds of Wikimedians who at least once have participated in a Wikimedia meeting on Zoom. We know how to provide live translations there. Jitsi, on the other hand, is less popular, and we'd have to learn how to support live translations, including more trainings organized specifically for our meetings.
:# We may consider having office hours on IRC. Frankly, I have a feeling that since the migration from Freenode, IRC has been more and more marginalized, but we could give it a try.
:I'm curious what other Wikimedians watching this page think. Add your comments! [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:15, 5 May 2022 (UTC)
::Just asking for an understanding that Google Form and Zoom are a bug, not a feature, to participate in a Wikimedia project. A bug that deserves a long-term fix. [[User:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio Bozzolan]] ([[User talk:Valerio Bozzolan|talk]]) 15:57, 7 May 2022 (UTC)
::: I appreciate these are standard across parts of the Foundation. And agree w/ [[user:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio]] this is a bug, not a feature.  Perhaps it's time to revisit this across the org. :)  We should be using tools that can be constantly used and deployed by communities for events, workshops, office hours, talks without sending traffic through commercial servers. 
::: ''Text'': Google makes some very wiki-spirited tools (they did absorb JotSpot back in 2006) so it's stayed around for a while. But we simply must stop using it as a crutch that keeps us from using and being delighted by notetaking on our own platform. Our collaborative platform for drafting and discussing documents. Our versioned, searchable platform.
::: ''Video'': I too have to use Zoom sometime, but I'm always surprised and a bit dismayed when a Wikimedia meeting uses it! Jitsi is stable, widely used + repackaged, easily modded and forked, and we host a [https://meet.wmcloud.org/ lovely instance] on the WM cloud. [We also regularly use BigBlueButton for larger audiences.] It makes it easy to name a persistent rooms, embed it it in other places or tools (see Jitsi-as-a-service + [[w:Brave Talk|Brave Talk]] these days), &amp;c. We should be thinking about how to better use video streams in our projects, and using this framework as we do so.  [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 12:54, 14 May 2022 (UTC)
::::Thanks @[[User:Sj|Sj]] and @[[User:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio Bozzolan]].
::::# First of all, I really hear what you're saying. Perhaps you're right, Google and Zoom may be bugs - it's definitely not up to me to decide. &quot;Perhaps it's time to revisit this across the org. :)&quot; - I'm grateful that you specifically used the words &quot;across the org&quot;. That's way wider than just Olga and me (people who organize ''our'' office hours), or [[m:Community Relations Specialists|Community Relations]] (&quot;technical liaisons&quot; so to speak), or [[m:Movement Communications|Movement Communications]] alone. If it's about ''the standard'', then it needs a broad agreement.
::::# @SJ, do Jitsi or any open-source alternatives provide the speech-to-text functionality and parallel voice tracks for live translators (interpreters)? I'm asking because each time we have a meeting, there are people who need the speech-to-text functionality . Unfortunately, we haven't been able to provide the live translation support yet. We're still working on it, and it seems we may have found a solution.
::::[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 15:55, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
::::: [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk]]: 
:::::: 1. We ''should'' change the standard [though there seem to be many even within one org!], but I only mentioned that to suggest that none are set in stone. :)  As this thread is about these particular discussions, I hope we can try a different standard for these sessions, or understand what prevents such a change.  If it is purely a matter of accessibility features, that would make a phabulous ticket even if it is not yet known who could set them up.   
:::::: 2. Yes they do! Other collaborative orgs w/ similar issues of language equity use jitsi regularly. There are solutions or workarounds for both. [also, to the point of &quot;supporting essential infrastructure for free knowledge&quot;, our engagement would certainly help make them better for all.]   
::::: '''speech to text''': Google Voice integration seems to be there, and a number of open-source s2t services that are not quite comparable. You can see the range of Summer of Code [https://jitsi.org/gsoc/s2t/ projects] + community submissions scratching their own itches in the [https://github.com/jitsi/jigasi/issues/157 jigasi repo]. 
::::: '''remote simultaneous interpretation''': the most recent solution (for a single language, letting you tune in or out of the raw audio and into a translator's audio channel) is use by [https://i.meet.mayfirst.org May First] (which we should [https://mayfirst.coop/en/ work more closely with] on choosing technology stacks, frankly) and is maintained [https://gitlab.com/mfmt/jsi here].  There are improvements, and pushes to integrate into jitsi core, both of which could be facilitated by small technical bounties or large expressions of interest [like Wikimedia indicating this is a crucial feature for us]. [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 02:37, 7 July 2022 (UTC)

::@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]], I will not participate in any forum that is not public. Why the wmf foundation wants to share information via Zoom, a for-profit corporation which provides no guarantee of privacy, is anyone's guess. We have been using wiki-code for discussion since 2001, why this change?
::I apologize if you find my message above irrespecutful, but this represents the views of many. [[User:Ottawahitech|Ottawahitech]] ([[User talk:Ottawahitech|talk]]) 18:26, 13 June 2022 (UTC)
:::@[[User:Ottawahitech|Ottawahitech]], above, you can find explanations on why we (the Web team) are using Zoom now. Are you also asking why we have any voice online meetings in general? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 15:57, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Instant jumping vs. animated scrolling for table of contents ==

As you're polishing up the table of contents, one thing it'd be nice to consider is the behavior when you click on a section in it. Currently, it instantly jumps to that section, but I think it'd be better if it instead did a very quick scroll (maybe a quarter of a second). This would help readers to more easily understand what's happening when they click the link, and to get a better intuitive sense of what the article contains by seeing it flash by. Would that be possible? &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 02:37, 30 April 2022 (UTC)

:&lt;small&gt;Bumping @[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] and @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]]. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 17:12, 6 July 2022 (UTC)&lt;/small&gt;

== Trouble With Zooming In ==

My vision is poor so I usually zoom to 200% on my browser and it is no problem. With the new skin that same magnification causes the sidebar to take up the top of my screen and I can't see the title of the article and know what page I'm on without scrolling.

== Wikistories ==

Will Vector 2022 be influenced by [[Wikistories]]? --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 10:09, 6 June 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]], what do you mean by influenced? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:18, 14 June 2022 (UTC)
::@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]]: If Vector 2022 will be adapted for (compatible from a design perspective with) Wikistories. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 19:06, 15 June 2022 (UTC)
:::@[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]], definitely. All the projects that currently are being built are compatible with or neutral to Vector 2022. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:47, 30 June 2022 (UTC)

== Language switcher opt-out ==

The new language picker is a deal breaker for me as an active editor who is working with a very diverse array of topics on Wikipedia. I write about [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Māori_phonology Māori language], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Тэруха Japanese geisha], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Литература_Тайваня Taiwanese literature], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Эскимосская_кухня Inuit cuisine], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Парагвайская_арфа Paraguayan instruments], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Мишон Vietnamese temples], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Кабилия Algerian regions], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Берберская_кухня Berber cuisine], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Кайна_(профессия) Arabic professions]. I write [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sister_exchange articles] that compare dozens of cultures [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Грамматическое_число or languages].

I need a way to hover over the list of languages to see the name of the page in a different random language (which can be anything from Korean to Twi). I need to be able to open 50 language editions very quickly to estimate if any of them have good illustrations or any new literature on the topic that I am working on. I often read the same article in 4 languages simply because I can read in a lot of languages and I am wondering which language edition has the best article. The workflow with the new language picker is tremendously stunted.

The main idea of the new interface seems to be making the page width more narrow. With that, there is a lot of free space at the sides, and I would like to propose putting a full list of languages there, as an option. [[User:Le Loy|Le Loy]] ([[User talk:Le Loy|talk]]) 00:29, 13 June 2022 (UTC)
: Yes, I agree, the decision taken now does not help advanced editors work in projects, but hinders them. I think we need to make a separate setting for the &quot;always open&quot; list. The problems of this list have still existed since sorting was removed. [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 15:43, 14 June 2022 (UTC)

:{{support}}--[[User:Wdpp|Wdpp]] ([[User talk:Wdpp|talk]]) 11:47, 3 July 2022 (UTC)

== Old version ==

:''Moved from [[Topic:Wxcz2an2ck4s4cdy]]''
After these changes are made, can I still use the old settings? [[user:Ilovemydoodle|Ilovemydoodle]] ([[user talk: Ilovemydoodle|talk]]) 09:26, 13 June 2022 (UTC)
: Yes [[user:Ilovemydoodle|Ilovemydoodle]], legacy Vector will be available and you will be able to use it as your skin. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 12:24, 14 June 2022 (UTC)
::{{ping|SGrabarczuk (WMF)}} Why does have to be called “legacy”? legacy implies that something is outdated, inferior, no longer supported, none of which apply to Vector &quot;legacy&quot;. Maybe instead, you could call it &quot;advanced&quot;, &quot;expert&quot;, or &quot;classic&quot;. – [[User:Ilovemydoodle2|Ilovemydoodle2]] ([[User talk:Ilovemydoodle2|talk]]) 17:48, 20 July 2022 (UTC)
:::@[[User:Ilovemydoodle2|Ilovemydoodle2]], the motivation is purely technical. This is because it's &quot;frozen&quot;. The Wikimedia Foundation will not develop it - there will be no actively built version of Vector parallel to Vector 2022. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 20:46, 20 July 2022 (UTC)

== Irish language Wikipedia and Vector 2022 ==

[[File:Irish Wikipedia random article - Vector 2022.png|thumb|ga.wp random article screencap - Vector 2022]]
[[File:Irish Wikipedia random article - Vector old.png|thumb|ga.wp random article screencap - current Vector]]

Hi there. I'm [[w:ga:User:Alison]] - admin and bureaucrat on the Irish language Wikipedia. I'd be remiss in not providing feedback, I think, so here goes.

* I see other folks pointing out the massive amount of whitespace / padding in the left side navbar which is squeezing out the actual article text on the right. On our wiki, it really seems significant. IMO, article is all, and we seem to be sacrificing actual content real-estate for ... what, exactly? Yes, it looks 'less cluttered', but there's actually less content - especially for those of us who both browse ''and'' edit on laptop screens.

* On the top tab section (which is otherwise quite nice), you can see the ''Plé'' (Talk) and ''Léigh'' (Read) are scrunched together with no separation. I18n bug, maybe?

* The main image and title have lost their localization and now show &quot;Wikipedia&quot; instead of &quot;Vicipéid&quot; - this could just be an image localization / config issue. Could someone point me in the right direction, maybe? I did the original, later-font localization for our wiki, some years back, so happy to dip in and fix :)

Le gach dea-ghuí (best regards),

-- Allie [[User:Alison|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FF823D;font-family: comic sans ms&quot;&gt;'''A&lt;font color= &quot;#FF7C0A&quot;&gt;l&lt;font color= &quot;#FFB550&quot;&gt;is&lt;/font&gt;o&lt;/font&gt;n'''&lt;/span&gt;]] &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Alison|❤]]&lt;/sup&gt; 16:17, 22 June 2022 (UTC)

:multilingual Wikipedians: during redesigh include current non-english desighs for evaluation, including spanish, french and german. They have good ideas and bad ideas... [[User:0mtwb9gd5wx|0mtwb9gd5wx]] ([[User talk:0mtwb9gd5wx|talk]]) 01:10, 23 June 2022 (UTC)
: The &quot;PléLéigh&quot; issue looks like it's [[phab:T309223|T309223]], a known issue. Until it is fixed in MediaWiki, try updating your browser(s) – the issue occurs if your browser doesn't support a certain relatively new feature. [[User:Rummskartoffel|Rummskartoffel]] ([[User talk:Rummskartoffel|talk]]) 21:59, 23 June 2022 (UTC)
::Hey there! Regarding logos https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T244486 is what you are looking for - basically every logo needs to be recreated. You can request one on that ticket to be prioritized higher or find information about creating new ones.
::Regarding sidebar whitespace I am not sure I understand. The extra padding is for the table of contents underneath the sidebar. You say it's squeezing article text on the right but in your screenshots the Vector 2022 screenshot shows more of the article text. I can see the description section heading for example.
::I can confirm the PléLéigh issue is a bug and will hopefully be fixed soon.
::Hope this is helpful. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 01:02, 1 July 2022 (UTC)

== wordmark no longer appears after upgrading to MediaWiki 1.38.1, style bugs ==

After upgrading to MediaWiki 1.38.1 from 1.36.1, the wordmark no longer appears next to the icon in the upper left.  If the window is wide enough, the 150px space for the wordmark is reserved but is empty.  When you make the window wider past a certain width, the coloring behind the sidebar also vanishes. This happens with Vector 2010 in both legacy and non-legacy mode and in Vector 2022.  The wordmark image is an svg that has not moved and still has correct permissions [[User:Queernix1028|Queernix1028]] ([[User talk:Queernix1028|talk]]) 19:43, 22 June 2022 (UTC)

:What is the value of wgLogos in your LocalSettings.php? [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:22, 29 June 2022 (UTC)
 $wgLogos = [
         'icon' =&gt; &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/arcc/logo.svg&quot;,
         '1x' =&gt; &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/arcc/logo.png&quot;,
         'wordmark' =&gt; [
                 'src' =&gt; &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/arcc/wordmark.png&quot;,
                 '1x'  =&gt; &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/arcc/wordmark.svg&quot;,
                 'width' =&gt; 150,
         ],
 ];
::It previously worked with wordmark src set to the svg file, but now neither that configuration nor the one above work. [[User:Queernix1028|Queernix1028]] ([[User talk:Queernix1028|talk]]) 14:32, 29 June 2022 (UTC)

:I believe you need to set a height on the wordmark. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 00:55, 1 July 2022 (UTC)

== Language links on Wikidata are right at the bottom of the page ==

I've enabled the new theme (Vector 2022) globally on all wikis. I generally like the new interface. However when I am on wikidata, previously the interlanguage links were on the right. (Where an infobox usually goes on a wikipedia page) Now they are right at the bottom of the page! Some wikidata pages are massive, and having to scroll all the way down to the bottom of the screen to do the thing I do most frequently on wikidata (add new language links) is a real pain. Please can you move the language links on wikidata back to the top (top right) of the page? - [[User:Rooiratel|Rooiratel]] ([[User talk:Rooiratel|talk]]) 14:25, 23 June 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Rooiratel|Rooiratel]]. Thanks for your opinion. Are you talking about the desktop view? What's the resolution of your screen? I've tried to narrow my window down and change its width, and it seems that the width thresholds when the interwiki links go from the bottom to the right are the same. Is there any setting you use that may make your experience different? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:50, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
::Hi {{ping|SGrabarczuk (WMF)}} this is for the desktop view. I am seeing this behaviour on my 1080p laptop screen and my 1440p desktop screen. I haven't used the mobile view, so can't comment on that. - [[User:Rooiratel|Rooiratel]] ([[User talk:Rooiratel|talk]]) 06:32, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== Infobox element alignment is mangled in mobile view ==

Maybe I'm doing something wrong, but when I click on &quot;Mobile view&quot; with Vector 2022, many of the infobox elements are misaligned. Many elements that should be centered are left-aligned, and many elements that should be left-aligned are centered. At least that's what it looks like for me in Chrome for Mac OS at [https://en.m.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Russian_Soviet_Federative_Socialist_Republic&amp;useskin=vector-2022 this page]. [[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] ([[User talk:Jonesey95|talk]]) 02:57, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

:Wow, that looks odd. Thanks @[[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] for reporting this. Right now, I only have one question - why do you use the mobile view and Vector 2022 mixed together? Minerva is dedicated for mobile, and Vector 2022 is dedicated for desktop. Having these two at the same time is bold and original :) [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:08, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
::I was just doing some very beginner-level QA testing. Editors do all sorts of ridiculous things, so I try to do some QA testing by doing ridiculous things. If you want editors to use Vector 2022 for desktop-only and Minerva for mobile-only, then make the &quot;Mobile view&quot;/&quot;Desktop view&quot; link at the bottom of the screen switch between the skins. Meanwhile, I'll be over here in legacy Vector where I can fill my browser window with content.... [[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] ([[User talk:Jonesey95|talk]]) 01:15, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

Using the mobile domain with the Vector skin invokes a special mode with lots of odd behaviour. It's not part of this project but will hopefully get fixed some day. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 02:30, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== &quot;Related articles&quot; appear to be missing ==

I do not see the &quot;Related articles&quot; section at the bottom of the mobile view. I don't really care, but since the &quot;Principles&quot; section of this page says &quot;We do not remove any functionality&quot;, I thought I'd mention it. It makes me wonder what other functionality has been removed, and whether this principle is really being followed in a systematic way. [[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] ([[User talk:Jonesey95|talk]]) 03:02, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

RelatedArticles appears to be working fine to me. I see it on Minerva. What do you mean by &quot;at the bottom of mobile view&quot;? The scope of this project is the desktop site so no changes to the mobile domain have been made.

RelatedArticles does not show on the skins of certain websites and has not shown on Vector or Vector 2022 unless the community has explicitly requested. See [[phab:T144812]], [[phab:T181242]] and [[phab:T278611]] for example. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:59, 24 June 2022 (UTC)
:I think this is my mistake. I was comparing [https://en.m.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Russian_Soviet_Federative_Socialist_Republic this] (default mobile view on en.WP) with [https://en.m.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Russian_Soviet_Federative_Socialist_Republic&amp;useskin=vector-2022 this] (Vector 2022 mobile view) and assuming that the default mobile view used some version of the Vector skin, but I think that is not correct. [[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] ([[User talk:Jonesey95|talk]]) 16:38, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

Ah okay. This mode is only accessible by a special URL and is not being worked on as part of this project. Thanks for taking the time to explain! [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 02:28, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== 非常に見にくい ==

日本語で失礼します。本日ごろから日本語版ウィキペディアのスキンに変更があったようですが、
# 文字の大きさをブラウザ側から変更できない(Safari使用)。
# そもそも標準の文字サイズが大きすぎる。
# 目次が項目名の横に位置が変わったせいでアクセスが煩雑になった。
# Infoボックスが大きすぎる
などの変更のせいで、余計見づらくなったような気がします。可能であれば改善するか、もしくは変更前のスキンに戻して欲しいです。 [[User:イカしたイカ|イカしたイカ]] ([[User talk:イカしたイカ|talk]]) 08:38, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

:感謝します、@[[User:イカしたイカ|イカしたイカ]]さん。
:First of all, you don't need to apologize for writing in Japanese. We welcome comments in any language.
:# Would you like just to change the default font size? Or would you be able to zoom in and out, and see the font size adjust?
:# Do you think making the text line wider and keeping the default font size would fix the problem?
:# Why do you think access is more complicated now? Our motivation was to reposition the table of context to make it more accessible. What do you think is not working?
:# Do you think the problem is related to the default font size?
:まず第一に、あなたは日本語で書いたことを謝罪する必要はありません。 どんな言語でもコメントを歓迎します。
:# デフォルトのフォントサイズを変更しますか？ または、ズームインおよびズームアウトして、フォントサイズが調整されるのを確認できますか？
:# テキスト行を広くし、デフォルトのフォントサイズを維持することで、問題が解決すると思いますか？
:# なぜ今、アクセスがより複雑になっていると思いますか？ 私たちの動機は、コンテキストのテーブルを再配置して、よりアクセスしやすくすることでした。 何が機能していないと思いますか？
:# 問題はデフォルトのフォントサイズに関連していると思いますか？
:[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 02:18, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== Please evaluate CJK characters' font size in Vector 2022 ==

{{tracked|T311469}}
For your infomation, the Chinese Wikipedia already has a [[zh:MediaWiki:Gadget-large-font.css|gadget]] that increases the font size for a better Chinese reading experience. Japanese and classical Chinese Wikipedia also have such kinds of gadgets. [[User:Diskdance|Diskdance]] ([[User talk:Diskdance|talk]]) 08:19, 25 June 2022 (UTC)

:It would be nice if we could integrate these gadgets into new Vector skin directly. This would benefit other CJK and multilingual wikis. [[User:Diskdance|Diskdance]] ([[User talk:Diskdance|talk]]) 08:20, 25 June 2022 (UTC)
::Thanks @[[User:Diskdance|Diskdance]]! @[[User:AHollender (WMF)|AHollender (WMF)]] FYI :) [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:03, 27 June 2022 (UTC)

I think we should create  a phabricator ticket for this one. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 02:29, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== Feedback regarding Vector (2022) TOC ==

I've had Vector (2022) enabled for a while, and generally like it. However:

* I don't feel the new way of handling the TOC and side menu is user friendly. It took me a while to notice I could hide the side menu only to raise the TOC up the page, as I assumed it would also hide the TOC since the two are part of the same sidebar. With the side menu visible, I had to scroll much further down than usual to find the TOC on many articles with short lead sections, which undermined the convenience previously provided by the TOC as a way to skip scrolling and quickly navigate to a desired section.
** It also doesn't help that the [[w:Template_talk:Skip_to_talk#Broken_functionality_with_new_version_of_vector_theme|new TOC breaks the functionality of]] {{tl|Skip to talk}}, widely used on talk pages on Wikipedia, but I now understand that the change is intended to make that template unnecessary.
** The prototype [https://di-visual-design-menus.web.app/Brown_bear linked by others above] deals with some of these issues but is still a bit confusing. It's not clear that clicking &quot;hide&quot; on the TOC should result in a menu appearing by the article title rather than just collapsing it like collapsible lists which use the same &quot;[hide]&quot; links; while this behaviour can be learned, it's not clear why the hidden TOC menu button doesn't persist between the search icon and article title when scrolling down, which is what I expected after seeing it collapse to a button beside the article title.

* The new sidebar is wider to accommodate the TOC, but much of that space is blank so I'm not sure it needs to be quite so wide, particularly as the added width can cause issues such as galleries by default having less space for images per row. I understand the motivation is to limit the characters of text per line, but doing so by padding the sidebar with empty space seems like an unhelpful way to achieve that. [[User:Scyrme|Scyrme]] ([[User talk:Scyrme|talk]]) 16:57, 26 June 2022 (UTC)

:I want to chime in about the &quot;hide&quot; behaviour. I noticed the link for the first time right now, tried clicking it and was a confused when it disappeared altogether. I would have expected the link to change to &quot;show&quot; and the table itself to hide. It took me a while to find the icon in the header. I think that if it should behave this way, it needs to somehow be communicated to the user where the TOC goes. [[User:Sebastian Berlin (WMSE)|Sebastian Berlin (WMSE)]] ([[User talk:Sebastian Berlin (WMSE)|talk]]) 10:42, 3 August 2022 (UTC)

== Where are the watch/unwatch buttons? ==

Alright, if the article is long enough to be scrolled, I should scroll it down, the top row of icons will jerk left-right, and the &quot;watchlist&quot; icon will become the &quot;watch/unwatch&quot; toggle. Hopelessly inconvenient, counterintuitive, but it works. But what if the article is so short that it won't scroll at all? [https://ru.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B8%D0%BF%D0%B5%D0%B4%D0%B8%D1%8F:%D0%A0%D0%B5%D1%86%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B7%D0%B8%D1%80%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5/%D0%9E%D0%B1%D1%8A%D0%B5%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BD%D1%91%D0%BD%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B9_%D0%B2%D0%BE%D0%BA%D0%B7%D0%B0%D0%BB_%D0%A6%D0%B8%D0%BD%D1%86%D0%B8%D0%BD%D0%BD%D0%B0%D1%82%D0%B8&amp;oldid=123611287 example] Seems like &quot;preferences/watchlist/edit raw watchlist&quot; is the only go-around, is it not? [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 12:13, 27 June 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]]: There's a smaller star-shaped watch/unwatch toggle to the right of the &quot;View history&quot;/&quot;История&quot; link. [[User:Scyrme|Scyrme]] ([[User talk:Scyrme|talk]]) 14:48, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
:: Thanks, that was most unexpected. I'd rather prefer old good text links. [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 15:59, 27 June 2022 (UTC) The new star looks almost exactly like the existing GA star, just a different shade of grey (but in almost the same corner location as in standard monobook). [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 16:02, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
:&quot;Thanks, that was most unexpected. I'd rather prefer old good text links&quot; - you're a Monobook user, am I right? This may be a good reason why it's most unexpected for you. Vector 2022 is based on Vector legacy (2010), and the star icon has been there for 12 years. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 01:51, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== Merge notification block in the header: notifications and alerts ==

{{Tracked|T142981}}
For me, it has always been a strange decision that notifications were divided into two unrelated blocks and icons with incomprehensible categorization. I forgot about it, but now I'm paying attention again.

Given that we removed the text from all menus, there are now a lot of icons at the top that do not understand what they do. Different blocks of notifications do not help this at all. Maybe it's time to put them in one menu and break it there already? Filters, tabs, whatever :) But at least you won't get confused in the icons.

I personally still (6 years!) do not know what their fundamental difference is. I asked my friends and they don't know either. [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 17:29, 27 June 2022 (UTC)

:{{Strong oppose}}. The notices are the notifications that are not very important/urgent, unlike the alerts. Merging them would make me unable to found out at a glance if I have any important/urgent notification, and would also overload the notification box, as I receive many notifications. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 22:19, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
:: It seems to me that it is possible to do this with filters and colored marker icons. Or a separate setting for users who really need it. [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 09:47, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

:{{Comment}}. I agree that the distinction could be clearer, but don't necessarily agree that there should be only one button. Presently, when both are empty the only difference between them is the header text and icon. Both share the exact same two buttons, which link to the same destinations. The text in the box doesn't even distinguish, reading &quot;There are no notifications&quot; instead of &quot;There are no alerts&quot;. There isn't even a &quot;help&quot; or &quot;about&quot; link unique to each of them to explain the difference or what gets sent where. If you follow the links to the special page or preferences, it's still not clear which notifications are sent where.

:Based on the names, I would've assumed the difference would be that alerts are specifically for subscriptions to [[Wikipedia:Article alerts|article alerts]], whereas notifications would be for everything else. It makes sense to split them, since alerts would be activity that's less personal to the receiver. &quot;Alerts&quot; would be like a daily newspaper, but &quot;notifications&quot; are more like personal mail. Except this isn't how the system actually functions; messages to the receiver's talk page are placed under &quot;Alerts&quot; rather &quot;Notices&quot;, for example.

:I understand that it may be helpful to filter urgent notifications from less urgent ones, but what counts as urgent or important? Shouldn't that be decided by the user's preferences? It would make more sense to have something like tabs, as Iniquity suggested, to filter types of notifications; this would let that user decide what is important. [[User:Scyrme|Scyrme]] ([[User talk:Scyrme|talk]]) 22:33, 27 June 2022 (UTC)

== Table of contents: Bold format for active section ==

I really appreciate the new skin and layout. In the beta, the active/current section of the article was formatted bold in the table of contents on the left side. But in the live version, it's regular and black. I find it really, really hard to differentiate between the normal blue titles and the active title, because the only difference is the black vs. blue color. Could you please make the active titles bold again? 
Thank you! [[User:Lhennen|Lhennen]] ([[User talk:Lhennen|talk]]) 21:11, 29 June 2022 (UTC)

:+1 Bold and black would be best imo. [[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] ([[User talk:L.xschlag|talk]]) 11:43, 1 July 2022 (UTC)
::@[[User:Lhennen|Lhennen]], @[[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] - thank you for your feedback!  Not sure if you've seen, but we are  currently in the middle of testing some [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Fifth prototype testing|prototypes]] related to this question.  You're welcome to give us more detailed feedback on the prototype page.  One of the things we're testing on these is the way links should appear within the table of contents (see https://di-visual-design-toc-active.web.app/Otter) for an example.  Currently, our feedback is showing us that people are leaning towards option 2: bold and black so we will most likely be continuing with that option and making the titles bold.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 10:08, 4 July 2022 (UTC)

== Jawiki has NOT reached consensus on implementing Vector 2022 yet ==

Jawiki has '''NOT''' reached consensus on implementing Vector 2022 yet. Why was it implemented without our consent? [[User:AppleRingo777|AppleRingo777]] ([[User talk:AppleRingo777|talk]]) 22:01, 29 June 2022 (UTC)

:Hi @[[User:AppleRingo777|AppleRingo777]] - we apologize for the confusion that the deployment process has caused and the lack of clarity from our side.  We are currently working on reading back through our previous communications and clarifying the process and what happened with individual members of the community.  We will to get back to the community with more detailed thoughts and a process for next steps by tomorrow July 1st.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 12:04, 30 June 2022 (UTC)

== [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] ==

Hello! I asked a question at the meeting, but I would like to duplicate it here. Will it be possible to control the location of blocks (right or left) through [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]? [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 15:34, 30 June 2022 (UTC)

:Hey! We are still thinking through how this would work. Input valued in [[phab:T306519]] ! [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:27, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
:: Thanks! :) [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 16:16, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Keep the TOC under the main menu as long as possible (Vector 2022) ==

When the window gets narrower the TOC is moved into a &quot;Hamburger button&quot;. But the main menu stays where it is until the window get's quite a bit more narrower. I think as long as the main menu fits, the TOC should stay at its original place. Especially since the TOC behind the &quot;Hamburger button&quot; is quite easy to miss. [[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] ([[User talk:L.xschlag|talk]]) 11:30, 1 July 2022 (UTC)

:This was a bug. I believe it should be fixed by the end of the week. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:28, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== &quot;Move&quot; is the only in the &quot;More&quot; drop down menu (Vector 2022) ==

I think it's quite odd that the &quot;More&quot; drop down menu most of the time contains only &quot;move&quot;. Is it on purpose to make it harder to find for the average user? [[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] ([[User talk:L.xschlag|talk]]) 11:35, 1 July 2022 (UTC)
* {{ping|L.xschlag}}, I have two items - the other is an add-on via preferences/gadgets. Unfortunately, I cannot use drop-down menues easily, so getting there in V-2022 is quite a nuisance. [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 21:31, 3 July 2022 (UTC)
*:Isn't the behaviour the same here on the other skins?
*:I agree it's not great having one item in a menu, but I think this case is quite rare since on most wikis move privilege is added along with page protection and deletion. There is a trade off here between the complexity of maintaining multiple variants of the skin in different circumstances and what looks best. Here we could add special treatment for the one item menu but we'd need to add additional code complexity and tests to cover it. Hope this insight is helpful. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:32, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Actions menu overflows when main menu is active (Vector 2022) ==

{{Tracked|T311471}}
When the main menu is active (meaning visible) and the window is quite narrow the actions menu (Read, Edit source, Add topic, View history) doesn't get condensed in the &quot;More&quot; drop down menu, resulting in a very ugly overflow. [[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] ([[User talk:L.xschlag|talk]]) 11:41, 1 July 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] - thank you for your feedback! This should now be fixed, let us know if you continue seeing issues.  [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 13:34, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Audio player issues (Vector 2022) ==

When pressing play from a wikipedia article (e.g. first clip in [[:w:en:Aftermath_(Rolling_Stones_album)]]), the page changes text colour from black to pale grey. Almost unreadable. This dead time varies from a few seconds to many minutes, probably caused by unsteady connection on my side. I tried opening 2-3-4... windows with the same article, and some windows seem to be stuck indefinitely while others play with minimal (but still annoying) delay. If I press play directly from file description page ( [[:w:en:File:Under_My_Thumb.ogg]]), it always plays instantly and the text always stays black. Win 10 Home / Chrome 102.0.5005.115 (64-bit) [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 19:29, 3 July 2022 (UTC)

:I've flagged this bug to the developers of [[Extension:TimedMediaHandler]]. This is not related to this project. I'll let you know if I hear anything back. Thanks for reporting! [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 16:43, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Language mix in the interface ==

Pardon me if this had already been discussed here. It seems that the language of the interface (as set in preferences) mixes up with local-language elements where it shouldn't. 
# My preferences are always &quot;interface=en&quot;, and thus I always see &quot;Contents Beginning&quot; in the TOC section - be it Chinese, Russian or Spanish wiki. 
# The pink box above TOC in ru-wiki says &quot;On this Википедия&lt;sup&gt;[sic!]&lt;/sup&gt; the language links are at the top of the page across from the article title. Go to top.&quot; In zh-wiki, however, the message is correctly &quot;On this Wikipedia the language links ...&quot; [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 21:23, 3 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thank you @[[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] for reporting this. That's odd. 🤔 [[betawiki:MediaWiki:Vector-language-redirect-to-top/en|The source code]] is: &lt;tt&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;On this {{SITENAME}} the language links&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;... - so apparently, something about &lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; isn't working here. But I don't know what yet. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:20, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Where are the categories? ==

Hi this is my first time looking at the prototype, so apologies if this question has been answered elsewhere - where are the categories? [[User:MassiveEartha|MassiveEartha]] ([[User talk:MassiveEartha|talk]]) 04:15, 5 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:MassiveEartha|MassiveEartha]]. I'm sorry that you felt confused. We don't touch elements such as categories. These prototypes were only created for editors to help us decide on the visual design matters. If the categories aren't displayed in any of the prototypes, then it's definitely unintentional and also irrelevant to what we do. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:02, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== 開発者集団は日本語版を軽視していると思われるThe group of developers seems to downplay the Japanese version ==

日本語版の利用者の一人としては、開発者の集団は日本語版を軽視していると考える。一つの証拠として開発者からの意見を求めるメッセージが英語だけで書かれていたことを挙げておく。機械翻訳があるのだから英語と共に日本語を添えることは簡単なことのはずである。それすらせずにVectorからVector2022への変更を強行したことは、一種の文化帝国主義であると評さざるを得ない。As one of the users of the Japanese version, I think that the group of developers disregards the Japanese version. One proof is that the message for the developer's opinion was written in English only. Since there is machine translation, it should be easy to add Japanese along with English. It must be said that forcing the change from Vector to Vector 2022 without doing so is a kind of cultural imperialism.--[[Special:Contributions/27.85.205.84|27.85.205.84]] 07:17, 5 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello 27.85.205.84. Do you maybe know good open-source machine translators working for Japanese and English? I've noticed that Google Translate doesn't work for these languages well. Sometimes it changes words, meanings, and the tone of entire sentences completely. I could write in Polish, my first language, but I'm sure that would be even more difficult. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:15, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Vector 2022を強要する行為は、開発者が読者を軽視していることの証拠である The act of forcing Vector 2022 is evidence that developers are downplaying their readers. ==

開発者（の集団）はアカウントユーザーなら自分で好きなスキンを使えるのだから、あまり出来がよいとは言えないVector 2022を強要してっもかまわないと考えているようである。しかし、元々Vector 2022は読者として快適に使えることを考慮していない。開発者（の集団）は読者がいなければいくら記事を作っても意味がないということを忘れているのだろうか。It seems that developers (a group of people) are willing to force Vector 2022, which is not very good, because account users can use their favorite skins. However, originally Vector 2022 did not consider it to be comfortable to use as a reader. Do developers (groups) forget that it doesn't make sense to write an article without a reader?--[[Special:Contributions/27.85.205.84|27.85.205.84]] 07:29, 5 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello! As I can see, the translation was done by Google Translate. It's not good. I've used DeepL and this message is very different in English. Why do you think Vector 2022 was not originally designed to be comfortable to use as a reader? I would like to understand what made you think so.
:こんにちは！ ご覧のとおり、翻訳はGoogle翻訳によって行われました。 良くない。 私はDeepLを使用しましたが、このメッセージは英語では大きく異なります。 なぜVector2022は、もともとリーダーとして快適に使用できるように設計されていなかったと思いますか？ どうしてそう思ったのか理解したい。 [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 02:06, 12 July 2022 (UTC)
:: [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)-san]], your great DeepL-ed message causes a [[:ja:Wikipedia:削除依頼/Wikipedia:井戸端/subj/デスクトップ版外装（スキン）改善バージョンの実装について|deletion discussion]] due to copyright violation. I wish a good Foundation staff would deeply understand the copyright policy in Wikipedia and recognize that copypasting from machine translation could violate the copyright that was attributed to that translation service.
:: So, while I'm not the original poster of this section, let me answer the question: 
:: &gt; Why do you think Vector 2022 was not originally designed to be comfortable to use as a reader? 
:: If you think the only problem is new Vector 2022 design itself, I must say you are missing an important point: how you all introduced the new skin. All of the changes has never been announced in jawiki before being applied (and unfortunately, after that, until today). Many of the editors, the readers, the users were surprised at the new design all of the sudden, and not a few of them regarded it as a big bug or something.
:: You may wonder, &quot;we let you know this in advance, via a member of your community.&quot; That's true, partially. [[User:AppleRingo777|AppleRingo777-san]] took your messages and passed them to us per your instruction. I heard that you (or someone in Foundation) asked to post the message in WP:NEWS. How did you determine that WP:NEWS, generally where announcements '''only for the editors''' are posted, was enough to communicate this important news that obviously affected the entirety of community members including the readers? Will you also assign the responsibility on this to AppleRingo777-san, a good community member? I cannot help but want the Foundation to realize that you all destroyed our trust. --[[Special:Contributions/2400:4052:3420:4500:444C:45BF:13AC:59E2|2400:4052:3420:4500:444C:45BF:13AC:59E2]] 14:40, 14 July 2022 (UTC)

== Listed coordinates overlapping with header weirdly ==

{{Tracked|T281974}}

for an example of this, see wp's [[:en:London|london]] article ([https://imgur.com/a/rEngM3R screenshot]) [[User:LarstonMarston|LarstonMarston]] ([[User talk:LarstonMarston|talk]]) 20:00, 5 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thank you @[[User:LarstonMarston|LarstonMarston]]. In this case, we need to fix the bug together with the communities - some code should be changed by editors on each wiki with this bug separately. We can help (and we're working on it). [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:11, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
::thanks, good to hear [[User:LarstonMarston|LarstonMarston]] ([[User talk:LarstonMarston|talk]]) 20:06, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Default to Collapsed Menu Exposed TOC ==

{{Tracked|T287609}}

I was trying to figure out why I didn't like the new TOC, and then it hit me that the main reason was that it is hidden by the side menu when you first visit a page (I very rarely login to Wikipedia, and I'm thinking that's the norm for most visitors). Then I was thinking that I almost never use the main navigation links, they just aren't part of my normal use case of visiting Wikipedia (it is to learn a specific thing that I don't currently know enough about). I was going to post to make it possible to hide the main nav, but then realized that you already built it, but the default is for it to show. My hypothesis is that the bulk of users don't look or click on any of the menu items, and that the menu should be hidden by default and the TOC exposed above the fold.  [[Special:Contributions/195.134.163.110|195.134.163.110]] 10:34, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

:Yes, TOC should be exposed above the article not on the right. In fact in desktop view if I click PC version it does not open stuff on the left. [[Special:Contributions/2A00:1370:8184:2478:A928:87EF:D073:FEEA|2A00:1370:8184:2478:A928:87EF:D073:FEEA]] 16:22, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
:Thank you for your feedback! We are planning on implementing this change within the next couple of weeks.  Progress can be tracked in the phabricator ticket linked above.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 10:04, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

::I would like you to give logged-in users the right to choose that as well. If you knew about these plans, don't you think that was a little premature to set Vector (2022) as the default in JAWP ? If you make changes right after you start it in JAWP, Japanese users will be confused. --[[User:呉野|呉野]] ([[User talk:呉野|talk]]) 13:21, 14 July 2022 (UTC)

== Replace the &quot;new section&quot; tab text with &quot;+&quot; gadget not working. ==

{{Fixed}}

On the English Wikipedia upon switching to Modern Vector the aforementioned gadget ceases to function as intended.

[[User:Nathanielcwm|Nathanielcwm]] ([[User talk:Nathanielcwm|talk]]) 13:14, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

:Looks like the gadget is setup to only work on Vector and Monobook. I have updated it to also apply to Vector 2022 skin (https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki%3AGadget-addsection-plus.js&amp;type=revision&amp;diff=1096783301&amp;oldid=1047498910) [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 15:59, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== July ==

@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]]: Does Vector 2022 will be deployed (as default) at all Wikimedia wikis until the end of July, as it is written [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements|here]]? I am asking this because I see that there is still some work to do and the deadline written there changed several times. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 21:56, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]], thanks for this question. This information is already outdated. It will ''not'' be deployed in July. We hope to send an update to the village pumps next week. We're working on the announcement right now. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:01, 7 July 2022 (UTC)

== Language switching ==

Hi, I really appreciate the suggestion of translations within the language button, thank you! [[Special:Contributions/37.103.14.65|37.103.14.65]] 09:06, 7 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thanks! Appreciation also goes to the [[Wikimedia Language engineering]] team, because they have made this particular change. We have &quot;only&quot; provided the language button :) [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 02:01, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== Vector (2022)のウィキペディア日本語版への導入について About the introduction of Vector (2022) to the Japanese version of Wikipedia ==

「[[:ja:Wikipedia:井戸端/subj/デスクトップ版外装（スキン）改善バージョンの実装について]]」での案内によると7月14日までこのページでコメントを受け付けるとのことなので意見を書く。--[[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] ([[User talk:匿竜類|talk]]) 02:25, 8 July 2022 (UTC)
* 開発者は開発すること自体に喜びを感じるべきであり、日本語版で行ったように強引に導入して「見えるところ」に成果が表れることに喜びを感じるべきでない。
* 開発者は裏方として、開発に専念するべきであり、それを使うかどうかは「利用者」の判断にゆだねるべきである。
* スキンはインフラストラクチャーである。技術者が陥りがちな間違いだが「新しければよい」というものではない。
* 現在のVector (2022)は完成品とは言えずベータテストの段階でしかない。この段階で全面導入を進めようとするのは技術者の姿勢として適切でない。ベータテストは希望者を募って行うべきである。
* Vector (2022)をデフォルトのスキンとすることについて、本当に開発者チームに権限が与えられているのか。証拠があるなら、リンクをつけて示してほしい。
* 今回の経緯を見ると「読者」に対する観点が脱落している。「読者」のいない記事に何の意味があるのだろうか。
:ja: Wikipedia: Idobata / subj / Desktop version According to the guidance on implementing the improved exterior (skin) version, comments will be accepted on this page until July 14, so I will write my opinion.
* Developers should be delighted with the development itself, and should not be delighted with the &quot;visible&quot; results of the forcible introduction as was done in the Japanese version.
* Developers should concentrate on development behind the scenes and leave it to the &quot;user&quot; to decide whether or not to use it.
* Skins are infrastructure. It's a mistake that engineers tend to make, but it's not &quot;just new.&quot;
* The current Vector (2022) is not a finished product, it is only in the beta test stage. It is not appropriate as an engineer's attitude to proceed with full-scale introduction at this stage. Beta testing should be done by recruiting applicants.
* Is the developer team really empowered to make Vector (2022) the default skin? If you have proof, please link to it.
* Looking at the history of this time, the viewpoint for &quot;readers&quot; is missing. What does an article without a &quot;reader&quot; mean? [[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] ([[User talk:匿竜類|talk]]) 02:25, 8 July 2022 (UTC)
*:Hi @[[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] - Thank you for your feedback and for the bug reports below.  We are currently in the process of taking the Vector (2022) skin out of beta testing/pilot mode and into the stage where we scale the skin, with the hopes of making it the default on all the wikis.  Over the course of the next month, we will be hosting conversations with the largest Wikipedias and getting their feedback on the skin, similar to our conversations with Japanese Wikipedia right now.  Even when default, logged-in users will still be able to chose whether they want to use the skin or not.  If they decide not to use it, they can turn it off at any moment in their user preferences.
*:In terms of readers, for every change we have made when building the skin, we have tested both quantitatively and qualitatively with readers and well as editors.  To access more detail on the research and testing we have done, please go [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features|to the Features page]] and select the feature you are interested in learning about.  From there, you can read the sections named Quantitative research or Qualitative research to see the testing we have done. In addition, we have also done more open-ended testing with readers to identify the issues with the skin starting in 2020 until now. Please see the  [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Repository/Hureo User Research Report/ja|Hureo User Research Report]] with Readers and Editors, the [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Repository/Wikimania Stockholm research report/ja|Wikimania Stockholm research report]], the [https://nbviewer.org/github/wikimedia-research/Desktop-behavior-analysis-Aug-2019/blob/master/Desktop_usage_behavior_analysis.ipynb Wikimedia Desktop Usage and Behavior Data Analysis], or the [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Repository/Sticky Header and Table of Contents User Testing/ja|Sticky Header and Table of Contents User Testing]] reports for some examples of the studies we have done with readers (which have translations in Japanese), what we have learned, and how we used those learnings to create the new skin. [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 10:00, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Vector (2022)の不具合の報告 Report a bug in Vector (2022) ==

{{Tracked|T303267}} {{Tracked|T281974}}

日本語版でVector (2022)を使うと、左側に「このWikipediaでは言語間リンクがページの先頭にある記事タイトルの向かい側に設置されています。ページの先頭をご覧ください。」と表示されるのだが、実際には「記事タイトル」は「ページの先頭」ではなくこのメッセージの下に表示される。以前は、このようなことがなかったように思うので一時的なものかもしれないが、症状が出ていることを確認してほしい。When I use Vector (2022) in the Japanese version, it says &quot;In this Wikipedia, the interlingual link is located opposite the article title at the top of the page. Please see the top of the page.&quot; However, in reality, the &quot;article title&quot; is displayed below this message instead of &quot;at the top of the page&quot;. I don't think this happened before, so it may be temporary, but please make sure that you have symptoms.--[[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] ([[User talk:匿竜類|talk]]) 02:42, 8 July 2022 (UTC)

:上記不具合を報告してから、1日経過していますが、応答がありません。[[:ja:Wikipedia:表示改善依頼#Vector（2022）スキンで、バッジと地図のタグが重なって表示される#]]によると、どうやらこの種の不具合はファブリケータで処理することになっているようですが、そちらの方への連絡はしていただけたのでしょうか。とりあえず担当者の応答を求めます。One day has passed since I reported the above problem, but there is no response. ja: Wikipedia: Display improvement request #Vector (2022) In the skin, the badge and the map tag are displayed overlapping. According to #, it seems that this kind of defect is to be handled by the fabricator. Could you contact that person? For the time being, ask for the response of the person in charge.--[[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] ([[User talk:匿竜類|talk]]) 03:05, 9 July 2022 (UTC)
::Hello! The coordinates issue is known but the language one wasn't.  Thank you for bringing it to our attention.
::I will reply with more details next week. Have a great weekend and thank you for the bug reports. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 18:27, 9 July 2022 (UTC)
:::These are tracked in [[phab:T303267]] and [[phab:T281974]]. Thanks for the report! [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 16:39, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Merge [ca-view] and [ca-nstab-main] in the article toolbar ==

Currently, in the article toolbar, we have two links (Read and Article) that lead to the same location. One of them is located in the left and the other one is located in the right navigation. This can be confusing to readers, and also adds unnecessary weight to the toolbar. [https://imgur.com/56mbihi Current look].

It would be good if we could merge these two tabs into one. Ideally, the best solution, in my opinion, would be to merge the right and left navigation and center the items, [https://imgur.com/a/ih52zYZ like this]. Please tell me what you think about this. Thank you! — [[User:Aca|Aca]] ([[User talk:Aca|talk]]) 11:18, 9 July 2022 (UTC)

:{{O}}. Now, the tabs are clear. You have 2 pages: the article and the talk page. You can select 1 action at a time for each of them: reading, visual editing, source editing, and viewing the history. Form the proposed design, you can understand that the tabs led to different types of pages. The watch is something not related to the article? And if now you are on article tabs, if you would press on the editing source tab, you would arrive on a page not related to the article (this is a possible confusion)? And so on. &quot;This can be confusing to readers,&quot; - how so? Are there any data? And if there are, are there any data that the proposed design is better? P.S. I also dislike the proposed design, due to visual reasons. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 19:00, 9 July 2022 (UTC)

== Big blank space when on a big zoom ==

Unlike the old layout that adjust depending of the size of zoom, the new format seems to follow a single size that, when zoomed in, creates a big blank space like if the page was still loading

It needs be fixed so the wiki pages can be better for people that have vison issues 

- [[:en:User:Meganinja202|User:Meganinja202]] | [[:en:User_talk:Meganinja202|¿]]  10:17:00 11 July 2022 (UTC) [[User:Meganinja202|Meganinja202]] ([[User talk:Meganinja202|talk]]) 10:17, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

:[[User:Meganinja202]] are you taking about [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Limiting_content_width]] or reporting a bug? If the latter, what browser and device are you using? [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 16:34, 11 July 2022 (UTC)
::i think should be a bug since its a thing that happens from top to bottom of the page and not from the sides, i am use Chromium Based MS Edge [[User:Meganinja202|Meganinja202]] ([[User talk:Meganinja202|talk]]) 17:02, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Language box recommendation ==

A minor suggestion: why not insert the language box on the title header so I don't have to go all up to the top of the page to change language versions. So yeah, thanks! [[User:PeaceSeekers|PeaceSeekers]] ([[User talk:PeaceSeekers|talk]]) 11:00, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

:ya, they should had kept the language bar on the side of page instead of the top, leaving the language option on top only on mobile/touch machines [[User:Meganinja202|Meganinja202]] ([[User talk:Meganinja202|talk]]) 17:03, 11 July 2022 (UTC)
:@[[User:PeaceSeekers|PeaceSeekers]] - do you use the site while logged-in? If so, you can access the language switching button from the persistent (&quot;sticky&quot;) header at the top of the page while you're scrolling.  We are also in discussion of bringing this functionality to all logged-in users as well.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 08:15, 12 July 2022 (UTC)
::I did log in, but I can't see it though ... what I have is only, from the left: the search button, article title, discussion page, edit history, watchlist and my profile stuff (for lack of better words). So that's that. [[User:PeaceSeekers|PeaceSeekers]] ([[User talk:PeaceSeekers|talk]]) 08:43, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== What I still would love to see different solutions to ==

I'm very much looking forward to not having the text fill an entire wide screen. This will make Wikipedia far easier to read on big screens. Thanks! A few things that still don't work for me:

'''Table of contents'''

If I haven't collapsed the left menu, the ToC is not visible when I start reading the article. This makes it more difficult to get an overview.

It's also ''generally'' more difficult to get an overview of the article content, as I need to go to the ToC in the sidebar and scroll down to see everything on big pages (like a Village Pump). This both makes it more difficult for me to conceptualize what's on the page – as I've tested this, I've realised I find it challenging to get a grasp of a page if I can't see the various topics at the same time – and adds more work, as I have to move the mouse pointer to the ToC to be able to scroll. I would have much preferred if it used more of the space available to get around this.

'''My contributions'''

My own user contributions is something I use all the time – it's my way of getting back to what I was doing before. Making it less accessible in the top menu is wrench thrown into my workflow.

'''Language links'''

This is my main issue. I use other languages ''all the time''. As a reader, I glance at them to conceptualise the topic – which languages have written about this subject? This hints at things that aren't available in the content itself. As an editor, I check out other languages to see what sources they have and so on. Having to click to even see if there are languages I can read is an extra step that both requires more work, but also makes it less inviting, as the opportunity doesn't stare me in the face. This is so central to my workflow that it might in itself be reason to keep using Vector 2010, but that's certainly not my preferred solution. [[User:Julle|Julle]] ([[User talk:Julle|talk]]) 10:13, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== feedback ==

asbra med maxbredd! coolt att wikipedia tar steget in i 2010-talet och blir läsbart på stor skärm.


språklänkarna blir mycket sämre. man borde kunna se språken direkt och klicka på dem, det är en sak man använder hela tiden.


jag förstår inte varför ni har bytt ut texten i användarmenyn mot symboler? det var tydligare med text. nu måste man gissa vad de betyder och många kommer aldrig lista ut det.


man borde inte behöva skrolla INNE I innehållsförteckningen för att se hela. sjukt störande att behöva gå till den och skrolla I DEN för att se vad som finns på sidan. [[Special:Contributions/81.92.27.129|81.92.27.129]] 18:12, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thanks for the feedback! 
:(google translation)
:* max  width: cool that wikipedia takes the step into the 2010s and becomes readable on the big screen.
:* language links: you should be able to see the languages ​​directly and click on them, it is one thing you use all the time.
:* Icons: I do not understand why you have replaced the text in the user menu with symbols? it was clearer with text. now you have to guess what they mean and many will never figure it out.
:* Table of contents: you should not have to scroll INSIDE the table of contents to see the whole thing. Very annoying to have to go to it and scroll IN IT to see what's on the page. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 19:00, 12 July 2022 (UTC)
:::(&quot;Sjukt störande&quot;, which the machine translation rendered as &quot;ill disturbing&quot;, means &quot;very annoying&quot;.) [[User:Julle|Julle]] ([[User talk:Julle|talk]]) 00:15, 13 July 2022 (UTC)

== More TOC concerns ==

On pages with long headings (f.i. [[Wikipedia:Closure_requests]]), the new TOC is highly impractical. The headings are difficult to parse, sometimes cutting words in two. A lot of scrolling is also required to get an overview of what discussions to close. Will it be possible to go back to the old TOC on a per-page base? I can imagine a lot of non-article pages will have similar problems (including this one).

Less importantly, I noticed that the default is having only the top heading displayed. In some pages / articles there are very few top-level headings, and this would always require the reader to uncollapse. Can this be made more dynamic? [[User:Femke|Femke]] ([[User talk:Femke|talk]]) 18:09, 14 July 2022 (UTC)

:Would it be possible (probably only on bigger screens) to use the empty white space on the right for tools (for logged-in editors), so that the TOC is less cramped? Solves two problems in one.  [[User:Femke|Femke]] ([[User talk:Femke|talk]]) 17:00, 18 July 2022 (UTC)

== incorrect translation Vector 2022（jpwiki） ==

The information text on where to switch languages is partially translated incorrectly. I think , &quot;このWikipediaでは言語間リンクがページの先頭にある記事タイトルの向かい側に設置されています。&quot; is a slightly mistaken translation. This may mean that the language switch is outside the display.

You probably meant to write that, &quot;他言語版へのリンクは、ページ先頭の記事タイトルの右側にあります。&quot;. But I would rather you don't adopt this with no check. [[User:呉野|呉野]] ([[User talk:呉野|talk]]) 10:01, 15 July 2022 (UTC)

== 'Talk' and 'Contributions' buttons shouldn't be hidden in the navigation bar's drop down menu. ==

We shouldn't have to click twice to get to our '''Talk''' and '''Contribution''' pages from the navigation bar. I mean, there's already a bunch of wasted white space to right of the search box and to the the left of our Userpage button for those two icons to be added in the nav bar without any problems. [[User:Some1|Some1]] ([[User talk:Some1|talk]]) 02:57, 17 July 2022 (UTC)

== Simple English sidebar ==

I notice in Simple English with the 2022 Vector, the menus on the left side of the page are  to the left of the page text as they should be, but they are far above rather than beside the text. [[User:Jim.henderson|Jim.henderson]] ([[User talk:Jim.henderson|talk]]) 05:47, 17 July 2022 (UTC)

== The new sidebar TOC is confusive, not intuitive, unusable ==

I strongly oppose the new sidebar TOC. It is extremely confusing, not intuitive, and unusable. The removal of the numbering for paragraphs and their transformation into collapsible lists, will make the articles and discussions unreadable, as their structure will be completely unclear.


The TOC at the top of the article right below the lead text was perfect for giving a clear impression of the article's structure and for exploring its contents.


I think that keeping both the old and the new TOC (if the latter is really necessary) would be a good solution. The new TOC proves useful only in the bottom sections of very long articles. [[Special:Contributions/2001:B07:A2A:1884:D5D:3606:C70C:5366|2001:B07:A2A:1884:D5D:3606:C70C:5366]] 14:03, 17 July 2022 (UTC)
* Second that. Another point of note is that the narrow sidebar is a poor match for long section titles. Even in English wikipedia, some headings must be split in two narrow lines, or three. Other languages, that are naturally more verboise than English, are even more affected. [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 08:16, 29 July 2022 (UTC)

== This gives me depression ==

By merely see this happen week-by-week, I can see this sacred project gradually being destroyed. I wish I could stop this. – [[User:Ilovemydoodle2|Ilovemydoodle2]] ([[User talk:Ilovemydoodle2|talk]]) 07:35, 18 July 2022 (UTC)

== wrong name for a language ==

someone is having a laugh, or got really confused about translation. In the main page https://www.wikipedia.org/, '''Français''' now appears as '''anglais''', both in the top 'wheel' and in the 'Read Wikipedia in your language' drop-down. This is very wrong. What other languages have been disappeared in this way ? a bit of QA would go a long way :-) [[Special:Contributions/92.16.98.145|92.16.98.145]] 16:23, 19 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thanks for letting us know! This looks like a mistake/error on translatewiki.net. We'll try to fix that immediately. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 18:28, 19 July 2022 (UTC)
::FYI this wasn't related to the project.
::See related Reddit thread for details on what happened here if you are curious: https://www.reddit.com/r/wikipedia/comments/w2iidz/why_anglais_did_someone_sabotage_it/ [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 20:03, 20 July 2022 (UTC)

== coordinates being weird (again) ==

there was an issue a little while ago where location coordinates in an article would overlap with the header. that's fixed now, but some icons are still uncomfortably close to them, like the FA star; for an example of this, see the english wiki's [[:en:India|India]] article ([https://imgur.com/a/uuXPMzk screenshot]) [[Special:Contributions/2600:1700:7AA1:2400:9CA1:1220:42FD:1F12|2600:1700:7AA1:2400:9CA1:1220:42FD:1F12]] 20:17, 20 July 2022 (UTC)

== General concerns! ==

Well I was part of the process for quite some time now. And up until the move of the TOC from inside the content to the sidebar it was okay with me. I had some minor things, I thought I will get used to: the white space (anyone wanting that, can narrow their window), some inconsistencies (compare [[#A few more issues with the Page header vs Sticky header icons]]), the language switcher, which I fear will leave the impression of reading ''the same'' thing in different languages (compare [[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Archive3#Language_Selector_misunderstandable]], as a side-note: nothing happened here, at least nothing I recognized). 

But today I got this message: [[Topic:Wsfx4tbwzkgamaek]] asking for a translation for [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Updates/2022-07_for_the_largest_wikis]]. Let me cite: 

*'''&quot;...before discussing the change itself&quot;'''
*'''&quot;...that allows for a way to identify the needs of the community from the new skin.&quot;'''
*'''&quot;We would love to see the Vector 2022 skin [...] become the new default across all wikis...&quot;'''
*'''&quot;We will be ready to begin making the change at the end of August (and not in July, as previously announced), when the ''visual refinements'' and other ''deployment blockers'' are ready.&quot;'''
*'''&quot;The goal for that discussion will be to identify breaking issues or opportunities for improvement for the new skin. It will be important for us to reduce the risk of bugs or imperfections that would be particularly troublesome on [insert your language] Wikipedia&quot;'''

All that reads like: Well, we're just talking, let's see, what needs to be done, that everyone is happy. There are some things that need to be done anyways. 

Now let's read those two cites:
*'''&quot;...difficult discussions about the launch as the default&quot;''' (compare [[Topic:Wsfx4tbwzkgamaek]])
*'''&quot;...until our improvements are default on all wikis in July 2022.&quot;''' (compare [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements]] 

So isn't this not just a request for bug reports instead of a &quot;discussion&quot;? Is this not more of a fear of &quot;Flak&quot; instead of &quot;needs of the community&quot;? Isn't it happening anyways, instead of you &quot;loving to see it&quot;? What about all the other projects, wikibooks for example (&quot;[insert your language] Wikipedia&quot;)? I understand, you do the work, you decide. '''But:'''

* Is it wise to &quot;discuss&quot; while there are still tasks to be done and decisions to be made? (compare [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Visual_Refinements]], which by the way doesn't even seem finished, and for example [[#MediaWiki:Sidebar]])
* Is the Date of the end of August (6 weeks) really feasible? Who will translate all the feedback that will come in german?
* Is it good to leave the impression, that communities will have a choice (compare [[#Jawiki has NOT reached consensus on implementing Vector 2022 yet]])?

Some suggestions, if I may:
# Why not try to slow the process down? Why the haste? One could remove the deadlines and refine everything. ''Then'' ask the communities for bug reports.
# Why not try some marketing &quot;tricks&quot;? I think the discussion about the white space clearly shows that desktop ''improvements'' are highly subjective. Why not use for example ''skin changes''? Another Option could be deploying Vector 2022 only for not logged in users and hence prolong/smooth the transition-process creating time for bug reports and discussions. Most of anonymous usage would probably not care for the change, as long as the content is there. On another plus-side it will create &quot;data&quot; on how the menu-usage changes and community-links are perceived. It will probably even create data on how many logged in users switch to the new layout deliberately and or switch back hence providing &quot;hard&quot; success-data. 
# Would it be that bad to really leave the community a choice?
# If you are relying on volunteers, grant them a little more slack. Bug reports from the community need time: Bugs need to be recognized as bugs, they need to be reported, triaged ''and'' handled. Is this possible in 6 weeks? Volunteers might have another life, a job, kids, a week might be pretty short notice. Phabricator-use is not that trivial.
# Let's talk or try, if the new design might eventually be a problem for recruiting new volunteers. Did anyone think about a possible impact of hiding ''community-links'' in collapsed menus? Nobody seems to talk about community-pages or discussion-pages or even other project-scopes. Is the new menu-structure as fitting for these as for wikipedia-articles? 

I'm deeply saddened. The new TOC will make my life within wikimedia really hard and I commented about that early on (compare [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Third_prototype_testing/Feedback#Benutzername:HirnSpuk|here, bullet 7]]). I think all the TOC-comments on this page (see above) should raise at least some concern. And last but not least, I'm deeply troubled, that the new language-links will do more harm, than good.

So, ping @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] and @[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]], my sincere apology, I don't mean to be rude or mean and I appreciate your work and the work of your colleagues. But I don't want to volunteer for the translation-request, because all of the above mentioned problems.

Regards [[User:HirnSpuk|HirnSpuk]] ([[User talk:HirnSpuk|talk]]) 22:25, 20 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:HirnSpuk|HirnSpuk]]. Thank you for your outstanding involvement, and appreciation for our work. I'm glad to see that. Also, thank you for your sincere, thoughtful, and thorough comment with all the links and quotes. I think I understand what your approach is, I'm happy that you're saying this.
:Before I answer the questions, I'll admit/confirm that:
:# The ToC work hasn't been finished yet. So haven't the visual refinements. There's a list of issues labelled as &quot;[[phab:T309972|deployment blockers]]&quot;, by which we mean issues we need to solve before making it the default everywhere. I hope this will make you less sad!
:# Bug reports do need time. Phabricator is not that trivial.
:# While indeed focusing on the most typical use cases, like interacting with articles.
:# In some discussions, it has been confusing what exactly is for the individual communities to choose between.
:Regarding the questions, my answers to the easiest part:
:# We've been working since 2019, most work is behind us and we're headed towards the end. Now, we need to make sure what else the largest communities may need.
:# What about all the other projects - the message I asked if you could translate is dedicated to the largest communities of the top language versions of Wikipedia.
:# This is why in that message, we're initiating a pre-discussion about culture of collaboration. After that, we'll ask for bug reports and other technical requests.
:# We use the name Desktop Improvements because the point is to make changes that are actual measured improvements. Only some of the visual refinements are really subjective. But regarding the feature changes, the idea for each of these is that it should be an improvement compared to Legacy Vector.
:# We're part of [[Core Experiences]] and work closely with the teams focusing on newbies and more experienced editors. It's our plan to make entry points for new volunteers prominent, in collaboration with Growth. We hope that Desktop Improvements will be an introduction to even more sophisticated changes addressing very specific use cases.
:OK, enough now for one comment. Let's keep talking, though. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 01:30, 21 July 2022 (UTC)

:: @[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]], because you said &quot;let's keep talking&quot;, let me react to your latter 5 points.
::# I do not want to diminish in any way the work you (plural) have done since 2019 and I think the plan is good. But I'm convinced, that the timing is not right. &quot;The end of August&quot; I find far to soon if you &quot;need to make sure what else the largest communities may need.&quot;
::# I wasn't able to find the &quot;we talk to the «big guys» first&quot;-idea anywhere. The only thing I find is &quot;We would like our improvements to be default on all wikis in August/September 2022.&quot; There will probably not be time to talk to the «small guys». And in addition, the text to translate suggest, that there is a choice, and you'd like to &quot;talk&quot;. My impression is you want to ask: how can we best ask for bug reports. That might (and probably will) work, but I don't want to be part of exactly this approach.
::# same as first and second.
::# How is the improvement measured? Is there any &quot;hard data&quot; anywhere? Everything needs more clicks hence more time. It &quot;looks&quot; a little better and modern, which I also find necessary and good. But what is actually &quot;improved&quot;? 
::#*I need more scrolling for the TOC, 
::#* I will need more work (and creative ideas btw) for rework of community-pages that rely on the &quot;old&quot; version of the TOC at the moment, and even worse, I need to check the visual appearance and usability of pages in even more configurations (to mobile and desktop and VE and source, now I need to add different skins), 
::#* I need more clicks for almost anything (if menus are hidden, but this is nearly imperative, to get at least some use out of the new ToC), 
::#* I'm deeply troubled about the &quot;impression&quot; some changes might make (which hence wouldn't be an improvement either and which is by default not measurable)... 
::#* What about the visually impaired? Is it an improvement for them too, any hard data? 
::#:Please, feel free to elaborate. I know it would be baloney to change the name in the last 6 weeks of the work. My point is not to do that, but to take a step back, review what's done so far, and if the decision will be made to prolong the process a really long time, then ''maybe'' one ''might'' think about a change, and if it's only to get less of the &quot;if you do this I'll be done with wiki...&quot;-criticism that's just consuming time for everyone.
::# I'm not addressing technical issues. It's the possible &quot;hiding&quot; of prominent community-links in the sidebar by using elaborate restructuring and collapsing mechanisms. On that the single communities won't have influence as far as I see it at the moment.
::PS: I appreciate trying to cheer me up (&quot;make you less sad&quot;), but my sadness stems from the uncertainty how this will all work out. In the end the prototype is only a prototype. And how much work in the community must be done afterwards to facilitate the &quot;improvements&quot; is also not clear. The main point being, that I struggle with checking and cross-checking functionalities in different systems. It was okay until the move of the ToC. But as long as there is still work to be done, I can't even think about workarounds for not having the ToC where and how I was used to it. 
::Regards [[User:HirnSpuk|HirnSpuk]] ([[User talk:HirnSpuk|talk]]) 07:34, 21 July 2022 (UTC)
:::Hey @[[user:HirnSpuk|HirnSpuk]], thank you for your continued feedback. It's been super helpful. We've rewritten our message to German-language Wikipedia based on your thoughts and the learnings we've gotten through similar conversations on other wikis. We're going to post our next draft for translation this week - let us know what you think of it! We're open to suggestions. Your continued thoughts are much appreciated!
:::In terms of your individual questions:
:::# The timing is not right
:::#* We really do believe that our changes are improvements already! We're eager to bring them to readers and editors. As you have pointed out, we've been building these for three years. We've received feedback from German-language Wikipedians, and many other communities. As you also know, we've performed prototype testing with editors across 30+ languages, and different types of quantitative testing on each feature. Many significant requests have already been discussed.
:::#* The main reason we want to have this conversation now (while we're putting the finishing touches, like the visual refinements and changes to the table of contents) is that we'd like to see if any of the feedback might change what those finishing touches are. We'd also feel more confident with our plan once we know what the additional work we need to do is, if any.
:::#* The process we're envisioning is to collect bugs and requests, and triage these into three categories: (1) the ones that must be done before the deployment, (2) the ones that can wait until after the deployment, and (3) the ones that we don't think are a priority. Our goal for the conversation with the communities is to establish what lies in each bucket such that the communities are comfortable with changing the default.
:::#* We understand if a conversation might take longer on a given community, and do not plan on cutting any discussion short just to reach a deadline. We made a mistake with Japanese Wikipedia and made the change prior to acknowledging a common process. We'd like to avoid that mistake with the other wikis, hence the lengthier discussion with German-language Wikipedia.
:::# The &quot;we talk to the «big guys» first&quot;-idea
:::#* We try to take the approach of equity. We have conversations across the top 25 Wikipedias by size. We've attended a [[m:Wikisource Triage meetings|Wikisource Triage meeting]] and two [[m:SWAN|SWAN]] meetings. The set of pilot wikis is diverse. We inform the big and small communities about our office hours using different channels, incl. MassMessages, Tech News, Discord, Telegram, Facebook. We're going to have the interpretation support in the top UN languages.
:::# How is the improvement measured?
:::#* Thank you for pointing this out. This very crucial piece was missing. We'll be adding a summary of our findings to our future messages.
:::#* You'll find the short answer [[:w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)#UX_research_and_usability_testing|on the English Wikipedia Village Pump page]], quite paradoxically brought to everyone's attention using the &quot;hidden&quot; template. For details on any individual feature, go to the “features” section of our documentation, select the feature you are interested in, and review the qualitative and quantitative sections.
:::# It's the possible &quot;hiding&quot; of prominent community-links in the sidebar by using elaborate restructuring and collapsing mechanisms. On that the single communities won't have influence as far as I see it at the moment.
:::#* This is a great question. So far, our interviews with users have shown that newcomers are NOT more likely to begin contributing based on the number (or even presence) of community links. In fact, having so many options at hand made them feel unwelcomed to the interface as they didn't instinctively know where the links would lead, and thus, felt intimidated or lost.
:::#* We think a better method is to have fewer links that are clearer to understand and pave more intuitive ways. These links are, among others, edit or history. We are working with the Growth and Editing teams to identify how we can increase the understanding of these links for readers and newcomers - both so they will know where the content they are reading is coming from, but also as a means of introducing them to contribution. See also: [[Core Experiences]].
:::# What about the visually impaired? Is it an improvement for them too, any hard data?
:::#* We've been doing accessibility testings with the American Foundation for the Blind. You'll find more information in this task: [[phab:T310033|T310033]]. Generally though, part of this work goes beyond Desktop Improvements, and is done by our designers who build basic user interface elements for all the teams.
:::Hey, on a side note, have you ever attended our office hours? I (Szymon) don't recall this. You'd have heard answers to some similar questions if you had joined us earlier. Anyway, feel invited.
:::[[user:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]], [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 02:44, 29 July 2022 (UTC)

== Sorry but user expereince is kind of awful ==

Okay. I've given &quot;Vector 2022&quot; a shot for a while and it is just confusing and difficult to use. Too much animation-style issues. Too much whitespace. Difficult discovery of functions. Difficult to obtain a feeling of confidence in mastery. If I would have been keeping a log, I'd have dozens of gripes by now. I don't wish to waste time enumerating specific things because it's besides the point because the entire experience is bad. I can't hack it anymore. I thought I'd get used to it but I'm going back to Vector 2010. Keep things simple. Keep it static. I know many people but a lot of work into this and it was a valid attempt but it just didn't suceed in improving over Vector 2010. [[User:Jason Quinn|Jason Quinn]] ([[User talk:Jason Quinn|talk]]) 02:24, 26 July 2022 (UTC)

== External link icon ==

The external link icon currently deployed on mediawiki.org looks horrible. What happened? The icon shown at [[phab:T261391]] in the &quot;After&quot; screenshot looks much better. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 19:55, 26 July 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]], what's the difference you're referring to? Could you maybe share a screenshot? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:36, 26 July 2022 (UTC)
::@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]]: Here.
::[[File:Vector2022 Broken External Link Icon.png|thumb|The icon looks thin and pixeled. Not like at Phabricator.]] --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 10:48, 27 July 2022 (UTC)
:::I saw that the issue was already reported. Compare [https://phab.wmfusercontent.org/file/data/zm2w6tyla7ap4pm54oxw/PHID-FILE-jxp2g6oxik24v6zcst5o/image.png this] with [https://phab.wmfusercontent.org/file/data/6tvujxqmvz53tlojn4qi/PHID-FILE-gq23v5redy2o4ki63rnq/Screen_Shot_2022-07-21_at_11.46.24_AM.png this]. Also, for me it looks like the arrow is misshaped. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 10:53, 27 July 2022 (UTC)
::::Hi @[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]] - thanks for your report.  The icon is indeed broken as of right now.  We're looking into this right now and hope to have a fix later this week or early next week.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 12:05, 28 July 2022 (UTC)

== Sticky header causes TOC to instantly offset on appearing ==

When scrolling down a page, at the moment the sticky header shows up (smoothly), the TOC offset is incremented to display below the header. However, the TOC offset change is instant, unlike the header. It's just a small visual thing, but I think making the TOC offset to follow the smooth header apparition would make pages look more reactive.&lt;br&gt;
Regards, [[User:Epok|Epok]] ([[User talk:Epok|talk]]) 18:54, 29 July 2022 (UTC)

== Sticky sidebar overlaps footer ==

{{tracked|T313060}}
I wonder if anyone have noticed it: when you scroll down until the end of the page (from a desktop) the sticky sidebar overlaps the footer. Because of this, it's impossible to read part of its content and it looks pretty weird. I don't know much about how MediaWiki works, but maybe applying z-index and background-color (or something similar) to the footer could be a possible solution?

Cheers, [[User:Anidae|Anidae]] ([[User talk:Anidae|talk]]) 22:18, 29 July 2022 (UTC)
: Hello @[[user:Anidae|Anidae]]. Thanks for writing here. Yes, we've noticed the bug and we'll fix it. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 11:49, 1 August 2022 (UTC)

== CSS gadget to truly disable max-width limit (on jawiki) ==

Hi, developers. I am aokomoriuta, a.k.a. jawiki sysop&amp;IFA, and was the [[usability:Releases/Default_Switch#Phase III Deployment|Phase III UX Ambassador for the (legacy) vector skin switching]].

In this thread, I'd like to notify you (developers) about the gadget '''NewVector-MaxWidth.css''', which is provided on Japanese Wikipedia to solve the max-width problem on Vector2022 and problems on the gadget linked from your FAQ page.

[[File:NewVector-MaxWidth example.png|800px|center]]

----

I understand why you think the limitation is reasonable. I won't make a counterargument to limit max-width as the default settings.

However, the limitation is NOT THE BEST FOR ALL USERS, but only most. Some users (including me) want to read Wikipedia and other articles as wide as possible (the browser's window-width).

I know you linked the gadget for such users ([[en:User:Jdlrobson/vector-max-width-toggle.js]]) from the [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Frequently_asked_questions#Why don’t we just make it a setting?|FAQ page]].

I tried it, but it's not good for me. There are three problems;

* I need to click the button to switch the width on each page.
* I can feel a little latency to see the switched page because JavaScript might take some instructions to overwrite the width settings, especially on my light laptop computer.
* The width is not maximized. It makes the width only about two times. As I wrote above, it is not enough.

To solve the above problems, I have provided a user custom css ([[:ja:プロジェクト:ウィキ技術部/スクリプト開発/trunk/newvector-maxwidth.css]]) to truly maximized the width on Japanese Wikipedia.

This method is significantly lighter than the gadget you provided, and easy to maintain because it needs only to specify the element's class/id which you limit the max-width. I will continue to maintain and provide Japanese Wikipedia users as long as I don't find an alternative way.

You can link the CSS from your (FAQ) pages, or take over its development and maintenance to provide all Wikimedia sites.
I also welcome feedback/request/comments from all developers and users. Please reply in this thread.

I hope this thread and your developments improve user experience successfully.

&lt;small&gt;日本語版の利用者の方へ(For Japanese users)：ガジェットに関する意見・要望・コメントなどは[[:ja:Wikipedia‐ノート:ベクター (2022年版)/横幅制限の撤廃]]でも受け付けていて、日本語ができる人はそちらに書いてもらったほうが応答や解決が早いと思います。&lt;/small&gt; [[User:青子守歌|aokomoriuta]] ([[User talk:青子守歌|talk]]) 06:58, 31 July 2022 (UTC)

== Design decision against the Wikimedia Movement strategy recommendations ==

{{tracked|T287609}}
Hello! The Desktop Improvements (sic) project has decided, against the Wikimedia Movement recommendations, to hide by default the links to sister projects to non logged users. The [[:m:Strategy/Wikimedia movement/2018-20/Recommendations/Improve User Experience|Improve User Experience]] recommendation textually says:

* ''Tools to connect '''cross-project''' and cross-language functionalities to provide an enhanced experience of the knowledge contained in the Wikimedia ecosystem for a particular interest, informational need, or inquiry.'' (bold text is mine).

We can have different views on aesthetics, but hiding the cross-project links instead of making them more prominent is against the recommendations. I have tried to discuss this in Phabricator, but there doesn't seem to be any way to discuss seriously this error. Thanks. [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 20:27, 1 August 2022 (UTC)

:[[User:Theklan|Theklan]], thank you for your concern and for keeping us on our toes. To clarify: the idea behind the goal that you've quoted is is to build systems and tools (such as structured data) that allow us to incorporate content from sister projects within Wikipedia. As we know from data collection simply linking to sister projects does not work effectively. So I respectfully disagree that we're are going &quot;against the Wikimedia Movement recommendations&quot;.
:Secondly, as we've discussed in the past: with each improvement comes a tradeoff, and sometimes when our principles/goals conflict with one another we are forced to make difficult decisions. So even if we had a movement goal to provide links to sister projects (which we do not), it still might be okay to collapse those links in some cases. We cannot offer people every link at all times — we know from research that this decreases the quality of the overall reading experience. So yes, the links in the sidebar are more difficult to access now. We are already aware of this. But the overall improvement to the reading experience makes this tradeoff worth it. This is the conclusion we have arrived at through data collection and testing. These decisions are not easy to make, and we know that certain people will be upset by them. I am sorry if you disagree with the conclusion we have come to.
:Thankfully the Structured data team are actively working on various experiments that bring content from sister projects directly into Wikipedia. You can read more about that project here: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T306341.  [[User:AHollender (WMF)|AHollender (WMF)]] ([[User talk:AHollender (WMF)|talk]]) 22:31, 1 August 2022 (UTC)
::&quot;Bring content from sister projects directly into Wikipedia&quot; doesn't seem like a recommendation, because we can also bring content from Wikiquotes to Wikisource, without using Wikipedia. So, sorry, but no. This recommendation is clear: disconnecting cross-project links goes against the recommendation. [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 07:58, 2 August 2022 (UTC)
:::@[[User:Theklan|Theklan]] you can read more about how content from sister projects is being incorporated into Wikipedia here: [[Structured Data Across Wikimedia/Search Improvements]] [[User:AHollender (WMF)|AHollender (WMF)]] ([[User talk:AHollender (WMF)|talk]]) 16:03, 2 August 2022 (UTC)
::::That's a good initative, yes. Is not related to what we are discussing here. What are the steps to make links to sister projects more prominent in the new design? [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 08:04, 3 August 2022 (UTC)
:::::In my understanding that question was already answered above: &quot;simply linking to sister projects does not work effectively&quot;. --[[User:AKlapper (WMF)|AKlapper (WMF)]] ([[User talk:AKlapper (WMF)|talk]]) 10:35, 3 August 2022 (UTC)
::::::&quot;Simply linking to sister projects does not work effectively&quot; can be a good sentence. Just deleting the links is, surely, less effective than having there. If the links there are not effective, we should have a place to put them on (that was my only point in the Phabricator ticket, but as usual it gets ignored, or the discussion goes to harassment if I have a point). Is there or will there be a place to put the links, or are we going to get rid of them just because they weren't prominent? (I remember that I have been constructive in this discussion, I even presented a mock-up to make my point more clear). [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 17:49, 3 August 2022 (UTC)

== Survey ==

Does [[phab:T314286|this survey]] will be run on English Wikipedia only? --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 09:25, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]] - no, we will be running the survey on approximately 10 languages, depending on where we are able to get translations.  We're starting with English Wikipedia while we wait for translations for other language wikis.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 11:15, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Namespaces in the search menu ==

It seems it is possible to improve the search as follows. For example, only for registered users. Editors often have to search for templates and links to help pages in the Wikipedia namespace, and registered users can probably do this more often than they type the names of articles in the search. To do this, it is convenient to type the name of the page directly in the search field, for example: &quot;template:page name&quot;, &quot;wikipedia:page name&quot;. It is even more convenient to type this with aliases of the namespaces &quot;t:name&quot; and &quot;wp:name&quot;. The inconvenient thing here is that you need to type the &quot;:&quot; character. Someone can switch the layout to English for this, where &quot;:&quot; is easier to type. And someone does not know about keyboard shortcuts on their language layout at all (there are even people who select and copy with the mouse and refuse to copy through ctrl+c/ctrl+v). It seems it would be convenient to have a namespace selection feature right in the drop-down list. For example, if it were possible to switch the search to these namespaces (or add these namespaces to the search output) if the namespace alias was the first &quot;wp  name&quot; - this is implemented in browsers when you can first type &quot;[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/95426?hl=en site search shortcut]&quot; in the address bar. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

:Hi @[[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]]. First of all, thank you for all your suggestions. I've taken the liberty and separated these into different topics. I think it'll be easier to talk. I needed to create the headings, and I tried to get the ideas reflected well, but if you think the headings could be better, please edit. You're the original author here.
:Regarding the namespaces in the search menu, I could swear I've seen something like this somewhere. I'll ask my team if we could do anything about it. Perhaps this would be a task for a separate team working just on the search... well, I'll get back to you. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 18:34, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== The header area in the new editor is not active for clicks and text selection ==

Sometimes when editing pages, it becomes necessary to select the page title and copy it. If you open editing in the [[2017 wikitext editor]] (for example, a random page that you have not opened before or you do not save site data through the browser settings), then the title is gray and it cannot be selected and copied. If you open (also a random page) for editing in the Visual editor, then the title is black and it can be selected and copied. It is necessary that you can always select and copy the title. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Open in reading mode without using scrolling ==

It is often necessary, when a page is in editing mode, to open a duplicate page in reading mode in a new tab to view or use a wiki link or footnote. Somewhere it was announced that you saw how much less often users began to scroll back to the beginning. To open a duplicate page, you need to scroll up, then down again to the place of editing. Maybe someday you will have ideas on how to open the reading mode without scrolling. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Add a help link to the languages widget ==

As a registered user, I would like to see languages that are more understandable to me higher in the list, for example, English. For many users, the main question is how to make specific languages higher. About this maybe there is somewhere deep in the help. But it seems it would be more useful to somehow find out that the user can influence the list of favorite languages, or go to this help from the menu itself with a minimum of clicks. And I would also like to know how to get rid of unnecessary suggested languages, which I clicked only once. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Placeholder for the search languages widget ==

As an editor, I sometimes have to open wikis in languages that are mentioned in the text (for example, as a country) or used in an article (for example, as a word in a [[:w:Category:Lang-x_templates|lang-x]] template). I understand in my own language what the language I need is called, but I do not know its original writing, which is shown in the drop-down menu. The first thing I do is spend time scrolling the list up and down in search of something similar. Yes, you can enter a name in the &quot;search&quot;, but this is 1) not very often required 2) you need to know about it in advance or remember, or the old experience of the language list prevails without this &quot;search&quot;. The problem is that the text &quot;Search for a language&quot; is too standardized and speaks poorly about the possibilities. I would like this placeholder to somehow directly and better than now tell me &quot;how&quot; to find (describes the actions - what should I type) a language if I know its name in my language. In my opinion, as the best example, the text in the placeholder of the field suggesting that we write a description of the edit when publishing the page &quot;Describe what you changed&quot; is much more informative and better suggests what needs to be done. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Languages' names in the language of the interface ==

For the old location of languages in the sidebar, a user script was made locally ([https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/MediaWiki:Gadget-iwcore.js] [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Gadgets] iwlocalnames iwhints iwcore), which registered users could enable for themselves and see the names of languages in their own language. It seems that this script was quite popular. It may be worth making a switch in the menu for everyone, even for unregistered users, which could change the language names to the interface language of this wiki (or the interface language that is selected in your settings) and back to self-names in one click. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Offer more pages in the search using the technology of translators ==

You said that readers prefer to look at one language and somehow &quot;don't know&quot; about other languages, and for this the language selector was placed at the top. If we look at enwiki, where there are 6 million articles, then this is much more than in other language wikis. When you search in yandex, an offer to read an article in enwiki through their translator often appears in its output. For example, if we search for &quot;список портов по грузообороту&quot;, the search site will offer us this article &quot;[[w:List of busiest ports by cargo tonnage]] in the following form [https://translate.yandex.ru/translate?lang=en-ru&amp;url=https%3A%2F%2Fen.wikipedia.org%2Fwiki%2FList_of_busiest_ports_by_cargo_tonnage&amp;view=c]. We have already used yandex in the [[Content translation]] extension. Perhaps for some translation directions it would be possible to suggest in our search to view the page in / through their translator. Or only show results from another language wiki by somehow translating the query (for the search engine itself, in the same way as they do, but by any translator) from the language of the current wiki. (From the point of view of spreading knowledge, this makes sense. It is unclear in what form it could be.) [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Add a link to the FAQ ==

It may be useful to add links from the old [[Structured Discussions/FAQ#Why is there so much whitespace/padding?]] to the [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Frequently asked questions]], the information (by links) in it at that time looked convincing. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

:Huh, you've found an old and potentially useful page. Your idea is good. However, there's an issue about the context. The Foundation isn't doing anything about Structured Discussions. I imagine if we provided this link, it would look like we were encouraging more people to use Structured Data, or like these projects were connected. What do you think? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 18:25, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
::I meant reusing these links &quot;Whitespace myth&quot;, &quot;Best practices analysis&quot; and footnotes, not links to the Flow help [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 18:37, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
:::Oh, OK, thank you for clarification! [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 20:11, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== ToC in the diff view ==

{{tracked|T311529}}
In revision comparison mode, ToC looks like a regular bulleted list without styles https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Botany&amp;diff=1101340041&amp;oldid=1098510198&amp;diffmode=source [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)
: Thank you, we'll work on it. You can follow our activities on Phabricator. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 12:08, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Feature request ==

Hey, I love the new Vector styles overall, but the user menu is the one area that slows me down. I tend to use my user contributions page a lot to check recent activity on articles I created or edited recently, because my watchlist is quite large. Other editors might frequently use tools collapsed in the menu like their Sandbox, but not user contributions or a watchlist. 

Consequently, I'd love more flexibility when it comes to... 
# how many menu items are shown in the header vs in the collapsed menu. On many monitor sizes there is a lot of wasted whitespace in between the search field and the user menu, and being able to show more items and then have it collapse dynamically as the viewport shifts is basically what the whole point of a more modern header layout is for. 
# the ability to customize which menu options are in the header based on my needs, so for that for instance I could hide notifs (I get very few alerts) but show user contribs. 

This kind of customization is similar to how the Slack sidebar can be reordered hierarchically by each user, but with sane defaults in place. This kind of addition would let us keep the same basic principle of a more refined set of menu items with a dropdown for the rest, but let users decide for themselves which tools they need quick access to the most. 

[[User:Steven Walling|Steven Walling]] ([[User talk:Steven Walling|talk]]) 18:02, 3 August 2022 (UTC)

== Sidebar overlapping ==

The main menu sidebar is overlapping (Vector 2022). Unusable. [[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]] ([[User talk:Grimes2|talk]]) 14:20, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]], thanks for writing here. Is this about the issue reported in [[#Sticky sidebar overlaps footer]]? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 17:56, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
::No! https://abload.de/image.php?img=2022-08-0420_03_33-grxcjnf.png [[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]] ([[User talk:Grimes2|talk]]) 18:09, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
:::I can't replicate this :/ Let's perhaps add ?safemode=1 to the URL and see if the issue still exists? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 18:24, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
::::No success. https://abload.de/image.php?img=2022-08-0420_35_52-gr10kgs.png [[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]] ([[User talk:Grimes2|talk]]) 18:39, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
::::My investigation: Opera was set to font size big. Using font size normal solved the problem. Thanks. [[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]] ([[User talk:Grimes2|talk]]) 18:59, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Sufficiently narrow window just shows some separator lines ==
{{tracked|T314708}}
I don't know when this started in the past few days, but (using Vector-2022 of course) as of now a narrow window, meaning one snapped to the right side of my 1920x1080 screen or even narrower than that, starts with the entire left-panel list of links, with their horizontal dividers spread across the window, before I even see the page title, right at the bottom of the window. Zooming the browser to 90% brings back a more normal display. This happens on every page I see; it's not dependent on images, or break markers, or the size of the TOC. I hope that's enough information without an image. I can't imagine I'm alone but didn't see any relevant subject line on this page.

Configuration: Edge 103.0.1264.77 or Chrome 103.0.5060.134, Windows 10, scaling 100%. English Wikipedia, any of several namespaces. [[User:DavidBrooks|DavidBrooks]] ([[User talk:DavidBrooks|talk]]) 16:42, 5 August 2022 (UTC)

:Ditto on my Surface Pro: 2736x1824 at 175% scaling. [[User:DavidBrooks|DavidBrooks]] ([[User talk:DavidBrooks|talk]]) 17:59, 5 August 2022 (UTC) ETA: screenshot of this page [https://1drv.ms/u/s!AtuCZY0YF4hGpK05RoIu3pNFNjW2Rg?e=5OCaOz]. [[User:DavidBrooks|DavidBrooks]] ([[User talk:DavidBrooks|talk]]) 18:04, 5 August 2022 (UTC)</text>
      <sha1>a05zf01u6rh924gch5li03rgzby0oam</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402765</id>
      <parentid>5401626</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:40:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Elizium23</username>
        <id>311572</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/*  Search suggestions and keyboard accessibility in Vector 2022 */ new section</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="169575" xml:space="preserve">{{Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Header}}
{{User:Dexbot/Archivebot
|archive = Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive%(counter)s
| counter = 4
|algo = old(42d)
|counter = 1
|maxarchivesize = 200K
|minthreadstoarchive = 1
|minthreadsleft = 4
}}
{{tmbox|text=Between August 8 and 19, one of us (Olga or Szymon) will not be working. During that time, we will be less responsive, but will try to get back to your questions and thoughts as soon as possible.}}
{{WMF present
|1=SGrabarczuk (WMF)|timezone_1=UTC+1/2|lang_1=pl, en, fr|photo_1=Wikispotkanie-warszawa-2021-07-03-rd-26.jpg
|2=OVasileva (WMF)|timezone_2=UTC+1/2|lang_2=en, es, bg|photo_2=Vasileva, Olga January 2017.jpg
}}
{{Archive box|
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive1|Archive1 (before the 1st batch of deployments)]]
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive2|Archive2 (before the 2nd batch of deployments)]]
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive3|Archive3 (before the 3nd batch of deployments)]]
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive4|Archive4]]
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements|Current discussion]]
}}
{{Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Talk page intro}}

__TOC__


== Where is the TOC? ==

People here are complaining about it. I don't even get one! [[User:Betaneptune|Betaneptune]] ([[User talk:Betaneptune|talk]]) 17:38, 25 May 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Betaneptune|Betaneptune]]. Do you still have this problem? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 17:52, 8 June 2022 (UTC)
::Hi ! I have the same problem on the French version of Wikipedia. The TOC just disappeared. The problem appears in Firefox desktop (last version 101.0.1), even in &quot;troubleshoot&quot; mode with all my add-ons deactivated. However, the problem does not appear in Chrome. This is extremely confusing. I reported it on some discussion page on the french version of WP, but I also mention it here, as I'm not sure at all where to report the problem for it to be taken into account. [[Special:Contributions/85.169.195.108|85.169.195.108]] 17:56, 26 June 2022 (UTC)
: The TOC is now on the left side, but after other menu lists. It should probably come first. But to keep things accessible, the (hidden) &quot;jump to main menu&quot; link should be kept as first element of course. [[User:Psychoslave|Psychoslave]] ([[User talk:Psychoslave|talk]]) 15:00, 5 July 2022 (UTC)
::Agreed. The TOC ''really'' should come first. The {{mono|#mw-navigation}} menu (which currently appears first) is comprised of mostly ancillary links unrelated to the page's content, many of which are rarely used (e.g., ''&quot;Download as PDF&quot;'', ''&quot;Create a book&quot;'', ''&quot;Permanent link&quot;'', etc). [[User:OmenBreeze|OmenBreeze]] ([[User talk:OmenBreeze|talk]]) 00:17, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
:::{{ping|85.169.195.108}} It has been tracked here [[phab:T312022]].--[[Special:Contributions/37.103.14.65|37.103.14.65]] 09:03, 7 July 2022 (UTC)
::::Suggestions:
::::* ''If'' the TOC will ''not'' come first, the other menu lists on the left side should become hidden (collapsed) when there is a TOC below them, so that the TOC is always visible.
::::* The TOC should always be shown in its entirety, and not displayed as a box that you have to scroll through.
::::[[User:Förbätterlig|Förbätterlig]] ([[User talk:Förbätterlig|talk]]) 14:03, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== Too narrow (again) ==

Why waste all that space? I have a nice wide screen so I want to take advantage of it. Those who want to have it narrow can just reduce their window sizes? Overall, not a great look. Not exciting. Quite boring.--[[User:Xania|Xania]] ([[User talk:Xania|talk]]) 11:23, 22 December 2021 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Xania|Xania]], you can read about our [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Limiting_content_width#Goals_and_motivation|goals and motivation]] for limiting the width. Also, we are working on a solution to use the empty space. Could you take a look at [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Fourth prototype testing/it|our fourth prototype]] and write more on what you think about arranging the space as it is presented there? Thank you in advance! [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 14:59, 26 April 2022 (UTC)
:: Oh my dear God, why don't you give an option to unrestrict the width?? It's beyond ridiculous how absolutely tiny is the page content on my monitor horizontally! I have to scroll all the time to read! Don't ruin Wikipedia the same way Fandom was ruined! [[Special:Contributions/90.188.46.13|90.188.46.13]] 04:38, 13 May 2022 (UTC)
:::We have given this option. This can be done with the [[:en:User:Jdlrobson/vector-max-width-toggle.js|gadget one of our engineers made]]. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 03:39, 14 May 2022 (UTC)
::::Thanks, but maybe we should have an easy plug-in system for ordinary users or, at least, the instructions how to apply it and a place where to find those customisations. By default it is really narrow to read and it feels like a news site rather than an encyclopedia article. [[User:Krnl0138|Krnl0138]] ([[User talk:Krnl0138|talk]]) 09:55, 15 May 2022 (UTC)
:::::I agree, the toggle option should be there by default! By the way, that script does not work well currently, so I [[:en:User:Arthurfragoso/vector-max-width-toggle.js|updated it here]]. — [[User:Arthurfragoso|Arthurfragoso]] ([[User talk:Arthurfragoso|talk]]) 13:28, 21 May 2022 (UTC)
::I don't understand why you are still pushing on us that bad design choice. It still is time to pull the plug and start to work on a plain page design. You are convincing no one here. Please, please, really, please stop this nonsense. Forcing bad choices on your users because you are the only product on the market is never a good thing.
::Since it has been forced without asking anyone on the French Wikipedia I had to register just to come back to the normal and good design. That's something, as a simple reader, I should never have had to do in the first place.
::So one last time, please come back to reason and stop hurting your user base foolishly. [[User:DerpFox|DerpFox]] ([[User talk:DerpFox|talk]]) 21:33, 13 May 2022 (UTC)
:::Hello @[[User:DerpFox|DerpFox]], thanks for your comment. Have you maybe followed the links I've shared in my answer to Xania? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 03:42, 14 May 2022 (UTC)
::The lines in the fourth prototype seem to be slightly wider to me on 1080p display than in the current version of 2022 vector design, but those empty strips on the sides, each of which are almost the size of the old navigation mv-panel, constantly remind about the space wasted.
::If the only reason of this thinning is the recommended line lengths in symbols and you want to keep it for any price, I would suggest using a dynamic font size, so, for example, starting from some resolution the symbols just grow larger. This might also reduce the eye strain connected to focusing on the small text.
::[[User:Kageneko|Kageneko]] ([[User talk:Kageneko|talk]]) 13:51, 17 May 2022 (UTC)
::I had a browse over the reasons for the change, but I still don't like or agree with the main justification more or less boiling down to &quot;everyone else is doing it so we should too&quot;. Even in the linked examples, the page still feels a lot more &quot;full&quot; despite having a dedicated deadspace on the site, due to the way the page has been very carefully designed in a mixture of different kinds of block contents (images, text interactive eliments, etc).
::Accepted Webpage standards used to be against having blank, unused and waisted deadspace, but at some point in the last 10 years there seems to have been a weird shift to the opposite where deadspace is all the rage, though it's not one I've personally ever liked or agreed with.
::While I'm sure there are good uses of limiting page width, I'm not sure if Wikipedia, being a site that is mainly made up of text would really benefit from it as it's likely just going to squash pages and increase the amount of vertical scrolling required to navigate. [[User:Dave247|Dave247]] ([[User talk:Dave247|talk]]) 07:32, 18 May 2022 (UTC)
::Yeah it's too narrow otherwise. the look is very nice, it's not boring as you tell.  [[User:Crater bug|Crater bug]] ([[User talk:Crater bug|talk]]) 15:28, 28 May 2022 (UTC)
:I totally agree! I dislike the vector skin because how small it is. [[User:OverAWallOfMetaKnight|OverAWallOfMetaKnight]] ([[User talk:OverAWallOfMetaKnight|talk]]) 15:55, 15 May 2022 (UTC)
:Agreed. I use a 3440x1440 screen (usually with a tiled layout), and this new layout forces all the content to occupy a comically narrow strip, instead of allowing me to choose the width myself. [[User:Emptyflask|Emptyflask]] ([[User talk:Emptyflask|talk]]) 13:47, 17 May 2022 (UTC)
:I agree, there is simply too much space wasted that could be used for more article space and a button specifically for those who want to edit wikipedia [[User:Techny3000|Techny3000]] ([[User talk:Techny3000|talk]]) 02:52, 28 May 2022 (UTC)
:hard to read I'm glad I stayed the same as before No changes required [[Special:Contributions/240B:11:E7E0:5E00:6005:3399:E6C:2B48|240B:11:E7E0:5E00:6005:3399:E6C:2B48]] 14:06, 2 July 2022 (UTC)
:Strongly agree. I want to decide the readable width for me. In the old skin and most websites, I can do it by adjusting the width of window. I definitely don't want to care about &quot;CORRECT READABLE WIDTH FOR EVERYONE&quot; decided by someone somewhere, even if they are great scholars. [[User:Kyoku|Kyoku]] ([[User talk:Kyoku|talk]]) 08:32, 10 July 2022 (UTC)
:Agreed wholeheartedly. By the way, the design is even worse on a low DPI widescreen display, like 1366x768, 1280x800/720, etc. Try it out with Device Rendering options in your browser, usually somewhere in Dev Tools. I just got hit with Vector 2022 after coming here from wikipedia where I've had Vector 2010 enabled for a while and I forgot how bad it was!
:Wikimedia Foundation, '''do not forget that people all around the world use your service'''. People who might have a budget/old device with a low resolution display, or schoolchildren with a Chromebook or something! No default layout should ever create this much dead space and padding in a desktop environment. NONE. Nor should it ever consume nearly 1/3 of screen real estate that can never ever be used by the main content.
:The floating ToC looks like absolute garbage at 720p. I have WUXGA and 4K devices and it isn't any better there either. I'm not sure who the design is aimed at, other than the designers pushing the modern scourge of padding and white space onto the rest of the Internet. [[User:-αβοοδ|-αβοοδ]] ([[User talk:-αβοοδ|talk]]) 17:41, 29 July 2022 (UTC)

After reviewing the posted defense of the narrowing and the feedback listed here, this feature belongs entirely as an optional setting. It most certainly should not be the website's default. [[User:RightQuark|RightQuark]] ([[User talk:RightQuark|talk]]) 01:29, 24 May 2022 (UTC)
:The defence of the narrowing seems to have little real-world bonuses. It may be theoretically good but makes it bad to read because Wikipedia articles can be long [[User:Torqueing|Torqueing]] ([[User talk:Torqueing|talk]]) 17:10, 24 May 2022 (UTC)

I also have a wide screen monitor. I do not like this forced width shrinkage in the Vector 2022 skin. [[User:OhanaUnited|&lt;b&gt;&lt;font color=&quot;#0000FF&quot;&gt;OhanaUnited&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/b&gt;]][[User talk:OhanaUnited|&lt;b&gt;&lt;font color=&quot;green&quot;&gt;&lt;sup&gt;Talk page&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/b&gt;]] 17:24, 9 June 2022 (UTC)

In current form without a toggle for width this layout is unacceptable on large monitors. Even my old 14'' monitor. For now I am reverting to avoid having in forced horizontal white-space. [[User:Phatom87|phatom87]] ([[User talk:Phatom87|talk]]) 14:32, 20 June 2022 (UTC)

:Absolutely unacceptable, too narrow, an unjustified  waste of space. [[User:Loupeter|Loupeter]] ([[User talk:Loupeter|talk]]) 10:39, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

:It sounds like the fixed-max-width (assuming one's window is wide enough, and regardless of how much wider it might be) is a compromise between the needs of two different types of reading activities. I have both habits (skim vs detail-read), and felt especially the concern that the text doesn't obey what *I* do with my window. A reason I might widen my window is exactly because I want wider content. A comprimse necessarily isn't ideal for either one side. A better solution is to make it easy and discoverable how to get the *best* feel for whatever one is trying to do, rather than forcing so many to have a sub-par experience. A third-party gadget isn't discoverable and is surely more fragile than a first-class toggle feature of the skin itself. [[User:DMacks|DMacks]] ([[User talk:DMacks|talk]]) 15:16, 29 June 2022 (UTC)

In my opinion, [[Skin:Timeless]] does a much better job at restricting article space to improve readability. This is because the UI is not entirely positioned on the left-hand side of the screen, and the background colour is not blindingly bright. If the intention is to create whitespace, please don't use bright colours. Timeless also has more space for pictures. For the past 20 years, articles have been written with the understanding that 80%+ of the screen will be for content. There are width and upright tags all over the place that, once viewed with this narrow a perspective, become overwhelming.

A skin should not change the fundamental readability of the page. Compare [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_World_Before_the_Flood?useskin=vector-2022 this] with [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_World_Before_the_Flood?useskin=timeless this]. In Timeless, when the content ends, grey begins. In Vector 2022, it looks like the HTML was corrupted and failed to load because it continues with white for no discernable reason. Vector also artificially makes articles look longer than they are, which may actually dissuade people from reading. For instance, using a 27&quot; 16:9 monitor, on the article for Barack Obama, [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barack%20Obama?useskin=vector-2022 Vector] just about lets me see the entire lead on my screen at once. [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barack%20Obama?useskin=timeless Timeless] allows me to see the whole lead quite easily, as well as part of the ToC. [[:en:Line length|Line length]] may be a thing, but you must take into account the total amount of text on the screen at once, too. There's no use having the perfect 50 character line if you need 100 of them all bunched up together. [[User:Anarchyte|Anarchyte]] ([[User talk:Anarchyte|talk]]) 13:18, 13 July 2022 (UTC)

:Quick update and aside: I just learned about wide-vector-2022. This is fantastic. I actually like the ToC being placed where it is when using that gadget. If the plan was to make the wide skin the default, I would be less hesitant. For comparison with the links in my previous message, [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barack%20Obama?useskin=vector-2022&amp;withgadget=wide-vector-2022 here is Barack Obama] with wide-vector-2022. [[User:Anarchyte|Anarchyte]] ([[User talk:Anarchyte|talk]]) 13:25, 13 July 2022 (UTC)
::This &quot;wide-vector-2022&quot; version should be the default IMO. [[User:Some1|Some1]] ([[User talk:Some1|talk]]) 02:50, 17 July 2022 (UTC)
::It's definitely an improvement, but Vector 2010 is still better. I agree with @[[User:Anarchyte|Anarchyte]] - Timeless does a better job of restricting article space than Vector 2022 does. When you look at how much of the left third of the screen is blocked off from article content, Vector 2010 restricts it the least, followed by Timeless, and then finally by Vector 2022 consuming nearly an entire 1/3 of the screen. At low DPI, it's hilariously ugly, and arguably makes readability worse, not better. Vector 2022 sure would be nice though, '''if the ToC was collapsible'''! [[User:-αβοοδ|-αβοοδ]] ([[User talk:-αβοοδ|talk]]) 17:48, 29 July 2022 (UTC)
:&gt; For the past 20 years, articles have been written with the understanding that 80%+ of the screen will be for content.
:I'll just note that for the past 10 years that means you've written things that just do not work that way on mobile. :)
:&gt; A skin should not change the fundamental readability of the page. [..] In Vector 2022, it looks like the HTML was corrupted and failed to load because it continues with white for no discernable reason.
:This seems like a lot of assumptions to me personally. Do we have wider evidence for this ?
:&gt; There's no use having the perfect 50 character line if you need 100 of them all bunched up together.
:Literally every mobile user on the Barack Obama page, the majority of the readers. Screens and screens till you hit the end of the lead...  —[[User:TheDJ|Th&lt;span style=&quot;color: green&quot;&gt;e&lt;/span&gt;DJ (Not WMF)]] ([[User talk:TheDJ|talk]] • [[Special:Contributions/TheDJ|contribs]]) 20:20, 14 July 2022 (UTC)
::{{tq|I'll just note that for the past 10 years that means you've written things that just do not work that way on mobile. :)}}
:::MinervaNeue, when viewed on normal phone screens, ignores width tags. The only difference between writing for desktop screens and mobile screens is file placement. 
::{{tq|This seems like a lot of assumptions to me personally. Do we have wider evidence for this ?}}
:::I don't need to provide evidence to state my opinion. The page looks unfinished with the extra whitespace on the right hand side. If you do want more than just my opinion, CNTRL+F for &quot;whitespace&quot; on this page. 12 other posts mention it.
::{{tq|Literally every mobile user on the Barack Obama page, the majority of the readers. Screens and screens till you hit the end of the lead...}}
:::Difference is that my phone is in my hand. I'm not getting overloaded with line after line if the screen is only 15cm long. I can see a whole paragraph on at once and then scroll when necessary. [[User:Anarchyte|Anarchyte]] ([[User talk:Anarchyte|talk]]) 13:10, 15 July 2022 (UTC)

== Full-width sticky header ==

I'm fine with the text being narrow but the ui and nav bar should be full width. --[[User:Thedonquixotic|Thedonquixotic]] ([[User talk:Thedonquixotic|talk]]) 00:18, 26 May 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:Thedonquixotic|Thedonquixotic]], what do you mean by the ui and nav bar? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 17:54, 8 June 2022 (UTC)
::Not sure what is unclear here. I mean the navbar. As in the bar up at the top of the page with use account, search etc.  [[User:Thedonquixotic|Thedonquixotic]] ([[User talk:Thedonquixotic|talk]]) 19:07, 1 July 2022 (UTC)
::: OK, thanks for clarification, @[[User:Thedonquixotic|Thedonquixotic]]. Let's take a look at [[:File:Diagram showing three layout containers - sidebar closed.jpg|this image]]. This will help us make sure what we're talking about. Now, the navbar (aka the [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Header|header]]) is aligned to the workspace container, so is wider than the content container, but not as wide as the page container. The same applies to the [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Sticky Header|sticky header]]. So you believe the header should be as wide as the page container? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:54, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Consistent skin across the wikis ==

New Skin is burdening me when I switching between languages. (and I zoom when I want improve readability rather put blank space) it Should changing all language together if it is well received and appreciated. should not just some language for set a precedent. [[User:Mutyoro|Mutyoro]] ([[User talk:Mutyoro|talk]]) 19:27, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
:@[[user:Mutyoro|Mutyoro]], thank you for your comment. First, if you want to have the same skin across all wikis, you can choose one [[:ja:特別:GlobalPreferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|global preferences]]. Secondly, the way how Vector 2022 becomes the default across more and more wikis - that's a complicated issue. Week after week, we roll out small changes to Vector 2022 that are visible across all wikis. At the same time, it's much easier (both for our team and for the communities) when some communities use this skin as the default earlier, and some get it later. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:54, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Feedback regarding the new language switcher ==

Hello, I am a French person using Wikipedia in both French and English. I usually decide the language of the article depending on the topic. If it's related to France, I know the French version is going to be better. If it's a general topic, I usually select English.

However, it's been a few months that the language picker has been moved to the top of the screen when an article is display in French. And I really can't get used to it. Sure, it's easy to discover - but it's more complicated to use. Having to click twice is a regression for anyone switching language frequently. An action that used to require half a second now takes 2 seconds. If you do this about ten times every time you browse Wikipedia, it does become irritating...

I hope this feature is not shipped to other languages, and France gets the sidebar back. If you want to make this feature more discoverable, maybe you could add a shortcut but keep the sidebar. Or display a tooltip once in a while to educate newcomers. But please, keep &quot;heavy users&quot; of language switching in consideration. Thanks {{unsigned|77.148.113.166|19:54, 25 January 2022}}
: I'd state this as 'what used to take me a second (finding the right language) now takes 10':  Open language switcher, often don't see the language I want, have to search?  want to see which languages have a version, have to scroll; don't have a quick way to default present all languages by-alpha. [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 16:49, 2 May 2022 (UTC)
: I have to agree with this as another French person frequently switching languages on Wikipedia and Wiktionary. I should add, in addition to the intrinsic usability of the interface (I do agree it's a slight regression for my usage), the fact that most language editions still use the old interface (and most other sites using mediawiki, and the latter is likely to remain the case for a long time) means you don't actually get the opportunity to unlearn it. So every time I want to switch languages from a French page, I will first scroll down to the old location and waste 1s parsing the sidebar and wondering where the links are. I check out other languages almost every time I read any article and those milliseconds of irritation do add up. Anyway, I strongly think that “don't fix what ain't broke” should apply here! [[Special:Contributions/37.183.2.114|37.183.2.114]] 12:06, 8 May 2022 (UTC)

: +1 to [[User:Sj|Sj]]. --[[User:ThurnerRupert|ThurnerRupert]] ([[User talk:ThurnerRupert|talk]]) 18:58, 11 June 2022 (UTC)

Often I use the language switcher not to navigate to the article on different language, but just to look up how that article is titled in a different language. In other words, using Wikipedia's inter-language links as a sort of dictionary. By hovering over the list of languages I can gather multiple titles, see their similarity between languages. With the New Look, language switcher became less accessible, though gathering titles by hovering still works there.
Also this new dropdown-based language switcher seems either to require tricky CSS features or JavaScript. Will it make problems for simplistic browsers like w3m? [[User:Vi2|_Vi]] ([[User talk:Vi2|talk]]) 17:48, 20 May 2022 (UTC)


I find the language switcher the worst of both worlds of the two variants in the old interface. It can be annoying to scroll through 200+ languages in an idiosyncratic ordering (for example, كوردی [Kurdi in Perso-Arabic script] is filed under S for Sorani), but at least I can see them all and preview the name of the article in various target languages. With the drop-down menu in the old interface, I get the languages grouped geographically, and I can also search for a specific language, with the system recognizing many name variations. The new interface gives me a drop down menu with all 200+ languages in the same idiosyncratic order, with no geographic grouping and no ability to search for a specific language. [[User:LincMad|LincMad]] ([[User talk:LincMad|talk]]) 22:28, 25 May 2022 (UTC)


I am primarily an active user on the Japanese Wikipedia (now defaulted to vector2022) and I agree with you completely.
Why doesn't this use the blank spaces on the left and right? No need to hide buttons and functions everywhere just to make the page look hollow. As for the other features, there are so many problems with the new Vector. I definitely want the old version to remain. I will continue to use it and not the new one. --[[User:Sugarman|Sugarman]] ([[User talk:Sugarman|talk]]) 07:14, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Sugarman|Sugarman]]. The space on the right are blank only temporarily. As you can see on our [https://di-collapsible-menus.web.app/Flamingo newest prototype], on the left, there are the sidebar and the table of contents, and on the right, there are some links pulled out of the sidebar.
:As for &quot;No need to hide [...] just to make the page look hollow&quot; - on our pages, we explain why hide some links and functionalities. We ''never'' argue that we want the page to look ''hollow''. We work to make the page look intuitive and welcoming. Entry points to advanced collaboration need to be clear, and not numerous.
:Unless you are an advanced user already. We realize that advanced users may need to access specific links with one click. We encourage you to describe (some day when you decide to spend some time on it) all the problems you would like to see solved. Perhaps this may be addressed by adding/adjusting gadgets and user scripts. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:50, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Feedback on ToC functionality ==

Hello, 

I’m not sure how far you are in the development of the new table of content functionality, but I was looking at [https://en-toc.wmcloud.org/wiki/Moon this prototype] and noticed a potential problem. Here the ToC is on the side and that’s a good thing, but the ToC in the text have also been deleted and that’s not much a good thing. When there is a big infobox, the in-text ToC compensate partly or totally for it, hence the page arrangement take it into consideration for the position of the images. Now if you delete it, all the text will go up, along with the images, but the images can’t always follow, because the infobox, so the right-aligned images are going to pile under it, while the left-aligned will reduce the text to a very small column between them and the infobox. On fr:wp, infoboxes are very widely used, so deleting the in-text ToC is going to break the page layout of most articles (and rather probably upset the community). So I’d suggest that, whatever you do with the ToC, to not delete the in-text ToC until there is also a functionality to move the infobox outside the text too (that would be great by the way, as infoboxes always cause difficulties with page layout). --[[User:Runi Gerardsen|Runi Gerardsen]] ([[User talk:Runi Gerardsen|talk]]) 09:30, 7 February 2022 (UTC)
:I would like to add myself as having this same concern about images. At present, image placement in many articles was determined by this factor of the TOC being inline, sometimes offsetting the issues of long infoboxes and allowing the first image in the first section to be right-justified (like anyone with any experience in professional publishing, I ''really'' hate left-justified lead images as they break up the flow of the text by interposing themselves between heds and text. Similarly, I try to maintain alternation in the justification of images since that mirrors the sweep of our vision and makes text with images easier to read (but of course you don't do this when it creates other layout issues).&lt;p&gt;''When'' this is deployed, a lot of articles are going to suddenly have image placement issues at the top that didn't previously. And this will probably make a lot of people ''very angry''.&lt;p&gt;I can see the need for the sticky TOC but I think it would still be better as something that could be toggled there from its current position while reading depending on how the user prefers it in an individual article. [[User:Daniel Case|Daniel Case]] ([[User talk:Daniel Case|talk]]) 05:50, 29 April 2022 (UTC)
::What if we kept both the inline/in-text ToC ''and'' the sticky/sidebar ToC, but only display the latter when the user's scrolled past the former? A user preference could be added that forces the latter to always (or never) be displayed. I agree that the situation with images is a &lt;abbr title=&quot;Pain In The Frigging Arse&quot;&gt;PITFA&lt;/abbr&gt;, but I really don't want to give up the sticky ToC either… [[User:OmenBreeze|OmenBreeze]] ([[User talk:OmenBreeze|talk]]) 00:43, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

I'm not sure, but until I manually switched back to &quot;Vector legacy (2010)&quot;, then again to &quot;Vector (2022)&quot;, ToC section was absent completely (neither new-style nor old-style). Also maybe, like with the language switcher, there should be [temporary] notice about ToC having moved to the left where it was previously? [[User:Vi2|_Vi]] ([[User talk:Vi2|talk]]) 17:57, 20 May 2022 (UTC)

== Left margin menu pushes down content ==

I normally use Monobook, but happened to get into the new Vector. Odd experience. The search box was absent and I had to scroll down for the content. I now see that you are supposed to click the magnifying glass to get the search box. OK. But the scrolling?

It seems the new Vector tries to guarantee wide enough space for the content. Perhaps that's what people surfing with maximised windows expect, but if you have a narrower window, is that really optimal? To get the left margin menu to the left of the content, I need a window some 1000 px wide. This &quot;minimum&quot; width gives me lines of about 100 characters, while I've heard reading is easiest at 47–72 or something like that. I like to have several windows open in parallel, and a narrower windows makes them fit better.

Anyway, if one's browser window is narrow, for whatever reason, does the empty space to the right of the margin menu really give the best possible experience? Is the 100 char width something that needs to be guaranteed for those planning layout of individual articles? (This experience is with Firefox 91.7.0esr on Debian.)

–[[User:LPfi|LPfi]] ([[User talk:LPfi|talk]]) 20:07, 17 March 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:LPfi|LPfi]], since your comment, we've introduced the new [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Table of contents|table of contents]], the [[phab:T303484|grid system]], and we've improved some issues with margins. What do you experience now? Have the issues you described changed?
:&quot;I had to scroll down for the content.&quot; - do you still need to do that? if yes, what do you see that you need to scroll past? It's the sidebar (the left menu) taking the full width, isn't it?
:Generally, we try to accommodate Vector 2022 for use cases such as yours. However, with screens narrower than ~1000px, we enter the territory of &quot;should V22 be responsive&quot; which is an area of controversies. We've been receiving contradicting voices, and it'd be a good topic for a separate community discussion. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 00:55, 5 August 2022 (UTC)

== The &quot;sticky table of contents&quot; is the worst among all the bad changes ==

I am sorry, but this sticky table of contents is such an eyesore, its sole addition might make me quit reading Wikipedia altogether. I'm not exaggerating, a similar update to Liquipedia made me want to avoid that project. It's more than an annoying waste of screen space - it also makes the different parts of the table of contents bold depending on where in the article my screen is, and thus it triggers my OCD, and it simply irritates me. I hate these moving parts in forced mobile designs.

&gt; &quot;The results of our 3rd prototype testing showed an overwhelming support for the proposed table of contents.&quot;

Have they? I don't see any discussion here.

&gt; &quot;The new table of contents will be persistent - users will have access to it at all times. It will also make it easier to understand the context of the page.&quot;

Are the TikTok memes reality? Excuse me, but I don't randomly forget what page or section I'm reading, thus I don't need a sticky title on my screen at all times.

&gt; &quot;In addition to that, it will be possible to navigate to different parts of the page without having to scroll all the way back to the top.&quot;

How is that &quot;need&quot; in any way difficult? It's one button on the keyboard - called ''Home''. Or you hold the slider on the right and jerk it up in a millisecond. But I suspect I know where &quot;scrolling&quot; is an issue - on mobile phones. This entire update in an exercise in transitioning a fine desktop UI from the 2000s which I had an honour to fall in love with in the 2010s to the non-constructive, downgraded, annoying and irritating experience of mobile phones.

Thankfully, not all projects choose to go this way. For an example of a new encyclopaedia with a traditional design, see the immensely popular Korean Namu Wiki. [[User:Adûnâi|Adûnâi]] ([[User talk:Adûnâi|talk]]) 12:53, 10 April 2022 (UTC)

:100% agree. [[User:Football Lab|Football Lab]] ([[User talk:Football Lab|talk]]) 09:12, 26 June 2022 (UTC)

== I hate the new TOC ==

I was directed here from [[phab:T273473]].&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;That left-of-the-article TOC is a horrible nightmare. I absolutely hate it. I would seriously avoid any website that forced it upon me. Can't scroll it out of sight, can't collapse it, can't disable it, takes up too much space, I hate it I hate it I hate it. This was the reason I switched back to Vector classic on beta cluster. (and if Vector classic gets it too I'll switch to Monobook, Timeless or just murder it with a userscript) I'm not much of a fan of Vector 2022 (but it's not a lost cause, just needs work), but this TOC pushed me over the edge.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;As a personal note: I rarely use the existing TOC. But I can scroll it out of sight so it doesn't bother me. If the TOC went completely missing tomorrow, I wouldn't miss it. Having this big, (to me) useless thing that contrasts with the main content (it's much darker) permanently in my field of vision greatly annoys me. And because of the fixed position, my banner blindness fails to kick in. This results in pure hatred for something that, on the face it, could seem innocuous. &lt;span id=&quot;Alexis_Jazz:1650385558357:TalkBWLCLNReading/Web/Desktop_Improvements&quot; class=&quot;BawlCmt&quot;&gt;[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]] ([[User talk:Alexis Jazz|talk]]) 16:25, 19 April 2022 (UTC)&lt;/span&gt;
:I was not &quot;directed&quot; anywhere, I blundered onto here after finally finding information about this new skin. And let me be clear, APART from the ridiculous handling of the TOC, the new skin is great, precisely BECAUSE, before the TOC-debacle, this skin allowed me to get more of the article on the screen, and allowed me to hide the standard list of menu choices that I only need 0.something % of the time. 
 
:So, please, Please, PLEASE make that TOC hideable! It's perhaps (!) a great default for newbies, but it's a bloody nuisance for us who usually never use the TOC, and if we do, we know where to find it! [[User:Autokefal Dialytiker|Autokefal Dialytiker]] ([[User talk:Autokefal Dialytiker|talk]]) 21:49, 25 April 2022 (UTC)
::I totally agree. [[Special:Contributions/185.53.157.151|185.53.157.151]] 08:13, 26 April 2022 (UTC)
::@[[User:Autokefal Dialytiker|Autokefal Dialytiker]], right, it's not that easy to get here. We'll put link to the project page on the list of available skins in preferences. The task is documented as [[phab:T307113|T307113]]. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 15:25, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
:Hey @[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]] - thanks for talking to us. It’s good to hear you were using Vector 2022. I hope that you will switch back to it. In terms of the table of contents, you raise good points. A lot has been happening since you wrote your comment, so my answer is longer than it would have been last week.
:* The first version of the design was based on the feedback we got on our previous prototypes from readers and editors (see [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Repository/Sticky Header and Table of Contents User Testing#toc-intro|in-person reader &amp; editor testing]] and [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Third prototype testing|on-wiki community testing]]).
:* That said, we have not yet made the design final. We are working on different ideas for the visual design of the entire site. We'll make the main content of the page be the primary focus of attention, even when other navigational elements (such as the ToC) are present. If you’re interested in following along with that work, most of it will be tracked on [[phab:T301780|T301780]] and in subtasks of that ticket.
:* We are also considering the way the ToC will display at smaller resolutions ([[phab:T306904|T306904]], [[phab:T306660|T306660]]) and looking into some options for collapsing it that could work for wider screens as well.
:* As you can see, people like you who have chosen Vector 2022 individually share a lot of feedback with us now. [[phab:T307004|T307004]], [[phab:T306562|T306562]] are some examples on things we are or will be working on.
:* In the meantime, we will be A/B testing the ToC on the pilot wikis. Our hypothesis is that the ToC will decrease the amount that people have to scroll to the top of the page to switch to a different section. The design might also vary once we have the results of the test.
:* Since these changes might take a little while to reach the beta cluster, we would also encourage technically-skilled folks to set up a script or gadget to make a temporary solution.
:And... yeah, [[Newsletter:Desktop Improvements updates|subscribe to our newsletter]], join our office hours ([[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Updates/Talk to Web|tomorrow]] or [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Participate|later]]) and talk to us more. Thank you! [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 15:23, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
::[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk]], here's another thought: [[wikt:reverse]]. It's not a long page, but that TOC is so bloody huge a full HD display isn't enough to read ''any'' of the actual page content without scrolling. &lt;span id=&quot;Alexis_Jazz:1651369145562:TalkBWLCLNReading/Web/Desktop_Improvements&quot; class=&quot;BawlCmt&quot;&gt;[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]] ([[User talk:Alexis Jazz|talk]]) 01:39, 1 May 2022 (UTC)&lt;/span&gt;
:::Right, right. Let's just take a look at [[:pl:Gramatyka języka fińskiego]]. I mean, this is an edge case, and as such, it's not that critical. From what I know, all TOC sections aren't uncollapsed by default, and you need to make an effort to see the full TOC. Is this your experience, too, @[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]]? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:45, 5 May 2022 (UTC)
::::[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk]], sorry for being possibly unclear. It was just a thought about the classic inline TOC which is disproportionally huge on Wiktionary, so it's something to think about when designing a new TOC. On the Gramatyka page on plwiki you at least get the intro without scrolling and the page actually ''is'' very long, so it's understandable the TOC also gets big. I've taken a look at the CSS (should have done that sooner) and simply disabling &quot;position:sticky&quot; stops the new TOC from being so infuriating. IMHO that should be the default, or at the very least, proper research should be done into this. Not only to determine by majority vote what users prefer (I wouldn't be surprised if sticky wins a binary majority vote) but also how crazy either option can drive users who ''don't'' like it. Pleasing a majority is no good if it causes a minority to be greatly aggravated. While I personally can get around it using technical means, that isn't true for most people. I'll also note that the experience on devices that are primarily controlled with a touchscreen may very well be different. With a keyboard, scrolling back up to the TOC is nearly no effort. Just press &quot;home&quot; or hold &quot;page up&quot;. With a touchscreen, not so much, so I can see why sticky might have a greater appeal there. &lt;span id=&quot;Alexis_Jazz:1651821096574:TalkBWLCLNReading/Web/Desktop_Improvements&quot; class=&quot;BawlCmt&quot;&gt;[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]] ([[User talk:Alexis Jazz|talk]]) 07:11, 6 May 2022 (UTC)&lt;/span&gt;
:::::What TOC? I don't get any such thing. [[User:Betaneptune|Betaneptune]] ([[User talk:Betaneptune|talk]]) 17:36, 25 May 2022 (UTC)
::1000px still seems like not enough for hiding the ToC. e.g. 1280 width on a rather large 16:10 projector screen and it is cumbersome and distracting. The floating option to hide it should definitely be implemented (closer to the left edge of the screen, hiding the TOC should make the content padding completely symmetrical left/right!) as that'd actually make Vector 2022 usable. Having it automatically (temporarily) pop out on mouse over would be quite nice, with a click to make it &quot;stick&quot; until clicked again, like a hamburger button you can hover over. For the record, I use Vector 2010 on smaller displays regardless of DPI, as well as high DPI larger screens, and Monobook on everything else. [[User:-αβοοδ|-αβοοδ]] ([[User talk:-αβοοδ|talk]]) 18:05, 29 July 2022 (UTC)
:100% agree. [[User:Football Lab|Football Lab]] ([[User talk:Football Lab|talk]]) 09:14, 26 June 2022 (UTC)

== Watchlist icon ==

[[User:Schierbecker|Schierbecker]] [[Topic:Wu23w3nlomndp5f1|wrote]]:
&lt;blockquote&gt;The watchlist icon too closely resembles a hamburger menu button. I can see many clicking the button thinking it is a dropdown menu. Some may lose unsaved edits after clicking it.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

I completely agree, but not really because it resembles a hamburger button but because it's sandwiched (no pun intended!) between dynamic menus. If there was the dropdown arrow next to the interlangs, alerts and notices buttons just like the personal menu, it would communicate more clearly that the watchlist button is a simple link and not a menu. [[User:Nardog|Nardog]] ([[User talk:Nardog|talk]]) 02:38, 21 April 2022 (UTC)

:Thanks for this comment, @[[User:Nardog|Nardog]]. We'll think how we could improve this. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:55, 27 April 2022 (UTC)
::Information on the design process that led to the current icon can be found here:
::https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T297979
::Nardog is already involved in that task. It's probably best to add this feedback there, as not all designers are reviewing this talk page. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 17:01, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== &quot;Beginning&quot; is confusing ==

More feedback: when I was at [[w:Gotcha journalism]] just now, I became confused because there appeared to be a section titled &quot;beginning&quot;, which I assumed covered the early history of the term. It took me a minute to figure out that that wasn't referring to a section but rather a way to scroll to the top of the page. Many other articles are going to have a similar problem, since we often begin with history sections that might reasonably be titled &quot;Beginning&quot; for early history. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 22:42, 27 April 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:Sdkb|Sdkb]] - good catch! This is something we discussed quite a bit internally in order to finally settle on beginning, although I agree that it's still imperfect.  Previously we were using &quot;introduction&quot;.  The issue there was that many articles have &quot;introduction&quot; as the name of their first section, causing duplication.  Other options we were considering were location-based (back to top, beginning of page, etc).  We are welcome to ideas on how to make this clearer.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 09:05, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
::The name used by wikipedians? ''Lead section'' in English, ''résumé introductif'' in French, etc ([[d:Q10966628|Q10966628]]) [[User:Pyb|Pyb]] ([[User talk:Pyb|talk]]) 11:07, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
:::On Translatewiki.net I found &quot;Début&quot; for fr.wiki and &quot;Inizio&quot; for it.wiki (on it.wiki we use also &quot;Incipit&quot; or &quot;Introduzione&quot;, see [[phab:T306990]]). [[User:Patafisik|Patafisik]] ([[User talk:Patafisik|talk]]) 15:09, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
::::@[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]], did you consider different design approaches in addition to different names? If the word had been accompanied by something like [[File:Font Awesome 5 solid caret-up.svg|16px]], it might have been a lot clearer. I also think there's some benefit to matching the terminology we already use as editors (&quot;lead section&quot; or &quot;introduction&quot;), since that makes it easier for newcomers. The Wikipedia articles that currently have &quot;Introduction&quot; as their first named section should not—they should be tagged with [[w:Template:Overview section]]. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 20:16, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
:::::&lt;small&gt;Bumping @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]]. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 17:16, 6 July 2022 (UTC)&lt;/small&gt;
::::::Just leaving a note here that we're still watching this conversation and considering different options, but haven't made a decision yet.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 13:58, 11 July 2022 (UTC)
::I think using the article title would make the most sense, as the title is the uppermost heading in the article. That way the header that the reader arrives at always matches the one they've clicked on. (I'm sure &quot;Beginning&quot; is better than &quot;Introduction,&quot; but it's not unheard of as a section title either: e.g. [[w:Creolization|Creolization]], [[w:Ashikaga shogunate|Ashikaga shogunate]], [[w:History of Carthage|History of Carthage]]. Is there any way to determine how often it's used?) [[User:Arms &amp;#38; Hearts|Arms &amp;#38; Hearts]] ([[User talk:Arms &amp;#38; Hearts|talk]]) 19:35, 29 May 2022 (UTC)

I think &quot;Top&quot; would be less confusing and generally make more sense as that seems to be the common English term for the top of the page. [[Special:Contributions/132.170.199.112|132.170.199.112]] 19:32, 22 June 2022 (UTC)

== Table of contents below sidebar just doesn't work ==

On a broader note than the two pieces of feedback above, I have to say that my experience so far with the new table of contents has been really frustrating. As an editor, I use lots of the links in the left sidebar quite frequently, so I don't want to collapse it (and even if I did, the way it persists in whatever state you leave it in means that every time I used it it'd return). But preserving the left sidebar forces the table of contents below it, which is just awful. The number one time I want to use the ToC is when I first navigate to an article, and I either want to jump to a specific section or just to see what sections it has to get an overview. Forcing me to scroll to get to that information is extremely annoying, and if it's kept in the final version, I predict the outcry will be intense. You could resolve this either by retaining the old style ToC alongside the new (which would also solve the [[w:MOS:SANDWICH|sandwiching]] concerns I've previously raised) or by moving the ToC above the left sidebar. From your previews, I know you've been working on moving some stuff around and introducing pinning, so I hope this will be resolved in future iterations. But the initial version being introduced here is clearly not ready yet. Best, &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 22:53, 27 April 2022 (UTC)
: For me it seems the table of contents and the sidebar seems to be two different things. On Wikipedia, I collapsed the sidebar and the table of contents still remain. [[User:Tenryuu|Tenryuu]] ([[User talk:Tenryuu|talk]]) 03:09, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
::I want ToC collapsed too. But there is no way to do it. It uses almost 1/3 of my screen and makes reading very difficult.- [[User:Nizil Shah|Nizil Shah]] ([[User talk:Nizil Shah|talk]]) 05:32, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
:::Same here. 14&quot; Screen, collapsed sidebar menu, open only when needed. With the new TOC I cannot collapse the sidebar, it's just a toggle between navbar and TOC. I appreciate the effort and that it's a first attempt, but it definitely should be optional. And yes, I was involved in feedbacks and testing earlier. Regards [[User:Elya|Elya]] ([[User talk:Elya|talk]]) 14:24, 29 April 2022 (UTC)

:::: +1, the TOC should be accessible from the top of the page, and collapsible (vertically; also horiz if it is making the sidebar too wide - many pages have section heads that are quite long).  [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 17:35, 2 May 2022 (UTC)
:::::@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] and @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]], neither of you have replied here. This is a major concern, and I predict that if it is not addressed, it may single-handedly prevent the community from being willing to accept New Vector. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 17:14, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
::::::Hi @[[User:Sdkb|Sdkb]] - thanks for the ping!  Currently, we're working on making the ToC collapsible, especially on narrow screens ([[phab:T306660]]).  Collapsing it would allow for access further up in the page, but won't completely solve the issue you're describing.  To make using both the sidebar and the table of contents a bit easier, we are planning two things.  For logged-out users, we plan on collapsing the sidebar by default so that the table of contents will be shown further up in the page.  We are also planning on separating the tools related to pages in a separate menu.  This will significantly shorten the space for the sidebar, and create a clear definition between which tool acts on the page as a whole, and which one acts only on the page itself.  In this example, this puts the ToC above the end of the introduction section, which is higher than the previous ToC location (admittedly, this will not be the case for all articles).  
::::::[[File:Prototype_of_table_of_contents_and_tools_menu_for_desktop_Wikipedia.png|thumb|Prototype of table of contents and tools menu for desktop Wikipedia]]
::::::[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 14:07, 11 July 2022 (UTC)
:::::::Thanks for the reply, @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]]! Moving the tools elsewhere (ideally to a Twinkle-like menu) is something I certainly support and have been trying to set up since [[w:WP:SIDEBAR20|the 2020 revamp]], and it would help with this. Your screenshot appears to be from a standard resolution display rather than a widescreen display, so I can't tell whether it's going to help enough to ensure that the ToC will always be visible on a normal monitor with neither it nor the main menu collapsed. Getting to a point where that's the case will be essential for getting community consensus.
:::::::Is there a reason you don't seem to be considering placing the ToC above the main menu? &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 23:49, 13 July 2022 (UTC)

== About Google Docs and Zoom ==

{{Ping|SGrabarczuk (WMF)}} Thank you for the invitation I received for tomorrow's videcall since I was an interface admin and a developer! but sadly I cannot participate since I don't use Google Docs or Zoom for security reasons (partially related: [https://www.zdnet.com/article/us-senate-german-government-tell-staff-not-to-use-zoom/] [https://www.gnu.org/proprietary/malware-google.html]).

I don't know if it could be useful but maybe in the future you may consider to land the doc on the wiki itself, or using Etherpad [https://etherpad.wikimedia.org/] when realtime is needed.

To drop Zoom, maybe I can propose Jitsi Meeting [https://meet.jit.si/] that is gratis and libre and supports streaming on social network to support large audience. (Also [[Wikimedia Meet]] deserves a try and some feedback). [[User:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio Bozzolan]] ([[User talk:Valerio Bozzolan|talk]]) 15:38, 28 April 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio Bozzolan]]. I understand your concerns and thank you for the language you use. I do appreciate that. As you may have realized, it isn't without a reason why we use these particular tools/platforms.
:# Google Docs are used by the Foundation as the default tool for making internal notes and docs. We might, for the purposes of the office hours, replace it with Etherpad. There's a problem with the translations, though. Asking translators to update just one word, and waiting until they've done that, could be troublesome. This is why I can only commit to replace this if we make more changes to the announcement. (By the way, the announcement is [[Template:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Office hours announcement|fully standardized]] and translated into 16 languages, some of which use declination or are not written in the Latin script.)
:# We need our office hours to be technically (platform-wise) predictable. Although Jitsi is open source and Zoom is not, the latter is more effective. It has been widely used for online meetings in the movement. It's been used by the WMF for office hours with the CEO, Maryana; it's been used by affiliates. There are hundreds of Wikimedians who at least once have participated in a Wikimedia meeting on Zoom. We know how to provide live translations there. Jitsi, on the other hand, is less popular, and we'd have to learn how to support live translations, including more trainings organized specifically for our meetings.
:# We may consider having office hours on IRC. Frankly, I have a feeling that since the migration from Freenode, IRC has been more and more marginalized, but we could give it a try.
:I'm curious what other Wikimedians watching this page think. Add your comments! [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:15, 5 May 2022 (UTC)
::Just asking for an understanding that Google Form and Zoom are a bug, not a feature, to participate in a Wikimedia project. A bug that deserves a long-term fix. [[User:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio Bozzolan]] ([[User talk:Valerio Bozzolan|talk]]) 15:57, 7 May 2022 (UTC)
::: I appreciate these are standard across parts of the Foundation. And agree w/ [[user:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio]] this is a bug, not a feature.  Perhaps it's time to revisit this across the org. :)  We should be using tools that can be constantly used and deployed by communities for events, workshops, office hours, talks without sending traffic through commercial servers. 
::: ''Text'': Google makes some very wiki-spirited tools (they did absorb JotSpot back in 2006) so it's stayed around for a while. But we simply must stop using it as a crutch that keeps us from using and being delighted by notetaking on our own platform. Our collaborative platform for drafting and discussing documents. Our versioned, searchable platform.
::: ''Video'': I too have to use Zoom sometime, but I'm always surprised and a bit dismayed when a Wikimedia meeting uses it! Jitsi is stable, widely used + repackaged, easily modded and forked, and we host a [https://meet.wmcloud.org/ lovely instance] on the WM cloud. [We also regularly use BigBlueButton for larger audiences.] It makes it easy to name a persistent rooms, embed it it in other places or tools (see Jitsi-as-a-service + [[w:Brave Talk|Brave Talk]] these days), &amp;c. We should be thinking about how to better use video streams in our projects, and using this framework as we do so.  [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 12:54, 14 May 2022 (UTC)
::::Thanks @[[User:Sj|Sj]] and @[[User:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio Bozzolan]].
::::# First of all, I really hear what you're saying. Perhaps you're right, Google and Zoom may be bugs - it's definitely not up to me to decide. &quot;Perhaps it's time to revisit this across the org. :)&quot; - I'm grateful that you specifically used the words &quot;across the org&quot;. That's way wider than just Olga and me (people who organize ''our'' office hours), or [[m:Community Relations Specialists|Community Relations]] (&quot;technical liaisons&quot; so to speak), or [[m:Movement Communications|Movement Communications]] alone. If it's about ''the standard'', then it needs a broad agreement.
::::# @SJ, do Jitsi or any open-source alternatives provide the speech-to-text functionality and parallel voice tracks for live translators (interpreters)? I'm asking because each time we have a meeting, there are people who need the speech-to-text functionality . Unfortunately, we haven't been able to provide the live translation support yet. We're still working on it, and it seems we may have found a solution.
::::[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 15:55, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
::::: [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk]]: 
:::::: 1. We ''should'' change the standard [though there seem to be many even within one org!], but I only mentioned that to suggest that none are set in stone. :)  As this thread is about these particular discussions, I hope we can try a different standard for these sessions, or understand what prevents such a change.  If it is purely a matter of accessibility features, that would make a phabulous ticket even if it is not yet known who could set them up.   
:::::: 2. Yes they do! Other collaborative orgs w/ similar issues of language equity use jitsi regularly. There are solutions or workarounds for both. [also, to the point of &quot;supporting essential infrastructure for free knowledge&quot;, our engagement would certainly help make them better for all.]   
::::: '''speech to text''': Google Voice integration seems to be there, and a number of open-source s2t services that are not quite comparable. You can see the range of Summer of Code [https://jitsi.org/gsoc/s2t/ projects] + community submissions scratching their own itches in the [https://github.com/jitsi/jigasi/issues/157 jigasi repo]. 
::::: '''remote simultaneous interpretation''': the most recent solution (for a single language, letting you tune in or out of the raw audio and into a translator's audio channel) is use by [https://i.meet.mayfirst.org May First] (which we should [https://mayfirst.coop/en/ work more closely with] on choosing technology stacks, frankly) and is maintained [https://gitlab.com/mfmt/jsi here].  There are improvements, and pushes to integrate into jitsi core, both of which could be facilitated by small technical bounties or large expressions of interest [like Wikimedia indicating this is a crucial feature for us]. [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 02:37, 7 July 2022 (UTC)

::@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]], I will not participate in any forum that is not public. Why the wmf foundation wants to share information via Zoom, a for-profit corporation which provides no guarantee of privacy, is anyone's guess. We have been using wiki-code for discussion since 2001, why this change?
::I apologize if you find my message above irrespecutful, but this represents the views of many. [[User:Ottawahitech|Ottawahitech]] ([[User talk:Ottawahitech|talk]]) 18:26, 13 June 2022 (UTC)
:::@[[User:Ottawahitech|Ottawahitech]], above, you can find explanations on why we (the Web team) are using Zoom now. Are you also asking why we have any voice online meetings in general? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 15:57, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Instant jumping vs. animated scrolling for table of contents ==

As you're polishing up the table of contents, one thing it'd be nice to consider is the behavior when you click on a section in it. Currently, it instantly jumps to that section, but I think it'd be better if it instead did a very quick scroll (maybe a quarter of a second). This would help readers to more easily understand what's happening when they click the link, and to get a better intuitive sense of what the article contains by seeing it flash by. Would that be possible? &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 02:37, 30 April 2022 (UTC)

:&lt;small&gt;Bumping @[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] and @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]]. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 17:12, 6 July 2022 (UTC)&lt;/small&gt;

== Trouble With Zooming In ==

My vision is poor so I usually zoom to 200% on my browser and it is no problem. With the new skin that same magnification causes the sidebar to take up the top of my screen and I can't see the title of the article and know what page I'm on without scrolling.

== Wikistories ==

Will Vector 2022 be influenced by [[Wikistories]]? --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 10:09, 6 June 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]], what do you mean by influenced? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:18, 14 June 2022 (UTC)
::@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]]: If Vector 2022 will be adapted for (compatible from a design perspective with) Wikistories. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 19:06, 15 June 2022 (UTC)
:::@[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]], definitely. All the projects that currently are being built are compatible with or neutral to Vector 2022. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:47, 30 June 2022 (UTC)

== Language switcher opt-out ==

The new language picker is a deal breaker for me as an active editor who is working with a very diverse array of topics on Wikipedia. I write about [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Māori_phonology Māori language], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Тэруха Japanese geisha], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Литература_Тайваня Taiwanese literature], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Эскимосская_кухня Inuit cuisine], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Парагвайская_арфа Paraguayan instruments], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Мишон Vietnamese temples], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Кабилия Algerian regions], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Берберская_кухня Berber cuisine], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Кайна_(профессия) Arabic professions]. I write [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sister_exchange articles] that compare dozens of cultures [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Грамматическое_число or languages].

I need a way to hover over the list of languages to see the name of the page in a different random language (which can be anything from Korean to Twi). I need to be able to open 50 language editions very quickly to estimate if any of them have good illustrations or any new literature on the topic that I am working on. I often read the same article in 4 languages simply because I can read in a lot of languages and I am wondering which language edition has the best article. The workflow with the new language picker is tremendously stunted.

The main idea of the new interface seems to be making the page width more narrow. With that, there is a lot of free space at the sides, and I would like to propose putting a full list of languages there, as an option. [[User:Le Loy|Le Loy]] ([[User talk:Le Loy|talk]]) 00:29, 13 June 2022 (UTC)
: Yes, I agree, the decision taken now does not help advanced editors work in projects, but hinders them. I think we need to make a separate setting for the &quot;always open&quot; list. The problems of this list have still existed since sorting was removed. [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 15:43, 14 June 2022 (UTC)

:{{support}}--[[User:Wdpp|Wdpp]] ([[User talk:Wdpp|talk]]) 11:47, 3 July 2022 (UTC)

== Old version ==

:''Moved from [[Topic:Wxcz2an2ck4s4cdy]]''
After these changes are made, can I still use the old settings? [[user:Ilovemydoodle|Ilovemydoodle]] ([[user talk: Ilovemydoodle|talk]]) 09:26, 13 June 2022 (UTC)
: Yes [[user:Ilovemydoodle|Ilovemydoodle]], legacy Vector will be available and you will be able to use it as your skin. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 12:24, 14 June 2022 (UTC)
::{{ping|SGrabarczuk (WMF)}} Why does have to be called “legacy”? legacy implies that something is outdated, inferior, no longer supported, none of which apply to Vector &quot;legacy&quot;. Maybe instead, you could call it &quot;advanced&quot;, &quot;expert&quot;, or &quot;classic&quot;. – [[User:Ilovemydoodle2|Ilovemydoodle2]] ([[User talk:Ilovemydoodle2|talk]]) 17:48, 20 July 2022 (UTC)
:::@[[User:Ilovemydoodle2|Ilovemydoodle2]], the motivation is purely technical. This is because it's &quot;frozen&quot;. The Wikimedia Foundation will not develop it - there will be no actively built version of Vector parallel to Vector 2022. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 20:46, 20 July 2022 (UTC)

== Irish language Wikipedia and Vector 2022 ==

[[File:Irish Wikipedia random article - Vector 2022.png|thumb|ga.wp random article screencap - Vector 2022]]
[[File:Irish Wikipedia random article - Vector old.png|thumb|ga.wp random article screencap - current Vector]]

Hi there. I'm [[w:ga:User:Alison]] - admin and bureaucrat on the Irish language Wikipedia. I'd be remiss in not providing feedback, I think, so here goes.

* I see other folks pointing out the massive amount of whitespace / padding in the left side navbar which is squeezing out the actual article text on the right. On our wiki, it really seems significant. IMO, article is all, and we seem to be sacrificing actual content real-estate for ... what, exactly? Yes, it looks 'less cluttered', but there's actually less content - especially for those of us who both browse ''and'' edit on laptop screens.

* On the top tab section (which is otherwise quite nice), you can see the ''Plé'' (Talk) and ''Léigh'' (Read) are scrunched together with no separation. I18n bug, maybe?

* The main image and title have lost their localization and now show &quot;Wikipedia&quot; instead of &quot;Vicipéid&quot; - this could just be an image localization / config issue. Could someone point me in the right direction, maybe? I did the original, later-font localization for our wiki, some years back, so happy to dip in and fix :)

Le gach dea-ghuí (best regards),

-- Allie [[User:Alison|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FF823D;font-family: comic sans ms&quot;&gt;'''A&lt;font color= &quot;#FF7C0A&quot;&gt;l&lt;font color= &quot;#FFB550&quot;&gt;is&lt;/font&gt;o&lt;/font&gt;n'''&lt;/span&gt;]] &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Alison|❤]]&lt;/sup&gt; 16:17, 22 June 2022 (UTC)

:multilingual Wikipedians: during redesigh include current non-english desighs for evaluation, including spanish, french and german. They have good ideas and bad ideas... [[User:0mtwb9gd5wx|0mtwb9gd5wx]] ([[User talk:0mtwb9gd5wx|talk]]) 01:10, 23 June 2022 (UTC)
: The &quot;PléLéigh&quot; issue looks like it's [[phab:T309223|T309223]], a known issue. Until it is fixed in MediaWiki, try updating your browser(s) – the issue occurs if your browser doesn't support a certain relatively new feature. [[User:Rummskartoffel|Rummskartoffel]] ([[User talk:Rummskartoffel|talk]]) 21:59, 23 June 2022 (UTC)
::Hey there! Regarding logos https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T244486 is what you are looking for - basically every logo needs to be recreated. You can request one on that ticket to be prioritized higher or find information about creating new ones.
::Regarding sidebar whitespace I am not sure I understand. The extra padding is for the table of contents underneath the sidebar. You say it's squeezing article text on the right but in your screenshots the Vector 2022 screenshot shows more of the article text. I can see the description section heading for example.
::I can confirm the PléLéigh issue is a bug and will hopefully be fixed soon.
::Hope this is helpful. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 01:02, 1 July 2022 (UTC)

== wordmark no longer appears after upgrading to MediaWiki 1.38.1, style bugs ==

After upgrading to MediaWiki 1.38.1 from 1.36.1, the wordmark no longer appears next to the icon in the upper left.  If the window is wide enough, the 150px space for the wordmark is reserved but is empty.  When you make the window wider past a certain width, the coloring behind the sidebar also vanishes. This happens with Vector 2010 in both legacy and non-legacy mode and in Vector 2022.  The wordmark image is an svg that has not moved and still has correct permissions [[User:Queernix1028|Queernix1028]] ([[User talk:Queernix1028|talk]]) 19:43, 22 June 2022 (UTC)

:What is the value of wgLogos in your LocalSettings.php? [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:22, 29 June 2022 (UTC)
 $wgLogos = [
         'icon' =&gt; &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/arcc/logo.svg&quot;,
         '1x' =&gt; &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/arcc/logo.png&quot;,
         'wordmark' =&gt; [
                 'src' =&gt; &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/arcc/wordmark.png&quot;,
                 '1x'  =&gt; &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/arcc/wordmark.svg&quot;,
                 'width' =&gt; 150,
         ],
 ];
::It previously worked with wordmark src set to the svg file, but now neither that configuration nor the one above work. [[User:Queernix1028|Queernix1028]] ([[User talk:Queernix1028|talk]]) 14:32, 29 June 2022 (UTC)

:I believe you need to set a height on the wordmark. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 00:55, 1 July 2022 (UTC)

== Language links on Wikidata are right at the bottom of the page ==

I've enabled the new theme (Vector 2022) globally on all wikis. I generally like the new interface. However when I am on wikidata, previously the interlanguage links were on the right. (Where an infobox usually goes on a wikipedia page) Now they are right at the bottom of the page! Some wikidata pages are massive, and having to scroll all the way down to the bottom of the screen to do the thing I do most frequently on wikidata (add new language links) is a real pain. Please can you move the language links on wikidata back to the top (top right) of the page? - [[User:Rooiratel|Rooiratel]] ([[User talk:Rooiratel|talk]]) 14:25, 23 June 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Rooiratel|Rooiratel]]. Thanks for your opinion. Are you talking about the desktop view? What's the resolution of your screen? I've tried to narrow my window down and change its width, and it seems that the width thresholds when the interwiki links go from the bottom to the right are the same. Is there any setting you use that may make your experience different? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:50, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
::Hi {{ping|SGrabarczuk (WMF)}} this is for the desktop view. I am seeing this behaviour on my 1080p laptop screen and my 1440p desktop screen. I haven't used the mobile view, so can't comment on that. - [[User:Rooiratel|Rooiratel]] ([[User talk:Rooiratel|talk]]) 06:32, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== Infobox element alignment is mangled in mobile view ==

Maybe I'm doing something wrong, but when I click on &quot;Mobile view&quot; with Vector 2022, many of the infobox elements are misaligned. Many elements that should be centered are left-aligned, and many elements that should be left-aligned are centered. At least that's what it looks like for me in Chrome for Mac OS at [https://en.m.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Russian_Soviet_Federative_Socialist_Republic&amp;useskin=vector-2022 this page]. [[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] ([[User talk:Jonesey95|talk]]) 02:57, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

:Wow, that looks odd. Thanks @[[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] for reporting this. Right now, I only have one question - why do you use the mobile view and Vector 2022 mixed together? Minerva is dedicated for mobile, and Vector 2022 is dedicated for desktop. Having these two at the same time is bold and original :) [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:08, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
::I was just doing some very beginner-level QA testing. Editors do all sorts of ridiculous things, so I try to do some QA testing by doing ridiculous things. If you want editors to use Vector 2022 for desktop-only and Minerva for mobile-only, then make the &quot;Mobile view&quot;/&quot;Desktop view&quot; link at the bottom of the screen switch between the skins. Meanwhile, I'll be over here in legacy Vector where I can fill my browser window with content.... [[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] ([[User talk:Jonesey95|talk]]) 01:15, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

Using the mobile domain with the Vector skin invokes a special mode with lots of odd behaviour. It's not part of this project but will hopefully get fixed some day. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 02:30, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== &quot;Related articles&quot; appear to be missing ==

I do not see the &quot;Related articles&quot; section at the bottom of the mobile view. I don't really care, but since the &quot;Principles&quot; section of this page says &quot;We do not remove any functionality&quot;, I thought I'd mention it. It makes me wonder what other functionality has been removed, and whether this principle is really being followed in a systematic way. [[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] ([[User talk:Jonesey95|talk]]) 03:02, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

RelatedArticles appears to be working fine to me. I see it on Minerva. What do you mean by &quot;at the bottom of mobile view&quot;? The scope of this project is the desktop site so no changes to the mobile domain have been made.

RelatedArticles does not show on the skins of certain websites and has not shown on Vector or Vector 2022 unless the community has explicitly requested. See [[phab:T144812]], [[phab:T181242]] and [[phab:T278611]] for example. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:59, 24 June 2022 (UTC)
:I think this is my mistake. I was comparing [https://en.m.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Russian_Soviet_Federative_Socialist_Republic this] (default mobile view on en.WP) with [https://en.m.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Russian_Soviet_Federative_Socialist_Republic&amp;useskin=vector-2022 this] (Vector 2022 mobile view) and assuming that the default mobile view used some version of the Vector skin, but I think that is not correct. [[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] ([[User talk:Jonesey95|talk]]) 16:38, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

Ah okay. This mode is only accessible by a special URL and is not being worked on as part of this project. Thanks for taking the time to explain! [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 02:28, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== 非常に見にくい ==

日本語で失礼します。本日ごろから日本語版ウィキペディアのスキンに変更があったようですが、
# 文字の大きさをブラウザ側から変更できない(Safari使用)。
# そもそも標準の文字サイズが大きすぎる。
# 目次が項目名の横に位置が変わったせいでアクセスが煩雑になった。
# Infoボックスが大きすぎる
などの変更のせいで、余計見づらくなったような気がします。可能であれば改善するか、もしくは変更前のスキンに戻して欲しいです。 [[User:イカしたイカ|イカしたイカ]] ([[User talk:イカしたイカ|talk]]) 08:38, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

:感謝します、@[[User:イカしたイカ|イカしたイカ]]さん。
:First of all, you don't need to apologize for writing in Japanese. We welcome comments in any language.
:# Would you like just to change the default font size? Or would you be able to zoom in and out, and see the font size adjust?
:# Do you think making the text line wider and keeping the default font size would fix the problem?
:# Why do you think access is more complicated now? Our motivation was to reposition the table of context to make it more accessible. What do you think is not working?
:# Do you think the problem is related to the default font size?
:まず第一に、あなたは日本語で書いたことを謝罪する必要はありません。 どんな言語でもコメントを歓迎します。
:# デフォルトのフォントサイズを変更しますか？ または、ズームインおよびズームアウトして、フォントサイズが調整されるのを確認できますか？
:# テキスト行を広くし、デフォルトのフォントサイズを維持することで、問題が解決すると思いますか？
:# なぜ今、アクセスがより複雑になっていると思いますか？ 私たちの動機は、コンテキストのテーブルを再配置して、よりアクセスしやすくすることでした。 何が機能していないと思いますか？
:# 問題はデフォルトのフォントサイズに関連していると思いますか？
:[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 02:18, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== Please evaluate CJK characters' font size in Vector 2022 ==

{{tracked|T311469}}
For your infomation, the Chinese Wikipedia already has a [[zh:MediaWiki:Gadget-large-font.css|gadget]] that increases the font size for a better Chinese reading experience. Japanese and classical Chinese Wikipedia also have such kinds of gadgets. [[User:Diskdance|Diskdance]] ([[User talk:Diskdance|talk]]) 08:19, 25 June 2022 (UTC)

:It would be nice if we could integrate these gadgets into new Vector skin directly. This would benefit other CJK and multilingual wikis. [[User:Diskdance|Diskdance]] ([[User talk:Diskdance|talk]]) 08:20, 25 June 2022 (UTC)
::Thanks @[[User:Diskdance|Diskdance]]! @[[User:AHollender (WMF)|AHollender (WMF)]] FYI :) [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:03, 27 June 2022 (UTC)

I think we should create  a phabricator ticket for this one. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 02:29, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== Feedback regarding Vector (2022) TOC ==

I've had Vector (2022) enabled for a while, and generally like it. However:

* I don't feel the new way of handling the TOC and side menu is user friendly. It took me a while to notice I could hide the side menu only to raise the TOC up the page, as I assumed it would also hide the TOC since the two are part of the same sidebar. With the side menu visible, I had to scroll much further down than usual to find the TOC on many articles with short lead sections, which undermined the convenience previously provided by the TOC as a way to skip scrolling and quickly navigate to a desired section.
** It also doesn't help that the [[w:Template_talk:Skip_to_talk#Broken_functionality_with_new_version_of_vector_theme|new TOC breaks the functionality of]] {{tl|Skip to talk}}, widely used on talk pages on Wikipedia, but I now understand that the change is intended to make that template unnecessary.
** The prototype [https://di-visual-design-menus.web.app/Brown_bear linked by others above] deals with some of these issues but is still a bit confusing. It's not clear that clicking &quot;hide&quot; on the TOC should result in a menu appearing by the article title rather than just collapsing it like collapsible lists which use the same &quot;[hide]&quot; links; while this behaviour can be learned, it's not clear why the hidden TOC menu button doesn't persist between the search icon and article title when scrolling down, which is what I expected after seeing it collapse to a button beside the article title.

* The new sidebar is wider to accommodate the TOC, but much of that space is blank so I'm not sure it needs to be quite so wide, particularly as the added width can cause issues such as galleries by default having less space for images per row. I understand the motivation is to limit the characters of text per line, but doing so by padding the sidebar with empty space seems like an unhelpful way to achieve that. [[User:Scyrme|Scyrme]] ([[User talk:Scyrme|talk]]) 16:57, 26 June 2022 (UTC)

:I want to chime in about the &quot;hide&quot; behaviour. I noticed the link for the first time right now, tried clicking it and was a confused when it disappeared altogether. I would have expected the link to change to &quot;show&quot; and the table itself to hide. It took me a while to find the icon in the header. I think that if it should behave this way, it needs to somehow be communicated to the user where the TOC goes. [[User:Sebastian Berlin (WMSE)|Sebastian Berlin (WMSE)]] ([[User talk:Sebastian Berlin (WMSE)|talk]]) 10:42, 3 August 2022 (UTC)

== Where are the watch/unwatch buttons? ==

Alright, if the article is long enough to be scrolled, I should scroll it down, the top row of icons will jerk left-right, and the &quot;watchlist&quot; icon will become the &quot;watch/unwatch&quot; toggle. Hopelessly inconvenient, counterintuitive, but it works. But what if the article is so short that it won't scroll at all? [https://ru.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B8%D0%BF%D0%B5%D0%B4%D0%B8%D1%8F:%D0%A0%D0%B5%D1%86%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B7%D0%B8%D1%80%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5/%D0%9E%D0%B1%D1%8A%D0%B5%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BD%D1%91%D0%BD%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B9_%D0%B2%D0%BE%D0%BA%D0%B7%D0%B0%D0%BB_%D0%A6%D0%B8%D0%BD%D1%86%D0%B8%D0%BD%D0%BD%D0%B0%D1%82%D0%B8&amp;oldid=123611287 example] Seems like &quot;preferences/watchlist/edit raw watchlist&quot; is the only go-around, is it not? [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 12:13, 27 June 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]]: There's a smaller star-shaped watch/unwatch toggle to the right of the &quot;View history&quot;/&quot;История&quot; link. [[User:Scyrme|Scyrme]] ([[User talk:Scyrme|talk]]) 14:48, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
:: Thanks, that was most unexpected. I'd rather prefer old good text links. [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 15:59, 27 June 2022 (UTC) The new star looks almost exactly like the existing GA star, just a different shade of grey (but in almost the same corner location as in standard monobook). [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 16:02, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
:&quot;Thanks, that was most unexpected. I'd rather prefer old good text links&quot; - you're a Monobook user, am I right? This may be a good reason why it's most unexpected for you. Vector 2022 is based on Vector legacy (2010), and the star icon has been there for 12 years. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 01:51, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== Merge notification block in the header: notifications and alerts ==

{{Tracked|T142981}}
For me, it has always been a strange decision that notifications were divided into two unrelated blocks and icons with incomprehensible categorization. I forgot about it, but now I'm paying attention again.

Given that we removed the text from all menus, there are now a lot of icons at the top that do not understand what they do. Different blocks of notifications do not help this at all. Maybe it's time to put them in one menu and break it there already? Filters, tabs, whatever :) But at least you won't get confused in the icons.

I personally still (6 years!) do not know what their fundamental difference is. I asked my friends and they don't know either. [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 17:29, 27 June 2022 (UTC)

:{{Strong oppose}}. The notices are the notifications that are not very important/urgent, unlike the alerts. Merging them would make me unable to found out at a glance if I have any important/urgent notification, and would also overload the notification box, as I receive many notifications. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 22:19, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
:: It seems to me that it is possible to do this with filters and colored marker icons. Or a separate setting for users who really need it. [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 09:47, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

:{{Comment}}. I agree that the distinction could be clearer, but don't necessarily agree that there should be only one button. Presently, when both are empty the only difference between them is the header text and icon. Both share the exact same two buttons, which link to the same destinations. The text in the box doesn't even distinguish, reading &quot;There are no notifications&quot; instead of &quot;There are no alerts&quot;. There isn't even a &quot;help&quot; or &quot;about&quot; link unique to each of them to explain the difference or what gets sent where. If you follow the links to the special page or preferences, it's still not clear which notifications are sent where.

:Based on the names, I would've assumed the difference would be that alerts are specifically for subscriptions to [[Wikipedia:Article alerts|article alerts]], whereas notifications would be for everything else. It makes sense to split them, since alerts would be activity that's less personal to the receiver. &quot;Alerts&quot; would be like a daily newspaper, but &quot;notifications&quot; are more like personal mail. Except this isn't how the system actually functions; messages to the receiver's talk page are placed under &quot;Alerts&quot; rather &quot;Notices&quot;, for example.

:I understand that it may be helpful to filter urgent notifications from less urgent ones, but what counts as urgent or important? Shouldn't that be decided by the user's preferences? It would make more sense to have something like tabs, as Iniquity suggested, to filter types of notifications; this would let that user decide what is important. [[User:Scyrme|Scyrme]] ([[User talk:Scyrme|talk]]) 22:33, 27 June 2022 (UTC)

== Table of contents: Bold format for active section ==

I really appreciate the new skin and layout. In the beta, the active/current section of the article was formatted bold in the table of contents on the left side. But in the live version, it's regular and black. I find it really, really hard to differentiate between the normal blue titles and the active title, because the only difference is the black vs. blue color. Could you please make the active titles bold again? 
Thank you! [[User:Lhennen|Lhennen]] ([[User talk:Lhennen|talk]]) 21:11, 29 June 2022 (UTC)

:+1 Bold and black would be best imo. [[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] ([[User talk:L.xschlag|talk]]) 11:43, 1 July 2022 (UTC)
::@[[User:Lhennen|Lhennen]], @[[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] - thank you for your feedback!  Not sure if you've seen, but we are  currently in the middle of testing some [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Fifth prototype testing|prototypes]] related to this question.  You're welcome to give us more detailed feedback on the prototype page.  One of the things we're testing on these is the way links should appear within the table of contents (see https://di-visual-design-toc-active.web.app/Otter) for an example.  Currently, our feedback is showing us that people are leaning towards option 2: bold and black so we will most likely be continuing with that option and making the titles bold.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 10:08, 4 July 2022 (UTC)

== Jawiki has NOT reached consensus on implementing Vector 2022 yet ==

Jawiki has '''NOT''' reached consensus on implementing Vector 2022 yet. Why was it implemented without our consent? [[User:AppleRingo777|AppleRingo777]] ([[User talk:AppleRingo777|talk]]) 22:01, 29 June 2022 (UTC)

:Hi @[[User:AppleRingo777|AppleRingo777]] - we apologize for the confusion that the deployment process has caused and the lack of clarity from our side.  We are currently working on reading back through our previous communications and clarifying the process and what happened with individual members of the community.  We will to get back to the community with more detailed thoughts and a process for next steps by tomorrow July 1st.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 12:04, 30 June 2022 (UTC)

== [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] ==

Hello! I asked a question at the meeting, but I would like to duplicate it here. Will it be possible to control the location of blocks (right or left) through [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]? [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 15:34, 30 June 2022 (UTC)

:Hey! We are still thinking through how this would work. Input valued in [[phab:T306519]] ! [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:27, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
:: Thanks! :) [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 16:16, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Keep the TOC under the main menu as long as possible (Vector 2022) ==

When the window gets narrower the TOC is moved into a &quot;Hamburger button&quot;. But the main menu stays where it is until the window get's quite a bit more narrower. I think as long as the main menu fits, the TOC should stay at its original place. Especially since the TOC behind the &quot;Hamburger button&quot; is quite easy to miss. [[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] ([[User talk:L.xschlag|talk]]) 11:30, 1 July 2022 (UTC)

:This was a bug. I believe it should be fixed by the end of the week. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:28, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== &quot;Move&quot; is the only in the &quot;More&quot; drop down menu (Vector 2022) ==

I think it's quite odd that the &quot;More&quot; drop down menu most of the time contains only &quot;move&quot;. Is it on purpose to make it harder to find for the average user? [[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] ([[User talk:L.xschlag|talk]]) 11:35, 1 July 2022 (UTC)
* {{ping|L.xschlag}}, I have two items - the other is an add-on via preferences/gadgets. Unfortunately, I cannot use drop-down menues easily, so getting there in V-2022 is quite a nuisance. [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 21:31, 3 July 2022 (UTC)
*:Isn't the behaviour the same here on the other skins?
*:I agree it's not great having one item in a menu, but I think this case is quite rare since on most wikis move privilege is added along with page protection and deletion. There is a trade off here between the complexity of maintaining multiple variants of the skin in different circumstances and what looks best. Here we could add special treatment for the one item menu but we'd need to add additional code complexity and tests to cover it. Hope this insight is helpful. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:32, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Actions menu overflows when main menu is active (Vector 2022) ==

{{Tracked|T311471}}
When the main menu is active (meaning visible) and the window is quite narrow the actions menu (Read, Edit source, Add topic, View history) doesn't get condensed in the &quot;More&quot; drop down menu, resulting in a very ugly overflow. [[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] ([[User talk:L.xschlag|talk]]) 11:41, 1 July 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] - thank you for your feedback! This should now be fixed, let us know if you continue seeing issues.  [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 13:34, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Audio player issues (Vector 2022) ==

When pressing play from a wikipedia article (e.g. first clip in [[:w:en:Aftermath_(Rolling_Stones_album)]]), the page changes text colour from black to pale grey. Almost unreadable. This dead time varies from a few seconds to many minutes, probably caused by unsteady connection on my side. I tried opening 2-3-4... windows with the same article, and some windows seem to be stuck indefinitely while others play with minimal (but still annoying) delay. If I press play directly from file description page ( [[:w:en:File:Under_My_Thumb.ogg]]), it always plays instantly and the text always stays black. Win 10 Home / Chrome 102.0.5005.115 (64-bit) [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 19:29, 3 July 2022 (UTC)

:I've flagged this bug to the developers of [[Extension:TimedMediaHandler]]. This is not related to this project. I'll let you know if I hear anything back. Thanks for reporting! [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 16:43, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Language mix in the interface ==

Pardon me if this had already been discussed here. It seems that the language of the interface (as set in preferences) mixes up with local-language elements where it shouldn't. 
# My preferences are always &quot;interface=en&quot;, and thus I always see &quot;Contents Beginning&quot; in the TOC section - be it Chinese, Russian or Spanish wiki. 
# The pink box above TOC in ru-wiki says &quot;On this Википедия&lt;sup&gt;[sic!]&lt;/sup&gt; the language links are at the top of the page across from the article title. Go to top.&quot; In zh-wiki, however, the message is correctly &quot;On this Wikipedia the language links ...&quot; [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 21:23, 3 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thank you @[[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] for reporting this. That's odd. 🤔 [[betawiki:MediaWiki:Vector-language-redirect-to-top/en|The source code]] is: &lt;tt&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;On this {{SITENAME}} the language links&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;... - so apparently, something about &lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; isn't working here. But I don't know what yet. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:20, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Where are the categories? ==

Hi this is my first time looking at the prototype, so apologies if this question has been answered elsewhere - where are the categories? [[User:MassiveEartha|MassiveEartha]] ([[User talk:MassiveEartha|talk]]) 04:15, 5 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:MassiveEartha|MassiveEartha]]. I'm sorry that you felt confused. We don't touch elements such as categories. These prototypes were only created for editors to help us decide on the visual design matters. If the categories aren't displayed in any of the prototypes, then it's definitely unintentional and also irrelevant to what we do. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:02, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== 開発者集団は日本語版を軽視していると思われるThe group of developers seems to downplay the Japanese version ==

日本語版の利用者の一人としては、開発者の集団は日本語版を軽視していると考える。一つの証拠として開発者からの意見を求めるメッセージが英語だけで書かれていたことを挙げておく。機械翻訳があるのだから英語と共に日本語を添えることは簡単なことのはずである。それすらせずにVectorからVector2022への変更を強行したことは、一種の文化帝国主義であると評さざるを得ない。As one of the users of the Japanese version, I think that the group of developers disregards the Japanese version. One proof is that the message for the developer's opinion was written in English only. Since there is machine translation, it should be easy to add Japanese along with English. It must be said that forcing the change from Vector to Vector 2022 without doing so is a kind of cultural imperialism.--[[Special:Contributions/27.85.205.84|27.85.205.84]] 07:17, 5 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello 27.85.205.84. Do you maybe know good open-source machine translators working for Japanese and English? I've noticed that Google Translate doesn't work for these languages well. Sometimes it changes words, meanings, and the tone of entire sentences completely. I could write in Polish, my first language, but I'm sure that would be even more difficult. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:15, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Vector 2022を強要する行為は、開発者が読者を軽視していることの証拠である The act of forcing Vector 2022 is evidence that developers are downplaying their readers. ==

開発者（の集団）はアカウントユーザーなら自分で好きなスキンを使えるのだから、あまり出来がよいとは言えないVector 2022を強要してっもかまわないと考えているようである。しかし、元々Vector 2022は読者として快適に使えることを考慮していない。開発者（の集団）は読者がいなければいくら記事を作っても意味がないということを忘れているのだろうか。It seems that developers (a group of people) are willing to force Vector 2022, which is not very good, because account users can use their favorite skins. However, originally Vector 2022 did not consider it to be comfortable to use as a reader. Do developers (groups) forget that it doesn't make sense to write an article without a reader?--[[Special:Contributions/27.85.205.84|27.85.205.84]] 07:29, 5 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello! As I can see, the translation was done by Google Translate. It's not good. I've used DeepL and this message is very different in English. Why do you think Vector 2022 was not originally designed to be comfortable to use as a reader? I would like to understand what made you think so.
:こんにちは！ ご覧のとおり、翻訳はGoogle翻訳によって行われました。 良くない。 私はDeepLを使用しましたが、このメッセージは英語では大きく異なります。 なぜVector2022は、もともとリーダーとして快適に使用できるように設計されていなかったと思いますか？ どうしてそう思ったのか理解したい。 [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 02:06, 12 July 2022 (UTC)
:: [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)-san]], your great DeepL-ed message causes a [[:ja:Wikipedia:削除依頼/Wikipedia:井戸端/subj/デスクトップ版外装（スキン）改善バージョンの実装について|deletion discussion]] due to copyright violation. I wish a good Foundation staff would deeply understand the copyright policy in Wikipedia and recognize that copypasting from machine translation could violate the copyright that was attributed to that translation service.
:: So, while I'm not the original poster of this section, let me answer the question: 
:: &gt; Why do you think Vector 2022 was not originally designed to be comfortable to use as a reader? 
:: If you think the only problem is new Vector 2022 design itself, I must say you are missing an important point: how you all introduced the new skin. All of the changes has never been announced in jawiki before being applied (and unfortunately, after that, until today). Many of the editors, the readers, the users were surprised at the new design all of the sudden, and not a few of them regarded it as a big bug or something.
:: You may wonder, &quot;we let you know this in advance, via a member of your community.&quot; That's true, partially. [[User:AppleRingo777|AppleRingo777-san]] took your messages and passed them to us per your instruction. I heard that you (or someone in Foundation) asked to post the message in WP:NEWS. How did you determine that WP:NEWS, generally where announcements '''only for the editors''' are posted, was enough to communicate this important news that obviously affected the entirety of community members including the readers? Will you also assign the responsibility on this to AppleRingo777-san, a good community member? I cannot help but want the Foundation to realize that you all destroyed our trust. --[[Special:Contributions/2400:4052:3420:4500:444C:45BF:13AC:59E2|2400:4052:3420:4500:444C:45BF:13AC:59E2]] 14:40, 14 July 2022 (UTC)

== Listed coordinates overlapping with header weirdly ==

{{Tracked|T281974}}

for an example of this, see wp's [[:en:London|london]] article ([https://imgur.com/a/rEngM3R screenshot]) [[User:LarstonMarston|LarstonMarston]] ([[User talk:LarstonMarston|talk]]) 20:00, 5 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thank you @[[User:LarstonMarston|LarstonMarston]]. In this case, we need to fix the bug together with the communities - some code should be changed by editors on each wiki with this bug separately. We can help (and we're working on it). [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:11, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
::thanks, good to hear [[User:LarstonMarston|LarstonMarston]] ([[User talk:LarstonMarston|talk]]) 20:06, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Default to Collapsed Menu Exposed TOC ==

{{Tracked|T287609}}

I was trying to figure out why I didn't like the new TOC, and then it hit me that the main reason was that it is hidden by the side menu when you first visit a page (I very rarely login to Wikipedia, and I'm thinking that's the norm for most visitors). Then I was thinking that I almost never use the main navigation links, they just aren't part of my normal use case of visiting Wikipedia (it is to learn a specific thing that I don't currently know enough about). I was going to post to make it possible to hide the main nav, but then realized that you already built it, but the default is for it to show. My hypothesis is that the bulk of users don't look or click on any of the menu items, and that the menu should be hidden by default and the TOC exposed above the fold.  [[Special:Contributions/195.134.163.110|195.134.163.110]] 10:34, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

:Yes, TOC should be exposed above the article not on the right. In fact in desktop view if I click PC version it does not open stuff on the left. [[Special:Contributions/2A00:1370:8184:2478:A928:87EF:D073:FEEA|2A00:1370:8184:2478:A928:87EF:D073:FEEA]] 16:22, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
:Thank you for your feedback! We are planning on implementing this change within the next couple of weeks.  Progress can be tracked in the phabricator ticket linked above.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 10:04, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

::I would like you to give logged-in users the right to choose that as well. If you knew about these plans, don't you think that was a little premature to set Vector (2022) as the default in JAWP ? If you make changes right after you start it in JAWP, Japanese users will be confused. --[[User:呉野|呉野]] ([[User talk:呉野|talk]]) 13:21, 14 July 2022 (UTC)

== Replace the &quot;new section&quot; tab text with &quot;+&quot; gadget not working. ==

{{Fixed}}

On the English Wikipedia upon switching to Modern Vector the aforementioned gadget ceases to function as intended.

[[User:Nathanielcwm|Nathanielcwm]] ([[User talk:Nathanielcwm|talk]]) 13:14, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

:Looks like the gadget is setup to only work on Vector and Monobook. I have updated it to also apply to Vector 2022 skin (https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki%3AGadget-addsection-plus.js&amp;type=revision&amp;diff=1096783301&amp;oldid=1047498910) [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 15:59, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== July ==

@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]]: Does Vector 2022 will be deployed (as default) at all Wikimedia wikis until the end of July, as it is written [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements|here]]? I am asking this because I see that there is still some work to do and the deadline written there changed several times. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 21:56, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]], thanks for this question. This information is already outdated. It will ''not'' be deployed in July. We hope to send an update to the village pumps next week. We're working on the announcement right now. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:01, 7 July 2022 (UTC)

== Language switching ==

Hi, I really appreciate the suggestion of translations within the language button, thank you! [[Special:Contributions/37.103.14.65|37.103.14.65]] 09:06, 7 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thanks! Appreciation also goes to the [[Wikimedia Language engineering]] team, because they have made this particular change. We have &quot;only&quot; provided the language button :) [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 02:01, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== Vector (2022)のウィキペディア日本語版への導入について About the introduction of Vector (2022) to the Japanese version of Wikipedia ==

「[[:ja:Wikipedia:井戸端/subj/デスクトップ版外装（スキン）改善バージョンの実装について]]」での案内によると7月14日までこのページでコメントを受け付けるとのことなので意見を書く。--[[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] ([[User talk:匿竜類|talk]]) 02:25, 8 July 2022 (UTC)
* 開発者は開発すること自体に喜びを感じるべきであり、日本語版で行ったように強引に導入して「見えるところ」に成果が表れることに喜びを感じるべきでない。
* 開発者は裏方として、開発に専念するべきであり、それを使うかどうかは「利用者」の判断にゆだねるべきである。
* スキンはインフラストラクチャーである。技術者が陥りがちな間違いだが「新しければよい」というものではない。
* 現在のVector (2022)は完成品とは言えずベータテストの段階でしかない。この段階で全面導入を進めようとするのは技術者の姿勢として適切でない。ベータテストは希望者を募って行うべきである。
* Vector (2022)をデフォルトのスキンとすることについて、本当に開発者チームに権限が与えられているのか。証拠があるなら、リンクをつけて示してほしい。
* 今回の経緯を見ると「読者」に対する観点が脱落している。「読者」のいない記事に何の意味があるのだろうか。
:ja: Wikipedia: Idobata / subj / Desktop version According to the guidance on implementing the improved exterior (skin) version, comments will be accepted on this page until July 14, so I will write my opinion.
* Developers should be delighted with the development itself, and should not be delighted with the &quot;visible&quot; results of the forcible introduction as was done in the Japanese version.
* Developers should concentrate on development behind the scenes and leave it to the &quot;user&quot; to decide whether or not to use it.
* Skins are infrastructure. It's a mistake that engineers tend to make, but it's not &quot;just new.&quot;
* The current Vector (2022) is not a finished product, it is only in the beta test stage. It is not appropriate as an engineer's attitude to proceed with full-scale introduction at this stage. Beta testing should be done by recruiting applicants.
* Is the developer team really empowered to make Vector (2022) the default skin? If you have proof, please link to it.
* Looking at the history of this time, the viewpoint for &quot;readers&quot; is missing. What does an article without a &quot;reader&quot; mean? [[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] ([[User talk:匿竜類|talk]]) 02:25, 8 July 2022 (UTC)
*:Hi @[[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] - Thank you for your feedback and for the bug reports below.  We are currently in the process of taking the Vector (2022) skin out of beta testing/pilot mode and into the stage where we scale the skin, with the hopes of making it the default on all the wikis.  Over the course of the next month, we will be hosting conversations with the largest Wikipedias and getting their feedback on the skin, similar to our conversations with Japanese Wikipedia right now.  Even when default, logged-in users will still be able to chose whether they want to use the skin or not.  If they decide not to use it, they can turn it off at any moment in their user preferences.
*:In terms of readers, for every change we have made when building the skin, we have tested both quantitatively and qualitatively with readers and well as editors.  To access more detail on the research and testing we have done, please go [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features|to the Features page]] and select the feature you are interested in learning about.  From there, you can read the sections named Quantitative research or Qualitative research to see the testing we have done. In addition, we have also done more open-ended testing with readers to identify the issues with the skin starting in 2020 until now. Please see the  [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Repository/Hureo User Research Report/ja|Hureo User Research Report]] with Readers and Editors, the [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Repository/Wikimania Stockholm research report/ja|Wikimania Stockholm research report]], the [https://nbviewer.org/github/wikimedia-research/Desktop-behavior-analysis-Aug-2019/blob/master/Desktop_usage_behavior_analysis.ipynb Wikimedia Desktop Usage and Behavior Data Analysis], or the [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Repository/Sticky Header and Table of Contents User Testing/ja|Sticky Header and Table of Contents User Testing]] reports for some examples of the studies we have done with readers (which have translations in Japanese), what we have learned, and how we used those learnings to create the new skin. [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 10:00, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Vector (2022)の不具合の報告 Report a bug in Vector (2022) ==

{{Tracked|T303267}} {{Tracked|T281974}}

日本語版でVector (2022)を使うと、左側に「このWikipediaでは言語間リンクがページの先頭にある記事タイトルの向かい側に設置されています。ページの先頭をご覧ください。」と表示されるのだが、実際には「記事タイトル」は「ページの先頭」ではなくこのメッセージの下に表示される。以前は、このようなことがなかったように思うので一時的なものかもしれないが、症状が出ていることを確認してほしい。When I use Vector (2022) in the Japanese version, it says &quot;In this Wikipedia, the interlingual link is located opposite the article title at the top of the page. Please see the top of the page.&quot; However, in reality, the &quot;article title&quot; is displayed below this message instead of &quot;at the top of the page&quot;. I don't think this happened before, so it may be temporary, but please make sure that you have symptoms.--[[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] ([[User talk:匿竜類|talk]]) 02:42, 8 July 2022 (UTC)

:上記不具合を報告してから、1日経過していますが、応答がありません。[[:ja:Wikipedia:表示改善依頼#Vector（2022）スキンで、バッジと地図のタグが重なって表示される#]]によると、どうやらこの種の不具合はファブリケータで処理することになっているようですが、そちらの方への連絡はしていただけたのでしょうか。とりあえず担当者の応答を求めます。One day has passed since I reported the above problem, but there is no response. ja: Wikipedia: Display improvement request #Vector (2022) In the skin, the badge and the map tag are displayed overlapping. According to #, it seems that this kind of defect is to be handled by the fabricator. Could you contact that person? For the time being, ask for the response of the person in charge.--[[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] ([[User talk:匿竜類|talk]]) 03:05, 9 July 2022 (UTC)
::Hello! The coordinates issue is known but the language one wasn't.  Thank you for bringing it to our attention.
::I will reply with more details next week. Have a great weekend and thank you for the bug reports. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 18:27, 9 July 2022 (UTC)
:::These are tracked in [[phab:T303267]] and [[phab:T281974]]. Thanks for the report! [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 16:39, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Merge [ca-view] and [ca-nstab-main] in the article toolbar ==

Currently, in the article toolbar, we have two links (Read and Article) that lead to the same location. One of them is located in the left and the other one is located in the right navigation. This can be confusing to readers, and also adds unnecessary weight to the toolbar. [https://imgur.com/56mbihi Current look].

It would be good if we could merge these two tabs into one. Ideally, the best solution, in my opinion, would be to merge the right and left navigation and center the items, [https://imgur.com/a/ih52zYZ like this]. Please tell me what you think about this. Thank you! — [[User:Aca|Aca]] ([[User talk:Aca|talk]]) 11:18, 9 July 2022 (UTC)

:{{O}}. Now, the tabs are clear. You have 2 pages: the article and the talk page. You can select 1 action at a time for each of them: reading, visual editing, source editing, and viewing the history. Form the proposed design, you can understand that the tabs led to different types of pages. The watch is something not related to the article? And if now you are on article tabs, if you would press on the editing source tab, you would arrive on a page not related to the article (this is a possible confusion)? And so on. &quot;This can be confusing to readers,&quot; - how so? Are there any data? And if there are, are there any data that the proposed design is better? P.S. I also dislike the proposed design, due to visual reasons. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 19:00, 9 July 2022 (UTC)

== Big blank space when on a big zoom ==

Unlike the old layout that adjust depending of the size of zoom, the new format seems to follow a single size that, when zoomed in, creates a big blank space like if the page was still loading

It needs be fixed so the wiki pages can be better for people that have vison issues 

- [[:en:User:Meganinja202|User:Meganinja202]] | [[:en:User_talk:Meganinja202|¿]]  10:17:00 11 July 2022 (UTC) [[User:Meganinja202|Meganinja202]] ([[User talk:Meganinja202|talk]]) 10:17, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

:[[User:Meganinja202]] are you taking about [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Limiting_content_width]] or reporting a bug? If the latter, what browser and device are you using? [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 16:34, 11 July 2022 (UTC)
::i think should be a bug since its a thing that happens from top to bottom of the page and not from the sides, i am use Chromium Based MS Edge [[User:Meganinja202|Meganinja202]] ([[User talk:Meganinja202|talk]]) 17:02, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Language box recommendation ==

A minor suggestion: why not insert the language box on the title header so I don't have to go all up to the top of the page to change language versions. So yeah, thanks! [[User:PeaceSeekers|PeaceSeekers]] ([[User talk:PeaceSeekers|talk]]) 11:00, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

:ya, they should had kept the language bar on the side of page instead of the top, leaving the language option on top only on mobile/touch machines [[User:Meganinja202|Meganinja202]] ([[User talk:Meganinja202|talk]]) 17:03, 11 July 2022 (UTC)
:@[[User:PeaceSeekers|PeaceSeekers]] - do you use the site while logged-in? If so, you can access the language switching button from the persistent (&quot;sticky&quot;) header at the top of the page while you're scrolling.  We are also in discussion of bringing this functionality to all logged-in users as well.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 08:15, 12 July 2022 (UTC)
::I did log in, but I can't see it though ... what I have is only, from the left: the search button, article title, discussion page, edit history, watchlist and my profile stuff (for lack of better words). So that's that. [[User:PeaceSeekers|PeaceSeekers]] ([[User talk:PeaceSeekers|talk]]) 08:43, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== What I still would love to see different solutions to ==

I'm very much looking forward to not having the text fill an entire wide screen. This will make Wikipedia far easier to read on big screens. Thanks! A few things that still don't work for me:

'''Table of contents'''

If I haven't collapsed the left menu, the ToC is not visible when I start reading the article. This makes it more difficult to get an overview.

It's also ''generally'' more difficult to get an overview of the article content, as I need to go to the ToC in the sidebar and scroll down to see everything on big pages (like a Village Pump). This both makes it more difficult for me to conceptualize what's on the page – as I've tested this, I've realised I find it challenging to get a grasp of a page if I can't see the various topics at the same time – and adds more work, as I have to move the mouse pointer to the ToC to be able to scroll. I would have much preferred if it used more of the space available to get around this.

'''My contributions'''

My own user contributions is something I use all the time – it's my way of getting back to what I was doing before. Making it less accessible in the top menu is wrench thrown into my workflow.

'''Language links'''

This is my main issue. I use other languages ''all the time''. As a reader, I glance at them to conceptualise the topic – which languages have written about this subject? This hints at things that aren't available in the content itself. As an editor, I check out other languages to see what sources they have and so on. Having to click to even see if there are languages I can read is an extra step that both requires more work, but also makes it less inviting, as the opportunity doesn't stare me in the face. This is so central to my workflow that it might in itself be reason to keep using Vector 2010, but that's certainly not my preferred solution. [[User:Julle|Julle]] ([[User talk:Julle|talk]]) 10:13, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== feedback ==

asbra med maxbredd! coolt att wikipedia tar steget in i 2010-talet och blir läsbart på stor skärm.


språklänkarna blir mycket sämre. man borde kunna se språken direkt och klicka på dem, det är en sak man använder hela tiden.


jag förstår inte varför ni har bytt ut texten i användarmenyn mot symboler? det var tydligare med text. nu måste man gissa vad de betyder och många kommer aldrig lista ut det.


man borde inte behöva skrolla INNE I innehållsförteckningen för att se hela. sjukt störande att behöva gå till den och skrolla I DEN för att se vad som finns på sidan. [[Special:Contributions/81.92.27.129|81.92.27.129]] 18:12, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thanks for the feedback! 
:(google translation)
:* max  width: cool that wikipedia takes the step into the 2010s and becomes readable on the big screen.
:* language links: you should be able to see the languages ​​directly and click on them, it is one thing you use all the time.
:* Icons: I do not understand why you have replaced the text in the user menu with symbols? it was clearer with text. now you have to guess what they mean and many will never figure it out.
:* Table of contents: you should not have to scroll INSIDE the table of contents to see the whole thing. Very annoying to have to go to it and scroll IN IT to see what's on the page. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 19:00, 12 July 2022 (UTC)
:::(&quot;Sjukt störande&quot;, which the machine translation rendered as &quot;ill disturbing&quot;, means &quot;very annoying&quot;.) [[User:Julle|Julle]] ([[User talk:Julle|talk]]) 00:15, 13 July 2022 (UTC)

== More TOC concerns ==

On pages with long headings (f.i. [[Wikipedia:Closure_requests]]), the new TOC is highly impractical. The headings are difficult to parse, sometimes cutting words in two. A lot of scrolling is also required to get an overview of what discussions to close. Will it be possible to go back to the old TOC on a per-page base? I can imagine a lot of non-article pages will have similar problems (including this one).

Less importantly, I noticed that the default is having only the top heading displayed. In some pages / articles there are very few top-level headings, and this would always require the reader to uncollapse. Can this be made more dynamic? [[User:Femke|Femke]] ([[User talk:Femke|talk]]) 18:09, 14 July 2022 (UTC)

:Would it be possible (probably only on bigger screens) to use the empty white space on the right for tools (for logged-in editors), so that the TOC is less cramped? Solves two problems in one.  [[User:Femke|Femke]] ([[User talk:Femke|talk]]) 17:00, 18 July 2022 (UTC)

== incorrect translation Vector 2022（jpwiki） ==

The information text on where to switch languages is partially translated incorrectly. I think , &quot;このWikipediaでは言語間リンクがページの先頭にある記事タイトルの向かい側に設置されています。&quot; is a slightly mistaken translation. This may mean that the language switch is outside the display.

You probably meant to write that, &quot;他言語版へのリンクは、ページ先頭の記事タイトルの右側にあります。&quot;. But I would rather you don't adopt this with no check. [[User:呉野|呉野]] ([[User talk:呉野|talk]]) 10:01, 15 July 2022 (UTC)

== 'Talk' and 'Contributions' buttons shouldn't be hidden in the navigation bar's drop down menu. ==

We shouldn't have to click twice to get to our '''Talk''' and '''Contribution''' pages from the navigation bar. I mean, there's already a bunch of wasted white space to right of the search box and to the the left of our Userpage button for those two icons to be added in the nav bar without any problems. [[User:Some1|Some1]] ([[User talk:Some1|talk]]) 02:57, 17 July 2022 (UTC)

== Simple English sidebar ==

I notice in Simple English with the 2022 Vector, the menus on the left side of the page are  to the left of the page text as they should be, but they are far above rather than beside the text. [[User:Jim.henderson|Jim.henderson]] ([[User talk:Jim.henderson|talk]]) 05:47, 17 July 2022 (UTC)

== The new sidebar TOC is confusive, not intuitive, unusable ==

I strongly oppose the new sidebar TOC. It is extremely confusing, not intuitive, and unusable. The removal of the numbering for paragraphs and their transformation into collapsible lists, will make the articles and discussions unreadable, as their structure will be completely unclear.


The TOC at the top of the article right below the lead text was perfect for giving a clear impression of the article's structure and for exploring its contents.


I think that keeping both the old and the new TOC (if the latter is really necessary) would be a good solution. The new TOC proves useful only in the bottom sections of very long articles. [[Special:Contributions/2001:B07:A2A:1884:D5D:3606:C70C:5366|2001:B07:A2A:1884:D5D:3606:C70C:5366]] 14:03, 17 July 2022 (UTC)
* Second that. Another point of note is that the narrow sidebar is a poor match for long section titles. Even in English wikipedia, some headings must be split in two narrow lines, or three. Other languages, that are naturally more verboise than English, are even more affected. [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 08:16, 29 July 2022 (UTC)

== This gives me depression ==

By merely see this happen week-by-week, I can see this sacred project gradually being destroyed. I wish I could stop this. – [[User:Ilovemydoodle2|Ilovemydoodle2]] ([[User talk:Ilovemydoodle2|talk]]) 07:35, 18 July 2022 (UTC)

== wrong name for a language ==

someone is having a laugh, or got really confused about translation. In the main page https://www.wikipedia.org/, '''Français''' now appears as '''anglais''', both in the top 'wheel' and in the 'Read Wikipedia in your language' drop-down. This is very wrong. What other languages have been disappeared in this way ? a bit of QA would go a long way :-) [[Special:Contributions/92.16.98.145|92.16.98.145]] 16:23, 19 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thanks for letting us know! This looks like a mistake/error on translatewiki.net. We'll try to fix that immediately. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 18:28, 19 July 2022 (UTC)
::FYI this wasn't related to the project.
::See related Reddit thread for details on what happened here if you are curious: https://www.reddit.com/r/wikipedia/comments/w2iidz/why_anglais_did_someone_sabotage_it/ [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 20:03, 20 July 2022 (UTC)

== coordinates being weird (again) ==

there was an issue a little while ago where location coordinates in an article would overlap with the header. that's fixed now, but some icons are still uncomfortably close to them, like the FA star; for an example of this, see the english wiki's [[:en:India|India]] article ([https://imgur.com/a/uuXPMzk screenshot]) [[Special:Contributions/2600:1700:7AA1:2400:9CA1:1220:42FD:1F12|2600:1700:7AA1:2400:9CA1:1220:42FD:1F12]] 20:17, 20 July 2022 (UTC)

== General concerns! ==

Well I was part of the process for quite some time now. And up until the move of the TOC from inside the content to the sidebar it was okay with me. I had some minor things, I thought I will get used to: the white space (anyone wanting that, can narrow their window), some inconsistencies (compare [[#A few more issues with the Page header vs Sticky header icons]]), the language switcher, which I fear will leave the impression of reading ''the same'' thing in different languages (compare [[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Archive3#Language_Selector_misunderstandable]], as a side-note: nothing happened here, at least nothing I recognized). 

But today I got this message: [[Topic:Wsfx4tbwzkgamaek]] asking for a translation for [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Updates/2022-07_for_the_largest_wikis]]. Let me cite: 

*'''&quot;...before discussing the change itself&quot;'''
*'''&quot;...that allows for a way to identify the needs of the community from the new skin.&quot;'''
*'''&quot;We would love to see the Vector 2022 skin [...] become the new default across all wikis...&quot;'''
*'''&quot;We will be ready to begin making the change at the end of August (and not in July, as previously announced), when the ''visual refinements'' and other ''deployment blockers'' are ready.&quot;'''
*'''&quot;The goal for that discussion will be to identify breaking issues or opportunities for improvement for the new skin. It will be important for us to reduce the risk of bugs or imperfections that would be particularly troublesome on [insert your language] Wikipedia&quot;'''

All that reads like: Well, we're just talking, let's see, what needs to be done, that everyone is happy. There are some things that need to be done anyways. 

Now let's read those two cites:
*'''&quot;...difficult discussions about the launch as the default&quot;''' (compare [[Topic:Wsfx4tbwzkgamaek]])
*'''&quot;...until our improvements are default on all wikis in July 2022.&quot;''' (compare [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements]] 

So isn't this not just a request for bug reports instead of a &quot;discussion&quot;? Is this not more of a fear of &quot;Flak&quot; instead of &quot;needs of the community&quot;? Isn't it happening anyways, instead of you &quot;loving to see it&quot;? What about all the other projects, wikibooks for example (&quot;[insert your language] Wikipedia&quot;)? I understand, you do the work, you decide. '''But:'''

* Is it wise to &quot;discuss&quot; while there are still tasks to be done and decisions to be made? (compare [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Visual_Refinements]], which by the way doesn't even seem finished, and for example [[#MediaWiki:Sidebar]])
* Is the Date of the end of August (6 weeks) really feasible? Who will translate all the feedback that will come in german?
* Is it good to leave the impression, that communities will have a choice (compare [[#Jawiki has NOT reached consensus on implementing Vector 2022 yet]])?

Some suggestions, if I may:
# Why not try to slow the process down? Why the haste? One could remove the deadlines and refine everything. ''Then'' ask the communities for bug reports.
# Why not try some marketing &quot;tricks&quot;? I think the discussion about the white space clearly shows that desktop ''improvements'' are highly subjective. Why not use for example ''skin changes''? Another Option could be deploying Vector 2022 only for not logged in users and hence prolong/smooth the transition-process creating time for bug reports and discussions. Most of anonymous usage would probably not care for the change, as long as the content is there. On another plus-side it will create &quot;data&quot; on how the menu-usage changes and community-links are perceived. It will probably even create data on how many logged in users switch to the new layout deliberately and or switch back hence providing &quot;hard&quot; success-data. 
# Would it be that bad to really leave the community a choice?
# If you are relying on volunteers, grant them a little more slack. Bug reports from the community need time: Bugs need to be recognized as bugs, they need to be reported, triaged ''and'' handled. Is this possible in 6 weeks? Volunteers might have another life, a job, kids, a week might be pretty short notice. Phabricator-use is not that trivial.
# Let's talk or try, if the new design might eventually be a problem for recruiting new volunteers. Did anyone think about a possible impact of hiding ''community-links'' in collapsed menus? Nobody seems to talk about community-pages or discussion-pages or even other project-scopes. Is the new menu-structure as fitting for these as for wikipedia-articles? 

I'm deeply saddened. The new TOC will make my life within wikimedia really hard and I commented about that early on (compare [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Third_prototype_testing/Feedback#Benutzername:HirnSpuk|here, bullet 7]]). I think all the TOC-comments on this page (see above) should raise at least some concern. And last but not least, I'm deeply troubled, that the new language-links will do more harm, than good.

So, ping @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] and @[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]], my sincere apology, I don't mean to be rude or mean and I appreciate your work and the work of your colleagues. But I don't want to volunteer for the translation-request, because all of the above mentioned problems.

Regards [[User:HirnSpuk|HirnSpuk]] ([[User talk:HirnSpuk|talk]]) 22:25, 20 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:HirnSpuk|HirnSpuk]]. Thank you for your outstanding involvement, and appreciation for our work. I'm glad to see that. Also, thank you for your sincere, thoughtful, and thorough comment with all the links and quotes. I think I understand what your approach is, I'm happy that you're saying this.
:Before I answer the questions, I'll admit/confirm that:
:# The ToC work hasn't been finished yet. So haven't the visual refinements. There's a list of issues labelled as &quot;[[phab:T309972|deployment blockers]]&quot;, by which we mean issues we need to solve before making it the default everywhere. I hope this will make you less sad!
:# Bug reports do need time. Phabricator is not that trivial.
:# While indeed focusing on the most typical use cases, like interacting with articles.
:# In some discussions, it has been confusing what exactly is for the individual communities to choose between.
:Regarding the questions, my answers to the easiest part:
:# We've been working since 2019, most work is behind us and we're headed towards the end. Now, we need to make sure what else the largest communities may need.
:# What about all the other projects - the message I asked if you could translate is dedicated to the largest communities of the top language versions of Wikipedia.
:# This is why in that message, we're initiating a pre-discussion about culture of collaboration. After that, we'll ask for bug reports and other technical requests.
:# We use the name Desktop Improvements because the point is to make changes that are actual measured improvements. Only some of the visual refinements are really subjective. But regarding the feature changes, the idea for each of these is that it should be an improvement compared to Legacy Vector.
:# We're part of [[Core Experiences]] and work closely with the teams focusing on newbies and more experienced editors. It's our plan to make entry points for new volunteers prominent, in collaboration with Growth. We hope that Desktop Improvements will be an introduction to even more sophisticated changes addressing very specific use cases.
:OK, enough now for one comment. Let's keep talking, though. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 01:30, 21 July 2022 (UTC)

:: @[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]], because you said &quot;let's keep talking&quot;, let me react to your latter 5 points.
::# I do not want to diminish in any way the work you (plural) have done since 2019 and I think the plan is good. But I'm convinced, that the timing is not right. &quot;The end of August&quot; I find far to soon if you &quot;need to make sure what else the largest communities may need.&quot;
::# I wasn't able to find the &quot;we talk to the «big guys» first&quot;-idea anywhere. The only thing I find is &quot;We would like our improvements to be default on all wikis in August/September 2022.&quot; There will probably not be time to talk to the «small guys». And in addition, the text to translate suggest, that there is a choice, and you'd like to &quot;talk&quot;. My impression is you want to ask: how can we best ask for bug reports. That might (and probably will) work, but I don't want to be part of exactly this approach.
::# same as first and second.
::# How is the improvement measured? Is there any &quot;hard data&quot; anywhere? Everything needs more clicks hence more time. It &quot;looks&quot; a little better and modern, which I also find necessary and good. But what is actually &quot;improved&quot;? 
::#*I need more scrolling for the TOC, 
::#* I will need more work (and creative ideas btw) for rework of community-pages that rely on the &quot;old&quot; version of the TOC at the moment, and even worse, I need to check the visual appearance and usability of pages in even more configurations (to mobile and desktop and VE and source, now I need to add different skins), 
::#* I need more clicks for almost anything (if menus are hidden, but this is nearly imperative, to get at least some use out of the new ToC), 
::#* I'm deeply troubled about the &quot;impression&quot; some changes might make (which hence wouldn't be an improvement either and which is by default not measurable)... 
::#* What about the visually impaired? Is it an improvement for them too, any hard data? 
::#:Please, feel free to elaborate. I know it would be baloney to change the name in the last 6 weeks of the work. My point is not to do that, but to take a step back, review what's done so far, and if the decision will be made to prolong the process a really long time, then ''maybe'' one ''might'' think about a change, and if it's only to get less of the &quot;if you do this I'll be done with wiki...&quot;-criticism that's just consuming time for everyone.
::# I'm not addressing technical issues. It's the possible &quot;hiding&quot; of prominent community-links in the sidebar by using elaborate restructuring and collapsing mechanisms. On that the single communities won't have influence as far as I see it at the moment.
::PS: I appreciate trying to cheer me up (&quot;make you less sad&quot;), but my sadness stems from the uncertainty how this will all work out. In the end the prototype is only a prototype. And how much work in the community must be done afterwards to facilitate the &quot;improvements&quot; is also not clear. The main point being, that I struggle with checking and cross-checking functionalities in different systems. It was okay until the move of the ToC. But as long as there is still work to be done, I can't even think about workarounds for not having the ToC where and how I was used to it. 
::Regards [[User:HirnSpuk|HirnSpuk]] ([[User talk:HirnSpuk|talk]]) 07:34, 21 July 2022 (UTC)
:::Hey @[[user:HirnSpuk|HirnSpuk]], thank you for your continued feedback. It's been super helpful. We've rewritten our message to German-language Wikipedia based on your thoughts and the learnings we've gotten through similar conversations on other wikis. We're going to post our next draft for translation this week - let us know what you think of it! We're open to suggestions. Your continued thoughts are much appreciated!
:::In terms of your individual questions:
:::# The timing is not right
:::#* We really do believe that our changes are improvements already! We're eager to bring them to readers and editors. As you have pointed out, we've been building these for three years. We've received feedback from German-language Wikipedians, and many other communities. As you also know, we've performed prototype testing with editors across 30+ languages, and different types of quantitative testing on each feature. Many significant requests have already been discussed.
:::#* The main reason we want to have this conversation now (while we're putting the finishing touches, like the visual refinements and changes to the table of contents) is that we'd like to see if any of the feedback might change what those finishing touches are. We'd also feel more confident with our plan once we know what the additional work we need to do is, if any.
:::#* The process we're envisioning is to collect bugs and requests, and triage these into three categories: (1) the ones that must be done before the deployment, (2) the ones that can wait until after the deployment, and (3) the ones that we don't think are a priority. Our goal for the conversation with the communities is to establish what lies in each bucket such that the communities are comfortable with changing the default.
:::#* We understand if a conversation might take longer on a given community, and do not plan on cutting any discussion short just to reach a deadline. We made a mistake with Japanese Wikipedia and made the change prior to acknowledging a common process. We'd like to avoid that mistake with the other wikis, hence the lengthier discussion with German-language Wikipedia.
:::# The &quot;we talk to the «big guys» first&quot;-idea
:::#* We try to take the approach of equity. We have conversations across the top 25 Wikipedias by size. We've attended a [[m:Wikisource Triage meetings|Wikisource Triage meeting]] and two [[m:SWAN|SWAN]] meetings. The set of pilot wikis is diverse. We inform the big and small communities about our office hours using different channels, incl. MassMessages, Tech News, Discord, Telegram, Facebook. We're going to have the interpretation support in the top UN languages.
:::# How is the improvement measured?
:::#* Thank you for pointing this out. This very crucial piece was missing. We'll be adding a summary of our findings to our future messages.
:::#* You'll find the short answer [[:w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)#UX_research_and_usability_testing|on the English Wikipedia Village Pump page]], quite paradoxically brought to everyone's attention using the &quot;hidden&quot; template. For details on any individual feature, go to the “features” section of our documentation, select the feature you are interested in, and review the qualitative and quantitative sections.
:::# It's the possible &quot;hiding&quot; of prominent community-links in the sidebar by using elaborate restructuring and collapsing mechanisms. On that the single communities won't have influence as far as I see it at the moment.
:::#* This is a great question. So far, our interviews with users have shown that newcomers are NOT more likely to begin contributing based on the number (or even presence) of community links. In fact, having so many options at hand made them feel unwelcomed to the interface as they didn't instinctively know where the links would lead, and thus, felt intimidated or lost.
:::#* We think a better method is to have fewer links that are clearer to understand and pave more intuitive ways. These links are, among others, edit or history. We are working with the Growth and Editing teams to identify how we can increase the understanding of these links for readers and newcomers - both so they will know where the content they are reading is coming from, but also as a means of introducing them to contribution. See also: [[Core Experiences]].
:::# What about the visually impaired? Is it an improvement for them too, any hard data?
:::#* We've been doing accessibility testings with the American Foundation for the Blind. You'll find more information in this task: [[phab:T310033|T310033]]. Generally though, part of this work goes beyond Desktop Improvements, and is done by our designers who build basic user interface elements for all the teams.
:::Hey, on a side note, have you ever attended our office hours? I (Szymon) don't recall this. You'd have heard answers to some similar questions if you had joined us earlier. Anyway, feel invited.
:::[[user:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]], [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 02:44, 29 July 2022 (UTC)

== Sorry but user expereince is kind of awful ==

Okay. I've given &quot;Vector 2022&quot; a shot for a while and it is just confusing and difficult to use. Too much animation-style issues. Too much whitespace. Difficult discovery of functions. Difficult to obtain a feeling of confidence in mastery. If I would have been keeping a log, I'd have dozens of gripes by now. I don't wish to waste time enumerating specific things because it's besides the point because the entire experience is bad. I can't hack it anymore. I thought I'd get used to it but I'm going back to Vector 2010. Keep things simple. Keep it static. I know many people but a lot of work into this and it was a valid attempt but it just didn't suceed in improving over Vector 2010. [[User:Jason Quinn|Jason Quinn]] ([[User talk:Jason Quinn|talk]]) 02:24, 26 July 2022 (UTC)

== External link icon ==

The external link icon currently deployed on mediawiki.org looks horrible. What happened? The icon shown at [[phab:T261391]] in the &quot;After&quot; screenshot looks much better. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 19:55, 26 July 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]], what's the difference you're referring to? Could you maybe share a screenshot? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:36, 26 July 2022 (UTC)
::@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]]: Here.
::[[File:Vector2022 Broken External Link Icon.png|thumb|The icon looks thin and pixeled. Not like at Phabricator.]] --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 10:48, 27 July 2022 (UTC)
:::I saw that the issue was already reported. Compare [https://phab.wmfusercontent.org/file/data/zm2w6tyla7ap4pm54oxw/PHID-FILE-jxp2g6oxik24v6zcst5o/image.png this] with [https://phab.wmfusercontent.org/file/data/6tvujxqmvz53tlojn4qi/PHID-FILE-gq23v5redy2o4ki63rnq/Screen_Shot_2022-07-21_at_11.46.24_AM.png this]. Also, for me it looks like the arrow is misshaped. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 10:53, 27 July 2022 (UTC)
::::Hi @[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]] - thanks for your report.  The icon is indeed broken as of right now.  We're looking into this right now and hope to have a fix later this week or early next week.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 12:05, 28 July 2022 (UTC)

== Sticky header causes TOC to instantly offset on appearing ==

When scrolling down a page, at the moment the sticky header shows up (smoothly), the TOC offset is incremented to display below the header. However, the TOC offset change is instant, unlike the header. It's just a small visual thing, but I think making the TOC offset to follow the smooth header apparition would make pages look more reactive.&lt;br&gt;
Regards, [[User:Epok|Epok]] ([[User talk:Epok|talk]]) 18:54, 29 July 2022 (UTC)

== Sticky sidebar overlaps footer ==

{{tracked|T313060}}
I wonder if anyone have noticed it: when you scroll down until the end of the page (from a desktop) the sticky sidebar overlaps the footer. Because of this, it's impossible to read part of its content and it looks pretty weird. I don't know much about how MediaWiki works, but maybe applying z-index and background-color (or something similar) to the footer could be a possible solution?

Cheers, [[User:Anidae|Anidae]] ([[User talk:Anidae|talk]]) 22:18, 29 July 2022 (UTC)
: Hello @[[user:Anidae|Anidae]]. Thanks for writing here. Yes, we've noticed the bug and we'll fix it. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 11:49, 1 August 2022 (UTC)

== CSS gadget to truly disable max-width limit (on jawiki) ==

Hi, developers. I am aokomoriuta, a.k.a. jawiki sysop&amp;IFA, and was the [[usability:Releases/Default_Switch#Phase III Deployment|Phase III UX Ambassador for the (legacy) vector skin switching]].

In this thread, I'd like to notify you (developers) about the gadget '''NewVector-MaxWidth.css''', which is provided on Japanese Wikipedia to solve the max-width problem on Vector2022 and problems on the gadget linked from your FAQ page.

[[File:NewVector-MaxWidth example.png|800px|center]]

----

I understand why you think the limitation is reasonable. I won't make a counterargument to limit max-width as the default settings.

However, the limitation is NOT THE BEST FOR ALL USERS, but only most. Some users (including me) want to read Wikipedia and other articles as wide as possible (the browser's window-width).

I know you linked the gadget for such users ([[en:User:Jdlrobson/vector-max-width-toggle.js]]) from the [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Frequently_asked_questions#Why don’t we just make it a setting?|FAQ page]].

I tried it, but it's not good for me. There are three problems;

* I need to click the button to switch the width on each page.
* I can feel a little latency to see the switched page because JavaScript might take some instructions to overwrite the width settings, especially on my light laptop computer.
* The width is not maximized. It makes the width only about two times. As I wrote above, it is not enough.

To solve the above problems, I have provided a user custom css ([[:ja:プロジェクト:ウィキ技術部/スクリプト開発/trunk/newvector-maxwidth.css]]) to truly maximized the width on Japanese Wikipedia.

This method is significantly lighter than the gadget you provided, and easy to maintain because it needs only to specify the element's class/id which you limit the max-width. I will continue to maintain and provide Japanese Wikipedia users as long as I don't find an alternative way.

You can link the CSS from your (FAQ) pages, or take over its development and maintenance to provide all Wikimedia sites.
I also welcome feedback/request/comments from all developers and users. Please reply in this thread.

I hope this thread and your developments improve user experience successfully.

&lt;small&gt;日本語版の利用者の方へ(For Japanese users)：ガジェットに関する意見・要望・コメントなどは[[:ja:Wikipedia‐ノート:ベクター (2022年版)/横幅制限の撤廃]]でも受け付けていて、日本語ができる人はそちらに書いてもらったほうが応答や解決が早いと思います。&lt;/small&gt; [[User:青子守歌|aokomoriuta]] ([[User talk:青子守歌|talk]]) 06:58, 31 July 2022 (UTC)

== Design decision against the Wikimedia Movement strategy recommendations ==

{{tracked|T287609}}
Hello! The Desktop Improvements (sic) project has decided, against the Wikimedia Movement recommendations, to hide by default the links to sister projects to non logged users. The [[:m:Strategy/Wikimedia movement/2018-20/Recommendations/Improve User Experience|Improve User Experience]] recommendation textually says:

* ''Tools to connect '''cross-project''' and cross-language functionalities to provide an enhanced experience of the knowledge contained in the Wikimedia ecosystem for a particular interest, informational need, or inquiry.'' (bold text is mine).

We can have different views on aesthetics, but hiding the cross-project links instead of making them more prominent is against the recommendations. I have tried to discuss this in Phabricator, but there doesn't seem to be any way to discuss seriously this error. Thanks. [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 20:27, 1 August 2022 (UTC)

:[[User:Theklan|Theklan]], thank you for your concern and for keeping us on our toes. To clarify: the idea behind the goal that you've quoted is is to build systems and tools (such as structured data) that allow us to incorporate content from sister projects within Wikipedia. As we know from data collection simply linking to sister projects does not work effectively. So I respectfully disagree that we're are going &quot;against the Wikimedia Movement recommendations&quot;.
:Secondly, as we've discussed in the past: with each improvement comes a tradeoff, and sometimes when our principles/goals conflict with one another we are forced to make difficult decisions. So even if we had a movement goal to provide links to sister projects (which we do not), it still might be okay to collapse those links in some cases. We cannot offer people every link at all times — we know from research that this decreases the quality of the overall reading experience. So yes, the links in the sidebar are more difficult to access now. We are already aware of this. But the overall improvement to the reading experience makes this tradeoff worth it. This is the conclusion we have arrived at through data collection and testing. These decisions are not easy to make, and we know that certain people will be upset by them. I am sorry if you disagree with the conclusion we have come to.
:Thankfully the Structured data team are actively working on various experiments that bring content from sister projects directly into Wikipedia. You can read more about that project here: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T306341.  [[User:AHollender (WMF)|AHollender (WMF)]] ([[User talk:AHollender (WMF)|talk]]) 22:31, 1 August 2022 (UTC)
::&quot;Bring content from sister projects directly into Wikipedia&quot; doesn't seem like a recommendation, because we can also bring content from Wikiquotes to Wikisource, without using Wikipedia. So, sorry, but no. This recommendation is clear: disconnecting cross-project links goes against the recommendation. [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 07:58, 2 August 2022 (UTC)
:::@[[User:Theklan|Theklan]] you can read more about how content from sister projects is being incorporated into Wikipedia here: [[Structured Data Across Wikimedia/Search Improvements]] [[User:AHollender (WMF)|AHollender (WMF)]] ([[User talk:AHollender (WMF)|talk]]) 16:03, 2 August 2022 (UTC)
::::That's a good initative, yes. Is not related to what we are discussing here. What are the steps to make links to sister projects more prominent in the new design? [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 08:04, 3 August 2022 (UTC)
:::::In my understanding that question was already answered above: &quot;simply linking to sister projects does not work effectively&quot;. --[[User:AKlapper (WMF)|AKlapper (WMF)]] ([[User talk:AKlapper (WMF)|talk]]) 10:35, 3 August 2022 (UTC)
::::::&quot;Simply linking to sister projects does not work effectively&quot; can be a good sentence. Just deleting the links is, surely, less effective than having there. If the links there are not effective, we should have a place to put them on (that was my only point in the Phabricator ticket, but as usual it gets ignored, or the discussion goes to harassment if I have a point). Is there or will there be a place to put the links, or are we going to get rid of them just because they weren't prominent? (I remember that I have been constructive in this discussion, I even presented a mock-up to make my point more clear). [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 17:49, 3 August 2022 (UTC)

== Survey ==

Does [[phab:T314286|this survey]] will be run on English Wikipedia only? --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 09:25, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]] - no, we will be running the survey on approximately 10 languages, depending on where we are able to get translations.  We're starting with English Wikipedia while we wait for translations for other language wikis.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 11:15, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Namespaces in the search menu ==

It seems it is possible to improve the search as follows. For example, only for registered users. Editors often have to search for templates and links to help pages in the Wikipedia namespace, and registered users can probably do this more often than they type the names of articles in the search. To do this, it is convenient to type the name of the page directly in the search field, for example: &quot;template:page name&quot;, &quot;wikipedia:page name&quot;. It is even more convenient to type this with aliases of the namespaces &quot;t:name&quot; and &quot;wp:name&quot;. The inconvenient thing here is that you need to type the &quot;:&quot; character. Someone can switch the layout to English for this, where &quot;:&quot; is easier to type. And someone does not know about keyboard shortcuts on their language layout at all (there are even people who select and copy with the mouse and refuse to copy through ctrl+c/ctrl+v). It seems it would be convenient to have a namespace selection feature right in the drop-down list. For example, if it were possible to switch the search to these namespaces (or add these namespaces to the search output) if the namespace alias was the first &quot;wp  name&quot; - this is implemented in browsers when you can first type &quot;[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/95426?hl=en site search shortcut]&quot; in the address bar. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

:Hi @[[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]]. First of all, thank you for all your suggestions. I've taken the liberty and separated these into different topics. I think it'll be easier to talk. I needed to create the headings, and I tried to get the ideas reflected well, but if you think the headings could be better, please edit. You're the original author here.
:Regarding the namespaces in the search menu, I could swear I've seen something like this somewhere. I'll ask my team if we could do anything about it. Perhaps this would be a task for a separate team working just on the search... well, I'll get back to you. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 18:34, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== The header area in the new editor is not active for clicks and text selection ==

Sometimes when editing pages, it becomes necessary to select the page title and copy it. If you open editing in the [[2017 wikitext editor]] (for example, a random page that you have not opened before or you do not save site data through the browser settings), then the title is gray and it cannot be selected and copied. If you open (also a random page) for editing in the Visual editor, then the title is black and it can be selected and copied. It is necessary that you can always select and copy the title. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Open in reading mode without using scrolling ==

It is often necessary, when a page is in editing mode, to open a duplicate page in reading mode in a new tab to view or use a wiki link or footnote. Somewhere it was announced that you saw how much less often users began to scroll back to the beginning. To open a duplicate page, you need to scroll up, then down again to the place of editing. Maybe someday you will have ideas on how to open the reading mode without scrolling. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Add a help link to the languages widget ==

As a registered user, I would like to see languages that are more understandable to me higher in the list, for example, English. For many users, the main question is how to make specific languages higher. About this maybe there is somewhere deep in the help. But it seems it would be more useful to somehow find out that the user can influence the list of favorite languages, or go to this help from the menu itself with a minimum of clicks. And I would also like to know how to get rid of unnecessary suggested languages, which I clicked only once. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Placeholder for the search languages widget ==

As an editor, I sometimes have to open wikis in languages that are mentioned in the text (for example, as a country) or used in an article (for example, as a word in a [[:w:Category:Lang-x_templates|lang-x]] template). I understand in my own language what the language I need is called, but I do not know its original writing, which is shown in the drop-down menu. The first thing I do is spend time scrolling the list up and down in search of something similar. Yes, you can enter a name in the &quot;search&quot;, but this is 1) not very often required 2) you need to know about it in advance or remember, or the old experience of the language list prevails without this &quot;search&quot;. The problem is that the text &quot;Search for a language&quot; is too standardized and speaks poorly about the possibilities. I would like this placeholder to somehow directly and better than now tell me &quot;how&quot; to find (describes the actions - what should I type) a language if I know its name in my language. In my opinion, as the best example, the text in the placeholder of the field suggesting that we write a description of the edit when publishing the page &quot;Describe what you changed&quot; is much more informative and better suggests what needs to be done. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Languages' names in the language of the interface ==

For the old location of languages in the sidebar, a user script was made locally ([https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/MediaWiki:Gadget-iwcore.js] [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Gadgets] iwlocalnames iwhints iwcore), which registered users could enable for themselves and see the names of languages in their own language. It seems that this script was quite popular. It may be worth making a switch in the menu for everyone, even for unregistered users, which could change the language names to the interface language of this wiki (or the interface language that is selected in your settings) and back to self-names in one click. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Offer more pages in the search using the technology of translators ==

You said that readers prefer to look at one language and somehow &quot;don't know&quot; about other languages, and for this the language selector was placed at the top. If we look at enwiki, where there are 6 million articles, then this is much more than in other language wikis. When you search in yandex, an offer to read an article in enwiki through their translator often appears in its output. For example, if we search for &quot;список портов по грузообороту&quot;, the search site will offer us this article &quot;[[w:List of busiest ports by cargo tonnage]] in the following form [https://translate.yandex.ru/translate?lang=en-ru&amp;url=https%3A%2F%2Fen.wikipedia.org%2Fwiki%2FList_of_busiest_ports_by_cargo_tonnage&amp;view=c]. We have already used yandex in the [[Content translation]] extension. Perhaps for some translation directions it would be possible to suggest in our search to view the page in / through their translator. Or only show results from another language wiki by somehow translating the query (for the search engine itself, in the same way as they do, but by any translator) from the language of the current wiki. (From the point of view of spreading knowledge, this makes sense. It is unclear in what form it could be.) [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Add a link to the FAQ ==

It may be useful to add links from the old [[Structured Discussions/FAQ#Why is there so much whitespace/padding?]] to the [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Frequently asked questions]], the information (by links) in it at that time looked convincing. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

:Huh, you've found an old and potentially useful page. Your idea is good. However, there's an issue about the context. The Foundation isn't doing anything about Structured Discussions. I imagine if we provided this link, it would look like we were encouraging more people to use Structured Data, or like these projects were connected. What do you think? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 18:25, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
::I meant reusing these links &quot;Whitespace myth&quot;, &quot;Best practices analysis&quot; and footnotes, not links to the Flow help [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 18:37, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
:::Oh, OK, thank you for clarification! [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 20:11, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== ToC in the diff view ==

{{tracked|T311529}}
In revision comparison mode, ToC looks like a regular bulleted list without styles https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Botany&amp;diff=1101340041&amp;oldid=1098510198&amp;diffmode=source [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)
: Thank you, we'll work on it. You can follow our activities on Phabricator. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 12:08, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Feature request ==

Hey, I love the new Vector styles overall, but the user menu is the one area that slows me down. I tend to use my user contributions page a lot to check recent activity on articles I created or edited recently, because my watchlist is quite large. Other editors might frequently use tools collapsed in the menu like their Sandbox, but not user contributions or a watchlist. 

Consequently, I'd love more flexibility when it comes to... 
# how many menu items are shown in the header vs in the collapsed menu. On many monitor sizes there is a lot of wasted whitespace in between the search field and the user menu, and being able to show more items and then have it collapse dynamically as the viewport shifts is basically what the whole point of a more modern header layout is for. 
# the ability to customize which menu options are in the header based on my needs, so for that for instance I could hide notifs (I get very few alerts) but show user contribs. 

This kind of customization is similar to how the Slack sidebar can be reordered hierarchically by each user, but with sane defaults in place. This kind of addition would let us keep the same basic principle of a more refined set of menu items with a dropdown for the rest, but let users decide for themselves which tools they need quick access to the most. 

[[User:Steven Walling|Steven Walling]] ([[User talk:Steven Walling|talk]]) 18:02, 3 August 2022 (UTC)

== Sidebar overlapping ==

The main menu sidebar is overlapping (Vector 2022). Unusable. [[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]] ([[User talk:Grimes2|talk]]) 14:20, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]], thanks for writing here. Is this about the issue reported in [[#Sticky sidebar overlaps footer]]? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 17:56, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
::No! https://abload.de/image.php?img=2022-08-0420_03_33-grxcjnf.png [[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]] ([[User talk:Grimes2|talk]]) 18:09, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
:::I can't replicate this :/ Let's perhaps add ?safemode=1 to the URL and see if the issue still exists? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 18:24, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
::::No success. https://abload.de/image.php?img=2022-08-0420_35_52-gr10kgs.png [[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]] ([[User talk:Grimes2|talk]]) 18:39, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
::::My investigation: Opera was set to font size big. Using font size normal solved the problem. Thanks. [[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]] ([[User talk:Grimes2|talk]]) 18:59, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Sufficiently narrow window just shows some separator lines ==
{{tracked|T314708}}
I don't know when this started in the past few days, but (using Vector-2022 of course) as of now a narrow window, meaning one snapped to the right side of my 1920x1080 screen or even narrower than that, starts with the entire left-panel list of links, with their horizontal dividers spread across the window, before I even see the page title, right at the bottom of the window. Zooming the browser to 90% brings back a more normal display. This happens on every page I see; it's not dependent on images, or break markers, or the size of the TOC. I hope that's enough information without an image. I can't imagine I'm alone but didn't see any relevant subject line on this page.

Configuration: Edge 103.0.1264.77 or Chrome 103.0.5060.134, Windows 10, scaling 100%. English Wikipedia, any of several namespaces. [[User:DavidBrooks|DavidBrooks]] ([[User talk:DavidBrooks|talk]]) 16:42, 5 August 2022 (UTC)

:Ditto on my Surface Pro: 2736x1824 at 175% scaling. [[User:DavidBrooks|DavidBrooks]] ([[User talk:DavidBrooks|talk]]) 17:59, 5 August 2022 (UTC) ETA: screenshot of this page [https://1drv.ms/u/s!AtuCZY0YF4hGpK05RoIu3pNFNjW2Rg?e=5OCaOz]. [[User:DavidBrooks|DavidBrooks]] ([[User talk:DavidBrooks|talk]]) 18:04, 5 August 2022 (UTC)

==  Search suggestions and keyboard accessibility in Vector 2022 ==

(Reposted from enwiki's Village Pump)

One of my most common actions is to find a policy or guideline via WP: shortcut. Therefore I use the search box for this. Having recently upgraded to vector-2022, I've also adopted the Alt-Shift-F shortcut to search. I'm using Chrome 103 on Windows 10 Pro. If I happen to search while the mouse pointer is near the search box, &quot;Enter&quot; has the undesirable effect of activating the search suggestion which is indicated by the mouse pointer, rather than sending my query as-is to the search engine. This is an accessibility no-no. I pressed &quot;Enter&quot; to activate my keyboard input, not what's under the caret. If I need to move the mouse to avoid this situation, it defeats the purpose of keyboard entry. As soon as I enter a search term that produces suggestions, the mouse pointer immediately selects whatever's underneath it, and then &quot;Enter&quot; accepts that selection. But I'm not using the mouse.

Example: &quot;Alt-Shift-F&quot; MOS:GENDERID &quot;Enter&quot; took me to WP:MOS and WP:MOSBIO, successively, until I moved the mouse away from underneath the search box. [[User:Elizium23|Elizium23]] ([[User talk:Elizium23|talk]]) 07:40, 7 August 2022 (UTC)</text>
      <sha1>bemqzd3umanmw4nhmnknck9e7zaye5q</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403356</id>
      <parentid>5402765</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:56:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Piotrus</username>
        <id>24984</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* Contributions now requite two clicks - please allow customization of the top right */ new section</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="170164" xml:space="preserve">{{Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Header}}
{{User:Dexbot/Archivebot
|archive = Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive%(counter)s
| counter = 4
|algo = old(42d)
|counter = 1
|maxarchivesize = 200K
|minthreadstoarchive = 1
|minthreadsleft = 4
}}
{{tmbox|text=Between August 8 and 19, one of us (Olga or Szymon) will not be working. During that time, we will be less responsive, but will try to get back to your questions and thoughts as soon as possible.}}
{{WMF present
|1=SGrabarczuk (WMF)|timezone_1=UTC+1/2|lang_1=pl, en, fr|photo_1=Wikispotkanie-warszawa-2021-07-03-rd-26.jpg
|2=OVasileva (WMF)|timezone_2=UTC+1/2|lang_2=en, es, bg|photo_2=Vasileva, Olga January 2017.jpg
}}
{{Archive box|
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive1|Archive1 (before the 1st batch of deployments)]]
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive2|Archive2 (before the 2nd batch of deployments)]]
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive3|Archive3 (before the 3nd batch of deployments)]]
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Archive4|Archive4]]
*[[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements|Current discussion]]
}}
{{Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Talk page intro}}

__TOC__


== Where is the TOC? ==

People here are complaining about it. I don't even get one! [[User:Betaneptune|Betaneptune]] ([[User talk:Betaneptune|talk]]) 17:38, 25 May 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Betaneptune|Betaneptune]]. Do you still have this problem? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 17:52, 8 June 2022 (UTC)
::Hi ! I have the same problem on the French version of Wikipedia. The TOC just disappeared. The problem appears in Firefox desktop (last version 101.0.1), even in &quot;troubleshoot&quot; mode with all my add-ons deactivated. However, the problem does not appear in Chrome. This is extremely confusing. I reported it on some discussion page on the french version of WP, but I also mention it here, as I'm not sure at all where to report the problem for it to be taken into account. [[Special:Contributions/85.169.195.108|85.169.195.108]] 17:56, 26 June 2022 (UTC)
: The TOC is now on the left side, but after other menu lists. It should probably come first. But to keep things accessible, the (hidden) &quot;jump to main menu&quot; link should be kept as first element of course. [[User:Psychoslave|Psychoslave]] ([[User talk:Psychoslave|talk]]) 15:00, 5 July 2022 (UTC)
::Agreed. The TOC ''really'' should come first. The {{mono|#mw-navigation}} menu (which currently appears first) is comprised of mostly ancillary links unrelated to the page's content, many of which are rarely used (e.g., ''&quot;Download as PDF&quot;'', ''&quot;Create a book&quot;'', ''&quot;Permanent link&quot;'', etc). [[User:OmenBreeze|OmenBreeze]] ([[User talk:OmenBreeze|talk]]) 00:17, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
:::{{ping|85.169.195.108}} It has been tracked here [[phab:T312022]].--[[Special:Contributions/37.103.14.65|37.103.14.65]] 09:03, 7 July 2022 (UTC)
::::Suggestions:
::::* ''If'' the TOC will ''not'' come first, the other menu lists on the left side should become hidden (collapsed) when there is a TOC below them, so that the TOC is always visible.
::::* The TOC should always be shown in its entirety, and not displayed as a box that you have to scroll through.
::::[[User:Förbätterlig|Förbätterlig]] ([[User talk:Förbätterlig|talk]]) 14:03, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== Too narrow (again) ==

Why waste all that space? I have a nice wide screen so I want to take advantage of it. Those who want to have it narrow can just reduce their window sizes? Overall, not a great look. Not exciting. Quite boring.--[[User:Xania|Xania]] ([[User talk:Xania|talk]]) 11:23, 22 December 2021 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Xania|Xania]], you can read about our [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Limiting_content_width#Goals_and_motivation|goals and motivation]] for limiting the width. Also, we are working on a solution to use the empty space. Could you take a look at [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Fourth prototype testing/it|our fourth prototype]] and write more on what you think about arranging the space as it is presented there? Thank you in advance! [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 14:59, 26 April 2022 (UTC)
:: Oh my dear God, why don't you give an option to unrestrict the width?? It's beyond ridiculous how absolutely tiny is the page content on my monitor horizontally! I have to scroll all the time to read! Don't ruin Wikipedia the same way Fandom was ruined! [[Special:Contributions/90.188.46.13|90.188.46.13]] 04:38, 13 May 2022 (UTC)
:::We have given this option. This can be done with the [[:en:User:Jdlrobson/vector-max-width-toggle.js|gadget one of our engineers made]]. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 03:39, 14 May 2022 (UTC)
::::Thanks, but maybe we should have an easy plug-in system for ordinary users or, at least, the instructions how to apply it and a place where to find those customisations. By default it is really narrow to read and it feels like a news site rather than an encyclopedia article. [[User:Krnl0138|Krnl0138]] ([[User talk:Krnl0138|talk]]) 09:55, 15 May 2022 (UTC)
:::::I agree, the toggle option should be there by default! By the way, that script does not work well currently, so I [[:en:User:Arthurfragoso/vector-max-width-toggle.js|updated it here]]. — [[User:Arthurfragoso|Arthurfragoso]] ([[User talk:Arthurfragoso|talk]]) 13:28, 21 May 2022 (UTC)
::I don't understand why you are still pushing on us that bad design choice. It still is time to pull the plug and start to work on a plain page design. You are convincing no one here. Please, please, really, please stop this nonsense. Forcing bad choices on your users because you are the only product on the market is never a good thing.
::Since it has been forced without asking anyone on the French Wikipedia I had to register just to come back to the normal and good design. That's something, as a simple reader, I should never have had to do in the first place.
::So one last time, please come back to reason and stop hurting your user base foolishly. [[User:DerpFox|DerpFox]] ([[User talk:DerpFox|talk]]) 21:33, 13 May 2022 (UTC)
:::Hello @[[User:DerpFox|DerpFox]], thanks for your comment. Have you maybe followed the links I've shared in my answer to Xania? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 03:42, 14 May 2022 (UTC)
::The lines in the fourth prototype seem to be slightly wider to me on 1080p display than in the current version of 2022 vector design, but those empty strips on the sides, each of which are almost the size of the old navigation mv-panel, constantly remind about the space wasted.
::If the only reason of this thinning is the recommended line lengths in symbols and you want to keep it for any price, I would suggest using a dynamic font size, so, for example, starting from some resolution the symbols just grow larger. This might also reduce the eye strain connected to focusing on the small text.
::[[User:Kageneko|Kageneko]] ([[User talk:Kageneko|talk]]) 13:51, 17 May 2022 (UTC)
::I had a browse over the reasons for the change, but I still don't like or agree with the main justification more or less boiling down to &quot;everyone else is doing it so we should too&quot;. Even in the linked examples, the page still feels a lot more &quot;full&quot; despite having a dedicated deadspace on the site, due to the way the page has been very carefully designed in a mixture of different kinds of block contents (images, text interactive eliments, etc).
::Accepted Webpage standards used to be against having blank, unused and waisted deadspace, but at some point in the last 10 years there seems to have been a weird shift to the opposite where deadspace is all the rage, though it's not one I've personally ever liked or agreed with.
::While I'm sure there are good uses of limiting page width, I'm not sure if Wikipedia, being a site that is mainly made up of text would really benefit from it as it's likely just going to squash pages and increase the amount of vertical scrolling required to navigate. [[User:Dave247|Dave247]] ([[User talk:Dave247|talk]]) 07:32, 18 May 2022 (UTC)
::Yeah it's too narrow otherwise. the look is very nice, it's not boring as you tell.  [[User:Crater bug|Crater bug]] ([[User talk:Crater bug|talk]]) 15:28, 28 May 2022 (UTC)
:I totally agree! I dislike the vector skin because how small it is. [[User:OverAWallOfMetaKnight|OverAWallOfMetaKnight]] ([[User talk:OverAWallOfMetaKnight|talk]]) 15:55, 15 May 2022 (UTC)
:Agreed. I use a 3440x1440 screen (usually with a tiled layout), and this new layout forces all the content to occupy a comically narrow strip, instead of allowing me to choose the width myself. [[User:Emptyflask|Emptyflask]] ([[User talk:Emptyflask|talk]]) 13:47, 17 May 2022 (UTC)
:I agree, there is simply too much space wasted that could be used for more article space and a button specifically for those who want to edit wikipedia [[User:Techny3000|Techny3000]] ([[User talk:Techny3000|talk]]) 02:52, 28 May 2022 (UTC)
:hard to read I'm glad I stayed the same as before No changes required [[Special:Contributions/240B:11:E7E0:5E00:6005:3399:E6C:2B48|240B:11:E7E0:5E00:6005:3399:E6C:2B48]] 14:06, 2 July 2022 (UTC)
:Strongly agree. I want to decide the readable width for me. In the old skin and most websites, I can do it by adjusting the width of window. I definitely don't want to care about &quot;CORRECT READABLE WIDTH FOR EVERYONE&quot; decided by someone somewhere, even if they are great scholars. [[User:Kyoku|Kyoku]] ([[User talk:Kyoku|talk]]) 08:32, 10 July 2022 (UTC)
:Agreed wholeheartedly. By the way, the design is even worse on a low DPI widescreen display, like 1366x768, 1280x800/720, etc. Try it out with Device Rendering options in your browser, usually somewhere in Dev Tools. I just got hit with Vector 2022 after coming here from wikipedia where I've had Vector 2010 enabled for a while and I forgot how bad it was!
:Wikimedia Foundation, '''do not forget that people all around the world use your service'''. People who might have a budget/old device with a low resolution display, or schoolchildren with a Chromebook or something! No default layout should ever create this much dead space and padding in a desktop environment. NONE. Nor should it ever consume nearly 1/3 of screen real estate that can never ever be used by the main content.
:The floating ToC looks like absolute garbage at 720p. I have WUXGA and 4K devices and it isn't any better there either. I'm not sure who the design is aimed at, other than the designers pushing the modern scourge of padding and white space onto the rest of the Internet. [[User:-αβοοδ|-αβοοδ]] ([[User talk:-αβοοδ|talk]]) 17:41, 29 July 2022 (UTC)

After reviewing the posted defense of the narrowing and the feedback listed here, this feature belongs entirely as an optional setting. It most certainly should not be the website's default. [[User:RightQuark|RightQuark]] ([[User talk:RightQuark|talk]]) 01:29, 24 May 2022 (UTC)
:The defence of the narrowing seems to have little real-world bonuses. It may be theoretically good but makes it bad to read because Wikipedia articles can be long [[User:Torqueing|Torqueing]] ([[User talk:Torqueing|talk]]) 17:10, 24 May 2022 (UTC)

I also have a wide screen monitor. I do not like this forced width shrinkage in the Vector 2022 skin. [[User:OhanaUnited|&lt;b&gt;&lt;font color=&quot;#0000FF&quot;&gt;OhanaUnited&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/b&gt;]][[User talk:OhanaUnited|&lt;b&gt;&lt;font color=&quot;green&quot;&gt;&lt;sup&gt;Talk page&lt;/sup&gt;&lt;/font&gt;&lt;/b&gt;]] 17:24, 9 June 2022 (UTC)

In current form without a toggle for width this layout is unacceptable on large monitors. Even my old 14'' monitor. For now I am reverting to avoid having in forced horizontal white-space. [[User:Phatom87|phatom87]] ([[User talk:Phatom87|talk]]) 14:32, 20 June 2022 (UTC)

:Absolutely unacceptable, too narrow, an unjustified  waste of space. [[User:Loupeter|Loupeter]] ([[User talk:Loupeter|talk]]) 10:39, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

:It sounds like the fixed-max-width (assuming one's window is wide enough, and regardless of how much wider it might be) is a compromise between the needs of two different types of reading activities. I have both habits (skim vs detail-read), and felt especially the concern that the text doesn't obey what *I* do with my window. A reason I might widen my window is exactly because I want wider content. A comprimse necessarily isn't ideal for either one side. A better solution is to make it easy and discoverable how to get the *best* feel for whatever one is trying to do, rather than forcing so many to have a sub-par experience. A third-party gadget isn't discoverable and is surely more fragile than a first-class toggle feature of the skin itself. [[User:DMacks|DMacks]] ([[User talk:DMacks|talk]]) 15:16, 29 June 2022 (UTC)

In my opinion, [[Skin:Timeless]] does a much better job at restricting article space to improve readability. This is because the UI is not entirely positioned on the left-hand side of the screen, and the background colour is not blindingly bright. If the intention is to create whitespace, please don't use bright colours. Timeless also has more space for pictures. For the past 20 years, articles have been written with the understanding that 80%+ of the screen will be for content. There are width and upright tags all over the place that, once viewed with this narrow a perspective, become overwhelming.

A skin should not change the fundamental readability of the page. Compare [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_World_Before_the_Flood?useskin=vector-2022 this] with [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_World_Before_the_Flood?useskin=timeless this]. In Timeless, when the content ends, grey begins. In Vector 2022, it looks like the HTML was corrupted and failed to load because it continues with white for no discernable reason. Vector also artificially makes articles look longer than they are, which may actually dissuade people from reading. For instance, using a 27&quot; 16:9 monitor, on the article for Barack Obama, [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barack%20Obama?useskin=vector-2022 Vector] just about lets me see the entire lead on my screen at once. [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barack%20Obama?useskin=timeless Timeless] allows me to see the whole lead quite easily, as well as part of the ToC. [[:en:Line length|Line length]] may be a thing, but you must take into account the total amount of text on the screen at once, too. There's no use having the perfect 50 character line if you need 100 of them all bunched up together. [[User:Anarchyte|Anarchyte]] ([[User talk:Anarchyte|talk]]) 13:18, 13 July 2022 (UTC)

:Quick update and aside: I just learned about wide-vector-2022. This is fantastic. I actually like the ToC being placed where it is when using that gadget. If the plan was to make the wide skin the default, I would be less hesitant. For comparison with the links in my previous message, [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barack%20Obama?useskin=vector-2022&amp;withgadget=wide-vector-2022 here is Barack Obama] with wide-vector-2022. [[User:Anarchyte|Anarchyte]] ([[User talk:Anarchyte|talk]]) 13:25, 13 July 2022 (UTC)
::This &quot;wide-vector-2022&quot; version should be the default IMO. [[User:Some1|Some1]] ([[User talk:Some1|talk]]) 02:50, 17 July 2022 (UTC)
::It's definitely an improvement, but Vector 2010 is still better. I agree with @[[User:Anarchyte|Anarchyte]] - Timeless does a better job of restricting article space than Vector 2022 does. When you look at how much of the left third of the screen is blocked off from article content, Vector 2010 restricts it the least, followed by Timeless, and then finally by Vector 2022 consuming nearly an entire 1/3 of the screen. At low DPI, it's hilariously ugly, and arguably makes readability worse, not better. Vector 2022 sure would be nice though, '''if the ToC was collapsible'''! [[User:-αβοοδ|-αβοοδ]] ([[User talk:-αβοοδ|talk]]) 17:48, 29 July 2022 (UTC)
:&gt; For the past 20 years, articles have been written with the understanding that 80%+ of the screen will be for content.
:I'll just note that for the past 10 years that means you've written things that just do not work that way on mobile. :)
:&gt; A skin should not change the fundamental readability of the page. [..] In Vector 2022, it looks like the HTML was corrupted and failed to load because it continues with white for no discernable reason.
:This seems like a lot of assumptions to me personally. Do we have wider evidence for this ?
:&gt; There's no use having the perfect 50 character line if you need 100 of them all bunched up together.
:Literally every mobile user on the Barack Obama page, the majority of the readers. Screens and screens till you hit the end of the lead...  —[[User:TheDJ|Th&lt;span style=&quot;color: green&quot;&gt;e&lt;/span&gt;DJ (Not WMF)]] ([[User talk:TheDJ|talk]] • [[Special:Contributions/TheDJ|contribs]]) 20:20, 14 July 2022 (UTC)
::{{tq|I'll just note that for the past 10 years that means you've written things that just do not work that way on mobile. :)}}
:::MinervaNeue, when viewed on normal phone screens, ignores width tags. The only difference between writing for desktop screens and mobile screens is file placement. 
::{{tq|This seems like a lot of assumptions to me personally. Do we have wider evidence for this ?}}
:::I don't need to provide evidence to state my opinion. The page looks unfinished with the extra whitespace on the right hand side. If you do want more than just my opinion, CNTRL+F for &quot;whitespace&quot; on this page. 12 other posts mention it.
::{{tq|Literally every mobile user on the Barack Obama page, the majority of the readers. Screens and screens till you hit the end of the lead...}}
:::Difference is that my phone is in my hand. I'm not getting overloaded with line after line if the screen is only 15cm long. I can see a whole paragraph on at once and then scroll when necessary. [[User:Anarchyte|Anarchyte]] ([[User talk:Anarchyte|talk]]) 13:10, 15 July 2022 (UTC)

== Full-width sticky header ==

I'm fine with the text being narrow but the ui and nav bar should be full width. --[[User:Thedonquixotic|Thedonquixotic]] ([[User talk:Thedonquixotic|talk]]) 00:18, 26 May 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:Thedonquixotic|Thedonquixotic]], what do you mean by the ui and nav bar? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 17:54, 8 June 2022 (UTC)
::Not sure what is unclear here. I mean the navbar. As in the bar up at the top of the page with use account, search etc.  [[User:Thedonquixotic|Thedonquixotic]] ([[User talk:Thedonquixotic|talk]]) 19:07, 1 July 2022 (UTC)
::: OK, thanks for clarification, @[[User:Thedonquixotic|Thedonquixotic]]. Let's take a look at [[:File:Diagram showing three layout containers - sidebar closed.jpg|this image]]. This will help us make sure what we're talking about. Now, the navbar (aka the [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Header|header]]) is aligned to the workspace container, so is wider than the content container, but not as wide as the page container. The same applies to the [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Sticky Header|sticky header]]. So you believe the header should be as wide as the page container? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:54, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Consistent skin across the wikis ==

New Skin is burdening me when I switching between languages. (and I zoom when I want improve readability rather put blank space) it Should changing all language together if it is well received and appreciated. should not just some language for set a precedent. [[User:Mutyoro|Mutyoro]] ([[User talk:Mutyoro|talk]]) 19:27, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
:@[[user:Mutyoro|Mutyoro]], thank you for your comment. First, if you want to have the same skin across all wikis, you can choose one [[:ja:特別:GlobalPreferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|global preferences]]. Secondly, the way how Vector 2022 becomes the default across more and more wikis - that's a complicated issue. Week after week, we roll out small changes to Vector 2022 that are visible across all wikis. At the same time, it's much easier (both for our team and for the communities) when some communities use this skin as the default earlier, and some get it later. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:54, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Feedback regarding the new language switcher ==

Hello, I am a French person using Wikipedia in both French and English. I usually decide the language of the article depending on the topic. If it's related to France, I know the French version is going to be better. If it's a general topic, I usually select English.

However, it's been a few months that the language picker has been moved to the top of the screen when an article is display in French. And I really can't get used to it. Sure, it's easy to discover - but it's more complicated to use. Having to click twice is a regression for anyone switching language frequently. An action that used to require half a second now takes 2 seconds. If you do this about ten times every time you browse Wikipedia, it does become irritating...

I hope this feature is not shipped to other languages, and France gets the sidebar back. If you want to make this feature more discoverable, maybe you could add a shortcut but keep the sidebar. Or display a tooltip once in a while to educate newcomers. But please, keep &quot;heavy users&quot; of language switching in consideration. Thanks {{unsigned|77.148.113.166|19:54, 25 January 2022}}
: I'd state this as 'what used to take me a second (finding the right language) now takes 10':  Open language switcher, often don't see the language I want, have to search?  want to see which languages have a version, have to scroll; don't have a quick way to default present all languages by-alpha. [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 16:49, 2 May 2022 (UTC)
: I have to agree with this as another French person frequently switching languages on Wikipedia and Wiktionary. I should add, in addition to the intrinsic usability of the interface (I do agree it's a slight regression for my usage), the fact that most language editions still use the old interface (and most other sites using mediawiki, and the latter is likely to remain the case for a long time) means you don't actually get the opportunity to unlearn it. So every time I want to switch languages from a French page, I will first scroll down to the old location and waste 1s parsing the sidebar and wondering where the links are. I check out other languages almost every time I read any article and those milliseconds of irritation do add up. Anyway, I strongly think that “don't fix what ain't broke” should apply here! [[Special:Contributions/37.183.2.114|37.183.2.114]] 12:06, 8 May 2022 (UTC)

: +1 to [[User:Sj|Sj]]. --[[User:ThurnerRupert|ThurnerRupert]] ([[User talk:ThurnerRupert|talk]]) 18:58, 11 June 2022 (UTC)

Often I use the language switcher not to navigate to the article on different language, but just to look up how that article is titled in a different language. In other words, using Wikipedia's inter-language links as a sort of dictionary. By hovering over the list of languages I can gather multiple titles, see their similarity between languages. With the New Look, language switcher became less accessible, though gathering titles by hovering still works there.
Also this new dropdown-based language switcher seems either to require tricky CSS features or JavaScript. Will it make problems for simplistic browsers like w3m? [[User:Vi2|_Vi]] ([[User talk:Vi2|talk]]) 17:48, 20 May 2022 (UTC)


I find the language switcher the worst of both worlds of the two variants in the old interface. It can be annoying to scroll through 200+ languages in an idiosyncratic ordering (for example, كوردی [Kurdi in Perso-Arabic script] is filed under S for Sorani), but at least I can see them all and preview the name of the article in various target languages. With the drop-down menu in the old interface, I get the languages grouped geographically, and I can also search for a specific language, with the system recognizing many name variations. The new interface gives me a drop down menu with all 200+ languages in the same idiosyncratic order, with no geographic grouping and no ability to search for a specific language. [[User:LincMad|LincMad]] ([[User talk:LincMad|talk]]) 22:28, 25 May 2022 (UTC)


I am primarily an active user on the Japanese Wikipedia (now defaulted to vector2022) and I agree with you completely.
Why doesn't this use the blank spaces on the left and right? No need to hide buttons and functions everywhere just to make the page look hollow. As for the other features, there are so many problems with the new Vector. I definitely want the old version to remain. I will continue to use it and not the new one. --[[User:Sugarman|Sugarman]] ([[User talk:Sugarman|talk]]) 07:14, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Sugarman|Sugarman]]. The space on the right are blank only temporarily. As you can see on our [https://di-collapsible-menus.web.app/Flamingo newest prototype], on the left, there are the sidebar and the table of contents, and on the right, there are some links pulled out of the sidebar.
:As for &quot;No need to hide [...] just to make the page look hollow&quot; - on our pages, we explain why hide some links and functionalities. We ''never'' argue that we want the page to look ''hollow''. We work to make the page look intuitive and welcoming. Entry points to advanced collaboration need to be clear, and not numerous.
:Unless you are an advanced user already. We realize that advanced users may need to access specific links with one click. We encourage you to describe (some day when you decide to spend some time on it) all the problems you would like to see solved. Perhaps this may be addressed by adding/adjusting gadgets and user scripts. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:50, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Feedback on ToC functionality ==

Hello, 

I’m not sure how far you are in the development of the new table of content functionality, but I was looking at [https://en-toc.wmcloud.org/wiki/Moon this prototype] and noticed a potential problem. Here the ToC is on the side and that’s a good thing, but the ToC in the text have also been deleted and that’s not much a good thing. When there is a big infobox, the in-text ToC compensate partly or totally for it, hence the page arrangement take it into consideration for the position of the images. Now if you delete it, all the text will go up, along with the images, but the images can’t always follow, because the infobox, so the right-aligned images are going to pile under it, while the left-aligned will reduce the text to a very small column between them and the infobox. On fr:wp, infoboxes are very widely used, so deleting the in-text ToC is going to break the page layout of most articles (and rather probably upset the community). So I’d suggest that, whatever you do with the ToC, to not delete the in-text ToC until there is also a functionality to move the infobox outside the text too (that would be great by the way, as infoboxes always cause difficulties with page layout). --[[User:Runi Gerardsen|Runi Gerardsen]] ([[User talk:Runi Gerardsen|talk]]) 09:30, 7 February 2022 (UTC)
:I would like to add myself as having this same concern about images. At present, image placement in many articles was determined by this factor of the TOC being inline, sometimes offsetting the issues of long infoboxes and allowing the first image in the first section to be right-justified (like anyone with any experience in professional publishing, I ''really'' hate left-justified lead images as they break up the flow of the text by interposing themselves between heds and text. Similarly, I try to maintain alternation in the justification of images since that mirrors the sweep of our vision and makes text with images easier to read (but of course you don't do this when it creates other layout issues).&lt;p&gt;''When'' this is deployed, a lot of articles are going to suddenly have image placement issues at the top that didn't previously. And this will probably make a lot of people ''very angry''.&lt;p&gt;I can see the need for the sticky TOC but I think it would still be better as something that could be toggled there from its current position while reading depending on how the user prefers it in an individual article. [[User:Daniel Case|Daniel Case]] ([[User talk:Daniel Case|talk]]) 05:50, 29 April 2022 (UTC)
::What if we kept both the inline/in-text ToC ''and'' the sticky/sidebar ToC, but only display the latter when the user's scrolled past the former? A user preference could be added that forces the latter to always (or never) be displayed. I agree that the situation with images is a &lt;abbr title=&quot;Pain In The Frigging Arse&quot;&gt;PITFA&lt;/abbr&gt;, but I really don't want to give up the sticky ToC either… [[User:OmenBreeze|OmenBreeze]] ([[User talk:OmenBreeze|talk]]) 00:43, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

I'm not sure, but until I manually switched back to &quot;Vector legacy (2010)&quot;, then again to &quot;Vector (2022)&quot;, ToC section was absent completely (neither new-style nor old-style). Also maybe, like with the language switcher, there should be [temporary] notice about ToC having moved to the left where it was previously? [[User:Vi2|_Vi]] ([[User talk:Vi2|talk]]) 17:57, 20 May 2022 (UTC)

== Left margin menu pushes down content ==

I normally use Monobook, but happened to get into the new Vector. Odd experience. The search box was absent and I had to scroll down for the content. I now see that you are supposed to click the magnifying glass to get the search box. OK. But the scrolling?

It seems the new Vector tries to guarantee wide enough space for the content. Perhaps that's what people surfing with maximised windows expect, but if you have a narrower window, is that really optimal? To get the left margin menu to the left of the content, I need a window some 1000 px wide. This &quot;minimum&quot; width gives me lines of about 100 characters, while I've heard reading is easiest at 47–72 or something like that. I like to have several windows open in parallel, and a narrower windows makes them fit better.

Anyway, if one's browser window is narrow, for whatever reason, does the empty space to the right of the margin menu really give the best possible experience? Is the 100 char width something that needs to be guaranteed for those planning layout of individual articles? (This experience is with Firefox 91.7.0esr on Debian.)

–[[User:LPfi|LPfi]] ([[User talk:LPfi|talk]]) 20:07, 17 March 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:LPfi|LPfi]], since your comment, we've introduced the new [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Table of contents|table of contents]], the [[phab:T303484|grid system]], and we've improved some issues with margins. What do you experience now? Have the issues you described changed?
:&quot;I had to scroll down for the content.&quot; - do you still need to do that? if yes, what do you see that you need to scroll past? It's the sidebar (the left menu) taking the full width, isn't it?
:Generally, we try to accommodate Vector 2022 for use cases such as yours. However, with screens narrower than ~1000px, we enter the territory of &quot;should V22 be responsive&quot; which is an area of controversies. We've been receiving contradicting voices, and it'd be a good topic for a separate community discussion. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 00:55, 5 August 2022 (UTC)

== The &quot;sticky table of contents&quot; is the worst among all the bad changes ==

I am sorry, but this sticky table of contents is such an eyesore, its sole addition might make me quit reading Wikipedia altogether. I'm not exaggerating, a similar update to Liquipedia made me want to avoid that project. It's more than an annoying waste of screen space - it also makes the different parts of the table of contents bold depending on where in the article my screen is, and thus it triggers my OCD, and it simply irritates me. I hate these moving parts in forced mobile designs.

&gt; &quot;The results of our 3rd prototype testing showed an overwhelming support for the proposed table of contents.&quot;

Have they? I don't see any discussion here.

&gt; &quot;The new table of contents will be persistent - users will have access to it at all times. It will also make it easier to understand the context of the page.&quot;

Are the TikTok memes reality? Excuse me, but I don't randomly forget what page or section I'm reading, thus I don't need a sticky title on my screen at all times.

&gt; &quot;In addition to that, it will be possible to navigate to different parts of the page without having to scroll all the way back to the top.&quot;

How is that &quot;need&quot; in any way difficult? It's one button on the keyboard - called ''Home''. Or you hold the slider on the right and jerk it up in a millisecond. But I suspect I know where &quot;scrolling&quot; is an issue - on mobile phones. This entire update in an exercise in transitioning a fine desktop UI from the 2000s which I had an honour to fall in love with in the 2010s to the non-constructive, downgraded, annoying and irritating experience of mobile phones.

Thankfully, not all projects choose to go this way. For an example of a new encyclopaedia with a traditional design, see the immensely popular Korean Namu Wiki. [[User:Adûnâi|Adûnâi]] ([[User talk:Adûnâi|talk]]) 12:53, 10 April 2022 (UTC)

:100% agree. [[User:Football Lab|Football Lab]] ([[User talk:Football Lab|talk]]) 09:12, 26 June 2022 (UTC)

== I hate the new TOC ==

I was directed here from [[phab:T273473]].&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;That left-of-the-article TOC is a horrible nightmare. I absolutely hate it. I would seriously avoid any website that forced it upon me. Can't scroll it out of sight, can't collapse it, can't disable it, takes up too much space, I hate it I hate it I hate it. This was the reason I switched back to Vector classic on beta cluster. (and if Vector classic gets it too I'll switch to Monobook, Timeless or just murder it with a userscript) I'm not much of a fan of Vector 2022 (but it's not a lost cause, just needs work), but this TOC pushed me over the edge.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;As a personal note: I rarely use the existing TOC. But I can scroll it out of sight so it doesn't bother me. If the TOC went completely missing tomorrow, I wouldn't miss it. Having this big, (to me) useless thing that contrasts with the main content (it's much darker) permanently in my field of vision greatly annoys me. And because of the fixed position, my banner blindness fails to kick in. This results in pure hatred for something that, on the face it, could seem innocuous. &lt;span id=&quot;Alexis_Jazz:1650385558357:TalkBWLCLNReading/Web/Desktop_Improvements&quot; class=&quot;BawlCmt&quot;&gt;[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]] ([[User talk:Alexis Jazz|talk]]) 16:25, 19 April 2022 (UTC)&lt;/span&gt;
:I was not &quot;directed&quot; anywhere, I blundered onto here after finally finding information about this new skin. And let me be clear, APART from the ridiculous handling of the TOC, the new skin is great, precisely BECAUSE, before the TOC-debacle, this skin allowed me to get more of the article on the screen, and allowed me to hide the standard list of menu choices that I only need 0.something % of the time. 
 
:So, please, Please, PLEASE make that TOC hideable! It's perhaps (!) a great default for newbies, but it's a bloody nuisance for us who usually never use the TOC, and if we do, we know where to find it! [[User:Autokefal Dialytiker|Autokefal Dialytiker]] ([[User talk:Autokefal Dialytiker|talk]]) 21:49, 25 April 2022 (UTC)
::I totally agree. [[Special:Contributions/185.53.157.151|185.53.157.151]] 08:13, 26 April 2022 (UTC)
::@[[User:Autokefal Dialytiker|Autokefal Dialytiker]], right, it's not that easy to get here. We'll put link to the project page on the list of available skins in preferences. The task is documented as [[phab:T307113|T307113]]. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 15:25, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
:Hey @[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]] - thanks for talking to us. It’s good to hear you were using Vector 2022. I hope that you will switch back to it. In terms of the table of contents, you raise good points. A lot has been happening since you wrote your comment, so my answer is longer than it would have been last week.
:* The first version of the design was based on the feedback we got on our previous prototypes from readers and editors (see [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Repository/Sticky Header and Table of Contents User Testing#toc-intro|in-person reader &amp; editor testing]] and [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Third prototype testing|on-wiki community testing]]).
:* That said, we have not yet made the design final. We are working on different ideas for the visual design of the entire site. We'll make the main content of the page be the primary focus of attention, even when other navigational elements (such as the ToC) are present. If you’re interested in following along with that work, most of it will be tracked on [[phab:T301780|T301780]] and in subtasks of that ticket.
:* We are also considering the way the ToC will display at smaller resolutions ([[phab:T306904|T306904]], [[phab:T306660|T306660]]) and looking into some options for collapsing it that could work for wider screens as well.
:* As you can see, people like you who have chosen Vector 2022 individually share a lot of feedback with us now. [[phab:T307004|T307004]], [[phab:T306562|T306562]] are some examples on things we are or will be working on.
:* In the meantime, we will be A/B testing the ToC on the pilot wikis. Our hypothesis is that the ToC will decrease the amount that people have to scroll to the top of the page to switch to a different section. The design might also vary once we have the results of the test.
:* Since these changes might take a little while to reach the beta cluster, we would also encourage technically-skilled folks to set up a script or gadget to make a temporary solution.
:And... yeah, [[Newsletter:Desktop Improvements updates|subscribe to our newsletter]], join our office hours ([[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Updates/Talk to Web|tomorrow]] or [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Participate|later]]) and talk to us more. Thank you! [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 15:23, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
::[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk]], here's another thought: [[wikt:reverse]]. It's not a long page, but that TOC is so bloody huge a full HD display isn't enough to read ''any'' of the actual page content without scrolling. &lt;span id=&quot;Alexis_Jazz:1651369145562:TalkBWLCLNReading/Web/Desktop_Improvements&quot; class=&quot;BawlCmt&quot;&gt;[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]] ([[User talk:Alexis Jazz|talk]]) 01:39, 1 May 2022 (UTC)&lt;/span&gt;
:::Right, right. Let's just take a look at [[:pl:Gramatyka języka fińskiego]]. I mean, this is an edge case, and as such, it's not that critical. From what I know, all TOC sections aren't uncollapsed by default, and you need to make an effort to see the full TOC. Is this your experience, too, @[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]]? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:45, 5 May 2022 (UTC)
::::[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk]], sorry for being possibly unclear. It was just a thought about the classic inline TOC which is disproportionally huge on Wiktionary, so it's something to think about when designing a new TOC. On the Gramatyka page on plwiki you at least get the intro without scrolling and the page actually ''is'' very long, so it's understandable the TOC also gets big. I've taken a look at the CSS (should have done that sooner) and simply disabling &quot;position:sticky&quot; stops the new TOC from being so infuriating. IMHO that should be the default, or at the very least, proper research should be done into this. Not only to determine by majority vote what users prefer (I wouldn't be surprised if sticky wins a binary majority vote) but also how crazy either option can drive users who ''don't'' like it. Pleasing a majority is no good if it causes a minority to be greatly aggravated. While I personally can get around it using technical means, that isn't true for most people. I'll also note that the experience on devices that are primarily controlled with a touchscreen may very well be different. With a keyboard, scrolling back up to the TOC is nearly no effort. Just press &quot;home&quot; or hold &quot;page up&quot;. With a touchscreen, not so much, so I can see why sticky might have a greater appeal there. &lt;span id=&quot;Alexis_Jazz:1651821096574:TalkBWLCLNReading/Web/Desktop_Improvements&quot; class=&quot;BawlCmt&quot;&gt;[[User:Alexis Jazz|Alexis Jazz]] ([[User talk:Alexis Jazz|talk]]) 07:11, 6 May 2022 (UTC)&lt;/span&gt;
:::::What TOC? I don't get any such thing. [[User:Betaneptune|Betaneptune]] ([[User talk:Betaneptune|talk]]) 17:36, 25 May 2022 (UTC)
::1000px still seems like not enough for hiding the ToC. e.g. 1280 width on a rather large 16:10 projector screen and it is cumbersome and distracting. The floating option to hide it should definitely be implemented (closer to the left edge of the screen, hiding the TOC should make the content padding completely symmetrical left/right!) as that'd actually make Vector 2022 usable. Having it automatically (temporarily) pop out on mouse over would be quite nice, with a click to make it &quot;stick&quot; until clicked again, like a hamburger button you can hover over. For the record, I use Vector 2010 on smaller displays regardless of DPI, as well as high DPI larger screens, and Monobook on everything else. [[User:-αβοοδ|-αβοοδ]] ([[User talk:-αβοοδ|talk]]) 18:05, 29 July 2022 (UTC)
:100% agree. [[User:Football Lab|Football Lab]] ([[User talk:Football Lab|talk]]) 09:14, 26 June 2022 (UTC)

== Watchlist icon ==

[[User:Schierbecker|Schierbecker]] [[Topic:Wu23w3nlomndp5f1|wrote]]:
&lt;blockquote&gt;The watchlist icon too closely resembles a hamburger menu button. I can see many clicking the button thinking it is a dropdown menu. Some may lose unsaved edits after clicking it.&lt;/blockquote&gt;

I completely agree, but not really because it resembles a hamburger button but because it's sandwiched (no pun intended!) between dynamic menus. If there was the dropdown arrow next to the interlangs, alerts and notices buttons just like the personal menu, it would communicate more clearly that the watchlist button is a simple link and not a menu. [[User:Nardog|Nardog]] ([[User talk:Nardog|talk]]) 02:38, 21 April 2022 (UTC)

:Thanks for this comment, @[[User:Nardog|Nardog]]. We'll think how we could improve this. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:55, 27 April 2022 (UTC)
::Information on the design process that led to the current icon can be found here:
::https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T297979
::Nardog is already involved in that task. It's probably best to add this feedback there, as not all designers are reviewing this talk page. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 17:01, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== &quot;Beginning&quot; is confusing ==

More feedback: when I was at [[w:Gotcha journalism]] just now, I became confused because there appeared to be a section titled &quot;beginning&quot;, which I assumed covered the early history of the term. It took me a minute to figure out that that wasn't referring to a section but rather a way to scroll to the top of the page. Many other articles are going to have a similar problem, since we often begin with history sections that might reasonably be titled &quot;Beginning&quot; for early history. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 22:42, 27 April 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:Sdkb|Sdkb]] - good catch! This is something we discussed quite a bit internally in order to finally settle on beginning, although I agree that it's still imperfect.  Previously we were using &quot;introduction&quot;.  The issue there was that many articles have &quot;introduction&quot; as the name of their first section, causing duplication.  Other options we were considering were location-based (back to top, beginning of page, etc).  We are welcome to ideas on how to make this clearer.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 09:05, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
::The name used by wikipedians? ''Lead section'' in English, ''résumé introductif'' in French, etc ([[d:Q10966628|Q10966628]]) [[User:Pyb|Pyb]] ([[User talk:Pyb|talk]]) 11:07, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
:::On Translatewiki.net I found &quot;Début&quot; for fr.wiki and &quot;Inizio&quot; for it.wiki (on it.wiki we use also &quot;Incipit&quot; or &quot;Introduzione&quot;, see [[phab:T306990]]). [[User:Patafisik|Patafisik]] ([[User talk:Patafisik|talk]]) 15:09, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
::::@[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]], did you consider different design approaches in addition to different names? If the word had been accompanied by something like [[File:Font Awesome 5 solid caret-up.svg|16px]], it might have been a lot clearer. I also think there's some benefit to matching the terminology we already use as editors (&quot;lead section&quot; or &quot;introduction&quot;), since that makes it easier for newcomers. The Wikipedia articles that currently have &quot;Introduction&quot; as their first named section should not—they should be tagged with [[w:Template:Overview section]]. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 20:16, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
:::::&lt;small&gt;Bumping @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]]. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 17:16, 6 July 2022 (UTC)&lt;/small&gt;
::::::Just leaving a note here that we're still watching this conversation and considering different options, but haven't made a decision yet.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 13:58, 11 July 2022 (UTC)
::I think using the article title would make the most sense, as the title is the uppermost heading in the article. That way the header that the reader arrives at always matches the one they've clicked on. (I'm sure &quot;Beginning&quot; is better than &quot;Introduction,&quot; but it's not unheard of as a section title either: e.g. [[w:Creolization|Creolization]], [[w:Ashikaga shogunate|Ashikaga shogunate]], [[w:History of Carthage|History of Carthage]]. Is there any way to determine how often it's used?) [[User:Arms &amp;#38; Hearts|Arms &amp;#38; Hearts]] ([[User talk:Arms &amp;#38; Hearts|talk]]) 19:35, 29 May 2022 (UTC)

I think &quot;Top&quot; would be less confusing and generally make more sense as that seems to be the common English term for the top of the page. [[Special:Contributions/132.170.199.112|132.170.199.112]] 19:32, 22 June 2022 (UTC)

== Table of contents below sidebar just doesn't work ==

On a broader note than the two pieces of feedback above, I have to say that my experience so far with the new table of contents has been really frustrating. As an editor, I use lots of the links in the left sidebar quite frequently, so I don't want to collapse it (and even if I did, the way it persists in whatever state you leave it in means that every time I used it it'd return). But preserving the left sidebar forces the table of contents below it, which is just awful. The number one time I want to use the ToC is when I first navigate to an article, and I either want to jump to a specific section or just to see what sections it has to get an overview. Forcing me to scroll to get to that information is extremely annoying, and if it's kept in the final version, I predict the outcry will be intense. You could resolve this either by retaining the old style ToC alongside the new (which would also solve the [[w:MOS:SANDWICH|sandwiching]] concerns I've previously raised) or by moving the ToC above the left sidebar. From your previews, I know you've been working on moving some stuff around and introducing pinning, so I hope this will be resolved in future iterations. But the initial version being introduced here is clearly not ready yet. Best, &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 22:53, 27 April 2022 (UTC)
: For me it seems the table of contents and the sidebar seems to be two different things. On Wikipedia, I collapsed the sidebar and the table of contents still remain. [[User:Tenryuu|Tenryuu]] ([[User talk:Tenryuu|talk]]) 03:09, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
::I want ToC collapsed too. But there is no way to do it. It uses almost 1/3 of my screen and makes reading very difficult.- [[User:Nizil Shah|Nizil Shah]] ([[User talk:Nizil Shah|talk]]) 05:32, 28 April 2022 (UTC)
:::Same here. 14&quot; Screen, collapsed sidebar menu, open only when needed. With the new TOC I cannot collapse the sidebar, it's just a toggle between navbar and TOC. I appreciate the effort and that it's a first attempt, but it definitely should be optional. And yes, I was involved in feedbacks and testing earlier. Regards [[User:Elya|Elya]] ([[User talk:Elya|talk]]) 14:24, 29 April 2022 (UTC)

:::: +1, the TOC should be accessible from the top of the page, and collapsible (vertically; also horiz if it is making the sidebar too wide - many pages have section heads that are quite long).  [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 17:35, 2 May 2022 (UTC)
:::::@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] and @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]], neither of you have replied here. This is a major concern, and I predict that if it is not addressed, it may single-handedly prevent the community from being willing to accept New Vector. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 17:14, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
::::::Hi @[[User:Sdkb|Sdkb]] - thanks for the ping!  Currently, we're working on making the ToC collapsible, especially on narrow screens ([[phab:T306660]]).  Collapsing it would allow for access further up in the page, but won't completely solve the issue you're describing.  To make using both the sidebar and the table of contents a bit easier, we are planning two things.  For logged-out users, we plan on collapsing the sidebar by default so that the table of contents will be shown further up in the page.  We are also planning on separating the tools related to pages in a separate menu.  This will significantly shorten the space for the sidebar, and create a clear definition between which tool acts on the page as a whole, and which one acts only on the page itself.  In this example, this puts the ToC above the end of the introduction section, which is higher than the previous ToC location (admittedly, this will not be the case for all articles).  
::::::[[File:Prototype_of_table_of_contents_and_tools_menu_for_desktop_Wikipedia.png|thumb|Prototype of table of contents and tools menu for desktop Wikipedia]]
::::::[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 14:07, 11 July 2022 (UTC)
:::::::Thanks for the reply, @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]]! Moving the tools elsewhere (ideally to a Twinkle-like menu) is something I certainly support and have been trying to set up since [[w:WP:SIDEBAR20|the 2020 revamp]], and it would help with this. Your screenshot appears to be from a standard resolution display rather than a widescreen display, so I can't tell whether it's going to help enough to ensure that the ToC will always be visible on a normal monitor with neither it nor the main menu collapsed. Getting to a point where that's the case will be essential for getting community consensus.
:::::::Is there a reason you don't seem to be considering placing the ToC above the main menu? &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 23:49, 13 July 2022 (UTC)

== About Google Docs and Zoom ==

{{Ping|SGrabarczuk (WMF)}} Thank you for the invitation I received for tomorrow's videcall since I was an interface admin and a developer! but sadly I cannot participate since I don't use Google Docs or Zoom for security reasons (partially related: [https://www.zdnet.com/article/us-senate-german-government-tell-staff-not-to-use-zoom/] [https://www.gnu.org/proprietary/malware-google.html]).

I don't know if it could be useful but maybe in the future you may consider to land the doc on the wiki itself, or using Etherpad [https://etherpad.wikimedia.org/] when realtime is needed.

To drop Zoom, maybe I can propose Jitsi Meeting [https://meet.jit.si/] that is gratis and libre and supports streaming on social network to support large audience. (Also [[Wikimedia Meet]] deserves a try and some feedback). [[User:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio Bozzolan]] ([[User talk:Valerio Bozzolan|talk]]) 15:38, 28 April 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio Bozzolan]]. I understand your concerns and thank you for the language you use. I do appreciate that. As you may have realized, it isn't without a reason why we use these particular tools/platforms.
:# Google Docs are used by the Foundation as the default tool for making internal notes and docs. We might, for the purposes of the office hours, replace it with Etherpad. There's a problem with the translations, though. Asking translators to update just one word, and waiting until they've done that, could be troublesome. This is why I can only commit to replace this if we make more changes to the announcement. (By the way, the announcement is [[Template:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Office hours announcement|fully standardized]] and translated into 16 languages, some of which use declination or are not written in the Latin script.)
:# We need our office hours to be technically (platform-wise) predictable. Although Jitsi is open source and Zoom is not, the latter is more effective. It has been widely used for online meetings in the movement. It's been used by the WMF for office hours with the CEO, Maryana; it's been used by affiliates. There are hundreds of Wikimedians who at least once have participated in a Wikimedia meeting on Zoom. We know how to provide live translations there. Jitsi, on the other hand, is less popular, and we'd have to learn how to support live translations, including more trainings organized specifically for our meetings.
:# We may consider having office hours on IRC. Frankly, I have a feeling that since the migration from Freenode, IRC has been more and more marginalized, but we could give it a try.
:I'm curious what other Wikimedians watching this page think. Add your comments! [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:15, 5 May 2022 (UTC)
::Just asking for an understanding that Google Form and Zoom are a bug, not a feature, to participate in a Wikimedia project. A bug that deserves a long-term fix. [[User:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio Bozzolan]] ([[User talk:Valerio Bozzolan|talk]]) 15:57, 7 May 2022 (UTC)
::: I appreciate these are standard across parts of the Foundation. And agree w/ [[user:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio]] this is a bug, not a feature.  Perhaps it's time to revisit this across the org. :)  We should be using tools that can be constantly used and deployed by communities for events, workshops, office hours, talks without sending traffic through commercial servers. 
::: ''Text'': Google makes some very wiki-spirited tools (they did absorb JotSpot back in 2006) so it's stayed around for a while. But we simply must stop using it as a crutch that keeps us from using and being delighted by notetaking on our own platform. Our collaborative platform for drafting and discussing documents. Our versioned, searchable platform.
::: ''Video'': I too have to use Zoom sometime, but I'm always surprised and a bit dismayed when a Wikimedia meeting uses it! Jitsi is stable, widely used + repackaged, easily modded and forked, and we host a [https://meet.wmcloud.org/ lovely instance] on the WM cloud. [We also regularly use BigBlueButton for larger audiences.] It makes it easy to name a persistent rooms, embed it it in other places or tools (see Jitsi-as-a-service + [[w:Brave Talk|Brave Talk]] these days), &amp;c. We should be thinking about how to better use video streams in our projects, and using this framework as we do so.  [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 12:54, 14 May 2022 (UTC)
::::Thanks @[[User:Sj|Sj]] and @[[User:Valerio Bozzolan|Valerio Bozzolan]].
::::# First of all, I really hear what you're saying. Perhaps you're right, Google and Zoom may be bugs - it's definitely not up to me to decide. &quot;Perhaps it's time to revisit this across the org. :)&quot; - I'm grateful that you specifically used the words &quot;across the org&quot;. That's way wider than just Olga and me (people who organize ''our'' office hours), or [[m:Community Relations Specialists|Community Relations]] (&quot;technical liaisons&quot; so to speak), or [[m:Movement Communications|Movement Communications]] alone. If it's about ''the standard'', then it needs a broad agreement.
::::# @SJ, do Jitsi or any open-source alternatives provide the speech-to-text functionality and parallel voice tracks for live translators (interpreters)? I'm asking because each time we have a meeting, there are people who need the speech-to-text functionality . Unfortunately, we haven't been able to provide the live translation support yet. We're still working on it, and it seems we may have found a solution.
::::[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 15:55, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
::::: [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk]]: 
:::::: 1. We ''should'' change the standard [though there seem to be many even within one org!], but I only mentioned that to suggest that none are set in stone. :)  As this thread is about these particular discussions, I hope we can try a different standard for these sessions, or understand what prevents such a change.  If it is purely a matter of accessibility features, that would make a phabulous ticket even if it is not yet known who could set them up.   
:::::: 2. Yes they do! Other collaborative orgs w/ similar issues of language equity use jitsi regularly. There are solutions or workarounds for both. [also, to the point of &quot;supporting essential infrastructure for free knowledge&quot;, our engagement would certainly help make them better for all.]   
::::: '''speech to text''': Google Voice integration seems to be there, and a number of open-source s2t services that are not quite comparable. You can see the range of Summer of Code [https://jitsi.org/gsoc/s2t/ projects] + community submissions scratching their own itches in the [https://github.com/jitsi/jigasi/issues/157 jigasi repo]. 
::::: '''remote simultaneous interpretation''': the most recent solution (for a single language, letting you tune in or out of the raw audio and into a translator's audio channel) is use by [https://i.meet.mayfirst.org May First] (which we should [https://mayfirst.coop/en/ work more closely with] on choosing technology stacks, frankly) and is maintained [https://gitlab.com/mfmt/jsi here].  There are improvements, and pushes to integrate into jitsi core, both of which could be facilitated by small technical bounties or large expressions of interest [like Wikimedia indicating this is a crucial feature for us]. [[User:Sj|Sj]] ([[User talk:Sj|talk]]) 02:37, 7 July 2022 (UTC)

::@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]], I will not participate in any forum that is not public. Why the wmf foundation wants to share information via Zoom, a for-profit corporation which provides no guarantee of privacy, is anyone's guess. We have been using wiki-code for discussion since 2001, why this change?
::I apologize if you find my message above irrespecutful, but this represents the views of many. [[User:Ottawahitech|Ottawahitech]] ([[User talk:Ottawahitech|talk]]) 18:26, 13 June 2022 (UTC)
:::@[[User:Ottawahitech|Ottawahitech]], above, you can find explanations on why we (the Web team) are using Zoom now. Are you also asking why we have any voice online meetings in general? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 15:57, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Instant jumping vs. animated scrolling for table of contents ==

As you're polishing up the table of contents, one thing it'd be nice to consider is the behavior when you click on a section in it. Currently, it instantly jumps to that section, but I think it'd be better if it instead did a very quick scroll (maybe a quarter of a second). This would help readers to more easily understand what's happening when they click the link, and to get a better intuitive sense of what the article contains by seeing it flash by. Would that be possible? &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 02:37, 30 April 2022 (UTC)

:&lt;small&gt;Bumping @[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] and @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]]. &lt;span style=&quot;color:#AAA&quot;&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;#123;{u&amp;#124;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;border-radius:9em;padding:0 5px;background:#088&quot;&gt;[[User:Sdkb|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FFF&quot;&gt;'''Sdkb'''&lt;/span&gt;]]&lt;/span&gt;&lt;small&gt;}&amp;#125;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Sdkb|'''talk''']]&lt;/sup&gt; 17:12, 6 July 2022 (UTC)&lt;/small&gt;

== Trouble With Zooming In ==

My vision is poor so I usually zoom to 200% on my browser and it is no problem. With the new skin that same magnification causes the sidebar to take up the top of my screen and I can't see the title of the article and know what page I'm on without scrolling.

== Wikistories ==

Will Vector 2022 be influenced by [[Wikistories]]? --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 10:09, 6 June 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]], what do you mean by influenced? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 22:18, 14 June 2022 (UTC)
::@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]]: If Vector 2022 will be adapted for (compatible from a design perspective with) Wikistories. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 19:06, 15 June 2022 (UTC)
:::@[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]], definitely. All the projects that currently are being built are compatible with or neutral to Vector 2022. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:47, 30 June 2022 (UTC)

== Language switcher opt-out ==

The new language picker is a deal breaker for me as an active editor who is working with a very diverse array of topics on Wikipedia. I write about [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Māori_phonology Māori language], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Тэруха Japanese geisha], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Литература_Тайваня Taiwanese literature], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Эскимосская_кухня Inuit cuisine], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Парагвайская_арфа Paraguayan instruments], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Мишон Vietnamese temples], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Кабилия Algerian regions], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Берберская_кухня Berber cuisine], [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Кайна_(профессия) Arabic professions]. I write [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sister_exchange articles] that compare dozens of cultures [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Грамматическое_число or languages].

I need a way to hover over the list of languages to see the name of the page in a different random language (which can be anything from Korean to Twi). I need to be able to open 50 language editions very quickly to estimate if any of them have good illustrations or any new literature on the topic that I am working on. I often read the same article in 4 languages simply because I can read in a lot of languages and I am wondering which language edition has the best article. The workflow with the new language picker is tremendously stunted.

The main idea of the new interface seems to be making the page width more narrow. With that, there is a lot of free space at the sides, and I would like to propose putting a full list of languages there, as an option. [[User:Le Loy|Le Loy]] ([[User talk:Le Loy|talk]]) 00:29, 13 June 2022 (UTC)
: Yes, I agree, the decision taken now does not help advanced editors work in projects, but hinders them. I think we need to make a separate setting for the &quot;always open&quot; list. The problems of this list have still existed since sorting was removed. [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 15:43, 14 June 2022 (UTC)

:{{support}}--[[User:Wdpp|Wdpp]] ([[User talk:Wdpp|talk]]) 11:47, 3 July 2022 (UTC)

== Old version ==

:''Moved from [[Topic:Wxcz2an2ck4s4cdy]]''
After these changes are made, can I still use the old settings? [[user:Ilovemydoodle|Ilovemydoodle]] ([[user talk: Ilovemydoodle|talk]]) 09:26, 13 June 2022 (UTC)
: Yes [[user:Ilovemydoodle|Ilovemydoodle]], legacy Vector will be available and you will be able to use it as your skin. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 12:24, 14 June 2022 (UTC)
::{{ping|SGrabarczuk (WMF)}} Why does have to be called “legacy”? legacy implies that something is outdated, inferior, no longer supported, none of which apply to Vector &quot;legacy&quot;. Maybe instead, you could call it &quot;advanced&quot;, &quot;expert&quot;, or &quot;classic&quot;. – [[User:Ilovemydoodle2|Ilovemydoodle2]] ([[User talk:Ilovemydoodle2|talk]]) 17:48, 20 July 2022 (UTC)
:::@[[User:Ilovemydoodle2|Ilovemydoodle2]], the motivation is purely technical. This is because it's &quot;frozen&quot;. The Wikimedia Foundation will not develop it - there will be no actively built version of Vector parallel to Vector 2022. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 20:46, 20 July 2022 (UTC)

== Irish language Wikipedia and Vector 2022 ==

[[File:Irish Wikipedia random article - Vector 2022.png|thumb|ga.wp random article screencap - Vector 2022]]
[[File:Irish Wikipedia random article - Vector old.png|thumb|ga.wp random article screencap - current Vector]]

Hi there. I'm [[w:ga:User:Alison]] - admin and bureaucrat on the Irish language Wikipedia. I'd be remiss in not providing feedback, I think, so here goes.

* I see other folks pointing out the massive amount of whitespace / padding in the left side navbar which is squeezing out the actual article text on the right. On our wiki, it really seems significant. IMO, article is all, and we seem to be sacrificing actual content real-estate for ... what, exactly? Yes, it looks 'less cluttered', but there's actually less content - especially for those of us who both browse ''and'' edit on laptop screens.

* On the top tab section (which is otherwise quite nice), you can see the ''Plé'' (Talk) and ''Léigh'' (Read) are scrunched together with no separation. I18n bug, maybe?

* The main image and title have lost their localization and now show &quot;Wikipedia&quot; instead of &quot;Vicipéid&quot; - this could just be an image localization / config issue. Could someone point me in the right direction, maybe? I did the original, later-font localization for our wiki, some years back, so happy to dip in and fix :)

Le gach dea-ghuí (best regards),

-- Allie [[User:Alison|&lt;span style=&quot;color:#FF823D;font-family: comic sans ms&quot;&gt;'''A&lt;font color= &quot;#FF7C0A&quot;&gt;l&lt;font color= &quot;#FFB550&quot;&gt;is&lt;/font&gt;o&lt;/font&gt;n'''&lt;/span&gt;]] &lt;sup&gt;[[User talk:Alison|❤]]&lt;/sup&gt; 16:17, 22 June 2022 (UTC)

:multilingual Wikipedians: during redesigh include current non-english desighs for evaluation, including spanish, french and german. They have good ideas and bad ideas... [[User:0mtwb9gd5wx|0mtwb9gd5wx]] ([[User talk:0mtwb9gd5wx|talk]]) 01:10, 23 June 2022 (UTC)
: The &quot;PléLéigh&quot; issue looks like it's [[phab:T309223|T309223]], a known issue. Until it is fixed in MediaWiki, try updating your browser(s) – the issue occurs if your browser doesn't support a certain relatively new feature. [[User:Rummskartoffel|Rummskartoffel]] ([[User talk:Rummskartoffel|talk]]) 21:59, 23 June 2022 (UTC)
::Hey there! Regarding logos https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T244486 is what you are looking for - basically every logo needs to be recreated. You can request one on that ticket to be prioritized higher or find information about creating new ones.
::Regarding sidebar whitespace I am not sure I understand. The extra padding is for the table of contents underneath the sidebar. You say it's squeezing article text on the right but in your screenshots the Vector 2022 screenshot shows more of the article text. I can see the description section heading for example.
::I can confirm the PléLéigh issue is a bug and will hopefully be fixed soon.
::Hope this is helpful. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 01:02, 1 July 2022 (UTC)

== wordmark no longer appears after upgrading to MediaWiki 1.38.1, style bugs ==

After upgrading to MediaWiki 1.38.1 from 1.36.1, the wordmark no longer appears next to the icon in the upper left.  If the window is wide enough, the 150px space for the wordmark is reserved but is empty.  When you make the window wider past a certain width, the coloring behind the sidebar also vanishes. This happens with Vector 2010 in both legacy and non-legacy mode and in Vector 2022.  The wordmark image is an svg that has not moved and still has correct permissions [[User:Queernix1028|Queernix1028]] ([[User talk:Queernix1028|talk]]) 19:43, 22 June 2022 (UTC)

:What is the value of wgLogos in your LocalSettings.php? [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:22, 29 June 2022 (UTC)
 $wgLogos = [
         'icon' =&gt; &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/arcc/logo.svg&quot;,
         '1x' =&gt; &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/arcc/logo.png&quot;,
         'wordmark' =&gt; [
                 'src' =&gt; &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/arcc/wordmark.png&quot;,
                 '1x'  =&gt; &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/arcc/wordmark.svg&quot;,
                 'width' =&gt; 150,
         ],
 ];
::It previously worked with wordmark src set to the svg file, but now neither that configuration nor the one above work. [[User:Queernix1028|Queernix1028]] ([[User talk:Queernix1028|talk]]) 14:32, 29 June 2022 (UTC)

:I believe you need to set a height on the wordmark. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 00:55, 1 July 2022 (UTC)

== Language links on Wikidata are right at the bottom of the page ==

I've enabled the new theme (Vector 2022) globally on all wikis. I generally like the new interface. However when I am on wikidata, previously the interlanguage links were on the right. (Where an infobox usually goes on a wikipedia page) Now they are right at the bottom of the page! Some wikidata pages are massive, and having to scroll all the way down to the bottom of the screen to do the thing I do most frequently on wikidata (add new language links) is a real pain. Please can you move the language links on wikidata back to the top (top right) of the page? - [[User:Rooiratel|Rooiratel]] ([[User talk:Rooiratel|talk]]) 14:25, 23 June 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Rooiratel|Rooiratel]]. Thanks for your opinion. Are you talking about the desktop view? What's the resolution of your screen? I've tried to narrow my window down and change its width, and it seems that the width thresholds when the interwiki links go from the bottom to the right are the same. Is there any setting you use that may make your experience different? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:50, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
::Hi {{ping|SGrabarczuk (WMF)}} this is for the desktop view. I am seeing this behaviour on my 1080p laptop screen and my 1440p desktop screen. I haven't used the mobile view, so can't comment on that. - [[User:Rooiratel|Rooiratel]] ([[User talk:Rooiratel|talk]]) 06:32, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== Infobox element alignment is mangled in mobile view ==

Maybe I'm doing something wrong, but when I click on &quot;Mobile view&quot; with Vector 2022, many of the infobox elements are misaligned. Many elements that should be centered are left-aligned, and many elements that should be left-aligned are centered. At least that's what it looks like for me in Chrome for Mac OS at [https://en.m.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Russian_Soviet_Federative_Socialist_Republic&amp;useskin=vector-2022 this page]. [[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] ([[User talk:Jonesey95|talk]]) 02:57, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

:Wow, that looks odd. Thanks @[[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] for reporting this. Right now, I only have one question - why do you use the mobile view and Vector 2022 mixed together? Minerva is dedicated for mobile, and Vector 2022 is dedicated for desktop. Having these two at the same time is bold and original :) [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:08, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
::I was just doing some very beginner-level QA testing. Editors do all sorts of ridiculous things, so I try to do some QA testing by doing ridiculous things. If you want editors to use Vector 2022 for desktop-only and Minerva for mobile-only, then make the &quot;Mobile view&quot;/&quot;Desktop view&quot; link at the bottom of the screen switch between the skins. Meanwhile, I'll be over here in legacy Vector where I can fill my browser window with content.... [[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] ([[User talk:Jonesey95|talk]]) 01:15, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

Using the mobile domain with the Vector skin invokes a special mode with lots of odd behaviour. It's not part of this project but will hopefully get fixed some day. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 02:30, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== &quot;Related articles&quot; appear to be missing ==

I do not see the &quot;Related articles&quot; section at the bottom of the mobile view. I don't really care, but since the &quot;Principles&quot; section of this page says &quot;We do not remove any functionality&quot;, I thought I'd mention it. It makes me wonder what other functionality has been removed, and whether this principle is really being followed in a systematic way. [[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] ([[User talk:Jonesey95|talk]]) 03:02, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

RelatedArticles appears to be working fine to me. I see it on Minerva. What do you mean by &quot;at the bottom of mobile view&quot;? The scope of this project is the desktop site so no changes to the mobile domain have been made.

RelatedArticles does not show on the skins of certain websites and has not shown on Vector or Vector 2022 unless the community has explicitly requested. See [[phab:T144812]], [[phab:T181242]] and [[phab:T278611]] for example. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:59, 24 June 2022 (UTC)
:I think this is my mistake. I was comparing [https://en.m.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Russian_Soviet_Federative_Socialist_Republic this] (default mobile view on en.WP) with [https://en.m.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Russian_Soviet_Federative_Socialist_Republic&amp;useskin=vector-2022 this] (Vector 2022 mobile view) and assuming that the default mobile view used some version of the Vector skin, but I think that is not correct. [[User:Jonesey95|Jonesey95]] ([[User talk:Jonesey95|talk]]) 16:38, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

Ah okay. This mode is only accessible by a special URL and is not being worked on as part of this project. Thanks for taking the time to explain! [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 02:28, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== 非常に見にくい ==

日本語で失礼します。本日ごろから日本語版ウィキペディアのスキンに変更があったようですが、
# 文字の大きさをブラウザ側から変更できない(Safari使用)。
# そもそも標準の文字サイズが大きすぎる。
# 目次が項目名の横に位置が変わったせいでアクセスが煩雑になった。
# Infoボックスが大きすぎる
などの変更のせいで、余計見づらくなったような気がします。可能であれば改善するか、もしくは変更前のスキンに戻して欲しいです。 [[User:イカしたイカ|イカしたイカ]] ([[User talk:イカしたイカ|talk]]) 08:38, 24 June 2022 (UTC)

:感謝します、@[[User:イカしたイカ|イカしたイカ]]さん。
:First of all, you don't need to apologize for writing in Japanese. We welcome comments in any language.
:# Would you like just to change the default font size? Or would you be able to zoom in and out, and see the font size adjust?
:# Do you think making the text line wider and keeping the default font size would fix the problem?
:# Why do you think access is more complicated now? Our motivation was to reposition the table of context to make it more accessible. What do you think is not working?
:# Do you think the problem is related to the default font size?
:まず第一に、あなたは日本語で書いたことを謝罪する必要はありません。 どんな言語でもコメントを歓迎します。
:# デフォルトのフォントサイズを変更しますか？ または、ズームインおよびズームアウトして、フォントサイズが調整されるのを確認できますか？
:# テキスト行を広くし、デフォルトのフォントサイズを維持することで、問題が解決すると思いますか？
:# なぜ今、アクセスがより複雑になっていると思いますか？ 私たちの動機は、コンテキストのテーブルを再配置して、よりアクセスしやすくすることでした。 何が機能していないと思いますか？
:# 問題はデフォルトのフォントサイズに関連していると思いますか？
:[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 02:18, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== Please evaluate CJK characters' font size in Vector 2022 ==

{{tracked|T311469}}
For your infomation, the Chinese Wikipedia already has a [[zh:MediaWiki:Gadget-large-font.css|gadget]] that increases the font size for a better Chinese reading experience. Japanese and classical Chinese Wikipedia also have such kinds of gadgets. [[User:Diskdance|Diskdance]] ([[User talk:Diskdance|talk]]) 08:19, 25 June 2022 (UTC)

:It would be nice if we could integrate these gadgets into new Vector skin directly. This would benefit other CJK and multilingual wikis. [[User:Diskdance|Diskdance]] ([[User talk:Diskdance|talk]]) 08:20, 25 June 2022 (UTC)
::Thanks @[[User:Diskdance|Diskdance]]! @[[User:AHollender (WMF)|AHollender (WMF)]] FYI :) [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:03, 27 June 2022 (UTC)

I think we should create  a phabricator ticket for this one. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 02:29, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== Feedback regarding Vector (2022) TOC ==

I've had Vector (2022) enabled for a while, and generally like it. However:

* I don't feel the new way of handling the TOC and side menu is user friendly. It took me a while to notice I could hide the side menu only to raise the TOC up the page, as I assumed it would also hide the TOC since the two are part of the same sidebar. With the side menu visible, I had to scroll much further down than usual to find the TOC on many articles with short lead sections, which undermined the convenience previously provided by the TOC as a way to skip scrolling and quickly navigate to a desired section.
** It also doesn't help that the [[w:Template_talk:Skip_to_talk#Broken_functionality_with_new_version_of_vector_theme|new TOC breaks the functionality of]] {{tl|Skip to talk}}, widely used on talk pages on Wikipedia, but I now understand that the change is intended to make that template unnecessary.
** The prototype [https://di-visual-design-menus.web.app/Brown_bear linked by others above] deals with some of these issues but is still a bit confusing. It's not clear that clicking &quot;hide&quot; on the TOC should result in a menu appearing by the article title rather than just collapsing it like collapsible lists which use the same &quot;[hide]&quot; links; while this behaviour can be learned, it's not clear why the hidden TOC menu button doesn't persist between the search icon and article title when scrolling down, which is what I expected after seeing it collapse to a button beside the article title.

* The new sidebar is wider to accommodate the TOC, but much of that space is blank so I'm not sure it needs to be quite so wide, particularly as the added width can cause issues such as galleries by default having less space for images per row. I understand the motivation is to limit the characters of text per line, but doing so by padding the sidebar with empty space seems like an unhelpful way to achieve that. [[User:Scyrme|Scyrme]] ([[User talk:Scyrme|talk]]) 16:57, 26 June 2022 (UTC)

:I want to chime in about the &quot;hide&quot; behaviour. I noticed the link for the first time right now, tried clicking it and was a confused when it disappeared altogether. I would have expected the link to change to &quot;show&quot; and the table itself to hide. It took me a while to find the icon in the header. I think that if it should behave this way, it needs to somehow be communicated to the user where the TOC goes. [[User:Sebastian Berlin (WMSE)|Sebastian Berlin (WMSE)]] ([[User talk:Sebastian Berlin (WMSE)|talk]]) 10:42, 3 August 2022 (UTC)

== Where are the watch/unwatch buttons? ==

Alright, if the article is long enough to be scrolled, I should scroll it down, the top row of icons will jerk left-right, and the &quot;watchlist&quot; icon will become the &quot;watch/unwatch&quot; toggle. Hopelessly inconvenient, counterintuitive, but it works. But what if the article is so short that it won't scroll at all? [https://ru.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B8%D0%BF%D0%B5%D0%B4%D0%B8%D1%8F:%D0%A0%D0%B5%D1%86%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B7%D0%B8%D1%80%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5/%D0%9E%D0%B1%D1%8A%D0%B5%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BD%D1%91%D0%BD%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B9_%D0%B2%D0%BE%D0%BA%D0%B7%D0%B0%D0%BB_%D0%A6%D0%B8%D0%BD%D1%86%D0%B8%D0%BD%D0%BD%D0%B0%D1%82%D0%B8&amp;oldid=123611287 example] Seems like &quot;preferences/watchlist/edit raw watchlist&quot; is the only go-around, is it not? [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 12:13, 27 June 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]]: There's a smaller star-shaped watch/unwatch toggle to the right of the &quot;View history&quot;/&quot;История&quot; link. [[User:Scyrme|Scyrme]] ([[User talk:Scyrme|talk]]) 14:48, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
:: Thanks, that was most unexpected. I'd rather prefer old good text links. [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 15:59, 27 June 2022 (UTC) The new star looks almost exactly like the existing GA star, just a different shade of grey (but in almost the same corner location as in standard monobook). [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 16:02, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
:&quot;Thanks, that was most unexpected. I'd rather prefer old good text links&quot; - you're a Monobook user, am I right? This may be a good reason why it's most unexpected for you. Vector 2022 is based on Vector legacy (2010), and the star icon has been there for 12 years. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 01:51, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

== Merge notification block in the header: notifications and alerts ==

{{Tracked|T142981}}
For me, it has always been a strange decision that notifications were divided into two unrelated blocks and icons with incomprehensible categorization. I forgot about it, but now I'm paying attention again.

Given that we removed the text from all menus, there are now a lot of icons at the top that do not understand what they do. Different blocks of notifications do not help this at all. Maybe it's time to put them in one menu and break it there already? Filters, tabs, whatever :) But at least you won't get confused in the icons.

I personally still (6 years!) do not know what their fundamental difference is. I asked my friends and they don't know either. [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 17:29, 27 June 2022 (UTC)

:{{Strong oppose}}. The notices are the notifications that are not very important/urgent, unlike the alerts. Merging them would make me unable to found out at a glance if I have any important/urgent notification, and would also overload the notification box, as I receive many notifications. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 22:19, 27 June 2022 (UTC)
:: It seems to me that it is possible to do this with filters and colored marker icons. Or a separate setting for users who really need it. [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 09:47, 28 June 2022 (UTC)

:{{Comment}}. I agree that the distinction could be clearer, but don't necessarily agree that there should be only one button. Presently, when both are empty the only difference between them is the header text and icon. Both share the exact same two buttons, which link to the same destinations. The text in the box doesn't even distinguish, reading &quot;There are no notifications&quot; instead of &quot;There are no alerts&quot;. There isn't even a &quot;help&quot; or &quot;about&quot; link unique to each of them to explain the difference or what gets sent where. If you follow the links to the special page or preferences, it's still not clear which notifications are sent where.

:Based on the names, I would've assumed the difference would be that alerts are specifically for subscriptions to [[Wikipedia:Article alerts|article alerts]], whereas notifications would be for everything else. It makes sense to split them, since alerts would be activity that's less personal to the receiver. &quot;Alerts&quot; would be like a daily newspaper, but &quot;notifications&quot; are more like personal mail. Except this isn't how the system actually functions; messages to the receiver's talk page are placed under &quot;Alerts&quot; rather &quot;Notices&quot;, for example.

:I understand that it may be helpful to filter urgent notifications from less urgent ones, but what counts as urgent or important? Shouldn't that be decided by the user's preferences? It would make more sense to have something like tabs, as Iniquity suggested, to filter types of notifications; this would let that user decide what is important. [[User:Scyrme|Scyrme]] ([[User talk:Scyrme|talk]]) 22:33, 27 June 2022 (UTC)

== Table of contents: Bold format for active section ==

I really appreciate the new skin and layout. In the beta, the active/current section of the article was formatted bold in the table of contents on the left side. But in the live version, it's regular and black. I find it really, really hard to differentiate between the normal blue titles and the active title, because the only difference is the black vs. blue color. Could you please make the active titles bold again? 
Thank you! [[User:Lhennen|Lhennen]] ([[User talk:Lhennen|talk]]) 21:11, 29 June 2022 (UTC)

:+1 Bold and black would be best imo. [[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] ([[User talk:L.xschlag|talk]]) 11:43, 1 July 2022 (UTC)
::@[[User:Lhennen|Lhennen]], @[[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] - thank you for your feedback!  Not sure if you've seen, but we are  currently in the middle of testing some [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Fifth prototype testing|prototypes]] related to this question.  You're welcome to give us more detailed feedback on the prototype page.  One of the things we're testing on these is the way links should appear within the table of contents (see https://di-visual-design-toc-active.web.app/Otter) for an example.  Currently, our feedback is showing us that people are leaning towards option 2: bold and black so we will most likely be continuing with that option and making the titles bold.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 10:08, 4 July 2022 (UTC)

== Jawiki has NOT reached consensus on implementing Vector 2022 yet ==

Jawiki has '''NOT''' reached consensus on implementing Vector 2022 yet. Why was it implemented without our consent? [[User:AppleRingo777|AppleRingo777]] ([[User talk:AppleRingo777|talk]]) 22:01, 29 June 2022 (UTC)

:Hi @[[User:AppleRingo777|AppleRingo777]] - we apologize for the confusion that the deployment process has caused and the lack of clarity from our side.  We are currently working on reading back through our previous communications and clarifying the process and what happened with individual members of the community.  We will to get back to the community with more detailed thoughts and a process for next steps by tomorrow July 1st.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 12:04, 30 June 2022 (UTC)

== [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] ==

Hello! I asked a question at the meeting, but I would like to duplicate it here. Will it be possible to control the location of blocks (right or left) through [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]? [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 15:34, 30 June 2022 (UTC)

:Hey! We are still thinking through how this would work. Input valued in [[phab:T306519]] ! [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:27, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
:: Thanks! :) [[User:Iniquity|Iniquity]] ([[User talk:Iniquity|talk]]) 16:16, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Keep the TOC under the main menu as long as possible (Vector 2022) ==

When the window gets narrower the TOC is moved into a &quot;Hamburger button&quot;. But the main menu stays where it is until the window get's quite a bit more narrower. I think as long as the main menu fits, the TOC should stay at its original place. Especially since the TOC behind the &quot;Hamburger button&quot; is quite easy to miss. [[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] ([[User talk:L.xschlag|talk]]) 11:30, 1 July 2022 (UTC)

:This was a bug. I believe it should be fixed by the end of the week. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:28, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== &quot;Move&quot; is the only in the &quot;More&quot; drop down menu (Vector 2022) ==

I think it's quite odd that the &quot;More&quot; drop down menu most of the time contains only &quot;move&quot;. Is it on purpose to make it harder to find for the average user? [[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] ([[User talk:L.xschlag|talk]]) 11:35, 1 July 2022 (UTC)
* {{ping|L.xschlag}}, I have two items - the other is an add-on via preferences/gadgets. Unfortunately, I cannot use drop-down menues easily, so getting there in V-2022 is quite a nuisance. [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 21:31, 3 July 2022 (UTC)
*:Isn't the behaviour the same here on the other skins?
*:I agree it's not great having one item in a menu, but I think this case is quite rare since on most wikis move privilege is added along with page protection and deletion. There is a trade off here between the complexity of maintaining multiple variants of the skin in different circumstances and what looks best. Here we could add special treatment for the one item menu but we'd need to add additional code complexity and tests to cover it. Hope this insight is helpful. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 14:32, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Actions menu overflows when main menu is active (Vector 2022) ==

{{Tracked|T311471}}
When the main menu is active (meaning visible) and the window is quite narrow the actions menu (Read, Edit source, Add topic, View history) doesn't get condensed in the &quot;More&quot; drop down menu, resulting in a very ugly overflow. [[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] ([[User talk:L.xschlag|talk]]) 11:41, 1 July 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:L.xschlag|L.xschlag]] - thank you for your feedback! This should now be fixed, let us know if you continue seeing issues.  [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 13:34, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Audio player issues (Vector 2022) ==

When pressing play from a wikipedia article (e.g. first clip in [[:w:en:Aftermath_(Rolling_Stones_album)]]), the page changes text colour from black to pale grey. Almost unreadable. This dead time varies from a few seconds to many minutes, probably caused by unsteady connection on my side. I tried opening 2-3-4... windows with the same article, and some windows seem to be stuck indefinitely while others play with minimal (but still annoying) delay. If I press play directly from file description page ( [[:w:en:File:Under_My_Thumb.ogg]]), it always plays instantly and the text always stays black. Win 10 Home / Chrome 102.0.5005.115 (64-bit) [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 19:29, 3 July 2022 (UTC)

:I've flagged this bug to the developers of [[Extension:TimedMediaHandler]]. This is not related to this project. I'll let you know if I hear anything back. Thanks for reporting! [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 16:43, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Language mix in the interface ==

Pardon me if this had already been discussed here. It seems that the language of the interface (as set in preferences) mixes up with local-language elements where it shouldn't. 
# My preferences are always &quot;interface=en&quot;, and thus I always see &quot;Contents Beginning&quot; in the TOC section - be it Chinese, Russian or Spanish wiki. 
# The pink box above TOC in ru-wiki says &quot;On this Википедия&lt;sup&gt;[sic!]&lt;/sup&gt; the language links are at the top of the page across from the article title. Go to top.&quot; In zh-wiki, however, the message is correctly &quot;On this Wikipedia the language links ...&quot; [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 21:23, 3 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thank you @[[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] for reporting this. That's odd. 🤔 [[betawiki:MediaWiki:Vector-language-redirect-to-top/en|The source code]] is: &lt;tt&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;On this {{SITENAME}} the language links&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/tt&gt;... - so apparently, something about &lt;nowiki&gt;{{SITENAME}}&lt;/nowiki&gt; isn't working here. But I don't know what yet. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:20, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Where are the categories? ==

Hi this is my first time looking at the prototype, so apologies if this question has been answered elsewhere - where are the categories? [[User:MassiveEartha|MassiveEartha]] ([[User talk:MassiveEartha|talk]]) 04:15, 5 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:MassiveEartha|MassiveEartha]]. I'm sorry that you felt confused. We don't touch elements such as categories. These prototypes were only created for editors to help us decide on the visual design matters. If the categories aren't displayed in any of the prototypes, then it's definitely unintentional and also irrelevant to what we do. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:02, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== 開発者集団は日本語版を軽視していると思われるThe group of developers seems to downplay the Japanese version ==

日本語版の利用者の一人としては、開発者の集団は日本語版を軽視していると考える。一つの証拠として開発者からの意見を求めるメッセージが英語だけで書かれていたことを挙げておく。機械翻訳があるのだから英語と共に日本語を添えることは簡単なことのはずである。それすらせずにVectorからVector2022への変更を強行したことは、一種の文化帝国主義であると評さざるを得ない。As one of the users of the Japanese version, I think that the group of developers disregards the Japanese version. One proof is that the message for the developer's opinion was written in English only. Since there is machine translation, it should be easy to add Japanese along with English. It must be said that forcing the change from Vector to Vector 2022 without doing so is a kind of cultural imperialism.--[[Special:Contributions/27.85.205.84|27.85.205.84]] 07:17, 5 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello 27.85.205.84. Do you maybe know good open-source machine translators working for Japanese and English? I've noticed that Google Translate doesn't work for these languages well. Sometimes it changes words, meanings, and the tone of entire sentences completely. I could write in Polish, my first language, but I'm sure that would be even more difficult. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:15, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Vector 2022を強要する行為は、開発者が読者を軽視していることの証拠である The act of forcing Vector 2022 is evidence that developers are downplaying their readers. ==

開発者（の集団）はアカウントユーザーなら自分で好きなスキンを使えるのだから、あまり出来がよいとは言えないVector 2022を強要してっもかまわないと考えているようである。しかし、元々Vector 2022は読者として快適に使えることを考慮していない。開発者（の集団）は読者がいなければいくら記事を作っても意味がないということを忘れているのだろうか。It seems that developers (a group of people) are willing to force Vector 2022, which is not very good, because account users can use their favorite skins. However, originally Vector 2022 did not consider it to be comfortable to use as a reader. Do developers (groups) forget that it doesn't make sense to write an article without a reader?--[[Special:Contributions/27.85.205.84|27.85.205.84]] 07:29, 5 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello! As I can see, the translation was done by Google Translate. It's not good. I've used DeepL and this message is very different in English. Why do you think Vector 2022 was not originally designed to be comfortable to use as a reader? I would like to understand what made you think so.
:こんにちは！ ご覧のとおり、翻訳はGoogle翻訳によって行われました。 良くない。 私はDeepLを使用しましたが、このメッセージは英語では大きく異なります。 なぜVector2022は、もともとリーダーとして快適に使用できるように設計されていなかったと思いますか？ どうしてそう思ったのか理解したい。 [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 02:06, 12 July 2022 (UTC)
:: [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)-san]], your great DeepL-ed message causes a [[:ja:Wikipedia:削除依頼/Wikipedia:井戸端/subj/デスクトップ版外装（スキン）改善バージョンの実装について|deletion discussion]] due to copyright violation. I wish a good Foundation staff would deeply understand the copyright policy in Wikipedia and recognize that copypasting from machine translation could violate the copyright that was attributed to that translation service.
:: So, while I'm not the original poster of this section, let me answer the question: 
:: &gt; Why do you think Vector 2022 was not originally designed to be comfortable to use as a reader? 
:: If you think the only problem is new Vector 2022 design itself, I must say you are missing an important point: how you all introduced the new skin. All of the changes has never been announced in jawiki before being applied (and unfortunately, after that, until today). Many of the editors, the readers, the users were surprised at the new design all of the sudden, and not a few of them regarded it as a big bug or something.
:: You may wonder, &quot;we let you know this in advance, via a member of your community.&quot; That's true, partially. [[User:AppleRingo777|AppleRingo777-san]] took your messages and passed them to us per your instruction. I heard that you (or someone in Foundation) asked to post the message in WP:NEWS. How did you determine that WP:NEWS, generally where announcements '''only for the editors''' are posted, was enough to communicate this important news that obviously affected the entirety of community members including the readers? Will you also assign the responsibility on this to AppleRingo777-san, a good community member? I cannot help but want the Foundation to realize that you all destroyed our trust. --[[Special:Contributions/2400:4052:3420:4500:444C:45BF:13AC:59E2|2400:4052:3420:4500:444C:45BF:13AC:59E2]] 14:40, 14 July 2022 (UTC)

== Listed coordinates overlapping with header weirdly ==

{{Tracked|T281974}}

for an example of this, see wp's [[:en:London|london]] article ([https://imgur.com/a/rEngM3R screenshot]) [[User:LarstonMarston|LarstonMarston]] ([[User talk:LarstonMarston|talk]]) 20:00, 5 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thank you @[[User:LarstonMarston|LarstonMarston]]. In this case, we need to fix the bug together with the communities - some code should be changed by editors on each wiki with this bug separately. We can help (and we're working on it). [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:11, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
::thanks, good to hear [[User:LarstonMarston|LarstonMarston]] ([[User talk:LarstonMarston|talk]]) 20:06, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== Default to Collapsed Menu Exposed TOC ==

{{Tracked|T287609}}

I was trying to figure out why I didn't like the new TOC, and then it hit me that the main reason was that it is hidden by the side menu when you first visit a page (I very rarely login to Wikipedia, and I'm thinking that's the norm for most visitors). Then I was thinking that I almost never use the main navigation links, they just aren't part of my normal use case of visiting Wikipedia (it is to learn a specific thing that I don't currently know enough about). I was going to post to make it possible to hide the main nav, but then realized that you already built it, but the default is for it to show. My hypothesis is that the bulk of users don't look or click on any of the menu items, and that the menu should be hidden by default and the TOC exposed above the fold.  [[Special:Contributions/195.134.163.110|195.134.163.110]] 10:34, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

:Yes, TOC should be exposed above the article not on the right. In fact in desktop view if I click PC version it does not open stuff on the left. [[Special:Contributions/2A00:1370:8184:2478:A928:87EF:D073:FEEA|2A00:1370:8184:2478:A928:87EF:D073:FEEA]] 16:22, 6 July 2022 (UTC)
:Thank you for your feedback! We are planning on implementing this change within the next couple of weeks.  Progress can be tracked in the phabricator ticket linked above.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 10:04, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

::I would like you to give logged-in users the right to choose that as well. If you knew about these plans, don't you think that was a little premature to set Vector (2022) as the default in JAWP ? If you make changes right after you start it in JAWP, Japanese users will be confused. --[[User:呉野|呉野]] ([[User talk:呉野|talk]]) 13:21, 14 July 2022 (UTC)

== Replace the &quot;new section&quot; tab text with &quot;+&quot; gadget not working. ==

{{Fixed}}

On the English Wikipedia upon switching to Modern Vector the aforementioned gadget ceases to function as intended.

[[User:Nathanielcwm|Nathanielcwm]] ([[User talk:Nathanielcwm|talk]]) 13:14, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

:Looks like the gadget is setup to only work on Vector and Monobook. I have updated it to also apply to Vector 2022 skin (https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=MediaWiki%3AGadget-addsection-plus.js&amp;type=revision&amp;diff=1096783301&amp;oldid=1047498910) [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 15:59, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

== July ==

@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]]: Does Vector 2022 will be deployed (as default) at all Wikimedia wikis until the end of July, as it is written [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements|here]]? I am asking this because I see that there is still some work to do and the deadline written there changed several times. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 21:56, 6 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]], thanks for this question. This information is already outdated. It will ''not'' be deployed in July. We hope to send an update to the village pumps next week. We're working on the announcement right now. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 16:01, 7 July 2022 (UTC)

== Language switching ==

Hi, I really appreciate the suggestion of translations within the language button, thank you! [[Special:Contributions/37.103.14.65|37.103.14.65]] 09:06, 7 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thanks! Appreciation also goes to the [[Wikimedia Language engineering]] team, because they have made this particular change. We have &quot;only&quot; provided the language button :) [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 02:01, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== Vector (2022)のウィキペディア日本語版への導入について About the introduction of Vector (2022) to the Japanese version of Wikipedia ==

「[[:ja:Wikipedia:井戸端/subj/デスクトップ版外装（スキン）改善バージョンの実装について]]」での案内によると7月14日までこのページでコメントを受け付けるとのことなので意見を書く。--[[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] ([[User talk:匿竜類|talk]]) 02:25, 8 July 2022 (UTC)
* 開発者は開発すること自体に喜びを感じるべきであり、日本語版で行ったように強引に導入して「見えるところ」に成果が表れることに喜びを感じるべきでない。
* 開発者は裏方として、開発に専念するべきであり、それを使うかどうかは「利用者」の判断にゆだねるべきである。
* スキンはインフラストラクチャーである。技術者が陥りがちな間違いだが「新しければよい」というものではない。
* 現在のVector (2022)は完成品とは言えずベータテストの段階でしかない。この段階で全面導入を進めようとするのは技術者の姿勢として適切でない。ベータテストは希望者を募って行うべきである。
* Vector (2022)をデフォルトのスキンとすることについて、本当に開発者チームに権限が与えられているのか。証拠があるなら、リンクをつけて示してほしい。
* 今回の経緯を見ると「読者」に対する観点が脱落している。「読者」のいない記事に何の意味があるのだろうか。
:ja: Wikipedia: Idobata / subj / Desktop version According to the guidance on implementing the improved exterior (skin) version, comments will be accepted on this page until July 14, so I will write my opinion.
* Developers should be delighted with the development itself, and should not be delighted with the &quot;visible&quot; results of the forcible introduction as was done in the Japanese version.
* Developers should concentrate on development behind the scenes and leave it to the &quot;user&quot; to decide whether or not to use it.
* Skins are infrastructure. It's a mistake that engineers tend to make, but it's not &quot;just new.&quot;
* The current Vector (2022) is not a finished product, it is only in the beta test stage. It is not appropriate as an engineer's attitude to proceed with full-scale introduction at this stage. Beta testing should be done by recruiting applicants.
* Is the developer team really empowered to make Vector (2022) the default skin? If you have proof, please link to it.
* Looking at the history of this time, the viewpoint for &quot;readers&quot; is missing. What does an article without a &quot;reader&quot; mean? [[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] ([[User talk:匿竜類|talk]]) 02:25, 8 July 2022 (UTC)
*:Hi @[[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] - Thank you for your feedback and for the bug reports below.  We are currently in the process of taking the Vector (2022) skin out of beta testing/pilot mode and into the stage where we scale the skin, with the hopes of making it the default on all the wikis.  Over the course of the next month, we will be hosting conversations with the largest Wikipedias and getting their feedback on the skin, similar to our conversations with Japanese Wikipedia right now.  Even when default, logged-in users will still be able to chose whether they want to use the skin or not.  If they decide not to use it, they can turn it off at any moment in their user preferences.
*:In terms of readers, for every change we have made when building the skin, we have tested both quantitatively and qualitatively with readers and well as editors.  To access more detail on the research and testing we have done, please go [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features|to the Features page]] and select the feature you are interested in learning about.  From there, you can read the sections named Quantitative research or Qualitative research to see the testing we have done. In addition, we have also done more open-ended testing with readers to identify the issues with the skin starting in 2020 until now. Please see the  [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Repository/Hureo User Research Report/ja|Hureo User Research Report]] with Readers and Editors, the [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Repository/Wikimania Stockholm research report/ja|Wikimania Stockholm research report]], the [https://nbviewer.org/github/wikimedia-research/Desktop-behavior-analysis-Aug-2019/blob/master/Desktop_usage_behavior_analysis.ipynb Wikimedia Desktop Usage and Behavior Data Analysis], or the [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Repository/Sticky Header and Table of Contents User Testing/ja|Sticky Header and Table of Contents User Testing]] reports for some examples of the studies we have done with readers (which have translations in Japanese), what we have learned, and how we used those learnings to create the new skin. [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 10:00, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Vector (2022)の不具合の報告 Report a bug in Vector (2022) ==

{{Tracked|T303267}} {{Tracked|T281974}}

日本語版でVector (2022)を使うと、左側に「このWikipediaでは言語間リンクがページの先頭にある記事タイトルの向かい側に設置されています。ページの先頭をご覧ください。」と表示されるのだが、実際には「記事タイトル」は「ページの先頭」ではなくこのメッセージの下に表示される。以前は、このようなことがなかったように思うので一時的なものかもしれないが、症状が出ていることを確認してほしい。When I use Vector (2022) in the Japanese version, it says &quot;In this Wikipedia, the interlingual link is located opposite the article title at the top of the page. Please see the top of the page.&quot; However, in reality, the &quot;article title&quot; is displayed below this message instead of &quot;at the top of the page&quot;. I don't think this happened before, so it may be temporary, but please make sure that you have symptoms.--[[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] ([[User talk:匿竜類|talk]]) 02:42, 8 July 2022 (UTC)

:上記不具合を報告してから、1日経過していますが、応答がありません。[[:ja:Wikipedia:表示改善依頼#Vector（2022）スキンで、バッジと地図のタグが重なって表示される#]]によると、どうやらこの種の不具合はファブリケータで処理することになっているようですが、そちらの方への連絡はしていただけたのでしょうか。とりあえず担当者の応答を求めます。One day has passed since I reported the above problem, but there is no response. ja: Wikipedia: Display improvement request #Vector (2022) In the skin, the badge and the map tag are displayed overlapping. According to #, it seems that this kind of defect is to be handled by the fabricator. Could you contact that person? For the time being, ask for the response of the person in charge.--[[User:匿竜類|匿竜類]] ([[User talk:匿竜類|talk]]) 03:05, 9 July 2022 (UTC)
::Hello! The coordinates issue is known but the language one wasn't.  Thank you for bringing it to our attention.
::I will reply with more details next week. Have a great weekend and thank you for the bug reports. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 18:27, 9 July 2022 (UTC)
:::These are tracked in [[phab:T303267]] and [[phab:T281974]]. Thanks for the report! [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 16:39, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Merge [ca-view] and [ca-nstab-main] in the article toolbar ==

Currently, in the article toolbar, we have two links (Read and Article) that lead to the same location. One of them is located in the left and the other one is located in the right navigation. This can be confusing to readers, and also adds unnecessary weight to the toolbar. [https://imgur.com/56mbihi Current look].

It would be good if we could merge these two tabs into one. Ideally, the best solution, in my opinion, would be to merge the right and left navigation and center the items, [https://imgur.com/a/ih52zYZ like this]. Please tell me what you think about this. Thank you! — [[User:Aca|Aca]] ([[User talk:Aca|talk]]) 11:18, 9 July 2022 (UTC)

:{{O}}. Now, the tabs are clear. You have 2 pages: the article and the talk page. You can select 1 action at a time for each of them: reading, visual editing, source editing, and viewing the history. Form the proposed design, you can understand that the tabs led to different types of pages. The watch is something not related to the article? And if now you are on article tabs, if you would press on the editing source tab, you would arrive on a page not related to the article (this is a possible confusion)? And so on. &quot;This can be confusing to readers,&quot; - how so? Are there any data? And if there are, are there any data that the proposed design is better? P.S. I also dislike the proposed design, due to visual reasons. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 19:00, 9 July 2022 (UTC)

== Big blank space when on a big zoom ==

Unlike the old layout that adjust depending of the size of zoom, the new format seems to follow a single size that, when zoomed in, creates a big blank space like if the page was still loading

It needs be fixed so the wiki pages can be better for people that have vison issues 

- [[:en:User:Meganinja202|User:Meganinja202]] | [[:en:User_talk:Meganinja202|¿]]  10:17:00 11 July 2022 (UTC) [[User:Meganinja202|Meganinja202]] ([[User talk:Meganinja202|talk]]) 10:17, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

:[[User:Meganinja202]] are you taking about [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Limiting_content_width]] or reporting a bug? If the latter, what browser and device are you using? [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 16:34, 11 July 2022 (UTC)
::i think should be a bug since its a thing that happens from top to bottom of the page and not from the sides, i am use Chromium Based MS Edge [[User:Meganinja202|Meganinja202]] ([[User talk:Meganinja202|talk]]) 17:02, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

== Language box recommendation ==

A minor suggestion: why not insert the language box on the title header so I don't have to go all up to the top of the page to change language versions. So yeah, thanks! [[User:PeaceSeekers|PeaceSeekers]] ([[User talk:PeaceSeekers|talk]]) 11:00, 11 July 2022 (UTC)

:ya, they should had kept the language bar on the side of page instead of the top, leaving the language option on top only on mobile/touch machines [[User:Meganinja202|Meganinja202]] ([[User talk:Meganinja202|talk]]) 17:03, 11 July 2022 (UTC)
:@[[User:PeaceSeekers|PeaceSeekers]] - do you use the site while logged-in? If so, you can access the language switching button from the persistent (&quot;sticky&quot;) header at the top of the page while you're scrolling.  We are also in discussion of bringing this functionality to all logged-in users as well.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 08:15, 12 July 2022 (UTC)
::I did log in, but I can't see it though ... what I have is only, from the left: the search button, article title, discussion page, edit history, watchlist and my profile stuff (for lack of better words). So that's that. [[User:PeaceSeekers|PeaceSeekers]] ([[User talk:PeaceSeekers|talk]]) 08:43, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== What I still would love to see different solutions to ==

I'm very much looking forward to not having the text fill an entire wide screen. This will make Wikipedia far easier to read on big screens. Thanks! A few things that still don't work for me:

'''Table of contents'''

If I haven't collapsed the left menu, the ToC is not visible when I start reading the article. This makes it more difficult to get an overview.

It's also ''generally'' more difficult to get an overview of the article content, as I need to go to the ToC in the sidebar and scroll down to see everything on big pages (like a Village Pump). This both makes it more difficult for me to conceptualize what's on the page – as I've tested this, I've realised I find it challenging to get a grasp of a page if I can't see the various topics at the same time – and adds more work, as I have to move the mouse pointer to the ToC to be able to scroll. I would have much preferred if it used more of the space available to get around this.

'''My contributions'''

My own user contributions is something I use all the time – it's my way of getting back to what I was doing before. Making it less accessible in the top menu is wrench thrown into my workflow.

'''Language links'''

This is my main issue. I use other languages ''all the time''. As a reader, I glance at them to conceptualise the topic – which languages have written about this subject? This hints at things that aren't available in the content itself. As an editor, I check out other languages to see what sources they have and so on. Having to click to even see if there are languages I can read is an extra step that both requires more work, but also makes it less inviting, as the opportunity doesn't stare me in the face. This is so central to my workflow that it might in itself be reason to keep using Vector 2010, but that's certainly not my preferred solution. [[User:Julle|Julle]] ([[User talk:Julle|talk]]) 10:13, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

== feedback ==

asbra med maxbredd! coolt att wikipedia tar steget in i 2010-talet och blir läsbart på stor skärm.


språklänkarna blir mycket sämre. man borde kunna se språken direkt och klicka på dem, det är en sak man använder hela tiden.


jag förstår inte varför ni har bytt ut texten i användarmenyn mot symboler? det var tydligare med text. nu måste man gissa vad de betyder och många kommer aldrig lista ut det.


man borde inte behöva skrolla INNE I innehållsförteckningen för att se hela. sjukt störande att behöva gå till den och skrolla I DEN för att se vad som finns på sidan. [[Special:Contributions/81.92.27.129|81.92.27.129]] 18:12, 12 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thanks for the feedback! 
:(google translation)
:* max  width: cool that wikipedia takes the step into the 2010s and becomes readable on the big screen.
:* language links: you should be able to see the languages ​​directly and click on them, it is one thing you use all the time.
:* Icons: I do not understand why you have replaced the text in the user menu with symbols? it was clearer with text. now you have to guess what they mean and many will never figure it out.
:* Table of contents: you should not have to scroll INSIDE the table of contents to see the whole thing. Very annoying to have to go to it and scroll IN IT to see what's on the page. [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 19:00, 12 July 2022 (UTC)
:::(&quot;Sjukt störande&quot;, which the machine translation rendered as &quot;ill disturbing&quot;, means &quot;very annoying&quot;.) [[User:Julle|Julle]] ([[User talk:Julle|talk]]) 00:15, 13 July 2022 (UTC)

== More TOC concerns ==

On pages with long headings (f.i. [[Wikipedia:Closure_requests]]), the new TOC is highly impractical. The headings are difficult to parse, sometimes cutting words in two. A lot of scrolling is also required to get an overview of what discussions to close. Will it be possible to go back to the old TOC on a per-page base? I can imagine a lot of non-article pages will have similar problems (including this one).

Less importantly, I noticed that the default is having only the top heading displayed. In some pages / articles there are very few top-level headings, and this would always require the reader to uncollapse. Can this be made more dynamic? [[User:Femke|Femke]] ([[User talk:Femke|talk]]) 18:09, 14 July 2022 (UTC)

:Would it be possible (probably only on bigger screens) to use the empty white space on the right for tools (for logged-in editors), so that the TOC is less cramped? Solves two problems in one.  [[User:Femke|Femke]] ([[User talk:Femke|talk]]) 17:00, 18 July 2022 (UTC)

== incorrect translation Vector 2022（jpwiki） ==

The information text on where to switch languages is partially translated incorrectly. I think , &quot;このWikipediaでは言語間リンクがページの先頭にある記事タイトルの向かい側に設置されています。&quot; is a slightly mistaken translation. This may mean that the language switch is outside the display.

You probably meant to write that, &quot;他言語版へのリンクは、ページ先頭の記事タイトルの右側にあります。&quot;. But I would rather you don't adopt this with no check. [[User:呉野|呉野]] ([[User talk:呉野|talk]]) 10:01, 15 July 2022 (UTC)

== 'Talk' and 'Contributions' buttons shouldn't be hidden in the navigation bar's drop down menu. ==

We shouldn't have to click twice to get to our '''Talk''' and '''Contribution''' pages from the navigation bar. I mean, there's already a bunch of wasted white space to right of the search box and to the the left of our Userpage button for those two icons to be added in the nav bar without any problems. [[User:Some1|Some1]] ([[User talk:Some1|talk]]) 02:57, 17 July 2022 (UTC)

== Simple English sidebar ==

I notice in Simple English with the 2022 Vector, the menus on the left side of the page are  to the left of the page text as they should be, but they are far above rather than beside the text. [[User:Jim.henderson|Jim.henderson]] ([[User talk:Jim.henderson|talk]]) 05:47, 17 July 2022 (UTC)

== The new sidebar TOC is confusive, not intuitive, unusable ==

I strongly oppose the new sidebar TOC. It is extremely confusing, not intuitive, and unusable. The removal of the numbering for paragraphs and their transformation into collapsible lists, will make the articles and discussions unreadable, as their structure will be completely unclear.


The TOC at the top of the article right below the lead text was perfect for giving a clear impression of the article's structure and for exploring its contents.


I think that keeping both the old and the new TOC (if the latter is really necessary) would be a good solution. The new TOC proves useful only in the bottom sections of very long articles. [[Special:Contributions/2001:B07:A2A:1884:D5D:3606:C70C:5366|2001:B07:A2A:1884:D5D:3606:C70C:5366]] 14:03, 17 July 2022 (UTC)
* Second that. Another point of note is that the narrow sidebar is a poor match for long section titles. Even in English wikipedia, some headings must be split in two narrow lines, or three. Other languages, that are naturally more verboise than English, are even more affected. [[User:Retired electrician|Retired electrician]] ([[User talk:Retired electrician|talk]]) 08:16, 29 July 2022 (UTC)

== This gives me depression ==

By merely see this happen week-by-week, I can see this sacred project gradually being destroyed. I wish I could stop this. – [[User:Ilovemydoodle2|Ilovemydoodle2]] ([[User talk:Ilovemydoodle2|talk]]) 07:35, 18 July 2022 (UTC)

== wrong name for a language ==

someone is having a laugh, or got really confused about translation. In the main page https://www.wikipedia.org/, '''Français''' now appears as '''anglais''', both in the top 'wheel' and in the 'Read Wikipedia in your language' drop-down. This is very wrong. What other languages have been disappeared in this way ? a bit of QA would go a long way :-) [[Special:Contributions/92.16.98.145|92.16.98.145]] 16:23, 19 July 2022 (UTC)

:Thanks for letting us know! This looks like a mistake/error on translatewiki.net. We'll try to fix that immediately. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 18:28, 19 July 2022 (UTC)
::FYI this wasn't related to the project.
::See related Reddit thread for details on what happened here if you are curious: https://www.reddit.com/r/wikipedia/comments/w2iidz/why_anglais_did_someone_sabotage_it/ [[User:Jdlrobson|Jdlrobson]] ([[User talk:Jdlrobson|talk]]) 20:03, 20 July 2022 (UTC)

== coordinates being weird (again) ==

there was an issue a little while ago where location coordinates in an article would overlap with the header. that's fixed now, but some icons are still uncomfortably close to them, like the FA star; for an example of this, see the english wiki's [[:en:India|India]] article ([https://imgur.com/a/uuXPMzk screenshot]) [[Special:Contributions/2600:1700:7AA1:2400:9CA1:1220:42FD:1F12|2600:1700:7AA1:2400:9CA1:1220:42FD:1F12]] 20:17, 20 July 2022 (UTC)

== General concerns! ==

Well I was part of the process for quite some time now. And up until the move of the TOC from inside the content to the sidebar it was okay with me. I had some minor things, I thought I will get used to: the white space (anyone wanting that, can narrow their window), some inconsistencies (compare [[#A few more issues with the Page header vs Sticky header icons]]), the language switcher, which I fear will leave the impression of reading ''the same'' thing in different languages (compare [[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Archive3#Language_Selector_misunderstandable]], as a side-note: nothing happened here, at least nothing I recognized). 

But today I got this message: [[Topic:Wsfx4tbwzkgamaek]] asking for a translation for [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Updates/2022-07_for_the_largest_wikis]]. Let me cite: 

*'''&quot;...before discussing the change itself&quot;'''
*'''&quot;...that allows for a way to identify the needs of the community from the new skin.&quot;'''
*'''&quot;We would love to see the Vector 2022 skin [...] become the new default across all wikis...&quot;'''
*'''&quot;We will be ready to begin making the change at the end of August (and not in July, as previously announced), when the ''visual refinements'' and other ''deployment blockers'' are ready.&quot;'''
*'''&quot;The goal for that discussion will be to identify breaking issues or opportunities for improvement for the new skin. It will be important for us to reduce the risk of bugs or imperfections that would be particularly troublesome on [insert your language] Wikipedia&quot;'''

All that reads like: Well, we're just talking, let's see, what needs to be done, that everyone is happy. There are some things that need to be done anyways. 

Now let's read those two cites:
*'''&quot;...difficult discussions about the launch as the default&quot;''' (compare [[Topic:Wsfx4tbwzkgamaek]])
*'''&quot;...until our improvements are default on all wikis in July 2022.&quot;''' (compare [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements]] 

So isn't this not just a request for bug reports instead of a &quot;discussion&quot;? Is this not more of a fear of &quot;Flak&quot; instead of &quot;needs of the community&quot;? Isn't it happening anyways, instead of you &quot;loving to see it&quot;? What about all the other projects, wikibooks for example (&quot;[insert your language] Wikipedia&quot;)? I understand, you do the work, you decide. '''But:'''

* Is it wise to &quot;discuss&quot; while there are still tasks to be done and decisions to be made? (compare [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Features/Visual_Refinements]], which by the way doesn't even seem finished, and for example [[#MediaWiki:Sidebar]])
* Is the Date of the end of August (6 weeks) really feasible? Who will translate all the feedback that will come in german?
* Is it good to leave the impression, that communities will have a choice (compare [[#Jawiki has NOT reached consensus on implementing Vector 2022 yet]])?

Some suggestions, if I may:
# Why not try to slow the process down? Why the haste? One could remove the deadlines and refine everything. ''Then'' ask the communities for bug reports.
# Why not try some marketing &quot;tricks&quot;? I think the discussion about the white space clearly shows that desktop ''improvements'' are highly subjective. Why not use for example ''skin changes''? Another Option could be deploying Vector 2022 only for not logged in users and hence prolong/smooth the transition-process creating time for bug reports and discussions. Most of anonymous usage would probably not care for the change, as long as the content is there. On another plus-side it will create &quot;data&quot; on how the menu-usage changes and community-links are perceived. It will probably even create data on how many logged in users switch to the new layout deliberately and or switch back hence providing &quot;hard&quot; success-data. 
# Would it be that bad to really leave the community a choice?
# If you are relying on volunteers, grant them a little more slack. Bug reports from the community need time: Bugs need to be recognized as bugs, they need to be reported, triaged ''and'' handled. Is this possible in 6 weeks? Volunteers might have another life, a job, kids, a week might be pretty short notice. Phabricator-use is not that trivial.
# Let's talk or try, if the new design might eventually be a problem for recruiting new volunteers. Did anyone think about a possible impact of hiding ''community-links'' in collapsed menus? Nobody seems to talk about community-pages or discussion-pages or even other project-scopes. Is the new menu-structure as fitting for these as for wikipedia-articles? 

I'm deeply saddened. The new TOC will make my life within wikimedia really hard and I commented about that early on (compare [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Third_prototype_testing/Feedback#Benutzername:HirnSpuk|here, bullet 7]]). I think all the TOC-comments on this page (see above) should raise at least some concern. And last but not least, I'm deeply troubled, that the new language-links will do more harm, than good.

So, ping @[[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] and @[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]], my sincere apology, I don't mean to be rude or mean and I appreciate your work and the work of your colleagues. But I don't want to volunteer for the translation-request, because all of the above mentioned problems.

Regards [[User:HirnSpuk|HirnSpuk]] ([[User talk:HirnSpuk|talk]]) 22:25, 20 July 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:HirnSpuk|HirnSpuk]]. Thank you for your outstanding involvement, and appreciation for our work. I'm glad to see that. Also, thank you for your sincere, thoughtful, and thorough comment with all the links and quotes. I think I understand what your approach is, I'm happy that you're saying this.
:Before I answer the questions, I'll admit/confirm that:
:# The ToC work hasn't been finished yet. So haven't the visual refinements. There's a list of issues labelled as &quot;[[phab:T309972|deployment blockers]]&quot;, by which we mean issues we need to solve before making it the default everywhere. I hope this will make you less sad!
:# Bug reports do need time. Phabricator is not that trivial.
:# While indeed focusing on the most typical use cases, like interacting with articles.
:# In some discussions, it has been confusing what exactly is for the individual communities to choose between.
:Regarding the questions, my answers to the easiest part:
:# We've been working since 2019, most work is behind us and we're headed towards the end. Now, we need to make sure what else the largest communities may need.
:# What about all the other projects - the message I asked if you could translate is dedicated to the largest communities of the top language versions of Wikipedia.
:# This is why in that message, we're initiating a pre-discussion about culture of collaboration. After that, we'll ask for bug reports and other technical requests.
:# We use the name Desktop Improvements because the point is to make changes that are actual measured improvements. Only some of the visual refinements are really subjective. But regarding the feature changes, the idea for each of these is that it should be an improvement compared to Legacy Vector.
:# We're part of [[Core Experiences]] and work closely with the teams focusing on newbies and more experienced editors. It's our plan to make entry points for new volunteers prominent, in collaboration with Growth. We hope that Desktop Improvements will be an introduction to even more sophisticated changes addressing very specific use cases.
:OK, enough now for one comment. Let's keep talking, though. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 01:30, 21 July 2022 (UTC)

:: @[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]], because you said &quot;let's keep talking&quot;, let me react to your latter 5 points.
::# I do not want to diminish in any way the work you (plural) have done since 2019 and I think the plan is good. But I'm convinced, that the timing is not right. &quot;The end of August&quot; I find far to soon if you &quot;need to make sure what else the largest communities may need.&quot;
::# I wasn't able to find the &quot;we talk to the «big guys» first&quot;-idea anywhere. The only thing I find is &quot;We would like our improvements to be default on all wikis in August/September 2022.&quot; There will probably not be time to talk to the «small guys». And in addition, the text to translate suggest, that there is a choice, and you'd like to &quot;talk&quot;. My impression is you want to ask: how can we best ask for bug reports. That might (and probably will) work, but I don't want to be part of exactly this approach.
::# same as first and second.
::# How is the improvement measured? Is there any &quot;hard data&quot; anywhere? Everything needs more clicks hence more time. It &quot;looks&quot; a little better and modern, which I also find necessary and good. But what is actually &quot;improved&quot;? 
::#*I need more scrolling for the TOC, 
::#* I will need more work (and creative ideas btw) for rework of community-pages that rely on the &quot;old&quot; version of the TOC at the moment, and even worse, I need to check the visual appearance and usability of pages in even more configurations (to mobile and desktop and VE and source, now I need to add different skins), 
::#* I need more clicks for almost anything (if menus are hidden, but this is nearly imperative, to get at least some use out of the new ToC), 
::#* I'm deeply troubled about the &quot;impression&quot; some changes might make (which hence wouldn't be an improvement either and which is by default not measurable)... 
::#* What about the visually impaired? Is it an improvement for them too, any hard data? 
::#:Please, feel free to elaborate. I know it would be baloney to change the name in the last 6 weeks of the work. My point is not to do that, but to take a step back, review what's done so far, and if the decision will be made to prolong the process a really long time, then ''maybe'' one ''might'' think about a change, and if it's only to get less of the &quot;if you do this I'll be done with wiki...&quot;-criticism that's just consuming time for everyone.
::# I'm not addressing technical issues. It's the possible &quot;hiding&quot; of prominent community-links in the sidebar by using elaborate restructuring and collapsing mechanisms. On that the single communities won't have influence as far as I see it at the moment.
::PS: I appreciate trying to cheer me up (&quot;make you less sad&quot;), but my sadness stems from the uncertainty how this will all work out. In the end the prototype is only a prototype. And how much work in the community must be done afterwards to facilitate the &quot;improvements&quot; is also not clear. The main point being, that I struggle with checking and cross-checking functionalities in different systems. It was okay until the move of the ToC. But as long as there is still work to be done, I can't even think about workarounds for not having the ToC where and how I was used to it. 
::Regards [[User:HirnSpuk|HirnSpuk]] ([[User talk:HirnSpuk|talk]]) 07:34, 21 July 2022 (UTC)
:::Hey @[[user:HirnSpuk|HirnSpuk]], thank you for your continued feedback. It's been super helpful. We've rewritten our message to German-language Wikipedia based on your thoughts and the learnings we've gotten through similar conversations on other wikis. We're going to post our next draft for translation this week - let us know what you think of it! We're open to suggestions. Your continued thoughts are much appreciated!
:::In terms of your individual questions:
:::# The timing is not right
:::#* We really do believe that our changes are improvements already! We're eager to bring them to readers and editors. As you have pointed out, we've been building these for three years. We've received feedback from German-language Wikipedians, and many other communities. As you also know, we've performed prototype testing with editors across 30+ languages, and different types of quantitative testing on each feature. Many significant requests have already been discussed.
:::#* The main reason we want to have this conversation now (while we're putting the finishing touches, like the visual refinements and changes to the table of contents) is that we'd like to see if any of the feedback might change what those finishing touches are. We'd also feel more confident with our plan once we know what the additional work we need to do is, if any.
:::#* The process we're envisioning is to collect bugs and requests, and triage these into three categories: (1) the ones that must be done before the deployment, (2) the ones that can wait until after the deployment, and (3) the ones that we don't think are a priority. Our goal for the conversation with the communities is to establish what lies in each bucket such that the communities are comfortable with changing the default.
:::#* We understand if a conversation might take longer on a given community, and do not plan on cutting any discussion short just to reach a deadline. We made a mistake with Japanese Wikipedia and made the change prior to acknowledging a common process. We'd like to avoid that mistake with the other wikis, hence the lengthier discussion with German-language Wikipedia.
:::# The &quot;we talk to the «big guys» first&quot;-idea
:::#* We try to take the approach of equity. We have conversations across the top 25 Wikipedias by size. We've attended a [[m:Wikisource Triage meetings|Wikisource Triage meeting]] and two [[m:SWAN|SWAN]] meetings. The set of pilot wikis is diverse. We inform the big and small communities about our office hours using different channels, incl. MassMessages, Tech News, Discord, Telegram, Facebook. We're going to have the interpretation support in the top UN languages.
:::# How is the improvement measured?
:::#* Thank you for pointing this out. This very crucial piece was missing. We'll be adding a summary of our findings to our future messages.
:::#* You'll find the short answer [[:w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)#UX_research_and_usability_testing|on the English Wikipedia Village Pump page]], quite paradoxically brought to everyone's attention using the &quot;hidden&quot; template. For details on any individual feature, go to the “features” section of our documentation, select the feature you are interested in, and review the qualitative and quantitative sections.
:::# It's the possible &quot;hiding&quot; of prominent community-links in the sidebar by using elaborate restructuring and collapsing mechanisms. On that the single communities won't have influence as far as I see it at the moment.
:::#* This is a great question. So far, our interviews with users have shown that newcomers are NOT more likely to begin contributing based on the number (or even presence) of community links. In fact, having so many options at hand made them feel unwelcomed to the interface as they didn't instinctively know where the links would lead, and thus, felt intimidated or lost.
:::#* We think a better method is to have fewer links that are clearer to understand and pave more intuitive ways. These links are, among others, edit or history. We are working with the Growth and Editing teams to identify how we can increase the understanding of these links for readers and newcomers - both so they will know where the content they are reading is coming from, but also as a means of introducing them to contribution. See also: [[Core Experiences]].
:::# What about the visually impaired? Is it an improvement for them too, any hard data?
:::#* We've been doing accessibility testings with the American Foundation for the Blind. You'll find more information in this task: [[phab:T310033|T310033]]. Generally though, part of this work goes beyond Desktop Improvements, and is done by our designers who build basic user interface elements for all the teams.
:::Hey, on a side note, have you ever attended our office hours? I (Szymon) don't recall this. You'd have heard answers to some similar questions if you had joined us earlier. Anyway, feel invited.
:::[[user:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]], [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 02:44, 29 July 2022 (UTC)

== Sorry but user expereince is kind of awful ==

Okay. I've given &quot;Vector 2022&quot; a shot for a while and it is just confusing and difficult to use. Too much animation-style issues. Too much whitespace. Difficult discovery of functions. Difficult to obtain a feeling of confidence in mastery. If I would have been keeping a log, I'd have dozens of gripes by now. I don't wish to waste time enumerating specific things because it's besides the point because the entire experience is bad. I can't hack it anymore. I thought I'd get used to it but I'm going back to Vector 2010. Keep things simple. Keep it static. I know many people but a lot of work into this and it was a valid attempt but it just didn't suceed in improving over Vector 2010. [[User:Jason Quinn|Jason Quinn]] ([[User talk:Jason Quinn|talk]]) 02:24, 26 July 2022 (UTC)

== External link icon ==

The external link icon currently deployed on mediawiki.org looks horrible. What happened? The icon shown at [[phab:T261391]] in the &quot;After&quot; screenshot looks much better. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 19:55, 26 July 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]], what's the difference you're referring to? Could you maybe share a screenshot? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 23:36, 26 July 2022 (UTC)
::@[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]]: Here.
::[[File:Vector2022 Broken External Link Icon.png|thumb|The icon looks thin and pixeled. Not like at Phabricator.]] --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 10:48, 27 July 2022 (UTC)
:::I saw that the issue was already reported. Compare [https://phab.wmfusercontent.org/file/data/zm2w6tyla7ap4pm54oxw/PHID-FILE-jxp2g6oxik24v6zcst5o/image.png this] with [https://phab.wmfusercontent.org/file/data/6tvujxqmvz53tlojn4qi/PHID-FILE-gq23v5redy2o4ki63rnq/Screen_Shot_2022-07-21_at_11.46.24_AM.png this]. Also, for me it looks like the arrow is misshaped. --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 10:53, 27 July 2022 (UTC)
::::Hi @[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]] - thanks for your report.  The icon is indeed broken as of right now.  We're looking into this right now and hope to have a fix later this week or early next week.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 12:05, 28 July 2022 (UTC)

== Sticky header causes TOC to instantly offset on appearing ==

When scrolling down a page, at the moment the sticky header shows up (smoothly), the TOC offset is incremented to display below the header. However, the TOC offset change is instant, unlike the header. It's just a small visual thing, but I think making the TOC offset to follow the smooth header apparition would make pages look more reactive.&lt;br&gt;
Regards, [[User:Epok|Epok]] ([[User talk:Epok|talk]]) 18:54, 29 July 2022 (UTC)

== Sticky sidebar overlaps footer ==

{{tracked|T313060}}
I wonder if anyone have noticed it: when you scroll down until the end of the page (from a desktop) the sticky sidebar overlaps the footer. Because of this, it's impossible to read part of its content and it looks pretty weird. I don't know much about how MediaWiki works, but maybe applying z-index and background-color (or something similar) to the footer could be a possible solution?

Cheers, [[User:Anidae|Anidae]] ([[User talk:Anidae|talk]]) 22:18, 29 July 2022 (UTC)
: Hello @[[user:Anidae|Anidae]]. Thanks for writing here. Yes, we've noticed the bug and we'll fix it. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 11:49, 1 August 2022 (UTC)

== CSS gadget to truly disable max-width limit (on jawiki) ==

Hi, developers. I am aokomoriuta, a.k.a. jawiki sysop&amp;IFA, and was the [[usability:Releases/Default_Switch#Phase III Deployment|Phase III UX Ambassador for the (legacy) vector skin switching]].

In this thread, I'd like to notify you (developers) about the gadget '''NewVector-MaxWidth.css''', which is provided on Japanese Wikipedia to solve the max-width problem on Vector2022 and problems on the gadget linked from your FAQ page.

[[File:NewVector-MaxWidth example.png|800px|center]]

----

I understand why you think the limitation is reasonable. I won't make a counterargument to limit max-width as the default settings.

However, the limitation is NOT THE BEST FOR ALL USERS, but only most. Some users (including me) want to read Wikipedia and other articles as wide as possible (the browser's window-width).

I know you linked the gadget for such users ([[en:User:Jdlrobson/vector-max-width-toggle.js]]) from the [[Reading/Web/Desktop_Improvements/Frequently_asked_questions#Why don’t we just make it a setting?|FAQ page]].

I tried it, but it's not good for me. There are three problems;

* I need to click the button to switch the width on each page.
* I can feel a little latency to see the switched page because JavaScript might take some instructions to overwrite the width settings, especially on my light laptop computer.
* The width is not maximized. It makes the width only about two times. As I wrote above, it is not enough.

To solve the above problems, I have provided a user custom css ([[:ja:プロジェクト:ウィキ技術部/スクリプト開発/trunk/newvector-maxwidth.css]]) to truly maximized the width on Japanese Wikipedia.

This method is significantly lighter than the gadget you provided, and easy to maintain because it needs only to specify the element's class/id which you limit the max-width. I will continue to maintain and provide Japanese Wikipedia users as long as I don't find an alternative way.

You can link the CSS from your (FAQ) pages, or take over its development and maintenance to provide all Wikimedia sites.
I also welcome feedback/request/comments from all developers and users. Please reply in this thread.

I hope this thread and your developments improve user experience successfully.

&lt;small&gt;日本語版の利用者の方へ(For Japanese users)：ガジェットに関する意見・要望・コメントなどは[[:ja:Wikipedia‐ノート:ベクター (2022年版)/横幅制限の撤廃]]でも受け付けていて、日本語ができる人はそちらに書いてもらったほうが応答や解決が早いと思います。&lt;/small&gt; [[User:青子守歌|aokomoriuta]] ([[User talk:青子守歌|talk]]) 06:58, 31 July 2022 (UTC)

== Design decision against the Wikimedia Movement strategy recommendations ==

{{tracked|T287609}}
Hello! The Desktop Improvements (sic) project has decided, against the Wikimedia Movement recommendations, to hide by default the links to sister projects to non logged users. The [[:m:Strategy/Wikimedia movement/2018-20/Recommendations/Improve User Experience|Improve User Experience]] recommendation textually says:

* ''Tools to connect '''cross-project''' and cross-language functionalities to provide an enhanced experience of the knowledge contained in the Wikimedia ecosystem for a particular interest, informational need, or inquiry.'' (bold text is mine).

We can have different views on aesthetics, but hiding the cross-project links instead of making them more prominent is against the recommendations. I have tried to discuss this in Phabricator, but there doesn't seem to be any way to discuss seriously this error. Thanks. [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 20:27, 1 August 2022 (UTC)

:[[User:Theklan|Theklan]], thank you for your concern and for keeping us on our toes. To clarify: the idea behind the goal that you've quoted is is to build systems and tools (such as structured data) that allow us to incorporate content from sister projects within Wikipedia. As we know from data collection simply linking to sister projects does not work effectively. So I respectfully disagree that we're are going &quot;against the Wikimedia Movement recommendations&quot;.
:Secondly, as we've discussed in the past: with each improvement comes a tradeoff, and sometimes when our principles/goals conflict with one another we are forced to make difficult decisions. So even if we had a movement goal to provide links to sister projects (which we do not), it still might be okay to collapse those links in some cases. We cannot offer people every link at all times — we know from research that this decreases the quality of the overall reading experience. So yes, the links in the sidebar are more difficult to access now. We are already aware of this. But the overall improvement to the reading experience makes this tradeoff worth it. This is the conclusion we have arrived at through data collection and testing. These decisions are not easy to make, and we know that certain people will be upset by them. I am sorry if you disagree with the conclusion we have come to.
:Thankfully the Structured data team are actively working on various experiments that bring content from sister projects directly into Wikipedia. You can read more about that project here: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T306341.  [[User:AHollender (WMF)|AHollender (WMF)]] ([[User talk:AHollender (WMF)|talk]]) 22:31, 1 August 2022 (UTC)
::&quot;Bring content from sister projects directly into Wikipedia&quot; doesn't seem like a recommendation, because we can also bring content from Wikiquotes to Wikisource, without using Wikipedia. So, sorry, but no. This recommendation is clear: disconnecting cross-project links goes against the recommendation. [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 07:58, 2 August 2022 (UTC)
:::@[[User:Theklan|Theklan]] you can read more about how content from sister projects is being incorporated into Wikipedia here: [[Structured Data Across Wikimedia/Search Improvements]] [[User:AHollender (WMF)|AHollender (WMF)]] ([[User talk:AHollender (WMF)|talk]]) 16:03, 2 August 2022 (UTC)
::::That's a good initative, yes. Is not related to what we are discussing here. What are the steps to make links to sister projects more prominent in the new design? [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 08:04, 3 August 2022 (UTC)
:::::In my understanding that question was already answered above: &quot;simply linking to sister projects does not work effectively&quot;. --[[User:AKlapper (WMF)|AKlapper (WMF)]] ([[User talk:AKlapper (WMF)|talk]]) 10:35, 3 August 2022 (UTC)
::::::&quot;Simply linking to sister projects does not work effectively&quot; can be a good sentence. Just deleting the links is, surely, less effective than having there. If the links there are not effective, we should have a place to put them on (that was my only point in the Phabricator ticket, but as usual it gets ignored, or the discussion goes to harassment if I have a point). Is there or will there be a place to put the links, or are we going to get rid of them just because they weren't prominent? (I remember that I have been constructive in this discussion, I even presented a mock-up to make my point more clear). [[User:Theklan|Theklan]] ([[User talk:Theklan|talk]]) 17:49, 3 August 2022 (UTC)

== Survey ==

Does [[phab:T314286|this survey]] will be run on English Wikipedia only? --'''''[[User:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #43b0ef;&quot;&gt;NGC 54&lt;/span&gt;]]''''' ([[User talk:NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;talk&lt;/span&gt;]] | [[Special:Contributions/NGC 54|&lt;span style=&quot;color: #7cb8f4;&quot;&gt;contribs&lt;/span&gt;]]) 09:25, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

:@[[User:NGC 54|NGC 54]] - no, we will be running the survey on approximately 10 languages, depending on where we are able to get translations.  We're starting with English Wikipedia while we wait for translations for other language wikis.   [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|OVasileva (WMF)]] ([[User talk:OVasileva (WMF)|talk]]) 11:15, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Namespaces in the search menu ==

It seems it is possible to improve the search as follows. For example, only for registered users. Editors often have to search for templates and links to help pages in the Wikipedia namespace, and registered users can probably do this more often than they type the names of articles in the search. To do this, it is convenient to type the name of the page directly in the search field, for example: &quot;template:page name&quot;, &quot;wikipedia:page name&quot;. It is even more convenient to type this with aliases of the namespaces &quot;t:name&quot; and &quot;wp:name&quot;. The inconvenient thing here is that you need to type the &quot;:&quot; character. Someone can switch the layout to English for this, where &quot;:&quot; is easier to type. And someone does not know about keyboard shortcuts on their language layout at all (there are even people who select and copy with the mouse and refuse to copy through ctrl+c/ctrl+v). It seems it would be convenient to have a namespace selection feature right in the drop-down list. For example, if it were possible to switch the search to these namespaces (or add these namespaces to the search output) if the namespace alias was the first &quot;wp  name&quot; - this is implemented in browsers when you can first type &quot;[https://support.google.com/chrome/answer/95426?hl=en site search shortcut]&quot; in the address bar. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

:Hi @[[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]]. First of all, thank you for all your suggestions. I've taken the liberty and separated these into different topics. I think it'll be easier to talk. I needed to create the headings, and I tried to get the ideas reflected well, but if you think the headings could be better, please edit. You're the original author here.
:Regarding the namespaces in the search menu, I could swear I've seen something like this somewhere. I'll ask my team if we could do anything about it. Perhaps this would be a task for a separate team working just on the search... well, I'll get back to you. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 18:34, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== The header area in the new editor is not active for clicks and text selection ==

Sometimes when editing pages, it becomes necessary to select the page title and copy it. If you open editing in the [[2017 wikitext editor]] (for example, a random page that you have not opened before or you do not save site data through the browser settings), then the title is gray and it cannot be selected and copied. If you open (also a random page) for editing in the Visual editor, then the title is black and it can be selected and copied. It is necessary that you can always select and copy the title. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Open in reading mode without using scrolling ==

It is often necessary, when a page is in editing mode, to open a duplicate page in reading mode in a new tab to view or use a wiki link or footnote. Somewhere it was announced that you saw how much less often users began to scroll back to the beginning. To open a duplicate page, you need to scroll up, then down again to the place of editing. Maybe someday you will have ideas on how to open the reading mode without scrolling. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Add a help link to the languages widget ==

As a registered user, I would like to see languages that are more understandable to me higher in the list, for example, English. For many users, the main question is how to make specific languages higher. About this maybe there is somewhere deep in the help. But it seems it would be more useful to somehow find out that the user can influence the list of favorite languages, or go to this help from the menu itself with a minimum of clicks. And I would also like to know how to get rid of unnecessary suggested languages, which I clicked only once. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Placeholder for the search languages widget ==

As an editor, I sometimes have to open wikis in languages that are mentioned in the text (for example, as a country) or used in an article (for example, as a word in a [[:w:Category:Lang-x_templates|lang-x]] template). I understand in my own language what the language I need is called, but I do not know its original writing, which is shown in the drop-down menu. The first thing I do is spend time scrolling the list up and down in search of something similar. Yes, you can enter a name in the &quot;search&quot;, but this is 1) not very often required 2) you need to know about it in advance or remember, or the old experience of the language list prevails without this &quot;search&quot;. The problem is that the text &quot;Search for a language&quot; is too standardized and speaks poorly about the possibilities. I would like this placeholder to somehow directly and better than now tell me &quot;how&quot; to find (describes the actions - what should I type) a language if I know its name in my language. In my opinion, as the best example, the text in the placeholder of the field suggesting that we write a description of the edit when publishing the page &quot;Describe what you changed&quot; is much more informative and better suggests what needs to be done. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Languages' names in the language of the interface ==

For the old location of languages in the sidebar, a user script was made locally ([https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/MediaWiki:Gadget-iwcore.js] [https://ru.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:Gadgets] iwlocalnames iwhints iwcore), which registered users could enable for themselves and see the names of languages in their own language. It seems that this script was quite popular. It may be worth making a switch in the menu for everyone, even for unregistered users, which could change the language names to the interface language of this wiki (or the interface language that is selected in your settings) and back to self-names in one click. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Offer more pages in the search using the technology of translators ==

You said that readers prefer to look at one language and somehow &quot;don't know&quot; about other languages, and for this the language selector was placed at the top. If we look at enwiki, where there are 6 million articles, then this is much more than in other language wikis. When you search in yandex, an offer to read an article in enwiki through their translator often appears in its output. For example, if we search for &quot;список портов по грузообороту&quot;, the search site will offer us this article &quot;[[w:List of busiest ports by cargo tonnage]] in the following form [https://translate.yandex.ru/translate?lang=en-ru&amp;url=https%3A%2F%2Fen.wikipedia.org%2Fwiki%2FList_of_busiest_ports_by_cargo_tonnage&amp;view=c]. We have already used yandex in the [[Content translation]] extension. Perhaps for some translation directions it would be possible to suggest in our search to view the page in / through their translator. Or only show results from another language wiki by somehow translating the query (for the search engine itself, in the same way as they do, but by any translator) from the language of the current wiki. (From the point of view of spreading knowledge, this makes sense. It is unclear in what form it could be.) [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

== Add a link to the FAQ ==

It may be useful to add links from the old [[Structured Discussions/FAQ#Why is there so much whitespace/padding?]] to the [[Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Frequently asked questions]], the information (by links) in it at that time looked convincing. [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)

:Huh, you've found an old and potentially useful page. Your idea is good. However, there's an issue about the context. The Foundation isn't doing anything about Structured Discussions. I imagine if we provided this link, it would look like we were encouraging more people to use Structured Data, or like these projects were connected. What do you think? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 18:25, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
::I meant reusing these links &quot;Whitespace myth&quot;, &quot;Best practices analysis&quot; and footnotes, not links to the Flow help [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 18:37, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
:::Oh, OK, thank you for clarification! [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 20:11, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== ToC in the diff view ==

{{tracked|T311529}}
In revision comparison mode, ToC looks like a regular bulleted list without styles https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Botany&amp;diff=1101340041&amp;oldid=1098510198&amp;diffmode=source [[User:Sunpriat|Sunpriat]] 21:18, 2 August 2022 (UTC)
: Thank you, we'll work on it. You can follow our activities on Phabricator. [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 12:08, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Feature request ==

Hey, I love the new Vector styles overall, but the user menu is the one area that slows me down. I tend to use my user contributions page a lot to check recent activity on articles I created or edited recently, because my watchlist is quite large. Other editors might frequently use tools collapsed in the menu like their Sandbox, but not user contributions or a watchlist. 

Consequently, I'd love more flexibility when it comes to... 
# how many menu items are shown in the header vs in the collapsed menu. On many monitor sizes there is a lot of wasted whitespace in between the search field and the user menu, and being able to show more items and then have it collapse dynamically as the viewport shifts is basically what the whole point of a more modern header layout is for. 
# the ability to customize which menu options are in the header based on my needs, so for that for instance I could hide notifs (I get very few alerts) but show user contribs. 

This kind of customization is similar to how the Slack sidebar can be reordered hierarchically by each user, but with sane defaults in place. This kind of addition would let us keep the same basic principle of a more refined set of menu items with a dropdown for the rest, but let users decide for themselves which tools they need quick access to the most. 

[[User:Steven Walling|Steven Walling]] ([[User talk:Steven Walling|talk]]) 18:02, 3 August 2022 (UTC)

== Sidebar overlapping ==

The main menu sidebar is overlapping (Vector 2022). Unusable. [[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]] ([[User talk:Grimes2|talk]]) 14:20, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

:Hello @[[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]], thanks for writing here. Is this about the issue reported in [[#Sticky sidebar overlaps footer]]? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 17:56, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
::No! https://abload.de/image.php?img=2022-08-0420_03_33-grxcjnf.png [[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]] ([[User talk:Grimes2|talk]]) 18:09, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
:::I can't replicate this :/ Let's perhaps add ?safemode=1 to the URL and see if the issue still exists? [[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|SGrabarczuk (WMF)]] ([[User talk:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|talk]]) 18:24, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
::::No success. https://abload.de/image.php?img=2022-08-0420_35_52-gr10kgs.png [[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]] ([[User talk:Grimes2|talk]]) 18:39, 4 August 2022 (UTC)
::::My investigation: Opera was set to font size big. Using font size normal solved the problem. Thanks. [[User:Grimes2|Grimes2]] ([[User talk:Grimes2|talk]]) 18:59, 4 August 2022 (UTC)

== Sufficiently narrow window just shows some separator lines ==
{{tracked|T314708}}
I don't know when this started in the past few days, but (using Vector-2022 of course) as of now a narrow window, meaning one snapped to the right side of my 1920x1080 screen or even narrower than that, starts with the entire left-panel list of links, with their horizontal dividers spread across the window, before I even see the page title, right at the bottom of the window. Zooming the browser to 90% brings back a more normal display. This happens on every page I see; it's not dependent on images, or break markers, or the size of the TOC. I hope that's enough information without an image. I can't imagine I'm alone but didn't see any relevant subject line on this page.

Configuration: Edge 103.0.1264.77 or Chrome 103.0.5060.134, Windows 10, scaling 100%. English Wikipedia, any of several namespaces. [[User:DavidBrooks|DavidBrooks]] ([[User talk:DavidBrooks|talk]]) 16:42, 5 August 2022 (UTC)

:Ditto on my Surface Pro: 2736x1824 at 175% scaling. [[User:DavidBrooks|DavidBrooks]] ([[User talk:DavidBrooks|talk]]) 17:59, 5 August 2022 (UTC) ETA: screenshot of this page [https://1drv.ms/u/s!AtuCZY0YF4hGpK05RoIu3pNFNjW2Rg?e=5OCaOz]. [[User:DavidBrooks|DavidBrooks]] ([[User talk:DavidBrooks|talk]]) 18:04, 5 August 2022 (UTC)

==  Search suggestions and keyboard accessibility in Vector 2022 ==

(Reposted from enwiki's Village Pump)

One of my most common actions is to find a policy or guideline via WP: shortcut. Therefore I use the search box for this. Having recently upgraded to vector-2022, I've also adopted the Alt-Shift-F shortcut to search. I'm using Chrome 103 on Windows 10 Pro. If I happen to search while the mouse pointer is near the search box, &quot;Enter&quot; has the undesirable effect of activating the search suggestion which is indicated by the mouse pointer, rather than sending my query as-is to the search engine. This is an accessibility no-no. I pressed &quot;Enter&quot; to activate my keyboard input, not what's under the caret. If I need to move the mouse to avoid this situation, it defeats the purpose of keyboard entry. As soon as I enter a search term that produces suggestions, the mouse pointer immediately selects whatever's underneath it, and then &quot;Enter&quot; accepts that selection. But I'm not using the mouse.

Example: &quot;Alt-Shift-F&quot; MOS:GENDERID &quot;Enter&quot; took me to WP:MOS and WP:MOSBIO, successively, until I moved the mouse away from underneath the search box. [[User:Elizium23|Elizium23]] ([[User talk:Elizium23|talk]]) 07:40, 7 August 2022 (UTC)

== Contributions now requite two clicks - please allow customization of the top right ==

I think the skin is the step in the right direciton, but the fact that accessing my contributions requires two clicks is annoying. Ditto for rsome others. I understand the goal is to de-clutter stuff (good) but allow customization, please. Keep the current layout as default but allow users easy customization of what goes into the top right horizontal menu and what is hidden in the top right pull down menu please. [[User:Piotrus|Piotrus]] ([[User talk:Piotrus|talk]]) 11:56, 7 August 2022 (UTC)</text>
      <sha1>fagh61ze23ttjf408q0jkm2yn96zudb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/id</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>978421</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402296</id>
      <parentid>3380871</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:06:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="38" xml:space="preserve">Lihat $1 untuk informasi lebih lanjut.</text>
      <sha1>eesojhqjrdtz84yam6zqmm8ed3slxdw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/ar</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>980810</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402192</id>
      <parentid>5371499</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20675" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''انظر [[Wikitech:PAWS]] لمزيد من التفاصيل.''
هذا المستند يوفر نظرة عامة تفاعلية سريعة على '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|باي ويكي بوت}}''' باستخدام ''مفكرة'' مُستضافة على بيئة معامل ويكيميديا باستخدام [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: قشرة ويب''')]].

{{note|1=لاحظ أن طرفية PAWS تدعم النسخ واللصق [[w:ar:كروميوم (متصفح ويب)|المتصفحات المبنية على كروميوم]] فقط (جوجل كروم وأوبرا وسفاري مايكروسوفت إيدج الجديد بالغرض.) إن كنت تستخدم متصفحًا مختلفًا، يمكنك تجربة قائمة السياق فقط (انقر بالزر الأيمن) أو ستكون بحاجة إلى كتابة الأوامر يدويًا المذكورة في هذا الشرح التفصيلي. يمكنك أيضًا إنشاء ملف باش يحتوي على الأمر ويستدعي الطرفي باستخدام &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.}}

{{Warning|1=كل المفكرات والطرفيات في PAWS عُرضةً للإنهاء دون ملاحظة. أنت مدعو لتشغيل مهمتك في أماكن أخرى (مثل [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|تولفورج]]) إن كانت مهمتك ستستمر لأكثر من ساعات.}}

== إنشاء حساب على ويكيميديا ==

لاتباع هذا الشرح التفصيلي، أنت فقط بحاجة إلى حساب على ويكيبيديا (ويكيميديا). استخدم [[Special:CreateAccount|خاص:أنشئ حسابًا]].

بمجرد أنك قد أنشأت حسابًا، من فضلك قم بزيارة https://test.wikipedia.org/ وتفحص إن كان اسم المستخدم الخاص بك يظهر أعلى الركن الأيمن &lt;small&gt;(هذا يعمل حول [[phabricator:T120327|T120327]])&lt;/small&gt;.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

== سجل دخولك إلى مفكرة ==

لبدء مفكرة مُستضافة، اذهب إلى https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub

اضغط على &quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot;، ثم اضغط على &quot;Allow&quot; عند طلب موافقة &quot;Use OAuth for Authentication&quot;.
المرة الأولى عند دخولك إلى PAWS، ستحتاج إلى إنشاء خادم.
اضغط على زر &quot;Start my Server&quot; الأخضر.
من الطبيعي الانتظار بضع دقائق حتى يبدأ الخادم الجديد.

بمجرد انتهائه، ستُحوَّل إلى مسار مثل &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/tree&lt;/nowiki&gt;

== بدء طرفية ==

لبدء طرفية تفاعلية جديدة،
# اذهب إلى [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ الصفحة الرئيسية]
# اضغط على «New» على الجانب الأيمن
# اختر «Terminal».
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
هذا سيفتح نافذة جديدة بمسار &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/terminals/1&lt;/nowiki&gt; برمز لينكس '$'.
&lt;/div&gt;

هذه الطرفية ليست محاكي. إنها [[w:ar:باش (يونكس)|قشرة باش]] حقيقية، وهي جزء من لينكس مثبت موجود على [[w:ar:دوكر (برمجية)|حاوية دوكر]]، لذا يمكنك استخدام أي أمر من أوامر الباش، ويمكنك استخدام أي أوامر متاحة على لينكس المثبتة.

لرؤية بعض الأوامر المتاحة، استخدم &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== تسجيل الدخول إلى الويكي ==
هذا سيثبت حسابك على الخادم وسيسمح لك بتسجيل الدخول من سطر الأوامر.
ينبغي أن يؤكد الأمر التالي على أنك قد سجلت الدخول إلى testwiki. إنه يستخدم أوث (OAuth)، لذا أنت لست بحاجة لإدخال كلمة مرور.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

يمكنك توصيل باي ويكي بوت بويكي مختلفة عن طريق إنشاء ملف باسم ''user-config.py'' في [[w:ar:الدليل الرئيسي|دليل &lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt;]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) وإضافة متغيري ''mylang'' و''family'':

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== إنشاء صفحة ==

لإنشاء صفحة، قم بإدخال الأمر التالي في الطرفية، وضع اسم المستخدم الخاص بك بدلاً من '&lt;username&gt;'، ثم اضغط 'Y' عند الطلب للموافقة على تغييراتك:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

لقدت عدلت الويكي. اعرض تغييراتك عن طريق فتح &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; في متصفحك.

يمكنك القراءة أكثر حول كل نص سطر أوامر باستخدام خيار أمر '-help'.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== جلب صفحة ==

جلب صفحات كثيرة يتحقق باستخدام أمر &quot;listpages&quot;.

للحصول على محتويات الصفحة التي أنشئتها في القسم السابق، قم بإدخال الأمر التالي:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

الآن إن ذهب إلى [$url قائمة ملفات PAWS]، ينبغي أن تكون الصفحة المحفوظة متواجدة.

== مثال نص برمجي حقيقي ==
عندما يتغير مسار موقع مستخدم على ويكيبيديا، فإن الوصلات على ويكيبيديا تصبح قديمة، ومن الممكن أيضًا أن تصبح [[w:ar:ويكيبيديا:وصلات خارجية مكسورة|وصلات مكسورة]] إن كان الموقع لا يتحول من المسارات القديمة إلى الجديدة.
على سبيل المثال، الموسوعة البريطانية قد غيرت وصلاتها، كنقل الصفحات من &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; إلى &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[اسم الموضوع]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
يمكنك إيجاد قائمة استخدامات المسار القديم على ويكيبيديا الإنجليزية من https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media .
تحديث كل تلك الوصلات يدويًا سيستغرق وقتًا طويلاً.
لحسن الحظ أن الموسوعة البريطانية قد أبقت على التحويلات من وصلاتها القديمة إلى الوصلات الجديدة، ولذا هذا ليس بحاجة للإصلاح مباشرةً.

مثال أبسط، ويكيبيديا الإنجليزية تحتوي وصلات إلى &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; بدلاً من &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;؛ أي أن نطاق &quot;www.&quot; الفرعي مفقود في المسار.

يوجد حاليًا 14 حالة على ويكيبيديا الإنجليزية: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

ويكيبيديا باللغات الأخرى لديها أيضًا نفس هذه المشكلة. مثلاً توجد حالة واحدة على ويكيبيديا الألمانية: https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
لإصلاح تلك الوصلات، يمكنك استخدام النص البرمجي في باي ويكي بوت [[Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py]]. في هذه الاستعراض سنستخدم وسيط '-simulate' لتفادي الكتابة على الويكي، لأنه توجد قوانين صارمة بشأن [[w:ar:وب:بوت|التعديل التلقائي]] على ويكيبيديا الإنجليزية.
&lt;/div&gt;

أولاً لنقم بإدراج جميع الصفحات التي تصل إلى &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

الآن نفحص إذا ما كانت تلك الصفحات تحتوي المسار في الصفحة؛ أي أنها لا تستخدم قالبًا.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

الآن قم باستخدام التبديل لإضافة &quot;www.&quot; المفقودة.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

في PAWS، وأي طرفية تدعم اللون وفرق التغييرات ستُظهر &quot;www.&quot; المضافة بلون أخضر، مسهلاً البحث في التغييرات المقترحة.

== بداخل باي ويكي بوت ==

{{Warning|1=لا تكتب أي كلمات مرور في ملف الخادم، الملفات علنية!}}

الخطوة التالية هي أن نستخدم جلسة بايثون PAWS.

# اذهب إلى [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home صفحة PAWS الرئيسية]
# اضغط «New&quot;/» على الجانب الأيمن
# اختر «Python 3».

سيفتح هذا نافذة جديدة.

في الصندوق النصي، قم بكتابة الآتي ثم في قائمة Cell اختر &quot;Run&quot; (أو اضغط Shift+Enter للتشغيل).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

صندوق نصي جديد سيظهر في الأسفل. قم بتشغيل الآتي لإنشاء كائن APISite متصل بموقع https://test.wikipedia.org/:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

قم بوصف &quot;site&quot; عن طريق كتابتها في الصندوق النصي الجديد ثم اختيار &quot;Run&quot;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

ينبغي أن تُظهر

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

أنشئ كائن صفحة:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

افحص إن كانت موجود بتشغيل:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

ينبغي أن يظهر

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

قم بإظهار النص على الصفحة:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

قم بتغيير نص الصفحة في الكائن:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

احفظ الصفحة على الويكي:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

ينبغي أن يكون الرد:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

مفكرة بايثون 3 التفاعلية تسمح بتشغيل سطور كثيرة معًا. النص أعلاه يمكنه وضعه في صندوق نصي واحد ثم تشغيله

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

سجل جلسة بايثون التفاعلية يمكن حفظ أو تحميله ليكون مرجعًا مستقبليًا.

== الوصول إلى توثيق عبر الإنترنت في PAWS ==

يمكن إيجاد توثيق باي ويكي بوت في https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/. ومصدره من [[w:docstring|سلاسل التوثيق]]، والتي يمكن تحميلها في مفكرة بايثون 3 التفاعلية باستخدام دالة مدمجة في بايثون [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].

على سبيل المثال، للبحث عن وسائط دوال الحفظ أعلاه، قم بتشغيل إما:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

أو

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== تعديل نصوص باي ويكي البرمجية ==

مكتبة باي ويكي بوت والنصوص البرمجية محملة في /srv/paws، وللقراءة فقط. مكتبة باي ويكي بوت المثبتة لا يمكن تعديلها في PAWS.

يمكن تعديل النصوص البرمجية بعد نسخها إلى صفحة PAWS الرئيسية الخاصة بك.

على سبيل المثال، لتشغيل &quot;checkimages.py&quot; معدل:

# في الطرفية، قم بإدخال &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
# في المتصفح، اذهب إلى [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ صفحة PAWS الرئيسية] ثم اضغط على الملف &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
# في المتصفح، يمكنك تعديل الملف. قم بتعديل النص البرمجي -- على سبيل المثال، بعد نص &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; مباشرةً في سطر 1775، قم بإضافة سطر جديد 1776 يقوم بطباعة اسمك: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;
# في واجهة التعديل، استخدم قائمة File ثم اضغط Save لحفظ تعديلاتك.
# في الطرفية، قم بإدخال &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate&lt;/code&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== انظر أيضا ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb دليل PAWS] لمستخدم واحد (مثلاً حول API والوصول لقاعدة البيانات)
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>mgkruwew4k9z59kh4umza94p6ec7re9</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402210</id>
      <parentid>5402192</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:55:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20638" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''انظر [[Wikitech:PAWS]] لمزيد من التفاصيل.''
هذا المستند يوفر نظرة عامة تفاعلية سريعة على '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|باي ويكي بوت}}''' باستخدام ''مفكرة'' مُستضافة على بيئة معامل ويكيميديا باستخدام [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: قشرة ويب''')]].

{{note|1=لاحظ أن طرفية PAWS تدعم النسخ واللصق [[w:ar:كروميوم (متصفح ويب)|المتصفحات المبنية على كروميوم]] فقط (جوجل كروم وأوبرا وسفاري مايكروسوفت إيدج الجديد بالغرض.) إن كنت تستخدم متصفحًا مختلفًا، يمكنك تجربة قائمة السياق فقط (انقر بالزر الأيمن) أو ستكون بحاجة إلى كتابة الأوامر يدويًا المذكورة في هذا الشرح التفصيلي. يمكنك أيضًا إنشاء ملف باش يحتوي على الأمر ويستدعي الطرفي باستخدام &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.}}

{{Warning|1=كل المفكرات والطرفيات في PAWS عُرضةً للإنهاء دون ملاحظة. أنت مدعو لتشغيل مهمتك في أماكن أخرى (مثل [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|تولفورج]]) إن كانت مهمتك ستستمر لأكثر من ساعات.}}

== إنشاء حساب على ويكيميديا ==

لاتباع هذا الشرح التفصيلي، أنت فقط بحاجة إلى حساب على ويكيبيديا (ويكيميديا). استخدم [[Special:CreateAccount|خاص:أنشئ حسابًا]].

بمجرد أنك قد أنشأت حسابًا، من فضلك قم بزيارة https://test.wikipedia.org/ وتفحص إن كان اسم المستخدم الخاص بك يظهر أعلى الركن الأيمن &lt;small&gt;(هذا يعمل حول [[phabricator:T120327|T120327]])&lt;/small&gt;.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

== سجل دخولك إلى مفكرة ==

لبدء مفكرة مُستضافة، اذهب إلى https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub

اضغط على &quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot;، ثم اضغط على &quot;Allow&quot; عند طلب موافقة &quot;Use OAuth for Authentication&quot;.
المرة الأولى عند دخولك إلى PAWS، ستحتاج إلى إنشاء خادم.
اضغط على زر &quot;Start my Server&quot; الأخضر.
من الطبيعي الانتظار بضع دقائق حتى يبدأ الخادم الجديد.

بمجرد انتهائه، ستُحوَّل إلى مسار مثل &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/tree&lt;/nowiki&gt;

== بدء طرفية ==

لبدء طرفية تفاعلية جديدة،
# اذهب إلى [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ الصفحة الرئيسية]
# اضغط على «New» على الجانب الأيمن
# اختر «Terminal».
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
هذا سيفتح نافذة جديدة بمسار &lt;nowiki&gt;https://paws.wmflabs.org/paws/user/&lt;username&gt;/terminals/1&lt;/nowiki&gt; برمز لينكس '$'.
&lt;/div&gt;

هذه الطرفية ليست محاكي. إنها [[w:ar:باش (يونكس)|قشرة باش]] حقيقية، وهي جزء من لينكس مثبت موجود على [[w:ar:دوكر (برمجية)|حاوية دوكر]]، لذا يمكنك استخدام أي أمر من أوامر الباش، ويمكنك استخدام أي أوامر متاحة على لينكس المثبتة.

لرؤية بعض الأوامر المتاحة، استخدم &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== تسجيل الدخول إلى الويكي ==
هذا سيثبت حسابك على الخادم وسيسمح لك بتسجيل الدخول من سطر الأوامر.
ينبغي أن يؤكد الأمر التالي على أنك قد سجلت الدخول إلى testwiki. إنه يستخدم أوث (OAuth)، لذا أنت لست بحاجة لإدخال كلمة مرور.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

يمكنك توصيل باي ويكي بوت بويكي مختلفة عن طريق إنشاء ملف باسم ''user-config.py'' في [[w:ar:الدليل الرئيسي|دليل &lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt;]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) وإضافة متغيري ''mylang'' و''family'':

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== إنشاء صفحة ==

لإنشاء صفحة، قم بإدخال الأمر التالي في الطرفية، وضع اسم المستخدم الخاص بك بدلاً من '&lt;username&gt;'، ثم اضغط 'Y' عند الطلب للموافقة على تغييراتك:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

لقدت عدلت الويكي. اعرض تغييراتك عن طريق فتح &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; في متصفحك.

يمكنك القراءة أكثر حول كل نص سطر أوامر باستخدام خيار أمر '-help'.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== جلب صفحة ==

جلب صفحات كثيرة يتحقق باستخدام أمر &quot;listpages&quot;.

للحصول على محتويات الصفحة التي أنشئتها في القسم السابق، قم بإدخال الأمر التالي:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

الآن إن ذهب إلى [$url قائمة ملفات PAWS]، ينبغي أن تكون الصفحة المحفوظة متواجدة.

== مثال نص برمجي حقيقي ==
عندما يتغير مسار موقع مستخدم على ويكيبيديا، فإن الوصلات على ويكيبيديا تصبح قديمة، ومن الممكن أيضًا أن تصبح [[w:ar:ويكيبيديا:وصلات خارجية مكسورة|وصلات مكسورة]] إن كان الموقع لا يتحول من المسارات القديمة إلى الجديدة.
على سبيل المثال، الموسوعة البريطانية قد غيرت وصلاتها، كنقل الصفحات من &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; إلى &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[اسم الموضوع]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
يمكنك إيجاد قائمة استخدامات المسار القديم على ويكيبيديا الإنجليزية من https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media .
تحديث كل تلك الوصلات يدويًا سيستغرق وقتًا طويلاً.
لحسن الحظ أن الموسوعة البريطانية قد أبقت على التحويلات من وصلاتها القديمة إلى الوصلات الجديدة، ولذا هذا ليس بحاجة للإصلاح مباشرةً.

مثال أبسط، ويكيبيديا الإنجليزية تحتوي وصلات إلى &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; بدلاً من &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;؛ أي أن نطاق &quot;www.&quot; الفرعي مفقود في المسار.

يوجد حاليًا 14 حالة على ويكيبيديا الإنجليزية: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

ويكيبيديا باللغات الأخرى لديها أيضًا نفس هذه المشكلة. مثلاً توجد حالة واحدة على ويكيبيديا الألمانية: https://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/

لإصلاح تلك الوصلات، يمكنك استخدام النص البرمجي في باي ويكي بوت {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}}. في هذه الاستعراض سنستخدم وسيط '-simulate' لتفادي الكتابة على الويكي، لأنه توجد قوانين صارمة بشأن [[w:ar:وب:بوت|التعديل التلقائي]] على ويكيبيديا الإنجليزية.

أولاً لنقم بإدراج جميع الصفحات التي تصل إلى &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

الآن نفحص إذا ما كانت تلك الصفحات تحتوي المسار في الصفحة؛ أي أنها لا تستخدم قالبًا.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

الآن قم باستخدام التبديل لإضافة &quot;www.&quot; المفقودة.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

في PAWS، وأي طرفية تدعم اللون وفرق التغييرات ستُظهر &quot;www.&quot; المضافة بلون أخضر، مسهلاً البحث في التغييرات المقترحة.

== بداخل باي ويكي بوت ==

{{Warning|1=لا تكتب أي كلمات مرور في ملف الخادم، الملفات علنية!}}

الخطوة التالية هي أن نستخدم جلسة بايثون PAWS.

# اذهب إلى [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home صفحة PAWS الرئيسية]
# اضغط «New&quot;/» على الجانب الأيمن
# اختر «Python 3».

سيفتح هذا نافذة جديدة.

في الصندوق النصي، قم بكتابة الآتي ثم في قائمة Cell اختر &quot;Run&quot; (أو اضغط Shift+Enter للتشغيل).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

صندوق نصي جديد سيظهر في الأسفل. قم بتشغيل الآتي لإنشاء كائن APISite متصل بموقع https://test.wikipedia.org/:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

قم بوصف &quot;site&quot; عن طريق كتابتها في الصندوق النصي الجديد ثم اختيار &quot;Run&quot;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

ينبغي أن تُظهر

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

أنشئ كائن صفحة:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

افحص إن كانت موجود بتشغيل:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

ينبغي أن يظهر

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

قم بإظهار النص على الصفحة:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

قم بتغيير نص الصفحة في الكائن:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

احفظ الصفحة على الويكي:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

ينبغي أن يكون الرد:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

مفكرة بايثون 3 التفاعلية تسمح بتشغيل سطور كثيرة معًا. النص أعلاه يمكنه وضعه في صندوق نصي واحد ثم تشغيله

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

سجل جلسة بايثون التفاعلية يمكن حفظ أو تحميله ليكون مرجعًا مستقبليًا.

== الوصول إلى توثيق عبر الإنترنت في PAWS ==

يمكن إيجاد توثيق باي ويكي بوت في https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/. ومصدره من [[w:docstring|سلاسل التوثيق]]، والتي يمكن تحميلها في مفكرة بايثون 3 التفاعلية باستخدام دالة مدمجة في بايثون [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].

على سبيل المثال، للبحث عن وسائط دوال الحفظ أعلاه، قم بتشغيل إما:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

أو

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== تعديل نصوص باي ويكي البرمجية ==

مكتبة باي ويكي بوت والنصوص البرمجية محملة في /srv/paws، وللقراءة فقط. مكتبة باي ويكي بوت المثبتة لا يمكن تعديلها في PAWS.

يمكن تعديل النصوص البرمجية بعد نسخها إلى صفحة PAWS الرئيسية الخاصة بك.

على سبيل المثال، لتشغيل &quot;checkimages.py&quot; معدل:

# في الطرفية، قم بإدخال &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
# في المتصفح، اذهب إلى [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ صفحة PAWS الرئيسية] ثم اضغط على الملف &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
# في المتصفح، يمكنك تعديل الملف. قم بتعديل النص البرمجي -- على سبيل المثال، بعد نص &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; مباشرةً في سطر 1775، قم بإضافة سطر جديد 1776 يقوم بطباعة اسمك: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;
# في واجهة التعديل، استخدم قائمة File ثم اضغط Save لحفظ تعديلاتك.
# في الطرفية، قم بإدخال &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate&lt;/code&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== انظر أيضا ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb دليل PAWS] لمستخدم واحد (مثلاً حول API والوصول لقاعدة البيانات)
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>dbxyjbq4bnientjemtnkhj9j46wkjgx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/32/ar</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>981969</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402209</id>
      <parentid>3392279</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:55:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="387" xml:space="preserve">لإصلاح تلك الوصلات، يمكنك استخدام النص البرمجي في باي ويكي بوت $1. في هذه الاستعراض سنستخدم وسيط '-simulate' لتفادي الكتابة على الويكي، لأنه توجد قوانين صارمة بشأن [[w:ar:وب:بوت|التعديل التلقائي]] على ويكيبيديا الإنجليزية.</text>
      <sha1>s0jimhtqyhhsjsl923kdjx7vfljbsmp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/ml</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>995897</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402298</id>
      <parentid>3441513</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:07:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="75" xml:space="preserve">കൂടുതൽ വിവരങ്ങൾക്ക് $1 കാണുക.</text>
      <sha1>0q3aajytbu1dwd6nija95h4bxhbeqpr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/bn</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>997519</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402234</id>
      <parentid>5400727</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14023" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=হালনাগাদকৃত তথ্য মেটাতে উপলভ্য: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|নিচে দেখুন]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|নিচে দেখুন]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* ভাষাসমূহ
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Date format and time offset ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== আরও দেখুন ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>jroclu78i9exvs7gcj3erdlp5j30vfr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1000370</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403360</id>
      <parentid>5292262</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:58:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;=== Diskussionsseiten deaktivieren ===&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4815" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{SettingSummary
|name=NamespaceProtection
|version_min=1.10.0
|rev_introduced=19110
|section=Access
|range=(Array von Arrays)
|default=&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; inline&gt;$wgNamespaceProtection = [];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; (1.14+)&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; inline&gt;$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_MEDIAWIKI] = array( 'editinterface' );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; (1.10 - 1.13)
|summary=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Which namespaces can be edited by whom?&lt;/span&gt;
}}
== Details ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting allows a wiki to require special permissions to edit some namespaces.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, the only restriction is that the MediaWiki namespace can only be edited by users with the &lt;code&gt;'{{ll|Manual:User rights|editinterface}}'&lt;/code&gt; permission (by default: sysops).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The keys of the array are namespace numbers, and the values are simple arrays of permission names.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you list more than one permission for a given namespace, a user must have all of them to edit pages in that namespace.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since 1.14, the MediaWiki: namespace is unconditionally protected to users with &lt;code&gt;'editinterface'&lt;/code&gt; right (same as in previous versions).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is set in {{ll|Manual:Setup.php|Setup.php}} and cannot be modified in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} since otherwise it's too easy to set it incorrectly and leave the wiki insecure.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to allow other groups than sysops to edit the MediaWiki: namespace, then [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights|grant the &lt;code&gt;'editinterface'&lt;/code&gt; right]] to those groups.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's not possible to restrict read access to a certain namespace with &lt;code&gt;$wgNamespaceProtection&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
(Siehe {{ll|Extension:Lockdown}})

== Beispiel ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Restricting editing of the main namespace ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_MAIN] = ['edit-main'];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This restricts editing in the main namespace to people in a group that has the edit-main permission.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Setting up custom namespaces with restricted write access ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define(&quot;NS_OFFICIAL&quot;, 100);
define(&quot;NS_OFFICIAL_TALK&quot;, 101);

$wgExtraNamespaces = [
    NS_OFFICIAL =&gt; &quot;Official&quot;,
    NS_OFFICIAL_TALK =&gt; &quot;Official_talk&quot;
];

$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_OFFICIAL]      = ['official-edit'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_OFFICIAL_TALK] = ['official-talk-edit'];

$wgGroupPermissions['managers']['official-edit'] = true; // only managers can edit pages in the Official namespace
$wgGroupPermissions['employees']['official-talk-edit'] = true; // employees can edit pages in the Official_talk namespace
$wgGroupPermissions['managers']['official-talk-edit'] = true; // so can managers
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Diskussionsseiten deaktivieren ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since &quot;&lt;code&gt;everyone&lt;/code&gt;&quot; is not a core permission, literally everyone gets denied access (including sysops).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you'll still need to remove the tab through other methods (see: {{ll|Manual:FAQ#How do I add/remove tabs throughout my wiki?|Manual:FAQ#How do I add/remove tabs throughout my wiki?}})&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disable all core TALK namespaces
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_TALK] = ['everyone'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_USER_TALK] = ['everyone'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_PROJECT_TALK] = ['everyone'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_FILE_TALK] = ['everyone'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_MEDIAWIKI_TALK] = ['everyone'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_TEMPLATE_TALK] = ['everyone'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_HELP_TALK] = ['everyone'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_CATEGORY_TALK] = ['everyone'];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Category:Page specific user rights extensions}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more extensions to control page access in some way&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:Lockdown}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;set any permission for any group per namespace&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:NSFileRepo}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;set permissions for images and files per namespace (custom local file repository namespace protection — based on {{ll|Extension:Lockdown}})&lt;/span&gt;</text>
      <sha1>ii5p0eqe2ks1q6jpeqz9diw07ygdprv</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403362</id>
      <parentid>5403360</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:58:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Welche Namensräume können von wem bearbeitet werden?&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4774" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{SettingSummary
|name=NamespaceProtection
|version_min=1.10.0
|rev_introduced=19110
|section=Access
|range=(Array von Arrays)
|default=&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; inline&gt;$wgNamespaceProtection = [];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; (1.14+)&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot; inline&gt;$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_MEDIAWIKI] = array( 'editinterface' );&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; (1.10 - 1.13)
|summary=Welche Namensräume können von wem bearbeitet werden?
}}
== Details ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting allows a wiki to require special permissions to edit some namespaces.&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, the only restriction is that the MediaWiki namespace can only be edited by users with the &lt;code&gt;'{{ll|Manual:User rights|editinterface}}'&lt;/code&gt; permission (by default: sysops).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The keys of the array are namespace numbers, and the values are simple arrays of permission names.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you list more than one permission for a given namespace, a user must have all of them to edit pages in that namespace.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since 1.14, the MediaWiki: namespace is unconditionally protected to users with &lt;code&gt;'editinterface'&lt;/code&gt; right (same as in previous versions).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is set in {{ll|Manual:Setup.php|Setup.php}} and cannot be modified in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} since otherwise it's too easy to set it incorrectly and leave the wiki insecure.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to allow other groups than sysops to edit the MediaWiki: namespace, then [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights|grant the &lt;code&gt;'editinterface'&lt;/code&gt; right]] to those groups.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's not possible to restrict read access to a certain namespace with &lt;code&gt;$wgNamespaceProtection&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
(Siehe {{ll|Extension:Lockdown}})

== Beispiel ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Restricting editing of the main namespace ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_MAIN] = ['edit-main'];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This restricts editing in the main namespace to people in a group that has the edit-main permission.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Setting up custom namespaces with restricted write access ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define(&quot;NS_OFFICIAL&quot;, 100);
define(&quot;NS_OFFICIAL_TALK&quot;, 101);

$wgExtraNamespaces = [
    NS_OFFICIAL =&gt; &quot;Official&quot;,
    NS_OFFICIAL_TALK =&gt; &quot;Official_talk&quot;
];

$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_OFFICIAL]      = ['official-edit'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_OFFICIAL_TALK] = ['official-talk-edit'];

$wgGroupPermissions['managers']['official-edit'] = true; // only managers can edit pages in the Official namespace
$wgGroupPermissions['employees']['official-talk-edit'] = true; // employees can edit pages in the Official_talk namespace
$wgGroupPermissions['managers']['official-talk-edit'] = true; // so can managers
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Diskussionsseiten deaktivieren ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since &quot;&lt;code&gt;everyone&lt;/code&gt;&quot; is not a core permission, literally everyone gets denied access (including sysops).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you'll still need to remove the tab through other methods (see: {{ll|Manual:FAQ#How do I add/remove tabs throughout my wiki?|Manual:FAQ#How do I add/remove tabs throughout my wiki?}})&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
# Disable all core TALK namespaces
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_TALK] = ['everyone'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_USER_TALK] = ['everyone'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_PROJECT_TALK] = ['everyone'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_FILE_TALK] = ['everyone'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_MEDIAWIKI_TALK] = ['everyone'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_TEMPLATE_TALK] = ['everyone'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_HELP_TALK] = ['everyone'];
$wgNamespaceProtection[NS_CATEGORY_TALK] = ['everyone'];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Category:Page specific user rights extensions}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more extensions to control page access in some way&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:Lockdown}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;set any permission for any group per namespace&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:NSFileRepo}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;set permissions for images and files per namespace (custom local file repository namespace protection — based on {{ll|Extension:Lockdown}})&lt;/span&gt;</text>
      <sha1>0ylu14adkoof3e923uccdm24zpru43b</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/mnw</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1004394</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402255</id>
      <parentid>5400748</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14080" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|ကျေဝ်ရံၚ်သၟဝ်တေံညိ]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|ရံၚ်သၟဝ်တေံညိ]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== သ္ၚိလွပ် ဂၠး ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* ဘာသာဂမၠိုၚ်
* ဗီုလဵုဗှ်ေဒးဂၞပ် တၞဟ်နသ္ဂောံထၟံက်ထ္ၜး?
* ပဵုတုဲ ဆိၚ်ၜတ်အရေဝ်ဘာသာဂမၠိုၚ်

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* စၟတ်တဲဇကု မၞုံတုဲတုဲ
* စၟတ်တဲတၟိ
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ပရေၚ်သ္ပဒတန် နကဵုအဳမေ&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Date format and time offset ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>lc00xgx5fiw06bqcyk7afz0cw6xwgsr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Gamepress/en</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1005522</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401823</id>
      <parentid>5208774</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:56:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2620" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name         = Gamepress
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description  = Easy-to-use gaming-oriented skin
|image        = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 1.0.7
|update       = 
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          = 5.3+
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme       = 
|changelog    = 
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla     = 
|phabricator  = Gamepress
}}
'''Gamepress''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.

The WordPress theme was written by Aleksandra Łączek and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 16 January 2014 for {{ll|ShoutWiki}}.

==Main features==

* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
* Three (or four, depending on how you look at it &amp;mdash; the red one is the default/base theme) [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|themes]]:
** blue
** green
** orange
* ''No'' logo image
* There are three &quot;columns&quot; above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) &amp;mdash; the contents of these are editable via &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered. If all three messages are empty, as they are by default, then the prefooter area won't be shown. If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended

== Installation ==
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>i26ar5g6ga0qqoghcigy46pwc6bt2jn</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401851</id>
      <parentid>5401823</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:04:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2677" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Gamepress
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description     = Easy-to-use gaming-oriented skin
|image           = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.0.7
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = Gamepress
}}
'''Gamepress''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.

The WordPress theme was written by Aleksandra Łączek and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 16 January 2014 for {{ll|ShoutWiki}}.

==Main features==

* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
* Three (or four, depending on how you look at it &amp;mdash; the red one is the default/base theme) [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|themes]]:
** blue
** green
** orange
* ''No'' logo image
* There are three &quot;columns&quot; above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) &amp;mdash; the contents of these are editable via &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered. If all three messages are empty, as they are by default, then the prefooter area won't be shown. If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended

== Installation ==
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>gkj9bei759pexdl72cb89lx5xpk8ve5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:DuskToDawn/en</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1005534</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401840</id>
      <parentid>5214310</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:00:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2017" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = DuskToDawn
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* Automattic — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] — MediaWiki port
|description     = A dark skin that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography
|image           = DuskToDawn.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.3.2
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=dusktodawn Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = DuskToDawn
}}
'''DuskToDawn''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name. It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;a dark theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&quot;.

The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by {{u|Jack Phoenix}} on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].

Dusk to Dawn is, according to various different WordPress sources, the successor to the [[Skin:Dusk|Dusk]] skin.

Its content area is even narrower than Dusk's, which means that various MediaWiki pages &amp;mdash; such as [[Special:Version]], etc. &amp;mdash; render outright poorly.

==Main features==

* &quot;Page last edited (by Foo)&quot; line below the page title, akin to that on ShoutWiki's default skin, Aurora
* No logo
* Narrow content area (see the intro section of this page), which makes this suitable for blog-like sites

== Installation ==
{{SkinInstall|DuskToDawn|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>3fkhate6eus05uojwdpusfsr19puw5i</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:DuskToDawn/lt</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1005661</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401843</id>
      <parentid>5214315</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:00:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2519" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = DuskToDawn
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* Automattic — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] — MediaWiki port
|description     = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dark skin that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&lt;/span&gt;
|image           = DuskToDawn.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.3.2
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=dusktodawn Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = DuskToDawn
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''DuskToDawn''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name. It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;a dark theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by {{u|Jack Phoenix}} on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Dusk to Dawn is, according to various different WordPress sources, the successor to the [[Skin:Dusk|Dusk]] skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Its content area is even narrower than Dusk's, which means that various MediaWiki pages &amp;mdash; such as [[Special:Version]], etc. &amp;mdash; render outright poorly.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &quot;Page last edited (by Foo)&quot; line below the page title, akin to that on ShoutWiki's default skin, Aurora
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* No logo
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Narrow content area (see the intro section of this page), which makes this suitable for blog-like sites
&lt;/div&gt;

== Įdiegimas ==
{{SkinInstall|DuskToDawn|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>sb9r7j9twz77z4azi81zzxr17pyrd6i</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:DuskToDawn/fr</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1012478</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401841</id>
      <parentid>5214314</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:00:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2521" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = DuskToDawn
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* Automattic — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] — MediaWiki port
|description     = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dark skin that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&lt;/span&gt;
|image           = DuskToDawn.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.3.2
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=dusktodawn Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = DuskToDawn
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''DuskToDawn''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name. It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;a dark theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by {{u|Jack Phoenix}} on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Dusk to Dawn is, according to various different WordPress sources, the successor to the [[Skin:Dusk|Dusk]] skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Its content area is even narrower than Dusk's, which means that various MediaWiki pages &amp;mdash; such as [[Special:Version]], etc. &amp;mdash; render outright poorly.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &quot;Page last edited (by Foo)&quot; line below the page title, akin to that on ShoutWiki's default skin, Aurora
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* No logo
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Narrow content area (see the intro section of this page), which makes this suitable for blog-like sites
&lt;/div&gt;

== Installation ==
{{SkinInstall|DuskToDawn|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>kc5nfzfpm0ly30c0n4hzqv7idgt5abd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Gamepress/fr</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1012480</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401822</id>
      <parentid>5208773</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:56:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3235" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name         = Gamepress
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description  = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Easy-to-use gaming-oriented skin&lt;/span&gt;
|image        = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 1.0.7
|update       = 
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          = 5.3+
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme       = 
|changelog    = 
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla     = 
|phabricator  = Gamepress
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Gamepress''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Aleksandra Łączek and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 16 January 2014 for {{ll|ShoutWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Three (or four, depending on how you look at it &amp;mdash; the red one is the default/base theme) [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|themes]]:
&lt;/div&gt;
** bleu
** vert
** orange
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* ''No'' logo image
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* There are three &quot;columns&quot; above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) &amp;mdash; the contents of these are editable via &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If all three messages are empty, as they are by default, then the prefooter area won't be shown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Installation ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>fyg9zfkbxlnh1fyfw755apj73wwb3q6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401852</id>
      <parentid>5401822</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:04:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3292" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Gamepress
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description     = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Easy-to-use gaming-oriented skin&lt;/span&gt;
|image           = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.0.7
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = Gamepress
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Gamepress''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Aleksandra Łączek and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 16 January 2014 for {{ll|ShoutWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Three (or four, depending on how you look at it &amp;mdash; the red one is the default/base theme) [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|themes]]:
&lt;/div&gt;
** bleu
** vert
** orange
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* ''No'' logo image
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* There are three &quot;columns&quot; above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) &amp;mdash; the contents of these are editable via &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If all three messages are empty, as they are by default, then the prefooter area won't be shown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Installation ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>8vxuvoc7ebv490hzzrzr8yayhsg1nvw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:DuskToDawn/ja</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1014720</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401842</id>
      <parentid>5214313</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:00:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2457" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = DuskToDawn
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* Automattic — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] — MediaWiki port
|description     = 古風な有機的装飾とモダンなデザイン、タイポグラフィを融合させたダーク外装
|image           = DuskToDawn.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.3.2
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=dusktodawn Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = DuskToDawn
}}
'''DuskToDawn'''は、同名のフリー＆オープンソース、GPLライセンスのWordPressテーマを移植したMediaWiki外装です。WordPressのテーマサイトでは、「古いスタイルの有機的な装飾をモダンなデザインとタイポグラフィに融合させたダークテーマ&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt;」と説明されています。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by {{u|Jack Phoenix}} on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].
&lt;/div&gt;

Dusk to Dawn は、さまざまな異なる WordPress のソースによると、[[Skin:Dusk|Dusk]] の後継外装であるとのことです。

そのコンテンツエリアはDuskよりもさらに狭く、[[Special:Version]]などのさまざまなMediaWikiページのレンダリングがまったくうまくいかないことを意味します。

==主な機能==

* ShoutWiki の既定の外装である Aurora のように、ページ名の下に「Page last edited (by Foo)」という行を表示します。
* ロゴなし
* Narrow content area (see the intro section of this page), which makes this suitable for blog-like sites* コンテンツエリアが狭いので（本ページのイントロダクション参照）、ブログ的なサイトに向いている

== インストール ==
{{SkinInstall|DuskToDawn|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>9akv3dqo8wqew4sfylugi5zjecd71mv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Gamepress/ja</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1014723</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401824</id>
      <parentid>5208775</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:56:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2934" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name         = Gamepress
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description  = 使いやすいゲーミング指向の外装
|image        = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 1.0.7
|update       = 
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          = 5.3+
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme       = 
|changelog    = 
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla     = 
|phabricator  = Gamepress
}}
'''Gamepress'' は、フリーでオープンソースのGPLライセンスの同名のWordPressテーマを移植したMediaWiki外装です。

WordPressのテーマはAleksandra Łączekによって書かれ、MediaWikiの移植は2014年1月16日に{{ll|ShoutWiki}}によって行われました。

==主な機能==

* '''2つの'''ナビゲーション&quot;ポートレット&quot; &amp;mdash; カスタム、ドロップダウン・ベースのメニュー（ページの上部に&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;）、および右側のサイドバーとして&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;を提供します。
* 3つの[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|テーマ]]（見方によっては4つ、赤いのがデフォルト/ベーステーマ）。
** ブルー
** グリーン
** オレンジ
* ロゴ画像はありません
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* There are three &quot;columns&quot; above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) &amp;mdash; the contents of these are editable via &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered.
&lt;/div&gt; 既定でそうなっているように、3 つのメッセージすべてが空であれば、プリフッター領域は表示されません。 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended&lt;/span&gt;

== インストール ==
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>povijcjsiu8ntop9puvkwtbrosk6nol</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401854</id>
      <parentid>5401824</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:04:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2991" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Gamepress
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description     = 使いやすいゲーミング指向の外装
|image           = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.0.7
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = Gamepress
}}
'''Gamepress'' は、フリーでオープンソースのGPLライセンスの同名のWordPressテーマを移植したMediaWiki外装です。

WordPressのテーマはAleksandra Łączekによって書かれ、MediaWikiの移植は2014年1月16日に{{ll|ShoutWiki}}によって行われました。

==主な機能==

* '''2つの'''ナビゲーション&quot;ポートレット&quot; &amp;mdash; カスタム、ドロップダウン・ベースのメニュー（ページの上部に&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;）、および右側のサイドバーとして&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;を提供します。
* 3つの[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|テーマ]]（見方によっては4つ、赤いのがデフォルト/ベーステーマ）。
** ブルー
** グリーン
** オレンジ
* ロゴ画像はありません
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* There are three &quot;columns&quot; above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) &amp;mdash; the contents of these are editable via &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered.
&lt;/div&gt; 既定でそうなっているように、3 つのメッセージすべてが空であれば、プリフッター領域は表示されません。 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended&lt;/span&gt;

== インストール ==
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>qwz2c6pqzr6rj9pjcbm01rh2lutz5kk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/shn</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1018419</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402266</id>
      <parentid>5400758</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15723" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=လွၼ်ႉၶၢဝ်ႇဢၼ်ပဵၼ်ဢၢပ်ႉတိတ်ႉၼၼ်ႉ ၸၢင်ႈဢဝ်လႆႈတီႈ မႅတ်ႇတႃႇ:[[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ၼဵၵ်းပၼ်တီႈၼိူဝ်ႁဵင်းၵွင်ႉ [[Special:preferences|ငဝ်ႈၵုမ်းပိူင်]] ဢၼ်မီးတီႈ ၸဵင်ႇၼိူဝ်ၽၢႆႇၶႂႃႇၼၼ်ႉ၊ ပေႃးၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇၶဝ်ႈလွၵ်ႉဢိၼ်ႇဝႆႉၼႆ မၼ်းတေပၼ်သုၼ်ႇၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇ တႃႇလႅၵ်ႈလၢႆႈ ငဝ်ႈၵုမ်းပိူင်ၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇ။ ၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇတေထုၵ်ႇဢွၵ်ႇၼႄပၼ်တင်း ၵၼ်ပိုၼ်းတူဝ်ၽူႈၸႂ်ႉတိုဝ်း ၼင်ႇ တီႈပႅၵ်ႈၼိူဝ် တွၼ်ႈတႃႇ လႅၵ်ႈလၢႆႈၵၢၼ်တင်ႈတၢင်ႇၸိူဝ်း။&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-username''  ၸိုဝ်ႈၽူႈၸႂ်ႉတိုဝ်းၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇ။ ပျူႇရူဝ်ႇၶရႅတ်ႉၵူၺ်း တေၸၢင်ႈလႅၵ်ႈလၢႆႈၸိုဝ်ႈၽူႈၸႂ်ႉတိုဝ်းၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇသေ တီႈဝီႇၶီႇၼႆႉ တီႈဢေႇသုတ်းမၼ်း တေလႆႈဢူၼ်းသႂ်ႇဝႆႉယဝ်ႉ ယွႆးလင် {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} ဢၼ်။&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || တီႈ ဝီႇၶီႇ ဝီႇၶီႇမီႇတီႇယႃႇၼႆႉ ဢၼ်ပဵၼ် ႁဵင်းၵွင်ႉဢၼ်ၼႆႉ မၼ်းတေၶႂၢင်းပၼ် ၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇ တႃႇၸတ်းၵၢၼ် ဢႅပ်ႇပလီႇၵေးသျိၼ်းၽၢႆႇၼွၵ်ႇ ဢၼ်ထုၵ်ႇၶႂၢင်းပၼ် တွၼ်ႈတႃႇ ၶဝ်ႈၸႂ်ႉဢၶွင်ႉၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇၼၼ်ႉ။ &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;တွၼ်ႈတႃႇ လွၼ်ႉၶၢဝ်ႇၼမ်လိူဝ် တူၺ်းတီႈ [[Help:OAuth|လွင်ႈၸွႆႈထႅမ် OAuth]]&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|တူၺ်းၽၢႆႇတႂ်ႈ]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|တူၺ်းၽၢႆႇတႂ်ႈ]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* ၽႃႇသႃႇၵႂၢမ်း
* ၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇတေႁဵတ်းႁိုဝ် မၢႆထိုင် တွၼ်ႈတႃႇ ထုၵ်ႇမွၵ်ႇၼႄ?
* ၵၢၼ်တင်ႈ ၽႃႇသႃႇၵႂၢမ်း ၼမ်လိူဝ်

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* လၢႆးမိုဝ်းၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇ ယၢမ်းလဵဝ်
* လၢႆးမိုဝ်း ဢၼ်မႂ်ႇ
**ႁဵတ်းတင်ႇ လိၵ်ႈဝီႇၶီႇ

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* လွင်ႈၼႄႉၼွၼ်း ဢီးမေးလ်&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== ပိူင်ဝၼ်းတီႈ လႄႈ ၶၢဝ်းယၢမ်း ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
တွၼ်ႈတႃႇ လွၼ်ႉၶၢဝ်ႇၼမ်လိူဝ်ၼၼ်ႉ တူၺ်း  [[About Beta Features]] လႄ။
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== တူၺ်းပႃး ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>pcmsfod12vmewphzbqbc42uqqszap1d</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402311</id>
      <parentid>5402266</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:08:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15640" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=လွၼ်ႉၶၢဝ်ႇဢၼ်ပဵၼ်ဢၢပ်ႉတိတ်ႉၼၼ်ႉ ၸၢင်ႈဢဝ်လႆႈတီႈ မႅတ်ႇတႃႇ:[[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ၼဵၵ်းပၼ်တီႈၼိူဝ်ႁဵင်းၵွင်ႉ [[Special:preferences|ငဝ်ႈၵုမ်းပိူင်]] ဢၼ်မီးတီႈ ၸဵင်ႇၼိူဝ်ၽၢႆႇၶႂႃႇၼၼ်ႉ၊ ပေႃးၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇၶဝ်ႈလွၵ်ႉဢိၼ်ႇဝႆႉၼႆ မၼ်းတေပၼ်သုၼ်ႇၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇ တႃႇလႅၵ်ႈလၢႆႈ ငဝ်ႈၵုမ်းပိူင်ၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇ။ ၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇတေထုၵ်ႇဢွၵ်ႇၼႄပၼ်တင်း ၵၼ်ပိုၼ်းတူဝ်ၽူႈၸႂ်ႉတိုဝ်း ၼင်ႇ တီႈပႅၵ်ႈၼိူဝ် တွၼ်ႈတႃႇ လႅၵ်ႈလၢႆႈၵၢၼ်တင်ႈတၢင်ႇၸိူဝ်း။&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* ''$int-username''  ၸိုဝ်ႈၽူႈၸႂ်ႉတိုဝ်းၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇ။ ပျူႇရူဝ်ႇၶရႅတ်ႉၵူၺ်း တေၸၢင်ႈလႅၵ်ႈလၢႆႈၸိုဝ်ႈၽူႈၸႂ်ႉတိုဝ်းၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇသေ တီႈဝီႇၶီႇၼႆႉ တီႈဢေႇသုတ်းမၼ်း တေလႆႈဢူၼ်းသႂ်ႇဝႆႉယဝ်ႉ ယွႆးလင် {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} ဢၼ်။&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || တီႈ ဝီႇၶီႇ ဝီႇၶီႇမီႇတီႇယႃႇၼႆႉ ဢၼ်ပဵၼ် ႁဵင်းၵွင်ႉဢၼ်ၼႆႉ မၼ်းတေၶႂၢင်းပၼ် ၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇ တႃႇၸတ်းၵၢၼ် ဢႅပ်ႇပလီႇၵေးသျိၼ်းၽၢႆႇၼွၵ်ႇ ဢၼ်ထုၵ်ႇၶႂၢင်းပၼ် တွၼ်ႈတႃႇ ၶဝ်ႈၸႂ်ႉဢၶွင်ႉၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇၼၼ်ႉ။ တွၼ်ႈတႃႇ လွၼ်ႉၶၢဝ်ႇၼမ်လိူဝ် တူၺ်းတီႈ {{ll|Help:OAuth}}
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|တူၺ်းၽၢႆႇတႂ်ႈ]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|တူၺ်းၽၢႆႇတႂ်ႈ]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* ၽႃႇသႃႇၵႂၢမ်း
* ၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇတေႁဵတ်းႁိုဝ် မၢႆထိုင် တွၼ်ႈတႃႇ ထုၵ်ႇမွၵ်ႇၼႄ?
* ၵၢၼ်တင်ႈ ၽႃႇသႃႇၵႂၢမ်း ၼမ်လိူဝ်

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* လၢႆးမိုဝ်းၸဝ်ႈၵဝ်ႇ ယၢမ်းလဵဝ်
* လၢႆးမိုဝ်း ဢၼ်မႂ်ႇ
**ႁဵတ်းတင်ႇ လိၵ်ႈဝီႇၶီႇ

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;* လွင်ႈၼႄႉၼွၼ်း ဢီးမေးလ်&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== ပိူင်ဝၼ်းတီႈ လႄႈ ၶၢဝ်းယၢမ်း ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
တွၼ်ႈတႃႇ လွၼ်ႉၶၢဝ်ႇၼမ်လိူဝ်ၼၼ်ႉ တူၺ်း  [[About Beta Features]] လႄ။
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== တူၺ်းပႃး ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>l75t9s18jj85u29fc67gzmj3w4z7u02</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/shn</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1018452</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402310</id>
      <parentid>3523049</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:08:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="107" xml:space="preserve">တွၼ်ႈတႃႇ လွၼ်ႉၶၢဝ်ႇၼမ်လိူဝ် တူၺ်းတီႈ $1</text>
      <sha1>tslxg1fvm45hpb0d1qu4yygf6nctcft</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/nl</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1022370</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401806</id>
      <parentid>5295503</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3059" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
Hier beschrijven we welke sociale media we gebruiken voor het doorgeven van informatie aan de Wikimedia technische community en leggen we uit hoe je die kanalen kunt gebruiken.

== Overzicht ==
Sociale media is bruikbaar voor het verspreiden van nieuws en om bestaande en mogelijke nieuwe gebruikers en vrijwilligers te bereiken.
Sociale media kan ook erg dwingend en tijdrovend zijn.
Onzorgvuldig gebruik kan groepen uiteen drijven, ruzie veroorzaken tussen vrijwilligers en lastige momenten bezorgen aan de beheerders van het platform en die van het sociaal media kanaal en projecten in gevaar brengen, zeker als er ook nog toetsenbordridders of fanaten opduiken.

== Sociale media kanalen ==

Er zijn een paar accounts die frequent gebruikt worden nieuws te delen over Wikimedia Technologie en de MediaWiki Community.

=== MediaWiki ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

=== Wikimedia Technologie ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

=== Huidige beheerders ===
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

== Onze regels ==
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

Let wel, het gaat ons om WikiMedia en we proberen een neutraal geluid te laten horen.

== Gebruik van Twitter en Facebook ==

Heeft u nieuws of een aankondiging waarvan u denkt dat het geschikt is om door ons gemeld te worden op Wikimedia Technologie Twitter en/of Facebook?
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>o84tl60ykjpocw2jm3nr7fy6ouk49qm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Gamepress/pl</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1029620</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401827</id>
      <parentid>5208776</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:56:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3250" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name         = Gamepress
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description  = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Easy-to-use gaming-oriented skin&lt;/span&gt;
|image        = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 1.0.7
|update       = 
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          = 5.3+
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme       = 
|changelog    = 
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla     = 
|phabricator  = Gamepress
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Gamepress''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Aleksandra Łączek and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 16 January 2014 for {{ll|ShoutWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Three (or four, depending on how you look at it &amp;mdash; the red one is the default/base theme) [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|themes]]:
&lt;/div&gt;
** niebieski
** zielony
** pomarańczowy
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* ''No'' logo image
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* There are three &quot;columns&quot; above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) &amp;mdash; the contents of these are editable via &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If all three messages are empty, as they are by default, then the prefooter area won't be shown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Installation ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>tic6r1lpz348umio3fyiqp7is0cvb1r</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401853</id>
      <parentid>5401827</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:04:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3307" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Gamepress
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description     = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Easy-to-use gaming-oriented skin&lt;/span&gt;
|image           = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.0.7
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = Gamepress
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Gamepress''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Aleksandra Łączek and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 16 January 2014 for {{ll|ShoutWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Three (or four, depending on how you look at it &amp;mdash; the red one is the default/base theme) [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|themes]]:
&lt;/div&gt;
** niebieski
** zielony
** pomarańczowy
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* ''No'' logo image
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* There are three &quot;columns&quot; above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) &amp;mdash; the contents of these are editable via &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If all three messages are empty, as they are by default, then the prefooter area won't be shown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Installation ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>361ywurfotzozgvfc8fxhn826xxmewv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/tr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1030027</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402314</id>
      <parentid>3581906</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:09:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44" xml:space="preserve">Daha fazla bilgi için $1 sayfasına bakın.</text>
      <sha1>sr9cadp61fqfckk5g4op6ulfoiwkc5x</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/tr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1033965</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402498</id>
      <parentid>5172954</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:15:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="70" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|Translate uzantısının belgelerini inceleyin ve çevirin]]</text>
      <sha1>3ud6rl7lrdcl1xf60rsge55nj7ak2yy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Social tools/tr</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>1035805</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401982</id>
      <parentid>4618709</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1589" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Sosyal araçları}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Genel bakış}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Geliştirici bilgisi}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Ekran görüntüleri}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Geçmiş}}
|group2 = Diğer sosyal uzantılar
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = SocialProfile'a bağlı
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = İlgili diğer uzantılar&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(SocialProfile'a bağlı olmayan)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>bztricl6udi3m2mzjrfq4u9gcp32wik</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401998</id>
      <parentid>5401982</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:10:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1590" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Sosyal araçları}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Genel bakış}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Geliştirici bilgisi}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Ekran görüntüleri}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Geçmiş}}
|group2 = Diğer sosyal uzantılar
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = SocialProfile'a bağlı
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = İlgili diğer uzantılar&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(SocialProfile'a bağlı olmayan)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>6c90dwrvsd9107xlb7db5bfva63eas8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Installing MediaWiki/de-formal</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1042192</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402874</id>
      <parentid>5387493</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:41:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14058" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Die Installation von MediaWiki kann für den durchschnittlichen Computeranwender schwierig werden, der keine Erfahrung mit Apache, PHP und MySQL/MariaDB hat.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Herunterladen der MediaWiki-Software ==

Laden Sie die tar-Datei zu MediaWiki von der [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|offiziellen Download-Seite]] herunter.

Generell gilt: Wenn Sie eine Produktionsumgebung verwenden, sollten Sie die letzte stabile Version verwenden, also MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extract the MediaWiki software ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Die heruntergeladenen Dateien liegen im &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;-Format vor, sodass sie vor der Verwendung entpackt werden müssen.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to uncompress this archive file before use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Entpacken Sie die Dateien lokal oder auf Ihrem Server.&lt;/span&gt;

Unter Windows werden dafür gewöhnlich Programme wie [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (quelltextoffene Software), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] oder [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] benutzt.

Unter Linux und Mac OS X können Sie die Datei entpacken (untar), indem Sie folgenden Befehl anwenden:
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

==Dateien auf den Server hochladen==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wenn Sie die Dateien noch nicht auf Ihren Webserver hochgeladen haben, tun Sie dies jetzt.
&lt;/div&gt;

Laden Sie die Dateien in das Webverzeichnis Ihres Webservers hoch, in dem Sie entweder:

# das entpackte Verzeichnis direkt kopieren oder
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# einen FTP-Clienten wie [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (Open Source Software, Windows, OSX und Linux) oder [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (OSX) nutzen.
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;by using software already provided by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting service]], such as the ''cPanel File Manager''&lt;/span&gt;

Wenn Ihr Kopier- oder FTP-Programm eine Option zur Umwandlung des Dateinamens in Kleinbuchstaben hat (change file names to lowercase), müssen Sie diese ausschalten.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn Sie Apache installiert haben, steht das korrekte Verzeichnis in Ihrer &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;-Datei (es ist die [$docroot DocumentRoot]-Richtlinie, normalerweise &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; oder &lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;apache-folder&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Hinweis: Dies änderte sich in Ubuntu 14.04 mit Apache 2.4.7, wo die ursprüngliche Konfigurationsdatei für Apache-Server-Einstellungen und Verzeichnisse &lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt; ist.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

Benennen Sie den hochgeladenen Ordner (oder den symbolischen Link) so um, wie Sie ihn in der URL haben wollen.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn Ihr Web-Server z.&amp;nbsp;B. wie &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt; läuft, würde eine Umbenennung zu einem &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt;-Verzeichnis bedeuten, dass Sie Ihr Wiki über &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt; erreichen.&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''''Benutzen Sie nicht $wiki, wenn Sie es als einen [[$short-url|Kurzlink]] benutzen möchten.'''''&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Eine Datenbank erstellen ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki wird Sie nach der Datenbank und dem Benutzernamen fragen und versuchen, diese zu erstellen, falls sie noch nicht vorhanden sind.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Sofern Sie das root-Passwort in Ihrer Datenbank kennen, kann das Installationsprogramm von MediaWiki eine Datenbank für Sie erstellen.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wenn Sie das root-Passwort nicht kennen, z.&amp;nbsp;B. wenn Sie auf einem gemieteten Server sind, müssen Sie eine neue Datenbank erzeugen.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Derzeit müssen Sie entweder MariaDB/MySQL oder Postgres benutzen, um die aktuellen Inhalte des Wikis zu speichern.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn Sie sich nicht sicher sind, welche Datenbank Sie auswählen sollen, benutzen Sie MariaDB, da dies am besten von MediaWiki unterstützt wird.&lt;/span&gt;

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Auf der Installationsseite müssen Sie einen Datenbanknamen (welcher alles sein kann) und das SQLite-Datenbankverzeichnis angeben.&lt;/span&gt;
Wenn Ihre Datenbank nicht auf dem gleichen Server wie Ihr Webserver läuft, müssen Sie den zugehörigen Webserverhostnamen &amp;mdash; im folgenden Beispiel ''mediawiki.example.com'' &amp;mdash; wie folgt eingeben:
Wenn dieses Verzeichnis nicht sicher ist (z.&amp;nbsp;B. für das Web lesbar), dann sollten Sie es manuell ändern, damit es nicht für das gesamte Web zugänglich ist.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bitte lesen Sie die entsprechende Dokumentation.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Alternativ kann auch der Host-Provider ein Konto für Sie einrichten.&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wenn Ihre Datenbank nicht auf dem gleichen Server wie Ihr Webserver läuft, müssen Sie den zugehörigen Webserverhostnamen – im folgenden Beispiel ''mediawiki.example.com'' – wie folgt eingeben:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;MySQL/MariaDB unter UNIX/Linux protokolliert alle Abfragen, die an die Datenbank gesendet werden, in einer Datei, die auch das Passwort enthält, das für das Benutzerkonto verwendet wird.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn Sie Bedenken haben, löschen Sie Ihre &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt;-Datei, nachdem Sie diese Abfragen ausgeführt haben.&lt;/span&gt;}}

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn Sie PostgreSQL verwenden, müssen Sie entweder eine Datenbank und einen Benutzer für sich anlegen lassen oder einfach den Namen eines PostgreSQL-Benutzers mit „Superuser“-Rechten in das Konfigurationsformular eingeben.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Dieser Datenbankbenutzer wird häufig '''postgres''' genannt.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, and a database named &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; owned by the user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser (geben Sie dann das Passwort ein)
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

oder Sie geben, als Superuser (standardmäßig „postgres“), die folgenden Befehle in die Datenbank-Eingabezeile ein:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

'''Achtung:''' die [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|Liste bekannter Probleme beim Betrieb von MediaWiki mit PostgreSQL]] sollte beachtet werden.

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== Das Installationsskript ausführen ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wenn alle oben genannten Schritte abgeschlossen sind, kann die Installation über einen Webbrowser abgeschlossen werden, indem die URL der index.php im Browser aufgerufen wird – bitte die in {{ll|Manual:Config script}} beschriebenen Anweisungen beachten.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Nächste Schritte ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additional configuration&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wiki administration&lt;/span&gt;
== Auf dem Laufenden bleiben ==
Nach der Installation stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie mit den Versionen auf dem neuesten Stand bleiben und halten Sie Ihren Server sicher!
{{Clickable button 2|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$maillist|Abonnieren Sie unsere Mailingliste über Mitteilungen zu Versionsankündigungen.]]&lt;/span&gt;|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Appendices ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/span&gt;
:{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hosting services which provide automatical installation of applications such as MediaWiki may offer outdated versions or have other issues. If you encounter problems, it ''does not'' mean that you cannot install MediaWiki. It means that you should install MediaWiki manually.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== System-specific instructions  ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The pages listed on {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First consult {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>jypsuukv5xd1rvuyow8ew9okw4dwhu0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402883</id>
      <parentid>5402874</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:42:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14167" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{InstallationNav}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page covers all steps to manually install and configure MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Die Installation von MediaWiki kann für den durchschnittlichen Computeranwender schwierig werden, der keine Erfahrung mit Apache, PHP und MySQL/MariaDB hat.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below offers [[#Alternatives to manual installation|easier alternatives to manual installation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The [[#Appendices|Appendices]] section below also provides installation notes for specific system configurations.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are already running MediaWiki, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading|Upgrade guide]].&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Check the installation requirements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check that your system meets the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements|installation requirements]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Make sure to also check the {{ll|Release notes}} of the MediaWiki version that you plan to install.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Herunterladen der MediaWiki-Software ==

Laden Sie die tar-Datei zu MediaWiki von der [[Special:MyLanguage/Download|offiziellen Download-Seite]] herunter.

Generell gilt: Wenn Sie eine Produktionsumgebung verwenden, sollten Sie die letzte stabile Version verwenden, also MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Extract the MediaWiki software ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Die heruntergeladenen Dateien liegen im &lt;code&gt;.tar.gz&lt;/code&gt;-Format vor, sodass sie vor der Verwendung entpackt werden müssen.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to uncompress this archive file before use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Entpacken Sie die Dateien lokal oder auf Ihrem Server.&lt;/span&gt;

Unter Windows werden dafür gewöhnlich Programme wie [https://www.7-zip.org/ 7-Zip] (quelltextoffene Software), [http://www.winzip.com/ WinZip], [https://www.rarlab.com/ WinRAR] oder [https://www.izarc.org/ IZArc] benutzt.

Unter Linux und Mac OS X können Sie die Datei entpacken (untar), indem Sie folgenden Befehl anwenden:
&lt;code&gt;tar -xf mediawiki-*.tar.'''gz'''&lt;/code&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you uncompress the archive file while being the root/admin user, you may want to change file ownership afterwards, depending on your setup.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Linux systems, the command would be using [[w:chown|chown]] as the following:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;chown -R &amp;lt;new_owner_user&gt; &amp;lt;mediawiki_folder&gt;&lt;/code&gt;}}

==Dateien auf den Server hochladen==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wenn Sie die Dateien noch nicht auf Ihren Webserver hochgeladen haben, tun Sie dies jetzt.
&lt;/div&gt;

Laden Sie die Dateien in das Webverzeichnis Ihres Webservers hoch, in dem Sie entweder:

# das entpackte Verzeichnis direkt kopieren oder
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# einen FTP-Clienten wie [https://filezilla-project.org/ FileZilla] (Open Source Software, Windows, OSX und Linux) oder [https://cyberduck.io/ Cyberduck] (OSX) nutzen.
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;by using software already provided by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting service]], such as the ''cPanel File Manager''&lt;/span&gt;

Wenn Ihr Kopier- oder FTP-Programm eine Option zur Umwandlung des Dateinamens in Kleinbuchstaben hat (change file names to lowercase), müssen Sie diese ausschalten.

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn Sie Apache installiert haben, steht das korrekte Verzeichnis in Ihrer &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;-Datei (es ist die [$docroot DocumentRoot]-Richtlinie, normalerweise &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; oder &lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;apache-folder&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By default, this is &lt;code&gt;/var/www/&lt;/code&gt; or {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&amp;lt;$1&gt;/htdocs&lt;/code&gt;|apache-folder}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The exact location of the Apache server settings and directories file &lt;code&gt;httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt; depends on your operating system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Hinweis: Dies änderte sich in Ubuntu 14.04 mit Apache 2.4.7, wo die ursprüngliche Konfigurationsdatei für Apache-Server-Einstellungen und Verzeichnisse &lt;code&gt;/etc/apache2/apache2.conf&lt;/code&gt; ist.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In Red Hat and Fedora, the file is &lt;code&gt;/etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

Benennen Sie den hochgeladenen Ordner (oder den symbolischen Link) so um, wie Sie ihn in der URL haben wollen.
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn Ihr Web-Server z.&amp;nbsp;B. wie &lt;code&gt;http://localhost&lt;/code&gt; läuft, würde eine Umbenennung zu einem &lt;code&gt;/w/&lt;/code&gt;-Verzeichnis bedeuten, dass Sie Ihr Wiki über &lt;code&gt;http://localhost/w/index.php&lt;/code&gt; erreichen.&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Do not use &lt;code&gt;/wiki/&lt;/code&gt; if you want to set it up as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|Short URL]] after running the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Config script|installation script]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|Create a database}}
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Eine Datenbank erstellen ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki wird Sie nach der Datenbank und dem Benutzernamen fragen und versuchen, diese zu erstellen, falls sie noch nicht vorhanden sind.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Sofern Sie das root-Passwort in Ihrer Datenbank kennen, kann das Installationsprogramm von MediaWiki eine Datenbank für Sie erstellen.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wenn Sie das root-Passwort nicht kennen, z.&amp;nbsp;B. wenn Sie auf einem gemieteten Server sind, müssen Sie eine neue Datenbank erzeugen.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Derzeit müssen Sie entweder MariaDB/MySQL oder Postgres benutzen, um die aktuellen Inhalte des Wikis zu speichern.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn Sie sich nicht sicher sind, welche Datenbank Sie auswählen sollen, benutzen Sie MariaDB, da dies am besten von MediaWiki unterstützt wird.&lt;/span&gt;

After finishing the database setup, continue with [[#Run the installation script]] below.

===SQLite===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
No further setup is required for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SQLite|SQLite]] if the &lt;code&gt;pdo-sqlite&lt;/code&gt; module for PHP is installed on the system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Auf der Installationsseite müssen Sie einen Datenbanknamen (welcher alles sein kann) und das SQLite-Datenbankverzeichnis angeben.&lt;/span&gt;
Wenn Ihre Datenbank nicht auf dem gleichen Server wie Ihr Webserver läuft, müssen Sie den zugehörigen Webserverhostnamen &amp;mdash; im folgenden Beispiel ''mediawiki.example.com'' &amp;mdash; wie folgt eingeben:
Wenn dieses Verzeichnis nicht sicher ist (z.&amp;nbsp;B. für das Web lesbar), dann sollten Sie es manuell ändern, damit es nicht für das gesamte Web zugänglich ist.

===MariaDB/MySQL===

Create the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MariaDB|MariaDB]]/[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:MySQL|MySQL]] database and database user. There are several ways:

* Use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Installation requirements#Control panel|control panel]] software offered by your [[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|Hosting service]] (example: [[w:PhpMyAdmin|PhpMyAdmin]])
* Use [[w:Secure Shell|ssh]] to log into your host and type the commands below into a MySQL prompt. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Bitte lesen Sie die entsprechende Dokumentation.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Alternativ kann auch der Host-Provider ein Konto für Sie einrichten.&lt;/span&gt;

The following commands create a database named &lt;tvar name=wikidb&gt;&lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, a user named &lt;tvar name=wikiuser&gt;&lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, and set permissions for the user on that database.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki;
CREATE USER 'wikiuser'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'localhost' WITH GRANT OPTION;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wenn Ihre Datenbank nicht auf dem gleichen Server wie Ihr Webserver läuft, müssen Sie den zugehörigen Webserverhostnamen – im folgenden Beispiel ''mediawiki.example.com'' – wie folgt eingeben:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;MySQL&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON my_wiki.* TO 'wikiuser'@'mediawiki.example.com' IDENTIFIED BY 'database_password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;MySQL/MariaDB unter UNIX/Linux protokolliert alle Abfragen, die an die Datenbank gesendet werden, in einer Datei, die auch das Passwort enthält, das für das Benutzerkonto verwendet wird.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn Sie Bedenken haben, löschen Sie Ihre &lt;code&gt;.mysql_history&lt;/code&gt;-Datei, nachdem Sie diese Abfragen ausgeführt haben.&lt;/span&gt;}}

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Wenn Sie PostgreSQL verwenden, müssen Sie entweder eine Datenbank und einen Benutzer für sich anlegen lassen oder einfach den Namen eines PostgreSQL-Benutzers mit „Superuser“-Rechten in das Konfigurationsformular eingeben.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Dieser Datenbankbenutzer wird häufig '''postgres''' genannt.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following commands on a Linux command-line, as the postgres user, create a database user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;, and a database named &lt;code&gt;my_wiki&lt;/code&gt; owned by the user named &lt;code&gt;wikiuser&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

  createuser -S -D -R -P -E wikiuser (geben Sie dann das Passwort ein)
  createdb -O wikiuser my_wiki

oder Sie geben, als Superuser (standardmäßig „postgres“), die folgenden Befehle in die Datenbank-Eingabezeile ein:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot;&gt;
CREATE USER wikiuser WITH NOCREATEDB NOCREATEROLE NOSUPERUSER ENCRYPTED PASSWORD 'database_password';
CREATE DATABASE my_wiki WITH OWNER wikiuser;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

'''Achtung:''' die [[phab:tag/postgreSQL|Liste bekannter Probleme beim Betrieb von MediaWiki mit PostgreSQL]] sollte beachtet werden.

{{anchor|Run the installation script}}
== Das Installationsskript ausführen ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Wenn alle oben genannten Schritte abgeschlossen sind, kann die Installation über einen Webbrowser abgeschlossen werden, indem die URL der index.php im Browser aufgerufen wird – bitte die in {{ll|Manual:Config script}} beschriebenen Anweisungen beachten.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
== Nächste Schritte ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:System administration#Configuration}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Additional configuration&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Administrators}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wiki administration&lt;/span&gt;
== Auf dem Laufenden bleiben ==
Nach der Installation stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie mit den Versionen auf dem neuesten Stand bleiben und halten Sie Ihren Server sicher!
{{Clickable button 2|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$maillist|Abonnieren Sie unsere Mailingliste über Mitteilungen zu Versionsankündigungen.]]&lt;/span&gt;|class=mw-ui-progressive|url=https://lists.wikimedia.org/postorius/lists/mediawiki-announce.lists.wikimedia.org/}}

{{anchor|Appendices|Installing an existing wiki|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Appendices ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Alternatives to manual installation|Alternative to manual installation}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Alternatives to manual installation ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Instead of manually installing MediaWiki, alternative options might be easier:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Software bundles#MediaWiki software appliances|pre-integrated software appliances]]&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Hosting services|hosting services with 1-click installation, or wiki farms]]&lt;/span&gt;
:{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hosting services which provide automatical installation of applications such as MediaWiki may offer outdated versions or have other issues. If you encounter problems, it ''does not'' mean that you cannot install MediaWiki. It means that you should install MediaWiki manually.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See also the {{ll|comparison of distribution options}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== System-specific instructions  ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The pages listed on {{ll|Manual:OS specific help}} give more detailed installation instructions aimed at specific systems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, by and large these per-system docs are less maintained and might not always be up to date.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First consult {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki|nsp=0}} (this page) before looking at per-system installation documentation.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Wiki families (multiple wikis)}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Running multiple wikis ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Installing an existing wiki}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Importing an existing wiki database ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Refer to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration|Manual:FAQ#Installation and configuration]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Manual:Upgrading|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Manual:Uninstallation|nsp=0}}

[[Category:Installation{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>jt9fcixokkmpn5awwmophskxj0d6hv5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/de</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1057494</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402149</id>
      <parentid>5165597</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:36:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8031" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since 2017, {{ll|VisualEditor}} provides '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' (visual difference displays).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are available in two places in the interface: when previewing changes to the document before the user saves the page, and (as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta feature]]) within the standard MediaWiki diff display, accessed from the history page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In both cases, the visual diff shows up alongside the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|traditional two-column wikitext diff]], and the user can toggle between the two displays.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diffs have two main advantages over wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first is that editors can directly see the changes they and others have made without needing to understand [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitext]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is particularly helpful when looking at changes to graphical structures such as tables; for example, if an edit deletes a column from a table, the wikitext diff for it would be hard to understand, while the visual diff would be immediately obvious.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The second is that the technology can be used to more accurately represent the change to the reader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if an edit swapped two paragraphs (with or without changes to the paragraphs), the visual diff will identify that this is what occurred, while a wikitext diff makes it appear that a paragraph was deleted and an entirely new paragraph was added.&lt;/span&gt;

== Auf regulären diff-Seiten ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of the examples and screenshots below are about using visual diffs during page previews when editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, VisualEditor's visual diffs can also be used on regular diff pages, on any wiki that has VisualEditor installed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can see an example of it in use on the English-language Wikipedia [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|here]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For wikis that have VisualEditor, there are several ways to activate this visual diff display:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If your wiki has a &quot;Beta features&quot; tab within Special:Preferences, and you want to make visual diffs an &quot;opt-in&quot; feature for users, you can add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* As seen in the Wikipedia example linked above, the visual diff mode can also be activated by simply adding &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; to the URL of a diff page.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Wie es funktioniert ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Screenshot mit einigen Änderungen an einem Artikel. Die meisten Änderungen werden durch Textformatierung hervorgehoben.|left|thumb|300px|Wenn Sie mit dem Bearbeiten der Seite fertig sind, geben Sie Ihre Bearbeitungszusammenfassung ein und wählen Sie &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.

Im visuellen Modus werden Ergänzungen, Entfernungen, neue Links und Formatierungen hervorgehoben. Andere Änderungen, wie z. B. das Ändern der Größe eines Bildes, werden in den Anmerkungen an der Seite beschrieben.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=Umschalttaste mit visuellen und Wikitext-Optionen; visuelle Option ist ausgewählt.|left|thumb|220x220px|Klicken Sie auf die Umschalttaste, um zwischen visuellen und Wikitext-Unterschieden zu wechseln.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing the same changes, in the two-column wikitext diff display.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|245x245px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The wikitext diff is the same diff tool that is used in the wikitext editors and in the page history.&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{clr}}
== Beispiele ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Rich text edits&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Visueller Diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|Wikitext diff
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Paragraph move with subtle vandalism&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Visueller diff
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff (2017).  This feature was added to the wikitext diff engine in 2018; see [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Table column removed&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Text, formatting and list changes&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insert new multimedia (sheet music)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Technologie ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thalia Chan, Unifying editing and visual diffs, Wikimania 2017&lt;/span&gt;]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Aktuelle Einschränkungen ==
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No notices for changes to &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, such as categories or TOC keywords.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Has issues with complex changes to tables.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unavailable on certain special pages:&lt;/span&gt;
** Mache &quot;diff&quot;-Seiten rückgängig.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** Bearbeitungskonflikte&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== Historie ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This feature has been available as the first diff tool in the desktop VisualEditor from the 1.31.0-wmf-20 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 6 February 2018).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before that, it was a secondary tool from the 1.29.0-wmf-17 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 21 March 2017).&lt;/span&gt;

== Siehe auch ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Fußnoten ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>g2daqu9nwioc6ymj96v2bhtmfaz1ax4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/th</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1061987</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402868</id>
      <parentid>4505788</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:38:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>outdated</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10217" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Extension-Translate}}
หน้านี้แสดงวิธีการ'''แปลแบบออฟไลน'''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you're interested in this, you probably already know what [[w:Gettext|Gettext PO]] files are.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this reason, we'll only discuss how to use them in a wiki with the Translate extension here.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise, you're probably more interested in the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:Translate/Translation example|How to translate]] tutorial for online translation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ในความเป็นจริงบางทีคุณก็ไม่ได้อยากแปลหน้าโดยใช้อินเตอร์เฟซเว็บขนาดนั้น อาจจะเนื่องด้วยความช้าหรืออินเตอร์เน็ตที่มีอยู่อย่างจำกัด อย่างไรก็ตาม ส่วนขยายการแปลของเรานี้สร้างขึ้นมาก็เพื่อให้ทุกคนมีส่วนร่วมได้สะดวกที่สุด ซึ่งหมายความว่าคุณไม่ควรถือไฟล์ออฟไลน์เป็นเวลานาน และคุณควรดาวน์โหลดไฟล์ใหม่ก่อนเริ่มแปล  มิฉะนั้นคุณอาจขัดแย้งกับนักแปลคนอื่น ๆ ที่ทำงานในวิกิ&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Be aware, however, that the Translate extension is designed as a collaborative process.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that you should not hold the files offline for long times, and you should always download a new file just before you start translating.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might conflict with other translators who work in the wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

== แปลงออกมา ==

คุณสามารถดึงข้อความใด ๆ ผ่านไฟล์ Gettext PO โดยการเลือก''แปลงออกมาเป็นไฟล์การแปลแบบออฟไลน์'' ภายในหน้า Special:Translate บางเว็บไซต์ก็ปิดใช้งานคุณลักษณะนี้ คุณควรตรวจสอบกับคู่มือในท้องถิ่นก่อนเริ่ม

{{Note|1=แม้ว่าบางกลุ่มข้อความอาจมีตัวเลือกการแปลงอยู่ ซึ่งส่งออกการแปลในรูปแบบดั้งเดิมของกลุ่มนั้นและรูปแบบนั้นอาจเป็น Gettext ซึ่งไม่ใช่ไฟล์ที่สามารถใช้สำหรับการแปลแบบออนไลน์}}

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ไฟล์เป็นไฟล์แบบมาตรฐาน Gettext PO ที่มีข้อมูลพิเศษเพิ่มขึ้นมาด้วย ส่วนหัวจะมีข้อมูลพิเศษดังต่อไปนีั &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; ในแต่ละส่วนการแปล จะใส่ข้อมูลระบุตัวตนที่ส่วนขยายการแปลต้องใช้ ผู้แปลที่มีประสบการณ์จะทราบดีว่าไม่ควรลบข้อมูลนี้ออก ลองแปลไฟล์เล็ก ๆ เพื่อทำความคุ้นเคยก่อนและเพื่อให้แน่ใจว่าจะไม่ลบแท็กนี้ด้วยในตัว แทบไม่อยากจะคิดภาพเมื่อคุณแปลข้อความไปเกือบร้อยส่วนการแปล แล้วดันเจอข้อผิดพลาดที่ไม่ทราบสาเหตุที่ไม่สามารถนำกลับมาออนไลน์ได้อีก นั่นทำให้การแปลแทบจะศูนย์เปล่าโดยสิ้นเชิง! ในด้านคำแนะนำการแปล จะถูกเก็บในลักษณะคอมเมนต์แทน&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The header contains some extra fields shown below; the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; for each message contains an identifier that the Translate extension needs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some editors are known to strip either the header comments or the &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; lines, so start with a small file to make sure that your editor does not remove these – it's not funny to realize the editor was buggy after translating hundreds of messages that you cannot import back into the online system!&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The message documentation is exported as translation comments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Important header fields:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
&quot;X-Language-Code: nl\n&quot;
&quot;X-Message-Group: ext-abc\n&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, &quot;ext-abc&quot; is the name of the message group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For translatable pages, the corresponding message group has the name &quot;page-&quot; + the page name (i.e. for the page &quot;Example&quot;, the header would contain the line &lt;code&gt;&quot;X-Message-Group: page-Example\n&quot;&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Example entry in a Translate Gettext po file.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;small&gt;&lt;pre&gt;
#. [Wiki] This text is used on the history tab.
#. [Wiki] 

msgctxt &quot;history_short&quot;
msgid &quot;History&quot;
msgstr &quot;Versionsgeschichte&quot;&lt;/pre&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Import ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is no need to translate the file completely. Uploading partially translated message groups is perfectly fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to import these files.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The users with correct user rights can use &lt;code&gt;Special:ImportTranslations&lt;/code&gt; to upload and import the translations.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The special page processes the file, shows the changes and lets the user import them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For large files with lots of changes the importing might take multiple steps, as the processing time is limited.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Importing can also be done using a command line script in &lt;code&gt;Translate/script/poimport.php&lt;/code&gt;. It's less flexible but can import everything in one go. It also needs intervention from someone with shell access to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The way how imports of off-line translations are handled (or not) depends on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Gettext Editors ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here are some tools you can use to edit the files off-line.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.poedit.net/ POedit] : Available for all platforms supporting the [http://www.wxwidgets.org/ wxWidgets toolkit], tested on Unix with GTK+ and Windows.&lt;br /&gt;'''WARNING:''' make sure you are using  version 1.4.2 or above, otherwise &quot;&lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt;&quot; lines are dropped and your work cannot be processed.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://projects.gnome.org/gtranslator/ gtranslator] : Can be used in the [http://gnome.org GNOME] desktop environment on Unix and Linux platforms.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.kde.org/applications/development/lokalize/ Lokalize] : Uses the [http://www.kde.org/ KDE 4] Desktop Environment on all platforms supporting it. Has a [http://userbase.kde.org/Lokalize user wiki] and online [http://docs.kde.org/stable/en/kdesdk/lokalize/index.html handbook]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://translate.sourceforge.net/wiki/toolkit/index Translate Toolkit] : Toolkit written in the [http://python.org python] programming language which must be installed as well, usable on all platforms. Supports several other file formats as well.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://virtaal.translatehouse.org/ Virtaal] : Multi-format translation tool based on the toolkit above. Currently working in Windows and Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://omegat.org OmegaT] : Free tool for professional translators written in Java, requires Java installed; available on all platforms. Supports a variety of other file formats, glosssaries, fuzzy matching, and translation memories.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://www.eazypo.ca Eazy PO] : Small program, runs on Windows, no installation required.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [http://gorm.po.dk/ Gorm PO file editor] : Small powerful program, runs on Windows, no installation required, version 1.0 fails on &lt;code&gt;msgctxt&lt;/code&gt; tags.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; [https://github.com/mlocati/betterpoeditor Better PO Editor] : Available as source code for Windows, BSD, Unix, Linux, Mac OS X. Includes spell checker and Google Translate suggestions.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Extension:Translate{{#translation:}}|Off-line translation]]</text>
      <sha1>2v00ay4kb68l7cuemfbam8ibscykq4r</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/cs</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1064367</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402920</id>
      <parentid>5356733</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="42053" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Základní přehled ==

=== Přístup k souborům ===

Zvolte si metodu přenosu souborů:

* Stažení přes [[w:Wget|wget]]
* Kopírování přes [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] či [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* Kopírování souborů přes [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|protokol přenosu souborů SSH]] (SFTP)
* Kopírování souborů přes [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] klienta.
* Pokud vaše hostingová společnost umožňuje přístup k vašim souborům přes webové rozhraní, můžete využít webový prohlížeč. Zjistěte si jaké máte možnosti u svého poskytovatele.
* Nějaký jiný způsob. Co vše se dá použít najdete v [[w:List of file transfer protocols|seznamu všech existujících protokolů pro přenos souborů]]

=== Příprava ===

Přečtěte si {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=textový soubor UPGRADE obsažený v MediaWiki}}.

# Zkontrolujte požadavky
# Přečtěte si soubor RELEASE-NOTES
# Přečtěte si soubor UPGRADE
# Udělejte zálohu stávajícího obsahu databáze a všech souborů
# Rozbalte nové soubory
# Aktualizujte rozšíření
# Spusťte aktualizační skript, který zkontroluje schéma databáze
# Zkontrolujte, je-li po aktualizaci vše jak má být
# Odstraňte pozůstatky po staré instalaci

== Kontrola požadavků == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} vyžaduje:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Jednu z následujících databází:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Od verze 1.36 se MediaWiki zavazuje podporovat pouze upgrady z předchozích dvou vydání LTS (viz [[phab:T259771]]). Aktualizace ze starších verzí MediaWiki budou muset být provedeny v několika krocích.
To znamená, že pokud chcete aktualizovat na verzi 1.36 z verze 1.23 nebo dřívějších, musíte nejprve upgradovat svou wiki z verze 1.23 na novější verzi 1.27 (nebo 1.35) a teprve z této verze 1.27 (nebo 1.35) budete moci upgradovat na verzi 1.36.

Pokud používáte databázi PostgreSQL, přečtěte si, prosím, také {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Další informace obsahuje {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} a stránka {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Přečtěte si poznámky k vydání ==
V distribučním tarballu nebo v souborech rezervovaných či exportovaných z [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] existuje řada souborů s názvy psanými velkými písmeny, z nichž jeden obsahuje '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Nyní je ta pravá chvíle do něj nahlédnout a zjistit, co se u této verze změnilo.
Nezapomeňte si také přečíst instrukce v souboru UPGRADE.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Dokončete čekající úlohy ==
Z důvodu regulace výkonu počítače jsou některé akce v databázi zpožděny a jsou spravovány ve [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|frontě úloh]].
Tyto úlohy jsou uloženy v databázi a obsahují parametry s informacemi o akcích, které se mají provést.
Důrazně doporučujeme spustit tyto čekající úlohy před aktualizací wiki, aby nedošlo k jejich selhání v případě, že by se specifikace parametrů těchto úloh v nové verzi změnila.
Pomocí {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} spusťte všechny čekající úlohy a před provedením aktualizace frontu vymažte.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Udělejte zálohu databáze a stávajících souborů ==

: ''Úplné pokyny k zálohování jsou na stránce: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

I když jsou aktualizační skripty dobře udržované a robustní, stále by se cokoli mohlo pokazit. Před pokračováním v aktualizaci databázového schématu '''vytvořte úplnou [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|zálohu]]''' souborů wiki včetně databáze:

* Obsah wiki z databáze (ujistěte se, že je sada znaků zadána správně, nejprve zkontrolujte LocalSettings.php). Může být dobrý nápad vytvořit výpis XML kromě výpisu databáze SQL.
:* MySQL, výpis SQL i výpis XML se používají pro příkaz &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt;:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, výpis z databáze pro použití s příkazem &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, pro zálohování používáte skript MediaWiki:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* Obrázky a další mediální soubory (obsah adresáře &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;, vlastní logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png).
* Konfigurační soubory, např. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (pokud existuje).
* Programové soubory MediaWiki, včetně všech zobrazení a rozšíření, zejména pokud jste je upravovali.

== Rozbalte nové soubory==

=== Použití balíčku tarball ===

Nové soubory můžete umístit pomocí FTP nebo příkazového řádku. Použijte příkazový řádek, pokud k němu máte přístup! Použití příkazového řádku bude mnohem rychlejší, než kdyby bylo nutné nahrát každý z tisíců souborů přes FTP.

{{Note|1=Dekomprimovaný tarball byste měli umístit do nové a prázdné složky na serveru. Pokud místo toho extrahujete novou verzi přímo v části staré verze, nikoli v novém adresáři, měli byste postupovat podle pokynů popsaných v [[#Back up existing files and the database|Zálohování existujících souborů a databáze]]: Jinak, pokud jste provedli jakékoli úpravy smazáním, soubory již nepůjdou obnovit! Rozbalením tarballu na živé kopii MediaWiki můžete také ponechat soubory ze staré verze MediaWiki, které mohou rušit nově aktualizovaný kód. Doporučujeme rozbalit nové soubory do nového adresáře a poté do nového adresáře použít úpravy (obnovení LocalSettings.php, složky obrázků, rozšíření a dalších přizpůsobení, jako jsou vlastní zobrazení).}}

==== Pomocí FTP nebo graficky ====

Pokud nemůžete získat přístup k příkazovému řádku na serveru, stáhněte si tarball MediaWiki do místního počítače a pomocí [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] rozbalte tarball na místním počítači.

Po lokálním extrahování souborů použijte svůj oblíbený FTP klientský software k nahrání adresářů a souborů na server.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Příkazovým řádkem ====
Pokud nemáte úplná oprávnění pro zápis do instalačních adresářů wiki u aktuálního uživatele, možná nemůžete příkaz spustit jako &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt;.
Když normálně zrušíte rozbalení tarballového balíčku, vytvoří se nový adresář pro novou verzi wiki a budete muset zkopírovat staré konfigurační soubory a adresáře obrázků z vašeho starého instalačního adresáře:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

Uživatelé systému (Open)Solaris by měli používat &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt; nebo:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Další informace ===

Po rozbalení tarballu byste měli zkopírovat nebo přesunout některé soubory a složky ze starého instalačního adresáře do nového:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - obsahuje vaše stará nastavení.
* Adresář &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (nebo &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; ve starších verzích), který obsahuje všechny nahrané soubory na wiki, pokud jste nevybrali jiný adresář pro nahrání a nezměníte vlastnictví a oprávnění. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (např. pokud je váš webový uživatel ''apache'').
* Některá rozšíření v adresáři &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;. Vždy byste měli získat aktualizovaná rozšíření! Stará rozšíření nezaručují, že budou fungovat s novější verzí MediaWiki.
* V případě, že používáte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo| vlastní logo]], je třeba tento soubor také obnovit ze zálohy. Před verzí 1.24 obvykle ve &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. Po verzi 1.24 v &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; nebo &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt;. Potom přidejte do LocalSettings.php např. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Pro verzi 1.35 možná budete muset obnovit loga z [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Poté přidejte do LocalSettings.php např. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Vlastní zobrazení z adresáře &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;.
* Jakékoli úpravy starých instalačních souborů nebo přípon.
* Jakýkoli soubor .htaccess (pokud používáte Apache a máte v nich definována pravidla).

Po dokončení vytvořte z této nové složky publikovatelnou složku na webovém serveru nebo přejmenujte starý instalační adresář a novou přejmenujte tak, aby odpovídala starému názvu.

=== Používání Git ===

Pokud používáte {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, exportujte soubory do nového prázdného adresáře a zkopírujte staré přizpůsobené soubory do nového adresáře, jak je popsáno v předchozí části.

Budete také muset nainstalovat některé externí knihovny PHP pomocí Composeru nebo poskytované kolekce udržované pro farmu Wikimedie.
Další podrobnosti o instalaci a aktualizaci externích knihoven najdete v [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|dokumentaci ke stažení Git]].

=== Použití oprav ===
Pro opravu menší verze je obvykle k dispozici malý soubor opravy.
Abyste jej mohli používat, musíte si stáhnout [[w:patch (Unix)|záplatu]] (patch).
Ručně stáhněte a extrahujte soubor opravy z [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ od poskytovatele] nebo postupujte podle pokynů pomocí wget (utilita pro jednoduché stahování souborů z internetu) níže.
Opravy jsou přírůstkové, '''nemůžete''' přeskočit verzi.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; do hlavního adresáře MediaWiki (adresáře s LocalSettings.php).
# Stáhněte soubor opravy a &lt;kbd&gt;rozbalte&lt;/kbd&gt; jej.
# Pomocí &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; zkontrolujte, co se změnilo (''např.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Pokud je vše v pořádku, spusťte znovu &lt;kbd&gt;záplatu&lt;/kbd&gt; bez &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
# Zkontrolujte svou stránku Special:Version a měli byste tam vidět číslo nové verze.

=== Ostatní soubory, které mohou způsobit chyby ===

Pokud rozbalíte starý instalační adresář, některé staré soubory mohou způsobit problémy s novou verzí.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Pokud nepoužíváte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profilování]], ale máte soubor &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; v kořenové složce MediaWiki, můžete obdržet chyby odkazující na &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.
Tuto chybu vyřešíte odstraněním nebo přejmenováním souboru &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;. Soubor &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;, také v kořenové složce MediaWiki, může sloužit jako šablona, pokud v budoucnu povolíte profilování.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23 zavrhuje mechanismus automatického zjišťování vzhledu souborů jádra. Po aktualizaci na tuto verzi byste se měli ujistit, že byly odstraněny staré soubory &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; přímo v adresáři &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; a také příslušné podsložky v adresáři &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;. Pokud budou nějaké z nich i potom nalezeny, vydá MediaWiki, pro vaši kontrolu, varování. (Budete také muset upravit všechna vlastní zobrazení, aby se řídila podobnou konvencí.) Podrobnosti najdete na stránce {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 mění cesty základních souborů zobrazení. Po aktualizaci na tuto verzi byste měli zajistit, aby staré soubory &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; přímo v adresáři &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; již neexistovaly. Podrobnosti najdete na stránce {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}.

== Aktualizujte rozšíření ==

Některá rozšíření byla aktualizována, aby fungovala s novou verzí MediaWiki. Ujistěte se, že aktualizujete na nejnovější verze i tato rozšíření. Možná budete muset provést ruční aktualizace vlastních rozšíření.

Různé [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] obsahují některé podmnožiny rozšíření a mají verze, které vám pomohou aktualizovat výběr toho správného pro vaši základní verzi MediaWiki.

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Distributor rozšíření]] funguje dobře pro většinu uživatelů, kteří chtějí obraz rozšíření fungující s jejich podporovanými verzemi MediaWiki.

Pokud chcete hodně rozšíření, pak je pravděpodobně nejlepší [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|stažení z Gitu]].
Pokud Git nemáte, ale chcete aktualizovat mnoho rozšíření, můžete použít [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].

== Přizpůsobte si LocalSettings.php ==

Pokud používáte stejné &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; ze staré verze, možná budete muset přizpůsobit jeho zacházení s novými verzemi:

=== Registrace zobrazení ===

Vzhledem k tomu, že v MediaWiki 1.24 seskupená zobrazení, jako jsou Vector, Monobook, Modern a CologneBlue, již nejsou součástí jádra MediaWiki, je třeba je explicitně zaregistrovat do &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, aby je bylo možné použít. Jinak MediaWiki varuje, že nemáte nainstalovaná zobrazení.

Toto, musíte přidat k &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, když aktualizujete z verzí starších než 1.24 a chcete mít k dispozici jedno z těchto zobrazení:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Jiná zobrazení nemusí být stále přizpůsobena novému systému [[Manual:Extension registration|registrace zobrazení]]. Proto si v případě problémů na stránce dokumentace o každé položce přečtěte, jak ji správně zaregistrovat.

=== Registrace rozšíření ===

Od verze MediaWiki 1.25 používají rozšíření nový systém [[Manual:Extension registration|rozšíření registrace]].

Dříve by váš &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; obsahoval něco jako:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Toto lze převést na:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Rozšíření jsou upravena pro použití nového systému registrace rozšíření.
Rozšíření, která nejsou přizpůsobena, by měla používat starý způsob jejich instalace.
Další informace naleznete v instalačních pokynech na stránce rozšíření.

=== Ostatní proměnné ===
Některé proměnné mohou být zastaralé nebo jsou dokonce odstraněny.
Mít je v &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; obvykle nebude mít žádný význam ani účinek.
V novějších verzích mohou být přidány nové proměnné nebo některé stávající proměnné změnily svůj typ.
Obvykle se pro ně snažíme používat rozumná výchozí nastavení a v případě změny typu musí být zpětně kompatibilní.
V každém případě si tyto změny prohlédněte v poznámkách k vydání.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Spuštění aktualizačního skriptu ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
Aktualizovat (upgradovat) databázi MediaWiki lze dvěma způsoby: Buď z příkazového řádku nebo z webového prohlížeče. Pokud máte k serveru přístup do shellu, doporučuje se aktualizovat z příkazového řádku, protože se tím snižuje riziko přerušení procesu aktualizace vypršením časového limitu nebo resetem připojení.

Skript se také pokusí stáhnout všechny chybějící závislosti, které MediaWiki potřebuje.

=== Příkazový řádek ===

Otevřete příkazový řádek serveru nebo prostředí SSH nebo podobně. K příkazovému řádku se dostanete po připojení k serveru přes SSH. Pokud místní počítač, na kterém pracujete, běží na systému Microsoft Windows, budete potřebovat nástroj jako [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY], abyste mohli používat SSH. Z příkazového řádku nebo prostředí Shell přejděte do adresáře &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; a spusťte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|skript aktualizace]]:

 $ php update.php

Pokud se na serveru Linux objeví chyba, zkuste provést stejný příkaz jako root (uživatel s nejvyšším oprávněním v systému UNIX) (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Poznámka pro jednoduché instalace ve Windows (např. S {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
Nejprve se ujistěte, že je spuštěn váš webový server (například Apache) a databáze (například MySQL).
Poté spusťte &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: Klikněte na něj pravým tlačítkem, vyberte Open With a přejděte na PHP.exe.
Výsledné okno příkazového řádku se pravděpodobně po dokončení aktualizace schématu automaticky uzavře.

Může se zobrazit zpráva, že vaše verze PHP je příliš stará a že MediaWiki potřebuje novější verzi.
Po této zprávě se aktualizace přeruší.
Důvodem této chyby je, že příkazový řádek může použít jinou verzi PHP než verzi, kterou máte, když spustíte MediaWiki z webového serveru.
Když se zobrazí tato zpráva, měli byste zkontrolovat, zda můžete spustit novější verzi PHP na shellu pomocí jiného příkazu: Může to být např. být ''php5'' nebo ''php56''.
Pokud je k dispozici jiná verze a - pokud ano - pod jakým jménem, záleží na nastavení vašeho serveru.
Pokud to nefunguje, zeptejte se svého hostitele. Určitě to budou vědět.

MediaWiki zkontroluje existující schéma a aktualizuje ho tak, aby pracovalo s novým kódem. Podle potřeby přidává tabulky a sloupce.

{{Note|1=Pokud používáte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|databázi Shared]], měli byste, pokud chcete aktualizovat sdílené tabulky, předat parametr &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt;. V opačném případě se jich nedotkne aktualizační skript.}}

==== Co dělat, když php update.php nic nedělá, což má za následek rychlou pauzu a návrat do příkazového řádku ====

To může být způsobeno nefunkčním prodloužením nebo zobrazením.

* Zkontrolujte, zda jsou přítomna všechna rozšíření a zobrazení požadované v LocalSettings.php.
* Zkontrolujte, zda rozšíření používají správnou metodu registrace (wfLoadExtension proti require_once).
* Zakomentujte první polovinu rozšíření v LocalSettings.php. Pokud to způsobí, že update.php bude fungovat, odkomentujte polovinu této poloviny (tedy 1/4 rozšíření). Pokud to NEZPŮSOBÍ, že update.php funguje, odkomentujte první polovinu, ale okomentujte druhou polovinu a poté okomentujte polovinu druhé poloviny atd. Opakujte, dokud update.php nebude fungovat, abyste našli ten, který selhal.

==== Co dělat v případě chyby &quot;Příkaz ALTER uživateli byl odepřen&quot; (nebo podobně) ====

V případě, že se skripty přeruší podobnou zprávou:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

Zkontrolujte, zda jste definovali {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} a {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} v souboru {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} (v hlavním adresáři). Jedná se o uživatele a heslo, které tento skript potřebuje pro přístup k databázi.

Zdá se, že se v některých případech pro aktualizaci názvu tabulky čte stará proměnná $wgDBmwschema (pro Postgres) místo $wgDBname, i když se používá MySQL. Pokud tomu tak je, zbavte se definice $wgDBmwschema v LocalSettings.php.

==== Co dělat v případě &quot;neočekávané T_STRING&quot; chyby ====

Pokud spouštíte update.php z příkazového řádku, může se objevit následující chyba:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

K této chybě dochází, když je update.php spuštěn z php4.

Ti, jejichž web hostují poskytovatelé, kteří poskytují php4 i php5, by měli provést následující kroky:

# Z příkazového řádku zadejte příkaz 'whereis php5'.
# Jakmile zjistíte umístění cesty php5, vypište obsah adresáře php5/bin.
# Jakmile určíte název spustitelného souboru PHP (PHP nebo php5), zadejte celou cestu a spusťte update.php.

Níže je uveden příklad:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

==== Co dělat v případě, že 'registerer_argc_argv je nastaven na false' error ====

Může dojít k chybě:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Přejděte na ~/maintenance (údržba). Upravte existující soubor 'php.ini' nebo si nějaký vytvořte. 
# Přidejte tento řádek:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Znovu spusťte &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;.

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
=== Webový prohlížeč ===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Viz také {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Pokud je vaše databáze již velká a ve velkém pracovním vytížení, neměli byste používat webový aktualizátor, např. protože se proces aktualizace přeruší, jakmile bude dosaženo ''maximálního časového limitu''. V takovém případě byste měli použít [[update.php]] z rozhraní příkazového řádku (nikoli z webu). Co přesně je &quot;příliš velká&quot;, záleží na vašem serveru (např. na jeho výkonu, zatížení a na tom, jak dlouho maximální doba spuštění PHP umožňuje spuštění skriptu). Pokud je vaše wiki příliš velká pro webovou aktualizaci a váš poskytovatel hostingu neumožňuje přístup z příkazového řádku, musíte migrovat wiki na jiný hostingový účet, nejlépe na ten, který má přístup do shellu.

# Vždy před provedením údržby databáze [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|ručně zálohujte wiki]].
# Navigujte svůj webový prohlížeč do &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;. Pokud je například vaše wiki na &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, přejděte na &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
# Vyberte svůj jazyk a klikněte na &quot;Pokračovat&quot; (continue).
# Existující instalace by měla být detekována. Aktualizujte ji podle pokynů na obrazovce. &lt;br/&gt; Pokud budete požádáni o &quot;aktualizační klíč&quot; (upgrade key), otevřete soubor {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} a vyhledejte klíč přiřazený {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.

Může se stát, že se zdá, že webový aktualizátor nefunguje: Místo zobrazení úvodní obrazovky pro výběr jazyka se může zobrazit prázdná stránka wiki, pravděpodobně s nějakou chybovou zprávou. V tomto případě je nejpravděpodobnější, že váš webový server používá Pravidla pro přepisování (Rewrite Rules) (nejpravděpodobněji pro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|krátkou URL]]), která vám nezobrazí aktualizátor ''mw-config/'', ale wiki stránku na ''Mw-config/'', s velkým písmenem &quot;M&quot;. V tomto případě po dobu aktualizace přejmenujte soubor ''.htaccess''. Pak byste měli mít přístup k webovému aktualizátoru.

{{Warning|1=Pokud použijete tuto metodu, nezapomeňte po spuštění aktualizačního skriptu změnit název souboru .htaccess zpět! V opačném případě dojde k poškození krátkých adres URL a případně i dalších položek!}}

== Test aktualizace ==

Po dokončení aktualizace přejděte na wiki a zkontrolujte, zda následující operace fungují podle očekávání:

* Prohlížení stránek (viewing pages).
* Úpravy stránek (editing pages).
* Nahrávání souboru (uploading a file).
* Navštivte stránku [[Special:Version]] a zkontrolujte, zda je zobrazená verze správná a zda jsou přítomna rozšíření.

== Odstraňte pozůstatky starých instalací ==
Pokud jste zkopírovali svou předchozí instalaci do jiné složky na serveru, ujistěte se, že ji odeberete nebo ji z webu zcela znepřístupněte.
Je velmi důležité nenechávat staré instalace přístupné z webu, protože to zcela maří účel aktualizace a ponechává váš server otevřený útokům.

== Často kladené otázky (FAQ) ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
=== Jak je těžké aktualizovat? (upgrade)===

Pokud je jediný soubor, který jste změnili, {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} a provádíte aktualizaci z verze 1.5 nebo novější, proces je velmi jednoduchý. Zabere vám to je jen pár minut. Změny schématu databáze zaberou určitý čas úměrný velikosti vaší databáze - potenciálně hodiny pro wiki s miliony stránek. Pro typičtější velikost několika tisíc stránek se obvykle provádí během několika sekund.

Drobné aktualizace ve stejné hlavní verzi, například od {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 do {{MW legacy release number}}, nevyžadují vůbec žádné změny schématu.
Můžete pouze aktualizovat soubory. Databáze nepotřebuje žádnou aktualizaci, proto není nutné spouštět aktualizační skript.

Aktualizace verze 1.4 nebo starší je potenciálně komplikovaná, protože byla zrušena podpora pro jiné znakové sady než UTF-8 a také  bylo změněno schéma pro ukládání hromadného textu. Přečtěte si prosím příslušnou sekci v souboru &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt;.

Aktualizování je obtížné, pokud jste upravili náš zdrojový kód a nechcete, aby byly vaše změny přepsány. Užitečné mohou být nástroje jako [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] nebo [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge]. Pokud používáte neudržovaná rozšíření, může dojít k potížím. Aktualizujte rozšíření současně s aktualizací MediaWiki.

Pokud jste upravili zobrazení nebo použijete zobrazení vlastní, budete ho pravděpodobně muset upravit, aby spolupracovalo s novou verzí MediaWiki.

{{Tip|1=Místo toho, abyste pokaždé opravovali své &quot;globální&quot; soubory CSS a JS (JavaScript), můžete kód jednoduše přidat na své stránky MediaWiki:Common.js a MediaWiki:Common.css. Protože jsou součástí databáze, která bude znovu použita při aktualizaci, nebudete již muset opravovat základní soubory MediaWiki.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== Jak mohu aktualizovat ze skutečně staré verze? V jednom kroku nebo v několika krocích? ===
Důležité: Pokud provádíte '''aktualizaci z MediaWiki verze 1.4 nebo starší''', měli byste nejprve aktualizovat na verzi MediaWiki 1.5.
Pokud aktualizujete z wiki Latin-1, použijte upgrade1_5.php (nalezený v MediaWiki 1.5) k převodu příslušných částí databáze na UTF-8 (aby to fungovalo, musí být ve vašem {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} $Latin nastaven na true).
Potom spusťte update.php a potom nastavte v nabídce LocalSettings.php možnost {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} na kódování dříve používané wiki (např. Windows-1252). To je v podstatě způsob, jak byly stránky Wikipedie a další stránky Wikimedia Foundation aktualizovány z verze MediaWiki 1.4 na 1.5 - viz [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki stránka nastavení pro enwiki] (Varování: Obrovská stránka!). Některé [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|související poznámky na Wikitech]].
Možná budete muset aktualizovat na MediaWiki verze 1.4 před spuštěním skriptu aktualizací verze 1.5.
Pokud chcete vytvořit výpis databáze (např. MySQL) vaší wiki Latin-1, aby nedošlo k problémům s kódováním znaků, ujistěte se, že typ pole &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; v textové tabulce {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} je &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, nikoli &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;.

Pokud '''provádíte aktualizaci MediaWiki verze 1.5 nebo novější''' z verze '''1.35''', můžete, ze staré na nejnovější stabilní verzi, aktualizovat v jednom kroku.
Drtivá většina zpráv, stejně jako automatické testování, ukazují, že to v jednom kroku funguje dobře.
Pokud nevěříte, přečtěte si [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|tento příspěvek]].
Mějte však na paměti, že při aktualizaci ze starých verzí je pravděpodobnost, že se setkáte s chybami PHP, větší než při aktualizaci z verze přímo předcházející nové verzi.
Tyto chyby by se stejně objevily, pokud byste nevynechali verze, ale chyby by byly spojeny s každou jednotlivou aktualizací.
Místo toho, pokud aktualizujete několik verzí najednou, získáte stejnou sadu chyb najednou.
To ztěžuje aktualizaci, ale nezapomeňte, že jste neměli potíže s aktualizací na přechodné verze, které jste přeskočili!

Pokud '''aktualizujete na MediaWiki verze 1.36''' nebo novější, budou podporovány pouze aktualizace z posledních dvou verzí LTS ([[phab:T259771]]). To znamená, že u velmi starých verzí nejprve aktualizujete na verzi MediaWiki 1.35 a poté upgradujete na verzi 1.36.

=== Měl bych nejprve zálohovat? ===

Krátká jednoznačná odpověď: Ano!

Jiná odpověď: Záleží na a) tom, jak si ceníte svých dat, b) jak je těžké vytvořit zálohu a c) jak jste si jisti s údržbou a správou MySQL. 

Selhání aktualizace může ponechat databázi v nekonzistentním stavu mezi dvěma verzemi.
Během aktualizace může dojít k chybě PHP nebo MySQL, takže vaše databáze bude aktualizována pouze částečně.
V takových situacích je možné tento problém nějak vyřešit manuální zásahem.
Bude však ''mnohem snazší'' udělat zálohu databáze před spuštěním update.php.
Jinak byste mohli mít hodiny - zbytečné - práce.

Obnova je často složitá.
Dobrovolníci na fórech podpory pravděpodobně nebudou ohromeni, pokud zanedbáte zálohu a poté budete potřebovat pomoc, abyste se zbavili problémů související se špatnou aktualizací.
Lepší je, pokud se můžete vrátit k záloze a poté [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|ohlásit chybu odpovídajícího projektu MediaWiki]] v procesu aktualizace, který způsobil poškození.

=== Mohu si ponechat LocalSettings.php? ===
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Ano, ale možná budete muset provést některé drobné změny. Formát $localsettings je do značné míry zpětně kompatibilní. Změny, které narušují kompatibilitu LocalSettings.php, budou dokumentovány v části &quot;Změny konfigurace&quot; v [[Release notes|Poznámkách k verzi]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== Může moje wiki zůstat online, zatímco probíhá upgrade? ===

Obecně ano, Git jej však může dočasně (na několik sekund) přerušit.

Pokud přecházíte na menší vydání MediaWiki, stačí aktualizovat zdrojové soubory.

Poznámka: Pro další kroky je předpokládáno, že máte přístup z příkazového řádku. Pokud přecházíte mezi hlavními vydáními MediaWiki, je upřednostňován následující postup:

# Rozbalte novou verzi MediaWiki do nového adresáře.
# Připravte nový adresář: Zkopírujte aktuální LocalSettings.php ze starého adresáře, zkopírujte všechny nainstalované přípony a vlastní zobrazení (pokud existují). Zkontrolujte nastavení {{wg|Logo}} a {{wg|Logos}} v LocalSettings.php a v případě potřeby zkopírujte soubor loga ze starého adresáře do nového adresáře.
# V poznámkách k aktualizaci nové verze zjistěte, zda je nutné provést nějaké změny v LocalSettings.php.
# Upravte databázi do režimu jen pro čtení vložením následující proměnné do LocalSettings.php ve starém adresáři - uživatelé uvidí tuto zprávu, pokud se během procesu aktualizace pokusí upravit stránku:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Toto již nefunguje od verze MediaWiki 1.27, což také zabraňuje spuštění aktualizačního skriptu. Řešení verzí od MediaWiki 1.27 a mladších najdete v {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. Viz také {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Spusťte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|aktualizační script]] nebo webovou aktualizaci v novém adresáři.
# Zkopírujte obrázky z podadresáře images sub-directory ze starého do nového adresáře.
# Zaměňte starý adresář za nový adresář s novými soubory.

=== Proč aktualizovat? ===
:''Přihlaste se k odběru oznámení o nových verzích.''

Protože je aktualizace [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|obvykle snadná]]. [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|Jeden krok od vaší staré verze k nejnovější]] a také jednoduše [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|přes web]].

Poslední vydání aktualizací instalují opravy zabezpečení tak, aby byla vaše wiki a váš počítač chráněn před vandaly a spamy, zatímco stará vydání nejsou vždy aktuální k současnému stavu (viz {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). Díky tomu jsou desítky dobrých důvodů pro doporučené pravidelné aktualizace!

Nová hlavní vydání aktualizací také přicházejí s novými funkcemi, které byste mohli chtít použít: Podrobnosti naleznete vždy v poznámkách k vydání. V případě, že potřebujete další argumenty, abyste přesvědčili své šéfy pro aktualizaci z velmi staré verze, je zde shrnutí:

* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}} [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|lze úpravy prohlížet před uložením]] jako rozdíl v porovnání s původním stavem.
* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}} je k dispozici [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|tlačítko zpět]].
* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}} je [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|sledování]] na [[Special:NewPages|Nových stránkách]] mnohem jednodušší.
* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}} můžete [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|přejmenovat]] (nebo přesunovat) soubory.
* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}} můžete automaticky [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|opravit dvojitá přesměrování]].
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}} je k dispozici {{ll|InstantCommons}}.
* Pokud máte vhodné ukládání do mezipaměti, od verze 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} silně optimalizuje rychlost načítání stránky.
* Od verze 1.17 je zařazení [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|kategorie třídění smysluplné!]] Zejména u neanglických textů. Rozšířeno na 68 jazyků {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} a {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} jsou uživatelé všech jazyků a pohlaví správně osloveni rozhraním a [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|protokoly]] (do verze 1.15, oslovení podle pohlaví nebylo).
* Ve verzi {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} byl systém zobrazování přepracován, což usnadňuje opětovné použití částí existujících zobrazení ve vašich vlastních zobrazeních.
* Od verze [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]] jsou [[m:Help:Diff|rozdíly]] čitelnější.
* Ve verzích [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] a [[MediaWiki 1.23 |1.23]] jsou emailová oznámení jasnější a předvídatelnější, takže vaše wiki bude efektivnější.
* Od verze [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]] je boj s vandaly (hlídání proti napadení) méně časově náročný.
* Ve verzi [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]] bylo vylepšeno úložiště hesel. Pro zajištění lepšího zabezpečení wiki.
* Od verze [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|jsou k dispozici vylepšené poslední změny]]
* Ve verzi [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]] byl vylepšen mechanismus [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot;]]
* Ve verzi [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]] byla přepracována správa relací a kompletně modernizována správa autentizace uživatelů. InstantCommons již nevyžaduje místní soubory.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}} se zlepšila mezipaměť vykreslovaného HTML stránek článků.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}} bylo API přepracováno a vylepšeno. Nyní lze také provést přiřazení skupiny uživatelů na volitelné období. Povoleno blokování rozsahu IP adres.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}} nemohou blokovaní uživatelé změnit svůj email. Přidána možnost vyhledávat příspěvky v rozsahu IP na Special:Contributions.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}} jsou nyní některá rozšíření součástí jádra, například {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}. Bylo představeno {{ll|Skin:Timeless}}. Přidán výchozí limit rychlosti úprav 90 úprav/minutu pro všechny uživatele.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}} podporuje MediaWiki více než 350 jazyků.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}} podporuje MediaWiki &quot;částečné bloky&quot;, kde lze IP adresám a účtům omezit úpravy konkrétních stránek nebo jmenných prostorů.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, více rozšíření součástí jádra: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (pro moduly Lua), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (stabilní vydání dlouhodobé podpory) jsou {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} součástí jádra. Funkci &quot;hodinky&quot; lze rozšířit o data vypršení platnosti.

Také jsme ve verzi {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} začali [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|sdružovat některá důležitá rozšíření]], jako je lepší editor a nástroje proti vandalismu ConfirmEdit a Nuke. Další rozšíření byla přidána v pozdějších vydáních.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Související stránky ==

* Příspěvek na blogu Grega Sabina Mullaneho poskytuje [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html více podrobností o aktualizacích různých verzí] .
* [[Project:Support desk|Podpora]] - pokud potřebujete pomoc nebo se něco pokazilo
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - jak obnovit obsah wiki, pokud nemáte použitelnou zálohu
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>7nbu7iwme9yatzwr0q5vo6ss24uruo0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402958</id>
      <parentid>5402920</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:42:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="41895" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Základní přehled ==

=== Přístup k souborům ===

Zvolte si metodu přenosu souborů:

* Stažení přes [[w:Wget|wget]]
* Kopírování přes [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] či [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* Kopírování souborů přes [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|protokol přenosu souborů SSH]] (SFTP)
* Kopírování souborů přes [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] klienta.
* Pokud vaše hostingová společnost umožňuje přístup k vašim souborům přes webové rozhraní, můžete využít webový prohlížeč. Zjistěte si jaké máte možnosti u svého poskytovatele.
* Nějaký jiný způsob. Co vše se dá použít najdete v [[w:List of file transfer protocols|seznamu všech existujících protokolů pro přenos souborů]]

=== Příprava ===

Přečtěte si {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=textový soubor UPGRADE obsažený v MediaWiki}}.

# Zkontrolujte požadavky
# Přečtěte si soubor RELEASE-NOTES
# Přečtěte si soubor UPGRADE
# Udělejte zálohu stávajícího obsahu databáze a všech souborů
# Rozbalte nové soubory
# Aktualizujte rozšíření
# Spusťte aktualizační skript, který zkontroluje schéma databáze
# Zkontrolujte, je-li po aktualizaci vše jak má být
# Odstraňte pozůstatky po staré instalaci

== Kontrola požadavků == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} vyžaduje:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Jednu z následujících databází:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Od verze 1.36 se MediaWiki zavazuje podporovat pouze upgrady z předchozích dvou vydání LTS (viz [[phab:T259771]]). Aktualizace ze starších verzí MediaWiki budou muset být provedeny v několika krocích.
To znamená, že pokud chcete aktualizovat na verzi 1.36 z verze 1.23 nebo dřívějších, musíte nejprve upgradovat svou wiki z verze 1.23 na novější verzi 1.27 (nebo 1.35) a teprve z této verze 1.27 (nebo 1.35) budete moci upgradovat na verzi 1.36.

Pokud používáte databázi PostgreSQL, přečtěte si, prosím, také {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Další informace obsahuje {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} a stránka {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Přečtěte si poznámky k vydání ==
V distribučním tarballu nebo v souborech rezervovaných či exportovaných z [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] existuje řada souborů s názvy psanými velkými písmeny, z nichž jeden obsahuje '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Nyní je ta pravá chvíle do něj nahlédnout a zjistit, co se u této verze změnilo.
Nezapomeňte si také přečíst instrukce v souboru UPGRADE.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Dokončete čekající úlohy ==
Z důvodu regulace výkonu počítače jsou některé akce v databázi zpožděny a jsou spravovány ve [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|frontě úloh]].
Tyto úlohy jsou uloženy v databázi a obsahují parametry s informacemi o akcích, které se mají provést.
Důrazně doporučujeme spustit tyto čekající úlohy před aktualizací wiki, aby nedošlo k jejich selhání v případě, že by se specifikace parametrů těchto úloh v nové verzi změnila.
Pomocí {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} spusťte všechny čekající úlohy a před provedením aktualizace frontu vymažte.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Udělejte zálohu databáze a stávajících souborů ==

: ''Úplné pokyny k zálohování jsou na stránce: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

I když jsou aktualizační skripty dobře udržované a robustní, stále by se cokoli mohlo pokazit. Před pokračováním v aktualizaci databázového schématu '''vytvořte úplnou [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|zálohu]]''' souborů wiki včetně databáze:

* Obsah wiki z databáze (ujistěte se, že je sada znaků zadána správně, nejprve zkontrolujte LocalSettings.php). Může být dobrý nápad vytvořit výpis XML kromě výpisu databáze SQL.
:* MySQL, výpis SQL i výpis XML se používají pro příkaz &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt;:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, výpis z databáze pro použití s příkazem &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, pro zálohování používáte skript MediaWiki:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* Obrázky a další mediální soubory (obsah adresáře &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;, vlastní logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png).
* Konfigurační soubory, např. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (pokud existuje).
* Programové soubory MediaWiki, včetně všech zobrazení a rozšíření, zejména pokud jste je upravovali.

== Rozbalte nové soubory==

=== Použití balíčku tarball ===

Nové soubory můžete umístit pomocí FTP nebo příkazového řádku. Použijte příkazový řádek, pokud k němu máte přístup! Použití příkazového řádku bude mnohem rychlejší, než kdyby bylo nutné nahrát každý z tisíců souborů přes FTP.

{{Note|1=Dekomprimovaný tarball byste měli umístit do nové a prázdné složky na serveru. Pokud místo toho extrahujete novou verzi přímo v části staré verze, nikoli v novém adresáři, měli byste postupovat podle pokynů popsaných v [[#Back up existing files and the database|Zálohování existujících souborů a databáze]]: Jinak, pokud jste provedli jakékoli úpravy smazáním, soubory již nepůjdou obnovit! Rozbalením tarballu na živé kopii MediaWiki můžete také ponechat soubory ze staré verze MediaWiki, které mohou rušit nově aktualizovaný kód. Doporučujeme rozbalit nové soubory do nového adresáře a poté do nového adresáře použít úpravy (obnovení LocalSettings.php, složky obrázků, rozšíření a dalších přizpůsobení, jako jsou vlastní zobrazení).}}

==== Pomocí FTP nebo graficky ====

Pokud nemůžete získat přístup k příkazovému řádku na serveru, stáhněte si tarball MediaWiki do místního počítače a pomocí [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] rozbalte tarball na místním počítači.

Po lokálním extrahování souborů použijte svůj oblíbený FTP klientský software k nahrání adresářů a souborů na server.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Příkazovým řádkem ====
Pokud nemáte úplná oprávnění pro zápis do instalačních adresářů wiki u aktuálního uživatele, možná nemůžete příkaz spustit jako &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt;.
Když normálně zrušíte rozbalení tarballového balíčku, vytvoří se nový adresář pro novou verzi wiki a budete muset zkopírovat staré konfigurační soubory a adresáře obrázků z vašeho starého instalačního adresáře:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

Uživatelé systému (Open)Solaris by měli používat &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt; nebo:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Další informace ===

Po rozbalení tarballu byste měli zkopírovat nebo přesunout některé soubory a složky ze starého instalačního adresáře do nového:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - obsahuje vaše stará nastavení.
* Adresář &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (nebo &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; ve starších verzích), který obsahuje všechny nahrané soubory na wiki, pokud jste nevybrali jiný adresář pro nahrání a nezměníte vlastnictví a oprávnění. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (např. pokud je váš webový uživatel ''apache'').
* Některá rozšíření v adresáři &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;. Vždy byste měli získat aktualizovaná rozšíření! Stará rozšíření nezaručují, že budou fungovat s novější verzí MediaWiki.
* V případě, že používáte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo| vlastní logo]], je třeba tento soubor také obnovit ze zálohy. Před verzí 1.24 obvykle ve &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. Po verzi 1.24 v &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; nebo &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt;. Potom přidejte do LocalSettings.php např. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Pro verzi 1.35 možná budete muset obnovit loga z [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Poté přidejte do LocalSettings.php např. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Vlastní zobrazení z adresáře &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;.
* Jakékoli úpravy starých instalačních souborů nebo přípon.
* Jakýkoli soubor .htaccess (pokud používáte Apache a máte v nich definována pravidla).

Po dokončení vytvořte z této nové složky publikovatelnou složku na webovém serveru nebo přejmenujte starý instalační adresář a novou přejmenujte tak, aby odpovídala starému názvu.

=== Používání Git ===

Pokud používáte {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, exportujte soubory do nového prázdného adresáře a zkopírujte staré přizpůsobené soubory do nového adresáře, jak je popsáno v předchozí části.

Budete také muset nainstalovat některé externí knihovny PHP pomocí Composeru nebo poskytované kolekce udržované pro farmu Wikimedie.
Další podrobnosti o instalaci a aktualizaci externích knihoven najdete v [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|dokumentaci ke stažení Git]].

=== Použití oprav ===
Pro opravu menší verze je obvykle k dispozici malý soubor opravy.
Abyste jej mohli používat, musíte si stáhnout [[w:patch (Unix)|záplatu]] (patch).
Ručně stáhněte a extrahujte soubor opravy z [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ od poskytovatele] nebo postupujte podle pokynů pomocí wget (utilita pro jednoduché stahování souborů z internetu) níže.
Opravy jsou přírůstkové, '''nemůžete''' přeskočit verzi.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; do hlavního adresáře MediaWiki (adresáře s LocalSettings.php).
# Stáhněte soubor opravy a &lt;kbd&gt;rozbalte&lt;/kbd&gt; jej.
# Pomocí &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; zkontrolujte, co se změnilo (''např.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Pokud je vše v pořádku, spusťte znovu &lt;kbd&gt;záplatu&lt;/kbd&gt; bez &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
# Zkontrolujte svou stránku Special:Version a měli byste tam vidět číslo nové verze.

=== Ostatní soubory, které mohou způsobit chyby ===

Pokud rozbalíte starý instalační adresář, některé staré soubory mohou způsobit problémy s novou verzí.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Pokud nepoužíváte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profilování]], ale máte soubor &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; v kořenové složce MediaWiki, můžete obdržet chyby odkazující na &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.
Tuto chybu vyřešíte odstraněním nebo přejmenováním souboru &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;. Soubor &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;, také v kořenové složce MediaWiki, může sloužit jako šablona, pokud v budoucnu povolíte profilování.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23 zavrhuje mechanismus automatického zjišťování vzhledu souborů jádra. Po aktualizaci na tuto verzi byste se měli ujistit, že byly odstraněny staré soubory &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; přímo v adresáři &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; a také příslušné podsložky v adresáři &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;. Pokud budou nějaké z nich i potom nalezeny, vydá MediaWiki, pro vaši kontrolu, varování. (Budete také muset upravit všechna vlastní zobrazení, aby se řídila podobnou konvencí.) Podrobnosti najdete na stránce {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 mění cesty základních souborů zobrazení. Po aktualizaci na tuto verzi byste měli zajistit, aby staré soubory &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; přímo v adresáři &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; již neexistovaly. Podrobnosti najdete na stránce {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}.

== Aktualizujte rozšíření ==

Některá rozšíření byla aktualizována, aby fungovala s novou verzí MediaWiki. Ujistěte se, že aktualizujete na nejnovější verze i tato rozšíření. Možná budete muset provést ruční aktualizace vlastních rozšíření.

Různé [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] obsahují některé podmnožiny rozšíření a mají verze, které vám pomohou aktualizovat výběr toho správného pro vaši základní verzi MediaWiki.

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Distributor rozšíření]] funguje dobře pro většinu uživatelů, kteří chtějí obraz rozšíření fungující s jejich podporovanými verzemi MediaWiki.

Pokud chcete hodně rozšíření, pak je pravděpodobně nejlepší [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|stažení z Gitu]].
Pokud Git nemáte, ale chcete aktualizovat mnoho rozšíření, můžete použít [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].

== Přizpůsobte si LocalSettings.php ==

Pokud používáte stejné &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; ze staré verze, možná budete muset přizpůsobit jeho zacházení s novými verzemi:

=== Registrace zobrazení ===

Vzhledem k tomu, že v MediaWiki 1.24 seskupená zobrazení, jako jsou Vector, Monobook, Modern a CologneBlue, již nejsou součástí jádra MediaWiki, je třeba je explicitně zaregistrovat do &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, aby je bylo možné použít. Jinak MediaWiki varuje, že nemáte nainstalovaná zobrazení.

Toto, musíte přidat k &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, když aktualizujete z verzí starších než 1.24 a chcete mít k dispozici jedno z těchto zobrazení:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Jiná zobrazení nemusí být stále přizpůsobena novému systému [[Manual:Extension registration|registrace zobrazení]]. Proto si v případě problémů na stránce dokumentace o každé položce přečtěte, jak ji správně zaregistrovat.

=== Registrace rozšíření ===

Od verze MediaWiki 1.25 používají rozšíření nový systém [[Manual:Extension registration|rozšíření registrace]].

Dříve by váš &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; obsahoval něco jako:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Toto lze převést na:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Rozšíření jsou upravena pro použití nového systému registrace rozšíření.
Rozšíření, která nejsou přizpůsobena, by měla používat starý způsob jejich instalace.
Další informace naleznete v instalačních pokynech na stránce rozšíření.

=== Ostatní proměnné ===
Některé proměnné mohou být zastaralé nebo jsou dokonce odstraněny.
Mít je v &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; obvykle nebude mít žádný význam ani účinek.
V novějších verzích mohou být přidány nové proměnné nebo některé stávající proměnné změnily svůj typ.
Obvykle se pro ně snažíme používat rozumná výchozí nastavení a v případě změny typu musí být zpětně kompatibilní.
V každém případě si tyto změny prohlédněte v poznámkách k vydání.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Spuštění aktualizačního skriptu ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
Aktualizovat (upgradovat) databázi MediaWiki lze dvěma způsoby: Buď z příkazového řádku nebo z webového prohlížeče. Pokud máte k serveru přístup do shellu, doporučuje se aktualizovat z příkazového řádku, protože se tím snižuje riziko přerušení procesu aktualizace vypršením časového limitu nebo resetem připojení.

Skript se také pokusí stáhnout všechny chybějící závislosti, které MediaWiki potřebuje.

=== Příkazový řádek ===

Otevřete příkazový řádek serveru nebo prostředí SSH nebo podobně. K příkazovému řádku se dostanete po připojení k serveru přes SSH. Pokud místní počítač, na kterém pracujete, běží na systému Microsoft Windows, budete potřebovat nástroj jako [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY], abyste mohli používat SSH. Z příkazového řádku nebo prostředí Shell přejděte do adresáře &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; a spusťte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|skript aktualizace]]:

 $ php update.php

Pokud se na serveru Linux objeví chyba, zkuste provést stejný příkaz jako root (uživatel s nejvyšším oprávněním v systému UNIX) (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Poznámka pro jednoduché instalace ve Windows (např. S {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
Nejprve se ujistěte, že je spuštěn váš webový server (například Apache) a databáze (například MySQL).
Poté spusťte &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: Klikněte na něj pravým tlačítkem, vyberte Open With a přejděte na PHP.exe.
Výsledné okno příkazového řádku se pravděpodobně po dokončení aktualizace schématu automaticky uzavře.

Může se zobrazit zpráva, že vaše verze PHP je příliš stará a že MediaWiki potřebuje novější verzi.
Po této zprávě se aktualizace přeruší.
Důvodem této chyby je, že příkazový řádek může použít jinou verzi PHP než verzi, kterou máte, když spustíte MediaWiki z webového serveru.
Když se zobrazí tato zpráva, měli byste zkontrolovat, zda můžete spustit novější verzi PHP na shellu pomocí jiného příkazu: Může to být např. být ''php5'' nebo ''php56''.
Pokud je k dispozici jiná verze a - pokud ano - pod jakým jménem, záleží na nastavení vašeho serveru.
Pokud to nefunguje, zeptejte se svého hostitele. Určitě to budou vědět.

MediaWiki zkontroluje existující schéma a aktualizuje ho tak, aby pracovalo s novým kódem. Podle potřeby přidává tabulky a sloupce.

{{Note|1=Pokud používáte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|databázi Shared]], měli byste, pokud chcete aktualizovat sdílené tabulky, předat parametr &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt;. V opačném případě se jich nedotkne aktualizační skript.}}

==== Co dělat, když php update.php nic nedělá, což má za následek rychlou pauzu a návrat do příkazového řádku ====

To může být způsobeno nefunkčním prodloužením nebo zobrazením.

* Zkontrolujte, zda jsou přítomna všechna rozšíření a zobrazení požadované v LocalSettings.php.
* Zkontrolujte, zda rozšíření používají správnou metodu registrace (wfLoadExtension proti require_once).
* Zakomentujte první polovinu rozšíření v LocalSettings.php. Pokud to způsobí, že update.php bude fungovat, odkomentujte polovinu této poloviny (tedy 1/4 rozšíření). Pokud to NEZPŮSOBÍ, že update.php funguje, odkomentujte první polovinu, ale okomentujte druhou polovinu a poté okomentujte polovinu druhé poloviny atd. Opakujte, dokud update.php nebude fungovat, abyste našli ten, který selhal.

==== Co dělat v případě chyby &quot;Příkaz ALTER uživateli byl odepřen&quot; (nebo podobně) ====

V případě, že se skripty přeruší podobnou zprávou:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

Zkontrolujte, zda jste definovali {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} a {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} v souboru {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} (v hlavním adresáři). Jedná se o uživatele a heslo, které tento skript potřebuje pro přístup k databázi.

Zdá se, že se v některých případech pro aktualizaci názvu tabulky čte stará proměnná $wgDBmwschema (pro Postgres) místo $wgDBname, i když se používá MySQL. Pokud tomu tak je, zbavte se definice $wgDBmwschema v LocalSettings.php.

==== Co dělat v případě &quot;neočekávané T_STRING&quot; chyby ====

Pokud spouštíte update.php z příkazového řádku, může se objevit následující chyba:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

K této chybě dochází, když je update.php spuštěn z php4.

Ti, jejichž web hostují poskytovatelé, kteří poskytují php4 i php5, by měli provést následující kroky:

# Z příkazového řádku zadejte příkaz 'whereis php5'.
# Jakmile zjistíte umístění cesty php5, vypište obsah adresáře php5/bin.
# Jakmile určíte název spustitelného souboru PHP (PHP nebo php5), zadejte celou cestu a spusťte update.php.

Níže je uveden příklad:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

==== Co dělat v případě, že 'registerer_argc_argv je nastaven na false' error ====

Může dojít k chybě:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Přejděte na ~/maintenance (údržba). Upravte existující soubor 'php.ini' nebo si nějaký vytvořte. 
# Přidejte tento řádek:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Znovu spusťte &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;.

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
=== Webový prohlížeč ===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Viz také {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Pokud je vaše databáze již velká a ve velkém pracovním vytížení, neměli byste používat webový aktualizátor, např. protože se proces aktualizace přeruší, jakmile bude dosaženo ''maximálního časového limitu''. V takovém případě byste měli použít [[update.php]] z rozhraní příkazového řádku (nikoli z webu). Co přesně je &quot;příliš velká&quot;, záleží na vašem serveru (např. na jeho výkonu, zatížení a na tom, jak dlouho maximální doba spuštění PHP umožňuje spuštění skriptu). Pokud je vaše wiki příliš velká pro webovou aktualizaci a váš poskytovatel hostingu neumožňuje přístup z příkazového řádku, musíte migrovat wiki na jiný hostingový účet, nejlépe na ten, který má přístup do shellu.

# Vždy před provedením údržby databáze [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|ručně zálohujte wiki]].
# Navigujte svůj webový prohlížeč do &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;. Pokud je například vaše wiki na &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, přejděte na &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
# Vyberte svůj jazyk a klikněte na &quot;Pokračovat&quot; (continue).
# Existující instalace by měla být detekována. Aktualizujte ji podle pokynů na obrazovce. &lt;br/&gt; Pokud budete požádáni o &quot;aktualizační klíč&quot; (upgrade key), otevřete soubor {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} a vyhledejte klíč přiřazený {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.

Může se stát, že se zdá, že webový aktualizátor nefunguje: Místo zobrazení úvodní obrazovky pro výběr jazyka se může zobrazit prázdná stránka wiki, pravděpodobně s nějakou chybovou zprávou. V tomto případě je nejpravděpodobnější, že váš webový server používá Pravidla pro přepisování (Rewrite Rules) (nejpravděpodobněji pro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|krátkou URL]]), která vám nezobrazí aktualizátor ''mw-config/'', ale wiki stránku na ''Mw-config/'', s velkým písmenem &quot;M&quot;. V tomto případě po dobu aktualizace přejmenujte soubor ''.htaccess''. Pak byste měli mít přístup k webovému aktualizátoru.

{{Warning|1=Pokud použijete tuto metodu, nezapomeňte po spuštění aktualizačního skriptu změnit název souboru .htaccess zpět! V opačném případě dojde k poškození krátkých adres URL a případně i dalších položek!}}

== Test aktualizace ==

Po dokončení aktualizace přejděte na wiki a zkontrolujte, zda následující operace fungují podle očekávání:

* Prohlížení stránek (viewing pages).
* Úpravy stránek (editing pages).
* Nahrávání souboru (uploading a file).
* Navštivte stránku [[Special:Version]] a zkontrolujte, zda je zobrazená verze správná a zda jsou přítomna rozšíření.

== Odstraňte pozůstatky starých instalací ==
Pokud jste zkopírovali svou předchozí instalaci do jiné složky na serveru, ujistěte se, že ji odeberete nebo ji z webu zcela znepřístupněte.
Je velmi důležité nenechávat staré instalace přístupné z webu, protože to zcela maří účel aktualizace a ponechává váš server otevřený útokům.

== Často kladené otázky (FAQ) ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
=== Jak je těžké aktualizovat? (upgrade)===

Pokud je jediný soubor, který jste změnili, {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} a provádíte aktualizaci z verze 1.5 nebo novější, proces je velmi jednoduchý. Zabere vám to je jen pár minut. Změny schématu databáze zaberou určitý čas úměrný velikosti vaší databáze - potenciálně hodiny pro wiki s miliony stránek. Pro typičtější velikost několika tisíc stránek se obvykle provádí během několika sekund.

Drobné aktualizace ve stejné hlavní verzi, například od {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 do {{MW legacy release number}}, nevyžadují vůbec žádné změny schématu.
Můžete pouze aktualizovat soubory. Databáze nepotřebuje žádnou aktualizaci, proto není nutné spouštět aktualizační skript.

Aktualizace verze 1.4 nebo starší je potenciálně komplikovaná, protože byla zrušena podpora pro jiné znakové sady než UTF-8 a také  bylo změněno schéma pro ukládání hromadného textu. Přečtěte si prosím příslušnou sekci v souboru &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt;.

Aktualizování je obtížné, pokud jste upravili náš zdrojový kód a nechcete, aby byly vaše změny přepsány. Užitečné mohou být nástroje jako [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] nebo [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge]. Pokud používáte neudržovaná rozšíření, může dojít k potížím. Aktualizujte rozšíření současně s aktualizací MediaWiki.

Pokud jste upravili zobrazení nebo použijete zobrazení vlastní, budete ho pravděpodobně muset upravit, aby spolupracovalo s novou verzí MediaWiki.

{{Tip|1=Místo toho, abyste pokaždé opravovali své &quot;globální&quot; soubory CSS a JS (JavaScript), můžete kód jednoduše přidat na své stránky MediaWiki:Common.js a MediaWiki:Common.css. Protože jsou součástí databáze, která bude znovu použita při aktualizaci, nebudete již muset opravovat základní soubory MediaWiki.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== Jak mohu aktualizovat ze skutečně staré verze? V jednom kroku nebo v několika krocích? ===
Důležité: Pokud provádíte '''aktualizaci z MediaWiki verze 1.4 nebo starší''', měli byste nejprve aktualizovat na verzi MediaWiki 1.5.
Pokud aktualizujete z wiki Latin-1, použijte upgrade1_5.php (nalezený v MediaWiki 1.5) k převodu příslušných částí databáze na UTF-8 (aby to fungovalo, musí být ve vašem {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} $Latin nastaven na true).
Potom spusťte update.php a potom nastavte v nabídce LocalSettings.php možnost {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} na kódování dříve používané wiki (např. Windows-1252). To je v podstatě způsob, jak byly stránky Wikipedie a další stránky Wikimedia Foundation aktualizovány z verze MediaWiki 1.4 na 1.5 - viz [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki stránka nastavení pro enwiki] (Varování: Obrovská stránka!). Některé [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|související poznámky na Wikitech]].
Možná budete muset aktualizovat na MediaWiki verze 1.4 před spuštěním skriptu aktualizací verze 1.5.
Pokud chcete vytvořit výpis databáze (např. MySQL) vaší wiki Latin-1, aby nedošlo k problémům s kódováním znaků, ujistěte se, že typ pole &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; v textové tabulce {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} je &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, nikoli &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;.

Pokud '''provádíte aktualizaci MediaWiki verze 1.5 nebo novější''' z verze '''1.35''', můžete, ze staré na nejnovější stabilní verzi, aktualizovat v jednom kroku.
Drtivá většina zpráv, stejně jako automatické testování, ukazují, že to v jednom kroku funguje dobře.
Pokud nevěříte, přečtěte si [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|tento příspěvek]].
Mějte však na paměti, že při aktualizaci ze starých verzí je pravděpodobnost, že se setkáte s chybami PHP, větší než při aktualizaci z verze přímo předcházející nové verzi.
Tyto chyby by se stejně objevily, pokud byste nevynechali verze, ale chyby by byly spojeny s každou jednotlivou aktualizací.
Místo toho, pokud aktualizujete několik verzí najednou, získáte stejnou sadu chyb najednou.
To ztěžuje aktualizaci, ale nezapomeňte, že jste neměli potíže s aktualizací na přechodné verze, které jste přeskočili!

Pokud '''aktualizujete na MediaWiki verze 1.36''' nebo novější, budou podporovány pouze aktualizace z posledních dvou verzí LTS ([[phab:T259771]]). To znamená, že u velmi starých verzí nejprve aktualizujete na verzi MediaWiki 1.35 a poté upgradujete na verzi 1.36.

=== Měl bych nejprve zálohovat? ===

Krátká jednoznačná odpověď: Ano!

Jiná odpověď: Záleží na a) tom, jak si ceníte svých dat, b) jak je těžké vytvořit zálohu a c) jak jste si jisti s údržbou a správou MySQL. 

Selhání aktualizace může ponechat databázi v nekonzistentním stavu mezi dvěma verzemi.
Během aktualizace může dojít k chybě PHP nebo MySQL, takže vaše databáze bude aktualizována pouze částečně.
V takových situacích je možné tento problém nějak vyřešit manuální zásahem.
Bude však ''mnohem snazší'' udělat zálohu databáze před spuštěním update.php.
Jinak byste mohli mít hodiny - zbytečné - práce.

Obnova je často složitá.
Dobrovolníci na fórech podpory pravděpodobně nebudou ohromeni, pokud zanedbáte zálohu a poté budete potřebovat pomoc, abyste se zbavili problémů související se špatnou aktualizací.
Lepší je, pokud se můžete vrátit k záloze a poté [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|ohlásit chybu odpovídajícího projektu MediaWiki]] v procesu aktualizace, který způsobil poškození.

=== Mohu si ponechat LocalSettings.php? ===
Ano, ale možná budete muset provést některé drobné změny. Formát {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} je do značné míry zpětně kompatibilní.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== Může moje wiki zůstat online, zatímco probíhá upgrade? ===

Obecně ano, Git jej však může dočasně (na několik sekund) přerušit.

Pokud přecházíte na menší vydání MediaWiki, stačí aktualizovat zdrojové soubory.

Poznámka: Pro další kroky je předpokládáno, že máte přístup z příkazového řádku. Pokud přecházíte mezi hlavními vydáními MediaWiki, je upřednostňován následující postup:

# Rozbalte novou verzi MediaWiki do nového adresáře.
# Připravte nový adresář: Zkopírujte aktuální LocalSettings.php ze starého adresáře, zkopírujte všechny nainstalované přípony a vlastní zobrazení (pokud existují). Zkontrolujte nastavení {{wg|Logo}} a {{wg|Logos}} v LocalSettings.php a v případě potřeby zkopírujte soubor loga ze starého adresáře do nového adresáře.
# V poznámkách k aktualizaci nové verze zjistěte, zda je nutné provést nějaké změny v LocalSettings.php.
# Upravte databázi do režimu jen pro čtení vložením následující proměnné do LocalSettings.php ve starém adresáři - uživatelé uvidí tuto zprávu, pokud se během procesu aktualizace pokusí upravit stránku:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Toto již nefunguje od verze MediaWiki 1.27, což také zabraňuje spuštění aktualizačního skriptu. Řešení verzí od MediaWiki 1.27 a mladších najdete v {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. Viz také {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Spusťte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|aktualizační script]] nebo webovou aktualizaci v novém adresáři.
# Zkopírujte obrázky z podadresáře images sub-directory ze starého do nového adresáře.
# Zaměňte starý adresář za nový adresář s novými soubory.

=== Proč aktualizovat? ===
:''Přihlaste se k odběru oznámení o nových verzích.''

Protože je aktualizace [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|obvykle snadná]]. [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|Jeden krok od vaší staré verze k nejnovější]] a také jednoduše [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|přes web]].

Poslední vydání aktualizací instalují opravy zabezpečení tak, aby byla vaše wiki a váš počítač chráněn před vandaly a spamy, zatímco stará vydání nejsou vždy aktuální k současnému stavu (viz {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). Díky tomu jsou desítky dobrých důvodů pro doporučené pravidelné aktualizace!

Nová hlavní vydání aktualizací také přicházejí s novými funkcemi, které byste mohli chtít použít: Podrobnosti naleznete vždy v poznámkách k vydání. V případě, že potřebujete další argumenty, abyste přesvědčili své šéfy pro aktualizaci z velmi staré verze, je zde shrnutí:

* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}} [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|lze úpravy prohlížet před uložením]] jako rozdíl v porovnání s původním stavem.
* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}} je k dispozici [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|tlačítko zpět]].
* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}} je [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|sledování]] na [[Special:NewPages|Nových stránkách]] mnohem jednodušší.
* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}} můžete [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|přejmenovat]] (nebo přesunovat) soubory.
* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}} můžete automaticky [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|opravit dvojitá přesměrování]].
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}} je k dispozici {{ll|InstantCommons}}.
* Pokud máte vhodné ukládání do mezipaměti, od verze 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} silně optimalizuje rychlost načítání stránky.
* Od verze 1.17 je zařazení [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|kategorie třídění smysluplné!]] Zejména u neanglických textů. Rozšířeno na 68 jazyků {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} a {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} jsou uživatelé všech jazyků a pohlaví správně osloveni rozhraním a [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|protokoly]] (do verze 1.15, oslovení podle pohlaví nebylo).
* Ve verzi {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} byl systém zobrazování přepracován, což usnadňuje opětovné použití částí existujících zobrazení ve vašich vlastních zobrazeních.
* Od verze [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]] jsou [[m:Help:Diff|rozdíly]] čitelnější.
* Ve verzích [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] a [[MediaWiki 1.23 |1.23]] jsou emailová oznámení jasnější a předvídatelnější, takže vaše wiki bude efektivnější.
* Od verze [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]] je boj s vandaly (hlídání proti napadení) méně časově náročný.
* Ve verzi [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]] bylo vylepšeno úložiště hesel. Pro zajištění lepšího zabezpečení wiki.
* Od verze [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|jsou k dispozici vylepšené poslední změny]]
* Ve verzi [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]] byl vylepšen mechanismus [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot;]]
* Ve verzi [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]] byla přepracována správa relací a kompletně modernizována správa autentizace uživatelů. InstantCommons již nevyžaduje místní soubory.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}} se zlepšila mezipaměť vykreslovaného HTML stránek článků.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}} bylo API přepracováno a vylepšeno. Nyní lze také provést přiřazení skupiny uživatelů na volitelné období. Povoleno blokování rozsahu IP adres.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}} nemohou blokovaní uživatelé změnit svůj email. Přidána možnost vyhledávat příspěvky v rozsahu IP na Special:Contributions.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}} jsou nyní některá rozšíření součástí jádra, například {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}. Bylo představeno {{ll|Skin:Timeless}}. Přidán výchozí limit rychlosti úprav 90 úprav/minutu pro všechny uživatele.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}} podporuje MediaWiki více než 350 jazyků.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}} podporuje MediaWiki &quot;částečné bloky&quot;, kde lze IP adresám a účtům omezit úpravy konkrétních stránek nebo jmenných prostorů.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, více rozšíření součástí jádra: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (pro moduly Lua), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (stabilní vydání dlouhodobé podpory) jsou {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} součástí jádra. Funkci &quot;hodinky&quot; lze rozšířit o data vypršení platnosti.

Také jsme ve verzi {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} začali [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|sdružovat některá důležitá rozšíření]], jako je lepší editor a nástroje proti vandalismu ConfirmEdit a Nuke. Další rozšíření byla přidána v pozdějších vydáních.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Související stránky ==

* Příspěvek na blogu Grega Sabina Mullaneho poskytuje [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html více podrobností o aktualizacích různých verzí] .
* [[Project:Support desk|Podpora]] - pokud potřebujete pomoc nebo se něco pokazilo
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - jak obnovit obsah wiki, pokud nemáte použitelnou zálohu
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>clfdwe7k1mpx9mgqdtbsfhctdup5wi1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402960</id>
      <parentid>5402958</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:43:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="41842" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Základní přehled ==

=== Přístup k souborům ===

Zvolte si metodu přenosu souborů:

* Stažení přes [[w:Wget|wget]]
* Kopírování přes [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] či [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* Kopírování souborů přes [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|protokol přenosu souborů SSH]] (SFTP)
* Kopírování souborů přes [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] klienta.
* Pokud vaše hostingová společnost umožňuje přístup k vašim souborům přes webové rozhraní, můžete využít webový prohlížeč. Zjistěte si jaké máte možnosti u svého poskytovatele.
* Nějaký jiný způsob. Co vše se dá použít najdete v [[w:List of file transfer protocols|seznamu všech existujících protokolů pro přenos souborů]]

=== Příprava ===

Přečtěte si {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=textový soubor UPGRADE obsažený v MediaWiki}}.

# Zkontrolujte požadavky
# Přečtěte si soubor RELEASE-NOTES
# Přečtěte si soubor UPGRADE
# Udělejte zálohu stávajícího obsahu databáze a všech souborů
# Rozbalte nové soubory
# Aktualizujte rozšíření
# Spusťte aktualizační skript, který zkontroluje schéma databáze
# Zkontrolujte, je-li po aktualizaci vše jak má být
# Odstraňte pozůstatky po staré instalaci

== Kontrola požadavků == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} vyžaduje:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Jednu z následujících databází:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Od verze 1.36 se MediaWiki zavazuje podporovat pouze upgrady z předchozích dvou vydání LTS (viz [[phab:T259771]]). Aktualizace ze starších verzí MediaWiki budou muset být provedeny v několika krocích.
To znamená, že pokud chcete aktualizovat na verzi 1.36 z verze 1.23 nebo dřívějších, musíte nejprve upgradovat svou wiki z verze 1.23 na novější verzi 1.27 (nebo 1.35) a teprve z této verze 1.27 (nebo 1.35) budete moci upgradovat na verzi 1.36.

Pokud používáte databázi PostgreSQL, přečtěte si, prosím, také {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Další informace obsahuje {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} a stránka {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Přečtěte si poznámky k vydání ==
V distribučním tarballu nebo v souborech rezervovaných či exportovaných z [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] existuje řada souborů s názvy psanými velkými písmeny, z nichž jeden obsahuje '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).
Nyní je ta pravá chvíle do něj nahlédnout a zjistit, co se u této verze změnilo.
Nezapomeňte si také přečíst instrukce v souboru UPGRADE.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Dokončete čekající úlohy ==
Z důvodu regulace výkonu počítače jsou některé akce v databázi zpožděny a jsou spravovány ve [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|frontě úloh]].
Tyto úlohy jsou uloženy v databázi a obsahují parametry s informacemi o akcích, které se mají provést.
Důrazně doporučujeme spustit tyto čekající úlohy před aktualizací wiki, aby nedošlo k jejich selhání v případě, že by se specifikace parametrů těchto úloh v nové verzi změnila.
Pomocí {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} spusťte všechny čekající úlohy a před provedením aktualizace frontu vymažte.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Udělejte zálohu databáze a stávajících souborů ==

: ''Úplné pokyny k zálohování jsou na stránce: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

I když jsou aktualizační skripty dobře udržované a robustní, stále by se cokoli mohlo pokazit. Před pokračováním v aktualizaci databázového schématu '''vytvořte úplnou [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|zálohu]]''' souborů wiki včetně databáze:

* Obsah wiki z databáze (ujistěte se, že je sada znaků zadána správně, nejprve zkontrolujte LocalSettings.php). Může být dobrý nápad vytvořit výpis XML kromě výpisu databáze SQL.
:* MySQL, výpis SQL i výpis XML se používají pro příkaz &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt;:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, výpis z databáze pro použití s příkazem &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt;:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, pro zálohování používáte skript MediaWiki:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* Obrázky a další mediální soubory (obsah adresáře &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt;, vlastní logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png).
* Konfigurační soubory, např. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (pokud existuje).
* Programové soubory MediaWiki, včetně všech zobrazení a rozšíření, zejména pokud jste je upravovali.

== Rozbalte nové soubory==

=== Použití balíčku tarball ===

Nové soubory můžete umístit pomocí FTP nebo příkazového řádku. Použijte příkazový řádek, pokud k němu máte přístup! Použití příkazového řádku bude mnohem rychlejší, než kdyby bylo nutné nahrát každý z tisíců souborů přes FTP.

{{Note|1=Dekomprimovaný tarball byste měli umístit do nové a prázdné složky na serveru. Pokud místo toho extrahujete novou verzi přímo v části staré verze, nikoli v novém adresáři, měli byste postupovat podle pokynů popsaných v [[#Back up existing files and the database|Zálohování existujících souborů a databáze]]: Jinak, pokud jste provedli jakékoli úpravy smazáním, soubory již nepůjdou obnovit! Rozbalením tarballu na živé kopii MediaWiki můžete také ponechat soubory ze staré verze MediaWiki, které mohou rušit nově aktualizovaný kód. Doporučujeme rozbalit nové soubory do nového adresáře a poté do nového adresáře použít úpravy (obnovení LocalSettings.php, složky obrázků, rozšíření a dalších přizpůsobení, jako jsou vlastní zobrazení).}}

==== Pomocí FTP nebo graficky ====

Pokud nemůžete získat přístup k příkazovému řádku na serveru, stáhněte si tarball MediaWiki do místního počítače a pomocí [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] rozbalte tarball na místním počítači.

Po lokálním extrahování souborů použijte svůj oblíbený FTP klientský software k nahrání adresářů a souborů na server.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Příkazovým řádkem ====
Pokud nemáte úplná oprávnění pro zápis do instalačních adresářů wiki u aktuálního uživatele, možná nemůžete příkaz spustit jako &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt;.
Když normálně zrušíte rozbalení tarballového balíčku, vytvoří se nový adresář pro novou verzi wiki a budete muset zkopírovat staré konfigurační soubory a adresáře obrázků z vašeho starého instalačního adresáře:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

Uživatelé systému (Open)Solaris by měli používat &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt; nebo:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

=== Další informace ===

Po rozbalení tarballu byste měli zkopírovat nebo přesunout některé soubory a složky ze starého instalačního adresáře do nového:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - obsahuje vaše stará nastavení.
* Adresář &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (nebo &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; ve starších verzích), který obsahuje všechny nahrané soubory na wiki, pokud jste nevybrali jiný adresář pro nahrání a nezměníte vlastnictví a oprávnění. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (např. pokud je váš webový uživatel ''apache'').
* Některá rozšíření v adresáři &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt;. Vždy byste měli získat aktualizovaná rozšíření! Stará rozšíření nezaručují, že budou fungovat s novější verzí MediaWiki.
* V případě, že používáte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo| vlastní logo]], je třeba tento soubor také obnovit ze zálohy. Před verzí 1.24 obvykle ve &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. Po verzi 1.24 v &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; nebo &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt;. Potom přidejte do LocalSettings.php např. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Pro verzi 1.35 možná budete muset obnovit loga z [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Poté přidejte do LocalSettings.php např. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Vlastní zobrazení z adresáře &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;.
* Jakékoli úpravy starých instalačních souborů nebo přípon.
* Jakýkoli soubor .htaccess (pokud používáte Apache a máte v nich definována pravidla).

Po dokončení vytvořte z této nové složky publikovatelnou složku na webovém serveru nebo přejmenujte starý instalační adresář a novou přejmenujte tak, aby odpovídala starému názvu.

=== Používání Git ===

Pokud používáte {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, exportujte soubory do nového prázdného adresáře a zkopírujte staré přizpůsobené soubory do nového adresáře, jak je popsáno v předchozí části.

Budete také muset nainstalovat některé externí knihovny PHP pomocí Composeru nebo poskytované kolekce udržované pro farmu Wikimedie.
Další podrobnosti o instalaci a aktualizaci externích knihoven najdete v [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|dokumentaci ke stažení Git]].

=== Použití oprav ===
Pro opravu menší verze je obvykle k dispozici malý soubor opravy.
Abyste jej mohli používat, musíte si stáhnout [[w:patch (Unix)|záplatu]] (patch).
Ručně stáhněte a extrahujte soubor opravy z [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ od poskytovatele] nebo postupujte podle pokynů pomocí wget (utilita pro jednoduché stahování souborů z internetu) níže.
Opravy jsou přírůstkové, '''nemůžete''' přeskočit verzi.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; do hlavního adresáře MediaWiki (adresáře s LocalSettings.php).
# Stáhněte soubor opravy a &lt;kbd&gt;rozbalte&lt;/kbd&gt; jej.
# Pomocí &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; zkontrolujte, co se změnilo (''např.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
# Pokud je vše v pořádku, spusťte znovu &lt;kbd&gt;záplatu&lt;/kbd&gt; bez &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
# Zkontrolujte svou stránku Special:Version a měli byste tam vidět číslo nové verze.

=== Ostatní soubory, které mohou způsobit chyby ===

Pokud rozbalíte starý instalační adresář, některé staré soubory mohou způsobit problémy s novou verzí.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Pokud nepoužíváte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profilování]], ale máte soubor &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; v kořenové složce MediaWiki, můžete obdržet chyby odkazující na &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.
Tuto chybu vyřešíte odstraněním nebo přejmenováním souboru &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;. Soubor &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt;, také v kořenové složce MediaWiki, může sloužit jako šablona, pokud v budoucnu povolíte profilování.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.23 zavrhuje mechanismus automatického zjišťování vzhledu souborů jádra. Po aktualizaci na tuto verzi byste se měli ujistit, že byly odstraněny staré soubory &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; přímo v adresáři &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; a také příslušné podsložky v adresáři &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt;. Pokud budou nějaké z nich i potom nalezeny, vydá MediaWiki, pro vaši kontrolu, varování. (Budete také muset upravit všechna vlastní zobrazení, aby se řídila podobnou konvencí.) Podrobnosti najdete na stránce {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 mění cesty základních souborů zobrazení. Po aktualizaci na tuto verzi byste měli zajistit, aby staré soubory &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; přímo v adresáři &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; již neexistovaly. Podrobnosti najdete na stránce {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}}.

== Aktualizujte rozšíření ==

Některá rozšíření byla aktualizována, aby fungovala s novou verzí MediaWiki. Ujistěte se, že aktualizujete na nejnovější verze i tato rozšíření. Možná budete muset provést ruční aktualizace vlastních rozšíření.

Různé [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] obsahují některé podmnožiny rozšíření a mají verze, které vám pomohou aktualizovat výběr toho správného pro vaši základní verzi MediaWiki.

[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Distributor rozšíření]] funguje dobře pro většinu uživatelů, kteří chtějí obraz rozšíření fungující s jejich podporovanými verzemi MediaWiki.

Pokud chcete hodně rozšíření, pak je pravděpodobně nejlepší [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|stažení z Gitu]].
Pokud Git nemáte, ale chcete aktualizovat mnoho rozšíření, můžete použít [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].

== Přizpůsobte si LocalSettings.php ==

Pokud používáte stejné &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; ze staré verze, možná budete muset přizpůsobit jeho zacházení s novými verzemi:

=== Registrace zobrazení ===

Vzhledem k tomu, že v MediaWiki 1.24 seskupená zobrazení, jako jsou Vector, Monobook, Modern a CologneBlue, již nejsou součástí jádra MediaWiki, je třeba je explicitně zaregistrovat do &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, aby je bylo možné použít. Jinak MediaWiki varuje, že nemáte nainstalovaná zobrazení.

Toto, musíte přidat k &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, když aktualizujete z verzí starších než 1.24 a chcete mít k dispozici jedno z těchto zobrazení:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Jiná zobrazení nemusí být stále přizpůsobena novému systému [[Manual:Extension registration|registrace zobrazení]]. Proto si v případě problémů na stránce dokumentace o každé položce přečtěte, jak ji správně zaregistrovat.

=== Registrace rozšíření ===

Od verze MediaWiki 1.25 používají rozšíření nový systém [[Manual:Extension registration|rozšíření registrace]].

Dříve by váš &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; obsahoval něco jako:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Toto lze převést na:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Rozšíření jsou upravena pro použití nového systému registrace rozšíření.
Rozšíření, která nejsou přizpůsobena, by měla používat starý způsob jejich instalace.
Další informace naleznete v instalačních pokynech na stránce rozšíření.

=== Ostatní proměnné ===
Některé proměnné mohou být zastaralé nebo jsou dokonce odstraněny.
Mít je v &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; obvykle nebude mít žádný význam ani účinek.
V novějších verzích mohou být přidány nové proměnné nebo některé stávající proměnné změnily svůj typ.
Obvykle se pro ně snažíme používat rozumná výchozí nastavení a v případě změny typu musí být zpětně kompatibilní.
V každém případě si tyto změny prohlédněte v poznámkách k vydání.

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== Spuštění aktualizačního skriptu ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
Aktualizovat (upgradovat) databázi MediaWiki lze dvěma způsoby: Buď z příkazového řádku nebo z webového prohlížeče. Pokud máte k serveru přístup do shellu, doporučuje se aktualizovat z příkazového řádku, protože se tím snižuje riziko přerušení procesu aktualizace vypršením časového limitu nebo resetem připojení.

Skript se také pokusí stáhnout všechny chybějící závislosti, které MediaWiki potřebuje.

=== Příkazový řádek ===

Otevřete příkazový řádek serveru nebo prostředí SSH nebo podobně. K příkazovému řádku se dostanete po připojení k serveru přes SSH. Pokud místní počítač, na kterém pracujete, běží na systému Microsoft Windows, budete potřebovat nástroj jako [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY], abyste mohli používat SSH. Z příkazového řádku nebo prostředí Shell přejděte do adresáře &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; a spusťte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|skript aktualizace]]:

 $ php update.php

Pokud se na serveru Linux objeví chyba, zkuste provést stejný příkaz jako root (uživatel s nejvyšším oprávněním v systému UNIX) (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).
Poznámka pro jednoduché instalace ve Windows (např. S {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):
Nejprve se ujistěte, že je spuštěn váš webový server (například Apache) a databáze (například MySQL).
Poté spusťte &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: Klikněte na něj pravým tlačítkem, vyberte Open With a přejděte na PHP.exe.
Výsledné okno příkazového řádku se pravděpodobně po dokončení aktualizace schématu automaticky uzavře.

Může se zobrazit zpráva, že vaše verze PHP je příliš stará a že MediaWiki potřebuje novější verzi.
Po této zprávě se aktualizace přeruší.
Důvodem této chyby je, že příkazový řádek může použít jinou verzi PHP než verzi, kterou máte, když spustíte MediaWiki z webového serveru.
Když se zobrazí tato zpráva, měli byste zkontrolovat, zda můžete spustit novější verzi PHP na shellu pomocí jiného příkazu: Může to být např. být ''php5'' nebo ''php56''.
Pokud je k dispozici jiná verze a - pokud ano - pod jakým jménem, záleží na nastavení vašeho serveru.
Pokud to nefunguje, zeptejte se svého hostitele. Určitě to budou vědět.

MediaWiki zkontroluje existující schéma a aktualizuje ho tak, aby pracovalo s novým kódem. Podle potřeby přidává tabulky a sloupce.

{{Note|1=Pokud používáte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|databázi Shared]], měli byste, pokud chcete aktualizovat sdílené tabulky, předat parametr &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt;. V opačném případě se jich nedotkne aktualizační skript.}}

==== Co dělat, když php update.php nic nedělá, což má za následek rychlou pauzu a návrat do příkazového řádku ====

To může být způsobeno nefunkčním prodloužením nebo zobrazením.

* Zkontrolujte, zda jsou přítomna všechna rozšíření a zobrazení požadované v LocalSettings.php.
* Zkontrolujte, zda rozšíření používají správnou metodu registrace (wfLoadExtension proti require_once).
* Zakomentujte první polovinu rozšíření v LocalSettings.php. Pokud to způsobí, že update.php bude fungovat, odkomentujte polovinu této poloviny (tedy 1/4 rozšíření). Pokud to NEZPŮSOBÍ, že update.php funguje, odkomentujte první polovinu, ale okomentujte druhou polovinu a poté okomentujte polovinu druhé poloviny atd. Opakujte, dokud update.php nebude fungovat, abyste našli ten, který selhal.

==== Co dělat v případě chyby &quot;Příkaz ALTER uživateli byl odepřen&quot; (nebo podobně) ====

V případě, že se skripty přeruší podobnou zprávou:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

Zkontrolujte, zda jste definovali {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} a {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} v souboru {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} (v hlavním adresáři). Jedná se o uživatele a heslo, které tento skript potřebuje pro přístup k databázi.

Zdá se, že se v některých případech pro aktualizaci názvu tabulky čte stará proměnná $wgDBmwschema (pro Postgres) místo $wgDBname, i když se používá MySQL. Pokud tomu tak je, zbavte se definice $wgDBmwschema v LocalSettings.php.

==== Co dělat v případě &quot;neočekávané T_STRING&quot; chyby ====

Pokud spouštíte update.php z příkazového řádku, může se objevit následující chyba:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

K této chybě dochází, když je update.php spuštěn z php4.

Ti, jejichž web hostují poskytovatelé, kteří poskytují php4 i php5, by měli provést následující kroky:

# Z příkazového řádku zadejte příkaz 'whereis php5'.
# Jakmile zjistíte umístění cesty php5, vypište obsah adresáře php5/bin.
# Jakmile určíte název spustitelného souboru PHP (PHP nebo php5), zadejte celou cestu a spusťte update.php.

Níže je uveden příklad:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

==== Co dělat v případě, že 'registerer_argc_argv je nastaven na false' error ====

Může dojít k chybě:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Přejděte na ~/maintenance (údržba). Upravte existující soubor 'php.ini' nebo si nějaký vytvořte. 
# Přidejte tento řádek:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# Znovu spusťte &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;.

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
=== Webový prohlížeč ===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''Viz také {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

Pokud je vaše databáze již velká a ve velkém pracovním vytížení, neměli byste používat webový aktualizátor, např. protože se proces aktualizace přeruší, jakmile bude dosaženo ''maximálního časového limitu''. V takovém případě byste měli použít [[update.php]] z rozhraní příkazového řádku (nikoli z webu). Co přesně je &quot;příliš velká&quot;, záleží na vašem serveru (např. na jeho výkonu, zatížení a na tom, jak dlouho maximální doba spuštění PHP umožňuje spuštění skriptu). Pokud je vaše wiki příliš velká pro webovou aktualizaci a váš poskytovatel hostingu neumožňuje přístup z příkazového řádku, musíte migrovat wiki na jiný hostingový účet, nejlépe na ten, který má přístup do shellu.

# Vždy před provedením údržby databáze [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|ručně zálohujte wiki]].
# Navigujte svůj webový prohlížeč do &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;. Pokud je například vaše wiki na &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, přejděte na &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.
# Vyberte svůj jazyk a klikněte na &quot;Pokračovat&quot; (continue).
# Existující instalace by měla být detekována. Aktualizujte ji podle pokynů na obrazovce. &lt;br/&gt; Pokud budete požádáni o &quot;aktualizační klíč&quot; (upgrade key), otevřete soubor {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} a vyhledejte klíč přiřazený {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.

Může se stát, že se zdá, že webový aktualizátor nefunguje: Místo zobrazení úvodní obrazovky pro výběr jazyka se může zobrazit prázdná stránka wiki, pravděpodobně s nějakou chybovou zprávou. V tomto případě je nejpravděpodobnější, že váš webový server používá Pravidla pro přepisování (Rewrite Rules) (nejpravděpodobněji pro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|krátkou URL]]), která vám nezobrazí aktualizátor ''mw-config/'', ale wiki stránku na ''Mw-config/'', s velkým písmenem &quot;M&quot;. V tomto případě po dobu aktualizace přejmenujte soubor ''.htaccess''. Pak byste měli mít přístup k webovému aktualizátoru.

{{Warning|1=Pokud použijete tuto metodu, nezapomeňte po spuštění aktualizačního skriptu změnit název souboru .htaccess zpět! V opačném případě dojde k poškození krátkých adres URL a případně i dalších položek!}}

== Test aktualizace ==

Po dokončení aktualizace přejděte na wiki a zkontrolujte, zda následující operace fungují podle očekávání:

* Prohlížení stránek (viewing pages).
* Úpravy stránek (editing pages).
* Nahrávání souboru (uploading a file).
* Navštivte stránku [[Special:Version]] a zkontrolujte, zda je zobrazená verze správná a zda jsou přítomna rozšíření.

== Odstraňte pozůstatky starých instalací ==
Pokud jste zkopírovali svou předchozí instalaci do jiné složky na serveru, ujistěte se, že ji odeberete nebo ji z webu zcela znepřístupněte.
Je velmi důležité nenechávat staré instalace přístupné z webu, protože to zcela maří účel aktualizace a ponechává váš server otevřený útokům.

== Často kladené otázky (FAQ) ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
=== Jak je těžké aktualizovat? (upgrade)===

Pokud je jediný soubor, který jste změnili, {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} a provádíte aktualizaci z verze 1.5 nebo novější, proces je velmi jednoduchý. Zabere vám to je jen pár minut. Změny schématu databáze zaberou určitý čas úměrný velikosti vaší databáze - potenciálně hodiny pro wiki s miliony stránek. Pro typičtější velikost několika tisíc stránek se obvykle provádí během několika sekund.

Drobné aktualizace ve stejné hlavní verzi, například od {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 do {{MW legacy release number}}, nevyžadují vůbec žádné změny schématu.
Můžete pouze aktualizovat soubory. Databáze nepotřebuje žádnou aktualizaci, proto není nutné spouštět aktualizační skript.

Aktualizace verze 1.4 nebo starší je potenciálně komplikovaná, protože byla zrušena podpora pro jiné znakové sady než UTF-8 a také  bylo změněno schéma pro ukládání hromadného textu. Přečtěte si prosím příslušnou sekci v souboru &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt;.

Aktualizování je obtížné, pokud jste upravili náš zdrojový kód a nechcete, aby byly vaše změny přepsány. Užitečné mohou být nástroje jako [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] nebo [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge]. Pokud používáte neudržovaná rozšíření, může dojít k potížím. Aktualizujte rozšíření současně s aktualizací MediaWiki.

Pokud jste upravili zobrazení nebo použijete zobrazení vlastní, budete ho pravděpodobně muset upravit, aby spolupracovalo s novou verzí MediaWiki.

{{Tip|1=Místo toho, abyste pokaždé opravovali své &quot;globální&quot; soubory CSS a JS (JavaScript), můžete kód jednoduše přidat na své stránky MediaWiki:Common.js a MediaWiki:Common.css. Protože jsou součástí databáze, která bude znovu použita při aktualizaci, nebudete již muset opravovat základní soubory MediaWiki.}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== Jak mohu aktualizovat ze skutečně staré verze? V jednom kroku nebo v několika krocích? ===
Důležité: Pokud provádíte '''aktualizaci z MediaWiki verze 1.4 nebo starší''', měli byste nejprve aktualizovat na verzi MediaWiki 1.5.
Pokud aktualizujete z wiki Latin-1, použijte upgrade1_5.php (nalezený v MediaWiki 1.5) k převodu příslušných částí databáze na UTF-8 (aby to fungovalo, musí být ve vašem {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} $Latin nastaven na true).
Potom spusťte update.php a potom nastavte v nabídce LocalSettings.php možnost {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} na kódování dříve používané wiki (např. Windows-1252). To je v podstatě způsob, jak byly stránky Wikipedie a další stránky Wikimedia Foundation aktualizovány z verze MediaWiki 1.4 na 1.5 - viz [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki stránka nastavení pro enwiki] (Varování: Obrovská stránka!). Některé [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|související poznámky na Wikitech]].
Možná budete muset aktualizovat na MediaWiki verze 1.4 před spuštěním skriptu aktualizací verze 1.5.
Pokud chcete vytvořit výpis databáze (např. MySQL) vaší wiki Latin-1, aby nedošlo k problémům s kódováním znaků, ujistěte se, že typ pole &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; v textové tabulce {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} je &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, nikoli &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;.

Pokud '''provádíte aktualizaci MediaWiki verze 1.5 nebo novější''' z verze '''1.35''', můžete, ze staré na nejnovější stabilní verzi, aktualizovat v jednom kroku.
Drtivá většina zpráv, stejně jako automatické testování, ukazují, že to v jednom kroku funguje dobře.
Pokud nevěříte, přečtěte si [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|tento příspěvek]].
Mějte však na paměti, že při aktualizaci ze starých verzí je pravděpodobnost, že se setkáte s chybami PHP, větší než při aktualizaci z verze přímo předcházející nové verzi.
Tyto chyby by se stejně objevily, pokud byste nevynechali verze, ale chyby by byly spojeny s každou jednotlivou aktualizací.
Místo toho, pokud aktualizujete několik verzí najednou, získáte stejnou sadu chyb najednou.
To ztěžuje aktualizaci, ale nezapomeňte, že jste neměli potíže s aktualizací na přechodné verze, které jste přeskočili!

Pokud '''aktualizujete na MediaWiki verze 1.36''' nebo novější, budou podporovány pouze aktualizace z posledních dvou verzí LTS ([[phab:T259771]]). To znamená, že u velmi starých verzí nejprve aktualizujete na verzi MediaWiki 1.35 a poté upgradujete na verzi 1.36.

=== Měl bych nejprve zálohovat? ===

Krátká jednoznačná odpověď: Ano!

Jiná odpověď: Záleží na a) tom, jak si ceníte svých dat, b) jak je těžké vytvořit zálohu a c) jak jste si jisti s údržbou a správou MySQL. 

Selhání aktualizace může ponechat databázi v nekonzistentním stavu mezi dvěma verzemi.
Během aktualizace může dojít k chybě PHP nebo MySQL, takže vaše databáze bude aktualizována pouze částečně.
V takových situacích je možné tento problém nějak vyřešit manuální zásahem.
Bude však ''mnohem snazší'' udělat zálohu databáze před spuštěním update.php.
Jinak byste mohli mít hodiny - zbytečné - práce.

Obnova je často složitá.
Dobrovolníci na fórech podpory pravděpodobně nebudou ohromeni, pokud zanedbáte zálohu a poté budete potřebovat pomoc, abyste se zbavili problémů související se špatnou aktualizací.
Lepší je, pokud se můžete vrátit k záloze a poté [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|ohlásit chybu odpovídajícího projektu MediaWiki]] v procesu aktualizace, který způsobil poškození.

=== Mohu si ponechat LocalSettings.php? ===
Ano, ale možná budete muset provést některé drobné změny. Formát {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} je do značné míry zpětně kompatibilní.
Změny, které narušují kompatibilitu LocalSettings.php, budou dokumentovány v části &quot;Změny konfigurace&quot; v [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|Poznámkách k verzi]].

=== Může moje wiki zůstat online, zatímco probíhá upgrade? ===

Obecně ano, Git jej však může dočasně (na několik sekund) přerušit.

Pokud přecházíte na menší vydání MediaWiki, stačí aktualizovat zdrojové soubory.

Poznámka: Pro další kroky je předpokládáno, že máte přístup z příkazového řádku. Pokud přecházíte mezi hlavními vydáními MediaWiki, je upřednostňován následující postup:

# Rozbalte novou verzi MediaWiki do nového adresáře.
# Připravte nový adresář: Zkopírujte aktuální LocalSettings.php ze starého adresáře, zkopírujte všechny nainstalované přípony a vlastní zobrazení (pokud existují). Zkontrolujte nastavení {{wg|Logo}} a {{wg|Logos}} v LocalSettings.php a v případě potřeby zkopírujte soubor loga ze starého adresáře do nového adresáře.
# V poznámkách k aktualizaci nové verze zjistěte, zda je nutné provést nějaké změny v LocalSettings.php.
# Upravte databázi do režimu jen pro čtení vložením následující proměnné do LocalSettings.php ve starém adresáři - uživatelé uvidí tuto zprávu, pokud se během procesu aktualizace pokusí upravit stránku:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
#* Toto již nefunguje od verze MediaWiki 1.27, což také zabraňuje spuštění aktualizačního skriptu. Řešení verzí od MediaWiki 1.27 a mladších najdete v {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. Viz také {{phabricator|T151833}}.
# Spusťte [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|aktualizační script]] nebo webovou aktualizaci v novém adresáři.
# Zkopírujte obrázky z podadresáře images sub-directory ze starého do nového adresáře.
# Zaměňte starý adresář za nový adresář s novými soubory.

=== Proč aktualizovat? ===
:''Přihlaste se k odběru oznámení o nových verzích.''

Protože je aktualizace [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|obvykle snadná]]. [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|Jeden krok od vaší staré verze k nejnovější]] a také jednoduše [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|přes web]].

Poslední vydání aktualizací instalují opravy zabezpečení tak, aby byla vaše wiki a váš počítač chráněn před vandaly a spamy, zatímco stará vydání nejsou vždy aktuální k současnému stavu (viz {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). Díky tomu jsou desítky dobrých důvodů pro doporučené pravidelné aktualizace!

Nová hlavní vydání aktualizací také přicházejí s novými funkcemi, které byste mohli chtít použít: Podrobnosti naleznete vždy v poznámkách k vydání. V případě, že potřebujete další argumenty, abyste přesvědčili své šéfy pro aktualizaci z velmi staré verze, je zde shrnutí:

* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}} [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|lze úpravy prohlížet před uložením]] jako rozdíl v porovnání s původním stavem.
* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}} je k dispozici [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|tlačítko zpět]].
* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}} je [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|sledování]] na [[Special:NewPages|Nových stránkách]] mnohem jednodušší.
* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}} můžete [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|přejmenovat]] (nebo přesunovat) soubory.
* Od verze {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}} můžete automaticky [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|opravit dvojitá přesměrování]].
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}} je k dispozici {{ll|InstantCommons}}.
* Pokud máte vhodné ukládání do mezipaměti, od verze 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} silně optimalizuje rychlost načítání stránky.
* Od verze 1.17 je zařazení [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|kategorie třídění smysluplné!]] Zejména u neanglických textů. Rozšířeno na 68 jazyků {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} a {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} jsou uživatelé všech jazyků a pohlaví správně osloveni rozhraním a [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|protokoly]] (do verze 1.15, oslovení podle pohlaví nebylo).
* Ve verzi {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} byl systém zobrazování přepracován, což usnadňuje opětovné použití částí existujících zobrazení ve vašich vlastních zobrazeních.
* Od verze [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]] jsou [[m:Help:Diff|rozdíly]] čitelnější.
* Ve verzích [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] a [[MediaWiki 1.23 |1.23]] jsou emailová oznámení jasnější a předvídatelnější, takže vaše wiki bude efektivnější.
* Od verze [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]] je boj s vandaly (hlídání proti napadení) méně časově náročný.
* Ve verzi [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]] bylo vylepšeno úložiště hesel. Pro zajištění lepšího zabezpečení wiki.
* Od verze [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|jsou k dispozici vylepšené poslední změny]]
* Ve verzi [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]] byl vylepšen mechanismus [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot;]]
* Ve verzi [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]] byla přepracována správa relací a kompletně modernizována správa autentizace uživatelů. InstantCommons již nevyžaduje místní soubory.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}} se zlepšila mezipaměť vykreslovaného HTML stránek článků.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}} bylo API přepracováno a vylepšeno. Nyní lze také provést přiřazení skupiny uživatelů na volitelné období. Povoleno blokování rozsahu IP adres.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}} nemohou blokovaní uživatelé změnit svůj email. Přidána možnost vyhledávat příspěvky v rozsahu IP na Special:Contributions.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}} jsou nyní některá rozšíření součástí jádra, například {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}. Bylo představeno {{ll|Skin:Timeless}}. Přidán výchozí limit rychlosti úprav 90 úprav/minutu pro všechny uživatele.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}} podporuje MediaWiki více než 350 jazyků.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}} podporuje MediaWiki &quot;částečné bloky&quot;, kde lze IP adresám a účtům omezit úpravy konkrétních stránek nebo jmenných prostorů.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, více rozšíření součástí jádra: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (pro moduly Lua), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
* Od verze {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (stabilní vydání dlouhodobé podpory) jsou {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} součástí jádra. Funkci &quot;hodinky&quot; lze rozšířit o data vypršení platnosti.

Také jsme ve verzi {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} začali [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|sdružovat některá důležitá rozšíření]], jako je lepší editor a nástroje proti vandalismu ConfirmEdit a Nuke. Další rozšíření byla přidána v pozdějších vydáních.
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== Související stránky ==

* Příspěvek na blogu Grega Sabina Mullaneho poskytuje [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html více podrobností o aktualizacích různých verzí] .
* [[Project:Support desk|Podpora]] - pokud potřebujete pomoc nebo se něco pokazilo
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - jak obnovit obsah wiki, pokud nemáte použitelnou zálohu
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>mfyr8sskcjigqebftse31sl23lmfr2g</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Installing MediaWiki/29/cs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1064415</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402879</id>
      <parentid>5393630</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:41:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="111" xml:space="preserve">Nepoužívejte $2, pokud ji chcete nastavit jako [[$3|Short URL]] po spuštění [[$1|instalačního skriptu]].</text>
      <sha1>cmyan1l6hnr7dkdu0z9888c5d89i3z5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/135/cs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1065355</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402957</id>
      <parentid>4994594</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:42:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="120" xml:space="preserve">Ano, ale možná budete muset provést některé drobné změny. Formát $1 je do značné míry zpětně kompatibilní.</text>
      <sha1>8d8kdxpi9hfkz5kfvnqky5xln6my5qm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki/vi</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1065972</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401769</id>
      <parentid>5312701</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3811" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]].  See ShoutWiki's website at [http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com], or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki còn có [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 có nhóm Gerrit của họ] bao gồm những nhân viên ShoutWiki.

==Mở rộng==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Về ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Thông tin về ShoutWiki và mã nguồn mở]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki GitHub của ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1e99wmyvj20z3sy30gvngpiicq7po69</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401785</id>
      <parentid>5401769</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3809" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]]. See ShoutWiki's website at [http://www.shoutwiki.com www.ShoutWiki.com], or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's 'about page' on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki còn có [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 có nhóm Gerrit của họ] bao gồm những nhân viên ShoutWiki.

==Mở rộng==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Về ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Thông tin về ShoutWiki và mã nguồn mở]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki GitHub của ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5gkup1dpoay7ryalxcpedid3ere34p8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401885</id>
      <parentid>5401785</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3778" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many of ShoutWiki's staff members are also MediaWiki [[developers]]. See [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki's website] or [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki's about page on ShoutWiki] to find out more about ShoutWiki in general.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki còn có [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 có nhóm Gerrit của họ] bao gồm những nhân viên ShoutWiki.

==Mở rộng==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki uses many [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions|extensions]] used by [[Differences between Wikipedia, Wikimedia, MediaWiki, and wiki|Wikimedia]] sites, in addition to their own custom extensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Về ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Thông tin về ShoutWiki và mã nguồn mở]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; various code patches by ShoutWiki to MediaWiki code
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki GitHub của ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>jz86xqh3cyb9du6wex6dxz6ym8iqmho</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/8/cs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1070250</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402818</id>
      <parentid>5011101</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:19:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="57" xml:space="preserve">Pod hlavičkou: '''[[$1|Filtry pro Nedávné změny]]'''.</text>
      <sha1>8i8vn4lqrtyrqg3a50rntynwyn754mb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/cs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1072144</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402280</id>
      <parentid>5015180</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:04:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="43" xml:space="preserve">Další informace získáte na stránce $1.</text>
      <sha1>ogk489fwz744q5gmc43etqpo9c6krgi</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Editor/fr</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1079235</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402691</id>
      <parentid>5370844</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6688" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Vous cherchez peut-être :

== Actuels ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Logiciels de modification actuellement sur les wikis Wikimedia
!Outil de modification
!Capture d'écran
!Année
!Plateforme
!Remarques
|-
|l'éditeur MediaWiki par défaut, qui est un {{tag|textarea|open}} HTML
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Capture d'écran de la zone de texte HTML|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Ordinateur et mobile
|Il n’a pas de barre d’outils. Il peut être vu lorsque Javascript est désactivé ou lorsque « {{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}} » est désactivé dans les [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extension:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Capture d'écran de WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Ordinateur
|Vous pouvez le voir quand « {{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}} » est activé dans les [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Éditeur visuel]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Capture d'écran montrant le mode visuel de VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Ordinateur et mobile
|Un système de modification de texte enrichi
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|éditeur de wikicode 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Capture d'écran du mode wikicode de VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Ordinateur
|C’est un mode de {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}}.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Page de relecture]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Ordinateur
|Utilisé sur [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Capture d'écran de wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Ordinateur
|Un éditeur de wikicode entièrement pris en charge par des bénvoles. Il est généralement exécuté comme gadget ou script utilisateur, mais il est aussi exécuté comme extension sur certains wikis hors Wikimedia.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Capture d’écran de l'éditeur de code|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Ordinateur
|Il est utilisé pour modifier les pages de JavaScript ou autre code.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Éditeur actuel de wikicode de {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Capture d’écran de modification du wikicode depuis le web mobile|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobile
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Traduction de contenu]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Capture d’écran de l’outil de traduction de contenu|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Ordinateur
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Discussions structurées]] (anciennement Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Capture d’écran d’un commentaire et du début de réponse avec les Discussions structurées|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Ordinateur et mobile
|Discussions structurées prend en charge les modes wikicode et visuel.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Éditeur de l’application [[$android-faq|Android]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Capture d’écran de l’interface de modification depuis un téléphone Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Éditeur de l’application [[$ios-faq|iOS]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Capture d’écran de l’interface de modification depuis un iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|Éditeur de [[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Ordinateur
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Éditeur de liste de Wikivoyage]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Ordinateur
|Outil de modification spécialisé basé sur JavaScript pour insérer un ou plusieurs modèles sur Wikivoyage
|-
|}

== Anciens ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Logiciels de modification précédemment disponibles sur les wikis Wikimedia
|-
!Outil de modification
!Capture d’écran
!Année
!Plateforme
!Remarques
|-
|L'éditeur « classique » JavaScript 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Capture d'écran de l'éditeur de wikicode 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Ordinateur
|Il était visible lorsque la préférence « afficher la barre d’outils » était activée de 2006 à 2010. Ensuite, il fut uniquement affiché pour les utilisateurs qui désactivaient la préférence « barre d’outil améliorée » (éditeur 2010). Cet éditeur a été [[phab:T30856|supprimé]] dans [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Une barre d’outils similaire est disponible comme gadget pris en charge par les bénévoles sur certains wikis.
|-
|Éditeur de wikicode original de MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Mobile
|Il s’agissait d’un ensemble de modifications spécialement pour mobile pour l’éditeur de wikicode sur ordinateur 2003. Il n’est plus en ligne.
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>lqp9aq0337dfu8zwdegovmlb83njky7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402709</id>
      <parentid>5402691</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:06:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6681" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Vous cherchez peut-être :

== Actuels ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Logiciels de modification actuellement sur les wikis Wikimedia
!Outil de modification
!Capture d'écran
!Année
!Plateforme
!Remarques
|-
|l'éditeur MediaWiki par défaut, qui est un {{tag|textarea|open}} HTML
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Capture d'écran de la zone de texte HTML|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Ordinateur et mobile
|Il n’a pas de barre d’outils. Il peut être vu lorsque Javascript est désactivé ou lorsque « {{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}} » est désactivé dans les [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extension:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Capture d'écran de WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Ordinateur
|Vous pouvez le voir quand « {{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}} » est activé dans les [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Éditeur visuel]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Capture d'écran montrant le mode visuel de VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Ordinateur et mobile
|Un système de modification de texte enrichi
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|éditeur de wikicode 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Capture d'écran du mode wikicode de VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Ordinateur
|C’est un mode de {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}}.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Page de relecture]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Ordinateur
|Utilisé sur [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Capture d'écran de wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Ordinateur
|Un éditeur de wikicode entièrement pris en charge par des bénvoles. Il est généralement exécuté comme gadget ou script utilisateur, mais il est aussi exécuté comme extension sur certains wikis hors Wikimedia.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Capture d’écran de l'éditeur de code|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Ordinateur
|Il est utilisé pour modifier les pages de JavaScript ou autre code.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Éditeur actuel de wikicode de {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Capture d’écran de modification du wikicode depuis le web mobile|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobile
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Traduction de contenu]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Capture d’écran de l’outil de traduction de contenu|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Ordinateur
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Discussions structurées]] (anciennement Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Capture d’écran d’un commentaire et du début de réponse avec les Discussions structurées|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Ordinateur et mobile
|Discussions structurées prend en charge les modes wikicode et visuel.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Éditeur de l’application [[$android-faq|Android]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Capture d’écran de l’interface de modification depuis un téléphone Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|Éditeur de l’application [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Capture d’écran de l’interface de modification depuis un iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|Éditeur de [[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Ordinateur
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Éditeur de liste de Wikivoyage]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Ordinateur
|Outil de modification spécialisé basé sur JavaScript pour insérer un ou plusieurs modèles sur Wikivoyage
|-
|}

== Anciens ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Logiciels de modification précédemment disponibles sur les wikis Wikimedia
|-
!Outil de modification
!Capture d’écran
!Année
!Plateforme
!Remarques
|-
|L'éditeur « classique » JavaScript 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Capture d'écran de l'éditeur de wikicode 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Ordinateur
|Il était visible lorsque la préférence « afficher la barre d’outils » était activée de 2006 à 2010. Ensuite, il fut uniquement affiché pour les utilisateurs qui désactivaient la préférence « barre d’outil améliorée » (éditeur 2010). Cet éditeur a été [[phab:T30856|supprimé]] dans [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Une barre d’outils similaire est disponible comme gadget pris en charge par les bénévoles sur certains wikis.
|-
|Éditeur de wikicode original de MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Mobile
|Il s’agissait d’un ensemble de modifications spécialement pour mobile pour l’éditeur de wikicode sur ordinateur 2003. Il n’est plus en ligne.
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>8xp7qx1gzle1wspiecorehhpocbosv0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402731</id>
      <parentid>5402709</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:09:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6674" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Vous cherchez peut-être :

== Actuels ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Logiciels de modification actuellement sur les wikis Wikimedia
!Outil de modification
!Capture d'écran
!Année
!Plateforme
!Remarques
|-
|l'éditeur MediaWiki par défaut, qui est un {{tag|textarea|open}} HTML
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Capture d'écran de la zone de texte HTML|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Ordinateur et mobile
|Il n’a pas de barre d’outils. Il peut être vu lorsque Javascript est désactivé ou lorsque « {{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}} » est désactivé dans les [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extension:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Capture d'écran de WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Ordinateur
|Vous pouvez le voir quand « {{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}} » est activé dans les [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Éditeur visuel]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Capture d'écran montrant le mode visuel de VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Ordinateur et mobile
|Un système de modification de texte enrichi
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|éditeur de wikicode 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Capture d'écran du mode wikicode de VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Ordinateur
|C’est un mode de {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}}.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Page de relecture]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Ordinateur
|Utilisé sur [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Capture d'écran de wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Ordinateur
|Un éditeur de wikicode entièrement pris en charge par des bénvoles. Il est généralement exécuté comme gadget ou script utilisateur, mais il est aussi exécuté comme extension sur certains wikis hors Wikimedia.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Capture d’écran de l'éditeur de code|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Ordinateur
|Il est utilisé pour modifier les pages de JavaScript ou autre code.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Éditeur actuel de wikicode de {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Capture d’écran de modification du wikicode depuis le web mobile|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobile
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Traduction de contenu]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Capture d’écran de l’outil de traduction de contenu|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Ordinateur
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Discussions structurées]] (anciennement Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Capture d’écran d’un commentaire et du début de réponse avec les Discussions structurées|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Ordinateur et mobile
|Discussions structurées prend en charge les modes wikicode et visuel.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Desktop (mobile soon)&lt;/span&gt;
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|Éditeur de l’application [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Android FAQ|Android]]
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Capture d’écran de l’interface de modification depuis un téléphone Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|Éditeur de l’application [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Capture d’écran de l’interface de modification depuis un iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|Éditeur de [[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Ordinateur
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Éditeur de liste de Wikivoyage]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Ordinateur
|Outil de modification spécialisé basé sur JavaScript pour insérer un ou plusieurs modèles sur Wikivoyage
|-
|}

== Anciens ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Logiciels de modification précédemment disponibles sur les wikis Wikimedia
|-
!Outil de modification
!Capture d’écran
!Année
!Plateforme
!Remarques
|-
|L'éditeur « classique » JavaScript 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Capture d'écran de l'éditeur de wikicode 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Ordinateur
|Il était visible lorsque la préférence « afficher la barre d’outils » était activée de 2006 à 2010. Ensuite, il fut uniquement affiché pour les utilisateurs qui désactivaient la préférence « barre d’outil améliorée » (éditeur 2010). Cet éditeur a été [[phab:T30856|supprimé]] dans [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Une barre d’outils similaire est disponible comme gadget pris en charge par les bénévoles sur certains wikis.
|-
|Éditeur de wikicode original de MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Mobile
|Il s’agissait d’un ensemble de modifications spécialement pour mobile pour l’éditeur de wikicode sur ordinateur 2003. Il n’est plus en ligne.
|-
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>phnqy6o7nhqqkuim389sa4xxohepbti</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/67/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1079455</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402708</id>
      <parentid>3765637</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:06:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="38" xml:space="preserve">Éditeur de l’application [[$1|iOS]]</text>
      <sha1>m12mzuaw8o1iibhiex1hxtobgb34jt5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/63/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1080205</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402730</id>
      <parentid>3810435</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:09:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="42" xml:space="preserve">Éditeur de l’application [[$1|Android]]</text>
      <sha1>tmp5cmilry7xdn0ipg57j4e0n2362hl</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/fi</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1087393</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402154</id>
      <parentid>4919121</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:37:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8148" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since 2017, {{ll|VisualEditor}} provides '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' (visual difference displays).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are available in two places in the interface: when previewing changes to the document before the user saves the page, and (as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta feature]]) within the standard MediaWiki diff display, accessed from the history page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In both cases, the visual diff shows up alongside the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|traditional two-column wikitext diff]], and the user can toggle between the two displays.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diffs have two main advantages over wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first is that editors can directly see the changes they and others have made without needing to understand [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitext]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is particularly helpful when looking at changes to graphical structures such as tables; for example, if an edit deletes a column from a table, the wikitext diff for it would be hard to understand, while the visual diff would be immediately obvious.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The second is that the technology can be used to more accurately represent the change to the reader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if an edit swapped two paragraphs (with or without changes to the paragraphs), the visual diff will identify that this is what occurred, while a wikitext diff makes it appear that a paragraph was deleted and an entirely new paragraph was added.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== On regular diff pages ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of the examples and screenshots below are about using visual diffs during page previews when editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, VisualEditor's visual diffs can also be used on regular diff pages, on any wiki that has VisualEditor installed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can see an example of it in use on the English-language Wikipedia [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|here]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For wikis that have VisualEditor, there are several ways to activate this visual diff display:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If your wiki has a &quot;Beta features&quot; tab within Special:Preferences, and you want to make visual diffs an &quot;opt-in&quot; feature for users, you can add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* As seen in the Wikipedia example linked above, the visual diff mode can also be activated by simply adding &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; to the URL of a diff page.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Kuinka se toimii ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=Kuvakaappaus, jossa näkyy joitakin artikkeliin tehtyjä muutoksia. Useimmat muutokset on korostettu tekstin muotoilulla.|left|thumb|300px|Kun olet viimeistellyt sivun muokkaamisen, kirjoita muokkausyhteenveto ja valitse &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.

Visuaalisessa tilassa lisäykset, poistot, linkkien lisäykset ja muotoilut korostetaan. Muut eroavaisuudet, kuten muutokset kuvien ko'issa, huomioidaan sivun oikeassa reunassa.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Toggle button showing visual and wikitext options; visual option is selected.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|220x220px|Näistä napeista voit vaihtaa eroavaisuuden tarkastelua visuaalisen ja wikitekstin tilan välillä.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing the same changes, in the two-column wikitext diff display.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|245x245px|Wikitekstin eroavaisuustila on sama eroavaisuustyökalu, jota käytetään wikitekstin muokkaustilassa ja sivuhistoriassa.]]

{{clr}}
== Esimerkkejä ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Rich text edits&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|Visuaalisen tilan eroavaisuusnäkymä
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|Wikitekstitilan eroavaisuusnäkymä
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Hienovarainen vandalismi jossa kappale samalla siirtyy&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|Visuaalisen tilan eroavaisuusnäkymä
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff (2017).  This feature was added to the wikitext diff engine in 2018; see [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Taulukon sarake poistettu&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|Visuaalisen tilan eroavaisuusnäkymä
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|Wikitekstitilan eroavaisuusnäkymä
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Tekstin, muotoilun ja luetteloiden muutokset&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|Visuaalisen tilan eroavaisuusnäkymä
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|Wikitekstitilan eroavaisuusnäkymä
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insert new multimedia (sheet music)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|Visuaalisen tilan eroavaisuusnäkymä
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|Wikitekstitilan eroavaisuusnäkymä
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== Käytetty teknologia ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thalia Chan, Unifying editing and visual diffs, Wikimania 2017&lt;/span&gt;]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Current limitations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No notices for changes to &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, such as categories or TOC keywords.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Has issues with complex changes to tables.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unavailable on certain special pages:&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Undo &quot;diff&quot; pages.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit conflict pages&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== History ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This feature has been available as the first diff tool in the desktop VisualEditor from the 1.31.0-wmf-20 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 6 February 2018).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before that, it was a secondary tool from the 1.29.0-wmf-17 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 21 March 2017).&lt;/span&gt;

== Katso myös ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Huomioita ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>a4l4iol165h714iow3ewdujpxm7zabe</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Editor/tr</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1088351</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402699</id>
      <parentid>5390881</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6160" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Şunu arıyor olabilirsiniz:

== Şuan ki ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Wikimedia vikilerinde mevcut düzenleme yazılımı
!Düzenleme aracı
!Ekran görüntüsü
!Yıl
!Platform
!Notlar
|-
|HTML {{tag|textarea|open}} olan varsayılan MediaWiki düzenleyicisi
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=HTML metin alanının ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Masaüstü ve mobil
|Bunun bir araç çubuğu yok. JavaScript devre dışı bırakıldığında veya [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]]'de &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; devre dışı bırakıldığında görülebilir.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extension:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=WikiEditor ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Masaüstü
|Bu, [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]]'de &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; etkinleştirildiğinde görülebilir.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Görsel Düzenleyici]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Görsel Düzenleyici görsel modunu gösteren ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Masaüstü ve mobil
|Zengin metin düzenleme sistemi
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|2017 vikimetin düzenleyici]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Görsel Düzenleyici'nin yerleşik vikimetin modunun ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Masaüstü
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|İnceleme Sayfası]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Masaüstü
|[[s:tr:|Vikikaynak]]'ta kullanılır
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=wikiEd ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Masaüstü
|Tamamen gönüllü destekli bir vikimetin editörü. Bu genellikle bir gadget veya kullanıcı komut dosyası olarak çalışır, ancak bazı Wikimedia olmayan vikilerde bir uzantı olarak çalıştırılır.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Kod düzenleyicinin ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Masaüstü
|JavaScript ve diğer kod sayfalarını düzenlemek için kullanılır.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;{{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}} uzantısının mevcut vikimetin editörü&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Mobil Web'de vikimetin düzenlemesinin ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|İçerikÇevirisi]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=İçerik Çevirisi'nin editörünün ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Masaüstü
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Yapısal Tartışmalar]] (önceden Flow olarak bilinirdi)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Yapısal Tartışmalarda bir yorumun ekran görüntüsü ve yanıtın başlangıcı|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Masaüstü ve mobil
|Yapısal Tartışmalar vikimetin ve görsel modları destekler.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Masaüstü (mobil yakında)
|Yeni tartışma sayfası tartışmaları başlatmak için bir satır içi form. Hem &lt;code&gt;Görsel&lt;/code&gt; hem de &lt;code&gt;Kaynak&lt;/code&gt; modlarıyla kullanılmıştır.
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Masaüstü (mobil yakında)
|Belirli tartışma sayfası yorumlarına yanıt vermek için bir araç. Yorumlar otomatik olarak imzalanır ve girintilenir. Hem &lt;code&gt;Görsel&lt;/code&gt; hem de &lt;code&gt;Kaynak&lt;/code&gt; modlarıyla kullanılmıştır. 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$android-faq|Android]] uygulamasında editör&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Bir Android telefonda düzenleme arayüzünün ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$ios-faq|iOS]] uygulamasındaki editör&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=iPhone'daki düzenleme arayüzünün ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]] editörü
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Masaüstü
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Vikigezgin Listeleme Editörü]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Masaüstü
|Vikigezgin'deki çeşitli şablonlardan birini eklemek için özel JavaScript tabanlı düzenleme aracı
|-
|}

== Eski ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Wikimedia vikilerde eski düzenleme yazılımı
|-
!Düzenleme aracı
!Ekran görüntüsü
!Yıl
!Platform
!Notlar
|-
|2006 JavaScript &quot;klasik&quot; düzenleyicisi, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=2006 vikimetin editörünün ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Masaüstü
|Bu, 2006-2010 arasında &quot;showtoolbar&quot; tercihi etkinleştirildiğinde görüldü. Bundan sonra, yalnızca &quot;gelişmiş araç çubuğu&quot; (2010 düzenleyicisi) tercihini devre dışı bırakan kullanıcılar için gösterildi. Bu düzenleyici [[MediaWiki 1.32]]'de [[phab:T30856|kaldırıldı]]. Benzer bir araç çubuğu bazı vikilerde gönüllü destekli bir yerel gadget olarak mevcuttur.
|-
|MobileFrontend'in orijinal vikimetin editörü
|
|2012–2014
|Mobil
|Bu, 2003 masaüstü wikitext editöründe mobil cihazlara özgü bir değişiklik grubuydu. Artık konuşlandırılmadı.
|-
|}

== Ayrıca bakınız ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – herhangi bir düzenleyicinin parçası değildir, ancak bazı düzenleme ortamlarının altında görünür
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – herhangi bir düzenleyicinin parçası değildir, ancak bazı düzenleme ortamlarının altında görünür

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>dqyj32inojo5pxd0x5kl318n5ee7zdc</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402719</id>
      <parentid>5402699</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:07:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6153" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Şunu arıyor olabilirsiniz:

== Şuan ki ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Wikimedia vikilerinde mevcut düzenleme yazılımı
!Düzenleme aracı
!Ekran görüntüsü
!Yıl
!Platform
!Notlar
|-
|HTML {{tag|textarea|open}} olan varsayılan MediaWiki düzenleyicisi
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=HTML metin alanının ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Masaüstü ve mobil
|Bunun bir araç çubuğu yok. JavaScript devre dışı bırakıldığında veya [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]]'de &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; devre dışı bırakıldığında görülebilir.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extension:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=WikiEditor ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Masaüstü
|Bu, [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]]'de &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; etkinleştirildiğinde görülebilir.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Görsel Düzenleyici]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Görsel Düzenleyici görsel modunu gösteren ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Masaüstü ve mobil
|Zengin metin düzenleme sistemi
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|2017 vikimetin düzenleyici]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Görsel Düzenleyici'nin yerleşik vikimetin modunun ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Masaüstü
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|İnceleme Sayfası]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Masaüstü
|[[s:tr:|Vikikaynak]]'ta kullanılır
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=wikiEd ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Masaüstü
|Tamamen gönüllü destekli bir vikimetin editörü. Bu genellikle bir gadget veya kullanıcı komut dosyası olarak çalışır, ancak bazı Wikimedia olmayan vikilerde bir uzantı olarak çalıştırılır.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Kod düzenleyicinin ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Masaüstü
|JavaScript ve diğer kod sayfalarını düzenlemek için kullanılır.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;{{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}} uzantısının mevcut vikimetin editörü&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Mobil Web'de vikimetin düzenlemesinin ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|İçerikÇevirisi]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=İçerik Çevirisi'nin editörünün ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Masaüstü
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Yapısal Tartışmalar]] (önceden Flow olarak bilinirdi)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Yapısal Tartışmalarda bir yorumun ekran görüntüsü ve yanıtın başlangıcı|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Masaüstü ve mobil
|Yapısal Tartışmalar vikimetin ve görsel modları destekler.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Masaüstü (mobil yakında)
|Yeni tartışma sayfası tartışmaları başlatmak için bir satır içi form. Hem &lt;code&gt;Görsel&lt;/code&gt; hem de &lt;code&gt;Kaynak&lt;/code&gt; modlarıyla kullanılmıştır.
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Masaüstü (mobil yakında)
|Belirli tartışma sayfası yorumlarına yanıt vermek için bir araç. Yorumlar otomatik olarak imzalanır ve girintilenir. Hem &lt;code&gt;Görsel&lt;/code&gt; hem de &lt;code&gt;Kaynak&lt;/code&gt; modlarıyla kullanılmıştır. 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;[[$android-faq|Android]] uygulamasında editör&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Bir Android telefonda düzenleme arayüzünün ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]] uygulamasındaki editör
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=iPhone'daki düzenleme arayüzünün ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]] editörü
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Masaüstü
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Vikigezgin Listeleme Editörü]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Masaüstü
|Vikigezgin'deki çeşitli şablonlardan birini eklemek için özel JavaScript tabanlı düzenleme aracı
|-
|}

== Eski ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Wikimedia vikilerde eski düzenleme yazılımı
|-
!Düzenleme aracı
!Ekran görüntüsü
!Yıl
!Platform
!Notlar
|-
|2006 JavaScript &quot;klasik&quot; düzenleyicisi, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=2006 vikimetin editörünün ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Masaüstü
|Bu, 2006-2010 arasında &quot;showtoolbar&quot; tercihi etkinleştirildiğinde görüldü. Bundan sonra, yalnızca &quot;gelişmiş araç çubuğu&quot; (2010 düzenleyicisi) tercihini devre dışı bırakan kullanıcılar için gösterildi. Bu düzenleyici [[MediaWiki 1.32]]'de [[phab:T30856|kaldırıldı]]. Benzer bir araç çubuğu bazı vikilerde gönüllü destekli bir yerel gadget olarak mevcuttur.
|-
|MobileFrontend'in orijinal vikimetin editörü
|
|2012–2014
|Mobil
|Bu, 2003 masaüstü wikitext editöründe mobil cihazlara özgü bir değişiklik grubuydu. Artık konuşlandırılmadı.
|-
|}

== Ayrıca bakınız ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – herhangi bir düzenleyicinin parçası değildir, ancak bazı düzenleme ortamlarının altında görünür
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – herhangi bir düzenleyicinin parçası değildir, ancak bazı düzenleme ortamlarının altında görünür

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>cdet9zpzua8ie35plagwwfzw4uouqlw</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402741</id>
      <parentid>5402719</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:11:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6146" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Şunu arıyor olabilirsiniz:

== Şuan ki ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Wikimedia vikilerinde mevcut düzenleme yazılımı
!Düzenleme aracı
!Ekran görüntüsü
!Yıl
!Platform
!Notlar
|-
|HTML {{tag|textarea|open}} olan varsayılan MediaWiki düzenleyicisi
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=HTML metin alanının ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Masaüstü ve mobil
|Bunun bir araç çubuğu yok. JavaScript devre dışı bırakıldığında veya [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]]'de &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; devre dışı bırakıldığında görülebilir.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extension:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=WikiEditor ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Masaüstü
|Bu, [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]]'de &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; etkinleştirildiğinde görülebilir.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Görsel Düzenleyici]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Görsel Düzenleyici görsel modunu gösteren ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Masaüstü ve mobil
|Zengin metin düzenleme sistemi
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|2017 vikimetin düzenleyici]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Görsel Düzenleyici'nin yerleşik vikimetin modunun ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Masaüstü
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|İnceleme Sayfası]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Masaüstü
|[[s:tr:|Vikikaynak]]'ta kullanılır
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=wikiEd ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Masaüstü
|Tamamen gönüllü destekli bir vikimetin editörü. Bu genellikle bir gadget veya kullanıcı komut dosyası olarak çalışır, ancak bazı Wikimedia olmayan vikilerde bir uzantı olarak çalıştırılır.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Kod düzenleyicinin ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Masaüstü
|JavaScript ve diğer kod sayfalarını düzenlemek için kullanılır.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;{{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}} uzantısının mevcut vikimetin editörü&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Mobil Web'de vikimetin düzenlemesinin ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|İçerikÇevirisi]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=İçerik Çevirisi'nin editörünün ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Masaüstü
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Yapısal Tartışmalar]] (önceden Flow olarak bilinirdi)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Yapısal Tartışmalarda bir yorumun ekran görüntüsü ve yanıtın başlangıcı|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Masaüstü ve mobil
|Yapısal Tartışmalar vikimetin ve görsel modları destekler.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Masaüstü (mobil yakında)
|Yeni tartışma sayfası tartışmaları başlatmak için bir satır içi form. Hem &lt;code&gt;Görsel&lt;/code&gt; hem de &lt;code&gt;Kaynak&lt;/code&gt; modlarıyla kullanılmıştır.
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Masaüstü (mobil yakında)
|Belirli tartışma sayfası yorumlarına yanıt vermek için bir araç. Yorumlar otomatik olarak imzalanır ve girintilenir. Hem &lt;code&gt;Görsel&lt;/code&gt; hem de &lt;code&gt;Kaynak&lt;/code&gt; modlarıyla kullanılmıştır. 
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Android FAQ|Android]] uygulamasında editör
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Bir Android telefonda düzenleme arayüzünün ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]] uygulamasındaki editör
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=iPhone'daki düzenleme arayüzünün ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]] editörü
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Masaüstü
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Vikigezgin Listeleme Editörü]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Masaüstü
|Vikigezgin'deki çeşitli şablonlardan birini eklemek için özel JavaScript tabanlı düzenleme aracı
|-
|}

== Eski ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Wikimedia vikilerde eski düzenleme yazılımı
|-
!Düzenleme aracı
!Ekran görüntüsü
!Yıl
!Platform
!Notlar
|-
|2006 JavaScript &quot;klasik&quot; düzenleyicisi, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=2006 vikimetin editörünün ekran görüntüsü|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Masaüstü
|Bu, 2006-2010 arasında &quot;showtoolbar&quot; tercihi etkinleştirildiğinde görüldü. Bundan sonra, yalnızca &quot;gelişmiş araç çubuğu&quot; (2010 düzenleyicisi) tercihini devre dışı bırakan kullanıcılar için gösterildi. Bu düzenleyici [[MediaWiki 1.32]]'de [[phab:T30856|kaldırıldı]]. Benzer bir araç çubuğu bazı vikilerde gönüllü destekli bir yerel gadget olarak mevcuttur.
|-
|MobileFrontend'in orijinal vikimetin editörü
|
|2012–2014
|Mobil
|Bu, 2003 masaüstü wikitext editöründe mobil cihazlara özgü bir değişiklik grubuydu. Artık konuşlandırılmadı.
|-
|}

== Ayrıca bakınız ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – herhangi bir düzenleyicinin parçası değildir, ancak bazı düzenleme ortamlarının altında görünür
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – herhangi bir düzenleyicinin parçası değildir, ancak bazı düzenleme ortamlarının altında görünür

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>8bdgafnhen5dvcvcy1j9siemwu4zni5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/63/tr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1088411</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402740</id>
      <parentid>3762119</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:11:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="37" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Android]] uygulamasında editör</text>
      <sha1>q1mu6p4x9uy67wteqyorg7hjj0vh7e9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/67/tr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1088414</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402718</id>
      <parentid>3762125</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:07:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="35" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|iOS]] uygulamasındaki editör</text>
      <sha1>a5qreizegwldcj8gxglkiupcavz056r</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/pt</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1105932</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402625</id>
      <parentid>4578064</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3862" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
As «Discussões Estruturadas» (antes conhecidas como &quot;Flow&quot;) são [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|um projeto]] da equipa de «Colaboração» da Fundação Wikimedia para criar uma discussão moderna e um sistema de colaboração para os projetos da Wikimedia.

== Guia rápido ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|Como se parecem as «Discussões Estruturadas» - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Experimente!]]]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Descubra uma página que nós criamos «Discussões Estruturadas», e como a utilizar]]''': 
* [[$basics|o essencial da edição]], 
* [[$post|colocar uma resposta]] (para uma discussão global ou para uma pessoa específica numa conversação global), 
* [[$create|crirar uma discussão]], 
* [[$watch|ver um tópico ou todo o painel]], 
* [[$notifications|get notifications]],
* [[$browse|browse and archive subjects]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There is some specific terms concerning Structured Discussions. They have been defined in '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|the Glossary]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ferramentas avançadas ==

Estão disponíveis algumas ferramentas avançadas para propósitos específicos. Estas estão agrupadas nestes temas:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Ativação}}
:O que acontece quando as «Discussões Estruturadas» são ativadas numa página?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Tópicos}}
:Filtrar tópicos, Editar um tema/mensagem, Resumir um tópico, Resolver um tópico
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Ligações permanentes}}
:Como criar hiperligações para assuntos
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Notificações e lista de vigias}}
:As notificações que recebe e as diferentes entradas nas listas de vigiar
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Histórico}}
:Como funciona o sistema do histórico
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Administração}}
:Ocultar, Eliminar, Suprimir tópicos
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Pré-carregamento}}
:Pré-carregar conteúdos numa nova conversação de «Discussões Estruturadas»
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Atalhos}}
:Atalhos de teclado para utilizar no modo de edição visual.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Toda a documentação numa página.}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>43okjpcqn4qtv523v91m3tkmg2eiztp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Editor/cs</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1112401</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402688</id>
      <parentid>5386457</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5823" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Možná hledáte:

== Aktuální ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Aktuální editační software na wiki Wikimedia
!Editační nástroj
!Snímek obrazovky
!Rok
!Základy
!Poznámky
|-
|výchozí editor MediaWiki, což je HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky HTML textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Stolní a mobilní
|Nemá panel nástrojů. Je vidět, když je zakázán JavaScript nebo když je zakázáno &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; ve [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Rozšíření:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky WikiEditoru|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Počítač
|To je vidět, když je ve [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] aktivován &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot;.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky zobrazující vizuální režim VisualEditoru|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Stolní a mobilní
|Systém pro úpravu textů ve formátu RTF
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Editor wikitextu 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky zabudovaného režimu wikitext VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Počítač
|Režim v rámci {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} pro úpravu označení wiki.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Korektura stránky]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Počítač
|Používá se na [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Počítač
|Plně dobrovolně podporovaný editor wikitext. Toto je obecně spuštěno jako gadget nebo uživatelský skript, ale je spuštěno jako rozšíření na některých wiki bez Wikimedie.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky editoru kódu|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Počítač
|Používá se pro úpravy JavaScriptu a dalších kódových stránek.
|-
|wikitextový editor {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky editace wikitextu na mobilním webu|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobilní
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|ContentTranslation]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky editoru ContentTranslation|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Počítač
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Strukturované diskuse]] (dříve známé jako Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Ukázka komentáře a začátek odpovědi na toto téma ve Strukturovaných diskusích|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Stolní a mobilní
|Strukturované diskuse podporuje wikitext a vizuální režimy.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Počítač (brzy pro mobily)
|Inline formulář pro zahájení diskuzí na nové diskusní stránce. Je vybavena jak režimy &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt;, tak &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;.
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Počítač (brzy pro mobily)
|Nástroj pro reakci na konkrétní komentáře diskusní stránky. Komentáře jsou automaticky podepsány a odsazeny. Je vybavena jak režimy &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt;, tak &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;. 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor v aplikaci [[$android-faq|Android]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky editačního rozhraní v telefonu se systémem Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobilní
|
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor v aplikaci [[$ios-faq|iOS]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Snímek obrazovky editačního rozhraní v iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobilní
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]] editor
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Počítač
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Editor seznamů Wikivoyage]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Počítač
|Specializovaný editační nástroj založený na JavaScriptu pro vkládání jedné z několika šablon na Wikivoyage
|-
|}

== Bývalé ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Bývalý editační software na wiki Wikimedia
|-
!Editační nástroj
!Snímek obrazovky
!Rok
!Základy
!Poznámky
|-
|&quot;Klasický&quot; editor JavaScriptu z roku 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky z editoru wikitext 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Počítač
|Toto bylo vidět, když byla v letech 2006–2010 povolena preference &quot;showtoolbar&quot;. Poté se to zobrazilo pouze uživatelům, kteří deaktivovali předvolbu &quot;vylepšený panel nástrojů&quot; (editor 2010). Tento editor byl [[phab:T30856|odstraněn]] v [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Podobný panel nástrojů je k dispozici jako místní gadget podporovaný dobrovolníky u některých wiki.
|-
|Originální editor wikitextu MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Mobilní
|Jednalo se o soubor specifických úprav pro stolní wikitextový editor. Již není nasazen.
|-
|}

== Související stránky ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – není součástí žádného editoru, ale objevuje se pod některými editačními prostředími
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – není součástí žádného editoru, ale objevuje se pod některými editačními prostředími

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>mkwgqxzgwyzoa0mapuq78sfom7ngyde</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402703</id>
      <parentid>5402688</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:05:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5816" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Možná hledáte:

== Aktuální ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Aktuální editační software na wiki Wikimedia
!Editační nástroj
!Snímek obrazovky
!Rok
!Základy
!Poznámky
|-
|výchozí editor MediaWiki, což je HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky HTML textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Stolní a mobilní
|Nemá panel nástrojů. Je vidět, když je zakázán JavaScript nebo když je zakázáno &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; ve [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Rozšíření:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky WikiEditoru|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Počítač
|To je vidět, když je ve [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] aktivován &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot;.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky zobrazující vizuální režim VisualEditoru|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Stolní a mobilní
|Systém pro úpravu textů ve formátu RTF
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Editor wikitextu 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky zabudovaného režimu wikitext VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Počítač
|Režim v rámci {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} pro úpravu označení wiki.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Korektura stránky]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Počítač
|Používá se na [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Počítač
|Plně dobrovolně podporovaný editor wikitext. Toto je obecně spuštěno jako gadget nebo uživatelský skript, ale je spuštěno jako rozšíření na některých wiki bez Wikimedie.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky editoru kódu|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Počítač
|Používá se pro úpravy JavaScriptu a dalších kódových stránek.
|-
|wikitextový editor {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky editace wikitextu na mobilním webu|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobilní
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|ContentTranslation]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky editoru ContentTranslation|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Počítač
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Strukturované diskuse]] (dříve známé jako Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Ukázka komentáře a začátek odpovědi na toto téma ve Strukturovaných diskusích|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Stolní a mobilní
|Strukturované diskuse podporuje wikitext a vizuální režimy.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Počítač (brzy pro mobily)
|Inline formulář pro zahájení diskuzí na nové diskusní stránce. Je vybavena jak režimy &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt;, tak &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;.
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Počítač (brzy pro mobily)
|Nástroj pro reakci na konkrétní komentáře diskusní stránky. Komentáře jsou automaticky podepsány a odsazeny. Je vybavena jak režimy &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt;, tak &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;. 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor v aplikaci [[$android-faq|Android]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky editačního rozhraní v telefonu se systémem Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobilní
|
|-
|Editor v aplikaci [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Snímek obrazovky editačního rozhraní v iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobilní
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]] editor
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Počítač
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Editor seznamů Wikivoyage]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Počítač
|Specializovaný editační nástroj založený na JavaScriptu pro vkládání jedné z několika šablon na Wikivoyage
|-
|}

== Bývalé ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Bývalý editační software na wiki Wikimedia
|-
!Editační nástroj
!Snímek obrazovky
!Rok
!Základy
!Poznámky
|-
|&quot;Klasický&quot; editor JavaScriptu z roku 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky z editoru wikitext 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Počítač
|Toto bylo vidět, když byla v letech 2006–2010 povolena preference &quot;showtoolbar&quot;. Poté se to zobrazilo pouze uživatelům, kteří deaktivovali předvolbu &quot;vylepšený panel nástrojů&quot; (editor 2010). Tento editor byl [[phab:T30856|odstraněn]] v [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Podobný panel nástrojů je k dispozici jako místní gadget podporovaný dobrovolníky u některých wiki.
|-
|Originální editor wikitextu MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Mobilní
|Jednalo se o soubor specifických úprav pro stolní wikitextový editor. Již není nasazen.
|-
|}

== Související stránky ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – není součástí žádného editoru, ale objevuje se pod některými editačními prostředími
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – není součástí žádného editoru, ale objevuje se pod některými editačními prostředími

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>6u9b2yif7nqgatspe3p696wfovxn0pn</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402725</id>
      <parentid>5402703</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:08:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5809" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Možná hledáte:

== Aktuální ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Aktuální editační software na wiki Wikimedia
!Editační nástroj
!Snímek obrazovky
!Rok
!Základy
!Poznámky
|-
|výchozí editor MediaWiki, což je HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky HTML textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Stolní a mobilní
|Nemá panel nástrojů. Je vidět, když je zakázán JavaScript nebo když je zakázáno &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; ve [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Rozšíření:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky WikiEditoru|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Počítač
|To je vidět, když je ve [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] aktivován &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot;.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky zobrazující vizuální režim VisualEditoru|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Stolní a mobilní
|Systém pro úpravu textů ve formátu RTF
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Editor wikitextu 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky zabudovaného režimu wikitext VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Počítač
|Režim v rámci {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} pro úpravu označení wiki.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Korektura stránky]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Počítač
|Používá se na [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Počítač
|Plně dobrovolně podporovaný editor wikitext. Toto je obecně spuštěno jako gadget nebo uživatelský skript, ale je spuštěno jako rozšíření na některých wiki bez Wikimedie.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky editoru kódu|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Počítač
|Používá se pro úpravy JavaScriptu a dalších kódových stránek.
|-
|wikitextový editor {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky editace wikitextu na mobilním webu|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobilní
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|ContentTranslation]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky editoru ContentTranslation|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Počítač
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Strukturované diskuse]] (dříve známé jako Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Ukázka komentáře a začátek odpovědi na toto téma ve Strukturovaných diskusích|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Stolní a mobilní
|Strukturované diskuse podporuje wikitext a vizuální režimy.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Počítač (brzy pro mobily)
|Inline formulář pro zahájení diskuzí na nové diskusní stránce. Je vybavena jak režimy &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt;, tak &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;.
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Počítač (brzy pro mobily)
|Nástroj pro reakci na konkrétní komentáře diskusní stránky. Komentáře jsou automaticky podepsány a odsazeny. Je vybavena jak režimy &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt;, tak &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;. 
|-
|Editor v aplikaci [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Android FAQ|Android]]
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky editačního rozhraní v telefonu se systémem Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobilní
|
|-
|Editor v aplikaci [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Snímek obrazovky editačního rozhraní v iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobilní
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]] editor
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Počítač
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Editor seznamů Wikivoyage]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Počítač
|Specializovaný editační nástroj založený na JavaScriptu pro vkládání jedné z několika šablon na Wikivoyage
|-
|}

== Bývalé ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Bývalý editační software na wiki Wikimedia
|-
!Editační nástroj
!Snímek obrazovky
!Rok
!Základy
!Poznámky
|-
|&quot;Klasický&quot; editor JavaScriptu z roku 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Snímek obrazovky z editoru wikitext 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Počítač
|Toto bylo vidět, když byla v letech 2006–2010 povolena preference &quot;showtoolbar&quot;. Poté se to zobrazilo pouze uživatelům, kteří deaktivovali předvolbu &quot;vylepšený panel nástrojů&quot; (editor 2010). Tento editor byl [[phab:T30856|odstraněn]] v [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Podobný panel nástrojů je k dispozici jako místní gadget podporovaný dobrovolníky u některých wiki.
|-
|Originální editor wikitextu MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Mobilní
|Jednalo se o soubor specifických úprav pro stolní wikitextový editor. Již není nasazen.
|-
|}

== Související stránky ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – není součástí žádného editoru, ale objevuje se pod některými editačními prostředími
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – není součástí žádného editoru, ale objevuje se pod některými editačními prostředími

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>2sz2v9ffhnape8miyt99yxkmjlzcz0j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/63/cs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1112452</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402724</id>
      <parentid>3832258</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:08:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="32" xml:space="preserve">Editor v aplikaci [[$1|Android]]</text>
      <sha1>1y80m8r2z0smbd0vnscxso7qms7uojh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/67/cs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1112455</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402702</id>
      <parentid>3832264</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:05:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28" xml:space="preserve">Editor v aplikaci [[$1|iOS]]</text>
      <sha1>gxl3rdjuo0xle64mc7y0mfjyoxt4x1x</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Reset password/ar</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1114654</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402381</id>
      <parentid>5140556</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T03:27:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>37.236.155.41</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9248" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
تغير كلمت سر
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do this, we have provided a basic guide below, which covers common questions related to password resets.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== When should I reset my password? ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are different circumstances under which you may reset your password, including:
&lt;/div&gt;

انت لقد نسيت الباسورد الخاص بك
شخص ما يعرف الباسورد الخاص بك
انت تريد باسورد قوي

كيف ممكن استطيع استعاده الباسورد الخاص بي
لتمكين إعادة تعيين كلمة المرور ، يجب إقران عنوان بريد إلكتروني بحسابك
هناك طريقتين لتفعل ذلك

عند انشاء حسابك يمكنك تقديم بريد الكتروني على Special:CreateAccount.
بعد انشاء حساب يمكنك اقران عنوان بريدك الكتروني بحسابك على   Special:Preferences &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can navigate to the &quot;{{int|prefs-personal}}&quot; tab, where you will see an “{{int|prefs-email}}” section.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can enter your email address in this section.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Do I need to confirm my email address to enable password resets? ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No, you do not need to confirm your email address in order to generate password reset emails.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it is ''highly recommended'' that you confirm your email address.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This way, you can ensure emails are sent to the correct address, and you can set up email preferences for your account.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How do I reset my password? ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to Special:PasswordReset on the wiki of your choice.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Enter either your username and email address (or both).
&lt;/div&gt;
## {{note|inline=1|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have enabled Enhanced Password Reset (see information in section 8), you will always need to enter both username and email address.&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your email for a password reset email.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Follow the instructions in the email to complete the process.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more technical password reset processes, visit the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Resetting passwords#Use%20Special:UserLogin|Resetting Passwords]] page.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How do I reset passwords for multiple usernames at once? ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have multiple usernames associated with one email address, you can generate password reset requests for all usernames at once.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do this, simply enter the email address only in Special:PasswordReset.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will then receive separate emails for all usernames associated with the account.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this will not work with accounts that have EPR enabled, as they require both the username and email address to generate the password reset email.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How do I reset the password for one account, if I have multiple usernames attached to the associated email address? ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to reset one account password, but you have multiple usernames attached to the same email address, you should only enter the username in Special:PasswordReset.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this will not work with accounts that have EPR enabled, as they require both the username and email address to generate the password reset email.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Can people actually reset my password on Special:PasswordReset? ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No, they can only trigger an email via Special:PasswordReset.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Somebody would need to have access to your email account to complete the password reset process.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== I’m getting password reset emails that I didn’t request. How do I prevent this from happening? ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can prevent unsolicited password reset emails by enabling [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Community_Tech/Password_Reset_Update|Enhanced Password Reset (EPR)]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is a feature that requires users to provide both a username and email address on Special:PasswordReset.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If both are provided, a password reset email will be sent.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If both are not provided, the password reset email will not be sent.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This feature was developed by the [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Community_Tech|Community Tech]] team, in response to [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Community_Wishlist_Survey_2019/Anti-harassment/Add_an_option_to_require_email_address_and_username_to_reset_password|#3 wish]] in the [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Community_Wishlist_Survey_2019/Results|2019 Wishlist Survey]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(EPR) enhances privacy because Wikimedia users may know your username (but not your email address).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Meanwhile, some people may know your email address (but not your username).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consequently, spammers and trolls are less likely to generate unwanted password reset emails, if you enable this feature.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To enable the feature, go to the “{{int|prefs-email}}” section in “{{int|preferences}}” You can click on the checkbox that states, “{{int|tog-requireemail}}”.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you click the checkbox and save, the preference is enabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you enable this preference, users will not be informed that both the username and email addresses are required on Special:PasswordReset (for security reasons).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this reason, ''&lt;u&gt;you must remember to enter both your username and email address on Special:PasswordReset.&lt;/u&gt;''&lt;/span&gt; 

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced Password Reset is not a global preference by default.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is enabled per wiki.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, you can make it global in your [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:GlobalPreferences|global preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== I requested a password reset. Why didn’t I receive an email? ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may have not received a password reset email for many reasons, including:
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You did not add an email address to your account.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this is the case, see instructions in Section 2 for how to associate an email address with an account.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You misspelled the username or email address associated with the account.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this is the case, we recommend that you try requesting a password reset again via Special:PasswordReset.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You only entered a username or email address (i.e., not both), and the Enhanced Password Reset feature was enabled.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this is the case, we recommend that you try requesting a password reset again, with both your username and email address.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The email was sent to Spam or another folder that you have not yet checked.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You requested too many password resets in a short period of time, which exceeded the password reset request limit.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this is the case, we recommend that you wait for a bit and then try again later.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Reset password]]
[[Category:Project help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>afrewqp6e7nol00eixzc5jt6g2f1blq</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403358</id>
      <parentid>5402381</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:57:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Clump</username>
        <id>81610</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/37.236.155.41|37.236.155.41]] ([[User talk:37.236.155.41|talk]]) to last version by 156.209.176.251</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9286" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
انا احتاج الى استعاده الباسوردكگ
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do this, we have provided a basic guide below, which covers common questions related to password resets.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== When should I reset my password? ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are different circumstances under which you may reset your password, including:
&lt;/div&gt;

انت لقد نسيت الباسورد الخاص بك
شخص ما يعرف الباسورد الخاص بك
انت تريد باسورد قوي

كيف ممكن استطيع استعاده الباسورد الخاص بي
لتمكين إعادة تعيين كلمة المرور ، يجب إقران عنوان بريد إلكتروني بحسابك
هناك طريقتين لتفعل ذلك

عند انشاء حسابك يمكنك تقديم بريد الكتروني على Special:CreateAccount.
بعد انشاء حساب يمكنك اقران عنوان بريدك الكتروني بحسابك على   Special:Preferences &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can navigate to the &quot;{{int|prefs-personal}}&quot; tab, where you will see an “{{int|prefs-email}}” section.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can enter your email address in this section.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Do I need to confirm my email address to enable password resets? ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No, you do not need to confirm your email address in order to generate password reset emails.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it is ''highly recommended'' that you confirm your email address.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This way, you can ensure emails are sent to the correct address, and you can set up email preferences for your account.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How do I reset my password? ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to Special:PasswordReset on the wiki of your choice.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Enter either your username and email address (or both).
&lt;/div&gt;
## {{note|inline=1|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have enabled Enhanced Password Reset (see information in section 8), you will always need to enter both username and email address.&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your email for a password reset email.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Follow the instructions in the email to complete the process.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For more technical password reset processes, visit the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Resetting passwords#Use%20Special:UserLogin|Resetting Passwords]] page.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How do I reset passwords for multiple usernames at once? ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have multiple usernames associated with one email address, you can generate password reset requests for all usernames at once.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To do this, simply enter the email address only in Special:PasswordReset.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will then receive separate emails for all usernames associated with the account.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this will not work with accounts that have EPR enabled, as they require both the username and email address to generate the password reset email.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How do I reset the password for one account, if I have multiple usernames attached to the associated email address? ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to reset one account password, but you have multiple usernames attached to the same email address, you should only enter the username in Special:PasswordReset.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this will not work with accounts that have EPR enabled, as they require both the username and email address to generate the password reset email.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Can people actually reset my password on Special:PasswordReset? ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No, they can only trigger an email via Special:PasswordReset.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Somebody would need to have access to your email account to complete the password reset process.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== I’m getting password reset emails that I didn’t request. How do I prevent this from happening? ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can prevent unsolicited password reset emails by enabling [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Community_Tech/Password_Reset_Update|Enhanced Password Reset (EPR)]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is a feature that requires users to provide both a username and email address on Special:PasswordReset.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If both are provided, a password reset email will be sent.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If both are not provided, the password reset email will not be sent.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This feature was developed by the [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Community_Tech|Community Tech]] team, in response to [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Community_Wishlist_Survey_2019/Anti-harassment/Add_an_option_to_require_email_address_and_username_to_reset_password|#3 wish]] in the [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Community_Wishlist_Survey_2019/Results|2019 Wishlist Survey]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(EPR) enhances privacy because Wikimedia users may know your username (but not your email address).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Meanwhile, some people may know your email address (but not your username).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consequently, spammers and trolls are less likely to generate unwanted password reset emails, if you enable this feature.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To enable the feature, go to the “{{int|prefs-email}}” section in “{{int|preferences}}” You can click on the checkbox that states, “{{int|tog-requireemail}}”.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you click the checkbox and save, the preference is enabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you enable this preference, users will not be informed that both the username and email addresses are required on Special:PasswordReset (for security reasons).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this reason, ''&lt;u&gt;you must remember to enter both your username and email address on Special:PasswordReset.&lt;/u&gt;''&lt;/span&gt; 

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced Password Reset is not a global preference by default.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is enabled per wiki.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, you can make it global in your [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Extension:GlobalPreferences|global preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== I requested a password reset. Why didn’t I receive an email? ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may have not received a password reset email for many reasons, including:
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You did not add an email address to your account.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this is the case, see instructions in Section 2 for how to associate an email address with an account.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You misspelled the username or email address associated with the account.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this is the case, we recommend that you try requesting a password reset again via Special:PasswordReset.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You only entered a username or email address (i.e., not both), and the Enhanced Password Reset feature was enabled.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this is the case, we recommend that you try requesting a password reset again, with both your username and email address.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The email was sent to Spam or another folder that you have not yet checked.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* You requested too many password resets in a short period of time, which exceeded the password reset request limit.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this is the case, we recommend that you wait for a bit and then try again later.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|Reset password]]
[[Category:Project help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>gccaukwb6yinc8mvo06mhq1y0fdgrme</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SocialToolsSidebar/1/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1122999</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402001</id>
      <parentid>3865335</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:13:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5" xml:space="preserve">about</text>
      <sha1>a7yw2fycbch2s7ltjd6flulx5u1534w</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SocialToolsSidebar/6/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1123004</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402002</id>
      <parentid>3865340</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:13:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13" xml:space="preserve">compatibility</text>
      <sha1>83c56j26p651yfxk2t0hca2smjks2ct</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:SocialToolsSidebar/en</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>1123008</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402003</id>
      <parentid>4104029</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:13:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="977" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle = 
|title = Social tools
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle = font-size:130%
|contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1 = about
|content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=Social tools}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=Contributing and reporting bugs}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=List of extensions}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=History of social tools}}

|heading2 = compatibility
|content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=Support for Echo notifications}} (draft)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=MediaWiki compatibility}}

}}
|#default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>snj97z35nxiay003aqd26s2kfgzczgy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:SocialToolsSidebar/ja</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>1123012</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402005</id>
      <parentid>4104030</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:13:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1223" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle = 
|title = ソーシャル ツール
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle = font-size:130%
|contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;about&lt;/span&gt;
|content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=ソーシャル ツール}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Contributing and reporting bugs&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=拡張機能一覧}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History of social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}

|heading2 = 互換性
|content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Support for Echo notifications&lt;/span&gt;}} (草稿)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=MediaWiki の互換性}}

}}
|#default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>3x5p9s6t3ouslk5fzssdi31l51qqv9m</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/th</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1127325</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402791</id>
      <parentid>3876681</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:53:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="220" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|คำอธิบายการใช้แม่แบบยกแหล่งที่มา]] หรือ[[$2|คำอธิบายการใช้ปุ่ม citoid's $3 ของไซทอยด์]]</text>
      <sha1>86ir8mcl07h6qcysxl2yb9hj4hbq7qo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:SocialToolsSidebar/fr</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>1131242</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402004</id>
      <parentid>5352993</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:13:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1006" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle = 
|title = Outils sociaux
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle = font-size:130%
|contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1 = À propos
|content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=Outils sociaux}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=Contribuer et rapporter des bogues}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=Liste des extensions}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Historique des outils sociaux}}

|heading2 = Compatibilité
|content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=Support pour les notifications Echo}} (ébauche)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=Compatibilité MediaWiki}}

}}
|#default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>ku2zrzwxk1y66hepk6xt58ujdclgqlj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Reset password/1/ar</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1132091</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402380</id>
      <parentid>5140555</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T03:27:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <ip>37.236.155.41</ip>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22" xml:space="preserve">تغير كلمت سر</text>
      <sha1>nmm1tcl1vp56y9gydgkpnqx2kyjj0hj</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403357</id>
      <parentid>5402380</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:57:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Clump</username>
        <id>81610</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>Reverted edits by [[Special:Contribs/37.236.155.41|37.236.155.41]] ([[User talk:37.236.155.41|talk]]) to last version by 156.209.176.251</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="60" xml:space="preserve">انا احتاج الى استعاده الباسوردكگ</text>
      <sha1>sabg13j80sb4tpy7s3sq6ptydq4vadv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Translate/49/id</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1140222</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402484</id>
      <parentid>4502665</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:13:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="70" xml:space="preserve">* [[$help|Koreksi dan terjemahkan dokumentasi dari ektensi Translate]]</text>
      <sha1>rn8pye5x8lwqm8g1d4f4wcgy8hgwssr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/ru</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1143237</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402628</id>
      <parentid>4578059</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5174" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Структурированные обсуждения (чаще известные как Потоки, Flow) являются [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|проектом]] Совместной команды, Collaboration team, в Сообществе Викимедиа для построения современной дискуссионной и совместной системы для проектов Викимедиа.

=== Краткий экскурс ===
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|Как выглядят структурированные обсуждения - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Попробуй это!]]]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Узнайте на одной странице, почему мы создали структурированные обсуждения и как их использовать]]''': 
* [[$basics|основы редактирования]], 
* [[$post|публикация ответа]] (для глобального обсуждения или конкретному человеку в глобальной беседе), 
* [[$create|создание обсуждения]], 
* [[$watch|просмотр отдельной темы или выпуска обсуждений в целом]], 
* [[$notifications|получать уведомодления]],
* [[$browse|просматривать и архивировать темы]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Существует несколько специфических терминов, касающихся структурированных обсуждений. Они указаны в '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|Глоссарии]]'''.

Структурированные обсуждения не работают у Вас? Пожалуйста, сверьтесь с '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|если Вам встретились проблемы]]'''.

== Расширенные средства ==

Для некоторых специфических случаев существуют некоторые расширенные средства. Они перегруппированы в следующих темах:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Активация}}
:Что случится когда Структурированные Обсуждения будут разрешены на странице?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Темы}}
:Фильтр тем, Редактирование тем/сообщений, тема Суммарно, тема Решение
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Постоянные ссылки}}
:Как создавать ссылки на темы
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Уведомления и список наблюдения}}
:Уведомления, которые вы получаете, и различные входные данные в списках наблюдения
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=История}}
:Как работает система истории
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Администрирование}}
:Скрытие, Удаление и Подавление тем
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Предварительная загрузка}}
:Предварительная загрузка содержимого в новых Структурированных Обсуждениях
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Краткие ссылки}}
:Клавиатурные комбинации для использования в режиме визуального редактирования

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Вся документация на одной странице.}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>7io3s7f1zolbsu0w431z96tmbs8wdgr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/vec</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1145096</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402274</id>
      <parentid>5400764</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14136" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Piasè informasion le se pole catar so meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Global account ====
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Languages
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Date format and time offset ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>563zrvnlpjcjpka55swm0jzmo7y5nok</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Gamepress/tr</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1146632</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401826</id>
      <parentid>5208777</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:56:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2790" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name         = Gamepress
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description  = Kullanımı kolay oyun odaklı görünüm
|image        = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 1.0.7
|update       = 
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          = 5.3+
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme       = 
|changelog    = 
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla     = 
|phabricator  = Gamepress
}}
'''Gamepress''', aynı adla ücretsiz ve açık kaynaklı GPL lisanslı WordPress temasından taşınan bir MediaWiki kaplamasıdır.

WordPress teması Aleksandra Łączek tarafından yazılmıştır ve MediaWiki portu [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] tarafından 16 Ocak 2014 tarihinde {{ll|ShoutWiki}} için yapılmıştır.

== Ana özellikler ==

* '''İki''' gezinti &quot;portletleri&quot; &amp;mdash; sayfanın üst kısmındaki özel, açılır menüyü (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) ve sağ kenar çubuğu olarak &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
* Üç (veya dört, ona nasıl baktığınıza bağlı olarak &amp;mdash; kırmızı olan varsayılan/temel temadır) [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|temalar]]:
** mavi
** yeşil
** turuncu
* Logo resmi ''yok''
* Altbilgi alanının üzerinde üç &quot;sütun&quot; vardır (altbilgi standart telif hakkı içeren şeyler içerir, /Kullanım Şartları/gizlilik politikası bağlantıları vb.) bunların içeriği &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; ile düzenlenebilir; '''herhangi bir''' herhangi bir içeriğe sahipse, önceki alt bilgi alanı oluşturulacaktır. Her üç mesaj da varsayılan olarak olduğu gibi boşsa, ön besleyici alanı gösterilmez. Bu ön altlık sütunlarına bir başlık vermek istiyorsanız ve ne zaman isterseniz, metnin istendiği gibi işlenmesi için vikimetin yerine bir ''kılavuz'' {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;|Başlık buraya gelir}} kullanın

== Kurulum ==
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>aamd1kqymzut2x6umzotlhgkb4nn8gw</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401856</id>
      <parentid>5401826</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:04:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2847" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Gamepress
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description     = Kullanımı kolay oyun odaklı görünüm
|image           = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.0.7
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = Gamepress
}}
'''Gamepress''', aynı adla ücretsiz ve açık kaynaklı GPL lisanslı WordPress temasından taşınan bir MediaWiki kaplamasıdır.

WordPress teması Aleksandra Łączek tarafından yazılmıştır ve MediaWiki portu [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] tarafından 16 Ocak 2014 tarihinde {{ll|ShoutWiki}} için yapılmıştır.

== Ana özellikler ==

* '''İki''' gezinti &quot;portletleri&quot; &amp;mdash; sayfanın üst kısmındaki özel, açılır menüyü (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) ve sağ kenar çubuğu olarak &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
* Üç (veya dört, ona nasıl baktığınıza bağlı olarak &amp;mdash; kırmızı olan varsayılan/temel temadır) [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|temalar]]:
** mavi
** yeşil
** turuncu
* Logo resmi ''yok''
* Altbilgi alanının üzerinde üç &quot;sütun&quot; vardır (altbilgi standart telif hakkı içeren şeyler içerir, /Kullanım Şartları/gizlilik politikası bağlantıları vb.) bunların içeriği &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; ile düzenlenebilir; '''herhangi bir''' herhangi bir içeriğe sahipse, önceki alt bilgi alanı oluşturulacaktır. Her üç mesaj da varsayılan olarak olduğu gibi boşsa, ön besleyici alanı gösterilmez. Bu ön altlık sütunlarına bir başlık vermek istiyorsanız ve ne zaman isterseniz, metnin istendiği gibi işlenmesi için vikimetin yerine bir ''kılavuz'' {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;|Başlık buraya gelir}} kullanın

== Kurulum ==
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>13x1yj6ebg5yc7riga5z3gbbeqmy8y0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:DuskToDawn/tr</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1146808</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401845</id>
      <parentid>5214316</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:00:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2089" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = DuskToDawn
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* Automattic — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] — MediaWiki port
|description     = Eski tarz organik süsleri modern tasarım ve tipografi ile birleştiren koyu görünüm.
|image           = DuskToDawn.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.3.2
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=dusktodawn Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = DuskToDawn
}}
'''DuskToDawn''', aynı adla ücretsiz ve açık kaynaklı GPL lisanslı WordPress temasından taşınan bir MediaWiki görünümdür. WordPress tema sitesinde &quot;eski stil organik süsleri modern tasarım ve tipografi ile birleştiren karanlık bir tema &lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; olarak tanımlanmaktadır.

WordPress teması Automattic tarafından yazılmıştır ve MediaWiki portu [[ShoutWiki]] için 11 Ocak 2014 tarihinde {{u|Jack Phoenix}} tarafından yapılmıştır.

Dusk to Dawn, çeşitli WordPress kaynaklarına göre, [[Skin:Dusk|Dusk]] görünümün halefidir.

İçerik alanı Dusk'lardan bile daha dardır, yani [[Special:Version|Özel:Sürüm]] vb. gibi çeşitli MediaWiki sayfaları düpedüz kötü görünür.

== Ana özellikler ==

* Sayfa başlığının altında, ShoutWiki'nin varsayılan kaplaması Aurora'dakine benzer &quot;En son düzenlenmiş sayfa (Foo tarafından)&quot; satırı
* Logo yok
* Blog benzeri siteler için uygun kılan dar içerik alanı (bu sayfanın giriş bölümüne bakın)

== Kurulum ==
{{SkinInstall|DuskToDawn|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>kypq1uc8e9eby8a5ueu5pmqv7jl9ax1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Bouquet/tr</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1147165</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401867</id>
      <parentid>5214285</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:07:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2042" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Bouquet
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Automattic — resmi kod (PHP, CSS, vb.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki bağlantı noktası
|description     = 
|image           = BouquetSkin.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.2.3
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=bouquet Arayüz Mesajları Viki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        =
|phabricator     = Bouquet
}}
'''Bouquet''', aynı adla ücretsiz ve açık kaynaklı GPL lisanslı WordPress temasından taşınan bir MediaWiki görünümdür.
WordPress tema sitesinde &quot;an elegant, simple theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; inspired by the beauty found in flowers&quot; olarak tanımlanmıştır.

WordPress teması Automattic tarafından yazılmıştır ve MediaWiki portu [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] tarafından 11 Ocak 2014 tarihinde [[ShoutWiki]] için yapılmıştır.

== Ana özellikler ==

* '''İki''' gezinti &quot;portletleri&quot; &amp;mdash; sayfanın üst kısmındaki özel, açılır menüyü (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Bouquet-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) ve sağ kenar çubuğu olarak &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
* Üç [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|tema]]:
** forget-me-not (internal name (''usetheme'' URL parametresi ve &lt;code&gt;$wgDefaultTheme&lt;/code&gt; için) ''forgetmenot'')
** pink dogwood (iç ad ''pinkdogwood'')
** tiger lily (dahili ad ''tigerlily'')
* Özel başlık/logo resmi (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Bouquet-skin-logo.png]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, 1100x180 piksel)

== Kurulum ==
{{SkinInstall
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]] &lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>8w80arda1iw9s7ji05yz3mz592xrguj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/135/id</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1147378</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402978</id>
      <parentid>3937307</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:47:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="97" xml:space="preserve">Ya, tetapi Anda harus membuat beberapa perubahan kecil. Format $1 pada umumnya kompatibel mundur.</text>
      <sha1>cdi9q63khshwrfln4yo25qp4t7bm8h1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Tables/1/vi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1148250</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402220</id>
      <parentid>3939473</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:59:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="182" xml:space="preserve">''Bảng (Tables)'' có thể được tham khảo ở đây; nếu bạn muốn tìm thêm thông tin về cấu trúc cơ sở dữ liệu (CSDL) bảng, hãy tham khảo tại $1.</text>
      <sha1>dsw37rbukew09hhm72tqpvzlng4c8bz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Tables/2/vi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1148251</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402223</id>
      <parentid>3939475</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:00:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Mibeblocky</username>
        <id>17658448</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="58" xml:space="preserve">'''Bảng (Tables)''' có thể tạo ra trong trang wiki.</text>
      <sha1>l2lap8wt89ywablq3r1vls4baqlsiej</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/nl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1154238</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402302</id>
      <parentid>5299101</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:07:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28" xml:space="preserve">Zie $1 voor meer informatie.</text>
      <sha1>a7wvafycgj9dluw04iunujauvsq02ca</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/ku</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1154900</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401804</id>
      <parentid>5184889</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/pt-br</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1161363</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402204</id>
      <parentid>5371510</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17825" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''Veja [[Wikitech:PAWS]] para mais detalhes.''
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Este documento fornece uma rápida visão geral interativa de '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' usando um '' notebook '' hospedado no ambiente do Wikimedia labs usando [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: Um Web Shell''')]].&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=Nota O PAWS Terminal suporta copiar e colar apenas em [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Other browsers based on Chromium|Navegadores baseados em Chromium]] &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;(Google Chrome, Opera e Safari estão bem).&lt;/span&gt; Se você usar um navegador diferente, poderá tentar apenas com o menu de contexto (clique com o botão direito do mouse) ou precisará digitar manualmente os comandos mencionados neste guia. Você também pode criar um arquivo bash com o conteúdo do comando e chamar o terminal com &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.}}

{{Warning|1=Todos os notebooks e terminais no PAWS estão sujeitos à rescisão sem aviso prévio. Você é incentivado a executar sua tarefa em outros locais (como [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) se sua tarefa durar mais de horas.}}

== Crie uma conta Wikimedia ==

Para seguir este guia, você só precisa de uma conta na Wikipedia / Wikimedia. Use [[Special:CreateAccount]] para criar uma.

Depois de criar uma conta, visite https://test.wikipedia.org/ e verifique se seu nome de usuário aparece no canto superior direito &lt;small&gt;(isso funciona em torno de {{task|T120327}})&lt;/small&gt;.

Se você é um novo usuário da Wikimedia, faça login com sua conta na meta.Wikimedia, Wikipédia, Wikidata e Commons.
E em cada um deles leia e exclua todas as mensagens pendentes que você tem (na parte superior).

== Entre em um notebook ==

Para iniciar um notebook hospedado, vá para https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub

Clique em &quot;Entrar com o MediaWiki&quot; e, em seguida, clique em &quot;Permitir&quot; quando for solicitado a aprovar &quot;Usar o OAuth para autenticação&quot;.
Na primeira vez que você acessa o PAWS, você precisa criar um servidor.
Clique no botão verde &quot;Start my Server&quot;.
É normal aguardar alguns minutos para a inicialização do novo servidor.

Uma vez concluído, você será redirecionado para um URL como &lt;nowiki&gt;https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/user/&lt;username&gt;/lab&lt;/nowiki&gt;

== Iniciar um terminal ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para iniciar um novo terminal interativo,
# Vá para a sua [$paws PAWS home]
# clique em 'New' no lado direito e
# selecione 'Terminal'.
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Isso abrirá uma nova janela com a URL $paws, com um prompt '$' do Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;

Este terminal não é um emulador. É um verdadeiro [[w:Bash (Unix shell)|bash shell]], como parte de uma instalação real do Linux em um [[w:Docker(software)|container docker]], para que você possa usar qualquer comando bash e use todos os comandos disponíveis no Linux que foram instalados.

Para ver alguns dos comandos disponíveis, use &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== Faça login na wiki ==
Isso estabelecerá sua conta no servidor e permitirá que você efetue login na linha de comando.
O comando a seguir deve confirmar que você pode efetuar login no testwiki. Ele usa o OAuth, portanto, não é necessário digitar uma senha.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Você pode conectar o pywikibot a um wiki diferente criando um arquivo chamado ''user-config.py'' em seu [[w:Home_directory|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; directory]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) e adicionando variáveis de ''mylang'' e ''family'':

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Crie uma página ==

Para criar uma página, digite o seguinte comando no terminal, substituindo '&amp;lt;username&gt;' pelo seu nome de usuário e pressionando 'Y' quando solicitado a aceitar suas alterações:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Você editou o wiki. Veja suas alterações abrindo &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; no seu navegador.

Você pode ler mais sobre cada um desses scripts de linha de comando com a opção de linha de comando '-help'.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Buscar uma página ==

A busca de muitas páginas é obtida com o comando &quot;listpages&quot;.

Para obter o conteúdo da página que você criou na seção anterior, digite o seguinte comando:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Agora, se você for para a sua [$pawshome PAWS files list], a página salva deverá estar presente.&lt;/span&gt;

== Um exemplo de script real ==
Quando um site usado na Wikipedia altera seu URL, os links na Wikipedia ficam desatualizados e também são possíveis [[w:WP:Dead links|links mortos]] se o site não redirecionar dos URLs antigos para os novos URLs.
Por exemplo, a Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) mudou seus links, como mover páginas de &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; para &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
Você pode encontrar a lista de usos do URL antigo na Wikipedia em inglês por [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].
A atualização manual de todos esses links consumirá muito tempo.
Felizmente, a EB manteve redirecionamentos de seus URLs antigos para os novos URLs, portanto, isso não precisa ser corrigido imediatamente.

Para um exemplo mais simples, atualmente a Wikipedia em inglês contém links para &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; em vez de &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; ou seja, um &quot;www&quot;. O subdomínio está ausente no URL.

Atualmente, existem 14 casos na Wikipedia em inglês: [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]

A Wikipedia em outro idioma também tem esse problema. por exemplo. há um caso na Wikipedia em alemão: [[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para corrigir esses links, podemos usar o script Pywikibot [[Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py]]. Nesta demonstração, usaremos o argumento '-simulate' para evitar a escrita no wiki, pois existem regras estritas sobre a Wikipedia em inglês [[w:WP:Bots| edição automática]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Primeiro vamos listar todas as páginas que apontam para $&lt;nowiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Agora, verificamos se essas páginas realmente possuem o URL literal na página; ou seja, eles não estão usando um modelo.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Agora use substituir para adicionar o &quot;www&quot; ausente.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

No PAWS e em qualquer terminal que suporte cores, a diferença de alterações mostrará o &quot;www.&quot; adicionado na cor verde do texto, facilitando a localização das alterações propostas.

== Dentro do Pywikibot ==

{{Warning|1=Não escreva senhas nos arquivos do servidor, os arquivos são públicos!}}

Em seguida, usaremos a sessão do PAWS Python.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# Vá para a sua [$paws PAWS home],
# clique em 'Novo' no lado direito e
# selecione 'Python 3'.
&lt;/div&gt;

Isso abrirá uma nova janela.

Na caixa de texto, digite o seguinte e, no menu Cell, selecione 'Run' (ou pressione Shift+Enter para executar).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Uma nova caixa de texto será exibida abaixo. Execute o seguinte para criar um objeto APISite conectado a https://test.wikipedia.org/:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Descreva o &quot;site&quot; inserindo-o na nova caixa de texto e selecionando &quot;Run&quot;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Deve mostrar

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

Crie um objeto de página:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Verifique se existe executando:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Deve gerar

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

Mostre o texto na página:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Altere o texto da página no objeto:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Salve a página no wiki:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

A resposta deve ser:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

O notebook interativo Python 3 permite que muitas linhas sejam executadas juntas. O acima pode ser colocado em uma caixa de texto e Executar

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

O log da sua sessão interativa do Python pode ser salvo ou baixado para referência futura.

== Acessando a documentação online no PAWS ==

A documentação do Pywikibot pode ser encontrada em https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/. Ele é originário principalmente de [[w:docstring|docstrings]], que pode ser carregado no notebook interativo do Python 3 usando a função interna do Python [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].

Por exemplo, para examinar os argumentos do método save acima, execute:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

ou

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Editando scripts Pywikibot ==

A biblioteca e os scripts do Pywikibot estão localizados em /srv/paws e são somente leitura. A biblioteca Pywikibot instalada não pode ser modificada no PAWS.

Os scripts podem ser modificados após copiá-los para a sua casa no PAWS.

Por exemplo, para executar um &quot;checkimages.py&quot; modificado:

# No terminal, digite &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# Em um navegador, vá para a sua [$paws PAWS home] e clique no arquivo &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
# No navegador, você pode editar o arquivo. Edite o código -- por exemplo, logo após o código &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; na linha 1775, adicione uma nova linha 1776 que imprimirá seu nome: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;
# Na interface de edição, use o menu Arquivo e clique em Salvar para salvar suas modificações.
# No terminal, digite &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== Veja também ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* [$1 PAWS cheatsheet] por um usuário (por exemplo, sobre acesso à API e ao banco de dados)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>rrbfoh1tmka38eevxy8oaai214vhbq4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402218</id>
      <parentid>5402204</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:56:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17788" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''Veja [[Wikitech:PAWS]] para mais detalhes.''
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Este documento fornece uma rápida visão geral interativa de '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' usando um '' notebook '' hospedado no ambiente do Wikimedia labs usando [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: Um Web Shell''')]].&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=Nota O PAWS Terminal suporta copiar e colar apenas em [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Other browsers based on Chromium|Navegadores baseados em Chromium]] &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;(Google Chrome, Opera e Safari estão bem).&lt;/span&gt; Se você usar um navegador diferente, poderá tentar apenas com o menu de contexto (clique com o botão direito do mouse) ou precisará digitar manualmente os comandos mencionados neste guia. Você também pode criar um arquivo bash com o conteúdo do comando e chamar o terminal com &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.}}

{{Warning|1=Todos os notebooks e terminais no PAWS estão sujeitos à rescisão sem aviso prévio. Você é incentivado a executar sua tarefa em outros locais (como [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) se sua tarefa durar mais de horas.}}

== Crie uma conta Wikimedia ==

Para seguir este guia, você só precisa de uma conta na Wikipedia / Wikimedia. Use [[Special:CreateAccount]] para criar uma.

Depois de criar uma conta, visite https://test.wikipedia.org/ e verifique se seu nome de usuário aparece no canto superior direito &lt;small&gt;(isso funciona em torno de {{task|T120327}})&lt;/small&gt;.

Se você é um novo usuário da Wikimedia, faça login com sua conta na meta.Wikimedia, Wikipédia, Wikidata e Commons.
E em cada um deles leia e exclua todas as mensagens pendentes que você tem (na parte superior).

== Entre em um notebook ==

Para iniciar um notebook hospedado, vá para https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub

Clique em &quot;Entrar com o MediaWiki&quot; e, em seguida, clique em &quot;Permitir&quot; quando for solicitado a aprovar &quot;Usar o OAuth para autenticação&quot;.
Na primeira vez que você acessa o PAWS, você precisa criar um servidor.
Clique no botão verde &quot;Start my Server&quot;.
É normal aguardar alguns minutos para a inicialização do novo servidor.

Uma vez concluído, você será redirecionado para um URL como &lt;nowiki&gt;https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/user/&lt;username&gt;/lab&lt;/nowiki&gt;

== Iniciar um terminal ==

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Para iniciar um novo terminal interativo,
# Vá para a sua [$paws PAWS home]
# clique em 'New' no lado direito e
# selecione 'Terminal'.
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Isso abrirá uma nova janela com a URL $paws, com um prompt '$' do Linux.
&lt;/div&gt;

Este terminal não é um emulador. É um verdadeiro [[w:Bash (Unix shell)|bash shell]], como parte de uma instalação real do Linux em um [[w:Docker(software)|container docker]], para que você possa usar qualquer comando bash e use todos os comandos disponíveis no Linux que foram instalados.

Para ver alguns dos comandos disponíveis, use &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


== Faça login na wiki ==
Isso estabelecerá sua conta no servidor e permitirá que você efetue login na linha de comando.
O comando a seguir deve confirmar que você pode efetuar login no testwiki. Ele usa o OAuth, portanto, não é necessário digitar uma senha.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Você pode conectar o pywikibot a um wiki diferente criando um arquivo chamado ''user-config.py'' em seu [[w:Home_directory|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; directory]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) e adicionando variáveis de ''mylang'' e ''family'':

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Crie uma página ==

Para criar uma página, digite o seguinte comando no terminal, substituindo '&amp;lt;username&gt;' pelo seu nome de usuário e pressionando 'Y' quando solicitado a aceitar suas alterações:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Você editou o wiki. Veja suas alterações abrindo &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; no seu navegador.

Você pode ler mais sobre cada um desses scripts de linha de comando com a opção de linha de comando '-help'.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Buscar uma página ==

A busca de muitas páginas é obtida com o comando &quot;listpages&quot;.

Para obter o conteúdo da página que você criou na seção anterior, digite o seguinte comando:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Agora, se você for para a sua [$pawshome PAWS files list], a página salva deverá estar presente.&lt;/span&gt;

== Um exemplo de script real ==
Quando um site usado na Wikipedia altera seu URL, os links na Wikipedia ficam desatualizados e também são possíveis [[w:WP:Dead links|links mortos]] se o site não redirecionar dos URLs antigos para os novos URLs.
Por exemplo, a Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) mudou seus links, como mover páginas de &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; para &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
Você pode encontrar a lista de usos do URL antigo na Wikipedia em inglês por [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].
A atualização manual de todos esses links consumirá muito tempo.
Felizmente, a EB manteve redirecionamentos de seus URLs antigos para os novos URLs, portanto, isso não precisa ser corrigido imediatamente.

Para um exemplo mais simples, atualmente a Wikipedia em inglês contém links para &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; em vez de &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; ou seja, um &quot;www&quot;. O subdomínio está ausente no URL.

Atualmente, existem 14 casos na Wikipedia em inglês: [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]

A Wikipedia em outro idioma também tem esse problema. por exemplo. há um caso na Wikipedia em alemão: [[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]

Para corrigir esses links, podemos usar o script Pywikibot {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}}. Nesta demonstração, usaremos o argumento '-simulate' para evitar a escrita no wiki, pois existem regras estritas sobre a Wikipedia em inglês [[w:WP:Bots| edição automática]].

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Primeiro vamos listar todas as páginas que apontam para $&lt;nowiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Agora, verificamos se essas páginas realmente possuem o URL literal na página; ou seja, eles não estão usando um modelo.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Agora use substituir para adicionar o &quot;www&quot; ausente.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

No PAWS e em qualquer terminal que suporte cores, a diferença de alterações mostrará o &quot;www.&quot; adicionado na cor verde do texto, facilitando a localização das alterações propostas.

== Dentro do Pywikibot ==

{{Warning|1=Não escreva senhas nos arquivos do servidor, os arquivos são públicos!}}

Em seguida, usaremos a sessão do PAWS Python.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# Vá para a sua [$paws PAWS home],
# clique em 'Novo' no lado direito e
# selecione 'Python 3'.
&lt;/div&gt;

Isso abrirá uma nova janela.

Na caixa de texto, digite o seguinte e, no menu Cell, selecione 'Run' (ou pressione Shift+Enter para executar).

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Uma nova caixa de texto será exibida abaixo. Execute o seguinte para criar um objeto APISite conectado a https://test.wikipedia.org/:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Descreva o &quot;site&quot; inserindo-o na nova caixa de texto e selecionando &quot;Run&quot;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Deve mostrar

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

Crie um objeto de página:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Verifique se existe executando:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Deve gerar

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

Mostre o texto na página:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Altere o texto da página no objeto:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Salve a página no wiki:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

A resposta deve ser:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

O notebook interativo Python 3 permite que muitas linhas sejam executadas juntas. O acima pode ser colocado em uma caixa de texto e Executar

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

O log da sua sessão interativa do Python pode ser salvo ou baixado para referência futura.

== Acessando a documentação online no PAWS ==

A documentação do Pywikibot pode ser encontrada em https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/. Ele é originário principalmente de [[w:docstring|docstrings]], que pode ser carregado no notebook interativo do Python 3 usando a função interna do Python [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].

Por exemplo, para examinar os argumentos do método save acima, execute:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

ou

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Editando scripts Pywikibot ==

A biblioteca e os scripts do Pywikibot estão localizados em /srv/paws e são somente leitura. A biblioteca Pywikibot instalada não pode ser modificada no PAWS.

Os scripts podem ser modificados após copiá-los para a sua casa no PAWS.

Por exemplo, para executar um &quot;checkimages.py&quot; modificado:

# No terminal, digite &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# Em um navegador, vá para a sua [$paws PAWS home] e clique no arquivo &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
# No navegador, você pode editar o arquivo. Edite o código -- por exemplo, logo após o código &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; na linha 1775, adicione uma nova linha 1776 que imprimirá seu nome: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;
# Na interface de edição, use o menu Arquivo e clique em Salvar para salvar suas modificações.
# No terminal, digite &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== Veja também ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
* [$1 PAWS cheatsheet] por um usuário (por exemplo, sobre acesso à API e ao banco de dados)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>bs0d9vfep39cuz9r3q77w0w6vpm9dv0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/32/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1161412</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402217</id>
      <parentid>3979278</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:56:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="243" xml:space="preserve">Para corrigir esses links, podemos usar o script Pywikibot $1. Nesta demonstração, usaremos o argumento '-simulate' para evitar a escrita no wiki, pois existem regras estritas sobre a Wikipedia em inglês [[w:WP:Bots| edição automática]].</text>
      <sha1>e2dh0v9tg2ugghduy9q2y851wpknbwd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/pt-br</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1165673</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401960</id>
      <parentid>5401043</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:49:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15394" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Header}}
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Melhorias da Área de Trabalho
| description = Uma série de novos recursos e alterações para o tema Vector
| logo        = Annotated Wikipedia Vector interface (logged-out).png
| start       = 2019-05
| end         = 2022-08
| group       = {{void|1=[[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web|Leitura/Web]]}}
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]] (Proprietária do Produto)
| team        = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web|Leitura/Web]]
| Phabricator = desktop-improvements
| updates     = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Updates|Subpágina de atualizações]]
| progress    = 
| previous    = 
| next        = 
| projectpage =
| backlog     = [[phab:project/view/67/|Painel de tarefas do Phabricator]]
| display     = 
}}
Já se passaram 12 anos desde que o tema atual padrão da Wikimedia ([[Special:MyLanguage/Skin:Vector|Vector]]) foi implantado.
Na última década, a interface foi enriquecida com [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|extensões]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Gadgets|gadgets]] e [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Interface/JavaScript#Personal scripts|scripts de usuário]].
A maioria deles não foi coordenada visualmente ou entre wiki.
Ao mesmo tempo, o web design, bem como as expectativas dos leitores e editores, evoluíram.
Achamos que é hora de pegar algumas dessas ideias e trazê-las para a experiência padrão de todos os usuários, em todos as wikis, de forma organizada e consistente.
{{void|1=
Nos próximos trimestres, a [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Team|equipe de leitores da web]] pesquisará e desenvolverá melhorias para a experiência da área de trabalho com base em pesquisas e ferramentas existentes.
}}

Nosso objetivo é tornar as wikis da Wikimedia mais acolhedoras e aumentar a utilidade entre os leitores e manter a utilidade aos editores existentes. Medimos o aumento da confiança e do sentimento positivo em relação a nossos sites, e a utilidade de nossos sites (o uso de ações comuns, como pesquisa e troca de idioma).

Atualmente, na maioria das wikis, apenas usuários conectados podem optar por participar individualmente. Em wikis selecionadas, nossas mudanças são implantadas para todos por padrão, e os usuários conectados podem optar por sair. Esperamos aumentar o conjunto de wikis de ''adoção inicial'' gradualmente, até que nossas melhorias sejam padronizadas em todas as wikis em julho de 2022.

== Atualizações ==
{{main|Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Updates}}
{{:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Updates}}
== Qual é o nosso objetivo? ==
=== Imagine um guarda-roupa ===
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;nolines&quot; widths=&quot;300&quot; heights=&quot;180&quot;&gt;
File:CLOTHES HANGING OVER BED JAPANESE STYLE.jpg|Gostaríamos de reorganizar gradualmente isso…
File:Wilmslow, United Kingdom (Unsplash).jpg|…nisso :)
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== Atualmente, a interface… ===
'''...não corresponde às expectativas. ...está bagunçada e não é intuitiva. ...não destaca o lado da comunidade. ...não é consistente com a versão móvel.'''

# A interface da área de trabalho não corresponde às expectativas criadas pelas modernas plataformas da web. Parece desorientador e desconectado. Os links de navegação e interface são organizados aleatoriamente.
# Existem distrações que não permitem que os usuários se concentrarem no que eles vieram fazer. É um desafio para os leitores se concentrarem no conteúdo. Não é possível alternar intuitivamente de idioma, procurar conteúdo ou ajustar as configurações de leitura. Os novos editores não conseguem usar sua intuição para configurar sua conta, abrir o editor ou aprender como usar páginas que não são de artigo para fins de moderação.
# Uma porcentagem muito pequena de leitores entende como as wikis da Wikimedia funcionam. Muitos leitores não sabem que o conteúdo que estão lendo é escrito por voluntários e atualizado com frequência, ou que eles também podem contribuir.
# A grande diferença de experiências entre nossa interface de desktop, aplicativos e dispositivos móveis dificulta a conexão de nossos leitores aos produtos. Há uma falta de unidade no conceito de sites da Wikimedia.

== Como as alterações são feitas ==
=== Princípios ===

'''Não tocamos no conteúdo. Não removemos nenhuma funcionalidade. Não tocamos em outros temas além do Vector. Somos inspirados pelos gadgets existentes. Não fazemos grandes alterações em etapas únicas.'''

# Estamos trabalhando apenas na interface. Nenhum trabalho será realizado em termos estilo de predefinições, estrutura do conteúdo da página, suporte a mapas ou predefinições transwiki.
# Embora nossas mudanças sejam facilmente perceptíveis, estamos adotando uma abordagem evolutiva e queremos que o site continue familiar para leitores e editores. Cada recurso é discutido, desenvolvido e implantado separadamente.
# Os elementos da interface podem mudar de lugar, mas todos os itens de navegação e outras funcionalidades atualmente disponíveis por padrão permanecerão.
# Temas que não sejam o Vector estão fora do escopo de nossos ajustes. Congelamos o Vector como Vector Legado, e começamos a implantar nossas funcionalidades como partes do novo Vector padrão.
# Analisamos muitas wikis e notamos muitos gadgets úteis. Alguns deles definitivamente merecem ser elevados e fazer parte da experiência padrão.
# Antes do desenvolvimento e após a implantação, coletamos dados (via [[d:Q1810071|teste A/B]], rodadas de feedback de protótipo etc.). No caso de resultados significativamente negativos, reverteremos nossas alterações.
# É nossa intenção testar nossas melhorias em colaboração com um conjunto diversificado de wikis, tanto Wikipédias quanto projetos irmãos, que se voluntariaram a ''implementação antecipada''.
{{void|1=
# As três primeiras funcionalidades (o [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Header|novo cabeçalho]], a [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Collapsible sidebar|barra lateral flexível]] e a [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Limiting content width|limitação largura do conteúdo]]) foram implantadas em julho de 2020.
# Nosso segundo grande recurso, uma [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Search|barra de pesquisa]] avançada, foi adicionada a wikis de implementação antecipada em fevereiro de 2021.
}}

{| class=&quot;plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;text-align:center;&quot;
|-valign=&quot;top&quot;
! style=&quot;padding:.5em; margin:.5em;&quot; |a maioria dos wikis
! style=&quot;padding:.5em; margin:.5em;&quot;|wikis de ''implementação antecipada''
|-
| style=&quot;padding:.5em; margin:.5em;&quot; |editores ou leitores&lt;br /&gt;não veem nossas alterações por padrão
| style=&quot;padding:.5em; margin:.5em;&quot;|editores e leitores&lt;br /&gt;veem nossas alterações por padrão
|-
| style=&quot;padding:.5em; margin:.5em;&quot; |somente editores podem participar&lt;br/&gt;(a partir das preferências do usuário, marcando '''{{int|skinname-vector-2022}}''' na guia [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|{{int|prefs-rendering}}]])
| style=&quot;padding:.5em; margin:.5em;&quot;|somente editores podem recusar&lt;br/&gt;(usando '''[https://www.mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=Special:Preferences&amp;wprov=vctw1#mw-prefsection-rendering-skin-skin-prefs {{int|vector-opt-out}}]''' na barra lateral ou diretamente nas preferências de usuário)
|}

{{anchor|Timeline}}
=== Plano de implantação e cronograma ===
&lt;span style=&quot;background-color:#fc3;&quot;&gt;Gostaríamos que nossas melhorias fossem padrão em todas as wikis em agosto/setembro de 2022.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div style=&quot;margin:auto; text-align: center;&quot;&gt;{{Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Timeline}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{anchor|test-wikis}}{{anchor|List of early adopter wikis (test wikis)}}
{{hidden
|1=Lista de wikis participando antecipadamente (wikis de teste)
|headercss=background-color:#eaf3ff;
|2=
Primeiro grupo de wikis (marcados como ◇ na linha do tempo acima):
* [[:eu:|{{int|project-localized-name-euwiki}}]]
* [[:fr:|{{int|project-localized-name-frwiki}}]]
* [[wikt:fr:|{{int|project-localized-name-frwiktionary}}]]
* [[:he:|{{int|project-localized-name-hewiki}}]]
* [[:fa:|{{int|project-localized-name-fawiki}}]]
* [[v:pt:|{{int|project-localized-name-ptwikiversity}}]]
* [https://office.wikimedia.org/ Wiki da Fundação]

Segundo grupo de wikis (marcados como ◇◇ na linha do tempo acima):

* [[:bn:|{{int|project-localized-name-bnwiki}}]]
* [[:voy:de:|{{int|project-localized-name-dewikivoyage}}]]
* [[:ko:|{{int|project-localized-name-kowiki}}]]
* [[:pt:|{{int|project-localized-name-ptwiki}}]]
* [[:sr:|{{int|project-localized-name-srwiki}}]]
* [[:tr:|{{int|project-localized-name-trwiki}}]]
* [[:vec:|{{int|project-localized-name-vecwiki}}]]
* [[:incubator:|{{int|project-localized-name-incubatorwiki}}]]

Terceiro grupo de wikis (marcados como ◇◇◇ na linha do tempo acima):

* [[:ary:|{{int|project-localized-name-arywiki}}]]
* [[q:fr:|{{int|project-localized-name-frwikiquote}}]]
* [[:id:|{{int|project-localized-name-idwiki}}]]
* [[n:pt:|{{int|project-localized-name-ptwikinews}}]]
* [[n:pl:|{{int|project-localized-name-plwikinews}}]]
* [[:th:|{{int|project-localized-name-thwiki}}]]
* [[:vi:|{{int|project-localized-name-viwiki}}]]
* [[b:vi:|{{int|project-localized-name-viwikibooks}}]]
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/span&gt;
* [[:foundation:|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikimedia Foundation Governance wiki&lt;/span&gt;]]
* [https://collab.wikimedia.org/  &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Collab wiki&lt;/span&gt;]
* [[:strategy:|Wiki de estratégia]]

Quarto grupo de wikis (marcados como ◇◇◇◇ na linha do tempo acima):

* [[s:ar:|{{int|project-localized-name-arwikisource}}]]
* [[:ca:|{{int|project-localized-name-cawiki}}]]
* [[s:pl:|{{int|project-localized-name-plwikisource}}]]
* [[n:zh:|{{int|project-localized-name-zhwikinews}}]]
}}

{{anchor|participate}}{{anchor|contact}}

== Envolver-se e contato ==
{{void|1=
'''[[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|Teste nossos recursos individualmente]], [[Talk:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements|compartilhe feedback]], e [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Participate#Entire communities|junte-se às nossas wikis já participantes]]!'''
}}
* {{clickable button 2|Special:Newsletter/28/subscribe|Inscrever no boletim informativo}}
* '''[[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|Teste individualmente]]''': em Preferências, marque a opção ''{{int|skinname-vector-2022}}''. Você também pode ativar nossas alterações usando as [[Special:GlobalPreferences#mw-prefsection-rendering|Preferências globais]].
* '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Updates/Talk to Web|Participe de reuniõs online conosco]]''': organizamos reuniões a cada 2-3 semanas.
* '''Promova''': Informe sua comunidade. Compartilhe nossas [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Updates|atualizações]] e [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Repository#posts|postagens no blog]].
* '''Reportar erros''': para reportar um erro, crie uma tarefa no Phabricator e adicione {{Phabricator inline tag|desktop-improvements}}.
* '''Implementação antecipada''': Esperamos aumentar gradualmente o conjunto de wikis de ''implementação antecipada''. Você acha que sua comunidade pode estar interessada em ter nossa interface como padrão? Por favor, entre em contato conosco!
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; style=&quot;float:left;&quot;&gt;
File:Wikispotkanie-warszawa-2021-07-03-rd-26.jpg|[[User:SGrabarczuk (WMF)|Szymon Grabarczuk]]&lt;br/&gt;Especialista em Relações com a Comunidade&lt;br/&gt;sgrabarczuk{{@}}wikimedia.org
File:Wikimedia Foundation hall blurred.jpg|[[User:Mehran (WMF)|Mehran]]&lt;br/&gt;Embaixador persa&lt;br/&gt;mehran-ctr{{@}}wikimedia.org
File:Wikimedia Foundation hall blurred.jpg|[[User:Patafisik (WMF)|Patafisik]]&lt;br/&gt;Embaixadora francesa&lt;br/&gt;patafisik-ctr{{@}}wikimedia.org
File:Wikimedia Foundation hall blurred.jpg|[[User:Bluetpp (WMF)|Phuong Pham]]&lt;br/&gt;Embaixador vietnamita&lt;br/&gt;ppham-ctr{{@}}wikimedia.org
File:Wikimedia Foundation hall blurred.jpg|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[User:Zapipedia (WMF)|Zapipedia]]&lt;br/&gt;Spanish Ambassador&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;izapico-ctr{{@}}wikimedia.org
&lt;/gallery&gt;
{{clear}}
* '''Traduzir''': ajude-nos a traduzir as páginas relacionadas:
{{hidden|1=Traduções prioritárias
|headercss=background-color:#eaf3ff;
|2=

Top 3
# {{ll|Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements}}
# {{ll|Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Frequently asked questions}}
# {{ll|Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features}}

Outras traduções importantes
# [[Template:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Office hours announcement]]
# [[Template:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Talk page intro]]
# [[Template:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Navigation]]
# [[Template:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Header]]
# {{ll|Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Updates}}
# {{ll|Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Repository#posts}}

[https://mediawiki.org/w/index.php?title=Special:Translate&amp;group=agg-Desktop_Improvements&amp;action=page&amp;filter= Ligação direta para todas as traduções]
}}
== Quais recursos serão adicionados ==
{{main|Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features}}
Não criamos uma especificação de produto completa e detalhada. Cada recurso é construído e implementado '''separadamente''' ao longo do tempo. Os recursos criados ainda estão sendo ajustados e aprimorados. Nossas decisões são baseadas em comentários da comunidade, testes de usuários e dados de API extraídos.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;slideshow&quot; showthumbnails=&quot;&quot; caption=&quot;Visualização das versões implantadas e dos conceitos iniciais&quot;&gt;
Header Logo reconfiguration - commons pt - GIF.gif|[[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Header|Cabeçalho 1: reconfiguração do logotipo]]
File:Collapsible sidebar - wikidata fr - GIF 2.gif|[[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Collapsible sidebar|Barra lateral ocultável]]
File:Limit content width - wikiversity pt - GIF 2.gif|[[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Limiting content width|Limitando a largura do conteúdo]]
File:Sketch of search results with images and descriptions for Desktop improvements project.jpg|[[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Search|Pesquisa: movimento da barra e outras melhorias]]
File:04 - DIP - Language links in article header.png|[[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Language switching|Seletor de idioma 1: links de idioma na barra de título do artigo]]
File:Consolidated user tools prototype for Desktop improvements project.gif|[[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/User menu|Menu do usuário]]
File:Search prototype for the Desktop improvements project.gif|[[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Sticky Header|Cabeçalho 2: cabeçalhos do site e artigo fixos]]
File:Table of contents prototype for Desktop improvements project.gif|[[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Table of contents|Índice]]
File:Article tools prototype for the Desktop improvements project.gif|[[Special:MyLanguage/Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/Features/Page tools|Ferramentas do artigo]]
&lt;/gallery&gt;</text>
      <sha1>s12pn74du0ydsqdkhg2zhsfcm1nh9w5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:SocialToolsSidebar/tr</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>1165831</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402006</id>
      <parentid>4104032</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:13:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="997" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle = 
|title = Sosyal araçları
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle = font-size:130%
|contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1 = Hakkında
|content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=Sosyal araçları}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=Hataları bildirme ve katkı sağlama}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=Uzantıların listesi}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Sosyal araçların tarihçesi}}

|heading2 = Uyumluluk
|content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=Echo bildirimleri desteği}} (taslak)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=MediaWiki uyumluluğu}}

}}
|#default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>5vnux80k5krf6jzdt3hjxbscspbej4f</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/tr</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1166681</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402163</id>
      <parentid>4950206</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:37:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8542" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;2017'den beri, [[VisualEditor]] ''''''{{ll|visual diffs}}'''''' (görsel fark göstergeleri) sağlar.&lt;/span&gt;
Bunlar arayüzde iki yerde bulunur: kullanıcı sayfayı kaydetmeden önce belgede yapılan değişiklikleri önizlerken ve geçmiş sayfasından erişilen standart MediaWiki fark ekranı içinde ([[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta özelliği]] olarak).
Her iki durumda da, görsel fark [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|geleneksel iki sütunlu vikimetin fark]] ile birlikte görünür ve kullanıcı iki ekran arasında geçiş yapabilir.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diffs have two main advantages over wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first is that editors can directly see the changes they and others have made without needing to understand [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitext]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is particularly helpful when looking at changes to graphical structures such as tables; for example, if an edit deletes a column from a table, the wikitext diff for it would be hard to understand, while the visual diff would be immediately obvious.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The second is that the technology can be used to more accurately represent the change to the reader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if an edit swapped two paragraphs (with or without changes to the paragraphs), the visual diff will identify that this is what occurred, while a wikitext diff makes it appear that a paragraph was deleted and an entirely new paragraph was added.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== On regular diff pages ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of the examples and screenshots below are about using visual diffs during page previews when editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, VisualEditor's visual diffs can also be used on regular diff pages, on any wiki that has VisualEditor installed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can see an example of it in use on the English-language Wikipedia [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|here]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For wikis that have VisualEditor, there are several ways to activate this visual diff display:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If your wiki has a &quot;Beta features&quot; tab within Special:Preferences, and you want to make visual diffs an &quot;opt-in&quot; feature for users, you can add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* As seen in the Wikipedia example linked above, the visual diff mode can also be activated by simply adding &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; to the URL of a diff page.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Nasıl çalışır ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing some changes to an article.  Most changes are highlighted with text formatting.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|300px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you are finished editing the page, type your edit summary and then choose &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In visual mode, you will see additions, removals, new links, and formatting highlighted.  Other changes, such as changing the size of an image, are described in notes on the side.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Toggle button showing visual and wikitext options; visual option is selected.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|220x220px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the toggle button to switch between visual and wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing the same changes, in the two-column wikitext diff display.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|245x245px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The wikitext diff is the same diff tool that is used in the wikitext editors and in the page history.&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{clr}}
== Örnekler ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Rich text edits&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Paragraph move with subtle vandalism&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff (2017).  This feature was added to the wikitext diff engine in 2018; see [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Table column removed&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Text, formatting and list changes&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insert new multimedia (sheet music)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Technology used ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thalia Chan, Unifying editing and visual diffs, Wikimania 2017&lt;/span&gt;]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Current limitations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No notices for changes to &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, such as categories or TOC keywords.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Has issues with complex changes to tables.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unavailable on certain special pages:&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Undo &quot;diff&quot; pages.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit conflict pages&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== History ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This feature has been available as the first diff tool in the desktop VisualEditor from the 1.31.0-wmf-20 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 6 February 2018).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before that, it was a secondary tool from the 1.29.0-wmf-17 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 21 March 2017).&lt;/span&gt;

== Ayrıca bakınız ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Dipnotlar ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>0hutebioym236322f73d9hhnaqi66s0</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402186</id>
      <parentid>5402163</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:48:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8499" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
2017'den beri, {{ll|VisualEditor}} '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' (görsel fark göstergeleri) sağlar.
Bunlar arayüzde iki yerde bulunur: kullanıcı sayfayı kaydetmeden önce belgede yapılan değişiklikleri önizlerken ve geçmiş sayfasından erişilen standart MediaWiki fark ekranı içinde ([[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta özelliği]] olarak).
Her iki durumda da, görsel fark [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|geleneksel iki sütunlu vikimetin fark]] ile birlikte görünür ve kullanıcı iki ekran arasında geçiş yapabilir.

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diffs have two main advantages over wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first is that editors can directly see the changes they and others have made without needing to understand [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitext]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is particularly helpful when looking at changes to graphical structures such as tables; for example, if an edit deletes a column from a table, the wikitext diff for it would be hard to understand, while the visual diff would be immediately obvious.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The second is that the technology can be used to more accurately represent the change to the reader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if an edit swapped two paragraphs (with or without changes to the paragraphs), the visual diff will identify that this is what occurred, while a wikitext diff makes it appear that a paragraph was deleted and an entirely new paragraph was added.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== On regular diff pages ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of the examples and screenshots below are about using visual diffs during page previews when editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, VisualEditor's visual diffs can also be used on regular diff pages, on any wiki that has VisualEditor installed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can see an example of it in use on the English-language Wikipedia [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|here]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For wikis that have VisualEditor, there are several ways to activate this visual diff display:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If your wiki has a &quot;Beta features&quot; tab within Special:Preferences, and you want to make visual diffs an &quot;opt-in&quot; feature for users, you can add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* As seen in the Wikipedia example linked above, the visual diff mode can also be activated by simply adding &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; to the URL of a diff page.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Nasıl çalışır ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing some changes to an article.  Most changes are highlighted with text formatting.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|300px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you are finished editing the page, type your edit summary and then choose &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In visual mode, you will see additions, removals, new links, and formatting highlighted.  Other changes, such as changing the size of an image, are described in notes on the side.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Toggle button showing visual and wikitext options; visual option is selected.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|220x220px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the toggle button to switch between visual and wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing the same changes, in the two-column wikitext diff display.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|245x245px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The wikitext diff is the same diff tool that is used in the wikitext editors and in the page history.&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{clr}}
== Örnekler ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Rich text edits&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Paragraph move with subtle vandalism&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff (2017).  This feature was added to the wikitext diff engine in 2018; see [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Table column removed&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Text, formatting and list changes&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insert new multimedia (sheet music)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Technology used ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thalia Chan, Unifying editing and visual diffs, Wikimania 2017&lt;/span&gt;]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Current limitations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No notices for changes to &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, such as categories or TOC keywords.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Has issues with complex changes to tables.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unavailable on certain special pages:&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Undo &quot;diff&quot; pages.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit conflict pages&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== History ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This feature has been available as the first diff tool in the desktop VisualEditor from the 1.31.0-wmf-20 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 6 February 2018).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before that, it was a secondary tool from the 1.29.0-wmf-17 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 21 March 2017).&lt;/span&gt;

== Ayrıca bakınız ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== Dipnotlar ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5367lfm3h4rmih12lynf8za993hd0p8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Diffs/15/tr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1166682</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402185</id>
      <parentid>4950203</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:48:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="58" xml:space="preserve">2017'den beri, $2 $1 (görsel fark göstergeleri) sağlar.</text>
      <sha1>kqb94pagx898icl9mr9lihwe53gi1am</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/sv</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1168128</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402269</id>
      <parentid>5400760</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="13419" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=Uppdaterad information finns på Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].}}

Genom att klicka på [[Special:preferences|inställningar]] längst upp till höger när du är inloggad kan du ändra dina inställningar.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|se nedan]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|se nedan]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || Hantera tvåfaktorsauktorisering.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || Hantera globala inställningar.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== Globalt konto ====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

* Språk
* Hur vill du att andra refererar till dig?
* Fler språkinställningar

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* Din nuvarande signatur
* Ny signatur
** Behandla som wikitext

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Date format and time offset ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Se även==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>r6oy7xuf899yie5lkhziyhw0os2wrbb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/ml</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1172477</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402618</id>
      <parentid>4578055</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4567" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions (formerly known as Flow) are [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|a project]] of the Collaboration team at the Wikimedia Foundation to build a modern discussion and collaboration system for Wikimedia projects.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Quick tour ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How Structured Discussions look - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Try it!]]&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There is some specific terms concerning Structured Discussions. They have been defined in '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|the Glossary]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Advanced tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some advanced tools are available, for specific purposes. They have been regrouped on these subjects:
&lt;/div&gt;

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Activation&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What happens when Structured Discussions are enabled on a page?&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Topics&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filter topics, Edit a topic/message, Summarize a topic, Resolve a topic&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Permalinks&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to create links to subjects&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notifications and watchlist&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How the history system works&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide, Delete, Suppress topics&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading contents on a new Structured Discussions conversation&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shortcuts&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Keyboard shortcuts to use on visual editing mode.&lt;/span&gt;

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All documentation on one page.&lt;/span&gt;}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>ezmx4y92cr8rxt4sqkyj2sylwbojd97</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:DuskToDawn/zh</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1176961</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401844</id>
      <parentid>5214317</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:00:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2460" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = DuskToDawn
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* Automattic — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] — MediaWiki port
|description     = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dark skin that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&lt;/span&gt;
|image           = DuskToDawn.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.3.2
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=dusktodawn Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = DuskToDawn
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''DuskToDawn''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name. It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;a dark theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by {{u|Jack Phoenix}} on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Dusk to Dawn is, according to various different WordPress sources, the successor to the [[Skin:Dusk|Dusk]] skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Its content area is even narrower than Dusk's, which means that various MediaWiki pages &amp;mdash; such as [[Special:Version]], etc. &amp;mdash; render outright poorly.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &quot;Page last edited (by Foo)&quot; line below the page title, akin to that on ShoutWiki's default skin, Aurora
&lt;/div&gt;
* 没有logo
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Narrow content area (see the intro section of this page), which makes this suitable for blog-like sites
&lt;/div&gt;

==安装==
{{SkinInstall|DuskToDawn|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>r27iyuropr5miozeb2mgbpahx9kcfc7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Gadgets/8/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1187030</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403317</id>
      <parentid>4054416</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:22:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14" xml:space="preserve">=== Format ===</text>
      <sha1>gvn5xjkpfyso7u6yihylmjv17j4ekub</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Gadgets/9/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1187031</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403318</id>
      <parentid>4054417</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:22:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44" xml:space="preserve">==== Using MediaWiki Gadgets Definition ====</text>
      <sha1>kaycvnnunls1h47xyp4qotsgeieylun</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/en</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>1187037</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403323</id>
      <parentid>5307412</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:23:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14703" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = Allow users to enable JS-based, user-provided gadgets from their preferences page
|example         = Wikimedia Commons: [[commons:Special:Gadgets|Gadget overview]], [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|user preferences]] (click &quot;Gadgets&quot;; you need to be logged in of course)
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
The '''Gadgets''' extension provides a way for users to pick JavaScript or CSS based &quot;gadgets&quot; that other wiki users provide.

Gadgets are made up of JavaScript and/or CSS {{ll|snippets}} located on pages in the MediaWiki namespace.
Each gadget is defined by a line in [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]], providing a name and description for the gadget, and a list of the JS and CSS snippets that it uses (see the ''[[#Usage|Usage]]'' section below).

Since Gadgets reside in the MediaWiki namespace (the list defining the gadgets as well as the actual code snippets), only sysops (interface admins from 1.32) can edit the code.
This is as it should be: only users especially trusted by the wiki community should be able to edit JavaScript code that is used by other users, since JavaScript can easily be used to hijack accounts or spy on people.

== Installation ==
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
== Usage ==
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|Selection of some gadgets at the user preferences in de.wikipedia]]
There are two ways to define gadgets depending on the &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;.
If It is &lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt; (the default value), the list of available gadgets is defined on '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''.
In an alternative way, Gadget definitions are defined on pages in the [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|Gadget definition]] namespace when &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt; is set to &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;.

{{caution|1=Migration of the existing gadget definitions is not yet supported, so you will lose previously defined gadgets after changing this option.}}

Once created with at least one valid gadget, gadgets defined there show up in the &quot;Gadgets&quot; section of [[Special:Preferences]], so users can pick the gadgets they would like to use.
An overview of the gadgets defined by MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition is also shown on '''[[Special:Gadgets]]''', along with links to the respective system messages, for easy editing.
Statistics for non-default gadget usage can be seen at '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''.

=== Format ===

==== Using MediaWiki Gadgets Definition ====
Each line in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition that starts with one or more &quot;*&quot; (asterisks) characters defines a gadget; it must have the following form:

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [options (can be omitted)] | page names

The first field (&quot;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&quot; in the example) is the gadget's ''internal name'', and references a system message ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''' in the example) that contains a short description of the gadget, using wiki syntax.

{{note|1=The ''internal name'' is used as part of the name of a form field and must follow the [https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id rules defined for NAME attribute values].
This means it must begin with a basic Latin letter (&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;) and may be followed by any number of letters, digits (&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;), hyphens (&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;), underscores (&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;), colons (&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;), and periods (&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;).}}

Options format:

 [option1 | option2 | ... optionN]

whitespace can be omitted.
A single option can either consist of a single option name (in this case it is a flag option), or contain a comma-separated list of values:

 option = value1, value2, value3

Examples:
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
or
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
or
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

==== Using Gadget Definition Namespace ====

Creation of the [[Gadget definition:mygadget]] page and putting in it the below [[w:JSON|JSON]] code have the same effect as &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In above example, the [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] and the [[Gadget:mygadget.css]] are used.
Remember the &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; option is always true in the gadget definition namespace.

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
You can add the following in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} to provide the appropriate permissions for users who are within the interface-admin group.
Editing pages in the Gadget namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; right and editing pages in the Gadget definition namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt; right.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


=== Options ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! Name
! Parameters
! Description
! Since
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''None'' || Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with {{ll|ResourceLoader}}. || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || Comma-separated module names || See [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|list of default modules]]. Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible). || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || Comma-separated privilege names || Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|privileges]]. || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''None''
| Hide the gadget from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Preferences]] page. This can be used in two ways:
* Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to Common.js). Note that you need to add both: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt; to load a module for all users.
* Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets. For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || Comma-separated skin names || Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]]. Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; in the URL, {{phab|T199478}}). || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || Comma-separated action names || Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions. E.g. &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages. {{Note|1=Specifying &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; action will also load it on &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;. Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''None'' || Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs). Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''None'' || Mark this gadget as [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]]. In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the require() function. This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (default), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;
| Set the {{ll|ResourceLoader}} target(s) for the gadget.
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| Use &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content). It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript. For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].
{{Note|1=Using &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files. For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| Comma-separated module names
| Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden). These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled. For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(pre-release)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''None'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL query parameter.
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''None'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} Makes the gadget to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|top-loaded]]. This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor. || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

You can specify extra dependencies for your gadgets, for example:

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; with mygadget.
Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.
To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot;:
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.

Note that restrictions are based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|permissions]], not user groups like [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
Here are some real examples:

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

=== Pages ===

The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' and '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css''' in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;.js&quot; or &quot;.css&quot;, respectively.

A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into {{tag|nowiki}} and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.

See the first and last lines of [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] for an example.

=== Sections ===

The list of gadgets in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;=&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:

  == interface-gadgets ==

This would define a new section, with the title defined on the page [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]].

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

== See also ==
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=Gadget Manager}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>4nbp6swbgwy08ef4mzmrh9t34t0ty3t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/ja</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>1187069</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403327</id>
      <parentid>5322646</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:23:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="19489" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = 環境設定画面からJSベースのユーザー提供型ガジェットを有効にできるようにしました。
|example         = ウィキメディア・コモンズ [[commons:Special:Gadgets|ガジェットの概要]]、, [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|個人設定]]。 (「ガジェット」をクリック。もちろんログインする必要があります)
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
'''ガジェット'''拡張機能は他の利用者にJavaScriptやCSSベースのガジェットを提供することを可能にします。

ガジェットは MediaWiki 名前空間のページにある JavaScript と CSS {{ll|snippets}} で構成されています。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each gadget is defined by a line in [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]], providing a name and description for the gadget, and a list of the JS and CSS snippets that it uses (see the ''[[#Usage|Usage]]'' section below).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Gadgets reside in the MediaWiki namespace (the list defining the gadgets as well as the actual code snippets), only sysops (interface admins from 1.32) can edit the code.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is as it should be: only users especially trusted by the wiki community should be able to edit JavaScript code that is used by other users, since JavaScript can easily be used to hijack accounts or spy on people.&lt;/span&gt;

== インストール ==
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
== 使用法 ==
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Selection of some gadgets at the user preferences in de.wikipedia&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to define gadgets depending on the &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If It is &lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt; (the default value), the list of available gadgets is defined on '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In an alternative way, Gadget definitions are defined on pages in the [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|Gadget definition]] namespace when &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt; is set to &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{caution|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Migration of the existing gadget definitions is not yet supported, so you will lose previously defined gadgets after changing this option.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once created with at least one valid gadget, gadgets defined there show up in the &quot;Gadgets&quot; section of [[Special:Preferences]], so users can pick the gadgets they would like to use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An overview of the gadgets defined by MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition is also shown on '''[[Special:Gadgets]]''', along with links to the respective system messages, for easy editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Statistics for non-default gadget usage can be seen at '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==== 書式 ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using MediaWiki Gadgets Definition ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each line in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition that starts with one or more &quot;*&quot; (asterisks) characters defines a gadget; it must have the following form:&lt;/span&gt;

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;options (can be omitted)&lt;/span&gt;] | ページ名(群)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first field (&quot;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&quot; in the example) is the gadget's ''internal name'', and references a system message ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''' in the example) that contains a short description of the gadget, using wiki syntax.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''internal name'' is used as part of the name of a form field and must follow the [https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id rules defined for NAME attribute values].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means it must begin with a basic Latin letter (&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;) and may be followed by any number of letters, digits (&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;), hyphens (&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;), underscores (&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;), colons (&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;), and periods (&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;}}

オプションの書式:

 [オプション1 | オプション2 | ... オプションN]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whitespace can be omitted.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A single option can either consist of a single option name (in this case it is a flag option), or contain a comma-separated list of values:&lt;/span&gt;

 option = value1, value2, value3

例:
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
または
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
または
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using Gadget Definition Namespace ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Creation of the [[Gadget definition:mygadget]] page and putting in it the below [[w:JSON|JSON]] code have the same effect as &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In above example, the [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] and the [[Gadget:mygadget.css]] are used.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember the &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; option is always true in the gadget definition namespace.&lt;/span&gt;

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add the following in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} to provide the appropriate permissions for users who are within the interface-admin group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing pages in the Gadget namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; right and editing pages in the Gadget definition namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt; right.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


=== オプション ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! 名前
! パラメーター
! 説明
! バージョン
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''なし'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with {{ll|ResourceLoader}}.&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|list of default modules]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|privileges]].&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''なし''
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide the gadget from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Preferences]] page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be used in two ways:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to Common.js).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you need to add both: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated skin names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; in the URL, {{phab|T199478}}).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated action names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g. &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/span&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specifying &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; action will also load it on &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/span&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''なし'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''なし'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mark this gadget as [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the require() function.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (default), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set the {{ll|ResourceLoader}} target(s) for the gadget.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; または &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/span&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pre-release&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''なし'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''なし'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Makes the gadget to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|top-loaded]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can specify extra dependencies for your gadgets, for example:&lt;/span&gt;

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; with mygadget.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/span&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|permissions]], not user groups like [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here are some real examples:&lt;/span&gt;

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

=== ページ ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' and '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css''' in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;.js&quot; or &quot;.css&quot;, respectively.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/div&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into {{tag|nowiki}} and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See the first and last lines of [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] for an example.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== 節 ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The list of gadgets in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;=&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would define a new section, with the title defined on the page [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

== 関連項目 ==
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=ガジェット管理者}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>47h23f3uf7rnejavyzp8w7awlxof10y</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/tr</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>1187172</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403334</id>
      <parentid>5307422</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:23:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16745" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = Kullanıcıların tercihler sayfasından JS tabanlı, kullanıcı tarafından sağlanan küçük araçları etkinleştirmesine izin verin
|example         = Wikimedia Commons: [[commons:Special:Gadgets|Küçük araca genel bakış]], [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|kullanıcı tercihleri]] (&quot;Küçük araçlar&quot; seçeneği tıklayın; elbette oturum açmanız gerekir)
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
'''Gadgets''' uzantısı, kullanıcıların diğer viki kullanıcılarının sağladığı JavaScript veya CSS tabanlı &quot;küçük araçlar&quot; seçmeleri için bir yol sağlar.

Küçük araçlar, MediaWiki ad alanındaki sayfalarda bulunan JavaScript ve/veya CSS {{ll|snippets}} üzerinden oluşur.
Her küçük araç, [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]] cinsinden bir satırla tanımlanır ve küçük araç için bir ad ve açıklama ile kullandığı JS ve CSS pasajlarının bir listesini sağlar (aşağıdaki &quot;[[#Usage|Kullanım]]&quot; bölümüne bakın).

Küçük araçlar MediaWiki ad alanında (küçük araçları ve gerçek kod pasajlarına tanımlayan liste) bulunduğundan, yalnızca hizmetliler (1.32'den itibaren arabirim hizmetlileri) kodu düzenleyebilir.
Olması gerektiği gibi: Yalnızca viki topluluğu tarafından özellikle güvenilen kullanıcılar, diğer kullanıcılar tarafından kullanılan JavaScript kodunu düzenleyebilmelidir, çünkü JavaScript hesapları ele geçirmek veya insanları gözetlemek için kolayca kullanılabilir.

== Kurulum ==
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
== Kullanım ==
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|de.wikipedia sitesinde kullanıcı tercihlerinde bazı küçük araçların seçimi]]
&lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt; üzerinde bağlı olarak küçük araçları tanımlamanın iki yolu vardır.
&lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt; ise (varsayılan değer), kullanılabilir küçük araçların listesi '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]''' olarak tanımlanır.
Alternatif bir şekilde, &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt; olarak ayarlandığında [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|Gadget definition]] ad alanındaki sayfalarda tanımlanan Küçük araç tanımları.

{{caution|1=Mevcut küçük araç tanımlarının taşınması henüz desteklenmemektedir, bu nedenle bu seçeneği değiştirdikten sonra önceden tanımlanmış küçük araçlarını kaybedersiniz.}}

En az bir geçerli küçük araç ile oluşturulduktan sonra, burada tanımlanan küçük araçlar $2 &quot;Küçük araçlar&quot; bölümünde görünür, böylece kullanıcılar kullanmak istedikleri küçük araçları seçebilirler.
MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition ile tanımlanan küçük araçlara genel bir bakış, kolay düzenleme için ilgili sistem mesajlarına bağlantılar ile birlikte '''[[Special:Gadgets]]''' üzerinde de gösterilir.
Varsayılan olmayan gadget kullanımına ilişkin istatistikler '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]''' altında görülebilir.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==== Biçim ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===== MediaWiki Küçük Araç Tanımını Kullanma =====
&lt;/div&gt;
MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition içindeki bir veya daha fazla &quot;*&quot; (yıldız) karakteriyle başlayan her satır bir küçük aracı tanımlar; aşağıdaki forma sahip olmalıdır:

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [seçenekler (çıkarılabilir)] | sayfa adları

İlk alan (örnekte &quot;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&quot;) küçük aracın ''dahili adıdır'' ve viki sözdizimini kullanarak küçük aracın kısa bir açıklamasını içeren bir sistem mesajına (örnekte '''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''') kaynağında bulunur.

{{note|1=''Dahili ad'', bir form alanının adının bir parçası olarak kullanılır ve [https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id tanımlanmış NAME öznitelik değerleri için kurallarına] uymalıdır.
Bu, basit bir Latin harfiyle (&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;) başlaması gerektiği ve ardından herhangi bir sayıda harf, rakam (&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;), tire (&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;), alt çizgi (&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;), ​​iki nokta üst üste (&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;) ve nokta (&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;) gelebileceği anlamına gelir.}}

Biçim seçenekleri:

 [seçenek1 | seçenek2 | ... seçenekN]

boşluk bırakılabilir.
Tek bir seçenek, tek bir seçenek adından oluşabilir (bu durumda bir işaret seçeneğidir) veya virgülle ayrılmış bir değerler listesi içerebilir:

 option = value1, value2, value3

Örnekler:
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
veya
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
veya
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===== Gadget Definition Ad Alanını Kullanma =====
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Gadget definition:mygadget]] sayfanın oluşturulması ve içine aşağıdaki [[:tr:JSON|JSON]] kodunun yerleştirilmesi &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt; ile aynı etkiye sahiptir.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Yukarıdaki örnekte [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] ve [[Gadget:mygadget.css]] kullanılmıştır.
Küçük araç tanımı ad alanında &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; seçeneğinin her zaman true olduğunu unutmayın.

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
interface-admin grubundaki kullanıcılara uygun izinleri sağlamak için aşağıdakileri {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} dosyanıza ekleyebilirsiniz.
Gadget ad alanındaki sayfaları düzenlemek &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; hakkını gerektirir ve Gadget definition ad alanındaki sayfaları düzenlemek &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt; hakkını gerektirir.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


=== Seçenekler ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! Ad
! Parametreler
! Açıklama
! Bu yana
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''Yok'' || Küçük aracı betiklerini {{ll|ResourceLoader}} ile uyumlu olarak işaretler. || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || Virgülle ayrılmış modül adları || [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|Varsayılan modüllerin listesine]] bakın. Geçerli küçük aracın ResourceLoader uyumlu kaynakları yoksa (yani uyumlu olarak işaretlenmemiş stil ve betik yoksa) bu seçeneğin hiçbir etkisi olmadığını unutmayın. || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || Virgülle ayrılmış ayrıcalık adları || Küçük aracı yalnızca belirtilen [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|ayrıcalıklar]] olan kullanıcılar için kullanılabilir (ve tercihlerde görünür) yapın. || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''Yok''
| Küçük aracını [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Tercihler]] sayfasından gizleyin. Bu iki şekilde kullanılabilir:
* Devre dışı bırakma özelliği olmadan bir küçük aracı varsayılan olarak etkinleştirin (Common.js ile modüler alternatif olarak). Tüm kullanıcılar için bir modül yüklemek için her ikisini de eklemeniz gerektiğini unutmayın: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt;.
* Son kullanıcılar için değil, diğer küçük araçlar tarafından yüklenmesi amaçlanan küçük araçlar. Örneğin, iki küçük aracın aynı dahili kodu yeniden kullanmasına izin vermek veya bir iki küçük aracınyalnızca belirli sayfalara yüklenen &quot;temel&quot; bölümünü kaydetmek için.
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || Virgülle ayrılmış görünüm adları || Küçük aracı yalnızca belirtilen [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|görünümler]] kullanan kullanıcılar tarafından kullanılabilir (ve tercihlerde görünür) yapın. MediaWiki 1.32'den önce, mevcut görüntülenen değil (URL'ye &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; eklerken olduğu gibi, {{phab|T199478}}) kullanıcı tercihlerinde ayarlanan görünümü dikkate alıyordu. || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || Virgülle ayrılmış eylem adları || Küçük aracı yalnızca belirtilen sayfa eylemlerinde kullanılabilir yapın. Örn. bir küçük aracı yalnızca düzenleme sırasında ve geçmiş sayfalarında yüklemek için &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt;. {{Note|1=&lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; eyleminin belirtilmesi, onu &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt; üzerinde de yükleyecektir. Geçersiz eylemler, küçük aracı hiçbir yerde çalıştırılamadığından etkin bir şekilde devre dışı bırakır.}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''Yok'' || Küçük aracı varsayılan olarak herkes için etkinleştirin (IP'ler dahil). Kayıtlı kullanıcılar yine de tercihlerinde devre dışı bırakabilir.
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''Yok'' || Bu küçük aracı [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|paketlenmiş]] olarak işaretleyin. Bu modda, yalnızca ilk JavaScript sayfası yürütülecektir. Diğer sayfalar require() işlevi kullanılarak içe aktarılabilir. Bu mod ayrıca, başka türlü dahil edilemeyen JSON sayfalarının kullanımını da sağlar.
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (varsayılan), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; veya &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;
| Küçük aracı için {{ll|ResourceLoader}} hedef(ler)i ayarlayın.
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; veya &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| Yalnızca sayfada bulunan öğelerin stilini değiştiren modüller için &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; kullanın (ör. görünümü, düzeni veya madde içeriğini özelleştirirken). Modülün CSS dosyalarının JavaScript ile yüklenmek yerine sayfa HTML'sinden eklenmesine neden olacaktır. Ayrıntılar için [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Geçiş kılavuzu (kullanıcılar)#Küçük araç türü]] sayfasına bakın.
{{Note|1=&lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; kullanılması, belirtilen JavaScript dosyalarına '''yüklenemeyecektir'''. Hem JavaScript ''hem de'' CSS yoluyla öğelerin stilini değiştiren küçük araçlar için iki ayrı küçük araç tanımı gerekir.}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| Virgülle ayrılmış modül adları
| Yalnızca CSS küçük araçları gerektirir (genellikle gizlenir). Bu küçük araçlar, &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; değerden daha erken yüklenecek ve JavaScript devre dışı bırakılsa bile yüklenecek. Ayrıntılar için [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Geçiş kılavuzu (kullanıcılar)#Küçük araç eşleri]] sayfasına bakın.
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(ön sürüm)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''Yok'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| Küçük aracı &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL sorgu parametresiyle yüklenmeye hazır hâle getirin.
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''Yok'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} Küçük aracı [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|üstten yüklenen]] olmasını sağlar. Bu, dikkatli bir şekilde kullanılmalıdır, ancak eklentileri Görsel Düzenleyici'ye kaydettirmek gibi bazı başlatma işlemleri için gerekli olabilir. || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

Küçük araçlarınızı için ekstra bağımlılıklar belirleyebilirsiniz, örneğin:

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

Burada, ResourceLoader'dan &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; ve &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; modüllerini mygadget ile yüklemesini istiyoruz.
Küçük araçların sayfalardan, statik dosyalardan veya harici URL'lerden gelen betiklerine bağlı olamayacağını, yalnızca ResourceLoader'da kayıtlı modüllere bağlı olduğunu unutmayın.
Bir sayfadan bir betiğini bir sayfadaki başka bir betiğine bağımlı hâle getirmek için, her birinin kendisini ResourceLoader'da bir modül olarak kaydeden bir gadget olması gerekir, ardından aşağıdaki sözdizimi kullanılarak bağımlılıkları yapılabilir:

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
Bir küçük aracı varsayılan olarak etkinleştirmek için &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot; öğesini kullanın:
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
Küçük aracı yalnızca uygun izinlere sahip kullanıcılara sunmak için &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; seçeneğini belirleyin, örneğin:
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
Küçük aracı yalnızca sayfaları gerçekten silebilen kullanıcılar için kullanılabilir hâle getirir.

Kısıtlamaların [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|hizmetliler]] veya bürokratlar gibi kullanıcı gruplarına değil, [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|izinlere]] dayalı olduğunu unutmayın.
İşte bazı gerçek örnekler:

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

== Sayfalar ==

Satırdaki kalan alanlar, sistem mesajlarında bulunan küçük aracı oluşturan JavaScript, CSS veya JSON koduna atıfta bulunur (örnekte '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' ve '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css'''); bu mesajların adları sırasıyla &quot;.js&quot; veya &quot;.css&quot; ile bitmelidir.

Bir küçük araç herhangi bir sayıda kod mesajı kullanabilir, özellikle genel kod, kendi özel kodlarına ek olarak birkaç küçük araç tarafından kullanılan bir kod mesajına yerleştirilebilir, örneğin:

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
Lütfen kodunuz viki sözdizimi olarak yorumlanabilecek dizeler içeriyorsa (örneğin imza kodu &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), kodunuzu {{tag|nowiki}} içine dahil etmek ve bu etiketleri JavaScript veya CSS yorumlarına koymak isteyebileceğinizi unutmayın, böylece gerçekte kullanıldığında yorumlanmazlar.

Örnek için [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] değerinin ilk ve son satırlarına bakın.

=== Bölümler ===

MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition içindeki küçük araçların listesi, iki veya daha fazla &quot;=&quot; (eşittir) karakterle başlayan ve biten satırlar kullanılarak bölümlere ayrılabilir; bu, bölümün adını tanımlayan bir sistem mesajının adını içerir, örneğin:

  == interface-gadgets ==

Bu, [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]] sayfasında tanımlanan başlık ile yeni bir bölüm tanımlar.

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

== Ayrıca bakınız ==
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=Küçük Araç Yöneticisi}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>0s15jgafgx3a1xd7m87c2ffnj6mui8j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/ar</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>1188180</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403321</id>
      <parentid>5307408</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:22:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20394" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = يسمح للمستخدمين بتمكين نبيطات تستند إلى جافا سكريبت يقدمها المستخدمين من صفحة تفضيلاتهم
|example         = ويكيميديا كومنز: [[commons:Special:Gadgets|نظرة عامة على النبيطات]]، [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|تفضيلات المستخدمين]] (انقر على «نبيطات»؛ يجب عليك أن تكون مسجل الدخول بالطبع)
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
يقدم امتداد '''Gadgets''' سبيل للمستخدمين يمكنهم من اختيار «نبيطات» مبنية على جافا سكريبت أو سي إس إس التي يقدمها مستخدمي موقع الويكي الآخرين.

تصمم النبيطات باستخدام {{ll|snippets}} جافا سكريبت أو سي إس إس أو كلاهما موجودة في صفحات على نطاق الاسم ميدياويكي.
تحدد كل نبيطة باستخدام سطر في [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]، يقدم اسم وبيان للنبيطة، وقائمة بقصاصات جافا سكريبت وسي إس إس التي تستعين بها (طالع فقرة '' [[#Usage|الاستخدام]]'' التالية).

منذ أن النبيطات تضاف إلى نطاق الاسم ميدياويكي (حيث توجد كلا من القائمة التي تحدد النبيطات وقصاصات الكود البرمجي ذاتها)، يمكن فقط لإداري النظام (وكذلك إداري الواجهة بدءا من الإصدار 1.32) تعديل الكود البرمجي.
يتعين أن يكون الأمر كما يلي: يمنح فقط المستخدمين الذين يحظون بثقة مجتمع الويكي المتينة صلاحية تعديل كود جافا سكريبت البرمجي الذي يستخدمه المستخدمين الآخرين، منذ أنه يسهل استخدام جافا سكريبت في قرصنة الحسابات أو التلصص على الأفراد.

== التنصيب ==
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
== الاستخدام ==
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|تشكيلة من بعض النبيطات الموجودة في تفضيلات المستخدم على موقع de.wikipedia]]
يوجد سبيلين اثنين لتحديد النبيطات استنادا إلى ‎&lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;.
لو كانت &lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt; (القيمة الافتراضية)، سوف تحدد قائمة النبيطات المتاحة على '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''.
سبيل آخر، وهو تحديد النبيطات على صفحات في نطاق الاسم [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|تعريف النبيطات]] حينما تكون قيمة ‎&lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt; هي &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;.

{{caution|1=ترحيل تعريفات النبيطات القائمة غير مدعوم بعد، لذا سوف تفقد النبيطات المعرفّة من قبل بعد تغيير هذا الخيار.}}

حال استحداث هذا مستخدمًا نبيطة واحدة على الأقل، تظهر النبيطات المحددة هناك في قسم «النبيطات» من صفحة [[Special:Preferences]]، حتى يمكن للمستخدمين اختيار النبيطات التي يرغبون في استخدامها.
نظرة عامة على النبيطات المحددة في MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition تظهر أيضًا في صفحة '''[[Special:Gadgets]]'''، إلى جانب وصلات شبكية إلى رسائل النظام المعنية بها، لتيسير التعديل.
يمكن الاطلاع على إحصائيات تتناول استخدام النبيطات التي ليست افتراضية على الصفحة '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==== الصيغة ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===== استخدام تعريف نبيطات ميدياويكي =====
&lt;/div&gt;
كل سطر في MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition يبدأ بالمحرف «*» (النجمة) سواء كان نجمة واحدة أو أكثر يعرّف نبيطة؛ يتعين أن يكون بالصيغة التالية:

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [خيارات (يمكن تخطيها)] | أسماء الصفحات

الخانة الأولى («&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;» في المثال) هي ''الاسم الداخلي'' للنبيطة، ويشير إلى رسالة من النظام ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''' في المثال) تحتوي على وصف موجز للنبيطة يستخدم إعراب نصوص الويكي.

{{note|1=يستخدم ''الاسم الداخلي'' جزءً من الاسم المذكور في خانة نموذج ويتعين أن يتبع [https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id القواعد المحددة لقيم الصفة NAME].
يعني هذا أن الاسم يتعين أن يبدأ بحرف لاتيني أساسي (&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;) ويجوز أن يتبعه أي عدد من الأحرف والأرقام (&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;) والشرطات (&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;) والشرطات التحتية (&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;) والنقطتان المتعامدتان (&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;) والنقط (&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;).}}

تنسيق الخيارات:

 [option1 | option2 | ... optionN]

يجوز حذف المسافة.
يجوز أن يحتوي خيار واحد على اسم خيار واحد (في هذه الحالة هو خيار وسم) أو يحتوي على قائمة قيم تفصلها فاصلة:

 option = value1, value2, value3

أمثلة:
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
أو
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
أو
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===== استخدام نطاق اسم تعريف النبيطات =====
&lt;/div&gt;

إنشاء صفحة [[Gadget definition:mygadget]] ووضع نص [[:ar:جسون|جسون]] البرمجي التالي فيها سوف يكون له نفس أثر &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

في المثال السابق، يستخدم كلا من [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] و[[Gadget:mygadget.css]].
تذكر أن خيار &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; تكون قيمته دائمًا «true» في تعريف نطاق الاسم المخصص للنبيطات.

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
يمكنك إضافة ما يلي في {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} لديك كي تقدم التصاريح الملائمة للمستخدمين المنتمين إلى مجموعة إداري الواجهة.
يتطلب تعديل الصفحات الموجودة في نطاق الاسم «نبيطات» التمتع بحق &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; وتعديل الصفحات الموجودة في نطاق اسم تعريف النبيطات يتطلب التمتع بحق &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


=== خيارات ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! الاسم
! المتغيرات
! الوصف
! منذ
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''لا شيء'' || يسم النصوص البرمجية للنبيطات في صفة متوافقة مع {{ll|ResourceLoader}}. || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || أسماء وحدات برمجية مفصولة بفاصلة || طالع [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|قائمة الوحدات البرمجية الافتراضية]]. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|privileges]].&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;''
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide the gadget from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Preferences]] page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be used in two ways:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to Common.js).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you need to add both: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated skin names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; in the URL, {{phab|T199478}}).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated action names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g. &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/span&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specifying &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; action will also load it on &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/span&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mark this gadget as [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the require() function.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (default), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set the {{ll|ResourceLoader}} target(s) for the gadget.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;or&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/span&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| أسماء وحدات برمجية مفصولة بفاصلة
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pre-release&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Makes the gadget to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|top-loaded]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

يمكنك تحديد تبعيات إضافية لنبيطاتك، على سبيل المثال:

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; with mygadget.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/span&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|permissions]], not user groups like [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/div&gt;
إليك بعض الأمثلة الحقيقية:

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

=== صفحات ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' and '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css''' in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;.js&quot; or &quot;.css&quot;, respectively.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/div&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into {{tag|nowiki}} and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See the first and last lines of [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] for an example.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== فقرات ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The list of gadgets in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;=&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

سوف يحدد هذا فقرة جديدة، ويكون عنوانها كما هو محدد في الصفحة [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]].

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

== انظر أيضا ==
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=مدير النبيطات}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>d89gw7td5lkyaxk1kh8x1nx1g1b2r0j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/pl</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>1190823</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403331</id>
      <parentid>5307418</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:23:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20569" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow users to enable JS-based, user-provided gadgets from their preferences page&lt;/span&gt;
|example         = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikimedia Commons: [[commons:Special:Gadgets|Gadget overview]], [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|user preferences]] (click &quot;Gadgets&quot;; you need to be logged in of course)&lt;/span&gt;
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The '''Gadgets''' extension provides a way for users to pick JavaScript or CSS based &quot;gadgets&quot; that other wiki users provide.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets are made up of JavaScript and/or CSS {{ll|snippets}} located on pages in the MediaWiki namespace.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each gadget is defined by a line in [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]], providing a name and description for the gadget, and a list of the JS and CSS snippets that it uses (see the ''[[#Usage|Usage]]'' section below).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Gadgets reside in the MediaWiki namespace (the list defining the gadgets as well as the actual code snippets), only sysops (interface admins from 1.32) can edit the code.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is as it should be: only users especially trusted by the wiki community should be able to edit JavaScript code that is used by other users, since JavaScript can easily be used to hijack accounts or spy on people.&lt;/span&gt;

== Instalacja ==
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
== Użycie ==
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Selection of some gadgets at the user preferences in de.wikipedia&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to define gadgets depending on the &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If It is &lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt; (the default value), the list of available gadgets is defined on '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In an alternative way, Gadget definitions are defined on pages in the [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|Gadget definition]] namespace when &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt; is set to &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{caution|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Migration of the existing gadget definitions is not yet supported, so you will lose previously defined gadgets after changing this option.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once created with at least one valid gadget, gadgets defined there show up in the &quot;Gadgets&quot; section of [[Special:Preferences]], so users can pick the gadgets they would like to use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An overview of the gadgets defined by MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition is also shown on '''[[Special:Gadgets]]''', along with links to the respective system messages, for easy editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Statistics for non-default gadget usage can be seen at '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==== Format ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using MediaWiki Gadgets Definition ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each line in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition that starts with one or more &quot;*&quot; (asterisks) characters defines a gadget; it must have the following form:&lt;/span&gt;

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;options (can be omitted)&lt;/span&gt;] | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;page names&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first field (&quot;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&quot; in the example) is the gadget's ''internal name'', and references a system message ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''' in the example) that contains a short description of the gadget, using wiki syntax.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''internal name'' is used as part of the name of a form field and must follow the [https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id rules defined for NAME attribute values].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means it must begin with a basic Latin letter (&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;) and may be followed by any number of letters, digits (&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;), hyphens (&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;), underscores (&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;), colons (&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;), and periods (&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Options format:
&lt;/div&gt;

 [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;option1&lt;/span&gt; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;option2&lt;/span&gt; | ... &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;optionN&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whitespace can be omitted.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A single option can either consist of a single option name (in this case it is a flag option), or contain a comma-separated list of values:&lt;/span&gt;

 option = value1, value2, value3

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Examples:
&lt;/div&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using Gadget Definition Namespace ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Creation of the [[Gadget definition:mygadget]] page and putting in it the below [[w:JSON|JSON]] code have the same effect as &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In above example, the [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] and the [[Gadget:mygadget.css]] are used.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember the &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; option is always true in the gadget definition namespace.&lt;/span&gt;

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add the following in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} to provide the appropriate permissions for users who are within the interface-admin group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing pages in the Gadget namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; right and editing pages in the Gadget definition namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt; right.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


=== Opcje ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Name&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Parameters&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Description&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with {{ll|ResourceLoader}}.&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|list of default modules]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|privileges]].&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;''
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide the gadget from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Preferences]] page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be used in two ways:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to Common.js).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you need to add both: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated skin names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; in the URL, {{phab|T199478}}).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated action names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g. &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/span&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specifying &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; action will also load it on &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/span&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mark this gadget as [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the require() function.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (default), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set the {{ll|ResourceLoader}} target(s) for the gadget.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;or&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/span&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pre-release&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Makes the gadget to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|top-loaded]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can specify extra dependencies for your gadgets, for example:&lt;/span&gt;

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; with mygadget.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/span&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|permissions]], not user groups like [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here are some real examples:&lt;/span&gt;

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

=== Strony ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' and '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css''' in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;.js&quot; or &quot;.css&quot;, respectively.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/div&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into {{tag|nowiki}} and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See the first and last lines of [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] for an example.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Sekcje ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The list of gadgets in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;=&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would define a new section, with the title defined on the page [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

== Zobacz też ==
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadget Manager&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ibysgovw5miikyt7bse5a2m5ewt3u7s</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/sv</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>1191190</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403332</id>
      <parentid>5307419</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:23:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20573" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow users to enable JS-based, user-provided gadgets from their preferences page&lt;/span&gt;
|example         = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikimedia Commons: [[commons:Special:Gadgets|Gadget overview]], [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|user preferences]] (click &quot;Gadgets&quot;; you need to be logged in of course)&lt;/span&gt;
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The '''Gadgets''' extension provides a way for users to pick JavaScript or CSS based &quot;gadgets&quot; that other wiki users provide.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets are made up of JavaScript and/or CSS {{ll|snippets}} located on pages in the MediaWiki namespace.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each gadget is defined by a line in [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]], providing a name and description for the gadget, and a list of the JS and CSS snippets that it uses (see the ''[[#Usage|Usage]]'' section below).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Gadgets reside in the MediaWiki namespace (the list defining the gadgets as well as the actual code snippets), only sysops (interface admins from 1.32) can edit the code.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is as it should be: only users especially trusted by the wiki community should be able to edit JavaScript code that is used by other users, since JavaScript can easily be used to hijack accounts or spy on people.&lt;/span&gt;

== Installation ==
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
== Användning ==
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Selection of some gadgets at the user preferences in de.wikipedia&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to define gadgets depending on the &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If It is &lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt; (the default value), the list of available gadgets is defined on '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In an alternative way, Gadget definitions are defined on pages in the [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|Gadget definition]] namespace when &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt; is set to &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{caution|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Migration of the existing gadget definitions is not yet supported, so you will lose previously defined gadgets after changing this option.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once created with at least one valid gadget, gadgets defined there show up in the &quot;Gadgets&quot; section of [[Special:Preferences]], so users can pick the gadgets they would like to use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An overview of the gadgets defined by MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition is also shown on '''[[Special:Gadgets]]''', along with links to the respective system messages, for easy editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Statistics for non-default gadget usage can be seen at '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==== Format ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using MediaWiki Gadgets Definition ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each line in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition that starts with one or more &quot;*&quot; (asterisks) characters defines a gadget; it must have the following form:&lt;/span&gt;

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;options (can be omitted)&lt;/span&gt;] | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;page names&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first field (&quot;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&quot; in the example) is the gadget's ''internal name'', and references a system message ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''' in the example) that contains a short description of the gadget, using wiki syntax.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''internal name'' is used as part of the name of a form field and must follow the [https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id rules defined for NAME attribute values].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means it must begin with a basic Latin letter (&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;) and may be followed by any number of letters, digits (&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;), hyphens (&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;), underscores (&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;), colons (&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;), and periods (&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Options format:
&lt;/div&gt;

 [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;option1&lt;/span&gt; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;option2&lt;/span&gt; | ... &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;optionN&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whitespace can be omitted.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A single option can either consist of a single option name (in this case it is a flag option), or contain a comma-separated list of values:&lt;/span&gt;

 option = value1, value2, value3

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Examples:
&lt;/div&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using Gadget Definition Namespace ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Creation of the [[Gadget definition:mygadget]] page and putting in it the below [[w:JSON|JSON]] code have the same effect as &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In above example, the [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] and the [[Gadget:mygadget.css]] are used.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember the &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; option is always true in the gadget definition namespace.&lt;/span&gt;

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add the following in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} to provide the appropriate permissions for users who are within the interface-admin group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing pages in the Gadget namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; right and editing pages in the Gadget definition namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt; right.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


===Alternativ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Name&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Parameters&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Description&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with {{ll|ResourceLoader}}.&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|list of default modules]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|privileges]].&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;''
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide the gadget from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Preferences]] page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be used in two ways:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to Common.js).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you need to add both: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated skin names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; in the URL, {{phab|T199478}}).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated action names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g. &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/span&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specifying &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; action will also load it on &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/span&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mark this gadget as [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the require() function.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (default), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set the {{ll|ResourceLoader}} target(s) for the gadget.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;or&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/span&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pre-release&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Makes the gadget to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|top-loaded]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can specify extra dependencies for your gadgets, for example:&lt;/span&gt;

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; with mygadget.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/span&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|permissions]], not user groups like [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here are some real examples:&lt;/span&gt;

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

===Sidor===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' and '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css''' in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;.js&quot; or &quot;.css&quot;, respectively.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/div&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into {{tag|nowiki}} and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See the first and last lines of [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] for an example.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Avsnitt ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The list of gadgets in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;=&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would define a new section, with the title defined on the page [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

== Se även ==
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadget Manager&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7tecxoh46nnierzlq4ea13d90o284kl</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:WikimediaDownload/18/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1201449</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402830</id>
      <parentid>4085395</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:21:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>fix</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="87" xml:space="preserve">Para esconder el enlace a [[Special:ExtensionDistributor]], añade puesto nosnapshot=1.</text>
      <sha1>peys1k2anxp7tqi4o8b4qc8kyt92cje</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki/sv</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1202196</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401766</id>
      <parentid>5390890</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3927" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Många av ShoutWikis administratörer är också MediaWiki-[[developers|utvecklare]]. Se [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWikis hemsida] eller [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About om ShoutWiki på ShoutWiki] för att ta reda på mer om ShoutWiki i allmänhet.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki har också [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 egen Gerrit-grupp] som består av ShoutWiki-personal och utvecklare.

==Tillägg==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki använder sig av flera av de tillägg som används på Wikimedias webbplatser utöver sina egna tillägg. Källkoden för de flesta av de här egenskapade tilläggen finns på [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedias gitdatabas (MediaWikis officiella git)]. Se [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]] för en lista över tillägg skrivna av ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Om ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Information om ShoutWiki och öppen källkod]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — några av ShoutWikis kodpatchar till MediaWikis kod
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWikis GitHub]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>odjwhl4xy9uuup2ineev6ply0rr6u71</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401783</id>
      <parentid>5401766</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3926" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Många av ShoutWikis administratörer är också MediaWiki-[[developers|utvecklare]]. Se [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWikis hemsida] eller [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About om ShoutWiki på ShoutWiki] för att ta reda på mer om ShoutWiki i allmänhet.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki har också [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 egen Gerrit-grupp] som består av ShoutWiki-personal och utvecklare.

==Tillägg==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki använder sig av flera av de tillägg som används på Wikimedias webbplatser utöver sina egna tillägg. Källkoden för de flesta av de här egenskapade tilläggen finns på [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedias gitdatabas (MediaWikis officiella git)]. Se [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]] för en lista över tillägg skrivna av ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Om ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Information om ShoutWiki och öppen källkod]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — några av ShoutWikis kodpatchar till MediaWikis kod
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWikis GitHub]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7qvd1uydr4pgrromvjbsw3a1muyttg1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401884</id>
      <parentid>5401783</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3918" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Många av ShoutWikis administratörer är också MediaWiki-[[developers|utvecklare]]. Se [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWikis hemsida] eller [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About om ShoutWiki på ShoutWiki] för att ta reda på mer om ShoutWiki i allmänhet.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki har också [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 egen Gerrit-grupp] som består av ShoutWiki-personal och utvecklare.

==Tillägg==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki använder sig av flera av de tillägg som används på Wikimedias webbplatser utöver sina egna tillägg. Källkoden för de flesta av de här egenskapade tilläggen finns på [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedias gitdatabas (MediaWikis officiella git)]. Se [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]] för en lista över tillägg skrivna av ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Om ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Information om ShoutWiki och öppen källkod]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; några av ShoutWikis kodpatchar till MediaWikis kod
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki ShoutWikis GitHub]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>2vmdwqqek2d0m0retrqg420gfot4j4t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>OOUI/Using OOUI in MediaWiki/en</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1204585</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403313</id>
      <parentid>5076650</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:21:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11304" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{OOUI}}
'''{{ll|OOUI}}''' is included in MediaWiki core, available to be used by both PHP and JavaScript code.

== PHP ==
=== Before you start ===
To use OOUI elements, the OOUI PHP library has to be loaded and the necessary styles have to be set up per the correct skin ([[phab:T98029#1475549|boring details]]).

The most convenient way to do this is:

==== Special pages etc. ====
Whenever you have access to an [[Manual:OutputPage.php|OutputPage]] instance, call its &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; method.
It is usually available as &lt;code&gt;$this-&gt;getOutput()&lt;/code&gt; in most contexts, such as on special pages, or as &lt;code&gt;$out&lt;/code&gt; in hook signatures.

Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
function execute( $param ) {
	$out = $this-&gt;getOutput();
	$out-&gt;enableOOUI();
	// … More code here …
	$group = new OOUI\ButtonGroupWidget( [
		// … More widgets here …
	] );
	$out-&gt;addHTML( $group );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Another example, useful when you have no easy access to an OutputPage instance:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
RequestContext::getMain()-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;enableOOUI();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Note that the method &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; (implemented by [[Manual:OutputPage.php|class &lt;code&gt;OutputPage&lt;/code&gt;]]) ensures that the proper theme and directionality is configured, and that the page loads the OOUI styles.
The OOUI widgets are namespaced, so they must be prefixed with &lt;code&gt;OOUI\&lt;/code&gt; or imported.
Stringifying the widgets converts them to HTML, so you can add widgets to the page using &lt;code&gt;$out-&gt;addHTML()&lt;/code&gt;.
Also note that in some cases, just enabling OOUI is not enough.
For example, if you need a certain icon added, you need to explicitly add the related icon pack.
For example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public function load() {
    $this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;enableOOUI();
    $this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addModuleStyles( [ 'oojs-ui.styles.icons-moderation' ] );
    return ( new OOUI\IconWidget(
		[
			'icon' =&gt; 'block',
			'classes' =&gt; [ 'flaggedrevs-icon' ],
			'title' =&gt; 'Block',
		]
	) )-&gt;toString();
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


==== Parser functions and tags, [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:ContentHandler|content models]] ====
If you have access to a ParserOutput instance (usually as &lt;code&gt;$parser-&gt;getOutput()&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;$pout&lt;/code&gt;), call its &lt;code&gt;setEnableOOUI( true )&lt;/code&gt; method, and also &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::setupOOUI()&lt;/code&gt;.

If you have access to a Parser instance, instead just call its &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; method.

Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function myTagHook( $content, array $attributes, Parser $parser, PPFrame $frame ) {
	$parser-&gt;enableOOUI();
	// … More code here …
	$group = new OOUI\ButtonGroupWidget( [
		// … More widgets here …
	] );
	return [ $group-&gt;toString(), 'markerType' =&gt; 'nowiki' ];
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== Otherwise ====
See [[OOUI/PHP examples#Before you start]].
(Instead of {{tag|link|open}} tags use the ResourceLoader style modules described below.)

=== Using OOUI widgets ===
Construct a widget:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn = new OOUI\ButtonWidget( [
    'label' =&gt; 'Click me!',
    'href' =&gt; 'https://example.com',
] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Its properties can be changed using getter/setter methods:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn-&gt;setLabel( 'Still click me!' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;When you're done creating the widget, you can treat it like a string to display it.
(You can explicitly convert to string by calling the &lt;code&gt;toString()&lt;/code&gt; method.)&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addHTML( &quot;&lt;div&gt;$btn&lt;/div&gt;&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== List of available elements ====
See also:

* Automatically updated list: https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/php/annotated.html
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/demos/demos.php?page=widgets&amp;theme=wikimediaui&amp;direction=ltr Live demo with examples] ([[phab:diffusion/GOJU/browse/master/demos/pages/widgets.php|demo page in master branch]])

As of OOUI v0.34.0, released 2019-09-04, these elements available in PHP (or in [[OOUI/Using OOUI in MediaWiki#Using OOUI widgets 2|JS via &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt;, see below]]) are:

Widgets:

* ButtonWidget
* ButtonInputWidget
* ButtonGroupWidget
* CheckboxInputWidget
* CheckboxMultiselectInputWidget
* RadioInputWidget
* RadioSelectInputWidget
* TextInputWidget
* MultilineTextInputWidget
* NumberInputWidget
* SearchInputWidget
* DropdownInputWidget
* ComboBoxInputWidget
* LabelWidget
* IconWidget
* IndicatorWidget
* ProgressBarWidget
* SelectFileInputWidget
* SelectWidget
* TabSelectWidget
* TabOptionWidget

Layouts:

* ActionFieldLayout
* FieldLayout
* FieldsetLayout
* FormLayout
* HorizontalLayout
* IndexLayout
* MenuLayout
* PanelLayout
* TabPanelLayout
* StackLayout

==== Example ====
Large structures can be created and displayed in a single call:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addHTML( new OOUI\FormLayout( [
	'method' =&gt; 'POST',
	'action' =&gt; 'login.php',
	'items' =&gt; [
		new OOUI\FieldsetLayout( [
			'label' =&gt; 'Form layout',
			'items' =&gt; [
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\TextInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'username',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'User name',
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\TextInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'password',
						'type' =&gt; 'password',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'Password',
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\CheckboxInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'rememberme',
						'selected' =&gt; true,
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'Remember me',
						'align' =&gt; 'inline',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\ButtonInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'login',
						'label' =&gt; 'Log in',
						'type' =&gt; 'submit',
						'flags' =&gt; [ 'primary', 'progressive' ],
						'icon' =&gt; 'check',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; null,
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
			]
		] )
	]
] ) );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== {{ll|HTMLForm}}, FormSpecialPage ===

HTMLForm has OOUI support.
You can use the &lt;code&gt;ooui&lt;/code&gt; display format for [[HTMLForm]] forms to render them using OOUI.
This is usually more convenient, as HTMLForm provides functionality for validation and handling form submission.
See [[HTMLForm#Display formats]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$htmlForm = HTMLForm::factory( 'ooui', $formDescriptor, $this-&gt;getContext() );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

On FormSpecialPage, use the &lt;code&gt;getDisplayFormat()&lt;/code&gt; method:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
protected function getDisplayFormat() {
	return 'ooui';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Examples:

* https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/specials/SpecialMIMESearch.php ([[Special:MIMESearch]])
* https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/specials/SpecialResetTokens.php ([[Special:ResetTokens]])

Widgets used in the form will be automatically [[#Infusion|infused (see below)]] if the JS widget offers additional capabilities over the PHP one.

== JavaScript ==
=== Using OOUI widgets ===
Depending on which of the features you're going to use, you should list one or more of the following modules as dependencies of your modules that use OOUI:

* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt;: OOUI's core JavaScript library. Contains the basic [[OOUI/Widgets|widgets]] and [[OOUI/Layouts|layouts]] that are [[#List of available elements|also available in PHP (see exact list above)]] and the ability to [[#Infusion|infuse]] them.
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-widgets&lt;/code&gt;: Additional [[OOUI/Widgets|widgets]] and [[OOUI/Layouts|layouts]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-toolbars&lt;/code&gt;: [[OOUI/Toolbars|Toolbar and tools]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-windows&lt;/code&gt;: [[OOUI/Windows|Windows and dialogs]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui.styles.icons-*&lt;/code&gt;: Specific icon styles depending on what icons you may want to use, e.g. &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui.styles.icons-interactions&lt;/code&gt; for check icon. Group names can be found in [https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/demos/?page=icons&amp;theme=wikimediaui&amp;direction=ltr&amp;platform=desktop demo page] or in [https://github.com/wikimedia/flask-oojsui/tree/master/flask_oojsui/static/oojs-ui code].  

For example ([[extension.json]]):

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;ResourceModules&quot;: {
		&quot;ext.myExtension&quot;: {
			&quot;dependencies&quot;: [
				&quot;oojs-ui-core&quot;,
				&quot;oojs-ui-windows&quot;
			],
			&quot;scripts&quot;: [
				...
			]
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Code in modules depending on OOUI can use the elements, as described in this OOUI documentation.
[[OOUI/Creating interfaces programmatically|Start reading it here]].

=== Infusion ===
To provide [[:en:Progressive_enhancement|progressive enhancement]] and avoid code duplication between PHP and JS, OOUI PHP widgets present on a page can be ''infused'' into OOUI widgets.

Assuming that a PHP widget has been made infusable when it was created:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn = new OOUI\ButtonWidget( [
    'infusable' =&gt; true,
    'id' =&gt; 'my-button',
    'label' =&gt; 'Click me!',
    'href' =&gt; 'https://example.com',
] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

It can be infused from JavaScript code:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var button = OO.ui.infuse( $( '#my-button' ) );
// Or, for self-documenting code:
var button = OO.ui.ButtonWidget.static.infuse( $( '#my-button' ) );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;The widget can now be modified from JavaScript code:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
button
	.setLabel( 'Really click me!' )
	.on( 'click', function () {
		alert( 'I was clicked!' );
	} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Gadgets ===
OOUI can be used in on-wiki gadgets or user scripts.
As above, you just need to ensure the &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt; module (or a different one, as described above) is loaded before your code runs.

For gadgets, you should add an entry in the &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; field of gadget description.
See [[Extension:Gadgets#Options|Gadgets' documentation]] for instructions and examples.

For user scripts, wrap your code in a &lt;code&gt;mw.loader.using( … )&lt;/code&gt; call, as always when loading modules.
See [[ResourceLoader/Modules#mw.loader.using|ResourceLoader documentation]] for instructions.
Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.using( 'oojs-ui-core' ).done( function () {
	$( function () {
		var button = new OO.ui.ButtonWidget( {
			label: 'Click me!'
		} );
		button.on( 'click', function () {
			alert( 'You clicked the button!' );
		} );
		$( '#mw-content-text' ).append( button.$element );
	} );
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== MediaWiki-specific OOUI widgets ==
Several MediaWiki-specific OOUI widgets are available under the &lt;code&gt;mw.widgets&lt;/code&gt; (JavaScript) or &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki\Widget&lt;/code&gt; (PHP) namespace, implementing interface elements common in MediaWiki.

TODO Write me.

* [[Manual:TitleInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:UserInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:SearchInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:NamespaceInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:DateInputWidget]] (example: [[gerrit:226647]])
* [[Manual:DateTimeInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:CategorySelector]]

== Using themes ==
OOUI comes with two themes, and every widget you create will use the theme defined by the current skin using &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#SkinOOUIThemes|SkinOOUIThemes}}&lt;/code&gt; in extension.json.
Custom themes can also be provided by the skin.
See [[OOUI/Themes]] for details.

{{Feedback/oojsui}}

[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ku3fdngjobbxcazgc09zox35if75t15</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>OOUI/Using OOUI in MediaWiki/ja</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1204587</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403316</id>
      <parentid>5076651</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:21:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11515" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{OOUI}}
'''{{ll|OOUI}}''' は MediaWiki コアに含まれており、PHP コードと JavaScript コードの両方で使用できます。

== PHP ==
=== 始める前に ===
To use OOUI elements, the OOUI PHP library has to be loaded and the necessary styles have to be set up per the correct skin ([[phab:T98029#1475549|boring details]]).

The most convenient way to do this is:

==== 特別ページなど ====
Whenever you have access to an [[Manual:OutputPage.php|OutputPage]] instance, call its &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; method.
It is usually available as &lt;code&gt;$this-&gt;getOutput()&lt;/code&gt; in most contexts, such as on special pages, or as &lt;code&gt;$out&lt;/code&gt; in hook signatures.

Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
function execute( $param ) {
	$out = $this-&gt;getOutput();
	$out-&gt;enableOOUI();
	// … More code here …
	$group = new OOUI\ButtonGroupWidget( [
		// … More widgets here …
	] );
	$out-&gt;addHTML( $group );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Another example, useful when you have no easy access to an OutputPage instance:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
RequestContext::getMain()-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;enableOOUI();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Note that the method &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; (implemented by [[Manual:OutputPage.php|class &lt;code&gt;OutputPage&lt;/code&gt;]]) ensures that the proper theme and directionality is configured, and that the page loads the OOUI styles.
The OOUI widgets are namespaced, so they must be prefixed with &lt;code&gt;OOUI\&lt;/code&gt; or imported.
Stringifying the widgets converts them to HTML, so you can add widgets to the page using &lt;code&gt;$out-&gt;addHTML()&lt;/code&gt;.
Also note that in some cases, just enabling OOUI is not enough.
For example, if you need a certain icon added, you need to explicitly add the related icon pack.
For example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public function load() {
    $this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;enableOOUI();
    $this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addModuleStyles( [ 'oojs-ui.styles.icons-moderation' ] );
    return ( new OOUI\IconWidget(
		[
			'icon' =&gt; 'block',
			'classes' =&gt; [ 'flaggedrevs-icon' ],
			'title' =&gt; 'Block',
		]
	) )-&gt;toString();
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


==== パーサー関数、タグ、[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:ContentHandler|コンテンツ モデル]] ====
If you have access to a ParserOutput instance (usually as &lt;code&gt;$parser-&gt;getOutput()&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;$pout&lt;/code&gt;), call its &lt;code&gt;setEnableOOUI( true )&lt;/code&gt; method, and also &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::setupOOUI()&lt;/code&gt;.

If you have access to a Parser instance, instead just call its &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; method.

Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function myTagHook( $content, array $attributes, Parser $parser, PPFrame $frame ) {
	$parser-&gt;enableOOUI();
	// … More code here …
	$group = new OOUI\ButtonGroupWidget( [
		// … More widgets here …
	] );
	return [ $group-&gt;toString(), 'markerType' =&gt; 'nowiki' ];
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Otherwise ====
&lt;/div&gt;
See [[OOUI/PHP examples#Before you start]].
(Instead of {{tag|link|open}} tags use the ResourceLoader style modules described below.)

=== OOUI ウィジェットの使用 ===
Construct a widget:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn = new OOUI\ButtonWidget( [
    'label' =&gt; 'Click me!',
    'href' =&gt; 'https://example.com',
] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Its properties can be changed using getter/setter methods:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn-&gt;setLabel( 'Still click me!' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;When you're done creating the widget, you can treat it like a string to display it.
(You can explicitly convert to string by calling the &lt;code&gt;toString()&lt;/code&gt; method.)&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addHTML( &quot;&lt;div&gt;$btn&lt;/div&gt;&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== 利用できる要素の一覧 ====
See also:

* Automatically updated list: https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/php/annotated.html
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/demos/demos.php?page=widgets&amp;theme=wikimediaui&amp;direction=ltr Live demo with examples] ([[phab:diffusion/GOJU/browse/master/demos/pages/widgets.php|demo page in master branch]])

As of OOUI v0.34.0, released 2019-09-04, these elements available in PHP (or in [[OOUI/Using OOUI in MediaWiki#Using OOUI widgets 2|JS via &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt;, see below]]) are:

Widgets:

* ButtonWidget
* ButtonInputWidget
* ButtonGroupWidget
* CheckboxInputWidget
* CheckboxMultiselectInputWidget
* RadioInputWidget
* RadioSelectInputWidget
* TextInputWidget
* MultilineTextInputWidget
* NumberInputWidget
* SearchInputWidget
* DropdownInputWidget
* ComboBoxInputWidget
* LabelWidget
* IconWidget
* IndicatorWidget
* ProgressBarWidget
* SelectFileInputWidget
* SelectWidget
* TabSelectWidget
* TabOptionWidget

Layouts:

* ActionFieldLayout
* FieldLayout
* FieldsetLayout
* FormLayout
* HorizontalLayout
* IndexLayout
* MenuLayout
* PanelLayout
* TabPanelLayout
* StackLayout

==== 例 ====
Large structures can be created and displayed in a single call:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addHTML( new OOUI\FormLayout( [
	'method' =&gt; 'POST',
	'action' =&gt; 'login.php',
	'items' =&gt; [
		new OOUI\FieldsetLayout( [
			'label' =&gt; 'Form layout',
			'items' =&gt; [
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\TextInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'username',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'User name',
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\TextInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'password',
						'type' =&gt; 'password',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'Password',
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\CheckboxInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'rememberme',
						'selected' =&gt; true,
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'Remember me',
						'align' =&gt; 'inline',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\ButtonInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'login',
						'label' =&gt; 'Log in',
						'type' =&gt; 'submit',
						'flags' =&gt; [ 'primary', 'progressive' ],
						'icon' =&gt; 'check',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; null,
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
			]
		] )
	]
] ) );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== {{ll|HTMLForm}}, FormSpecialPage ===

HTMLForm has OOUI support.
You can use the &lt;code&gt;ooui&lt;/code&gt; display format for [[HTMLForm]] forms to render them using OOUI.
This is usually more convenient, as HTMLForm provides functionality for validation and handling form submission.
See [[HTMLForm#Display formats]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$htmlForm = HTMLForm::factory( 'ooui', $formDescriptor, $this-&gt;getContext() );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

On FormSpecialPage, use the &lt;code&gt;getDisplayFormat()&lt;/code&gt; method:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
protected function getDisplayFormat() {
	return 'ooui';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Examples:

* https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/specials/SpecialMIMESearch.php ([[Special:MIMESearch]])
* https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/specials/SpecialResetTokens.php ([[Special:ResetTokens]])

Widgets used in the form will be automatically [[#Infusion|infused (see below)]] if the JS widget offers additional capabilities over the PHP one.

== JavaScript ==
=== OOUI ウィジェットの使用 ===
Depending on which of the features you're going to use, you should list one or more of the following modules as dependencies of your modules that use OOUI:

* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt;: OOUI's core JavaScript library. Contains the basic [[OOUI/Widgets|widgets]] and [[OOUI/Layouts|layouts]] that are [[#List of available elements|also available in PHP (see exact list above)]] and the ability to [[#Infusion|infuse]] them.
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-widgets&lt;/code&gt;: Additional [[OOUI/Widgets|widgets]] and [[OOUI/Layouts|layouts]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-toolbars&lt;/code&gt;: [[OOUI/Toolbars|Toolbar and tools]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-windows&lt;/code&gt;: [[OOUI/Windows|Windows and dialogs]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui.styles.icons-*&lt;/code&gt;: Specific icon styles depending on what icons you may want to use, e.g. &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui.styles.icons-interactions&lt;/code&gt; for check icon. Group names can be found in [https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/demos/?page=icons&amp;theme=wikimediaui&amp;direction=ltr&amp;platform=desktop demo page] or in [https://github.com/wikimedia/flask-oojsui/tree/master/flask_oojsui/static/oojs-ui code].  

For example ([[extension.json]]):

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;ResourceModules&quot;: {
		&quot;ext.myExtension&quot;: {
			&quot;dependencies&quot;: [
				&quot;oojs-ui-core&quot;,
				&quot;oojs-ui-windows&quot;
			],
			&quot;scripts&quot;: [
				...
			]
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Code in modules depending on OOUI can use the elements, as described in this OOUI documentation.
[[OOUI/Creating interfaces programmatically|Start reading it here]].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Infusion ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To provide [[:en:Progressive_enhancement|progressive enhancement]] and avoid code duplication between PHP and JS, OOUI PHP widgets present on a page can be ''infused'' into OOUI widgets.

Assuming that a PHP widget has been made infusable when it was created:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn = new OOUI\ButtonWidget( [
    'infusable' =&gt; true,
    'id' =&gt; 'my-button',
    'label' =&gt; 'Click me!',
    'href' =&gt; 'https://example.com',
] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

It can be infused from JavaScript code:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var button = OO.ui.infuse( $( '#my-button' ) );
// Or, for self-documenting code:
var button = OO.ui.ButtonWidget.static.infuse( $( '#my-button' ) );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;The widget can now be modified from JavaScript code:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
button
	.setLabel( 'Really click me!' )
	.on( 'click', function () {
		alert( 'I was clicked!' );
	} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== ガジェット ===
OOUI can be used in on-wiki gadgets or user scripts.
As above, you just need to ensure the &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt; module (or a different one, as described above) is loaded before your code runs.

For gadgets, you should add an entry in the &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; field of gadget description.
See [[Extension:Gadgets#Options|Gadgets' documentation]] for instructions and examples.

For user scripts, wrap your code in a &lt;code&gt;mw.loader.using( … )&lt;/code&gt; call, as always when loading modules.
See [[ResourceLoader/Modules#mw.loader.using|ResourceLoader documentation]] for instructions.
Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.using( 'oojs-ui-core' ).done( function () {
	$( function () {
		var button = new OO.ui.ButtonWidget( {
			label: 'Click me!'
		} );
		button.on( 'click', function () {
			alert( 'You clicked the button!' );
		} );
		$( '#mw-content-text' ).append( button.$element );
	} );
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== MediaWiki 固有の OOUI ウィジェット ==
Several MediaWiki-specific OOUI widgets are available under the &lt;code&gt;mw.widgets&lt;/code&gt; (JavaScript) or &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki\Widget&lt;/code&gt; (PHP) namespace, implementing interface elements common in MediaWiki.

TODO Write me.

* [[Manual:TitleInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:UserInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:SearchInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:NamespaceInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:DateInputWidget]] (example: [[gerrit:226647]])
* [[Manual:DateTimeInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:CategorySelector]]

== テーマの使用 ==
OOUI comes with two themes, and every widget you create will use the theme defined by the current skin using &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#SkinOOUIThemes|SkinOOUIThemes}}&lt;/code&gt; in extension.json.
Custom themes can also be provided by the skin.
See [[OOUI/Themes]] for details.

{{Feedback/oojsui}}

[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>96y42n8dsdke5f5mvgz1j3qslpt7db3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/zh</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>1205786</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403335</id>
      <parentid>5307423</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:23:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14191" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = 允許使用者在他們的偏好設定頁面中啟用基於JS、由使用者提供的小工具
|example         = 維基共享資源：[[commons:Special:Gadgets|小工具總覽]]、[[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|使用者偏好設定]]（點擊「小工具」；您需要先登入）
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
'''小工具'''擴充功能提供了一種方式，能讓使用者選擇其他wiki使用者提供基於JavaScript和CSS的'''小工具'''。

小工具由位於MediaWiki命名空間頁面中的JavaScript和CSS{{ll|snippets}}組成。
每個小工具由[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]中的一行所定義，並提供了小工具的名稱及描述，以及JS和CSS程式碼片段的列表（參見底下的[[#Usage|用法]]段落）。

由於小工具位於MediaWiki命名空間（定義小工具的列表和實際的程式碼判斷皆是），因此只有管理員（自1.32起為介面管理員）能編輯程式碼。
這是因為：只有受到wiki社群高度信任的使用者才能編輯JavaScript程式碼，因為它被其他使用者所用，且JavaScript能輕鬆地劫持帳號和監視他人。

== 安装 ==
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
== 用法 ==
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|在de.wikipedia的使用者偏好設定中選擇的一些小工具]]
基於&lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;，有兩種方式可以定義小工具。
如果設定為&lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt;（預設值），則可用小工具的列表定義在'''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''。
替代方式是當&lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;設定為&lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;時，小工具定義在[[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|Gadget definition]]命名空間中的頁面。

{{caution|1=遷移已存在的小工具定義尚未被支援，所以您將會在改變此選項後遺失先前定義的小工具。}}

一旦建立至少一個有效的小工具，所定義的小工具將在[[Special:Preferences]]的「小工具」章節顯示，使用者將能選擇他們想要使用的小工具。
由MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition定義的小工具總覽也顯示在'''[[Special:Gadgets]]'''，並附上指向對應系統訊息的連結以方便編輯。
非預設小工具的使用情況統計可在'''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''檢視。

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==== 格式 ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===== 使用MediaWiki Gadgets Definition =====
&lt;/div&gt;
在MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition中每個以一個以上「*」（星號）字元開頭的行定義為小工具；它必須是以下的格式：

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [選項（可以省略）] | 頁面名稱

第一個欄位（範例中的「&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;」）是小工具的'''內部名稱'''，並引用一條系統訊息（此範例為'''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;'''），其包含小工具的簡短描述，可使用wiki語法。

{{note|1='''內部名稱'''被用作表單欄位名稱的一部分，必須遵守[https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id NAME屬性值定義的規則]。
這表示它必須以基本的拉丁字母（&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;）開頭，並跟隨任何數量的字母、數字（&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;）、連字號（&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;）、底線（&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;）、冒號（&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;）和句號（&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;）。}}

選項格式：

 [選項1 | 選項2 | ... 選項N]

可以省略空格。
每個選項可以是僅有選項名稱（在這種情況為flag選項）或包含以逗點隔開的值列表：

 option = value1, value2, value3

範例：
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
或
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
或
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===== 使用小工具定義命名空間 =====
&lt;/div&gt;

建立[[Gadget definition:mygadget]]頁面並放入以下的[[w:zh:JSON|JSON]]程式碼與&lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;有相同的效果。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

在以上範例中，使用了[[Gadget:Mygadget.js]]和[[Gadget:mygadget.css]]。
記得&lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt;選項在小工具定義命名空間時永遠為true。

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
您可以在您的{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}加入以下內容，以提供適當的權限給interface-admin群組中的使用者。
編輯小工具命名空間中的頁面需要&lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt;權限，編輯小工具定義命名空間中的頁面需要&lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;權限。
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


===选项===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! 名称
! 參數
! 描述
! 以来
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''无'' || 標記小工具腳本與{{ll|ResourceLoader}}相容。 || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || 逗點隔開的模組名稱 || 參見[[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|預設模組列表]]。 如果目前小工具沒有包含相同於ResourceLoader的資源（即沒有樣式表或腳本標記為相同），則此選項無效。 || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || 逗點隔開的權限名稱 || 標記小工具僅對擁有特定[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|權限]]的使用者有效且在偏好設定中可見。 || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''无''
| 從[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|偏好設定]]頁面中隱藏小工具。 這可以使用在兩個地方：
* 預設啟用小工具並不允許關閉（Common.js的模組化替代方案）。 注意您需要同時加入：&lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt;以對所有使用者載入此模組。
* 小工具不是給終端使用者所用，而是讓其他小工具載入。 例如允許兩個小工具重用相同的內部程式碼，或對僅在特定頁面載入的小工具註冊「核心」部分。
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || 逗點隔開的外觀名稱 || 標記小工具僅對使用特定[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|外觀]]的使用者有效且在偏好設定中可見。 在MediaWiki 1.32之前它採用使用者在偏好設定中設定的外觀，而不是目前顯示的外觀（例如在URL中加入&lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt;，{{phab|T199478}}）。 || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || 逗點隔開的操作名稱 || 標記小工具僅在特定頁面操作時有效。 例如使用&lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt;讓小工具僅在編輯頁面時和歷史頁面上載入。 {{Note|1=指定&lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt;操作時也會在&lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;載入。 無效的操作將導致小工具停用，不會在任何地方執行。}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''无'' || 預設對所有人（包含IP）啟用小工具。 已註冊使用者仍然可以在他們的偏好設定中停用它。
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''无'' || 標記小工具為[[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]]。 在此模式中，僅有第一個JavaScript會被執行，其他頁面可透過使用require()函數來引入。 此模式也允許使用JSON頁面，在其他情況無法被引用。
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt;（預設）、&lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt;或&lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;
| 對小工具設定{{ll|ResourceLoader}}目標。
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; 或 &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| 模組僅會修改頁面上已存在元素的樣式（自訂外觀、排版或條目內容），可使用&lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt;。 這讓模組的CSS檔案直接包含在頁面的HTML中，而非透過JavaScript載入。 詳細資訊請見[[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]]。
{{Note|1=使用&lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt;將'''不會'''載入任何指定的JavaScript檔案。 對於同時透過JavaScript'''和'''CSS修改元素樣式的小工具，需要使用兩個單獨的小工具定義。}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| 逗點隔開的模組名稱
| 需要僅CSS的小工具（通常被隱藏）。 這些小工具將會比使用&lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;還快載入，且就算JavaScript被停用也會載入。 詳細資訊請見[[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]]。
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(預發布)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''无'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| 標記小工具可透過URL查詢參數載入。
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''无'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} 標記小工具[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|最早載入]]。 應該謹慎使用，可能需要初始化一些東西，例如註冊可視化編輯器的插件。 || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

您可以對您的小工具指定額外的依賴項，例如：

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

在這裡，我們要求ResourceLoader和mygadget一起載入模組&lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt;和&lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt;。
注意小工具無法依賴於來自頁面、靜態文件或外部URL的腳本，只有已經在ResourceLoader註冊的模組可以使用。
要讓來自某頁面的腳本依賴來自另一頁面的腳本，兩個都必須作為小工具在ResourceLoader上註冊為模組，它們才能使用以下語法設定依賴關係：

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
要預設啟用小工具，使用「&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;」：
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
要讓小工具僅對擁有適當權限的使用者可用，設定&lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt;選項，例如：
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
讓小工具僅對擁有刪除權限的使用者可用。

注意此限制是基於[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|權限]]，而不是例如[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|管理員]]或行政員這樣的使用者群組。
這裡有一些實際例子；

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

=== 页面 ===

此行剩餘的欄位指向構成小工具的JavaScript、CSS或JSON程式碼，包含在系統訊息內（此範例中的'''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js'''和'''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css'''）；這些訊息的名稱必須分別是「.js」或「.css」結尾。

一個小工具可以使用任意數量的程式碼訊息，具體來說，除了自己的特定程式碼，共用程式碼可以放在一個程式碼訊息並由多個小工具使用，例如：

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
請注意如果您的程式碼包含可被解析為wiki語法的字串（例如，簽名代碼&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;），您可能想要將您的程式碼包含在{{tag|nowiki}}內，將這些標籤放在JavaScript或CSS註解中，它們才不會在實際使用中被解析。

範例可參考[[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]]的第一行和最後一行。

=== 章節 ===

MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition中的小工具列表可以透過以兩個以上的「=」（等號）字元開頭及結尾的行來分隔成多個段落，其中包含定義該段落的系統訊息名稱，例如：

  == interface-gadgets ==

這定義了新段落，其中標題定義在[[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]]頁面中。

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

== 參見 ==
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=小工具管理工具}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>959ju7tz0njprofjdwt1h8yqakuovxs</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/bn</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>1226145</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403320</id>
      <parentid>5307409</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:22:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22022" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow users to enable JS-based, user-provided gadgets from their preferences page&lt;/span&gt;
|example         = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikimedia Commons: [[commons:Special:Gadgets|Gadget overview]], [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|user preferences]] (click &quot;Gadgets&quot;; you need to be logged in of course)&lt;/span&gt;
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
'''গ্যাজেট''' এক্সটেনশনটি ব্যবহারকারীদের জাভাস্ক্রিপ্ট অথবা সিএসএস ভিত্তিক &quot;গ্যাজেটসমূহ&quot; বাছাই করার একটি উপায় প্রদান করে যা অন্যান্য উইকি ব্যবহারকারীরা সরবরাহ করে থাকে।

গ্যাজেটসমূহ মিডিয়াউইকি নামস্থানের পাতাগুলোতে জাভাস্ক্রিপ্ট অথবা {{ll|snippets}} স্নিপেটগুলো নিয়ে গঠিত।
প্রতিটি গ্যাজেট [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]] এ একটি লাইন দ্বারা সংজ্ঞায়িত, যেটি গ্যাজেটের জন্য একটি নাম এবং বিবরণ সরবরাহ করে। এছাড়াও এটি ব্যবহার করে এমন জাভাস্ক্রিপ্ট এবং সিএসএস স্নিপেটের একটি তালিকা (নিচে ''[[#Usage|ব্যবহারবিধি]]'' অনুচ্ছেদে দেখুন)।

যেহেতু গ্যাজেটসমূহ মিডিয়াউইকি নামস্থানে থাকে (গ্যাজেটসমূহের পাশাপাশি সংখ্যার আসল কোড স্নিপেটগুলি সংজ্ঞায়িত করার তালিকা), তাই কেবলমাত্র সিসপ (১.৩২ থেকে ইন্টারফেস প্রশাসকগণ) কোড সম্পাদনা করতে পারবেন।
এটি যেমনটি হওয়া উচিত তা হলো: উইকি সম্প্রদায়ের দ্বারা বিশেষত বিশ্বস্ত ব্যবহারকারীদেরই জাভাস্ক্রিপ্ট কোড সম্পাদনা করতে সক্ষম হবেন, যা অন্য ব্যবহারকারীদের দ্বারা ব্যবহৃত। যেহেতু জাভাস্ক্রিপ্ট সহজেই অ্যাকাউন্টগুলি হাইজ্যাক করতে বা লোকেরা গুপ্তচর ব্যবহার করতে পারে।

== ইন্সটল প্রক্রিয়া ==
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
== ব্যবহারবিধি ==
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Selection of some gadgets at the user preferences in de.wikipedia&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to define gadgets depending on the &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If It is &lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt; (the default value), the list of available gadgets is defined on '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In an alternative way, Gadget definitions are defined on pages in the [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|Gadget definition]] namespace when &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt; is set to &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{caution|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Migration of the existing gadget definitions is not yet supported, so you will lose previously defined gadgets after changing this option.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once created with at least one valid gadget, gadgets defined there show up in the &quot;Gadgets&quot; section of [[Special:Preferences]], so users can pick the gadgets they would like to use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An overview of the gadgets defined by MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition is also shown on '''[[Special:Gadgets]]''', along with links to the respective system messages, for easy editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Statistics for non-default gadget usage can be seen at '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==== ধরন ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==== মিডিয়াউইকি গ্যাজেট সংজ্ঞা ব্যবহার করে ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each line in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition that starts with one or more &quot;*&quot; (asterisks) characters defines a gadget; it must have the following form:&lt;/span&gt;

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;options (can be omitted)&lt;/span&gt;] | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;page names&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first field (&quot;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&quot; in the example) is the gadget's ''internal name'', and references a system message ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''' in the example) that contains a short description of the gadget, using wiki syntax.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''internal name'' is used as part of the name of a form field and must follow the [https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id rules defined for NAME attribute values].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means it must begin with a basic Latin letter (&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;) and may be followed by any number of letters, digits (&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;), hyphens (&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;), underscores (&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;), colons (&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;), and periods (&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Options format:
&lt;/div&gt;

 [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;option1&lt;/span&gt; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;option2&lt;/span&gt; | ... &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;optionN&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whitespace can be omitted.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A single option can either consist of a single option name (in this case it is a flag option), or contain a comma-separated list of values:&lt;/span&gt;

 option = value1, value2, value3

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Examples:
&lt;/div&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using Gadget Definition Namespace ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Creation of the [[Gadget definition:mygadget]] page and putting in it the below [[w:JSON|JSON]] code have the same effect as &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In above example, the [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] and the [[Gadget:mygadget.css]] are used.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember the &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; option is always true in the gadget definition namespace.&lt;/span&gt;

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add the following in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} to provide the appropriate permissions for users who are within the interface-admin group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing pages in the Gadget namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; right and editing pages in the Gadget definition namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt; right.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


=== অপশনসমূহ ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! নাম
! পরামিতিসমূহ
! বিবরণ
! হতে
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with {{ll|ResourceLoader}}.&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|list of default modules]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|privileges]].&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;''
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide the gadget from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Preferences]] page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be used in two ways:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to Common.js).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you need to add both: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated skin names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; in the URL, {{phab|T199478}}).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated action names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g. &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/span&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specifying &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; action will also load it on &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/span&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mark this gadget as [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the require() function.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (default), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set the {{ll|ResourceLoader}} target(s) for the gadget.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;or&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/span&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pre-release&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Makes the gadget to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|top-loaded]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can specify extra dependencies for your gadgets, for example:&lt;/span&gt;

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; with mygadget.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/span&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|permissions]], not user groups like [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here are some real examples:&lt;/span&gt;

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

=== পাতাসমূহ ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' and '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css''' in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;.js&quot; or &quot;.css&quot;, respectively.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/div&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into {{tag|nowiki}} and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See the first and last lines of [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] for an example.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== অনুচ্ছেদসমূহ ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The list of gadgets in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;=&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would define a new section, with the title defined on the page [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

== আরও দেখুন ==
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=গ্যাজেট ব্যবস্থাপক}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>tudxlmwma343spte47fvgp3lvvx50rd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/id</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1233304</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401798</id>
      <parentid>5184878</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2994" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
Halaman ini menjelaskan saluran media sosial yang digunakan untuk mempos informasi berguna kepada komunitas teknologi Wikimedia dan menjelaskan cara mempos di saluran-saluran ini.

== Gambaran umum ==
Situs web media sosial berguna untuk menyebarkan berita dan menjangkau calon pengguna dan kontributor.
Media sosial juga bisa sangat menuntut dan menghabiskan waktu.
Penggunaan yang ceroboh bisa memecah komunitas, menjauhkan konten bebas dan kontak publik kepada lingkungan pemilik platform media sosial yang biasanya tertutup dan didorong komersial.

== Saluran media sosial ==

Terdapat beberapa akun yang biasanya digunakan untuk membagikan berita mengenai Teknologi Wikimedia dan Komunitas MediaWiki.

=== MediaWiki ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

=== Teknologi Wikimedia ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

=== Pemelihara saat ini ===
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

== Aturan operasi kami ==
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

Tolong perhatikan, kami rasa penting untuk beroperasi secara konservatif di saluran media sosial dan berusaha memastikan pos kami memiliki sudut pandang yang netral.

== Pos di Twitter dan Facebook ==

Apakah Anda punya berita atau pengumuman yang Anda ingin kami pos di Twitter dan/atau Facebook Teknologi Wikimedia?
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>8f31tbyh1to73hgl9stdxxiw27aiayj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/yue</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1233635</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402275</id>
      <parentid>5400766</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14071" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updated information is available at Meta: [[m:Help:Preferences]].&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking on the [[Special:preferences|Preferences]] link in the upper right while logged in allows you to change your preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will be presented with the User profile section, as well as a bar of tabs across the top for changing other types of settings.&lt;/span&gt;

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your user name. Only trusted users can change your username, and the wiki must also have the {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} extension installed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A list of the user groups you are in.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, this link allows you to manage external applications that are permitted to access your account.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Help:OAuth}} for more information.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How many edits you have made. Not all wikis will have this.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The time your account was registered.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;see below&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage two factor authentication.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manage global preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To change your password, enter your old password in the first box and your new password in the last two.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want this site to remember your login, check ''Remember my login on this computer''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this function requires you to have cookies enabled in your browser, and if your cookie is cleared or expires you will no longer be remembered.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Global account}}
====全域戶口====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From your preferences you can select what language you would like the interface to be in.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Only the buttons like 'edit' and 'talk', in addition to a few pages in the sidebar, will be affected.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The main text of the pages will not be changed by this for the vast majority of pages, although there are a few pages where it will, like some in the Wikimedia Meta Wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Languages
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* How do you prefer to be described?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* More language settings
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Your existing signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* New signature
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** Treat as wikitext
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have supplied an email address, you will need to click the ''verify address'' button in order to use these functions. You will receive an email; simply open it and follow the link to enable the following functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Email confirmation&lt;/span&gt; ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows other registered users to send you an email using &quot;{{int|emailuser}}&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page. Emails are sent using a web interface, and your email address is not revealed to a sender until you reply by email.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This allows users without the autoconfirmed permissions to send you emails.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option allows you to specify which users will not be able to send you direct emails. They will not see the &quot;Email this user&quot; link on the sidebar of your user page.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can choose the skin you want to use. You can preview the available skins before choosing them, by clicking on the &quot;{{int|skin-preview}}&quot; link next to each skin. Please refer to {{ll|Help:Skins}} for more details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Date and time}}
===日期格式同時間差異===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The following is normally rendered depending on preferences:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Here you can determine how images will be displayed. Images displayed by direct pasting of a URL (if the wiki has it enabled) will not be affected by this setting.
&lt;/div&gt;

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This setting lets you choose how big image previews will be on the Image: pages. If you know what your current screen resolution is you may like to set this to one or two sizes smaller than your own screen. If you have a slow connection (such as dial-up) you may want to limit them to 320×240.&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Define how big you want thumbnails to appear. This setting will not affect thumbnails with dimensions determined by an editor, nor can it increase images beyond their original dimensions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|About Beta Features]] for more information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>8j38n5c3lqej3y43gwcos0kol33fy2k</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Editor/id</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1234799</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402692</id>
      <parentid>5370847</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5776" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Anda mungkin mencari:

== Sekarang ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Perangkat lunak penyuntingan yang sekarang untuk wiki Wikimedia
!Perkakas penyuntingan
!Cuplikan layar
!Tahun
!Platform
!Catatan
|-
|editor MediaWiki baku, yang merupakan sebuah {{tag|textarea|open}} HTML
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Cuplikan textarea HTML|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Desktop dan mobile
|Editor ini tidak memiliki bilah perkakas. Editor ini bisa dilihat ketika JavaScript dimatikan, atau ketika &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; dimatikan di [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Ekstensi:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Cuplikan WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Desktop
|Editor ini bisa dilihat ketika &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; dinyalakan di [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Cuplikan mode visual VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Desktop dan mobile
|Sistem penyuntingan kaya teks
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Penyunting teks wiki 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=CUplikan mode teks wiki bawaan VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Proofread Page]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Desktop
|Digunakan di [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Cuplikan wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Desktop
|Editor teks wiki yang sepenuhnya didukung sukarelawan. Editor ini biasanya dijalankan sebagai perkakas atau skrip pengguna, tetapi editor ini dijalankan sebagai ekstensi di beberapa wiki non-Wikimedia.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Cuplikan penyunting kode|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Desktop
|Editor ini digunakan untuk menyunting JavaScript dan halaman kode lainnya.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Penyunting teks wiki {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}} sekarang&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Cuplikan penyuntingan teks wiki di Mobile Web|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobile
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Terjemahan Konten]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Cuplikan editor Terjemahan Konten|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Desktop
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Pembicaraan Terstruktur]] (sebelumnya dikenal sebagai Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Cuplikan sebuah komentar dan awal dari balasannya di Pembicaraan Terstruktur|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Desktop dan mobile
|Pembicaraan Terstruktur mendukung mode teks wiki dan visual.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Desktop (sebentar lagi mobile juga)
|Formulir pada baris yang sama untuk memulai diskusi baru di halaman pembicaraan. Perkakas ini punya mode &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; dan &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;.
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Desktop (sebentar lagi mobile juga)
|Perkakas untuk membalas komentar spesifik di halaman pembicaraan. Komentar ditandatangani dan diindentasikan secara otomatis. Perkakas ini punya mode &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; dan &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;. 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor di aplikasi [[$android-faq|Android]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Cuplikan antarmuka penyuntingan di telepon Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor di aplikasi [[$ios-faq|iOS]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Cuplikan antarmuka penyuntingan di iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|Editor [[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Desktop
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Wikivoyage Listing Editor]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Desktop
|Perkakas penyuntingan berbasis JavaScript khusus untuk memasukkan salah satu templat di Wikivoyage
|-
|}

== Bekas ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Perangkat lunak penyuntingan yang dahulu untuk wiki Wikimedia
|-
!Perkakas penyuntingan
!Cuplikan layar
!Tahun
!Platform
!Catatan
|-
|Editor &quot;klasik&quot; JavaScript 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Cuplikan penyunting teks wiki 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Desktop
|Ini dahulu di lihat ketika preferensi &quot;showtoolbar&quot; diaktifkan pada 2006–2010. Setelah itu, editor ini hanya ditampilkan kepada pengguna yang mematikan preferensi &quot;enhanced-toolbar&quot; (editor 2010). Editor ini [[phab:T30856|dihapus]] pada [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Bilah perkakas yang serupa tersedia sebagai perkakas lokal yang didukung sukarelawan di beberapa wiki.
|-
|Editor teks wiki MobileFrontend awal
|
|2012–2014
|Mobile
|Ini adalah seperangkat modifikasi khusus mobile dari editor teks wiki desktop 2003. Tidak lagi diedarkan.
|-
|}

== Lihat pula ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – bukan bagian dari penyunting mana pun, tetapi muncul di bawah beberapa lingkungan penyuntingan
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – bukan bagian dari penyunting mana pun, tetapi muncul di bawah beberapa lingkungan penyuntingan

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>t7ulloambve7s1jo9f8511kmxw4y59r</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402713</id>
      <parentid>5402692</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:06:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5769" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Anda mungkin mencari:

== Sekarang ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Perangkat lunak penyuntingan yang sekarang untuk wiki Wikimedia
!Perkakas penyuntingan
!Cuplikan layar
!Tahun
!Platform
!Catatan
|-
|editor MediaWiki baku, yang merupakan sebuah {{tag|textarea|open}} HTML
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Cuplikan textarea HTML|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Desktop dan mobile
|Editor ini tidak memiliki bilah perkakas. Editor ini bisa dilihat ketika JavaScript dimatikan, atau ketika &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; dimatikan di [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Ekstensi:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Cuplikan WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Desktop
|Editor ini bisa dilihat ketika &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; dinyalakan di [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Cuplikan mode visual VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Desktop dan mobile
|Sistem penyuntingan kaya teks
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Penyunting teks wiki 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=CUplikan mode teks wiki bawaan VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Proofread Page]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Desktop
|Digunakan di [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Cuplikan wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Desktop
|Editor teks wiki yang sepenuhnya didukung sukarelawan. Editor ini biasanya dijalankan sebagai perkakas atau skrip pengguna, tetapi editor ini dijalankan sebagai ekstensi di beberapa wiki non-Wikimedia.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Cuplikan penyunting kode|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Desktop
|Editor ini digunakan untuk menyunting JavaScript dan halaman kode lainnya.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Penyunting teks wiki {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}} sekarang&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Cuplikan penyuntingan teks wiki di Mobile Web|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobile
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Terjemahan Konten]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Cuplikan editor Terjemahan Konten|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Desktop
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Pembicaraan Terstruktur]] (sebelumnya dikenal sebagai Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Cuplikan sebuah komentar dan awal dari balasannya di Pembicaraan Terstruktur|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Desktop dan mobile
|Pembicaraan Terstruktur mendukung mode teks wiki dan visual.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Desktop (sebentar lagi mobile juga)
|Formulir pada baris yang sama untuk memulai diskusi baru di halaman pembicaraan. Perkakas ini punya mode &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; dan &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;.
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Desktop (sebentar lagi mobile juga)
|Perkakas untuk membalas komentar spesifik di halaman pembicaraan. Komentar ditandatangani dan diindentasikan secara otomatis. Perkakas ini punya mode &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; dan &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;. 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor di aplikasi [[$android-faq|Android]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Cuplikan antarmuka penyuntingan di telepon Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|Editor di aplikasi [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Cuplikan antarmuka penyuntingan di iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|Editor [[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Desktop
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Wikivoyage Listing Editor]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Desktop
|Perkakas penyuntingan berbasis JavaScript khusus untuk memasukkan salah satu templat di Wikivoyage
|-
|}

== Bekas ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Perangkat lunak penyuntingan yang dahulu untuk wiki Wikimedia
|-
!Perkakas penyuntingan
!Cuplikan layar
!Tahun
!Platform
!Catatan
|-
|Editor &quot;klasik&quot; JavaScript 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Cuplikan penyunting teks wiki 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Desktop
|Ini dahulu di lihat ketika preferensi &quot;showtoolbar&quot; diaktifkan pada 2006–2010. Setelah itu, editor ini hanya ditampilkan kepada pengguna yang mematikan preferensi &quot;enhanced-toolbar&quot; (editor 2010). Editor ini [[phab:T30856|dihapus]] pada [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Bilah perkakas yang serupa tersedia sebagai perkakas lokal yang didukung sukarelawan di beberapa wiki.
|-
|Editor teks wiki MobileFrontend awal
|
|2012–2014
|Mobile
|Ini adalah seperangkat modifikasi khusus mobile dari editor teks wiki desktop 2003. Tidak lagi diedarkan.
|-
|}

== Lihat pula ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – bukan bagian dari penyunting mana pun, tetapi muncul di bawah beberapa lingkungan penyuntingan
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – bukan bagian dari penyunting mana pun, tetapi muncul di bawah beberapa lingkungan penyuntingan

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>3b43siy96fp3xvooqgf7ajf7hnvirqx</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402735</id>
      <parentid>5402713</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:10:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5762" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Anda mungkin mencari:

== Sekarang ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Perangkat lunak penyuntingan yang sekarang untuk wiki Wikimedia
!Perkakas penyuntingan
!Cuplikan layar
!Tahun
!Platform
!Catatan
|-
|editor MediaWiki baku, yang merupakan sebuah {{tag|textarea|open}} HTML
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Cuplikan textarea HTML|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Desktop dan mobile
|Editor ini tidak memiliki bilah perkakas. Editor ini bisa dilihat ketika JavaScript dimatikan, atau ketika &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; dimatikan di [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Ekstensi:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Cuplikan WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Desktop
|Editor ini bisa dilihat ketika &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; dinyalakan di [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Cuplikan mode visual VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Desktop dan mobile
|Sistem penyuntingan kaya teks
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Penyunting teks wiki 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=CUplikan mode teks wiki bawaan VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Proofread Page]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Desktop
|Digunakan di [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Cuplikan wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Desktop
|Editor teks wiki yang sepenuhnya didukung sukarelawan. Editor ini biasanya dijalankan sebagai perkakas atau skrip pengguna, tetapi editor ini dijalankan sebagai ekstensi di beberapa wiki non-Wikimedia.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Cuplikan penyunting kode|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Desktop
|Editor ini digunakan untuk menyunting JavaScript dan halaman kode lainnya.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Penyunting teks wiki {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}} sekarang&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Cuplikan penyuntingan teks wiki di Mobile Web|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobile
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Terjemahan Konten]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Cuplikan editor Terjemahan Konten|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Desktop
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Pembicaraan Terstruktur]] (sebelumnya dikenal sebagai Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Cuplikan sebuah komentar dan awal dari balasannya di Pembicaraan Terstruktur|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Desktop dan mobile
|Pembicaraan Terstruktur mendukung mode teks wiki dan visual.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Desktop (sebentar lagi mobile juga)
|Formulir pada baris yang sama untuk memulai diskusi baru di halaman pembicaraan. Perkakas ini punya mode &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; dan &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;.
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Desktop (sebentar lagi mobile juga)
|Perkakas untuk membalas komentar spesifik di halaman pembicaraan. Komentar ditandatangani dan diindentasikan secara otomatis. Perkakas ini punya mode &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; dan &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;. 
|-
|Editor di aplikasi [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Android FAQ|Android]]
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Cuplikan antarmuka penyuntingan di telepon Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|Editor di aplikasi [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Cuplikan antarmuka penyuntingan di iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobile
|
|-
|Editor [[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Desktop
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Wikivoyage Listing Editor]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Desktop
|Perkakas penyuntingan berbasis JavaScript khusus untuk memasukkan salah satu templat di Wikivoyage
|-
|}

== Bekas ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Perangkat lunak penyuntingan yang dahulu untuk wiki Wikimedia
|-
!Perkakas penyuntingan
!Cuplikan layar
!Tahun
!Platform
!Catatan
|-
|Editor &quot;klasik&quot; JavaScript 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Cuplikan penyunting teks wiki 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Desktop
|Ini dahulu di lihat ketika preferensi &quot;showtoolbar&quot; diaktifkan pada 2006–2010. Setelah itu, editor ini hanya ditampilkan kepada pengguna yang mematikan preferensi &quot;enhanced-toolbar&quot; (editor 2010). Editor ini [[phab:T30856|dihapus]] pada [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Bilah perkakas yang serupa tersedia sebagai perkakas lokal yang didukung sukarelawan di beberapa wiki.
|-
|Editor teks wiki MobileFrontend awal
|
|2012–2014
|Mobile
|Ini adalah seperangkat modifikasi khusus mobile dari editor teks wiki desktop 2003. Tidak lagi diedarkan.
|-
|}

== Lihat pula ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – bukan bagian dari penyunting mana pun, tetapi muncul di bawah beberapa lingkungan penyuntingan
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – bukan bagian dari penyunting mana pun, tetapi muncul di bawah beberapa lingkungan penyuntingan

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>a4pucaasiq3db7g4fptit0z9i5uu38u</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/63/id</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1234852</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402734</id>
      <parentid>4206077</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:10:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="33" xml:space="preserve">Editor di aplikasi [[$1|Android]]</text>
      <sha1>3q4z6mrpwvsnoiijq7bm84ki2fmdh6m</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/67/id</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1234855</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402712</id>
      <parentid>4206083</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:06:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29" xml:space="preserve">Editor di aplikasi [[$1|iOS]]</text>
      <sha1>ifzmypxcs9c6f8xpc2jzodhiqfnl6ba</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Social tools/fi</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>1236473</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401976</id>
      <parentid>4429448</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1639" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Sosiaaliset työkalut}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Yleiskatsaus}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Tietoa ohjelmistokehittäjille}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Kuvakaappauksia}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Historia}}
|group2 = Muut sosiaaliset laajennokset
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = Riippuvaisia SocialProfile-laajennoksesta
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = Muut laajennokset&lt;br&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(jotka eivät ole riippuvaisia SocialProfile-laajennoksesta)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>cgob9qb807rcc8axlhomi0jzug9qqvi</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401990</id>
      <parentid>5401976</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:10:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1640" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Sosiaaliset työkalut}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Yleiskatsaus}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Tietoa ohjelmistokehittäjille}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Kuvakaappauksia}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Historia}}
|group2 = Muut sosiaaliset laajennokset
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = Riippuvaisia SocialProfile-laajennoksesta
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = Muut laajennokset&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(jotka eivät ole riippuvaisia SocialProfile-laajennoksesta)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>ohl6l9yo2uox3n5a6bihube0pejjxp2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/he</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1237136</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402198</id>
      <parentid>5371504</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="21554" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''ראה [[Wikitech:PAWS]] לפרטים נוספים.''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This document provides a quick interactive overview of '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' using a ''notebook'' hosted on the [[wikitech:Help:Cloud Services Introduction|Wikimedia Cloud Services]] environment using [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: A Web Shell''')]].&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PAWS Terminal supports copy and paste in [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Browsers based on Chromium|Chromium-based browsers]] only.&lt;/span&gt; (Google Chrome, Opera, Safari ו- Microsoft Edge החדשים הם בסדר.) אם אתה משתמש בדפדפן אחר, אתה יכול לנסות באמצעות תפריט ההקשר בלבד (לחיצה ימנית) או שתצטרך להקליד ידנית את הפקודות המוזכרות בהליכה זו. אתה יכול גם ליצור קובץ bash עם תוכן הפקודה ולקרוא למסוף עם &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.}}

{{Warning|1=כל המחברות והמסופים ב- PAWS כפופים לסיום ללא הודעה מוקדמת. מומלץ להפעיל את המשימה במקומות אחרים (כגון [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) אם המשימה נמשכת יותר משעות.}}

== צור חשבון ויקימדיה ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To follow this walk-through, you only need a Wikipedia/Wikimedia account. Use [[Special:CreateAccount]] to create one.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once you have created an account, please visit https://test.wikipedia.org/ and check that your username appears in the top right corner &lt;small&gt;(this works around {{task|T120327}})&lt;/small&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Sign into a notebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To start a hosted notebook, go to https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot;, and then click &quot;Allow&quot; when asked to approve &quot;Use OAuth for Authentication&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first time you access PAWS, you need to create a server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the green &quot;Start my Server&quot; button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's normal to wait a few minutes for the new server to start up.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once that is completed, you will be redirected to a URL like &lt;nowiki&gt;https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/user/&lt;username&gt;/lab&lt;/nowiki&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Start a terminal ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To start a new interactive terminal,
# Go to your [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home]
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will open a new window with a Linux '$' prompt.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This terminal is not an emulator.  It is a real [[w:Bash (Unix shell)|bash shell]], as part of a real Linux installation sitting on a [[w:Docker (software)|Docker container]], so you can use any bash command, and use any commands available on Linux that have been installed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To see some of the commands available, use &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Login to the wiki ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will establish your account on the server and allow you to log in from the command line.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The following command should confirm that you can log into the testwiki. It uses OAuth, so there is no need to enter a password.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can connect pywikibot to a different wiki by creating a file named ''user-config.py'' in your [[w:Home_directory|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; directory]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) and adding ''mylang'' and ''family'' variables:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Create a page ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To create a page, enter the following command in the terminal, replacing '&amp;lt;username&gt;' with your username, and pressing 'Y' when prompted to accept your changes:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You have edited the wiki.  View your changes by opening &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your web browser.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can read more about each of these command line scripts with the '-help' command line option.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Fetch a page ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Fetching many pages is achieved with the &quot;listpages&quot; command.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To get the contents of the page you created in the previous section, enter the following command:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now if you run &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot; inline&gt;$ ls&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; the saved page should be present.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== A real script example ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When a website used on Wikipedia changes its URL, the links on Wikipedia become outdated, and possible also [[w:WP:Dead links|dead links]] if the website doesn't redirect from the old URLs to the new URLs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) has changed their links, such as moving pages from &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can find the list of usages of the old URL on English Wikipedia at [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updating all those links manually will be very time consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thankfully EB has maintained redirects from their old URLs to the new URLs, so this does not need to be fixed immediately.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For a simpler example, English Wikipedia currently contains links to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; instead of &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; i.e. a 'www.' subdomain is missing in the URL.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are currently 14 cases on English Wikipedia: [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Wikipedia in other language also have this problem.  e.g. there is one case on German Wikipedia: [[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In order to fix those links, we can use Pywikibot {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}} script.  In this demo we will use the '-simulate' argument to avoid writing to the wiki, as there are strict rules about [[w:WP:Bots|automated editing]] of English Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
First, let's list all of the pages which link to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now we check those pages actually have the literal URL in the page; i.e. they are not using a template.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now use replace to add the missing &quot;www.&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In PAWS, and any terminal that supports color, the diff of changes will show the added &quot;www.&quot; in green text color, making it easier to find the proposed changes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Inside Pywikibot ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don't write passwords in files of server, the files are public!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Next we will use the PAWS Python session.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to your [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home PAWS home],
# click 'New' on the right hand side, and
# select 'Python 3'.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will open a new window.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the text box, enter the following and in the Cell menu select 'Run' (or pressing shift+enter to run).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A new text box will appear below.  Run the following to create an APISite object connected to https://test.wikipedia.org/:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Describe &quot;site&quot; by entering it into the new text box and selecting &quot;Run&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It should show
&lt;/div&gt;

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Create a page object:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check it exists by running:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It should output
&lt;/div&gt;

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Show the text on the page:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Change the page text in the object:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Save the page to the wiki:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The response should be:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The interactive Python 3 notebook allows many lines to be run together.  The above could be put into one text box and Run
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The log of your interactive Python session can be saved or downloaded for future reference.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Accessing online documentation in PAWS ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Pywikibot documentation may be found at https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/.  It is primarily sourced from [[w:docstring|docstrings]], which can be loaded in the interactive Python 3 notebook using the Python built-in function [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to look at the arguments for the save method above, run either:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Editing Pywikibot scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Pywikibot library and scripts are located in /srv/paws, and are read-only.  The installed Pywikibot library cannot be modified in PAWS.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Scripts may be modified after copying them into your PAWS home.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to run a modified &quot;checkimages.py&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the browser, you can edit the file.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit the code -- for instance, just after the &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; code on line 1775, add a new line 1776 that will print out your name: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the editing interface, use the File menu and click Save to save your modifications.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb PAWS cheatsheet] by one user (e.g. about API and database access)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ltz569cqrwcp6l9igd70ubn391qp9a7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Special pages/16/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1238899</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402385</id>
      <parentid>4218138</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T03:54:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>fix</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="67" xml:space="preserve">O pseudo-$manual especial podem ser traduzido para outras línguas.</text>
      <sha1>mgvj5a8bjfufuftx9ypircmr4z1vbd0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Social tools/12/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1243832</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401971</id>
      <parentid>4232922</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:09:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26" xml:space="preserve">dependent on SocialProfile</text>
      <sha1>r42jby58ulgm6f59o3u73s7p4lwww28</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/ms</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1246766</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401803</id>
      <parentid>5184884</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/bn</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1260955</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402919</id>
      <parentid>5355643</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="62906" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

==সংক্ষিপ্ত বিবরণ==

=== ফাইল স্থানান্তর ===

ফাইল স্থানান্তর করার জন্য একটি পদ্ধতি চয়ন করুন:

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Secure copy with [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] or [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
&lt;/div&gt;
* একটি [[w:File Transfer Protocol|এফটিপি]] ক্লায়েন্ট ব্যবহার করে।
* হোস্টিং সংস্থা ওয়েব ব্রাউজারের মাধ্যমে একটি ফাইল ম্যানেজার ইন্টারফেস সরবরাহ করতে পারে; আপনার সরবরাহকারীর সাথে পরীক্ষা করুন।
* অন্য কিছু পদ্ধতি। &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]&lt;/span&gt;

===প্রারম্ভিক===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

# প্রয়োজনীয়তা পরীক্ষা করুন
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
# রিলিজ নোট পড়ুন
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Read the UPGRADE file
&lt;/div&gt;
# বিদ্যমান ফাইল এবং ডাটাবেস ব্যাক আপ করুন
# নতুন ফাইলগুলি আনপ্যাক করুন
# এক্সটেনশন আপগ্রেড করুন
# ডাটাবেসটি পরীক্ষা করতে আপডেট স্ক্রিপ্টটি চালান
# আপডেট পরীক্ষা করুন
# পুরানো ইনস্টলেশন থেকে বামফুটগুলি সরান

== প্রয়োজনীয়তাগুলি পরীক্ষা করুন == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
মিডিয়াউইকি {{MW stable branch number}} -এর প্রয়োজন:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* নিম্নলিখিত একটি:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Version 1.36, MediaWiki only commits to supporting upgrades from two LTS releases ago (see [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades from older versions of MediaWiki will have to be performed in multiple steps.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if you want to upgrade to 1.36 from 1.23 or earlier, you'll first have to upgrade your 1.23 wiki to 1.27 (or 1.35), and, from 1.27 (or 1.35), you'll be able to upgrade to 1.36.&lt;/span&gt;

আপনি যদি PostgreSQL ব্যবহার করন, তবে দয়া করে {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}} -ও পড়ুন।

আরও তথ্যের জন্য, দয়া করে {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} এবং {{ll|Compatibility}} পড়ুন।

== রিলিজ নোট পড়ুন ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Within the distribution tarball, or within the files checked out/exported from [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]], there are a number of files with capitalized filenames, one of which contains the '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]).&lt;/span&gt;
এখনই এটি খোলার এবং এই রিলিজটিতে কী পরিবর্তন হয়েছে তা খুঁজে বের করার সময়।
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also read the instructions in the UPGRADE file.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== মুলতুবি থাকা কাজগুলি পরিষ্কার করুন ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For performance reasons, some actions in the database are delayed, and are managed by the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]].&lt;/span&gt;
এই কাজগুলি ডাটাবেসে সঞ্চিত থাকে এবং এটি সম্পাদন করা উচিত এমন ক্রিয়া সম্পর্কিত তথ্যসহ পরামিতি ধারণ করে।
উইকিকে আপগ্রেড করার আগে সেই মুলতুবি থাকা জবগুলি চালনার জন্য দৃড়ভাবে সুপারিশ করা হয়েছে, যদি নতুন সংস্করণে সেই জবের প্যারামিটারের স্পেসিফিকেশন পরিবর্তিত হয় তবে তাদের ব্যর্থতা এড়াতে।
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} to run all pending jobs and clear the queue before performing the upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== বিদ্যমান ফাইল এবং ডাটাবেস ব্যাক আপ করুন ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:''Full instructions: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
While the upgrade scripts are well-maintained and robust, things could still go awry. Before proceeding to update the database schema, '''make a full [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|backup]]''' of the wiki, including both the database and the files:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* the wiki's content, from the database, (make sure you get the character set specified correctly, first check LocalSettings.php). It may be a good idea to create an XML dump in addition to the SQL database dump.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MySQL, both SQL dump and XML dump are for use with the &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL, database dump for use with &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; command:&lt;/span&gt;
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SQLite, you use a MediaWiki script for making a backup:&lt;/span&gt;
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* images and other media files (the contents of the &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; directory, custom logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* configuration files, e.g. &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (if present)
&lt;/div&gt;
* মিডিয়াউইকির প্রোগ্রাম ফাইলগুলি, সমস্ত স্কিন এবং এক্সটেনশানসহ, বিশেষত যদি আপনি সেগুলি পরিবর্তন করেন।

== নতুন ফাইলগুলি আনপ্যাক করুন ==

=== একটি টার্বল প্যাকেজ ব্যবহার করে ===

আপনি এফটিপি বা কমান্ড লাইন ব্যবহার করে নতুন ফাইলগুলি স্থাপন করতে পারেন। কমান্ড লাইনটি ব্যবহার করুন, যদি আপনার এটিতে অ্যাক্সেস থাকে! কমান্ড লাইনটি ব্যবহার করা এফটিপির মাধ্যমে হাজার হাজার ফাইলের মধ্যে একটিতে আপলোড করার চেয়ে অনেক দ্রুত হবে।

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should put the decompressed tarball in a new and empty folder on your server. If you instead extract the new version directly on top of your old version, rather than in a new directory, you should follow the instructions described in [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]]: otherwise, if you've made any customizations you may erase them in a way that leaves you with no reference to re-apply them from.&lt;/span&gt; আপনার মিডিয়াউইকির লাইভ কপির উপরে একটি টারবাল উত্তোলন মিডিয়াউইকির পুরানো সংস্করণ থেকে ফাইলগুলি পিছনে ফেলে রাখতে পারে যা আপগ্রেড কোডটিতে হস্তক্ষেপ করতে পারে। আপনাকে নতুন ডিরেক্টরিতে নতুন ফাইলগুলি আনপ্যাক করার পরামর্শ দেওয়া হচ্ছে এবং তারপরে নতুন ডিরেক্টরিতে কাস্টমাইজেশন প্রয়োগ করে (LocalSettings.php, চিত্র ফোল্ডার, এক্সটেনশনগুলি এবং কাস্টম স্কিনের মতো অন্যান্য কাস্টমাইজেশন পুনরুদ্ধার করা)}}

==== এফটিপি বা গ্রাফিকাল ====

আপনি যদি আপনার সার্ভারের কমান্ড লাইনটি অ্যাক্সেস করতে না পারেন, তবে আপনার স্থানীয় কম্পিউটারে মিডিয়াউইকি টারবল ডাউনলোড করুন এবং আপনার স্থানীয় পিসিতে টারবলটি বের করতে [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] ব্যবহার করুন।

আপনি স্থানীয়ভাবে ফাইলগুলি সরিয়ে নেওয়ার পরে সার্ভারে ডিরেক্টরি এবং ফাইলগুলি আপলোড করতে আপনার প্রিয় এফটিপি ক্লায়েন্ট সফ্টওয়্যার ব্যবহার করুন।

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
=== কমান্ড লাইন ===
আপনার যদি আপনার বর্তমান ব্যবহারকারীর অধীনে উইকি ইনস্টল ডিরেক্টরিগুলিতে সম্পূর্ণ লেখার অনুমতি না পান তবে আপনাকে &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; হিসাবে কমান্ডটি চালানোর প্রয়োজন হতে পারে।
সাধারণত টারবল প্যাকেজটি আনার সময় নতুন উইকি সংস্করণের জন্য একটি নতুন ডিরেক্টরি তৈরি করা হবে এবং আপনাকে আপনার পুরানো ইনস্টলেশন ডিরেক্টরি থেকে পুরনো কনফিগারেশন ফাইল এবং চিত্র ডিরেক্টরি কপি করতে হবে:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===অন্যান্য ফাইলগুলি===

টার্বলটি বের করার পরে, আপনাকে পুরানো ইনস্টলেশন ডিরেক্টরি থেকে নতুন ফাইলটিতে কিছু ফাইল এবং ফোল্ডার অনুলিপি করা বা সরিয়ে নেওয়া উচিত:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
* পুরানো ইনস্টলেশন ফাইল বা এক্সটেনশনে যে কোনও পরিবর্তন হয়েছে।
* যে কোনও .htaccess ফাইল (যদি আপনি অ্যাপাচি ব্যবহার করেন এবং আপনি সেগুলিতে কোনও নিয়ম সংজ্ঞায়িত করেন)।

একবার হয়ে গেলে, এই নতুন ফোল্ডারটি ওয়েব সার্ভারে প্রকাশিত ফোল্ডারটি তৈরি করুন বা পুরাতন ইনস্টলেশন ডিরেক্টরিটির নতুন নাম দিন এবং তারপরে পুরানো নামের সাথে মিলে নতুন নামটি দিন।

=== গিট ব্যবহার করে ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

আপনার কম্পোজার বা উইকিমিডিয়া উইকি ফার্মের জন্য রক্ষণাবেক্ষণকৃত কোনও সংগ্রহ ব্যবহার করে কিছু বাহ্যিক পিএইচপি লাইব্রেরি ইনস্টল করতে হবে।
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

=== প্যাচ ব্যবহার করে ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
# আপনার Special:Version পরীক্ষা করুন এবং আপনার নতুন সংস্করণ নম্বরটি দেখতে হবে।

=== ফাইলগুলি যা ত্রুটির কারণ হতে পারে ===

আপনি যদি পুরানো ইনস্টলেশন ডিরেক্টরিটি প্যাক করে ফেলেছেন তবে কিছু পুরানো ফাইলগুলি নতুন সংস্করণে সমস্যা তৈরি করতে পারে।

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

== এক্সটেনশন আপগ্রেড করুন ==

মিডিয়াউইকির নতুন সংস্করণটির সাথে কাজ করার জন্য কয়েকটি এক্সটেনশন আপডেট করা হয়েছে। এই জাতীয় এক্সটেনশনের সর্বশেষতম সংস্করণে আপগ্রেড করতে ভুলবেন না। আপনার কাস্টম এক্সটেনশনে ম্যানুয়াল আপডেটগুলি করতে হতে পারে।

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

=== ত্বকের নিবন্ধকরণ ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== এক্সটেনশন নিবন্ধকরণ ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

পূর্বে আপনার &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; -এ এমন কিছু অন্তর্ভুক্ত থাকত:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

এটি রূপান্তর করা যেতে পারে:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

এক্সটেনশনগুলি নতুন এক্সটেনশন রেজিস্ট্রেশন সিস্টেমটি ব্যবহার করার জন্য অভিযোজিত হচ্ছে।
অভিযোজিত নয় এমন এক্সটেনশনগুলির সেগুলি ইনস্টল করার পুরানো উপায়টি ব্যবহার করা উচিত।
আরও তথ্যের জন্য এক্সটেনশনের পৃষ্ঠায় ইনস্টলেশন নির্দেশাবলী দেখুন।

=== অন্যান্য ভেরিয়েবল ===
কিছু ভেরিয়েবল অপ্রচলিত বা এমনকি অপসারণ করা যেতে পারে।
&lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; -এ সেগুলি রাখলে সাধারণত কোনও প্রভাব থাকে না।
নতুন সংস্করণগুলিতে নতুন ভেরিয়েবল যুক্ত করা যেতে পারে বা কিছু বিদ্যমান ভেরিয়েবলগুলি তাদের ধরণ পরিবর্তন করেছে।
আমরা সাধারণত তাদের জন্য বুদ্ধিমান ডিফল্ট ব্যবহার করার চেষ্টা করি এবং প্রকারের পরিবর্তনের ক্ষেত্রে পিছনে সামঞ্জস্যপূর্ণ হতে পারি।
যে কোনও ক্ষেত্রে, এই পরিবর্তনগুলি দেখতে রিলিজ নোটগুলি একবার দেখুন।

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
== আপডেট স্ক্রিপ্ট চালান ==
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
আপনি মিডিয়াউইকি ডাটাবেস দুটি উপায়ে আপগ্রেড করতে পারেন: হয় কমান্ড লাইন থেকে বা ওয়েব ব্রাউজার থেকে। আপনার সার্ভারে শেল অ্যাক্সেস থাকলে, কমান্ড লাইন থেকে আপগ্রেড করার প্রস্তাব দেওয়া হয়, যেহেতু এটি একটি সময়সীমা বা সংযোগ পুনরায় সেট করার মাধ্যমে আপগ্রেড প্রক্রিয়াটি ব্যাহত হওয়ার ঝুঁকি কমায়।

স্ক্রিপ্টটি মিডিয়াউইকির যে কোনও নিখোঁজ নির্ভরতা ডাউনলোড করার চেষ্টা করবে।

=== কমান্ড লাইন ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

একটি লিনাক্স সার্ভারে যদি আপনি ত্রুটি পান তবে মূল (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;) হিসাবে একই কমান্ডটি প্রয়োগ করার চেষ্টা করুন।
উইন্ডোজে সাধারণ ইনস্টলেশনগুলির জন্য দ্রষ্টব্য (উদাহরণস্বরূপ {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}} ব্যবহার করে):
প্রথমে নিশ্চিত হয়ে নিন যে আপনার ওয়েব সার্ভার (যেমন Apache) এবং আপনার ডাটাবেস (যেমন MySQL) চলছে কিনা।
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
স্কিমা আপগ্রেড সম্পূর্ণ হলে ফলাফল প্রাপ্ত কমান্ড প্রম্পট উইন্ডোটি অটোক্লোজ হতে পারে।

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

মিডিয়াউইকি বিদ্যমান স্কিমাটি পরিদর্শন করবে এবং এটি প্রয়োজনীয়ভাবে সারণী এবং কলামগুলি যুক্ত করে নতুন কোডের সাথে কাজ করতে আপডেট করবে।

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

এটি কোনও ত্রুটিযুক্ত ত্বক বা এক্সটেনশনের কারণে ঘটতে পারে।

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

স্ক্রিপ্টগুলি অনুরূপ কোনও বার্তার সাথে বাতিল হয়ে যায়:

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

কমান্ড লাইন থেকে update.php চালানো ব্যক্তিরা নিম্নলিখিত ত্রুটির মুখোমুখি হতে পারেন:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

update.php php4 থেকে চালানো হলে এই ত্রুটি ঘটে।

যে সমস্ত ব্যক্তিরা তাদের সাইট php4 এবং php5 সরবরাহকারীদের দ্বারা হোস্ট করা আছে তাদের নিম্নলিখিত পদক্ষেপ নেওয়া উচিত:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

নিচে একটি উদাহরণ দেওয়া হল:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

আপনি ত্রুটির সম্মুখীন হতে পারেন:
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
# নিম্নলিখিত হিসাবে একটি লাইন যুক্ত করুন:

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

# পুনরায় চালান &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
===ওয়েব ব্রাউজার===
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
: ''আরো দেখুন {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

# সর্বদা ডাটাবেস [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|ব্যাক আপ]] করবেন রক্ষণাবেক্ষণ সম্পাদনের আগে।
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
# আপনার ভাষা নির্বাচন করুন এবং চালিয়ে যান ক্লিক করুন।
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=আপনি যদি এই পদ্ধতিটি ব্যবহার করেন, আপগ্রেড স্ক্রিপ্ট চালানোর পরে '''.htaccess ফাইলের নাম ফিরে''' নিশ্চিত করে নিন! অন্যথায় সংক্ষিপ্ত ইউআরএল এবং সম্ভবত অন্যান্য জিনিসগুলি ভেঙে যাবে!}}

== আপডেট পরীক্ষা করুন ==

আপগ্রেড শেষ হয়ে গেলে, উইকিতে ব্রাউজ করুন এবং নিম্নলিখিত অপারেশনগুলি প্রত্যাশা অনুযায়ী কাজ করে কিনা তা দেখুন:

* পৃষ্ঠাগুলি দেখা
* পৃষ্ঠাগুলি সম্পাদনা করা
* একটি ফাইল আপলোড করা
* [[Special:Version]] -এ যান এবং দেখানো সংস্করণটি সঠিক এবং এক্সটেনশন উপস্থিত রয়েছে তা পরীক্ষা করুন।

== পুরানো ইনস্টলেশন থেকে বামফুটগুলি সরান ==
আপনি যদি সার্ভারের অন্য ফোল্ডারে আপনার পূর্ববর্তী ইনস্টলেশনটি অনুলিপি করেন তবে এটি সরিয়ে ফেলার বিষয়ে নিশ্চিত হন বা এটি ওয়েব থেকে সম্পূর্ণ অ্যাক্সেসযোগ্য করে তুলুন।
পুরানো ইনস্টলেশনগুলি ওয়েব থেকে অ্যাক্সেসযোগ্য না রাখা খুব গুরুত্বপূর্ণ, যেহেতু এটি আপগ্রেড করার উদ্দেশ্যটিকে পুরোপুরি পরাভূত করে এবং আপনার সার্ভারকে আক্রমণে উন্মুক্ত করে দেয়।

== সচরাচর জিজ্ঞাসিত প্রশ্ন ==
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
===আপগ্রেড করা কতটা কঠিন?===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

গৌণ আপগ্রেডগুলি, একই প্রধান সংস্করণের মধ্যে, যেমন {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 থেকে {{MW legacy release number}}, কোনও স্কিমা পরিবর্তন করার প্রয়োজন নেই।
আপনি কেবল ফাইলগুলি আপডেট করতে পারেন। ডাটাবেসটির কোনও আপডেটের প্রয়োজন নেই, তাই আপডেটের স্ক্রিপ্টটি চালানোর প্রয়োজন নেই।

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

আপনি যদি ত্বকটি পরিবর্তন করে থাকেন বা একটি কাস্টম ত্বক ব্যবহার করেন তবে আপনাকে খুব সম্ভবত মিডিয়াউইকের নতুন সংস্করণ দিয়ে আবার কাজ করার জন্য এটি সামঞ্জস্য করতে হবে।

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
=== আমি কীভাবে সত্যিকারের খুব পুরানো সংস্করণ থেকে আপগ্রেড করব? এক ধাপে, নাকি বেশ কয়েকটি পদক্ষেপে? ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;যদি আপনি '''মিডিয়াউইকি 1.5 বা নতুন''' থেকে আপগ্রেড করেন তবে আপনি আপনার পুরানো সংস্করণ থেকে সর্বশেষ স্থিতিশীল সংস্করণে এক ধাপে আপগ্রেড করতে পারেন।&lt;/span&gt;
বেশিরভাগ প্রতিবেদনগুলির পাশাপাশি অটোমেটেড পরীক্ষাগুলি ইঙ্গিত দেয় যে এটি এক ধাপে করা ঠিক কাজ করে।
আপনার যদি এটি বিশ্বাস করতে সমস্যা হয় তবে [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|এই মেইলিং তালিকা পোস্ট]] পড়ুন।
তবে, দয়া করে নোট করুন যে আপনি যখন পুরানো সংস্করণগুলি থেকে আপডেট করেন, PHP ত্রুটিগুলির মুখোমুখি হওয়ার সম্ভাবনাগুলি আপনি নতুন সংস্করণে সরাসরি আগের সংস্করণ থেকে আপগ্রেড করার চেয়ে বড় হয়ে যায়।
আপনি এই ত্রুটিগুলি যেভাবেই পেয়েছেন, যদি আপনি সংস্করণগুলি এড়িয়ে না থাকেন তবে ত্রুটিগুলি প্রতিটি পৃথক আপডেটের সাথে যুক্ত হত।
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;কেবলমাত্র আপনি - যখন আপনি সংস্করণগুলি এড়িয়ে গেছেন - সেগুলি একই সাথে পাবেন।&lt;/span&gt;
এটি আপগ্রেডকে আরও কঠিন করে তুলবে, তবে ভুলে যাবেন না যে আপনি মধ্যবর্তী সংস্করণগুলিতে আপডেট করতে সমস্যা হয়নি, যা আপনি এড়িয়ে গেছেন!

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

===আমার কি প্রথমে ব্যাক আপ নেওয়া উচিত?===

সংক্ষিপ্ত উত্তর: হ্যাঁ।

দীর্ঘ উত্তর: এটি এর উপর নির্ভর করে ক) আপনি আপনার ডেটাটিকে কতটা মূল্য দেন, খ) একটি ব্যাকআপ তৈরি করা কতটা কঠিন এবং গ) আপনি MySQL রক্ষণাবেক্ষণ এবং প্রশাসনের সাথে কতটা আত্মবিশ্বাসী। 

একটি আপগ্রেড ব্যর্থতা দুটি সংস্করণের মধ্যে আপনার ডেটাবেসকে অসঙ্গতিপূর্ণ অবস্থায় ফেলে রাখতে পারে।
আপনার ডাটাবেসটিকে আংশিক আপগ্রেড রেখে আপগ্রেড করার সময় কোনও PHP বা MySQL ত্রুটি ঘটতে পারে।
এ জাতীয় পরিস্থিতিতে অনেকটা ম্যানুয়াল কাজ করে কোনওভাবে এই সমস্যাটি সমাধান করা সম্ভব।
যাই হোক, update.php চালু হওয়ার আগে থেকেই কেবল একটি ডাটাবেস ব্যাকআপ রাখা এবং এটি চালিয়ে যাওয়া ''সহজতর উপায়'' হয়ে উঠবে।
অন্যথায় আপনার কাছে ঘন্টার পর ঘন্টার - অযথা - কাজ থাকতে পারে।

পুনরুদ্ধার প্রায়শই জটিল।
সমর্থন ফোরামগুলিতে স্বেচ্ছাসেবীরা আপনি যদি ব্যাকআপ তৈরি করতে অবহেলা করেন এবং তারপরে আপগ্রেড-সম্পর্কিত দুর্নীতি থেকে পুনরুদ্ধার করতে সাহায্যের প্রয়োজন হয় তবে তা মুগ্ধ হওয়ার সম্ভাবনা নেই।
আরও ভাল ফলাফল হল যদি আপনি আপনার ব্যাকআপটিতে ফিরে যেতে পারেন, এবং তারপরে [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|সম্পর্কিত মিডিয়াউইকি প্রকল্পের বিরুদ্ধে ত্রুটিটি প্রতিবেদন করুন]] আপগ্রেড প্রক্রিয়াতে যা দুর্নীতির কারণ হয়েছিল।

===আমি কি আমার LocalSettings.php রাখতে পারি?===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

===আমার উইকি আপগ্রেড করার সময় কী অনলাইন থাকতে পারে?===

সাধারণত হ্যাঁ, তবে গিট সাময়িকভাবে (কয়েক সেকেন্ডের জন্য) এটি ভেঙে দিতে পারে।

আপনি যদি মিডিয়াউইকির ক্ষুদ্র প্রকাশের মধ্যে আপগ্রেড করছেন তবে আপনাকে যা করতে হবে তা হল উত্স ফাইলগুলি আপডেট করা।

দ্রষ্টব্য: নিম্নলিখিতটি অনুমান করে আপনার কমান্ড লাইনের অ্যাক্সেস রয়েছে। আপনি যদি মিডিয়াউইকির প্রধান প্রকাশের মধ্যে আপগ্রেড করছেন তবে পছন্দসই পদ্ধতিটি নীচে রয়েছে:

# মিডিয়াউইকির নতুন সংস্করণটিকে একটি নতুন ডিরেক্টরিতে আনপ্যাক করুন
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
# নতুন সংস্করণটির জন্য প্রকাশিত নোটগুলিতে দেখুন LocalSettings.php-তে কোনও পরিবর্তন করা দরকার কিনা।
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
# নতুন ডিরেক্টরিতে [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|আপডেট স্ক্রিপ্ট]] বা ওয়েব আপডেটার চালান।
# পুরানো ডিরেক্টরি থেকে নতুন ডিরেক্টরিতে চিত্র উপ-ডিরেক্টরি থেকে চিত্রগুলি অনুলিপি করুন।
# পুরানো ডিরেক্টরি এবং নতুন ডিরেক্টরি অদলবদল করুন।

=== কেন আপগ্রেড করবেন? ===
:''নতুন রিলিজ সম্পর্কে অবহিত হওয়ার জন্য সাবস্ক্রাইব করুন [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]]-এ।''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
== আরো দেখুন ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - আপনার যদি সফল ব্যাকআপ না থাকে
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>7ico1g8dtmcoqwc61oklyu9atljmy1m</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>OOUI/Using OOUI in MediaWiki/fr</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1264316</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403315</id>
      <parentid>5076652</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:21:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11371" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{OOUI}}
'''{{ll|OOUI}}''' est inclus dans le noyau de MediaWiki, disponible pour être utilisé par le code PHP et JavaScript.

== PHP ==
=== Avant de commencer ===
To use OOUI elements, the OOUI PHP library has to be loaded and the necessary styles have to be set up per the correct skin ([[phab:T98029#1475549|boring details]]).

The most convenient way to do this is:

==== Pages spéciales ====
Whenever you have access to an [[Manual:OutputPage.php|OutputPage]] instance, call its &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; method.
It is usually available as &lt;code&gt;$this-&gt;getOutput()&lt;/code&gt; in most contexts, such as on special pages, or as &lt;code&gt;$out&lt;/code&gt; in hook signatures.

Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
function execute( $param ) {
	$out = $this-&gt;getOutput();
	$out-&gt;enableOOUI();
	// … More code here …
	$group = new OOUI\ButtonGroupWidget( [
		// … More widgets here …
	] );
	$out-&gt;addHTML( $group );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Another example, useful when you have no easy access to an OutputPage instance:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
RequestContext::getMain()-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;enableOOUI();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Note that the method &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; (implemented by [[Manual:OutputPage.php|class &lt;code&gt;OutputPage&lt;/code&gt;]]) ensures that the proper theme and directionality is configured, and that the page loads the OOUI styles.
The OOUI widgets are namespaced, so they must be prefixed with &lt;code&gt;OOUI\&lt;/code&gt; or imported.
Stringifying the widgets converts them to HTML, so you can add widgets to the page using &lt;code&gt;$out-&gt;addHTML()&lt;/code&gt;.
Also note that in some cases, just enabling OOUI is not enough.
For example, if you need a certain icon added, you need to explicitly add the related icon pack.
For example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public function load() {
    $this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;enableOOUI();
    $this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addModuleStyles( [ 'oojs-ui.styles.icons-moderation' ] );
    return ( new OOUI\IconWidget(
		[
			'icon' =&gt; 'block',
			'classes' =&gt; [ 'flaggedrevs-icon' ],
			'title' =&gt; 'Block',
		]
	) )-&gt;toString();
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


==== Fonctions et balises d'analyseur, [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:ContentHandler|modèles de contenu]] ====
If you have access to a ParserOutput instance (usually as &lt;code&gt;$parser-&gt;getOutput()&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;$pout&lt;/code&gt;), call its &lt;code&gt;setEnableOOUI( true )&lt;/code&gt; method, and also &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::setupOOUI()&lt;/code&gt;.

If you have access to a Parser instance, instead just call its &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; method.

Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function myTagHook( $content, array $attributes, Parser $parser, PPFrame $frame ) {
	$parser-&gt;enableOOUI();
	// … More code here …
	$group = new OOUI\ButtonGroupWidget( [
		// … More widgets here …
	] );
	return [ $group-&gt;toString(), 'markerType' =&gt; 'nowiki' ];
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== Sinon ====
See [[OOUI/PHP examples#Before you start]].
(Instead of {{tag|link|open}} tags use the ResourceLoader style modules described below.)

=== Utilisation des widgets OOUI ===
Construct a widget:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn = new OOUI\ButtonWidget( [
    'label' =&gt; 'Click me!',
    'href' =&gt; 'https://example.com',
] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Its properties can be changed using getter/setter methods:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn-&gt;setLabel( 'Still click me!' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;When you're done creating the widget, you can treat it like a string to display it.
(You can explicitly convert to string by calling the &lt;code&gt;toString()&lt;/code&gt; method.)&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addHTML( &quot;&lt;div&gt;$btn&lt;/div&gt;&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== Liste des éléments disponibles ====
See also:

* Automatically updated list: https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/php/annotated.html
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/demos/demos.php?page=widgets&amp;theme=wikimediaui&amp;direction=ltr Live demo with examples] ([[phab:diffusion/GOJU/browse/master/demos/pages/widgets.php|demo page in master branch]])

As of OOUI v0.34.0, released 2019-09-04, these elements available in PHP (or in [[OOUI/Using OOUI in MediaWiki#Using OOUI widgets 2|JS via &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt;, see below]]) are:

Widgets:

* ButtonWidget
* ButtonInputWidget
* ButtonGroupWidget
* CheckboxInputWidget
* CheckboxMultiselectInputWidget
* RadioInputWidget
* RadioSelectInputWidget
* TextInputWidget
* MultilineTextInputWidget
* NumberInputWidget
* SearchInputWidget
* DropdownInputWidget
* ComboBoxInputWidget
* LabelWidget
* IconWidget
* IndicatorWidget
* ProgressBarWidget
* SelectFileInputWidget
* SelectWidget
* TabSelectWidget
* TabOptionWidget

Layouts:

* ActionFieldLayout
* FieldLayout
* FieldsetLayout
* FormLayout
* HorizontalLayout
* IndexLayout
* MenuLayout
* PanelLayout
* TabPanelLayout
* StackLayout

==== Exemple ====
Large structures can be created and displayed in a single call:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addHTML( new OOUI\FormLayout( [
	'method' =&gt; 'POST',
	'action' =&gt; 'login.php',
	'items' =&gt; [
		new OOUI\FieldsetLayout( [
			'label' =&gt; 'Form layout',
			'items' =&gt; [
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\TextInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'username',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'User name',
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\TextInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'password',
						'type' =&gt; 'password',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'Password',
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\CheckboxInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'rememberme',
						'selected' =&gt; true,
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'Remember me',
						'align' =&gt; 'inline',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\ButtonInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'login',
						'label' =&gt; 'Log in',
						'type' =&gt; 'submit',
						'flags' =&gt; [ 'primary', 'progressive' ],
						'icon' =&gt; 'check',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; null,
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
			]
		] )
	]
] ) );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== {{ll|HTMLForm}}, FormSpecialPage ===

HTMLForm has OOUI support.
You can use the &lt;code&gt;ooui&lt;/code&gt; display format for [[HTMLForm]] forms to render them using OOUI.
This is usually more convenient, as HTMLForm provides functionality for validation and handling form submission.
See [[HTMLForm#Display formats]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$htmlForm = HTMLForm::factory( 'ooui', $formDescriptor, $this-&gt;getContext() );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

On FormSpecialPage, use the &lt;code&gt;getDisplayFormat()&lt;/code&gt; method:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
protected function getDisplayFormat() {
	return 'ooui';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Examples:

* https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/specials/SpecialMIMESearch.php ([[Special:MIMESearch]])
* https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/specials/SpecialResetTokens.php ([[Special:ResetTokens]])

Widgets used in the form will be automatically [[#Infusion|infused (see below)]] if the JS widget offers additional capabilities over the PHP one.

== JavaScript ==
=== Utilisation des widgets OOUI ===
Depending on which of the features you're going to use, you should list one or more of the following modules as dependencies of your modules that use OOUI:

* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt;: OOUI's core JavaScript library. Contains the basic [[OOUI/Widgets|widgets]] and [[OOUI/Layouts|layouts]] that are [[#List of available elements|also available in PHP (see exact list above)]] and the ability to [[#Infusion|infuse]] them.
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-widgets&lt;/code&gt;: Additional [[OOUI/Widgets|widgets]] and [[OOUI/Layouts|layouts]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-toolbars&lt;/code&gt;: [[OOUI/Toolbars|Toolbar and tools]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-windows&lt;/code&gt;: [[OOUI/Windows|Windows and dialogs]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui.styles.icons-*&lt;/code&gt;: Specific icon styles depending on what icons you may want to use, e.g. &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui.styles.icons-interactions&lt;/code&gt; for check icon. Group names can be found in [https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/demos/?page=icons&amp;theme=wikimediaui&amp;direction=ltr&amp;platform=desktop demo page] or in [https://github.com/wikimedia/flask-oojsui/tree/master/flask_oojsui/static/oojs-ui code].  

For example ([[extension.json]]):

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;ResourceModules&quot;: {
		&quot;ext.myExtension&quot;: {
			&quot;dependencies&quot;: [
				&quot;oojs-ui-core&quot;,
				&quot;oojs-ui-windows&quot;
			],
			&quot;scripts&quot;: [
				...
			]
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Code in modules depending on OOUI can use the elements, as described in this OOUI documentation.
[[OOUI/Creating interfaces programmatically|Start reading it here]].

=== Infusion ===
To provide [[:en:Progressive_enhancement|progressive enhancement]] and avoid code duplication between PHP and JS, OOUI PHP widgets present on a page can be ''infused'' into OOUI widgets.

Assuming that a PHP widget has been made infusable when it was created:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn = new OOUI\ButtonWidget( [
    'infusable' =&gt; true,
    'id' =&gt; 'my-button',
    'label' =&gt; 'Click me!',
    'href' =&gt; 'https://example.com',
] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

It can be infused from JavaScript code:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var button = OO.ui.infuse( $( '#my-button' ) );
// Or, for self-documenting code:
var button = OO.ui.ButtonWidget.static.infuse( $( '#my-button' ) );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;The widget can now be modified from JavaScript code:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
button
	.setLabel( 'Really click me!' )
	.on( 'click', function () {
		alert( 'I was clicked!' );
	} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Gadgets ===
OOUI can be used in on-wiki gadgets or user scripts.
As above, you just need to ensure the &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt; module (or a different one, as described above) is loaded before your code runs.

For gadgets, you should add an entry in the &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; field of gadget description.
See [[Extension:Gadgets#Options|Gadgets' documentation]] for instructions and examples.

For user scripts, wrap your code in a &lt;code&gt;mw.loader.using( … )&lt;/code&gt; call, as always when loading modules.
See [[ResourceLoader/Modules#mw.loader.using|ResourceLoader documentation]] for instructions.
Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.using( 'oojs-ui-core' ).done( function () {
	$( function () {
		var button = new OO.ui.ButtonWidget( {
			label: 'Click me!'
		} );
		button.on( 'click', function () {
			alert( 'You clicked the button!' );
		} );
		$( '#mw-content-text' ).append( button.$element );
	} );
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Widgets OOUI spécifiques à MediaWiki ==
Several MediaWiki-specific OOUI widgets are available under the &lt;code&gt;mw.widgets&lt;/code&gt; (JavaScript) or &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki\Widget&lt;/code&gt; (PHP) namespace, implementing interface elements common in MediaWiki.

TODO Write me.

* [[Manual:TitleInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:UserInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:SearchInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:NamespaceInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:DateInputWidget]] (example: [[gerrit:226647]])
* [[Manual:DateTimeInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:CategorySelector]]

== Utilisation de thèmes ==
OOUI comes with two themes, and every widget you create will use the theme defined by the current skin using &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#SkinOOUIThemes|SkinOOUIThemes}}&lt;/code&gt; in extension.json.
Custom themes can also be provided by the skin.
See [[OOUI/Themes]] for details.

{{Feedback/oojsui}}

[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>90c582swh5w6r8fwfl1a5xba7b5n25u</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/sv</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1268220</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401814</id>
      <parentid>5184896</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3000" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
Den här sidan beskriver de kanaler på sociala medier som används för att sprida information som är användbar för Wikimedias teknikgemenskap och förklarar hur man använder kanalerna.

== Översikt ==
Sociala medier är användbara för att sprida nyheter och nå ut till potentiella användare och bidragsgivare.
Sociala medier kan också vara väldigt krävande och tidsödande.
Oansvarigt bruk kan splittra gemenskaper, och driva bort fritt innehåll och offentliga kontakter till miljöer i sociala medieplattformar som ofta är stänga och kommersiellt drivna.

== Kanaler på sociala medier ==

Det finns flera konton som ofta används för att dela nyheter som Wikimedias teknologi och MediaWikis gemenskap.

=== MediaWiki ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

=== Wikimedias teknologi ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

=== Nuvarande underhållare ===
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

== Våra regler ==
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

Observera att vi anser det viktigt att operera konservativt på sociala medier och strävar efter att vara så neutrala som möjligt.

== Skriva på Twitter och Facebook ==

Har du några nyheter eller ett tillkännagivande du skulle vilja att vi publicerar på Wikimediateknologis Twitter och/eller Facebook?
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>41d7d707uk30g6nwxt6lmyfiq4rowxj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Extension registration/tr</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1271391</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402515</id>
      <parentid>5375690</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26287" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
'''Uzantı kayıtı''', MediaWiki'nin [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|uzantılar]] ve [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|görünümler]] yüklemek için kullandığı mekanizmadır.
Yapılandırma verilerini &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; veya &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; adlı bir dosyaya uzantınızın veya dış görünümünüzün kök dizinine koyarsınız ve MediaWiki bunu uzantıları ve görünümleri kaydetmek için kullanır.

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
== Site hizmetlileri için geçiş ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Before MediaWiki 1.25, configuration for extensions and skins was done in a PHP file using the extension's or skin's name, for example &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This must be done before you load any extensions or skins from non-standard directory locations:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you keep your extensions in a location different from &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}}'', to specify the directory in which to find the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Looks in $wgExtensionDirectory for /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your skins are not in &lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override the poorly named {{wg|StyleDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of &lt;code&gt;wfLoadSkin()&lt;/code&gt;'', to specify the directory in which to find the skin.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Looks in $wgStyleDirectory for both /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json and /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Uzantı geliştiricileri için geçiş ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since MW 1.30, namespace IDs defined in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; can be overwritten locally, by defining the respective constant in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; before loading the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consider for instance the following namespace declaration in a &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would per default cause the constant NS_FOO to be defined to have the value 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, this can be overwritten by defining the respective constant in LocalSettings.php:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would cause the &quot;Foo&quot; namespace to be registered with the ID 6688 instead of 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When overriding namespace IDs, don't forget that all talk namespaces must have odd IDs, and the ID of the talk namespace must always be the subject namespace's ID plus one.&lt;/span&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also the [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ extension registration wall of sadness (now superpowers)].&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; helps you migrating from PHP entry points to a JSON metadata file.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension supports older versions of MediaWiki, you should keep your PHP entry point &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; until you drop support for those older versions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sample command lines:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to uninstall your extension from &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; if you receive errors that constants or functions cannot be redefined.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should replace your PHP entry point file (FooBar.php) with something like the following happens to not break wikis during the upgrade process.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Or skins
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Belgelerin saklanması ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PHP entry points usually have some documentation of configuration settings that is useful and shouldn't be lost.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately JSON doesn't support comments. It is recommended that you transfer configuration documentation to a &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; file in the extension's repository.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also document configuration on-wiki in your Extension:''MyExtension'' page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to include some documentation directly in the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration ignores any key in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; starting with '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' in the top-level structure, so you can put comments in those parts of the JSON file. For example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Version 1 of the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; format also allowed &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; in &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; section, but this is no longer recommended or supported in version 2. &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; field of the config variable should be used instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This should only be used for brief notes and comments.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Özellikler ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are loading a large number of extensions, extension registration will provide a performance boost as long as you have [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (or APCu) installed. Extensions that are loaded together with &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (with plural -s) will be cached together.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Öznitellikler ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A recurring problem is how to &quot;register&quot; something with another extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usually this meant that you had to load one extension before another.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, VisualEditor has a &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt; which allows extensions to add their modules.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, in VisualEditor's entry point it has:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if any extension appends to the array before VisualEditor is loaded, VE will wipe out its entry in this array.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some extensions depended upon a specific load order, others hacked around this with {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration solves this problem with &quot;attributes&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the Math extension, its &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; would have something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the attributes need to be defined in the separate section &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; node needs to be an object with the extension name as key and an object of attribute/value pairs as the value. Be aware that the key in the subobject must not contain the extension name!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When VisualEditor wants to access this attribute it uses:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Gereksinimler (bağımlılıklar) ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration has a &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; section, which acts similar to [[Composer]]'s &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; section.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It allows an extension developer to specify several requirements for the extension, such as a specific MediaWiki version (or greater/less than) or another extension/skin.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to add a dependency on a MediaWiki version that is greater than 1.26.0, you can add the following code to &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The key of the &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; object is the name of the dependency (prior to MediaWiki 1.29.0 only &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; was supported), the value is a valid version constraint (the format has to match the one [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md used by composer]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In MediaWiki 1.29.0 and above you can also add dependencies on skins and other extensions like so:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The extensions and skins specified here must also use the extension registrations system described on this page for this to work.
* The string added to specify the extension or skin must be identical to the string specified in the &quot;name&quot; field of the respective &quot;extension.json&quot; or &quot;skin.json&quot; file.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For extensions using Wikimedia [[Special:MyLanguage/Continuous integration|continuous integration]], dependencies also need to be added to {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}&lt;/span&gt;
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Bir uzantının gerçekten ihtiyaç duyulmadan yüklenip yüklenmediğini kontrol edin ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many extensions may provide features that work only if another extension is loaded too, without really needing this feature for the core extension function to work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To implement a standardized way of checking, if an extension is loaded or not (without the need of extra work in an extension that is a soft-dependency in another one), extension registration can be used. It implements an &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns a simple boolean, if the extension is loaded or not (the extension needs to be loaded with extension registration for this to work). Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since [[MediaWiki 1.32]] it's also possible to check if an extension is loaded and satisfies a given composer version constraint:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you would like to check if a specific version of an extension is loaded in earlier versions of MediaWiki, information like that can be extracted with the &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns credit information for all loaded extensions. Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Alternatively, if the extension B defines a special constant meant for this purpose during loading, it is possible to check, if it is defined:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A more brittle way, that should be avoided is to check if a specific class of extension B exists or not, e.g. using this code:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This might break if the extension exists in the file system but is not loaded, e.g. if composer was used for autoloading.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the class was renamed or ceases to exist (e.g. because it is not package public) this will also break.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In general it is preferred to share code via composer components instead of extensions. If the classes of an extension only need to exist, but the extension does not need to be configured nor loaded, for what you want to do, that is a strong indicator that that code should be split off into a composer component you should depend on instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Yapılandırmalar (Uzantı/görünüm ayarlarınız) ===
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; assumes that your config settings start with a &quot;wg&quot; prefix.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If that's not the case, you can override the prefix by using a special key:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
That would use a prefix of &quot;eg&quot;, and set the global variable &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; to true.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the configuration section of extension registration provides a lot more features and allows you to describe your configuration options with much more detail. Instead of having a single key -&gt; value store for your configuration options, you can also add the following information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The general structure of the &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; changes slightly to the following, more object-oriented version:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== Değer ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the configuration moved to this place.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the only required key for a configuration object.&lt;/span&gt;

==== Yol ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The boolean value of the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; key identifies, if the value of the configuration option should be interpreted as a filesystem path, relative to the extension directory root.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g., if the value of the configuration is &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; and the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; is true, the actual value will be &lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

==== Açıklama ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; key for a configuration option can hold a non-localized string, which can be used to explain the configuration option to other developers or the users (system administrators) of your extension.&lt;/span&gt;
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the description key is usually not exposed to the frontend of the wiki, however, take a look to the outlook for more information how this feature could be used in the future!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There's also the possibility to add a message key of MediaWiki's internal localisation system as a description (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;), which, in the future, will be used to expose the description in the frontend of the MediaWiki installation.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== herkese açık / özel ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option is a boolean, which defaults to false, which means, that the configuration option and the value is marked as &quot;private&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This value is not used anywhere at the moment, take a look to the outlook to find out more about this option.&lt;/span&gt;

==== Görünüm ====
{{tracked|T155155}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The mentioned changes above are also preparation steps for an improved configuration management in MediaWiki. The above changes allow us to, e.g., expose the configuration options of extensions in the MediaWiki UI. For this, the localised description message (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) and the indication, if the configuration option should be exposed or not (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) is needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Birim testleri otomatik keşif ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki allows any extension to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|register phpunit tests]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without extension registration, you would need to register a hook handler for the {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}} hook, which would look something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(as described on the manual page). However, this code looks the same for a lot of extensions, so you could call it unnecessary code duplication.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension uses extension registration and your phpunit tests are located in the &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt; subdirectory of your extension, the phpunit wrapper of MediaWiki will autodiscover the unit tests with the help of extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Therefore, you don't need to register the hook anymore and you don't need to specify, that your unit tests are saved in the default directory.&lt;/span&gt;

== Kayıtı özelleştirme ==
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

== Ayrıca composer.json ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If an extension or skin has library dependencies, it may have a &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well, see {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Use the &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt; field to make MediaWiki use Composer's autoloading when appropriate.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some metadata fields overlap between &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (discussed in {{task|T89456}}), including :
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

== Kod yönetimi ==
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

== Ayrıca bakınız ==
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Report bugs against the [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]] project.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Old versions of [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (prior to May 2015) and {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} describe the old approach of declaring extension information in PHP code and variables
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Known limitations&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Overview of architecture&lt;/span&gt;}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; is the schema for &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (and skin.json).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] about implementing extension registration&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[toollabs:extreg-wos|Extension registration wall of superpowers!]] — summary of which extensions are still to be converted.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{task|T98668}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking ticket for converting all extensions and skins on Git to use extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;

== Kaynakça ==
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7mc9st2e3nbu2zu7r2bq6z9xzdfptqw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Extension:Gadgets/21/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1272955</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403319</id>
      <parentid>4336140</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:22:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="43" xml:space="preserve">==== Using Gadget Definition Namespace ====</text>
      <sha1>7q5nu5bc9805cyupok38iq1omdzw6nw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Modern/de</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1273351</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403206</id>
      <parentid>5237984</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:48:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1468" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;!-- this is a comment to generate a page image at ?action=info. You can remove it safely. --&gt;
{{Skin
|status        = stable
|name          = Modern
|image         = Dantman-Skin-modern.png
|imagesize     = 350px
|license       = GPL-2.0+
|compatibility policy = rel
|download      = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin|Modern}}
|mediawiki     = 1.30+
|parameters    = 
|example       = https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?useskin=modern
|phabricator   = MediaWiki-skins-Modern
|vagrant-role  = modern
}}
'''Modern''' ist ein MediaWiki-Skin.
Es wurde im Jahr [[phab:rMWd9dc19768289cabcf452d8e2eb2a1defd25e9ab2|2008]] erstellt.
Es wurde von der [[Special:MyLanguage/Skin:MonoBook|MonoBook-Oberfläche]] abgeleitet.

In MediaWiki 1.23 und früher wurde der Skin Modern innerhalb des MediaWiki-Kernrepository gepflegt.
In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.24}} wurde es, zusammen mit den anderen Standard-Skins, vom Kern in ein eigenes Repository [[Special:MyLanguage/Separating skins from core MediaWiki|getrennt]].
Es blieb mit MediaWiki [[Special:MyLanguage/Bundled extensions|gebündelt]] bis zur Entfernung vom Bündel in Version 1.31.
Es war seit seiner ersten Version als Benutzeroption in den Wikimedia-Wikis verfügbar.
Sie war auch die Standard-Oberfläche für das [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Toolserver|Toolserver]]-Wiki bis es 2014 abgeschaltet wurde.

== Installation ==
{{SkinInstall
|registration=required
|vagrant=modern
}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|canasta=1|miraheze=1}}</text>
      <sha1>6wkmsdo6x8jb8i9cl3sfbhg3pq0ow4m</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Skin:Modern/15/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1274807</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403205</id>
      <parentid>4752399</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:48:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="38" xml:space="preserve">Es wurde im Jahr [[$1|2008]] erstellt.</text>
      <sha1>mdmrx8e9r2p27ompwm65ts54oypciq7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/hu</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1278073</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402775</id>
      <parentid>4356589</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:47:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="117" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Segítség a hivatkozássablonok használatához]] vagy [[$2|Segítség a citoid $3 gombjának használatához]]</text>
      <sha1>n1oeewvwe0t2m4i4a7w9e6dc26lqx2y</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/tr</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1287512</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402814</id>
      <parentid>5083456</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:16:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6611" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
Aşağıdaki terimler İnceleme İyileştirmeleri Düzenleme projesi (ERI) ile ilgilidir. 
Eğik olan terimler sözlüğün girdileridir.

== ERI bileşenleri ve özel terimler ==
;İnceleme Geliştirmeleri Düzenlemesi
:'''''ERI''' olarak bilinir''
:[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements|İnceleme İyileştirmelerini Düzenleme]] (ERI), mevcut düzenleme-inceleme süreçlerinin yeni editörler üzerindeki olumsuz etkilerini iyileştirirken aynı zamanda azaltmayı amaçlayan bir [[Collaboration|İşbirliği Ekibi]] projesidir.
;Düzenleme incelemesi için yeni filtreler
:''&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''[[Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes|Filtreler için Özel:Son Değişiklikler]]''' olarak da bilinir.&lt;/span&gt;''
:İnceleme İyileştirmeleri Düzenleme projesinin ilk ürün yayımlarından biri, genel olarak gözden geçirenlerin çabalarını daha iyi hedeflemelerine ve daha verimli olmalarına yardımcı olmak için tasarlanmış Son Değişiklikler özel sayfasında yapılan bir iyileştirmeler paketidir. İyileştirmeler ayrıca özellikle yeni katkıda bulunanlara fayda sağlama potansiyeline sahiptir. 
;ReviewStream
:[[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]], çeşitli düzenleme-inceleme araçları tarafından kullanılmak üzere tasarlanmış, makine tarafından okunabilir bir beslemedir. [[RCStream|RCStream]] gibi, MediaWiki vikilerinden son değişiklikleri yayımlayacak. ReviewStream, şu anda RCStream'de bulunan bilgilere düzenleme-inceleme sürecini iyileştirmek için tasarlanmış ek veriler ekler.
;Filtre arama çubuğu
:''Son Değişiklikler Sayfasındaki İyileştirmeler'' in bir parçası. Kullanıcılar, ''Açılır Filtre Paneli''&lt;nowiki /&gt;'nden (aşağıya bakın) filtre seçmek için tıklayarak veya adlarını yazarak son değişiklikleri filtreleme işlemine başlamak için Fitre Arama Çubuğu'nu tıklar.
;Açılır Filtre Paneli
:''Son Değişiklikler Sayfasındaki İyileştirmeler''&lt;nowiki/&gt;'in bir parçası. Filtre paneli, filtreleme seçeneklerinin bir listesini görüntüleyen bir açılır menüdür.
;Aktif Filtre Görüntüleme Alanı
:''Son Değişiklikler Sayfasındaki İyileştirmeler''&lt;nowiki/&gt;'in bir parçası. Aktif filtre görüntüleme alanı, kullanıcılara mevcut filtreleri ve vurgulama ayarları hakkında hızlı bir okuma sağlamak için tasarlanmıştır.
;Yeni gelenler
:ERI için tanımlanmış yeni bir kullanıcı sınıfı, çok yeni olan, ondan daha az düzenleme ve dört günlük faaliyete sahip kayıtlı editörleri belirtir. Bu tür editörlerin reddedilmeye karşı özellikle savunmasız olduğu [[Edit Review Improvements#Related documents|araştırmanın gösterdiği]] için oluşturuldu. Ayrıca ERI projelerinde bir filtrenin adı.
;Öğrenciler
:ERI için tanımlanan bir terim, ''&quot;Yeni gelenler&quot;'' den daha fazla gün etkinlik ve düzenlemeleri olan ancak ''Deneyimli Kullanıcılar'' dan daha az olan kayıtlı editörleri ifade eder. Ayrıca ERI projelerinde bir filtrenin adıdır. İngilizce Vikipedi'de bu kategori Autoconfirmed'e karşılık gelir.
;Deneyimli Kullanıcılar
:30 günden fazla etkinliği ve 500 düzenlemesi olan kayıtlı editörleri ifade eden ERI için tanımlanan bir terim. Ayrıca ERI projelerinde bir filtrenin adıdır. İngilizce Vikipedi'de bu kategori Extended Confirmed ile karşılık gelir.

== ERI ile ilgili genel ve viki kavramları ==
;Yapay Zeka
:ERI, yapay zeka (AI) programı [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES] tarafından desteklenen tahmine dayalı filtreler kullanır. Halk arasında, [[:en:Artificial intelligence|yapay zeka]] terimi, bir makine, insanların doğal dil işleme, problem çözme veya öğrenme gibi diğer insan zihinleriyle ilişkilendirdiği bilişsel işlevleri taklit ettiğinde kullanılır. AI, daha spesifik ''&quot;makine öğrenimi&quot;'' konseptiyle yakından ilişkili geniş bir terimdir.
;Makine Öğrenme
:[[:en:Machine learning|Makine öğrenimi]], bilgisayarlara özel olarak yapmak için programlanmamış görevleri öğrenme yeteneği kazandırmayı amaçlayan bir ''yapay zeka'' alt alanıdır. ERI, makine öğrenimi programı [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES] tarafından desteklenen tahmini filtreler kullanır.
;Doğruluk
:ERI araçları, çeşitli &quot;doğruluk&quot; düzeylerinde yapay zeka öngörücü filtreler sunar. Bu bağlamda kullanıldığında, doğruluk, filtrenin hedeflediği özelliği doğru şekilde tanımlayan, filtrenin döndürdüğü arama sonuçlarının yüzdesini ifade eder. Başka bir deyişle, filtre ne kadar doğru olursa, o kadar az yanlış pozitif üretir. (AI alanında, bunun için doğru teknik terim &quot;[[:en:Precision and recall|hassas]]&quot; şeklindedir.)
;Bssleme
:'''''Akış''' olarak da anılır''
:Bilgisayar beslemesi, kullanıcılara sık sık güncellenen içerik sağlamak için kullanılan bir veri biçimidir. ERI'de, [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]], vandalizm önleme ve düzenleme-inceleme programlarında yapılan son değişikliklerle ilgili verileri yayınlayan bir beslemedir.
;İyi niyet
:ERI projeleri, bir düzenlemenin iyi niyetle yapılıp yapılmadığını tahmin eden Kullanıcı Niyeti filtreleri sunar. Bu anlamda terim, bir kullanıcının niyetinin bikiye katkıda bulunmak mı yoksa ona zarar vermek mi olduğunu ifade eder. ERI'nin temel hedeflerinden biri, iyi niyetle katkıda bulunmaya çalışan ancak bunu başarılı bir şekilde yapacak beceri veya bilgiden yoksun olabilecek editörleri, özellikle ''yeni gelenleri'' bulup yardımcı olmalarını sağlamaktır. (ERI’nin Kullanıcı Amacı filtreleri, bir [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team|iyi niyet testi]] içeren makine öğrenimi programı ORES tarafından desteklenmektedir.)
;Hasar
:ERI projeleri, bir düzenlemenin vikiyi iyileştirip iyileştirmediğini veya ona zarar verip vermediğini öngören Katkı Kalitesi filtreleri sunar. Bu anlamda &quot;hasar&quot;, hem vandalizmi hem de kasıtsız biçimlendirme, stil, olgu vb. Hatalarını kapsayan genel bir terimdir. ERI'nin temel hedeflerinden biri, gözden geçirenlerin iyi niyetle katkıda bulunmaya çalışan, ancak beceri veya bilgi eksikliği onları zarara yol açan editörler, özellikle ''yeni gelenler'' bulup onlara yardım etmelerini sağlamaktır. (ERI'nin Kullanıcı Niyeti filtreleri, bir &quot;[[m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models|zarar verici]]&quot; testini içeren makine öğrenimi programı ORES tarafından desteklenmektedir.)

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7b1dnc2fu1c52wdorqxhhtys8a77h0u</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402827</id>
      <parentid>5402814</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:20:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6590" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
Aşağıdaki terimler İnceleme İyileştirmeleri Düzenleme projesi (ERI) ile ilgilidir. 
Eğik olan terimler sözlüğün girdileridir.

== ERI bileşenleri ve özel terimler ==
;İnceleme Geliştirmeleri Düzenlemesi
:'''''ERI''' olarak bilinir''
:[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements|İnceleme İyileştirmelerini Düzenleme]] (ERI), mevcut düzenleme-inceleme süreçlerinin yeni editörler üzerindeki olumsuz etkilerini iyileştirirken aynı zamanda azaltmayı amaçlayan bir [[Collaboration|İşbirliği Ekibi]] projesidir.
;Düzenleme incelemesi için yeni filtreler
:'''''[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes|Filtreler için Özel:Son Değişiklikler]]''' olarak da bilinir.''
:İnceleme İyileştirmeleri Düzenleme projesinin ilk ürün yayımlarından biri, genel olarak gözden geçirenlerin çabalarını daha iyi hedeflemelerine ve daha verimli olmalarına yardımcı olmak için tasarlanmış Son Değişiklikler özel sayfasında yapılan bir iyileştirmeler paketidir. İyileştirmeler ayrıca özellikle yeni katkıda bulunanlara fayda sağlama potansiyeline sahiptir. 
;ReviewStream
:[[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]], çeşitli düzenleme-inceleme araçları tarafından kullanılmak üzere tasarlanmış, makine tarafından okunabilir bir beslemedir. [[RCStream|RCStream]] gibi, MediaWiki vikilerinden son değişiklikleri yayımlayacak. ReviewStream, şu anda RCStream'de bulunan bilgilere düzenleme-inceleme sürecini iyileştirmek için tasarlanmış ek veriler ekler.
;Filtre arama çubuğu
:''Son Değişiklikler Sayfasındaki İyileştirmeler'' in bir parçası. Kullanıcılar, ''Açılır Filtre Paneli''&lt;nowiki /&gt;'nden (aşağıya bakın) filtre seçmek için tıklayarak veya adlarını yazarak son değişiklikleri filtreleme işlemine başlamak için Fitre Arama Çubuğu'nu tıklar.
;Açılır Filtre Paneli
:''Son Değişiklikler Sayfasındaki İyileştirmeler''&lt;nowiki/&gt;'in bir parçası. Filtre paneli, filtreleme seçeneklerinin bir listesini görüntüleyen bir açılır menüdür.
;Aktif Filtre Görüntüleme Alanı
:''Son Değişiklikler Sayfasındaki İyileştirmeler''&lt;nowiki/&gt;'in bir parçası. Aktif filtre görüntüleme alanı, kullanıcılara mevcut filtreleri ve vurgulama ayarları hakkında hızlı bir okuma sağlamak için tasarlanmıştır.
;Yeni gelenler
:ERI için tanımlanmış yeni bir kullanıcı sınıfı, çok yeni olan, ondan daha az düzenleme ve dört günlük faaliyete sahip kayıtlı editörleri belirtir. Bu tür editörlerin reddedilmeye karşı özellikle savunmasız olduğu [[Edit Review Improvements#Related documents|araştırmanın gösterdiği]] için oluşturuldu. Ayrıca ERI projelerinde bir filtrenin adı.
;Öğrenciler
:ERI için tanımlanan bir terim, ''&quot;Yeni gelenler&quot;'' den daha fazla gün etkinlik ve düzenlemeleri olan ancak ''Deneyimli Kullanıcılar'' dan daha az olan kayıtlı editörleri ifade eder. Ayrıca ERI projelerinde bir filtrenin adıdır. İngilizce Vikipedi'de bu kategori Autoconfirmed'e karşılık gelir.
;Deneyimli Kullanıcılar
:30 günden fazla etkinliği ve 500 düzenlemesi olan kayıtlı editörleri ifade eden ERI için tanımlanan bir terim. Ayrıca ERI projelerinde bir filtrenin adıdır. İngilizce Vikipedi'de bu kategori Extended Confirmed ile karşılık gelir.

== ERI ile ilgili genel ve viki kavramları ==
;Yapay Zeka
:ERI, yapay zeka (AI) programı [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES] tarafından desteklenen tahmine dayalı filtreler kullanır. Halk arasında, [[:en:Artificial intelligence|yapay zeka]] terimi, bir makine, insanların doğal dil işleme, problem çözme veya öğrenme gibi diğer insan zihinleriyle ilişkilendirdiği bilişsel işlevleri taklit ettiğinde kullanılır. AI, daha spesifik ''&quot;makine öğrenimi&quot;'' konseptiyle yakından ilişkili geniş bir terimdir.
;Makine Öğrenme
:[[:en:Machine learning|Makine öğrenimi]], bilgisayarlara özel olarak yapmak için programlanmamış görevleri öğrenme yeteneği kazandırmayı amaçlayan bir ''yapay zeka'' alt alanıdır. ERI, makine öğrenimi programı [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES] tarafından desteklenen tahmini filtreler kullanır.
;Doğruluk
:ERI araçları, çeşitli &quot;doğruluk&quot; düzeylerinde yapay zeka öngörücü filtreler sunar. Bu bağlamda kullanıldığında, doğruluk, filtrenin hedeflediği özelliği doğru şekilde tanımlayan, filtrenin döndürdüğü arama sonuçlarının yüzdesini ifade eder. Başka bir deyişle, filtre ne kadar doğru olursa, o kadar az yanlış pozitif üretir. (AI alanında, bunun için doğru teknik terim &quot;[[:en:Precision and recall|hassas]]&quot; şeklindedir.)
;Bssleme
:'''''Akış''' olarak da anılır''
:Bilgisayar beslemesi, kullanıcılara sık sık güncellenen içerik sağlamak için kullanılan bir veri biçimidir. ERI'de, [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]], vandalizm önleme ve düzenleme-inceleme programlarında yapılan son değişikliklerle ilgili verileri yayınlayan bir beslemedir.
;İyi niyet
:ERI projeleri, bir düzenlemenin iyi niyetle yapılıp yapılmadığını tahmin eden Kullanıcı Niyeti filtreleri sunar. Bu anlamda terim, bir kullanıcının niyetinin bikiye katkıda bulunmak mı yoksa ona zarar vermek mi olduğunu ifade eder. ERI'nin temel hedeflerinden biri, iyi niyetle katkıda bulunmaya çalışan ancak bunu başarılı bir şekilde yapacak beceri veya bilgiden yoksun olabilecek editörleri, özellikle ''yeni gelenleri'' bulup yardımcı olmalarını sağlamaktır. (ERI’nin Kullanıcı Amacı filtreleri, bir [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team|iyi niyet testi]] içeren makine öğrenimi programı ORES tarafından desteklenmektedir.)
;Hasar
:ERI projeleri, bir düzenlemenin vikiyi iyileştirip iyileştirmediğini veya ona zarar verip vermediğini öngören Katkı Kalitesi filtreleri sunar. Bu anlamda &quot;hasar&quot;, hem vandalizmi hem de kasıtsız biçimlendirme, stil, olgu vb. Hatalarını kapsayan genel bir terimdir. ERI'nin temel hedeflerinden biri, gözden geçirenlerin iyi niyetle katkıda bulunmaya çalışan, ancak beceri veya bilgi eksikliği onları zarara yol açan editörler, özellikle ''yeni gelenler'' bulup onlara yardım etmelerini sağlamaktır. (ERI'nin Kullanıcı Niyeti filtreleri, bir &quot;[[m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models|zarar verici]]&quot; testini içeren makine öğrenimi programı ORES tarafından desteklenmektedir.)

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>h9s0znhsbg9a8u2bnr97pr3h4n2p0c9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/8/tr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1287645</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402826</id>
      <parentid>5083455</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:20:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="73" xml:space="preserve">'''[[$1|Filtreler için Özel:Son Değişiklikler]]''' olarak da bilinir.</text>
      <sha1>kmbbj7fmtdaufj15nfoud8zmkaorj69</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/135/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1296939</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402967</id>
      <parentid>4431261</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:44:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="128" xml:space="preserve">Ja, aber es sind vermutlich einige kleinere Anpassungen vorzunehmen. Das Format der $1 ist in hohem Maße rückwärtskompatibel.</text>
      <sha1>9z5e3i6kccds3elc73t5f672staeot9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:CirrusSearch/374/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1305807</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402828</id>
      <parentid>4460309</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:20:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>fix</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="208" xml:space="preserve">Se pueden buscar dos o más espacios de nombres desde el panel ''Avanzado'' de la '''barra de búsqueda''' que se encuentra en la parte superior de cada página de resultados de búsqueda, [[Special:Search]].</text>
      <sha1>65xirexpyg72mle07x78eghprj3qzqf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Extension registration/id</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1307947</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402508</id>
      <parentid>5375685</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26930" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
'''Pendaftaran ekstensi''' adalah mekanisme yang digunakan MediaWiki untuk memuat [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|ekstensi]] dan [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You put configuration data in a file named &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; in the root directory of your extension or skin, and MediaWiki uses this to register extensions and skins.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
==Migrasi untuk administrator situs==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Before MediaWiki 1.25, configuration for extensions and skins was done in a PHP file using the extension's or skin's name, for example &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This must be done before you load any extensions or skins from non-standard directory locations:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you keep your extensions in a location different from &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}}'', to specify the directory in which to find the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Looks in $wgExtensionDirectory for /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your skins are not in &lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override the poorly named {{wg|StyleDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of &lt;code&gt;wfLoadSkin()&lt;/code&gt;'', to specify the directory in which to find the skin.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Looks in $wgStyleDirectory for both /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json and /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==Migrasi untuk pengembang ekstensi==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since MW 1.30, namespace IDs defined in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; can be overwritten locally, by defining the respective constant in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; before loading the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consider for instance the following namespace declaration in a &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would per default cause the constant NS_FOO to be defined to have the value 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, this can be overwritten by defining the respective constant in LocalSettings.php:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would cause the &quot;Foo&quot; namespace to be registered with the ID 6688 instead of 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When overriding namespace IDs, don't forget that all talk namespaces must have odd IDs, and the ID of the talk namespace must always be the subject namespace's ID plus one.&lt;/span&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also the [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ extension registration wall of sadness (now superpowers)].&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; helps you migrating from PHP entry points to a JSON metadata file.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension supports older versions of MediaWiki, you should keep your PHP entry point &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; until you drop support for those older versions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sample command lines:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to uninstall your extension from &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; if you receive errors that constants or functions cannot be redefined.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should replace your PHP entry point file (FooBar.php) with something like the following happens to not break wikis during the upgrade process.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Or skins
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===Mempertahankan dokumentasi===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PHP entry points usually have some documentation of configuration settings that is useful and shouldn't be lost.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately JSON doesn't support comments. It is recommended that you transfer configuration documentation to a &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; file in the extension's repository.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also document configuration on-wiki in your Extension:''MyExtension'' page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to include some documentation directly in the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration ignores any key in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; starting with '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' in the top-level structure, so you can put comments in those parts of the JSON file. For example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Version 1 of the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; format also allowed &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; in &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; section, but this is no longer recommended or supported in version 2. &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; field of the config variable should be used instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This should only be used for brief notes and comments.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Fitur==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are loading a large number of extensions, extension registration will provide a performance boost as long as you have [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (or APCu) installed. Extensions that are loaded together with &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (with plural -s) will be cached together.
&lt;/div&gt;

===Atribut===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A recurring problem is how to &quot;register&quot; something with another extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usually this meant that you had to load one extension before another.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, VisualEditor has a &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt; which allows extensions to add their modules.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, in VisualEditor's entry point it has:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if any extension appends to the array before VisualEditor is loaded, VE will wipe out its entry in this array.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some extensions depended upon a specific load order, others hacked around this with {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration solves this problem with &quot;attributes&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the Math extension, its &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; would have something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the attributes need to be defined in the separate section &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; node needs to be an object with the extension name as key and an object of attribute/value pairs as the value. Be aware that the key in the subobject must not contain the extension name!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When VisualEditor wants to access this attribute it uses:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===Persyaratan (ketergantungan)===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration has a &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; section, which acts similar to [[Composer]]'s &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; section.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It allows an extension developer to specify several requirements for the extension, such as a specific MediaWiki version (or greater/less than) or another extension/skin.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to add a dependency on a MediaWiki version that is greater than 1.26.0, you can add the following code to &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The key of the &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; object is the name of the dependency (prior to MediaWiki 1.29.0 only &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; was supported), the value is a valid version constraint (the format has to match the one [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md used by composer]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In MediaWiki 1.29.0 and above you can also add dependencies on skins and other extensions like so:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The extensions and skins specified here must also use the extension registrations system described on this page for this to work.
* The string added to specify the extension or skin must be identical to the string specified in the &quot;name&quot; field of the respective &quot;extension.json&quot; or &quot;skin.json&quot; file.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For extensions using Wikimedia [[Special:MyLanguage/Continuous integration|continuous integration]], dependencies also need to be added to {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}&lt;/span&gt;
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Check if an extension is loaded without actually requiring it ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many extensions may provide features that work only if another extension is loaded too, without really needing this feature for the core extension function to work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To implement a standardized way of checking, if an extension is loaded or not (without the need of extra work in an extension that is a soft-dependency in another one), extension registration can be used. It implements an &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns a simple boolean, if the extension is loaded or not (the extension needs to be loaded with extension registration for this to work). Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since [[MediaWiki 1.32]] it's also possible to check if an extension is loaded and satisfies a given composer version constraint:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you would like to check if a specific version of an extension is loaded in earlier versions of MediaWiki, information like that can be extracted with the &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns credit information for all loaded extensions. Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Alternatively, if the extension B defines a special constant meant for this purpose during loading, it is possible to check, if it is defined:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A more brittle way, that should be avoided is to check if a specific class of extension B exists or not, e.g. using this code:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This might break if the extension exists in the file system but is not loaded, e.g. if composer was used for autoloading.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the class was renamed or ceases to exist (e.g. because it is not package public) this will also break.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In general it is preferred to share code via composer components instead of extensions. If the classes of an extension only need to exist, but the extension does not need to be configured nor loaded, for what you want to do, that is a strong indicator that that code should be split off into a composer component you should depend on instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Configs (Your extension/skins settings) ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; assumes that your config settings start with a &quot;wg&quot; prefix.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If that's not the case, you can override the prefix by using a special key:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
That would use a prefix of &quot;eg&quot;, and set the global variable &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; to true.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the configuration section of extension registration provides a lot more features and allows you to describe your configuration options with much more detail. Instead of having a single key -&gt; value store for your configuration options, you can also add the following information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The general structure of the &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; changes slightly to the following, more object-oriented version:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Value ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the configuration moved to this place.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the only required key for a configuration object.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Path ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The boolean value of the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; key identifies, if the value of the configuration option should be interpreted as a filesystem path, relative to the extension directory root.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g., if the value of the configuration is &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; and the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; is true, the actual value will be &lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Description ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; key for a configuration option can hold a non-localized string, which can be used to explain the configuration option to other developers or the users (system administrators) of your extension.&lt;/span&gt;
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the description key is usually not exposed to the frontend of the wiki, however, take a look to the outlook for more information how this feature could be used in the future!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There's also the possibility to add a message key of MediaWiki's internal localisation system as a description (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;), which, in the future, will be used to expose the description in the frontend of the MediaWiki installation.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== public / private ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option is a boolean, which defaults to false, which means, that the configuration option and the value is marked as &quot;private&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This value is not used anywhere at the moment, take a look to the outlook to find out more about this option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Outlook ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{tracked|T155155}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The mentioned changes above are also preparation steps for an improved configuration management in MediaWiki. The above changes allow us to, e.g., expose the configuration options of extensions in the MediaWiki UI. For this, the localised description message (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) and the indication, if the configuration option should be exposed or not (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) is needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Unit tests auto-discovery ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki allows any extension to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|register phpunit tests]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without extension registration, you would need to register a hook handler for the {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}} hook, which would look something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(as described on the manual page). However, this code looks the same for a lot of extensions, so you could call it unnecessary code duplication.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension uses extension registration and your phpunit tests are located in the &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt; subdirectory of your extension, the phpunit wrapper of MediaWiki will autodiscover the unit tests with the help of extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Therefore, you don't need to register the hook anymore and you don't need to specify, that your unit tests are saved in the default directory.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Customizing registration ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Also composer.json ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If an extension or skin has library dependencies, it may have a &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well, see {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Use the &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt; field to make MediaWiki use Composer's autoloading when appropriate.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some metadata fields overlap between &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (discussed in {{task|T89456}}), including :
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code stewardship ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Report bugs against the [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]] project.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Old versions of [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (prior to May 2015) and {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} describe the old approach of declaring extension information in PHP code and variables
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Known limitations&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Overview of architecture&lt;/span&gt;}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; is the schema for &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (and skin.json).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] about implementing extension registration&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[toollabs:extreg-wos|Extension registration wall of superpowers!]] — summary of which extensions are still to be converted.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{task|T98668}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking ticket for converting all extensions and skins on Git to use extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== References ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>h75gorj1ei4fkcwmmeenewptsl60rnu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/fa</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1317751</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402153</id>
      <parentid>4919119</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:37:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8657" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since 2017, {{ll|VisualEditor}} provides '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' (visual difference displays).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are available in two places in the interface: when previewing changes to the document before the user saves the page, and (as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta feature]]) within the standard MediaWiki diff display, accessed from the history page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In both cases, the visual diff shows up alongside the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|traditional two-column wikitext diff]], and the user can toggle between the two displays.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diffs have two main advantages over wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first is that editors can directly see the changes they and others have made without needing to understand [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitext]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is particularly helpful when looking at changes to graphical structures such as tables; for example, if an edit deletes a column from a table, the wikitext diff for it would be hard to understand, while the visual diff would be immediately obvious.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The second is that the technology can be used to more accurately represent the change to the reader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if an edit swapped two paragraphs (with or without changes to the paragraphs), the visual diff will identify that this is what occurred, while a wikitext diff makes it appear that a paragraph was deleted and an entirely new paragraph was added.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== On regular diff pages ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of the examples and screenshots below are about using visual diffs during page previews when editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, VisualEditor's visual diffs can also be used on regular diff pages, on any wiki that has VisualEditor installed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can see an example of it in use on the English-language Wikipedia [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|here]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For wikis that have VisualEditor, there are several ways to activate this visual diff display:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If your wiki has a &quot;Beta features&quot; tab within Special:Preferences, and you want to make visual diffs an &quot;opt-in&quot; feature for users, you can add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* As seen in the Wikipedia example linked above, the visual diff mode can also be activated by simply adding &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; to the URL of a diff page.
&lt;/div&gt;

== این چطور کار می کند ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=نماگرفت برخی تغییرات را در یک مقاله نشان می‌دهد. بیشتر تغییرات با قالب‌بندی متن برجسته می‌شوند.|left|thumb|300px|پس از پایان ویرایش صفحه ، خلاصه ویرایش خود را تایپ کنید و سپس «تغییرات‌تان را بازبینی کنید» را انتخاب کنید.

در حالت بصری ، موارد اضافی ، حذفیات ، پیوندهای جدید و قالب بندی را برجسته خواهید دید. سایر تغییرات ، مانند تغییر اندازه تصویر ، در یادداشت های کناری توصیف شده است.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Toggle button showing visual and wikitext options; visual option is selected.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|220x220px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the toggle button to switch between visual and wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing the same changes, in the two-column wikitext diff display.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|245x245px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The wikitext diff is the same diff tool that is used in the wikitext editors and in the page history.&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{clr}}
== مثال‌ها ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Rich text edits&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Paragraph move with subtle vandalism&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff (2017).  This feature was added to the wikitext diff engine in 2018; see [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Table column removed&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Text, formatting and list changes&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insert new multimedia (sheet music)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== تکنولوژی بکار رفته ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thalia Chan, Unifying editing and visual diffs, Wikimania 2017&lt;/span&gt;]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== محدودیت های فعلی ==
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No notices for changes to &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, such as categories or TOC keywords.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Has issues with complex changes to tables.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unavailable on certain special pages:&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Undo &quot;diff&quot; pages.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit conflict pages&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== تاریخچه ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This feature has been available as the first diff tool in the desktop VisualEditor from the 1.31.0-wmf-20 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 6 February 2018).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before that, it was a secondary tool from the 1.29.0-wmf-17 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 21 March 2017).&lt;/span&gt;

== همچنین ببینید ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== پانویس ها ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>l8g7qwu1710vt16raa52zfc6qgytv6v</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Page Previews/fa</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1317792</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402139</id>
      <parentid>5390111</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:22:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="35861" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
ویژگی ''' پیش نمایش صفحه ''' مشکل اصلی کاربران را که نیاز به باز کردن چندین زبانه برای درک یک کلمه یا مفهوم دارند را در متن موضوعی که می خوانند ، حل می کند.
با پیش نمایش صفحه ، هر زمان که یک خواننده  بر روی پیوندی برای مقاله‌ای دیگر می‌رود، خلاصه ای از موضوع و یک تصویر (در صورت موجود بودن) نمایش داده می شود.
سپس کاربر می‌تواند قبل از ادامه مقاله فعلی ، تصمیم بگیرد که آیا مایل به بازدید دقیق‌تر از آن موضوع است.
شرح کامل عملکرد پیش نمایش صفحه را می توان در [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|اینجا]] یافت.
مروری بر کلیه اسناد فنی مرتبط در [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ این پست وبلاگ] از ماه مه ۲۰۱۸ ارائه شده است.

ویژگی پیش‌نمایش منبع یک پروژه مرتبط است. هر زمان که خواننده ای بر روی نشانگر پانویس آن حرکت می‌کند ، پیش نمایش آن پانویس را نشان می‌دهد. شرح این ویژگی را می‌توان در [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|صفحه پروژه آن]] یافت.

== معرفی ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Page Previews are designed to reduce the cost of exploration of a link, as well as to promote learning by allowing readers to gain context on the article they are reading or to define an unfamiliar term, object, event, or idea without navigating away from their original topic.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For casual readers, Page Previews will make it easier for users to get an overview of an article before deciding whether or not to browse to it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Users interested in reading an entire article in its totality will not be distracted or discouraged by viewing unfamiliar concepts—they can simply preview the concept without navigating to a new page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consequently, the smoothness of the user experience for these users will be increased.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There have been many requests over the years for a similar feature; there are browser extensions (see [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|list]]) and one heavily used gadget (the more editor-focused [[:en:Wikipedia:Tools/Navigation popups|Navigation popups]]) that also exist to solve this problem.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Page Previews were first built as a beta feature in 2014 (called Hovercards) and have been among our most popular beta features in terms of adoption, user feedback and impact on usage.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On the [[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|primary talk page for Hovercards]], over the course of 2 years, numerous issues across all projects were identified and resolved.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The mobile equivalent of Page Previews, implemented on the Android app [[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|in September 2015]], led to a 20% increase in links clicked per page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Previews [[#settings|settings panel]] enables logged-out users to enable and disable the feature based on their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Logged-in users may enable or disable Page Previews from the Appearance section of Special:Preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If Navigation popups and Page Previews are enabled at the same time (typically, for logged-in users who have opted in via the beta feature), Navigation popups takes precedence.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To enable Page Previews, Navigation pop-ups must be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|نمونه‌ای از پیش‌نمایش صفحه]]

== طرح ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For the current iteration of Page Previews, each preview contains the following:
* A portion of the first paragraph from the article
* An image (if available) from the article. Images appear horizontal or vertical depending on the location of the link within the article.
* A settings cog which allows users to turn Page Previews on and off
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|نمونه پیش‌نمایش صفحه به زبان یونانی
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|نمونه پیش‌نمایش صفحه به زبان چینی
File:Hovercard english.png|نمونه پیش‌نمایش صفحه به انگلیسی
&lt;/gallery&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Example of Page Previews in Chinese
File:Hovercard english.png|Example of Page Previews in English
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Key differences from Navigation Popups ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Navigation popups is for power users and has many features that are not relevant to most site users, such as quick links to meta-data pages like History, Diffs, and Usercontributions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Navigation popups work for links to all namespaces, and on all Wikimedia projects. Page Previews is configured to only work with mainspace links, and currently only on Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Page Previews are styled to enable easy reading. Currently, Nav-popups' type-size is small and the margins are tight.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Page Previews are available to all users, not just logged-in users.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Page Previews use a visual style consistent with the article type treatment
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Page Previews emphasize the lead images, so a user gets an idea of a term using both text and image.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The action set in the gadget feels out of context, hence we need to validate which of those actions are useful for readers and editors.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== پیش‌نمایش اچ‌تی‌ام‌ال ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
As of March 1st, 2018, page previews now display previews in HTML.  This resolves many outstanding bugs, provides correct representation of mathematical, chemical and other formulas, and ensures previews display the same formatting as the article content.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== تنظیمات ==

=== فعال/غیر‌فعال ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Logged-Out Users ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Logged-out users may turn Page Previews off via the cog-icon displayed at the bottom of each preview. If a user wishes to re-enable Page Previews, they can be enabled via the &quot;{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}&quot; link available at the bottom of any wiki page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;They can also disable JavaScript in their browser to turn it off permanently.&lt;/span&gt;
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |Select setting cog to disable Page Previews
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | Select disable to disable the feature
File:Reenablemodal.png | Instructions on how to re-enable will be presented
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| The link to re-enable Page Previews is available at the bottom of each page
&lt;/gallery&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Logged-In Users ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Logged-in users can control their settings from two places. They may enable or disable Page Previews from the Appearance section of Special:Preferences. Logged-in users may also turn Page Previews off via the cog-icon displayed at the bottom of each preview.
* If a logged-in user clicks on the settings cog, the system will redirect them to the user preferences page.
* If a user previously had the Hovercards beta feature enabled, their preference will be kept and appear in the Appearance section of user preferences.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| Users may enable the feature by using the settings cog at the bottom of each preview, or by selecting the option directly from the user preferences page
&lt;/gallery&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

== معیارهای موفقیت و ارزیابی ویژگی ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A number of qualitative and quantitative tests were performed to evaluate the performance of the Page Previews feature. These tests were focused on the following questions:
* Do users enjoy Page Previews and find them useful?
* How do Page Previews change reading behavior and do they help users be more accurate when selecting the articles they wish to read?
* Would launching the Page Previews feature have effects on fundraising?
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== 2015 Greek and Catalan Wikipedia test ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A feature test was implemented for a period of 4 months on Greek and Catalan Wikipedias. A number of issues and bugs were reported and user satisfaction was recorded using a survey. Users had generally favorable feedback, with the majority of users finding Page previews (Hovercards) useful, easy to use, and enjoyable to use.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/GreekCatalanTest|the full results of these tests]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== 2016 Qualitative test ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To determine user attitudes towards the Page Previews feature and trace further changes in reader behavior, an unmoderated remote panel study was performed using [http://UserZoom.com UserZoom] software.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The majority of participants reported positive attitudes to the Page Previews feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition, the majority of participants had no issues in turning the feature on and off.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Users also described the feature in generally positive terms and reported it was not distracting to their reading experience.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|the full results and analysis of this test]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== 2016 A/B tests on Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To determine changes in reading behavior and evaluate the success of the Page Previews (Hovercards) beta feature, three A/B tests were launched on Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias. The A/B test on Hungarian was launched June 7, 2016, the A/B tests on Italian and Russian were launched Sept 23, 2016.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The results of these tests indicated that Page Previews facilitate positive changes in reading behavior by increasing the precision with which users select the pages they read, reducing the cost of exploration of other pages, and allowing users to selectively focus on a single topic by providing context within a page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During the process of collecting and analysing our data we ran into a number of bugs and issues within our instrumentation that allowed us to refine and improve, to ensure subsequent tests were issue-free.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|the full results and analysis of these tests]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== 2017-2018 A/B tests on English and German Wikipedias ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From October to November 2017 and December 2017 to February 2018, we ran [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|two A/B tests to gauge the performance of the feature]] prior to release on these projects.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The results, described in more detail [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|in the report]], displayed a decrease in pageviews, but an overall increase in the number of distinct pages that readers interact with, indicating that they are more likely to explore a larger variety of topics when the feature is on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also noted decreased usage of the back button and very low rates of disabling the feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition, we ran a number of fundraising tests on enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Improvements since English Wikipedia discussion from April 2016 ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
During the [[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |discussion]] from April 2016, a number of bugs, improvements, and other requests were identified which we have addressed in the following ways:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previews “getting stuck” in the open position
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have since refactored our code and this is no longer an issue
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Bolded text and mathematical formulas not appearing within the preview
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Currently, previews display in HTML and content is true to the article content
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to disable the feature from the card itself
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in and logged-out users can now disable the feature by selecting the settings gear within the card itself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to make sure page previews do not interfere with navigational popups
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in users may either have navigational popups or page previews. If you’re a navpopups user, you will not be able to enable page previews unless you turn off navpopups first, and vice versa
Providing more thorough research and A/B test results, performing a large-scale A/B test on English Wikipedia
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Since the discussion, we have performed [[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|two series of A/B tests]], the first on Hungarian, Russian, and Italian Wikipedias.  And the [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |second]] on English and German Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Limiting performance impact
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have worked with our performance team to minimize any issues page previews.  A [https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 dashboard] with detailed information on feature performance was created.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing a way to enable the feature for anonymous users only
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*This is ready as well.  As of March 2018, the feature is enabled by default for anonymous users on all Wikipedias except English and German
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing data on how often users disable the feature
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*For both of our 2017/18 A/B tests, the disable rate was around 0.01%.  Because the rate had been similarly low in earlier A/B tests, we also did a [[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |qualitative test]] to confirm that users did not have problems enabling or disabling the feature.  Our conclusion is that people know how to turn the feature off without difficulty but do so at extremely low rates.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing information on whether the feature was considered a nuisance
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Based on our qualitative testing, we concluded that tested users did not find the feature distracting, or a nuisance.
&lt;/div&gt;

== صفحات در لیست سیاه ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For security reasons, Page Previews won't be loaded on certain special pages. We refer to these pages as &quot;disabled pages&quot;. The initial version of this can be found here: {{phab|T170893}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future Iterations and Potential Improvements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Following the general launch of Page Previews, we are planning on iterating on the feature to add functionality. These items will include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Configuration of images and other settings:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** a number of users have requested making images configurable within Page Previews. Request declined: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** other logged out preferences (more info [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|here]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Article titles - currently, only the summary of the article is available within Page Previews. As an iteration, we would like to display the title of each article along with its summary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Reference Tooltips ([[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]). The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using Page Previews to gain more information on each reference without scrolling to the bottom of the page&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Cross-wiki Page Previews ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]), and subsection links ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]]), particularly for Wiktionary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrate with Navigation Pop-ups - we would also like to expand the configuration of Page Previews to include some of the functionality planned in navigation pop-ups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Interacting with Page Previews text - a number of requests for interacting with preview text have been filed, including being able to copy and paste the text or export the text as a form or article summary. More info here  ([[phab:T146097|phab:T146097]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrating with Wiktionary items to provide definitions on hover.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interacting with Wiktionary items to provide definitions for unknown&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/FAQ|سوالات متداول]] ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
;Why Page Previews?
:This is a feature intended to improve the experience for any reader who normally would have clicked on a blue link in Wikipedia because they needed an overview (definition) of that entity. It's inspired by one of the most popular gadgets, [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia_talk:Tools/Navigation_popups Navigation popups].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How do we measure Page Previews performance?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
At the project level, administrators can determine how long a user should dwell on a link before a hover is triggered. If a project wants to be conservative, the lag can be longer. WMF will have a recommendation as to optimum dwell time that provides the best user experience while minimizing accidental hovers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Why can't users just turn on Page Previews if they want them?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Unfortunately, there is no good way to tell users about a new feature without showing it to them first. Central notice banners have been suggested, but running them for 2 weeks would not solve the needs of future users and we do not want to run them continuously. Notifying a user of a new feature is best done using a...hover-over.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What impact to Page Previews have on page views?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:According to A/B tests we did not see a large decrease in session depth across all Wikipedias. Average session depth (average number of pages viewed per session) [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|remained relatively equal]] between the Previews on and off groups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What about accessibility?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Page Previews only activate when the focus/hover state occurs over a link. They are usable for people who use keyboard navigation. For screen readers, Page Previews have proper [[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]] semantics declaring them as tooltips. In short, screen reader software ignore Page Previews.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; If I have Page Previews feedback or if I have a suggestion for making them better, where should I go?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Please go to [[Talk:Page_Previews|the Page Previews discussion page]].
&lt;/div&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Previews continues to show an old version of a page. What can I do?&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Preview shows the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|cached]] version of a page. If the page has been edited and you want Page Previews to show the new version right away, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|purge]] the page.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
;Analytics and instrumentation
:* Page Previews were instrumented to measure various aspects of usage. Please see the {{ll|Extension:Popups|nsp=0}} extension page for details and feel free to ask any clarifying questions.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To measure content usage via Page Previews, in an aggregated way that is compatible with the existing Pageviews data, a separate instrumentation [[phab:T186728|was set up]] that went live in April 2018. There are [[phab:T193524|plans]] to make some of this data public for the benefit of e.g. Wikipedia editors and academic researchers.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Project-level rollout discussions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update July 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Page previews are now available on all Wikipedias.  The feature is on by default for anonymous users and newly created accounts and off by default for accounts created before July 10, 2018.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update April 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The next step of the rollout for English and German Wikipedias is planned for the first half of April 2018. This deployment will include turning the feature on by default for logged-out users.  '''This will mean no changes for logged-in users.''' The feature will be off by default for logged-in editors, unless currently enabled. If you would like to enable it, it is available in your Preferences under “Appearance”. If you have the feature enabled already, it will stay on.  
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In terms of future changes for logged-in users, we have a few options we will be requesting feedback on:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Keep the feature off by default for logged-in users.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for new accounts only. Currently, when users move from being readers to contributors and create an account, the feature will seem to vanish, and that would be confusing.  As a further step in the feature rollout, we plan to change this configuration and enable the feature for all new accounts.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for existing logged-in users (Even if it were enabled for everyone, it would still be automatically suppressed for anyone who uses NAVPOPS.)
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Plan ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We began rolling out to Catalan, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias in early 2017. Data from the A/B tests represented highly favorable views of the feature. After this, we would like to continue rolling out in stages to other Wikipedias as described in the table below.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Code&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Language&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phase&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Onboarding&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Success&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dates&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All other Wikipedias except the remaining top 6&lt;/span&gt; || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|this message]] was sent to Wikipedia Village Pump (or equivalent) of the 247 wikis included in this phase on  19 April&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Onboarding Experience ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The onboarding experience for the feature will depend on the consensus of each community on having Page Previews on by default or providing users with an onboarding experience during which they can reject the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;

== همچنین ببینید ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (documentation of a - so far internal - dataset recording aggregate frequencies of seen page previews)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[:en:WP:POP|Navigation popups]] - the editor-focused gadget, started in 2005 by Lupin, available at most wikis
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ WMF blog post - Hovercards now available as a Beta Feature on all Wikimedia wikis] (March 2014)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The original specifications can be seen at [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]] and [https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|A list of similar browser extensions]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - The API specification for Page Previews
&lt;/div&gt;

== منابع ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>gn5dlemwhxdlnw714j6kk3enosdkmbt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Page Previews/78/fa</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1317810</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402138</id>
      <parentid>4493822</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:22:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="142" xml:space="preserve">مروری بر کلیه اسناد فنی مرتبط در [$url این پست وبلاگ] از ماه مه ۲۰۱۸ ارائه شده است.</text>
      <sha1>6qy43r3oi90uucmmzf9f26yervkhwq0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/cs</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1325687</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401789</id>
      <parentid>5184870</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3720" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Overview ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Social media channels ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== MediaWiki ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Wikimedia Technology ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>61acsgv0c1utg651pozcapctq9yfrl7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Preferences/fa</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1326655</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402242</id>
      <parentid>5400734</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:03:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14747" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=اطلاعات به روز شده در فراویکی در دسترس است: [[m:Help:Preferences]]}}

هنگام ورود به سیستم، بر روی پیوند [[Special:preferences|ترجیحات]] در بالا سمت چپ (محیط فارسی) کلیک کنید.
برای تغییر سایر تنظیمات، بخش نمایه کاربر و همچنین نوار برگه‌هایی در بالای صفحه به شما ارائه می شود.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || نام کاربری شما. فقط کاربران معتمد می توانند نام کاربری شما را تغییر دهند و همچنین ویکی باید پسوند {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} را نیز نصب کند.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || فهرستی از گروه‌های کاربری که در آن هستید.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || در ویکی‌های ویکی‌مدیا، این پیوند به شما این امکان را می‌دهد تا برنامه‌های کاربردی خارجی را که اجازه دسترسی به حساب شما را دارند، مدیریت کنید. &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;درباره [[Help:OAuth|راهنمای OAuth]] بیشتر بدانید.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || چه تعداد ویرایش انجام داده اید. همه ویکی ها این را ندارند.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || زمان ثبت نام حساب شما.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|پایین را نگاه کنید]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|پایین را نگاه کنید]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || احراز هویت دو مرحله‌ای را مدیریت کنید.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || ترجیحات سزاسری را مدیریت کنید.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
برای تغییر رمز ورود، رمز عبور پیشین خود را در کادر اول و رمز ورود جدید خود را در دو مورد آخر وارد کنید.
اگر می خواهید این سایت ورود شما را به خاطر بسپارد، ''ورود من را در این رایانه به خاطر بسپار'' را علامت بزنید.
توجه داشته باشید که این عملکرد مستلزم داشتن کوکی ها در مرورگر شما است و اگر کوکی شما پاک شود یا منقضی شود دیگر به خاطر نمی آورد.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== حساب سراسری====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
از طریق تنظیمات دلخواه خود می توانید به چه زبانی رابط را انتخاب کنید.
فقط دکمه‌های مانند 'ویرایش' و 'بحث'، علاوه بر چند صفحه در نوار کناری، تحت تأثیر قرار می‌گیرند.
متن اصلی صفحه‌ها با اکثریت قریب به اتفاق صفحه‌ها تغییر نخواهد کرد، اگرچه چند صفحه وجود دارد که در آن تغییر خواهد کرد، مانند برخی از آنها در فراویکی ویکی‌مدیا.

* زبان‌ها
* شما ترجیح می‌دهید چگونه توضیح داده شود؟
* تنظیمات زبان بیشتر

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* امضای فعلی شما
* امضای جدید
** امضا به صورت ویکی‌متن در نظر گرفته شود.

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
اگر آدرس ایمیل خود را ارائه کرده اید، برای استفاده از این عملکرد باید روی دکمه ''تأیید آدرس'' کلیک کنید. شما یک ایمیل دریافت خواهید کرد. به سادگی آن را باز کرده و برای فعال کردن عملکردهای زیر پیوند را دنبال کنید.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| تایید ایمیل ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;این اجازه می دهد تا سایر کاربران ثبت نام شده با استفاده از پیوند «ارسال نامه به این کاربر» در نوار کناری صفحه کاربری خود، ایمیل ارسال کنند. ایمیل‌ها با استفاده از یک رابط وب ارسال می شوند و آدرس ایمیل شما تا زمانی که از طریق ایمیل پاسخ ندهید ، برای فرستنده مشخص نمی شود.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || با این کار کاربران فاقد مجوز تایید شده خودکار امکان ارسال ایمیل برای شما را دارند.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || این گزینه به شما امکان می دهد مشخص کنید کدام کاربرها قادر به ارسال ایمیل مستقیم به شما نخواهند بود. آنها پیوند «ارسال نامه به این کاربر» را در نوار کناری صفحه کاربری شما مشاهده نخواهند کرد. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
در اینجا می توانید پوسته‌ای را که می خواهید انتخاب کنید. می توانید پیش از انتخاب ، با کلیک روی پیوند «{{int|skin-preview}}» کنار هر پوسته، پیش نمایش پوست های موجود را مشاهده کنید. لطفا برای اطلاعات بیشتر به {{ll|Help:Skins}} مراجعه کنید.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== قالب تاریخ و فاصله زمانی ===

موارد زیر به طور معمول بسته به تنظیمات ارائه می شود:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
در اینجا می توانید نحوه نمایش تصاویر را تعیین کنید. تصاویری که با جایگذاری مستقیم یک URL نمایش داده می شوند (اگر ویکی آن را فعال کرده باشد) تحت تأثیر این تنظیم قرار نخواهند گرفت.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - این تنظیم به شما امکان می دهد تا اندازه بزرگ پیش نمایش تصاویر را در صفحات Image: انتخاب کنید. اگر می دانید وضوح صفحه نمایش فعلی شما چیست ، ممکن است بخواهید این را روی یک یا دو اندازه کوچکتر از صفحه نمایش خود تنظیم کنید. اگر اتصال شما کند است (مانند dial-up)، ممکن است بخواهید آنها را به 320 × 240 محدود کنید.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - مشخص کنید که چقدر می خواهید ریز عکسها نشان داده شوند. این تنظیم روی تصاویر کوچک با ابعادی که توسط ویرایشگر تعیین می شود تأثیر نخواهد گذاشت و همچنین نمی تواند تصاویر را از ابعاد اصلی خود افزایش دهد.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

درباره [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|ویژگی‌های آزمایشی]] بیشتر بدانید.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== جستارهای وابسته ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9o5hawxkeq1nbn94uyowirmveydmbmb</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402287</id>
      <parentid>5402242</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:05:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14700" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{PD Help Page}}
{{Special page}}
{{outdated|reason=اطلاعات به روز شده در فراویکی در دسترس است: [[m:Help:Preferences]]}}

هنگام ورود به سیستم، بر روی پیوند [[Special:preferences|ترجیحات]] در بالا سمت چپ (محیط فارسی) کلیک کنید.
برای تغییر سایر تنظیمات، بخش نمایه کاربر و همچنین نوار برگه‌هایی در بالای صفحه به شما ارائه می شود.

Starting in MediaWiki 1.32.0-wmf.23, [[Special:Preferences]]'s design has been changed.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that some of the preferences discussed here are added by extensions and are not a part of MediaWiki core.&lt;/span&gt;

== {{int|prefs-personal}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-info}} ===

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| ''{{int|username}}'' || نام کاربری شما. فقط کاربران معتمد می توانند نام کاربری شما را تغییر دهند و همچنین ویکی باید پسوند {{ll|Extension:Renameuser|nsp=0}} را نیز نصب کند.
|-
| {{int|prefs-memberingroups}} || فهرستی از گروه‌های کاربری که در آن هستید.
|-
| {{int|mwoauth-prefs-managegrants}} || در ویکی‌های ویکی‌مدیا، این پیوند به شما این امکان را می‌دهد تا برنامه‌های کاربردی خارجی را که اجازه دسترسی به حساب شما را دارند، مدیریت کنید. برای اطلاعات بیشتر {{ll|Help:OAuth}} ببینید.
|-
| ''{{int|prefs-edits}}'' || چه تعداد ویرایش انجام داده اید. همه ویکی ها این را ندارند.
|-
| {{int|prefs-registration}} || زمان ثبت نام حساب شما.
|-
| {{int|prefs-resetpass}} || [[#Change password|پایین را نگاه کنید]]
|-
| {{int|centralauth-prefs-status}} || [[#Global account|پایین را نگاه کنید]]
|-
| {{int|oathauth-prefs-label}} || احراز هویت دو مرحله‌ای را مدیریت کنید.
|-
| {{int|globalprefs-info-label}} || ترجیحات سزاسری را مدیریت کنید.
|}

{{anchor|Change password}}
==== {{int|prefs-resetpass}} ====
برای تغییر رمز ورود، رمز عبور پیشین خود را در کادر اول و رمز ورود جدید خود را در دو مورد آخر وارد کنید.
اگر می خواهید این سایت ورود شما را به خاطر بسپارد، ''ورود من را در این رایانه به خاطر بسپار'' را علامت بزنید.
توجه داشته باشید که این عملکرد مستلزم داشتن کوکی ها در مرورگر شما است و اگر کوکی شما پاک شود یا منقضی شود دیگر به خاطر نمی آورد.

{{anchor|Global account}}
==== حساب سراسری====

=== {{int|prefs-i18n}} ===
از طریق تنظیمات دلخواه خود می توانید به چه زبانی رابط را انتخاب کنید.
فقط دکمه‌های مانند 'ویرایش' و 'بحث'، علاوه بر چند صفحه در نوار کناری، تحت تأثیر قرار می‌گیرند.
متن اصلی صفحه‌ها با اکثریت قریب به اتفاق صفحه‌ها تغییر نخواهد کرد، اگرچه چند صفحه وجود دارد که در آن تغییر خواهد کرد، مانند برخی از آنها در فراویکی ویکی‌مدیا.

* زبان‌ها
* شما ترجیح می‌دهید چگونه توضیح داده شود؟
* تنظیمات زبان بیشتر

=== {{int|prefs-signature}} ===
* امضای فعلی شما
* امضای جدید
** امضا به صورت ویکی‌متن در نظر گرفته شود.

=== {{int|prefs-email}} ===
اگر آدرس ایمیل خود را ارائه کرده اید، برای استفاده از این عملکرد باید روی دکمه ''تأیید آدرس'' کلیک کنید. شما یک ایمیل دریافت خواهید کرد. به سادگی آن را باز کرده و برای فعال کردن عملکردهای زیر پیوند را دنبال کنید.

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
| تایید ایمیل ||
|-
| ''{{int|allowemail}}'' || &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;این اجازه می دهد تا سایر کاربران ثبت نام شده با استفاده از پیوند «ارسال نامه به این کاربر» در نوار کناری صفحه کاربری خود، ایمیل ارسال کنند. ایمیل‌ها با استفاده از یک رابط وب ارسال می شوند و آدرس ایمیل شما تا زمانی که از طریق ایمیل پاسخ ندهید ، برای فرستنده مشخص نمی شود.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ''{{int|email-allow-new-users-label}}'' || با این کار کاربران فاقد مجوز تایید شده خودکار امکان ارسال ایمیل برای شما را دارند.
|-
| ''{{int|tog-ccmeonemails}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|email-blacklist-label}}'' || این گزینه به شما امکان می دهد مشخص کنید کدام کاربرها قادر به ارسال ایمیل مستقیم به شما نخواهند بود. آنها پیوند «ارسال نامه به این کاربر» را در نوار کناری صفحه کاربری شما مشاهده نخواهند کرد. 
|-
| ''{{int|tog-enotifwatchlistpages}}'' ||
|-
| ''{{int|lqt-preference-notify-talk}}'' ||
|}

== {{int|prefs-rendering}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-skin}} ===
در اینجا می توانید پوسته‌ای را که می خواهید انتخاب کنید. می توانید پیش از انتخاب ، با کلیک روی پیوند «{{int|skin-preview}}» کنار هر پوسته، پیش نمایش پوست های موجود را مشاهده کنید. لطفا برای اطلاعات بیشتر به {{ll|Help:Skins}} مراجعه کنید.

{{anchor|Date and time}}
=== قالب تاریخ و فاصله زمانی ===

موارد زیر به طور معمول بسته به تنظیمات ارائه می شود:

&lt;pre&gt;
 [[2001-01-05]] (or [[2001]]-[[01-05]]) (with leading zeros)
 [[2001]] [[January 5]] ([[2001]] [[January 05]])
 [[January 5]], [[2001]] ([[January 05]], [[2001]])
 [[5 January]] [[2001]] ([[05 January]] [[2001]])
 [[January 5]] ([[January 05]])
 [[5 January]] ([[05 January]])
&lt;/pre&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-files}} ===
در اینجا می توانید نحوه نمایش تصاویر را تعیین کنید. تصاویری که با جایگذاری مستقیم یک URL نمایش داده می شوند (اگر ویکی آن را فعال کرده باشد) تحت تأثیر این تنظیم قرار نخواهند گرفت.

* ''{{int|imagemaxsize}}'' - این تنظیم به شما امکان می دهد تا اندازه بزرگ پیش نمایش تصاویر را در صفحات Image: انتخاب کنید. اگر می دانید وضوح صفحه نمایش فعلی شما چیست ، ممکن است بخواهید این را روی یک یا دو اندازه کوچکتر از صفحه نمایش خود تنظیم کنید. اگر اتصال شما کند است (مانند dial-up)، ممکن است بخواهید آنها را به 320 × 240 محدود کنید.
* ''{{int|thumbsize}}'' - مشخص کنید که چقدر می خواهید ریز عکسها نشان داده شوند. این تنظیم روی تصاویر کوچک با ابعادی که توسط ویرایشگر تعیین می شود تأثیر نخواهد گذاشت و همچنین نمی تواند تصاویر را از ابعاد اصلی خود افزایش دهد.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Use Media Viewer: On Wikimedia wikis, this setting (on by default) determines whether the [[mw:Extension:Media Viewer/About|Media Viewer]] should be used to provide a smoother image viewing experience.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-diffs}} ===

* {{int|tog-diffonly}}
* {{int|tog-norollbackdiff}}
* {{int|revisionslider-preference-disable}}

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrendering}} ===

* {{int|tog-underline}}
* {{int|stub-threshold}}
* {{int|tog-showhiddencats}}
* {{int|tog-numberheadings}}
* {{int|tog-showrollbackconfirmation}}

{{anchor|Rendering_math}}
=== {{int|prefs-math}} ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can control how mathematical equations described using the {{tag|math|open}} tag will be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae uploaded as images or written outside the math tag will not be affected by this setting.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note the math preferences will only be visible if {{ll|Extension:Math}} is installed.&lt;/span&gt;

* ''{{int|mw_math_png}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_mathml}}''
* ''{{int|mw_math_source}}''

== {{int|prefs-editing}} ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
These are the settings to control editing pages, including whether to automatically watch pages that you have edited or created.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedediting}} ===

* {{int|tog-editsectiononrightclick}}
* {{int|tog-editondblclick}}

=== {{int|prefs-editor}} ===

* {{int|editfont-style}}
* {{int|tog-minordefault}}
* {{int|tog-forceeditsummary}}
* {{int|tog-useeditwarning}}
* {{int|wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}

=== {{int|prefs-preview}} ===

* {{int|tog-previewonfirst}}
* {{int|tog-previewontop}}
* {{int|tog-uselivepreview}}

{{anchor|Recent_changes}}
== {{int|prefs-rc}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-displayrc}} ===

* ''{{int|recentchangesdays}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how far back the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Tracking changes|recent changes]] pages will go. Note that the list will stop prematurely if the number of edits is exceeded (see below).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|recentchangescount}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here you can specify how many edits should be displayed.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-advancedrc}} ===
* ''{{int|tog-hideminor}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This enables you to hide edits marked as minor (see {{ll|Help:Editing pages}}). Since some users will rapidly make a lot of tiny tweaks to update templates or fix spelling errors you may find enabling this to be useful. You can also turn this on temporarily from the recent changes page (see {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}}).&lt;/span&gt;
* ''{{int|tog-usenewrc}}'' - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enhanced recent changes condenses edits into a per-page list. As indicated, this requires JavaScript to be enabled. See {{ll|Help:Tracking changes}} for more information on this feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in recent changes: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves. This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-watchlist}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are the settings to control the behavior of the watchlist (See {{ll|Help:Watchlist}}).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of these options are also available on the watchlist display itself, but by setting them in your preferences, you control the default behavior of the watchlist i.e., it will perform the same actions every time you visit the page.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-editwatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-displaywatchlist}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-advancedwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Show Wikidata edits in your watchlist: On selected Wikimedia projects where data from [[d:|Wikidata]] is available, this option allows you to see changes to the Wikidata items connected to pages on your wiki, as well as changes to the wiki pages themselves.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can help catch vandalism on Wikidata that could be seen on your wiki.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|prefs-tokenwatchlist}} ===
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Watchlist token: This token is used to generate a [[w:RSS feed|RSS feed]] from your watchlist. Anyone who knows this token can use it to access your watchlist. If the token is discovered by someone else, you can use the &quot;Click here if you need to reset it&quot; link to create a new token. Once you have done this, you will need to edit the URL of your feed subscription in your feed reader to account for the new token.
&lt;/div&gt;

== {{int|prefs-searchoptions}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default settings for searches including how many results to display and how much context to show for each result.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Check the boxes next to the namespaces which you want to show up, the first time that you search for something.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can override this when doing an actual search, by checking or unchecking the boxes at the bottom of the search results screen.&lt;/span&gt;

=== {{int|cirrussearch-pref-completion-section-desc}} ===

== {{int|prefs-echo}} ==

=== {{int|prefs-emailsettings}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echosubscriptions}} ===

=== {{int|prefs-echocrosswiki}} ===

== {{int|prefs-gadgets}} ==

== {{int|prefs-betafeatures}} ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On Wikimedia wikis, the '''Beta features''' tab allows you to enable experimental features before they are made available to everyone.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you choose to turn on any of these features, you should be prepared to encounter bugs and problems, and you may see sudden changes in the way the feature looks or works as development continues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Each feature has a &quot;discussion&quot; link next to it, so you can offer your suggestions or report any problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

درباره [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/About|ویژگی‌های آزمایشی]] بیشتر بدانید.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Automatically enable all new beta features: If you turn on this option, new beta features will become active for you as soon as they are added to the Beta Features system.
&lt;/div&gt;

== جستارهای وابسته ==
* {{ll|Manual:User preferences}}
* {{ll|Manual:$wgDefaultUserOptions}}
* {{ll|Help:Skins}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]</text>
      <sha1>dbjbjivc0vw1gg96z2rdzix1ybj226h</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/fa</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1326662</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402286</id>
      <parentid>4518607</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:05:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="51" xml:space="preserve">برای اطلاعات بیشتر $1 ببینید.</text>
      <sha1>7h4p6i2241hcun70pb3796rlu8ac9fl</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:VisualEditor/User guide/lij</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1339543</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402780</id>
      <parentid>5347003</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:48:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="68395" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;{{PD Help Page}}&lt;/div&gt;
{{VisualEditor Portal}}
&lt;div style=&quot;max-width:70em; margin:auto;&quot;&gt;
{{ombox|text=
&lt;span class=&quot;plainlinks&quot;&gt;Se ti ti vœ provâ VisualEditor sénsa modificâ 'na vôxe, [{{fullurl:VisualEditor:Test|veaction=edit}} tò-u chi 'na pàgina] pe fâ de prêuve.&lt;/span&gt; Ti no t'hæ bezéugno de 'n account pe dêuviâ VisualEditor inte quélla pàgina.}}

__TOC__
__NOEDITSECTION__

== Arvî o VisualEditor ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot; style=&quot;clear: both&quot;
|-
| Pe modificâ 'na pàgina dêuviando VisualEditor, sciacâ in sciâ lengoétta ''{{int|vector-view-edit}}'' in âto inta pàgina.

L'avertûa da pàgina pe fâ de modìfiche a pœ avéi bezéugno de vàrri segóndi, ànche de ciù se a pàgina a l'è tànto lónga.

Sciacando in sciâ lengoétta &quot;{{int|visualeditor-ca-editsource}}&quot; o conpariâ l'editor normâle de wikitèsto.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor edit tab|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Se pœ ànche arvî VisualEditor sciacando in sciô link &quot;{{int|editsection}}&quot; inte ògni seçión.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Section edit links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
|}

== Introduçión: a bâra d'instruménti de VisualEditor ==

&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar|png|-}}|frameless|center|950px|alt=Screenshot da bâra d'instruménti de VisualEditor]]&lt;/div&gt;

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | A bâra d'instruménti de VisualEditor a conpare inta pàrte superiôre do schèrmo quànde ti t'iniçi a fâ de modìfiche con VisualEditor. A inclùdde de icónn-e comùn:
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Undo-redo.png|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-undo-tooltip}}''' e '''{{int|visualeditor-historybutton-redo-tooltip}}''' i cangiaménti che ti t'hæ fæto.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Headings|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Menù a tendìnn-a di '''tìtoli de seçioîn''': o permétte de cangiâ a formataçión do paràgrafo. Pe cangiâ o stîle de 'n paràgrafo spostâ o póntató do mouse, seleçionando 'n eleménto da-o menù (a no l'è necesâio do tèsto). I tìtoli de seçioîn són coscì formatæ ''{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading2}}'' e e sóttaseçioîn ''{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading3}}'', ''{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-mw-heading4}}'' e coscì vîa. O formâto normâle o l'è ''{{int|visualeditor-formatdropdown-format-paragraph}}''.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Formatting|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| 
'''Formataçión:''' sciacando in sciâ &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; o s'avre 'n menù. 
* ''{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-bold-tooltip}}'' ('''G''') o fa diventâ o tèsto seleçionòu in grascétto.
* ''{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-italic-tooltip}}'' (''C'') o fa diventâ o tèsto seleçionòu in corscîvo.
* ''{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-superscript-tooltip}}'' (x&lt;sup&gt;2&lt;/sup&gt;) o fa diventâ o tèsto seleçionòu ciù picìn e spostòu de 'n pö vèrso l'âto.
* ''{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-subscript-tooltip}}'' (x&lt;sub&gt;2&lt;/sub&gt;) o fa diventâ o tèsto seleçionòu ciù picìn e spostòu de 'n pö vèrso o bàsso.
* ''{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-strikethrough-tooltip}}'' (&lt;s&gt;S&lt;/s&gt;) o azónze 'na bâra in sciô tèsto.
* L'eleménto ''{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-code-tooltip}}'' ('na cóbia de paréntexi &lt;code&gt;{}&lt;/code&gt;) o cangia o font do tèsto seleçionòu, ch'o diventa làrgo sôlo in spàçio, e o distìngoe da-o tèsto d’in gîo.
* L'eleménto ''{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-underline-tooltip}}'' (&lt;u&gt;U&lt;/u&gt;) o azónze 'na sotoliniatûa a-o tèsto seleçionòu.
* L'eleménto ''{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-language-tooltip}}'' (文A) o permétte d'indicâ a léngoa (prezénpio, Giaponéize) e a direçión de letûa (prezénpio da drîta vèrso mancìnn-a) do tèsto seleçionòu.
* L'ùrtimo eleménto ([[File:VisualEditor MediaWiki theme clear icon bitmap.png]]), ciamòu ''{{int|visualeditor-clearbutton-tooltip}}'', o leva tùtta a formataçión do tèsto seleçionòu, inclûzi i link.

Se ti no t'hæ seleçionòu nisciùn tèsto quànde ti ti prémmi &quot;&lt;u&gt;'''''A'''''&lt;/u&gt;&quot; pe arvî o menù e pöi ti ti çèrni 'n eleménto, quélla formataçión a saiâ aplicâ a-o tèsto che ti t'hæ comensòu a scrîve, a prescìnde da dónde se trêuva o póntatô do mouse.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Instruménto de colegaménto:''' l'icónn-a co-e cadénn-e a l'è [[#Editing links|l'instruménto pe fâ di colegaménti]]. Sciacando quésta icónn-a (solitaménte dòppo avéi seleçionòu do tèsto) s'arve o [[#Editing links|diàlogo do link]].
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|130px|center]]
| '''Çita:''' o menù ''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}'' o serve a inserî 'na çitaçión into pónto indicòu (dîta nòtta a pê de pàgina ò nòtta de tèsto ascì). Tùtti i progètti àn a poscibilitæ de acêde a-a formataçión de bâze de nòtte e a poscibilitæ de riutilizâ 'na nòtta, gràçie a quésto menù. Quésto menù o dâ a poscibilitæ de acêde a-i template de çitaçión ascì, se prezénti in sciâ tò wiki.

(E instruçioîn pe azónze o menù {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}} a 'na wiki in particolâ s'atrovàn a-a pàgina {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}})
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
| '''poméllo {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}}:''' &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se o servìçio Citoid o l'è abilitòu in sciâ tò wiki, ti ti véddiæ o poméllo {{int|citoid-citoidtool-title}} a-o pòsto do menù {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(To check whether it's enabled, see the page &quot;Special:Version&quot; on your wiki and the page [[Special:MyLanguage/Citoid/Where citoid is enabled|Where citoid is enabled]].)&lt;/span&gt;

O servìçio Citoid o tenta de conpilâ 'n template de çitaçión outomaticaménte.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| '''Elénchi e indentaçioîn:''' e prìmme dôe icónn-e perméttàn de formatâ o tèsto ségge cómme ''{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-bullet-tooltip}}'' ségge cómme ''{{int|visualeditor-listbutton-number-tooltip}}''. E ùrtime dôe icónn-e perméttàn pe cóntra d'aomentâ ò amermâ o livèllo de indentaçión di eleménti da lìsta.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|250px|center]]
| '''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}:''' o menù ''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}'' o poriéiva êse despægio tra i vàrri progètti. Chi de sótta s'atrova 'na lìsta de '''tùtte''' e scèlte che poriéivan êse mostræ.
* L'icónn ''{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}'' ('n'inmàgine de montàgne) a l'arve o [[#Editing images and other media files|barcón de diàlogo di file]].
* L'icónn-a ''{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}'' (a tésera de 'n puzzle) a permétte de [[#Editing templates|modificâ i templates]].
* L'icónn-a ''tòua'' a permétte d'inserî 'na tabélla.
* L'icónn-a ''{{int|visualeditor-commentinspector-tooltip}}'' ('n fumétto) a permétte d'inserî di coménti no vixìbili a-i letoî; quésti són defæti vixìbili sôlo quànde se modìfica 'na pàgina e dónde són segnalæ da 'n icónn-a co-in pónto esclamatîvo. Inta modalitæ de modìfica, sciacando in sce l'icónn-a co-o pónto esclamatîvo, o l'è poscìbile modificâ ò cancelâ o coménto.
* L'icónn-a ''{{int|wikihiero-visualeditor-mwhieroinspector-title}}comment'' (o scìnbolo [[:w:ankh|ankh]] ☥) a permétte d'inserî di geroglìfici (véddi chi de sótta).
* L'eleménto ''blòcco de còdice'' o permétte d'inserî 'na strìnca de còdice.
* L'eleménto ''notaçión muxicâle'' o permétte d'inserî 'n tòcco de spartîo.
* L'icónn-a ''{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}'' ('n set de föto) a permétte d'inserî 'na galerîa a-a pàgina.
* L'icónn-a ''{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}'' (Σ) a l'arve l'[[#Editing mathematical formulae|editor pe-e fórmole matemàtiche]].
* L'eleménto ''gràfico'' o permétte d'inserî 'n gràfico.
* L'eleménto ''{{int|visualeditor-mwsignature-tool}}'' o permétte d'inserî a tò fìrma inte quéllo progètto. O saiâ dizativòu (no seleçionàbile) quànde ti ti modìfichi 'n tîpo de pàgina inte 'n ''namespace'', cómme 'na vôxe, dónde e fìrme no doviéivan êse inserîe.
* L'icónn-a ''{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}formula-title'' (tréi lìbbri) a l'arve 'n barcón de diàlogo into quæ se pœ specificâ dónde saiàn mostræ e nòtte a-o letô. Normalménte a lìsta de riferiménti a va inserîa 'na sôla vòtta pe pàgina.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | '''Inseriménto caràteri speciâli:''' l'icónn-a ''{{int|visualeditor-specialcharacter-button-tooltip}}'' (Ω) a s'atrova vixìn a-o menù ''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}''. Quànde a vêgne seleçionâ, s'arve 'n barcón de diàlogo ch'o mostra vàrri caràteri speciâli. Sciacando in sce 'n caràtere specìfico quésto o saiâ inserîo into tèsto. I caràteri speciâli inclùddan di scìnboli stàndard, acénti vàrri e scìnboli matemàtici. (Quésta lìsta a pœ êse modificâ localménte. Véddi {{ll|VisualEditor/Special characters}} pe-e instruçioîn.)
|}
&lt;div style=&quot;margin: 0 -50px;&quot;&gt;
[[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar SpecialCharacters|png|-}}|frameless|border|950px|center]]&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor toolbar edit notices icon.png|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| O poméllo '''Modifica avîsi''' o mostra ògni avîso da-a pàgina.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor More Settings|png|-}}|frameless|400px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O menù '''$pagemenu''' o s'atrovâ a mancìnn-a de ''$save'' e do menù ''Cangia editor''. Inte quésto menù o gh'è 'n poméllo pe arvî 'n barcón de diàlogo '''Scèlte''' co-e segoénti schêde (a mancìnn-a):&lt;/span&gt;

* '''[[#Editing categories|{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}]]''' o permétte de azónze de categorîe a quésta pàgina e de scistemâ l'órdine co-o quæ a pàgina a l'è mostrâ, quànde a l'è inserîa inte 'na categorîa co 'n ìndice divèrso pe mostrâ a pàgina.
* '''[[#Editing page settings|{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}]]''' o permétte de trasformâ a pàgina inte 'n redirect e de cangiâ e sò inpostaçioîn, cómme quélle pe mostrâ a tabélla di contegnûi, pe dizativâ i colegaménti de modìfica vixìn a ògni tìtolo e pe definî a pàgina cómme 'na de dizanbigoaçión.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Inpostaçioîn avansæ''' o permétte de modìficâ e inpostaçioîn pe fâ conparî a pàgina tra i rizultâti mostræ da-i motoî de riçèrca, mostrando 'na tabélla pe azónze 'na nêuva seçión e ò tìtolo mostròu.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''{{int|visualeditor-mwlanguagevariantinspector-filter-langs-label}}''' o mostra a lìsta de pàgine in âtre léngoe colegæ a unn-a.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;'''Templates dêuviæ''' o mostra a lìsta di links a ògni template dêuviòu inta pàgina.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;E tabélle do barcón de diàlogo &quot;Scèlte&quot; són mostræ ascì into menù $pagemenu e pœan êse avèrte sciacando sórva de quéste.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;De ciù o menù $pagemenu o contegne o poméllo '''Véddi cómme drîta-a-mancìnn-a''' e o poméllo '''Trovâ e rinpiasa''', i quæ arvian o barcón de diàlogo dónde ti ti pœ inserî caràteri, tèrmini ò esprescioîn che ti ti stæ çercando ò quélle che ti ti vœ sostitoî, insémme a vàrri pomélli pe divèrse inpostaçioîn.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[File:OOjs UI icon edit-ltr.svg|frameless|150px|border|center]]
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;O poméllo '''pasa a l'editor vizoâle''' o s'atrovâ vixìn a-o poméllo '''$save'''. O permétte de pasâ a l'editor de wikitésto.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== Publicâ de modìfiche ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| Quànde a modìfica a l'è stæta efetoâ, sciacâ o poméllo vèrde ''{{int|publishchanges}}'' inta bâra d'instruménti. Se ti no t'hæ fæto de modìfiche o poméllo o l'è dezabilitòu (mostròu in grîxo). Pe cancelâ tùtti i tò cangiaménti, sera a tò pàgina web, òpû sciaca a lengoétta ''{{int|vector-view-view}}'' sórva a bâra d'instruménti pe-e modìfiche.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar actions|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Sciacando o poméllo bleu ''{{int|publishchanges-start}}'' o s'arve 'n barcón de diàlogo. Dónca ti ti pœ inserî chi 'n brêve somâio di cangiaménti che ti t'hæ fæto, segnâ l'edit cómme minô e/ò azónze a pàgina a-a tò $watchlist. O barcón pe-o somâio o l'è pægio a-o cànpo {{int|summary}} into editor de wikitèsto.&lt;/span&gt;

Ti ti pœ védde ascì e tò modìfiche sciacando o poméllo ''{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}'' pe êse segûo che séggian corètte prìmma de sarvâ a pàgina. O l'è scìmile a-o poméllo ''{{int|showdiff}}'' da modìfica vivàgna.

O poméllo ''{{int|Visualeditor-savedialog-label-resume-editing}}'' te riporta a-a pàgina che ti ti stâvi modìficando. Ti ti pœ sarvâ tùtte e modìfiche in ségoito.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor save dialog|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|}
{{anchor|Editing links|EditingLinks}}
== Modificâ i colegaménti ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;20&quot;
|-
| [[File:VisualEditor - Toolbar - Linking.png|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| Se pœan azónze di colegaménti atravèrso l'icónn-a ''{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}'' (a quæ a rafigua 'na cadénn-a) inta bâra d'instruménti, òpû dêuviando i tàsti ràpidi {{Key press|Ctrl|K}} (ò {{Key press|Command|K}} in sce 'n Mac).

Se ti ti seleçioni (evidençi) 'n tèsto e dòppo ti ti prémmi o poméllo ''{{int|visualeditor-annotationbutton-link-tooltip}}'', quéllo tèsto o saiâ dêuviòu pe creâ o colegaménto. Pe 'n colegaménto ch'o inclùdde 'na sôla paròlla ti ti pœ seleçionâ ò quélla paròlla òpû métte o pontatô do mouse in sciâ paròlla.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-search results|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| Ségge se ti t'adêuvi o poméllo ò i tàsti ràpiddi, o s'arviâ 'n barcón de diàlogo dónde poéi scrîve o colegaménto.
L'instruménto pe-i colegaménti o daiâ 'na màn co-i colegaménti '''intèrni''', çercando e cóbie probàbili.
Quànde ti t'hæ scrîto ò seleçionòu o colegaménto ti ti conpleti o procèsso de colegaménto sciacando {{Key press|Enter}} òpû o poméllo ''{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}''. O tò colegaménto o conpariâ sùbito inta pàgina ma, coscì cómme i âtri cangiaménti, o no saiâ publicòu scìn a-a publicaçión de ''tùtta'' a pàgina.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-link tool-external link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Pe fâ 'n colegaménto a 'na pàgina web inte 'n âtro scîto d’Internétte, o procèsso o l'è scìmile: ti ti çèrni a schêda ''{{int|visualeditor-linkinspector-button-link-external}}'' e ti t'inserisci 'n URL inta cazélla.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor link tool simple link|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| I colegaménti estèrni saiàn mostræ coscì: [http://example.com]. Quésti pœan êse azónti spostando o póntatô do mouse lónxi da de paròlle (prezénpio dòppo in spàçio). Arvî l'instruménto pe-i colegaménti sciacando in sciô poméllo ò dêuviando a scorsaieu da tastêa. Scrîve l'URL inta cazélla e sciacâ o poméllo ''{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}'' pe inserî o link.
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-context menu-link tool|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| Pe cangiâ ò levâ 'n colegaménto existénte, sciacâ sórva o colegaménto into tèsto e dónca prémme l'icónn-a ch'a apare. Se arviâ 'n barcón de diàlogo a quæ a consente de fâ a modìfica. Ti ti pœ fâ conparî o barcón de diàlogo dêuviando a scorsaieu da tastêa ascì. Quànde 'n colegaménto o l'è seleçionóu, o apare colorîo de bleu.

Into procèsso de colegaménto ti ti pœ cangiâ dónde o va o colegaménto. Ti ti pœ ascì levâ do tùtto o colegaménto sciacando o poméllo ''{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}'', in âto a drîta into barcón de diàlogo.
Ti ti pœ ascì arvî l'òbietîvo do colegaménto inte 'n âtra pàgina sciacando in sciô colegaménto into barcón de diàlogo, scistêma ch'o serve ascì pe verificâ a validitæ de 'n colegaménto estèrno.

Se ti ti vœ sciortî da-a modìfica do tèsto mostróu cómme 'n colegaménto, continoando a scrîve sùbito dòppo, ti ti pœ prémme {{Key press|→}}:
* Sciacando quésto tàsto 'na sôla vòtta ti ti sciortiæ da-a modìfica do colegaménto e o corsô o se mesciâ a-a fìn de l'eleménto co-in colegaménto (co-o bòrdo bleu).
* Sciacâ quésto tàsto dôe vòtte o mesciâ o corsô dòppo a-o colegaménto, prónto a scrîve do tèsto.

Pe modìficâ a scrîta into colegaménto de un za existénte, sciacâ into tèsto do colegaménto e scrîve quéllo nêuvo.
Ma se ti ti vœ rinpiasâ tùtta a scrîta, nòtta che:

* Se ti t'hæ seleçionóu (evidençiòu) tùtta a scrîta do colegaménto, quésto o saiâ scancelòu sciacando 'n qualónque tàsto.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pe mantegnî o colegaménto ti ti doviêsci sciacâ inta sò scrîta e dêuviâ o tàsto ''backspace'' pe cancelâ ezataménte i caràteri da scrîta, òperaçión ch'a mantegniâ 'n picìn spàçio evidençiòu de bleu.&lt;/span&gt; Òua ti ti pœ scrîve o nêuvo tèsto do colegaménto.
* Ti ti pœ colegâ [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Links|categorîe, files e âtro]] ascì.
|}

{{anchor|EditingReferences|Editing references}}
== Modificâ e nòtte ==
{{Further|1=[[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates|Agiùtto a l'ûzo di templates de çitaçión]] ò [[Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full|Agiùtto a l'ûzo do poméllo citoid's {{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}]]}}

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| colspan=2 | 
=== Determinâ quæ scistêma o l'è dêuvióu ===
|-
| A tó wiki a pœ dêuviâ 'n di tréi scistêmi de nòtte poscìbili. O prìmmo scistêma o l'è o ciù sénplice, dónde o menù ''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}'' (mostròu a drîta) o no inclùdde nisciùn di templates de çitaçión. Se a tó wiki a l'adêuvia quésto scistêma, alôa tùtto quéllo che ti pœ servî da savéi in scê nòtte a s'atrêuva inte quésta pàgina.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor cite menu default|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| O segóndo scistêma o l'ha a mæxima strutûa do menù ''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}'', ma con vàrri di ciù popolâri templates de çitaçión, colegæ pe 'n colegaménto ràpido. Se a tó wiki a l'adêuvia quésto scistêma, alôa ti ti pœ trovâ ciù detàli a {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Templates}}.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor citoid Cite button|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|100px]]
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Into tèrso scistêma, ti ti pœ iniçia sciacando o poméllo Çitta.&lt;/span&gt; Alôa o s'arve 'n barcón de diàlogo, o quæ o inclùdde 'n procèsso de çitaçión ch'o l'adêuvia o servìçio citoid. Se a tó wiki a l'adêuvia quésto scistêma, alôa ti ti pœ trovâ ciù detàli a {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/User guide/Citations-Full}}.
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor Citoid Inspector|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | 
===Modificâ 'na nòtta existénte===
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pe modificâ 'na nòtta existénte, sciacâ in sce quésta dónde a conpare into tèsto (de sòlito cómme 'n nùmero tra paréntexi). Ti ti véddiæ ò 'n'icónn-a ''$ref'' (segnalìbbro) ò 'n'icónn-a (e nómme) pe-o template ch'o l'è stæto dêuviòu pe creâ quésta nòtta. In ògni câxo, sciacando in sciô poméllo ''Edit'' o conpariâ o barcón de diàlogo da dónde ti ti pœ modificâ a nòtta.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pe l'icónn-a ''$ref'', sciacâ ''Edit'' o l'arve o barcón de diàlogo. Pe comensâ a cangiâ e informaçioîn inta nòtta, sciacâ in sce quésta.&lt;/span&gt;

Vàrie wikis dêuviàn di templates pe formatâ e nòtte. Se 'n template o l'è dêuviòu inte 'na nòtta, quànde ti ti mesci o póntatô do mouse sórva e informaçioîn da nòtta tùtte e informaçioîn chi contegnûe saiàn evidençiæ.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Se 'n template o l'êa stæto dêuviòu e ti ti prémmi in scê informaçioîn da nòtta, alôa l'icónn-a $template (o tòcco do puzzle) a conpariâ con de informaçioîn. Sciacâ in sciô poméllo ''edit'' pe modificâ o contegnûo do template atravèrso o sò barcón de diàlogo.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se quéllo ch'o conpare quànde ti ti prémmi in sce 'na nòtta o l'è 'n'icónn-a pe 'n template stàndard pe-e çitaçioîn (ti ti pœ védde 'n ezénpio chi a drîta), alôa sciacando ''Edit'' se arvîa o sò barcón de diàlogo.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Web|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Into barcón de diàlogo do template ti ti pœ azónze ò levâ informaçioîn, ò cangiâ o contegnûo atoâle. Sôlo i cànpi (paràmetri do template) che l'àn 'n contegnûo doviéivan êse vixìbili a l'inìçio. Pe azónze di nêuvi cànpi, sciacâ in sciô poméllo ''{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}'' in bàsso a-o barcón.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 5|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Prémmi in sce ''{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}'' quànde ti t'hæ finîo. 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== Riutilizâ 'na nòtta existénte ===
|-
| Se a pàgina a contegne za 'na çitaçión a-o tèsto che ti ti vœ çitâ, alôa ti ti pœ çèrne de riutilizâ a nòtta za existénte.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
Pe riutilizâ 'na nòtta za existénte, mesciâ o póntatô do mouse into pónto do tèsto dónde ti ti vœ azónze a nêuva nòtta (nùmero) pe quélla çitaçión. Alôa prémme in sce l'eleménto &quot;Riutilizâ nòtta&quot;, da-o menù &quot;{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
(Nòtta: se a tò wiki a l'ha o tèrso scistêma de nòtte sórva descrîto, ti ti véddiæ 'na scrîta ''Riutilizâ'' into barcón de diàlogo, in càngio de 'n eleménto ''Riutilizâ'' into menù ''$cite''.)
&lt;/div&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Cite menu re-use|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Into {{int|cite-ve-dialog-reference-title}} diàlogo, amia a-a lìsta de nòtte e seleçionn-a quélla che ti ti vœ riutilizâ. Se gh'è ciù de ina nòtta, ti ti pœ dêuviâ o barcón de riçèrca (ciamòu {{int|cite-ve-reference-input-placeholder}}) pe fâ a lìsta sôlo de nòtte che contegniàn 'n çèrto tèsto.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 18|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Azónze 'na nêuva nòtta ===
|-
| Pe azónze 'na çitaçión dêuviando o menù ''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}'', spostâ o póntatô do mouse dónde ti ti vœ azónze a nòtta into tèsto. Alôa seleçionâ o corètto tîpo de çitaçión into menù.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references more|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Dêuviâ a çitaçión ''bâze'' ====
|-
| Quéllo ch'o l'è mostróu chi o l'è quéllo che ti ti véddiæ se ti ti seleçioni l'eleménto pe-e nòtte de bâze.  Inte l'editor de-e nòtte, ti ti pœ azónze a tò çitaçión, formataçión inclùza.

Ti ti pœ ascì inclùdde a nòtta inte 'n çèrto grùppo, âtriménti quésto cànpo o saiâ lasciòu vêuo (quésta scèlta a l'è dêuviâ pe mostrâ i grùppi de nòtte co l'instruménto ''{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}'').
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 20|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Into barcón de diàlogo de nòtte, se ti ti vœ inclùdde 'n template de çitaçión ò 'n di âtri inte 'na nòtta, sciacâ l'icónn-a {{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}} ('n pésso de puzzle) inta menù d'instruménti ''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}'', inte l'editor de nòtte.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Dónca, çercâ o template ch'o se vœ dêuviâ, da azónze e modificâ cómme tùtti i âtri templates (véddi a seçión [[#Editing templates|Modificâ i templates]] ciù de sótta se a gh'è bezéugno de ciù informaçioîn in scî templates).

Dòppo avéi azónto 'n nêuvo template, sciacâ in sce ''{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}'' pe ritornâ a l'editor de nòtte e de nêuvo in sce ''{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}'' pe tornâ a-a modìfica da vôxe.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references 9|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Se inta pàgina o no l'è ancón prezénte 'n elénco de nòtte (prezénpio quànde se azónze a prìmma nòtta da pàgina), o va azónto pe fâ vizoalizâ o tèsto da nòtta.

Poxiçionâ o póntatô do mouse dónde se vœ che séggian vizoalizæ e nòtte (de sòlito a-a fìn da pàgina) e sciacâ o menù ''{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}'', in sce l'icónn-a ''{{int|cite-ve-dialogbutton-referenceslist-tooltip}}'' (tréi lìbbri).
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor References List Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Se ti ti dêuvi vàrri grùppi de nòtte, câxo de sòlito râro, ti ti pœ specificâ o grùppo inte quésto diàlogo. Sôlo e nòtte ch'apartegnian a quèllo grùppo saiàn mostræ inta pàgina inta poxiçión dónde o se trêuva o grùppo de nòtte.

L'ùrtimo pasàggio into barcón de diàlogo da lìsta de nòtte o l'è quéllo de sciacâ ''{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}''.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor references list|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 |
==== Dêuviâ i templates de çitaçión ====
|-
| A tò wiki a poriéiva avéi di templates de çitaçión de ciù into menù ''{{int|cite-ve-toolbar-group-label}}''. Se o l'è coscì ti t'hæ 'n colegaménto ràpido co-i templates de çitaçión ciù dêuviæ inta tò wiki. (E instruçioîn pe azónze templates de çitaçión de ciù inta tò wiki s'atrovàn a-a pàgina {{ll|VisualEditor/Citation tool}})
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing References - Cite Pulldown|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| Sciacâ in sce l'icónn-a do template ''Çita lìbbro'' o l'arve l'editor de quéllo template. Cànpi pe-e informaçioîn ciù inportànti saiàn evidençiæ co-în asterisco. Méntre i cànpi ciù comùn saiàn mostræ, no tùtti di quésti són domandæ.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Cite book required fields|png|-}}|frameless|border|430px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pe azónze ciù paràmetri, dâ ’na scòrsa a l'editor do template e sciacâ in sce a çèrnia ''{{int|visualeditor-dialog-transclusion-add-param-save}}''.&lt;/span&gt;

Prémmi in sce ''{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}'' quànde ti t'hæ finîo.
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Editing references - Add parameter|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing images and other media files|Images}}
== Modificâ e inmàgine e âtri files multimediâli ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| colspan=2 |
=== Modificâ e inmàgine ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a new image (or another type of media file) to the page, press the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; icon (a picture of mountains) in the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menu. The image will be added wherever your cursor is.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Media Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Pressing the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; icon opens a dialog that automatically searches Wikimedia Commons and your local wiki for media files related to the title of the page you are editing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can change the search by changing the text in the dialog's search box.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To choose a file, press on its thumbnail image.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This places the image onto the page you are editing.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After the image you selected is inserted into the page, another dialog will open. This dialog allows you to add and edit the caption of the image. The caption can contain formatting and links.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 6|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The media dialog also allows you to add alternative text captions, to help users who use screen readers, or who have disabled image display.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 7|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also set various parameters for the image in the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-advancedsettings-tool}}&quot; window. These include the alignment, the type, and size of the image.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 8|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you are done, press &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; to close the dialog and return to editing the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For an existing image, you can add or edit a caption or other settings by pressing on the image, then pressing on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-media-tooltip}}&quot; icon that appears below the picture.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can resize an existing image by pressing on it, then moving the resize icon (the two-headed arrow on one or both bottom corners).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can also drag and drop an image to a place higher or lower on the page.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|center|360px]]
|}

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Uploading images&lt;/span&gt; ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can upload images from a tab in the media dialog, or by dragging and dropping a file into the editor, or by pasting an image from your clipboard.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Upload&quot; tab and select an image from your computer. You can type the file name, or drag an image into the box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you dragged and dropped an image directly into the editor, or pasted one from your clipboard, this tab will open automatically.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 1.5|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You need to describe the image and add categories to it so that other people can find it.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Media upload 2|png|-}}|frameless|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The image will be inserted into the page when you are done.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-logo|svg|-}}|frameless|200px|center]]
|}

=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing media galleries&lt;/span&gt; ===

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a new gallery, press the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-mwgallerydialog-title}}&quot; icon (a set of photos) on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menu. (If you don't see this icon on that menu, then your local wiki has decided to delay implementing this functionality in the visual editor.)&lt;/span&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery1|png|-}}|frameless|border|150px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt; 
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit an existing gallery in the visual editor, press that gallery. Then, near the bottom of the gallery, press the gallery icon (a set of photos). This brings up the gallery editor, with the full list of images included in the gallery.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
|- 
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The gallery editor is currently a simple box that allows you to edit existing galleries using wikitext markup. To add a new image to an existing gallery, type the file name, followed by a bar (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) and the caption for that image. You must put each image in the gallery on its own line.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also edit this list to remove or rearrange images or to change captions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you press the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-done}}&quot; button, you will exit the gallery editor. You should then see your changes, with the gallery as it will now appear to readers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Remember that exiting the gallery editor does not publish your changes. As with other changes made using the visual editor, you must publish the entire page in order to publish your work.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Gallery3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing templates}}
== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing templates&lt;/span&gt; ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The powerful MediaWiki template system lets you insert dynamic content, text from other pages, and much more. For a detailed explanation and examples, see the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Templates|Templates help page]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the VisualEditor you can search for a relevant template, add an invocation or [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Transclusion|transclusion]] on the page you’re editing and, if needed, add custom content using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Glossary#Parameter|parameters]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Insert new template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a template to a page, place your cursor at the position on the page where you want the template to be inserted.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then open the {{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}} menu and select &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, type two curly brackets {{((}} to open the same dialog.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Template Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|500x500px|center]]
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find the template you want to insert by typing either its name or a relevant keyword.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Results containing the search term in either the name or description will display in a dropdown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should help you find a relevant template, even if you don’t know its exact name.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re having trouble finding the kind of template you want by using keywords, you can look on other wiki pages with similar content and view or edit the page source to see which templates are in use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you find the desired template’s name, you can type it into this field to insert it here.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Search.png|alt=Screenshot of the template search field in the Visual Editor|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also edit a template that’s already on a page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you select the template you want to edit, it turns blue, and a box appears displaying &quot;[[File:OOjs_UI_icon_puzzle-ltr.svg]]&amp;nbsp;{{int|visualeditor-dialogbutton-template-tooltip}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then select the &quot;{{int|vector-view-edit}}&quot; link  or double click on the template itself to open the template.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:VisualEditor_Template_Context_Menu.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor interface with a template selected|center|frameless|300x300px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some templates are not visible to someone reading a page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the visual editor, such hidden templates are still shown so that you can click and edit or delete them.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The name of the template will be shown next to the puzzle icon and both will be grayed out.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:VisualEditor_Hidden_Templates.png|alt=Screenshot of hidden templates in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|474x474px]]

|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
{{anchor|Template parameters}}
=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Template parameters&lt;/span&gt; ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You’ll see this dialog box when you’re adding a new template or editing one already in place.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What you see in the box depends on whether the template in question contains {{ll|Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData}}, helpful metadata added by other editors to make it easier to edit templates in the Visual Editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When a template contains TemplateData, the VisualEditor can use it to present annotated fields for you to fill in.
&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For templates that have some community-provided TemplateData, the VisualEditor displays a list of the named parameters and, often, descriptions and instructions explaining the meaning and required format for each parameter’s values.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Template_parameters_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Template parameters in the Visual Editor interface]]
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |&lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable any optional parameter (which have blue checkboxes on the left side).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a parameter’s checkbox is grayed out and not clickable, the template requires that parameter, so it can’t be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a new template, you may find that some optional parameters are pre-selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That means the author(s) of the template recommends the use of those parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It’s best to review all parameters that will be used in a template to ensure you understand their use.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking an unchecked parameter adds it to the template.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Clicking a parameter that’s already been added takes you to the parameter’s input field.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some template parameters will show as “deprecated”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don’t use deprecated parameters when inserting a template; they’re only visible to you because those parameters are in use on older pages where this template was included.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of template parameters in the Visual Editor interface|center|frameless|500x500px|Interface for adding more parameters to a template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Adding undocumented parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Adding undocumented parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re inserting or editing a template whose author hasn’t laid out its parameters in TemplateData, it has what we call “undocumented” or “unnamed parameters”.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases, you should consult the page for the template itself.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can learn how to correctly employ and work with all of the template’s parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This includes learning the exact names of the parameters as written by the template author.&lt;/span&gt;  

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you find in the documentation that the template expects parameters without names, fill in numbers as placeholders for the parameter names using the undocumented parameter input, then add text to the values you want to provide as you normally would.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter: “1”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;first unnamed parameter’s value: “en_US”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter: “2”&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;second unnamed parameter’s value: “yes”&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you accidentally include nonexistent, misspelled or erroneous parameters, the values you enter for those parameters won’t show up on the page you’re editing.
&lt;/div&gt; 
|[[File:Template_without_TemplateData_in_VisualEditor_(old_UI).png|alt=Screenshot of a template missing TemplateData|center|frameless|500x500px|Template without TemplateData in the Visual Editor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
{{anchor|Autogenerated parameters}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Autogenerated parameters ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, the template in question lacks TemplateData but it was possible to autogenerate the parameters. This means that the undocumented parameters have already been added for you, but the names may not be easily understandable and the dialog cannot display any directions or descriptions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As a result the dialog box provides a link to the template’s documentation, which should help you deduce and fill in the template’s various parameters.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Autogenerated_parameters_in_the_VisualEditor.png|center|frameless|500x500px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 |
{{anchor|Editing multi-part template content}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Editing multi-part template content ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During editing, you may open template content consisting of multiple templates or a single template linked to some wikitext.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This differs from the nested templates described below.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this case, the templates are better visualized as being stacked or connected.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This content often contains “unbalanced templates,” templates which are incomplete on their own and need to be paired with some wikitext or another template in order to function.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These related pieces of template content must be created in wikitext, but can be edited in the VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In these cases you will see a notice at the top of the dialog to signal the situation and a specialized toolbar will be visible at the bottom of the sidebar.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There you can use the icon buttons to add additional templates, additional wikitext, delete elements or change their order.&lt;/span&gt;

|[[File:Multi-part_template_content_in_the_VisualEditor (new).png|alt=Screenshot of the interface to edit multi-part template content in the VisualEditor|center|frameless|500x500px|Editing multi-part template content in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;2&quot; |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Nested templates ====
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Templates can include other templates as the value for parameters. You’ll recognize it when you see a parameter whose value contains the double curly braces &lt;nowiki&gt;( {{ }} )&lt;/nowiki&gt; denoting a template.&lt;/span&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The VisualEditor can’t present this template within a template (a nested template) using the editor’s easy-to-use interface, so if you want to nest a template yourself, you’ll need to understand how to add the template by hand in wikitext into the appropriate parameter field.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Embedded_template_in_VisualEditor.png|alt=Screenshot of the VisualEditor template interface showing an embedded template|center|frameless|417x417px|Embedded template in the VisualEditor]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
|-
| colspan=2 |
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Completing your edit ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you have finished editing a template, you can click &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then you can preview your edit and make sure it looks the way you want and expect.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may also see an error message, which (like the other TemplateData mentioned above) is community-provided content and may vary in usefulness.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to consult the template’s own documentation to get to the bottom of some errors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you’re still having trouble, consider posting about your problem on the template’s talk page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a template ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove a template in the VisualEditor, click the template box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press the &quot;Delete&quot; or &quot;Backspace&quot; key on your keyboard.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The template will disappear from the page.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[File:Removing_templates_from_a_page_via_context_menu_new.png|alt=Screenshot of the button to remove a template|center|frameless|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Removing a template in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing on mobile ===
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When editing a template on a page using the VisualEditor on a mobile device, you’ll see that the sidebar starts out hidden. You can make it visible by pressing the “Show/hide options” button.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[File:VisualEditor_template_editing_on_mobile.png|alt=Screenshot of editing a template on a mobile device|center|frameless|280px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing a template on mobile in the VisualEditor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | 
=== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substituting templates&lt;/span&gt; ===
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you insert a template in a wiki page, its content and appearance are reevaluated every time the page loads, based on the template code and the values of its parameters.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means if someone updates the code of a template, then every page which uses that template will also get updated when they publish.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There’s another, much less common way to use templates, though, and that’s to [[w:Help:Substitution|substitute]] a template.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Doing this permanently includes the template content just as it appears at the moment you insert it. It will not update if the template code is later changed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most users won’t ever need to resort to substitution.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Substitution is typically only useful when you need to capture the exact appearance of one version of a template, such as when content is under development and needs evaluation.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To substitute a template in the VisualEditor, insert a template using the name syntax &lt;code&gt;subst:&amp;lt;template name&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Autocomplete doesn’t work in this case.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then press the blue “Add template” button.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When you’re finished, press “Insert”, which will insert the template content as you see it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[File:SUBST_in_VE.png|alt=Screenshot of editor using SUBST to add a template|center|frameless|418x418px|Adding a template using SUBST in the VisualEditor]]
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Editing lists ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Toolbar Lists and indentation|png|-}}|frameless|border|300px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use the visual editor to create lists, or to change the format of an existing list. There are two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start a new list, just press on one of the two menu items shown here. Or, if you already have typed the list (on separate lines), select (highlight) the list you have typed, then press on one of the menu items.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 1 unordered bullet|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
  [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 2 ordered numbered|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shown here are examples of the two types of lists: unordered (bullet) and ordered (numbered).&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 3 select to indent|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to change the indentation level of part of an existing list, select the part of the list that you want to change.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists 4 indentation menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then use the menu, or press the Tab key. (The Tab key increases indentation;  use the shift key plus the Tab key to decrease indentation)&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists after indenting|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here is the result of increased indentation.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor lists mixed|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even mix ordered (numbered) and unordered (bullet) lists, if the list items have different indentations.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing tables&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor insert table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|200px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use the visual editor to insert and change tables.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can even import a table by dragging a comma-separated value (.csv) file from your computer into the main editing window.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you press on &quot;Table&quot;, in the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menu, the visual editor inserts a blank four-by-four table.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now the &quot;Table&quot; menu is available. From that menu, you can add a caption to the top of the table.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor empty table|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|170px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To select a cell, press it once.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables select one cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit the contents of the cell (for example, to add content or to correct a spelling error), double press in the cell. Or you can select the cell and then press Return.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To end your editing of a cell, just press elsewhere.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables type inside a cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor table editing add and remove columns|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|253px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add, move or delete a column or a row.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can merge cells: Select them, then from the Table menu, press on &quot;Merge cells&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables merge cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you merge cells, only the text in one cell is kept; any text in the other cells is deleted when you merge the cells. If you decide that you wanted some or all of the text that was deleted, use the Undo button, move or copy the text you want, then merge the cells again.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables post-merge cell|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also split cells that were previously merged.  All the content that was in the merged cell will remain in the first cell when you do the split. You can then cut and paste text to other cells, if you want.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor tables split cells|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|350px]]
|}

{{anchor|Editing categories}}
== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing categories&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category item|png|-}}|frameless|border|200px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit categories, on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; menu, press the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; item.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor category editing|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Pressing on &quot;{{int|visualeditor-categories-tool}}&quot; opens a dialog that lists existing categories and allows you to add new ones, and to delete existing categories.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You also have the option of setting or changing the general (default) [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Sorting#Sort order|sorting key]], which determines where the page appears when listed with other pages in the same category.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, the default sorting key for the article &quot;George Washington&quot; is &quot;Washington, George&quot;. In the category &quot;Presidents of the United States&quot;, the article is listed under the letter &quot;W&quot;, not the letter &quot;G&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 3|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a category for a page, type the name of the category into the field &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-categories-input-placeholder}}&quot;. As you type, the visual editor will search for possible matching, existing categories. You can either select an existing category, or you can add a category that doesn't yet have its own category page. (Until that category page is created, your new category will show as a red link after you publish all your editing changes.)&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - Category editing 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To remove an existing category, press on it and press on the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-inspector-remove-tooltip}}&quot; icon (trash can) in the dialog that opens.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Pressing on a category also allows you to specify a sorting key for that specific category. Such a sorting key overrides the default sorting key.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|150px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; when you are done editing categories to return to the page editor.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Editing page settings}}
== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing page settings&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor page settings item|png|-}}|frameless|border|500px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit a page's settings, press to open the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}}&quot; menu, in the toolbar, and select the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; button.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-label}}&quot; button opens a dialog that shows several options.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Redirects|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make a page a redirect to another page by checking the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-redirect-label}}&quot; checkbox, and then typing the name of the page to which you want to send the reader who tries to go to the page that you are editing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;At the bottom is the option to prevent page renames from updating this redirect. This is very rarely used.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings TOC|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|500px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can change whether the page shows a Table of Contents by selecting one of these three buttons. The default option is &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-meta-settings-toc-default}}&quot;, which shows a Table of Contents if there are three or more headings.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Page Settings Edit Links|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|400px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can make a page not show edit links next to each section header by checking this checkbox.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Apply Changes|png|-}}|frameless|border|center|300px]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Press &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-apply}}&quot; when you are done editing the {{int|visualeditor-pagemenu-tooltip}} to return to the page editor.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing maps&lt;/span&gt; ==
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| [[{{lm|Visual editor showing editing an existing map|jpg|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add and change maps. See {{ll|Help:VisualEditor/Maps}}.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

{{anchor|Editing mathematical formulae}}
== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing mathematical formulae&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a new mathematical formula to the page, place your cursor where you want it to be inserted, and press on the &quot;{{int|math-visualeditor-mwmathdialog-title}}&quot; icon (&quot;Σ&quot;) in the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-toolbar-insert}}&quot; menu on the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor Formula Insert Menu|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A window will open in which you can type the formula, using LaTeX syntax. the visual editor will update the formula as you type it, so you can see how it will look as you make changes. Once you are happy with the formula, press the &quot;{{int|visualeditor-dialog-action-insert}}&quot; button.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit an existing mathematical formula on the page, press on it and then press on the &quot;Σ&quot; icon that appears. This will open up the formula window, where you make changes.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor - editing existing mathematical formula|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mathematical formulae can be placed inline or centered as a block.&lt;/span&gt;
|[[{{lm|VisualEditor mathematic formula inline|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Editing musical scores ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To add a new musical notation to a page, place your cursor where you want the musical notation to be inserted.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then, from the &quot;Insert&quot; menu on the toolbar, press the &quot;Musical notation&quot; option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To edit an existing musical notation on the page, double press on it.
&lt;/div&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor-Insert-Musical-Notation|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will open the &quot;Musical notation&quot; dialog. Here the notation can be edited by scale, either in ABC or in Lilypond format.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also link the notation to an audio or MIDI file.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you are finished, press the &quot;Done&quot; button to close the dialog and publish your changes.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|Musical|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing poems and other special items&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some items, such as association lists and poems, are not yet fully supported by the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 1|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In most cases, the existing items can be edited, but new ones cannot be inserted in the visual editor.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Until they are fully supported, you can copy an existing one from another page, or edit the source wikitext directly.&lt;/span&gt;

| [[{{lm|VisualEditor editing poem 2|png|-}}|frameless|border|400px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Switching between the visual and wikitext editors&lt;/span&gt; ==

{| cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
| 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To switch from the visual editor to the wikitext editor, press the &lt;code&gt;[[&amp;nbsp;]]&lt;/code&gt; button on the far right of the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor toolbar Page options - Switch to wikitext - Save|png|-}} |frameless|border|200px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll see a diff. (If you pressed on &quot;Discard changes&quot;, you'll just see wikitext, ready to edit with the wikitext editor.)&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scroll down, and you'll see the wikitext editing area.&lt;/span&gt; 
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching diff before wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|500px|center]]
|-
| colspan=2 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also switch from the wikitext editor to the visual editor. To do that, press the pencil icon on the far right of the toolbar.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[{{lm|VisualEditor bi-directional switching pencil icon in wikitext|png|-}} |frameless|border|150px|center]]
|}

== &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Keyboard shortcuts&lt;/span&gt; ==

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many editors are used to entering wikitext directly, especially bold, italics and wikilinks. [[mw:VisualEditor/Portal/Keyboard shortcuts|Keyboard shortcuts]] allow to quickly insert similar formatting without having to use toolbar items. Here are the common general shortcuts in the visual editor:&lt;/span&gt;

{| style=&quot;text-align:center; margin:auto;&quot; cellpadding=&quot;15&quot;
|-
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PC shortcut&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Action&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mac shortcut&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|B}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Bold&lt;/span&gt;
| {{Key press|Cmd|B}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|I}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Italics&lt;/span&gt;
| {{Key press|Cmd|I}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|K}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Insert link&lt;/span&gt;
| {{Key press|Cmd|K}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|X}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Cut&lt;/span&gt;
| {{Key press|Cmd|X}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|C}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Copy&lt;/span&gt;
| {{Key press|Cmd|C}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|V}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Paste&lt;/span&gt;
| {{Key press|Cmd|V}}
|-
| colspan=3 | &lt;hr /&gt;
|-
| {{Key press|Ctrl|Z}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Undo&lt;/span&gt;
| {{Key press|Cmd|Z}}
|}
&lt;!-- Close **both** &lt;div&gt;s here --&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}|User guide]]
[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>e5o4kp4tmz9zrfu8ccybmjx3pis3neg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/lij</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1339891</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402779</id>
      <parentid>4565669</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:48:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="104" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Agiùtto a l'ûzo di templates de çitaçión]] ò [[$2|Agiùtto a l'ûzo do poméllo citoid's $3]]</text>
      <sha1>42enfq73tl42pm9920yokfseqh4jjx7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/lt</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>1351018</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403329</id>
      <parentid>5307417</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:23:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20758" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow users to enable JS-based, user-provided gadgets from their preferences page&lt;/span&gt;
|example         = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikimedia Commons: [[commons:Special:Gadgets|Gadget overview]], [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|user preferences]] (click &quot;Gadgets&quot;; you need to be logged in of course)&lt;/span&gt;
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The '''Gadgets''' extension provides a way for users to pick JavaScript or CSS based &quot;gadgets&quot; that other wiki users provide.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets are made up of JavaScript and/or CSS {{ll|snippets}} located on pages in the MediaWiki namespace.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each gadget is defined by a line in [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]], providing a name and description for the gadget, and a list of the JS and CSS snippets that it uses (see the ''[[#Usage|Usage]]'' section below).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Gadgets reside in the MediaWiki namespace (the list defining the gadgets as well as the actual code snippets), only sysops (interface admins from 1.32) can edit the code.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is as it should be: only users especially trusted by the wiki community should be able to edit JavaScript code that is used by other users, since JavaScript can easily be used to hijack accounts or spy on people.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Installation ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Usage ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Selection of some gadgets at the user preferences in de.wikipedia&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to define gadgets depending on the &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If It is &lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt; (the default value), the list of available gadgets is defined on '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In an alternative way, Gadget definitions are defined on pages in the [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|Gadget definition]] namespace when &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt; is set to &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{caution|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Migration of the existing gadget definitions is not yet supported, so you will lose previously defined gadgets after changing this option.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once created with at least one valid gadget, gadgets defined there show up in the &quot;Gadgets&quot; section of [[Special:Preferences]], so users can pick the gadgets they would like to use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An overview of the gadgets defined by MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition is also shown on '''[[Special:Gadgets]]''', along with links to the respective system messages, for easy editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Statistics for non-default gadget usage can be seen at '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Format ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using MediaWiki Gadgets Definition ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each line in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition that starts with one or more &quot;*&quot; (asterisks) characters defines a gadget; it must have the following form:&lt;/span&gt;

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;options (can be omitted)&lt;/span&gt;] | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;page names&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first field (&quot;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&quot; in the example) is the gadget's ''internal name'', and references a system message ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''' in the example) that contains a short description of the gadget, using wiki syntax.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''internal name'' is used as part of the name of a form field and must follow the [https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id rules defined for NAME attribute values].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means it must begin with a basic Latin letter (&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;) and may be followed by any number of letters, digits (&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;), hyphens (&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;), underscores (&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;), colons (&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;), and periods (&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Options format:
&lt;/div&gt;

 [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;option1&lt;/span&gt; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;option2&lt;/span&gt; | ... &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;optionN&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whitespace can be omitted.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A single option can either consist of a single option name (in this case it is a flag option), or contain a comma-separated list of values:&lt;/span&gt;

 option = value1, value2, value3

Pavyzdžiai:
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
arba
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
arba
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using Gadget Definition Namespace ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Creation of the [[Gadget definition:mygadget]] page and putting in it the below [[w:JSON|JSON]] code have the same effect as &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In above example, the [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] and the [[Gadget:mygadget.css]] are used.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember the &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; option is always true in the gadget definition namespace.&lt;/span&gt;

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add the following in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} to provide the appropriate permissions for users who are within the interface-admin group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing pages in the Gadget namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; right and editing pages in the Gadget definition namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt; right.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Options ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Name&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Parameters&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Description&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with {{ll|ResourceLoader}}.&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|list of default modules]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|privileges]].&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;''
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide the gadget from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Preferences]] page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be used in two ways:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to Common.js).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you need to add both: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated skin names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; in the URL, {{phab|T199478}}).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated action names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g. &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/span&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specifying &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; action will also load it on &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/span&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mark this gadget as [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the require() function.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (default), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set the {{ll|ResourceLoader}} target(s) for the gadget.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;or&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/span&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pre-release&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Makes the gadget to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|top-loaded]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can specify extra dependencies for your gadgets, for example:&lt;/span&gt;

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; with mygadget.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/span&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|permissions]], not user groups like [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here are some real examples:&lt;/span&gt;

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Pages ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' and '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css''' in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;.js&quot; or &quot;.css&quot;, respectively.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/div&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into {{tag|nowiki}} and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See the first and last lines of [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] for an example.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The list of gadgets in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;=&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would define a new section, with the title defined on the page [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadget Manager&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>29xvtzej01255mxenruq82jchv1p8vf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Portal/34/tr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1355747</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403191</id>
      <parentid>4625767</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:44:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="422" xml:space="preserve">* '''Yeni kullanıcılara yardım edin''' — Görsel Düzenleyici lansmanı başarılı olursa, alıştığımızdan çok daha fazla yeni kullanıcımız olacak ve düzenleme daha kolay olsa da, toplulukla nasıl etkileşim kuracağımızı bulmak yine de zor olacak. Bu yeni gelenlerin Vikipedi'ye alışmalarına yardımcı olmak için lütfen [[$1|yardım masasında veya IRC yardım kanalında]] biraz zaman geçirin.</text>
      <sha1>brdq7ce3vcv5wen3pu5c51dyjccp5hy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/na</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1355952</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402619</id>
      <parentid>4626688</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4520" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions (formerly known as Flow) are [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|a project]] of the Collaboration team at the Wikimedia Foundation to build a modern discussion and collaboration system for Wikimedia projects.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Quick tour ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How Structured Discussions look - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Try it!]]&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There is some specific terms concerning Structured Discussions. They have been defined in '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|the Glossary]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Advanced tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some advanced tools are available, for specific purposes. They have been regrouped on these subjects:
&lt;/div&gt;

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Activation&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What happens when Structured Discussions are enabled on a page?&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Topics&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filter topics, Edit a topic/message, Summarize a topic, Resolve a topic&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Permalinks&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to create links to subjects&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notifications and watchlist&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Ekadaedaenigawae}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How the history system works&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide, Delete, Suppress topics&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading contents on a new Structured Discussions conversation&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shortcuts&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Keyboard shortcuts to use on visual editing mode.&lt;/span&gt;

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All documentation on one page.&lt;/span&gt;}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>evy8kvui7lqka2j74eginevm72r0wkg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>ShoutWiki/de</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1365177</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401756</id>
      <parentid>5312689</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4044" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Viele Mitarbeiter von ShoutWiki sind auch MediaWiki-[[Developers/de|Entwickler]]. Siehe die [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki-Webseite] oder die [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki-Seite über ShoutWiki] um mehr über ShoutWiki allgemein herauszufinden.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki hat auch [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 eine eigene Gerrit-Gruppe], die aus ShoutWiki-Entwicklungsmitarbeitern besteht.

== Erweiterungen ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki nutzt viele Erweiterungen, die auch von Wikimedia-Seiten genutzt werden, zusätzlich zu ihren benutzerspezifischen Erweiterungen. Der Quellcode für die meisten dieser benutzerspezifischen Erweiterungen kann im [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia-Git-Repositorium (der offizielle MediaWiki-Git)] gefunden werden. Siehe [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]] für eine Liste der von ShoutWiki geschriebenen Erweiterungen.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.  See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Über ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Informationen über ShoutWiki und Open Source]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — unterschiedliche Code-Patches von ShoutWiki zum MediaWiki-Code
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki GitHub von ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5rwefwdtpfqkq60iqlyd95p3g2kgrn8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401775</id>
      <parentid>5401756</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:53:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4043" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Viele Mitarbeiter von ShoutWiki sind auch MediaWiki-[[Developers/de|Entwickler]]. Siehe die [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki-Webseite] oder die [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki-Seite über ShoutWiki] um mehr über ShoutWiki allgemein herauszufinden.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki hat auch [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 eine eigene Gerrit-Gruppe], die aus ShoutWiki-Entwicklungsmitarbeitern besteht.

== Erweiterungen ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki nutzt viele Erweiterungen, die auch von Wikimedia-Seiten genutzt werden, zusätzlich zu ihren benutzerspezifischen Erweiterungen. Der Quellcode für die meisten dieser benutzerspezifischen Erweiterungen kann im [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia-Git-Repositorium (der offizielle MediaWiki-Git)] gefunden werden. Siehe [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]] für eine Liste der von ShoutWiki geschriebenen Erweiterungen.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Über ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Informationen über ShoutWiki und Open Source]
*{{Localized link|Category: Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] — unterschiedliche Code-Patches von ShoutWiki zum MediaWiki-Code
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki GitHub von ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>59uszvr2vj8uuz1hgnetwi2rc0j7b5g</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401875</id>
      <parentid>5401775</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:22:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4035" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Ptag|ShoutWiki}}
'''ShoutWiki''' is a free wiki hosting service (also known as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Wiki farms|wiki farm]]) from the United Kingdom.
Officially registered in England and Wales (as '''ShoutWiki Limited'''),&lt;ref name=CompaniesHouseOverview&gt;[https://beta.companieshouse.gov.uk/company/09749047 ShoutWiki Limited, Company number 09749047 - overview]; ''CompaniesHouse.gov.uk''; Companies House, United Kingdom; retrieved 6 August 2022.&lt;/ref&gt; all ShoutWiki hosted sites are powered by the [[MediaWiki]] wiki engine.
ShoutWiki is known for its various different, unique [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki|MediaWiki extensions]] (including [[social tools]]), along with their ports of various [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:Skins by ShoutWiki|skins]] (many created from WordPress skins).
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Viele Mitarbeiter von ShoutWiki sind auch MediaWiki-[[Developers/de|Entwickler]]. Siehe die [http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki-Webseite] oder die [http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About ShoutWiki-Seite über ShoutWiki] um mehr über ShoutWiki allgemein herauszufinden.&lt;/span&gt;
ShoutWiki hat auch [https://gerrit.wikimedia.org/r/#/admin/groups/285 eine eigene Gerrit-Gruppe], die aus ShoutWiki-Entwicklungsmitarbeitern besteht.

== Erweiterungen ==
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ShoutWiki nutzt viele Erweiterungen, die auch von Wikimedia-Seiten genutzt werden, zusätzlich zu ihren benutzerspezifischen Erweiterungen. Der Quellcode für die meisten dieser benutzerspezifischen Erweiterungen kann im [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia-Git-Repositorium (der offizielle MediaWiki-Git)] gefunden werden. Siehe [[:Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki]] für eine Liste der von ShoutWiki geschriebenen Erweiterungen.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See {{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}} for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.&lt;/span&gt;

As of August 2022, ShoutWiki is available with the option of fifteen (15) [[Special:MyLanguage/Category:All skins|skins]].&lt;ref&gt;
[http://shoutwiki.com/wiki/Special:Version#Installed_skins ShoutWiki: Special: Version – installed skins]; ''ShoutWiki.com/wiki''; ShoutWiki Hub; retrieved 6 August 2022.
&lt;/ref&gt;

==Backups and database dumps==

There are [https://archive.org/details/shoutwiki.com backups for some of the ShoutWiki wikis] by WikiTeam at the Internet Archive WaybackMachine located at Archive.org.

As of 6 June 2012, there are instant database dumps available for individual wikis.
See [https://blog.ShoutWiki.com/2012/06/new-feature-instant-database-dumps/ here].

==References==

&lt;References/&gt;

==External links==

*[http://www.shoutwiki.com/ ShoutWiki] — official website
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Project:About Über ShoutWiki]
**[http://www.shoutwiki.com/wiki/ShoutWiki_Hub:Open_source Informationen über ShoutWiki und Open Source]
*{{ll|Category:Extensions by ShoutWiki}}
*[[ShoutWiki/Patches]] &amp;mdash; unterschiedliche Code-Patches von ShoutWiki zum MediaWiki-Code
*[https://github.com/ShoutWiki GitHub von ShoutWiki]
*[https://wikistats.wmcloud.org/display.php?t=sw WikiStats – List of ShoutWikis] — sortable list table of ShoutWiki wiki sites from Wikistats 2.2 at WikiStats.WMCloud.org; MediaWiki statistics, hosted by Wikimedia Cloud Services (WMCS)
*[[WikiApiary:Farm:ShoutWiki|Farm:ShoutWiki (ID: 24706)]] — at [[WikiApiary|WikiApiary.com]] (founded 2011), the wiki site for detailed information on all MediaWiki-powered websites; including list of active ''and'' defunct ShoutWiki-hosted wiki sites
*[[WikiIndex:Category:ShoutWiki|Category: ShoutWiki]] — list of ShoutWiki hosted wiki sites, at WikiIndex.org, the wiki 'index' of all wiki sites

[[Category:Wiki farms{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>s1s30d8xkts8t6owv793w7u3yjjgqp4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/bn</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1383476</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401790</id>
      <parentid>5184869</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3939" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

== ভূমিকা ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

== সামাজিক যোগাযোগ মাধ্যমে চ্যানেলসমূহ ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== মিডিয়াউইকি ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

=== উইকিমিডিয়া প্রযুক্তি ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

== আমাদের পরিচালনা বিধি ==
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

দয়া করে লক্ষ্য করুন, আমরা সামাজিক যোগাযোগ মাধ্যমের চ্যানেলগুলো রক্ষণশীলতার সাথে পরিচালনা করা এবং আমাদের পোস্টগুলোতে নিরপেক্ষ দৃষ্টিভঙ্গি বজায় রাখার বিষয়টি নিশ্চিত করা গুরুত্বপূর্ণ বলে মনে করি।

== টুইটার ও ফেসবুকে পোস্ট করা ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>n94qae1rzv4tyqw1fnibolc08mzleri</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Lakeus</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1386860</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401655</id>
      <parentid>5293580</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T16:00:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Lakejason0</username>
        <id>17199297</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>// Edit via Wikiplus</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="23333" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin|templatemode=
|name          = Lakeus
|status        = stable
|username      = Lakejason0
|author        = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Lakejason0
* Light beacon
* Dianliang233
* Winston Sung
* ...
|image         = SkinLakeus.png
|imagesize     = 320
|version       = 1.1.12
|update        = 2022-08-07
|mediawiki     = 1.36+
|php           = 
|compatibility policy = rel
|license       = GPL-3.0-or-later
|download      = {{GithubDownload|lakejason0|mediawiki-skins-Lakeus|translatewiki=1}}
|translate     = mwgithub-lakeus
|example       = [https://skins.toolforge.org/index.php?useskin=lakeus Example on MediaWiki Skins Wiki]
|compatibility = 
|parameters    = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder&lt;/code&gt;
}}

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:1--&gt; &lt;tvar name=1&gt;'''Lakeus'''&lt;/tvar&gt; is a skin that aims to provide a simple but all-functional experience.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; It's named after a character in the novel of one of the authors, Lakejason0.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Installation == &lt;!--T:2--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{SkinInstall
|download-link=[https://github.com/lakejason0/mediawiki-skins-Lakeus/releases/latest &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:39--&gt; Download&lt;/translate&gt;]
|registration=Yes
}}

&lt;translate&gt;
== Features == &lt;!--T:3--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Simple but all-functional (at least most of them should work).&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; Works when JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; Customization through CSS variables.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; Responsive design.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:18--&gt; Should work with desktop and tablet; on very narrow phones the sidebar menu might be too wide to close.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; A Theme designer.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:43--&gt; By enabling it in your preferences you can change and preview the theme in real time.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:44--&gt; For the most of time, only a few tweaks on basic variables are needed and it will produce an automagically calculated theme for you.&lt;/translate&gt;
** &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:45--&gt; It might be a bit buggy and unstable, so be sure to report any of the problems to me!&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:46--&gt; You can always disable automatic calculation if you are not satisfied.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Planned Features == &lt;!--T:25--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; A [[&lt;tvar name=1&gt;phab:T244392&lt;/tvar&gt;|WVUI search bar]], the same as in the new &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Skin:Vector|nsp=0}}&lt;/tvar&gt;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Notes == &lt;!--T:6--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; The skin should be usable even when JavaScript isn't present.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; Several handy features may not be available though.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; The skin made a dedicated menu for site that uses a language with &lt;tvar name=1&gt;LanguageConverter&lt;/tvar&gt; variants (e.g. Chinese (&lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;zh&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;) and Serbian).&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; When no variants available, the menu should be invisible.&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; RTL support hasn't been tested well, but main features are confirmed RTL compatible (e.g. sidebar menus).&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
== Customization == &lt;!--T:14--&gt;

=== CSS variables === &lt;!--T:20--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{{note|1=&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; Your CSS may not work in several special pages (like &lt;tvar name=1&gt;[[Special:Preferences|{{int|preferences}}]]&lt;/tvar&gt;); it's an intended behavior of MediaWiki core due to security concerns, but site admins could set &lt;tvar name=2&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages|$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}}&lt;/tvar&gt; to &lt;tvar name=3&gt;{{phpi|true}}&lt;/tvar&gt; to bypass it after understanding the risks.&lt;/translate&gt;}}
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Lakeus supports customization through CSS variables.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:78--&gt; Below are several methods to generate a theme, and to apply the result (should be CSS code) you'll need to copy it to &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, which can be found on &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; for all wiki users, and &lt;tvar name=3&gt;&lt;code&gt;Special:MyPage/Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; for yourself.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;
==== Theme Designer ==== &lt;!--T:47--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:48--&gt; Using the theme designer would be easier for anyone (at least I hope so).&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:49--&gt; You'll only need to change the basic variables and the rest will be automatically calculated.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:50--&gt; You can disable the auto calculation for each variable that you don't really like the auto calculated result of it, and manually tweak it as you like.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:51--&gt; To enable it, go to the preferences, select &quot;Appearance&quot;, and you can find the option when the skin Lakeus is selected.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:52--&gt; Once enabled, it would load on every page.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:53--&gt; Basically all the buttons and form inputs do what it literally means; just try them out if you are a bit confused.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:54--&gt; There ''are'' some variables that do not appear on every page, and they would be listed below:&lt;/translate&gt;
* &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:55--&gt; Interface message box.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:56--&gt; These elements appears in situations like that a user group setting is successfully applied when JavaScript disabled, translation page edit notice warning, MediaWiki exceptions that appears on page editing, user talk page notices with no Echo and other notification extensions installed, and so on.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
==== Preset themes ==== &lt;!--T:57--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:58--&gt; There will be some preset theme that is already here for you to use.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:59--&gt; You can share your own theme on the talk page as well.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:60--&gt; Come back later if there isn't any.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
===== Vintage ===== &lt;!--T:62--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:63--&gt; A vintage theme, last exported on 1.1.7.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #8e860a;
    --color-secondary: #eeebe7;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: rgba(238,235,231,0);
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #eeebe7;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #8c8985;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #8e860a;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-bar: #8c8985;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #8e860a;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0,0,0,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #000000;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #9b9b9b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-content: #24220a;
    --background-color-body: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #bcb9b5;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #8e860a;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #e4e1dd;
    --border-color-toc: #b2afab;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #e9e6e2;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #9e9c98;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #dfdcd8;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(44,44,44,0.1);
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #dad7d3;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
===== Ocean ===== &lt;!--T:76--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:77--&gt; A theme with light blue color scheme, last exported on 1.1.8.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #3366cc;
    --color-secondary: #f4fcff;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: #e2f4fe;
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #f4fcff;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #91989b;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #3366cc;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-bar: #91989b;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #f4fcff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #3366cc;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(35,93,194,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #91989b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #0955b8;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-content: #000000;
    --background-color-body: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #c1c9cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #3366cc;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #eaf2f5;
    --border-color-toc: #b7bfc2;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #eff7fa;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #a4abae;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #e5ecef;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --text-color-portlet-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(112,147,255,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #e2f4fe;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;

==== Manually change the variables ==== &lt;!--T:61--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; Below is the default setting of CSS variables; modify these settings and put the result into your &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --background-color-base: white;
  --background-color-body: white;
  --background-color-content: white;
  --background-color-footer: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list: white;
  --background-color-portlet-body: white;
  --background-color-toggle-list-card: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-edit-options: #eee;
  --background-color-search-suggestions: #fff;
  --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #1d5492;
  --background-color-search-input: #fff;
  --background-color-toc: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #eaecf0;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fee7e6;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fef6e7;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d5fdf4;
  --background-color-user-message: #ffce7b;
  --background-color-wikitable: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #eaecf0;
  --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-content: #ccc;
  --border-color-toggle-list: #ddd;
  --border-color-search-suggestions: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-search-bar: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-portlet-body: var(--color-gray);
  --border-color-header-tab: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-toc: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #d33;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fc3;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
  --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
  --border-color-wikitable: #a2a9b1;
  --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
  --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #000000;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item: #1c1c1c;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-content: #000000;
  --text-color-header: #000000;
  --text-color-body: #000000;
  --text-color-footer: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
  --text-color-user-message: #000000;
  --text-color-wikitable: #202122;
  --icon-filter-header: unset;
  --color-search-suggestions-text: #000;
  --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #fff;
  --color-tagline: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #54595d;
  --color-accent-header-tab-new: #54595d;
  --color-header: white;
  --color-base: #54595d;
  --color-gray: #a2a9b1;
  --color-gray-2: #eaecf0;
  --color-link: #0645ad;
  --color-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-new: #d33;
  --color-link-new--visited: #a55858;
  --color-link-new--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-external: #36b;
  --color-link-external--visited: #636;
  --color-link-external--active: #b63;
  --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
  --color-footer-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-footer-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-toc-number: #202122;
  --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
  --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
  --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
  --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
  --header-elevation: var(--elevation);
  --mask-background: rgba( 0, 0, 0, 0.8 );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:19--&gt;
For example, to change the header's color to a light blue (e.g. &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;#4FC3F7&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), it would be:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --color-header: #4FC3F7;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;

=== Parameters === &lt;!--T:21--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:32--&gt; Parameter&lt;/translate&gt;
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:33--&gt; Type&lt;/translate&gt;
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:34--&gt; Default&lt;/translate&gt;
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; Description&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink}}
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:36--&gt; Boolean&lt;/translate&gt;
| {{phpi|true}}
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:22--&gt; Determines whether to show the link to the skin's repository in the footer.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLogos}}
|
|
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:24--&gt; For now, only &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and &lt;tvar name=2&gt;&lt;code&gt;wordmark&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; are recognized; keys like &lt;tvar name=3&gt;&lt;code&gt;svg&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=4&gt;&lt;code&gt;1x&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, &lt;tvar name=5&gt;&lt;code&gt;1.5x&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; or &lt;tvar name=6&gt;&lt;code&gt;2x&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; are not used by the skin.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:37--&gt; Notice that other skins may utilize the image provided by &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; '''AND''' other keys as well, so do not rely on the key to provide a icon only for this skin.&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder}}
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:38--&gt; Boolean&lt;/translate&gt;
| {{phpi|false}}
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:29--&gt; Determines whether to add a skin provided border to site notice.&lt;/translate&gt; &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt; Enabling it can be useful for plain text notices, but if you've already got a border in your site notice content, you can leave it disabled.&lt;/translate&gt;
|}

&lt;translate&gt;
=== Sidebar icons === &lt;!--T:64--&gt;
&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:65--&gt; Unfortunately, it's not easy to add icons to the skin without including many images on page.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:66--&gt; If you can bear the loading time of web font icons, you can try this out as follows.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:67--&gt; To start with, include the icon font face (in this whole example, Material Icons) in your CSS (&lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;).&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:68--&gt; You may have loaded some font faces in other places other than &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;, in which case just ensure that they don't conflict with each other.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* MD Icons */
/* fallback */
@font-face {
  font-family: 'Material Icons';
  font-style: normal;
  font-weight: 400;
  src: url(https://fonts.gstatic.com/s/materialicons/v70/flUhRq6tzZclQEJ-Vdg-IuiaDsNc.woff2) format('woff2');
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:69--&gt;
Then, as we are going to use pseudo elements, some paddings and extra settings to create space for icons are applied:
&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
.toggle-list__list a {
    padding-left: calc(8px + 25px);
}

.toggle-list__list a::before {
    content: '';
    width: 0;
    height: 0;
    display: inline-block;
    font-family: 'Material Icons';
    font-size: 18px;
    transform: translateX(-25px) translateY(3px);
    /* Display Optimizing */
    -webkit-font-smoothing: antialiased;
    text-rendering: optimizeLegibility;
    -moz-osx-font-smoothing: grayscale;
    font-feature-settings: 'liga';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:70--&gt; Now, it's time to add the actual icons.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:71--&gt; You can use Devtools (The tool opened by right click and then Inspect Element) to see the list items' IDs, and we are finally going to set the actual content of the pseudo elements (icons):&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Navigation */
#n-mainpage-description a::before {
    content: 'home';
}

#n-recentchanges a::before {
    content: 'auto_awesome';
}

#n-randompage a::before {
    content: 'shuffle';
}

#n-portal a::before {
    content: 'forum';
}

#n-help-mediawiki a::before {
    content: 'help_center';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:72--&gt; In this example, Material Icons supports certain strings (used here) and code points for an certain icon.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:73--&gt; For what strings or code points could be used for Material Icons, see [&lt;tvar name=url&gt;https://fonts.google.com/icons&lt;/tvar&gt; Icons - Google Fonts].&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:74--&gt; Feel free to add more rules for your own site, for example one of the authors' site got an admin noticeboard:&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot; highlight=1&gt;
#n-adminnoticeboard a::before {
    content: 'groups';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:75--&gt;
The &lt;tvar name=1&gt;&lt;code&gt;#n-...&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; part corresponds with the system message you used in your &lt;tvar name=2&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/tvar&gt;.
&lt;/translate&gt;

[[Category:Mobile skins{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>jlppns5ydtee9b3qng6z8u4t0wv8cyw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Lakeus/en</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1386922</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401680</id>
      <parentid>5293581</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:34:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20278" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin|templatemode=
|name          = Lakeus
|status        = stable
|username      = Lakejason0
|author        = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Lakejason0
* Light beacon
* Dianliang233
* Winston Sung
* ...
|image         = SkinLakeus.png
|imagesize     = 320
|version       = 1.1.12
|update        = 2022-08-07
|mediawiki     = 1.36+
|php           = 
|compatibility policy = rel
|license       = GPL-3.0-or-later
|download      = {{GithubDownload|lakejason0|mediawiki-skins-Lakeus|translatewiki=1}}
|translate     = mwgithub-lakeus
|example       = [https://skins.toolforge.org/index.php?useskin=lakeus Example on MediaWiki Skins Wiki]
|compatibility = 
|parameters    = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder&lt;/code&gt;
}}

'''Lakeus''' is a skin that aims to provide a simple but all-functional experience.
It's named after a character in the novel of one of the authors, Lakejason0.

== Installation ==
{{SkinInstall
|download-link=[https://github.com/lakejason0/mediawiki-skins-Lakeus/releases/latest Download]
|registration=Yes
}}

== Features ==
* Simple but all-functional (at least most of them should work).
* Works when JavaScript is disabled.
* Customization through CSS variables.
* Responsive design. Should work with desktop and tablet; on very narrow phones the sidebar menu might be too wide to close.
* A Theme designer. By enabling it in your preferences you can change and preview the theme in real time. For the most of time, only a few tweaks on basic variables are needed and it will produce an automagically calculated theme for you.
** It might be a bit buggy and unstable, so be sure to report any of the problems to me! You can always disable automatic calculation if you are not satisfied.

== Planned Features ==
* A [[phab:T244392|WVUI search bar]], the same as in the new {{ll|Skin:Vector|nsp=0}}.

== Notes ==
* The skin should be usable even when JavaScript isn't present. Several handy features may not be available though.
* The skin made a dedicated menu for site that uses a language with LanguageConverter variants (e.g. Chinese (&lt;code&gt;zh&lt;/code&gt;) and Serbian). When no variants available, the menu should be invisible.
* RTL support hasn't been tested well, but main features are confirmed RTL compatible (e.g. sidebar menus).

== Customization ==

=== CSS variables ===
{{note|1=Your CSS may not work in several special pages (like [[Special:Preferences|{{int|preferences}}]]); it's an intended behavior of MediaWiki core due to security concerns, but site admins could set {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages|$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}} to {{phpi|true}} to bypass it after understanding the risks.}}
Lakeus supports customization through CSS variables. Below are several methods to generate a theme, and to apply the result (should be CSS code) you'll need to copy it to &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, which can be found on &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; for all wiki users, and &lt;code&gt;Special:MyPage/Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; for yourself.
==== Theme Designer ====
Using the theme designer would be easier for anyone (at least I hope so). You'll only need to change the basic variables and the rest will be automatically calculated. You can disable the auto calculation for each variable that you don't really like the auto calculated result of it, and manually tweak it as you like.

To enable it, go to the preferences, select &quot;Appearance&quot;, and you can find the option when the skin Lakeus is selected. Once enabled, it would load on every page.

Basically all the buttons and form inputs do what it literally means; just try them out if you are a bit confused. There ''are'' some variables that do not appear on every page, and they would be listed below:
* Interface message box. These elements appears in situations like that a user group setting is successfully applied when JavaScript disabled, translation page edit notice warning, MediaWiki exceptions that appears on page editing, user talk page notices with no Echo and other notification extensions installed, and so on.

==== Preset themes ====
There will be some preset theme that is already here for you to use. You can share your own theme on the talk page as well. Come back later if there isn't any.

===== Vintage =====
A vintage theme, last exported on 1.1.7.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #8e860a;
    --color-secondary: #eeebe7;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: rgba(238,235,231,0);
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #eeebe7;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #8c8985;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #8e860a;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-bar: #8c8985;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #8e860a;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0,0,0,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #000000;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #9b9b9b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-content: #24220a;
    --background-color-body: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #bcb9b5;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #8e860a;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #e4e1dd;
    --border-color-toc: #b2afab;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #e9e6e2;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #9e9c98;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #dfdcd8;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(44,44,44,0.1);
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #dad7d3;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===== Ocean =====
A theme with light blue color scheme, last exported on 1.1.8.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #3366cc;
    --color-secondary: #f4fcff;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: #e2f4fe;
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #f4fcff;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #91989b;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #3366cc;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-bar: #91989b;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #f4fcff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #3366cc;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(35,93,194,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #91989b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #0955b8;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-content: #000000;
    --background-color-body: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #c1c9cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #3366cc;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #eaf2f5;
    --border-color-toc: #b7bfc2;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #eff7fa;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #a4abae;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #e5ecef;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --text-color-portlet-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(112,147,255,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #e2f4fe;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


==== Manually change the variables ====

Below is the default setting of CSS variables; modify these settings and put the result into your &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --background-color-base: white;
  --background-color-body: white;
  --background-color-content: white;
  --background-color-footer: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list: white;
  --background-color-portlet-body: white;
  --background-color-toggle-list-card: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-edit-options: #eee;
  --background-color-search-suggestions: #fff;
  --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #1d5492;
  --background-color-search-input: #fff;
  --background-color-toc: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #eaecf0;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fee7e6;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fef6e7;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d5fdf4;
  --background-color-user-message: #ffce7b;
  --background-color-wikitable: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #eaecf0;
  --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-content: #ccc;
  --border-color-toggle-list: #ddd;
  --border-color-search-suggestions: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-search-bar: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-portlet-body: var(--color-gray);
  --border-color-header-tab: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-toc: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #d33;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fc3;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
  --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
  --border-color-wikitable: #a2a9b1;
  --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
  --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #000000;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item: #1c1c1c;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-content: #000000;
  --text-color-header: #000000;
  --text-color-body: #000000;
  --text-color-footer: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
  --text-color-user-message: #000000;
  --text-color-wikitable: #202122;
  --icon-filter-header: unset;
  --color-search-suggestions-text: #000;
  --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #fff;
  --color-tagline: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #54595d;
  --color-accent-header-tab-new: #54595d;
  --color-header: white;
  --color-base: #54595d;
  --color-gray: #a2a9b1;
  --color-gray-2: #eaecf0;
  --color-link: #0645ad;
  --color-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-new: #d33;
  --color-link-new--visited: #a55858;
  --color-link-new--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-external: #36b;
  --color-link-external--visited: #636;
  --color-link-external--active: #b63;
  --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
  --color-footer-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-footer-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-toc-number: #202122;
  --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
  --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
  --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
  --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
  --header-elevation: var(--elevation);
  --mask-background: rgba( 0, 0, 0, 0.8 );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

For example, to change the header's color to a light blue (e.g. &lt;code&gt;#4FC3F7&lt;/code&gt;), it would be:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --color-header: #4FC3F7;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


=== Parameters ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Parameter
! Type
! Default
! Description
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink}}
| Boolean
| {{phpi|true}}
| Determines whether to show the link to the skin's repository in the footer.
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLogos}}
|
|
| For now, only &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wordmark&lt;/code&gt; are recognized; keys like &lt;code&gt;svg&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1x&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1.5x&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;2x&lt;/code&gt; are not used by the skin. Notice that other skins may utilize the image provided by &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; '''AND''' other keys as well, so do not rely on the key to provide a icon only for this skin.
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder}}
| Boolean
| {{phpi|false}}
| Determines whether to add a skin provided border to site notice. Enabling it can be useful for plain text notices, but if you've already got a border in your site notice content, you can leave it disabled.
|}

=== Sidebar icons ===
Unfortunately, it's not easy to add icons to the skin without including many images on page.
If you can bear the loading time of web font icons, you can try this out as follows.
To start with, include the icon font face (in this whole example, Material Icons) in your CSS (&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;).
You may have loaded some font faces in other places other than &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, in which case just ensure that they don't conflict with each other.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* MD Icons */
/* fallback */
@font-face {
  font-family: 'Material Icons';
  font-style: normal;
  font-weight: 400;
  src: url(https://fonts.gstatic.com/s/materialicons/v70/flUhRq6tzZclQEJ-Vdg-IuiaDsNc.woff2) format('woff2');
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Then, as we are going to use pseudo elements, some paddings and extra settings to create space for icons are applied:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
.toggle-list__list a {
    padding-left: calc(8px + 25px);
}

.toggle-list__list a::before {
    content: '';
    width: 0;
    height: 0;
    display: inline-block;
    font-family: 'Material Icons';
    font-size: 18px;
    transform: translateX(-25px) translateY(3px);
    /* Display Optimizing */
    -webkit-font-smoothing: antialiased;
    text-rendering: optimizeLegibility;
    -moz-osx-font-smoothing: grayscale;
    font-feature-settings: 'liga';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Now, it's time to add the actual icons.
You can use Devtools (The tool opened by right click and then Inspect Element) to see the list items' IDs, and we are finally going to set the actual content of the pseudo elements (icons):

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Navigation */
#n-mainpage-description a::before {
    content: 'home';
}

#n-recentchanges a::before {
    content: 'auto_awesome';
}

#n-randompage a::before {
    content: 'shuffle';
}

#n-portal a::before {
    content: 'forum';
}

#n-help-mediawiki a::before {
    content: 'help_center';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

In this example, Material Icons supports certain strings (used here) and code points for an certain icon.
For what strings or code points could be used for Material Icons, see [https://fonts.google.com/icons Icons - Google Fonts].
Feel free to add more rules for your own site, for example one of the authors' site got an admin noticeboard:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot; highlight=1&gt;
#n-adminnoticeboard a::before {
    content: 'groups';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

The &lt;code&gt;#n-...&lt;/code&gt; part corresponds with the system message you used in your [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].

[[Category:Mobile skins{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>lhpldpltrp6on2pmzhugj0g34inzmyf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Lakeus/zh</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1386924</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401690</id>
      <parentid>5293590</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:35:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20340" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin|templatemode=
|name          = Lakeus
|status        = stable
|username      = Lakejason0
|author        = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Lakejason0
* Light beacon
* Dianliang233
* Winston Sung
* ...
|image         = SkinLakeus.png
|imagesize     = 320
|version       = 1.1.12
|update        = 2022-08-07
|mediawiki     = 1.36+
|php           = 
|compatibility policy = rel
|license       = GPL-3.0-or-later
|download      = {{GithubDownload|lakejason0|mediawiki-skins-Lakeus|translatewiki=1}}
|translate     = mwgithub-lakeus
|example       = [https://skins.toolforge.org/index.php?useskin=lakeus Example on MediaWiki Skins Wiki]
|compatibility = 
|parameters    = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder&lt;/code&gt;
}}

{{NoteTA|G1=IT}}
'''Lakeus'''是一款旨在提供简洁而完整体验的皮肤。
其以作者之一，Lakejason0的小说角色命名。

== 安装 ==
{{SkinInstall
|download-link=[https://github.com/lakejason0/mediawiki-skins-Lakeus/releases/latest 下载]
|registration=Yes
}}

== 功能 ==
* 简洁而完整（至少大部分功能是好的）。
* JavaScript被禁用时也能工作。
* 使用CSS变量来自定义。
* 响应式设计。 在桌面设备和平板电脑上的显示应该都是正常的；在非常窄的手机屏幕上，侧边栏菜单可能会因为太宽而无法关闭。
* 主题设计器。 在参数设置中打开，即可实时更改并预览主题。 大多数情况下，只需要更改几个基本变量，主题设计器就会自动为你计算生成主题。
** 目前可能有些问题，不是很稳定，所以可以的话请务必向我报告您遇到的问题！ 如果您不满意自动计算的结果，您随时可以关闭相应的自动计算。

==计划功能==
* [[phab:T244392|WVUI搜索栏]]，跟新版{{ll|Skin:Vector|nsp=0}}的一样。

== 注释 ==
* 此皮肤在无JavaScript时也应当是可用的。 虽然没有JavaScript的时候有一些便利的特性是不可用的。
* 此皮肤为使用带有LanguageConverter变种的语言（比如中文（语言代码为&lt;code&gt;zh&lt;/code&gt;）和塞尔维亚语）的站点提供了一个独立的菜单。 当站点没有语言变种可用时，此菜单应当是隐藏起来的。
* RTL书写方向的支持尚未完全测试，但是主要功能已经过RTL兼容测试（比如侧边栏菜单）。

== 自定义 ==

=== CSS变量 ===
{{note|1=您的CSS可能在一些特殊页面上不起作用（比如[[Special:Preferences|{{int|preferences}}]]）；这是MediaWiki本体出于安全考虑的预设行为，但站点管理员可以在知悉相关风险后将{{ll|Manual:$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages|$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}}设为{{phpi|true}}以绕过这个特性。}}
Lakeus支持使用CSS变量来自定义。 以下是一些制作主题的方法，若要将主题结果（应当是CSS代码）应用，你需要将其复制到&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;，可以在&lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;（适用于全站所有用户）或&lt;code&gt;Special:MyPage/Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;（适用于用户自己）处找到。
==== 主题设计器 ====
使用主题设计器对于所有人来说都会简单一些（至少我希望是这样啦）。 您将只需要更改一些基本变量，剩下的部分会自动计算。 若您不喜欢部分变量的自动计算结果，您可以关闭相应的自动计算，并手动按照意愿微调。

要启用主题设计器，请前往参数设置，选择“外观/显示”，在Lakeus皮肤被选中后，您就可以看见主题设计器的选项了。 启用后，主题设计器会在每个页面上加载。

基本上里面的按钮和表单控件做的事情都是其字面意思；如果不太懂，就试着调整调整，用一用，按一按。 当然，''依然存在''有一些变量不会在每个页面上都被使用，这些变量会在下方列出：
* 界面消息框。 这些元素在类似于以下情况时会出现：没有JavaScript时成功更改用户组设置；翻译页面编辑提示警告；页面编辑时MediaWiki抛出的异常；Echo或其他通知扩展未安装时的用户讨论页通知……

==== 预设主题 ====
此处会有一些预设主题供您直接使用。 您也可以在讨论页上分享自己的主题。 如果此处没有任何内容，请稍后回来查看。

===== 复古 =====
一个复古主题，最后一次导出于1.1.7。
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #8e860a;
    --color-secondary: #eeebe7;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: rgba(238,235,231,0);
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #eeebe7;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #8c8985;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #8e860a;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-bar: #8c8985;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #8e860a;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0,0,0,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #000000;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #9b9b9b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-content: #24220a;
    --background-color-body: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #bcb9b5;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #8e860a;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #e4e1dd;
    --border-color-toc: #b2afab;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #e9e6e2;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #9e9c98;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #dfdcd8;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(44,44,44,0.1);
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #dad7d3;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===== 海洋 =====
淡蓝色配色方案主题，最后一次导出于1.1.8。
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #3366cc;
    --color-secondary: #f4fcff;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: #e2f4fe;
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #f4fcff;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #91989b;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #3366cc;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-bar: #91989b;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #f4fcff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #3366cc;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(35,93,194,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #91989b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #0955b8;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-content: #000000;
    --background-color-body: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #c1c9cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #3366cc;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #eaf2f5;
    --border-color-toc: #b7bfc2;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #eff7fa;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #a4abae;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #e5ecef;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --text-color-portlet-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(112,147,255,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #e2f4fe;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


==== 手动更改变量 ====

以下是CSS变量的默认设置；可以修改这些设置并把设置结果放到你的&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;里面：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --background-color-base: white;
  --background-color-body: white;
  --background-color-content: white;
  --background-color-footer: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list: white;
  --background-color-portlet-body: white;
  --background-color-toggle-list-card: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-edit-options: #eee;
  --background-color-search-suggestions: #fff;
  --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #1d5492;
  --background-color-search-input: #fff;
  --background-color-toc: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #eaecf0;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fee7e6;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fef6e7;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d5fdf4;
  --background-color-user-message: #ffce7b;
  --background-color-wikitable: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #eaecf0;
  --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-content: #ccc;
  --border-color-toggle-list: #ddd;
  --border-color-search-suggestions: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-search-bar: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-portlet-body: var(--color-gray);
  --border-color-header-tab: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-toc: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #d33;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fc3;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
  --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
  --border-color-wikitable: #a2a9b1;
  --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
  --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #000000;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item: #1c1c1c;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-content: #000000;
  --text-color-header: #000000;
  --text-color-body: #000000;
  --text-color-footer: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
  --text-color-user-message: #000000;
  --text-color-wikitable: #202122;
  --icon-filter-header: unset;
  --color-search-suggestions-text: #000;
  --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #fff;
  --color-tagline: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #54595d;
  --color-accent-header-tab-new: #54595d;
  --color-header: white;
  --color-base: #54595d;
  --color-gray: #a2a9b1;
  --color-gray-2: #eaecf0;
  --color-link: #0645ad;
  --color-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-new: #d33;
  --color-link-new--visited: #a55858;
  --color-link-new--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-external: #36b;
  --color-link-external--visited: #636;
  --color-link-external--active: #b63;
  --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
  --color-footer-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-footer-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-toc-number: #202122;
  --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
  --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
  --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
  --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
  --header-elevation: var(--elevation);
  --mask-background: rgba( 0, 0, 0, 0.8 );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

比如，要将顶栏的颜色改为淡蓝色（比如&lt;code&gt;#4FC3F7&lt;/code&gt;），那么写成：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --color-header: #4FC3F7;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


=== 参数 ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! 参数
! 类型
! 默认值
! 描述
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink}}
| 布尔值
| {{phpi|true}}
| 决定是否在页脚中展示链接到此皮肤仓库的链接。
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLogos}}
|
|
| 目前，只有&lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt;和&lt;code&gt;wordmark&lt;/code&gt;会被使用；其余键名（例如&lt;code&gt;svg&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;1x&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;1.5x&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;2x&lt;/code&gt;等）不会被此皮肤使用。 请注意，其他皮肤也有可能使用由&lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt;提供的图片，'''与此同时也会'''使用其他键名，因此请不要用以上键名尝试为此皮肤提供单独的图标。
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder}}
| 布尔值
| {{phpi|false}}
| 决定是否为站点通知（Site Notice）启用一个由皮肤提供的边框。 启用此特性有助于提升纯文本通知的美观度，但如果通知内容本身就有边框，你可以保留默认值而不启用。
|}

=== 侧边栏图标 ===
很遗憾，向皮肤中添加图标而不在页面上加载很多图片是不太可能的。
若您能忍受加载网络字体图标的等待时间，你可以尝试以下方法来添加图标。
首先，引入图标的字体（Font face，本例是Material Icons）到你的CSS（&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;）中。
您可能在除了&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;以外的地方已经加载过了一些字体，此时确保它们不会互相冲突即可。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* MD Icons */
/* fallback */
@font-face {
  font-family: 'Material Icons';
  font-style: normal;
  font-weight: 400;
  src: url(https://fonts.gstatic.com/s/materialicons/v70/flUhRq6tzZclQEJ-Vdg-IuiaDsNc.woff2) format('woff2');
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

然后，由于本例使用伪元素，我们会应用一些边距和额外的设定来为图标腾出空间：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
.toggle-list__list a {
    padding-left: calc(8px + 25px);
}

.toggle-list__list a::before {
    content: '';
    width: 0;
    height: 0;
    display: inline-block;
    font-family: 'Material Icons';
    font-size: 18px;
    transform: translateX(-25px) translateY(3px);
    /* Display Optimizing */
    -webkit-font-smoothing: antialiased;
    text-rendering: optimizeLegibility;
    -moz-osx-font-smoothing: grayscale;
    font-feature-settings: 'liga';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

现在，就是添加实际图标了。
你可以使用Devtools（鼠标右击，审查元素）来查看列表项的ID，然后就是设置为元素（图标）的实际内容：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Navigation */
#n-mainpage-description a::before {
    content: 'home';
}

#n-recentchanges a::before {
    content: 'auto_awesome';
}

#n-randompage a::before {
    content: 'shuffle';
}

#n-portal a::before {
    content: 'forum';
}

#n-help-mediawiki a::before {
    content: 'help_center';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

本例中，Material Icons支持特定的字符串（此处使用的）以及一些字符码位以用于展示对应的图标。
Material Icons支持的字符串或码位请见[https://fonts.google.com/icons Icons - Google Fonts]。
请随意为您自己的站点添加更多的规则，例如某位作者的站点有管理员告示板：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot; highlight=1&gt;
#n-adminnoticeboard a::before {
    content: 'groups';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;code&gt;#n-...&lt;/code&gt;的部分与您在[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]中使用的系统消息对应。

[[Category:Mobile skins{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9xa0y9l7fb0n1pu7wz1co5y80gmnq4m</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Lakeus/hi</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1386942</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401685</id>
      <parentid>5293586</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:34:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="25946" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin|templatemode=
|name          = Lakeus
|status        = stable
|username      = Lakejason0
|author        = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Lakejason0
* Light beacon
* Dianliang233
* Winston Sung
* ...
|image         = SkinLakeus.png
|imagesize     = 320
|version       = 1.1.12
|update        = 2022-08-07
|mediawiki     = 1.36+
|php           = 
|compatibility policy = rel
|license       = GPL-3.0-or-later
|download      = {{GithubDownload|lakejason0|mediawiki-skins-Lakeus|translatewiki=1}}
|translate     = mwgithub-lakeus
|example       = [https://skins.toolforge.org/index.php?useskin=lakeus Example on MediaWiki Skins Wiki]
|compatibility = 
|parameters    = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder&lt;/code&gt;
}}

'''Lakeus''' एक स्किन है जो एक साधारण पर सुविधापूर्ण अनुभव प्रस्तुत करता है।
इसका नाम लेखकों में से एक की कहानी के एक पात्र, Lakejason0 पर रखा गया है।

== स्थापना ==
{{SkinInstall
|download-link=[https://github.com/lakejason0/mediawiki-skins-Lakeus/releases/latest डाउनलोड करें]
|registration=Yes
}}

== विशेषता ==
* साधारण पर सुविधापूर्ण (कम से कम ज़्यादातर काम करते हैं)।
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;गैर-जावास्किप्ट समर्थन के साथ।&lt;/span&gt;
* CSS वेरिएबल से अनुकूलन।
* रेसपॉनसिव डिज़ाइन डेस्कटॉप और टैब्लेट के साथ काम करना चाहिए; बहुत पतले फ़ोन पर साइडबार मेनू शायद ज़्यादा चौड़ा हो और इसे बंद न किया जा सके।
* एक थीम डिज़ाइनर। अपने वरीयताओं में इसे सक्षम करके आप लाइव थीम का पूर्वावलोकन देख सकते हैं। ज़्यादातर समय बस कुछ बुनियादी वेरिएबलों को बदल देने से यह कई प्रक्रियाओं से आपके लिए एक थीम बना देगा।
** इसमें कुछ बग्स हैं और यह अस्थिर है, तो मुझे वे समस्याएँ ज़रूर रिपोर्ट करें! अगर आप अंजाम से सहमत न हो तो स्वचालित थीम को रद्द कर सकते हैं।

== योजनाबद्ध सुविधाएँ ==
* नए {{ll|Skin:Vector|nsp=0}} की तरह [[phab:T244392|WVUI खोज बार]]।

== टिप्पणियाँ ==
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;स्किन के पास गैर-जावास्क्रिप्ट समर्थन होना चाहिए।&lt;/span&gt; कुछ सुविधाएँ शायद उपलब्ध न हो।
* इस स्किन में LanguageConverter प्रकारों वाली भाषाओं के लिए एक समर्पित मेनू है (जैसे &lt;code&gt;zh&lt;/code&gt; और सर्बियाई)। अगर प्रकार उपलब्ध नहीं होते हैं, यह मेनू अदृश्य रहता है।
* RTL समर्थन को ठीक से परीक्षणित नहीं किया गया है, पर मुख्य सुविधाओं पर RTL समर्थन को घोषित कर दिया गया है (जैसे साइडबार के मेनू)।

== अनुकूलन ==

=== CSS वेरिएबल ===
{{note|1=आपका CSS शायद [[Special:Preferences|{{int|preferences}}]] जैसे कुछ पृष्ठों पर काम न करे; यह सुरक्षा के मुद्दों के कारण मीडियाविकि की एक सुविधा है, लेकिन खतरों के समझने के बाद साइट के प्रबंधक {{phpi|true}} को {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages|$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}} पर सेट करके इसे बाइपास कर सकते हैं।}}
Lakeus CSS वेरिएबल द्वारा अनुकूलन के समर्थित करता है। &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Below are several methods to generate a theme, and to apply the result (should be CSS code) you'll need to copy it to &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, which can be found on &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; for all wiki users, and &lt;code&gt;Special:MyPage/Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; for yourself.&lt;/span&gt;
=== थीम डिज़ाइनर ===
थीम डिज़ाइनर का उपयोग कोई भी कर सकता है (कम-से-कम मेरे खयाल से)। आपको बस बुनियादी वेरिएबल बदलने हैं और बाकी अपने आप आ जाएगा। अगर आपको अपने-आप बना अंजाम पसंद न आए तो आप सभी वेरिएबलों के लिए स्वचालित कैलक्यूलेशन बंद करके अपने पसंद के अनुसार खुद से भी बदल सकते हैं।

इसे सक्षम करने के लिए वरीयताओं में जाएँ, &quot;स्वरूप&quot; चुनें, और Lakeus स्किन चुनने पर आपको विकल्प मिल जाएगा। सक्षम हो जाने पर यह हर पृष्ठ पर लोड होगा।

बस सारे बटन और इंपुट अपने मतलब के काम ही करेंगे; अगर आप ठीक से समझे नहीं तो इसका उपयोग करके देखें। कुछ ऐसे वेरिएबल हैं जो सभी पृष्ठों पर नहीं दिखते, और वे नीचे सूचीबद्ध हैं:
* इंटरफेस सूचना बॉक्स। ये एलिमेंट जावास्क्रिप्ट के अक्षम होते हुए सदस्य समूह के सेटिंग को लागू किए जाने, अनुवाद पृष्ठ पर सूचना या चेतावनी पाने, पृष्ठ संपादन के समय मीडियाविकि के छूटों, बिना Echo या किसी सूचना एक्सटेंशन को स्थापित किए सदस्य वार्ता पृष्ठ सूचनाओं, आदि स्थितियों में आते हैं।

=== प्रीसेट थीम्स ===
आपके उपयोग के लिए पहले से ही कुछ प्रीसेट थीम्स मौजूद होंगे। आप वार्ता पृष्ठ पर आपका अपना थीम भी बाँट सकते हैं। अगर कुछ नहीं है तो बाद में वापस आइए।

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===== Vintage =====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A vintage theme, last exported on 1.1.7.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #8e860a;
    --color-secondary: #eeebe7;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: rgba(238,235,231,0);
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #eeebe7;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #8c8985;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #8e860a;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-bar: #8c8985;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #8e860a;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0,0,0,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #000000;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #9b9b9b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-content: #24220a;
    --background-color-body: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #bcb9b5;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #8e860a;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #e4e1dd;
    --border-color-toc: #b2afab;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #e9e6e2;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #9e9c98;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #dfdcd8;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(44,44,44,0.1);
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #dad7d3;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===== Ocean =====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A theme with light blue color scheme, last exported on 1.1.8.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #3366cc;
    --color-secondary: #f4fcff;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: #e2f4fe;
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #f4fcff;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #91989b;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #3366cc;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-bar: #91989b;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #f4fcff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #3366cc;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(35,93,194,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #91989b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #0955b8;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-content: #000000;
    --background-color-body: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #c1c9cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #3366cc;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #eaf2f5;
    --border-color-toc: #b7bfc2;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #eff7fa;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #a4abae;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #e5ecef;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --text-color-portlet-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(112,147,255,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #e2f4fe;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


=== वेरिएबल खुद बदलें ===

नीचे CSS वेरिएबलों का डिफ़ॉल्च सेटिंग है; इन्हें बदलकर अपने &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; में डाल दें:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --background-color-base: white;
  --background-color-body: white;
  --background-color-content: white;
  --background-color-footer: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list: white;
  --background-color-portlet-body: white;
  --background-color-toggle-list-card: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-edit-options: #eee;
  --background-color-search-suggestions: #fff;
  --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #1d5492;
  --background-color-search-input: #fff;
  --background-color-toc: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #eaecf0;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fee7e6;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fef6e7;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d5fdf4;
  --background-color-user-message: #ffce7b;
  --background-color-wikitable: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #eaecf0;
  --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-content: #ccc;
  --border-color-toggle-list: #ddd;
  --border-color-search-suggestions: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-search-bar: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-portlet-body: var(--color-gray);
  --border-color-header-tab: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-toc: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #d33;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fc3;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
  --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
  --border-color-wikitable: #a2a9b1;
  --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
  --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #000000;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item: #1c1c1c;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-content: #000000;
  --text-color-header: #000000;
  --text-color-body: #000000;
  --text-color-footer: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
  --text-color-user-message: #000000;
  --text-color-wikitable: #202122;
  --icon-filter-header: unset;
  --color-search-suggestions-text: #000;
  --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #fff;
  --color-tagline: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #54595d;
  --color-accent-header-tab-new: #54595d;
  --color-header: white;
  --color-base: #54595d;
  --color-gray: #a2a9b1;
  --color-gray-2: #eaecf0;
  --color-link: #0645ad;
  --color-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-new: #d33;
  --color-link-new--visited: #a55858;
  --color-link-new--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-external: #36b;
  --color-link-external--visited: #636;
  --color-link-external--active: #b63;
  --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
  --color-footer-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-footer-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-toc-number: #202122;
  --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
  --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
  --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
  --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
  --header-elevation: var(--elevation);
  --mask-background: rgba( 0, 0, 0, 0.8 );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

उदाहरणस्वरूप, शीर्षक के रंग को हल्के नीले (जैसे &lt;code&gt;#4FC3F7&lt;/code&gt;) में बदलने के लिए कोड होगा:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --color-header: #4FC3F7;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


=== पैरामीटर ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! पैरामीटर
! प्रकार
! मूल
! विवरण
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink}}
| बूलियन
| {{phpi|true}}
| यह तय करता है कि लिंक को फुटर के स्किन रिपॉज़िटरी में दिखाया जाएगा कि नहीं।
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLogos}}
|
|
| अभी के लिए सिर्फ &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; और &lt;code&gt;wordmark&lt;/code&gt; ही मान्य हैं; स्किन &lt;code&gt;svg&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1x&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1.5x&lt;/code&gt; या &lt;code&gt;2x&lt;/code&gt; जैसे कुंजियों का उपयोग नहीं करती। ध्यान रखें कि दूसरी त्वचाएँ &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; '''और''' दूसरे कुंजियों द्वारा प्रदान किए गए चित्रों का भी उपयोग कर सकते हैं, तो सिर्फ इसी स्किन के लिए आइकॉन देने के लिए कुंजी पर निर्भर न रहें।
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder}}
| बूलियन
| {{phpi|false}}
| यह तय करता है कि स्किन साइट सूचना पर बॉर्डर जोड़ेगा कि नहीं। इसे सक्षम करने से सामान्य पाठ की सूचनाओं को फ़ायदा हो सकता है, लेकिन अगर आपने सूचना पर पहले से ही बॉर्डर जोड़ा हुआ है, आप इसे अक्षम रख सकते हैं।
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sidebar icons ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately, it's not easy to add icons to the skin without including many images on page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you can bear the loading time of web font icons, you can try this out as follows.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start with, include the icon font face (in this whole example, Material Icons) in your CSS (&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may have loaded some font faces in other places other than &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, in which case just ensure that they don't conflict with each other.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* MD Icons */
/* fallback */
@font-face {
  font-family: 'Material Icons';
  font-style: normal;
  font-weight: 400;
  src: url(https://fonts.gstatic.com/s/materialicons/v70/flUhRq6tzZclQEJ-Vdg-IuiaDsNc.woff2) format('woff2');
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Then, as we are going to use pseudo elements, some paddings and extra settings to create space for icons are applied:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
.toggle-list__list a {
    padding-left: calc(8px + 25px);
}

.toggle-list__list a::before {
    content: '';
    width: 0;
    height: 0;
    display: inline-block;
    font-family: 'Material Icons';
    font-size: 18px;
    transform: translateX(-25px) translateY(3px);
    /* Display Optimizing */
    -webkit-font-smoothing: antialiased;
    text-rendering: optimizeLegibility;
    -moz-osx-font-smoothing: grayscale;
    font-feature-settings: 'liga';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now, it's time to add the actual icons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use Devtools (The tool opened by right click and then Inspect Element) to see the list items' IDs, and we are finally going to set the actual content of the pseudo elements (icons):&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Navigation */
#n-mainpage-description a::before {
    content: 'home';
}

#n-recentchanges a::before {
    content: 'auto_awesome';
}

#n-randompage a::before {
    content: 'shuffle';
}

#n-portal a::before {
    content: 'forum';
}

#n-help-mediawiki a::before {
    content: 'help_center';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, Material Icons supports certain strings (used here) and code points for an certain icon.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For what strings or code points could be used for Material Icons, see [https://fonts.google.com/icons Icons - Google Fonts].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Feel free to add more rules for your own site, for example one of the authors' site got an admin noticeboard:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot; highlight=1&gt;
#n-adminnoticeboard a::before {
    content: 'groups';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;#n-...&lt;/code&gt; part corresponds with the system message you used in your [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Mobile skins{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ju7hy3o5rls88p01mtbq8qhm5zx8728</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Lakeus/ja</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1387329</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401684</id>
      <parentid>5293584</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:34:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22199" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin|templatemode=
|name          = Lakeus
|status        = stable
|username      = Lakejason0
|author        = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Lakejason0
* Light beacon
* Dianliang233
* Winston Sung
* ...
|image         = SkinLakeus.png
|imagesize     = 320
|version       = 1.1.12
|update        = 2022-08-07
|mediawiki     = 1.36+
|php           = 
|compatibility policy = rel
|license       = GPL-3.0-or-later
|download      = {{GithubDownload|lakejason0|mediawiki-skins-Lakeus|translatewiki=1}}
|translate     = mwgithub-lakeus
|example       = [https://skins.toolforge.org/index.php?useskin=lakeus Example on MediaWiki Skins Wiki]
|compatibility = 
|parameters    = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder&lt;/code&gt;
}}

'''Lakeus''' は、シンプルでありながら、すべての機能を備えた外装を目指しています。
作者の一人であるLakejason0さんの小説の登場人物にちなんで名づけられたものです。

== インストール ==
{{SkinInstall
|download-link=[https://github.com/lakejason0/mediawiki-skins-Lakeus/releases/latest ダウンロード]
|registration=Yes
}}

== 特徴 ==
* シンプルだが、すべての機能を備えている（少なくとも、ほとんどの機能が使えるはずだ）。
* JavaScript が無効でも動作します。
* CSS変数によるカスタマイズ。
* レスポンシブデザインを採用。 デスクトップとタブレットで動作するはずです。非常に狭い携帯電話では、サイドバーメニューが広すぎて閉じられないかもしれません。
* テーマデザイナーです。 個人設定で有効にすることで、リアルタイムにテーマを変更したり、プレビューしたりすることができます。 ほとんどの場合、基本的な変数に少し手を加えるだけで、自動で計算されたテーマが出来上がります。
** ちょっとバグが多くて不安定かもしれないので、不具合があったら必ず報告してくださいね。 ご不満な場合は、いつでも自動計算を無効にすることができます。

== 予定されている機能 ==
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[phab:T244392|WVUI search bar]], the same as in the new {{ll|Skin:Vector|nsp=0}}.&lt;/span&gt;

== 注記 ==
* この外装は JavaScript がない場合でも使用できるはずです。 ただし、いくつかの便利な機能は使用できない場合があります。
* 中国語 (&lt;code&gt;zh&lt;/code&gt;) やセルビア語など、LanguageConverter 言語変種がある言語を使用しているサイト専用のメニューを作成しました。 利用できる言語変種がない場合、メニューは非表示になっているはずです。
* RTL対応は十分に検証されていませんが、主要な機能はRTL対応であることが確認されています（サイドバーメニューなど）。

== カスタマイズ ==

=== CSSの変数 ===
{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your CSS may not work in several special pages (like [[Special:Preferences|{{int|preferences}}]]); it's an intended behavior of MediaWiki core due to security concerns, but site admins could set {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages|$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}} to {{phpi|true}} to bypass it after understanding the risks.&lt;/span&gt;}}
LakeusはCSS変数によるカスタマイズをサポートしています。 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Below are several methods to generate a theme, and to apply the result (should be CSS code) you'll need to copy it to &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, which can be found on &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; for all wiki users, and &lt;code&gt;Special:MyPage/Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; for yourself.&lt;/span&gt;
==== テーマデザイナー ====
テーマデザイナーを使えば、誰でも簡単にできるようになる（少なくとも私はそう願っている）。 基本的な変数を変更するだけで、あとは自動的に計算されます。 自動計算された結果があまり好きでない変数ごとに自動計算を無効にして、手動で好きなように微調整することができます。

これを有効にするには、個人設定から「外観」を選択し、外装 Lakeus を選択するとオプションが見つかります。 一度有効にすると、すべてのページで読み込まれるようになりました。

基本的にすべてのボタンとフォームの入力は、文字どおりの意味を持ちます。 すべてのページに表示されない変数がいくつかあり、それらは以下のようになります。
* インターフェイスのメッセージボックス。 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These elements appears in situations like that a user group setting is successfully applied when JavaScript disabled, translation page edit notice warning, MediaWiki exceptions that appears on page editing, user talk page notices with no Echo and other notification extensions installed, and so on.&lt;/span&gt;

==== プリセットテーマ ====
すでに用意されているプリセットテーマを使用することができます。 トークページでも、自分のテーマを共有することができます。 なかったらまた来てください。

===== ヴィンテージ =====
1.1.7で最後にエクスポートされたヴィンテージテーマ。
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #8e860a;
    --color-secondary: #eeebe7;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: rgba(238,235,231,0);
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #eeebe7;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #8c8985;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #8e860a;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-bar: #8c8985;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #8e860a;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0,0,0,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #000000;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #9b9b9b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-content: #24220a;
    --background-color-body: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #bcb9b5;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #8e860a;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #e4e1dd;
    --border-color-toc: #b2afab;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #e9e6e2;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #9e9c98;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #dfdcd8;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(44,44,44,0.1);
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #dad7d3;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===== オーシャン =====
水色を基調としたテーマで、最後にエクスポートされたのは1.1.8です。
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #3366cc;
    --color-secondary: #f4fcff;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: #e2f4fe;
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #f4fcff;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #91989b;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #3366cc;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-bar: #91989b;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #f4fcff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #3366cc;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(35,93,194,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #91989b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #0955b8;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-content: #000000;
    --background-color-body: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #c1c9cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #3366cc;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #eaf2f5;
    --border-color-toc: #b7bfc2;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #eff7fa;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #a4abae;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #e5ecef;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --text-color-portlet-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(112,147,255,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #e2f4fe;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


==== 手動で変数を変更する ====

下記は、CSS 変数の既定の設定です。これらの設定を変更し、結果をあなたの &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; に記載します:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --background-color-base: white;
  --background-color-body: white;
  --background-color-content: white;
  --background-color-footer: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list: white;
  --background-color-portlet-body: white;
  --background-color-toggle-list-card: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-edit-options: #eee;
  --background-color-search-suggestions: #fff;
  --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #1d5492;
  --background-color-search-input: #fff;
  --background-color-toc: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #eaecf0;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fee7e6;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fef6e7;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d5fdf4;
  --background-color-user-message: #ffce7b;
  --background-color-wikitable: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #eaecf0;
  --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-content: #ccc;
  --border-color-toggle-list: #ddd;
  --border-color-search-suggestions: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-search-bar: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-portlet-body: var(--color-gray);
  --border-color-header-tab: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-toc: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #d33;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fc3;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
  --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
  --border-color-wikitable: #a2a9b1;
  --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
  --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #000000;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item: #1c1c1c;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-content: #000000;
  --text-color-header: #000000;
  --text-color-body: #000000;
  --text-color-footer: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
  --text-color-user-message: #000000;
  --text-color-wikitable: #202122;
  --icon-filter-header: unset;
  --color-search-suggestions-text: #000;
  --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #fff;
  --color-tagline: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #54595d;
  --color-accent-header-tab-new: #54595d;
  --color-header: white;
  --color-base: #54595d;
  --color-gray: #a2a9b1;
  --color-gray-2: #eaecf0;
  --color-link: #0645ad;
  --color-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-new: #d33;
  --color-link-new--visited: #a55858;
  --color-link-new--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-external: #36b;
  --color-link-external--visited: #636;
  --color-link-external--active: #b63;
  --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
  --color-footer-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-footer-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-toc-number: #202122;
  --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
  --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
  --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
  --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
  --header-elevation: var(--elevation);
  --mask-background: rgba( 0, 0, 0, 0.8 );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

例えば、ヘッダーの色を水色（例：&lt;code&gt;#4FC3F7&lt;/code&gt;）に変更する場合は、次のようになります。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --color-header: #4FC3F7;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


=== パラメーター ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! パラメーター
! 型
! 既定
! 説明
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink}}
| 真偽値
| {{phpi|true}}
| フッターに外装のリポジトリへのリンクを表示するかどうかを決定します。
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLogos}}
|
|
| 今のところ、&lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; と &lt;code&gt;wordmark&lt;/code&gt; だけが認識され、&lt;code&gt;svg&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;1x&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;1.5x&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;2x&lt;/code&gt; といったキーは外装では使用されません。 他の外装でも &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; や他のキーで提供される画像を利用できるため、この外装のみのアイコンを提供するキーに依存しないようにしてください。
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder}}
| 真偽値
| {{phpi|false}}
| サイト通知に外装ボーダーを追加するかどうかを設定します。 有効にするとプレーンテキストのお知らせに有効ですが、すでにサイトのお知らせコンテンツにボーダーがある場合は、無効のままでもかまいません。
|}

=== サイドバーアイコン ===
残念ながら、ページに多くの画像を含めずに、外装にアイコンを追加するのは簡単ではありません。
Webフォントアイコンの読み込み時間に耐えられる方は、以下の方法で試してみてください。
まず始めに、CSSにアイコンのフォントフェイス（この全体の例では、Material Icons）を含めます（&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;）。
フォントフェイスを&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;以外の場所に読み込んでいる可能性がありますが、その場合は、それらが互いに競合しないことを確認してください。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* MD Icons */
/* fallback */
@font-face {
  font-family: 'Material Icons';
  font-style: normal;
  font-weight: 400;
  src: url(https://fonts.gstatic.com/s/materialicons/v70/flUhRq6tzZclQEJ-Vdg-IuiaDsNc.woff2) format('woff2');
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

そして、疑似要素を使うので、アイコンのスペースを確保するためのパディングや余分な設定が施されています。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
.toggle-list__list a {
    padding-left: calc(8px + 25px);
}

.toggle-list__list a::before {
    content: '';
    width: 0;
    height: 0;
    display: inline-block;
    font-family: 'Material Icons';
    font-size: 18px;
    transform: translateX(-25px) translateY(3px);
    /* Display Optimizing */
    -webkit-font-smoothing: antialiased;
    text-rendering: optimizeLegibility;
    -moz-osx-font-smoothing: grayscale;
    font-feature-settings: 'liga';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

さて、いよいよ実際のアイコンを追加していきます。
Devtools（右クリック→Inspect Elementで開くツール）でリストアイテムのIDを見ることができますが、いよいよ擬似要素（アイコン）の実際の中身を設定していきます。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Navigation */
#n-mainpage-description a::before {
    content: 'home';
}

#n-recentchanges a::before {
    content: 'auto_awesome';
}

#n-randompage a::before {
    content: 'shuffle';
}

#n-portal a::before {
    content: 'forum';
}

#n-help-mediawiki a::before {
    content: 'help_center';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

この例では、マテリアルアイコンは、特定の文字列（ここで使用）と特定のアイコンのコードポイントをサポートしています。
マテリアルアイコンに使用できる文字列やコードポイントについては、[https://fonts.google.com/icons アイコン - Google Fonts]を参照してください。
例えば、ある著者のサイトでは、管理者用の掲示板を設置しました。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot; highlight=1&gt;
#n-adminnoticeboard a::before {
    content: 'groups';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;code&gt;#n-...&lt;/code&gt;の部分は、[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]において使用したシステムメッセージに対応します。

[[Category:Mobile skins{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>tmbwny016cyvxhjyhzi9k4emb1pr11p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/zh</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1388440</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402164</id>
      <parentid>4919131</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:37:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8809" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since 2017, {{ll|VisualEditor}} provides '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' (visual difference displays).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are available in two places in the interface: when previewing changes to the document before the user saves the page, and (as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta feature]]) within the standard MediaWiki diff display, accessed from the history page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In both cases, the visual diff shows up alongside the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|traditional two-column wikitext diff]], and the user can toggle between the two displays.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diffs have two main advantages over wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first is that editors can directly see the changes they and others have made without needing to understand [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|wikitext]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is particularly helpful when looking at changes to graphical structures such as tables; for example, if an edit deletes a column from a table, the wikitext diff for it would be hard to understand, while the visual diff would be immediately obvious.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The second is that the technology can be used to more accurately represent the change to the reader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if an edit swapped two paragraphs (with or without changes to the paragraphs), the visual diff will identify that this is what occurred, while a wikitext diff makes it appear that a paragraph was deleted and an entirely new paragraph was added.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== On regular diff pages ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of the examples and screenshots below are about using visual diffs during page previews when editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, VisualEditor's visual diffs can also be used on regular diff pages, on any wiki that has VisualEditor installed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can see an example of it in use on the English-language Wikipedia [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|here]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For wikis that have VisualEditor, there are several ways to activate this visual diff display:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If your wiki has a &quot;Beta features&quot; tab within Special:Preferences, and you want to make visual diffs an &quot;opt-in&quot; feature for users, you can add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* As seen in the Wikipedia example linked above, the visual diff mode can also be activated by simply adding &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; to the URL of a diff page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How it works ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing some changes to an article.  Most changes are highlighted with text formatting.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|300px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you are finished editing the page, type your edit summary and then choose &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In visual mode, you will see additions, removals, new links, and formatting highlighted.  Other changes, such as changing the size of an image, are described in notes on the side.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Toggle button showing visual and wikitext options; visual option is selected.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|220x220px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the toggle button to switch between visual and wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing the same changes, in the two-column wikitext diff display.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|245x245px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The wikitext diff is the same diff tool that is used in the wikitext editors and in the page history.&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{clr}}
== 例子 ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Rich text edits&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Paragraph move with subtle vandalism&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff (2017).  This feature was added to the wikitext diff engine in 2018; see [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Table column removed&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Text, formatting and list changes&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insert new multimedia (sheet music)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diff&lt;/span&gt;
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Technology used ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thalia Chan, Unifying editing and visual diffs, Wikimania 2017&lt;/span&gt;]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Current limitations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No notices for changes to &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, such as categories or TOC keywords.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Has issues with complex changes to tables.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unavailable on certain special pages:&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Undo &quot;diff&quot; pages.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit conflict pages&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== History ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This feature has been available as the first diff tool in the desktop VisualEditor from the 1.31.0-wmf-20 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 6 February 2018).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before that, it was a secondary tool from the 1.29.0-wmf-17 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 21 March 2017).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>o38fezndx436g3m1omqa135kznd3ygo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Lakeus/pl</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1394343</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401683</id>
      <parentid>5293585</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:34:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24140" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin|templatemode=
|name          = Lakeus
|status        = stable
|username      = Lakejason0
|author        = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Lakejason0
* Light beacon
* Dianliang233
* Winston Sung
* ...
|image         = SkinLakeus.png
|imagesize     = 320
|version       = 1.1.12
|update        = 2022-08-07
|mediawiki     = 1.36+
|php           = 
|compatibility policy = rel
|license       = GPL-3.0-or-later
|download      = {{GithubDownload|lakejason0|mediawiki-skins-Lakeus|translatewiki=1}}
|translate     = mwgithub-lakeus
|example       = [https://skins.toolforge.org/index.php?useskin=lakeus Example on MediaWiki Skins Wiki]
|compatibility = 
|parameters    = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder&lt;/code&gt;
}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Lakeus''' is a skin that aims to provide a simple but all-functional experience.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's named after a character in the novel of one of the authors, Lakejason0.&lt;/span&gt;

== Instalacja ==
{{SkinInstall
|download-link=[https://github.com/lakejason0/mediawiki-skins-Lakeus/releases/latest Pobieranie]
|registration=Yes
}}

== Funkcje ==
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Simple but all-functional (at least most of them should work).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Works when JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Customization through CSS variables.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Responsive design.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Should work with desktop and tablet; on very narrow phones the sidebar menu might be too wide to close.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A Theme designer.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By enabling it in your preferences you can change and preview the theme in real time.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For the most of time, only a few tweaks on basic variables are needed and it will produce an automagically calculated theme for you.&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It might be a bit buggy and unstable, so be sure to report any of the problems to me!&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can always disable automatic calculation if you are not satisfied.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Planned Features ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[phab:T244392|WVUI search bar]], the same as in the new {{ll|Skin:Vector|nsp=0}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The skin should be usable even when JavaScript isn't present.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Several handy features may not be available though.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The skin made a dedicated menu for site that uses a language with LanguageConverter variants (e.g. Chinese (&lt;code&gt;zh&lt;/code&gt;) and Serbian).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When no variants available, the menu should be invisible.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;RTL support hasn't been tested well, but main features are confirmed RTL compatible (e.g. sidebar menus).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Customization ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== CSS variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your CSS may not work in several special pages (like [[Special:Preferences|{{int|preferences}}]]); it's an intended behavior of MediaWiki core due to security concerns, but site admins could set {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages|$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}} to {{phpi|true}} to bypass it after understanding the risks.&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lakeus supports customization through CSS variables.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Below are several methods to generate a theme, and to apply the result (should be CSS code) you'll need to copy it to &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, which can be found on &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; for all wiki users, and &lt;code&gt;Special:MyPage/Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; for yourself.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Theme Designer ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using the theme designer would be easier for anyone (at least I hope so).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll only need to change the basic variables and the rest will be automatically calculated.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable the auto calculation for each variable that you don't really like the auto calculated result of it, and manually tweak it as you like.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To enable it, go to the preferences, select &quot;Appearance&quot;, and you can find the option when the skin Lakeus is selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once enabled, it would load on every page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Basically all the buttons and form inputs do what it literally means; just try them out if you are a bit confused.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There ''are'' some variables that do not appear on every page, and they would be listed below:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interface message box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These elements appears in situations like that a user group setting is successfully applied when JavaScript disabled, translation page edit notice warning, MediaWiki exceptions that appears on page editing, user talk page notices with no Echo and other notification extensions installed, and so on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Preset themes ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There will be some preset theme that is already here for you to use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can share your own theme on the talk page as well.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Come back later if there isn't any.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===== Vintage =====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A vintage theme, last exported on 1.1.7.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #8e860a;
    --color-secondary: #eeebe7;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: rgba(238,235,231,0);
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #eeebe7;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #8c8985;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #8e860a;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-bar: #8c8985;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #8e860a;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0,0,0,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #000000;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #9b9b9b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-content: #24220a;
    --background-color-body: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #bcb9b5;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #8e860a;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #e4e1dd;
    --border-color-toc: #b2afab;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #e9e6e2;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #9e9c98;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #dfdcd8;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(44,44,44,0.1);
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #dad7d3;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===== Ocean =====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A theme with light blue color scheme, last exported on 1.1.8.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #3366cc;
    --color-secondary: #f4fcff;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: #e2f4fe;
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #f4fcff;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #91989b;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #3366cc;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-bar: #91989b;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #f4fcff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #3366cc;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(35,93,194,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #91989b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #0955b8;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-content: #000000;
    --background-color-body: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #c1c9cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #3366cc;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #eaf2f5;
    --border-color-toc: #b7bfc2;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #eff7fa;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #a4abae;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #e5ecef;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --text-color-portlet-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(112,147,255,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #e2f4fe;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Manually change the variables ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Below is the default setting of CSS variables; modify these settings and put the result into your &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --background-color-base: white;
  --background-color-body: white;
  --background-color-content: white;
  --background-color-footer: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list: white;
  --background-color-portlet-body: white;
  --background-color-toggle-list-card: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-edit-options: #eee;
  --background-color-search-suggestions: #fff;
  --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #1d5492;
  --background-color-search-input: #fff;
  --background-color-toc: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #eaecf0;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fee7e6;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fef6e7;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d5fdf4;
  --background-color-user-message: #ffce7b;
  --background-color-wikitable: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #eaecf0;
  --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-content: #ccc;
  --border-color-toggle-list: #ddd;
  --border-color-search-suggestions: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-search-bar: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-portlet-body: var(--color-gray);
  --border-color-header-tab: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-toc: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #d33;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fc3;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
  --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
  --border-color-wikitable: #a2a9b1;
  --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
  --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #000000;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item: #1c1c1c;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-content: #000000;
  --text-color-header: #000000;
  --text-color-body: #000000;
  --text-color-footer: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
  --text-color-user-message: #000000;
  --text-color-wikitable: #202122;
  --icon-filter-header: unset;
  --color-search-suggestions-text: #000;
  --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #fff;
  --color-tagline: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #54595d;
  --color-accent-header-tab-new: #54595d;
  --color-header: white;
  --color-base: #54595d;
  --color-gray: #a2a9b1;
  --color-gray-2: #eaecf0;
  --color-link: #0645ad;
  --color-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-new: #d33;
  --color-link-new--visited: #a55858;
  --color-link-new--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-external: #36b;
  --color-link-external--visited: #636;
  --color-link-external--active: #b63;
  --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
  --color-footer-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-footer-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-toc-number: #202122;
  --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
  --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
  --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
  --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
  --header-elevation: var(--elevation);
  --mask-background: rgba( 0, 0, 0, 0.8 );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to change the header's color to a light blue (e.g. &lt;code&gt;#4FC3F7&lt;/code&gt;), it would be:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --color-header: #4FC3F7;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


=== Parametry ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Description&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean&lt;/span&gt;
| {{phpi|true}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Determines whether to show the link to the skin's repository in the footer.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLogos}}
|
|
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For now, only &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wordmark&lt;/code&gt; are recognized; keys like &lt;code&gt;svg&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1x&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1.5x&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;2x&lt;/code&gt; are not used by the skin.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notice that other skins may utilize the image provided by &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; '''AND''' other keys as well, so do not rely on the key to provide a icon only for this skin.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean&lt;/span&gt;
| {{phpi|false}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Determines whether to add a skin provided border to site notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enabling it can be useful for plain text notices, but if you've already got a border in your site notice content, you can leave it disabled.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sidebar icons ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately, it's not easy to add icons to the skin without including many images on page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you can bear the loading time of web font icons, you can try this out as follows.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start with, include the icon font face (in this whole example, Material Icons) in your CSS (&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may have loaded some font faces in other places other than &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, in which case just ensure that they don't conflict with each other.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* MD Icons */
/* fallback */
@font-face {
  font-family: 'Material Icons';
  font-style: normal;
  font-weight: 400;
  src: url(https://fonts.gstatic.com/s/materialicons/v70/flUhRq6tzZclQEJ-Vdg-IuiaDsNc.woff2) format('woff2');
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Then, as we are going to use pseudo elements, some paddings and extra settings to create space for icons are applied:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
.toggle-list__list a {
    padding-left: calc(8px + 25px);
}

.toggle-list__list a::before {
    content: '';
    width: 0;
    height: 0;
    display: inline-block;
    font-family: 'Material Icons';
    font-size: 18px;
    transform: translateX(-25px) translateY(3px);
    /* Display Optimizing */
    -webkit-font-smoothing: antialiased;
    text-rendering: optimizeLegibility;
    -moz-osx-font-smoothing: grayscale;
    font-feature-settings: 'liga';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now, it's time to add the actual icons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use Devtools (The tool opened by right click and then Inspect Element) to see the list items' IDs, and we are finally going to set the actual content of the pseudo elements (icons):&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Navigation */
#n-mainpage-description a::before {
    content: 'home';
}

#n-recentchanges a::before {
    content: 'auto_awesome';
}

#n-randompage a::before {
    content: 'shuffle';
}

#n-portal a::before {
    content: 'forum';
}

#n-help-mediawiki a::before {
    content: 'help_center';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, Material Icons supports certain strings (used here) and code points for an certain icon.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For what strings or code points could be used for Material Icons, see [https://fonts.google.com/icons Icons - Google Fonts].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Feel free to add more rules for your own site, for example one of the authors' site got an admin noticeboard:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot; highlight=1&gt;
#n-adminnoticeboard a::before {
    content: 'groups';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;#n-...&lt;/code&gt; part corresponds with the system message you used in your [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Mobile skins{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>qebelixru59smp1uz1a096nz0wss6gr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/he</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1405051</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402294</id>
      <parentid>4764018</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:06:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="31" xml:space="preserve">למידע נוסף, ראה $1.</text>
      <sha1>5z7ipvnyrobp724up95gu1bj54s7lfz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Lakeus/yue</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1405915</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401689</id>
      <parentid>5360767</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:34:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="21393" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin|templatemode=
|name          = Lakeus
|status        = stable
|username      = Lakejason0
|author        = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Lakejason0
* Light beacon
* Dianliang233
* Winston Sung
* ...
|image         = SkinLakeus.png
|imagesize     = 320
|version       = 1.1.12
|update        = 2022-08-07
|mediawiki     = 1.36+
|php           = 
|compatibility policy = rel
|license       = GPL-3.0-or-later
|download      = {{GithubDownload|lakejason0|mediawiki-skins-Lakeus|translatewiki=1}}
|translate     = mwgithub-lakeus
|example       = [https://skins.toolforge.org/index.php?useskin=lakeus Example on MediaWiki Skins Wiki]
|compatibility = 
|parameters    = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder&lt;/code&gt;
}}

'''Lakeus'''係一款旨在提供簡潔而完整體驗嘅佈景主題。
以佢嘅作者之一，Lakejason0嘅小説角色命名。

== 安裝 ==
{{SkinInstall
|download-link=[https://github.com/lakejason0/mediawiki-skins-Lakeus/releases/latest 下載]
|registration=Yes
}}

== 功能 ==
* 簡潔而完整（起碼大部分功能都可以正常運作）
* 支援停用JavaScript嘅情形下運作。
* 使用CSS變數嚟實現自訂。
* 響應式設計。 喺桌上設備同埋平板電腦上面嘅顯示應該都係正常嘅；喺非常之窄嘅手機熒幕上，邊欄選單可能會因為太闊而無法關閉。
* 主題設計器。 於偏好設定中啟用就可即時預覽及變更主題。 大多數情形下，只需調整幾個變數，主題設計器就可為你計算生成主題。
** 目前可能存在問題且缺乏穩定，如果你遇到問題，務請向我回報！ 如果自動計算結果不及預期，你可隨時將之停用。

==  計劃功能 ==
* [[phab:T244392|WVUI搜尋欄]]，同新版{{ll|Skin:Vector|nsp=0}}入面嘅相同。

== 註 ==
* 呢款佈景主題應同無JavaScript環境相容。 雖然喺無JavaScript情形下，部分便利特性會無法使用。
* 呢款佈景主題為使用帶有LanguageConverter變體語言〔比如中文（語言代碼為&lt;code&gt;zh&lt;/code&gt;）同塞爾維亞語〕嘅網站提供一個獨立選單。 當網站無語言變種可用時，選單應該會隱藏自身。
* RTL書寫方向嘅支援尚未完全測試，但主要功能已通過相容測試（例如邊欄選單）。

== 自訂 ==

=== CSS變數 ===
{{note|1=你嘅CSS喺部分特殊頁面上可能唔生效（例如[[Special:Preferences|{{int|preferences}}]]）；呢個係MediaWiki本體出於安全考慮所作出嘅預設行為，但係站點管理員可以喺清楚相關風險之後將{{ll|Manual:$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages|$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}}設定為{{phpi|true}}嚟繞過呢個特性。}}
Lakeus支援使用CSS變數嚟實現自訂。 以下係製作主題嘅方法示例，如果要將主題結果（應該係CSS代碼）套用，您需要將佢複製到&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;，可以喺&lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;（適用於全站用户）或&lt;code&gt;Special:MyPage/Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;（適用於用户自己）處揾到。
==== 主題設計器 ====
主題設計器可為所有人帶來更方便嘅體驗（希望如此）。 你只需變更幾個基本變數，其餘會自動計算。 你可停用相應嘅自動計算，並按照自己意願進行微調。

如要啟用主題設計器，請前往偏好設定，選擇「外觀/顯示」，選中Lakeus佈景主題後，你就可以見到主題設計器選項。 啟用後，主題設計器會於所有頁面載入。

當中嘅按鈕同表單嘅作用基本都同字面意思一樣，如果有不解之處，就試著用下，睇下起乜嘢作用。 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There ''are'' some variables that do not appear on every page, and they would be listed below:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interface message box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These elements appears in situations like that a user group setting is successfully applied when JavaScript disabled, translation page edit notice warning, MediaWiki exceptions that appears on page editing, user talk page notices with no Echo and other notification extensions installed, and so on.&lt;/span&gt;

==== 主題方案集 ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There will be some preset theme that is already here for you to use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can share your own theme on the talk page as well.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Come back later if there isn't any.&lt;/span&gt;

===== 復古 =====
一個復古主題，收尾一次導出嘅版本係1.1.7。
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #8e860a;
    --color-secondary: #eeebe7;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: rgba(238,235,231,0);
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #eeebe7;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #8c8985;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #8e860a;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-bar: #8c8985;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #8e860a;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0,0,0,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #000000;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #9b9b9b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-content: #24220a;
    --background-color-body: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #bcb9b5;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #8e860a;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #e4e1dd;
    --border-color-toc: #b2afab;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #e9e6e2;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #9e9c98;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #dfdcd8;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(44,44,44,0.1);
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #dad7d3;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===== 海洋 =====
淡藍色配色主題方案，收尾一次導出嘅版本係 1.1.8。
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #3366cc;
    --color-secondary: #f4fcff;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: #e2f4fe;
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #f4fcff;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #91989b;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #3366cc;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-bar: #91989b;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #f4fcff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #3366cc;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(35,93,194,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #91989b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #0955b8;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-content: #000000;
    --background-color-body: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #c1c9cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #3366cc;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #eaf2f5;
    --border-color-toc: #b7bfc2;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #eff7fa;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #a4abae;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #e5ecef;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --text-color-portlet-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(112,147,255,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #e2f4fe;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


==== 手動修改變數 ====

以下係預設嘅CSS變數，可以修改呢啲設置並且將設置結果放到你嘅&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;入面。

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --background-color-base: white;
  --background-color-body: white;
  --background-color-content: white;
  --background-color-footer: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list: white;
  --background-color-portlet-body: white;
  --background-color-toggle-list-card: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-edit-options: #eee;
  --background-color-search-suggestions: #fff;
  --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #1d5492;
  --background-color-search-input: #fff;
  --background-color-toc: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #eaecf0;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fee7e6;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fef6e7;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d5fdf4;
  --background-color-user-message: #ffce7b;
  --background-color-wikitable: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #eaecf0;
  --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-content: #ccc;
  --border-color-toggle-list: #ddd;
  --border-color-search-suggestions: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-search-bar: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-portlet-body: var(--color-gray);
  --border-color-header-tab: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-toc: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #d33;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fc3;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
  --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
  --border-color-wikitable: #a2a9b1;
  --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
  --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #000000;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item: #1c1c1c;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-content: #000000;
  --text-color-header: #000000;
  --text-color-body: #000000;
  --text-color-footer: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
  --text-color-user-message: #000000;
  --text-color-wikitable: #202122;
  --icon-filter-header: unset;
  --color-search-suggestions-text: #000;
  --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #fff;
  --color-tagline: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #54595d;
  --color-accent-header-tab-new: #54595d;
  --color-header: white;
  --color-base: #54595d;
  --color-gray: #a2a9b1;
  --color-gray-2: #eaecf0;
  --color-link: #0645ad;
  --color-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-new: #d33;
  --color-link-new--visited: #a55858;
  --color-link-new--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-external: #36b;
  --color-link-external--visited: #636;
  --color-link-external--active: #b63;
  --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
  --color-footer-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-footer-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-toc-number: #202122;
  --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
  --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
  --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
  --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
  --header-elevation: var(--elevation);
  --mask-background: rgba( 0, 0, 0, 0.8 );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

例如，要將頂欄嘅顏色改為淡藍色（比如&lt;code&gt;#4FC3F7&lt;/code&gt;），噉就寫成：

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --color-header: #4FC3F7;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


=== 參數 ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! 參數
! 類型
! 預設值
! 描述
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink}}
| 布爾值
| {{phpi|true}}
| 決定是否喺頁腳處展示指向此佈景主題倉庫嘅連結。
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLogos}}
|
|
| 目前，只有&lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt;同&lt;code&gt;wordmark&lt;/code&gt;會被使用；其餘鍵名（例如&lt;code&gt;svg&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;1x&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;1.5x&lt;/code&gt;、&lt;code&gt;2x&lt;/code&gt;等）唔會被此佈景主題使用。 請注意，其他佈景主題亦有可能使用由&lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt;提供嘅圖片。'''與此同時亦會'''使用其他鍵名，因此請勿用以上鍵名嘗試為此佈景主題提供單獨圖標。
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder}}
| 布爾值
| {{phpi|false}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Determines whether to add a skin provided border to site notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enabling it can be useful for plain text notices, but if you've already got a border in your site notice content, you can leave it disabled.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

=== 側邊欄圖標 ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately, it's not easy to add icons to the skin without including many images on page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you can bear the loading time of web font icons, you can try this out as follows.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start with, include the icon font face (in this whole example, Material Icons) in your CSS (&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may have loaded some font faces in other places other than &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, in which case just ensure that they don't conflict with each other.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* MD Icons */
/* fallback */
@font-face {
  font-family: 'Material Icons';
  font-style: normal;
  font-weight: 400;
  src: url(https://fonts.gstatic.com/s/materialicons/v70/flUhRq6tzZclQEJ-Vdg-IuiaDsNc.woff2) format('woff2');
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Then, as we are going to use pseudo elements, some paddings and extra settings to create space for icons are applied:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
.toggle-list__list a {
    padding-left: calc(8px + 25px);
}

.toggle-list__list a::before {
    content: '';
    width: 0;
    height: 0;
    display: inline-block;
    font-family: 'Material Icons';
    font-size: 18px;
    transform: translateX(-25px) translateY(3px);
    /* Display Optimizing */
    -webkit-font-smoothing: antialiased;
    text-rendering: optimizeLegibility;
    -moz-osx-font-smoothing: grayscale;
    font-feature-settings: 'liga';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now, it's time to add the actual icons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use Devtools (The tool opened by right click and then Inspect Element) to see the list items' IDs, and we are finally going to set the actual content of the pseudo elements (icons):&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Navigation */
#n-mainpage-description a::before {
    content: 'home';
}

#n-recentchanges a::before {
    content: 'auto_awesome';
}

#n-randompage a::before {
    content: 'shuffle';
}

#n-portal a::before {
    content: 'forum';
}

#n-help-mediawiki a::before {
    content: 'help_center';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, Material Icons supports certain strings (used here) and code points for an certain icon.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For what strings or code points could be used for Material Icons, see [https://fonts.google.com/icons Icons - Google Fonts].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Feel free to add more rules for your own site, for example one of the authors' site got an admin noticeboard:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot; highlight=1&gt;
#n-adminnoticeboard a::before {
    content: 'groups';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;#n-...&lt;/code&gt; part corresponds with the system message you used in your [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Mobile skins{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>nri39oh2jz4j40f474nkrvo3p7w4veu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Preferences/40/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1407888</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402282</id>
      <parentid>4772819</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:04:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36" xml:space="preserve">Siehe $1 für weitere Informationen.</text>
      <sha1>gbijzevwaldqjhmz47zcnjenve1cqfa</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/ru</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>1425870</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403330</id>
      <parentid>5307420</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:23:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20871" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow users to enable JS-based, user-provided gadgets from their preferences page&lt;/span&gt;
|example         = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikimedia Commons: [[commons:Special:Gadgets|Gadget overview]], [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|user preferences]] (click &quot;Gadgets&quot;; you need to be logged in of course)&lt;/span&gt;
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The '''Gadgets''' extension provides a way for users to pick JavaScript or CSS based &quot;gadgets&quot; that other wiki users provide.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets are made up of JavaScript and/or CSS {{ll|snippets}} located on pages in the MediaWiki namespace.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each gadget is defined by a line in [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]], providing a name and description for the gadget, and a list of the JS and CSS snippets that it uses (see the ''[[#Usage|Usage]]'' section below).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Gadgets reside in the MediaWiki namespace (the list defining the gadgets as well as the actual code snippets), only sysops (interface admins from 1.32) can edit the code.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is as it should be: only users especially trusted by the wiki community should be able to edit JavaScript code that is used by other users, since JavaScript can easily be used to hijack accounts or spy on people.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Installation ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Usage ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Selection of some gadgets at the user preferences in de.wikipedia&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to define gadgets depending on the &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If It is &lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt; (the default value), the list of available gadgets is defined on '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In an alternative way, Gadget definitions are defined on pages in the [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|Gadget definition]] namespace when &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt; is set to &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{caution|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Migration of the existing gadget definitions is not yet supported, so you will lose previously defined gadgets after changing this option.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once created with at least one valid gadget, gadgets defined there show up in the &quot;Gadgets&quot; section of [[Special:Preferences]], so users can pick the gadgets they would like to use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An overview of the gadgets defined by MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition is also shown on '''[[Special:Gadgets]]''', along with links to the respective system messages, for easy editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Statistics for non-default gadget usage can be seen at '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Format ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using MediaWiki Gadgets Definition ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each line in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition that starts with one or more &quot;*&quot; (asterisks) characters defines a gadget; it must have the following form:&lt;/span&gt;

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;options (can be omitted)&lt;/span&gt;] | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;page names&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first field (&quot;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&quot; in the example) is the gadget's ''internal name'', and references a system message ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''' in the example) that contains a short description of the gadget, using wiki syntax.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''internal name'' is used as part of the name of a form field and must follow the [https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id rules defined for NAME attribute values].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means it must begin with a basic Latin letter (&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;) and may be followed by any number of letters, digits (&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;), hyphens (&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;), underscores (&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;), colons (&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;), and periods (&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Options format:
&lt;/div&gt;

 [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;option1&lt;/span&gt; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;option2&lt;/span&gt; | ... &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;optionN&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whitespace can be omitted.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A single option can either consist of a single option name (in this case it is a flag option), or contain a comma-separated list of values:&lt;/span&gt;

 option = value1, value2, value3

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Examples:
&lt;/div&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using Gadget Definition Namespace ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Creation of the [[Gadget definition:mygadget]] page and putting in it the below [[w:JSON|JSON]] code have the same effect as &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In above example, the [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] and the [[Gadget:mygadget.css]] are used.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember the &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; option is always true in the gadget definition namespace.&lt;/span&gt;

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add the following in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} to provide the appropriate permissions for users who are within the interface-admin group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing pages in the Gadget namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; right and editing pages in the Gadget definition namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt; right.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Options ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Name&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Parameters&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Description&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with {{ll|ResourceLoader}}.&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|list of default modules]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|privileges]].&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;''
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide the gadget from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Preferences]] page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be used in two ways:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to Common.js).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you need to add both: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated skin names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; in the URL, {{phab|T199478}}).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated action names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g. &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/span&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specifying &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; action will also load it on &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/span&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mark this gadget as [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the require() function.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (default), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set the {{ll|ResourceLoader}} target(s) for the gadget.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;or&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/span&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pre-release&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Makes the gadget to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|top-loaded]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can specify extra dependencies for your gadgets, for example:&lt;/span&gt;

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; with mygadget.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/span&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|permissions]], not user groups like [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here are some real examples:&lt;/span&gt;

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Pages ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' and '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css''' in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;.js&quot; or &quot;.css&quot;, respectively.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/div&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into {{tag|nowiki}} and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See the first and last lines of [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] for an example.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The list of gadgets in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;=&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would define a new section, with the title defined on the page [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

== См. также ==
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadget Manager&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>luvtyumrj2opzowxfsgqjb464v8ysop</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:VisualEditor/User guide/342/fi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1426843</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402770</id>
      <parentid>4827678</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:43:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="103" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|Ohjeita viitemallineiden käyttämiseen]] tai [[$2|Ohjeita citoidin $3-painikkeen käyttämiseen]]</text>
      <sha1>3cplqhjy3ljja92dj8o35tml8hpqmy9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Editor/de</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1427441</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402689</id>
      <parentid>5383991</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7320" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Du suchst möglicherweise nach:

== Aktuell ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Aktuelle Bearbeitungssoftware auf Wikimedia-Wikis
!Bearbeitungswerkzeug
!Bildschirmfoto
!Jahr
!Plattform
!Anmerkungen
|-
|Der Standard-MediaWiki-Editor, welches eine HTML-{{tag|textarea|open}} ist
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Bildschirmfoto der HTML-textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Desktop und Mobil
|Dies hat keine Werkzeugleiste. Es kann gesehen werden, wenn JavaScript deaktiviert ist, oder wenn &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; in [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] deaktiviert ist.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Erweiterung:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Ein Bildschirmfoto des WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Desktop
|Dies kann gesehen werden, wenn &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; in [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] aktiviert ist.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing VisualEditor's visual mode&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Desktop und Mobil
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[w:Formatted text|rich-text]] [[w:WYSIWYG|WYSIWYG]] editing system&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Wikitexteditor 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of VisualEditor's built-in wikitext mode&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Proofread Page]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Used at the [[S:|Wikisources]]&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Bildschirmfoto von wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An entirely volunteer-supported wikitext editor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is generally run as a gadget or user script, but it is run as an extension on some non-Wikimedia wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the code editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is used for editing JavaScript and other code pages.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}'s wikitext editor&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of wikitext editing on Mobile Web&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ContentTranslation&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of ContentTranslation's editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Desktop
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Strukturierte Diskussionen]] (Bisher bekannt unter Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of a comment and the beginning of a reply to it in Structured Discussions&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Desktop und Mobil
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Structured Discussions supports wikitext and visual modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Desktop (Bald auch Mobil)
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Desktop (Bald auch Mobil)
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor in der [[$android-faq|Android]]-App&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the editing interface on an Android phone&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor in der [[$ios-faq|iOS]]-App&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the editing interface on an iPhone&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]-Editor
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Desktop
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikivoyage Listing Editor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specialized JavaScript-based editing tool for inserting one of several templates at Wikivoyage&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|}

== Ehemalig ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Former editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
|-
!Bearbeitungswerkzeug
!Bildschirmfoto
!Jahr
!Plattform
!Anmerkungen
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 2006 JavaScript &quot;classic&quot; editor, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Bildschirmfoto des Wikitexteditor 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This was seen when the &quot;showtoolbar&quot; preference was enabled from 2006–2010. After then, it was only shown for users who disabled the &quot;enhanced-toolbar&quot; (2010 editor) preference. This editor was [[phab:T30856|removed]] in [[MediaWiki 1.32]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A similar toolbar is available as a volunteer-supported local gadget at some wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|MobileFrontends ursprünglicher Wikitext-Editor
|
|2012–2014
|Mobil
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This was a mobile-specific set of modifications to the 2003 desktop wikitext editor. No longer deployed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|}

== Siehe auch ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>c2dceautice2te94m6gv4j4w2ta9q6l</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402705</id>
      <parentid>5402689</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:05:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7313" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Du suchst möglicherweise nach:

== Aktuell ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Aktuelle Bearbeitungssoftware auf Wikimedia-Wikis
!Bearbeitungswerkzeug
!Bildschirmfoto
!Jahr
!Plattform
!Anmerkungen
|-
|Der Standard-MediaWiki-Editor, welches eine HTML-{{tag|textarea|open}} ist
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Bildschirmfoto der HTML-textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Desktop und Mobil
|Dies hat keine Werkzeugleiste. Es kann gesehen werden, wenn JavaScript deaktiviert ist, oder wenn &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; in [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] deaktiviert ist.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Erweiterung:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Ein Bildschirmfoto des WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Desktop
|Dies kann gesehen werden, wenn &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; in [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] aktiviert ist.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing VisualEditor's visual mode&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Desktop und Mobil
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[w:Formatted text|rich-text]] [[w:WYSIWYG|WYSIWYG]] editing system&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Wikitexteditor 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of VisualEditor's built-in wikitext mode&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Proofread Page]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Used at the [[S:|Wikisources]]&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Bildschirmfoto von wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An entirely volunteer-supported wikitext editor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is generally run as a gadget or user script, but it is run as an extension on some non-Wikimedia wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the code editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is used for editing JavaScript and other code pages.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}'s wikitext editor&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of wikitext editing on Mobile Web&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ContentTranslation&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of ContentTranslation's editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Desktop
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Strukturierte Diskussionen]] (Bisher bekannt unter Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of a comment and the beginning of a reply to it in Structured Discussions&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Desktop und Mobil
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Structured Discussions supports wikitext and visual modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Desktop (Bald auch Mobil)
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Desktop (Bald auch Mobil)
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor in der [[$android-faq|Android]]-App&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the editing interface on an Android phone&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|Editor in der [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]-App
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the editing interface on an iPhone&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]-Editor
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Desktop
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikivoyage Listing Editor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specialized JavaScript-based editing tool for inserting one of several templates at Wikivoyage&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|}

== Ehemalig ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Former editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
|-
!Bearbeitungswerkzeug
!Bildschirmfoto
!Jahr
!Plattform
!Anmerkungen
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 2006 JavaScript &quot;classic&quot; editor, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Bildschirmfoto des Wikitexteditor 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This was seen when the &quot;showtoolbar&quot; preference was enabled from 2006–2010. After then, it was only shown for users who disabled the &quot;enhanced-toolbar&quot; (2010 editor) preference. This editor was [[phab:T30856|removed]] in [[MediaWiki 1.32]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A similar toolbar is available as a volunteer-supported local gadget at some wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|MobileFrontends ursprünglicher Wikitext-Editor
|
|2012–2014
|Mobil
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This was a mobile-specific set of modifications to the 2003 desktop wikitext editor. No longer deployed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|}

== Siehe auch ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>rkhhu4edm3csspt9p1xpigvcu571c6c</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402727</id>
      <parentid>5402705</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:09:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7306" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Du suchst möglicherweise nach:

== Aktuell ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Aktuelle Bearbeitungssoftware auf Wikimedia-Wikis
!Bearbeitungswerkzeug
!Bildschirmfoto
!Jahr
!Plattform
!Anmerkungen
|-
|Der Standard-MediaWiki-Editor, welches eine HTML-{{tag|textarea|open}} ist
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Bildschirmfoto der HTML-textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Desktop und Mobil
|Dies hat keine Werkzeugleiste. Es kann gesehen werden, wenn JavaScript deaktiviert ist, oder wenn &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; in [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] deaktiviert ist.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Erweiterung:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Ein Bildschirmfoto des WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Desktop
|Dies kann gesehen werden, wenn &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; in [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]] aktiviert ist.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|VisualEditor]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing VisualEditor's visual mode&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Desktop und Mobil
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[w:Formatted text|rich-text]] [[w:WYSIWYG|WYSIWYG]] editing system&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Wikitexteditor 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of VisualEditor's built-in wikitext mode&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A mode within {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} to edit wiki markup.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Proofread Page]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Used at the [[S:|Wikisources]]&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Bildschirmfoto von wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An entirely volunteer-supported wikitext editor.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is generally run as a gadget or user script, but it is run as an extension on some non-Wikimedia wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the code editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is used for editing JavaScript and other code pages.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}'s wikitext editor&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of wikitext editing on Mobile Web&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ContentTranslation&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of ContentTranslation's editor&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Desktop
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Strukturierte Diskussionen]] (Bisher bekannt unter Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of a comment and the beginning of a reply to it in Structured Discussions&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Desktop und Mobil
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Structured Discussions supports wikitext and visual modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Desktop (Bald auch Mobil)
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An inline form for starting new talk page discussions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Desktop (Bald auch Mobil)
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A tool for responding to specific talk page comments.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments are signed and indented automatically.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is equipped with both &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt; modes.&lt;/span&gt; 
|-
|Editor in der [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Android FAQ|Android]]-App
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the editing interface on an Android phone&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|Editor in der [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]-App
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot of the editing interface on an iPhone&lt;/span&gt;|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Mobil
|
|-
|[[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]-Editor
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Desktop
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikivoyage Listing Editor&lt;/span&gt;]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specialized JavaScript-based editing tool for inserting one of several templates at Wikivoyage&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|}

== Ehemalig ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Former editing software on Wikimedia wikis&lt;/span&gt;
|-
!Bearbeitungswerkzeug
!Bildschirmfoto
!Jahr
!Plattform
!Anmerkungen
|-
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The 2006 JavaScript &quot;classic&quot; editor, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Bildschirmfoto des Wikitexteditor 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Desktop
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This was seen when the &quot;showtoolbar&quot; preference was enabled from 2006–2010. After then, it was only shown for users who disabled the &quot;enhanced-toolbar&quot; (2010 editor) preference. This editor was [[phab:T30856|removed]] in [[MediaWiki 1.32]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A similar toolbar is available as a volunteer-supported local gadget at some wikis.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|MobileFrontends ursprünglicher Wikitext-Editor
|
|2012–2014
|Mobil
|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This was a mobile-specific set of modifications to the 2003 desktop wikitext editor. No longer deployed.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|}

== Siehe auch ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;not part of any editor, but appears underneath some editing environments&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>efjpmhnt86tt4tokv15nlfm64bs8wz7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Page Previews/vi</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1427845</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402141</id>
      <parentid>5395005</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:22:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="35614" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
:''For the extension that powers this feature, see [[Extension:Popups]].''
{{Wikimedia engineering project information
| name        = Page Previews
| logo        = Hovercards-thumbnail.png
| description = Page Previews provides you with a short summary of an article whenever you hover a link to it.
| start       = March 26, 2014
| end         = 2018-05
| group       = [[Special:MyLanguage/Reading|Reading]]
| lead        = [[User:OVasileva (WMF)|Olga Vasileva]]
| team        = [[User:Prtksxna|Prateek Saxena]], [[User:Quiddity (WMF)|Quiddity (WMF)]], [[User:CKoerner_(WMF)|Chris Koerner]], [[User:Jkatz_(WMF)|Jon Katz]], [[User:Jdlrobson|Jon Robson]], [[User:JHernandez (WMF)|Joaquin Oltra Hernandez]], [[User:Jhobs|Jeff Hobson]], [[User:Tbayer (WMF)|Tilman Bayer]], [[User:PMiazga (WMF)|Piotr Miazga]], [[User:Npangarkar_(WMF)|Nirzar Pangarkar]], [[User:Phuedx|Sam Smith]], [[User:Sherah (WMF)|Sherah Smith]], [[User:VBamba_(WMF)|Vibha Bamba]], [[User:Jaredzimmerman (WMF)|Jared Zimmerman]]
| Phabricator =
| updates =
| progress =
| previous    =
| next        =
| backlog =
}}
Tính năng '''Xem trước trang''' giải quyết vấn đề người dùng phải mở nhiều tab để tìm hiểu về các từ hoặc khái niệm có trong chủ đề chính mà họ đang đọc.
Với Xem trước trang, khi người đọc di chuột lên một liên kết tới bài viết khác, một bản tóm tắt ngắn chủ đề và một bức ảnh (nếu có) sẽ được hiển thị.
Người dùng có thể quyết định muốn truy cập để tìm hiểu kỹ hơn về chủ đề đó trước khi tiếp tục với bài viết hiện tại.
Mô tả chi tiết về tính năng Xem trước trang có thể được tìm thấy [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/Functionality|tại đây]].
Tổng quan về tất cả các tài liệu kỹ thuật có liên quan được cung cấp tại [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2018/05/09/page-previews-documentation/ bài blog này] từ tháng 5 năm 2018.

Tính năng '''Xem trước chú thích''' là một dự án có liên quan. Tính năng này hiển thị một bản xem trước chú thích khi người đọc di chuột lên dấu chú thích. Mô tả về tính năng này có thể được tìm thấy trên [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|trang dự án của nó]].

== Giới thiệu ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Page Previews are designed to reduce the cost of exploration of a link, as well as to promote learning by allowing readers to gain context on the article they are reading or to define an unfamiliar term, object, event, or idea without navigating away from their original topic.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For casual readers, Page Previews will make it easier for users to get an overview of an article before deciding whether or not to browse to it.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Users interested in reading an entire article in its totality will not be distracted or discouraged by viewing unfamiliar concepts—they can simply preview the concept without navigating to a new page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consequently, the smoothness of the user experience for these users will be increased.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There have been many requests over the years for a similar feature; there are browser extensions (see [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|list]]) and one heavily used gadget (the more editor-focused [[:en:Wikipedia:Tools/Navigation popups|Navigation popups]]) that also exist to solve this problem.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Page Previews were first built as a beta feature in 2014 (called Hovercards) and have been among our most popular beta features in terms of adoption, user feedback and impact on usage.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On the [[Talk:Beta Features/Hovercards|primary talk page for Hovercards]], over the course of 2 years, numerous issues across all projects were identified and resolved.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The mobile equivalent of Page Previews, implemented on the Android app [[wmfblog:2015/09/10/Wikipedia-app-new-navigation-features/|in September 2015]], led to a 20% increase in links clicked per page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Previews [[#settings|settings panel]] enables logged-out users to enable and disable the feature based on their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Logged-in users may enable or disable Page Previews from the Appearance section of Special:Preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If Navigation popups and Page Previews are enabled at the same time (typically, for logged-in users who have opted in via the beta feature), Navigation popups takes precedence.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To enable Page Previews, Navigation pop-ups must be disabled.&lt;/span&gt;

[[File:Hovercards - Alps Mont Blanc.jpg|none|thumb|623x623px|Ví dụ một bản Xem trước trang]]

== Thiết kế ==

Với phiên bản hiện tại của Xem trước trang, mỗi bản xem trước có chứa những thông tin sau:
* Một phần trích trong đoạn văn đầu của bài viết
* Một bức ảnh (nếu có) từ bài viết. Ảnh được hiện ngang hoặc dọc tùy theo vị trí của liên kết trong bài.
* Một nút cài đặt cho phép người dùng bật tắt Xem trước trang

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercards screenshot Greek 3.png|Ví dụ về Xem trước trang bằng tiếng Hy Lạp
File:Hovercards screenshot Chinese 1.png|Example of Page Previews in Chinese
File:Hovercard english.png|Example of Page Previews in English
&lt;/gallery&gt;

=== Khác biệt chính với Các popup chuyển hướng ===

* Các popup chuyển hướng được thiết kế dành cho người dùng nâng cao và có nhiều tính năng không phù hợp với hầu hết người dùng, ví dụ như các liên kết nhanh tới các trang siêu dữ liệu như Lịch sử, Khác biệt và Đóng góp thành viên.
* Các popup chuyển hướng hoạt động với tất cả không gian tên, và trên tất cả các dự án Wikimedia. Xem trước trang chỉ hoạt động với các liên kết không gian tên chính, và hiện chỉ có trên các Wikipedia.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Page Previews are styled to enable easy reading. Currently, Nav-popups' type-size is small and the margins are tight.
&lt;/div&gt;
* Xem trước trang có sẵn với tất cả người dùng chứ không chỉ giới hạn cho người dùng đã đăng nhập.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Page Previews use a visual style consistent with the article type treatment
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Page Previews emphasize the lead images, so a user gets an idea of a term using both text and image.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The action set in the gadget feels out of context, hence we need to validate which of those actions are useful for readers and editors.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Xem trước HTML ===

Tính đến ngày 1 tháng 3 năm 2018, các bản xem trước trang đã được hiển thị ở dạng HTML. Điều này đã giải quyết được nhiều lỗi đáng chú ý, cho phép biểu diễn chính xác các ký hiệu toán học, hóa học và các công thức khác, đồng thời đảm bảo bản xem trước được hiển thị với định dạng giống như nội dung bài viết.

{{anchor|Settings|settings}}
== Cài đặt ==

=== Bật/Tắt ===

==== Người dùng chưa đăng nhập ====
Người dùng chưa đăng nhập có thể tắt Xem trước trang bằng cách nhấn vào biểu tượng bánh răng ở dưới mỗi bản xem trước. Nếu muốn bật lại Xem trước trang, người dùng có thể nhấn vào liên kết &quot;{{int|Popups-settings-enable}}&quot; ở cuối bất cứ trang wiki nào.
Người dùng cũng có thể tắt JavaScript trong trình duyệt để tắt tính năng này vĩnh viễn.
{{-}}

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200px&quot;&gt;
File:Hovercard english.png |Chọn biểu tượng cài đặt hình bánh răng để tắt Xem trước trang
File:Page preview settings logged out.png | Select disable to disable the feature
File:Reenablemodal.png | Instructions on how to re-enable will be presented
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;100px&quot;&gt;
Reenable preview.png| Liên kết bật lại Xem trước trang luôn xuất hiện ở cuối mỗi trang
&lt;/gallery&gt;

==== Người dùng đã đăng nhập ====

Người dùng đã đăng nhập có thể điều chỉnh tùy chọn ở hai nơi. Họ có thể bật hoặc tắt Xem trước trang từ phần Giao diện trong Đặc biệt:Tùy chọn. Người dùng đã đăng nhập cũng có thể tắt Xem trước trang qua biểu tượng bánh răng ở cuối mỗi bản xem trước.
* Nếu người dùng đã đăng nhập nhấn vào biểu tượng bánh răng cài đặt, hệ thống sẽ chuyển tới trang tùy chọn người dùng.
* Nếu người dùng trước đó đã bật tính năng beta Hovercards, tùy chọn của họ sẽ được giữ lại và xuất hiện trong phần Giao diện của trang tùy chọn.

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;350px&quot;&gt;
File:Preferences for logged in users.png| Người dùng có thể bật tính năng bằng cách nhấn vào biểu tượng cài đặt ở cuối mỗi bản xem trước, hoặc chọn trực tiếp từ trang tùy chọn người dùng
&lt;/gallery&gt;

{{anchor|Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A number of qualitative and quantitative tests were performed to evaluate the performance of the Page Previews feature. These tests were focused on the following questions:
* Do users enjoy Page Previews and find them useful?
* How do Page Previews change reading behavior and do they help users be more accurate when selecting the articles they wish to read?
* Would launching the Page Previews feature have effects on fundraising?
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== 2015 Greek and Catalan Wikipedia test ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A feature test was implemented for a period of 4 months on Greek and Catalan Wikipedias. A number of issues and bugs were reported and user satisfaction was recorded using a survey. Users had generally favorable feedback, with the majority of users finding Page previews (Hovercards) useful, easy to use, and enjoyable to use.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/GreekCatalanTest|the full results of these tests]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== 2016 Qualitative test ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To determine user attitudes towards the Page Previews feature and trace further changes in reader behavior, an unmoderated remote panel study was performed using [http://UserZoom.com UserZoom] software.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The majority of participants reported positive attitudes to the Page Previews feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition, the majority of participants had no issues in turning the feature on and off.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Users also described the feature in generally positive terms and reported it was not distracting to their reading experience.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Research/Design Research/Reading Team UX Research/Hovercards Usability|the full results and analysis of this test]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== 2016 A/B tests on Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To determine changes in reading behavior and evaluate the success of the Page Previews (Hovercards) beta feature, three A/B tests were launched on Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias. The A/B test on Hungarian was launched June 7, 2016, the A/B tests on Italian and Russian were launched Sept 23, 2016.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The results of these tests indicated that Page Previews facilitate positive changes in reading behavior by increasing the precision with which users select the pages they read, reducing the cost of exploration of other pages, and allowing users to selectively focus on a single topic by providing context within a page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;During the process of collecting and analysing our data we ran into a number of bugs and issues within our instrumentation that allowed us to refine and improve, to ensure subsequent tests were issue-free.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Read [[Special:MyLanguage/Page_Previews/2016_A/B_Tests#Hovercards A.2FB Test Results|the full results and analysis of these tests]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== 2017-2018 A/B tests on English and German Wikipedias ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;From October to November 2017 and December 2017 to February 2018, we ran [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|two A/B tests to gauge the performance of the feature]] prior to release on these projects.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The results, described in more detail [[Page Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests|in the report]], displayed a decrease in pageviews, but an overall increase in the number of distinct pages that readers interact with, indicating that they are more likely to explore a larger variety of topics when the feature is on.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We also noted decreased usage of the back button and very low rates of disabling the feature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In addition, we ran a number of fundraising tests on enwiki.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Improvements since English Wikipedia discussion from April 2016 ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
During the [[w:Wikipedia:Village_pump_(proposals)/Archive_131#Proposal:_Enable_Hovercards_by_default |discussion]] from April 2016, a number of bugs, improvements, and other requests were identified which we have addressed in the following ways:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previews “getting stuck” in the open position
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have since refactored our code and this is no longer an issue
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Bolded text and mathematical formulas not appearing within the preview
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Currently, previews display in HTML and content is true to the article content
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to disable the feature from the card itself
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in and logged-out users can now disable the feature by selecting the settings gear within the card itself.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A means to make sure page previews do not interfere with navigational popups
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Logged-in users may either have navigational popups or page previews. If you’re a navpopups user, you will not be able to enable page previews unless you turn off navpopups first, and vice versa
Providing more thorough research and A/B test results, performing a large-scale A/B test on English Wikipedia
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Since the discussion, we have performed [[#Success Metrics and Feature Evaluation|two series of A/B tests]], the first on Hungarian, Russian, and Italian Wikipedias.  And the [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests |second]] on English and German Wikipedias.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Limiting performance impact
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*We have worked with our performance team to minimize any issues page previews.  A [https://grafana.wikimedia.org/dashboard/db/reading-web-page-previews?refresh=1m&amp;orgId=1 dashboard] with detailed information on feature performance was created.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing a way to enable the feature for anonymous users only
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*This is ready as well.  As of March 2018, the feature is enabled by default for anonymous users on all Wikipedias except English and German
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing data on how often users disable the feature
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*For both of our 2017/18 A/B tests, the disable rate was around 0.01%.  Because the rate had been similarly low in earlier A/B tests, we also did a [[Wikimedia_Research/Design_Research/Reading_Team_UX_Research/Hovercards_Usability |qualitative test]] to confirm that users did not have problems enabling or disabling the feature.  Our conclusion is that people know how to turn the feature off without difficulty but do so at extremely low rates.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Providing information on whether the feature was considered a nuisance
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
*Based on our qualitative testing, we concluded that tested users did not find the feature distracting, or a nuisance.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Disabled pages ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For security reasons, Page Previews won't be loaded on certain special pages. We refer to these pages as &quot;disabled pages&quot;. The initial version of this can be found here: {{phab|T170893}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Future Iterations and Potential Improvements ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Following the general launch of Page Previews, we are planning on iterating on the feature to add functionality. These items will include:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Configuration of images and other settings:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** a number of users have requested making images configurable within Page Previews. Request declined: https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T148995
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** other logged out preferences (more info [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features/Hovercards/preferences|here]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Article titles - currently, only the summary of the article is available within Page Previews. As an iteration, we would like to display the title of each article along with its summary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Reference Tooltips ([[phab:T67114|phab:T67114]]). The [[m:WMDE Technical Wishes/ReferencePreviews|project page for the Reference Previews]] feature has more details.
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:Reference-tooltips-06.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using Page Previews to gain more information on each reference without scrolling to the bottom of the page&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Cross-wiki Page Previews ([[phab:T67117|phab:T67117]]), and subsection links ([[phab:T65792|phab:T65792]]), particularly for Wiktionary
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrate with Navigation Pop-ups - we would also like to expand the configuration of Page Previews to include some of the functionality planned in navigation pop-ups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Interacting with Page Previews text - a number of requests for interacting with preview text have been filed, including being able to copy and paste the text or export the text as a form or article summary. More info here  ([[phab:T146097|phab:T146097]])
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Integrating with Wiktionary items to provide definitions on hover.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300px&quot;&gt;
File:NavigationPopups Wiktionary.png |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interacting with Wiktionary items to provide definitions for unknown&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== [[Special:MyLanguage/Page Previews/FAQ|FAQ]] ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
;Why Page Previews?
:This is a feature intended to improve the experience for any reader who normally would have clicked on a blue link in Wikipedia because they needed an overview (definition) of that entity. It's inspired by one of the most popular gadgets, [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia_talk:Tools/Navigation_popups Navigation popups].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How do we measure Page Previews performance?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:The theory of impact for Page Previews is that they lower the cost of exploring a link. This should mean that users are less inhibited and more focused when exploring links. We should see that the overall links clicked +  (non-accidental) hovers exceed the number of links clicked without Page Previews. This is what success looks like. There are also some indications of failure that we will look for:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*hovers can be accidental - we need to measure normal dwell time in a controlled condition to ensure that the likely rate of accidental hovers is not too high. To give an example, if a user must dwell on a link for 250 msecs before a hover shows, then we would want to make sure that there are not a large number of users who tend to dwell on a link for more than 250 msecs without clicking it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*Page Previews could lead to fewer page views, because the user gets the information that they need from the preview- this is not a problem, but we want to make sure that the decrease (if any) does not result in significantly less editing or fundraising.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the % of hovers that result in a user continuing to the page is high - this would suggest that most people wanted to go to the page anyway. If this is the case, then the hover is likely just adding an unnecessary step. We expect some significant % of click throughs for hovers. It is ~60% on Android for a similar feature, but we expect it to be lower on desktop.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:*the percentage of users who disable Page Previews is low (given that users are aware on how to disable the feature) - this suggests that users enjoy the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Is this enabled by default for logged-in users?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:No. If you had the feature enabled as a Beta feature you will still have the feature enabled. See Preferences&gt;Appearance&gt;Reading preferences to change the setting.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What if I have Navpops enabled by default?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:If you have Navpops enabled, Page Previews are automatically disabled. You will have to disable Navpops in order to experience Page Previews. This is an intentional decision to ensure that Navpop users' do not have their preferences interrupted. Note: for certain browsers, you might have to clear your browser cache first for the change to take place.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; How many options do I have in Page Previews preferences?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Right now, Page Previews will either be turned on or off by a user. The option to turn them off lives in each hover event. So at each hover event, a user can decide that they are no longer interested. For logged-in users, Page Previews may be re-enabled from user settings under the section titled &quot;Appearance&quot;. For logged-out users, Page Previews may be re-enabled by selecting the &quot;Enable Previews&quot; link at the bottom of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
At the project level, administrators can determine how long a user should dwell on a link before a hover is triggered. If a project wants to be conservative, the lag can be longer. WMF will have a recommendation as to optimum dwell time that provides the best user experience while minimizing accidental hovers.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; Why can't users just turn on Page Previews if they want them?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Unfortunately, there is no good way to tell users about a new feature without showing it to them first. Central notice banners have been suggested, but running them for 2 weeks would not solve the needs of future users and we do not want to run them continuously. Notifying a user of a new feature is best done using a...hover-over.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What impact to Page Previews have on page views?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:According to A/B tests we did not see a large decrease in session depth across all Wikipedias. Average session depth (average number of pages viewed per session) [[Page_Previews/2017-18_A/B_Tests#Pageviews_and_Page_Interactions,_effects_on_fundraising|remained relatively equal]] between the Previews on and off groups.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; What about accessibility?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Page Previews only activate when the focus/hover state occurs over a link. They are usable for people who use keyboard navigation. For screen readers, Page Previews have proper [[w:WAI-ARIA|WAI-ARIA]] semantics declaring them as tooltips. In short, screen reader software ignore Page Previews.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
; If I have Page Previews feedback or if I have a suggestion for making them better, where should I go?
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
:Please go to [[Talk:Page_Previews|the Page Previews discussion page]].
&lt;/div&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Previews continues to show an old version of a page. What can I do?&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The Page Preview shows the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Caching|cached]] version of a page. If the page has been edited and you want Page Previews to show the new version right away, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Purge|purge]] the page.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How can I exclude certain page images?&lt;/span&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:PageImages#image-choice|Extension:PageImages]] for details.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Main|Extension:Popups}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
;Analytics and instrumentation
:* Page Previews were instrumented to measure various aspects of usage. Please see the {{ll|Extension:Popups|nsp=0}} extension page for details and feel free to ask any clarifying questions.
&lt;/div&gt;
:* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To measure content usage via Page Previews, in an aggregated way that is compatible with the existing Pageviews data, a separate instrumentation [[phab:T186728|was set up]] that went live in April 2018. There are [[phab:T193524|plans]] to make some of this data public for the benefit of e.g. Wikipedia editors and academic researchers.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Project-level rollout discussions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update July 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Page previews are now available on all Wikipedias.  The feature is on by default for anonymous users and newly created accounts and off by default for accounts created before July 10, 2018.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Update April 2018 ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The next step of the rollout for English and German Wikipedias is planned for the first half of April 2018. This deployment will include turning the feature on by default for logged-out users.  '''This will mean no changes for logged-in users.''' The feature will be off by default for logged-in editors, unless currently enabled. If you would like to enable it, it is available in your Preferences under “Appearance”. If you have the feature enabled already, it will stay on.  
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In terms of future changes for logged-in users, we have a few options we will be requesting feedback on:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Keep the feature off by default for logged-in users.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for new accounts only. Currently, when users move from being readers to contributors and create an account, the feature will seem to vanish, and that would be confusing.  As a further step in the feature rollout, we plan to change this configuration and enable the feature for all new accounts.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Turn the feature on by default for existing logged-in users (Even if it were enabled for everyone, it would still be automatically suppressed for anyone who uses NAVPOPS.)
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Rollout Plan ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
We began rolling out to Catalan, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, and Russian Wikipedias in early 2017. Data from the A/B tests represented highly favorable views of the feature. After this, we would like to continue rolling out in stages to other Wikipedias as described in the table below.
&lt;/div&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Code&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Language&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Phase&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Onboarding&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Success&lt;/span&gt; !! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dates&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| ca || {{#language:ca|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ca.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tema:Thijlqz8uwve1490&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| el || {{#language:el|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://el.wikipedia.org/wiki/Βικιπαίδεια:Αγορά/Αρχείο_2016/Δεκέμβριος#Αναδυόμενες_κάρτες&lt;/ref&gt; || {{Check}}
| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| it || {{#language:it|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;https://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Malfunzionamenti#Hovercards&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| he || {{#language:he|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 0 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;https://he.wikipedia.org/wiki/ויקיפדיה:מזנון/ארכיון_387#הצעה:_הפעלת_כרטיסים_מרחפים_בוויקיפדיה_בעברית&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| hu || {{#language:hu|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív104#Információs_kártyák&lt;/ref&gt;&lt;ref&gt;https://hu.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Kocsmafal_(műszaki)/Archív105#Információs_kártyák_(másodszor)&lt;/ref&gt;
|{{Check}}|| {{ym|2017|3}}

|-
| -|| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All other Wikipedias except the remaining top 6&lt;/span&gt; || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[m:User:CKoerner_(WMF)/Enable_Hovercards/Phase_1|this message]] was sent to Wikipedia Village Pump (or equivalent) of the 247 wikis included in this phase on  19 April&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2017|7}}

|-
| ja || {{#language:ja|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://ja.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:井戸端#New_Page_previews_feature&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| es || {{#language:es|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} || 1 || &lt;ref&gt;https://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Café/Archivo/Noticias/Actual#Nueva_funci.C3.B3n_Vistas_previas_de_p.C3.A1ginas&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| fr || {{#language:fr|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||1|| &lt;ref&gt;https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia:Le_Bistro/19_avril_2017#Nouvelle_fonctionnalité_Aperçus_des_pages&lt;/ref&gt;  &lt;ref&gt;[[:fr:Wikipédia:Le Bistro/21 juillet 2017#Page Previews (Hovercards) update]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}}|| [https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T162672#3539210 {{ym|2017|8}}]

|-
| de || {{#language:de|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;[[:de:Wikipedia:Fragen_zur_Wikipedia/Archiv/2018/Woche_14#Seitenvorschaubilder (Page_Previews)]]&lt;/ref&gt; ||{{Check}} || {{ym|2018|4}}

|-
| en || {{#language:en|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}}} ||2||&lt;ref&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Village_pump_(miscellaneous)#Page_Previews&lt;/ref&gt; || || {{ym|2018|4}}
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Onboarding Experience ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The onboarding experience for the feature will depend on the consensus of each community on having Page Previews on by default or providing users with an onboarding experience during which they can reject the feature.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Xem thêm ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[wikitech:Analytics/Data_Lake/Traffic/Virtualpageview_hourly|virtualpageview_hourly]] (documentation of a - so far internal - dataset recording aggregate frequencies of seen page previews)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[:en:WP:POP|Navigation popups]] - the editor-focused gadget, started in 2005 by Lupin, available at most wikis
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://blog.wikimedia.org/2014/03/26/Hovercards-now-available-as-a-beta-feature-on-all-wikimedia-wikis/ WMF blog post - Hovercards now available as a Beta Feature on all Wikimedia wikis] (March 2014)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The original specifications can be seen at [[:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf|:File:NavigationPopups V1.pdf]] and [https://trello.com/c/NYQ0nMeE/101-Hovercards-phase-3 Hovercards-phase-3 trello notes].
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Topic:Seq3z026jcarkaji|A list of similar browser extensions]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Page Previews/API Specification]] - The API specification for Page Previews
&lt;/div&gt;

== Tham khảo ==
{{Reflist}}

[[Category:Design{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>otg8rmppm8acyhpao7li746qge43by7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Page Previews/78/vi</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1427850</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402140</id>
      <parentid>4828985</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:22:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="145" xml:space="preserve">Tổng quan về tất cả các tài liệu kỹ thuật có liên quan được cung cấp tại [$url bài blog này] từ tháng 5 năm 2018.</text>
      <sha1>t5iba0rpfwfsphg52col494ige1km55</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/nan</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1449145</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401805</id>
      <parentid>5184885</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3356" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Khài-iàu==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

== Siā-huē muî-thé kuán-tō ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== MetiaUiki ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

=== Uikimitia Ki-su̍t ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

=== Bo̍k-tsiân uī-hóo-tsiá ===
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

== Lán-ê tshau-tsok kui-tsik ==
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Huat-pòo kàu Twitter hām Facebook ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>q4cg424qqqjai2w8atippa00yzix6e6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/mnw-simplified-anonta</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1453441</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402044</id>
      <parentid>5190765</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:35:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4578" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:1--&gt;
You can type the Mon language on Wikipedia without installing any software.

&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
To enable it, do the following:
&lt;/translate&gt;

# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:3--&gt; Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; If &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;ဘာသာ မန်&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Mon Simplified Anonta&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; If &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;ဘာသာ မန်&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/translate&gt;
## &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; Click &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;...&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/translate&gt;
## &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Find &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;ဘာသာ မန်&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; in the panel. You can easily do it by searching for &quot;mon&quot; in Latin letters. Click it.&lt;/translate&gt;
## &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Mon Simplified Anonta&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:10--&gt;
To disable this special keyboard and go back to type usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.  To re-enable the keyboard, press Ctrl-M, or repeat the steps above.

&lt;!--T:11--&gt;
To type Mon letters, use the table below:
&lt;/translate&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; To type this letter...&lt;/translate&gt;
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; Type these keyboard keys:&lt;/translate&gt;
! &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt; Comments:&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Numbers without Shift&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:16--&gt; Numbers with Shift&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:17--&gt; E above&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:18--&gt; qwerty row without Shift&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:19--&gt; QWERTY row with Shift&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:20--&gt; Mon medial MA&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|T
|ဳ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:21--&gt; Mon II&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:22--&gt; Mon medial LA&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:23--&gt; asdf row without Shift&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:24--&gt; Type this '''after''' the letter&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|s
|ျ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:25--&gt; medial YA&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:26--&gt; ASAT&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|g
|ါ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:27--&gt; tall AA&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|h
|ဴ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:28--&gt; Mon O&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|j
|ြ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:29--&gt; medial RA&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|k
|ု
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:30--&gt; U&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|l
|ူ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:31--&gt; UU&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|;
|း
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:32--&gt; VISARGA&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:33--&gt; ASDF row with Shift&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:34--&gt; medial HA&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|D
|ီ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:35--&gt; II&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|F
|္
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:36--&gt; VIRAMA&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|G
|ွ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:37--&gt; medial WA&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|H
|ံ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:38--&gt; ANUSVARA&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|J
|ဲ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:39--&gt; AI&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:40--&gt; zcxv row without Shift&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:41--&gt; AA&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:42--&gt; ZXCV with Shift&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:43--&gt; Mon medial NA&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:44--&gt;
This keyboard layout is based on the [&lt;tvar name=&quot;link&quot;&gt;https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta&lt;/tvar&gt; Mon Anonta layout published by Keyman]. However, in the original Anonta layout, the ေ sign (E, on the 'a' key) is typed before the letter, and in this layout it is typed after the letter.
&lt;/translate&gt;</text>
      <sha1>p82jqu60xhrcwbfbbnbhpog5bocq20z</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/mnw-simplified-anonta/5/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1453447</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402045</id>
      <parentid>4910682</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:35:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="71" xml:space="preserve">If &quot;$1&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Mon Simplified Anonta&quot;.</text>
      <sha1>ev3qn2uws1mtkimeedzxxfr0r8uiu1q</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/mnw-simplified-anonta/6/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1453448</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402046</id>
      <parentid>4910683</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:35:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="64" xml:space="preserve">If &quot;$1&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:</text>
      <sha1>djqqgn80fbdgs3v69auech3dly5cqm3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/mnw-simplified-anonta/7/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1453449</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402047</id>
      <parentid>4910684</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:35:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="58" xml:space="preserve">Click &quot;$1&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.</text>
      <sha1>57oykhjvmdmgversv7br05aj6kjbsto</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/mnw-simplified-anonta/8/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1453450</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402048</id>
      <parentid>4910685</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:35:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="95" xml:space="preserve">Find &quot;$1&quot; in the panel. You can easily do it by searching for &quot;mon&quot; in Latin letters. Click it.</text>
      <sha1>ag6tv9hfmasvzcrvw3s27g6qoaarhhk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/mnw-simplified-anonta/en</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1453485</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402049</id>
      <parentid>5190768</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:36:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2982" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

You can type the Mon language on Wikipedia without installing any software.

To enable it, do the following:

# Click the search box at the top of the page.
# Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.
# If &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Mon Simplified Anonta&quot;.
# If &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:
## Click &quot;...&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.
## Find &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; in the panel. You can easily do it by searching for &quot;mon&quot; in Latin letters. Click it.
## Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Mon Simplified Anonta&quot;.

To disable this special keyboard and go back to type usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.  To re-enable the keyboard, press Ctrl-M, or repeat the steps above.

To type Mon letters, use the table below:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! To type this letter...
! Type these keyboard keys:
! Comments:
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Numbers without Shift
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Numbers with Shift
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| E above
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |qwerty row without Shift
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |QWERTY row with Shift
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| Mon medial MA
|-
|T
|ဳ
| Mon II
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| Mon medial LA
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |asdf row without Shift
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. Type this '''after''' the letter
|-
|s
|ျ
| medial YA
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| ASAT
|-
|g
|ါ
| tall AA
|-
|h
|ဴ
| Mon O
|-
|j
|ြ
| medial RA
|-
|k
|ု
| U
|-
|l
|ူ
| UU
|-
|;
|း
| VISARGA
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |ASDF row with Shift
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| medial HA
|-
|D
|ီ
| II
|-
|F
|္
| VIRAMA
|-
|G
|ွ
| medial WA
|-
|H
|ံ
| ANUSVARA
|-
|J
|ဲ
| AI
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |zcxv row without Shift
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| AA
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |ZXCV with Shift
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| Mon medial NA
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

This keyboard layout is based on the [https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta Mon Anonta layout published by Keyman]. However, in the original Anonta layout, the ေ sign (E, on the 'a' key) is typed before the letter, and in this layout it is typed after the letter.</text>
      <sha1>b6wze9of58onxtbdvnotsmgnvv6hwc6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/mnw-simplified-anonta/mnw</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1453622</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402053</id>
      <parentid>5190766</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:36:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5882" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

မၞးတက်ဂွံ လိက်မန် ပ္ဍဲကဵု ဝဳကဳပဳဒဳယာ သီုကဵု ဟွံဒး အေန်သတဝ်ပၠုပ် သောပ်ဝဴမွဲမွဲ။

သွက်သ္ဂောအ်တက်လိက်ဂွံဂှ် ကၠောန်ဗက် အတိုင်ဗွဲသၟဝ်ဝွံညိ-

# ဍဵု ပ္ဍဲကဵု ခံက်ဂမၠာဲ မနွံ ပ္ဍဲလတူ မုက်လိက်ဏအ်ညိ။
# ဍဵု ရုပ်ကောန်ဍေင်သၟတ် မဂွံဆဵုညာတ်ဒၟံင် ဗဒါဲ ခံက်ဂမၠာဲဂှ်ညိ။
# &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ယဝ်ရ &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; မံက်ညာတ်ဒၟံင် ပ္ဍဲကဵုလတူစရင်ဂှ်မ္ဂး၊ ရုဲစှ် &quot;Mon Simplified Anonta&quot; ညိ။&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ယဝ်ရ &quot;&quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; ဟွံမံက်ညာတ် ပ္ဍဲကဵုလတူစရင်ဂှ်မ္ဂး၊ ကၠောန်ဗက် အတိုင်ဗွဲသၟဝ်ဝွံညိ -&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ဍဵု &quot;...&quot; ဒၞာဲသၟဝ် ပ္ဍဲကဵု စရင်ဂှ်။ တၞးမုက်လိက်မွဲ မံက်ကၠုင်ရောင်။&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ဂၠာဲ &quot;&quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; ပ္ဍဲကဵု တၞးမုက်လိက်ဂှ်။ ဗွဲမလောဲသွာ ဂၠာဲကေတ်မာန် နကဵု မတက်စုတ် &quot;mon&quot; နကဵု အက္ခရ်လေတ္တေန်။ ဍဵု လတူ ဘာသာမန်ဂှ်။&lt;/span&gt;
## ဍဵု ရုပ်ကောန်ဍေင်သၟတ်ဂှ် ပၠန်၊ တုဲ ဂၠာဲ &quot;Mon Simplified Anonta&quot;။

မိက်ဂွံ ဗဒေါအ်ထောအ် ကဳဘောတ်တၟေင်ဏအ်တုဲ တက်လိက် အတိုင်ဗီုတြေံပၠန်မ္ဂး၊ ဍဵု ရုပ်ကောန်ဍေင်သၟတ် တုဲ ဍဵု &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;၊ ဟွံသေင်မ္ဂး ဍဵု Ctrl-M ညိ။ မိက်ဂွံကဵု ကဳဘောတ်ဏအ် ကၠောန်ကမၠောန်ပၠန်မ္ဂး ဍဵု Ctrl-M ဟွံသေင်မ္ဂး ကလေင်ပ အတိုင်ဗွဲလတူဂှ်ညိ။

သွက်ဂွံ တက်လိက်မန်ဂှ် စကာ အင် ဗွဲသၟဝ်ဝွံညိ-
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! သွက်ဂွံတက် မလိက်...
! တက် နကဵုကောန်ဍေင်ကဳဘောတ်စဏအ်-
! တင်ပတိုန်ထ္ၜးဂမၠိုင်-
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |မဂၞန်ဂမၠိုင် သက္ကု သမၠာဲ
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |မဂၞန်ဂမၠိုင် နကဵု သမၠာဲ
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| ဂစိုတ်ဝ် လတူ
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |ပၞောန်-q သက္ကု သမၠာဲ
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |ပၞောန်-Q နကဵု သမၠာဲ
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| ကွက်မ
|-
|T
|ဳ
| ခရိတ်က္ဍိုပ်ဒေါဝ်
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| ကွက်လ
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |ပၞောန်-asdf သက္ကု သမၠာဲ
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. တက် အရာဏအ် '''ကြဴနူ''' မလိက်ဂှ်
|-
|s
|ျ
| ကွက်ယ
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| ဂစိုတ်
|-
|g
|ါ
| ကၞာတဲသမၠုင်
|-
|h
|ဴ
| ဩ
|-
|j
|ြ
| ကွက်ရ
|-
|k
|ု
| ဓဇုက်ဇုင်မွဲ
|-
|l
|ူ
| ဓဇက်ဇိုင်ၜါ
|-
|;
|း
| သရးက္ဍိုပ်
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |ပၞောန်-ASDF နကဵု သမၠာဲ
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| ကွက်ဟ
|-
|D
|ီ
| ဂစိုတ်မ်လတူ
|-
|F
|္
| ကၟက်
|-
|G
|ွ
| ကွက်ဝ
|-
|H
|ံ
| ခၞံက္ဍိုပ်
|-
|J
|ဲ
| သဝဲပၠန်
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |ပၞောန်-zcxv သက္ကု သမၠာဲ
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| ကၞာတဲ
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |ပၞောန်-ZXCV နကဵု သမၠာဲ
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| ကွက်န
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

ဒမံင်လစွံ ကဳဗောတ်ဏအ်ဂှ် ဒုင်သဇိုင် ကုမန်အနန္တ မကၠောန်ပတိတ်လဝ် နကဵု Keyman [https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta Mon Anonta layout published by Keyman]။ ဆဂး ပ္ဍဲကဵု ဒမံင်လစွံမူလ အနန္တ ဂှ်၊ ေ (သွေမွဲ ပ္ဍဲကဵု 'a') ဂှ် တက်ကိုပ်ကၠာမလိက်၊ ပ္ဍဲကဵု ဒမံင်လစွံဏအ်ဂှ် သွေမွဲ တက်လက်ကြဴမွဲလိက်။</text>
      <sha1>nwx06ms1b6kmuj0yhyxy6m9j39i3wof</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/mnw-simplified-anonta/my</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1456753</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402052</id>
      <parentid>5190769</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:36:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5795" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

သင်သည်မည်သည့်ဆော့ဝဲလ်မှ အသုံးမပြုဘဲ ဝီကီပီးဒီးယားတွင် မွန်ဘာသာစကားအတွက် သင်စာရိုက်နိုင်သည်။

အသုံးပြုလိုပါက အောက်ပါအတိုင်း အသုံးပြုပါရန်:

# စာမျက်နှာ၏ထိပ်ရှိ ရှာဖွေရေးဘောက်စ်ကို နှိပ်ပါ။
# ရှာဖွေမှုအကွက်အနီးတွင် ပေါ်လာသည့် ကီးဘုတ်အိုင်ကွန်လေးကို နှိပ်ပါ။
# &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;ခေါင်စဥ်၏ ထိပ်တွင် &quot;ဘာသာမန်&quot; ဟုပေါ်လာပါက၊ &quot;Mon Simplified Anonta&quot; ကိုရွေးချယ်ပါ။&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;...&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; in the panel. You can easily do it by searching for &quot;mon&quot; in Latin letters. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Mon Simplified Anonta&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To disable this special keyboard and go back to type usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.  To re-enable the keyboard, press Ctrl-M, or repeat the steps above.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To type Mon letters, use the table below:
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type this letter...&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type these keyboard keys:&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comments:&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Numbers without Shift&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Numbers with Shift&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E above&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;qwerty row without Shift&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;QWERTY row with Shift&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mon medial MA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|T
|ဳ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mon II&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mon medial LA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;asdf row without Shift&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type this '''after''' the letter&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|s
|ျ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;medial YA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ASAT&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|g
|ါ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;tall AA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|h
|ဴ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mon O&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|j
|ြ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;medial RA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|k
|ု
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;U&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|l
|ူ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;UU&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|;
|း
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VISARGA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ASDF row with Shift&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;medial HA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|D
|ီ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;II&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|F
|္
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;VIRAMA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|G
|ွ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;medial WA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|H
|ံ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ANUSVARA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|J
|ဲ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;AI&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;zcxv row without Shift&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;AA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ZXCV with Shift&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mon medial NA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This keyboard layout is based on the [https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta Mon Anonta layout published by Keyman]. However, in the original Anonta layout, the ေ sign (E, on the 'a' key) is typed before the letter, and in this layout it is typed after the letter.
&lt;/div&gt;</text>
      <sha1>cqxntkr7qu2dskota8o1sqrh9e4kumf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Editor/es</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1457827</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402690</id>
      <parentid>5370840</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:04:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6161" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Puede que estés buscando:

== Actual ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Software de edición actual en wikis de Wikimedia
!Herramienta de edición
!Captura de pantalla
!Año
!Plataforma
!Notas
|-
|el editor de MediaWiki predeterminado, que es un HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de HTML textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Escritorio y móvil
|No tiene barra de herramientas. Puede verse cuando JavaScript está desactivado, o cuando &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; está desactivado en [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extensión:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Una captura de pantalla de WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Escritorio
|Esto se puede ver cuando &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; está habilitado en [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor visual]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Captura de pantalla que muestra el modo visual de VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Escritorio y móvil
|Un sistema de edición [[w:Formatted text|texto enriquecido]] [[w:WYSIWYG|WYSIWYG]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Editor de wikitexto 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Captura de pantalla del modo de wikitexto integrado de VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Escritorio
|Un modo dentro de {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} para editar el marcado wiki.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Página de revisión]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Escritorio
|Utilizado en [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Escritorio
|Un editor de wikitexto totalmente apoyado por voluntarios. Esto generalmente se ejecuta como un gadget o script de usuario, pero se ejecuta como una extensión en algunas wikis que no son de Wikimedia.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Captura de pantalla del editor de código|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Escritorio
|Se utiliza para editar JavaScript y otras páginas de códigos.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor de wikitexto actual de {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de la edición de wikitexto en la Web móvil|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Móvil
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Traducción de contenidos]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Captura de pantalla del editor de ContentTranslation|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Escritorio
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Discusiones estructuradas]] (anteriormente conocido como Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de un comentario y el comienzo de una respuesta en Discusiones estructuradas|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Escritorio y móvil
|Discusiones estructuradas admite wikitexto y modos visuales.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Escritorio (móvil pronto)
|Un formulario en línea para iniciar nuevas discusiones en la página de discusión. Está equipado con los modos &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;.
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Escritorio (móvil pronto)
|Una herramienta para responder a comentarios específicos de la página de discusión. Los comentarios se firman y sangran automáticamente. Está equipado con los modos &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;. 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor en la aplicación [[$android-faq|Android]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de la interfaz de edición en un teléfono Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Móvil
|
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor en la aplicación [[$ios-faq|iOS]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Captura de pantalla de la interfaz de edición en un iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Móvil
|
|-
|Editor [[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Escritorio
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Editor de listas de Wikiviajes]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Escritorio
|Herramienta de edición especializada basada en JavaScript para insertar una de varias plantillas en Wikiviajes
|-
|}

== Anterior ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Antiguo software de edición en wikis de Wikimedia
|-
!Herramienta de edición
!Captura de pantalla
!Año
!Plataforma
!Notas
|-
|El editor &quot;clásico&quot; de JavaScript de 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Captura de pantalla del editor de wikitexto de 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Escritorio
|Esto se vio cuando se habilitó la preferencia &quot;showtoolbar&quot; de 2006 a 2010. Después de eso, solo se mostró a los usuarios que deshabilitaron la preferencia &quot;barra de herramientas mejorada&quot; (editor de 2010). Este editor fue [[phab:T30856|eliminado]] en [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Una barra de herramientas similar está disponible como un dispositivo local apoyado por voluntarios en algunas wikis.
|-
|Editor de wikitexto original de MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Móvil
|Este fue un conjunto de modificaciones específicas para dispositivos móviles al editor de wikitexto de escritorio de 2003. Ya no está desplegado.
|-
|}

== Véase también ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – no forma parte de ningún editor, pero aparece debajo de algunos entornos de edición
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – no forma parte de ningún editor, pero aparece debajo de algunos entornos de edición

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>3e6jw1iog1tt3lyiys61ha64thkxcmu</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402707</id>
      <parentid>5402690</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:05:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6154" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Puede que estés buscando:

== Actual ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Software de edición actual en wikis de Wikimedia
!Herramienta de edición
!Captura de pantalla
!Año
!Plataforma
!Notas
|-
|el editor de MediaWiki predeterminado, que es un HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de HTML textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Escritorio y móvil
|No tiene barra de herramientas. Puede verse cuando JavaScript está desactivado, o cuando &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; está desactivado en [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extensión:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Una captura de pantalla de WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Escritorio
|Esto se puede ver cuando &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; está habilitado en [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor visual]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Captura de pantalla que muestra el modo visual de VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Escritorio y móvil
|Un sistema de edición [[w:Formatted text|texto enriquecido]] [[w:WYSIWYG|WYSIWYG]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Editor de wikitexto 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Captura de pantalla del modo de wikitexto integrado de VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Escritorio
|Un modo dentro de {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} para editar el marcado wiki.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Página de revisión]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Escritorio
|Utilizado en [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Escritorio
|Un editor de wikitexto totalmente apoyado por voluntarios. Esto generalmente se ejecuta como un gadget o script de usuario, pero se ejecuta como una extensión en algunas wikis que no son de Wikimedia.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Captura de pantalla del editor de código|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Escritorio
|Se utiliza para editar JavaScript y otras páginas de códigos.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor de wikitexto actual de {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de la edición de wikitexto en la Web móvil|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Móvil
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Traducción de contenidos]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Captura de pantalla del editor de ContentTranslation|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Escritorio
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Discusiones estructuradas]] (anteriormente conocido como Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de un comentario y el comienzo de una respuesta en Discusiones estructuradas|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Escritorio y móvil
|Discusiones estructuradas admite wikitexto y modos visuales.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Escritorio (móvil pronto)
|Un formulario en línea para iniciar nuevas discusiones en la página de discusión. Está equipado con los modos &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;.
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Escritorio (móvil pronto)
|Una herramienta para responder a comentarios específicos de la página de discusión. Los comentarios se firman y sangran automáticamente. Está equipado con los modos &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;. 
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor en la aplicación [[$android-faq|Android]]&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de la interfaz de edición en un teléfono Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Móvil
|
|-
|Editor en la aplicación [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Captura de pantalla de la interfaz de edición en un iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Móvil
|
|-
|Editor [[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Escritorio
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Editor de listas de Wikiviajes]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Escritorio
|Herramienta de edición especializada basada en JavaScript para insertar una de varias plantillas en Wikiviajes
|-
|}

== Anterior ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Antiguo software de edición en wikis de Wikimedia
|-
!Herramienta de edición
!Captura de pantalla
!Año
!Plataforma
!Notas
|-
|El editor &quot;clásico&quot; de JavaScript de 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Captura de pantalla del editor de wikitexto de 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Escritorio
|Esto se vio cuando se habilitó la preferencia &quot;showtoolbar&quot; de 2006 a 2010. Después de eso, solo se mostró a los usuarios que deshabilitaron la preferencia &quot;barra de herramientas mejorada&quot; (editor de 2010). Este editor fue [[phab:T30856|eliminado]] en [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Una barra de herramientas similar está disponible como un dispositivo local apoyado por voluntarios en algunas wikis.
|-
|Editor de wikitexto original de MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Móvil
|Este fue un conjunto de modificaciones específicas para dispositivos móviles al editor de wikitexto de escritorio de 2003. Ya no está desplegado.
|-
|}

== Véase también ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – no forma parte de ningún editor, pero aparece debajo de algunos entornos de edición
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – no forma parte de ningún editor, pero aparece debajo de algunos entornos de edición

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>6t7nkm7m0ramrn2831nccdumzh1dp6a</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402729</id>
      <parentid>5402707</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:09:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6147" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Disambiguation}}
Puede que estés buscando:

== Actual ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Software de edición actual en wikis de Wikimedia
!Herramienta de edición
!Captura de pantalla
!Año
!Plataforma
!Notas
|-
|el editor de MediaWiki predeterminado, que es un HTML {{tag|textarea|open}}
|[[File:Basic MediaWiki editor without toolbar.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de HTML textarea|center|frameless]]
|2003
|Escritorio y móvil
|No tiene barra de herramientas. Puede verse cuando JavaScript está desactivado, o cuando &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; está desactivado en [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikiEditor|Extensión:WikiEditor]]
|[[File:VectorEditorBasic-en.png|alt=Una captura de pantalla de WikiEditor|center|frameless]]
|2010
|Escritorio
|Esto se puede ver cuando &quot;{{int|Wikieditor-toolbar-preference}}&quot; está habilitado en [[Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-editing|{{int|preferences}}]].
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/VisualEditor|Editor visual]]
|[[File:VisualEditor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Captura de pantalla que muestra el modo visual de VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2012
|Escritorio y móvil
|Un sistema de edición [[w:Formatted text|texto enriquecido]] [[w:WYSIWYG|WYSIWYG]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/2017 wikitext editor|Editor de wikitexto 2017]]
|[[File:2017 wikitext editor toolbar and start of article.png|alt=Captura de pantalla del modo de wikitexto integrado de VisualEditor|center|frameless]]
|2017
|Escritorio
|Un modo dentro de {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor}} para editar el marcado wiki.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Proofread Page|Página de revisión]]
|[[File:Proofread Page editor.png|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Escritorio
|Utilizado en [[S:|Wikisources]]
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:WikEd|wikEd]]
|[[File:WikEd screenshot.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de wikEd|center|frameless]]
|2006
|Escritorio
|Un editor de wikitexto totalmente apoyado por voluntarios. Esto generalmente se ejecuta como un gadget o script de usuario, pero se ejecuta como una extensión en algunas wikis que no son de Wikimedia.
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:CodeEditor|CodeEditor]]
|[[File:CodeEditor extension screenshot.png|alt=Captura de pantalla del editor de código|center|frameless]]
|2011
|Escritorio
|Se utiliza para editar JavaScript y otras páginas de códigos.
|-
|&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Editor de wikitexto actual de {{ll|Extension:MobileFrontend|nsp=0}}&lt;/span&gt;
|[[File:Switching edit modes on Mobile Web 2014-11-04.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de la edición de wikitexto en la Web móvil|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Móvil
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Content translation|Traducción de contenidos]]
|[[File:Content-Translation-Warning.png|alt=Captura de pantalla del editor de ContentTranslation|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Escritorio
|
|-
|[[Special:MyLanguage/Structured_Discussions|Discusiones estructuradas]] (anteriormente conocido como Flow)
|[[File:Flow comment.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de un comentario y el comienzo de una respuesta en Discusiones estructuradas|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Escritorio y móvil
|Discusiones estructuradas admite wikitexto y modos visuales.
|-
|[[Talk pages project/New discussion|New Discussion Tool]]
|[[File:New Discussion Tool v1.0.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Escritorio (móvil pronto)
|Un formulario en línea para iniciar nuevas discusiones en la página de discusión. Está equipado con los modos &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;.
|-
| [[Talk pages project/Replying|Reply Tool]]
|[[File:Screenshot of DiscussionTools toolbar in source.png|center|frameless]]
|2020
|Escritorio (móvil pronto)
|Una herramienta para responder a comentarios específicos de la página de discusión. Los comentarios se firman y sangran automáticamente. Está equipado con los modos &lt;code&gt;Visual&lt;/code&gt; y &lt;code&gt;Source&lt;/code&gt;. 
|-
|Editor en la aplicación [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/Android FAQ|Android]]
|[[File:Device-2017-02-17-141705.png|alt=Captura de pantalla de la interfaz de edición en un teléfono Android|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Móvil
|
|-
|Editor en la aplicación [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia Apps/iOS FAQ|iOS]]
|[[File:Wikipedia iOS Application Editor.PNG|alt=Captura de pantalla de la interfaz de edición en un iPhone|center|frameless|249x249px]]
|2014
|Móvil
|
|-
|Editor [[Extension:TemplateData|TemplateData]]
|[[File:TemplateData GUI editor new.png|center|frameless]]
|2014
|Escritorio
|
|-
|[[voy:en:Project:Listing editor|Editor de listas de Wikiviajes]]
|[[File:Wikivoyage-listing-editor-v2.1-wide.png|center|frameless]]
|2013
|Escritorio
|Herramienta de edición especializada basada en JavaScript para insertar una de varias plantillas en Wikiviajes
|-
|}

== Anterior ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable sortable&quot;
|+Antiguo software de edición en wikis de Wikimedia
|-
!Herramienta de edición
!Captura de pantalla
!Año
!Plataforma
!Notas
|-
|El editor &quot;clásico&quot; de JavaScript de 2006, {{ll|Manual:EditPage.php}}
|[[File:Edit toolbar - 2.png|alt=Captura de pantalla del editor de wikitexto de 2006|center|frameless]]
|2006–2018
|Escritorio
|Esto se vio cuando se habilitó la preferencia &quot;showtoolbar&quot; de 2006 a 2010. Después de eso, solo se mostró a los usuarios que deshabilitaron la preferencia &quot;barra de herramientas mejorada&quot; (editor de 2010). Este editor fue [[phab:T30856|eliminado]] en [[MediaWiki 1.32]]. Una barra de herramientas similar está disponible como un dispositivo local apoyado por voluntarios en algunas wikis.
|-
|Editor de wikitexto original de MobileFrontend
|
|2012–2014
|Móvil
|Este fue un conjunto de modificaciones específicas para dispositivos móviles al editor de wikitexto de escritorio de 2003. Ya no está desplegado.
|-
|}

== Véase también ==
* [[MediaWiki:Edittools]] – no forma parte de ningún editor, pero aparece debajo de algunos entornos de edición
* {{ll|Extension:CharInsert}} – no forma parte de ningún editor, pero aparece debajo de algunos entornos de edición

[[Category:Edit extensions{{#translation:}}| ]]
[[Category:Edit{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>96vsbj9cx4fgn5e05o8ri35q379kg3v</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/63/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1457981</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402728</id>
      <parentid>4923907</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:09:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="39" xml:space="preserve">Editor en la aplicación [[$1|Android]]</text>
      <sha1>jx2p006yg5gsb3ya7duw8h8gbz0jxv1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/67/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1457984</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402706</id>
      <parentid>4923913</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:05:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="35" xml:space="preserve">Editor en la aplicación [[$1|iOS]]</text>
      <sha1>n3ru1laygs0z1uhn1vdl3vs2koa066f</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/mnw-simplified-anonta/ja</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1463348</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402050</id>
      <parentid>5190767</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:36:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4018" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

ソフトウェアをインストールしなくてもウィキペディアでモン語をタイプできます。

有効にするには、以下を実行します:

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;リストの一番上に「ဘာသာမန်」が表示されている場合は、「モン簡略化されたアノンタMon Simplified Anonta」を選択してください。&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;「ဘာသာမန်」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします:&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;一覧のいちばん後ろの「...」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;パネルで「ဘာသာမန်」を見つけます、 ラテン文字で「モン」を検索すると簡単にできます、 クリックして。&lt;/span&gt;
## 小さなキーボードアイコンをもう一度クリックして、「モン簡略化されたアノンタ」を選択します。

この特別なキーボードを無効にして通常の入力に戻るには、小さなキーボードアイコンをクリックしてから、[ネイティブキーボードを使用する]をクリックするか、「Ctrl-M」を押します。キーボードを再度有効にするには「Ctrl-M」を押すか、上記の手順を繰り返します。

モン文字を入力するには、次の表を使用してください:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! この文字を入力するには...
! キーボードのこれらのキーを入力します:
! コメント:
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの数字
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの数値
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| 上記の E
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの 「qwerty」行
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した「QWERTY」行
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| モン内側 「MA」
|-
|T
|ဳ
| モン 「II」
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| モン内側 「LA」
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの「asdf」行
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. タイプこの手紙の'''後'''
|-
|s
|ျ
| 内側 YA
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| アサット
|-
|g
|ါ
| 背の高い AA
|-
|h
|ဴ
| モン 「O」
|-
|j
|ြ
| 内側 RA
|-
|k
|ု
| U
|-
|l
|ူ
| UU
|-
|;
|း
| ヴィサルガ
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した ASDF 行
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| 内側 HA
|-
|D
|ီ
| II
|-
|F
|္
| ヴィラーマ
|-
|G
|ွ
| 内側 WA
|-
|H
|ံ
| アヌスヴァーラ
|-
|J
|ဲ
| AI
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの zcxv 行
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| AA
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの ZXCV
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| モン内側 「NA」
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

このキーボードレイアウトは、「Keymanキーマン」によって公開されている[https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta モンアノンタレイアウトに基づいています]。ただし、元の「Anontaアノンタ」レイアウトでは、ေ 記号（「a」キーのE）は文字の前に入力され、このレイアウトでは文字の後に入力されます。</text>
      <sha1>skapp30htk6ab2nv29ulu3s411vbzgo</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402059</id>
      <parentid>5402050</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:36:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3979" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

ソフトウェアをインストールしなくてもウィキペディアでモン語をタイプできます。

有効にするには、以下を実行します:

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# リストの一番上に「ဘာသာ မန်」が表示されている場合は、「モン簡略化されたアノンタMon Simplified Anonta」を選択してください。
# &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;「ဘာသာမန်」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします:&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;一覧のいちばん後ろの「...」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;パネルで「ဘာသာမန်」を見つけます、 ラテン文字で「モン」を検索すると簡単にできます、 クリックして。&lt;/span&gt;
## 小さなキーボードアイコンをもう一度クリックして、「モン簡略化されたアノンタ」を選択します。

この特別なキーボードを無効にして通常の入力に戻るには、小さなキーボードアイコンをクリックしてから、[ネイティブキーボードを使用する]をクリックするか、「Ctrl-M」を押します。キーボードを再度有効にするには「Ctrl-M」を押すか、上記の手順を繰り返します。

モン文字を入力するには、次の表を使用してください:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! この文字を入力するには...
! キーボードのこれらのキーを入力します:
! コメント:
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの数字
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの数値
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| 上記の E
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの 「qwerty」行
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した「QWERTY」行
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| モン内側 「MA」
|-
|T
|ဳ
| モン 「II」
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| モン内側 「LA」
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの「asdf」行
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. タイプこの手紙の'''後'''
|-
|s
|ျ
| 内側 YA
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| アサット
|-
|g
|ါ
| 背の高い AA
|-
|h
|ဴ
| モン 「O」
|-
|j
|ြ
| 内側 RA
|-
|k
|ု
| U
|-
|l
|ူ
| UU
|-
|;
|း
| ヴィサルガ
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した ASDF 行
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| 内側 HA
|-
|D
|ီ
| II
|-
|F
|္
| ヴィラーマ
|-
|G
|ွ
| 内側 WA
|-
|H
|ံ
| アヌスヴァーラ
|-
|J
|ဲ
| AI
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの zcxv 行
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| AA
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの ZXCV
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| モン内側 「NA」
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

このキーボードレイアウトは、「Keymanキーマン」によって公開されている[https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta モンアノンタレイアウトに基づいています]。ただし、元の「Anontaアノンタ」レイアウトでは、ေ 記号（「a」キーのE）は文字の前に入力され、このレイアウトでは文字の後に入力されます。</text>
      <sha1>bx103f67ncaeisi48mnxfu6zs8zaqej</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402061</id>
      <parentid>5402059</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:37:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3940" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

ソフトウェアをインストールしなくてもウィキペディアでモン語をタイプできます。

有効にするには、以下を実行します:

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# リストの一番上に「ဘာသာ မန်」が表示されている場合は、「モン簡略化されたアノンタMon Simplified Anonta」を選択してください。
# 「ဘာသာ မန်」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします:
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;一覧のいちばん後ろの「...」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;パネルで「ဘာသာမန်」を見つけます、 ラテン文字で「モン」を検索すると簡単にできます、 クリックして。&lt;/span&gt;
## 小さなキーボードアイコンをもう一度クリックして、「モン簡略化されたアノンタ」を選択します。

この特別なキーボードを無効にして通常の入力に戻るには、小さなキーボードアイコンをクリックしてから、[ネイティブキーボードを使用する]をクリックするか、「Ctrl-M」を押します。キーボードを再度有効にするには「Ctrl-M」を押すか、上記の手順を繰り返します。

モン文字を入力するには、次の表を使用してください:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! この文字を入力するには...
! キーボードのこれらのキーを入力します:
! コメント:
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの数字
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの数値
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| 上記の E
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの 「qwerty」行
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した「QWERTY」行
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| モン内側 「MA」
|-
|T
|ဳ
| モン 「II」
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| モン内側 「LA」
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの「asdf」行
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. タイプこの手紙の'''後'''
|-
|s
|ျ
| 内側 YA
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| アサット
|-
|g
|ါ
| 背の高い AA
|-
|h
|ဴ
| モン 「O」
|-
|j
|ြ
| 内側 RA
|-
|k
|ု
| U
|-
|l
|ူ
| UU
|-
|;
|း
| ヴィサルガ
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した ASDF 行
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| 内側 HA
|-
|D
|ီ
| II
|-
|F
|္
| ヴィラーマ
|-
|G
|ွ
| 内側 WA
|-
|H
|ံ
| アヌスヴァーラ
|-
|J
|ဲ
| AI
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの zcxv 行
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| AA
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの ZXCV
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| モン内側 「NA」
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

このキーボードレイアウトは、「Keymanキーマン」によって公開されている[https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta モンアノンタレイアウトに基づいています]。ただし、元の「Anontaアノンタ」レイアウトでは、ေ 記号（「a」キーのE）は文字の前に入力され、このレイアウトでは文字の後に入力されます。</text>
      <sha1>8ysxihxxutpiwbte39y8jatx5vh7hvm</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402063</id>
      <parentid>5402061</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:37:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3900" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

ソフトウェアをインストールしなくてもウィキペディアでモン語をタイプできます。

有効にするには、以下を実行します:

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# リストの一番上に「ဘာသာ မန်」が表示されている場合は、「モン簡略化されたアノンタMon Simplified Anonta」を選択してください。
# 「ဘာသာ မန်」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします:
## 一覧のいちばん後ろの「...」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;パネルで「ဘာသာမန်」を見つけます、 ラテン文字で「モン」を検索すると簡単にできます、 クリックして。&lt;/span&gt;
## 小さなキーボードアイコンをもう一度クリックして、「モン簡略化されたアノンタ」を選択します。

この特別なキーボードを無効にして通常の入力に戻るには、小さなキーボードアイコンをクリックしてから、[ネイティブキーボードを使用する]をクリックするか、「Ctrl-M」を押します。キーボードを再度有効にするには「Ctrl-M」を押すか、上記の手順を繰り返します。

モン文字を入力するには、次の表を使用してください:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! この文字を入力するには...
! キーボードのこれらのキーを入力します:
! コメント:
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの数字
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの数値
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| 上記の E
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの 「qwerty」行
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した「QWERTY」行
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| モン内側 「MA」
|-
|T
|ဳ
| モン 「II」
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| モン内側 「LA」
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの「asdf」行
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. タイプこの手紙の'''後'''
|-
|s
|ျ
| 内側 YA
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| アサット
|-
|g
|ါ
| 背の高い AA
|-
|h
|ဴ
| モン 「O」
|-
|j
|ြ
| 内側 RA
|-
|k
|ု
| U
|-
|l
|ူ
| UU
|-
|;
|း
| ヴィサルガ
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した ASDF 行
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| 内側 HA
|-
|D
|ီ
| II
|-
|F
|္
| ヴィラーマ
|-
|G
|ွ
| 内側 WA
|-
|H
|ံ
| アヌスヴァーラ
|-
|J
|ဲ
| AI
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの zcxv 行
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| AA
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの ZXCV
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| モン内側 「NA」
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

このキーボードレイアウトは、「Keymanキーマン」によって公開されている[https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta モンアノンタレイアウトに基づいています]。ただし、元の「Anontaアノンタ」レイアウトでは、ေ 記号（「a」キーのE）は文字の前に入力され、このレイアウトでは文字の後に入力されます。</text>
      <sha1>paymhtprv9eif64s6xtkmyofy5zddfu</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402064</id>
      <parentid>5402063</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:37:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Low quality/machine translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3876" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

ソフトウェアをインストールしなくてもウィキペディアでモン語をタイプできます。

有効にするには、以下を実行します:

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# リストの一番上に「ဘာသာ မန်」が表示されている場合は、「モン簡略化されたアノンタMon Simplified Anonta」を選択してください。
# 「ဘာသာ မန်」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします:
## 一覧のいちばん後ろの「...」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; in the panel. You can easily do it by searching for &quot;mon&quot; in Latin letters. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## 小さなキーボードアイコンをもう一度クリックして、「モン簡略化されたアノンタ」を選択します。

この特別なキーボードを無効にして通常の入力に戻るには、小さなキーボードアイコンをクリックしてから、[ネイティブキーボードを使用する]をクリックするか、「Ctrl-M」を押します。キーボードを再度有効にするには「Ctrl-M」を押すか、上記の手順を繰り返します。

モン文字を入力するには、次の表を使用してください:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! この文字を入力するには...
! キーボードのこれらのキーを入力します:
! コメント:
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの数字
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの数値
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| 上記の E
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの 「qwerty」行
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した「QWERTY」行
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| モン内側 「MA」
|-
|T
|ဳ
| モン 「II」
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| モン内側 「LA」
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの「asdf」行
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. タイプこの手紙の'''後'''
|-
|s
|ျ
| 内側 YA
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| アサット
|-
|g
|ါ
| 背の高い AA
|-
|h
|ဴ
| モン 「O」
|-
|j
|ြ
| 内側 RA
|-
|k
|ု
| U
|-
|l
|ူ
| UU
|-
|;
|း
| ヴィサルガ
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した ASDF 行
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| 内側 HA
|-
|D
|ီ
| II
|-
|F
|္
| ヴィラーマ
|-
|G
|ွ
| 内側 WA
|-
|H
|ံ
| アヌスヴァーラ
|-
|J
|ဲ
| AI
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの zcxv 行
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| AA
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの ZXCV
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| モン内側 「NA」
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

このキーボードレイアウトは、「Keymanキーマン」によって公開されている[https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta モンアノンタレイアウトに基づいています]。ただし、元の「Anontaアノンタ」レイアウトでは、ေ 記号（「a」キーのE）は文字の前に入力され、このレイアウトでは文字の後に入力されます。</text>
      <sha1>sum54fti6wcbqqad7th4g7g2dt7wfue</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402065</id>
      <parentid>5402064</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:38:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Low quality/machine translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3924" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

ソフトウェアをインストールしなくてもウィキペディアでモン語をタイプできます。

有効にするには、以下を実行します:

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# リストの一番上に「ဘာသာ မန်」が表示されている場合は、「モン簡略化されたアノンタMon Simplified Anonta」を選択してください。
# 「ဘာသာ မန်」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします:
## 一覧のいちばん後ろの「...」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; in the panel. You can easily do it by searching for &quot;mon&quot; in Latin letters. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## 小さなキーボードアイコンをもう一度クリックして、「モン簡略化されたアノンタ」を選択します。

この特別なキーボードを無効にして通常の入力に戻るには、小さなキーボードアイコンをクリックしてから、[ネイティブキーボードを使用する]をクリックするか、「Ctrl-M」を押します。キーボードを再度有効にするには「Ctrl-M」を押すか、上記の手順を繰り返します。

モン文字を入力するには、次の表を使用してください:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! この文字を入力するには...
! キーボードのこれらのキーを入力します:
! コメント:
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの数字
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの数値
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| 上記の E
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの 「qwerty」行
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した「QWERTY」行
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| モン内側 「MA」
|-
|T
|ဳ
| モン 「II」
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| モン内側 「LA」
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの「asdf」行
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. タイプこの手紙の'''後'''
|-
|s
|ျ
| 内側 YA
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| アサット
|-
|g
|ါ
| 背の高い AA
|-
|h
|ဴ
| モン 「O」
|-
|j
|ြ
| 内側 RA
|-
|k
|ု
| U
|-
|l
|ူ
| UU
|-
|;
|း
| ヴィサルガ
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した ASDF 行
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| 内側 HA
|-
|D
|ီ
| II
|-
|F
|္
| ヴィラーマ
|-
|G
|ွ
| 内側 WA
|-
|H
|ံ
| アヌスヴァーラ
|-
|J
|ဲ
| AI
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの zcxv 行
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| AA
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの ZXCV
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mon medial NA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

このキーボードレイアウトは、「Keymanキーマン」によって公開されている[https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta モンアノンタレイアウトに基づいています]。ただし、元の「Anontaアノンタ」レイアウトでは、ေ 記号（「a」キーのE）は文字の前に入力され、このレイアウトでは文字の後に入力されます。</text>
      <sha1>3ov87cmiatj6h7snfgau64ag2uv66tj</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402066</id>
      <parentid>5402065</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:39:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Low quality/machine translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3979" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

ソフトウェアをインストールしなくてもウィキペディアでモン語をタイプできます。

有効にするには、以下を実行します:

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# リストの一番上に「ဘာသာ မန်」が表示されている場合は、「モン簡略化されたアノンタMon Simplified Anonta」を選択してください。
# 「ဘာသာ မန်」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします:
## 一覧のいちばん後ろの「...」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; in the panel. You can easily do it by searching for &quot;mon&quot; in Latin letters. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## 小さなキーボードアイコンをもう一度クリックして、「モン簡略化されたアノンタ」を選択します。

この特別なキーボードを無効にして通常の入力に戻るには、小さなキーボードアイコンをクリックしてから、[ネイティブキーボードを使用する]をクリックするか、「Ctrl-M」を押します。キーボードを再度有効にするには「Ctrl-M」を押すか、上記の手順を繰り返します。

モン文字を入力するには、次の表を使用してください:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! この文字を入力するには...
! キーボードのこれらのキーを入力します:
! コメント:
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの数字
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの数値
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| 上記の E
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの 「qwerty」行
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した「QWERTY」行
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| モン内側 「MA」
|-
|T
|ဳ
| モン 「II」
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| モン内側 「LA」
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの「asdf」行
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type this '''after''' the letter&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|s
|ျ
| 内側 YA
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| アサット
|-
|g
|ါ
| 背の高い AA
|-
|h
|ဴ
| モン 「O」
|-
|j
|ြ
| 内側 RA
|-
|k
|ု
| U
|-
|l
|ူ
| UU
|-
|;
|း
| ヴィサルガ
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した ASDF 行
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| 内側 HA
|-
|D
|ီ
| II
|-
|F
|္
| ヴィラーマ
|-
|G
|ွ
| 内側 WA
|-
|H
|ံ
| アヌスヴァーラ
|-
|J
|ဲ
| AI
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの zcxv 行
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| AA
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの ZXCV
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mon medial NA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

このキーボードレイアウトは、「Keymanキーマン」によって公開されている[https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta モンアノンタレイアウトに基づいています]。ただし、元の「Anontaアノンタ」レイアウトでは、ေ 記号（「a」キーのE）は文字の前に入力され、このレイアウトでは文字の後に入力されます。</text>
      <sha1>3xe1v9ok2fc4aezpz0afhx3czw2uwhf</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402067</id>
      <parentid>5402066</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:42:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Low quality/machine translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4032" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

ソフトウェアをインストールしなくてもウィキペディアでモン語をタイプできます。

有効にするには、以下を実行します:

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# リストの一番上に「ဘာသာ မန်」が表示されている場合は、「モン簡略化されたアノンタMon Simplified Anonta」を選択してください。
# 「ဘာသာ မန်」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします:
## 一覧のいちばん後ろの「...」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; in the panel. You can easily do it by searching for &quot;mon&quot; in Latin letters. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## 小さなキーボードアイコンをもう一度クリックして、「モン簡略化されたアノンタ」を選択します。

この特別なキーボードを無効にして通常の入力に戻るには、小さなキーボードアイコンをクリックしてから、[ネイティブキーボードを使用する]をクリックするか、「Ctrl-M」を押します。キーボードを再度有効にするには「Ctrl-M」を押すか、上記の手順を繰り返します。

モン文字を入力するには、次の表を使用してください:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! この文字を入力するには...
! キーボードのこれらのキーを入力します:
! コメント:
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの数字
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Numbers with Shift&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| 上記の E
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの 「qwerty」行
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した「QWERTY」行
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| モン内側 「MA」
|-
|T
|ဳ
| モン 「II」
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| モン内側 「LA」
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの「asdf」行
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type this '''after''' the letter&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|s
|ျ
| 内側 YA
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| アサット
|-
|g
|ါ
| 背の高い AA
|-
|h
|ဴ
| モン 「O」
|-
|j
|ြ
| 内側 RA
|-
|k
|ု
| U
|-
|l
|ူ
| UU
|-
|;
|း
| ヴィサルガ
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した ASDF 行
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| 内側 HA
|-
|D
|ီ
| II
|-
|F
|္
| ヴィラーマ
|-
|G
|ွ
| 内側 WA
|-
|H
|ံ
| アヌスヴァーラ
|-
|J
|ဲ
| AI
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの zcxv 行
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| AA
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの ZXCV
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mon medial NA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

このキーボードレイアウトは、「Keymanキーマン」によって公開されている[https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta モンアノンタレイアウトに基づいています]。ただし、元の「Anontaアノンタ」レイアウトでは、ေ 記号（「a」キーのE）は文字の前に入力され、このレイアウトでは文字の後に入力されます。</text>
      <sha1>7uwjiv9drt4uolxld1lrjkgyoihd06f</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402068</id>
      <parentid>5402067</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:42:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Low quality/machine translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4084" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

ソフトウェアをインストールしなくてもウィキペディアでモン語をタイプできます。

有効にするには、以下を実行します:

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# リストの一番上に「ဘာသာ မန်」が表示されている場合は、「モン簡略化されたアノンタMon Simplified Anonta」を選択してください。
# 「ဘာသာ မန်」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします:
## 一覧のいちばん後ろの「...」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; in the panel. You can easily do it by searching for &quot;mon&quot; in Latin letters. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## 小さなキーボードアイコンをもう一度クリックして、「モン簡略化されたアノンタ」を選択します。

この特別なキーボードを無効にして通常の入力に戻るには、小さなキーボードアイコンをクリックしてから、[ネイティブキーボードを使用する]をクリックするか、「Ctrl-M」を押します。キーボードを再度有効にするには「Ctrl-M」を押すか、上記の手順を繰り返します。

モン文字を入力するには、次の表を使用してください:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! この文字を入力するには...
! キーボードのこれらのキーを入力します:
! コメント:
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの数字
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Numbers with Shift&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E above&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの 「qwerty」行
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した「QWERTY」行
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| モン内側 「MA」
|-
|T
|ဳ
| モン 「II」
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| モン内側 「LA」
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの「asdf」行
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type this '''after''' the letter&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|s
|ျ
| 内側 YA
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| アサット
|-
|g
|ါ
| 背の高い AA
|-
|h
|ဴ
| モン 「O」
|-
|j
|ြ
| 内側 RA
|-
|k
|ု
| U
|-
|l
|ူ
| UU
|-
|;
|း
| ヴィサルガ
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した ASDF 行
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| 内側 HA
|-
|D
|ီ
| II
|-
|F
|္
| ヴィラーマ
|-
|G
|ွ
| 内側 WA
|-
|H
|ံ
| アヌスヴァーラ
|-
|J
|ဲ
| AI
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの zcxv 行
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| AA
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの ZXCV
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mon medial NA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

このキーボードレイアウトは、「Keymanキーマン」によって公開されている[https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta モンアノンタレイアウトに基づいています]。ただし、元の「Anontaアノンタ」レイアウトでは、ေ 記号（「a」キーのE）は文字の前に入力され、このレイアウトでは文字の後に入力されます。</text>
      <sha1>fbfuglumbitchqzrrcg6zw2fn1jucqg</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402069</id>
      <parentid>5402068</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:42:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Low quality/machine translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4132" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

ソフトウェアをインストールしなくてもウィキペディアでモン語をタイプできます。

有効にするには、以下を実行します:

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# リストの一番上に「ဘာသာ မန်」が表示されている場合は、「モン簡略化されたアノンタMon Simplified Anonta」を選択してください。
# 「ဘာသာ မန်」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします:
## 一覧のいちばん後ろの「...」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; in the panel. You can easily do it by searching for &quot;mon&quot; in Latin letters. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## 小さなキーボードアイコンをもう一度クリックして、「モン簡略化されたアノンタ」を選択します。

この特別なキーボードを無効にして通常の入力に戻るには、小さなキーボードアイコンをクリックしてから、[ネイティブキーボードを使用する]をクリックするか、「Ctrl-M」を押します。キーボードを再度有効にするには「Ctrl-M」を押すか、上記の手順を繰り返します。

モン文字を入力するには、次の表を使用してください:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! この文字を入力するには...
! キーボードのこれらのキーを入力します:
! コメント:
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの数字
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Numbers with Shift&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E above&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの 「qwerty」行
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した「QWERTY」行
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| モン内側 「MA」
|-
|T
|ဳ
| モン 「II」
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| モン内側 「LA」
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの「asdf」行
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type this '''after''' the letter&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|s
|ျ
| 内側 YA
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ASAT&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|g
|ါ
| 背の高い AA
|-
|h
|ဴ
| モン 「O」
|-
|j
|ြ
| 内側 RA
|-
|k
|ု
| U
|-
|l
|ူ
| UU
|-
|;
|း
| ヴィサルガ
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift を使用した ASDF 行
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| 内側 HA
|-
|D
|ီ
| II
|-
|F
|္
| ヴィラーマ
|-
|G
|ွ
| 内側 WA
|-
|H
|ံ
| アヌスヴァーラ
|-
|J
|ဲ
| AI
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift なしの zcxv 行
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| AA
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Shift 付きの ZXCV
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mon medial NA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

このキーボードレイアウトは、「Keymanキーマン」によって公開されている[https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta モンアノンタレイアウトに基づいています]。ただし、元の「Anontaアノンタ」レイアウトでは、ေ 記号（「a」キーのE）は文字の前に入力され、このレイアウトでは文字の後に入力されます。</text>
      <sha1>reqm1h3jn9k8ote6ubin4s9o50z2x3b</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/mnw-simplified-anonta/7/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1463351</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402062</id>
      <parentid>4940828</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:37:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="95" xml:space="preserve">一覧のいちばん後ろの「$1」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。</text>
      <sha1>0v65t6o0hvqtl04gcxa6knc69kkob22</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/mnw-simplified-anonta/5/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1466364</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402058</id>
      <parentid>4950476</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:36:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="161" xml:space="preserve">リストの一番上に「$1」が表示されている場合は、「モン簡略化されたアノンタMon Simplified Anonta」を選択してください。</text>
      <sha1>imba9pdidbpmtunf67jgun3sdb6qaue</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/mnw-simplified-anonta/6/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1466365</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402060</id>
      <parentid>4950401</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:37:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="90" xml:space="preserve">「$1」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします:</text>
      <sha1>mhbp0ugrjibrk51nuyfqpewkl8893l2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:System message/539/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1468630</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402524</id>
      <parentid>4956761</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:23:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36" xml:space="preserve">for core, in $1 add the message keys</text>
      <sha1>ejx3gidcfj8peyo6nmrhpc32zh5osan</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:System message/542/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1468633</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402525</id>
      <parentid>4957187</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:23:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="64" xml:space="preserve">for extensions, in $1 add a line under the extension's name like</text>
      <sha1>frrym6xv3cfqs8acq2i7c2zhv565r5o</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/nan</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1469131</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402620</id>
      <parentid>4957879</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3943" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions (formerly known as Flow) are [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|a project]] of the Collaboration team at the Wikimedia Foundation to build a modern discussion and collaboration system for Wikimedia projects.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Khuài-sok iû-lám ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|Kiat-kòo-huà thó-lūn ê guā-kuan - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Tshì-khuànn-māi!]]]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There is some specific terms concerning Structured Discussions. They have been defined in '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|the Glossary]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Ko-kip ê kang-kū ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some advanced tools are available, for specific purposes. They have been regrouped on these subjects:
&lt;/div&gt;

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Kik-uah}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What happens when Structured Discussions are enabled on a page?&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Tsú-tê}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filter topics, Edit a topic/message, Summarize a topic, Resolve a topic&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Íng-kiú liân-kiat}}
:Lû-hô tshòng-kiàn tsí-hiòng tsú-tê ê liân-kiat
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Thong-ti hām kàm-sī tshing-tuann}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Li̍k-sú}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How the history system works&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Hîng-tsìng}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide, Delete, Suppress topics&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Ū-ka-tsài}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading contents on a new Structured Discussions conversation&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Khuài-tsia̍t hong-sik}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Keyboard shortcuts to use on visual editing mode.&lt;/span&gt;

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=Tsi̍t-ia̍h tíng-kuân sóo-ū ê bûn-tông}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>2hbfqftop0216qfemcqgiyo0nbgpet0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:System message/539/tr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1476666</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402550</id>
      <parentid>4981710</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:27:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="56" xml:space="preserve">çekirdek için, $1 içine mesaj anahtarlarını ekleyin</text>
      <sha1>08wk9xmgczqa7ppe917g01w7anj2a9r</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:System message/542/tr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1476669</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402536</id>
      <parentid>4981716</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:25:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="94" xml:space="preserve">uzantılar için, $1 içinde uzantının adının altına aşağıdaki gibi bir satır ekleyin</text>
      <sha1>b7drf5c99ibuo4dehtawq2cyy5ehq2j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Lakeus/fi</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1476880</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401682</id>
      <parentid>5293583</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:34:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24265" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin|templatemode=
|name          = Lakeus
|status        = stable
|username      = Lakejason0
|author        = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Lakejason0
* Light beacon
* Dianliang233
* Winston Sung
* ...
|image         = SkinLakeus.png
|imagesize     = 320
|version       = 1.1.12
|update        = 2022-08-07
|mediawiki     = 1.36+
|php           = 
|compatibility policy = rel
|license       = GPL-3.0-or-later
|download      = {{GithubDownload|lakejason0|mediawiki-skins-Lakeus|translatewiki=1}}
|translate     = mwgithub-lakeus
|example       = [https://skins.toolforge.org/index.php?useskin=lakeus Example on MediaWiki Skins Wiki]
|compatibility = 
|parameters    = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder&lt;/code&gt;
}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Lakeus''' is a skin that aims to provide a simple but all-functional experience.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's named after a character in the novel of one of the authors, Lakejason0.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Installation ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{SkinInstall
|download-link=[https://github.com/lakejason0/mediawiki-skins-Lakeus/releases/latest &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Download&lt;/span&gt;]
|registration=Yes
}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Features ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Simple but all-functional (at least most of them should work).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Works when JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Customization through CSS variables.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Responsive design.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Should work with desktop and tablet; on very narrow phones the sidebar menu might be too wide to close.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A Theme designer.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By enabling it in your preferences you can change and preview the theme in real time.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For the most of time, only a few tweaks on basic variables are needed and it will produce an automagically calculated theme for you.&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It might be a bit buggy and unstable, so be sure to report any of the problems to me!&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can always disable automatic calculation if you are not satisfied.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Planned Features ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[phab:T244392|WVUI search bar]], the same as in the new {{ll|Skin:Vector|nsp=0}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The skin should be usable even when JavaScript isn't present.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Several handy features may not be available though.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The skin made a dedicated menu for site that uses a language with LanguageConverter variants (e.g. Chinese (&lt;code&gt;zh&lt;/code&gt;) and Serbian).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When no variants available, the menu should be invisible.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;RTL support hasn't been tested well, but main features are confirmed RTL compatible (e.g. sidebar menus).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Customization ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== CSS variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your CSS may not work in several special pages (like [[Special:Preferences|{{int|preferences}}]]); it's an intended behavior of MediaWiki core due to security concerns, but site admins could set {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages|$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}} to {{phpi|true}} to bypass it after understanding the risks.&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lakeus supports customization through CSS variables.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Below are several methods to generate a theme, and to apply the result (should be CSS code) you'll need to copy it to &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, which can be found on &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; for all wiki users, and &lt;code&gt;Special:MyPage/Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; for yourself.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Theme Designer ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using the theme designer would be easier for anyone (at least I hope so).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll only need to change the basic variables and the rest will be automatically calculated.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable the auto calculation for each variable that you don't really like the auto calculated result of it, and manually tweak it as you like.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To enable it, go to the preferences, select &quot;Appearance&quot;, and you can find the option when the skin Lakeus is selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once enabled, it would load on every page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Basically all the buttons and form inputs do what it literally means; just try them out if you are a bit confused.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There ''are'' some variables that do not appear on every page, and they would be listed below:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interface message box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These elements appears in situations like that a user group setting is successfully applied when JavaScript disabled, translation page edit notice warning, MediaWiki exceptions that appears on page editing, user talk page notices with no Echo and other notification extensions installed, and so on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Preset themes ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There will be some preset theme that is already here for you to use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can share your own theme on the talk page as well.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Come back later if there isn't any.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===== Vintage =====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A vintage theme, last exported on 1.1.7.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #8e860a;
    --color-secondary: #eeebe7;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: rgba(238,235,231,0);
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #eeebe7;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #8c8985;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #8e860a;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-bar: #8c8985;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #8e860a;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0,0,0,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #000000;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #9b9b9b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-content: #24220a;
    --background-color-body: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #bcb9b5;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #8e860a;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #e4e1dd;
    --border-color-toc: #b2afab;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #e9e6e2;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #9e9c98;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #dfdcd8;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(44,44,44,0.1);
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #dad7d3;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===== Ocean =====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A theme with light blue color scheme, last exported on 1.1.8.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #3366cc;
    --color-secondary: #f4fcff;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: #e2f4fe;
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #f4fcff;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #91989b;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #3366cc;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-bar: #91989b;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #f4fcff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #3366cc;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(35,93,194,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #91989b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #0955b8;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-content: #000000;
    --background-color-body: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #c1c9cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #3366cc;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #eaf2f5;
    --border-color-toc: #b7bfc2;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #eff7fa;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #a4abae;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #e5ecef;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --text-color-portlet-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(112,147,255,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #e2f4fe;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Manually change the variables ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Below is the default setting of CSS variables; modify these settings and put the result into your &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --background-color-base: white;
  --background-color-body: white;
  --background-color-content: white;
  --background-color-footer: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list: white;
  --background-color-portlet-body: white;
  --background-color-toggle-list-card: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-edit-options: #eee;
  --background-color-search-suggestions: #fff;
  --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #1d5492;
  --background-color-search-input: #fff;
  --background-color-toc: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #eaecf0;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fee7e6;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fef6e7;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d5fdf4;
  --background-color-user-message: #ffce7b;
  --background-color-wikitable: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #eaecf0;
  --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-content: #ccc;
  --border-color-toggle-list: #ddd;
  --border-color-search-suggestions: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-search-bar: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-portlet-body: var(--color-gray);
  --border-color-header-tab: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-toc: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #d33;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fc3;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
  --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
  --border-color-wikitable: #a2a9b1;
  --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
  --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #000000;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item: #1c1c1c;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-content: #000000;
  --text-color-header: #000000;
  --text-color-body: #000000;
  --text-color-footer: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
  --text-color-user-message: #000000;
  --text-color-wikitable: #202122;
  --icon-filter-header: unset;
  --color-search-suggestions-text: #000;
  --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #fff;
  --color-tagline: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #54595d;
  --color-accent-header-tab-new: #54595d;
  --color-header: white;
  --color-base: #54595d;
  --color-gray: #a2a9b1;
  --color-gray-2: #eaecf0;
  --color-link: #0645ad;
  --color-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-new: #d33;
  --color-link-new--visited: #a55858;
  --color-link-new--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-external: #36b;
  --color-link-external--visited: #636;
  --color-link-external--active: #b63;
  --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
  --color-footer-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-footer-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-toc-number: #202122;
  --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
  --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
  --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
  --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
  --header-elevation: var(--elevation);
  --mask-background: rgba( 0, 0, 0, 0.8 );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to change the header's color to a light blue (e.g. &lt;code&gt;#4FC3F7&lt;/code&gt;), it would be:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --color-header: #4FC3F7;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Parameters ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Description&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean&lt;/span&gt;
| {{phpi|true}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Determines whether to show the link to the skin's repository in the footer.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLogos}}
|
|
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For now, only &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wordmark&lt;/code&gt; are recognized; keys like &lt;code&gt;svg&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1x&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1.5x&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;2x&lt;/code&gt; are not used by the skin.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notice that other skins may utilize the image provided by &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; '''AND''' other keys as well, so do not rely on the key to provide a icon only for this skin.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean&lt;/span&gt;
| {{phpi|false}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Determines whether to add a skin provided border to site notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enabling it can be useful for plain text notices, but if you've already got a border in your site notice content, you can leave it disabled.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

=== Sivupalkin kuvakkeet ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately, it's not easy to add icons to the skin without including many images on page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you can bear the loading time of web font icons, you can try this out as follows.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start with, include the icon font face (in this whole example, Material Icons) in your CSS (&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may have loaded some font faces in other places other than &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, in which case just ensure that they don't conflict with each other.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* MD Icons */
/* fallback */
@font-face {
  font-family: 'Material Icons';
  font-style: normal;
  font-weight: 400;
  src: url(https://fonts.gstatic.com/s/materialicons/v70/flUhRq6tzZclQEJ-Vdg-IuiaDsNc.woff2) format('woff2');
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Then, as we are going to use pseudo elements, some paddings and extra settings to create space for icons are applied:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
.toggle-list__list a {
    padding-left: calc(8px + 25px);
}

.toggle-list__list a::before {
    content: '';
    width: 0;
    height: 0;
    display: inline-block;
    font-family: 'Material Icons';
    font-size: 18px;
    transform: translateX(-25px) translateY(3px);
    /* Display Optimizing */
    -webkit-font-smoothing: antialiased;
    text-rendering: optimizeLegibility;
    -moz-osx-font-smoothing: grayscale;
    font-feature-settings: 'liga';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Nyt on aika lisätä varsinaiset kuvakkeet.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use Devtools (The tool opened by right click and then Inspect Element) to see the list items' IDs, and we are finally going to set the actual content of the pseudo elements (icons):&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Navigation */
#n-mainpage-description a::before {
    content: 'home';
}

#n-recentchanges a::before {
    content: 'auto_awesome';
}

#n-randompage a::before {
    content: 'shuffle';
}

#n-portal a::before {
    content: 'forum';
}

#n-help-mediawiki a::before {
    content: 'help_center';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, Material Icons supports certain strings (used here) and code points for an certain icon.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For what strings or code points could be used for Material Icons, see [https://fonts.google.com/icons Icons - Google Fonts].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Feel free to add more rules for your own site, for example one of the authors' site got an admin noticeboard:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot; highlight=1&gt;
#n-adminnoticeboard a::before {
    content: 'groups';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;#n-...&lt;/code&gt; part corresponds with the system message you used in your [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Mobile skins{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>rfne89o4dt5tf6rneiva1e25e46zzjb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/eo</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1478656</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402610</id>
      <parentid>4986900</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3485" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
Strukturema Diskutejo (antaŭe nomita “Flow”) estas [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|projekto]] de la kunlaborskipo ĉe la Vikimedia Fondaĵo kiu celas modernan sistemon de diskuto kaj kunlaboro  pri Vikimediaj projektoj.

== Enkonduka travizito ==
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|Kiel Structurema Discutejo aspektas - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Provu ĝin!]]]]
&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Eltrovi kial Strukturema Diskutejo estas konstruita, kaj kiel oni uzas ĝin]]''': 
* [[$basics|Enkonduko]], 
* [[$post|alŝuti respondon]] (al la tutmonda diskuto aŭ al specifa persono en tutmonda interparolado), 
* [[$create|krei diskuton]], 
* [[$watch|observi temon aŭ tutan diskutejon]], 
* [[$notifications|akirai sciigojn]],
* [[$browse|foliumi kaj enarkivigi temojn]].
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

Oni difinis kelkajn specifajn terminojn pri la Strukturema Diskutejo en '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|la Terminaro]]'''.

Ĉu Strukturema Diskutejo ne funkcias por vi? Bonvolu kontroli '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|ĉu vi povas solvi tiun problemon]]'''.

== Altnivelaj iloj ==

Iuj altnivelaj iloj haveblas por specifaj celoj. Oni grupigis ilin pri ĉi tiuj temoj:

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=Aktivigo}}
:Kio okazas kiam oni ebligas Struktureman Diskutejon en paĝo?
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=Temoj}}
:Filtri temojn, Redakti temon aŭ mesaĝon, Resumi temon, Solvi temon
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=Fiksligiloj}}
:Kiel oni kreas ligilojn al temoj
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=Sciigoj kaj atentaro}}
:La sciigoj kiujn vi ricevas kaj la apartaj enigoj en atentaroj
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=Historio}}
:Kiel la histori-sistemo funkcias
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=Administrado}}
:Kaŝi, Forstreki, Forigi temojn
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=Antaŭŝargado}}
:Antaŭŝargi enhavon en nova interparolado pri Strukturema Diskutejo
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=Fulmoklavoj}}
:Fulmoklavoj por reĝimo pri vida redaktado.

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=La tuta dokumentaro sur unu paĝo.}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>gzeth2j2edta2d3ny2maanmjwn924d4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/he</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1484178</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402156</id>
      <parentid>5004905</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:37:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8414" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;מאז 2017, [[VisualEditor|עורך חזותי]] מספק [[Visual diffs|'''השוואות חזותיות''']] (הצגת הבדלים חזותיים).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are available in two places in the interface: when previewing changes to the document before the user saves the page, and (as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta feature]]) within the standard MediaWiki diff display, accessed from the history page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In both cases, the visual diff shows up alongside the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|traditional two-column wikitext diff]], and the user can toggle between the two displays.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diffs have two main advantages over wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;
הראשון הוא שהעורכים יכולים לראות ישירות את השינויים שהם ואחרים ביצעו ללא צורך להבין ב[[Wikitext|תחביר ויקי]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is particularly helpful when looking at changes to graphical structures such as tables; for example, if an edit deletes a column from a table, the wikitext diff for it would be hard to understand, while the visual diff would be immediately obvious.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The second is that the technology can be used to more accurately represent the change to the reader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if an edit swapped two paragraphs (with or without changes to the paragraphs), the visual diff will identify that this is what occurred, while a wikitext diff makes it appear that a paragraph was deleted and an entirely new paragraph was added.&lt;/span&gt;

בדפי הבדלי גרסאות רגילים
רוב הדוגמאות וצילומי המסך שלהלן עוסקים בשימוש של הבדלים חזותיים במהלך תצוגות מקדימות של דפים בעת עריכה.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, VisualEditor's visual diffs can also be used on regular diff pages, on any wiki that has VisualEditor installed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can see an example of it in use on the English-language Wikipedia [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|here]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For wikis that have VisualEditor, there are several ways to activate this visual diff display:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If your wiki has a &quot;Beta features&quot; tab within Special:Preferences, and you want to make visual diffs an &quot;opt-in&quot; feature for users, you can add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* As seen in the Wikipedia example linked above, the visual diff mode can also be activated by simply adding &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; to the URL of a diff page.
&lt;/div&gt;

איך זה עובד
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing some changes to an article.  Most changes are highlighted with text formatting.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|300px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you are finished editing the page, type your edit summary and then choose &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In visual mode, you will see additions, removals, new links, and formatting highlighted.  Other changes, such as changing the size of an image, are described in notes on the side.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Toggle button showing visual and wikitext options; visual option is selected.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|220x220px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the toggle button to switch between visual and wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing the same changes, in the two-column wikitext diff display.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|245x245px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The wikitext diff is the same diff tool that is used in the wikitext editors and in the page history.&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{clr}}
דוגמאות
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Rich text edits&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|הבדל חזותי
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Paragraph move with subtle vandalism&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|הבדל חזותי
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff (2017).  This feature was added to the wikitext diff engine in 2018; see [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Table column removed&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|הבדל חזותי
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Text, formatting and list changes&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|הבדל חזותי
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insert new multimedia (sheet music)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|הבדל חזותי
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Technology used ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thalia Chan, Unifying editing and visual diffs, Wikimania 2017&lt;/span&gt;]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Current limitations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No notices for changes to &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, such as categories or TOC keywords.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Has issues with complex changes to tables.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unavailable on certain special pages:&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Undo &quot;diff&quot; pages.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit conflict pages&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

היסטוריה
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This feature has been available as the first diff tool in the desktop VisualEditor from the 1.31.0-wmf-20 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 6 February 2018).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before that, it was a secondary tool from the 1.29.0-wmf-17 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 21 March 2017).&lt;/span&gt;

ראו גם
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>k348yyudqbx55tphgb1e19ipybma8nx</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402179</id>
      <parentid>5402156</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:45:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8330" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
מאז 2017, {{ll|VisualEditor}} מספק '''{{ll|visual diffs}}''' (הצגת הבדלים חזותיים).
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These are available in two places in the interface: when previewing changes to the document before the user saves the page, and (as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|beta feature]]) within the standard MediaWiki diff display, accessed from the history page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In both cases, the visual diff shows up alongside the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|traditional two-column wikitext diff]], and the user can toggle between the two displays.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Visual diffs have two main advantages over wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;
הראשון הוא שהעורכים יכולים לראות ישירות את השינויים שהם ואחרים ביצעו ללא צורך להבין ב[[Wikitext|תחביר ויקי]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is particularly helpful when looking at changes to graphical structures such as tables; for example, if an edit deletes a column from a table, the wikitext diff for it would be hard to understand, while the visual diff would be immediately obvious.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The second is that the technology can be used to more accurately represent the change to the reader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if an edit swapped two paragraphs (with or without changes to the paragraphs), the visual diff will identify that this is what occurred, while a wikitext diff makes it appear that a paragraph was deleted and an entirely new paragraph was added.&lt;/span&gt;

בדפי הבדלי גרסאות רגילים
רוב הדוגמאות וצילומי המסך שלהלן עוסקים בשימוש של הבדלים חזותיים במהלך תצוגות מקדימות של דפים בעת עריכה.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, VisualEditor's visual diffs can also be used on regular diff pages, on any wiki that has VisualEditor installed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can see an example of it in use on the English-language Wikipedia [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|here]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For wikis that have VisualEditor, there are several ways to activate this visual diff display:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If your wiki has a &quot;Beta features&quot; tab within Special:Preferences, and you want to make visual diffs an &quot;opt-in&quot; feature for users, you can add the following to LocalSettings.php:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* As seen in the Wikipedia example linked above, the visual diff mode can also be activated by simply adding &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot; to the URL of a diff page.
&lt;/div&gt;

איך זה עובד
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing some changes to an article.  Most changes are highlighted with text formatting.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|300px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you are finished editing the page, type your edit summary and then choose &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In visual mode, you will see additions, removals, new links, and formatting highlighted.  Other changes, such as changing the size of an image, are described in notes on the side.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Toggle button showing visual and wikitext options; visual option is selected.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|220x220px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the toggle button to switch between visual and wikitext diffs.&lt;/span&gt;]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshot showing the same changes, in the two-column wikitext diff display.&lt;/span&gt;|left|thumb|245x245px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The wikitext diff is the same diff tool that is used in the wikitext editors and in the page history.&lt;/span&gt;]]

{{clr}}
דוגמאות
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;Rich text edits&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|הבדל חזותי
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Paragraph move with subtle vandalism&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|הבדל חזותי
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff (2017).  This feature was added to the wikitext diff engine in 2018; see [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;Table column removed&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|הבדל חזותי
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;Text, formatting and list changes&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|הבדל חזותי
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;Insert new multimedia (sheet music)&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|הבדל חזותי
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikitext diff&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Technology used ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thalia Chan, Unifying editing and visual diffs, Wikimania 2017&lt;/span&gt;]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Current limitations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No notices for changes to &quot;invisible&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|page metadata}}, such as categories or TOC keywords.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Has issues with complex changes to tables.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unavailable on certain special pages:&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Undo &quot;diff&quot; pages.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit conflict pages&lt;/span&gt;&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

היסטוריה
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This feature has been available as the first diff tool in the desktop VisualEditor from the 1.31.0-wmf-20 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 6 February 2018).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before that, it was a secondary tool from the 1.29.0-wmf-17 branch onwards (released to Wikimedia production on 21 March 2017).&lt;/span&gt;

ראו גם
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Footnotes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>taq4ck4olmrkkv1fsmsb886jtinkoq1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:VisualEditor/Diffs/15/he</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1484268</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402178</id>
      <parentid>5004904</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:45:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="67" xml:space="preserve">מאז 2017, $2 מספק $1 (הצגת הבדלים חזותיים).</text>
      <sha1>04fzm5s7wiwu05ruxaeq1nlhqt5n5wv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Social media/eu</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1484289</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401794</id>
      <parentid>5184875</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:54:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3495" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page describes the social media channels used for posting information useful to the Wikimedia technology community and explains how to post to these channels.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Laburpena ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media websites are useful for spreading news and reaching out to potential users and contributors.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social media can also be very demanding and time-consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Careless use can fragment communities, draining away free content and public contacts to social media platform owners' frequently closed and commercially-driven environments.&lt;/span&gt;

== Sare sozial kanalak ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are several accounts used frequently to share news about Wikimedia Technology and the MediaWiki Community.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== MediaWiki ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/mediawiki @mediawiki]
* Facebook - [https://www.facebook.com/MediaWikiProject/ MediaWikiProject]
* YouTube - [https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCg4wlhlN8RjP6_e_vMC4CTA MediaWiki Channel]

=== Wikimedia Teknologia ===
* Twitter - [https://twitter.com/wikimediatech @wikimediatech]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Current maintainers ===
&lt;/div&gt;
* [[mw:User:HLepp_(WMF) | Haley Lepp]] -- Twitter channels
* [[mw:User:SSethi_(WMF) | Srishti Sethi]] -- Facebook
* [[mw:User:Cindy.cicalese | Cindy Cicalese]] -- Facebook

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Our operating rules ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* '''Topics we post about''': 
** '''MediaWiki''': ''Directly'': News and information relevant to MediaWiki software and the MediaWiki project, information from [[MW:Template:MediaWiki_News | MediaWiki News]], calls for mentors for outreach programs. ''Retweeets'': new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks
** '''Wikitech''': ''Directly'': News from the Wikimedia Technical Movement, occasional news and information from Wikimedia and Wikidata, news and information about related technology and the Open Source Software movement, quarterly promotions of Tech News and Quarterly Technical Community Newsletter, calls for mentors and mentees for technical outreach programs, new stories published on the Wikimedia Technical Blog, Upcoming Technical Talks, technical office hours
* '''Retweeting''': We will retweet some posts between the MediaWiki and Wikitech accounts. As a general rule, we rarely retweet other user accounts.
* '''Likes''': We occasionally like posts from other accounts
* '''Replies''': We do not reply or respond from the @MediaWiki and @Wikimediatech accounts. The social media channels are not support channels.
* '''Timing''': It is our goal to post from each account to several times a week.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note, we feel it's important to operate conservatively on social media channels and seek to ensure our posts maintain a neutral point of view.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Posting to Twitter and Facebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Do you have news or an announcement you would like us to post to Wikimedia Technology Twitter and/or Facebook?
&lt;/div&gt;
Reach out to us! The person listed as maintaining the platform will be able to help you.

[[Category:MediaWiki Communication{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>seqi4p7m7bep79ljs0vy42ehzkimq6z</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/es</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>1486829</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403325</id>
      <parentid>5307411</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:23:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20787" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = Permite a los usuarios activar accesorios basados en JavaScript desde su página de preferencias
|example         = Wikimedia Commons: [[commons:Special:Gadgets|Resumen de accesorios]], [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|preferencias de usuario]] (haga clic en &quot;Accesorios&quot;; debe iniciar sesión, por supuesto)
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
La extensión '''Accesorios''' ofrece a los usuarios una forma de elegir &quot;accesorios&quot; basados en JavaScript o CSS que proporcionan otros usuarios de wiki.

Los accesorios están hechos con {{ll|snippets}} (fragmentos) de JavaScript o CSS  ubicados en las páginas del espacio de nombres de MediaWiki.
Cada accesorio se define mediante una línea en [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]], que proporciona un nombre y una descripción para el accesorio, y una lista de los snippets de JS y CSS que utiliza (consulte la sección ''[[#Usage|Usos]]'' a continuación).

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Gadgets reside in the MediaWiki namespace (the list defining the gadgets as well as the actual code snippets), only sysops (interface admins from 1.32) can edit the code.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is as it should be: only users especially trusted by the wiki community should be able to edit JavaScript code that is used by other users, since JavaScript can easily be used to hijack accounts or spy on people.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Installation ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Usage ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Selection of some gadgets at the user preferences in de.wikipedia&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to define gadgets depending on the &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If It is &lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt; (the default value), the list of available gadgets is defined on '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In an alternative way, Gadget definitions are defined on pages in the [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|Gadget definition]] namespace when &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt; is set to &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{caution|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Migration of the existing gadget definitions is not yet supported, so you will lose previously defined gadgets after changing this option.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once created with at least one valid gadget, gadgets defined there show up in the &quot;Gadgets&quot; section of [[Special:Preferences]], so users can pick the gadgets they would like to use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An overview of the gadgets defined by MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition is also shown on '''[[Special:Gadgets]]''', along with links to the respective system messages, for easy editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Statistics for non-default gadget usage can be seen at '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Format ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using MediaWiki Gadgets Definition ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each line in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition that starts with one or more &quot;*&quot; (asterisks) characters defines a gadget; it must have the following form:&lt;/span&gt;

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;options (can be omitted)&lt;/span&gt;] | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;page names&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first field (&quot;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&quot; in the example) is the gadget's ''internal name'', and references a system message ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''' in the example) that contains a short description of the gadget, using wiki syntax.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''internal name'' is used as part of the name of a form field and must follow the [https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id rules defined for NAME attribute values].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means it must begin with a basic Latin letter (&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;) and may be followed by any number of letters, digits (&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;), hyphens (&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;), underscores (&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;), colons (&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;), and periods (&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Options format:
&lt;/div&gt;

 [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;option1&lt;/span&gt; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;option2&lt;/span&gt; | ... &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;optionN&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whitespace can be omitted.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A single option can either consist of a single option name (in this case it is a flag option), or contain a comma-separated list of values:&lt;/span&gt;

 option = value1, value2, value3

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Examples:
&lt;/div&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using Gadget Definition Namespace ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Creation of the [[Gadget definition:mygadget]] page and putting in it the below [[w:JSON|JSON]] code have the same effect as &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In above example, the [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] and the [[Gadget:mygadget.css]] are used.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember the &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; option is always true in the gadget definition namespace.&lt;/span&gt;

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add the following in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} to provide the appropriate permissions for users who are within the interface-admin group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing pages in the Gadget namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; right and editing pages in the Gadget definition namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt; right.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Options ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Name&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Parameters&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Description&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with {{ll|ResourceLoader}}.&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|list of default modules]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|privileges]].&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;''
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide the gadget from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Preferences]] page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be used in two ways:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to Common.js).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you need to add both: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated skin names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; in the URL, {{phab|T199478}}).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated action names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g. &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/span&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specifying &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; action will also load it on &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/span&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mark this gadget as [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the require() function.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (default), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set the {{ll|ResourceLoader}} target(s) for the gadget.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;or&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/span&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pre-release&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Makes the gadget to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|top-loaded]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can specify extra dependencies for your gadgets, for example:&lt;/span&gt;

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; with mygadget.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/span&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|permissions]], not user groups like [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here are some real examples:&lt;/span&gt;

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Pages ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' and '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css''' in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;.js&quot; or &quot;.css&quot;, respectively.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/div&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into {{tag|nowiki}} and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See the first and last lines of [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] for an example.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The list of gadgets in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;=&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would define a new section, with the title defined on the page [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadget Manager&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>h5uyvsa5vx3c6td45ov2yxs8c2qm9cs</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/ko</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>1490031</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403328</id>
      <parentid>5307416</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:23:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="19425" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = 사용자가 그들의 설정(preferences) 페이지에서 JS 기반 사용자 제공 가젯을 활성화하도록 허용합니다.
|example         = 위키미디어 공용 : [[commons:Special:Gadgets|Gadget overview]], [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|user preferences]] (&quot;Gadgets&quot; 을 클릭합니다; 물론 로그인 상태이어야 합니다)
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
'''가젯''' 확장은 사용자가 다른 위키 사용자가 제공한 자바스크립트 또는 CSS 기반의 &quot;가젯&quot;을 선택할 수 있는 방법을 제공합니다.

가젯은 미디어위키 네임스페이스의 페이지에 있는 자바스크립트 및/또는 CSS {{ll|snippets}} 으로 구성됩니다.
각 가젯은 [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]에 가젯의 이름과 설명, 사용하는 JS 및 CSS 스니펫 목록을 제공하는 행으로 정의됩니다(아래 ''[[#Usage|사용법]]'' 섹션 참조).

가젯은 미디어위키 네임스페이스(가젯을 정의하는 목록과 실제 코드 조각)에 있기 때문에 sysops(1.32의 인터페이스 관리자)만 코드를 편집할 수 있습니다.
이런 방식으로 동작되어야 합니다: JavaScript는 계정을 가로채거나 사람을 염탐하는 데 쉽게 사용될 수 있기 때문에 위키 커뮤니티에서 특별히 신뢰하는 사용자만 다른 사용자가 사용하는 JavaScript 코드를 편집할 수 있어야 합니다.

== 설치 ==
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
== 사용법 ==
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|de.wikipedia의 사용자 기본 설정에서 일부 가젯 선택한 이미지]]
 &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;에 따라 가젯을 정의하는 두가지 방법이 있습니다.
&lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt;(기본값) 이라면, 사용가능한 가젯의 리스트는 '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''로부터 정의됩니다.
또는 &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;가 &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;으로 설정된 경우 [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|가젯 정의]] 네임스페이스의 페이지에서 가젯 정의가 정의됩니다.

{{caution|1=기존 가젯 정의의 마이그레이션은 아직 지원되지 않으므로 이 옵션을 변경하면 이전에 정의한 가젯을 잃게 됩니다.}}

하나 이상의 유효한 가젯으로 생성되면 거기에 정의된 가젯이 [[Special:Preferences]]의 &quot;가젯&quot; 섹션에 표시되므로 사용자는 사용하려는 가젯을 선택할 수 있습니다.
MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition에 의해 정의된 가젯의 개요는 쉽게 편집할 수 있도록 해당 시스템 메시지에 대한 링크와 함께 '''[[Special:Gadgets]]'''에도 표시됩니다.
기본이 아닌 가젯 사용에 대한 통계는 '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''에서 볼 수 있습니다.

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==== 형식 ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===== 미디어위키 가젯 정의 사용하기 =====
&lt;/div&gt;
하나 이상의 &quot;*&quot; (asterisks) 문자로 시작하는 MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition에 있는 각 라인은 가젯을 정의한다; 다음과 같은 형식을 따라야 한다:

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [options (생략 가능)] | 페이지 이름

첫 번째 필드(예제에서 &quot;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&quot;)는 가젯의 ''내부 이름''이며 Wiki 구문을 사용하여 가젯에 대한 간단한 설명이 포함된 시스템 메시지(예제에서 '''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''')를 참조합니다.

{{note|1=''내부 이름''은 양식 필드 이름의 일부로 사용되며 [NAME 속성 값에 대해 정의된 https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id 규칙]을 따라야 합니다.
이는 기본 라틴 문자(&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;)로 시작해야 하며 그 뒤에 임의의 수의 문자, 숫자(&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;), 하이픈(&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;), 밑줄(&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;), 콜론(&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;) 및 마침표(&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;)가 올 수 있다는 것을 의미합니다.}}

옵션 형식:

 [옵션1 | 옵션2 | ... 옵션N]

공백은 생략할 수 있습니다.
단일 옵션은 단일 옵션 이름(이 경우 플래그 옵션임)으로 구성되거나 쉼표로 구분된 값 목록을 포함할 수 있습니다:

 option = value1, value2, value3

예시:
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
또는
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
또는
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
===== 가젯 정의 네임스페이스 사용하기 =====
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Gadget definition:mygadget]] 페이지를 생성하고 아래에 [[w:JSON|JSON]] 코드를 넣으면 &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;와 같은 효과를 냅니다.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

위의 예시와 같이 [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] 과 [[Gadget:mygadget.css]] 가 사용됩니다.
가젯 정의 네임스페이스에서 &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; 옵션은 항상 true 라는 것을 명심하십시오.

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
{{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}에 다음을 추가하여 interface-admin 그룹 내에 있는 사용자에게 적절한 권한을 제공할 수 있습니다.
가젯 네임스페이스에서 페이지를 편집하려면 &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; 권한이 필요하고 가젯 정의 네임스페이스에서 페이지를 편집하려면 &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt; 권한이 필요합니다.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Options ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Name&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Parameters&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Description&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with {{ll|ResourceLoader}}.&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|list of default modules]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|privileges]].&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;''
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide the gadget from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Preferences]] page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be used in two ways:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to Common.js).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you need to add both: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated skin names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; in the URL, {{phab|T199478}}).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated action names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g. &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/span&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specifying &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; action will also load it on &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/span&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mark this gadget as [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the require() function.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (default), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set the {{ll|ResourceLoader}} target(s) for the gadget.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;or&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/span&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pre-release&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Makes the gadget to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|top-loaded]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can specify extra dependencies for your gadgets, for example:&lt;/span&gt;

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; with mygadget.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/span&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|permissions]], not user groups like [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here are some real examples:&lt;/span&gt;

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Pages ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' and '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css''' in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;.js&quot; or &quot;.css&quot;, respectively.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/div&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into {{tag|nowiki}} and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See the first and last lines of [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] for an example.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The list of gadgets in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;=&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would define a new section, with the title defined on the page [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadget Manager&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>bcd3r6bd8yax8e6scg0e9vbm4dyzs9u</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/hy</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1490641</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402932</id>
      <parentid>5355655</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="53945" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Հիմնական ակնարկ ==

=== Ֆայլի փոխանցումը ===

Ընտրե՛ք ֆայլերի փոխանցման մեթոդ.

* [[w:Wget|wget]]
* Ապահով պատեճենե՛ք օգտագործելով [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] կամ [[w:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* [[w:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]] հաճախորդ (կլիենտ) ծրագրի օգտագործումը
* Հոսթինգ ծառայություն տրամադրող ընկերությունը կարող է վեբ բրաուզերի միջոցով տրամադրել ֆայլերի կառավարման միջերես (ինտերֆեյս), որի առկայությունը կարող եք ճշտեք ձեր ինտերնետ մատակարարի հետ:
* Մեկ այլ մեթոդ Դրանց ցուցակն առկա է [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]

===Նախնական===

Կարդեցե՛ք {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=the UPGRADE text file included in MediaWiki}}.

# Ստուգե՛ք պահանջները
# Կարդացե՛ք RELEASE-NOTES ֆայլը
# Read the UPGRADE file
# Պահուստավորե՛ք առկա ֆայլերը և տվյալների շտեմարանը
# Ապափաթեթավորե՛ք նոր ֆայլերը
# Արդիականացրե՛ք ընդլայնումները
# Գործարկե՛ք թարմացման սկրիպտը՝ ստուգելու համար տվյալների շտեմարանը
# Ստուգե՛ք թարմացումը
# Հեռացրե՛ք հին տեղադրումներից մնացած ֆայլերը

== Ստուգե՛ք պահանջները == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} պահանջում է՝

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Հետևյալներից մեկը․
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Սկսած 1.36 տարբերակից MediaWiki-ն հանձնառու է աջակցել արդիականացումները միայն նախորդող երկու LTS թողարկումներից (տե՛ս [[phab:T259771]]): MediaWiki-ի ավելի հին տարբերակներից արդիականացումները պետք է իրականացվեն մի քանի քայլով:
Սա նշանակում է, որ եթե դուք ցանկանում եք արդիականացնել 1․23-ից կամ ավելի վաղ ստեղծված թողարկումից մինչև 1․36, ապա առաջինը դուք պետք է արդիականացնեք 1․23 wiki-ն մինչև 1․27 (կամ 1.35), իսկ դրանից հետո 1.27-ից (կամ 1.35-ից) դուք կարող եք արդիականացնել մինչև 1․36 թողարկումը։

Եթե դուք օգտագործում եք PostgreSQL, խնդրում ենք կարդացեք նաև {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}։

Լրացուցիչ տեղեկատվության համար խնդրում ենք կարդալ {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} և {{ll|Compatibility}}։

== Կարդացե՛ք թողարկման ծանոթագրությունները ==
Բաշխման ֆայլի կամ [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]]-ից ստացված/ներմուծված ֆայլերի մեջ կան մի շարք ֆայլեր՝ մեծատառ  անվանումներով, որոնցից մեկը պարունակում է '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]])-ը։
Այժմ ժամանակն է բացելու այն և պարզելու թե ի՞նչ է փոխվել այս թողարկման մեջ։
Դուք նաև պետք է կարդաք UPGRADE ֆայլի հրահանգները։

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Մաքրել սպասման մեջ գտնվող առաջադրանքները ==
Կատարողականության տեսանկյունից որոշ գործողություններ տվյալների պահոցում հետաձգվում են և կառավարվում [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]]-ի կողմից։
Այս առաջադրանքները պահպանվում են տվյալների պահոցում և պարունակում են պարամետրեր կատարման ենթակա գործողությունների վերաբերյալ տեղեկատվության հետ միասին։
Հաստատակամորեն խորհուրդ է տրվում գործարկել այդ սպասման մեջ գտնվող առաջադրանքները մինչև wiki-ի արդիականացումը՝ խուսափելու համար ձախողումից այն դեպքում, երբ այդ առաջադրանքների պարամետրական բնորոշումը փոխվում է նոր թողարկման մեջ։
Օգտագործե՛ք {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}} գործարկելու բոլոր սպասման մեջ գտնվող առաջադրանքները և մաքրելու առաջադրանքների հերթը մինչև արդիականացման կատարումը։

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Պահուստավորե՛ք գոյություն ունեցող ֆայլերը և տվյալների պահոցը ==

''Ամբողջական հրահանգներ․ {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

Թեև արդիականացման սկրիպտները լավ մշակված են և հուսալի՝ ամեն ինչ կարող է գնալ ոչ այնպես, ինչպես ցանկալի է։ Մինչև տվյալների պահոցի սխեմայի թարմացման գործարկումը wiki-ի '''կատարեք ամբողջական [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|պահուստավորում]]'''՝

* wiki-ի բովանդակությունը տվյալների պահոցից, (համոզվեք որ ճիշտ եք նշել սիմվոլների հավաքածուն, առաջինը ստուգե՛ք LocalSettings.php-ն)։ Լավ կլինի տվյալների պահոցի SQL dump-ի հետ ստեղծել նաև XML dump-ը։
:* MySQL, թե՛ SQL dump-ը և թե՛ XML dump-ը օգտագործվում են &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; հրամանի հետ․
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* PostgreSQL, տվյալների պահոցի dump-ը օգտագործվում է &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; հրամանի հետ․
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* SQLite, դուք օգտագործում եք MediaWiki-ի սկրիպտը պահուստ ստեղծելու համար՝
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* պատկերները և այլ մեդիա ֆայլերը (&lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; պանակի պարունակությունը՝ logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* կոնֆիգուրացիան ֆայլեր, օրինակ՝ &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; և &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (եթե առկա է)
* MediaWiki-ի ծրագրային ֆայլերը, ներառյալ բոլոր տեսքերը և ընդլայնումները, հատկապես եթե դուք ձևափոխել եք դրանք։

== Ապափաթեթավորե՛ք նոր ֆայլերը ==

=== Tarball փաթեթի օգտագործումը ===

Դուք կարող եք տեղադրել նոր ֆայլը անհրաժեշտ տեղում՝ օգտագործելով FTP կամ հրամանների տող։ Օգտագործե՛ք հրամանների տողը, եթե դուք ունեք հասանելիություն դրան։ Հրամանի տողի օգտագործումը շատ ավելի արագ կլինի, քան հազարավոր ֆայլերից յուրաքանչյուրը FTP-ի միջոցով վերբեռնելը:

{{Note|1=Դուք պետք է ապաարխիվացված tarball-ը դնեք ձեր սերվերում՝ նոր և դատարկ պանակում: Եթե դուք փոխանակ  ապաարխիվացնելու նոր տարբերակը նոր պանակի մեջ՝ ապաարխիվացնում եք նոր տարբերակն անմիջապես հին տարբերակի վրա, ապա դուք պետք է հետևեք [[#Back up existing files and the database|Գոյություն ունեցող ֆայլերի և տվյալների պահոցի պահուստավորում]]-ի մեջ նկարագրված հրահանգներին։ Հակառակ դեպքում, եթե ցանկացած փոփոխություն կատարելու դեպքում դուք կարող եք հեռացնել դրանք անվերադարձ։ Ապաարխիվացնելով tarball-ը MediaWiki-ի աշխատող օրինակի վրա դուք կարող եք թողնել նաև MediaWiki-ի հին տարբերակի բոլոր ֆայլերը, որոնք կարող են խանգարել արդիականացված ծրագրին։ Խորհուրդ է տրվում, որ դուք նոր ֆայլերը ապաարխիվացնեք նոր պանակի մեջ, և ապա կիրառեք հարմարեցումները նոր պանակի նկատմամբ (վերականգնելով LocalSettings.php ֆայլը, պատկերների պանակը, ընդլայնումները և այլ հարմարեցումները ինչպես հարմարեցված տեսքերը)։}}

==== FTP կամ գրաֆիկական ====

Եթե դուք հասանելի չեք ձեր սերվերի հրամանների տողին, ներբեռնեք MediaWiki-ի tarball-ը ձեր տեղային համակարգչի մեջ և օգտագործեք [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip]-ը ձեր տեղային PC-ի մեջ tarball-ը ապաարխիվացնելու համար։

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After you extracted the files locally, use your favorite FTP client software to upload directories and files to the server.
&lt;/div&gt;

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Command line ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to run the command as &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; if you don't have full write permissions to the wiki install directories under your current user.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When untarring a tarball package normally a new directory for the new wiki version will be created and you will have to copy the old configuration files and images directory from your old installation directory:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
(Open)Solaris users should use &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt;, or:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Other files===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
After extracting the tarball, you should copy or move some files and folders from the old installation directory to the new one:
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;contains your old configuration settings.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (or &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in older versions) directory, which contains all the uploaded files to the wiki, unless you have chosen a different upload directory, and change the ownership and permissions. &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (e.g. if your web user is ''apache'').
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Some extensions in the &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; directory. You should always get updated extensions, old extensions aren't guaranteed to work with a newer version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In case you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|custom logo]] this file also needs to be restored from backup. Before 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. After 1.24 the logo is usually in &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt; if that's what you chose to use. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* For 1.35 you may need to restore the logos from [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]]. Then add to LocalSettings.php e.g. &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom skins from within the &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any modifications made to the old installation files or extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Any .htaccess file (if you're using Apache and you've defined any rules in them).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once done, make this new folder the published folder on the web server, or rename the old installation directory and then rename the new one to match the old name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using Git ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If using {{ll|Download from Git|Git}}, export the files into a clean location, and then copy the old customized files into the new location as described in the previous section.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You will also need to install some external PHP libraries using Composer or a provided collection maintained for the Wikimedia wiki farm.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;More details on installing and updating external libraries can be found in the [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git download documentation]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using patch ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A small patch file is usually made available for a minor version upgrade.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll need to download [[w:patch (Unix)|patch]] to use this.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Manually download and extract the patch file from [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ the dumps site] or follow the directions with wget below.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Patches are incremental, you can '''not ''' skip a version.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; to your main MediaWiki directory (the one with LocalSettings.php).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Download the patch file and &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt; it.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Use &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt; to check what will be changed (''e.g.'', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# If all is well, run &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; again without &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Check your Special:Version and you should see the new version number in place.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Files remaining that may cause errors ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you unpacked over the old installation directory, some old files can cause problems with the new version.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are not using [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]], but have a &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file in the MediaWiki root folder, you may receive errors referring to &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Deleting, or renaming, the &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; file will resolve this error.  The &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; file, also in the MediaWiki root folder, can serve as a template should you enable profiling in the future.&lt;/span&gt;

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.23 deprecates the skin autodiscovery mechanism of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory as well as the according subfolders inside the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory got removed. MediaWiki will log warnings if any of them are still found to help you remember. (You will also need to adjust any custom skins to follow a similar convention.) See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki 1.24 changes the paths of core skin files. After upgrading to this version, you should ensure that the old files &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; directly in the &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; directory are no longer present. See {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} for details.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Upgrade extensions ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Certain extensions have been updated in order to work with the new version of MediaWiki. Be sure to upgrade to the latest versions of such extensions. You might need to perform manual updates to custom extensions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Different [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|tarballs]] include some subsets of extensions and have versioning which helps you upgrade choosing the right one for your MediaWiki core release.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Adapt your LocalSettings.php ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Other variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Run the update script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: ''See also {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Should I back up first?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Short answer: Yes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Why upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>dezjlcx9ns57bia1vuqlbscju0kqnfq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:LiquidThreads/en</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1493654</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402081</id>
      <parentid>5031133</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:45:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3072" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
[[Extension:LiquidThreads|LiquidThreads]] is a discussion system for MediaWiki that adds forum-like features to discussion pages.

This page is still developing; these are only basic instructions.

== Basics ==

=== Posting a new discussion ===
To post a new discussion, click on the &quot;Start new discussion&quot; link at the top of the discussion page.

[[File:LiquidThreads New Discussion Link.png|500px]]

=== Adding a reply ===
[[File:LiquidThreads Reply Button.png]]

To add a reply to a thread, click on the &quot;Add a reply&quot; link at the bottom of a thread.

Once you have clicked on this button, a form will load allowing you to enter your reply.

When you are done, click &quot;Save&quot; to save your reply.

=== Searching past discussions ===

To search past discussions on a page, use the search box at the top of the page.

[[File:LiquidThreads Search Box.png|500px]]

=== Editing a post ===
To edit a post, move your mouse over the post, then move it over the arrow to the right of the menu.
Then, click &quot;Edit&quot;.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Edit.png]]

=== Viewing thread history ===
To view the history of a thread, click on the &quot;History&quot; link to the right-hand side of the thread's header.

[[File:LiquidThreads Thread Menu History.png]]

You can navigate between changes made to threads, and view the thread as it existed at certain points of time.

== Refactoring ==

=== Moving a post to a new position ===
You can move a post to a new position on the page with drag-and-drop.
To activate this for a post, click on &quot;Drag to a new location&quot; under the &quot;More&quot; menu.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Drag.png]]

Once you've clicked on this, you can drag the thread to a new location.
[[File:LiquidThreads drop points.png|600px|thumb|left]]

=== Writing a thread summary ===
To write or edit a thread summary, click on the &quot;Summarize&quot; option, to the right of the section heading.

[[File:LiquidThreads Thread Menu Summarize.png]]

== Administrative tasks ==

=== Toggling LiquidThreads on a page ===
To activate LiquidThreads on a specific page on a wiki where LiquidThreads is opt-in, add 
 &lt;kbd&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#useliquidthreads:1}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/kbd&gt; 
to the page's source code. To deactivate LiquidThreads on a specific page on a wiki where LiquidThreads is opt-out add 
 &lt;kbd&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#useliquidthreads:0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/kbd&gt; 
to the page's source code.

=== Removing a post ===
To remove a post, [[#Editing a post|edit it]], and remove all of its content.
If it has no replies with content in them, then it will not be shown.
The previous content of the post will still be available in its page history.

Administrators can delete individual posts.
If you are one, then to do this, move your mouse over the post, and then over the arrow on the toolbar.
Then, select &quot;Delete&quot; from the options.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Delete.png]]

=== Restoring a post ===
To restore a previously-removed post, you should [[#Viewing thread history|view the thread's history]], and find the revision before that thread was removed. [TBC]

[[Category:Extension help|LiquidThreads{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>c3lr3it9fsqw8go1vwqojm09s3np1ix</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:LiquidThreads/ja</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1493656</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402083</id>
      <parentid>5031139</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:45:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4093" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
[[Extension:LiquidThreads|LiquidThreads]] is a discussion system for MediaWiki that adds forum-like features to discussion pages.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page is still developing; these are only basic instructions.
&lt;/div&gt;

== 基本 ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Posting a new discussion ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To post a new discussion, click on the &quot;Start new discussion&quot; link at the top of the discussion page.

[[File:LiquidThreads New Discussion Link.png|500px]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Adding a reply ===
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:LiquidThreads Reply Button.png]]

To add a reply to a thread, click on the &quot;Add a reply&quot; link at the bottom of a thread.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once you have clicked on this button, a form will load allowing you to enter your reply.
&lt;/div&gt;

When you are done, click &quot;Save&quot; to save your reply.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Searching past discussions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To search past discussions on a page, use the search box at the top of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:LiquidThreads Search Box.png|500px]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing a post ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit a post, move your mouse over the post, then move it over the arrow to the right of the menu.&lt;/span&gt;
Then, click &quot;Edit&quot;.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Edit.png]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Viewing thread history ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To view the history of a thread, click on the &quot;History&quot; link to the right-hand side of the thread's header.

[[File:LiquidThreads Thread Menu History.png]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can navigate between changes made to threads, and view the thread as it existed at certain points of time.
&lt;/div&gt;

== リファクタリング ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Moving a post to a new position ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can move a post to a new position on the page with drag-and-drop.&lt;/span&gt;
To activate this for a post, click on &quot;Drag to a new location&quot; under the &quot;More&quot; menu.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Drag.png]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you've clicked on this, you can drag the thread to a new location.&lt;/span&gt;
[[File:LiquidThreads drop points.png|600px|thumb|left]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Writing a thread summary ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To write or edit a thread summary, click on the &quot;Summarize&quot; option, to the right of the section heading.

[[File:LiquidThreads Thread Menu Summarize.png]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Administrative tasks ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Toggling LiquidThreads on a page ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To activate LiquidThreads on a specific page on a wiki where LiquidThreads is opt-in, add 
 &lt;kbd&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#useliquidthreads:1}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/kbd&gt; 
to the page's source code. To deactivate LiquidThreads on a specific page on a wiki where LiquidThreads is opt-out add 
 &lt;kbd&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#useliquidthreads:0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/kbd&gt; 
to the page's source code.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a post ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To remove a post, [[#Editing a post|edit it]], and remove all of its content.
If it has no replies with content in them, then it will not be shown.
The previous content of the post will still be available in its page history.

Administrators can delete individual posts.
If you are one, then to do this, move your mouse over the post, and then over the arrow on the toolbar.
Then, select &quot;Delete&quot; from the options.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Delete.png]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Restoring a post ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To restore a previously-removed post, you should [[#Viewing thread history|view the thread's history]], and find the revision before that thread was removed. [TBC]

[[Category:Extension help|LiquidThreads{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>kyud3uvywldvjgt8ooe3rl0ecktuhv3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/fi</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>1497159</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403324</id>
      <parentid>5307413</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:23:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20865" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow users to enable JS-based, user-provided gadgets from their preferences page&lt;/span&gt;
|example         = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Wikimedia Commons: [[commons:Special:Gadgets|Gadget overview]], [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|user preferences]] (click &quot;Gadgets&quot;; you need to be logged in of course)&lt;/span&gt;
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The '''Gadgets''' extension provides a way for users to pick JavaScript or CSS based &quot;gadgets&quot; that other wiki users provide.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets are made up of JavaScript and/or CSS {{ll|snippets}} located on pages in the MediaWiki namespace.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each gadget is defined by a line in [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]], providing a name and description for the gadget, and a list of the JS and CSS snippets that it uses (see the ''[[#Usage|Usage]]'' section below).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Gadgets reside in the MediaWiki namespace (the list defining the gadgets as well as the actual code snippets), only sysops (interface admins from 1.32) can edit the code.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is as it should be: only users especially trusted by the wiki community should be able to edit JavaScript code that is used by other users, since JavaScript can easily be used to hijack accounts or spy on people.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Installation ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Usage ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Selection of some gadgets at the user preferences in de.wikipedia&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There are two ways to define gadgets depending on the &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If It is &lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt; (the default value), the list of available gadgets is defined on '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In an alternative way, Gadget definitions are defined on pages in the [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|Gadget definition]] namespace when &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt; is set to &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

{{caution|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Migration of the existing gadget definitions is not yet supported, so you will lose previously defined gadgets after changing this option.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once created with at least one valid gadget, gadgets defined there show up in the &quot;Gadgets&quot; section of [[Special:Preferences]], so users can pick the gadgets they would like to use.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An overview of the gadgets defined by MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition is also shown on '''[[Special:Gadgets]]''', along with links to the respective system messages, for easy editing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Statistics for non-default gadget usage can be seen at '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Format ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using MediaWiki Gadgets Definition ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each line in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition that starts with one or more &quot;*&quot; (asterisks) characters defines a gadget; it must have the following form:&lt;/span&gt;

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;options (can be omitted)&lt;/span&gt;] | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;page names&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first field (&quot;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&quot; in the example) is the gadget's ''internal name'', and references a system message ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''' in the example) that contains a short description of the gadget, using wiki syntax.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''internal name'' is used as part of the name of a form field and must follow the [https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id rules defined for NAME attribute values].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means it must begin with a basic Latin letter (&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;) and may be followed by any number of letters, digits (&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;), hyphens (&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;), underscores (&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;), colons (&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;), and periods (&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Options format:
&lt;/div&gt;

 [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;option1&lt;/span&gt; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;option2&lt;/span&gt; | ... &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;optionN&lt;/span&gt;]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whitespace can be omitted.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A single option can either consist of a single option name (in this case it is a flag option), or contain a comma-separated list of values:&lt;/span&gt;

 option = value1, value2, value3

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Examples:
&lt;/div&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using Gadget Definition Namespace ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Creation of the [[Gadget definition:mygadget]] page and putting in it the below [[w:JSON|JSON]] code have the same effect as &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In above example, the [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] and the [[Gadget:mygadget.css]] are used.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember the &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; option is always true in the gadget definition namespace.&lt;/span&gt;

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add the following in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} to provide the appropriate permissions for users who are within the interface-admin group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing pages in the Gadget namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; right and editing pages in the Gadget definition namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt; right.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Options ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Name&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Parameters&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Description&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with {{ll|ResourceLoader}}.&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|list of default modules]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|privileges]].&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;''
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide the gadget from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Preferences]] page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be used in two ways:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to Common.js).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you need to add both: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated skin names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; in the URL, {{phab|T199478}}).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated action names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g. &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/span&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specifying &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; action will also load it on &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/span&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mark this gadget as [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the require() function.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (default), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set the {{ll|ResourceLoader}} target(s) for the gadget.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;or&lt;/span&gt; &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/span&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pre-release&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''Tyhjä'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;None&lt;/span&gt;'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Makes the gadget to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|top-loaded]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can specify extra dependencies for your gadgets, for example:&lt;/span&gt;

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; with mygadget.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/span&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|permissions]], not user groups like [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here are some real examples:&lt;/span&gt;

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Pages ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' and '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css''' in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;.js&quot; or &quot;.css&quot;, respectively.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/div&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into {{tag|nowiki}} and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See the first and last lines of [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] for an example.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sections ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The list of gadgets in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;=&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would define a new section, with the title defined on the page [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadget Manager&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>5pgkf5v2jhcowr5e9hgj4d95rw3gram</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:LiquidThreads/id</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1497551</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402080</id>
      <parentid>5049003</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:45:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3871" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
[[Extension:LiquidThreads|LiquidThreads]] is a discussion system for MediaWiki that adds forum-like features to discussion pages.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page is still developing; these are only basic instructions.
&lt;/div&gt;

==Penggunaan dasar==

=== Membuat sebuah diskusi ===
To post a new discussion, click on the &quot;Start new discussion&quot; link at the top of the discussion page.

[[File:LiquidThreads New Discussion Link.png|500px]]

=== Melakukan balasan ===
[[File:LiquidThreads Reply Button.png]]

To add a reply to a thread, click on the &quot;Add a reply&quot; link at the bottom of a thread.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once you have clicked on this button, a form will load allowing you to enter your reply.
&lt;/div&gt;

When you are done, click &quot;Save&quot; to save your reply.

=== Mencari diskusi sebelumnya ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To search past discussions on a page, use the search box at the top of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:LiquidThreads Search Box.png|500px]]

=== Menyunting sebuah pos ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit a post, move your mouse over the post, then move it over the arrow to the right of the menu.&lt;/span&gt;
Then, click &quot;Edit&quot;.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Edit.png]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Viewing thread history ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To view the history of a thread, click on the &quot;History&quot; link to the right-hand side of the thread's header.

[[File:LiquidThreads Thread Menu History.png]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can navigate between changes made to threads, and view the thread as it existed at certain points of time.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Refactoring ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Moving a post to a new position ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can move a post to a new position on the page with drag-and-drop.&lt;/span&gt;
To activate this for a post, click on &quot;Drag to a new location&quot; under the &quot;More&quot; menu.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Drag.png]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you've clicked on this, you can drag the thread to a new location.&lt;/span&gt;
[[File:LiquidThreads drop points.png|600px|thumb|left]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Writing a thread summary ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To write or edit a thread summary, click on the &quot;Summarize&quot; option, to the right of the section heading.

[[File:LiquidThreads Thread Menu Summarize.png]]

== Tugas administratif ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Toggling LiquidThreads on a page ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To activate LiquidThreads on a specific page on a wiki where LiquidThreads is opt-in, add 
 &lt;kbd&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#useliquidthreads:1}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/kbd&gt; 
to the page's source code. To deactivate LiquidThreads on a specific page on a wiki where LiquidThreads is opt-out add 
 &lt;kbd&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#useliquidthreads:0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/kbd&gt; 
to the page's source code.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a post ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To remove a post, [[#Editing a post|edit it]], and remove all of its content.
If it has no replies with content in them, then it will not be shown.
The previous content of the post will still be available in its page history.

Administrators can delete individual posts.
If you are one, then to do this, move your mouse over the post, and then over the arrow on the toolbar.
Then, select &quot;Delete&quot; from the options.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Delete.png]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Restoring a post ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To restore a previously-removed post, you should [[#Viewing thread history|view the thread's history]], and find the revision before that thread was removed. [TBC]

[[Category:Extension help|LiquidThreads{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>enmdciun942wwm0lrrl2aoduhqeatou</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:ShoutWiki/5/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1503091</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401770</id>
      <parentid>5066396</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:52:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="234" xml:space="preserve">ShoutWiki のスタッフの多くは、MediaWiki の[[developers|開発者]]でもあります。ShoutWiki 全般については、ShoutWiki のウェブサイト $1 や[$url ShoutWikiの関連ページ]を参照してください。</text>
      <sha1>3hzoohka3hmm1b03t80cugwkntsz9dd</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401888</id>
      <parentid>5401770</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:23:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="238" xml:space="preserve">ShoutWiki のスタッフの多くは、MediaWiki の[[developers|開発者]]でもあります。ShoutWiki 全般については、[$url ShoutWiki のウェブサイト]や[$url2 ShoutWikiの関連ページ]を参照してください。</text>
      <sha1>sn3jv6xxasn5052a83lopyd6fmamgm1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Technical decision making/Community rep nomination</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1509490</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401585</id>
      <parentid>5398144</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T12:02:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Grunny</username>
        <id>206531</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>+</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1799" xml:space="preserve">= Technical Decision Forum Community Representative Nomination Form =
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|+ '''Please add the information requested for the person you are nominating'''
!Nominated Person's First Name !! Nominated Person's Last Name
!WikiUser 
! Meets the requirements to be a community representative. 
! Agree to respond to Forum requests for feedback within 7 days 
! Agree to participate in discussion in good faith under the terms of the code of conduct for Wikimedia technical spaces 
! Have read and understand the Technical Decision Forum process documentation and agree to serve as a committee representative.
!Comments      
|-
| ''First Name'' || ''Last Name'' || ''Wiki'' || ''YES'' || ''YES'' || ''YES'' || ''YES''
|
|-
| Adi || Purnama || [[User:Rtnf]]|| No (dont have +2 rights and merged commit yet) || YES || YES || YES
|Representing Indonesian Wikipedia Tech Ambassador. 
Motivation : My academic background is Computer Science. I'm still not quite good in writing a proper Wikipedia article, but I really want to contribute to this movement. So, even though I rarely edits an article, i'm trying to contribute to this movement by using other means : reporting bug to Phabricator, suggesting a new feature to Phabricator,  compiling my local community statistics by using quarry, fighting vandalism by creating my own monitoring tools, and experimenting with Wikidata's linked data technology.
In short, i want to contribute to this movement by using my technical skills.
|-
|Dessalegn
|Yehuala
|Dessalegn Yehuala
|YES
|YES
|YES
|YES
|I have shared my statement of interest letter via the TDF mailing list.
|-
|Daniel
|Grunwell
|Grunny
|No (not applying as community rep)
|YES
|YES
|YES
|A representative from Fandom (not a community rep), as discussed in the TDF mailing list.
|}</text>
      <sha1>bunwdttozudig67f4zstglfinz8lbwe</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Extension registration/pl</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1510779</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402510</id>
      <parentid>5375687</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27278" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Extension registration''' is the mechanism that MediaWiki uses to load [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|extensions]] and [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You put configuration data in a file named &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; in the root directory of your extension or skin, and MediaWiki uses this to register extensions and skins.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Migration for site administrators ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Before MediaWiki 1.25, configuration for extensions and skins was done in a PHP file using the extension's or skin's name, for example &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This must be done before you load any extensions or skins from non-standard directory locations:&lt;/span&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you keep your extensions in a location different from &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}}'', to specify the directory in which to find the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Looks in $wgExtensionDirectory for /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your skins are not in &lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt;, you need to override the poorly named {{wg|StyleDirectory}}, ''or use the second parameter of &lt;code&gt;wfLoadSkin()&lt;/code&gt;'', to specify the directory in which to find the skin.&lt;/span&gt;
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Looks in $wgStyleDirectory for both /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json and /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Migration for extension developers ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since MW 1.30, namespace IDs defined in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; can be overwritten locally, by defining the respective constant in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; before loading the extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Consider for instance the following namespace declaration in a &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would per default cause the constant NS_FOO to be defined to have the value 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, this can be overwritten by defining the respective constant in LocalSettings.php:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would cause the &quot;Foo&quot; namespace to be registered with the ID 6688 instead of 1212.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When overriding namespace IDs, don't forget that all talk namespaces must have odd IDs, and the ID of the talk namespace must always be the subject namespace's ID plus one.&lt;/span&gt;

:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also the [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ extension registration wall of sadness (now superpowers)].&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The script &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; helps you migrating from PHP entry points to a JSON metadata file.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension supports older versions of MediaWiki, you should keep your PHP entry point &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt; until you drop support for those older versions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Sample command lines:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to uninstall your extension from &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; if you receive errors that constants or functions cannot be redefined.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should replace your PHP entry point file (FooBar.php) with something like the following happens to not break wikis during the upgrade process.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Or skins
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Keep i18n globals so mergeMessageFileList.php doesn't break
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Retaining documentation ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PHP entry points usually have some documentation of configuration settings that is useful and shouldn't be lost.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately JSON doesn't support comments. It is recommended that you transfer configuration documentation to a &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; file in the extension's repository.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You should also document configuration on-wiki in your Extension:''MyExtension'' page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is possible to include some documentation directly in the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration ignores any key in &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; starting with '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' in the top-level structure, so you can put comments in those parts of the JSON file. For example:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Version 1 of the &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; format also allowed &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; in &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; section, but this is no longer recommended or supported in version 2. &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; field of the config variable should be used instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This should only be used for brief notes and comments.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Features ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are loading a large number of extensions, extension registration will provide a performance boost as long as you have [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (or APCu) installed. Extensions that are loaded together with &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (with plural -s) will be cached together.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Attributes ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A recurring problem is how to &quot;register&quot; something with another extension.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Usually this meant that you had to load one extension before another.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, VisualEditor has a &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt; which allows extensions to add their modules.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, in VisualEditor's entry point it has:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means that if any extension appends to the array before VisualEditor is loaded, VE will wipe out its entry in this array.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some extensions depended upon a specific load order, others hacked around this with {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration solves this problem with &quot;attributes&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In the Math extension, its &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; would have something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the attributes need to be defined in the separate section &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt; node needs to be an object with the extension name as key and an object of attribute/value pairs as the value. Be aware that the key in the subobject must not contain the extension name!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
When VisualEditor wants to access this attribute it uses:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Requirements (dependencies) ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension registration has a &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; section, which acts similar to [[Composer]]'s &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; section.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It allows an extension developer to specify several requirements for the extension, such as a specific MediaWiki version (or greater/less than) or another extension/skin.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to add a dependency on a MediaWiki version that is greater than 1.26.0, you can add the following code to &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The key of the &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; object is the name of the dependency (prior to MediaWiki 1.29.0 only &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt; was supported), the value is a valid version constraint (the format has to match the one [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md used by composer]).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In MediaWiki 1.29.0 and above you can also add dependencies on skins and other extensions like so:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* The extensions and skins specified here must also use the extension registrations system described on this page for this to work.
* The string added to specify the extension or skin must be identical to the string specified in the &quot;name&quot; field of the respective &quot;extension.json&quot; or &quot;skin.json&quot; file.
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For extensions using Wikimedia [[Special:MyLanguage/Continuous integration|continuous integration]], dependencies also need to be added to {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}&lt;/span&gt;
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Check if an extension is loaded without actually requiring it ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Many extensions may provide features that work only if another extension is loaded too, without really needing this feature for the core extension function to work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;As an example: If extension B is loaded, extension A can provide a real WYSIWYG editor, otherwise it will use a simple textarea.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extension A can profit from extension B (if it is loaded), but doesn't require it to be loaded to work properly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For this, you generally check, if the extension is loaded, rather than adding it as a ''hard'' dependency.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To implement a standardized way of checking, if an extension is loaded or not (without the need of extra work in an extension that is a soft-dependency in another one), extension registration can be used. It implements an &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns a simple boolean, if the extension is loaded or not (the extension needs to be loaded with extension registration for this to work). Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since [[MediaWiki 1.32]] it's also possible to check if an extension is loaded and satisfies a given composer version constraint:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you would like to check if a specific version of an extension is loaded in earlier versions of MediaWiki, information like that can be extracted with the &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt; method, which returns credit information for all loaded extensions. Example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Alternatively, if the extension B defines a special constant meant for this purpose during loading, it is possible to check, if it is defined:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A more brittle way, that should be avoided is to check if a specific class of extension B exists or not, e.g. using this code:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This might break if the extension exists in the file system but is not loaded, e.g. if composer was used for autoloading.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the class was renamed or ceases to exist (e.g. because it is not package public) this will also break.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In general it is preferred to share code via composer components instead of extensions. If the classes of an extension only need to exist, but the extension does not need to be configured nor loaded, for what you want to do, that is a strong indicator that that code should be split off into a composer component you should depend on instead.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Configs (Your extension/skins settings) ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
By default, &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; assumes that your config settings start with a &quot;wg&quot; prefix.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If that's not the case, you can override the prefix by using a special key:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
That would use a prefix of &quot;eg&quot;, and set the global variable &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; to true.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Starting with manifest version 2, the configuration section of extension registration provides a lot more features and allows you to describe your configuration options with much more detail. Instead of having a single key -&gt; value store for your configuration options, you can also add the following information.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The general structure of the &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; changes slightly to the following, more object-oriented version:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Value ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the configuration moved to this place.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is the only required key for a configuration object.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Path ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The boolean value of the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; key identifies, if the value of the configuration option should be interpreted as a filesystem path, relative to the extension directory root.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g., if the value of the configuration is &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; and the &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; is true, the actual value will be &lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Description ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; key for a configuration option can hold a non-localized string, which can be used to explain the configuration option to other developers or the users (system administrators) of your extension.&lt;/span&gt;
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The value of the description key is usually not exposed to the frontend of the wiki, however, take a look to the outlook for more information how this feature could be used in the future!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There's also the possibility to add a message key of MediaWiki's internal localisation system as a description (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;), which, in the future, will be used to expose the description in the frontend of the MediaWiki installation.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== public / private ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This option is a boolean, which defaults to false, which means, that the configuration option and the value is marked as &quot;private&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This value is not used anywhere at the moment, take a look to the outlook to find out more about this option.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Outlook ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{tracked|T155155}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The mentioned changes above are also preparation steps for an improved configuration management in MediaWiki. The above changes allow us to, e.g., expose the configuration options of extensions in the MediaWiki UI. For this, the localised description message (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) and the indication, if the configuration option should be exposed or not (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) is needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Unit tests auto-discovery ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki allows any extension to [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|register phpunit tests]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Without extension registration, you would need to register a hook handler for the {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}} hook, which would look something like:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(as described on the manual page). However, this code looks the same for a lot of extensions, so you could call it unnecessary code duplication.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If your extension uses extension registration and your phpunit tests are located in the &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt; subdirectory of your extension, the phpunit wrapper of MediaWiki will autodiscover the unit tests with the help of extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Therefore, you don't need to register the hook anymore and you don't need to specify, that your unit tests are saved in the default directory.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Customizing registration ==
&lt;/div&gt;
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Also composer.json ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If an extension or skin has library dependencies, it may have a &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; file as well, see {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Use the &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt; field to make MediaWiki use Composer's autoloading when appropriate.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some metadata fields overlap between &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (discussed in {{task|T89456}}), including :
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Code stewardship ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

== Zobacz też ==
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Report bugs against the [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]] project.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Old versions of [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (prior to May 2015) and {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} describe the old approach of declaring extension information in PHP code and variables
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Known limitations&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Overview of architecture&lt;/span&gt;}}
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; is the schema for &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (and skin.json).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] about implementing extension registration&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[toollabs:extreg-wos|Extension registration wall of superpowers!]] — summary of which extensions are still to be converted.&lt;/span&gt;
* {{task|T98668}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Tracking ticket for converting all extensions and skins on Git to use extension registration.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== References ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>t44i04edtewgnwxwzu9qreleol4wbxp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Pywikibot/PAWS/pl</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1511581</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402203</id>
      <parentid>5371508</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:54:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="21714" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Ptag|PAWS}}
{{Pywikibot}}
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Wikitech:PAWS]] for more details.&lt;/span&gt;''
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This document provides a quick interactive overview of '''{{ll|Manual:Pywikibot|Pywikibot}}''' using a ''notebook'' hosted on the [[wikitech:Help:Cloud Services Introduction|Wikimedia Cloud Services]] environment using [[Wikitech:PAWS|'''PAWS''' ('''PAWS: A Web Shell''')]].&lt;/span&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PAWS Terminal supports copy and paste in [[w:Chromium (web browser)#Browsers based on Chromium|Chromium-based browsers]] only.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Google Chrome, Opera, Safari and new Microsoft Edge are fine.)&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a different browser, you can try with context menu only (right-click) or you will need to manually type the commands mentioned in this walk-through.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can also create a bash file with in content the command and call in terminal with &lt;code&gt;bash file.sh&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All notebooks and terminals in PAWS are subject to termination without notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You are encouraged to run your task on other places (such as [[wikitech:Help:Toolforge|Toolforge]]) if your task lasts for more than hours.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Create a Wikimedia account ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To follow this walk-through, you only need a Wikipedia/Wikimedia account. Use [[Special:CreateAccount]] to create one.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once you have created an account, please visit https://test.wikipedia.org/ and check that your username appears in the top right corner &lt;small&gt;(this works around {{task|T120327}})&lt;/small&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are a new user on Wikimedia log in with your account on Meta-Wiki, Wikipedia, Wikidata, and Commons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;And in each of them read and delete all pending messages you have (on the top).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Sign into a notebook ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To start a hosted notebook, go to https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;Sign in with MediaWiki&quot;, and then click &quot;Allow&quot; when asked to approve &quot;Use OAuth for Authentication&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first time you access PAWS, you need to create a server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the green &quot;Start my Server&quot; button.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's normal to wait a few minutes for the new server to start up.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once that is completed, you will be redirected to a URL like &lt;nowiki&gt;https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/user/&lt;username&gt;/lab&lt;/nowiki&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Start a terminal ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To start a new interactive terminal,
# Go to your [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home]
&lt;/div&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;click: File &gt; New &gt; Terminal&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will open a new window with a Linux '$' prompt.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This terminal is not an emulator.  It is a real [[w:Bash (Unix shell)|bash shell]], as part of a real Linux installation sitting on a [[w:Docker (software)|Docker container]], so you can use any bash command, and use any commands available on Linux that have been installed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To see some of the commands available, use &lt;code&gt;ls /bin/&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ ls /bin/
bash         cat            domainname  journalctl  mkdir          pwd         stty                            tar           zcmp
unzip2       chacl          echo        kill        mknod          rbash       su                              tempfile      zdiff
../..
$ ls /usr/bin/
2to3-3.4                 dvipdf                     lcf                         printf               systemd-path                         
X11                      dwp                        ld                          prlimit              systemd-run
../..
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To see them all, press TAB twice.


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Login to the wiki ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will establish your account on the server and allow you to log in from the command line.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The following command should confirm that you can log into the testwiki. It uses OAuth, so there is no need to enter a password.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py login
Logging in to wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;
Logged in on wikipedia:test as &lt;username&gt;.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can connect pywikibot to a different wiki by creating a file named ''user-config.py'' in your [[w:Home_directory|&lt;code&gt;$HOME&lt;/code&gt; directory]] (&lt;code&gt;/home/paws&lt;/code&gt;) and adding ''mylang'' and ''family'' variables:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
mylang = 'test'
family = 'wikipedia'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Create a page ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To create a page, enter the following command in the terminal, replacing '&amp;lt;username&gt;' with your username, and pressing 'Y' when prompted to accept your changes:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -up -talk -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -text:&quot;Hello. ~~~~&quot;
Loading User talk:&lt;username&gt;...

&gt;&gt;&gt; User talk:&lt;username&gt; &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ Hello. ~~~~

Do you want to accept these changes? ([Y]es, [N]o, [a]ll, open in [b]rowser): Y
Page [[User talk:&lt;username&gt;]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You have edited the wiki.  View your changes by opening &lt;nowiki&gt;https://test.wikipedia.org/wiki/User_talk:&lt;username&gt;&lt;/nowiki&gt; in your web browser.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can read more about each of these command line scripts with the '-help' command line option.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py add_text -help
...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Fetch a page ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Fetching many pages is achieved with the &quot;listpages&quot; command.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To get the contents of the page you created in the previous section, enter the following command:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -page:&quot;User talk:&lt;username&gt;&quot; -save
   1 &lt;username&gt;
Saving User talk:&lt;username&gt; to /home/paws/User_talk_&lt;username&gt;
1 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now if you run &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot; inline&gt;$ ls&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt; the saved page should be present.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== A real script example ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When a website used on Wikipedia changes its URL, the links on Wikipedia become outdated, and possible also [[w:WP:Dead links|dead links]] if the website doesn't redirect from the old URLs to the new URLs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, Encyclopedia Britannica (EB) has changed their links, such as moving pages from &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media/&lt;/nowiki&gt; to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/topic/[topic name]/images-videos/*&lt;/nowiki&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can find the list of usages of the old URL on English Wikipedia at [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/media]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Updating all those links manually will be very time consuming.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Thankfully EB has maintained redirects from their old URLs to the new URLs, so this does not need to be fixed immediately.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For a simpler example, English Wikipedia currently contains links to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt; instead of &lt;nowiki&gt;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;; i.e. a 'www.' subdomain is missing in the URL.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There are currently 14 cases on English Wikipedia: [[:w:Special:LinkSearch/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Wikipedia in other language also have this problem.  e.g. there is one case on German Wikipedia: [[:w:de:Spezial:Weblinksuche/http://britannica.com/EBchecked/]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In order to fix those links, we can use Pywikibot {{ll|Manual:Pywikibot/replace.py|replace.py}} script.  In this demo we will use the '-simulate' argument to avoid writing to the wiki, as there are strict rules about [[w:WP:Bots|automated editing]] of English Wikipedia.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
First, let's list all of the pages which link to &lt;nowiki&gt;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&lt;/nowiki&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now we check those pages actually have the literal URL in the page; i.e. they are not using a template.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py listpages -lang:en -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot;
   1 Bhatner fort
   2 Mohammad Ishaq Khan
   3 Fringe theories/Noticeboard/Archive 7
   4 El Riego phase
   5 Catalonia/Archive 4
   6 Stephen I of Hungary
   7 Stephen I of Hungary/Archive 1
   8 Väinö Tanner
   9 Tokaji
  10 Transylvania/Archive5
  11 Hungarians in Romania
  12 Transylvania
  13 Uttarakhand
  14 Françoise Giroud
14 page(s) found
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Now use replace to add the missing &quot;www.&quot;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;console&quot;&gt;
$ pwb.py replace -lang:en -simulate -weblink:&quot;britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; -grep:&quot;britannica.com\/EBchecked&quot; &quot;http://britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot; &quot;http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/&quot;
The summary message for the command line replacements will be something like: Bot: Automated text replacement  (-http://britannica.com/EBchecked/ +http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/)
Press Enter to use this automatic message, or enter a description of the
changes your bot will make: 
Logging in to wikipedia:en as &lt;username&gt;
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.
Retrieving 14 pages from wikipedia:en.


&gt;&gt;&gt; Stephen I of Hungary &lt;&lt;&lt;
@@ -47 +47 @@
- Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}
+ Stephen's birth date is uncertain because it was not recorded in contemporaneous documents.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Hungarian and Polish chronicles written centuries later give three different years: 967, 969 and 975.{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} The unanimous testimony of his three late 11th-century or early 12th-century [[hagiographies]] and other Hungarian sources, which state that Stephen was &quot;still an adolescent&quot; in 997,&lt;ref&gt;''Hartvic, Life of King Stephen of Hungary'' (ch. 5), p. 381.&lt;/ref&gt; substantiate the reliability of the later year (975).{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}} Stephen's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita minor)|Lesser Legend]]'' adds that he was born in [[Esztergom]],{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}}{{sfn|Kristó|2001|p=15}}&lt;ref name=Britannica&gt;{{cite encyclopedia|title=Stephen I|url=http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/565415/Stephen-I|encyclopedia=[[Encyclopædia Britannica]]|publisher=Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.|year=2008|accessdate=2008-07-29}}&lt;/ref&gt; which implies that he was born after 972 because his father, [[Géza, Grand Prince of the Hungarians]], chose Esztergom as royal residence around that year.{{sfn|Györffy|1994|p=64}} Géza promoted the spread of Christianity among his subjects by force, but never ceased worshipping pagan gods.{{sfn|Kontler|1999|p=51}}{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}} Both his son's ''[[Life of Saint Stephen, King of Hungary (Vita maior)|Greater Legend]]'' and the nearly contemporaneous [[Thietmar of Merseburg]] described Géza as a cruel monarch, suggesting that he was a despot who mercilessly consolidated his authority over the rebellious Hungarian lords.{{sfn|Berend|Laszlovszky|Szakács|2007|p=331}}{{sfn|Bakay|1999|p=547}}

Do you want to accept these changes? ([y]es, [N]o, [e]dit, open in [b]rowser, [a]ll, [q]uit): N

...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In PAWS, and any terminal that supports color, the diff of changes will show the added &quot;www.&quot; in green text color, making it easier to find the proposed changes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Inside Pywikibot ==
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Don't write passwords in files of server, the files are public!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Next we will use the PAWS Python session.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to your [https://hub.paws.wmcloud.org/hub/home PAWS home],
# click 'New' on the right hand side, and
# select 'Python 3'.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This will open a new window.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In the text box, enter the following and in the Cell menu select 'Run' (or pressing shift+enter to run).
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A new text box will appear below.  Run the following to create an APISite object connected to https://test.wikipedia.org/:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Describe &quot;site&quot; by entering it into the new text box and selecting &quot;Run&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
site
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It should show
&lt;/div&gt;

  Out[3]: APISite(&quot;test&quot;, &quot;wikipedia&quot;)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Create a page object:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Check it exists by running:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.exists()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It should output
&lt;/div&gt;

  VERBOSE:pywiki:Found 1 wikipedia:test processes running, including this one.
  Out[5]: True

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Show the text on the page:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Change the page text in the object:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.text = 'Hello world'
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Save the page to the wiki:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The response should be:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;text&quot;&gt;
Page [[Test]] saved
INFO:pywiki:Page [[Test]] saved
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The interactive Python 3 notebook allows many lines to be run together.  The above could be put into one text box and Run
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
import pywikibot

site = pywikibot.Site('test', 'wikipedia')
page = pywikibot.Page(site, 'test')

page.text = 'Hello world!'
page.save()
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The log of your interactive Python session can be saved or downloaded for future reference.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Accessing online documentation in PAWS ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Pywikibot documentation may be found at https://doc.wikimedia.org/pywikibot/.  It is primarily sourced from [[w:docstring|docstrings]], which can be loaded in the interactive Python 3 notebook using the Python built-in function [https://docs.python.org/3/library/functions.html#help help()].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to look at the arguments for the save method above, run either:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
or
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;python&quot;&gt;
help(pywikibot.Page.save)
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Editing Pywikibot scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The Pywikibot library and scripts are located in /srv/paws, and are read-only.  The installed Pywikibot library cannot be modified in PAWS.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Scripts may be modified after copying them into your PAWS home.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to run a modified &quot;checkimages.py&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;cp /srv/paws/pwb/scripts/checkimages.py ~&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In a browser, go to your [https://paws.wmcloud.org/ PAWS home] and click on the file &lt;code&gt;checkimages.py&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the browser, you can edit the file.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit the code -- for instance, just after the &lt;code&gt;start = time.time()&lt;/code&gt; code on line 1775, add a new line 1776 that will print out your name: &lt;code&gt;print(&quot;MYNAME's version.&quot;)&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the editing interface, use the File menu and click Save to save your modifications.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the terminal, enter &lt;code&gt;pwb.py ~/checkimages.py -simulate -limit:10&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt; (If no '-limit:x' defined, the program would run until all images checked, it may take long time.)

== Zobacz też ==
* [[wikitech:PAWS/PAWS and Pywikibot]]
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:SRodlund_(WMF)/Using-Pywikibot-with-Paws.ipynb Using Pywikibot with PAWS notebook based tutorial] - A tutorial that helps users get started with using Pywikibot and PAWS
* [https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/PAWS/PAWS_examples_and_recipes#Pywikibot_(Uses_MediaWiki_API) Example notebooks using Pywikibot] - A list of notebooks hosted on PAWS that use Pywikibot
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [https://public.paws.wmcloud.org/User:Jtmorgan/ds4ux/paws-cheatsheet.ipynb PAWS cheatsheet] by one user (e.g. about API and database access)
&lt;/div&gt;
* [https://github.com/toolforge/paws Source code on GitHub]

{{Bothelp}}

[[Category:Pywikibot{{#translation:}}|PAWS]]
[[Category:Tools{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>12mat46t5vqy3vfwx3u60hahxdist7k</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Extension registration/cs</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1516187</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402505</id>
      <parentid>5386487</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22223" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
'''Registrace rozšíření''' je mechanismus, který používá MediaWiki pro načítání [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|rozšíření]] a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|vzhledů]].
Konfigurační data vložíte do souboru s názvem &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; nebo &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; do kořenového adresáře vašeho rozšíření nebo vzhledu a MediaWiki je použije k registraci rozšíření a vzhledů.

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
== Migrace pro správce webu ==

Před MediaWiki 1.25 byla konfigurace pro rozšíření a vzhledy prováděna v souboru PHP pomocí názvu přípony nebo vzhledu, například &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; nebo &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To lze převést na:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
Toto je nutné provést před načtením jakýchkoli rozšíření nebo vzhledů z nestandardních umístění adresáře:

: Pokud svá rozšíření uchováváte na jiném místě než &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;, musíte přepsat {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} nebo použít druhý parametr {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} k určení adresáře, ve kterém chcete rozšíření najít.
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Hledá $wgExtensionDirectory za /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: Pokud vaše vzhledy nejsou v &lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt;, musíte přepsat špatně pojmenovaný {{wg|StyleDirectory}}, ''nebo použít druhý parametr &lt;code&gt;wfLoadSkin()&lt;/code&gt;'', abyste určili adresář, ve kterém se má vzhled najít.
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Vyhledá v $wgStyleDirectory za oba /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json a /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Migrace pro vývojáře rozšíření ==
Od MW 1.30 mohou být ID jmenného prostoru definovaná lokálně v &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; před načtením rozšíření přepsána definováním příslušné konstanty v &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;.
Zvažte například následující deklaraci jmenného prostoru v souboru &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To by ve výchozím nastavení způsobilo, že konstanta NS_FOO bude definována na hodnotu 1212.
Toto však lze přepsat definováním příslušné konstanty v LocalSettings.php:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To by způsobilo, že jmenný prostor &quot;Foo&quot; bude registrován s ID 6688 namísto 1212.
Při přepisování ID jmenného prostoru nezapomeňte, že všechny jmenné prostory talk musí mít lichá ID a ID jmenného prostoru talk musí být vždy ID jmenného prostoru subjektu plus jedna.

:''Viz také [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ registrace na stránce rozšíření (nyní superschopnosti)].''

Skript &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; vám pomůže s migrací ze vstupních bodů PHP do souboru metadat JSON.
Pokud vaše rozšíření podporuje starší verze MediaWiki, měli byste si ponechat vstupní bod PHP &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt;, dokud neukončíte podporu pro tyto starší verze.

Ukázky příkazových řádků:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Možná budete muset odinstalovat své rozšíření z &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, pokud se zobrazí chyby, že konstanty nebo funkce nelze předefinovat.
Soubor vstupního bodu PHP (FooBar.php) byste měli nahradit něčím podobným, jako je následující, aby nedošlo k přerušení wiki během procesu upgradu.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Udržujte i18n globals, aby se mergeMessageFileList.php nezměnil
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Nebo vzhledů

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Udržujte i18n globals, aby se mergeMessageFileList.php nezměnil
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Uchovávání dokumentace ===
Vstupní body PHP mají obvykle nějakou dokumentaci konfiguračních nastavení, která je užitečná a neměla by se ztratit.
Bohužel JSON nepodporuje komentáře. Doporučuje se přenést konfigurační dokumentaci do souboru &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; v úložišti rozšíření.
Konfiguraci byste také měli zdokumentovat na wiki na stránce Rozšíření:''MyExtension''.
Část dokumentace je také možné zahrnout přímo do souboru &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;.
Registrace rozšíření ignoruje jakýkoli klíč v &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; začínající znakem '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' ve struktuře nejvyšší úrovně, takže do těchto částí souboru JSON můžete vkládat komentáře. Například:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Verze 1 formátu &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; také umožňovala &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; v sekci &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt;, ale to již není doporučeno ani podporováno ve verzi 2. Místo toho by mělo být použito pole &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; konfigurační proměnné.

Toto by mělo být použito pouze pro krátké poznámky a komentáře.

== Funkce ==

Pokud načítáte velký počet rozšíření, registrace rozšíření poskytne zvýšení výkonu, pokud máte nainstalováno [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (nebo APCu). Rozšíření načtená společně s &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (s množným číslem -s) budou uložena do mezipaměti společně.

=== Atributy ===
Opakujícím se problémem je, jak něco &quot;zaregistrovat&quot; s jinou příponou.
Obvykle to znamenalo, že jste museli načíst jedno rozšíření před druhým.
VisualEditor má například &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt;, který umožňuje rozšířením přidávat své moduly.
Ve vstupním bodě VisualEditoru však má:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To znamená, že pokud se nějaké rozšíření připojí k poli před načtením VisualEditoru, VE vymaže svůj záznam v tomto poli.
Některá rozšíření závisela na konkrétním pořadí načítání, jiná to obcházela pomocí {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}.
Registrace rozšíření řeší tento problém pomocí &quot;atributů&quot;.
V rozšíření Math by jeho &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; mělo něco jako:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
Počínaje verzí 2 musí být atributy definovány v samostatné sekci &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;code&gt;Attributes&lt;/code&gt; musí být objekt s názvem rozšíření jako klíčem a objektem párů atribut/hodnota jako hodnotou. Pamatujte, že klíč v podobjektu nesmí obsahovat název rozšíření!

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Když chce VisualEditor získat přístup k tomuto atributu, použije:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Požadavky (závislosti) ===
Registrace rozšíření má sekci &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; (vyžaduje), která funguje podobně jako sekce &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; [[Composer]]u.
Umožňuje vývojáři rozšíření specifikovat několik požadavků na rozšíření, jako je konkrétní verze MediaWiki (nebo vyšší/menší než) nebo jiné rozšíření/vzhled.
Chcete-li například přidat závislost na verzi MediaWiki, která je větší než 1.26.0, můžete do &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; přidat následující kód: &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Klíč objektu &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; je název závislosti (před MediaWiki 1.29.0 byla podporována pouze &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt;), hodnota je platné omezení verze (formát je [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md podle volby autora]).

V MediaWiki 1.29.0 a vyšší můžete také přidat závislosti na vzhledech a dalších rozšířeních, jako jsou:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Rozšíření a vzhledy uvedené zde, aby fungovaly, musí také používat systém registrace rozšíření popsaný na této stránce.
* Řetězec přidaný k určení přípony nebo vzhledu musí být shodný s řetězcem uvedeným v poli &quot;name&quot; příslušného souboru &quot;extension.json&quot; nebo &quot;skin.json&quot;.
* &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Pro rozšíření využívající [[continuous integration|kontinuální integrace]] Wikimedie, je také třeba přidat závislosti do {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}&lt;/span&gt;
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Zkontrolujte, zda je rozšíření načteno, aniž by bylo ve skutečnosti vyžadováno ===
Mnoho rozšíření může poskytovat funkce, které fungují pouze v případě, že je načteno i jiné rozšíření, aniž by tuto funkci skutečně potřebovali pro fungování základní funkce rozšíření.
Jako příklad: Pokud je načteno rozšíření B, může rozšíření A poskytovat skutečný WYSIWYG editor, jinak bude používat jednoduchou textovou oblast.
Rozšíření A může těžit z rozšíření B (pokud je načteno), ale ke správnému fungování nevyžaduje, aby bylo načteno.
Za tímto účelem obvykle zkontrolujete, zda je rozšíření načteno, spíše než jej přidáte jako ''tvrdou'' závislost.

Pro implementaci standardizovaného způsobu kontroly, zda je rozšíření načteno nebo ne (bez nutnosti práce navíc v rozšíření, která je v jiném rozšíření měkkou závislostí), lze použít registraci rozšíření. Implementuje metodu &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt;, která vrací jednoduchý boolean, pokud je rozšíření načteno nebo ne (aby to fungovalo, musí být rozšíření načteno s registrací rozšíření). Příklad:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
Od [[MediaWiki 1.32]] je také možné zkontrolovat, zda je rozšíření načteno a zda splňuje dané omezení verze:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Pokud byste chtěli zkontrolovat, zda je v dřívějších verzích MediaWiki načtena konkrétní verze rozšíření, lze podobné informace extrahovat pomocí metody &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt;, která vrací informace o kreditu pro všechna načtená rozšíření. Příklad:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Alternativně, pokud rozšíření B definuje speciální konstantu určenou pro tento účel během načítání, je možné zkontrolovat, zda je definována:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Křehčím způsobem, kterému je třeba se vyhnout, je zkontrolovat, zda specifická třída rozšíření B existuje nebo ne, např. pomocí tohoto kódu:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To může přestat fungovat, pokud přípona existuje v systému souborů, ale není načtena, např. pokud byl pro automatické načítání použit composer.
Pokud byla třída přejmenována nebo přestane existovat (např. protože není balíček public), dojde také k přerušení.

Obecně je upřednostňováno sdílení kódu prostřednictvím komponent pro composer namísto rozšíření. Pokud třídy rozšíření potřebují pouze existovat, ale rozšíření nemusí být konfigurováno ani načteno, pro to, co chcete dělat, je to silný indikátor toho, že by tento kód měl být rozdělen na komponentu composer, na kterou byste se měli spolehnout. namísto.

=== Configs (Vaše nastavení rozšíření/vzhledů) ===
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
Ve výchozím nastavení &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; předpokládá, že vaše konfigurační nastavení začíná předponou &quot;wg&quot;.

Pokud tomu tak není, můžete předponu přepsat pomocí speciálního klíče:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To by použilo předponu &quot;eg&quot; a nastavilo globální proměnnou &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; na hodnotu true.

Počínaje zveřejněním verze 2 poskytuje konfigurační sekce registrace rozšíření mnohem více funkcí a umožňuje vám popsat možnosti konfigurace mnohem podrobněji. Namísto jediného klíče -&gt; úložiště hodnot pro možnosti konfigurace můžete také přidat následující informace.

Obecná struktura &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; se mírně mění na následující, více objektově orientovanou verzi:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== Hodnota ====
Hodnota konfigurace se přesunula na toto místo.
Toto je jediný požadovaný klíč pro konfigurační objekt.

==== Cesta ====
Booleovská hodnota klíče &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; identifikuje, zda má být hodnota konfigurační volby interpretována jako cesta souborového systému vzhledem ke kořenu adresáře rozšíření.
Pokud je například hodnota konfigurace &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; je pravdivá, skutečná hodnota bude &lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;.

==== Popis ====
Klíč &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; pro možnost konfigurace může obsahovat nelokalizovaný řetězec, který lze použít k vysvětlení možnosti konfigurace dalším vývojářům nebo uživatelům (správcům systému) vašeho rozšíření.
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
Hodnota klíče popisu obvykle není vystavena frontendu wiki, ale podívejte se do přehledu, kde najdete další informace, jak by se tato funkce mohla v budoucnu používat!

Existuje také možnost přidat klíč zprávy interního lokalizačního systému MediaWiki jako popis (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;), který bude v budoucnu použit k odhalení popisu v rozhraní instalace MediaWiki.

==== veřejné / soukromé ====
Tato volba je booleovská, jejíž výchozí hodnota je false, což znamená, že konfigurační volba a hodnota jsou označeny jako &quot;private&quot;.
Tato hodnota se momentálně nikde nepoužívá, podívejte se do přehledu, kde se o této možnosti dozvíte více.

==== Výhled ====
{{tracked|T155155}}
Výše uvedené změny jsou také přípravnými kroky pro vylepšenou správu konfigurace v MediaWiki. Výše uvedené změny nám umožňují např. odhalit možnosti konfigurace rozšíření v uživatelském rozhraní MediaWiki. K tomu je zapotřebí zpráva s lokalizovaným popisem (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) a indikace, zda má být konfigurační volba (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) veřejná nebo ne.

=== Automatické zjišťování testů jednotek ===
MediaWiki umožňuje libovolné rozšíření pro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|registraci testů phpunit]].
Bez registrace rozšíření byste museli zaregistrovat obslužný program pro háček {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}}, který by vypadal asi takto:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

(jak je popsáno v příručce). Tento kód však vypadá stejně pro mnoho rozšíření, takže byste to mohli nazvat zbytečnou duplikací kódu.
Pokud vaše rozšíření používá registraci rozšíření a vaše testy phpunit jsou umístěny v podadresáři &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt; vašeho rozšíření, wraper phpunit MediaWiki automaticky objeví testy jednotek pomocí registrace rozšíření.
Proto již nemusíte háček registrovat a nemusíte specifikovat, že vaše testy jednotek jsou uloženy ve výchozím adresáři.

== Přizpůsobení registrace ==
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

== Také composer.json ==

Pokud má rozšíření nebo vzhled knihovny závislosti, může je mít také soubor &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt;, viz {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Použijte pole &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt;, aby MediaWiki používala automatické načítání Composer, když je to vhodné.

Některá pole metadat se překrývají mezi &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (diskutované v {{task|T89456}}), včetně:
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;

== Správce kódu ==
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

== Související stránky ==
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
* Hlášení chyb v projektu [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]].
* Staré verze [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (před květnem 2015) a {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} popisují starý přístup deklarování informací o rozšíření v kódu PHP a proměnných
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=Známá omezení}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=Přehled architektury}}
* &lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; je schéma pro &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (a skin.json).
* [[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] o implementaci registrace rozšíření
* [[toollabs:extreg-wos|Zeď superschopností pro registraci rozšíření!]] — přehled rozšíření, která je ještě třeba převést.
* {{task|T98668}} — Sledovací karta pro převod všech rozšíření a vzhledů na Gitu pro použití registrace rozšíření.

== Odkazy ==
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>mc5915wyf2hvk5qu5599z8z5s2yw6tt</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402518</id>
      <parentid>5402505</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22202" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.25|comment=and after|gerrit change=166705}}
'''Registrace rozšíření''' je mechanismus, který používá MediaWiki pro načítání [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|rozšíření]] a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|vzhledů]].
Konfigurační data vložíte do souboru s názvem &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; nebo &lt;code&gt;skin.json&lt;/code&gt; do kořenového adresáře vašeho rozšíření nebo vzhledu a MediaWiki je použije k registraci rozšíření a vzhledů.

{{anchor|Migration for extension developers}}
== Migrace pro správce webu ==

Před MediaWiki 1.25 byla konfigurace pro rozšíření a vzhledy prováděna v souboru PHP pomocí názvu přípony nebo vzhledu, například &lt;code&gt;MyExtension.php&lt;/code&gt; nebo &lt;code&gt;MySkin.php&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Hello/Hello.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/FooBar/FooBar.php&quot;;
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
require_once &quot;$IP/skins/Baz/Baz.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/BarFoo.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To lze převést na:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtensions( [ 'Hello', 'FooBar' ] );
$wgFooBarEnable = true;
wfLoadSkin( 'Baz' );
wfLoadExtension( 'BarFoo', '/tmp/extension/some/where/else/BarFoo/extension.json' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Custom locations ===
Toto je nutné provést před načtením jakýchkoli rozšíření nebo vzhledů z nestandardních umístění adresáře:

: Pokud svá rozšíření uchováváte na jiném místě než &lt;code&gt;$IP/extensions&lt;/code&gt;, musíte přepsat {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} nebo použít druhý parametr {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} k určení adresáře, ve kterém chcete rozšíření najít.
:: If one or more of your extensions are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadExtension()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those extensions.
::: ''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadExtensions()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|ExtensionDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgExtensionDirectory = '/some/path';
wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' ); // Hledá $wgExtensionDirectory za /some/path/FooBar/extension.json
wfLoadExtension( 'Hello', '/some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json' ); // Looks for /some/other/path/HelloV2/Hello.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

: Pokud vaše vzhledy nejsou v &lt;code&gt;$IP/skins&lt;/code&gt;, musíte přepsat špatně pojmenovaný {{wg|StyleDirectory}}, ''nebo použít druhý parametr &lt;code&gt;wfLoadSkin()&lt;/code&gt;'', abyste určili adresář, ve kterém se má vzhled najít.
:: If one or more of your skins are stored in additional locations, use the second parameter of {{phpi|wfLoadSkin()}} to specify the location of the &lt;code&gt;.json&lt;/code&gt; file for ''each'' of those skins.
:::''Note: {{phpi|wfLoadSkins()}} '''(plural)''' always uses {{wg|StyleDirectory}} and cannot be overridden.''

:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgStyleDirectory = '/my/skins';
wfLoadSkins( [ 'BarBaz', 'BazBar' ] ); // Vyhledá v $wgStyleDirectory za oba /my/skins/BarBaz/skin.json a /my/skins/BazBar/skin.json
wfLoadSkin( 'BamBam', '/yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json' ); // Looks for /yet/another/path/BamBam/skin.json
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Migrace pro vývojáře rozšíření ==
Od MW 1.30 mohou být ID jmenného prostoru definovaná lokálně v &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; před načtením rozšíření přepsána definováním příslušné konstanty v &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;.
Zvažte například následující deklaraci jmenného prostoru v souboru &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
	&quot;namespaces&quot;: [
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1212,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo&quot;
		},
		{
			&quot;id&quot;: 1213,
			&quot;constant&quot;: &quot;NS_FOO_TALK&quot;,
			&quot;name&quot;: &quot;Foo_Talk&quot;
		}
	]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To by ve výchozím nastavení způsobilo, že konstanta NS_FOO bude definována na hodnotu 1212.
Toto však lze přepsat definováním příslušné konstanty v LocalSettings.php:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
define( 'NS_FOO', 6688 );
define( 'NS_FOO_TALK', 6689 );
wfLoadExtension( &quot;Foo&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To by způsobilo, že jmenný prostor &quot;Foo&quot; bude registrován s ID 6688 namísto 1212.
Při přepisování ID jmenného prostoru nezapomeňte, že všechny jmenné prostory talk musí mít lichá ID a ID jmenného prostoru talk musí být vždy ID jmenného prostoru subjektu plus jedna.

:''Viz také [https://tools.wmflabs.org/extreg-wos/ registrace na stránce rozšíření (nyní superschopnosti)].''

Skript &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:convertExtensionToRegistration.php|maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php}}&lt;/code&gt; vám pomůže s migrací ze vstupních bodů PHP do souboru metadat JSON.
Pokud vaše rozšíření podporuje starší verze MediaWiki, měli byste si ponechat vstupní bod PHP &lt;code&gt;''FooBar/FooBar''.php&lt;/code&gt;, dokud neukončíte podporu pro tyto starší verze.

Ukázky příkazových řádků:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;shell-session&quot;&gt;
$ cd core
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php extensions/MassMessage/MassMessage.php
$ php maintenance/convertExtensionToRegistration.php skins/MonoBook/MonoBook.php --skin
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Možná budete muset odinstalovat své rozšíření z &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt;, pokud se zobrazí chyby, že konstanty nebo funkce nelze předefinovat.
Soubor vstupního bodu PHP (FooBar.php) byste měli nahradit něčím podobným, jako je následující, aby nedošlo k přerušení wiki během procesu upgradu.

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadExtension' ) ) {
	wfLoadExtension( 'FooBar' );
	// Udržujte i18n globals, aby se mergeMessageFileList.php nezměnil
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar extension. ' .
		'Please use wfLoadExtension() instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar extension requires MediaWiki 1.29+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Nebo vzhledů

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
&lt;?php
if ( function_exists( 'wfLoadSkin' ) ) {
	wfLoadSkin( 'FooBar' );
	// Udržujte i18n globals, aby se mergeMessageFileList.php nezměnil
	$wgMessagesDirs['FooBar'] = __DIR__ . '/i18n';
	$wgExtensionMessagesFiles['FooBarAlias'] = __DIR__ . '/FooBar.alias.php';
	wfWarn(
		'Deprecated PHP entry point used for the FooBar skin. Please use wfLoadSkin instead, ' .
		'see https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension_registration for more details.'
	);
	return;
} else {
	die( 'This version of the FooBar skin requires MediaWiki 1.25+' );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Uchovávání dokumentace ===
Vstupní body PHP mají obvykle nějakou dokumentaci konfiguračních nastavení, která je užitečná a neměla by se ztratit.
Bohužel JSON nepodporuje komentáře. Doporučuje se přenést konfigurační dokumentaci do souboru &lt;code&gt;README&lt;/code&gt; v úložišti rozšíření.
Konfiguraci byste také měli zdokumentovat na wiki na stránce Rozšíření:''MyExtension''.
Část dokumentace je také možné zahrnout přímo do souboru &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt;.
Registrace rozšíření ignoruje jakýkoli klíč v &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; začínající znakem '&lt;code&gt;@&lt;/code&gt;' ve struktuře nejvyšší úrovně, takže do těchto částí souboru JSON můžete vkládat komentáře. Například:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;@note&quot;: &quot;This file must be kept in sync with LocalisationUpdate.php&quot;,
	&quot;@name&quot;: ...
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Verze 1 formátu &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; také umožňovala &lt;code&gt;@note&lt;/code&gt; v sekci &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt;, ale to již není doporučeno ani podporováno ve verzi 2. Místo toho by mělo být použito pole &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; konfigurační proměnné.

Toto by mělo být použito pouze pro krátké poznámky a komentáře.

== Funkce ==

Pokud načítáte velký počet rozšíření, registrace rozšíření poskytne zvýšení výkonu, pokud máte nainstalováno [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Performance tuning|APC]] (nebo APCu). Rozšíření načtená společně s &lt;code&gt;wfLoadExtension'''s'''&lt;/code&gt; (s množným číslem -s) budou uložena do mezipaměti společně.

=== Atributy ===
Opakujícím se problémem je, jak něco &quot;zaregistrovat&quot; s jinou příponou.
Obvykle to znamenalo, že jste museli načíst jedno rozšíření před druhým.
VisualEditor má například &lt;code&gt;$wgVisualEditorPluginModules&lt;/code&gt;, který umožňuje rozšířením přidávat své moduly.
Ve vstupním bodě VisualEditoru však má:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgVisualEditorPluginModules = [];
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To znamená, že pokud se nějaké rozšíření připojí k poli před načtením VisualEditoru, VE vymaže svůj záznam v tomto poli.
Některá rozšíření závisela na konkrétním pořadí načítání, jiná to obcházela pomocí {{wg|ExtensionFunctions}}.
Registrace rozšíření řeší tento problém pomocí &quot;atributů&quot;.
V rozšíření Math by jeho &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; mělo něco jako:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;VisualEditorPluginModules&quot;: [
		&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
	]
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
Počínaje verzí 2 musí být atributy definovány v samostatné sekci &lt;code&gt;attributes&lt;/code&gt;.

&lt;code&gt;Attributes&lt;/code&gt; musí být objekt s názvem rozšíření jako klíčem a objektem párů atribut/hodnota jako hodnotou. Pamatujte, že klíč v podobjektu nesmí obsahovat název rozšíření!

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;attributes&quot;: {
		&quot;VisualEditor&quot;: {
			&quot;PluginModules&quot;: [
				&quot;ext.math.visualEditor&quot;
			]
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Když chce VisualEditor získat přístup k tomuto atributu, použije:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAttribute( 'VisualEditorPluginModules' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Požadavky (závislosti) ===
Registrace rozšíření má sekci &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; (vyžaduje), která funguje podobně jako sekce &lt;code&gt;require&lt;/code&gt; [[Composer]]u.
Umožňuje vývojáři rozšíření specifikovat několik požadavků na rozšíření, jako je konkrétní verze MediaWiki (nebo vyšší/menší než) nebo jiné rozšíření/vzhled.
Chcete-li například přidat závislost na verzi MediaWiki, která je větší než 1.26.0, můžete do &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; přidat následující kód: &lt;ref&gt;https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki/blob/78091899db2315916502421fdd2972f1d73237b3/docs/extension.schema.json#L273-L282&lt;/ref&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.26.0&quot;
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Klíč objektu &lt;code&gt;requires&lt;/code&gt; je název závislosti (před MediaWiki 1.29.0 byla podporována pouze &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki&lt;/code&gt;), hodnota je platné omezení verze (formát je [https://getcomposer.org/doc/articles/versions.md podle volby autora]).

V MediaWiki 1.29.0 a vyšší můžete také přidat závislosti na vzhledech a dalších rozšířeních, jako jsou:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.29.0&quot;,
		&quot;extensions&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleExtension&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		},
		&quot;skins&quot;: {
			&quot;ExampleSkin&quot;: &quot;*&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Rozšíření a vzhledy uvedené zde, aby fungovaly, musí také používat systém registrace rozšíření popsaný na této stránce.
* Řetězec přidaný k určení přípony nebo vzhledu musí být shodný s řetězcem uvedeným v poli &quot;name&quot; příslušného souboru &quot;extension.json&quot; nebo &quot;skin.json&quot;.
* Pro rozšíření využívající [[Special:MyLanguage/Continuous integration|kontinuální integrace]] Wikimedie, je také třeba přidat závislosti do {{git file|project=integration/config |file=zuul/parameter_functions.py}}
}}

In MediaWiki 1.33.0(?!??) and above you can also add dependencies on PHP like so:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;requires&quot;: {
		&quot;MediaWiki&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 1.33.0&quot;,
		&quot;platform&quot;: {
			&quot;php&quot;: &quot;&gt;= 7.0.3&quot;
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== Zkontrolujte, zda je rozšíření načteno, aniž by bylo ve skutečnosti vyžadováno ===
Mnoho rozšíření může poskytovat funkce, které fungují pouze v případě, že je načteno i jiné rozšíření, aniž by tuto funkci skutečně potřebovali pro fungování základní funkce rozšíření.
Jako příklad: Pokud je načteno rozšíření B, může rozšíření A poskytovat skutečný WYSIWYG editor, jinak bude používat jednoduchou textovou oblast.
Rozšíření A může těžit z rozšíření B (pokud je načteno), ale ke správnému fungování nevyžaduje, aby bylo načteno.
Za tímto účelem obvykle zkontrolujete, zda je rozšíření načteno, spíše než jej přidáte jako ''tvrdou'' závislost.

Pro implementaci standardizovaného způsobu kontroly, zda je rozšíření načteno nebo ne (bez nutnosti práce navíc v rozšíření, která je v jiném rozšíření měkkou závislostí), lze použít registraci rozšíření. Implementuje metodu &lt;code&gt;isLoaded&lt;/code&gt;, která vrací jednoduchý boolean, pokud je rozšíření načteno nebo ne (aby to fungovalo, musí být rozšíření načteno s registrací rozšíření). Příklad:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{MW version|version=1.32|comment=and after|gerrit change=455752}}
Od [[MediaWiki 1.32]] je také možné zkontrolovat, zda je rozšíření načteno a zda splňuje dané omezení verze:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;isLoaded( 'ExtensionB', '&gt;=1.2' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version of 1.2 or greater.
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Pokud byste chtěli zkontrolovat, zda je v dřívějších verzích MediaWiki načtena konkrétní verze rozšíření, lze podobné informace extrahovat pomocí metody &lt;code&gt;getAllThings&lt;/code&gt;, která vrací informace o kreditu pro všechna načtená rozšíření. Příklad:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$bVersion = ExtensionRegistry::getInstance()-&gt;getAllThings()['ExtensionB']['version'] ?? null;
if ( $bVersion !== null &amp;&amp; version_compare( $bVersion, '2.1.0', '&gt;=' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded and has a version number greater than or equal to 2.1.0
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Alternativně, pokud rozšíření B definuje speciální konstantu určenou pro tento účel během načítání, je možné zkontrolovat, zda je definována:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( defined( 'ExtensionBVersion' ) ) { // You could also check for a version, if the constant holds the version
	// do things only, if extension B is loaded
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Křehčím způsobem, kterému je třeba se vyhnout, je zkontrolovat, zda specifická třída rozšíření B existuje nebo ne, např. pomocí tohoto kódu:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
if ( class_exists( 'ExtensionBHooks' ) ) {
	// do things only, if extension B its classes exist
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To může přestat fungovat, pokud přípona existuje v systému souborů, ale není načtena, např. pokud byl pro automatické načítání použit composer.
Pokud byla třída přejmenována nebo přestane existovat (např. protože není balíček public), dojde také k přerušení.

Obecně je upřednostňováno sdílení kódu prostřednictvím komponent pro composer namísto rozšíření. Pokud třídy rozšíření potřebují pouze existovat, ale rozšíření nemusí být konfigurováno ani načteno, pro to, co chcete dělat, je to silný indikátor toho, že by tento kód měl být rozdělen na komponentu composer, na kterou byste se měli spolehnout. namísto.

=== Configs (Vaše nastavení rozšíření/vzhledů) ===
{{See also|Manual:Configuration for developers}}
{{See also|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#config}}
Ve výchozím nastavení &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; předpokládá, že vaše konfigurační nastavení začíná předponou &quot;wg&quot;.

Pokud tomu tak není, můžete předponu přepsat pomocí speciálního klíče:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: true
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

To by použilo předponu &quot;eg&quot; a nastavilo globální proměnnou &lt;code&gt;$egMyExtSetting&lt;/code&gt; na hodnotu true.

Počínaje zveřejněním verze 2 poskytuje konfigurační sekce registrace rozšíření mnohem více funkcí a umožňuje vám popsat možnosti konfigurace mnohem podrobněji. Namísto jediného klíče -&gt; úložiště hodnot pro možnosti konfigurace můžete také přidat následující informace.

Obecná struktura &lt;code&gt;config&lt;/code&gt; se mírně mění na následující, více objektově orientovanou verzi:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;config_prefix&quot;: &quot;eg&quot;,
	&quot;config&quot;: {
		&quot;MyExtSetting&quot;: {
			&quot;value&quot;: true,
			&quot;path&quot;: false,
			&quot;description&quot;: &quot;The description for the configuration&quot;,
			&quot;descriptionmsg&quot;: &quot;myextension-config-myextsetting&quot;,
			&quot;public&quot;: true
		}
	},
	&quot;manifest_version&quot;: 2
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

==== Hodnota ====
Hodnota konfigurace se přesunula na toto místo.
Toto je jediný požadovaný klíč pro konfigurační objekt.

==== Cesta ====
Booleovská hodnota klíče &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; identifikuje, zda má být hodnota konfigurační volby interpretována jako cesta souborového systému vzhledem ke kořenu adresáře rozšíření.
Pokud je například hodnota konfigurace &lt;code&gt;myFile.png&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;path&lt;/code&gt; je pravdivá, skutečná hodnota bude &lt;code&gt;/path/to/the/wiki/extensions/MyExtension/myFile.png&lt;/code&gt;.

==== Popis ====
Klíč &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt; pro možnost konfigurace může obsahovat nelokalizovaný řetězec, který lze použít k vysvětlení možnosti konfigurace dalším vývojářům nebo uživatelům (správcům systému) vašeho rozšíření.
It may also be used as tooltip text on the parameters section of the extension infobox on the MediaWiki.org extension description page.
Hodnota klíče popisu obvykle není vystavena frontendu wiki, ale podívejte se do přehledu, kde najdete další informace, jak by se tato funkce mohla v budoucnu používat!

Existuje také možnost přidat klíč zprávy interního lokalizačního systému MediaWiki jako popis (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt;), který bude v budoucnu použit k odhalení popisu v rozhraní instalace MediaWiki.

==== veřejné / soukromé ====
Tato volba je booleovská, jejíž výchozí hodnota je false, což znamená, že konfigurační volba a hodnota jsou označeny jako &quot;private&quot;.
Tato hodnota se momentálně nikde nepoužívá, podívejte se do přehledu, kde se o této možnosti dozvíte více.

==== Výhled ====
{{tracked|T155155}}
Výše uvedené změny jsou také přípravnými kroky pro vylepšenou správu konfigurace v MediaWiki. Výše uvedené změny nám umožňují např. odhalit možnosti konfigurace rozšíření v uživatelském rozhraní MediaWiki. K tomu je zapotřebí zpráva s lokalizovaným popisem (&lt;code&gt;descriptionmsg&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;description&lt;/code&gt;) a indikace, zda má být konfigurační volba (&lt;code&gt;public&lt;/code&gt;) veřejná nebo ne.

=== Automatické zjišťování testů jednotek ===
MediaWiki umožňuje libovolné rozšíření pro [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:PHP unit testing/Writing unit tests for extensions|registraci testů phpunit]].
Bez registrace rozšíření byste museli zaregistrovat obslužný program pro háček {{ll|Manual:Hooks/UnitTestsList|UnitTestsList}}, který by vypadal asi takto:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function onUnitTestsList( array &amp;$paths ) {
	$paths[] = __DIR__ . '/tests/phpunit/';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

(jak je popsáno v příručce). Tento kód však vypadá stejně pro mnoho rozšíření, takže byste to mohli nazvat zbytečnou duplikací kódu.
Pokud vaše rozšíření používá registraci rozšíření a vaše testy phpunit jsou umístěny v podadresáři &lt;code&gt;tests/phpunit/&lt;/code&gt; vašeho rozšíření, wraper phpunit MediaWiki automaticky objeví testy jednotek pomocí registrace rozšíření.
Proto již nemusíte háček registrovat a nemusíte specifikovat, že vaše testy jednotek jsou uloženy ve výchozím adresáři.

== Přizpůsobení registrace ==
:''See [[Manual:Extension.json/Schema#callback]].''

== Také composer.json ==

Pokud má rozšíření nebo vzhled knihovny závislosti, může je mít také soubor &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt;, viz {{ll|Manual:Composer.json best practices}}. Použijte pole &lt;code&gt;load_composer_autoloader&lt;/code&gt;, aby MediaWiki používala automatické načítání Composer, když je to vhodné.

Některá pole metadat se překrývají mezi &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;composer.json&lt;/code&gt; (diskutované v {{task|T89456}}), včetně:
* &lt;code&gt;url&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;homepage&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;license-name&lt;/code&gt; a &lt;code&gt;license&lt;/code&gt;

== Správce kódu ==
{{Component|mediawiki-configuration}}

== Související stránky ==
* {{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema}}
* Hlášení chyb v projektu [[phab:tag/mediawiki-configuration/|MediaWiki-Configuration]].
* Staré verze [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Developing extensions#Setup|Manual:Developing extensions#Setup]] (před květnem 2015) a {{wg|ExtensionCredits}} popisují starý přístup deklarování informací o rozšíření v kódu PHP a proměnných
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Limitations|2=Známá omezení}}
* {{ll|Manual:Extension registration/Architecture|2=Přehled architektury}}
* &lt;code&gt;[[phab:diffusion/MW/browse/master/docs/extension.schema.v2.json|docs/extension.schema.v2.json]]&lt;/code&gt; je schéma pro &lt;code&gt;extension.json&lt;/code&gt; (a skin.json).
* [[Requests for comment/Extension registration|RfC]] o implementaci registrace rozšíření
* [[toollabs:extreg-wos|Zeď superschopností pro registraci rozšíření!]] — přehled rozšíření, která je ještě třeba převést.
* {{task|T98668}} — Sledovací karta pro převod všech rozšíření a vzhledů na Gitu pro použití registrace rozšíření.

== Odkazy ==
{{reflist}}

[[Category:Extension registration{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Extension creation{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>dzw7x54j5e4lwsxhgqcaglquhwkseg7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>VisualEditor/Diffs/ko</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1529893</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402158</id>
      <parentid>5156642</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:37:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7096" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;2017년부터 [[VisualEditor|시각편집기]]는 ''''''{{ll|visual diffs}}''''''(시각 차이 표시 기능)를 제공합니다.&lt;/span&gt;
인터페이스 내의 두 곳에서 사용이 가능합니다: 사용자가 문서를 저장하기 전에 문서의 변경사항을 미리 볼 때, 그리고 ([[Special:MyLanguage/Beta Features|베타 기능]]으로서) 역사 문서로부터 접근하는 표준 미디어위키 차이 표시 내에서
이 두 경우에서 시각 차이는 [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Diff|전통적인 2컬럼 위키텍스트 차이]]와 함께 표시되며 사용자는 이 두 디스플레이 사이를 전환할 수 있습니다.

시각 차이는 위키텍스트 차이에 비해 2가지 주된 장점이 있습니다.
첫째로는 편집자가 [[Special:MyLanguage/wikitext|위키텍스트]]를 이해할 필요 없이 자신과 다른 사람의 변경사항을 직접 볼 수 있다는 것입니다.
표와 같은 그래피컬한 구조의 변화를 볼 때 특히 도움이 됩니다: 이를테면 표의 컬럼을 삭제하는 편집의 경우 위키텍스트 차이로 볼 때는 이해가 어렵지만 시각 차이로 볼 때는 즉각적인 명시성이 있습니다.

둘째로 이 기술이 독자에게 변경사항을 더 정확하게 표현할 수 있다는 것입니다.
이를테면 두 문단을 서로 맞바꾸는 편집의 경우(문단의 변경이 있고 없고를 떠나) 시각 차이는 발생 내용이 무엇인지를 식별해주는 반면 위키텍스트 차이는 문단이 삭제되고 완전히 새로운 문단이 추가된 것처럼 보여줍니다.

== 일반 차이 문서에서 ==
아래의 예시와 스크린샷 대부분은 편집 시 문서 미리 보기 중에 시각 차이를 이용하는 것을 다루고 있습니다.
그러나 시각편집기의 시각 차이는 시각편집기가 설치된 모든 위키에서 일반 차이 문서에서도 사용할 수 있습니다.
영어 위키백과에서의 예시는 [[w:Special:Diff/473592443|여기]]에서 볼 수 있습니다.

시각편집기가 있는 위키의 경우 이 시각 차이 표시를 활성화하는 방법에 여러 가지가 있습니다:

* 다음을 LocalSettings.php에 추가하십시오:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPage = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* 위키에 특수:환경설정 안에 &quot;베타 기능&quot; 탭이 있고 사용자에게 시각 차이를 끌 수 있는 기능을 제공하기 원하면 다음을 LocalSettings.php에 추가할 수 있습니다:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;$wgVisualEditorEnableDiffPageBetaFeature = true;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* 위에 링크된 위키백과 예시에서 볼 수 있듯이 시각 차이 모드는 차이 문서의 URL에 단순히 &quot;&amp;visualdiff&quot;를 추가함으로써 활성화할 수도 있습니다.

== 작동 방식 ==
[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_visual_diff.png|alt=문서의 일부 변경사항을 보여주는 스크린샷입니다. 대부분의 변경사항은 텍스트 서식과 함께 강조됩니다.|left|thumb|300px|문서 편집을 마치면 편집 요약을 입력하고 &quot;{{int|visualeditor-savedialog-label-review}}&quot;를 선택하십시오.

시각 모드에서 추가된 내용, 제거된 내용, 새 링크, 강조된 서식을 보게 됩니다. 이미지의 크기 변경 등의 다른 변화는 측면의 노트 안에 표시됩니다.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_toggle_button.png|alt=시각 및 위키텍스트 옵션을 보여주는 토글 버튼입니다. 시각 옵션이 선택됩니다.|left|thumb|220x220px|토글 버튼을 클릭하면 시각 및 위키 텍스트 차이 사이를 전환할 수 있습니다.]]
{{clr}}

[[File:VisualEditor_visual_diff_tool_-_wikitext_diff.png|alt=2열 위키텍스트 차이 표시에서 동일한 변경사항을 보여주는 스크린샷입니다.|left|thumb|245x245px|위키텍스트 차이는 위키텍스트 편집기와 문서 역사에 사용되는 것과 동일한 차이 도구입니다.]]

{{clr}}
== 예시 ==
&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;190&quot; caption=&quot;리치 텍스트 편집&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff rich text edit.png|시각 차이
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff rich text edit.png|위키텍스트 차이
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;사소한 문서 훼손이 있는 문단 이동&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|시각 차이
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff paragraph move and vandalism.png|위키텍스트 차이(2017)입니다. 이 기능은 2018년에 위키텍스트 차이 엔진에 추가되었습니다. [[:File:VisualEditor new wikitext diff with paragraph move and vandalism.png]] 참고.
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;300&quot; caption=&quot;탭 컬럼 제거&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff table remove col.png|시각 차이
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff table remove col.png|위키텍스트 차이
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;270&quot; caption=&quot;텍스트, 서식, 목록 변화&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff editing text.png|시각 차이
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff editing text.png|위키텍스트 차이
&lt;/gallery&gt;

&lt;gallery mode=&quot;packed&quot; heights=&quot;200&quot; caption=&quot;새 멀티미디어(악보) 삽입&quot;&gt;
File:VisualEditor visual diff inserting music.png|시각 차이
File:VisualEditor wikitext diff inserting music.png|위키텍스트 차이
&lt;/gallery&gt;

== 사용된 기술 ==
[[File:Wikimania_2017_-_Unifying_editing_and_visual_diffs.webm|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|left|right}}|start=11:35|thumb|Thalia Chan, 편집 및 시각 차이 통일(Unifying editing and visual diffs), 위키마니아 2017]]

* [https://github.com/edg2s/google-diff-match-patch Google Diff, Match and Patch]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149571|T149571]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* [https://github.com/Tchanders/treeDiffer.js TreeDiffer.js]&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T149570|T149570]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== 현 시점의 제한 ==
* 분류나 TOC 키워드 등 &quot;보이지 않는&quot; {{ll|Help:Magic words#Behavior switches|문서 메타데이터}}의 변경사항 고지는 없습니다.
* 표의 복잡한 변경에는 문제가 있습니다&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T158445|T158445]]&lt;/ref&gt;
* 일부 특수 문서에서는 사용할 수 없습니다:
** 차이 문서의 편집 취소.&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T78550|T78550]]&lt;/ref&gt;
** 편집 충돌 확인 문서&lt;ref&gt;[[phab:T153298|T153298]], [[phab:T190649|T190649]]&lt;/ref&gt;

== 역사 ==
이 기능은 데스크톱 시각편집기의 1.31.0-wmf-20 브랜치 이상에서 최초의 차이 도구로서 사용이 가능하게 되었습니다. (2018년 2월 6일 위키미디어 운영 환경에 배포됨)
그 이전까지는 1.29.0-wmf-17 브랜치 이상에 부차적인 도구였습니다. (2017년 3월 21일 위키미디어 운영 환경에 배포됨)

== 같이 보기 ==
* [[m:2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094|2016 Community Wishlist Survey/Categories/Reading#CW2016-R094]]
* [[metawiki:Community Tech/Improved diffs|Community Tech/Improved diffs]]

== 각주 ==
&lt;references /&gt;

[[Category:VisualEditor{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Visual diffs{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>pbjp04t912zlp6d99k9ne609b3a7jn6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>User:PPelberg (WMF)/Greenhouse</title>
    <ns>2</ns>
    <id>1540774</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401962</id>
      <parentid>5398435</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:00:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>PPelberg (WMF)</username>
        <id>16721796</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* Loose */ finer histories</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22146" xml:space="preserve">  
[[File:Greenhouse in Mendocino Coast Botanical Gardens.jpg|right|468x468px|Welcome inside!]]
I imagine this page as a greenhouse within the broader [[Greenhouse experiment]]. 

A place to gather bits of information from in and around the [[meta:Wikimedia movement|Movement]] that resonate with [[User:PPelberg (WMF)|me]], a [[:en:Product management|Product Manager]] at the [[:en:Wikimedia Foundation|Wikimedia Foundation]].

This page is an experiment built on the hypothesis that taking consistent note of information resonates with me ''and'' locating these bits of resonance together in a public place where I can relate and iterate upon them will cause new ideas to emerge.

== TBD ==
''#TODO: use this section to show/store &quot;loose&quot; ideas that have become clear/definitive enough to be &quot;planted&quot; outside [[User:PPelberg (WMF)/Greenhouse|the greenhouse]]. When possible, it'd be neat to be able to link the &quot;loose&quot; thought an idea in this section &quot;sprouted&quot; from.''  

== Loose ==

* i'd like to be able to see how a particular comment, paragraph, or even sentence evolved over time. essentially: a more granular kind of page history. 
* considering how flexible mediawiki is, if volunteers haven't already ''tried'' to solve something in their own vernacular/improvisational way, i'd worry that an intervention wouldn't be adopted/supported widely. ''this thought prompted by conversation with [[User:NRodriguez (WMF)|NRodriguez (WMF)]].''
* speculative design idea: design Wikipedia if it were a camera roll…in Wikipedia’s case, the atomic unit would be an event (comprised of a time, location, description, and piece of media) rather than how we traditionally think of the camera roll as a photo. In Wikipedia’s spin on the camera roll, the atomic unit/event is framed through the metaphor of “event as memory” which could open  possibilities for how the memories/events/atomic units are related to one another and can be explored.
* I wonder if individual wikis have attempted to define for themselves what “being welcoming” means and looks like to them as a project/community? Do you they have a shared felt sense for what they’d like newcomers to feel? I ask this thinking about how subjective/fluid I imagine the idea of welcomeness to be and therefore in tension it likely is with being defined in the first place.
* meta: I wonder how people can be made more causally aware of the activity in one another’s greenhouse to both serendipitously spot ideas that resonate and also lead them to feel less alone/isolated in their practices.
* meta: I’m attracted to the idea of being able to save edits more quickly so that i can have smaller units to reference later via single purpose diffs. This kind of gets at what permalink a for comment offers, but for content contributions.  
* I think I’d like a “meta” section of sorts to articulate the experiences im Having maintaining this practice and what I’m noticing in this process  
* I wonder why we call people who visit Wikipedia “readers” instead of “learners”? The latter - to me- seems like it might help clarify what value we need to consistently be providing / outcomes we need to be building for. This leads me to wonder what the corollary for editors could be… 
* related to the below: i think I’m curious more broadly about naming what the defining features of mediawiki / Wikipedia are and sketching out ideas for how: A) these technical features influenced the culture that lives atop it and B) they can be reinterpreted to meet the needs of today’s learners 
* i wonder if people who are new to the Foundation might value hearing about how &quot;permanence&quot; impacts the Movement, its culture, and how they can leverage this feature to aid the work they are doing. ''E.g. detecting patterns in behavior, understanding history, etc.''
* what might it look like to be able to talk to Wikipedia?
** ''Inspired by https://riff.quest/''
* how - if at all - does the Movement respect and acknowledge the knowledge that lives within peoples’ bodies?
* meta: I’d like a reply tool-like, append-only gadget for adding new content to this page. Ideally, I’d be able to specify that new content gets added to the top of the page. who knows, maybe a sub-set of volunteers would value being able to enable a tool like this on specific talk pages as a way of generating ideas, making input a bit easier 
* remix the [https://pathway-generator.glitch.me/ learning pathway generator] [[User:CMadeo (WMF)|User@CMadeo (WMF)]] as a way to:
** create a generator that offers the questions i catalog (maybe other people can add questions they come up with as well?)
** create a generator that cycles through agreements/principles that we can use at the start of any &quot;gardening&quot; session
* would it be possible to get rid of page loads in the main namespace? 
** ''This thought inspired by reading the [[:en:2022 Tour de France|2022 Tour de France]] on desktop, noticing the previous year navigation in the info box and thinning, “it’d be nice to move along this ‘timeline’ with more fluidity.”''  
* Potential benefit to readers who create accounts: i'd like to be able to help make a travel itinerary based on notable places i'd like to visit
** ''the above prompted by visiting [[:en: Kengo Kuma]] and thinking, &quot;If I ever go to Japan, I'd like to experience some of the buildings Kuma has designed.&quot;''
* going back to the memory thread: maybe the way memory fits into wikipedia is through the frame of learning. retention (read: memory) is a core part of learning and understandings. it's with this in mind it seems like there could be an opportunity for us to invest in help people to better recall/retain what they learned while on wikipedia. ''this framing was sparked by the conversation i had tonight with [[User:MNovotny (WMF)|@MNovotny (WMF)]] &amp; [[User:Pginer-WMF|@Pginer-WMF]]''
* related to the thought below, I wonder what if anything could get unlocked from enabling people to make inter-article links or linking to specific sentences that would map, as closely to possible, as the precisely places within the wiki where more information about that thing exists. 
* Might there be a population of experienced volunteers who would be motivated to '''opt into''' reviewing, and potentially acting on, input from readers. 
** ''What prompted this: I was reading the [[:En:Amsterdam]], I happened upon the following sentence, “ Amsterdam was founded at the Amstel, that was dammed to control flooding; the city's name derives from the Amstel dam.” Then I thought to myself, “huh, I want to learn more about this flooding control. Oh! There’s a source here…maybe that will help me learn more about this.” (Taps citation). I see that the source is encyclopedia Britannica and I think to myself, “huh, I wonder if/why another encyclopedia is considered a reliable source. Is there some way I can flag this for someone to look into?”'' 
* idea: Wikipedia gardening club. Idea would be some kind of experiment where you create a little “raised bed” and come together to garden / make sense of what you’ve planned in your green house over the past, let’s say, month.
* thinking about what “information” is inside of the depth to which some people engage with/edit Wikidata…I wonder if it has to do with how relatively unconstrained it is in comparison to editing other, bigger, projects where there is less low hanging fruit, less open field…fewer places to really go on big edit “sprees” without running into anyone else. 
** ''Note; this thought is entirely built on assumption. I’d be curious to learn how the number of edits that are made to wiki data are made each month distributed across the total number of people who edited in a given month.''  
* what If, as a way to, help people:
** become a bit more comfortable with editing
** feel recognized for their support of/contribution to Wikipedia, and
** help us better understand how Wikipedia fits into their life 
** ...we ask  in the donate flow for people to have them/their contribution permanently memorialized on-wiki? 
** i wonder if people would be proud to share that page and show how long they've been donating. could also be an interesting opportunity to work on people sharing diffs. see [[phab:T302352|T302352]].
* Can &quot;narrative&quot; be encyclopedic? To what extent is a point of view core to a narrative? What might an encyclopedic narrative look like? ''I wonder this as I think about how prominent the &quot;[[:en:Stories (social media)|story]]&quot; format has become and wonder about what Wikipedia's relationship to it is.''
* memory as a motivator for contribution…what can the future NOT afford to forget,  not know, not learn from, etc.?
** ''#TODO: ask [[User:IFried (WMF)|@IFried (WMF)]] about what the Campaigns Teams has learned about this in the work they've done/are doing with campaign organizers working in Sub-Saharan Africa.'' 
* How might Wikipedia connect people to _their_ past? How might Wikipedia help people to better understand/contextualize their own experience?  
* Wikipedia as collective memory. 
** This objective varies fundamentally from other participatory experiences  on the internet (read: Social media) where the individual is centered. It’s about self-expression. If it matters to you, it belongs, it has a place. 
** On Wikipedia, the collective is centered. What belongs is only that which the collective remembers. I think therein lies a question the answer to which is always evolving: what is the composition of that collective especially when the notion of a singular collective is a false premise.
* Wikipedia
** Enables you to be an active reader. &quot;Active&quot; in the sense that Wikipedia enables you to &quot;ask&quot; and &quot;answer&quot; the questions that emerge ''while'' you're reading? ''&quot;Hold on, what does term mean? Awesome, I can visit this page and answer that.&quot; &quot;Hold on, this doesn't look quite right...what source are they using to support this statement?&quot;''
** Doesn't ask for or direct my attention. The interface empowers me to wonder and place me attention in the places that catch my eye. This reminds me of how I feel being outside, exploring a city, in nature, etc. ''Again, coming back to the park metaphor.''
* Mobile
** What questions do people on mobile devices come to Wikipedia seeking answers to? How does the effort and work required to answer said questions vary on mobile and desktop? 
*** ''Note: in this context, I'm using &quot;question&quot; in the way [[w:Bret Victor|Bret Victor]] uses it in [http://worrydream.com/ExplorableExplanations/ Explorable Explanations].''
** What does &quot;deep learning&quot; look like on Wikipedia on a mobile device? 
* What does the movement mean when it refers to “oral history”?
* What - if any - precedents are there for a concept like “notable observer”? 
** Here I’m thinking about a policy that would support commentary/perspective from people the wiki has deemed notable in the domain they’re commenting on. ''This thought and the one above it inspired by presentation deryck Chan have at 2021 wikimania.''
* [[:en:Wikipedia:Be bold|en:Be bold]] and its lack of resonance with the experiences of people from historically marginalized and underrepresented background.
{{Quote|source=|text=Hi. I am Vis M from India. Please make reading &amp; editing from mobile more friendly as it is the only internet device used everyday by common people of developing countries. Are  there plans for more support for mobile? Wiktionary, Wikisource, and Wikivoyage will benefit a lot if people can contribute and participate from smartphones.|sign=[https://etherpad.wikimedia.org/p/appconversations24042022 APP Conversation with Maryana Iskander (24 April 2022)]}}

* [[phab:T305756|T305756: Help readers remember the time they spend on Wikipedia]]
* [[phab:T302352|T302352: Make diffs more shareable]]
* [[phab:T304382|T304382: Introduce an intuitive workflow for adding open knowledge resources to articles]]
* How might Wikipedia present information in ways people accessing the site on a mobile device will find engaging and useful? ''Or said another way: we need a way of presenting history, the encyclopedia using modern media (pictures, videos, sound, touch, etc.).''
** Requirements
*** Volunteers are already improvising ways of presenting information in this format 
*** The component bits of information already exist within Wikipedia and volunteers are already adding them
*** The format will enable people reading Wikipedia to use this new representation to answer new questions or answer existing questions with less effort
*** People will be able to create these new knowledge representations using only the information present within a single article and the knowledge they have in their minds
*** People contributing these new knowledge formats will feel proud after making one 
*** Readers and contributors should be able to distinguish between articles that have the new knowledge format and those that do not. ''Think: articles with and without infoboxes.''
** Ideas
*** Timelines and elevating knowledge formats that have naturally emerged into structured/dedicated contribution tools/workflows
****A timeline “asks” for events (entities many people, I assume across cultures) innate key understand: something happening at a point in time, accompanied by a reliable source that verifies what you are reporting happened and at the time you reported it having happened.
****these events could also “ask” for some kind of visual (e.g illustration) that helps readers understand/imagine the event
****also re timeline: the format seems a format that would work well with wikitext and therefore compliant with all existing moderation/auditability experiences. #TODO add a link to the transportation map template [[User:Whatamidoing (WMF)|@Whatamidoing (WMF)]] shared with me today as an example of the kind of fidelity that can be achieved using wikitext.
**** many wikipedia articles include events mapped to points in time.  relating events to time in a visual way seems to have been valuable enough to readers that volunteers created many custom templates to support this way of presenting time-based information. [i]  and while ''some'' volunteers have discovered these templates and used them to visually relate time and events [ii], ''many'' articles A) lack any kind of visual relating time and events or B) have used existing tools to improvise doing the above [iv]  all of this has summed to me thinking: &quot;hmm, maybe timelines are a 'first class' knowledge format that we ought to define the presentation for and create the tooling necessary for volunteers across experience levels to create.&quot;  
***** i. &lt;nowiki&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Category:Timeline_templates&lt;/nowiki&gt;  i
***** i. &lt;nowiki&gt;https://af.wikipedia.org/wiki/Voyager_2&lt;/nowiki&gt;  
***** iii. &lt;nowiki&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Events_leading_to_the_attack_on_Pearl_Harbor&lt;/nowiki&gt;  
***** iv. e.g. &lt;nowiki&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Timeline_of_women_in_computing&lt;/nowiki&gt;, &lt;nowiki&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Timeline_of_hypertext_technology&lt;/nowiki&gt;, &lt;nowiki&gt;https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Timeline_of_web_search_engines&lt;/nowiki&gt;
** https://meta.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Julle/Essays/Wikipedia_as_a_physical_space
* How might Wikipedia reflect back to people the time they spend with it, so that people can better understand what they need and are interested in?
* How might we empower people to configure Wikipedia in ways that are suited to meet their individual needs and interests? ''Asked another way: How might we empower people to customize Wikipedia in ways that align their individual needs with the objectives/values/policies of the project's?''
* How might we evolve category pages to help readers discover knowledge within the wiki they might not have found otherwise?
* What verbs describe the various ways in which people use Wikipedia to learn? How might the nuance the answer to that question might produce impact how I think and talk about Wikipedia's interfaces?
** Retrieve information they once knew and have since forgotten
** Answer a specific question. ''What other movies has ___ acted in?''
** Locate and collate/combine discrete pieces of information into knowledge that leads to understanding. 
* What might it do to think of Wikipedia as a collective memory? A place where Volunteers go to document, agree on, and iterate upon the world’s collective memory to make it more complete and accurate over time?
** Related to the above: in what ways do individuals use Wikipedia to remember? E.g. using special:contributions as a way to remember where you’ve “been” on Wikipedia.
* How might Wikipedia help people to answer questions that land at the intersections of multiple topics? 
** ''This question brought to mind by me wondering: “How - if at all - are the concepts of [[:en:memory|memory]] and [[:en:History|history]] related?” With this question in mind I visited en:memory and en:history seeking to answer this question using the Wikipedia iOS app. I then used the app’s in-page search looking for “history” within En:memory and “memory” within “en:history”. Finding neither, I ended up here to capture this moment and unanswered question.''
* RE creating a place people can visit to help them remember where they’ve gone on the wiki: what if they view offered people opportunities to improve the pages/categories/etc. they engage with most? Essentially, this place becomes could meet the moments when, “you know you want to be on Wikipedia and you don’t know what you want to do? Learn? Contribute in some way? Etc.”
* as product managers at the foundation…
** what  artifact(s) are we creating, collaborating on, referencing, iterating upon, etc. as a means to developing richer knowledge of where and how we might intervene to achieve the the impact we, and the movement, has established for itself? ''E.g. is it the “flywheel”?'' 
** Related: why does the flywheel seem not to have evolved much?
** for reference: other functions/disciplines seem to make creating/collaborating on shared artifacts a core part of their practices. Designers: design system. engineers: libraries, code bases. Data scientists: libraries(?).
** what questions do people ask product leaders that we can equip them to answer?
** what is “the work”? What do we currently understand to be the most complex challenges we face/questions we need to answer and what do we need to answer them?
* Extending the &quot;Wikipedia as a public park/reserve/etc.&quot; metaphor, how might we help people arriving to Wikipedia become aware of the small acts they can take to make the encyclopedia better for everyone. Where everyone could mean other people who will visit Wikipedia after them, their future selves, etc. 
** In what ways is Wikipedia/spending time in it '''''similar''''' to spending time in a park?
** In what ways is Wikipedia/spending time in it '''''different''''' to spending time in a park?
** What might be the implications of adopting this metahpor?
** Some examples from parks that come to mind&lt;ref&gt;https://lnt.org/why/7-principles/&lt;/ref&gt; that might inform how we think about this on Wikipedia:
*** &quot;Travel an Camp on Durable Surfaces&quot;
*** &quot;Dispose of Waste Properly&quot;
*** &quot;Leave What You Find&quot;
*** &quot;Minimize Campfire Impacts&quot;
*** &quot;Respect Wildlife&quot;
*** &quot;Be Considerate of Others&quot;
*** ''Also see https://www.urban-design-guidelines.planning.vic.gov.au/guidelines/public-spaces via [[User:AHollender (WMF)|User:AHollender (WMF).]]''
** Ideas for Wikipedia
*** &quot;Learn something unexpected? Let the next person know.&quot;
*** &quot;Find something interesting, save it in some way so that you can revisit it later.&quot; ''Here, I'm thinking about how on a hike you might take a picture of a beautiful view to try to &quot;capture it.&quot;''
*** &quot;Want to remember where you've been on the wiki, create an account so that you can recall the articles you've read and the ones you have yet to explore.&quot; ''Here, I'm thinking about how you might consult trail map to decide which route you want to take by delineating the trails you've already taken from the ones you have yet to explore.'' 
**Continuing with park/nature metaphor: how might we enable people to see where they’ve been and inspire them to explore “paths” / “places” / “views” they have yet to visit and see?  ''Contributions page as a way of retracing your steps…a reliably way to revisit somewhere you remember having been.''
**If parks and nature have various kinds of views (big open expanses, cozy nooks, etc.), what Kinds of views might be present / absent within Wikipedia?
*References that have had enduring impact on how I think/understand Wikipedia and the role of product manager at the Wikimedia Foundation
**[[:en:A City Is Not a Tree|A City Is Not a Tree]]
**[[:en:Wikipedia:Chesterton's fence|en:Chesterton's fence]]
**[[:en:Wikipedia Signpost/2020-04-26/Opinion|Trusting Everybody to Work Together]]
**The Tyranny of Structurelessness ([https://www.jofreeman.com/joreen/tyranny.htm essay] | [[:en:The Tyranny of Structurelessness|article]])
**https://return.life/2022/03/07/the-mind-made-matter/
***&quot;...over the course of time individuals internalize knowledge to mind and then outsource expertise to matter.&quot;
***&quot;the individual mind lives within a collective intelligence largely  expressed through material objects. Whether we are talking of calculators and compasses, instruments and maps, or books and puzzles, we individually absorb well designed functional schema from matter, and occasionally give back our own incremental representations to the ambient culture.&quot;
**[https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc7282 On Consensus and Humming in the IETF]
*Helpful tools
**Canonical datasets: https://wikitech.wikimedia.org/wiki/Analytics/Data_Lake
**[deprecated] A list of the en:wiki articles that received the most traffic ''yesterday'' from four social media platforms: Facebook, Twitter, YouTube, and Reddit: [[:en:User:HostBot/Social media traffic report|User:HostBot/Social media traffic report]]

== References ==</text>
      <sha1>l3gcweol9gecsgl8wetql3psyfthmns</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Extension:Gadgets/th</title>
    <ns>102</ns>
    <id>1552983</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403333</id>
      <parentid>5307421</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:23:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="21511" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Bundled|1.18}}
{{Extension
|status          = stable
|type1           = mywiki
|type2           = special
|type3           = api
|author          = Daniel Kinzler
|username        = Duesentrieb
|mediawiki       = 1.19+
|image           = Screenshot-gadgets-tab-vector-skin.png
|compatibility policy = rel
|download        = {{WikimediaDownload|Gadgets}}
|readme          = {{git file|action=raw|project=mediawiki/extensions/Gadgets|branch=HEAD|file=README|text=README}}
|changelog       = 
|description     = อนุญาตให้ผู้ใช้เปิดใช้งานแกดเจ็ตที่ผู้ใช้จัดเตรียมโดย JS จากหน้าการตั้งค่า
|example         = Wikimedia Commons: [[commons:Special:Gadgets|ภาพรวมแกดเจ็ต]], [[commons:Special:Preferences#mw-prefsection-gadgets|การตั้งค่าผู้ใช้]] (คลิก 'Gadgets' คุณต้องลงชื่อเข้าใช้แน่นอน)
|phabricator = mediawiki-extensions-gadgets
}}
ส่วนขยาย '''Gadgets''' ช่วยให้ผู้ใช้สามารถเลือก 'แกดเจ็ต' ที่ใช้ JavaScript หรือ CSS ที่ผู้ใช้ Wiki รายอื่นจัดเตรียมไว้

แกดเจ็ตประกอบด้วย JavaScript และ/หรือ CSS {{ll|snippets}} ที่อยู่บนหน้าเว็บในเนมสเปซมีเดียวิกิ
แต่ละแกดเจ็ตถูกกำหนดโดยบรรทัดใน [[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]] โดยระบุชื่อและคำอธิบายสำหรับแกดเจ็ต และรายการของข้อมูลโค้ด JS และ CSS ที่ใช้ (ดูส่วน ''[[#Usage|การใช้งาน]]'' ด้านล่าง)

เนื่องจาก Gadgets อยู่ในเนมสเปซ MediaWiki (รายการที่กำหนดแกดเจ็ตรวมถึงข้อมูลโค้ดจริง) มีเพียง sysops (ผู้ดูแลระบบส่วนต่อประสานจาก 1.32) เท่านั้นที่สามารถแก้ไขโค้ดได้
นี่เป็นอย่างที่ควรจะเป็น: เฉพาะผู้ใช้ที่ได้รับความเชื่อถือโดยเฉพาะอย่างยิ่งจากชุมชน Wiki เท่านั้นที่จะสามารถแก้ไขโค้ด JavaScript ที่ผู้ใช้รายอื่นใช้ เนื่องจาก JavaScript สามารถใช้เพื่อติดตามสอดส่องบัญชีหรือสอดแนมบุคคลอื่นได้อย่างง่ายดาย

== การติดตั้ง ==
{{ExtensionInstall
|repo-name=Gadgets
|registration=yes
}}

{{anchor|Usage}}
== การใช้งาน ==
[[File:Screenshot-gadgets-tools.png|thumb|250px|การเลือกแกดเจ็ตบางอย่างตามความชอบของผู้ใช้ใน de.wikipedia]]
มีสองวิธีในการกำหนดแกดเจ็ตโดยขึ้นอยู่กับ &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt;
หากเป็น &lt;code&gt;'MediaWikiGadgetsDefinitionRepo'&lt;/code&gt; (ค่าเริ่มต้น) รายการอุปกรณ์ที่ใช้ได้จะถูกกำหนดไว้ที่ '''[[MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition]]'''
ในอีกทางหนึ่ง คำจำกัดความของ Gadget ถูกกำหนดไว้บนเพจในเนมสเปซ [[Special:PrefixIndex/Gadget definition:|Gadget definition]] เมื่อ &lt;code&gt;$wgGadgetsRepoClass&lt;/code&gt; ถูกตั้งค่าเป็น &lt;code&gt;'GadgetDefinitionNamespaceRepo'&lt;/code&gt;

{{caution|1=ยังไม่สนับสนุนการย้ายคำจำกัดความของแกดเจ็ตที่มีอยู่ ดังนั้นคุณจะสูญเสียแกดเจ็ตที่กำหนดไว้ก่อนหน้านี้หลังจากเปลี่ยนตัวเลือกนี้}}

เมื่อสร้างด้วยแกดเจ็ตที่ถูกต้องอย่างน้อยหนึ่งรายการ แกดเจ็ตที่กำหนดไว้จะแสดงในส่วน &quot;แกดเจ็ต&quot; ที่ [[Special:Preferences]] เพื่อให้ผู้ใช้สามารถเลือกแกดเจ็ตที่ต้องการใช้
ภาพรวมของแกดเจ็ตที่กำหนดโดย MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition จะแสดงบน '''[[Special:Gadgets]]''' พร้อมด้วยลิงก์ไปยังข้อความระบบที่เกี่ยวข้อง เพื่อให้แก้ไขได้ง่าย
สถิติการใช้งานแกดเจ็ตที่ไม่ใช่ค่าเริ่มต้นสามารถดูได้ที่ '''[[Special:GadgetUsage]]'''

&lt;div class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;
==== รูปแบบ ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using MediaWiki Gadgets Definition ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Each line in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition that starts with one or more &quot;*&quot; (asterisks) characters defines a gadget; it must have the following form:&lt;/span&gt;

  * &lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt; [&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;options (can be omitted)&lt;/span&gt;] | ชื่อเพจ

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first field (&quot;&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;&quot; in the example) is the gadget's ''internal name'', and references a system message ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-&lt;span style=&quot;color:green&quot;&gt;gadget_name&lt;/span&gt;''' in the example) that contains a short description of the gadget, using wiki syntax.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The ''internal name'' is used as part of the name of a form field and must follow the [https://www.w3.org/TR/html4/types.html#type-id rules defined for NAME attribute values].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This means it must begin with a basic Latin letter (&lt;code&gt;[A-Za-z]&lt;/code&gt;) and may be followed by any number of letters, digits (&lt;code&gt;[0-9]&lt;/code&gt;), hyphens (&lt;code&gt;-&lt;/code&gt;), underscores (&lt;code&gt;_&lt;/code&gt;), colons (&lt;code&gt;:&lt;/code&gt;), and periods (&lt;code&gt;.&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;}}

รูปแบบตัวเลือก:

 [ตัวเลือกที่ 1 | ตัวเลือกที่ 2 | ... ตัวเลือกN]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;whitespace can be omitted.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A single option can either consist of a single option name (in this case it is a flag option), or contain a comma-separated list of values:&lt;/span&gt;

 option = value1, value2, value3

ตัวอย่าง:
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
หรือ
  * mygadget[ResourceLoader|package]| mygadget.js | mygadget-Foo.js | mygadget-data.json | mygadget.css
หรือ
 * mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Using Gadget Definition Namespace ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Creation of the [[Gadget definition:mygadget]] page and putting in it the below [[w:JSON|JSON]] code have the same effect as &lt;code&gt;mygadget[ ResourceLoader | rights=foo, bar ] | mygadget.js | mygadget.css&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;settings&quot;: {
		&quot;rights&quot;: [ &quot;foo&quot;, &quot;bar&quot; ],
		&quot;default&quot;: false,
		&quot;package&quot;: false,
		&quot;hidden&quot;: false,
		&quot;skins&quot;: [],
		&quot;actions&quot;: [],
		&quot;category&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	},
	&quot;module&quot;: {
		&quot;scripts&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.js&quot; ],
		&quot;styles&quot;: [ &quot;mygadget.css&quot; ],
		&quot;datas&quot;: [],
		&quot;peers&quot;: [],
		&quot;dependencies&quot;: [],
		&quot;messages&quot;: [],
		&quot;type&quot;: &quot;&quot;
	}
}

&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In above example, the [[Gadget:Mygadget.js]] and the [[Gadget:mygadget.css]] are used.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Remember the &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; option is always true in the gadget definition namespace.&lt;/span&gt;

=== User rights ===
{{Note|1=This extension adds two new user rights, &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt;, which by default aren't given to any group.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can add the following in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} to provide the appropriate permissions for users who are within the interface-admin group.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Editing pages in the Gadget namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-edit&lt;/code&gt; right and editing pages in the Gadget definition namespace requires the &lt;code&gt;gadgets-definition-edit&lt;/code&gt; right.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-edit'] = true;
$wgGroupPermissions['interface-admin']['gadgets-definition-edit'] = true;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
}}


=== ตัวเลือก ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
|-
! ชื่อ
! พารามิเตอร์
! รายละเอียด
! ตั้งแต่
|-
| &lt;code&gt;ResourceLoader&lt;/code&gt; || ''ไม่มี'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Marks gadget's scripts as compatible with {{ll|ResourceLoader}}.&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Default modules|list of default modules]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that this option has no effect if current gadget has no ResourceLoader-compatible resources (i.e. no styles and scripts not marked as compatible).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated privilege names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who have the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|privileges]].&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;hidden&lt;/code&gt;
| ''ไม่มี''
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide the gadget from the [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Preferences|Preferences]] page.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This can be used in two ways:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable a gadget by default without ability to disable (as modular alternative to Common.js).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that you need to add both: &lt;code&gt;hidden | default&lt;/code&gt; to load a module for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Gadgets that are not meant for end-users, but rather are meant to be loaded by other gadgets.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example to allow two gadgets to re-use the same internal code, or to register the &quot;core&quot; part of a gadget that only loads on certain pages.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated skin names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available (and visible in preferences) only to users who use the specified [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Skins|skins]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Before MediaWiki 1.32 it was taking into consideration the skin set in preferences for the user, not the current displayed one (like when adding &lt;code&gt;?useskin=monobook&lt;/code&gt; in the URL, {{phab|T199478}}).&lt;/span&gt; || ?
|-
| &lt;code&gt;actions&lt;/code&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated action names&lt;/span&gt; || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available only on the specified page actions.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E.g. &lt;code&gt;actions = edit, history&lt;/code&gt; to load a gadget only while editing and on history pages.&lt;/span&gt; {{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Specifying &lt;code&gt;edit&lt;/code&gt; action will also load it on &lt;code&gt;action=submit&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Invalid actions effectively disable the gadget since it can't be run anywhere.&lt;/span&gt;}} || 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;
| ''ไม่มี'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enable the gadget by default for everyone (including IPs).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Registered users can still disable it in their preferences.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.18
|-
| &lt;code&gt;package&lt;/code&gt;
| ''ไม่มี'' || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mark this gadget as [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration_guide_(users)#Package_Gadgets|packaged]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this mode, only the first JavaScript page will be executed. Other pages can be imported by using the require() function.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This mode also enables use of JSON pages, which cannot be included otherwise.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38-wmf.16
|-
| &lt;code&gt;targets&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;desktop&lt;/code&gt; (default), &lt;code&gt;mobile&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;desktop,mobile&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Set the {{ll|ResourceLoader}} target(s) for the gadget.&lt;/span&gt;
| [[gerrit:60954]]
|-
| &lt;code&gt;type&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; หรือ &lt;code&gt;general&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Use &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; for modules that only modify styling for elements already on the page (e.g. when customizing the skin, layout, or article content).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It will cause the CSS files of the module to be included from the page HTML instead of being loaded via JavaScript.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget type]].&lt;/span&gt;
{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using &lt;code&gt;styles&lt;/code&gt; will '''not''' load in any specified JavaScript files.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For gadgets that modify styling for elements through both JavaScript ''and'' CSS, two individual gadget definitions are required.&lt;/span&gt;}}
| 1.28
|-
| &lt;code&gt;peers&lt;/code&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Comma-separated module names&lt;/span&gt;
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Require CSS-only gadgets (which usually would be hidden).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These gadgets will be loaded sooner than by &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt;, and will be loaded even if JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For details, see [[Special:MyLanguage/ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers|ResourceLoader/Migration guide (users)#Gadget peers]].&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.29.0-wmf.11 &lt;br/&gt; &lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pre-release&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
|-
| &lt;code&gt;supportsUrlLoad&lt;/code&gt; {{anchor|supportsUrlLoad}}
| ''ไม่มี'' &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; true &lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt; false
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Make the gadget available to be loaded with the &lt;code&gt;?withgadget&lt;/code&gt; URL query parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
| 1.38
|-
| &lt;code&gt;&lt;s&gt;top&lt;/s&gt;&lt;/code&gt; || ''ไม่มี'' || {{removed-inline|1.29}} &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Makes the gadget to be [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgResourceModules#Details|top-loaded]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This should be used sparingly, but may be needed for some initialization stuff like registering plugins with VisualEditor.&lt;/span&gt; || [[gerrit:75506]]
|}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can specify extra dependencies for your gadgets, for example:&lt;/span&gt;

 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=jquery.ui, jquery.effects.clip]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here, we ask ResourceLoader to load modules &lt;code&gt;jquery.ui&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;jquery.effects.clip&lt;/code&gt; with mygadget.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that gadgets can't depend on scripts from pages, static files or external URLs, only on modules already registered in ResourceLoader.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To make a script from a page depend on another script from a page, each should be a gadget which registers itself as a module in ResourceLoader, then they can be made to have dependencies using the following syntax:&lt;/span&gt;

 * childgadget[ResourceLoader|dependencies=ext.gadget.parentgadget]|childgadget.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable a gadget by default, use &quot;&lt;code&gt;default&lt;/code&gt;&quot;:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * mygadget[ResourceLoader|default|dependencies=mediawiki.util]|mygadget.js|mygadget.css
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To make the gadget available only to users with appropriate permissions, set the &lt;code&gt;rights&lt;/code&gt; option, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;
 * ImprovedDeletion [rights=delete] | ImprovedDeletion.js
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Makes the gadget available only to users who can actually delete pages.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note that restrictions are based on [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User rights#List of permissions|permissions]], not user groups like [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators|administrators]] or bureaucrats.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Here are some real examples:&lt;/span&gt;

 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback|modrollback]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-modrollback.js|modrollback.js]]
 * [[w:MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock|UTCLiveClock]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Manual:Purge|purge]]]|[[MediaWiki:Gadget-UTCLiveClock.js|UTCLiveClock.js]]
 * [[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop|Ajax_sysop]][ResourceLoader|rights=[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrol]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|rollback]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Rollback|markbotedits]],[[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Administrators#Deletion|delete]]]|[[m:User:Pathoschild/Scripts/Ajax sysop.js|Ajax_sysop.js]]

=== หน้า ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The remaining fields on the line refer to the JavaScript, CSS or JSON code that makes up the gadget, contained in system messages ('''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.js''' and '''MediaWiki:Gadget-mygadget.css''' in the example); the names of those messages must end with &quot;.js&quot; or &quot;.css&quot;, respectively.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A gadget can use any number of code messages, specifically, common code can be put into a code message used by several gadgets, in addition to their own specific code, e.g:
&lt;/div&gt;

  * frobinator[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|frob.js|frob.css|pretty.css
  * l33t[ResourceLoader]|commonStuff.js|tools.js|l33t.js
  * foobar[ResourceLoader|package]|foo.js|bar.js|foobar.json
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Please note that if your code contains strings that could be interpreted as wiki syntax (e.g. the signature code &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;~~~~&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;), you may want to enclose your code into {{tag|nowiki}} and put these tags in JavaScript or CSS comments so they're not interpreted when actually used.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
See the first and last lines of [[Special:PermaLink/1158805|MediaWiki:Gadget-externalsearch-bar.js]] for an example.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== ส่วน ===

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The list of gadgets in MediaWiki:Gadgets-definition can be broken into sections using lines that start and end with two or more &quot;=&quot; (equals) characters, enclosing the name of a system message that defines the section's name, for example:
&lt;/div&gt;

  == interface-gadgets ==

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This would define a new section, with the title defined on the page [[MediaWiki:Gadget-section-interface-gadgets]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Popular gadgets ==

See [[meta:Gadgets]] for gadgets which are popular in Wikimedia communities.

== ดูเพิ่ม ==
* {{ll|Extension:Gadgets/Roadmap}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Version 2 Design Specification#Gadget Manager|2=Gadget Manager}}
* {{ll|Extension:Widgets}}
* {{ll|Snippets}}

{{OnWikimedia}}
{{Used by|bluespice=1|canasta=1|fandom=1|miraheze=1|mywikis=1|prowiki=1|semantic core=1}}

[[Category:Gadgets{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:JavaScript{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>6ay1jz2h0nwhb04xbm3nzf9iaeyoenz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Module:String/doc/de</title>
    <ns>828</ns>
    <id>1553770</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403153</id>
      <parentid>5396133</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:39:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;start_index&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15023" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#ifeq:{{SUBPAGENAME}}|doc||{{Documentation subpage}}}}&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;languages/&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
&lt;includeonly&gt;{{Languages|Module:String/doc}}&lt;/includeonly&gt;
&lt;!-- Add categories where indicated at the bottom of this page and interwikis at Wikidata --&gt;
{{Shared Template Warning|Module:String}}
{{Module rating|release}}
{{Module rating|protected}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This module is intended to provide access to basic string functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of the functions provided here can be invoked with named parameters, unnamed parameters, or a mixture.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If named parameters are used, MediaWiki will automatically remove any leading or trailing whitespace from the parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Depending on the intended use, it may be advantageous to either preserve or remove such whitespace.&lt;/span&gt;

== Globale Optionen ==

; &lt;code&gt;ignore_errors&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If set to {{phpi|true}} or 1, any error condition will result in an empty string being returned rather than an error message.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;error_category&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If an error occurs, specifies the name of a category to include with the error message.&lt;/span&gt; Die Standardkategorie ist {{ll|Category:Errors reported by Module String}}.
; &lt;code&gt;no_category&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If set to {{phpi|true}} or 1, no category will be added if an error is generated.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Unit tests for this module are available at [[Module:String/testcases]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;len&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function returns the length of the target string.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}len{{!}}''$1''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}len{{!}}s= ''$1'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;s&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string whose length to report&lt;/span&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;sub&lt;/code&gt; ==

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This function returns a substring of the target string at specified indices.&lt;/span&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}sub{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=start_index
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;end_index&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}sub&lt;wbr/&gt;{{!}}s= ''$1'' {{!}}i= ''$2'' {{!}}j= ''$3'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=start_index
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;end_index&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;s&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to return a subset of&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;i&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first index of the substring to return, defaults to 1.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;j&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The last index of the string to return, defaults to the last character.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first character of the string is assigned an index of 1.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If either i or j is a negative value, it is interpreted the same as selecting a character by counting from the end of the string.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hence, a value of -1 is the same as selecting the last character of the string.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the requested indices are out of range for the given string, an error is reported.
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;match&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function returns a substring from the source string that matches a specified pattern.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}match{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''{{!}}''$4''{{!}}''$5''{{!}}''$6''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_string&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;start_index&lt;/span&gt;
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;match_number&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
|6=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;nomatch_output&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}match{{!}}s= ''$1'' {{!}}pattern= ''$2'' {{!}}start= ''$3'' {{!}}match= ''$4'' {{!}}plain= ''$5'' {{!}}nomatch= ''$6'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_string&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;start_index&lt;/span&gt;
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;match_number&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
|6=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;nomatch_output&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;s&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;pattern&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The pattern or string to find within the string&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;start&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The index within the source string to start the search.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first character of the string has index 1.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Defaults to 1.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;match&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In some cases it may be possible to make multiple matches on a single string.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This specifies which match to return, where the first match is &lt;code&gt;match = 1&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a negative number is specified then a match is returned counting from the last match.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hence &lt;code&gt;match = -1&lt;/code&gt; is the same as requesting the last match.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Defaults to 1.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;plain&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean flag indicating that pattern should be understood as plain text and not as a [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]]-style [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Defaults to {{phpi|false}}.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;nomatch&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If no match is found, output the &quot;nomatch&quot; value rather than an error.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the &lt;code&gt;match&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;start&lt;/code&gt; are out of range for the string being queried, then this function generates an error.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An error is also generated if no match is found.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If one adds the parameter &lt;code&gt;ignore_errors=true&lt;/code&gt;, then the error will be suppressed and an empty string will be returned on any failure.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For information on constructing [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]] patterns, a form of [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]], see:
&lt;/div&gt;

* [https://www.lua.org/manual/5.1/manual.html#5.4.1 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lua reference: Patterns&lt;/span&gt;] - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;as of version 5.1&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:Scribunto/Lua reference manual#Patterns|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scribunto patterns&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:Scribunto/Lua reference manual#Ustring patterns|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scribunto Unicode string patterns&lt;/span&gt;}}

== &lt;code&gt;pos&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function returns a single character from the target string at position pos.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}pos{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=index_wert
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}pos{{!}}target= ''$1'' {{!}}pos= ''$2'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=index_wert
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;target&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;pos&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The index for the character to return&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first character has an index value of 1.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If one requests a negative value, this function will select a character by counting backwards from the end of the string.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In other words &lt;code&gt;pos = -1&lt;/code&gt; is the same as asking for the last character.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A requested value of zero, or a value greater than the length of the string returns an error.
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;find&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function allows one to search for a target string or pattern within another string.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}find{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''{{!}}''$4''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_str&lt;/span&gt;
|2=ziel_zeichenkette
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;start_index&lt;/span&gt;
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}find{{!}}source= ''$1'' {{!}}target= ''$2'' {{!}}start= ''$3'' {{!}}plain= ''$4'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_str&lt;/span&gt;
|2=ziel_zkt
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;start_index&lt;/span&gt;
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;source&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;target&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string or pattern to find within source&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;start&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The index within the source string to start the search, defaults to 1&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;plain&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean flag indicating that target should be understood as plain text and not as a [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]]-style [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]], defaults to {{phpi|true}}&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This function returns the first index &gt;= &quot;start&quot; where &quot;target&quot; can be found within &quot;source&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Indices are 1-based.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;target&quot; is not found, then this function returns 0.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If either &quot;source&quot; or &quot;target&quot; are missing / empty, this function also returns 0.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function should be safe for UTF-8 strings.
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;replace&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function allows one to replace a target string or pattern within another string.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}replace{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''{{!}}''$4''{{!}}''$5''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_str&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replace_string&lt;/span&gt;
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replacement_count&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}replace{{!}}source= ''$1'' {{!}}pattern= ''$2'' {{!}}replace= ''$3'' {{!}}count= ''$4'' {{!}}plain= ''$5'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_string&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replace_string&lt;/span&gt;
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replacement_count&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;source&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;pattern&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string or pattern to find within source&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;replace&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The replacement text&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;count&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The number of occurrences to replace; defaults to all&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;plain&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean flag indicating that pattern should be understood as plain text and not as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Scribunto/Lua reference manual#Ustring patterns|Scribunto ustring pattern]] (a unicode-friendly [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]]-style [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]]); defaults to {{phpi|true}}&lt;/span&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;rep&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Repeats a string ''n'' times.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}rep{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;count&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;source&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to repeat&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;count&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The number of repetitions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}rep{{!}}$1{{!}}3&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|hello}} gives {{tmpl|0={{#invoke:String|rep|$1|3}}|hello}}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;includeonly&gt;{{Sandbox other||
&lt;!-- Categories below this line; interwikis at Wikidata --&gt;
[[Category:Modules]]
}}&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;
[[Category:Module documentation pages{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
| #default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Module:String/doc|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}</text>
      <sha1>o2xxhuvbhw4y3bfyck9sft1dejc08uj</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403155</id>
      <parentid>5403153</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:39:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;start_index&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14911" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#ifeq:{{SUBPAGENAME}}|doc||{{Documentation subpage}}}}&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;languages/&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
&lt;includeonly&gt;{{Languages|Module:String/doc}}&lt;/includeonly&gt;
&lt;!-- Add categories where indicated at the bottom of this page and interwikis at Wikidata --&gt;
{{Shared Template Warning|Module:String}}
{{Module rating|release}}
{{Module rating|protected}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This module is intended to provide access to basic string functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of the functions provided here can be invoked with named parameters, unnamed parameters, or a mixture.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If named parameters are used, MediaWiki will automatically remove any leading or trailing whitespace from the parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Depending on the intended use, it may be advantageous to either preserve or remove such whitespace.&lt;/span&gt;

== Globale Optionen ==

; &lt;code&gt;ignore_errors&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If set to {{phpi|true}} or 1, any error condition will result in an empty string being returned rather than an error message.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;error_category&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If an error occurs, specifies the name of a category to include with the error message.&lt;/span&gt; Die Standardkategorie ist {{ll|Category:Errors reported by Module String}}.
; &lt;code&gt;no_category&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If set to {{phpi|true}} or 1, no category will be added if an error is generated.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Unit tests for this module are available at [[Module:String/testcases]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;len&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function returns the length of the target string.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}len{{!}}''$1''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}len{{!}}s= ''$1'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;s&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string whose length to report&lt;/span&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;sub&lt;/code&gt; ==

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This function returns a substring of the target string at specified indices.&lt;/span&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}sub{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=start_index
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;end_index&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}sub&lt;wbr/&gt;{{!}}s= ''$1'' {{!}}i= ''$2'' {{!}}j= ''$3'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=start_index
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;end_index&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;s&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to return a subset of&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;i&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first index of the substring to return, defaults to 1.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;j&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The last index of the string to return, defaults to the last character.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first character of the string is assigned an index of 1.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If either i or j is a negative value, it is interpreted the same as selecting a character by counting from the end of the string.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hence, a value of -1 is the same as selecting the last character of the string.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the requested indices are out of range for the given string, an error is reported.
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;match&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function returns a substring from the source string that matches a specified pattern.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}match{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''{{!}}''$4''{{!}}''$5''{{!}}''$6''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_string&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=start_index
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;match_number&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
|6=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;nomatch_output&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}match{{!}}s= ''$1'' {{!}}pattern= ''$2'' {{!}}start= ''$3'' {{!}}match= ''$4'' {{!}}plain= ''$5'' {{!}}nomatch= ''$6'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_string&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=start_index
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;match_number&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
|6=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;nomatch_output&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;s&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;pattern&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The pattern or string to find within the string&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;start&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The index within the source string to start the search.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first character of the string has index 1.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Defaults to 1.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;match&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In some cases it may be possible to make multiple matches on a single string.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This specifies which match to return, where the first match is &lt;code&gt;match = 1&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a negative number is specified then a match is returned counting from the last match.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hence &lt;code&gt;match = -1&lt;/code&gt; is the same as requesting the last match.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Defaults to 1.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;plain&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean flag indicating that pattern should be understood as plain text and not as a [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]]-style [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Defaults to {{phpi|false}}.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;nomatch&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If no match is found, output the &quot;nomatch&quot; value rather than an error.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the &lt;code&gt;match&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;start&lt;/code&gt; are out of range for the string being queried, then this function generates an error.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An error is also generated if no match is found.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If one adds the parameter &lt;code&gt;ignore_errors=true&lt;/code&gt;, then the error will be suppressed and an empty string will be returned on any failure.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For information on constructing [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]] patterns, a form of [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]], see:
&lt;/div&gt;

* [https://www.lua.org/manual/5.1/manual.html#5.4.1 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lua reference: Patterns&lt;/span&gt;] - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;as of version 5.1&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:Scribunto/Lua reference manual#Patterns|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scribunto patterns&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:Scribunto/Lua reference manual#Ustring patterns|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scribunto Unicode string patterns&lt;/span&gt;}}

== &lt;code&gt;pos&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function returns a single character from the target string at position pos.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}pos{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=index_wert
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}pos{{!}}target= ''$1'' {{!}}pos= ''$2'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=index_wert
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;target&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;pos&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The index for the character to return&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first character has an index value of 1.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If one requests a negative value, this function will select a character by counting backwards from the end of the string.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In other words &lt;code&gt;pos = -1&lt;/code&gt; is the same as asking for the last character.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A requested value of zero, or a value greater than the length of the string returns an error.
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;find&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function allows one to search for a target string or pattern within another string.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}find{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''{{!}}''$4''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_str&lt;/span&gt;
|2=ziel_zeichenkette
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;start_index&lt;/span&gt;
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}find{{!}}source= ''$1'' {{!}}target= ''$2'' {{!}}start= ''$3'' {{!}}plain= ''$4'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_str&lt;/span&gt;
|2=ziel_zkt
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;start_index&lt;/span&gt;
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;source&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;target&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string or pattern to find within source&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;start&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The index within the source string to start the search, defaults to 1&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;plain&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean flag indicating that target should be understood as plain text and not as a [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]]-style [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]], defaults to {{phpi|true}}&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This function returns the first index &gt;= &quot;start&quot; where &quot;target&quot; can be found within &quot;source&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Indices are 1-based.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;target&quot; is not found, then this function returns 0.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If either &quot;source&quot; or &quot;target&quot; are missing / empty, this function also returns 0.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function should be safe for UTF-8 strings.
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;replace&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function allows one to replace a target string or pattern within another string.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}replace{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''{{!}}''$4''{{!}}''$5''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_str&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replace_string&lt;/span&gt;
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replacement_count&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}replace{{!}}source= ''$1'' {{!}}pattern= ''$2'' {{!}}replace= ''$3'' {{!}}count= ''$4'' {{!}}plain= ''$5'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_string&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replace_string&lt;/span&gt;
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replacement_count&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;source&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;pattern&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string or pattern to find within source&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;replace&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The replacement text&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;count&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The number of occurrences to replace; defaults to all&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;plain&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean flag indicating that pattern should be understood as plain text and not as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Scribunto/Lua reference manual#Ustring patterns|Scribunto ustring pattern]] (a unicode-friendly [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]]-style [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]]); defaults to {{phpi|true}}&lt;/span&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;rep&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Repeats a string ''n'' times.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}rep{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;count&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;source&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to repeat&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;count&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The number of repetitions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}rep{{!}}$1{{!}}3&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|hello}} gives {{tmpl|0={{#invoke:String|rep|$1|3}}|hello}}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;includeonly&gt;{{Sandbox other||
&lt;!-- Categories below this line; interwikis at Wikidata --&gt;
[[Category:Modules]]
}}&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;
[[Category:Module documentation pages{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
| #default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Module:String/doc|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}</text>
      <sha1>81fmzww07sqn35di2tnxxahd39ax9nc</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403158</id>
      <parentid>5403155</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:39:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;start_index&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14799" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#ifeq:{{SUBPAGENAME}}|doc||{{Documentation subpage}}}}&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;languages/&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
&lt;includeonly&gt;{{Languages|Module:String/doc}}&lt;/includeonly&gt;
&lt;!-- Add categories where indicated at the bottom of this page and interwikis at Wikidata --&gt;
{{Shared Template Warning|Module:String}}
{{Module rating|release}}
{{Module rating|protected}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This module is intended to provide access to basic string functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of the functions provided here can be invoked with named parameters, unnamed parameters, or a mixture.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If named parameters are used, MediaWiki will automatically remove any leading or trailing whitespace from the parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Depending on the intended use, it may be advantageous to either preserve or remove such whitespace.&lt;/span&gt;

== Globale Optionen ==

; &lt;code&gt;ignore_errors&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If set to {{phpi|true}} or 1, any error condition will result in an empty string being returned rather than an error message.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;error_category&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If an error occurs, specifies the name of a category to include with the error message.&lt;/span&gt; Die Standardkategorie ist {{ll|Category:Errors reported by Module String}}.
; &lt;code&gt;no_category&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If set to {{phpi|true}} or 1, no category will be added if an error is generated.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Unit tests for this module are available at [[Module:String/testcases]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;len&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function returns the length of the target string.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}len{{!}}''$1''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}len{{!}}s= ''$1'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;s&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string whose length to report&lt;/span&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;sub&lt;/code&gt; ==

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This function returns a substring of the target string at specified indices.&lt;/span&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}sub{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=start_index
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;end_index&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}sub&lt;wbr/&gt;{{!}}s= ''$1'' {{!}}i= ''$2'' {{!}}j= ''$3'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=start_index
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;end_index&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;s&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to return a subset of&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;i&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first index of the substring to return, defaults to 1.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;j&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The last index of the string to return, defaults to the last character.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first character of the string is assigned an index of 1.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If either i or j is a negative value, it is interpreted the same as selecting a character by counting from the end of the string.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hence, a value of -1 is the same as selecting the last character of the string.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the requested indices are out of range for the given string, an error is reported.
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;match&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function returns a substring from the source string that matches a specified pattern.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}match{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''{{!}}''$4''{{!}}''$5''{{!}}''$6''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_string&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=start_index
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;match_number&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
|6=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;nomatch_output&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}match{{!}}s= ''$1'' {{!}}pattern= ''$2'' {{!}}start= ''$3'' {{!}}match= ''$4'' {{!}}plain= ''$5'' {{!}}nomatch= ''$6'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_string&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=start_index
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;match_number&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
|6=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;nomatch_output&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;s&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;pattern&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The pattern or string to find within the string&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;start&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The index within the source string to start the search.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first character of the string has index 1.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Defaults to 1.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;match&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In some cases it may be possible to make multiple matches on a single string.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This specifies which match to return, where the first match is &lt;code&gt;match = 1&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a negative number is specified then a match is returned counting from the last match.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hence &lt;code&gt;match = -1&lt;/code&gt; is the same as requesting the last match.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Defaults to 1.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;plain&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean flag indicating that pattern should be understood as plain text and not as a [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]]-style [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Defaults to {{phpi|false}}.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;nomatch&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If no match is found, output the &quot;nomatch&quot; value rather than an error.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the &lt;code&gt;match&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;start&lt;/code&gt; are out of range for the string being queried, then this function generates an error.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An error is also generated if no match is found.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If one adds the parameter &lt;code&gt;ignore_errors=true&lt;/code&gt;, then the error will be suppressed and an empty string will be returned on any failure.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For information on constructing [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]] patterns, a form of [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]], see:
&lt;/div&gt;

* [https://www.lua.org/manual/5.1/manual.html#5.4.1 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lua reference: Patterns&lt;/span&gt;] - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;as of version 5.1&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:Scribunto/Lua reference manual#Patterns|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scribunto patterns&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:Scribunto/Lua reference manual#Ustring patterns|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scribunto Unicode string patterns&lt;/span&gt;}}

== &lt;code&gt;pos&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function returns a single character from the target string at position pos.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}pos{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=index_wert
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}pos{{!}}target= ''$1'' {{!}}pos= ''$2'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=index_wert
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;target&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;pos&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The index for the character to return&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first character has an index value of 1.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If one requests a negative value, this function will select a character by counting backwards from the end of the string.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In other words &lt;code&gt;pos = -1&lt;/code&gt; is the same as asking for the last character.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A requested value of zero, or a value greater than the length of the string returns an error.
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;find&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function allows one to search for a target string or pattern within another string.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}find{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''{{!}}''$4''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_str&lt;/span&gt;
|2=ziel_zeichenkette
|3=start_index
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}find{{!}}source= ''$1'' {{!}}target= ''$2'' {{!}}start= ''$3'' {{!}}plain= ''$4'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_str&lt;/span&gt;
|2=ziel_zkt
|3=start_index
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;source&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;target&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string or pattern to find within source&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;start&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The index within the source string to start the search, defaults to 1&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;plain&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean flag indicating that target should be understood as plain text and not as a [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]]-style [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]], defaults to {{phpi|true}}&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This function returns the first index &gt;= &quot;start&quot; where &quot;target&quot; can be found within &quot;source&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Indices are 1-based.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;target&quot; is not found, then this function returns 0.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If either &quot;source&quot; or &quot;target&quot; are missing / empty, this function also returns 0.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function should be safe for UTF-8 strings.
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;replace&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function allows one to replace a target string or pattern within another string.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}replace{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''{{!}}''$4''{{!}}''$5''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_str&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replace_string&lt;/span&gt;
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replacement_count&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}replace{{!}}source= ''$1'' {{!}}pattern= ''$2'' {{!}}replace= ''$3'' {{!}}count= ''$4'' {{!}}plain= ''$5'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_string&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replace_string&lt;/span&gt;
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replacement_count&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;source&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;pattern&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string or pattern to find within source&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;replace&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The replacement text&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;count&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The number of occurrences to replace; defaults to all&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;plain&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean flag indicating that pattern should be understood as plain text and not as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Scribunto/Lua reference manual#Ustring patterns|Scribunto ustring pattern]] (a unicode-friendly [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]]-style [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]]); defaults to {{phpi|true}}&lt;/span&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;rep&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Repeats a string ''n'' times.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}rep{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;count&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;source&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to repeat&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;count&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The number of repetitions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}rep{{!}}$1{{!}}3&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|hello}} gives {{tmpl|0={{#invoke:String|rep|$1|3}}|hello}}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;includeonly&gt;{{Sandbox other||
&lt;!-- Categories below this line; interwikis at Wikidata --&gt;
[[Category:Modules]]
}}&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;
[[Category:Module documentation pages{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
| #default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Module:String/doc|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}</text>
      <sha1>cy3pcdt7yyxrl6akzfa2vidnws65gck</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403161</id>
      <parentid>5403158</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:39:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;end_index&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14743" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#ifeq:{{SUBPAGENAME}}|doc||{{Documentation subpage}}}}&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;languages/&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
&lt;includeonly&gt;{{Languages|Module:String/doc}}&lt;/includeonly&gt;
&lt;!-- Add categories where indicated at the bottom of this page and interwikis at Wikidata --&gt;
{{Shared Template Warning|Module:String}}
{{Module rating|release}}
{{Module rating|protected}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This module is intended to provide access to basic string functions.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of the functions provided here can be invoked with named parameters, unnamed parameters, or a mixture.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If named parameters are used, MediaWiki will automatically remove any leading or trailing whitespace from the parameter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Depending on the intended use, it may be advantageous to either preserve or remove such whitespace.&lt;/span&gt;

== Globale Optionen ==

; &lt;code&gt;ignore_errors&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If set to {{phpi|true}} or 1, any error condition will result in an empty string being returned rather than an error message.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;error_category&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If an error occurs, specifies the name of a category to include with the error message.&lt;/span&gt; Die Standardkategorie ist {{ll|Category:Errors reported by Module String}}.
; &lt;code&gt;no_category&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If set to {{phpi|true}} or 1, no category will be added if an error is generated.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Unit tests for this module are available at [[Module:String/testcases]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;len&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function returns the length of the target string.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}len{{!}}''$1''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}len{{!}}s= ''$1'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;s&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string whose length to report&lt;/span&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;sub&lt;/code&gt; ==

: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This function returns a substring of the target string at specified indices.&lt;/span&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}sub{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=start_index
|3=end_index
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}sub&lt;wbr/&gt;{{!}}s= ''$1'' {{!}}i= ''$2'' {{!}}j= ''$3'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=start_index
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;end_index&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;s&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to return a subset of&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;i&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first index of the substring to return, defaults to 1.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;j&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The last index of the string to return, defaults to the last character.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first character of the string is assigned an index of 1.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If either i or j is a negative value, it is interpreted the same as selecting a character by counting from the end of the string.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hence, a value of -1 is the same as selecting the last character of the string.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the requested indices are out of range for the given string, an error is reported.
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;match&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function returns a substring from the source string that matches a specified pattern.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}match{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''{{!}}''$4''{{!}}''$5''{{!}}''$6''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_string&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=start_index
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;match_number&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
|6=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;nomatch_output&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}match{{!}}s= ''$1'' {{!}}pattern= ''$2'' {{!}}start= ''$3'' {{!}}match= ''$4'' {{!}}plain= ''$5'' {{!}}nomatch= ''$6'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_string&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=start_index
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;match_number&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
|6=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;nomatch_output&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;s&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;pattern&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The pattern or string to find within the string&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;start&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The index within the source string to start the search.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The first character of the string has index 1.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Defaults to 1.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;match&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In some cases it may be possible to make multiple matches on a single string.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This specifies which match to return, where the first match is &lt;code&gt;match = 1&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If a negative number is specified then a match is returned counting from the last match.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hence &lt;code&gt;match = -1&lt;/code&gt; is the same as requesting the last match.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Defaults to 1.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;plain&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean flag indicating that pattern should be understood as plain text and not as a [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]]-style [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]].&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Defaults to {{phpi|false}}.&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;nomatch&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If no match is found, output the &quot;nomatch&quot; value rather than an error.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the &lt;code&gt;match&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;start&lt;/code&gt; are out of range for the string being queried, then this function generates an error.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An error is also generated if no match is found.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If one adds the parameter &lt;code&gt;ignore_errors=true&lt;/code&gt;, then the error will be suppressed and an empty string will be returned on any failure.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For information on constructing [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]] patterns, a form of [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]], see:
&lt;/div&gt;

* [https://www.lua.org/manual/5.1/manual.html#5.4.1 &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lua reference: Patterns&lt;/span&gt;] - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;as of version 5.1&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Extension:Scribunto/Lua reference manual#Patterns|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scribunto patterns&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:Scribunto/Lua reference manual#Ustring patterns|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scribunto Unicode string patterns&lt;/span&gt;}}

== &lt;code&gt;pos&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function returns a single character from the target string at position pos.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}pos{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=index_wert
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}pos{{!}}target= ''$1'' {{!}}pos= ''$2'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=ziel_zeichenkette
|2=index_wert
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;target&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;pos&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The index for the character to return&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The first character has an index value of 1.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If one requests a negative value, this function will select a character by counting backwards from the end of the string.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In other words &lt;code&gt;pos = -1&lt;/code&gt; is the same as asking for the last character.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A requested value of zero, or a value greater than the length of the string returns an error.
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;find&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function allows one to search for a target string or pattern within another string.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}find{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''{{!}}''$4''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_str&lt;/span&gt;
|2=ziel_zeichenkette
|3=start_index
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}find{{!}}source= ''$1'' {{!}}target= ''$2'' {{!}}start= ''$3'' {{!}}plain= ''$4'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_str&lt;/span&gt;
|2=ziel_zkt
|3=start_index
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;source&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;target&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string or pattern to find within source&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;start&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The index within the source string to start the search, defaults to 1&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;plain&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean flag indicating that target should be understood as plain text and not as a [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]]-style [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]], defaults to {{phpi|true}}&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This function returns the first index &gt;= &quot;start&quot; where &quot;target&quot; can be found within &quot;source&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Indices are 1-based.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;target&quot; is not found, then this function returns 0.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If either &quot;source&quot; or &quot;target&quot; are missing / empty, this function also returns 0.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function should be safe for UTF-8 strings.
&lt;/div&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;replace&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This function allows one to replace a target string or pattern within another string.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}replace{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''{{!}}''$3''{{!}}''$4''{{!}}''$5''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_str&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replace_string&lt;/span&gt;
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replacement_count&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

ODER

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}replace{{!}}source= ''$1'' {{!}}pattern= ''$2'' {{!}}replace= ''$3'' {{!}}count= ''$4'' {{!}}plain= ''$5'' &lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source_string&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;pattern_string&lt;/span&gt;
|3=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replace_string&lt;/span&gt;
|4=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;replacement_count&lt;/span&gt;
|5=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;plain_flag&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;source&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to search&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;pattern&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string or pattern to find within source&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;replace&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The replacement text&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;count&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The number of occurrences to replace; defaults to all&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;plain&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean flag indicating that pattern should be understood as plain text and not as a [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Scribunto/Lua reference manual#Ustring patterns|Scribunto ustring pattern]] (a unicode-friendly [[w:Lua (programming language)|Lua]]-style [[w:Regular expression|regular expression]]); defaults to {{phpi|true}}&lt;/span&gt;

== &lt;code&gt;rep&lt;/code&gt; ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Repeats a string ''n'' times.
&lt;/div&gt;

Verwendung:

: {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}rep{{!}}''$1''{{!}}''$2''&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;
|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;source&lt;/span&gt;
|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;count&lt;/span&gt;
}}

Parameter:

; &lt;code&gt;source&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The string to repeat&lt;/span&gt;
; &lt;code&gt;count&lt;/code&gt;
: &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The number of repetitions.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Example {{tmpl|0=&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#invoke:&lt;/nowiki&gt;String{{!}}rep{{!}}$1{{!}}3&lt;nowiki&gt;}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;|hello}} gives {{tmpl|0={{#invoke:String|rep|$1|3}}|hello}}
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;includeonly&gt;{{Sandbox other||
&lt;!-- Categories below this line; interwikis at Wikidata --&gt;
[[Category:Modules]]
}}&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;
[[Category:Module documentation pages{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
| #default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Module:String/doc|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}</text>
      <sha1>94t3zewaumig2ln6hjuvkh6bo895o4a</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Gamepress/de</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1554214</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401821</id>
      <parentid>5238121</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:56:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2995" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name         = Gamepress
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description  = Einfach verwendbarer, Gamingorientierter Skin
|image        = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 1.0.7
|update       = 
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          = 5.3+
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme       = 
|changelog    = 
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla     = 
|phabricator  = Gamepress
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Gamepress''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Aleksandra Łączek and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 16 January 2014 for {{ll|ShoutWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
&lt;/div&gt;
* Drei (Oder vier, jenachdem, wie du es anschaust &amp;mdash; das rote Schema ist das Standard-/Basisschema) Schemen:
** Blau
** Grün
** Orange
* ''Kein'' Logobild
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* There are three &quot;columns&quot; above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) &amp;mdash; the contents of these are editable via &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If all three messages are empty, as they are by default, then the prefooter area won't be shown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended&lt;/span&gt;

== Installation ==
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>2rd5kvy9pp7vc3iu50f14qxuh278u59</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401850</id>
      <parentid>5401821</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:04:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3052" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Gamepress
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description     = Einfach verwendbarer, Gamingorientierter Skin
|image           = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.0.7
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = Gamepress
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Gamepress''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Aleksandra Łączek and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 16 January 2014 for {{ll|ShoutWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
&lt;/div&gt;
* Drei (Oder vier, jenachdem, wie du es anschaust &amp;mdash; das rote Schema ist das Standard-/Basisschema) Schemen:
** Blau
** Grün
** Orange
* ''Kein'' Logobild
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* There are three &quot;columns&quot; above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) &amp;mdash; the contents of these are editable via &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If all three messages are empty, as they are by default, then the prefooter area won't be shown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended&lt;/span&gt;

== Installation ==
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>gfyz6bpofigreb45dc6vp1od5y241ym</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Lakeus/de</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1554229</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401681</id>
      <parentid>5377228</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:34:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22932" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin|templatemode=
|name          = Lakeus
|status        = stable
|username      = Lakejason0
|author        = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Lakejason0
* Light beacon
* Dianliang233
* Winston Sung
* ...
|image         = SkinLakeus.png
|imagesize     = 320
|version       = 1.1.12
|update        = 2022-08-07
|mediawiki     = 1.36+
|php           = 
|compatibility policy = rel
|license       = GPL-3.0-or-later
|download      = {{GithubDownload|lakejason0|mediawiki-skins-Lakeus|translatewiki=1}}
|translate     = mwgithub-lakeus
|example       = [https://skins.toolforge.org/index.php?useskin=lakeus Example on MediaWiki Skins Wiki]
|compatibility = 
|parameters    = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder&lt;/code&gt;
}}

'''Lakeus''' ist ein Skin, welches sich vornimmt, eine schlichte, aber voll funktionsfähige Erfahrung zu bieten.
Es wird nach einen Charakter im Roman eines der Autoren namens Lakejason0 benannt.

== Installation ==
{{SkinInstall
|download-link=[https://github.com/lakejason0/mediawiki-skins-Lakeus/releases/latest Lade es herunter]
|registration=Yes
}}

== Funktionen ==
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Simple but all-functional (at least most of them should work).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Works when JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Customization through CSS variables.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Responsive design.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Should work with desktop and tablet; on very narrow phones the sidebar menu might be too wide to close.&lt;/span&gt;
* Einen Schemendesigner. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By enabling it in your preferences you can change and preview the theme in real time.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For the most of time, only a few tweaks on basic variables are needed and it will produce an automagically calculated theme for you.&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It might be a bit buggy and unstable, so be sure to report any of the problems to me!&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can always disable automatic calculation if you are not satisfied.&lt;/span&gt;

== Geplante Funktionen ==
* Eine [[phab:T244392|WVUI-Suchleiste]], das selbe wie im neuen {{ll|Skin:Vector|nsp=0}}.

== Anmerkungen ==
* Der Skin sollte verwendbar sein, auch wenn kein JavaScript vorhanden ist. Verschiedene nutzvolle Funktionen könnten jedoch nicht verfügbar sein.
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The skin made a dedicated menu for site that uses a language with LanguageConverter variants (e.g. Chinese (&lt;code&gt;zh&lt;/code&gt;) and Serbian).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When no variants available, the menu should be invisible.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;RTL support hasn't been tested well, but main features are confirmed RTL compatible (e.g. sidebar menus).&lt;/span&gt;

== Anpassung ==

=== CSS-Variablen ===
{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your CSS may not work in several special pages (like [[Special:Preferences|{{int|preferences}}]]); it's an intended behavior of MediaWiki core due to security concerns, but site admins could set {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages|$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}} to {{phpi|true}} to bypass it after understanding the risks.&lt;/span&gt;}}
Lakeus unterstützt die Personalisierung durch CSS-Variablen. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Below are several methods to generate a theme, and to apply the result (should be CSS code) you'll need to copy it to &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, which can be found on &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; for all wiki users, and &lt;code&gt;Special:MyPage/Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; for yourself.&lt;/span&gt;
==== Schemendesigner ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using the theme designer would be easier for anyone (at least I hope so).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll only need to change the basic variables and the rest will be automatically calculated.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable the auto calculation for each variable that you don't really like the auto calculated result of it, and manually tweak it as you like.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To enable it, go to the preferences, select &quot;Appearance&quot;, and you can find the option when the skin Lakeus is selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once enabled, it would load on every page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Basically all the buttons and form inputs do what it literally means; just try them out if you are a bit confused.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There ''are'' some variables that do not appear on every page, and they would be listed below:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interface message box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These elements appears in situations like that a user group setting is successfully applied when JavaScript disabled, translation page edit notice warning, MediaWiki exceptions that appears on page editing, user talk page notices with no Echo and other notification extensions installed, and so on.&lt;/span&gt;

==== Voreinstellungsschemen ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There will be some preset theme that is already here for you to use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can share your own theme on the talk page as well.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Come back later if there isn't any.&lt;/span&gt;

===== Vintage =====
Ein Uralt-Schema, zuletzt in 1.1.7 exportiert.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #8e860a;
    --color-secondary: #eeebe7;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: rgba(238,235,231,0);
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #eeebe7;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #8c8985;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #8e860a;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-bar: #8c8985;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #8e860a;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0,0,0,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #000000;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #9b9b9b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-content: #24220a;
    --background-color-body: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #bcb9b5;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #8e860a;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #e4e1dd;
    --border-color-toc: #b2afab;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #e9e6e2;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #9e9c98;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #dfdcd8;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(44,44,44,0.1);
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #dad7d3;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

===== Ocean =====
Ein Schema mit hellblauen Farbschema, zuletzt in 1.1.8 exportiert.
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #3366cc;
    --color-secondary: #f4fcff;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: #e2f4fe;
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #f4fcff;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #91989b;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #3366cc;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-bar: #91989b;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #f4fcff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #3366cc;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(35,93,194,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #91989b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #0955b8;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-content: #000000;
    --background-color-body: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #c1c9cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #3366cc;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #eaf2f5;
    --border-color-toc: #b7bfc2;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #eff7fa;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #a4abae;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #e5ecef;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --text-color-portlet-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(112,147,255,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #e2f4fe;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


==== Manuell die Variablen ändern ====

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Below is the default setting of CSS variables; modify these settings and put the result into your &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --background-color-base: white;
  --background-color-body: white;
  --background-color-content: white;
  --background-color-footer: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list: white;
  --background-color-portlet-body: white;
  --background-color-toggle-list-card: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-edit-options: #eee;
  --background-color-search-suggestions: #fff;
  --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #1d5492;
  --background-color-search-input: #fff;
  --background-color-toc: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #eaecf0;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fee7e6;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fef6e7;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d5fdf4;
  --background-color-user-message: #ffce7b;
  --background-color-wikitable: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #eaecf0;
  --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-content: #ccc;
  --border-color-toggle-list: #ddd;
  --border-color-search-suggestions: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-search-bar: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-portlet-body: var(--color-gray);
  --border-color-header-tab: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-toc: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #d33;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fc3;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
  --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
  --border-color-wikitable: #a2a9b1;
  --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
  --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #000000;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item: #1c1c1c;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-content: #000000;
  --text-color-header: #000000;
  --text-color-body: #000000;
  --text-color-footer: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
  --text-color-user-message: #000000;
  --text-color-wikitable: #202122;
  --icon-filter-header: unset;
  --color-search-suggestions-text: #000;
  --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #fff;
  --color-tagline: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #54595d;
  --color-accent-header-tab-new: #54595d;
  --color-header: white;
  --color-base: #54595d;
  --color-gray: #a2a9b1;
  --color-gray-2: #eaecf0;
  --color-link: #0645ad;
  --color-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-new: #d33;
  --color-link-new--visited: #a55858;
  --color-link-new--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-external: #36b;
  --color-link-external--visited: #636;
  --color-link-external--active: #b63;
  --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
  --color-footer-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-footer-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-toc-number: #202122;
  --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
  --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
  --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
  --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
  --header-elevation: var(--elevation);
  --mask-background: rgba( 0, 0, 0, 0.8 );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to change the header's color to a light blue (e.g. &lt;code&gt;#4FC3F7&lt;/code&gt;), it would be:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --color-header: #4FC3F7;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


=== Parameter ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Parameter
! Typ
! Standard
! Beschreibung
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink}}
| Wahrheitswert
| {{phpi|true}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Determines whether to show the link to the skin's repository in the footer.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLogos}}
|
|
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For now, only &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wordmark&lt;/code&gt; are recognized; keys like &lt;code&gt;svg&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1x&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1.5x&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;2x&lt;/code&gt; are not used by the skin.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notice that other skins may utilize the image provided by &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; '''AND''' other keys as well, so do not rely on the key to provide a icon only for this skin.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder}}
| Wahrheitswert
| {{phpi|false}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Determines whether to add a skin provided border to site notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enabling it can be useful for plain text notices, but if you've already got a border in your site notice content, you can leave it disabled.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sidebar icons ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately, it's not easy to add icons to the skin without including many images on page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you can bear the loading time of web font icons, you can try this out as follows.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start with, include the icon font face (in this whole example, Material Icons) in your CSS (&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may have loaded some font faces in other places other than &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, in which case just ensure that they don't conflict with each other.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* MD Icons */
/* fallback */
@font-face {
  font-family: 'Material Icons';
  font-style: normal;
  font-weight: 400;
  src: url(https://fonts.gstatic.com/s/materialicons/v70/flUhRq6tzZclQEJ-Vdg-IuiaDsNc.woff2) format('woff2');
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Then, as we are going to use pseudo elements, some paddings and extra settings to create space for icons are applied:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
.toggle-list__list a {
    padding-left: calc(8px + 25px);
}

.toggle-list__list a::before {
    content: '';
    width: 0;
    height: 0;
    display: inline-block;
    font-family: 'Material Icons';
    font-size: 18px;
    transform: translateX(-25px) translateY(3px);
    /* Display Optimizing */
    -webkit-font-smoothing: antialiased;
    text-rendering: optimizeLegibility;
    -moz-osx-font-smoothing: grayscale;
    font-feature-settings: 'liga';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now, it's time to add the actual icons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use Devtools (The tool opened by right click and then Inspect Element) to see the list items' IDs, and we are finally going to set the actual content of the pseudo elements (icons):&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Navigation */
#n-mainpage-description a::before {
    content: 'home';
}

#n-recentchanges a::before {
    content: 'auto_awesome';
}

#n-randompage a::before {
    content: 'shuffle';
}

#n-portal a::before {
    content: 'forum';
}

#n-help-mediawiki a::before {
    content: 'help_center';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, Material Icons supports certain strings (used here) and code points for an certain icon.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For what strings or code points could be used for Material Icons, see [https://fonts.google.com/icons Icons - Google Fonts].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Feel free to add more rules for your own site, for example one of the authors' site got an admin noticeboard:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot; highlight=1&gt;
#n-adminnoticeboard a::before {
    content: 'groups';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;#n-...&lt;/code&gt; part corresponds with the system message you used in your [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Mobile skins{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>euscs9gl3h9zeuup8tcdkbk4i4doyhd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:System message/539/cs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1557726</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402544</id>
      <parentid>5249737</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:26:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="41" xml:space="preserve">pro jádro přidejte klíče zpráv do $1</text>
      <sha1>c0fx6c30v1g6li0oc8v3v8yuxew3w0k</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:System message/542/cs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1557741</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402526</id>
      <parentid>5249765</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:23:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="70" xml:space="preserve">pro rozšíření v $1 přidejte pod název rozšíření řádek jako</text>
      <sha1>s1u0gz55cvecnqfeg54k4ni4kp7jqhl</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>OOUI/Using OOUI in MediaWiki/de</title>
    <ns>0</ns>
    <id>1558658</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403314</id>
      <parentid>5253033</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:21:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11881" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{OOUI}}
'''{{ll|OOUI}}''' ist im MediaWiki-Kern enthalten und kann sowohl von PHP- als auch Javascript-Code verwendet werden.

== PHP ==
=== Bevor Du beginnst ===
To use OOUI elements, the OOUI PHP library has to be loaded and the necessary styles have to be set up per the correct skin ([[phab:T98029#1475549|boring details]]).

The most convenient way to do this is:

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Special pages etc. ====
&lt;/div&gt;
Whenever you have access to an [[Manual:OutputPage.php|OutputPage]] instance, call its &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; method.
It is usually available as &lt;code&gt;$this-&gt;getOutput()&lt;/code&gt; in most contexts, such as on special pages, or as &lt;code&gt;$out&lt;/code&gt; in hook signatures.

Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
function execute( $param ) {
	$out = $this-&gt;getOutput();
	$out-&gt;enableOOUI();
	// … More code here …
	$group = new OOUI\ButtonGroupWidget( [
		// … More widgets here …
	] );
	$out-&gt;addHTML( $group );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Another example, useful when you have no easy access to an OutputPage instance:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
RequestContext::getMain()-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;enableOOUI();
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Note that the method &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; (implemented by [[Manual:OutputPage.php|class &lt;code&gt;OutputPage&lt;/code&gt;]]) ensures that the proper theme and directionality is configured, and that the page loads the OOUI styles.
The OOUI widgets are namespaced, so they must be prefixed with &lt;code&gt;OOUI\&lt;/code&gt; or imported.
Stringifying the widgets converts them to HTML, so you can add widgets to the page using &lt;code&gt;$out-&gt;addHTML()&lt;/code&gt;.
Also note that in some cases, just enabling OOUI is not enough.
For example, if you need a certain icon added, you need to explicitly add the related icon pack.
For example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public function load() {
    $this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;enableOOUI();
    $this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addModuleStyles( [ 'oojs-ui.styles.icons-moderation' ] );
    return ( new OOUI\IconWidget(
		[
			'icon' =&gt; 'block',
			'classes' =&gt; [ 'flaggedrevs-icon' ],
			'title' =&gt; 'Block',
		]
	) )-&gt;toString();
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Parser functions and tags, [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:ContentHandler|content models]] ====
&lt;/div&gt;
If you have access to a ParserOutput instance (usually as &lt;code&gt;$parser-&gt;getOutput()&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;$pout&lt;/code&gt;), call its &lt;code&gt;setEnableOOUI( true )&lt;/code&gt; method, and also &lt;code&gt;OutputPage::setupOOUI()&lt;/code&gt;.

If you have access to a Parser instance, instead just call its &lt;code&gt;enableOOUI()&lt;/code&gt; method.

Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
public static function myTagHook( $content, array $attributes, Parser $parser, PPFrame $frame ) {
	$parser-&gt;enableOOUI();
	// … More code here …
	$group = new OOUI\ButtonGroupWidget( [
		// … More widgets here …
	] );
	return [ $group-&gt;toString(), 'markerType' =&gt; 'nowiki' ];
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Otherwise ====
&lt;/div&gt;
See [[OOUI/PHP examples#Before you start]].
(Instead of {{tag|link|open}} tags use the ResourceLoader style modules described below.)

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using OOUI widgets ===
&lt;/div&gt;
Construct a widget:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn = new OOUI\ButtonWidget( [
    'label' =&gt; 'Click me!',
    'href' =&gt; 'https://example.com',
] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Its properties can be changed using getter/setter methods:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn-&gt;setLabel( 'Still click me!' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;When you're done creating the widget, you can treat it like a string to display it.
(You can explicitly convert to string by calling the &lt;code&gt;toString()&lt;/code&gt; method.)&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addHTML( &quot;&lt;div&gt;$btn&lt;/div&gt;&quot; );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== List of available elements ====
&lt;/div&gt;
See also:

* Automatically updated list: https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/php/annotated.html
* [https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/demos/demos.php?page=widgets&amp;theme=wikimediaui&amp;direction=ltr Live demo with examples] ([[phab:diffusion/GOJU/browse/master/demos/pages/widgets.php|demo page in master branch]])

As of OOUI v0.34.0, released 2019-09-04, these elements available in PHP (or in [[OOUI/Using OOUI in MediaWiki#Using OOUI widgets 2|JS via &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt;, see below]]) are:

Widgets:

* ButtonWidget
* ButtonInputWidget
* ButtonGroupWidget
* CheckboxInputWidget
* CheckboxMultiselectInputWidget
* RadioInputWidget
* RadioSelectInputWidget
* TextInputWidget
* MultilineTextInputWidget
* NumberInputWidget
* SearchInputWidget
* DropdownInputWidget
* ComboBoxInputWidget
* LabelWidget
* IconWidget
* IndicatorWidget
* ProgressBarWidget
* SelectFileInputWidget
* SelectWidget
* TabSelectWidget
* TabOptionWidget

Layouts:

* ActionFieldLayout
* FieldLayout
* FieldsetLayout
* FormLayout
* HorizontalLayout
* IndexLayout
* MenuLayout
* PanelLayout
* TabPanelLayout
* StackLayout

==== Beispiel ====
Large structures can be created and displayed in a single call:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$this-&gt;getOutput()-&gt;addHTML( new OOUI\FormLayout( [
	'method' =&gt; 'POST',
	'action' =&gt; 'login.php',
	'items' =&gt; [
		new OOUI\FieldsetLayout( [
			'label' =&gt; 'Form layout',
			'items' =&gt; [
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\TextInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'username',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'User name',
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\TextInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'password',
						'type' =&gt; 'password',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'Password',
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\CheckboxInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'rememberme',
						'selected' =&gt; true,
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; 'Remember me',
						'align' =&gt; 'inline',
					]
				),
				new OOUI\FieldLayout(
					new OOUI\ButtonInputWidget( [
						'name' =&gt; 'login',
						'label' =&gt; 'Log in',
						'type' =&gt; 'submit',
						'flags' =&gt; [ 'primary', 'progressive' ],
						'icon' =&gt; 'check',
					] ),
					[
						'label' =&gt; null,
						'align' =&gt; 'top',
					]
				),
			]
		] )
	]
] ) );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

=== {{ll|HTMLForm}}, FormSpecialPage ===

HTMLForm has OOUI support.
You can use the &lt;code&gt;ooui&lt;/code&gt; display format for [[HTMLForm]] forms to render them using OOUI.
This is usually more convenient, as HTMLForm provides functionality for validation and handling form submission.
See [[HTMLForm#Display formats]].

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$htmlForm = HTMLForm::factory( 'ooui', $formDescriptor, $this-&gt;getContext() );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

On FormSpecialPage, use the &lt;code&gt;getDisplayFormat()&lt;/code&gt; method:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
protected function getDisplayFormat() {
	return 'ooui';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Examples:

* https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/specials/SpecialMIMESearch.php ([[Special:MIMESearch]])
* https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/MW/browse/master/includes/specials/SpecialResetTokens.php ([[Special:ResetTokens]])

Widgets used in the form will be automatically [[#Infusion|infused (see below)]] if the JS widget offers additional capabilities over the PHP one.

== JavaScript ==
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Using OOUI widgets ===
&lt;/div&gt;
Depending on which of the features you're going to use, you should list one or more of the following modules as dependencies of your modules that use OOUI:

* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt;: OOUI's core JavaScript library. Contains the basic [[OOUI/Widgets|widgets]] and [[OOUI/Layouts|layouts]] that are [[#List of available elements|also available in PHP (see exact list above)]] and the ability to [[#Infusion|infuse]] them.
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-widgets&lt;/code&gt;: Additional [[OOUI/Widgets|widgets]] and [[OOUI/Layouts|layouts]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-toolbars&lt;/code&gt;: [[OOUI/Toolbars|Toolbar and tools]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-windows&lt;/code&gt;: [[OOUI/Windows|Windows and dialogs]].
* &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui.styles.icons-*&lt;/code&gt;: Specific icon styles depending on what icons you may want to use, e.g. &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui.styles.icons-interactions&lt;/code&gt; for check icon. Group names can be found in [https://doc.wikimedia.org/oojs-ui/master/demos/?page=icons&amp;theme=wikimediaui&amp;direction=ltr&amp;platform=desktop demo page] or in [https://github.com/wikimedia/flask-oojsui/tree/master/flask_oojsui/static/oojs-ui code].  

For example ([[extension.json]]):

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;json&quot;&gt;
{
	&quot;ResourceModules&quot;: {
		&quot;ext.myExtension&quot;: {
			&quot;dependencies&quot;: [
				&quot;oojs-ui-core&quot;,
				&quot;oojs-ui-windows&quot;
			],
			&quot;scripts&quot;: [
				...
			]
		}
	}
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

Code in modules depending on OOUI can use the elements, as described in this OOUI documentation.
[[OOUI/Creating interfaces programmatically|Start reading it here]].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Infusion ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To provide [[:en:Progressive_enhancement|progressive enhancement]] and avoid code duplication between PHP and JS, OOUI PHP widgets present on a page can be ''infused'' into OOUI widgets.

Assuming that a PHP widget has been made infusable when it was created:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
$btn = new OOUI\ButtonWidget( [
    'infusable' =&gt; true,
    'id' =&gt; 'my-button',
    'label' =&gt; 'Click me!',
    'href' =&gt; 'https://example.com',
] );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

It can be infused from JavaScript code:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
var button = OO.ui.infuse( $( '#my-button' ) );
// Or, for self-documenting code:
var button = OO.ui.ButtonWidget.static.infuse( $( '#my-button' ) );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;The widget can now be modified from JavaScript code:&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
button
	.setLabel( 'Really click me!' )
	.on( 'click', function () {
		alert( 'I was clicked!' );
	} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Gadgets ===
&lt;/div&gt;
OOUI can be used in on-wiki gadgets or user scripts.
As above, you just need to ensure the &lt;code&gt;oojs-ui-core&lt;/code&gt; module (or a different one, as described above) is loaded before your code runs.

For gadgets, you should add an entry in the &lt;code&gt;dependencies&lt;/code&gt; field of gadget description.
See [[Extension:Gadgets#Options|Gadgets' documentation]] for instructions and examples.

For user scripts, wrap your code in a &lt;code&gt;mw.loader.using( … )&lt;/code&gt; call, as always when loading modules.
See [[ResourceLoader/Modules#mw.loader.using|ResourceLoader documentation]] for instructions.
Example:

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;javascript&quot;&gt;
mw.loader.using( 'oojs-ui-core' ).done( function () {
	$( function () {
		var button = new OO.ui.ButtonWidget( {
			label: 'Click me!'
		} );
		button.on( 'click', function () {
			alert( 'You clicked the button!' );
		} );
		$( '#mw-content-text' ).append( button.$element );
	} );
} );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== MediaWiki-specific OOUI widgets ==
&lt;/div&gt;
Several MediaWiki-specific OOUI widgets are available under the &lt;code&gt;mw.widgets&lt;/code&gt; (JavaScript) or &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki\Widget&lt;/code&gt; (PHP) namespace, implementing interface elements common in MediaWiki.

TODO Write me.

* [[Manual:TitleInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:UserInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:SearchInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:NamespaceInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:DateInputWidget]] (example: [[gerrit:226647]])
* [[Manual:DateTimeInputWidget]]
* [[Manual:CategorySelector]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Using themes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
OOUI comes with two themes, and every widget you create will use the theme defined by the current skin using &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:Extension.json/Schema#SkinOOUIThemes|SkinOOUIThemes}}&lt;/code&gt; in extension.json.
Custom themes can also be provided by the skin.
See [[OOUI/Themes]] for details.

{{Feedback/oojsui}}

[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>1lfw0ec3ddnerync8k1p3zmc1fz9t7t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:DuskToDawn/de</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1562762</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401839</id>
      <parentid>5264266</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:00:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2415" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = DuskToDawn
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* Automattic — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] — MediaWiki port
|description     = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A dark skin that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&lt;/span&gt;
|image           = DuskToDawn.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.3.2
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=dusktodawn Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = DuskToDawn
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''DuskToDawn''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name. It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;a dark theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; that melds old-style organic ornaments with modern design and typography&quot;.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by {{u|Jack Phoenix}} on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Dusk to Dawn is, according to various different WordPress sources, the successor to the [[Skin:Dusk|Dusk]] skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Its content area is even narrower than Dusk's, which means that various MediaWiki pages &amp;mdash; such as [[Special:Version]], etc. &amp;mdash; render outright poorly.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Hauptfunktionen ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* &quot;Page last edited (by Foo)&quot; line below the page title, akin to that on ShoutWiki's default skin, Aurora
&lt;/div&gt;
* Kein Logo
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Narrow content area (see the intro section of this page), which makes this suitable for blog-like sites
&lt;/div&gt;

== Installation ==
{{SkinInstall|DuskToDawn|registration=required}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>a273074xt4ggr2an44wbjpnwcu05osm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Lakeus/yo</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1562997</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401688</id>
      <parentid>5293587</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:34:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24246" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin|templatemode=
|name          = Lakeus
|status        = stable
|username      = Lakejason0
|author        = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Lakejason0
* Light beacon
* Dianliang233
* Winston Sung
* ...
|image         = SkinLakeus.png
|imagesize     = 320
|version       = 1.1.12
|update        = 2022-08-07
|mediawiki     = 1.36+
|php           = 
|compatibility policy = rel
|license       = GPL-3.0-or-later
|download      = {{GithubDownload|lakejason0|mediawiki-skins-Lakeus|translatewiki=1}}
|translate     = mwgithub-lakeus
|example       = [https://skins.toolforge.org/index.php?useskin=lakeus Example on MediaWiki Skins Wiki]
|compatibility = 
|parameters    = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder&lt;/code&gt;
}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Lakeus''' is a skin that aims to provide a simple but all-functional experience.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's named after a character in the novel of one of the authors, Lakejason0.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Installation ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{SkinInstall
|download-link=[https://github.com/lakejason0/mediawiki-skins-Lakeus/releases/latest &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Download&lt;/span&gt;]
|registration=Yes
}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Features ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Simple but all-functional (at least most of them should work).&lt;/span&gt;
* Ṣiṣẹ nigbati JavaScript jẹ alaabo.
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Customization through CSS variables.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Responsive design.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Should work with desktop and tablet; on very narrow phones the sidebar menu might be too wide to close.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A Theme designer.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By enabling it in your preferences you can change and preview the theme in real time.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For the most of time, only a few tweaks on basic variables are needed and it will produce an automagically calculated theme for you.&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It might be a bit buggy and unstable, so be sure to report any of the problems to me!&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can always disable automatic calculation if you are not satisfied.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Planned Features ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[phab:T244392|WVUI search bar]], the same as in the new {{ll|Skin:Vector|nsp=0}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* Awọ yẹ ki o jẹ lilo paapaa nigbati JavaScript ko ba si. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Several handy features may not be available though.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The skin made a dedicated menu for site that uses a language with LanguageConverter variants (e.g. Chinese (&lt;code&gt;zh&lt;/code&gt;) and Serbian).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When no variants available, the menu should be invisible.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;RTL support hasn't been tested well, but main features are confirmed RTL compatible (e.g. sidebar menus).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Customization ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== CSS variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your CSS may not work in several special pages (like [[Special:Preferences|{{int|preferences}}]]); it's an intended behavior of MediaWiki core due to security concerns, but site admins could set {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages|$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}} to {{phpi|true}} to bypass it after understanding the risks.&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lakeus supports customization through CSS variables.&lt;/span&gt; Ni isalẹ wa awọn ọna pupọ lati ṣe ipilẹṣẹ akori kan, ati lati lo abajade (o yẹ ki o jẹ koodu CSS) iwọ yoo nilo lati daakọ si &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, eyiti o le rii lori &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; fun gbogbo awọn olumulo wiki, ati &lt;code&gt;Special:MyPage/Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; fun ararẹ.
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Theme Designer ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using the theme designer would be easier for anyone (at least I hope so).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll only need to change the basic variables and the rest will be automatically calculated.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable the auto calculation for each variable that you don't really like the auto calculated result of it, and manually tweak it as you like.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To enable it, go to the preferences, select &quot;Appearance&quot;, and you can find the option when the skin Lakeus is selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once enabled, it would load on every page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Basically all the buttons and form inputs do what it literally means; just try them out if you are a bit confused.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There ''are'' some variables that do not appear on every page, and they would be listed below:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interface message box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These elements appears in situations like that a user group setting is successfully applied when JavaScript disabled, translation page edit notice warning, MediaWiki exceptions that appears on page editing, user talk page notices with no Echo and other notification extensions installed, and so on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Preset themes ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There will be some preset theme that is already here for you to use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can share your own theme on the talk page as well.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Come back later if there isn't any.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===== Vintage =====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A vintage theme, last exported on 1.1.7.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #8e860a;
    --color-secondary: #eeebe7;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: rgba(238,235,231,0);
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #eeebe7;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #8c8985;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #8e860a;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-bar: #8c8985;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #8e860a;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0,0,0,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #000000;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #9b9b9b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-content: #24220a;
    --background-color-body: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #bcb9b5;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #8e860a;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #e4e1dd;
    --border-color-toc: #b2afab;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #e9e6e2;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #9e9c98;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #dfdcd8;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(44,44,44,0.1);
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #dad7d3;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===== Ocean =====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A theme with light blue color scheme, last exported on 1.1.8.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #3366cc;
    --color-secondary: #f4fcff;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: #e2f4fe;
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #f4fcff;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #91989b;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #3366cc;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-bar: #91989b;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #f4fcff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #3366cc;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(35,93,194,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #91989b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #0955b8;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-content: #000000;
    --background-color-body: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #c1c9cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #3366cc;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #eaf2f5;
    --border-color-toc: #b7bfc2;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #eff7fa;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #a4abae;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #e5ecef;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --text-color-portlet-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(112,147,255,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #e2f4fe;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Manually change the variables ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Below is the default setting of CSS variables; modify these settings and put the result into your &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --background-color-base: white;
  --background-color-body: white;
  --background-color-content: white;
  --background-color-footer: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list: white;
  --background-color-portlet-body: white;
  --background-color-toggle-list-card: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-edit-options: #eee;
  --background-color-search-suggestions: #fff;
  --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #1d5492;
  --background-color-search-input: #fff;
  --background-color-toc: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #eaecf0;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fee7e6;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fef6e7;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d5fdf4;
  --background-color-user-message: #ffce7b;
  --background-color-wikitable: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #eaecf0;
  --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-content: #ccc;
  --border-color-toggle-list: #ddd;
  --border-color-search-suggestions: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-search-bar: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-portlet-body: var(--color-gray);
  --border-color-header-tab: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-toc: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #d33;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fc3;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
  --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
  --border-color-wikitable: #a2a9b1;
  --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
  --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #000000;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item: #1c1c1c;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-content: #000000;
  --text-color-header: #000000;
  --text-color-body: #000000;
  --text-color-footer: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
  --text-color-user-message: #000000;
  --text-color-wikitable: #202122;
  --icon-filter-header: unset;
  --color-search-suggestions-text: #000;
  --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #fff;
  --color-tagline: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #54595d;
  --color-accent-header-tab-new: #54595d;
  --color-header: white;
  --color-base: #54595d;
  --color-gray: #a2a9b1;
  --color-gray-2: #eaecf0;
  --color-link: #0645ad;
  --color-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-new: #d33;
  --color-link-new--visited: #a55858;
  --color-link-new--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-external: #36b;
  --color-link-external--visited: #636;
  --color-link-external--active: #b63;
  --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
  --color-footer-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-footer-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-toc-number: #202122;
  --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
  --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
  --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
  --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
  --header-elevation: var(--elevation);
  --mask-background: rgba( 0, 0, 0, 0.8 );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to change the header's color to a light blue (e.g. &lt;code&gt;#4FC3F7&lt;/code&gt;), it would be:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --color-header: #4FC3F7;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Parameters ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Description&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean&lt;/span&gt;
| {{phpi|true}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Determines whether to show the link to the skin's repository in the footer.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLogos}}
|
|
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For now, only &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wordmark&lt;/code&gt; are recognized; keys like &lt;code&gt;svg&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1x&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1.5x&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;2x&lt;/code&gt; are not used by the skin.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notice that other skins may utilize the image provided by &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; '''AND''' other keys as well, so do not rely on the key to provide a icon only for this skin.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean&lt;/span&gt;
| {{phpi|false}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Determines whether to add a skin provided border to site notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enabling it can be useful for plain text notices, but if you've already got a border in your site notice content, you can leave it disabled.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sidebar icons ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately, it's not easy to add icons to the skin without including many images on page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you can bear the loading time of web font icons, you can try this out as follows.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start with, include the icon font face (in this whole example, Material Icons) in your CSS (&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may have loaded some font faces in other places other than &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, in which case just ensure that they don't conflict with each other.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* MD Icons */
/* fallback */
@font-face {
  font-family: 'Material Icons';
  font-style: normal;
  font-weight: 400;
  src: url(https://fonts.gstatic.com/s/materialicons/v70/flUhRq6tzZclQEJ-Vdg-IuiaDsNc.woff2) format('woff2');
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Then, as we are going to use pseudo elements, some paddings and extra settings to create space for icons are applied:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
.toggle-list__list a {
    padding-left: calc(8px + 25px);
}

.toggle-list__list a::before {
    content: '';
    width: 0;
    height: 0;
    display: inline-block;
    font-family: 'Material Icons';
    font-size: 18px;
    transform: translateX(-25px) translateY(3px);
    /* Display Optimizing */
    -webkit-font-smoothing: antialiased;
    text-rendering: optimizeLegibility;
    -moz-osx-font-smoothing: grayscale;
    font-feature-settings: 'liga';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now, it's time to add the actual icons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use Devtools (The tool opened by right click and then Inspect Element) to see the list items' IDs, and we are finally going to set the actual content of the pseudo elements (icons):&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Navigation */
#n-mainpage-description a::before {
    content: 'home';
}

#n-recentchanges a::before {
    content: 'auto_awesome';
}

#n-randompage a::before {
    content: 'shuffle';
}

#n-portal a::before {
    content: 'forum';
}

#n-help-mediawiki a::before {
    content: 'help_center';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, Material Icons supports certain strings (used here) and code points for an certain icon.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For what strings or code points could be used for Material Icons, see [https://fonts.google.com/icons Icons - Google Fonts].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Feel free to add more rules for your own site, for example one of the authors' site got an admin noticeboard:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot; highlight=1&gt;
#n-adminnoticeboard a::before {
    content: 'groups';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;#n-...&lt;/code&gt; part corresponds with the system message you used in your [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Mobile skins{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>0aai33zv3r7xj81kf6yylkarjp7exju</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/mnw-simplified-anonta/de</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1563583</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402051</id>
      <parentid>5388337</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:36:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3976" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

Du kannst die Mon-Sprache in Wikipedia tippen, ohne weitere Software zu installieren.

Mache dies, um es zu aktivieren:

# Klicke das Suchfeld oben in der Seite.
# Klicke auf das kleine Tastatursymbol, das in der Nähe des Suchfelds erscheint.
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Mon Simplified Anonta&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Klicke &quot;...&quot; am Ende der Liste. Ein Menü wird erscheinen.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;ဘာသာ မန်&quot; in the panel. You can easily do it by searching for &quot;mon&quot; in Latin letters. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Mon Simplified Anonta&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To disable this special keyboard and go back to type usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.  To re-enable the keyboard, press Ctrl-M, or repeat the steps above.
&lt;/div&gt;

Um Mon-Buchstaben zu tippen, verwende die Tabelle unten:
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
! Um diesen Buchstaben zu tippen...
! Tippe diese Tastaturtasten:
! Anmerkungen:
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Nummern ohne Umschalttaste
|-
|ၝ
|`
|
|-
|၁
|1
|
|-
|၂
|2
|
|-
|၃
|3
|
|-
|၄
|4
|
|-
|၅
|5
|
|-
|၆
|6
|
|-
|၇
|7
|
|-
|၈
|8
|
|-
|၉
|9
|
|-
|၀
|0
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |Nummern mit Umschalttaste
|-
|ဎ
|~`
|
|-
|ဍ
|!
|
|-
|ဏ္ဍ
|@
|
|-
|ဋ
|#
|
|-
|ိဲ
|$
|I + AI
|-
|ဵ
|^
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;E above&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|ရ
|&amp;
|
|-
|ဂ
|*
|
|-
|×
|_
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |QWERTY-Reihe ohne Umschalttaste
|-
|q
|ဆ
|
|-
|w
|တ
|
|-
|e
|န
|
|-
|r
|မ
|
|-
|t
|အ
|
|-
|y
|ပ
|
|-
|u
|က
|
|-
|i
|ၚ
|
|-
|o
|သ
|
|-
|p
|စ
|
|-
|[
|ဟ
|
|-
|]
|ဩ
|
|-
|\
|ၑ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |QWERTY-Reihe mit Umschalttaste
|-
|Q
|ၛ
|
|-
|W
|ဝ
|
|-
|E
|ဣ
|
|-
|R
|ၟ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mon medial MA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|T
|ဳ
| Mon II
|-
|Y
|ၠ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Mon medial LA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|U
|ဥ
|
|-
|I
|၎
|
|-
|O
|ဿ
|
|-
|P
|ဏ
|
|-
|{
|ဨ
|
|-
| }
|အဴ
|
|-
|&lt;nowiki&gt;|&lt;/nowiki&gt;
|ဋ္ဌ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |ASDF-Reihe ohne Umschalttaste
|-
|a
|ေ
|E. Tippe dies '''nach''' den Buchstaben
|-
|s
|ျ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;medial YA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|d
|ိ
|I
|-
|f
|်
| ASAT
|-
|g
|ါ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;tall AA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|h
|ဴ
| Mon O
|-
|j
|ြ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;medial RA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|k
|ု
| U
|-
|l
|ူ
| UU
|-
|;
|း
| VISARGA
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |ASDF-Reihe mit Umschalttaste
|-
|A
|ဗ
|
|-
|S
|ှ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;medial HA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|D
|ီ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;II&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|F
|္
| VIRAMA
|-
|G
|ွ
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;medial WA&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|H
|ံ
| ANUSVARA
|-
|J
|ဲ
| AI
|-
|K
|ဒ
|
|-
|L
|ဓ
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |ZCXV-Reihe ohne Umschalttaste
|-
|z
|ဖ
|
|-
|x
|ထ
|
|-
|c
|ခ
|
|-
|v
|လ
|
|-
|b
|ဘ
|
|-
|n
|ည
|
|-
|m
|ာ
| AA
|-
|,
|ယ
|
|-
|.
|ၜ
|
|-
|/
|။
|
|-
| colspan=&quot;3&quot; |ZXCV mit Umschalttaste
|-
|Z
|ဇ
|
|-
|X
|ဌ
|
|-
|C
|ဃ
|
|-
|V
|ဠ
|
|-
|B
|ၐ
|
|-
|N
|ဉ
|
|-
|M
|÷
|
|-
|&lt;
|ၞ
| Mon Mediales-NA
|-
|?
|၊
|
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This keyboard layout is based on the [https://help.keyman.com/keyboard/mon_anonta/1.0.1/mon_anonta Mon Anonta layout published by Keyman]. However, in the original Anonta layout, the ေ sign (E, on the 'a' key) is typed before the letter, and in this layout it is typed after the letter.
&lt;/div&gt;</text>
      <sha1>1ggyvwd5zqnjhuzywnh40zsy0h43aat</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Lakeus/ur</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1564402</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401687</id>
      <parentid>5293588</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:34:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24458" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin|templatemode=
|name          = Lakeus
|status        = stable
|username      = Lakejason0
|author        = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Lakejason0
* Light beacon
* Dianliang233
* Winston Sung
* ...
|image         = SkinLakeus.png
|imagesize     = 320
|version       = 1.1.12
|update        = 2022-08-07
|mediawiki     = 1.36+
|php           = 
|compatibility policy = rel
|license       = GPL-3.0-or-later
|download      = {{GithubDownload|lakejason0|mediawiki-skins-Lakeus|translatewiki=1}}
|translate     = mwgithub-lakeus
|example       = [https://skins.toolforge.org/index.php?useskin=lakeus Example on MediaWiki Skins Wiki]
|compatibility = 
|parameters    = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder&lt;/code&gt;
}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Lakeus''' is a skin that aims to provide a simple but all-functional experience.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's named after a character in the novel of one of the authors, Lakejason0.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Installation ==
&lt;/div&gt;
{{SkinInstall
|download-link=[https://github.com/lakejason0/mediawiki-skins-Lakeus/releases/latest &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Download&lt;/span&gt;]
|registration=Yes
}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Features ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Simple but all-functional (at least most of them should work).&lt;/span&gt;
* جاوا اسکرپٹ کے غیر فعال ہونے پر کام کرتا ہے۔
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Customization through CSS variables.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Responsive design.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Should work with desktop and tablet; on very narrow phones the sidebar menu might be too wide to close.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A Theme designer.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By enabling it in your preferences you can change and preview the theme in real time.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For the most of time, only a few tweaks on basic variables are needed and it will produce an automagically calculated theme for you.&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It might be a bit buggy and unstable, so be sure to report any of the problems to me!&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can always disable automatic calculation if you are not satisfied.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Planned Features ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[phab:T244392|WVUI search bar]], the same as in the new {{ll|Skin:Vector|nsp=0}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* جب جاوا اسکرپٹ موجود نہ ہو تب بھی جلد کو قابل استعمال ہونا چاہیے۔ &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Several handy features may not be available though.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The skin made a dedicated menu for site that uses a language with LanguageConverter variants (e.g. Chinese (&lt;code&gt;zh&lt;/code&gt;) and Serbian).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When no variants available, the menu should be invisible.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;RTL support hasn't been tested well, but main features are confirmed RTL compatible (e.g. sidebar menus).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Customization ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== CSS variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your CSS may not work in several special pages (like [[Special:Preferences|{{int|preferences}}]]); it's an intended behavior of MediaWiki core due to security concerns, but site admins could set {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages|$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}} to {{phpi|true}} to bypass it after understanding the risks.&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lakeus supports customization through CSS variables.&lt;/span&gt; ذیل میں تھیم تیار کرنے کے کئی طریقے ہیں، اور نتیجہ (سی ایس ایس کوڈ ہونا چاہیے) کو لاگو کرنے کے لیے آپ کو اسے &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; میں کاپی کرنا ہوگا، جو کہ تمام ویکی صارفین کے لیے &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; اور اپنے لیے &lt;code&gt;Special:MyPage/Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; پر پایا جا سکتا ہے۔
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Theme Designer ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using the theme designer would be easier for anyone (at least I hope so).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll only need to change the basic variables and the rest will be automatically calculated.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable the auto calculation for each variable that you don't really like the auto calculated result of it, and manually tweak it as you like.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To enable it, go to the preferences, select &quot;Appearance&quot;, and you can find the option when the skin Lakeus is selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once enabled, it would load on every page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Basically all the buttons and form inputs do what it literally means; just try them out if you are a bit confused.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There ''are'' some variables that do not appear on every page, and they would be listed below:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interface message box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These elements appears in situations like that a user group setting is successfully applied when JavaScript disabled, translation page edit notice warning, MediaWiki exceptions that appears on page editing, user talk page notices with no Echo and other notification extensions installed, and so on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Preset themes ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There will be some preset theme that is already here for you to use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can share your own theme on the talk page as well.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Come back later if there isn't any.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===== Vintage =====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A vintage theme, last exported on 1.1.7.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #8e860a;
    --color-secondary: #eeebe7;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: rgba(238,235,231,0);
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #eeebe7;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #8c8985;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #8e860a;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-bar: #8c8985;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #8e860a;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0,0,0,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #000000;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #9b9b9b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-content: #24220a;
    --background-color-body: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #bcb9b5;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #8e860a;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #e4e1dd;
    --border-color-toc: #b2afab;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #e9e6e2;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #9e9c98;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #dfdcd8;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(44,44,44,0.1);
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #dad7d3;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===== Ocean =====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A theme with light blue color scheme, last exported on 1.1.8.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #3366cc;
    --color-secondary: #f4fcff;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: #e2f4fe;
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #f4fcff;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #91989b;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #3366cc;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-bar: #91989b;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #f4fcff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #3366cc;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(35,93,194,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #91989b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #0955b8;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-content: #000000;
    --background-color-body: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #c1c9cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #3366cc;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #eaf2f5;
    --border-color-toc: #b7bfc2;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #eff7fa;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #a4abae;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #e5ecef;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --text-color-portlet-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(112,147,255,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #e2f4fe;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Manually change the variables ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Below is the default setting of CSS variables; modify these settings and put the result into your &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --background-color-base: white;
  --background-color-body: white;
  --background-color-content: white;
  --background-color-footer: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list: white;
  --background-color-portlet-body: white;
  --background-color-toggle-list-card: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-edit-options: #eee;
  --background-color-search-suggestions: #fff;
  --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #1d5492;
  --background-color-search-input: #fff;
  --background-color-toc: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #eaecf0;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fee7e6;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fef6e7;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d5fdf4;
  --background-color-user-message: #ffce7b;
  --background-color-wikitable: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #eaecf0;
  --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-content: #ccc;
  --border-color-toggle-list: #ddd;
  --border-color-search-suggestions: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-search-bar: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-portlet-body: var(--color-gray);
  --border-color-header-tab: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-toc: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #d33;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fc3;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
  --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
  --border-color-wikitable: #a2a9b1;
  --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
  --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #000000;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item: #1c1c1c;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-content: #000000;
  --text-color-header: #000000;
  --text-color-body: #000000;
  --text-color-footer: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
  --text-color-user-message: #000000;
  --text-color-wikitable: #202122;
  --icon-filter-header: unset;
  --color-search-suggestions-text: #000;
  --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #fff;
  --color-tagline: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #54595d;
  --color-accent-header-tab-new: #54595d;
  --color-header: white;
  --color-base: #54595d;
  --color-gray: #a2a9b1;
  --color-gray-2: #eaecf0;
  --color-link: #0645ad;
  --color-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-new: #d33;
  --color-link-new--visited: #a55858;
  --color-link-new--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-external: #36b;
  --color-link-external--visited: #636;
  --color-link-external--active: #b63;
  --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
  --color-footer-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-footer-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-toc-number: #202122;
  --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
  --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
  --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
  --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
  --header-elevation: var(--elevation);
  --mask-background: rgba( 0, 0, 0, 0.8 );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to change the header's color to a light blue (e.g. &lt;code&gt;#4FC3F7&lt;/code&gt;), it would be:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --color-header: #4FC3F7;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Parameters ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Parameter&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Description&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean&lt;/span&gt;
| {{phpi|true}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Determines whether to show the link to the skin's repository in the footer.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLogos}}
|
|
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For now, only &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wordmark&lt;/code&gt; are recognized; keys like &lt;code&gt;svg&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1x&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1.5x&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;2x&lt;/code&gt; are not used by the skin.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notice that other skins may utilize the image provided by &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; '''AND''' other keys as well, so do not rely on the key to provide a icon only for this skin.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean&lt;/span&gt;
| {{phpi|false}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Determines whether to add a skin provided border to site notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enabling it can be useful for plain text notices, but if you've already got a border in your site notice content, you can leave it disabled.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sidebar icons ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately, it's not easy to add icons to the skin without including many images on page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you can bear the loading time of web font icons, you can try this out as follows.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start with, include the icon font face (in this whole example, Material Icons) in your CSS (&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may have loaded some font faces in other places other than &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, in which case just ensure that they don't conflict with each other.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* MD Icons */
/* fallback */
@font-face {
  font-family: 'Material Icons';
  font-style: normal;
  font-weight: 400;
  src: url(https://fonts.gstatic.com/s/materialicons/v70/flUhRq6tzZclQEJ-Vdg-IuiaDsNc.woff2) format('woff2');
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Then, as we are going to use pseudo elements, some paddings and extra settings to create space for icons are applied:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
.toggle-list__list a {
    padding-left: calc(8px + 25px);
}

.toggle-list__list a::before {
    content: '';
    width: 0;
    height: 0;
    display: inline-block;
    font-family: 'Material Icons';
    font-size: 18px;
    transform: translateX(-25px) translateY(3px);
    /* Display Optimizing */
    -webkit-font-smoothing: antialiased;
    text-rendering: optimizeLegibility;
    -moz-osx-font-smoothing: grayscale;
    font-feature-settings: 'liga';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now, it's time to add the actual icons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use Devtools (The tool opened by right click and then Inspect Element) to see the list items' IDs, and we are finally going to set the actual content of the pseudo elements (icons):&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Navigation */
#n-mainpage-description a::before {
    content: 'home';
}

#n-recentchanges a::before {
    content: 'auto_awesome';
}

#n-randompage a::before {
    content: 'shuffle';
}

#n-portal a::before {
    content: 'forum';
}

#n-help-mediawiki a::before {
    content: 'help_center';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, Material Icons supports certain strings (used here) and code points for an certain icon.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For what strings or code points could be used for Material Icons, see [https://fonts.google.com/icons Icons - Google Fonts].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Feel free to add more rules for your own site, for example one of the authors' site got an admin noticeboard:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot; highlight=1&gt;
#n-adminnoticeboard a::before {
    content: 'groups';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;#n-...&lt;/code&gt; part corresponds with the system message you used in your [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Mobile skins{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ftxh0rpbs4j5ravxetr2zwx64sr84xi</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:System message/539/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1565895</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402548</id>
      <parentid>5272400</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:26:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="53" xml:space="preserve">pour le noyau, dans $1 ajoutez les clés des messages</text>
      <sha1>75qlalcye5gqvq71m826j8fbhrenlx6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:System message/542/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1565901</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402532</id>
      <parentid>5272393</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:25:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="81" xml:space="preserve">pour les extensions, dans $1 ajoutez une ligne sous le nom de l'extension ainsi :</text>
      <sha1>p85w10twqfe154gfgd6cl1hvi196a8l</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:LiquidThreads/de</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1566889</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402082</id>
      <parentid>5275241</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:45:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4038" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
[[Extension:LiquidThreads|LiquidThreads]] is a discussion system for MediaWiki that adds forum-like features to discussion pages.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This page is still developing; these are only basic instructions.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Grundlagen ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Posting a new discussion ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To post a new discussion, click on the &quot;Start new discussion&quot; link at the top of the discussion page.

[[File:LiquidThreads New Discussion Link.png|500px]]

=== Hinzufügen einer Antwort ===
[[File:LiquidThreads Reply Button.png]]

To add a reply to a thread, click on the &quot;Add a reply&quot; link at the bottom of a thread.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once you have clicked on this button, a form will load allowing you to enter your reply.
&lt;/div&gt;

When you are done, click &quot;Save&quot; to save your reply.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Searching past discussions ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To search past discussions on a page, use the search box at the top of the page.
&lt;/div&gt;

[[File:LiquidThreads Search Box.png|500px]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Editing a post ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To edit a post, move your mouse over the post, then move it over the arrow to the right of the menu.&lt;/span&gt;
Then, click &quot;Edit&quot;.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Edit.png]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Viewing thread history ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To view the history of a thread, click on the &quot;History&quot; link to the right-hand side of the thread's header.

[[File:LiquidThreads Thread Menu History.png]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can navigate between changes made to threads, and view the thread as it existed at certain points of time.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Refactoring ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Moving a post to a new position ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can move a post to a new position on the page with drag-and-drop.&lt;/span&gt;
To activate this for a post, click on &quot;Drag to a new location&quot; under the &quot;More&quot; menu.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Drag.png]]

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once you've clicked on this, you can drag the thread to a new location.&lt;/span&gt;
[[File:LiquidThreads drop points.png|600px|thumb|left]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Writing a thread summary ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To write or edit a thread summary, click on the &quot;Summarize&quot; option, to the right of the section heading.

[[File:LiquidThreads Thread Menu Summarize.png]]

== Verwaltungsaufgaben ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Toggling LiquidThreads on a page ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To activate LiquidThreads on a specific page on a wiki where LiquidThreads is opt-in, add 
 &lt;kbd&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#useliquidthreads:1}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/kbd&gt; 
to the page's source code. To deactivate LiquidThreads on a specific page on a wiki where LiquidThreads is opt-out add 
 &lt;kbd&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;{{#useliquidthreads:0}}&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/kbd&gt; 
to the page's source code.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Removing a post ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To remove a post, [[#Editing a post|edit it]], and remove all of its content.
If it has no replies with content in them, then it will not be shown.
The previous content of the post will still be available in its page history.

Administrators can delete individual posts.
If you are one, then to do this, move your mouse over the post, and then over the arrow on the toolbar.
Then, select &quot;Delete&quot; from the options.

[[File:LiquidThreads Menu Delete.png]]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Restoring a post ===
&lt;/div&gt;
To restore a previously-removed post, you should [[#Viewing thread history|view the thread's history]], and find the revision before that thread was removed. [TBC]

[[Category:Extension help|LiquidThreads{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9lsxxi54476g5efnnnrv0ko4wq7bl4z</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Bouquet/de</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1567123</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401859</id>
      <parentid>5275549</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:06:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2570" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Bouquet
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Automattic — Originalcode (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki-Portierung
|description     = 
|image           = BouquetSkin.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.2.3
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=bouquet &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interface Messages Wiki&lt;/span&gt;]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        =
|phabricator     = Bouquet
}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Bouquet''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;an elegant, simple theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; inspired by the beauty found in flowers&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].
&lt;/div&gt;

== Hauptfunktionen ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Bouquet-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Three [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|themes]]:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** forget-me-not (internal name (for the ''usetheme'' URL parameter and &lt;code&gt;$wgDefaultTheme&lt;/code&gt;) ''forgetmenot'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** pink dogwood (internal name ''pinkdogwood'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** tiger lily (internal name ''tigerlily'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom header/logo image (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Bouquet-skin-logo.png]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, 1100x180 pixels)
&lt;/div&gt;

== Installation ==
{{SkinInstall
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]] &lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>lbq9nj5631tg7rukji62rcvmboy9ekz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:RenameDbPrefix.php/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1571146</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401748</id>
      <parentid>5304354</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:43:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Häufiger Fehler ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4614" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.13|comment=and after}}
{{MW file|renameDbPrefix.php|maintenance/
|class1=RenameDbPrefix
}}
==Details==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''renameDbPrefix.php''' file is a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Maintenance scripts|maintenance script]] to change the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgDBprefix|prefix of database]] tables.
&lt;/div&gt;

Run this script after changing {{ll|$wgDBprefix}} on a wiki.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The wiki will have to get downtime to do this correctly.&lt;/span&gt;

== Argumente ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 75%; border:1px solid #338800; background-color:#FEFEFE;&quot;
|-
! Option !! Description !! Required
|-
| --old || Old db prefix; 0 for none || {{Required}}
|-
| --new || New db prefix; 0 for none || {{Required}}
|}

== Verwendung ==
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;bash&quot; style=&quot;overfow:auto;&quot;&gt;
php maintenance/renameDbPrefix.php --old oldDBprefix --new newDBprefix
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{terminal|text=
$ php maintenance/renameDbPrefix.php --old &quot;hiwiki_&quot; --new &quot;enwiki_&quot;

Renaming DB prefix for tables of wiki from 'hiwiki_' to 'enwiki_'

Renaming table hiwiki_actor to enwiki_actor
Renaming table hiwiki_archive to enwiki_archive
Renaming table hiwiki_bot_passwords to enwiki_bot_passwords
Renaming table hiwiki_category to enwiki_category
Renaming table hiwiki_categorylinks to enwiki_categorylinks
Renaming table hiwiki_change_tag to enwiki_change_tag
Renaming table hiwiki_change_tag_def to enwiki_change_tag_def
Renaming table hiwiki_comment to enwiki_comment
Renaming table hiwiki_content to enwiki_content
Renaming table hiwiki_content_models to enwiki_content_models
Renaming table hiwiki_externallinks to enwiki_externallinks
Renaming table hiwiki_filearchive to enwiki_filearchive
Renaming table hiwiki_image to enwiki_image
Renaming table hiwiki_imagelinks to enwiki_imagelinks
Renaming table hiwiki_interwiki to enwiki_interwiki
Renaming table hiwiki_ip_changes to enwiki_ip_changes
Renaming table hiwiki_ipblocks to enwiki_ipblocks
Renaming table hiwiki_ipblocks_restrictions to enwiki_ipblocks_restrictions
Renaming table hiwiki_iwlinks to enwiki_iwlinks
Renaming table hiwiki_job to enwiki_job
Renaming table hiwiki_l10n_cache to enwiki_l10n_cache
Renaming table hiwiki_langlinks to enwiki_langlinks
Renaming table hiwiki_log_search to enwiki_log_search
Renaming table hiwiki_logging to enwiki_logging
Renaming table hiwiki_module_deps to enwiki_module_deps
Renaming table hiwiki_objectcache to enwiki_objectcache
Renaming table hiwiki_oldimage to enwiki_oldimage
Renaming table hiwiki_page to enwiki_page
Renaming table hiwiki_page_props to enwiki_page_props
Renaming table hiwiki_page_restrictions to enwiki_page_restrictions
Renaming table hiwiki_pagelinks to enwiki_pagelinks
Renaming table hiwiki_protected_titles to enwiki_protected_titles
Renaming table hiwiki_querycache to enwiki_querycache
Renaming table hiwiki_querycache_info to enwiki_querycache_info
Renaming table hiwiki_querycachetwo to enwiki_querycachetwo
Renaming table hiwiki_recentchanges to enwiki_recentchanges
Renaming table hiwiki_redirect to enwiki_redirect
Renaming table hiwiki_revision to enwiki_revision
Renaming table hiwiki_revision_actor_temp to enwiki_revision_actor_temp
Renaming table hiwiki_revision_comment_temp to enwiki_revision_comment_temp
Renaming table hiwiki_searchindex to enwiki_searchindex
Renaming table hiwiki_site_identifiers to enwiki_site_identifiers
Renaming table hiwiki_site_stats to enwiki_site_stats
Renaming table hiwiki_sites to enwiki_sites
Renaming table hiwiki_slot_roles to enwiki_slot_roles
Renaming table hiwiki_slots to enwiki_slots
Renaming table hiwiki_templatelinks to enwiki_templatelinks
Renaming table hiwiki_text to enwiki_text
Renaming table hiwiki_updatelog to enwiki_updatelog
Renaming table hiwiki_uploadstash to enwiki_uploadstash
Renaming table hiwiki_user to enwiki_user
Renaming table hiwiki_user_former_groups to enwiki_user_former_groups
Renaming table hiwiki_user_groups to enwiki_user_groups
Renaming table hiwiki_user_newtalk to enwiki_user_newtalk
Renaming table hiwiki_user_properties to enwiki_user_properties
Renaming table hiwiki_watchlist to enwiki_watchlist
Renaming table hiwiki_watchlist_expiry to enwiki_watchlist_expiry

Done! [57 tables]
}}

== Häufiger Fehler ==
;Invalid prefix!
This error occurs when either the --old or --new value is incorrect. 

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|$wgDBprefix}}
* {{ll|Database field prefixes}}

[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}|renameDbPrefix.php]]
[[Category:Database maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>a4iqa1jcahd3devj23mt0x1a1n6264p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Mctest.php/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1571211</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401741</id>
      <parentid>5382341</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:33:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Häufiger Fehler ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3317" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW file|mctest.php|maintenance/|class1=McTest}}
==Details==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''mctest.php''' is a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Maintenance scripts|MediaWiki maintenance script]] that makes several 'set', 'incr', 'get' requests on every memcached server and shows a report.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Optionen/Argumente ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 75%; border:1px solid #338800; background-color:#FEFEFE;&quot;
|-
! Option
! Beschreibung
! Notwendig
! Standardwert
|-
| --i || Number of iterations || {{optional}} || 100
|-
| --cache || Use servers from this $wgObjectCaches store || {{optional}} ||
|-
| --driver || Either &quot;php&quot; or &quot;pecl&quot; || {{optional}} || php
|-
| --server[:port] || Memcached server to test, with optional port || {{optional}} ||
|}

== Verwendung ==
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;bash&quot; style=&quot;overfow:auto;&quot;&gt;
php maintenance/mctest.php [ --i| --cache| --driver| --server[:port] ]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Basic test ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{terminal|text=
$ php maintenance/mctest.php

Warming up connections to cache servers...done
Single and batched operation profiling/test results:
127.0.0.1:11211
 add: 100/100 8ms   set: 100/100 7ms   incr: 100/100 9ms   get: 100/100 (7ms)   delete: 100/100 (1ms)
 setMulti (IB): ✓ 2ms   getMulti (IB): 100/100 0ms   changeTTLMulti (IB): ✓ 1ms   deleteMulti (IB): ✓ 1ms
 setMulti (DB): ✓ 2ms   getMulti (DB): 100/100 0ms   changeTTLMulti (DB): ✓ 1ms   deleteMulti (DB): ✓ 1ms
}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Test with custom iterations ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{terminal|text=
$ php maintenance/mctest.php --i 500

Warming up connections to cache servers...done
Single and batched operation profiling/test results:
127.0.0.1:11211
 add: 500/500 9ms   set: 500/500 7ms   incr: 500/500 7ms   get: 500/500 (9ms)   delete: 500/500 (7ms)
 setMulti (IB): ✓ 14ms   getMulti (IB): 500/500 3ms   changeTTLMulti (IB): ✓ 7ms   deleteMulti (IB): ✓ 7ms
 setMulti (DB): ✓ 13ms   getMulti (DB): 500/500 3ms   changeTTLMulti (DB): ✓ 7ms   deleteMulti (DB): ✓ 7ms
}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Test with custom server and port ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{terminal|text=
$ php maintenance/mctest.php &quot;127.0.0.1:12345&quot;

Warming up connections to cache servers...done
Single and batched operation profiling/test results:
127.0.0.1:12345
 add: 0/100 0ms   set: 0/100 0ms   incr: 100/100 0ms   get: 0/100 (0ms)   delete: 0/100 (0ms)
 setMulti (IB): ✗ 0ms   getMulti (IB): 0/100 0ms   changeTTLMulti (IB): ✗ 0ms   deleteMulti (IB): ✗ 0ms
 setMulti (DB): ✗ 0ms   getMulti (DB): 0/100 0ms   changeTTLMulti (DB): ✗ 0ms   deleteMulti (DB): ✗ 0ms
}}

== Häufiger Fehler ==
; MediaWiki isn't configured for Memcached usage
This error occurs when your MediaWiki installation is not configured properly with memcached server.

; MediaWiki isn't configured with a cache named '$cache'
This indicates that you have not configured the '$cache' properly in $wgObjectCaches. Check [[LocalSettings.php]] for configuration details.


== Siehe auch ==
* [[Manual:memcached]]
* [[Manual:Performance tuning]]
* [[Manual:findDeprecated.php]]

[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}|mctest.php]]
[[Category:Development maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>n3waqsqzue0wwuopw3v4rr2o3y2nl24</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:MakeTestEdits.php/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1573343</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401734</id>
      <parentid>5382365</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:31:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Gültiger Benutzername eines vorhandenen Benutzers auf den Wiki&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2426" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.27|comment=and after}}
{{MW file|makeTestEdits.php|maintenance/|class1=MakeTestEdits}}

== Details ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''makeTestEdits.php''' maintenance script allows a developer to made random edits for testing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is a very helpful feature for those who run test wiki and want to create some random pages to testing a new version or patch.&lt;/span&gt;

== Optionen/Argumente ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 75%; border:1px solid #338800; background-color:#FEFEFE;&quot;
|-
! width=&quot;15%&quot; | Option
! Beschreibung
! Notwendig?
! Standardwert
|-
| --user || Gültiger Benutzername eines vorhandenen Benutzers auf den Wiki || {{Required}} ||
|-
| --count || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Number of edits to be made&lt;/span&gt; || {{Required}} || 
|-
| --namespace || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Namespace number in which edits need to be made&lt;/span&gt; || {{Optional}} || 0 (Main namespace)
|}

== Verwendung ==
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;bash&quot; style=&quot;overfow:auto;&quot;&gt;
php maintenance/makeTestEdits.php --user UserName --count EditCounts [--namespace NamespaceNumer]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Making 20 edits with username Foo ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{terminal|text=
$ php maintenance/makeTestEdits.php --user &quot;Foo&quot; --count 20

Edited Page 81
Edited Page 4d
Edited Page 24
Edited Page d8
Edited Page 3f
Edited Page ce
Edited Page d2
Edited Page 17
Edited Page 06
Edited Page 89
Edited Page 34
Edited Page 3b
Edited Page a4
Edited Page f9
Edited Page b8
Edited Page 72
Edited Page e5
Edited Page dd
Edited Page 53
Edited Page a3
Done
}}

{{note|1=Spaces inside a username must be replaced with underscores ( _ ) or use double quotation like &quot;Foo Bar&quot;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Common error ==
&lt;/div&gt;
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No such user exists.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This indicates that the username is not a valid username of an existing user on wiki. If the username contains spaces, see ''Tip 1'' above.&lt;/span&gt;

== Siehe auch ==
* [[Manual:Edit.php|Edit.php]]
* [[Manual:reassignEdits.php|ReassignEdits.php]]
* [[Manual:rollbackEdits.php|RollbackEdits.php]]

[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Content maintenance scripts]]</text>
      <sha1>odkazlbtt9iw80b04kh5hl9f5l2dqio</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401736</id>
      <parentid>5401734</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:31:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Häufiger Fehler ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2374" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.27|comment=and after}}
{{MW file|makeTestEdits.php|maintenance/|class1=MakeTestEdits}}

== Details ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''makeTestEdits.php''' maintenance script allows a developer to made random edits for testing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is a very helpful feature for those who run test wiki and want to create some random pages to testing a new version or patch.&lt;/span&gt;

== Optionen/Argumente ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 75%; border:1px solid #338800; background-color:#FEFEFE;&quot;
|-
! width=&quot;15%&quot; | Option
! Beschreibung
! Notwendig?
! Standardwert
|-
| --user || Gültiger Benutzername eines vorhandenen Benutzers auf den Wiki || {{Required}} ||
|-
| --count || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Number of edits to be made&lt;/span&gt; || {{Required}} || 
|-
| --namespace || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Namespace number in which edits need to be made&lt;/span&gt; || {{Optional}} || 0 (Main namespace)
|}

== Verwendung ==
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;bash&quot; style=&quot;overfow:auto;&quot;&gt;
php maintenance/makeTestEdits.php --user UserName --count EditCounts [--namespace NamespaceNumer]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Making 20 edits with username Foo ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{terminal|text=
$ php maintenance/makeTestEdits.php --user &quot;Foo&quot; --count 20

Edited Page 81
Edited Page 4d
Edited Page 24
Edited Page d8
Edited Page 3f
Edited Page ce
Edited Page d2
Edited Page 17
Edited Page 06
Edited Page 89
Edited Page 34
Edited Page 3b
Edited Page a4
Edited Page f9
Edited Page b8
Edited Page 72
Edited Page e5
Edited Page dd
Edited Page 53
Edited Page a3
Done
}}

{{note|1=Spaces inside a username must be replaced with underscores ( _ ) or use double quotation like &quot;Foo Bar&quot;}}

== Häufiger Fehler ==
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No such user exists.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This indicates that the username is not a valid username of an existing user on wiki. If the username contains spaces, see ''Tip 1'' above.&lt;/span&gt;

== Siehe auch ==
* [[Manual:Edit.php|Edit.php]]
* [[Manual:reassignEdits.php|ReassignEdits.php]]
* [[Manual:rollbackEdits.php|RollbackEdits.php]]

[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Content maintenance scripts]]</text>
      <sha1>k2t6iic3zfkmz1da5cro83t6nmzxg7a</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401738</id>
      <parentid>5401736</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:32:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Anzahl an vorzunehmende Bearbeitungen&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2329" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW version|version=1.27|comment=and after}}
{{MW file|makeTestEdits.php|maintenance/|class1=MakeTestEdits}}

== Details ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''makeTestEdits.php''' maintenance script allows a developer to made random edits for testing.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is a very helpful feature for those who run test wiki and want to create some random pages to testing a new version or patch.&lt;/span&gt;

== Optionen/Argumente ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 75%; border:1px solid #338800; background-color:#FEFEFE;&quot;
|-
! width=&quot;15%&quot; | Option
! Beschreibung
! Notwendig?
! Standardwert
|-
| --user || Gültiger Benutzername eines vorhandenen Benutzers auf den Wiki || {{Required}} ||
|-
| --count || Anzahl an vorzunehmende Bearbeitungen || {{Required}} || 
|-
| --namespace || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Namespace number in which edits need to be made&lt;/span&gt; || {{Optional}} || 0 (Main namespace)
|}

== Verwendung ==
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;bash&quot; style=&quot;overfow:auto;&quot;&gt;
php maintenance/makeTestEdits.php --user UserName --count EditCounts [--namespace NamespaceNumer]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Making 20 edits with username Foo ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{terminal|text=
$ php maintenance/makeTestEdits.php --user &quot;Foo&quot; --count 20

Edited Page 81
Edited Page 4d
Edited Page 24
Edited Page d8
Edited Page 3f
Edited Page ce
Edited Page d2
Edited Page 17
Edited Page 06
Edited Page 89
Edited Page 34
Edited Page 3b
Edited Page a4
Edited Page f9
Edited Page b8
Edited Page 72
Edited Page e5
Edited Page dd
Edited Page 53
Edited Page a3
Done
}}

{{note|1=Spaces inside a username must be replaced with underscores ( _ ) or use double quotation like &quot;Foo Bar&quot;}}

== Häufiger Fehler ==
; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;No such user exists.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This indicates that the username is not a valid username of an existing user on wiki. If the username contains spaces, see ''Tip 1'' above.&lt;/span&gt;

== Siehe auch ==
* [[Manual:Edit.php|Edit.php]]
* [[Manual:reassignEdits.php|ReassignEdits.php]]
* [[Manual:rollbackEdits.php|RollbackEdits.php]]

[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Content maintenance scripts]]</text>
      <sha1>craepq66zpiy72cs6zt5oll8sl30up1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:PurgeExpiredWatchlistItems.php/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1573356</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401831</id>
      <parentid>5290703</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:58:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Häufiger Fehler ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1569" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW 1.35|and after}}
{{maintenance script | name = purgeExpiredWatchlistItems.php }}
== Details ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''purgeExpiredWatchlistItems.php''' is a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Maintenance scripts|maintenance script]] that deletes expired rows from the {{ll|Manual:watchlist table|watchlist}} and {{ll|Manual:watchlist_expiry table|watchlist_expiry}} database tables.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Optionen ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This script doesn't have any of its own parameters, and the most useful of the generic parameters is probably &lt;code&gt;--batch-size&lt;/code&gt;, which determines how many rows will be deleted on each run (defaults to 500).
&lt;/div&gt;

== Verwendung ==
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;bash&quot; style=&quot;overfow:auto;&quot;&gt;
php maintenance/purgeExpiredWatchlistItems.php
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{terminal|text=
$ php maintenance/purgeExpiredWatchlistItems.php

7 expired watchlist entries found.
All expired entries purged.
}}

== Häufiger Fehler ==
;Watchlist expiry is not enabled.
An error is thrown if {{manual|$wgWatchlistExpiry}} is not true. Set &lt;code&gt;$wgWatchlistExpiry = true;&lt;/code&gt; to enable.

== Siehe auch ==
* {{manual|$wgWatchlistExpiry}}
* {{manual|$wgWatchlistPurgeRate}}
* {{manual|$wgWatchlistExpiryMaxDuration}}
* {{manual|watchlist_expiry table}}
* {{manual|purgeExpiredWatchlistItems.php}}
* {{ll|Help:Watchlist expiry}}

{{watchlists navigation}}

[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}|PurgeExpiredWatchlistItems.php]]
[[Category:User maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>4kfi7f4prrvel255ndovrho86929a89</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:DeleteTag.php/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1573363</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401832</id>
      <parentid>5382266</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:58:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Häufiger Fehler ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1461" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW file|deleteTag.php|maintenance/
|class1=DeleteTag
}}
== Details ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''deleteTag.php''' is a maintenance script that removes a revision tag from edits and log entries where it was applied.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Argumente ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 75%; border:1px solid #338800; background-color:#FEFEFE;&quot;
|-
! Argument
! Beschreibung
! Notwendig
|-
| tagname || &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Name of the tag to delete&lt;/span&gt; || {{required}}
|}

== Verwendung ==
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;bash&quot; style=&quot;overfow:auto;&quot;&gt;
php maintenance/deleteTag.php tagname
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{terminal|text=
$ php maintenance/deleteTag.php &quot;mobile edit&quot;

Deleting tag 'mobile edit'...
1
The tag has been removed from 1 revisions, deleting the tag itself...
Done.
}}

{{note|1=You can find all valid tags at ''Special:Tags''}}

{{terminal|text=
$ php maintenance/deleteTag.php &quot;visualeditor-switched&quot;

Tags defined by an extension cannot be deleted unless the extension specifically allows it.
}}

{{note|1=Some MediaWiki extensions may not allow tags to be deleted.}}

== Häufiger Fehler ==
; Tag '$tag' not found
This error occurs when an invalid tag name is given. See ''Special:Tags'' for valid tag names.

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Manual:AddChangeTag.php}}
* {{ll|Manual:Tags}}

[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Content maintenance extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>qpkebxbpomhsjb7atlovvf2r6zx9d83</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:ImportSites.php/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1573390</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401833</id>
      <parentid>5382272</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:58:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Häufiger Fehler ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2078" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW file|importSites.php|maintenance/|class1=ImportSites}}
== Details ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''importSites.php''' is a maintenance script that imports site definitions from an XML file into the sites table.
&lt;/div&gt;

== Argumente ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 75%; border:1px solid #338800; background-color:#FEFEFE;&quot;
|-
! Argument
! Beschreibung
! Notwendig
|-
| file || XML file containing site definitions. Use &quot;php://stdin&quot; to read from stdin. || {{required}}
|}

== Verwendung ==
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;bash&quot; style=&quot;overfow:auto;&quot;&gt;
php maintenance/importSites.php file
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

{{Codesample|name=mywikisites.xml|lang=xmlline=1|code=
&lt;sites version=&quot;1.0&quot; xmlns=&quot;http://www.mediawiki.org/xml/sitelist-1.0/&quot;&gt;
	&lt;site type=&quot;mediawiki&quot;&gt;
		&lt;globalid&gt;hewikipedia&lt;/globalid&gt;
		&lt;group&gt;wikipedia&lt;/group&gt;
		&lt;path type=&quot;page_path&quot;&gt;https://he.wikipedia.org/index.php/&lt;/path&gt;
		&lt;path type=&quot;file_path&quot;&gt;https://he.wikipedia.org/&lt;/path&gt;
	&lt;/site&gt;
	&lt;site type=&quot;mediawiki&quot;&gt;
		&lt;globalid&gt;hiwikipedia&lt;/globalid&gt;
		&lt;group&gt;wikipedia&lt;/group&gt;
		&lt;path type=&quot;page_path&quot;&gt;https://hi.wikipedia.org/index.php/&lt;/path&gt;
		&lt;path type=&quot;file_path&quot;&gt;https://hi.wikipedia.org/&lt;/path&gt;
	&lt;/site&gt;
	&lt;site type=&quot;mediawiki&quot;&gt;
		&lt;globalid&gt;wikisite1&lt;/globalid&gt;
		&lt;group&gt;mywikigroup&lt;/group&gt;
		&lt;path type=&quot;page_path&quot;&gt;https://www.wikisite1.org/index.php/&lt;/path&gt;
		&lt;path type=&quot;file_path&quot;&gt;https://www.wikisite1.org/&lt;/path&gt;
	&lt;/site&gt;
&lt;/sites&gt;
}}

{{terminal|text=
$ php maintenance/importSites.php mywikisites.xml

Done.
}}

== Häufiger Fehler ==
; Failed to open $file for writing.
This error occurs when the file does not exist or the user running the script does not have permission to read the file.

If the file does exist, check the file permissions. If you are a root user, you can run the script with sudo.

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Manual:addSite.php}}
* {{ll|Manual:exportSites.php}}
* {{ll|Manual:importSiteScripts.php}}
* {{ll|Manual:sites table}}

[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Content maintenance extensions{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>e5bxxl12eub0z1xyar47bx1kf43t0b3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:ManageForeignResources.php/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1573397</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401835</id>
      <parentid>5382389</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:58:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Häufige Fehler ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3476" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW file|manageForeignResources.php|maintenance/|class1=ManageForeignResources}}
== Details ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''manageForeignResources.php''' is a maintenance script that manages foreign resources registered with ResourceLoader.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This helps developers with downloading, verifying, and updating local copies of upstream libraries registered as ResourceLoader modules.&lt;/span&gt;
Siehe [[phab:source/mediawiki/browse/master/resources/lib/foreign-resources.yaml|resources/lib/foreign-resources.yaml]].

== Optionen/Argumente ==
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;width: 75%; border:1px solid #338800; background-color:#FEFEFE;&quot;
|-
! Option
! Beschreibung
! Notwendig
! Standardwert
|-
| action || One of &quot;update&quot;, &quot;verify&quot; or &quot;make-sri&quot; || {{required}} ||
|-
| module || Name of a single module || {{optional}} || all
|-
| --verbose || Be verbose || {{optional}} || 
|}

Use the '''update''' action to download URLs specified in foreign-resources.yaml and unpack them to the resources directory.
This will also verify them against the integrity hashes.

Use the '''verify''' action to verify that the files currently in the resources directory match what &quot;update&quot; would replace them with.
This is effectively a dry run and will not change any module resources on disk.

Use the '''make-sri''' action to compute an integrity hash for upstreams that do not publish one themselves.
Add or update the URLs in foreign-resources.yaml as needed, but omit (or leave empty) the &quot;integrity&quot; key.
Then, run the &quot;make-sri&quot; action for the module, and copy the integrity into the file.
Then, you can use &quot;verify&quot; or &quot;update&quot; normally.

== Verwendung ==
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;bash&quot; style=&quot;overfow:auto;&quot;&gt;
php maintenance/manageForeignResources.php actionName [ moduleName| --verbose ]
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Updating foreign resources ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{terminal|text=
$ php maintenance/manageForeignResources.php update

... updating 'CLDRPluralRuleParser'
... updating 'html5shiv'
... updating 'jquery'
... updating 'jquery.chosen'
... updating 'jquery.client'
... updating 'jquery.cookie'
... updating 'jquery.form'
... updating 'jquery.fullscreen'
... updating 'jquery.hoverIntent'
... updating 'jquery.i18n'
... updating 'jquery.jStorage'
... updating 'jquery.throttle-debounce'
... updating 'moment'
... updating 'mustache'
... updating 'oojs'
... updating 'oojs-router'
... updating 'ooui'
... updating 'pako'
... updating 'promise-polyfill'
..............................
}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Verifying a module ====
&lt;/div&gt;
{{terminal|text=
$ php maintenance/manageForeignResources.php verify oojs

... verifying 'oojs'

Done!

}}

== Häufige Fehler ==
; Unknown module name
As of 25 Oct 2021, the module name must be one of:
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;bash&quot; style=&quot;overfow:auto;&quot;&gt;
CLDRPluralRuleParser, html5shiv, jquery, jquery.chosen, jquery.client,
jquery.cookie, jquery.form, jquery.fullscreen, jquery.hoverIntent, jquery.i18n,
jquery.jStorage, jquery.throttle-debounce, moment, mustache, oojs, oojs-router,
ooui, pako, promise-polyfill, qunitjs, sinonjs, vue, vuex.
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

== Siehe auch ==
* {{ll|Manual:jsparse.php}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader}}
* {{ll|ResourceLoader/Core modules}}

[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Development maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>qewsb2bgrvw0cqun0j5vaig7bg1vk0l</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Structured Discussions/nl</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1575213</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402621</id>
      <parentid>5293848</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4567" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Structured Discussions Navigation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions (formerly known as Flow) are [[Special:MyLanguage/Structured Discussions|a project]] of the Collaboration team at the Wikimedia Foundation to build a modern discussion and collaboration system for Wikimedia projects.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Quick tour ==
&lt;/div&gt;
[[File:Conversation using Flow.png|thumb|{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How Structured Discussions look - [[Structured Discussions/Sandbox|Try it!]]&lt;/span&gt;]]
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour|Discover on one page why we built Structured Discussions, and how to use it]]''':
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#basics|editing basics]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#post|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#create|create a discussion]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#watch|watch a topic or a whole board]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#notifications|get notifications]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Quick tour#browse|browse and archive subjects]]
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
There is some specific terms concerning Structured Discussions. They have been defined in '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Glossary|the Glossary]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Structured Discussions are not working for you? Please check '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Structured Discussions/Known problems|if you can solve that problem]]'''.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Advanced tools ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Some advanced tools are available, for specific purposes. They have been regrouped on these subjects:
&lt;/div&gt;

;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Activation|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Activation&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;What happens when Structured Discussions are enabled on a page?&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Topics|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Topics&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filter topics, Edit a topic/message, Summarize a topic, Resolve a topic&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Permalinks|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Permalinks&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How to create links to subjects&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Notifications and watchlist|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notifications and watchlist&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The notifications you receive and the different inputs in watchlists&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;How the history system works&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Administration|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Administration&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Hide, Delete, Suppress topics&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Preloading|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Preloading contents on a new Structured Discussions conversation&lt;/span&gt;
;{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/Keyboard shortcuts|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Shortcuts&lt;/span&gt;}}
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Keyboard shortcuts to use on visual editing mode.&lt;/span&gt;

{{ll|Help:Structured Discussions/One_page|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;All documentation on one page.&lt;/span&gt;}}

[[Category:Help{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Structured Discussions{{#translation:}}|*]]</text>
      <sha1>ezmx4y92cr8rxt4sqkyj2sylwbojd97</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:New filters for edit review/Glossary/de</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1581250</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402809</id>
      <parentid>5312276</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:16:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7836" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{ptag|edit-review-improvements}}
{{ERI Navigation}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The following terms are relevant to the Edit Review Improvements project (ERI).&lt;/span&gt; 
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Terms in italics are entries of that glossary.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== ERI components and special terms ==
&lt;/div&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Edit Review Improvements&lt;/span&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also known as '''ERI'''&lt;/span&gt;''
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements|Edit Review Improvements]] (ERI) is a project of the [[Collaboration|Collaboration Team]] that is seeks to reduce the negative effects current edit-review processes can have on new editors to the wikis—while improving edit-review processes overall.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New filters for edit review&lt;/span&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also known as '''[[Special:MyLanguage/Edit Review Improvements/Filters for Special:Recent Changes|Filters for Special:Recent Changes]]'''.&lt;/span&gt;''
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;One of the first product releases of the Edit Review Improvements project is a suite of improvements to the Recent Changes special page that are designed to help reviewers in general to better target their efforts and be more efficient. The improvements also have the potential to particularly benefit new contributors.&lt;/span&gt; 
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ReviewStream&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] is a machine-readable feed that’s designed to be used by a variety of edit-review tools. Like [[RCStream|RCStream]], it will broadcast recent changes from MediaWiki wikis. To the information currently in RCStream, ReviewStream adds additional data designed to improve the edit-review process.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Filter search bar&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. Users click in the Filter Search Bar to begin the process of filtering recent changes, either by clicking to select filters from the ''Dropdown Filter Panel'' (see below) or by typing their names.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Dropdown Filter Panel&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The filter panel  is a dropdown menu that displays a list of filtering options.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Active Filter Display Area&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Part of the ''Recent Changes Page Improvements''. The active filter display area is designed to give users a quick read of their current filter and highlighting settings.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Newcomers&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A new user class defined for ERI denoting registered editors who are very new, having fewer than ten edits and four days of activity. Created because [[Edit Review Improvements#Related documents|research shows]] that such editors are particularly vulnerable to rejections. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Learners&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more days of activity and edits than ''“Newcomers”'' but fewer than ''“Experienced Users”''. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Autoconfirmed.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Experienced Users&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A term defined for ERI denoting registered editors who have more than 30 days of activity and 500 edits. Also the name of a filter in ERI projects. On English Wikipedia, this category corresponds to Extended Confirmed.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== General and wiki concepts relevant to ERI ==
&lt;/div&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Artificial Intelligence&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI uses predictive filters powered by the artificial intelligence (AI) program [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES]. Colloquially, the term [[:en:Artificial_intelligence|artificial intelligence]] is applied when a machine mimics cognitive functions that humans associate with other human minds, such as natural language processing, problem solving or learning. AI is a broad term that’s closely associated with the more specific concept of ''“machine learning”''.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Machine Learning&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;[[:en:Machine_learning|Machine learning]] is a subfield of ''artificial intelligence'' that seeks to give computers the ability to learn tasks they haven’t been specifically programmed to do. ERI uses predictive filters powered by the machine-learning program [https://ores.wikimedia.org/ ORES].&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Accuracy&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI tools offer AI predictive filters at various levels of “accuracy”. Used in this context, accuracy refers to the percentage of search results the filter returns that correctly identify the property the filter is targeting. In other words, the more accurate the filter is, the fewer false positives it produces. (In the AI field, the correct technical term for this is “[[:en:Precision_and_recall|precision]]”.)&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Feed&lt;/span&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Also referred to as a '''Stream'''&lt;/span&gt;''
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A computer feed is a data format used for providing users with frequently updated content. In ERI, [[Edit Review Improvements/ReviewStream|ReviewStream]] is a feed that broadcasts data about recent changes to anti-vandalism and edit-review programs.&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Good faith&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI projects offer User Intent filters, which predict whether an edit was made in good faith. In this sense, the term refers to whether a user’s intention was to contribute to the wiki or damage it. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but who may lack the skill or knowledge to do so successfully. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a [[Special:MyLanguage/Wikimedia:scoring_platform_team|good-faith test]].)&lt;/span&gt;
;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Damage&lt;/span&gt;
:&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;ERI projects offer Contribution Quality filters, which predict whether an edit improves the wiki or damages it. In this sense, “damage” is a general term that covers both vandalism and unintentional errors of formatting, style, fact, etc. A key goal of ERI is enabling reviewers to find and help editors — especially ''newcomers'' — who are trying to contribute in good faith but whose lack of skill or knowledge leads them to cause damage. (ERI’s User Intent filters are powered by the machine-learning program ORES, which includes a “[[m:Research:Revision_scoring_as_a_service#Models|damaging]]” test.)&lt;/span&gt;

[[category:Glossary{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>ptssqvth4a4uz63uu7ndixbgv4c3qdd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Coding conventions/Java/12/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1582940</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401650</id>
      <parentid>5317380</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T14:39:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="30" xml:space="preserve">Maven is used as a build tool.</text>
      <sha1>r1vbjzhxage77dc5yz34ckf4ujs5gyu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Extension registration/116/cs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1584114</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402517</id>
      <parentid>5320981</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:21:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="117" xml:space="preserve">Pro rozšíření využívající [[$1|kontinuální integrace]] Wikimedie, je také třeba přidat závislosti do $2</text>
      <sha1>is2uwgv3g1s9ktmwy7halyct15mbu53</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Reading/Web/Desktop Improvements/229/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1588595</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401959</id>
      <parentid>5335796</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:49:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="92" xml:space="preserve">'''[[$1|Participe de reuniõs online conosco]]''': organizamos reuniões a cada 2-3 semanas.</text>
      <sha1>p5txeh08f2887s9r63f060zuw7fiwp4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Bouquet/ru</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1590425</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401865</id>
      <parentid>5340782</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:07:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2733" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Bouquet
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =&lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Automattic — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)&lt;/span&gt;
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki port&lt;/span&gt;
|description     = 
|image           = BouquetSkin.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.2.3
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=bouquet &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interface Messages Wiki&lt;/span&gt;]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        =
|phabricator     = Bouquet
}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Bouquet''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is described on the WordPress theme site as &quot;an elegant, simple theme&lt;sup&gt;[sic]&lt;/sup&gt; inspired by the beauty found in flowers&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Automattic and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 11 January 2014 for [[ShoutWiki]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Bouquet-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Three [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|themes]]:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** forget-me-not (internal name (for the ''usetheme'' URL parameter and &lt;code&gt;$wgDefaultTheme&lt;/code&gt;) ''forgetmenot'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** pink dogwood (internal name ''pinkdogwood'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** tiger lily (internal name ''tigerlily'')
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Custom header/logo image (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[File:Bouquet-skin-logo.png]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, 1100x180 pixels)
&lt;/div&gt;

==Установка==
{{SkinInstall
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features]] &lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>9wpqbddcqwpk84zkf1zup977g417y8f</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Gamepress/ru</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1590447</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401825</id>
      <parentid>5340811</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:56:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3354" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name         = Gamepress
|status       = stable
|username     = 
|author       =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description  = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Easy-to-use gaming-oriented skin&lt;/span&gt;
|image        = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize    = 350px
|version      = 1.0.7
|update       = 
|mediawiki    = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php          = 5.3+
|license      = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download     = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme       = 
|changelog    = 
|parameters   = 
|example      = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla     = 
|phabricator  = Gamepress
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Gamepress''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Aleksandra Łączek and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 16 January 2014 for {{ll|ShoutWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Three (or four, depending on how you look at it &amp;mdash; the red one is the default/base theme) [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|themes]]:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** blue
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** green
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** orange
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* ''No'' logo image
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* There are three &quot;columns&quot; above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) &amp;mdash; the contents of these are editable via &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If all three messages are empty, as they are by default, then the prefooter area won't be shown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended&lt;/span&gt;

== Установка ==
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>jk8cp31b4bt3f3tjlido95zmnyw5lf7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401855</id>
      <parentid>5401825</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:04:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3411" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Gamepress
|status          = stable
|username        = 
|author          =
* [http://webtuts.pl/themes/ Aleksandra Łączek] — original code (PHP, CSS, etc.)
* {{u|Jack Phoenix}} — MediaWiki port
|description     = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Easy-to-use gaming-oriented skin&lt;/span&gt;
|image           = Gamepress Skin Screenshot.png
|imagesize       = 350px
|version         = 1.0.7
|update          = 
|mediawiki       = {{MW lts branch number}}+
|php             = 5.3+
|license         = GPL-2.0-or-later
|download        = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin}}
|readme          = 
|changelog       = 
|parameters      = 
|example         = [http://mwmsg.shoutwiki.com/wiki/Main_Page?useskin=gamepress Interface Messages Wiki]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        = 
|phabricator     = Gamepress
}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Gamepress''' is a MediaWiki skin ported from the free and open source, GPL-licensed WordPress theme with the same name.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The WordPress theme was written by Aleksandra Łączek and the MediaWiki port was done by [[User:Jack Phoenix|Jack Phoenix]] on 16 January 2014 for {{ll|ShoutWiki}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==Main features==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* '''Two''' navigation &quot;portlets&quot; &amp;mdash; custom, drop-down based menu (&lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-navigation]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;) at the top of the page, and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Sidebar]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; as the right-hand sidebar
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Three (or four, depending on how you look at it &amp;mdash; the red one is the default/base theme) [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Theme|themes]]:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** blue
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** green
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
** orange
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* ''No'' logo image
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* There are three &quot;columns&quot; above the footer area (footer contains standard copyright stuff, about/ToU/privacy policy links, etc.) &amp;mdash; the contents of these are editable via &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-1]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-2]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;[[MediaWiki:Gamepress-prefooter-3]]&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;; if '''any''' of them has any content at all, the prefooter area will be rendered.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If all three messages are empty, as they are by default, then the prefooter area won't be shown.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If and when you want to give these prefooter columns a header, use a ''manual'' {{tmpl|0=&lt;code class=mw-highlight&gt;{{^(}}{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}} {{attr|class|&quot;widget-title&quot;}}{{)^}}$1{{^(}}/{{#tag:span|h3|class=nt}}{{)^}}&lt;/code&gt;|Title goes here}} instead of wikitext so that the text renders as intended&lt;/span&gt;

== Установка ==
{{SkinInstall
|Gamepress
|registration=required
}}

[[Category:Skins by ShoutWiki{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins based on WordPress themes{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins using deprecated features{{#translation:}}]]&lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>qvypbames56ngx35y2e9h6gu2h67arg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Lakeus/ru</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1590454</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401686</id>
      <parentid>5340827</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T18:34:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24171" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Skin|templatemode=
|name          = Lakeus
|status        = stable
|username      = Lakejason0
|author        = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* Lakejason0
* Light beacon
* Dianliang233
* Winston Sung
* ...
|image         = SkinLakeus.png
|imagesize     = 320
|version       = 1.1.12
|update        = 2022-08-07
|mediawiki     = 1.36+
|php           = 
|compatibility policy = rel
|license       = GPL-3.0-or-later
|download      = {{GithubDownload|lakejason0|mediawiki-skins-Lakeus|translatewiki=1}}
|translate     = mwgithub-lakeus
|example       = [https://skins.toolforge.org/index.php?useskin=lakeus Example on MediaWiki Skins Wiki]
|compatibility = 
|parameters    = &lt;nowiki/&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder&lt;/code&gt;
}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;'''Lakeus''' is a skin that aims to provide a simple but all-functional experience.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It's named after a character in the novel of one of the authors, Lakejason0.&lt;/span&gt;

== Установка ==
{{SkinInstall
|download-link=[https://github.com/lakejason0/mediawiki-skins-Lakeus/releases/latest Скачайте]
|registration=Yes
}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Features ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Simple but all-functional (at least most of them should work).&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Works when JavaScript is disabled.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Customization through CSS variables.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Responsive design.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Should work with desktop and tablet; on very narrow phones the sidebar menu might be too wide to close.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A Theme designer.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;By enabling it in your preferences you can change and preview the theme in real time.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For the most of time, only a few tweaks on basic variables are needed and it will produce an automagically calculated theme for you.&lt;/span&gt;
** &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It might be a bit buggy and unstable, so be sure to report any of the problems to me!&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can always disable automatic calculation if you are not satisfied.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Planned Features ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A [[phab:T244392|WVUI search bar]], the same as in the new {{ll|Skin:Vector|nsp=0}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Notes ==
&lt;/div&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The skin should be usable even when JavaScript isn't present.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Several handy features may not be available though.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The skin made a dedicated menu for site that uses a language with LanguageConverter variants (e.g. Chinese (&lt;code&gt;zh&lt;/code&gt;) and Serbian).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When no variants available, the menu should be invisible.&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;RTL support hasn't been tested well, but main features are confirmed RTL compatible (e.g. sidebar menus).&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Customization ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== CSS variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Your CSS may not work in several special pages (like [[Special:Preferences|{{int|preferences}}]]); it's an intended behavior of MediaWiki core due to security concerns, but site admins could set {{ll|Manual:$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages|$wgAllowSiteCSSOnRestrictedPages}} to {{phpi|true}} to bypass it after understanding the risks.&lt;/span&gt;}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Lakeus supports customization through CSS variables.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Below are several methods to generate a theme, and to apply the result (should be CSS code) you'll need to copy it to &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, which can be found on &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; for all wiki users, and &lt;code&gt;Special:MyPage/Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt; for yourself.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Theme Designer ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using the theme designer would be easier for anyone (at least I hope so).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You'll only need to change the basic variables and the rest will be automatically calculated.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can disable the auto calculation for each variable that you don't really like the auto calculated result of it, and manually tweak it as you like.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To enable it, go to the preferences, select &quot;Appearance&quot;, and you can find the option when the skin Lakeus is selected.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once enabled, it would load on every page.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Basically all the buttons and form inputs do what it literally means; just try them out if you are a bit confused.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There ''are'' some variables that do not appear on every page, and they would be listed below:&lt;/span&gt;
* &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Interface message box.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;These elements appears in situations like that a user group setting is successfully applied when JavaScript disabled, translation page edit notice warning, MediaWiki exceptions that appears on page editing, user talk page notices with no Echo and other notification extensions installed, and so on.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Preset themes ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There will be some preset theme that is already here for you to use.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can share your own theme on the talk page as well.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Come back later if there isn't any.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===== Vintage =====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A vintage theme, last exported on 1.1.7.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #8e860a;
    --color-secondary: #eeebe7;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: rgba(238,235,231,0);
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #eeebe7;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #8c8985;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #8e860a;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #eeebe7;
    --border-color-search-bar: #8c8985;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #8e860a;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #000000;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0,0,0,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #000000;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #9b9b9b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-content: #24220a;
    --background-color-body: #eeebe7;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #bcb9b5;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #8e860a;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #8e860a;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #e4e1dd;
    --border-color-toc: #b2afab;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #e9e6e2;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #9e9c98;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #dfdcd8;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0,0,0,0.1);
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(44,44,44,0.1);
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #dad7d3;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===== Ocean =====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A theme with light blue color scheme, last exported on 1.1.8.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
    --color-primary: #3366cc;
    --color-secondary: #f4fcff;
    --color-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --color-warning: #ffcc33;
    --color-error: #dd3333;
    --color-success: #14866d;
    --color-header: #e2f4fe;
    --color-link: #0645ad;
    --color-secondary--derived: #f8f9fa;
    --border-color-secoundary--derived: #a2a9b1;
    --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
    --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
    --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
    --background-color-base: #f4fcff;
    --color-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-link--active: #5670e0;
    --color-link-new: #dd3333;
    --color-link-new--visited: #a4000c;
    --color-link-new--active: #ff6a5d;
    --color-link-external: #003da3;
    --color-link-external--visited: #001873;
    --color-link-external--active: #5267d5;
    --header-elevation: unset;
    --text-color-header: #000000;
    --icon-filter-header: unset;
    --background-color-search-suggestions: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-suggestions: #91989b;
    --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #3366cc;
    --color-search-suggestions-text: #000000;
    --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #ffffff;
    --background-color-search-input: #f4fcff;
    --border-color-search-bar: #91989b;
    --background-color-toggle-list: #f4fcff;
    --background-color-toggle-list-card: #3366cc;
    --text-color-toggle-list-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(35,93,194,0.2);
    --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-toggle-list: #91989b;
    --subheader-color-toggle-list: #0955b8;
    --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #ffffff;
    --mask-background: rgba(0,0,0,0.8);
    --background-color-content: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-content: #000000;
    --background-color-body: #f4fcff;
    --text-color-body: #000000;
    --border-color-content: #c1c9cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #3366cc;
    --color-accent-header-tab-new: #3366cc;
    --border-color-header-tab: #eaecf0;
    --color-tagline: rgba(0,0,0,0.5);
    --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
    --background-color-edit-options: #eeeeee;
    --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
    --background-color-toc: #eaf2f5;
    --border-color-toc: #b7bfc2;
    --color-toc-number: #0d0d0d;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #e5e7ea;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffcc33;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #ffe69a;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #dd3333;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fae2e2;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
    --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
    --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d9ebe7;
    --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
    --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
    --background-color-user-message: #ffe4b3;
    --text-color-user-message: #000000;
    --background-color-wikitable: #eff7fa;
    --text-color-wikitable: #030303;
    --border-color-wikitable: #a4abae;
    --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #e5ecef;
    --background-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --text-color-portlet-item: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(51,102,204,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-hover: #0b3c75;
    --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(112,147,255,0.1);
    --text-color-portlet-item-focus: #0b3c75;
    --border-color-portlet-body: #ffffff;
    --background-color-footer: #e2f4fe;
    --text-color-footer: #000000;
    --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
    --color-footer-link--visited: #001f7d;
    --color-footer-link--active: #5670e0;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Manually change the variables ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Below is the default setting of CSS variables; modify these settings and put the result into your &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --background-color-base: white;
  --background-color-body: white;
  --background-color-content: white;
  --background-color-footer: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list: white;
  --background-color-portlet-body: white;
  --background-color-toggle-list-card: #eee;
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-toggle-list-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-portlet-item-hover: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
  --background-color-portlet-item-focus: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.2);
  --background-color-edit-options: #eee;
  --background-color-search-suggestions: #fff;
  --background-color-search-suggestions-current: #1d5492;
  --background-color-search-input: #fff;
  --background-color-toc: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #eaecf0;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-error: #fee7e6;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fef6e7;
  --background-color-interface-message-box-success: #d5fdf4;
  --background-color-user-message: #ffce7b;
  --background-color-wikitable: #f8f9fa;
  --background-color-wikitable-table-head: #eaecf0;
  --border-color-edit-options: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-content: #ccc;
  --border-color-toggle-list: #ddd;
  --border-color-search-suggestions: #c8ccd1;
  --border-color-search-bar: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-portlet-body: var(--color-gray);
  --border-color-header-tab: var(--color-gray-2);
  --border-color-toc: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #a2a9b1;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-error: #d33;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-warning: #fc3;
  --border-color-interface-message-box-success: #14866d;
  --border-color-user-message: #ffa500;
  --border-color-wikitable: #a2a9b1;
  --subheader-color-toggle-list: #6a6a6a;
  --logo-text-color-toggle-list: #000000;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item: #1c1c1c;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-hover: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-toggle-list-item-focus: #3a3a3a;
  --text-color-content: #000000;
  --text-color-header: #000000;
  --text-color-body: #000000;
  --text-color-footer: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-neutral: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-error: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-warning: #000000;
  --text-color-interface-message-box-success: #000000;
  --text-color-user-message: #000000;
  --text-color-wikitable: #202122;
  --icon-filter-header: unset;
  --color-search-suggestions-text: #000;
  --color-search-suggestions-text-current: #fff;
  --color-tagline: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab: var(--color-base);
  --color-accent-header-tab-selected: #54595d;
  --color-accent-header-tab-new: #54595d;
  --color-header: white;
  --color-base: #54595d;
  --color-gray: #a2a9b1;
  --color-gray-2: #eaecf0;
  --color-link: #0645ad;
  --color-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-new: #d33;
  --color-link-new--visited: #a55858;
  --color-link-new--active: #faa700;
  --color-link-external: #36b;
  --color-link-external--visited: #636;
  --color-link-external--active: #b63;
  --color-footer-link: #0645ad;
  --color-footer-link--visited: #0b0080;
  --color-footer-link--active: #faa700;
  --color-toc-number: #202122;
  --font-family: 'Roboto', -apple-system, blinkmacsystemfont, 'Segoe UI', 'Oxygen', 'Ubuntu', 'Cantarell', 'Helvetica Neue', sans-serif;
  --font-family-serif: 'Linux Libertine', 'Times New Roman', 'Liberation Serif', 'Nimbus Roman', 'Noto Serif', 'Times', serif;
  --font-family-headings: var(--font-family-serif);
  --elevation: 0 2px 2px rgba( 0, 0, 0, 10% );
  --header-elevation: var(--elevation);
  --mask-background: rgba( 0, 0, 0, 0.8 );
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
For example, to change the header's color to a light blue (e.g. &lt;code&gt;#4FC3F7&lt;/code&gt;), it would be:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
:root {
  --color-header: #4FC3F7;
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;


=== Параметры ===
{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot;
! Параметр
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Default&lt;/span&gt;
! &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Description&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusShowRepositoryLink}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean&lt;/span&gt;
| {{phpi|true}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Determines whether to show the link to the skin's repository in the footer.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLogos}}
|
|
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For now, only &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;wordmark&lt;/code&gt; are recognized; keys like &lt;code&gt;svg&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1x&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;1.5x&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;2x&lt;/code&gt; are not used by the skin.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Notice that other skins may utilize the image provided by &lt;code&gt;icon&lt;/code&gt; '''AND''' other keys as well, so do not rely on the key to provide a icon only for this skin.&lt;/span&gt;
|-
| {{phpi|$wgLakeusSiteNoticeHasBorder}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Boolean&lt;/span&gt;
| {{phpi|false}}
| &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Determines whether to add a skin provided border to site notice.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Enabling it can be useful for plain text notices, but if you've already got a border in your site notice content, you can leave it disabled.&lt;/span&gt;
|}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Sidebar icons ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Unfortunately, it's not easy to add icons to the skin without including many images on page.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you can bear the loading time of web font icons, you can try this out as follows.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To start with, include the icon font face (in this whole example, Material Icons) in your CSS (&lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may have loaded some font faces in other places other than &lt;code&gt;Lakeus.css&lt;/code&gt;, in which case just ensure that they don't conflict with each other.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* MD Icons */
/* fallback */
@font-face {
  font-family: 'Material Icons';
  font-style: normal;
  font-weight: 400;
  src: url(https://fonts.gstatic.com/s/materialicons/v70/flUhRq6tzZclQEJ-Vdg-IuiaDsNc.woff2) format('woff2');
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Then, as we are going to use pseudo elements, some paddings and extra settings to create space for icons are applied:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
.toggle-list__list a {
    padding-left: calc(8px + 25px);
}

.toggle-list__list a::before {
    content: '';
    width: 0;
    height: 0;
    display: inline-block;
    font-family: 'Material Icons';
    font-size: 18px;
    transform: translateX(-25px) translateY(3px);
    /* Display Optimizing */
    -webkit-font-smoothing: antialiased;
    text-rendering: optimizeLegibility;
    -moz-osx-font-smoothing: grayscale;
    font-feature-settings: 'liga';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Now, it's time to add the actual icons.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can use Devtools (The tool opened by right click and then Inspect Element) to see the list items' IDs, and we are finally going to set the actual content of the pseudo elements (icons):&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot;&gt;
/* Navigation */
#n-mainpage-description a::before {
    content: 'home';
}

#n-recentchanges a::before {
    content: 'auto_awesome';
}

#n-randompage a::before {
    content: 'shuffle';
}

#n-portal a::before {
    content: 'forum';
}

#n-help-mediawiki a::before {
    content: 'help_center';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In this example, Material Icons supports certain strings (used here) and code points for an certain icon.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For what strings or code points could be used for Material Icons, see [https://fonts.google.com/icons Icons - Google Fonts].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Feel free to add more rules for your own site, for example one of the authors' site got an admin noticeboard:&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;css&quot; highlight=1&gt;
#n-adminnoticeboard a::before {
    content: 'groups';
}
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The &lt;code&gt;#n-...&lt;/code&gt; part corresponds with the system message you used in your [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]].
&lt;/div&gt;

[[Category:Mobile skins{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>cpsarpgyp1gh6l8p5jm89v3tjqnro14</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Coding conventions/Java/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1590928</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401653</id>
      <parentid>5342206</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T14:39:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8290" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Development guideline}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page describes the '''coding conventions''' used within files of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Code|MediaWiki codebase]] written in '''Java'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding conventions#All languages|general conventions]] that apply to all program languages, including Java.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Build ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Maven is used as a build tool.&lt;/span&gt;
All projects should inherit from the [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-parent-pom/|discovery-parent-pom]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It configures a number of static analysis tools and linters that will help in keeping projects coherent.&lt;/span&gt;
Code conventions are embodied in the  [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-maven-tool-configs/+/refs/heads/master/src/main/resources/org/wikimedia/discovery/build/tools/checkstyle/checkstyle.xml|checkstyle configuration]] used by that pom.xml and will not be repeated here.
The [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-parent-pom/+/refs/heads/master/README.md|README]] file in that project describes how to use this parent pom.

Java projects hosted on Gerrit should be built by Jenkins by using the [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/integration/config/+/refs/heads/master/jjb/job-templates.yaml#87|-maven-java8-docker template]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Other templates are available to publish documentation and to manage the release process.&lt;/span&gt;

Java projects should be analyzed by [https://sonarcloud.io/organizations/wmftest SonarCloud].

== Java-Version ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of our projects are at the moment targeting Java 8.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We are in the process of transitioning to Java 11.&lt;/span&gt;

== Bibliotheken ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A number of libraries are commonly used throughout our various Java projects.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using the same libraries for similar use cases can help coherence across projects.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That being said, use the list below as suggestions, not as a hard rule.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Production Code ===
&lt;/div&gt;

==== Guava ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Guava is used on a number of projects.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that in some cases, we have dependencies that themselves rely on outdated Guava versions, which prevents us from using the latest version.The features of Guava that we use the most are:&lt;/span&gt;

* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/PreconditionsExplained Preconditions]
* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/ImmutableCollectionsExplained Immutable Collections]
* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/CachesExplained Caches]

==== Lombok ====
While [https://projectlombok.org/features/all Lombok] is not strictly a library, it provides very useful syntactic sugar to Java.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Lombok is an annotation processor executed at compile time, Lombok has no runtime dependencies and is thus not creating compatibility issues.&lt;/span&gt;

Lombok can be further configured by adding a &lt;code&gt;lombok.config&lt;/code&gt; file at the package level, which might be particularly useful to make it play nice with Jackson.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An example of such configuration:&lt;/span&gt;

 lombok.equalsAndHashCode.callSuper = call
 # disable SpotBugs, it does not like generated code by lombok
 lombok.extern.findbugs.addSuppressFBWarnings = true
 lombok.addLombokGeneratedAnnotation = true
 # useful for jackson that will be able to use the all args constructor when deserializing
 lombok.anyConstructor.addConstructorProperties = true

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A few particularly useful features:
&lt;/div&gt;

* [https://projectlombok.org/features/Data @Data]: makes it easy to generate DTO / DO, taking care of all this getters / setters and having a proper, valid &lt;code&gt;equals()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;hashCode()&lt;/code&gt;.
* [https://projectlombok.org/features/SneakyThrows @SneakyThrows]: a better way of dealing with checked exceptions than wrapping them in an unchecked exception.

Depending on your IDE, you might need to install a lombok plugin. See [https://www.projectlombok.org/setup/overview documentation for your specific IDE].

==== JSR 305 ====
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;JSR 305 provides annotations to better document expected behaviour and help detect bugs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those annotations are only compile time dependencies and not required at runtime, they don't generate dependency issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In particular:
&lt;/div&gt;

* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/Nonnull.html @Nonnull] / [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/Nullable.html @Nullable]: specifies that a method parameter or return value should be non-null or nullable.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/ParametersAreNonnullByDefault.html @ParametersAreNonnullByDefault]: all parameters on this class / package / method are expected to be non null unless otherwise specified.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/Immutable.html @Immutable]: this class is immutable.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/ThreadSafe.html @ThreadSafe] / [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/NotThreadSafe.html @NotThreadSafe]: this class is or is not thread safe.

==== JSON / XML ====

[https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson Jackson] is used for most JSON and XML parsing / serialization, with the use of [https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson-annotations annotations].

==== HTTP client ====

[https://hc.apache.org/ Apache HttpComponents] is used as an HTTP client.

As much as possible a single instance of &lt;code&gt;HttpClient&lt;/code&gt; should be shared within an application.
A custom User Agent string should be configured.

=== Testing ===

==== Unit Testing Framework ====

We mostly use [https://junit.org/ JUnit] as a testing framework.
Some projects are using [https://junit.org/junit4/ JUnit 4], while others are using JUnit 5.
Some projects have dependencies on component specific testing libraries that don't support [https://junit.org/junit5/ JUnit 5] yet.
For projects that don't have this limitation, JUnit 5 should be preferred.

==== Mocking ====

[https://site.mockito.org/ Mockito] is used as a mocking framework where needed.

==== HTTP Mocking ====

[https://wiremock.org/docs/ WireMock] is used as an HTTP mock server, which allows testing code that relies on HTTP interactions.
Note that WireMock makes it easy to also test various faults (delays, timeout, etc...).

==== Assertions ====

[https://assertj.github.io/doc/ AssertJ] is our main assertion framework.
In almost all cases AssertJ should be preferred over plain &lt;code&gt;assert&lt;/code&gt;, JUnit assertions or Hamcrest.

== Various conventions ==

=== Unit vs Integration Tests ===

We follow the usual naming conventions to identify [https://maven.apache.org/surefire/maven-surefire-plugin/examples/inclusion-exclusion.html unit tests] vs [https://maven.apache.org/surefire/maven-failsafe-plugin/examples/inclusion-exclusion.html integration tests].

=== Managing &lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt; and defensive programming ===

As much as possible, &lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt; values should be avoided.
[[:en:Null_object_pattern|Null Objects]] should be preferred.
Parameters should be expected to be non null and not explicitly checked, unless they come from an untrusted caller.
Parameters should be marked with &lt;code&gt;@Nonnull&lt;/code&gt; / &lt;code&gt;@Nullable&lt;/code&gt; to allow static analysis tools to validate nullity.

{{Conventions navigation}}</text>
      <sha1>chr710qsfre5q90rmnzi6jt8fm8p4e6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Upgrading/de-formal</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1598188</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402923</id>
      <parentid>5366148</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="49440" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{MW quick download|align={{dir|{{pagelang}}|rtl=left|ltr=right}}}}

== Übersicht ==

=== Dateiübertragung ===

Eine Methode zur Übertragung der Dateien auswählen:

* [[w:de:Wget|wget]]
* Secure copy (sicheres Kopieren) mit [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html SCP] oder [[w:de:WinSCP|WinSCP]]
* [[w:de:SSH File Transfer Protocol|SSH File Transfer Protocol]] (SFTP)
* Einen [[w:de:File Transfer Protocol|FTP]]-Client verwenden.
* Möglicherweise bietet Ihnen Ihr Provider einen Dateimanager als webbasierte Benutzeroberfläche an.
* Irgendeine andere Methode. &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;There is a list of these at [[w:List of file transfer protocols]]&lt;/span&gt;

===Vorbereitung===

Lesen Sie die {{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable release git}}|file=UPGRADE|text=UPGRADE Textdatei, die in MediaWiki enthalten ist}}.

# Überprüfen Sie die Voraussetzungen
# Lesen Sie die RELEASE-NOTES-Datei
# Lesen Sie die UPGRADE-Datei
# Sichern Sie die vorhandenen Dateien und die Datenbank
# Entpacken Sie die neuen Dateien
# Aktualisierung der Erweiterungen
# Starten Sie das Update-Skript, um die Datenbank zu überprüfen.
# Testen Sie das Update.
# Entfernen der Überreste der alten Installationen

== Überprüfen Sie die Anforderungen == 
{{TNT|Security warning 2021-12}}
MediaWiki {{MW stable branch number}} erfordert:

* '''PHP {{MW stable php requirement}}'''+
* Eines der folgenden:
** '''MariaDB {{MW stable MariaDB requirement}}'''+
** '''MySQL {{MW stable mysql requirement}}'''+
** '''PostgreSQL {{MW stable postgresql requirement}}'''+
** '''SQLite {{MW stable sqlite requirement}}'''+

Von Version 1.36 an unterstützt MediaWiki Upgrades nur in Schritten von zwei LTS-Releases (siehe [[phab:T259771]]). Upgrades von älteren Versionen müssen dann in mehreren Schritten durchgeführt werden.
Das bedeutet: ein Upgrade von 1.23 oder älter auf 1.36 muss über ein Upgrade auf 1.27 (oder 1.35) erfolgen, um dann auf die gewünschte Version 1.36 zu aktualisieren.

Wenn Sie PostgreSQL benutzen, lesen Sie bitte auch {{ll|Manual:Upgrading Postgres}}.

Für weitere Informationen lesen Sie bitte {{ll|Manual:Installation requirements}} und {{ll|Compatibility}}.

== Lesen Sie die Versionshinweise ==
In der &quot;Tarball-Distribution&quot; (der .tar-Paket-Datei) oder unter den von [[Special:MyLanguage/Gerrit|Git]] ausgecheckten/exportierten Dateien gibt es eine Reihe von Dateien mit Großbuchstaben in den Dateinamen, von denen eine die '''{{git file|project=mediawiki/core|branch={{MW stable branch git}}|file=RELEASE-NOTES-{{MW stable branch number}}|text=RELEASE-NOTES}}''' ([[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|wiki]]) enthält.
Öffnen Sie diese jetzt und finden Sie heraus, was in diesem Release geändert wurde.
Auch die Anweisungen in der UPGRADE-Datei sollten beachtet werden.

{{anchor|Clear pending jobs}}
== Ausstehende Aufträge löschen ==
Aus Performance-Gründen verzögern sich einige Aktionen in der Datenbank und werden vom [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Job queue|job queue]] verwaltet.
Diese Aufträge werden in der Datenbank gespeichert und enthalten Parameter mit Informationen über Aktionen, die sie ausführen sollen.
Es wird dringend empfohlen, diese ausstehenden Jobs vor dem Upgrade des Wikis auszuführen, um zu vermeiden, dass sie fehlschlagen, falls sich die Parameterspezifikation dieser Jobs mit der neuen Version ändert.
Verwenden Sie {{ll|Manual:RunJobs.php|runJobs.php}}, um alle ausstehenden Aufträge auszuführen und die Warteschlange zu löschen, bevor Sie das Upgrade durchführen.

{{anchor|Back up existing files and the database}}
== Sichern vorhandener Dateien und der Datenbank ==

:''Vollständige Anleitung: {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}''

Während die Upgrade-Skripte gut in Stand gehalten und robust sind, können dennoch Dinge schief gehen. Bevor Sie das Datenbank-Schema aktualisieren, &quot;&quot;machen Sie ein vollständiges [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Backing up a wiki|Backup]]&quot;&quot; Ihres Wiki, inklusive der Datenbank und den Dateien:

* der Inhalt deines Wikis, von der Datenbank (stellen Sie sicher, den richtigen Zeichensatz zu haben, überprüfen Sie dies zuerst in der LocalSettings.php). Es wäre auch gut, zu dem SQL-Datenbank-Dump zusätzlich einen XML-Dump zu erstellen.
:* Bei MySQL ist für einen SQL- bzw. XML-Dump der  &lt;code&gt;mysql&lt;/code&gt; Befehl zu verwenden:
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.sql'''''
 mysqldump --user='''''wikidb_user''''' --password='''''wikidb_userpassword''''' '''''wikidb''''' --xml &gt; '''''file.xml'''''
:* Bei PostgreSQL ist für einen Datenbank-Dump der &lt;code&gt;pg_restore&lt;/code&gt; Befehl zu verwenden:
 pg_dump --create -Fc '''''wikidb''''' &gt; '''''file.db.dump'''''
:* Bei SQLite gibt es ein MediaWiki Skript um ein Backup zu erstellen:
 php '''''wikifolder'''''/maintenance/sqlite.php --backup-to '''''file'''''
* Bilder und andere Mediendateien (der Inhalt des &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; Verzeichnis, benutzerdefiniertes Logo /skins/common/images/wiki.png)
* Konfigurationsdateien, bspw &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;.htaccess&lt;/code&gt; (wenn vorhanden)
* MediaWikis Programmdateien, inklusive allen Benutzeroberflächen (Skins) und Erweiterungen (Extensions), besonders wenn Sie diese modifiziert haben.

== Neue Dateien entpacken ==

=== Verwendung eines Tarball-Paketes ===

Sie können die neuen Dateien via FTP oder Befehlszeile einfügen. Nutzen Sie die Befehlszeile, wenn Sie dazu Zugang haben! Die Befehlszeile zu verwenden ist viel schneller, als jede einzelne Datei der Tausenden via FTP hochzuladen.

{{Note|1=Sie sollten den entpackten tarball in ein neues und leeres Verzeichnis auf dem Server ablegen. Wenn Sie den tarball stattdessen direkt in die bestehende alte Version entpacken, sollten Sie die Anweisungen auf der Seite [[#Back up existing files and the database|Back up existing files and the database]] beachten. Andernfalls, falls Sie irgendwelche Anpassungen vorgenommen haben, werden diese so überschrieben, dass keine Möglichkeit mehr bleibt, diese wieder herzustellen. Wenn Sie dazu die neue Version direkt über die bestehende entpacken, können Dateien zurückbleiben, welche die neue Version beim Aktualisieren beeinflussen. Es ist daher empfehlenswert, die Dateien in einem neuen Verzeichnis zu entpacken und die Anpassungen im neuen Verzeichnis vorzunehmen (LocalSettings.php, Bildverzeichnis, Erweiterungen und andere Anpassungen wie eigene Skins).}}

==== FTP oder grafisch ====

Falls kein Kommandozeilen-Zugriff auf den Server möglich ist, kann das MediaWiki tarball Archiv lokal auf einen Computer heruntergladen und mittels [http://www.7-zip.org/download.html 7zip] entpackt werden.

Nachdem alle Dateien und Ordner lokal entpackt wurden, können sie mit einem beliebigen FTP Programm auf den Server hoch geladen werden.

==== cPanel File Manager ====

cPanel is a popular interface provided by many web hosts.  This method is efficient because the files are uncompressed on the server itself.

* Navigate to the directory that holds your wiki folder.
* Upload the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  You may need to hit &quot;Reload&quot; to see it.
* Extract the mediawiki-1.xx.x.tar.gz file.  Reload again.
* Confirm that the mediawiki-1.xx.x folder is present.
* Delete the tar.gz file.
* Copy all necessary skins, extensions, image folders, customizations, and the LocalSettings.php into the new folder. (see below)
* When you are ready to run update.php, rename your old wiki folder and your new wiki folder. (e.g. &quot;w&quot; becomes &quot;w1.34&quot; and then &quot;mediawiki1.35.0&quot; becomes &quot;w&quot;)  This step is easily reversible if you run into problems.

{{anchor|Command_line}}
==== Kommandozeile ====
Unter Umständen kann es nötig sein, das Kommando als &lt;code&gt;sudo&lt;/code&gt; auszuführen, falls der aktuelle Benutzer auf den wiki Installationsverzeichnissen keine vollständigen Schreibrechte haben sollte.
Beim enttarren (entpacken) eines tarball Pakets wird normalerweise ein neues Verzeichnis für die neue wiki Version erstellt. Danach müssen die die alten Konfigurationsdateien und das image Verzeichnis, in dem sich Bilder befinden, aus dem alten, vorherigen Installationsordner in den neuen kopiert werden:

&lt;code class=&quot;mw-code mw-highlight plainlinks&quot; style=&quot;display:block&quot;&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;{{#tag:span|cd|class=nb}} /path/to/your/new/installation/  
wget https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/{{MW stable branch number}}/mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
tar -xvzf mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
rm mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz
&lt;/code&gt;

(Open)Solaris Benutzer sollten &lt;kbd&gt;gtar&lt;/kbd&gt; benutzen, oder:

 $ gzip -dc mediawiki-{{MW stable release number}}.tar.gz | tar xf -

===Andere Dateien===

Nach dem entpacken das tarball Archivs, sollten einige Dateien und Ordner aus dem alten Installationsverzeichnis in das neue kopiert oder verschoben werden:
* &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; - enthält Ihre alten Konfigurationseinstellungen.
* Das &lt;code&gt;images&lt;/code&gt; (oder &lt;code&gt;uploads&lt;/code&gt; in älteren Versionen) Verzeichnis, das alle ins Wiki hochgeladenen Dateien enthält, es sei denn es wurde ein anderes Uploadverzeichnis ausgewählt. Die Zugriffsrechte (Permissions) und der Besitzer (Ownership) müssen geändert werden.  &lt;code&gt;find ./images -type d -exec chmod 755 {} \;&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;chgrp -R apache images&lt;/code&gt; (beispielweise falls der web user &quot;apache&quot; ist).
* Einige Erweiterungen im &lt;code&gt;extensions&lt;/code&gt; Verzeichnis. Es sollten immer die aktuellen Erweiterungen installiert und verwendet werden, veraltete Erweiterungen funktionieren eventuell nicht korrekt oder gar nicht mit einer neueren MediaWiki-Version.
* Falls ein [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogo|benutzerdefiniertes Logo]] verwendet wird, muss diese Datei ebenfalls aus der Sicherungsdatei wiederherstellt werden. In Versionen vor 1.24 befindet es sich normalerweise im Verzeichnis &lt;code&gt;skins/common/images/&lt;/code&gt;. Ab Version 1.24 im Verzeichnis &lt;code&gt;resources/assets/&lt;/code&gt; oder &lt;code&gt;images/&lt;/code&gt;, je nach dem welches zur Verwendung ausgewählt wurde. Danach dies in der LocalSettings.php hinzufügen, zum Beispiel &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogo = &quot;$wgScriptPath/images/logo.png&quot;;&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* Bei 1.35 müssen die Logos ggf. aus [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgLogos|wgLogos]] wiederhergestellt werden. Dann ist beispielsweise folgendes zur LocalSettings.php hinzuzufügen: &lt;syntaxhighlight lang=php inline&gt;$wgLogos = [ '1x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/1x_version.png&quot;, '2x' =&gt; &quot;path/to/2x_version.png&quot;, 'svg' =&gt; &quot;path/to/svg_version.svg&quot; ];&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;
* benutzerdefinierte Skins aus dem &lt;code&gt;skins&lt;/code&gt;-Verzeichnis
* jede Veränderung, die in den alten Installationsdateien oder Erweiterungen durchgeführt wurde.
* jede .htaccess Datei (falls Apache verwendet wird und irgendwelche Regeln in der .htaccess eingetragen wurden).

Machen Sie diesen neuen Ordner zum veröffentlichten Ordner auf dem Webserver, oder benennen Sie das alte Installationsverzeichnis um und benennen Sie dann das neue um, um den alten Namen zu erhalten.

=== Git verwenden ===

Wenn Sie {{ll|Download from Git|Git}} verwenden, exportieren Sie die Dateien an einen sauberen Speicherort und kopieren Sie dann die alten benutzerdefinierten Dateien wie im vorherigen Abschnitt beschrieben an den neuen Speicherort.

Sie müssen auch einige externe PHP-Bibliotheken mit Composer oder einer bereitgestellten Sammlung installieren, die für die Wikimedia Wiki-Farm gepflegt wird.
Weitere Details zur Installation und Aktualisierung externer Bibliotheken finden Sie in der [[Download_from_Git#Fetch_external_libraries|Git-Download-Dokumentation]].

=== Verwendung eines Patches ===
Eine kleine Patchdatei wird in der Regel für ein Minor-Versions-Upgrade zur Verfügung gestellt.
Sie müssen [[w:de:patch (Unix)|patch]] manuell herunterladen, um dies verwenden zu können.
Nach dem manuellen Download von der [https://releases.wikimedia.org/mediawiki/ Dumps-Seite] extrahieren Sie sie oder folgen Sie den Anweisungen mit wget unten.
Patches sind inkrementell, Sie können '''keine Version überspringen'''.

# &lt;kbd&gt;cd&lt;/kbd&gt; in Ihr Hauptverzeichnis von MediaWiki (das mit LocalSettings.php).
# Laden Sie die Patchdatei herunter und entpacken Sie sie mit &lt;kbd&gt;gunzip&lt;/kbd&gt;.
# Verwenden Sie &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run&lt;/code&gt;, um zu überprüfen, was geändert wird (''z.B.''', &lt;code&gt;patch -p1 --dry-run -i ''mediawiki-x.xx.x.patch''&lt;/code&gt;).
# Wenn alles in Ordnung ist, führen Sie &lt;kbd&gt;patch&lt;/kbd&gt; erneut ohne &lt;code&gt;--dry-run&lt;/code&gt; aus.
# Überprüfen Sie Ihre Special:Version und Sie sollten die neue Versionsnummer sehen.

===Verbliebene Dateien, die Fehler verursachen können===

Wenn die neue Version in eine altes, bestehendes Installationsverzeichnis entpackt wurde, können einige alte Dateien Probleme mit der neuen Version verursachen.

{{MW 1.18|and after}}
Wenn Sie [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration settings#Profiling|profiling]] nicht verwenden, aber eine &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt;-Datei im MediaWiki-Stammordner haben, erhalten Sie möglicherweise Fehler, die sich auf &lt;code&gt;/includes/Profiler.php&lt;/code&gt; beziehen.
Löschen oder umbenennen der &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.php&lt;/code&gt; Datei behebt den Fehler. Die &lt;code&gt;StartProfiler.sample&lt;/code&gt; Datei, die sich ebenfalls im MediaWiki Wurzelverzeichnis befindet, kann als Vorlage dafür dienen, falls profiling zukünftig aktiviert werden soll.

{{MW 1.23|and after}}
Mediawiki 1.23 verwendet nicht mehr den skin autodiscovery Menchanismus. Nachdem auf diese Version aktualisiert wurde, sollte sicher gestellt werden, dass die alten &lt;code&gt;Chick.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Nostalgia.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Simple.php&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;Standard.php&lt;/code&gt;-Dateien direkt im &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; Verzeichnis sowie die entsprechenden Unterordner im &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; Verzeichnis gelöscht werden. MediaWiki wird als Erinnerung eine Warnung aufzeichnen und ggf. ausgeben, falls diese alten Skins immer noch gefunden werden. (Benutzerdefinierte Skins müssen ebenfalls entsprechend angepasst und mit ihnen verfahren werden.) Siehe {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} für mehr Informationen.

{{MW 1.24|and after}}
MediaWiki 1.24 ändert die Pfade von Kern-Skin-Dateien. Nach dem Upgrade auf diese Version sollten Sie sicherstellen, dass die alten Dateien &lt;code&gt;CologneBlue.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;Modern.php&lt;/code&gt;, &lt;code&gt;MonoBook.php&lt;/code&gt; und &lt;code&gt;Vector.php&lt;/code&gt; direkt im Verzeichnis &lt;code&gt;skins/&lt;/code&gt; nicht mehr vorhanden sind. Siehe {{ll|Manual:Skin autodiscovery}} für Details.

== Erweiterungen aktualisieren ==

Einige Erweiterungen wurden angepasst, um mit der neuen Version der MediaWiki-Software arbeiten zu können. Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie die jeweils aktuelle Version verwenden. Eventuell müssen sie Updates für spezifische Erweiterungen manuell einspielen.

Verschiedene [[Special:MyLanguage/tarballs|Tarball-Pakete]] enthalten Untergruppen von Erweiterungen mit eigener Versionierung, die dabei helfen, die passende Version für das vorhandene MediaWiki-Kern-Release zu finden.

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
[[Special:ExtensionDistributor|Extension Distributor]] works well for most people who want a snapshot of extensions that will work with their supported versions of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want a lot of extensions then [[Special:MyLanguage/Download from Git|downloading from Git]] is probably best.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you don't have Git but you want to upgrade a lot of extensions, you might consider using [[MwExtUpgrader|mwExtUpgrader]].&lt;/span&gt;

== Ihre LocalSettings.php anpassen ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you use the same &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; from the old version, you may need to adapt it to how new versions handle it:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Skin registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.24, bundled skins like Vector, Monobook, Modern and CologneBlue are no longer part of MediaWiki core, and they need to be registered explicitly in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; to use them, otherwise MediaWiki will warn that you don't have installed skins.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This is what you need to add to &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; when upgrading from versions older than 1.24 and want to have available one of those skins:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadSkin( 'Vector' );
wfLoadSkin( 'MonoBook' );
wfLoadSkin( 'Modern' );
wfLoadSkin( 'CologneBlue' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Other skins may still not be adapted to the new [[Manual:Extension registration|skin registration]] system, so refer to the documentation page about each skin to see how to register it properly in case of problems.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Extension registration ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Since MediaWiki 1.25, extensions use a new [[Manual:Extension registration|extension registration]] system.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Previously your &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; would include something like:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Cite/Cite.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Gadgets/Gadgets.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ImageMap/ImageMap.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/InputBox/InputBox.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Nuke/Nuke.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/ParserFunctions/ParserFunctions.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/Poem/Poem.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi/SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi.php&quot;;
require_once &quot;$IP/extensions/WikiEditor/WikiEditor.php&quot;;
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be converted to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;php&quot;&gt;
wfLoadExtension( 'Cite' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Gadgets' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ImageMap' );
wfLoadExtension( 'InputBox' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Nuke' );
wfLoadExtension( 'ParserFunctions' );
wfLoadExtension( 'Poem' );
wfLoadExtension( 'SyntaxHighlight_GeSHi' );
wfLoadExtension( 'WikiEditor' );
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions are being adapted to use the new extension registration system.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Extensions that are not adapted should use the old way of installing them.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Refer to the installation instructions on the extension's page for more information.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Other variables ===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some variables may be obsolete or even removed.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Having them in &lt;code&gt;LocalSettings.php&lt;/code&gt; usually won't have any effect.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;New variables may be added in newer versions, or some existing variables changed their type.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We usually try to use sane defaults for them, and in case of type change, be backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In any case, take a look at the release notes to see those changes.&lt;/span&gt;

{{anchor|Run the update script}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Run the update script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;!--
NOTE TO EDITORS: As of r72451 &lt;https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:Code/MediaWiki/72451&gt;, this section name is linked from an error message hard-coded into MediaWiki, so if you change the section name, add &lt;span id=&quot;Run_the_update_script&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt; or something so that the links still work.
--&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can upgrade the MediaWiki database in two ways: Either from the command line or from the web browser. If you have shell access to your server, upgrading from the command line is recommended, since this reduces the risk of the upgrade process being interrupted by a timeout or connection reset.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The script will also attempt to download any missing dependencies which MediaWiki needs.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Command line ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Access the command line of your server or an SSH shell or similar. You can access the command line by connecting to your server via SSH. If the local PC you are working on runs Microsoft Windows, you will need a tool like [http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html PuTTY] to use SSH. From the command line or the Shell, change to the &lt;code&gt;'''maintenance'''&lt;/code&gt; directory and execute the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:update.php|update script]]:
&lt;/div&gt;

 $ php update.php

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a Linux server if you get an error, try performing the same command as root (&lt;kbd&gt;sudo php update.php&lt;/kbd&gt;).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note for simple installations on Windows (e.g. with {{ll|Manual:Installing MediaWiki on XAMPP|XAMPP}}):&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;First make sure that your web server (such as Apache) and your database (such as MySQL) are running.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Then run &lt;code&gt;update.php&lt;/code&gt;: right-click it, select Open With, and browse to PHP.exe.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The resulting command prompt window will likely autoclose when the schema upgrade completes.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You might see a message that your PHP version is too old and that MediaWiki needs a newer version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;After that message, the update aborts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Reason for this error is that the command line can use another PHP version than that one which you have when you execute MediaWiki from the web server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;When you get this message you should check, if you can execute a newer PHP version on the shell by using a different command: That might e.g. be ''php5'' or ''php56''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If another version is available and - if so - under which name, depends on the setup of your server.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If it does not work, ask your hoster; they will surely know.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
MediaWiki will inspect the existing schema and update it to work with the new code, adding tables and columns as needed.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Note|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Shared database|Shared database]], you should pass the &lt;code&gt;--doshared&lt;/code&gt; parameter if you want the shared tables to be updated. Otherwise, they won't be touched by the update script.&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do if php update.php fails to do anything, resulting in a quick pause and then return to command prompt ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This can be caused by a malfunctioning extension or skin.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that all extensions and skins called for in LocalSettings.php are present
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Check that extensions are using the correct registration method (wfLoadExtension vs. require_once)
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Comment out the first half of the extensions in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this causes update.php to work, uncomment half of that half (so 1/4 of the extensions).&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If this does NOT cause update.php to work, uncomment the first half but comment out the second half, and then comment out half of the second half, etc.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Repeat until update.php works to find the one that is failing.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;ALTER command denied to user&quot; error (or similar) ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In case the scripts abort with a message similar to:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre&gt;
Error: 1142 ALTER command denied to user 'wiki'@'localhost' for table 'mytable' (localhost)
ERROR: must be the owner of the mytable relation 
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This means that you should check that you have defined {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}} and {{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}} in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file (in the main directory). These are the user and password needed by this script in order to access to the database.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In some cases, an old $wgDBmwschema variable (for Postgres) seems to be read for the table name to update instead of $wgDBname, even when MySQL is used.  If this is the case, just get rid of the $wgDBmwschema definition in LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== What to do in case of &quot;unexpected T_STRING&quot; error ====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals running update.php from the command line may encounter the following error:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
syntax error, unexpected T_STRING, expecting T_OLD_FUNCTION or T_FUNCTION or T_VAR or '}' \
in ~/maintenance/commandLine.inc on line 13
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
This error occurs when update.php is run from php4.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Individuals who have their site hosted by providers who provide both php4 and php5 should take the following steps:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# from the command line, enter the command 'whereis php5'
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you have discerned the location of the php5 path, list the contents of php5/bin directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# once you've determined the name of the PHP executable (either PHP or php5), type in the entire path to execute update.php
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Below is an example:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
$ command -v php5
$ ls -la /usr/local/php5/bin
$ /usr/local/php5/bin/php update.php
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
====What to do in case of 'register_argc_argv is set to false' error====
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You may encounter the error:
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
Cannot get command line arguments, register_argc_argv is set to false
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Go to ~/maintenance. Either edit an existing 'php.ini' file, or create one.
&lt;/div&gt; 
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Add a line as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;pre style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
register_argc_argv=true
&lt;/pre&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Re-run &lt;code&gt;php update.php&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Anchor|Web_updater}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Web browser===
&lt;/div&gt;
{{MW 1.17|and after}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
: ''See also {{ll|Manual:update.php|update.php}}''
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If your database is already big and in high production usage, then you should not be using the Web updater, e.g. because the update process will time out when the ''maximum_execution_time'' is reached. In that case you should use [[update.php]] from the command-line interface (not from the web). What exactly is &quot;too big&quot; depends on your server (e.g. on its performance, the load and on how long the maximum execution time of PHP allows the script to run). If your wiki is too big for the web updater and your hosting provider does not allow command-line access, then you need to migrate your wiki to another hosting account, preferably to one that does have shell access.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Always [[Manual:Backing up a wiki|back up]] before performing database maintenance.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Navigate your web browser to &lt;code&gt;'''/mw-config/'''&lt;/code&gt;.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, if your wiki is at &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/index.php&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;, then navigate to &lt;code&gt;&lt;nowiki&gt;http://example.org/w/mw-config/&lt;/nowiki&gt;&lt;/code&gt;.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Select your language and click continue.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# The existing installation should be detected. Follow the instructions on the screen to upgrade it.&lt;br/&gt;If asked for the &quot;upgrade key&quot;, open your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} file and look for the key assigned to {{ll|Manual:$wgUpgradeKey|$wgUpgradeKey}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
It might happen that the web-updater does not seem to work: Instead of seeing the initial language selection screen, you might see an empty wiki page, possibly with some error message. In this case it is most likely that your web server uses Rewrite Rules (most likely for [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Short URL|short URLs]]), which do not show you the updater at ''mw-config/'', but a wiki page at ''Mw-config/'', with capital &quot;M&quot;. In this case, rename the ''.htaccess'' file for the time of the update. Then you should be able to access the web-updater.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Warning|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you use this method, make sure to '''change the name of the .htaccess file back''' after running the upgrade script! Otherwise, short URLs and possibly other stuff will be broken!&lt;/span&gt;}}

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Test the update ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Once the upgrade has been completed, browse to the wiki and check that the following operations work as expected:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Viewing pages
* Editing pages
* Uploading a file
* Visit [[Special:Version]] and check that the version shown is correct and that the extensions are present.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Remove leftovers from old installations ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have copied your previous installation to another folder on the server, be sure to remove it or make it completely inaccessible from the web.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is very important to not leave old installations accessible from the web, since it completely defeats the purpose of upgrading, and leaves your server open to attacks.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Frequently asked questions ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section begin=FAQ /&gt;
{{anchor|How hard is it to upgrade?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How hard is it to upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If the only file you have modified is {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}, and you are upgrading from 1.5 or later, the process is very simple. The amount of human work involved is only a few minutes. The database schema changes will take an amount of time proportional to the size of your database — potentially hours for wikis with millions of pages, but for a more typical size of a few thousand pages, it is usually done in seconds.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Minor upgrades, within the same major version, say from {{MW legacy branch number}}.0 to {{MW legacy release number}}, do not require any schema changes at all.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You can just update the files. The database needs no update, hence it is not necessary to run the updater script.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading from 1.4 or earlier is potentially complicated because support for character sets other than UTF-8 was dropped, and the schema for storing bulk text changed. Please read the relevant section in the &lt;code&gt;UPGRADE&lt;/code&gt; file.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Upgrading becomes difficult if you have modified our source code, and you don't want your changes to be overwritten. Tools such as [http://www.gnu.org/software/diffutils/diffutils.html diff], [http://www.gnu.org/software/patch/ patch], [http://meldmerge.org/ Meld] or [http://winmerge.org/ WinMerge] may be useful. There is also potential for trouble if you are using unmaintained extensions. Upgrade your extensions at the same time as you upgrade MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you have modified the skin or use a custom skin, you very likely will have to adjust it to work again with the new version of MediaWiki.
&lt;/div&gt;

{{Tip|1=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead of patching your &quot;global&quot; CSS and JS (JavaScript) files every time, you can simply add the code to your MediaWiki:Common.js and MediaWiki:Common.css pages. As these are part of the database which will be reused when you upgrade, you will not have to patch the MediaWiki core files any more.&lt;/span&gt;}}

{{anchor|How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?}}
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It depends: If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.4 or older''', you should upgrade to MediaWiki 1.5 first.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are upgrading from a Latin-1 wiki, use upgrade1_5.php (found in MediaWiki 1.5) to convert the relevant parts of the database to UTF-8 ({{ll|Manual:$wgUseLatin1|$wgUseLatin1}} needs to be set to true in your {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} for this to work).&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Next, run update.php, and then set the {{ll|Manual:$wgLegacyEncoding|$wgLegacyEncoding}} option in LocalSettings.php to the encoding previously used by the wiki (e.g. windows-1252). This is basically how Wikipedia and other Wikimedia Foundation sites were upgraded from MediaWiki 1.4 to 1.5 – see the [https://noc.wikimedia.org/wiki.php?wiki=enwiki settings page for enwiki] and some [[wikitech:Obsolete:1.5 upgrade|related notes at Wikitech]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You may need to upgrade to MediaWiki 1.4 before running the upgrade1.5 script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you want to make a database dump (e.g. MySQL) of your Latin-1 wiki, make sure the type of the &lt;code&gt;old_text&lt;/code&gt; field in the {{ll|Manual:Text table|text}} table is &lt;code&gt;mediumblob&lt;/code&gt;, not &lt;code&gt;mediumtext&lt;/code&gt;, to avoid character encoding issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you are '''upgrading from MediaWiki 1.5 or newer''' to '''1.35''', you can upgrade in one step, from your old version to the latest stable version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The vast majority of reports, as well as automated testing, indicate that doing it in one step works just fine.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If you have trouble believing this, read [[mailarchive:mediawiki-l/2008-October/028975.html|this mailing list post]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, please note that when you update from old versions, chances that you will encounter PHP errors are bigger than when you upgrade from the version directly previous to the new version.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You would have received these errors anyway, had you not skipped versions, but the errors would have been associated with each individual update.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Instead, if you update several versions at once, you'll get the same set of errors all at the same time.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This will make the upgrade more difficult, but do not forget that you did not have the trouble of updating to the intermediate versions, which you skipped!&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are '''upgrading to MediaWiki 1.36''' or later, only upgrades from the last two LTS releases will be supported ([[phab:T259771]]). This will mean that for very old versions, that you first upgrade to MediaWiki 1.35 and then upgrade to 1.36.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Should I back up first?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Short answer: Yes.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Long answer: It depends on a) how much you value your data, b) how hard it is to create a backup and c) how confident you are with MySQL maintenance and administration.
&lt;/div&gt; 

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An upgrade failure may leave your database in an inconsistent state, in between two versions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A PHP or MySQL error might happen during upgrade leaving your database partly upgraded.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In such situations it may be possible to somehow fix this problem with much manual work.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;However, it will be ''way easier'' to just put a database backup from before running update.php in place and to continue with that.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Otherwise you might have hours of - needless - work.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Recovery is often complex.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Volunteers on the support forums are unlikely to be impressed if you neglect to make a backup and then need help to recover from upgrade-related corruption.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A better outcome is if you can revert to your backup, and then [[phab:maniphest/task/create/|report the bug against the corresponding MediaWiki project]] in the upgrade process which caused the corruption.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can I keep my LocalSettings.php?===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Yes, but you may have to make some minor changes. The format of {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}} is largely backward compatible.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Changes which break LocalSettings.php compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes|release notes]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Can my wiki stay online while it is upgrading?===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Generally yes, however Git may temporarily (for a few seconds) break it.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are upgrading between minor releases of MediaWiki, all you need to do is update the source files.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Note: the following assumes you have command line access. If you are upgrading between major releases of MediaWiki, the preferred procedure is as follows:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Unpack the new version of MediaWiki into a new directory
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Prepare that new directory: copy your current LocalSettings.php from the old directory, copy any installed extensions and custom skins (if any). Check {{wg|Logo}} and {{wg|Logos}} settings in LocalSettings.php and if necessary copy logo file from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# In the release notes for the new version, see if any changes need to be made to LocalSettings.php.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Place the database in read-only mode by inserting the following variable into LocalSettings.php in the old directory - users will see this message if they attempt an edit during the upgrade process:
&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;code class=&quot;mw-highlight&quot;&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly|$wgReadOnly}} = {{#tag:span|'Upgrading to MediaWiki {{MW stable release number}}'|class=s1}};&lt;/code&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
#* This no longer works since MediaWiki 1.27, which also prevents running the update script. A workaround for versions since MediaWiki 1.27 can be found in {{ll|Manual:$wgReadOnly#Upgrading}}. See also {{phabricator|T151833}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Run the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Command_line|update script]] or the web updater in the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Copy the images from the images sub-directory from the old directory to the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
# Swap the old directory and the new directory.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===Why upgrade?===
&lt;/div&gt;
:''&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Subscribe to [[mail:mediawiki-announce|mediawiki-announce]] to be notified of new releases.&lt;/span&gt;''

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Because it's [[#How hard is it to upgrade?|usually easy enough]], [[#How do I upgrade from a really old version? In one step, or in several steps?|a single step from your version to latest]] and also [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Upgrading#Web updater|via web]].
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Recent releases receive security fixes to keep your wiki and your host safe from vandals, while old releases don't (see {{ll|Version lifecycle}}). That makes dozens good reasons to upgrade!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
New major releases come with new features, which you might want to use: see the release notes for details. In case you need additional arguments to convince your bosses to let you upgrade from a pretty old version, here is a summary:
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.5|1.5}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.5#Smaller changes since 1.4|edits can be previewed before saving]] also as diff.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.9|1.9}}, an [[Special:MyLanguage/Release notes/1.9#Undo revision|undo button]] is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.12|1.12}}, [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Patrolling|patrolling]] on [[Special:NewPages]] is much easier.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.13|1.13}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Moving a page|rename]] (move) files.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|Release notes/1.14|1.14}}, you can [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:$wgFixDoubleRedirects|fix double redirects]] automatically.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.16|1.16}}, {{ll|InstantCommons}} is available.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* If you have appropriate caching, since 1.17 {{ll|ResourceLoader}} optimizes pageload speeds a lot.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since 1.17, [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.17/Category sorting|category sorting makes sense!]] (especially for non-English letters); extended to 68 languages after {{ll|MediaWiki 1.21|1.21}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18|1.18}} and {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}}, users of all languages and genders are correctly addressed by the interface and [[m:Help:Special_page#Logs|logs]] (before 1.15, no gender at all).
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In {{ll|MediaWiki 1.19|1.19}} the skinning system was reworked, making it easier to reuse parts of existing skins in your own skins.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.20|1.20]], [[m:Help:Diff|diffs]] are more readable.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki_1.21|1.21]] and [[MediaWiki 1.23|1.23]], email notifications become clearer and more predictable, making your wiki more effective.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[MediaWiki 1.22|1.22]], vandal fighting (patrolling) is less time-consuming.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.24|1.24]], password storage was improved to allow for better security.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since [[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki 1.25|1.25]], [[m:Special:MyLanguage/Help:Enhanced recent changes|enhanced recent changes are available]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.26|1.26]], the [[ResourceLoader|&quot;ResourceLoader&quot; mechanism was improved]]
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* In [[MediaWiki 1.27|1.27]], the session management was reworked as well as the user authentication management completely modernized.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;InstantCommons no longer requires local files.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.28|1.28}}, the cache for rendered HTML of article pages improved.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.29|1.29}}, the Action API was reworked and improved. Also, user group assignments may now be done for a selectable period.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Allow to block range of IPs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.30|1.30}}, the blocked users cannot change their email.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Added ability to search for contributions within an IP ranges at Special:Contributions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.31|1.31}}, some extensions are now part of the core, like {{ll|Extension:OATHAuth|OATHAuth}}, {{ll|Extension:MultimediaViewer|MultimediaViewer}}, {{ll|Extension:Nuke|Nuke}}.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The {{ll|Skin:Timeless}} was introduced.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Add default edit rate limit of 90 edits/minute for all users.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.32|1.32}}, MediaWiki supports over 350 languages.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.33|1.33}}, MediaWiki supports &quot;partial blocks&quot;, where IPs and accounts can be restricted from editing particular pages or namespaces.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.34|1.34}}, more extensions part of the core: {{ll|Extension:Scribunto|Scribunto}} (for Lua modules), {{ll|Extension:TextExtracts|TextExtracts}}, {{ll|Extension:PageImages|PageImages}}.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Since {{ll|MediaWiki 1.35|1.35}} (a stable long-term support release), {{ll|Extension:VisualEditor|VisualEditor}} is part of the core.
&lt;/div&gt; &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &quot;watch&quot; feature can be enhanced with expiry dates.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
Also, in {{ll|MediaWiki 1.18}} we started [[Special:MyLanguage/Suggestions for extensions to be integrated|bundling some vital extensions]], like a better editor and anti-vandalism tools ConfirmEdit and Nuke; more have been added in later releases.
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;section end=FAQ /&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== See also ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
* Greg Sabino Mullane's Blog post provides some [http://blog.endpoint.com/2014/10/mediawiki-minor-upgrade-with-patches.html more detail about point release upgrades].
* [[Project:Support desk]] if you need help or something went wrong
&lt;/div&gt;
* {{ll|Category:MediaWiki deprecated or obsolete features}}
* {{ll|Manual:Backing up a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring a wiki from backup}}
* {{ll|Manual:Moving a wiki}}
* {{ll|Manual:Restoring wiki code from cached HTML}} - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;if you don't have a successful backup&lt;/span&gt;
* {{ll|Manual:Installing}}

[[Category:MediaWiki administration{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki for site admins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]
[[Category:Upgrading{{#translation:}}|Upgrading to *]]</text>
      <sha1>3ao5z1e8z4jsfpm3zg6z7iw76jfyunr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/63/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1606292</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402726</id>
      <parentid>5383983</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:09:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="32" xml:space="preserve">Editor in der [[$1|Android]]-App</text>
      <sha1>i67x0hczhm0bj8zw75oejzub0yddwve</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Editor/67/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1606293</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402704</id>
      <parentid>5383989</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:05:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28" xml:space="preserve">Editor in der [[$1|iOS]]-App</text>
      <sha1>62r1aiv55aipbclw34ahspj7q6kq53j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Main Page/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1608205</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401705</id>
      <parentid>5389389</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:26:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Die '''Hauptseite''' ist die Seite, zu der das Wiki geht, wenn keine Seite in den [[$1|Parameter zu index.php]] angegeben ist.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1211" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Die '''Hauptseite''' ist die Seite, zu der das Wiki geht, wenn keine Seite in den [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:parameters to index.php|Parameter zu index.php]] angegeben ist.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It is also the page that one is taken to if one clicks on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Logo|logo]] or on the Main page item on the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Sidebar|sidebar]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The title at which the main page is accessed can be modified by changing [[MediaWiki:Mainpage]].&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The term &quot;main page&quot; and its translations can still be accessed via the system message [[MediaWiki:Mainpage-description]] (for use in [[MediaWiki:Sidebar]] and so on).&lt;/span&gt;

To change which page is the main page, in the search bar, type &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Mainpage&lt;/code&gt;. Then edit it so its content is the name of the page you want to be the main page. &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:Mainpage&lt;/code&gt; should always contain the title, because it is a system message that is reserved for the title of the main page, so don't change it to &lt;code&gt;MediaWiki:x&lt;/code&gt;.

[[Category:Manual{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>7symebervoq6tdlk16z5r81565kg1ti</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki/it</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1611295</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402174</id>
      <parentid>5400619</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:42:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Low quality/machine translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2497" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Per impostazione predefinita MediaWiki ha diversi [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|gruppi utente]] che possono concedere a un utente un insieme di permessi utente.
Vedere anche  [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User_rights#List_of_groups|l'elenco dei gruppi]].

== Special:Permessi utente ==
{{MW 1.10|and later}}
C'è una '''interfaccia''' semplice ([[Special:UserRights]]) per aggiungere o rimuovere un utente da uno o più gruppi utente.
Per fare ciò l'utente che agisce deve avere i permessi utente &lt;code&gt;userrights&lt;/code&gt;, che per impostazione predefinita è concessa al gruppo utente {{int|Group-bureaucrat}}.
È possibile accedere direttamente a [[Special:UserRights]] oppure attraverso [[Special:SpecialPages]] nell'area strumenti sulla sinistra.
È anche possibile visualizzare i permessi di un gruppo specifico accedendo alla pagina speciale [[Special:UserGroupRights]].

Per aiuto nell'utilizzare Special:UserRights, fare riferimento a {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}}.

== Dall'API ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
If you are developing a [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Gadgets|gadget]], a [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bots|bot]] (an admin bot) or other stuff that should be able to change user's groups through the API, see the page {{ll|API:User group membership}}.
&lt;/div&gt;

=== Da linea di comando ===
Lo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Maintenance scripts|scrip di manutenzione]] {{ll|Manual:createAndPromote.php|createAndPromote.php}} può aggiungere gruppi ad un utente dalla linea di comando:
&lt;code&gt;php maintenance/createAndPromote.php Example --sysop&lt;/code&gt;

Non è possibile rimuovere un gruppo da un utente dalla linea di comando, senza modificare direttamente il database.

== Da codice sorgente ==

Se stai sviluppando una [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|estensione]] di MediaWiki come un [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SessionManager and AuthManager|custom authentication manager]] o altre estensioni che dovrebbero essere in grado di cambiare i gruppi degli utenti, si può dare un'occhiata a questi metodi:

* &lt;code&gt;User::addGroup()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;User::removeGroup()&lt;/code&gt;

Come documentato nella pagina https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/php/User_8php_source.html.

== Pagine correlate ==
* {{ll|Manual:User rights}} — Spiegazione dei differenti &quot;permessi&quot; che possono essere assegnati a un gruppo
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}}

[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}|Setting user rights in MediaWiki]]</text>
      <sha1>3118vn5bzt6ko5c8sxqpqwelro9hp7u</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402745</id>
      <parentid>5402174</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:15:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>any feedback?</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2472" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
Per impostazione predefinita MediaWiki ha diversi [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:User rights and groups|gruppi utente]] che possono concedere a un utente un insieme di permessi utente.
Vedere anche  [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:User_rights#List_of_groups|l'elenco dei gruppi]].

== Special:Permessi utente ==
{{MW 1.10|and later}}
C'è una '''interfaccia''' semplice ([[Special:UserRights]]) per aggiungere o rimuovere un utente da uno o più gruppi utente.
Per fare ciò l'utente che agisce deve avere i permessi utente &lt;code&gt;userrights&lt;/code&gt;, che per impostazione predefinita è concessa al gruppo utente {{int|Group-bureaucrat}}.
È possibile accedere direttamente a [[Special:UserRights]] oppure attraverso [[Special:SpecialPages]] nell'area strumenti sulla sinistra.
È anche possibile visualizzare i permessi di un gruppo specifico accedendo alla pagina speciale [[Special:UserGroupRights]].

Per aiuto nell'utilizzare Special:UserRights, fare riferimento a {{ll|Help:User rights and groups}}.

== Dall'API ==

Se si sta sviluppando un [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:Gadgets|gadget]], un [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Bots|bot]] (un admin bot) o qualunque altra cosa che dovrebbe essere in grado di modificare i gruppi utenti attraverso le API, vedere la pagina {{ll|API:User group membership}}.

=== Da linea di comando ===
Lo [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Maintenance scripts|scrip di manutenzione]] {{ll|Manual:createAndPromote.php|createAndPromote.php}} può aggiungere gruppi ad un utente dalla linea di comando:
&lt;code&gt;php maintenance/createAndPromote.php Example --sysop&lt;/code&gt;

Non è possibile rimuovere un gruppo da un utente dalla linea di comando, senza modificare direttamente il database.

== Da codice sorgente ==

Se stai sviluppando una [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Extensions|estensione]] di MediaWiki come un [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SessionManager and AuthManager|custom authentication manager]] o altre estensioni che dovrebbero essere in grado di cambiare i gruppi degli utenti, si può dare un'occhiata a questi metodi:

* &lt;code&gt;User::addGroup()&lt;/code&gt;
* &lt;code&gt;User::removeGroup()&lt;/code&gt;

Come documentato nella pagina https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/php/User_8php_source.html.

== Pagine correlate ==
* {{ll|Manual:User rights}} — Spiegazione dei differenti &quot;permessi&quot; che possono essere assegnati a un gruppo
* {{ll|Manual:Preventing access}}

[[Category:Permission{{#translation:}}|Setting user rights in MediaWiki]]</text>
      <sha1>ejzhs4afjfhm68ijir01ukk2jyqe97d</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Skin:Foreground/hi</title>
    <ns>106</ns>
    <id>1612244</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402175</id>
      <parentid>5401307</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:43:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Low quality/machine translation</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="6055" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Skin
|name            = Foreground
|status          = unstable &lt;!-- Not maintained in a year but no explicit signal its unmaintained. See https://github.com/jthingelstad/foreground/issues/398 --&gt;
|username        = 
|author          = * Garrick van Buren, 
* Jamie Thingelstad, 
* Tom Hutchison
|description     = अपनी सामग्री को अग्रभूमि में रखने पर ध्यान केंद्रित करता है
|image           = 20151215 1.2.0 Screenshot MediaWiki Foreground skin.png
|imagesize       = 375
|version         = 2.4.0
|update          = 2021-02-11
|mediawiki       = 1.35+
|php             = 7.2+
|license         = BSD-2-Clause
|download      = {{WikimediaDownloadSkin|Foreground|phab=SFOR}}
|readme          = [https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-skins-Foreground/blob/master/README.md README]
|changelog       = [https://github.com/wikimedia/mediawiki-skins-Foreground/blob/master/CHANGELOG.md CHANGELOG]
|parameters      = 
|example         = &lt;nowiki /&gt;
* [https://foreground.wikiproject.net/wiki/Main_Page foreground.wikiproject.net]
|compatibility   = 
|bugzilla        =
|translate       = mwgithubskin-foreground
}}
''अग्रभूमि''' किस्न आपकी सामग्री को अग्रभूमि में रखने पर केंद्रित है।
यह उत्तरदायी लेआउट का समर्थन करता है और इसमें [https://www.semantic-mediawiki.org सिमेंटिक मीडियाविकि] के लिए पूर्वनिर्धारित कक्षाएं हैं।
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Built on Zurb's Foundation Framework (v5.5.3), a &quot;mobile first&quot; and advanced responsive front-end framework.&lt;/span&gt;

== हाइलाइट ==

* MediaWiki ऊपर और नीचे, बीच में सामग्री के अलावा कुछ भी नहीं।
* उपयोगी टैब। अंतर्निहित और उत्तरदायी स्वयं के टैब।
* स्मार्ट टाइपोग्राफी। उस पाठ का डिज़ाइन चुनें जिसकी आपको आवश्यकता है।
* जाली का नक्शा। अपनी जानकारी को डेस्कटॉप और मोबाइल उपकरणों पर कुशलता से रखें
* फ़ॉन्ट विस्मयकारी का पूर्ण समर्थन (v4.5)

==कॉन्फ़िगरेशन==

* गैर-लॉग-इन आगंतुकों के लिए पृष्ठ क्रियाएँ।
* टूल के तहत मदद और हाल के बदलाव दिखाएं।
* वैकल्पिक विकीनाम शीर्ष नावबार नाम सेट करता है जिससे आप अपने विकी के नाम को संक्षिप्त कर सकते हैं। उपयोगी है यदि आपका &lt;code&gt;$wgSitename&lt;/code&gt; लंबा है लेकिन आपको इसे अन्य उद्देश्यों के लिए रखने की आवश्यकता है।
* शीर्ष नेवबार में एक आइकन प्रदर्शित करें।
* IE को नवीनतम ब्राउज़र इंजन का उपयोग करने के लिए बाध्य करने के लिए &quot;X-UA-संगत&quot; सामग्री = &quot;IE = edge&quot; के साथ एक मेटा टैग तैयार करने में सक्षम। उदाहरण के लिए जब किसी ने अपना ब्राउज़र संगतता मोड में सेट किया हो।
* फ़ुटर आइकन को आउटपुट करें या केवल टेक्स्ट दिखाते हुए उन्हें दबाएं।
* फुटर में फॉलो आइकॉन को इनेबल करने के लिए AddThis PubID को जोड़ें।

इस किस्न को स्थापित और कॉन्फ़िगर करने के तरीके के बारे में जानकारी के लिए [https://github.com/thingles/foreground/blob/master/README.md README फ़ाइल] देखें।

==यह भी देखें==
* [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/foreground मेलिंग सूची] [https://lists.wikimedia.org/pipermail/foreground/ (संग्रहालय)]
* [https://foreground.wikiproject.net/wiki/Main_Page अग्रभूमि डेमो विकी]
* [https://github.com/thingles/foreground/issues किसी समस्या या सुविधा अनुरोध की रिपोर्ट करें] — कृपया GitHub पर समस्याओं या सुविधा अनुरोध की रिपोर्ट करें!
* [https://foreground.wikiproject.net/wiki/Sites_using_Foreground अग्रभूमि का उपयोग करने वाली साइटें — बेझिझक अपना विकी जोड़ें!]
* [https://wikiapiary.com/wiki/Skin:Foreground WikiApiary पर निगरानी में रखे गए अग्रभूमि का उपयोग]
* [https://get.foundation/ ज़र्ब फाउंडेशन]
** [https://get.foundation/sites/docs-v5/index.html ज़र्ब का फाउंडेशन फ्रेमवर्क (v5.5.3) प्रलेखन]

[[Category:Mobile skins{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Skins_using_deprecated_features{{#translation:}}]] &lt;!-- [[phab:T306942]] --&gt;</text>
      <sha1>moyquk7l9zjnrxdphi0qocugba5ncv4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/201/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612337</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402671</id>
      <parentid>5401485</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:58:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>improvement</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="39" xml:space="preserve">Estensioni collegate ai permessi utente</text>
      <sha1>sb6yzm4we794lcmxyc0umt4p563qrr0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1612341</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402016</id>
      <parentid>5401494</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:28:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make variable names untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1904" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:1--&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!

&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/translate&gt;

# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:3--&gt; Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; If &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Setswana&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;&lt;tvar name=&quot;setswanaTilde&quot;&gt;Setswana tilde&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; If &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Setswana&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following: &lt;/translate&gt;
## &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; Click &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;...&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/translate&gt;
## &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Find &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Setswana&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/translate&gt;
## &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Setswana tilde&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; To type Setswana letters, type the tilde (&lt;tvar name=&quot;1&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), and after it type the Latin letter that is the most similar to the Setswana letter.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; For example, to type &lt;tvar name=&quot;output&quot;&gt;Š&lt;/tvar&gt;, type &lt;tvar name=&quot;tilde&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and then &lt;tvar name=&quot;input&quot;&gt;S&lt;/tvar&gt;. The full list:&lt;/translate&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt; To type this letter...&lt;/translate&gt;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Type these keyboard keys:&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>1awlyp1vvko90l3dh2ozcqrw6h8zim8</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402023</id>
      <parentid>5402016</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:29:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <comment>make variable names untranslatable</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1890" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:1--&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!

&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/translate&gt;

# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:3--&gt; Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; If &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Setswana&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Setswana tilde&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; If &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Setswana&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following: &lt;/translate&gt;
## &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; Click &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;...&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/translate&gt;
## &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Find &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Setswana&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/translate&gt;
## &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Setswana tilde&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; To type Setswana letters, type the tilde (&lt;tvar name=&quot;1&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), and after it type the Latin letter that is the most similar to the Setswana letter.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; For example, to type &lt;tvar name=&quot;output&quot;&gt;Š&lt;/tvar&gt;, type &lt;tvar name=&quot;tilde&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and then &lt;tvar name=&quot;input&quot;&gt;S&lt;/tvar&gt;. The full list:&lt;/translate&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt; To type this letter...&lt;/translate&gt;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Type these keyboard keys:&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>ewq25kdaj7drlw20b55tgv5rf15vx3l</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402034</id>
      <parentid>5402023</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:32:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <minor />
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1890" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;
&lt;!--T:1--&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!

&lt;!--T:2--&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/translate&gt;

# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:3--&gt; Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:4--&gt; Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:5--&gt; If &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Setswana&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;&lt;tvar name=2&gt;Setswana tilde&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;
# &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:6--&gt; If &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Setswana&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following: &lt;/translate&gt;
## &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:7--&gt; Click &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;...&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/translate&gt;
## &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:8--&gt; Find &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Setswana&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/translate&gt;
## &lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:9--&gt; Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;&lt;tvar name=1&gt;Setswana tilde&lt;/tvar&gt;&quot;.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:10--&gt; To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:11--&gt; To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/translate&gt;

&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:12--&gt; To type Setswana letters, type the tilde (&lt;tvar name=&quot;1&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt;), and after it type the Latin letter that is the most similar to the Setswana letter.&lt;/translate&gt;
&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:13--&gt; For example, to type &lt;tvar name=&quot;output&quot;&gt;Š&lt;/tvar&gt;, type &lt;tvar name=&quot;tilde&quot;&gt;&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;&lt;/tvar&gt; and then &lt;tvar name=&quot;input&quot;&gt;S&lt;/tvar&gt;. The full list:&lt;/translate&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:14--&gt; To type this letter...&lt;/translate&gt;
!&lt;translate&gt;&lt;!--T:15--&gt; Type these keyboard keys:&lt;/translate&gt;
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>g0e9jou1zcke8bw285zltuxpf52wq8r</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/5/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612347</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402017</id>
      <parentid>5401500</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:28:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="64" xml:space="preserve">If &quot;$1&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;$setswanaTilde&quot;.</text>
      <sha1>ni026tpx74jvsafxngxfwcx4236f4gb</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402024</id>
      <parentid>5402017</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:30:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="52" xml:space="preserve">If &quot;$1&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;$2&quot;.</text>
      <sha1>e4r28tgvh126fmxjov6m0sajrq2z5v0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/6/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612348</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402018</id>
      <parentid>5401501</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:28:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="64" xml:space="preserve">If &quot;$1&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:</text>
      <sha1>djqqgn80fbdgs3v69auech3dly5cqm3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/7/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612349</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402019</id>
      <parentid>5401502</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:28:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="58" xml:space="preserve">Click &quot;$1&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.</text>
      <sha1>57oykhjvmdmgversv7br05aj6kjbsto</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/8/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612350</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402020</id>
      <parentid>5401503</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:28:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="33" xml:space="preserve">Find &quot;$1&quot; in the panel. Click it.</text>
      <sha1>fvmxh9ath9rf28cfzfmj3csnmhz6wv3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/9/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612351</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402021</id>
      <parentid>5401504</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:28:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="54" xml:space="preserve">Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;$2&quot;.</text>
      <sha1>1xyarj4dfwy44r90tw7qs6rmhjjb827</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402035</id>
      <parentid>5402021</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:32:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="54" xml:space="preserve">Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;$1&quot;.</text>
      <sha1>6k0s4vz91le1cpbpf5bl2jvupinjjag</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/89/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612380</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401589</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:25:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;tramite [[Special:Undelete]]&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28" xml:space="preserve">tramite [[Special:Undelete]]</text>
      <sha1>symtlcxm8q9dkfqniqgxqev6slytj5u</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/121/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612381</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401591</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:26:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot; permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="189" xml:space="preserve">
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo dell'azione, riepilogo, utente che ha effettuato l'azione) di voci di registro specifiche - richiede il permesso &quot;deleterevision&quot;</text>
      <sha1>8m096jbyjmx5tn04d05gcdkgpqi8uub</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/122/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612382</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401593</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:27:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot; permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="164" xml:space="preserve">
permette di cancellare/ripristinare le informazioni (testo della revisione, riepilogo della modifica, utente che ha effettuato la modifica) di revisioni specifiche</text>
      <sha1>tapyag3st6ojpo0b2taqxdfm9bzo83u</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/123/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612383</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401595</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:28:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;'''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="55" xml:space="preserve">'''Diviso in deleterevision e deletelogentry in 1.20'''</text>
      <sha1>k2jwsjih8cj4fghbiud60iz0jq5rr4m</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/106/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612384</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401597</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:28:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;contiene [[$man|messaggi dell'interfaccia]].&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44" xml:space="preserve">contiene [[$man|messaggi dell'interfaccia]].</text>
      <sha1>7v7azhjuzuo9qrgfoojy3gvwrjn83ec</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/262/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612385</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401599</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:29:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="85" xml:space="preserve">nasconde anche la voce &quot;Cambia password&quot;, ma non altri modi per cambiare la password.</text>
      <sha1>j0tbk6e3zc4m6oj2p3njb1dpo4jcsdm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/221/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612386</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401601</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:32:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="92" xml:space="preserve">Per la modifica di CSS/JSON/JS a livello di sito, ora ci sono permessi separati, vedi sotto.</text>
      <sha1>t1umokfmw992rked3bre3rzevr9xkna</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/259/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612387</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401603</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:33:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;(si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il diritto di $edituserjs)&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="85" xml:space="preserve">(si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il diritto di $edituserjs)</text>
      <sha1>cxajkt25gdpqu6fbra3y5rr0hckuit5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401607</id>
      <parentid>5401603</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:34:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="86" xml:space="preserve">(si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di $edituserjs)</text>
      <sha1>5c654vguv066xc1s4vobcyq5chdb6d8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/224/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612388</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401605</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:34:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;(si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di $edituserjson)&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="88" xml:space="preserve">(si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di $edituserjson)</text>
      <sha1>abwft1kep7cgwtbwvpc7pw9ritcx87l</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/101/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612389</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401609</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:34:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;vedere [[$1|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]]&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44" xml:space="preserve">vedere [[$1|Manual:Administrators#Rollback]]</text>
      <sha1>8kdwirqvkw1aclvpmep6hi95y4s8gvj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/119/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612390</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401611</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:35:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;'''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision'''&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="78" xml:space="preserve">'''Prima della [[rev:35303|1.13]] questo permesso era chiamato hiderevision'''</text>
      <sha1>quwseigsbwmd0j5g6dye9wazqdtbcib</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/96/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612391</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401613</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:35:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="123" xml:space="preserve">Senza di essa, un amministratore che ha la capacità di bloccare non può sbloccarsi se bloccato da un altro amministratore</text>
      <sha1>k172czgvobm96ggjn7s00irj2ffd9nl</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/213/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612392</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401614</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:36:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Utilizzare $HideUserContribLimit per disattivare.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="49" xml:space="preserve">Utilizzare $HideUserContribLimit per disattivare.</text>
      <sha1>lk1l8xopq1lg12rrwlqou0v1brq785t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/97/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612393</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401616</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:37:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="80" xml:space="preserve">consente l'assegnazione o la rimozione di tutti (*) i gruppi a qualunque utente.</text>
      <sha1>h3s3nhpqcxkm3ejmj1o4ko36lgeaw0x</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/98/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612394</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401618</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:38:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;(*)Con $AddGroups e $RemoveGroups è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="118" xml:space="preserve">(*)Con $AddGroups e $RemoveGroups è possibile impostare l'aggiunta /rimozione di determinati gruppi anziché di tutti</text>
      <sha1>toq6nssaa0e6zo1lobysowo6opn68to</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/126/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612395</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401620</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:39:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;&quot;transwiki&quot;&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11" xml:space="preserve">&quot;transwiki&quot;</text>
      <sha1>1vpc0nojnihe6ipt7pbem08x1tfbk5g</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/128/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612396</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401622</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:40:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="72" xml:space="preserve">Questo permesso era chiamato 'importraw' nella versione 1.5 e precedenti</text>
      <sha1>hptn6f27y6mid6iudjjzcy0qdt0l8s9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/219/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612397</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401624</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:40:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;non disponibile per impostazione predefinita&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44" xml:space="preserve">non disponibile per impostazione predefinita</text>
      <sha1>it4iny9fksvpgvovs994o2pyju9xxtv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/131/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612398</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401627</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:40:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="62" xml:space="preserve">elenca le pagine che nessun utente ha negli osservati speciali</text>
      <sha1>evih51kspqi7lsuc0b0fneqq3tdwf1p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/180/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612399</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401629</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:42:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="167" xml:space="preserve">È inoltre necessario aggiungere &lt;code&gt;right-[name]&lt;/code&gt; e &lt;code&gt;action-[name]&lt;/code&gt; interface messages to /languages/i18n/en.json (con documentazione in qqq.json).</text>
      <sha1>a4rb2rkuun183dq1vs1rf3haey5lvkd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0pupkt3uku8ebal</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612400</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401634</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:46:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0pupkt3uku8ebal&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>1g7gbrg251khdq04zdoll0ursc1cmcp</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0puyp7d0woyxb9j</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612402</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401640</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T13:51:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0puyp7d0woyxb9j&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>s8yg1gfg6l3u5e5ks5tmbwnzrqcuavu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0q3ufw7k3blbqxd</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612409</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401667</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T16:30:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0q3ufw7k3blbqxd&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>l7evcnpw2rs5m3t29kphdpofqmrlopc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0q3vdkqevu6g964</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612410</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401668</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T16:31:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0q3vdkqevu6g964&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>jc3duugt0dofgyiw762tk47m8fpmv0i</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0qdgb9ia8chz8zr</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612411</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401696</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T19:23:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0qdgb9ia8chz8zr&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>mr4xmkkqzmkjff4okeyj1rtbzz7rt6g</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>User:MdsShakil/common.js</title>
    <ns>2</ns>
    <id>1612412</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401697</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T19:27:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>MdsShakil</username>
        <id>17398289</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;new mw.Api().postWithToken('csrf', {action:'echomarkread', all:1});&quot;</comment>
      <model>javascript</model>
      <format>text/javascript</format>
      <text bytes="67" xml:space="preserve">new mw.Api().postWithToken('csrf', {action:'echomarkread', all:1});</text>
      <sha1>42qdmlxahys4kirvilrv750a4ehct5v</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401698</id>
      <parentid>5401697</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T19:30:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>MdsShakil</username>
        <id>17398289</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Not working</comment>
      <model>javascript</model>
      <format>text/javascript</format>
      <text bytes="0" />
      <sha1>phoiac9h4m842xq45sp7s6u21eteeq1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Main Page/1/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612414</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401704</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:26:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Die '''Hauptseite''' ist die Seite, zu der das Wiki geht, wenn keine Seite in den [[$1|Parameter zu index.php]] angegeben ist.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="126" xml:space="preserve">Die '''Hauptseite''' ist die Seite, zu der das Wiki geht, wenn keine Seite in den [[$1|Parameter zu index.php]] angegeben ist.</text>
      <sha1>1pb7o6tnw4xjsis5fxllersftqa9kak</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Maintenance scripts/Configuration/Page display title/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612415</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401706</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:26:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Handbuch:Wartungsskripte/Konfiguration&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="38" xml:space="preserve">Handbuch:Wartungsskripte/Konfiguration</text>
      <sha1>bx2d07qbvxkv1d4uwglhnx4s640lcsd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Maintenance scripts/Configuration/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1612416</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401707</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:26:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Handbuch:Wartungsskripte/Konfiguration&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3155" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
__NOTOC__
{{Maintenance scripts}}


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}}&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}}&lt;/code&gt; configuration variables must be set in order to run maintenance scripts that need to alter the structure of the database (like {{ll|Manual:update.php}}) if the user configured in {{ll|Manual:$wgDBuser}} doesn't have enough permissions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, you can pass the &lt;kbd&gt;--dbuser&lt;/kbd&gt; and &lt;kbd&gt;--dbpass&lt;/kbd&gt; parameters to the script.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;!-- What about SQLite-backed installs? --&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The values for these variables differ based on the database engine that is being used to power your installation of MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If not configured, it will use the user configured in {{ll|Manual:$wgDBuser}}.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===MySQL===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some of the maintenance scripts require database permissions that, for security reasons, the main MediaWiki database account should not have.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A separate database account with 'superuser' privileges for just the MediaWiki database should be created (if it does not already exist.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the database that you use for MediaWiki is called &lt;code&gt;wikidb&lt;/code&gt;, then the following SQL would create such a user who can exercise superuser privileges on localhost.:&lt;/span&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot; style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON wikidb.* TO 'wikidbadmin'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'strong-password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once the account exists, the account name should be set in the &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}}&lt;/code&gt; configuration variable.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Like other configuration variables, &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminuser&lt;/code&gt; should be set in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A password for &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminuser&lt;/code&gt; must be set in the &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}}&lt;/code&gt; configuration variable.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===PostgreSQL===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL uses a different security model than MySQL and the same PostgreSQL server account used for day-to-day operation of the MediaWiki installation must also be used for running the maintenance scripts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is necessary to ensure that the owner for new tables created by the maintenance scripts is set correctly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You don't need to set &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminuser&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminpassword&lt;/code&gt; at all.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>lexqm1tzqqw25ae2vuecdfeiunvh6lk</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401709</id>
      <parentid>5401707</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:26:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;===MySQL===&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3099" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
__NOTOC__
{{Maintenance scripts}}


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}}&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}}&lt;/code&gt; configuration variables must be set in order to run maintenance scripts that need to alter the structure of the database (like {{ll|Manual:update.php}}) if the user configured in {{ll|Manual:$wgDBuser}} doesn't have enough permissions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, you can pass the &lt;kbd&gt;--dbuser&lt;/kbd&gt; and &lt;kbd&gt;--dbpass&lt;/kbd&gt; parameters to the script.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;!-- What about SQLite-backed installs? --&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The values for these variables differ based on the database engine that is being used to power your installation of MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If not configured, it will use the user configured in {{ll|Manual:$wgDBuser}}.&lt;/span&gt;

===MySQL===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some of the maintenance scripts require database permissions that, for security reasons, the main MediaWiki database account should not have.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A separate database account with 'superuser' privileges for just the MediaWiki database should be created (if it does not already exist.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the database that you use for MediaWiki is called &lt;code&gt;wikidb&lt;/code&gt;, then the following SQL would create such a user who can exercise superuser privileges on localhost.:&lt;/span&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot; style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON wikidb.* TO 'wikidbadmin'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'strong-password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once the account exists, the account name should be set in the &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}}&lt;/code&gt; configuration variable.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Like other configuration variables, &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminuser&lt;/code&gt; should be set in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A password for &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminuser&lt;/code&gt; must be set in the &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}}&lt;/code&gt; configuration variable.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
===PostgreSQL===
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL uses a different security model than MySQL and the same PostgreSQL server account used for day-to-day operation of the MediaWiki installation must also be used for running the maintenance scripts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is necessary to ensure that the owner for new tables created by the maintenance scripts is set correctly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You don't need to set &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminuser&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminpassword&lt;/code&gt; at all.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>52uu559pjaun2xh7m984ih32vee192s</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401711</id>
      <parentid>5401709</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:26:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;===PostgreSQL===&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3043" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
__NOTOC__
{{Maintenance scripts}}


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}}&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}}&lt;/code&gt; configuration variables must be set in order to run maintenance scripts that need to alter the structure of the database (like {{ll|Manual:update.php}}) if the user configured in {{ll|Manual:$wgDBuser}} doesn't have enough permissions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, you can pass the &lt;kbd&gt;--dbuser&lt;/kbd&gt; and &lt;kbd&gt;--dbpass&lt;/kbd&gt; parameters to the script.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;!-- What about SQLite-backed installs? --&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The values for these variables differ based on the database engine that is being used to power your installation of MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If not configured, it will use the user configured in {{ll|Manual:$wgDBuser}}.&lt;/span&gt;

===MySQL===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some of the maintenance scripts require database permissions that, for security reasons, the main MediaWiki database account should not have.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A separate database account with 'superuser' privileges for just the MediaWiki database should be created (if it does not already exist.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the database that you use for MediaWiki is called &lt;code&gt;wikidb&lt;/code&gt;, then the following SQL would create such a user who can exercise superuser privileges on localhost.:&lt;/span&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot; style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON wikidb.* TO 'wikidbadmin'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'strong-password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once the account exists, the account name should be set in the &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}}&lt;/code&gt; configuration variable.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Like other configuration variables, &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminuser&lt;/code&gt; should be set in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A password for &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminuser&lt;/code&gt; must be set in the &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}}&lt;/code&gt; configuration variable.&lt;/span&gt;

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL uses a different security model than MySQL and the same PostgreSQL server account used for day-to-day operation of the MediaWiki installation must also be used for running the maintenance scripts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is necessary to ensure that the owner for new tables created by the maintenance scripts is set correctly.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;You don't need to set &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminuser&lt;/code&gt; or &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminpassword&lt;/code&gt; at all.&lt;/span&gt;

[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>9wz0f4g1xp3sgk8ct3si30mdgh68lfp</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401713</id>
      <parentid>5401711</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:27:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Du musst überhaupt nicht $1 oder $2 einstellen.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2997" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
__NOTOC__
{{Maintenance scripts}}


&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}}&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}}&lt;/code&gt; configuration variables must be set in order to run maintenance scripts that need to alter the structure of the database (like {{ll|Manual:update.php}}) if the user configured in {{ll|Manual:$wgDBuser}} doesn't have enough permissions.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Alternatively, you can pass the &lt;kbd&gt;--dbuser&lt;/kbd&gt; and &lt;kbd&gt;--dbpass&lt;/kbd&gt; parameters to the script.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;!-- What about SQLite-backed installs? --&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;The values for these variables differ based on the database engine that is being used to power your installation of MediaWiki.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If not configured, it will use the user configured in {{ll|Manual:$wgDBuser}}.&lt;/span&gt;

===MySQL===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Some of the maintenance scripts require database permissions that, for security reasons, the main MediaWiki database account should not have.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A separate database account with 'superuser' privileges for just the MediaWiki database should be created (if it does not already exist.)&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If the database that you use for MediaWiki is called &lt;code&gt;wikidb&lt;/code&gt;, then the following SQL would create such a user who can exercise superuser privileges on localhost.:&lt;/span&gt;
{{-}}
&lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&quot;sql&quot; style=&quot;overflow:auto;&quot;&gt;
GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON wikidb.* TO 'wikidbadmin'@'localhost' IDENTIFIED BY 'strong-password';
&lt;/syntaxhighlight&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Once the account exists, the account name should be set in the &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminuser|$wgDBadminuser}}&lt;/code&gt; configuration variable.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Like other configuration variables, &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminuser&lt;/code&gt; should be set in {{ll|Manual:LocalSettings.php|LocalSettings.php}}.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A password for &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminuser&lt;/code&gt; must be set in the &lt;code&gt;{{ll|Manual:$wgDBadminpassword|$wgDBadminpassword}}&lt;/code&gt; configuration variable.&lt;/span&gt;

===PostgreSQL===
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;PostgreSQL uses a different security model than MySQL and the same PostgreSQL server account used for day-to-day operation of the MediaWiki installation must also be used for running the maintenance scripts.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is necessary to ensure that the owner for new tables created by the maintenance scripts is set correctly.&lt;/span&gt;
Du musst überhaupt nicht &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminuser&lt;/code&gt; oder &lt;code&gt;$wgDBadminpassword&lt;/code&gt; einstellen.

[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>bs56bff4ba2pj1i4mw699gcuhmwo6wm</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Maintenance scripts/Configuration/14/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612417</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401708</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:26:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;===MySQL===&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11" xml:space="preserve">===MySQL===</text>
      <sha1>s2iqcyhlmi7d7izbehbrgmattv50tp1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Maintenance scripts/Configuration/15/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612418</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401710</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:26:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;===PostgreSQL===&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16" xml:space="preserve">===PostgreSQL===</text>
      <sha1>2g08jltum4l2xpimzmmiexj3yjvugpv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Maintenance scripts/Configuration/13/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612419</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401712</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:27:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Du musst überhaupt nicht $1 oder $2 einstellen.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="48" xml:space="preserve">Du musst überhaupt nicht $1 oder $2 einstellen.</text>
      <sha1>q2hctgt4p4um0nojlnyx1q2eg4xeeuk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Maintenance scripts/List of scripts/Page display title/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612420</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401714</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:27:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Handbuch:Wartungsskripte/Liste der Skripte&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="42" xml:space="preserve">Handbuch:Wartungsskripte/Liste der Skripte</text>
      <sha1>gfveh3s4y3wf5wd1b8rc4wrmgmizu2u</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Maintenance scripts/List of scripts/de</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1612421</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401715</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:27:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Handbuch:Wartungsskripte/Liste der Skripte&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3183" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Maintenance scripts}}

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page contains list of maintenance script.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scripts are categories on their nature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This list may not contains some scripts so you can get the updated list from below sources.&lt;/span&gt;

* {{git file |file=maintenance/ |text=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Browse the latest contents of the &lt;code&gt;maintenance&lt;/code&gt; directory.&lt;/span&gt;}}
* https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/php/ - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;View its generated documentation summary.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Files &gt; File List &gt; maintenance in the tabs or left-hand navigation sidebar)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

__FORCETOC__

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Content maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Content maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Database maintenance script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Database maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  User maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== File maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  File maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Development maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Development maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Stats maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Stats maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Logs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Logs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Interwiki maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Interwiki maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Jobs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Jobs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Language maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Language maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Benchmark maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Benchmark maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Storage maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Storage maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;


[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>600i36697ilg7yd43vbwlzy8hi3f89c</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401717</id>
      <parentid>5401715</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:28:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Diese Seite enthält die Liste der Wartungsskripte.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3132" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Maintenance scripts}}

Diese Seite enthält die Liste der Wartungsskripte.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scripts are categories on their nature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This list may not contains some scripts so you can get the updated list from below sources.&lt;/span&gt;

* {{git file |file=maintenance/ |text=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Browse the latest contents of the &lt;code&gt;maintenance&lt;/code&gt; directory.&lt;/span&gt;}}
* https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/php/ - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;View its generated documentation summary.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Files &gt; File List &gt; maintenance in the tabs or left-hand navigation sidebar)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

__FORCETOC__

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Content maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Content maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Database maintenance script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Database maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  User maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== File maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  File maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Development maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Development maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Stats maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Stats maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Logs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Logs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Interwiki maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Interwiki maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Jobs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Jobs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Language maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Language maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Benchmark maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Benchmark maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Storage maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Storage maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;


[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>a7vol571031orb4wi82bqztg2l8ckm3</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401719</id>
      <parentid>5401717</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:28:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Inhalts-Wartungsskripte ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3072" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Maintenance scripts}}

Diese Seite enthält die Liste der Wartungsskripte.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scripts are categories on their nature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This list may not contains some scripts so you can get the updated list from below sources.&lt;/span&gt;

* {{git file |file=maintenance/ |text=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Browse the latest contents of the &lt;code&gt;maintenance&lt;/code&gt; directory.&lt;/span&gt;}}
* https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/php/ - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;View its generated documentation summary.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Files &gt; File List &gt; maintenance in the tabs or left-hand navigation sidebar)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

__FORCETOC__

== Inhalts-Wartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Content maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Database maintenance script ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Database maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  User maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== File maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  File maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Development maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Development maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Stats maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Stats maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Logs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Logs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Interwiki maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Interwiki maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Jobs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Jobs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Language maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Language maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Benchmark maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Benchmark maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Storage maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Storage maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;


[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>e1rh7lkdphzn97ad7p0kc656w9rabd6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401721</id>
      <parentid>5401719</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:28:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Datenbankwartungsskripte&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3007" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Maintenance scripts}}

Diese Seite enthält die Liste der Wartungsskripte.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scripts are categories on their nature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This list may not contains some scripts so you can get the updated list from below sources.&lt;/span&gt;

* {{git file |file=maintenance/ |text=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Browse the latest contents of the &lt;code&gt;maintenance&lt;/code&gt; directory.&lt;/span&gt;}}
* https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/php/ - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;View its generated documentation summary.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Files &gt; File List &gt; maintenance in the tabs or left-hand navigation sidebar)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

__FORCETOC__

== Inhalts-Wartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Content maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

Datenbankwartungsskripte
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Database maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  User maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== File maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  File maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Development maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Development maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Stats maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Stats maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Logs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Logs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Interwiki maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Interwiki maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Jobs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Jobs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Language maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Language maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Benchmark maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Benchmark maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Storage maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Storage maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;


[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>ps8ili7nc5b2vv5nopxuqj1liy82etg</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401723</id>
      <parentid>5401721</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:28:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="3013" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Maintenance scripts}}

Diese Seite enthält die Liste der Wartungsskripte.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scripts are categories on their nature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This list may not contains some scripts so you can get the updated list from below sources.&lt;/span&gt;

* {{git file |file=maintenance/ |text=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Browse the latest contents of the &lt;code&gt;maintenance&lt;/code&gt; directory.&lt;/span&gt;}}
* https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/php/ - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;View its generated documentation summary.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Files &gt; File List &gt; maintenance in the tabs or left-hand navigation sidebar)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

__FORCETOC__

== Inhalts-Wartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Content maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Datenbankwartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Database maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  User maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== File maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  File maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Development maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Development maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Stats maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Stats maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Logs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Logs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Interwiki maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Interwiki maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Jobs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Jobs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Language maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Language maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Benchmark maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Benchmark maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Storage maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Storage maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;


[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>hcbf106vdwecbivpsdditvhj89wjeze</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401725</id>
      <parentid>5401723</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:29:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Benchmark-Wartungsskripte ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2953" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Maintenance scripts}}

Diese Seite enthält die Liste der Wartungsskripte.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scripts are categories on their nature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This list may not contains some scripts so you can get the updated list from below sources.&lt;/span&gt;

* {{git file |file=maintenance/ |text=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Browse the latest contents of the &lt;code&gt;maintenance&lt;/code&gt; directory.&lt;/span&gt;}}
* https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/php/ - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;View its generated documentation summary.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Files &gt; File List &gt; maintenance in the tabs or left-hand navigation sidebar)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

__FORCETOC__

== Inhalts-Wartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Content maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Datenbankwartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Database maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  User maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== File maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  File maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Development maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Development maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Stats maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Stats maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Logs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Logs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Interwiki maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Interwiki maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Jobs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Jobs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Language maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Language maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Benchmark-Wartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Benchmark maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Storage maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Storage maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;


[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>n5aroio5axmslb6n4p2qtu1o3iwstci</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401727</id>
      <parentid>5401725</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:29:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Interwiki-Wartungsskripte ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2893" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Maintenance scripts}}

Diese Seite enthält die Liste der Wartungsskripte.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scripts are categories on their nature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This list may not contains some scripts so you can get the updated list from below sources.&lt;/span&gt;

* {{git file |file=maintenance/ |text=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Browse the latest contents of the &lt;code&gt;maintenance&lt;/code&gt; directory.&lt;/span&gt;}}
* https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/php/ - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;View its generated documentation summary.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Files &gt; File List &gt; maintenance in the tabs or left-hand navigation sidebar)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

__FORCETOC__

== Inhalts-Wartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Content maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Datenbankwartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Database maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  User maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== File maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  File maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Development maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Development maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Stats maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Stats maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Logs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Logs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Interwiki-Wartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Interwiki maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Jobs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Jobs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Language maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Language maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Benchmark-Wartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Benchmark maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Storage maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Storage maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;


[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>l97x5s4dz9i8c5j8lrkks4ax0apfxmk</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401729</id>
      <parentid>5401727</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:30:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Dateiwartungsskripte ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2833" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Maintenance scripts}}

Diese Seite enthält die Liste der Wartungsskripte.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scripts are categories on their nature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This list may not contains some scripts so you can get the updated list from below sources.&lt;/span&gt;

* {{git file |file=maintenance/ |text=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Browse the latest contents of the &lt;code&gt;maintenance&lt;/code&gt; directory.&lt;/span&gt;}}
* https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/php/ - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;View its generated documentation summary.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Files &gt; File List &gt; maintenance in the tabs or left-hand navigation sidebar)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

__FORCETOC__

== Inhalts-Wartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Content maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Datenbankwartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Database maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  User maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Dateiwartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  File maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Development maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Development maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Stats maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Stats maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Logs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Logs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Interwiki-Wartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Interwiki maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Jobs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Jobs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Language maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Language maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Benchmark-Wartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Benchmark maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Storage maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Storage maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;


[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>jtnbhn6qrzkyeef360lpdbccl5z2eq9</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401731</id>
      <parentid>5401729</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:30:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Sprachwartungsskripte ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2770" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;
{{Maintenance scripts}}

Diese Seite enthält die Liste der Wartungsskripte.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Scripts are categories on their nature.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This list may not contains some scripts so you can get the updated list from below sources.&lt;/span&gt;

* {{git file |file=maintenance/ |text=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Browse the latest contents of the &lt;code&gt;maintenance&lt;/code&gt; directory.&lt;/span&gt;}}
* https://doc.wikimedia.org/mediawiki-core/master/php/ - &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;View its generated documentation summary.&lt;/span&gt; &lt;small&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;(Files &gt; File List &gt; maintenance in the tabs or left-hand navigation sidebar)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;

__FORCETOC__

== Inhalts-Wartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Content maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Datenbankwartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Database maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== User maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  User maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Dateiwartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  File maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Development maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Development maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Stats maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Stats maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Logs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Logs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Interwiki-Wartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Interwiki maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Jobs maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Jobs maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Sprachwartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Language maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

== Benchmark-Wartungsskripte ==
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Benchmark maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Storage maintenance scripts ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;DynamicPageList&gt;
category  =  Storage maintenance scripts
shownamespace=false
&lt;/DynamicPageList&gt;


[[Category:Maintenance scripts{{#translation:}}| ]]</text>
      <sha1>eipo5ssane299ya891e8f5irncl3dn7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Maintenance scripts/List of scripts/16/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612422</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401716</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:28:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Diese Seite enthält die Liste der Wartungsskripte.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="51" xml:space="preserve">Diese Seite enthält die Liste der Wartungsskripte.</text>
      <sha1>6nthtkeq09lxeu6et1z80gmm1d16aj1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Maintenance scripts/List of scripts/4/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612423</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401718</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:28:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Inhalts-Wartungsskripte ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29" xml:space="preserve">== Inhalts-Wartungsskripte ==</text>
      <sha1>id64lmoi07c52kgjgatbxpkl2j0c400</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Maintenance scripts/List of scripts/5/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612424</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401720</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:28:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Datenbankwartungsskripte&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24" xml:space="preserve">Datenbankwartungsskripte</text>
      <sha1>jligoh05r106sv3y4brvl5fvy1lecut</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401722</id>
      <parentid>5401720</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:28:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="30" xml:space="preserve">== Datenbankwartungsskripte ==</text>
      <sha1>mamaa5kko6tp026doi352llw8rieeux</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Maintenance scripts/List of scripts/14/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612425</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401724</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:29:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Benchmark-Wartungsskripte ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="31" xml:space="preserve">== Benchmark-Wartungsskripte ==</text>
      <sha1>cbf25k52ccmnmok1nc0o2nuldtnm6bi</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Maintenance scripts/List of scripts/11/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612426</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401726</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:29:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Interwiki-Wartungsskripte ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="31" xml:space="preserve">== Interwiki-Wartungsskripte ==</text>
      <sha1>879xgjxzty0tdr07o8azk6tbh28yif7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Maintenance scripts/List of scripts/7/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612427</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401728</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:30:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Dateiwartungsskripte ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26" xml:space="preserve">== Dateiwartungsskripte ==</text>
      <sha1>hger60g434v98pkyuwr8aoz2968wtjq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Maintenance scripts/List of scripts/13/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612428</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401730</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:30:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Sprachwartungsskripte ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27" xml:space="preserve">== Sprachwartungsskripte ==</text>
      <sha1>qms1sxmkvhab1kjsw6olsrnvzymx33l</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:MakeTestEdits.php/Page display title/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612429</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401732</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:31:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Handbuch:makeTestEdits.php&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26" xml:space="preserve">Handbuch:makeTestEdits.php</text>
      <sha1>a6hbx7qeng9t54x9luxnyyscb5k2dp8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:MakeTestEdits.php/8/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612430</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401733</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:31:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Gültiger Benutzername eines vorhandenen Benutzers auf den Wiki&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="63" xml:space="preserve">Gültiger Benutzername eines vorhandenen Benutzers auf den Wiki</text>
      <sha1>7e1kfzkapi26biphe1w7ggjhuuttvlt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:MakeTestEdits.php/13/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612431</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401735</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:31:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Häufiger Fehler ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22" xml:space="preserve">== Häufiger Fehler ==</text>
      <sha1>2c1wv04b7rjonp9frlmelx5qfa1wh00</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:MakeTestEdits.php/9/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612432</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401737</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:32:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Anzahl an vorzunehmende Bearbeitungen&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="37" xml:space="preserve">Anzahl an vorzunehmende Bearbeitungen</text>
      <sha1>j9694wqncy49apvvznksasq0xw98mcy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Mctest.php/Page display title/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612433</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401739</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:33:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Handbuch:mctest.php&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="19" xml:space="preserve">Handbuch:mctest.php</text>
      <sha1>npr8gr43cnd6t94d28gio83itpon2c4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Mctest.php/12/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612434</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401740</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:33:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Häufiger Fehler ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22" xml:space="preserve">== Häufiger Fehler ==</text>
      <sha1>2c1wv04b7rjonp9frlmelx5qfa1wh00</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:PreprocessorFuzzTest.php/Page display title/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612435</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401742</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:34:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Handbuch:preprocessorFuzzTest.php&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="33" xml:space="preserve">Handbuch:preprocessorFuzzTest.php</text>
      <sha1>62by3g303d5e7lbm5jhk9gy3jdusyz3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:RenameDbPrefix.php/7/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612436</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401747</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:43:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Häufiger Fehler ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22" xml:space="preserve">== Häufiger Fehler ==</text>
      <sha1>2c1wv04b7rjonp9frlmelx5qfa1wh00</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:ShoutWiki/11/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612437</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401754</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="141" xml:space="preserve">The source code for most of these ShoutWiki custom extensions can be found at [$url Wikimedia's git repository] (the official MediaWiki git).</text>
      <sha1>bq6pzdq737lv9jk78v67mfu6fx1ssie</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:ShoutWiki/12/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612438</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401755</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:51:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="53" xml:space="preserve">See $1 for a list of extensions written by ShoutWiki.</text>
      <sha1>8rzi374vwvc33agetudptnpzkre9991</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:PurgeExpiredWatchlistItems.php/6/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612439</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401828</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:58:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Häufiger Fehler ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22" xml:space="preserve">== Häufiger Fehler ==</text>
      <sha1>2c1wv04b7rjonp9frlmelx5qfa1wh00</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:DeleteTag.php/9/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612440</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401829</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:58:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Häufiger Fehler ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22" xml:space="preserve">== Häufiger Fehler ==</text>
      <sha1>2c1wv04b7rjonp9frlmelx5qfa1wh00</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:ImportSites.php/8/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612441</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401830</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:58:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Häufiger Fehler ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="22" xml:space="preserve">== Häufiger Fehler ==</text>
      <sha1>2c1wv04b7rjonp9frlmelx5qfa1wh00</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:ManageForeignResources.php/13/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612442</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401834</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T21:58:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== Häufige Fehler ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="21" xml:space="preserve">== Häufige Fehler ==</text>
      <sha1>cb2d4ltmdr38kgyc6o210exht2txhf7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:CategoryChangesAsRdf.php/Page display title/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612443</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401847</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:02:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Handbuch:categoryChangesAsRdf.php&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="33" xml:space="preserve">Handbuch:categoryChangesAsRdf.php</text>
      <sha1>sc11znzsyvdy1tna33mxgn2h402a9pi</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Pending changes/Page display title/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612444</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401890</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:26:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Help:保留中の変更&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="23" xml:space="preserve">Help:保留中の変更</text>
      <sha1>bf5lq16fzfletcy384bjq2xiwdf6f11</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401894</id>
      <parentid>5401890</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:28:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="20" xml:space="preserve">Help:変更の保留</text>
      <sha1>ldgbnws7e4ygi370fmrii3nhoiiy8ju</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Pending changes/ja</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1612445</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401891</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:26:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Help:保留中の変更&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1876" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
'''Pending changes''' is a way to configure a page so that it displays to readers only edits that have been reviewed.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== What it means for a page to be pending changes protected ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a pending changes protected page, edits by unregistered (or new) users are not shown to readers until reviewed by a pending changes reviewer.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is thus a lesser form of protection than semi-[[Special:MyLanguage/Protection|protection]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== When is a page pending changes protected ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A page is pending changes protected by an [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:Administrators|administrator]] when it matches specific criteria set forth by the wiki's protection policy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to review pending edits ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All pending edits appear at '''Special:PendingChanges''', which provides the option to list only those from pending changes-protected pages (or actively deferred, if deferred changes is enabled), and can be reviewed by users with ''review'' permission.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to enable this feature ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The feature requires the [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:FlaggedRevs|flagged revisions]] extension, it can be enabled by setting {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsProtection}} to true in local settings, and can be used alongside its [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Deferred changes|deferral feature]] (enabled via {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsDeferral}}).
&lt;/div&gt;</text>
      <sha1>f2nodjp32fcgxsh59b7tgmh880xz2s4</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401893</id>
      <parentid>5401891</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:28:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;'''変更の保留''' ('''Pending changes''') は、査読済みの編集内容のみを読者に表示するようにページを構成する方法です。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1860" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
'''変更の保留''' ('''Pending changes''') は、査読済みの編集内容のみを読者に表示するようにページを構成する方法です。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== What it means for a page to be pending changes protected ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a pending changes protected page, edits by unregistered (or new) users are not shown to readers until reviewed by a pending changes reviewer.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is thus a lesser form of protection than semi-[[Special:MyLanguage/Protection|protection]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== When is a page pending changes protected ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A page is pending changes protected by an [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:Administrators|administrator]] when it matches specific criteria set forth by the wiki's protection policy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to review pending edits ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All pending edits appear at '''Special:PendingChanges''', which provides the option to list only those from pending changes-protected pages (or actively deferred, if deferred changes is enabled), and can be reviewed by users with ''review'' permission.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to enable this feature ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The feature requires the [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:FlaggedRevs|flagged revisions]] extension, it can be enabled by setting {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsProtection}} to true in local settings, and can be used alongside its [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Deferred changes|deferral feature]] (enabled via {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsDeferral}}).
&lt;/div&gt;</text>
      <sha1>9c1bfsc0rf6mf2mmflxd0pghe9etrrz</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401896</id>
      <parentid>5401893</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:29:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== 保護されているページの編集を保留する意味 ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1808" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
'''変更の保留''' ('''Pending changes''') は、査読済みの編集内容のみを読者に表示するようにページを構成する方法です。

== 保護されているページの編集を保留する意味 ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a pending changes protected page, edits by unregistered (or new) users are not shown to readers until reviewed by a pending changes reviewer.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is thus a lesser form of protection than semi-[[Special:MyLanguage/Protection|protection]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== When is a page pending changes protected ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A page is pending changes protected by an [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:Administrators|administrator]] when it matches specific criteria set forth by the wiki's protection policy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to review pending edits ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All pending edits appear at '''Special:PendingChanges''', which provides the option to list only those from pending changes-protected pages (or actively deferred, if deferred changes is enabled), and can be reviewed by users with ''review'' permission.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to enable this feature ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The feature requires the [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:FlaggedRevs|flagged revisions]] extension, it can be enabled by setting {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsProtection}} to true in local settings, and can be used alongside its [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Deferred changes|deferral feature]] (enabled via {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsDeferral}}).
&lt;/div&gt;</text>
      <sha1>6ylasmaadayzax1kahntm1myiy3eqek</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401898</id>
      <parentid>5401896</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:32:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1796" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
'''変更の保留''' ('''Pending changes''') は、査読済みの編集内容のみを読者に表示するようにページを構成する方法です。

== ページを変更の保留＋保護する意味 ==
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On a pending changes protected page, edits by unregistered (or new) users are not shown to readers until reviewed by a pending changes reviewer.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is thus a lesser form of protection than semi-[[Special:MyLanguage/Protection|protection]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== When is a page pending changes protected ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A page is pending changes protected by an [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:Administrators|administrator]] when it matches specific criteria set forth by the wiki's protection policy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to review pending edits ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All pending edits appear at '''Special:PendingChanges''', which provides the option to list only those from pending changes-protected pages (or actively deferred, if deferred changes is enabled), and can be reviewed by users with ''review'' permission.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to enable this feature ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The feature requires the [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:FlaggedRevs|flagged revisions]] extension, it can be enabled by setting {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsProtection}} to true in local settings, and can be used alongside its [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Deferred changes|deferral feature]] (enabled via {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsDeferral}}).
&lt;/div&gt;</text>
      <sha1>m8ddw4cne0iwr1cydv8t2kdpiwg6kqb</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401900</id>
      <parentid>5401898</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:33:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;変更の保留＋保護されているページでは、未登録の (または新規の) 利用者による編集は、保留中の変更の査読者が査読するまで読者に表示されません。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1801" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
'''変更の保留''' ('''Pending changes''') は、査読済みの編集内容のみを読者に表示するようにページを構成する方法です。

== ページを変更の保留＋保護する意味 ==
変更の保留＋保護されているページでは、未登録の (または新規の) 利用者による編集は、保留中の変更の査読者が査読するまで読者に表示されません。
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This is thus a lesser form of protection than semi-[[Special:MyLanguage/Protection|protection]].&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== When is a page pending changes protected ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A page is pending changes protected by an [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:Administrators|administrator]] when it matches specific criteria set forth by the wiki's protection policy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to review pending edits ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All pending edits appear at '''Special:PendingChanges''', which provides the option to list only those from pending changes-protected pages (or actively deferred, if deferred changes is enabled), and can be reviewed by users with ''review'' permission.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to enable this feature ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The feature requires the [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:FlaggedRevs|flagged revisions]] extension, it can be enabled by setting {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsProtection}} to true in local settings, and can be used alongside its [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Deferred changes|deferral feature]] (enabled via {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsDeferral}}).
&lt;/div&gt;</text>
      <sha1>o55ckuj6voib1ntzpatyyrf36thc88s</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401902</id>
      <parentid>5401900</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:34:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;したがって、半[[$1|保護]]よりも劣る保護ということになります。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1764" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
'''変更の保留''' ('''Pending changes''') は、査読済みの編集内容のみを読者に表示するようにページを構成する方法です。

== ページを変更の保留＋保護する意味 ==
変更の保留＋保護されているページでは、未登録の (または新規の) 利用者による編集は、保留中の変更の査読者が査読するまで読者に表示されません。
したがって、半[[Special:MyLanguage/Protection|保護]]よりも劣る保護ということになります。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== When is a page pending changes protected ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A page is pending changes protected by an [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:Administrators|administrator]] when it matches specific criteria set forth by the wiki's protection policy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to review pending edits ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All pending edits appear at '''Special:PendingChanges''', which provides the option to list only those from pending changes-protected pages (or actively deferred, if deferred changes is enabled), and can be reviewed by users with ''review'' permission.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to enable this feature ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The feature requires the [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:FlaggedRevs|flagged revisions]] extension, it can be enabled by setting {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsProtection}} to true in local settings, and can be used alongside its [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Deferred changes|deferral feature]] (enabled via {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsDeferral}}).
&lt;/div&gt;</text>
      <sha1>ecm3167y6xmzl4ylu4h8ajltcnrid2u</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401905</id>
      <parentid>5401902</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:34:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1773" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
'''変更の保留''' ('''Pending changes''') は、査読済みの編集内容のみを読者に表示するようにページを構成する方法です。

== ページを変更の保留＋保護する意味 ==
変更の保留＋保護されているページでは、未登録の (または新規の) 利用者による編集は、保留中の変更の査読者が査読するまで読者に表示されません。
したがって、半[[Special:MyLanguage/Protection|保護]]よりも劣る保護の一種ということになります。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== When is a page pending changes protected ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A page is pending changes protected by an [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:Administrators|administrator]] when it matches specific criteria set forth by the wiki's protection policy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to review pending edits ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All pending edits appear at '''Special:PendingChanges''', which provides the option to list only those from pending changes-protected pages (or actively deferred, if deferred changes is enabled), and can be reviewed by users with ''review'' permission.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to enable this feature ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The feature requires the [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:FlaggedRevs|flagged revisions]] extension, it can be enabled by setting {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsProtection}} to true in local settings, and can be used alongside its [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Deferred changes|deferral feature]] (enabled via {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsDeferral}}).
&lt;/div&gt;</text>
      <sha1>ppapp3esenk74qg3qk2kjukdmaf1ny1</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401908</id>
      <parentid>5401905</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:34:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== ページを変更の保留＋保護するタイミング ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1734" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
'''変更の保留''' ('''Pending changes''') は、査読済みの編集内容のみを読者に表示するようにページを構成する方法です。

== ページを変更の保留＋保護する意味 ==
変更の保留＋保護されているページでは、未登録の (または新規の) 利用者による編集は、保留中の変更の査読者が査読するまで読者に表示されません。
したがって、半[[Special:MyLanguage/Protection|保護]]よりも劣る保護の一種ということになります。

== ページを変更の保留＋保護するタイミング ==

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A page is pending changes protected by an [[Special:MyLanguage/Project:Administrators|administrator]] when it matches specific criteria set forth by the wiki's protection policy.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to review pending edits ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All pending edits appear at '''Special:PendingChanges''', which provides the option to list only those from pending changes-protected pages (or actively deferred, if deferred changes is enabled), and can be reviewed by users with ''review'' permission.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to enable this feature ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The feature requires the [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:FlaggedRevs|flagged revisions]] extension, it can be enabled by setting {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsProtection}} to true in local settings, and can be used alongside its [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Deferred changes|deferral feature]] (enabled via {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsDeferral}}).
&lt;/div&gt;</text>
      <sha1>5d3ib71ius5vfx286y868v2ihfdd9v3</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401910</id>
      <parentid>5401908</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:35:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;ウィキの保護方針で定められた特定の基準に合致する場合、そのページは[[$1|管理者]]によって保護された変更保留の状態です。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1711" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
'''変更の保留''' ('''Pending changes''') は、査読済みの編集内容のみを読者に表示するようにページを構成する方法です。

== ページを変更の保留＋保護する意味 ==
変更の保留＋保護されているページでは、未登録の (または新規の) 利用者による編集は、保留中の変更の査読者が査読するまで読者に表示されません。
したがって、半[[Special:MyLanguage/Protection|保護]]よりも劣る保護の一種ということになります。

== ページを変更の保留＋保護するタイミング ==

ウィキの保護方針で定められた特定の基準に合致する場合、そのページは[[Special:MyLanguage/Project:Administrators|管理者]]によって保護された変更保留の状態です。

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to review pending edits ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
All pending edits appear at '''Special:PendingChanges''', which provides the option to list only those from pending changes-protected pages (or actively deferred, if deferred changes is enabled), and can be reviewed by users with ''review'' permission.
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== How to enable this feature ==
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
The feature requires the [[Special:MyLanguage/Extension:FlaggedRevs|flagged revisions]] extension, it can be enabled by setting {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsProtection}} to true in local settings, and can be used alongside its [[Special:MyLanguage/Help:Deferred changes|deferral feature]] (enabled via {{phpi|$wgFlaggedRevsDeferral}}).
&lt;/div&gt;</text>
      <sha1>901nzlr8je0y3tq7diatsw2u1gx0z8p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Pending changes/1/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612446</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401892</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:28:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;'''変更の保留''' ('''Pending changes''') は、査読済みの編集内容のみを読者に表示するようにページを構成する方法です。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="157" xml:space="preserve">'''変更の保留''' ('''Pending changes''') は、査読済みの編集内容のみを読者に表示するようにページを構成する方法です。</text>
      <sha1>rdz0mg2mkii6luyqfsih7lrypil1vng</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Pending changes/2/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612447</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401895</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:29:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== 保護されているページの編集を保留する意味 ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="66" xml:space="preserve">== 保護されているページの編集を保留する意味 ==</text>
      <sha1>nnb7ny92vxw7k0e9budi5rz6cd4vcwc</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401897</id>
      <parentid>5401895</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:32:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="54" xml:space="preserve">== ページを変更の保留＋保護する意味 ==</text>
      <sha1>6qjir5qzw4dltfikzzd8j1pb43y29l8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Pending changes/3/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612448</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401899</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:33:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;変更の保留＋保護されているページでは、未登録の (または新規の) 利用者による編集は、保留中の変更の査読者が査読するまで読者に表示されません。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="205" xml:space="preserve">変更の保留＋保護されているページでは、未登録の (または新規の) 利用者による編集は、保留中の変更の査読者が査読するまで読者に表示されません。</text>
      <sha1>8rh341fp6inmzaiag9j6d6awj85zj2t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Pending changes/4/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612449</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401901</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:34:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;したがって、半[[$1|保護]]よりも劣る保護ということになります。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="88" xml:space="preserve">したがって、半[[$1|保護]]よりも劣る保護ということになります。</text>
      <sha1>gjzhfw33z06gemf1g72plptsog3wnta</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401904</id>
      <parentid>5401901</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:34:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="97" xml:space="preserve">したがって、半[[$1|保護]]よりも劣る保護の一種ということになります。</text>
      <sha1>b8pg29pn3zex0ihlnmnnr1xqr0zqlvr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Pending changes/5/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612450</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401907</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:34:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;== ページを変更の保留＋保護するタイミング ==&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="63" xml:space="preserve">== ページを変更の保留＋保護するタイミング ==</text>
      <sha1>8icbhny3tn6si1b4dctow3lp1upgyc9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Pending changes/6/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612451</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401909</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:35:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;ウィキの保護方針で定められた特定の基準に合致する場合、そのページは[[$1|管理者]]によって保護された変更保留の状態です。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="172" xml:space="preserve">ウィキの保護方針で定められた特定の基準に合致する場合、そのページは[[$1|管理者]]によって保護された変更保留の状態です。</text>
      <sha1>07lpvd21ms8t21s2mlrr7b6c2yan0eo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:ShoutWiki/12/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612452</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401911</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:35:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Consulte $1 para uma lista de extensões elaboradas pelo ShoutWiki.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="67" xml:space="preserve">Consulte $1 para uma lista de extensões elaboradas pelo ShoutWiki.</text>
      <sha1>n0w780gzmceqgu5afmjoncopzuhdjhh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:ShoutWiki/11/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612453</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401913</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:38:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;O código fonte da maioria destas extensões personalizadas ShoutWiki pode ser encontrado em [$url repositório git do Wikimedia] (o git oficial do MediaWiki).&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="159" xml:space="preserve">O código fonte da maioria destas extensões personalizadas ShoutWiki pode ser encontrado em [$url repositório git do Wikimedia] (o git oficial do MediaWiki).</text>
      <sha1>taz40vwwuzizkrpv1fo0pgrrjr8qsq4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Coding conventions/Java/12/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612454</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401917</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:41:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Maven é utilizada como uma ferramenta da build.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="48" xml:space="preserve">Maven é utilizada como uma ferramenta da build.</text>
      <sha1>nvemz268o07fxoa79vslb13pozhltsa</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Manual:Coding conventions/Java/pt-br</title>
    <ns>100</ns>
    <id>1612455</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401918</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:41:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Maven é utilizada como uma ferramenta da build.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8529" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
{{Development guideline}}
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;This page describes the '''coding conventions''' used within files of the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Code|MediaWiki codebase]] written in '''Java'''.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;See also the [[Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Coding conventions#All languages|general conventions]] that apply to all program languages, including Java.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Build ==
&lt;/div&gt;
Maven é utilizada como uma ferramenta da build.
All projects should inherit from the [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-parent-pom/|discovery-parent-pom]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;It configures a number of static analysis tools and linters that will help in keeping projects coherent.&lt;/span&gt;
Code conventions are embodied in the  [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-maven-tool-configs/+/refs/heads/master/src/main/resources/org/wikimedia/discovery/build/tools/checkstyle/checkstyle.xml|checkstyle configuration]] used by that pom.xml and will not be repeated here.
The [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/wikimedia/discovery/discovery-parent-pom/+/refs/heads/master/README.md|README]] file in that project describes how to use this parent pom.

Java projects hosted on Gerrit should be built by Jenkins by using the [[gerrit:plugins/gitiles/integration/config/+/refs/heads/master/jjb/job-templates.yaml#87|-maven-java8-docker template]].
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Other templates are available to publish documentation and to manage the release process.&lt;/span&gt;

Java projects should be analyzed by [https://sonarcloud.io/organizations/wmftest SonarCloud].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Java version ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Most of our projects are at the moment targeting Java 8.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;We are in the process of transitioning to Java 11.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
== Libraries ==
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;A number of libraries are commonly used throughout our various Java projects.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Using the same libraries for similar use cases can help coherence across projects.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;That being said, use the list below as suggestions, not as a hard rule.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
=== Production Code ===
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Guava ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Guava is used on a number of projects.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Note that in some cases, we have dependencies that themselves rely on outdated Guava versions, which prevents us from using the latest version.The features of Guava that we use the most are:&lt;/span&gt;

* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/PreconditionsExplained Preconditions]
* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/ImmutableCollectionsExplained Immutable Collections]
* [https://github.com/google/guava/wiki/CachesExplained Caches]

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== Lombok ====
&lt;/div&gt;
While [https://projectlombok.org/features/all Lombok] is not strictly a library, it provides very useful syntactic sugar to Java.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Since Lombok is an annotation processor executed at compile time, Lombok has no runtime dependencies and is thus not creating compatibility issues.&lt;/span&gt;

Lombok can be further configured by adding a &lt;code&gt;lombok.config&lt;/code&gt; file at the package level, which might be particularly useful to make it play nice with Jackson.
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;An example of such configuration:&lt;/span&gt;

 lombok.equalsAndHashCode.callSuper = call
 # disable SpotBugs, it does not like generated code by lombok
 lombok.extern.findbugs.addSuppressFBWarnings = true
 lombok.addLombokGeneratedAnnotation = true
 # useful for jackson that will be able to use the all args constructor when deserializing
 lombok.anyConstructor.addConstructorProperties = true

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
A few particularly useful features:
&lt;/div&gt;

* [https://projectlombok.org/features/Data @Data]: makes it easy to generate DTO / DO, taking care of all this getters / setters and having a proper, valid &lt;code&gt;equals()&lt;/code&gt; and &lt;code&gt;hashCode()&lt;/code&gt;.
* [https://projectlombok.org/features/SneakyThrows @SneakyThrows]: a better way of dealing with checked exceptions than wrapping them in an unchecked exception.

Depending on your IDE, you might need to install a lombok plugin. See [https://www.projectlombok.org/setup/overview documentation for your specific IDE].

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
==== JSR 305 ====
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;JSR 305 provides annotations to better document expected behaviour and help detect bugs.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Those annotations are only compile time dependencies and not required at runtime, they don't generate dependency issues.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
In particular:
&lt;/div&gt;

* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/Nonnull.html @Nonnull] / [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/Nullable.html @Nullable]: specifies that a method parameter or return value should be non-null or nullable.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/ParametersAreNonnullByDefault.html @ParametersAreNonnullByDefault]: all parameters on this class / package / method are expected to be non null unless otherwise specified.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/Immutable.html @Immutable]: this class is immutable.
* [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/ThreadSafe.html @ThreadSafe] / [http://checkstyle-addons.github.io/jsr305-javadoc/3.0.1/javax/annotation/concurrent/NotThreadSafe.html @NotThreadSafe]: this class is or is not thread safe.

==== JSON / XML ====

[https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson Jackson] is used for most JSON and XML parsing / serialization, with the use of [https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson-annotations annotations].

==== HTTP client ====

[https://hc.apache.org/ Apache HttpComponents] is used as an HTTP client.

As much as possible a single instance of &lt;code&gt;HttpClient&lt;/code&gt; should be shared within an application.
A custom User Agent string should be configured.

=== Testing ===

==== Unit Testing Framework ====

We mostly use [https://junit.org/ JUnit] as a testing framework.
Some projects are using [https://junit.org/junit4/ JUnit 4], while others are using JUnit 5.
Some projects have dependencies on component specific testing libraries that don't support [https://junit.org/junit5/ JUnit 5] yet.
For projects that don't have this limitation, JUnit 5 should be preferred.

==== Mocking ====

[https://site.mockito.org/ Mockito] is used as a mocking framework where needed.

==== HTTP Mocking ====

[https://wiremock.org/docs/ WireMock] is used as an HTTP mock server, which allows testing code that relies on HTTP interactions.
Note that WireMock makes it easy to also test various faults (delays, timeout, etc...).

==== Assertions ====

[https://assertj.github.io/doc/ AssertJ] is our main assertion framework.
In almost all cases AssertJ should be preferred over plain &lt;code&gt;assert&lt;/code&gt;, JUnit assertions or Hamcrest.

== Various conventions ==

=== Unit vs Integration Tests ===

We follow the usual naming conventions to identify [https://maven.apache.org/surefire/maven-surefire-plugin/examples/inclusion-exclusion.html unit tests] vs [https://maven.apache.org/surefire/maven-failsafe-plugin/examples/inclusion-exclusion.html integration tests].

=== Managing &lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt; and defensive programming ===

As much as possible, &lt;code&gt;null&lt;/code&gt; values should be avoided.
[[:en:Null_object_pattern|Null Objects]] should be preferred.
Parameters should be expected to be non null and not explicitly checked, unless they come from an untrusted caller.
Parameters should be marked with &lt;code&gt;@Nonnull&lt;/code&gt; / &lt;code&gt;@Nullable&lt;/code&gt; to allow static analysis tools to validate nullity.

{{Conventions navigation}}</text>
      <sha1>8nzxipttpr9wpykbjzsjshtp5lgi0wb</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/15/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612456</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401919</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:42:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Digite estas teclas do teclado:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="31" xml:space="preserve">Digite estas teclas do teclado:</text>
      <sha1>83k2oyaf9301j0wma3y0jwrv1hufb6e</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/pt-br</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1612457</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401920</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:42:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Digite estas teclas do teclado:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1964" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/span&gt; 
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;...&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type Setswana letters, type the tilde (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), and after it type the Latin letter that is the most similar to the Setswana letter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to type Š, type &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; and then S. The full list:&lt;/span&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type this letter...&lt;/span&gt;
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>9r35l3sjb2k905k1mgcn9jrg5h9sn67</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401922</id>
      <parentid>5401920</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:42:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Para digitar esta carta...&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1912" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/span&gt; 
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;...&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type Setswana letters, type the tilde (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), and after it type the Latin letter that is the most similar to the Setswana letter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to type Š, type &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; and then S. The full list:&lt;/span&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>pq3mxpiec8if430sm79zrenew2lhc7b</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401924</id>
      <parentid>5401922</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:42:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Por exemplo, para digitar $output, digite $tilde e depois $input. A lista completa:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1866" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/span&gt; 
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;...&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type Setswana letters, type the tilde (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), and after it type the Latin letter that is the most similar to the Setswana letter.&lt;/span&gt;
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>pqa98kk8yla14wanzfh8o75omd2eg6l</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401926</id>
      <parentid>5401924</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:43:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til ($1), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1804" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/span&gt; 
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;...&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/span&gt;

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>auapd2417zut8dwh371us2tu14tolk6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401928</id>
      <parentid>5401926</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:43:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1748" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/span&gt; 
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;...&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/span&gt;
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>te4mtdzp1o5awbd8gjsovz1lay5v2pa</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401931</id>
      <parentid>5401928</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:44:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1710" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/span&gt; 
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;...&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>mcnia8ztsqe8ios8ha033rfuzq1swnj</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401933</id>
      <parentid>5401931</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:44:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;$setswanaTilde&quot;.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1664" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/span&gt; 
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;...&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>bzv551sfnyhtlaqgocpzmub5wy7acv7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401935</id>
      <parentid>5401933</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:44:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Encontre &quot;$setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1612" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/span&gt; 
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;...&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/span&gt;
## Encontre &quot;Setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.
## Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>tldxak7c80d2h1ue44ju1bpdxk5msjs</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401937</id>
      <parentid>5401935</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:45:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Clique em &quot;$ellipsis&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1553" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/span&gt; 
## Clique em &quot;...&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.
## Encontre &quot;Setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.
## Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>35byrkjzj6rzpni7cruz1peur6s04ui</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401939</id>
      <parentid>5401937</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:45:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Se &quot;$setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1490" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte: 
## Clique em &quot;...&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.
## Encontre &quot;Setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.
## Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>q2jk3955nkqzcr70n625wii93xkusdl</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401941</id>
      <parentid>5401939</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:45:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Se &quot;$setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;$setswanaTilde&quot;.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1432" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/span&gt;
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte: 
## Clique em &quot;...&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.
## Encontre &quot;Setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.
## Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>hprkzwi565o6i06lszwoq9h7smu0sbl</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401943</id>
      <parentid>5401941</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:45:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Clique no pequeno ícone do teclado que aparece perto da caixa de busca.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1384" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
# Clique no pequeno ícone do teclado que aparece perto da caixa de busca.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte: 
## Clique em &quot;...&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.
## Encontre &quot;Setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.
## Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>o70lu0bqdhy6pyd7i7o9vnrm7xyyvkh</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401945</id>
      <parentid>5401943</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:46:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Clique na caixa de busca na parte superior da página.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1338" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# Clique na caixa de busca na parte superior da página.
# Clique no pequeno ícone do teclado que aparece perto da caixa de busca.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte: 
## Clique em &quot;...&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.
## Encontre &quot;Setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.
## Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>7rtsbwy7qqv0zwmkweg4mgkg7t62l9k</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401948</id>
      <parentid>5401945</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:46:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Para habilitar este layout de teclado, faça o seguinte:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1289" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

Para habilitar este layout de teclado, faça o seguinte:

# Clique na caixa de busca na parte superior da página.
# Clique no pequeno ícone do teclado que aparece perto da caixa de busca.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte: 
## Clique em &quot;...&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.
## Encontre &quot;Setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.
## Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>nu5q9viu2uinm8e2o1ljnh0ovyfhgyy</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401950</id>
      <parentid>5401948</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:46:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Você pode digitar o alfabeto Setswana com todas as letras especiais!&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1235" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

Você pode digitar o alfabeto Setswana com todas as letras especiais!

Para habilitar este layout de teclado, faça o seguinte:

# Clique na caixa de busca na parte superior da página.
# Clique no pequeno ícone do teclado que aparece perto da caixa de busca.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte: 
## Clique em &quot;...&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.
## Encontre &quot;Setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.
## Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>4uc0um16mi8hbbwsd0v1nkau8v1e5x5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402022</id>
      <parentid>5401950</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:28:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1444" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

Você pode digitar o alfabeto Setswana com todas as letras especiais!

Para habilitar este layout de teclado, faça o seguinte:

# Clique na caixa de busca na parte superior da página.
# Clique no pequeno ícone do teclado que aparece perto da caixa de busca.
# &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se &quot;$setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se &quot;$setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte:&lt;/span&gt; 
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Clique em &quot;$ellipsis&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Encontre &quot;$setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;$setswanaTilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>j3b9njl3m296ad6x2tq58jcphsktl6z</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402025</id>
      <parentid>5402022</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:30:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Updating to match new version of source page</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1444" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

Você pode digitar o alfabeto Setswana com todas as letras especiais!

Para habilitar este layout de teclado, faça o seguinte:

# Clique na caixa de busca na parte superior da página.
# Clique no pequeno ícone do teclado que aparece perto da caixa de busca.
# &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se &quot;$setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;$setswanaTilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se &quot;$setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte:&lt;/span&gt; 
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Clique em &quot;$ellipsis&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Encontre &quot;$setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;$setswanaTilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>jaw7i03em07xdiu0fztjn2s8jkjvjeu</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402027</id>
      <parentid>5402025</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:30:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1403" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

Você pode digitar o alfabeto Setswana com todas as letras especiais!

Para habilitar este layout de teclado, faça o seguinte:

# Clique na caixa de busca na parte superior da página.
# Clique no pequeno ícone do teclado que aparece perto da caixa de busca.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.
# &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Se &quot;$setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte:&lt;/span&gt; 
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Clique em &quot;$ellipsis&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Encontre &quot;$setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;$setswanaTilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>11aw5mi0e5cseexiczikauh6w81qtp5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402029</id>
      <parentid>5402027</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:32:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1362" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

Você pode digitar o alfabeto Setswana com todas as letras especiais!

Para habilitar este layout de teclado, faça o seguinte:

# Clique na caixa de busca na parte superior da página.
# Clique no pequeno ícone do teclado que aparece perto da caixa de busca.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte: 
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Clique em &quot;$ellipsis&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Encontre &quot;$setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;$setswanaTilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>kwnpo41yuy8ecx1rnd5qx5l6h3zlgn6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402031</id>
      <parentid>5402029</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:32:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1316" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

Você pode digitar o alfabeto Setswana com todas as letras especiais!

Para habilitar este layout de teclado, faça o seguinte:

# Clique na caixa de busca na parte superior da página.
# Clique no pequeno ícone do teclado que aparece perto da caixa de busca.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte: 
## Clique em &quot;...&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Encontre &quot;$setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;$setswanaTilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>b22h8kcafg2rn7yajia8mafdzvwyhw7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402033</id>
      <parentid>5402031</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:32:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1275" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

Você pode digitar o alfabeto Setswana com todas as letras especiais!

Para habilitar este layout de teclado, faça o seguinte:

# Clique na caixa de busca na parte superior da página.
# Clique no pequeno ícone do teclado que aparece perto da caixa de busca.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte: 
## Clique em &quot;...&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.
## Encontre &quot;Setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.
## &lt;span class=&quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&quot;&gt;Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;$setswanaTilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>2hllb5gkyiolvn0csepkczpcnf8qfin</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402037</id>
      <parentid>5402033</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:33:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1235" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

Você pode digitar o alfabeto Setswana com todas as letras especiais!

Para habilitar este layout de teclado, faça o seguinte:

# Clique na caixa de busca na parte superior da página.
# Clique no pequeno ícone do teclado que aparece perto da caixa de busca.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.
# Se &quot;Setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte: 
## Clique em &quot;...&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.
## Encontre &quot;Setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.
## Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.

Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.
Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.

Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.
Por exemplo, para digitar Š, digite &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; e depois S. A lista completa:

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!Para digitar esta carta...
!Digite estas teclas do teclado:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>4uc0um16mi8hbbwsd0v1nkau8v1e5x5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/14/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612458</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401921</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:42:28Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Para digitar esta carta...&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26" xml:space="preserve">Para digitar esta carta...</text>
      <sha1>82xjs2znpktye0oc2mpc0h1oifrmw6p</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/13/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612459</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401923</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:42:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Por exemplo, para digitar $output, digite $tilde e depois $input. A lista completa:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="83" xml:space="preserve">Por exemplo, para digitar $output, digite $tilde e depois $input. A lista completa:</text>
      <sha1>ohsnx2thw2nugqdf0vkin8otc6nkkrj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/12/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612460</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401925</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:43:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til ($1), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="124" xml:space="preserve">Para digitar letras Setswana, digite o til ($1), e depois digite a letra latina que é a mais parecida com a letra Setswana.</text>
      <sha1>47ih6ndwfru61ywwb58f9yymiz2msh5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/11/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612461</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401927</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:43:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="66" xml:space="preserve">Para reativar o teclado Setswana, repita os passos listados acima.</text>
      <sha1>27bkh0o92v4zmuyhog3s5zi0a389eqz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/10/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612462</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401930</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:44:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="167" xml:space="preserve">Para desativar este teclado especial e voltar a digitar normalmente, clique no pequeno ícone de teclado e depois clique em &quot;Usar teclado nativo&quot;, ou pressione Ctrl-M.</text>
      <sha1>16c1hw7c8li3ztn84vdvztbtc21eos3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/9/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612463</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401932</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:44:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;$setswanaTilde&quot;.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="76" xml:space="preserve">Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;$setswanaTilde&quot;.</text>
      <sha1>53533bkq2ffsfr06lyd2518udj44nr7</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402036</id>
      <parentid>5401932</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:33:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="64" xml:space="preserve">Clique novamente no pequeno ícone do teclado, e selecione &quot;$1&quot;.</text>
      <sha1>52rzgo1litfb6pv9xtdr8d5ktvfs11q</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/8/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612464</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401934</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:44:46Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Encontre &quot;$setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="44" xml:space="preserve">Encontre &quot;$setswana&quot; no painel. Clique nele.</text>
      <sha1>hxl1pw87xnsd1j8eyhg4bkblrmeud9a</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402032</id>
      <parentid>5401934</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:32:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="37" xml:space="preserve">Encontre &quot;$1&quot; no painel. Clique nele.</text>
      <sha1>qrtlomgm4ox5kvsfmh3mjpfi1mw4v63</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/7/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612465</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401936</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:45:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Clique em &quot;$ellipsis&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="62" xml:space="preserve">Clique em &quot;$ellipsis&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.</text>
      <sha1>7vln51yvismfzdooqdo66i150iiozjo</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402030</id>
      <parentid>5401936</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:32:11Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="55" xml:space="preserve">Clique em &quot;$1&quot; no final da lista. Aparecerá um painel.</text>
      <sha1>ry4gao2wxvobu339sam6kderoeq4pyh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/6/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612466</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401938</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:45:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Se &quot;$setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="64" xml:space="preserve">Se &quot;$setswana&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte:</text>
      <sha1>olnoymuja3ldh1mho0wporzg48zy8ha</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402028</id>
      <parentid>5401938</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:32:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="57" xml:space="preserve">Se &quot;$1&quot; não aparecer no topo da lista, faça o seguinte:</text>
      <sha1>msm870stjrnxw4rh54e4p5h0n2er2ns</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/5/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612467</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401940</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:45:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Se &quot;$setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;$setswanaTilde&quot;.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="69" xml:space="preserve">Se &quot;$setswana&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;$setswanaTilde&quot;.</text>
      <sha1>ay0pi1ue42yb4rqir5m6u3nvxrqq4ev</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402026</id>
      <parentid>5401940</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:30:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="50" xml:space="preserve">Se &quot;$1&quot; aparecer no topo da lista, selecione &quot;$2&quot;.</text>
      <sha1>tso3wh9bza8c9kr1lixcy4s0f3bpgc0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/4/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612468</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401942</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:45:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Clique no pequeno ícone do teclado que aparece perto da caixa de busca.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="72" xml:space="preserve">Clique no pequeno ícone do teclado que aparece perto da caixa de busca.</text>
      <sha1>0cz6ki9aitkpays5uhwl4s7ylhkns7t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/3/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612469</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401944</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:46:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Clique na caixa de busca na parte superior da página.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="54" xml:space="preserve">Clique na caixa de busca na parte superior da página.</text>
      <sha1>05114514udtyomc2p0xkji7jse0pt6e</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0qornzvx72jfixv</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612470</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401946</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:46:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0qornzvx72jfixv&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>bb3nlg7rzs62g2mx1nfjr1ime4yaddj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/2/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612471</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401947</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:46:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Para habilitar este layout de teclado, faça o seguinte:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="56" xml:space="preserve">Para habilitar este layout de teclado, faça o seguinte:</text>
      <sha1>64wyxu5am8584109ju3wtpw1asgoqpe</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/1/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612472</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401949</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:46:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Você pode digitar o alfabeto Setswana com todas as letras especiais!&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="69" xml:space="preserve">Você pode digitar o alfabeto Setswana com todas as letras especiais!</text>
      <sha1>esocabggt99mru1fc5ih9x0sucka1mi</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/Page display title/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612473</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401951</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:47:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Ajuda:Extensão:UniversalLanguageSelector/Método de entrada/tn-tilde&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="69" xml:space="preserve">Ajuda:Extensão:UniversalLanguageSelector/Método de entrada/tn-tilde</text>
      <sha1>71r0aczeak0sfrhjarpapczyn6kuty5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Parameters to index.php/88/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612474</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401952</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:47:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Passar $1 retorna o código fonte de uma página ou revisão. Por razões de cache e segurança, isto geralmente deve ser usado apenas através do [[$vsurl|script path]], isto é, $2]].&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="185" xml:space="preserve">Passar $1 retorna o código fonte de uma página ou revisão. Por razões de cache e segurança, isto geralmente deve ser usado apenas através do [[$vsurl|script path]], isto é, $2]].</text>
      <sha1>sf7wandq3l24c2joyv5wzx4u1r52rxt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:$wgSMTP/78/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612475</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401955</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:48:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;==== require_once(): Falha na abertura requerida 'Net/Socket.php ======= Verifique seu LocalSettings.php para quaisquer linhas que chamem $include. Estas não devem ser necessárias, mas podem atrapalhar o suporte SMTP. Retire-as do LocalSettings.php se estiverem presentes.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="274" xml:space="preserve">==== require_once(): Falha na abertura requerida 'Net/Socket.php =======
Verifique seu LocalSettings.php para quaisquer linhas que chamem $include. Estas não devem ser necessárias, mas podem atrapalhar o suporte SMTP. Retire-as do LocalSettings.php se estiverem presentes.</text>
      <sha1>o9pap0lrtbpbovjhti1rf5posddbe9w</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5401957</id>
      <parentid>5401955</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:48:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Eliazhar</username>
        <id>17652978</id>
      </contributor>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="269" xml:space="preserve">=== require_once(): Falha na abertura requerida 'Net/Socket.php ===
Verifique seu LocalSettings.php para quaisquer linhas que chamem $include. Estas não devem ser necessárias, mas podem atrapalhar o suporte SMTP. Retire-as do LocalSettings.php se estiverem presentes.</text>
      <sha1>iuhsaxwnmlt3ki9a080co913rjxlrpi</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0qp7gz4l8a36wdw</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612476</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401961</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T22:54:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0qp7gz4l8a36wdw&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>2ri4frtxqmlxk38mdybv24nnt7zt8oo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0qpoh9b90s46e3s</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612477</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5401963</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:02:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* このページは Structured Discussions ボードに変換されています */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0qpoh9b90s46e3s&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>dhj79qodoavjtpxsweslkxg867847sn</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0qqm4le0fe0gp3t</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612480</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402008</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:19:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0qqm4le0fe0gp3t&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>1ftjn90s0egbtzt65kpb3rxb3ji36ty</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/Page display title/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612481</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402009</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:27:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="63" xml:space="preserve">Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde</text>
      <sha1>atrdyiv8boun9iqugsn373cmhxjxe2s</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/ja</title>
    <ns>12</ns>
    <id>1612482</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402010</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:27:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2014" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the search box at the top of the page.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/span&gt; 
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;...&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type Setswana letters, type the tilde (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), and after it type the Latin letter that is the most similar to the Setswana letter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to type Š, type &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; and then S. The full list:&lt;/span&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type this letter...&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type these keyboard keys:&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>8us64h9d60146o91abifkg6tw1i0ulo</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402012</id>
      <parentid>5402010</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:27:23Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1971" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon that appears near the search box.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/span&gt; 
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;...&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type Setswana letters, type the tilde (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), and after it type the Latin letter that is the most similar to the Setswana letter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to type Š, type &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; and then S. The full list:&lt;/span&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type this letter...&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type these keyboard keys:&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>3by5lvp142erpjbgldm5ltspjfe3ofa</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402014</id>
      <parentid>5402012</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:27:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1971" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; doesn't appear at the top of the list, do the following:&lt;/span&gt; 
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;...&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type Setswana letters, type the tilde (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), and after it type the Latin letter that is the most similar to the Setswana letter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to type Š, type &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; and then S. The full list:&lt;/span&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type this letter...&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type these keyboard keys:&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>jnxr5uz5ae50ph2z0p075ef8l4s5u9y</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402039</id>
      <parentid>5402014</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:33:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;「$1」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1941" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# 「Setswana」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします: 
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click &quot;...&quot; at the bottom of the list. A panel will appear.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type Setswana letters, type the tilde (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), and after it type the Latin letter that is the most similar to the Setswana letter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to type Š, type &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; and then S. The full list:&lt;/span&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type this letter...&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type these keyboard keys:&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>tge76d3osjjn5lvh7mdh70naicwnkd6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402041</id>
      <parentid>5402039</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:33:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;一覧のいちばん後ろの「$1」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1922" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# 「Setswana」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします: 
## 一覧のいちばん後ろの「...」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Click the little keyboard icon again, and select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type Setswana letters, type the tilde (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), and after it type the Latin letter that is the most similar to the Setswana letter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to type Š, type &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; and then S. The full list:&lt;/span&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type this letter...&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type these keyboard keys:&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>afek394lgggtk2udkh61qvglvgwerlu</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402043</id>
      <parentid>5402041</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:34:34Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;小さなキーボードのアイコンをクリック、レイアウトの中から「$1」を選択。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1916" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# 「Setswana」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします: 
## 一覧のいちばん後ろの「...」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## 小さなキーボードのアイコンをクリック、レイアウトの中から「Setswana tilde」を選択。

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type Setswana letters, type the tilde (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), and after it type the Latin letter that is the most similar to the Setswana letter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to type Š, type &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; and then S. The full list:&lt;/span&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type this letter...&lt;/span&gt;
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type these keyboard keys:&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>dbb49epkh0d65usw5ax50aqci76nwoj</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402055</id>
      <parentid>5402043</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:36:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;この文字を入力するには...&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1874" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# 「Setswana」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします: 
## 一覧のいちばん後ろの「...」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## 小さなキーボードのアイコンをクリック、レイアウトの中から「Setswana tilde」を選択。

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type Setswana letters, type the tilde (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), and after it type the Latin letter that is the most similar to the Setswana letter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to type Š, type &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; and then S. The full list:&lt;/span&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!この文字を入力するには...
!&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Type these keyboard keys:&lt;/span&gt;
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>02n3xp9cr3auecnceit0mgpniqpo6ep</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402057</id>
      <parentid>5402055</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:36:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;キーボードのこれらのキーを入力します:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1848" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages /&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
You can type in the Setswana alphabet with all the special letters!
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;
To enable this keyboard layout, do the following:
&lt;/div&gt;

# ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。
# 検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。
# &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;If &quot;Setswana&quot; appears at the top of the list, select &quot;Setswana tilde&quot;.&lt;/span&gt;
# 「Setswana」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします: 
## 一覧のいちばん後ろの「...」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。
## &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Find &quot;Setswana&quot; in the panel. Click it.&lt;/span&gt;
## 小さなキーボードのアイコンをクリック、レイアウトの中から「Setswana tilde」を選択。

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To disable this special keyboard and go back to typing usually, click the little keyboard icon and then click &quot;Use native keyboard&quot;, or press Ctrl-M.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To re-enable the Setswana keyboard, repeat the steps listed above.&lt;/span&gt;

&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;To type Setswana letters, type the tilde (&lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt;), and after it type the Latin letter that is the most similar to the Setswana letter.&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;For example, to type Š, type &lt;code&gt;~&lt;/code&gt; and then S. The full list:&lt;/span&gt;

{| class=&quot;wikitable&quot; style=&quot;text-align: center&quot;
!この文字を入力するには...
!キーボードのこれらのキーを入力します:
|-
|Ê
|~E
|-
|ê
|~e
|-
|Ô
|~O
|-
|ô
|~o
|-
|Š
|~S
|-
|š
|~s
|}</text>
      <sha1>647sftvsqiqzuvrm3uk1v9ztnk3w5e7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/3/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612483</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402011</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:27:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="57" xml:space="preserve">ページ最上部の検索ボックスをクリック。</text>
      <sha1>bc2mn3nz9xcg8n6k7hv4q5yes7jy59s</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/4/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612484</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402013</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:27:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="120" xml:space="preserve">検索ボックスの右直下に小さなキーボードのアイコンが表示されたら、それをクリック。</text>
      <sha1>0kcr1mh0zaatgez679q0uzpuc1zvc3z</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/6/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612485</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402038</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:33:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;「$1」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="90" xml:space="preserve">「$1」がリストの一番上に表示されない場合は、次のようにします:</text>
      <sha1>mhbp0ugrjibrk51nuyfqpewkl8893l2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/7/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612486</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402040</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:33:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;一覧のいちばん後ろの「$1」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="95" xml:space="preserve">一覧のいちばん後ろの「$1」をクリックするとパネルが表示されます。</text>
      <sha1>0v65t6o0hvqtl04gcxa6knc69kkob22</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/9/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612487</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402042</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:34:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;小さなキーボードのアイコンをクリック、レイアウトの中から「$1」を選択。&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="104" xml:space="preserve">小さなキーボードのアイコンをクリック、レイアウトの中から「$1」を選択。</text>
      <sha1>4lx5lekt7p9hhhs9yc02t9jp7h99e46</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/14/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612488</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402054</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:36:35Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;この文字を入力するには...&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36" xml:space="preserve">この文字を入力するには...</text>
      <sha1>p8w8mq7ndmzsqfrtstk54yn7lw0x4sr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:UniversalLanguageSelector/Input methods/tn-tilde/15/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612489</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402056</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:36:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;キーボードのこれらのキーを入力します:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="55" xml:space="preserve">キーボードのこれらのキーを入力します:</text>
      <sha1>geh0du3sdp7lwiakvbjofb2rayqhkcc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0qs0nefif2yg07d</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612490</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402070</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:44:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0qs0nefif2yg07d&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>d5tkamtd4mbmo0t9y8gccats4yiyo1g</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:LiquidThreads/14/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612491</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402073</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:45:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="65" xml:space="preserve">This page is still developing; these are only basic instructions.</text>
      <sha1>ou8xhwdk63t9ca7rhfe94kytxgnz9v7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:LiquidThreads/15/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612492</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402074</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:45:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="88" xml:space="preserve">Once you have clicked on this button, a form will load allowing you to enter your reply.</text>
      <sha1>051qj7cbho85vs3s3suc36weeq8giwr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:LiquidThreads/16/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612493</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402075</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:45:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="80" xml:space="preserve">To search past discussions on a page, use the search box at the top of the page.</text>
      <sha1>mqv7i9a6x2xps7gof0i1p4cea7xoxa3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:LiquidThreads/17/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612494</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402076</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:45:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="100" xml:space="preserve">To edit a post, move your mouse over the post, then move it over the arrow to the right of the menu.</text>
      <sha1>seowfr14pzwso5jy9k7fh4osk8etqx8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:LiquidThreads/18/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612495</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402077</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:45:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="110" xml:space="preserve">You can navigate between changes made to threads, and view the thread as it existed at certain points of time.</text>
      <sha1>4rzhonxtfmnj3ts9fi702dy7qzgsf7e</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:LiquidThreads/19/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612496</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402078</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:45:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="69" xml:space="preserve">You can move a post to a new position on the page with drag-and-drop.</text>
      <sha1>oq8omuu7byio9are28nrrv4zc1x81ze</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:LiquidThreads/20/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612497</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402079</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-06T23:45:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="71" xml:space="preserve">Once you've clicked on this, you can drag the thread to a new location.</text>
      <sha1>bdzuyiyfpkpald39yzgfm84n7r2apyv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0qts7cdwlkvht7m</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612498</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402086</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:16:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0qts7cdwlkvht7m&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>6nwkgtfho00hm8sizo6bpm7af0n13yd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:MediaWiki 1.30/61/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612499</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402107</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:46:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="63" xml:space="preserve">Consulte o arquivo $1 para obter a lista completa de mudanças.</text>
      <sha1>k7n3la8b0g6lhaa170jc1qdv6af62q2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:MediaWiki 1.30/62/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612500</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402109</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:46:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="117" xml:space="preserve">Foi implantado nos wikis da Wikimedia Foundation através do incremental &quot;$1&quot;-branches starting em 9 de maio de 2017.</text>
      <sha1>tga2fugbv2at8stsvioqm15kxa454v5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:MediaWiki 1.30/63/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612501</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402111</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T00:47:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="65" xml:space="preserve">A versão estável 1.30.0 foi lançada em 12 de dezembro de 2017.</text>
      <sha1>sjgfc49xxg4zifuoe29fllyk5kz54m1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0qygm1866vn1hbc</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612504</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402169</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T01:40:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0qygm1866vn1hbc&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>a33su70m8paw7faa7s95ww7xhhrmxl6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/111/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612505</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402342</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:33:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="217" xml:space="preserve">: O enlace objectivo pode ser o nome de uma mensagem de interface (uma página no MediaWiki namespace) ou uma página wiki, ou um enlace externo. Em qualquer caso, o [[$1|link]] pode ser interno, interwiki ou externo.</text>
      <sha1>8vbbrtni1g6mnig8wxd0imfql6gabr8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/157/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612506</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402344</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:33:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="199" xml:space="preserve">Em alguns casos (tais como enlaces com o carácter &quot;&amp;&quot;), uma mensagem de interface é necessário. O enlace objectivo não pode ser dependente da linguagem da interface configurada nas preferências.</text>
      <sha1>mu63kx1gwa3ae8b8lke5vswc3ttdiwt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/153/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612507</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402348</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:36:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="78" xml:space="preserve">(Para informação sobre atribuir uma permissão a grupos ou utentes, ver $2.)</text>
      <sha1>6g9yukbjhcl0wd0ytmj1zszc9extq3g</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Interface/Sidebar/156/pt</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612508</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402354</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T02:37:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="142" xml:space="preserve">O encabeçado para a cada secção é tomado desde a lista de elementos do primeiro nível (&quot;navigation&quot; e &quot;new heading&quot; no exemplo de acima).</text>
      <sha1>70yzr814woa9r97caxh65cjnmni94pj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0r4ldowieqmcx3b</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612509</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402382</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T03:30:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0r4ldowieqmcx3b&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>dvhaxcsi4ecbsrv1wqibl6baek4f7ax</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0r8pru1wh123a1e</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612511</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402394</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T04:44:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0r8pru1wh123a1e&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>cmsiv2inpkp4gbthg8ft4pz36m0wxtt</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation example/54/mr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612514</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402463</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:04:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="273" xml:space="preserve">आमचा असा उद्देश आहे कि सर्व आवश्यक संकल्पना व कामे यांची ओळख करून देउन, ही शिकवणी शक्य तितकी छोटी ठेवावी.</text>
      <sha1>mr0ddq24augxajgixu9vclg8ngbo5yr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation example/55/mr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612515</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402465</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:04:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="227" xml:space="preserve">ही शिकवणी पूर्ण झाल्यावर आपण [[$1|पान भाषांतराबाबत गहन दस्ताएवजीकरण]] याचा वापर करू शकता.</text>
      <sha1>lzam0uz22zcge6cqjs6s3ofkng3jgcf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Page translation example/61/mr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612516</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402467</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:06:18Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="471" xml:space="preserve">असे शक्य आहे कि आपल्या मनात एखादे पान आहे, ज्याचे भाषांतर करावयाचे आहे;किंवा आपण त्यातील पायऱ्या वापरुन ''आपल्या विकिवर'' प्रयत्न करण्यास खाली दिलेले उदाहरणादाखलचे पान वापरू शकता.</text>
      <sha1>jhh62dd0vgtcn6aqqxae2rdcna1jni4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0rdc55a6mend0js</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612517</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402471</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:07:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0rdc55a6mend0js&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>4z223pgplf27wps63dzwpvg5sl2dj9o</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/222/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612518</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402529</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:24:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso $editusercss)&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="135" xml:space="preserve">prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso $editusercss)</text>
      <sha1>a21j5cbvtbz6k413iv0aa677nsp11d9</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/223/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612519</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402534</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:25:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di $edituserjs)&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="137" xml:space="preserve">prima della 1.31 era assegnato a tutti (cioè &quot;*&quot;) (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di $edituserjs)</text>
      <sha1>mmm1j2svbtzg94ztns1df8rlianctt0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/120/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612520</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402538</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:25:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di $suppressrevision)&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="149" xml:space="preserve">cioè un'alternativa più ristretta a &quot;suppressrevision&quot; (si noti che questo non è necessario se il gruppo ha già il permesso di $suppressrevision)</text>
      <sha1>m530focplvm51jgf7h90h55pk91tl7x</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/195/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612521</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402540</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:25:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Amministrazione&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15" xml:space="preserve">Amministrazione</text>
      <sha1>ttgl5vhklfs5dm9cuypgafpiem55y9t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/124/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612522</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402542</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:26:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="75" xml:space="preserve">che blocca tutte le interazioni con il sito web, tranne la visualizzazione.</text>
      <sha1>hkn3cwm3esititse49ee6o7e0ndic7j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/134/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612523</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402546</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:26:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;può essere visualizzato opzionalmente&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="38" xml:space="preserve">può essere visualizzato opzionalmente</text>
      <sha1>7iixwznjtxs9zmlod5dy8cmtorgiqye</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/138/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612524</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402552</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:27:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;non influenzati da [[$1|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione $RateLimitsExcludedGroups era usata a questo scopo'')&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="168" xml:space="preserve">non influenzati da [[$1|rate limits]] (''prima dell'introduzione di questo diritto, la variabile di configurazione $RateLimitsExcludedGroups era usata a questo scopo'')</text>
      <sha1>favndsejsnfnjoovkcy77u9hi06tmbn</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/234/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612525</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402554</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:30:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a $link1. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di $link2, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="180" xml:space="preserve">Con questo permesso, è possibile definire la profondità delle pagine collegate a $link1. Altrimenti, verrà utilizzato il valore di $link2, che è 0 per impostazione predefinita.</text>
      <sha1>tib6u75ynjnla11kmcq1ezlmzzdp51f</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/149/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612526</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402556</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:30:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="139" xml:space="preserve">Sebbene queste autorizzazioni controllino tutte cose distinte, a volte per eseguire determinate azioni sono necessarie più autorizzazioni.</text>
      <sha1>ahetms8dq10ug529s3c9ftksg1g20lg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/150/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612527</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402558</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:31:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi).&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="239" xml:space="preserve">Ad esempio, permettere alle persone di modificare le pagine ma non di leggerle non ha senso, poiché per modificare una pagina bisogna prima essere in grado di leggerla (supponendo che nessuna pagina sia inserita nell'elenco dei permessi).</text>
      <sha1>ck280gmqv4jaaw8fj9wvjj638qqbqx8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/151/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612528</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402560</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:32:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="173" xml:space="preserve">Consentire il caricamento ma non la modifica non ha senso, poiché per caricare un'immagine è necessario creare implicitamente una pagina di descrizione dell'immagine, ecc.</text>
      <sha1>1mu2ex9tz2yp1ypwpc1ez19zqltm2gw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/159/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612529</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402562</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:32:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;account registrati.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="19" xml:space="preserve">account registrati.</text>
      <sha1>80bdn68guaxj41qdx4um916j74nnu24</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/160/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612531</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402565</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:33:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;account registrati con anzianità pari a $AutoConfirmAge e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a $AutoConfirmCount.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="118" xml:space="preserve">account registrati con anzianità pari a $AutoConfirmAge e con un numero di modifiche pari almeno a $AutoConfirmCount.</text>
      <sha1>0lnxki8b97801i3ln07mxfaxz9530lv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/164/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612532</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402568</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:34:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="122" xml:space="preserve">utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono cancellare e ripristinare le pagine, bloccare e sbloccare gli utenti, ecc.</text>
      <sha1>poqigpzzwvxgk1wtygzpq31yp8ispx0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/165/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612533</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402570</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:35:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="86" xml:space="preserve">utenti che per impostazione predefinita possono modificare i permessi di altri utenti.</text>
      <sha1>r4oubflthhyk5vpam4oaasqt5debcba</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/168/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612534</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402572</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:35:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="99" xml:space="preserve">È anche possibile creare qualsiasi gruppo personalizzato, semplicemente assegnandogli dei diritti.</text>
      <sha1>640edctfspuqi9k0eoz9q0y553ix8wi</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/172/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612535</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402574</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:36:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione $1, sono disponibili qui:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="100" xml:space="preserve">* I valori predefiniti nell'ultima versione stabile di MediaWiki, versione $1, sono disponibili qui:</text>
      <sha1>dg7ev28v8h6edmimievgpx4d4ol7x9v</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/173/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612536</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402576</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:37:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo $1.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="118" xml:space="preserve">* Permessi aggiuntivi: dovreste essere in grado di elencare tutti i permessi disponibili sul vostro wiki eseguendo $1.</text>
      <sha1>imvklspqsgbz7zi59k1yi1osvgqdrg5</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/179/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612537</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402578</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:37:54Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando $GroupPermissions descritto sopra.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="114" xml:space="preserve">Probabilmente si vuole anche assegnarlo a qualche gruppo di utenti, modificando $GroupPermissions descritto sopra.</text>
      <sha1>7chl0ttfry6y1u9m84z0u3c2k80cizh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/217/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612538</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402580</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:39:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite $OAuth o [[$1|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando $GrantPermissions.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="187" xml:space="preserve">Se si vuole che questo permesso sia accessibile alle applicazioni esterne tramite $OAuth o [[$1|bot password]], è necessario aggiungerlo a una abilitazione modificando $GrantPermissions.</text>
      <sha1>llnmo9rw3vsrsn86vvj00p3brd7r5fg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/176/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612539</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402582</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:40:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="48" xml:space="preserve">Seguono informazioni riservate ai programmatori.</text>
      <sha1>6tur5pneu70gvdvndfrquqqra84y59g</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/196/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612540</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402584</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:40:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Tecnica&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7" xml:space="preserve">Tecnica</text>
      <sha1>iqph5g0dde3ldmyzv41u7j1x749mzdg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/145/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612541</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402586</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:41:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;utilizzato per il gruppo &quot;autoconfermato&quot;, si veda l'altra tabella qui sotto per maggiori informazioni&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="102" xml:space="preserve">utilizzato per il gruppo &quot;autoconfermato&quot;, si veda l'altra tabella qui sotto per maggiori informazioni</text>
      <sha1>efccg1q52yx77zzknx437w8430jrnnv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/135/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612542</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402588</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:46:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;[[$1|parametro URL]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="49" xml:space="preserve">[[$1|parametro URL]] &quot;&lt;code&gt;&amp;action=purge&lt;/code&gt;&quot;</text>
      <sha1>88k0fxsc2mlmggcs1ouatetophyqjk0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/220/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612543</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402590</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:46:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;utenti che possono modificare i CSS/JS del sito.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="48" xml:space="preserve">utenti che possono modificare i CSS/JS del sito.</text>
      <sha1>omff3vc6hw8qrxw4r72awoann87u4yz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/167/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612544</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402593</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;A partire da MW 1.12, è possibile creare gruppi personalizzati in cui gli utenti vengono promossi automaticamente (come nel caso di autoconfirmed e emailconfirmed) utilizzando $AutoPromote.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="190" xml:space="preserve">A partire da MW 1.12, è possibile creare gruppi personalizzati in cui gli utenti vengono promossi automaticamente (come nel caso di autoconfirmed e emailconfirmed) utilizzando $AutoPromote.</text>
      <sha1>3v39xijtzkzmbx3yi8y2c1ml6nr064g</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/26/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612545</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402597</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="23" xml:space="preserve">* [[$1|editing basics]]</text>
      <sha1>8v9p4pklwpotdvy4215u6kj3n0qucfw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/27/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612546</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402598</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="99" xml:space="preserve">* [[$1|post an answer]] - to the global discussion or to a specific person in a global conversation</text>
      <sha1>2qski3byrno85sbnp7onrhhmudn3zse</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/28/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612547</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402599</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="28" xml:space="preserve">* [[$1|create a discussion]]</text>
      <sha1>jv6rmytu02u5frx5cc0cc41qne7xobq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/29/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612548</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402600</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="39" xml:space="preserve">* [[$1|watch a topic or a whole board]]</text>
      <sha1>py3vn1u220gkdhfqvgf2y7rd37yzl52</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/30/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612549</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402601</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26" xml:space="preserve">* [[$1|get notifications]]</text>
      <sha1>etlpgw98e7bbabt7n07pnrqgu6gqq24</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/31/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612550</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402602</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="36" xml:space="preserve">* [[$1|browse and archive subjects]]</text>
      <sha1>3c6moarznpi5g50pfs167kls95n95v7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/177/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612551</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402631</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:47:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Se si aggiunge un nuovo permeso nel core, per esempio per [[$2|controllare una nuova pagina speciale]], è ''richiesto'' di aggiungerlo all'elenco dei diritti disponibili in $Utente, $1 ([esempio $url]).&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="203" xml:space="preserve">Se si aggiunge un nuovo permeso nel core, per esempio per [[$2|controllare una nuova pagina speciale]], è ''richiesto'' di aggiungerlo all'elenco dei diritti disponibili in $Utente, $1 ([esempio $url]).</text>
      <sha1>it2xykekcpzf0lzbq406o09799vpc5n</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402659</id>
      <parentid>5402631</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:52:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>typo</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="204" xml:space="preserve">Se si aggiunge un nuovo permesso nel core, per esempio per [[$2|controllare una nuova pagina speciale]], è ''richiesto'' di aggiungerlo all'elenco dei diritti disponibili in $Utente, $1 ([esempio $url]).</text>
      <sha1>aqqjnkslqw8icf6t55wnhprq4v6bt34</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/178/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612552</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402636</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:49:55Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Se {{$man|si opera in una estensione}}, è necessario utilizzare $AvailableRights.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="82" xml:space="preserve">Se {{$man|si opera in una estensione}}, è necessario utilizzare $AvailableRights.</text>
      <sha1>0ljtvhpu4kgjvvy6eqp7qygis94weaa</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/26/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612553</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402640</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:50:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24" xml:space="preserve">* [[$1|編集の基本]]</text>
      <sha1>kkrdlaaze9e3tp3l7qz5fib98h48q7t</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/27/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612554</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402642</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:50:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="126" xml:space="preserve">* [[$1|回答の投稿]] - グローバルな議論の場で、またはグローバルな議論の場で特定の利用者に</text>
      <sha1>l4yk61ab8bmb7p37bfvobg6zxf2uwwe</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/28/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612555</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402644</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:50:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27" xml:space="preserve">* [[$1|議論を始める]]</text>
      <sha1>0jueev1o9619cvl7390hv2kbc7vy0v7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/29/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612556</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402646</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:50:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="66" xml:space="preserve">* [[$1|特定の話題もしくはボード全体をウォッチ]]</text>
      <sha1>ash9pxg1ltcm8evvh8t88l6uqcajjmu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/30/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612557</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402648</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:50:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="30" xml:space="preserve">* [[$1|通知を受信する]]</text>
      <sha1>ck2xfriertcwud64ssjzaqueamycaw1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Structured Discussions/31/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612558</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402650</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:51:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="45" xml:space="preserve">* [[$1|主題を閲覧して過去ログ化]]</text>
      <sha1>78q62ivtwkys4rn8jbo0rg57hpfg8jl</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/163/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612559</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402651</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:51:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;account con il permesso ''bot'' (destinato agli script automatici).&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="67" xml:space="preserve">account con il permesso ''bot'' (destinato agli script automatici).</text>
      <sha1>q9m7ir2bbgn47eaas476ixfy0zo3nfw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:User rights/181/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612560</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402654</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T06:51:49Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;I messaggi di permesso-* possono essere visualizzati in [[Special:ListGroupRights]] e i messaggi di azione-* sono usati in una frase come &quot;Non hai il permesso di ...&quot;.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="167" xml:space="preserve">I messaggi di permesso-* possono essere visualizzati in [[Special:ListGroupRights]] e i messaggi di azione-* sono usati in una frase come &quot;Non hai il permesso di ...&quot;.</text>
      <sha1>pusfbrfs6a0nzz8xpwzykuwg20muxlj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Setting user groups in MediaWiki/12/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612561</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402744</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T07:15:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>any feedback?</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="190" xml:space="preserve">Se si sta sviluppando un [[$1|gadget]], un [[$2|bot]] (un admin bot) o qualunque altra cosa che dovrebbe essere in grado di modificare i gruppi utenti attraverso le API, vedere la pagina $3.</text>
      <sha1>stomlvo6q8r7089gs4wkdogrjqwank8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/53/da</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612562</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402834</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:29:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="85" xml:space="preserve">Derfor vil vi her diskutere, hvordan disse bruges i en wiki med Translate-udvidelsen.</text>
      <sha1>fa7z4b9s6rjvlt4rvuky0udd6vcgjle</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/54/da</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612563</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402836</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:29:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="82" xml:space="preserve">Ellers er du måske mere interesseret i ''[[$1|hvordan man oversætter]]'' online.</text>
      <sha1>q2m71e2xruo42ruv7hsqfa3xjofrf5e</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/53/de-formal</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612564</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402840</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:31:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="119" xml:space="preserve">Aus diesem Grund werden wir hier nur diskutieren, wie man sie in einem Wiki mit der Übersetzungserweiterung verwendet.</text>
      <sha1>lqxvvxy4q3u93y55mmh7v5gg8ac21s6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/54/de-formal</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612565</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402842</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:31:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="125" xml:space="preserve">Andernfalls sind Sie möglicherweise mehr an der „[[$1|Übersetzungsanleitung]]“ für Online-Übersetzungen interessiert.</text>
      <sha1>d0hm9xtvp6yv3j8444jfaax2fs2nndi</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/53/el</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612566</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402846</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:32:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="188" xml:space="preserve">Για το λόγο αυτόν, θα συζητήσουμε μόνο πως να τα χρησιμοποιούμε σε ένα wiki με την επέκταση Μετάφραση εδώ.</text>
      <sha1>n9fn2gw8nz1yk2b9lxwydy7uxug97fq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/54/el</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612567</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402848</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:32:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="172" xml:space="preserve">Αλλιώς, είναι πιθανότερο να ενδιαφέρεστε για τον οδηγό [[$1|Πως να μεταφράσω]] για online μετάφραση.</text>
      <sha1>t5iz0hd5g5wr72x3lirm70bwk99utxo</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/53/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612568</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402852</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:33:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="98" xml:space="preserve">Por esa razón, sólo discutiremos aquí cómo utilizarlos en un wiki con la extensión Translate.</text>
      <sha1>9oh40arz74axr9no33dio68kcawp81i</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/54/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612569</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402854</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:33:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="118" xml:space="preserve">De lo contrario, probablemente estés más interesado en el tutorial [[$1|Cómo traducir]] para traducción en línea.</text>
      <sha1>n2bh9jnzcaa3g1vsvs9kxzgjl6pzlj0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/53/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612570</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402858</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:34:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="92" xml:space="preserve">Nous allons donc sur cette page décrire la partie particulière à l’extension Translate.</text>
      <sha1>6hsjv71ooxr8981g87rgbkz86edncxk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/54/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612571</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402860</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:34:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="80" xml:space="preserve">Vous pouvez donc déjà lire la page [[$1|''Comment traduire'']] avant celle-ci.</text>
      <sha1>e3wvl985ylghotxn5pz1js24lt6c1m1</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/53/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612572</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402864</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:35:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="95" xml:space="preserve">Por esta razão, somente discutiremos como usá-los em uma wiki com a extensão Translate aqui.</text>
      <sha1>pw1xa80ubzhz3k90u6o2flxq7rqfvlv</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Off-line translation/54/pt-br</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612573</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402866</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:35:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="108" xml:space="preserve">Caso contrário, você pode estar mais interessado no tutorial [[$1|Como traduzir]] para traduções online.</text>
      <sha1>fenompzq78ur3fdcpcej9xw39tk49qs</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Statistics and reporting/64/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612574</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402892</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:45:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="161" xml:space="preserve">La maggior parte delle informazioni viene caricata in tempo reale ed è visibile consultando le quattro pagine speciali $lstats, $mgstats, $tstats e $slanguages.</text>
      <sha1>cdsfhxb5x3hehrkss8bauhdnxkqvo21</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402904</id>
      <parentid>5402892</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:24:53Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="114" xml:space="preserve">Queste sono esposte principalmente attraverso le quattro pagine speciali $lstats, $mgstats, $tstats e $slanguages.</text>
      <sha1>j353n1zubafc0dp4hwp2rudc15y8ili</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Statistics and reporting/65/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612575</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402894</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:45:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="139" xml:space="preserve">Le prime due sono visualizzazioni differenti degli stessi dati: le percentuali di completamento per ogni lingua di ogni gruppo di messaggi.</text>
      <sha1>a37712kgfalfaalyu5a2gc3bmw0c1c2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Statistics and reporting/66/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612576</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402896</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T08:45:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>restore</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="174" xml:space="preserve">Le alre due pagine aiutano gli amministratori di traduzione a controllare lo stato della comunità, sia da una prospettiva generale che da un punto di vista più dettagliato.</text>
      <sha1>l1e220oq4n1mkn0l4j0e1xg21w76n36</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5402906</id>
      <parentid>5402896</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:25:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>typo</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="175" xml:space="preserve">Le altre due pagine aiutano gli amministratori di traduzione a controllare lo stato della comunità, sia da una prospettiva generale che da un punto di vista più dettagliato.</text>
      <sha1>cmtkmvvft6i0ouwayylhuhbzg73fldh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Extension:Translate/Statistics and reporting/63/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612577</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402902</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:23:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="66" xml:space="preserve">La maggior parte delle informazioni viene caricata in tempo reale.</text>
      <sha1>i5o5hjdj1rh9yzxvyayaliqtzik3qge</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/563/en</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612578</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402915</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>FuzzyBot</username>
        <id>451990</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Importing a new version from external source</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="123" xml:space="preserve">Changes which break $1 compatibility will be documented in the &quot;configuration changes&quot; section of the [[$2|release notes]].</text>
      <sha1>6y5stf74cs08xjlf7m5b11pyq8ca122</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Formatting/160/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612579</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402916</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;* Combina elenco puntato ** con definizione  ::- definizione ** crea spazio vuoto&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="81" xml:space="preserve">* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto</text>
      <sha1>2jmfq8qk3sn1qsi67r64r0gurksmuvy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Formatting/161/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612580</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402925</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:40:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;* Combina elenco puntato ** con definizione  *:- definizione ** senza spazi vuoti&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="81" xml:space="preserve">* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
*:- definizione
** senza spazi vuoti</text>
      <sha1>duf70fcd24nsybwn5paotalnesvk508</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/563/fr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612581</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402951</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:42:07Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="158" xml:space="preserve">Les changements qui peuvent casser la compatibilité de $1 seront documentés dans la section &quot;Changements dans la configuration&quot; des [[$2|notes de version]].</text>
      <sha1>cy5gek23yblfjd6exwbyr8sepdq4ao8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Formatting/162/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612582</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402955</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:42:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;*elenco puntato :- definizione :* sottoelenco che non crea spazio :* vuoto dopo la definizione&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="94" xml:space="preserve">*elenco puntato
:- definizione
:* sottoelenco che non crea spazio
:* vuoto dopo la definizione</text>
      <sha1>cndgn09hsb7a96zjvzeb4pu78om1mio</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/563/cs</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612583</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402959</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:43:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="126" xml:space="preserve">Změny, které narušují kompatibilitu $1, budou dokumentovány v části &quot;Změny konfigurace&quot; v [[$2|Poznámkách k verzi]].</text>
      <sha1>8yebhvu8a3vvuyys1v6zy2kfghhw64y</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Formatting/163/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612584</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402961</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:43:26Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;* Combina elenco puntato ** con definizione  ::- definizione ** crea spazio vuoto&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="81" xml:space="preserve">* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
::- definizione
** crea spazio vuoto</text>
      <sha1>2jmfq8qk3sn1qsi67r64r0gurksmuvy</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Formatting/164/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612585</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402963</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:43:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;* Combina elenco puntato ** con definizione  *:- definizione ** senza spazi vuoti&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="81" xml:space="preserve">* Combina elenco puntato
** con definizione 
*:- definizione
** senza spazi vuoti</text>
      <sha1>duf70fcd24nsybwn5paotalnesvk508</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Help:Formatting/165/it</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612586</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402965</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:43:38Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>GpieroMW</username>
        <id>17587484</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;*elenco puntato :- definizione :* sottoelenco che non crea spazio :* vuoto dopo la definizione&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="94" xml:space="preserve">*elenco puntato
:- definizione
:* sottoelenco che non crea spazio
:* vuoto dopo la definizione</text>
      <sha1>cndgn09hsb7a96zjvzeb4pu78om1mio</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/563/es</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612587</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402976</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:46:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="155" xml:space="preserve">Los cambios que puedan afectar a la compatibilidad de $1 se documentarán en la sección &quot;Cambios en la configuración&quot; de las [[$2|notas de lanzamiento]].</text>
      <sha1>c7hmplgus7jwdguvlux8piu5nkmsirw</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/563/ja</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612588</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402982</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:48:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="154" xml:space="preserve">$1 の互換性を壊すような変更は[[$2|リリースノート]]の「後方互換性のない変更」節に文章化されて公表されます。</text>
      <sha1>tbfu5xxbsxwgdancmmldy1r34k94nnj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/563/pl</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612589</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402986</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:49:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="112" xml:space="preserve">Zmiany, które wpłyną na zawartość $1 będą opisane w sekcji &quot;configuration changes&quot; [[$2|rejestru zmian]].</text>
      <sha1>0uh6lbzn8yxa3t4jvdgss5v08f6anx8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:Upgrading/563/tr</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612590</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5402990</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T09:50:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Shirayuki</username>
        <id>472859</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>update</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="131" xml:space="preserve">$1 uyumluluğunu bozan değişiklikler, [[$2|sürüm notlarının]] &quot;yapılandırma değişiklikleri&quot; bölümünde belirtilmiştir.</text>
      <sha1>8j3dacl9tc1feoo5sv2dr7ilm248zrf</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Wikibase/72/ru</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612591</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403068</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:15:59Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Добро пожаловать на центральную страницу '''Wikibase'''.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="92" xml:space="preserve">Добро пожаловать на центральную страницу '''Wikibase'''.</text>
      <sha1>fnlqep8w3i3s756spme5sq2ke81mdt3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Wikibase/83/ru</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612592</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403070</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:16:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Здесь вы найдете документацию и ресурсы для программного обеспечения с открытым исходным кодом, созданного $1, которое вы можете использовать для создания совместных баз знаний, а также откроете дверь в сеть Linked Open Data.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="398" xml:space="preserve">Здесь вы найдете документацию и ресурсы для программного обеспечения с открытым исходным кодом, созданного $1, которое вы можете использовать для создания совместных баз знаний, а также откроете дверь в сеть Linked Open Data.</text>
      <sha1>6scjf3pstx6iub6kac8m9j2wuto40a7</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Wikibase/84/ru</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612593</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403072</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:16:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;С чего начать&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="24" xml:space="preserve">С чего начать</text>
      <sha1>b27o19efqnc3zwnwnc2792zdkvzt8ya</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Wikibase/85/ru</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612594</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403074</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:16:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Использование Wikibase&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="35" xml:space="preserve">Использование Wikibase</text>
      <sha1>tvbnsux6s4ukfmi906s9w35vnobtg6y</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Wikibase/86/ru</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612595</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403076</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:17:31Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Ссылки&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="12" xml:space="preserve">Ссылки</text>
      <sha1>r76n4spmlyzlebk2fmezkse15h4l6wr</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Wikibase/73/ru</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612596</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403078</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:17:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Что такое Wikibase?&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27" xml:space="preserve">Что такое Wikibase?</text>
      <sha1>c6yumz50w1vntnkww7caszyxvsaoh7h</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SocialToolsSidebar/Page display title/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612597</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403080</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:23:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Vorlage:SocialToolsSidebar&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="26" xml:space="preserve">Vorlage:SocialToolsSidebar</text>
      <sha1>5lh5vxt2hkx4nbtjsm5fzf89k6o6jly</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:SocialToolsSidebar/de</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>1612598</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403081</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:23:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Vorlage:SocialToolsSidebar&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1537" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle = 
|title = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social tools&lt;/span&gt;
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle = font-size:130%
|contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;about&lt;/span&gt;
|content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Contributing and reporting bugs&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;List of extensions&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History of social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}

|heading2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;compatibility&lt;/span&gt;
|content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Support for Echo notifications&lt;/span&gt;}} (&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;draft&lt;/span&gt;)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki compatibility&lt;/span&gt;}}

}}
|#default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>6wmojfb91vgw4nrtotenmr3agfmfqno</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403083</id>
      <parentid>5403081</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:23:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Soziale Werkzeuge&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1486" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle = 
|title = Soziale Werkzeuge
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle = font-size:130%
|contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;about&lt;/span&gt;
|content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Contributing and reporting bugs&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;List of extensions&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History of social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}

|heading2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;compatibility&lt;/span&gt;
|content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Support for Echo notifications&lt;/span&gt;}} (&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;draft&lt;/span&gt;)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki compatibility&lt;/span&gt;}}

}}
|#default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>8nvvme9z4yyx55eeqkezbrp24pclopj</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403085</id>
      <parentid>5403083</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:23:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Über&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1430" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle = 
|title = Soziale Werkzeuge
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle = font-size:130%
|contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1 = Über
|content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Contributing and reporting bugs&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;List of extensions&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History of social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}

|heading2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;compatibility&lt;/span&gt;
|content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Support for Echo notifications&lt;/span&gt;}} (&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;draft&lt;/span&gt;)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki compatibility&lt;/span&gt;}}

}}
|#default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>7yjw2yyj9jxtj62mee96xjsae3t3jq5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403087</id>
      <parentid>5403085</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:23:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Soziale Werkzeuge&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1379" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle = 
|title = Soziale Werkzeuge
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle = font-size:130%
|contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1 = Über
|content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=Soziale Werkzeuge}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Contributing and reporting bugs&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;List of extensions&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History of social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}

|heading2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;compatibility&lt;/span&gt;
|content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Support for Echo notifications&lt;/span&gt;}} (&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;draft&lt;/span&gt;)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki compatibility&lt;/span&gt;}}

}}
|#default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>2qtb1rc9gffvxq5wwp2mwkultuasqa6</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403089</id>
      <parentid>5403087</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:23:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Liste der Erweiterungen&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1328" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle = 
|title = Soziale Werkzeuge
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle = font-size:130%
|contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1 = Über
|content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=Soziale Werkzeuge}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Contributing and reporting bugs&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=Liste der Erweiterungen}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History of social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}

|heading2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;compatibility&lt;/span&gt;
|content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Support for Echo notifications&lt;/span&gt;}} (&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;draft&lt;/span&gt;)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki compatibility&lt;/span&gt;}}

}}
|#default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>igig0fsed8e28b7uavt59h4ldhwrn7v</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403091</id>
      <parentid>5403089</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:23:52Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Kompatibilität&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1274" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle = 
|title = Soziale Werkzeuge
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle = font-size:130%
|contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1 = Über
|content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=Soziale Werkzeuge}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Contributing and reporting bugs&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=Liste der Erweiterungen}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History of social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}

|heading2 = Kompatibilität
|content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Support for Echo notifications&lt;/span&gt;}} (&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;draft&lt;/span&gt;)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki compatibility&lt;/span&gt;}}

}}
|#default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>q2gy2zxobvv1vp2sbvbkaanzu8su3vb</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403093</id>
      <parentid>5403091</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:24:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Unterstützung für Echo-Benachrichtigungen&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1231" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle = 
|title = Soziale Werkzeuge
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle = font-size:130%
|contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1 = Über
|content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=Soziale Werkzeuge}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Contributing and reporting bugs&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=Liste der Erweiterungen}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History of social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}

|heading2 = Kompatibilität
|content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=Unterstützung für Echo-Benachrichtigungen}} (&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;draft&lt;/span&gt;)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki compatibility&lt;/span&gt;}}

}}
|#default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>nse6d53o4dc0im9qxr6it9de1e4llwl</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403095</id>
      <parentid>5403093</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:24:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Entwurf&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1177" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{Sidebar
|style = width:20em
|name = SocialToolsSidebar
|pretitle = 
|title = Soziale Werkzeuge
|image = [[File:Social-tools-logo-concept-1.png|50px|Social tools logo concept|alt=]]
|headingstyle = font-size:130%
|contentstyle = text-align:{{dir|{{pagelang}}|right|left}}; padding:.75em

|heading1 = Über
|content1 = 
* {{ll|Social tools|2=Soziale Werkzeuge}}
* {{ll|Social tools/Contributing and reporting bugs|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Contributing and reporting bugs&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/List of extensions|2=Liste der Erweiterungen}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History of social tools&lt;/span&gt;}}

|heading2 = Kompatibilität
|content2 =
* {{ll|Social tools/Echo|2=Unterstützung für Echo-Benachrichtigungen}} (Entwurf)
* {{ll|Social tools/MediaWiki compatibility|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;MediaWiki compatibility&lt;/span&gt;}}

}}
|#default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:SocialToolsSidebar|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>kjzdtuq96z5f586vdgz5w1293qkqa1j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SocialToolsSidebar/10/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612599</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403082</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:23:22Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Soziale Werkzeuge&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17" xml:space="preserve">Soziale Werkzeuge</text>
      <sha1>3olpykzcqgcnsl4ln3l4q9nvx4bui4u</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SocialToolsSidebar/1/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612600</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403084</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:23:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Über&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="5" xml:space="preserve">Über</text>
      <sha1>2vh89byovvplg9nk30n99orbczg04g0</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SocialToolsSidebar/2/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612601</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403086</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:23:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Soziale Werkzeuge&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17" xml:space="preserve">Soziale Werkzeuge</text>
      <sha1>3olpykzcqgcnsl4ln3l4q9nvx4bui4u</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SocialToolsSidebar/4/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612602</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403088</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:23:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Liste der Erweiterungen&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="23" xml:space="preserve">Liste der Erweiterungen</text>
      <sha1>jhuxt35wontvpgokaaoany2kt5254hu</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SocialToolsSidebar/6/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612603</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403090</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:23:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Kompatibilität&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15" xml:space="preserve">Kompatibilität</text>
      <sha1>t5d78mkihbl1qa1w1be39l0ryz5iqxg</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SocialToolsSidebar/7/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612604</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403092</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:24:24Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Unterstützung für Echo-Benachrichtigungen&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="43" xml:space="preserve">Unterstützung für Echo-Benachrichtigungen</text>
      <sha1>j252jy4pm9kosfktx87iusa0btt1xok</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SocialToolsSidebar/8/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612605</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403094</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:24:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Entwurf&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7" xml:space="preserve">Entwurf</text>
      <sha1>0l6iva53oxaitjfiyosfvkm7dhlrngx</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Social tools/1/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612606</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403098</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:26:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Soziale Werkzeuge&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17" xml:space="preserve">Soziale Werkzeuge</text>
      <sha1>3olpykzcqgcnsl4ln3l4q9nvx4bui4u</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Social tools/de</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>1612607</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403099</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:26:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Soziale Werkzeuge&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2015" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Soziale Werkzeuge}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Overview&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Developer info&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshots&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History&lt;/span&gt;}}
|group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other social extensions&lt;/span&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other related extensions&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;independent of SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>fpw2c8lrc9i7j3wghluuvo4k20oaxzp</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403101</id>
      <parentid>5403099</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:26:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Übersicht&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1961" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Soziale Werkzeuge}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Übersicht}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Developer info&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshots&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History&lt;/span&gt;}}
|group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other social extensions&lt;/span&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other related extensions&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;independent of SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>f3hsd162w896ohhft9olfux7m22gx3j</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403103</id>
      <parentid>5403101</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:26:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Entwicklerinfo&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1905" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Soziale Werkzeuge}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Übersicht}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Entwicklerinfo}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Screenshots&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History&lt;/span&gt;}}
|group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other social extensions&lt;/span&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other related extensions&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;independent of SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>aspc5nw165n68vk037wupmdm8yi8gyj</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403105</id>
      <parentid>5403103</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:26:41Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Bildschirmfotos&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1853" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Soziale Werkzeuge}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Übersicht}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Entwicklerinfo}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Bildschirmfotos}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;History&lt;/span&gt;}}
|group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other social extensions&lt;/span&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other related extensions&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;independent of SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>o2uzz6ibniakzer3mqhbtufllup5113</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403107</id>
      <parentid>5403105</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:26:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Geschichte&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1800" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Soziale Werkzeuge}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Übersicht}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Entwicklerinfo}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Bildschirmfotos}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Geschichte}}
|group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other social extensions&lt;/span&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other related extensions&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;independent of SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>0idspgxojfc7k5kv7gkrbpb1dm48uvs</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403109</id>
      <parentid>5403107</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:26:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Andere ähnliche Erweiterungen&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1750" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Soziale Werkzeuge}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Übersicht}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Entwicklerinfo}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Bildschirmfotos}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Geschichte}}
|group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other social extensions&lt;/span&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = Andere ähnliche Erweiterungen&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;independent of SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>dv0cx057h380kk740ivl4wnm6drjtvd</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403111</id>
      <parentid>5403109</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:27:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;unabhängig von SocialProfile&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1695" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Soziale Werkzeuge}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Übersicht}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Entwicklerinfo}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Bildschirmfotos}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Geschichte}}
|group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other social extensions&lt;/span&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;dependent on SocialProfile&lt;/span&gt;
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = Andere ähnliche Erweiterungen&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(unabhängig von SocialProfile)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>oedrl5oap3xl1ygxfcwslsv3ejj9jnh</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403113</id>
      <parentid>5403111</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:27:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;abhängig von SocialProfile&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1640" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{Navbox
| name = Social tools
| title = {{ll|Social tools|2=Soziale Werkzeuge}}
| bodyclass = hlist

| group1 = {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|nsp=0}}
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile|2=Übersicht}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/For developers|2=Entwicklerinfo}}
* {{ll|Extension:SocialProfile/Screenshots|2=Bildschirmfotos}}
* {{ll|Social tools/History|2=Geschichte}}
|group2 = &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;other social extensions&lt;/span&gt;
|list2 =
{{Navbox|child
| group1 = abhängig von SocialProfile
| list1 = 
* {{ll|Extension:BlogPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Challenge|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:FanBoxes|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MiniInvite|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PictureGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:PollNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:QuizGame|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:RandomGameUnit|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SiteMetrics|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:SportsTeams|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserStatus|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:UserWelcome|nsp=0}}

| group2 = Andere ähnliche Erweiterungen&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;small&gt;(unabhängig von SocialProfile)&lt;/small&gt;
| list2 = 
* {{ll|Extension:AJAXPoll|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Comments|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:ImageRating|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:LinkFilter|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:MediaWikiChat|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:NewSignupPage|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:Video|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:VoteNY|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiForum|nsp=0}}
* {{ll|Extension:WikiTextLoggedInOut|nsp=0}}
}}

}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:Social tools{{#translation:}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>g1ehpbpkvtdjd3nf25cmilj96jgt5i3</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Social tools/2/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612608</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403100</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:26:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Übersicht&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10" xml:space="preserve">Übersicht</text>
      <sha1>nqasjaaygoemy6egddhhab26xok76f8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Social tools/4/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612609</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403102</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:26:36Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Entwicklerinfo&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14" xml:space="preserve">Entwicklerinfo</text>
      <sha1>lfgigys111lrcuj44o9h783nd0c4cis</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Social tools/5/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612610</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403104</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:26:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Bildschirmfotos&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="15" xml:space="preserve">Bildschirmfotos</text>
      <sha1>gh070wzw2ngs1aa2o27upacuvmn08ec</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Social tools/6/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612611</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403106</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:26:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Geschichte&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="10" xml:space="preserve">Geschichte</text>
      <sha1>6u3n0dk0dtaytzwq12ra8egpnuyer1o</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Social tools/9/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612612</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403108</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:26:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Andere ähnliche Erweiterungen&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="30" xml:space="preserve">Andere ähnliche Erweiterungen</text>
      <sha1>30fs4bl0c4vxo8gven5mm61fmbqjd19</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Social tools/10/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612613</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403110</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:27:08Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;unabhängig von SocialProfile&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29" xml:space="preserve">unabhängig von SocialProfile</text>
      <sha1>5hezbkliznbnyi9c1f4ksesm0yjsvh8</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Social tools/12/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612614</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403112</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:27:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;abhängig von SocialProfile&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27" xml:space="preserve">abhängig von SocialProfile</text>
      <sha1>htih5jg0r37yeuj0vibpvzsr592y4oa</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Since/1/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612615</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403114</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:27:57Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Seit $1&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7" xml:space="preserve">Seit $1</text>
      <sha1>0lkn4v4yhu5q8l4wxkz2djb1715dyld</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Since/de</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>1612616</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403115</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:27:58Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Seit $1&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="751" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;&lt;includeonly&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color:#999&quot;&gt;Seit {{trim| {{#if:{{{mw|}}}|{{#ifexist:MediaWiki {{{mw}}}|[[Special:MyLanguage/MediaWiki {{{mw}}}|MW {{{mw}}}]]|MW {{{mw}}}}}|}} {{r|{{#if:{{{1|{{{r|}}}}}}|{{{1|{{{r}}}}}}|?}}|cat={{{cat|}}}}} }}&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;!--
--&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{Documentation|content=

== Usage ==
&lt;pre&gt;
* Lorem ipsum ({{Since|r=1234}}).
* Lorem ipsum ({{Since|mw=1.18}}).
* Lorem ipsum ({{Since|mw=1.18|r=1234}}).
* Lorem ipsum ({{Since}}).
&lt;/pre&gt;

* Lorem ipsum ({{Since|r=1234|cat=no}}).
* Lorem ipsum ({{Since|mw=1.18|cat=no}}).
* Lorem ipsum ({{Since|mw=1.18|r=1234|cat=no}}).
* Lorem ipsum ({{Since|cat=no}}).

}}

[[Category:Info templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>fzh05ug5tnu4mvkz8bpe18kxq0sgzxj</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Subversion navigation/Page display title/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612618</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403117</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:29:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Vorlage:Subversion-Navigation&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="29" xml:space="preserve">Vorlage:Subversion-Navigation</text>
      <sha1>kbslouf9iump6tn5f8zucfr8u8gscv6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Subversion navigation/de</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>1612619</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403118</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:29:13Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Vorlage:Subversion-Navigation&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1209" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{nmbox
|header={{ll|Subversion}}
|text={{flatlist|1=
* '''{{ll|Subversion|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Intro&lt;/span&gt;}}'''
* '''{{ll|Subversion/Code review|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Code review&lt;/span&gt;}}''' &lt;!--
--&gt;({{ll|Subversion/Code review/guide|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;guide&lt;/span&gt;}} · {{ll|Subversion/Code review/tags|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;tags&lt;/span&gt;}})
* {{ll|Subversion/auto-props|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;auto-props&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/branching guide|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Branching guide&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/branches|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Branches&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/statistics|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Statistics&lt;/span&gt;}} &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &lt;!--
--&gt;''[[Special:PrefixIndex/Subversion|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more...&lt;/span&gt; &amp;raquo;]]''
}}&lt;!--/flatlist--&gt;
}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:SVN{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>3iic37cnzdzee1r29qccukipddjbcjf</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403120</id>
      <parentid>5403118</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:29:17Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Einführung&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1159" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{nmbox
|header={{ll|Subversion}}
|text={{flatlist|1=
* '''{{ll|Subversion|2=Einführung}}'''
* '''{{ll|Subversion/Code review|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Code review&lt;/span&gt;}}''' &lt;!--
--&gt;({{ll|Subversion/Code review/guide|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;guide&lt;/span&gt;}} · {{ll|Subversion/Code review/tags|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;tags&lt;/span&gt;}})
* {{ll|Subversion/auto-props|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;auto-props&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/branching guide|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Branching guide&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/branches|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Branches&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/statistics|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Statistics&lt;/span&gt;}} &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &lt;!--
--&gt;''[[Special:PrefixIndex/Subversion|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more...&lt;/span&gt; &amp;raquo;]]''
}}&lt;!--/flatlist--&gt;
}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:SVN{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>sedcariz44ov9zgcmijlsxcqe8k32o5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403122</id>
      <parentid>5403120</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:29:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Code-Review&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1103" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{nmbox
|header={{ll|Subversion}}
|text={{flatlist|1=
* '''{{ll|Subversion|2=Einführung}}'''
* '''{{ll|Subversion/Code review|2=Code-Review}}''' &lt;!--
--&gt;({{ll|Subversion/Code review/guide|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;guide&lt;/span&gt;}} · {{ll|Subversion/Code review/tags|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;tags&lt;/span&gt;}})
* {{ll|Subversion/auto-props|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;auto-props&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/branching guide|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Branching guide&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/branches|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Branches&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/statistics|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Statistics&lt;/span&gt;}} &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &lt;!--
--&gt;''[[Special:PrefixIndex/Subversion|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more...&lt;/span&gt; &amp;raquo;]]''
}}&lt;!--/flatlist--&gt;
}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:SVN{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>f2frfks421dx8guxreozr8imkn7839t</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403124</id>
      <parentid>5403122</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:29:27Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Statistiken&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1048" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{nmbox
|header={{ll|Subversion}}
|text={{flatlist|1=
* '''{{ll|Subversion|2=Einführung}}'''
* '''{{ll|Subversion/Code review|2=Code-Review}}''' &lt;!--
--&gt;({{ll|Subversion/Code review/guide|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;guide&lt;/span&gt;}} · {{ll|Subversion/Code review/tags|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;tags&lt;/span&gt;}})
* {{ll|Subversion/auto-props|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;auto-props&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/branching guide|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Branching guide&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/branches|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Branches&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/statistics|2=Statistiken}} &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &lt;!--
--&gt;''[[Special:PrefixIndex/Subversion|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;more...&lt;/span&gt; &amp;raquo;]]''
}}&lt;!--/flatlist--&gt;
}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:SVN{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>gd8u4zd6to1a29owlg75mm5vxnu5b0i</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403126</id>
      <parentid>5403124</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:29:40Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Mehr...&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="992" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{nmbox
|header={{ll|Subversion}}
|text={{flatlist|1=
* '''{{ll|Subversion|2=Einführung}}'''
* '''{{ll|Subversion/Code review|2=Code-Review}}''' &lt;!--
--&gt;({{ll|Subversion/Code review/guide|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;guide&lt;/span&gt;}} · {{ll|Subversion/Code review/tags|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;tags&lt;/span&gt;}})
* {{ll|Subversion/auto-props|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;auto-props&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/branching guide|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Branching guide&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/branches|2=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Branches&lt;/span&gt;}}
* {{ll|Subversion/statistics|2=Statistiken}} &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &lt;!--
--&gt;''[[Special:PrefixIndex/Subversion|Mehr... &amp;raquo;]]''
}}&lt;!--/flatlist--&gt;
}}&lt;includeonly&gt;[[Category:SVN{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]&lt;/includeonly&gt;&lt;noinclude&gt;

[[Category:Navigation templates{{#translation:}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>bcq9zyoivhc9nsdvjx4tof24m6zj2zn</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Subversion navigation/1/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612620</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403119</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:29:16Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Einführung&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11" xml:space="preserve">Einführung</text>
      <sha1>p33ji9pwxpsno5mikekwujh96vlnccd</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Subversion navigation/2/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612621</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403121</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:29:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Code-Review&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11" xml:space="preserve">Code-Review</text>
      <sha1>5egw05l505kzwtpihmdunzjeoj1wpir</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Subversion navigation/8/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612622</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403123</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:29:25Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Statistiken&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11" xml:space="preserve">Statistiken</text>
      <sha1>4x4nt6gh8mz08qfhpwxgd3yo0608up6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Subversion navigation/9/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612623</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403125</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:29:39Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Mehr...&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="7" xml:space="preserve">Mehr...</text>
      <sha1>5ssrg82vheq1065vunjxp1gult64fwh</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Status/Page display title/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612625</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403129</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:30:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Vorlage:Status&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="14" xml:space="preserve">Vorlage:Status</text>
      <sha1>ee26nujromt1aackc28217nb6rf2zon</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:Status/de</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>1612626</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403130</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:30:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Vorlage:Status&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2041" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;{{{3|Status}}}:&lt;/span&gt; &lt;span style=&quot;background:#{{#switch:{{lc:{{{1}}}}}|done=0C0|not done=C00|on hold=EE0|{{#if:{{{2|}}}|{{{1|CCC}}}|CCC}} }};&quot;&gt;&amp;emsp;&amp;emsp;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;b&gt;{{{2|{{#switch:{{lc:{{{1}}}}}
|done=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Done&lt;/span&gt;
|not done=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Not done&lt;/span&gt;
|on hold=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On hold&lt;/span&gt;
|in progress=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In progress&lt;/span&gt;
|#default={{{1|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In progress&lt;/span&gt;}}}
}}}}}&lt;/b&gt;
| #default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:Status|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation|content=

This template is used under the header of a request to summarize its current status.

{{(}}{{!}}
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|done}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|done}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|on hold}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|on hold}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|not done}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|not done}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|done|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|done|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|on hold|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|on hold|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|not done|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|not done|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|00C|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt; 
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|00C|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|C0C|some arbitrary text|Violet}}&lt;/pre&gt; 
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|C0C|some arbitrary text|Violet}}
{{!}}{{)}}

}}

[[Category:Templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>ht9cztlya7aa5jg6opk96928ju83zz3</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403132</id>
      <parentid>5403130</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:30:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;{{{$1|Status}}}:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1985" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{{3|Status}}}: &lt;span style=&quot;background:#{{#switch:{{lc:{{{1}}}}}|done=0C0|not done=C00|on hold=EE0|{{#if:{{{2|}}}|{{{1|CCC}}}|CCC}} }};&quot;&gt;&amp;emsp;&amp;emsp;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;b&gt;{{{2|{{#switch:{{lc:{{{1}}}}}
|done=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Done&lt;/span&gt;
|not done=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Not done&lt;/span&gt;
|on hold=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On hold&lt;/span&gt;
|in progress=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In progress&lt;/span&gt;
|#default={{{1|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In progress&lt;/span&gt;}}}
}}}}}&lt;/b&gt;
| #default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:Status|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation|content=

This template is used under the header of a request to summarize its current status.

{{(}}{{!}}
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|done}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|done}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|on hold}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|on hold}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|not done}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|not done}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|done|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|done|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|on hold|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|on hold|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|not done|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|not done|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|00C|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt; 
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|00C|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|C0C|some arbitrary text|Violet}}&lt;/pre&gt; 
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|C0C|some arbitrary text|Violet}}
{{!}}{{)}}

}}

[[Category:Templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>07xus8n3scbp3igdb6s6uaq9gzbot2q</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403134</id>
      <parentid>5403132</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:30:48Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Erledigt&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1933" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{{3|Status}}}: &lt;span style=&quot;background:#{{#switch:{{lc:{{{1}}}}}|done=0C0|not done=C00|on hold=EE0|{{#if:{{{2|}}}|{{{1|CCC}}}|CCC}} }};&quot;&gt;&amp;emsp;&amp;emsp;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;b&gt;{{{2|{{#switch:{{lc:{{{1}}}}}
|done=Erledigt
|not done=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;Not done&lt;/span&gt;
|on hold=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On hold&lt;/span&gt;
|in progress=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In progress&lt;/span&gt;
|#default={{{1|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In progress&lt;/span&gt;}}}
}}}}}&lt;/b&gt;
| #default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:Status|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation|content=

This template is used under the header of a request to summarize its current status.

{{(}}{{!}}
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|done}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|done}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|on hold}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|on hold}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|not done}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|not done}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|done|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|done|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|on hold|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|on hold|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|not done|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|not done|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|00C|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt; 
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|00C|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|C0C|some arbitrary text|Violet}}&lt;/pre&gt; 
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|C0C|some arbitrary text|Violet}}
{{!}}{{)}}

}}

[[Category:Templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>9b98mj4a6f3mo9y36owcgueoe7al7mx</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403136</id>
      <parentid>5403134</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:30:51Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Noch zu erledigen&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1886" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{{3|Status}}}: &lt;span style=&quot;background:#{{#switch:{{lc:{{{1}}}}}|done=0C0|not done=C00|on hold=EE0|{{#if:{{{2|}}}|{{{1|CCC}}}|CCC}} }};&quot;&gt;&amp;emsp;&amp;emsp;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;b&gt;{{{2|{{#switch:{{lc:{{{1}}}}}
|done=Erledigt
|not done=Noch zu erledigen
|on hold=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On hold&lt;/span&gt;
|in progress=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In progress&lt;/span&gt;
|#default={{{1|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In progress&lt;/span&gt;}}}
}}}}}&lt;/b&gt;
| #default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:Status|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation|content=

This template is used under the header of a request to summarize its current status.

{{(}}{{!}}
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|done}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|done}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|on hold}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|on hold}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|not done}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|not done}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|done|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|done|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|on hold|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|on hold|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|not done|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|not done|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|00C|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt; 
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|00C|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|C0C|some arbitrary text|Violet}}&lt;/pre&gt; 
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|C0C|some arbitrary text|Violet}}
{{!}}{{)}}

}}

[[Category:Templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>q1w39znr859kj9lekr2ewktqq9s87o5</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403138</id>
      <parentid>5403136</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:31:01Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;In Arbeit&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1828" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{{3|Status}}}: &lt;span style=&quot;background:#{{#switch:{{lc:{{{1}}}}}|done=0C0|not done=C00|on hold=EE0|{{#if:{{{2|}}}|{{{1|CCC}}}|CCC}} }};&quot;&gt;&amp;emsp;&amp;emsp;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;b&gt;{{{2|{{#switch:{{lc:{{{1}}}}}
|done=Erledigt
|not done=Noch zu erledigen
|on hold=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On hold&lt;/span&gt;
|in progress=In Arbeit
|#default={{{1|&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;In progress&lt;/span&gt;}}}
}}}}}&lt;/b&gt;
| #default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:Status|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation|content=

This template is used under the header of a request to summarize its current status.

{{(}}{{!}}
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|done}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|done}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|on hold}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|on hold}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|not done}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|not done}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|done|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|done|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|on hold|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|on hold|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|not done|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|not done|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|00C|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt; 
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|00C|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|C0C|some arbitrary text|Violet}}&lt;/pre&gt; 
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|C0C|some arbitrary text|Violet}}
{{!}}{{)}}

}}

[[Category:Templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>k8fjo18umlfh6z7rs5hveiuyv2l0tpk</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403140</id>
      <parentid>5403138</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:31:03Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;In Arbeit&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1770" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;{{#switch:
| =
{{{3|Status}}}: &lt;span style=&quot;background:#{{#switch:{{lc:{{{1}}}}}|done=0C0|not done=C00|on hold=EE0|{{#if:{{{2|}}}|{{{1|CCC}}}|CCC}} }};&quot;&gt;&amp;emsp;&amp;emsp;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;b&gt;{{{2|{{#switch:{{lc:{{{1}}}}}
|done=Erledigt
|not done=Noch zu erledigen
|on hold=&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;On hold&lt;/span&gt;
|in progress=In Arbeit
|#default={{{1|In Arbeit}}}
}}}}}&lt;/b&gt;
| #default=
  {{#invoke:Template translation|renderTranslatedTemplate|template=Template:Status|noshift=1|uselang={{int:lang}}}}
}}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation|content=

This template is used under the header of a request to summarize its current status.

{{(}}{{!}}
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|done}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|done}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|on hold}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|on hold}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|not done}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|not done}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|done|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|done|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|on hold|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|on hold|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|not done|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|not done|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt;
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|00C|some arbitrary text}}&lt;/pre&gt; 
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|00C|some arbitrary text}}
{{!}}-
{{!}} &lt;pre&gt;{{status|C0C|some arbitrary text|Violet}}&lt;/pre&gt; 
{{!}} &amp;rarr;
{{!}} {{status|C0C|some arbitrary text|Violet}}
{{!}}{{)}}

}}

[[Category:Templates{{#translation:}}|{{PAGENAME}}]]
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>9p1xbsit1i9fx2mkmqiny1gp7ak00an</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Status/1/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612627</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403131</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:30:45Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;{{{$1|Status}}}:&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="16" xml:space="preserve">{{{$1|Status}}}:</text>
      <sha1>6g1yh4bm4nkoxpnnteis72nmekjyd2z</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Status/2/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612628</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403133</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:30:47Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Erledigt&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="8" xml:space="preserve">Erledigt</text>
      <sha1>kbln932xjgywjarbcn14c8x3slvfxel</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Status/3/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612629</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403135</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:30:50Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Noch zu erledigen&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="17" xml:space="preserve">Noch zu erledigen</text>
      <sha1>9mx9ia54eysgq573ltyptsblgj69cqc</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Status/5/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612630</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403137</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:31:00Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;In Arbeit&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9" xml:space="preserve">In Arbeit</text>
      <sha1>0zyb8qb9lnxvxzcnmsv8aflbb2idj6u</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:Status/6/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612631</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403139</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:31:02Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;In Arbeit&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9" xml:space="preserve">In Arbeit</text>
      <sha1>0zyb8qb9lnxvxzcnmsv8aflbb2idj6u</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SWViewer/Manual/DocFooter/2/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612632</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403141</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:34:42Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Oben&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4" xml:space="preserve">Oben</text>
      <sha1>hdrxp64c2reh5hh3mek4k9jw1rvtt0j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SWViewer/Manual/DocFooter/3/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612633</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403142</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:34:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Oben&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4" xml:space="preserve">Oben</text>
      <sha1>hdrxp64c2reh5hh3mek4k9jw1rvtt0j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SWViewer/Manual/DocFooter/4/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612634</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403143</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:34:43Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Oben&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="4" xml:space="preserve">Oben</text>
      <sha1>hdrxp64c2reh5hh3mek4k9jw1rvtt0j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Template:SWViewer/Manual/DocFooter/de</title>
    <ns>10</ns>
    <id>1612635</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403144</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:34:44Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Oben&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1154" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;&lt;templatestyles src=&quot;SWViewer/Manual/DocFooter/styles.css&quot; /&gt;
{| class=&quot;swv-doc-footer plainlinks&quot; role=&quot;presentation&quot;
|-
| class=&quot;swv-doc-footer-title&quot; | &lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;SWViewer&lt;br /&gt;Docs&lt;/span&gt;
| class=&quot;swv-doc-footer-back&quot; rowspan=2 |
[[File:{{dir|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}|OOjs UI icon next-ltr|OOjs UI icon previous-ltr}}.svg |30px |link=Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SWViewer/{{{1}}} |alt={{{3|{{{1}}}}}} |{{{3|{{{1}}}}}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{ll|Manual:SWViewer/{{{1}}}|{{{3|{{{1}}}}}}}}
| class=&quot;swv-doc-footer-top&quot; rowspan=2 |
[[File:OOjs UI icon collapse.svg |30px |link=Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SWViewer |alt=Oben|Oben]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{ll|Manual:SWViewer|2=Oben}}
| class=&quot;swv-doc-footer-next&quot; rowspan=2 |
[[File:{{dir|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}|OOjs UI icon previous-ltr|OOjs UI icon next-ltr}}.svg |30px |link=Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SWViewer/{{{2}}} |alt={{{4|{{{2}}}}}} |{{{4|{{{2}}}}}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{ll|Manual:SWViewer/{{{2}}}|{{{4|{{{2}}}}}}}}
|-
| class=&quot;swv-doc-footer-navbar&quot; | {{navbar|SWViewer/Manual/DocFooter|mini=1}}
|}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation|Template:SWViewer/Manual/DocFooter/doc}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>d9wg8372hi9398no5svu1n9tbrlz53v</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403146</id>
      <parentid>5403144</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:35:05Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;SWViewer&lt;br /&gt;Dokumentation&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="1107" xml:space="preserve">&lt;noinclude&gt;
&lt;languages /&gt;
&lt;/noinclude&gt;&lt;templatestyles src=&quot;SWViewer/Manual/DocFooter/styles.css&quot; /&gt;
{| class=&quot;swv-doc-footer plainlinks&quot; role=&quot;presentation&quot;
|-
| class=&quot;swv-doc-footer-title&quot; | SWViewer&lt;br /&gt;Dokumentation
| class=&quot;swv-doc-footer-back&quot; rowspan=2 |
[[File:{{dir|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}|OOjs UI icon next-ltr|OOjs UI icon previous-ltr}}.svg |30px |link=Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SWViewer/{{{1}}} |alt={{{3|{{{1}}}}}} |{{{3|{{{1}}}}}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{ll|Manual:SWViewer/{{{1}}}|{{{3|{{{1}}}}}}}}
| class=&quot;swv-doc-footer-top&quot; rowspan=2 |
[[File:OOjs UI icon collapse.svg |30px |link=Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SWViewer |alt=Oben|Oben]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{ll|Manual:SWViewer|2=Oben}}
| class=&quot;swv-doc-footer-next&quot; rowspan=2 |
[[File:{{dir|{{PAGELANGUAGE}}|OOjs UI icon previous-ltr|OOjs UI icon next-ltr}}.svg |30px |link=Special:MyLanguage/Manual:SWViewer/{{{2}}} |alt={{{4|{{{2}}}}}} |{{{4|{{{2}}}}}}]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{ll|Manual:SWViewer/{{{2}}}|{{{4|{{{2}}}}}}}}
|-
| class=&quot;swv-doc-footer-navbar&quot; | {{navbar|SWViewer/Manual/DocFooter|mini=1}}
|}&lt;noinclude&gt;
{{documentation|Template:SWViewer/Manual/DocFooter/doc}}
&lt;/noinclude&gt;</text>
      <sha1>3021ajc1izwxaf61els4o0813ywkory</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SWViewer/Manual/DocFooter/1/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612638</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403145</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:35:04Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;SWViewer&lt;br /&gt;Dokumentation&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="27" xml:space="preserve">SWViewer&lt;br /&gt;Dokumentation</text>
      <sha1>pk5ezfnpki82pfwrmgr41fgfwggkpiq</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Template:SWViewer/Manual/DocFooter/Page display title/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612639</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403147</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:35:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Vorlage:SWViewer/Manual/DocFooter&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="33" xml:space="preserve">Vorlage:SWViewer/Manual/DocFooter</text>
      <sha1>68k71z3jkmlhwl2g2xyf2izdtq6098r</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Module:String/doc/21/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612640</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403150</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:39:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;start_index&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11" xml:space="preserve">start_index</text>
      <sha1>kxrsiok9tdcuhblimepfcm7il7w8iu6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Module:String/doc/25/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612641</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403151</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:39:14Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;start_index&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11" xml:space="preserve">start_index</text>
      <sha1>kxrsiok9tdcuhblimepfcm7il7w8iu6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Module:String/doc/39/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612642</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403152</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:39:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;start_index&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11" xml:space="preserve">start_index</text>
      <sha1>kxrsiok9tdcuhblimepfcm7il7w8iu6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Module:String/doc/46/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612643</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403154</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:39:15Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;start_index&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11" xml:space="preserve">start_index</text>
      <sha1>kxrsiok9tdcuhblimepfcm7il7w8iu6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Module:String/doc/88/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612644</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403156</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:39:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;start_index&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11" xml:space="preserve">start_index</text>
      <sha1>kxrsiok9tdcuhblimepfcm7il7w8iu6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Module:String/doc/93/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612645</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403157</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:39:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;start_index&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="11" xml:space="preserve">start_index</text>
      <sha1>kxrsiok9tdcuhblimepfcm7il7w8iu6</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Module:String/doc/22/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612646</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403159</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:39:29Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;end_index&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9" xml:space="preserve">end_index</text>
      <sha1>lgfwi4r698uctw1x6bby0akz6e5931j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Module:String/doc/26/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612647</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403160</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:39:30Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;end_index&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="9" xml:space="preserve">end_index</text>
      <sha1>lgfwi4r698uctw1x6bby0akz6e5931j</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Module:Transcluder/doc/Page display title/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612648</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403164</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:40:09Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Modul:Transcluder/doc&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="21" xml:space="preserve">Modul:Transcluder/doc</text>
      <sha1>nje006r1fndqnb2g8i7a9yssbmuppzk</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:MediaWiki 1.30/63/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612649</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403183</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:43:06Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Die stabile Version 1.30.0 wurde am 12. Dezember 2017 veröffentlicht.&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="70" xml:space="preserve">Die stabile Version 1.30.0 wurde am 12. Dezember 2017 veröffentlicht.</text>
      <sha1>oh3jtftbu0l1c1m34kqwpxpyr66fby4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Category:Development notes/Page display title/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612650</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403195</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:44:19Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Kategorie:Entwicklungsanmerkungen&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="33" xml:space="preserve">Kategorie:Entwicklungsanmerkungen</text>
      <sha1>bshgw4cxebxskyrggmdcmv4fs5ho7nz</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Category:Development notes/1/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612651</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403196</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:44:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;$1&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="2" xml:space="preserve">$1</text>
      <sha1>rq0hjs7fpmzgl4u73gupx0a4684l5e2</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Category:Development notes/de</title>
    <ns>14</ns>
    <id>1612652</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403197</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:44:20Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Kategorie:Entwicklungsanmerkungen&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="121" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;
&lt;span lang=&quot;en&quot; dir=&quot;ltr&quot; class=&quot;mw-content-ltr&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>rv3apyjeuhz9k319py2ghxawprf2izo</sha1>
    </revision>
    <revision>
      <id>5403198</id>
      <parentid>5403197</parentid>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T10:44:21Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;$1&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="65" xml:space="preserve">&lt;languages/&gt;

[[Category:MediaWiki development{{#translation:}}]]</text>
      <sha1>krdlyam35i1yxqmpqs36xkvwsmldp28</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Wikibase/79/ru</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612653</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403236</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:01:10Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>DecabristM</username>
        <id>13368742</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Быстрый старт&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="25" xml:space="preserve">Быстрый старт</text>
      <sha1>965lmxppecc9r9upuvt0ub4mndht58m</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0rwa10yp59cp5bw</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612656</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403345</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:47:33Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0rwa10yp59cp5bw&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>lei0d3q2q639qt34gwfp317hsxw3nf4</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0rwbzzxkl01cp8p</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612657</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403346</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:48:32Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* This page has been converted into a Structured Discussions board */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0rwbzzxkl01cp8p&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>1lhrd81mkfjxj8zuqozb5hzdfvcq1md</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Topic:X0rwktkfld8cqr19</title>
    <ns>2600</ns>
    <id>1612658</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403353</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:52:56Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>Flow talk page manager</username>
        <id>1946968</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>/* Questa pagina è stata convertita in una bacheca di discussioni strutturate */</comment>
      <model>flow-board</model>
      <format>application/json</format>
      <text bytes="1" xml:space="preserve">{&quot;flow-workflow&quot;:&quot;x0rwktkfld8cqr19&quot;}</text>
      <sha1>0aoyyfmo7arkmqztxelgkm1npgvex53</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection/21/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612659</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403359</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:58:12Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;=== Diskussionsseiten deaktivieren ===&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="38" xml:space="preserve">=== Diskussionsseiten deaktivieren ===</text>
      <sha1>kxbguym67gao46q8q9169vowgjinp7w</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
  <page>
    <title>Translations:Manual:$wgNamespaceProtection/3/de</title>
    <ns>1198</ns>
    <id>1612660</id>
    <revision>
      <id>5403361</id>
      <timestamp>2022-08-07T11:58:37Z</timestamp>
      <contributor>
        <username>ThisCarthing</username>
        <id>17456337</id>
      </contributor>
      <comment>Created page with &quot;Welche Namensräume können von wem bearbeitet werden?&quot;</comment>
      <model>wikitext</model>
      <format>text/x-wiki</format>
      <text bytes="54" xml:space="preserve">Welche Namensräume können von wem bearbeitet werden?</text>
      <sha1>qn6qt8hmr45xom93df6j20g0cm8fj7i</sha1>
    </revision>
  </page>
</mediawiki>